《The Only Aura User In Magic World》


 Chapter 1 - Prologue

    I guess this is it. Being a hunter I was volunteering myself to fight in the war. Although I finally gain new power, I''m still too weak and too inexperienced with it. And now, my partner, the ck slime Blobby, got eaten by a monster those bastards controlled along with my right arm. With no weapon, no magic I can use, and no strength left in me to escape, I can only wait for the monster to kill me.


    I want to avenge all those precious people to me who died in their hand, the Evil God Cult. I thought I can easily win against them after gaining Aura ability. I was wrong. Even with a powerful ability, there''s a limit to what one person can do. I thought I had prepared myself to fight to death. But now I realize I am still afraid of death. I bet my corpse will have an unsightly expression. That is if my face is not eaten by the monster.


    I closed my eyes in fear, but the pain nevere. In fact I can''t even feel the pain on my right arm anymore. Am I dead? When I think so I heard someone keep calling my name.


    "Roy! Roy! It''s you turn for magic awakening! Come forward!"


    What?!


    I opened my eyes to the person who calling my name.


    Where is this? What happened with the war? Why is my arm grow back?


    "Stop daydreaming and waste everyone''s time!"


    Why is he angry? No. Wait. Don''t tell me this is the past?


    I looked around and see the same scenery I saw thirty years ago when I was fifteen. It was the day when people my age about to enter school. And this is the school I enrolled for a year until this city got destroyed by those bastards from Evil God Cult. I don''t know how did this happened, but I will use this chance to defeat the cult.


    I cleared my mind and finallye forward to the ce where the teacher pointed. He''s being too loud just because I didn''t respond for a while. He told me to touch a scanning magical device which will help me awaken my magic.


    In this world, magic exist. Some people will usually awaken to two or three magical element. Some would be lucky enough to even awaken five elements. In my previous life, I only awaken to one element, which is summoning magic. And that''s how I gain my partner the ck slime, Blobby.


    I hope I will be able to summon him again. This time, I will walk the path of Aura user, not a mage. In my previous life, I tried so hard to improve my magic and Blobby''s strength which are to no avail. I spend 25 years training to improve my magic, but turned out I have no talent with it.


    It was a few months before I died, that instead of practicing my magic, I tried to improve my physical ability. I have given up on magic at that time. I also transform Blobby into a sword so I can be like those swordsman in a fairytale book I read as a child. I practiced seriously that people called me a madman.


    And then few days before I died, I gained an Aura ability like the ones in fairytale. I be much stronger all of a sudden. It was at that time the Kingdom requesting for volunteer to fight a war and I who became cocky because of my newly found power participating. The result? I am back in the past.


    I touched the magical device and it shows two magical elements instead of just one! How?! I only had just one but now I have two? I guess it''s a blessing in disguise to have a second chance.


    The first one is the same element I had before, a Summoning element. I hope I can summon Blobby again. It was way toote back when I finally recognized his ability. Even when I thought he was just a useless blob, he''s always with me. But now, we can grow stronger together.


    Mage with summoning element, are different than mage with other element. Other element, can increase their magic quantity by repeating using their magic, but for summoning magic, the increase of magic is next to none. It got increased, but even after 30 years I only feel that it got increased just a little. To improve rapidly, we summoning mage need to defeat monsters with our summoned monster. Because my summoned monster is just a ck slime, I can''t do that. Until I got my Aura ability and used Blobby as weapon.


    In this life, I will make sure to increase both my Aura ability and magical ability and survive! It''s good if I ended up being the strongest, but I won''t ever be cocky again and think I''m the strongest just because a little increase in power. Even if I defeat strong enemies, I will still think myself as being weak. I don''t have to fight every battle straight on. I can use hit and run tactics, or shamelessly escape if I think the battle is pointless.


    Now is my second magical element. Since I want to gain Aura ability, I will fight closebat most of the time. So I hope my second element is wind magic to help me increase my speed. Or maybe healing element. Then I can heal myself every time I get hurt.


    The result is not what I imagine. I awakened Air element. It''s a rare element, but it''s well-known for being useless inbat. The best thing about this element is making the user of this magic able to breathe underwater.


    For me, that is more than enough. Having one more magic than I had in the past is much better than nothing. Maybe I can use this to train underwater. In my past life, there are many famous mage with rare elements, but none of them are air element mage, so I don''t know yet what air element can do other than breathing underwater. If I learn more, maybe I can use it for many things.


    For now, the ceremony for magic awakening is over. I don''t have any friend when I was at this age, so I will just return to my home in a vige near this city. In a week, I will return here to attend school. For everyone who has just awaken their magic, it''spulsory to attend introductory school for one year. They will teach you the basic of magic for one year.


    After that, we are free to do what we want. For those who want to get stronger, they can apply for advanced school which will give you resources to improve yourself. For those whock money but havebat ability, they might register as hunter. In fact as long as you have awaken your magic, you can register as hunter right away even when enrolling in introductory school.


    There may be other profession they are interested in. Probably following after their parent''s footsteps. But the most popr choice is being a hunter or attend advanced school.


    As for me, I will choose being a hunter and attend advanced school at the same time. It might be difficult with my magic, but there must be a hope.


    I will register as hunterter when I return back to the city for school in a week. For now I''ll return to my vige.


    At the city gate, I can ride a carriage with other passengers, but because I need to be stronger, I''ll just run. It will take longer, but my stamina will increase. The gatekeeper and other people looked at me curiously for trying to go home on foot. It will take at least until dinner time for me to get home. I can just hunt some rabbits on the way. I good thing I bought a knife before I went home since I haven''t summoned Blobby yet. I will summon my monster tomorrow and hope it will be a ck slime again.


    It was night when I entered the vige. I entered a house in the vige. It was my house, but no one''s in there since I''m an orphan. My parent died few years ago and I''m the only one left. The vige chief is the one who responsible for me since then. But he only give me bread enough for a day so I need to hunt myself. Now that I''ve awaken my magic, it will be less likely that he will continue giving me bread. In my previous life, he also stopped sending me bread after I awaken my magic. Not caring what kind of magic I got.


    And just like I expected, there''s a letter from the chief telling me to get food on my own on the table.


    Nobody in the vige cares about an orphan. But that''s fine. I can just do whatever I want.


    For now I''ll go to bed. It was exhausting running from the city. I need to get stronger so at least I cane and go to the city without tiring myself out.

 Chapter 2 - Talking Slime

    It''s here! After waking up and have breakfast, I tried to summon a monster and it''s Blobby again!


    "Blobby!"


    I shouted his name and hug him tightly.


    "Oh Blobby! I missed you!"


    [What do you mean you missed me?]


    "YOU CAN SPEAK!"


    How? Back then he never once say a word and now, he spoke as soon as I summoned him. Is this a different ck slime? The chance is high. Then I need a new name for him.


    [Hey! I said exin why you missed me?]


    "¡­"


    I didn''t answer him. Or maybe her? Since her voice is that of a woman. I just touched her with my finger and check if it was really her who spoke just now.


    [Yes! It''s me who spoke! My consciousness can only take control of this slime once a day! Now tell me! Did you say you missed me because this is your second time summoning me? Did you return to the past? Answer quickly before my consciousness disappear!]


    Whoa. So demanding. But how did she knows I''m returning to the past? For now I''ll just answer her questions with her still in my arms.


    "Yes I''ve returned to the past. And this makes it the second time I summoned a ck slime. How did you know?"


    [It was my magic. I can use it once to return to the past. Which means I used it on you so you have a second chance. My time is almost up so I will exin things quickly. Since I used my magic on you, which means you gained Aura ability. Try to get it again. And improve your physical strength. You look so weak. Andstly, I''m fine being called Blobby, but my real name is Victoria. And tell me everything even when my consciousness disappear. I can still remember what you told me after I wake up. Bye!]


    Just like that, she doesn''t speak again.


    "Hey, Blobby? I mean Victoria? Have you gone? Is this real?"


    Shit. That was too fast. I have too many questions. Was she the one who returns me to the past? How does she knows about Aura? If I want the answer, I should wait until tomorrow. For now I''ll try telling Blobby everything.


    I told Blobby about everything since the day I summoned him until the day he got eaten. And about Evil God Cult. And because her time conscious is always limited, I''ll ask questions she can answer anytime she wants.


    "¡­that''s all about my previous life. Now I have questions which you can answer anytime you want. Who are you? Or maybe what are you? How do you know aura? Do you have other ability other than returning to the past? Why did you never spoke in my past life? Why did you choose me to return to the past instead of sending yourself? You could just picked someone else much stronger than me at the time? I guess you can''t answer this question because you''re part of this timeline. You don''t have any memory of the future. Well, that''s about what I''m curious about. I''ll ask you again next time. For now, let''s get some exercise."


    After asking questions, I can only wait until her consciousness return tomorrow. Then I went for a jog with Blobby. I asked Blobby to transform into weight I can wear on my back. She can transform to anything I imagined. Even her weight is changed. Since both summoners and the summons have some kind of telepathic ability, we canmunicate without talking so I can just imagine what Blobby will turns into.


    Then with Blobby as weight, I did some exercise. I also practiced sword swinging as well. Then other weapons such as spear, axe, hammer, dagger, other tools such as rope, grappling hook, and chains.


    Everything went well other than my weak body. I exhausted my stamina doing training all day. The sun hasn''t setting yet but I''m alreadyying on the bed. Thus I fell asleep until morning.


    As soon as I woke up, I heard Blobby¡ªno. Victoria speaking.


    "As I told you, I am Victoria. Long time ago, I was a human and also an aura user. Then I died and somehow I ended up as a slime. Or more like this slime''s other personalities whiches out once a day. Returning to the past is this slime''s ability, and seems like it can''t use it anymore. This slime has other abilities but you need to increase your aptitude first as summoning mage so you can use its other abilities. As for your other questions, I can only guess. Why I chose you maybe because you''re the same as me, an Aura ability user. I never speak because I just don''t really care about the world. But now the situation has changed. I think the one you called Evil God Cult is the one who responsible to the death of our fellow Aura ability user. I''ll tell you about this tomorrow since my time is almost up. Just keep practicing until you gain your Aura again. You should have known how to do it since you seeded before. See you tomorrow."


    ¡­that''s a lot to take. So Blobby is actually an OP monster. I never knew that. Then Victoria was a human and an Aura ability user just like me. Then I can ask her for a consultation about Aura. As for the Evil God Cult¡­ we really are fated to be mortal enemies.


    Okay then! I''ll just keep practicing until school started. As for Air element magic¡­ I''ll just practice one thing at a time. Maybe Victoria knows about it.


    Just like that, one week passed.


    I learned a lot from Victoria. Although I still haven''t gain my Aura, I can detect presences now. It''s a useful ability. Back in my previous life, able to detect presence is a signal for me getting closer to Aura. That''s also what Victoria told me.


    She also told me about her past. She most likely died about two thousand years ago. Before she died, mage and Aura user both are getting along with each other. Then one day, a really strong mage killed Aura user one by one, until all of them died. Victoria is thest among Aura user who got killed. She had a chance to talk with her murderer before she died. She asked why he killed everyone and he answered that he''s afraid of power stronger than his. He wanted to be a god. The one whom everyone fears and worships. I guess that''s makes him an Evil God.


    As for the truth whether Evil God Cult is rted with him or not, I don''t know yet. But at least I will consider it so I can clearly imagined the enemy I''m facing. For now, let''s just say that they are people who wants to revive the Evil God''s glory.


    I also learned about Air magic. Victoria told me that Air magic is the most suited magic for an Aura user. It will allows me to fight underwater, to walk in the air, and to shoots projectiles pneumatically withpressed air.


    I''m still unable to walk on air, but I can shoot projectiles. I tried to shoot a tree with a rock, and the rock sunk about 2 cm into the tree. Because the air pressure spread all over the ce, I tried using it differently.


    I transform Blobby into a tube with a hole in one side to put a projectile in it. After putting a rock, Ipressing air on one side, and release it. Since the air pressure is concentrated in to one side, the power is tremendous! Since then I keep Blobby as a cane wherever I go. And although it was weird, I always keep rocks in my pocket.


    It''s time to go to school and just like before, I choose to go there on foot instead of carriage. But now I''m faster and have more stamina than before.


    Before, I need about 6 hours to return to my home from the city and I need a lot of breaks. And now I can reach the city in one and a half hour without any break.


    It''s the first day of school and the lesson taught at the school all are something I have learned in the past. So I just sleep on my desk until the school is over. No one asking me about my cane, which is Blobby in disguise.


    It''s not like I don''t have any friends, okay!


    Most of them don''t know yet that I''m their friend¡­ now I sound like a stalker.


    I mean to say that¡­ Fine! I am terrible at making friends, okay!


    Even back then, I got my first friend during a magical practice where we were paired for a spar. We got close since then and ever since we always nodded to each other whenever we met. That''s all we did.


    Wait! So he''s not actually my friend? We were just an acquaintance? His name? I forgot¡­


    Which means I never made any friends at this age in my previous life.


    I''m not crying!

 Chapter 3 - Hunter Registration

    The first day of school has ended, and I didn''t make any friends. I saw a lot of familiar faces. Some who will seeded in life, and some who will die soon.


    In ten month, the Evil God Cult wille out in the public for the first time by destroying several cities. This city of Melk is one of them. They will also destroy any viges nearby including my vige. I want to get stronger so I can defeat them instead of being defeated like in my past life.


    I really want to destroy their ns to attack the city, but I''m just one man. Even if I asked the king, he would never listen to an orphan from random vige. And during that period, I never tried to remember the faces of those attackers. Because of my status, those who knew the faces and names of Evil God Cult''s members would never tell me. The members are all wearing hoods when they attacked. Maybe some of them are people I know. Most of their members are most likely hiding as part of our society so I can''t act suspiciously if I want to destroy them.


    ¡­which means I should have make friends like normal people my age! What have I done?!


    Now I can only y the part of a loner or a gloomy kid. Or maybe someone with trust issues. Then it would be normal if I am close to someone who tried to get close to me first. Okay then, I''ll try that.


    For now since the school is over, I''ll register as Hunter in the Hunter Guild. It''s the biggest building in the middle of the city.


    Being a Hunter means I can bring in monsters I defeated or herbs and sell them to the guild. I can also take request sent from client and get paid with the reward. They also act like a bank. So my reward can be saved there and I can took it from any Hunter Guild in the world.


    I have entered the Hunter Guild building and walked to the receptionist. There''s only one person in front of me. In fact I know her. She''s Ang. She''s a beauty who''s also entering the school at the same time as me. Which means she''s just fifteen years old and registering as hunter today. In the future, she will be known as Elemental Master. She''s one of the lucky ones who got 4 magic elements when she awakened. Fire, Ice, Earth, and Wind.


    During her time in this city, before Evil God Cult destroyed it, she doesn''t show her real talent yet. It was because she lost her family that she dedicated her life to get stronger and avenge her family. She wants to kill every single member of the cult. She entered Advanced School and became much stronger and gained a title ''Elemental Master'', one who mastered four kind of magic elements.


    Now what? If I helped her family, she might not be Elemental Master like in my previous life. Should I help her so she can improve on her own and make her my ally since her hatred to the cult is well-known? I don''t know what''s the best choice is for the future, so I''ll just interact with her normally¡­ if I have the chance.


    "Wee to the Hunter Guild, can I help you?"


    The pretty receptionist greeted her and asked Ang''s business here.


    "I want to register as a hunter."


    Here''s my chance! Although she may think of me as annoying, at least I''ll make an impression in her mind.


    "Ah, me too! Can you please register both of us at once so it will be finished faster?"


    I shamelessly joined their conversation. With this I''m sure she will know me next time we meet.


    "Is that okay with you?"


    "Sure I don''t mind."


    After getting her permission, the receptionist gave us a paper to fill. There''s many nk spaces but I only fill my name and age since those are the required data.


    "Here you go." I said as I returned the paper to the receptionist.


    "Thank you¡­ Roy. Age 15. Is that right?"


    "Yes"


    "You only filled your name and age only?"


    Oho! Seems like I seeded in giving her an impression. Ang asked me why I didn''t fill the rest such as my hometown, awakened magic, and other things.


    "Yes. Those two are the only things needed to register as a hunter."


    "Seems like you know few things about being a hunter."


    Of course I know! I spend over 30 years being a hunter! Though I spend most of that time gathering herbs since I had nobat abilities. I won''t tell them that though.


    "I know a bit from a senior hunter. He said only these two are important. Hunter''s works sometime make them moves from ce to ce so hometown wasn''t really important. As for magic, since the guild checked only the result not the process, it''s not really important for them when you register. Unless you want some party to invite you. For now I''m thinking of going solo so this part is unnecessary. And the magic I used will be known sooner orter. Either way, writing down my magic is not important in registering." I exined to Ang patiently.


    "I see. Then I''ll do that as well."


    She also wrote down her name and age. Seems like she doesn''t want to join any party yet.


    And then she gave her paper to the receptionist. After checking both our papers'' content, she gave us a silver card.


    "Here''s your Hunter''s card. You both will start as E-rank hunters. It is shown on your card and will change if you raise your rank. There are 6 hunter ranks from E, D, C, B, A, to S, with S being the highest rank. You need toplete missions to raise your rank. There are other ways to raise your ranks, butpleting mission is the safest way. You can check the board over there to see requests and when you see a request you want to do, you can grabbed it and give it to the receptionist. After that you can do your mission. We also worked as a bank so you can keep your money in the guild. You can take them from any guild in the world. You can also use your hunter card to pay for something. If you do, the amount of money you have will be reduced by the amount you paid. You can do it by holding your card and touched it other''s card, and concentrate the amount you''re paying. Any questions?"


    "None from me. I''ll go check the board first."


    "None from me either."


    Both of us left to the request board to check on missions. While we were looking for an appropriate mission, Ang asked me something.


    "Hey, do you want to be in a party with me?"


    "Huh?"


    Did she just asked me to be in a party with her? Seriously? I just thought of making an impression so next time we meet, she knows who I am. But to be ended up in a party with her? I guess I''ll confirm with her first.


    "Are you asking me?"


    "Who else is here?"


    "Maybe you''re asking a ghost near me."


    "Why would I invite a ghost to my party? I''m asking you! Seems like you know a bit about being a hunter so I want you to give me some pointers. Do you want to be in party with me?"


    "Sure."


    Since I have her confirmation, there''s no way I would refuse. Now I can teach her about her magic and maybe making her my ally. I really need someone I can trust to defeat those bastards. Although she may go a different path than me, as long as she''s still have hatred to Evil God Cult, it will be fine since she will be one of the strongest mage in the world. So I will use this chance to improve her magic.


    "Okay then. What''s a good mission for a rookie hunter?"


    "How about goblins subjugation. These kind of jobs are useful for training. And we''re also helping nearby vige by defeating those goblins."


    "Sure. Then we''ll take that mission."


    She grabbed the request to subjugate goblins and we went to the receptionist.


    "Excuse me. We''ll taking this request."


    "And we''re also taking this job as a party."


    "Okay. Goblin subjugation, is it? It''s a good first mission for you two. Be careful because although goblins are weak, some veteran hunter has been killed by them."


    "Thank you. See youter!"


    I said goodbye to the receptionist and we both leave the guild.


    On the way to the city gate, we tried to get to know each other.


    "So what''s your magic elements?" I asked her first.


    "I guess since we''re a team we should know each other''s magic. I have four magic elements. Fire, Ice, Earth, and Wind. You?"


    "Four! That''s a lot!" I pretended to be surprised. "I have two. Summoning and Air magic."


    "Those two are rare, aren''t they? I don''t know about Air magic, but Summoning seems pretty neat."


    As we talked, we already left the city. Soon we will arrive at our destination. I hope things will go well in this mission.

 Chapter 4 - Teaching Angela

    "What''s your contracted monster?"


    As Ang and I leave the city, she asked me about my monster.


    "It''s a ck slime. Blobby, greet my friend Ang."


    As I said that, Blobby who has been in my hand as a walking cane, turned back into a slime.


    "Her name is Blobby. Her Special ability is shape-shifting. She can turns into anything I want."


    "Shape-shifter? That''s cool but she''s still seems weak. What about Air magic?"


    "I can breathe underwater!"


    "¡­I kind of regretted that I asked you to team up together."


    "Don''t worry about it. Let''s just worry about these boarsing at us. First thing of being a hunter, never let down your guard even when you''re chatting."


    We have reached the forest as we talked, and soon I can detect several boars aiming at us. Because I haven''t manifested my Aura yet, my presence detection is still haven''t reached farther than 10 meters, but with Air magic, I can sense breathing from farther than that. Air element is really useful for an Aura user!


    "They''reing at us. It must be because of the smell."


    "I heard that some monsters has great sense of smell. They must have known the smell of a human''s body toing at us from distance."


    "¡­I''d like to say that I farted when we entered the forest, but you might be right."


    "It''s you! You''re the one who''s luring the boars here!"


    In fact, no one knows what odor monster smell from us which makes them hostile at human. But the fact that they can smell us from distance is right for some monsters. During my past life, I can easily ambushed and entrapped boars. So I think they noticed us now is because of my fart.


    Soon, we saw 3 boars charging at us.


    "Just three of them. How many can you take on?"


    "Is it the time to be calm?! I''ve never fought boars before!"


    "Then I''ll take two and thest one will be your target practice. Wait a bit."


    "What do you mean by that?! Hey! Come back!"


    Before she finished speaking, I already rushed to the boars. I said that I will leave one for her so I''ll kill the left and the middle ones, I''ll just let the right one for Ang to take care of.


    Because it was just one week since she awakened her magic, she shouldn''t have known yet to control her magic well. At most she''s only able to cast basic spells of the four elements. She must not be overconfident just because she has four elements. I don''t know when we will be a party again so I will teach her to get stronger today.


    When I heard Ang telling me toe back, I already reached the first boar.


    Now, how do I killed it so Ang won''t think of me as weakling? Should I kill it in a stylish way, or just kill it with one strike?


    Since I want to let one boar alive and not running away, maybe it will be best if I killed the other two with several attack instead of instantly kill them with one strike. Then I guess sword is the best choice.


    I transformed Blobby into a sword and charged at the boar on the left side. When it tried to ram me, I dodged left to its right side and shed my sword at its side. Then I shed it again a few more time and every time it tried to change direction to face me, I always keep my position at its right. Boars has only charging attack after all. They can''t attack enemy from their side. Then as a finisher, I stabbed my sword deep enough to pierce its heart. That''s one down, two to go.


    After finishing one boar, I looked at the other two. Their instinct doesn''t seems to tell them that I''m dangerous for them. That''s good. I just need to finish another one the same way and let Ang take care of thest one.


    Soon enough, the second boar dropped after I stabbed at its heart. And thest boar still doesn''t realized how strong I am, but when I looked at Ang, she seems to be the one who realized that I''m strong despite my weak ck slime as a contracted summon.


    "Hey! There''s only one boar left! You''ll be the one to take care of it!"


    "Eh¡­ Ah! Okay!"


    Then she put both her hands forward and cast a basic spell ''Fireball''. It hit the boar who was still aiming at me, but didn''t do much damage. Instead, now the boar is angry and targeting Ang. Ang turn pale in fear knowing the boar is aiming at her.


    Sigh¡­ now I wonder how she survive in my previous life. Maybe she would encounter someone who taught her about adventuring. But now she met me so I will be the one to show her the rope.


    Blobby now has be a whip in my hand. I swung the whip and it hits and wraps around the boar''s leg. Then I tripped it so it would fall.


    "Be careful. Once you attacked a monster, especially if your attack is too weak, you will be their target. You need to calm down first while I am binding its legs."


    "¡­okay."


    She took a deep breath as I wrapped Blobby as a rope to tie the boar''s four legs. This boar is a magical beast or can be said as monster as well. Its size is about 150 cm while standing on four legs. Its thick hide protected it from low level attack such as fireball from a rookie mage.


    "There you have it! Now you have a living target practice for your magic."


    "¡­I''m sorry. I''m such a burden. And also for thinking that you were weak when in fact you are much stronger than me."


    "It''s fine. If I told someone about my contracted monster and my Air magic, everyone would have the same reaction. For now you need to fix your misconception."


    "My misconception?"


    "Yes. In fact, it is the same misconception that almost everyone who has just awakened their magic have. They always think that having magic would make them stronger. In one week since you awakened your elements, you must have been practicing your magic. But have you actually tried it on a living target?"


    "Eh? No. This is the first time."


    "Then it''s good that you''re teaming up with me. If you go alone, you might not realize how weak you are when you died. For now try fireball magic on this boar again, but this time, use more mana when you casted it."


    "¡­why? Does that makes my magic stronger?"


    "Yes. On any books you read, or the lesson taught at school, they only told you what kind of magic from your element. For example Fire element magic. They only tell you about Fireball, Firewall, Fire Pir, and other names for fire magic as well as its strength and appearances. They also told you the level you need to use such magic. But the truth is, all magic are the same."


    There are five level of magic. The first level is Beginner level, then Intermediate, Advanced, Expert, andstly Master. For fire magic, they only teach us that Fireball is the only magic at beginner level. But that''s not right. It''s not wrong, but not the correct one either. It''s just that the mana quantity of a beginner level mage, can only use the fireball magic that was written on a book or taught at school. If you fire mage want to use higher level magic, they just need to reduce the amount of mana used in casting.


    There should be a mana maniption technique, but it was only well-known about 25 years in the future. And it was Ang herself who spread the knowledge. But this time, I will be the one who teach it to Ang.


    Like I said, Fire magic at beginner level, can only cast an average fireball magic because of the amount of mana used for casting. They can use Firewall, Fire Pir, or other fire magic while at beginner level will make their power lessened.


    I exined all of that while making sure the boar can''t escape. Ang also practiced what I told her right away. And just like how I knew her in the past, she''s extremely talented that she can do what I told her to do.


    "Basically, using magic is only needed two things. Creation and Maniption. For example, you create a fire out of thin air, and manipte it to the shape of a ball and shot it to your target. What I taught you was only the maniption part. To manipte your fireball to be bigger, smaller, faster, slower, or disappear. Or you can shape it into a wall and make a weaker version of a Firewall magic. For us beginner level mage, there''s a limit of what we can do using our limited amount of mana. As your level got higher, you can manipte your magic more freely."


    As I finished exining, Ang create a big fireball and shot it real fast at the boar. The boar died in one shot.


    "Whoa! Did you see that! I killed it in one shot!"


    "Congrattion! What I exined to you can be practiced with your other elements as well. Practice a lot after we finished our mission. For now, you can practice your magic on the goblins we will face. If you got tired, I''ll take care of the rest."


    "Okay! Thank you!"


    With this, I have made a connection with a future Elemental Master and I also have taught her what she will found out herself in the future. With this, I hope she will be much stronger when we faced the Evil God Cult who will attack the city in ten month.

 Chapter 5 - Saving Kayla

    After Ang finished the boar, we continued our mission to defeat goblins. The mission stated that we only needed at least 5 goblins, which is easy for even Ang herself to do alone.


    We still haven''t found any goblins yet but we have met several others monsters. I told Ang to take care of them so she can practice as well. At least there were no monsters stronger than boar yet.


    She continued to improve in a quick rate. Not just her Fire element, her other elements improved as well. For her Ice magic, she can freeze a boar''s leg from 3 meter distance. It''s not far but that''s an improvement as freezing magic was only supposed to be used when you are an Advanced level mage. Her weaker version is only able to freeze a leg but that''s great.


    Her Earth Magic, the wall she created is not any different with other beginner level earth mage''s Earth Wall, other than the fact that she can regenerate her wall quickly as soon as it was destroyed.


    As for Wind Magic, she can create a wind barrier around her to protect herself from a projectiles. When I tried to use my Air Cannon, where I put a stone in a tube shaped Blobby and shot it with air pressure, the speed of the bullet is considerably slowed down. Proof that I''m still stronger than her since it wasn''t stopped or changed direction. Haha!


    She can also do other magic, but those are what I consider the best among each elements.


    Other than how she got angry at me for shooting at her, there were no trouble. Even when I told her that my shot is missing her on purpose, she''s still angry. So I lend her Blobby so she can squish it to rx. Blobby is so powerful!


    We continued searching for goblins and soon enough, we saw ten of them. And they are surrounding a mound under a tree.


    "I found goblins. They are surrounding a mound and attacking it fiercely. Looks like someone is using earth magic to protect themselves from goblins. Let''s help her. Each of us took five goblins, okay?"


    "Understood."


    Ang soon prepared to cast a magic. I don''t know what magic she will use, but this time I will no longer guide her since I have already told her everything I know. I will trust her decision based on her growth along the way here. I will just defeat my share of goblins.


    I use summoning magic so I can transport Blobby who was still in Ang''s embrace to my hand and transform her into a sword. Although it has been just one week since I exercising my body, I''m already strong enough to defeat higher level monster than goblins or boars. 5 goblins? They all die soon after I reached them. All with clean cuts on their neck.


    And after I finished my share, Ang also has shot 3 goblins down. For the other two¡­ They tried to run away after seeing their kinds got killed. I will trust Ang to kill the two goblins. For now, I will check the person under the mound.


    I knocked on it and yelled, "Hey! It''s fine now! You cane out now!"


    "Really?"


    "Yeah. My partner has just killed the leftovers and she''sing here now. You cane out now."


    "¡­"


    No more answer. There are various scenarios running in my head about what happened to the person inside. Since the voice is that of a woman, there''s one scenario popping inside my head of how she ended up holing herself up inside the mound by her own earth magic.


    "¡­please let here her first before Ie out."


    "I understand."


    Seems like I was right. She got herself tricked by men who are now have escaped so she can only trust women. I called out Ang and told her the situation and also my guess to her. She understood and approached the mound while I stepped back so the person inside can feel safer.


    "It''s fine now. My friend also has stepped away and be the lookout for other monsters."


    "¡­I''m undoing the magic now."


    She said so as the mound slowly opened. But when Ang got a clear look of what''s inside, she shouted at me.


    "Don''t look over here!"


    I turned my head away. Sigh¡­ so she''s naked there.


    "Blobby, get over there and be a nket. Big enough to cover her body."


    I ordered Blobby to cover the girl''s body. I''m not looking over where they are, but I heard a slight gratitude from the girl.


    Ang asked the girl some questions and I collect the proof of subjugation which is the goblin''s right ear. When we showed it back at the guild, it will prove that we have cleared our mission.


    After finished collecting the proof, the girls also finished their chat and walked over here.


    "Roy. She''s Ka. She''s the same as us, registering as hunter today and also we went to the same school."


    Ang told me Ka''s story. Ka went to school today as well and after school was over, she quickly went to hunter guild to register. The fact that she registered today rather thanst week when she just awakened her magic is praiseworthy.


    Then inside the guild, she met her ssmates who have registered few days ago and telling her that she will be safe if she goes with them. And so she agreed, even though their party members are all male.


    Their journey was easy as they haven''t found any monsters yet. Their luck must have been good because Ang and I have encountered multiple monsters on the way.


    As they thought it was a good ce to assault Ka, they grabbed her and ripped her clothes. Finally when she was on the ground, one person who is the leader of the party wanted to ''taste'' her first.


    As he pulled down his pants, a sword stabbed his back through his chest. It was a goblin. There were five goblins surrounding them. The other boys escaped and left only Ka alone.


    Ka also tried to escape through another way because she''s also afraid of the boys. But the goblins chased after her and even their numbers increased from three to ten. She panicked and forget that she can use magic. As she keeps running away, she finally remembered her magic and used it to hide under the mound.


    "¡­that''s what she told me. That''s why she''s afraid of men now just like your guess."


    "That''s understandable. Ka, do they know about your magic elements?"


    After hearing Ang''s report, I asked Ka even though she''s afraid of me. She jolted when I asked her but still answered my question.


    "I never told them."


    "Then did you write down your elements on the paper when you''re registering as hunter?"


    "Hmm? Yes I did. I wrote down Earth, Healing, and Light elements."


    "I see."


    I understandpletely how the guys invited her. They must have known about her elements since she registered and started targeting her.


    "You asked about that paper again?"


    Ang asked me in confusion.


    "It''s easy to find out your magic from seeing it on the paper. They must have realized that she has low attacking power when they saw her magic so they started targeting her. That''s why I only wrote my name and age. You will easily be targeted by those with malicious intent. Earth, Light, and Healing elements arecking in attack power when you''re just a beginner level. If she has something like Fire or Lighting which has powerful attack, they won''t even bother to think about assaulting her. From now on, you two must keep your elements as secret. If necessary to tell other, Ka should just tell about Healing and Light elements and use Earth magic as a trump card."


    Then I walked closer to Ang and spoke to her in whisper.


    "You too. Just pick two elements to tell and use them when you''re in front of other. And for the other two, use them as a trump card. Whether you want to tell Ka about your elements or not, that''s up to you."


    "I see. I think I can trust her so maybe if she asked me, I will tell her. What about you?"


    "Me? Summoning element and my contracted monster is a slime. Then a rare but well-known to be weak Air element. Even if you spread them, everyone will think that I''m a weakling. What do you think?"


    "¡­people will think you are weak, but in fact you are strong. So it''s useful because you can make your enemies let down their guards even when they know about your magic."


    "That''s right."


    We continued to chat while walking back to the city. On the way back, we saw corpses on the ground.


    "Kyaaa! They are from the group that tried to assault me! They''re dead!"


    Ka screamed as she recognized the corpses from their clothes.


    "It''s obvious they will die when they met another monsters if they are even get scared of three goblins."


    "Why are you so calm?!"


    Ang shouted in my ear when Imented calmly.


    "If you became a hunter, this is amon sight. These are not the first corpses I saw, and they won''t be thest either."


    I have a lot of experiences from my past life, so seeing dead bodies won''t faze me. But with this, I think both Ang and Ka will think twice about their career as hunters.


    Whatever options they choose, I will respect their decisions.

 Chapter 6 - Return To The City

    "What will you do to the bodies?"


    Oh! Ang is much calmer than I thought after seeing dead bodies. Not like Ka who''s still shocked.


    "Take their Hunter Card. It''s the card we got when we registered. It will be used as proof that they are dead to show it to the guild. We might be rewarded. If they have no one to give their wealth to, we can take part of their money from the bank since that''s where their money are stored. You can register someone''s name in your card so they can use it or take the money. It''s just precaution since being a hunter means you will be close to death at all time."


    Most of my money I got in my previous life, are from corpse collection works. Before I got my Aura, I was too weak to even fight a goblins. Whenever I found a monster, I just used Blobby as a bait and I would run away shamelessly. I only did real hunter job few months before I died.


    "You mean if they don''t register their rtives before they died, the money will be going to the one who found their cards. We only take parts of it but where do the other part go?"


    "For the guild emergency fund, I guess."


    "What kind of emergency would the guild have?"


    "For example, in case of monsters Stampede that will attack the city. They used the money to keep hunters in the city to protect civilians."


    "I see."


    I exined to Ang and Ka who''s listening despite still being in shock. Then I looked for the corpse''s Hunter Card. There''s two of them, and the one that Ka said to be their leader wasn''t here.


    "Ka, the one who got stabbed from the back isn''t here. Where do you think his corpse is?"


    "Eh? I don''t remember. I just keep running away after the goblins appear."


    "What a shame. If we have his card then we could get more money."


    Ka doesn''t seem to be lying just because she doesn''t want to see another corpse. She''s truly doesn''t remember because she was panicking. I guess this is it. Now we only need to return to the city.


    "Let''s go back now. If we find another body, let''s check for their cards."


    On the way back we found the body of the man who tried to assault Ka. But he no longer has his Hunter Card.


    "Seems like other hunters have found his body first. At least now we know everyone in his party are all dead. You can rest easy now, Ka. At least at the moment, there''s no one targeting you."


    "¡­I don''t feel happy at all."


    "That''s good as well. Now you know the risk of being a hunter. If you''re happy seeing a corpse, I would be worried."


    "I thought you are happy with being richer?" Ang interjected.


    "I am happy to get more money. But seeing a corpse is a different matter. I would act tough when I see one. After all I need to be calm when I see a corpse. I need to know what''s killing him, how he died, and to remain vignt at the surrounding to make sure the one who killed him isn''t nearby. If I got panicked and freeze, that''s an opportunity for the killer to kill me."


    "You really knows a lot. It''s as if you have experienced many things despite us having the same age."


    "Haha! I only know what I know. If I know something important, shouldn''t I exined it to those who doesn''t know?"


    We left the body as it is. Soon he will be eaten by carnivorous beast so we don''t need to bury or burn the body. A perfect ending for an evil man.


    There were few monsters on the way home but I let Ang take care of them all. And then we found another boar as well. Since our mission is over, we can bring back its meat for food.


    After entering the city, I told Ka to get changed first. There''s no way I can let her walk around with nket wrapped around her body like a pervert. And Blobby is also can''t stay with her forever since she''s mine.


    I waited for Ka and Ang who apanying her at the guild. When they enter the guild with proper clothes, I walked to the receptionist to report about our mission and about Ka''s team.


    "Is that so? Then I will write that down. Congrattions on your first time clearing a request!"


    "Thank you."


    The receptionist congratte us for finishing our job. As for the matter of Ka, it was already amon urrence to newbie. They only give us our share of money and leave it at that.


    "That''s all for today. I''ll go home now. See you tomorrow on school¡­ maybe?"


    "Why maybe?"


    "I spent my time on school sleeping. Maybe I''ll go check the library from time to time, but I only spend a little time at school."


    Since I have already learned all necessary knowledge for introductory school, there''s no longer any need for me to learn in ss. But there''s a library at school so I think I will learn more stuff I never knew before. Maybe I''ll find the history of those Evil God Cult. Or maybe there''s a chance, despite it''s an extremely low chance, I can learn more about Aura.


    I can learn what I need to get stronger from Victoria. But the erased history of Aura user, she doesn''t know much other than Aura users being massacred by Evil God. And it''s just her assumption that Evil God is the one who killed her.


    And the reason I will go to the library is because of Aura ability. At first, the name ''Aura'' I called my power is based on a fairy tale book I read in the past life. And now when Victoria exined to me, in the past, it was also called Aura as well. That''s why I thought that maybe there''s hidden meaning in a fairy tale. Maybe there''s a history about the past Aura user in the fairy tale book. That''s why I will use my free time to go to the library.


    "Let''s do another quest again tomorrow."


    "I''ll pass."


    "Why?!"


    "Thanks to today''s mission and the body we found, I have nock of money at the moment. Tomorrow I will go to the library. There''s something I want to look for."


    "Is that so? Then I''ll do that as well."


    Why is Ang wanted to go with me that badly? Must be because she''s a rookie hunter and wanted me to guide her some more since she''s stillcking in knowledge and experience. It will be a pain to exin to her about what I''m looking for so I will have to refuse her.


    "No need to apany me. Why don''t you use the time tomorrow to practice your magic? You can still hunt monsters without taking any requests. Then let''s meet up at the guild the day after tomorrow for our next quest."


    "Okay."


    I guess now we are formally a party. Having the future Elemental Master as my teammate, I hope she will be much stronger than in my past life when we encounter the Evil God Cult.


    "Umm¡­ Can I enter your party as well?"


    Hmm? Ka seems interested in joining us. I don''t remember about her, but I have heard that there are several students from school who died on the day they registered as hunter. Maybe she''s one of them since I never saw her in school in my past life. I''m sure because I will remember if a beauty like her is in the same school. I guess I changed her fate when I rescued her from the goblins.


    "You sure? I know that you''re afraid of men because of what happened today, but are you okay with having me as your teammate?"


    "Yes, I''m sure. Ang told me a little bit about how she got stronger in one day because of your guidance. I also want to be stronger."


    Her eyes shows her determination. I like that. I don''t think that she''s a member of Evil God Cult. Since their attacks is on the time we attended school, I don''t think any students is rted to the cult. Maybe if their parents are a member, but for Ka whom almost died today, I don''t think she''s a member. If she is, they would at least taught her several things. But seeing how amateurish her actions today, I''m sure of it.


    "Then let''s get along from now on."


    "Yes. Then since we are all from viges outside the city, let''s get into a carriage together. Thest carriage for today will leave soon."


    "No. I''m not going with a carriage. I''ll go home on foot."


    "What?! Even if you ride a horse, you can only reach the nearest vige after one hour of ride! Why are you going on foot?"


    "For training purpose. If I run now, I can reach home jut on the time for dinner. I''m pretty fast, you know? You two as well. Don''t need to copy my extreme training, but you still need to exercise so you can have the strength and stamina for much a harder mission. But since I can see your exhaustion, just go home and rest well. Oh, if you see me tomorrow, don''t greet me if I''m sleeping. I usually spent my time at school sleeping. Goodbye!"


    And I left them as I run home. In just one day, I got to be friend with the future Elemental Master, and a healing mage. With this, I hope I can change the future.

 Chapter 7 - Sparring

    Finally, the time hase. It has been a month since school started and Ang, Ka, and I became a party.


    We did quests a day and have a break the next day. We did it for a month already. Our formation is I''m the vanguard, then Ka the healer in the middle, and Ang behind. We are a perfect team even if we are all beginner level. Even the teamwork of those two already enough to take care of a few orcs.


    The time hase¡­ for the school event! It''s an event where the school ask the students to pair up and spar in front of the teachers to show them how much we grow.


    Which means this is the day where I met my nodding friend! The friend who will nod at each other whenever we met without ever speaking at all. Now then, let''s go look for the guy before someone snatched him. Then after today, we will start our nodding at each other whenever we met.


    "Roy! Let''s pair up!"


    "You are not the nodding friend!"


    "What?"


    Oops! Ang looks surprised when I shouted at her. Well, this is one of the day that I''ve been waiting for since I returned back in time, so when she suddenly called out to me, I got annoyed.


    "Sorry. I thought you are someone else," I made a crappy excuse why I shouted. Then I continued "Why aren''t you partnered with Ka?"


    "She''s with the healer team. You don''t want to be with me?"


    "It''s not that. I thought that you will be together. Then¡­ please take care of me."


    With a heavy heart, I agree to spar with her. Which means there will be no nodding friend in this life. What a shame.


    "Hey¡ªpretty Ang! Will you be my partner on this dance?"


    Uwaah¡­ heree the annoying son of a noble¡­ What a pain in the ass. Let''s leave before he be hostile with me.


    "What a pest. He''s beening at me ever since school started."


    "I don''t need any story about him. I''ll just leave things for you to take care of. I''ll go get someone else to be my sparring partner."


    "No you don''t!"


    She grabbed my arm and stopped me from running away.


    "I''m sorry. We already agreed to be partner today."


    Then I whispered to her so the noble kid won''t hear me.


    "You should have said ''Okay, Sure''. If you don''t say that, then he will be hostile to me!"


    "I''ll take care of it."


    Then she looked at the guy and said the following.


    "Well, I don''t mind changing partner. As long as I can get a living target, anyone will do."


    "Urgh¡­ since you already have partner, then I will leave."


    He turned his gaze at me for a moment and turns back to leave.


    "What do you mean you''ll take care of it? Don''t you see he''s still hostile with me?"


    "That can be taken care of during the spar."


    "You mean you''re gonna aiming for my life?!"


    "I know you. You can either dodge or block anything I throw at you."


    "You''re evil!"


    And soon, the sparring began. We are thest one to have our spar.


    Everyone did their best. Ka also seems to be working hard to heal the students'' injuries. She''s well known for her healing magic and her beauty whichparable to Ang. In fact, in this school, the two of them are the talk of the whole school. Many men are aiming for the two of them. Even the young male teachers.


    In my past life, only Ang is popr. That''s because Ka should be dead already. I''ve changed the fate of two people already after returning back to the past. It could be more than two if I think of those who are indirectly affected by these two.


    There will be one other person whose beauty alsoparable with these two, but she will onlye to this city in three months. She will be one of the teacher here, not a student. And she''s also one of the people I know who has extreme hostility against the cult. But she''s not here yet so there''s no point in telling about her yet.


    Finally, it''s our turn to spar in front of everyone. Ang is well-known at school for her powerful Fire magic. As for other element, she only shows other people about her Wind magic. For Ice and Earth magic, she decided to keep them as secret just like I told her to. Which means, she will only use fire and wind in this spar.


    As for me, everyone already know that I''m just a useless summoner with a slime. They already predict the result of our battle before when they saw us being paired. And I will make their prediction a correct one.


    "Begin!"


    The teacher has signaled the start of the battle.


    "Blobby! I choose you!"


    It''s not like I have other summon.


    Blobby changed form from my wristband into her usual blob appearance. After getting used with her, I thought that carrying a cane is too conspicuous. Turning her into a wrist band is a much better choice since I can transform her instantly into a sword or a shield to attack or defense depending on the situation. If I keep carrying a cane, it will be obvious to other that the cane is my summoned monster since I can just walk normally.


    "Blobby! Use Body m!"


    Blobby then charged forward as I instructed. She charged directly toward Ang and she''s already prepared to cast her magic.


    "Fireball."


    "Blobby!"


    Blobby didn''t take any damage, but she''s knocked back again toward me.


    "Alright¡­ you wo-"Fireball!" WAAH! I already give up so stop attacking me!"


    She doesn''t stop attacking even after I said she''s already won. She really want me to be her living target! What an evil woman!


    I grabbed blobby and used her as a shield.


    "Please let me go! We can talk things out if you have any problem with me! Stop attacking me!"


    "I refuse."


    Her cold answer said everything. She really want to hit me! Even though she knows that I want to keep my real ability hidden, she''s trying to get me used it and fight her for real! Somehow she ended up as a battle maniac!


    "No, no, no, no, no! We can talk things through if you have any misunders¡ª MY FACE! You just aimed at my face! What would happen if I turned ugly! I still haven''t got myself a girlfriend so stop attacking my face! You''re gonna breaking¡ªMY HEART! This time you''re targeting my heart?! Are you trying to get me killed?! Can anybody help me stop her? She''s gone mad! Ang? Miss Ang? Can you stop attacking me? Is there no hope in¡ªMY FUTURE!"


    There''s a sudden pause after I blocked herst attack.


    "¡­"


    "¡­"


    "... Did you just aimed down there?"


    "¡­I did."


    "WHY?! What have I done to you?! That''s the most evil thing you did today! Not just my face, my heart, and then my crotch! Look around! All the men now are afraid to look at you in the eyes! They''re afraid of you!"


    "Doesn''t matter. Fireball!"


    She continued attacking me. Not just my face! She''s also aiming at my heart and then my crotch! She has just be men''s enemy from today.


    Why does she keeps doing this? Does she have faith in my blocking and dodging ability? Or she''s just doing this to vent her anger?


    If I want to, I can defeat her in one hit. But now, everyone already see her as the strongest among our generation. If I defeat her, I would just ended up getting unnecessary attention since I want to keep being low-key.


    I looked away from her to Ka in hope that she will stop her. But Ka just wink at me and gave thumbs up at me. Is this nned by them?!


    "To hell with the evaluation! I''m leaving! Bye!"


    Then I run away from the arena. I ignore the teachers who keep calling me to return to the arena.


    This ended up as the worst day ever since I got reincarnated to the past. I never met the nodding guy, and Ang keep aiming to burn my crotch. If I stay, something could get burned.


    ...¡­.


    Back at the arena, the principal announced the result.


    "Let''s stop the fight because Roy has left the arena. As for the result, we can see that Ang has the biggest firepower in the school with her rapid fireball attack. That''s a great achievement that even some Intermediate Fire Mage can''t get, but she already achieved it while still in her beginner level. Let''s give her a round of apuse for her showcase of power."


    The audiences pped their hands to give appreciation to Ang who has shown an amazing growth in just one month.


    Then the principal continued giving the evaluation and this time, it was Roy''s.


    "As for Roy¡­ He''s good at using his slime to block attacks and he''s also good to make a decision to run away when he can''t win a fight. That''s all for today''s sparring events. I hope all students can learn from Ang so everyone can grow much more and be a powerful mage."


    After the principal''s closing speech, everyone leave school.


    As for Roy, he''s already left early. In fact, neither Ang nor Ka who is looking for him can''t see his trace at all. He just disappear without telling his party member.

 Chapter 8 - Finding A Clue

    I left the arena and school just like that. Now, no one will questions me why I skipped ss. I have a sound reason as to why. Everyone must have seen it. It''s sad that I won''t be greeted with a nod by the nodding guy ever again, but my future is at stake.


    Seems like they''re announcing the evaluation. Ang must be praised by teachers now. Seeing how she can use rapid fireball at me, everyone must have thought that she''s a genius. But only Ang and Ka knows that I am the reason she got stronger.


    I also taught Ka about Light and Healing magic. She improved a lot ever since. As for Earth magic, I can just let Ang told Ka what I taught her since they both have earth element magic.


    It''s still eleven o''clock. Usually the school will end at one o''clock. This is the first time I left school early.


    The school only teach the students for five days a week. From Monday to Friday. And today is Friday.


    Usually we went to the guild and look for missions after school, but since today is a sparring events, I told them that we will take a break today and return on Monday. We would take jobs only on Monday, Wednesday, and Friday since I told them to rest or practice during the other days. So they usually training on the days we''re not taking any mission to improve their physical ability just like I told them to.


    Since it''s the first time I left school early, let''s take a walk around the city.


    I know most of the people''s face around the city. Not the way I wished it to be though. It was after the cult''s attack. The guild ask the survivors to collect the dead bodies. And I see most of the townspeople after their death. It was a terrible experience.


    It''s good that I know their faces. Which means they are the victims and not a part of the cult. For those whose face I don''t recognize, they are suspicious. Well, not all of them is suspicious. But at least I need to check their movement.


    "Roy. You really like patrolling in the city, huh?"


    Out of a sudden, Blobby¡ªno, Victoria spoke to me. Usually she would only appear if I have questions, but I haven''t asked her any questions today so this is a rare urrence.


    "I''m just looking for unfamiliar faces. The city will be attacked in nine month so those whose face I have never seen in this city during my previous life, are suspicious. If possible, I''d like to destroy their n to attack this city before it happen, but that is seems unlikely."


    "Why?"


    "Even if I did, the cult will grow suspicious of the city and may end up sending more reinforcements. During my previous life, they only attack this city just to introduce themselves to the world. They have no other reason to attack. But if I destroy their n during the attack, their cult will still be well-known, but this city will be known to be powerful as well. That''s why I''m on patrol to see suspicious people. Just in case they changed their schedule because I changed something in this life."


    "I see. I''ll support you all the way to defeat those people. I can sense that you will gain Aura soon. When the timee, I will teach you more about Aura."


    "Okay. Thanks!"


    She said that I will have my Aura soon. What a surprise! It''s only been a little bit over a month and I have already made a great improvement! And now I also have a teacher who will make my progress move smoothly. But I mustn''t get cocky. The reason I got returned back in time was because I got too cocky with my power and then I lose in the war. Even if I got Aura, I must still continue to progress to be stronger.


    As I think to myself, I saw a face I know from my previous life. He''s not from the victims of the cult. He''s from the cult himself!


    He''s with someone I don''t know and walking pass by me. I pretended to ignore them. When they can''t see me, I turned around and sneakily follow them. Seems like I will get a clue about their ns in this city.


    I saw them entering a restaurant and I followed them enter soon after waiting for a minute outside. They were talking about something I can''t hear about in the table at the corner of the restaurant. I sit at two table next to them and while they''re not looking, I threw Blobby after transforming her to the size of a pebble under their table. I can just let Blobby listen to their conversation, and ask Victoriater.


    Although my hearing has improved, I still can''t hear them when they speak in whispers. That''s why I threw Blobby to eavesdrop them. I also ordered some food so they will only think that I''m just a customer here.


    They finished their meals quickly and left soon after. I asked Blobby to stick on their clothes and follow them. I also finished my meal and leave the restaurant to stalk them.


    And¡­they entered the Governor''s house! Does it mean the Governor is involved with the attack?


    I jumped to the rooftop and find a way to enter the Governor''s house without anyone noticing. It''s hard to follow them inside the house, so after I entered the house, I unlock several windows so I can have a way in and out of the ce, and I waited until night at the rooftop of the house. The back of the house is facing the backyard and since there''s no one there at this time, I waited at the rooftop facing the backyard.


    I waited until midnight and summoned Blobby at the rooftop.


    "Victoria! Tell me what you''ve heard!"


    "Damn! You threw me so I can eavesdrop on them? But it''s a good idea so I''ll let it go. I don''t have much time so I''ll summarize it. They are nning to attack the city! They will throws some kind of potion all over the city to attract monsters here! They will wait until they finished the potions to make their members won''t get attacked by the monsters first. And they will finish in about nine month just like you said. The governor is part of the cult and other than the two who I followed and the Governor himself, the ones here are all new members of the cult. They all will be tested tomorrow in the forest for battle. I think that''s your best chance to finish the, if you want to stay discreet."


    "Okay, let''s prepare for tomorrow. Let''s find an inn that''s still open and rest for now."


    I agree with Victoria to kill their new members tomorrow. If it''s the forest, no one will find out that I''m the one who killed them all.


    I left the spot to look for a ce to rest. I can just sleep in the street, but since tomorrow is a big day, I need to sleep in a ce where I can rest well. There''s no inn that''s still open, but there are a lot of brothel so I enter one and go directly to the receptionist.


    "Excuse me. I just need a ce to sleep so can I rent one room?"


    "Sorry, handsome. We can''t do that. We have a rule that you can only rent a room with a girl from this establishment. You can''t just rent a room so you can sleep here," replied the receptionist.


    "That''s fine. Just get me a girl who seems tired today and tell her that she doesn''t need to do anything to me. We will just sleeping together."


    The receptionist seems surprised hearing my request.


    "¡­This is the first time we have such request in this establishment since I took over this ce. Hmm¡­ deal! There''s one girl who seem tiredtely since her reputation is soaring and many men came here just for her. I''ll lend you that girl. Here''s the key to your room. Just wait there. As for the fee, it''s¡­"


    She told me how much the price and I paid her. Then I enter the room provided by her. As for waiting for the girl? There''s no need to since we''re just going to sleep.


    Iid on the bed and think about what happened today. I followed the man from the cult and ended up knowing the Governor is rted to the cult.


    And tomorrow is the entrance exam for the new members? They have an exam? Seriously?


    I guess they did it to see whether the newbie can actually kill or not. I don''t think the test is about killing monsters so maybe they will kill each other or targeting someone. As soon as I wake up, I will check the forest. Maybe they are hiding something in the forest as well.


    Well, for now let''s sleep. I need to have all the energy needed for tomorrow.


    As I closed my eyes, I heard someone entering my room. She must be the tired girl I asked for.


    "Nice to meet you. I''m Sophie."

 Chapter 9 - Lets Just Sleep

    "Sophie, right? I''m Roy and I want to sleep. Let''s just sleep until morning."


    Sophie entered the room and introduced herself. I just told her that I''m really here to sleep. Even though from appearances alone, she''s worthy to be the number one girl in the establishment. But I don''t care about it at the moment.


    If not for tomorrow''s battle, I will dly make a move on her. But this things doesn''t matter at the moment. I can juste here on any other time if I want to. If not for the gates already closed, or other inns are still open, I won''t have toe here just to sleep.


    Sophie then undressed herself and walked to the bed.


    "I can''t just do that. This is a kind of service industry and I need to service you."


    Oh! Wow! Her body! Her face! Everything! Perfect!


    But no. Really, no. I can''t just make a move thinking that tomorrow I will be in perfect condition. Although my physical ability is much better than average person, I can still get tired. And since tomorrow I might end up fighting 50 people, I really need to be in perfect condition.


    Now how should I refuse her?


    "Then service me with your warmth during my sleep. That alone is enough."


    "I can''t do that. This is my job after all. I don''t have any choices."


    Why did she said it that way? Doesn''t have any choices? Does it mean she''s being forced to work here? It doesn''t matter at the moment. So I will keep refusing her.


    "Do you know what I said to the owner? I just told her to call the girl who seems tired today and she choose you. Do you know what that means?"


    "What is it?"


    Sheid on next to me and touched my cheek trying to seduce me. I looked into her eyes and told her with a serious expression.


    "It means she found you to be the most exhausted girl here. I told her that we will only sleep together which means she wants you, the most tired girl today, to rest well. She''s worried about you."


    Her hand which was caressing my cheek stopped.


    "But... I can''t do that. I have to do more work if I want to pay my debt."


    Does it means she''s forced to work here to pay her debt?


    "If you''re sick because you work too much, you can''t do any more works anyway. And you will need more fund to get to the doctor. That''s why you need to rest. Your fatigue was noticed by the owner and I also ask you to rest."


    "¡­but."


    She''s still resisting. Does she hate to sleep that much? Just like children who refuse to nap because they want to y so badly?


    Then if she''s forced to work, I can force her to rest.


    "Let''s do it this way."


    "What?"


    Iid on my side and embrace her. This way, she can''t do anything at all.


    "I''m much stronger than you physically. If I do this, you can''t move at all so your only option is to sleep. Good night."


    "Wait! No!"


    "Just shut up and sleep."


    Sophie still struggling in my embrace. It''s like she got brainwashed to always work and never rest. What kind of evil being forced this lovely girl to do this?


    And what about me? I''m forcing myself to endure the temptation! Do I really need to sleep without any actions? There''s a beautiful naked girl in my embrace, and I refused to do anything to her! If other people know this, they would think I prefer men. That''s a big NO!


    Let''s ignore everything and sleep. I can just cry in regretter. But I can''t sleep! Sophie ended up telling me her story while she''s in my embrace!


    "Three years ago, I was just a student. I just awakened to my magic and register as hunter in hope for a better life. Somehow I ended up being tricked by my party member and shouldered a lot of debt I can''t pay with just being a low rank hunter. That''s when the owner found me, and after listening to my story she asked me if I wanted to work here. Since the pay is much better than being a low rank hunter, I agree. Then my reputation got higher and I got more jobs and money. But the debt somehow increased and I could never keep up with the payment. That''s why I need to do more work so I can get money."


    Okay. So she just told me her background story. What does she want from me? Comforting someone is not something I''m good at. So I just put my hand on her head and pat her.


    "What? Do you think you canfort me like this?"


    "No way. It''s impossible. You will never be able to rx until your debt disappear. I''m just doing this in hope you can fall asleep faster this way."


    "What''s wrong with you? You just keep saying sleep and sleep again and again. Do you not think that I''m attractive at all?"


    "No, you are very attractive. If I don''t have a n that will spend a lot of my energy tomorrow, then I will do those kind of things to you. Sadly, I need a rest. Just go to sleep."


    How many times have I told her to just go to sleep? Even I can already feel her fatigue. She clearly needed more rest than me.


    "Uuuh¡­ What should I do?"


    "Like I said. Sleep."


    Sigh¡­ what should I do with her? If it''s like this, I can''t get any sleep. Should I just do it with her? It should be fine if I just do it once. Or maybe not. I have to leave early. Probably at dawn. And I don''t know how strong those cult members are. If I ended up getting exhausted during the battle, there won''t be other chance to attack.


    Then¡­ it''s time to use my secret technique!


    Over the years I''m being weak, I have created my own list of techniques. I called it ''Shameless Survival Arts''.


    Just like the name implied, I will do almost anything to survive. Whenever I''m in a tough spot, I always make sure that I have at least two options. First is to escape, and second is to ask for someone''s help. After that, then other options such as lying, telling the truth, hit and run tactics, and in the small chance I''m fighting a woman, which I did a few times, I will seduce them.


    And now since I can''t escape because I have paid and it will be a waste of money, and I can''t ask for help here, what kind of man asking for help when he''s in a room with a woman? I am. But I will be troubling the owner who agreed to let me stay for the night. Although I''m shameless, my shamelessness is at its peak only when I don''t bother other people. Mostly innocent people.


    Which means it wille down to my special skill from Shameless Survival Arts.


    Seduction skill: Cheesy Lines!


    "You know what? Even if you told someone about your story, most of them won''t care. But I do. I can''t help you with paying your debt. And I don''t even know if we can meet again in the future. But now you''re in my arms. You can dream of me and I will protect you in your dream. That''s the least I can do for you."


    How is it? Does my cheesy lines works?


    Sophie then hugged me tightly. She looked up to my face with teary eyes and says, "Thank you."


    Well, damn! This actually works! During my previous life, Cheesy Lines never works as Seduction Skill. It''s more useful as a Distraction Skill. But for it to work on Sophie¡­ she must have a big wound in her heart to fall for stupid lines.


    As she cries in my embrace, she asked me something unrted to her story.


    "Why did you say you don''t know if we can meet again? Is the thing you have to do tomorrow life threatening?"


    "¡­possibly."


    I answered her with a lie. Of course I won''t die. Even if my n to kill them all failed, I will choose to run away instead of fighting them all. Survival is number one. And if I judged them to be easy opponents, I will kill them all ording to the n. Although my existence will be known by the cult, living is what matter most.


    "Promise me you won''t die."


    She looks into my eyes as she asked me to make a promise with her. Did she ended up falling for me? Cheesy Lines works beyond my expectation!


    "I promise."


    "And meet me again tomorrow. Promise?"


    "Fine, I promise you that as well."


    Now I got a date tomorrow. But other than sleeping together, I don''t know what else I can do for her. Let''s take things one at a time. I''ll think about it tomorrow.


    Soon Sophie fall asleep even though she''s the one who wanted to stay awake the most before. She''s asleep with a smile on her face.


    "At least she''s happy in her dream."


    Finally I can sleep as well. Even with a nude girl in my arms, I have to sleep. Fuck, now I get aroused. I really should have said to the owner that I also looking for services like other men do.


    Whatever. I need to kill a lot tomorrow anyway. If I ended up not feeling exhausted by the time I killed all of them, I will be truly disappointed.

 Chapter 10 - Ruby

    I woke up before dawn. I opened my eyes to see that there''s someone beside me. Yes, she''s Sophie. Afterst night, it took me a while until she finally fell asleep. And it ended up with me having a date with her tonight.


    She''s sleeping naked and she''s hugging me in her sleep. And so¡­ I enjoyed the moment.


    ...


    Oh Shit! I spend ten minutesying on the bed? I need to leave quickly!


    I rose from the bed, making sure that Sophie won''t wake up. I left the bed and stand up. I turned back to Sophie who seems to be having a good dream.


    ...


    Damn! Now I spent another half an hour just seeing her naked? I need to leave immediately!


    I covered Sophie under a nket and left the room. We''ll see each other tonight, so I don''t need to say goodbye.


    I walk downstairs and see that the owner is still waiting at the desk. She then looked at me.


    "Oh? Is your business this early in the morning? The sun still hasn''t arise yet"


    "Probably? I''d like to prepare myself first."


    "Do you want some breakfast? I''ll make them for you."


    "Does this establishment serve breakfast?"


    "Not at all. So this is free from me. As thank you for apanying Sophie. She''s forcing herself too much and she need a rest. You''re just sleeping with her, right? You didn''t do anything to her?"


    "I just spoke some sweet words to her and somehow I ended up promising her to a date tonight."


    "I''ll hear the detailster. I''m going to cook first and we''ll take during the meal."


    "Sure."


    I moved to a table nearby and waited for her cooking.


    Actually, there''s a reason I choose this brothel among any other brothel in the city. It was because of the owner. She''s one I considered as hero during my past life.


    Her name is Ruby and she is the owner of this brothel. And she''s one who wholeheartedly support all the girls working in the brothel. Emotionally and financially. No matter what kind of past the girls have, she epted them all with open hands.


    I know her because of the attack by the cult. She protected everyone from the monster by sheltering them all in her brothel, and she also protected them from the cult members who attacked them after the monsters leave.


    There are two waves of attacks. First is by monsters, and then by the members of the cult. For the monsters, as long as you''re hiding in good ce, they won''te looking for you. But for the cult, they will loot everything they find. They will also kill everyone in sight.


    Ruby protected everyone by blocking the entrance from the cult. Although she was just an Intermediate mage, she fought until herst breath. When she died, reinforcement finally came and kill all the cult members. Everyone in the brothel are safe thanks to her sacrifice, including me.


    This time, I can''t let her die.


    One of the reason I choose this ce is to see if she still the same woman who will protect everyone, and she is indeed the same.


    After she finished cooking, we''re chatting during our meal. I told her everything that happened with Sophiest night and she thanked me for helping Sophie rest well.


    "Thank you. It''s good that you came here. It''s been few days since Sophie got a good rest. Even when I told her to rest, she would refuse. Do you know that she also took a part-time job during the day? Day and night she keeps working. I''m worried of her well-being."


    If she''s not here during the day, it make sense why I never met her in my previous life. She must have been somewhere else when the attack happened.


    Then Ruby continued asking me questions.


    "What is it something which threatening your life today? Maybe I can help you."


    She''s the same as before. Always helping other without caring about herself. I can''t let her sacrifice herself for me again. This time she have to live! That''s why I have to tell her about the danger we''re facing.


    I''m not some kind of idiot who think I can do everything on my own. That''s why I always have escaping and asking for help as options during any kind of situations. This time I will ask for her help. Unlike some idiots in the stories I read about people having second chance, but insist on doing everything alone. Keeping everything as secrets.


    I can''t tell her everything. There''s no way someone can believe me if I said I''ve returned to the past. That''s why I mix lies and truths.


    I told her that I eavesdrop someone by chance and that someone is nning to attack the city (Truth). I am indeed eavesdropping someone, but I know the attack from my past life. Then I told her that I have told the authorities, but they think I''m lying (Lie). I haven''t done that but I know they won''t believe me if I told them. I told Ruby that some people in nobility is actually taking part in the attack (Truth). This will make her think twice if she wanted to tell someone else. Of course I told her to keep it secret, but I can''t do anything if she doesn''t believe me. I continued exining while mixing truths and lies.


    "Is all you''ve said the truth?"


    "I don''t know. Part of why I''m going today is to see whether it''s the truth or not. I''m actually hoping that I just misheard things, but this is really not something I can''t leave alone if it''s the truth."


    "Let''s think of it as the truth for now. What should I do?" she said.


    "Obviously making sure that you can protect your own live and those you care about."


    I told her to treasure her life. If not, she will sacrifice herself again. Though I''m not sure if she would listen to my advice.


    "You said to protect myself, but what about you? Why are you insist in fighting them? You''re even risking your life today, aren''t you?"


    Why? Now that I think about it, I don''t really have to fight them, don''t I? I can just run away from them. Leaving everything behind. I never thought of myself as a good guy. I will let some people die if it mean I can survive. But that doesn''t mean I will let them all die.


    Why am I fighting? Why am I trying so hard?


    I guess it was back when I awakened my Aura ability that I ever felt truly happy in my past life. I thought that I can finally be stronger. And then I enjoyed fighting enemies after I became stronger. I was weak all my life and when I got Aura ability, I felt that I''m the strongest man in the world. That was stupid of me.


    In the end, the only reason I fight is because they are evil. I have no other reason. I can just escape and leave everything behind but I didn''t do it. Maybe there''s still kindness in me.


    So I just told Ruby why I fight.


    "I fight because they are evil. I''m not a guy who thinks I can save everyone, but if there''s evil in front of me, I will fight. I guess that''s why I fight. But I''m still a coward. So if the evil is too strong, I will run away."


    "I see. As long as you''re alive, you can hit them back after you got stronger. Is that it?


    "You''re right."


    I guess in the end, I don''t really know the reason I fight. Because they''re evil? That may be just one reason. But I guess that''s enough for now. What''s important is to survive.


    "Roy. Do you want to live here?"


    "What?"


    Did Ruby just told me to live here?


    "I have plenty of room and there''s meal for you as well. You only needed to help us from time to time."


    "Why?"


    "Because you seem lost. You said the reason why you fight, but you''re unsure about it. Maybe by staying here, you will find the real reason why you fight. But you have to be our helper from time to time."


    "¡­Okay. Sure."


    I don''t know about my real reason, but I won''t refuse a shelter and meals. Now I don''t have to go back to that vige again.


    "Then, I''ll be leaving now."


    "Okay. Take care of yourself. If it''s too hard for you, you can run away. From today, this is your home."


    I left the brothel and run to the governor''s house. Trying to stalk them to where they''re going.


    As I waited for them, I thought about what Ruby said.


    "Home, huh?"


    I never had a real home before. Always moving from ce to ce. For her to lend a room to someone she just met¡­ She''s really the same as before. Always thinking for others.


    Subconsciously, I smiled while thinking about my new home.

 Chapter 11 - Infiltrating The Test

    It was five in the morning when I see some movements. I saw many people split up into groups of three to five and left the Governor''s house. None of them goes to the same direction, so I just followed the one that went near me.


    The gate was still not opened. That''s how it was supposed to be, but somehow, all the gates opened early. Either the gatekeepers are colluded with them, or the governor requested them to open the gate early.


    After the people I also get to the gate. I approached the gatekeeper five minutester.


    "Excuse me! Why is the gates opened so early?" I asked the gatekeepers.


    "Who are you?!"


    One of the gatekeepers shouted at me with hostility.


    "I''m Roy. A student. Yesterday I can''t go back to the vige early so I was stuck in the city."


    "Then just leave! Don''t ask any questions!" the other gatekeepers told me to leave quickly.


    "Okay, okay!"


    None of them has a face I recognized. They must be one of the cult members. I don''t know where the real gatekeepers are, so I need to proceed carefully. Who knows if they would kill me after I left?


    I went through the gate and find some ce to hide. I waited for a while, and there''s no one following me. Seems like they won''t kill people unnecessarily.


    after another minute passed, there''s another group leaving. So I followed them.


    Despite being early in the morning, they are extremely vignt to the surrounding. If I can''t sense their presence from afar, they would have find me already. It''s good that I have both Aura and air element magic. Thanks to my air element, I can sense people breath and follow them.


    They went into the forest while checking the surrounding. I also checked my surrounding and I found some people going this way. They might be from the cult as well. I need to hide.


    Both group encounter each other, and they are having a conversation. I tried to eavesdrop on them on my own. I need to save Victoria''s time because maybe she will be usefulter.


    As I got closer without getting noticed by them, I heard what they''re talking about.


    "¡­we only need to wait for one more group before we go."


    "Let''s rest here. Does anyone know about the test?"


    "No. The priests never told us a thing about the damn test."


    "Maybe they will tell us to kill each other and the winner will be recruited."


    "Maybe. Should I kill everyone here then?"


    "No, don''t do that. Even if we must kill each other, let''s wait until they told us to do it. There''s no way a secret organization like this will allow anyone who can''t obey order."


    "Hah! You''re right about that! Don''t worry about anything! It''s because I will kill everyone!"


    Hmm¡­ the tests seems to be hidden even from the new recruits. I thought as I heard them saying some barbaric stuffs.


    The cult must have recruited some people who has criminal records. But not all of them has criminal records. Some must have agree with the cult''s ideology and decide to join them. Those guys are much more dangerous than these low-life criminals. That''s why I think for those guys, they will be epted without any tests.


    As for these ruffians, they must have promised them some wealth or freedom to do anything they want if they join. That''s why the cult told them their ns to attack the city to show how serious they are to these ruffians.


    I waited for a while and then I see another group of four peopleing. Nowbined with the group from before, it''s thirteen people gathering here.


    As soon as they came, the two previous group moves without letting the new group taking a rest. It''s in case their spection are correct in which they will fight each other, so the previous groups won''t let the neers take a breather.


    And of course I followed them.


    They pass through the forest, crossing the river and now to a ce I''ve never been to.


    There''s a cave under a hill. Seems like it was their destination and where they will take the test since there are many people gathering there. There are even some whose faces I seen in my previous life. They are the ones who joined their forces and attacked Melk City.


    It''s confirmed that these new recruits of them are the ones who will be responsible for the attack on Melk City and the surrounding viges. Those with face I recognized, are the ones who passes the test. Which means I have to kill them all.


    The cult might ended up attacking the city with much stronger forces. At that time, I will also be much stronger and kill them all as well¡­ hopefully.


    In front of the cave, there are about 80 people. And two of them who are standing in front of the others are the two who Victoria followed. One of them is the one who killed the most during the attack on Melk City. An advanced Lightning Mage.


    In my current strength, I can''t sense the strength of my enemies, but I think there are several advanced mage here with intermediate mage being the most among them.


    The lightning mage began to speak.


    "The exam will start inside the cave. There will be a wide area inside which all of you will enter, and we will release monsters there. All of you have to fight them all and those who survive will be rewarded!"


    ""OOOOOH!!""


    So that''s the test. Maybe I could disguise myself as one of them and stab them all from behind. Then I can me the monsters for it.


    "I wish that all eighty three of you will survive and join our rank."


    Ahhhh. I can''t use that n if they had already counted the numbers of participants. Maybe I could rece one of them?


    "Now I will take attendance and when I called your name, you will enter the cave and wait for the rest of us there."


    They even have attendance? Is this school? Can''t you please make it easier for me?


    As I was looking for a chance, I overheard someone''s talking.


    "Hey, ck Hood! You wanna team up with me inside?"


    ck Hood? Is that his alias? Maybe I can kill him and disguise myself as that guy. He''s wearing a hood so no one can see my appearance if I disguised myself as him.


    As I thought of that, the lightning mage called a name.


    "Jo! Jo!"


    "I''ming!"


    His name is Jo? Why not just signed yourself as ck Hood?


    AAAAAH!!


    There''s no way I can enter if it like this! I have to think of a way!


    So I left that ce. There are about 83 of them, 85 if I included the two examiner. And now it''s still the 7th person to be called. I might have some time to lure some monsters here to distract them all and enter the cave. That''s the only way I can think of.


    I run as fast as I can to find a group of monsters and soon I stumble upon a group of orcs.


    Good. I will use them as distraction.


    I attacked one of them lightly so it won''t have any visible wound. It got angry and all of them also shows their rage to me. Now I only need to run to the cave''s direction.


    I run with a speed that the orcs can chase. If I run too fast, they will give up chasing me.


    When I was about to reach the cave, while still away from the people''s sight, I increased my speed and hide in a ce the orcs and the cult can''t see.


    And now they fight!


    It was the people closest to the forest that notices somethinging. And when they saw a group of orcs, they warned everyone.


    "A group of orcs is attacking!"


    That''s good enough. That''s the signal for me to enter the cave.


    As soon as everyone''s attention is toward the orcs, I entered the cave.


    The inside of the cave looks fancy. Seems like this cave is a manmade one. Or at least the inside parts are manmade. As I walked through the cave, I see a door to a room. Must be the wide area that lightning mage talking about. If I entered like this, the people who entered first will found out about me.


    Luckily, the wall next to the door is ck. I can just ask Blobby to cover me and some parts of the area while transforming her to a t board like the wall. Now I can wait for everyone to enter the room and I will act after the monsters has been called out.


    I waited for a while but still no one ising. They must have been busy with the orcs.


    After another fifteen minute, finally the next person has entered. The orcs must have been defeated.


    Hmm? Then there are groups of peopleing in. Maybe I can blend in with them?


    "Some people died because of the orcs so they just counted those who died and let everyone else in. it''s nice since I don''t have to wait anymore."


    The guy who has just entered the room exined to those who entered early. I overheard them and know that this is my chance to blend in!


    As soon as there are nobody looking my way, I transformed Blobby back into my wristband and pretended I''m one of them. I joined the group that has just entered from behind them. Now everyone will think that I''m one of the new recruits.


    And just I expected, one of them think I''m also a new recruit and talked to me.


    "Those orcs are easy prey, right? My Fire Spell can defeat them easily. Those who died are too weak and shouldn''t even think of entering. Aren''t I right?"


    "Maybe. I don''t know how strong those orcs are since I didn''t join the fight."


    Then I whispered to him alone so only he can hear me.


    "That will be my n for this test. We can just rest while everyone fighting the monsters. They only told us that only survivors will pass the test, not the one who killed the most monsters. This way we can save our energy. And if some of them said we are not supposed to pass the test because of our cowardly act, we can just kill them since they''re already spent their strength, while we are still in perfect condition. How about it? Wanna join up with me?"


    "Kukuku¡­ that''s one good n. I''m in. My name is Bob. What''s yours?"


    You shouldn''t have believed someone you met for the first time, Bob. This will be the end of your life.


    Obviously, I can''t give him my real name in case I failed to kill everyone. So I gave him a fake name.


    "Alejandro."

 Chapter 12 - Battle Inside The Cave

    "Alright, since everyone has entered, we will release the monsters you will have to fight against."


    Then the lightning mage, activated some kind of mechanism inside the room after he closed the entrance. And then, the wall on the other side opened and I can see many monsters ahead.


    Those are the same type of monsters. And the numbers is about 300 of them! It''s more than three times the number of the people.


    The monsters are called Giant Mantis. They look like a praying mantis, but their size is about the same as human if not bigger. On average, they are about two meter tall. And those two de like hands are dangerous. The sharpness of those des can split a human body from head to toe.


    "Those are your enemies you have to kill. As long as you survive, you will be epted," said the lightning mage.


    He and the other mage still staying here. I guess it means that they are confident in their abilities. I don''t care why, but this gave me an opportunity to kill them as well. If they decided to leave, I might lose my chance to kill them.


    Luckily, the monsters that appear is Giant Mantis. I can transform Blobby into a de simr to the mantis'' des and when someone outside checking on what happened here, they will me the mantis.


    The battle began, and Bob and I just watched everyone from the sideline. So are the two examiner.


    The two looked at us from time to time, but they didn''t care whether we''re fighting or not. And when the battle got harder for everyone, the two examiner stopped caring about us and only looked at those with strong potential.


    300 Giant Mantis is difficult to handle. Usually, they need to be defeated by at least 2 intermediate level mage. Now there are more than three times the number of the people. But from them, there are some who shows great ability. They are already reached advanced level and can take down several mantises at once.


    And I found my target among those advanced level mage. A fire elemental mage. There are some advanced level fire mage, but the one I''m aiming is the one farthest from me in case someone suspicious of me if I targeted the one close by.


    What will I do? It''s the time for my air element to shine!


    With air element magic, I can change the chemicalpound of gases around me. I still don''t know much yet, but that was what Victoria told me. Where does her knowledgee from? Maybe when she have more time, she will told me everything. I hope it won''t be something terrible.


    Victoria told me several things she knows during each time she appears. One of them is the fact that air is a mixture of gases. Like what we breathe in and needed for us to live, is Oxygen. And when Oxygen enter our lung, it change into Carbon Dioxide we breathe out. I don''t know how shees with such knowledge but I know that she can be trusted. Maybe it was somethingmon in the past?


    Anyway, that''s why I''m looking for a strong fire mage. All I need to do is to change the mixture of gases near that guy into a highly mmable one that may end up hurting himself. Victoria said it was Ethylene. A slightly sweet smelling gas which extremely mmable.


    My air element is still in basic level, but I can change the gas around him enough to kill him and several people around him. So I activate my magic without anyone knowing.


    "BOOOOOM!"


    "Uwaaah!"


    "What the hell!"


    "Did he just die by his own magic?"


    An explosion happened. And everyone stopped to see the situation. And someone who saw what happened, specte that a man is killed with his own magic. That''s half-right. The other half is my magic, but that''s good enough for a passing grade. Since that''s all you need to know.


    Then I did it one more time with a smaller scale to another fire mage. This time, my target is an intermediate level one. There goes another ''Boom''.


    "What happened? Is there some kind of explosive gases here?"


    "There shouldn''t be any! We just finished building this cest month and there''s no explosive gases at all!"


    The two examiner got confused with what happening. Well, that''s good for me. Now that their attention is at the center of the explosion, I can stealthily approach them without anyone knowing. Not even Bob who is close to me. Just like I thought, he''s stupid.


    I transformed Blobby into two de with simr shape to the mantis'' de. The two de are connected with a string since Blobby can''t split her body. When I''m behind the two examiner, I raised both des high and swung them downward!


    Just like the Giant Mantis. Their attacks are mostly by using their des and swung them downward. Sometime, they will caught their prey with the prey''s head in between the two des, and the mantises would eat their prey like that. I can''t copy that, so I only imitate their downward swing.


    "What?!"


    "Both examiners got killed!"


    "Traitor! There''s a traitor among us!"


    "Alejandro! Why did you betray us?!


    Seems like I gained everyone''s attention. Now I just need to take care of them all.


    "Sadly Bob, I''m not Alejandro. I''m Carlos!"


    Again. I used another fake names again. Then I announced my intention to everyone.


    "You. All. Bad. Guys. I. Kill. You."


    Now even someone as stupid as Bob will realize that I''m their enemy. That exnation is too easy to understand. If there are some who doesn''t get it, their intelligence is much lower than a baby who doesn''t understandnguage yet.


    Now then, in an enclosed space, between enemies both monsters and humans, I will show everyone how scary a fighter can be!


    I swung my des down again to Bob who is the nearest one from me. Goodbye, Bob. I will send everyone with you so can have friend in the afterlife.


    "Kill the traitor!"


    "We can''t let him live!"


    "Wait! There''s a mantis behind you!"


    "GUWAAAH!"


    Heh. Another one died by the mantis. Using two des is really a good idea.


    Then I killed them one by one with the same method. Downward swing like a mantis.


    In front of the cave, there are 85 people. Now it hase down to 30. Although most of them are killed by the mantises, I still kill a lot myself. And I will keep killing until everyone died.


    Well, not everyone. At least I will keep the mantises alive. I''ll just dun away after killing every cult members. But thirty enemies is not a small number even with the help of hundreds of Giant Mantises. Good thing I just slept with Sophie. We didn''t do anything that would tire me out today.


    "You little! Earth Wall!"


    It''s Jo! He''s actually an advanced level earth mage! So you actually hiding your real power. That doesn''t matter. His earth wall are blocking me, but I can take care of them! Although it will take some time.


    I transform Blobby into a shovel and dig up an entrance.


    I opened up a hole the size of a small window.


    "Here''s Pablo!"


    "Aren''t you Carlos?!"


    "It''s difficult to remember if I picked up too many fake names!"


    "That''s stupid of you to only open up a hole this size. Now die! Fireball!"


    Oh shit! Turn out Jo is also a fire mage! I quickly backed away before he finished his spell, and activate my own magic as well.


    This time, Jo went Kaboom. And the wall got destroyed.


    I was too careless. Again, I got too cocky with my power that I almost died. If I don''t have air element like in my previous life, I would have died long ago.


    I need to do it more carefully even if I have to spend more time and energy. As long as I''m alive, even if I fail, I can just return at ater time. Dying because I overestimated my strength is stupid of me. Especially when everyone here is my enemy and I have secured the escape route.


    That''s right. After I killed Bob, I opened the entrance again so I can leave anytime I want but I forget about it the next second. Turns out I was so much wiser back when I was weak.


    I need to regain those wisdom back! Time for another Shameless Survival Arts!


    Distraction Skill: Screaming!


    "AAAAAAAAAAAH!"


    "Ugh! What the hell?!"


    sh! He died.


    "Stop Screaming!"


    sh! Another enemy fell.


    "He''s distracting us with his scream!"


    sh! Another one bites the dust.


    Now there are about fifteen human enemies, while the mantises have dropped to fifty. Seems like there are more advanced level mage than I expected.


    I keep distracting the enemies while killing them. And finally, there is only one enemy left with the numbers of mantises is about thirty.


    "Why did you kill us?"


    Thest man asked while being surrounded by Giant Mantises.


    "I can''t stand the cult."


    As I finished my sentences, one Giant Mantis grabbed him and eat his head.


    Everyone has died now and I''m extremely tired. I need to leave quickly before someone finds me.

 Chapter 13 - Aura Awakening

    I exited the cave and went into hiding. I waited there in case someone from the cult wille to check on them. And they sure did.


    After three hours waiting, someone came and enter the cave to check. Well, I''m sure that he will only think that the Giant Mantises are much stronger than average since both the examiners got killed by me who imitated how the mantises kill their prey.


    After a while, the man who entered the cave leave. Probably to tell hisrade. I''ll wait for them here to memorize their faces. If they are people in high position or powerful, there''s no chance for me to defeat them.


    And indeed, the one that guy called over was someone whose strength far above me at present. I don''t know his name but he''s a summoner just like me. And his summoned monster is the one that killed me in my previous life. Some kind of mutated monster.


    As a summoning mage, we can only contracted to just one monster. Unless that monster died, the summoned can''t contracted to other monsters. That''s why most summoning mage are either strong from the start or stay weak forever. If not for Blobby and my Aura ability, I will be thetter.


    And I guess that man kill his own monster to make contract with a new and much stronger monster. Or maybe that''s the same monster as his starter, but he did some experiment and modified its feature to be a much stronger monster. Both seems possible as they are a cult that did many evil. Which means there''s possibility that they have a lot of those modified mutated monster.


    I know it was him because of his scar. He had arge scar on his left hand from between his index finger and middle finger on his palm, and it''s reached his forearm, just near his elbow. That is most likely because of some kind of surgery he went through. I know because I''m familiar with scar from ded weapon and surgery.


    Actually in my previous life, as I have no strength, I wanted to gain money by bing a doctor, so I saved money and I finally entered medical school at the age of thirty. Everyone there is almost half my age.


    Actually, after introductory school in this life, I wanted to go to medical school again. Although in my past life I''m still poor even after I became a doctor, this life will be much better. I still have all the knowledge about medicine, but to be a doctor I need a license. Back then I finished school in eight years, but this time I will shortened it.


    Well, that''s not important right now. The Scarred Palm guy is too strong for me and I don''t know where his monster is. I decided to run away.


    I escaped the forest to the direction of my house in the vige. I need to pack some of my things because I will live in the brothel from tonight. I don''t have much, but I need some clothes. Especially underwear. It''s disgusting to wear the same one for months. Yes, I''ve experienced that before. That''s when I thought of having Blobby turned into pants.


    ¡­I guess that''s why Victoria nevere out in my previous life. Let''s keep it secret from her. Forever!


    Soon I reached home safely. I took a breather for a minute and then¡­ I felt a surge of power within me!


    "It''s Aura! My Aura is finally awakened!"


    I shouted in joy after feeling it. In just one month, I gained Aura! Although I can''t defeat the Scarred Palm guy yet, I can defeat advanced level mage directly. What I did in the cave is because I nned cautiously so I could defeat advanced mage. If I directly fought against them, I would lose. Maybe I should use Blobby as an armor. That way my defense is greatly increased.


    Then suddenly I heard a voice from under me.


    "Not yet. You''re still not even halfway to being a real Aura user."


    It was Victoria. She suddenly spoke to me.


    "So there''s something stronger than this?"


    "Oh? Instead of being down after I told you, instead you be more spirited."


    "Of course! It means that I can still grow more!"


    "So you''re an optimist."


    "No. it depends on the situation. Sometime I can be a pessimist as well. You just need to know that I have a twisted personality."


    "Whatever. Now I will exin some things I haven''t told you yet about Aura. As usual, listen carefully. Although since you have be stronger and this slime also be stronger with you killing many today, I have a little bit more time than before.


    "So each time you got stronger you will gain more time."


    "That''s right. Now I will tell you about what you need to do to be a real Aura User."


    Hmm¡­ seems like there''s more to Aura than I expected. It was much more than increase in physical ability. That''s what I thought as I listened to Victoria.


    To summarize, I have just able to see a door to Aura. I haven''t even touched it. Let alone opened it.


    To enter the realm of Aura user, I need to fight some kind of monster. What monster is it? Not even Victoria knows. At least she told me to find that monster myself. The clue she had was just that the monster''s ability is something that I needed for my desire. I have to kill it on my own, without any magic or support. That means I can''t even use her as weapon. I need to pick my own weapon.


    And after I killed the monster, I will gain ability that fit my desire. Not ability that I desire. What it means is like my reason to live, not what I want at the moment. For example if someone loves music, they will gain ability to improve hearing, or maybe to make their voice louder. For that person, they need to defeat an enemy that has sound type attack, or a good hearing.


    Another example is if someone wanted to be a powerful mage. They can gain another magic with using Aura as its medium. And sometime, what they needed to kill is not monsters. It''s human.


    As for me¡­ I think what I really want is to defeat the Evil God Cult. That''s what I thought in my mind. But Victoria said that each person''s Aura, knows more about the person than the person himself. So even if I thought about getting stronger, my Aura might decide that it''s not what I want. That''s why finding a monster that I need to kill will be difficult.


    But when I found it, I will feel some kind of connection with the monster from my body. That''s what Victoria said. So it means I will have to go on a journey alone until I find that monster. Or at least I can have Blobby/Victoria with me until I find that monster. And when I found it, I need to drop her somewhere until I finished killing the monster.


    So I asked Victoria a question.


    "What about you? What did you fight? How did you find them? What ability did you gain?"


    "Back when I was still a human being, I was helped by my master. She watched me growing up from a baby so she knows about me. That''s why when she found monsters that might be the correct ones, she would cage them unless they are amon monster. That''s how every Aura user gain their new ability."


    "¡­That''s cheating."


    "For me, I fought a flying-type monster. It was the 7th monster my master caught. And then a pair of wing grown on my back."


    "So you wanted to fly? But isn''t Aura user can run on air once they got stronger? You did say that before."


    I remember back when Victoria talked to me for the first time. She said that after I got Aura, if I trained more, I can run on air. So I think that ability to fly is not that good for an Aura user.


    "You''re right. But once I tried to fly, I was actually much faster than those who has practiced Aura for decades. I became the strongest fighter in the sky."


    "But you still got killed."


    "¡­the enemy is a smart one. He took innocent people hostages and told us to let him go if we want the hostage to be safe. When we let down our guard, who can tell that he has allies that attacked us from behind. I guess that''s how he eradicated almost every Aura user back then."


    That''s one serious story. If her spection about the one who killed her being the Evil God is true, the cult might ended up doing something much worse than that. I thought I can get by and defeat those crazy bastards if I just practice my Aura even if it''s not perfect. Now that she has told me about it, I think that even after I gain new ability and able to run on air, I might still lose.


    So basically Aura is the shape of my own will. It knows about my desire that I never knew about. To realize what I truly desire, I have to fight many kind of monsters. Or maybe humans. I hope it won''t be a difficult one.


    I think it would be better if I could gain new ability as soon as possible. I should tell Ang and Ka first that I would leave for some time before I go since we''re a party.

 Chapter 14 - Abandoned Kid

    Victoria finished exining and her consciousness disappeared. She turned back into Blobby. Maybe there''s a secret of how she ended up turning into a ck Slime, but I won''t ask her yet. I can ask her once my summoning element got leveled up and she can stay as Victoria for much longer time.


    As for what she told me about fighting monster, I want to do it as soon as possible. I guess in two days, I will tell Ang and Ka that I will take a leave from school and hunting. As to where to go¡­ there''s a snowy mountain way south of Melk City. I guess I will try my luck over there.


    As for my desire, there are many things I wanted. I want to destroy the Evil God Cult, I want to survive and live a long life, and there are other things I desire. I don''t know what power I will obtain and what monster I need to defeat. Maybe I will ended up having wings like Victoria? That seems nice being able to fly.


    But for now I will return to Melk. I made a promise to Sophie that I will visit her if I survive, and Ruby also gave me a ce to live. I guess my n will be to return to the city, and tomorrow on Sunday I will look for necessities for my adventure. For weapon that I need to use in battle, I guess I will look for knives and daggers. Throwing knives might be a good idea. Since everyone only fight using magic, there are no weapon shop. There are only wands and essories shops. They sell magical wand and equipment. I guess I will check on that store first in case they have anything useful.


    I finished packing up. I only carrying a few luggage since mostly they are clothes. I don''t have much in this house after all. I will write a letter to the chief that I will be leaving this vige. In the letter I will tell him that anything left behind in the small house will be his property.


    Now everything is settled! Let''s go back to the city!


    Right now it''s around four in the afternoon. If I run to the city, I can get there before the gates locked. So I run lightly to the city.


    It was half past six when I reached the city. The gatekeeper right now is the one I used to see.


    Should I ask him about this morning? Maybe I shouldn''t in case I raised suspicion. After all, all the cult''s new recruits died today and the only one who is not from the cult who left the city this morning is me. That''s why I just nodded at the gatekeeper when I passed him.


    Being suspicious of everyone is not a healthy way of living.


    As soon as I entered the city, I didn''t go to the brothel. Instead I went to the Hunter Guild to ask for where the good store to purchase some equipment. The receptionist gently told me where the good stores are. Some of them are ces I never been to in my previous life. Since I was poor back then and couldn''t finish even a simple mission, I only went to the cheapest ones. When I went to the most expensive store, the clerk kicked me out because I have no money.


    And when I was about to leave, the receptionist called out to me.


    "Oh, wait! There''s one more thing I forgot to tell you. Actually after yourst mission few days ago, you and your party are eligible to move up into D rank Hunter. Please give me your guild card for processing the rank up."


    Already? That was faster than I thought. I gave her my card.


    "Shouldn''t I do this with my party?"


    "The other two has already ranked up yesterday when they were looking for you. I''ve heard about it. You ran away from a spar didn''t you?"


    As she finished her sentence, someone in the hallughed.


    "Hahaha! You escape from a spar? What a coward!"


    "Why don''t you try sparring with someone who''s targeting your crotch? Do you want to take the risk?"


    He quieted down after I said that. He didn''t try to provoke me further so I guess he''s actually pretty neat. Unlike most hunter who will undoubtedly pick a fight after I said it. But since the guild almost empty right now, there are nobody here who would pick a fight. Instead most of them should be home already.


    And then the receptionist give me my card back.


    "Here''s your card. As you can see the only difference is the rank. For the color, it stays as silver. Once you ranked up to C rank, your card will be a gold one until you be a B rank. Then for A rank it''s white, and ck for S rank."


    "Shouldn''t it be gold for the highest?"


    "We didn''t use any paint on at all for the cards. They are the color of the material. Silver and gold are easier to obtain but white ore and ck ore are harder to find. Since those are the only materials that can contain the magic necessary for a guild card. If they are moremon, the color will be reversed."


    "I see. Thank you and goodbye."


    Now one of the things I was curious about since my past life has been answered. I rarely go to the guild after all and it was embarrassing for the young me to ask about rank up when I was so weak.


    I left the guild and walk to the direction of the brothel. I stopped by a food stall on the way to fill my belly.


    While I was eating by a fountain in the center of the city, the hem of my shirt is being pulled by a kid. He was a child about five years old.


    "Are you lost?"


    Am I lost? Why is a kid asking me that?


    "No, I''m not lost. What about you?"


    "I''m not lost but my mother is."


    What?! Does he mean he''s the one who got lost?


    "You sure it''s not you who is lost?"


    "No. Mother told me to stay here and so I did. She hasn''ting back since yesterday though?"


    "What?! You mean you''ve been here since yesterday?"


    Is his mother abandoned him? There''s no way an adult would forget her own son. What a cruel mother to abandon her own son.


    "Yes!"


    "¡­do you want some bread?"


    "Hmm¡­ but I just ate yesterday. Mother always say to eat once every other day to be healthy. Even if I got very hungry I have to eat only one meal every two day."


    WHAT THE HELL! Its way much worse than I thought! Is that why he became so thin? Howe he can survive this long?


    "No, no. You see. For a kid like you, it''s much healthier if you eat as a lot. Your mother is wrong about that."


    I exined it gently to the boy. He was raised by such a horrible mother. What about his father then?


    "Hey, what about your father?"


    "You mean mother''s boyfriend? She keep changing her boyfriend over and over again so I don''t know which one to tell you."


    Damn, kid! You war too innocent! Howe you answered honestly like that? And his mother actually used his innocence to leave him? It''s getting worse and worse.


    "Anyway, what''s your name?"


    "My name?"


    "It is what others called you with."


    "Oh! Mother always call me piece of sh¡ª"


    "Okay! That''s enough! That''s not a name! You still haven''t been given a name yet."


    "It''s something other gave? Then I have never gotten it. I''ve never received anything other than food. And it''s only my mother and you who give me food."


    SHIT!


    SHIT, SHIT, SHIT!


    What should I do with him? Should I bring him to an orphanage? But there''s a chance that the orphanage in this city is connected to the cult since the governor himself is a member.


    Should I leave him here then? No I can''t do that.


    What should I do? What should I do? What should I do?


    ...


    "And that''s why I bring him with me."


    "I see."


    In front of me is Ruby. The one who gave me shelter.


    Right now I''m at the brothel. After I entered through the backdoor as she told me to, I ask one of the girl to call her. Then I told her about the boy I found. I asked the boy to follow me at the fountain. He''s actually following me without a slight of suspicion! It was lucky that I''m the one who find him.


    "Hey. What''s your name?" Ruby asked the boy.


    "Piece of sh¡ª"


    "He doesn''t have a name!"


    "I understand!"


    I closed the boy''s mouth before he finished speaking and as expected of Ruby. She understood immediately.


    "I can ask him to stay here. But since he''s way too young, I need everyone''s agreement first. I''ll go call everyone. Seems like today we will opente."


    And Ruby left me alone with the boy. If everyone agree, then he might be able to live here. But I understand the girls worry. No one want to raise a kid in a brothel.


    And so we waited for everyone to gather.

 Chapter 15 - The Boys Fate

    "ROY!"


    After Ruby called everyone over, the first one toe is Sophie. And as soon as she saw me, she shouted my name and hug me.


    ¡­nice.


    "Yeah, I''ve returned as promised."


    "d to see you alive. I heard from Ruby that you will live here from today?"


    "That seems to be the case."


    Then Sophie showered me with kisses. Forehead, cheek, and lips. She kissed me all over my face. Well, I dly ept it.


    "So you''re Roy. Sophie told us about you."


    "I hope someone would say something like what you said to Sophie."


    "That "You can dream of me and I will protect you in your dream" ¡­KYAA!!"


    "Can I dream of you as well?"


    Then the other girlse as well and¡­ what the hell!? How did I ended up being so popr? I only said some cheesy lines to Sophie and everyone want me to say something to them?


    My guess is that every girl here are hurt deeply and they want someone to support them. Being in this line of works, there''s no way that anyone have never been hurt. But to think that no one ever tried to heal them is saddening. The only people they can trust is only the girls here and Ruby.


    And then I entered the frame. They heard about what happenedst night from Sophie. Right now they may say that they wish for me to say those words to them as a joke, but I think deep down they still wish for a knight to save them. Since I may end up living here with them all, I need to make sure we have a good rtionship. And I will try my best to heal them from their wound in their hearts.


    "I''m d to see that everyone is getting along."


    I showed them a sincere smile.


    First thing first, I need to show everyone that I actually care about them. That''s why when I see everyone, I need to show them my concern first. Saying that I was d to see everyone is getting along, will make them think that I''m concerned about them. Ruby might have told them that I will live here from now on so they must be worried if I was such a selfish bastard.


    And just as I expected, some of them even has their cheeks turned red after hearing what I said. Was that too much?


    Then I heard some of them speaking in whispers.


    "He''s d we''re getting along? What a gentleman!"


    "He doesn''t seems as selfish as other men."


    "Maybe I can ask him to sleep with me just like Sophie did."


    I can hear you guys talking. My hearing has already improved because of Aura so I can hear their whispers at this range.


    "Girls, calm down! We need to discuss what we should do with the kid."


    Then Ruby came and interrupted the girls'' admiration on me. Can''t she pick a better time?


    But it is more important to figure out what to do with the boy. He seems confused about what''s going on.


    Then after a short discussion, everyone agreed to have him stay here, but the boy said another unexpected things.


    "I can''t stay here! There''s too many people here!"


    "What''s wrong with too many people?"


    I asked him. I have a hunch that he''s going to drop a bomb, but I need to know more about how his asshole of a mother raise him. That''s why I need to have him told me everything one by one.


    "Mother said that she has to hit me at least once a day if we''re living together. If there''s too many people, it will be too painful for me."


    FUCK!


    Again! This bitch just keep getting worse and worse! Even all the girls got shocked with what he said.


    Then I grabbed his shirt and lift it up.


    "Gasp!"


    "No way!"


    Yeah¡­ just as I suspected. He''s got too many scars on his body.


    What the hell is this?!


    He doesn''t have a name, his mother hit her every day, and he can only eat once every two days. This is not how a child so be raised! I also wondered how he could survive all this years. I don''t think that his mother is that bad when he was just a baby. That means he''s raised this wayter. He looked to be around five years old so maybe his mother started abused him about one year ago.


    And despite what he went through, his innocence is still there. Maybe that''s why his mother get upset of him. He''s too innocent and his mother is too annoyed to exin every little things to him, then it went worse and turned into abuse. His mother can''t take care of him anymore and abandoned him.


    "Well, you''ve had it wrong all your life. None of us here will hit you so you can stay here for as long as you want."


    Ruby then spoke to the boy to calm him down and persuade him that no one here wanted to hurt him.


    "Really?"


    "Not yet."


    I sternly interrupted him. There''s one more thing that he need before he can stay here.


    "You still haven''t got a name yet. We can''t let anyone without a name staying here. There''s no way we can call you ''Kid'' forever. That''s why let''s give him a name."


    I suggested everyone to give him a name. It will be a start for him to have a better life.


    After some discussion it was decided that his name will be Daniel.


    Daniel looked happy when we give him a name. But there''s one more thing to do before he can truly blend in.


    "Alright, Daniel. Now you have a name and a home. But there''s one more condition that you need to fulfil. Come here."


    Daniel approached me while everyone looked confused. They must have thought that everything is ready so they don''t know what I''m going to do.


    Then when Daniel got close to me, I pinched his cheek and pulled it.


    "Wha ah yu dowing?" (What are you doing?)


    "Is it hurt? Is it painful?"


    He didn''t answer but after a while he nodded.


    "Then cry. Ask for help. It is not fine to get hurt all the time. You are just a kid so it''s fine to cry. It''s your job to cry when it''s painful."


    I looked at his face with his cheek still being pulled by me. His eyes started to tear up.


    "Is it fine?"


    "It is."


    Then he hugged me and cry his heart out. Al the emotions he build up to this day, he let them out.


    "Huwaaa!!! It''s painful! It''s hurt! I''m hungry! I''m afraid! It''s so scary!"


    I released my hand from pinching him and hug him back. He need to know that someone care. Someone can help him. And I will be one who will help him and support him. Hopefully, I will be just one of many. Since the girls are all also moved to tears. Even Ruby who always looked so calm is wiping her tears.


    "I know I know. I''m sorry for pinching your cheek."


    He kept crying as I tried tofort him. All those pent up emotions, I will help him vent.


    Then I tried to give him advice. It was an advice from my heart. I said it wholeheartedly as it is something from all of my experiences. In my past life, and after I went back in time. This was a lesson I overheard from a man to his child, and I took it to heart. And in this brothel, where every girls has their own stories, they listened to it.


    "You know what? Living is hurt. Living is painful. That''s why you can cry. And you can ask for help. Not everything and everyone tries to hurt you. Someone mighte and help you. That''s why ask for help. Everyone is allowed to cry and ask for help. No matter if you''re a kid or an adult, boy or girl, rich or poor, sick or healthy, everyone can cry when it''s painful. Everyone can ask for help. Although not everyone will answer your ask for help, I will. I will try to help you in any way I can."


    Daniel paused and looked at me.


    "Will you help me?"


    "I will."


    Then he continued sobbing until he fell asleep.


    "I think you will make a good father."


    Me? A father? I never thought of it. I did yed with kids around me but to be told that I will make a good father is a first. I just said something that I heard in the past. And I feel like Sophie''s and the girls'' admiration on me is increased by a lot.


    "Anyway, where''s his room?"


    "For now he will stay with you in your room. At least for tonight. You''re going to leave again, right? That''s why you didn''t know what to do with him and try to get my permission for him to stay."


    "You''re gonna leave again?"


    It was Sophie who interrupted Ruby and me. She was anxious about me leaving again just after she heard about me living here.


    "Yeah. Probably I will leave for months. I''ll leave after I tell my party members so probably on Monday. And tomorrow I will be shopping for necessities."


    Since I don''t have any ''real'' weapons. I depend on Blobby too much that I never thought of having another weapons.


    "What a pity. At least you''reing back, right?"


    "Yes. This is my home after all."

 Chapter 16 - Magic Spear And A Mother

    That night, Daniel and I sleep in a room provided by Ruby in the brothel. It was just us two at first, then Sophie came in after she finished her shift. I let her rest beside me. And then another girl came in.


    Why?


    When she get closer I saw that on her cheek, there was a dried tears. She must also needed support and she asked for me to help her without saying a word. And so I let her sleep beside me. And since Sophie had been asleep for a while, the new girle between me and Sophie and used my arm as pillow.


    Then the numbers of girls increased. So I had Blobby turned into a veryrge bed that will fit all of us. Although some of them can''t sleep next to me, they happily stay in my room.


    I already said that if someone ask for my help, I will try my best to help them. Even though I said that to Daniel, I said it loudly on purpose to let other knows as well. That''s why when dawn came, another batch of girls enter my room. It was the time when there''s no longer any customer enter so Ruby had closed the shop and the girls decided to sleep in my room.


    And that''s when I can truly fell asleep. No one else entering the room so I slept soundly and woke up when Ruby entered to tell that breakfast is ready. She entered the room with a smile after seeing the situation where everyone decided to sleep there.


    And after breakfast, ording to what we promised to have me live here I helped with cleaning the store. Since the store only open at night, in the morning is the time for the girls to rest and for cleaning the store.


    "It''s nice to have a man here. You''re really helping us a lot just by being here."


    "Don''t praise me! I''m weak to praises, especially from a beautiful woman! Now I have no choice but to work harder!"


    A little joke between works is a great way to get closer. Although she''s also one of the girls who slept in my room, I can''t say that we''re close just because of that. I also want to help them outside their dreams.


    As for Daniel, he''s taking a bath with Ruby. After that, Ruby taught him several things while being apanied with the youngest girl in the shop, Hannah. She''s just ten years old. Although she worked here, she didn''t do night jobs since she''s too young. Just like me, she''s also a helper. And she''s also the second girl to enter my room after Sophie. She''s the one who pushed Sophie away from next to me and use my arm as pillow.


    Ruby really take care of her girls. Even those who no longer worked here. Hannah is a daughter of one of the girls who have left and now worked at a food stall. Hannah''s mother woulde visit Hannah every day before the shop opened.


    Even though she visit every day, Hannah must still feel lonely. Especially when she is the youngest girl here. That''s why after what I saidst night in front of everyone, she decided to go to my roomst night.


    As for her father, no one knows who her father is. It''s that kind of shop after all. Although Ruby had the girls drink some kind of potion to prevent pregnancy, ident could happen.


    Then after lunch I would leave the store to buy some equipment for my journey. Daniel also wanted toe with me. And when I was about to leave, Ruby came over and told me that Hannah want to go as well. And Ruby asked me to visit Hannah''s mother''s stall after we''re done. She says it''s a good idea to let Hannah''s mother know that there''s a man living in the brothel now.


    And we three left together. Hannah is holding Daniel''s hand. She must be happy that she has a little brother and now she''s no longer the youngest one among the group. And she keeps ncing at me from time to time. Does it means she thinks of me as her older brother?


    Soon we arrived at the equipment store. Yesterday when I asked the guild receptionist, she told me that this one is affordable among D rank Hunter and this store also has a lot of collection. So we went inside the store.


    The shopkeeper wee us with a business smile on his face, but as soon as I entered the store, I was fascinated with something inside.


    "How much for that spear?"


    Yes. It was a spear. In the age where there are no more Aura user, a cold weapon is something rare to find. But as soon as I entered this shop, I saw one.


    Because it was shown inside the store, it must be some kind of magic weapon. But because it''s a spear, no one bother to buy it. I was lucky to find a weapon already.


    "You wanted that spear? You have a strange taste. That spear has magic imbued in it but it''s not useful for battle. Its only use is to repair itself even after it breaks if you pour your magic in it. Do you still want to buy it?"


    "Depend on the price."


    Repair itself even after it breaks? That means I can use it forever! That must be one of the weapons made for Aura user in the past that Victoria once told me about.


    "This thing has been long since it was here and no one ever been shown an interest in it. I''ll give you a cheap price for it. It will be¡­"


    "I''ll take it!"


    The shopkeeper told me the price. Since it was affordable, I bought it.


    I showed him my guild card and the payment was done via transfer from my card to his. Having a guild card is convenient. We just need to hold each other''s cards together and start thinking of the amount for the payment then we pour magic on the cards. The money then transferred safely.


    After I received the spear, the first thing I did is broke it in half. Then I pour my magic on it and the spear is restored!


    "Awesome! Even the de which has a little rust on it restored as well!"


    The shopkeeper shocked seeing me break my spear in half. And because of that, he tried to make me leave as soon as possible. He might be afraid that I will broke everything. What a rude fellow!


    The next stop is a hardware shop. I still have some money left to buy several knives for throwing weapons. As for dismantling monsters, I can just use the de on the spear for it. I can repair it easily after all.


    There are many shops selling knives so I just picked the cheapest one. I can sharpen it with my Aura after all so there''s no need to buy an expensive ones. And obviously this time I didn''t break the knives. That shopkeeper in the previous store is such a rude guy to think that I will break everything.


    "Well, now let''s go meet Hannah''s mother. Is she still working?"


    "She should be. It''s this way! Follow me!"


    Hannah excitedly pulling Daniel''s hand while leading us to where her mother works.


    Soon I see a woman selling hotdog in her stall. She looks to be around forty. She must be Hannah''s mother.


    As soon as Hannah saw her, Hannah started running toward her mother.


    "Mommy!"


    "Hannah! How''ve you been?"


    "Good!"


    "You two must be Roy and Daniel. Just now Ruby told me that you''re going here. Thank you for taking care of my daughter."


    "No, no. We only just met yesterday so I haven''t take care of her yet."


    She told me that Ruby was here just now and thanking me for something I haven''t done yet. What a good mother. I wonder why she doesn''t choose to stay with Hannah.


    "I heard from Ruby that Hannah was lonely and she sneaked into your room to sleep together so she won''t feel lonely. That was enough for me to show my gratitude. Please have some hotdogs. I will give you for free."


    "Thanks. Can I have five of them for me alone? Daniel just need one."


    "Oh, right. Ruby told me that you won''t refuse free stuffs. Fine, it was just six, right?"


    The hotdogs was delicious. As for Hannah, she already prepared one specially made for her. Daniel also excitedly eating hotdog for the first time. But it was too much for his small belly so I finished his leftover.


    While we were eating, we were chatting while waiting for customers toe. Hannah''s mother''s name is Penny and we''re talking about yesterday. About how Hannah ended up sneaking into my room. Then I asked her why she''s leaving Hannah at the brothel.


    "Penny, why aren''t you living together with Hannah?"


    "¡­because of my pregnancy, I can''t work at the brothel. Thankfully Ruby gave me this job. At first I was doing fine even after Hannah grows a bit. We even rent a small ce. Then as we expend more money because of her growing up, I took more shifts. Due to the stress, I would vent at her. That''s whyst year I thought it would be good if Ruby can take care of her. She agree to have Hannah as the helper. Although I''m doing fine now, I''m still afraid if I ended up hurting her. That''s why we live separately. At least until I be stronger."


    Simr. She''s almost simr to Daniel''s mother. But thankfully, she has Ruby helped her. If not, Hannah''s fate would be simr to Daniel. I guess that''s why Ruby sent me here.


    Ruby must have realized that I might looking for Daniel''s mother and punish her for what he did to Daniel. That''s why she sent me here to show that there might be a chance that it was actually Daniel''s mother who tried to protect Daniel from herself. She doesn''t have anyone to rely so she left Daniel on the street. And run away.


    Although I still have hatred for her, at least I won''t do anything to her until I found out her true motives in abandoning Daniel. If she''s simr to Penny, I will only give her some advice. But if it''s the worst case scenario¡­ there''s many thing I can think of.


    Seeing from Daniel''s body which is full of scars, I still can''t think of her being good at all. At least from now on, Daniel won''t suffer as much as before.

 Chapter 17 - Departing

    That night, there were less girls sleeping in my room.


    Does¡­ does it means my charm is weakening?


    Turns out that the girls who weren''t there was apanying their guests who paid for a service until morning. That''s why they didn''te by.


    Then the next morning after breakfast, I left to school. Not for studying. Well, it''s not like I did go to school for studying. I always went there to sleep on my desk since I would exercise until I was dead tired every morning so I could gain my Aura.


    Anyway, I went there to meet my party members, Ka and Ang, and tell them that I will be leaving. Then I would ask the teacher for exam schedule and school event since I wouldn''t want to miss it if want to graduate so I can go to medical school. The requirement to attend was to at least graduate introductory school.


    ording to my previous life, there won''t be any important school event at least for months. But since I did some different things in this life, there might be a chance that it will change.


    At school, I asked one teacher about it, and there really won''t be anything important at least for a few months so he gave me permission to leave until then. I also hope that I will find the monster I need to defeat as soon as possible. At least I want to finish it in one month.


    Then I walked to the ssroom. Somehow it feels a little noisy in the ss. What happened while I was gone?


    As soon as I entered the ssroom I see Ang being surrounded by our ssmates, and even those form different sses. For Ka, it was natural for here to be here since she''s close with Ang, but for the others?


    Ka who noticed I entered the ssroom approached me. She seemed worried.


    "Roy! Where did you go back then? Ang and I were looking for you everywhere. We were really worried that you might be angry at Ang for attacking your¡­ that spot."


    That spot? Oh right! She did aimed at that ce! I forgot about that!


    "I have something important to do that day. What happened here?"


    Then I asked Ka about the disturbance in ssroom where everyone is surrounding Ang.


    "Well, Ang''s evaluation during the spar was amazing. Then everyone wanted to get to know her better. Most of them are girls though. The boys were too afraid because of what happened to you. Although there were some who''s extremely persistent."


    "Look! Herees the coward! Haha!"


    Someone interrupted us. Seems like it was the persistent guy. Now he''s looking for attention by making fun of me?


    "Look at the man who ran away with his tail between his legs because of a small fire! It was just a sparring and he ran away! What a coward!"


    Is he an idiot? There''s no way you could gain anyone''s affection if you do it like this. You''re gonna end upbelled as bully by the others.


    Well, I don''t care how he''s being viewed by the others. In front of everyone, I took out a matchstick and lit it. As the me sparked, I bring it closer to the guy''s crotch.


    "What are you doing?!" he said while pping my hand away.


    "OOOH!! You''re also afraid of fire on your crotch! You''re also a coward like me! We''re coward brothers!"


    Oh, look at his face! He''s expression keep changing from shock, to anger, and then embarrassment. What a funny faces he makes.


    "Dude, you need to have a proper definition of being a coward. Being afraid of fire on your crotch is calledmon sense. Next time you''re trying to gain attention, don''t do it like this. Or at least you need to have a proper definition of what being a coward mean. Don''t mistake it withmon sense like you did just now, okay?"


    Ignoring everyone''sughter at myment, I walked to Ang who''s also smiling.


    "Come with me. I have something to tell to you and Ka."


    She looks surprised, but she still followed me outside the ssroom.


    Now the three of us were at the hallway while other people would look at us curiously. None of them know that we are a party.


    "What do you want to tell us?"


    It was Ang who asked first. She didn''t even apologize for what she did during the spar. Sigh¡­ I''ll just let it go this one time.


    "I''m leaving. Probably for a few months. I''d like if it''s only for a day, but the chance is almost zero for it to happen."


    "What''s so important that you need to leave?"


    "I need to find a monster. I don''t know what kind of monster is it, nor do I know where I could find it. That''s why I''m leaving."


    "Was it necessary to go that far just to kill one monster?"


    "Yes. So if you want to do hunter mission, you can go on your own. Or just the two of you. Or maybe ask someone to join your party."


    "What about school? I thought you''re nning to go to higher education?"


    "That''s my n. I already asked the teacher when the important even is so I will go back at that time even if I didn''t find what I''m looking for."


    Then the two discussed something in whisper. Though I can hear them clearly, I let them be until they sort out what they want to ask. It''s obviously them trying to follow me.


    "Can we go with you?"


    "If you don''t mind staying with me. It will be a long journey so we need to camp outside. How about it?"


    "¡­let us discuss it for a while. When will you leave?"


    "Right now if I''m alone. If you''reing, then it will be tomorrow after you''ve prepared yourselves. I want to finish this as fast as possible."


    Then the two discussed what their next actions would be. I guess it was Ka who''s being worried about staying with me. Especially considering how we encounter her at that time. She must be wary of all men and I was included even if I''m the man who''s closest to her.


    "We''ll go with you. You''re going to get stronger, right? We won''t let you get stronger alone. We also want to be strong!"


    "That''s right! You''ve taught us a lot, but that''s not everything, right? You only taught us magic and about the jobs as hunters. Since we met you, we grow much stronger than others the same age. We''re a party, remember?"


    "Well, I just need your answer to be yes or no. But okay. I ept your exnations."


    I guess it''s settled. Then let''s decide where and when we will leave. But before that, Ang said something to me.


    "By the way, about the sparring. I''m sincerely apologize for attacking you like that. I''m truly sorry."


    "It''s fine as long as you won''t do it to me again. If you''re targeting someone else, please do so. Aiming at men''s crotch with a fireball is a much more effective way to intimidate your enemies than using your strongest magic just to show off. All men are weak down there. Remember that when you''re up against men next time."


    That''s another lesson I taught them. Angughed a bit after I epted her apologize. While Ka took out a notebook out of nowhere and write it down. Scary¡­


    Ka would write down what I said, especially when it''s about anti-person battle against men. How to escape, when to escape, how to intimidate your enemies, their weak points, and what I said just now. Whatever it is inside that notebook, it must be terrifying, although all of that is learned from me, it''s still scary. She''s one of the people that I would never want to be enemy with.


    "By the way since its still morning, we can go back home now and gather after lunch. We can leave today."


    The two already discussed when to leave, huh?


    After giving them detail of what necessary to bring on a journey, I let them know where to meet.


    "Then let''s meet at Red Tail. That''s where I live in since two days ago."


    "Red Tail? I''ve never heard an inn named red tail before."


    "It''s not an inn. It''s a brothel¡­ why are you kicking my shin."


    "Because you just asked two young girl to meet you at a brothel! Why are you living there?"


    "The owner is kind enough to lend me a room for free. Don''t worry. Since its still morning, there''s no customer there."


    "You! Sigh¡­ fine. We''ll meet you there after we finished preparing."


    We left the school without taking any lesson. As we left the school, we went our separate ways. Ang and Ka went back home and I went to the brothel.


    There''s nothing much happening. We met at the brothel and leave after a while. Both girls are just surprised to received hospitality from a brothel. In fact Sophie ended up getting along really well with the two. It took a while until they finished chatting.


    "Well, then. Since we''re ready, let''s go!"


    Since they''re finished chatting, and I''ve already said goodbye to Daniel and the others, we left. I let Ruby take care of Daniel''s need. I hope when I return, he will be a normal kid.

 Chapter 18 - First Day Of Travel

    We left the city and walked to the north. To Mellian City over there. That city is close to mountain and ruins where many strong monsters resides. I thought that ce would be ideal to find the monster I needed to defeat. And since it''s close to the city, I can let Ang and Ka rest there and wait for me at the city when I discover the monster so I can fight it alone.


    "And why were we on foot? Why aren''t we going with carriage?"


    "In case I find the monster I need to fight with."


    As I pondering about what to do? Ites to mind that it will be easy to introduce Victoria to them. And she might also have ancient knowledge of magic suited for the girls.


    I looked around to find that there''s only us three in the area, so I summoned the ck Slime.


    "Victoria will tell you about it."


    "Victoria? Who is she? Isn''t she Blobby?"


    "Victoria is Blobby''s other personalities. She used to be human."


    As I answered Ang''s question, the ck Slime in my hand spoke.


    "Are you sure it''s fine to tell them about Aura and me?"


    "It''s fine. I trust them."


    And even if they spread my secret, no one would believe them. For people in this world, Aura is like a myth or legend of the past. It''s only a story in a children books.


    Meanwhile, the girls looked at Victoria with surprise and shock on their faces.


    "Blobby just spoke! I mean Victoria!"


    "So you''re Victoria. Nice to meet you."


    "Yeah. Nice to finally able to talk with you. I already know about you as much as Roy does, so we no longer need any introduction. And now my personality able to surface for about one hour, I''ll entertain you with a story of the type of strength Roy pursuit. If you have any question, you can save it forter, okay?"


    Then the ck slime I was holding jumped to Ang''s hand. And I also sensed some monsters approaching so I readied my spear.


    To make it easy to carry, I split the spear into half with the same length and carried them on my waist. I used my belt to hold them on my waist. Now since the monsters appeared, I took the spear and pour my magic on it to recover the spear back into one. Then I made a fighting stance as I hold the spear.


    "There''s monsters approaching. I''ll take care of them all. The three of you should try to get along in this one hour, okay? If you still have other questions, I''ll answer them after Victoria''s gone."


    Thus I went on my own to fight while protecting the three of them. Meanwhile Victoria told them how I got this strong.


    The first monster that appeared is a wolf. Since it''s also a good practice before I found the right monster, I decided to only use my Aura and spearmanship.


    Let''s start with a thrust attack!


    As I ran forward and tried to pierce the wolf, the wolf dodged to the side easily. A weak monster able to dodge my attack? Well, considering that I''mcking in the weapon mastery of spear, it''s normal. And my choice of attack is thrust which is easy to dodge. Then I should thrust faster.


    My first living target practice while using a spear able to doge most of my attacks. It''s annoying! I know that thrusting attack is easy to dodge than shing attack, but this wolf just dodged all my attack like that? I''m annoyed with my own weakness. Then I tried to add more physical strength rather than just weapon mastery, and my speed went up a level. The wolf went down in one thrust soon after I pierced its belly.


    "Fuck! I''m too weak! With this level, I can only always rely on Blobby or Victoria! If my target is too strong, there''s no chance for me to defeat it!"


    After venting my anger, I practiced swinging the spear for a bit before the next monster appear. Ang and Ka were still listening closely to Victoria while their eyes locked at me.


    "I thought he could defeat a wolf in no time. How did he get weaker?"


    It was Ka who seem confused seeing me grow weaker. Then Victoria answered her.


    "He''s not getting weaker. He just realized his own weakness. That''s why he is angry at himself. Usually, he would attack without any technique at all. He would rely on his exceptional strength, and the unpredictability of his ever changing weapon which is me. Now he has to defeat a monster alone without relying on someone else''s help and without magic. He can''t even use me so his only weapon is that spear and the several knives hidden under his jacket. He''s smart enough to know by now that if he could master more weapon, he will undoubtedly got much stronger. And the first weapon he needed to master is a spear."


    I can barely hear Victoria said that in between my spear practice and soon, I will see another monster appear. It was another wolf.


    I put my stance again but this time I lowered my spear so that the tip is facing the wolf''s vision. This way, if I thrust my spear, as long as I did it properly in a straight line, the enemy will misjudge the distance. And sure enough, the wolf died in one shot this time.


    The sensation of attacking with technique rather than attacking wildly like I did before is vastly different. This is Just like Victoria said. If I could master at least one weapon, I will be much stronger than if I can use many kinds of weapon. The biggest different is whether I could master a weapon, or just use a weapon. Anyone can use a weapon, but not many can master it.


    Then what if I could master a lot type of weapons? I smiled slightly with that thought. But before that happen, I need to at least earn spearmanship properly first. This is the weapon I choose to defeat whatever monster I have to face. Even if I found this spear by chance, this is still something I have chosen.


    After I defeat the second wolf, seems like other monster that''s approaching us noticed it. They were probably weaker than wolves so they choose to retreat.


    "Alright, let''s move forward! We need at least 2 days if we move at this pace to arrive at Mellian City. The sun is still bright so let''s move forward and look for a good ce to rest before the sun set."


    I lead the way and the two girls and a slime following me behind.


    One hour quickly pass by and Victoria can''t resurface anymore. It''s just Blobby jiggling right now without any intellect at all. Only following my order. Meanwhile, the two girls who heard about Victoria and Aura for the first time, haven''t asked any question at all. They must have a lot to ask me but seems like they choose to do itter.


    "The two of you have no question to me?"


    "A lot! But we can ask youter. You need to improve your weapon mastery first, right? Then we will just ask you during dinner after we set up our camp."


    "Well, thanks for your consideration. If you want to fight then just tell me."


    "No need. We have learn how to increase our magic faster without any resources from Victoria. We''re doing it at the moment. I''m practicing by lighting mes on each tips of my fingers."


    Ang showed me that there are fire on the tip of her index finger and middle finger of her right hand.


    "I can only light two at once. Victoria said that an average beginner level mage can do this. If I can just lit another me on my finger, I can defeat every mage under intermediate level."


    "As for me, I''m practicing healing magic. I keep using it lightly so only the spot I aim will be healed. I''m using it on my legs so I will tire less during the walk."


    This time, Ka spoke. So that''s why I sense something from her feet. That was healing magic that she keeps using.


    "Won''t you be tired of exhausting your magic?"


    "Maybe. But Victoria said it will be fine since you will defeat any monsters we see. Since that''s the case, I''m practicing right now."


    "Well, as long as you two still have some strength for the night watch, its fine. We will walk for a bit before we found a good spot for camping. Let''s go."


    We continued our journey. There''s no more words spoken among us. Each of us is too busy with our own matter. Ang and Ka is concentrating on their magic practice, while I killed monsters to improve my spear mastery.


    Soon enough we found a good spot to rest and we set up our camp there. Because we''re practicing as we walked, our pace slowed down. Seems like we will reach the city in three or four days instead of two days. But it''s fine as long as we''re growing stronger.

 Chapter 19 - Their First Real Battle

    Finally, we found a good spot for camping before the sun goes down. But at the moment, there are two monsters upying the ce. They''re a bull-like monsters. Their size is bigger than boars. And because of its friendly nature, they are not considered for subjugation mission by the guild. That''s only if you don''t provoke them.


    Once they were provoked, they will charge at you. Their power is much stronger than boars. Usually, a party of C rank hunters are needed to subjugate them once they are angry. So it might be a good opportunity for the girls to have fighting experience against stronger monster.


    "Ang! Ka! It''s your turn now! Both of you will take the one on the right, while the other will be mine! It''s a good chance to have experience against stronger monster so I will not give you any advice nor help at all. I will only help you if you''re in danger of dying. As long as you''re not dying, even if you''re injured badly, I won''t help."


    "Wait! We don''t need to fight them don''t we? They''re famous for being a friendly monsters. We can set up our tent and they will not bother with us at all."


    "Ka is right. We don''t need to fight them at all!"


    I can guess what they''re thinking. When I said I won''t help them, they get scared. Usually, when we''re doing quest from the guild to subjugate monsters, they can freely fight because they know that I will help. As a result, they have never once got hurt at all. Each time the monsters about to attack them, I would distract them.


    In the end, I''m the one who got hurt the most while the girls are unscathed. All those healing magic Ka used, are pretty much only ever be used on me. She never used healing magic on neither Ang nor herself. At least until Victoria told her how to improve her magic. Now she would use healing magic on herself during our journey.


    "You have a lot to ask me, right? I will answer your questions if you can defeat one of them."


    Then I pick up a stone and throw it at one of the bull.


    "Now they''re angry. We have no choice but to defeat them. I will lure one of them away and you''ll fight the other one. Good luck!"


    I left them behind as I lured one of the bulls. They haven''t got a chance toin when the bulls charged to them.


    I also ran toward the bulls. The bulls run in line with one of them is at the front and the other is behind it. I will aim at the one behind.


    As our distance got closer, I jumped over their heads. I ignored the one in front and scratch the back of the one behind with my spear. Now the one in front can''t suddenly change direction so it directed its attack to the two humans that it see. While the one behind is stopped on its track and aimed its anger toward me.


    I spread my presence detectionbined with air magic to the girls so I can feel when they''re in danger while I fought this bull. Seems like for today''s dinner it will be beef. But for that, I need to finish this one first.


    Using spear alone to defeat the bull is difficult. Even when I scratched the back of the bull, it barely left any wound. Although I haven''t used my Aura yet, it''s still too weak. Then my target right now is to defeat the bull without Aura. Only by relying my physical strength and spearmanship. That''s the challenge.


    I have practiced while fighting monsters on the way so I already know that spear''s greatest strength is in its power to pierce. Its reach is also a spear''s advantage. Although spear can be used for swinging and shing, its true power is in its thrust attack. That''s what I learned as I used the spear in my hand.


    Its advantage is obvious? Of course it is. But now I have experience it myself, my body will remember what type of attack is best when I used a spear. If I don''t experiment it, I might ended up always using a thrust attack like an idiot. Combination between thrusting and shing is important especially when fighting against smart opponent. Even more, if I used Blobby. I can use more variant of attack while Blobby keep transforming.


    With that in my mind, I put up my stance and prepared to pierce the bull right between its eyes. And this time, I will try to add spin in my thrust. Then my spear would pierce the bull deeper than if I didn''t add a spin. Well, that''s the theory anyway. I haven''t tried it yet so this is my first time adding a spin.


    I thrust my spear as strong as I can with adding a spin by turning my wrist. The result is not bad. I defeated the bull in one shot. But the trajectory of my attack is shifted a bit.


    "So if I add a spin it will change trajectory. I need to practice this move until I can hit my target more urately."


    I said that to myself as the ce I pierced the bull is a little above the bull''s right eye. It is way off than the target I intended. Although I still defeated the bull I still feel bitter when I thought that I still have a lot to learn.


    Victoria said that it wasmon for mage to learn martial arts as well even though they can''t awaken their Aura. I think my current strength is still weaker than regr mage in the past. Although I don''t have anyone topare other than what Victoria taught me.


    Then I looked at the other battle. If I must say, they look like I see two girls fighting for the first time ever. Did I spoil them too much?


    "Fireball!"


    "Blinding Light!"


    Ang started attacking the bull with a fireball. That''s pretty much normal. But the girls'' teamwork is terrible. Ka used Blinding Light and ended up blinding Ang as well. They should have nned it beforehand when to use blinding magic. Or at least they should decide on a sign when to use blinding magic. That''s a magic that will hurt your allies more than your enemy if you timed it wrongly after all.


    Usually, I just need to yell for when they need to attack and what type of magic they need to use. This time I just let them fight on their own and the result is as I expected.


    Oh? The two of them ended up fighting. I should have taught them about leadership skill together with their magic. Then they would have known their own weakness and know their roles. I want them to be able to think for themselves instead of following me around forever.


    Individually, I think that each of them can handle a bull. Although it will take some time to defeat the bull, they can do it alone. But now they have to move as a team, without anyone taking charge, they fight like amateurs who have just awakened their magic. Not like how a D rank hunter should fight.


    Hmm? Now the bull has its vision cleared, it started to charge on them again. It hit Ka on her side. Her ribs should be broken. But she choose to stand up? Pretty strong ain''t she?


    Ang looked a bit panicked when the bull attacked Ka but when she saw Ka stood up, she began to calm down.


    Now they have calmed down, it was Ang again who attacked first with fireball. She also run to another direction to lure it from the injured Ka while Ka is healing herself.


    After the bull was lured away, Ang return in a short while and discussed something with Ka. They both nodded and soon the bull returns.


    Now what will they do?


    Hmm? They just waited for the bull to charge at them?


    When the bull is at certain distance, both Ang and Ka put their hands down on the ground.


    A pitfall appeared in front of the charging bull! Their n is to trap the bull! Then the two attacked the trapped bull with barrage of magic attacks.


    That''s not how I want the future Elemental Master to fight! That''s more like if the Elemental Master go corrupted by me. Wait! That''s what happened!


    But a win is a win so I will congratte them.


    "Congrattions both of you! It''s your real first battle! Now you have experience the feel of danger, you will undoubtedly be stronger and stronger!"


    "Yeah, but I broke my ribs. It hurts!"


    "Go heal yourself. You''re the healer here! And you two can take a rest for a while. I''ll prepare the tent. You can ask me any question after you rest. I''ll wake you up when dinner is ready."


    The two of them dropped to the ground as if they are fainting. I let them take their nap while I prepare the camp.


    After they woke up, they will ask me questions. Should I tell them everything? Maybe I will.

 Chapter 20 - Please, Get Stronger

    "Wake up! Dinner is ready!"


    I woke the girls from their slumber as I finished setting up the camp and cooked dinner. It''s a steak. From the meat of the bulls we defeated. I also made some jerky for our rations during the journey. In case we didn''t found any edible monster''s meat.


    "It''s dark already? Did we sleep that long?"


    "Yes, Ang. Although you ended up using simple trick to defeat the bull, you still spent too much energy. There''s hope for improvement, but that''s good enough. The fact that you used pitfall means I''m your biggest influence. I''m grateful for that."


    "We still have a lot to learn. Not just from you and Victoria. We need to learn from everything we see and everyone we meet. That''s what Victoria thought about you. She said that you''re unlike other Aura user. You choose to absorb everything and use it for yourself. When I looked at Ka after the bull attacked her, I calmed down after seeing her determination on her eyes. Then I thought about what would Roy do if he has my power? The answer I reached on my own is a pitfall."


    "So you''re pretending to be me but still with your power? That''s indeed what I would do. But to be stronger, you should think for yourself instead of pretending to be me."


    Then I woke Ka who''s still sleeping.


    "Ka. Wake up."


    "Hmm? Ouch!"


    "Slowly, slowly. You''re still hurt from the attack. Your ribs should be cracked. Use healing magic few more times so it will heal. Then you can have dinner."


    "What''s for dinner?"


    "Steak."


    "Good. I''m starving."


    We ate our meals around the fire to keep us warm. And we chatted about the girls'' battle against the bull. I praised them for the result, but the process¡­ they still have a lot to improve.


    All this time, they can peacefully fight from distance because I''m always y the part of a vanguard. I attract the monsters to me and the girls would attack them from afar. That''s how we always act as a party. But when I''m out of the equation, it was horrible. If I didn''t see Ka raised an earth wall, I would act immediately. Luckily she''s able to raise the wall above her chest. It only resulted in her ribs being broken.


    "¡­now, you have questions, right? Before you ask your questions, I''ll tell you something about me you won''t expect."


    The atmosphere changed as I made a serious expression. After showing Victoria to them¡­ no. Even before that when we were on a mission, I already know that they can be trusted. That''s why I''ll tell them my secret. Although I''m sure one day this secret will be out. Well, the obvious reason is that one day I will tell this secret myself to influential people who is not a part of the cult so we can be prepared to fight them.


    "I''m actually a regressor."


    "Regressor?"


    "That''s what Victoria called me. I time travelled back to the past from the future. Actually, I''m travelled to back on the magic awakening ceremony."


    "What?!"


    I stayed quiet so they can process their thought. It is indeed unbelievable. If someone told me that they are a regressor, I would not believe them as well.


    Once they have sort out their thought, I continued.


    "Soon¡­ no. Probably even at this moment, the enemy of humanity is growing. That''s the reason why I desire to be strong. To destroy every single one members of that evil group."


    "¡­ That''s some unbelievable story. But is there any proof to what you said?"


    "Here, around this part of your chest. You have a mole around here."


    I pointed at my own chest where Ang''s mole should be located. I knew about it. In fact, most people know about it. Especially men.


    "Wha!? Pervert! Did you peek at me in the future?!"


    "No. You were famous because of your four elements. And all of them should be around Advanced level. And even at the time, you were strong enough to defeat an Expert level mage. Why I knew about your mole¡­ is because the dress you always wore on the battlefield. You always wear a revealing dress that shows your cleavage. Obviously, most men would look at that part."


    "Why would I wear something like that?!"


    "I don''t know. Some says that your dress is a magic armor. But the truth is not something I know. After all we were not close at all. In fact we were never talked once in that timeline."


    "I would never wear something that embarrassing in this timeline!"


    ""Shame.""


    "What?! Even you, Ka?"


    Ka and I high-fived. We do feel that it''s a shame that she don''t want to wear such outfit. Maybe if there''s a magic dress like that again in the future, she would wear them.


    "Anyway, you said something more important than Ang''s cleavage before."


    "But I want her cleavage to be the most important point¡­ UWAA!!! Don''t burn my hair!"


    Ang can''t take a joke at all. She would use fireball every time she''s angry. Or maybe she could sense that I''m not joking at all? I should be more careful with what I said then.


    Ka, ignoring my pain, choose to continue asking questions.


    "Enemy of humanity and the battlefield Ang is fighting. Tell us about them."


    Then I exined to them thoroughly about the group and how evil they are. I choose to not tell them the name Evil God Cult. It was because it is not their real name. It is a name the kingdom gave to the group after their activities grow muchrger. As of now, I don''t have any idea of what they are called.


    "¡­ That secret organization is nning to conquer the world with evil. That''s the gist of it."


    "¡­fuck. That''s too big for us right now."


    "Yes. That''s why I''m going on a journey to awaken my special ability from Aura. As for you two, you need to grow stronger. In fact everyone should grow stronger. But I can''t tell anyone yet. I can''t trust those in high position."


    "But you should know at least some of them, right? Why don''t you assassinate them?"


    "If I do, the secret organization will target me. I''m still far too weak and their power and connection is still unknown even in the future. I only know some event that affect me."


    "Then you can tell us the tragedy that will ur, can''t you?"


    "I will tell you when it''s about to happen. You just need to get stronger."


    "You can''t do that. At least tell us one that will happen soon."


    "What will, if I tell you, you will only train for that moment. The only thing I can tell you is that the tragedy will never stop until the organization is destroyed thoroughly. Even if we stop one, they will continue to act. That''s why I ask you to get stronger. Even with all the knowledge I know, it''s impossible to defeat them on my own. I''m fortunate enough to find two reliable friends I can trust and I don''t want to lose you guys. Even more so that what I did in this timeline, has probably changed the future. The events that will happen in the future is totally unknown after I killed some members few days ago. It might be worse than it should be so please get stronger."


    I bowed down and begging them shamelessly. This is my true feeling. I don''t want to lose the first friends I made in this timeline. And also the things that the cult will do in the future will get worse and worse. At least I can wish for their safety if they got stronger.


    "It''s okay. You don''t need to bow down. We understand."


    "Yeah. Basically they''re evil. And we''re aiming to destroy them, right?"


    "Not ''we''. Just me alone. Your goal in the future should be decided by you yourselves. At least if you want to destroy that evil group, it was from the bottom of your heart. Not because of an unbelievable story by a shameless man."


    "Okay, okay. We got it. You want to say that our goal should be our own survival, right? But we refuse. We are a party and also friends. If you wish to destroy the evil, we also wish for the same. We trust you and you also trusted us enough to tell us about your secret. We won''t let you down and grow stronger. Even stronger than the me in your previous life."


    "Yes. You are the leader of this party. You decided where to go and we will walk with you."


    This is amazing. These two now has shown their determination to follow me. Although the future is unknown, and maybe we will be split apart, I''m sure that they will still think of the cult as their enemy.


    And there''s another more important thing from what Ang said.


    "You said that you wish the same thing as me, right? Then I wish for you to wear a sexy dress."


    "That''s right! I also wish for the same thing."


    "GO TO HELL!"

 Chapter 21 - Bandit Encounter

    The next day, we continued our journey.


    Ka has healed enough and got enough rest, so we left after breakfast.


    It''s unfortunate that Ang refused to wear revealing clothes, but we continued regardless. This is more important than being a pervert after all.


    I continued practicing my spearmanship against the monsters we met but this time, the two girls also fought on their own volition. I don''t need to tell them to fight or not, but they have prepared their magic when they saw several monsters ahead.


    If it''s just one, they would leave it to me and practicing magic while waiting for me defeating the monster. But when there are more than one, they will fight.


    Our battle prowess growing rapidly. Now the girls have the strength to defeat an experienced Intermediate mage on their own while still being in Beginner level. But they still weren''t satisfied with that. Their goal is to be much stronger than that. Even stronger than the Elemental Master Ang in my previous timeline.


    We fought from morning until the sun down and we had dinner while chatting. And Victoria would appear when we had our dinner and have a girl''s talk.


    I''m being left out¡­


    On the third day of our journey, I finally found them. The perfect enemies for the girls. Bandits.


    All this time, they only fought against monsters. And they did it decently. But they have never once fought against another human being. This will be a good experience if they want to fight against the cult.


    "Girls! Let''s continue. There''s a group of bandits trying to surround us but let''s pretend we don''t know about their existence. This time let''s practice fighting in a disadvantaged position where we are being surrounded and also fighting against another human being. Since they are bandits, you can kill them."


    "Killing human being? Somehow I feel reluctant to do that even though I said that I will support you against that evil group."


    "You''re free to choose not to kill, but you should have experienced a little about what they will do to beautiful girls, Ka. Remember how we first met?"


    "Ah, that. They deserve to die."


    She changed her mind easily. I mean of course if I remind her about how men tried to assault her, she won''t give the bandits any mercy.


    Back when we were started as a party, Ka was still wary of me. She would always be close to Ang. But now we gradually got closer and I think she already trust me. I mean she woulde all this way mean she trust me, right? She had already let down her guard around me and would asionally make a joke with me to tease Ang.


    "Stay alert. They will soon surround us. I don''t mind if you kill the bandits or not, but I will kill those who attacked me. The sight of dead body around you won''t be pretty."


    The bandits got closer. Their number is about twenty. About five of them are Intermediate mage, and two of them are Advanced mage. The Intermediate level mages are good for the girls to gain experience, but the two advanced mage are too troublesome. And maybe there are still some bandits who hid their level really well. I hope that is not the case.


    "Alright. This is the n. I will leave you two here alone to fight them while I keep watch of their movement. There''s two Advanced level mage, but I will take care of them. You will fight the rest along with the five Intermediate level mage."


    "We''re already surrounded, right? How can you leave this ce without them noticing?"


    "I have many ways. For example¡­"


    I took a deep breath and prepared to say something to my party members loudly so that the bandits can hear me. I hold my stomach and scream in pain.


    "AAAH! I can''t hold it anymore! I''m going to poo! Wanna join me?"


    ""HELL NO!""


    "ARGH! Don''t shout! My body is weak against shouting! Now I can feel the tip is already peeking out! Wait for me while I''m doing my business!"


    Alright. My n went well. Although I can''t see the bandits, I can still feel them being disgusted by me. Whichever way I go, I''m sure they will leave me alone. They will also think that the girls won''t have any protection and will act after I leave.


    As soon as I''m out of their sight, the bandits indeed attacking the girls. The two Advanced level mage are just watching from the sideline. They will only move if they see the girls'' power is too much for the others to handle.


    I sneaked behind the two mages who are luckily standing side by side. They didn''t notice me because they are too engrossed in watching the girls fight. I get into a position where it would be easy to kill them both in one swoop with my spear. If I swung my on their necks, both their heads will be decapitated. But I will only actter when they think that they will lose.


    The girls did well. As soon as the bandits appear, Ka set up a magic wall. The wall is in a three quarter shape. Not a full circle. Then from the opening, Ang would use magic to attack the enemies. She seeded killing two of them and injured several others lightly. I guess they decided to kill, but because it''s the first time she ever killed a person, when she kill one of them, her body shook and her uracy is fallen so she only injured the next one. But when sheposed herself, she killed another one.


    "Seems like they have trouble. Let''s finish this as soon as possible so we can enjoy the girls. After everyone had their fill, we can sell them to ve trader."


    "No, you don''t. You''re going to die here."


    One of the mage told the other one to help, but before the other said anything, I interrupted.


    Shocked with my sudden appearance, they tried to use magic on me but it''s toote for them. I swung my spear to decapitate them. They can''t even use magic before they died.


    Now the only thing to do for me is to watch over the girls and also those who tried to run away. But no one noticed the two leaders are already dead. They got agitated that their attack can''t reach the girls and some of them already fallen.


    "You''re just a beginner mage! I''ll show you the real fireball!"


    One of the intermediate mage yelled. He used a bigger fireball than the one Ang used. And he also stupidly attacked from the front. The only open spot on the wall.


    When the mage started to cast magic, Ka already acted. She moved in front of Ang and used Blinding Light.


    "It''s no use! Even if you''re blinding us, you can''t move because you blocked your own path!"


    That is wrong. Because they can raise an earth wall, of course they can move it as well. If they decided to run away by destroying the wall first, it would take time. But if they spin the wall, the wall will slide and the opened spot will face different direction while the mage''s fireball will hit the wall. That''s what the girls did.


    As soon as a spot opened up, Ang already prepared her Ice Spike magic to attack the unprepared Intermediate mage in front of the new opened spot and kill him.


    They have found their roles in a team battle. Ka will support and Ang will attack. Ka will spin the wall and use Blinding Light if she saw a powerful magic aiming at them from the front. While Ang is the damage dealer.


    They keep doing it and make their enemies agitated.


    Noticing that they are at disadvantage and their numbers already fallen with only leaving 6 of them with only two Intermediate mages, some of them looked this way to ask for help from the advanced mages. So I showed them the two''s head.


    "They can''t help you. You''re on your own."


    Seeing their bosses already dead, their morale is dropped to the bottom. And they are trying to flee. Of course I will obstruct them.


    That was the n. Because of the few survivor idiocy who think it wise to run to the same direction, they instead became a bigger target for Ang''s magic.


    It''s a fireball, but the size is bigger than her normal ones. The size is the same as the Intermediate mage from before, but with less speed and less power. That''s when Ka acted. She used earth magic to make a small pitfall enough to make them trip and fall. As long as the front is fallen, the ones behind will slowed down as well. If they think calmly, they should be able to handle it. But as I expected. They are all idiots and got burned by Ang.


    "You two did great! But there''s still one left alive here pretending to be dead. What will you do?"


    I approached the girls and pointing at the man who''s ying dead.


    "Please spare me! I don''t want to die!"


    Then Ka stepped forward.


    "I will kill him. I haven''t killed anybody yet."


    A stone spike protruding from earth and pierced the unlucky guy on the chest.


    It was very well done. But the fatigue and the pressure of killing people for the first time hit them hard as soon as they rxed.


    "Let''s move a bit and find a ce to rest. It''s still bright but you''ve earned this rest. Let''s go."


    After taking a few deep breath, they followed me to another area to set our camp.


    As for the corpse, I returned as soon as the tent was set and took the bandit''s valuables. I''ll let the monster around here to eat them.


    A perfect ending for bad guys.

 Chapter 22 - Mellian City

    The next day after the bandit encounter, the girls returned to normal. They don''t pretend it never happened. In fact they became more resolved to kill bad guys. Knowing what happened to Ka if we didn''t meet, and also what I told them about how the evil cult act, make them more resolute to fight against evil.


    Few dayster, we finally reached Mellian City. It took longer than we thought, but we became much stronger during our journey. Although none of us increased our level to Intermediate, our party can fight against a strong Advanced level mage. Without me, they have enough strength to fight against a group of Intermediate mage.


    "Hey Roy. What are we going to do today since we''re already here?"


    Ka asked me curiously.


    "For today, we will look for an inn to rest. We will stay here for about one month and possibly longer if I haven''t found what I''m looking for. We will go to the guild to ept missions. At least we will go on a quest once a week. After we''re done with any quest, you''re free for a week and during that time I will be looking for the monster I have to defeat."


    One month is a long time and if just do quest every day, it will be boring staying here. But if I found the monster I''m looking for before one month, I will choose to stay here for vacation. This city is bigger than Melk after all. And somehow, this ce has never been targeted by the cult. I don''t know the reason why, but maybe I can find the reason while staying here.


    Soon we found an inn to stay. We paid for two rooms. One for me and another is for the two girls. They say that it was to save some money. So I asked them if I could stay with them to save more money but they refused.


    After finding an inn, we spent the day looking around the city. Other than the fact that there are more hunters in this city than in Melk, there''s not much differences.


    A lot of hunters staying here is because there are a lot of area filled with monsters near this city. That''s why Mellian city is one of the city that got attacked by monsters the most. But with the amount of hunters here, the city is well-protected.


    The next day we went to the hunter guild to take a request.


    The girls were looking at the quest board while I went to the staff to ask about monsters around here.


    And from what I heard about the monsters here, there''s no one that interest me. Not any flying type monster, or even a fast running monster. I thought at least my target would be a fast running one because of my desire to escape when thing go wrong or when it''s impossible to win. Well, it may be because I haven''t seen the monsters yet so I hope it''s the fast running one that I need to defeat.


    "Is that all of them? They are the only monsters that show up around here?"


    "It''s not all of them. They might be some wandering monsters who somehow entered the area from another ce. These all are only those thatmonly appear around the area. Who knows if there are more rare monsters which rarely appear on site? Maybe you can find some rare monster appearance on the quest board."


    "Alright, I''ll see the boardter. Does the guild have some kind of monsters encyclopedia?"


    "The guild doesn''t own such encyclopedia. Usually books like that are owned by Advanced School specialized in theory. Not magic or battle. Maybe the guild master has one. I''ll go ask himter. Why are you interested in monsters?"


    I can''t say that I''m looking for a monster to awaken my special ability, right? Then I will tell her the other truth. Ever since I was returned in time, and realized that I''m too weak even with a new power, I always want to learn more about monsters. About how to defeat them. And how to run away from them.


    So I answered the receptionist as such.


    "I want to learn so I know what I''m running away from."


    "You''re not trying to defeat them but to run away from them?"


    "Yes. Obviously, my life is more important than being a high rank hunter. If I could defeat them, I would. If I couldn''t, then I will escape."


    "That''s interesting. Usually hunters will only escape as ast resort. Most of them are prideful and think only of gaining achievements despite their obviousck of talent. And they would die on a mission. You are the first person I ever met to think of running away from monster."


    "Well, I''ll be going to my friends over there. See you in a bit."


    I''m leaving the receptionist and go to where the girls are. They are still in front of the board but they''re being surrounded by men.


    Oh shit!


    "Hey, girls. You should just became our friend instead of waiting for your friend who might never came. We can go to quests together from now on."


    A bald man tried to flirt with Ang and Ka. This is their unluckiest day ever. For the men...


    Ang tried to refuse their offer, but the men insisted. They even grabbed Ang''s arm. Before anything happen, I should intervene.


    "Hey! Stop it!"


    I tried to approach the girls but two men blocked me.


    "Don''te any closer if you don''t want to regret it."


    One of them threaten me. I don''t care much about his weak threat, but if he want me to stop then I will stop. But I still shouted something to the men.


    "It''s not me who will regret it. It''s you guys! You should have wear some kind of crotch guard before you flirt with them!"


    "What?"


    As the two who blocked me got confused, someone yelled in pain. It was the guy who grabbed Ang''s arm.


    "GAAAH!!"


    He got kicked in the nut by Ang. Subconsciously my hand moved toward my crotch to protect it even though I was just seeing. Well, as a man, I can feel the pain. All the men in the guild also made some weird expression.


    Ang is still being nice because she only kicked the man who grabbed her, while Ka¡­ Ka she targeted every men who surround her and kicked their nuts.


    "Wait, wait! GYAAAH!"


    Obviously, the men who blocked me also got kicked. There are several men dropped on the ground with their hands between their legs. This is not a sight to see.


    I''m afraid. Afraid of Ka. This is the first time I''ve seen something like this, but I know this will happen. It was because of Ka who always wrote down something I said.


    Yes. Kicking men''s crotches is something I taught her. And I''m the kind of guy who is afraid of people with the same knowledge as me and practice it. Even if the one who did it is the one I taught.


    I''m scared because if there''s someone out there who want to kill me, but we both have the same personality, then that guy will undoubtedlye at me again and again even if they fail to kill me. Just like what I will do. That''s why I''m afraid of those with the same mind as me.


    If I was in a situation simr to Ka, I''m sure I will do the same thing as she did. But seeing it from the sidelines gave me nightmare. I''m both proud of her to follow my advice, but also scared because she followed my advice to a T.


    If I want her to be able to survive on her own, I have to teach her everything. And she also has proved to me that she can grow stronger. That''s why I will keep teaching her what she can learn. I trust her so I''m sure she won''t do the same thing to me what she did to these guys.


    ¡­Right?


    "I''ll remember your faces!"


    The shout of the losers was heard as they escaped. All those who tried to flirt with Ang and Ka left the guild in pain. I hope we won''t meet again. Because if theye at us, I can give them something worse than being kicked in the nuts. Although it will be painless, it could be much worse. But with Ka here, I''m sure even if I did something at them, she will keep kicking them. Because when the guys leave and I take a peek at her face, she wear a smile that gives me shiver.


    The other guys in the guild looked away from Ang and Ka, but the girls are all pping their hands. Now more people learned how to deal with annoying guys. Scary¡­


    "Well, now that they''ve gone, have you picked a quest yet?"


    "Oh right! There''s a subjugation quest in the Northeast Forest. The type is not important as long as we at least defeat the minimum numbers of monsters."


    "Good. We''ll take that."


    I''ve heard about such quest before. Usually, it was a repeatable quest that always put up on the board at the guild in every city located near area where a lot of monster reside. Like this city.


    The quest is always avable so there will be no monsters from outside that will enter the city. The reward is also good. And with the type of monsters material brought back, it may increase.


    We let the receptionist know we took that quest and then left the city.

 Chapter 23 - Kaylas Battle

    We left the city in the morning and go to the northeast forest. Our mission today is to subjugate at least 20 monsters of any kind. I told the girls about the reason why such request was put up by the guild. It was to reduce the chance of over poption of monsters and to make sure the monster will not attack the city once they grow too much in numbers. Some monsters are quick to breed after all.


    "I see. So any monsters is fine for the request, right?"


    "Yes. And we can collect useful materials from the monsters so we can get more reward. This is the most taken request in Mellian City. We might even met another party who took the same request. So make sure that we won''t meet any of them in case they used us of taking their prey."


    I answered Ang and told her to get away from other parties. Most hunters are selfish people like that. If they used us, it might end up in a fight.


    The guild doesn''t care if we kill each other as long as it''s not inside the guild. If other party decided to pick a fight with me, I will kill them if possible. But if I do that, even if the guild act like they don''t care, there will still be rumor because we took the same mission. That''s why I told the girls to change spot if we met other party. Even if they didn''t pick the same mission.


    On the way to the forest, we saw other parties also getting in the forest. So we go deeper where no one dares to approach. It was also to see if the monster I need to defeat to get a special ability is there.


    We haven''t entered the forest deep enough that we still met other party fighting monsters. Each time we met other parties, we would just ignore them and continued walking deeper. Some even tried to stop us to get deeper in the forest but we ignore them. There are still good hunters out here.


    Finally we''re in an area where we don''t see any people. I also can''t sense other people than us here. Maybe it''s because the level of monsters here are much higher than other area.


    "Let''s start from here. There''s no more people around us so we can fight as much as we like."


    "As much as we like... but the monsters here in the deeper area of the forest are stronger than before. How can we fight as we like?"


    "Not all monsters here is too strong for us. For example those wolves that have been following us for a while. You two can take them on. There''s only five of them. Which means we need fifteen more toplete our mission."


    "Wait. I''ll do it alone. I also want to test my own firepower. I know that Ang has much stronger firepower and that makes her the main attacker when it''s just the two of us. But I also want to see my own strength. There''s also something I want to try."


    It was Ka who said that. She also shows her desire to get stronger. She must be worried if she ended up on her own since she rarely shows her power. Usually she would just use Earth Wall to protect us, Blinding Light to blind the enemies, and healing magic.


    Although all of Ka''s element only have few attacking spell, she wanted to fight the wolves on her own. It''s praiseworthy. Maybe she has some sort of enlightenment in using her elements. Instead of using magic that was taught at school, she may be forming some sort of magic only for her.


    "Alright. Do your best!"


    "Okay!"


    Ka moved toward where the wolves are alone. I''m curious of her n.


    "You sure she''s okay on her own?"


    "Let her do what she wants. Even if there''s a danger, we can help her then. But with her confidence, I don''t think we''re needed."


    Ang seems worried of Ka. Well, they are best friends after all. I''ve always see them together ever since they met. Never once I have seen them going alone somewhere. I know that they must have separate at some point, but I just never saw them going their own way.


    "Hmm? She stopped? Does she want to kill the wolves with trap?"


    Ka stopped even though there are still some distance from the wolves. What will she do?


    Ka put both her hands on the ground. And that''s when the wolves think of her as an easy prey. Two of the wolves charged toward her. But Ka is one step ahead of them. She made spikes grown from earth and stabbed the two wolves. She makes it seems easy.


    Now there''s only three wolves left. They are now wary of her magic. Three on one might be a bit difficult for the current Ka. But this is still an important experience.


    The three wolves are wary of her and watching from a bit distance. The distance where they think it''s safe from Ka. But they were wrong. Ka still crouching down with both hands on the ground and used the same magic again. But this time the location of where the spikes appear is not around her. They''re right under the wolves!


    Again, two wolves down. Ka used strategy instead of raw firepower to defeat four wolves. First she made them think that spikes only grow within her vicinity, then when they took a distance, she will raised another spikes from below the wolves.


    ording to what the school taught, earth magic ''Ground Spike'' can only protrude within one meter of the caster if they''re still a beginner level. But for Ka to do what only advanced level mage can do, must take her a great concentration to seed. And also high quantity of her magic is used. She''s already tired now.


    "Ka!"


    "Wait! She''s still not done yet!"


    "No! Her magic is depleted with herst attack! We have to help her!"


    "If we do that, she might end up hating us forever. Look at her! Is that the look of someone who''s about to give up?"


    I pointed at Ka to make Ang calm down. Ka still looked as if she still has some trick under her sleeve. She doesn''t have any look of resignation on her face at all. In fact her face is brimming with confidence.


    Then thest wolf move forward. This one must be the leader of the pack. And he''s angry of how his kin are killed. But since he can see that Ka is exhausted, he didn''t step back and escape.


    And Ka stood up. She grabbed one earth spike that''s still protruding in front of her which is from the first magic she used. Then she pluck it off the ground and making a stance as if she''s using a spear.


    "Oh! She''s copying me! She''s trying to use a spear! This must be what she wants to try! She must have wanted to be a one on one battle and that''s why she''s killing the first four so she can practice her melee fight with thest one!"


    If she can use spear or other melee weapons, she can cover her weakness ofcking offensive magic with her closebat. Although she can''t fight in a long range, it''s still better than nothing.


    Both of us were looking at how she fights. Although the wolf scratch her few times, she still fight. She used a tiny bit of her magic left to cast healing magic on herself. That''s how she can fight this long even though she''s just an amateur in melee battle. And more importantly¡­ looks like spear is not a good choice of weapon for her. The length is the same as my spear. That must be the reason. And so I gave her an advice.


    "Too long!"


    It sounded like I wasining about how the fight took a long time. But it''s to tell Ka that the weapon of her choice is not suitable for her because it was too long.


    It took her a while to realize my intention and she broke the spear in half. Now the spike in her hand is held only with one hand and her movement is much swifter than before.


    "Hmm¡­ Rapier suit her better than a spear. I thought it would be a short spear but rapier is a better choice for her."


    Seeing how she also shed using the spike and how she''s holding it on one end, not the middle part, she''s better in using a rapier. Maybe a sword will do. But she''s more inclined in thrusting attack. Which makes rapier is better choice.


    "Now is the finishing move."


    Imented as I watched her fight.


    Ka pulled the spike back and when the wolf charged toward her, she thrust the spike forward and it pierced the wolf''s neck. Her target must be its head but she missed due tock of proper training. That can be taken care ofter when I train her.


    Then Ka dropped to the ground due to exhaustion and Ang run toward Ka. I also approach her and I didn''t forget to give herpliment.


    "Ka. You did great. Using weapon to cover for yourck of offensive magic is amazing. And seems like you have affinity with rapier. I''ll teach youter so you can rest for now. Don''t worry about the mission. I can fight while carrying you on my back after all."


    "No. as for the rest fifteen, I''ll try to fight them on my own. Roy will carry Ka and do not fight with her on your back!"


    That''s much better actually. Now I can just watch Ang from the sideline and let her finish the mission without me doing anything but carrying Ka. Ka and I will only watch from now.


    "But if the monster is too powerful, I''ll join the fight, okay?"


    And so, we continued searching for the next monsters.

 Chapter 24 - Me Or The Girls

    Ang keep defeating monsters on her own while I''m just enjoying the shows¡­ and the feeling on my back. After Ka fainted from exhaustion, I carried her on my back while letting Ang take care of the monsters. Thus far, there''s only weak monsters here despite being deep within the forest. Seems like we won''t meet any strong monster today.


    "Fifteen! That makes it fifteen monsters I defeated and also we finished our mission to defeat twenty monsters. Should we go back?"


    Ang looked at me after she used Ice Spike to pierce a goblin in the chest. She keeps using variations of magic to defeat the monsters. She used Wind Boost to increase her speed, Ground Spike to stationary monsters, and Fireball and Ice Spike to the moving ones. So far we''re not surrounded by any monsters so it was easy for Ang herself to fight.


    "Let''s go back slowly so Ka will be able to walk on her own when we reach the city."


    "Why do we have to wait for her to wake up? Can''t you just carry her to the inn?"


    "I would if I could. But don''t you remember this morning? We just made some enemies in the guild. If it''s monsters, I could fight them with Ka on my back. But if it''s human being, it will beplicated."


    "You think they''re going to take revenge on us? And what do you mean byplicated?"


    "Oh, I''m sure they will. And they will also bring more people with them. And what I mean byplicated is depend on what they will do. Don''t worry, we won''t fight probably. But depending on the situation, you might ended up being embarrassed. You will be embarrassed that you ever knew me."


    "What do you mean by that?"


    This time, the voice ising from right beside my ear. Looks like Ka is up and has been listening us for a while.


    "We''ll seeter. All I can say is that I''m a great actor. And there''s also a possibility that they won''t attack us so just act normally. Ka, will you walk on your own or you want me to carry you until the gate?"


    "Carry me back. I''m quite enjoying this."


    "Thank you. Me too. I enjoy this as well."


    "¡­pervert."


    And so, we leave the forest and return to the city.


    Our harvest today is eight wolves, seven goblins, three boars, and two orcs. It''s too weak to be in a deeper part of the forest. Must be because at the entrance, most of the monsters are being massacred so the weak ones, but slightly smarter monsters, decided to move deeper. That''s why there''s no strong monsters yet.


    And maybe the strong monsters are resting because they have a lot of prey since the weak monsters enter deeper in the forest. They are full from eating the monsters around and taking a nap right now. This makes looking for my target is more difficult. After we return to the city and we took care of the thugs who were looking for trouble, I think I will choose to stay outside and camp. I''ll return back to the city when it''s the time for us to hunt together.


    I conveyed my intentions to the girls and the girls only let me leave after the next mission. Since I also need to train Ka as well, it''s better this way. We also have some questions to Victoria. Whether Ka and other people can awaken their Aura ability or not. We''ll do itter at the inn so that we can freely talk with Victoria without being wary of someone seeing a slime talking.


    We entered the gate to the city and I already noticed several people watching us. It''s the men from before and they''re getting reinforcements as well. Did he really think that they won''t get kicked again if they do this? Luckily I already dropped Ka before we enter the city. Although she''s still tired, she still has enough strength to escape if things go south.


    "Hey, they already watching us. There''s about fifteen of them. Let''s lure them to an alley near the busiest street. We may need eyewitnesses."


    "Saying that we need eyewitnesses¡­ these guys are pitiful to actually thinking of attacking us. Especially with you around."


    Ang said so as we''re entering an alley.


    "Save the gratitude forter. We''re here."


    As soon as I said that, the fifteen men are already surrounding us and block the exit. Before I do anything to them, let''s ask them some question first.


    "What do you want?"


    "Revenge! You dare to kick my crotch! I''m making sure to thoroughly enjoy your body and your friend! As for the boy, we''ll kill him. You may think that you''re safe in this alley thinking that people may hear us and help you. But you''re wrong! The people here are afraid of us The w! We''re notorious around these area! And unfortunately for you, the city guards won''te here."


    It was the guy who grabbed Ang''s arm. Seems like he''s the leader of this gang. And to think that people like this are scaring the citizen¡­ If they got arrested, then the citizen would appreciate us, right?


    It''s as he said. No one here willing to help us. Most of them actually watching from the sidelines. As this ce is near the guild, there are a lot of hunters watching. That means they will know how scary Roy is.


    Without any warning, I undressed myself until there''s only my boxer left covering the important part.


    "What are you doing? Do you seriously think that you can bribe us with those shabby clothes?"


    "No. It''s much worse."


    It''s time for another Shameless Survival Arts!


    Acting Skill: ying the Victim!


    First I throw my clothes to the thug who seems to be the leader.


    Then I took a deep breathe, and screamed at the top of my lung.


    "Help! These guys trying to assault me!"


    "What?"


    Nice. It''s working. They''re confused. But I didn''t stop yet.


    "Nonononono!! I said no! I don''t swing that way! You''re free to love whoever you want but not me! I don''t want anything to touch my ass!"


    "Wait! You''re wrong!"


    I shamelessly dropped on the ground and with my back against the wall, and I waved my hand in front of me while facing the thugs. Now it looks like they''re trying to assault me despite the thugs'' denial.


    Now the crowd is getting bigger. Those who were watching from the start know the truth, but the neers think that I said the truth. That''s top-tier acting for you.


    The ones who were watching from the start are holding back theirughter while telling the neers the truth. Now all the audience are holding back theirughter. With this many people gathering here, there''s no way the guards won''te here. And the thugs who are frantically denying my lies won''t even think of running away. Once the guardse, they have no other choice but to go to jail.


    "No, we''re not trying to **** him! We''re actually trying to assault¡­ Ouch!"


    "What are you saying?! We''re friends here! We''re just ying around!"


    "Why did you hit me?"


    "You want to say we''re targeting the girls? That''s a sure way to the jail for us!"


    "But if we don''t deny it, they will think that we swung that way! This guy lying skill is too much! Everyone here already thinking that we''re like that!"


    Soon, we heard the guards areing. They''re the one responsible in protecting the city. My n to call them is sessful.


    "What''s going on here?!"


    "Sir! They''re trying to assault me! Look! They already stripped me bare and my clothes is in their hands!"


    "What? No! You threw this!"


    Then I stopped acting.


    "Then what were you doing here? There''s no way you''re actually aiming for the girls, right?"


    Everyone here then see my evil smile. All those who were speaking and talking, now stopped their mouth. Silence surround us.


    "Did you think that your evildoing will never be caught? Here we are! Now tell us! Why are you here? Are you targeting me or the girls? There are a lot of witnesses here. If your answer is targeting me, then you will be going to jail. If your answer is targeting the girls, then you will be investigated with every simr crime and going to jail. Your destination is the same, but the weight of the punishment is different. What''s your answer?"


    I calmly said all that while wearing only my underwear. But no one actually think that I''m a pervert. In fact, in their eyes, I''m a Demon Lord. I alone can handle dozen of thugs without fighting. No one will dare to pick a fight against us in this city anymore. And just as I said before. Ang and Ka both were too embarrassed with my acts. They were hoping that they can find a hole to hide themselves but they can''t in this situation.


    Meanwhile, the guards asked some eyewitnesses about what happened.


    "I see. So you guys are the gang that keep bothering the people here. Now do as he said and choose an answer! Depending on your answer, the punishment will be different!"


    Ahaha! The captain of the guards is on my side! Now what will they choose?

 Chapter 25 - Their Lives Will Not Be The Same Anymore

    "What¡­ what kind of punishment will we got depend on our answer?"


    Oh! They already gave up resisting. With this many people around, and the guards also here, they''re in a situation where fighting back will out them in a worse situation.


    "If you''re targeting me, I know that will be your only offense. If your answer is targeting the girls, then when the guards investigate it, they might find your past attempts as well. I know that you must have did something like that before."


    "Before that, can you wear something first? Being seen with a man who only wear underwear is embarrassing."


    "No, Ang. They have my clothes and I will be more persuasive if I''m half naked. In fact if I''m totally naked, we''re already done here, right captain?"


    "Hmm? You might be right. Anyway, The w is already made a lot of offenses in the past but we never found any evidence. As long as they can be arrested, we will be recognized by the citizen as those who hold justice. And our reputation will grow."


    After I answered Ang, I asked the captain of the guards who keeps ncing my way. I see¡­ so he''s like that. That''s much better then!


    I whispered something to him and he wholeheartedly agree with my n. He started smiling evilly like me.


    "We- we were trying to assault him!"


    One of the guys shouted. Then following him, some of them also saying something.


    "No we don''t! I don''t swing that way!"


    "But the punishment is lighter at least!"


    "Fuck! I shouldn''t have followed him here!"


    "Do we have a choice to not be put in a jail?"


    "Fuck no! There''s too many witnesses here! You guys decide which one is your answer! I will say I''m targeting the guy to have a lighter punishment!"


    "Then I will do the same!"


    "Ugh¡­ fine! Me too!"


    In the end, all fifteen of them decided the same answer


    "Is that your final answer?"


    "Fuck yeah it is! Come on! Do your worst!"


    "Okay then."


    I pick up my clothes that were already thrown away by the thugs. But before I wear them, I gave them a new information.


    "Captain, they already admitted their wrongdoing. Please arrest them."


    "Rest assured, young man! They will be put on prison."


    "Wait!"


    I want to say something, but before I did, a womane at us.


    "They are rapist! They have did those thing to me and many other girls! You can''t just let them go with a light punishment!"


    "She''s right! I lost my fianc¨¦e because of those guys!"


    "They deserve to die! Death sentence to them!"


    Suddenly many people who were afraid to inform the guards before, said about The w''s crimes. At first it was just ****, then thievery, robbery, murder, and the numbers of people who reporting are increased. So I shut them up.


    "Shut up! I haven''t finished speaking!"


    I shouted angrily. Now that everyone has shut their mouth, I continued speaking.


    "Captain of the guards. First thing first, may I know your name?"


    "It''s Hill."


    "Okay. Then Captain Hill. I have some questions. Is there a lot of prisoners at the moment?"


    "Yes there are many."


    Great. He yed along with my n. It was something I whispered to him before. But if we do this, everyone will be more convinced.


    "Is the prison separated between genders?"


    "Yes. At least this city''s prison is separated by gender."


    "Are there any sexual offenders and rapist in the men''s prison?"


    "A lot. And all of them can''t hold their sexual desire and they''re already doing it between prisoners. Despite being the same gender. I bet they will be happy if they got new friends who entered the prison because they''re trying to **** a man."


    "Did you hear that? There are a lot of them!"


    Many people doesn''t understand at first. But seeing how color drained from the thugs'' faces, they soon understood.


    "Wait! Wait! We''re actually trying to **** the women! And what they said about robbery is right!"


    "We were not targeting the man! It''s the girls!"


    "Please don''t put us in jail! At least the charges need to be changed!"


    The thugs now desperate trying to change the charge. None of them want to taste the forbidden area. Neither do I. but I enjoy seeing those who tried to harm me fall into hell. As long as it''s not me, then everything is fine.


    "Hill, you also likes men, right? What do you think of them?"


    I already ask him whether he would agree if I everyone know his preference or he would like to keep it a secret before. He said he never kept it a secret. It''s just that no one ever asked about it.


    "Well, for me¡­ there are some that I would like to get to know better. I actually went to the prison at least once a week. I know some guards and prisoners who will love to have them join us."


    "Ca-Captain! Don''t tell me you''re¡­"


    "You never asked before. It''s not like I kept it a secret you know. Ever wonder why only our squad has a biweekly bathing event at the river?"


    "AAAAH!"


    One of Hill''s men asked and now every one of them is screaming in agony.


    "Well, that''s that. Do you think the punishment is too light?"


    I asked everyone here and everyone is shaking their heads. No oneined that their punishment is too light. After all, as soon as they enter the jail, their lives will be forever changed.


    "Of course since some of you have a history with them, you can inform the guards as well. So that these thugs you hate so much can enjoy prison life for a longer time."


    Since my act is over, I wore my clothes again. There are some men who were disappointed by it but I ignore them.


    Then one man suddenlye from the crowd.


    "Excuse me! Can I visit the prison?"


    There are more like Hill in the crowd! And he''s directly asked if he could ''visit'' the prison!


    "Oh! You can! In fact I have a spot as my assistant. If you want, you can apply as well and we can ''visit'' the prison together."


    "Thank you!"


    Not just to visit the prison. That guy also got a job as well! Must be his lucky day.


    As for Hill''s men who wanted to quickly put the thugs in prison and probably ask for transfer to another squad, I went to them to have a chat.


    "Hey, guys. I have something to tell you."


    "What is it? Don''t get too close with me!"


    "Don''t worry. I''m straight. More importantly, it''s about your Captain''s taste in men. You''ve seen how he doesn''t seem to be interested in me at all despite me being half-naked? Looks like men with toned body like mine is not his taste. So for your safety, I will tell you a set of exercise to gain some muscle. If you want, I can tell you right now."


    I lied. Hill is in fact, too attracted with me. I will tell himter that this is my bribe to him to never improve our rtionship to more than a friend.


    "Yeah, we want to hear it! Anyone with writing tools, please write it down and share it with everyone who''s not here!"


    They took the bait. What I will give them is not how to build a body like mine. My body is on the slim side with toned muscle. It''s a body built to fight. Victoria said that this is a body of a martial artist. There''s almost no other martial artist here other than me so I don''t know if what she said is right or not.


    But for them, I''ll give them an exercise to build a body just for shows. One that will increase the mass of their muscle. They will be stronger and bigger. Although in the end they will be bigger than me, I can still beat them ck and blue since I''m used to fight. But at least it''s good for their health as well. I also tell them to write down meals that''s good for their body.


    After I finished giving them instructions, I returned to Hill and his new assistant.


    "Hill. I just gave them a set of exercise to gain some muscles. Their body will be bigger and more muscr than mine. Do you like it?"


    "¡­what''s your name?"


    "Roy."


    "Roy. I love you."


    "Just as a friend and never more than that. Consider it as bribe to befriend the Captain of this city guards."


    "I''m usually one who never takes any kind of bribes. But this I like. We''re friend forever from today. My new assistant and I also will never see you as a romantic partner. Thank you very much."


    "You helped us with a small problem as well so we''re even. I told your boys that your taste is not the muscr ones. You can pretend that you''re not actually interested in them so they can be relieved. Then see youter!"


    I leave the alley crowded with people together with Ang and Ka.


    "You''re evil."


    "Oh really, Ang? Look at Ka."


    Ka is busy writing down something on her notebook and ignore us.


    "She''s recording everything I did. You''re surrounded by bad friends, Ang."


    "¡­can I stay sane surrounded by these guys?"

 Chapter 26 - Victoria Reincarnated Twice?

    The night after I made friend with the Captain of the guards, three humans and a slime is gathering together in my room at an inn where we stay. We''re want to ask Victoria if Ka can be Aura user like me or not. So I called out to Victoria who''s still disguising as my wristband.


    "Victoria,e out! You should have seen everything so we''ll just ask you directly. Can Ka or other people gain Aura?"


    Then the ck wristband on my arm left me and turned into a ck blob.


    "Well, I don''t know. No one ever know that they can be an Aura user or not. Back in my time, we would just training every day, but even so, many people don''t have the talent for it. Even after training for fifty years, some of us can''t gain Aura ability."


    "Then should I just give up in using weapon? I think it was pretty useful when I fought before. Though I still need to increase my physical ability."


    Ka seems down hearing that she will have difficulty in gaining Aura.


    "I don''t think you need to give up. I can still teach you rapier if you want me to. Having a meleebat skill is useful no matter what kind of situation you''re in."


    I encourage her to train in using rapier. After all, the more skill you have, the better chance of survival you will have in the face danger. But Victoria continued.


    "I didn''t mean to say that you should give up awakening Aura. I think it''s better if you practicing weapon since you''re alsocking in firepower. There were a lot of people simr to you. Having magic elements thatck in term of firepower, and practicing swords. They were called Magic Swordsman. If I hadn''t awaken my Aura, I would be a Magic Swordsman as well."


    "So¡­ Magic Swordsman are mages who want to awaken their Aura?"


    I asked curiously.


    "Actually, all the Aura user in my time were used to be Magic Swordsman. It''s just you the weird one. You have only been training physical strength but you somehow awaken your Aura. Usually it would take years before your Aura awaken, but you somehow did it in just over one month."


    "It did took me years in my previous life. I was already over forty since I first awaken my Aura ability."


    "I guess that''s why you can awaken it in such a short time since this is your second time doing it."


    Then Ka interrupted.


    "Wait! Why is being a Magic Swordsman can awaken Aura ability faster?"


    "Well¡­ we don''t know the exact reason. My teacher in the past told me that actually affecting your Aura. That''s why when you''re both expert in magic and melee, you can gain your Aura faster. That''s just a wild guess though. Since we''re witnessing someone who gain Aura ability just by training his physical ability. Anyway, being a Magic Swordsman for Ka will undoubtedly make her stronger."


    "What about me? Should I be a Magic Swordsman as well?"


    Ang seems to be interested in having Aura ability as well so she asked.


    "That''s up to you. Being a Magic Swordsman doesn''t necessarily make everyone stronger. You already have four elements. If you add swordsmanship as well, your increase in magic may be slower. Personally, I think it''s best if you concentrate in your four elements. Then once you got stronger and be at least an Expert Level mage, no matter how strong Roy be, you can give him trouble with your four elements."


    "Just trouble. You can never win against me."


    Ang seems mad when I said that.


    "Are you sure about that? I will be much stronger than the Ang that became the Elemental Master in your previous life, you know?"


    "You''re only thinking about my strength. Add my personality to the equation and you will know the result."


    "¡­if you met someone stronger than you, you will either run away or attack them from behind. What a coward."


    "Thanks for thepliment."


    Ka wasn''t interested in our skit like usual, instead she''s taking note about Magic Swordsman instead of¡­ scary things.


    "Victoria, what do I need I to do to be a Magic Swordsman?"


    "Just practice your swordsmanship or other weapons. You''repatible with a rapier, right? Then practice it. Since Roy has practice many kind of weapons, albeit not thoroughly, he can still teach you the basic. After all Magic Swordsman is just mages who practiced swordsmanship. To be a real Magic Swordsman, you need to add your element in your weapon. Or maybe use both weapon and magic at the same time. How you do it is different with each person."


    "Okay then. I will teach you to wield your rapier. I also need to practice it more so we can learn together."


    I said as we have learned about Magic Swordsman. With this, we will be training together more often. At least I will teach her the basic today since I want to leave tomorrow to look for the monster I need to defeat.


    "You want to learn rapier as well? Aren''t you already pick a spear as your main weapon?"


    "No. I used spear only temporary. My strong point is in my variation of weapons I use. To make sure my opponent won''t know what weapon I will use and what type of attack will be used. That''s why Blobby is my main weapon since she can transform into any shape I want."


    "Wait! I won''t be joining you tomorrow. Since it''s also a good time to fight without using magic or support. You can only summon me if you''re in danger."


    What? Victoria refused toe with me?


    "Do you have something to do tomorrow?"


    "Hmm¡­ how to say it¡­ I''ll just be direct. This is actually my third life."


    "What?"


    "Don''t ask too many questions since my time is limited. Actually I¡­"


    Victoria started to say something unbelievable. Since she said she used to be human, I thought this is her second life. Who knows that this is actually her third?


    Her second life is that of an Aura user in this world. And her first life was in a ce she called a modern world. A world where science developed instead of magic. That''s why she knows much aboutponents in air such us Oxygen or Carbon Dioxide.


    "Okay, so¡­ what that''s got to do with tomorrow."


    "I''m actually a Fujoshi. It''s a great title in my first world. This title was only given to those extraordinary girls."


    I don''t know if what she said is the truth or a lie since it''s a totally different world, but I continued listening regardless.


    "There are many other girls with higher status as Fujoshi than I am, but if I don''t do a certain thing tomorrow, I will let down the title of Fujoshi and every Fujoshi from my world. Even if this is another world, I have to live up to my title!"


    "So, what is a Fujoshi and how you became one?"


    "It''s top secret. Only the chosen one who has touched the light can be one and you should not care about it since it''s belong exclusively to girls."


    She puts great emphasis into that Fujoshi thingy, but refused to answer me. what does she want?


    "Before I continue, I have to tell you something, Roy. If you''re in that world, you will be branded as a criminal. And you will be called by a name that only criminals have. It''s called Riajuu."


    "What? Why am I a criminal just because I''m in that world? What is this Riajuu?"


    "It''s because of your situation. Even if you didn''t do anything, you can be branded as a Riajuu over there just by having simr situation."


    "Why?! What situation?"


    "It''s how you have too many female friends. There''s already two here, and a whole lot in the brothel."


    "Speak Louder!"


    I didn''t catch what she said. Although my hearing is improved by a lot since I awaken my Aura ability, she still spoke in a much lower voice that I still can''t catch what she said. I only heard female, two, and lot.


    But instead of repeating what she said, she choose to ignore me.


    "In my world, we have a type of punishment for Riajuu like you. Everyone will chant ''Riajuu go explode!'' at you."


    "Why am I exploding? What a cruel punishment you have over there!"


    "Then I''ll tell you how to not be a Riajuu. It''s simple."


    "Why should I do it when I''m not in that world?"


    "What you will do will help me tomorrow. You just need to throw Blobby to the prison where the thugs from today is being held. Since I have no free will as Blobby, you just need to order her to survey the area and watch everything there. That will help you to not be a Riajuu and also will help me in my Fujoshi way."


    "That''s all?"


    "That''s all. Now my time is over, if you don''t do as I say, I will not appear again! You will not be able to ask for my help ever again! Got that?"


    "Fine. Just putting you in prison, right? That''s easy. But if I''m in danger, I will summon you to where I am, okay?"


    "Okay. And I think it will be better for us both if you throw me to prison every day. At least when you are in this city. Just that, when you returned to the inn, summon me. But after this slime body''s time as Victoriae to an end, throw me back to the prison."


    "Even at night?"


    "Especially night. I actually want to go there right away, but I''m holding myself back. Just don''t forget tomorrow!"


    "Fine."


    As our conversation is finished and Victoria still has a little bit of time, the girls who were just listening to us asked Victoria.


    "Victoria. Can we be a Fujoshi as well?"


    "After listening to you, being one seems interesting. I also ask the same as Ang."


    "Hmm¡­ it''s still too early for you girls and also difficult to find the necessary stuffs in this world. But if I found them, I will teach you the Fujoshi way!"


    I hope she will not bring the girls into the dark side of whatever this Fujoshi is.


    That night, I can''t sleep at all. I''m still thinking of what is this Riajuu that Victoria said. As long as I throw her to the prison I won''t be a Riajuu, right?


    What the hell is Riajuu?!!!!

 Chapter 27 - Found My Target

    The next morning, I left the inn after saying goodbye to Ang and Ka. They decided to take a break from hunting and take a look around the city. And since the news about those two being my friend, and I''m the one who put the w gang into hell, I don''t think there''s any sane person trying to mess with them. After all the end result will be the men getting kicked in the nut by Ka, or me introducing them to a new world. Even more since the captain of the city guards had be our friend.


    And now, first thing I''m going to do is to search for where the prison are. Luckily, I saw some of the guards from yesterday who''s resting after getting exhausted by the morning exercise.


    "Hey. Morning exercise?"


    They nodded and answer my question.


    "Yes. After our usual routine, we continued with the sets you taught us. Since the usual sets are rmended by our captain himself. We thought that if we do both his and your training sets, we can gain muscle faster. And now we''re too exhausted to continue."


    "You shouldn''t overdo it. Do it slowly. If you train too much, instead of getting stronger, you may end up injuring yourself. Just do my exercise lightly and once you''re tired, go rest. That way, little by little, your stamina will increase. And maybe you can still have some spare energy after you do both Hill''s and my training sets."


    "You''re right. I guess this is it for today. What are you doing here by the way?"


    "I want to see the prison where I put those thugs is. Where is it?"


    "It''s over there. Why do you want to go there? Don''t tell me that when you said you''re straight, it was a lie."


    "No. It''s the truth. Why are you react like that?"


    "Because since yesterday''s event, the numbers of visitors has increased three times. All of theme because they want to get some act inside the prison. Just imagining it alone is a torture to my mind."


    "Well, you need to rest your body and your mind. Then I''ll take my leave. Good luck in achieving the ''Perfect Body''."


    I left them as I went to the location the guard pointed at.


    "Whoa! The prison is so big! Hill must be happy with all the prisoner inside. It''s basically ''All You Can Eat'' for him."


    Yesterday, before we had dinner and have a chat in my room, I went around the city and hear a rumor. They say that everyone who has entered the prison, never dare to do crime again. Hill must have ''work'' really hard to make it happen. I hope I won''t ever enter any kind of prison ever. Not this one or anywhere else.


    I look around and when I didn''t sense anyone looking at me, I turned Blobby into a small ball and throw her to the middle of the prison. Then I ordered Blobby to look around for whatever it is that Fujoshi Victoria want. The rest is up to her.


    Now I''m on my own, leaving the city. I don''t have anywhere I want to go so I just randomly pick a direction, and go to the direction I pointed.


    With the spear broken in half on my back to make it easy to carry, I entered the forest that I went to yesterday with Ang and Ka. This time, I''m alone and not even my slime is with me. Only me, my spear and my magic.


    Since I have no other goal than to find the monster I needed to defeat, I ignore all the weak monsters around me. I only fought orcs or other monsters stronger than that to improve my spearmanship. And although it''s not a real rapier, I used a half split spear into a makeshift rapier so I can learn fencing skill to teach Ka.


    Somehow, I ended up being surrounded by too many monsters. Even a flying monsters like a Giant Eagle! And I don''t feel anything at all from my Aura so it seems like flying monsters is not my target.


    Since the opponent is too many, I escape from the spot. I don''t know where I''m running to. Whenever I see an area where the monsters is few, I ran over there, and by the time I noticed, the numbers of monsters chasing me is increased.


    "WHY ARE YOU FOLLOWING ME?!!!"


    Somehow, my scream also ended up luring more monsters. Why is there too many monsters here? No wonder the guild gave request to defeat twenty monsters. If those requests weren''t there, the numbers of monsters chasing me would increase.


    I somehow ended up in a mountain area and I see a cave. I entered the cave with hope. Not to escape from the monsters chasing me. If I want to escape from them, I won''t enter a cave that might end up being a dead end. I entered the cave so the numbers of monsters that can attack me will be limited. That way I can reduce the numbers until there''s no more of them left.


    "Huh? They''re noting?"


    Somehow the situation is changed. They were not entering the cave to fight me at all even though I''m standing close to the entrance. It seems like they were all afraid of something.


    "It must be the one living in this cave. And something seems to be calling me to go deeper. It''s like¡­ my Aura is triggered by something inside. Does it mean I found my target?"


    And seeing from the reaction of the monsters chasing me, this one must be extremely strong. I never thought that I will find my target this quickly even though I''m the one who wanted to end it quickly.


    "Let''s see what kind of monster I will face. This should be my biggest challenge ever even if I included my previous life."


    I walk slowly and carefully inside the cave. The cave went deep inside and seems like it will go deeper to underground. Which mean there''s a possibilities ofcking air. I can continue with my Air magic, but to defeat the monster, I can''t use magic or support so I will make my body get used to theck of air and use minimal movement. This increase my disadvantage against the monster.


    Midway, I summon Blobby so I can ask Victoria about the monster we will be seeing. But as soon as I summon my beloved slime, Victoria shouted in anger.


    "AAAAAH! WHY DID YOU SUMMON ME? I WAS ABOUT TO SEE SOME ACTION!"


    "I''m also going to have some action as well. My Aura is triggered by the monster inside this cave. I found my target but I still don''t know yet what monster it is. I won''t ask you to help me, but I will ask you something about the monster if you know about it. The sooner we kill this guy the sooner we can go back to Daniel and the others."


    "Not yet. I don''t want to go home yet. Let us stay here for a month until before your next school event. There''s more to see in the prison- I mean the city!"


    "Okay. But I think the monster inside is too strong so I may need toe here a few more times until I finally got the strength to kill it. All the monsters chasing me choose to run away after I entered this cave so this target of mine must be extremely strong if its presence alone can make other monsters run in fear."


    "So you also choose to keep running away until you can defeat it. Considering your personality, that''s a wise choice."


    Then we continued walking deeper. And finally, at the end of the cave, there''s a big room. In the middle of the room, there''s a big round eyeball monster with a lot of tentacles attached to it.


    "That''s the All-Seeing Eye!"


    Victoria then called out that monster''s name.


    "You mean the All-Seeing Eye that was told to be much more difficult than a dragon? The one without any record of anyone ever subjugating it?"


    "Yeah, that one! So after a long time it''s still called that way. Looks like your dream of getting stronger has the difficulty setting set on Nigtmare."


    "What difficulty setting?"


    "Nothing. Just a reference from my previous world. More importantly, look at the fruit that thing guarded."


    I look at an object behind the monster. It looks like a pear but it must be not a normal pear since the monster is protecting it.


    "That fruit is called ''Pierre Fruit''. It only grows in a ce with a lot of mana. Strong monsters usually protecting that fruit because of the mana surrounding the fruit can make monsters grow stronger. It''s useless for any mages other than summoner so you hit the jackpot! If you eat that fruit, you can summon two more monsters! One each after your summoning magic is leveled up. That means you can make contract with a monster when you hit Intermediate level, and another one when you''re an Advanced level."


    "Doesn''t that mean the fruit is useless if the summoner is already a Master level?"


    "You''re right. That''s why you hit the jackpot!"


    "But the obstacle is too difficult."


    "It''s a monster that no one have ever defeated after all."


    "I have one more question before I advance. Why is it called Pierre Fruit?"


    "Because the first one who discovered it is Pierre. That''s what the rumor says."


    "Not because the shape is ''pear-y''?"


    "¡­your guess is as good as mine. Now go and defeat that monster!"

 Chapter 28 - Preparation For The Real Battle

    It has been ten days since I finally saw my target. In those ten days, I kept fighting the All-seeing Eye over and over again. And the result is my loss.


    That monster can see all of my movement! And despite its size, it''s actually pretty agile. The monster''s huge round eyeball has about two meter circumference. Then it has about twenty tentacles attached to the eyeball with the length of ten meters each.


    That thing look disgusting at first and every time I return to fight that thing, I still feel disgusted by it. There''s no way anyone can get used to seeing that monster!


    I keep challenging the All-seeing Eye every day for ten days already. And so far, it''s impossible for me to defeat that thing. That''s what the girls said today when they decided to follow me to see the monster.


    After we returned to the inn and have dinner, the girls and I discussed about the All-seeing Eye and how to defeat that monster.


    "It''s impossible for you to kill that monster. You have been fighting it for ten days and you know it that there''s no chance for you to win! Just give up on your special ability. I know that if it''s you, you can still grow stronger without any special ability."


    "I agree. You''re forcing yourself just to be able to defeat the All-seeing Eye. The Roy I knew won''t fight a battle he couldn''t win. So why are you continue to persist?"


    Ang and Ka seem worried about me. What they just said make it seems like they don''t want me to die. But knowing them, they don''t want me to defeat the All-seeing Eye for another reason.


    "You don''t want me to defeat that monster because of the special ability that I might get, right? You''re worried if I''m able to get some kind of see-through vision."


    ""That''s right!""


    "Don''t worry. It has been ten days since I fight that monster and every day since I first saw it, I have done a lot of thinking. About why does deep in my heart, I desire to have seeing special ability. And about why I''m choosing to continue fighting evil."


    "Seems like you did a lot of thinking. So why the All-seeing Eye? Don''t tell me it''s about peeking on girls."


    When I was about to say why I want that special ability, somehow Victoria summoned herself in front of us.


    "Don''t do serious conversation without me around!"


    "How did you summon yourself here? Did you just teleported?"


    "No. All contracted monster can choose to summon themselves to their summoner whenever we want."


    "First time I heard that."


    "You think every monster love to be summoned out of nowhere to suddenly be in a fight they can''t refuse? Of course most of them will hate their own summoner. And when emergency arrive, they will not want to go save their summoner. That will give them freedom. Only few monsters love their summoner."


    "And you choose toe here so you can listen to our conversation?"


    "It''s about you after all. You''re my master!"


    "Fine. Do what you want."


    Over the few days, I finally figured out what important thing she''s doing in the prison. Seems like what she said about Fujoshi was a lie. Maybe not all of them. Only few things she said was a lie. But for her to have such hobby¡­ and she wanted Ang and Ka to join her hobby? Is that how Fujoshi increased in numbers in her previous world?


    More importantly, I can feel relieved knowing that she might be lying. That means about me being a Riajuu criminal might be a lie. But I refused to ask her any more than that. Because she might ended up hating me for it. I don''t want her to hate me because she''s my reliable partner and teacher. So throwing her into the prison is the least I can do. Maybe when we return to Melk, I can throw her into the prison over there?


    "Well, about my special ability. It''s not that I don''t want a see-through vision. I also want it including many other abilities. But this one might be the most suited skill for me to improve my judgement. My decision making skill."


    "Decision making skill?"


    "Having the vision to see through everything will help me to choose whether I need to run away from a strong enemies, or fight them because I know I can win. To help other people, or to save myself. That kind of decision. It''s perfect for me."


    "I see. Seeing everything closely will help you making a clear judgement. That''s really helpful."


    "You''re right. And the see-through vision is a bonus."


    "Pervert!"


    It really is a great bonus. Seeing from my experience from the past few days fighting All-seeing Eye, I know that thing has a see-through vision.


    It can read my moves!


    If I guess correctly, it saw the movements of my muscle so it can predict my moves. That''s why it''s difficult for me to fight that monster. No wonder no one has ever defeat that thing. And its tentacles also difficult to handle. Some of them are sharp like des, and some other can stick and grab on things.


    "But that doesn''t make it any easier to fight that monster. How will you defeat it?"


    "I only used Aura when I fought All-seeing Eye for the first time. And it''s only on my attacks. Never on my movements. I can increase my speed and sense by using Aura, but I didn''t use it. I know from the first time that I can''t win by using normal means. So I keep fighting it without using Aura until it get used to my style."


    "You''re tricking the monster that can see-through everything?"


    Ka asked me.


    "Maybe. I don''t know until I fight that thing for real tomorrow. Today when I fought against it, I feel like it has begun to get used to my fake fighting style. So tomorrow will be my real battle against that thing. If I can''t win, then I''ll give up on my special ability."


    "You think that''s enough to defeat that monster? It''s called All-seeing Eye for a reason."


    "That''s why I did a ten days of preparation. Look at those stuffs lying on the corner of my room!"


    I pointed at the corner where there are a lot of things lying there covered under a nket.


    "Those are all my preparation for tomorrow''s battle. If that''s not enough, then I have to do an improvisation on my own. Victoria, those can be considered as my weapons, right?"


    "Hmm¡­ it''s a stretch to be called as weapons, but in my time, we can even gain special ability by killing a caged monster."


    "Caged? Didn''t you say that supports are not allowed?"


    "If the monsters have been caught and put in a cage for several days, their wound will heal and can be considered to be returned to their perfect condition. So that doesn''t count."


    "Fuck! That''s totally cheating!"


    "I lived in the perfect time for Aura user to grow, so we can be spoiled as much as we want to. Now you''re probably the only one Aura user in this world so no one can spoil you like a baby. You have to do everything by yourself."


    "Can''t you help me? What if we consider you as a monster? Can we seed?"


    "Then what if it doesn''t work and we killed the monster? You will have to find another one who know where."


    "Wait, Roy. You haven''t told us what those luggage of yours is."


    Ang looked curiously at the things I will use to fight the All-seeing Eye.


    "Those 3 barrels are filled with oil."


    "You''re going to burn the monster?"


    "Yeah. I hope it works. Then those small metal container is filled withpressed oxygen. In case the fire spread and I''mcking of oxygen. I built it with the help of Victoria''s knowledge of her previous world. Even in my previous life, this is the first time I''ve seen such invention. As a doctor, this will help me saving a lot of people. Then those bags are filled with throwing weapons. And that''s a makeshift shield. It''s not as strong as when I use Victoria as a shield, but it may be necessary."


    I exined the things I will use on the battle to them.


    And then Ka asked a question.


    "You forget to tell us why you choose to fight evil."


    "Hmm, right. Ruby told me that I myself don''t know why I''m fighting. After a few days of thinking, in the end it''s just that I love this world."


    "¡­that''s sappy."


    "What do you expect from an old man? I tried to remember everything I went through in my previous life and in this life. There are more bad things than the good things. The bad things makes me lost faith in the world. But the good things, even the slightest bit of kindness, makes me believe in the world that I dream of. A world filled with kindness. I''m fighting for the little good things in this world even though it''s not many. You can say I''m being sentimental, but that''s what I really think."


    That''s what I really thought. In this time, I met Ang, Ka, Ruby, Sophie, Daniel, and several other people. And the kindness I received from them gives me hope. That''s why for those Evil God Cult and many other evils in this world, I will fight them.


    But if I can''t win I will just run away together with my precious friends.

 Chapter 29 - To The Battle

    The next morning, I went to the cave where the All-seeing Eye resides together with everyone. All three of them areing. Ang, Ka, and even Victoria choose toe instead of doing her¡­ hobby.


    "So, why are you guysing?"


    "We will only go to the entrance. We won''t get inside and just hunt the monsters around the cave. And telling other human if they evere to that ce to go away."


    "Ang is worried about you. And so am I. So we choose toe with you to the entrance. At least when the battle is over, I can heal you as fast as possible."


    "Oh! So you''re worried about me? How sweet of you!"


    As Ang was making excuses of why shee with me, Ka said the truth that they were worried about me. And to think that Ka''s healing magic slipped my mind is stupid of me despite I''m the one who received healing from her the most.


    "And so¡­ Why is Ang carrying Blobby?"


    "It''s for us to know your well-being. As soon as the battle ended, whether you win or lose, quickly summon Blobby so we know you have finished. If we see that Blobby disappeared from Ang''s arm, that means you have summoned her and we can go to your side as fast as possible."


    "That really slipped my mind. Thank you for thinking of me that much."


    "You''re wee. After all you haven''t finished teaching us everything yet so we can''t have you die. My fencing skill can still grow and I need you to teach me more."


    "Me too. After all you''re the perfect target for my magic."


    "Ang? Is that all you think of me? Being your practice target?"


    "¡­just don''t die."


    Ang seems shyer than usual. Could it be love? Does she loves me? If I tease her about it then she might just answer it with saying as a friend, so let''s not. Maybe in this timeline, I can get myself a girlfriend so I don''t have to do it at the brothel like I used to. Oh wait! I live in a brothel now so in the end I will keep going to the brothel!


    "Anyway, aren''t those heavy? You''re carrying three barrels on your own."


    "Well, not really. I''m using a bit of Aura to improve my strength so this much is easy to handle. I thought of using a cart but it would be difficult to use the cart inside the cave. But had I know that you guys areing, I would have used a cart and leave it to you."


    "Having Aura is convenient. I hope I can be an Aura user one day."


    "Good luck, Ka! I hope you can do it. As for me, I think I''ll just keep improving my magic. But when you exercise, I''ll join you as well. Being fit is useful in many ways."


    We continued chatting as we got closer and closer to the cave. And finally we arrived at the front of the cave.


    "Well, wish me luck. See youter!"


    I entered the cave as the girls and a slime watching me until they can''t see me. They should be looking for monster to train now. ording to the past few daysing here, I know that the monsters around here are at the level where they might have some difficulty defeating them. But if they work together, they can win. If they take a rest at the entrance of this cave, monsters also won''t try to enter. They''re too scared of the All-seeing Eye''s presence in this cave.


    I''ve walked deep down until I stopped about thirty meters before I reached the room where the monster is. This location is far enough so that monster won''t be able to see me. That''s what I''ve learned after ten days of experiment.


    I stopped and lit a cigarette. I''m not a smoker. Not even in my past lives. I just lit it because it will be my source of fire to burn the oil after I throw the barrels to the monster. If I light it inside the room, the monster might noticed it. That''s why I used cigarette.


    Then I checked my preparation again. After I felt that everything is okay, I carried two barrels of oil on my left, and one on my right so I can throw it as soon as I entered.


    I still haven''t nned to use my Aura yet. I still don''t know if All-seeing Eye is hiding other abilities or not. After all, this will be the first time ever that someone is trying to kill that monster.


    And now¡­ RUN!


    I run as fast as possible without using my Aura yet. In a few seconds, I will see that monster again.


    As soon as I saw the monster, it tried to attack me with its ded tentacles. That''s the same attack I experienced ten times before! There''s no way it can touch me!


    I evaded the tentacle and throw one barrel at the huge eyeball. The force of impact is strong enough to break the barrel and oil started to smear on its body¡­ or eye.


    "That''s one!"


    My right hand grabbed another barrel and prepared to throw it again. This time, the eyeball protected itself by the tentacles but some of the tentacles is still trying to attack me.


    So far, there''s no difference than the previous days. Its attacks are still the same with all the time I experimented before. Which mean the next attack is the tentacle with suctions on it!


    It tried to grab me but I dodged it again. And now I can see the pear-y fruit that it tried to protect. Although I nned to burn the monster, there''s no way I want that fruit to be burnt. As I predicted, the first oil wasn''t reaching the fruit. And the next one won''t be as well.


    I throw another barrel but this time it hit the tentacles that tried to protect its eyeball. I''m not expecting all the oil to hit the eye so this is still within the range of error. As long as the oil touched any part of its body without touching the fruit at all, it''s still a sess for me.


    Then thest oil barrel. The All-seeing Eye''s attack has be faster although it still has many of its tentacles protecting the eyeball. My right hand grabbed my spear and with one hand, I used my spear to parry and attack the tentacles.


    And as I was doing that, I throw thest oil barrel with my left hand up high in the air. The monster must have been confused with what I''m doing despite it can see my every moves. It decided to look up at the barrel I throw above it. And that''s the moment I''ve been looking for! One short moment of carelessness!


    I blow the cigarette I was smoking right to its eyeball! It didn''t expect me to burn it before all the barrels hit that thing!


    And before my cigarette hit the oily eyeball, I moved direction and run to the fruit. I must save that fruit before it got burnt!


    I run to the fruit and grabbed it as some tentacles tried to grab me. And when I grab Pear-y fruit, the cigarette hit the eyeball.


    "All ording to the n!"


    Then as it burnt, I heard a roar. It''s a scream of pain by the monster.


    "GRRRRAAAAAAAAHH!!!"


    "Scream in pain! And die for my sake¡­ wait! That thing is screaming? It has mouth?!"


    As I thought of that, I saw from the eyeball, another tentacle grow from it with mouth at the end of that tentacle. It''s the first time I saw it.


    "Wait! That means poisoning it with Carbon Monoxide is useless! That thing''s mouth can reach for a ce where the air is not poisoned because of the me! Which means all I have left to do is to fight it directly while I''m the one who''s worried about the air. Fuck!"


    I put the fruit in the pocket of my jacket, and charged to the eyeball. Even if it has mouth, its organ are mostly in that eyeball. So this will be my first time using Aura for real against that monster.


    I shed down the iling tentacles with my spear and stabbed through the tentacles trying to protect the eyeball. My spear hit the eye and I put more power in my spear so I can pierce through it and kill it.


    It''s not deep enough!


    I stepped back and pulled my spear so I can pierce it again, but now all the tentacles are chasing me!


    Even after using Aura, I still unable to kill it in one shot. As expected of a monster without a record of anyone ever defeating it.


    I step back again and took my small Oxygen Tank so I can breathe. For me, my record of holding my breath while using Aura and moving is fifteen minute. So from now, every fifteen minute I will take my breath while fighting it.


    Now the real battle has begun!

 Chapter 30 - Breath And Fight

    First Breath.


    I can''t actually put my trust just from my practice. Even if it''s fifteen minute that I can fight all out in a single breath, that''s not considering the pressure and the stress of a real fight yet.


    I may be able to go all out in the first ten minutes. But after that, if I don''t take another breath, my movement will significantly slower. For a monster than can see everything, that''s a big opening to kill me.


    After I took a breath from the Oxygen Tank, I put the tank back in my pocket and charge at the burning eyeball. Howe that thing can survive in this fire? Don''t tell me that thing actually has a resistance against fire? That mean I can only hope the smoke and theck of air can help me.


    I broke my spear in two like usual and put my Aura in both broken pieces. The one with de, I will use it to sh the tentacles, and the blunt part is for parrying attack. This should be enough to fight until I saw an opening to kill it.


    Although the smoke also blocked my view, I can still use my presence detection with my Aura. But the monster also somehow able to keep its eye open with so much smoke and fire around it.


    If possible, I would like to sh the tentacle with its mouth so it will have difficulty reaching an area with clear air. But the tentacles keep attacking me and I can''t close the distance. So all I can do for now is to block the attack, slicing the tentacles, and look for an opening to kill that thing.


    I also throw several throwing knives, but that monster know I''m open after I throw weapons so after a few times, I stopped using throwing weapons.


    I took the whole one breath to strategize and defending myself. From the next one on, I will attack more.


    I took a distance from the eyeball and took out my Oxygen Tank again.


    Second breath.


    Seems like it knows that I''m taking my breath and it attacked me with des. I haven''t able to take a deep breath so this one might onlyst for five minute. I need to make an opening so I can catch my breath for the next one.


    I parry the de tentacle with the club from the broken spear and I put my power and Aura to the de of the spear and cut the tentacle! Now it lost one of its twenty tentacles. Twenty one if I included the mouth.


    Seemingly shocked by my sudden gust of strength, it paused its movement and I took that as a chance to cut more tentacles. This time, three more are dismembered.


    As soon as I cut the three tentacles, I took out the Oxygen Tank again and took my third breath.


    Third breath.


    This time, I didn''t put the tank back in my pocket. Instead, I will use it to block attack just like the blunt end of the spear. This way, it will be easier for me to get the next breath.


    I took a deep breath this time and by the time I finished, I used the tank to block another de tentacle. It leave a scratch, but it won''t break easily. Since it was made to hold such pressure from how much Ipressed air, it''s pretty strong.


    But since I take a lot of air every time I used it, there might only be about five more breath before the tank is out.


    This time, I ignore the tentacles attacking me and go directly to the huge eyeball. The All-seeing Eye must have not expected it since there''s no tentacles protecting it.


    That''s my n! To make the enemy get used to my fight, and then changed my target mid-fight. This way, despite being called the All-seeing Eye, in the end, it can''t read my mind.


    Although it still trying to follow my movement, the unexpected move of me made its reaction slower. Of course I''m not the guy who just let that kind of opening be.


    I thrust my spear and pierced it through its eye! But the defense of that eyeball is pretty damn high that the de of the spear is only sunk for about ten centimeters. I expected it to be strong, but not this strong!


    Since I expected it, I raised the Oxygen Tank in my other hand and swung it down to the spear to make the de sink deeper!


    "GRAAAAAH!!"


    It''s funny how I hit something in front of me, but the scream is somewhere else. But I have no time tough since the me is about to died down. If the fire is out, the chance of winning will decrease significantly.


    A tentacle tried to grab me, but I parry it with the broken spear handle. I raised the tank again and swung it down again. This time while yelling out a scream.


    "HAAAAH!!"


    Screaming while attacking, will make the attack get stronger. That''s why Aura user in the past would scream every time they fight since it makes their attacks stronger. That''s what Victoria told me.


    And she''s right. The second hit makes the spear sunk deeper than the first one. But even though the monster is in pain, it''s still smart enough to protect itself. The tentacles gathered around me and attacked me simultaneously, but I already stepped back and prepared to take another breath.


    Fourth breath.


    The Oxygen Tank is about to leak since I used it to attack. But that''s good since this will be thest breath I took from it. After this, if I can''t win, that''s that.


    I threw the tank that still have some Oxygen left to the eyeball. No, to the de tentacle closest to the eyeball. And as I expected, the de attacked the tank and the Oxygen leaked.


    The fire that was about to die off, suddenly growrger. That''s right. Oxygen is mmable. That''s why I used it as weapon.


    And now it became panicked because of the sudden growth in me. All its tentacles are moving frantically. Without trying to attack me. And of course I will kill it with thisst shot.


    I grabbed the broken spear handle so I can swung it to the broken spear still stuck on the eyeball.


    I moved forward as I dodged the random movement of the tentacles. So far so good, but as I was about to reach the spear, a de tentacle approached me!


    This is not the attack of the All-seeing Eye. It''s just a random move it make because it became panic. That''s why I can''t predict it.


    If I dodged, I won''t be able to finish it. And I don''t have enough time to get a knife to block the de. The only choice I have left to finish kill it right now is if I sacrifice my arm.


    The tentacle attacked from my left side so I raised my left hand to protect myself. I strengthen my arm with Aura in hope that I can block it.


    "AAAARGH!!!"


    The de pierced through my flesh and bone. But luckily, there are two bones there and the second one able to block it. Although the bone must be cracked now.


    I ignore the pain and swung my spear handle to the spear. This time, the whole half of a spear is sunk deep. Hopefully, it will die.


    The All-seeing Eye is screaming in pain, and I''m already running away to the exit of the room while adding pressure on my left arm so I won''t lose too much of blood.


    From a safe distance, I watched the monster writhing in pain and finally it stopped moving.


    I can''t tell if it''s already dead or not, so again, I took another breath.


    Fifth breath.


    Because the room is filled with smoke, and the Oxygen Tank is already gone, I took a breath away from that room. I inhaled a bit of smoke, but that''s still okay.


    I ran as fast as possible to the eyeball, and kicked it right where my spear is!


    Just as I expected! It''s still alive! But thatst kick is enough to kill that thing!


    As I kicked it, its tentacles wriggling because of the pain. But soon, it stopped moving. And it died for real this time. I know because my vision suddenly be clearer even though the room is full of smokes.


    That mean I finally got my special ability! And it really is a vision ability!


    But before I celebrate my victory, I have something to do. It''s to fix my half severed arm.


    After using magic on the spear so it can be repaired and using Air magic to clear the surrounding, I summoned Blobby and took out a small medical kit from my pocket.


    I have a lot of pockets and each of them isrge in size. It''s the clothes I prepared for this fight after all.


    "You''re don¡ªWHAT''S GOING ON HERE?!"


    Ah, of course she would be confused. Seeing me stitching my own arm while it''s bleeding must have make her worried.


    I became the first person to ever defeat All-seeing Eye and my only injury is only my half severed arm. Of course she would be surprised. So I just summarized the story until everyonee here.


    "I won."


    "¡­holy shit."

 Chapter 31 - Aftermath Of The Battle

    I was stitching my own left arm with a single hand while I summoned Blobby. No, it was Victoria as soon as I summoned her. And she''s screaming as soon as she saw my half severed arm and the dead monster.


    "You''re stitching your arm back?"


    "In case you''ve forgotten, I used to be a doctor in my previous life. Reattaching an arm is something I can do. And this is only half severed so it is possible for me to fix it."


    "I mean you''re doing on your own? With only one hand?!"


    "Do you see me having an extra hand? Why don''t you help me put pressure on my arm so I can fix it quickly? Because of the special ability I''ve just gotten, I can see everything clearly. My muscle, bones, and veins are clear for me to see. This ability is sure to be useful for a doctor.


    "So you can see-through an object now. I have to tell that to the girls."


    She said as she transform and help me put pressure on my left arm. Now I can perform the operation better.


    "By the way, how''s the girls?"


    "They''re doing fine. We were attacked by a group of goblins when I got summoned here. I''m sure they can handle them easily but it will take time. So it will be some time before Ka can heal you."


    "That''s fine. I still need to stitch my own arm before she perform healing magic on me. That way the rate of healing will be improved highly."


    If she heal me before I fix it, there''s a chance that my left arm won''t feel the same as before again. That''s the w of healing magic. It doesn''t reverse the wound back to before it was wounded. It''s just improved the recovery rate of the patients.


    And as a doctor, I can say that human body is full of mysteries. Even if the wound are healed, there''s still a chance that it might be paralyzed and the pain might continue for the rest of your live.


    The healer will heal the wound while the doctor fix the wound. The method might be different but even if a doctor fix your wound, your body won''t be the same again. That''s why it''s better if both doctor and healer to work together. Unless the healer is at least at Expert level mage.


    At Expert level, healer can even heal permanent injury. Then what about Master level? So far, there''s no record of a healer to reach that level. But rumor says that they might be able to revive the dead.


    ¡­that''s no longer a healer. That''s necromancer.


    As I was trying to connect my veins, I had a better idea.


    "Victoria. You''ll do the surgery. Just do as I told you and it will be done in an instant."


    "You''re working me like a ve now that there''s no more restriction on support? What an evil master you are."


    "With you around we can be the greatest surgeon in the world!"


    "But that''s not your goal, right? Don''t ignore me! Hey!"


    Whateverins she throws at me, I''ll just ignore it.


    "It''s done! Perfect! I can move my fingers well! As long as Ka heal me, my hand will be recovered in no time."


    "Where''s my praise? I want to stay in the city longer to watch the prison as a reward."


    "No reward for you! I already figure it out that Fujoshi is not a good title. Maybe in your previous world. But Fujoshi is just you people who like to watch that kind of things, right?"


    "¡­most of us are readers but that''s still correct. Then if you know it, give me my reward!"


    "And Riajuu¡­ it''s just a term for popr people, right? I''ve heard you few times when I was about to throw you to the prison. Each times you see a man and a woman together, you keep saying ''Riajuu, go explode!'' in whisper. Being popr is not a crime at all! You''re just jealous because you''re not popr!"


    "¡­so what?! You''re gonna punish me for it?"


    "That''s right! Until we return to Melk city, you will no longer enter the prison! I lost my sleep thinking what is ''Riajuu'' you said but in the end it''s not a crime at all! Just your jealousy!"


    "Tsk! So you figured it out. Can''t be helped, right? You''ve now be a real Aura user. With a bit more training, you can materialized your Aura into weapons. Then you won''t need this shapeshifting slime again. By then you can do everything by yourself."


    "You think I''m the kind of person who will do everything by myself and throw you away just like that? And why are you so stupid despite being way much older than me?"


    "You called me stupid?"


    "Yes, you are! As long as I improve my summoning magic level, your consciousness can stay much longer, right? Then you can transform yourself into a humanoid body and do whatever the fuck you want until I summon you. It''s that simple."


    "That''s right! I forgot about it since I''ve lived a long time as a slime! I can just transform my body into humanoid shape! That''s easy!"


    And then she transformed herself into a human when I saw the girls finally arrived.


    "Roy! You''re oka-WHO IS THAT PRETTY LADY?!"


    As soon as she entered, Ka shouted so loud my ears are ringing.


    "That''s Victoria''s humanoid shape. But I think that''s not her real body from her past."


    "You''re right. This is a girl from a famous girlband in my previous world. I''m also a K-Pop lover!"


    "I''ve had enough of learning non-existent words that only exist in your world. Just say that''s the form you''re gonna take as your human form."


    "With this I can go anywhere on my own! For that to happen, you have to raise your level, Roy!"


    "Whatever¡­ Ka! Heal my left arm."


    Looks like Victoria is worried about the future if I ended up not wanting to summon her again since I have properly be an Aura user. But now her worry is gone, she seems happy.


    Her form she took is very human-like. She''s just like a beautiful dark-skinned woman wearing all-ck. Seeing her form makes me wonder if that ''girlband'' she said is filled with beauties. Since there''s a word ''band'', I guessed that there must be several girls in it.


    Ka healed my arm and it''s already as good as before. There''s no permanent injury at all.


    After telling everyone how I defeated All-seeing Eye, I asked Victoria about Pear-y fruit.


    "Should I just eat the Pear-y fruit as it is?"


    "Just eat it. And it''s called Pierre fruit."


    I ate the fruit as Victoria told me to, and what happen is¡­


    "¡­nothing happened."


    "You just need to increase your summoning magic level so you can feel the change. Like I told you before, you can make contract with another monster as soon as you leveled up. One when you entered the Intermediate level, and another one when you entered the Advanced level."


    "Which means I can only wait, huh? For now let''s check on the corpse. Does that thing has any useful materials or not?"


    "Yeah! You''re the first person to ever defeat it in history! You can gain recognition from the whole world once you informed the guild!"


    Ang''s words makes me realize something.


    "Let''s just see if there''s any useful material or not. I don''t want to inform the guild yet. I still don''t want to gain fame at the moment. I''m still too weak even with this new ability."


    "You''re right. But it''s a shame that you won''t be recorded in history."


    "After all I''m still a beginner level mage. No one will believe us even if we inform the guild. And if we told them, we might ended up gain hostility more than gain respect."


    After I told her what I think, we checked to see the corpse. It was too disgusting to check thoroughly so we ended up agreed to burn it.


    "You sure? This is the only proof that you have defeated the All-seeing Eye, you know?"


    "Yes. I don''t want to be in the spotlight yet. It''s not the time."


    "Does that mean you will be in the spotlight in the future?"


    "Depend on the situation."


    If possible, I want to stay in the dark when I destroy the Evil God Cult. Bing too famous will only put me on disadvantage when we encounter each other.


    After Ang burnt the corpse, we left the cave¡­ and see goblins entering the cave at the entrance.


    "Somehow, they noticed that the strong monster in this cave is already gone. Ka and I will take care of them."


    "No!"


    Ang and Ka was about to step forward when Victoria still in human form stepped forward.


    "I want to test this body first. I still have few minutes left so I want to check my ability."


    "Sure, then. Go ahead."


    Victoria used her shapeshifting skill to make a sword appear on her hand. And she agilely defeated the goblins. In this narrow space, she could swing her sword without even touching the wall or the ceiling of the cave. I guess that''s the difference of me being self-taught mostly, and the real experienced fighter.


    The three of us watched her fight in awe. Although she doesn''t use her Aura, she can defeat most monster easily with her sword. And she''s moving as if she''s dancing. None of the blood of the monsters ever touched her body.


    That is the peak of swordsmanship! I want to achieve that someday.

 Chapter 32 - What I Can Do And What I Will Do

    That was a great show of ability by Victoria. After the fight, the beautiful human form suddenly turned into a slime. That''s when we know Victoria''s time is up and we can only meet again tomorrow.


    The three of us then return to the city.


    "So what''s your ability? You can see-through things, right?"


    "Yes. I can see your skeleton really well. I don''t know much about this yet so I want to check it after I take a rest. I''m exhausted."


    "Then do that. The two of us will take a mission from the guild now so we will discuss our next move tomorrow since your goal have been achieved."


    "Okay. See you tomorrow! Or maybeter if we meet at the inn."


    I left the girls as I returned to the inn where I slept until dinner time.


    During dinner, the innkeeper told me Ang and Ka has eaten dinner before me and returned to their own room. They must be tired after doing mission so I will meet them tomorrow.


    I returned to my room and test my new ability. Since Victoria can''t appear again today, I can only test it on my own without her guidance. I can just ask her tomorrow.


    I stood in the center of my room and test my vision. My eyes is facing the door but I can still see the window at the opposite direction. Directly behind my back. Weird.


    I can also see the ceiling above me without moving my head. Still weird. But I love it!


    I already love this new ability of mine just with the first test. Then I walk to the window and open it to see outside view. This time I want to test how far I can see. The city gate that I need fifteen minutes to reach if I walk normally, suddenly got so close to me!


    Then I tried to use my see-through vision. I can see outside the gate! But this zooming and see-through vision can only be viewed if I''m looking directly with my eyes. Unlike the surrounding view that I don''t need to look directly. But that''s okay!


    So see through and zoom vision can bebined, but the surrounding view can''t.


    Next is to test the see-through vision. I looked at my arm and see the blood flowing in my veins, the bones and muscles of my arm as I moved it. This vision is really great for a doctor.


    Then obviously, to see Ang next door! I see through the wall and see two skeleton in the next room¡­ That''s not what I want to see! I don''t want to see through that much!


    More importantly, since when do they rent a room together? When we firste to the city, they each rent their own room, but now they are sleeping together? Well, I didn''t see them actually sleeping. I just saw two skeleton with inner organ and muscleying next to each other. Why don''t they invite me?


    For now, let''s reduce the strength of the see-through vision. Good¡­ the organ has been covered by flesh. A little more¡­ a little more¡­ and¡­


    "Ugh!"


    My head hurts! Too much information gave me a headache! Just a little bit more but my head is hurting!


    It''s sad that I can''t see what I want to see. But at least I learn the w of using this ability too much. I gotta learn to use it efficiently as to not hurt my head again. I guess that''s it for testing my new ability.


    Iy down on the bed but I can''t sleep yet.


    It''s time to think of new name for my new ability!


    I can''t just call it ability forever.


    Let''s see¡­ Visionability! Or Eyebility! Abiliteye! Looking Good! Visionary!


    ¡­I have terrible naming sense. Is there any monster I need to defeat so I can gain the ability to give name? I mean why the hell did I ever think of ''Looking Good'' as the name?


    I want to call it All-seeing, but it''s the same with the name of a monster so that''s a no.


    Hmm¡­ First, it''s an ability to see. My vision is improved. I can see-through things. I can see the surrounding. What''s a good name for it? God''s Eye? I''m a human not a God.


    Wait! How about Divine Vision? Maybe that will work. Let''s put it as its temporary name since I can''t imagine a better one yet. I''ll discuss it with the other¡­ I don''t think so. I can''t tell the girls that I can see-through things, right?


    For now it''s called Divine Vision until I got a better one. But I might ended up forget to make a new name so it might be a permanent name.


    After deciding a temporary name for my new ability, I sat on the side of the bed and summarizing what I can do now, in the future, and what should I do after this. After all, I need to know my own limit first so I know what I can do and what I can''t do.


    First is summoning magic. I can summon Blobby. A ck slime that can shapeshift into anything I desire. It also has Victoria''s consciousness. An Aura user from the past. She''s also my teacher. Victoria is also a woman from another world before she''s reincarnated to this world and became an Aura user. There are so many thing she can teach me.


    I have eaten the Pear-y fruit so when I leveled up, I can make a contract with another monster. Usually summoner can only summon one monster even after they leveled up, but now I can have three. If I found another Pear-y fruit, and I ate it after I''m an Advanced level summoner, I can make contract with five monsters as long as I reached the Master level.


    Then another element I can use is Air element. It''s useful for breathing. And I canpress air which is useful to make an Oxygen Tank. This is very helpful when I fought the All-seeing monster. And it will also be helpful for a doctor. Maybe I can make more and sell it. I can also shot a bullet bypressing air in a small tube, and release it. I called it Air Cannon.


    Oh, right! With my new vision, I can see far into distance! That mean my Air Cannon can be more urate for sniping a distant enemy. I''ll try it tomorrow. I should raise the level of Air element as well. But the resource for an Air element is extremely rare so I can only raise it naturally. It will take a long time then.


    Next is my Aura. Combining it with martial arts, or weapon mastery, I am nearly invincible in closebat. Which is the weakness of all mages. As long as I can close the distance, I can kill anyone easily. So melee weapon for a close range, and Air Cannon for a long range. I''m an all-rounder.


    As for martial arts and weapon mastery, I need to train them more. At the moment, I am better in spear than other weapons, but I still need to improve other weapon''s mastery to be unpredictable. My greatest advantage is my randomness in using any kind of weapon because of Blobby''s ability.


    Then Divine Vision. I can see the surrounding area, see far away, and see through things. With this, I can see an enemy from far away and decide if I can kill the enemy or run away because they are too strong. Perfect ability to make important decision.


    Lastly obviously, my shamelessness. Survival is the most important thing, but even if I got so much stronger, I can''t just kill everyone I hate. That will make me no difference than Evil God Cult. I need to be more flexible in my thinking. Like how I put those thugs in prison without fighting, but instead using peaceful means. Although that peaceful means will make them unable to live peacefully forever.


    Then what should I do from now? Other than increasing my strength?


    I want to destroy the Evil God Cult. That''s right. That one desire is still the same. But this time, I also want to protect the world. Because I want to protect the littlest kindness in people. Although I''m not kind, I still love to see other''s kindness toward me, or other people. After all, the kindest heart makes me believe in a world I wished for. A world filled with kind people. That''s why I want to destroy evil¡­ except my evil. I will do anything in any way possible that will makes me stay alive, to protect those kindness.


    Protecting kindness by doing evil¡­ that''s fine!


    Although I can''t change the world by doing that, at least I can change my world. I can live in a better world if I change my surrounding.


    If I have to choose to destroy the cult by sacrificing someone important to me, I will refuse to do so. I will save everyone important to me, put them in secret ce only I know, although I don''t have such ce at the moment. Then think of another way to destroy them without sacrificing anyone.


    The only way I can do that is by growing stronger. Not grow stronger alone, but together. At the moment, I have Ang and Ka with me. Then I should teach the girls at Red Tail brothel to get stronger as well. That way, they can change career into a hunter if they want to, and the survival rate be higher.


    Then the kids, Daniel and Hannah. Daniel still need ten more years until his magic awaken, and Hannah five years. But I can still teach them some knowledge.


    And so, I will write down some of my knowledge and give it to them as soon as I''m back. I still don''t know their elements yet so I''ll just write the elements I know of. If some of them have a rare element, I will have to ask Victoria.


    I fell asleep at dawn after I finished writing down some knowledge to share with the girls at the Red Tail brothel.

 Chapter 33 - Last Day In Mellian City

    The next morning, after having breakfast, we gathered in my room to discuss our next actions.


    "I havepleted my purpose ining here. What about you girls?"


    "Then let''s go back to Melk tomorrow by foot. We can gain experience traveling on our own rather than taking a carriage."


    "Although it may take longer, we can grow stronger by doing it."


    "I guess this is thest day we''re here. Then do whatever you want while you''re still here. I''ll say goodbye to Hill."


    We will return tomorrow so I thought of telling Hill first. He''s the only friend I made here so he need to know. Although we only met once.


    I asked the guards patrolling and it seems like Hill overlooking the guards'' training. So I went to his location.


    As I reach the location, I was greeted by an amazing view. Bunch of muscr men are going shirtless and showing off their muscles.


    "Hey, bro. Look at this biceps. How is it?"


    "Amazing, bro. How about my chest muscle?"


    "Good, bro."


    Then someonee and talked to the two.


    "Hey, hey! Look at my back, bro. Perfect, isn''t it?"


    "Nice, bro. But mine is better."


    The view here¡­ is men seeing other half naked men and touching each other bodies.


    I thought that they were doing it to get further away from Hill, but in the end, they got closer instead.


    I have to get to Hill quickly before the view poisoning my mind.


    I saw Hill and his assistant sitting at the corner, pretending to read a book when he''s actually checking on his men.


    "Hill! Enjoy the view? Where''s my gratitude?"


    Hill looked at me with a joyous expression and run to me.


    "Roy! My bestest friend! This is the greatest gift I''ve ever received! I will forever be your friend!"


    "d to hear that. So? How did they ended up touching each other''s muscles?"


    "Well, one day a man suddenly show the result of your training set. He actually did more than it should be, but he''s fine. That''s when the others check on his body. And then¡­ everyone be ''Hey, bro'', ''nice muscle, bro'', ''can I check it, bro''."


    "I guess the training paid-off."


    "Oh! And thanks to this, the numbers of newbies are risen!"


    "d for you to make new friends with simr taste¡­"


    "Some of them are women!"


    They could be Victoria''s friends¡­


    "Anyway, I''m here to say I''m leaving. I am going to return to Melk tomorrow."


    "Why so soon!? This is only our second encounter!"


    "My business here is done so I''m going back home. Maybe in the future I''lle back here."


    "Promise me, okay!"


    I ignored him and gave him a notebook.


    "What''s this?"


    "It''s a new training sets. In case they want a body for battle instead of one for show like those guys."


    I pointed at the men who''s showing off their muscle.


    "I can''t ept this!"


    He said as he rip the book into pieces. Where did that strengthe?


    "I have received a lot from you I can''t ept this!"


    "No, you already rip the book off."


    "That type of knowledge should only belong to you!"


    "You just want their body to stay like that, right?"


    "It''s sad that you have to leave. And I can''t see you off. Goodbye my friend. I hope fate lets us meet again!"


    He pushed my back and I was forced to leave. Did he really hate the book that much?


    "Boys! My friend, the one who gave you the sacred knowledge of perfect body will be leaving! This will be ourst meeting!"


    Didn''t I just say that we might meet again? Oh, wait! I see! So he''s pretty smart.


    I thought that way when I heard some men actually speaking in low voice.


    "Look! Captain is pushing him away! He really hate muscle!"


    "That''s right! He even say that he won''t meet again."


    "Then we have to gain more muscle so we won''t be his type!"


    That''s wrong, dude. Instead you be his type more and more.


    Hill actually pushing my back just so he can show these guys that he pretend to hate my type. Instead it increase their morale and they will train harder.


    Good one, Hill. Good one.


    When I left the ce, I met Ang and Ka. Seems like she just said farewell to the receptionist and other hunters. After the event where Ka kicked the thugs'' in the crotch, both of them somehow get closer to other female hunters. While the men were crouching when they saw Ka.


    "Roy. Can we borrow Victoria? For thest day here, we want to make some memories and have girls talk."


    Girls'' talk? With Victoria? Now that she mention it, I often forgot that she was a human. And now she also can stay in human form for about one hour. This might be her first time in a really long time that she can y with other girls.


    "Okay. Just don''t let her corrupt you."


    "Alright. Victoria, we will go to a restaurant. When we get close, we will find an empty area for you to transform into human. Just wait until we get there."


    Ang hugged the slime and tell her to wait until they reach an empty area so she can transform. With that, she can stay longer in the restaurant.


    And then we separate again. They went to the restaurant and I¡­ there''s nowhere else for me to go. I guess I''ll just train in the forest or something.


    ...¡­.


    In the restaurant after Victoria transformed.


    "Hmm¡­ this is delicious! First real meal I''ve eaten in years!" said Victoria.


    "I thought you don''t need meal to survive."


    "Yeah. I''ve never seen you eat once whenever we''re together."


    Ang and Ka asked.


    "I don''t need to eat since ck slimes are immortal, but I want to because I enjoy it. I thought I will never enjoy something like eating again. To be contracted to Roy is lucky!"


    They were chatting inside the restaurant when some men approach them.


    "Hey, girls! Wannae with us?" One of them shamelessly flirted with the girls and sit at the empty seat.


    "You want to kill your future and your present?" Ka intimidate the guys.


    "What are you talking about?"


    Then one of the men whisper something to the guy who just spoke.


    "Boss, they are the nutcrackers. The ones who kicked the boys from the w and put them into prison. Although the man who put the w in prison is not here, the two girls is the nutcrackers."


    Nutcrackers is the nickname given by the male hunters to Ka and Ang. It was from the day they kicked the thugs in the nut.


    Then in fear, the flirting guy asked his subordinate.


    "You mean she might kick me in the nut and I might be arrested and get my ass¡­ stabbed?"


    "Boss, let''s run away before we provoke them any further."


    The flirting guy suddenly stood up.


    "Ah! Aaaah! The seat is extremelyfortable that I unconsciously sat there. Well, if I''m bothering you girls, then I''ll take my leave."


    And he run away.


    "I guess you two be a celebrity in this city," said Victoria.


    "It''s great that no one is bothering us anymore. I hope it''s the same in Melk. But the hunters over there is more gentlemanly than here. Except for the guys who tried to assault me."


    They have finished their meals, but they still haven''t left the restaurant yet. Instead they are having girls'' talk.


    "Hey, you girls n to have boyfriends?" asked Victoria.


    "Why ask?"


    "I''m worried about you. The only man you''re hanging out with is Roy after all."


    "What''s wrong with it?"


    "Just an advice from your elder. If you n to have boyfriend, and he''s not Roy, you should leave Roy right away."


    "Why?"


    "Because if you meet other man someday, you will end upparing that man with Roy."


    "I see. Roy is a weird one after all. But I don''t have any n at all to have boyfriend after all. So I guess I can stay with him longer. What about you, Ka?"


    "I''m fine with having Roy as my boyfriend."


    "What?!"


    "I mean even if I meet another man one day, I don''t think that he will be able to bepared with Roy. And I can trust Roy with my live."


    "Are you serious?"


    "He''s someone who know the future. But instead of using all that knowledge to make him rich, or using it to do evil, he instead choose to fight evil. He might tell a lie or keep a secret, but in the end, he''s just a good guy. Although he may end up with a harem because of how he live with a lot of girls in a brothel, I don''t mind not being his number one."


    "I see. What about you Ang?"


    "Huh? Me? I never thought about it. He''s a good guy, that''s for sure. And he might be iparable with any men out there. But I never thought of having a boyfriend at all."


    "Well, we can take things slowly. With Sophie and other girls in the brothel get close to him, it''s just a matter of time until he get himself a girlfriend. That''s why I''m curious about your choice."


    Then Ka realized something.


    "Wait! He''s from the future, right? Then, did he has a girlfriend in his previous live?"


    "I don''t know. He never talk much about his previous life."


    "Let''s ask himter. We might also learn something about him."


    And the girls'' talk continued with them talking about Roy.

 Chapter 34 - About Summoning Magic

    We''re finally going home today. The three of us and a slime is leaving Mellian city today on foot. We thought about using carriage, but the girls said they want to fight more freely so we choose to go on foot. If we use carriage, we might end up bothering other passengers if we encounter monsters.


    We''re walking together but there''s one thing that bothering me. It''s about Ang who keeps ncing my way. And every time I look back at her, she would avoid my gaze. So I ask her directly what''s bothering her.


    "So, what''s bothering you, Ang?"


    "Huh?! No- it''s nothing!"


    Then Ka spoke.


    "Then I will ask Roy in your ce, Ang. We''re curious about your rtionship with girls in your previous life. Do you have a lover back then?"


    "Is that what you two and Victoria talked about yesterday? Unfortunately, I died single. I''ve never had any girlfriend at all in both previous timeline and this one. Why so curious?"


    "Victoria said that if we have any interest in romance, we should get away from you since we might ended upparing other men with you."


    "Hah! What''s there topare? Everyone is bravepared to me who thought of escaping as first priority!"


    "But for me, I''m fine to have someone like you as my lover."


    "¡­you have a weird taste in men."


    "No. my taste in men is really good. Rather than choosing men who''s after my body, I rather choose someone who can protect me. How about it? Wanna be my boyfriend? I allow you to have a harem if you do."


    "Nice! Then we''re lover from today!"


    I answered instantly without hesitation. I never have a girlfriend before and to think I will have one now. And she allowed me to have a harem! Why would I refuse that?


    Ang who was surprised by our interaction confused with what happened.


    "Wait! Is that how it goes? How are you two so casual about this?!"


    "Well, I mean there''s nothing wrong about being casual, right? And we can just continue our lives as it is. It''s not like I have to be romantic now that I suddenly got a girlfriend."


    "He''s right. Casual is the best. And it''s not like we have to change how we interact just because we''re lover now. And you don''t need to worry about being a third-wheel."


    "Am I the weird one here?"


    "Yes you are. You are too normal to be surrounded by weird people. That''s why when you''re with us, you will be the weird one among us. And if we meet other people, they will think that all of us is weird."


    "You¡­ sigh¡­ whatever. Just¡­ congrattion on being lover you two."


    "Thank you."


    Ang seems to have given up with the matter of our rtionship. While Ka and I still act the same as usual. Our status now has be that of a lover, but we still act as we were before we became lovers. I wonder what the girls at the brothel will say if I told them that I have a girlfriend who allowed polygamy. Will they change their impression on me? Or maybe they will ask me to be their boyfriend? I''ll think of itter when I returnter.


    We camped for the night that day. Our pace is faster than it was before when we''re going to Mellian from Melk although the numbers of monsters encounter we had is almost the same. This must mean that we have grown stronger since we left Melk.


    I would use Divine Vision to see where the enemies are, then we take turns of who will fight. It was Ang first, then Ka, then me, and after my turn, its Ang''s turn again.


    We left the next day after we finished our morning exercise. Ang with her meditation, Ka with her fencing practice, and I would have a sparring session with Victoria''s human form.


    She now can stay conscious as Victoria for about two hours. So the first hour is for me to spar with her, and the next hour is for chatting. When my sparring is over, we would continue our journey while chatting with Victoria.


    And this time sparring session is about unarmedbat. How to fight without using weapon. I''m surprised to know that fighting unarmed is not just about punching and kicking. There''s also throws and locks.


    When she used what she called ''Armbar'' on me she dislocated my shoulder. And I have to ask Ka to heal me. Fighting unarmed is really useful if I want to subdue a human enemy without killing them.


    Victoria said that unarmedbat is really well developed in her previous world. And it even be some sort of entertainment. The fighter can be rich even if they fight just once every few months. Even if they just fight once or twice in a year, they can gain money even if they don''t win. What an amazing world.


    And after she used armbar on me, I already know why she loves to watch it. I mean two men, getting that close where their bodies touched each other''s bodies must be a wonderful sight for her.


    But still¡­ a world where a fight can be an entertainment. That world must be amazing to think of that. And the strongest of them all can be crowned as the world champion. Even in this world, there are many people who would like to have that title.


    Maybe I can put such idea in this world?


    Everyone having topete for the title of the strongest. Then maybe everyone will end up wanting to get stronger willingly. That way they have better chance for survival and more people will fight them. Let''s just think about it in the future since I don''t have any resource to do all that yet.


    After taking a break for a few minutes after sparring session, we continued our journey home with Victoria still in human form. When we found a monster, Victoria would volunteer to fight it herself. That mean I can watch and learn how she fight, and I can increase my summoning magic proficiency because she''s still my summon after all. Which also mean that her time will grow longer as well. I hope it will be soon for her to be able to stay consciousness for the whole day. Then maybe forever if possible.


    I like Blobby because she doesn''t talk much. Not that she can speak or anything. But having Victoria is much more useful because I can learn a lot from her.


    And there''s another thing I just thought of.


    "Victoria. Before I summoned you, where were you? I think it''s a question most summoner are curious about. Although it''s been a while since I summoned you for the first time."


    "Yeah. It''s been a while since you summoned me but you just ask me now?"


    "Important things first. I never thought it was that important before. But now, I have the chance to summon more monsters, I thought of asking you first. But from your experience as monster, and the ancient knowledge of the past if you know any."


    "If I have to call it, I was in the monster world before you summoned me. And if you unsummon me right now, I think I will return back to that world. There are many monsters over there than here. Some of them even have intellect and understand humannguage. I think it''s a good time to tell you this. Summoning magic is actually connecting this world with that world. When you use summoning magic, you made a portal in both world. Then the monster closest to the portal will enter it. The portal has some kind of contract magic which allow you to make contract with the monster. It was lucky of you to summon me."


    "Now that you mention it¡­ doesn''t it mean I''m extremely lucky? I mean you were my summon in my previous timeline and now you are my summon again."


    "You are right. You''re just lucky to have me again in your second life. Back in my time as Aura user, I learnt something about summoning magic from my teacher. My teacher said that most of summoner choose to grow stronger first, then he use summoning magic to open a portal to monster world and enter themselves. They will then find a monster to their liking to make a contract with. Usually through the means of battle. That''s why they choose to get stronger first before they summon a monster. Some time it would take them years before they make a contract and return to this world. It''s not rare to see human''s corpses in that world, so I guess there are many who died in that world. That''s why summoner are rare."


    "Doesn''t that mean I can make a portal to that world right now?"


    "I don''t know. But for your next monster, I suggest you to do that if you want a strong monster. That''s all I know about summoning magic. The rest is for you to find out."


    If I could go to that world whenever I want that would be great. I can built a safe ce over there. One which no one from this world will never know except the people I choose. But it might be filled with monster so I have to check the ce first.

 Chapter 35 - Chance Encounter

    "So if I can travel to and from that world, I can build my own safe haven, right? Victoria? Victoria?"


    Victoria suddenly turned back into a ck blob. Looks like she has passed the limit of her consciousness. Now she''s Blobby and I can meet Victoria again tomorrow.


    "You want to build a safe ce in a world filled with monsters? There''s a chance that world is worse than ours, you know?"


    Ang remind me of the truth. That''s right. Even if that ce is where Victoriaes from, there''s a chance that there are many other unbelievable monster like the immortal slime Blobby.


    "It''s just a thought. I''ll think about it when I raised my Summoning level. That''s when I will go to that world and search for another strong monster. Maybe I will make a contract with a monster that already has a house. That way I can just visit it every day."


    "What? Like a dragon that build a nest in that world or something?"


    "If possible I want a humanoid monster with intellect. Then it can be the leader of its species and I can have my own army of monster! But I have to see whether I can transport non-contracted monsters first. If I could, that would be great."


    "It doesn''t has to be a humanoid one, right? So why a humanoid monster?"


    "So they can blend in well in this world! That way I could have the biggest informationwork in the world!"


    "Why not biggest army to defeat that evil organization?"


    "Like usual, my first priority is running away and survive. That''s why information is the most important thing."


    I talked about what I want to do about the next monster I will summon. But that''s still in the future.


    "You just got yourself a girlfriend yesterday and instead of having a chat with her you''re thinking of getting another monster in the future. Say something to your girlfriend!"


    I turned to look at Ka who has been watching us from beginning.


    "What do you think, Ms. Girlfriend?"


    "I don''t care that much about how we should act from now on. What about you Mr. Boyfriend?"


    "Me? Knowing the future is a scary thing for me. So, however I act, most of the time, it was in order to defeat that evil organization. I already thought of you as important to me even before we be lover. That include you too, Ang. But for me to date like a normal person is impossible when I think of the future. Even if I do it will just end up as an act. Not my real feeling. I think that will be rude toward my partner if I do that."


    "And you don''t think it''s rude to go out with Ka?"


    "Nope. Not at all." "Not in the slightest."


    We both answered Ang at the same time.


    "You confessed after you know what I want to do. You must have thought about it seriously, right?"


    I turned to Ka this time.


    "Obviously. With me around you, I think before you choose to run away if something happen, you will consider saving those around you and those important to you first. Even though it was by chance, I''m still the first person you saved in this timeline, right? After all if you''re not around, I would have died by the goblins back then. Which mean I''m the proof that you can also save those around you. But please save yourself first in case it''s impossible to save others."


    "As you wish, my dear."


    Ang looks shocked hearing our conversation.


    "¡­sorry. I never thought that you two have thought about it seriously. I thought that both of you just dating on a whim."


    "Don''t worry about it. With my personality, I know it''s difficult for other to trust me."


    "And I learn everything from this guy."


    "Maybe it''s me who really have to think about it seriously. I can''t continue to imagine about charming prince forever."


    With this conversation, the rtionship between the three of us gotten closer and closer. So I thought of telling them about the attack in Melk in few months if it will happen again.


    "Hey. Now I have cleared my mind, I thought of telling you that there will be an att¡­"


    I stopped my word because I saw someone I didn''t expect with my Divine Vision. My presence detection skill by using Aura hasn''t sense anything yet, but my Divine Vision is able to see someone from far away.


    It was the scarred palm guy. The one whose summoned monster killed me and also the man who was there at the entrance of the cave. Where I killed all their new recruits by disguising the scene as if it was done by the monsters there. Why would he be in this area?


    What should I do now? If we continue like this we will inevitably meet midway. No matter how much confidence I have in my acting skill, I don''t think I can act normal in front of the man who''s responsible for my second chance.


    Then the only choice is to kill him. I also have chosen how I want to live my life this time. And by killing him, there''s a chance that I can save many unknown people from him. But that doesn''t matter. The truth is I''m hesitating because if I kill him, the future I know will disappear. Not all of them, but most of them. Maybe the one where monsters will attack Melk in a few month is one of them.


    But this may be my only chance to kill him. So what if the future changed? The biggest fact where Evil God Cult is exist won''t change. I can just teach those important to me to grow stronger. That way we can prevent more tragedies. And even if the attack in Melk still happen, we can fight back. Or at least survive.


    Then there''s no more hesitation. Killing him right now is the answer!


    Now, the n!


    "Ang. Ka. We might need to return to Mellian again."


    "Why?"


    "There''s a man I have to kill in front of us and I want to make it as if it''s a monster that killed him. A strong one. We will then return to Mellian because it''s the closest ce here and report to the guild about the monster and the fact that it killed someone. We might need to run as fast as we can so we can reach Mellian as soon as possible. If possible I want to reach before dark, but it might be weird if we arrived that soon from here. Maybe we should take the main road so we can ask for a ride to the city."


    "That''s too much effort for just killing a man. Who is he?"


    "I don''t know what his name is, but he''s the one responsible in my death."


    "He is your murderer? Then is this a revenge?"


    "For me, I thought of killing people I know that they are members of the cult. And he''s most likely one of their higher rank members since I saw people telling him about the situation back in the cave about the death of their new recruits. I don''t know if he''s currently a high rank member or not, but at least in the future, he is. His monster is a mutated one. Either forced by experiment or happen naturally. But that monster is strong enough to kill me who had just awaken Aura."


    "Won''t that mean the future in this timeline will be different? Then you can''t trust everything from your previous live. This might be a big change from your previous live just by killing that man."


    "I think so too. But whatever will be, will be. I have decided how to live this life. And most things I know are around the time before I died then. Most of the knowledge I have are useless since the cult only affect me directly a few times."


    "So you want to kill everyone from the cult that you know of? Won''t that be difficult?"


    "I don''t think I will kill everyone yet. After all most of their members that I know were younger than me at the time. Which means most of them are still kids right now or maybe not even born yet. If I meet kids who I know that they will be members of the cult, I''ll check first if they have connection with the cult at the moment first. If they don''t, I''ll try to educate them so they won''t stray."


    "You mean like what you did to Daniel? Now that I think about it, is Daniel someone you know in the future?"


    "What?! You think Daniel will be a member of that evil organization? Never!"


    "But he''s a na?ve kid. If you never appear in front of him, who knows if someone will approach him with bad intention or not?"


    "He''s in a safe ce right now surrounded with good people. He won''t stray from the right path!"


    Now that Ang mentioned it, I think what she said might be true. Daniel might ended up bing a member if he never met me.


    That''s enough about Daniel. For now, I''ll take care of the scarred palm guy first.

 Chapter 36 - Killing My Murderer

    Let''s see. He''s still far away. And he can''t see us because there''s forest between us. We''re hidden behind the trees and bushes. His level¡­ I don''t know. But let''s just imagine that he''s at least an expert. He seems older than me but in thirty years, he''s still well despite his old age.


    He''s alone. I can''t see anyone with him. He''s not even having his monster with him. I checked below the ground and above the sky just to check, and there''s no monsters I can see. At least none of the monsters I see within my sight are not his summoned monsters.


    There are still some monsters like goblins and wolves, but none of them are close to him. Maybe he unsummon his monster back to the monsters world. Or he''s giving an order to his monster. Whatever the case may be, he''s all alone in the forest.


    I don''t know about his other elements, but let''s think of it as if he''s an Expert level in all of his elements. Not that I will give him a chance to show it.


    This is the first time I used Divine Vision for its real purpose. Decision-making. I saw the scarred palm alone and decided to kill him. If it''s not for this special ability, I would have never known that he''s around.


    Now it''s about my n. How do I make it as if he was killed by a monster? It''s all depend on how well Blobby can disguise herself into another type of monster. One which almost no one ever has seen it. A dragon!


    But even if I transformed her, Blobby can''t put her strength into killing the scarred-palm guy. Which mean I have to be creative.


    "Blobby, turn into a huge scissor, but the de is shaped like a dragon''s head with sharp fangs."


    Blobby did as I ordered. And now she''s changed into a dragon''s head scissor.


    "Is that how a dragon look like?"


    Ang asked me curiously while Ka touching the head of the dragon.


    "I don''t know. Never saw any in both lifetime. But at least this is what people imagine what a dragon''s head looked like. And that''s enough to make it seems like a dragon killed him."


    "What about the surrounding area?"


    "Yeah, I need to make it looked like the dragon caused ruckus in that area so I''ll take care of itter. Now stay here and wait for me."


    I left the girls and went to a ce where the goblins are. Not directly to the guy.


    I stopped somewhere where the goblins won''t notice me and picked up a rock. I need to know the distance where the guy can notice a presence, so I''ll turn the goblins as my bait. The goblins are about 50 meters from the guy but it was surrounded with trees and make it difficult for him to see the goblins.


    I threw a stone five meters from the goblins, in the direction between the goblins and the guy. The goblins heard something and went to check what it is that they heard. But the guy seems to not notice yet. If I just throw a stone to his direction, he might be suspicious of the surrounding because he won''t see anything moves, that''s why I choose the goblins.


    There are only three goblins but that''s more than enough. I keep throwing stones between the goblins and the guy. The goblins followed the sound and getting closer to the guy. Then when the distance is about 20 meters, I throw a stone and the guy noticed it!


    He looked at the source of the sound and he saw three goblinsing out. He calmly casted three fireball one by one. From what I can see, it took him at least one second to activate his magic. From the chanting until the fireball shot out. And the size of the fireball tells me how strong he is. He''s at least an Advanced level mage in fire magic. But he''s still has his summon. At least he''s not calling his summon here.


    After watching how he defeat the three goblins, I moved ce to where he''s going and wait there. I will wait while hiding from him and will attack when he got closer to me. I was hiding in the bushes and will attack when he''s twenty meters from me. I''ll try using my Aura on my feet so I have explosive power for my speed so I can reach him in one second. And I hid my breath by using Air magic inside my mouth. If possible I want to activate this magic directly to my lung one day.


    He walked closer to my hiding spot and soon he will be within my range. It might take longer than one second, but he might not be able to react that fast if I attack him. I prepared Dragon Head Scissor Blobby and crouched to have a crouching start before I jumped to the Scarred Palm guy.


    25 meters¡­ 24 meters¡­ 23 meters¡­ 22 meters¡­ 21 meters¡­ and¡­


    NOW!


    The explosive power of my feet reached a speed I have never used before. My reaction speed became slower because of the speed I''m using, but that''s still fine.


    The sound of me kicking the ground was so loud and the guy I''m aiming for was surprised by the sound. He looked my way but paused for a tenth of a second.


    That''s obvious!


    Normally, he must have tried to attack me as soon as he heard the sound. That''s what an experienced mage would do. But when he looked at me, he must be really shocked to see a dragon head with a pair of human leg wearing pants. That''s because I''m using the dragon head to hide my face. But it was thanks to that tenth of a second that I''m able to kill him.


    Although he was surprised, he''s still trying to use his magic. But my speed was so fast that I can use the dragon head to bite his head and separate it from his body. If I was just a tenth of a secondte, his magic would have killed me first. As expected. The strongest element is element of surprise!


    Now the headless corpse in front of me has a clear bite mark on it. And his head¡­ is unrecognizable after I used Blobby to chew it hard in its dragon''s mouth. The blood? I''ll just pour it back to its body.


    Now that he''s dead, I have to make it clear that no one will suspect me. Especially the Evil God Cult. If I just leave it as it is, someone from the cult will try to find him. Even if they don''t suspect me, they will be suspicious of what creature bit his head off. But if I made it clear that a dragon was here, they will be busy with the nonexistent dragon.


    I know how much they love mutated monsters. That''s why they will never ignore it if there''s a rumor going on about a dragon. They will try to hunt it and make it their servant no matter what it takes. I know that they love to control monsters, but I don''t know how they did it. But I know for sure that they did some kind of experiment to either monster or human. Maybe it''s rted to how this guy got the scar on his palm.


    To check what''s inside that scar, I used Divine Vision and I see some kind of blue stone. That''s a familiar stone I''ve seen from my previous live. I don''t know what it''s called and the effect of that stone, but I saw some of their members have these kind of stones in their hands when we were fighting. Is this a stone that help you in controlling a monster even if they are not contracted monster? It''s possible.


    So, if the attack on Melk still happen, I will need to take care of people with this kind of stones. Maybe I should look around the city if they put these type of stone somewhere visible.


    Wait!


    Now that I think about it, the three goblins before didn''t try to attack him! They''re just watching him and not moving at all. Maybe rather than controlling, it was so that the owner of the stone won''t be attacked by monsters.


    So they keep such important stones for themselves and used it for evil instead. It''s just a spection but still, if what I think is true, then the cult will be busy looking for the nonexistent dragon. They will find out why the stone has no effect on the dragon. Or maybe they think that there''s a summoner who contracted with a dragon and used it to kill the scarred palm guy.


    Well, even if they''re busy, they will undoubtedly still attack cities. But maybe with this, their attack will be dyed and by that time, Ang, Ka, and the others will be much stronger and well prepared for the attack. Though I haven''t told them about the attack yet. I will tell them when we return back to Mellian. For now it''s time for the dragon to fly.


    I transformed Blobby into a dragon. Not just the head, but the whole body. Although it might be difficult for her to fly, I can just throw her as strong as I can to the sky and let her glide to somewhere safe. I need to throw her as high as possible so many people can see her. Then Blobby can change into a bigger dragon and glide somewhere until I summoned her back to me.


    But that''s not everything. I threw her already but the most important part is not there yet. The dragon''s roar. I used Air magic to change the air so my voice is changed and I¡­


    "ROOOOOOAAAAAAAR!!!!"


    Although it''s not that loud, it''s still important to roar. I hope it will reach someone.


    Now, let''s return to the girls!

 Chapter 37 - Reporting Dragons Appearance

    As I returned to the girls, I saw both of them are panicking.


    "I have returned!"


    "You''re finally here! What was that roar before?!"


    "That was me pretending to roar like a dragon."


    "And that dragon we just saw was Blobby, right? Don''t tell me she can fly?"


    "Not yet. I just threw her as strong as I can and she''s freely gliding to somewhere with a lot of people before she turn away to an empty area. Maybe in the future she can fly after I raise my level. But now that we have seen a dragon, it''s best for us to go to the main road and return to Mellian as fast as possible. And act like that was really a dragon and we''re escaping out of fear. If you can''t act, just pretend you''re shaken and can''t speak at all. At least until we return to the inn. Let''s go now!"


    After answering Ang, the three of us went to the direction of the main road. And since it''s closer to Mellian than other cities. We choose to return to Mellian just one day after we said goodbye. If I meet Hill, it will be very awkward.


    Soon we reached the main road and we saw a carriage going to Mellian. We asked for a ride because of the dragon and they let us ride with them. They were originally going to another city but because of the dragon appearance, they decided to return to Melk. And that''s about all the conversation we had. They seems to be very afraid of the dragon while we were acting like we are afraid. So none of us talk the whole way. We just said thank you and goodbye when we reach the gate.


    Unfortunately, the one who guards the gate right now is Hill. Now it became awkward since he also said that he won''t see me again.


    "Well¡­ so you''re the guard for today?"


    "¡­yes. It was because the appearance of the dragon. Someone who entered before said that he heard the roar of a dragon. So the whole city panicked and I was told to guard the gate. Did you also saw it? You must be. And that''s why you returned here."


    "That means someone already reported it to the guild, right? Then I don''t need to go there and said the same thing."


    "No. I suggest that you still report it to the guild. They want to see if everyone saw the same thing or not."


    "Alright then, I''ll go to the guild right away. The two of you should find an inn quick. Because of the dragon, many peoplee here and it will be harder for us to find an inn. Meet me at the guild after you find one."


    "Okay."


    I send the girls off and when I was about to leave, Hill invite me for a dinner.


    "Hey, are you free tonight? I want to hear more about the dragon. And some other question about my men."


    "If it''s your treat, then I''m free."


    "You mean you won''te if you have to pay? You''re so petty."


    Then I left Hill and go to the Hunter Guild. It was crowded with a lot of people and most of them probably informing about the appearance of the dragon. Only some hunters actually heard the roar, but that''s good.


    When it was my turn to report, I said the same thing to the staffs but with an additional report of my own.


    "It was close to us and flew right above us. And when that monster was above us, it spilled some liquid like blood on the ground right in front of me. That''s when I decide for us to escape and return to the city. I don''t know if that was drop of blood or something else, and I don''t know if that thing was injured or it has killed someone. I only speak of something that I see. I don''t think my party members saw the blood so it might be because I was panicked."


    With this, they might request some high rank hunters to investigate the area where the dragon fly. It will be soon before they find the corpse of the scarred palm guy.


    After finishing my report, I found Ang and Ka waiting me in the lobby. They have found an inn and it''s the same inn we used before. It''s just that they only rent one room.


    "Perfect."


    "No! Not perfect! There''s only one bed and three of us! You will have to find another inn!"


    "Shouldn''t you find one for me since I asked you? It will be fine if I transform Blobby into a bed, right?"


    "Sigh¡­ fine. But it will be us who sleep with Blobby. You still haven''t summoned her yet?"


    "Later when we''re at the inn. Just tell me which room and open the window so I can enter through the window."


    "Why would you enter through the window?"


    Then it''s Ka who has been quiet for a while that answered Ang. Ka always the quiet one among us three and she''s just letting Ang asks me something.


    "One man. Two girls. One room. What would everyone who saw us says?"


    "¡­I''ll open the window."


    "I''m fine if you want to be Roy''s girlfriend as well, you know?"


    "No thanks. I think that kind of thing is too soon for me."


    "Ugh¡­ I''ve been rejected¡­ Well, I have a dinner with Hill so you I''ll meet at the innter. See ya!"


    I left the guild to the restaurant Hill invited me to.


    Being a captain of the city guards make him able to reserve a private room in the restaurant he told me to go. This is dangerous. I must never show him my back!


    "Don''t worry. I promised you that we''re just friend."


    Noticing how I acted, he said so. But I still won''t rx my vignce.


    "So, why are you inviting me? I don''t think it''s about the dragon since with your status you can just ask the guild."


    "You''re right. I don''t really care about the dragon since if that monster want to attack this city, there''s nothing we can do against it. The most we can do is to evacuate the citizen. What I want to ask is about my boys. Let''s talk while we eat."


    The dishes were served by the waitress. Of course I asked for quantity over quality.


    "Can you even finish all of these?"


    "Hey! If it''s meal paid by someone else, I have bottomless stomach. But because you''re my friend, I only ask less than usual. Be grateful, captain."


    "¡­even if you say that, I can''t be grateful to you."


    Then I took off my shirt and continued eating while being shirtless.


    "¡­ Excuse me! We''re ordering some more."


    "Just friend, okay."


    "Good friend indeed. Anyway, back to what we''re here for."


    "Right. What are you gonna ask me about?"


    "About my boys and their training. I feel like they train their bodies more than they practice magic. I''m worried if there''s any monster attack that they can''t defeat even the weakest monster since they only train their bodies."


    "Are you stupid? You''re their captain! You just need to tell them to practice their magic or they will be punished. That''s all it takes."


    Hearing my answer, Hill mmed the table as he only realized it just now.


    "That''s right! How could I forgot such simple thing like that?"


    "You''re enjoying the view too much you forgot about the important thing. Don''t forget that you are the one responsible for this city''s protection. The citizens depend on you to protect them. Not the hunters, nor the nobles. They ced their trust in you, people with uniform. If that dragon decided to attack here, it''s your duty to protect the citizens and evacuate them."


    Not that the dragon will ever attack this city. At least not Blobby dragon.


    "You''re right! I guess I panicked too much because of the dragon''s appearance. I will tell the boys to not forget to train their magic even if they don''t want to let go of their physical training."


    His mood has changed for the better. As a captain of the guards, his responsibility is too big for me to fathom. But at least I could give him my wisdom since I''m mentally older than him.


    "Oh, yeah! About your training. I''m worried that they will turn slimmer if they trained too much and turned just like you. Should I just ask them to stop?"


    "No need. Their body won''t be like mine if they trained as I instructed. Let''s say that my body is better for agility and the training I gave them is focused for their strength. Instead of getting slimmer, if they consume a lot of nutritional food and train more, they will get bigger."


    "Ahahaha! I like that! You are the best friend I ever had!"


    "Just friend."


    "Yeah, just friend!"


    We partying untilte and I went to the inn after taking the drunk Hill to his ce.

 Chapter 38 - Inside The Inn Room

    Alright then, now it''s the time to go to the inn¡­ after I bought some cakes for the girls.


    I jumped from rooftop to rooftop until I reached the roof of the inn we''re staying at.


    I looked at the direction of the room they rented. The window is closed although I told them to open it. Maybe they''re changing?


    I activated my Divine Vision and see through the room and saw the two girls in their underwear. They are really changing clothes at the moment¡­ or is it my see-through vision that make me able to see them like that. I don''t know but let''s wait and enjoy the view until they opened the window so I cane in.


    Soon they opened the window with only wearing their underwear. So it''s my see-through vision that make me see them that way. I lowered the strength of my see through and I can see their normal clothes. I need to train more so I can tell the difference when I used my see-through vision too much or not.


    Then I entered through the window they opened.


    "I''m here. Have you girls eaten yet? I brought cakes."


    "We have and we will eat those cakes. Now give them to us."


    Ang''s eyes turned scary when she saw the cakes I brought. Bringing cakes seems a good choice.


    While the girls are eating, I summoned Blobby. But this time, I summoned her differently than before. Usually, I would just use magic to summon her and she would magically appear.


    This time, after hearing Victoria''s exnation about Summoning element, I tried to unsummon Blobby back to her world first. Since she''s my contracted monster, I can summon and unsummon her wherever she is.


    After she returned back to her own world, I used summoning magic to make a portal between two worlds. The portal is connecting this world and the world of monsters where she is. And because the clearer my imagination the greater the magic will be, I imagine a door since it connect two ces.


    As I used the magic, a rectangle shaped portal appear in front of me and a ck slime can be seen on the other side of the portal.


    "Roy! What is that?!"


    Ang surprised seeing a portale out of nowhere.


    "After hearing Victoria''s exnation, I''m trying to make a portal between this world and monsters world. The magic consumption is insane! Blobby! Come quick before I exhausted my magic!"


    Blobby then jumped over the portal and I stopped using my magic. The portal in front of me disappear and the room returned back to normal.


    I slumped down on the bed because I almost emptied my magic.


    "It was exhausting¡­ but at least it worked! It means that Summoners can make a portal between two worlds. But my magic is too low. I really should practice my magic more and increase their levels."


    "Does it means that you can go in and out of that world?"


    "I don''t know yet but I hope it''s true."


    Then I could build a safe ce in that world¡­ only if that world is safe.


    "Well, that''s good to know. But more importantly, about today. I think that was too much effort just to kill one man. Making it seems like a dragon killed him, then turned Blobby into a dragon and make her fly, and we returned to the city and see everyone panicking. It''s too much for just one man."


    Even though it was usually Ka who followed me without question, she''s still said too much, huh.


    "I agree. But that''s if the main target is that one person. My main target is the cult. With this much chaos, the cult must have put an action. They should have known about the dragon or maybe they even chasing Blobby somewhere. Luckily Blobby was never found. When either a hunter or even the cult found the dead body, there will be even more chaos. The guild might even contact high ranked hunters to subjugate the dragon. While the cult will be busy looking for the dragon for research. Which means their n around this time will be changedpletely. Maybe with this I can dy their n for Melk."


    "What?! They have n for Melk city?"


    Both Ang and Ka surprised to hear the truth. And I''m exining about what will happen in few months. About the destruction of Melk city.


    "¡­that''s what happened in my previous life. Although I have interfere a bit about their ns, I think it was still too little to change their n. I feel like even after everything I done, they will still attack Melk. That''s why I hope with this, their ns will be dyed. Even if it''s just by one day, that still mean many people will get stronger a bit. I''m nning to tell the girls at the brothel to get stronger and possibly led a better life. I''m nning to teach them magic in a way that even a Beginner level mage can fight a little in the battle."


    "Is-is that really what happened? What about us?"


    "You two? For Ka it''s obvious in this life that if we never met her, she would have died. For Ang, we''re not close at all but I think you lost someone important to you and that''s what make you into Elemental Master in the future. Though I don''t know who that important person is."


    "I guess that''s true. But what will you do now? Even if we can protect Melk, there''s a limit to what one man can do."


    "That''s why I''m trying to rope in more people. I''m going to involve more people but in a way that I won''t be recognized. I don''t know how to do it yet but at least I will tell the King about the cult. But I think there are still some member of the cult in among the nobles. Just like the governor of Melk. But for now, I''ll just go back to school try to graduate." I''ll think more about itter."


    "Oh right! What school event so important for you that you have to go?"


    "School Exam. There''s three exams in one year. If I want to graduate properly, I have to pass all those exams. It''s easy for me, though."


    "Exam is it¡­ Do we have to take part? I don''t like exams. Why not just demonstrating our magic instead of theory?"


    "You''re free to not take part in it. But if you want to go to higher education, I suggest you to take the exams. Even if you want to go to magic college to improve your magic, having graduated and got a degree from the school will make you easier to enter the college you want to go to."


    "Why do you think we''re going to the college? I think we can just ask you to teach everything."


    "But I don''t have magic resources. Even if you can increase your level without magic resources, having them will increase your magic greatly. But you''re free to choose what you want. Anyway, I will go to medical school like I told you before. If you want to follow me or not, it''s your own choice."


    Then like usual, Ka pointed out something from our conversation and ask me what''s on her mind.


    "Then if you want us to get stronger, why don''t you just ask us to go to college?"


    "I told you before that you''re free to choose what you want to do. But I suggest you to take part in the exam. That way if you want to go to college, it will be easier for you. And if you don''t want to, that''s fine as well."


    "Then I''ll take the exam and think about my future before the next exames. It''s gettingte now so let''s sleep. Turn Blobby into a bed now!"


    I guess she asked me so she can finish our conversation sooner. Well, that''s fine.


    Blobby then turned into a big bed that the two girls can use.


    "Oooh! It''s so soft! And warm! I think I can get addicted to this."


    "You''re right! This feels great."


    "I know, right? Then let''s sleep."


    I shamelesslyy down on the bed together with the girls. Obviously the girls noticed and kicked me out of Blobbybed. Shame.


    "Rest well. We''re returning to Melk for real tomorrow and this time, we''ll just using carriage."


    "Why carriage?"


    "So we can blend in with other people. If we''re going on foot just the day after the dragon''s appearance, it will be suspicious. We can ask the guild if they have a job of guarding a carriage that''s going to Melk. That way we can be rewarded as we''re going home."


    "I see. With this much chaos, some merchant will ask hunters to protect them. Especially if they''re tight on schedule. Okay, then. Tomorrow morning we will go to the guild first."


    With that, our n for tomorrow is settled. And we went into slumber soon.


    That''s what I thought until I use Divine vision to check the area and see something is happening three doors next to ours.


    It''s a man! And a woman! They move a lot!


    And I fell asleep after finished watching them.

 Chapter 39 - Finally Home

    We''re finally home! Back at Melk city!


    After our discussion that night, we went to the guild the next morning and took a job as a guard for a merchant who was going to Melk city. There are several others who took the same job as us since the merchant is a coward. He epted everyone who''s taking his job no matter what their ranks are. And so there were 20 hunters guarding the carriage.


    That''s too much for just one merchant. But the merchant kept his promise and paid us as promised. Although some hunters dislike it when they found out some hunters doesn''t work as much as the other (like me!) get paid the same, there''s nothing they canin about since the merchant has told everyone about it before and they have epted it.


    On the way to Melk, there are also some men who tried to flirt with Ang and Ka but they were all turned down. Luckily for them, there''s no casualties from the "Nutcracker". Ka know that if they''re all crouched down in pain, there will be less people protecting the carriage. So she held back but she makes no promises if they tried to flirt with her after the mission is over.


    And when we enter the city and go to the guild to report, some of the hunters who went there before us talked trash about us. They even shamelessly tried to flirt with the girls again. And of course the nickname "Nutcracker" will be known from today on.


    It''s such an easy money. Making Blobby turns into a dragon and let her fly. Then some merchant will make request to the guild to help protect them from the fake dragon. Aren''t I just the greatest swindler?


    "Now that we''re back, what will you two do?"


    "We''re both going back to our home first and tell our family that we will live in the city and rent an apartment for both of us."


    Looks like Ang and Ka has made a n together. They were thinking to move to the city and rent an apartment so they don''t need to go back and forth to their home vige.


    "That''s nice! Maybe I can stay over from time to time."


    "No. You''re not invited. You''re free toe but you can''t stay over. We can at least make it our base so we can gather there before and after taking mission. And you''re already living together with a lot of women. And a little boy. Didn''t you say that you want to make them stronger?"


    "Oh, right. Then, see you tomorrow at school."


    I said farewell to the girls and go to Red Tail brothel. It''s been almost a month since I saw everyone. Although I just stayed there for a few night, that ce is already home to me. Although midway I''m being surrounded by men who were kicked before in the guild.


    "What do you want?"


    "Now that you''re alone, you can no longer depend on the girls to protect your ass. I will kill you!"


    "Killing me because you can''t kill the girls? You''re just showing your weakness by telling everyone you can''t defeat two teenage girls. That''s just sad."


    "Shut up! Everyone! Kill this guy!"


    But none of them moved. In fact all of them except the one who spoke are fainted. None of them realized it was because I used Air magic to change the air they breathe.


    "What? Guys! What happened?"


    "And now you''re talking to unconscious people. You''re showing your stupidity right now."


    "Shut up!"


    "Is that the attitude you''re showing to someone who is obviously stronger than you and can make dozen of people fainted without you noticing?"


    "Huh? HUH?!"


    He looked around and see that everyone that he called over were down. Do I have to experience this everywhere I go with Ang and Ka? To meet miserable men who were rejected by the two girls and they me me for their own misfortune. I guess I just have to get used to it. If there were witnesses like what happened in Mellian, I could do the same tactic by getting myself undressed. But these people must be less popr than the thugs in Mellian since no one is curious about what happened here. And both Ang and Ka weren''t here so my acting will be having less impact.


    "So? Wanna give it a go?"


    "Eh? Ah! Uhm¡­ Err¡­"


    "Then it''s interrogation time! Are you their leader? Or is there anyone else above you who I need to take care of as well?"


    Because he was extremely afraid of me, he told me everything. He''s a hunter who''s leading a party, which is the people on the ground, and he also has connection with a small time mafia who''s making people fall into debt. Their target is unfortunate people. Maybe Sophie and some of the girls'' debt is toward that guy.


    And he''s also saying the guy''s location. Maybe I should visit him before going back to the brothel. Let''s make them clear the girls'' debt as a souvenir. And having someone like that to be my ally seems to be a better option. Let''s meet him first.


    But I just want to rest today. So maybe tomorrow evening I guess. After school was over.


    "Tell him that a potential business partner wille tomorrow evening that can make him possibly be the richest person in the kingdom. I wille visit his ce and then we will discuss business."


    I make him send a message to the moneylender that I will visit him. And for what business I will do, I''ll take care of it after the exam. I know it will be a huge sess but I have to find a good ce to make it happen first. I know that negotiating while not having anything yet is strange, but I can just make him submit by force if he doesn''t want it. Maybe he will give me a warm wee tomorrow, but for now let''s go back to Red Tail.


    The man leaves his friends on the ground but since I don''t use Air magic anymore, they will probably wake up soon so I also left them.


    Finally I can go home.


    I walked for a bit and soon I reached the brothel. I entered through the back door and meet Daniel inside ying with the girls. He''s so popr.


    "I''m home!"


    "Roy!"


    Daniel who was ying with the girls, stood up from his chair and run to give me a hug. But he was a second toote since there''s another person who hugged me first.


    "Roy! I missed you!"


    It was Sophie. I feel like she''s stressed about something. Must be about her debt.


    "Yeah, I missed you too. Are you alright?"


    "I think I''m alright now that you''re here."


    "My turn!"


    Daniel who lost his chance to hug me first, get between us and hugged my legs. He''s too short to hug my body. So I picked him up.


    "Have you been a good boy?"


    "They say that I''m the bestest!"


    "That''s great!"


    Not like there''s any other boy in this building.


    "How was your journey?"


    Ruby came and asked me about my journey.


    "It was fruitful! I get two things I wanted."


    "Two?"


    "First is I''m stronger now. Second is that I got myself a girlfriend."


    "What?!"


    Every girls in the room surprised by the sudden news, but it was Sophie who seems shocked the most.


    "She''s Ka. One of the girl who came here before we left. The best thing about her is that she allowed me to have a harem!"


    "Oh¡­ then it''s okay if she allow you to have a harem. I will permit you to build a harem if you''re going out with me."


    "...you''re fine with it? And is that a confession?"


    "For the future I guess¡­ Right now, I don''t want to burden you with my debt so at least let me be your girlfriend when my debt is cleared."


    "Oh, yeah! About your debt. Is your debtor called Sam?"


    "You know him?"


    "Not yet. But I just arranged a business meeting tomorrow with him. If it works, I can ask him to clear your debt and also all the other girls'' debt with him."


    Again, everyone is surprised to hear my words.


    "Are you sure about that? If you''re thinking to help us, you don''t have to do that."


    "I''m not helping you. I ''m just doing it because he seems to be a good business partner and I can get a lot of money doing it. And while I''m doing it, it''s a good idea to clear you girls'' debt. Of course if the negotiation is sessful."


    "Oh, Roy! I love you!"


    At first it was just Sophie who hugged me. Then the girls who seems to have debts with Sam moved to tears as well, it turned into a group hug.


    "Wait! If you want to hug me then do it one on one. Bury my head in your bosom for a few seconds and I will be happy. Longer than that and I will be happier. Nowe!"


    The girls agreed to reward me with it. And today turned into one of the happiest moment in my life. Although the one who hugged me the longest is Daniel, this is still fine.

 Chapter 40 - Meeting Sam

    And so, the store was closed for that night and we were partying untilte to celebrate the girls'' debt being cleared. Although the negotiation hasn''t happened yet.


    Then I proceed to give them notes I wrote about how to improve magic without using magic resources. It was to improve their ability and living condition. If they grow stronger, they can also be a hunter and get money from missions.


    Knowing that their living condition can be improved, they got extremely happy. With this, if my negotiation failed tomorrow, they can at least pay their debt by working as hunters during the day. But I''ll try my best to have a sessful negotiation.


    It might be a good thing that their debts are all toward this Sam. Or maybe this is not a coincidence? I asked Ruby about Sam and she refused to answer me. She only said that I will know about Sam during the meeting.


    And then, the party ended with the girls being so studious. Even Hannah''s mother, Penny, is learning. Leaving only me and the two kids Hannah and Daniel since they haven''t gotten their magic yet.


    Everyone now went to their own rooms to study about their elements. Other than themon elements like fire, wind, earth, and ice, I also write about how to increase their magic by meditating. It''s useful for everyone no matter what elements they have.


    And that night I y with the kids until they sleep. I let the kids sleep on the bed while I slept on Blobbybed. Even Sophie who alwayse over, didn''te. I should have given them the notes tomorrow so I can sleep withpanions tonight.


    The next morning, I wake up and find that there''s no one on the bed. Both kids somehow ended up moving to Blobbybed and use my body as a pillow. I carefully pick them up without waking them, and move them to the bed.


    Then I went to the dining room to have a breakfast. And while having breakfast, everyone woke up and we''re having breakfast together. Some of the girls asked me a question about my notes and I exined to them clearly. They are really studious.


    Then as a morning routine, I left the city to exercise in the forest. I practice by myself, not with Victoria since there''s a possibility of something happened tonight during the meeting with Sam, the moneylender. Or is it the mafia? Whatever the case, she''s a little bit involved in the underground. That''s why I choose her to be my business partner.


    I finished my practice and returned to the city to find Ka just arrived.


    "Ka! Hey!"


    "Hmm? Roy! Just finished morning practice?"


    "Yes. How about you? Still practicing rapier?"


    "Of course. I finished practicing ande here as soon as I finished. I already told my family that I won''t live in the vige anymore. It''s great to not having them talking about arranged marriage again. I also told them that I have a boyfriend and I won''t return again."


    "You won''t miss them?"


    "I won''t. I didn''t tell them that I''m pretty sessful as a hunter although still a D-rank. If I do, they would asked me for money. I''m just d I won''t live with them anymore."


    "Well, if that''s what you want."


    Then we walked together toward the school. As for Ang, we will meet her at school so it''s fine to not care about her now.


    "So you''ll be looking for apartment after school with Ang?"


    "That''s the n. Are you going toe with us looking for apartment?"


    "No. I have a n. I have a meeting with some mafia guy. And if you noticed, there''s a guy following me since I entered the city. Must be one of his men."


    "Hmm? I didn''t notice at all."


    "He''s over there. Hiding behind that house. Hey!"


    I waved my hand to the man who followed me. Then he looked surprised and pretend that he didn''t see me.


    "Wait here."


    I asked Ka to wait as I walked to the guy who followed me.


    "Hey. I already noticed you since before I entered the city. If you pretend that you didn''t see me after I waved my hand at you, I will be embarrassed."


    "How did you notice?"


    "That doesn''t matter. Now that I gained a lot of attention because you pretended to not noticing me, the numbers of your people looking at me increased. How many people did Sam ordered to follow me?"


    "¡­"


    "So you won''t answer. Well, that''s fine. Just tell Sam I will meet her after school. And also tell everyone who followed me that if I greet them, they must not embarrass me by pretending to not know me just like you did. That was pretty embarrassing, you know? That''s all I have to say. I''ll be going to school now."


    I left the man and returned to Ka who doesn''t have any change in her expression even after I told her I will have a meeting with a mafia.


    "What kind of meeting will you have with that mafia?"


    "Business kind. I''m looking for partnership with a win-win rtionship. I''m just hoping that Sam will listen to me."


    "What kind of business?"


    "I will give Sam something for Sam to sell."


    "What things?"


    "Possibly, many kind of things."


    "How will you get those things?"


    "A hint. I''m an Air elemental mage."


    "Hmm¡­ I have a guess but I can''t be sure yet. I''ll just ask you tomorrow at school then."


    We continued chatting until we reached the school.


    At school we were told that the exam will start in three days. That was quick. Luckily, we have returned before the exam started. Even though we got dyed because I needed to kill one man.


    "Roy!"


    After school was over, Ang called me.


    "Hmm? I thought you two are going to look for an apartment. You''re looking for me?"


    "Yes. I heard from Ka that you have a business meeting with a mafia. Well, I don''t need to care about that. I just want you to help me study for the exam."


    "Hmm? I thought you''re not choosing to attend college?"


    "You said it before, right? That I can have more options if I graduate? I haven''t thought about the future yet, but at least I want to have more options. That''s why, help me studying!"


    "I also ask the same. Help us studying. Please."


    Out of nowhere, Ka joined us.


    "That''s fine. You''re looking for an apartment, right? Then after you found one, tell me where it is tomorrow. Then from tomorrow until the day of exam, we can study there. Of course if you want to study in a restaurant or somewhere else, that''s fine. As long as you paid for the meal."


    "Our apartment it is. Then see you tomorrow!"


    How much do they hate the thought of treating me to a meal? I guess ordering ten serving is too much.


    Now that the school is over, it''s time to meet Sam.


    I left the school and saw the person watching me from before. This time I waved my hand for a greeting and he waved back. And so I went to look for Sam with a good feeling in my heart.


    Just a normal greeting can make you happy, but why is everyone doesn''t know that? Instead of greet back, they choose to put up their guard? That''s just sad.


    Well, if they don''t know the person who greeted them, it''s obvious that they will put up their guard. Maybe I should introduce myself next time I greet a stranger.


    I said that I''m looking for Sam. It was because none of his men are actually told me where to meet. But that''s fine. If I follow the trail of the people who followed me, I''m sure I can find where he is.


    Using my Divine Vision, I found the building where''s Sam at in no time.


    Before I entered the door, someone called out to me and said that he will bring me to Sam.


    I followed the man to a room in the back.


    As soon as I entered the room, I saw a man sitting on the sofa with a woman wearing maid uniform behind him.


    "Nice to meet you. I''m Sam."


    "No you''re not."


    I know because there''s a hidden door in this room which will lead me to the real Sam. This guy is just one of Sam''s subordinate.


    "What are you talking about?"


    I ignore this fake Sam and walked to where the hidden door is and kicked it open. The man and the maid were surprised to see that I know there''s a hidden door behind the cab.


    There''s a stairs leading down to the basement where the real Sam is.


    As soon as I entered a room in that basement, I was greeted by the real Sam.


    "How did you know I was here?"


    Sam asked with a deep voice. But I know that''s just a pretense.


    "I have a good eyesight. I also know that you''re a woman. I guess it''s not Sam from Samuel, but instead Sam from Samantha."


    "What?!"


    It was the man who pretended to be Sam who was surprised. While the maid only surprised to hear that I know Sam is a woman.


    "Looks like that guy is in a lower position from that maid since she only surprised to hear that I know you''re a woman. She must have known about it before we entered here.


    Anyway, Ie here for a talk. Let''s talk about business."

 Chapter 41 - Negotiation With Sam

    "You''re just barging in here, entering the secret room of our group, and just saying ''let''s negotiate''? Are you crazy?"


    I didn''t feel any malicious intent from Sam, so I guess she''s just curious and surprised. Of course she did. After all, I bet even those lower ranked thugs never know about this room and the fact that she''s the real Sam. The man over there must have been ying as Sam for a long time. But there''s something odd about the man. Maybe I could use him in this negotiation.


    "Based on my actions so far, from asking your henchman so I can meet you, until I kicked the secret door open, I think I am a madman. I''m indeed crazy, but by choice."


    "Crazy by choice¡­ then your business with me must be something crazy as well."


    "You''re right. I''m gonna ask you for a partnership of 50:50, and also the clearance of the debt of everyone in Red Tail brothel, for something I will give you but I don''t have them yet."


    "¡­"


    "How about it?"


    None of them spoke. They must be thinking I''m crazy. Well, they''re not wrong. Even I think I''m crazy sometime¡­ most of the time¡­ all the time¡­


    "¡­and the things you''re gonna trade with us is¡­?"


    "Don''t know yet. But I know where to get a lot of them."


    "So basically, you''re here without having anything at all to trade with us, thinking that your proposal will be epted?"


    "Yes!"


    "¡­ Lina. Serve him some drink."


    "Okay. Coffee or tea?"


    Lina must be the maid''s name. Does her serving me drinks mean that the negotiation proceed smoothly?


    "Coffee please."


    "Just asking your preferences. I will only give you water whatever your preference is."


    "Damn! So evil! Water is fine."


    Why would she asked coffee or tea like that?


    "Even our maid knows that the negotiation failed. If she thinks you''re worthy of listening, she will serve you the drink you asked. Since she''s just giving you water, that means you''re not worth listening to. You have nothing but asking for a 50:50 for that? You''re beyond crazy."


    Looks like it failed. Oh well, it''s not like the negotiation will end smoothly as I imagined. Then there''s another thing left to give her.


    "Okay, I''ll give you an important information. Then your maid can serve me a parfait."


    "What information do you think will benefit me? That you can make money out of nowhere?"


    "A mind-blowing one. Hey, you! The fake Sam! Come over here!"


    I turned my head to the man who stayed still the whole conversation in the corner of the room.


    "No. I''ll just stay here."


    "Then I''lle to you."


    There''s one thing I''m curious about.


    It''s about what the scarred palm guy had inside his mouth.


    At first, I thought that it was some kind of candy. I never checked it because I used Blobby to destroy his head and what''s inside of it. But now, I see the same thing inside this man''s mouth.


    It was that pinkish colored thingy located behind his mr. If he opened his mouth, no one would notice it because its color is the same as the tongue. Even if someone seen it, they would just think that it''s a candy like I did.


    Back then, I was only concentrated fully in killing that man. But now, since killing is not the real goal here, I can see clearly that this fake Sam has that same thing inside his mouth. Does it means he''s part of the cult? That''s what I''m about to find out and also one information I''m about to tell Sam. The real Sam.


    I''m gonna hit him real hard, and if I''m wrong, I''ll just apologizeter. But my instinct tells me that I''m right and I trust my instinct.


    "Hey. What''s your name?"


    "¡­"


    "You don''t wanna answer? Then I''ll call you Sammy since she is the real Sam."


    "¡­"


    Sammy just ignore me. Well, what I''m gonna do to him is not something he can ignore.


    I walked closer to Sammy and when he''s within my reach, I kicked his gut.


    "Guah!"


    Sammy crouched while holding his stomach. I didn''t kick him that hard, right? Well, as an Aura user who has trained my body, even a light kick can damage untrained people that much.


    Sam stood up from her seat and Lina also prepared to use her magic on me.


    "What are you doing?!"


    I didn''t answer her. I just use my left hand to grab Sammy''s jaw that opened wide because of my kick, and use my right hand to pick that little thing inside his mouth.


    "Got it! Do you two know what this is?"


    I asked Sam and Lina about my discovery. The thing in my hand has a round shape, and small enough to be covered behind Sammy''s teeth. The color is a bit pinkish like the color of tongue which makes it harder to find.


    "What is that thing?! Why is that thing inside his mouth?"


    "If I guess correctly, that thing is a small magic explosive. If you infuse a bit of magic to it, it will explode in an instant."


    Sam doesn''t know about what''s in my hand, while Lina seems to know something. I''ve heard about magic device that can explode once infused with magic. But this is the first time I''ve seen it.


    "It will explode, huh? Let''s see."


    "Wait! If you infuse your magic, it will explode in an instant!"


    I ignored Lina''s words about in an instant. With my quick reaction, I''m sure I can throw it away before it explode.


    And just as I thought, after I infuse magic through that little thing, I threw it away before it explode. And then there''s an explosion 5 meter away from me with the strength that''s enough to destroy a head.


    "What a way to suicide. Right, Sammy?"


    He was slightly amused when I tried to infuse magic to that thing, but when he saw my speed to throw it away before it exploded, he makes a surprised face.


    "Is that how your organization try to keep their secret? Giving their members an explosive so they can burst their own head when things goes south?"


    "No we''re not! Although we''re a gang, we-"


    "I''m not asking you, Sam. I''m asking Sammy here and the organization he belong to."


    "¡­how much do you know."


    Sammy seems to have a sudden change in his attitude. He also prepared to fight back but I punched his nose before he reacted.


    "I know that the governor of Melk is one of you."


    "What?! Samuel! Who are you?!"


    Sam seems surprised hearing that the governor is a part of the organization Sammy is in. But his real name is Samuel? Does she thinks that if the fake Sam is also a Sam, then it''s not a lie?


    "¡­"


    He kept quiet instead of answering his boss.


    "Does anyone has a rope to bind him? What I''m about to give you is information of that organization."


    Then Lina stepped forward and used her magic.


    "Vine Wrap!"


    Then from the vase on the coffee table, a nt suddenly grows big and using its vine to bind Sammy.


    "Oh! You''re a summoning element mage? That''s the same as me! And your summon is a nt type monster! That''s awesome!"


    I saw Lina''s face blushed slightly because of my praise, but it then she shook her head and the color of her face returned back to normal. I thought I saw a slight smile from her expressionless face.


    "For now, I''ll introduce you guys to the organization he belongs. Rather than organization, I''d like to call it a cult. Their goals is to revive the glory of the Evil God. So let''s call them Evil God Cult."


    "How did you know about our cult?!"


    "¡­Sammy, oh Sammy. You must be a low-ranked member of the cult if you can''t shut your mouth. You just told me that the name of the cult is Evil God Cult."


    I thought it was called that because of the naming sense of the one who discovered their goals. But it''s actually their real name?


    "Wait! Evil God? What Evil God?"


    "I''ll tell youter. For now I will tell you about their n. They are nning to destroy this city by using monsters stampede."


    "How did you know our n?!"


    "And you''re admitting it. Again! He really is stupid. Why did you pick this guy as your substitute?"


    Sammy just stupidly, admitted the n of the cult again. It got me curious to how Sam picked him as her substitute.


    "¡­his name is Samuel and can be called Sam like me. That''s all. But seriously, why would anyone tried to destroy this city?"


    "For an example, I guess. To show the world what they capable of. So, since you''re interested in this talk, where''s my parfait?"


    "¡­ I haven''t agreed to your offer yet, but still¡­ Lina! Get him a parfait!"


    "¡­"


    "Lina?"


    The maid doesn''t move at all even though her mistress is ordering her. Then she turned her eyes toward me and said something weird.


    "My summon''s vine can reach up to 20 meter."


    "Huh?"


    "¡­"


    Oh! She must be waiting for apliment! After my praise about how cool her nt monster is, she want to be praised more!


    "That''s cool!"


    Then she left the room with a happy expression on her face.


    "Does she always like that?"


    "No. It''s the first time I''ve seen her like that. Maybe because of our line or works, she barely ever get praises from others. That''s why after youpliment her, she wants more."


    "Haha! That''s cute!"


    For someone who worked in the underground world, as the maid of one gang leader, she''s way too cute. I will surely give her more praises.

 Chapter 42 - Negotiation Concluded

    "So? Where were we?"


    While waiting for my parfait, we continued our meeting.


    "You''re talking about destroying this city with monsters stampede. How will those cult do that?"


    "They will spread some kind of substance, possibly a monsters attracting potion, around the city. While the members themselves, will drink a potion that will make them won''t be attacked by monsters. That''s what I heard. But looking from Sammy''s expression, I got it right."


    This time, Sammy kept quiet and not talking at all. But his face shows a different expression when I said the truth that he kept a secret.


    Knowing that I can see his expression''s changing, he kept his head down this time. To make it harder for me to find the truth from him. But that''s useless to me who have Divine Vision. I can see his heart beats faster when I said what he tried to hide.


    "Does that things even exist? The potions to attract monsters and potions to makes monsters won''t attack us?"


    "They are. Even if they still don''t exist yet, the cult would makes them. And I believe they will attack us when they have finished their products. At least that what I learned from eavesdropping on them."


    "And the governor is a part of this?"


    "Yes. And possibly, many of the guards here are part of the cult as well."


    I''m just guessing it, but at least, back when I killed their new recruits, the ones who opened the gates before the supposed times were their members. There are four gates in this city. North, east, south, and west. And back then when I passed the gate, there were at least four guards. That means at least there are twelve guards who are members of the cult. Or at least disguising themselves as the guards.


    Fortunately, I have gained my Divine Vision ability. If the cult members have the same exploding device in their mouth, I can see it. And so I can tell if they are part of the cult or not. I don''t know if every members have them in their mouth, but at least those who has, are part of the cult.


    "And? How did you know he''s part of that cult?"


    Sam asked me curiously.


    "It was that exploding device in his mouth. This is just the second time I''ve seen it so I wasn''t sure yet. But thanks to him being stupid enough to admit he''s part of the cult, I know now."


    "You! You''re just lucky to find me! But regardless of what you found out, this city will be destroyed! There''s nothing you can do on your¡ªGuh!"


    And so, I punched him in the gut for speaking without permission.


    "I''ll ask you a question then. Do you know the dragon''s appearance near Mellian? Was there any victim killed by the dragon?"


    I asked Sammy about the dragon.


    "Ugh¡­ there''s no casualties despite the appearance of the dragon. There are many witnesses who saw the dragon and heard its roar, but there''s no victim."


    "Despite being punched in the gut, you sure answered honestly. Well¡­ you''re wrong! There''s one casualty. It was someone like you with an explosive inside his mouth. A man with a scar on his palm. I''ve seen him before in the forest. At the entrance of the cave where you''re examining your new recruits. Where every single one of the new recruits and the examiners died."


    "What?! How did you know the dead? And the ce where we trained our new recruits, you know about it?"


    "Not just I know about it, I caused it! Every single one of them are killed by me! Blobby!"


    I called out Blobby who has been disguising himself as my armguard all this time.


    "This is my summon, Blobby. A ck Slime with shapeshifting ability. I turned him into a de simr to the monsters during the massacre and killed all of your new recruits. And I made it as if it was caused by the monsters."


    I showed him how Blobby can transform to anything I wanted.


    "You!"


    "That''s not all."


    I turned Blobby again and this time she''s changed into the dragonhead scissor.


    "I''m the dragon! The main cause of the panic in Mellian was me! I used dragon as a disguise to not let your cult realize someone like me exist!"


    Sammy turned speechless this time. And Sam has the same reaction as well.


    "After using this dragonhead scissor to kill the scarred palm guy, I changed Blobby to a dragon and let it fly so many people can see her. And the panic thates was within expectation."


    "¡­that''s too much effort just to kill one man. You really don''t want to be found, huh?"


    It was Sam who asked me.


    "Yeah. In the end, I''m still too weak to fight against such a huge organization. I believe the Evil God Cult''s influence has spread around the world. There''s limit to what one can do so at least until I have the strength, I won''t let my identity be found. This guy will die soon and somehow I can trust you with this information. Just so you know, we are still in negotiation."


    "So you want to kill him? How will you do it if you don''t want to alert the cult?"


    "Do you have a rival organization? Another mafia group or a gang of thugs?"


    "I see¡­ that''s interesting. Now I feel like the negotiation will proceed smoothly. I''ll take care of him then."


    "Feels like epting my conditions now? As for him, just tell me where to find the group. If I found that none of them are part of the cult, I will tell you."


    "Once you tell me, I will act ordingly. As for your conditions, I want to listen more. I feel like you already have n even if the city is truly destroyed."


    As expected of the real leader. Of course I have an idea of what to do.


    "First thing first, I want to try my best in stopping the destruction of this city. But even if I stopped it, I will move to another city because I want to enroll in medical school in Cassau. I want you to move your base to that city so we can proceed our business easier. But please move until I have shown you what I will trade with you. Then you can choose to continue our partnership or not."


    "Good."


    "Hey. Please don''t kill me."


    While we were conducting negotiation, Sammy somehow interrupted us. So this time, I hit him real hard so he will faint. At least it''s not enough to kill him yet.


    "So? Why did you trust me?"


    "Somehow I felt something familiar from you. Are you and Ruby of the Red Tail rted?"


    "¡­she''s my mom. And she was supposedly be the real leader of our group. Few years ago she left me in charge and choose to build a brothel."


    What?! She''s Ruby''s daughter?! No wonder I felt like Ruby knows Sam.


    "So? What else do you want from us?"


    "About the clearance of the girls'' debts¡­"


    "It''s all done. We already have a lot of money even if they choose not to pay."


    "Great! Well, I have an exam at school, so I will tell you after I catch some stuffs to trade with you. We will continue our talkter. Just prepare to move if you decide to continue our partnership."


    "And what will you do now?"


    "Waiting for my parfait. I''ll search for your rival organization after this and I''ll tell you which one to me for Sammy''s death. Just tell me all organization that hostile to you."


    "Alright. They''re all¡­"


    I listened to her telling the groups one by one from the biggest group to the smallest. I feel like there are too many groups in this small city.


    While we were talking, my long awaited parfait is here!


    "Here is your parfait."


    "It looks so delicious! Thanks!"


    "Cough. By the way, all the topping fruits are from the fruits I grows,"


    She''s still thinking of gettingpliments? That''s fine with me.


    "You grow fruits on your own? That''s awesome! You''re the perfect maid!"


    She doesn''t reply. But her face turned totally red and she has a smile she tried to hide on her face.


    "Lina. You''re always doing your best. You are truly the best assistant I could have."


    This time, Sam tried to give Linapliment. But Lina react differently than when Ipliment her.


    "Just doing my job."


    Both Sam and I are confused with her reaction, so we talk in whisper so Lina won''t listen.


    "Why is her reaction different?"


    "Maybe I''m just her type."


    "You?!"


    "Is there something wrong?"


    Curious, Lina asked us.


    "Well, our negotiation today has concluded so after finishing this parfait I will leave to do some works. Then¡­ Sam, I''ll see you tonight?"


    "Tonight is fine. I''ll let Lina open the secret door so you won''t burst it open again. See youter."


    And we make a promise to meet again after I checked other groups.


    I left after finished my parfait like I said and went to look for the groups Sam said. Maybe I can kill some of the cult''s members I find?

 Chapter 43 - Another Journey

    And so, a week has passed since my negotiation with Sam.


    That day, after concluding our negotiation, I left to check the rival group. Luckily, the first group I checked has no member of the cult. It was Sam''s group biggest rival so it won''t be strange if Sammy died because of that group.


    After telling Sam that night, she told me that she will take care of it. Seeing how she preserved Sammy in ice, it might be a while until she nned out everything. But I will trust her in how she will do it.


    Funnily, when I got to Sam''s base that night, a parfait already waiting for me to eat. And a maid already waiting for my praise. When I told Lina I wille after I got the goods, she looked dejected.


    Aaah! I want to praise her every day!


    I went back to the brothel telling the girls'' debt are cleared. The brothel closed again that night. And it hasn''t been opened since the girls are focused to be stronger so they can be a hunter instead of sex worker again.


    When I told Ruby about my negotiation with her daughter, she told me that she built this brothel so the girls who fall into debt can pay their debt little by little. So when the debts are cleared, she found no reason to continue her business. Now it looked like this brothel changed into magic school since everyone were so enthusiastic.


    Some of the girls also has rare magic which hard to find. Like Sophie''s lightning element. If only she had enough resources, she would be able to pay her debt by doing some quests.


    Although we still don''t have enough resources, at least I can teach everyone to improve without using resources. Of course I only told them what Victoria told me.


    The day after my negotiation with Sam, I went to Ang''s and Ka''s new apartment and tutor them for the exam. Other than some magic theories, the exam include math, history, andnguage. Language is obvious because not many people can read, so if the student want to go to college, they must be able to read and write. Math is necessary to not be swindled when shopping, and history is so everyone knowsmon knowledge of the past. As for geography, somehow it wasn''t taught in the first ce so it''s not included in the exam.


    For the people in this time, they don''t need to know the location of another country. As long as they know their city, the cities surrounding, and where the capital is, they will be fine. It was until about 20 yearster that geography was taught in school so people will know the boundary between countries. At least that''s what I''ve heard.


    Anyway, the test was finished and we all passed. Since this is my second life, I can pass easily. Ka is smart enough that even if I didn''t tutor her, she would be fine on her own. As for Ang, she barely pass the exam. She found it difficult to study anything not rted to magic.


    Well, that''s all for the written exam. Next is magic exam.


    For those who wanted to learn other things than magic, like how I aim to be a doctor, magic exam won''t change the result for the exam. But if you do it well, you might get a rmendation to an elite college for magic and get magic resources and schrship.


    This magic exam wasn''t important. There are three exams in one year so the most important one is the third exam since that''s where the students is at their strongest point in their student days. And after thatst exam, there will be another sparring event likest month, but there might be scouts in the audience to offer the students rmendation to their schools.


    I told that to the girls and they choose to hold back during this time. They each showing their weakest magic. Ang used her wind magic and Ka used her Light magic.


    As for me¡­


    "Summon! ck Slime, Blobby!"


    The teachers not making any changes in their expression after I summoned Blobby. That''s all I needed to show as summoner. Since the strength of summoner can only be shown by how strong their summons are, so when I summoned Blobby, the teacher already made their judgment.


    Then one of the teacher asked me a question.


    "Why is the name of your monster is ''Blobby''?"


    "Because she''s a blob. Another option is Blimey."


    "Alright, next!"


    What? Nothing else? He''s just ask me about the origin of Blobby''s name? He doesn''t want to ask why Blimey? Blimey!


    In any case, my grade is already decided by the teacher. At least they know that it''s useless to rmend me to magic college. At least with my grade, they encourage me to go to medical college when I told them that''s what I''m aiming for.


    And so, the time hase for me to leave this city again.


    "So? Where are you going?"


    Ka and Ang are curious about my destination. But seems like Ka already had a guess.


    "Cassau city."


    "Cassau? You''re going to the sea?"


    "As expected of you. I already guessed what you''re going to do."


    Ang doesn''t know what my goal is, but Ka already guessed it.


    Ka knows because Cassau is a city next to a sea. It''s also where most trade happened since it''s where the harbor is and the destination of merchant from other countries who''s doing business in our kingdom, Tatrama Kingdom.


    I feel like this is the very first time I thought of the name of this kingdom since I turned back in time.


    "Ka, you know about it?"


    "I don''t know his destination is, but I can guess what he''s going to do."


    "And that is¡­"


    ""He''s (I''m) going fishing.""


    Both of us answered at the same time.


    "What?"


    And of course Ang is curious why I''m going fishing in another city.


    "Do you remember that I had just get a partnership with someone?"


    "If I''m not wrong, your partner is a mafia or something."


    "Right. But after this mission on Cassau, I bet they will choose to be merchant since it''s very profiting."


    "You''re going to trade fish?"


    "Possibly, and also all other things thaty in the bottom of the sea."


    "Since he can breathe underwater, he''s going treasure hunting under the sea, where no one has ever tried to before. Not just because it''s hard to find mage that can fight underwater, but also because of the monsters there. Most of the monsters under the sea are still unknown to us. We can learn from books and hearsay about shark-type monster, siren, and other well-known monsters, but it is presumably only less than 1% of what''s hidden under the sea. It is an unknown territory."


    Ka kindly exined to Ang.


    "What?! Why are we going there if the monsters are unknown?"


    "What? You''re thinking ofing along?"


    "Huh?"


    Huh? Ang seems to think that she wille along. Why does she think that?


    "It is a totally unknown territory, so I don''t suggest you toe along. In the first ce, I want to go there alone. With Blobby/Victoria."


    "Eh? Then what will I do?"


    "You and Ka can choose to do some quests like usual and improve your rank. And I''m asking you to teach the girls in Red Tail about being a hunter."


    "Sure. I can do that."


    It was Ka who answered.


    "Well¡­ I can do that too. But I''m worried about you since you said that it''s a totally unknown territory."


    "Oh? You''re worried about me? Don''t tell me that you have fallen for me?"


    "No. You can leave. I will help the girls from Red Tail."


    Her attitude changes too quickly. Does it mean there''s no chance for her to like me? Well, that doesn''t matter since I already have Ka.


    "But are you sure you can find treasure at the bottom of the sea?"


    "Yes. Think about it. Most trade to far ces, are transported by ships. And even though we already have a safe sea route, it took us hundreds of years to finally found it. Before that, there are already many ships sunk because of monsters. Even today, although we have a safe routes, it doesn''t mean monsters won''t attack. It''s just a route where monsters are less likely to appear.


    And so, where are the goods carried by the ships? They''re at the bottom of the sea. Other than that, there must be another treasure I can get there."


    "What treasure?"


    "Resources. Since it''s at the bottom of the sea, there should be magic resources for ice element. Then if I find underwater volcano, there might be another one for fire element. As for earth, maybe they are buried in a cave underwater. Ice, if I go to a ce close to iceberg. There might be other, but that''s the obvious ones. Many researchers already thought about it, but since the ces they are located is difficult to reach, no one has ever tried it. But what about me? I have Air element that makes me able to breathe anywhere, Blobby who can change into any shape I want, my vision that can see through the darkness, and my Aura ability. Since if I trained Aura I could walk on air, what about underwater? Especially when water is much thicker than air. My Aura and Air element should be able to make me move well even underwater. So this is an experiment for me."


    "You''re risking your life for an experiment?"


    "You should know it by now that I won''t risk my life. If I can''t do it, I would just give up. That''s all."


    "Roy. You forgot one thing. Underwater ruins."


    "That''s right! If I could find one, I can be rich in one day!"


    Thanks to Ka reminder, now I have one more thing to look forward.


    After that, I return to Red Tail and tell everyone I''m leaving to Cassau. I also told the girls that they can learn from Ang and Ka when I leave. Daniel about to cry when he realize I''m leaving again, but after I told him it won''t be as long as before, he calmed down.


    That night, he hugged me tight in his sleep.

 Chapter 44 - Swimming Practice

    I have arrived in Cassau City. Since I''m going alone, it''s pretty fast even if I go by foot.


    Well, it''s not like I''m all by myself. I have Blobby who sometime turned into Victoria.


    During my journey, Victoria would volunteer to fight monsters on her own. Since I have my spear by my side, it''s fine if she leaves me for a while. And it feels like I have be a proper summoner. I stay in the back while my summon will defeat monsters.


    So while Victoria is defeating monsters and improving my summoning element, I practiced Air element so it can reach Intermediate level. It''s two birds with one stone.


    Although it was only for a few hours a day, it was worth it. Little by little, Victoria''s time has increased again. I believe soon I will reach Intermediate level in my summoning element. Especially soon when I will fight more monsters underwater.


    In just three days, I have arrived at Cassau City. I went to find an inn to lodge in and see around the city first.


    Since this city will be my base in the future.


    There''s a medical college I will attend. I won''t attend right away after graduation. At least two or three years after. Since during that time, there''s no incident caused by the cult.


    If I remember correctly, the cult only attacked the cities like Melk and few others along with the viges nearby the target. And after that, they somehow disappeared for about five years. So I want to train myself and improve my magic level before I attend college.


    Why did I choose to attend college here? At first, I was fine choosing anywhere. Then when I thought of getting treasures from the bottom of the sea, I want to choose a city close to the shore.


    I have several options, but the college in Cassau is pretty high-leveled. The magic college wasn''t that well-known around the country, but the medical college does. It''s not the best but at least it was pretty good. And I know that the students has much freedom. They don''t need to take sses, but still need to pass the exam. Just like in introductory school. In other college, their attendance will be important for graduation.


    It has too much freedom that the professor doesn''t even try to remember the students'' names. At least only the smart ones are remembered.


    As long as the students doesn''t makes the school looks bad, they are free to do whatever they want. Of course they still have to pay tuition.


    Once I graduate from introductory school, I will move here and go ''fishing'' for two or three year, then I will attend college after that. If Ka and Ang still doesn''t know what they want to pick for their future, I will suggest them to move with me to this city.


    If my treasure hunting now is a great sess, Sam will probably move here like I told her to. Then I could ask for her help to find a house to live in. a big building perhaps, so that Daniel, Ka, Ang, and probably the girls from the Red Tail can live together with me in this city.


    Maybe I can build a n? That''s for the future, so it''s not important right now. For now I will just improve my strength, magic, and wealth. Also personal connection if I found someone interesting.


    The next day, I went to a beach somewhere where no one goes to. Since it will be surprising for them if they see someone dive into the sea and neveres out after several hours.


    "Now then, let''s dive!"


    I changed into a shorts so that it won''t restrict my movement underwater since the water already restricted my movement so much.


    My Air element is fully activated. And I can breathe normally underwater. I made a space inside my mouth to be filled with Oxygen, so I can breathe in just fine and I breathe out from my nose. So far so good. I can breathe just fine.


    Now then, the real thing. Aura has many function. And I will try to use Aura to cover my body so I can move better underwater.


    Aura has a lot of function. One of them that I tried is covering my body with Aura to increase my defense. This is what Victoria said should be able to make me walk on air. In the future, after I be better in using my Aura, I should be able to walk on air by covering my feet in Aura, then it will makes me able to step on air just like that. I can''t do it now, but since I have Air element, as soon as I can materialize air, and make it touchable, I should be able to do it soon. Not needing me to grow my Aura power that much.


    But using Aura to cover my whole body underwater, it only makes me sunk deeper underwater. I can reach the bottom of the sea faster, but that''s not what I needed. It''s difficult to move. What I want is to move freely underwater.


    Then I realize something. I was so stupid.


    Since it''s underwater, trying to walk underwater is a stupid thing. What I should do is to swim faster. That''s all I need to do. Not trying to force myself to move normally as if it''s on thend.


    Trying to cover the whole body might be a good idea if I''m about to fight underwater, but this is just a movement practice. I will try to swim with the help of Aura. Maybe I will get faster like how I run onnd with Aura covering my feet.


    That''s it!


    I only need to cover my legs with Aura! Maybe my arms as well for maneuverability. But for a straight line, just my legs should be enough.


    I did that and as I thought, I can swim very fast!


    In fact, it was too fast!


    "GLUGLABLALABLUBLUGLUB-"


    It was too surprising that I opened my mouth and forgot to use Air magic. And it also hurting my eyes moving too fast! I was in panic so I tried to calm myself down.


    It works that I can swim fast, but I need to think everything else as well. But the answer to my new trouble is simple. First, I have to keep my mouth shut. Then I need to keep my eyes shut.


    I don''t need to open my mouth to breathe, but I forgot about my air magic because I was in panic. I also don''t need to open my eyes since I can see through my eyelid with my Divine Vision.


    I did just that and the result is clear. I can now swim faster than most of the fish around me!


    WOOHOO!


    I shouted internally since I''m still afraid of opening my mouth and make another blub-blub. If there''s anyone on the surface see, they might be curious about the sources of the bubbles. What do they think? A mermaid? I should try to find a pair of shells in perfect size then. To be more convincing.


    I''m having the time of my life. Swimming to the bottom of the ocean, then quickly raise to the surface. Because it''s just a straight line, I don''t need to cover my hands with Aura. Just keep moving my legs so I can be faster and faster. Having Vision Divine also helped me to see what''s in front of me.


    I want to jump to the sky!


    Finally I reached the surface and Boom!


    "WOOOOOHOOOOOOO!"


    This time, I no longer shout internally. And I also jumped as high as thirty meter. That''s so high. I feel so close to the sky. Although it was just thirty meters, but I started from the bottom of the sea. And it''s also about 50 meters underwater because I''m still not that far from the shore. But the feeling I have is like I''m with the sky.


    As I''m still in the air, I also tried to walk on air using just Aura under my feet. But I still can''t do it. Then I used Air magic to make air resistance denser under my feet. I feel a bit of resistance but still not enough to make me stay on air. But being able to swim fast is more than enough at the moment.


    To make it more stylish, I did a flip and nd'' on the sea surface. Since I just learned to kick water, I tried to step on water. And Inded perfectly.


    "A perfectnd for a new mermaid."


    What I don''t know, is that about 80 meters from me, there''s a fishermen on a ship looking my way. Although I have Divine Vision, I was too focused in what''s in front of me so I didn''t notice it at all until Inded on the sea surface.


    "A sea demon! A sea demon appears!"


    "I''m a mermaid!"


    Oh shit!


    I undo the Aura under my feet and let myself sink. Why the hell did I shout back? Just few days ago, I make a ruckus in Mellian with a fake dragon. Now I make a new trouble with a fake mermaid?


    I hope the chaos this time won''t be too big.

 Chapter 45 - Underwater Battle Technique Training

    Now that my movement has improved, next is how to fight underwater.


    The easiest option is for me to use spear ornce and swim directly to my opponent and pierce through its body. That''s one way to fight.


    But this is underwater. No matter how good I am at swimming underwater now, there''s a possibility that sea monsters is more agile underwater than I am. If I attacked straightforward with my spear, the monster might be able to dodge it. I need more type of attack.


    For example, if there is a monster under me, I can change Blobby into a heavy weapon like Axe or Hammer, and altering its weight with Blobby''s ability, I can crush the monster in one shot. Let''s try it.


    I changed Blobby into a giant hammer, and swung it down as I alter its weight. The result is I spun a few times with just one swing.


    It has strong power, but difficult to control underwater. It''s good to one-shot my enemy, but if there are multiple monsters, I have no chance in winning.


    That''s it for heavy weapon. Now for light weapon, my weapon of choice is a sword. I can move it normally if I use my Aura to cover my arms, but that''s it. No killing power at all. If the monster has a sturdy defense, there''s no way I can kill them unless I use hammer or axe, but they have their own w.


    I need something all-rounder. Able to move easily underwater, has a good reach, and able to strike a killing blow.


    Hmm¡­ it''s difficult. I guess I should train my body and Aura ability more. Looks like it''s alle to my own physical ability rather than weapon selection or Aura. Although Aura can improve my physical ability, it''s still not enough. I need to train more so I can use more power.


    It''s a good thing I choose to not go to medical college right away. During the time after I graduate, I can practice my underwater battle technique as well during that time.


    But that''s forter. For now, I''ll just concentrate to foil the cult''s n to destroy Melk city and to make sure everyone I care about survive during the tragedy. Maybe I should just tell them all to move to another city so I can rx and not care about the rest of the people who will die.


    No. I can''t. I''m not evil enough to let innocent people die when I know I can save them. At least I will make proposal for everyone to move to another city. I''ll let Sam look for building for us all to reside in Cassau when she moves.


    Well, for now let''s find treasures first. After all, that''s the main reason I''m training my underwater battle technique. And it will be my source of ie for years and I will be rich! I hope it''s a good idea to trust Sam with this money-making scheme.


    I want to practice more, but the current is making my movements restricted. At least I can swim just fine even under strong current. But my speed is slowed down a bit. If I swim following the current, then my speed will increase instead.


    That''s it!


    I don''t have to fight the current! I just need to follow it!


    I swung the sword shaped Blobby and try to follow the current. My movement be much smoother and faster. But the weapon''s trajectory can''t be changed.


    Wait! What if I don''t make sudden stop or sudden directional change? And try to make the weapon''s movement into an 8 shape. With no sharp turn during each movement.


    I tried just that and the result is incredible! If it''s like this, then I can fight any kind of monsters underwater! Hopefully.


    But I feel like there''s a room for improvement. What is it?


    That''s right! The weapon selection!


    My weapon of choice is a normal shape double-edge sword. The t area on the side is too thin. If I change it to a wider t area, I can follow the current better and its power will be increased.


    And so, I changed Blobby again into a shape of a broadsword like one of the weapon I''ve seen Victoria used. She called it Chinese broadsword. Is that where it came from? It''s one weapon that originated in Victoria''s original world. At least I''ve never seen or read anything about this type of sword.


    When people say sword, it''s that double-edge sword that I usually made Blobby transform into. Never have there been a single edged curved de with wide t area on its side like this in history of this world. At least the history that was written. No one really know about history other than the people involved in it. Even the greatest and smartest historian, would make assumption from discovery they found. But what they found at least make more things clearer about the past.


    Using this broadsword, my attacks are more powerful than before. If it''s a normal weapon, it would break if I used too much force, but since this is my trusted partner Blobby, I can use as much power as I want to. Blobby is invincible!


    Invincible Blobby!


    Immortal Blobby!


    Praise the Blobby!


    The greatest blob in the world!


    After singing my praise to Blobby internally, I feel my body a bit sluggish. Of course after making so much movement underwater I would be tired. Ie up to the surface and look for an ind to rest.


    There''s a small deserted ind nearby and I swum there after seeing around and see there''s no one this time who would think I''m a sea demon.


    On the way to the ind, I grabbed some fishes for lunch.


    Finally my feet touchednd. I feel like it has been a long time since I''m on solid ground. Well, the sand in the bottom of the sea doesn''t count. And the sea surface when I walk on water also doesn''t count. This is a real solid ground.


    I made a fire and cook the fishes I caught. Then I heard a voiceing out of my left arm.


    "Hmm¡­ you did well figuring all that out. Underwater movements and battle technique. Also weapon selection. You did all of that so well on your own."


    My armguard is talking! Wait no! It''s Victoria!


    "You juste out now?"


    "It was underwater after all. I don''t need air but I don''t know if I can speak underwater. And even if I could, I don''t know if you can hear me."


    "Right. So? Why are youing out now? Do you have any advice for underwater battle technique?"


    "No. As far as I can tell, you already did more than what I can advise you."


    "And what is your advice?"


    "Do it with guts!"


    "That''s useless advice."


    In the end, we''re just chatting useless stuffs.


    "Oh! I like the part where you yelled out ''I''m a mermaid''! That''s the best part today."


    "Yeah. That''s why I picked up two simr shells to cover my chest area. Then my disguise will be perfect."


    "But real mermaid doesn''t have shells. They just go out as they are."


    "Awesome. But I will still keep the shells. It''s cool for a goodugh."


    "Do whatever you want. Thanks to you now I have learn how to fight underwater. I''m going to dive now and practice it myself. You just need to rest. If I find any treasures, I''ll bring it back here. You just need to rest."


    What good partner I have! There''s no other summoner as happy as I am. She''s perfect as a lifelong partner. And more importantly...


    "What is that you''re wearing?"


    She has changed into her humanoid shape. And she''s almost naked! With only some important spots covered.


    "It''s a kind of sexy swimsuit from my world. You like it?"


    "Very much so."


    Her important ces are covered with a bit of cloth which connected with strings to the other important spots. That world she came from¡­ I want to go there!


    "Enough watching. I still have a little of time. When I can go out all day, I will wear other clothes from my world only when there''s just two of us. You''re gonna enjoy it."


    She said that then she dives into the sea. What kind of clothes will she shows me? Maybe if I give her paint, she will color her own outfits to makes it closer to how it looked in her world. Maybe I need to learn painting so she will allow me to color her outfits.


    Whatever the case, there''s more thing I look forward in the future.


    I lost in my own imagination as I took a bite off of the fish I just cooked.


    "It''s burnt¡­"


    Because I lost in thought for a while, the fishes is burnt ck. So I returned to the sea and get some more fishes to cook while waiting for Victoria to surface and bring me treasures.

 Chapter 46 - Sunken Ship

    I sunbathe as I waited for Victoria to surface. Since her time is limited, she shoulde out before her time is up. And if she''s able to find some treasures, she would inform me where to find it and also the danger in the area.


    Maybe she found where I can harvest water type magic stone. It''s a stone used as resources for mage to improve their level. One type of magic stone can be used for any type of magic elements, but they are most useful when they are used to improve magic level of the same element.


    But there are few exceptions. Like water magic stones. They can be used by ice element mage. It''s not as well as how water element mage tries to use them, but still better than any other elements. It''s because ofpatibility. Since ice is made of water.


    But what about air? If boiled, water turned into gas. So why can''t I use water magic stones well? I don''t know the exact answer, but my guess is that when water vaporize, they only changed into one type of air. Air element mage, can change the air into any kind ofposition, but gas made of boiled water is only one type. So I guess that''s why it''s slow for me to use water magic stone to increase my level.


    Maybe there are air element magic stone, but no one ever bother to try to find it. Since most air element mage just gave up when they awaken to this element. I also has no interest in it back then because I only had summoning element in my previous life. Even if I did have air element back then, if Victoria refused to talk to me, the result is still the same.


    It was truly lucky for me to be able to use Aura. Because of that, Victoria decided to speak to me in this life.


    But howe a ck slime has the ability to bring me back to the past? What kind of monster is Blobby? Even Victoria doesn''t know much. She''s just somehow ended up as a consciousness inside the ck slime after she died. Maybe I can find the answer if I can go to the Monsters World. But that''s still in the future. I''m still haven''t improved my summoning element yet. Then after I reached Intermediate level, I will go to Monsters World to get myself a new summon. Maybe I can learn more about Blobby over there.


    As I thinking about many stuffs, Victoria returned with some magic stones.


    "I''m back. I found where we can harvest many of these."


    "Really? Cool! Did you see any sunken ship?"


    "Yes. It''s a bit away so if I go there, I won''t make it in time to tell you. I also discover a new weapon you can use underwater."


    "What is it?"


    "A harpoon rifle! I''ll transform into a rifle and you willpress air inside the tube. Then as you use your magic, the harpoon will shoot out and pierce your target. And it also use less energy so you can preserve your stamina."


    "That''s cool. So it''s like Air Cannon but underwater. And I also need to make a harpoon."


    "No. as long as the harpoon and the rifle is connected, I can be both the rifle and the harpoon. Then after you shot it, you just need to transform me back so you don''t need to retrieve the harpoon."


    "Awesome."


    It''s convenience. And I can preserve my stamina as well since it means I don''t need to do the ''swim through the enemy''s body along with my spear'' tactic.


    Speaking about spear, I left my self-repair spear at the inn. I need to remember to carry it always with me. Even if I have Blobby/Victoria around.


    "And with simr concept, I can transform into a grappling hook! Now you don''t need me to be your armguard. I can be a grappling hook that can be attached on your arm. Since it''s me, you can use it as armguard as well."


    "Grappling hook?"


    "You can shoot some kind of hook to the rooftop and you can easily climb it."


    "I don''t need that. I can jump to the rooftop easily."


    "Shut up and just be Rodriguez!"


    "Who the hell is Rodriguez?!"


    Did she just bring another of her ''only in her original world'' invention?


    "Just know that he''s a badass."


    "Okay. I''m a badass. Cool."


    "I still have a while until my time is up. Let''s train the grappling hook first!"


    "Was it necessary?"


    "It is for my heart! Do you wanna know what kind of things I want to do in this world after I reincarnated but I can''t? This is just one of them. Just let me be happy!"


    "Okay! Okay!"


    And so, I was being forced to practice this grappling hook. It was awesome! There is a small forest in this deserted ind and I practiced there.


    I shot the hook to the branch and I can swung around. It is fun. No wonder Victoria want to do it.


    "Hey! Don''t forget to yell ''AAAAA'' when you''re swinging!"


    "Why?"


    "Just do it!"


    I did as she said. Somehow, I felt better when I yelled during swinging rather than keeping my mouth shut. I asked Victoria why and she said that it''smon sense in her world.


    Did people in her world travel by swinging on trees?


    "Haa¡­ I had a lot of fun¡­"


    "So it''s fun for you, huh? Then let''s dive and go to where you located the sunken ship is. There might be treasures inside."


    A sunken ship that carried a lot of cargo¡­ it''s a treasure for me. Especially if the ship carried precious stuffs. Materials, magic stones, or maybe even artifacts. I will then let Sam sold them. She could be my middleman. Or woman.


    Thus we dive into the sea again and went to the ce Victoria saw the ship is. As for what she brought before, we left it on the ind. I will retrieve itter when I finished.


    Then we found the ship Victoria told me. From the look of it, it should have been sunk for more than a hundred year. Maybe I could get expensive valuables here.


    Also, since it has been about a hundred year, the ship is already became a new habitat for fishes and other sea creatures. But only the small fishes. Somehow, I never see any monsters in this area. Maybe because the big fish already eaten by the bigger fish. And the bigger fish choose to find somewhere else big fish gather instead of eating small fishes.


    If that''s true, then I''m lucky. That means I don''t need to fight on my first day underwater treasure hunting.


    As soon as we enter the ship, Victoria has changed back into a ck blob. Looks like her time is up. I made Blobby into a grappling hook on my arm like Victoria want to. Now I can be as badass as Rodriguez¡­ if she said the truth.


    The fishes around here are beautiful. If I have my own house, I will bring them back home and put them in a big ss tank. I heard that some nobility has simr hobby as well. They put fishes inside a ss tank called aquarium or something and show them off to the guest. For me, I think I''ll just show them off to my girlfriend¡­ or girlfriends.


    Ka is already my girlfriend and I''m just waiting for Sophie to confess. Maybe she already fall out of love since her debt is cleared? But I still have my hope in Lina.


    There are many barrels and boxes that has already broken. Some of them are empty. I think what''s inside is some type of foods. Maybe spices. That''s why they have been eaten and gone. I''ll just look for jewelries.


    I found some chests in another room. They must be valuables since they were put inside a chest. The chests are pretty powerful and able to endure being underwater for so long. I bet even the chest is expensive. But I can''t bring this back so regretfully, I smashed the chest with my Aura covered fist and loot what''s inside.


    It''s gold! HAHAHA! I''m d to choose to do this! If I don''t have air element, I won''t even think about going underwater! Now I can be rich!


    Should I just sell them on my own?


    No. I have many things I want to do. I''ll just keep my words and let Sam do her part. 50:50 is a good deal if I get this much every time I went diving.


    There are many chests in the ship but it''s impossible to bring them to the city without alerting other. I have no other choice but to just bring the content of just one chest. That should be enough to buy a house in Cassau. I''ll ask Sam to buy a house when she moved here with money from this finding. If they''re not enough, I can just return here anytime I want.


    And when I already loot everything in this ship, I can just look for another sunken ship. Maybe I should build a n in the future.


    I bring everything I could carry to the ind I left the magic stones is. Then I put them all in my Blobbybag to not alert other people and return back to the inn in Cassau.


    Since I have finished my business here, I''ll just go back to Melk tomorrow. As for souvenirs, I can give them some of the jewelries I found. They should be happy.

 Chapter 47 - Giving Directions

    The next morning after I went diving, I left the city. I put the treasures inside Blobbybag and try to hide from people''s eyes. Just me carrying heavy baggage is enough to raise suspicion so I chose to jump over the city wall.


    Let''s see if I can go back to Melk in one day. I''ll just pick a straight line to Melk ignoring the terrible terrain.


    I jumped from branch to branch in the forest, walking on the water when I reached the river, climbed a hill and jumped down from it. It''s interesting to see many things I have never seen before.


    In the forest, I saw a small tree with blue colored leaves. It was a home to several type of birds.


    When I reached the river, it was during the time when salmon swimming upstream to spawn. I saw some bears trying to grab them. It''s like a buffet for those bears. At least for some talented bears that able to catch the salmons.


    In the mountain, I saw goats climbing on an almost vertical wall with such ease. Don''t tell me that they are Aura user as well?


    Those are only some of the things I''ve seen when I''m still have not reach halfway to Melk. I''m still closer to Cassau than Melk but the view is excellent. Even more with my Vision Divine, I can see more of the beauty of nature.


    Monsters? All monsters I met on the way are already dead. They are not worth mentioning. But even when there are many monsters here, I still can''t believe that this ce is the habitat for many normal animals. Seems like they learned to escape from predators.


    Well, that''s enough of beauty of the nature. Since somehow in the middle of forest, there''s a girl running for her life this way.


    "HELP!"


    Oh? She seems to have found me and asked for my help. Did she not find me suspicious and just asked a random stranger for help? Since I''m kind, I will help her.


    "What can I do for you?"


    I asked her politely and shows her my best smile. She seems to be around my age this time. When I said this time, it means my 15 years old self. Not the 45 years old me.


    "MY VILLAGE IS BEING ATTACKED BY BANDITS! PLEASE HELP!"


    Does she always shout or this is her normal voice? Can I turn the volume down?


    "Alright, I will help."


    "REALLY?!"


    "Yes! You see, that way, if you go to the west, you will find the main road soon. Follow it to the south then you will get to Cassau where you can ask for reinforcement. Good luck!"


    I told her where the nearest city is.


    Awesome! I did a good stuff today! I have to reward myself.


    "NO! I MEAN PLEASE HELP ME DEFEAT THE BANDITS!"


    "Do you have to be so loud?"


    "THIS IS MY NORMAL VOICE!"


    Even after I covered my ears with my hands, her voice is still too loud. Can''t she lower her speaking volume a bit?


    "PLEASE HELP!"


    "I already did! I gave you direction to the nearest city!"


    "NOT THAT!"


    "Then what? Look closely. Do I look like someone capable of saving a vige? Do you think I can defeat all the bandits?"


    "¡­ YOU''RE RIGHT! I''M SORRY!"


    "I''ll give you an advice. Even if you''re escaping, you need to keep your calm. No matter what happen, if you think carefully, there''s always a way to do it right. After I told you the direction to Cassau, you should have left me and keep running to look for reinforcement. You might find someone reliable in the main road. Don''t think that anyone can help you. Even those who tried to help you, they might have ulterior motives. So you have to think everything calmly and choose the right person or group to ask for help. What would happen if I ask for your body as the reward?"


    "¡­YOU''RE RIGHT! I DIDN''T THINK THINGS THROUGH! I''M SORRY!"


    "And what if you''re being chased? If you had just leave, you can make me the bait to dy your pursuer even for a few seconds. That will make your survival chance increase a little."


    "YOU MEAN SACRIFICING A STRANGER''S LIFE?!"


    "Why do you have to be so loud? Of course that will happen if I''m weak. I''m actually pretty strong. But it''s not enough to save a whole vige."


    "I SEE!"


    "Even if I protected your vige, if there''s no strong guard and there are some bandits who managed to escape, the vige will be attacked again. And next time, they will give no mercy."


    "I UNDERSTAND!"


    "Then why are you still here? You forget why you''re running? Your pursuers are already here."


    "OH MY GOD!"


    "They must be following the source of your voice since you''re so loud."


    There are two pursuers chasing after this loud girl. If the bandits can allow two people to chase one person, I bet they have many members to attack the vige.


    "I CAN''T LET YOU SUFFER BECAUSE OF MY STUPIDITY!"


    "Oiii¡­ did you forget what I just told you? Just leave and get reinforcement. I''ll hold them back. If you find hunters on the main road, you can ask for their help. After the vige is safe, then you can go to the city and ask the guards to send some people to protect the vige. Or maybe sent request at the hunter guild."


    As I told her to leave, the pursuers already saw us.


    "Hey, hey! You''re gonna help her? I see that you carry heavy bag with you. How about you just give us that bag and we might let you two live."


    Sigh¡­ this is why I don''t want to be seen carrying this stuffs.


    "YOU''RE STRONG, RIGHT?! THEN YOU CAN DEFEAT THEM EASILY! I''LL GO GET REINFORCEMENT NOW! OH, RIGHT! WHERE DO YOU LIVE?! I''LL BE SURE TO REWARD YOU IN THE FUTURE IF YOU SURVIVE!"


    "I SAID YOU''RE TOO LOUD!! But I won''t refuse a gift. I will move to Cassau next year and I''m asionally going there for now so we might meet there."


    "OKAY! THANK YOU FOR YOUR TEACHING!"


    Our conversation ended up too long. Does she not feel worried about her own vige?


    She ran to the ce I pointed at before, where the main road is. And the bandits are trying to get her, but I stopped them.


    "If you want to live, go back to the vige you''re attacking and tell everyone that girl is bringing reinforcements."


    "Huh?! Are you making fun of me? I just told you that you have to give us your bags and I''ll let you live!"


    "How about I won''t give you my bag, and you go back to the vige? Then all of us can live instead of having someone die."


    "That doesn''t make any sense! Don''t you know that we''re trying to rob you?"


    "And you don''t know how strong I am."


    If possible I want to leave without a fight. Blobby is now is a bag and I can''t use her as a weapon. Should I just clear the oxygen from their faces and makes them faint? Or just kill them. It''s simpler to just kill them I guess. Then I will use the self-repair spear I have. No. I''ll just use my barehanded technique I learnt from Victoria. They will be my sparring partner.


    "Then I will kill you before you kill me!"


    "Not going to happen if I can kill you first!"


    "Don''t make it more confusing! I''m not a smart man! Let''s kill this guy!"


    Yes, I know from the exchange we had. One is talking too much and the other is just following order from the man who talked too much.


    I dropped my Blobbybag on the ground and punched the talking man on the nose before he used magic. I just swung my fist without any technique. Just like a brawler. But it should be enough to defeat them with my speed.


    The man falls and as the other guy is confused with how his friend is down, I punched him on the temple. He got knocked out in an instant.


    "You!"


    I kicked the back of his knee and he falls down again just as he stood up.


    "Now I will try the joint dislocating technique I just learnt. Your scream will tell me if it''s hurt or not. Please cooperate with me."


    "Wait! What are you¡­! AAAAAAH!"


    I practiced new moves on this punk. If I study it to perfection, I can let people live in suffering for the rest of their lives. It''s also good for interrogation if I don''t want my enemies to make any moves.


    The first joint I dislocate is his right shoulder. Looks like it''s painful for him. Was it because I''m not good at it or this is how painful dislocating joints is?


    Whatever the case, I can just study it right here right now. I have two guinea pigs for me to use.

 Chapter 48 - Jewel And Gladius

    This is what happened during the time Roy decided to practice his joint dislocation technique.


    A girl is running through the forest and her destination is the main road. She ran there so she can get reinforcement fast before something more terrible happened to her vige.


    Her vige is being attacked by bandits, but she''s able to escape and tried to find reinforcement. On the run, he met Roy and asked for his help. But instead of helping her vige, he only gave her directions. One is the direction to the nearest city, and the other is a direction on what to do during emergency.


    Roy told her to stay calm and think thoroughly. That way, she will find the most efficient way to survive and probably will be able to save her vige faster.


    Of course it will be faster if Roye with her to her vige, but Roy doesn''t even think of saving the vige. He thought that if even just one bandit able to escape, they might try to take revenge on him. Or maybe they would even try to attack the vige again. That''s why he told the girl to ask for reinforcement from the city.


    Roy taught the girl a little too long that her pursuers finally caught up with her. Then Roy told her to leave and now she has already reached the main road.


    She looked around and she could see several people but she didn''t ask them for help right away.


    I SEE A LOT OF PEOPLE BUT I DON''T THINK I SHOULD ASK THEM FOR HELP! MOST OF THEM ARE MEN AND THEY LOOKED AS IF THEY WANT TO EAT ME WHOLE! I''VE GOT NO OTHER CHOICE BUT TO GAIN THEIR ATTENTION FIRST! MAYBE NOT ALL OF THEM IS AS BAD AS WHAT THAT PERSON TOLD ME!


    The girl whose thought is full of capital letters and exmation marks is Jewel. The girl who has been nicknamed as loud person by Roy.


    Jewel approached a group of what seems to be a hunter party and ask for their help. Unfortunately, this party is filled by men.


    "HELP! MY VILLAGE IS BEING ATTACKED BY BANDITS!"


    "Oh? What kind of reward will you give us for saving your vige, huh? Hmm? She''s already running? Well, let''s ignore her plea. Whatever happened to that vige is no concern to us."


    THIS IS JUST AS HE TOLD ME! I SAW THAT GUY IS LOOKING AT MY BODY EVEN THOUGH I''M JUST 13 YEARS OLD! HE MUST BE AIMING FOR MY BODY! AND I FEEL LIKE IF THEY ARE GOING BECAUSE OF THE REWARD, IF THEY THINK THAT THE OPPONENTS IS TOO STRONG, THEY WILL RUN AWAY FIRST AND MAKE THE VILLAGERS AS DECOY! IF I TRY TO NEGOTIATE, IT WILL JUST MAKES IT LONGER UNTIL I GET A REAL REINFORCEMENT! I''LL JUST LOOK FOR OTHER PEOPLE TO HELP!


    NOW THAT I THOUGHT CAREFULLY, MY PARENT SHOULD BE SAFE! IF THE RAID IS A SUCCESS FOR THE BANDITS, THEY WILL LET US LIVE SO THEY CAN ROB US AGAIN IN THE FUTURE! THAT''S WHY THEY WON''T KILL US! AND I''M THE ONLY YOUNG WOMAN IN THE VILLAGE! MY MOM GAVE BIRTH TO ME WHEN SHE''S ALREADY 40! I HOPE NONE OF THE BANDITS IS AIMING AT HER. AS FOR MY FATHER, AS LONG AS HE DOESN''T TRY TO REBEL, HE WILL BE SAFE! I DON''T REALLY CARE MUCH ABOUT OTHER VILLAGERS! I JUST WANT MY PARENT TO BE SAFE!


    Her thoughts filled her head. She''s not wrong that her parent might be safe. And she doesn''t care much about other vigers'' well-being. Since she''s always being bullied by the others.


    Everyone her age are boys. And during their childhood, boys tend to tease the girls they liked. That''s why Jewel doesn''t like them. Then other adults keep ignoring her when she''s being teased. Her only allies is her parent. She would like to move but her parent rejected that idea. Her father is just a farmer. Theyck other skills necessary to survive in the city. Even if they moved to another vige, they''re afraid that other vigers in the new ce they moved won''t ept them. That''s why they have no choice but to stay.


    On the main road, as she run to the city, she met a party of five women. She thought they might be kind enough to help without reward so she asked their help.


    That party is called dius. A party of five b-ranked hunters and all of the members are girls.


    When Jewel asked for their help, they agree to help instantly. So Jewel together with five girls, return back to her vige.


    There''s one odd member in dius. It was the leader of the party, Nana.


    She''s called Nana because she''s old enough to be the grandmother of the other members. No one remember her real name and everyone called her Nana. She''s the one who suggested her party to help Jewel.


    She asked Jewel a question she had been curious about.


    "We''ll help you protect the vige. Lead the way!"


    "OKAY!"


    "Why are you so loud?"


    "I''M THE ONLY YOUNG GIRL IN THE VILLAGE! AND MOM SAID MEN LIKE QUIET GIRL!"


    "Ah! I see! It must be annoying when they annoy you with their flirting. It must be worked if you keep talking loudly even when you talk normally."


    "YES! I HAVE FORGOTTEN HOW TO LOWER THE VOLUME OF MY VOICE!"


    "Is that even possible? And why are you so calm even though your vige is being attacked by bandits?"


    "I MET A MAN BEFORE I MET YOU! HE''S ABOUT MY AGE! MAYBE 2 OR 3 YEARS OLDER SINCE HE SAID HE''S STRONG! HE MUST HAVE AWAKEN HIS MAGIC! HE TOLD ME TO STAY CALM EVEN IN THE WORST SITUATION! NOW I HAVE THINK THINGS THROUGH, I DON''T REALLY CARE ABOUT THE VILLAGE! ONLY MY PARENT''S SAFETY IS IMPORTANT TO ME! AND I DON''T THINK THAT THE BANDITS WILL KILL THEM IF THEY WANT TO ROB OUR VILLAGE AGAIN IN THE FUTURE! BUT I WANT MY PARENT TO BE SAFE SO AFTER YOU SAVE THE VILLAGE, I WILL GO TO THE CITY TO GIVE QUEST TO THE GUILD TO HAVE SOMEONE BE THE VILLAGE''S GUARD! UNTIL I CAME BACK, WILL YOU STAY IN THE VILLAGE AND CLEAR THE LAST BIT OF BANDITS?!"


    "Sure. But you need to learn how to lower your voice first."


    "I''LL TRY!"


    They continue toward Jewel''s vige and soon, they passed the ce where she met Roy before.


    "What the¡­"


    They found two bodies lied down on the ground without any sign of battle or magic. They are the two men who became Roy''s sparring partner.


    "AH! THEY ARE THE GUYS WHO PURSUED ME BEFORE! THAT MAN I MET MUST HAVE DEFEATED THEM!"


    "See if they''re still alive."


    Nana told her party members to check the bandit condition. The two of them are alive and well. They are just fainted, but most of the joints in their bodies are dislocated.


    "How cruel. I think the man you met choose to turn them into his sparring partner. Who the hell is he?"


    "HE SAID HE''S STRONG TOO! I DON''T KNOW WHO HE IS BUT I KNOW WHERE HE WILL LIVE!"


    "Oh¡­ then if he''s this strong, why won''t he just go to your vige?"


    "HE SAID THAT HE''S JUST ONE MAN! IN CASE SOME BANDITS MANAGED TO ESCAPE, THEY WILL SURELY TAKE REVENGE AND THE NEXT TIME THEY ATTACKED THE VILLAGE, IT WILL BE WORSE THAN TODAY! THAT''S WHY I WANT TO FIND SOMEONE WHO CAN BE THE VILLAGE''S GUARD AND PROTECTED IT!"


    "Hmm¡­ he''s smart. But to ignore people in danger is a bit¡­"


    "Nana! Look! I think that man left behind a message here!"


    There''s a message written on the ground. Roy used his spear to write on the ground as if he knows that Jewel wille back soon.


    The message says:


    Dear the loudest girl I''ve ever met.


    If you read this message, that means you''re able to find good people to help you. Tonight it will rain and erase this message, so I will give you some information from these two.


    There are about twenty bandits in the vige other than these two. Most of them are either beginner or intermediate level mage. The leader is an advanced mage so be careful.


    By the way, I''m heading toward theirir which is empty because all of the bandits went to loot your vige. I''m going to loot theirir so if your reinforcement strong enough to defeat them all, and can find their but it''s empty, it was because of me.


    P.S. :


    I''ve checked your vige and return here to write this. There are no casualties other than the injured. Nobody died. The bandits onlye to secure foods. They won''t kill unnecessarily unless they are provoked. They will leave before the sun is set so if you read this, be quick.


    Bye.


    "¡­this man you met is amazing. It wasn''t that long before you get us and return here, right? Then he''s able to find all of this in that short time. I''m interested in him."


    "YEAH! I FEEL LIKE HE''S AMAZING! THAT''S WHY WHEN I MEET HIM AGAIN IN THE FUTURE, I WANT TO ASK HIM TO TEACH ME MORE! I STILL HAVEN''T AWAKEN MY MAGIC SO I HOPE CAN BE A LITTLE SMARTER WITH HIS TEACHING."


    "To be able to influence you this much with just one meeting¡­ maybe in the future we will hear more about this guy. As for Jewel wanting to be his disciple, I believe his first teaching for you to be quieter."


    "I''LL TRY!"


    They then quicken their pace and arrive at Jewel''s vige soon. Thanks to Roy''s message, they can defeat all the bandits easily with good nning.


    Jewel''s parent are both alive and well. As for the injured, one of dius party member is a healer. The party decided to stay in the vige for a while until Jewel returned from giving a request at the guild.


    As for Roy, he''s going back to Melk with happiness filled his heart because of the loot he got from the bandit''sir. Now he''s just wondering about how to enter Melk without raising any unwanted attention.

 Chapter 49 - I Got A Maid

    I got so many gold and jewelries from the bandit''sir today. Now I''m instead of carrying Blobbybag, I''m pulling Blobbycart. The bandits seems to be quite sessful.


    Although I regretted a bit that I can''t help that loud person. If it''s in a closed space, I can easily beat over a hundred people. But since it''s an open area, in a vige, if they tried to take hostage, I can''t do anything.


    My control over air element is also can''t reach too far from me. Just about 30 meter max. That''s make it harder to make all bandits faint unless they are gathered in one location.


    Let''s just hope that she can bring reinforcement quickly. Not that anyone would die unless they provoked the bandits. But I already gave her some info about the bandits. Hope it will help.


    Anyway, since looting the bandits took some time, I arrived at Melk just as the gate is closed. Not that it will gives me problem since I can just climb the wall.


    I went around the wall and look for a ce with no guards. While looking for a good ce, I found several guards have explosives in their mouth. I can''t just go kill them since they are guards of the city. It will alert everyone. I will just remember their faces. And I also tried to remember the faces of the guards who doesn''t have explosives. I hope they can be trusted.


    For now I''ll go to Sam''s ce and give all these to her. Since she''s a gang leader, there''s no way she has already fallen asleep at this time, right?


    I knocked on the door to Sam''s ce this time instead of kicking it open. And the one who opened it was Lina whose expression brighten up as soon as she saw me.


    "Good evening. I''m here for the trade. I have the goods with me this time."


    "Alright. I''ll bring you to the boss. Will it be parfait again?"


    "No. Just tea is fine."


    "Understood. I''ll prepare the best tea for you. Follow me."


    The best tea? Just how much does she want me topliment her?


    Then I transform Blobbycart into slimmer and longer Blobbycart so I can bring all the goods with me.


    I followed Lina into the secret room where I burst the door open previously. Lina knocked on the door and tell Sam that I''m here.


    "Excuse me, Boss. Roy is here with the goods."


    "Don''t bother me right now! I''m about to have my beauty sleep!"


    Really? A gang leader going to sleep this early for her beauty sleep? I bet she can do it because she always have someone else do her jobs before. Now she no longer have someone to y the part of ''Sam'', she shouldn''t have sleep this early.


    "Don''t bother beautifying yourself with sleep! Try to be beautiful with a smile from the goods I''ll give you."


    "¡­wait. I need to get dressed first."


    "Boss. You just need to cover yourself with jacket over your pajamas. We can''t have Roy wait here any longer."


    "You really sided with Roy, huh? I''m your boss, you know? Sigh¡­e in!"


    Lina opened the door and I can see a woman wearing her pajamas covered with jacket. Although I can see her even before the door is open, I tried to not use Divine Vision unnecessarily.


    "So? What goods did you bring?"


    "I have two types of goods. First is this. Something I looted from bandit''sir."


    I put the goods on the floor. Only the ones I get from looting their.


    "Hmm¡­ this is profitable. But if it''s from bandit, then there''s a possibility of some of the jewelry to be belonged to nobility. If such things shows in the market, we can be used of stealing from nobility."


    "I know. But if some of the gold here is melted and changed their shape, we can sell them."


    "That''s right, I guess. But I don''t think this is what''s in your mind when you asked for my cooperation before. What''s the other goods then?"


    "As expected of you. You''re pretty sharp. No wonder you can survive being a gang leader and moneylender. The rest of the goods is the real thing!"


    This time, I transformed Blobby back to her usual blob and let all the stuffs dropped.


    "It''s a slime!"


    "Yes, but that''s not the one I''m giving you. It''s the stuffs on the ground!"


    "These are¡­ magic stones? For water element? And the rest are¡­ magic equipment?! How did you get all these?"


    Just like she said. Most of the goods I get from the sunken ship are magic equipment. Even a simple magic equipment that was sold in the store is expensive. I was lucky to buy my self-repair spear cheaply. It was because no one would buy it.


    But what about the magic equipment from over a hundred year ago? Most of the equipment from that time are no longer usable. But the one I found has never been used. Although there are some with rust because it has been abandoned for a long time, they should still be able to be fixed. And the price of just one of them should be high.


    "How did you get these? Did you steal it?"


    "They were all abandoned."


    "All of these? Howe someone stupid enough to never use all this magic equipment and abandon them?"


    "Because they were sunk during the delivery."


    "What?"


    "I took them from a sunken ship. With my air element, I can dive underwater as long as I want to. This is the business I''m talking about before. I will dive underwater and seek many treasures from magic stones, goods from sunken ships, and maybe materials from sea monsters."


    "Air element? Then your other element is summoning and¡­ water element?"


    "No. Just air and summoning."


    "I see. I won''t ask where your confidencee from just with those two elements, but this business is really profiting. Are you sure about the 50:50 share?"


    "Yes. Does it means you will agree with the term?"


    "Of course! There''s no way I will let go of this partnership! How often will you dive?"


    "At least once a month. If you''re moving to Cassau, I can bring more because it''s closer."


    "Okay! I will move as soon as my business here is done! But you won''t move?"


    "Not yet. At least until I graduate first. Now I want to ask you something."


    "What is it?"


    "I want you to buy a house. Or maybe a building with a lot of rooms for when me and other people move to Cassau. If possible, makes it close to your office. You can have my share now for the funds."


    "I see. That''s easy. I will move in a few days with Lina and my other trusted subordinate. For where I will sell them¡­ I''ll take care of that. You just need to bring your finds at least once a month. Is that a deal?"


    "Deal!"


    "No deal!"


    "Huh?"


    It was Lina who doesn''t ept the deal. What''s her deal?


    She put my tea on the table and protested to Sam.


    "Lina? What''s wrong?"


    "I want to resign as your maid and be Roy''s maid!"


    Lina said bluntly.


    "What?"


    "Huh? My maid?"


    "That''s right. I want to stay with Roy."


    Then Sam stood from her seat and sit next to me so we can chat in whisper.


    "What do you think?"


    "I don''t mind if she want to be my maid. But can you tell me what exactly makes her do this?"


    I''m curious. I''m really curious. Why is someone like Lina want to be with me? I don''t feel anything romantic about this so I believe it''s not because she loves me. Does me giving herpliment many times makes her wants more and more?


    Then Sam tells me Lina''s story.


    "Actually, I asked her after our negotiation that time. She actually has some ''daddy issues''. Her mother died when she was young and her father mes her for it. But Lina keeps trying to impress her father with many things. Cooking, cleaning, studying, and others. But her father never once gives her praises. As soon as her magic awakened, she was sold by her father to a ve merchant. It was me who bought her and free her from very, but she choose to stay as my maid.


    Then you came and praised her. She told me that it feels like you''re a much older man when you give herpliment. I think that''s why for Lina, you are the recement for her father who never praise her."


    "¡­Damn! So I''m a father now?"


    "I don''t mind if she leaves my side for you. I think I can trust you with her. How about it?"


    This time, she speak in her normal voice and no longer whispers again. Having a maid, huh?


    "Lina. Are you sure about this?"


    I asked Lina about her decision.


    "Yes, I''m sure."


    "Okay then. I''ll give you my first order. I want you to follow Sam to Cassau and help her. At least until I moved there. For now, Sam need as many help as she can get, so I ask you to continue what you''re doing now. Of course this time as her helper. Not as her maid."


    "Understood. I will make sure Sam buy a big building for you and your friend while I''m with her. But¡­"


    "Don''t worry. Although I will move there after graduation, I will visit from time to time since I need to stock up our supply as well."


    "Then I will do as you say."


    "Good. I knew I can count on you! You''re the best maid one could ever have!"


    Now Lina''s face has a big smile on it with a slight blush on her cheeks.


    Since I have finished my business here, I left the building and went back home to Red Tail. Lina will help Sam moves and will be waiting for me in my new house. Maybe I will go back to Cassau in a week so I can get more money and Sam will buy me a bigger house. I can also look for settlement if she hasn''t found a good one yet.


    Maybe I should bring the girls with me next time.

 Chapter 50 - Souvenirs

    As soon as I entered the building of Red Tail, I was greeted by Daniel who was just about to go to bed.


    "Daniel! I''m back!"


    "Roy!"


    The small boy run toward me with his small steps and hugged me tightly. He''s the one who loves me the most among everyone I have met both in this life and my previous life. I could never understand why his mother would abandon him.


    "Have you been a good boy?"


    "I am! Aunt Ruby taught me how to count and I already able to count to ten!"


    "That''s great! What about writing?"


    "Wait!"


    Daniel run toward the counter and took a paper. Then he returns to me and shows what he write on the paper.


    "Here!"


    I looked at his writing and read my name. There''s many scribbling as well. Looks like he tried so hard just to write my name instead of his own name.


    There''s many time he wrote it wrong, like ''ROI'', '' roI'', ''LOI'', ''Roo'', and many other wrong writings until he finally got it right. Well, I''m d he didn''t write ''Loo''.


    Seems like he was only taught his ABCs and Ruby told him to practice it himself without telling him how to spell my name. I guess it works.


    "You did great!"


    "I''m wrong so many times but I finally got it right!"


    "You really smart, Daniel. Next time, try to write your own name. Then Ruby''s, Sophie''s, Hannah''s, and everyone''s name. They will be happy if they received their own name written by you."


    "I will do my best!"


    I looked at Ruby who keep smiling seeing our interaction.


    "Ruby, where are the others?"


    "They are already sleeping. Today, all of them went training in the forest together with your two friends Ang and Ka. They must be exhausted after training the whole day. They haven''t even eat dinner yet and already went to their own rooms¡­ well, other than Sophie who choose to sleep in your room¡­ Hannah''s mother, Penny, also train hard and she''s already asleep with Hannah."


    "I see. They worked hard. Once they woke up, please give them these. These are souvenirs for them."


    I put several jewelries on the counter. They are not the one I have shown Sam. They are specially picked as souvenir for the girls. There are bracelets, earrings, nes and rings.


    "What about me?"


    "Of course you will get one. Here, I''ll give you this ring. But since you''re still small, you can wear it as ne like this. Don''t show it off in public, okay?"


    "Okay! Thanks Roy!"


    The girls are free to take whatever they wanted. But for the children, Daniel and Hannah, I gave them rings since they''re still too young for jewelries. I used a string to turn the rings into a ne. But maybe I shouldn''t have given the kids rings since they are still too young. I should have bring them toys but I forgot to buy some.


    "Ruby. Those are for everyone except Sophie. Since she''s sleeping in my room, I''ll give her myself."


    "Okay. Daniel, tonight you will sleep with Aunty again."


    "Um!"


    Daniel nodded while holding the ring hanging on his neck happily.


    "Oh! And do you have some food left? I''m starving."


    "Wait a bit. I''ll cook some food for you."


    After finishing my dinner, I went to my room to rest.


    I opened the door and seems like Sophie got awake because of the sound of the door creaking.


    "Hmm¡­"


    "I''m back. You can go back to sleep."


    "¡­Rooooyyy."


    "You''re sleep talking. I heard you worked hard today. Go get some rest. I have a souvenir for you. I''ll give it tomorrow when you have rested well.


    "Unnn¡­"


    Just as I told her to go back to sleep, she''s already asleep. Looks like the training today is to tiring.


    And she''s taking so much space on the bed. I can''t eveny there anymore. Got no choice. I''ll sleep on Blobby bed tonight.


    The next morning, somehow Sophie ended up hugging me in her sleep. And my movement as I awake woke her up.


    "Hnnn¡­ morning, Roy."


    "Morning. Did you have a good dream?"


    "Yeah. You were so dreamy in my dream."


    "But not in real life. Wake up and let''s get some breakfast. I heard that you haven''t eaten yet since you returned yesterday. And before I forget, this is a souvenir for you."


    "What is it?"


    "Some kind of magic equipment. This ne if you put your magic in it, it will make a barrier around you. It can protect your life just once so I hope you won''t ever use it."


    "Roy¡­ Thank you. But this is too much for me. What about your girlfriends Ka and Ang?"


    "I have something else for them. And my girlfriend at the moment is just Ka. I''ll give it to them at school so let''s have breakfast first."


    The ne I gave Sophie is one of the treasure I found underwater. I saw it a few times in my previous life. It''s called Ne of Protection. It will build a barrier surrounding the user once it used. Then it will break as soon as the barrier vanished.


    For Ka and Ang, I also will give them magic equipment I found. I hope they will like it.


    "Roy¡­ about your girlfriend¡­ she says that she allow you to build a harem. I want to be part of it. But I''m not prepared for it yet. Will you wait until I sort my thoughts?"


    "I''ll wait as long as you want. But for someone who is not prepared to be my lover to sleep in my bed¡­ I think it won''t take long for you to reach an answer."


    "Haha¡­ You may be right."


    We had a noisy breakfast this morning with all of the girls choosing what kind of jewelry they want. It was peaceful.


    After breakfast before going to school, I told Ruby that I have something to tell everyone so I want everyone to gather after school. I also told her that I will bring Ang and Ka as well. It''s about moving to Cassau. I want them all to move to Cassau before the monsters stampede.


    I went to school normally and meet Ang and Ka walking together to school. So I greet them and told them toe to Red Tail after school.


    There''s something different about school, though. The students who almost never went to school suddenly choose to attend. I asked Ka what''s going on.


    "Oh, there''s a new teachering a few days ago. From how there are more male students than female, you should be able to guess why they choose to attend."


    "I see. So Ms. Wendy alreadye, huh?"


    "You know her? Wait. Since it''s your second life, of course you knew her. What do you think about her?"


    "She''s very beautiful and can be trusted."


    I remember it well. She''s a member of the king''s secret agents. During the war, it was her and her agency that find the most information about the cult. In the future, one of the agent betrayed the country and spread false usation to Wendy and some of her friends in the agency. She was then hunted and died soon after.


    But this time, I won''t let her die. After all, in my previous life, I am one of her admirers! In fact, I should be among the male here and would shamelessly sat in the front seat even though I couldn''t understand the lesson whenever it was her ss.


    Although I don''t have the same admiration feeling I have at that time, I still don''t want her to repeat the same fate. This time, I will try to save her.


    I will try make contact with herter. But not today. Today I have something to tell everyone at the Red Tail. I also has to prepare a letter to the king to give her. I will tell the king about the cult''s n in the near future so he will be prepared when the cult attack. I need to write a good story first so I''ll make contact with Wendyter.


    "I have souvenir for you two. For Ang, it''s a red robe that increase your magic resistance."


    I gave the first souvenir to Ang.


    "Thanks! Is this what you got from ''fishing''?"


    "Yes. I got a lot of treasures. That''s why I decided to give you some. What I gave you and the others is at leastmon equipment or jewel. I can''t have you bring attention with super rare magic equipment after all. I left some at Sam''s to sell. I''m gonna be rich!


    Then Ka will have this wand. It help improve the efficiency of healing magic. The tip is pretty sharp and the material is quite durable, so you might be able to use this as a makeshift rapier as well."


    "Cool! Thanks! I feel like my healing element has improved a lot and soon I will reach Intermediate level in healing element. This wand might be able to help me improve more on it."


    "Really? That''s awesome. Tell me when you want to cultivate to improve your level. I have a few tricks I know about levelling up and be stronger than a normal level up."


    "I will."


    "And after school, I want you two toe with me to Red Tail. I have an announcement to tell you and all the girls."


    "About what?"


    "Future n, I guess?"


    Then we went to school together ignoring the noise made by the new teacher''s admirer while telling the girls about what I did during my time in Cassau. They seems to be interested in diving as well. I will try to improve my air element so I can make other people breathe anywhere as well. That way, we can grab more treasures.

 Chapter 51 - Future Plan

    Back at Red Tail, I told everyone about the attack that will happen in few months. I omitted the fact that I came from the future. But it seems like everyone believed me.


    "Does it mean that you taught everyone to get stronger is so we will fight the stampede?"


    Someone among the girls asked me. Of course they will be worried if that''s the case.


    "No. Since I owe this ce, I thought of helping everyone here. I taught you all to get stronger so you can at least make a living by bing a hunter. It''s also about my previous journey to Cassau."


    I told the girls about my partnership with Sam and how I got all the jewelries that I gave them. I didn''t tell them about my Aura since it''s not important for them at the moment. And they all believe me again. Looks like in their heart, they have all believed me wholeheartedly. Was it because of the debt or the cheesy lines?


    I finished telling what happened and asked them what they will choose.


    "So, I asked Sam to buy me a building big enough for all of us in Cassau. I don''t know when it will be done but I wish she will get me one before the stampede. So, will you move there before the stampede or will you stay here, or maybe you have something else in your mind? I want you to think carefully and once the building is procured, you''re all free to move there. Of course the kids, Daniel and Hannah, along with Hannah''s mother, Penny, will move there. I don''t want the kids to be here during the stampede."


    "I can agree with that."


    Said Penny.


    "Yeah, me too."


    "I think I will move as well, but let me think about it first."


    Everyone already think about their decision to move or stay. As for Penny, of course she will agree and not let her daughter be inside the chaos that will happen. I heard that some already decided to move and some others still thinking about it.


    "Well, it''s not like you have to move there. If you don''t want to, you can go to another city to be safe."


    "What about you? You don''t want to move yet?"


    "I want to graduate first. And also thinking of a way to foil their n to attack the city. I''m having difficulty of telling the authorities and to make them trust me. I know someone who can help me contact the authority, but to make that person trust me is another matter."


    "You choose graduation over safety?"


    "If it''s me alone, I''m sure I can escape from whatever they''re nning. My n for the future is to graduate as soon as possible and move to Cassau after graduation. Then for about two years or so I will try to improve my strength and magic. I''m having difficulty in increasing my levels since both elements I have is quite rare. After that I will attend medical school to be a doctor."


    "So? What will happen to us if we move there? Do we end up just like here bing a hunter?"


    "That''s why I''m having this meeting with everyone today. For those who decided toe with me, I will consider building a n after I raise my hunter rank."


    The room turned noisy with my deration. It''s understandable.


    n is just another group of hunters. The difference between normal hunter parties is that being in a n, you can directly get request from someone. Normal hunter can only get request and reward from the guild.


    They can however, get request from another party if they are having emergency. Like that loud girl''s vige. That girl might get a hunter to save her vige, but that hunter''s achievement won''t be recorded in the guild. So if they are close to rank-up and just need one more mission, if they don''t get request directly from the guild, their achievement won''t be recorded and their rank won''t raise. That''s why most hunter would refuse a request like that.


    But for a n, we can get request directly from someone. Of course if the requests are like having to clean the sewer, or harvesting herbs, we can refuse them. That''s whymoner would go to the guild directly. Only nobles or rich merchant would go directly to the n for requests. That''s why the reward are usually much higher than the same quests from the guild since the guild would take 30% from the reward.


    Of course members of the n are allowed to go to the guild as well to take requests. But the most difficult part of being a n is to get others to trust our abilities. Also money is important as well, but with my cooperation with Sam, I won''t have any money problem.


    In Cassau, no¡­ in this Kingdom, there are only about 10 ns. It''s not like there are no other ns out there, but because they are unable to get people''s trust and money problem, they got disbanded quickly.


    Money is no problem for me, but for making other trust us¡­ I''ll work on that.


    And now the girls are discussing about whether being in a n would be better for them or not. Of course they know about many other ns who got disbanded in just few weeks so they are worried about it, but I assured them that with Sam''s help, there won''t be any problem. And I also told them that not everyone need to participate in mission. If they want to, they can stay in n building and do the chores. I told them that I already have my new maid sent there to look for house together with Sam.


    "Well, that''s all I''m saying. Once the house is procured, you can move there. Of course before I graduate, I will visit from time to time since it''s my house. Just think carefully. I hope you can make decisions before the monsters stampede happen."


    Of course I will visit a lot! I don''t want to make Daniel feel lonely without me. I feel like ever since I took Daniel in, I have been travelling more than ying with him. No wonder he always hate it if I leave for too long.


    Then Ang, Ka, and somehow Sophie as well, approach me.


    "Why do you really want to graduate? Why not just go to school again?"


    "Because I don''t want to waste another year studying the same thing again. And also, school transfer is only added about ten years in the future. I want to be a doctor so I can heal people without it being a crime. Specialized school/college not for battle only allow people who has graduated already."


    "Ten year in the future? You speak as if you know the future."


    I looked at both Ang and Ka before replying to Sophie.


    "I''ll talk about itter. You two bringing Sophie here means¡­"


    "Yeah. Ang and I already agree to add her in our party."


    "Cool. Then let''s go to my room and I''ll tell Sophie my secrets."


    The four of us went to my room leaving the others discussing about their own future.


    In my room, there are four of us¡­ no. since I'', telling Sophie my secrets there are five of us.


    "Victoria. Come out."


    The grappling hook on my arm changed shape into a beautifuldy.


    "Blobby turned into a girl?!"


    "Nice to finally meet you. I''m Victoria. Blobby''s other personalities."


    Well, that''s a simple self-introduction. But she''s not wrong.


    Then we tell Sophie about the fact that I''m from the future and able to use Aura. Of course she''s surprised to hear that I have a see-through vision, but she''s a lot calmer than Ang and Ka.


    "Well, the first time we met, I slept next to you naked after all. So I won''t mind."


    "Anyway, now you know about it and what my enemies capable of. Are you sure you want to join this party?"


    "Not just this party. I''ll join you in your n and I''ll join you in your life. I thought a lot to day and think that I want to be with you. Forever. So let me be your girlfriend."


    "Okay. Cool."


    "Wait! Why are you fine with it? First, it was Ka. Then Sophie as well. Both of you just casually asked to be Roy''s girlfriends. Is that normal?"


    It was Ang. Seems like for her, it has to be a mutual love with romantic event for two people to be lovers. She''s still young after all. No. Everyone is young. I''m the only one whose mentality is much older than everyone here. But I never gave it too much thought of having them as my girlfriend. Sophie is older than the me right now, and Ka is the same age. Even more, in this country, fifteen years old is already considered an adult. So it''s fine, right?


    "It''s fine. I love Roy after all."


    "Me, too."


    "Me, three."


    "As for me, right now I''m a monster but I love him as my master and partner. And as I saw him growing, I feel like I have a younger brother that I have to teach many things for."


    I never thought Victoria feels that way about me. Well, she always been with me ever since I returned to this time. She''s a good teacher with a lot of experience. Let''s ignore the fact about her being a fujoshi. Sometime I feel like I heard her saying something about pairing me with other men. Just thinking about that making me shiver.


    "What about you?"


    It was Sophie who asked Ang.


    "I don''t know. I guess I''m still waiting for my fateful encounter. But I do have a good impression of Roy."


    "Don''t do that. You shouldn''t have any good impression about him if you want to have someone else as your boyfriend. You will just end upparing Roy with other men. Roy is one of a kind, you know?"


    "I guess you''re right. Anyway, congrattion for you two for being lover. Now Roy has two girlfriends. What do you two thinks of each other?"


    "I can teach Sophie light element. And her lightning element if she improved it, she will have a powerful attack power."


    "I can teach Ka about nightly activities. I feel like having a new sister I can share everything with."


    "Well, if you two happy about it, I won''t say anything else."


    Looks like they can get along just fine.


    "Then how about we go take a quest tomorrow?"


    "Okay, but tonight, I''ll be borrowing your girlfriends and Victoria as well for sleepover in my apartment. Goodbye!"


    With that, all of them left my room and leaving me alone here. Well, as long as they get along.

 Chapter 52 - Battle Practice With Orcs

    The next day after Sophie join our party, we went outside the city to subjugate monsters. We didn''t take any request and just training to improve our teamwork and skills.


    Sophie is doing well. She adapt very well on the team although it''s her first day after joining. Or maybe Ang and Ka already trained her hard during my leave? I feel like I''m the one being left out.


    Victoria too, as we keep defeating monsters and go deeper into the forest, she choose toe out on her own. After being a slime for thousands of years, she must be really lonely. That''s why she enjoy being able to have friends and doesn''t want to be left out.


    I need to improve my summoning element so she can enjoy it more. It''s the best gift I can think of for her for teaching me many things. Other than phrases and words from other world.


    Aftering out, whenever she talks to me, she would keep saying ''damn riajuu''. I can be sure that it means I''m popr or something. Why is she so jealous about me being popr? No. I don''t think it''s jealousy. I think it was just her wanting to say that. Seriously, what does everyone in other world have to do with popr people? Do they say simr thing like Victoria?


    Doesn''t matter. Today we''re here to test ourpatibility with the new member, Sophie. Other world is not important right now.


    Sophie is doing well. She used lightning magic ''Chain Lightning'' to kill multiple goblins at once. Since all of us are still in beginner level, killing multiple goblins with one magic is already a great achievement. Of course all of us helped her.


    I''m at the vanguard with my self-repair spear together with Victoria, grabbed the monsters'' attention to us and make sure no attack targets the girls.


    Now since Victoria started to fight as well, I decided to have spear as my main weapon. Although I want to keep having a transforming weapon as my main, letting Victoria fight on her own is more beneficial since I can just sit back and watch the fight instead of getting involved in battle.


    Although I think that way, I still get involved if there are any danger. And even though Victoria used to be an Aura user in the past, she can''t use her Aura anymore since she became a slime. So when she fought, she often made mistake thinking that she can use her Aura and misjudge the strength needed to one shot the enemy. That''s why we need her to get used to fight with only her physical strength and skill.


    And her skill is much better than mine. It''s annoying that I lost every time we spar. But since I improved as well, it''s fine.


    We''re doing fine on our hunt, and this is thest monsters we decided to fight before we return.


    Orcs. Five orcs.


    I find it weird that there are five orcs gathering together. Usually, they only gather in two or three. Never more than that. Unless there''s an orc settlement nearby.


    "Alright, we will defeat those five orcs and return back to the guild to inform about possibility of an orc settlement. It is rare to find five orcs together. So, how will we do it? One on one or a group battle? Or maybe you''re crazy enough to fight one on five?"


    "One on one."


    "Agreed."


    "Anything is fine with me."


    "I will try my best!"


    Although Sophie has the strongest firepower with her lightning element, she''s still anxious to fight an orc one on one. Even Ka who has the weakest firepower feels confident about the fight.


    "Then I''ll take one on the right."


    "I''ll take the left one."


    Of course the first to react is me and Victoria. We decided to take the one farthest from the group for a battle.


    This is a good partner for my Air Cannon practice. I almost forget that I have this skill. But since Victoria isn''t here to be the weapon (she called it rifle), I will try to improvise.


    I try to gain its attention by shing my spear lightly to its face. It worked well and it chased after me leaving the group of orcs behind.


    I took a distance from it and grabbed a fist sized rock. How will I shoot it if I can''t hold the stone with my hand? Since the air pressure will damage my hand if I hold the stone.


    The answer is by throwing the stone before I shoot it.


    First I preparepressing air in a certain spot. For now it''s two meter in front of me. Then I will throw the stone to that spot. As soon as the stone passed through that spot, I will burst thepressed air. If my throw is urate, the stone will fly forward in a high speed.


    I was right. The stone flew forward to the orc, it pierced its eye and killed it instantly.


    What I didn''t consider is the fact that the burst from thepressed air reached me. Although it''s just a wind to me, if any other people nearby, they will be blown away. I need to consider the distance where I prepared my magic. Also if there are other people near me or not. But still, the result is I killed the orc in one shot.


    But the stone I shot is stuck in the orc''s head. I guess that''s show how strong their skull is.


    Next is Victoria. She''s easily dodged the orc''s attack and keep targeting at the orc''s vital point. She finished her side by beheading the orc''s head. I guess she changed her own mass to be stronger than the orc. That''s why she can easily cut down its neck.


    As for Ang, she''s doing well. She used variant type of magic to defeat the orc she''s facing. She used her magic in rotation. Fire magic, then ice, then wind, then earth, and then she used fire again. It makes the orc confused. Neither Victoria nor I have taught her to fight like that. No wonder they called her a genius.


    Then it''s Ka and Sophie. They took their time and it was Sophie who finished first.


    Sophie is nervous during the battle. But I hope when she realize how strong she is, she can feel confident about her own strength. That''s just how powerful lightning mage is.


    Sophie has two elements. Lightning element and light element. One has powerful strength the other has powerful defense. Although barrier from light magic is still weaker than earth element, it is useful because the barrier is invisible. But it is only efficient when one reach intermediate level. During beginner stage, the magic consumption for using light barrier is too much. That''s why Ka who also has light element choose to use earth wall.


    Back to the battle, Sophie used light magic ''Blinding Light'', to blind the orc. Then she used Lightning Bolt to attack it. She keeps repeating it over and over until the orc died. Now she will realize how strong she is even at beginner level.


    Last one is Ka. The one who has the weakest attack power. Her battle is the longest one.


    To cover for her weal attack power, she tried to improve her melee battle skill with using rapier made from earth magic Ground Spike. If she want more power, she would have chosen a spear and make a longer spike. But she chose agility over strength after we had practice in both weapon. It was also Victoria''s advice to let her use rapier.


    Most mage used hand gesture when they use magic. Although it''s unnecessary, Victoria did it as well. That''s why it''s much better if she had a weapon in one hand, and the other is for casting magic. That''s rapier is better than spear for her.


    Ka used earth magic ''Pitfall'' to trap the orc. Then she used Ground Spike to stab the orc from multiple ces while it''s still trapped. But Ground Spike is not enough to pierce the thick muscle of an orc. That''s why she used her rapier to attack the vital spot of the orc. The eyes, nose holes, ears, and its body where its internal organ located.


    When she''s tired or injured, she would use healing magic on herself, then keep on attacking the orc. It took her one hour until she defeated the orc. The others are already finished their part and choose to watch over Ka.


    Ka must have practice everyday for her to be so agile with rapier. I think it was just over one month ago when she decided to use the weapon. And now she''s already so good at it. If Ka and I fight with using rapier, with only skills and technique, she''s already better than me. And Victoria said it will be soon until Ka is more skilled than her. Ka must be a genius.


    It''s a shame that she hasn''t able to learn Aura yet. Victoria also doubtful if Ka can learn Aura. But for Ka herself, she doesn''t care if she can learn it or not. She said that if she can learn it, it''s good. But if she can''t that''s, fine as well. Since the person herself doesn''t care, we no longer persuade her to learn Aura.


    Since all the orcs has been defeated, we decided to return to the city after taking their fangs as proof of subjugation. We need to inform the guild about the appearance of five orcs at the same time.

 Chapter 53 - Orc Emperors Appearance

    This conclude our practice. All five orcs were defeated in a one on one fight. Victoria and my victory is obvious with our strength. Ang is a genius so I''m not really worried about her. Sophie only need to realize how strong her lightning element is. It''s the element with the biggest firepower among any other element. As for Ka, she took her time, but she calmly finished the orc she''s fighting. So we finished for the day because the appearance of five orcs.


    "Let''s go back and inform the guild. There might be an orc settlement nearby."


    "I thought you''re going to try subjugate them all on your own."


    "Aura is not an omnipotent ability. I still have a lot to improve. If the enemy is not something I can defeat in one shot, I won''t take the risk. The All-seeing eye is an exception because I need to gain my ability."


    "You''re such a coward. Not that we hate that part about you."


    Ka said so. Well, all this time I always told them that I''m a coward.


    "Not just a coward. A courageous coward. I dare to admit that I''m a coward."


    "Why? Even though you''re so strong?"


    "Sophie, he told us he came from the future, right? In that timeline, he died because of overconfident. That''s why now he choose to be a coward."


    "Ka is right. I''m a coward by choice. I dare to be a coward. That''s why I''m a courageous coward."


    "He know how strong he is, but he always choose to underestimate himself and overestimate his enemy, unless his opponent is something he has fought before. That''s why he''s doing fine with orcs and other monsters we fought here."


    "As expected, Ka knew me the best!"


    "I know that he always look for something to grab when he asleep. Either it''s pillow, nket, or me."


    "As expected, Sophie knew me the best!"


    "He''s our boyfriend, so let''s share everything we know about this guy to each other."


    "Okay!"


    "And if he has some kind of weakness, please tell me."


    Somehow, Ang butted in with the girl''s conversation. Why would she want to know my weaknesses?


    "By the way, if it''s about Roy, I''m the one who knows him the most. I also know his taste in men."


    "The slime tells lies! Do not ever believe her words!"


    What taste in men? I''m not into that kind of thing!


    "ROAAAAAR!!"


    As soon as we''re about to head home, suddenly we hear a monster roar.


    "What was that?"


    I look over there with my Divine Vision. With both my see-through and zoom vision, I can see that 5 km away from me there''s an orc. But it''s not an ordinary orc. And there really is a settlement close by. That orc must be the leader.


    "It''s an Orc Emperor."


    "What?!"


    "And there''s an orc settlement there."


    "What should we do?"


    "Go back and inform the guild."


    "Its roar is almost as loud as when you roar as a dragon."


    "Roy did what?!"


    "I''ll tell youter."


    There are many things Sophie doesn''t know. When she found out the real me, will she fall out of love?


    We quickly left that spot and travel back to the city.


    Just few minutes after we go, we encounter another party. It''s a party of three men and they are quite famous in Melk. After all, theyare an A-ranked hunter party. All three of them has reached A-rank few years ago.


    I thought of telling them about the orc settlement but they greeted us first. No. They greeted the girls.


    "Hey, girls! Wanna join us on a hunt?"


    "No thanks. Bye."


    Ka answered for the girls. Looks like I won''t tell them about the settlement.


    "Don''t say that. Aren''t you hunters as well? Don''t you want to raise your level faster?"


    "Not interested. Bye."


    He got shot down twice! Ka is just being her usual self. She''s never interested in any men other than me. I''m truly a lucky one.


    "Come on! We''re A-ranked hunters! There''s no way you shot me down twice, right? You actually want us to push you down."


    What a rude fellow. Just because he''s an A-rank hunter he thinks he can do anything? I can kill them all easily in one second. That''s why I didn''t act yet. Unless they''re forcing themselves on the girls.


    "Just join us while we''re asking nicely!"


    "And we''re escaping before you hurt us!"


    Oh! Ka bing more and more like me! And that was a cue for us to run away.


    "Wait!"


    No. We won''t wait. All five of us, with Victoria still take control of Blobby, run toward the city.


    "That was close. A little more and I will kill them."


    "Yeah. I almost kicked their nuts as well."


    "I thought you are the type to not hold back, Ka. But why did you choose to run? Influenced by Roy?"


    Ang asked Ka while we''re running away.


    "That''s part of it. They also said that they''re A-rankers. If we be hostile with an A-rankers, our status in the guild will get worse."


    "Is there anything worse than called ''Nutcracker''?"


    "I''m not talking about that stupid nickname. I''m talking if the guild has to pick a side, they will no doubt choose the A-rankers instead of us. It will be harder for us to get a quest in the future if it happen."


    "And running away is fine?"


    "It is. At least they also know that even if we talked trash about them, no one will trust us. In the end, we can only run away and not talking about it."


    "That''s my girl! Unlike the magic nerd, you''re good at noticing things!"


    "Who you called magic nerd?!"


    "Someone who barely pass any other subjects but magic in the exam."


    We chatted while running away from the A-rank hunters. At least until they can''t see us anymore. It''s good that they don''t try to chase after us.


    "Are they always like this?"


    Sophie asked Victoria who run beside her.


    "Don''t worry. You will get used to it and be a part of it. What do you think? You never see this side of Roy, right? You only ever saw him acting cool in Red Tail before."


    "I think this side of him is cool. He acted like a coward but I think he''s worried about us so he doesn''t want to get us involved in any danger."


    "¡­I think your mind is already corrupted with your love toward Roy. Since you love him too much, you will ept anything about him."


    "What did you say?"


    "She said that you fell in love with an awesome guy."


    Victoria spoke in a low tone that Sophie can''t hear her. So I interrupted and said what I think.


    "Well, you''re right!"


    "Note to self. If I want to get a lover, find someone who has debt, and clear that debt."


    "Victoria. Don''t forget cheesy lines."


    "Yeah. That too."


    As soon as we''re far from the three A-rankers, we walked back home. Victoria also has disappear and only Blobby remains as my grappling hook on my arm.


    "That is really convenient."


    "I know, right? At first I want to stay this way and let Blobby continue as my weapon. But now Victoria have a longer time and can fight on her own, I have to use spear as my main weapon."


    I exined to Sophie after I show her how useful a grappling hook is.


    Soon we reach the city and I asked what the girls going to do.


    "I''m going to report to the guild about the orc settlement. What about you girls?"


    "I''m going home to take a bath. I sweat a lot today."


    "Yeah. I just wish that the bathroom in our apartment is bigger."


    "How about use the one in Red Tail? It''s big enough to hold ten people."


    "Is it fine to borrow your bathroom?"


    "It''s fine. Instead everyone would love if youe."


    Bath together? I''m in!


    "Cool. Let''s go take a bath together then!"


    "Girls only. You have report to give."


    "I''ll join after I finish reporting!"


    "No! I said girls only!"


    Sigh¡­ fine.


    "Ah, right! Let''s have a break from hunting for a week. I almost never had a break for over a month already. How about it? Ka? Sophie? Wanna go on a date?"


    "You''re asking both of us to go together or one by one?"


    "Anything is fine. Maybe Ang want to go as well?"


    "No thanks. Enjoy your date."


    "How about you and Ka go on a date tomorrow, and then with me the day after?"


    "You sure don''t want to be the first, Sophie?"


    "You''re his first girlfriend so you go first. And also, let''s go shopping for clothes to wear on our date! Let''s surprise Roy with our fashion!"


    "I won''t go on a date with him, but let''s go shopping."


    So we have our schedule decided. Tomorrow, I will go on a date with Ka. The day after, is with Sophie. Then maybe I will ask Daniel to go out to y the day after? I will ask Hannah to y together as well.


    And so, I left to report to the guild while the girls busy shopping for clothes and return together to Red Tail for a bath.


    I reported about the appearance of Orc Emperor and orc settlement. I show the guild staff the location on the map and they say they will ask high ranked hunter to subjugate the orc. They will set out in two or three days.


    ¡­And I will have enjoy my week long break.

 Chapter 54 - Date With Kayla

    The report I inform the guild about the orc settlement is quick. I just told them about encountering five orcs and finding an orc settlement led by Orc Emperor.


    Generally, orcs has the height of two and a half meter. But Orc Emperor has the height of 180 cm. it''s considerably shorter than average orcs, but it''s much more powerful than normal orc. Even stronger than General Orc. It also able to use magic and stronger than average Orc Mage. That''s why it''s rmended only for at least a party of A-rank hunters to subjugate.


    Then I told the staff that we met a party of three A-ranked hunters on the way home. They are going at the direction of the settlement. I don''t know what happened to them after they tried to flirt with the girls. Of course I told the staff about their attitude toward the girls.


    The guild told me that they will take care of it and give a group quest for it. Group quest is a quest that have no limit of the hunters who takes it. It can be just one participant, to maybe even over a hundred hunters participating. That''s how urgent this situation is.


    I'' also confused about the situation because it never happened in my previous life. Maybe because the ones who responsible in subjugating the Orc Emperor is among the cult new recruit I killed. Or maybe it''s the scarred-palm dude. Whatever the case, I let the guild take care of this.


    After all, I have a date today.


    It''s the day after we went training and I make promise to go on a date. Today is with Ka and tomorrow with Sophie. Sophie seems eager to go on a date yesterday she even pushed Ka to go shopping for clothes to wear during the date. Which means shopping for clothes is erased from the list on what to do during this date.


    Well, I have decided on what to do during our date. For Ka, it''s different than what I will do with Sophie tomorrow. I hope they enjoy it.


    Now I''m waiting for Ka on the street outside of Ka and Ang''s apartment. She wille out soon.


    And shees in a few minutes. That was quick. And the clothes she''s wearing¡­ it''s her usual clothes that sometimes she used during hunting.


    "Looking good as usual, eh?"


    "I think this is the best suit for the asion."


    She answered. And then Ang peeked her head outside the window of the second floor and said something to us.


    "She said she won''t wear the clothes she bought yesterday. What a waste¡­"


    "It''s okay. She looks good in this clothes as well."


    "Have fun!"


    Ang waves at us. But we still didn''t move from the spot.


    "Is she the kind that only wears her underwear in the house?"


    "I know that you''ll see it. Yes, she does. I think in your previous timeline, she wears revealing clothes because she likes to wear less."


    "I hope that''s true."


    "Me too."


    We still stand there without moving an inch. And Ang keeps watching us.


    "Anyway, it''s the first time I''m questioning your decision. Are you sure you''re fine going out with me? I know after what happened in our first time meeting made you hate men."


    Instead of answering, she approaches me. Her face is getting closer and closer until our lips met. We kissed for a few second and she separates her face from me.


    "You''re different. And I like you for that. Maybe because you saved my life, but I never regretted to be your lover. And I know that maybe there are many other girls who will recognize how great you are. That''s why I allow you to build a harem. As long as there''s a ce for me in your heart, I''m fine no matter how many girls be your lovers. Shall we go?"


    "¡­you''re perfect. I can''t believe a perfect girl like you would fall for me. I never have any girlfriend including in my past life, you know? So tell me if there''s anything you don''t like during our date. I''ll try to fix it."


    "So? Where are we going?"


    "It''s something I believe you will enjoy. Fishing and BBQ by the river. I rented a horse carriage for a whole day. Let''s have a lot of fun."


    "How do you know that''s what I want?"


    "Whenever we''re outside of the city, you always spacing out whenever we''re walking by a beautiful spot. And now we''re on a date, you didn''t wear a clothes normal girls would wear for a date even though you went to buy new clothes yesterday. Instead you''re wearing your easy to move clothes you usually wear whenever we''re on a quest. You also predict this would happen, didn''t you?"


    "Let''spete who catch the biggest fish! Do you have the fishing gears?"


    "I put all necessary stuffs in the carriage. Let''s go."


    We left together leaving Ang who keeps watching us shocked during our kiss. She''s so pure. I hope whoever gets to be her boyfriend won''t be a bad person.


    It''s just the two of us. I left Blobby in the care of Sophie who''s babysitting Daniel. She''s seems excited about tomorrow.


    But I brought my spear. Although the ce we''re going is close and rtively safe, there''s still a possibilities of monstersing. And they mighte from the smell of the fishes we''re cookingter.


    There''s not much to tell about our date. We went to the river, yed with water, went fishing, got fishes, and cooked it. It was fun. This is the most fun I ever had since I return back in time. No. even in my previous life, I''ve never had this much fun. Doing something together with a woman who loves you is totally different thing even when I''m doing the same old thing.


    Somehow Ka caught the biggest fish. As the winner, she decided to have me do all the cooking. I''ll show her my cooking skill I got from my 45 years of living!


    "That was so good!"


    "I know, right? This recipe will only appear in twenty years!"


    "I always forget that you''re thirty years older than me."


    "That''s my mental age. Since I''m returned in time, you can just treat me as someone your age. It''s weird if you think that a 45 years old man is going out with a 15 years old girl. Even Victoria said it was a crime in her old world. Just think I''m 15 now."


    "Yeah. That''s weird indeed. It''s no wonder you can seduce Sophie with your experience. Is there anyone else you have seduced other than the girls in Red Tail?"


    "No¡­ oh, wait! You remember that I said I got a new maid? She was Sam''s maid before. Somehow after I praised her a few times, she thinks I''m a substitute for her ideal father. Must be because of my mental age."


    "Yeah. You always act childish but sometime you act mature. Tell me more about her. She might be my new sister."


    "You call my other girlfriend your sister? That''s nice. Well, about her¡­ her name is Lina. I heard that she has a daddy issue. She''s also great as a maid¡­"


    I told her everything I know about Lina. About her issue I heard from Sam and how awesome her nt type summoned monster is.


    "Well then, next, please tell me more about yourself."


    "Me? Well, I''m just an average vige girl¡­"


    She lived with her parent in a vige near the city. Her parent always arranged a marriage partner for her ever since she awaken her magic. They want to livefortably with the money from their son-inw. But now she left her parent to live in Melk. Both her father and mother are addicted to gambling. That''s one reason why she choose to live in the city without hesitation when she and Ang discussed about getting an apartment.


    She also didn''t tell her parent that she''s living well as a hunter. She had more money now than fifteen years with her parent. She also has no regret in leaving them behind.


    Before we knew it, the sky has turned dark. I guess time passed by quickly when we''re having fun.


    "Wanna go home now? It''s getting dark."


    "Let''s stay here for a few more minutes. I don''t know when you will ask me for a date again in the future."


    "You can tell me whenever you want to go on a date, you know? Oh, the day after tomorrow, I''m going to go out and have fun with Daniel and Hannah. You can join us together. I will also invite Sophie as well. You can ask Ang if she want to go."


    "With the kids, huh? Okay. I enjoy our date just the two of us. But I like it better if all of us is together."


    "Then we should arrange a BBQ party with everyone when we got the chance. It will be a st!"


    We''re chatting few more minute and soon decided to go back home. It was an unforgettable day today. I know more about Ka and we also got much closer. The two of us sat on the carriage with a bright smiles on our faces.

 Chapter 55 - Date With Sophie

    Ah¡ªtoday was fun. Ka also seems to enjoy it very much. That means I did very well on my very first date ever. But for tomorrow¡­ I have no idea on what Sophie likes to do. I know Ka because we''re often go on a quests together. But Sophie, we just did it once and it was a training. I guess I should just take the safe route.


    As soon as I returned home, Victoria asked me about everything that happened. She doesn''t want to miss anything at all. Where we went to, the clothes she wore, what we did, I have no choice but to relent to her aggressive questionings.


    She said that it was terrible for a girl''s first date on a fishing trip. But when I told her that it was something Ka loved, she nodded and said, "It''s fine then."


    "You know, when girls go on a date in my world, we¡ª"


    "Stop! I don''t want to hear anything about it! Don''t bring the culture of another world to this world!"


    There''s a chance that whatever she tells me will only make me lose confidence in taking girls on a date ever again. What if the girls'' expectation rose up when they heard about dating in Victoria''s world? I don''t want that to happen.


    Soon nighte and it''s time to sleep for Daniel. He''s already asleep on the bed next to me. Since I have nothing to do, I decided to sleep as well. But there''s a knock on the door. It was Sophie.


    "Sophie? Come in."


    Shees in shyly. Unlike her usual self whenever she decided to sleep here. Maybe she''s too excited about tomorrow she can''t fall asleep. Is she a kid or what?


    "Roy. I''m too excited about tomorrow''s date I can''t fall asleep. Let''s sleep together."


    "Are you a kid? And you always sleep here with or without my permission after all."


    "Yeah, but it''s embarrassing to ask when we''ll be together the whole day tomorrow. Can''t we?"


    "¡­sure."


    I pulled Daniel who is deep in his sleep so he will sleep between us. I thought of having a Blobbybed but even if I do that, both of them will choose to move with me when they''re awake.


    I thought she''s just here to sleep. But she ended up chatting with me.


    "¡­Roy, how was today?"


    "It was great. I can''t wait for tomorrow."


    "I see¡­ that''s good. I also want for tomorrow toe sooner."


    "Good. Then let''s sleep."


    "Hahaha¡ª"


    "Why are youughing?"


    "Let''s sleep. That''s what you keep saying on our first meeting. Although I''m not naked now. Many things has happened to me ever since I met you."


    Since the topic turned into a serious one, I think I won''t tell her to just sleep this time. It''s not like I''m in a hurry. Also, since tomorrow''s schedule is a date with her, it''s fine since sleepte since we''re sleeping together after all.


    And thus we chatted about the all kind of topics before we sleep.


    At the end of our chat, I realize she''s already too sleepy. So I guess this is the end of our conversation.


    "Hey, Roy¡­ why did you agree to be my boyfriend?"


    "Because I love you."


    "But you already have Ka. Do you really want a harem that much?"


    "Well, not really. But I know how much you love me. Since Ka allow me to build a harem, I will make a harem only for girls who loves me. Like you and Ka. If there''s a girl who confessed to me, unless she''s seriously fall for me, I will reject them. Although Ka is a bit casual, I can understand her feeling. That''s why I epted her to be my girlfriend. And so were you. Although it''s a bit too casual of a confession, I know your feeling. That feelings is what makes me in love with you two. I guess being a single for 45 years is rted, but who cares about the past?"


    "But I''m dirty."


    "You''re not dirty."


    I guess it''s normal for her to feel about herself that way when she has been working as prostitute for a while. But I also speak my honest feeling.


    "Of course I am! I''m working in a brothel!"


    "You''re not dirty."


    "But-"


    "Sophie is not dirty."


    Unexpectedly, there''s someone else who answered. It was Daniel who seems to be still in his half asleep state. But he''s still able to join our conversation somehow.


    "Sophie is not dirty. Sophie always take a bath together with me. She''s not dirty. Nobody here is dirty¡­"


    Daniel spoke out what''s on his mind and he returns to sleep.


    "Well, you heard him. He''s the most honest kid I ever met. That means you''re not dirty at all. And I won''t let my girl speaks bad things about herself. You can never said you''re dirty ever again. Unless you''re swimming in a muddy river or something."


    "Heheh¡­ I guess I ept that. Hearing you both saying it make me feel better."


    I reached my hand toward her head and pat her head lightly.


    "Good night."


    "Good night."


    She answered back while grabbing my hand that''s patting her head. I guess this is how I''ll sleep tonight.


    ...


    Morninges and everyone wakes up. Sophie already returned to her own room for preparation for the date and Daniel, as expected, doesn''t remember what he said to Sophiest night. He''s confused why Sophie suddenly hugged him as soon as he wake up, but he doesn''t really mind it since he loves hugging.


    I dressed myself in my casual clothes and went down for breakfast. I waited for a while and soon Sophiee wearing a beautiful dress. I guess today''s date is within the city.


    We just walked around the city, eating street foods from the stall, buying something that interest us, while she never let go of my hand. It is a simple date, but we both enjoyed it just fine.


    It''s already getting dark before we know it. We decided to end our date with a dinner in a restaurant and then return home.


    "Sophie. Tomorrow I''m nning to hang out with Daniel and Hannah. Will you join us?"


    "Where will you go?"


    "Well, circuse to town. And looks like today is theirst day of preparation and will perform starting tomorrow. Look. We can see their tent from here."


    There''s a circusing that has been preparing for shows for a week. And I''m nning to watch it with Daniel and Hannah. And maybe everyone as well.


    "So yesterday with Ka, today with me, and tomorrow is with everyone?"


    "You can put it that way. Then everyone can enjoy together."


    "Well, I''lle. It will be fun¡­ maybe? Do you like circus?"


    "Yes. Back then, I don''t quite enjoy it. I thought it was only good for children. Then as I gain Aura, I understand that circus performers are among the people with the greatest physical ability. Maybe if it''s just their physics, they are much better than even those A or maybe S rank hunters. Their strength, agility, flexibility, and uracy are top-notch. And the best part is their humor sense. Kids enjoy them because they are funny. Especially the clowns. I just hope that the kids are not someone who''s afraid of clowns."


    "Hmm¡­ I see. I have heard that fear of clowns ismon. Let''s hope that''s not the case for Daniel and Hannah. And now that you mention it, you got me interested in circus. Let''s ask everyone in Red Tail."


    "Sure. I guess this is the end of our date."


    I regretted a bit that today''s date hase to an end. But I also look forward for the circus tomorrow.


    As I thought that way, Sophie suddenly grabbed my head and pulled me for a kiss.


    "It''s not considered a date if we don''t at least kissed once."


    "Make it twice."


    And so we kissed again under the moonlight.


    Although she''s an experienced woman, she didn''t ask me to visit her room. I also didn''t ask her for it. I thought that even though she may be feeling better, what she saidst night is still lingering in her mind. And I don''t want her to think that I epted her confession only for her body. So we''ll just slowly take our time for that. I''m still young after all.


    As we entered Red Tail, everyone was there waiting for me. Even Ka and Ang.


    Seems like while I''m on a date with Sophie, Ka asked everyone to hang out tomorrow saying it''s my n to do so. I''m fine with it so I told everyone that we''re going to the circus.


    There are fewer girls in Red Tail. After I cleared their debt, and also after what I said about stampede, several of them already left. Some left alone or in a group to be hunters in another city. I hope it''s not among the city that will be attacked soon. Some left without saying a word. They just disappear without any notice. And some choose to marry with their loyal customers. Some are from another city. And for the customers who''s living in this city, the girls said that they will suggest them to leave.


    There''s only me, Daniel, Hannah and her mother, Sophie, Ruby, and five other girls other than Ang and Ka. The five girls left are those who still haven''t decided on their future. They might go to Cassau but they might not stay and leave. There''s still time so it''s fine.


    Which means tomorrow morning, I have to leave early to book thirteen tickets. Fourteen with Victoria. Can''t leave her alone.

 Chapter 56 - The Birth Of Clarence The Clown

    The morning after my date with Sophie, I woke up and left early to book some tickets for the circus.


    I walked up to the ticket booth to buy the tickets.


    "Excuse me. I would like to buys some tickets for the circus."


    "Okay. How many?"


    "Fourteen."


    "Big family?"


    "Big family."


    The seller was about to give me the tickets but someone who seems to be part of the troupe stopped him.


    "Wait! The shows is canceled tonight!"


    "What?!"


    "Wait, what?! Why?"


    It was a sudden canction. I don''t know why, but if it''s like this, everyone will be disappointed. I have to ask the reason why.


    "Half of the performers got food poisoning. We can''t make appearance with only half of us. Even the main performer, the clown, also got sick."


    "How?"


    "The food catering service gave us two type of dishes. One with fish and the other with chicken. The one who eat the chicken got food poisoning."


    "Well, I can''t just go back and tell everyone that the circus is cancelled, can''t I? Is all the performance canceled?"


    "Well, we have no clowns. The trapeze artistscked members but can still perform. The contortionist is fine and so is the ventriloquist. The tightrope walker also out. We have a pair performance but one of them got sick. The dancers, if we change our routine, it might work. In the end, it''s the clown that most important. Since he''s the main entertainment for circus. If a circuscked clowns, can it still be called a circus?"


    Damn, he''s right! A circus without a clown is no circus.


    Hmm? There''s one performance he didn''t say.


    "There''s no animal tamer?"


    "Since ourst tamer can''t see the difference between animal and monster, and got eaten by monster, we decided to never have a tamer ever again."


    What should I do now? I can''t just go home and tell everyone the show is cancelled. I don''t want to let them down.


    Wait! I have one thing I can do!


    "Hey! If there''s a clown who can do multiple performance, will you let the show goes on?"


    "Hmm? Of course. We loss too much money just by cancelling the shows. If the shows can go on, I will do anything."


    "Then I will be the clown! I''ll practice all the performance before noon. Then if I can do it, you will continue the shows!"


    "That''s a good n, but can you do it? Doing performance in a circus is not just something anyone can do. Especially being a clown that need to make everyoneugh. Can you do it?"


    "I''ll do it! If you think I''m not good enough, you can cancel the shows. As for people who want to buy the tickets, just let the booth open when you decide the show can go on! And please let me have thirteen tickets for free."


    "Okay, then. You can enter the tent and practice now. As for the tickets, we''ll take care of it."


    "Wait. I''ll tell everyone what''s going on first. I''ll be back soon!"


    I left the booth and run home as fast as I can. The n is changed a bit, but everyone can still enjoy the circus.


    I reached Red Tail and see everyone is still enjoying their breakfast. I told them what happened in the ticket booth.


    "So you''re going to be a clown?"


    "Only if my performance is good enough."


    "Don''t worry. We know you can do it. Don''t let the shows got cancelled!"


    "I''ll be sure to make it happen!"


    After telling them what happened, I return back to the circus and entered the tent.


    "I forgot to tell you that I''m the leader of this troupe, Thomas. And I''m also the emcee of the circus. Not that it''s an important position though. My job when the shows began is to say who will be performing and what kind of performance it is."


    "Cool. I''m Roy. A hunter."


    "Are you sure you''re good enough?"


    "I can show you. Why don''t you introduce me to the other members and tell them the shows might go on."


    "Only if pass the test. Since there are many performers who got poisoned, you will have to do multiple performance to fill the gap."


    Thomas then gathered everyone in the tent. About half of them has paleplexion. They must be the one who got poisoned. Why aren''t they at hospital?


    "Everyone. This is Roy who will substitute our sick performers. Roy, everyone choose to stay when they heard that someone will substitute them. They choose to stay so they can see the one who will rece them instead of going to the hospital."


    "Just go to the hospital already!"


    "They won''t until you show them what you got."


    "Fine!"


    Without waiting for permission, I climbed up adder to the high tform where they put the tight rope is. Looks like this is also where the trapeze artist will start their performance once the rope is untied. The distance between the two tforms is about 20 meters. Just show how big this tent is since it also has the capacity to allow five hundred of audiences. I''m gonna ask for the seats in the front row for the others.


    I reached the top and walked on the tightrope. Everyone looks amazed to see an amateur did it on the first try. But my performance is not just about walking on a tightrope.


    As I reached the midway of the rope, I stopped.


    Now it''s time for the real shows!


    I jumped and did a backflip. But I didn''tnd on the rope. I just let gravity pull me to the ground. Face first.


    "What are you doing?!"


    "No!"


    Yep. That''s a normal reaction. I have looked around the stage and I can see that they usually put the for the training. Because of the food poisoning, they haven''t prepared the. So I''m falling straight to the ground.


    And what everyone heard is not the sound of a body fallen to the ground. But the sound is simr to punching the ground. It''s because I stopped my fall with one hand. I''m showing how strong I really am to them. I also stopped for a few second and do a one hand hand-stand push-up a few times to show them I''m totally fine.


    "See? I can perform just fine. Now you sick people, go to the hospital!"


    Seeing me did a performance, the poisoned performers decided to leave for hospital. I guess them staying here shows how much they took pride in their job. I can''t hate someone like that.


    "Are you really fine? That''s a ten meters free fall you did."


    "I''m fine. In fact I can go higher. I''m actually an air element mage. I just made the air below me a bit thicker to slow my fall."


    But even if I didn''t use any magic, I''m sure I''ll be fine. This part I didn''t tell everyone.


    "I see. Then what do you think about your performance? You think you can just show everyone that falling from that height is fine? We can''t show that to the audience."


    "If you''re nning to use that fall in the shows, I have an idea. By the way, which one is the clown?"


    Thomas pointed at someone who''s exiting the tent. He''s about as tall as me.


    "He''s in simr height as you but have arger built."


    "I see. Then I can wear his clothes. I might add some pillow so I can be seen as a fat clown. It will be funnier that way."


    "That''s a good idea. But about that fall?"


    "Don''t worry. My n is before we start the show of the tightrope walker or the trapeze artists, I will fall first just like that. But below me, there has to be a stall selling clothes. I will fall to that stall and when Ie out, I will wear something else. Then I will look up and pretend to realize that the wasn''t prepared yet. That''s the signal of when you should prepare the while I entertain the audience. How about it?"


    "I see. Yeah, that can be funny. I think you just got the job and the shows will go on. But what else can you do?"


    "I can do sleight of hand. And maybe I can pretend to do other performance but I fail. Then after I failed, the real performers will show how to do it right. And to fill the time that the sick performers should do, I have few things in mind. Since I have been epted, please train me well. I''ll do my best to do my part."


    "If you can do many things, you might end up ying the whole time. Can you do it?"


    "I have confidence in my stamina. Even if the shows goes until morning, I can go on just fine."


    "Then we will trust you."


    Thomas then turned to the members of his troupe.


    "You heard the man! He will do the most during tonight''s shows! You will take turn teaching him and see that he learned it so he can fill-in the nk left by other members. We will do our shows as scheduled with a special guest from the clown¡­ rence the Clown!"


    """OOOOOOH!"""


    Everyone seems spirited now they can perform.


    But¡­


    "Why rence?"


    "You need a stage name. Do you hate it?"


    "No. rence is fine."


    I can''t wait to show Daniel and the others how great I am as an entertainer. Let''s hope everything will go well.


    ¡­and during lunch I have to check if the food served is spoiled or not. Can''t have the shows cancelled again because of the same reason.

 Chapter 57 - The Show Begins

    I returned to Red Tail after lunch and give everyone the tickets at the front row. They have to see me perform.


    During practice, I was praised a lot for being able to do many things. Except by the contortionist. I know I have flexible because of my daily training, but not that flexible. Doing a split is the best I can do.


    Thanks to that, I will perform most of the time from start to finish. I don''t mind because I enjoyed it a lot. But because of that, the focus of the circus today is in theedy.


    Usually, other performers will perform and shows their awesomeness for a while. But because of theirck of members because of food poisoning, they have to change their routine which in turns makes me part of their new routine.


    Since the shows is at night, from seven o''clock until nine, the troupe decided to for us to rest after lunch until one hour before the shows began. Since they see me practicing too hard, they thought I might be tired. But the truth is I can go on and not feeling tired at all. But I was told that if I continued practicing, other might follow. Even if I don''t get injured, the other might be. That''s why I choose to rest in Red Tail.


    Back in Red Tail, everyone is more excited than when I told them we''re going to the circus. Must be because I will perform. That means I have to show them my awesomeness. I can''t let them down.


    It''s finally time for me to go. I need to prepare my costume and makeup. This show might be the only time I will perform. That''s why this has to be the best performance. I lend Blobby to Sophie who tells everyone about Blobby''s other identity. Two hour is enough for her tost the whole show. She will transform into her female human form before they enter the tent and watch me like everyone else.


    Behind the stage, I let the makeups artist to do their things. I told them it has to be one-of-a-kind face. When they finished with me, I looked at the mirror. It''s looking good. They cover my face with white paint and draw a big lips over my lip to the cheeks. There''s a red colored heart shaped symbol on my left eye and on my right eye it''s a diamond shaped one. On my forehead, it''s a ck spade shaped on the right, and a club on the left. Just like the symbol on ying cards.


    I put on a big red round nose and a blue afro wig. I don''t know if this is a one-of-a-kind but I like it. I wore a red oversized pants and striped shirts. With pillow underneath that makes me look big. They don''t restrict my movement at all.


    Finally, the show began!


    The MC and leader of the troupe, Thomas, introduce everyone for the shows. He also apologize for theck of members. I''ll be thest one he will introduce.


    "And now! We have a special guest to substitute ourck of member! He is a legend! No one knows where he came from! He just appeared today and tell us the show must go on! He''s the legendary clown, rence the Clown!"


    I''m a legend before my first appearance? I guess Thomas know how to put someone in the spotlight. I just have to make sure what he said wille true.


    I get into the stage and waved my hands to the audience. I saw Daniel and the others pointing at me saying, "That''s Roy!"


    I guess they recognize me on first nce. I waved at them longer than I did to other audience.


    After waving at everyone, I took out three balls. This is the part where I show everyone my juggling skills.


    Everyone looked at me in awe. Well, most of them are kids, though. They are being brought here with their parents. I can easily make the children entertained, but the adult, I will try harder.


    That''s why the circus'' staff put a huge ball in the stage. While juggling, I jumped on the huge ball and bnced myself on the ball. This time everyone is amazed. Well, not Ka and Ang who already knows that I can do this. Not like I have shown this performance to them, but I think they just think everything I could do here is normal if I managed to do it. Daniel and the others is showing the same reaction as everyone else.


    I did a round on the stage on top of the huge ball while juggling three balls. Then Thomase up and throws me another ball. There''s four balls now that I''m juggling. I can hear the audience gasped.


    Thomas added one more ball and it became five. The audience''s reaction became wilder. I can do more but I think this is enough. Both Thomas and I don''t want the standard of every shows to be too high. If the audience''s expectation is too high, then in the future when I''m not performing, we will only let them down. That''s why only five balls is enough.


    I jumped down from the huge ball and grabbed all the balls I juggled at the same time. I bowed down to the audience and everyone''s pping at my performance.


    I return to the backstage ande back again with balloons on my hand. It''s time for balloon art show while the other is preparing their props. It''s just for a few minutes and only enough to make one balloon art.


    I blew air into the balloon enough to shape it after I blew it. Then with my quick hands, I shape it into the form of a dog. I heard apuse again. I''m doing really well. Since Daniel is in the front row, I gave that dog shaped balloon to him. He was so happy.


    Other kids also shows that they want me to make them one. But it''s already times for other performer. The strongman.


    Thomas announced who wille next and the staffs are putting the props at the stage. It was a barbell with 100kg written on each weight. And also a thick book.


    When the staff put the barbell, they were asked to drop it purposely on the ground to tell the audience how heavy it is. The sound is so loud the tent is covered with silence. No more apuse or someone speaking.


    Before the strongman''s appearance I need to look like I want to try lifting it. I grabbed the bar and tried to lift it up. Although I can lift it, I pretend that it was too heavy for me. I tried many times but I failed. I even pretend that my hand slipped and fall on my back. Everyoneugh at my ridiculous action.


    Then the strongman came with a sneer. That sneer makes everyoneughed again. He grabbed the book prepared for him and rip it in half with his strength. Leaving everyone in awe.


    Then he leave the stage to grab something and return again. He''s carrying a balloon filled with helium. He shoved the balloon to me and I pretend that it was way too heavy for me. I tried to push it, pull it, lift it, push it down, and it stayed in one spot without moving. Everyoneughed at how weak I am.


    The strongman ignore me and grabbed the barbell bar. He easily lifted it up with one hand. Everyone amazed by his strength.


    I''ve tried that before. I don''t think it was truly 200 kg. But it''s still heavy enough for normal people to lift. But he can easily lifted it with one hand while sneering at me who can''t lift a balloon properly.


    He dropped the barbell and it makes another loud sound. Everyone gave him a round of apuse as he bows to the audience. Then he approached me with a needle he took from his pocket. He stab that needle to the balloon I tried to push forward, and I pretend to fall forward. It was funny for everyone to see a clown doing stupid things.


    I got up and pretend to be angry at him. But he only has a fierce expression on his face without saying anything so I pretend to be scared and say ''peace bro''.


    Then he waked out the stage. When his back is facing me, I made a gesture like I''m making fun of him. Some audienceughed at me. When the audienceughed, the strongman looked back to me and I just do a stupid thing. Pretending that there''s nothing wrong. Of course theughter be louder after that.


    I did it each time he''s turning his back on me and he also stopped when he heardughter. Finally he left the stage and I have no one else to make fun of. There''s just the sound of the audience pping.


    The shows begin with a good start.

 Chapter 58 - The Show Is Over But Trouble Begin

    Because theughter is loud enough to make people outside the tent hear it, they decided to buy the tickets and watch the show. Little by little, the empty seat is filled with new audience.


    Thomas who watched the seats is filled, is extremely happy. Usually a circus never have full seat. There''s always some empty seats. But if we continue like this, we might be able to fill all the empty seats.


    For me, the strongman already left and there''s no one to make fun of anymore. But soone the contortionist. Unlike the big strongman who has just left, she''s really thin. The contrast between both performers make the audience curious about what she will do.


    The contortionist entered the stage carrying my greatest enemy. Balloon filled with helium. There are also some staffs entered with her to prepare the props for her performance.


    Seeing the balloon, I pretended to be afraid of it. When she politely give me the balloon, at first I rejected it. But finally I reluctantly epted it. This one has a string attached so I grabbed the string. The balloon floated without me having to lift it up myself. I make a happy expression and the audienceughed at me.


    As I grabbed the balloon, she moved her hand to grab her own head. Then she makes a jump and spin 180 degree while keeping her head in the same position facing the same direction. Which makes her neck is turned 180 degree.


    Everyone gasped seeing that. Including me. Then she makes many other extremely difficult moves to make the audience left in awe.


    Finally, herst performance is using bow and arrow with her leg in difficult position as she shot the arrow to the balloon I was holding. I pretended to act like I''m really scared and looked like about to leak out. I run away from where I stood several times until she can''t take it anymore and force me to stand there.


    I covered with my eyes with the hand which not holding the balloon as she shot the arrow.


    It''s a bullseye!


    I heard the balloon popped and I see that she hit the target. Again, everyone''s apuse fill the entire tent.


    After that, although I wasn''t on the stage the entire time, the audience is satisfied with many of the other performers. The strongman alsoe out a few times to assist other performers. And whenever both of us on stage, we acted like mortal nemesis. It was interesting for the audience to watch a rivalry between me and the fierce looking strongman.


    I also did what I said during my entrance test. I walk on a tightrope and fall into a cart full of merchandise which was brought by the strongman to advertise the circus. Then Ie out of fine except that I wore a red dress. At first everyone panicked because of my fall. But when they see mee out wearing a dress, it turned into aughter.


    By this time, all the seats are already filled. No more empty seats.


    I gestured to the staff that the safety need to be ced while I was being chased by the strongman. Not expecting that the tightrope walkers are already on the rope on each side of the rope.


    The staff tried to tie the faster in case someone falls again. But the truth is no one will fall. It was only for the audience to think that there won''t be any danger.


    But the two walkers are already in the middle of the rope with their bncing pole before the is fully prepared. Everyone gasped, but when they see that one of the walker crouching, while the other one is climbing the crouching one so they both can reach the other side safely, there''s another thunderous apuse from the audience.


    Finally, we reached the climax. The trapeze artists.


    They did a simple switch from one swing to another as a warming up. Everyone already amazed with their skills but it''s not the real thing yet. Of course I have my turn here as well.


    I climbed on one high tform. Both hands are grabbing the bar on the swing and I swing on it. It feels good to just swing, but that''s not what everyone want to see.


    The trapeze artist on the other side, is hanging with his leg on the swing to receive me. And so as I jumped over to the other swing, I actually letting myself fall to the safety. Everyone gasped in shock seeing I jumped too soon.


    The was actually adjusted so that when someone actually fall, the will break the part where the is tied to. Which makes the unusable anymore.


    I was safe from the fall, but I pretend to panic seeing there are still many people above doing some acrobatics move. Making the audience looking at the same spot.


    Then I pretend to freeze with their awesomeness while I''m still caught in the and sat on the ground. They did some awesome acrobatic move up there without thinking about falling.


    After finished doing their moves, they stood on the tform and gave bow to the audience. That performance make the audience gave a standing ovation toward us performers. Someone even yelling my stage name, rence, over and over again.


    Finally the show is over with all of us performers bowed to the audience following Thomas instructions. But something big happened as the audience is still pping.


    Someone entered the tent without tickets to announce something horrifying.


    "The orcs are attacking! There are dozens of orcs attacking outside the city!"


    And so the audience who were just happily enjoying the asion, panicked o her the news. Then from the top of my lung, I yelled.


    "CALM DOWN!"


    It was so loud that everyone stopped screaming and looked at me.


    "Calm down! They''re still outside the city! What you need to do now is to calmly go home and lock the door until it''s safe. Just walk out there calmly, while making sure you won''t block the way of the hunters and guards who will go out there to defeat the orcs. Do that, and I''m sure you will be safe. Now calmly go out the tent, and do what I said. And thank you for watching. Good night!"


    In the end, it was me who closed the show. Everyone also calmly leave their seats and went home.


    "Since there''s monstersing, we should go back to the inn. We can clean up this ce tomorrow. What about you, Roy?"


    "I¡­"


    As I was thinking about what to do, the Hunter''s Card in my pocket is beeping. I always carry it even in this clown costume. It''s a signal from the guild that there''s an emergency quest and all hunters should go to the guild unless they want their rank to be dropped or have a sound reason to why they didn''te.


    I turned to Thomas and the others saying that I already have a n.


    "Well, since it''s beeping I already know what I''m about to do."


    "About your payment, we''ll talk tomorrow."


    "Okay! Good night! Be safe!"


    "Wait! You''re going to the guild wearing that?"


    "There''s no time!"


    With that, I left the tent. And outside the tent, there''s three girls waiting for me. They were Ang, Ka, and Sophie.


    "I knew you wille if we waited."


    "Where''s the other?"


    "They already went home. Victoria is with them. Saying that once she get home, she will grab your spear. So when you summoned her, the spear wille along."


    "Cool. Did you enjoy the performance?"


    "It was great."


    "You were amazing!"


    "It was hrious seeing you on bad term with the big guy."


    It was Ka, Sophie, and Ang respectively who answered. I knew my rivalry with the strongman is the most memorable part of the show.


    "Then, let''s go to the guild!"


    "Wearing that?"


    "Yes!"


    It must be funny for other people to see three girls and a clown running to the guild.


    As we reached the guild we hear someone quarrelling.


    "You just run away leaving your friend to their death, and luring the orcs here? Are you a clown?"


    Hearing that remark, I can''t just let it go. I kicked the door to the guild open and entered.


    "Wait! Even a clown is better than that! Don''t insult a clown unless you know the guy better!"


    I see one of the A-rank hunter that tried to flirt with the girls three days ago, and an overbearing man who seems to be a high ranked hunter as well.


    "Who are you?"


    "My stage name is rence the Clown!"


    "Alright. Since I already know who you are, I''ll call you a retard!"


    "There you have it! You only insult a clown after knowing him. Do you even know the guy whose cor you''re grabbing?"


    "I don''t know yet. I just know what he did is wrong. I apologize for insulting clowns."


    Seems like he''s cooled down with our stupid conversation. That''s good now we can have a proper discussion.


    Good thing I''m here still in my clown costume.

 Chapter 59 - Emergency Meeting

    The man who was angry before, already calmed down. He let go of the guy he grabbed and started talking to me. Seems like he knows what to do in a when everyone is getting too heated. And I y along to cool down everyone here.


    "So¡­ why are you wearing that costume?"


    "Circuse. Lack members. Volunteer."


    "So the circus came to town, but somehowcking their members when the show about to start. And then you volunteer to be a clown so the show can go on."


    "Show end. Come here."


    "And just as the show ended, you''re called when your card beeping. So you''re also a hunter, huh? What rank and how old are you?"


    "Silver. D. 15."


    "You''re still fifteen and you already reached D rank? Which mean it''s just this year that you be a hunter, right? Since fifteen is the age when people got their magic awakened. You having a silver card will be changed into gold soon I hope."


    "And you? Who are you?"


    "Don''t know anything about me?"


    "I''m a newbie. Haven''t even been one year since I became a hunter."


    "Now you speak normally? Then I answer it your way. Kron. 33. White."


    "You have a white card? Does that mean you''re the A-ranked Kron who reached rank A 5 years ago? Wow! You''re amazing! I heard it''s difficult after getting to rank C to improve further. But isn''t the man you''re fighting is also an A-rank? He called himself an A-rankst time we met."


    "A. But thief."


    "You mean he''s an A ranked but he actually reach that rank by stealing other people''s achievement? while the other''s having trouble ranking up. And he think he can get away with that?"


    "Guild. Evidences. Escape."


    "You mean the guild has found the evidence that he and his friend are frauds. And then they decided to escape? Then during their escape this happen."


    "Yes."


    "Can you two speak like normal people? It''s good to see the loner Kron to make friend but this is not the time."


    The receptionist interrupt our chat. What''s wrong with it? We speak word by word and the other exining it. That''s fine, right?


    And for there to be a fake A-ranker¡­ first time I heard about it. It''s not really a fake, but just someone who steal other''s achievement and got their rank rose. But their level should be way below their rank so they''re a fake.


    I already know this man is Kron when I saw him. He''s a hunter who reached where he is now just by doing solo quest. All the quests he ever done, he did it alone. That''s why he was called The Lonewolf.


    He was so great that even I have heard of his achievement in my past life. But somehow, few years after the attack on Melk, he just disappear. I think it was between five to ten years from now. I forget.


    No one ever know what happened to him. I just hope he didn''t be a part of the cult. I didn''t see any explosives in his mouth, so I think he''s safe.


    Just as we were about to continue chatting, the guild master ising.


    "Sorry, I waste. I just watched the circus with my grandson and¡­ OOOOH! It''s rence the Clown! You''re a hunter?"


    "Yes I am."


    "So good to see you! My grandson is a big fan! You''re doing great to calm the audience."


    "That''s nothing."


    "Guild Master. Can we please discuss the important thing first?"


    "Oh right!"


    Then the receptionist began exining the situation.


    "It happened because of this guy and his friends."


    She pointed to the fake A-rank hunters.


    Then she continued to exin about three days ago when a hunter reported about the orc settlement and the appearance of what seems to be an Orc Emperor.


    "Me! Me! It was me who reported it! I also report about encountering him and his friends!"


    I sais ad I pointed at the fake ranker.


    "So you''re Roy. I didn''t notice you with that makeups and costume."


    Said the receptionist. Then she continued telling about what happened that day.


    The guild was just got the news about three man party who stole someone''s achievement to raise their rank. They pretended to help other strong party, and when they killed the target monster, the three killed all the hunters and witnesses. That''s how the achievement of killing strong monster fall into their hand and their ranks rose.


    They realize the guild finally got the evidence and prepare to escape when they met me. That''s why the guild stopped the search for their whereabouts because of the Orc Emperor and call back all the people chasing after them. Because if they made a mistake, they will be the one who ended up entering the settlement.


    That''s why sine two days ago, the guild organized a group to kill the Orc Emperor and destroy their settlements with Kron as the leader.


    "You''re the leader? Cool!"


    "It''s just because I work alone. In the real battle, I won''t do much. The leader of each party is the one who lead their own party. I''m just a figurehead since no one will object if I''m the leader."


    "That''s still cool. It means the guild has that much faith in you."


    "Thanks."


    Kron and I whispered to each other while the receptionist still talking.


    In the end, this morning, the three idiots ended up entering the orc settlement and they were being chased by the orcs.


    It took them three days to reach there but it took him less than one day to return? They must be trying to erase their tracks as they go. Especially after meeting me. They must be thinking to eliminate us but never consider us to escape. How foolish¡­


    And this guy who came back, he actually sacrificed his friend to survive. But he was so stupid he''s still being chased. His stupidity ended up luring the orcs to this city.


    "Reportedly, there were about 30 orcs outside the city. With the help of hunters and the guards, we''re able to defeat them all, but the citizen still in panic."


    "So? If the orcs has been defeated, why are we here?"


    One hunter asked why we got called. And the guild master take a step forward to exin.


    "Then let me exin why the guild gathered us here. If it''s really the Orc Emperor, then today''s attack is not the end. There will be more tomorrow. Orc Emperor is smart enough to strategize. Which means we need two groups. One group will defend this city along with the guards, and the other group will go to the settlement and subjugate the Orc Emperor. You will depart tomorrow morning, so we''re here to arrange the group. As for the location of the settlement¡­"


    "Oh! I can show you where they are! Do you have a map?"


    The receptionist gave me a map of the area around Melk. I drew a circle on the location where I saw the settlement is.


    "I saw the Orc Emperor around this area. He''s inside the settlement. I don''t know how big the settlement is, but it should be around this area."


    "Then Kron and your party will leave to the settlement."


    "Why me?!"


    I don''t know why I was suddenly selected to be in the group that go to the settlement. I mean, we''re just D-rankers. And one E-ranker.


    "You will be the guide. I won''t ask you to defeat the orcs. Just making sure that everyone will reach the location. By the way, did the orcs chasing you?"


    "No."


    "Which means you have a pair of good eyes. You saw the Orc Emperor even when you haven''t entered their settlement. After all, once the orc realize an intruder, they will chase after them. You didn''t get chased is why I ask you to go."


    Damn! I''m the one who thought of leaving this job to other hunters when I first saw that Orc Emperor. Now it became my duty to guide other hunters to go there?


    And the guild master realize I have a good vision just by that exnation. No wonder he''s the guild master.


    "With your vision, I hope you can at least find a location with low security to breach. Once the Orc Emperor is defeated, the settlement will be in chaos. Which makes it easier to eliminate them all."


    He''s really smart. He build a n based on how god my vision is.


    "Well, rence¡­ or Roy. Pleased to work with you."


    "Yeah¡­ me too¡­ Can I wear this outfit tomorrow?"


    "No. Wear something easy to move. I don''t think you can move really well with that on. Even if you do, if you wear something easy to move, you will be able to move better."


    "It''s not like I will be the one to fight..."


    "Go rest for the night and we will gather here tomorrow morning. We will depart as soon as everyone has gathered."


    "Okay¡­"


    At least it''s good that I don''t have to fight.


    Orc Emperor, huh?


    Even if I don''t have to fight, I should at least make a n in case no one can defeat it. If I make a good n, I think I can defeat it even on my own. I hope it won''te to that.


    The meeting is over and we were told to go home to rest. But it''s not the time for me to go home. I have somewhere else to go because of this incident. I told the girls to go home without me, while I go to the governor''s house.


    I want to see if this is a part of their n or not.

 Chapter 60 - Entering Orc Settlement

    I went to the governor''s ce to see the reaction of the cult about the orcs. It seems like this wasn''t part of the n.


    I''m at the rooftop right above the governor''s office so I can eavesdrop on him, while looking with my Divine Vision. He''s not alone.


    I heard them arguing inside his office.


    "What''s wrong with this city?! Nothing ever goes ording to the n! First, we lost many new recruits. Now the orcs settlement? This will make the citizen prepared for the future stampede! You''re the governor, but you don''t know what''s going on?"


    "Actually, the orcs settlement is just a coincidence. It was the fault of some criminal who identally enter their territory and stupidly decided to lure them here."


    "But it''s still your city! Whatever the case, make sure everything will going well for the stampede. No more mistakes!"


    "Understood."


    I see. Hearing their conversation, it seems this is not their fault. It might be mine though, but I don''t care. Now I really think that the one who took care of the orcs settlement is among the people I killed during the cult''s recruitment exam.


    Well, since it''s my fault, I will take care of it. I need to go home and prepare a n for fighting against the Orc Emperor. Since Victoria should be out of time now, and tomorrow I might need her, I can''t ask for her teaching. I''ll just do my best then.


    The next morning, we already gathered in the guild. And I no longer wearing the clown costume. Which makes me need to introduce myself again to Kron and other hunters.


    Someone suggested a n.


    "How about we let the guide and his party subjugate the monsters on the way? Then the main force can save their magic before the real thing."


    "That could be a good n, but they''re still just newbies. It will took time for them to defeat the monsters on the way. We need to defeat the Orc Emperor quickly."


    "Hey, we''re just newbies. So I don''t think we should go there. I can just show you the location on the map. It''s okay, right?"


    ""NO!""


    Somehow, everyone said it together.


    "Why are you guys so adamant in having me as the guide?"


    "Because you''re the only one who saw the Orc Emperor. It''s just in case you''re lying so we can just punish you out there. And if it''s the truth, you can get support from us saying that your party can be trusted and your rank might be raised."


    "Aaah¡­ so you still think I''m lying. That''s fine I guess¡­"


    Well, that''s that. Which means I have no way out of going there.


    "Then I might have a n. Apart from Kron and my party, there are about six parties. Each time we encounter monsters on the way, one party will fight them. Then the next encounter, it''s another party''s turn. You''ll take turns fighting monsters. Then if the monster is too strong, like maybe Orc General, one party must be left behind to fight it. They can catch upter once they finished the fight. How''s that?"


    "I think that''s a good n."


    "Yeah, I agree."


    Seems like everyone agreed. But then, someone enters the guild with news of the orcs army approaching.


    "They''reing! The orcs sending an army! The number is about one hundred of them!"


    Then Kron took charge of the attacking team.


    "Let''s go now. The defending team will protect the city and make ways for us. Let''s go!"


    With this situation, there''s no way that I won''t fight the Orc Emperor, right? What a shitty luck I have.


    With Blobby as my grappling hook and a broken spear on my back, all of us left the guild and run toward the settlement.


    I think I know the reason why the guild master ask me on this mission. It''s so that they know that I have a good vision. So they can set me to be scouting the area next time the guild needed something. And other hunters already realized that when the guild master put me in this team. In the end, I stillck experience to figure it out quickly like other hunters.


    With the hunters from the defending team and the guards helping us, we managed to break through and went directly to the orcs settlement.


    With this many people, it was difficult for me to find who among them is connected to the cult. But at least none of the attacking team have any explosives inside their mouth. But to trust them is a different matter.


    On the way, we encounter groups of orcs. They seem to be the reinforcement sent by the Orc Emperor. We did as nned to fight in rotation. 1st party, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, and after the sixth, the first party got their turn again.


    It was easy as they are just normal orcs. And the average ranks of us in attacking team other than my party is B-rank.


    As we got closer to the target, we finally encounter a group of orcs lead by an Orc General. Looks like they finally showing the main force. But they won''t even reach the wall of the city with us here.


    "Finally, a worthy opponent! We''ll take care of this! You guys continue to the target ording to the n! We''ll catch up soon!"


    A leader of one party decided to fight the Orc General.


    We left them behind because it''s part of the n. They will catch up soon so it''s fine.


    Then we encounter another group. This one has two Orc Generals.


    Another party decided to stay.


    It happen again three more times. But thest three encounters has Orc Wizard in it. It might took time for them to reach the Orc Emperorter, but at least, once the other who were left behind catching up, they can help them.


    Finally, the one who reached the settlement is just Kron, my party, and another party consisting of two male hunters and two female hunters.


    "Well, we''re here now. What should we do?"


    "Charge them directly."


    It was Kron who suggested that. There''s no way I want to do it but he already activated his magic.


    "Cyclone!"


    His Wind element has reached Advanced level and I feel like it''s so close to Expert. In a year or so, his wind magic should be able to reach an Expert level.


    Using his magic, he made a cyclone that rampaging on the settlement and attacking all the orcs nearby.


    It was so strong that Ang, Ka, and Sophie were almost blown away. I have to hold them tightly so they won''t fly. The other party seems to be doing fine. They can still stand on their own. Showing the difference in experience and skill between us.


    "Damn! That''s just sick!"


    Kron didn''t kill the orcs with just that. He also used ice magic Ice Spike, and shoot many of them at the cyclone. This is the one that will kill the orcs within the cyclone. The spikes will flew inside the cyclone and stab the flying orcs inside.


    "Ang. You saw that didn''t you?"


    I asked Ang who''s in my arm so she won''t flew away.


    "Yes. I will learn a lot from today''s experience."


    "Good. Anyway, we can''t do anything with this cyclone on the way. Let''s just watch a little longer."


    The other party, seeing that they were not needed in this area, they decided to leave to another area where the cyclone doesn''t affected the orcs. That''s where they fight their battle.


    As for us, we just stay here until the cyclone is gone. Well, I''m doing fine, but the girls has difficulty moving. It''s all thanks to my Aura that I can stay in this spot without moving. If I don''t have Aura, we might suffer the same fate as the orcs.


    Kron doesn''t stop his cyclone yet as not all the orcs killed by the Ice Spike yet. He want to make sure that at least all the orcs that got caught is dead before stopping the cyclone.


    But it appears. The Orc Emperor is calmly walking in the middle of the cyclone. The Orc Emperor is smaller than average orc, but much stronger. It can also use magic as well. Just like Orc Wizard.


    Using wind magic which is more powerful than Kron''s, the Orc Emperor cancelled Kron''s cyclone just like that.


    "It''s raining orcs!"


    "No time for joke, Roy! The big boss is here!"


    "Then it''s our cue to run away. Kron! We will take care of the small fries! Can you take it on alone?"


    "I''ll try! Good luck!"


    "You too!"


    We left this area to Kron alone. He''s already an A-ranked who''s so close to reaching S-rank. I hope he can defeat it on his own.


    I don''t know the level of Kron''s magic other than the wind element. For ice, since he''s only used a weak Ice Spike so efficiently, he hasn''t show his true strength. I truly hope that I won''t take part in this battle, so I told the girls to just take care of the small fries.


    Anyway, even if he can''t defeat it, he can at least stall for time until other hunters caught up. And no one will me us for not joining the fight against Orc Emperor since we''re just newbies.

 Chapter 61 - Cleaning Up The Small Fries

    On our side, we took care of normal orcs. I found a location where only normal orcs appear. No Orc General, or Orc Wizard in sight.


    We were doing okay, but the girls'' stamina can''t keep up. They were still not used to continuous battle. Of course I helped them. But they must be feeling stressed because they''re still not used to it.


    I looked at Kron and the Orc Emperor from time to time with my Divine Vision. He''s not doing so well. He''s almost on par with the Orc Emperor in magic, but he''s losing in physical ability. He will tire out soon. But at least I can see other parties starting to catch up. Kron will be able to catch a breather soon with them helping.


    As for the other party that split with us as soon as Kron used his cyclone magic, they were doing fine as well. They can fight well against Orc General and Orc Wizard. Although the battle took some time. But they never realize that they were about to get ambushed several times. It was thanks to me that they weren''t caught in a trap. But I won''t tell them it was me who helped them.


    I used Blobbyrifle to shoot rocks at the orcs that trying to ambush them. Then the party will realize there are other orcs who tried to ambush them but somehow failed. They can easily take care of those orcs.


    I also want to help Kron by shooting from afar, but I''m afraid that if I disturb their battle, Kron might lose concentration. That''s not something I want to happen. I just pray that the other parties can help him.


    Now all the orcs within our area has been cleared. But the girls are already exhausted. Especially Sophie who has just return to be a hunter after leaving that job for too long. Sheck stamina. I need to give her some exercise to improve her stamina after this is over. She can''t just practice her magic without having any stamina. That will be a trouble when we needed to travel far.


    "You girls can rest here for now. There''s no monsters left in this area."


    "Great¡­ I''m so tired! Does anyone has water?"


    "This ce is close to ake. It''s that way. Don''t worry, the area is clear. I want to check on other team."


    I pointed my finger to a ce where theke is located. The water is clear so I think it''s fine to drink the water.


    "You can just see them from here, right? With your Divine Vision just like before?"


    "Yes. But to help them, I need to be in a good position. There are too many obstacles blocking me from using Blobbyrifle here. See youter."


    I left the girls to rest. Now I need to help other. Kron is doing fine and there are already some people who already arrived and about to help him. That means I can just concentrate to help the party inside the settlement. They were facing two Orc General and one Orc Wizard at the moment. And they have so many ambushes prepared.


    And so, I went near their location while grabbing rocks on the way. After finding a good position, I sharpened the rocks I grabbed. If the rock I used as bullet is sharp, I can defeat an orc in one shot if I hit the vital. I also prepared slightlyrger rocks in case I the small stones doesn''t work.


    There are many orcs preparing to ambush the party. I need to kill them so the party can just concentrate on the Orc Generals and Orc Wizard.


    Looks like these are thest three of the higher rank orcs. The party have already finished some other on the way. That''s good, but because they didn''t finish all the normal orcs, they were about to get ambushed many times before. At that time, I just picked any rocks nearby so I didn''t kill the ambush. But the party''s reaction is good. They can kill the injured orc easily.


    Their appearances in that area makes most of the orcs went over there. That was why there is a ce with fewer orcs that my party went to. I''m thankful to that party so I don''t want them to die.


    Now that I can sharpened the rocks I find, I can easily kill the orcs in hiding. They also noticed that someone is helping them, so they can concentrate on the Orc General and Orc Wizard. But I think those three orcs together is still weaker than the Orc Emperor. That means I have to help that side as soon as I finished here.


    As I was busy killed the orcs, I almost didn''t notice that one of the party member is slipped and fall in front of the Orc General who already prepared to kill him. He was the other man in that party other than the leader.


    The Orc General raised its club, but it was at the time I already aiming at it with the bigger stone. I shot the stone toward the club to change its trajectory.


    It missed!


    The hunter realize someone is helping him, and stood up preparing to use his magic. It was Fire Storm. An advanced ss magic. But I think he''s just reached that level so it''s not as strong as the real Fire Storm. But using that magic in such close range is enough to defeat that orc.


    One down, two to go!


    Well, if I didn''t count on other orcs in hiding.


    With that, it turned into 4 against two. The party gained an advantage but they are already tired.


    I killed all the hiding orcs and approach the exhausted party.


    "Hey! I''ll take care of the General you''ll take care of the Wizard!"


    "It was you who helped us?!"


    "We''ll talkter. The Orc Emperor is much stronger than I thought. It can easily defeat those three high ranked orcs alone. Kron might need help."


    "Okay. I leave the General to you."


    The party now only need to take care of the Orc Wizard. They didn''t even ask if I could defeat the Orc General alone or not. Seems like they are more tired than I expected. But if it''s just one Orc Wizard, I believe they can defeat it.


    Now I need to lure the Orc General away from the battle.


    I threw a knife at its eye and sessfully gained its attention. But even a throwing knife can''t hurt its eye. What a strong creature. I expected as much. But I know of a creature that has a stronger eye.


    I lure it away from the battle to an open space. Now it''s just one on one. I grabbed my spear with my right hand and turned Blobby into a shield on my left.


    The Orc General is charging at me with the club over its head. It was easy to dodge but I didn''t do that. I want to test my strength on the Orc General while I have the chance.


    I blocked its club with the shield. It was so heavy I feel my feet sunk on the ground. So I quickly moved to the right and attacked the orc with my spear. Even with my Aura covering the spear, I can''t pierce through its thick muscle. The orc got injured, but it''s not life-threatening.


    At least it worked. Which means I can stab the orc over and over again until it died.


    So this time, I parry its attack with the shield and stab my spear on its chest. Aiming at its heart.


    The orc just sneered at my move since it know that my attack won''t hurt that much. But this is not over yet.


    I release my hand from the spear, and concentrating my Aura on my right foot. Then I kicked the other end of the shaft and the spear pierced right through its body.


    It took only a short time for me to defeat the Orc General. Even if the fight is short, if I underestimate the monster just a little bit, I''ll be the one who died. Even now, my left hand that blocked its attack is still shaking.


    I checked on the other side and see that they are already done and taking a break. So I went over there.


    "You''re taking a break?"


    "Yes. Seems like you finished your side. You''re stronger than I thought."


    "Thanks."


    "We''ll be going to Kron''s side after a short break. What about you?"


    "I''m going back to my party first. Then I will assist Kron. I think other party are already arrived and supporting Kron. But the Orc Emperor is much stronger than expected. It still unscathed even after a long fight with Kron."


    "You really have a good pair of eyes, huh? Once we done with this mission, I bet your rank will rise."


    "I hope so. Then, see youter!"


    I left them and return back to where the girls are resting. Seems like they moved location to where theke is. I also need to hydrate so let''s go there!

 Chapter 62 - Preparation Against Orc Emperor

    "Roy, how''s the others?"


    "Let me drink first. I''m thirsty."


    I found the girls by theke. They are resting here like I told them to. And there''s one more thing that they do other than resting. Ang is making barrel using ice magic while Ka and Sophie both filling them with water from theke.


    I put my head into theke and drink it directly. The water taste delicious. I think I drank two liters already.


    After I finished drinking, I looked at the girls who still filling the ice container with water.


    "That''s a good idea. You''re nning to give them to the others, right?"


    "We can''t just rest here without doing anything after all. It was Ka''s idea. Although it took some time for me to finally build the barrel using Ice magic. I only made three of them."


    "I guess your magic control has improved again. Normally, no one would want to make something like a barrel using their magic. But it''s useful as well to train their magic control. People were just stupidly thinking of using magic for battle. So most of themcking in control. I guess that''s why Kron''s Cyclone and Ice Spikebo, although powerful, still can''t finish all the orcs. Some of them still alive when the Orc Emperor cancelled his magic. But they have fallen to their death so it''s okay."


    "Yeah. I started to think that magic control is really helpful in making my attack magic more powerful. I used to hate this kind of training, but from now, I will diligently practice it."


    "Great. You two need to learn magic control as well. As for the ice barrels, I can only carry two of them. Who will carry thest one?"


    "¡­"


    "¡­"


    "¡­I guess that one is useless. So? How''s the other side?"


    Ang asked me after decided to destroy thest barrel. Sophie and Ka now only need to fill two of them.


    "They are doing well. Everyone now has reunited with Kron and helping him. That Orc Emperor is stronger than we thought. Even Kron is looking tired now. But that orc seems to still hide its true strength. Well¡­ we''re doomed I guess."


    "But you have a n, right? You always have a n."


    Ka looked at me and says so. What does she think I am? But she''s right though.


    "Well, for now we will support them. I''ll carry the barrels to them. Ka is needed for her healing magic. Although it''s weak, Sophie''s lighting magic could be useful. As for Ang¡­"


    "I''ll think of something."


    "She''ll think of something herself. Let''s go."


    "Wait!"


    Now a new voice was heard. Victoria finally revealed herself. In a blob form.


    "I don''t know what you''re nning but I''ll tell you what I know about Orc Emperor first."


    "Great! I can adjust my n to it then."


    "No. it''s not that great. First thing first, that Orc Emperor is much bigger than the Orc Emperor in my era. They are supposed to be around 160cm tall with the strength equal to two Orc Generals, and one Orc Wizard. This one is about 180 cm and its magic is more powerful than two Orc Wizardsbined."


    "You mean¡­ that Orc Emperor is a mutated monster?"


    "Possibly. I can only tell you about the Orc Emperor that I know. Whether it''s simr to this one, I don''t know yet. But it should be good enough to learn about it."


    I was shocked to hear about a normal Orc Emperor she learned in the past, and some of her exnation is different than this mutated Orc Emperor.


    Like she said, an average Orc Emperor has the strength of two Orc General, and magic power of one Orc Wizard. That should have been the case. But this one has magic more powerful than two Orc Wizards. No wonder Kron can''t defeat it.


    I can see from here that the battle isn''t progressing well. Everyone has arrived and helping Kron, but most of them already exhausted. To be able to fight against this much hunters is unbelievable.


    Worse, we still don''t know how strong it is. I already have some difficulty against one Orc General, but if it has the strength of two Orc Generals, it''s much more troublesome. Furthermore, if that thing has mutated and has more strength, I can only imagine how strong it is.


    In the past, only Aura user with strengthening ability would dare to fight them directly. As for mage, only those who at least an Expert level mage have confident in killing it. Advanced level mage can kill it, but if they''re in a group. A long time has passed, and even advanced level mage in this time, is much weaker than advanced level mage in the past. Even more so, that Orc Emperor is a mutated monster. I feel like all my ns is useless against it.


    "What''s their weakness?"


    "I don''t know. In the past, they were easily defeated by overpowering them. No one tried to find its weaknesses."


    Damn. Mages and Aura users in the past are too overpowered. They are like ''To hell with weaknesses! Just use an even stronger power!''


    How can we defeat this thing?


    At least if I could discuss it with everyone, it might be doable. There''s a strength in number.


    "That''s all you know?"


    "Yes."


    "Then for now, let''s go over there and help everyone. They all needed some rest, so my n is to stall for time while Kron and the other is resting. You three will ask if anyone has powerful magic they haven''t shown yet. Once they rested, those with special move will use their strongest attack on the monster. While stalling for time, I will also make the air thinner within the area of that monster. Maybe it will help just a little. And if there is someone whose special move is fire magic, I could change the air properties into an extremely mmable one. If that doesn''t work, we''re doomed."


    "Oh right! Distraction! I heard that Orc Emperor is an intelligent monster. They will target the most troublesome one first. But sometime, their instinct is stronger than their intellect. Orc Emperor is a monster that likes topete in strength. You''re the perfect partner for that monster to dance with."


    "That''s nice. I can be the most troublesome person in the world. And I believe I''m a good dancer. Let''s go!"


    As we were about to go over there, the situation got worse.


    Four parties decided to escape! Now there''s only Kron, and two other parties fighting the Orc Emperor. They decided to stay is praiseworthy. One of them is the party that I helped. I don''t know if they decided to stay because they were too tired or because they want to protect the city. Whatever the case, they decided to stay and fight. We have to go over there quickly.


    "Four parties are leaving. Our chance to win is getting lower and lower."


    "They are leaving? Do they not care about what will happen if we left it alive?"


    "Well, the good part is that they return to where theye from. Which mean they can help the defending team from the orcs army. I hope the defending team is doing fine."


    "I hope so. We saw more than a hundred orcs attacking the city. Although we defeated their reinforcement, there are not many strong hunter left in the city. I hope the hunters that escaped here will help protect the city."


    We can just hope. For now, we will concentrate on killing the Orc Emperor.


    As soon as we arrived, we saw Kron is using Ice Wall to protect everyone from the Orc Emperor''s club swing. The Ice Wall from an Advanced level ice element mage can''t hold it and it broke on contact. But enough to buy time for everyone to escape.


    They escaped to our direction, so I just told them to rest.


    "You guys rest first. I will distract that monster as long as possible. While you''re resting, Ka will tell you the n."


    As I was about to leave them, Kron grabbed my arm and stop me.


    "Are you nning to die? What can you do alone anyway?"


    I guess he''s really worried about me. It''s nice to see someone is worried about me. Ang, Ka, and Sophie are already ustomed with me that they think everything will be alright when I''m doing something. Well, Sophie still look worried, but she held back her emotion. Ang and Ka keep consoling her on the way here that I will be okay.


    As for Kron, we just met yesterday. He''s really a kind man. I won''t let him or anyone here to die. Not on my watch.


    So I just calmly tell Kron that I''ll be fine.


    "Don''t worry. I''m a clown. I can entertain anyone. Even an Orc Emperor. All of you will discuss the n while Ka heal you. We also brought some water. As for me, I will keep it busy as long as possible."


    "Okay. Don''t die, rence!"


    He called me rence instead of Roy. I guess I can show him what a great clown I truly am. Although I have only been a clown for one night.

 Chapter 63 - Distracting The Orc Emperor

    Alright. Now it''s my turn.


    Other parties looked confused seeing me walked forward alone. Well, that should be the case.


    But Ka and the others told them that I should be fine. They should rest and restore their magic before they fight again.


    I think I heard Ka saying something about one hour, but what the hell?!


    One hour against an Orc Emperor is too much!


    That means I have to do something else that won''t use much of my stamina.


    Let''s see¡­ Orc Emperor is intelligent, but also move on instinct. It is smart and love topete strength because of its instinct. And it''s extremely powerful.


    How can I make smart creature look stupid? I have many ways, but whether it worked or not, I don''t know. I can only try since it will be impossible to defeat it if I can''t stall for time.


    That means I have tobine all of my distraction skills from Shameless Survival Arts.


    Shameless Survival Arts!


    Legendary Clown: rence!


    Somehow I always named my arts on the spot. Well, it''s not like I have to name everything.


    Now then, what should this clown do?


    For now, I''ll try to look intimidating in front of the Orc Emperor and walk slowly toward it.


    I left everyone behind, took a step forward, and as expected, the Orc Emperor noticed me.


    That thing seems to be wary of me. That''s good. That''s the trait only smart creature have. To be wary of something unexpected.


    I heard something from behind me about my actions, but I''ll ignore them for now. I''ll leave them to the girls.


    I walked slowly without making it too obvious that I''m acting. Just enough to make the Orc Emperor think that I''m no pushover.


    Whoops! I think this is close enough. Any closer and the Orc Emperor will strike me with its club. Even if I use Aura to protect myself, there''s no way I can be unharmed.


    But it''s good that I have already stall for time a whole minute just by walking. Now I have to show it what I can do!


    "Huaaaargh!!"


    I rip off my shirt and let out a roar. And then I made a pose as if to show the Orc Emperor my muscle. Although it''s obviously smaller than it.


    Will this work? I just stupidly provoking an Orc Emperor with my muscle when I know I couldn''t even win in strength against Orc General.


    If possible, I''d like to make it unconscious by making it breathe sleeping gas or making it difficult for that monster to breathe. But I can''t. I noticed while I was slow walking to it, each time I''m about to use magic, that thing somehow noticed. Without a doubt, that Orc Emperor can sense magic when it was about to be casted.


    Then I just have to make the magic surround it without making the Orc Emperor wary.


    That Orc Emperor sneered at my show of strength.


    "ROOOAAAAAARRR!!"


    Then the Orc Emperor roared at me. Its spit got on my face. Disgusting.


    But at least it means my n worked. It got provoked by my little show of strength and decided to show its own strength by roaring. At least that''s what I thought.


    Now, I''m using magic. Of course the Orc Emperor will be wary of what I''m going to do. But it won''t be for long. Because I just use air magic to make the air surrounding me turned into Oxygen.


    Knowing that my magic is not an offensive magic, the Orc Emperor sneered at me again. Look like that thing know I''m weaker in both magic and physical. But that doesn''t mean I can''t entertain this monster.


    I slowly walked and grab arge stone. The size is about as big as my head.


    What am I going to do? Well, the show of strength isn''t over yet.


    I put the stone on the ground in front of the monster, then I raised my hand above my head.


    "Haiiiiyah!"


    I split the stone with a chop covered by Aura. My hand doesn''t hurt at all and the stone is perfectly split in two.


    Noticing that the magic I used is only for myself to make a show like that, the Orc Emperor calmed down. But itspetitive spirit is raised.


    The Orc Emperor walked to arge boulder. Dropping its club, that monster just swung its fist to the boulder. It got destroyed into pieces.


    Well, that deserve a round of apuse. And so I slowly pping.


    Having an instinct topete and being smart will be your downfall!


    Instinct topete mean it will not back down from a challenge. Having intellect mean it has curiosity and ability to learn. That means I will just challenge it by doing something it can''t do, but can still learn. Of course the thing I''ll challenge it won''t be useful for battle. Maybe?


    And as it realize I only used magic for myself, I think it know that the magic I used is spread around me and could even reach him. It even tried a few time to get inside the range where I used my magic and feel the oxygen as it breathe. That''s fine. Now I will make the air surrounding it gets thinner. I''m sure it won''t notice right away. And by the time it noticed, everyone should be recovered enough strength.


    Now my n is to make it breathe more and more.


    I have more confidence now since my n is working so far.


    This is what happened when curiosity met a clown. The most curious job with many tricks hidden.


    Next, I grabbed three fist-sized stones on the ground. What I''m doing now is¡­ juggling.


    I skillfully show my juggling skill in front of the Orc Emperor. It must have never seen it before. Obviously. I mean what kind of society it is when an orc have seen someone juggling stones skillfully?


    Then I throw the stones at it. Challenging it to do the same. I''m changing its instinct frompeting through strength, topete in intellect and skills as well.


    Being provoked, of course the orc tried to do the same. But with bigger stones. Fine with me since the more strength you use, the more you breathe, then the quicker you will faint.


    The Orc Emperor tried it over and over again. It keeps failing many times but when I sneered at it, it got provoked again and refuses to give up. Until finally, it did it. Of course the stamina it wasted is a lot. But that thing is an Orc Emperor. I don''t know how much stamina that thing has.


    What should I do now? Competing in strength is useless. I have to do something else.


    I took a deck of cards in my pants pocket. I have it from the circus and I haven''t returned it yet. Now I will show the orc some tricks using cards.


    "Look at this. I took a card with my right hand, and poof! It disappear. Again, another card, then poof again! It disappear again!"


    I used the trick where I took a card and make it disappear with a sleight of hand trick. Then I gave the cards to the Orc Emperor for it to try.


    Who knows that I have been stalling it for more than thirty minute? Using my Divine Vision, I can see that everyone is rested enough but still need some more time. Maybe training the Orc Emperor to do magic trick will gain us more time.


    The Orc Emperor has arm length longer than me and its hands and fingers also bigger than me. Which makes it difficult to perform such tricks. Of course every time it tried to give up, I sneered at it and provoke it further. Just enough to not make the Orc Emperor too angry and go crazy attacking me acting like an average orc.


    As I watched the orc practicing, I saw Sophie approached. Our position is in a straight line where the orc is in the middle and Sophie is behind it. I did this when I gather stones for my juggling so the orc won''t notice what the others is doing.


    Sophie is shaking but about to prepare her magic. I shook my head to tell her it was not the time yet. But it''s already time for me to use my magic!


    I concentrate and makes the air is not a breathable kind. Normal people would faint but the Orc Emperor still has some strength.


    "ROAAAAR!


    It noticed that I used some kind of magic to harm it and stopped working on the trick. It faced me in anger and see I''m holding some kind ofrge tube shaped weapon with stones inserted in it.


    I shot Air Cannon at its head using arge rock and Victoria as weapon. It connected but won''t hurt the Orc Emperor much. But that''s enough to gain all its attention to me.


    "Now!"


    Sophie used her lightning magic, Lightning Shock, to paralyze the Orc. Because she''s still a beginner level it won''t stop that thing for long. But enough for the others to prepare their magic.


    I ran toward Sophie after I shot the orc, grabbed her and escape far away from it when I heard someone signaled to attack.


    "FIRE!!"


    That''s a cue for me to make the air surrounding that orc into a mmable one. I did that quickly while running away, then I heard a loud explosion behind me. I didn''t look at the orc at all because I need to be in a safe ce.


    Everyone seems to use all of their magic power for this attack. Mostly the fire and wind element mages.


    I hope this works.

 Chapter 64 - Resting And Planning

    "You guys rest first. I will distract that monster as long as possible. While you''re resting, Ka will tell you the n."


    "Are you nning to die? What can you do alone anyway?"


    "Don''t worry. I''m a clown. I can entertain anyone. Even an Orc Emperor. All of you will discuss the n while Ka heal you. We also brought some water. As for me, I will keep it busy as long as possible."


    "Okay. Don''t die, rence!"


    That was the exchange that happened before Kron take a rest and let Roy do his thing.


    Kron and the other hunters, needed to recovers their magic and made a good n to kill this Orc Emperor. Roy will act as the distraction for the Orc Emperor and stall for time as long as he can until everyone ready for the finishing move.


    Kron retreated and all the exhausted hunters gathered in a spot where Ka, Ang, and Sophie are waiting. As expected, all of them has run out of water trying to keep up with the Orc Emperor. They drunk the cold water from the ice barrel and one barrel is empty in an instant.


    "Whoa! You guys are really exhausted, huh? Get some rest before we move to kill that thing again."


    Said Ang while handing ice ss to a tired hunter.


    "Aaahhh- that was refreshing. Thank you for the water. You made an ice barrel with your magic and it makes the water cold. It was nice."


    "Alright, the injured one pleasee here. I''ll heal you with my healing magic."


    "You''re Ka? So you have a healing element, huh? I usually work alone but do you want to be my partner?"


    Kron invited Ka to be his partner but Ka refuses.


    "No thank you. I''m Roy''s girlfriend."


    "His girlfriend, huh? Does that mean all three of you is his girlfriends?"


    "Not me. We''re just friend."


    Ang replied.


    "Well, Ka? About your boyfriend, Roy. Do you think he knows what he''s doing?"


    "Stalling for time. He''s the best at it."


    "But that Orc Emperor is smarter and stronger than any monsters I have encountered. You think he will be okay?"


    "Don''t worry. It will be like usual where he throws away hismon sense and make all of us shocked. But he will do what he said."


    "Oiiii!! He''s splitting a rock on two! What is he doing?!"


    "Challenging the Orc Emperor, I guess? He told you to rest so you need to rest. If you spend your time looking at him, your mind will be tired."


    "But how can I not be worried? He just roared and split a stone in half, then that monster smashed a boulder! What the heck is going on?!"


    "He''s buying us time! If you''re worried about him, then ignore him. The more you waste your time looking at him, the more time be wasted. We don''t know if that Orc Emperor can be distracted for how long, so we must hurry. I''ll tell you the n that Roy made."


    Ka ignoring other hunters'' reaction to watching Roy challenging the Orc Emperor, told them about the n to use a special move if there''s any.


    "I don''t have any. I''m only good in Area of Effect magic. Not a single target magic."


    "Neither do us. We never encountered anything stronger than this Orc Emperor."


    "Then how many fire element mage here?"


    There are currently thirteen people here excluding Roy. Ang, Ka, Sophie, Kron, one party with four hunters, and another party with five hunters. Among all those hunters, five of them raised their hand saying they have fire element.


    "Then how many wind element mage?"


    This time, another five of them raised their hand. One of them is Kron. And among those who raised their hands, two of them also have fire element. One of the two is Ang.


    "Alright. Then the n is for all the fire mages tobine their offensive magic and concentrate it on that orc. Then the wind mages will use wind to make the fire bigger. Roy also can help making the fire bigger with his air element magic. That''s our best shot. Now we just need to rest until everyone recovers their magic."


    Said Ka while she''s healing another hunter who got injured.


    "You think this will work?"


    "Even if it doesn''t work, I believe Roy still has some n. He always has ns. We just need to trust him at that time."


    "Alright. Then let''s rest and do it that way. And please tell me that Orc Emperor is not juggling stones!"


    "We can''t that Orc Emperor is juggling stones. That''s the truth."


    "Even if I am her girlfriend, I never know what is on his mind. But whatever it is, he never let us down."


    Now that everyone has healed up a bit and drunk some water, they tried to rest, but they can''t just rest seeing how Roy just teaching the Orc Emperor to juggle stones.


    "Hey, when shall we act?"


    "When all of you confident you can cast your strongest magic."


    "Alright. Somehow I believe that Roy can stall for even a whole day. We can rest easy for now."


    "By the way, where''s the other parties?"


    Ka asked about the disappearance of the four parties.


    "I told them that someone need to retreat and get us some reinforcement. Four parties decided to volunteer and before we can say anything, they already gone."


    "At least they didn''t just run away¡­ they should be helping the defending team first, right? Then it will take longer for reinforcement to arrive."


    "At least it''s better than nothing."


    By this time, Roy is showing the Orc Emperor about the card trick.


    "And now he''s teaching a card trick."


    "Well, it bought us more time. Are you all prepared?"


    "We can go anytime."


    "Wait! If we just use magic like that, the Orc Emperor might notice and dodge it. I''ll try to paralyze it a bit. I''m just a beginner level, but at least I could buy a tenth of a second. After I shot my lightning magic, that''s when you all shot your fire and wind magic. By that time Roy should be taking me away from that Orc Emperor."


    It was Sophie who suggested it. She is the only lightning mage among those stayed here.


    "Are you not afraid?"


    "Even if something happened, Roy will save me."


    "Well, let''s do it when that orc is focused on the cards."


    "By the way, there''s a chance that this n doesn''t work. So after using our strongest fire and windbination magic, everyone will need to cast a barrage of magic toward that Orc."


    "How can we tell if the Orc Emperor is dead or not?"


    "Roy has good eyes. When he returns, only stop once he said so. If he didn''t say anything, that mean the Orc Emperor is still alive."


    "Alright. Let''s get into position."


    Everyone gets into their position. Sophie carefully get behind the Orc Emperor. That''s when Roy noticed their n is to use Sophie''s magic to shock the Orc Emperor first, so he makes sure the Orc Emperor won''t look back.


    He makes the air into something harmful for body if it taken for too long. But the Orc Emperor noticed that Roy is doing something harmful to it. It got angry, but Roy already prepared to shoot a huge stone with Air Cannon to its head.


    The shot hit its head but it doesn''t injure the Orc Emperor much. But that''s enough to gain its attention and make sure Sophie can hit it.


    "Now!"


    Sophie used Lightning Shock to paralyze the Orc Emperor. It got shocked for less than a second but by the time it recovers, everyone already shot their fire and wind magic to it.


    Roy also already grabbed Sophie and carried her to safety while ignoring the huge explosion behind him. He also make sure that Sophie is safe in his arms and the explosion doesn''t get to her.


    After reaching to where everyone is, he looked back at the Orc Emperor. He saw that the Orc Emperor has fallen to the ground but still alive.


    "It''s still alive! Shoot more magic!"


    Although the explosion is big, thanks to wind magic and Roy''s air magic which changes the air properties into an explosive ones, the Orc Emperor fainted for a second. It got burnt on its face and several parts of its body, but it''s still alive!


    Everyone shoot their magic. Roy also grabbed some rocks and use Air Cannon to attack the Orc Emperor. Other than Ka who might need to use her healing magic again, everyone also casted their magic. Including Sophie who cast lightning magic.


    But the Orc Emperor is still alive. It even slowly stood up from the ground. In fact, almost all the magic other than the first biggest fire and wind magic could not hurt it. But with this many attacks, it can''t do anything yet other than standing up.


    The Orc Emperor just stood there waiting for a chance to fight back. The battle is not over yet.

 Chapter 65 - Meteor Hammer

    Oh shit¡­


    After huge explosion of fire and wind magic, that Orc Emperor has fallen. But that onlysted for a few seconds. It got burnt on its face and several other ces in its body, but that monster is still alive!


    "It''s still alive! Shoot more magic!"


    I shouted the status of the Orc Emperor who started to slowly stand up from the ground. Other than the fire and wind magicbination, there''s no other damage that it took. Well, damn¡­


    What should I do now?


    I look around to see that everyone already exhausted again. That short rest doesn''t mean much if they use this much magic. Even Kron is starting to get tired. That means the only one who can defeat it is me.


    Fine. This time, I''ll fight it seriously. No more clowning around.


    "Kron! Throw me to the sky as high as you can with your wind magic!"


    "What?"


    "Do it! This might be our only way to win!"


    "Fine! I''ll believe you! I''ll use all my magic power that I have left to blow you away! If this doesn''t work, we''ll die!"


    "Good!"


    Then I jumped as high as I can, and when I was about to slowed down due to gravity, Kron use wind magic to boost me faster higher into the sky. If only I could walk on air already...


    I fly to the sky leaving everyone on the ground fighting. Everyone looked at me who was blown away for a moment, but they returned to shoot magi at the Orc Emperor. They can''t afford to get distracted.


    The Orc Emperor still can''t do anything yet. I guess I wasted some of its stamina while stalling for time. This mean the Orc Emperor can no longer use 100% of its strength. As for whether it still has a secret move or something, I won''t let it do that.


    "Hey, Victoria. You''re there?"


    "Yes. I''m still Victoria."


    "What''s the chance of me killing that Orc Emperor?"


    "With everyone else exhausted, you''re the only one left to fight. And with what you''re nning to do, at most we can only injure it a lot. But that doesn''t mean it will be defeated. The real battle will begin after that."


    "My guess is the same. In the end, I have to be the one who finished it huh?"


    "I thought if it''s you, you will not even try to fight it. Is it because of Daniel and the other still in Melk?"


    "Yes. If they weren''t there, I would escape already. This Orc Emperor is too dangerous to left alone."


    We chatted as I flew through the sky. My speed is starting to fall down and soon, I will start falling.


    "Ready, Victoria?"


    "Sure. Let''s call this ''Meteor Hammer''!"


    "Whatever you say¡­ Meteor Hammer!"


    Victoria transformed into a giant hammer, and her weight also adjusted to the heaviest she can. I grabbed the handle and swung it down. Trying to aim at the Orc Emperor from high above.


    With the weight of the giant hammer and gravity helping me, I''m pretty sure we can manage to injure the Orc Emperor. But defeating it? It will be difficult.


    I can make it into an axe and chop the Orc Emperor into two. But an axe is easier to dodge. With the Orc Emperor''s strength, I''m pretty sure it can dodge the axe even under heavy attack by the mages. That''s why I choose a hammer with bigger surface area.


    With all my strength, I try to control the handling of the hammer. Just a slight error will make it a miss from the target.


    "Do you know the term ''Terminal Velocity''?"


    As we were falling down, Victoria asked something.


    "What''s that?"


    "It means the maximum velocity attainable by an object as it falls. I feel like the speed of our falling is not increased by much anymore. Which mean we will reach terminal velocity soon."


    "Does that mean it''s impossible for this attack to be faster and stronger?"


    "Yes. After this, it''s all up to you. Good luck?"


    "Yeah¡­ I needed it."


    Using my Divine Vision, I can see that the Orc is now able to endure the magic barrage and can walk. But then when the surrounding turned dark, it looked up and see a giant hammer is falling.


    "Please don''t dodge."


    Seems like the Orc Emperor noticed that it was me above the sky. And then its instinct kicked in topete in strength instead of dodging.


    Seems like that Orc Emperor hasn''t been intelligent for long if its instinct kicked in just like that. But that''s a good thing for me.


    Now is the time for impact!


    BANG!!


    I see everyone shocked with me suddenly falling while carrying a huge hammer out of a sudden, but they seemed to notice that this might be the final confrontation between us and the Orc Emperor. They just watched in awe.


    Surprisingly, the Orc Emperor can handle this much weight and speed. It still standing with both arm crossed above it to block the hammer, while the hammer still haven''t touched the ground at all. And I''m still hanging on the handle of the hammer trying to put more strength in it.


    It turned into a stalemate for a second, but the Orc Emperor did something unthinkable.


    It focused its strength only on one arm to defend itself from the hammer, while the other hand is aiming at me. It tried to attack me with Fireball!


    I who was still holding on the handle with both my legs in the air to increase the strength of the hammer, had no other choice but to let go unless I want to be burned by that high level Fireball.


    I let go of the handle and run on it to the other side of the hammer that''s hitting the orc.


    I raised my leg and stomped down as hard as I could. Using the chance when the orc is just guarding with one hand. The Orc Emperor can''t take that much power with one hand so it fallen to the ground with a loud sound.


    But I haven''t finished yet. I continued to stomp on the hammer. It was because I can see the Orc Emperor is still alive.


    "Good! Just like that! Continue with your Tap Dancing!"


    "Can you shut your mouth, Victoria?! Now it seems like I''m stepping on you and you''re enjoying yourself being stepped by me!"


    "¡­Just do your best!"


    While I''m Stomping on the hammer, the others just watching and cheered when they saw the Orc Emperor has fallen. They thought that it has finally been defeated. But they are also confused why I''m dancing.


    Well, I''m not dancing!


    Other than Ang and Ka who knows me well, everyone is confused, including Sophie who still doesn''t know everything about me yet.


    "That thing is still alive!"


    And so, Ang yelled to make everyone realize the situation.


    Then, I feel that the hammer I''m stomping is shaking. The Orc used all its strength to lift the weight pressing it and throw the hammer along with me still on top of it.


    I bnced myself mid-air andnd on the ground. I''m not hurt at all.


    The Orc is fuming. Its left hand and right leg both broken because of that attack. But it can still fight.


    "Those who still have some strength! Attack that thing!"


    I shouted an order to other hunters. Then everyone continued their barrage of magic attack.


    Unfortunately, the orc is prepared this time. It used a non-elemental barrier magic. It''s a magic that all mage in advanced level or higher can use. But because it''s a non-elemental magic, the consumption of magic is high. Which is why most mages just use a barrier/shield with elements they mastered.


    But this orc used this for its protection. At least it means the orc will exhaust its magic with this barrier.


    I also helped by shooting Air Cannon at the Orc Emperor. But the barrier is still standing strong. That Orc Emperor has a lot of magic to spare.


    But still, the barrier won''tst long. And everyone soon will exhaust all their power. Which means the conclusion will be settled in a physical battle.


    "All of you continue attacking! I need to restore my strength."


    After giving an order, I retreated to where Ka is. I drank about half barrel of water on my own. It seems like I''m also exhausted by this battle.


    "I''ll heal you first."


    "Thanks. I''ll go rest for five minute. If anything happen, wake me up."


    "Okay."


    Although I don''t have any injury, her healing magic helped rxing my muscles. So it helped a lot for the final battle between me and the Orc Emperor.


    Somehow I feel like everyone started to put their trust in me. Including Kron. They were trying to waste the Orc Emperor''s magic instead of finishing it. They only use low level magic instead of powerful ones like before. I guess that''s what makes them an experienced hunters. They are good at making decision in split-second.


    Five minuteter, I opened my eyes and ready to fight!

 Chapter 66 - Conclusion Of The Battle

    I stepped forward to the Orc Emperor who''s still protecting itself from everyone''s magic attacks.


    "Roy. That orc keeps watching our way all this time. Seems like it''s wary of you."


    "Thanks, Ka. Go get some rest. I''ll take care of it from now on."


    Although it was just a five minute rest, thanks to Ka healing magic, I feel good. Meanwhile, the Orc Emperor is wasting its magic protecting itself and haven''t gotten a chance at all to catch its breath.


    Some of the hunters, already can''t use anymore magic. It was Sophie first who retreated and then Ang. That''s normal since they are just beginner level mage. But for those two tost this long is praiseworthy. Let''s hope the reward for this mission is at least a rank up for the four of us. That''s the least of what the guild should do.


    I grabbed the spear from my back with my left hand, and Victoria as grappling hook on my right.


    Everyone''s eyes are on me. And then, when I raised my spear, as if everyone already agreed, they all stopped attacking and retreated. And the Orc Emperor also undo its barrier and charged at me.


    Thanks to my distraction before, the Orc Emperor already dropped its weapon during the juggling practice. Now it''s unarmed with its left hand broken and its right leg also broken. But it still can stand and charged at me with its broken leg. What a horrifying creature.


    Thanks to its broken leg, its speed is low. And it can only attack with its right hand now. Unless it can endure the pain of attacking with its left arm.


    I dodged the orc''s attack and then counter it with a kick to the broken arm. Although it''s obviously way weaker than any of the attack that orc received, it still got damaged. Hitting a weak point is a must do to win a fight.


    Knowing that I have made two weakness in Orc Emperor''s body, I will aim most of my attack to its weakness. Which is its left arm and right leg.


    I tried to stab it with my spear, but it was useless. Although the bone is broken, the muscle is still too thick for me to injure it. Since the spear is useless, I just dropped it on the ground.


    Although we have wasted so much of its stamina, it still has good reflexes. It throws a quick punch toward me. I''m not fast enough to dodge that, but I have Victoria.


    I shot the grappling hook to a tree and make it pull me toward that tree. The Orc Emperor is angry for missing its target.


    But if I take too long in a distance, the Orc Emperor will start to use magic. So as soon as Inded, I run back toward that orc again. Then I transform Victoria into a sledge hammer and swung it to its right kneecap.


    Although the broken bone is not the kneecap, the damage taken still hurt the broken bones. If I keep attacking the right knee, that orc won''t be able to stand anymore.


    I keep repeating my attack pattern. Mainly targeting its right knee, while asionally attacking its left arm. Sometimes I also throw knives at its eyes although I know it''s useless. It was just to block its vision momentarily.


    But the Orc Emperor is smart. It soon learned my pattern and started to throw counter attacks. The battle gotten more difficult now.


    "He''s fighting on par with an Orc Emperor?"


    "No. the Orc Emperor''s injury makes them seems even. But seriously, who actually fight physically when you have magic?"


    "Roy is different. His awakened element is weak. One is air element and the other is summoning element. And his summon is a transforming slime. So he thought it would be great if he use the slime as weapon. That''s how he got this strong."


    "I see. But to be this strong without magic¡­ I feel sorry for him. It means no matter how strong he became, no one will recognize him if his level is low. This is how society viewed us hunters."


    "Ask him if he cares. Don''t forget he''s a clown. Although it was just one night, he is a clown through and through. He can handle insults toward him."


    "But I never thought that he''s someone who fight. I thought he''s someone who would choose to run away when he''s in difficult position."


    "You''re right. I believe he did it because he has important people in the city that he wants to protect. It''s thanks to one idiot that a whole army of orcs is attacking the city. Making the orcs find the location of Melk. If it didn''t happen, he won''t fight this hard."


    I feel like I can hear Ka and Kron talking. But I didn''t hear much about what they are talking about since I''m busy with this Orc.


    Our height is about the same, but the difference in weight is obvious. Which making it stronger than me by default. But I can outsmart it. That''s the only way to win.


    The Orc Emperor has gotten used to my pattern, but what it didn''t notice is that this pattern is a trap for that orc to get used.


    Then, as that orc thought that I will hit its knee again, I transformed the hammer into a rope and wrap it around its neck. With it thick neck, I don''t think that I could choke it to death, but the rope is only for me to hang on to.


    I got around to its back and poke its right eye with my left hand. I poke it around the eyeball and pluck the whole eyeball out of its face.


    "ROAAAAAAAR!!"


    I never heard an orc screaming in pain like that. But now, I have another target other than its broken limbs.


    The Orc Emperor tried to shook me off of it, so I jumped andnded on the ground. Just next to where I drop my spear.


    I grabbed my spear and aimed at its hollow right eye. Hoping that at least that area is weaker than the other parts. But it was stopped. Just before the spear touched its brain.


    What the hell is this thing made of?


    I let go of the spear as the Orc Emperor tried to grab it and pulled it out. But I won''t let that happen. I transformed Victoria to a sword and cut the part where the orc grabbed. Making the spear stay there.


    Then I transformed Victoria again into a hammer and smash it to the broken spear.


    The Orc scream in pain again, but it still didn''t kill that freaking monster.


    And so I swung the hammer to its right knee and shatter its kneecap. Because of the damage umtion, it shattered. Making the Orc Emperor falls forward.


    It fell with the broken spear supporting it so its head didn''t touch the ground. It still didn''t die, but I already prepared for it.


    I moved to its back and swung the hammer down with Victoria adjusted her weight to the max as I swung it down.


    The broken spear finally broke through its head and pierced its brain. Then the spear also broke due to the weight of my attack.


    Finally, the Orc Emperor is dead.


    "WOOOOHOOOO!! YEAAAH!!"


    I shouted in happiness as I finally killed the Orc Emperor.


    Everyone also cheered when they saw the orc''s head pierced and smashed.


    Finally, after a long battle, the victory is decided.


    "Good job. Thanks to this battle, I should have gained a lot of experience and will be able to stay for about 12 hour."


    "Really? That''s great, Victoria!"


    "Yeah. But now I know why your summoning element hasn''t raised at all. It was all because all the energy that should have got into you as I defeated monsters, somehow all sucked into me which makes me able to stay longer. That means you can only increase your level once my consciousness stay 24 hours a day. Well, good luck with that."


    "What?! Doesn''t that mean unless I defeat another monster with the same level as this Orc Emperor, I won''t be able to raise my level at all?"


    "Just your summoning element. Your air element need to be cultivated like normal."


    "AAAARGH!"


    "Don''t worry. Now that I can stay for that long, I can go hunt some monster by myself. Then when you need me, you can just summon me. Well, now that I can stay that long, I will leave and go hunt some monster. At least I will go hunting for three hours every day. As for the rest nine hours, I''ll go y with the girls. See ya."


    "Don''t run away!"


    She''s quick when she want to flee. At least the Orc Emperor is dead now.


    I grabbed my broken spear and repair it back to its original form. I feel like I used this spear more when it''s broke than when it''s in perfect condition.


    Everyone now gather around the Orc Emperor to see if it''s truly dead.


    "You did it, Roy! Where''s Victoria?"


    "Thanks to defeating strong monster, she can now stay for twelve hour a day. She will spend at least three hour to hunt some monster. I''ll summon herter when we return home."


    "Really? That''s great!"


    Ka seems so happy to learn Victoria can stay for half a day.


    So I need her to be able to stay conscious twenty four hour a day until I finally able to increase my level, huh? At least with her, I can raise my level quickly. But if I have to fight another mutated Orc Emperor¡­ I think I''ll pass on that.

 Chapter 67 - I Let Down My Guard

    "Roy! You did it!"


    "No. We did it!"


    "Yeah, but it was thanks to you that the Orc Emperor is finally defeated. We don''t have to wait for reinforcement any longer."


    "Reinforcement?"


    "The other parties who weren''t here are have retreated. I told them to help the defending team and return here with reinforcement."


    "Really? But asking four parties is too much, isn''t it?"


    "I just asked one. The other three volunteer without consulting first."


    "Well, at least we have defeated the Orc Emperor. With it thick muscles, I believe we can get a lot by selling its body parts."


    "Yeah. That would be great. It''s the first time Melk''s hunter guild to receive the material from Orc Emperor. But what''s so good about material from Orc Emperor?"


    "¡­its bones?"


    "You can broke them easily."


    "Meat?"


    "I Orc Meat taste terrible. I don''t know about Orc Emperor''s though."


    "Well, we can just bring the corpse back to the guild. There might be some uses."


    We''re celebrating our victory and Kron and I are talking about the reward already. We were just enjoying the aftermath of fighting the Orc Emperor.


    ¡­and I let down my guard.


    "Huh? Someone ising. Maybe the reinforcement will arrive soon."


    "You really have a good pair of eyes, huh? How much for one?"


    "It''s not for sale! Why do you think that I can give it to you? Do you think I will pluck my eye out of its socket and gave it to you?"


    "After witnessing you plucking out the Orc Emperor''s eye, I think that''s usible."


    "Idiot¡­ by the way, why is the reinforcement alone?"


    "Huh? Well¡­ maybe the guild sent a high ranked hunter alone here. In Melk, other than us whoe here¡­ there''s no one else!"


    Both of us alerted by the neer. That neer just looked at the dead Orc Emperor and seeing that he can''t do anything alone, he throw some kind of magic tools.


    That magic tool then melted as it touched the dead Orc Emperor''s body and the dead body soon disintegrated.


    Everyone then also alerted by the situation, but the guy has already started to run away. While Kron and I started chasing him, the others still in shock without knowing what has happened.


    I grabbed my spear that has already been repaired, and throw it to the guy. It pierced through his body. But he''s still alive.


    Kron and I approached him.


    "Who the hell are you?!"


    Kron tried to grab the man, but the man just smiled.


    "See you in hell."


    I should have used my Divine Vision sooner. I saw that this guy has an explosive in his mouth just like other cult members that I saw before.


    "Shit! Kron!"


    I grabbed Kron and pulled him away from the man.


    Kron was too close with him when he explode his own head.


    I saved his life, but the explosion still hit him. His forehead and part of his hair got burnt.


    If I was a little slower, the explosion will hit his eye and he will be blind. It was good he will alive. But the roots of Kron''s hair won''t.


    "Kron! Are you okay?"


    The others finally caught up with us and see the explosion hit Kron.


    "Ka! Heal him!"


    "Okay!"


    I asked Ka to use her healing magic on Kron. Although healing magic can''t heal burnt hair roots, at least he won''t have a burnt mark on his head.


    I checked on the dead man''s condition. Well¡­ he''s dead. His head exploded but his body is still fine. I checked to see if he''s carrying some sort of clue and I found nothing else other than two more of magic tools that he used to disintegrate the Orc Emperor''s body.


    "Damn! There''s no clue about him at all. He doesn''t even has a Hunter Card."


    While I''m checking on the guy who explode himself, Kron stood up already healed.


    "Have you find out about this guy?"


    "No. He doesn''t have anything on him other than one more of that magic tool."


    I looted two of the same magic tools, but I only show him one of them. The other one is already in my pocket. It might be useful in the future.


    "Can you guess where hee from?"


    "I don''t know. Possibly, from an organized group since his action is too precise. He came here and saw the corpse of Orc Emperor. Then he left right away after disintegrating the corpse. He also didn''t hesitate at all tomit suicide. That''s all I can guess."


    I didn''t tell him yet about the existence of Evil God Cult. Although he''s a good man, I don''t know yet if I can trust him. But I do hope that he will be on our side one day.


    "Fuck it hurts! Thanks to your girlfriend the pain is gone. But it sure surprise me."


    "Not just surprise you. Try touching your head. Just above your forehead."


    "What''s¡­ AAAARGH!! My hair!"


    "It got burnt all the way to the roots. My condolences."


    "NOOOOO! Tell me that at least I still look like someone withrge forehead!"


    "Umm¡­ nope. Not at all. You''re bald. From your forehead until the top of your head, it''s all gone. But the side and back is still fine."


    "AAAAAAARGH! Roy! If you found the one organization behind this man, tell me. I will destroy anything rted to them."


    "Okay. I''ll give you one of my knives. Whether you want to shave your hair or keep the knife as a keepsake, it''s up to you."


    I checked on the dead man again, and then gather everyone and told them all what happened.


    I know for sure that this man is a member of the cult. As for why he disintegrate the Orc Emperor''s corpse, my guess is that the cult doesn''t want the body of their experiment to be taken by the guild.


    I know that the Evil God Cult has done many kind of experiment. One of them is monsters mutation. After all, the monster that killed me was a mutated one.


    I bet that the Orc Emperor is one of their experiment who run away. It then found a group of orcs and start building a settlement.


    The cult doesn''t want other to know that the Orc Emperor is a mutated one because of an experiment. That''s why they decided to destroy the corpse.


    Maybe I should have stayed longer at the governor''s ce. Then I could get some clues about them.


    Before I talked to everyone about what to do, I excuse myself from the others and summoned Victoria who''s still enjoying moving her bodies. I told her what happened and gave her an order.


    "Victoria, I want you to go to the Governor''s ce and see if anyone ising or reporting about the death of the Orc Emperor. Then see his reaction and remember everyone he interacted with after that."


    "Damn. Can''t you just kill this governor?"


    "We still have no evidence of his rtion with the cult. If you have done this mission, then you can search for some evidences. Then I will send a letter to the king about it and let him realize the danger we''re facing. If the kingdom move against the cult, then we can have more allies helping us."


    "Then I want a reward."


    "What do you want?"


    "I said that I will at least hunt monsters 3 hours a day. But let''s make it so I don''t have to do it every day. Just on the weekday when you''re at school studying. For the weekend, I want to have free time."


    "Fine with me."


    "Oh! And I also want some pocket money. It''s the master responsibility as I''m your contracted monster."


    "Sure. We will be rich soon after all once we move to Cassau."


    "Great. See youter then."


    Victoria run through the forest back to the city. I told her to not let anyone saw her.


    I returned back to where everyone is and told them to keep my strength a secret.


    "I want you all to keep my strength as secret. I don''t want to be targeted by the organization who doesn''t hesitate to take their own life yet. We will only tell the guildmaster the truth and told him to keep it a secret. Just tell everyone that the Orc Emperor died because of thebination of fire and wind magic that makes a huge explosion, and destroy the Orc Emperor''s body until nothing remained. Do you all agree?"


    "I agree with Roy. At least if we said everyone did their part, none of us will be targeted by that organization. We don''t know the goal of that shitty organization."


    Kron agreed with me while his right hand is touching his newly shaved head.


    "I agree as well. It was too dangerous for Roy alone to bear the burden of being targeted."


    "Us too. None of the member of our party will tell anyone about you amazingly killing the Orc Emperor in physical battle."


    "Thanks. Let''s go home now since our mission is over. I''m worried about the defense of Melk city."


    Everyone agreed to keep silent of my strength.


    Thanks to this mission, we also got closer with each other. Even Ka, Ang, and Sophie, is chatting about a desserts in a certain cafe with girls from the other parties.


    As for the boys¡­ we''re making fun of Kron''s new ''haircut''. He doesn''t like it¡­

 Chapter 68 - Reporting The Guild

    "So that''s what happened¡­ Thank you for protecting the city and defeating the Orc Emperor."


    We have returned back to Melk and reported the guild master. We also told him about how I''m the one who finished it and someone else destroy the corpse. But we ask him to keep my strength as secret and just said it was collective achievement by magicbination.


    "That''s worrying to know that there''s someone or group out there is involved. And that Orc Emperor, from what I heard, its size is about 180 cm?"


    "Yes. We''re about the same height."


    I answered honestly.


    We''re all in guild master room. Just Kron, my party, and the two parties who stayed until the end. The other who retreated to ask for reinforcement weren''t here.


    Well, after what happened, they don''t even bring a reinforcement. They did help with the defense of the city, but they never said anything to the guild about us asking for reinforcement. Their only achievement is the Orc Wizards or Orc General they fought on the way to the settlement.


    And also, thanks to the other who keep secret about the fact that we killed the Orc Emperor, my party''s achievement is just guiding everyone and also the one who responsible for nning thebination magic.


    The parties who didn''t participate in the final battle can''t say anything about it. They just regretted that they were too quick to run away. It''s good enough for them to not be hostile to us.


    Back to the guild master, he''s summarizing the event that happened.


    "So the Orc Emperor is bigger than an average Orc Emperor. It might be a mutated monster. Or worse, the man who destroy its corpse, the organization where he belong is responsible in an experiment that makes the Orc Emperor mutated. Which means there''s a chance that there are many other mutated monster made by those organization."


    "And I will destroy that organization!"


    Thanks to the effort of everyone, no one died in this event. Not even those who defending the city. Just the two fake A-rank hunters who died as they lure the orcs here. As for the one who survive, he''s in jail now.


    The only casualty in this horrifying event is just Kron''s hair roots. That''s why he''s so adamant in taking down every single one of the organization who might be responsible for this.


    Of course I haven''t told anyone yet about the truth that there is an evil organization trying to conquer the world. Everyone is not yet ready for the truth. And I still don''t know if there are members of the cult among the parties in the battle. Although I feel like the chance is low.


    After the battle, we got to know each other better. They are all good people. They also worried about me when I fought the Orc Emperor.


    Seeing Kron''s baldness, the guild master decided to give him something to cover his head.


    "I have something that might help you cover your head. How about this bandana?"


    The guild master gave Kron a blue bandana from his desk.


    "I don''t know about that. I might look like someone who''s desperate to hide my baldness if I wear that."


    "Then I''ll take it."


    Faster than anyone could react, I grabbed the bandana and wore it on my head.


    "How do I look? Do I look like someone desperate to hide my bald spot?"


    "Nope. Not at all."


    "I think you look good in that."


    Of course the one who answered are my girlfriends. They are honest girls.


    "Give me that! This was given to me not you!"


    Kron take the bandana from my head and wore it. No one saying anything about his ne looks.


    "Say something! Where''s my praises!"


    Kron got angry when no one isplimenting him. He''s my new friend so I will lend him a hand.


    "Bro. In the end, it''s alle down to the face."


    "Spare me the truth!"


    Of course when I said I will lend him a hand, it means to tell him the truth. To make him realize how the world works. That''s a good thing to do as a friend, right?


    "That''s one thing taken care of. Now as a reward, for Roy and his party, we will increase your hunter rank by one level. Which means for Roy, Ang, and Ka, they will be given a C-rank and a gold card. As for Sophie, she will be a D-rank."


    "Are you sure? It was just not long ago when I was active as a hunter. Is this okay to raise my rank this fast?"


    Sophie thought that she doesn''t deserve to get her rank raised. But the one who answered her question is not the guild master, not me, not Ang or Ka. It was one of the girl from another party who I helped in the settlement to kill the Orc General. Her name is Vivian. A member of Hector''s party, led by Hector. He''s someone who used his own name as the party''s name.


    "I think you are more than deserved to rank up. You are brave enough get close to the Orc Emperor and shock that monster. Not a single one of us other than Roy, dare to do that."


    "¡­then I''ll ept it. Thank you for the reward."


    "Please keep up the good work. I believe you will soon raise your rank again and won''t be left behind by Roy and the other."


    The guild master encourage Sophie to keep up the good work. Her lightning element is very useful and I believe she can be the strongest in that element in the future.


    The guild master also gave us some money to spend. Then he proceed to give other hunters the reward they deserve.


    All of us decided to use some of that money to celebrate tonight. We ate, drank, and had a lot of fun untilte at night.


    Before we went home, Kron pulled me for a private conversation between us two.


    "Roy. Do you know about that secret organization?"


    I think he''s already know that I have some idea about the organization behind the Orc Emperor''s incident. So I told him what I can.


    "For now, it''s just a spection. And there''s no evidence of their existence yet so I can''t say anything to you."


    "Basically, you''re saying that there''s a chance that there''s a traitor among us. And you still can''t trust me with that information yet. Have you told your party?"


    "You''re sharp. Yes I have. I can trust her. But you, we just metst night."


    "I guess you''re right. I also can''t trust someone I just metst night in an instant."


    "You don''t look down at all even after you know that much, huh?"


    "Of course. It mean I just have to find out about them myself or get you to trust me more. I believe in the future, you will tell me everything you know about them. I just have to make you trust me more until that daye."


    "Good luck with that. What will you do after this?"


    "Get stronger. I will travel to another city and hunt some strong monsters. I don''t think I will be able to get to S-rank soon after what happened. I will get stronger and defeat all those responsible for what happened to my hair!"


    "Revenge of the bald!"


    "Yeah! Revenge of the- NO!"


    "What''s wrong? If you one day want to write an autobiography about yourself, you need a title, right? I think Revenge of The Bald is a good title."


    "No! I''m not nning to write a book about myself!"


    "Even if you don''t, once you gain reputation and poprity around the world as you improve your ranks by getting some achievements, someone will make a story about you. Then you need to prepare about getting such title in the stories someone else wrote."


    "Grrr¡­. That mean I just need a nickname so I won''t be called the bald. How about Blue Bandana?"


    "The Blue Bandana That Hides His Baldness."


    "No! Just Blue Bandana!"


    "Good luck in spreading your nickname."


    "Sigh¡­ Roy, you''re a good man. I hope we will meet again in the future. Maybe our path will cross one day."


    "Or maybe I can just give you my address so you can visit me from time to time. After graduating, I will move to Cassau. I don''t know the address yet, but in the future, you might be able to find me there."


    "¡­I was just trying to be cool. In the story, usually we part way with something cool. Not exchanging home address. Can''t I be cool for one day?"


    "Nope. Your coolness disappear either when your hair roots burnt, or when you meet someone cooler than you. Like me! If you need anything, you can visit Cassau. I don''t have a house yet, but I will be soon. Good luck in your journey to be strong."


    "Goodbye¡­ rence. I hope I can see some more of your performances."


    The day after, we meet again just before he left the city. He felt extremely awkward because we have said goodbyest night, but I don''t care. In fact he should be more embarrassed. He is a fun guy to tease.

 Chapter 69 - Victorias Report

    Kron has left Melk today. Since I told him where I will stay in the future, I believe we will see each other again.


    Then there''s also Victoria. I told her to sneak into Governor''s residence, and she hasn''t returned yet. Even after more than 12 hours passed. But I''m not worried about her. Even if she got caught, she''s an immortal slime. I hope she found some evidence about the cult.


    My n today is to go to school like usual. Then I need to go to the circus to collect my payment. Will I get a bonus?


    School is over and now I will go to the circus troupe. I heard that they cancelled a lot of events scheduled in Melk because of the orcs attack. If I don''t go today, I won''t get paid. I need to hurry!


    "Roy! Thank god you''re alive! I heard that no casualties in yesterday''s attack but I''m still worried about my best clown!"


    "What do you mean your best clown? I am the world''s best clown. You need to correct your words."


    "You''re right! I never thought we would have huge sess when we decided to perform in this city. But thanks to you, we did really well. If it''s not for the food poisoning, you won''t perform with us."


    "You''re grateful half of your member got poisoned? You''re really evil."


    "That''s not what I mean! Anyway, here''s your share. You have a hunter''s card, right? And since it''s thanks to you the tickets got sold out, I''ll give you some bonus"


    "Thanks!"


    I take out my card and touch it with his card. While mine is a hunter''s card, he''s holding amonly used card. It was for small business or for personal use that you can get from the bank.


    "Gold card? You''re a C-rank?"


    "Thanks to yesterday''s event, my rank raised. I did pretty well on the mission."


    "I see. Do you want to continue being a hunter?"


    "What? You''re trying to scout me into your circus?"


    "Obviously!"


    "I''ll pass on that. Maybe I''ll take part in it from time to time, but I think being a hunter is fine as well."


    Actually I really want to let go of this life of killing monsters or humans. But with the cult out there, I won''t be able to life my live peacefully knowing that danger is close.


    I will think about his offer when the cult is gone. After all, even with all the wealth that I got from diving and treasure hunting, being a clown is much more fun.


    "Well, if you need my help in the future, just find me. I''ll be moving to Cassau by next year."


    "Cassau? Maybe we should move there as well. We have saved enough money to build a base in a city but we haven''t found a good city yet. If you move there, I think it will be a good idea to set a base there. Although we''re mainly a travelling circus, we thought of having a home. So in the future, we will mainly perform in Cassau and travel from town to town then return to Cassau after the tour is over."


    "Alright. But you don''t have to call me every time you''re about to perform, alright?"


    They were all good people. Since they''re going to stay in Cassau as well, we will meet often there.


    They have decided to leave and move to another city after what happened. So this is also a goodbye for now.


    We have gotten so close just after one show. And the strongman is actually the one with the softest heart. He cried during our farewell.


    Since I have nothing else nned today, I went back to Red Tail and enjoy the rest of the day ying with Daniel. But when I return, somehow the atmosphere is different.


    "What''s wrong?"


    "They left. It''s just us here. They said that they''re already afraid with the orcs'' attack and stayed here when the guild is having an emergency that night. They felt guilty but also scared of the future. They don''t want to get involved with danger and decided to leave this morning, just when you leave for school. They didn''t want to move with us to Cassau and choose to go to another city."


    "Isn''t that fine? I will also think twice if I have to face the danger. Does this mean the rest of us here will move to Cassau?"


    Those who stay here are Sophie, Ruby, Penny, Hannah, and Daniel. All the other girls have left. They either left with their boyfriend, or left on their own. Now the building has gotten quieter.


    "Then, I take it that everyone here has chosen to move to Cassau?"


    "Yes. I''m your girlfriend so it''s obvious. Since you obviously will take Daniel with you, Ruby is worried about him if you decided to travel. Penny thought that staying with you is safer so Hannah and Penny will move as well."


    "That''s fine. I guess my n to build a n will be dyed if we only have this many people, but building a n is not important. I just want to build a safe ce for people around me."


    I still haven''t gotten any news from Sam and Lina about the ce they''re trying to get me. Maybe I should visit them? I think I''ll leave tomorrow. And this time, I will ask the Ang, Ka, and Sophie toe with me. To find us a new house in Cassau. And I think it''s about time I go for another treasure hunt.


    I asked Sophie to tell the girls while I yed with Daniel. Then just before dinner, she returned and said everyone wille. Of course I also told Daniel that I will leave again, and Ruby will take care of him.


    I''m not a really good brother, aren''t I? Although I decided to take him in, I always travel all the time and leaving everything to Ruby. But I can''t just bring him with me. The only thing I can do is to y with him whenever I''m home.


    Thente at night, Victoria returned.


    "How is it?"


    "I found some evidence about their ns. They write down their ns but none of them have any names of the involved members included. Just about what, when, and how they will attack."


    "Let''s see¡­"


    She brought several documents home with her. I took one of them and read it. It''s about the n to attack Melk using monsters in few months. There are also several others n involving other city. There''s also a paper about monsters experiment.


    "Damn. These are enough to have the governor executed. How did you get these? Did you copy them all?"


    "No. just the first page. The governor write down everything on paper and left it for the higher up of the cult to read in case he''s busy. But they didn''t read it at all and just patiently waited until the governor is done with his business and he will tell them directly. It happened yesterday and today is the same.


    Then seeing that his higher ups didn''t even touch the papers, he just burn them without taking another nce. So what he burns are just nk paper other than the first page."


    "I see¡­ thanks for all this. But do you know about the Orc Emperor incident?"


    "Yes. They send someone to destroy the Orc Emperor''s body. Even if you choose to leave, they will still take care of it. They are just being careful to not let anyone see the corpse and find something unusual. And what was told to the governor is that the Orc Emperor died because of magicbination between fire and wind, then someonee and destroy the corpse. They don''t know about your strength. But they know about your involvement. They decided to leave you all alone because if you need magicbination to defeat the Orc Emperor, you are seen as weaklings. Seems like they have someone extremely powerful behind them. Possibly, a Master level mage."


    "Thanks. You did a lot today. By the way, tomorrow we all will go to Cassau."


    "Treasure Hunting? I''m in!"


    "Of course. And you also want some pocket money, right? I think it''s a good idea for you to be in your human form tomorrow and register to the guild. That way you can have your own card."


    "That''s great! That mean I can get some money on my own!"


    "Just be careful to not let anyone know that you''re a slime. It''s better if you team up with the girls when I''m not around."


    "Sure! What about these documents? Will you give them to your teacher? The one who''s actually a secret agent?"


    "No. I think I''ll give them to the king myself. I think I will go to the capital after spending some time in Cassau. I need a disguise to hide my identity. You will help me with that."


    "Sure! I will transform into a full body armor with helmet. All ck. Wait and see."


    She transformed and envelop my whole body with hers. She also cover my face with a helmet. I think this is a perfect disguise.


    "I call it-"


    "No. Don''t use any name from your world that I might not understand. Just use a simple one people can remember."


    "Fine. Let''s just call yourself Dark Armor."


    "I''m fine with it. It''s simple."


    "How about ''Kuro''? It''s anothernguage in my world. It means ck. Although you say no to a name from my world, just this much is fine, right? It''s also shorter than Dark Armor and also easy to remember."


    "¡­fine. Then Kuro shall be my alias when we''rebined like this."


    And so, I prepared another disguise for when I decided to meet the king.

 Chapter 70 - Dreamt Of Being A Hero

    Victoria''s registration was done early. Then the five of us left for Cassau. We travel on foot with steady pace because Sophie still not used to a long travel. Although I can reach there in less than a day, I still have to think about the others.


    We set up a camp in the evening so we can rest. We should be able to reach Cassau in two or three days if we keep the pace.


    Victoria has gone and turned back into Blobby. We let Sophie and Ka take first shift of watch duty. It was so Sophie can get used to camping. And Ka will keep herpany. After their turns, it''s mine and then Ang.


    I choose the middle shift because it was the most tiring one. I have to wake up in the middle of the night and only sleep for a while. Of course I slept again after my shift, only for a short while. If the girls are the one who''s doing it, I''ll be concerned about them. That''s why I choose to be the middle shift.


    As for why Sophie and Ka together on the first shift, it was because this is Sophie''s first time camping as a hunter. She said that long time ago, she used to travel with her merchant father. But at that time, she was just someone to be protected. Now she''s a hunter, she need to get used to do the protecting instead.


    She''s the first because the first shift will always have the longest time to rest without any interruption until the sun rise. Ka with her to guide her. And she''s also the one who has the closest rtionship with Sophie. Other than me.


    During my turn for watch duty, Sophie left her tent and take a seat next to me.


    "Can''t sleep?"


    "Yes. Am I bothering you?"


    "Not at all. You can rest your head in myp. I''ll keep youpany until you fall asleep."


    "Thanks."


    Without hesitation she rest her head on myp. I grabbed a nket and cover her body with it.


    "What''s wrong?"


    "Just¡­ being a hunter is tiresome. Especially when you''re travelling. It''s the first time for me to keep watch at night."


    "Right. You said that you used to travel with your father, right?"


    "It''s different. Back then, I am the one being protected. Now I''m the one doing protection."


    "Then wanna quit being a hunter? It''s not like I taught you to be stronger just so you can be a hunter you know?"


    "That''s¡­ I feel like if I do that, you will get further and further away from me. I don''t want that."


    "¡­damn. You''re cute."


    I said as my hand reached her head and rub it.


    "I really want to be a part of your life. And you be an important part of my life."


    "This is weird, you know? Getting into rtionship just because we slept together. Not that I hate it."


    "You''re right. I know at that time, you just want to get to sleep quickly and said nice things to me. But since that time, I just can''t get you away from my mind. That''s why I became a hunter. I want to be closer with you."


    "You don''t regret being a hunter? You should already know how close you are to death in this line of job."


    "I know. But when I see you fighting the Orc Emperor, my heart is hurt imagining what would happen if you died. Rather than me dying, I''m more afraid to lose you."


    "That''s nice to hear. But I want you to still be afraid of death. After all, I''m the one who''s afraid of death the most here. Especially after experiencing it once."


    She turned her head to me while still on myp and ask me with a concerned expression.


    "If you''re afraid of death, then why are you doing this? Why do you want to fight an entire secret organization and have to get stronger?"


    "Why am I doing it? Well, it''s because I know the future. It''s scary. I want to change it. My wish is just to live peacefully, but knowing that Evil God Cult exist, they won''t let anyone live peacefully. They will kill anyone if they don''t share the same vision. That''s why if I want to live peacefully, they have to disappear."


    "But you don''t have to fight them, right? With your strength as it is now, you can choose to keep running away until you reach a ce they can''t reach."


    Thinking back, that''s should be the first thing I did once I turned back in time. Why didn''t I do it? It''s obvious. Just a stupid answer.


    "Well, it was because I am stupid and made a stupid decision. I get back to the past and I didn''t choose to run away forever just like you said. It was because... in the corner of my mind, I want to y hero. Knowing what the future will be, and how to get stronger faster, I just thought that maybe if I get strong enough, I can destroy that cult and be a hero. Although that kind of thinking never stays in my head for long, in the end, I met people who became important to me before I choose to run away. Now I want to live peacefully and make sure everyone important to me will be safe. That''s why I choose to fight now."


    "So you choose to fight them? Is that it?"


    "Yes. But that''s not all. You know that I will go to the royal capital after my business in Cassau is over, right?"


    "Yes. You told us this morning."


    "I''m nning to tell the king about the cult. Hopefully, I can leave the rest to the king. If he choose to fight the cult, I can rest easy. But I think even if he''s doing well, there''s a limit to what he can do. So I will help him little by little until the kingdom has enough power to protect itself from the cult. Once the cult''s influence disappear in this kingdom, I can finally live peacefully with Daniel, Ka, you, and the others. As for other countries, let''s have the king inform themter on."


    "I see. So you want to get stronger so you can leave the rest to the kingdom. But what if there are traitors in the kingdom? Wasn''t the governor is part of the cult?"


    "That''s will be included in the part where I helped the king little by little."


    "Then after that, you won''t get involved with the cult again?"


    "Hopefully, that will be the case. Then we can have our happily ever after."


    "Then I will support you with all my heart."


    She said as she yawned. I guess she''s tired from our chat.


    "Go to sleep. I will carry to your tent so you can sleep here if you want."


    "Then I''ll take that offer. I always had a good dream whenever I sleep with you¡­"


    "You too, Ka. I know you''re listening. And Ang, sorry to wake you up but this is not your turn yet. You can sleep again and I''ll wake you upter."


    I can see them with my Divine Vision so I knew they have been listening from the start.


    Then Ka, instead of sleeping in her tent, she choose to leave and approached me.


    "Then I will sleep on your otherp. You have two so it''s fine, right?"


    "Sure. Being surrounded by beauties is a blessing after all."


    I adjusted my siting position so both Ka and Sophie can sleep well. With Sophie on my right, and Ka on my left, I patted their heads and soon, they fell asleep.


    As for Ang, she peeked from her tent for a while and then returned back to her sleep. Not asking to sleep on myp. It''s obvious since she''s not my girlfriend. And even more obvious that I only have two legs. Where would she sleep then?


    Few hours passed but since Ang woke up before, I choose to stay on duty for another hour so Ang can get her rest. Then I carried Sophie and Ka back to their tent and woke Ang up so she can have her turn.


    The three girls stayed in one tent with using Blobby as their bed. While I''m staying alone in a small tent.


    I don''t have anyin about sleeping alone. Especially when I know that there are two women who truly worried about me. They are such a great women that I felt truly grateful that they want to be with me.


    And possibly, there''s one more woman. Although she''s not my lover.


    And still possibly, there will be more. I''m truly d to have understanding girlfriends who allow me to have a harem. Will there be more, I wonder?


    Whether I will have more lovers or not, it doesn''t matter. What matter most is for me to have the ability to protect them. That''s why I have to get stronger.

 Chapter 71 - Bathhouse And Inn

    We have reached Cassau just before it got dark. People are already going their way home and started closing their shops. Other than inns, restaurants and bars.


    "We''re finally here! Should we go look for an inn?"


    "Yeah. I''ll also try to look for Sam and Lina to ask if they have already found us a ce."


    My vision is still locked in one spot. I can see many thing with my Divine Vision so I don''t have to turn my head.


    Yeah, that''s right! I have the greatest vision in the world!


    "Excuse me, you have been looking at our bathhouse since a while ago. Are you interested in it? If you are, feel free toe. Although it''s not cheap, we have confidence in our services."


    Someone suddenly approached me as I was ''looking for Sam''. Annoying¡­


    She seems to be an employee at some kind of shops.


    "Well, I''m looking for my frie- Guagh!!"


    As I was about to tell her that I''m looking for a friend, but Ang punched me in the gut before I finished my sentence.


    "Aaaah¡­ so that''s a bathhouse that you keep looking at¡­ what about your friends? Have you find them yet?"


    "Ugh- I''m still looking for them. Why don''t you go find an inn for us?"


    I asked Ang and the others to find us an inn to stay. But before they answered, the replye from the bathhouse employee.


    "Ah! If you''re looking for a ce to stay, you can stay in our ce. Although it''s well-known as a bathhouse, it''s actually an inn as well. Not many people know about it so we don''t have many people choosing to stay. But the bathhouse is almost always full."


    "I''ll take that offer! We will stay in your establishment for a while!"


    "Thank you for choosing our inn. Pleasee and register first."


    The employee ask us to follow her to the bathhouse inn.


    "Of course Roy will agree to stay there¡­"


    "I''m sorry! It was instinctive decision!"


    "That''s what he says¡­ What about you two?"


    "I''m fine with it. I want to soak myself in a bath."


    "Me too. It''s not like it will be easy to find an inn at this time."


    It was Ka first who answered Ang and then Sophie followed after.


    "Aren''t you two his girlfriends? You two just fine with him looking at other girls?"


    "Well, he''s Roy after all. And we can just get two roomster. One will be Ang and me, then Roy and Sophie will be on the other room. She can just sleep with him to seduce him."


    Whoa. Ka already thought that far. Well, it''s true that I enjoy seeing girls, but I enjoy it more when they are my girlfriends.


    "I''m fine with it, but why aren''t you be the one to sleep with him?"


    Sophie asked why Ka didn''t decided to sleep with me.


    "I think it''s too soon for me to think about it. I will just leave it to the most experienced one among us. We will still have a lot of time together in the future."


    And so we decided to get two room in this inn. I let the girls find the rooms they wanted while I''m continuing my search of Sam and Lina.


    Unexpectedly, as I was just activating my Divine Vision again, I saw that both Sam and Lina are also living in this inn. Just right in front of my room. I guess I was too focused to a certain spot that I didn''t notice they are here as well.


    "Seems like they are here as well. That means they haven''t found a good ce yet."


    "You mean the one you''re looking for is staying here? Why did you take so long to find them? I thought you would have found them sooner."


    "Ang. Don''t forget that this ce is also a bathhouse."


    "¡­pervert."


    Ang soon realized the answer on her own after Ka''s reminder. Sophie was just giggling while watching the whole conversation.


    Well, Ka is right. I enjoyed watching the bath before actually searching for Sam.


    "Well, I will go greet them first. Oh wait! They seem to being here. I think they''re about to take a bath."


    Soon after I said that, we saw Sam going down the stairs and about to go to the bath. Lina also followed behind her. And as soon as Lina saw my face, her face brighten up.


    "Master! You''re here!"


    "Lina. Been a while. How are you?"


    "I''m good! I missed you all these times."


    "What are you doing here?"


    Sam asked my intention ining here.


    "I''m going to another treasure hunt. And to let my party to remember the area around here. You haven''t found a ce yet?"


    I asked Sam but the one who answered me is Lina.


    "Not yet. I found a good ce for you, but our budget is not enough. Sorry to have failed you¡­"


    "No. Don''t be so down. That means you found a good ce for me, right? You''re doing great then. As for money, I will take care of that since I''m doing another treasure hunt. Just do your job like usual."


    "Yes! Thank you master!"


    "You''re going to the bath, right? You can go now and we can talkter. My friends also want to take a bath. You can get to know each other there."


    With that, I grabbed all the girls'' luggage and carry them to my room. Ang and Ka can take them after bathing.


    After taking the luggage, I also went to take a bath. I didn''t take as long as the girls so when I have done and returned to my room, they are still there having fun.


    Of course I can see them.


    "Since you will be here, I''ll take a bath with them."


    "Sure."


    Victoria appear and went to the bath. Ang, Ka, and Sophie are pleasantly surprised to see her joining.


    Hmm? I think they''re looking this way for a moment? Did Victoria told them that I''m peeking?


    ¡­that''s the truth and the girls should already get used to it. Other than Sam and Lina who''s still confused about their conversation. They must be thinking that there''s no way I can peek on them.


    They left soon after and entered my room. Seems like we will have our discussion here.


    "Roy! That''s your summon?"


    "Yes. Her name is Victoria. You should have known each other in the bath, right?"


    "But I still can''t believe it! I mean, she''s totally like a human!"


    "Victoria. Show her your original form."


    Then human Victoria turned into blob Victoria. Now Sam can believe it.


    "A slime that have the same intellect as human? Amazing."


    "Well, more importantly, how''s business?"


    This is what I want to know.


    "Well, we''re doing well. Although your share is not enough to buy the ce that Lina want, it''s still a lot."


    "Wait. What kind of house is Lina trying to get me?"


    "A huge one! Master, please look outside the window!"


    I look over the window and see the building Lina pointed. It''s a big three story building. I can see it behind a shop in front of this inn. No wonder it''s quite expensive.


    "Although that building is good, I''m still doubtful to get Master that one."


    "Why? I think it''s good. As for the price, I can get a lot after treasure hunting a few times."


    "That building is the only one for sale in this city. Other than that, there are only small houses for sale."


    "Then why not there?"


    "¡­because it was haunted."


    "What?!"


    Then I looked again with my Divine Vision activated. Can I see ghosts with this vision?


    The answer is yes. I saw a human shaped upper half body floating around in said building.


    "Oooh! There really is ghosts over there. About five of them I guess?"


    "You can see ghosts?"


    "I see. It was an ability you got after defeating All-seeing Eye. So you can see everything in present with your eyes. But you can''t see the past and future."


    Ka calmly appraising my vision while ignoring Ang''s scream. As for Sophie, she''s grabbing my hand. She must be scared


    "You''re right. Let''s go over there tomorrow."


    "Nope! We will go to the guild and look for a good quest to take. You go on your own!"


    "Is that so? Then it will be just me and Victoria."


    "No! Nonononononononono! Why should I go with you?"


    "Just ept it. Even if you don''t want to, I can just summon you when I''m there."


    "¡­this is the first time I regretted to be your summon."


    I want to go check that ce as soon as possible. I''m not afraid of ghosts. Although it''s the first time I see ghosts.


    "Are you thinking of exorcising the ghost? I think you should do that after you got the money. If the ghosts disappear before you got the money, the price might rise."


    "I''ll do that then. By the way, if the ce is haunted, why is it so expensive? Shouldn''t it be cheap?"


    "I thought so too. When I asked, they say that the building is expensive because of the material to build it. I heard that it was made with better materials than other building. That''s why it''s pretty strong."


    "Strong building, huh? I like it already."


    "Even though the price has been lowered by more than 50% because of the ghosts, it was still expensive. I think it''s best if you have the money first before you visit the building. They might raise the price if they know you can exorcise ghosts."


    "Okay. I will get a lot of treasure and bring it to Sam. Where should I take them to?"


    "I rented an office nearby. Just bring them over there. I will also buy a ce to be my office after I get more money. That''s why you should bring a lot of treasures."


    "Will do. I''ll bring a lot of them tomorrow. Now that you''re so close here, I can bring more than I did before."


    "Good. I''ll be waiting."


    I guess I won''t leave Cassau until I bought a ce here. That''s fine since I''m not in a hurry.


    As for the haunted building¡­ I''ll take care of it after I got the money.


    Can aura be used to exorcise ghosts?

 Chapter 72 - Another Treasure Hunt And A Rumor

    The next day, I left to the sea while the girls enjoying sightseeing in Cassau. And maybe they will take a quests from the guild.


    I dive into the sea to where I found the previous sunken ship. I haven''t taken all the treasures inside that ship yet. Maybe there are more of them.


    Somehow, today''s treasure hunt is different than thest time. This time, there are a lot more monsters. Looks like it''s the time when some type of fishes migrate. And because they are foods for monsters, the monsters followed them here. Now I have experienced why diving underwater is not popr. People might die getting killed by monsters.


    But not me. Last time I came here, I practiced my underwater battle technique before I hunt for treasure. Now I will know how well I fought underwater.


    There are a lot of fish monsters here. Is there any mermaid? I don''t see any.


    Most of the monsters are smaller than me so they choose to ignore me and feast on smaller fishes. If there''s a piranha here, they won''t care about the size of their meal.


    Then I encounter a bigger target. It''s a Sting Ray. The size is wide and long with a long and poisonous tip on its tail. Its tail is so long that it can target the enemy in front of it. Just like a scorpion. It''s a perfect practice target.


    I first shoot at it with Blobby harpoon. I missed. That Sting Ray is much faster than I imagined, so I transformed Blobby into a broadsword.


    Now is where the real battle began.


    The Sting Ray already think of me as its enemy. It will either run away or kill me. The fact that it stays, means that thing is trying to kill me.


    The Sting Ray can swim fast, but its tail attacked much faster. It''s like water pressure doesn''t mean much to it. But at least I''m quick enough to block the attack. I block the tip of its tail with the side of my broadsword.


    It attacked rapidly but I managed to block them all. Now it''s my turn.


    I swung my broadsword at it. It dodged easily but my swing doesn''t stop. I keep swinging following an 8 shape pattern. Although it''s not always an 8, I keep swinging.


    I managed to scratch it a few times. Blood pouring out from where I scratched it. I have to finish soon before another bigger monsters appear because of the smell of blood.


    The Sting Ray take some distance and I used that chance to attack it with my spear to kill it.


    I swum as fast as I can in a straight line to the Sting Ray, and pierced its body with the spear. It was a good idea to hold the rear end of the spear because the length of the spear saved me from the poisonous tail attack. Its tail stopped right in front of my face. If the spear any shorter, I would have died. What a blunder.


    I need to improve so I can kill monsters more efficiently. Without taking a huge risk like this. Maybe I should make my broadsword longer? But the attack power might be lessened if I do that. In the end, it''s all about my physical strength, huh? I have to be able to strike down the enemy in one strike.


    I guess this is enough battle for today. I need to leave soon before the smell of the blood attract stronger monsters. I still haven''t got any treasures yet.


    I swam to where the sunken ship is. On the way, there are only monsters weaker than the Sting Ray so I have no problem in defeating them. And I grabbed some Tuna because they were delicious. I''ll have them for lunchter. I can ask Lina to cook it. Then after lunch I can return here to get some more treasures.


    I also grabbed some water magic stones on the way. There are some Ice magic stones that somehow ended up here. Must be carried away from an iceberg or something. I''ll give them to Angter.


    I entered the ships and look for more boxes. The ones that''s not damaged at all. After all, they''re the kind of boxes that was necessary for merchant especially if they want to protect their merchandise. It''s difficult to break but I can do it easily.


    I ignore the boxes that was filled with foods and spices. Even if the boxes arepletely airtight, the foods should be spoiled and rotten already.


    I grabbed most boxes that was filled with jewelries. As for boxes filled with magic equipment or magic tools, I''ll take themter. I can ask Sam to have someone appraise them and then I''ll present the good ones to the girls and let Sam sell the rest.


    I left the sea and return to Cassau before lunch.


    I returned to the inn and give the Tuna to Lina to cook. She then asked the employee of the inn to use the kitchen as we all waited at the restaurant in the inn. Since we got the ingredients ourselves, we don''t have to pay.


    While waiting, I asked Sam about the estimation of the treasures I just brought. And since I will return to the seater, there might be more. I also ask her to find appraiser she can trust to appraise some magic tools and equipment I found. I know some of them, but not all. I just know those I have seen in the past.


    "With this, I think you can buy that building already. But you need to wait at least 2 days for all of these to be sold."


    "That''s fine. I can grab some more treasures during that time or check on the hunting grounds nearby. We also need to check the monsters thatmonly appear here in case we want to take some quests."


    "That''s good. But where will you store the treasures you find? I don''t think you can safely put them in your room here."


    "I''ll just leave them in an empty ind I found, or just leave gather them all underwater in the same ce. So I whenever I''m out of money I can just go there. But I don''t think I can find any safe ce underwater with how strong the current is and that there are more monsters here than before."


    "I think I know why. There''s a rumor about a sea demon appearance. It''s not that the sea demon appear, but her maid was witnessed by a fisherman."


    "Really? What''s the connection with the monsters? Did that demon order them to attack?"


    It was Ang who interrupt our chat. I know the reason why. It was a simple answer. But of course for a magic nerd like Ang, she won''t know the answer unless it''s rted to magic.


    "It was because of that, most of fishermen afraid to go out to the sea. That mean there will be more fishes around the area. More fishes mean more predators. It''s that simple."


    Sam answered Ang''s question. My guess was right then. But that sea demon¡­ I hope that thing won''t attack me out of nowhere.


    "Actually, I might know something about that."


    "Victoria? You know about the sea demon?"


    "No. Sam, can you tell us how the rumor started?"


    Victoria seems to know something about it and she asked Sam to tell her how the rumor started.


    "It started not long ago. Just few days before we came here. If Roy doesn''t know about rumor, I think the rumor started just after Roy leave this city and return to Melk."


    Interesting. So the sea demon appeared around the time I''m here.


    Sam continued the story.


    "There''s a fisherman on a boat. He was in the middle of the sea, quite far from where other fishing boat usually went fishing. Suddenly, he saw a humanoid form jumped from the sea and that thing can walk on water. He screamed, "A sea demon! A sea demon appears!" then he got a reply, "I''m her maid!" That''s how the rumors spread.


    Interesting¡­ wait! That story seems familiar!


    "Somehow, the maid''s voice sounded like that of a man."


    "Sam¡­ what do you know about that fisherman?"


    "He''s old. His hearing is not well anymore but he''s not a liar. He''s quite well-known among the fishermen group as an honest man. That''s why everyone took it seriously."


    "Ahahahaha!"


    Seems like Victoria already know the truth.


    God! That is embarrassing!


    That rumored maid of the sea demon was me!


    That old fisherman misheard me saying ''I''m a mermaid'' and changed it into ''I''m her maid''.


    Victoriaughed so hard she can''t stopughing.


    Seeing Victoriaughed, Ang and Ka looked at me. They seemed to have realized the rumor is rted to me. Sophie and Sam also looked at me because of it.


    "Umm¡­ That probably me."


    "As I thought."


    "You''re such an idiot."


    Ang and Kaughed after hearing my confession. But Sophie and Sam looked confused. I have no choice but to tell them the truth.


    "I was practicing swimming and jumped high andnded on water. I can walk on water so that should be me. But what I shouted at that time was ''I''m a mermaid!'' not ''I''m her maid!'' That man misheard me."


    "Hahaha-"


    "Seriously?"


    "I''m serious. The rumor started to spread around the time I''m here, right? Then it was me. I''m sorry to have caused this much problem that makes fishermen afraid to go to the sea. But please don''t tell anyone. It''s embarrassing."


    Sophieughed together with the other three. But Sam who doesn''t know I''m an aura user and what I can do, still looked confused.


    She asked me how can a human being walk on water? But Lina alreadye with the dishes.


    I''ll tell her about it someday¡­ but not today.


    I''m too embarrassed to tell her now.


    If I did it with the intention of spreading the rumor, I would proudly tell her how I did it, but since this is totally unintentional, this is too embarrassing.


    I think the girls will tease me about it from now on. But it''s also my fault so I can''t do anything about it.


    Sigh¡­

 Chapter 73 - Dungeon

    We had a great lunch thanks to Lina''s cooking. She''s blushed as usual when I praised her.


    One of the chefs alsoe out and ask me toe again whenever I had more fishes. Since most fisherman stopped going out to the sea, the supply of fishing low. So they asked me to bring them some if I found more. Of course they will pay me.


    I''m the one who started the rumor but I''m getting paid. Other than the embarrassment, there''s nothing else I canin about. I just hope the girls won''t tell anyone the truth.


    "I''m going back to the sea in a while. What about you girls?"


    "I''ll try to sell your finding today. If I could sell some of them today, you can get your money faster. I''ll bring Lina with me."


    "No."


    Sam trying to sell the jewelries I found and taking Lina with her but Lina refused.


    "Lina, please help her."


    "If that''s what master desire."


    "¡­she''s totally your maid now."


    "Isn''t that great? Lina, unless it''s difficult, I want you to help Sam in any way you can. After all, she''s my partner."


    "Understood. I will help her to the best of my ability."


    "What about you, Ka?"


    This time, I asked Ka about her schedule today.


    "I want to learn more about dungeon. I heard that there''s a dungeon nearby. The three of us will collect some information about it."


    "You want to explore dungeon?"


    "Maybe. I want to learn about it first."


    "Okay. If you want to go there, bring me along."


    There''s a dungeon in this world. Although not many of them and they are not popr. Only few hunters and explorers want to go there. After all, it''s a monsters'' den.


    It was said that the monsters in this world, aree from the dungeon. They leave the dungeon and live in the wild. I don''t know the truth about it, and no one does.


    Dungeon usually is a closed space where monsters appear. They seem to be endless amount of them. There''s a story about some group of powerful mage who conquered dungeon, but the monsters still appear even after they reached the lowest floor.


    Other than monsters, there are also some treasure that can only appear in the dungeon. Sometimes, it''s a magic item, or maybe even an elixir. But they are rare and can only be found deeper in the dungeon.


    Most of the people who enters, are those who wants to get rich quickly. Ignoring the risk. But the rate of people who seeded dungeon exploring, is lower than the people who died inside the dungeon.


    Maybe if I enter there, I could find a super strong magic weapon. But I already have Blobby so it''s not important to me.


    I have never went inside a dungeon in the past. Although I''m interested in the treasure, the monsters inside is stronger than monsters in the wild. I might encounter another monster more powerful than the mutated Orc Emperor. But maybe if I had a party¡­


    "Roy, you interested in dungeon exploring?"


    "Yes. I have never enter a dungeon before."


    "What about the cave where you find that fruit? Does that count as a dungeon?"


    That fruit? She must mean Pear-y Fruit. If I think about it, it''s quite simr to a dungeon. A closed space, a monster, and a treasure. But there''s only one monster there. Maybe I should check again. Who knows if the guild will reward me for discovering a dungeon?


    "There was only one monster there so I don''t know yet. What about you girls?"


    "We''re interested in going there, but it might be difficult in our current level. As a mage, fighting in a closed space is difficult. How about we all go there tomorrow for a test? If we found the exploring is doable, we can continueter. We have Roy after all."


    Ka is right. Being a mage, fighting using magic in a closed space is hard. That''s also one reason why not many mage want to enter.


    As for me, I fight in a closebat. So it should be easier for me. And I also have experience in fighting in a closed space. But if I have to choose, I would rather fight outside than inside.


    I have fought against an Orc Emperor outside, and against the All-seeing Eye inside. For me, fighting inside is much easier. Although I had restriction back then with not using magic or havingpanion with me, now I don''t have them anymore. If I have to fight All-seeing eye again, I can win easily if I can use my air magic. Having air element magic won''t make me out of breath.


    But I would rather fight outside. Because fighting in the wild means I have multiple escape route I can take if I can''t win the battle. In a closed area, there would usually be just one escape route. Which mean it was easy to block and makes me unable to escape.


    If I''m someone who wants to gain achievements and want to win no matter what, I would challenge a dungeon. But I''m someone who values my own life after I lost it. So I would choose to fight in a ce where my escape route is clear.


    But if I''m with a party, we can watch each other''s back and someone can also secure the escape route. Maybe it''s fine to explore it.


    "Then let''s go tomorrow. After today, I think I can get more treasures tost for a month or so. I''ll bring themter to Sam."


    "Master, can I join your exploration tomorrow?"


    "Hmm? Are you sure? What about you girls?"


    "I''m fine with it."


    "Me too."


    "If Ka and Sophie already agreed, I have no reason to refuse then."


    "You can just say okay or something, Ang. Sam, is she free tomorrow?"


    "I might need to find some buyers to sell your jewelries. But if can take care most of it today, I can handle everything on my own tomorrow."


    I think she has changed a lot. Sam used to be a gang leader and moneylender. But now she''s doing a clean job of being a merchant, she''s totally different from when she just allow her subordinates do whatever evil stuffs they want.


    After finishing our meals and have some more chats, I returned to the sea.


    I''m going to take all the treasures left in the ship and took them to the ind where I rested back then. I think that''s an emptynd and no one goes there. I can just dig up a hole and bury the treasures there.


    Later that evening, I brought some more fishes for the restaurant. After another delicious dinner, I prepared to take a bath. But the employee stopped me.


    "Excuse me. I''m sorry but the male bath can''t be used now. The water is slightly muddy so we can''t let our customers bathe over there. We''re sorry for the inconvenience."


    "Hmm¡­ Then what should I do. I just went swimming today so I smell like a sea now. I really need a bath. Don''t tell me it turned into a mixed bath?"


    "You wish! There''s no way that happened¡­ right?"


    Ang always loves to hit me in a moment like this. Can''t I just enjoy a mixed bath?


    "There''s no mixed bath. But the women''s bath is currently used as the men''s bath. Women can enter itter after the men''s turn."


    "So the girls will enter after the boys?"


    "That''s right."


    "So we can''t enter it right now. What time will it be for the girls to have their turn?"


    Ang asked the employee. Seems like she also nned to take a bath.


    "In 2 hours. At 9 o''clock it will be the girls'' turn."


    "Alright. If that''s the case, I''ll take a bath before the girls. But I need to get some air first before I take a bath. I''ll be back at 8:59."


    Yup. That''s my n. To take a walk around until 8:59. Then it''s still the men''s bath at that time. Let''s leave before Ang hit me again.


    "AAAAH! It hurts! Don''t pull my ear!"


    She didn''t hit me. But she pulled my ear real hard.


    "No waiting! You! Bathe! Now!"


    "Okay-okay! I''ll take a bath now!"


    I used my special ability this time since I can''t get some air. It''s one I used against the Orc Emperor.


    Shameless Survival Arts!


    Stalling Time Skill: Slow Walking!


    I think it''s better to name it Shameless Arts now. There''s nothing about survival here.


    "Run or I''ll pull your other ear."


    Dammit. I lost to her ''kind'' persuasion. I have no choice but to take a long rxing bath. 5 hours should be enough.


    "And don''t even try to take a long bath for hours. One hour max! No more than that!"


    "Yes, Ma''am!"


    She''s really persuasive. I can''t do anything about it.


    The only thing I can do is to watch them from my room.


    "And don''t use your see-through vision again!"


    ¡­no promises there.

 Chapter 74 - New Girl?

    "Who''s she?"


    "She''s Ellen. She said she wants to tag along."


    Right now, we''re about to leave the city and go to the dungeon. But I saw a girl waiting next to the gate for someone. I asked Ka if she knows her and she said someone wants to tag along with us.


    "She''s the one from whom I received information about dungeon. When I said we''re going today, she volunteer to be our guide."


    "She''s a hunter?"


    "She''s an A-rank hunter. But she said a member of her party is an S-rank."


    "Why would she bother with us C-rankers? And with my Divine Vision, I can check on the surrounding just fine."


    "Well, she''s insistent. And I can''t really refuse her. Since you have no experience as well, I thought having her would be fine."


    "I see. But now there''s five of us. You, Ang, Sophie, Lina, and I. And we don''t know if Victoria wille out or not. With this many people, the dungeon will be cramped."


    "You''re right. I told her that we have about five members and she''s still insistent."


    "Well, how about the rest of you? You fine with another one joining us?"


    I asked the rest of the members.


    "I''m fine with it. She''s a good girl."


    "I like her. Let''s take her with us."


    "Whatever master desire."


    Ang and Sophie seems to have known about that girl. As for Lina, she will agree to whatever I say.


    Lina joining us as she asked me yesterday. She''s still wearing her maid clothes but she''s carrying a vase with soil in it. It was for when she summon her nt monster. Since it was a nt, it can''t walk on its own. That''s why that vase is important. But she said that if her summon got stronger, it can walk by using its own roots as its legs. But it might take a while until then.


    Since there''s no one disagree with hering, then she can join us. It should be temporary since she already has a party.


    I was about to greet her but her attitude was¡­


    "What?! You have a man in your party? Why didn''t you tell me?"


    Seems like she hates men.


    "What''s wrong with having a man in a party? Did you hate men? Then I apologize for not telling you. We can continue without you."


    "You entered the guild with just three of you. Everyone is girls. Of course I would think you''re a girl only party. I was even prepared to invite you three to join our party."


    "Sorry. That''s impossible. I enjoy teaming up with Roy."


    "Are you sure about that? Don''t you know that we have an S-rank hunter in our party?"


    "I know. But I prefer Roy over any S-rank hunters. I guess you won''t be joining us then."


    "Sorry Ellen. I also like to be here."


    "Me too. I''m sorry to refuse your invitation."


    Ka, Ang, and Sophie rejected Ellen''s offer to join her party which has an S-rank hunter. Well, I''m much better than any S-ranker after all.


    "You¡­"


    "What? Why is she looking at me as if I just stole her lover?"


    "Don''t know. I guess she''s the kind that prefer women."


    Ellen is staring dagger at me. As if she had a grudge against me.


    "I''ll still join you girls! I''ll show you that I''m better than that man over there. I''m an A-rank hunter after all."


    "If you hate me that much, you don''t have to do it. You can just leave now."


    "No! I will show you how strong an A-rank hunter is. Even if that rumored Sea Demone with her maid, I can defeat them on my own!"


    Oh shit! She just said something about the rumor. Now I have to deal with the girls'' reaction!


    "What do you think, Roy? Can she defeat that Sea Demon''s maid?"


    "Yeah, Rooooy. What do you think, Rooooy?"


    "Stop it! Both of you stop it!"


    Both Ka and Ang started to tease me. I heard Sophie''sughter as well. As for Lina, she doesn''t know the truth. Let it be that way for now.


    "You don''t need to ask his opinion! I will defeat that Sea Demon. Even if I can''t at least I know I can defeat her maid!"


    "What do you think, Rooooy?"


    "Enough of that! I think she can do whatever she wants! Let''s go!"


    We leave the city with Ellen. But I felt Blobby leave my arm. Looks like Victoria choose to appear now. She will appear from outside the city as if she''s waiting for us. The worst part about it is that¡­ her teasing will be much worse than Ka and Ang.


    "Hey! I''ve been waiting for a while! Let''s go!"


    "Another member of your party? From the look of it, he''s the only man here. He must be holding onto your weaknesses. He''s just another prick who wants girls all around him! You must leave this party ande with me!"


    No! She''s wrong! I don''t have anyone weaknesses! In fact, at the moment, they are holding my weakness!


    "Nope. He doesn''t has any of our weaknesses. Let''s just go our way. And while we''re on the way, let''s have a chat about the rumor."


    NOOOOOO!


    This is hell!


    All the way to the dungeon, both my hands never left my face. I''m still covering my face even after we arrived.


    There were some monsters on the way, but thanks to Ellen who wants to show off her ability, we don''t have to fight.


    She''s showing her powerful fire magic against the monsters. They were quite powerful magic, but should be useless in the dungeon.


    If she used her magic in the dungeon, the oxygen in the area will be burnt and we won''t have any way to breathe. And it was so powerful that it might hit her allies.


    For the oxygen, since I''m here, it will be fine. But just like any other mages, her control over her magic is still weak. She can''t adjust her magic well.


    We have arrived at the entrance of the dungeon so I told the girls to control their magic properly.


    "Girls. Don''t use big scale magic. Try to control it and make it smaller. We can use this dungeon as your training spot for battle in closed space since we always fight in the wild before."


    "Okay. Understood."


    "Using weak magic? There are strong monsters inside and you ordered them to use weak magic? Do you want to die?"


    I already gotten used to Ellen''s hostility toward me so I ignored her. Whatever happen to her, as long as she''s alive, I won''t care.


    I don''t want her to die because she''s really concerned about the girls'' safety. She''s a good person albeit only toward girls.


    "Then as for formation, Ka in the front. Then Sophie and Lina in the middle, and Ang behind us. As for the tagalong, she can be wherever she wants. Victoria and I will be on the ceiling."


    "Wait, what? On the ceiling? Are you drunk?"


    I ignore Ellen''s remark again. I can stick on the wall because of aura. As for Victoria, even though she can''t use aura, she''s still a slime. And it''s normal for a slime to have the ability to stuck on the wall or ceiling.


    We entered the dungeon and as soon as Victoria and I entered, we climbed on the wall and stuck our feet on the ceiling.


    "What? You''re really stuck on the ceiling? Are you a cockroach?"


    Ignore her. Ignore her.


    "Lina. You can summon your monster now."


    "Alright. Come Sunny."


    She had told us about her monster''s ability before we leave.


    It''s a nt type monster. And it looks like a sunflower. Except for the vine that can grow from its stem. For it to be able to walk using its own roots, Lina need to grow it first. If I found something that''s helpful for the growth of a nt type monster, I will give it to her.


    Then for Sunny''s ability. It can grow its vine and wrap the enemy. Then it can also shoot seeds from its flower. Of course I praised Lina for how cool her summon is after she tells me about it. She was sad that she only has one element. Just like me in the past. But I told her that it means she can just concentrate on growing her summon and be stronger that way. She became happy after that.


    "Alright. Lina, there''s a goblin in front of us. Attack it with Sunny''s seeds. I want to see how strong your monster is."


    "Okay."


    "The goblin will be visible soon. It''s right in front of you. Just wait until it got visible."


    I told her to wait. Then when the goblin appear, Lina told Sunny to shoot it.


    "Sunny, Seeds Throws!"


    Sunny throws the seeds¡­ or is it vomits? Whatever the case, Sunny shoots the goblins with rapid fire. The damage is little but because of how much the seeds attacked, the goblin''s got hurt more and more until it died.


    "Good job, Lina. Sunny too."


    "Thank you."


    Once Sunny grows, it should be able to shoot its seeds more powerful and faster than that. I can''t wait to see that.

 Chapter 75 - Dont Use Common Sense On Him

    Our dungeon exploration is doing well. Extremely well in fact that even Ellen surprised about it. She was supposed to be the most experienced one among us. Not even Victoria has entered a dungeon in her past life when she was an aura user. But she said she''s experienced it in a video games when she was in her old world.


    I don''t know what video games is but if it means someone can learn the experience without actually doing it, I''m jealous of people of that world. I need to learn more about that worldter.


    The only thing that bothering our exploration is Ellen''s continuous questions.


    "What is that nt monster? Why is Ka using an earth spike as a weapon? How can Ang kill a monster with a fireball even though she''s just a beginner level? Howe the fireball is smaller than most beginner level mage''s fireball but has more power? And Howe those two walk on the ceiling as if it''s normal?!"


    "I was surprised that Master can walk on the ceiling. But I know that Master is a special being. If he says he can do it, then he will do it."


    "Why is a maid worshipping him?!"


    Most of the questions is answered by the maid, Lina. Although she can''t answer most of the questions asked, she just said "Everything is by Master''s will."


    Did I end up creating a cult?


    "Ellen. I''ll tell you as the person who knows him the longest after his summon. The longer you know Roy, the more yourmon sense shattered. He might has somemon sense, but he choose to ignore it most of the time. Try to get used to it."


    "How can I get used to not usingmon sense?!"


    Ang said it as a matter of fact. She''s right though. Most of the things I taught everyone is notmon. Like how to improve magic level faster without the use of Magic Stones, or to control your magic better. But those are things that will be known in the future. I just taught them before the knowledge spread. I think some of them are knowledge that were discovered by Ang herself in the future. But now I''ll be the one who get the credit for it.


    Anyway, since Ellen is surprised by everything, it''s my time to annoy her. Since she keeps talking shit about me.


    "Hmm¡­ So you don''t know much even though you said you are experienced in this, huh? What''s all that experience used for if you only have questions, huh?"


    "Ugh¡­ shut up! I''ll can tell you about this dungeon that you don''t know of! Listen! This dungeon only has one path. Which means there''s just one way to the deepest part of this dungeon. And there''s no treasure here. The deeper you go, the stronger the monsters get. But at the deepest part, the strongest monster here is just orcs. This dungeon is well-known for being low leveled and easy to conquer. That''s why it''s not popr among hunters."


    She exined all she knows about the dungeon. That''s also the same information I got from Kast night. But as soon as I saw this dungeon, I know all they were wrong. The information is only half right. No. it may be even less than half right. But I won''t tell her she''s right no matter how little it is. She''s annoying after all.


    "You are wrong."


    "Why do you think I''m wrong? My party has conquered this dungeon twice already. First is because we found it interesting and the second is in case we missed anything during our exploration. And we found nothing different from the information that we got."


    "But none of you can stuck on the ceiling."


    "Isn''t that normal?"


    "Sophie. Light."


    "Huh? Okay."


    I asked Sophie to illuminate the ceiling to a part where I pointed at. It''s great that we have two light element magic. Ka who stay as the vanguard who keeps her light magic on and holding a spike in one hand, and Sophie who stays in the middle.


    As Sophie light the ceiling, everyone now can see there''s a hole on it. It might only be able to fit one person, but it is still a path everyone missed since the dungeon is dark.


    "There are many holes like this on the way. Inside, there are monsters and some of them are stronger than an orc. The path inside also branched. Although this one over here has no treasure inside, there''s a monster inside."


    "What?! How?!"


    "The dungeon we''re in is going down deeper and deeper. That means there are rooms above this path we walked. Then the path will be like a maze. No longer just like this floor we''re walking that only has one way to go."


    "Why didn''t you tell us? Don''t tell me you just wanted to annoy Ellen?"


    "Nope. There''s no need to tell anyone because the fastest route to a treasure chest is the one at the deepest area of this floor. There''s a hole in the ceiling that will lead us to a treasure chest right away."


    Ang is angry that I didn''t tell her from the start.


    "How can you know? Have you entered this dungeon before?"


    "No. it''s my first time here."


    "Then why don''t we just enter this one and explore the rest of the dungeon?"


    "The monster is stronger than orc. And the area is too narrow to use powerful magic. The girls need to be at least Intermediate level mage so they can damage them by using small magic. And your magic control is too weak despite being the strongest here. If you use the same magic that you used on the way to this dungeon, you will end up hurting us. SO our goal today is to get that treasure from the hole at the end of this floor, kill the monster that guard it, and leave. We can exploreter once we''re stronger and more prepared. After all there''s a lot more undiscovered treasure chests over there."


    "And how do you know that?"


    "Enough, Ellen. Like I said before, don''t use yourmon sense on him. Just get used to it."


    Ang told Ellen to stop asking too many questions. I guess she''s also irritated to hear so many questions.


    "In any case, it''s good that you''re joining us in this exploration. It means when we inform the guild about it, they won''t think that we''re lying just because we''re just a C-rank hunter party. Although Sophie is a D-rank and Victoria is E."


    "So you''re using me?"


    "Yes. You can also explore this dungeonter with your S-rank hunter friend you have. Who knows if you can get a legendary magic tool from here?"


    "¡­fine. So we will climb the hole after we reach the end of this floor?"


    "Yeah. I''ll enter it first and let you climb on Victoria."


    "Climb on Victoria? What the hell are you using a girl for?"


    Oh shit. I forgot that she''s extremely hostile especially against men who treat women lightly. Let''s show her that Victoria is not human.


    "Victoria. Please."


    "Okay."


    Victoria turned into a ck blob of slime and dropped just in front of Ellen.


    "Nice to meet you, Ellen. I''m Victoria. A ck slime. And I''m Roy''s summon. I can transform myself into anything. That''s what he meant by climbing on meter. I''ll just turn myself into a rope or adder."


    "What?! You''re a summoned monster?"


    "Yes, I am."


    After many times she irritate me with her hostility against me, it''s refreshing to see her surprised expression on the way here. And it''s way more interesting when she realize that Victoria is a slime.


    "Eh? She''s a slime? Then it can be exined how she can stuck herself on the wall and ceiling. But what about Roy? And how strong is he to be able tomand a slime with intellect that canmunicate with human? Then what about how he realize the treasure chests'' location? And about¡­"


    Ellen keep mumbling to herself. She has too many questions to ask. Why can''t she be a little bit like Luna? Today is her first time joining our party and she doesn''t have much to ask.


    I turned my eyes at Lina who smiled at me.


    Well, she''s at the level of worshipping me. Whatever I do or say is normal for her.


    All I did was just praised her a few times and she already worship me? She''s not right in the head. But her ability as a maid and her nt type monster is both exceptional.


    Let''s hope she won''t make a cult about it.


    "Since Ellen is busy mumbling to herself, let''s continue our march. All of you other than Lina already experienced battling orcs so I''ll leave the monsters in this floor to you."


    "Roy, what about the monster that''s guarding the treasure chest?"


    "That''s a Cyclops. It''s bigger and stronger than orc. But with how narrow the area it''s in, it doesn''t have much space to move. I can take care of it easily."


    And so, we continue deeper to the dungeon.

 Chapter 76 - Entering The Unexplored Path

    It was easy to continue our exploration with the monsters here. Even the strongest one is just an orc and we have experienced battle against orcs too many times. During our training, and also in the recent case of orc settlement.


    And this dungeon is too deep. Not the path we''re taking of course. What I''m thinking is the path that goes after entering a hole in the ceiling.


    I haven''t entered one yet, but I can see them clearly with my Divine Vision. That''s why I only told the girls to go to the deepest area of this floor and go up after that. The only strong monster there is a Cyclops.


    I don''t think the girls are able to defeat it yet since they are still a beginner level. But I can fight it. Especially in a closed space. I don''t know if Victoria is strong enough to defeat it alone since she can''t use aura, but she should be fine. Maybe I''ll help her a bit.


    Although it will be difficult to use a spear, I just need to break the spear near the tip and use it like a dagger.


    "That''s it. We have reached the end of the path. How do we get up there?"


    "I can climb first then transform Victoria into a rope. You just need to grab her and I will pull you up. The hole is too narrow to fit two people so don''t grab the rope at the same time."


    I answered Ang who wonders how to get up there. They are all excited to enter the unexplored path of the dungeon.


    They never seen any monsters on the ceiling. It was because Victoria and I cleared it up quickly. Most of them are just slimes so it was easy. And they are not that dangerous. Well, the most dangerous slime is my partner here. Other than her, I think there''s not many slimes that was too strong.


    As for Ellen, she seems to be preparing herself mentally since she heard that we have a Cyclops to fight. Well, usually, Cyclops are only seen on a mountain in outside. Not inside a dungeon.


    The one here must be born inside the dungeon. That''s why it can''t escape since the hole is too narrow and it can''t fit. It choose to stays in a room where the treasure chest is because it was the biggest room nearby.


    There are more and more strong monsters inside, but there''s only one Cyclops we will be facing. That''s why I choose this path inside of entering other path.


    And what''s more, the inside of the treasure chest is amazing! Those are multiple Magic Stones with various elements!


    There''s some fire element, wind, lightning, ice, earth, and even a rare healing magic stones!


    Usually, magic stones only appear in a ce filled with certain element. Like water magic stones under the sea, fire in the volcano, and such. So a healing element magic stones are extremely rare. There are no ce known to be the exact location where such magic stones appear.


    I can give the fire, wind, and ice to Ang, lightning to Sophie, and healing and earth to Ka.


    Since Ang already gotten three types, for the earth magic stones I think it''s fair if I give it to Ka. As for Lina, I have to apologize since there''s no summoning magic stones. Even if there''s one, I might end up using it to cultivate instead of giving it to her.


    Ellen? She didn''t do much so we can ignore her.


    There are also some other magic stones that I have never seen before inside that chest. I hope there are some air element magic stones.


    As everyone has rested enough, I climbed up the hole with Victoria. She had it easy as she can turn small and enter the hole easily. As for me, I have to crawl inside that hole.


    Victoria who has exited first, kill all the slimes there. As soon as I reached the end of the hole, she was just finished taking care of the slimes.


    "Aren''t they your cousins?"


    "No. My cousins are as beautiful as me."


    "So your cousins change their appearance ording to their own preference, huh?"


    "Yes. It was thanks to stic surgery."


    "What''s that? What''s stic and how a surgery rted to it?"


    "I don''t know much about how they do it. Let''s just say that it''s a surgery to change people''s appearance or heal a scar or w or even birthmark that people doesn''t want to have?"


    "Making old scar disappear? Doesn''t that sound like healing magic but through surgery? If I can learn it I might be able to get rich from female hunters or nobles who hates their scars, or freckles, or a birthmark."


    "But I don''t know how they do it. So good luck inventing it yourself."


    "Does stic surgery popr in your world?"


    "They turn fuglies into beauties. What do you think?"


    "But there''s one thing we needed, right? What''s stic?"


    "¡­ let''s stop thinking about it. I don''t want this beautiful world to be filled with trash."


    "What''s that mean?"


    "In my world, most of the trash that was thrown into the river or even sea, are made of stic. They are not an edible stuffs so it endangered the animals. And if stic is disposed by burning it, it will increase the risk of heart disease. It''s useful but harmful at the same time if not properly taken care of."


    "It''s that harmful? And you don''t know how to make it."


    "And I don''t know how to make it. But for healing an old scar or birthmark, there''s no need for stic I guess? You might need to use other part of your patients'' skin to cover the scar. And I heard that there''s a practice that use fish''s skin to cover a burnt skin. Good luck with that."


    Using fish skin on the burnt area? That''s interesting.


    "Even though you''re not a doctor, I can still learn a lot about medical expertise from your world. Please teach me more of what you know."


    "Sure. Although I don''t know everything, I can still give you some ideas. For now let''s finish this exploration."


    With that, we finished our chat. Then just like what I said before, she turned into a rope and I pulled everyone up to this side.


    "This is the unexplored area of the dungeon... and I''m the first one to enter here!"


    "No you''re not. I''m the first. Don''t forget about it. You''re just tagging along trying to show off your experience but you haven''t done anything at all other than asking too many questions."


    "Sorry. I was just excited."


    Hmm? She''s notshing at me like usual? I guess her attitude changed because of this exploration. I''m just d she stopped doing it.


    "After this passage, we will encounter a Cyclops. There''s also a treasure chests filled with magic stones of various elements. I''ll just give Ellen one of fire magic stones and the rest is for us, okay?"


    "Fine with me. Just one is enough evidence to show the guild. By the time we reported about this, there will be chaos in the guild. All the hunters will try to explore the new area and most treasure will be fought over.


    What about you? It will be difficult for a C-rank hunters to continue exploring this area."


    "Our goal has never been to conquer a dungeon in the first ce. We''re just here because we never entered one before. If they want to fight, let them fight each other. We have some business to attend tomorrow."


    "Not us. Just you. We will go sightseeing the city. You can go alone."


    "Just him? What is his business?"


    "Not important."


    "It is important! I''m just curious about the ghosts."


    I objected Ang that says it wasn''t important. Looking for a house is important.


    "What ghosts? Are you trying to buy that haunted building?"


    "Yes."


    "Are you crazy? All the previous owners choose to leave and nevere back after seeing the ghosts."


    "I''m interested to test if I can punch a ghost or not."


    "Is that why you''re going? Oh wait. I forgot to not usemon sense when talking with you. Do whatever you want. We might not meet again in the future after all. And if you''re cursed, don''t ever talk to me again."


    Curse, huh? I guess I forgot about that part. Well, whatever. Once I can''t hit the ghost, I will escape right away before the ghost curse me. Can aura protect me from curses?


    No wait! More importantly, why am I so entranced with that building? Don''t tell me the ghost already put a charm magic or curse on me when I see it before? To make me interested in the building?


    Shit. Now that I know, I have to go there even more. And when I do, the first thing I will do when I see a ghost is to punch it straight in the face.


    "Victoria? What''s wrong?"


    I heard Sophie called out to Victoria. What is she doing now?


    She''s just crouching and facing the wall with her hand holding her head. Does she really afraid of ghost?


    "No matter what I do I''ll just end up there. I can''t undo the contract. I have to face the ghost. How can I escape this fate."


    "You can''t. I''m bringing you tomorrow no matter what. Who knows if the ghosts over there are your old friends? They died and stay as a ghost in this world."


    "But ghosts are scary! I don''t believe in a friendly ghosts!"


    No matter how much she hates it, I''m taking her with me no matter what.

 Chapter 77 - Treasure, Get!

    "About the cyclops. It''s a particrly strong monster. Comparable with an Orc General. So for this fight, the participant will only be me, Victoria, Lina, and Sunny. Since the rest of you can get some shares from the treasures, us two summoners will get this turn."


    The content of the treasure chest containing various magic stones that suit the rest of the girls. So for the Cyclops, it''s the summoners'' turn. I need Victoria to defeat a whole lot powerful monster so I can increase my level. Thanks to the Orc Emperor, I''m already halfway in increasing her time. For defeating the Cyclops, it might not increase by much, but it''s important for her to defeat monster no matter how weak and how little it increase my summoning element is.


    As for Lina, since she only has a summoning element, and has always been Sam''s maid, she never had any experience in real fight against monsters other than today. Defeating the Cyclops should improve the level of her summoning element. Although I don''t think it''s enough for her to reach Intermediate level.


    The experience will be shared between the two of us, but that''s fine. Since she has chosen to stay with me, I can help her raise her level. Maybe if I find another Pear-y Fruit I can give it to her.


    "Alright. Good luck Lina! Sunny too!"


    "I wish you the best, Lina!"


    "I believe in you."


    "Hey! What about me?"


    Ang, Ka, and Sophie were just encouraging Lina. They don''t care about me at all.


    "Huh? You''ll be fine so we don''t need to say anything."


    "Don''t let Lina got hurt."


    "I believe in you."


    The treatment is totally different with me¡­ except for Sophie who keeps repeating the same words.


    Well, at least it means they have that much trust in me.


    "Let''s enter. Lina. Just tell Sunny to keep shooting at it."


    "Okay."


    "Are you sure it''s okay with just two summoners? I have seen Sunny''s performance but not yours. I think Victoria can fight well but I don''t know yet."


    Ellen seems to be hesitating about my n. Well, it''s her first ride with me so it''s understandable.


    "Just watch. The four of you just need to watch. The victor has already been decided."


    "You have that much confidence, huh? I guess I''ll just trust you."


    She has been docile since I show her the holes in the ceiling. After all she can''t stay hostile against someone who had been right all the time.


    "So I just have to let Sunny shoot the enemy?"


    "Yes. You just need to hold Sunny and keep shooting. The Cyclops doesn''t have anything to attack from distance. Just shoot it from a safe distance. Don''t worry about me. I can dodge Sunny''s seeds easily while Victoria doesn''t really take any damage."


    "Understood."


    We decided to face the Cyclops with this n.


    We continued walking on the passageway and finally we reached a bigger room. The length of the room is about 20 meter and it''s only 5 meter wide. The height is just about 4 meter. Which makes the 3 meter tall Cyclops have restricted movements.


    "There''s our Cyclops. You can see behind that thing that there''s a treasure chest. That''s our target in this exploration."


    "You''re right. Don''t tell me you have a see-through vision or something."


    "Yes I do. Ask me what color is the underwear you''re wearing and I can tell you the answer."


    "I was right! You''re just a pervert!"


    Oops! I shouldn''t have said that. Now she became hostile again toward me.


    "Well, let''s start the fight. You girls just stay and watch. Lina! Shoot!"


    "Okay!"


    Sunny started shooting its seeds. Does Sunny have unlimited seeds?


    Victoria and I also run toward the Cyclops. If the space is this big, I should be able to use my spear just fine. But I also want to improve my dagger technique so I keep using it that way.


    Feeling the seeds attacking it, the Cyclops didn''t take any damage. The Cyclops strength is almost as strong as the Orc General that I fought before so it was as expected that it takes no damage.


    But the seeds make it notice our existence. It knows that enemy ising.


    The Cyclops fight unarmed. It used its long arms to fight. But for Victoria and me, those punches are easy to evade. Especially in this closed space. It keeps hitting on the wall as we keep evading the Cyclops'' punches.


    I threw three throwing knives to its eye. Although its muscles is as strong as Orc General, its eye is not as strong. Just throwing knives are enough to damage it. Even more, since Cyclopes only have one eye, those knives already took away that monster''s vision.


    Victoria and I keep shing at the blinded Cyclops. Although it will be easy to finish if I stab it like how I finished the Orc General, we choose this style of fighting to improve ourselves.


    Victoria with her Katana cut open a long wound on the Cyclops, while I use my dagger and aura to make a deeper wound. We keep doing it until the Cyclops unable to move any longer.


    It was easier than Orc General since the Cyclops has difficulty in this closed area. Thanks to its size, its movements are restricted a lot and easily predicted. That''s how we killed it easily.


    "Well, that was easy."


    "No, it''s not! Cyclopes are monsters that needed at least an advanced level mage to defeat! But you not only are still a beginner level. You also didn''t use any magic and fight closebat with it! You are insane!"


    "How was it, Lina?"


    "I''m fine. But mentally exhausted. I never thought you can defeat it without using magic."


    "Well, if you''re with me, you will see more unexpected things. Try to get used to it like Ang, Ka, and Sophie did."


    I looked at Sunny who''s being carried by Lina.


    "Oh, look! Sunny seems to has grown bigger!"


    "Yes! I can feel that Sunny is happy. Sunny also started dancing."


    I see the stalk keeps moving. Is that dancing? I guess Sunny is happy with its own growth.


    "Let''s go check the treasure chest."


    I opened the treasure chest and I can see a lot of magic stones there.


    "They''re really magic stones. And the qualities are high! How did you know? Was it really see-through vision?"


    "You doubted me? That''s normal I guess. Here''s one fire magic stone for you. As for the rest, we''ll share it at the inn."


    "Okay. It was interesting to explore a dungeon. Let''s do it again sometime!"


    "But after we reported about this dungeon, it will be crowded by hunters who wanted to seek treasures. So it will be difficult to enter again soon."


    "But I don''t think they can get anything yet at the moment. The hole we entered is quite slippery since many slimes used it. It will be a while until someone other than us can get a treasure. They also need to fight monsters like the Cyclops. It will be difficult for average hunters."


    "You''re also leaving for the capital soon, right? So we can''t enter it at least until you returned here."


    "You''re right."


    After checking on the ghosts tomorrow, I nned to go to the capital the next day alone. I hope the ghosts problem can be solved so I can buy that building and let the girls stay there.


    I need to go to the capital to report about the Evil God Cult to the king. And I need to do it stealthily. No one must know who I am. I also need to disguise myself so the king won''t know who I am.


    "Master, you''re going to the capital? Do you need me to go with you?"


    "I need to go alone. Sorry I can''t take you with me. But I want you to take care of our new house as soon as we buy it. I''ll go check on it tomorrow."


    "Understood. I''ll make it as clean as possible."


    "I knew I can count on you!"


    "Of course!"


    She''s as cute as usual after getting praised.


    Meanwhile Ellen seems to be deep in thoughts.


    "Hey, Ka. Can I ask you a favor?"


    "What is it?"


    "I''m going to inform my party about the unexplored area. When we decided to explore this dungeon again I want you toe with us. We don''t have any light element magic to give us light."


    "Hmm?"


    Instead of answering, Ka just looked at me. Asking for my permission.


    "You can do whatever you want while I''m going to the capital. But once I return here don''t forget that we will go back to Melk soon."


    "Then I will go."


    "Great!"


    "On one condition!"


    Of course I would put a condition to this. I can''t let anything bad happen to Ka.


    "She can go only if you promise to do anything it takes to protect her from danger. If it''s only at the level of orcs, she can fight it just fine. But there are Cyclops in the unexplored areas. You have to protect her even with your life on the line! If you can''t do that, ask someone else."


    "Of course that''s a given! Did you forget that we have an S-rank hunter in our party?"


    "I don''t. But can your party use a powerful small magic like my party did? Using a strong magic without control will only damage yourself and your surroundings. Can that S-rank of yours do it?"


    "¡­ I don''t know."


    "Roy. Can I teach them how to control their magic? I will only follow them once they passed an eptable level of control."


    "Sure then. You can ask Ang to help you teach them since she''s better at it."


    "Only if they ask me to join the exploration¡­ Is what I want to say. But in a closed space, it will be hard to explore with too many members. I''ll just stay in the city and cultivate with those magic stones we just got."


    "Then that''s that. If their control is not good enough, don''t join them."


    "Okay!"


    "That''s good. Let''s return now. We have been here for a while."


    Seems like they have their own n now. Ang and Sophie will try to improve their magic with the help of magic stones. Ka will teach Ellen''s party about magic control. And Lina will take care of our new house.


    I hope I can punch those ghosts away from that building.

 Chapter 78 - News Spread Too Quickly In The Guild

    "You found an unex- hmph!"


    "SSH! DON''T BE TOO LOUD! IT WILL MAKE RUCKUS HERE!"


    "You''re way louder than her!"


    We report our finding to the guild receptionist as soon as we got back to the city, and she almost tell everyone in the guild about it. So I have to cover her mouth with my hand and told her to be quiet. But I was louder than her so Ang yelled at me.


    "I apologize for my manner. Pleasee to the guild master room. This information is too much too handle for me alone."


    "Understood."


    The receptionist told us to follow her to the guild master room because this is an important matter that can''t be handled poorly.


    Telling the guild that there''s an unexplored area in a dungeon that has been found for over a hundred years is too much of a surprise.


    The dungeon we explored has been discovered for a long time. And since the path inside is obvious, it was named Linear Dungeon. Because there''s only one path to take. Whether you enter or exit, it''s the only path that exist.


    Then one day, a group consisting of an extremely handsome man surrounded by beauties suddenly reported that there are many paths in the ceiling leading to treasures.


    We followed the receptionist to the guild master''s room and tell the guild master about our finding.


    "So those holes in the ceiling actually led a way to treasures? How did you enter it? We already know about those holes for a long time, but only thought that those holes are for slimes to spawn. How did you enter it? Unless you can fly."


    "We didn''t fly. My summon is also a special type of slime that can transform into any object. I let it climb the hole and transform into a rope. Then we climb it like normal."


    "Is that so? Can you show me your summon?"


    "Okay."


    Victoria eight now is no longer in her human form. She''s a grappling hook attached to my right arm just like usual.


    I showed the guild master my right arm and let Victoria transform into a blob of slime.


    "This is interesting. A shape-shifting slime. First time I''ve seen it."


    The guild master of Cassau guild amazed to see Victoria. Meanwhile Ellen looked confused why I didn''t tell the guild master that I can stuck on the wall and ceiling.


    Maybe after she thought to herself that it was impossible to make him believe it until he sees it for himself, she keep her mouth shut. Or maybe she thinks I want to keep my ability as secret.


    "Thanks for your information. But if this report spread to the hunters, the number of hunters who want to enter the dungeon will skyrocket. Even if it''s difficult to climb it, there will be many hunters who want to give it a try."


    "That''s not my problem. Can we leave now?"


    "Oh, right. Sorry for holding you this long. But the guild will soon give request to the hunters about the dungeon''s unexplored area so if possible, we would like to hire your party. And there might be a name change from Linear Dungeon to another name."


    "Just change it to Non-Linear Dungeon. As for your request, I''m going to the capital the soon so I can''t participate. Ellen said she wants to tell her party to go. Just ask her."


    I can''t go because I''m going to have a meeting with the king. And when I said a meeting, it means sneaking into his bedroom and have a private chat.


    "Alright. Ellen, your party will try to conquer this dungeon?"


    "Yes. My party and Ka here will try to conquer it. But we need fit the conditions that Ka put before we enter it."


    What she means by conditions is that they need to learn magic control into a passable level ording to Ka. Because of the narrow area, it will be difficult to conquer it if Ellen''s party only know how to use powerful spell. It will only hurt themselves if they use powerful spell. And they have to make sure Ka is safe even at the cost of their lives.


    "What condition¡­ I guess it''s something personal. I won''t ask any further. But if you take too long before you enter the dungeon, I will inform all the hunters here about the dungeon."


    "That''s fine. After all there''s an S-rank hunter in my party. No matter who tried topete with us, we won''t back down!"


    "Okay. I''ll give you two weeks before I inform the hunters about this."


    "I think you don''t need to care about that."


    I interrupted their conversation.


    "What do you mean?"


    "I mean that receptionistdy over there has told another receptionist about this before we get here. Although I already shut her mouth before, the gossipy nature of hers is too much to handle. I believe the one she spokes to have already told some hunters about this."


    "What?!"


    The guild master then looked at the receptionist who enters the room with us.


    "Do you know what you have done?! You will make that dungeon cramped with greedy hunters! There will be fight over treasures because you can''t handle it in proper manner!"


    "I''m sorry!"


    "You... there''s a Cyclops inside that hole! If inexperienced hunters enter it, although it''s difficult, there will be some that can climb the holes. And because of those small holes, it will be difficult for those hunters to escape once they enter. They will be prey to Cyclops and who knows what other type of monsters there!"


    "If we''re done here then I''ll leave, okay? Bye!"


    Feeling that there won''t be any need of me staying here any longer, I decided to leave.


    "Ah! Thank you for reporting! We will reward you for this findings. But we need some time to think of a proper reward. We will give you the reward after I inform the guild HQ about this."


    "I''m going to the capital soon. So if I haven''t returned yet, just give the reward to any of my party members."


    "Understood. Thank you very much."


    All of us left the guild master room leaving only the guild master and the receptionist inside.


    On the way to the exit, I can see many hunters looking at us. Seems like there are too many gossipy receptionists in this guild.


    As we were about to leave, one man blocked the exit.


    "Hey, are you the one who find the unexplored area in Linear Dungeon?"


    "Nope. Wrong person."


    "Oh? Okay. Sorry."


    "It''s fine. No problem"


    "He''s lying! He''s the one who told Serena!"


    "One thing for sure is that the receptionists in this guild will be punished by the guild master for spreading unconfirmed rumor."


    "Hiiii!"


    One of the receptionists suddenly shout out that I''m lying. How unprofessional of them. And that Serena I guess is the one who is being reprimanded right now in the guild master room.


    "So you''re lying! How dare you!"


    "I''m not lying! Those area has been found a long time ago but no one tried to enter them before except me and my party."


    "Oh I see. So you''re not lying."


    He''s so gullible! I wonder if Daniel grows up, he will be like this man here. I hope that won''t be the case.


    And I can''t hate people with this personality. I guess I need to give him some advice.


    "Listen here. The unexplored area is filled with monsters stronger than orcs. If you value your life, please listen to the guild master''s pointer before you enter it. Otherwise, it''s just a suicide mission."


    "Okay. You''re a kind man."


    "Thank you. I know I am, but listening to other people saying it to me feels good."


    "I know. When someone praise me, I also feel good."


    "Alright, I''m leaving. Goodbye!"


    "Bye-bye!"


    I found a new friend today!


    Wait! I don''t know his name yet! Does that count as a friend?


    Anyway, I hope nothing happens to him. He''s such an interesting guy.


    "Then I''ll also take my leave. I have to report this to my party. Ka, I''ll contact you tomorrow."


    "Okay. See you tomorrow!"


    Ellen also leave her own way to tell her party members about the dungeon. Now she has topete with many other hunters over the treasures.


    "ELLEEEN! HELLOOOO!"


    As she leaves, I heard a familiar voice calling out to her. I used my Divine Vision to look at her without turning my head back. Then I see a familiar face.


    She''s the loud girl from before! And she''s louder than back then when she asked for help!


    I guess her being here means that she''s safe. And her vige should be safe because I gave her some hints. But I don''t want to get involved with her. Not with how loud she is. So I walked away without looking at her while the girls are looking at her curiously.


    She seems to know Ellen. Maybe it was Ellen''s party that helped her before. Good for her.


    But if she''s here, there''s a chance that we will meet again. I don''t know if my eardrums can handle her or not. That''s why I choose to leave without greeting her. I don''t even know her name so I guess we''re just stranger.


    Before we reach the inn, Victoria spoke to me.


    "Roy. Before we return to the inn, let''s buy some charms to exorcise ghosts."


    "Huh? Aren''t you also a ghost? If we think about it, you have died a long time ago. Then you be a ghost that possessed Blobby."


    "No I''m not! I''m reincarnated!"


    "How can you tell?"


    "I can''t! I just don''t want to be a ghost!"


    What a difficult partner I have¡­

 Chapter 79 - Old Friend

    Now it''s time for ghost hunting!


    It was only me, Lina, and Blobby who enters the haunted building.


    Lina asked the key from the seller and the seller happily give it to us when we said he doesn''t need toe. We just said we want to check the building before deciding to buy it.


    "Lina. You don''t need toe if you''re afraid."


    I can see clearly that her hand that holding the key is shaking. She''s afraid but still choose toe. Even Victoria choose to not appear and let Blobby takes control. But in the end, their memory is shared. Victoria can see what Blobby sees.


    "I''lle with you. I''m the one who suggested this building after all."


    "That''s very brave of you. But I don''t want anything happen to you so¡­"


    "I''lle with you¡­"


    She said with her voice shaking. I guess she is worried about me.


    "Fine. You cane. But stay close behind me at all time, okay?"


    "Okay!"


    She stuck behind me and her chest is touching my back. Awesome!


    But I can''t move freely if she''s holding the hem of my sleeve like this.


    "You can grab the hem of my shirt. That way my movement won''t be restricted much."


    "Okay!"


    Now there''s a bit distance from her body. Her chest no longer touching my back. What a shame. I should have told herter.


    We enter through the front door. There are not many people outside at the moment, but usually, whenever someone entered this building, they would watch them with great interest. That''s also why I choose toe here in the morning when people are not around.


    "Excuse me! Is there any ghost I can talk to here? Bring me a ghost that can speak humannguage!"


    I entered the haunted building and asked to see a ghost that I can have a conversation with. It might be weird¡­ no. It is weird to do this. But I don''t have any other way to exorcise ghosts. I just entered the building boldly and challenge the ghosts here. I haven''t used my aura yet since I don''t know if it can work or not. I will try to hit it with a normal attack first.


    "Who dares to enter this building? You will suffer for eternity!"


    Here ites! Back then I saw about five ghosts here. And all of them areing right now. The leader of the ghosts must be the one in the middle. The one with the upper half of a woman that keep floating. The rest have men''s appearances.


    That she-ghost is the one who talked. While the rest¡­ I don''t know if they can talk or not. They just waiting for the she-ghost''s order.


    "Who are y-"


    "HUACHAAA! Oh? I can''t hit her."


    Instead of waiting for her response, I just swung my fist at her. It went through her body.


    "You dare to hit me? How dare you lowly mage- GUAGH!"


    "Oh? I can hit her if I used aura? Then it will be easy."


    "Wait wait wait wait wait! How can you touch me?"


    "I''m using aura."


    I answered her as I prepared to swing my next punch.


    "Aura? You''re not a mage?"


    "My magic level is still weak so I mainly used aura. Were you an aura user in the past?"


    "Yes I was. And I was pretty popr- hey! Stop trying to punch me!"


    "I don''t have any interest in your past. Now that I know I can use aura to hit you, I will destroy all you ghosts who put a curse on me!"


    "Wait! What curse?!"


    "After gaining aura, my special ability is my vision. I defeated All-seeing Eye to get it. Do you get it now? I used my eye to see into this building about three days ago and since then, I was obsessed in purchasing this building. Knowing my personality, being obsessed with a haunted building is not something that should happen to me. So my guess is that there''s a curse or charm magic that has been cast on me when I peeked inside this building. Then I know now that I can hit you with aura, I''ll exorcise every ghosts here."


    "Wait! Stop! Please! We can talk about it! I don''t want to die even though I already dead!"


    "Shouldn''t it be that since you''re already dead, you''re experienced in¡­ dying?"


    "Wait! I know what happened to you and it was unintentional! Please let''s have a chat! I can also undo the charm magic on you but it might takes time! If you kill me, the charm magic can be permanent!"


    "¡­fine. Exin."


    Looks like we can converse with the ghost. Since we no longer need to fight, I can let Lina walk on her own. No longer need to grab my shirt.


    "Lina, since I don''t need to fight anymore, you can let go now."


    "No."


    "¡­wanna hold my hand?"


    "Yes."


    Lina let go of my shirt and hugged my arm. I can feel her chest touching!


    "¡­damn riajuu."


    "Wait! Where did you learn that word?!"


    I heard something familiar from she-ghost. It was what Victoria called me before!


    "Riajuu? From a friend-"


    "Sonia! Is that you, Sonia?!"


    "This voice! Victoria? Is that you, Victoria?! Where are you?!"


    "Over here!"


    Victoria left my arm and returned into her blob form.


    Does she knows the ghost? Don''t tell me I was right when I joked about the ghost being Victoria''s old friend?


    "Victoria! You''re a slime!"


    "And you''re a ghost!"


    "Don''t tell me, that ghost is your old friend?"


    "Umm¡­ yeah. More like we were both disciples of my master."


    "Alright. I understand. We need to have a chat but before that¡­ Lina, can you please go to the seller and purchase this building for me? Please do it before he knows the situation is under control and they want to raise the price."


    "¡­"


    "Lina? Please. I can only count on you."


    "¡­will you praise meter?"


    "I will praise you whenever you want."


    "Okay. I''ll be back soon."


    She really wants me to praise her that much? I already know but she must really loves to be praised by me.


    "Now, let''s return to the topic. That ghost is your fellow disciple and she knows how to lift the curse she casted on me unintentionally?"


    "Hmm¡­ where do we start?"


    Victoria slowly tells me the story about her rtionship with the ghost in the past.


    That ghost used to be Sonia. A fellow disciple of Victoria. And they were rival as well. Maybe that''s how Sonia learned about words like riajuu.


    Victoria was a beautiful girl. I can see that Sonia is quite beautiful as well. Don''t tell me her humanoid form is the real Victoria?


    "Hup! This was my real form in the past life."


    She changed into her humanoid form but there are few differences than her usual form. It''s just her legs are shorter, her chest and butt is smaller, her face is not that different from usual. I guess she only changed some parts that she doesn''t like, huh?


    "Well, except she wasn''t all ck like this. She also usually wear brighter colored dress."


    Said Sonia who knows about Victoria in the past.


    Sonia was jealous of Victoria. Especially when her crush had a crush on Victoria. But Victoria doesn''t like him.


    Trying to win him over, Sonia ended up needed to defeat a subus for her special ability to manifest.


    "So that''s where the charm magice from¡­ have you finished undoing it yet?"


    "I''m halfway there. I''m not as proficient in this as back when I''m still alive."


    The story goes and they have grown up and live separately. Away from each other and never heard anything from the other.


    "It''s done. Now I will continue the story."


    Sonia finished undoing her charm magic casted on me. Now I don''t have any obsession toward this building anymore. But what is it that makes me charmed toward this building? Not on her?


    It was because she died in this ground. It was thisnd that I get charmed by. But since it was still her magic, she can still undo it.


    "How did you die? And how did you end up being a ghost? Along with those four ghosts over there?"


    "I died after getting seduced by a mage. That mage had ulterior motives to kill all aura user. That is why I hate mages in general. I already had many lovers back then. The ones who still stay with me are these ghosts hanging around with me all the time. They can''t speak now that they''re ghost. I''m the only one who can. On myst breath, I casted a powerful charm magic in hope that mage will be seduced and tried hard make me survive. But it didn''t work on him. Instead, it was thisnd that my magic worked. Then somehow, I and my lovers ended up bing ghosts and whoever see or walk thisnd, they will be charmed by my magic. Someone got charmed and built this ce. Since I don''t want to stay in the wild, I let him build this ce and once the building is finished, I scared him to death. Ever since then, whoever bought this ce will be chased away whenever I got bored since I can''t leave this ce."


    So that''s why I got charmed by this building. Wait!


    "That mage who killed aura user! Was that the same mage who killed you as well, Victoria?"


    "Maybe. He said he wants to kill all aura user. So after he killed Sonia, he should be going to another aura user one by one until he ended up killing me."


    "Sonia? Do you know who that mage is?"


    "I don''t remember much, but after I died, before this ce was built, there was a rumor about an Evil God who massacred strong people. If those strong people are aura user, then¡­"


    That means the Evil God is the one who hunted aura user. Then someone at this very moment is trying to be Evil God himself, or maybe even revive the real Evil God.


    Worst case scenario, he''s reincarnated just like Victoria, and slowly trying to get his power back and conquer the world.


    Destroying the cult bing harder and harder now.

 Chapter 80 - Another One?

    "Does this mean we''re up against someone from the past who killed every single aura user?"


    "What are you talking about?"


    I was just guessing the identity of the one behind Evil God Cult, and Sonia curious about it. So Victoria told her about the fact that I returned back in time thanks to the ability of the ck slime.


    "I''m also curious about the truth about this ck slime. How can this slime has the ability to let someone go back into the past? Then the fact that Victoria never appears in my past life as well. We can only guess about this. Maybe if Blobby can talk, she will tell us something. Victoria, can Blobby talk or not?"


    "I don''t know. Ever since I was reincarnated in this ck slime, I nevermunicate with Blobby. In fact I always be the one in control until you summoned me and make me your contracted monster. After that, I need to defeat a lot of monsters to be able to have more time in control of this body. I knew that this slime has the ability to turn back in time, but I could never use it in the past. There are also many other abilities that were locked until Roy''s summoning element level improved."


    There''s too many things I don''t know about. Like the truth behind the Evil God Cult, and about the ck Slime and how Victoria''s soul ended up in the body of that ck Slime.


    I only got this far depending solely on knowledge of the events that''s going to happen and my own body. There are also several other things that were different from my past life, so I can''t always depend on my memory of my past life.


    More importantly, at the moment, there''s something I have to do.


    "Now that reunion time is over, let''s exorcise some ghosts."


    "No! I want to live even though I''m already dead!"


    "That''s two things I never would have thought to be said in a sentence."


    "Wait, Roy! Why don''t we let her be and be the guardian of this building? She can help chasing away intruder."


    "But won''t they be charmed by thisnd ande again?"


    "I''ll try to undo the magic I casted in thisnd!"


    "Then there''s the fact that there are four ghosts of men here. I will live with my girlfriends here so I don''t want them to peek on my girls. I''ll exorcise them and let you alone live."


    "Nooo! Is there any other choices?"


    "Nope. It''s either you alone survive or all of you get exorcised."


    "Ugh! Fine¡­ I want to continue living."


    "Alright. You''ve made your choice."


    I approached the male ghosts one by one and exorcise them with my aura.


    "Ghost Killer Punch!"


    "Darling!"


    "Ghost Killer Kick!"


    "Honey!"


    What? So she has nicknames for each of her lover.


    "Ghost Killer Head-butt!"


    "My Trophy!"


    "Wait, what?!"


    The ghost Sonia said some weird nickname to the third ghost I exorcised.


    "He''s used to be someone else''s boyfriend until I stole him away from her."


    "And you called him your trophy?"


    "Yes."


    "What about thest one, then? Ghost Killing¡­ what else is there? Ghost Killing Knee Strikes!"


    "Mr. Handsome with perfect smile!"


    "Too long!"


    I killed all the other ghosts leaving only Sonia alone behind. Although I just killed her lovers and she screamed out their names, I don''t think she feels sad at all.


    "You''re not sad at all even though I just killed your lovers?"


    "They were just men I toyed with. I have no real affection toward them."


    "They died and stayed here for nothing if you said that. Now what to do with you? I can''t just let you stay here without doing anything."


    Even though I told her I will let her live(?) I don''t know what to do with her.


    "For now try to leave this ce."


    "I can''t. I''m stuck in this building. At first I was stuck in thisnd, then they built this ce and I can only stuck in this building."


    "If you can''t do anything, I''ll exorcise you."


    "I can help you take care of any trespasser! I''ll be the watch dog of this ce!"


    Did she just say she''s willing to be a dog? That mean I not only have a unique summon, I will also have a unique watch dog.


    "If you don''t want me to exorcise you, you have to lift the spell that you cast on this area! You will undo your charm magic you casted in this ce!"


    "Sorry, I can''t!"


    "If you can''t do it I will exorcise you!"


    "Hiiiii! I''ll try my best! I don''t know how long will it be, but I''ll do it!"


    A ghost who''s afraid of a living being. That''s funny.


    "Roy, aren''t you too harsh on her?"


    "I think so too. But she''s already casted her magic on me. Even though it''s unintentional, I already decided that she''s hostile and I won''t hold back against her."


    "Well, if that''s what you want, I won''t say anything else."


    "What about you? I thought you two were rival?"


    "Only she thinks that way. She had a crush toward a man who had a crush on me. I rejected him so many times and that''s why she thinks I''m her love rival. I don''t like him one bit though."


    "Why?"


    "He''s an aura user. And at the time, most of aura user has a body even bigger than the guards of Mellian city that you taught. Men with big muscles are not my taste so I thought of being single my whole life. I prefer someone like you. Muscr but slim. Instead of someone with biceps bigger than a girl''s waist."


    Damn! If they''re bigger than Mellian city''s guards, then aura user of the past are all beasts!


    Well, size doesn''t matter! What''s matter is usefulness! That''s what matter most!


    Wait! I forgot something important!


    "Victoria, did you just say you prefer someone like me?"


    "Yes I did."


    "Was that a confession?"


    "Yes. But you only need to say yes once I can fully take control of this slime at all time. I can only stay a little past 12 hour at the moment. Once I can be in control, I''ll be your lover."


    "That''s great! But¡­ is this how easy to get lovers?"


    Victoria admitted that it was a confession but I need to answer only after she can fully take control of the ck slime.


    But¡­ first is Ka. Then Sophie. And now Victoria. If this is how easy to get a lover then¡­


    "Howe I can get three girlfriends in just a few months but I could only stay single for a whole lifetime!"


    "You have terrible luck."


    "You don''t have any charm as a man in your past life."


    "Shut up and do your job, you shitty ghost watch dog! Or I''ll exorcise you!"


    "I''m sorry!"


    I yelled in anger because both Victoria and Sonia because they were right.


    I had terrible luck with women that I have to endure dozens of times being rejected. I alsocked charm. I mean I''m not that ugly, but no one wanted someone without confidence.


    I guess I was too timid in the past. I never had any confidence.


    I used to only had one element, and my summon is Blobby. I had to try my hardest to be able to survive, but with how weak I was, I didn''t have any confidence.


    Then as I manage to collect money, I tried to go to medical school, but I was the oldest student there. In fact, there are many professor who''s younger than me. I was around 30 years old at that time, and most of the students are those who had just finished their introductory school. Which means most of them are around 16 years old.


    Surrounded by people around half my age and richer than me, I lost more my confidence.


    Then as I finished medical school, no hospital will ept me because I was too old.


    It was wayter after I thought of using Blobby as weapon and identally managed to be able to use aura, my confidence raised.


    Then the stupid me decided to join the war and died soon. I died because of overconfidence.


    That is why I''m a coward now. A coward by choice, not by nature.


    I gained aura and its special ability, get a lot of friends and allies, but I still choose to be a coward.


    Like how I killed the Orc Emperor. I can defeat it on my own, but I choose to stick with the others and get everyone''s help. If I do it alone, I don''t think I can finish it unscathed. I will most likely be injured greatly.


    And fighting the All-seeing Eye without using magic or have anypanion, I took care of that after sparring with it for a few days. And even after all that nning, I almost lost one of my arm.


    That''s why being a coward is a good thing since I can find more way to survive.


    I guess that''s what makes me different from my past life.


    Back then before I gain aura, I was just a man without any confidence. I was also so stupid that I dare to confess to multiple girls. Those were not bravery, just stupidity.


    But now, I''m a confident coward.


    I''m confident that I can escape through any danger.


    Then when I''m with the others, I only made decisions that will make them stronger but won''t push them too hard. And I made sure that they will be safe.


    Confidence do changes people. Even though I''m a coward, I still have three girls confessed their feelings to me.


    But for three girls to fall for me¡­ it was way too surprising.

 Chapter 81 - A New Aura Teacher

    Right now, we were waiting for Lina toplete the transaction to purchase this building. Since we now have managed to¡­ subdue Sonia, we won''t get attacked by the ghosts anymore. The other four ghosts are all disappear with my Godly Ghost Killing Skills.


    Sonia right now is trying to undo the magic she casted on thisnd back when she was on her deathbed. It was really strong since the magic hasn''t been weakened even after thousands of years.


    Victoria is telling Sonia while she''s working that she came from another world, and the words that she taught Sonia like riaju areing from that world. Let''s ignore the fact that Victoria is trying to bring Sonia to bing fujoshi like her.


    Sonia also seem to have a lot to tell about thest thousands of years she stuck in this ce. Although she said they were rivals, they seen to be getting along just like sisters. A


    "By the way, why was I not affected by your charm magic like the others in the past? I know I ended up getting obsessed by this ce, but when it happened to other people, they got it worse, right? And I somehow realized I was charmed and try to fight it."


    I asked Sonia why I''m not affected as much as other people when I heard that many people has bought this building because of her charm.


    "Yeah. Usually those who are affected won''t throw a punch at me right away. They ended up getting scared and try to negotiate with me. Then as I absorbed their life force little by little, when their condition got worse, they will sold this ce again."


    "Wait! Why are you absorbing life force when you''re already dead?"


    "It helped me maintain the ghosts of my four lovers. Actually I had more before, but since they needed life force to stay in this world, one by one they disappear until there are only four left. Those four are the ones who got seduced by me the most."


    "And now they have gone you don''t think much about them anymore. And won''t it be terrible if you stay and suck my life force? I think it''s better if you just disappear."


    "No! Please, no! I don''t need to suck life force anymore since I don''t have anyone left! All the ghosts with me are already dead. I''m here because of the magic I casted in thisnd! Please don''t exorcise me!"


    Sonia''s begging me to not exorcise her. But I can''t trust her yet.


    "Victoria. Can I trust her words?"


    "I think you can. Although she''s annoying, she''s actually pretty reliable. If she says she won''t do it, then she won''t."


    "I don''t know. I mean you only know her from back when she was still alive thousands years ago. Who knows how she is right now after a long time?"


    "Then believe in me who believes in her!"


    What the heck is this slime saying?


    "You lied to me about the meaning of riaju and fujoshi."


    "Ugh! Just let her stay for her usefulness, please! Then I will add more time in hunting more monsters!"


    Victoria begged me to let Sonia stays.


    "Why are you like this?"


    "Why won''t I be like this? She''s the only one left who know about me when I was still alive! Don''t you have anyone like that? You were time traveled to the past so you should at least have someone that you can depend on, right?"


    "I had one. But at the moment she hasn''t been born yet. And who knows if she can still be born again after I changed the future?"


    "¡­LOLICON! This guy is a lolicon!"


    "Again¡­ another word I don''t know appear from her mouth."


    "It means someone who loves minor!"


    "No! I''m not a pedophile! She was twenty when I met her when I was forty! Which means she will be born in five years unless I changed the future too much that she won''t be born in the future. And I know her through her husband who was my patient. They built an orphanage together and I often go there for checkup on the kids."


    "I see. But you''re still an adult from the future who makes someone in her fifteen as his lover!"


    "And you''re a thousand years old granny who just confessed to that guy who is not even a tenth of your age!"


    "¡­ let''s stop this conversation before it gets any worse."


    "You started it! Anyway, fifteen years old are already considered as adult so it''s fine."


    I just asked why I''m not affected too much by charm magic, then it turned into exorcising Sonia again, then it got into this?! We have strayed too much from the topic.


    "I''ll ask again. Why am I not affected too much by the charm magic?"


    "Maybe because you were travelled back to the past? Mean your mentality is too strong. My charm magic doesn''t work well on those with strong mental defense. Most aura user have strong mental defense, but you''re stronger than that. I can still charmed those aura user in the past, but it doesn''t affect you that much."


    "I understand. I mean he even has Shameless Survival Arts. Those who proudly say he''s shameless have strong mental defense."


    Hearing Victoria''s exnation about my shamelessness, I also agree with her.


    "It''s good that I''m shameless then."


    "Why are you so happy about it?"


    Before I answer Sonia, the door to the building is opened. I saw Lina looks like she has already finished the transaction and she also bring the others.


    I told them about the fact that Sonia was a fellow disciple of Victoria. Then Victoria introduce her to everyone.


    "Since we have bought this building, you can choose which room you want. By the way mine is the biggest room in the third floor."


    "You already picked yours?"


    "Since I''m the leader, of course I picked the biggest room. My harem might increase as well. I mean Victoria just confessed today."


    "Really?! I knew you will join soon!"


    "Let''s get along, Victoria."


    Said Sophie and Ka respectively.


    "Yeah. Thanks you two. But I refuse to hear his answer yet until I can fully take control of this slime. Although the answer is obvious, I won''t do anything a lover do yet. I might regret it a lot during the time I''m not in control if we do things like lovers. Although I''m not in control, my mind still works."


    "Then it just need time, right? I''ll be going to the capital tomorrow. You can stay here, catching up with your old friend, and hunt some monster if you have the time. I''ll just summon you once I get there."


    "Okay!"


    Victoria now used her humanoid form that she usually takes instead of taking her real form back when she was still alive. It makes Sonia mad knowing the one she called as her rival can change her shape however she wanted.


    The others, although they haven''t gotten used to talking to a ghost, knowing that the ghost is an old friend of Victoria, they slowly epted her.


    Well, Ka and Sophie are both doing fine talking to her normally. Sam pretend to not see Sonia. Lina is holding my arm as she sits next to me, while Ang¡­ she''s talking from the kitchen while we were talking in the living room.


    "Ang! Sonia doesn''t bite!"


    "She might not bite! But she can curse! She just casted a curse on your beloved before, Ka!"


    "Ang, we talked to a slime on daily basis. So why can''t you talk to a ghost?"


    "A ghost and a slime are different!"


    Ka failed to persuade Ang out of the kitchen.


    "It will take time until she can get used to Sonia. More importantly, I thought you girls are trying to teach Ellen''s party how to improve their magic control?"


    "They refused. Even with Ellen''s approval, they think it''s embarrassing to be taught by a beginner level mage and a C-rank hunters. They choose to enter the dungeon right away this morning. I think I''ll just stay here and cultivate my magic. We got a lot of high quality magic stones after all."


    "Can they climb the slippery holes?"


    "Someone among them can fly. And she''s quite slim so it won''t be too hard for them. She will bring a rope with her. That''s what Ellen told me. I just let Ang taught Ellen the basic of magic control in case something unexpected happened."


    "Okay. They are really narrow-minded despite having an S-ranker with them. Or maybe because they have one, they don''t want to listen to anyone else?"


    But this way, I can hope for their growth after I got back from the capital. I''ll go alone by foot since it will be faster. But it might still take three days at most to get there.


    "Oh, Sam! What about the unknown magic stones? Have you find an appraiser?" I asked Sam.


    "Not yet. And even if I found one, they need to be someone we can trust."


    "Sigh¡­ I wish these eyes can appraise things."


    "You might be able to."


    "What?!"


    I was surprised to hear a response from Sonia. I forgot that she''s also an aura user just like Victoria in the past.


    "If you defeat more monsters that have special ability in their visions, you might be able to evolve your own special ability."


    "Really! I never know that! Our master never told us that part. Have you experienced it yourself?"


    "Not me, idiot. You. Back when your special ability manifested, your wings is really small. Barely enough to lift your own weight. Then after you defeat more flying monsters, your wings grow bigger andst time I seen it, there were 3 pairs of wings behind your back."


    "Really?! I thought that was because I''m getting better in using aura!


    Victoria surprised to hear how her wings grows in the past


    "That might helped, but I''ve seen it firsthand that it grows the more flying monsters you defeat. If you never know about it, there''s a chance that your desire to get that special ability is not shown anymore, so you won''t feel anything if you find the right monsters."


    "Does that mean I have to defeat it without anyone''s help and only through my own strength like before? That''s hard¡­"


    Just defeating an All-seeing Eye took me a lot of preparation. Who knows what kind of enemy will have a vision special ability?


    "Master. I''ll help you looking for monsters with special ability rted to vision in the library. Maybe I''ll find one in some old monster encyclopedia."


    "Thanks, Lina! I know I can count on you!"


    "If you want better eyesight, then eat carrots!"


    I heard a voiceing from the kitchen. It was Ang who advised me to eat carrots to help my eyesight.


    I don''t know if it will work or not, but it''s worth a try.

 Chapter 82 - Failure Exploration

    Roy left Cassau to travel to the capital on his own. He didn''t even bring Victoria with her and told her to catch up with Sonia and defeat a lot of monsters. This way, Roy''s summoning element will be able to improve at a faster rate. But Victoria need to be able to take full control of the slime before Roy''s summoning element could improve.


    Victoria fought all the monsters easily, by using her martial arts skill and increasing the weight of her weapons. And whenever she founds an enemy that has a good vision, she would capture them to give to Roy so he can improve his Divine Vision. Most of them are hawk type monster.


    She capture them, and put them in a cage that Lina bought. Lina also told Victoria any type of monsters that has good vision. She didn''t just look for monsters. She also looked for magic item that will help Roy. She''s a very loyal maid.


    ¡­although how she became loyal was weird.


    Roy justplimented her a few times and she already worshiped him.


    Not just that she''s a loyal maid, she''s also a perfect maid. It wasn''t long since Roy has left, and the whole building already cleaned up. She can also cook well. And if there''s something Roy wanted, she would look for any information about the thing Roy searched for. That''s why she diligently reading many books about monsters in the library.


    About the new ce that Roy just bought, it''s a three story building. The first floor has the living room, bathroom, kitchen, and dining room. The second floor has eight room, and the top floor has five room with one room being the biggest. All room has balcony.


    The biggest room at the third floor is taken by Roy. Then in front of his room there are four rooms. Three of them are taken. It was Sophie''s room, Ka''s room, and Victoria''s.


    Victoria said she also wants some privacy and her room will also be used by Sonia the ghost. And although Sophie has her own room, she prefer to sleep with Roy at night.


    For the second floor, two of them are already upied. One by Ang, and another by Sam. Sam didn''t want to stay there. She said she want to leave once she found a ce for herself. That ce will be her office as well.


    As for Ang, she said whatever room she''s in, she doesn''t want a ghost entering it. Sonia agreed after receiving a re from Roy.


    Lastly is Lina. She upied one of the empty room in the second floor for just the first night. After that, clearing a spot in the first floor, she said she will make a room for herself in the first floor. It was because she''s a maid. That''s what she said.


    While Roy is leaving for the capital, the girls are doing their own business. Victoria is defeating monsters, and Lina is reading books at the library.


    Ka, Sophie, and Ang stays in their own room to cultivate using the high quality magic stones. They were hoping to be able to improve fast. All this time, they almost never cultivate by normal means.


    They would try method taught by Roy that he learned from the future, or by Victoria''s method from the past. Both method doesn''t use magic stones, but they help greatly in magic control. At least the method taught by those two are good for improvement without using magic stones.


    Now because of the dungeon exploration, they found a lot of magic stones with some of them are still magic stones of unknown elements. Sam is trying to find someone who can appraise them.


    While the girls from Roy''s party are busy with their own things to do, there''s another party who just got themselves into a problem.


    It was Ellen''s party, dius.


    They managed to climb up a slippery hole and continued moving forward. They don''t have any light element mage with them so they used Ellen''s fire to light the way. Not just that it wasn''t as bright as light from light element mage, it would also waste their oxygen.


    Ellen who was told that by Ka decided to only let small fire so the party will still have a lot of air left. She doesn''t know what Oxygen is, but she knows how good Ka''s party members are. That''s why she decided to trust Ka even though her party members disagree with her.


    "Ellen! Air is everywhere! So what if we light a bit more fire! We can''t see things otherwise!"


    "Nana! This is our first time exploring this dungeon with narrow path. And those girls¡­ and a guy are better than us in fighting at closed space! You have to trust me!"


    "Don''t forget that you''re just a newbie in this party! You might be an A-rank hunter, but I''m more experienced in exploration! Just do as I say!"


    The leader of dius, Nana, insist that they will be fine. She said she was experienced in dungeon exploration, but the dungeons she explored before have bigger space inside. She was right that a bigger me won''t hurt them. But the story if different if it''s just that.


    The party has encountered several monsters, some are even as strong as the Cyclops. And Nana just told her party members to fight as usual. Although she told her party to not use big scale magic, it still too much for a closed area.


    There are two fire mages in the party. Luckily, one of them is Ellen who keeps refusing to use magic bigger than a fireball. That was why the party can still continue. But that''s the reason why they don''t know yet the fear of losing oxygen.


    But that''s not all. There''s one thing that Roy forget to tell Ka and the others. There''s a huge danger in this dungeon other than the monsters or theck of Oxygen.


    It was the fact that since the unexplored area are above the main path that was well-known already, there are many path with hollow area below them, at the main path.


    Roy didn''t have the need to tell Ka because they can only use small scale magic. But if someone used big scale magic, they will be caved in.


    And as it happened now, the opponent this time are Cyclopes. Five of them.


    The area that dius is in right now is bigger than most area in the dungeon. It fits more than five Cyclopes. Which also means the Cyclopes has a lot of room for big movement.


    And someone used a powerful area of effect magic.


    "Chaos Lightning!"


    One of the party member used an advanced level lightning magic.


    "Wait! Tiff, don''t do that!"


    It was not Ellen who shouted. It was Nana.


    "Why?! It''s not like I used a fire magic that will burn all the ''Oksigen'' like Ellen said."


    "Not that! This dungeon makes us climb from the main path! Which means it is hollow below us!"


    "Oh no!"


    Just as Nana said, after the magic hit the Cyclopes, they were all defeated. But the impact is too strong and their foothold can''t handle it.


    Grumble


    And so, the strongest party in Cassau, dius, got caved in inside the dungeon. With no one able to help them.


    ¡­Except maybe for someone whose ability far beyondmon sense.


    The day that the party dius got caved in, there was chaos inside the guild. It was the day that Roy left for the capital. News travel fast to Ka and the others.


    It was Victoria who heard about it first since she just returned from hunting checking on the request.


    At first she didn''t know that it was Ellen''s party. But when she heard that there''s an S-rank hunter in the party, she checked with the guild staff about the member. That was how she found out that it was about Ellen''s party.


    She didn''t panic. Instead she just went home to her new house and report it to the others during dinner.


    "Seems like Ellen and her party got caved in."


    "What?! How?" Ang asked.


    "My guess is that her party member still used strong magic to fight there. We also forgot to tell her that the area below them should be hollow knowing that they need to climb." Victoria replied calmly.


    "What should we do? Should we help them?" Ang asked again.


    "How?"


    "I got some ideas. We can''t help them out of the dungeon, but we can at least help them survive."


    As Ka about to tell them her n, someone knocked on the door.


    "EXCUSE ME! IS KAYLA HERE?!"


    Everyone surprised to hear a loud voice from the door. But Victoria able to stay calm because she also know the owner of this loud voice.


    "Come in!" Ka replied.


    "EXCUSE M¡ªAAAAH A GHOST!!!"


    "Ignore her. Can I help you?"


    "OH RIGHT! ELLEN TOLD ME TO COME HERE IN CASE SOMETHING HAPPENED TO HER! SHE TOLD ME TO MAKE HER PERSONAL REQUEST TO SAVE HER AND HER PARTY! SHE SAID THE REWARD IS HUGE!"


    "I understand, but can you lower your voice? It''s dark and you''re bothering the neighbor."


    "I''M SORRY, I CAN''T!"


    "Alright. We also want to help Ellen. For now, please tell us your name." Ka asked the loud girl calmly."


    "IT''S JEWEL!"

 Chapter 83 - Need To Survive For A Week

    After deciding to help Ellen''s party, Ka told Jewel to go home. It was already dark after all and¡­ it''s also for the health of their eardrums.


    "Ka, you said to help them, but how should we do it?" Ang asked


    "I didn''t say I can help them out of the dungeon. I said that I can help them survive until helpe. We are still just a bunch of beginner level mage. Even more, our leader is away at the moment. Who knows when he wille back? The capital is a long way from here. Even if he goes all out, it''s not a distance he can take in just a day."


    "I believe he can. But he''s not someone who want to spend all his power just to get to his destination," said Victoria.


    Then she continues, "Roy told me that he will make a portal so I can go there instead of just summoning me. He also said that he will make a portal daily to let him know if there''s some news. Although it would be just for a few seconds. And I don''t think he''s the kind that willing to help someone who want to go on dangerous situation on their own. He already know that Ellen''s party doesn''t want to be taught magic control by Ka. I think he hated those kind of people with too much pride."


    "It''s not that he hated them. He just doesn''t care about them if they are strangers to him. But Ellen is someone he knows so he might help. But there''s no need to ask him to return. We just need to help Ellen''s party to survive until someone rescue them. If they haven''t been rescued until Roy returned, then we will ask Roy to help them. After you get summoned by Roy, I want you to try persuading him to help Ellen after he returns," said Ka to Victoria.


    "Okay. Since Roy isn''t here, you''re the boss. After all you''re the one who learned the most from him."


    "Thanks. I have a n to let them survive for much longer, but the one who''ll do the work will be you, Victoria."


    "¡­you''re such a ve driver. Just like Roy who told me to hunt more and more monsters."


    "Actually, wasn''t that your own fault? It was you who started fighting on your own so Roy just leave you be."


    "Shut up, Ang! So? What should I do?" Victoria asked Ka.


    "Dig up a hole where they are being caved in."


    "Doesn''t that mean I will rescue them on my own?"


    "It will be great if you can do that. But the chance it happening is small. We don''t know their situation at the moment. I just need you to open a hole at least enough for you to enter. Then you will go in and out to give them supply enough until helpe or Roy returned. I think he can save them right away if he wants to."


    "You have a lot of faith in him, huh? As expected of the first wife."


    "Are you fine with me being the first wife?"


    "I don''t mind. In the end, it will be me who will stuck with him the longest since I''m his summon."


    "I don''t mind either. I just want to be with him," said Sophie.


    Then as the atmosphere changed with the topic turned into Roy''s wives, the ghost, Sonia approached Ang and asked something.


    "How did a guy like that be so popr? He even married three girls."


    "Actually he isn''t married with anyone yet- AAAAAH!! A ghost!"


    Ang who just realized that Sonia was next to her, run away to her room.


    Meanwhile, there are two girls who don''t really care about the ident that happened to dius.


    "Lina, you''re cooking is great as usual."


    After knowing how much Lina loves to be praised, Sam would always give herpliment in every possible moment.


    "Thank you, Sam."


    Since she''s no longer Sam''s maid, she started to call her name. Now they look like friends or sisters.


    "You''re not taking part on the conversation? I thought you love him as well?"


    "I''m his maid. It will be great if that happened?"


    "What''s wrong?"


    "I''m just too shy. And this distance we have right now is good enough for me. Maybe one day I''ll tell him myself."


    "What if he''s the one who confessed first?"


    "Then I''ll happily ept it."


    The girls then finished their meals. And Victoria left right away to the dungeon. It was already night so the gates are already closed. And all the shops are closed so they can''t buy foods for Ellen''s party. They can only bring them in the morning, so they returned to their own rooms and start cultivating.


    Victoria who has just arrived at the dungeon, see a portal appeared in front of her. It was Roy''s summoning magic. Victoria can see Roy is preparing the tent.


    Knowing Roy''s limit, Victoria spoke before Roy could ask her anything.


    "Ellen''s party got caved in! I''m trying to help! I only got two hours left at most so goodbye!"


    After hearing the situation, Roy stopped his magic. He can only summon the portal for a few seconds so it was really helpful that Victoria knows about it.


    Roy doesn''t really care about Ellen''s party, but he tried to guess what Victoria and the others tried to do. He can guess correctly that the girls are most likely will try to ask for Roy''s help if they can''t rescue Ellen and her party.


    After the connection was cut off, Victoria looked for Ellen.


    She doesn''t need to enter it through the entrance since the area that got caved in affected the surface. She just entered through that sunken ground.


    She dig up the rubbles and enter through a small opening. She also carried something with her. Small enough to enter the hole she entered.


    She saw the corpse of Cyclopes, Orcs, and other monsters. They are the monsters that inhabiting the dungeon.


    She also passed through several treasure chests. But she ignored them because her time is limited. She only has one more hour before she cane out again tomorrow.


    Digging deeper, Victoria can''t find Ellen. Then realizing that the dungeon goes up after taking the main path down, Ellen''s party shouldn''t be too deep at the bottom. She continued to search not too deep.


    Ellen soon heard the sounding from the outside.


    "Help! We''re here!"


    "Ellen! Is that you?!"


    "This voice, Victoria? It''s you?"


    "Yes. It''s difficult for normal human to get here so I came. How''s the situation?"


    "We''re okay! One of my party members is using her ice magic to build a block of ice to block the rubbles from falling! It won''t hold much longer! Please rescue us!"


    "That''s impossible. But I can help you survive until rescuee. Wait for a while and I''ll open a hole connected to the outside. Then we will bring you food and water enough to let you survive until helpe."


    After she answered Ellen, she finally made a way to Ellen.


    "Oh, hey! I found you!"


    "A talking slime?!" One of the party member shocked to realize that the one Ellen talking to is a slime.


    "Even if you said you can help us survive, there''s no point if we got buried under the rubbles. The Ice blocks are started to melt. Once they were all melted, we will be buried and there''s no hope for us left."


    There''s also the fact that the dungeon can''t be affected by earth magic. The ground and the wall in the dungeon was made by unknown material. They can be destroyed but earth magic is useless against these materials.


    "Ice magic will melt with time. But if you use earth magic as support, it willst longer." Victoria said calmly.


    "But earth magic doesn''t work in the dungeon!"


    "That''s why I brought some dirt from the outside. Earth element mages will do their jobs here. I''ll go outside and bring you more."


    "Okay, thanks! As for water, I''m also a water element mage. We''ll be fine."


    "But you should still preserve your magic. Who knows when the rescue wille? And thanks to the dungeon being caved in, there are no more hunters interested in this ce. They mighte but only to dig up the treasures that got buried. If they tried to rescue you sloppily, you might end up being buried more and more with no hope in escaping."


    "So there''s no hope, huh? I guess we''ll all die here."


    "Not exactly. If you survive, I know Roy can help. But he''s away and the earliest he will return is in a week. You just need to survive for about a week."


    "Can this Roy really save us? Then why isn''t heing right now?" someone asked Victoria.


    "He''s not someone who cares about strangers. Although he knows Ellen, they are not close enough to be friends. Even more, you refused Ka''s offer to teach you magic control. I believe he doesn''t think well of your party."


    "What does magic control means? We''re already advanced level mage!"


    "It means to use the minimum mana to cast magic at maximum power. You wasted too much mana if you don''t have magic control. You can also manipte the shape of your magic. There are a lot of functions, but the one who knows about it the most should be Roy. Well, I don''t have much time so I''ll leave for now and return with some fruits. After that, I''ll see you tomorrow I guess?"


    Victoria then left and returned again carrying dirt and fruits.


    The next day, she brought some water and food as she said. She brought a lot in case Roy will summon her soon and they won''t have enough supply tost long until rescuee.


    Then the day after that, she didn''te.

 Chapter 84 - Sneaking Into The Capital

    "How were they?"


    I asked Victoria.


    Yesterday, Victoria told me in hurry that Ellen''s party got caved in and the girls are trying to help them. Now it''s already dark and I summoned her because the capital is already in sight.


    I hurried here because I want to help the girls. It''s not that I really want to help Ellen''s party. It''s that because Ka and the others decided to help them, I decided to help the girls.


    If the girls don''t want to help, then I won''t. It''s that simple.


    After I summoned Victoria, I asked her what they were doing and how''s the situation with Ellen''s party.


    The girls are doing fine. Lina is trying to help with looking for monsters with possibilities of having special ability rted to vision. And Victoria is hunting monsters and caught some small monsters with good vision.


    Sam is working as usual, the ghost is undoing the magic she casted, and the rest are cultivating.


    I heard from Victoria that Sophie also tried to help improving my vision so she build a garden in the backyard and nt carrots with the help of Lina.


    There''s a small backyard behind the building enough to build a small garden for carrots and possibly other vegetables. Although at the moment, it''s all nted with carrot''s seeds.


    That''s what Victoria told me after I summoned her.


    Then I asked her about the situation with Ellen''s party. There''s also a water mage among them so they won''tck water. The air cirction is fine as long as they don''t use fire magic to burn the Oxygen. I also bring them some dirt from the outside so they can support the rubbles from burying them. The rest is up to them. If they had a quarrel or fighting among themselves, the situation will get worse." Victoria exined.


    "What about good news?"


    "What good news?"


    "The treasures. The dungeon got caved in so no one should be able to explore it anymore."


    "Oh, that! I brought out some treasure chests that I can to our house. Some of them are underneath the rubbles so I just leave them be. I told the girls to only open it once you have returned just in case some of them have traps."


    "Awesome."


    Last time I checked, there were no treasure chests with traps in it. But I don''t know yet if that''s still the case. It was smart of her to wait until I return.


    "You''re not going to ask if there''s anyone who can save Ellen''s party?" Victoria asked.


    "Hmm? I bet even if there are any, they won''t help unless they will get a huge reward. By the way, is there any reward?"


    "None from the guild. Ellen''s party just destroyed a dungeon full of undiscovered treasures so their reputation is falling. Even more with their attitude and pride, no one likes them."


    "Right. They even refused when Ka tried to teach them magic control."


    "But Ellen has prepared about it before she explored the dungeon. You remember that loud girl you met back then? The one who asked for help because of bandits attacking her vige? Her name is Jewel. And Ellen asked her toe to us in case something happened. She also prepared a reward for us."


    "Nice. She''s getting smart just with one time exploring the dungeon. I guess I should help her at least."


    That was why I hurried to the capital after hearing the news from Victoria yesterday.


    If I go at normal pace, I should be able to arrive tomorrow evening even with fighting the monsters. But I ended up quickening my pace and arrived this evening when the capital has just closed the gates.


    "I will sneak into the capital now and look for some evidence of the cult or betrayal of the kingdom. I should be able to find one and present it to the king. I think I''ll meet the king tomorrow night after collecting some evidence and found a member of the cult."


    "Okay. Do you want to put on your disguise now?"


    "Sure. But I''ll refrain from the name Kuro. It sounded so simr with our bald friend, Kron."


    "Then what should you call yourself? rence?"


    "That''s a stage name. And it might be found outter. Let''s have another one."


    "What about Ninja?"


    "What''s that mean?"


    "They are someone who did covert mission. Like sneaking or even assassination. And you''re about to do covert operation so it fits you."


    "Then call me Ninja when I''m in this disguise."


    "Wait! Ninja doesn''t wear armor like this! I''ll change it into clothes Ninjas would wear."


    Then Victoria changed into an easy to move clothes with a mask that only cover my mouth and my hair. My eyes are still visible.


    "It sure does feel like something for covert operation. And it''s easy to move as well. But why is my eyes are not covered?"


    "It''s not like anyone will found out about you from your eyes. Brown eyes aremon after all."


    "It''s not that. What if the queen ended up falling for me after seeing my charming eyes?"


    "¡­that''s impossible. The most likely things for her in her mind is asking if this guys is a clown."


    Ninja! I''m Ninja! I feel like Victoria is just using me to fulfil her fantasy desire. But that''s okay. I mean even now I sometime tried to do things I can''t do in my past life. So I understand her well.


    I climbed the city wall with the grappling hook. Although transformed into Ninja costume, she''s still made a grappling hook on my right arm attached to the costume. Is this Ninja''s equipment?


    I can just run on the wall, but it will took time to reach the top and someone might be able to see me. And since I don''t want to be found out, I activate my Divine Vision only to see the surrounding area. Not to focus in one spot. At least I won''t until I reached a safe ce.


    And my presence detection without using Vision Divine has improved as well. But still, it''s better if I can do things faster. So I keep using the grappling hook whenever I want to reach a ce I can''t reach with just my jumping power.


    Good thing the grappling hook is silent. It''s because it is Victoria. If it''s a real grappling hook, I guess it will make a sound. But I have never seen one before so I don''t know if this thing exist in this world or just in Victoria''s world.


    I finally reached the highest point of the capital city of Kingdom Tatrama. I''m on top of a building called library tower. It''s a tower filled with books or documents from all around the world.


    There are ten floor in this tower. From the first to the fifth are free to enter as long as you register at the entrance. Then above them, you need a special pass. With the tenth floor being only few people can pass.


    Anyone thought that the top floor is reserved for the king. But that''s wrong. The king gas a special room at the basement. With only the king himself and probably the one who managed this library knows about.


    Even I thought that the highest floor is for an extremely secret information. But seeing with my Vision Divine, I can see that most of the things up to tenth floor are not really a secret. The secrets documents are well hidden in the basement.


    I don''t know why these things are stored here if they are not really a secret. But I can guess from how some of them are old fairytale about overpowering an empire or fighting the authority.


    I have read some of those stories in my past life and I know some of them are banned in the country. I guess many people with power don''t want anyone to read those things.


    And what''s hidden inside the basement are secret of this kingdom. Although I can''t read them all since this is too far away, I think that ce is fine unless either the one who manage that ce or the king himself is part of the cult.


    The king is fine, but I don''t know the one in charge of the Library Tower. It was a secret even until the day I died.


    For now, I''ll try to locate anyone suspicious. Since this is the capital, everyone is suspicious.


    Are there anyone with another explosives inside their mouth?


    I looked over the pce where the king resides. There, I found that the pce has a lot of hidden passages. So I try to look for a ce in the pce that can only be entered through a hidden passage.


    And I found one already. It''s a room without a window. And there are many path connecting to that room. I guess that ce should be for someone in charge of protecting the king. After all, there''s a hidden passage on the king''s chamber''s ceiling connecting to that room.


    Suspicious!


    Knowing that Wendy is a member of a secret agency of the king, and one of the agent ended up betraying the country and framing her, that ce is something I have to check.


    Hmm? There''s someone entering one of the hidden passageway. Is he the owner of that room? I need to get closer to the pce to know what he''s hiding.


    I left the Library Tower and get to the top of the pce. There, I used Vision Divine to see what he''s hiding.


    I see something written on the wall that I missed before. It said ''Hidden Protector''s Chamber''.


    He seems to be writing something. Then after finished writing, he enters another hidden passageway toward the ceiling of the king''s chamber.


    I looked at the king''s chamber and see the king is prepared to go to sleep with the queen. The queen is currently pregnant so the king rubbed the queen''s belly carefully.


    I remember that the crown prince should be born around this time. So I guess it will be in a few month.


    But¡­ after her son was born, the queen fell into depression. I think I understand why after seeing it now. I''ll tell her and the king when I sneaked into their room tomorrow.


    I entered the secret room while the owner is busy keeping watch of the king.


    Hahaha! I found it already! An Evidence that can prove he''s a traitor of the country!


    Before I forget, I tried to focus my eye to the man who''s peeking on the king.


    As expected! There''s the same magical explosives inside his mouth!


    After seeing everything I needed, I left the pce and the city to rest outside. I can''t have any evidence about me entering the capital.


    Now I just need to think how to make a great presentation to the king after sneaking in.


    How will I make a great impact and be trusted by the king? Should I practice my dialogue for tomorrow?

 Chapter 85 - Hiding Under The Desk

    After all that practicing, I think I can perform well. Although in the end, most of it will need improvisation.


    I also change my voice with the help of air magic. With Victoria''s advice, I alter my voice by breathing in Helium. Of course so that I won''t die, I need to exchange the Helium with Oxygen some time.


    My voice is really funny. I just hope that the king will focus more on what I say rather than my voice.


    Now it''s already evening and I am preparing to sneak in again to the pce.


    "Hey, Roy. You can trespass the king''s pce easily but why can''t you do it at the governor''s ce at Melk?"


    "I entered the king''s pce through the hidden passage. The security is tighter because it''s the ce where the king rest and do his jobs. But not many of them knew about the hidden passages.


    As for the governor''s ce, there''s no hidden passage. It means most of the people there should be rted to the cult. That''s why the members of the cult can enter and leave the governor''s ce freely. Unless I want to raisemotion, I can''t enter it. I need to have some kind of invisibility technique to enter through the door since all of the windows are locked."


    I answered Victoria''s question.


    Although the security is tighter in the king''s pce, the governor''s ce is much harder to sneak into.


    "You know what? Hidden passages are supposed to be a secret and hidden in the most inconspicuous ce. And you just entered them easily."


    "It''s all thanks to Divine Vision. If not for these, I don''t think I can go to the king. Now, shall we go?"


    Victoria wrapped around my body and turned into Ninja''s outfit. And then we sneaked into the capital and enter the pce through a hidden passage.


    Then I entered the king''s chamber when no one is around. Not even the peeping tom.


    I hid myself under the desk. Sitting under the desk while hugging my knees.


    Since this chamber is where the king and the queen rest, the king never takes his works here. Maybe he did it in consideration of the queen''s pregnancy.


    The queen is taking a bath right now. Helped by pce maids.


    I have no interest in pregnant women or taking the wives of other people. So I don''t peek on the queen for long.


    But the maids are all¡­ Wow!


    Does being hot is a necessary requirement for being hired as a maid?


    Let''s stop here and focus on the task.


    ¡­focus on what? All I''m doing now is waiting.


    I''ll just spend this time reassessing about the king from what I knew in my past life.


    His name is Albert Tatrama. King of Tatrama Kingdom.


    He''s just 23 years old right now. About two years ago, the previous king died because of an illness. The previous king has two children. A son and a daughter. And his son, Albert, became the king after his death.


    Albert was known for being a good king. At least that''s what happened in my previous life. He''s doing really well against the cult. In fact, in thirty years when we got to war, it was because he''s eradicating all the people rted to the cult. Whether they are a nobility, rich merchant, guild master, or a general, he didn''t give them any mercy.


    Since the cult''s influence in the kingdom decreasing, the cult has no choice but to use forceful means. And that means going to war with this kingdom.


    After knowing the truth about the Evil God Cult, many other countries join hand with Albert to destroy the cult. After that¡­ I died not knowing what will happen after.


    What the hell?!


    Now that I think about it, won''t it be fine if I don''t alter the future? The kingdom are doing fine, but I returned back to the past and change so many things!


    Well, I don''t care much about it though. Since I''m doing this for my own selfishness.


    Whether the world will be peaceful ore to ruin in the future, as long as I''m fine and all the people I care about is fine as well, I won''t care much about the world.


    What if¡­ I gained a lot of harem members from all over the world? Then I have no choice but to save the world, right?


    I think I will stay in this country. I hope there won''t be a time when I have to leave this country knowing how charming I am to girls.


    "Hey, Roy. I don''t know what you''re thinking but I feel like it''s something that won''t happen. Please focus on the mission¡­ but we''re just waiting here, huh? Well, don''t dive too deep into your own imagination."


    I feel like Victoria is getting better at reading my mind. Maybe it was because we''re connected as a master and his summon.


    Back to the king. He''s doing well against the cult and he''s getting more and more powerful after other countries decided to make alliance with him. He''s also quite strong, reaching Advanced level even though he''s busy. I don''t know his current level but if he can reach Advanced even though he''s so busy, that mean he has the talent in magic as well.


    The crown prince also learnt a lot from watching him. He''s the hope of this kingdom. I think I heard him making a speech about how much he wanted to be like his father the king.


    Although the king seems doing well, the queen doesn''t.


    Her name is Marie. I heard that after the birth of the crown prince, the queen sumbed to an illness. She managed to live but she fell into depression. It''s great that the king is watching her so she has someone to rely on.


    But now I know the reason why the queen became that way. I hope I can help her with her situation.


    The illness she caught was actually a mental one. She is¡­


    Oh wait! Seems like the king and the queen is here. Now I just need to wait for the peeping Tom to arrive.


    Hmm¡­ He''s taking too long inside that hidden room. Is he suspicious of something? I mean I did copying all the evil ns he wrote down. Maybe I messed up a little? Like dropping an ink or forgot to return a paper to its original ces?


    I hope he won''t notice.


    Then I saw him taking something out of his bag. It''s a drawing of¡­ the queen!


    Don''t tell me he''s got the hot for her?


    Wait! Now that I think about it, the queen was never left the castle after delivering the crown prince. Maybe this peeping Tom knows the reason and use it to his advantage and make a move toward the queen?


    No. I''m just thinking too much. My imagination went wild at the moment there. Let''s believe that the queen isn''t someone like that.


    After all, I finally found out that he''s the one who makes Ms. Wendy suffer.


    After killing Wendy, the king found out the truth and made an order to kill him.


    I just found out yesterday that it was him after knowing his ns. He thinks that by writing down the ns, no one will know about it because he''s in a hidden room. But such things won''t be able to get pass my Divine Vision.


    What?! Now he frame the drawing and put it on the wall, then he''s kissing it!


    Please, hurry up and get here! I''m sick of watching your idiotic actions! Hurry up!


    I truly wish he would identally use magic on his explosive device inside his mouth so he can explode right his own head. But I need him alive as evidence to give to the king.


    I have waited until both the king and the queen fall asleep. Just as the two of them fell asleep, the peeping Tom finished making out with the drawing.


    I need something to erase that image from my mind. It was sickening.


    This is the first time I actually hated to have this special ability of mine. But since this is an important matter, I have to endure it.


    Finally, he''s here! He''s right above the desk I''m hiding. I think his gaze is concentrated only at the queen even though his job is to protect the king.


    Time to make my appearance!


    "Wake up, your majesty! I have something important to tell you!"


    I spoke after altering my voice with Helium.


    "What?! Who''s there speaking in funny voice?!"


    Now the two of them are awake because of my loud and funny voice. It will be soon when the peeping Tom will enter.


    "I am Ninja! Please wait a bit, your majesty."


    As soon as I said that, the peeping Tom break through the ceiling of the room andnded between the king and me.


    "Be careful your majesty! I will pro-"


    "You''re my target!"


    I grabbed the peeping Tom''s arm and threw him down to the floor. Then I hold his head with one hand while the other is grabbing something from the inside of his mouth.


    "Where is it~? Here it is! Your majesty, I want to give you report about the existence of an evil organization which this guy who just said he wanted to protect you belong. This is an explosive device attached to the back of the tooth that they all have."


    "What?!"


    The king is confused. But I continued.


    "And here are some of the evil ns this guy prepared. I copied them from his room. It''s a secret room near this chamber."


    "You!"


    Seems like this peeping Tom is shocked to hear that someone found out about the organization''s existence and his ns.


    Now then, the king is reading the documents I gave him after turning on the light. I don''t know why he did this right in front of a trespasser like me, but if he thinks that I can be trusted, then that''s good.


    I hope I won''t put too much stress to the pregnant queen.

 Chapter 86 - Lie Detector King

    "These are¡­"


    The king was shocked when he''s reading the documents.


    "What''s written there are only some of the ns he wrote that I copied. There should be more inside his room. I''m here to tell you the danger that the cult this guy belong to."


    "That man is lying! I belong to the kingdom! My duty is to protect the king!"


    "Oh yeah? Then why are you hanging a picture of the queen in your room? Then you kissed the picture over and over again."


    "What?! Eeeew!"


    The queen reacted as if she''s disgusted. Well, I did get disgusted as well.


    "Right, Eeeew. That''s the same reaction when I saw it."


    "Your majesty! He''s lying!"


    Trying to frame me for lying, he''s desperately using his magic to attack me even when he''s in a difficult position. As expected for the one who became the king''s secret protector.


    But I''m way faster than him. I just smacked his head and he can no longer focus on his magic.


    "Argh! You¡­!"


    As I smacked his head and his magic was cancelled, the king looked at me right in the eye and said something unexpected.


    "You there with the funny voice. What''s your name?"


    "Ninja."


    "That''s a lie. What''s your real name?"


    Somehow I feel like he can tell whether I speak lies.


    "Ninja is my disguise. It''s obvious that I didn''te here so my identity would be revealed. If your majesty want to find out who I am, find it yourself. And I advise you to not make it as your most important mission to find out my identity after knowing the existence of an evil organization. And even if you do find my identity, I want you to keep it a secret."


    "¡­that''s not a lie."


    "Your majesty can tell?"


    I asked the king how she can tell that I''m not lying.


    "I have a secret that I only told to few people. My wife the queen and my sister are the only two people I can trust. It''s that I can tell when someone tells a lie."


    The guy I pinned down and I were so surprised to hear that the king has such a big secret. I guess that''s why he found out who the traitors are in my past life.


    I guess I need to test him.


    "I''m the most handsome man in the world."


    "¡­that''s not a lie. My lie detecting ability can only work with feelings not the fact. If you feel you''re the most handsome man in the world, my ability won''t react because it was based on your own feeling. Other than your name, there''s no liesing out of your mouth."


    "That''s awesome! By the way, me being handsome is a fact."


    "I doubt that. In the end, it''s just personal preferences. What about your voice?"


    "Well, it''s actually a kind of magic."


    "Magic, magic, magic, Maagiiic!"


    "Wait, what?!"


    Somehow Victoria suddenly¡­ singing? Why would she start singing at this moment!


    I have prepared many things for the report to the king and now all of them are useless!


    First the peeping Tom''s doing something Eeeeew to the queen''s picture. Then the king''s ability to detect a lie. Then suddenly Victoria started singing? What the hell?


    "What was that?!"


    "Not important at the moment."


    "I can tell that you''re not lying. Does that mean you''re here with someone else? The voice ising from you, though. Just after you said ''kind of magic''."


    "Magic, magic, magic, Maagiiic!"


    "There it is!"


    (Shut up Victoria! Why would you start singing here?!)


    I whispered to Victoria.


    (I can''t help it, okay! It''s some kind of ruleing from my world!)


    (It''s a different world now so don''t do that!)


    Can''t she just be quiet at this serious moment? I was about to tell the king more about the cult and what their ns are that I remembered. Though I don''t remember much since I didn''t care so it would only be little information. But with this king, I hope he can take care of the cult faster now.


    "Albert. I can''t sleep if you''re this loud. You can detect lies so can you trust this Ninja?"


    "Sorry, dear. But you''re right. If he wants to kill us, he could have done it easily without alerting us. I think I can trust him."


    "Then go discuss it somewhere else. He found a hidden room with my picture, right? I want you to go there, find more evidence, and burn down that picture."


    Whoa the queen just giving order to the king! I guess now I know who the real boss in the royalties is now.


    "But what about your security? I can''t just leave you here alone."


    "Ah! Actually I have the ability to see through things. So I can check on her even when we''re in another room. That''s also why I know what this peeping Tom doing before he came here."


    "¡­that''s not a lie but a rather disturbing ability."


    The king is a bit disturbed about my vision ability. Well, that''s obvious when he has a beautiful wife.


    "Don''t worry. I''m not into married women."


    "But you''re a man as well. So you still interested in beauties, right?"


    "Albert. Does that mean if you have his eyes, you will¡­"


    "Let''s chat in another room! How do we get there?"


    The king is still a man after all.


    "Wait a moment. I need to bring this guy as well. I need to dislocate his bones so he can''t move."


    "What?!"


    The guy tried to protest but I''m much stronger than him. I need to bring him for questions and also just in case he tried to cast magic again.


    Now the things I practiced all night since yesterday can no longer work. It all ended up with me needed to do more improvisation. But at least I gained the king''s trust. Just because I never told a lie other than my own name.


    I cover the mouth of the guy I pinned down and started to dislocate every joints. Even the fingers.


    There''s still a muffled scream but the queen never looked away from him. She''s quite a scarydy.


    "We can go there from the ceiling. If your majesty put a chair on the desk, you should be able to reach there."


    "¡­you''re doing such a scary things in front of the king and the queen, then you gave an order to the king?"


    "Just go, Albert! I don''t want the noise to bother my baby. Oh, since Ninja can see-through things, then can you check on my baby?"


    "¡­I''ll do itter."


    "Great! Now, go!"


    We climbed to the ceiling and crawl in the hidden passage.


    After listening to the king, it seems like the guy I pulled in the hidden passageway with cloth covering his mouth is called Tim. So he''s a peeping Tim not peeping Tom, huh?


    "And? Why did you trust me enough to tell me your secret? As for this guy, I think I know the reason. His life is numbered already and dead man tell no tales. That''s why you''re not afraid of him telling anyone."


    "You''re right. As for you, it was because you didn''t tell any lies. At the court, many people tells lies. And I can''t find the truth on my own. Then you came and put some of the puzzle pieces. I think I''m getting a clearer picture of what''s going on."


    "I see. Oh? We''re here. Let''s enter the room."


    We soon reached the room where the one who should be responsible to the king''s protection and the king''s secret agency live.


    I say should because Tim was doing the opposite of it.


    As soon as we entered the room, the picture of Queen Marie greeted us. And the king burn it without hesitation.


    "Ah! I forgot that it will be hard for us to breathe if I start a fire in enclosed space!"


    "Don''t worry about that."


    "You''re¡­ not lying. I don''t know how you do it but there''s no smell of smoke at all."


    Of course it was because of air magic. If I told him how amazing air element actually is, then he can narrow my identity into someone who can use air element really well. And I think I''m the only one in the world who can do that. Or at least in the whole kingdom. And in the present since many people in the past can do many things with air element. And if there''s no one else who came from another world like Victoria who knows what air element can do.


    "Alright. Now since the picture has been burnt, I''ll show you where the rest the evil organization''s ns are. I think that most of them are just Tim''s own n. But some of them are things that I know."


    I show him some paper with ns to destroy several cities including Melk. Then I told him the possibilities of aristocracy involved in the ns. Though I didn''t say who because I have no evidence.


    "All of these are his ns?"


    "Yes. Although I only know some of them will happen. I don''t know about everything else. And there''s not a single contributor''s name written in the ns so we don''t know any other traitor."


    "But you can see if there''s anyone who has explosive devices inside their mouth. You decided they are from the cult."


    "Yes. Although I don''t know if those with higher positions in the cult has the same device inside their mouth or not. But at least those who have it are considered evil to me."


    "I see. I think I know some people in the court who should be involved with some of these ns. They lie a lot and it''s disgusting because my ability always activated around them."


    "Just interact with them like usual. I know you''re smart enough to take care of those things if you want to."


    "Is that why you''re telling all of these? So I can take care of everything?"


    "Yes. I''m just one man and so are you. But you''re a king. You can do many things I can''t. That''s why I want you to know all of these things."


    "How do you know about all these stuffs?"


    Should I make up some stories? I don''t think so. If he knows I''m lying, there''s a chance that he won''t trust me anymore. I''ll just give him a hint then. If he''s smart, he would notice what I mean.


    "This is not my first time."

 Chapter 87 - Informing The King About Future Events

    "Not your first time? Don''t tell me that this is your second life after returning to the past. That seems impossible."


    Whoa! He got it right in the first try. He''s good. Really good. No wonder this kingdom can survive so long fighting the cult.


    But it''s not like I want to hide the fact that I returned to the past to the king. I just don''t want my identity to be known at least for now, while I''m still weak.


    I don''t mind the king find out who I am. I just don''t have many people I can trust. If he knows who I am, then if by any chance my identity got leaked¡­ I don''t want to imagine what would happen to the others.


    "I can only tell you what I know. And the first thing you need to know is that I don''t know much about the cult. It would be you who knows about them outside of the members of the cult themselves."


    "Wait, what?! You''re really came from the future?!"


    "HMMMMPF!"


    It is normal for anyone to hear that I''m actually from the future. Even Tim was so surprised.


    Tim who is being pulled by me looked at me in shock and I crouched down and said something that will put him into despair.


    "That''s right. I didn''t n to tell anyone about it at first. But since the king himself already told you his secret that no one else other than his family knows, that means you will die soon. As for me, he won''t kill me because of the information I have. So, we will interrogate you first. It doesn''t matter if you lie because the king will know you''re lying."


    I took of the cloth that covering Tim''s mouth and he started to yell at me.


    "You think I will say anything to you! If youing from the future is true then our ns worked in that timeline! Doesn''t matter what you do now, our ns will still work! And even if youe from the future or the king himself can detect a lie, it won''t matter if I don''t say anything!"


    After Tim''s banter, I looked at the king to check if he said any lie at all.


    The king shook his head.


    "No. He didn''t speak a lie at all. It will be difficult to interrogate him."


    "That''s right! No matter how painful you will torture me, I won''t say anything about us!"


    Then the king said that he doesn''t lie again saying torturing Tim will be useless.


    "That''s fine. You''re about to die anyway so how about you listen to what will happen in the future together with the king. You will be satisfied knowing most of your ns worked. But in this timeline, they won''t work since we''ll be stopping them. Or at least some of them that I knew about."


    "What''s that mean?"


    The king confused with my words.


    "Well, even if I am indeeding from the future, I don''t know everything that''s going on. I know mostly things that happened near me or from stories I heard in the pub or my allies when I decided to join the war. After all, back then, I''m just an average civilian who doesn''t care much about the situation around the world. It was around the time of myst year that I learned more about the situation. But since I''m changing the future, most of them shouldn''t happen in this timeline."


    "Aren''t people who came back to the past supposed to be overpowered and know everything?"


    "Those are just from stories in books. And I was just a civilian who doesn''t care much about the world even after the cult did something so close to me. I chose to live as a doctor. In a vige at the countryside. So I don''t know much.


    Rather, now that I experienced it myself, I was confused with the protagonists of the stories about returning to the past. They seem like to know everything and have extremely good memory. I mean, how could they memorize everything as if they knew they would go back to the past? And the authors just made their protagonists experience all important event in their past lives themselves."


    "¡­now that you mentioned it, I can no longer read simr novel about second chance the same ever again."


    And so, I told the king about the things I knew about the cult, their ns, and what he did that I knew.


    "So¡­ I was doing well even after some cities got destroyed. But you died before you know what happened after the war."


    "Yes. I told you this because I want you to take care of these evil organization called Evil God Cult." I replied.


    During the time I exined about some events that happened in my past life, Tim kept changing his expression. He was happy when the cult''s n worked, but he quickly changed his expression into that of a disappointment because I have told the king to prevent all that to happen.


    At least Albert know with Tim''s reaction how evil that organization is.


    "You''re making me take care of the whole organization?"


    "Of course! You''re the king after all!"


    "What about you? You won''t fight?"


    "I will fight. But I''m just one man. I don''t think I can even protect a whole city. But you''re a king. You can make everyone in the kingdom move with just a word. More importantly¡­"


    "More importantly?"


    "I will have more free time if you take care of the cult. I can spend more time with my lovers."


    "That''s your real intention?" Albert asked


    "Of course it is! You will know if I told you a lie, right? So you should have known that I haven''t spoken a single lie at all other than my name."


    "But you haven''t told everything as well."


    "I''ll tell you more when the time is right."


    "...alright. Thanks for telling. Now what should we do to him?"


    The king pointed at Tim who has arge bump on his head.


    It was because he tried to use magic from time to time. But I smacked him on the head every time he tried to use magic.


    "We''ll kill him. It''s not like he will say anything. Shall we go back to your room? Seems like your sister is apanying the queen in your chamber. She seems pretty hostile toward me."


    "Then I''ll go first. I''ll tell her you''re a friend."


    Oh! I''m the friend of the king! What a surprise!


    Wait! There''s something I have to tell him first.


    "Before we return, I have something to tell you."


    "Huh? You''re not making any funny voice again. Is this your real voice?"


    "Even if you find my identity by my voice, I trust you to keep it a secret. You remember the part that I''m a doctor and I have a see-through vision, right?"


    "Yeah."


    "It''s about the queen''s pregnancy¡­"


    I told him what I''ve seen with my Divine Vision.


    Both the king and Tim was so shocked. Even more than when I told them about the future.


    I also tell the king about the condition of the queen after the birth of the crown prince.


    "I see¡­ thanks for telling me but¡­ sigh. I need some time to clear my mind before I return. You can kill this guy first."


    "Okay."


    "Wai- Ack! Uuuh¡­"


    I choked his neck with my right hand using full power. He couldn''t say anything before his death.


    No matter how much he adores the queen, he has no ce in this kingdom after I showed the king proof of his betrayal.


    He died with a broken neck.


    "Your majesty can go first."


    "Honorific now? You don''t need to use honorific on me after all this time talking without it. Just call me Albert. Being put in this position, I need friend I can talk to."


    "Good luck finding one."


    "I have found one. But he doesn''t even tells me his name. I''ll figure out his identity soon though."


    We returned to the king''s chamber with him at the front so he can exin it to his sister.


    "You trusted a man who broke into your room with your secret that you kept from me for years? Are you crazy?"


    "It was because my ability that I know I can trust him. He hasn''t spoken any lies all this time other than his name."


    "Then tell us what he told you! I''ll decide after listening about it."


    "Okay. Ninja, please tell her."


    Albert just told me to exin it to his sister. But I refuse.


    "You tell her yourself. I''ll be drawing all the hidden passage in this pce. I don''t think you know everything about this pce."


    I said with my funny voice.


    "Oh, thanks. That will be helpful. But can you at least cover the corpse first? I don''t want my wife to see dead body."


    I grabbed the curtain and use it to cover Tim''s dead body. Then as he started exining to his sister, Shirley, I drew him all the hidden passages in the pce.


    "Here''s the map. Destroy this after you memorize the content."


    "Great, thanks."


    I gave the map after he finished exining to his sister.


    "Now, I''m here about your majesty the queen''s condition."


    Now I changed my voice into a more serious one. Not my real voice, just adjusted it a bit. Because I don''t know if the queen or the king''s sister can keep a secret or not.

 Chapter 88 - The Babies Condition

    Why was I so easily tell others that I came from the future?


    It''s for my own sake.


    I told people I think I can trust so that they will help me prevent the danger that wille. Then if possible, I will left everything to them and hopefully, not getting myself involved with the cult.


    But I don''t think that''s possible since the Evil God Cult''s influence is widespread around the world.


    That''s why by leaving everything to other people, I hope at least I and the people I care about have enough time to get strong enough to protect themselves.


    If I tried to take all of the responsibilities as the person who knows, I won''t have enough time to get stronger. And I might end up risking the whole world if I did it poorly.


    Because of all the knowledge that I''ve learnt from both my past life and present life, I know that I''m not smart enough, strong enough, and rich enough to take care of everything alone. That''s why I need to have some help.


    And I''m not someone who is too shy or proud to ask for anyone''s help. And I''m proud of being shameless enough to ask for help.


    And this time, I''m asking for help from the king himself.


    I was just trying to get someone in high position to help taking care of the cult, but when I came here, I see a patient instead.


    And as a doctor, I can''t ignore someone in pain¡­ even if that''s someone is still a fetus.


    "Your majesty, I will now tell you about your condition."


    I said that in my serious tone. Not using helium to alter my voice. And now that I''ve turned serious, the king who has listened about it also has serious expression on his face.


    "Why are your voice changing? And since it looks like you two have been getting along well in such a short time, you can call me Marie."


    "Marie! You can''t trust someone you just met!"


    "But Albert said that he has never once spoke any lies. Other than his own name."


    The king''s sister, Shirley, protested to the queen that she must not trust me especially only on the first time meeting. But the queen said she trust me because she trust Albert who knows if I said a lie.


    "I don''t mind you all finding about my identity, but I don''t want a certain party knows who I am. That''s why I apologize for disguising myself."


    "Evil God Cult, huh? And you said you returned to the past? Although I still can''t believe it, since my brother hasn''t detect any liesing from you, I''ll trust you for now."


    "Thank you, your highness."


    "Just call me Shirley. Although I haven''t trust you yet, since my brother trusted you, you can call me by my name. But once you spoke any lies, I''ll kill you."


    "Thank you, Shirley."


    Somehow, I ended up getting close with the three royalties.


    Shirley is 17 years old now. 2 years older than I am.


    Simr to the current king, she''s now active as a hunter. Although Albert back then only became a hunter to gain more experiences.


    In my past life, Shirley continue being a hunter even until the day I died. She became a hunter so she can live independently in the future. She doesn''t want to be tied up with the royalties and be used as political tool.


    Although I don''t think Albert will ever use his family members as a political tool, it''s different from the other aristocrats who has their own ns.


    But I have more important matter to inform them right now.


    "It''s about your babies."


    "You mean baby, right? How could you made a mistake already?"


    "Shut up, Shirley! He''s not lying!"


    "But¡­ he said babies! Even the doctors already said that¡­ there''s only¡­ one heartbeat?"


    Marie realized something quickly. She started to rub her belly. And Albert put her in his embrace.


    "¡­I know that something is weird. My stomach grown too big for just one baby."


    "Marie, let''s listen more to what Ninja says. He''s a doctor and he has a see-through vision. And he''s not lying."


    "¡­okay. Please continue."


    Marie gave me permission to speak. And at this time, Shirley already shocked with tears in her eyes and she covered her mouth with her hands.


    Of course anyone would be surprised. After all, it''s impossible for anyone to found out that the queen is pregnant with twins when no one can see-through her belly.


    "Yes, you are pregnant with twins. One of the twins is a boy. And he''s quite healthy. The other one is a girl. Her heart isn''t beating."


    "Does that mean she died?" Marie asked with tears in her eyes,


    "No. Dead fetus, in case of twins, it would not grow as it is. She''s grown big together with the boy. Which means even though her heart is not beating, she''s still continue to grows. This is the case of when your fetus need some special condition to be alive when you delivered them. If you fail to do it, the baby will be really die after you delivered it, and then you will be the one who pay the price. Your body might be deteriorating, or your magic, and in your case, it should be mental health. Your mind isn''t clear, you''ll get more and more timid, anxious when you''re leaving your room. Although I don''t know if that''s what happened in my previous live because I never see you back then. At least from the rumor, you are physically fine, and your magic is not weakening, so I thought it should be your mental health."


    "Ninja, you said that the fetus need a special condition to be alive, right? What is it?" Marie asked.


    "There was a case in my past live about this as well. Although it was not a twin, she''s the first who managed to deliver the baby just fine. Then all the doctors around the world started to do some research about this. Then they found the answer. The pregnant woman, continued cultivating her magic even in her pregnancy. Then most of the magic that was absorbed from the magic stones, entered the womb. That was how the baby gained wind element even though she was just born. This happened around ten years from now."


    "So, does that mean I should cultivate? But the doctor said I have to refrain from cultivating."


    "They are right. It was because normal babies would suffer when the mother is cultivating. That was why it was a taboo for pregnant women to cultivate. Because the babies would end up died before they are born. And in your case, you have a twin. One is a normal baby, and the other need special care."


    "Does that mean I have to give up on one of them?! No! I''d rather die than give up one of my babies! Why did you have to tell me about it?!" Marie shouted angrily.


    "If I didn''t tell you, your baby will be the one who suffers the most. She has a chance to be more powerful than anyone else, but she won''t be able to show the world if she died. I have a way to let you deliver both babies, but there''s a possibility that it might fail since there are almost no known simr cases like this after that one from ten years in the future. And you''re the only one who have a twins with one fetus needed special treatment. This will be the first experiment ever in the whole whorld so will you ept it? I''ll let you discuss it with Albert but I''m in a hurry so I want you to make a decision right away."


    I let the two of them discuss about the whole experiment while I took another paper and wrote something.


    Shirley doesn''t know what to do since the decision about the babies need to be made by the parent. So she peeked at what I''m writing. She was so shocked to see what it is.


    She asked me about what I wrote but I said I''ll tell everyone whether Marie will decide to go with the experiment or not.


    "We decided to try it. I won''t let either of them died."


    "Albert?" I asked Albert.


    "Marie is the boss at home. I''ll support her decision."


    "Fine. Now, what''s Marie''s element that either anyone here has?"


    "Hmm? It''s ice element. Shirley has it." Marie answered honestly.


    "Good. Do you have an ice element magic stone with you?"


    "There are some here. I never used them after I got pregnant."


    "Alright. You know about one for two cultivation method, right?" I asked them.


    "It''s when one magic stone is used to cultivate by two mages at the same time."


    Marie answered correctly.


    "Right. It''s simr to that. I want Marie to cultivate normally, and Shirley to channel the mana during cultivation into the girl fetus. But I need to teach you about magic control first."


    I taught the three of them about magic control like how I taught Ka and the others.


    Then I gave Albert the paper I just wrote. It''s about practicing magic control.


    "Having magic control make you able to use minimum amount of mana to cast more powerful magic. But it also help in channeling your magic during your cultivation into a certain part of the body. It was used when someone got a curse in his right arm that made him unable to cultivate and improve his magic. Then when he cultivating, he make sure that the mana spread won''t enter his right hand. He seeded. After that case was known, most pregnant women who were a mage, would cultivate without letting the magic spread in their body entered the womb.


    If Marie has a good control, she might be able to do it on her own. But time is limited. Her due date should be around 6-7 weeks. That''s why we need someone with the same element as her to help. Shirley, can you do it?"


    I asked Shirley who listened closely.


    "I can! I will do it!"


    "Good. Then let''s do it now. If there''s a chance of failure, we''ll stop the experiment right away."


    And so, Marie started cultivating and Shirley helped channeling the mana inside Marie''s body into the baby. I helped them to point where the baby is. And Albert watched us worriedly.

 Chapter 89 - More Confused About Aura

    "WOOHOOO! We did it!"


    I yelled happily when the experiment was a sess. Although we don''t know yet if both babies will be delivered safely, at least with this, Marie will have a chance to deliver both babies safely.


    "Why are you the one so surprised? Isn''t this your n?" asked Albert with a huge smile on his face.


    "You two are the one who''s being too excited! It was us girls who worked hard, you know?" said Shirley.


    "Now that you have experienced it, I want you two to do it more until the due date. Hopefully both babies will be fine. Now, do you have anyone you can trust with delivering both babies?" I asked Albert.


    "Hmm¡­ you''re right. Everyone already knows that Marie is pregnant with just a child. If she suddenly gave birth to two babies, it will give everyone a shock. Even more if they know that someone is actually use Marie as an experiment."


    "You gave me the permission to do it, so you''re an aplish."


    I replied to Albert''s remark.


    "How about you do it?"


    "Me?! I''m busy and I need to return to where I came from. Maybe if Marie hasn''t gave birth in a month, I can return. But I make no promises."


    "That''s fine. Then pleasee in a month whether she has given birth to the babies or not."


    I nodded to Albert''s request to help delivering the babies next month.


    "Then, I''ll take my leave."


    "How? Your scream should have alerted the guards. Some of them should be here anytime soon." said Albert.


    "That''s okay. As long as we''re indoor, I can defeat most of the guards."


    "You''re trying to kill my guards? Just jump out of the window or something!"


    "Well, I will only kill those with explosives inside their mouth. You don''t mind, right?"


    I asked permission from Albert to kill. But seems like he won''t give it.


    "¡­don''t kill anyone. At least not yet. Let them live. I''ll take care of everything. Isn''t that what you want? As for Tim, I''ll just tell everyone that you trespass the king''s chamber to kill him because of personal vendetta. You will bebeled as criminal. But it should be fine since you''re in disguise, right?"


    "If that''s what you want. Then, I''ll take my leave. See you next month. And don''t forget to cultivate."


    After reminding Marie and Shirley to cultivate, I left the chamber via the window.


    I left the capital quickly as I saw the guards entered the king''s chamber with my Divine Vision.


    I entered the forest where I camped. Then Victoria leave my body and transformed into her human form.


    "That was surprising! To hear that the queen''s baby has that kind of condition. Even more, most of the thing you practiced since yesterday were all useless! Why did you have to practice if you ended up adlibbing?"


    "More importantly, what do you think about the king''s lie detector skill? Is he an aura user?"


    How could anyone has a special ability like aura user without awakening their aura?


    "I don''t know much, but¡­"


    "I don''t know much, you don''t know much, Sonia doesn''t know much. Actually, how much was known about aura in the first ce?"


    "¡­who knows? I don''t."


    "I know you don''t, but you can continue."


    "You don''t have to stop me in the first ce if you just want toin¡­"


    Victoria then tells me about a rumor she doesn''t know much about in the past.


    Back when she was still alive, she heard a rumor about continuing special abilities after the owner''s death. It was so that the future generation of the aura user can have multiple special abilities.


    Victoria thought that Albert should be a descendant of an aura user.


    "I might be wrong, but who knows if someone actually seeded in doing it?"


    "Yeah, who knows? I bet you don''t. Do you think that Albert can be an aura user as well?"


    "¡­who knows? I don''t."


    "Yeah, right¡­"


    What the hell? I thought having an aura and that''s that. Then I learned that I can have a special ability. Then I learned that special ability can develop. Then again, there''s a possibilities of special abilities being inherited by future generation.


    And I still can''t see the full potential of aura!


    Who should I ask? Most aura user are all dead. There''s one who died and became a monster, and another one who died and be a ghost.


    Cana I met another aura user or former aura user again in the future?


    I hope whoever or whatever they are, they will know more about aura usage.


    First I have to ask Sonia about it first, shouldn''t I? Maybe she knows more than Victoria. And since she also has many lovers, she should be able to get more information from her lovers than Victoria who stayed single.


    "I''ll go sleep now. We''ll be returning to Cassau tomorrow morning. Transform into a bed."


    "You know what? I think I''m the one who slept with you the most without ever having sex. Although you never had sex with anyone yet."


    "You want me to have sex with you? Here? In the wild?"


    "¡­no thanks. The atmosphere also need to be right. And we''re not a lover yet so not now. But I want to ask you something. Why you have nevery a hand on your lovers? Even though Sophie would always sleep with you?" Victoria asked.


    "Well, although I''m in my fifteen years old self, my mentality is that of an adult. That''s why I can endure it. But in my past life¡­ I''m a regr customer at a cheap brothel. I haven''t had sex with either with Ka and Sophie yet because I know that their feeling is less of a love and more of a dependence. They are confused one with the other."


    That''s right. Ka depend on me because I saved her on our first encounter. And when she confessed to me, it was so casual. I felt her sincere feeling, but it was not totally the feeling of love of a woman toward a man. More like she feels like she can rely on me. That''s why I know she''s not ready yet for a physical rtionship.


    As for Sophie, she also rely on me. Although I can feel more love from her than from Ka. But I feel like if I end up having sex with her, she will start to think of me simr to her clients. Men who only wants her for her body. That''s why I haven''ty my hand on her yet. Both of them need some time.


    "Then why did you epted their confession? You can just reject them you know?" asked Victoria.


    "¡­when I heard from Ka that I can freely build a harem for myself, I just have to ept her."


    "Why?"


    "It''s most men''s dream to have a harem! That''s why! Then what about your confession?"


    "Me? You''re just my type. That''s all."


    "See? I have two girlfriends and one on the way. But their feeling of love aren''t the kind of love between man and woman. Does that mean I have to be in physical rtionship with them even though they still don''t understand their own affection toward me is that of a reliance?"


    "I think sex should only happen when two parties have mutual agreement. Whether it''s love or prostitution, both parties need to be consent. Now that you mentioned it, I think you''re right that you haven''ty a hand on the girls yet."


    "Yeah. The most we have done as a lover is just kissing. And sleeping together."


    Victoria seems to be pondering about something.


    "Then why would they hurriedly confessed to you when they haven''t figure out their own feeling?"


    "Who knows? I don''t. Aren''t you supposed to know since you''re also a girl?"


    "Don''t forget that I''m an over a thousand years old granny as well. I don''t know what''s in the mind of kids their age."


    "But you have a fellow disciple who''s getting lovers¡­ or more like collecting lovers."


    "¡­she''s a rare case. I could never tell what''s on her mind."


    "Do you think that now she''s dead, she''s changed?"


    "I don''t think she will seduce people anymore since she''s afraid of you killing her because she values her life¡­ her ghost life¡­ her existence? Well, unless she found an extremely good looking ghost I hope."


    Then we continued chatting pointless topic until I fell asleep.


    "Huhuhu¡­ looking at your cute sleeping face is why you''re my type."


    I couldn''t hear what Victoria said as my consciousness disappear and I entered a dream realm.


    I woke up the next morning and prepared to return to Cassau after breakfast.


    No. I need to call it home soon. After I return to Melk, I will get Daniel and the others to move to our new house. Daniel would be happy.


    "Alright, Victoria¡­ I mean Blobby. Let''s go home."


    I hope the king and the queen are doing fine. He has a lot of things that he needed to take care and I just added more works for him. It''s better than having the kingdom betrayed by its own people.

 Chapter 90 - Ridiculously Easy Rescue

    It has been a two days since I left the capital. The king should be busy right now looking for the criminal who killed his secret guardian.


    Well, the king should be fine. It was the guards and other people who should be busy looking for ''Ninja''. The king will make it as if Tim died because of personal vendetta.


    Even so, the guards and the court will still be busy after knowing that there''s someone who can trespass the pce easily. And if my guess is right, Albert should be finding people he can trust and eliminating traitors. He used this chance while the pce is busy to eliminate the traitors at the same time.


    As for Marie, she should be resting. I also gave her a note about healthy nutritious food she can eat and good for both babies. Shirley should be helping her. Taking care of her needs. At least until they found someone they can trust.


    The king trust me so easily just because I never lied. Then just because of that, both his sister and his wife trust me as well. How can anyone be so trusting just like that?


    Oh wait! I also trust Ka and Ang after talking and hunting together for a few times. But I don''t have any lie detecting skill, which means I''m stupider than the king who trust me because he can detect lies.


    Let''s see everyone whom I have told about the future.


    First it was Victoria. She''s my partner so I think she''s fine.


    Then Ang and Ka. Ang used to be extremely hostile to the cult. But that was after a stampede in Melk. At the moment, she''s just a magic nerd teenage girl. As for Ka, She should be dead if I never met her. Other than me, she hates all men.


    After them, it was Sophie. I told her after she said she wants to join our party. Sometime I forgot that she was a prostitute. That means she had a lot of connection with various people who were her clients. Who knows if she has met anyone from the cult? I was so stupid to tell them my secret even though it hasn''t been long since we met.


    No matter how close I thought we were, I don''t think we''re close enough to actually tell them something so important.


    But who cares if I ended up having a harem?


    Harem with girls who actually doesn''t know their own feelings¡­ yet.


    I''ll take my time getting closer to them.


    Next is Lina. I don''t know if Sam realize that I''m from the future, but Lina knows. But she''s a weird one. She''s a maid with daddy issue who loves to be praised by me. As for Sam, as long as I gave her more profit, I don''t think she will care if I am from the future or even from the moon.


    After them, it was the king. Then the queen and king''s sister.


    It''s toote to regret telling them about my secret. Maybe in the future I will continue to tell someone else about my secret. Then it might spread to the cult one day and get me killed.


    Whatever the case, I''ll take care of it one by one in the future. If I can''t then I just need to run away.


    Now I can see Cassau. I can finally go home.


    That''s what I thought at first. I tried to use Divine Vision on the city to check on them but I can''t find them! Other than Sam who''s still in the city, no one else was there!


    Then I remembered about the party that got caved in. Maybe they''re over there at the dungeon.


    Since I was hurried to go home, it was still afternoon when we reached the dungeon.


    I no longer needed Divine Vision to see them because they are clearly over here, trying to clear up the rubbles.


    Maybe they thought since no one''s willing to help Ellen''s party, they will do it themselves. And they tried to clear the rubbles hoping that they can reach the party.


    "Dig more! Ka, dig more! This can also be used as a practice for earth element magic!"


    "We''re trying to rescue people, Ang. We''re not practicing. We''re rescuing people!"


    "But we can do both at the same time!"


    I can see that Ang and Ka both are digging little by little using their earth magic. They should have just dug for about 10 meters deep. But the fact that they haven''t found Ellen''s party meant that her party is much deeper.


    I looked below the ground and see that Ellen''s party is right under the area where Ang and Ka dug up. But they need to dig 20 more meters before they can rescue Ellen''s party.


    I can see Lina is here as well. She doesn''t do much, but her summon, Sunny, used her vine tentacles to carry the rubbles and help digging. Sophie is next to Lina watching because she''s not much of help with her magic.


    I can also see that several area nearby have been dug by other people. They are most likely digging for treasures.


    Ever since the dungeon was destroyed, many monsters are died. And since the dungeon is copsed, it was impossible for new monsters to spawn. And so, the dungeon''s life is over just a few days after being found. How stupid.


    All the treasures were still there so many people tries their luck by digging up from right above the dungeon. And I think some of them seeded since I can see several opened chests. But there are still a lot more underground.


    The funniest part was that the first party to enter the unexplored area after us can''t enjoy any of the treasures. In fact, it was their fault that the dungeon is destroyed.


    They refused to practice magic control and tried to monopolize the dungeon. But they got caved in instead. Now they have no choice but to rely on the people they rejected before. And no one else is willing to help them. Except for that loud girl I suppose. Since she hasn''t manifested her magic, bringing her here would only be a burden.


    I approached Lina and Sophie who were watching on Ka and Ang working.


    "Hey, yo! Been a while, huh?"


    "Hmm? Roy! You''ve returned!"


    "Master! Wee home!"


    "This is not our home though¡­ whatever. I''m home."


    I asked the situation to the two. And their answer is as I expected. No one is helping Ellen''s party other than us. And Ang and Ka both trying to dig until they reached Ellen''s party.


    "I guess I should help. But how?"


    "What do you mean how?! We thought to dy their death because we trust you to be able to rescue them! Don''t tell me you don''t have a n?!"


    Victoria suddenly spoke. She hasn''t been appearing all day today, and she wanted to help rescuing Ellen''s party. Maybe she wanted the reward offered by Ellen.


    "By the way, where''s the hole you entered through before?"


    "It was¡­ around that part. Don''t you have any n to help them?"


    Victoria pointed to a hole I can see a bit away from where Ang and Ka are digging.


    "I have a n but¡­ it involve me digging barehanded. What should I do if my nails broke?!"


    "That''s the least of your problem!"


    Victoria shouted so loud that Ka and Ang noticed us here. They stopped digging as soon as they saw us.


    "Ah! Roy is here!" It was Ka who noticed us first.


    "Roy! Come get them out of here!"


    "Master said he can''t have his nails broken. Please wait until Master found another n to get them out of here."


    It was Lina who replied Ang. She already know that I''m thinking of another n? What an amazing maid!


    "Forget about your nails! You almost got your arm cut and you perform a surgery on your own so you can reattach it, but you''re worried about your nails?!"


    "It was a dead or alive situation back then. Don''t you think if you asked anyone who has dug the nearby area to help you can rescue them faster?"


    "¡­seems like Ellen''s party is quite hated."


    "¡­Victoria. Enter the hole and cover the people under here with your body. Make it into a ball just big enough for them to enter."


    "What are you trying to do?"


    Victoria asked me but I didn''t answer her.


    "Ang, Ka. Both of you were holding back your magic because you''re afraid in case they got buried, right? If Victoria covered them all, you won''t have to worry about that. Now, go all out!"


    They went all out now knowing that Ellen''s party will be safe.


    Before, they were only digging up little by little. Now they''re digging up to more than one meters hole in one go. Their mastery of magic control are superb.


    The ground was unstable for a while because the area where Ellen''s party was is hollow and more rubles falling down. But Ang and Ka able to bnce themselves after a while.


    I see-through inside of Victoball (Victoria Ball) and see that Ellen''s party is fighting among themselves. Somehow, they are targeting Ellen. There''s one olddy there trying to stop their fighting to no avail. Is she the S-ranked hunter?


    "It''s funny how none of you thought about this. If only you did this on the first day, I can stay at the capital longer you know?"


    "What happened at the capital?" Sophie asked.


    "I''ll tell youter. Hmm? They have dug enough and can see Victoria. I''ll pull them out."


    The Victoball suddenly has a handle on the side that appear after being dug. I pulled it out with all my strength and the ball was thrown into the air.


    The ground now sinking because of it so I grabbed Ka and Ang who are still nearby and jumped out of the hole.


    "This is the most ridiculous rescue mission in the world¡­"


    I said to myself.


    Ka should be smart enough to think of this, but she didn''t. In fact, she choose to rely on me too much so she only think of letting them survive until I returned.


    I thought I already taught her almost everything, but I forgot to teach her how to be independence, huh?

 Chapter 91 - Terrible Party

    "¡­somehow I never thought of this n at all."


    Ka said while looking at the giant Victoball opened and the people inside are out.


    "I think you can be a good leader, but it was because we''re too close with Roy that we ended up always thinking of relying on him. We need to improve ourselves so we can be independent from him."


    Ang is right. They are too much relying on me. I thought that I had taught Ka many things, but I forgot one important thing. Being independence and stop relying on me too much.


    It''s fine to rely on me or anyone, but if they rely too much on another people, she will end up unable to do things that she should be able to do on her own. Maybe I should left them on their own more often.


    It''s good that Ang noticed it early.


    While Ka and Ang are thinking of how easy things could have gone had they be a little smarter and less reliant to me, Ellen''s party is fighting among themselves.


    "It was your fault! You should have known to not use powerful magic inside an enclosed space! You even did it knowing that underneath us are hollow area!"


    "My fault? If it wasn''t for me, the monsters would have killed all of us! Then it was you who emptied our food supply! They were supposed to be enough tost for a week and you emptied them in one day!"


    "I told you guys that we shouldn''t have enter the dungeon! I agree with Ellen to practice this so-called magic control and you refused it! Both of you were too hurried when you heard about the unexplored area and you choose to blindly enter!"


    Here is the situation. There are five members in Ellen''s party. Ellen, an olddy, someone else, someone else II, and the third someone else. I haven''t heard their names and I don''t care either.


    Someone else is ming someone else II for destroying the dungeon. The third someone else actually agree with Ellen to have Ka and Ang helped them in the first ce, but knowing that they''re here instead of practicing, the other three must be the one who choose to enter the dungeon right away.


    2 versus 3. So the 3 win.


    That mean Ellen and the third someone else against the olddy, someone else, and someone else II.


    Now that they''re out, the ming game begin. I don''t think they can stay as a party anymore. Aren''t they the one who saved loud girl''s vige? The loud girl would be sad knowing the party disbanded.


    The olddy tried to stop the fight while Ellen ignored them. She''s just happy to be out after almost a week without sunlight.


    "Alright, they have been rescued. Now let''s go home. I haven''t been able to sleep indoor at all since I left for the capital."


    "Oh, right! Did you buy souvenirs?" Ang asked.


    "Nope. Since I thought you girls are trying to help Ellen''s party, I thought to hurry up and return. Let''s go home instead of watching them fight. No matter how long we waited for them, they won''t say any thanks to us for helping them."


    "Okay then. Ellen! We''re going back now!" Ang shouted.


    "Wait, no!"


    Thanks to Ang, now the attention of Ellen''s party turned toward us. The olddy who tried to stop the fight also turned her head toward us.


    "You! You should have done this in the first ce! If only you didn''t take too long to rescue us! Then why did you put us in a small space! We got bruises from being thrown inside that small ball!"


    Shit. This is the part that I hate.


    Just like back in the past a patiente to me when I was a doctor in a small clinic. His arm was terribly infected by a disease and I had to amputate it. Then he me me for being unable to heal him. If I didn''t cut his arm, he would die once the disease will spread. But he didn''t listen. And in the end, I have to leave the city because he spread rumor about me being a quack doctor.


    Now I have to experience it with a group I just save?


    Well, it was actually Ka and the others who were being targeted now.


    Victoria is doing fine since she''s the oldest. She had more experi¡­ I thought of her being reliable because she had a lot of experience, but why did she end up punching that someone else II right in the nose. I think it''s broken.


    "Hey! We just saved your life! If you don''t like it I can kill you here!" Victoria said.


    "You broke my nose!"


    "Thanks for the rification. I am indeed just broke your nose. Maybe I should break the rest of your bones."


    Victoria said threateningly.


    "Roy. Can you stop Victoria from going wild?"


    Ange to me and ask me to stop Victoria.


    "No. In fact, I support her if she want to fight them all."


    "Why? You should stop it before things get worse!"


    "This is the consequences of your actions. Not me. You all decided to save them without knowing how terrible their personalities are. I''m just a bystander here. The one who agreed to save them wasn''t me. You should learn how to handle this because in the future, you might get into a worse situation."


    "So¡­ I should join the fight?" Ang asked.


    "Your choice. Mine is ignore them and go home quickly. But if you choose to join them, I''ll stay here and watch."


    Sophie and Lina seeing the situation get worse, approached me. They asked what happened. And since they are a bit older than Ka and Ang, and have more experiences dealing with people who has terrible personalities, they choose to watch the situation.


    But why is Victoria picked a fight with them? She was supposed to be the oldest one among us.


    Then it turned into someone else and someone else II fighting Victoria. There''s no way they can beat her barehanded. And it''s not like she will take any damage.


    Knowing the situation get worse, the olddy tried to stop the fight to no avail. She doesn''t even try her best to stop the fight, huh? I guess she''s a terrible person as well.


    The third someone else together with Ellen looked at the situation and walked over toward me.


    "Roy, thank you for saving us."


    "Thank you and I''m sorry that they ended up like that."


    Ellen and the third someone else said their gratitude for us saving them. They also apologize because of their attitude.


    "I didn''t do much. It was Ang and Ka who did the most."


    "Right. Ang, Ka, thank you for saving us. We will pay you handsomely."


    Ellen said her gratitude toward the girls.


    Why can''t it just be ''we will pay you, handsome''?


    "But next time you choose someone to get us, please don''t let them be too loud." said Ang.


    Too loud, huh? Oh, right!


    "That loud girl¡­ are you the one who helped her vige?"


    "Huh? Yes we were, but how did you know?"


    "It was me who wrote the message on the ground."


    "It was you?! Jewel had been looking you ever since! She said she wants to learn more from you. And it was thanks to your message that we can easily handle the bandits. Because of that, we werebeled as heroes since the leader of the bandit is infamous. By the way, my name is Jessica."


    It was the third someone else who exined to me. So her name is Jessica.


    "Well, I thought that if you''re her heroes, then howe your party has terrible personalities?"


    "Umm¡­"


    Ellen and Jessica looked at each other, then Jessica started exining to me how they ended to be that way.


    Their party is called dius with the olddy as the leader. Other than the olddy, all the other members are changed frequently.


    She made the party to be all-women only and most of the members she picked are those with hatred toward men. Although not all of them really hated men, they got influenced by the olddy''s hatred toward men. That was why Ellen''s attitude toward me on the first time we met was horrible.


    That mean they all have terrible attitude from the beginning if someone nted hatred inside of them. At first it was just toward men, then it ended up to everyone else. Although they are still good toward girls. That was why they helped the loud girl.


    "So the olddy gathered women with terrible attitude from the beginning?"


    "¡­although I want to say you''re wrong, that''s the truth. Sorry for being harsh on you before." Ellen bowed her head and apologizes.


    "It''s okay. It was fun to have someone to tease. At least you didn''t try to attack me."


    I looked over at Victoria who''s still arguing with the others. Well, she''ll be fine. Age-wise, she has more experience than that olddy. I think it will be over soon.


    "Let''s ignore Victoria and go home. Or you girls want to join them?"


    I asked Ang and Ka.


    "¡­no thanks. Let''s just go home," said Ka.


    "What about you two?" this time, I asked Ellen and Jessica.


    "We''re returning as well. As for them¡­ I think I''ll leave the party. I can''t stay any longer with them." Ellen replied.


    "Me too. I have never liked Tiffany from the beginning." Said Jessica.


    "Tiffany?"


    "That girl." Jessica pointed at one of the girl arguing with Victoria.


    "So it''s someone else II¡­"


    "What?"


    "Nothing. Just talking to myself."


    It''s not like we will meet again in the future.


    Oh, wait!


    "Wait! About that loud girl. Can you please tell her to lower the volume of her voice if she wanted to see me?"


    "¡­we have tried to tell her to do so many times. We failed¡­" Ellen sighed.


    Well, damn!

 Chapter 92 - More Learning

    "Alright then, goodbye!"


    I waved my hand and said farewell to Jessica and Ellen.


    "Wait! You don''t want to stop them?"


    Ellen asked me why I''m not stopping Victoria from arguing.


    "Hmm? She''s free to do whatever she wants to do. Once she''s got bored, she will go home. And I can just summon her anytime I want since she''s my summon."


    "¡­okay. It''s weird now that I think about it. They are actually arguing with a monster. So weird¡­ We will stay for a bit and tell Nana that we''re quitting the party. " said Jessica.


    This time, we said our farewell for real. I together with Ang, Ka, Sophie, and Lina who has unsummoned Sunny, went home together. Ellen and Jessica choose to stay and told their party that they''re leaving the party for good. Which means Victoria will catch up soon.


    As for Ellen''s party¡­ dius wasn''t it? I never heard that name in my previous life. I guess they must have been disbanded. Seeing how they can''t get along among themselves it''s obvious that they will disband. I guess that''s why that olddy doesn''t even try her best to stop her party members.


    As for Ellen and Jessica in my previous life¡­ I don''t remember having heard their name either. I should have collect more information in my past life.


    It has been only a few months since I time travelled, but I have regretted that Icked information too many times.


    As soon as we arrived at our new home, I called for Sonia and summoned Victoria.


    "You''re talking about age, now?! I''ll tell you I''m at least a thousand year older than you! Wait! Where did they go?"


    Seems like the argument getting more and more heated if she started to talk about her own age.


    "You''re still fighting?"


    "Yeah! That olddy decided to side with those spoiled girls! Why did you summoned me too soon?!"


    I ignore her question and looked at Sonia instead.


    "How is it? Can you undo your own magic?"


    "Umm¡­ should I really undo it?" Sonia asked me.


    "What''s wrong?"


    "I just¡­ imagined that if my magic was undone, I will disappear. I don''t want that."


    "Well, it''s fine. As long as you never charmed people I care, I don''t mind if your magic stays. There''s also one thing I''d like for you to tryter, but we have something important to discuss."


    I sat at the sofa in the living room with Victoria and Sonia stays floating in the air. The other girls also seems interested in our discussion, they choose to stay and listening closely to our talks.


    "I have two things I want to talk with you two. First, tell me everything you know about aura. Second, tell me everything about the person who killed you two. There might be more questionster but those two are the most important things for me at the moment."


    I raised both my index finger and middle finger.


    The slime and the ghost looked at each other and then they tell me everything they know about aura first.


    About Aura, no one truly knows everything about it. Some says that it''s a substitute for magic. But the fact that even some Expert level mage in the past can use Aura as well, that theory was discarded. As for Master level mage, even in the past those people are rarities.


    Then, Aura wasmonly used for body and weapon reinforcement. Covering the whole body or part of the user''s body, aura will increase the strength, endurance, and speed of the user''s body. When used it on weapons or tools. They can be sharper and had stronger defense.


    Those are what I already learnt from my previous life. That was why I got overconfident and got myself killed. I thought that just by reinforcing my strength alone are enough for me to join the war even though I have never kill anyone before.


    After I had my first kill, I didn''t think much of it and got used to killing already. But in the end, I got myself killed. Although I already killed the one who''s responsible for my death, I still shouldn''t get cocky again.


    After returning to the past and awakened my magic element, surprisingly two of them, I practiced my body so that I could manifest my Aura again. I improved my physical ability surprisingly fast and finally able to manifest my Aura just a few months after that.


    When I said it to Victoria and Sonia, they don''t think it was too surprising for my growth in strength and stamina to increase rapidly.


    "Roy, I think it was mainly because of your air element. Just like how ice element mage can resist cold and fire element mage can resist heat, air element mage can unknowing to the mage themselves, increase the amount of oxygen taken to their lungs and spread in their blood. That''s should be what happened to you. The increase of oxygen in your blood can improve your physical strength rapidly." Victoria exined.


    "I don''t get what she''s talking about, but it''s amon sense for us in the past that air element mage can improve their strength faster than any other element. That was why most kids in the past wanted to have air element so they can be the strongest once they manifest their Aura." Sonia continued Victoria''s exnation.


    So air element was so popr in the past, huh? Although they were rare, Aura user who has air element were much more stronger physically than those with other elements. Although in the end, it depend on the people themselves.


    And more importantly, we now know that introductory school actually didn''t teach much in magic lesson. Mostly teaching about writing, reading, arithmetic, and history. As for magic, they only taught us themon sense like you cultivate like this, this element is useful, that element is weak to this element, and so on.


    Even Ang just realize how she feel different right now.


    "So the reason I don''t sweat much anymore is because of fire element¡­ I usually sweat a lot during the day. No wonder it was actually from my fire element¡­ or maybe ice element?" said Ang.


    We continued about the next use of Aura. Once people awaken their Aura, they can get special ability that their heart desire but the Aura user themselves doesn''t know about it. And they need to defeat the enemy with ability simr or the same with the ability their heart desired.


    Ang wanted to fly so she gained a pair of wings. Sonia wanted to seduce men so she''s able to use charm magic to seduce men. I wanted to have be better in decision making so I gained ability to see everything.


    And these abilities can grow more by defeating enemies, whether they are humans or monsters, with the simr abilities with what the Aura users have.


    Then the third uses of Aura is materialize it. Aura user can materialize weapon or tools with their own Aura. They can also use it to lengthen the de of a sword, or even making a steps in the air. This is how Aura user can run in the air. Once Aura users get into this stage, none of them carrying weapon anymore.


    I haven''t been able to use this yet. They told me that I need to be more powerful until I can walk on air. Maybe my air element magic can help me to walk on air. But I also need to raise its level as well. Where can I find air element magic stones?


    "I don''t know where you can find them but I know how to make them."


    "What?!"


    I was surprised to hear that I can make my own air element magic stones on my own from Sonia. And looking that Victoria is surprised as well, I don''t think she knows about it.


    "Do you remember the ghost you exorcised before? Mr. Handsome with the perfect smile?"


    "¡­that''s a long nickname there. Was he an air element mage?"


    "Yes, he was. He''s also a rich man who sells air element magic stones for money. Although air element mages are rare, he became rich by putting a high price on things he created."


    So, that ghost with a long-ass nickname was an air element mage who somehow unable to awaken his Aura. He''s making a living by selling expensive air element magic stones to Aura users with air element magic.


    Sonia continued exining how to make the magic stones. It was quite simple. I just need a powerful container andpress the air inside of that container as much as possible after putting some magic stones in it. Any type of magic stones is good because their elements can be changed into air element. But using a normal magic stones without any element in it will make the qualities of the air element magic stones higher.


    Right now, most normal magic stones that have no elements are used by researchers for creating magical tools like. That was why I never see them in my previous life as well. Once a location of where such magic stones can be mined are found, the kingdom took control of it. That was why normal magic stones are much more difficult to find than other elements.


    Maybe the unknown magic stones I gave to Sam from the dungeon are normal magic stones? Victoria doesn''t know about it but maybe Sonia can.


    After putting magic stones inside a powerful container andpressed the air inside of it, and just by leaving it be for a few days, the elements inside the magic stones will change.


    Finally I found a way to improve my air element magic faster.

 Chapter 93 - Story From Fairy Tale

    Powerful container, huh? I think I can use the materials like the ones I made for the oxygen tank from the time I fought the All-seeing Eye.


    "Sonia, can we awaken our Aura as well?" Ka asked.


    She was interested in Aura as well. Because of herck of offensive power, she used a spike from earth magic as a rapier. If she has Aura ability as well, she will be more powerful.


    "That''s a difficult question. Back then, we have a way to know whether someone has potential in awakening their Aura or not. And even those with potential, only few percent of them actually managed to awaken their Aura. But there are some who actually doesn''t have the potential at first, but somehow managed to awaken their Aura even though their Aura is much weaker than average Aura user."


    Sonia exined. But why is Victoria listening closely as if she doesn''t know it?


    "Victoria, why do you act as if you don''t know it? Shouldn''t you be getting your potential tested as well? And why don''t you know about it?"


    "Well, I don''t remember it. I do remember watching something interesting though." Victoria replied.


    Then Sonia tells Victoria what happened in the past.


    "We were being tested at the same time! How did you forget?"


    "Actually, how was our master conduct the test? I only remember of seeing something good."


    "He grabbed our waist, inject a little bit of his Aura into our body while looking straight into our eyes. How could you forget that? He said that if he could see the trace of his Aura in our eyes, it means we have potential to awaken our Aura. That was the method he learned from his master," exined Sonia.


    "Ooh¡­ so that''s what it was. No wonder I felt like I watched something good¡­"


    Seeing Victoria had a weird smile, I realized what happened.


    "Sonia. Did you have other fellow disciple as well? Boys perhaps?"


    "Hmm? Yes. We have several boys and girls training together. Although some of them didn''t have potential at first, about two or three of them managed to awaken their Aura. Of course the most talented at the time was me and Victoria."


    "¡­no wonder she was so happy."


    "What''s wrong?" Sonia asked.


    "Victoria¡­ she''s¡­ a weird girl who loves to watch men getting intimate with other men¡­"


    "¡­no wonder she forgot about it. I remember how she intensely watching while master is testing other disciples."


    Over a thousand years passed already and she never changed. I truly wish she wasn''t like that.


    Now I''m worried! She said that I''m her type, but in what?! Her type in her imagination for being with¡­ other men?


    HELL NO!


    I should think carefully before I answered her confession!


    "What''s wrong, Roy?"


    Ka is worried about me who suddenly stopped talking.


    "Nothing! Sonia, can I try that with everyone here? I want to see if they have potential or not."


    "Not yet. Your Aura is still not good enough. If you''re doing it badly, you might end up killing them. Master said that it need precise control over Aura to do it. Even some Aura user who''s much stronger than master is unable to do it."


    "I see. I thought I could finally build an army of Aura users for myself. Well, maybe in the future I can."


    "Improving Aura ability takes a long time. Even if you trained hard, it might take you more than fifty years before you can do it. Everyone has different limit in their potential. Maybe you have reached your limit right now. Or maybe you can only grow after you reach 70s. The rate of aura users'' growth are all different from each other."


    Does that mean I might already reached my limit?


    Doesn''t matter. There are still many things I can do even if my Aura hits the limit. I can practice other weapon, using magic tools, improving my air and summoning element, and learn all kind of knowledge.


    I guess I have to give up on building an army of Aura users for now.


    This is my second life. I know by now that no knowledge is unnecessary. The ones that seems unnecessary at first, actually they were just knowledge that no one have found where they need be used yet. Even if they will never be used, they are important.


    And I used my time poorly in my past life. I only learned things from rumors. Even the knowledge about magic control, I learned it because one of my patient told me about it. If at that time he didn''t enter my clinic, I won''t be able to get this far in this life.


    "Well, is that all you two know about Aura?"


    I asked both Sonia and Victoria.


    "Yes. That''s all I remembered. If there''s other things I remember, I''ll tell you about it." said Sonia.


    "Good. Now about the one who killed the two of you. Tell me everything you know."


    The first one who tells me was Sonia.


    Just like what she told me before, she was seduced by the mage who ended up killing her. Before she died, the mage told her that he wanted to kill all Aura users.


    "¡­for someone who seduces men easily, how can you be seduced by a guy?"


    "¡­I''m weak toward yboy. That wasn''t the first time I got seduced, but back then, I could still seduce them and make them be my lovers. But for that mage, he killed me after he learned everything I know about Aura. I don''t even remember his name or his face."


    How stupid. A seductress easily seduced? And she ended up being killed. That''s a stupid way to die.


    Next is Victoria. Just like she told me when we first chatted just after I summoned her for the first time. She already heard rumor of a mage who targeted Aura users. And so, she tried to run away. To a ce where no one knows that she is an Aura user.


    But she failed to escape the mage''s grasp. She fought him for a while, but in the end, she lost. She asked him why he''s aiming for Aura users, and he told her that he wanted to be a god. He doesn''t want anyone to have power stronger than him. And he also said that Victoria is thest one.


    Was that mage is the same one who killed Sonia?


    No one knows. But there''s a possibilities of that mage who killed Victoria and Sonia is the same. Probably, that mage killed Sonia first after asking about Aura, then started killing Aura users until that mage finally killed Victoria.


    Then, I noticed that Sophie is thinking deeply about something.


    "Sophie? What''s wrong?"


    "Hmm¡­ I think I know that story. I have something simr in books I bought for Daniel to read. Let me get it first."


    She stood up and went to her own room. We all sipping the drinks Lina prepared who knows when.


    Sophie returned shortly after carrying several books.


    "These are the books I nned to read to Daniel so he can learn to read and write. They are all fairy tales. And this one is simr to the mage Sonia and Victoria told us."


    I remember now!


    I''ve read that book before. I had it in my clinic in case my patients will have to wait in line for their checkup. Unfortunately, my clinic wasn''t popr and I''m the only one who read the books.


    The story is about a hero defeating evil viins. Amon story for children.


    Now that Sophie mentioned it, she was right. And this book is one of many books that tells about Aura. But I thought in the past that it was just a fiction.


    Now I read it again, the hero is most likely that mage who killed Aura users and the viins are depicted to be humanoid using weapon and unique ability. Some of the viins'' abilities is to strengthen their physical ability called Aura. And one of the reason why I first named it Aura before I actually know that it was really called Aura when I summoned Victoria.


    It started with the hero mage returned home to see that his friend was seduced by a subus and died soon after his life force is absorbed by the subus. Then the hero decided to seduce the subus and killed her.


    "Doesn''t this part very simr to Sonia''s story?"


    "But I have never seduced his friend! Even if I had, I never absorbed my lover''s life force! I only absorb those who are too ugly in my harem. Wait! Maybe his friend is ugly." Sonia protested.


    "This story might be rted to the truth. But it was changed for entertainment so the author turned the mage into hero. Even thest viin in the story is one with multiple pairs of wing. Just like Victoria." I said.


    "Does that mean¡­"


    "Yes. History is being altered. But it might just be our assumption." I answered Ka before she finished her words.


    The one who killed Aura users ended upbeled as hero, while Victoria and other Aura users became viins.


    This might be a real history, but it ended up as a fairy tale. I need to know more.


    "Hey. If anyone here encounter any monsters or ghosts that can speak, ask them about Aura first. Who knows if they are actually Aura users from the past?"


    At least I hope the next Aura user is a human being. I want to learn more about Aura and the one who hunted all Aura users.

 Chapter 94 - Way Of Distant Communication

    "I believe, this is a really old fairy tale. But have either of you read about this story when you both still alive?"


    I asked both Victoria and Sonia who had stayed in this world much longer than most people. Probably even the two oldest being in this world.


    "Nope. But if it''s about story, Victoria should have known better than me." Sonia pointed at Victoria and tell me it''s better to ask Victoria instead.


    I looked at Victoria and she exined.


    "Back then, other than hunting monster, I love to read and write stories. Some of the books Sophie brought here were written by me. Like ''Beauty and the Rich'' and ''Cloud White''. Those were originally written by me, but there might be some changes after a thousand year."


    "Seriously? You wrote a story?" I was shocked to hear that. And Sophie seems interested in it.


    "I just giarized from fairy tales from my original world. I also wrote other stuffs using different alias."


    "What other stuffs?"


    I didn''t know that I would ask something I would regret.


    "Stories about rtionship between men! In fact, I also wrote something simr by using a character with the same characteristic as Roy as the protagonist!"


    "Rip them apart! Burn them! Soak them into water and use it as fertilizer! Then burn all the harvest you make from any nt that use those fertilizer!"


    Some things shouldn''t exist in this world¡­ in any world!


    One thing I know about Victoria''s original world is that no onecked imagination! But I think there should be limit to how wild their imagination is!


    "Huhuhu¡­ no way! Even if all of them got destroyed, you could never destroy ideas! I can make a new one again no matter how many times you destroy them all!"


    "No one can stop her from doing what she desired. Not even our master in the past. Just give up."


    Sonia told me to just give up. There''s really nothing I can do about it. I''ll just check Victoria''s room regrly from now on.


    "By the way, I already have a sponsor. I sent some rough drafts to Hill in Mellian anonymously and he will support me. In fact, it was him who want the protagonist to be simr to you. He also¡­"


    "Enough! Let''s get back to the topic already! Have you read this story in back when you''re alive?!"


    I pointed at the book about the mage hero and Victoria shook her head.


    "I''ve read almost every stories at that time, but I never read this one."


    "So that means this story hasn''t existed yet when you''re alive. But this story was an old one that should have been modified many times. That means the original writer wrote this book around the time after you died. Maybe if we could find the original story, we will know if it''s the truth or not."


    That''s the first step to know the truth.


    The original author should be dead a long time ago. And even if we look for the current version of the book''s author, we won''t find much. But maybe it will be helpful.


    "If anyone can find the author of the current version, let''s ask him. What''s his name again? Uneaten Beef? It''s a pseudonym, huh?"


    "There''s a chance that the author has other aliases like I did. Maybe something simr like Raw Beef, Rare Beef, Medium Rare Beef, Well Done Beef, or Livestock." Victoria said


    "Can we find a clue if we ask the publisher or seller?"


    "Maybe, but don''t forget that they are just giarizing book from the past. Even if we found the current version''s author, he might not know anything about the truth."


    Maybe I could ask historian about it? When we return to Melk, I''ll try asking history teacher about hero. There wasn''t any history telling us about heroes, but historian might have a clue.


    "Hey, is it so important to know about the past? It was all just your assumption that the one who killed Sonia and Victoria are rted to the current Evil God, right? What if you''re wrong then?"


    "¡­Ang is right. I think we should focus on the present. I also have asked the king to take care of the cult. Let''s just improve our strength and study more for now. But if any of you find something rted to what we''re talking here, please tell me about it."


    This conclude the two questions I was curious about the most right now. First is that there might be more uses in Aura than what we know at the moment. Then the one who killed Sonia and Victoria might be the same Evil God we''re fighting against. Although it''s just a possibility.


    But at least we learned a lot today. Which is good.


    "Umm¡­ What''s the thing you wanted to ask me?"


    Sonia timidly asked me.


    "Oh! I almost forgot. In the past, you casted a charm magic to thisnd, right? Then you stuck in this ce forever, right? Can you still cast that magic now?"


    "Umm¡­ no. Sorry."


    "I don''t mind. Then what if we take a part of thisnd and carry it around with us. Will you be able to travel then?"


    "Hmm? I don''t know."


    "Then let''s try it."


    Since in the first ce there was no building here, I have to destroy the floor first to get some dirt from the ground under this building.


    I walked to the center of this building, in the living room, and punched a hole on the ground.


    I asked Lina to get me a container where I can put some of the dirt into, and she gave me a cup from the kitchen. Good enough.


    I grabbed a bit of the ground and pour it into the cup I''m holding.


    "I''ll jump to the next building carrying this. Sonia, try to follow me!"


    "Okay!"


    Walking through the front door with a ghost will make everyone''s shocked, so I get to the third floor''s window so I could jump to the rooftop of our neighbor''s building.


    I looked at Sonia who expectant of the result. I guess a thousand years locked in one ce will make her bored and want to see outside of this building.


    "Ready?"


    "Yes!"


    Everyone stayed in the living room because I told them to stay. They don''t have toe with me for these. Even Victoria is staying.


    I jumped outside andnded on neighbor''s rooftop. And¡­ Sonia follows me!


    She''s finally able to leave that building!


    "I''m moving? I''m moving! I can go anywhere now!"


    "Yeah. You can go anywhere with someone who always carrying some dirt. I''ll try with smaller amount now and leave this cup here."


    I put the cup at the top of the rooftop and put a bit of dirt onto my hand. I clenched my fist tightly so no dirt will leave my hand.


    This time, I tried to go further away. I left the city by jumping from building to building and left the city without anyone noticing. It was easy because of my 360 degree vision.


    Maybe because I killed some small monsters Victoria collected and caged at home right after returning, I can see a bit further with my 360 degree vision.


    Should I eat appraisal magic tools so I can appraise items with my eyes? I don''t think I will. If I failed to get appraising eyes, I just ended up with stomachache. Then I shat magic tool. That''s scary.


    I ran to the outside with Sonia beside me. Of course with my vision I can see her without turning my head. Knowing that she can follow me this far with just a pinch of dirt, maybe my n can work here.


    "Alright. This is far enough."


    "Aaah! This is the first time I''m so far away from that building! I missed the forest after all this time!"


    "Well, you can enjoy the sightter. I have something else I want you to try. Can you return to our home instantly from here?"


    "Hmm?"


    "Try to go home directly and ask Victoria to say something weird. Then transport to where the cup from before is. If possible, grab the cup and transport here again. See if you can bring the cup with you. Oh! Try toe here only after I tell you to!"


    "You mean like teleportation? And what do you mean by after you telling me?"


    "I''ll talk to the dirt and see if it can reach you. If I can''t reach you, wait few seconds after you reach the cup to return here."


    "I''ll try!"


    As soon as she said it, she disappear.


    This distance is still within the range where my Vision Divine can see into our home. I looked at our home direction and see it was a sess! She''s currently asking Victoria to say something weird!


    Why did I have to ask her to say something weird? Because she''s a weirdo. I just want to see if Sonia can carry messages from one end to another. And Even if I told Victoria to say something good, she might just say something weird in the end.


    Sonia then disappear from our house and appear on the next building. Then I bring the dirt in my hand close to my mouth and trying to tell Sonia toe here.


    Sonia tried to grab the cup but she failed. So she pretend to hold the cup on her hand and teleported here.


    She appear here with a weird posture like she''s holding a sword on her hand. Why is she holding a cup like she''s wielding a sword? Maybe her main weapon is a sword in the past.


    "I can''t bring the cup, but I seeded in teleporting. I can tell that you''re speaking something from that little bit of dirt but I don''t know what you''re saying. And Victoria said ''Roy X Hill is a good shipping''."


    "That''s great! Not Victoria''s word. Everything apart from that is good even without the cup. Let''s go home now."


    "¡­Sure." Sonia seems dejected knowing she had to go home just as soon as she can go outside.


    "Don''t worry. You can follow me or anyone elseter when we''re going outside."


    Sonia didn''t teleported like before. She instead choose to follow me and see the outside world. That was why I went home slowly.


    Back at home, I told everyone what I want to do with this experiment.


    "I want everyone here to carry some dirt from thisnd with you at all time. Put some dirt inside a ne or a bag and carry with you at all time. That way we canmunicate with each other via Sonia."


    "I see! If we could have a way tomunicate, ident like before won''t happen again! We can just ask you how to deal with it so you won''t be in hurry to finish your business again!"


    "Ka is right. Even in the future, weck the means ofmunication. I have some ideas for those from the future, but for us, Sonia is enough."


    "Does that mean¡­"


    "Yes. Now you can follow anyone of us anywhere. We can contact you by talking to the dirt we''re carrying. Once you feel like someone called you, you have to go over there right away."


    "Okay!"


    Sonia seems happy now. And we also had a way tomunicate even from distance.


    Now no matter how long we''re separated, we can be in touch with each other.


    I don''t know the range in which Sonia can go to, but I hope it''s far.

 Chapter 95 - Something I Shouldnt Have Said

    "Hmm¡­ The smell of the sea!"


    "Can you even smell?"


    The day after returned home, I went for myst treasure hunting before returning to Melk. And like usual, the other has their own business to attend.


    Ka, Sophie, and Ang choose to cultivate. They realize how much they depend on me, so they need to improve their own strength first. I also wish to cultivate, but there''s no magic stonespatible with me at the moment.


    I asked Lina to find ne or any type of essories that we can fill them with dirt from thend where Sonia casted her magic onto, our home.


    I ask her if she can just cast another magic to the essories. She can do it, but the strength is too weak and Sonia can''t transport to the ce with such weak charm magic. What a difficult ghost.


    And so, I''m currently running on the surface of the sea while carrying a cup filled with dirt. That was how Sonia able to leave that building.


    And now she''s following me and keep quarreling with Victoria. I nned to leave the cup in an empty ind so she can enjoy being outside for a while.


    Victoria retorted to Sonia saying she''s smelling the smell of the sea even though she''s just a ghost. But can a slime smell as well?


    It is funny to see that a ghost and a slime talking with each other. No one would believe it that they were actually old friends. For the ghost Sonia, it''s normal I guess for human being died and became a ghost. But what about the slime?


    And as for what we discussed yesterday, I''ll just tell it to the king next month. Maybe he will know something.


    "So? So? What are you doing here?"


    The ghost is excited about ying outdoor for the first time in a thousand year. For a woman who seduces men and keep them as pets, she acted too childish some time.


    "I''m hunting for treasures. There are so many treasures under the sea untouched by people. Since I have both Aura and air element, under the sea is basically my yground! If not for the fact that there are monsters as well."


    "I see! You''re doing something one of my lover who disappeared a few years after we became ghosts did in the past!"


    Sonia continued.


    "He used to say that the sea is filled with treasures. He even so proud to find one ancient tool in the past and he keep bragging to my other lovers."


    "Before we continued, do you even remember the names of anyone of your lovers? I''m sad to know that all of them getting seduced by you and you never tried to remember their name." I said.


    "I don''t remember their name, but I make sure to give them nicknames."


    "Does those nicknames changed every time?"


    "¡­yes."


    So she doesn''t even try to remember their nickname, huh? Then what about that Mr. Handsome With Perfect Smile.


    "I just called them ording to my mood, how they look like, or how I got them to be my lovers. I also called them by how strong they are."


    No wonder that mage aiming for her first. Her power is too much! She can bring any men to their knees! If that mage leave her alone until she caught wind of what that mage''s aim for, there''s no chance at all for that mage to win. Sonia could gather all powerful men to kill that mage. Or maybe she could even seduce that mage if she had the chance.


    But unfortunately, she died before she can seduce the one who killed her. She acted stupid in front of people who flirted with her without knowing their real intentions. She never charmed them with charm magic unless they are her targets. But she feels good because she is their target so she leave them be.


    "We have reached that empty ind. I''ll leave this cup in that ind so Sonia can enjoy being outside until I return. If you''re bored, then you can just teleport back home on your own."


    "Okay!"


    I ran on the sea surface to that empty ind, and ced the cup under a tree so the wind can''t blow the dirt away.


    Then Sonia enjoying floating around the cup. She can''t get far from that cup so she only float around that cup.


    "Alright, I''m bored now. I''ll go back first. Call me if you need anything!"


    And poof! She''s gone.


    "¡­she was so insistent to follow us and when we''re here she''s gone? Your old friend has some annoying personality."


    "Well, she''s only interested in men. And in a different way from me." Victoria said.


    "I''ll be damned if the two of you interested in men the same way as you do. How can everyone in your world survive with so many of you?"


    "We keep our desire a secret from everyone. But with how advanced we were, we can keep in touch with anyone with the same desire without even meeting them in person."


    Maybe I could spread such invention to this world. I''ll ask herter.


    For now, let''s go get some treasures!


    Today, I only mainly looking for magic stones. Of course if there are other valuables then I''ll grab them as well. But for now, it''s time for magic stones. I want to increase the level of my air element magic so badly.


    There''s no interesting story to tell here. I''m just grabbing magic stones, most of them are water element magic stones, and gather them on the empty ind. I keep doing it until it started to get dark.


    Of course I defeated some monsters underwater. Although I learned how to fight with a broadsword underwater, I choose to use my self-repair spear. I let Victoria hunt monster on her own.


    This way, I can improve both my summoning element (hopefully) and my Divine Vision as well (probably).


    After all, there must be some monsters underwater with good vision. Especially in the deep part of the sea. Maybe I won''t need to close my eyes again when I move fast underwater.


    Once I think I found enough treasure, I swam around the bottom of the sea in case I found another sunken ship.


    I found some of them, but I''ll leave exploring that ship the next time I go diving. I just memorize where to go next time. I still need to find good material to make container so I can create air element magic stones.


    Then I return to the empty ind, grab the cup and some magic stones. I also found some jewelries to give Sam to sell. The amount is less than before since I''m mainly looking for magic stones, but I think it''s enough for a few months.


    Since I''m nning to go to the market first, I decided to not call Sonia. As for Victoria, I''ll just summon herter when I''m home.


    I returned by running on the sea surface. I choose a long route since I saw a ship with many mages on it. I think they want to try their luck with the sea demon, but they won''t find that sea demon. It was all just a huge misunderstanding!


    After reaching the city, I went to the market and bought the same material I used for my oxygen tank.


    After buying some, I return home. I left my bag filled with magic stones in my room, and did some experiment.


    I summoned Victoria who was still swimming, and transform her into a hammer to turn the material into a container. I want to make some air element magic stones as soon as possible.


    I make the container big enough to fit ten magic stones, and thick enough to endure thepressed air so it won''t explode.


    After finishing the first container andpressed air inside of it, I made some more until dinner time.


    During dinner, Lina gave us some essories for us.


    Everyone is here except for Sam who''s busy.


    "Most of what I bought are nes, but I have few earrings and bracelets as well."


    If I want one that doesn''t restrict my movement, I think I''ll choose the earring. But with the size being so small, can it contain enough dirt so Sonia can travel to?


    "The earring is too small. Not enough dirt to make me teleport there." Said Sonia after we tried it after dinner.


    Then everyone choose their own essories. Most of them choose bracelets. Victoria doesn''t need one because I can summon her and we can use the one I''m using. As for me¡­


    "I''ll take this belt buckle. It won''t restrict my movement. But¡­"


    "What''s wrong, master? Is there anything you''re not satisfied with? I''m sorry for choosing one that doesn''t fit your taste."


    "No, Lina. You''re doing well in choosing them. You''re not at fault here! It''s just that¡­ since my pants fit in just right on my waist, I never need any belt even in my previous live. So I just¡­"


    Snap!


    I think I heard something snapped.


    "Roy, does that mean you never gain weight? Even after you ate so many things?"


    "Umm¡­ yes? Ka, you''re scaring me."


    Then Victoria exined what''s wrong.


    "Roy, other than you, we are all women here. All of us loves sweets and worried about weight gain. Then you just said that you never worried about gaining weight. You just made an enemy with all the women here by saying that."


    Oh, shit!


    "Roy, I think you will sleep alone tonight. I''ll be borrowing Victoria as well."


    "Umm¡­ Sophie. Don''t be angry."


    "Roy. All of us will have a sleepover at Sophie''s room. Don''t you dare peek on us!"


    "Ka¡­"


    "Roy! I hate you!"


    "Umm¡­ Ang¡­ I have no other secrets¡­"


    "Master¡­ this is the first time I feel hatred toward you. No more dessert for you tonight."


    "No! Don''t take the pudding away! Lina!"


    "Roy, you''re the enemy of women."


    "You can''t say that to me if you can change your body shape however you like, Victoria!"


    "Umm¡­"


    "No! Ghost doesn''t have the right to speak now!"


    No one talked to me tonight. This is the first time I feel so lonely after returning to the past.


    I thought I was used to loneliness in my past live, but now, I''m used to have someone with me. So when no one talked to me, I felt so lonely.


    By the way, the pillow in my room is wet because of sweat. It''s not tears!

 Chapter 96 - The Ghost Meets The Kids

    "We''re here!"


    After a few days of travelling, Ka, Ang, Sophie, and I returned to Melk.


    Since the loot from myst treasure hunting is a lot, and should be enough for a month until I hunt more treasure, I returned to Melk.


    I''m going to tell Daniel and the others that our new home is being prepared. Lina is currently looking for someone to install a bathroom in our new house.


    We already have a bathroom, but we want to have a bigger bathroom.


    When I agree to have a bigger bathroom, I also said it''s much better because I can join the girls. Then Ang punched me in the gut.


    That was how we ended up building another bathroom in my room since it''s the biggest room in the building.


    As for the drainage system, Victoria is currently teaching Lina about the drainage system from her old world. She said she can''t teach everything, but it should be more than enough in this world.


    She never used that knowledge back when she was still alive because she always wanders around and almost never stayed in one ce for too long.


    Victoria also taught Lina about water system. So, we can get water in our own room by turning the tap she''s nning to make.


    When I heard about it, I just told her that I will leave her in Cassau until I really need her by my side and summon her. Our home is important after all.


    As we were about to reach Melk, Sonia appears and see the surrounding.


    "So that''s where you''re from."


    "Yeah. Since you''re here, I''ll introduce youter to Daniel and the others. But when we''re inside the city, before we reach Red Tail, I want you to return to Cassau first and wait until we call you over."


    "Okay."


    Then Sonia disappear again.


    This mean that there seems to be no set distance to how far her connection can go to.


    I''m leaving Sonia in Cassau to watch over Victoria. If she''s left alone, there''s a high chance that Victoria will look for another prison in Cassau.


    But if she''s with Sonia, they will end up arguing most of the time.


    A slime and a ghost is arguing, and a maid is watching them... Lina can''t do anything if they end up fighting so she can only watch. The only one who can stop the two of them is me.


    Although I said they are fighting, they looked like a sibling''s quarrel. Even if we didn''t do anything, they won''t go too far. And even if they do go too far, I think it''s fine as well since both ghost and ck slime can''t take any damage.


    Sonia is a ghost, and Aura is needed to exorcise her. Both Sonia and Victoria can''t use Aura anymore. As for Victoria, she''s a shapeshifting ck slime that I often use as weapon. I don''t think I ever seen her taking damage.


    Normal slime can be killed just by a swing of a club, but ck slime doesn''t take any damage. I think she''s immortal.


    We entered the gate and walk to Red Tail. As we entered through the door, we see Daniel and Hannah is ying with Hannah''s mother, Penny, and Ruby.


    "We''re home!"


    Said Sophie as we entered the building.


    Ang and Ka also followed us inside instead of going to their own apartment. They have nothing to do over there.


    "Sophie! You''re home!"


    Daniel run over to Sophie and give her a big hug.


    "Daniel! What about me? Hey, Daniel? Me? This Roy here?"


    "Since you took him here, he''s much closer with Sophie than you. You should have yed with him more."


    "¡­can''t say anything about that."


    I looked down as what Ruby said is right.


    "Don''t worry! I like you!"


    "Hannah! You''re an angel!"


    "I want to see rence every day!"


    "¡­what about me? What about Roy? Not rence the clown but Roy?"


    "¡­I missed Roy a bit, I guess?"


    Scary! Children''s honesty are scary!


    "So? Have you find a house for us?" Ruby asked.


    "Yes we have. Complete with a maid and a watchghost."


    "Wait, what?! A maid I can understand, but a watchghost?"


    "Just like a watchdog. But instead of a dog, it''s a ghost."


    Well, it''s normal for anyone to be shocked when I told them I have a ghost to watch the house.


    "Don''t worry, she''s a tame ghost. Or like, I made her submit to me."


    "Is the ghostdy beautiful?" Hannah asked.


    "Well¡­ she''s beautiful, but she''s pretty much see through. I can call her here now."


    I called Sonia by tapping the buckle on my belt. I bought this just the morning after the girls iste me for being unable to gain weight.


    I told them I did gained weight, but they were all turned into muscles. The girls still hate me even after I said that.


    That''s when I decide to never talk to the girls about weight ever again. Never even toward girls I don''t know!


    In the end, I just buy myself a belt and not talking about it. As for the others, they decided to have bracelets or ne.


    That night, since I was left alone, I spend my time making a strong container for making air element magic stones. I made about three of them and put ten stones inside each one of the containers. I hope there will be some result after I return there in two or three weeks.


    Yeah, I''m nning to go there again. Obviously, to bring Daniel and the others to our new house. Then I also need to keep my promise to Albert and return. Hopefully it would be before the babies are born.


    After tapping the buckle, Sonia appears.


    "Sister Ghost appears! She''s so pretty!" Hannah was so excited seeing Sonia''s appearance.


    "Thank you, little girl. You''re also pretty cute yourself."


    Hannah''s mother, Penny, looked toward me and Sonia alternatively. When I nodded to tell her that Sonia is not hostile, Penny let out a relieved sigh.


    I introduced Sonia to the others.


    "So, she is the ghost who''s haunting our new home in Cassau. Her name is Sonia and she''s an old friend of Victoria back when both of them were still alive."


    "So sister ghost is friend of sister slime! Then will you be my friend too?"


    "Me too! Me too!"


    Hannah and Daniel loves it when they both getting new friends. Even if they are slimes or ghosts.


    Hannah calling Victoria sister slime, and Sonia is sister ghost. I think Daniel will do the same too.


    "Sister Ghost! Will I be a ghost after I die, or will I be a slime?"


    Oh, shit! That was a difficult question! There''s no real answer to that question!


    Sonia looked at me asking for my help, but the one Hannah is asking is Sonia, so I just stare dagger at Sonia.


    Tell a lie! Tell a lie! Tell a lie!


    Don''t make them believe easily in reincarnation!


    Does she understand my intention?


    Sonia started answering Hannah''s question.


    "Little girl, you shouldn''t want to be either a ghost or a slime. I became this way because I did bad things before I died. Then I died not in peace so my soul is wandering around as a ghost."


    Good! That might not be a correct answer, but that''s good enough for children to hear!


    Sonia is surprisingly good with kids, huh?


    Wait! She had a lot of lovers, but I never heard she''s talking about her children. Does that mean she''s unable to had children in the past? And she ended up being kind toward children because of that? I''ll ask herter.


    "What bad thing did sister ghost do?" This time, Daniel asked Sonia.


    "For example, like not listening to your mom or brother."


    That''s¡­ if it''s anyone else that might be a good answer, but for Daniel who was abandoned by his mother¡­


    "Does that mean I did bad thing? Mommy told me to wait for her, but she never returned after several days and I left with Roy¡­"


    Sonia looked at me again. Her expression is as if she''s about to cry. I have told her before we return about Daniel''s situation. So she knows that he was abandoned by his mother.


    Before I told her anything, Rubye close to me and whispered something.


    "We have found Daniel''s mother. That day, she actually trying to sell Daniel to ve trader. After a few days, she found the trader, but at that time, you already took Daniel home with you. So the ve trader choose to have Daniel''s mother to sell as a ve instead. She then run away. A few days ago, we found her corpse in the forest. Seems like shemitted suicide because she can''t run away anymore."


    That was¡­ lucky. If I waste just one day and didn''t met Daniel by chance, he would have been a ve. He''s so lucky to escape from being a ve. But I won''t tell him about it. At least not anytime soon. He''s still a child.


    I told Sonia how to respond to Daniel''s question.


    "Some time, it was the mother who did bad things. So, it''s fine if you didn''t listen to your mother if she did bad things. But did you listen to Roy and the sisters here?"


    "I did! They said that I''m a good boy and praise me!" Daniel replied happily.


    "That means you''re a good boy. Please continue being good to everyone."


    Sonia then approached Daniel and tried to hug him. But she can''t. Her body just went through Daniel''s. I can see that Sonia is about to cry again. I''ll help her this time.


    "Daniel. Sonia can''t stay here for long. She need to go home to Cassau because she has some business to attend to. Say goodbye to her."


    "Bye-bye sister ghost!" Daniel, followed by Hannah, waved their hands to Sonia.


    "¡­Bye-bye! Once you move to Cassau, we can meet again every day!"


    "Really?! Then let''s y together in the future!"


    Sonia then disappear. She must be crying back in Cassau.


    I think I need to be a bit kinder toward her. She''s not as evil as I thought. There must be some reason why she''s good toward children.


    After Sonia returned to Cassau, we spend the rest of the day together.


    Tomorrow, I will return to school and see if I can find a clue about mage hero from the past.

 Chapter 97 - Angela About To Breakthrough

    I''m going to school just like usual today¡­ well, I mean unusually since I skip most of the time.


    There are no important exam at the moment so Ka and Ang choose to stay in their apartment to cultivate. While I alone went to school.


    I attend sses like other students. Luckily, we have history ss today. I''m going to ask the teacher about mage hero after ss is over.


    After ss is over, I run to the teacher and asked him about hero, if such people exist or not.


    "Heroes? Are you stupid? There''s no such things as heroes when we live in peace. In the past? Why should I know about it? Just because I''m a history teacher? Don''t ask me anything other than what was taught in ss. I never bother to learn more than that."


    Annoying! This teacher is annoying! He was just remembering those that were important in sses. How could he became a teacher if he doesn''t even want to teach?


    Feeling annoyed, I feel like pranking this teacher. This teacher with long silky smooth blond wig who thinks that no one can notice that he is wearing a wig. Even all students here already gave him nickname ''Mr. Wig''.


    And my moment hase!


    Ms. Wendy appear and this history teacher is making an attempt to flirt with her.


    "Ms. Wendy! How''s your ss?"


    "Well, the students are trying their best. I''d love it if they did the same in other subjects as well."


    "Haha! Of course they will listen when you''re the teacher! If possible, I''d like it if you can teach me how to gain the student''s attention."


    This guy is shameless. He just said to not bother him with questions other than from the ss, and shamelessly asking Ms. Wendy for her guidance. Even if he learns something, he will never use it anyway.


    "Actually, this boy here was just asking me a question about history, so I just told him to read more books first before asking me again."


    No, he did not!


    If that how it is, I''ll steal your wig!


    I sneaked behind that shameless teacher. Right now, I''m right behind him with only less than 30 cm distance.


    I put my index finger on my lips telling Ms. Wendy who saw that I''m about to do something to not say anything.


    Seeing her nodded slightly after looking at me, Imenced my n.


    I carefully raised my hand above this shameless teacher''s head who''s trying to boast about his teaching experience to Ms. Wendy. Slowly, my hand is right above his head.


    I made a pinching gesture above his head, and pinch the top of his wig with my thumb and my index finger. Once I''m sure this Mr. Wig''s attention is fully on Ms. Wendy, I quickly pulled the wig up from his head.


    It''s a sess! But that''s not everything. I put the wig on my head, and left for a while to grab a bottle of ink from one of the ssroom.


    I took off the cap of the bottle, and make some air pressure inside the bottle while covering the bottle with my other hand.


    I returned to Mr. Wig, and opened slightly my hand that covering the bottle to spray some ck ink to his head. I''m doing it carefully to not let any ink hit Ms. Wendy.


    By this time, more and more students are watching. None of them liked Mr. Wig, and most of the male students here are fans of Ms. Wendy. So when they''re seeing Mr. Wig is trying to flirt with Ms. Wendy, and I''m pulling a prank on him, they were silently cheering in their heart.


    I sprayed the ink on Mr. Wig''s head so it ended up looking like he had a terrible crew cut. I can see everyone is holding theirughter. Even Ms. Wendy is covering her mouth with her hand. But Mr. Wig thought that his joke was funny so he just continued making terrible jokes.


    My mission isplete. I will take my leave.


    As I leave, the students are making hand gesture like that of pping, but they did it without making any sound. I just raised both my hands in appreciation, and walk like a boss.


    As I was leaving, I heard Ms. Wendy saying something to Mr. Wig¡­ Mr. Ink Head.


    "Excuse me, Mr. Wi¡­ Senior. I have some business to attend to."


    Ms. Wendy left Mr. Ink Head and walked my way. I have lowered my hands and the other students also stopped pping. If Mr. Ink Head saw I''m wearing his wig, he would be angry, so I thought of leaving that ce right away.


    But luckily, Ms. Wendy walked right in a position where Mr. Ink Head can''t see me. Is that intentional? Knowing she''s a secret agent, it should be intentional.


    I entered the library so I could find any clues about heroes. And I know that Ms. Wendy is following me all the way to the library. Either it was because she has some business with me or she has some business in the library, I don''t know. Most likely, she''s trying to give me some advice as a teacher to her student. Pranking a teacher is bad after all.


    "UWOAAAA! Where''s my hair?!"


    There''s a screaming voiceing from the staff''s room, but I don''t care. I just look for a book about history.


    Maybe I should have stayed in the capital and sneak into the Library Tower.


    If I remember correctly, the books in the highest floor of that library are mostly about legend, myth, or fairy tale. Maybe I could find more from there.


    "Until when will you stop wearing that wig?"


    "Until I thought it''s annoying. Probably sometimeter before I''m going to bed."


    I answered Ms. Wendy''s question.


    I have short hair, and I usually cut my hair once it''s a bit longer. So this is my first time trying to have a long silky smooth hair.


    "Huhu¡­ you''re so funny like a clown. Do you want to be like that rence?"


    Now that she mentioned it, I think I saw her from the stage.


    "Well, what do you think about my performance in the circus?"


    "You''re rence? I never expected that he''s one of the student here."


    "So? Why are you here Ms. Wendy?"


    Just as I asked her, suddenly a ghost appear between us two.


    "Ghost! Be careful!"


    "Ah! Wait! She''s a tame ghost!"


    "What?"


    I never expected Sonia to suddenly appear here. Now that I think about it, there''s a chance that I will be in a crowd when she suddenly appear. But for her to appear without me calling means that someone is sending me a message. For now, let''s calm Ms. Wendy down first.


    "I''ll introduce you to each other. House Ghost, School Teacher. School Teacher, House Ghost."


    "Umm¡­ she''s a ghost from your house?" Ms. Wendy asked.


    "We used her as our means ofmunication. Sonia, what''s wrong?"


    I asked Sonia if there''s any emergency.


    "Roy, Ang''s magic has increased. She will soon reach Intermediate level in her ice element. And what''s with your hair?"


    "Really?! That''s great! And call it my fabulous hair."


    "Problem is, none of us has experience in increasing our magic level. Even Victoria doesn''t know. So we thought you might know something."


    Sonia ignored my joke.


    Improving level? I know next to nothing about it! I only know how summoning element improved our level. We just need our summoned monster to defeat monsters. Then we go ''poof'' and our level increased.


    As for other elements, the teachers in Introductory School never told us anything important. They only told us the levels and how to improve them by cultivation, and never about breaking through the next level. I think all of the teachers here is just in the beginner level.


    Everyone but one!


    "Ms. Wendy! Can you guide Ang to breakthrough her ice elements magic level?"


    "Ang? She''s one of the top student here, right? You''re friend with her?"


    "Yeah. Can you help her? None of the people we know have experienced leveling up. We could meet one acquaintance in the hunter guild, but at this time, they should be doing some requests."


    MS. Wendy wondering about something.


    "Hmm¡­ actually, there have been some cases when people who tried to level up getting attacked around here."


    "What? Why?!"


    "I don''t know. We haven''t found the reason why. Few weeks ago, there''s a hunter who was about to advance to Advanced level, but there were no news about him afterwards. When his friends looking for him, he was already died. There were simr cases in the past few months about it where people who were about to breakthrough getting killed."


    I think I can guess the reason why. It was because of the cult! The cult is preparing to attack this city. So they killed anyone who was trying to break through their levels. The cult is most likely afraid that their n will fail if there are a lot of powerful mage in this city.


    That was just my guess, but I might be right.


    "That was why most people who tried to breakthrough asked for protection from the guild by sending them a request."


    "And how do Ang breakthrough then?"


    "This is her first breakthrough so I suggest she do it in a quiet ce. If her concentration break during the breakthrough, the damage will be significant on her body."


    "So to improve our level, we just need to cultivate in a quiet ce? Is that all?"


    "Yes. But when you''re about to breakthrough, the magic in the surrounding will be affected. And people who are sensitive to magic movement will realize someone is about to breakthrough. I think that''s how they know where they should attack."


    I never thought that improving our level was so easy. We just need to concentrate while cultivating without ever breaking our focus. That''s the only difficult part I guess.


    Then when I need to breakthrough my air element magic, I just need to find a quiet ce. Maybe our home in Cassau is a good ce since we have a ghost watching it.


    But in Melk, there are rumors about people killing mage who tried to breakthrough. We need to find a ce outside the city.


    "Sonia. Tell Ang, Ka, and Sophie to go to the guild and see if they can find our acquaintance to help protecting Ang. After that, meet me outside the city."


    "Ah! I''ming too! She''s also my student after all."


    "Tell them Ms. Wendy ising as well. I have some matters to attend before going."


    After hearing what I said, Sonia left to give Ang and the others my message.


    "You''re not going there right away?"


    "Ms. Wendy can go first. I have small matters to take care of."


    I left the library and just like usual, I jumped to the roof. I need Victoria''s help here.

 Chapter 98 - Do It Seriously!

    Ms. Wendy left first to get herself prepared. Meanwhile, I summoned Victoria.


    "What''s up, Roy? Any problem? And what''s with your hair?"


    "Image change. Actually¡­"


    I told her about Ang breaking through her ice element magic and about how there are people who attacked those who were about to breakthrough.


    "I see¡­ so you want me to help you protect Ang?"


    "Well, I want you to protect Red Tail. If the one who attacked Ang knew who she is, they will undoubtedly targeting everyone in Red Tail."


    As I told Victoria my n, Sonia appears again.


    "Ka said that she have transferred Daniel and the others to the guild for protection. The guild actually have done it a few times after the ident to protect friends and family of the ones who were about to breakthrough. The guild said that if you want, they can give us reinforcements. Those people who attacked are considered problem for everyone in this city."


    Problem for everyone in this city? But what if those people are from this city?


    But for the guild to help us¡­ I knew that guild not only support registered hunters, but they also support everyone who worked hard in getting stronger. But I don''t think I will readily ept their help in this situation where I don''t know who is the traitor and member of the cult.


    "Sonia. Tell Ka to only bring people she trusted. If there are none, then don''t bring anyone. Their reinforcement might be a burden to us."


    "Okay."


    Sonia left again to send the message to Ka.


    "Now everyone in Red Tail no longer needed our protection. What''s next?"


    "Join the battle obviously. How much longer will you be conscious?"


    "Three hours at most."


    "Do you want to join the battle or be my weapon?"


    "I''ll join the battle. Only when my time is up will Blobby be your weapon."


    "Nice. Let''s go!"


    I thought of having Victoria to protect Daniel and the others, but now since the guild has make their move to go against those groups. Seems like there are already too many victims for the guild to keep them silent.


    We just need to stall time for Ang to breakthrough. Ka and Sophie should be able to manage few enemies. As for Ms. Wendy¡­ she''ll be fine even on her own


    As we run to the gate, Victoria asked me something.


    "Roy. Are we fighting the cult?"


    "Probably."


    "I want to ask, why do you think that cult decided to put explosive devices inside its members'' mouth? What do you think the reason is?"


    "Hmm? Isn''t it just so they won''t say anything in case they were caught?"


    "But no one have ever known about their existence before us. Or is it just a gimmick that any evil organization has?"


    "Probably. Now that I think about it, it was quite stupid of the cult to let their members have explosive devices in their mouth. Well, not really stupid since normal people can''t see through their mouth. Thanks to it, I can see who is a member of the cult."


    "Wild guess! I''m just guessing that hey probably told their members to kill themselves so they won''t leak any secret."


    "That''s not a wild guess. Everyone who knows they have explosives inside the member''s mouth would think the same way."


    "Then what about you?"


    My guess? I just thought about it now.


    "They used to have poison inside their mouth. But once the new members enter the group, they haven''t gotten used to having poison inside their mouth. So when they were celebrating themselves for entering the cult in a restaurant, all of them identally bite the poison inside their mouth. And so, many restaurant were used for serving poison to their customers."


    "That''s one wild guess over there."


    "Then one day, when the higher ups of the cult noticed that their members are decreasing instead of increasing, one of them who was an owner of a restaurant told the higher ups of the weakness of having poison inside their mouth. So they decided to have explosives instead that activated by magic."


    "¡­what about the reason why they have poison in their mouth?"


    "¡­so that they will kill themselves instead of leaking any secrets about the cult."


    "That''s just the same reason I said! You''re only telling the reason why they have explosives instead of poison!"


    "Oh! We''re here!"


    "Don''t change the subject!"


    Ignoring Victoria, we reached our destination. Only Ms. Wendy waiting there.


    "You''re here! Who''s that with you?"


    "My inseparable partner."


    "Are you nning to fight wearing that wig?"


    "I want to fight while looking fabulous at the same time."


    We chatted until the other three arrived. There was no other people with them seems like Kron and the others were not there.


    "Just you three?"


    "Yes. Kron and the other party we get along with is not here to do some requests. Well, no one knows where Kron has disappeared to. And what''s with that hair? Isn''t that Mr. Wig''s?"


    Ka answered and she asked me about the wig. Is this a trend to ask about my hair every time?


    "It was. Before I came here, he proudly showing off his new ink head."


    "Roy stole it from him while pulling a prank on that teacher." Ms. Wendy said.


    "Then you don''t have to wear it, right? Remove it!"


    Ms. Wendy answered why I have the wig and Ang told me to remove the wig.


    "No! I want to look fabulous with my new long silky smooth blond hair! Why do I smell something burnt?"


    "Because I just burnt the tip of that wig."


    "Fuck!"


    I remove the wig quickly before the fire touched my skin¡­ or my real hair. I threw it on the ground and stepped on it. Ang shouldn''t burn things so easily like that. Is she trying to be an arson?


    "Why can''t I look fabulous while protecting you?!"


    "Please be more serious about this! I just want to improve my level, but somehow I have to risk my life because someone is possibly trying to attack me?"


    "Don''t worry. With me nearby, there won''t be anyone that can get past my guard."


    "I understand that, but do it seriously!"


    Seeing Ang convinced with my words, Ms. Wendy is confused.


    "Aren''t you all still just a beginner level mage? Including Roy? Why did you trust him so much?"


    "His strength is beyondmon sense." Ka said.


    "His personality is also beyondmon sense." It was Sophie this time.


    "His existence doesn''t even make sense." Ang? What''s that means?


    "Everything about him is weird. That''s what make him, Roy." Not everything about me is weird, Victoria.


    Well, theirment about me aren''t important.


    "Ms. Wendy. Do you know a good ce for Ang to breakthrough?"


    "There''s a shack on that mountain used to belong to an old friend. It was no longer used anymore. If we fought the attacker in a distance, the sound of battle won''t reach that shack and Ang won''t break her concentration."


    "Alright. Victoria and I will lead the way. All of you don''t need to use your magic and just keep your stamina for when the enemiese. We will rest for a while and Ang will start cultivating to breakthrough just before it gets dark. Once she started cultivating, the three of you will spread into three direction and protect Ang. Victoria and I will attack them from behind."


    Everyone nodded after hearing my n except for Ms. Wendy.


    "Wait! Isn''t it too crazy for a beginner level like you to do all of that?"


    "It''s not. It is even crazier if I didn''t do all of them."


    Not persuaded with my words, Ang tried to convince her.


    "Ms. Wendy, just trust him."


    "How can you put your trust in him so much?"


    "Well¡­ he''s not the kind of man who breaks promises¡­ probably. We trust him with our lives¡­ probably." Ang exined.


    Hearing the word ''probably'', I dropped to the ground in tears.


    "Why are you not sure?"


    "One thing I''m sure of is that he''s strong. That''s the truth. After a few month being in a party with him, I know he''s someone I can trust with my life."


    So that''s Ang''s impression of me.


    Feeling so trusted, I felt like crying.


    "¡­if that''s what you think, then let''s do it with that n."


    "Wait, Ms. Wendy! I have something for you."


    I threw a ne at her.


    "Tap it to call the ghost."


    "The ghost?"


    Ms. Wendy tapped the ne and Sonia appears.


    "Hello again, School Teacher!"


    "It''s you!"


    I exined to Ms. Wendy about Sonia.


    "During the battle, we might be separated too far. She will be our means ofmunication."


    "This is convenience! Where can I find ghosts like Sonia?"


    "¡­Sonia is a bit special, so even if you find another ghost, they won''t be able to do what Sonia can do."


    "I see¡­ what a shame¡­"


    I know what she thinks.


    She must have thinking that having a long distancemunication will make her real job as the kingdom''s secret agent easier.


    Now that I think about it, I just killed her boss back in the capital. Maybe Albert will soon call all secret agents back to the kingdom.

 Chapter 99 - Mission: Protect Angela

    "I''ll try to breakthrough now. Please protect me."


    Ang said as she entered the shack after having some light meal before cultivating.


    We reached the shack soon after leaving the city. It was easy with the monsters around this area not strong enough to be an obstacle for us.


    It was just me and Victoria who fought until we reach our destination. And as usual, our temporary party member get surprised.


    Ms. Wendy was so shocked when she heard that Victoria is actually my summon, and even more shocked after knowing that the ghost, Sonia, and the ck slime, Victoria, were old friends back when they were both still alive.


    Now that Ang is prepared to breakthrough, we have to prepare for the iing attack.


    Luckily, the shack she entered is right next to a cliff on two sides, the north side and the west side. Which means we only have to worry about attack from two directions, east and south. So Ms. Wendy is will be guarding one side, and Sophie and Ka will guard the other side.


    "Ms. Wendy, do you know why those attackers tried to kill everyone who''s about to breakthrough?"


    Ka curious about the reason why there are so many cases of mages being killed when they''re about to breakthrough.


    "I don''t know. But I think it''s because some people don''t want this city to have strong mages. Don''t think about that and just concentrate in protecting Ang."


    "Is there any obstacle for when we''re trying to breakthrough?"


    "None that I know of. As long as you have cultivate your magic, you will be able to breakthrough easily."


    Ms. Wendy answered all of Ka''s question.


    Since there should be some time before the assants attack, we spend our time chatting. Mostly, we just asked Ms. Wendy some question about magic that wasn''t taught at school.


    "What about other elements? Are there no obstacle as well?"


    This time, I asked Ms. Wendy.


    "You have summoning element and air element, right? For summoning element, you just need to have your summon defeat monsters as much as possible. Seeing how Victoria able to defeat monsters easily, I think you just need to wait. As for air element, I don''t have any clue about it. Maybe just like ice and other elements, you won''t have any obstacles."


    I hope she''s right.


    In my past life, I tried to make Blobby fight against other monsters. Blobby can''t kill the monster, and the monster can''t kill Blobby. I thought that Blobby must have great defense.


    Since summoner can only have one monster, unless they eat Pear-y Fruit, the condition to make contract with another monster is that our summons need to die first. And Blobby is unkible, so I have no hope in making another monster as my summon.


    Blobby is way too weak that Blobby couldn''t even defeat her distant cousin, a normal slime. I had no hope in increasing the level of my summoning element at the time.


    I only started to use Blobby in thetter year of my life and that''s not enough for my summoning level to improve. Even worse is that I only had one element.


    Other summoners usually only used their summons only when they are just beginner level mage. And they usually have other elements as well. Once their other elements are improved, most of them would forget about their own summons. Or maybe they would even kill their own summons so they can make contract with new monsters until they got a strong one.


    I think I understand why Victoria never appear in my previous live. I tried to kill her a few times just soon after I summoned her. I won''t tell her about it though.


    Soon, we felt something differenting from the shack. Now Ang is truly about to breakthrough, and her magic is increasing and affecting the surrounding.


    "I''ll check the area!"


    I used my Divine Vision in full power to see the surrounding area if there is someone who felt Ang''s magic increase.


    I found one! He''s about 10 Km from the shack!


    He must have felt Ang''s magic and about to retreat to inform the others.


    If I could kill him before he inform the others, there won''t be any attacking. That''s what I thought.


    I almost tried to chase after him, but before my legs moved, I saw him talking to four other people. Then they moved separately.


    Seems like it will be harder than I thought. Why is there so many people trying to kill one person who''s about to level up?


    "They found us already! Everyone, guard your post! Victoria! We will go to different area! You will move alongside the cliff to the east, and I will go south! Get behind them and make sure that no one will be able to escape!"


    "Roy! How many were there?!" Victoria asked.


    I tried to look further, but my eyes can''t reach that far. Thest thing I see was those scouts who were about to inform the others.


    "Let''s assume that they have a hundred people."


    "Why do we have to assume that much people trying to kill one person?"


    "Because we will be happier if we find that the number is actually fewer than that."


    "¡­sound logical. Let''s go!"


    Victoria is easily convinced by that, while the others seems to be grinding their teeth.


    "Let''s stay in contact using Sonia! I''ll leave this ce to you three!"


    I left the three and run by the side of the cliff to the south. Victoria did the same to the East. The three who stays won''t have to worry about enemiesing from the cliff side.


    I ran alongside the cliff and with my Divine Vision, I can see that there are five people running toward the Ang''s direction. One of whom is the scout from before.


    Just five, huh? As long as they are not too powerful, I can beat them easily. But since I don''t know how strong they are, I''ll just ambush them with surprise attack.


    I jumped from the cliff and stuck my feet on the wall. No one will expect an attack from the cliff.


    Once I get into a good position, I waited for them to pass.


    I heard them talking while I''m waiting to ambush them.


    "Hey, why do we have to kill someone just because they''re trying to breakthrough?"


    "I don''t know! Just ask our boss!"


    "This is stupid just to kill them. If they are women, I think we have the right to enjoy them first, right?"


    Then I heard loudughtering from them.


    This means that the boss of this group isn''t among those five, huh? I''ll just let one live to interrogateter.


    "That''s what I''m talking about! Why do we have to kill them if we can just let them live? If they''re women, we can have some fun. If they''re men, we can loot everything they have and let them escape. Then maybe in the future when we meet them again, we can continue take everything from them again and again. One of us is already an Advanced level mage, so it should be easy for us. And we can get rich easily this way."


    "¡­you''re right! I''ll vote for you to be our next boss! With my powerful magic and you as the leader, we can steal as many things as we want!"


    "Thank you. I will make sure everyone is happy!"


    ""Hurray! Hurray! Hurray!""


    Those five are cheering somehow. That''s some stupid n, but they''re going to die anyway.


    Even if they let their victims live and escape, they won''t meet each other again in the future since their victims won''t use the same route. And even if they choose the same route, they might bring some people as their guards. How foolish.


    Hearing about them looting make me thinks that they''re bandits.


    I looked into the inside of their mouth and see that they have no explosives inside. Maybe the one who had it is the boss. I''ll askter.


    I choose a wrong position for this ambush. I should have been on the other side of the cliff instead of being in a cliff sticking my foot on the wall.


    I could have just pushed them down the cliff to keep my stamina.


    I need to learn more to have a more tactical mindset.


    But I guess it''s fine as well since even if I pushed them down the cliff, I won''t know if they''re still alive or not. I can just kill them here and intimidate thest person so when I interrogate himter, he willply.


    Now then, who''s the one with advanced level mage here?


    No. I guess the one who I won''t kill should be the one with better head than the others. It''s the man who will be voted as their boss!


    Does bandit has election to choose their leader?


    I waited for a while, and once they get past my position, I jumped from the cliff to their backs and swung my spear to cut the necks of four of them. Leaving only one person with his neck intact.


    "So easy. Hey, you! I have some question to you. Ans-"


    "Alright-alright! I''ll tell you everything I knew! I''ll tell you where I hid my treasures, and even where you can find a good cheap brothel with extremely beautiful girls is! Just please spare my life!"


    How cowardly. I guess he''s just someone who thinks he has a good n, but never actually do something. I haven''t finished speaking and he already surrendering himself.


    Anyway¡­


    "Then answer my questions. Of course you will tell me where the good brothel is after you answered all my questions honestly. If I think you''re lying, your head will be flying."


    Although I won''t enter brothel again unless it''s necessary, that doesn''t mean I''m not interested. Even if I already have lovers, I''m still curious.


    Of course I won''t enter it, but peeping won''t be a problem, right?

 Chapter 100 - Fake Bandits

    Interrogating this bandit leader wannabe is easy. He answered all my questions without hesitation. He must be afraid of getting killed by me.


    I asked him about why they tried to attack mages who were about to breakthrough.


    His answer is that because his leader told them to. He doesn''t know why, but he suspected that this is a job given by someone, and the leader was paid handsomely by doing this.


    I asked him about the person who paid the bandit leader to attack mages, and he doesn''t know who they are. So I asked how many people is attacking today.


    The total number of the bandits reached a hundred, but the numbers of bandit who attacked today was just thirty. Does that mean there are seventy more bandits in case the first wave failed?


    He answered honestly and told me that in case the first wave haven''t returned after an hour, the rest of the bandits will attack. Including the leader.


    My guess is that either the one who paid the bandit leader, or the bandit leader himself is a part of the cult. Or maybe both of them are.


    Since the bandit leader might be a member of the cult, there''s a chance that some of the bandits are also members of the cult.


    Doesn''t matter, I''ll make sure all of us will survive.


    I turn my back toward the one I interrogated, and he thinks that his live is saved. Thinking so, he tried to attack me from behind. Not knowing that I can see behind me.


    Before his magic is activated, I turned my body toward him and pierced my spear straight through his heart.


    "Aa¡­ I don''t wanna die¡­" he said on hisst breath.


    "Me neither. That''s why I have to kill you."


    After killing him, I threw his body down the cliff along with his four friends.


    Now then, let''s inform the others.


    I tapped the buckle of my belt and called Sonia.


    "Sonia, mission report!"


    "Yes, sir! The shack is still safe. No one reached there yet. Ang is still trying to breakthrough, and I don''t know about Victoria."


    "She will be fine. I have something I want you to tell the others."


    I told them about the numbers of the attackers. The first wave has thirty people, five of them are already dead so there''s just twenty five more to go. Then if after one hour no one returned, the rest of the bandits will attack.


    "And what are you going to do, Roy?"


    "I''ll get behind them and kill everyone hopefully. I''ll try to make sure that no info about us get out to the mastermind."


    "Alright, then. Good luck!"


    Sonia disappear to inform the others.


    I have told Sonia to tell the others to kill everyone to make sure that the bandit''s reinforcement won''te earlier. If any one of them returned to tell the others before one hour mark, the second wave wille earlier.


    I told Sonia to tell Victoria to kill the leftovers enemies who tried to escape. She''s not a mage so she has no area of effect attacks, but if the enemies are spread out when they''re trying to escape, I''m sure she can handle them.


    As for what I am going to do, I will go far to the back of the bandits. Even behind the main force.


    With my Divine Vision, it was quite easy to hide from the enemies'' sight. I ran deeper into the enemy''s main force without anyone noticing.


    Finally, I can see the main force. Surprisingly, they are much more organized than a normal bandit group.


    Although none of them wear uniform, I feel like they are too disciplined to be a bandit group.


    I think they are fake bandits. The real ones were the first thirty attackers while the rest were probably the cult''s private soldiers or maybe the governor''s.


    Now that I''m here, first thing to do is make sure that none of them able to escape. But how? This ce is too open to block them all from escaping.


    Yup. We''re totallycking in numbers. We only have five people not counting the one who''s trying to breakthrough and the ghost. Maybe I should have agreed to ask reinforcement from the guild.


    No. Just because they are reinforcement from the guild doesn''t mean that we can trust them. If only at least we have Kron or anyone from the Orc Emperor subjugation to help us, I can have more options.


    But now, I''m all alone. I have to thinks of a way to kill everyone here. If I let just one of them leave alive, they will inform the mastermind about us. At least if everyone is killed, the real mastermind behind the attack won''t know who we are.


    Wait! The guild is protecting Daniel and the others! If one of the enemy is a hunter, they will know that the guild is protecting someone. Then if we return unharmed, they will know about our identities in the end! Either by waiting for us at the guild, or from the identities of the people the guild protecting.


    This is a difficult situation.


    Or maybe not!


    The only reason I want to stay in Melk is because I want to graduate. But that''s not important at all!


    I do want to be a doctor again, but that''s not what I want the most. I just want to survive!


    So what if I ended up going to school again or having to be a ssmate with other students younger than me? I have experienced it once and I don''t mind doing it again.


    I''m a shameless person who made Shameless Survival Arts. Why should I be ashamed to be different? And with my knowledge, I can pass the exam easily and get my license faster.


    The only things left for me is the Introductory School graduation degree. I think I''ll just go to school next year again in Cassau. Or maybe, hopefully, I can find someone to bribe and get my degree without finishing school? I could just ask Albertter. Maybe he could make me a medical license as well.


    Now that I''m no longer have any attachment in Melk, I have more options.


    Although I have decided to leave Melk, I will still try to hide my face. I don''t need her to transform into Ninja again since I just need to cover my face with cloth.


    I looked for a ce I can hide and call Sonia and told her to tell me once all the enemies are killed.


    Sonia then disappear again. Now I have to find a good ce to eavesdrop the leader of this group if possible.


    Since I encounter the five bandits, it has just been fifteen minutes. Which means it will be about forty minute left until the main force attacked.


    Good thing that they are hiding in a forest. I can just hide above the trees.


    I jumped from tree to tree while checking on the enemy. Then I found something caught my eye.


    There is a cage with only one person inside. The cage was pulled by horses just like carriages. Is the one inside that cage their enemy?


    The person inside the cage is a woman. She seems to be arguing with a man in front of the cage. Maybe he''s the leader of the group?


    I tried to get closer to them without anyone noticing and listen to their argument.


    "You are far too powerful to be with that party. What is your real identity?!"


    "I''m just a hunter! And I''m teaching them about hunter''s job! Release me! I have no connection other than that with them! Why do you want to kill mages who were about to breakthrough anyway?"


    Seems like before us, these groups attacked another party who has someone that''s about to breakthrough as well. And because she''s more powerful than the other in her party, these bandit wannabe tried to question her.


    "It''s none of your business. Don''t forget that you''re just a prisoner here. With that cor on you, should I release you here among men who desired your body?"


    "Ugh!"


    That cor she''s wearing is something I knew of. It''s Magic Restriction Cor. Anyone who wears that cor, won''t be able to use magic. Her chance of escaping from here with that cor is zero.


    Then someonee and said something to the man.


    "Captain! The bandits haven''t returned after twenty minutes! We heard sound of magic casted from that area so they should be still fighting."


    "Let them be. We will move in forty minutes. And don''t call me Captain! We''re pretending to be bandits here so call me boss!"


    "Alright boss!"


    Captain he says¡­ then they are really from private army. And they really pretending to be bandits.


    "You''re not bandits? Who are you people?!"


    "You don''t need to know. Just tell me about yourself. If you don''t, we have no choice but to bring you to our master."


    "I''m just a hunter!"


    "Someone as strong as you is just D-rank hunter? That''s not possible. You must be some spy working for someone. Tell me who your boss is?"


    "No one! I''m a hunter so I have no boss!"


    "So stubborn. We will just bring you to our master after this mission is over. It''s getting dark already. I hope we can finish this one before the sun disappear, but knowing how weak the bandits are, that''s seems impossible. At least we will rest before we attack this next target. They seem to be stronger than average mages if they still fighting."


    Then the man went to rest somewhere else.


    I also leave that area and hide.


    Soon, Sonia appear and told me that the first wave is over. All the enemies are killed and the girls only had slight injuries. Another good news is Ang has breakthrough in her ice element magic. Which means she''s already an Intermediate level ice mage.


    Although she has finished breakthrough, doesn''t mean that these people will stop attacking. So I summon Victoria for preparation before I make my move.


    "Sonia. Tell everyone to rest first. I will make my move after they started to advance. If I move too soon they will have rooms to escape. But once they get closer to the girls, then I will start my attack from the back of the enemy."


    "Alright. What will you do while waiting?"


    "I think I will have a nice chat with a pretty girl."

 Chapter 101 - Sweet Or Sour Candy?

    Since the first wave is over, I summoned Victoria. And Victoria''s time is also almost over soon so I will just use her as weapon or tools.


    I waited until the people who guards the person in the cage left. Since they thought that the cor is enough to stop her, they won''t bother doing some useless task.


    And soon, they were gone.


    I looked around to see if we''re safe from other people and sneaked and approached the cage.


    "Hello! Nice to meet you! May I ask your name?"


    "Who are you? What do you want?"


    "I''m someone in need of help, and I want to ask for your helping hand if I can trust you. So, may I ask your name?" I ask her name again.


    "¡­you can call me Candy."


    So it''s a fake name. Or maybe that''s her real name?


    "Sweet candy or sour candy?" I asked.


    "Does that even matter?"


    "Although I love sweet candy, at the moment I''m craving for sour candy at the moment."


    "¡­I see that you''re an idiot."


    "Now you know that I''m an idiot. It''s good that we know each other better now. Then let''s share information."


    "What do you want?"


    "I want to know who these fake bandits are and how did you ended up getting caught. Why are they bringing a cage?"


    Candy told me everything from when she''s about to help someone breakthrough, they got killed, and she alone still survive.


    Candy heard a rumor about some groups targeting mages in the middle of breaking through. So when she finds out that there''s a party with someone who wanted to breakthrough, she volunteer to follow them to get some information.


    Unfortunately, the party is way too weak.


    Candy was just interested in the group that will attack the party so when the group arrived, she nned to escape on her own. That''s when things went wrong.


    "The party I''m with was so stupid. They know I''m stronger than them so they begged me to protect them and hugged my leg. It was toote when the attackers came. I should have killed the party on my own without hesitation so I won''t get caught. What a blunder!"


    Candy exined how she got caught.


    But I''m not convinced. If she want to check the attackers, she could have just follow the party from afar instead of by their side.


    "That''s not everything, right? If you want to know the attackers, you could have followed them from afar. There''s something else you didn''t tell. And that''s why these groups decided to let you live."


    "¡­"


    "What''s the reason you were so curious about these group of fake bandits? Well, there are some real bandits, but most of them here are fakers."


    Everyone in these fake bandit group has explosive devices inside their mouth. Which means this group is sent by the cult.


    My guess that they don''t want anyone strong in this city before the stampede is probably a correct one.


    "What if I say that I''m a secret agent work for his majesty the king himself? I want to know if there''s a group with potential to disturb the peace in this kingdom. Heh, sorry. That''s a lie."


    A lie? I can find out if that''s a lie or not. It''s easy.


    "Do you know Tim? Your boss?"


    "What?!"


    Her eyes opened widely from shock.


    I can see that she knows Tim, her boss. Which means she''s Ms. Wendy''s colleague. Both of them are secret agents.


    "I''ll tell youter after this battle is over. I''ll tell both you and the school teacher Ms. Wendy all I know about Tim. Ms. Wendy is here as well protecting her students."


    "Wendy is here? Did she tell you about Tim?"


    "Nope. I knew about Tim directly from the king himself. For now, I know that you are really a secret agent of the king, so I''ll trust you."


    Will I tell them about my identity as Ninja? Probably.


    I no longer care about hiding my identity because there''s a chance that someone from the cult finds out because of today''s matter. Whether it will be someone who''s able to escape from here, which I hope none of them makes it, or finding my address from seeing Ruby and the others inside the guild for protection.


    Although there''s still a chance that no one finds out, I still need to be cautious. It means we will have no choice but to move to Cassau earlier than nned.


    Although Cassau is not the safest ce, I''ve never heard any rumor rted to the cult in Cassau from my past live.


    There are obviously still some thugs or underworld organization simr to Sam''s organization back when she''s still in Melk, but I never heard of any huge incident caused by the cult in Cassau.


    Well, if I see someone with an explosive devices inside their mouth, I''ll just kill them silently.


    I called out Blobby and turned her into a key to open the cage. Then I unlocked Candy''s cor with Blobbykey but I didn''t remove it yet.


    "I''ve taken off your cor. Remove itter only when we''re about to attack."


    "When will we start attacking?"


    "Soon, these guys will attack my friends and Ms. Wendy. If we attack too soon before they make their moves, there will be some people who will manage to escape. So we will only attack them from behind, few minutes after they begun to advance. Just before they reached Ms. Wendy and the others."


    "Are you confident in killing everyone here? I think there are more than twenty advanced level mages here." Candy worried about the difference in number.


    "Don''t worry. If I can''t do it, I''ll just escape"


    "¡­so you''re confident in escaping, huh?"


    "Yeah. After we create chaos from behind the enemy, they will be divided into two groups. First group will end up facing against us, and the other group will be facing Ms. Wendy and my friends."


    I hope the strong mages will end up in the group that will face us. That way, the girls will be in a safer position. And I can escape shamelessly if they''re too strong. At least it should be enough to stall for time until the girls escape.


    For this n, it will be better if I used a ranged attack, so I will be using Blobby as a gun or pistol.


    It''s something from Victoria''s old world called Desert Eagle. But since we''re not in a desert and there''s nothing ''eagle'' I can see about this weapon, I''ll just call it Blobpistol.


    When I called as such while Victoria is still there, she was angry at how terrible my naming sense is. At least it''s original.


    Anything Blobby transformed will be named Blob-something, and Victoria will be Victo-something. That''s much easier to remember.


    After testing it a few times, back before we returned to Melk, I already know how far this Blobpistol effective against enemy.


    If it''s human being without any protection, the furthest distance the bullet will be effective is when I shot at around 120 meter distance.


    Of course the bullet is sharpened. Whenever I''m outside, I always make sure to get as many rocks I can carry and sharpened them all.


    I will use this for this battle.


    "Candy, you will stay here and pretend that cor still restricting your magic. Once they make a move, I think you will be left here. Probably with some guards. Try to kill them all and go to the most crowded location. I will try to make the enemies stay in one spot, then you will use your strongest magic to kill them all. Can you do it?"


    "I''ll try. Then how can we know the reason behind the attacks?"


    "Let''s try to at least keep their leader alive and interrogate him. He''s the one that talked to you before, right?" I asked for her confirmation.


    "Yes. I think he''s even stronger than average advanced level mage."


    "Okay. I''ll contact Ms. Wendy and the others about our n. If we said your name, Candy, to Ms. Wendy, she will know it''s you, right?"


    "Yes. It''s my real name. How will you contact her?"


    "With a ghost."


    Seems like we worked Sonia too hard today. We already used her to move to where the others are many times.


    She''s a ghost, so I hope she won''t get tired.


    Well, it''s the usual scene where I called Sonia, Candy got surprised, I told Sonia my n, and then Sonia will tell the others.


    After that Candy asked me about Sonia, and she also tried to gain some info about how I got to know Tim and the king. But I only said that I will tell both her and Ms. Wendy only after the fight is over. I can''t have her think about other matters in a death or alive situation.


    "Oh, right! Candy! If their leader told the others to bring you with them, you just need to pretend that the cor is still locked and wait until the right moment to escape. You are too strong to be together with their previous target, and now they met another target that cause them trouble? If the leader is smart, he will assume that we were working together. Then he might try to use you as a hostage. Just pretend that you can''t use magic until the right moment. I''ll try to kill everyone around you and you will use that chance to escape."


    "Got it. But what if you can''t kill everyone before I escape?"


    "Then I will leave you and escape. I''ll pray for your safety. Good luck in escaping."


    After making our n, I can see that there are multiple peopleing here, so I hide after I lock the cage again. With Candy''s power, I''m sure she can destroy the cage.


    I can see that everyone is prepared to march. I guess it''s already time.

 Chapter 102 - Their Reason For The Attack

    I can see that these fake bandits are starting to move. Everyone is busy preparing to fight even though they haven''t gotten any info on how strong the enemies are, and how many people they will fight.


    They just prepared all seventy people to kill their target. Whether the enemy has a hundred people, or just one person, these fake bandits prepared everyone to kill all of their enemies.


    I have told Candy about what she will do.


    There are two possible options for the fake bandits. Either to have some people guard her, or taking her along so they can use her as hostage in case their enemies this time is rted to her or not.


    Well, there''s one more option. Which is to ignore Candy and make everyone attack without leaving anyone behind to guard her. If that''s their choice, then that would be great.


    Unfortunately, it seems like the fake bandit leader choose to bring her with him.


    The only good thing about this is that he alone move behind the main force while guarding Candy.


    The cage is being pulled by a horse and he''s pulling the reins.


    He doesn''t notice that right behind the cage he''s pulling, I''m following him. Candy positioned her body so that he won''t notice me following. And since I can see with my Divine Vision that everyone is advancing, and we''re behind them, I whispered to Candy the change in n.


    I will attack him and put the Magic Restriction Cor around his neck. That way, he can''t do anything other than shouting for help from his allies. But that won''t be a problem if I knocked him out and stuffed his mouth with cloth.


    Since we still have time before the right moment where the fake bandits will have fewer chance to escape, I told Candy to gain any kind of information from the fake bandit leader.


    "Hey! Who are you and why did you do this?" Candy asked the fake bandit leader.


    "Hmm? You can call me Grant. As for why we do this kind of thing, it''s because we are paid handsomely for this."


    "Don''t act like a bandit! I know that you are far too organized to be a bandit! Tell me the truth!"


    "Well, we are indeed paid handsomely. As for the truth, why would I tell you about it? Maybe I''ll tell you if you strip naked here."


    "Hell no!"


    Hearing Candy refused his proposal, I said to Candy in whisper.


    "You can strip naked to get the truth. It''s easy since no one other than him and I will see you."


    "You think I will do it?!"


    "Actually, please don''t. If you change your mind too quickly, he will be suspicious instead. You getting strip naked is just what I wish for."


    "Then I won''t do it!"


    Good thing that Grant can''t hear any word we said.


    "Why is he move slowly? Won''t it give a chance for Wendy and your friends to escape?"


    "I think he''s just being careful since it''s dark. Continue asking him questions. Although we can interrogate himter, asking him now might get a different answer. Probably even the truth. Just say that since you''re going to die anyway, it won''t be a problem if he leaked a secret or two."


    "You''re right. I''ll try."


    Candy tried to ask Grant again.


    "Just tell me the truth. I''m going to die anyway," said Candy.


    "Why are you going to die?" asked Grant.


    "Umm¡­" Candy sneak a nce at me asking for help.


    Why are you asking me? Are you really a secret agent? Make some lies!


    I whispered again to her.


    "Just say that even if he brought you to his leader, you will only say that you''re a hunter teaching newbies. Then if there''s no chance to escape, you will bite your tongue and suicide before he turns you into tools for men''s satisfaction! Just improvise!"


    Candy said the same thing to Grant.


    "Even if you brought me to your leader for questions, I can only say that I''m a hunter teaching newbies. If there''s no chance to escape, I''ll justmit suicide before you turn me into a tool to satisfy your men."


    "Then just go and kill yourself. There''s no other worth for you other than being potential hostage here."


    Seeing his reaction, Candy nced at me again.


    This woman is suck in asking question. Seriously, how could she be a secret agent? I''ll ask Ms. Wendyter.


    "For now, just keep looking at him. I''ll imitate your voice and I''ll be the one asking question. You just need to move your mouth ording to my word in case he''s looking behind."


    She nodded after hearing what I said.


    Now I''m adjusting my voice with air element so we could have a simr voice.


    "I''m curious. I know that I have the appearance that will make most men fall for me, but instead of having your men doing what they want to me, you choose to put me in a cage which is the safest ce for me at the moment. Why?"


    After asking that question, Candy red at me.


    What I said was the truth so she shouldn''t get angry.


    "Hah! You''re so confident in your look, huh? I''ll tell you this. All of us, other than the first wave who are the real bandits, only have one woman in our mind. She''s the greatest woman we''ve ever seen. She''s the most beautiful, smartest, and the woman we all respected the most. You are nothing to her!"


    Hearing Grant praising a woman to that point, it even makes Candy a little angry. But Grant continued.


    "We did it for her! We don''t care about Evil God or whatnot! We joined the cult only because of her! She''s like an angel! She''s the most important person in our lives! If she told us to die, we''ll die! If she told us to kill, we''ll kill! If she died, we all will follow her to the afterlife!"


    He''s a fanatic. That''s what both Candy and I understood.


    But more importantly, it seems like he''s from the cult. More like, he''s in the cult because of this woman he''s worshipping.


    If he doesn''t care about everything else other than that woman like he says, it means that the one who gave him the order to kill mages is her.


    Then I continued asking using Candy''s voice.


    "Does that mean she''s the one who give you the order? Do you know the reason why?"


    "Why should I care? If she told me to swim inva, I will do it! If she told me to bury myself alive, I will do it! So what if she told me to kill mages on the verge of breakthrough? I don''t need a reason. I''ll do everything for her."


    "I bet she doesn''t even remember your name."


    "Huhu¡­ unlike the others, this Grant has the privilege to be remembered by Lady Celestine! I''m special to be remembered by Lady Celestine!"


    Let''s ignore his fanatic tendency and collect the important information.


    So, the one who gave the order to attack is this Lady Celestine. And everyone here, at least the fake bandits, are her worshippers, her fans.


    Once she''s mentioned, Grant would praise her nonstop.


    At least I found his weakness. Should I stop pretending and just knock him out right now? We need to prepare for the battle. If Grant is gone, this group of fake bandits will no longer have their leader.


    But there''s one thing I''m concerned about.


    I have tapped the buckle of my belt many times, and Sonia hasn''te yet!


    Are they having some trouble over there?


    I''m too far from the shack even with my Divine Vision I can''t see the others.


    I can still see the shack, but I can''t see the girls. Are they inside? Or have they decided to escape? I''m worried.


    But if something happened, Sonia woulde to my side.


    Since she hasn''t appeared in front of me yet, I think they are not in any danger at the moment. But they needed Sonia''s help with something.


    So I''ll try to waste time by having a chat with Grant. But seems like Grant no longer has any intention to speak anymore.


    He won''t answer anything I said anymore. Even when I used Candy''s voice and said "I''ll strip naked for you if you forget about that Lady Celestine," Grant never said any words.


    But I ended up being red by Candy. If not for the cage, she would have hit me.


    Then, good newse!


    Sonia finally appear after a while not answering my call.


    She came with a good newsing from Ka''s side!


    Ka is getting smarter and smarter again! I really love this part of her.


    After listening to Sonia, I used Divine Vision again. This time, I''m not looking at the shack. But I''m looking at the ground near the shack.


    There is a hole right in front of the shack!


    This hole was made by Ka and Ang using their earth element magic. Looks like Ang managed to breakthrough just fine.


    And I also can see that they are digging another hole that they will cover so they can have a ce to hide.


    Hearing this n, we have a chance to not let everyone on the enemy''s side alive. So I just knocked Grant unconscious since we no longer needed to ask him questions for now.


    "Those girls are keep improving again and again. I''m truly d to be able to meet them in this life."

 Chapter 103 - Kaylas Plan

    This happened soon after Roy left the group. Victoria went to the east and after a while, she encountered several enemies. Seven of them to be exact.


    Victoria just charged at them head-on. Different from Roy that mainly used sneak attack and ambush, Victoria choose to fight head-on against the enemies.


    It was mostly thanks to her being a ck slime that she is invulnerable toward any kind of attack. Whether it''s magic or physical attack, she can''t be damaged at all.


    That was why she dare to be so bold in battle.


    The only w she has is that she hasn''t been able topletely master her own body. Although she makes her own weight increased on each of her attack to make a stronger and more powerful attack, the moment after the attack and reducing the weight back to normal again is too slow.


    She''s doing fine when Roy was wielding her as weapon. As his summon, she has some connection with him and she will adjust her body to transform into what in Roy''s mind. Even the weight.


    But the connection only happened when she''s near Roy. And she can''t use that connection for telepathicmunication.


    Although she has been practicing a lot by defeating monsters, she still can''t get used to her new body.


    No matter how useful her ability as shapeshifter is, she can only fight as how she remembered it in her past human life. Although she''s smart and has a really wild imagination, she''s not a quick thinker like Roy. That''s why the only way for her to fight is by fighting like she did in the past, back when she hasn''t gained both magic and Aura.


    Even though she no longer has Aura, her sword technique is much better than Roy. So for her to defeat several humans enemies is much easier than defeating monsters.


    Facing against seven opponents, the only problem she could have is if they choose to escape. So, once she found them, she just charged right through them, killing some enemies while getting past them to their back so they won''t have a chance to escape.


    She managed to kill three people just like that.


    "What? Who are you?!"


    "It''s not time for questions! Just kill her already!"


    Leaving only four people behind, two on the right and another two on the left. All four of them casted their magic to attack Victoria.


    Their attacks raised the dust around them making even themselves unable to see anything. Victoria used that chance to attack all four of them.


    Although she can''t see as well, she can deduce where the enemies are from where the magic came from. She moves to her left and shed two enemies, then she moves to the right and stabbed one enemy. Leaving only one man alive.


    "Don''t kill me! Please, I beg you!"


    "You''re here to kill my friends so it''s no problem if I kill you, right?"


    With that, she swung her sword and decapitate her enemy''s head from his body.


    Although she''s a woman who came from a modern world, she''s already ustomed to killing in this world. The world she''s reincarnated into is not a kind world, with the rule of survival of the fittest. And so, she adapted to themon sense of this world after a few years growing up in this world in her childhood.


    After killing all seven enemies, she started to move to the center area. Since she has already advanced ahead, the other girls still hasn''t fought any enemies. If Victoria can reduce the enemies here, the burden on the girls will be lighter.


    But just as soon as she ran, Sonia appears.


    "What''s wrong?"


    "Roy has gained some new information. They have two waves of attacks. The first one is right now, with thirty people, and Roy has defeated five of them. The second wave is in an hour if the first wave hasn''t returned by then. And they have about seventy people left for the second wave. He wants me to ry a message to you to make sure that no enemies can escape. All of them has to be killed. If even one person escape, the second wave wille sooner."


    "Understand. Inform the others."


    "Okay."


    Since the both of them have knew each other for a long time, they already have a good understanding of each other. They don''t need to say more than necessary during an emergency. So after rying a message to Victoria, Sonia left right away.


    Roy has defeated five and Victoria has defeated seven. Which means there are still eighteen enemies left.


    Victoria choose to stay behind the enemy and killed them from behind while they are fighting with Ka''s group.


    She let them fight Ka''s group first so they will let their guards down for attacks from behind and Victoria can kill them.


    In the end, Ka and Sophie together managed to kill four enemies, Wendy able to kill six enemies, and the rest are killed by Victoria. Which makes her kill count to fifteen.


    The eight enemies are killed by her as she judged them to be dangerous when they were about to cast magic to kill the girls. So when they were preparing their magic, Victoria appears and killed them.


    Wendy was surprised to see that Ka and Sophie able to kill four. They both able to kill the least number of enemy, but knowing that they are still beginner level, and most of the enemies are intermediate level, Wendy was so surprised.


    They only got slight injuries, and Ka can easily heal them.


    "Are you sure you are still beginner level mages?" Wendy asked Ka and Sophie.


    "Yes. It was all thanks to Roy''s teaching and also Victoria and Sonia''s knowledge of magic from the past." Sophie answered.


    "Just who is Roy, really?"


    "He''s a clown. An extremely good one. If you watched his performance in the circus, you will know it too," said Ka.


    "I know that. I also watched the circus during rence''s performance. Roy told me that he''s rence. But that doesn''t answer my questions!"


    "You will know. Maybe after this is over, he will tell you his secret. Or maybe just one of his many secrets," replied Ka confidently.


    "Can he really be trusted so much just by him telling you his secrets?" asked Wendy.


    "Well, if he tells you his secret, you will have no choice but to trust him."


    "I don''t think that will happen. He''s my student, but to trust him just after sharing his secret, I don''t think I can trust him that easily. By the way, I haven''t seen Victoria for a while. Where is she?"


    Wendy looked around and didn''t see Victoria since the battle here is over.


    "Roy probably has summoned her," Sophie answered Wendy''s question.


    "¡­I forgot that she''s a monster."


    Soon after, the door of the shack is opened and Ange out of it.


    "I''ve finished breaking through! Now is my time to shine! Tell me what happened!"


    Sophie summarized what happened about the battle, and where Roy is currently.


    Meanwhile, Sonia who just see the good news that Ang has broken through to Intermediate level on her ice element, suddenly got called by Roy.


    She reappears soon to tell new information from him.


    "Wendy, do you know a woman named Candy?"


    "Hmm? What is it?"


    "These fake bandits captured her and put her in a cage. Later, she will cooperate with Roy to make ruckus from behind the enemy lines."


    "She will? That''s great! She''s pretty strong herself so it''s great to have her to join!"


    Wendy is happy to hear that they have a reinforcement from someone she knows.


    "Well, if she''s so strong, why was she captured?" teased Ang.


    "That just means the enemies is much stronger than her. Sonia, tell us everything you heard from Roy."


    Ka asked Sonia to tell everything.


    Sonia informed them about how they are fake bandits who are actually part of the cult. Although they are part of the cult, their loyalty is just toward a woman in the cult. Probably one of their higher-ups.


    "What cult? What are you talking about?" Wendy is confused with the information she got.


    "Roy said that he will exin it to both you and Candy after this is over. Let''s hope you all can stay alive when it''s over," said Sonia.


    While Wendy is confused, Ka is already thinking of a n for their next moves.


    "I have a n. Since we still have enough time before they started moving, let''s do it right now. It will help us kill everyone even if their numbers bigger than us."


    "What is your n?" Ang asked.


    "This is a cliff with nowhere to escape other than falling from it since they got us surrounded. Let''s dig a hole and make it seems as if we''re escaping to below the cliff. But actually, the hole is just a trap toward dead end. And we will make some hollow area below that fake escape path that we will cover, and we will return to the surface from there while covering the hole."


    "I see! Then we will make them got caved in once they entered just like Ellen''s party!" Sophie understood Ka''s n.


    "I don''t think all of them will enter the hole. Some of them should be entering the shack or looking from the edge of the cliff. But with Ms. Wendy''s powerful magic, she can attack that area and makes everyone fall to their death."


    "I understand. I can fly by using wind magic since I''m advanced level in both wind and fire element so I will fly above the cliff and use powerful fire magic to destroy the cliff! That''s a sound n! But what if there are some enemies that doesn''t dare to get close to the cliff? And where will you hide?"


    Wendy asked where the others will hide while she''s flying.


    "We can dig another hole away from the cliff. That will be our hiding spot. As for the rest of the enemies, Roy and your friend can take care of that."


    "What if they identally attacked your hiding spot?" Wendy asked Ka again.


    "If it''s Roy, he will get here first and protect our location as soon as he arrived. We will be fine. We still have time so let''s start digging, Ang."


    Ka stood up and prepared to dig a hole.


    "Alright! I have just breakthrough Intermediate level and the first thing I do is digging a hole? This group is weird as usual."


    And so, Ka and the others prepared their n.


    Since they don''t need to be careful of burying people under them, both Ka and Ang used their digging ability to the fullest from the start. The fake escape path needed to be long enough to convince the enemies.


    Wendy is looking for a good hiding spot while flying. Sophie and Sonia is on guard duty.


    This is why Sonia can''t answer Roy''s call until their preparation is over.

 Chapter 104 - Different Factions In The Cult

    My girlfriend is really awesome!


    She has nned to kill most of the enemy in one shot.


    Ka and the others will lure the fake bandits with a hole they dug and make the fake bandits think that they have escaped to under the cliff.


    But that''s just a trap to make everyone gather in one spot, then Ms. Wendy will kill them all by using her strongest fire magic from the sky.


    And so, it''s my job to make sure that most of the enemies, and hopefully all of them, will fall to their death. Either getting caved in once they entered the hole, or be pushed to their death after falling off the cliff.


    There might be some survivor, but we can take care of them as long as there are no one stronger than Advanced level mages.


    I looked for the ce where Ka and the others hide. It was far from the cliff so they should be fine.


    As for Ms. Wendy, Sonia says that once the enemies get close, she will contact Ms. Wendy and she will fly then. To conserve magic, she can''t fly all the time using wind magic. That''s why Sonia need to report the enemies'' location before they reached close to Ms. Wendy.


    I ride the coach with Candy behind me in a cage and Grant knocked out cold beside me. For now, I need to hide him.


    "Is it okay to knock him out cold? Don''t you think it''s too soon for that?"


    "Nah, I can just disguise my voice and make it as if he''s still fine."


    "What if he suddenly awake?" asked Candy.


    "Don''t worry, I made sure that he''s only getting the bare minimum of air so he won''t die, but not enough to make him conscious."


    "Air?"


    "It''s okay if you don''t understand. Just trust me."


    And so, I called Blobby to envelop both me and Grant.


    I made sure that Grant''s head can be seen while I''m hiding behind him under the cover of Blobby. Of course to make things more believable, my both my hand is out. My hands is out from under Grant''s armpit, while his hand is blocked by Blobby.


    It feels like I''m hugging him, but with Blobby as a cloak, no one can see me.


    "How is it?"


    "¡­now he looks like a fat man with a small head and short arms."


    "But no one will be suspicious, right?"


    "Unless they are very close with him."


    "That''s okay. I don''t think these kind of people would care about their leader''s body shape."


    Soon, I can see that all the enemies has reached the shack. And they were looking for Ka and the others but they found nothing. They only see a hole in front of the shack.


    "Hey! Why are you not fighting?" I asked them all using the voice of Grant.


    "Sir! They seem to be running away! There''s a hole and we suspect that they are escaping to the bottom of the cliff!" someonee over to me and reported.


    "Is that so? Then why are you here and not looking for them!"


    I tried to act like their leader. And it looks like I''m doing fine. None of them suspected me.


    "Grant, oh, Grant¡­ why are you thinking that you''re the leader here?"


    Suddenly, someone appears with a grin in his face.


    And¡­ he looks just like Grant! Don''t tell me he''s Grant''s twin?


    Damn! I forgot to see the faces of everyone here so I don''t know that my n has a huge w! What should I do?


    Well, it''s time for Shameless Survival Arts!


    Acting Skill: Pretend We''re Strangers!


    "And who do you think you are?!"


    Aaaaaah! How stupid! He''s Grant''s twin and I''m asking him who he is! I should have said a better line than that! Even Candy is too embarrassed to look at me!


    "Urgh¡­ is that how it is? Just because you were chosen as the leader for this mission, you choose to forget me? Your own brother, the Great Graham?"


    How are you so great?! You''re just here because of a woman!


    "It''s not the time toin! All of us will charge into that hole and make sure none of them are alive! Kill everyone for Lady Celestine!"


    ""UOOOOOH!!!""


    Wait! There''s something strange!


    I thought that everyone here is supporting this Celestine, but why is Grant''s own twin didn''t seem happy when I said it? Did he finds out about my disguise?


    "Lady Celestine this, Lady Celestine that¡­ You''re just a pervert who got brainwashed by her big boobs! In the end, you''re just a boob lover!"


    Grant¡­ I hope you died. You just followed Celestine''s order because she has big boobs?


    Then Graham continued.


    "We''re not here because of Lady Celestine! We''re here because of Lady Veronica!"


    ""UOOOOOH!!""


    They made another loud yell about as loud as Celestine''s fan.


    So this group is divided into two. One is Celestine''s fan, and the other is Veronica''s fan.


    In the end, everyone is stupid.


    "You said we''re boob lover, but aren''t you here as well because of Lady Veronica''s ass? You''re just a huge ass lover!" one of the men who supported Celestine said so.


    ¡­Twins are indeed twins, huh?


    Although one is ass man, and the other is boobs man.


    I''ll try to capture Grant''s twin as well. Hopefully, both of them has important information to give us. But to do that¡­


    "Then let''s make it into apetition. If my side win, it means Lady Celestine is the best. If you win, it means Lady Veronica is the best."


    "I''ve been waiting to prove that for a long time! How do we decide the victor?"


    "How? We will decide thatter. The sooner we kill our targets, the sooner will we have ourpetition."


    "Tsk! Fine. But I assure you that we will win and proof Lady Veronica is the best!"


    Seriously, apetition that will decide which one is better? Boobs or ass? How stupid.


    It''s the heart that count!


    "Everyone, Charge! For Lady Celestine!"


    "And Lady Veronica!" Graham continued my word.


    ""OOOOOOOO!""


    With Grant as the leader of big boobs faction, and Graham as the leader of big ass faction staying behind, the others marched on and entered the hole. The few smarter ones choose to look below from the cliff to see where the hole end, but it was too dark and even light element mage can''t make their light shone that far.


    Seeing how everyone move ahead leaving me and Graham behind, I asked him why is he not leaving.


    "Both of us are leader of each factions. We can''t have both leader to fight this battle. Although somehow they managed to defeat those lowlife bandits, I don''t think they''re strong enough to need both of us toe out."


    Although he said that, he kept sending nces to Candy. Of course Candy noticed his gaze and she tries to cover her body¡­ her ass and sit down in the cage.


    Well, from my perspective, Candy indeed is a beauty with great figures which is big in both boobs and ass. But for Grant, I think she''s not big enough for him to convert religion from Celestine to Candy.


    Now I''m curious about how big this Celestine is.


    Once most of this group reached the hole, they organized themselves and enter in two lines.


    I''ll use this chance to knock Graham unconscious before Ms. Wendy attacked.


    "Oh, a bird!" I pointed my finger to the sky.


    "How can you see a bird in the dark?" Graham said. But he''s still looking to the sky.


    Then I smacked his head and knock him out. Easy.


    "You can take off the cor now. I don''t think you will make a move here." I said to Candy.


    "These guys¡­ how can they kill people just because of boobs or ass? Do you know something about the cult?" Candy asked me as she took off the cor.


    "What I know doesn''t contain their fetishes. But if you want to know more, we can talkter."


    "Alright, but you will tell me everything," she said.


    "I won''t. Although I saved your live, it''s not enough for you to trust me. I will tell you enough to let you know the important part, but for the rest, I''ll let someone else you can trust to do the job."


    I''ll delegate the king himself to tell both Candy and Wendy.


    "Someone I can trust? Is it Wendy?"


    "Nope. Just focus in killing everyone first. I''ll go pick up my friends."


    I left the coach and Candy who''s leaving the cage to the ce where Ka and the others hide.


    It''s good that no one notices where they are. They hide well under the ground with two ice pir supporting a huge rock above them so when the enemy marched on and stepped on the ground above the girls, the enemy won''t notice anything strange.


    I transform Blobby into a shovel and start digging.


    "Hey! It''s safe now toe out!"


    As soon as I said that, I heard a huge explosioning from where the shack is.


    Seems like Ms. Wendy has made her move.

 Chapter 105 - By Guts, The Right Tool, Strength, Math, And Physics!

    I helped the girls out of their hiding spot as the sound of explosione from the cliff.


    "Has it started?" Sophie asked.


    "I hope it has ended," said Ka.


    I looked over the area where the explosione from with my Divine Vision and answer their question.


    "Unfortunately, although about fifty of them died, there are still few survivors. About ten of them. You girls go over to that coach over there and rest. There are two men, twins, knocked out over there. I''ll interrogate themter. You just need to knock them out if they made a slight movement while I help Ms. Wendy and Candy to kill the rest of the enemies."


    I said while pretending to be though and cool.


    "Understood. Good luck!" said Ka.


    "Umm¡­ can''t you be kinder and just say ''No! I''ll help you!'' like that?"


    "No! It''s important to rest. You will kill the enemies while we''re resting and look after the two people you said about."


    "No. That was just me pretending to be though. I really wish for your help here. Even though the enemies is not a lot, I still want some help."


    Aren''t thepany of the protagonist should say ''No! I''ll help you!'' just like that and they will help the protagonist? This just prove that fiction is fiction. Or maybe I''m not the protagonist here?


    "That''s why we''ll help by not bing your burden. You can go wild while we''re taking a break."


    ¡­seems like Ka got influenced by me too much. She''s bingzy.


    She should have rested enough while hiding underground, but to think that she said she want to take a break, she''s bing more and more like me. Leaving the important thing to the capable ones while taking a break.


    I also want to do that! That''s the main reason why I visited the king back then! But until now, I still have to be the one to do something! Can''t I take a rest?


    Let''s stopining and just put some effort in what matter most at the moment. Killing the rest of the enemies and survive.


    "Fine then. Make sure that those two are tied and unable to move. One of them already has Magic Restriction Cor on him, so you don''t need to watch him since he''s unable to use magic even if he''s awake. Just be careful with the other one. But with how hard I hit him, I don''t think he will wake up until tomorrow."


    "I''ming too! I want to test my new strength! Since I just breakthrough to Intermediate level in my ice element, I want to try it as soon as possible!"


    Ang volunteer toe with me to kill the remaining enemies.


    "Alright then. Let''s go."


    Ang and I left the other two who choose to take a rest.


    Although I said that it''s a shame that they''re not going to help, I know how tired they were after fighting the enemies.


    There are twenty five enemies, and although both Sophie and Ka managed to take down four of them, it still makes them exhausted because these enemies are much stronger and organized than any bandits we encountered before.


    As for Ang, she''s still in her top condition. In fact, she''s much stronger now because she has just broken through. She founds an enemy who got separated and seems to be trying to escape, and fight him.


    It''s supposed to be dark at the moment, but because of Ms. Wendy''s fire magic, there are some grass and trees that got burned and give us source of light.


    I don''t need them though since I have night vision, but thanks to the fire, Ang managed to find an enemy.


    She shot several Ice Spikes at him, but he managed to dodge them. Then Ang used wind magic to boost herself and charge directly at the enemy. In the close range, he used Fireball at the enemy''s mouth, and killed him.


    "I thought you''re trying to use your ice magic? Why Fireball?"


    "Because he''s also an ice element mage. When I shot the Ice Spikes at him, he sneered and dodged to see my reaction. But he didn''t know that I have three other elements. If I used ice magic again, he will be able to either block it or maybe negate it with using an even more powerful ice magic, so I killed him with a Fireball because he won''t expect it at all."


    "¡­you''re a freak. A magic freak and a battle freak. You''re too much of a genius."


    "Thank you. Shall we go on then?"


    "Sure."


    She''s too strong and too smart! Only within the area of magic and battle. For other subjects? She''s just average.


    But with this, once she be stronger and stronger, she can''t no longer keep following me who wants peace. If she want to be stronger, she had to go on a journey. Whether it''s to enter magic college, or adventuring, she has to leave if she wants to be stronger.


    And there''s nothing I can do to hold her. After all, the one who asked her to be stronger is me.


    For now, there are still something she can learn from me, Victoria, and Sonia, so she will stay with us.


    But in the future, she might choose to leave.


    No. Knowing her, she will leave undoubtedly. Maybe in one or two year, but not now.


    Whatever the case, she keeps getting stronger and stronger. Probably she will be much stronger than Ang in my past live, the Elemental Master. As a friend, I should congratte her.


    Since she won''t leave anytime soon, I should teach her everything I can. In term of magic and fighting though. As for other stuffs? Ka is a much better learner in other area.


    What about Ka and Sophie? Will they leave as well?


    As for Ka, I think she will leave and learn as many things she could. And Sophie, I don''t know if she want to be stronger like Ang and Ka. She just said that she wanted to be with me. But who knows about their future?


    Whatever the case, if they choose to leave, they can leave anytime they want. After all, we have a home they can return to.


    Ah shit¡­ I''m getting sentimental about thinking that they''re gonna leave. Good thing it''s dark now. If not, everyone will see my eyes tearing up. It''s weird to see someone crying as they kill. Though I did kill two people while I''m in tears.


    From ten enemies, one has been defeated by Ang and two has been shot to death by me. As for the other seven, four of them are flying. Three of the flying ones are carrying their friend. Now all of them are flying.


    "What now? I haven''t learned to fly yet."


    Should I tell her to kill the ones on the ground that pretend to be dead?


    "Try to shot your ranged magic attack at them. Just like Candy did."


    "What about you?"


    "I''ll also shot while trying to get closer."


    Although they are flying, other than Candy who tried shooting the enemies from the ground, they are still within the range of my jump.


    I shot my Blobpistol at one of them who is carrying another mage to distract them from attacking Ms. Wendy. It worked and both of them are aiming at me.


    "Don''t you dare targeting my students!" shouted Ms. Wendy.


    Don''t worry, Ms. Wendy. It''s all part of the n.


    As the pair descending, I jumped toward them. My jump is too fast and too high that makes their reaction slowed down because it was too surprising for them.


    I jumped to right above the two of them and stabbed my spear down and pierced both of them together.


    "Two down, five more to go."


    Then as I killed two of them, one flying enemy who doesn''t carry anyone flew toward me.


    "You''re a sitting duck once you''re in the sky!"


    ¡­I really want to see a duck sitting on the sky. That would be funny.


    I used the body of the flying man I just killed as a foothold, and jumped again toward the one saying something funny.


    I pierced my spear directly from the front. Now three down and four to go.


    "Roy! You''re amazing!"


    Amazing? I just stepped on dead body to be able to jump. Why don''t you see once I''m able to step on air? That would be really amazing sight.


    "We need to escape! Let''s split! Two on the ground and two on the sky! Whoever managed to survive will return and report everything happening here!"


    Well, it''s not like I''m nning to let anyone of you live. Other than the two twin brothers whom unconscious on the ground.


    "Ms. Wendy! You and I will get the two flying ones! Leave the one on the ground to the others!"


    "Okay!"


    She understand my n, and fly toward me to catch me and carry me with her.


    "Drop me here!"


    As soon as the pair who were flying split up, I told Ms. Wendy to drop me.


    How will I be able to move on air while I can''t step on air yet, and there''s no dead body to step on?


    The answer is by grappling hook.


    I shot the hook and let it grab the top of a tall tree. It''s about twenty meters distance but Blobby is able to reach that far.


    Then as the hook is attached to the cliff, I let gravity do its job and pulled me down. The grappling hook is still in ce so I swung back up and remove the hook from the cliff.


    "AAAAAAA!"


    I shouted as Victoria told me to while swinging.


    Well, this is fun. No wonder Victoria told me to shout.


    Shouting is indeed a must.


    As I was raised again, I''m directly in front of the furthest flying enemy.


    "Hello!"


    "What?! How did you get here?!"


    "By guts, the right tool, strength, math and Physics!"


    I showed him the importance of math before I killed him.


    I stabbed him and used his body as foothold tond safely on the ground.


    Then I looked at the other three.


    "They will be fine. Missionplete!"

 Chapter 106 - Interrogated By A Long Black-Haired Bombshell

    After killing my target, I looked at the situation with the other three.


    The other flying enemy was burnt and fell to his death because of Ms. Wendy. Candy struck an enemy with lightning magic. And thest enemy got pierced by Ang''s Ice Spike.


    Finally the battle is over!


    We gathered together back where Ka and Sophie are resting, at the ce where the coach is.


    The twin are still unconscious. Or maybe they did woke up, but Ka knock them out again.


    "What are you going to do with those two?" Ms. Wendy asked me.


    "I''ll try to get everything from them. Where the cult located, their higher ups, Lady Celestine and Veronica, the cult''s goal and everything possible from them. But first¡­"


    I approached the unconscious twin and pulled the explosive devices from their mouth.


    "They always have this thing in their mouth. Makes it easier for me to find out that they are from that cult."


    "They only did that so their member can keep their secrets. It''s not like anyone other than you has see-through vision." Ka retorted.


    "See-through?"


    Both Ms. Wendy and Candy covered their important areas as soon as they heard that I can see-through things.


    "Don''t worry," I gave them thumb up and continued, "I''ve seen everything and I liked everything. Then this is the part where Ang hit me."


    As soon as I said don''t worry, Ang has prepared to hit me as usual.


    And the pain this time is stronger than usual.


    "Guh¡­ having broken through to Intermediate level, your punch is getting stronger."


    "Thanks for thepliment. But please refrain from saying and doing anything perverted." Ang said.


    "I can''t."


    "What do you mean you can''t?"


    "Actually, these two are from different factions in the cult. One is from big boob faction, and the other is from big butt faction. Don''t hit me! I said the truth! You can ask Candy there! She''s a witness and almost became their victim!" I pointed at Candy who sighed because it was the truth.


    "¡­he''s right. Half of the enemies idolizing someone called Lady Celestine, who has big breast. The other half idolizing Lady Veronica who has big butt."


    All the girls now looked at the twin with disgust.


    "That''s why I will use it for interrogation."


    "How? Will you ask someone among us to seduce them to speak the truth? If so, I won''t do it." Ang said.


    I looked at Candy who sighed again. Seems like she doesn''t want to say it. So I will say it.


    "Well¡­ Candy over there was caught by them and put in a cage. From what I''ve seen, the one from boob faction doesn''t feel anything much from her despite her size. As for the ass faction, the leader, one of the twins, actually interested in seeing."


    "Ugh¡­ can I just kill them right now?" Ang aimed her killing intent at the twin.


    "Later. If we want to make them speak, we need someone who has both big boobs and ass to be the one asking them."


    "I won''t do it!"


    "Neither will I!"


    Ms. Wendy and Candy who knows their own assets, refuse to do it.


    The one who is willing here, should be Sophie. But although she was a former prostitute, she is more of a slim type.


    "I won''t ask you to do it. There are three who fit the bills. First is Sonia, but she''s a ghost. Second is Victoria, but she''s out at the moment. Lastly¡­ me using Blobby as disguise."


    Sonia perfectly fit the bill¡­ unless that Celestine and Veronica is out of the world!


    Victoria can change her shape to her will.


    So the one who will fit the bill and willing to do it, is me. While using Blobby to cover myself and shape her as my body and turns me into a long ck-haired bombshell.


    "¡­you''re going to do it?" asked Ms. Wendy confused.


    "Yes. For now, I''ll have Blobby became my body with Sonia''s shape."


    I take off my clothes and pants leaving myself with only an underwear. I don''t really care if the girls are looking. Wearing only underwear, as a man, is not as embarrassing as for when women did it.


    Then I cover my body with Blobby and have her transform my figure into simr with Sonia.


    "How do I look?"


    "¡­I hate to say it, but you do look gorgeous." Angpliment my look.


    Well, I''m not only transforming my body. I also transform my face. It will be weird if there''s a woman with perfect figure, but the face of a man.


    Now I look like a woman, with long hair thanks to Blobby, wearing a scarf to cover my Adam''s apple, and my outfit is revealing deep cleavage and a tight shorts.


    I really want to look at the mirror and see how hrious my look is.


    "Tsk! I wish I had that figure!" said Ang.


    "You will. Not now."


    As someone who has seen how her look in the future, I know how amazing her proportion will be. Well, hopefully, it will be the same as in my past live.


    "Hmm?" Ang is confused but Ka told her what I mean in whisper.


    "Don''t forget. He''s from the future."


    "Haha! Now I feel better!"


    "Don''t forget. In that future, you''re single."


    "¡­must you say that?"


    Well, I don''t know if she''s single or not. But from the rumor I heard about her, she has never been with any men before.


    "Let''s wake them up. If they saw me like this and actually started to say everything, that just show how stupid they are."


    And they are indeed stupid.


    As I shook them awake, they were angry at first. But then¡­


    "I''m truly sorry for what my stupid brother has done to you and your friends!"


    "I''m sorry that my brother looked at your friend with lecherous eyes!"


    It was Graham who spoke first, followed by Grant.


    I hope there are only these kind of men who joined the cult. Then it would be easy to force them to speak everything.


    "I''ll forgive you if you answer my questions."


    ""We''ll dly tell you everything!""


    Well, the first thing I know before asking them questions, is that at least Lady Celestine has smaller boobs than my disguise, and that Lady Veronica has smaller ass than this.


    Damn! Even with this body, Sonia still needed to use charm magic? What happened to men''s taste in women in the past?


    Then will they be Ang''s fan in the future? Who knows?


    I asked everything I want to know and they answered them all.


    The first thing is, the one who gave the order to kill mages is Lady Celestine. One of the cult''s higher ups who stays in the governor''s ce at the moment. She stayed there together with another of their higher up, Lady Veronica.


    She gave the order because of the Orc Emperor incident. Knowing that someone managed to kill something as strong as mutated Orc Emperor, make the cult thought that their n might fail because there are unknown powerful mage in this city.


    I have the urge to tell them that I''m more of a fighter than a mage, but I managed to hold back.


    Well, this is interesting.


    I thought they would be willing to answer the questions willingly. But now, I can see their tongue is trying to find the explosive devices inside their mouth. So I guess my seduction failed, huh?


    Well for the rest of the questions, I have to consider if they will answer the truth or not.


    "How do I join the cult? I''m interested if they n to destroy the world."


    "Well, for me, I entered because I encountered Lady Celestine. After that, I kept following her and she found out about me. She said to do what she says so I can follow her anywhere and so I did. ckmailing, Killing, anything she said, I did it without hesitation."


    "As for me, it''s the same. But with Lady Veronica. As to how the others joined, they are introduced by other members to join. I can tell you where to sign. That ce is the only location where you can register as a member."


    Then Graham said that the registration is in another country, Kingdom Arturo. There''s a city at the edge of that kingdom, and they told us to enter a certain bar after midnight.


    That''s a lie I guess. There are already recruitment happening in this city. I killed them all though.


    But at least I got some new information.


    The ce he told us, should be a trap. If we go there, we will end up getting caught in their trap.


    These twin already realize that they can''t kill themselves so they thought of having us caught in the cult''s trap.


    If I tell Albert about this, he will send some spy to Arturo and investigate the city and the bar. It should be useful.


    "Thank you for that. But now I know you won''t answer honestly anymore, it''s time for you to die."


    "What?! We spoke the truth!"


    "Right! If you don''t trust me, you can bring me to that bar and I''ll speak for you!"


    I thought they were trying to kill themselves after looking for the explosives inside their mouth. But to think they ended up begging for their lives¡­ how ridiculous.


    "If you''re looking for the explosives inside your mouth, then why are you begging for your lives?"


    Both of them shocked after hearing my words. Or more precisely, my voice.


    When I spoke to them at first, I used a female voice. But now, I spoke in my normal voice.


    "Now I''ll kill you. But before I kill you physically, I''ll kill you mentally!"


    I undo Blobby''s transformation right in front of them. Revealing me, a handsome man, only wearing underwear.


    ""GYAAAAA!!!""


    "Now die!"


    I shed both of them with my spear. Decapitating both of them.


    "Was that necessary to undo your disguise?"


    "No, but it''s fun to see their reaction."


    "¡­I forgot that you''re a clown."


    Ms. Wendy then told me to get dressed.


    The battle is over and the interrogation is over. Now we can go home.


    But there''s just one more thing to do.


    "When will you tell us the truth?"


    There''s two secret agent looking at me with hostility.


    Should I seduce them just like the twins?

 Chapter 107 - Lying Is Necessary For The Password

    "Tell us! Who are you and what do you know?!"


    Candy said with hostility. And Ms. Wendy also looking at me.


    Well, although we cooperate temporarily, they are still a secret agent of the king.


    If someone they barely met figured out who they were, it''s obvious that they would be hostile.


    And I keep escaping the questions by telling them I will answer their questionster.


    "I have asked Wendy and she was also surprised for you to realize her true identity. She never told anyone about it. And what do you know about these people and the cult he mentioned before?"


    Candy pointed at Grant whose head already separated from his body.


    "If I tell you, will you believe me? I thought I told you I will let someone else tell you."


    "You did, but you need to tell us as well. We will decide if we can trust you or not."


    "Alright then, I''ll tell you. But making you believe in this story is up to the guy you will meetter."


    "I don''t think even if someone you appointed will not make us believe him easily." Candy sneered at my remark.


    Then I replied with a sneer as well.


    "Even if he''s the king of this country?"


    "What?!"


    "Justst week¡­ now that I think about it, it has only been a week since I left the capital, huh? Anyway,st week, I killed your boss, Tim, right in front of the king himself after reporting his betrayal¡­ and hidden desire."


    "You did what?" It was Ms. Wendy who shouted out loud.


    "I killed your boss, Tim, right in front of the king himself."


    Even if I repeated my word again, it''s not like they will believe me.


    Hearing something like the leader of the secret agency being killed right in front of the king is unbelievable.


    "If you don''t believe me, there should be a newsing from the capital soon. It''s about a man called Ninja, which is me, is killing Tim because of personal vendetta. I did it in the king''s chamber. The security of the pce should be increased now because of what happened."


    "Ninja?"


    "My alter ego. I can''t sneak in the pce without a disguise, right? By the way, I also have another alter ego, which is rence the clown. Aren''t I amazing?"


    "¡­so you''re a clown, huh?"


    "You''re exactly right, Candy? Want some candies?"


    "No. Just continue."


    So Candy doesn''t like candy. That means more candies for me!


    "I''ll take some candies then. And maybe you can get yourself dressed before you continue."


    Ang took some candies from my clothes on the ground, and throw my clothes at me. She than shared it with Ka and Sophie. She also offered it to Ms. Wendy but Ms. Wendy refused.


    I put on my clothes as I tell Candy and Ms. Wendy about the cult.


    "Such evil group existed? Impossible!"


    "It is possible, Ms. Wendy. As a teacher and a secret agent yourself, you should have known that the things that was taught at school was never everything."


    Then Candy interrupted.


    "Don''t believe in him yet, Wendy! He could be telling lies!"


    "That''s why I told you that I''ll let the king tells you! If it''s him, whether he said lies or truths, you will believe him easily because it''s part of your job."


    "We''re not in a position to meet the king directly." Candy said.


    "You have to meet him directly! Right now, the king is also trying to find more traitor in the kingdom and he needs someone he can trust! If he know that I send you two to him, he will have allies he can trust."


    "¡­but how?" asked Ms. Wendy.


    "Easy. I''ll draw you a hidden passage through Tim''s room and you will arrive at the ceiling of the king''s chamber. Knock on the ceiling when he''s in the chamber to let him know you''re there. Once he noticed and asked who you are, tell him this password. ''Ninja is not a clown''. He will then know that you are someone that can be trusted"


    ''Ninja is a clown'' is a lie that Albert need to hear.


    When he hears it, he will know that it''s a lie because of his lie detector ability will activate once he hears it. That was why I told Candy and Ms. Wendy that I''m a clown.


    Although we haven''t decided on any password, if Albert is as smart as I thought, he will then figure out that Ninja is actually a clown. Then he will realize that the trespasser is someone who actually knows Ninja''s identity.


    "Tell the king the password, only when he''s in his chamber. Although the queen and the king''s sister know about me as well, it need to be the king himself to hear the password."


    "But why is the password is Ninja is not a clown? Aren''t you the Ninja and a clown?" Ms. Wendy asked curiously.


    "It''s called a password because only he will understand it. Remember, ''Ninja is not a clown''."


    "Aren''t there many people in the court that the king can trust?" Candy asked.


    People in the court, huh? Even though not all of them should be part of the cult, it''s still difficult to believe them.


    Maybe some of them although doesn''t belong in the cult, they still did other crimes. And Albert, while looking for the traitors, finds about their wrongdoings. It will be difficult for him to trust them.


    That''s why, if I deliver him two people I can trust, maybe his job will be easier.


    I have read the n made by Tim to make Ms. Wendy a criminal. In there, I also read Candy''s name included in the list.


    If both of them are part of the cult, Tim wouldn''t made that n.


    And if Ms. Wendy and Candy are part of the cult, but doesn''t have explosive devices in their mouth, it means that both of them are of higher rank than Tim and Tim wouldn''t dare to put their name of the list.


    If I''m wrong, I''ll endanger the whole country by letting them get close to Albert. It''s the risk of fighting against an organization that dare to go against the whole world.


    Well, for now, let''s have these two help Albert.


    "It''s justst week that I inform the king. Right now, he should be trying to figure out who the traitor is among the people in the pce. He needed someone he can trust so I ask you two to help him. Although I will meet him again soon."


    "You''re going there? Why aren''t you the one helping him then?"


    "Well, for one, the only reason I told him everything is so I can leave everything for him to take care of. If possible, I don''t want to do anything with the cult ever again. That''s why I don''t want to. I told him I will help from time to time, but to not expect me to always help him."


    "¡­so you''re justzy."


    Candy shot a re at me. But I ignored her.


    "Now that I have told you everything, you two should prepare to go to the capital. For now, let''s go home first."


    We sneaked into the city because the gate is closed. It''s no problem for us since we can just jump over the wall.


    Well¡­ it was me who jumped the wall and carrying the girls. It was nice to carry my target of admiration in my previous live, Ms. Wendy.


    She was so tired she doesn''t want to use magic anymore, so I ended up having to jump over the wall back and forth to carry everyone.


    We split up after we entered the city. Ms. Wendy and Candy is preparing to go to the capital as soon as possible.


    I told them to not tell anyone yet about the cult. No one knows if there are someone among them who is part of the cult.


    As for us, Ka and Ang took Sophie to their apartment. Sophie said that she want to ask Ang her experience in breaking through along with Ka.


    And I''m in charge of Daniel and the others'' protection.


    They are fine in the guild, and no one tried to bother with them.


    The guild receptionist told me that there are some drunk men trying to cause trouble in front of the guild. Not knowing if they are rted to the attackers or not, the guild just ask some hunters to watch the drunk men.


    As for Red Tail, there were no sign of it being trespassed. Seems like we''re safe. But I don''t know if we can stay safe if we stay in Melk. And this time, I won''t care about not graduating. So I told Daniel, Hannah, Penny, and Ruby to move tomorrow.


    "We''ll move tomorrow? Isn''t that too soon?" Penny worried about moving too soon.


    "If it''s for safety, then I understand. Knowing that this city isn''t safe, I think it will be better if we move to different city as soon as possible. Let''s do it for both Hannah and Daniel. I''ll give the key to this building to you in case you want to have a ce to sleep whenever you''re here, Roy."


    Ruby gave me the key to this building. But will Ie back here again?


    Penny finally agreed to move tomorrow after Ruby persuaded her. Meanwhile, Daniel and Hannah are both happy to be moving ce.


    And so, everyone preparing their stuffs to move to Cassau. And I became the owner of Red Tail. Although I don''t know if I will return here or not.

 Chapter 108 - Moving Day

    The next day, early in the morning, I woke up because Ruby knocked the door to my room and called me.


    "Roy! You have guestsing for you!"


    "Tell them I''m not fully functional until three more hours. I''m enjoying my sleep here and unable to move from this bed. The gravity force of the bed in the morning is much heavier than any other time."


    I have looked at the guests visiting me and think it would be okay to not meet them. They are just Ms. Wendy and Candy, along with Ang, Ka, and Sophie who show them the way.


    They are freely entering the building. Well, this is also Sophie''s house after all. It''s normal for her to bring the guests in.


    Ang and Ka are also regrlying here. And they are currently ying with Hannah and Daniel whom I don''t know when he left this room.


    Kids sure are early risers.


    "Okay. I''ll tell them just that. But I''m not responsible if they want to enter your room and chat. By the way, when will we leave?"


    "As soon as everyone is ready."


    "Other than you, the others has prepared themselves."


    "Then as soon as I''m ready. It''s just impossible for me to leave this bed at the moment."


    Of course the bed I''m talking about is Blobbybed. I can alter the size and softness of the bed ording to my will. That''s why this is the best bed ever!


    I usually just sleep on a normal bed, but when I want to have a good rest, I would use Blobbybed to sleep on.


    Sincest night was hectic, I want to have a good night sleep before we move to Cassau. But I never would have thought that those two secret agents want to meet me early in the morning and disturb my sleep.


    I have told her to go to the capital as soon as possible, so why would theye here looking for me? I thought our business was concludedst night?


    I deactivate my Divine Vision and go back to sleep. Ignoring everything else that''s happening in the world.


    ...


    ...


    "ROOOY! WAKE UP!"


    "Ugh!"


    While trying to sleep again, suddenly I felt a heavy weight jumping on me. It was Daniel.


    "Ugh¡­ what''s wrong Daniel?"


    "Ka say you need to wake up!"


    ¡­so they finally decided to send an assassin. How effective.


    "Tell her I''m awake."


    "Okay!"


    Daniel left the room while I still haven''t left Blobbybed.


    Let''s sleep again.


    Is what I want to do, but there''s someone opening the door to my room again.


    "Wake up!"


    "I''m awake! You can ask Daniel if I''m awake or not!"


    It was Candy. Seems like she can''t wait any longer so she barged into my room. Behind her, I see Ms. Wendy, Ang, Ka, and Sophie.


    "If I asked him, he would just say that you''re awake because you say so!"


    "Well, I''m awake when he''sing in so it''s not a lie. Anyway, what do you wanting here early in the morning?"


    "It''s not early! The sun is already up!"


    "If I''m still in my bed that mean it''s still early!"


    Just after I said that my Blobbybed turned into a woman.


    "Don''t worry. Now that I''m awake, he has no other choice but to wake up."


    "Victoria!"


    My bed turned into the Victoria''s human form. And then, from the open door, Daniel and Hannah saw her and greeted her cheerfully.


    "Although we metst night, it''s the first time wemunicate, so nice to finally talk to you, Candy."


    "¡­the slime is talking!?"


    It''s so loud now that I no longer have any desire to go back to sleep.


    "So? What do you want from me?"


    "We want to join you on your way to Cassau. We''ll split up midway."


    I see. Since Cassau and the capital is in the same direction, they want to tag along with us.


    "Okay, so¡­ is that why you''re waking me up at this time?"


    "Yes."


    "Okay. We''ll move after I sleep again."


    "No!"


    Damn! Candy is too annoying. Can''t I just sleep in peace?


    "Before wee here, we already rented a horse carriage. Let''s leave right now!"


    "Fine! But in the carriage, don''t wake me up!"


    Having no other choice, I left Melk together with them.


    Seems like no one has any attachment left in the city.


    Ms. Wendy and Candy are both secret agents. They being in Melk is probably because of a mission.


    Ka and Ang also seem to not getting along with the people in their viges. After getting their own apartment in the city, they never return back to their own viges.


    Well, so am I.


    The only one who made contact with me in my vige is just the vige chief. And it was just to give me some food. I know that he is annoyed by my existence, but because of his status as the vige chief, he needed to make sure that at least the vigers know that he cares about the people.


    Daniel and Hannah¡­ they seem excited to go to another city. It''s also their first time riding a horse carriage.


    Penny is just happy to see her daughter smiling.


    As for Sophie and Ruby, they also don''t have any attachment in Melk.


    Ruby''s daughter, Sam, also moved to Cassau. So it will be easier if they want to meet.


    And Sophie, she said she doesn''t have any good memories in Melk other than sleeping with me. Since she can do it anytime she wants, she just said to at least have a bigger bed.


    In the end, the one who had the most attachment with Melk was me. Since I''m the only one who knows the future and has seen it myself. Although the only friend I had is just the nodding guy and I have never met him in this lifetime. I only remember we always nodded at each other but I failed to remember his face. I just know that he has a generic young man face.


    I hope Albert do a good job in preventing the tragedy.


    For that, he needed someone he can trust. That''s why I hope these two secret agents are loyal to the kingdom.


    Both Ms. Wendy and Candy are the target for Tim''s n. He made a n to frame a lot of secret agents and other important people in the kingdom to make the kingdom grow weaker.


    In my previous live, he managed to do it, but just as the kingdom''s power weakening, Albert realized that someone is framing Ms. Wendy and the others.


    I don''t know how, but Albert managed to clear out the traitors in the kingdom. He then tell everyone how Ms. Wendy and the others are on the side of justice and willing to die for the country.


    Since I saw Candy''s name in the list of people targeted by Tim, I thought maybe I can trust her as well.


    It has been two days since we left Melk. And Daniel started to get bored. So I taught him to y several card games to waste time.


    I also perform several tricks as rence to alleviate his boredom. And I realized how amazing clowns are. They can make sad and bored people happy.


    "Hey. Why aren''t you two hurried to the capital?"


    On the way, I asked Ms. Wendy and Candy why they are taking their time to the capital.


    "¡­we need to prepare ourselves mentally. We have never met the king before. All of our missions was given out to us by Tim. We are not in the position to meet the king directly." Ms. Wendy replied.


    "Oh yeah. And you should probably hide yourselves even from your friends and other secret agents once you entered the capital. Just in case that some of them are actually part of the cult. There should be a hidden passage that goes directly to the garden in the pce from outside the gate. I''ll draw you a map for that."


    "How did you know all the secret passages?" Ms. Wendy asked.


    "I can see through things. Did you forget? Is that why you both no longer covering your body with your hands?"


    "What?! Pervert!" Both of them are covering their important parts with their hands as soon as I said that.


    "Don''t worry. It''s not like he always use that ability at all time. Although he will do it at least when you''re taking a bath," said Sophie covering for me. Good job!


    "Sigh¡­ I gave up on covering my body at all time. At least it''s good that he can see enemies from afar. Other than that, he mainly used his ability to look for an escape path," said Ang.


    "Escape? Not looking for the enemies weaknesses but to look for escape? How cowardly!" Candy said.


    We chatted a lot about anything because it took a while before we reached our destination.


    After three more days, we finally reached Cassau and it''s time for us to split with Ms. Wendy and Candy.


    "When you meet the king, tell him that Ninja will being soon. I probably needed to take care of few things before I can leave to the capital."


    "Roy, we''re going to the capital?"


    "What''s capital?"


    Hannah seems interested in going to the capital, while Daniel doesn''t know what a capital is. We need to teach him many things.


    Maybe it will be better if we all go to the capital. We can y a lot there and I can teach Daniel many things.


    "Well, how about you girls? Do you want to go to the capital as well?" I asked everyone else.


    "Yes!"


    "I''m always curious about how the capital looked like."


    Seems like everyone wanted to go as well.


    "Well then, how about we go thereter after we see our new house?"


    I don''t know when we will have the chance to go to the capital again, so it''s better if everyone at least has visited there once.


    "That''s how it is. Seems like I will be going there with everyone. So once you meet the king, tell him that I might bete because I want to go sightseeing."


    "Okay. See you at the capital I guess? Bye!"


    And we said farewell to Ms. Wendy and Candy at the front of the gate.


    They left the carriage to us to return while they''re taking horses to reach the capital faster.


    "Now, let''s go to our new home!"

 Chapter 109 - Secret Agents Meet The King

    Roy and the others stays at Cassau while looking around the city sightseeing with Daniel and the others.


    He will stay there for a few days before taking everyone to go to the capital.


    While the others were ying, he would sometime go diving to get some treasures to sell.


    The house looked better now that Lina has cleaned and renovate a few things. Thanks to Victoria''s knowledge of water draining system, there will be a private bathroom only for me in my room. But it hasn''t been built yet.


    It still needed at least a few month until it''splete. It''s all new knowledge after all for us in this world.


    While Roy and the others were rxing in Cassau, the two secret agents finally arrived at the capital.


    "Finally, we have arrived. How long has it been since I returned here?" said Candy reminiscing the past.


    "You''re from the capital? Then do you have a family you want to meet there?" asked Wendy.


    "No. I was trained to be a secret agent since I was little. I''m an orphan," said Candy.


    "Oh yeah. I heard that from you before. I''m also an orphan from a vige not far from here. But if there''s a chance, I would like to visit there after we''re done meeting with his majesty even though there''s no one I''d like to meet there," said Wendy.


    Candy silent for a while before asking Wendy something.


    "¡­you think Roy said the truth?"


    Candy still not believed what Roy said to them about the cult and how their leader is a traitor.


    "You¡­ now that you mentioned it, it was Tim who recruited you and taught you everything, right? You can''t believe if he''s really a traitor. That''s why you want it to be a lie."


    "¡­he''s like a father to me. It''s hard to believe that he nned to make us into a criminal in his n." Candy looked sad saying that.


    "Then if Roy spoke the truth, at least we should be able to meet his majesty himself. Then we can ask for his confirmation."


    "You might be right. Let''s go."


    "Wait! Let''s make our preparation first."


    Wendy stopped Candy who''s about to enter the secret passage from outside the wall that Roy told them about.


    "What preparation?"


    "Mental preparation. Candy, what would you do if what Roy said is true? Will you still put your faith to the country?"


    Candy pondered for a bit before answering Wendy.


    "I don''t know. To imagine that there are a lot of traitor inside the court is hard to believe."


    "Yeah, and if what Roy said is true, undoubtedly we will have a lot of work to do. More than we ever have before. But for me, I want the country to be safe. I only became a teacher for a short while, but I find it fun. I hope I can truly be a teacher in the future. But if there''s an organization that nned to destroy everything, my dream won''t evere true. What about you? What other things want to do other than being an agent?"


    Wendy hasn''t been long since she became a teacher, but she thinks bing a teacher might be a good idea if she were to quit being an agent. But she won''t be able to be a teacher if the cult destroy the world.


    They don''t know if the cult want to destroy the world or not, but hearing their ns from Roy, they thought that might be the end goal of the cult.


    "¡­I don''t know. But whatever I want won''t happen if the cult nned to destroy the world. Let''s go. I have prepared myself."


    "Good. I''ll take the lead."


    With Wendy in the lead, they entered the hidden passage. The end of that passage is a garden in the pce, then they entered another hidden passage to where Roy said Tim''s room is.


    They stopped for a while in that room.


    "So this is his room. I heard that Roy and his majesty took all important document here. We won''t find anything here."


    "What''s that?"


    Wendy didn''t see anything of importance in the room, but Candy found some writing on the floor. Hidden under a chair.


    They look closer at the writing to see a heart shaped symbol and two names written in the middle of the heart.


    "It says Tim and the other name is... Marie? Wasn''t Marie the name of the queen?" Wendy is surprised to see the name of the queen there.


    "¡­Roy said that Tim was killed because of his betrayal and his¡­ hidden desire. Don''t tell me his hidden desire is to¡­"


    At this time, Candy''s impression of the one she thought of as her father is dropped to the lowest point.


    "¡­Candy, let''s go. There''s nothing else to see here."


    Wendy told Candy to meet the king right away. They don''t have any other business here.


    Meanwhile, inside the king''s chamber, there are four people inside.


    Albert, Marie, Shirley who has just finished cultivating together with Marie, and one other person.


    "Ian, thank you for returning to be our butler. Even though you were supposed to be retired already, we have no other people we could trust." Albert thanking the old man with a long white hair tied into a ponytail who is wearing a butler outfit.


    "It''s nothing. I swear my loyalty to the country. If the country is in danger as you said, there''s no way I won''t help."


    Ian was the head butler of the previous king who retired after Albert sat on the throne. He knows Albert and his sister since they were just born.


    "But can you tell me what kind of trouble we''re facing?"


    Ian still hasn''t heard about anything from Albert. He was just told to help the country.


    "I just want someone I can trust to be by my side. As for the trouble¡­"


    Before he said anything else, everyone in the room heard a knock on the ceiling.


    Ian prepared himself to fight thinking it might be an assassin or spy, but Albert stopped him.


    "Who''s there?!" Albert asked the identity of the one on the ceiling.


    Wendy and Candy, can see peek a small part of the room from the ceiling. And when they see that Albert was there, Wendy knocked to tell him that they''re here.


    "Ninja is not a clown." Wendy said the password.


    Everyone was confused when they heard that. Everyone but Albert.


    What he felt was his lie detection ability was activated. Which mean that was a lie.


    Knowing that his lie detection ability activated, it means that Ninja is a not a clown is a lie. That means the guest knocking on the ceiling is someone who knows Ninja''s real identity.


    "Did Ninja sent you here?" Albert asked the voice from the ceiling.


    "Yes. He said that your majesty needed someone he can trust, so he send us both here." Wendy replied.


    "You can enter."


    As soon as he gave the permission, Wendy and Candy both entered and instantly get into a kneeling position.


    "No need to do that. You can stand. Who are you two?"


    Getting permission from the king, both of them stand up.


    The three people inside were rxed when they heard that Ninja send these two girls here, while one person still remains on guard.


    "Please be careful. They might be enemies."


    Ian already prepared to cast his magic to protect Albert.


    "No need to be on guard. If Ninja is sending them here, then at least Ninja trust them. For now, tell me who you are."


    Wendy is the one who answered Albert.


    "We are secret agents of the kingdom and a subordinate of Tim. Ro- Ninja said that Tim is nning to frame us and betray the kingdom but he prevented it to happen. He said that we will learn the truth bying here."


    "¡­the fact that he''s making me do the work of telling the truth is just very like him. He''s someone who told me all of this because he want other people to do it. And that Ro-something should be his real name, right? Do you know his identity?" Albert asked.


    "Yes. Tim told me to work as a teacher in an Introductory School in Melk few months ago. He is one of my student, Roy." Wendy replied honestly.


    "Wait, he''s a student? That mean he''s younger than me!" Shirley was surprised to hear that Roy is younger than her.


    "Did you forget what he told us?"


    "¡­oh, right."


    Marie reminded her about the fact that Roy came from the future. That means even if he''s younger than Shirley, his mental age is much older than that.


    Then Albert exined everything to the three people.


    "You twoe here in a good time. I was just about to tell everything to Ian. Now I don''t have to repeat it again."


    Albert tells everything about the cult, about the future he heard from Roy who came from, and his ability to detect lies.


    "I see. So that''s why I was asked such question." Ian smiled remembering yesterday when Albert visited him.


    "Sorry to test you before."


    Yesterday, by using one of the hidden passage Roy told him, he visited Ian and ask him a question. He asked if Ian loyal to the throne. Ian answered yes, but Albert''s lie detection skill was activated.


    Then he asked Ian again if he want to work under Albert again, Ian answered yes. Then Ian added that he is loyal to the king, but that''s not a lie.


    Albert feels warm after hearing that.


    Not loyal to the throne, but loyal to the king. That means he''s only loyal to Albert himself. Not anyone else. Probably, not even the previous king.


    "Well, what about you two? Will you help us in fighting against the cult?"


    This time, Albert asked the two guests about their decisions.


    "I will."


    Without hesitation, Wendy answered.


    "I¡­ can I have some time before I answer?"


    "Sure. Why?" Albert asked Candy.


    "Roy said that he wille here soon. I want to ask him something before deciding my answer. Don''t worry, I won''t ever reveal anything I heard today."


    "Understood. If you meet him in the capital, tell him to visit here every day. He was a doctor and I want him to be the one who delivered my babies."


    "Thank you for your generosity," Candy said.


    Wendy and Ian already decided to help Albert eradicate the evil cult, while Candy is still hesitating.


    She thought of Tim as her father since he''s the one who taught her everything since young. But to hear someone she idolize is evil, her heart can''t take it.


    She wants to hear everything from Roy. About the future he came from and what really happened directly from him.

 Chapter 110 - What Candy Wants

    "¡­hey. Does anyone ever thought that time goes by very quickly? I thought we were just travelled to Cassau the other day, but suddenly, we''re already near the capital. Does that ever bother anyone?"


    Currently, we are in a carriage heading to the capital. We rented two carriages for all of us to travel to the capital for sightseeing.


    In the first carriage, there was me, Sophie, Lina, Daniel, Hannah, and Penny. In the other carriage, the other were there. Ka, Ang, Victoria, Sonia, Ruby, and Sam.


    At first I was just asking the kids if they want to visit the capital. The kids were happy to go to the capital, and obviously, Hannah''s mother will join. And as a part of the team, of course Ka, Ang, and Sophie wille along. Then I asked Lina if she want to go as well so she can have a break since she has been taking care of the house since we bought it.


    Ruby at first refused, but since Sam wanted to go to the capital to check some price of valuables, Ruby also joined us.


    Victoria is obviouslye along, while Sonia is bored at home alone so she followed. But if there''s a trespasser entering our home, she will notice.


    It should have been a few days since we sightseeing Cassau when we already on the move again. I never thought that time can go by so fast. For me, it feels like just a day? An hour? Or maybe one chapter of a story. That just shows how fast time goes.


    I asked if anyone feels the same.


    "Nope. I feel time goes by normally," replied Sophie.


    "Master, it has been precisely 5 days since you entered Cassau. And 2 days since we left," said Lina.


    "Well, I guess it''s just me."


    Seriously, what have we done in the past five days?


    On the first day, we arrived Cassau. Then we show our new house to Daniel and the others and show them their rooms. There''s a n to build more room and another floor above. But it will only be done in a few month or maybe a year.


    Why more room? I don''t know. Go ask Victoria. At least we can make our building into an inn if we have more room.


    At first I thought of building a n. That might be nice. I can be the leader who do nothing all day while the other members do all the job. And I don''t have to work again.


    I''ll just go diving and hunt treasures. It''s nice because there are nopetition in this business. I can do it anytime I want and give them to Sam to sell. Even if I''m rich in the future, going treasure hunting underwater can get me some kind of ancient magic tools. Maybe there''s one that can help me protect my home.


    Well, the first day is just sightseeing. Then the second day, when I want to go diving, the kids also want to see the sea. So all of us going to the beach. I taught those who can''t swim to swim.


    I went diving and get less than what I usually caught, but that''s fine since we''re just having fun together at the beach.


    Then the third day, Ang asked me to go to the sea again so she can train casting her magic underwater. Ka and Sophie joined, while the others were too tired and choose to rest for the whole day.


    While training, I made sure that Sophie''s training spot is away from us. Being shocked while swimming is not something I want to taste.


    Then the fourth day, we decided to go to the capital, and here we are at the fifth day! We can see the capital already.


    Aren''t training arc is something that needed to be exined better? It should take one or two at the very least in how these girls trained. But it ended so fast that I almost forgot about it. What did they practiced anyway? I just bring them to a good spot to practice and left them alone until I picked them up.


    Then the next day we left for the capital? It was too fast!


    "Is that the capital?"


    "What''s that tall thing?"


    The kids are so excited to see the capital.


    "That is the Library Tower. They have many kind of books there."


    Maybe I could learn more about the truth from there. Is the one called Evil God is the same man who killed Sonia and Victoria? And howe he''s still alive?


    Maybe he reincarnated like Victoria, or be a ghost like Sonia and give order to other people.


    There are many things I don''t understand, but I''m just toozy to understand them. I guess if it''s important, I''ll look for some info about it.


    While we were still away from the capital, someonee over to our carriages. It''s someone we know already, Candy.


    We stopped our horses and greet her.


    "Hello! Have you been waiting for us?"


    "Yes. There''s something I want to ask you," said Candy.


    "What is it?"


    "Can we go somewhere private?"


    Candy seems to not want anyone else to know what she''s trying to say, so I left the carriages and tell the others to keep moving.


    "You all can go there. I''lle to you soon after we have a chat."


    "Do you need me to stay with you?" Victoria asked.


    "If I need you, I can just summon you. Go with the others. If you reached the capital before I catch up with you, go look for an inn."


    "Okay! Bye! Candy, Bye!"


    After sending them off, I followed Candy to a hut in the forest.


    "What is it?"


    "The king asked me to be his ally, but I haven''t made my decision yet."


    "And how can I help you with that?"


    "I just want to ask you about the future."


    "Didn''t Albert already told you everything I told him?"


    "You just called his majesty the king by name?"


    "He said I can. Well, privately I guess," I said.


    "Well, yes. I have heard them from his majesty. But I want to hear them from you."


    "Alright."


    Then I told her exactly what I have told Albert. Just the cult keep making trouble and finally we were at war against the cult.


    "That''s the same thing I heard from his majesty," said Candy.


    "Then what are you hesitating about?"


    "It''s just¡­ Tim was someone I considered as a father figure. He''s the one who taught me loyalty to the country. But he''s the one who betrayed the country. I just don''t know what''s right anymore."


    Tim was a father figure? The same Tim who kissed a painting of Marie? That''s just crazy!


    But I guess everyone has a side no one knows except for the people close to them. No wonder Candy is hesitating.


    "How about Ms. Wendy? What''s her decision?"


    "She''s at the capital helping his majesty. She instantly made her decision back then. But I still don''t know what to do."


    So Ms. Wendy has made her decision to help Albert. That''s good to hear. At least there''s one person he can trust.


    "Oh, and there''s also one other person his majesty trusted. It was his butler, Ian."


    "Hmm? That''s good. Two people at once is a good start. I has only been a few weeks since I met him and to find two people already is great."


    A butler, huh? That''s nice.


    "So you''re here to ask me for an advice? Because I''m from the future?"


    "Yes. I''m just so lost knowing someone I trust to be a traitor. Tell me what to do?"


    "I can''t do that. But if there''s something I can say to you, is for you to not do what you don''t want to do. Do what you want to do is an obvious advice, so it will be best if you don''t do anything you don''t want while doing what you want to do."


    "Like how you don''t want to be involved too deeply with the cult matter so you choose to get his majesty do everything?"


    "Yeah, that! So? What about you?"


    I asked Candy what she wants to do and what she doesn''t want to do. She didn''t answer me but just keep mumbling.


    It''s something I can''t hear even with my good hearing but I can see her mouth keep moving. I should have learned how to read lips movement.


    "That''s it!" She said as she smiled brightly. Unlike the previously hesitating Candy.


    "What is it?"


    "Let me be your girlfriend!"


    "¡­okay, but why?"


    Did I just stupidly epted her confession?


    "When I was caught and put into a cage, I was so scared. Then you came and save me. Since then, I feel secure whenever I''m around you especially after seeing your strength defeating those people near the cliff. I guess that''s why I want to hear your advice before deciding things."


    "Well, I''m honored."


    "And I also feel slightly jealous when you''re with the others. Not that I don''t agree with you having a harem. I mean how close you are with Ka, Sophie, Daniel, Hannah, and the others. I want to be a part of that."


    "Wee aboard I guess."


    "But I know that if I''m with you, I can do what I want and probably prevent what I don''t want to happen!" Candy eximed.


    "And what is that?"


    "I want to be with you. As for what I want to prevent, I''ll tell youter. When will you meet the king?" Candy asked me.


    "Probably tonight. The queen hasn''t delivered her babies yet?"


    "No. They said it should be anytime soon."


    "Then I guess I''ll visit them tonight and see her condition. Since you have decided what you want to do, shall we go to the capital?"


    "Yes!"


    We took our time going to the capital walking hand in hand. She seems so happy to do it. She never shows me before that she has affection toward me so her confession caught me by surprise. But it feels good to have another girl liked me.


    But still¡­ I should have forced her to tell me what she wants to prevent how she will do it.


    It was a big mistake to not listen to her answer before answering her confession.


    But even if she did tell me, I guess I will still have the same answer.


    Dammit, me! Stop being so happy by every confession you get from beautiful girls!

 Chapter 111 - Im Here As Ninja! Not Clarence!

    "That''s just like Stockholm Syndrome."


    After I entered the capital together with Candy hand in hand, we found the inn that the others picked and went there.


    We meet everyone and I introduced Candy again to the others, but this time as my girlfriend.


    When we told Victoria and the others about how we ended up as lover, Victoria said something I don''t know. Just like usual.


    If it''s any other word, I might ignore it like usual, but since there''s a word syndrome, as a doctor, I''m curious about it.


    "What''s that? An illness?" I asked Wendy while tilting my head.


    "Yes. A mental one. It''s when a hostage and the captor, or maybe an abuse victim and the abuser, bonded with each other," Victoria exined.


    "That never happened. I''m neither her captor, nor her abuser."


    "But you killed her father figure. And that''s what you told her when you first met. So it''s just a rtionship that doesn''t make sense!"


    "¡­ It''s funny to think that your world filled with unknown words that doesn''t exist here. Where does the Stockholm came from?"


    "It''s a city where the first observed case happened. There was a bank robbery, and the robbers take several people as their hostages for a few days. Then after several days, they bonded together. After being released by the captors, the hostages would defend their captors."


    "I see. So if it happened in Melk, it can be called as Melk Syndrome," I said.


    "That''s not the point! Candy, are you sure about being in rtionship with him? He''s a coward. He''s not that good looking. Well, he''s rich, but you never learnt about that, right? So, why?"


    This time, Victoria targeted her confusion at Candy.


    "He''s strong. He makes me feel secure. Although it was a weird first meeting, he still ended up saving me. I also want to be a part of your big family. When we traveled together to Cassau, I was jealous of how everyone is getting along. I want to be a part of that since I never have family before. As for Tim, when we visited the royal pce and found out Tim''s¡­ hidden desire, my impression of him has plummeted to the ground."


    "Poor thing. Yes, we can be a big family! If Roy ever hurt you in anyway, tell big sister here and I will smack his butt!" said Victoria as she hugged Candy.


    Nice. They seem to be getting along just fine. Ka and Sophie also happily have a chat with Candy. Sonia also gave several rtionship advices. As for Ang¡­


    "Sigh¡­ I knew that he will end up getting more and more lovers. But as usual, it was another weird situation to confess."


    "Yeah. I thought it was weird too. But I still epted her anyway. I don''t have any lie detection skill, but I feel like her feeling of love is more sincere than the others. Ka''s and Victoria''s feeling is more like dependence than love at first, but little by little, their love for me is growing. I can feel it since we''re together most of the time. As for Victoria, I can never tell what''s in her mind. But we''re inseparable so it''s fine to make her my girlfriend I guess. At least I need to answer her again when she''s fully in control of the ck slime''s consciousness."


    I exined to Ang. The others are busy chatting with Candy so they can''t hear us talking.


    "And that makes four. How many more will you get before you satisfied?" Ang asked.


    "As many as possible. I don''t think I can refuse those who feels love or dependence toward me. But if I ever feel like the other is not sincere, I won''t ept their confession."


    While I was chatting with Ang, Candy and the others looked at me wanting to say something.


    "Roy. I will have a chat with the girls. You can do whatever you want until night. When you''re about to visit his majesty, tell me so I cane with you."


    "Okay. If anyone needs me, I''ll be in some restaurant or street stall. I''m hungry."


    I left the inn and look for some good ce to eat. Since I have a lot of money, I don''t need to care about how expensive the food is.


    "Are you serious about him?"


    "Yes. There''s also¡­"


    "Really! That''s¡­"


    "I want to¡­"


    "Good Idea! Count me in!"


    I got goosebumps out of a sudden. What are they nning?! Does it involve me? I can''t hear them anymore! Should I return?


    I ate at several restaurants. Now I can tell the others which restaurant is good. Ireturned back to the inn after filling my stomach.


    Soon, nightes and I returned to the inn.


    Ka, Sophie, Candy, Ang, Sonia, Victoria, and I gathered in one room.


    "I''m going to the royal pce now. Candy and Victoria will being as well. As for Sonia, I might call youter. Victoria, how much longer will youst?" I asked Victoria when her control over Blobby will be gone.


    "Probably until two hours after midnight. My time is getting longer and longer. Soon you will be able to increase your summoning element," Victoria answered.


    "Good. Then, we''ll be going."


    "Be safe."


    "Don''t do anything rash to the king."


    "Enjoy yourst freedom."


    Ka wish me safe, and Sophie told me to not be rash to the king. But Ang¡­


    Wait, what?! What is Ang talking about? Why my freedom?


    "Umm¡­ Ang? Can you tell me what you''re saying?"


    "Roy. We don''t have much time. As a pregnant woman, the queen need to have a good rest. We can''t visit her toote in the night," Victoria told me to leave right away.


    I feel scared about what Ang is saying to me. But it''s more important to see the queen''s condition. I can just ask Angter.


    Later that night, Candy and I sneaked into the King''s Chamber with me wearing Ninja outfit I made in my free time, and Victoria as my grappling hook.


    "You''re here, Ninja. Or should I say Roy? We already know your identity so why don''t you show me your face behind that mask."


    That''s the first thing Albert said as I entered without permission from him.


    Seems like Marie and Shirley has just finished cultivating, and Albert is working in his room. Ms. Wendy also here reporting something to Albert. And there''s also an old man wearing butler outfit. He must be Ian.


    "Just imagine the most handsome face in the world, and you will recognize me when you meet me."


    "Unfortunately, there are no one in this world who has mirror as their face," Albert replied shamelessly.


    "Both of you are shameless. Aren''t you here to check on my babies?" Marie interrupted us.


    "Yeah, Albert. Can''t you stop with the joke? I''m here for your wife, not to hear your joke."


    Did he really think he''s more handsome than me?


    Enough for the greetings and the jokes. I just went up to Marie who''sying on her bed, and looked at both babies.


    "Well, both babies are fine. In fact, they are much healthier than thest time I saw them. Even the boy seems lively. Seems like your cultivation also affected him in a good way."


    "Really? That''s good. What about the girl? Is her heart beating?" Albert asked about his daughter''s condition.


    "Her heart doesn''t beat yet, but she has grown. We can only know the result after both of them were born. It should be in two or three days. But that''s just an estimation. There''s no exact time for due date of a mother''s pregnancy. Each pregnancy is different after all."


    Everyone relieved when they heard that both babies are fine and healthy. But we can only find out the real answer after both babies are born.


    "That''s fine. We will ask for your help to deliver the babies. By the way, Candy. Have you found the answer?"


    Since the checkup is done, Albert asked Candy about her decision.


    "Yes. Roy has helped me find the answer and as a result, we''re going out."


    "Really? That''s good, but not the answer I want to hear," said Albert.


    "No. But it''s rted."


    "Hmm?" I was curious about why it''s rted.


    Candy then tells everyone in the room about her decision.


    "I find the man I love and want to be with him forever. But I also want the world, or at least the kingdom I tried hard to protect all this time to be safe. So I will help your majesty in a way that only I and several other people can do."


    "And what is that?" Albert asked curiously.


    "It''s to help you in asking Roy if you ever wanted his help."


    While I was in shock, Victoria left my hand.


    "His other girlfriends and I also agreed to ask Roy if there''s something you want his help for!" Victoria said.


    "NOOOOO!"


    "YEEEES!"


    While I was shouting in disagreement, Albert was shouting in happiness.


    "I don''t want it!"


    "I want it!"


    "I don''t want to do problematic stuffs!"


    "I want him to do something instead of just telling me about what will happen!"


    "Why is everyone agreed to that n when I said I want to leave everything in his hands?!"


    "Thanks to all his friends and girlfriends now I can take care of other troublesome stuffs!"


    "AAAAH!"


    "YEAAAAAH!"


    We keep saying things alternatively.


    While I shouted my regret and disagreement, Albert keep shouting his happiness.


    And why is everyone smiling? Even the butler whom I had never met isughing at me!


    I''m here as Ninja! Not rence!

 Chapter 112 - Getting Library Permit

    I cried thinking that my peaceful life disappears. If it''s just Candy who said that she wants to have me help Albert, I can have several reasons to refuse. But to think that everyone is involved in this and want me to help Albert in eradicating the cult. Now whatever excuse I made won''t work.


    "I''m d to have you in the team, Roy." Albert smiled joyously.


    "Why are you happy? You don''t even know me that well."


    "But I have heard what you did from Wendy. You used melee attack to fight against mages. That''s an amazing feat! No wonder you cane here and bypass all the guards safely. What elements do you have?"


    "¡­summoning and air element." I said with tears still falling from my eyes and dripping on my cheeks.


    Candy approached me and wipe my tears with a handkerchief like a good wife. A good wife with a crybaby husband.


    "Your summon is that woman over there, right? A slime?"


    "A ck Slime, your majesty. If possible, I''d like to speak you casually like you did with Roy since it''s not our first meeting." Victoria said.


    "Oh, so it was your voice back then. You started singing out of nowhere even Roy got surprised. And you have a ghost friend, right? The one you used for distancemunication?" Albert curious about Sonia.


    "Here!"


    I throw two nes at Ms. Wendy. She knows how to call Sonia so she tapped on one of the nes.


    "Nice to meet everyone here. I''m the friendly ghost, Sonia, here to help you with distantmunication. But only limited to those who carried specific essory." Sonia greeted everyone as soon as she appears.


    "Nice to meet you too. Are those essories¡­ for us?"


    "Yes. They''re gifts from the man who cried over there. I don''t know why he''s crying but I enjoy seeing him that way. He always bullied me."


    "Shut up, you ghost! Or I''ll exorcise you for real!" I tried to threaten Sonia but it doesn''t work.


    "You won''t do that. Now that I''m the only one to help you withmunication, you don''t have the guts to kill me. You need me." Sonia shamelessly replied.


    Is this what happened when I went out to eat? Everyone seems to be against my freedom. Is this the rise against Roy''s freedom?


    Can''t I just be a jerk and ignore them? Somehow I feel like I can''t. They are the people I gathered whom I trust and trust me. It might be because I long for human rtionship.


    Dammit! Where did I go wrong?!


    "Since Roy is not in the condition to talk, I''ll do the talking here. By the way, he brought you gifts for your babies."


    Victoria then grabbed the books I carried with me under my Ninja outfit. They are fairy tales for children.


    "Ah, I''ve read those a long time ago. Did they publish a new version of these books?"


    "That''s also the things we want to talk about. While waiting for Roy to stop crying, I''ll exin to everyone here." Victoria spoke in a serious tone.


    The atmosphere changed. So I need to stop crying now. Well, it''s not like Albert will ask me to help him all the time.


    "I want to talk about fairy tale. Especially this book." Victoria shows the book titled ''Hero Against Evil''.


    "Is there some sort of hidden message inside?" Shirley asked.


    "I don''t know, but this book is rted to Sonia and my past lives. We were humans in the past, but got killed by someone. We assumed the person who killed us is the Evil God."


    "What?! And how did this book is rted to you?" Albert asked.


    Victoria exined how the evil that was introduced were simr to Sonia and Victoria. Especially the first enemy Hero killed and thest one.


    Then Victoria exined about Aura and the possibilities that Roy is the only person with Aura in the world.


    "Albert, from what I know, there''s a possibility that your ancestor is also an Aura User who can detect lies. That''s why you inherit his ability even though you are not an Aura user." Sonia continued Victoria''s exnation.


    "Really? I guess that exin how I have this ability, and how Roy can see through objects."


    "Wait. We don''t know if what they said is the truth."


    "How about this?"


    I have stopped crying in the middle of Victoria''s exnation.


    Now, I''m focusing my Aura under the sole of my shoes and used it to walk on the wall.


    "I''m using Aura to stick my feet to the wall and ceiling. If I''m stronger, I''ll be able to step on air, but I can''t do that now. I can also swim faster in the sea by covering my body with Aura." I exined how useful Aura is.


    "Swimming in the sea? Isn''t that dangerous? Under the sea, there are too many monsters that hasn''t been identified yet. The one that was identified, we suspect that we only reached less than 20% of all species under the sea. Even for sea travels, we need dozens of powerful mages to protect the ship. And you''re swimming in that dangerous area?" Albert shocked to hear I''m swimming.


    "He even make business of it. He would dive underwater and look for sunken ships where he will loot all the valuables inside to sell. It''s a business only he can do without having to worry aboutpetition. Actually, I can do that as well, but I can''t swim as fast as he did since I can''t use Aura again after I be a ck Slime." Victoria proudly telling the king about my business.


    "Doesn''t that make him rich? But I guess even if he got all the money around the world, he can''t use it if the world is destroyed."


    "Yes. And that''s why I thought of having you take care of the cult while I''m living my lifevishly. But now¡­" remembering what happened today makes me want to cry again. Stop it, me!


    "Anyway, you think that the Evil God who killed both of you and the Evil God from the cult is the same? Are you sure?" Albert ignored my crying face and asked Victoria and Sonia.


    "We don''t know yet. We thought that we might find a clue if we look for the author of the book. The original story at least. Then we can find more clues about Evil God." Sonia said.


    "I''ll take that into ount. Now let''s talk about Melk."


    "Oh, yeah. Melk. Now that you mentioned it, I want to ask you to give me a medical license so I can be a doctor again. It''s faster this way than going to college." I shamelessly asked for a license from Albert.


    "I heard that you''re leaving quickly because you''re afraid that your identity was caught. And that''s why you thought it will be difficult to go to school, right? I''ll do what I can do."


    "Great, thanks!"


    "Now about Melk. Roy, you have caused trouble several times for the cult, right? I heard from Wendy that other than the time you fought together, you also foiled their ns. Not the one about the Stampede, but their other ns."


    "Yes. I killed the new recruits, and killed the mutated Orc Emperor." I answered honestly.


    "Then I guess the cult over there is in chaos. The governor is also a member of the cult, right? Then we need to focus our sight on Melk first. Wendy, I need you to return there and be a teacher again. Take one of the ne with you and wear it at all time." Albert gave an order to Wendy.


    "I understand."


    As Wendy about to leave, Albert stopped her.


    "Just go tomorrow. You can stay here and listen to our discussion for now. Roy, there are two cities that you mentioned will get Stampede at the same time as Melk that is suspicious. Both governors are nning to visit the capital at the same time. If both of them are member of the cult, we can assume that the time they visit here, is the day that the Stampede happened. Which is in three month time."


    "Three month? Can you gather soldier to protect those cities in time?" I asked Albert.


    "That''s why I need everyone''s help. Candy, I want you to help me gather all the secret agents to meet me. I will use lie detection skill to see if their loyalties is false. And I want Roy to protect me during my meeting with them. How long will you be here?"


    "Tsk! Busy again¡­ I don''t know how long it will be. Just not too long that will make the kids bored I guess. I also want to check the Tower Library if there are some older version of that story. Maybe I can find some clues."


    I''m worried that if we stay here for too long, Daniel will get bored. We have a home in Cassau but we only stayed there for a few days before we have to leave again.


    "Alright. I''ll give you permission to enter the highest floor. The librarian is someone I can trust, but he has no battle prowess. That''s why I didn''t ask him to be here."


    "That''s good. But what about the basement?" Albert surprised when he heard about the basement. Then he quickly regained himself.


    "I forgot that you can see-through objects. I''ll tell him about it as well. You have my permission. Enter through the window so he will know who you are and won''t record you entering the library."


    The librarian is responsible in recording every single person who entered the library. Even if they didn''t read any book, he will write everyone''s name.


    It''s a good thing that I have gained permission from the king himself.

 Chapter 113 - Victorias Making New Friends

    "I guess our meeting is over then? Can I go home and continue crying?"


    Since the business with the king is over, I want to go rest and cry. I''m still not finished crying to my own weakness. My lovers.


    Not that I won''t argue or fight with them, but if they want to ask something, I will do it. Why am I such an idiot? I need to learn how to refuse.


    "Why are you such a crybaby?" Albert asked me.


    "I just realized how lonely I was in my past live and now when I thought of having someone depending on me, I won''t be able to refuse them. Especially if they are my lovers. I thought we won''t get to meet each other again after your babies are born, but seems like we will continue cooperating for a long time. Can''t you just find the mastermind and kill them already?"


    "If it was that easy, I would have done that already. It''s hard enough to find someone I can trust, and it''s harder to find the mastermind. When Candy brought here the other secret agents, I want your help to eliminate the untrustworthy one." Albert looked at my eyes when he said that.


    He just asked me to kill several secret agents who were supposed to be loyal to the country without batting an eye. He''s really serious about eliminating threat, huh.


    "I''ll try. But how can we know if they are traitors or not? What if they are also evil even though they are not part of the cult? Even with your lie detection skill and my see-through vision, it will be difficult to judge if they can be trusted or not."


    "Yeah. But at least we can eliminate the obvious traitors first. That mean I have to ask those without explosives inside their mouth personal questions. I need to prepare some questions for them. Right now, we only have few people with us. Me, Marie, Shirley, Ian, Wendy, Candy, Roy, Sonia, and Victoria."


    "And my friends." I reminded him that I have friends that might want to help.


    "And Roy''s friends. For now, our goal is to gather allies we can trust, and stop the cult''s n of using monsters'' Stampede to destroy cities. But I guess it''s better if their n worked."


    Hearing that, I can''t hold back my feeling and just grabbed the king by the cor and lifted him up.


    "Are you thinking of killing innocent people? If you''re nning to do that, then I''m gonna kill you right now!"


    In anger, I threaten Albert. The others are toote to react, because once they realized the king''s life is at my mercy, Victoria who understand my thought managed to stop the one who makes their moves. Ms. Wendy and Ian.


    As for Candy, Marie, and Shirley, they are unprepared. When they see that Victoria stopped Ian and Ms. Wendy, they are confused but they didn''t do anything.


    "It was necessary! If their existence nevere to light, no one will join us in our fight against them! No one is willing to fight when they don''t know if we have enemy or not! And other countries will think that we are preparing ourselves to conquering theirnds!"


    I let go of my grip and let Albert fall to the floor.


    Albert then continued exining.


    "I didn''t say I will let innocent people die. I will send a group of trusted people to stop the monsters from destroying the cities when the timee. What I''m trying to do is to make their existence known, so I need those Stampedes to happen, but I have to make sure that everyone I send able to defeat all the monsters while protecting and evacuating the civilians. That''s why we need powerful and trusted allies."


    "Good. I was just testing you. I''m not nning to kill you at all, just threatening. Casualties are difficult to avoid. But if you actually nning to let innocent people die¡­ I''m not nning to do anything with you." I said.


    "So it''s fine either way?"


    "No. Like I said, I''m not nning to do anything with you. Which mean I don''t care about this country anymore and won''t help you ever again."


    "¡­good thing I have the right answer."


    The atmosphere turned back to normal again. No more threatening the king. Ms. Wendy and Ian also let go of their killing intent.


    But damn! They are really experienced in killing! Even the butler! My knees are shaking when they aimed their killing intent at me. Good thing Victoria moves first.


    "But that means we need more people, right? We need those who are powerful enough to kill the monsters, and we don''t know what kind of monsters will appear. They also need to be able to evacuate the citizen safely."


    Ian who has calmed his killing intent down, stand up properly again and gave his thought to the king''s n. Where''s they old man who want to kill me? Even Ms. Wendy is still looking at me with hostility.


    "That''s why in each city, we need to have at least two groups. One group is the one responsible in killing the monsters, and the other group is responsible in evacuating the people. We also need to make sure that the people won''t notice that we already know the stampede will happen beforehand. If they do, even if we save everyone, the people will target their hostility toward us." Albert said.


    "Well, you will think about it. I will go back to the inn now. I''ll check on Marie''s condition everyday but don''t expect me toe here since I can just see her condition from afar. If you need anything, contact me through Sonia."


    "I will. Can I ask for more of this essories? If everyone have this, we will be able to gain advantage against the cult." Albert asked if he can have a lot of essories to call Sonia.


    "I can give everyone here one of them, but I won''t give you more. Since Sonia is for my personal use only¡­ wait, thate out wrongly. Well, you understand."


    I just used her so I can contact my friends easily. Not for her to be used by strangers. She also has her own will so if the one who called her is an asshole, she can refuse the call.


    "I see. Then, I''ll contact you after we gathered some candidates."


    Before I take my leave, I was stopped by Victoria who seems to have an idea.


    "Wait! Roy! We know people who can help."


    "Who?"


    "For evacuation, the level of their magic are not important. But what''s important is for them to be disciplined and organized. We know a group like that."


    "Really? Can you tell me?"


    Victoria seems to know someone who can help and Albert is curious about it and asked her.


    While I¡­ still don''t remember who she''s talking about.


    "Roy, for evacuation, they just need to be physically fit. They need to go around the ce to look for a shelter, and convince the people to follow them. They just needed to be trained more in giving instructions."


    Trained more? Don''t tell me!


    "You mean them? They are just bribes for him so I can have more freedom there. But who would have thought that they will be useful in this time."


    "Who are you talking about?" Albert asked curiously. Everyone in the room also curious about this physically fit group we talked about.


    "They are the city guards of Mellian city."


    "City guards? Tell me more."


    "It''s just a bribe I gave them so I can freely do anything in that city."


    "A bribe?" Everyone keep getting more and more confused.


    "I''ll tell you about it! The story started from a one sided love of the city guard captain, Hill, and the ones whose everything is his type, Roy!"


    "Disimer: This story is based on the point of view of Victoria. Her version of the story might consist of lies and deception. For rification, I AM STRAIGHT! I love women!"


    I have to dere it and make sure everyone understand.


    Victoria tells her version of the story. But she didn''t lie about how I gave the guards a training set they needed to practice, while lying to them saying that those practice set will make a body that Hill dislike.


    "I see. It''s good to know that they are trained and motivated. Although their motivation is to make sure their bodies are not to be their captain''s liking, it''s still good. Maybe I need to tell the guards here to train like that as well."


    "Yeah, but don''t you think as someone who can tell a lie, you''re trusting too much in Victoria''s story about¡­ the other things?"


    I asked Albert whose keeping his distance from me. Ian also stood in the corner of the room now.


    "I''m just¡­ Victoria is a good storyteller that I got so into it."


    "Albert¡­ I need to tell you that there are, in fact, a lot of women who loves that kind of story. Marie, you''re pregnant but you can''t be too excited about Victoria''s story that you get a nosebleed."


    "Ah! Shirley, get me my handkerchief!"


    "Wait. I need to wipe my nose first."


    Albert and Ian who saw that has expression of horror.


    Victoria, is full of smile after telling the story.


    "The two will never end up together, but their feelings they have to each other are real!"


    Albert choose to calm his wife down.


    "Umm¡­ Marie, Most of her story makes my lie detection skill activated. It got activated so many times that it makes me about to vomit. You can''t believe everything she said! Marie? Shirley? Anyone?!"


    The girls'' faces are red when they heard Victoria''s story. Except for Sonia who is translucent.


    And so, tonight''s meetinge to an end, and I returned to the inn where the other stayed.


    Marie, instead of resting, after hearing that Victoria wrote stories in the past, she wanted to hear her stories together with the other girls. Ian took that chance to escape as well saying he have something to do.


    Which means Albert is the only man who has to hear Victoria''s stories untilte at night.


    After returning to the inn, I prepared a letter to send to Hill. I just said that some noble is interested in their training to make their body all muscr, so they might visit anytime soon.


    I didn''t tell him that the noble is actually a king in disguise. I''ll leave persuading Hill and the others to Albert.


    But Albert will only go after his children are born. So it might takes few weeks before he can go.

 Chapter 114 - Sonias Past

    "AAAAAARGH! Boring! We haven''t find any clues even though we have cleared the first five floor already!"


    It has been dour days already since Albert gave me permission to enter all floor in the Tower Library. The librarian is kind enough to let me have the key. Well, it was Albert who told him to give me the key.


    Five floor in four days? That''s a record. Each floors at least have at least five thousand books.


    Well, it''s not like we read everything here. We just skimmed through the book and see if any one of them has anything to do with the past. But we haven''t found any.


    From history books, to fictions, we have skimmed through all of them. And now I''m bored.


    It''ste at night and the Tower Library is closed already. But thanks to my night vision, I don''t need light to read any books. Ever since I was given the key, I spend every night reading. I would just rest and sleep for a few hour on Blobbybed.


    The others helped me in looking for any clues. But Ang got bored so easily. Sophie is helping by reading children''s stories. Ka is reading everything she fancies. But she would read them thoroughly. Victoria and Sonia are the ones who helped me the most. But Victoria has a time limit and Sonia is needed to contact the others. I asked her to spend more time with Daniel and the others.


    Both of them are curious because it''s rted to their death and all the other Aura users in the past. But I can''t let them look for the clues on their own. Victoria has time limit, and Sonia only connected to the dirt inside the essories we have. If I left a ne here, someone might have taken it, so I can''t have her help me on her own.


    That''s why I''m the only one who have to do the most work. If the others needed me, they can contact me through Sonia.


    But damn! This is so boring!


    There''s only Sonia and me in the dark library and I''m sitting on Blobbycouch trying to find something interesting.


    "Sonia, you''re not bored?" I asked Sonia in my boredom.


    "Nope. There are a lot of books here. It''s better than being locked in that building for years with nothing inside. Next pages, please."


    Since Sonia can''t touch anything, I''m also helping her to flip the page of the book she''s reading. Good thing that there are dozens of books with the same title. So I can put the books on the floor and opened all the books in different pages. I don''t have to turn every single page for Sonia.


    "Should we stop doing this? It''s not like our assumption is right. It might just be the story just coincidentally simr to your past."


    "You might be right. But as long as it hasn''t been proven otherwise, it could also be true. Come on, we still have five more floor and a basement before we finished everything."


    I shake my head hearing her dedication to the truth. She said that reading was not her hobby back when she was alive, but now it seems to be the opposite. It''s not like a ghost can do much, so a hobby is good for her I guess.


    I looked at the royal pce from time to time, and see through the King''s Chamber and Marie''s belly. There''s no sign of the babies to be delivered again today. I have given Albert a ne to call Sonia, so when the emergency timee, he will contact me through Sonia.


    "Sonia, let''s stop here and rest for a bit. While we''re resting, you can tell me about your past." Out of boredom, I asked Sonia to tell me about her past.


    "It''s nothing interesting. I want to be loved, I made a lot of men into my lovers, and then I died." Sonia answered emotionlessly.


    "But that''s not all, isn''t it? There''s more to your story. Like when you have a child and became a mother."


    "How did you know?!" Sonia''s expression changed as she stopped reading the book and looking at me.


    "When you heard about Daniel''s story on your first meeting with him, you became too sentimental. You had a child before?"


    "¡­I guess it''s fine to tell you. Yes, I''m a mother of two. A daughter and a son."


    Sonia told me about her past after she choose to live separately from Victoria.


    "It was by chance that I found a vige and wanted to rest and spend the night there. But strangely, the only residents there were men. There were no women in that vige. And I felt some kind of connection with that vige. More precisely, the one who took over that vige. A subus. Then I killed her and gained my special ability."


    Killing a subus is not an easy feat. Subus is among those monsters with high intellect and able tomunicate with humans. They could even disguise themselves as human. Who knows if some people I have met are actually monsters pretending to be human?


    "After gaining my new ability, I went back to seduce the man I had a crush with. Victoria has left who knows where at the time after I returned, and I used that chance to seduce him. I have a good time with him, but somehow, I ended up seducing a lot more men than I thought. I thought that maybe the subus ability affected me and made me seduce all men."


    Aura user''s ability can affect the mind of the user themselves? Maybe that only affected if they defeated intellectual monsters.


    "Then the 106th man is more special than all 173 of them."


    "Wait, what? You seduced 173 men and you''re doing fine?"


    No sexually transmitted disease or any health issues at all? Is it because of Aura? I hope it''s because of Aura. Please let it be because of Aura!


    "Several of my lovers are healers. If I felt slightly sick or something, they will heal me. The highest level of healers among my lovers is an Expert level after all."


    Viva healer! Long live healer! Ka, I wish you the very best!


    "Maybe because of this special ability of the subus or maybe it was from me, but I never had a child before then. But after I met him, I have a daughter. Then two yearster, I have a son with him again."


    Sonia looked happy remembering those times.


    "I tried to be a good mother to the two. Then I naively thinking that their father will be nice to them even if I undo my charm magic. I was wrong."


    This time, Sonia looked sad. I guess something bad happened to her after that.


    "He left me and my kids behind as he disappeared. My daughter was seven at the time and thought it will be great if she could find her father. So she took her brother to look for him. Not knowing that their father nning to kill me after alerting a nobleman in a city. They send thousands of soldiers to kill me saying I''m a demon.


    I was looking for my kids and the soldiers found them first. And that man¡­ he said that his own children is demon''s children. The soldiers killed my children in front of me. In anger, I used charm magic on all the men there and forced them to kill each other."


    ¡­so she has such a past. And I also can feel my Blobbycouch shaking slightly. Seems like Victoria still has some time.


    "Victoria, I know you''re there. Anything you want to say?" I looked down on the couch I''m sitting on.


    The couch transformed into a woman and I have no choice but to stand up in the progress.


    "Sonia, I''m sorry to hear that. I never thought that something that tragic happened to you. While you''re grieving over your children, I was just having fun flying all over the ce and enjoying my own life. I should have helped you."


    Victoria approached Sonia. It was so close and I can see that Victoria tried to hug her. But that''s impossible since Sonia is a ghost.


    "So that''s why you reacted that way when you heard Daniel''s mother died."


    "Yes. I just love children. I don''t want anything bad happen to all children around the world." Sonia said with a smile that can break anyone''s heart.


    "Leave it to me. I will make our house in Cassau filled with children. But please wait a few years since I''m still too young to be a father myself. Maybe in two or three years at least. Until then, you can y with Daniel and Hannah as much as you want." I proudly said I will make a lot of children.


    "Is that how you cheered someone up? By telling her that you will have a lot of children?" Victoria fumed when she heard what I said.


    We had a little argument and was stopped by Sonia''sughter.


    "Ahaha¡­ Thank you, both of you. Although it has been a long time since I died, it''s nice to be able to meet Roy and reunited with you, Victoria."


    We spend that night just chatted until Victoria''s time is really over.


    I''d like to have children, but I''m still too young. At least my physical body is.


    I''m still fifteen¡­ or maybe I''m already sixteen? I forgot when my birthday is.


    I know that some people already have children at my age. But that doesn''t mean I have to have children quickly. And I need to ask the girls if they want to have children as well.


    Let''s take it slow.

 Chapter 115 - Birth

    It was the day after Sonia told us her past.


    When we asked why she return to seduce other men after that, she just said that she was bored.


    I guess how she ended up being seduced is because she wanted to be loved. With her appearance, it''s no trouble for her to get a man fall for her. But they were only lusting for her body I guess. That''s why she wanted them to love her for who she is.


    Then that guye, showering her with loves, and killed her.


    Which means there''s a possibility that this Evil God is a swindler. That''s only if our assumption was right. We haven''t been able to find any clues at all in the Tower Library.


    Today, our schedule is like usual. Going back to the inn where everyone stayed, have breakfast with everyone, ying with Daniel for a bit before returning to the library.


    But just as I was about to leave the library, Sonia appears in front of me.


    "It''s today! Marie''s water is broke!"


    "Tell the others I can''t return. Then you will go back to Marie''s side and tell her what to do!"


    I asked Sonia to help Marie delivering her babies before I reached there. It might be just a few minute until I arrive, but it''s still helpful.


    "Me? Are you sure?" Sonia seems not confident in doing it.


    "Yes. You are a mother as well. You know what to do."


    "Alright. I''ll try my best!"


    Sonia disappear and I prepared myself to sneak into the pce.


    I looked at the pce and see that the room they are in is not the usual King''s Chamber. It was probably a guest room or something that was used for the deliveries.


    Marie was there breathing heavily. Albert, Shirley, and Ian also there. Candy is still summoning other secret agents and Ms. Wendy has left for Melk a few days ago.


    But there is another person there. A man who seems to be the court mage. Has Albert decided to trust him? Or maybe it was an emergency so he forgot about him and only think about Marie and her babies. I''ll check thatter.


    "Victoria, you there?"


    "Yes I am!"


    I didn''t sleep too long after Sonia told me her past. Now I''m curious about how long can Victoria stays?


    "How long can you be in control this time? I thought I didn''t sleep that long."


    "Now I don''t have to stay for the whole time. I can turn my control of Blobby on and off as many times as I want as long as I still have time. For now¡­ let''s say it''s about fourteen hours."


    "That''s a lot. You still defeating monsters?"


    I have changed my outfit into Ninja''s appearance and left the library. But I still have time for a small chat.


    "Yes. I spend at least 5 hours a day to defeat monsters. Then whenever I''m silent by your side, it was probably Blobby."


    "Good. It means soon my summoning level can rise and thanks to Pear-y Fruit I can make contract with another monster."


    As we were close to where the others are, I heard some arguments.


    "Your majesty! It''s not time to be stubborn! You can''t trust a ghost to deliver your child!"


    "It''s fine! She''s here because of his order! He wille soon! You must never call any other people here! Even youing here is a mistake!"


    Did he just say that a possible ally is a mistake? Maybe he''s too emotional to make judgments. He need to calm down fast.


    Good thing there''s a hidden passage to that room. I emerged from the wall and prepare myself to deliver the twin.


    "Good morning. Albert and you, the other guy, please don''t be noisy. We''re here to watch the miracle of life. Marie, you''re doing well. Keep it that way."


    "KEEP WHAT?! I''M TRYING!!"


    So far, it''s going well. After experienced delivering two babies, Sonia sure knows well what to do.


    "Who are you? How did youe here?"


    The court mage with the mustache preparing his magic to attack me. But Albert stopped him.


    "Stop it Miguel! He''s a doctor I trust and a friend! Ro- Ninja! Help my wife!"


    "That''s why I''m here."


    In panic, Albert almost called me by my real name. But he changed it midway remembering that there''s someone new here.


    The first one toe out is the boy. It took Marie thirty minutes to finally deliver him.


    "The boy is healthy. Victoria, put him on that bed! Sonia, instruct her on what to do!"


    "Okay!"


    Victoria and Sonia move to the other bed. Shirley followed them to look at her nephew. She''s happy that his nephew was born safely.


    Me too. I never thought that even after cultivating, there''s no issues with the boy. At least physically, he''s fine and healthy. We can only hope he will be fine growing up as well.


    "Oooh! My king! Congrattion! Now you we have the heir for the kingdom¡­ what''s wrong?"


    "Shut up, Miguel. Don''t forget that I told you that you were not supposed to be here. Everything that happened here, is a secret!"


    "Umm¡­ what''s wro-¡­?! It''s a twin?!"


    "YOU TWO ARE TOO LOUD!"


    Marie shouted at the two.


    If this Miguel has any kind of explosives inside his mouth, I would have cut his neck right away. But the fact that he doesn''t have it, make him a possible ally.


    "No one make a sound other than me, Marie, and Sonia and the newly born boy! This is the first ever in the world to happen and no one here want to see a mistake happening!"


    I shut everyone.


    Sonia is busy instructing Victoria and Shirley who wanted to help. The boy is fine so there''s nothing else they can do other than letting him cry.


    And soon, I can see that the girl is about toe out. She''s still not breathing and her heart is not beating. But no one here lost hope.


    And strange thing happen. The atmosphere turned cold. Even the warm water that was brought here turned cold and freeze.


    "What happen?"


    The one who knows nothing, can''t shut his mouth at all.


    "Fire mage! Warm the water!"


    I told anyone who has fire element to grab the basin and warm the water again.


    "Victoria! Wall! Separate us from the other baby! Ice magee here!"


    Victoria turned into a wall, but there''s still a door she opened so Shirley cane over. After Shirleye over, the door is closed. Now it''s just me, Marie, and Shirley. And after seeing that the boy is really fine and telling the king he''s okay, Sonia alsoe over.


    "What is happening?"


    "Probably the result of all your cultivation. Once the babye out, the magic inside her body alle out and makes everything freeze."


    "Should I call Albert and let him warm this room?"


    Sonia asking if it''s fine to change the temperature.


    "No. We don''t know what will happen here. This girl will be born having innate talent as Ice element mage as soon as she''s born. The temperature is probably something that she did instinctively as she is an ice mage and will make her calmer that way. If we forcefully change the temperature, it might be dangerous for her!"


    "But if we stay like this, even we will freeze to death!"


    "¡­ Victoria! Tell the guys in the other side to bring us warm nkets!"


    "Alright!"


    Even Marie''s temperature is dropping. If it goes on, she might die even if she''s an ice mage.


    I''m doing fine because I cover myself with Aura. Maybe I can help her if I use Aura to cover her body.


    It''s the first time I did this so I hope it works.


    I grabbed Marie''s hand that''s gripping hard on the nket and just like how I use my Aura to cover my weapon to make it sharper, I used it to cover Marie''s whole body.


    Her temperature isn''t dropping anymore, but because I need to cover her as well, it''s me this time whose body temperature is dropping.


    Just endure it, Roy!


    Another thirty minutes passed in this frozen hell. My body is shaking due to the cold. Even sixyer of clothes and nket didn''t help me. It''s just my will that I have to depend on now.


    "UUUUUUAAAAAAAAARGHH!!"


    Marie yelled out loud as the baby finallye out.


    I ignore everything including my own body and check on the baby.


    She''s still not breathing.


    "Roy?"


    I ignored Marie as I tried to push in air into the baby''s lung. I grabbed a straw I brought with me, put one side in my mouth and the other side in the baby''s mouth.


    I made sure that she can get some Oxygen as I blow into the straw to force the Oxygen inside her lung.


    Finally, after the fifth tries¡­


    "OWAAAA! OWAAAA!"


    I fall on my butt and feel relieved. But I didn''t forget to say the important thing to the mother as a doctor.


    "Finally¡­ congrattion! It''s a boy and a girl. Both of them are healthy."


    Marie let out a smile as she cried, but soon after she fainted because of exhaustion.


    "Marie!"


    "Don''t worry. She''s just tired. But I need to perform a check on her as well. Hopefully, she''s fine."


    Victoria transformed back into a human and let Albert enter as he carried his son.


    After checking on Marie telling him that she''s fine physically and just exhausted, everyoneughed with joy.


    ¡­I guess I''ll celebrate by eating a whole lot of food today. I won''t be going to the library anymore today. I''ll just return there tomorrow.

 Chapter 116 - Flamboyant Mustache Miguel

    I''ll check on Marie after she wakes up. For now, there''s another important matter.


    "Who are you?"


    I asked the court mage that was not invited here.


    "I''m Miguel. His majesty personal bodyguard. Who are you?" He answered and threw back a question.


    "Doesn''t matter. Are you loyal to Albert?"


    "Huh? Are you crazy? Why did you call his majesty so casually? Do you have a death wish?"


    "Answer my question! This is also Albert''s question. Just answer me!"


    If Albert''s lie detection activated, I will cut him down at once. Even if he''s not loyal to the king but loyal to the country itself, I will still kill him.


    "Of course I am! Who do you think you are?"


    Instead of replying, I turned my head and looked at Albert. He nodded his head. Which mean this Miguel is loyal to him. Then I should ask him another question.


    "Then do you swear to never reveal what happened in this room and what will you hear soon?"


    If he has any intention to reveal what happened today to anyone and lied in front of Albert''s face, I''ll kill him.


    "What do you mean by that?"


    "Just answer his question. Miguel, do you swear to never reveal today''s matter?"


    Confused at first, but Albert asked him the same question and told him to answer, Miguel promised to the king he will never reveal it.


    "I promise. With my life on the line, I will never reveal anything that happened today to anyone even to my own family."


    "Good. I trust you. Now, listen carefully to what I have to say."


    Albert told Miguel about the truth that there''s an evil organization nning to destroy the world. He also asked some question like if Miguel belong to any secret organization or not. Seems like Miguel can be trusted. Albert never said anything about his ability activated.


    It''s nice to find more ally. I hope there will be more of them and I will have nothing to do. That way, even if Candy and the others asked me to do a mission by Albert, I have reason to refuse them. I''ll just say that he has a lot of allies so he doesn''t need me anymore.


    After all, no matter how strong I became, I will never be able to defeat strength by numbers.


    Is that something a man who defeated dozens of mages in a cave should say? No, but it''s something a coward says.


    I have to learn the coward way better. Does Shameless Survival Arts count? It has been a while since I used it.


    As I finished checking on the babies'' and Marie''s physical condition, Albert also finished talking with the neer, Mustache Miguel.


    "Are you done talking with Mustache?"


    "His name is Miguel."


    "Mustache Miguel."


    "You¡­ sigh. Now I there''s a picture of mustache floating in my mind. I can''t erase them." Albert said.


    "So, who is Mustache?" I asked about Mustache''s identity.


    "Mustache is¡­ wait! His name is Mustaguel! No, Mus¡­ Miguel!"


    "It''s confirmed. His name is Mustaguel."


    "My name is Miguel, you bastard!" Mustache then protested that I called him wrong.


    "Miguel Yubas Tart?"


    "Just Miguel!"


    Let''s ignore the moving mustache and just ask Albert.


    "Mustache is my personal bodyguard. After you killed Tim and making a ruckus here, everyone thought that I needed a bodyguard at all time since you can enter here unnoticed. They decided to send him since he''s of simr age with me and he will soon reach Expert level I heard. We all have hope that he will be the strongest mage in the court." Albert told me about Miguel.


    Wait! Mustache? Bodyguard? Mustache? Expert level mage? Mustache?


    "You''re the mboyant Mustache Miguel!"


    "mboyant what?"


    I remember now! He''s the one who fought together with Albert the longest. How could I forget about that mustache?


    Back when I joined the war as a hunter in myst year of my life, I along with other hunter were under the leadership of the mboyant Mustache troop. Though in the end, we hunters choose to fight without following any orders.


    "He''s the one who fought together with you the longest. mboyant Mustache is the troop he led during the war. He was the strongest mage in this kingdom. People alwayspared him with the Elemental Master Ang. But Ang has more elements which makes people think that she''s the strongest mage." I exined that Mustache is someone who fought against the cult as well.


    "So he''s well-known in the future¡­ because of his mustache?" Albert asked.


    "Because of his mustache."


    "Why my mustache? Why not my power people know me for?" Mustache looked like he''s about to cry.


    "For one, the g of your troop you led is a picture of mustache. Now that I know Albert, I think it was him who told you to do that."


    Hearing what I said, Albert thinking about something for a while.


    "Great. Mustaguel, you are forbidden to shave that mustache of yours." Albert gave an order to Mustache


    "Why?!" Mustache asked.


    "So you have a trademark of your own."


    Good idea, Albert. Now it''s confirmed that he will be called Mustache or Mustaguel from now on.


    Thirty years is a long time. And my memory suck. I don''t remember much about other famous people who fought the cult. But if I encountered them like I did today with the mboyant Mustache, I might remember them. Although some of them are haven''t been born yet.


    While we were talking about Mustache''s mustache, Marie awoke.


    "Ugh¡­"


    "Don''t move. Justy still on the bed and rest."


    "How''s my babies?" the first thing she asked is her babies.


    "They both are alive and healthy. The girl has an ice element innate talent. She will be powerful in the future. Shirley is taking care of them together with Victoria and Sonia. For now I''ll check if you have any psychological issue. Answer my question. If you found Albert cheating on you, what will you do?"


    "Smash his balls!" Marie answered without hesitation.


    "Good. You''re fine."


    "Wait! What was that about? Why my balls?" Albert looked afraid when he heard that.


    "It''s fine as long as you don''t cheat. So it doesn''t matter to you, right?" Marie put an evil smile on her face. Scary¡­


    "Umm. Excuse me your majesty. You told me to keep things here as secret, right? Everyone knows that the queen is pregnant with only one baby. So what should we do now?" Mustache asked something I also curious about.


    I mean, the only reason I told them to keep it secret is so no one from the cult will know about the twins in case something happened. Now what to do?


    "We have discussed it. The girl will somewhere else in a safe ce together with Ian. Now that Mustaguel has be our ally, I can have Ian protect my daughter. As for my son, we will raise him as the future king of the kingdom." Albert looked at Ian.


    "I shall do my best." Ian bowed at Albert.


    "She will be raised like amoner, but she will be taught that we are her parent and she has a twin brother." Albert said.


    Well, however the family decide the daughter''s fate is not my problem. I have yed my part as the doctor. Now I only have to help him killing traitors while I''m still in the capital.


    "That''s why, Roy, please take care of my daughter."


    "I see¡­ wait, what?! How did it end up with me raising her?"


    What the hell is going on here?


    "We have discussed it with Sonia and your girlfriends and friends through her. They said that they will dly do it. From now on, Ian and my daughter will be a part of your family."


    "What?! Sonia!"


    Sonia appeared in front of me.


    "You said that you want to have the house filled with kids. She will be one of them. It might be a good idea as well since it''s the safest ce we know for now. Everyone has agreed as well. And Ang also said that once the baby grows up, she will teach her about ice magic. I just told everyone about the baby girl born with innate ice element magic and they are so happy to hear it."


    "What?!"


    Then Albert interrupted spoke.


    "So, please take care of our daughter. Now that has been decided, we will now proceed to give a name to the babies."


    "Albert! I haven''t agreed to it yet!" I tried to protest.


    "Roy. Even if you don''t agree, if any one among your friends who live with you choose to agree, they are free to do what they want to do. And other than you, everyone has agreed. Even if you don''t want to take care of her, the other will do it. It''s not your decision." It was Victoria who answered.


    So she also take part in this charade? And I''m the only one who don''t know? Should I just kick everyone out of my house?


    I slumped down and finally figured out what''s wrong in this timeline.


    It''s rtionship. As long as I made some kind of connection with anyone, trouble will always appear. If I choose to be alone, even if troublee, I can just run away. But now, if troublee, unless everyone choose to run away, I won''t be able to run away without them.


    Conclusion: Personal rtionship will cause trouble you can''t escape from.


    Solution: Break off any rtionship I have.


    I can''t do that! I''m a lonely man who can''t live alone!


    "Sigh¡­ I give up. So, what''s their name?" I surrender myself to fate.


    "The boy''s name will be n and the girl''s name will be Lana. Please take care of Lana for me."


    "...I''ll try."

 Chapter 117 - Love At First Sight

    After helping Marie delivering her babies, it was decided that the girl, Lana will be raised by the butler, Ian, and will live together with me in Cassau.


    Now I have a butler and a maid! Yay! Is not how I feel right now.


    Everyone has decided without my agreement that they will help raise the girl.


    Just because Albert wanted to hide the fact that his children is twin, so that no one from the cult will find out about it, he had his own baby girl to be taken into my house.


    It was me who told him to make sure that the cult doesn''t know about the twins. First it was because the doctor who checked on Marie''s condition before can only detect one heartbeat. It would be a shocking event if she suddenly gave birth to two babies.


    And we don''t know if the doctor is part of the cult or not. If his children somehow got marked by the cult, Albert can''t do anything about it. So at least he want one of them to survive in case something like that truly happened.


    Sound evil as a parent to let his own child taken care of by someone else, but as a king, that''s seems to be a sound n to secure his heir. In case something happened to his son, he will still has a daughter.


    But he told me to secretlye to the capital from time to time so the twin can recognize each other.


    The world will only know that the king only has one son. But only several of his trusted people will know that he also has a daughter with ice element innate ability.


    ¡­and I will be the one to take care of her. Well, not me. But she will live in my house so she''s also my responsibility.


    It was still noon when we reach the inn. And everyone is waiting for the new members of our family.


    "Is that Lana? So cute! Let big sister carry you."


    Ang seems excited to see the baby. She even ignored Ian who carried Lana and just took her from him.


    Everyone ignored Ian and just focus on Lana. Everyone except one person. Lina.


    Lina sized up the old man before her, and Ian also checking on her as well.


    "Butler?" Lina said as she pointed her index finger at Ian.


    "Hmm. Maid?" Ian nodded and asked Lina.


    Lina nodded. Then the two of them bowed to each other.


    Is that some sort of secret code only maids and butlers understand?


    "Hey, old man? What''s that?"


    "Just acknowledging each other. After working as a butler for decades, I can tell that she''s a maid and a capable one."


    "You can tell just by a nce?" I''m curious since Lina doesn''t wear her usual maid outfit. She''s wearing casual clothes today. As for Ian, he''s still wearing his butler''s outfit.


    "I can see if someone is a butler or a maid at once. It''s an ability I gained after being a butler for a¡­ long¡­ time¡­"


    "Hmm?"


    Ian suddenly speak slowly and looked somewhere else like he just saw someone he recognize here. Is it a noble who knows about him?


    I followed his nce and I only see Ruby who also interested in seeing Lana.


    Feeling that someone is looking at her, Ruby turn her head over here and the two of them locked their gaze.


    "Do you know each other?"


    "No. but we can get to know each other from now on." Ian said as he walked toward Ruby.


    Feeling someone is approaching them, the girls also stopped ying with Lana and look at the shocking event that''s about to happen.


    Ian knelt down and grabbed Ruby''s right hand as he introduced himself.


    "Excuse me. I am Ian. I know it''s unbelievable but it seems like I fall in love with you at first sight. We just met today, but I want to ask you if you would marry this old man?"


    ¡­


    ¡­


    ¡­


    ""WHAT?!""


    Everyone was shocked by Ian''s sudden proposal. Ruby just stood there in silent while everyone, even the other guests, was so surprised. Some of them who''s still eating, spit out their food.


    "What the hell?!"


    Of course the most surprised one here is Sam. As Ruby''s daughter, she would never have thought of seeing someone proposing to her mother in front of her own eyes.


    "Really?" Ruby also seems surprised, but she looked happy.


    "There is no word I can use to exin it other than love at first sight. I don''t have a ring at the moment, but will you marry me?" Ian proposed to Ruby again.


    "¡­sure! I''d love to have a gentleman by my side." Ruby epted Ian''s proposal.


    "What?!"


    "Wow!"


    "MOM!"


    Everyone shocked again to hear Ruby''s answer. And Sam tried to stop her mother from making a rash judgment.


    "What''s wrong, Sam? It''s not like I need your permission to marry anyone. You have grown up and an adult already. You don''t need to care about my love life."


    "But but but! This is too rash!"


    The mother and daughter pair is arguing. Although it looks like Ruby left her daughter in the past and let her be a gang leader, the two of them are still looking out for each other.


    "She''s your daughter? I''m sorry that I acted rashly. I forgot to ask you what''s your name and your daughter''s." Ian stand up straight and asked for Ruby''s name.


    "My name is Ruby. And my daughter''s name is Samantha. Don''t worry about it. Her father died a long time ago. And I feel the same with you. I also fell in love with you at first nce. Sam''s opinion doesn''t matter so let''s get married."


    "MOM!"


    "¡­alright, this is absurd." Ang said that to me as she''s still carrying Lana.


    "Really? I thought you have seen absurdness with Ka, Sophie, and Candy bing my girlfriends. That''s not enough to get you used to it?" I teased Ang.


    "They became your girlfriends! Not your wives! And this! This is a proposal at first sight! Haaah¡­ seems like I''m the only one here who knows nothing about love."


    "Well, lovees in different shape for anyone. You just haven''t found yours yet. Just take it slowly." I said to Ang.


    "¡­I guess you''re right. It''s not like I have to have a lover already."


    "For now, let''s celebrate Ian''s and Ruby''s engagement. And I''m hungry. What about you, Daniel?"


    Daniel and Hannah who looked at Lana joyfully, turn their heads to me.


    "Food!"


    "I''m hungry! Mom, let''s eat!"


    Hannah pulled her mother''s arm and take a seat in the dining hall.


    Me, Ang, Ka, Sophie, Daniel, Hannah, Penny, Ruby, and now Ian. We have nine people here but there''s no table big enough for us to eat. So I had Victoria to turn into a table fit for all of us after getting the owner''s permission.


    We had a feast. Everyone is wondering how Lana was born. Well, most of them are women so they are curious about it. Although thanks to Penny and Ruby who has experience in childbirth, they told everyone the hardship of a parenting.


    "How''s the situation look for the king?" Ka asked me after they have a chat about childbirth.


    I used magic to make an Air Barrier so that no sound will be heard by other people.


    "Both babies are healthy. But he will only shows the world that he only has one son. As for Lana, he thought it would be best if she''s safe. So he won''t tell anyone about her."


    "Isn''t that cruel to just abandon his own daughter?" Ang asked.


    Since we''re just having a meal, Ang didn''t carry Lana anymore. It''s Penny that carried her. Daniel and Hannah sit next to Penny and yed with the newborn baby who is fast asleep.


    "Wasn''t it you guys who agreed to it? And you''re ming on the king?"


    "I thought that it would be great if the king owe us. I was the first one to agree, but everyone followed my decision." It was Ka who answered.


    "Sigh¡­ what happened, happened. Ang, Lana has innate talent in ice element magic. She was born with it. So she will sleep with you and you will take care of her most of the time. Are you prepared?"


    "Me? I know I said I will help, but I¡­" Ang hesitates.


    "Of course the others will help as well. Albert sent Ian to us for that reason. But she has awakened ice magic and you''re the only one with it. So I want you to take care of her and prepare in case anything happened. I''ll tell you this. When I helped with thebor, Lana able to make the room freeze. Everyone in that room risk their lives just to see her born. That''s how powerful her magic is at least. If you can''t do it, it''s better for us to return her to Albert. Can you do it?"


    "¡­I can only say I''ll try my best. Of course I will ask everyone''s help to raise her." Ang answered.


    "Good. There will be a parade for the king''s newborn baby in a week. You all will return to Cassau after that."


    "Us? What about you?" Sophie asked.


    "Depend on when Candy will brought back the other agents. I said I will help Albert eliminate the untrustworthy ones. After that, I''ll return. Let''s hope Candy will return before the parade."


    Sonia is with Albert right now and didn''t join us in the feast. If there''s any news, she will tell me.


    But damn! I know that love at first sight exist. But I never thought I would witness a proposal at first sight. And the two newly engaged pair are pretty chill about it. Except for Sam who seems to be listless.


    Oh, well. She''ll recovered soon.

 Chapter 118 - The Letter Has Arrive

    Three dayster, I went to the library as usual. Other than the usual team that goes to the library, there is another person added. It was Ian.


    "I thought you''re going to stay with Ruby today." I asked him while reading some books in the 9th floor of the Tower Library.


    Thanks to Ian''s fast reading, our speed in finishing each floor is faster. Now we''re halfway through the 9th floor. By tomorrow, I guess we can enter the basement.


    The reason we save the basement forst is¡­ the librarian forget where the key is. I heard that he found it yesterday, but since we have gotten this far, we just finished all ten floor before entering the basement.


    "Hoho! The key to happiness in marriage is to keep our distance. Not to be close. I have a hobby and she has hers. We respected each other''s hobbies and won''t get involved too much in the other''s hobby unless we both love the same thing. I love reading so here I am. But I won''t stay the night here like you." Ian said as he closed the book he read. Seems like he finished that one as well.


    "That''s fine. You being here is helpful¡­ probably. At least we can finish the whole library in few days."


    "You''re still not sure?"


    "Nope. But if there''s any clue, I guess we could find them in Cassau since it was where the first ''Evil'', Sonia, was killed. For now we''ll stay until the parade then we will return to Cassau."


    "Will I have my own room?"


    "Heh! Once I went diving a few more times, I could even buy the surrounding house. Don''t worry about your room. And it looks like you will sleep with Ruby anyway, right?"


    "Yes, but about that¡­ When I told young king Albert about this, he said to have a wedding here before we go to Cassau. He said to have only you and your friends as the guests. He said he wanted to meet with your friends."


    "Tsk! He sure knows how to make me stay in the capital more and more! Make sure to have a feast of delicious food." I said to Ian.


    "Of course we will."


    I bet he already told the others as well. I must be thest person he told. No wonder Victoria, Sonia, and Ka here doesn''t react to it. In fact, they are smiling when they heard my response.


    "By the way, it''ste but I still want to ask you about the day of thebor. Where''s the other people in the pce?" I wondered where other people is. At least, the maids and servants should be there that day.


    "Albert told everyone to note to the pce for two days. Saying it was for the sake of the future heir. Of course we also bribed the doctor to note that day, but if someone asked him, we told him to say that the king has a son." Ian replied.


    "And what''s the status of the doctor now?"


    "¡­upon investigation, several people has asked him many times about the birth of the crown prince. Thanks to Miguel, we have eliminated some of them."


    "I see."


    Suddenly, Sonia disappear. Seems like she was being called by someone.


    I looked at the pce and see that Sonia is there talking with the king. Looks like we''re going there.


    "Looks like Albert is about to call me. What will you do, Ian?"


    "I''ll go there first."


    Ian transformed into a giant falcon and fly through the window. That was cool!


    Ian has two elements. One is a wind element and he already reached Advanced level in it, and the other is a rare element, Beastform.


    Beastform is a rare element that can''t be increased its level. As soon as someone awakened Beastform element, they are already considered as Advanced level.


    Mages with Beastform like Ian, can transform into just one single type of animal. Once they have decided what animal they will turn into, they can''t never change into other type of animal.


    And Ian choose to transform into a peregrine falcon. The fastest bird on earth. I mean sky since it''s their flying speed which makes them the fastest, but whatever.


    And Beastform mages also can change into a hybrid form of half human and half beast. But Ian choose to stay in his human form most of the time. I think it will be funny to see an old man with beak and wings flying at high speed.


    Anyway, Ian left first, but I choose to wait for Sonia to report to me first before I leave. So Victoria and I just prepared ourselves to go, while Ka choose to leave the library.


    Since the floor we''re in is only for nobility, it will be suspicious if by any chance some noble decided to enter the library and encounter her while she''s waiting for us. That''s why she left the library and returns to the inn.


    I waited for Sonia to return. I don''t know what kind of report Albert has for me, or maybe he needed Sonia to contact Ms. Wendy who seems to have returned to Melk already.


    Soon, Sonia appeared in front of me.


    "What did he want?"


    "Albert said that Candy will return soon. Albert will have a secret meeting with all of them around this time tomorrow. He needed help in what question is necessary to ask those agents."


    "Wait wait. Are you sure he asked Roy toe?"


    Victoria suddenly interrupted us.


    "Yes he did. By the time he finished talking, Ian was just arrived. Miguel was there as well."


    "What about Marie and Shirley?" Victoria asked Sonia.


    "Marie is taking care of n. And Shirley wasn''t there. Why?"


    "Well, you think it''s safe to have them made the questions for the interview? I mean Albert and Roy together, they will just end up making stupid jokes one after another. Ian and Miguel aren''t the kind to stop the king from having fun. Go get Marie or Shirley. We will also go there to¡­ stop them from going too far."


    "¡­make sense."


    The future of this kingdom¡­ no. This world is at stake just by looking for traitors. Did they think that we will joke about it?


    "Do you have too little faith in me when this kingdom is at risk?"


    "I have faith that both of you will end up making stupid questions. That''s why I will be there along with Sonia and Marie judge your questions."


    So strict!


    Well, they are free toe. Maybe the more people we have, the faster we will be done.


    ...¡­.


    At the same time, Roy''s letter to Hill finally arrived. It camete because there were monsters blocking the way. But the letter finally arrived safely.


    Hill''s assistant, Mauro, the one who loves to ''visit'' the prison and ended up bing Hill''s assistant because of¡­ their simrities, visit Hill with the letter in hand.


    Both Mauro and Hill also tried to do the same exercise that Roy gave them and their bodies have be bigger and more muscr. Although not as big as Hill''s subordinate, their muscle can be seen through the slim fit uniform of the guards.


    As for Hill''s subordinate¡­ they have long forgotten the reason of their training and be a group of muscle lover. Not as big of a lover as Hill''s in a certain sense, but just love to train in their spare time.


    "Boss! You''ve got a lettering from Roy! He remembers you!" Mauro says something that will gave Roy shivers.


    "Really? Let me see!" Hill took the letter from Mauro and read it carefully.


    "Is it love letter? Must be love letter! He must have said something like I miss you!"


    Roy who was about to go to the pce because of Albert''s summon, really got a shiver that never stop for a whole minute.


    Hill read the letter.


    [Hill. This is not a love letter. I repeat this is not a love letter. I write this because I made friend with a certain noble about how powerful the guards became after I gave them the exercise set. That noble is interested in seeing how powerful the guards of Mellian is and might soon visit you. His name is Albert. If you can satisfy him, you and your men might be able to be promoted and maybe even live in the capital. Just prepare yourself when hees and answer all of his questions honestly. By honestly I mean telling him we are just friend and no more than that. If you end up getting promoted and move to capital, there''s a chance that we might be able to meet often although I don''t live in the capital. Whatever the choice is up to you. And I remind you again that this is not a love letter. We are just friend.


    Your friend and will never be more than that, Roy.]


    "What does it says?" Mauro asked Hill.


    "This¡­ is a love letter!" Hill replied shamelessly.


    "Really?! Does it says he will visit you soon?"


    "No. But it says that I have a chance to meet him. Bring everyone to the hall. I have a good news for them." Hill told Mauro to get the others and tell them about the news from Roy.


    Of course he will lie and says something like Roy is not good enough for him, but they were friends. His men would believe him and thought about it before deciding to work themselves harder and build bigger muscle.


    As for Roy¡­ he finally meet Albert while his body is shivering nonstop.

 Chapter 119 - Relaxing Discussion

    "Wee, Roy¡­ what''s wrong? You''re shivering." Albert greeted me but he was worried when he saw me shivering.


    "I just¡­ feel like something scary is happening. It was terribly scary. Even more than the day I died."


    "Well, that doesn''t matter to me now. Soon Candy will return with other agents and I want to prepare to interview them one by one. I want you, Miguel, and Candy to be there with me." Albert said.


    "One moment. I need to stop this uncontroble shivers."


    What the heck is wrong with me? What is making me so scared? I even feel like going to war again is much better than this feeling.


    After one minute, the shivers finally disappear.


    I''ll figure out what happenedter. For now it''s the most important event for this kingdom. Interview with his people.


    "Albert, I suggest you also invite some people either from the military or nobility as well for the interview. Those who are traitors will be killed and those we are not traitors, we will select carefully from them and choose only those we can fully trust and tell them the truth. If there''s no one we can trust, let''s just give them job to test them."


    With this, thanks to Albert''s lie detection, we can quickly decide those we can trust, those who are traitors, and those who aren''t traitors but we can''t trust yet.


    "I agree. I have several people in mind to summon. One of them is Luiz. The governor of Melk. Well, it''s obvious that he''s a traitor. But I won''t call him because I need the Stampede to happen."


    "Even if you call him, by the time he arrived here I would be in Cassau. Since those agents Candy brought wille soon, I have no n to stay here any longer and being used by you. I''ll left after the parade and Ian''s wedding. I should have finished the whole books and documents in Library Tower by then." I said.


    "That''s fine. For now let''s discuss about the interview tomorrow."


    Other than me, there are Albert, Mustache, Ian, Victoria in human form, Sonia, and Marie who carried n along so we can''t be too loud or we will disturb the baby.


    Everyone is discussing in a rxing manner other than Mustache who looks serious, and Ian the butler who serve us tea and snacks.


    "We''ll interview them one by one. Although it will took time, it was easier to eliminate the traitor this way. Is everyone agree with this?" Albert asked for everyone''s agreement.


    "Aye! Mustache and Ian don''t need to be asked because they will do whatever you say. Let''s do that." I answered.


    Mustache looked at me in anger.


    "Hey! I told you my name is Miguel!"


    "It''s fine, right? To have a nickname is an honor for hunters. Everyone will know you soon. And you even arrange your mustache so each tips are pointed upward. How much do you care about that mustache of yours?"


    Last time I saw him, his mustache is normal and not a gravity defying like this. Why the change?


    "Oh. I told him to do that. When he got close to n, n would cry nonstop. But after arranging his mustache like that, n smiled. So I told him his mustache needed to be permanently that way." Mustache look dejected when he heard Albert said that.


    Then Albert continues. "Speaking about facial hair, Ian also started to grow his beard, right?"


    "It''s to make sure that no one will recognize me anymore. Ruby also said I look better with a beard." Ian answered happily.


    "Right. I can''t wait to see your wedding and meet thedy who caught your heart. Your friends wille as well, right?" Albert aimed that question at me which I replied by a nod.


    "Can''t you return back to the main topic already? It has just barely started and you already discussed something else."


    "Sorry, Marie." Albert apologized to Marie.


    "This is the reason Victoria and Sonia brought me here. They are correct to have mee."


    Well, she''s right. We easily strayed from the main topic when it''s just us men. Good thing that she''s here.


    "About the interview. Anyone has suggestion about the question? Of course name, birth date, and birth ce are normal. Let''s make the questions that can only be answered by yes or no, or questions with two choices only."


    I suggested it because Albert''s lie detection skill is not almighty, if we limit the answers into two, when Albert detect that the interviewee is lying, we can know his answer is.


    For those who have explosive devices inside their mouth, I can just kill them once they entered the room.


    "I agree. How about asking their allegiance?" Albert suggested.


    "Why? So you can just kill everyone whose allegiance is not toward you? Does that mean you want to kill me as well since my allegiance is toward my girlfriends? Rejected. At least make it subtle like work or family. Then ask them what kind of family they had or what kind of job they do. Of course since I''ll be there as well, I might ask some questions I made on the spot."


    "¡­then this discussion is useless, right?" Mustache asked.


    ""No."" Both I and Albert answered at the same time.


    "We can use a questions from this discussion as the benchmark of what we''re going to askter." Albert said.


    "I was about to say I was bored reading books all the time soing here is a good idea to relief my boredom. But I agree with Albert."


    "¡­I guess you must have a lot of joke questions in your mind."


    "It''s not a joke. I''m about to suggest if they have a preference between big boobs or big butts." I replied confidently.


    "That''s what I''m talking about!" Albert said as he pointed his index finger at me.


    "It''s not a joke! We know that the cult has at least two factions. One is the big boob faction with Celestine as their leader, and the other one is the big butt faction by Veronica."


    "But you decided to kill the traitor once they entered the room! Those questions are useless unless you want to interrogate the members of the cult!"


    "Oh, right. What about you? Which one do you prefer?" I asked Albert teasingly.


    "It''s obvious! I choose¡­ Marie no matter what!" Albert said after paused for a second.


    "Albert. You hesitated for a second there."


    I also see him ncing at Marie who''s ring at him before he answered. Marie is the boss here.


    "Well, that one was indeed a joke so let''s put it aside. Since they are from a cult, how about we ask them their religion is? Ask them which god they believe in. Of course we will only ask those with faith."


    There are several religion in this world. The biggest one is from the Supreme God Church. The one with the biggest numbers of believers. Of course there''s a church for them in the capital as well.


    There are also some religion that was made for jokes like Straight Banana or Flying Papaya. What the hell are the people who built those religion thinking?


    "Right. If we ask their faith, we might know if they are from the cult. But what if there are other religion who believe in world destruction that we don''t know of?"


    "They are as dangerous as Evil God Cult. There''s no need to ask them any further. If they have faith that we don''t know of, we can just ask them about it. Let''s also ask them about how much they know about Tim. They are his subordinates after all. Who knows if he has influenced some of them with his thinking?"


    "Then tell them that you''re the man who killed him? They might be hostile to you. And we''re also asking other people as well so let''s be careful of our questions." Albert said.


    "We can say that thanks to me, you found a hidden passage to Tim''s room and found some evidence of his n to betray the kingdom. Then we can ask them if they are involved with Tim''s n or not. We can ask those whose name are not on the list of people he''s nning to betray."


    We continued discussing until it started to get dark.


    It was finished quite nicely. We made a lot of good questions that can help us find if there are traitors or not among them.


    Although I don''t think that we will use most of the questions we prepared.


    I returned to the library to continue my search about the past, and Albert return to his works.


    Tomorrow will be a long day for us. I need to stay sharp to see if there are some people who can bypass Albert''s lie detection. Those people will be difficult to handle.


    That was why I didn''t spend the night at the library like usual, and return to the inn to rest.


    While I was racking my brain and think about tomorrow, the others were already thinking about Ruby''s marriage.


    A wedding that will be witnessed by the king himself is something rare, and they will participate as well after all.


    Meanwhile, Sam has already given up persuading her mother to wait until Ruby and Ian gotten to know each other better before they marry. She''s still sulking today.


    Well, she''ll be okay¡­ right?

 Chapter 120 - The Audition Begin

    The day hase for the interview. I have arrived at the venue which is the audience hall in the pce.


    As for other people who lives here like the maids and servants, they were given a vacation just like the day n and Lana were born. No wonder the pce seems empty that day.


    As for the maids and servants, Albert has asked some of them questions. Some of them are given vacation, and some others will be interviewed today.


    There were also nobles who were given priority for their interview. Albert summoned them under the pretext of asking them what future they would like for the kingdom. Which direction shall they take?


    The nobles are asked toe in the afternoon after lunch, so for the morning, it was scheduled for the secret agents and the maids and servants.


    "And it will take at least until midnight to interview everyone. Don''t you have a better job to do as the king?" I asked Albert who''s preparing himself in his seat.


    The arrangement for the interview is Albert sitting on his throne, and behind him diagonally is Mustache as his bodyguard.


    There is only one door as the only way to get to the audience hall. At the entrance is me whose job is to kill the traitors once they entered.


    To not get found out that our purpose is to eliminate traitors, we made sure that the hallway before entering the audience to be empty so we can take care of the corpses without being found out. It will be fine because the corpse will be taken to a secret room using hidden passage.


    As for those who are haven''t been found out if they are traitors or not, they will be taken to different ce from where they entered from. So no one will be suspicious if none of the interviewee returned to their waiting ce.


    As for the nobles who willeter, their arrangement will be different. They will be taken to a waiting for nobles. Of course they might encounter other nobles there, but that doesn''t matter.


    We''re looking for allies and enemies today. Doesn''t matter how prideful these nobles are, if we''re looking for allies, we need people who can get along with the others. So even if those nobles are not traitors but can''t get along with other nobles, we won''t count on them.


    "Roy. This is my job. Determining if these people will give hope to the kingdom or bring ruin instead is the duty of the king." Albert answered my question.


    "Whatever. Let''s start the audition already." I asked for the interview to get started already.


    "Audition? Now that you mention it, it does seems like some kind of audition. Call the first contestant!" Albert yed along with me. Behind him, Mustache just gave up and not saying anything at all.


    How we called the ''contestant'' is by having Sonia to tell Ian who''s waiting with the other contestants in the waiting room.


    She didn''t appear in front of him because she might startle the contestants, but she could make the ring on Ian''s finger to vibrate slightly. That''s the cue for Ian to call the next people. Of course they have been given numbers so they will enter ording to their numbers.


    As soon as the first person enters, I shouted, "The first contestant is here!"


    At the same time, I also gave a signal to Albert and tell him that the first person is a traitor.


    "Wee! What is your talent?!" Albert continued yed along with me.


    "Umm¡­ what?" the first man who entered was confused.


    "Having his head separated from his neck!"


    I said as I swung my spear and decapitate his head.


    I have seen inside his mouth that the first guy has an explosive device inside. Without hesitation, I just cut his neck and let the blood dirtied the floor.


    "Too fast! And you''re dirtying the floor! What should we do with this?" Albert asked.


    "There''s no floor that''s gotten dirty. Just Blobby transforming into a carpet. This way, it''s easier to clean the body and the blood. As for the smell of the blood¡­ let''s say that Mustache is menstruating right now."


    "Hey! What the hell, man?!" Mustache protested.


    "Let''s just say that he''s being disrespectful to me and the two of you who are extremely loyal to me, killed the first person." Albert suggested calmly.


    Well, that''s better than Mustache is menstruating. Let''s do that.


    The next contestant arrived. He doesn''t have any explosive device in his mouth so we proceed normally.


    "What''s your name and your job?" Albert asked normally.


    "My name is Jo. I''m an agent of the kingdom."


    Jo? I think I killed someone with that name before. I guess since it''s such amon name, I''ll encounter more Jo and Bob¡­ and Roy. I hope I won''t meet any Roy I have to kill.


    Sensing that Jo didn''t speak any lies, Roy continued.


    "What did you do beforeing here?"


    "I was tasked to scout young talent to be agents in the future. My magic is weak so I can''t have other important jobs like espionage."


    "Scouting is important too. Is there any other kingdom or maybe organizations that tried to make contact with you?"


    "¡­excuse me?" Jo was confused by Albert''s question. It was a question we prepared yesterday during our rxing meeting.


    "Just answer it. Your boss, Tim, involved in some strange organization. That''s why I want to see if there are other among the agents who enter that organization as well."


    Hearing what Albert said, Jo clenched his fist in anger.


    "I''m not part of any organization other than this kingdom''s agency. And I have no n to betray the kingdom I love! There were some who tried to contact me, but I refuse them all!"


    I looked at Albert and seeing he nodded slightly, I know that Jo didn''t speak lies. Well, if he speak any lies, I''ll kill him.


    "Good. Please continue to work for me¡­ for the kingdom from now on. Once you leave this hall, Candy will inform you about Tim and the organization he belong to. I look forward to work with you in the future."


    "Thank you! I will always put my loyalty to this kingdom!" After saying that, Jo left.


    "Nice! That''s one. Let''s hope that most of the contestant will pass." Albert started calling them as contestants as well. I''m a bad influence for the king.


    "That''s impossible. There are about a hundred other people in the waiting room. At least 15 of them have explosives device in their mouth. And who knows if the other 85% has as much loyalty as Jo has?"


    "You''re right. If we have at least 50% of them as our allies, that would be helpful. Oh, right. From now, I will also ask if they are under someone else''s order or not. There are some nobles who has¡­ terrible reputation." Albert said.


    Seems like it''smon for nobles to send spies. I think some of the servants should be spies sent by some nobles. That''s how the story goes in a novel I read in the past.


    "Honestly, that''s your problem. I''m here because of the cult. Not for the cold war between royalty and nobility." I said.


    "Fair enough. Let''s get the next contestant."


    For the rest of the contestants, most of them are neutral. Not loyal to the kingdom nor the king, but doesn''t involved in any organization. We just let them go home and return to their previous job. Even those who are the maid in the pce can return to being a maid. But their contact with Albert and Marie will lessened.


    Candy told those who passed the audition to never leak today''s event to anyone. Even with other contestants who passed. Those are Albert''s job.


    As for the traitors, there are in total 17 of them including the first person I killed.


    After the first traitor, we decided to interrogate the next person. But even after we torture them, they won''t speak anything about Evil God Cult. Some of them even slit their own throat.


    What is it that makes them so loyal to the cult? Money? Power? Or maybe because of those two. Celestine and Veronica.


    But I don''t think that''s the case. If they choose to enter the cult just because of their idols were there, there''s no way the war will continue for thirty years. I mean in thirty years, those things will get¡­ saggy.


    But still¡­ we got 40 allies. Which is good.


    Twenty eight are from the agency, and the other twelve are maids and servants. Of course we told them to not leak anything even to their family.


    Albert promised to protect their family and even bowed to his own servant to keep today''s matter as secret.


    Finally, the batch from the agents and servants are over. We''re having our lunch in the audience hall. Which is something unprecedented.


    I transformed Blobby into table and chairs as we eat in a room filled with the smell of blood.


    "Is it over?" I asked Albert.


    "Only for the agents and servants. Next is from nobility. Be extremely cautious. They are very tricky." Albert said.


    "How many of them?"


    "Only ten or so. But they will give me more headache than the previous batch."


    "Don''t worry. I''m a doctor."


    "¡­you''re not thinking of helping me?"


    "I''m helping you by killing the traitor. Just tell me if I should kill them or not."


    Our busy day is not over. In fact it might get harder. At least for Albert.

 Chapter 121 - The Prime Minister And His Son

    "Done eating? Let''s continue."


    "You say that, but the next contestant hasn''t arrived yet." I replied to Albert after seeing the waiting room with my Divine Vision.


    "It''s nice to have such eyes, isn''t it?" Albertplimented my eyes.


    "¡­that''s just another word for ''you have such beautiful eyes''. Did Victoria influence you much?"


    "Hell no! I just mean your ability!" Albert protested.


    "Umm¡­ your majesty? Is it officially called an Audition now?" Mustache who ate quickly so he can return to his position, asked Albert.


    "Yes. The winner will receive our trust. The loser will die. The undecided, we will see how they''re doingter. We can ask the winner to keep watch on the undecided." Albert said.


    "Let''s think of the name of the audition! Like ''Who Wants To Be Trusted'' or something." I suggested an idea to Albert.


    "That''s good. But mine is better. ''Albert''s Trust''. Since it''s basically to decide whom I can trust."


    Albert and I continue speaking nonsense about suggestion for the title of the audition.


    "Sigh¡­ I wish the queen can be here¡­" Mustache sighed knowing that he is powerless in stopping us. I can hear his murmur.


    "Hmm? Looks like the first contestant after lunch break has arrived. An old man with¡­ his son maybe?"


    I looked at the waiting room and see that Ian is greeting the neer.


    "That should be the Prime Minister. I told him to bring his son as well since he will soon seeding his father." Albert replied as he return to his throne.


    "Why two of them together? Not one by one?" I asked.


    "Because he''s the Prime Minister and the future Prime Minister. Other than Ian, those two are someone I wanted to recruit and be on my side no matter what. I''ll do the talking. It will be quick. Roy, can you¡­"


    Before he finished his request, I have done what he wanted me to do.


    "None of them have explosives inside their mouth. To trust them or not will be your choice."


    "Good. Bring him in."


    Albert tapped his ring and Sonia, without appearing in front of him, goes to Ian''s side.


    Ian''s back is facing the wall, but Sonia can appear within short distance of where the sand she casted her charm magic is, so Sonia appear behind the wall.


    She spoke in a low voice so that only Ian can hear it, then she disappear.


    Then Ian brought the father and son pair to the audience hall.


    "Your majesty King Albert. For what reason did you summon us?"


    The old man kneeled in front of the throne followed by another man who seems to be in his 40s.


    I don''t know either one of them. Maybe they both died before making a huge achievement to make them famous enough that I can hear their name. Thirty years is a long time after all.


    The old man would have died before I died in my past life. As for the one who seems to be his son, I think in thirty years, he will be as old as his father right now.


    What''s their name again?


    "Thank you foring in short notice, Lowe. I see that you also brought your son, Hector, with you as I told you. You two can speak casually just like when we were alone. These two other people here are my friends. You know Mus- Miguel, my bodyguard, right? And the other person is¡­ Ninja. The one who killed Tim."


    "What?!"


    The two father and son became wary when they hear my name. Well, my nickname. I told Albert to call me Ninja instead of my real name.


    "Albert! What''s going on here?!"


    Lowe asked for an exnation.


    "It''s something very important. The fate of this kingdom¡­ no. The fate of this world is at stake. Before I tell you anything, please read these documents I found in Tim''s room. It was Ninja who told me about this." Albert stand from his throne and gave several documents for the two to read.


    "Telling them to read those already? Aren''t your approach is way too direct?" I approached Albert and speak in low voice.


    "I told you that I want to trust these two. It''s either they became our allies or they died."


    "Man, you''re cruel to your own men. Well, I''ll leave the decision to you. By the way, why is your Prime Minister is so old? Why isn''t he retired yet?"


    "Well, his son said that he hasn''t learned everything yet. So he told his father to keep his position until He learned everything."


    "Dude''s old enough to have children my age and he still think that he''s not good enough? And you want to trust him as well?"


    "He''s a good man. My father also thought of having Hector as his Prime Minister before he died. Unfortunately, his wish nevere true."


    "Okay. Just tell me if I have to kill them."


    "I hope it won''te to that."


    Albert and I finished whispering as the two father and son pair also finished reading the document.


    "This¡­ is unbelievable. Not just Tim tried to use his own subordinates, he also looked for the weakness of this pce and nning to capture the capital. What is going on?" Hector is angry at the fact that someone close to the king is nning something malicious.


    Albert looked at me instead of answering. Looks like it''s my turn first for exnation.


    "It''s the reason why I killed Tim. He''s a member of a secret cult called Evil God Cult. I told Albert about what that cult is nning and now we''re here to see if anyone here is a traitor or not. The rest will be exined by Albert himself."


    There''s no point in exining if the one I speak to doesn''t trust me. I''ll just let Albert take care of this.


    Our n should be to let the promising candidate to be our allies to enter the room where Candy is and Candy will tell the rest. That''s when we auditioned the agents and servants.


    But for nobles and people in high position, it will be Albert''s duty. Candy''s duty is to be by Ian''s side in case something happening in the waiting room of the nobles.


    Putting several nobles who don''t get along in the same room will obviously end up with having a quarrel. That''s why Candy is on standby until something is happening.


    The questions we ask are quite subtle and will not make the contestant suspicious about it. They would just think that their loyalties to the throne is being tested.


    Albert has finished with his exnation and the father and son duo has a shocked expression showing on their face.


    "¡­are you for real?"


    Albert didn''t tell them about meing from the future. He just told them about what we knew about the ns that cult is preparing. Which is the stampede that will happen in Melk and some other cities.


    "Albert. Just ask them the real questions." I reminded Albert about our real mission here.


    "Right. The two of you, does any one of you is or used to be involved with the cult or any other evil organization?"


    Albert asked the two which was answered by Hector, the son.


    "No way! We swore our loyalty to this kingdom! Right¡­ father? What''s wrong?" Hector asked his father curiously.


    "Sigh¡­ so this is a test of loyalty, huh? If you can trust us, you will ask us to be your allies. But if you can''t, you will kill us. There''s no in between." Lowe bravely looked at Albert straight in the eye.


    "Sharp as usual. Please answer." Albert locked his eyes at Lowe while Mustache behind him is preparing to intervene in case something happen.


    "Yes. I was a member of a certain organization who dere a fight against the world fifty years ago." Lowe said.


    "Father!"


    Fifty years ago? There was such things?


    Then Lowe continued.


    "Your grandfather, the king at the time, gave me a job to join that organization and ruin them from within. Which is why no one has ever heard of it and it was never written in any record of history. My job back then was to be a secret agent. Just like Tim. In fact, Tim became the leader of the agents is partly my fault. Back then, I found an orphan whose parent I killed because they are members of that organization. That orphan was Tim. Then my partner, who became the leader of the secret agents during your father''s era, adopted him. It was my partner who choose Tim as his sessor." Lowe exined.


    "Thanks for telling me. Please answer myst question. Can I trust you?"


    Whoa! Albert asked him directly! But the fact that he asked them that questions mean that both of them hasn''t tell any lies. I guess it''s fine.


    "My life is only for the sake of the kingdom. I will help you destroy the cult." Lowe kneeled in front of Albert and swore.


    "I will do my best to meet your expectations!" Hector followed along.


    "Haa¡­ thanks, you two. It''s good to have you two with me." Albert relieve a sigh after knowing that the two of them can be trusted.


    He said that it won''t take long, but I think these two will be the longest one we have.


    "Albert. Since you summoned us here is to eliminate the traitors, we both like to help you. Please let us stay." Lowe asked to have the permission to stay.


    "Sure. I''ll tell you this. The reason we''re doing this is because I can tell if someone is telling lies or not. If I don''t have this ability, this interview would be useless." Albert said.


    "I see! No wonder your decisions in some meeting we had are weird sometimes. It was because you can''t trust most nobles, right?" Hector realized something.


    "You''re right. They are just greedy bastard who doesn''t care about the kingdom at all. They just want to fill their pockets. We still have several other people to interview, so will you help us?"


    "We will. But I suggest to have a meeting with everyone you trust after the meeting is over. I have something to ask of youter."


    Lowe suggested to have another meeting after the audition is over.


    It means that I will have to stay here longer.


    Since we have two more people, can I just sit this one out? I''m bored.

 Chapter 122 - The Last Contestant

    To choose to trust the Prime Minister and his son is solely Albert''s decision. In fact, trusting everyone who has passed is Albert''s decision. If I want anything, I can just ask Albert and ignore everyone else.


    Whether we picked the right person or not, I''ll leave it to Albert. I''m just here to kill those with explosive devices in their mouth.


    The fact that some of them has those explosive devices inside their mouth, means that no one has figure out that someone is able to recognize their identities. Which is good for me.


    But sooner orter, they might figure it out and I won''t be able to recognize if they are part of the cult or not.


    At least that day is not today.


    I can see that the next person is someone from nobility who has explosive device inside his mouth.


    "Albert. The next one is their member."


    "I see¡­ don''t kill him right away. We will let him go." Albert said.


    "Are you sure? Having a traitor in nobility sure will give you much trouble. I think it''s best if I just kill him." I suggested to just kill any member of the cult.


    "No. If he''s in high rank, then we can just ask someone among the agents today to investigate him at all time. Someone with high position is surely will be contacted by the higher ups of the cult. And we can''t just have Ninja act for personal vendetta all the time." Albert exined.


    "Well, I don''t mind doing that. But know that I will go home soon so I won''t be here for long."


    "We have Lowe and Hector here so you can go rest. You can see the waiting room from the Library Tower, right? Then just contact Sonia to tell me if the next contestant have explosives inside their mouth or not. The rest of the contestants are people in high position so I don''t n to kill them."


    "Well¡­ the next contestant hasn''t arrive yet. I guess I''ll take that offer. I''ll return when thest contestant arrive. Bye!"


    I walked to the door as I heard Hector asked Albert something.


    "Contestant?"


    "Hmm? Well, while we''re doing all this interview, it would be nice if we have fun doing it. So we just imagine that this is an audition with our trust as the prize. Then the loser die. And some other are just candidates that might be forgotten." Albert exined to Hector and Lowe who listened carefully.


    "¡­you sure are having fun, my king. I never thought that you have personality like this before." Lowe said.


    "Well, having to talk with Ninja often, somehow his personality affected me. Let''s hope not in the bad way."


    I hope so as well. After having my girlfriends scheming to make me take care of Albert''s daughter, I doubt anyone who got influenced by me is going the good way.


    I left the Audience Hall and enter one of the hidden passage to the city. Then I quickly jumped on top of a building and enter the Library Tower through the window I unlocked yesterday.


    The sooner I finish reading, the more I can rest. I have worked too much these past few months. After Ruby''s wedding, I hope there won''t be any more works.


    I know that Albert will take care of the cult better than I do. I just hope that he won''t need me to do any more jobs.


    I need to improve my use of Aura and also my magic level. That''s why after few days of rest, I''ll go train and cultivate more often. It''s been so long since I actually trained.


    I entered the tenth floor with training in mind, and continued reading books I haven''t finished. Victoria who has been with me all the time alsoe out and read some books.


    Somehow, the tenth floor is filled with children''s book. Some old fairy tales.


    "We should be able to find some clues here." I said to Victoria.


    "Why aren''t we searching the tenth floor right away?" Victoria asked.


    "We also found some fairy tales in the lower floor, right? I just thought that maybe some of them are rted with your past. Who would have thought that we found nothing at all? And even in history books, there''s nothing about hero written there."


    We have searched the whole Library other than the basement and the tenth floor, and the oldest history written is from a thousand year ago, but after Sonia and Victoria died. There''s nothing about hero or evil.


    Either because they don''t know about it, or they erased those history on purpose. I mean with how many Aura user in the past, I bet most people in the past knows about Aura. So it''s impossible for people of that time to not know about their existence, other than some people in some isted viges.


    That''s why there''s a high possibility that the real history was erased and now we''re searching any clues we could find.


    Now that I think about it, since the history was erased, how do people of the past tell the story to future generation? By telling everyone that it''s fictions. That''s why they wrote fairy tales.


    "The fact that in the highest floor there are many children''s stories, we can conclude that someone who put all these books here thought they are important." I said to Victoria.


    "And the fact that they are collecting dust, means whoever has the permission to enter this floor, think that these books are worthless to read."


    Like Victoria said. Only some people has permission to enter this floor, but when we entered this floor, even the doorknob is dusty. Seems like the librarian himself found this ce to be a pain to take care of.


    I was hoping that we can find a clue about anything rted to the mage who killed all Aura users, but after reading a lot of book, I''m thinking of giving up.


    "Aah! I wanna give up! There''s nothing about Aura users or simr power in any of these books!"


    "It was you who said we might find a clue here." Victoria said.


    "Yeah, but we found nothing! And while we''re here, it''s almost time for thest contestant to visit Albert. Let''s return to the Audience Hall."


    I stopped reading any more book and Victoria also stopped as well and prepared to return to Albert.


    During the time we''re in the Library Tower, I have seen just one other person who has explosive device in his mouth. I have asked Sonia to tell Albert about it. It was the third person after the Prime Minister. After that, there are no more people with explosives in their mouth.


    Now we have to wait before thest contestant arrive, and I have told Albert I will return before then. That''s why we stopped reading anymore and quickly go to Audience Hall.


    As we entered the hall, we saw Albert and the others with serious expressions.


    "How''s it? You find a good contestant?" I teased Albert because I know the answer from seeing their expression.


    "Does it look that way? The answer is no. Rather than having those nobles who are not part of the cult, I would rather have a private chat with the member of the cult one on one. The nobles of this kingdom are all cunning. One is a bootlicker, the other is warmonger, and someone even dare to suggest very. None of them are thinking about the kingdom! Only thinking about themselves! I''m disappointed to know that these people are under me."


    Albert sure does have a lot ofins after sitting on that throne the whole day.


    "Well, isn''t that something you have to take care of?"


    "It''s been a while since I became the king. I thought I have seen how cunning the people from aristocracy is. Who would have thought that these people are more cunning when they are given permission to speak to me in private? The bootlickers is fine. They just want to be on my good side. But they are not good enough to be trusted. Those who want ves and war are terrible. It has been since my grandfather''s rule that this kingdom forbid very. And for war, we have not involved in any war since my father''s rule. We are too weak to fight against those soldiers of other kingdom who has never stopped fighting for so many years. What do these people think about the citizen?" Albert said.


    "They think about everything but the people. You have a lot of work to do here, Albert. Good luck!"


    "Sigh¡­ I hope thest person is better than the previous ones."


    I looked at the waiting room and see that there are three people inside talking with Ian. Did Albert asked the three of them toe? I don''t think so.


    Only one of them seems to be a noble. The other two seems to be his bodyguard. But those two are the most important one.


    Sonia then appear in front of Albert and tell us about what''s happening inside the waiting room.


    "Thest one said that he will only enter the Audience Hall if he can bring his bodyguards with him. What should I tell Ian?" Sonia asked.


    "Tell them that only he can enter."


    "Wait, Albert! Let them all enter! The noble doesn''t have explosive device, but the two bodyguards with him have it! He might have a clue about the cult!" I told everyone what I can see.


    "Are you sure? Then should we kill the bodyguards and interrogate him? I don''t think we can do that."


    Albert is right. In case the cult is holding someone important to him as hostage, if they know that he left the hall alone, something tragic will happen to them. I guess it''s time to use my secret weapon.


    "I''ll take care of the bodyguard. I can use air magic to create a type of gas that will make people fall into hallucination. But I can use it for one minutes at most since my level is low and those bodyguards'' magic levels are higher than me. Use that one minute chance to interrogate that man." I told Albert my n.


    "One minute? I guess that''s fine. I''ll give you a signal to when you used it. Air magic is surprisingly useful, huh?"


    Yes. But it was thanks to Victoria. Since Victoria came from a world more advanced than ours, and also the people over there has a lot of imagination, she taught me about this in one of our lesson back when it was just me, Ka, and Ang.


    I tried to use it, but failed too many times since no matter how much she told me, Icked the imagination to do it. But after hearing about many kind of stories from her world, I finally managed to do it.


    With Ka''s permission, I used it on her and she ended up hallucinating for ten minutes. I guess it was because she''s still a beginner level mage.


    Now that I have to use it against two person whom obviously higher leveled than me, one minute is more than enough to tire me outpletely.


    Well, if anything happened, I can have Victoria to protect me.

 Chapter 123 - Berthold

    "Roy, can you do it?"


    As we nned our next steps, Albert asked me if I can stall the two bodyguards for a while.


    "Just one minute at most. Don''t expect it to be more than that. You just need to prepare your questions that can be answered within one minute." I said to Albert.


    One minute can be short, and can be long depend on what you''re doing. But it won''t be enough to have someone exins everything. I wonder what Albert going to ask him?


    Albert then discussed something with the Prime Minister and his son about the questions to ask. I told Sonia to call Ian pretending to make them think that Ian is informing the king about them to the king to stall for time.


    While the guy who seems to be thest noble we''re going to ask, looked terrified about something. Must be rted to the two people he brought. What are they nning to Albert?


    "Roy! Hey, Roy!"


    Victoria is calling me. She''s now part of my outfits like usual since Albert said to not kill any nobles.


    "What is it?"


    "That day that you practiced gas that can make people hallucinating, what did you make Ka see?" Victoria asked.


    "I don''t know. Maybe something fun or happy? She was smiling and refused to answer me after the effect is gone. Then she said to never use it on her ever again."


    If she''s happy, why did she refuse to have me used it on her again? I''m still wondering about it. And if I tried to use it on my own, my concentration will broke and the magic is cancelled. So I will never know the answer unless Ka is willing to tell me. Which I won''t force her to.


    "I think she might be high." Victoria said.


    "No she isn''t. We''re on the same level ground at the time."


    "Not that high. A different type of high."


    High but not high? What is she¡­ ooooh, right. I''m a doctor myself so how can I forgot about it?


    There was even a story in my past life that says someone break into a hospital and only steal drugs so that they can get high.


    I never get high before and I hope I won''t in the future.


    Then Victoria continued.


    "I think it''s better if you said some suggestion so when they started hallucinating, what you said will happen in their mind."


    "Like hypnotism? There are mages who has mental type magic that can hypnotize others. Can I do that too?"


    "Well, you already able to make people hallucinating so I guess you can. Let''s say something that won''t make them suspicious once their consciousness return."


    Victoria might be right. So if I said dancing monkey, they will start hallucinating and see a dancing monkey. What should I tell them now so they won''t be suspicious once the hallucination break?


    I think I know what.


    "Alright. I have prepared some questions. Are you ready?" Albert said.


    "Just give me the signal. Can''t we just use it right away?" I asked why I can''t just use it once they entered the hall.


    "We need to see first if those two are here to harm us. If they''re trying to harm us right away, just kill those two and we can ask Berthold everything as much as we can. If he''s part of them, we will kill them all."


    So his name is Berthold.


    Let''s hope those two bodyguards of his will attack us so we can kill them right away.


    Albert called Sonia and told her that the three are permitted to enter.


    "Tell Ian that I gave them all permission to enter. Also tell him to be careful toward the bodyguards."


    "Alright. After this, I''ll return to the inn. Just call me if you need anything."


    Since Sonia has no other works to do, she told us that she''ll return to the inn. I want to do that too but I''m busy. Just a few days more until all the books in the Library Tower are done. Good luck, me!


    Then, the three people entered at the same time. I waited until all three of them entered and close the door. If they are nning something, they would need to wait until the door are closed.


    But they didn''t do anything. Which mean they are not nning to attack Albert. Maybe they are just here to observe him and the people guarding him.


    The man called Berthold seems¡­ cowardly. He kept sweating since he entered the waiting room. Be careful of hydration, dude.


    And the two bodyguards are wearing a robe and their faces are hidden under the hoods of their robes.


    "Berthold. Is something the matter?" Albert asked first before Berthold give him a greeting.


    "No, sire. Nothing happened."


    "Then why do you want to have your bodyguards here?"


    As soon as Albert said that, the two bodyguards are preparing to cast their magic. Since their body is hidden under their robes, no one other than me can see it. But I gave a signal to Mustache that these two are preparing something.


    "No! Nothing happened! I just¡­ I just scared of Ninja! That''s right! Ninja!"


    He made some kind of excuses. And he''s afraid of me? I think he''s more afraid of his own bodyguards than afraid of me.


    "Do you have anything happened between the two of you that resulted in Ninja wanted you died?"


    "¡­maybe it''s something that involved him indirectly?"


    Yeah, maybe. Maybe I want to kill you now.


    "Ninja, do you want him dead?"


    Albert pointed his question at me. And the three of contestants turned their head to me. Berthold is even shrieking as if he''s dying.


    "No. I don''t even know him."


    "Berthold. This is Ninja, my childhood friend since the time I sneaked out of the pce when I was a kid. The reason he''s able to sneak into the pce and killed Tim is because of my involvement. I let him in and let him kill Tim. The reason he killed Tim is because Tim¡­ killed an innocent live. Ninja''s friend. I allowed him to kill Tim is because I found out that¡­ he has a malicious intent to my wife, the queen."


    Good! Albert is good in making bullshit! But I guess the part where he allowed me to kill Tim is because Tim has feeling toward Marie is right.


    Then I see that Albert is raising his right thumb up. It''s time to move.


    "Time Stop!"


    I said that as a suggestion while putting my hands forward to the two bodyguards from behind them as soon as they returned to face Albert again and activate my magic. Now it should seem that for these two that time is stopped. They should be thinking that everyone can''t move while in fact, we''re still talking. I hope it works!


    "Berthold. Our time is just one minute. Answer me, are you part of the cult just like these two?" Albert''s interrogation started.


    "Your majesty?" Berthold is confused, but Albert gave him no time to be confused.


    "Just answer! Quick!"


    "No! I''m not a member of that cult! They came to me three days ago as my wife''s friend, and took my son hostage! If I escape and refuse to do what they want me to do, they''ll kill my son! The one who''s a member of that filthy cult is my wife and I never know about it until then!"


    "Have you ever did a crime in which you might be arrested for and do you have something for us to use as evidence? I''ll put a pretense that you are arrested because of it so we can legally attack your ce and rescue your son at the same time. Then we can have more time to talk."


    "That''s¡­ My father used to do ve trading in ournd. I have some evidences in my home here. It''s in the¡­"


    "Good. Our time is up. Pretend we never have this talk and speak as if we have just started our chat today."


    Then Albert looked at me and nodded. I guess it''s time to stop my magic. It''s tiring and if we continue a few more second, I will faint. This magic is too much for the weak me to use against stronger mage. I should really stop doing anything else and just return to training.


    I hope when we return to Cassau, those magic stones will be turned into Air element magic stones. I really need it.


    As I cancelled my magic, the two bodyguards looked like they are just woken up from a sleep. They should be thinking that time is stopped for them and they don''t know about the conversation between Albert and Berthold. I hope that''s the case.


    "Don''t worry, Berthold. Ninja won''t kill you as long as told him not to. I just put him here so he can be my bodyguard for a while together with Miguel. He will return home to his vige after the parade. I just asked you toe since you''re not looking well these past few days. You can go home now and rest."


    "Thank you, your majesty." Berthold and his bodyguards left the pce soon after.


    Berthold doesn''t seem to be as afraid as he was when he entered the hall.


    "Finally the audition is over! Good luck in arresting him. I won''t help you this time." I said.


    "That''s fine. It''s also a good time to test the audition winners. Thinking that today is an audition instead of interrogation makes today much more interesting than usual."


    "It''s all in the mind. As long as you have fun, even doing something you don''t like will be enjoyable."


    "I guess that''s true."


    I said farewell to Albert and return to the library to finish the floor.


    However Albert tries to arrest Berthold is not important to me. He''ll speak to me if he found something interesting.

 Chapter 124 - Can I Cry?

    "Roy! I found something!"


    After finished the whole audition I returned to the Library Tower with Victoria and called Sonia as well. As for Ian, he helped Albert preparing the arrest for Berthold.


    They say that they are going tomence their n tomorrow. I''m not involved in their n and not nning to as well. They can take care of themselves. And it''s also a good idea to make Albert''s new allies to work.


    As we continued reading, Victoria found something about what we''re looking for. About the hero in a certain fairy tale.


    "What is it?" Sonia and I curiously looked at what Victoria''s reading.


    "Here! It''s another book about hero. There are many of these books we read, but this one is different. The viin in this book, is simr to the hero in the book ''Hero Against Evil''."


    "Really? Are you sure?" I asked Victoria.


    "Just look at the author''s name! At first, I just read it like the other stories. Then after reading the name of the author, I reread it again and found that the bad guy here is simr to the hero in that book."


    The author''s name?


    I looked at the name Victoria pointed at and see the name ''Uneaten Beef'' written there.


    "Uneaten Beef? That''s the same author, right?"


    "That''s right. This beef wrote both books. Here, read it first."


    Victoria offered the book in her hand to me, then she continued looking for other books.


    The book title is Hero Rama. I guess the name of the protagonist of this story is Rama.


    The story is started as the young boy Rama lived happily with his family and friend in a certain vige. One day however, things changed when Rama''s father who is a powerful mage with strengthening magic is killed by a powerful mage.


    Rama swore to avenge his father''s death despite his mother''s protest. His mother is afraid that Rama would end up getting the same fate as his father. But Rama still choose to leave and hone his magic.


    Rama keeps getting stronger and stronger. He was blessed with several elements, and he can also use strengthening magic like his father, albeit it''s far too weak than his magic. And there''s one more unique magic Rama had. Which is Lie detection magic. He can tell if someone is telling a lie.


    "¡­somehow, the plot is predictable."


    "That''s obvious knowing how much we know. And this story is for kids and written in a way so kids can enjoy it."


    Victoria who is a professional writer before she died, exins how this story is targeted for children.


    The story continued. Rama found out that the one who killed his father also killed many other powerful people until one day, no one is able topete with that murderer. But Rama refuses to give up.


    Rama trained until he can defeat a dragon with a single magic, and finally he challenged the mage who killed his father. Both of them are evenly matched.


    The battlest for a while, and finally, Rama managed to seal the mage with powerful magic tool. Rama can''t kill the mage, but using a magic tool, he sealed the mage who terrorized people and finally, peacee to thend.


    Rama returned home and reunited with his already old mother. Then he used his power for good and build a kingdom and be the first king of his own kingdom.


    "¡­and the kingdom name is Tatrama. The ''Rama'' in ''Tatrama''e from the first king himself who is also Albert''s ancestor." I said.


    "That wasn''t written in the book, but we can think of it that way. The strengthening magic that was written in the book can be considered as Aura. And Rama''s ability which is lie detection, is now inherited by Albert." Victoria summarized the book.


    "It''s a good thing we read this first before we enter the basement. If we enter the basement and see the real history of the kingdom first before we read this, we might note to this conclusion."


    Just like I said, it''s a good thing to find this book first. But it took us so long just to find one book. Good thing I just look for stories from children''s books, novels, and history instead of looking at knowledge book. If I do, it will took us a longer time until we find this story.


    "Now we found more clues. First is about hero. Then the author, Uneaten Beef. Just how much did he regret to not eat that beef? Andstly, Rama who we assume the first king of this kingdom which hasn''t existed during the time you two were alive."


    Hero, author, and first king. Those three are the clues we have at the moment. At least it''s an improvement.


    "Should I inform Albert?" Sonia thought of contacting Albert right now.


    "No need. He''s busy at the moment and we can just tell him after we finished the basement as well. Even if we told him right now, it''s not like we can do anything right away." I said.


    "Roy, you forgot another clue here." Victoria reminded me about something.


    "You mean the magic tool used to seal the bad guy?"


    "Yeah. The story says that a magic tool is used to seal his enemy. Maybe because the seal is recently broken, this Evil God guy returned. And he started by creating a cult about him."


    "You think that we''re fighting the same person as the one who killed you? You might be right. But let''s not forget about how Rama and this supposed to be Evil God is evenly matched, and Rama needed to use a magic tool to seal him."


    If the story is true, then this guy we''re fighting about is the strongest being in the whole world. And now, this guy is building an army.


    This time, I truly regret the fact that I didn''t choose to run away right away as soon as I returned from the future. If so, I won''t have anything to do with the cult and can live leisurely while on the run looking for a safe ce. Then even if this Evil God truly revived and conquer the world, I can still be alive.


    But it''s toote to regret. I have chosen to fight them. Well, in the end, I made a decision to let Albert take care of it. But after getting more girlfriends, I ended up having to continue helping Albert in destroying the cult. Should I be happy that none of my girlfriends are evil?


    If I improve my summoning element, I could enter the Monster''s World, right? Maybe once I enter that world, I can stay there forever with everyone and not caring about anything else.


    Wait! If this Evil God is really someone from the past, then this guy must have known about how summoner can enter and exit Monster''s World as they wished! If he is a summoner, or he has a summoner subordinate, then they can visit Monster''s World whenever they want. There''s really no safe ce, huh? Even if we go to Monster''s world, we might still be attacked.


    "Victoria, Sonia, is the knowledge about summoners able to enter freely to Monster''s World ismon knowledge in the past?" I asked the two olddies.


    "Did you just make fun of me in your mind?" Victoria asked.


    "No." Yes.


    "¡­whatever. Yes, that knowledge ismon. Instead, I was surprised to see that no one know about it anymore." Victoria said, then Sonia continued.


    "Which mean even that world is not safe if this Evil God is someone from the past."


    Sonia''s thought are exactly what I had in mind.


    "Then do you know about magic tools that can seal someone?"


    "Such powerful magic tool were made in the ancient era. Even more than several thousand years ago. There are people who researched magic tools in order to build something new, or maybe rebuild something that was made in the ancient era. I know this because one of my lover was a researcher. ¡­was it one? Or maybe two?" Sonia''sst words are spoken in low volume but I can hear it. Let''s ignore it.


    "So if we want to defeat this Evil God, we might need to delve deeper into the past to find something that can defeat the possibly most powerful human in the world, if he''s still human. This is the guy who probably calling himself a god we''re fighting here."


    "Being a god is surprisingly easy, you know? Not a real divine being, but just a title. So in a way, he might really be a god." Victoria said.


    "Like Mortal God? Tell me how someone can be a god."


    "You just have to make people worship you. Those worshipers will think of you as their god. If you''re very strong and no one can defeat you, you can just say that you won''t kill anyone who worship you as their god. Then they start worshipping you and a cult was made."


    Victoria''s exnation make sense. Especially if the one who proimed as a god knows how much gullible people are.


    "But a cult built by fear won''tst long, right?" I asked Victoria.


    "But it did. Sonia said that she heard rumors about Evil God just soon after she died and became a ghost. This is a cult that was made since around a thousand years ago. And human are creature that forgets. One thousand year is more than enough time to make people forget about their fears. Now, instead of fear, they did it out of their faith to this Evil God."


    "So¡­ the only way to destroy this cult is by killing their god. And this god of theirs is someone so powerful that needed to be sealed since he can''t be killed¡­ can I cry?"

 Chapter 125 - Day Of The Parade

    It''s the parade day to celebrate the king''s first son. He also has a daughter but not many knows about it.


    The past few days, we have finished reading all the books about history or fairy tales in the Library Tower. And just like we suspected, the name of the first king of Tatrama kingdom is Rama, although in the history, he was called Rupert Tatrama from his father''s name, Rupert.


    But that''s all we could find in the basement. Other than that fact, we only see documents of the kingdom''s secret moves from the past. Like sending a spy to another country, brainwashing powerful mage, and many other evil n that should never be known to the world.


    As for the documents that were written since Albert''s rule, there were only few of them. And none of them are as bad as the previous kings'' era. Or maybe not yet.


    We told Albert about our findings and he only said that he will help search for more clues. Does he no longer surprised to hear that the first king of this kingdom is an Aura user? Maybe it was because we have told him about where his abilitye from.


    I also told him to look for ancient magic tools or weapons or anything that might be used to kill this Evil God.


    He agreed and only said to let go of everything for the next few days and enjoy the parade and Ruby''s wedding.


    That''s why today we just enjoy ourselves as the parade goes on.


    Albert, Marie, and n rode in an open carriage to show the people his newborn son. Everyone is cheering for the future king. Mustache is behind them as their bodyguard along with several other royal mages.


    I think I saw some of them before. They should be the audition winners who got promoted into royal mage.


    How did they got promoted only after a few days of the audition? It was because of the arrest of Berthold.


    The arrest happened just yesterday morning with Albert himself as the lead. He brought only the people who won the audition with him.


    Alberte to arrest Berthold for the crime of ve trading, which is banned in this kingdom. Berthold pretend to not know about it. Albert said that even though Berthold is a scaredy-cat, his acting is really good. Maybe it was because his son''s life is on the line.


    Although Berthold married his wife because of some political marriage arrangement, he cares deeply toward his son. So he doesn''t care of what happen to his wife.


    During the arrest, several people refused toe along, of whom Albert presumed to be from the cult. And as they were told to be taken and interrogated, Berthold''s wife stupidly decided to blow her own head. Which makes Albert''s army wary of these people they are going to arrest.


    She could have just tagged along for the interrogation, but she choose to kill herself. Probably because of fear that we will find out about the cult. Albert told me that the other people who were the guests of Berthold''s wife, angry at her decision. Since they could have just be prisoned and that''s all, but because of the explosion, the cult''s member had no other choice but to kill themselves as well when they were going to be caught.


    All of the member of the cult burst their own head, including the two bodyguards Berthold brought to the audition. Seeing them killing themselves, the knights who doesn''t know about the cult surrender themselves. Afraid that the explosion is because Albert''s army''s power. Those who surrendered were imprisoned and will be auditioned by Albert himself. Of course those who are innocent will be released in a few days.


    As for Berthold''s son, it was Ian who saved him. Ian sneaked into the room where he is locked, and kill the captors guarding him.


    Berthold''s son is just ten years old. He and Berthold were secretly escorted to stay in Tim''s secret room in the pce and will be safely guarded.


    The two of them will be released and given new identities. Berthold will no longer be a noble. As for how he will end up, it''s up to Albert. But I guess Berthold will be our allies against the cult.


    The news create chaos among the people for a while, but people no longer care because they only think of the parade and celebration. The civilians doesn''t think much of what''s happening with nobles. They only care more about themselves.


    As for nobles, they were scared to do anything. Whether they are part of the cult or not, all of them choose to stay quiet.


    Albert told me all of this this morning just before the parade. And now, we''re all watching his carriage moving from the side of the street. I''m carrying Lana and stand in the front so Marie can see us.


    "Look. That''s your father, mother, and your brother."


    I said to Lana in whisper as Marie noticed us and waving n''s arm toward us.


    "Look at you being so close to Lana. I thought you don''t want to take part in taking care of her." Ang teased me.


    "What?! Who said that?"


    "You! Just a few days ago!"


    "Really? I don''t remember anything that long ago."


    "¡­that remind me of how forgetful you are. If you can remember a lot more, we can take care of the¡­ that thing better." Ang said in low volume so no one can hear us.


    Ang spoke the truth. If I have a good memory, I can remember more of the cult''s n and tell Albert about it instead of having him look for it. Sorry, but I''m just an average person. The only thing that makes me different from other people is Aura. And some memories of the future. Most of them are about me though.


    "Ah! So cute! What''s the name?"


    Someone next to us saw me and asked for a name.


    "Roy."


    "Not you, you idiot! She''s talking about Lana! And did you really think you''re cute?!"


    Good thing that I''m carrying Lana. If not, I''m sure Ang would hit me as usual.


    "Ask blind people if I''m cute and they will say the same answer."


    "That you''re cute?"


    "No. They''ll say ''I''m blind you stupid idiot!'' right to my face. But they can''t see my face so they might actually said it to someone else''s face."


    "That''s obvious, you stupid idiot!"


    "Now it''s you who called me stupid idiot."


    "I''m representing all the blind people who don''t know toward whom those words should be spoken!"


    While we''re continued arguing, Ka interrupt us.


    "Your skit makes thatdy leave. You two should be careful when and where you two are ying around."


    "No. I made thatdy leave on purpose. Victoria, follow her and if you find her hiding spot together with other people, contact Albert via Sonia. Don''t engage them."


    Then while everyone''s eyes are locked at Albert, Victoria leave her usual spot in my body, my arm.


    "Okay. Does she have it in her mouth?" Victoria asked which I nodded and she left to stalk thatdy.


    Seems like they are really targeting the prince. Good thing that we choose to keep Lana''s existence a secret. Guarding two babies is harder than one after all.


    We continued watching Albert until his carriage left the street. And then everyone leave and return to their daily lives. Although some of them are following the carriages. Most of them are kids though.


    We returned to the inn and rest for a while.


    "Master. Here''s your suit. I picked one that suited you most."


    "Thanks, Lina. The size?"


    "I already know your size."


    "How?"


    "I''m a maid."


    I never have anyone measure my size and never told anyone. But how can Lina know about my size? Is this how a maid should be? Scary¡­


    "We don''t need to measure you. We just asked Victoria since you often use her as your clothes." Sophie exined.


    Oh, right. If it''s Victoria, then she could just transform herself into me or the clothes I wear and have Lina measure her.


    And then Victoria returned. She entered the inn with her human form.


    "How is it?"


    "I told Albert their hiding spot. Then I waited until Miguel busted them. Thatdy and her friends choose to kill themselves."


    So they thought that they had no choice but to suicide. How stupid. I guess they were taught that way.


    "But Miguel managed to grab one man and pluck the explosive device along with some of his teeth before he activate it. That guy will be put in prison."


    "I see. I guess Albert will be the one to interrogate him. I should also check if there are people he caught yesterday that has explosive devices as well before Albert get close to them. I''ll be back soon."


    After hearing from Victoria that they managed to capture one person, I left to see the prison where that guy and everyone who were caught from Berthold''s estate imprisoned.


    I hope I won''t see anything that Victoria saw in Mellian''s prison.


    ¡­yup. No one has explosive anymore. I should return to the inn and dressed up for Ruby''s wedding tonight. And I didn''t see anything in the corner of that prison. Nothing at all¡­


    Is there any potion that can make me forget a certain memory?

 Chapter 126 - Wedding Night

    The parade is over and now we''re at Ruby and Ian''s wedding. We had a wedding in the pce with only limited number of people. Only trusted people can participate.


    The maids and servant who weren''t able to gain Albert''s trust but still worked there, were told to take a day off again. Just thisst few days and they have gotten vacation several times.


    The first was during the twin''s birth. Then the audition day. And then today. They must be really happy to work here.


    Although Albert invited the winners of the audition, only some of them attended. Those who didn''t attend were doing a job Albert given like taking care of the aftermath of Berthold''s arrest.


    Albert said he also want to invite Berthold and his son since they are living in the pce at the moment, but Lowe rejected that idea. Albert hasn''t interrogate Berthold yet so none of us know if he can be trusted or not.


    "Can''t believe that Ian really got himself a wife." Albert approached me and said it.


    "Can''t believe you can''t believe Ian is marrying."


    "Can''t believe that you can''t believe that I can''t believe Ian is marrying."


    "Can''t believe that you can''t believe that--"


    "Enough, you two! If you keep continuing, neither of you will stop!"


    As we can''t believe each other, Sonia intervened.


    "Can''t believe you stop us." I said.


    "Can''t believe you can''t believe that she stop us." Albert followed along.


    "Can''t believe that--"


    As we were about to continue can''t believing each other, this time, it was Marie who stop us.


    "Are you two having fun? Please don''t act stupid in front of the children."


    ""We''re sorry!"" Both Albert and I apologized together.


    "Oh no! I just heard from Sonia that the king had been corrupted by Roy. I never thought it would be this bad." Ang said.


    "It''s good that Roy made another friend." Sophie just d that Albert and I are getting along.


    "Please note that any men who get along with him are not normal. From Hill, Kron, then even the king himself, are not normal." Ka calmly said.


    IN this wedding, everyone from my group already decided to be casual when interacting with Albert. Although at first they were nervous, when they see how close Albert is with me, they just treat him casually. As for the audition winners, they don''t dare to talk to Albert casually.


    "Albert. This is Ka, the one who looked smart. Then the one who looked kind is Sophie. And you already know about Candy. Those three are my girlfriends."


    "Nice to meet you all. I''m kind of the king of this country and this is my wife, Marie. And that girl over there is my sister, Shirley."


    The first people I introduced to Albert are my girlfriends. Then Albert also introduced his family.


    Marie is carrying her daughter, Lana, who she might not meet again in a long time, and Shirley is carrying n.


    "Shirley, they are around your age so you can get along with them well. I''ll take care of n."


    "Okay."


    Albert then grabbed n from Shirley and let Shirley have a chat with the girls. Seems like Shirley doesn''t have many friends around her age.


    "I haven''t introduced everyone yet. This one whom always look for a fault in me is Ang. That boy over there is Daniel whom I picked up on the street. He''s ying with Hannah and her mother, Penny. The one who wears a maid outfit into the wedding is my maid, Lina. And the one who keep drinking is Sam. She''s Ruby''s daughter." I introduced the rest of my group to Albert. As for Ruby, she''s the main star today and I won''t need to introduce her again. Victoria and Sonia are both people Albert already know. Well, not really people.


    "I see. So Ian is a stepfather now."


    "Yeah. That''s exactly why she''s drinking."


    I told Albert about how shocked she was when Ian suddenly proposed to Ruby just after meeting and how Ruby just epted it. Although Sam is an adult now, sheined when her mother choose to remarry. Seems like Sam is such a mommy girl.


    "She''s the one who trade with you regarding the treasures you found under the sea, right? I''ll try to contact her about businesster. When she''s sober."


    "You''re interested in the treasures?" I asked Albert.


    "Yes. In fact one of the people from the audition used to be a spy who worked at a merchantpany. He''s a licensed appraiser. I thought that you might want to have him around."


    "Sure. You can talk to Sam about it. But I guess you send him to us is because you want more people to be able to stay in contact with me. Just do whatever you want."


    "That''s in the list. Don''t worry, I won''t put too many people around you. Only those I thought may be benefit you."


    Well, he''s right that having an appraiser is benefiting me. This way, Sam won''t have to look for another appraiser and pay them. She can just ask this appraiser who works for her with a set sry. However much she paid him is something she need to discuss. Well, I guess I should stop her from drinking.


    I called Lina to make Sam stop drinking. I think if she focus on her work, she will forget about her mother''s remarriage soon.


    After introducing everyone to Albert, the girls are getting along quickly with Marie and Shirley. Considering they are the same age, it must be wonderful for Marie and Shirley to make new friends.


    They soon also grabbed n again from Albert and talked about many things and asked about Penny, Ruby, and Sonia''s experience of raising a child.


    Other than Candy who still seem reserved around the king, the others are already making themselvesfortable. I just hope that Victoria won''t spread her hobbies to everyone.


    Then the ceremony began, the vow was spoken, and the groom kissed the bride. Everyone is in joyful mood to celebrate the new old couple. Other than Sam who is still sulking.


    But once Albert introduce her to an appraiser who will work for her, she returned to normal.


    After the ceremony, we just chatted all night. Since it might be a long time until Lana can meet her parent and brother again, no one thought of separating her from her mother even after Lana fell asleep.


    "Roy, you''ll return tomorrow?" Albert asked me all of a sudden.


    "Yeah. I told you that before, right?"


    "Well, we discussed few things and--"


    "Before you continue, I have to say something. Again?!"


    When he said that they discussed something, it ended up with me doing something. Is this something I can refuse? Or is this something rted to the girls in my group and unable to refuse? I think it''s thetter.


    "Yes. Again. This time it''s about Shirley. When the news of my heir born was spread, some nobles think that Shirley''s position is now to be used as political tool and to be married off to someone."


    "Yeah yeah yeah. Now you want me to take care of her as well." Hearing it''s about Shirley, I looked at her and see that Shirley is getting along with Ka and the other. That means even if I refuse, they will ept the request and nothing I can do about it. Is it my fate to be pushed around?


    "I will tell everyone that Shirley has no interest in being used as political tool so she leave and choose to live as a Hunter. That''s why I want you and your friend to build a n with her. As for the budget, I think you can take care of that."


    "Building a n?! You''re gonna use us to do some request that can''t be handled by your men, right? What do I get from doing it?"


    There''s no way that I will do everything he said for free.


    "I''ll think for a way to get you Introductory School Degree. You want it so you can enter a medical school, right? I''ll also help your friends to get them as well. Maybe I will include Sophie and Victoria."


    Sophie and Victoria as well? That''s an interesting offer. I don''t really care much anymore about getting my doctor license, but I want the girls to find something they want to do other than just fighting. Maybe they also want to be a doctor? Or even entering magic college to learn how to get stronger.


    "Then I''ll do it. I just need to build a n, right?" I agree to Albert''s idea.


    "Yeah. You can discuss with your friendster. But since I want Shirley to leave politic, I suggest that the leader of your n won''t be her."


    "That I can do. But if you ever want to submit a request, I won''t ept anything cheap. Even if the reward is not money, it must be something expensive or useful."


    "I''ll leave Shirley and Lana to you. But in case Shirley ever be your girlfriend, you have to call me dearest elder brother."


    "You think she will like someone like me? And I will never call you that."


    "Three girls already confessed to you. Who knows if Shirley will feel the same as well?"


    After chatting with Albert for a while, I asked everyone about building a n. I know that I have said it before when I asked them to move to Cassau, but that n seems to be forgotten since many girls of Red Tail choose to leave on their own and we never talked about it again.


    When I asked everyone, of course all of them already know Albert''s n to have us build a n. I''m always thest one to hear the news.


    I realized once again that I hate Albert.

 Chapter 127 - Going Home Separately

    The wedding is over and it''s time to return back to the inn. The kids are all tired and sleepy so the girls left early. Ruby and Ian stay for a while longer since they are the protagonists of today''s event. They also went to help cleaning up the ce.


    As for me, the reason I''m still here is because Marie is reluctant to separate with Lana. I''m just here until she can let Lana go since we might not meet for a while again. Shirley returned to her room to prepare to leave tomorrow with me and the others to Cassau.


    So it''s just Albert and I chatting whatever topic both of us interested in.


    "See? The word ''Kidnap'' and ''Babysit'' are simr. Kidnap can be separated into two words which is ''Kid'' and ''Nap''. And babysit also the same. ''Baby'' and ''Sit''. Baby and kid are simr in which their meaning is young children of which baby is usually younger. As for nap and sit, both of them are verbs in which both means an action one do to rest. So why is ''Babysit'' and ''Kidnap'' mean totally different thing? And why can''t it be ''Babynap'' or ''Kidsit''?" I asked some real question there.


    "Now that you mention it, doesn''t it mean that you''re kidnapping my daughter? As for their meaning¡­ I guess it''s the fact that one of them is done forcefully." Albert''s reply make me realize it.


    "I see. I guess you are indeed smart."


    "I''m a king after all."


    The topic of our conversation varies too much that now we ended up talking aboutnguage.


    "You two, how can you talk about so many useless things? Why are you two discussing about the words ''Kidnap'' and ''Babysit''?"


    Marie interrupted our conversation.


    "Marie, are you done saying farewell to Lana?" I asked Marie who''s still carrying Lana. As for n, he has been listening to our conversation in Albert''s arm.


    "Not yet."


    "Yes. That''s why I''m chatting with Albert about many things. I''m bored so I just talked about stupid things with the lonely king over here." I replied.


    "And I have a good reason for me to enjoy talking with a friend." Said the king who never had any friends.


    ¡­what a sad reply.


    "You two keep me here because you don''t want to separate with Lana, but what about Shirley? She''s also going to leave, you know?"


    Does Shirley actually not loved by these two?


    "Shirley always wanted to leave. Ever since long time ago, she long to be free and not be used as a political tool. But I always worry about her since she has no experience in the outside world at all. Then as Marie got pregnant, we decided to allow her once my kids are born. And youe in a timely manner. Since you have a lot of girl friends around her age, it will be great if she get along with you all. And I can trust you to take care of her."


    Just as Albert finished exining, Shirley returned.


    "I''m fine even if I''m going on my own, you know? It''s just that since being with you is more convenient, I''ll be joining you."


    "Yeah. It''s good to have another babynapper." I said.


    "You mean kidnapper? Sorry. Babysitter?"


    "I thought we had that discussion already!"


    "Don''t get angry! I forgot since it was a long time ago."


    "It''s barely five minutes since we talked about it!"


    How could this king forget about what we discussed? Now I''m worried if it''s a good idea to leave the kingdom in his hand.


    "By the way, when will you leave?" Shirley asked me.


    "Probably tomorrow afternoon. We need to discuss our n in the morning after all."


    "What n?"


    "I''m nning on leaving on my own to Cassau and train on the way. Ka and Ang suggested that they do the same. Then we need someone to go along with Daniel and the other to return to Cassau right away. We will discuss who going where tomorrow morning."


    "We''re not leaving together?"


    "No. After finding some clues about who our enemy is, we realized that we are far too weak against them. It''s a good idea to train on our way home."


    Soon, Marie finally said farewell to Lana who has already fall asleep. I carried Lana with me and Shirley tagged along to the inn where we stay since it''s better for her to leave from the inn tomorrow than leaving from the pce and being seen by someone.


    We return to the inn and luckily, the innkeeper still allowed us to rent another room for Shirley even though it''ste. He''s a good guy. Although I never know what his name is.


    The next morning, I was awaked by everyone who somehow gathered in my room.


    "Why are you all here? This ce is too cramped." I said as I rubbed my eyes.


    "Change of n. We need to leave the capital as soon as possible. Albert told me that there are some activities among noble when they noticed that Shirley wasn''t in the pce." Sonia reported about what Albert told her.


    "Then she can just return to the pce."


    "I won''t return. I''ll be going with you to Cassau and build a n." Shirley refused my idea.


    "Tch, Fine! For now, the nonbatant will go to Cassau right away. Daniel, Hannah, Penny, Sam, and Ruby will leave while Ian will guard them. Oh, right. Sam''s new employee wille along as well. Since he was a former agent, he should be able to fight decently. You will go through the main road so I hope there won''t be much trouble there."


    I don''t know how strong Ian is, but he should be strong enough to protect everyone together with Sam''s new employee.


    "Then Lina. You will also go with them. But leave your summon with me. It will be a good idea to get your summon stronger. Since I will be with Sunny, Sunny can be the one who finished the monsters I defeated and Sunny can get stronger faster."


    "Okay. Come out, Sunny!"


    Lina summoned Sunny in a vase and put it on the table. We will get along from now on, Sunny.


    "Then the rest can go their own way home and practice with our new friend, Shirley. But be careful. Even if you have an advanced level mage with you, there are still danger everywhere." I looked at Shirley. Although Candy is also an advanced level mage, no one knows that Shirley has also reached advanced level.


    "How did you know that I have reached advanced level?"


    "You''re holed up in your house with a lot of resources. And you want to be independent. The easiest way to be independent from your royal family is to be stronger. I just guessed that you have reached advanced level. Which elements of yours is it? I don''t think it''s the ice element."


    "It''s the Wind Element. I can fly now." Shirley replied.


    "Nice. Just be careful on the way. By the way, Sophie." I called out to Sophie who has been quiet all the time.


    "What is it?" Sophie asked.


    "You can choose whichever side you want to join. I now that among us, you are the one who hate fighting the most. You don''t have to force yourself."


    "Thanks, Roy. But I''ll join with Ka. Even if I hate fighting, being stronger is always a good thing. Isn''t that what you taught us?"


    How do I say it? I forgot that I taught them about it. Let''s pretend that I remember.


    "As long as you want to, you can choose to do whatever you want. Lastly, Victoria¡­ you can do whatever you want."


    "I''ll join with the girls for a while then I''ll leave on my own. If you need any help, just summon me."


    I don''t need to worry about Victoria. And if she choose to go on her own, I''m the one who benefit from it since her time to stay will get longer, and my summoning element can soon be improved.


    "That''s the n. I''ll be leaving after I wake up again from my second sleep. No need to wait for me. You can leave whenever you want."


    And so, I wrapped the nket around me again and tried to go back to sleep. After I wake up, I''ll be leaving on a journey with Sunny. I hope Sunny will be a good conversation partner. She can''t talk? Then she can just be a good listener.


    "Is he always like this?" Shirley who still doesn''t know me as well as the others asked.


    "Just get used to it. By the way, Roy, can we have Lina go with us? Since Daniel already leaving with a butler, I thought it''s a good idea to have a maid with us."


    Ang asked for my permission.


    "Just go ask her. Don''t force her if she doesn''t want to go with you. And if she agree, you need to do your best to protect her since her summon is with me."


    Then Shirley asked me something.


    "Roy. I know you''re strong, but are you sure you can go alone?"


    "If I go with someone else, I''ll just end up leaving the fight to them. That''s just how my personality is and I can''t myself train that way. Don''t worry, I''m not alone. I have Sunny with me. And you can contact me via Sonia. If something happened to any of you, I''ll rush to your side as soon as possible."


    I hope it won''te to that.


    As soon as we made our n, everyone left my room and I return to my sleep.

 Chapter 128 - Like Master Like Summon

    I woke up at noon and noticed that everyone has gone. Only me and the potted nt, Sunny in the room.


    "It''s just us two from now. Let''s get along until we reach Cassau."


    Sunny shook her¡­ flower head? I''ll think of that as her agreement.


    I guess even a nt want to be stronger.


    I get out of the bed and wore prepare to leave when Sonia appear in front of me.


    "What''s wrong, Sonia?"


    "I noticed that you''re awake when your buckle belt moved. Just a message from Albert saying that some nobles are preparing to made a search of the princess. Though Albert told them to stay put, there might still be some idiots who dare to look for Shirley. He said that any important news from him will only be delivered through me, so anyone who im themselves to be his messengers deserve to be killed. Even if they are nobles, you are free to kill them. In case they are from another country, Albert said that he will think of their act as hostility from their entire kingdom and prepare a war against them." Sonia ryed Albert''s message.


    Albert sure love his sister, right?


    "That I can do. Have you told the girls others?"


    "Yes. They said that they will get Shirley has a makeover to make her unnoticeable by the nobles. Since she''s rarely leave the pce, it might be doable."


    "Okay. Since she''s with the others, just tell them if Albert has another message rted to her."


    "By the way, where are you going?"


    "Who''s asking?"


    "Everyone."


    Seems like I made everyone curious at where my destination is.


    "Home obviously. To Cassau. But my way might be different than theirs. Just tell them to wait in Cassau if they arrive first."


    "Okay. Bye." Sonia just quickly said her farewell and about to disappear.


    "Wait! Are you in a hurry?"


    "No. The girls are just doing some shopping. We will probably leave tomorrow. I''m just going to enjoy our girls'' time." Sonia disappear while having a smile on her face.


    So they haven''t left yet and went shopping instead. I guess it''s fine to enjoy themselves.


    Girls sure love shopping. And they can even bonded with each other by shopping together. I just hope that no trouble wille to them since they''re a group of beautiful girls. Well, even if any man approach them, they will fall victim to the ''Nutcracker''.


    I left the inn after finished my breakfast¡­ or was it lunch? Then I picked Sunny and left the inn.


    "Hmm¡­ it will be difficult for me to fight this way. I''ll find something to strap you in my back if that''s okay with you."


    Sunny moved her flower up and down.


    Then I bought a bandage to strap Sunny on my back. Sunny''s head or flower like head moved above my shoulder to see the front view.


    "How is it?"


    Seeing her nodding again, I left the capital that way.


    Many people looked at me curiously but I just ignore them. It''s rare to see someone is piggybacking a potted nt so it''s obvious that I gained attention.


    I think I saw a glimpse of Shirley happilyughing when she''s kicking a man''s balls. It''s just my imagination, right?


    As soon as no one is looking at me outside the gate, I run as fast as possible to¡­ I don''t really know where I''m going so I just run straight forward and enter the forest.


    "Sunny! How''s the ride?!"


    This time, Sunny''s leaves are dancing. I guess she loved the wind.


    Just a few minutes after entering the forest, we encounter our first monster. It''s a hobgoblin.


    "Alright. Sunny, I''ll leave you here. Try to attack that thing with your seed or entrap it with your vine. I''ll adapt to your fighting styles."


    I put the potted nt on the ground and charge at the hobgoblin alone.


    Then I sensed something from behind me so I dodged to the right. I noticed that Sunny throws a seed straight to the hobgoblin. Which means if I didn''t notice, that seed will hit me.


    "Hey! I told you that you can fight however you want! But that doesn''t mean you have to attack me!"


    Iined to the nt who seems to be excited in fighting a monster.


    The seed that Sunny throws hit the monster but didn''t do any damage at all. I guess it''s still way too weak to fight alone.


    "For now, don''t attack it blindly. Your attack doesn''t work on it but it can be used as a distraction. Try to attack it when this monster''s attention is focused only at me!"


    I don''t know if Sunny can understand difficult order, so I just fight against the hobgoblin without caring about whether Sunny understand or not.


    For this battle, I''ll just try fighting it barehanded with the help of my Aura covering my whole body to make up for my defense. By using my Aura, my strength and defense are about the same as the hobgoblin after a few bout. So this is how strong I am without my weapon, huh?


    As for my spear, I smashed it into pieces and put them in my pockets. I''ll just use it if I can''t defeat my opponent in a bare knuckle fight.


    The hobgoblin is armed with a club, but I knocked it away and now we''re fighting with punches.


    Hobgoblin intellect only allow it to make a simple and predictable attack with its fist, so I''m obviously have the advantage since I trained to kick as well. But for now, I''ll just use my fist without kicking, or grappling.


    Since the hobgoblin''s attacks are predictable, I can easily dodged it. But seems like its defense is quite high even when I''m covering my body with Aura. If I just cover only my fists with my Aura, I can easily defeat it with one punch, but I need to train with my Aura covering my whole body to get used to it.


    Both Sonia and Victoria told me that practicing with covering my whole body with Aura will benefit me more than fighting with just covering one part of my body or my weapon. They say that doing it will make my body adapt better to Aura when my Aura is getting strongerter.


    As for how to increase the strength of my Aura, I just need to use it more often. And¡­ I need to train getting hit on my body while it''s covered with Aura. I don''t like that part of training.


    Victoria said that since there are many Aura user in the past, so they often had a spar to improve their Aura. Since I''m the only Aura user here, that''s impossible. And no one has enough physical strength to for me so I can increase my Aura. So I have to fight monster with good physical ability. Just like this hobgoblin.


    With my personality, I would always finish the fight as soon as I can, but since it''s a training, I can''t do that. I need to lower myself to get hit by this stupid hobgoblin''s attack. Aura user sure has a perverted way to practice.


    Let''s allow this hobgoblin tond a punch on my body first.


    The hobgoblin raised its hand high and swung it down to my head. But I tilted my head and let it hit my shoulder instead.


    "Argh! It''s hurt!"


    While I was distracted by the pain, the hobgoblin tried to attack me again. Fortunately, Sunny threw a seed right at the moment when the hobgoblin is about to attack me and distracted it.


    I escape from its range of attack and catch my breath. There''s no healer with me this time, so I can''t afford to get any major injury. I need to move my body so the impact will be lessened. Maybe just dodged it slightly so the attack will just scratch me.


    If I do that, it will take a longer time for me to get stronger. I have no choice but to take the damage and hopefully, I won''t get injured.


    On the next bout, Sunny is already capable to coordinate with me and judge when and where she should shoot. I never thought that nt type monsters are smart. Or maybe it''s just Sunny.


    Finally after exchanging punches many times, and getting hit over and over, the hobgoblin seems tired and its attack is slowed down and weakened. I guess it''s time to end this.


    I tripped its leg and mount the monster. Then I pummeled its head with my fists until it got severely weakened, but not died yet.


    Then I grabbed the tip of my spear and opened a hole in the monster''s chest.


    "Sunny. Keep shooting at the hole in its body until it died."


    I lifted the hobgoblin, pulled the spearhead, and let Sunny aimed at its chest freely.


    The seed doesn''t do much damage, but it will surely dies soon.


    Then the monster died with its chest filled with seeds. What a cruel way to die.


    "Oh? You seem to get bigger again. I guess you''re a monster that has quick grow ability. Lina will be pleased with you."


    The flower then danced happily hearing my praise. She really is simr to Lina. Like Master like summon.

 Chapter 129 - New Dungeon

    "Am I the first person to discover this dungeon?"


    As I said that, the nt on my back shook its leaves and hit my face with it.


    "Sorry. I mean are we the first to discover this dungeon? There''s no trace of people entering this ce."


    Where are we right now?


    We''re under thergest waterfall in the kingdom.


    Why are we here?


    Well, since my goal is to get stronger, I thought it would be great to enter a ce with a lot of monsters.


    People who knows me would be shocked to hear that. They will think that I''m not me anymore since Roy is someone who doesn''t want to enter such ces.


    They''re right though.


    But since my Divine Vision can cover my surrounding, I know where and when I will encounter monsters. And I only choose to fight monsters that I can confidently¡­ run away from.


    Killing them? Of course I would if that''s possible. But my goal is to get stronger while I''m still alive. Not dying on the way. So killing monsters is not important. Getting stronger is.


    The worst part is that to increase the strength of my Aura, I need to get hit more often. Though after getting this far, I can say that I''m getting better in taking a hit. But I can''t say it proudly.


    After our first encounter with the hobgoblin, we encounter other monsters as well. Although only few of them are at least as strong as the hobgoblin, or stronger than the hobgoblin. And each time, I deliberately get hit by those monsters. Is there really no other way to get stronger than getting hit?


    I feel like if my Aura is getting stronger, but it''s just a slight increase.


    As for Sunny, she''s getting bigger now. But her growth rate is slower than before. I hope by the time we finish our training, Lina can reach Intermediate Level. Sunny did all the killing blow after all.


    Sunny''s biggest change is that now she can walk on her own. She can move her vines and roots to leave the pot and walked on its own. Although her movement is slow, it''s better than being in the vase all the time. Lina will be surprised to see Sunny''s growth.


    Our journey somehow led us to this waterfall. I saw some mages, probably hunters, fighting monsters in this area. Seems like this spot is a good ce to look for monsters.


    But I ignore them all. It was because I saw a dungeon under the waterfall.


    It''s a difficult ce to enter since you need to go through underwater tunnel right under the waterfall, and the length of that tunnel is more than three hundred meter. I think I''m the only one who can go there.


    Of course there are also monsters in the water, so even mages will have difficulty to enter even if they see the underwater passage.


    But I''m fine. As for Sunny, I think her shaking her leaves means that she''s fine as well.


    I thought too much water can kill nts, but I guess nt type monsters are different.


    I entered the underwater cave and kill the monsters there with my spear. Sunny can''t attack underwater yet, but I guess her vines can be used if she''s stronger.


    As I swum underwater, I see many human corpse. I think they were people who found this tunnel, but died underwater. Maybe there''s some powerful monsters inside this cave.


    I activated my Divine Vision to see the surrounding and I managed to see a lot of holes on the wall and the ceiling of the cave. Does all dungeon always have holes in it? First it was the dungeon near Cassau, then here.


    In any case, it will be easy if I just swim away from those holes. But I can''t just take it easy. After all, each of those holes are home to a giant snake or eel like monster. So first thing first, I need to see how fast they are. If they are as fast as the sea monsters I usually fought, then it''s okay to continue. If they are faster than that, I''ll just give up.


    I picked a dead body from the bottom of the cave, and throw it to the wall filled with holes. This one should have died because he''s out of breath since his body is fully reserved and no damage on his body. It should be around two or three month since this guy died here.


    As soon as the body get close to the holes, the giant eele out of their holes and bit the dead body. Not just one or two, but all the eels near the body,e out of the holes and rip the dead body to pieces.


    Hmm¡­ seems like they are not as fast as the monsters in the sea. Maybe it''s because sea monsters and freshwater monsters are fundamentally different. Sea is too fast and the monsters there can freely swim wherever they like, but freshwater, like river orke, are narrower. So the monsters have difficulty in adjusting their speed.


    In any case, it''s easy for me to pass this area. I''ll just enter the dungeon and ignore those eels.


    I can see the end of the tunnel already. And what I see is the entrance to a cave, but this time, it''s no longer underwater. There''s air in this area, and the monsters here varies.


    "How is it Sunny? Can you continue?"


    I asked Sunny who had been carried by me on the way here. She replied with a nod. But the pot she''s in now is too wet and the ground inside has decreased since I took it diving. I guess I need to fill it after we get out of here.


    "Sunny, I think it''s better if you leave that vase and just wrap my waist with your vine or root. I''ll get you a new vase once we return. When we encounter a monster, I want you to leave my side and we will cooperate like usual, okay?"


    Sunny nodded and wrap her roots around me. I should have done this from the beginning.


    At the entrance of the real dungeon, I see a fully intact corpse of a male human. I guess he seeded in entering the underwater tunnel, but can''t continue any longer. He should be died because of starvation.


    I don''t have any sympathy with him because he has an explosive device inside his mouth. Why did I encounter someone from the cult in this dungeon? Could it be that the existence of this dungeon has been found by the cult, but it has never been explored since no one can reach this far?


    No matter how powerful you are, you can''t enter this ce just by defeating the monsters on the way. You need to be able to hold your breath the entire time, or have something that can help you breathe underwater. Like the oxygen tank I built back then, or have someone with air element apany you.


    Whatever the case, even if they know about this dungeon, they haven''t found anything. The only trace of people in this dungeon, is only this corpse here. But seeing this corpse still intact here meant that at least this ce is safe and no monsters appear here.


    "Sunny, for now we will rest here. I''ll go back to the water to catch some fishes. You just wait here."


    Sunny leave my side and approach the corpse. What is she nning?


    "I''ll be back soon."


    I dive again and look for some prey.


    I heard that eel are some kind of delicacy. Should I hunt one of them?


    I grabbed my spear and approach one of the hole. The size of the hole is about 30m, but the length is 3 meter. As for the eel, its length is about one and a half meter. This should be able to fill my stomach.


    But if I approach it carelessly, the surrounding eels will alsoe out. I need to be fast.


    I''ve seen their attack before. As long as I haven''t entered its range, it won''te out and attack me. Just two meter from the hole.


    Then I quickly pierce my spear into the hole and stabbed the eel right on its head. As soon as I know that the spear has pierced the eel, I swum back quickly as to not get the other eel near the hole attacked me.


    Before, when I saw them, they won''t leave their home. At least the tip of their tails are still inside the hole. But somehow, they are chasing after me now. They are many, and strong. But slow. So I can get to the exit before they reached me.


    "Caught an eel! I wonder how it taste since I''ve never eaten one of these in the past."


    I brought the dead eel with me to where Sunny is waiting. But when I see where Sunny is, I dropped the eel in shock.


    Sunny''s roots are piercing the corpse!


    "¡­Sunny, what are you doing? Are you using his body as fertilizer?"


    Sunny nodded at my question.


    "Is this your first time using a corpse as a fertilizer?"


    Sunny nodded again. Affirming my guess.


    "Then next time you need to do it, can you just use the corpse of a monster? Seeing you stabbing human corpse and use it as fertilizer is too scary for me."


    Then Sunny raised two leaves on each side. I guess that mean "Can''t be helped."


    "Shit. Now I lost my appetite. I can no longer finish this whole eel. But half of this might be doable. I''ll let you have the other half and try using it as a fertilizer, okay?"


    I can''t believe that I''m roasting a giant eel while watching a corpse sucked dry by a nt.


    But at least the eel is delicious. I need to get more to bring home and let Lina cook them for me.

 Chapter 130 - Training With Goblins

    After filling my stomach with eel, both of us, a human and a nt, entered the dungeon.


    Being in a cave should make the area dark, but it was bright as if it was outside during the day. It was because there are some type of n that emit light all around the cave. From wall, ceiling, and even the floor, there are several of these nts whose leaves emit light. Even after being stepped, the light won''t dim.


    "Sunny. Your friends?"


    Sunny shook her flower head. Then she magically, made her flower head emit light like the nts around here.


    "You can do that too? Doesn''t it mean they are your friends or simr species? Both of you can emit light after all."


    Sunny shook her flower head again. This time it shook faster than before.


    "Sorry sorry. I know you are different. You emit light on your flower, while these nts emit light on their leaves. That mean you''re different."


    This time, the flower head nodded and dimmed its light. Even nts have feelings.


    "Come on, we''re moving."


    As I told Sunny to go, Sunny wrapped her root around my waist and we''re entering the dungeon.


    After all the monsters we defeated, and that corpse Sunny used as fertilizer for her nutrient, Sunny has grown considerably¡­ smaller?


    "Sunny, did you get smaller?"


    As I said that, Sunny suddenly change her size into bigger flower. Her sunflower flower head is now about the same size as my head from the size of my fist. Her root also be bigger and thicker as well. How can I know? It''s because her roots already wrapped on my waist tightly.


    "Too tight! Too tight!"


    Seeing me suffering, Sunny loosened her wrap and let me catch a breath.


    "Huff¡­ I see that you can grow bigger and smaller. But please don''t get bigger again when you''re wrapping your roots or vines around me, okay?"


    Sunny dropped her flower head dejectedly. Then raised it a bit. Is that how she apologize?


    "Apologize epted. Now let''s see what kind of treasures inside this dungeon."


    Somehow, my Divine Vision is affected by the mana inside this dungeon. I guess it''s because the purity of mana here since no human other than me has ever entered here and affecting the mana. This is the first time my Divine Vision doesn''t work well.


    I can still see around me, see-through objects, and zoom to distant object, but the effectiveness is different than when I''m outside.


    Well, the good thing is at least I know that my Divine Vision has a weakness. It doesn''t work well in a ce filled with mana of high purity. Now I just need to find something to get rid of this weakness. Maybe using a scope will help me see further. Even better if there''s an enemy whose vision is unaffected by mana with high purity. Then I just killed it and gained its vision. I hope I can find one here.


    So I made a new n with Sunny. Instead of having Sunny helped me like before, I intend to defeat the monster here on my own without using magic or Sunny''s help. At least one of them. If there are multiple enemies of the same type, I just need to defeat one of them without magic, then after defeating one, I can use magic and Sunny''s help to defeat the rest.


    When I told Sunny about this n, she shook her flower head and rejected the idea. I guess she just want to be the one to do thest damage so she can grow. Buy finally after telling her that I will buy a high quality vase for her, she finally agree. Well, it was just for me to fight each type of monsters alone so she doesn''t actually protest heavily.


    Don''t tell me that Sunny did it on purpose so she can get something from me? How smart! As long as it''s something I can get, I''m fine with it though.


    The first monsters we encounter inside the dungeon is goblins. Weak. Too weak. But the numbers of goblins is about fifty of them. Only ten of them in front of us, while the others are nearby but didn''t notice us. They wille as soon as they hear fighting.


    I can be sneaky and kill them one by one without alerting other goblins, but it will take a long time and annoying. So once I see them, I just pierce my spear on one of them.


    The goblins now be alert of our presences. And since I have defeated one of them, Sunny decided to join.


    Sunny left my body and walked on her roots. Then on her stalk, three vines appear and from it, the vines attacked the goblins. Sunny also shooting seeds from her flower head as well.


    "What? Do you want to fight on your own?"


    Sunny nodded as she heard me.


    "Then I''ll leave these group to you while I take care of the other groups."


    Since I have killed one goblin from the first group, Sunny is now facing nine goblins. Well, as long as the goblins'' attack can''t reach Sunny''s main body, she will win undoubtedly. Although it may take time since her attacks is still weak.


    While waiting for Sunny to finish, I can just defeat the rest of the goblins. Let''s see if I can defeat all of them unscathed while not using any magic. After defeating the first goblin, I didn''t notice any change with my Divine Vision. Maybe it''s because goblin doesn''t have any vision ability. Or maybe it''s because just defeating one of them isn''t enough.


    I can find the answer after I finished all these goblins.


    I let Sunny take care of the first group, and while they are distracted by Sunny''s vines, I passed them and get to the next group.


    Just like before, this group also has ten goblins.


    Since I don''t want to use magic, I''ll try defeating them all without getting myself out of breath. One goblin need to be killed in one shot. If possible, multiple goblins in one shot.


    I threw my spear at the goblins standing in a row, and managed to impale two of them. Eight more to go.


    Then I approached the goblins and punched their faces one by one. I also letting them get a few hits on my body. Thanks to this perverted training method, my defense has raised. So it''s impossible for the weak goblins armed with clubs to hurt me.


    After thest goblins of the group is killed after I broke its neck, I picked my spear and prepare to throw it to the next wave of goblins.


    The next goblinse from a narrow tunnel so they are running here in a row. And this throw pierced four of them. Easy.


    "Taste my punches! And maybe sometime my kicks! If you''re not ugly, you would have a taste of my head-butt!"


    They are ugly so I didn''t use any head-butts. Why would I get my face so close to those things on purpose?


    Soon, all forty goblins are defeated by me alone. And of course I''m out of breath. But since the battle is over, I can get some fresh air with magic instead of breathing in this ce covered with goblins; corpse.


    Now let''s see how Sunny is doing.


    She''s doing extremely well. In fact she has already defeated 5 out of the nine goblins.


    She wrapped her vines around the goblins and shoot one goblin with seeds. All four goblins are wrapped around her three vines with one vine wrapped two goblins.


    Then Sunny shot one goblin while also tightening the wrap around the goblins'' neck. The seeds are aimed at the goblin''s eyeballs.


    But the vine wrap is not enough to break their necks. That''s why Sunny decided to shoot them one by one.


    Just as I approached Sunny, she let go of the goblin that she shot. Now only three more to go with each vines wrapped one of them.


    "Sunny, can''t you just swing those goblins around with your vines? Just smash their heads to the wall or the floor."


    Sunny stopped shooting the next goblin and looked at me for a while. Then he returned shooting again.


    "What? You''re still not strong enough to lift them up?"


    Sunny nodded at my word.


    Despite her quick growth during this training, she''s still not strong enough to lift a goblin. Maybe after a few more battle, and few more nutritious corpses as her fertilizer, she will be strong enough to lift a monster.


    "Do you want me to beat them to near death?"


    Sunny nodded at my suggestion. Looks like even she''s also bored of how repetitive her actions is.


    I just stab my spear to their chest and let Sunny shoot the chest part of the goblins.


    All the goblins here are defeated. It was an easy for both of us. But there''s something I learned from Sunny''s fight.


    It''s that Sunny''s potential to get stronger is much better than any other type of monster. So why is her kind not popr as contracted monster? Maybe it''s the fact that she started weak. No one would have thought that her kind are capable of growth. And even those who understand, they would have thought that raising her is a pain.


    There''s also one other thing I''m curious about.


    "Sunny. Before you meet me, you are just a weak monster, right? Then why is Lina refused to kill you and contract another monster?"


    Sunny just raised her leaves and tilted her flower head. Looks like she doesn''t know the reason as well.


    Oh well, I can just ask Linater. For now, it''s time to conquer this dungeon.

 Chapter 131 - Theyre Having Fun Without Me

    After fighting goblins, we encounter different types of monsters. Rats, centipedes, snakes, bats, and many other types. Most of the monsters here are not considered as strong and can be defeated by D-rank hunters, but the numbers will make even an A-rank hunter lose.


    But they are not a problem for me and Sunny. My defense are strong enough to survive their attacks even if they are attacking me at the same time. And Sunny has grown bigger and stronger. Her vines and roots can trap the enemies. And her seed bullets can kill her enemy faster. But still not enough to kill them in one shot.


    But there''s one thing I need to make sure of. Has Lina reached Intermediate level yet?


    I called Sonia to ask her about it.


    I tapped the buckle on my belt and after a few second, Sonia appear in front of me.


    "Roy, where is this?" Sonia is curious about the location she''s arrived at.


    "A new dungeon I discovered. How''s everyone?"


    "They are fine. The girls are still training while Ian and the others will soon arrive at Cassau. And we all get along with Shirley just fine although she need to learn more about the outside world. And Victoria would sometime leave us at night and hunt monsters on her own. She said she will leave the group once they are close to Cassau."


    Then Sonia started telling me about the others'' condition. They are all doing fine. And I think the girls are enjoying their time together. I hope they don''t forget about me.


    "That''s impossible. We won''t forget about you ever. Especially when the thing we talked about most is about you. We love to make fun of you every day so believe me when I say that no one will forget about you."


    "¡­should I be happy to hear that?"


    So they are bonding because of me. Or more like they are making fun of me. What did I do wrong?


    "Anyway, why are you calling me?" Sonia asked me why I called her.


    "Right. I want you to ask Lina about her progress in summoning element. Tell me if she''s close to breakthrough. Then I''ll stop having Sunny help me."


    "Why do you want Sunny to stop growing?"


    "That''s wrong. I want Sunny to help growing, but for Lina, it''s useless if her summoning level increased. As a summoner, the increase of our summoning element doesn''t mean much other than able to make a portal between this world and Monsters'' World for a longer time. That''s why I want Lina to stop improving her level when she''s close to breakthrough, while I will try looking for another Pear-y Fruit for her so she can make a contract with another monster." I exin my intention to Sonia who will tell Lina about it.


    "I see. Do you want me to tell Lina to summon Sunny? That way Sunny won''t have to join you in your¡­ massacre."


    "Sure. Also tell her to summon Sunny via portal. Not the normal summon. That way I can also see everyone over there."


    "Alright. I''ll tell her that. Bye."


    With that, Sonia disappear from here and should be at Lina and the other''s location.


    As I finished talking with Sonia, I see Sunny is dancing.


    "Why are you look so happy? Can''t wait to see your master?"


    Sunny nodded while keep dancing. It''s funny seeing a sunflower dancing.


    "I''ll wait here with you until Lina summon you."


    I sat on the ground with my back against the wall and Sunny leave my body and walked with her roots as her legs.


    After waiting for a few minutes, finally a portal appeared in front of Sunny and I. I have told Lina how to make a portal before, but this should be the first time she did it. Because unlike Victoria, Sunny can''t speak, so it would be easier for Lina to summon Sunny normally. By forcefully transporting Sunny to her location.


    When I asked Victoria about this kind of summoning, she said that she can''t do anything. She can''t resist, and will be transported to my location. I think this is the reason why most summons got themselves confused when they are summoned by their masters. I''ve seen some of them in my past life, and most of the summoned monsters can''t quickly follow their masters'' orders as soon as they are summoned.


    As soon as Lina noticed us, all the girls gathered in front of the portal on the other side and curiously looked at me through the portal. Don''t they feel cramped at all?


    "Sunny. You can go."


    I told Sunny to follow her master and Sunny walked on her own surprising everyone.


    "Look at that! The baby has grown! Look at how the baby is walking!"


    Somehow Victoria acted as if Sunny is a baby who just learn to walk.


    "Umm¡­ Victoria? Sunny is a nt. Not a baby. And why are you the one so excited about this?"


    "Shut up and let me enjoy the moment! By the way, how are you going to find Pear-y Fruit? Thest time you found it was by chance."


    "Let''s hope that by chance moment wille again."


    Then Candy asked me about Pear-y Fruit.


    "Roy, what is this Pear-y Fruit and how can that fruit help Lina?" Candy asked.


    "Just ask Victoria. This portal won''tst long so I can''t exin it to you here. By the way Lina, I told Sunny that I will buy her a good vase once I get home, but I think Sunny want you to be the one to choose it. Once you have returned to Cassau, go buy a vase that Sunny likes. I''ll pay for it once I get home."


    "Alright! We have another shopping time again and this time, it''s Roy''s treat!"


    "Good! There''s something I want to buy but I''m out of money at the capital! Thanks Roy!"


    "You''re such a great boyfriend! Bye, Roy!"


    It was Victoria who said it first, then Ang, and finally Ka. After that I heard the girls shouted in excitement while the portal is closing.


    "Wait, no! Just the vase! Don''t close the portal yet! Argh!"


    Before I finish speaking, the portal has already closed.


    While I was desperately pleading, Sonia appear in front of me.


    "Sonia! Tell them it''s not my treat! Only the vase!"


    "I''m here to say that there''s some toy I want to buy Daniel. So I can''t say that to them. But you can get money quick, right? Just go dive again or you can find some treasures in this new dungeon. Then you can open up a portal to Victoria, and throw all the treasures there for us to give Sam once we arrive at Cassau, and she will handle the rest." Sonia said.


    "That''s a good idea, but I still hate the fact that you''re just using my money!"


    Then without waiting for Sonia to leave, I walked back to the entrance of the dungeon.


    "Is that this dungeon''s end?" Sonia asked me while following me to the entrance.


    "No. That''s the entrance. But there''s some delicious eels I want to take home and let Lina cook for me. I''ll transport them to Victoria and have Ang freeze the eels so it will still be good even after a few weeks. I don''t know when I return after all."


    "Oh! That''s great! It''s a shame that I can''t eat after I be a ghost. Even Victoria who became a slime can eat although she doesn''t need food. I''ll tell them the news."


    And finally, Sonia left and I''m all by myself.


    Instead of continuing the exploration inside the dungeon, I ended up walking back to the entrance again. Those eels are delicious after all. Even though I only roasted it without any seasoning, it''s still taste good.


    I also don''t know if I can get eels after I reach the end of the dungeon, so I went back first before continuing. And with my portal to Victoria, as long as Victoria is with the others, I can transport many things to her.


    I dive back to the water at the entrance and caught ten eels with the same tactic. If Victoria is with me, I can get many more, but let''s be satisfied with this much.


    I just hope that all these eels won''t be gone by the time I returned.


    It took me about one hour since Ist talked with Sonia to get these ten giant eels. After each eel I got, the next eel is harder to get than the previous one. That''s why I only got ten of them even though I want more.


    I opened up the portal again to see the girls are¡­ barbecuing?


    "You''re barbecuing without me?!"


    "Hmm? Hey, Roy! Where''s the eels? We''ve been waiting for them for a while!" Victoria asked me for the eels.


    "You''re barbecuing without me?!"


    "Of course we are. It''s eels we''re talking about. The giant eels that live in a hole, right? It was a delicacy even in the past. Now, where are they?"


    "Where''s my share?"


    "Lina is roasting some beefs for you. Of course you don''t get any eels. Just cook it yourself."


    Victoria hand me the meal that Lina prepared for me while they are partying?


    "Here''s your frigging eels!"


    I threw the eels one by one into the portal and I quickly close the portal before I watched them having fun any longer.


    I entered the dungeon again while eating the meal Lina cooked.


    "This is delicious! But I hate how they''re having fun without me. But this is delicious!"

 Chapter 132 - No Biting!

    After finishing the meal Lina cooked for me, I continued exploring the dungeon. I''m all alone now, but I still hope to be able to conquer this dungeon. Though if things get tough, I will escape as fast as I can.


    My Divine Vision is still doesn''t work well in this dungeon. Maybe those goblins doesn''t have any vision ability. What a shame. At least I can still see the surrounding although the range is shorter than when I was outside. Still it''s good enough for me to protect myself from being surrounded.


    Although I should be vignt to the monsters here, my mind is still thinking of how the girls are having fun making a barbeque party. I wish they don''t finish all the eels I brought.


    Maybe I will make fun of them if they get fat¡­


    No. That''s a terrible idea. Just that one time I told them that I won''t get fat is enough for them to be extremely hostile to me. What if I told them they gotten fat? I''d be dead if I do that.


    So far, the enemy I''ve encountered after going alone are too weak for me. It''s even difficult for me to allow them to hit me on purpose. So when I encounter weak enemies, I just stopped doing anything and let them attack me once or twice, then I will kill them.


    It was so easy and makes my training boring. But if I take it easy, I will end up getting killed if I let down my guard against strong monsters.


    I think it''s better for me to speed run this dungeon and leave this ce. Being here alone is boring. Should I just call Victoria?


    I guess not. Although Victoria seems to be having fun, she''s still diligently hunting monsters. I hope so¡­


    Maybe I''ll try to befriend a monster here. It''s amon sense that only those with taming element canmunicate with monsters. But for other elements, they are unable tomunicate with monsters. Even for us summoners, we can onlymunicate slightly with our contracted monsters, but not to any wild monsters. But if the monsters I tried to talk to is at least as smart as Sunny, then we might be able tomunicate.


    If there''s a wild monster I can talk to, I hope it''s a cat type. I love cat! I want to have a pet cat since a long time ago. I like a small cat. They are cute. But a big cat is fine as well. Since there are more ce to rub them. But it''s impossible to let them inside the city.


    As I was thinking of having a pet, I saw a giant lizard ahead. Can that thingmunicate? Let''s try it.


    I approached the lizard calmly and when the lizard finally noticed me, I reach out my hand to it.


    "Hello, lizard. Don''t bite me, Ie in peace. Pleased to meet you. Wanna be my friend?"


    As I reach out my hand to the lizard, it tried to bite me even though I said no biting.


    "I SAID NO BITING!"


    With my hand still in the mouth of the lizard, I reached out my other hand and grabbed its mouth. Then with my full strength, I pulled the upper jaw and the lower jaw apart. It bleed profusely and die soon after.


    "Lizard is no good! I''d better find another monster."


    I left the ce and continued deeper into the dungeon. There I found another lizard. But this one is covered with fire.


    "Fire lizard?"


    I approached this lizard and tried to get along with it.


    "Hello. Ie in peace¡ªI SAID I COME IN PEACE SO NO BITING!"


    This one is a fail as well. I ripped its jaw like the one before, but this time, I felt stinging pain on my hand.


    "Ouch! Hmm¡­ so Aura doesn''t protect you from fire. Truly, Aura is only useful in physical fight."


    I learned something new again today. It should have been something I learned at first, but because the way I fight is by using hit and run tactic, and I keep dodging the enemy''s magic, I never realize it until today.


    Or is it because my Aura is still too weak? I''ll try asking Sonia.


    Soon, Sonia appear in front of me.


    "What''s up calling me again so soon?"


    "What? The party still not over?"


    "It''s already midnight so other than the one keeping watch, everyone else is asleep."


    "So it''s alreadyte? I don''t realize at all."


    When I was sending the eels to Victoria, it was still bright. But now, everyone has fallen asleep? Did I have too much fun on my own without me realizing it?


    "Anyway, why are you calling me thiste? I want to go back to sleep." Sonia said.


    "Does a ghost even need a sleep? I want to ask you about Aura. Does Aura protect you from magic?"


    "Are you stupid? If Aura can protect you from magic attack, Neither Victoria nor I will get killed."


    Oh, right. I forgot.


    "Oh! But there''s a legend told by our master. About the peak strength of Aura."


    "What is it?"


    A legend about Aura? It might just be a story to make children interested in learning Aura. But it''s still worth listening considering the Evil God is also written in children''s stories.


    "Well, there''s a legend of a Very strong Aura user. He is weak in magic, but extremely talented in Aura. Because of that, he became obsessed with be the strongest. Even stronger than Master level mages. Some say that his Aura sword can cut through magic."


    "Aura sword, huh?"


    "Yeah. It''s just Aura concentrated on your hand, materialized and shaped into a sword."


    "I know that. But it means if I can reach that height, I don''t need to look for ancient magic tool to kill this Evil God."


    "¡­you think you can reach that height?"


    "No. I think that''s too far for me. Creating Aura sword might be doable for me in the future, but to improve even further seems unlikely. Well, I''ll just keep training then. Who knows if I can be that strong?"


    I want to have the strength of Aura that can sh magic, but that seems impossible. If Sonia''s master, a real Aura user can''t reach it, what about me whose teachers are a ghost and a slime?


    "Alright, thanks for telling me this."


    "Yeah. Are we done?"


    "Well, since you don''t need to sleep, how about you apany me exploring this dungeon?"


    "¡­enjoy your loneliness." Sonia said as she started to disappear.


    "Wait! No!"


    How cruel! After being a ghost for a thousand years, she should have known the feeling of loneliness. Howe she be so cruel to me? Did I do something wrong to her? Other than the fact that I threatened to exorcise her? Oh, wait. That''s the reason why.


    And so I continued exploring the dungeon alone.


    I tried to greet all the monsters I encounter, but all of them want me dead so I just killed them all. Making me realize how rare monster with intellect is.


    But I found three of them. And they are all with me. First is Victoria and Blobby. Well, Blobby doesn''t actually has any intellect. She''s just following my order and transform into anything I want. But Victoria''s consciousness is with Blobby so that makes one.


    Next is Sunny. A nt type monsters who''s contracted to Lina the maid. Although she started weak, and was only useful to wrap her vines to someone, she''s getting stronger now.


    Lastly is Sonia. But that''s if I count ghost as monster. She''s Victoria''s fellow disciple. Someone who''s able to use Aura in the past before she died.


    I think it would be great if the next monster I contracted with is an intellectual ones. I''ll try contracting it the way summoners of the past did. By entering the portal to Monster''s World and find a powerful monster to be contracted.


    But I need to be stronger so I can freely explore the Monster''s World. That''s why I need training.


    "Oh, well. Let''s finish this dungeon fast and leave this ce as soon as possible."


    This time, I ran fast through the dungeon without caring about the monsters here. But if I find any strong monster, I''ll stop and try fighting them.


    I keep running all the way until my vision see a treasure chest at the end of the way. It''s located in a big room probably at the end of the dungeon.


    But there''s a monsters guarding that treasure chest. It''s a huge lizard, even bigger than any lizard here.


    Is that thing a dragon? I don''t see any wings so it might just be a gigantic lizard. And there''s an even bigger me surrounding its body than the previous fire lizard I encounter. I can feel the heat even though I haven''t entered that room.


    Let''s try approaching that lizard.


    "Greetings, huge lizard! Ie in peace¡ªoh my god! You breathe fire!"


    This time, no biting ident happened. But fire breathing ident did happen. This only mean one thing. Kill or run away!

 Chapter 133 - Escape From The Dungeon

    Damn it! I was just greeting it but that thing tried to burn me alive instead! Does that thing has no manner at all? Or its intellect is the same asmon monsters? One thing for sure, There''s no other choice but to kill that huge lizard or run away.


    It might be a good idea to distract that lizard for a while, find a chance to steal the treasure, and runaway. But I still haven''t seen what''s inside that treasure chest yet. I need to see if the inside of that chest is worth the risk or not.


    But I need to dodge this fire breath first.


    In a closed space, using a fire breath makes it difficult for me to dodge it. But I managed to do it by jumping to the ceiling and stuck my body there. The next time it shoot a fire breathe again, I might not be able to dodge it so I have to keep moving.


    I ran around the huge lizard while trying to see the inside of the treasure chest. What''s inside the chest is just one thing. A stick about 30cm in length, and the color is brown. I think it''s a magic wand. And the color brown should represent earth element magic. So this is probably a wand for earth element mage.


    While I was thinking about the wand inside the chest, the huge lizard attacked me again. This time, it used its tail covered with fire and swung it at me. Good thing I noticed it quickly. That''s how I managed to duck in time and the tail passed above my head.


    "That was close!"


    It''s impossible to win this fight without using magic. Especially when that lizard burnt the oxygen around me in this room. That''s why I no longer thought of this as training and started using magic to let myself get some air.


    But I need to see first if I can defeat this thing or not. I tried using Air Cannon to shot some rocks at it, but it doesn''t take any damage. I think it''s useless to use it.


    Then I keep moving until I find a perfect chance to pierce it with my spear. I found the opportunity to attack its head, and without hesitation I covered only my hands and my spear with Aura to make the most powerful piercing attack I can.


    If it takes some damage, then I can defeat it. But if there''s no damage, I''ll grab the item inside the treasure chest and run away from this dungeon as fast as possible.


    I thrust my spear between its two eyes and¡­ it barely took damage. Only 2cm of the spearhead pierced it. Even the scale on its forehead is this strong, and this thing has its body covered with such scales and they are keep burning.


    Yup, that''s it. Time to go.


    The lizard got angry because I attacked, and it started to breathe fire everywhere. I need to hurry to the treasure chest and run away with the treasure!


    I managed to pass the lizard and run quickly to the treasure chest. There''s no time to open it normally so I just kicked it hard enough to open the chest, then grabbed the wand and run back toward the entrance.


    I ignore all the monsters I encounter on the way back because the huge lizard is chasing after me. If that thing do a big fire breath in here, I''d be dead for sure since there''s only a straight way to the exit from here. That''s why I keep running and ignoring the monsters I see, and even monsters that tried to block the way.


    As I managed to get some distance from the lizard, it tried to use its breath to kill me. But there''s still some more distance until I can enter theke. I''ve got to run faster!


    I keep running with my full speed, but its fire breath is faster than me. I hope I can still make it in time!


    I can see the water already, but the fire is right behind me. I can feel the heat on my back. It''s impossible to escape unscathed.


    In desperation, I made an air barrier behind me filled with Carbon Dioxide. The fire stopped for a while, but in less than a second, the fire managed to engulf it in the fire. I never thought that the lizard''s lung is so powerful. But at least I managed to gain some time to dive into the water.


    I dive into the water as I felt my shoes is burning. Just a secondte and my legs will be burned.


    I swum away before that lizard decided to boil the water as well. Of course I grabbed two eels on the way out.


    I barely escaped death, but I can only feel relieved once I get pass the waterfall. I swim to the shore carrying my spear that impaled two eels and finally able to rest.


    "Huff¡­ huff¡­ I think that''s enough for dungeon exploration. I will never enter a dungeon alone ever again!"


    If I have someone else with me, not Sunny, but someone whom at least reached intermediate level like Ang, Candy, or Shirley, I might be able to find a way to kill that huge lizard. Going alone is a suicide.


    I know that I always said that fighting in a closed space is better for me, but I like to fight outside more. After all, in a closed space, there are only few escape route. While in the outside, as long as I get far enough, I already escaped from the enemy.


    Iid my back on the ground and see the sun is rising.


    "I''ll take a rest here for a moment. Then I''ll cook these eels and go back into training. And next time I encounter goblins or other weak monsters, I won''tin. They are much better than monster that can kill me."


    After resting for about one hour, I made a fire and roast the eels. I eat half of the eel, then the rest I saved forter.


    "I think it''s time to go to a city before continuing my training. It''s hard staying in the wild barefooted."


    My shoes are burned because of the huge lizard and can''t be worn anymore. I can just cover my feet with Aura, but that won''t help me from the weather.


    ...¡­.


    Meanwhile, the girls have just woken up after barbeque partyst night.


    "Let''s have some more before we leave!"


    Ang requested Lina to cook another eel before they continue their journey.


    "I think that''s enough. Any more than that and Master will say that we gained weight." Lina shook her head as she refused Ang''s idea.


    "Ugh¡­ I guess you''re right. Who would have thought that these scary looking eels are so delicious? And we even finished half of them yesterday."


    There are eight of them travelling together. Ang, Ka, Sophie, Lina, Victoria, Sonia, Candy, and Shirley. Not counting the flower monster. Victoria and Sonia doesn''t need to eat, but Victoria still choose to eat because her sense of taste still works. There''s no way Victoria would leave a delicious dish alone.


    But still, for seven girls to eat five giant eels on their own is still too much. Even Roy only eat half of the eel. Well, it was because he saw something disgusting. Normally, one big eel is just enough for him to fill his stomach. Three of them if he wants to eat until he''s full. But hispanions turn out to be big eater as well. Five eels in one night for seven people can make them fat.


    "It''s fine, right? We can burn the fat by walking. By the way, where are we going today?"


    Before anyone can answer Shirley''s question, a group of bandits approaching them.


    "Woohoo! There''s a lot of girls here!"


    There are about fifteen men approaching the girls. But the girls were not scared at all.


    "Well, we could also burning fat by beating them up." Ka said.


    "Wait, I''ll try to attack them first. I want to see how much people I can defeat in one shot."


    Ang moved forward and reached out her hand.


    "What is it, girl? Do you want to surrender yourse-"


    Before the guy finished his words, he and five other men were frozen by Ang''s ice magic.


    "Six of them? I feel like I''m more powerful now, but I expected more than six." Said Ang.


    "That''s still a good number though. And our training really bear fruits. I also feel stronger even though I just practicing magic control." Candy who is the strongest among them say so.


    "The-they are too strong! Let''s retreat!"


    "No you don''t!"


    Victoria appear from behind them and killed three of them. Leaving only six of them behind.


    "Now there are six of you left. Now it''s fair, right? Six on six? Lina also can see how strong Sunny is now and everyone has a chance to burn their fat." Victoria said.


    "Sigh¡­ I guess we always encounter men like this." Shirley sighed.


    "Well, it''s obvious when we''re all beautiful girls gathering together. Everyone will think that we are easy prey. Just get used to it." Ka said.


    Then the girls pick their opponents and fought them one on one. Telling the men that those who can defeat their opponent can leave alive.


    In the end, the girls defeated the men one-sidedly. The girls are growing stronger. Even the two who are still in beginner level, Ka and Sophie, are about to breakthrough to intermediate level soon.


    Once they all returned to Cassau, the only beginner level mage in the group are Lina who stayed behind on purpose, and Roy himself.

 Chapter 134 - Visiting A New City

    It has been two days since I left that dungeon. I have been spending my time trying to use the wand I recently gotten, but there was no progress. Maybe it''s because I have no aptitude to the element of this wand.


    Maybe I''m right that this is an earth element magic wand. I''ll just keep it for now and when I return to Cassau, I''ll give it to Sam so her appraiser can appraise it. If it''s an earth element wand like I thought, then it''s better if I give it to Ka. As for Ang, she already has a lot of attack magic in her arsenal.


    Right now, I''m in Hirugas city. My main goal for entering this city? It''s to buy a new pair of shoes. Even though I can cover my feet with Aura, being barefooted all the time is no good. Many kind of illness can happen just by walking barefooted in the wild. That''s what I learned as a doctor.


    About this city I''m in¡­ it''s one of the cities that will be attacked by a stampede along with Melk. That''s why I''ve seen several people I know. They are all the winners of the audition who won Albert''s trust. There are also several people who has exploding devices in their mouth, but I won''t make any move since Albert''s agents are already here.


    But I can still help a bit. I''ll just grab one of Albert''s men and tell him I''m Ninja, then I will point my fingers at those who have explosive devices inside their mouth. That''s good enough.


    Good thing I tried to memorize people''s faces. If it was me in the past, I won''t bother remembering other people''s faces other than those I meet most, or some famous people. Just like how I don''t remember the face of the nodding guy. Is he well? Is he nodding at someone else? Does he not remember me? I hope you''re doing well, nodding guy. Unless you''re secretly member of the cult. If you are, please die.


    I went into a shop and buy me a nice pair of boots. It feels better than myst one. As for its color, it doesn''t matter since it will be mud-colored soon.


    After buying a pair of boots and equip them right away, I left the store and look for a face I know. I then grabbed one audition winner and point him the members of the cults nearby.


    "Hey, you!"


    "Hmm? Who are you and what do you want?" The man asked.


    "I''m Ninja. You''ve seen me at the audition." I whispered to him so no one can hear.


    "You''re Ninja? But what audition?"


    "For you, it''s an interview. But for me and Albert, we called it audition. I wear a mask that day so it''s normal for you to not know me."


    "Oh, you''re Ninja. I never thought that you are so young. Can I help you?"


    The man''s attitude changed after I told him who I was. Albert or Candy should have tell the winners about the fact that I''m Albert''s friend and the one who inform him about the cult. But they never told the winners about meing from the future.


    "I''m leaving this city right now and I want you to apany me to the gate so I can show you some people who belong to the cult. I''ll left the decision on what to do with them to you."


    I have finished taking care of my business in this city. I just need to buy a pair of boots, and some supply for the rest of my journey. As for resting, I can do that in the wild as long as I find a good location. I don''t need to waste my time staying at an inn for that.


    "Are you busy today?" I asked


    "Not at all. I''m here as a hunter and I just finished my request today. I''ll follow you to the gate. By the way, in case you forgotten my name, its¡­"


    "No need. It''s already difficult for me to remember your face. I''ll just end up forgetting about your name. And it''s not like we''ll meet again in the future."


    "¡­okay"


    He seems dejected when I said I don''t need an introduction. Well, that''s fine. After all, in case we meet again in the future, I might have forgotten your face.


    "I hope your memory is better than mine since I don''t want to repeat if again. Let''s go! By the way, the old man you speak to before is one of them."


    "What?! So our guess is right."


    He seems surprised when he heard about it. But saying that their guesses is correct meant that he was just trying to get some info from the old man.


    "I''ll tell you about everyone with explosive devices inside their mouth within our sight so there might be some people that I missed."


    "So you really do have a see-through vision! I''m so envious of your ability! I thought that Candy was just speak nonsense. By the way, I heard that she''s your girlfriend now. Is that true?"


    "Yeah she is. Why?"


    "Nothing. Just many men crying after hearing that. Both Candy and Wendy are the goddesses in the agency, you know?"


    "I see. Well, just don''t try to flirt with her or I wille to you, okay? And the two girls who were just passing us are members of the cult."


    I continued pointing the people who are members of the cult.


    "Are you in a hurry? If not, I can pretend to show you around the city while you tell me all the members of the cult we passed. That way, we will find most of their members in this city." The man suggested to walk around the city.


    "Sure. Let''s do it. And that man with one eye is also a member."


    The man whose name I don''t know took me around the city while I told him about all the members of the cult I find.


    "That girl with a peg leg is a member."


    "That bearded auntie is a member."


    "That one who ate banana by eating it from the middle first is a member. You know from how she ate that banana. She''s totally evil."


    "That man wearing a thong is a member. Sometime I wish I''m blind."


    "That granny selling flowers is a member. But be careful because she has the strongest muscle I''ve ever seen other than me and some people I have met. I think she could be in the top ten. Scary¡­"


    "That hooded man sitting on the park whose face can''t be seen but actually is crying at the moment, he''s a member of the cult. He must have stubbed his toe from how his toenail broke. That''s why you should always pick a good boots."


    I pointed at everyone who has explosive device inside their mouth to the man I''m with.


    "¡­umm, thank you for telling me but I think somements are unnecessary. I mean some of them are something that only you can see."


    "You think being able to see-through objects is a blessing? Think again. Still envious of this?"


    I still remember how he said that he''s envious of this vision. Let''s tell him how much of a curse this ability is. Although most of the time it''s a blessing, the things I''ve seen¡­ is too much for a mere mortal.


    "I guess that''s all I''ve seen over here. There are some people inside buildings that haven''te out so you need to judge them properly whether they are from the cult or not. And so far I can tell if someone is a member of the cult by looking inside their mouth, but I believe there are other members who doesn''t have them inside their mouth. My guess is that they are the higher-ups of the cult." I exined.


    "I see. I''ll keep that in mind."


    "Do you think the n will work? Letting the stampede happen and you can kill all the monsters while evacuating all the citizens?" I asked the man.


    Although it was Albert''s n and I had already let him do whatever he want, I''m still worried about letting the stampede happen.


    "Yes. Most of the agents here works as hunters. We also take care of all powerful monsters nearby so when the stampede happen, there will only be weak monsters that even E-rank hunter can defeat. Let''s hope the reinforcement his majesty will get us to help evacuate the citizens are capable."


    "Don''t worry about it. If they are still training after I left them, and I believe that they are, evacuating the citizens is something easy for them. Albert said that he will meet them and auditioned them soon. As for you, the monsters and the citizens are taken care of, but be careful of the member of the cult. I suggest some of you will pretend as a thief to rob and kill those people. Pretend you''re stealing, but your main goal is to kill them. And try to aim for a normal criminal as well even if they are not from the cult. That way, it won''t make them think that we are aiming for them." I suggested an idea for him.


    "That sounds like a good idea. I''ll discuss it with the one in charge of this area. But that mean we willck manpower if we do everything." The man seems pondering about it.


    "Well, that was just a suggestion. Whether you do it or not, I''ll leave the decision to you guys. I''ll be leaving now. Take care."


    I shook my hand with the audition winner whose name I don''t remember and leave the city.


    Now my next destination is home. Let''s take another detour and see what I can obtain. I hope I can find a Pear-y Fruit for Lina. And for me in case I reached Advanced level.

 Chapter 135 - Im The Weakest

    About five days since I left Hirugas City, I''ve decided it''s time to go home. I''m so lonely.


    I traveled from Hirugas to Cassau directly, but whenever I see a dungeon I would enter them. All the dungeons have been long discovered and the treasures inside are scarce. Some of the dungeons even doesn''t have any treasures since hunters often enter and fight for the treasures. The only thing left for me are magic stones which I sent all of them to Victoria to carry.


    But yesterday when I sent some magic stones to her via portal, Victoria told me that she will separate herself from the group and hunt monsters on her own. Which means if I get more treasures, valuables, or delicious monsters, I have to bring them with me.


    And today, I found out the reason why Victoria left the group. Just when I''m preparing for lunch, Sonia appears to inform me about the girls'' whereabouts.


    "Sonia. It''s been a while."


    "Yeah. How have you been?" Sonia asked.


    "Lonely."


    "I bet."


    "How''s everyone?" I asked about the others'' condition.


    "Ruby''s group is doing well. Ian decided to be a hunter to help us build a n quicker. Especially when you''re in the group. You will end up trying to dy building the n as much as possible so you don''t have to take Albert''s requests, right?"


    "Maybe you''re right, maybe you''re wrong. How''s the kids?"


    "Hannah and Daniel yed a lot with Lana. Daniel even read Lana a book even though he can barely read. It has been decided that most of the time, Ruby and Ian will take care of Lana. They say that they are already too old to have their own child so it''s a good idea for those two to act as Lana''s grandparent." Sonia replied.


    "That''s good. How about Albert?"


    "He told me that there have been several attempt to probably kidnap n. But ever since your so-called audition help him gain more trusted allies, the security in the pce has been increased. Especially after knowing the enemy and what they capable of."


    Yeah. Even a noble''s wife in the capital was secretly a member of the cult so I bet there are still some of them in the pce that I don''t know of. But I guess Mustache and other agents are doing well.


    "Albert also said that he will go to Mellian in three days to meet Hill and the other. He said he will interview the noble there first and then Hill and his men so he know if he can trust them or not." Sonia continued.


    "How about the girls?"


    "We just arrived at Cassau. That''s why I''m here. Also we are getting Sunny a new vase and other necessities by using some the profit that you gain from the leftovers that Sam sold."


    I guess that''s why Victoria told me she''s leaving the group. The other have arrived at home after all. But there''s one thing Sonia told me that''s bugging me.


    "Those necessities are unnecessary!"


    How could they just use someone else''s money freely?


    "Toote. Money has been spent."


    "How much?! How much did they spent my money?!"


    "¡­ I think it''s better for you to go diving after you return"


    Those are my money! My money! How could they do that to me?


    "Roy. This is what it meant to have girlfriends. Your money is not yours anymore. Your belongings doesn''t belong to just you anymore. I tell you this because I was a girlfriend of many." Sonia said telling her experience of taking the wealth of men she seduced.


    "I still don''t like it, okay?!"


    After few moment of silence for my money and all the things that I owned be co-owned, Sonia continued speaking.


    "By the way, right now you''re the weakest in magic level along with Lina. Ka has breakthrough to intermediate level in her healing magic, while Sonia has improved in her lightning magic. And Ang even already improved her fire element into intermediate level. As for Lina, if she want to, she can let Sunny fight and improve her level. Which mean you are the weakest among us in magic level. Of course not counting the nonbatant."


    "That''s great! It means that their effort bear fruits! I need to go back to Cassau to be able to cultivate using the air element magic stone I made. Are they done yet?"


    It has been a while since I tried making them. But when I checked on them thest time, the magic stones haven''t change their element into air element at all. But I think it should be one soon.


    "Yes they have. You shoulde home soon so you can cultivate." Sonia said.


    "I think I''ll be home in a few days. Don''t spend all money before I return."


    "¡­no promise." Sonia said as she disappear.


    "Hey!"


    They still want to spend my money again? What are they spending so much money for? Decoration for house?


    I quicken my pace so I can get home faster and stop them from spending my money. But whenever I encounter any monster, I would stop and greet them first before I killed it or let them escape.


    There are several monsters who seem to understand mynguage. I think that''s why they choose to leave me alone when I said "Ie in peace". But the number of monsters who doesn''t understand is a lot more.


    I also found some dungeon which I entered and explore it for a while. But if it takes more than one day to explore the dungeon, I''ll leave.


    The progress of strengthening my Aura seem to be going well. But I think it''s too slow considering I only practiced against weak monsters. The strongest monster I practiced with are those with simr strength as hobgoblins. Any stronger than that then I killed them without practicing.


    But now, when I''m covering my whole body with Aura and got hit by a hobgoblin''s attack, I don''t feel as much pain as before. So I think I can practice against monsters a bit stronger than that. But as for the giant fire lizard that burnt my shoes, I think it''s still impossible without Victoria.


    Should I summon her? She said she was leaving on her own so I guess she''s working her best. Even she want to be able to stay in control forever and not let Blobby take charge of her body. Having a shared consciousness must be tough.


    I still wonder today what kind of monster a ck slime is. I''ve never seen any other ck slime other than Blobby even in my past life. And what kind of slime able to return someone into the past? There must be an answer inside Blobby''s real consciousness. That''s why I need to increase the level of my summoning level.


    The increase of level for summoning mage doesn''t seem to be much. I was only told that our summoning speed be faster. But one of my patient in the past who was a summoner told me that her contracted monster also slightly getting stronger than before she leveled up. She used to think that once she leveled up, she would kill her contracted monster and try to make a contract with a stronger one.


    But when she leveled up, not just her summon getting stronger. Even themunication between her and her summon be smoother. Her summon be able to understand difficult order. That''s why she became reluctant to kill her summon.


    Maybe if I level up, I canmunicate with Blobby''s real consciousness which I never know about. Victoria also doesn''t know about the real Blobby, but she somehow understand Blobby''s power to return back in time. Maybe Blobby also has other power than shapeshifting.


    While I continue my travel, I encounter an orc. It should be an easy win, but I never tried fighting it without using magic or without Victoria by my side. And I never let it hit me even once before. Let''s see if it''s stronger than a hobgoblin or not.


    "Let''s have a fight, pig face!"


    This time, I don''t bother try to see if the orc understand me or not. I just asked for a fight with it.


    The orc then swung its club at my head which I blocked with both my arms crossed above my head. Of course I used Aura to cover my whole body, not just my arms.


    And the result is I blocked the attack but I got pushed down a bit. I guess orc''s strength is only slightly stronger than that of hobgoblin. Which mean this is a good opponent for practice.


    This time, like usual, I tried fighting it unarmed, without using my spear or any kind of weapon. I pretend to swing my fist slow so the orc can dodge it and the fight willst longer and I can get hit more.


    Wait, no! That''s not my intention! I want to get hit, but I don''t want to get hit! I mean I''m willing to get hit so my Aura can be stronger, and not because I''m a pervert!


    There''s no way I want to get hit on purpose because I love to get hit! I did it because it''s a practice!


    After a few bout, the orc became tired and move slower. I think it''s time to end it so I threw abination punches and kicks and defeat it.


    After defeating it, I don''t feel good at all.


    "Why is Aura user''s practice has to be so perverted?!"


    I think about it every day since I began my journey.

 Chapter 136 - Its A Net! Its A Stocking! Its A Fishnet Stocking!

    I found a dungeon again on the way back to Cassau. It has been two days since the girls are home.


    This dungeon is one that has been discovered for a while which means that almost all of the treasures here have been looted. As for me, since there''s nothing here to block my vision, I found one treasure chest that hasn''t been found.


    There''s a party of hunters that has been stalking me ever since I entered this dungeon, but I pretend to not notice them.


    A party of six hunters stalking one person? How shameless.


    I ignore them while I continue walking through the path where thest remaining treasure chest is.


    I heard that in time, the dungeon can regenerate the treasure chests inside of it, so even if all the treasures has been taken, one day there will be more appear.


    Maybe the party who''s following me knows that and think that if they follow me, they will reach the treasure. Well, they''re right.


    I''ll lead them to where the treasure chest is and if I think that the treasures inside is not anything good after seeing it with Divine Vision, I''ll just leave. But if it''s something good, I''ll take it. If they tried to rob me, I''ll kill them. But if they want to negotiate, I''ll listen what they want to offer.


    When I''m about fifty meters from the treasure, my Divine Vision finally able to see through the chest and shows me what treasure is inside of the chest.


    It was still too far for me to decide what it is so I walked closer and I found out what it is.


    Is that a? Yes!


    Is that a stocking? Yes!


    Is that a fis stocking? Yes! Why?!


    Why is the treasure a fis stocking? Is this some kind of magic equipment? There''s no way I would want to wear it!


    Although I already know what''s inside the treasure chest, I still approached it out of curiosity. The stalkers haven''t found out about the treasure yet, but I don''t know what they will do once they find it. It might be interesting knowing that two of them are girls. Maybe I can see one of them wearing the stocking.


    As I walked closer to the treasure chest, the party following me finally have the treasure chest in their sight ande out of their hiding spot.


    "Stop right there! We''ll take the treasure!"


    Is this how they want things to go? Stopping me from taking the treasure and took them from right in front of me? That''s cute.


    If I hadn''t took the path with no monsters, they would realize how strong I am and retreat before offending me. Well, this is the reason why I choose the long way to this ce instead of the shortcut.


    This should be interesting.


    "You want the treasure? Then please take it. I just want to see how good that treasure I let go is. Just let me take a peek when one of you using it." I said.


    "You just want to let us take the treasure without a fight?" One of them asked.


    "Fighting is tiring. I''m just curious if the things inside the treasure chest is a magic tool, what kind of effect do they have? You too, right? You want to know how good the thing inside is. If it''s useless, then I''llugh at how you''re trying to take it from me. If it''s useful, I''ll cry because I let go of something so good. Just let me see the effect of the thing inside the chest if it''s a magic tool."


    I already know what''s inside, and seeing that there are two girls in the group, I want to see it worn so badly. They are not as beautiful as any girls in my group, but they are still considered beauties. That''s why I hope one of the two girls will wear the fis stocking. Just please don''t let it be the guys.


    While I''m thinking of it, I tried using Divine Vision on them and I see that two men have explosive devices inside their mouth. Is this how they recruit new members? By approaching them and join their party, then told them to join the cult? Maybe.


    Should I kill just two of them or kill everyone? Well, the answer is obvious. Fis stocking first.


    "Well, if it''s just seeing then it''s fine right?"


    One man who seems to be their leader said that to the other party members. This one doesn''t has explosive device inside his mouth. Maybe the two who have them are their new party members.


    Everyone nodded in agreement and approached the treasure chest and opened it.


    Then the leader picked the thing inside the chest up for everyone to see.


    "Fis stocking?"


    "Awesome! Now your promise! Let one of the two girls in your party wear it!"


    I am not pretending that I''m not interested. They have made a promise so they should keep their promise.


    "But¡­" The leader looked at the two girls.


    "You''re the leader so you should be smart enough at least. This guy entered the dungeon alone while there are six of us. Which mean he''s confident with his strength. We shouldn''t make him our enemy." Said the other man who doesn''t have explosive device in his mouth.


    I think the two cult members have an agreement to not talk unless it''s necessary. They haven''t speak any words at all but none of them disagree with having a girl wear the stocking. After I got out of this dungeon, I''ll snipe them from afar. Without Victoria, my sniping power is lessened, but as long as I used bigger stones, I think I can kill them.


    "I''ll wear it. I''m wearing a skirt after all. It''s easier for me. You don''t mind, right?"


    One girl is wearing a skirt while the other is wearing pants. The one wearing skirt suggested to wear it and also winked at the leader. I see¡­


    I asked the one who agreed with me to keep their promise.


    "Is that what I think it is?"


    "Yes. Our leader is just so dense. He never noticed her trying to flirt with her all the time. It might be her chance to seduce him with the stocking." He whispered.


    "What about your other friends there? They haven''t said anything at all." I asked him about the two cult member.


    "We just met them today. They are newbies and our leader thought to guide them for their first exploration." This time, he no longer whispered and spoke in normal volume.


    "By stalking me since I entered the dungeon you mean?"


    As I replied to him, he and the other men made a shocked expression. While the girls are nowhere around us as the skirt wearing girl is changing. Well, it''s not like I can''t see them.


    "You noticed?"


    "If you choose to fight instead of asking, it will be you guys who died." I pretend to be strong even though I''m just a beginner level.


    "I see. No wonder you dare to enter dungeon alone. Sorry about that." The leader apologized for his action.


    "It''s fine. After all if I got the treasure, I don''t think I will wear it. And I can see something good."


    Then the girlse out. All the men here awed by the appearance of the girl with fis stocking.


    "How is it?" The girl asked the leader.


    "Umm¡­ it looks good on you." The leader answered shyly while his face became so red.


    "Thank you!" The girl replied happily.


    "Thank you as well for showing us something great." I sped both my hands and bowed to the girl. Then the guy I chatted with followed suit.


    "I thank you very much."


    As for the other two, the still doesn''t speak at all. But their eyes are locked to the girl''s thighs.


    "Seems like those two will get closer from now on." I whispered to the man next to me.


    "Yeah. It''s just today that I found out his taste is in fis stocking." He replied.


    "It''s annoying to see how dense our leader is. Finally they will make some progress. By the way, howe you two be so close?"


    The other girl suddenly approached us joined our conversation.


    "You''re not going to those guys?" I asked the girl and pointed at the two silent guys.


    "Somehow I feel like it''s a bad idea to get close to them. They are dangerous. I said I disagree to let them follow us, but our leader is both dense and naive. That''s why he let them follow us. I need to watch them in case they tried to do anything to us."


    Her instinct told her that those two are dangerous. But why is she talking to me?


    "What about me? Am I not dangerous enough for you?"


    "You''re not dangerous. You''re just a pervert."


    "Hey! It''s not like I know what''s inside the chest!" I lied.


    "Look! Those two are whispering something to each other!"


    The girl said and the three of us looked at the two men while there''s a couple who doesn''t realize anything.


    I eavesdropped on them and I know what they''re looking for. They''re aiming for the fis stocking if it''s something good and nned to kill everyone here. I guess that mean no one other than those two is a member of the cult.


    I think I''ll stay around with these guys for now. They seem like good guys.


    More importantly, what is the secret behind that fis stocking?

 Chapter 137 - Its All Because Of The Stocking

    I don''t like how I found the enemy just before I returned home. But I guess I just can''t let this thing be after knowing that they''re also nning to kill me.


    They must have told¡­ I forgot to ask their names. Well, these two cult members must have told this party that they are weaker than their actual strength. That''s why the leader of this party let down his guard.


    But one of his party member, the girl who wears pants, keep watch on the two. She must have a good instinct. And the fact that she''s approaching me means that I''m a good person. That must be it!


    "Rose. You said those two are dangerous, but why are you approaching this guy? Is he not dangerous?" The man who chatted with me asked the girl whose name is Rose.


    "I do think that he''s a pervert, but not a dangerous one. Well, you''re also a pervert so I thought if you two can get along, I think he''s fine."


    Hmm¡­ can''t deny that.


    So her name is Rose and his is Kite, huh? It should be easy to remember but I make no promise.


    "By the way, what''s your name?" Rose asked me.


    "Roy. I apologize firsthand because I suck at remembering people''s name so I might forget yours."


    "That''s fine. I''m Rose and he''s Kite. The two who keep flirting is Joshua and Josephine."


    "And I think that girl called Josephine will wear that stocking from now on." I said.


    "Hah! After trying many times to seduce him, it was a fis stocking that make him noticed her? Just how dense is that guy seriously?" said Kite.


    So the party consist of a dense leader, a girl who falls in love with the dense creature, a girl with good instinct, and a pervert. Then there are two cult members here nning to kill us all.


    "Alright, you two keep watch on those two guys who''s whispering to each other."


    "What are you going to do?" Kite asked.


    "The reason why I''m still here."


    Then I walked to the two couple who keep flirting and ignoring us all.


    "It''s so nice to see you and your girlfriend getting along, but don''t forget that I''m here to see what kind of effect that stocking has. So, can you test it?" I said to the couple.


    "I''m not her boyfriend!" Joshua said.


    "Deny all you want but that''s not what everyone here thinks. And if you don''t like her you need to be clear about it. I don''t think you don''t like her though. Anyway, pour your magic to that stocking."


    After telling the girl to try pouring her magic to the stocking, she paused for a while. Then she tried pouring her magic to the stocking and test what kind of effect it has. Everyone now is looking at her curiously.


    "How is it?" I asked Josephine.


    "I feel¡­ warm?"


    "Only on your legs or your whole body?"


    "It''s¡­ my whole body." She replied.


    "Josephine, are you okay?" Joshua asked her condition.


    "I''m fine."


    A stocking that keep your body warm. I think that''s all it is. Maybe it''s some kind of protection magic.


    "Anyone has aptitude for ice magic please make some ice."


    Then Joshua walked forward and made a ball of ice.


    I took the ice ball from him and gave it to Josephine. The ice then melt in an instant. I then touched the water and feel the temperature is normal. Not hot or cold at all.


    For an ice to be melted in an instant, I thought the temperature of the water will be hot. Maybe it''s not something that makes cold things hot, but make the temperature of anything it touched to normal.


    "Let''s try with fire."


    "I can do that. Hngggh! I can''t do that." Josephine volunteer to do it herself but somehow there''s no firee out.


    "Then my guess should be correct. It''s a magic tool that make anything it touched to be normal temperature. My guess is about the normal temperature of human''s body. It''s good if you''re fighting in cold ce or hot ce, or if your enemy is either ice mage or fire mage. But if you''re an ice mage or fire mage yourself, you won''t be able to cast any magic."


    Then I grabbed a piece of paper from my pocket and hold it out.


    "Is there any other fire mage here? Burn this paper and I''ll try touching the fire to her body."


    Without saying anything, Rose shoot a fireball and the paper is on fire. She has a good aim.


    Then I let Josephine touched it and she doesn''t feel hot at all. Which mean that fis stocking is the best equipment to protect you against hot and cold. Now I really want that. I don''t think I will wear it but I guess I can give it to Ka or Sophie. But since I promised to let these guys have it, I won''t take it from them. Unless they do it willingly.


    Just as we finished our experiment, the two cult members attacked us out of nowhere. One guy aiming at Rose and Kite while the other is targeting the couple and me.


    Because they know the effect of the fis stocking, he used a powerful earth magic, Earth Lance at us. But I managed to grab both Joshua and Josephine and dodged it.


    As for Rose and Kite, both of them have been vignt to the two so they dodged it well.


    "Earth Lance? And this strong as well. You are an advanced level?" Joshua asked the attacker.


    "Yes. Now we can''t have anyone has that powerful equipment other than us so please die for the sake of our god!"


    But before he casted any magic, I moved. I grabbed his head and smash it to the wall. He died in one hit.


    "No!" the other attacker shouted.


    "Yes! By the way, before I checked the inside of his mouth, I want to ask if you have explosive device in your mouth or not." I already know the answer, but I think it''s a good idea to let other knows of their existence as well.


    "How did you know?"


    "On my journey, it''s not the first time someone has explosive in their mouth. I know that because one person I decapitate spit it out after his head is rolling. Who are you and why are you guys attacking hunters? I don''t think anyone with tools for killing themselves is good people."


    Of course I lied. Normally, even if I decapitate someone''s head, it''s impossible for something stuck so hard on the back of their teeth to fall of easily. But I guess he''s too panicked to notice it. And it''s not like anyone here have ever seen a decapitated head before. I also said I killed several of them so he might think that he''s too weak to fight against me.


    "Hmm¡­ I guess it''s time for me to die. Everything is for the sake of our true god!" He said as he tried to pour magic into the explosive device.


    "Wait! Before you kill yourself, tell me what should I call those explosive device in your mouth is!" I keep calling it explosive device but I don''t know what they called it.


    "You mean the HGB?" The man paused and replied my question.


    "HGB? Seriously?"


    "It''s from ''Head Goes Boom''. Now if you''d excuse me, I''m going to die here."


    After he excuse himself, he explode his own head in front of all of us. The brain of that guy sttered everywhere but I used the corpse of the guy I killed to protect me.


    Then I insert my finger to the corpse mouth and picked the HGB.


    "So you''re called Head Goes Boom. What a stupid name."


    I activated the HGB and throw it away quickly. It explode soon after.


    "What kind of cult are those people in? They''re not afraid to kill themselves." Joshua asked.


    "You''re asking that now? Not when you naively decided to have them join your group? You almost cost your party and your new girlfriend their lives!"


    I can''t tell a na?ve person about the cult. He might alert everyone from the cult. So I guess I just teach him to be wary of other people.


    "That''s¡­ sorry."


    "Sorry? I liked you because you''re kind and strong! But now! I don''t think I can stay with someone who might end up having me dead because of his naivety! I''ll leave this party as of today! And here''s your fis stocking you like so much!"


    Josephine throw the fis stocking from who know when she take it off and throw it to Joshua. Then she leave right away.


    "Roy, thank you for your help. Joshua, I will leave together with Josephine. So this is our goodbye." Rose chased after Josephine after saying goodbye to us.


    "I''ll stay with you. I''m your childhood friend after all. If I''m not around, you would have died many times. But this time, you need to discuss with me before you make any decision, okay?"


    "Kite¡­ thank you for staying with me. It''s all because of this fis stocking! Here! You can have this!"


    Joshua throw the stocking at me and I grabbed it. It''s still warm.


    "By the way, it''s not the stocking''s fault. It''s whoever decided to have those two followed you. Which means you. Next time, if you haven''t died because of your naivety yet, think carefully before letting strangers join you. I''ll be taking this stocking then."


    The three of us then leave the dungeon together. We''re going to the same exit after all.


    How could someone let go a powerful equipment so easily? Is he stupid?


    Then at the exit, the two girls are still there.


    "What are you two doing here?" I asked.


    "We don''t know the way home."


    That''s hrious. Leaving first and then waiting for the other to ask the way? That''s the first time I''ve seen someone doing it.


    "Josephine¡­" Joshua tried to talk to Josephine.


    "Don''t talk to me!"


    I guess she''s still angry. Well, I don''t care what they''re going to do.


    "Where are you going?" I asked them.


    "I think Joshua and I will return to our base. What about you?" Kite replied then asked Rose.


    "The both of us born in Cassau so we thought of going there. But we don''t know the way." Rose replied.


    "I''m going to Cassau as well. It''s straight that way, but if you want to go through the main road, it''s over there." I pointed the location of Cassau and the main road is to Rose.


    "You''re not gonna tell us to follow you? We''re going the same way." Rose asked.


    "I''m going straight to Cassau and probably encounter some monsters on the way. Your friend need to calm herself first before going into danger so I suggest you go through the main road which is safer." I exined.


    "Alright, thanks. Since we''re going to the same city, we might meet again so see youter!"


    Rose left to the main road together with Josephine. Then Kite and Joshua also left leaving me alone again.


    That''s fine. I don''t feel so lonely anymore especially after watching some drama.


    Now it''s time to go home.

 Chapter 138 - Appraising The Wand And The Stocking

    Finally I''m back at Cassau! The first ce I''ll go is obviously my home first. I have been away from Daniel too often and too long. Did I really take him in so other people can take care of him?


    Good thing back at Hirugas I bought some candies for the kids that can''t be found here. I hope that''s enough to make them happy.


    "I''m home!"


    I said as I entered the house. Then Sonia appears in front of me and Ian and the others greet me.


    "Wee home, Roy. How was your journey?" Sonia asked.


    "It was good. But I don''t want to do that too often. Maybe once in a while." I replied.


    "Master, please have some tea."


    There at the table, Lina somehow has prepared a tea for me even though I have just arrived. When did she made it? Or does she know I will return today?


    "Thanks, Lina. I missed your tea. Hmm? It''s sweeter than thest time." I said.


    "After I returned, I practiced more with the help of Ian. How is it?"


    "I like this one better. You have certainly improved."


    I missed to see how she blushed after every praise I gave her like this.


    Then I see something that wasn''t there before in the corner of the room. It''s a vase with a small


    "Is that Sunny''s new vase?" I asked Lina.


    "Yes. She enjoyed it very much. Now that she can change her size, she used her small size when she''s indoor."


    I looked at Sunny who waved her leaf at me showing her satisfaction with the vase she got. With my money.


    "Where''s the other?"


    "Daniel, Hannah, and Lana are napping in the same room. Ever since we return home, those three are inseparable." Ruby replied.


    "It''s great that Hannah love acting as their older sister. Now she has more friends to y with. Daniel also loves Lana very much. He is much more motivated to learn to read now so he can read Lana a story well." Penny said happily.


    "As for Sam, she''s at her office. The new appraiser we got from his majesty is doing a good job." Lina said.


    "I see. I also have something to appraise so I think I''ll go there in a bit. What about the girls and Ian?"


    "They are taking request from the guild. The guild said that those who wants to build a n should have made several contribution to the guild. We''recking in contribution so they split up and took several requests at the same time."


    They need to chill for a bit. There''s no point to hurrying up building a n. There''s only more jobs once you finally build it.


    Well, that''s the main point of building a n. But if the job given to us is something from Albert and can affect the world, that''s a bit difficult. Instead of taking requests so they can build a n faster, they should take different type of request so they will gain a lot of experience. I''ll tell themter.


    "Alright. I''ll take a rest in my room for now then I''ll go to Sam''s office. Is there anything else I need to know?"


    "Yeah. First, Sam''s office has moved right next door. I suggest you go there first before you rest since it''s so close." Lina replied.


    By this time, everyone already return to do their own chores. As for Sonia, I think she''s reporting my return to the others.


    "When did she moves?"


    "Just as soon as she returned here. Most of our neighbors doesn''t like that they live next to a haunted building, so as long as we pay them enough money to buy another house, they will dly move." Lina replied.


    Nice. That means we can buy the next building so we can build a park for the kids to y.


    "Once we have enough money, we should buy all thends nearby. The kids would be happy if we made a park for them to y. We can also make it so all the kids in this town have a ce to y at."


    This way, Daniel and the others can y together with a lot of friends.


    "That''s a good idea! There''s no park here for kids to y at. They just y on the street which could be dangerous sometime. I''ll negotiate with our neighbors now!" Lina turned around and prepare to go out. But I stopped her.


    "Wait! After your shopping with the girls, I don''t think I have much money left. Wait until I earned more money before doing anything, okay?"


    "Okay!"


    Everyone''s here loves children. All of them want kids to y a lot and have fun as much as they can. If I told them this n, everyone would agree with me. Maybe they would even pitched in some money?


    After finishing my tea and chatted with Lina for a while, I went to Sam''s office next door.


    There, I greeted Sam and after some pleasantries, I told her my intention which is to have her new appraiser to appraise the two items I got from two dungeons.


    Sam''s appraiser whose name is Jeremy, received the two items and said that he will only take a few minutes to appraise them so waited while having a chat with Sam.


    Soon, Jeremy finished and told me what the effects of the two item I gave him.


    "Thanks for waiting. The first item I''ll tell you is the fis stocking. Like Roy said, the wearer of this stocking will have her temperature stay the same at all time, ranging from 15 degree Celsius to 35 degree Celsius. Ice will melt instantly, and fire will disappear as soon as they touched the wearer. So this stocking is good for defense against ice and fire magic. But if the wearer is an ice or fire mage, they wouldn''t be able to use their ice and fire magic." Jeremy exined about the fis stocking.


    "So I''m right. I think this is a good item for Ka or Sophie who doesn''t have either elements." I said.


    "But why is it in the form of stocking? If it can affect the whole body, then it can be a bracelet or a ring, right? The one who made it into a fis stocking is a weirdo." Sam said.


    "The one who made it into a fis stocking has a unique taste." I said as to protect the one who create it. Then I continued, "Treasures from dungeons are not known where theye from. No one knows if they are made by the dungeon themselves, or there''s someone who purposely left it inside the dungeons. I can only praise them for this invention." I said as I sped my hands together like I was praying.


    "Then next is this wand. This is a great equipment for earth element mages. When they used earth magic while wielding this wand, not just the power of the wielder''s magic is stronger, the wielder can also gather the earth in the surrounding and shape it to whatever they want, while the weight still stay the same. For example, you can build a wall that you can carry it with you wherever you''re going, and it will be your portable barrier."


    "A shield. You want to say a shield." I corrected his word.


    "Yes! A shield. And you can carry the earth shield around with you so if you enter a ce where it''s difficult to find earth, you can still use your magic." Jeremy continued.


    "Difficult ce to find earth? You mean like the North Pole or the South Pole? I heard that those ces are covered with ice."


    I never been there before, but I think I remembered reading about those two ces covered with ice. Nothing but ice floating in the sea. Some says that there are small part of earth under those thick ice, but no one ever seen it since it''s just spection.


    "Yeah. Maybe there are some dungeon which limit your ability when you enter. Or unchangeable dungeon which earth can''t be taken so bringing your own earth is useful for earth mage. And it can also be shaped into anything the wielder want."


    "That sound simr to Blobby." Sam said.


    Yeah. Having something that can change its shape into anything is just like Blobby.


    "But can the wand''s shape itself be changed? Like make it smaller or bigger."


    "No. The wand will stay the same. Only the earth will change its shape so the wand can''t be smaller." Jeremy exined.


    "That''s good enough. This is a perfect weapon for Ka considering her fighting styles. Now she no longer need to use a spike from Earth Spike magic as a weapon. With her intellect, I think she''s a good choice to be the owner of this wand. If I give this to Ka, then it''s better if the stocking goes to Sophie. Thanks, you two. I''ll take my leave now."


    "Ah, Roy! When will you go diving again? You know that you don''t have much money since your girlfriends and friends took them away." Sam reminded me of my financial problem.


    "Sigh... I''ll do it tomorrow. I''ll go deeper next time. Bye."


    I said my goodbye and left her office. Good thing that they renovate the building so there''s a door connecting my house with her office. Now it won''t take time to go to her ce if I needed something.


    After checking that everyone hasn''t returned yet, and the kids still asleep, I went to my room and took a short rest.


    Sleeping at my own home is always feel better than sleeping anywhere else. If only Blobby is here to be my bed, then that would be perfect.

 Chapter 139 - Everyone Loves To Tease Me

    After I wake up from my nap, I was surrounded by kids. Daniel isying his head on my stomach as he looked up to my face.


    "Roy is up!" He said.


    "I''m up. I heard that you learn difficult words. How smart are you right now?"


    "I learn something from Sister Ang! She taught me what you are! Azy bum!" Daniel said with a bright smile.


    Well, that was not wrong. But considering what I have done, I don''t think I have time to be called azy bum. I have been so busy these past few month.


    Then I looked at the side to see Hannah is carrying Lana in her arms.


    "Have you been a good big sister to these two?" I asked Hannah.


    "I have. We have been sleeping together all this time!"


    "How''s Lana? Did she freeze anything?"


    "Not anymore. As long as someone is with her, she won''t freeze anything. I think Lana is just lonely."


    Then Hannah told me that during the first day of travel, Lana freeze the wheel of the carriage at night when she can''t sleep. Then when Hannahe close to her and hugged Lana, she didn''t freeze anything anymore.


    "You''re a great big sister." I said as I patted Hannah''s head.


    "Me too! I''m a great big bother!" Daniel said. Seems like he wanted to be patted as well.


    "Haha! You''re missing one letter there. It should be a big brother. Not bother. And you have never been a bother to me." I patted Daniel''s head as well.


    Seriously, why did I have to be so busy and leaving these cute kids behind in the care of others? I wish everything will be over soon and no war happen. But that''s just a wistful thinking knowing how capable the cult is. I just hope that Penny and Ruby can raise the kids well despite the danger that happen in this world.


    "So, why are you guys here?"


    "Mom said dinner will be ready soon so she told us to wake you up." Hannah replied.


    "I see. Let''s go down then."


    Daniel quickly stand up on the bed with both his hand raised up.


    "Carry me!" He said.


    "I thought you are the big brother?"


    "Now I''m the little bother! So carry me!"


    "It''s brother."


    I picked up Daniel with one arm and prepared to leave my room when I looked at Hannah''s expression. She looks a little jealous and seems to want to be carried as well.


    "Hannah, you can jump on my back, you know? And I will carry Lana."


    "Umm¡­ no. I''m the big sister so I can''t be spoiled." She replied.


    "Sure you can. Even I want to be spoiled sometime."


    "Then I''ll take your offer!"


    Hannah then let me pick Lana and I put Lana on Daniel''s arm.


    "Hold her tight, okay?"


    "Yes, sir!" Daniel replied happily.


    Then as I turned my back to Hannah, she climbed the bed and jumped on my back. She hugged my neck with one hand while the other hand is patting my head.


    "Since you want to be spoiled, I''ll pat your head!" Hannah said.


    "Oh. This is nice. Let''s go to the dining hall." I said.


    "Let''s go!"


    Down in the dining hall, the meal has just been prepared on the table. I let the kids down and they ran to their seat.


    It''s been a while since I''m here and the number of chairs increased. Of course it has considering we got new family members. Candy, Shirley, Ian, and the baby Lana.


    But today, most of them are empty. There are only the kids, Lina, Penny, Ruby, Ian, and me.


    "Where''s the others? They haven''t finished their requests?" I asked Ian who has returned.


    "We all took subjugation quests for all kind of monsters nearby. But each one of us took different route. Ms. Sonia told me that everyone is okay. They arepeting among themselves to find who subjugated monsters the most." Ian replied.


    "Beingpetitive is fine and all. It helped everyone grow stronger. But that doesn''t mean they have to skip dinner for it."


    "Don''t worry. I have prepared them some meal in case they haven''t returned for dinner. But since they haven''t returned by now and the gate already closed at this time, they should be returning tomorrow in the morning."


    They arepeting to the point of camping outside? Should I visit them tonight?


    Nah, I''ll just stay here and y with the kids.


    As for the gifts for Ka and Sophie, I''ll give it to them tomorrow after they returned.


    Before I forgot, I gave Lina something to do.


    "Lina, can you help me?"


    "What is it, Master?"


    "I want you to wash this stocking."


    When I hand her the fis stocking, everyone froze other than the kids.


    "What is it?" I asked.


    "Did you made another girlfriend?" Penny asked.


    "No."


    "Did you cheat on your girlfriends?" This time it was Ruby.


    "No!"


    "Where did Master stole it from?" Lina also asked me.


    "I didn''t steal it!"


    "I didn''t know you have such hobby. Now I think I can believe the story Ms. Victoria told us about you and Hill." Ian said.


    "I don''t have such hobby! This is a magic tool I got from a dungeon! Even I don''t know why it''s a fis stocking!" I cried out loud to make everyone believe me.


    After many times telling them that Victoria''s stories are 90% lies, howe they still believe her?


    "Master, you found this stocking and asked me to wash it. Does it mean you wore it when you found it?" Lina asked again.


    "No! I''m with another party back then and there''s a girl who willingly put them on and tested it! It was not me! And that girl doesn''t want it anymore because something happened so I take it with me since it''s a useful magic equipment. I did say that I''m visiting Sam so her appraiser can appraise some things for me, right? This stocking is one of them. I''m nning to give it to Sophie."


    "Oh, is that so? Then I believe Master." Lina said as she turns back to do someundry.


    I can see her grinning. Everyone is also smiling andughing. So it means they''re doing it on purpose? Everyone is teasing me? Even Lina and Ian?


    Don''t tell me that everyone is getting along because whenever I''m not around, they started talking about me. Making fun of me. That''s why everyone''s chemistry is so good when they are teasing me or making fun of me.


    Right now, I felt so alone even though I''m with other people. Let''s ignore the adult here and just y with the kids.


    I spend the rest of the day ying with the kids and reading them books. After keeping thempany, I grabbed the tank where I put magic stones so they can be transformed into air element, and took out the magic stones.


    I took out the magic stones to my bed and prepared to cultivate when Victoria entered my room.


    "Hmm? You''re not with the girls?" I asked Victoria.


    "What? You don''t miss me at all? I''m so sad." Victoria pretended to cry.


    "Yeah, right. By the way, what did you girls doing on your journey? How could everyone improved so fast and leaving me behind?"


    "Simple. We just had either me or Sonia on watch duty every night since neither of us need rest. Then as for the others, they can either rest or cultivate. Everyone choose to cultivate every night other than Lina. That''s why they improved quickly. What about you? What did you do? I heard that you entered a dungeon."


    "Dungeons. I entered all the dungeon I found on the way here. Most of them are dungeons that has been conquered many times by other hunters so there are no treasures over there other than some magic stones that I sent you. Only the first and thest dungeons is different."


    "Exin more before you cultivate. I''m bored."


    "Nothing much to tell. The first dungeon''s entrance is through underwater tunnel under a waterfall. That''s where I found those eels you eaten."


    "Aah¡­ those were delicious."


    "I know, right? And I heard from Lina that there''s only one more eel left and we had it for dinner tonight. Where did the rest go?"


    "Obviously, we ate them all. When we reached Cassau, there were still three eels left. Then we ate two of them before you returned. And now you have returned, Lina used thest of the eels for your dinner."


    "Sigh¡­ at least I can still eat it even though it was just one."


    Then I continued telling her about my experience in the first dungeon. How I tried to talk with monsters and how I took the treasure and escape from the giant fire lizard.


    "What''s the treasures you got? Are they something good?" Victoria asked about the treasure.


    "I''ll tell the rest when everyone returned tomorrow. I still want to cultivate so don''t disturb me."


    "Fine. Then I''ll be in my room writing some stories about Roy x Albert. By the way, my books will be published soon. Isn''t it great?"


    "Not at all! Burn them before they spread!"


    "You can''t take what I love from me! Good night!"


    Victoria mmed the door and went back to her room. I used Divine Vision to see what''s she''s doing. And thinking that I''m looking at her, Victoria opened a page and direct it to my room.


    ¡­I read a bit and I regret reading it.


    I hope no one realized where she got the reference of the characters in her books from.


    After clearing my mind, I grabbed a magic stones and cultivate my air magic.


    Ignore everything and focus only on improving my magic level.

 Chapter 140 - Giving The Presents

    This is the first time I ever cultivate using a magic stones. Even in my past life, I never did it. It''s obvious since I only had aptitude in summoning element of which cultivating is not necessary to improve my level. But in the end, I died while still in beginner''s level.


    I feel that my air element has slightly improved, but still not enough for me to level up into intermediate level. I guess I should turn more magic stones'' element into air element. Maybe I should build more tank to store the stones so I can make a lot of them in one go.


    And if there''s a leftover tank, maybe I could use them for oxygen tank. Although I might not need it, it can still be useful. Then once I entered medical college¡­ if I entered medical college, I don''t know if Albert can do something about my graduation degree, I can tell every doctors about it. Then maybe I could finish school in one year. Or maybe less if I show them all my knowledge whiche from the future.


    Because of the war, medical skill also developed a lot. Just around ten years ago, whenever someone broke their bones and there''s no healer around, doctors would just amputate the broken limb. The knowledge of how to fix broken bones by surgery is still unknown after all.


    I heard that the first surgery of fixing a broken bone was done in a country that''s at war with the neighboring country. I guess that''s make sense since there are a lot of people to use for experiment.


    But now, medical knowledge has advanced slightly. And I know more than any doctors and surgeons in this world. I hope with my knowledge, medical advancement will happen faster and more illness can be healed faster than before.


    In any case, I will only do that if I can attend medical college first. If I couldn''t be one, I''ll think another way but it might take a long time for my knowledge to spread by that time.


    What about now? I''m still too young and no one will believe me because of that. Even though my mind is that of a 45 years old man, I''m still a 15 years old boy. Or maybe 16 now.


    Let''s hope I won''t forget any medical knowledge I''ve ever learned.


    I opened my eyes after cultivating for a few hours to see that it''s already noon. I checked the house with my Divine Vision and I can see that the girls are already returned and about to have lunch with everyone.


    Did I skip breakfast? If I eat lunch twice, does the first lunch considered as breakfast?


    It doesn''t matter whether I skipped breakfast or not if I keep eating, right?


    I walked to the dining table where everyone is already seated and the meal has been prepared.


    "Been a while, Roy." Ang greeted me.


    The girls also smiled at me or waved their hands for greetings.


    "When did you all return?" I pulled back my chair and sat on it while asking the girls.


    "Just around one hour ago. We heard that you''re cultivating so we just leave you be. How was your journey?" Ka asked.


    "It''s good. I heard that three of you has improved your levels."


    "Yes! My fire element has reached intermediate already. Soon, it will be my wind element that will reach Intermediate. Aren''t I great?" Ang proudly telling her achievements because of the journey.


    "Yeah, yeah. I always know that you''re genius in magic. Good for you. Then, Ka?" I turned my head to Ka next to me.


    "My healing magic. It has reached intermediate and now I can heal a more severe injury." Ka replied as she smiled at me.


    "You''re making healing magic your primary element? I thought that you wanted your earth element to improve first."


    "That was in the past. Now I have a boyfriend who can only fight as vanguard so he will without a doubt get hurt over and over again. If I can''t protect him, at least I need to be able to heal him." Ka said.


    "¡­that''s a nice way of thinking. I''m moved to tears hearing you care about me so much." I wiped my teary eyes hearing Ka''s reply. Then I moved my head to the opposite and face Sophie. "What about you?"


    "It''s my lightning element. There are a lot of lightning element magic stones in the treasure chest we found in the dungeon here back then after all. As for my light element, there''s no change at all."


    We chatted while having our lunch together. This time, everyone is seated together. We enjoyed our time together. Even Candy, Shirley, and Ian doesn''t feel like strangers anymore. Everyone is getting along really well. I bet it was because they have a lot of fun making fun of me.


    Even during dinner, two out of three topics we talked about is about them making fun of me. For rence the clown, being made fun of is something great. But I''m not a clown right now so it''s not great.


    After finishing our meal, Shirley asked me something she heard about from Victoria.


    "Roy, I heard that you got treasures in a dungeon. I''ve never entered a dungeon before so I''m curious about them." Shirley asked.


    "I only got two items. Both are equipable items. The first is this wand which I will give to Ka." I took out the wand from my pocket and gave it to Ka then I exin the function of the wand.


    "So it''s basically simr to Blobby." Ka said after hearing my exnation.


    "Yes. The earth you gather will envelope the wand so you can''t make it into anything smaller than the wand. As someone who has Blobby, I can say that this is something amazing."


    "Maybe I can make a bed made of y just like Blobbybed. I guess I need to experiment a lot of things with this wand. Thanks, Roy." Ka thanked me for the wand.


    "You''re wee. Then the next item is¡­ Lina, has it dried yet?"


    "I brought it with me. Here you go." Lina gave me a bag with the stocking inside of it. Why did she has to put it in a bag?


    I put one hand inside the bag and pulled out the content of the bag.


    "It''s this!" I showed everyone the magic item in my hand.


    "¡­Roy, I never thought that you have a hobby of wearing that thing." Ang said.


    "Ian already said that yesterday. You need to be more original." I said.


    Then Victoria intervened.


    "You returned home without catching anything? You''re a shame of a fisherman! Your father the legendary fisherman cried in heaven for you!" said Victoria.


    "It''s turned into a drama? You sure answer like someone who writes stories. As you can see, this is a fis stocking. I got this on my journey after watching some kind of drama." Just like before, I also exin the function of the fis stocking to the wearer.


    "Why fis stocking?" Sonia asked.


    "I asked the same question, but I don''t know anyone who knows the answer. I thought of giving it to either Ka or Sophie since they don''t have aptitude in either ice or fire element. But since Ka has received the wand, I thought to give it to Sophie. What do you think?" I asked Sophie about her opinion of receiving the stocking.


    "Well¡­ I don''t like fighting, but because war ising, I thought I need to do my part as well. So I''ll dly ept that. But I think I''ll wear a pants over these stocking." Sophie said.


    "What about me, Master Roy? I''m not even in the corner of your mind?" Ian asked me.


    "I know that you don''t have aptitude to either element as well, but a falcon flying in the sky wearing a fis stocking is suspicious. So you''re no good."


    And I don''t want to see it being worn by an old man.


    "You said that you''ve seen a drama unfold and you got these stocking. What did you experience?" Victoria asked.


    "A story of a broken heart. It started with their party stalking me inside the dungeon, then once they see the treasures, they stopped me and took the treasures for themselves. I told them that they can have it only after I''ve seen the effect of whatever inside that chest is." I exined.


    "Of course you did. You''ve seen through the chest before they stopped you so you did it on purpose to let someone wear it!" Said detective Ang.


    "Nice deduction, detective Ang! Then the leader of the party got entranced by the girl who wear this thing. Then two cult member who somehow invited by the leader attacked us in order to get this stocking. Then the couple had a fight and the party break up. None of them want this stocking filled with sad memory anymore so I took this with me."


    "Do you then get along with the girl?" Victoria asked skeptically.


    "What? You think I tried to seduce a girl who just got her heart broken? No! Ah, by the way, the two girls in that party seem to be from this city so we might meet them." I said.


    "Really? What''s their name? Maybe we have met them before." Ka asked about the girls'' identities.


    "I think they are¡­ Jose and Rosephine." I don''t remember their names clearly.


    "What kind of names are those? I don''t think we meet them before." Ka said.


    "Alright. Then I''ll be going diving now. Bye."


    After giving the two items to Ka and Sophie, I left the house to find more treasures. I need to have a lot of savings since now I know that my money will be taken from me so easily.


    And few days pass by peacefully without any incident in Cassau.

 Chapter 141 - After A Week Of Peaceful Days

    It has been a week of peaceful days. And I don''t have anything urgent to do at all. I just went diving for a few hours every day and return home with more money. Now I have enough to buy the neighboring buildings.


    Sam really is good at business. She said that she found a client who''s willing to pay a lot of money for the treasures I find from diving. She told me that it was some rich group who wanted to sell merchandise across the sea in the past but the ship sunk and they lost a lot of money. Maybe the ships I got my loot from is one of theirs.


    I think that''s why when they found out about the stuffs that Sam sells, they are willingly paying a lot of money. And then they try to find out where she gets those stuffs from which lead them to follow me to the beach. But of course they are not diving to the sea.


    Since they don''t have any intention to harm me, I just let them be. And if they try to approach me, I''ll ignore them.


    I''m fine with being followed, but having ten people following me is annoying. So today I went to Sam to give her the loots and tell her to inform her client to not have so many people following me.


    "Today you got a lot as well. I heard from Lina that our neighbor is moving since you bought their plot ofnd. Trying to make your house bigger?" Sam asked after I gave her employee my loots.


    "Yes. That and I''m nning to build a park here for the children to y. It''s so that the kids can make new friends."


    "That''s nice. Anything else?"


    "Yes. Tell your client that they have too many people following me and it''s started to get annoying. If they be more annoying then I will kill them. Tell your client to never me me for killing his men in case that happen. They even started to check around my house."


    "Hmm¡­ that''s fine. I''ll tell him to reduce the number of people following you and that you will kill anyone who tries to invade your privacy. Is that okay with you?" Sam asked.


    "Yes. Tell your client that I will kill anyone who checked on my house and following my friends. As for those who follows me to the sea, just reduce their number is fine. But if it''s too many then I''ll kill them. Even if the number is increased and the new faces are not their people and from a third party, I will be fair and kill them all." I said.


    "Is killing people a fair thing to do?"


    "It is if I kill everyone. If I choose favorites then it''s not fair."


    "Okay. He''ll be here in the afternoon so I''ll tell him then. Oh, right. I think the girls are gathering together now. They have some kind of discussion. I think you will be busy again soon."


    I got a bad feeling about this. Just after a week of peaceful days, some bad things will happen that might need me to work hard. Should I escape? Or just give up? I guess I''ll just give up and do the work.


    "Thanks for telling me. I guess I''ll go now. They seem to be waiting for me." I said as I look at my house with my Divine Vision and see that the girls are gathering around Sonia who seem to have some news from Albert.


    I left Sam''s office and return home then I approached the girls.


    "Will I be busy again?" I just asked them directly.


    "Here''s some parfait so you feel a little better." Lina offered me a parfait she made.


    "Thanks. So? Is there any news?" I asked Sonia.


    "Albert has visited Hill in Mellian city. He also visited the noble in charge of that city and Albert said he can be trusted. As for Hill and his men, everyone agreed to help him evacuating people. Some of them also strong enough to help the agents to defeat monsters. Luckily, none of them are members of the cult. That''s what Albert said about Hill and the others." Sonia exin what Albert told her.


    Seeing everyone''s reaction, I already know that they have heard it from Sonia first. I bet there will be more than this news.


    "Anything else?" I asked.


    "Albert wished that it was thest time that he will see Hill, but that''s impossible. Then the next info is¡­ you do know that Albert contacted Wendy by using me, right?"


    "I know. She has a ne, right?"


    Since everyone who can call Sonia are given a piece of essory by me, of course Ms. Wendy will contact Albert via Sonia.


    "Yes. Albert told Wendy that even though we have more people, it''s still not enough. So as for Melk city where Wendy is located, Albert will send Hill and about ten of his men to Melk."


    "But they are only responsible for evacuation, right? As for those responsible to defeat the monsters during the stampede¡­ don''t tell me!" I raised from my chair as I figure out whates next from Sonia''s mouth.


    "Yes. It will be everyone here. Of course Wendy will have some reinforcementing as well. And you can finish your school as well. Wendy said that no one knows about anyone who got involved during that time Ang breaking through. But for safety purpose, she suggested you to not stay in Red Tail anymore. Don''t worry since she has prepared a ce for everyone to stay in. She bought a whole hotel building for everyone to stay at." Sonia exined.


    "Sigh¡­ At least I can still attend medical school after this."


    "Hmm? You''re surprisingly not refusing this job like usual? Why?" Ang asked me curiously.


    "Well, even if I refuse it, you all have already thought of a way to convince me, right? Let''s just skip the convincing part and do this. But after I graduate, I have to have two years break from any works from Albert rted to the cult. Tell him that." I pointed my finger to Sonia as I said that.


    "I''ll tell him that. What will you do in those two years?" Sonia asked.


    "Training, cultivating, bing richer, and resting. If we haven''t changed the future too much, then it should be around seven or eight years before the cult started their next n. Then during that time we can improve our strength before the real war happen. And that should be enough time for me to finish medical school as well. But since we are trying to prevent casualties during the stampede, the future will be different. But I don''t think the cult will make any big moves during the next two years. Which is enough for us to improve." I exined my n to everyone.


    "I see. That''s a good n. We can also look for trusted allies after the stampede. Which will make us stronger." Candy thought out loud.


    "I''ll tell Albert about your n. He will most likely agree to this two years break. Oh, if you''re going to Melk, Wendy told me to go there as soon as possible. Since if you''re still aiming to finish school, there will be an important exam next week." Sonia said to hurry up.


    "Then tomorrow I''ll leave. What about you two?" I asked Ang and Ka if they wanted to finish school as well.


    "I''ll go with you. Since I want to be a healer, I guess I''ll go to magic college specialized in healing magic after the two years break." Ka said.


    "Me too. I think it''s a good idea to aim for the best magic school in this country." Ang also agreed.


    "Isn''t that the college in capital?" I asked Ang.


    "Yes. Then I could ask Albert or Marie to find me a lodging. After the two years of training, I believe I can be the strongest in the college. Then I''ll learn everything I needed and return here." Ang said confidently.


    "Oh! If you''re aiming for that school, then me too! I already graduate Introductory School few years ago so I might be the oldest student there. But that''s okay with me." Shirley also aimed for the same college as Ang.


    "Why didn''t you attend college before?" I asked her curiously.


    "Brother told me that it will be troublesome if member of royalty go to college. Since he''s afraid that someone is trying to approach me with ill intention. But if I return there after two years, I think no one will recognize me after I return since I almost never leave the pce before. But I only got introductory school degree by being home-schooled so I also want to experience going to school before then. Can Ie to your school as well?" Shirley asked to go to Melk as well.


    "Fine. The four of us will leave tomorrow then. What about the three of you?"


    I asked Sophie, Lina, and Candy if they want to go as well.


    "We will go too. But we''ll leaveter than you guys. Ian will stay here to take care of the others. He said he''ll leave everything in Melk to us all." Candy replied.


    "Which mean everyone is going, huh. Sonia, tell Albert and Ms. Wendy that we''re going."


    I guess it''s time to visit Melk again. Although I don''t like how I have to work hard over there, I''m still happy to be able to finish school. But Hill will be there as well. I hope Hill and his group of muscr men won''t cause any problem there. Especially to me.

 Chapter 142 - Strategy For The Stampede

    "Wee, my favorite students who love to skip sses. And your highness."


    Ms. Wendy greeted us and kneeled in front of Shirley just a bit away from the entrance to Melk. We traveled quickly to Melk by transforming Victoria into a wagon and let me pulled it.


    "Just call me Shirley. I don''t want anyone to know my identity. Please stand up." Shirley says as she helped Ms. Wendy to stand.


    "Then you should have did as I suggested. Disguising yourself." I said.


    "No! A girl and a mustache is not a goodbination! In fact it will make others pay more attention at her!" Ang protested.


    "Well, she can have Victoria as her wig to change her hair color to ck if she want to. That''s fine, right? While Victoria acted as her wig, we can find the ingredient for a hair dye. I think there are a lot of those in this area."


    "You can make one?" Ang asked.


    "Yeah. Back then although I can''t fight, I still became a hunter. But the only requests I''m doing is herb gathering and the likes. I was lucky to be able to help someone make a hair dye and other kind of potion."


    "Then you should have done that from the start!" Ang said.


    "What''s done is done. I can just do thatter. By the way, I heard that you own a hotel, Ms. Wendy?" I deliberately change the topic.


    "Yes. It''s a good ce. I made it so only those with personal connection can stay in that ce. I think that ce is big enough if everyone in the defense group and evacuation group stay together." She replied.


    Defense group are the one who responsible to defeat the monsters during the stampede. We are in that group. As for evacuation group, it will be Hill''s and his subordinates'' responsibility.


    Sophie said she wille here in a week, and I don''t know when Hill wille. But I guess it should be days before the stampede.


    "The three of you should forget about the stampede at the moment and just focus on the exam. The exam will start next week. If you want to graduate, you need to study since you have been skipping ss for a long time." Ms. Wendy reminded us of the exam. After everything that happened, I almost forget that she''s also a teacher.


    "Ah! I haven''t studied for a long time!" Ang cried in despair.


    "What? Did you forget that we returned here mainly to take the exam instead of fighting?"


    "I thought that we''re here mainly for the battle and not the exam. But I heard there''s a practical exam, right? I think I can get a high grade in that exam. The grade from practical exam is the most important thing if I want to enter magic college, right?" Ang asked.


    "Yes. So for Ka and Ang, the practical exam is more important. As long as you passed it, the written exam is not important anymore. As for me, written exam is more important since I want to attend medical school. So our n is to pass the exam, taking care of the stampede, and pass the final examter."


    "You don''t need to do that. As long as you at least passed two out of three exams, you can graduate safely. You have passed the first exam and if you pass this one, you don''t need to join thest one. But you can take part in it if you want to get a higher mark."


    "Seriously? Then we can just go home after the exam." I said happily.


    I never thought that we only need to pass just two exam from three. In the past, I just worked hard to pass all three exams. But since thest exam is where my grade is the highest, I guess that''s fine.


    "No. His majesty said that if you leave before the stampede, I will make sure you didn''t pass the test. It''s my privilege as your teacher. So even if you passed, you have to wait until the stampede before you got your degree." Ms. Wendy exins.


    "¡­so we have a corrupt teacher. Can I just bribe you?"


    "You can bribe me by helping us take care of the stampede. Then no matter how badly you are on your test, I can give you a passing grade."


    So I can''t escape fighting in the stampede.


    "Sigh¡­ can''t we just kill everyone in the cult here since there are several other cities that will get attacked?"


    "Well¡­ no. Actually, the reason you''re here is¡­ the reason we head Shirley here is because of her status." Ms. Wendy exined the reason why we''re asked to help here.


    Albert asked us toe here was mainly to use Shirley''s status as the princess and my Divine Vision to look for the members of the cult. So we will take care of the stampede, then after that, it will be our duty to clear out all the cult members left in this city using my Divine Vision. Then using Shirley''s status that will make everyone believe her when she make a speech about the reason behind the stampede. She will convince everyone about the existence of the cult. Then the information will spread to other cities.


    So Sonia keep this as a secret. Does Albert really think that the cult will cease their attacks after we told everyone about their existence? Or maybe because once we stopped the stampede and the news of the cult spread, the cult will be more cautious and won''t do anything big in near future. Giving us more time to reinforce our strength.


    Whatever the case, the king is smart. And he''s also being helped by the prime minister and the future prime minister. So they should have thought about it clearly. So I''ll just trust his decisions.


    "So my brother is using me?" Shirley realized it after hearing Albert''s n.


    "Wee to the club of people that''s being used by the king." I grabbed her shoulder and give her a thumb up.


    "Who''s in the club?" Ka asked.


    "So far, it''s just me and Shirley. All his subordinates doesn''t count because it''s their job to be used." I replied.


    "Let''s ignore him and continue about our n. How many evacuation center we have?" Victoria asked Ms. Wendy.


    "We have about fifty location. Maybe the number of people in evacuation group is too little. But during the stampede, we can ask the hunter guild to help us. We can tell them to gather people in those spot without telling them that we are ordered by the king. Of course my hotel is one of the evacuation center. We have a basement big enough to hold a hundred people. If we used the whole building, we can let about five hundred people in."


    Wendy told us about the location of evacuation center. Unsurprisingly, Red Tail is one of them. Maybe because she know that is our ce and it''s empty. So I gave her the key to that building I received from Ruby.


    "All the evacuation centers'' wall has been reinforced with magic. It will hold for a while. So once you see one of the buildings is under attack, make killing the monsters there as your priority." Ms. Wendy continued


    "Not me. Once the stampede happen, I will find the cult members hiding among the crowd and kill them before they enter the buildings. It will be dangerous if even one of them enter one of the building. Before the stampede happen, I will look everyone with explosive devices inside their mouth. Tell me about all the secret agents here so I can tell them the people who belong to the cult. But there might be some of them who doesn''t have any explosive device inside their mouth so after I told the agents about the members of the cult, they need to investigate on their own. Then once the stampede happen, I will kill them and make it seem as if the monsters killed them."


    With this, the number of casualties will be lessened. The thought of cult member hiding among the crowd and entered the building make me shiver. Casualties is inevitable, but the fewer casualties the better. I can only pray to the safety of everyone in other cities.


    "Good idea. When will you start gathering info?" Ms. Wendy asked me.


    "Once we entered your hotel. At this time, the cult member should be wary to the neers. So I thought of making them think that I''m resting after a long journey. I will sneak out of the hotel in disguise and search for the members of the cult."


    "Then how will you tell the agents about the members of the cult? Are you good at drawing?" Ms. Wendy asked me if I''m talented in drawing.


    "No. But I can just transform Victoria into the cult member''s faces. Then I''ll leave investigating them to you and your fellow agents."


    So far so good. I made sound ns to what we will doter. I''ll tell Sonia to inform Albert and Sophie''s group. As for Hill''s group¡­ I''ll tell them once they entered the city.

 Chapter 143 - Im Strong!

    The written exam was finished already. I''m confident with my grade. It will soon be the magical exam. I heard from Ms. Wendy that it is optional so I don''t think I will participate.


    It was made optional because it will be bad for the student who is good academically, but bad in practice to participate. They might lose their confidence. Just being good academically was enough for the student to study to the higher education. Like how I want to enter medical school.


    The past few days, I went around the city to look for any members of the cult and other suspicious people. Then I give report of what I found to either Ms. Wendy, or the other agents.


    Those whom I have told the agents were closely watched of their actions and with whom they are interact with. In case there are more members without any of the HGB device in their mouth. Seriously, why would anyone called it Head Goes Boom? And even after being named as such, these people are still putting that thing inside their mouth.


    I tried to imagine what happened. Someone from the cult is giving a new recruit the HGB device.


    "Hey! I want you to have this."


    "What''s that?"


    "It''s called Head Goes Boom! Put it on the back of your teeth and you just need to pour your magic into this item to make your head goes boom."


    "Oh, wow! I want it!"


    Yeah, right. Such conversation wouldn''t happen. Unless they are really stupid.


    Well, those are things I did in these past few days after returning to Cassau. Finding people with HGB, reporting to the agents, taking exam, and imagining something that would never happen.


    And today is the day for the practical exam. I choose to watch from the sideline with Shirley who want to watch. She goes to school with us but never entered the ss during the exam. But once the exam is over, she will start to attend ss like other students despite already graduate. Ms. Wendy already gave her special permission for it so she is allowed to stay in ss even though she''s not a student. That''s called abusing your power, Ms. Wendy.


    Then for Sophie, Candy, and Lina who want toe here as well, they said that they will arrive tomorrow. That''s the message I received from Sonia. I also asked Sonia to guide them to the hotel.


    As for Hill, despite him and his people is needed here, sometime I wish that they got lost. But we needed more people so he is important for our n.


    Hill getting lost is impossible. Why? Because he''s already here behind me!


    I turned around quickly and faced the man who''s all smile and greeting me.


    "Why are you here?" That''s the first thing thates out of my mouth after a while not meeting him.


    "Oh, Roy! Don''t you miss me? I read your¡­ letter." Hill said.


    "Why is there a pause before the word letter? It''s just a letter, alright! Back to the main question. Why are you here?" I asked the same question again.


    "Because I heard that the magical exam is open for public to watch. And then I saw you here." He replied casually.


    "What I mean is, why are you behind me? Anyone can stay behind me but you!" I shouted.


    "Well, we can take our time." Hill said as he stand beside me.


    "We won''t have any time for anything. Shirley, this is Hill you should have heard a lot of lies from Victoria about him." I introduced Shirley to Hill while pping Hill''s hand that''s grabbing my shoulder.


    "From what I see, it might be the truth. Nice to meet you, Hill. I''m Shirley. Albert''s brother." Shirley introduced herself to Hill.


    "So you''re the pr- his sister! Nice to meet you. And please let me hear about what you heard from Ms. Victoria. She''s Roy''s summon, right? I believe we can get along really well." Hill shook his hand with the princess.


    If this is a formal meeting, he could be punished for being too friendly. Especially when Hill is the captain of the guard of Mellian. If it''s amoner, saying that theyck manner is normal. But Hill''s position mean he must know the manner when meeting with royalties.


    Well, considering how I interact with Albert, it will be me who ended up bing Albert''s friend, it would be me who get sentenced the most. I even kidnapped his daughter and sister¡­ and butler.


    By the way, Victoria''s not in control of the ck Slime at the moment. It''s rare seeing Blobby again.


    We chatted while watching the exam. It was still other students who shows their talent. Most of them are just beginner level mage. Only rich students have reached intermediate level. Well, even though they have reached intermediate level, from what I see, they are still inexperienced in using magic. They must be spoiled kids who never left their house and only practiced using inanimate target.


    There are also some intermediate level mages who seems capable, but if they arepared with either Ka or Ang, they would lose.


    Soon it''s finally Ka and Ang''s turn. For the exam, the students need to attack a target designed to receive attack and calcte the power behind the attack.


    The target is some kind of pir with the height of two meters and its diameter is half mater. It was designed to absorb any attack. It will calcte any attack it received. The range of attack power it received ranging from 0-10000. The ten thousand mark is about the average power of advanced level mage.


    For average mages, beginner level should reach attack power of about 2000 as the average. The average intermediate level mage should reach attack power of around 7500. And 10000 is for advanced level mage.


    Of course it''s also depend on the mages. A powerful beginner level mage can even reach 3000 attack power. And powerful intermediate mage can reach attack power of 9000. And even weak advanced level mage, can barely reached 5000.


    As for Ka and Ang, we''ll see how strong they are.


    It''s Ka''s turn first. For healing element or light element, there''s another test for them. But I told both of them to keep their real power as secret because I see some cult members in the audience.


    Both Ka and Ang will use their earth element for the exam.


    Ka used Earth Spike and make a giant earth spike protruding from earth. The spike attacked the target. Soon on the pir, there''s a number.


    2578


    That''s the strength of Ka''s earth magic. Of course she hasn''t used her full strength yet, but that''s already the strongest among the beginner level mages who takes the exam.


    There are cheers from the audience seeing the numbers. Considering that beginner level earth magic aren''t strong because of theirmon sense, everyone has high hopes for her. Well, some of them are cheering because of her beauty. But she''s mine and I won''t let her go!


    Next is Ang. She used Wind sh to attack the target. And the numbers that appear surprised everyone.


    3924


    That''s already within the reach of Intermediate level magic even though she only used basic wind magic!


    I thought I told them to not gain attention, but it seem it was impossible for them to do that. Even their appearances alone will gain everyone''s attention.


    Then it will be my job to protect them.


    "3924! What a number for a beginner level mage!" The examiner, Ms. Wendy,mented about Ang''s strength.


    "That''s not all. Even the previous student is surprisingly strong. Seems like the students we have this year are exceptional." Another teacher also make ament.


    "Yeah, but there''s also another unique student who didn''t even try to take this exam. Can I call him so we can see how exceptional he is?"


    Hmm? It was Mr. Wig who said that. So there''s another exceptional student here other than those two, huh? I''m curious.


    "Sure. I''m curious about the student who doesn''t want to take practical exam as well. If he''s exceptional, why would he decide to not take part in the practical exam?" The previous teacher asked Mr. Wig. I should try harder to remember names.


    "You''ll see. Alright, since student Ang is thest student to take part in the exam, then if student Roy is here, pleasee forward and test your strength!"


    Whoa! Surprisingly it was me who was called. He should have known that I''m weak and only has a ck slime as a summon, and a useless air element. That''s why he picked on me so all the other students who received small numbers on the exam will gain their confidences.


    Or maybe because he realized back then that I stole his wig? Maybe that too.


    Because I was called, I walked forward to the testing area. Then I confidently summon Blobby and attacked the target.


    "Blobby Throw!"


    My attack is¡­ just throwing my slime to the target. It shocked everyone in the audience and those who knows me are holding back theirughter.


    Soon the number appear and it says¡­


    8


    "Uoooh! That''s awesome! I''m strong!"


    Everyoneughed at my antics. Although Mr. Wig called Roy, I''m taking part as rence the clown. To make everyone enjoy the show. And I did it well.


    "Eight? Eight?! Even the weakest to take part was in his 500s and you only got an eight? You''re really exceptional! Hahaha!" Mr. Wigughed loudly.


    I guess he called me because he wants to make fun of me. Well, that''s fine.


    "It''s good that he confidently take part. It shows how much we shouldn''t treat our students badly. Even those who had terrible strength in the practical exam, might be great in the written exam. Maybe they could be a magic researchers." Ms. Wendy kindly supported me.


    "Or a clown! Ahaha!" That''s really not a good manner for a teacher.


    If entertainment is what you want, then I will kindly give it to you.


    "Well, this is all for the practical exam today¡­"


    I ignored the closing speech and instead return back to Shirley''s location where Ka and Ang already waited for me. Then Ipress air to shoot the target from this far. I took a button from the shirt of another audience, then shot it to the target.


    A loud sound suddenly heard from the target. Everyone''s attention now is at the target again despite seeing no one nearby. Then a number appear at the target pir.


    9124


    My shameless act doesn''t end there.


    "Who is it? Who did that? Can''t you please don''t do that? You''re scaring me!"


    I pretend that it was not me and looked for someone who might have done it.


    Of course the three girls around me areughing while everyone is busy looking for the perpetrator.


    Oh wait! Did I just make the cult wary about my existence? I shouldn''t have done that? How stupid of me.


    After we return to the hotel, Ms. Wendy is asking me if I''m the one who did it. Then she scolds me for hours.


    I''m sorry, okay?

 Chapter 144 - Playing Hero

    After my stupid antics yesterday, today I''m weing the three girls who have just arrived at the hotel.


    "Sophie! Candy! Lina! I missed you all!" I said to them as soon as I saw the three girls arrived.


    "Roy! You are still under punishment for what you did yesterday! I told you to clean up the basement so return there immediately!" Ms. Wendy shouted at me.


    "Sorry!"


    "What did he do yesterday?" Candy asked Ms. Wendy.


    "Well, he acted impulsively and it might ended up making the cult be more wary toward our ns. He needed to be punished for it." Ms. Wendy.


    "I''m innocent!" I said as I prepare to return to the basement to clean it.


    "In front of the public during yesterday practical exam, he secretly shows his strength. It was him who said to keep Ka''s and Ang''s true strength a secret, but he ended up showing a little show of strength. Although he managed to keep his identity as secret, he still need to be punished for it."


    Ms. Wendy then exins what happened during the exam. How after Ang''s turn, Mr. Wig called me to proof my strength. Then knowing that Mr. Wig only called me to make fun of me, I impulsively shot a button I stole from a guy near me with Air Cannon.


    "Well, that''s just like Roy. I think he did it because of different reason, but you can still punish him anyway." Sophie said.


    "Really? Roy! What reason do you have for doing what you did?" Ms. Wendy called me again before I return to the basement.


    Why did I take too long to go to the basement? It''s because of my special skill ''Slow Walking''. I just don''t want to return cleaning the basement. I mean howe the basement is much wider than the first floor of the hotel? Did Ms. Wendy actually bought all thend near this hotel and build the basement?


    By the way, after being called by Ms. Wendy, I respondedzily.


    "I just want to test my power."


    "Make sure the whole ce is cleanedpletely." Ms. Wendy then talked to Candy about the n.


    More importantly, the construction is terrible! I mean looking around, I can only see that this basement is crudely built. It''s like the constructor just go ''we can just dig under the building and made some pir to support the hotel''.


    There''s a lot of rubbles from the construction left behind and I have to clean this on my own? How cruel!


    This condition makes this ce unfit to be an evacuation center.


    When I return to the basement, Ka and Ang already helping me with the cleanup. And Shirley is watching. Ang used her earth magic to tten the floor while Ka used her wand to lift heavy stones. It''s also a good practice for her as well.


    And seeing how they are really helpful, I choose to find somewhere toy down.


    "Hey! We''re here to help you, so if you don''t do anything, we''ll leave! You can do the rest by yourself!" Ang shouted as she saw me trying to sleep.


    "I''m up! What should I help you with?"


    "Just the heavy stuffs."


    "But Ka already done it."


    We both looked at Ka who''s using her wand to collect the stones and rubbles around the wand, then gather them in one spot and tten them easily.


    "That''s a really good wand. Why didn''t you give that to me?" Ang is jealous with Ka who received the wand.


    "Because Ka is more creative than you. While you used your talent and exceptional strength of your magic, Ka used her creativity. After all, she''s smarter than you."


    Then we continued to work while chatting. About how useful Ka''s wand is. Unlike Blobby who transform her own body, Ka''s wand used the earth and shape it to Ka''s will.


    After a while, more people entered the basement. They were Sophie, Lina, Hill, and Victoria who has just returned from hunting monsters. She hunt monsters everyday to help reduce the number of monsters during the stampede along with other agents.


    "You alling here to help? Thank you!"


    "No. I''m just here to offer you a bath together with me." Hill said jokingly.


    "Never in all of my lifetimes!" I replied.


    "Well, seems like you don''t need our help after all. I talked with Sophie and she said that you didn''t act impulsively in the exam. Is that true?" Hill asked the true reason why I purposely gained the cult''s attention.


    Seeing everyone here is people I can trust, other than Hill with my back, I answered truthfully. Back in the lobby, there are other agents there so I didn''t answer honestly.


    "Because of these two." I pointed my finger to Ka and Ang.


    "Those two?" Hill and Shirley confused with my answer. But as for the others, somehow they expected this answer from me.


    "Both of them gained too much attention with their show of strength despite holding back. The cult should have been wary of them and maybe trying to recruit them. But I intervened by showing them that there are someone dangerous in this city. They should be trying to find me now. But they will never suspect me because of my 8 attack power." I exined my reason.


    "So you''re diverting their attention from the two girls to you? And risking our ns by doing it?" Hill asked.


    "Honestly, I don''t care anymore if the cult ended up destroying this city or not. I just don''t want anyone precious to me be in danger. I don''t have anyone like that in the past, but I have a lot of them now. I don''t care about any kingdom. I just hope everyone I care about and I can live peacefully."


    "Protecting those important to you? That''s so sweet of you! Am I included in that?" Hill asked.


    "Mmm¡­ maybe. If I have to rank you in the group, you will always in thest rank of people I want to save. So If I have to choose between you or anyone else in the group, I will just let you die."


    "But you still thinking of me! How sweet!"


    Hill is always happy with whatever answers I gave him. And I have learned to ignore him when he''s like that.


    "Does everyone here already know that?" It was Shirley who asked.


    "No. We just know he had different reason why he did what he did. But we don''t know what it is." Ang replied Shirley''s question.


    "I know I can trust him. He''s my boyfriend." Sophie said proudly.


    "Our boyfriend. Candy included." Ka corrected Sophie''s word.


    "Well, looks like the basement already cleaned up pretty well. I hope Ms. Wendy is satisfied with this. What do you think?" I turned my head to the entrance of the basement where Ms. Wendy is eavesdropping us together with Candy.


    "I think it''s good enough. Are you going somewhere?"


    "Another cleaning up chores. Victoria, let''s go."


    Victoria and I left the hotel together. Just like usual, Victoria is a grappling hook.


    "You haven''t told the others what kind of cleaning that we do?"


    "I believe they already know. Let''s find some dirt."


    The cleaning that we do is killing the members of the cult sneakily. Or make it seem as if it was an ident or they are being mugged.


    I have told Ms. Wendy and the others the members of the cult that often goes out in the city or hunters who have HGB in their mouth. But there are still some of them hiding in the dark. Even investigating them proven to be difficult, so I''ll just kill them.


    Soon there will be a rumor about a vignte running wild and killing people. Well, for some I might be a vignte who helped people, but for the cult I am a criminal.


    It was because the people I targeted are mostly criminal from the mafia or simr to that. Acting on myself to do some justice. Well, if the targets are not criminal, I just kill them sneakily or making it looks like the targets were robbed.


    So far, there have been no rumors about me yet. But it will spread soon because of what I did in the exam. I''d say I''m pretty smart.


    We usually did this when it''s dark, but it''s still noon. There are not many of bad guys appearing while it''s bright, but there are still some who dare toe out. I killed the bad guy and look for a cult members nearby to make it seems like the bad guy is the one killing them.


    I used my Ninja outfit to do this job. But when it''s dark, Victoria alwaysining to me saying that she want my disguise to be wearing a flying mammal mask. Must be something from her world again. I just ignore it though.


    But after a few days, she keeps insisting. So I gave up partially. I heard that the masked vignte from her world is wearing a cape, so I told her the cape is fine but not everything else.


    Now I''m Caped Ninja ying hero.

 Chapter 145 - It Seems Like Im Already Wanted

    Right now I''m jumping on top of buildings and patrolling the city to find any bad guys. Either they are from the cult or not.


    I have stopped a mugging, kidnapping, sexual assault, and even murder. But seriously, I never thought that this city is filled with criminal. I guess I never really tried to see it before.


    It was easy for me since I can sneak behind them and kill them with a single sh. Or by using my Air Cannon from distance.


    There have been some rumors spread among the citizen about a caped hero saving people, but for the authority, I am a criminal.


    That''s obvious knowing that some of the people in the authority are members of the cult. I even killed some guards doing shady business before.


    While I''m doing my patrol, I found someone with HGB walking alone on empty alley.


    Since there are no one else here, and I don''t think it''s a trap, I''m thinking of what to do with him.


    And so, this time, I''m not ying hero. I''m ying the bad guy.


    How bad I am? Well, as soon as I get close to him, without any warning, I severed both of his leg.


    "AAAAAAAHHHH!!" The guy screamed in pain, but I ignore him and just pushed him down to the ground from the back. It''s so that he can''t identify who I am. Even though I''m still wearing a disguise, it''s still safer this way.


    "What do you have here? essories? Jewelries? Money? Hmm? You''re a hunter so you have a hunter card. That means all your money is in here, right? I''ll just strip everything above your waist since below it, it''s dirtied by your blood."


    I act as a bad guy and stripped everything above his waist. I don''t n to sell them since there might be a tracker or something. I''ll just burn them or throw it outside the gateter without taking anything for myself.


    Hmm? He has some money not saved in his card? I''ll take it.


    "You! I''ll kill you! The cult will not forgive you for this!" The guy shouted at me.


    He''s so stupid. To think that he actually said something about the existence of the cult.


    "What cult? Saying it a cult makes it seems like you are doing bad things together. Are there more people like you I can rob in that cult? Then please if you''re still alive, tell them about me." I provoked the legless man.


    "Who the hell are you?!" He didn''t answer my question. I guess it''s time to leave.


    "I''m just a normal mugger. Well, a bit barbaric but yeah. I''m- oh, shit! That caped hero wannabe is here! Gotta bail. Bye!"


    I pretended to run away from the caped hero. Which is actually me as well. I escape while screaming. The legless man should be thinking that he''s saved now. Well, if a healer is nearby, then he can be saved. If not, then luck is the only thing he can count on. But there''s no one around and I don''t n to kill him yet.


    After I left, I looked at him again. The legless man then looked around while screaming for help. But no one ising.


    So he explode his own head. He took his own life without hesitation after knowing that he can''t be saved.


    With this, the cult will be more wary toward my existence once his corpse is found. I have killed some of them before but now after the show of strength I did during practical exam, they are surely can''t leave me alone.


    Maybe they have been wary of me since I first killed someone few days ago. Well, with my Divine Vision, I can see if anyone is nning to trap me so I believe I will be fine.


    "Where are you going now?" Victoria asked me.


    "The usual. Patrolling while looking for another agent so I can inform them that I killed another member of the cult. But before that, I guess I should throw these baggage first."


    I leave the city and throw the stuffs I stole from the man I left for dead. Then when I''m returning to the city, I heard a scream for help.


    I look for the source and find a woman being surrounded by a group of men. I''m about to go there to be a hero and save her, but I changed my mind after seeing something else.


    The woman doesn''t have HGB inside her mouth. And so do the men that surround her. But the ones who have them are hiding in the surrounding. In fact they seem to be surrounding the group of men. And all of them have HGB in their mouth. And they are all men. The surrounded woman is the only woman here.


    I''m suspicious with this situation so I find some ce I can hide and hear what that girl said.


    It''s difficult to bypass the guards, but I did it. I hide in an empty building just next to the woman.


    Although it''s still bright, there are no other people around here. I see some people but none of them dared to help the woman. Is this group infamous in the area?


    "Unhand me, you pigs!" The woman shouted at the men grabbing her.


    "No way. And you, aren''t you seducing men when you''re walking with those tight clothes and such huge ass? Isn''t this what you wanted?" One of the men who seems to be the leader said that.


    "No way! I''m not trying to seduce anyone! Release me! Help! Anyone, help me!" The woman screamed for help again.


    "No one will help you here. Everyone in this area knows who we are. None of them dare to go against us. Now let me enjoy your body." The man smiling and approaching the woman who''s being restrained by his men.


    The woman then looked around and this time with a calm expression.


    "I see. Seems like he''s not here. Ah, well, why don''t you all just die?" the woman then released a powerful wind magic and kill everyone there except for the leader.


    Severed body and dismembered limbs are all over the ce. The area is now covered with blood of the men who died.


    The leader fall on his butt and looked at the woman in fear.


    "You¡­ you area an expert level wind mage?!" the man shouted in fear.


    "Sigh¡­ I thought that it''s a good chance to trap that caped guy, but it seems I was wrong. Maybe he''s really only active during the night."


    Oh shit! An expert level mage is trying to capture me? Good thing I saw the people in hiding. If not, I would be dead by now.


    "A beautiful woman is chasing after you. It''s difficult to be popr isn''t it?" Victoria whispered.


    "Don''t talk to me right now. Victoria, change into the wall here and I''ll hide in between the real wall and you. I don''t know how strong an expert level mage is, but it''s better to be safe now." I ordered Victoria to be a wall. Then I put myself in between the real wall and Victoria and peeked at the scary woman.


    "I''m sorry! Please forgive me!" The man kneeled and begged for forgiveness, but the woman ignored him.


    "Come out!" she said.


    Did she calls for me? Nope. She''s calling the people in hiding. So she''s a member of the cult. But the fact that she''s giving order and doesn''t have an HGB in her mouth means that she''s possibly the higher ups of the cult.


    "Victoria, remember her face."


    "And her body, right? Sure."


    Even in this situation, she keeps making a joke. I just hope that she won''t notice us.


    I never met an expert level mage before so I don''t know to what extent their power is. And I don''t know if they can detect presence or not. That''s why once I noticed that she''s trying to lure me with using herself as the bait, I quickly hide myself.


    "Did anyonee here?" The woman asked.


    "No, Lady Veronica! No one entered this ce!" one of the cult member replied.


    Lady Veronica? That sound familiar.


    "Isn''t she one of the faction leader in the cult? The big butt one? We heard about her and the big boob faction from the twin back when you saved Candy."


    Thanks to Victoria I remembered who she is. Veronica is a big name in the cult. And she''s now trying to capture me? Maybe kill me. But I won''te out at all from this hiding spot.


    Then Veronica continued.


    "Don''t you think that if he''s sneaky at night, he can be sneaky during the day as well? What if he''s already here but no one noticed him?"


    "Lady Veronica is right! Everyone, check the surrounding again!"


    Good thing I''m already in hiding. All her people then searched the area thoroughly leaving no spot behind. Leaving Veronica alone in the alley. As for the man who grabbed her before, he''s already been killed by one of Veronica''s men.


    One of the cult member entered the building I''m hiding in, but no one noticed that the wall is actually a monster shaped into a wall. It''s good that the building is ck as well. The man then leaves and look for another spot.


    Now it''s just Veronica in the alley. Should I kill her? Nah. Too risky. I will nevere out until she leaves.


    "Hey~ I know you''re here. Why don''t youe out and y with me a little bit?" Veronica said seductively.


    Alright, I''m convinced. Let''s go.


    "You idiot! It''s just a trap!"


    The wall suddenly have a hand and pinched my cheek.


    "Thank you Victoria. If you''re not here, I would be tempted to leave already."


    Scary. This Veronica is using her beauty as a weapon. Not just she''s powerful, she''s also know how to use her advantage as well.


    "Do note out until it''s safe, okay?"


    I nodded at Victoria''s word. I won''t be seduced again this time.

 Chapter 146 - Veronica

    There''s only Veronica left behind in the alley and I''m watching her from behind the wall. Or in between two walls to be exact. Whatever she''s going to do or say, I won''te out.


    "No matter what she do, we should stay here until all is clear. She''s too strong to fight. And if you assassinated her right here, our n will undoubtedly be ruined. They might cancel their n to destroy this city." Victoria said to me.


    It''s weird to have a wall talked to me. Just like the phrase, even walls have mouth. Wait, it was ears?


    "I still think it''s better for the n to be cancelled though." I replied to her.


    "That is good in the short-term. But for the long-term, we need to stick to the n. The cult''s existence and how dangerous they are must be known to everyone."


    We need more people. What weck the most is allies. Albert must have thought that if the attack happen, more people will join our cause to destroy the cult. Especially those who lose their beloved during the stampede prepared by the cult. But if by any chance they found out that we let their n toe through, we might gain more enemies instead.


    But Albert should have taken care of that. He might have n in case the citizens realized that we let the cult attacked the city by using monsters stampede.


    I''ll just leave theplicated things to Albert. I just hope everything will be alright.


    Then we saw that Veronica is sitting on the ground while hugging her knees.


    "Why is she hugging her knees?" Victoria said.


    "Wait, you can see her from here?"


    Don''t tell me that Victoria also can use see-through vision like me?


    "There''s a hole in the wall and I stretch out my body in there to peek." Victoria replied.


    "Damn! You are an amazing summon, but why did in the past you are so useless?"


    "You said you don''t know me back then, right? I don''t know how, but I wasn''t there in your previous life. Your summon is just a ck Slime without another being inside it or that somehow I can''te out. The ck Slime is a mindless monster so they can''t think on their own. And since ck Slime can''t be killed, the monster doesn''t have any sense of danger. So they don''t have any defensive maneuver to protect themselves. That''s just my guess though."


    Victoria told me her guess which is simr to mine. Yeah, if I''m unkible, I would also choose to not do anything and probably sleep all day.


    "Hmm? That woman is crying? Is this another one of her strategy to lure me out?"


    In the empty alley, Veronica is hugging her knees and crying. This woman is surely using any means necessary to pull me out of hiding. She''s even using her tears as weapon.


    "No. She''s crying for real this time."


    "Why are you the one being seduced this time?!"


    Can''t she just be a wall and be quiet? What does she mean crying for real anyway? How did she knows? She might just be acting, you idiot!


    "Mommy¡­ how did everything go wrong?" Veronica said in her tears.


    Wrong? What makes things wrong? Isn''t it your cult who made things wrong?


    "I don''t want this at all¡­ being used like this..." Veronica continued.


    Alright, there. You want me to sympathize with you? I don''t think so. You''re just acting. I''m not pitying you at all.


    "Roy, I think she''s too pitiful." Suddenly Victoria spoke again.


    "I said to not get seduced, you idiot slime!"


    "But she''s too pitiful. What if she''s not acting? What if she doesn''t want things to be this way?"


    "Like what? She doesn''t want to join the cult? But she did! She doesn''t want to kill people? The cult she belongs to kill people! She doesn''t want to destroy this city? It''s toote for that! What is it that she doesn''t want? We''ll ignore whateveres out of her mouth and just wait here until she left."


    And just like that woman, I also don''t want things to go wrong. Although the things we''re talking about should be different.


    "Hic¡­ Mommy¡­ Why did you left me?" Veronica is crying and asking for her mommy.


    "Alright, that''s it! There''s no bad person would cry for her mommy! Let''s go have a chat with her!"


    "No, idiot Victoria! There''s no rule saying bad guy should never cry for their mommy! She''s still evil no matter what, okay?!" I tried to stop Victoria who already stopped being a wall and turned into her human form.


    "But this ismon in story, right? A member of evil organization actually doesn''t want to be involved with them but fate told her otherwise. Then the protagonist wille and they will be friend. The member if evil organization will leak important information to protagonist while staying in the organization." Victoria insisted toe out.


    "But there''s one thing that doesn''t match with that story of yours. I''m not a protagonist! And there''s no way something clich¨¦ will happen in real world!" I tried to stop her again.


    "Don''t worry. Everyone is their own protagonists in their story. And I''ll make myself the protagonist who will approach her. It''s fine since I can''t be killed, right?"


    "Well, whatever. You will keep insisting to go anyway. Just make your form is different than your human form so she won''t notice you. I''ll stay here and listen to your conversation. By the way, in my story, the protagonist is a cat-rabbit hybrid called Marcus Chiwawa the 4th whose paw is so warm they melt the snow and make the world flooded."


    "What''s with that? I want to read that story. Well then, I''m going."


    "And I''m staying."


    Victoriae out of hiding and approach Veronica. I''ll be listening to their conversation while in hiding.


    When Veronica noticed that someone is approaching her, she instantly prepared a magic to attack.


    "Wait! I''m here to talk! I''m sorry that I eavesdropped you when you''re crying. But I want to listen to your story."


    "Who are you?" Veronica is still wary to Victoria who appeared out of nowhere.


    "I''m just a summoned monster with intellect whose master is someone you people should be looking for." And Victoria stupidly pointed at where I''m hiding.


    "Oy, you idiot! Why are you telling her your identity and where I''m hiding?" I shouted from my hiding spot. I still don''t want to show my face to Veronica.


    "You¡­ what do you want?" Veronica asked while her eyes is staring at my hiding spot.


    "Well, our goal is to destroy that cult you belong to. And since it looks like you don''t want to be a part of them, I thought it might be a good idea if we cooperate. But before that I want to listen to your story first. Seems like you had a difficult past and ended up being a member of the cult. And probably one of the higher ups, right?" Victoria answered.


    Victoria! Why are you so direct?! Won''t she be suspicious then?


    "Alright. Seems like you are a good person. But can your master be trusted?" Veronica asked.


    "He can. In fact it was because of him that the king himself made an action for your n to destroy cities using monster stampede. With your help, we might be able to save more people." Victoria replied.


    What if she''s just putting up an act? Why did you have to tell her about the king''s involvement?


    "I heard the king is wise. I hope your goal to destroy this stupid cult wille true. Will you listen to my story?"


    What?! What''s happening? Is there some sort of secret conversation between them that only women understand? If so, please teach me!


    Veronica then tells her past about the reason why she''s in the cult.


    Veronica lives with both of her parents. Then one day, her father tells his family that he joined a cult so his family can leave poverty. Veronica was still a kid who haven''t manifested her magic at that time.


    At first, the cult wasn''t so bad. They gave Veronica''s father a job so her family can earn enough money to live.


    One day, Veronica''s father died for some unknown reason. And after that, her mother disappear. Then Veronica was raised by the cult to be one of the higher ups of the cult. And she indeed be one.


    But she didn''t became one because she wanted to. It was just because of her appearance. Her looks makes more worshippers join the cult. Although what they worship is Veronica herself.


    Seeing how easily Veronica raised the numbers of worshippers, the higher ups decided to have her involved deeper in the cult. And that''s when she fell into despair to see that the goal of the cult is to destroy the world. She was told at first that the cult is worshipping an unknown god who will be their savior, but she never thought that it was an evil one.


    Then she realize many more despairing things. Like how those who joined the cult will have HGB in their mouth to kill themselves. She doesn''t need one because she has a much higher position than those low level members.


    She also realized that her parents are actually killed by one of the member as well. It was to brainwash Veronica to be their pawn.


    Veronica can''t do anything but to endure it as much as possible and pretend that she''s loyal. If not, she would be killed.


    Thanks to her loyalty, she was given chance to improve her magic. Which makes her an expert level mage. But no matter how strong she became, she could never escape from the cult. She hates to kill people, but she has no choice if she wants to live. That''s why when no one is around, she cries.


    "I see¡­ you''ve done well to tell us about yourself." Victoria said after hearing Veronica''s past.


    What is it? It became a counseling session? Should I cry? I still can''t trust her though.


    "See, Master? I think we can trust her." Victoria said we can trust Veronica. But I don''t think so.


    "Then you can have a chat with her as much as you want. Her people is returning so I''ll escape first. I''ll summon you tomorrow after lunch, then you can tell me all information that you got. And you, the crybaby, close your eyes until I''m gone. I don''t want to be seen."


    Seeing Veronica closed her eyes as I told her to, I left that spot right away. I guess this is the end of me ying hero.


    ...¡­.


    After Roy left, the Victoria turned into an earring on Veronica''s ear.


    "This way we can talk whenever we want." Victoria said right to Veronica''s ear.


    "Will it be alright? Your master doesn''t seem to trust me. I''m just a crybaby for him."


    "Don''t worry. He''s also a crybaby himself. And he just want to protect his friends. That''s why he said he doesn''t trust you. But for me, it''s fine since I can''t be killed. But I guess he''s angry because I told you about the king. They are good friend after all." Victoria replied.


    "I think it will be difficult. The power of one country won''t be enough to destroy the cult."


    "That''s why we''re gathering allies and information. And I believe my master is strong enough to handle any problems that wille. He just need something to motivate himself. Maybe this stampede will do some good for him as well."


    Victoria know that if Roy has the right motivation, he can be stronger than anyone. But he won''t say it to the person himself.

 Chapter 147 - Can We Trust Her?

    I went home without going anywhere else as Victoria is with Veronica. I still can''t put my trust in Veronica, hence why I never show my face to her. And I also altered my voice back then. I just hope that Victoria won''t leak my identities. And she''s already leaking the fact that Albert''s involvement in destroying the cult.


    Well, if she can be trusted, then it''s the best oue. But if she can''t, it will be hell for us. And even if she can be trusted, we need to check on her properly first in case she''s being watched by the cult.


    The fact that she hated the cult might be known by some of the cult members, and they might have put some people to watch her.


    And about her subordinates. Or to be exact, her worshippers. It will be good if they joined the cult just because of her. So when she leaves the cult, they might leave as well. But I won''t count on that.


    I guess I''ll report this to Albert and the others first. That''s why I returned home in haste.


    "Wee back! That was quick. Did you get hungry or what?" Ang weed me back at the hotel and teased me, but I''m in no mood to y along.


    "Gather everyone who''s free. And where''s Sonia? I have something important to tell everyone and she need to inform Albert quickly." I said seriously.


    Seeing me being serious, everyone''s mood changed. They must have thought that this information is extremely important after seeing my expression. Ang then went to look for the others and called them. The others also did the same.


    I waited until everyone is here at the dining hall.


    Soon, Ang returned with Ka, Sophie, Candy, Lina, and Shirley entered the hall. Then Hill followed by his subordinate who will be in charge for evacuation during the D-day. Lastly, Ms. Wendy entered the dining hall along with few other agents. Not everyone is here since some agents are still patrolling. But I will have Ms. Wendy to inform them.


    As for Sonia, she is already waiting beside me.


    Seeing everyone is here, I begin to talk.


    "So is this everyone?"


    "Some agents are still investigating and went on a hunt. So yes, this is everyone." Ms. Wendy reported the ones who are not present.


    "By the way, where''s Victoria?" Ka noticed that Victoria isn''t with me.


    "She''s doing an independent mission which result might change our situation to better or worse. Let''s hope it''s for the better." I replied.


    "So that''s why you gathered us here? Please continue." Said Ka.


    Hearing my response, everyone became tense. Even though it seems that we were just having fun until today, everyone still know what''s at stake here.


    "Well, firstly, I went on a cleaning duty and managed to kill some members of the cult. But that''s not the important thing I wanted to share."


    Then I told them about seeing a woman who got herself grabbed by a group of men. Unexpectedly, she''s a higher up of the cult. And she is Veronica, the woman that a certain faction of the cult worshipped.


    "Wasn''t she the one with big breasts? Or was it ass?" Ang seem to remember about her.


    "Ass. She was grabbed on purpose to lure me out and capture me. I guess my antic during the exam bear consequence already. Unexpectedly, she''s an expert level mage."


    "What?! Expert level you say?!"


    Everyone is stunned hearing the level of one member of the cult. So was I. It was a good thing that I saw her magic before I did anything stupid.


    While I was feeling relieved that I didn''t do anything stupid to Veronica, the other is in a heated discussion over Veronica''s magic level.


    "Expert level? If she nned to attack the city as well, we''re doomed. All our nning hase to naught!" Ms. Wendy said.


    "I never thought that our opponent is an expert level. I think running away is a good choice. We can try to get as many citizen to escape before the stampede." Candy suggested to escape.


    "How about we trap her? Even if she''s an expert level, she''s still human being, right?" It was Hill who said that.


    "Not to mention, she''s one of the higher ups in the cult. Who knows if there are more people are strong as she is? And not counting the numbers of people above her. This is a suicide mission. I''ll talk to my brother to cancel our ns." Shirley said.


    "Wait! Roy said that Victoria is in a mission that will decide our fate. He hasn''t exined what her mission is." Ka calmly stopped the quarrel.


    Everyone quieted down in an instant and put their attention to me.


    "Well, here''s the thing. When that Veronica sent people to check the area leaving her alone behind, we saw her hugged her knees and cried. Victoria took pity on her and approached her. I know that seems stupid, but it already happened. Then she told Victoria about her past and how she ended up as a member of the cult. Victoria sympathized with her so she thought that we might be able to get her on our side." I exined what happened.


    "What?! That''s stupid! Why did she do that? What about you, Roy? Can you trust her?" Ang asked me.


    "I don''t. But I thought that it''s a good idea to have her on our side. I left the scene without having her see my face. She already know that Victoria is a monster and Albert is involved because Victoria told her. We can only trust in Victoria''s judgment. I''ll summon her tomorrow after lunch so we will have our discussion again then. But before that, tell me what you all think."


    I asked for everyone''s opinions. Maybe we could get better idea on what to do next. But still, what''s important is what Victoria will find out.


    "Then¡­ should I inform Albert first?" Sonia asked me if she can go.


    "Yes, please. And ask for his opinion as well. And he might need you to send messages to other cities as well so you need to stay with him for a while."


    "Alright. I''ll go now." Sonia disappear and she should be at Albert''s side now.


    "Well? Anyone?" I asked if anyone can give any ideas.


    "Tell us about your thought first. You must have thinking about this ever since the time you met that Veronica, right?" Ka told me to give my opinion first.


    "Well, I think it we need to hear what information she gave to Victoria first, but to be prepared in case she betray us. Even if she tell us the truth, there''s also a chance that she''s being watched. But for me personally, it will be best if we escape. We can also bring some citizen with us just like Candy suggested." I answered my thought honestly.


    "So all we need to do is wait for Victoria?" Hill asked.


    "Yes. If she can bring Veronica on our side, our chance to win will increase. That''s why this is an important mission for her that we can''t ignore." I said.


    "I''m of the same opinion. All we can do now is to wait for Victoria. I don''t think there''s nothing else we can do now. After Victoria returns, only then we can finalize our n. Let''s hope Veronica can be trusted." Ka calmly said.


    "By the way, why did Victoria approach her? Just because she''s crying?" Sophie asked me curiously.


    "Stupid reason just like how she is. She said that in stories, it''s normal for a protagonist to get help from former enemy. She thought herself as the protagonist and thought that Veronica will join us."


    "¡­seriously?" Ms. Wendy asked for confirmation.


    "That''s what she said." I nodded at her.


    "Well, we can''t do anything about it. But at least we have important information. It''s about the existence of expert level mage in the cult." Ka changed the topic.


    "And we need to think that they might have more of them. How do we handle them?" Candy asked.


    I might have or might not have killed an expert level mage before. It was the scarred palm guy. I don''t know how strong he was and just assumed that he''s an expert level mage when I killed him.


    And I killed him by using element of surprise. I might be able to kill more expert level mage as long as I can close the distance quickly.


    If Veronica''s an expert level mage, then she should have realized when I was hiding in the building close to her, right? I mean the scarred palm guy noticed me when I''m about twenty meters away.


    Maybe Veronica know someone is approaching her and she put up an act to get my sympathy. Or maybe she doesn''t notice me at all since she was busy with the group that tried to get her.


    "What do you think, Roy?" Ka asked me if I could handle an expert level mage.


    "If the enemy is just one and I caught him/her by surprise, I can kill that mage. Other than sneak attack, it was too risky to make a move."


    While we''re discussing about how to handle expert level mages, Sonia return with an order from Albert.


    "I''m back. Albert said to wait until Victoria return with information. Until then, continue investigating the cult member secretly like usual." Sonia delivered Albert''s message. It will be dangerous to move on without information.


    "Alright. Let''s do that. We''ll continue tomorrow with Victoria." I dismissed everyone and Sonia disappeared again. She must be reporting the situation to other agents in another city. There should be at least one person who received essory to call Sonia in each city.


    I returned to my room and just have an early sleep. I hope Victoria returns with good news.

 Chapter 148 - Victoria Returns

    After the discussion about what to do, everyone agreed that the only choice they have is to wait for Victoria and hoping for good news.


    The next morning, I saw everyone is already up. Well, more like they didn''t fell asleep at all. They must have difficulty sleeping thinking that our n for the stampede might be known by the cult.


    As for me, I slept like usual. I''m fine if they know about our n. It''s because I have confidence in running away. Although it might be difficult to escape with the others, I''m sure I can still escape. But I still hope that Victoria will return with good news, and Veronica can be trusted.


    As I go to the dining hall, Sonia was there.


    "You''re not with Albert?"


    "No. My job over there is done. I''m resting here. Since most likely Albert will ask many things after Victoria returned, and I have to go over there and back again and again." Sonia replied.


    "Do ghosts need to take a rest?"


    "I don''t know about other ghost, but this one need it. So don''t bother me again until Victoria returns." Sonia snapped at my question.


    I''m just curious about it. I guess she must be pretty tired after rying Albert''s messages to other cities. That''s why she''s too sensitive and need rest. I''ll leave her alone for now.


    Everyone is too tense because of yesterday''s event. I want to have a chat with someone, but I don''t like this kind of atmosphere so I left the hotel.


    Not knowing what to do, I choose to wait until lunch time like any other people my age. Going to school.


    Ka and Ang chose to stay at the hotel to cultivate and training. Even Ms. Wendy skipped going to school today. All the male students must be disappointed.


    When I arrived at school, everyone is talking about the practical exam that happened two days ago. Although I gained a lot of attention, what they''re talking about is the person who attacked the target after me. Well, it''s still me they''re talking about.


    But they seem to have forgotten the result of the others. Ang''s and Ka''s powerful attacks were forgotten. And even my amazing number of eight has been forgotten.


    It''s like everything in the exam didn''t matter at all. Well, that''s good. It means my n to avert their attention from Ka and Ang worked.


    I went to ss and returned when it''s about time for lunch. Although there are still ss after lunch, I skipped them.


    Maybe I should just skip everything altogether from now on. After all, ording to Ms. Wendy, I''m can graduate as long as I passed two out of three exam. I have passed one of them, and this second one, although they haven''t graded the written exam yet, I''m confident I can pass it.


    Once I received the result, I can go to the principal right away and ask for my degree. But since the result hasn''t been out yet, I left. Maybe I could ask Ms. Wendy to take care of it.


    When I returned to the hotel, the lunch has been prepared and everyone is already seated.


    "Well, it''s rare to see everyone so eager to eat." I said.


    "You''re not summoning Victoria yet?" Ang asked something everyone wanted to ask.


    "After lunch. We will have our discussion with our belly filled. I don''t want anything to disturb my meal after all."


    Everyone ate quickly. All of them has finished their meals while I''m continued having my second, third, fourth, and fifth serving. The portion that Lina made today is smaller than usual.


    I ignore their stare as I continued eating. I know they want me to summon Victoria quickly, but my meal is important to, you know?


    "Alright, I''ll summon her now. Should I summon her right away or connect a portal to her location?" I asked their opinions.


    "I think it''s better if you just summoned her right away. If you used a portal, anyone near Victoria will be able to notice the portal. Not just it will make the enemy on guard, they will also learn of summoner''s real ability. It will be horrible if they ended up able to travel to one ce to another easily." Ka calmly replied.


    Although she looks tense, she''s still coolheaded as always. And hearing her reply, everyone agreed as well.


    And so, after everything on the tables are cleared, I summoned Victoria right away to the table. And ''poof!'' she appeared as¡­ an earring? I guess that''s the form she took to not make other cult member realized her existence.


    "Wee back. So? How''s it going? Do you have the time to tell us what you found?" I asked her directly.


    "Don''t worry. I let Blobby take overst night when Veronica asleep so I have a lot of time. I already told her about this condition of mine." Victoria replied.


    "Did you tell her about us?"


    "No. Other than the fact that Albert is the leader of the operation, I never told her about anything else. Just telling her that we want to destroy the cult. I also just told her that we nned to save the citizens from the stampede. But I didn''t tell her any n on how we will do it."


    It''s good that Victoria knows to keep us as secrets. But if she keep too many secrets, won''t Veronica feel that it will be difficult to trust Victoria?


    "So, what do you got? Everyone is too tense since yesterday and they haven''t got enough sleep because of it."


    "About Veronica? She agreed to help us. She will be a spy on that side. So I think of having her have an essory to call Sonia so we can contact each other. Just her having a single ring won''t make the cult suspicious, right? The ring is just a normal one but they would never think that it''s used for long distantmunication." Victoria said.


    Everyone feel relieved when they heard that Veronica joined our cause and agreed to help. But I''m still skeptical to having her. As for giving her a ring, I think it will be fine as long as there''s no one on that side that can exorcize Sonia.


    "If it''s just a ring, then I can do it. But tell her to only call Sonia when the area is empty and no one is around. And when talking to Sonia, she need to speak in low volume." I agreed to give Veronica a ring.


    "Good! But¡­ I don''t feel you''re as excited as the other. What''s wrong, Roy?" Victoria noticed that I haven''t trusted her.


    "Well, of course I still don''t trust her yet."


    "Why? Because she almost managed to seduce you and if I haven''t stopped you, you will approach her?"


    As soon as Victoria said that, I felt the girls'' are ring at me. Why did she has to say something like that? But that is one of the reason why I haven''t trust Veronica yet.


    "If she''s willing to use her body like that, of course I will be suspicious if she''s really crying for her mommy that time. What if she did that to gain information on us? From now on, only Victoria and Sonia can make a contact with her. Maybe me as well since I''m Victoria''s master. But if possible, I''ll leave it to Victoria."


    "I''m fine with it. Now I have important information about their n during the stampede."


    Hearing Victoria''s word, everyone is leaning forward to hear what Victoria learned. I asked Sonia to remember everything Victoria said and ry it to Albert.


    "The schedule of the stampede seems to be changed. Veronica hasn''t learned when it is, but before the stampede happen, most member of the cult will leave the city. This will happen in every city as well. So when most of the cult member leave the city, it means the stampede will happen soon."


    "Aren''t there too many people on that side? Won''t it make people suspicious to see that a lot of people is leaving the city?" Candy asked.


    "Seems like the governors of each city, or those with power at least, will apply a request to the guild. They will give a minimum reward and trying to get as many people as possible. Which will make normal hunters refused that job because of the reward, while the request itself is a message to all member of the cult saying it''s time to leave. Only some people like the governor himself and several important people in each city will stay." Victoria exined.


    "So they used the request as a message. Have someone goes to the guild every day, in the morning and afternoon, to see if the guild have such request to take."


    I said to Ms. Wendy who''s in charge of the agents in this city. Ms. Wendy nodded to my suggestion and give the order to an agent next to her.


    "Anything else?" I asked Victoria.


    "Yes. Veronica herself with her position still doesn''t know what the cult is nning for the world. She just know that the goal is to destroy the world, but for the n to do it, she will only be ryed a message from someone even higher once the n was made."


    "So it''s difficult to find more information. Then, what about the expert level mages they have?" I asked about the expert level mages.


    "Those who don''t have status or power in the city will leave. So Veronica herself will leave this city soon. I think it''s better to give her a ring right away."


    She keep saying for me to give her a ring right away? That sounds like I''m proposing to her doesn''t it?


    Victoria continued, "She stays in one of the noble''s house in this city. It''s better if you gave her a ring tonight."


    "That sound like Roy is proposing to her, doesn''t it?"


    As soon as Ang said it, everyone is looking at me weirdly.


    "Not a ring, okay?! I''ll give her a bracelet or a ne but not a ring?! Why do you want it to be a ring?! Anyway, we know what to do now. They doesn''t seem to know about our n and sending the expert level mages and most of their members to leave the city. We will continue with our n. But we need to be careful because the governor will stay and we don''t know if he''s an expert level mage or not. Sonia, inform Albert right away. I''ll go meet this Veronica right away." I said and about to return to my room to grab a bracelet for her.


    "So you trust her?" Ka asked.


    "We might be able to trust her, but not her surroundings. That''s why I need to check it first. Victoria, show me the way."


    After grabbing a bracelet, I jumped out of the window to the rooftop of the hotel and jumped from building to building while making sure that no one saw me. I made sure to cover my face before I meet Veronica. Let''s keep my identity a secret from her.

 Chapter 149 - Impossible To Sneak In

    With Victoria''s direction, I went to the noble''s house where this Veronica is supposed to be staying at. And knowing that she''s a leader of a faction, I expected that ce to be heavily guarded. But I hope that most of her people is looking for me instead so I have a way in.


    It''s just the two of us. I also wanted to have Sonia with me, but it''s still bright and people will panic to see a ghost wandering in the street. So I''ll let her stay behind at the hotel.


    "I thought you already trust Veronica after what I told you, but why are we going there right away? You still don''t trust her? Or is it that I''m unreliable to you?" Victoria seem sad when she asked me that.


    "No. I still can''t trust her so easily and you are reliable partner. But you haven''t investigate her surrounding yet. What if another faction is spying on her? We don''t know if within the cult there''s a conflict arise. Maybe we can use it for our advantage."


    I told Victoria what I thought. If she''s been in the cult since she was young, and now she said she hates the cult, there might be a chance someone knows about it. It could be one of her followers who''s actually a spy from other faction. That''s why I have to go and see it for myself.


    Then if Veronica is really thinking of betraying the cult, and there''s really a spy within her surrounding, we might be able to trick that spy. But for me to decide what to do, I need to see it first. I don''t have a lie detecting ability like Albert did, but what I have is a vision that makes me able to see-through things and far ahead that no one can see.


    I still haven''t learned to read lips movement so it might be difficult. But that just mean I have to see more of their actions.


    Soon enough, we reached the noble''s house where Veronica is staying. And as I expected, it was heavily guarded. Although it seems like there''s no guards in this ce, many people are watching whoever goes in and out of the house.


    It would be difficult for me to sneak into the house without anyone noticing. Even on top of the buildings nearby, there are many people keeping watch. Although it''s not as many as the time that Veronica tried to capture me, it''s still a lot.


    I hide myself on top of a building that wasn''t being watched and take a look at the house where Veronica is staying at. She was there, in a room on the second floor just walking around. Is she worried about something?


    But I also see something. It''s that whenever Veronica is seen from the window. Each time she was seen from the outside, the watchers'' eyes are focused on her. I guess it''s good that most of her followers are joining because of her looks.


    Whoever thought of having her in her position right now is formidable. That person can think of something like having a good looking woman to make sure they can gain more followers.


    "Hmm? That''s pretty normal in my previous world, you know?"


    When I said what I thought about having a good looking woman gaining followers, Victoria said something about her world.


    "Please tell me more."


    "Well, it means that those beautiful women, and sometimes also handsome men, would gain more followers to be more and more popr. Even if they are not talented in anyway, as long as they put on a show of their own appearance, their followers might increase. And some of them can make a living easily just like that. It''s pretty simr to Veronica''s situation, but in my world, most of those beautiful men and women are doing it by their own will. Unlike Veronica." Victoria exined.


    "There''s no way that she could get so many followers just because she was forced to do it. This Veronica, she''s actually enjoying her position, right?" I still can''t trust her so I asked Victoria.


    "Was. Back when she was being appointed, she was still a gullible girl who thought that everything that she learn was for the good of the world. So of course she would try her best to repay the favor. And when she realized what the cult is about, she has already gained too many followers."


    I''m about to say something again, but I noticed something was wrong. If all the guards are Veronica''s followers, then they should be watching her as she was seen from the window. But there are actually some of them who aren''t interested in watching her even though she was seen from the window, but keeping their watch on her room even when she wasn''t seen from the outside. Almost as if they don''t want to have her escape from their sight, and not because they are trying to protect her.


    "Victoria. Seems like my guess is right. She''s being watched probably by spies from different faction of the cult."


    "Are you sure?"


    "Pretty much. There are some people who keep watch of her every movement."


    "That doesn''t make them spies, right? What if they are just very dedicated in protecting her?" Victoria asked.


    "That mean I''m wrong. But it''s not about right or wrong. It''s about being careful."


    "¡­you''re being too careful. But I guess that''s better than not at all." Victoria said.


    I keep count of the numbers of people that keep watching Veronica''s room even though she can''t be seen. There are about five of them and there''s no missing spot on the area they watched. That mean it will be impossible to sneak in.


    I guess I''ll leave it to Victoria again to talk with her.


    "Victoria. It''s impossible for me to sneak in. I want you to give this bracelet to her and let her call Sonia. Then we will exchange messages through Sonia. I''ll return to the hotel."


    "You don''t want to talk to her directly anymore?" Victoria asked.


    "It''s not like I don''t want to. It''s that I can''t. She is being guarded at all time and makes it impossible for me to enter the house. Maybe you can tell her to go on patrol again like before to entrap me and I can meet her then. Also tell her that she is being watched by spies probably from different factions. So she shouldn''t say everything so easily." I told Victoria what to tell Veronica.


    "Right. Then I''ll be staying with her for a while and told her to only contact Sonia when it''s night and have the curtain closed. Just in case. Then how can I get in if the security is this strict?"


    "Easy. Just turn yourself into the earring that Veronica wore yesterday. I''ll tell the guards that she dropped it along with the bracelet."


    After telling her the n to let Victoria sneak into the house, I approached the main entrance of that house and called out to the guards.


    "Who are you?!" There are two guards protecting the gate, and one of them is extremely hostile.


    "Just a hunter. Is this the ce where Veronica lives? The one withrge hip? I saw her yesterday. She dropped this earring and bracelet so I''m here to return them. Can you give them to her?" I exin the reason why I''m here.


    "Really? You''re not here because you want to see how she looks, right?" the hostile guard asked me.


    "Well, I admit that she''s beautiful. But I have girlfriend of my own and we''re about to meet so I have to go right away. If she knew that I''mte because of a woman, I''ll be dead."


    Good. I could always count on my acting skill. All of the hidden guards are now keeping their watch on me. Well, of course they would. But I just walked here normally and I''ll leave normally again. If someone is tailing me after I leave, I''ll just pretend that I''m going out for a hunt. Once I''m out of the city, I can kill them easily while making it as if they are attacked by monsters.


    "Oh, yeah! I think I saw her with that earring yesterday. Give it to me and I''ll return it to her." The other guard who''s not hostile to me took the earring and the bracelet from my hand.


    "Hey! What do you think you''re doing?!" The other guard shouted at the guard who took the essories from me.


    "It''s true. I saw her yesterday being more beautiful than usual. And she was wearing this earring. And hunter, you can leave now. I''ll return them to her." He asked me to leave.


    "Alright. I''ll leave them to you then." I left them but my vision is still focused on them.


    "Keep guarding the gate. I''ll return these to Lady Veronica."


    "Hah! You are just happy that you have reason to meet her, right? Since you have an ulterior motive, it will be right if I''m the one to give them to Lady Veronica!"


    Now they are fighting over who will bring those essories to Veronica. But thanks to those two, I''m sure Victoria will be delivered to Veronica.


    Knowing that Victoria will be delivered safely, I focused on the surrounding to see anyone who''s following me. There''s one guy who keep tailing me, but once I''m a distance away from the house, he seem to think that I''m really just there to return missing items and returned watching the house.


    After the guy who''s following me leaves, I returned to the hotel and wait for some good news from Sonia who will be called by Veronicater in the night.

 Chapter 150 - Reunion With Baldy

    A few days after delivering the bracelet to Veronica, I recalled back Victoria and let Sonia ry messages from her to us. I made sure that Sonia also won''t leak our identities.


    The n for the Stampede was dyed because the numbers of monsters in the surrounding area has decreased. It''s thanks to the agents who worked hard subjugating monsters. But that doesn''t mean that the stampede is cancelled.


    As for other cities, the schedule was supposed to beter than in Melk. Melk was supposed to be the first city that got attacked, but thanks to our effort, we dyed their n. It might not mean much, but for me, it''s a good news.


    Especially after knowing that baldy is back to town!


    "I''m Blue Bandana, dammit!"


    This bald thirty three years old A-ranked hunter seems to be saying something, but that''s not important. Seeing him again give me hope that he''s willing to join our cause. Especially after his loss¡­ of hair.


    "Hey there, Kron. Been a while. How''s the progress of your mission?" I asked Kron who have just returned to the city.


    I meet him as I was on my way home from the guild after checking if there are any mission that Veronica told before. Because if the request exist, it mean the stampede will happen soon.


    Then I met Kron on the way back. And he''s covering his head with a tablecloth.


    "It''s a bandana! I know you must be thinking of something rude again!"


    Seems like he received a new ability that enables him to know if someone is insulting him.


    "Yeah, yeah, sorry. That loincloth suit your head."


    "It''s a bandana, you damn clown!"


    Being called a clown is not an insult to me. I''m d to see that he''s still¡­ Kron.


    "So? How''s your mission progress?" I asked Kron again about his mission.


    "You mean about the organization that burnt my hair? I might have found something. Before I returned here, I was in the capital. There was a kidnapping attempt that I stopped. I killed the guy and looked inside his mouth and I see an explosive device inside it. I want to ask him about the organization, but he''s already dead." Kron exin of how he get closer to find the truth.


    "Of course he died, you baldy! You killed him! It should have been hit first askter, and not kill first askter. Who will you ask if he died?!"


    "Well, that''s not the point, isn''t it? I want to tell you about how I learn a little about the organization." Kron said.


    "Yeah, that''s not what I asked about as well. I''m asking about your mission to restore your hair. Have you find the hair restoration potion yet?" I teased Kron about his baldness.


    "You''re talking about my hair? I didn''t have any mission like that! Umm¡­ are those thing exist?" Kron asked about the hair restoration potion.


    "I don''t know. That''s why I''m asking you that." Although in my past life, even as I entered my 40s, I never had any problem with hair loss. But it''s still good if he has anything to tell.


    "¡­can we not talk about my hair again? Why did you keep changing the topic there?"


    "Because everything is rted to your hair. You''re looking for that organization because you lost your hair, right?"


    "¡­ let''s just find some ce so we can have a talk. I don''t want you to keep telling everyone that I''m bald." Kron wished for me to stop talking about his hair.


    "But that''s the truth."


    "Whatever. Do you have any ce in mind?"


    "You free now? Then follow me."


    I brought Kron to the hotel. Everyone is wondering about the person I brought with me. They must have thinking that he might be our ally. Well, they are right. I brought him here to see if we can trust him or not.


    "What is this hotel?" Kron asked while looking around inside the hotel.


    "Just a hotel reserved only to me and my friends. Aren''t I cool?"


    "Yeah, yeah. Very cool. So if we talk here we don''t have to worry about anyone, right? Since you can trust them."


    "Yes. Lina! Go get Ka, Ang, and Sophie. And give this guy some food." I told Lina to call the girls.


    "You''ll pay, right?" Kron asked me.


    "It''s free. She''s my personal maid."


    "¡­what happened since west met? Did you get more girlfriends?" Kron asked while smiling.


    "Yes. Oh, it''s them. You can talk now. Everyone here are people I trust."


    Well, I can trust them if the topic Kron about to talk with me is rted to the cult.


    Lina returned with Ka, Ang, Sophie, Candy, and Ms. Wendy. Seems like they are interested in the A-ranked hunter, The Baldy.


    After some pleasantries, Kron talked about what he experienced in the capital.


    Back when he tried to stop a kidnapping attempt, he killed the kidnapper. And to his surprise, the kidnapper has an explosive device in his mouth. After what happened after the Orc Emperor incident, Kron would check the inside of the mouth of anyone he killed. Of course they are all bad guys.


    Then when he found the explosive device, two guards who were patrolling heard of the disturbance and approached Kron. Of course they thought that Kron was the kidnapper. But Kron who is innocent didn''t fight back and only talk. That''s where he ended up knowing those two guards.


    "One of the guards has mustache. I think he was called mustache as well. And the other introduced himself as Alberto. We have a chat a bit and they told me few things. That''s when Alberto ended up telling me about the thing that this organization is nning. He said that there are several cities that will be targeted soon and one of them is Melk. That''s why I''m here." Kron exined why he returned.


    I think I know what happened. The girls with me also realized something as well from what Kron is talking. Well, not Ang. As for other people who are listening, they only thought that the two guards must be secret agents of the king.


    I looked at Ka''s face, and she nodded. I think my guess is correct.


    "Kron. Does the other guard without mustache look like an annoying guy who seem to know everything? And the mustache just keep quiet whenever he speaks?" I asked for Kron''s confirmation.


    "Yes. Do you know them?" Kron asked.


    "Sonia! Come here!"


    Instead of answering Kron''s question, I called Sonia who''s listening in from another room. She didn''te because Kron might be surprised to see a ghost. But I called her anyway.


    "Roy, do you want me to ask Albert?" Sonia know what I want her to do right away.


    "Ask him if he''s the one who the A-ranked bald hunter talked to. I know what his answer will be, but just ask him."


    Sonia then disappear. We don''t know if Albert is busy or not, so usually Sonia just transported to where Marie is and ask her if Albert is avable.


    "Whoa! Roy! Did you also seduce a ghost?!" Kron surprised to see a ghost instead of what I''m saying to her.


    "Yes. Don''t you know that a ghost and a clown get along really well?"


    "Stop joking around! Do you really think the guy Kron talking to is Albert?" Ang asked.


    "Probably. Well, the other guy is obviously Mustache. And he won''t leave Albert''s side unless it''s important. So I think Alberto is Albert. Don''t you noticed it by his name already?"


    "The name Albert is toomon. In fact most of everyone here has amon name. How would I know that Alberto is Albert?" Ang said.


    But before I answered her, Sonia returned with news from Albert.


    "Roy, Albert says that Kron is OK." Sonia said to me.


    "As expected."


    "What? What is OK? Can you tell me?" Kron doesn''t know what we''re talking about.


    "It means Albert said that you can be trusted. I already know that from the start, but with his confirmation, the other will agree to have you with us. Of course if you are willing to join us. Ms. Wendy, will you introduce yourself and tell him why all of us are here?"


    I told Ms. Wendy to do it as the representative from Albert''s people. After all, she was the one in charge of the operation here. And Kron was stunned to hear the truth that his bandana slipped off his slippery head and show us the greatness of a baldy.


    "Wait! So Alberto is the king? And you always know who they are but you never told me back then? And now you are all here to stop the stampede?"


    "No. As for Albert''s n, we are letting the stampede happen. And when it does, we will evacuate the citizens and defeat the monsters as many as we can. Hopefully there will be no casualties. We need the stampede to happen so everyone will know of the cult''s existence. Don''t worry, you''re not the only one who hate that n." I exined to Kron.


    "¡­alright, I''m in! I hope with me joining you, there will be less casualties. Tell me what to do." Kron agree to join us.


    "It''s good to have you with us. Now that you''re here, I want you to ask the hunters in this city to defeat the monsters and help evacuate the people when the stampede happen. If it''s you who asked, with your reputation, I believe most hunter will agree to help."


    Now with Kron''s help, our n can go smoothly and helped rescue the citizens faster. He''s such a well-known hunter in this city after all.


    Today is really a great day. We have a good news, a better news, and best news.


    The good news is, Kron is returning to Melk. The better news, Kron agreed to join us. The best news, Hill likes Kron more than me. I feel like Hill talked to me less and less, and he''s talking with Kron more often. Well, Kron still doesn''t know of Hill''s¡­ desire yet. But I wish the best for those two.


    Few dayster, Sonia was called by Veronica. And when she returns, she told us some news.


    Veronica is leaving, and the stampede will happen in two days. The low reward quest will also be posted tomorrow so the hiding cult member will leave soon and leaving only some important people in the city.


    "Alright. You are free to do whatever you want today, and tomorrow, we will get some rest and only left few people to see the situation. Rest well and prepare for the battle!"

 Chapter 151 - Resting Day

    It''s resting day today. The stampede will happen tomorrow so I told everyone to rest well before the event.


    Although I told them to rest, most of them are unable to sleep and stay together in the dining hall. They must be too tense to rest. Other than Hill and the guards he brought from Mellian.


    Mellian city is a city surrounded by a lot of monsters, and makes that city a good ce for hunters to make a living. The monsters near that city would sometime tried to enter the gate to the city, but the guards protected it well.


    And usually, when the numbers of the monsters increased a lot, and there would be stampede. Thest stampede that happened in Mellian was three years ago. And all the guards Hill brought here have experience handling it. That''s why they are not anxious like the others.


    The guards of Mellian doesn''t really help in defeating the monsters. It was mostly hunters who do that. And the guards are mostly responsible in evacuating the citizen. Only some of the real strong ones are defeating monsters.


    Hill told this to me and Kron in my room. Just the three of us as everyone else is doing whatever they can to be rxed. Like the girls decided to sleep in one room, some decided to cultivate, and even Lina is unable to rest so she''s in the kitchen making some meal for tomorrow.


    It''s not just us three who are rxed, some of the more experienced one also able to rx before the battle. And they are watching their juniors today so they don''t overdo it before the battle.


    "That''s why it''s great that Roy told me to join him. We are experienced in handling the stampede in Mellian." Hill proudly puffed his chest.


    "I only thought of you guys because of the training sets I gave you lot. If not for your physical strength, I won''t ever think of having you guys over. I don''t even know that Mellian experienced stampede many times already. Had I known, I would have tell Albert to get all the guards over there." I said to Hill.


    "Even if he asked that, it''s not like all of us can go, you know? We still need to have guards in case of stampede happening again in Mellian. When I asked other corps if they want toe, they said that if everyone is leaving, no one will protect their home. That''s why it was mostly from my corps that''s helping young Albert. We even have the noble in our city agree to it. He doesn''t belong to any aristocracies group, or belong to any cult. That''s why young Albert asked him to be his ally, and he agreed." Hill said.


    So Albert already gained another noble to help us, huh? I never know about that. But it''s not like he has to tell me everything. I believe that whatever he''s doing is for the good of everyone.


    "By the way, how''s the hunters doing?" This time, I asked Kron.


    "I just told the guild master that I think the numbers of monsters is increased a lot. I told him that there might be a stampede. He didn''t believe me fully, especially when the numbers of hunters are increased and there are more and more monsters being hunted thanks to the king''s agents here. But thanks to my reputation, he said the guild will be prepared just in case. They will prepare a reward depend on the numbers of monsters that any hunters defeated during the stampede. This is the first time this city had any stampede so that''s all they can think for now." Kron exined to us.


    "I think that''s good enough. That would at least make hunters motivated." Hill said.


    "I agree. By the way, have you seen what''s the quest from the cult is about?" I asked Kron.


    "It''s something about migrating to another city. The quest was submitted by the governor himself. It says that they are hiring hunters to protect many citizens who would like to try their luck in another city because there''s not enough space in this city anymore. They will leave soon. With how quick the preparation needed to be done, only those of the cult who has long prepared to leave will join the quest. As for the people they will be guarding, I bet they are also from the cult as well. But those people are not hunters." Kron told us what the quest the cult gave to the guild.


    I agree with Kron. The quest was just posted this morning, and the departure was this afternoon. Only those who have prepared for a long time would join that quest. And if there are any hunters who joined the quest other than those from the cult, they might be killed on the way. Or maybe they would even try to recruit them.


    "Roy, what about the informant from the cult?" Kron asked me about Veronica.


    "She already left the city. When she''s alone, she will contact us. She needs to be careful of spies around her as well."


    "I still don''t trust her though. What if it''s just a trap to kill all of us?""


    "I too haven''t believe her fully. Even if her story was true, she has been with the cult for too long. Well, if the information she told us about the stampede is true, I can trust her a little bit then." I replied to Kron''s question.


    Yesterday when Veronica contacted us through Sonia, she told us a few key information. If all the information she gave are true, I can conclude that she''s really trying to leave the cult.


    The first information is that most of the cult members are leaving. That''s true. Even Veronica is leaving the city as well. And about the mission from the guild is true as well.


    Then about the rest of the cult members that are staying behind. Most of them are obviously trying to see the situation and will report of the stampede to their higher ups. Despite Veronica''s position being higher than the governor of Melk, Luiz, he is closer to their higher ups than Veronica. Luiz was more trusted than Veronica and that''s why the stampede happened in his city. I believe it''s the same in other cities as well with the one in charge is closer to the higher ups of the cult.


    Andstly, the most important information is¡­ the governor, Luiz, is an expert level mage in fire element. At least that''s what Veronica knows. As for other cult members that''s staying behind, most of them are advanced level mages.


    We need to capture the cult members alive. Well, most of them at least to continue with our n. And so, Candy proposed an idea. She will wear Sophie''s stocking to protect her from the expert level fire magic, and confront him and shock him with her lightning magic. Candy has two elements, lightning element that has reached advanced level, and also advanced level fire magic. She has been teaching Sophie about lightning magic since she joined us.


    But wearing that stocking mean she won''t be able to use fire magic at all. That''s why Ms. Wendy will support her. As for the others, they will take care of the monsters and the evacuation. While I will clean up the rest of the cult members that hides with the citizens.


    I was asked to capture them alive, but that''s only optional. I can kill them if they are too difficult to handle. Well, the most difficult part is to take the HGB from inside their mouth. We need them to bepletely unconscious so they can''t activate it.


    For this, I gave the Magic Restriction Cor that I got back when I saved Candy, to the person herself. At least the governor need to be alive.


    "Well, we have made our n, so you all go back to your room and rest. I want to sleep." I said to the two guests in my room.


    "Why do you want to sleep so soon? We can y cards untilte. I''m bored." Kron replied.


    "Yeah. And you have been sleeping most of the time. It''s not good for your health if you sleep all the time. Now you can apany me in the bed." Hill said.


    "It''s you who have to leave! That''s my bed you''reying on!"


    Knowing that in my room I won''t be able to sleep because two annoying guys is there, I left my room to look for Sophie and ask her to let me sleep in her room. The girls are having a sleepover in the biggest room here so I think it will be fine to sleep in Sophie''s roo. Of course the biggest room are reserved for Shirley.


    I easily got the permission from Sophie so I went to her room.


    Even though I said I''m going to sleep, once I rest my head on the pillow, my mind is working to its limit. Why did this often happen before sleep?


    I know the main reason why. Although I show everyone that I''m rxed, I''m actually the most excited for tomorrow. Not the most anxious, but the most excited. It was because finally, I will change the future.


    There have been many events before that''s obviously changed the future, but no matter what, even though I haven''t told anyone about it yet, the stampede in Melk is the one that gives me nightmare the most. Both in my past life, and the present.


    Finally, I could do something about this nightmare of mine.

 Chapter 152 - The Bell Has Rung

    Early in the morning, I already awake even though I usually overslept. Although it was still four in the morning, everyone also has already wake up. And seeing the breakfast has been served, Lina and few others must be awake even earlier.


    I can see determination in everyone''s eyes. And I also determinedly eating the breakfast until there''s nothing left.


    "Don''t eat everything. So that we can have some food to share with refugeeter."


    Thanks to Sophie''s reminder, I stopped eating after a while.


    "Alright! Everyone already knows their own mission, right? Then do your best! Everyone, to your position!" Ms. Wendy gave the order.


    "It''s still too early. If all of us leave the hotel now, it will only raise suspicion. At least wait until the sun rise." I said.


    Although I said that, there are few people who already left the hotel.


    "So, what else did Veronica says about the stampede?" Ang asked


    "Seems like the cult are luring some powerful monsters nearby because we have subjugated too many monsters. I think some of the monsters will be controlled directly by some members of the cult." I said as I remembered how they can control monster.


    Whatever kind of experiments and research that they done, the monsters'' controlling experiment is a sess. And seems like they don''t need a tamer or summoner to control those monsters.


    Veronica said that the Orc Emperor should be one of the experiment that escaped. She heard about it as soon as she arrived in this city back then. That Orc Emperor should be one that the cult raised to be their own, but somehow it be too strong and left. Which mean the people that the cult will be alert most would be us. The hunters who are involved in the subjugation of the Orc Emperor. And knowing that Kron is here, they should be targeting him first. As for us, because of our low level, they shouldn''t think that we''re a problem at all. Especially since the guy who witnessed me killing the Orc Emperormitted suicide.


    In any case, thanks to my intervention, the monsters during this stampede will be stronger than the monsters in my previous life.


    The n today is quite simple. Kron will leave as soon as the gate is open, and after a while he will return telling the guild that stampede is happening. Telling everyone that monsters are getting closer and closer.


    Lina will stay in the hotel as it''s also an evacuation center. As for other girls, Ka, Ang, Sophie, and Shirley, they will join the hunters.


    There will be panic among the citizens. It was because this city has never experienced stampede in the past. And most likely, some cult members will try to rile the people up. Saying we''re doomed or something.


    Then Hill''s people will try to calm the people down and evacuate them. They are already experienced stampede in Mellian, so they should be capable of doing so.


    The agents will help defeat monsters and evacuate people, but their main mission should be to bring down the governor. Candy and Ms. Wendy both will confront the expert level mage. With Candy wearing Sophie''s fis stocking under her pants, I think the expert level fire magic won''t do any damage to her. But we don''t know if he has other element that has reached expert level, or if there''s another expert level mage in the cult.


    As for me, I''ll be hunting people from the cult hiding within the citizens with my partner, Victoria. I don''t think there will be the higher ups of the cult still in this city other than the governor, so it should be easy finding people with HGB in their mouth.


    Time pass by quickly and everyone has left to their own position.


    "Roy, do you really think that there will be cult members who join the civilians in evacuation? What is the chance of them having a ce to hide?" As I was about to leave the hotel as well, Victoria asked me about the chance of the cult members hiding during the stampede.


    "I think it''s probably zero. They are people who doesn''t mind taking their own lives after all. They will probably try to increase the number of casualties by themselves. If we let them enter the evacuation center with other people, it might increase the number of casualties instead."


    "I see¡­ then how will you kill them?"


    "With your help obviously. I will snipe them from afar so you need to transform into that rifle you''re so proud about. I spent this morning sharpening rocks so it can pierce through their heads. As long as there''s no barrier around them, they will 100% die."


    "I thought you were told to capture them if possible?" Victoria asked curiously.


    "Then I''ll just say it''s impossible. As soon as I cleared up those hiding cult members, I''ll go help the others. I hope they will be fine." I said as I look at the girls'' location with my Divine Vision.


    "Don''t worry about them. They are stronger than average mages. They can handle themselves. Magic wise, they are stronger than you." Victoria tried tofort me.


    "I will worry about them. If the n failed, I''ll go get everyone and escape no matter what."


    Victoria didn''t say anything to my words. I hope it means she agrees with me.


    "Lina, we''re going now!"


    "Alright. Please return safely!"


    I left the hotel and jumped on top of a building.


    The stampede will happen soon, so before that happen, let''s take care of the enemy that''s moving alone.


    Any one from the cult who doesn''t walk in crowded area, will be killed. Like those who are still inside their houses, or inside their rooms at an inn.


    I looked around for a bit and see one of the cult member inside a room at an inn. He''s the only one in the room, so it''s a perfect chance.


    I grabbed Victoria who has transformed into a sniper rifle, loaded a sharp rock as a bullet, andpressing air inside the rifle. There''s a scope on the rifle so I told Victoria to remove it. My eyes can already see far ahead even without using any tools.


    I looked at the man in the room. He''s getting dressed and put a hunter card in his pocket. Seems like he''s a hunter. Probably one of the cult members who will create chaos in the guild.


    I aimed at his head and make sure thepressed air is just enough to break the window and kill him. I can make the shot strong enough to pierce a wooden wall, but since he''s right at the window, I won''t do that.


    After I had a good aim at his head, I shot the bullet out of the rifle and it pierced his head and the bullet is lodged right in his brain. He should be dead already, but to make sure, I used my vision to see his vital sign. His heart is no longer moving so I knew I took one down.


    "Alright, let''s go find the next one." I said confidently.


    "What about the inn employee who will see the body? Don''t you feel sorry for him?" Victoria asked worriedly about.


    "Don''t worry. In fact, I might have saved his life. He''ll be happy to know that when Shirley make a speech and told everyone about the cult. Then he will realize his guest is a member of the cult. That''s why we need to make sure that our n is going well." I said as I looked around for the next target.


    "I think it''s best if you move location. The sound of your shoot was loud enough to make people notice where you are. That''s the rule of a sniper. Once your location was known, you have to go find another ce right away. I think it''s better if you shot several people right away in one location."


    "You should have said that sooner! Let''s go!" I said as I left the roof of that building and go for another ce.


    Since there are already many people out and about in public, it will be a big problem if I killed them in public. I see some of them, but I ignored them for now.


    If I need to kill them in public, I guess having a disguise is a better option. That mean Ninja ising back!


    The next one, I found four men in different location. And I choose a good spot where I can shoot them from.


    In one breathe, I shoot the first one,pressing air again in my rifle then shoot the second one. The third one is the same, but the fourth one is smart. Once he heard the sound from my rifle from my first shot, he looks at my location and hide behind the wall.


    I took a deep breathe, andpress air enough to pierce that wall. Then I shot the fourth one, and before any other people noticed me, I left that location. I think some people watched me jumping from building to building, but luckily I covered my face with a mask. No one will recognize me.


    "So three is the max number for people I shoot in a row. More than that, and the enemy will notice me and might escape." I said to myself.


    Then I found more cult members walking alone. I killed them all and escape after doing so.


    As of now, I managed to kill twenty three of them.


    And as I was about to go to the next spot, the bell that inform the citizens about the approaching danger is ringing loudly. I haven''t seen any monsters within the range of my vision, but I see Kron in the guild trying to persuade the hunters. He makes the guild alert faster than I thought. I thought by the time he reports the guild, I can already see some of the monsters, but with this, the city will be able to prepare better against the stampede.

 Chapter 153 - Gathering At The Guild

    Unlike before when only orcs attacked the city, now there are many types of monsters attacking. As for orcs, several average guards can take care of one of them. And several experienced hunters can fight the Orc General. That''s why even the people in this city doesn''t really mind about it since they believe that the guards and hunters can handle it.


    Back then, it was just groups of orcs who were lured to this city because of an idiot. And the numbers of the orcs thate can be handled pretty easily. Even experienced intermediate level mage can defeat several of them at once.


    But now, not just the monsters varies. Theye inrge numbers as well. And some monsters are even stronger than Orc Generals. Now it''s more appropriate to be called stampede than thest one.


    The bell that mark the approaching danger was rung. It was also a call for all hunters to go to the guild. Although I have my own mission, I need to go to the guild so my hunter license won''t be revoked. If the guild know that I''m in the city but refused a summon from the guild, my reputation as a hunter will be plummeted down and my hunter license will be revoked. I guess I should go over there now and see how the girls are doing.


    As I entered the guild, I see the girls are being surrounded by men. Men who are holding their crotch in pain. I guess after a while away from this city, Ka''s nickname, the Nutcracker. Has been forgotten. And these guys are trying to flirt with the girls.


    Kron is together with the guild leader discussing something. So I don''t have any business with him since we have discussed our n, so I just go to where the girls are. And the surrounding eyes are confused to see that a man can approach the girls safely. They don''t know that the Nutcracker is my girlfriend.


    The four girls standing side by side would of course gain everyone''s attention. Especially when all of them are beauties. And I''m proud that two of them are my girlfriends.


    Ang, Ka, Sophie, and Shirley. Only these four from my group thate here. Lina is not a hunter and she stays in the hotel. Candy and Ms. Wendy both also aren''t hunters. And they are looking for a chance to grab the governor along with some other agents.


    "How''s your hunt, Roy?" Shirley asked me worriedly while the other girls are still calm.


    "Not bad. Just one more and I would have killed exactly two dozen."


    I said while looking around and see that there are no cult members with HGB in their mouth in the guild.


    While everyone is talking to each other, the guild master and Kron are trying to gain everyone''s attention.


    "Everyone! Be quiet!"


    Once everyone is quiet, the guild master continued talking.


    "There''s a monsters stampedeing. And the monsters thate today is more in numbers and more varies so there are many kind of monsters. That''s why the guild ask all of the hunters to participate in protecting the city from the monsters. Of course we will reward you. The reward will be counted ording to how many monsters you defeated."


    The guild master said something I already expected. Then he continued talking but I ignore him since there''s no point in listening to someone who knows nothing. Should I tell him about the cult? And why is he talking for too long when it''s an emergency?


    "Come with me."


    I told my party to follow me. And I approached the still speaking guild master.


    "Alright, that''s enough. We wasted too much time listening to him talking. You already know what''s going on so you can arrange for yourself what you''re going to do. I''ll be borrowing the guild master. Kron, you alsoe with me."


    Everyone is confused to see me suddenly take control of the situation and shamelessly stopped the guild master''s speech. The guild master was angry but before he said anything, I used air magic to reduce the air he breathes in so he will have difficulty breathing and not have enough air to speak.


    "Just shut up and follow me. We''re going to your office."


    I made the guild master walked in front of us and lead us to his office, where I undone my magic so he can breathe normally again.


    "What do you think you''re doing?!" The guild master was angry that I stopped his speech.


    "Before you''re getting angry, I''d like to introduce her to you. She is Shirley, his majesty King Albert''s sister." I just quickly introduced Shirley to him.


    "What?!"


    "Nice to meet you guild master of Melk city. Like he said, I''m Shirley. The king''s sister." Shirley offered her hand for a handshake, but instead the guild master kneeled in front of her.


    "I apologize for my long speech. I know how important time is to you."


    So this damn guild master know the speech is too long? I shouldn''t have introduce Shirley and just leave right away. This guy is so annoying.


    "Anyway, we don''t have much time if you''re going to continue talking so I stopped you. Other reason is because we''re here on a mission which you will keep as absolute secret. Got it?"


    "What kind of mission does her highness want me to help with? I''ll do my best to help you in anything." The guild master agreed to help right away.


    But instead of answering, Shirley is looking at me in confusion. I guess it''s because we never made a n about this so her mind can''t keep up. And this is also something I juste up with after I entered the guild so of course no one knows about this.


    "I''ll do the talking. We''re here to ask you about everything rted to yesterday''s quest. What''s the quest is about? Who submitted that request? If the one who submitted the request didn''t came here personally, who''s the messenger? Any hunter who participate in that quest, or even civilians. The receptionist who took care of that request, and even what you did yesterday."


    Hearing what I said, those who knows the truth should have realized why I''m asking this. Well, except for Ang who''s making a confused expression on her face. But it''s good that she stays silent.


    "What is your mission is all about?" The guild master asked.


    "You''ll know soon enough. After the stampede is over, everything will be revealed. That''s why you need to cut your speech so everyone is better prepared against the stampede. Do you have any report about yesterday''s request?"


    The guild master then looking for several written report and asked me what kind of request it was. I just told him the one with cheap reward and says for the good of the city. He found one instantly.


    I checked the name of everyone rted to the quest and I see¡­ no one I know of. I don''t know anyone whose names are written in this report so I just gave it to Ka.


    "Ka, find everyone whose name is written here."


    "You asked me that because you don''t know anyone, right? Maybe you should try to memorize everyone''s name, you know? It will make things easier for all of us." Ka replied.


    "I''ll try but no promise. I''ll leave now to hunt those that I can see. I''ll leave the rest to you. Guild master, help them in any way you can."


    After I said that, I left the guild master''s office. Now Ka and the guild master will help each other to see if there are other cult members rted to the mission. Some of them might not have a HGB in their mouth after all. They will see how the people in the list are rted to the governor. And once they found one still in this city, Ka can report it to one of the agents and have the agents investigate.


    The guild is already empty after I left the office. Seems like the hunters have arranged where they will be ced and what their job is.


    Now, it''s time to go for another hunt.


    Outside the guild, many people are running about in panic after hearing the stampede ising. I see Hill''s people disguising themselves as this city''s guards trying to calm them down and told them to stay in their house. The citizens will only be evacuated once the monsters have entered the city, so they were told to stay in their house first.


    But there are still many travelers who don''t have any ce to stay. Only those people are arranged to go to any one of the evacuation spot that Ms. Wendy has prepared. And so I''m looking to see if there are someone among them who has a HGB in their mouth.


    And I see three of them staying in one location. So they are really hiding among the citizens.


    I didn''t try to do anything to make the people panic even more. I just inform Hill''s people and some agents who''s disguising themselves and hiding among the crowd about the cult members that I saw.


    Ms. Wendy told me that they have prepared a n in case that the cult members is hiding among the crowds. I should believe in them and search for another cult members.


    When I was talking to one of the agents, the three cult members are talking with two other people who doesn''t have HGB in their mouth. When the agent I''m talking to hear that, he looked at them and told me that the two guys are some kind of gang members in the area.


    Well, if the ones the cult members interacting with are bad guys, everyone already agreed to just kill them along with the others if they can''t be captured.


    In any case, my job here is done and I will go look in another location. And while I''m going to the next area, I see that the monsters are already fighting the hunters near the gates.


    I hope everyone will be safe.

 Chapter 154 - Taking Prisoners

    I checked on several other evacuation spots and see that the agents over there can handle everything well. I just told them if there are any other suspicious people other than those who has HGB in their mouth. Then I left everything to them.


    It''s good to have people who are smart and experienced as allies. While I''m just one man from the future who has terrible memory, other people can cover me in anything I''mcking.


    As of now, the monsters that tried to enter the city are only weak monsters like boars, and goblins. Butter, more monsters wille. No matter how much hunters we have protecting this city, it will still be difficult for them to block the gate. Casualties are unavoidable.


    And I''m being pessimistic again. Enough, me! Think happy thoughts, think happy thoughts!


    Our n worked. Candy managed to capture the governor. The monsters stopped attacking and most of them are either dead or retreating. Then the next day, Shirley will make a speech and tell everyone about the cult''s n of destroying the world.


    Then everyone will unite against the cult. Albert will try to contact other countries and make an alliance against the cult. And then I can rest easy and just leave everything to Albert since the cult will be busy protecting themselves from the joint attack of multiple countries.


    That''s the ideal future I wished. And I still hope there will still be a better future than that. That''s why I have to believe in everyone and make sure we stop the stampede and captured the governor.


    I looked at Candy''s group who are responsible in capturing the governor. They are still waiting for the right moment to attack. Since he is being guarded as well, it''s difficult for Candy and the others to attack right away. And I also told them about expert level mages can detect presences, so they are a bit far from the governor.


    After seeing Candy and the others still didn''t move and stay in their hiding spots, I left to find another separated cult members to kill.


    I found one entering empty houses and stole the valuables inside. I guess this is a good time for thieves to rob into someone''s house. Some actually entered a house with someone still in it, but they were killed because the owner of the house has prepared a trap and attacked the robbers from behind.


    And this one I found is pretty strong. He should be an intermediate ice mage. Some of the houses he enters have some people inside. But he didn''t kill them and just took the valuables.


    I don''t know why he didn''t kill anyone, but I don''t care. I''ll just kill him right away like I did to the others.


    "Roy, remember to not just kill anyone you see. Capturing them and pluck out the explosive devices from their mouth is better. Wendy already told you where to put the prisoners, right?" Victoria reminded me again to not kill everyone.


    "But we don''t have any other Magic Restriction tools, right? The only one we have is with Candy for the governor''s use only. If we captured them, they will just st themselves out."


    "I have a n for that. Let''s capture him first and I''ll show you how."


    Curious about Victoria''s n, I tried to capture the guy. Does she want me to dislocate his joints? That might be a good n.


    While I''m above the rooftop of a building, I aimed Victoria who has transformed into a grappling hook at the man.


    "Aaaah!"


    The hook struck his shoulder and pierced it. Then I reel him up to the roof as he screamed in pain.


    "You dare!"


    "I dare. Go sleep."


    I knock him out of his consciousness and bring him to where Ms. Wendy told me to put the prisoners at.


    At the location, Victoria separate herself from me and grabbed a rope prepared by the agents.


    "Just rope isn''t enough, you know? Want me to dislocate their joints?" I asked.


    "We''ll do both. You''ll dislocate his joints first and I''ll tie him up."


    That''s the safest option we have. So I dislocate the guy''s joints. Just both shoulders, elbows, legs, and knees. I think that''s enough.


    "How will you tie him up to make him not use his magic?" I asked her as I pluck out the HGB along with some of his teeth as well.


    "Did you just pluck out his teeth?" Victoria asked.


    "Just two of them. He''s unconscious so he won''t notice the pain until he''s awake."


    Victoria sighed hearing that. She then in her humanoid form approached the man while carrying the rope.


    "You know how mages are usually aiming their palm at their target when they cast their magic? It wasn''t like that in the past but it is now. So why don''t we tie him up with both his palm in his cheek? He won''t dare to use magic then."


    Then I watched Victoria makes the man''s arm crossed in front of his chest, with the palm of his right hand is touching his left cheek and the palm of his left hand is touching his right cheek.


    I see now! So if he tried to use magic, he would end up attacking himself. And even if by any chance he managed to untie the rope, his body can''t move because I dislocated his joints. But isn''t that stupid?


    "Victoria. They are someone who will blow their own heads with an explosive devices hidden inside his mouth. What make you think they won''t cast their magic to kill themselves?" I asked the w in Victoria''s tying method.


    "Hmm¡­ you''re right. Well, even if he died, it''s fine, right? We can then tell Wendy that we captured some of them but theymitted suicide by attacking themselves with magic. Well, if this works, it will be useful for the next captives. If not, we will try other method until it works."


    So cruel. What is this? A psychological experiments? We''ll see if hemit suicideter or not? We''re treating them like a guinea pigs. I think killing them is still more humane than letting them like this.


    "Victoria. Tie his hands with both his palms touching his crotch. That way, unless they are crazy, they won''t even think of casting any magic. Though this only works with men." I suggested an idea to her.


    "You might be right. But what''s the difference between aiming at their own heads and aiming at their own crotches?"


    "Well, if it was me given those two options, although I don''t want to die, I will have fewer resistance in blowing my own head than blowing down there. That''s a forbidden area where no men dare to walk through whether out of their own volition or not." I exined the reason why to Victoria.


    "Okay." Victoria replied as she unties the rope and ties it again as I told her to.


    As long as the enemies we captured are men, they won''t dare to cast any magic to kill themselves. And unlike aiming at their own heads, even if they cast any magic like this, it won''t necessarily kill them.


    After the first prisoner was caught and tied properly, I left to look for the next one.


    Maybe it''s because most of the cult members are leaving that there are fewer members on the street. BU I still managed to find two more people to capture. Both are men so I tied them like Victoria did to the first one.


    Then I found again but this time, they are in a group. Five of them are gathering and discussing about something.


    "What? Just five of us? Where''s the others?"


    "I don''t know. I met them yesterday and they are all okay back then. What if that vignte attacked them?"


    "You think a vignte is attacking people without any reason? Some of us who aren''t here never did any crimes. Or what? You think that vignte knows about us and trying to kill us one by one?"


    "Yes." While they are discussing why other members are noting, I jumped out of my hiding spot directly to the middle of them and replied to their question.


    Surprised, they tried to attack me but they are too slow. Before they cast any magic, I already moved behind one of them and knock one person out already.


    Knowing that someone is actually aiming at them, they didn''t stop and panic. They quickly tried to kill me while also looking for a way out of the battle to probably report me to other members. But I won''t let that happen.


    I quickly throw the guy I knocked out to someone who''s looking for a way to escape, while I''m running toward another person and knock him out quickly. Three people down already only leaving two behind.


    One of them knowing that he is no match against me, decisively activate the HGB and blow his own head. Thest one was surprised to see his friend''s reaction and about to do the same when I quickly reach out my hand to inside his mouth and plucked the HGB out and threw it away as it was just activated. It exploded just 2 meters away from me.


    "Who are you?! How do you know about us?!"


    I didn''t answer his question and quickly knock him out as well. Then I plucked out the HGB from the other three and bring them all to where we keep prisoners. Where three people already tied up holding their crotches.


    And so, I managed to get seven prisoners before the strong monsters finally appear and entered the city.


    It will be difficult to capture any more people with this situation so for the next cult members, I''m thinking of killing them right away.

 Chapter 155 - Outside The City

    Meanwhile, after Roy left the guild to capture prisoners, Ka and the others stay behind in the guild master''s office and reading the report from yesterday''s quest.


    Ka asking the guild master if there are any hunters that wanted to take the request as well, but somehow they are either refused or toote to take the request.


    "Well, ording to the receptionist who was in charge yesterday, there were no rejected applicants. Only those who werete in taking the request were rejected." The guild master answered Ka''s question.


    "I see¡­ so where''s the receptionist who''s in charge of this request?" Ka asked the whereabouts of the receptionist.


    "Hmm? She asked for a leave yesterday after her shift was over so she''s noting today. She said that she''s visiting her hometown." The guild master replied.


    "Ka, don''t tell me?"


    "It''s possible, Shirley. So do you know anyone on the list who came here in the guild today because of the emergency?" Ka asked the guild master again.


    The guild master is thinking while reading the list of names of hunters who werete in taking the request. He remembered everyone who entered the guild today since he''s looking at everyone properly. Unlike a certain Aura user who is terrible at remembering people.


    "Now that you mentioned it, everyone rted in that quest didn''te here today. Even those who arete in taking that request. Don''t tell me that they are rted to the stampede and that''s why they all left the city?"


    "You''re actually pretty sharp. Yes, all of them are probably rted to this stampede. What we''re afraid is that if there are someone who is not rted to this stampede is taking part in this quest. They might be killed already."


    Ka returned the report to the guild master and finished her investigation.


    "This¡­ if the people rted to this quest is connected with the stampede, don''t tell me that the governor is¡­"


    "You just need to keep it a secret for a while. We will take care of the stampede and the people causing it. You just need to wait until Shirley revealed everything in public. I hope you will cooperate with us from now on." Ka advised the guild master.


    "¡­I''ll cooperate with you. I hope whoever caused this stampede will get what they deserve." The guild master agreed to cooperate.


    After that, Ka left followed by the others.


    "You don''t need to check on the report anymore?" Kron asked.


    "No need. Everyone is either gone or are in hiding. Roy can take care of those who are in hiding. As for the receptionist, the guild master is a sharp man. He can take care of her. Roy just asked me this on a whim because he is very cautious. Now we just need to take care of the monsters."


    With Roy leaving to do his own job, Ka took charge of leading the party. And Kron left on his own to outside the gate to protect the city.


    "Alright, the monsters should be here soon. Let''s go!" Ka and the girls left as well to protect the city.


    They can just concentrate in defeating monsters since Roy and some agents is taking care of what''s happening inside the city.


    Soon they reached outside the city as the monsters approaching. The battle has just started.


    "Ang and Sophie will be at the front! Shirley will go around the ce and see if there''s anyone who needs help and support them! I will stay behind and heal the injured!" Ka gave the order and the girls moved as she ordered.


    The first wave ising. They are considered weak monsters, but Ka and the girls refuse to let their guards down even knowing they can easily defeat those monsters.


    But they didn''t do anything yet. Because the guild will reward the hunters ording to the numbers of monsters they defeated, most low rank hunters were eager to get some kill. That''s why Ka and the others still reserving their magic for the real battle toe.


    It''s not just Ka''s party who reserved their strength. Some other experienced hunters also saving their strength and let the low rank hunter gain some achievements.


    Ka just stay there looking at her surrounding if there are any injured person, she checked first if the injury is a big one or a minor ones. If it''s a big one, she will cast a healing magic. But if it''s a minor ones, she will let it be despite the curses she received from the injured.


    Sophie and Ang who stays in the front, only casted basic magic to support the others. While Shirley still didn''t do anything and just watching.


    While looking at the battlefield, someone is asking for Ka to heal him.


    "Help! I''m injured!"


    "You can still walk, you can still talk, and your whole body can still move. That''s just a scratch. Endure it." Ka replied calmly as she looked at the guy''s condition.


    "You little¡­ I''m injured here! It''s your job to heal me!" The guy said angrily.


    "No it''s not. To heal someone or not is my decision, not my duty. I''ll heal you if your injury is worse. But if it''s just a scratch, find someone to spit on the wound." Ka still refused to heal the guy.


    And then, a helping from another healer with a higher rank. A B-rank hunter.


    "Just as she said, if you don''t have any major injuries, you can find someone to spit on the wound or maybe cry to your mom about it. The stampede is just beginning and only beginner hunters like you trying to get all the glory with these weak monsters. Most experienced hunters are saving their magic and stamina for the real battle. If you can''t endure a scratch like that, you should leave the battlefield." The female B-ranked healer said as she supported Ka''s decision.


    "Tsk!" The man just clicked his tongue and left. No one knows and no one is interested where he''s going.


    "You''re doing well for someone who has just awakened her magic this year. I''m going to that side. Let''s have a talk after the stampede is over." The girl said that and left before Ka responded.


    "Yeah, sure. If we meet again." Although the girl already gone, Ka still replied.


    Ka doesn''t know who she is as the girl who just spoke to her is not a local hunter. But she feel that her healing magic is more powerful than normal when Ka saw her healing someone and thought she may be able to learn something from her.


    And when Ka is alone again, looking for injured person, someone annoying approaching her again.


    "Not healing my friend just because he only received a scratch? Why are you so discriminating to my friend?"


    The guy who approached Ka is also attending the school so Ka often sees him. And he is a rich man''s son as he has reached intermediate level in wind magic as shown before during the test.


    "Johnathan. If you''re not injured it''s better if you fight instead of being here arguing useless things with me. Bye."


    "Just walking away like that? I''m still better than your boyfriend who doesn''t even participate!" Johnathan provoked Ka.


    They both has history. Or at least it was just Johnathan who think so.


    Johnathan confessed to her during the time Roy was away and he was obviously rejected. And since then, Johnathan always hostile toward Roy even though Roy doesn''t even know that this guy exist.


    So when the stampede happen and he saw Roy taking the guild master to the office like he''s a VIP, he was angry. Then when he didn''t see Roy protecting the city, he found a chance to talk trash about him to his girlfriend and the one who rejected Johnathan, Ka.


    And Ka''s response is, "You''re right."


    Even Ka knows that if Roy''s participated in fighting the monsters, it will be easier for everyone. With him attacking the monsters from behind, everyone can have a better chance. But the danger inside the city still exist. And that''s why Ka has no other choice but to let him fight behind the scene.


    "Hah! So you agree that your boyfriend is such a loser!"


    "No. I said it''s better if he''s participated, but he''s no loser. You''re the loser here. Even though you''re weak you''re pretending to be strong and hadn''t done anything at all. Remember that your intermediate wind magic is weaker than my beginner earth magic during the exam."


    Hearing that, Johnathan was angry.


    "What did you say?! You think I''m useless? I''m just like everyone here who''s reserving their strength. Don''t you understand?"


    "I don''t. After all the next wave ising and the monsters are stronger than the first wave. Orcs, Ogres, Cyclopes, those monsters are not so weak that they can be defeated by your weak magic. You lost your chance in getting any achievements. During the report, your kill count will be zero. No wonder you''re teaming up with someone who cries over a scratch."


    Ka said as she pointed at the monsters that getting nearer. Johnathan also looked over to where she pointed and he really feels like running away this time. He''s just someone who became intermediate because his father bought him a lot of resources and he almost never go out to fight monsters. The only monsters he ever fought was just goblins and he thought he''s already above everyone else of the same age. Of course that thought is gone after seeing Ka''s and Ang''s power during the practical exam.


    "Since you''re saving your strength, I guess it''s time for you to shine¡­ well, he''s gone." Ka looked at Johnathan who is running away back to the city and sighed to his cowardliness.


    Then Ka looked at her party members and see that everyone is about to get serious.

 Chapter 156 - Wyverns Sighted

    As soon as the annoying flea escaped back to the city, Ang who was at the front approached Ka since she thought that Sophie alone is enough for now to take care of the small fries.


    "He''s still bothering you? What an annoying guy he is. And did he juste here and left before he even do anything? He didn''t even beat a single monster?"


    "The idiot must have thinking that it''s better to be here than not at all like Roy. He wanted to one upped Roy, but I believe Roy don''t even remember this guy even though they are in the same ss." Ka calmly replied.


    "That''s stupid. After all no one can have better achievement than Roy in this stampede. He''s the one who makes it possible that we can defend the city on time after all."


    Both Ang and Ka thought that even if Roy didn''t tell the king about the stampede, they believed that he will find another way. Even if he says that he doesn''t really care about the city, the girls are thinking that it must be a lie.


    "Yeah. And even though he always act like it''s fine to run away, he always cares about this stampede. After all this is the event that changed him the most. Well, we should do our parts as well. The next wave ising. We will get busier and busier from now." Ka said.


    "Ka! She needed some healing!"


    Shirley suddenlye with her flight magic while carrying a seriously injured girl. She got injured because her party members saw hopelessness against the stampede and used her as a bait to escape. And Shirley who saw that helped the girl but the girl is already seriously injured by the time shee.


    "I''ll return to the frontline now. You take care of her."


    Ang leaves Ka and returned to the battlefield. Seeing someone seriously injured, and the cause is her own party, Ang needed to do something to relieve her anger. She very much wanted to kill the one who used someone else as a bait, but now is not the time.


    There are also more and more people retreating back to the city. And no one bothers to stop them. All those who stayed thought that those people should escape before they became a burden to the others. Although some of them still insist staying to fight, they were told to not get in the way.


    And as long as there are no one like the new patient that Shirley brought, with someone leave her behind as a sacrifice for their escape, no one really bother to what the other is doing. As for those who sacrifices their own allies, their faces are being remembered by those who stays and witnessed their action. It will be difficult for them to stay as hunters in this city.


    Ka equip a wand and healed the injured girl. Ka has two wands now. Both are from Roy. One is the one he got from a dungeon under a waterfall, and the other is the one he got during his first time diving and treasure hunting. The one she used is the one that Roy got after diving under the sea. The one that improve healing magic slightly.


    Unlike the one from dungeon, this wand is man-made and has limited use. And Ka didn''t hesitate at all to use this wand one time after she saw the girl''s condition.


    Soon the girl is awake.


    "Uuh¡­ Thank you for saving my life."


    "You should thank Shirley as well. If she didn''t notice you, you would have died already." Ka said calmly.


    "Since you''re fine now, I''ll leave. There are many things I need to do." Shirley said her farewell and return back to support other hunters.


    "You''re healed now, but you lose a lot of blood so I suggest you to retreat. But not right away. If you leave now, you might encounter the one who almost killed you. Just leave after a few minutes." Ka said to the girl.


    "Ah! That''s right! Those people used me as a bait! I thought we were friends! Thank you, Ka. You saved my life."


    "No worries. Just rest for a while." Ka said as she continued looking for another injured person.


    The girl looked at Ka for a while and realized she never introduced herself even though they attend the same school.


    "Ka, I''m Bailey. We attend the same school but we never talked before. I know you because you''re popr. I never thought you''re so kind to save my life." Bailey said.


    "Just doing what I can."


    "Hey, Ka. Why don''t we team up after this stampede is over? You can just leave that Roy behind and maybe asked Ang to join. You don''t need someone like him. He''s so weak but somehow he''s the only man closest to you two. It''s a mystery how that happen." Bailey tried to recruit Ka into her new party after leaving her previous one.


    "Not interested." Ka replied without any hesitation.


    "The more you interact with him, the more enemies he will have. Don''t you know how popr you and Ang are?"


    "There''s no point in using threats. He doesn''t care how many people he will make enemies of. Especially at school. Everyone is too weak for him. And enough with this nonsense. You should have regain your strength now. Retreat into the city already."


    "Hah! Defending someone who doesn''t dare to fight here? I wonder what excuse he said to the guild master before." Bailey then retreated back to the city.


    Bailey was also there during the time Roy stopped the guild master''s speech. She saw how Roy acted friendly to the guild master and thought that Roy must be using some kind of connection to not participate in this fight without having his license revoked.


    "Sigh¡­ somehow everyone hates Roy. I''d like to see their faces once they realized that he''s the only reason this city survives. But I think he will keep it secret. And no one will knows his greatness¡­" Ka thought to herself.


    While thinking so, a wolf somehow breakthrough the defense and charged at her. Ka didn''t even spare a look at it as she casted an Earth Spike to grow from the ground and pierced its body.


    And battle also happened everywhere. Sophie has also casted area of effect lightning magic to a crowd of monsters. The power is not strong enough to kill even one of them, but it was good to slow them down and let other hunters kill them. Sophie is still saving her magic.


    Ka also busy fighting ogres while protecting other hunters. She concentrated her magic to make a small, but heavy and fast Ice Spike and aimed if at the ogre''s heart. The ogre died instantly, and Ang already prepared to cast her second magic to defeat the next ones. Making other hunters stunned to see her abilities even though some of them are the more experienced one.


    Some high-ranked hunters and parties already wanted to recruit both Ang and Sophie into their teams. Some of them already asked but of course neither of them wanted to join. Both of them are still happy and enjoy being in Roy''s party with the others.


    And unknowingly, they give Roy another groups of people who hated him. Most of the hunters thought that Roy is just lucky that he''s able to be in a party with powerful girls. No one knows that the girls are powerful because of his guidance. And it''s impossible to think so especially after seeing the number eight on his practical exam.


    Shirley is extremely busy as well. Thanks to her advanced level on wind element, she can fly. And using her flight magic, she covered the whole battlefield and supporting those who are in dangers. She also carried injured people to any healer she could find.


    Although she nned to save her magic strength for the battle, she just can''t stay in the safe ce while the others are risking their lives. So she no longer reserving her magic for the next fight, and just spent it to safe as many people as possible. As a royalty, she believes that she has to protect the people.


    In another ce, Kron is defeating any monsters he could find.


    "You! You dare aiming for my hair?! The hair roots are already gone and you friggin'' monster are still aiming for my hair? How dare you asshole do that! I''m gonna kill you!"


    "They are aiming for your head! They want to kill you and not aiming to make you bald!"


    Kron ignored the people next to him that he managed to save in time and attacked all the monsters nearby.


    "Die, you bastards! I''m gonna kill every single living being targeting the rest of my hair!"


    "Like I said, they are aiming at your head! Not hair!"


    Again, Kron ignored the people around him. He looked at the surrounding and see more and more monsters are being defeated. He thought that it should be finished soon, but he was wrong.


    He looked at the sky and see a group of wyvern flying above the clouds toward the city. And that''s not all.


    "Shit! Those wyverns carried monsters on their back! You guys protect this line! I''ll report this to the ones behind!"


    Kron can see the wyverns have several monsters on their backs. Just one wyvern can make chaos inside a city, but a wyvern carrying monsters? Not just this is the first time Kron sees it, this is also the first in history.


    Kron hurriedly used his flight magic and fly back to the city. He didn''t forget to tap the earring he got from Roy to call Sonia and told her to report this to everyone.


    Now the monsters invasion is truly unavoidable with an attack from above.

 Chapter 157 - Steering A Wyvern With A Spear

    "Alright, we only got seven of them but I think they''re more than enough. As for the next enemies, I''ll just kill them."


    After putting all of the prisoners to the allocated ce, I woke them all up to see their reactions.


    "Uhh¡­ where is this?"


    "I can''t move at all!"


    "We''re all being captured? How does he knows about us?"


    "More importantly, my HGB are gone. I can''t even kill myself here."


    "What? Mine is gone too! And why are we all being tied up with our hands holding our crotches?"


    Everyone woke up in confusion. And then they see me wearing a mask looking at them.


    "Hey, you! It''s you who captured us, right? What do you want?"


    It was the 7th man who asked. I numbered them from the first to the seventh ording to the time I brought them here.


    "More like what do you want? Why do you people want this stampede to happen?"


    "¡­"


    None of them answering my question. Seems like even though they know the situation they are in, they still won''t talk.


    "You think just because you took those explosives from our mouth we can''t kill ourselves? You''re dead wrong!"


    The third man suddenly casted his magic while both his hand is aiming at his crotch. It''s obvious what happened next.


    "Aaaargh! My dick! It burns! My balls!"


    The third man screamed in pain as he burnt his own balls with fire magic. Of course the rope that tied him was burnt as well, but I dislocated his joints before so he won''t be able to move even without the rope.


    And everyone watched him in horror as his crotch area is burning.


    "Well, that''s the reason why I tied you up in this weird position. He''s going to die soon. I don''t need your answer today. You can give me the answer tomorrow. Well, if I survive the stampede. Don''t worry, after the battle is over, someone should be here to give you meal and treat you like prisoners. You have the options to let go of your worldly desires like your friend did over there and dies in pain, with no balls, or wait until tomorrow and give me the answer. After giving your answer, you can ask me or my friends to kill you. Properly without inflicting too much pain. Then, see you tomorrow."


    I left the prisoners and soon after I left that ce, Sonia appears in front of me.


    "Roy! Bad news! Wyverns ising! And they brought monsters on their back as they fly to this city!"


    "Well, that''s indeed a bad news. Have you told the others yet?"


    "I did. You''re thest one I informed." Sonia said.


    Why does she loves to give me the reportst?


    "How''s the others?" I asked about the others.


    "Ka, Sophie, Ang, and Shirley are still doing their best in defending the city. Kron is going to inform the guild master about the wyverns. Most people refused to leave their house, but we still evacuate some of them. As for Candy and Wendy, they are still waiting for a chance to attack."


    The only ones protecting the city are the guards of this city. The ones who aren''t part of the cult. And they are weak. I should have the girls return to the city and have them fight the monsters inside the city.


    "Sonia. Tell the agents once they secured the civilians, to fight the monsters inside the city. Are there any hunters left in the city?"


    "There are many who escaped from the fight after the first wave. They can''t be relied to protect the city."


    "Well, if they want to live, they have no choice but to fight. Tell Hill''s people who are free to help inbat as well." I said.


    "Alright. Did you capture some people as prisoners? Wendy will be mad if she found out you just kill everyone."


    "I captured seven of them. One of them killed himself. As for the rest, I don''t think they want to kill themselves after seeing how that guy died."


    "And how did he die?" Sonia asked me curiously.


    "He burnt his own balls and screamed in pain."


    "Ouch! And what will you do to them?"


    "I will go back tomorrow. After the stampede is over, I''ll have Hill treat them as prisoners."


    "He means prisoners in Mellian. Which is something I want to see again!" Victoria said happily.


    I didn''t deny what she said. I''ll just left them to Hillter.


    Sonia then disappear. I jumped to a top of a building and see that the wyverns areing. They are indeed carrying other monsters on their backs.


    "Victoria. You will help protect the city. I''ll summon you when I need you."


    "Okay."


    Victoria turned into her human form and left to somewhere. We won''t be acting together in the same location because we can cover more grounds this way.


    I also start looking for good projectiles to shoot the wyverns from the top of a building. Any rocks, knives, anything I can throw I grabbed them and put them on top of a building. I thought that as long as I can damage the wing, the wyvern will fall along with other monsters. And they will all die.


    Even if they don''t die, they should be heavily injured falling from that height. If I''m correct, the monster should be targeting the most crowded ce and they won''t start descending until they found it.


    The wyverns has passed the gate. I saw a man flying into the city before that. That must be Kron reporting. Even if he reported it, we stillcked people. I hope this wyverns are thest waves.


    Once a wyvern get into my range, I shot it with several projectiles at once hoping that some of them will hit. Even if one of them hit, the wyvern might lose bnce and some of the monsters might fall. That''s what I hoped for. Although Victoria isn''t here with me, I can still shoot Air Cannon despite theck of uracy.


    The projectiles hit the wyvern. A knife stabbed the right wing and a stone hit its head. Another knife hit its chest and a pot hit a monsters on its back and makes it fall. I should have grabbed more solid objects than a pot. It didn''t do any damage. And knives are useless unless they stabbed the wing. Even the wyvern''s p of its wings can alter the direction. Next time I should just go with stones and more solid objects.


    The wyvern lost bnce mid-air and some monsters fallen from that height. Looking at the location they are falling, there should be hunters below them. Hunters who escaped first after seeing the enemies. I''ll let them do some works with the weakened monsters and continue aiming for the ones above.


    I want to take on the next wyvern, but they seem to notice I''m targeting them and descend into a safe height. Where even if the monsters fall from that height, they would all survive without any major injuries.


    Should I just fight them in a close rangebat?


    Wait! I have a better idea!


    I called Sonia and waited for a while until she appears. She must be extremely busy today.


    "What''s wrong, Roy? Calling me again so quickly."


    "Contact Candy and ask her if I should shot down one of the wyvern to the governor''s location."


    "Understood."


    Once the monsters fell, there would be chaos even a small one at the governor''s pce. I should think that his guards are all powerful enough to handle these monsters.


    Then once they are busy fighting the monsters, Candy, Ms. Wendy, and other agents could capture the governor. That''s a good n I thought.


    Soon Sonia returns with a respond for Candy.


    "She said to do it. And if possible, bring down more than just one wyvern."


    "Alright, I''ll try."


    Sonia disappear again as I''m thinking of how to lure the wyvern over there. I thought it was a good n but I haven''t thought of having them going over that location.


    Well, I''ll just choose the easiest one. Good thing they descended a bit. Enough for me to jump over to them.


    I moved to a taller building and waited until a wyvern get close to me. I covered my legs with Aura to make my jump even higher.


    I easilynded on top of the wyvern''s head. All the monsters looked at me and wanted to kill me right away, but they have terrible footing on the back of the wyvern. The wyvern also shook its head and try to shake me off its head, but I held on really well.


    I grabbed my spear, stabbed its right eye, and tried to control its flight. I used the spear as a lever to control its flight, but it was so heavy! All the stories I read about trying to control a flying monsters like this are lies! It''s impossible to control it without having any strength! Even an Aura user like me is having difficulty controlling its flight.


    Some monsters already fallen to the ground, but I''m still forcing the wyvern''s flight direction toward the governor''s pce. I don''t need to be right above it. Just close enough and then I can let the monsters do their own things.


    Right now, the wyvern is flying directly to the governor''s ce while slightly descending. With this, the wyvern should bending just within the governor''s ce. I guess this is enough.


    I jumped away from the wyvern before anyone noticed me, and went into hiding to look for another wyvern.

 Chapter 158 - Killing An Expert Level Mage

    One wyvern goes down bringing a dozen of monsters along. And from the street, several peoplee out and tries to subjugate them. They are actually the king''s agents and they are pretending to be on the losing side so the governor''s guard will take action.


    The civilians nearby have been evacuated so it''s fine to use powerful magic, but the agents didn''t do that and keep pretending being weak until the governor''s guards make action.


    I think it''s fine for me to leave and try to get another one fall down here. Although the governor is still hasn''te out, he will soon if he notice the monsters are here. That''s when Candy will take action.


    I jumped over a building and this time, there''s another wyvern close to me. I just shot its wing and the wyvern lost its bnce and dropped all the monsters on its back. All fallen near the first wyvern.


    Since Ipleted my mission, I return to my search of separated cult members. But that''s when I noticed a gate is being broken through. People are running from that gate.


    I looked over to that side and see that the hunters are running in fear of their lives. Not caring that they are letting innocent people die. I should have told Ka to split the group so they can also protect that side.


    There are four gates to enter this city. Ka and the others are protecting the north side where the scout says the monsters from that side is more than the other gates. And the ones that got broken through was the south gate.


    Hmm? I see a ck mantis protecting people on that side. Must be Victoria. She''s disguising herself into a giant mantis and pretend to be someone''s summoned monster. I guess I should help her since my job here is done.


    Even though most hunters are weak, that shouldn''t make monsters able to prate our defense easily. There must be cult members disturbing the defense over there. And when I got closer, I can see that I''m correct. Some hunters who are running away are actually members of the cult with HGBs in their mouth. Maybe the one I killed was the cult members who should have disturbing the defense in the north gate. That''s why the north gate is safe.


    I don''t know about other gates but since the monsters has started entering through the south gate, I should take care of those monsters who have entered and those people who caused it.


    I approached a group of people who has HGB in their mouth and sh them with my spear. These people actually happily running around while everyone is panicking. I mean even without looking inside their mouth, I can see tell if they are a psychopath when they are smiling like that. Though I killed them all in one go.


    This time, I no longer has any desire to capture anyone. Killing them is easier and faster. Those seven prisoners¡­ six prisoners are enough for us.


    I found another group hiding from the monsters and the hunters. They are also members of the cult. So I''m going to them for the kill.


    It''s nice for them to keep explosive devices in their mouth. Making it easier for me to find if they are enemies. I hope they will keep the tradition forever. Well, until the cult is destroyed. Not forever.


    I ran toward the new enemies, and once I''m about twenty meters, one guy suddenly turned their head at my location despite there are walls between us.


    He''s an expert level mage!


    I stopped instantly and entered one house and not moving at all pretending I''m a civilian looking for a ce to hide. I''m still within his range but I pretend I don''t know and hide from the monsters. Lucky that the house I entered is an empty one. The owner must have been evacuated by the others.


    I can see through the wall that the one who noticed me is talking to someone while pointing at my direction. His finger is pointing directly at my face. Expert level mages are scary.


    I''m still wondering how Veronica didn''t notice me when I was so close to her back then. My theory is that she let down her guard. Or maybe, just like the rich students at school. Their parent gave them resources and they just continued cultivating without getting any experience against monster.


    And Veronica is being nurtured by the cult. Since she''s an important figure for the cult, she is being protected even when she''s already expert level. And any enemies encounter is being taken care of by her guards so she never had a chance to fight for real. But with her strength, it was still enough for her to kill lower level mages.


    Well, for now, her information for this stampede can be trusted. That''s all that matter. As for after the stampede, maybe I can arrange it so she can meet Albert. He will know if she''s telling the truth or not.


    I look at the group I''m stalking and they seem to still be wary at me. Maybe pretending to hide is the wrong answer.


    Instead of staying still, I move about inside the building I''m in pretending that I''m a thief hoping for fortunes during this dangerous time. This is more normal than hiding even though there are no enemies here.


    The expert level mage now talking to the others and looking at his expression, I think he''s letting his guard down. Wait, no! He''s asking someone to check on me! I need to act more like a thief now.


    I exited the building and go for another ones while rummaging the ce. Now the ones whose job is to stalk me will know that I''m just a petty thief.


    I keep moving from one building to another while also making sure that I''m closing the gap between me and the expert level mage. I don''t know why they are stopping there, but the longer they stay there, the more chance I will have.


    While still being stalked, I pretend to enter the house next to the expert level mage making them think that I''m just a thief by grabbing some valuables. There''s a reason why I''m entering this house. Mainly to kill the expert level mage. There''s wall right between me and the expert level mage. If I''m using my full power to crash this wall, I can easily kill him.


    While crouching and pretending I''m stealing some things, I prepared my Aura around my body but I concentrate more on my legs for the speed. Using a spear is difficult in this situation so I will rely on my fist first.


    One of his allies is approaching him. My chance is when his ally is talking to him.


    With him in front of me, and a stalker on my back, I have no escape route unless I kill them. Then I saw the neer approached the expert level mage. The mage turned his head slightly to look at his friend and that''s my chance!


    While he''s slightly distracted, I crashed my body to the wall and destroy it. Then I went through the wall and attacked the expert level mage who has a confused expression on his face.


    I concentrate my Aura to my right hand, then with my hand as a spear, I stabbed the expert level mage right through his heart. I can see really well how my hand pierced his heart. To make sure he really died, I moved my fingers I covered with Aura and destroying the heart.


    Then I pulled out my hand as the expert level mage is falling to the ground, and I kicked with my left leg to the one who just spoke to him.


    There are five people here. The expert level mage and two others are staying here. Then the neer who I just kicked to death, and one person who stalked me under the expert level mage''s order. I have killed two and three more to go.


    The two here already preparing to cast their magic, but I''m faster than them. I took out two throwing knives and threw them at the two mages. The knives pierced their hearts. I have a really good uracy, you know?


    Then without looking on them, I entered the wall I destroyed and chase after the stalker who has started to escape.


    With my 360 degree vision, I can see the other four already dead and this one is thest one. He didn''t even bother to check on his allies. The cult and its members are truly ruthless.


    Seeing I''m getting closer to him, I saw he''s smiling. He didn''t prepare any magic so why would he smile?


    Then I remembered that he has an explosive in his mouth. If I get to close to the explosion, I won''t be able to leave unharmed. So I retreated back before I get to close to him.


    "Damn you cultist and your explosives!" I said to distract him and it worked.


    "How did you-"


    Before he finished his words, I already threw a knife at his heart.


    "Phew, that was terrifying. I should check carefully again next time if there are possibly another expert level mages I will face. I did this one horribly and took a lot of time killing them all. I should leave now before someone elsee."


    I left the location and continue going to the south gate to stop the monsters from destroying the city. I can only hope the other three gates are protected well.

 Chapter 159 - Saving People

    "As expected, sneak attack suit me best."


    "You just stole my kill! Did you forget that the more monster I defeated, the more time I will have and then it will be your turn to increase your summoning element?"


    "I didn''t forget. I just thought that surviving is more important. Killing enemies quickly is better than spending too much time on just one."


    After killing the expert level mage and his group, I regrouped with Victoria who''s fighting monsters near the south gate. Thanks to her the numbers of monsters are declining and more people able to evacuate with the guidance of Hill''s people.


    She''s still in her ck mantis form, so now for others it looks like I''m her master. Of course I''m still wearing my mask so no one know that the master of this ck praying mantis is the same guy who throw his slime at a practice target. And we''re a distance away from other people so no one noticed us talking.


    As soon as I reached here, I see Victoria is struggling against a Cyclops. Must be because she isn''t used to her mantis form yet. And she doesn''t want any witness to know that she is my summon. She really knows me well.


    While the Cyclops is busy fighting against Victoria, Hill''s people used that chance to get the citizens to safety. And now, there are no more witnesses but Victoria doesn''t know about it, so I sneak attacked the Cyclops and killed it.


    "Roy, that Cyclops is the strongest monster that has entered the city through the south gate. The rest of the monsters can easily be handled by other hunters. And if you have taken care of the traitors, the southern area should be safe now. We should split up and see the east gate and the west gate."


    Victoria told me the situation here. Seems like this Cyclops is the strongest monster that break through the gate. Although there are also other monsters that being carried by the wyverns that has entered the city, the south gate should be fine now.


    "Alright. You will go east and I will go west. On the way, there should be several monsters in the city that has trespassed by riding on the wyverns'' back. Kill them if you see them on the way."


    With this, all the gates should be taken care of. I heard that Kron is in the city so he must be taking care of the monsters he found. I didn''t see him anywhere so he should be near the north gate. I''ll contact Sonia to tell him to check on the south gate after I leave this ce.


    "By the way Roy, I think this mantis form is too hard for me. Do you know what kind of monsters with the most simr form as humans that I can transform to?" Victoria asked me.


    "How about Subus? They seem humanoid enough for you, right? You can just add their wings on your humanoid form''s back."


    "Hmm¡­ I don''t think that''s a good idea. Subus don''t use weapon." Victoria said.


    Right. I forgot that Victoria is expert with swords. I guess that''s why she''s transformed into a praying mantis since their arms are shaped like a de. But its des keep pointing downward so it''s difficult for Victoria to fight normally.


    I''m thinking for a bit to what type of monsters fit for Victoria''s transformation. It must be a humanoid ones. I can tell her to transform into a hobgoblin, but I don''t think she will like it.


    I don''t know much about monsters since I rarely fought against them. I only started to fight monsters in thetter part of my life. Maybe I should give her a transformation from a monster I read in stories.


    That''s right! That transformation is perfect for her!


    "How about a living armor? I don''t know if they are real or not, but a living armor is a perfect choice for you don''t you think? You can shape the armor however you like and have it wield any weapon you like. Just pretend you''re in your normal humanoid form, but this time, you''re wearing armor." I suggested a living armor to Victoria.


    After hearing my word, she transformed into her normal humanoid form instead of an armor. She said this way, it will be easier to imagine the type of armor she want to have.


    Then the armor she transformed into¡­ her helmet looks just like an ordinary knight''s helmet. I only saw the pictures in books though so I don''t know if that''s what a knight''s helmet looks like. But Victoria is from another world so she must be using knights from her previous world as the base of her armor.


    As for her body armor¡­ she transformed into an armor which shows her curves. Is that normal in other world? I don''t know. Then I tried to see through her armor, and it was hollow. Although she doesn''t need to make it empty as other people can''t see inside, she''s still making the inside of the armor is empty just like a real living armor.


    "Perfect. Let''s split up now. Good luck!"


    We split up right away after she has transformed. Now everyone will think that a living armor is protecting them. They will guess that a summoner or maybe a tamer is helping them.


    I''m jumping from building to building and go to the west gate to check the situation. On the way, I see a wyvern ascend to the sky and go somewhere. That one must have just dropping its passengers.


    I looked at where the wyvern appear from and see Kron is there fighting monsters while protecting civilians. He''s all alone. No Hill''s people or the king''s agents are nearby. We reallycking in numbers.


    I have no choice but to help him.


    "Kron! Distract the monsters while I evacuate the people!"


    Kron looked at me and then smiled as he returned to fight the monsters again.


    I look around to find where the people are hiding. They are hiding in separate location.


    Let''s see¡­ there are only ten people here. Nine of them are kids and one is an adult woman. Are they from an orphanage? Or everyone is her children? Doesn''t matter. They need to be rescued.


    Saving kids will be difficult. I can''t tell them to get over here and they willply. They are too scared. I guess I''ll just grab them and gather them in one spot, then bring them all to safety while leaving the monsters with Kron.


    The adult woman is protecting three kids, so I need to find the other six kids and bring them to the woman. The woman and three kids are hiding in an empty restaurant. So the first person I need to save is the one that can be seen by the monsters first.


    Kron should be able to kill them all in an instant, but he''s being careful to make sure he didn''t attack the kids identally. I need to be quick.


    The first kid I grabbed is the one right behind Kron that he''s trying to protect. There are three others behind him but they are further than the first kid. But before I grabbed the other kids, I have something to inform Kron first.


    "From here, straight to that Ogre''s location, no civilians in sight!"


    "Thanks!"


    Hearing my words, Kron cast a powerful Blizzard magic to that spot and killed three monsters and the surrounding area. The buildings are destroyed, but there''s no casualties at all. Well, there''s actually a cult member hiding over there and he died being crushed under that building. But he''s an enemy so it''s fine.


    I grabbed the kid and hold her with my left arm, then I run to where the other two are hiding and carried them all to the restaurant where the woman is hiding.


    "Hide here first. I''ll go get the other three kids."


    "Wait! There should be ten kids here!" The woman shouted.


    Ten? Then there should be one more, right? I didn''t see anyone.


    "David was eaten by that dragon. He''s dead." One kid spoke without hiding his fear. Although he said it''s a dragon, I think he still doesn''t know the differences between dragon and wyvern. But I understood what he meant.


    Hearing that the woman cried. The other kids also cry following their guardian.


    "Don''t cry! You''re still alive so you need to survive first! If you cry, the monsters will know where we hide! I''ll find the other three and then I''ll bring all of you to safety! I promise that those who are here will survive."


    Can''t believe that a wyvern has eaten that kid. I''m toote to save that kid. And that wyvern has flew somewhere else. At least I need to get these kids to safety.


    I left the restaurant and search for the rest of the kids. Thanks to my vision, I can see where they are hiding. It only took me less than two minutes to get those three and return to the restaurant.


    "Alright, everyone is here. Follow me to safety!"


    I carried two kids on each arm, makes four in total. Then I had two slightly older kids on my back. I told them to hug my neck tightly as I carry them. Which left the woman and three kids. The three kids are the oldest three among the kids here so I asked them to run on their own with the woman.


    "Kron! There''s no people within thirty meters!"


    Of course I inform Kron that it''s safe to use powerful magic now.


    After saying that, Kron used her ice-windbination magic just like the one he used in the orc settlement.


    I forgot to tell him to wait until we''re away from him. But it looks like the wind here is not that strong. Even kids can still walk albeit there''s a bit difficulty.


    As I lead the way to one of the evacuation center, I met one of Hill''s men.


    "Hey! Bring everyone here to safety! I have somewhere to go!"


    "Alright, Roy. Be careful!"


    After leaving everyone under his protection, I continue moving to the west gate.

 Chapter 160 - The Captain Of Melk City Guards, Oleg

    Overlooking the west gate, I didn''t see any big trouble here. In fact this area is being taken care of really well mainly by the original guards of this city. Not the fake guards who are actually members of the cult, but the real guards who protect the people.


    Now that I remember, I think in my previous life, the reason why I and other people survived is mainly because the guards are doing their job. They protected us by sacrificing their lives. I should repay that debt.


    If I remember correctly, the guards who saved us was led by the captain of the guards, Oleg. How could I forget someone who saved my life?


    The answer is he didn''t save my life. I saved my own life back then.


    While he and the guards are busy saving people, I was somehow got separated from them.


    Not knowing what to do and afraid to be killed, I entered an empty house and y dead. I lied face down on the ground with Blobby on my back making it seems that I was killed by a slime. Now I remember that there''s a thief entering the house andughed at me seeing I died by a slime. And seeing Blobby didn''t do anything, the thief just took valuables and leave.


    I keep ying dead for two days while only eating any foods that was left behind in that house. I only know some people survived after the stampede because of Oleg''s contribution in the stampede. Although he and most of the good guards died during the stampede.


    Oleg doesn''t have anything to do with me, but thanks to him saving people lives, I can survive and know what to do after seeing there are other survivors like me. If I was alone, I wouldn''t know what to do. That''s why I should repay this debt of not making me the only survivor.


    Well, it''s not like all the survivors are saved by Oleg and his friends, but most of the survivors are. So I want to pay him back for what he did in my previous life.


    This time, there should be more people protecting the city. And we''re on our way to victory, not defeat likest time. And this Oleg is a good guy and I hope we can bring him into our cause and make him our ally.


    I look around and see a guard, who is actually an agent, fighting the monsters. I should ask him about Oleg.


    I approached the agent and spoke to him.


    "Hey! It''s me!"


    "Roy? What is it?"


    "About Oleg. What do you know about him? Tell me in a simple way."


    The agent think for a second and says only one word.


    "Good!"


    That mean he can be trusted. The agent seems to understand my intention in the question.


    "Should we tell him the truth?"


    "¡­I have been a spy in this city for a decade already and from what I know about him, I can trust him 100%. In fact I wanted to bring him to our side when I knew the stampede is going to happen, but I was hesitant to do it. Please tell him the truth. We can have another reliable ally for the battle against the cult."


    "Alright. By the way, how did you guard this side?"


    "I told Captain Oleg that there might be traitor among us. He believed it. Especially after knowing that a lot guards actually took a leave from yesterday at the same time. And those people are nowhere in sight not even trying to help. So after I told him, he told those he can trust to kill anyone who''s about to retreat back to the city. If they are retreating to the forest, then we don''t need to kill them. Just that."


    No wonder I see several corpses near the gate. Some are wearing the guard uniform. And some of them have HGB in their mouth. Although some of them don''t have it. I guess he''s just being careful.


    "Alright, I''ll talk to him. Good luck to you!"


    "Yeah! You too!"


    I guess he''s very dedicated in protecting the city. He wouldn''t even mind throwing his life away to protect the people in my past life.


    The hunters fighting on this side, some of them have a fearful expression. Can''t be helped if they know that they will be killed if they are retreating.


    Since there are no more cult members in sight, I guess it should be fine for them to retreat now. And let them fight monsters inside the city.


    I approached Oleg, and when he saw me, he threw an Ice Spike to my face!


    "Hey! I''m not an enemy!"


    "Who are you?" He asked when he saw that I dodged his Ice Spike.


    "I''m the guy who made trouble during the practical exam!"


    "That was you? And how do I know you mean well? You''re wearing a mask!"


    Does wearing a mask make me a bad guy? Maybe.


    "It was because what I did that day that the stampede was dyed for a few days. If not for me, this city would be destroyed a few days ago."


    "You know about the stampede before it happen? Who are you?" Oleg asked me my identity again. I guess it''s fine to show him my face.


    "I am¡­" I lowered my mask and before I told him who I am, Oleg noticed my identity.


    "Eight? You''re Eight?"


    "What''s that?! My nickname?"


    I''m surprised that I have a nickname. But to think that nickname is from the result of my strength that day¡­ that''s hrious! Since he knows who I am, I put on the mask back on to cover my face.


    "Yes. We had a goodugh because of your show of strength that day. And why should I trust you?"


    "Me, the guard who told you there are some traitors among the guards, and some other are here by the order of the king." I exin it in a simple way.


    "So you mean the king know the stampede is going to happen and let it be instead of stopping it?" Oleg asked.


    "Stopping ''them'' you mean. This stampede also happen in other cities as well. And letting it happen is so that people know the danger of the organization behind this. You''ll know about it soon after the stampede end. If we still alive by then."


    "What do you mean by that?"


    Instead of answering, I walked to a corpse of the guard who was killed when he was about to retreat and plucked the HGB from the inside of his mouth.


    "Explosive device. Most of the members of this evil organization have this things inside their mouth. We let the stampede happen so we can also kill some of the members as well. Because if we just stop the stampede, the real problem won''t end."


    Oleg is stunned seeing the HGB in my hand. To proof that it''s an explosive, I pour a little magic in it and throw it away. It exploded when it was about ten meters away. Does that mean I''m getting faster?


    Back then when I threw it away after I took it from the other Sam''s mouth, it exploded after just five meters. I guess I''m stronger now.


    "An organization whose members have those things in their mouth? How cruel."


    "Well, there seem to be some of them left in the city. And someone with high position is also a member which we are trying to capture as we speak."


    "Is he¡­?"


    "I''ll leave that to your imagination. For now, I can assure you that there are no other cult members in this area. You should let them retreat into the city. Some monsters already entered the city. It''s better for these coward to enter the city and encounter those monsters instead of the civilians. What do you think?"


    Oleg think for a moment and quickly made a decision.


    "Alright. I''ll tell my men to stop killing the cowards. What will you do now?" Oleg asked.


    "My job is to kill the members of this organization who''s hiding among the crowd and also kill some monsters as well. But seeing how well you''re doing here, I guess I''ll go to another ce."


    "Wait! Before you go, promise me that you will tell me everything you know!"


    Hmm? I will tell him of course, but why is he so motivated?


    "Why?"


    "Whatever you''re into, I''m joining you guys."


    "Well, I''m thinking of inviting you so it''s good that you''re willing to join us. You can ask your friend over there. Then, see youter." I pointed at the agent I talked to before and then left the ce immediately.


    Now the west area is doing well, so I should move to another ce¡­ I thought. But seeing there are more wyverns in the skies, I started to think that it''s better to escape.


    No! I shouldn''t be pessimistic yet! I must have faith to everyone here! They are doing their best to protect the city! And the wyverns don''t have any passengers on their back. They also just keep watching the city without going down at all.


    For now, I should go to the other gates. The East gate is where Victoria went to and the north is where the girls are. I''ll go check on the girls first. Victoria is fine since she doesn''t take any damage at all.


    As for Kron¡­ I can see him moving to another ce to fight the monsters inside the city. Since I don''t see any more civilians outside, I think it''s fine to leave him alone now.

 Chapter 161 - Showing My Strength To One Annoying Guy

    The north gate is where the monsters are the strongest and more in numbers than the other gates. But the hunters protecting that side is also the strongest. Kron was supposed to lead this area but he left to fight the monsters inside the city, so there''s no leader here. But I think it''s still fine.


    From what I heard from Sonia, It was thanks to Ka. She didn''t step forward as the leader. She was just simply telling those who stays to stick with their party members and do what the leaders of each party members says. She''s a smart girl.


    While on the way, of course I killed the cult members on the way. Even in this location, there are traitors among the hunters. But thanks to Ka''s decision to have each party take care each area, no monsters entering the city.


    I don''t see anyone left who are fighting the monsters has HGB in their mouth. Then I can left this ce to them. I''ll just go far behind the enemy and kill them from the back. I''ll go tell Ka first.


    I approached Ka who seem to be just finished healing a patient.


    "Alright, you should be healed."


    "Thank you, Ms. Healer. When this is over, will you be so kind to have a dinner with me?"


    Hmm? This guy just shamelessly flirt with my girlfriend in this situation. Well, knowing how beautiful she is, I think it must have happened many times before Ie here. Ka also has a tired expression when she heard that.


    "No thanks. But I think my boyfriend will agree toe with you if you ask. He loves free meal. Sorry, that was wrong. Meals, I mean. He eats at least five portions for himself. You can ask him now since he''s here." Ka turned her head toward me.


    Then following her, the guy also looked at me.


    "So? About the dinner. Can I choose the ce?" I asked the guy.


    "Hell, no! If you already have a lover, you should have told me before!" The guy looked at Ka again.


    "I did. This is the third time you invited me to a dinner and every time, I answered with saying I have a boyfriend. And after the first time I told you, I tried to heal your hearing. It didn''t work as expected." Ka calmly said.


    So this guy shamelessly flirted with her even after being rejected. Did he get injured that many time?


    "I thought you just said you have a boyfriend as an excuse. I never thought you really had one." The guy still shamelessly replied.


    "Then I will tell you this as a representative of all the women in the world. When someone told you she has a boyfriend, whether it was the truth or a lie, it means that they have no interest in you at all."


    Ouch! That must be painful to hear.


    "You¡­ remember this!"


    Why is he saying something a viin would say?


    By the way, I have no intention to let someone who says that to leave just like that.


    I grabbed his neck and raise him up.


    "Remember what? Is that a threat I hear? Should I just feed you to these monsters?"


    "Urgh¡­ Ack¡­"


    I put some strength into my grip as to not let him able to breathe easily. Just enough to not let him pass out.


    "Wait! What are you doing? Release him!"


    A woman whom I presumed to be another healer told me to let the guy go. Is she his party member?


    "He threatened me. I don''t feel safe knowing him alive so I thought it would be best to kill him." I just answered nonchntly.


    "Just release him! He will never do that again!"


    "And how will I know?"


    When I asked the healer, Ka patted my shoulder and tell me to release the guy.


    "Hey, just release him. The stampede is more important."


    "Well, alright. Since my lovely girlfriend say so, I''ll let you live. But next time I heard another threat from you, I''ll kill you and no one will be able to stop me at that time. You''re cool with that, right?" I also asked the healer girl.


    "Yeah. Just please let him go."


    I released my grip and the guy dropped to the ground. The healer girl casted a healing magic on the guy. What a waste of magic.


    "You¡­ "Is that another threat?!"" Before he finished speaking, I interrupted midway.


    "¡­no. Sorry."


    "It''s good that you understand. Ka, the other gates are doing fine. Vi¡­ my summoned monsters is helping in the east gate. And since this is the ce with the most monsters, I thought of helping this area for a bit." I almost leaked Victoria''s name to these two. Good thing I noticed.


    "Alright. Sophie and Ang are fighting the monsters over there. And Shirley tirelessly grabbing the injured people and brought them to any free healer she finds."


    I guess that''s what let this guy be healed by Ka instead of his own friend. It was Shirley who brought him here.


    I look over where the others are, and they are still doing fine. Except for Shirley who seems exhausted.


    "Ka, once I leave, I will also tell Shirley on the way to rest for a while. She''s too exhausted flying all over the ce filled with monsters. Healing magic doesn''t restore stamina much, but it''s still better than nothing. I will tell Shirley to get to you and you will heal her." I said to Ka.


    "Alright. You''re leaving now?"


    "The sooner I go, the more monsters I can defeat. See you soon."


    I left Ka and sneak behind the enemies. It was quite easy as all the monsters are too busy fighting other hunters. I approached Shirley and told her to rest. She agreed seeing that I''m here to help and go directly to Ka''s location while¡­ those two are still with her. What are they talking about?


    I also grabbed some rocks on the way to shoot them down. Then I look for a good location where my shot can reach the whole area. Since Victoria isn''t here, the range is shorter. But it should be fine as long as the monsters are not too far.


    I found a good spot on top of a tree and start shooting some rocks at the monsters that some hunter found it hard to kill.


    After shooting several rocks, I left my spot and go to another spot while grabbing more rocks. Before I took care of the monsters from behind, I should make it easier for others to kill the monsters near the city first.


    Then I see Ka pointing at a monster. Why is she doing that? Does she want me to target that monster? Fine with me.


    After killing the monster she pointed, Ka pointed at another monster. Her face is looking at the two while Shirley just watching them. I guess Ka want me to show how powerful her boyfriend is.


    I keep shooting at the monsters she pointed until she stopped doing it. Then I continued killing other monsters near the city until I run out of bullet/rocks.


    ...¡­.


    Just after Roy left Ka, Shirley appeared and Ka instantly healed her. Then the guy from before who hadn''t move at all said something that Ka can''t ignore.


    "Just who does he think he is? I don''t think he''s a good match with you. You should break up with him."


    "Hey! That''s enough! Let''s just kill some monsters already!" The woman with him told him to stop.


    But before they leave, Ka stopped them.


    "Hey. Do you think he''s weak?" Ka provoked the man.


    "What? Just because he can lift me with one hand doesn''t mean he can be helpful against monsters. Do you think I''m wrong?"


    "Very wrong. Look."


    Ka pointed at a monster. The pair and Shirley looked at where she pointed, and they didn''t see anything of importance.


    "What?" The man asked.


    And soon, the monster Ka pointed at suddenly had its head struck by a rock the size of a human head. The monster then didn''t die, but the hunters around that monster used that chance when the monster lost its bnce to kill that monster.


    "What? What is that?" The man is confused that a rock suddenly appear and hit the monster out of nowhere.


    "Look." Ka told him to look again and pointed at another direction.


    Again, a monster suddenly got struck by a rock.


    "What happened?"


    Then the woman with him noticed what Ka wanted to proof.


    "Don''t tell me that was your boyfriend? What was the magic he used? That doesn''t seem to be an earth magic. It was close to wind magic but it isn''t."


    "I just wanted to show you how strong he is. If you insist of having him as your enemy, you would never notice how you die."


    The man''s expression turned pale, and he left that spot right away. He no longer has any desire to get Ka, or provoking Roy ever again.


    "This¡­ I''m sorry that my friend is rude."


    "It''s okay. Anyway, what is it that you wanted to talk to me about?"


    The woman is actually the healer who helped Ka drive away the man who wanted to be healed even though he was only scratched. And she told Ka that she has something to talk about.


    "I just want to ask if you are a student at a college majoring in healing magic."


    "Well, I still haven''t graduated my introductory school yet. And about going to college, I''m thinking of going there after two years. I still want to improve myself before busying myself with college." Ka replied.


    "Why? You should just go to college already! You can improve your healing magic once you''re there. You don''t have to wait two years!" The woman insisted Ka to attend college.


    Ka was about to answer, but Shirley interrupted the two.


    "Why don''t you stay for a while in this city? After the stampede, there''s an important event that''s going to happen in Melk. If you see it, you will understand why Ka wanted to have that two years."


    "What event?" The woman asked.


    "An event that will shake the world." Shirley answered confidently.


    Of course the event Shirley talked about is making the existence of the cult to be known, and what their goal is. She will be the one to make a speech in front of everyone after the stampede is over and the governor is caught.


    But that seem to be difficult.

 Chapter 162 - Luring The Monsters Away

    Most of the monsters that caused problem to the hunters has been shot by my shoots. And Ka no longer pointed at a monster just to show others my strength. I think I saw that guy who tried to flirt with her keep looking around in fear. Is he looking for me?


    Doesn''t matter. I just hope that he won''t have any intention in making me his enemy ever again. And I hope he will not try to flirt with my girlfriends.


    Now the hunters are joining parties with each other. Since they thought that a party won''t be enough, they made a joint party with two or three parties to fight the monsters.


    I can see that Sophie and Ang also joined with a party. I think they are from that time during the Orc settlement''s raid. But I forgot who they are.


    Then behind the party who fought the monsters, most healers are o standby to heal injured people. Like Ka and that girl from before. Although I know Ka can fight if she want to, during war like this, her healing magic is needed. That''s why she stay behind to heal. She hadn''t attacked at all.


    Well, she is smart so I can trust her decisions. If she want to heal people, that''s fine. If she want to be the vanguard, that''s fine as well. Of course I will protect her no matter what.


    Well, since the monsters that caused the most trouble had been done in, I guess I should go behind the monsters and kill them in closebat. I will lure most of the monsters toward me and I''ll kill them when I find the chance to do it. With this, the number of monsters that being handled by the hunters should be decreasing.


    I was about to jump down from the tree I hid myself on, and A ghost suddenly appear in front of me. So I stopped my descend by hugging the tree. I forgot to be cool and just let my feet stuck on the tree.


    "What is it, Sonia?" I asked the ghost that suddenly appear. Is there some important news I have to hear?


    "¡­You look ridiculous hugging a tree like that. Are you a monkey?"


    "A handsome one. Why are you here?"


    Seeing how she managed to let out a joke, I don''t think it''s a really important news. Maybe just someone rying a message that doesn''t necessarily need me to answer right away.


    Of course thanks to Sonia''s joke, I remember to cover my feet with Aura and stuck them on the trunk of the tree.


    "Just Victoria telling me to inform you that the East gate is fine. You can summon her since she''s going to the north gate."


    "Nice."


    Without any hesitation, I summoned Victoria directly on top of my palm.


    Well, I thought she would be in her slime form, but who would have thought that she''s in her armored form.


    Unprepared by the sudden weight, I pulled back my arm and Victoria falls down to the ground.


    "What was that for?!" Victoria shouted angrily.


    "Sorry. I thought you would be in your slime form."


    "Even if I was, what sort of person summoned their monster while on top of a tree?"


    "I''m on the middle of a tree actually."


    "Shut up!"


    I guess she''s angry because I let her fall down.


    I already said sorry to her. I think that''s enough. More than that, and she might ask for something unreasonable of me. And I don''t want that.


    "Victoria. Did you kill a lot of monsters?"


    "You just changed the topic abruptly without thinking of apologizing?!"


    "I did say sorry, didn''t I? More than that and you would have asked something weird from me. I think that''s enough." I replied.


    "Tsk! Well, the monsters are not that strong. If I have to guess, I think I need to fight several strong monsters to finally have my long awaited 24 hour/day of freedom." Victoria answered my question.


    "Well, if you defeat all these monsters, do you think that will be enough?"


    I let Victoria see the surroundings. There are Ogres, Cyclopes, and more powerful monsters.


    "Yeah¡­ I think these should be enough. But I don''t have enough power to defeat them all. So¡­"


    "So I''ll use you as weapon. Let''s go."


    Before I go, I turned my head to Sonia who is watching the situation.


    "Sonia. Go see how Kron is doing. He''s inside the city. Support him in any way you can."


    "Okay." Then she disappears.


    Victoria already transformed into her default form when I armed her as a weapon. A grappling hook.


    "Roy, how''s the other?"


    "They''re doing fine. Though I don''t know about Candy."


    I look around to see more and more monsters areing. I truly feel like running away, but for now, let''s try to decrease the numbers of monster first. Only when I thought it will be useless to continue fighting, I will run away with the others.


    In my past life, I don''t know the exact numbers of monsters that appeared. I went into hiding as fast as I could. But I don''t think it was this much. Or is it because we are prepared, the monsters that appear seems more? Maybe that''s the case.


    For example, in the past, monsters already entered the city. Seeing the monsters inside the city already causing ruckus, the other monsters who doesn''t dare to fight over their preys choose to retreat back into the forest.


    But now since the hunters and the guards are protecting the city, the monsters might think that we are a good target and they did not choose to retreat.


    And I also didn''t see if anyone is controlling the monsters. Maybe they are too far away and already leave their location once they thought the numbers of monsters is enough to level the city. When I asked Veronica about it a few days ago, she also think so.


    Yeah, I think this many monsters are more than enough to destroy the city. That only would happen if we are not prepared. Good thing that we have a lot of king''s agents here. The guards and the hunters in this city are also surprisingly strong. That''s why we managed to hold this long.


    As long as we decrease the numbers of monsters, the rest of them should be retreating soon after. Our main goal is to capture the governor, but it would be useless if the city is destroyed. So we need to kill the monsters and protect the civilians as well.


    I run to a Cyclops nearby and with Victoria as a sword, I cleaved its head while shouting loud so other monsters would notice me.


    Then some beast like monsters noticed me, and as usual, I said the same thing to a monsters I find like I did back then.


    "Hello, Ie in peace."


    "GRAAAWR!!" The beast growled at me.


    "Roy, are you stupid? It can''t be called peace if you just decapitate a monster."


    "Right! By the way, that Cyclops seem to be weaker than the one back then."


    "That''s because each monsters live differently. That Cyclops we encounter in the past live in a dungeon and this one lives in the wild. Usually, monsters in the dungeon are stronger than outside because they absorbed the magic from dungeon. That''s why you can easily cut its neck. The other reason is you became stronger after your training." Victoria exined.


    Yeah¡­ I never actually testing my strength after training. I just thought I have gotten stronger, but I don''t know how strong I have be. I should have had Ms. Wendy to lend me that target practice that was used for the exam and try to attack it in full force. But I don''t think that pir can endure my attack seeing just a button shot withpressed air already hit nine thousand. The max should be ten thousand so I almost got it destroyed.


    Anyway, saying Ie in peace doesn''t work and I started being chased by the beast. I let it chase after me while also luring more monsters to follow me. The more monsters chasing after me, the easier it would be for the hunters.


    I choose this n after seeing that I can outrun most of the monsters here. The fastest monsters in this stampede are wyverns. But they flew over the sky and enter the city directly so I don''t need to care about them. I don''t think they will care about just one person.


    I lured the monsters, but when I found a chance, I slipped in between a narrow gap between two trees making huge monsters unable to pass it and have to walk around. I used that chance to kill some monsters and then I run away again.


    I see Sophie and Ang looking over my way. They should have realized that it was me luring all the monsters and they smiled. Then they shouted something to other parties. I think it''s about me luring the monsters and dying their attacks. Making the others have enough time to rest and have easier time against the monsters.


    If possible, I''d like to lure those monsters away from the city. But when they see I''m moving too far from the city, the monsters stopped chasing after me and returned advancing toward the city. Though there are some persistent monsters still chasing after me.


    I killed those who are still chasing after me and return to the battlefield to do the same tactic again. Just lure them away from the city and when they are far enough, I''ll kill them.


    I repeated this several times and the numbers of monsters in this area decreasing considerably.

 Chapter 163 - Candy Is In Trouble

    Same type of monster, different strength. That''s what I learned today as I killed more and more monster.


    The first Cyclops I killed today was easy. But I think that must be the weakest Cyclops among all the Cyclopes during this stampede. After all, other than that first one, the other Cyclopes I attacked, still alive after one hit. Their necks are harder than the first Cyclops''s.


    I still managed to scratch them, and it seems to be a fatal hit to those Cyclopes. But they still able to live and chasing after me. It means that those cut doesn''t mean much for them even though they are bleeding from the neck.


    I thought I could fight the monsters easily here, but that doesn''t seem to be the case. So most of the time, I just running around the area and making sure that all the monsters are chasing after me. Then after there are a lot of them following me, I made them follow me away from the city. Then once they stopped chasing after me after a bit away, I killed some monsters that still chasing me.


    As for the rest of the monsters who returned back to the city, I left some of them to other hunters as I took a rest. Then I do that again.


    Repeating the same thing over and over again seems ridiculous, but as long as it works, I''m fine with it. Everyone also get used to my tactics. They know when to rest and when to attack. They don''t know about my identity, but they seem to think that I''m a reliable ally.


    And that''s all I need for them to know.


    "Roy. Aren''t you bored doing the same thing over and over again?" Victoria asked.


    "Not at all. The tactic is working and that''s the most important thing." I replied.


    "Can''t you just fight them all without running away? You should be able to do it."


    "I can''t."


    "Of course you can! Don''t make an excuse like you are too weak! With your vision, you should be able to see the slightest movement of a muscle and predict your opponent''s attack! If there are enemies you can''t kill in one hit, then do it with two! If not two, then three! Just keep attacking!"


    Victoria seems to be angry about the way I fight. She is right that I can slightly predict my opponent''s move by reading their muscles, but fighting this way is the safest option.


    "Don''t think some things like this is the safest option! You should think of something like the fastest option! If you know the fastest way to defeat these monsters, then do it! After that, you can go anywhere and safe the others. Ka and the girls are fine thanks to you, but we don''t know about Kron, Hill, Candy, and Wendy''s situation. Just because Sonia isn''t here, mean we can conclude that they are fine. You should help the others before something happened."


    ¡­yeah. I''m just thinking about myself aren''t I? There are other ce that I need to help. Although Candy said that she will be fine against the governor, doesn''t mean she is indeed fine. There''s also another expert level mage that I encounter today. What if they found someone of that level near the governor? I need to finish things here quickly.


    While I was thinking of a way to defeat the monsters in the quickest way, Sonia appears.


    "Roy. Ka said that you''ve done well. You can regroup for now and take a rest for a while. You might not have taken any damage, but some healing magic should be useful for your body. The numbers of injured people also decreased so you can go to her for some rest."


    ¡­yeah. I should do that. Resting my body should make my mind clearer. Then after some rest, I can fight however I wantter.


    "Alright. I''ll return soon. Also please check on the other as well. Candy should be fighting the governor soon, right?"


    "Last time I checked, they are doing fine against his guards. But I will check again."


    "Then what about the other cities? Are they doing fine?" I asked about the condition of other cities.


    Because of the dy caused by me, the stampede that should have happened to Melk city first and another citiester, should make it happened at the same time with another city in this time. Are they doing okay?


    "Well¡­ not as efficient as Melk, but they are doing fine. The other cities don''t seem to have any expert level mage. That''s what I heard from the one in charge. But because unlike here, where you can notice the cult members hiding among the people and killed them, the other cities don''t have you. Casualties are unavoidable, but they seem to be able to minimize it."


    I guess they are doing better than I expected then. But does it mean their real target is Melk? They have two expert level mages sent here. Or maybe that''s just coincidence?


    I don''t see any reason why they would target Melk other than showing their strength. There''s no secret treasures here. At least from what I can see. Maybe the governor and the other expert level mage that I killed were here by chance. Well, the governor is here because he''s the governor.


    As for the other guy¡­ maybe it wasn''t long since he broke through to expert level. That''s why the cult doesn''t notice him yet. And he wanted to gain some credit here and prove his strength to the cult. But he failed since he was killed by me.


    That''s just a guess. For now, let''s regroup back and get some rest.


    Sonia disappear to check on the others, while I returned to where Ka is after checking that no more monsters chasing after me.


    "Roy, you cany over there. I''ll heal you soon."


    As soon as I arrived, Ka has just finished healing someone. Iy on my back and rest my eyes as Ka soon approaches me and casted a healing magic on me while holding a wand.


    "Hmm? That wand is cracked. I guess it will reach its limit soon." I said to Ka.


    "Really? I didn''t see any crack here."


    "The crack started from the inside. My guess is that wand should reach its limit after two or three more times."


    "I see. Thanks for telling. I won''t use it again unless it''s necessary."


    Ka pocketed her wand and casted another healing magic on me without using the wand. I should look for more wands when I''m diving next time. Or maybe just buy them in bulk.


    While thinking so, Sonia appears again in front of me. She has a panicked expression on her face. I raised my upper body from the ground and listened to what''s happening.


    "Roy. Candy is in big trouble. Most of the agents trying to capture the governor died. Only Candy, Wendy, and few others survive. All the other guards had been killed and the governor is the only one left. He''s too strong for everyone over there. The ones who still alive are thanks to Candy protecting them. The stocking she wears can affect those near her. Soon she will be exhausted of her magic and¡­"


    "That''s enough. I''m going there. Let''s go, Victoria. Ka too. Candy might need some healing."


    I stopped Sonia from telling me any further. Candy is in danger. That''s the only thing that matter to me.


    I only had a few minutes of rest, but that''s enough. Candy''s life is in danger. I have to safe her. And for the governor to be so difficult to handle despite our preparation¡­ don''t tell me that he has two elements that have reached expert level! Why is he a governor?


    I stand up on the spot, and piggybacking Ka on my back. Then I told Sonia to inform Ang, Sophie, and Shirley who are still fighting that we are entering the city to help Candy.


    "Ka, you might need to use that wand again after all. And use your other wand and grab as many sand as you can! Sonia, tell me what other element the governor has!"


    I gave the order and as soon as Ka grabbed a lot of sand with her earth wand, I left and entered the city again. I quickly jumped from building to building to reach the location where Candy is.


    "Roy. The governor has fire element, ice element, and lightning element! All of them has reached expert level!" Sonia told me the elements the governor has.


    "Damn! No wonder Candy and the others are having trouble! What about his guards?"


    "All of them have died. He''s the only one left!"


    "Does he have a family we can use as hostage?"


    The one who answered my question this time was Ka.


    "No. His family has left the city with that migrating mission. There shouldn''t be any more of his family in this city. And even if they are here, I don''t think that we can use them as hostages."


    She''s right. They are from a cult that doesn''t mind killing themselves. Being taken as hostages won''t change anything.


    In any case, we need to hurry to where Candy is.


    I had Victoria transformed as a rifle so I can shoot him as soon as he''s in sight. I don''t think that it is enough to him, but it should be enough to distract him from Candy.

 Chapter 164 - Another Element?

    I can finally see Candy after running for a while. But even with my speed, it will take a while until I reached her.


    Candy is only ying defense here. Thanks to the fis stocking underneath her pants, she can defend herself and people near her from the governor''s fire magic and ice magic. That equipment is too awesome. If only it was not in the form of a fis stocking, I would take it for myself.


    With the special effect of that stocking, Candy can change the temperature of anything near her in an instant. Making fire disappear, and ice melt instantly when they get close to her. As far as I know, it''s the greatest magic equipment ever to be found from a dungeon. Making one invulnerable toward fire and ice is too overpowered.


    But the biggest w of that stocking, other than its form which makes most men don''t want to wear them, is that the wearer won''t be able to cast any magic of fire and ice element. Which makes Candy unable to fight the governor with her fire element.


    She can only fight by using her lightning element, but the governor also has the same element. But his lightning element is stronger than Candy''s. Which makes Candy''s magic doesn''t make any real damage to him.


    As for the Ms. Wendy and the other agents, they can''t do anything against him. But to think that he won''te out at all until all of his guards died, making it at least a bit easier for us. Had hee out sooner before all of his guards died, Candy and the others would have been dead already.


    So now my mission is to save Candy, then put the Magic Restriction Cor on the governor''s neck, and pluck out the HGB from his mouth. But can I put the cor before he explode his head?


    I can do it if I knock him out first.


    But seeing how he is on high alert, it would be impossible to approach him. And he''s too strong as well.


    This will be my biggest challenge so far.


    Soon I saw the governor in sight without any obstruction. There''s no wall, no trees, and no people blocking me from him. And I prepared several sharp rocks and put them inside Victorifle. I have 33 chances with all the sharp rocks I put in Victorifle. Those sharp rocks are the ones Ka made for me on the way here thanks to her wand.


    I still have a lot of smaller unsharpened pebbles, but that''s forter.


    When my view is unobstructed, I shot one bullet at the governor right away. Once it got close to him, he noticed something ising and prepared an Ice wall to protect himself. The bullet got stopped by the ice wall, but that''s fine. That shot was meant to distract him from Candy and the others.


    The governor then looked at my direction. Although we''re far apart, he noticed where I am. There''s no point in hiding so I prepared my second shot. I used my Divine Vision to see his muscles to predict what kind of movement he will do. Any suspicious move meant another shot at him.


    I also didn''t just run straight toward him. I am making sure that the first Ice Wall that he made won''t obstruct my shot. But his eyes are following my move.


    "Ka! Contact Sonia! Tell her to ry a message to Candy and the others to hide inside that clothing store!" Since it will be difficult for me to focus on the governor while talking, I made Ka do the talking.


    When I spoke to Ka, he seems to have noticed that I was slightly distracted and preparing a Fireball at me. But I shot my second bullet already. He then cancelled the Fireball and made another Ice Wall.


    I keep moving after that and soon, Sonia appear next to me. And the governor had a shocked expression when he saw a ghost suddenly appear. I took that chance to shoot my third bullet.


    His reaction was dyed a bit and the Ice Wall he built the third time wasn''t fast enough to protect him. But he''s still an experienced mage. He dodged the bullet slightly by moving his head a little. The bullet only left a scratch on his cheek.


    Alright. He seems to be easily distracted by something that suddenly appear. He was extremely alert, but that could be his weakness as well. Only temporary though. If he''s really an experienced mage, he will soon realize his own weakness and try to cover it. But while he hadn''t done that, I''ll make sure to use that weakness first.


    I move to another location but not without thinking. I make sure that both Candy''s and my location are in his sight.


    Ka has finished ryed my message to Sonia and Sonia will appear near Candy. I''ll use that chance to shot him again.


    The moment Sonia appears next to Candy, the governor was stunned as expected. And I shot another bullet again. This time, my target is his chest. But he also learned his lesson.


    As soon as he heard the sound of the shooting, he quickly build an Ice Wall big enough to cover him from me. But that Ice Wall is quite fragile as it was made in a hurry so it''s still broken through. The bullet struck his left chest. It didn''t reach his heart but it damaged his lung.


    I then moved to the rooftop of the building that I told Candy to hide into, and dropped Ka there. She will heal Candy while I''m trying to capture the governor.


    I move around quite a bit and shot several more times and finally, I stopped when I''m just ten meters away from him.


    Wait! I forgot that the Magic Restriction Cor is still with Candy! That means I have to get close to him and pluck the HGB from his mouth? I think knocking him out is a better idea.


    First, I can''t have him realize that I know about the explosive inside his mouth. Or he will use that for his advantage knowing that we''re here to capture him.


    "Why don''t you just die already? Don''t dodge my shot next time, okay?" I tried to provoke him.


    "¡­you''re taming a ghost to be a long distantmunication tool? That''s a great idea." He said.


    "I know, right? Anyway, governor¡­ no. I''ll just call you Luiz if that''s fine with you. If it''s not fine, it doesn''t matter anyway. There''s a stampede happening. Why didn''t you do anything?" I pretend to not know about the cult.


    "¡­who are you?" Luiz asked.


    "I''m someone whose girlfriend about to be killed by you. Now please answer my question already."


    "I just want to destroy the city. If she''s your girlfriend, do you know why she attacked me and killed all my guards?"


    I guess it''s time for a back and forth questions times.


    "Looking at you who doesn''t care that his town is about to be destroyed, I''m quite sure that the reason she wants to kill you is because you''re such a hateful governor. I bet there are a lot of people who wanted you die."


    "Huff¡­ so what? Many people tried to kill me even in the past, but none of them seeded. And you will fail as well."


    Luiz is starting to get out of breathe. It was because I used my air magic to make sure the air he breathe is getting thinner and thinner. I hope it''s enough to make him faint.


    "No. I won''t fail."


    "Huff¡­ huff¡­ but you''re-!!!"


    His eyes suddenly shot open as he realizes something. He suddenly moved away from that spot.


    I instantly transformed Victorifle into a Victogun and shot Luiz.


    But this time, Luiz''s Ice Wall is stronger than before and my bullet unable to pierce through it.


    "Huff¡­ was it you? I have a hard time breathing¡­ huff¡­"


    Since he already noticed it, there are only two choice for me. One is to keep attacking him and making him out of breath, or talking with him until he fainted.


    Let''s try talking first.


    "What if I am?"


    "This¡­ is air element magic¡­ huff¡­"


    Then he somehow able to take a deep breath and his breathing is slowly returning to normal again. Don''t tell me!


    "You''re also an air element mage? You have four elements?!"


    I was really surprised by this revtion. Other than Ang, I have never met another person with four elements. Two or three are quitemon, but four? This battle will be harder and harder. I can no longer knock him out with making him unable to breathe.


    "Huhuhu¡­ it''s the weakest among all the elements I have. It''s still in beginner level even after so many years I tried to improve it. I thought that was fine since air magic only help me in breathing, but to think that you can also use it to get someone out of breath¡­ there are still many things I can learn at this age, huh? Are those projectiles shot with using air magic as well?"


    I was stunned to hear his correct observation of my attacks.


    Calm down, me! It just mean he''s very smart and sharp. The fight is getting harder but it''s still not impossible to win. I''m still better than him in using air magic and moving my body. I can still win this fight!


    I aimed Victogun at him. The real battle is about to begin!

 Chapter 165 - Fighting Luiz

    I aimed Victogun at Luiz and shoot one sharp rock as a bullet at him. He just calmly built an Ice Wall to protect himself.


    "That doesn''t seem to be the work of that magic tool. Neither it was from a wind magic. My guess is it was from your air magic, right? How did you do it?"


    Yeah, people in this world doesn''t know aboutpressing air. I also know about it from Victoria who came from another world. If not for her, I wouldn''t be able to do it.


    And I have no intention telling this guy about it. He can just keep thinking about what air magic can do. His curiosity might led him to be distracted. I''m hoping for that chance.


    For now, I should keep moving while attacking him.


    I keep my legs moves as I also hide from time to time when he''s about to attack me. Then each time I found a chance, I shot a bullet at him. Although some time he didn''t manage to build an Ice Wall in time, he''s still quick enough to dodge the bullet. He keep getting scratch wound from the shot I did, but none of them are life threatening.


    They just making him angrier and angrier. But he''s still able to collect himself.


    While he''s thinking that I was too difficult to handle, he changed his magic to aim at where the girls are hiding.


    "If I can''t hit you, I can just kill your girlfriend!"


    His target is the clothing store I had Candy and the others hide.


    I pretended to be panicked and reacted slowly.


    "No!"


    Luiz casted a powerful lightning magic as an expert level lightning mage. It was a lightning force powerful enough to destroy that building. I don''t know its name, but I think it''s the most powerful lightning attack magic.


    I look over at how the girls are doing, and they are fine even under the rubles of the building. It was thanks to Ka''s wand.


    I told her to bring a lot of sand so she can protect Candy and the others from Luiz''s lightning magic. And it worked!


    Before Luiz casted his magic¡­ no. Even before that, as soon as Ka reached Candy, Ka build a multipleyer dome shaped mound and had everyone hides under the mounds.


    Neither of us know if one mound is enough to protect everyone, so I told Ka to build multipleyer of them with the sand she''s carrying.


    Good thing that the weight of the sand she carried didn''t change when she''s holding the wand. If not, I wouldn''t be able toe here quickly.


    When I carried her, she''s holding her earth wand and shaped the sand into a huge backpack on her back. That''s why Luiz didn''t get suspicious at all to what she''s carrying.


    And although Ka can use the earth under the building, it would take some time for her to bring them out since the flooring of that building is made of wood. She''s still beginner level in earth element after all.


    But when I fought Luiz, she used the time she has after healing the others to raise some earth to reinforce her dome shaped protection. Which is how she can endure the lightning.


    If the attack was a fire or ice magic, then it would be Candy''s turn.


    "You bastard!"


    I pretend to make him think that he really managed to kill Candy and the others even though I can see that they are doing fine. He smiled when I yelled at him.


    "Now your girlfriend and her friends have died! What will you do now?"


    I pretend to be angry and shoot at him multiple times. Of course all the bullets were either blocked or dodged.


    Looking at his reaction, he seem to be convinced that I''m really angry. He''sughing at my poor attempts to kill him.


    Expert level mage somehow able to detect people approaching them. But they don''t realize when it''s not a living being.


    That''s right. Sonia has been watching us from the beginning. And she will contact Ka to move when Sonia noticed Luiz is distracted by me.


    If I''m right, then expert level mage when they are being distracted, they won''t notice anyone getting closer to them. That''s something I learned from Veronica when we first met. I don''t know if it''s right, but it''s worth trying.


    Each time I attacked, Sonia told Ka it''s time to move to different spot after the ce they hide was destroyed. I need their help if I want to capture Luiz alive.


    But I can''t just do the same thing over and over again. Luiz is sharp. He might realize that I''m just stalling for time. So it''s time to attack differently. By using different weapon.


    While I keep moving around, Luiz was confused by my never ending stamina. And I covered Victogun with my body. He can only see the left side of my body while I transformed Victoria on my right into a¡­ shotgun!


    I filled¡­ what should I call it? Vicshotgun? I filled it with a lot of small pebbles and prepared to shot ten of them at a time. I think they''re smaller than pebbles since I can fit about two hundred of them on the shotgun. But that''s not important.


    The most important thing is I have another twenty shots at Luiz. And with the power of the shotgun in both close and mid-range, he would have difficulty dodging.


    When I stopped and pulled the shotgun to aim at him, he was surprised to see the shape of my gun is changing. But he keeps his cool and prepared to build an Ice Wall.


    And when I shot with the shotgun, the Ice Wall is destroyed easily. Then I shot again as the wall is destroyed because it was attacked in multiple spots at the same time, and Luiz tried to dodge. But the bullets are too spread out he can''t dodge them all. The impact pushed him back but he''s still able to endure it.


    "What was that?"


    Whatever he said, I won''t respond to it. He needs to be even more confused so I have more chance.


    "That magic tool¡­ I want it!"


    Sorry, but this is not a magic tool. She''s my summon. I can''t hand her to anyone.


    Twenty shot seems a lot, but even after I used all the bullets, he''s still standing. How strong is this guy? He''s even bleeding from his head but he''s still standing. And the fact that he hadn''t killed himself means that he must be thinking that he''s still has a chance to defeat me.


    The end of our fight ising. And it should be anti-climactic like how I usually fought.


    I pretended to look despaired as I throw away the shotgun at him. Luiz must have thought that it''s myst resort. Well, it will be.


    If Ka knows me as well as I imagined her to be, she would know that this is her time toe out of her hiding spot.


    Luiz calmly grabbed the shotgun I threw and he thanking me for it.


    "Well, thank you for your gift. I''ll use it well to kill you- what?!"


    The shotgun in his hand suddenly changed shape into a¡­ tentacles? Why does Victoria want to be something that has tentacles?


    The tentacles then wrapped around him and restrained him. Then a head appeared from one of the tentacles and said something.


    "Sadly for you, I''m no magic item. I''m his summoned monster!" Victoria yelled at the man.


    What''s that? Too creepy! A head from a tentacle? That''s just something out of horror stories!


    Well, I won''t let go of this chance.


    While he was confused and scared about what happened, I get closer to him and throw a punch. A right hook to his temple. Not strong enough to kill him, but just strong enough to shake his brain for a few seconds.


    "Roy! Catch!"


    Ka who knows what I want after throwing Victoria,e out of the hiding spot and threw the Magic Restriction Cor at me. Which I catch with my left hand and instantly put it on the confused Luiz''s neck.


    "Nice cor. It suits you well."


    But I haven''t done yet. After putting the cor and praised him for how fit it was on his neck, I inserted my fingers into his mouth and took out the HGB from his head.


    Sigh¡­ of all the things my fingers can enter, why is it men''s mouth that has to be the ce my fingers have entered into most?


    "You know?! Who are you people?"


    Luiz was shocked to see that I plucked out the HGB from his mouth. But he''s being restrained and unable to use magic so there''s nothing he can do.


    "Does it matter to you who have been captured? And look! My girlfriends! They are still alive! Don''t forget that there''s an ''s'' behind the word ''girlfriends''. Making it plural. I''m awesome, right?"


    Luiz was about to say something but I knocked him out for real this time.


    Seeing Luiz fainted, Victoria released her restraint and Luiz dropped to the ground. And then I proceeded to dislocate his joints. Now there''s really nothing he can do.


    "Roy. Thanks foring." Candy thanked me for saving her.


    "No worry. That''s what a boyfriend should do."


    Did I see Candy blushing? Well, that''s cute.


    "Let''s bring this guy to where the other prisoners are. Then we will take care of the stampede."

 Chapter 166 - Short Rest

    "I''ll carry this guy to where I put the other prisoners are. You guys go take a break back at the hotel. Once you rested enough, return to fight the monsters. I will also return to the hotel after I carried this guy there."


    Rather than carrying, it was more like pulling. I have dislocated his joints and let himy on the ground as I pulled his leg. So it''s not exactly carrying.


    I also told the others to go rest in the hotel for a while. Lina should have some food to give us. And I''ll be joining them as well.


    "Alright. By the way, how many prisoners did you take?" Candy asked.


    "Seven. Eight if I including this guy on the list. Well, some of them should be dead already. But I made sure they died in pain so no one will follow him."


    I remembered how one prisoner shot his own balls and screamed in pain as the others are watching. Only crazy bastards would follow suit.


    "And how many people did you kill?" Candy asked again.


    Did she suspect me trying to kill everyone instead of capturing them? Well she''s right. Let''s just answer her honestly.


    "More than one."


    That''s my honest answer.


    "Digits. He hadn''t finished speaking. He''s saying he has killed more than one digit of them." Victoria said.


    "Well, that''s as expected. It''s too difficult to capture more people after all in this situation. But seven of them are good enough. But I don''t think any one of them would say anything."


    "That''s right! No matter what you asked, none of us will say anything! I don''t know how you figure it out, but we are not someone who will say something easily!"


    Luiz suddenly spoke after hearing Candy''s words. Well, I don''t expect any of them to actually talk after all. Let''s just show him what I can do.


    "Ehem¡­ cough¡­la, no that''s wrong. L? Lla? Lalilu? Oh this one sounds right?"


    I mumbled nonsense while everyone is hearing. None of them know what I had in mind.


    "What are you doing?" Luiz is the first one to ask.


    And I answered him after I adjusted my voice with air magic. That nonsense mumbling was me practicing how to alter my voice to be simr to Luiz''s.


    "What do you think I''m doing?" I spoke with his voice.


    "That''s¡­ my voice! Don''t tell me you¡­" Luiz and everyone is shocked to hear Luiz''s voiceing out of my mouth.


    "Yeah. I don''t need you to say anything. After the stampede over, we will tell everyone about your cult, your goal, and everything that we know about the cult. You will stand in front of the public and I will speak with your voice. Isn''t that great? Since we don''t need you to speak anymore, I think it''s better if I just cut your tongue, right? Anyone who doesn''t want to see it please look away. Ka. You just need to heal him after I finished cutting his tongue."


    "Okay." Ka followed my order.


    "Wait! I''ll speak! Don''t cut my tongue!" Luiz begged me.


    "Hmm? For someone who used to carry an explosive inside his mouth, you seem to be too scared to die." I asked him.


    "I don''t want to die! I put that thing in my mouth because it was something that everyone has to have when they joined the cult! Please don''t cut my tongue or kill me! I will tell you everything!" Luiz continue to beg me to spare his life.


    I look at Candy and Ms. Wendy''s reaction. Seems like they let me decide on my own.


    Without saying anything, I pulled out his tongue and cut it with the de of my spear.


    "Ka, heal."


    "Understood."


    Luiz screamed in pain. And he can''t move his body since I dislocated his joint. It looks weird seeing a man screaming in pain like this.


    I feel annoyed to hear his screaming so I knock him out.


    After I knock him out, I pulled his leg again and about to bring him with me when Ms. Wendy stopped me.


    "Roy. Do you think that was the right choice? Cutting his tongue? What if he has a secret to tell us?" Ms. Wendy asked.


    "Well, we already have one informant already. One is already difficult to trust. And having two will make it harder."


    "You still don''t trust Ve¡­ that girl?" Ms. Wendy carefully stopped calling Veronica by name in case Luiz or someone else is listening.


    "Yes. We should really have Albert meet her at least once. Only then, I will be able to trust her."


    With Albert''s lie detection skill, I will be able to trust her. It''s funny how I can trust everyone else here but Veronica just because she managed to seduce me just once. If it was not for Victoria, I would be dead already. And it was also Victoria who approached her first. Which makes us able to know more about the stampede.


    After that, I brought Luiz to the where the other prisoners are. As soon as I arrived there, Luiz''s consciousness returned.


    We saw in the room where I put the prisoners are that the guy who shoot himself with fireball is no longer breathing. And the other prisoners don''t dare to look at the corpse. Even I don''t want to.


    Then Luiz shouts gibberish words because his tongue was cut. Maybe he said something like why didn''t the others kill themselves. I don''t know and I don''t care. As long as we can keep Luiz alive, it''s fine for the other to die.


    I put Luiz in the corner of the room so even if someone is casting their magic, it won''t reach him. Then I left that ce and return to the hotel where I was greeted by delicious food.


    "This is¡­"


    "Ka said that you''reing, so I made these. You should be hungry, right?"


    "¡­Lina! You''re the best maid ever!"


    I had a feast along with everyone who fought against Luiz. I''m the only one doing it happily. The agents are mourning on their friends'' death.


    I look below to the basement, and see that some civilians are hiding there. Hill is also there asking the people to be calm.


    After finishing my meals, I went below there and told Hill about the prisoners. I told him that he can do anything he want as long as the governor stays alive.


    "I hope someone is my type."


    Nope. I didn''t hear him mumbling something. Not at all.


    Then I returned to the dining hall and everyone is ready to go again.


    "Have you all rested enough?"


    "We can''t stay here when we know this isn''t over yet." Ms. Wendy said.


    "Then why did you wait for me? You can go now."


    Then the agents are leaving. Only Ka, Candy, Ms. Wendy, and Lina stay here.


    "What is it?"


    They are looking at me curiously.


    "Roy, although we caught Luiz, the stampede isn''t over yet. What will you do now?" Candy asked.


    Victoria who seems to be interested in this discussion, transformed into her human form and take a seat to listen to this discussion.


    "Kill more monsters."


    "Hmm? I thought you will answer something like you will run away?" Victoria asked.


    "Of course I will. Only once I thought that it''s impossible to continue fighting. But despite this many monstersing, we''re still doing great. So I have hope that we can do this."


    Just a few moments ago, before I go to the north gate, I was being pessimistic. But now after we managed to capture the expert level mage, Luiz, I have expectation that we can do this.


    "Sigh¡­ if that''s the case, then I''m d." Victoria said.


    "Why?"


    "Before the stampede, the girls had a discussion about what to do if you decided to run away. This is the event that affect you the most in your previous life so I thought you have some kind of trauma or something."


    Trauma? Well I did have one. It''s the trauma of the time I was killed. But I have killed the one responsible for it. Maybe that''s how my trauma was healed.


    As for this stampede, maybe since I don''t have many friends at that time that I don''t feel traumatic at all.


    "Thanks for worrying, but I''m fine."


    "Tsk! Just when I prepared a good speech to say to you." Victoria seems mad.


    "Speech? I bet it''s something from another story again. You sure love things like that, right?"


    "Yes. But I won''t say it anymore. But there''s still one advice I can give you. Go all out."


    "I already go all out, though?" I''m tilted my head in confusion. I always did my best so what does she mean?


    "I mean go all out like the Aura user you are. Fight the enemies head on instead of keep running and attacking from distance. This way, you can grow faster and know how powerful you are. All this time, you have been wondering how powerful you are, right? Now it''s time to use your real strength. Don''t worry about other people seeing you. I''ll be your armor to protect your identity."


    How strong I am¡­ I don''t know the answer to that question. I guess I''ll use this chance to try it. I know that I am already way stronger than the day I died, but knowing how strong I am will be extremely useful.


    "Fine. I''ll do as you say."


    And this time, no longer running away!

 Chapter 167 - Why The Cape?

    Fighting the monsters head on¡­ I never did it unless I know that the enemy is weaker than me. And even when I fought head on, usually I''m with my party members.


    The only time I ever fought like that was in my previous life. I was so bold back then just because I manifested Aura. Thinking that I can defeat everyone.


    Well, I guess I should try to be bold like that again. I believe there were no more cult members left in this city, and I will also wear some disguise as well. So no one will find out about my identity. They will think that I''m a Living Armor just like Victoria before. After all, in this world, no one should know about Aura. Except maybe the one called the Evil God. But I don''t think he''s in this city.


    "Alright. Let''s put on your armor."


    More than putting on my armor, Victoria is just enveloped me with her slimy body and transformed into a full body armorplete with the helmet. Is that a cape hanging from my shoulder?


    "Why the cape?"


    "For mysteriousness."


    "I don''t need it. Why is the helmet doesn''t cover my mouth?"


    "So when you speak, your voice won''t be muffled."


    "Is that so¡­ wait!"


    When I look down to see the torso and my leg area, I saw my shadow on the ground. Thanks to the lighting, I can see the top of my head. And there''s something weird on my head.


    "Why is there a pair of ear like things above my helmet?"


    I saw the shadow and touched the part with two pointy triangr shape on my head. They look just like a pair of ear of some kind of animal.


    "¡­I want you to say ''I am vengeance!'' in a deep voice." Victoria asked for me to say something I don''t understand.


    "What?"


    "Not what. ''I am vengeance. I am the night. I am¡­"


    "Is this another of your wish fulfillment from your previous world again? I won''t do that!"


    She sure loves to put anything she want from her original world to try now. When I asked Sonia if this was the case back when both of them were alive, she said it wasn''t. That mean it happened after she became a ck slime with shape shifting ability.


    I keep wondering what''s with that world of her? It was so weird. So I rejected to do what she wants.


    "Later. If I remember." I said.


    "Well, that''s why I want you to do it now! Your memory suck!"


    What? What did she say? Maybe I forgot about it already. I don''t think it''s important anyway. Now, let''s go kill some monsters.


    I already lost my cape and the pointy helmet when I left the hotel. Those are just unnecessary essories. While Victoria just clicked her tongue. Does she has a tongue? I mean I don''t want my armor to have a tongue. That''s creepy.


    Good thing I didn''t see any tongue or weird things on my armor. I still don''t understand how she could speak when she''s not in her human form.


    The armor is kind of heavy. It will restrict my movement. So I told Victoria to reduce her weight. And then she asked me if she''s fat? She can alter her appearance so why is she saying something weird again?


    Now the armor is perfect. My movement is no longer restricted and it''s very light. It no longer has any function as an armor, but it''s a disguise anyway so it''s fine.


    Since I have gone to the south, west, and north, now is the time to go to the east. After that will be south, west, and north again.


    I wanted to fight the monsters inside the city at first, but when I look around, everyone is doing fine so far. The wyverns are mostly stay up in the air and haven''t attacked yet. Other than that one wyvern that ate a kid before. Maybe they will only attack when they are hungry.


    For now, I''ll let those hunters and guards inside the city to watch over the wyverns first. And since all the citizens have been evacuated, there''s no hurry in defeating the monsters inside the city.


    Destroyed buildings? Those things don''t matter. I''m going to leave this city after this is over after all and return to Cassau.


    As soon as I arrived at the east gate, I can clearly see why Victoria only reported that they are fine.


    The monsters in this area are not too much for the hunters here. But the hunters assigned here are also not too strong as well.


    They can hold back the monsters, but they find it difficult to defeat them since they don''t have many powerful hunters here. So there are no one can finish those monsters.


    When Victoria was here, she was the only one killing the monsters that the hunters are holding back. Once she killed some of them, she left the ce thinking that the hunters here should be able to protect the gate.


    As for the troublemakers that tried to retreat back to the city, they are being ignored. No one cares about those who retreated. The hunters are busy protecting the city from the monsters.


    I heard from Victoria on the way that when she arrived here, she saw many people hiding and peeking at the battle even though the monsters are not that strong. She thought they must be members of the cult and killed them all.


    That must be why she said this area is fine. All the cult members have been killed by her. And I don''t see any more of them.


    This area is well protected by the hunters, but soon they will be losing. No matter how evenly matched they are against the monsters, the monsters stamina are much greater than mages who never trained their stamina.


    And so, I joined the fight.


    I see a group of hunters finally having trouble with a group of wolves. I went over there and sh the wolves with a sword I had Victoria transformed to. Since she''s already be an armor, it means the sword and anything she made is attached to the armor. I can''t throw it but it''s fine since I''m here to fight the monsters head on.


    As for my spear, I snapped it into three and just put them on my back. I''ll use it when it''s necessary. For now, I need to improve Victoria''s time first. Then I will soon able to improve my summoning element level soon and I can have another contracted monster thanks to the Pear-y fruit.


    "Who are you?"


    A hunter asked me, but I won''t say anything since I''m pretending to be another Living Armor.


    "Don''t tell me, another Living Armor? And this one is stronger than the previous one!"


    "There must be a summoner in the city trying to help us!" Another hunter eximed.


    "I don''t think so. Since there are two Living Armors, that person must be a tamer. We should be grateful to whoever he ister. For now, let''s focus on other monsters. He can take care of these wolves!"


    Seems like that one is the leader of this party.


    He is with four other hunters, and the enemies are wolves. About twenty of them. They are quite good to be able to protect themselves against this many wolves. Even when one magic is weak, as long as they can coordinate well with other mages, they can handle many things that one can''t do.


    Seeing how I can easily defeat several wolves, these wolves hostilities are aimed at me. While I just keep swinging my sword around and kill them one by one.


    These wolves are not enough to tell me how powerful I have be. But I still took care of them all.


    The strongest monsters in this area, from what I can see, are Orc Generals. There are five of them and they move in a group. There are about fifteen hunters working together to hold those Orc Generals. I guess I''ll help the other first before going against those Orc Generals.


    I move to another group and fight the monsters they were facing. I also pointed my sword to where the Orc Generals are telling these hunters to help those people since I can see little by little that we are being pushed back.


    The hunters seem to understand me and help the other blocking the Orc Generals while I took care of the small fries.


    I keep moving from one ce to another while finishing all the monsters the other hunters can''t take care of. Until finally, it''s time to fight the five Orc Generals.


    There are five Orc Generals moving in one group, but no one is leading them. I don''t see the sight of an Orc Emperor. How did these Orc Generals grouped together?


    Probably it was because of the hunters. They thought it would be a big trouble if they are separated, so they gathered the Orc Generals in one spot and have the strongest hunters grouped as well to stop these five from entering the city.


    If that was the case, then the one who suggested that idea is a genius.


    "The Living Armor is here! Let''s send the Orc General to it one by one! Wait! Send him three at once!"


    The one who seem to be the leader see I raised three fingers and told the others to give me three Orc Generals right away.


    I approached an Orc General and shed its fingers right away. The hand that hold its weapon is now only has one thumb and the weapon is fallen to the ground.


    Its scream alerted the other Orc Generals. I stepped back and all the Orc Generals are chasing after me. But the two who arest in chasing me is being stopped by the hunters.


    I don''t want others to see that the weapon I have is changing, so I keep using a sword as weapon. I shed the fingerless Orc General on its body. Before, I had trouble even piercing its heart. But now, the sh give it a major injury. Although it wasn''t enough to kill it, I''m d to see how powerful I am.


    I didn''t target its neck or eyes like I usually did, and it only took me five shes to kill one Orc General. And it only took fifteen shes to kill three of them.


    I look at the surrounding and see that there are still monsters approaching this city. And like before, the monsters in this area are not too strong. At least this time, there are no Orc General anymore.


    When I was about to help the hunters defeating thest two and continue fighting, one hunter stopped me.


    "We can take care of these two and those approaching monsters! Please go to another location!"


    I nodded when I see that he''s right. The two Orc Generals are getting exhausted fighting too many hunters at once and soon it will die.


    And so I left that spot and my destination this time is the south.

 Chapter 168 - Im Not Wearing It!

    The south area and the west area are done simrly like in the east. I just helped the hunters take care of the strong monsters. They are happy that only monsters they can defeat are left behind. Now they can get some rewards from the guild.


    Wait, I forget about that! How many monsters have I defeated? I should be the one contributed the most in defeating monsters. Should I start counting?


    I think that will be useless. No one would believe that I defeated that much monsters. Let''s just pretend that I didn''t participate at all.


    Goodbye, money.


    In the west area, I met Oleg again. And somehow he noticed my identity right away. He said thank you for helping them and told me to go somewhere else. Everyone really loves to gain achievements, huh? They just told me to leave once they can handle the monsters.


    That''s fine, though.


    Then thest area is the north gate again. But before going there, I need to check on Kron first. He''s still fighting in the city.


    As for the wyverns above the sky, I left them be for now. I still can''t move freely in the sky. Maybe once I improved my air element to Intermediate, I can finally step on air. That''s something to look forward to.


    When I see Kron, he''s alone fighting a group of monsters. There are many corpses around him. Probably corpses of hunters who tried to escape. Kron doesn''t seem to mind them dead.


    But he''s already exhausted. He keep fighting the monsters inside the city while making sure that no civilians are harmed. He can''t see like I can, so he doesn''t know if there are civilians around him or not. That''s why we he didn''t use his full strength.


    "Kron! You need to get some rest! Your flying magic will be necessary to fight against those wyverns! Let me handle everything here!"


    "Okay! I''ll be resting at the hotel now!" Then he flew away to the hotel.


    As long as he got enough rest, I don''t think the wyverns will be too much trouble for him. And with Shirley and Ms. Wendy as well, they should be able to hold these wyverns when they''re going to attack.


    Remembering that I hadn''t tell them about it, I contacted Sonia mid-battle and told her to ry a message to any flying mages to get some rest. They will have important roles during the fight against wyverns.


    And if they have a partner they want to carry in the sky, they can ask their partners to get some rest as well. Then they will be the one flying while carrying the attackers. Of course if they can do it alone, it''s fine as well.


    I fought the leftovers of Kron''s battle. The monsters here are¡­ not worth mentioning. The strongest one is able to endure six shes of my attack. But it died on the seventh.


    Although fighting the enemies head on is not something I usually do, it was still quite easy to do it. With my Divine Vision, just like Victoria told me, I can predict their movements by seeing the miniscule movement of their muscles.


    So far, there''s no monsters I have to block their attack. All of them are not fast enough to make me block them.


    And I don''t need to move so much of my body to dodge their attack. Just enough to not let it hit me. Like swaying my upper body, lifting my leg so it won''t be hit, and take a step backward.


    Maybe I don''t need to fight sneakily again? No. those are still necessary. I''m fighting head on since I know that most cult members nearby should be dead already. And no one would inform the cult about my existence.


    I guess it means different situation, different fighting style.


    In no time at all, I defeated all the monsters that Kron fought. Sorry. I lied about the no time. It took me about one hour. It took a while since some monsters decided to escape when they realized they have no chance to win against me.


    They are spread out that I have difficulty to which one I have to chase after first. When I want to chase another monster, it was already escape quite far. And while chasing after the monsters, I encounter another group of monsters fighting the city guards.


    So I ended up taking my time defeating all the monsters inside the city. Other than the wyverns that stay in the sky.


    I thought that the stampede will be over soon, but no one would have thought that there''s still onest waveing. It''sing from the north.


    Worse of all, I feel the ground shaking.


    I look around but I still don''t see anything that can cause this earthquake. Which means it''s either a monsters with earth magic, or a gigantic monsters.


    Why did it have to end with such a troublesome monster?


    And soon enough, Sonia appears in front of me reporting a monster''s approach.


    "Roy! A Giant Smander is approaching from the north!"


    "Giant Smander? Tell me about that monster."


    "It''s a gigantic fire lizard! The length of that monster should be about fifty meters. It can breathe fire as well."


    That sounds like that monsters I encounter in the dungeon. The one where I found Ka''s wand is. But I think this one is bigger than that.


    "What about other areas?"


    "No other waves areing. This one should be thest one."


    "Alright. Tell the flying group to take care of the wyverns. How many flying groups do we have?" I asked Sonia.


    "There should be about five of them. Three groups are people you know well. First is Kron. He''s flying and fighting alone. Then next is Wendy and Candy. And the third is Shirley and Ang. Although Ang is the one with the weakest level, she''s still considered as a powerhouse during this stampede."


    "Good. I''ll be going then."


    Fighting against that Giant Smander should be difficult. With my sword, I think it looks like I''m poking a monster with a needles.


    Before I left, Victoria stopped me.


    "Roy. Fire."


    "Yes! It is a fire breathing monster! What about it?!"


    "It''s with Candy." Victoria continue.


    "What is it?!"


    "¡­"


    "No! I won''t wear it!"


    I know what she''s thinking about. It''s that fis stocking that currently on Candy''s possession.


    "¡­"


    "Never!"


    "Stocking¡­"


    "No!"


    "Sssstooooockiiiiiingggg¡­"


    "¡­uuuuuuuaaaaaaaah!!! Fine! But you will be the one to wear it!"


    I told Victoria that she will be the one to wear it.


    "It won''t make difference you know? I''m still your armor after all. And if I wear it, it will still be you who ended up wearing it."


    "No! It has a big difference! Especially for my heart! And you can make it so the stocking can''t be seen by other, right? You will be the one who wear it!"


    Although this is an urgent matter, Sonia is just thereughing. Don''tugh!


    "I still think there''s no difference, but fine."


    "And we don''t really need to wear it, right? I can just fold it and put it in my pocket. That should still work."


    "Okay, okay. I still think you will look good wearing fis stocking." Victoria added.


    "Even if that''s the case, doesn''t mean I will wear it!"


    "So you don''t deny that you will look good?"


    "I ept all kind ofpliment you threw toward me. And I will always look good in anything I wear. But there are some things I would never wear."


    Sonia who''s stillughing disappear suddenly. She must be telling Candy that I''ming for the stocking.


    Candy should be at the hotel now since she''s a pair with Ms. Wendy. So I''m going there right away.


    As soon as I arrived, Candy already took off the stocking and present it to me. IN FRONT OF EVERYONE!


    Ka, Sophie, Ang, Shirley, Candy, Ms. Wendy, Lina, and even Kron is watching. What is this? A new kind of torture?


    "Here''s the stocking. You can wear it now. It''s still warm." Candy said with her face full of smile.


    "Thanks for it still being warm, but I''m not wearing it! Victoria is the one who wears it! And I can just put it in my pocket so it''s still effective!"


    "It''s not, Roy. We tried it before. It doesn''t work that way. You have to wear it properly, on your legs." Candy said.


    "It''s Victoria!"


    "Fine, it''s Victoria. Just sit over there and we''ll put it on for you."


    Candy then pushed me back and I fall with my butt on the chair. When did Lina get over here and set the chair?


    Then the girls started holding my body so I won''t moves too much and Candy and Sophie lifted my legs and started to put the stocking over Victoria''s leg armor.


    What kind of shame y is this?! And I thought I was shameless¡­


    "Don''t worry. The size is adjustable. It will fit you." Sophie said.


    Kron and Sonia just watching over there andugh. At least I should be d that Hill isn''t here.


    As soon as the girls finished dressing me with the stocking, I told Victoria to shape shift so she can cover it. There''s no way I''m going outside while being seen wearing this.


    I quickly left the hotel while everyone isughing. I need to relieve my shame by killing that Giant Smander.

 Chapter 169 - Whack-A-Toe

    I left the hotel with people close to me cheering for me. It''s notughter, it''s cheers. They are cheering for me with a smile. A smilebined with exhaling air from their lungs which makes multiple ''Ha'' sound.


    "They''reughing at you, Roy." Victoria said.


    "Shut up! They''re cheering for me with a weird way!"


    "Roy. Do you know? If I transform myself into just the upper body of the armor, the stocking on the leg armor will be moved to you. So, it will be you who to wear it."


    "Please don''t do that! I beg you, my dear Victoria!"


    I''m begging her while I''m jumping from rooftop to rooftop.


    "Then you will do as I say. Now the Giant Smander''s fire won''t work on you. The only thing it has against you is its strong physical powerbined with its size. And you will fight it head on. Ignore other mages attacking the monster!"


    "If I ignore them, I will be the one to get hit by their magic! It will be fine if they''re fire or ice magic, but I''m still vulnerable to other type of magic, you know?"


    "You know what I mean. Just attack the monster with physical attacksbined with your Aura. Don''t use dirty tricks or sneak attack."


    "That''s impossible! With the body of that size, no normal attack can kill it! Tactic also important in battle you muscle head!"


    "Alright, alright. I actually just want to see if it''s possible. Just fight however you want."


    So, in the end she''s just teasing me?!


    I finally arrived outside the north gate. I see that all the monsters have been defeated and only some hunters left guarding this ce. And everyone is looking at the Giant Smander in fear.


    In my previous life, I never notice such a giant monster attacking the city. I do feel some kind of earthquake back then. I thought maybe the monsters is getting closer to where I hide, but maybe the cause of that earthquake is this lizard. I might be wrong though, since my memory sucks.


    Anyway, my past doesn''t matter anymore. The present is more important! That''s why I hope I will receive a gift from the others after this is over. After all present=gift. Got it? Sorry for theme joke.


    Before I start charging to the Giant Smander, I prepared my spear as well. I repair it back to one piece. I want to test how powerful my attack if I throw this spear to that lizard.


    I run toward the Giant Smander with the spear on my right hand, and prepare to throw it. I covered my whole body to throw the spear. If I just covered my arm, the power is not as much as when I''m covering my whole body.


    After all, even though I look like throwing with one arm, I actually threw the spear with my whole body. My legs, my hip, waist, chest, neck, and obviously my right arm that will throw the spear. And even my left arm to pull my body as my right arm pushed it.


    This is a spear throw with my full strength. I''m confident to be able to give a huge damage to the Giant Smander with this.


    I see it getting closer and closer to the Giant Smander''s forehead and finally the spear reached its forehead.


    *tuk*


    "¡­let''s escape." I said.


    "So fast! Why did you give up when you just hit that monster once?!" Victoria shouted angrily at me. Now that she''s covering my whole body, I heard her voice right next to my ears. Her shout is ringing my ears.


    "Don''t you hear that sound? What''s with the ''tuk''? Howe I used all my power and it only make a tuk sound? That''s not a sound I want to hear! Let''s give up! Escape from this city with everyone!"


    "It''s just one tuk! Don''t you always say it? If you can''t kill it with one hit, then kill it with two hits. If not then three. If not then attack it again and again until it dies. It''s the same with this lizard!"


    "No, it''s not! I only said it knowing that at least my attack can damage my enemy! But what''s with this tuk? There''s no way that tuk give any damage? No matter how many tuks I give, it will never die! I can''t just keep tuk-tuk-tuk-tuk-ing it until it dies! Everyone would die first before I give that thing any damage! And that spear didn''t even faze that lizard!"


    The spear I threw was bounced back and stabbed the ground. That Giant Smander doesn''t even seem to notice that it was just got attacked. I feel no hope in winning against this thing.


    "There are many things can influence how the attack didn''t hurt that Smander! Gravity, wind, the speed of that spear, the strength of that spear, the sharpness of that spear, the distance, where it hits, and more! What if its forehead is the strongest part of Giant Smander? Why didn''t you aim at its belly? Usually, lizard type monsters'' weakness are their bellies, right? The least protected by its scales. Like a dragon''s weakness?" Victoria said it angrily.


    "How do you know? Have you fought a dragon before?"


    "It''smon sense from my world!"


    "Then your world has dragons? I thought there''s no monsters in that world." I said.


    "¡­we''re talking about that Giant Smander right now. Not about dragon."


    "Don''t change the subject! You don''t even know if dragons'' weakness is their belly, right? You haven''t even fought any dragons in this world!"


    "¡­what about you? I said many things about the reason why your attack didn''t give any damage at all, but have you tried everything? What about covering your spear with Aura?" Victoria asked.


    "¡­ah!"


    Shit! I forgot to pour Aura into the spear! No wonder it didn''t do any damage! How could I be this stupid! Must be the stocking! Because my mind is filled by the stocking, I forgot many things! As I thought, I shouldn''t have worn this stocking! Wait, it was Victoria who''s wearing it. Well, she shouldn''t wear it in the first ce then.


    "You just said ah! You totally forgot to pour your Aura to your spear! Why are you like this in this important moment?!"


    "Let''s start round two." I ignored Victoria.


    "The first round hasn''t even started!"


    Well¡­ what to do now? My only way for ranged attack is gone. To retrieve that spear right now is too dangerous. It bounced away behind that Giant Smander. I guess in the end, it will be a close-rangebat.


    Now, where should I aim it? Its belly is so high that I have to jump first before I attack. But doing so will make me vulnerable to its attack.


    While I was thinking of how to attack it, the Giant Smander''s whole body suddenly on fire. And there''s also fire inside its mouth. Is it trying to use its fire breath? If a monster this size uses its breath attack, there will be too many casualties! I have to stop it!


    Without thinking much, I had Victoria transformed into a hammer. I covered my whole body with Aura again, and this time, I didn''t forget to cover my hammer as well.


    I run toward the Giant Smander and¡­ goes under it and approached its right front foot. I raised the hammer high and swung it down as strong as possible to its¡­ toe. One of its toes.


    "Why?!!!" Victoria shouted.


    "You always feel pain when you stubbed your toe, right? That''s why I did this."


    And just like I thought, the Giant Smander is in too much pain its head raised to the sky instead of aiming to the city. Making its fire breath attacking no one. Oh wait! There''s a wyvern up there getting hit by the fire!


    The wyvern died leaving the smell of a cooked meat. Now I want to taste it. Maybe I should ask Lina to cook one for me.


    The Smander raised its right foot due to the pain. The toe is totally broken and I also destroyed the w attached to that toe.


    Meanwhile, I moved to its left front foot and attacked one of its toes again.


    "You''re ying whack-a-mole this time?" Victoria asked.


    "What''s that? There are no moles here. Just toes."


    "You''re ying whack-a-toe this time?"


    "After that first toe I hammered, I see that the lizard can feel the pain since it''s broken. So I thought of destroying all its toes. If I''m right, then monster''s toes have simr function as human''s toes. To assist in walking and bncing the body. I hope that''s the case with this one as well. If I destroyed all its toes, it will have a hard time walking and we can end it here before it reaches the city." I exined to Victoria.


    "¡­you always have the weirdest idea."


    "As long as it works! And it is working so far!"


    And I continue smashing its toes. Its ming toes. The fire is even reaching its toes, but I don''t mind it at all. It was because of the stocking I had with me. But if I''m asked if I''m grateful to have this on me, I will say no.

 Chapter 170 - Killing The Giant Salamander

    Giant Smander Has four feet. Each foot has five toes. Or is it fingers? Well, if I count its front feet as hands, then maybe ten fingers and ten toes. In any case, the Giant Smander has twenty toes. And I managed to break twelve of them.


    Two from its right front foot, three from its left front foot, two toes in its left hind foot, and all five of its right hind foot.


    The Giant Smander has difficulty maintaining its bnce with its heavy weight. It tried to stand with its palms on the ground, but it''s only making that Giant Smander unable to move. Standing on its four feet is the only thing it can do. But with its tail on behind it, it can still barely able to move by using its tail as a pivot.


    Did it do this instinctively? If so, that''s awesome!


    Well, thanks to it using its tail as pivot to help it move, I know that this lizard no longer has any means to attack me. The Giant Smander has no means to attack under its body other than mming its own body to the ground. But once it did that, it won''t be able to stand anymore.


    "Damn! You''re evil!" Victoria eximed as I exined to her my n.


    "Hahaha! As long as we win! If we defeat this monster, not just your time will be full. I can also probably raise my summoning level! As for this lizard''s fire around its body, those things don''t have any effect on me! I''m nearly invincible even though I''m not proud to what I have to wear. The heat doesn''t bother me anyway!" I said as I''m aiming for another one of the lizard''s toes.


    "¡­it should be the cold." Victoria whispered something.


    "Heat or cold, neither of them can harm me at the moment!"


    "That''s not what I''m talking about, but sure. Are you going to keep hammering its toes like this? This lizard doesn''t have much toes anymore." Victoria asked.


    "Of course not! Once people realized that this thing unable to move, they would swarm over here and cast their magic to attack this thing. There''s no way those people would try to leave such easy kill alone. All of them are fighting over the fame of defeating this monster. Unless they are smart."


    Smart people won''t try to gain achievement this way. It will only cause trouble for themselves. If the story that this monster was defeated by some weak hunters spread, and the rumor is different from the fact, those hunters will gain recognition and will be trusted to receive difficult tasks.


    I can see from the gate that many people already noticed how the Giant Smander has difficulty moving and they are started to approach us. Some of them even already casted magic from that far.


    There are even hunters who have retreated into the city, returning back to the battlefield hoping for an achievement. I really want to kill them.


    Meanwhile, the Giant Smander realized that it will be surrounded soon, so it prepared to use its me breath attack again. Although during the fight I managed to turn its body slightly so it no longer looking at the city, it can still move its neck. And it is aiming for the idiot hunters who areing straight from the city. Which means if those idiots can''t block the fire breath, the city will be in danger.


    Well, I have faith that the fire will hit those idiots! Please die for the sake of the citizen! I hope the damage to the city won''t be too big.


    Oh, wait! The smarter hunters are actually still near the gate and didn''t move at all! And they are cooperating in building barriers from ice and earth to stop the fire breath!


    They should be able to protect the city. I will try to smash another toe wishing that it will scream in pain again and attacked the sky, but seems like the Giant Smander can now endure the pain and still aimed at the iing hunters.


    Obviously, most of them died. Some of them had half of their bodies burnt. Some lost their limbs. But they are all idiots so I don''t really pity them at all.


    The fire goes on until it hits the barrier and stops.


    After that, the smarter hunters are spread right and left, making sure no one is in a straight line to the city as they get closer to the Giant Smander. As for the idiots, most of them retreating again.


    I think there are more hunters than before even including the ones who retreated. Maybe it means the other areas are already safe.


    As for the airborne troops, the wyverns seem to be retreating after they feel the heat of the fire breath from the Giant Lizard. So Kron and the others areing here.


    Having so many reinforcements is fine and all, but I hope I will be the one who hit this lizardst since I want to improve my summoning level quickly. I''m curious about monsters'' world and what kind of monster I can get contract with.


    Back to the battle. I''m going for another one of the Giant Smander''s toes, but seems like it gave up attacking other people.


    It purposely pressed down its body as I''m still under this monster. If it was anyone else, they would be pressed to death. But I''m faster than other people. I can escape before I got caught.


    Now seeing the Giant Smander on its belly, should make it easier for me, but that''s wrong.


    The Giant Smander still has a lot of strength in all four of its legs. With putting the heels of its feet to the ground, it can still stand up again while enduring the pain from its broken toes.


    "Look! Whatever you did before are all useless! Attacking its toes doesn''t mean anything!"


    Victoria sure loves toin.


    "At least its movement is slowed down significantly. Now, what to do? Maybe I''ll just pierce its brain or its heart. I guess I should aim at its heart. But attacking from its chest might be difficult since it might press down its body again. Maybe from its back?" I thought.


    I run on its side climbing to its back with my feet sticking to it. With my Divine Vision''s see-through ability, I can see where its heart is located. The heart''s location is closer to its back than its chest. But the back is harder, I guess I need a better weapon to be able to hit that far.


    "Roy, what weapon will you use?" While climbing on the Giant Smander''s back, Victoria asked me.


    "I''m still thinking. Do you have any suggestion?" I asked back.


    "I do. I''ll show you once you''ve arrived on its back."


    "We''re here anyway. I''m right above its heart. What weapon will you show me?"


    While chatting with Victoria, I have arrived to where I''m going. Not on top of its back, but right above its heart. This way, I just need to pierce through below me to kill it.


    And Ms. Wendy already arrived here while carrying Candy, and Candy is attacking the Giant Smander''s head. Candy attacked with lightning magic to its eye, but the Giant Smander dodge it and the lightning struck its forehead. But it didn''t do much damage. I guess its forehead is really the strongest part of this Smander.


    And then all the other hunters also arrived. Even another group of idiots ising.


    From head to tail, this Giant Smander is covered with fire. But there are still many idiots here attacking with fire magic.


    "Roy, I''ll show you the best weapon for this asion!" Victoria said.


    Then the armored part in my right hand, where Victoria usually transformed into sword or hammer, changed into a¡­ drill?


    "It''s a drill! Cover this drill with your Aura and make it spin over and over again on the target!"


    "Victoria¡­ you are the best! This is a great idea!" I praised Victoria for her idea.


    "Hehe¡­ of course I know you will like it. I am the one closest to you after all. I know your preference."


    Seems like she''s thinking of what I want as well. I''m grateful for her help.


    Meanwhile, the Giant Smander noticed I''m on its back and it keep shaking its body trying to threw me. But with my Aura ability, I can stick my feet to its back like a glue. I''m more of a lizard than this Giant Smander.


    "Victoria. Can you spin fast enough for the drill to dig through this thick scales'' back?"


    "That''s up to you. See that thing beside the drill that looks like a reel for fishing? Just spin it real fast."


    I looked at where she told me, and there''s indeed something I can spin. I tried spinning the reel and the drill indeed spinning. It spun as fast as I spin the reel.


    Now that I know how to use the drill, I stick the tip of the drill right above the heart and spun the reel as fast as possible.


    At first, it was quite though drilling the scale. But I spun the reel faster and the drill finally break through the scale after just a few minutes. Of course the Giant Smander tried to fight back, but I''m immune to fire at the moment. Other hunters must be thinking that I''m burning, but I''m totally fine. And even if someone else is wearing the stocking, only those with air magic can breathe in this ce.


    After drilling through its scale, the rest are easy. The skin, the muscle, it was easy to pierce those and I purposely attack it in between its ribs so there is no bone between me and its heart.


    The Giant Smander stopped its fire and keep iling about because of the pain, but I ignore it. I wonder how a quadrupedal animal scratch their back?


    And I find the answer soon enough. The Giant Smander tried flip its body upside down to press its back on me. Knowing I''m in danger, I erge the drill and make a huge hole from where I first drilled its body enough for me to enter.


    Because of the first hole I dig, it was easy and I can erge the hole enough for me to enter. I''m totally covered in blood. As for the smell, I have air magic to cover my nose and mouth with.


    After I entered its back, I changed the drill again to a smaller type since it''s faster. While I''m upside down and shaking, I drilled through its heart.


    Finally, the Giant Smander stopped moving and died.


    "Roy! I can feel it! I''m finally able to take control of this slime fully!"


    "I know! I can feel that there''s some kind of power entering my body and improving my summoning element! I think I''ll be able to reach Intermediate level soon!"


    We''re both happy with the result. But there''s one thing we forget. We''re still inside the smander''s body and the ce we entered from is blocked since the lizard isying on its back.


    I guess I should continue drilling until I left through its chest.

 Chapter 171 - Taking The Tail

    The Giant Smander is already dead. And everyone is cheering. All the hunters nearby approached the dead Giant Smander to see if it''s really dead.


    And I can see some idiots trying to get the credits for killing the Giant Smander. They even fought for it. And some of that idiots are actually the ones who casted fire magic on this Giant Smander. This fire lizard.


    How did one learn to be stupid? That''s the opposite of what learning meant to be!


    One is learning to be smart! Not stupid! But these people did just the opposite!


    Or maybe thy never learnt anything before. If so, that''s makes sense.


    I wonder what they will think once I''ming out of this Giant Smander''s chest?


    The Giant Smander diedying sideways. Which means I wille out of its chest if I keep digging forward.


    Now that I think about it, this Smander''s scales are quite strong, right? Maybe I should take some for myself. Victoria is finally able to be in charge of the slime''s body for a whole day now. I think she will leave my side more often now. That''s why I want to have some sort of protection.


    Not like the full body armor I had Victoria transformed to. Maybe just arm guards for both arms, shin guards, and a breastte. As for other areas, I don''t need it. Since this is not Victoria, I won''t have much freedom of movement if I put too much armor. And all the things I needed can also be hidden under my clothes. Probably not the breastte though. I''ll just ask Victoriater if there are any other type of armor I can hid under my clothes. She has more knowledge than anyone about such matter in this world after all.


    I dug out of the Giant Smander''s chest and see the shocked expression of the stupid hunters who want to im this monster as their loot. Well, I won''t give it to anyone though.


    "Who are you?!" Stupid hunter #1 asked.


    "Why are you asking such stupid question? He''s obviously a monster! A Living Armor. There''s also one in the east gate before, but that one is more feminine. Like, her curves are showing. Unfortunately, there''s nothing inside since it''s just a living armor." Someone replied. Probably stupid hunter #2


    "Yeah? Then where''s the summoner?"


    "The person who contracted these monsters are obviously not a summoner. But a tamer since this mage has two Living Armors."


    Stupid hunter #1 and #2 are talking back and forth, while I''m thinking of how to get all this for myself. But that seems difficult. If only I''m strong enough to carry this Giant Smander somewhere.


    Then I noticed something. The idiots started talking about the Living Armor in the east gate and me are one and the same. Why?


    And I found out the reason.


    "Both Living Armors are the same! So, it might be a summoner!" It''s another stupid hunter. This one is #3


    "You might be right. Look! This Living Armor is wearing a fis stocking!"


    ¡­ VICTORIA!!!!


    I red at the stupid hunters. They were probably thinking that I''m targeting them.


    Then I went to the back of the Giant Smander and wanted to cut of its tail. The tail''s length is a bit less than twenty meters, but that''s more than enough for me to build my armor.


    With Victoria transformed into what she called chainsaw, I cut the tail of the Giant Lizard. Everyone is shouting something when they saw me cutting the Smander''s tail.


    After I cut it, I carried it. I should be able to bring this somewhere safe.


    And so, I escape from the others to somewhere they won''t find me. It''s a bit difficult with the size of the tail, but still doable. The most difficult thing is for me to escape from the pursuers. The idiot hunters who wanted to take everything.


    They wanted to take the credits for killing the Giant Smander, and they don''t want me to take its tail. How stupid are they?


    But that''s fine with me. As long as I''m far enough from the smarter hunters, I can just kill all of these idiots.


    That''s what I prepared to do, but someone stopped me. It was Kron who realized that there are too many hunters following me.


    "Stop it! Do you guys really want someone whose strength enough to kill that Giant Smander as your opponent? If you want, then feel free to chase after him!" Kron shouted at the top of his lungs.


    "¡­but, that monster just¡­" someone tried toin.


    "Why do you care about that Giant Smander''s tail? While you are stupidly chasing after the tail, the body has been taken to the guild. If you want to chase after that Living Armor, that''s fine! You can do it! But remember this! While you guys are hiding, that Living Armor goes around the city protecting people! If those people know that you are hunting that Living Armor, you will no longer have any ce in the city!" After saying that, Kron left.


    The stupid hunters looked at each other for a while and finally they returned to the city. Some of them are gritting their teeth.


    But still¡­ I failed to kill everyone. It''s not like any of them are members of the cult, but I just don''t want to see any of these people ever again.


    And now no one is chasing after me. I can finally talk now.


    "Damn you, Victoria! Why did you put the stocking over the armor?! It was so embarrassing!" I shouted.


    "Then I''ll ask you this. Back then, when Ang is about to break through and you meet Candy, you had me covered your whole body and transformed into a woman with revealing clothes, right? What''s the difference with this?"


    It was the time when the twin from the cult attacked people who are trying to breakthrough. I transformed into a bombshell that has both traits of big boobs and big butt. Making both of them droll over me.


    "That was different! I used you to have the appearance of a woman back then, but not now! Take off the stocking now! I don''t need to wear it anymore."


    Since the stocking is over the armor, I had Victoria take it off. And since we no longer have to hide my identity, she also leaves my body and turned into her human form. Wearing that stocking.


    "How do I look?" Victoria asked.


    "Better than when I wore it. Since no one is chasing after us anymore, let''s try taking all the scales on this tail."


    "What do you want to do with the scales?"


    "Making an armor. Since you will probably leave my side more often now, I need to have another means of protection."


    "How will you do it? After all Aura users were put to extinction, this world has be a magic world where no one needed to have a cksmith to build their armor. Are you going to do the smithing yourself?" Victoria asked.


    That''s¡­ a good question.


    "Maybe I can just sculpt something from this scale and transformed it into arm guards and shin guards?"


    "Of course you can. But the endurance of the equipment and the quality is different from if a real cksmith do it. That is just a temporary measure. You need to find a cksmith. Or maybe be one yourself. By the way, cksmith are people whose work is closely rted to fire. So, you might still need this stocking again."


    Right! I need to find one!


    While I''m still collecting the scales, we talked about many things. Since finally the stampede is over, and my graduation should be guaranteed, now we will have some time of freedom. And we are nning to use that time to improve ourselves.


    "By the way, Roy? Do you remember what I ask you in case one day my mind can take control of this slime at all time?"


    "What? That you said you wanted to be my girlfriend?" I asked.


    "Yeah. For someone so forgetful, you do remember the small stuffs."


    "What about that promise? Do you want to keep it? Because whether we became a lover or not, it doesn''t actually change what we''re doing right?"


    "It''s just a matter of feeling. I will feel better if we do end up as lover. Now I have totally became Ka and the others'' sister!" Victoria shouted happily.


    After that, we continue collecting the scales until it was all gone. Now is the time to return to the city without anyone sees me.


    "Hey, Roy." Victoria who is running beside me called me.


    "What is it?"


    "I feel like the way we ended up as lover is much more casual than when you were asked by the others."


    "Then what? You want to be special?"


    "Hm¡­ I don''t know."


    "Aren''t you usually say another wish-fulfilment thing that you can''t do in your previous world? Why don''t you say something you like?"


    "Yeah, that''s the thing. I''m not a fan of romance stories."


    "Then you can do anything you want for now. I''ll y along with you this time." I said.


    "Really?!"


    She was so happy about it. She then transformed herself into¡­ an armor with cape and the animal shaped helmet with two pointy ears. Like the one she transformed herself into before.


    "Say it with a deep voice! I am vengeance! I am¡­"


    Until we reached the city, she enjoyed herself ying with me. This is her reward for helping me all this time. She deserved to have rewards every once in a while.

 Chapter 172 - After The Stampede

    After the Giant Smander''s subjugated by me, the guild was informed about our victory and the end of the stampede. Everyone celebrated our victory.


    Back at the hotel, every citizen who seeks refugee there has left the building to see the houses they lived in. Are they still livable or not?


    I don''t think there will be low supply of foods since some of the monsters we fought are boars and other edible monsters, but the most difficult thing now has just began. The government.


    The governor and several people with power are either joined the cult or have left during the migration yesterday, so it''s up to Shirley to do it.


    She''s only taking care of the small stuffs, while other important stuffs are being taken care of by the king''s agents who are still alive.


    I told them that they also need some rest, but they refused. They said that this is how they should repay those who died during the stampede.


    Many agents died on the hand of the governor, Luiz. They said that if they don''t have anything to do, their mind will be filled with killing intent toward him. Even Candy feels the same way.


    That''s why I had Hill and his people to keep guards on the prisoners. We thought it will be dangerous if we had the agents take care of being the guards.


    As for the prisoners, the numbers are increased. It was because some hunters who feel they had contributed with the battle, feel that they need to get rewards. They would approach woman on the street, taking valuables, or entering some restaurants and asking meals for free. Candy took some agents to take care of those idiots.


    As for me and the others, we take a break at the hotel. It was too tiring.


    But I couldn''t sleep at all. After all, I''m so excited that the stampede has ended. I didn''t try to contact Sonia to ask about other cities.


    After the Giant Smander killed and I collected the scales from its tail, I told Sonia to ry a message to Albert that the stampede here is over. She hadn''t returned since then. Must be quite busy in another city.


    Whileying down on the bed, Victoria entered my room along with the others who have nothing to do. I told her to not hunt some monsters for a while since most monsters near the city are all gone.


    Monsters are necessary for the city. Hunters would subjugate monsters, and get their meats. Then the meat will be sold by the guild to the people.


    Because of the stampede, we have a lot of supply now once we dismantle everything. This city will be fine for a while, but not forever. We need monsters toe back so people can make a living. That''s why I left the Giant Smander''s tail behind so monsters woulde and eat it. That way, the numbers of monsters will return to normal again.


    I rejected Victoria''s idea to go hunting because of that. She and other girls also unable to sleep because of the excitement.


    And that''s how they ended up barging into my room.


    "What do you want?" I asked the girls.


    Victoria brought Ang, Ka, Sophie, and Lina here. The others are busy.


    "We''re bored! Let''s do something!" Ang said.


    "Have you tried visiting your home vige? After our graduation is guaranteed, you might never return here again, you know?"


    "Nah. We just asked Ms. Wendy to fly over our viges to see if they are fine. By the way, she also looked at your vige as well. And everything is fine. Only this city is attacked."


    I think that''s different from my previous life, but it''s better this way. And it''s not like I have intimate rtionship with anyone in the vige, so I don''t need to go home.


    "That''s good. Now what?"


    "No shops open because of the stampede. What should we do?" Victoria asked.


    "Rest."


    "We can''t sleep! That''s why we''re here!" Ang shouted.


    Hmm¡­ what should we do. I also can''t sleep so it''s better if we do something together.


    "How about we console the people here? Entertain everyone?"


    "How?"


    "Lina. You, Sophie, and Victoria go find Shirley and ask her some food supply to cook for everyone. We''re having a spontaneous festival today. And also, find a lot of chefs or food stands seller as well. I''ll ask someone if we can use the square. Ka and Ang,e with me."


    Lina and Victoria are looking for Shirley. With her status, once she asked the guild, they will give some ingredients for her. And since I''m the one who proposed the idea, Shirley should agree.


    Having a festival just as soon as the stampede is over might cause people to dislike us. Why should we celebrate when many people are dead?


    That''s why Shirley need to be there as well to make a speech. Another speech before the real thing tomorrow when we uncover the cult''s existence.


    She should lead everyone to pay respect to the lost lives and then had everyone joined the festivities. To celebrate our survival. And we''ll make all the meals free tonight.


    Shirley also hasn''t told anyone other than some surviving nobles about her identities, but we won''t have her identity leaked yet. She wille out as a noble. Not as princess.


    And my main goal is to gather every survivors in one spot to see if there are still some members of the cult hiding among the people. I don''t think everyone will gather since some people are too tired and resting properly, but it''s fine. I don''t think those who are resting is cult members.


    "Where are we going? Why not just go ask for Shirley with Victoria?" Ang asked.


    "Well, the man I''m going to is someone with some fame in this city. Especially after the stampede. If we ask for this guy''s cooperation, people will ept it better."


    I''m talking about Oleg. He''s the captain of the guards after all. Asking Shirley to use the square is fine, but with Oleg''s cooperation, more people will gather. He''s such an important figure in this city after all. And closer to themoners than the nobles in this city.


    Shirley will take care of the nobles, and Oleg will help me with themoners.


    "We''re here. Let''s go in."


    We arrived at the guards'' barrack where all the guards are resting. And I found the guy I''m looking for. And seems like he''s looking for me too.


    "Eight! I''m just about to look for you." Oleg called me as soon as he sees me.


    "I also have some business with you. But you can go first."


    "The governor is¡­"


    "Yes, he is."


    I know what he wants to ask, so I answered it right away.


    "I see. Who''s in charge now?"


    "The princess."


    "The princess is here?!"


    The one who shouted was the female healer Ka and I met. I don''t know her name though.


    "You are¡­"


    "Oh! My name is Ga. The princess is here? Does that mean reinforcement ising?" Ga asked.


    "Reinforcement has arrived long before the stampede happened. And you have met the princess before." It was Ka who answered.


    I guess it was the time when I asked Shirley to rest near Ka. Well, let''s ignore her for now.


    "I''m here to ask you to use the square. It''s easy to ask for it to the princess, but you are closer to themoners than her. I need your help."


    "The square? For what?"


    "Festival."


    Hearing my answer, Oleg understood instantly what I''m nning to do. We''re nning to let the people enjoy our victory.


    "Alright, I''m in!" Then Oleg returned to the barrack and told everyone about it.


    "Hey! We''re preparing for a festival right now! If you can still move,e with me for the preparation! If you can''t, rest well for now so you cer!"


    "OOOOOOOHH!!"


    Hearing Oleg''s shouts, everyone in the barrack cheer loudly.


    Now we not only have the permission. We also have the manpower as well.


    "Alright. Now let''s go check the spot."


    I lead everyone to go to the square.


    While walking, Ga asked Ka about me.


    "Ka. Is he your boyfriend? The one with mask before who shot down the monsters?"


    "Yes, he is."


    "But he only scores eight in the practical exam!"


    "No. it wasn''t eight." Ka replied calmly.


    "You mean it was him?! The mysterious person who attacked the target!"


    Ka didn''t answer and just smile. I don''t mind Ka showing off her boyfriend, but I told Ga not to spread my identity.


    At the square, we encounter Shirley who is talking to the guild master. Victoria and Lina are also there.


    "Roy! A festival? That''s a good idea!" Shirley shouted.


    "Yeah. And I brought the manpower. Oleg, this is the princess. Shirley, this is Oleg." I introduced Oleg and Shirley to each other. And Ga who ended up following us as well, shocked to see that the princess is Shirley.


    "Does it mean that the reinforcement is¡­"


    "Yes. It was us."


    I''ll leave her to Ka. They seem to be getting along well.


    "Since the guild master is here as well, did you agree with giving the people the food supply for free?" I asked the guild master


    "Yeah. Only for this asion."


    That''s fine as well.


    I look around the ce and easily imagine what to build.


    "Alright! Ang, Ka, and other earth mages will build the stage and the stands! While the other will inform the citizen about the festival! Let''s make this quickly before the sun sets!"


    I had everyone worked hard even after they all tired of fighting. But everyone here is working with a smile on their faces. I guess everyone is looking forward to the festival.


    And I hope that there''s no cult members in sight.

 Chapter 173 - Poker Night

    The festival was quite amazing. At first, I nned it just because I can''t sleep and it was still bright. But then, everyone is enjoying the moment.


    Some people are trying to take their minds off the deceased ones and their losses. Some are celebrating their victory.


    Children are here just to enjoy the festival and grabbed the free foods in the stands. While adults who know more, decided to forget everything for now and enjoy the festival.


    As for me, I''m wearing my clown costume tonight. Walking around the square and make everyoneugh.


    Some people are causing problem, but I''m stronger than them. Then I told the guards to throw them to the prison.


    Everyone loves entertainment. And seeing a talented clown in the crowd makes them happier. I yed some tricks that I can do alone, pranked some people, and teaching easy card tricks to those who wants to learn it.


    I can do it since I have much higher physical capabilities than most people, but I need to slow down to teach them those tricks. Everyone is interested in learning it.


    And not just food stands, there are also stands for attractions where people can y for. It was quickly made thanks to the cooperation of all the earth mages. Everyone is enjoying the whole festival.


    But in the end, the festival doesn''tst long. Everyone is too tired to continue. So, we stopped it as soon as more people returned home and clean up the rest along with the guards.


    The festival was quickly prepared, and it was also quickly ended. Although there are still some people in the square, since there are too few people left, we just told them the festival is over.


    The girls are all returning to the hotel. They feel their fatigues returned after enjoying the festival. I think they will be oversleeping untilte tomorrow. They deserved a good rest.


    As for when we should tell people about the governor''s involvement, the n is for us to do it tomorrow, but I''ll leave it to Shirley and the others. My role is just reading the script by using the governor''s voice. Voice Acting is what Victoria called it.


    The n was to have a festival so I can get more tired and sleep well, but I''m still not sleepy after all this time. I guess I''m still too excited.


    There are also no other people with HGB in their mouth attending the festival. I guess everyone is dead then.


    Although the girls are all resting already, Victoria is still with me since she doesn''t need sleep. There are three other people with us. Kron, Hill, and Oleg. And I''m still wearing my clown outfit.


    "Hill. You''re not guarding the prisoners?" I asked.


    "No. It was so cruel of you to tie them up like that. I can''t bear to look at them anymore so I let my people take shift in guarding. Instead of asking about the prisoner, how about you introduce us to this fine man over here?" Hill looked at Oleg.


    Oleg is the only one here who still doesn''t know what''s happening yet. He just knew that the governor is responsible for the stampede.


    "Right. I guess I''m the neer here. My name is Oleg. The captain of Melk city guards." Oleg introduced himself to Kron and Hill.


    "Oh! What a surprise! We have the same position! I''m the captain of Mellian city guards. Nice to meet you. Are you single?"


    "Whoa. What is it, Hill? You''re nning to introduce him to some girls?" Kron asked Hill curiously.


    Meanwhile, all four of us are looking at him like a strange creature.


    "What is it?" Kron is confused to see all of us looking at him like this.


    "Sometimes, it''s nice to be na?ve." I said.


    "Well, dear Kron here might not be totally wrong." Hill said.


    "Unfortunately, or maybe fortunately, I''m taken. I''m a happily married man to an amazingdy.


    "Hmm¡­ so you''re married already, huh? What a shame." Hill pretended to be disappointed.


    "Then why don''t you find me some girls? I''d like that." Kron naively said.


    Does he really never notice how Hill is actively approaching him? Hill has a saddened expression now. And it''s real. Not a pretension.


    "Maybe I will, Kron. Maybe I will¡­"


    "Since you''re the captain of the guards here, does that mean you know me?" This time, Kron asked Oleg.


    "I know. You are quite popr among the people in this city after all." Oleg replied.


    "I guess I don''t need to introduce myself then."


    "And I think I haven''t introduced myself yet. I''m Roy. And this is my slime, Victoria." I introduced myself and Victoria to Oleg.


    "Are you the female version of the living armor?" Oleg asked Victoria.


    "I am. And the male version is just me transforming myself into an armor being worn by Roy. Nice to meet you." Victoria said.


    "Introduction is nice and all, but don''t you all need some sleep?" I asked everyone here other than Victoria.


    "I have rested as soon as the stampede is over. And I missed the festival because of that!" It was Kron who answered first.


    "As for me, I''m used to stampede in Mellian. I''m confident with my stamina. You can ask the prisoners in Mellian about it." Hill proudly said that.


    I won''t ask anyone about his stamina ever! Is the face that I and Oleg made. As for Victoria, if she has the same body organ as human being, she will be drooling right now. And Kron¡­


    "Whoa! Really?! You must be working really hard to punish those evildoers!"


    "¡­yes! Yes, it was a punishment!" Hill doesn''t want to destroy Kron''s naivety.


    "Kron¡­ are you sure you''re 33 years old? Not 13?" I asked.


    "Why would I be thirteen years old? And I''m already 34 now. It''s been months sincest time I told you my age, you know?"


    "Yeah, sure¡­ what about you, Oleg? Why are you not home? Don''t you have a wife?" I asked Oleg.


    "She''s having a sleepover with her sister. After she saw me doing fine, I told her that she needs tofort her sister. My sister-inw''s husband died today after all. But I won''t tell her that he''s a traitor and I killed him myself."


    "You mean he has an explosive inside his mouth?" I asked.


    "Yeah. I killed him before I met you. And after you told me about the explosive, I checked inside his mouth and see that he has one. I don''t think his wife has one as well, so I sent my wife tofort her."


    "Was she at the festival?" I asked.


    "Hmm? Yeah, she was. Why?"


    "Then she''s really not rted to them. At least directly. There''s no one at the festival having an explosive device in their mouth. I guess all of them died."


    "How did you know?"


    "This guy has a see-through vision." Victoria answered instead of me.


    "Oh¡­ somehow, everything that happened today, doesn''t make me surprised anymore."


    ¡­


    Somehow, our conversation ended just like that. I''m thinking of talking about another topic, but Victoriae with a helping hand.


    "Hey. Why not ying some card games since we''re all bored?"


    "Sure! I have a deck already in my pocket. What game should we y?"


    Everyone agreed to y some cards. We suggested poker since it''s what everyone knows.


    "Then how about poker with different rules? By the way, Roy, during the duration of the game, you are prohibited to see through any cards in anyone''s hand or the deck." Victoria suggested.


    "Fine with me. It will be boring if I win easily anyway. What are the rules of the new poker game?" I asked.


    "Well, it''s called Hold ''em Poker. The rule is¡­"


    Victoria exined about the rule. Instead of each yer holding five cards, each of us will hold two cards and keep it until the round end. No change at all. Then the dealer will deal a card one by one on the table until five cards are drawn. With thebination of the cards in hand and in the table, the one with the higher hand win.


    "So the chips are important in this game. This is a psychological battle. Interesting." I said.


    "Exactly! And I''ll be the dealer while you four will y. We''ll y a round for a test. Then the real one begun after." Victoria said.


    "Where will you find the chips? I don''t think we can find one or make one quickly." Kron asked.


    "Wait a minute."


    Victoria left her seat and go behind the bar. She took a lot of boxes of matches.


    "We will use matchsticks instead of chips. Let''s start!"


    Victoria gave each of us five boxes each. After we learnt the rule, it''s time to test it.


    Victoria drew two cards to each of us. I received a pair of twos.


    The game started and none of us are folding or raised the bet even after Victoria put the fourth card on the table.


    "Here''s thest one!"


    Thest card she drew is a 2 of spades. I guess I can win with three of a kind.


    "I raise." I put three matchsticks forward.


    "I fold."


    "Me too."


    Kron and Hill both folded their cards.


    "I raise."


    Oleg choose to raise and bet ten more matchsticks.


    I stopped to think for a while.


    On the table, there are five cards. From the first one Victoria drew, it was a King of heart, 4 of spade, 5 of clubs, 3 of diamonds, and 2 of spades.


    Maybe Oleg has an Ace or a 6 in his hand. Which gave him a straight hand. I guess I should fold.


    "I fold."


    I gave up. Oleg show us the card and he actually only has 9 of hearts and seven of hearts!


    I should have won if I didn''t fold!


    "AARGH! I would have won! Dammit!"


    "Hahaha! I guess I understand how this works. Let''s y for real now."


    Now everyone already understood how the game works, we yed for real this time.

 Chapter 174 - Were Doing It Today?

    "All right! This is thest time! All in!" I shouted.


    "Me too!" Oleg did the same as me.


    We yed for a long time. Since this is a new game we ever yed, we take interest in this game. We have yed many rounds despite the winner is decided by thest man standing and it takes too long for one person to leave the table.


    Somehow, Oleg and I have the same numbers of wins. Three each.


    As for Hill, he has only one win while Kron has two wins. I don''t know how he did it despite his naivety. I guess his naivety only works in one subject.


    As for me and Oleg, this makes the fifth time that we are thest two in all ten matches. Victoria just smiling there and see how the game going as the dealer.


    We didn''t actually gamble with money. We just continued using matchsticks to y as substitutes for chips. But this is too much entertaining. Kron and Hill also like to watch the game even after they have lost all their chips.


    On the table, five cards already drawn. Five of clubs, two of clubs, two of diamonds, queen of heart, and nine of spades.


    What I have are queen of spades and queen of diamonds. Which means I have a full house with three queens and two twos.


    I don''t know why Oleg is so confident with his hand that he called All-in as well, but his hand shouldn''t be better than me. Although I didn''t use my Divine Vision ability, I''m quite sure of it.


    "Roy. Together?"


    "Alright. Together."


    Our cards areying face down in front of us. When we received our cards, we no longer took it with our hands anymore. We just let it stay face down on the table and peek at the cards we have.


    If I win, the match will still continue since Oleg has more matchsticks than me. But if Oleg win, that''s the end of the match.


    The two men, Kron and Hill, are ring at our cards.


    And then we flip both cards at the same time.


    "I wo- FUUUU¡ª"


    "I won! Haha!"


    My full house is losing against his four of a kind. Both card in his hands are two of hearts and two of spades. It''s my loss. And I take it like a gentleman.


    "How did you always get good cards! Are you cheating?! Victoria! You didn''t secretly cheer for him to win, right? And purposely gave him good cards?"


    "I actually cheered for Oleg to win. But I didn''t give him good cards on purpose. Your luck is just as shitty as your memory."


    "You still making a joke about my memory? I can memorize things better now!"


    "Yeah, yeah. Except for people''s names."


    "I don''t need to remember the names of people I might never meet again, right?"


    "Roy. Take a loss like a gentleman, won''t you?"


    Hmm? I heard someone else spoke interrupting us. It was Ang. And the others were also here as well.


    "You guys can''t sleep? You should rest more."


    "Roy. We have yed all night and now it''s almost lunch time already. They are all oversleep while we didn''t get any sleep at all." Victoria said.


    I looked outside the window and I was shocked to see that the sun is already up.


    "Holy shit! When did the sun rise that high? How long have we been ying?"


    "A little less than twelve hour." Victoria replied calmly.


    "Oh no! My wife will be angry if she didn''t see me at home! I''m going home now! See youter!" Oleg leaves the hotel. He is going home.


    "I guess I''ll check how the prisoners doing." Hill also leaves.


    "I''m going to bed. Good night." Kron is going to sleep.


    "I guess I should sleep as well."


    "No, you don''t! We''re making a n for Shirley''s speech today. Did you forget already?" Ang asked.


    "Well, I thought after the festival, you want people to rest first. Are you really nning to have it done today?" I asked Shirley.


    "Yes. We''ll do it in the afternoon. You will say what we prepared by using Luiz''s voice." Shirley replied.


    I guess I won''t get to sleep until we nned everything.


    Now the dining hall is full of people who have just woken up. Since all of us missed breakfast, we had an early lunch right now.


    After finishing our meals, we continued our discussion.


    "So, we will have Shirley, and several other agents will be her guards. Of course Roy is included. He will be the one who carried Luiz to the stage. Roy, you will stand behind the tied Luiz and speak everything with his voice. And¡­ even though you cut his tongue, he might still be able to let out some yell. Does anyone have any idea how to stop it?" It was Ms. Wendy who lead the discussion.


    "Me! How about not letting any aire out of his mouth? Roy should be able to do that." Victoria suggested.


    "Me? I don''t know about that. I can make him breathe in less air, but I don''t know about not letting any aire out of his mouth."


    "Then practice!"


    I guess I should be able to do it if Victoria say so. Any ideas thate out from her, were originally from her world where technology and knowledge about air, human body, medical, and many other things are more advanced than this world.


    She has helped me with realizing what air element can do other than just making me able to breathe anywhere. Some of her teachings are still either I can''t understand it yet, or I need to achieve higher level of air element to be able to do it. Like how I should be able to step on air.


    Someone volunteered to be used as a practice target. It''s one of the agents. I told him to keep talking or singing whatever he wants. Then I''ll try to stop air toe out from his mouth while making sure that he''s still able to breathe.


    Thanks to his terrible singing voice, I can finally do it in less than fifteen minutes. But that means we have to listen to him singing for fifteen minutes. His voice is so terrible that I feel the urgency to stop him from singing.


    At first the others want me to change the target practice, but Victoria and Ka agreed that if I want to learn this faster, I need to have some kind of motivation. And the motivation they gave me is to stop him from singing.


    "Finally, I did it! Now you need to stop singing!"


    Maybe having a guinea pigs for experiments will help me understand what Victoria is teaching me about. Like Oxygen, Hydrogen, Nitrogen, and probably many other -gens that I don''t understand yet.


    I will need ab for that. And for experiment, I guess I''ll kidnap some cult members and use them. I can also ask Hill, Oleg, or even Albert to give me some prisoners with death sentence.


    "Good. Now what about his mouth movements? It might be too far from the people to see if his mouth is moving or not when you talk, but we still need to be careful of that." Ms. Wendy asked.


    "I''ll take care of that. Just put me inside his mouth and I''ll handle the rest." Victoria replied.


    For someone to voluntarily entering someone''s mouth¡­ she''s so brave.


    "Now that''s taken care of. Next is the watch guard. There might be some other members of the cult hiding in this city or just entered it today to see what''s going on and why is the city not destroyed yet. The agents and guards will be spread and hide among the people to check if someone is suspicious. Roy will be busy doing some voice acting so he won''t be able to cover everything with his eyes. And we can''t just leave everything to him! We need to get some works done as well!" Ms. Wendy said.


    ¡­that''s the words I wanted to hear the most. ''we can''t just leave everything to Roy'' is something that I needed to hear. After getting Albert involved, instead of be free from the difficult stuffs, I was put into a more difficult stuffs and have to take care of everything just because of my memories of my previous life and my Aura ability.


    Now I heard that words from the teacher I admired in my previous life. I LOVE YOU!


    I already have girlfriends, but if by any chance you want to join my harem, I will dly ept you. Not that I will tell this to anyone. But I think everyone already know about it.


    "Now about what you need to say in front of everyone. It must include the goal of the cult, the reason why they nned to destroy the city, and anything we can use to make people me the cult." Ms. Wendy said.


    "And we can''t say anything about the name of the cult. Since we don''t know its real name and none of the members will say anything about it as well. Saying things like Evil God Cult must be done by Shirley herself. Maybe just something like Evil Cult." Ka added.


    "Hmm? Didn''t Veronica tell us that the name of the cult is¡­ what was it again?" I forget about it.


    "You mean True God Cult? That''s something we can''t say to the people. In case someone ended up believing the name, they will try to join the cult instead." Ka said.


    She''s smart as usual. If I yed Hold ''em Poker against her, I would end up losing many times. Maybe.


    We heard from Veronica about the real name of the cult and we don''t like it. Evil God Cult is better since we want to makes them our enemies.


    And so, we prepared a script or me to memorize. It''s so long so I guess I''ll put this on Luiz''s back under his shirt. Then I can see-through his shirt and read the text. It''s easy!

 Chapter 175 - Why I Hate Prison

    Well, that''s one thing taken care of. We will perform the showter in the afternoon. Now the next thing is¡­


    "What about the other prisoners?" I asked Ms. Wendy.


    "Which one? The members of the cult that you captured or the thugs who caused troubles after the stampede?" Ms. Wendy asked back.


    "Well¡­ both of them, I guess? What will we do to them?"


    "Hmm¡­ as for the troublemakers, we can imprison them in a real prison. We''ll give them to the guards of this city to take care of. As for members of the cult¡­ It will be problematic if we put them in prison. During the stampede, all the convicts in prison choose to stay knowing that the prison is a safe ce, but some of the wardens are dead. And we don''t know if there are members of the cult inside the prison as well. We can''t do much to those who are already in prison after all." Ms. Wendy shook her head.


    I guess that''s partly my fault as well. After knowing Hill and what Victoria enjoyed viewing in Mellian''s prison, I would purposely walk away from prison and never really tried to see through the inside of the prison.


    Knowing that there are only criminals there, the numbers of people rted to the cult should be high. Maybe I''ll go check it outter.


    ¡­after I asked Oleg if there are people like Hill as the warden or not.


    "Have you interrogated them?"


    Yesterday when I was trying to sleep before suggesting a festival, it should be enough for Ms. Wendy and the agents to interrogate the prisoners I caught. Maybe they have given us another info other than what we know from Veronica as well.


    "We have. One of my people is expert in torture and interrogation. He said that the members of the cult only know what we already know. Even Luiz doesn''t know much other than being told by their higher ups to make a stampede happen in this city." Ms. Wendy said.


    "Your interrogator is extremely good then. I thought that even the members of the cult will still choose to stay silent after being tortured."


    "¡­it''s all thanks to you though."


    "What?" I tilted my head in confusion.


    What did I do to them? I just capture them, dislocate their joints, and threw away their HGBs. Is there anything else that I did? Maybe it''s how I tied them up?


    "Well, your method of tying them while making them only have one way to kill themselves with magic is really cruel. My interrogator even shiver in fear when he saw the situation. There''s a corpse of a man with his crotches burnt. The expression of that person on his death is different from any that he has seen in his life. And then those who haven''t killed themselves told us the truth because they saw the scariest thing that would happen if¡­ they tried to kill themselves." Ms. Wendy exined.


    So it works better than I imagined. I thought I would only have them unable to kill themselves. Who would have thought that it would cause them so much trauma just witnessing someone burned his own crotches to death?


    It''s also a good thing that I only captured men. In fact, I haven''t seen much female cult members so far. If I found one, I guess I should think how to tie them up again. Maybe Victoria will know more about it.


    "Let''s just kill the prisoners. Throw them outside the city and do whatever you want to get them killed. From what I see, some of the agents here are holding grudges toward them for having their friends killed, right? Just let them grab those prisoners outside the city and have them do whatever they want as long as the prisoners died." I said calmly.


    "¡­that''s pretty cruel. But I think that''s good for the agents to relieve their anger as well. Candy, you will go with the agents and see if they are truly dead." Ms. Wendy looked at Candy.


    I guess she''s worried if by any chance that the prisoners are not killed. But for me, I can believe these agents. all of these agents are people who Albert can trust. None of them should be rted to the cult. I''m sure that they will kill those prisoners without a doubt.


    "Alright then. We''re done, right? I''ll take a short nap then. I haven''t sleep at all since yesterday."


    I go to my room and sleep until the time for the public speech arrive.


    After few hours of sleep, I was awakened by Sophie very gently. It was so gentle that I wish I can go back to sleep again. And then Ang came and disturb my rest for real.


    "Sophie! Next time you wake him up, don''t do it like that! Just p his face or something." Ang said to Sophie.


    "That''s impossible for me. Next time, I''ll just ask you to do it." Sophie said.


    "Please, don''t! Sophie is the one who has to wake me up! At least when we don''t have any urgent matter." I interrupted.


    "But we have an urgent matter now! You need to wake up already!"


    Seems like it''s impossible to have another sleep. I''ll just ask Sophie to sleep with me tonight.


    I wear a guard uniform since I''ll be pretending to be Shirley''s guard. My mouth is covered with a mask so that no one can see that I''m the one doing the talking.


    As for Luiz, he will be restrained and have Victoria inside his mouth. Will she be okay being inside his mouth? I tried asking her.


    "Hmm? I''m fine. Back then when I was still alive in this world, I killed and tortured many people using both the strength I gained in this world and the knowledge I learned from my previous world. I have seen things even more disgusting than the inside of someone else''s mouth." Victoria replied nonchntly. Making those who heard her stepped away in fear.


    Will I be okay having her as my girlfriend?


    No. I''m not just her boyfriend. I''m also her master as she is my summon. She won''t try to kill me. I hope.


    "Well, where are we going first?"


    "To Luiz''s ce obviously! You''ll be meeting Hill and Oleg there who has been exined about our n. By the way, are you sure we can trust Oleg? I know he''s doing well protecting the city, but we don''t know much about him." Ang asked.


    "Well, I know that he yed an important role in my previous life which makes me able to keep my life. Maybe yours as well. And after seeing what he did, I know I can trust him."


    "Well, if you say so." Ang said.


    I guess she''s convinced with that exnation. But how she didn''t ask me about why I didn''t remember about Oleg earlier is a good thing. I can''t just tell her that I forgotten about him until I met him yesterday.


    ¡­but from the suspicious stares from Victoria and Ka, and also the stifledughter of Sophie and Lina, I think only Ang doesn''t realize it. Good thing that Shirley, Candy, and Ms. Wendy isn''t here.


    Anyway, I wondered about it for a while. Where are they?


    "They are making the preparation. Once everything is prepared, Shirley will meet you and you will bring Luiz from where he is being imprisoned to the stage we just built yesterday for the short festival." When I asked, it was Ka who answered.


    "So, we will openly show Luiz to the public on the way to the stage as well. And while doing that, we make sure that everyone in the city noticed something is going on. Am I right?"


    "Yes. Once you''re on the stage, it''s your turn." Ka said.


    "Huhu¡­ don''t worry, I''ll be doing my best. Victoria said that it was a voice acting, and I''m good at acting." I said confidently.


    "That''s good. Some agents said that there are people entered this city a while ago. Once Luiz is on stage, they might assassinate him."


    Assassination? If I don''t have to do the talking, I would be out there killing or capturing suspicious people. But with me on the stage, I can''t do that anymore. So¡­ do they have n in case this happen?


    "If an assassin indeede, should I let Luiz die or protect him?" I asked Ka.


    "Protect him if possible. On the stage, there will be only four of you. Shirley as the princess, Luiz, Oleg, and you. If the assassines, I want you to prioritize saving Shirley first. It''s fine if Luiz is dead. We already know enough about the cult to make them the enemy of the people. But if possible, protect him."


    Sigh¡­ protecting someone I would killter. Such a pain in the ass.


    So I just need to prioritize Shirley first? As for the other, they will be a part of the crowd or hiding somewhere to look for suspicious people.


    "By the way, have any of you heard anything from Sonia?"


    "She''s so busy right now. The losses in another city is too much. But they managed to capture the noble in charge of those cities. Although I heard that they all killing themselves after being caught." Ka replied.


    So they have chosen death. It means that we are the only ones left to show the world about the cult.


    I''ll show the world how good my voice acting skill is. Well, Melk city at least.

 Chapter 176 - He Is The Culprit!

    At the building where the imprisoned Luiz is, we meet Hill and Oleg who brought us to Luiz.


    We see the governor who has lost all his strength, unable to move, and unable to speak normally since I cut off his tongue.


    "kihh¡­ me¡­" He begged us.


    "Kiss you? Ask Hill for that." I said.


    "Roy. I think he''s begging us to kill him instead of kiss him." Oleg exined.


    "Oh. Well, don''t worry. You''ll die soon. Probably the cult send assassin to kill youter when you stepped on the stage, but I''ll try to protect you until it''s time for you to die. The question is, should we let the assassin they send return back to the one who gave that assassin the order, or kill them to keep the cult in the dark? Either way, the cult will soon know that this kingdom is preparing to fight against them." I said.


    Luiz''s expression changed into despair. Despite his strength reached expert level, not only he lost a fight against a beginner level. Even after losing, he can''t do anything other than being my puppet. He can''t move, and he can''t talk.


    Then there''s a chance that the cult will send a spy to Melk since the stampede is a failure. The spy will try to assassinate Luiz if we spread the cult''s existence and their goal to the world.


    If anyone in his ce, they would probably have the same expression as he has at the moment.


    "Don''t worry. I have one good news for you." I said to Luiz.


    Then I altered my voice to simr to Luiz and said, "At least your name will be written in history."


    "¡­damn, you''re so cruel!" Oleg said.


    "That''s why I fell in love with him!" Hill proudly eximed. I got the shiver again.


    "AS A FRIEND! No more than that! A friend who asionally greeted each other when we met, and y cards, but there''s no body contact at all!" I said.


    Soon, Shirleye along with several agents and guards. Ms. Wendy and Candy are also here. As for Ka and the others, they should be at the square right now.


    Victoria? She''s been with me all this time.


    Seeing Shirley has arrived, I opened Luiz''s mouth and put Victoria inside.


    "Let''s practice. With our connection as master and summon, we should be able to interact through our mind as long as we''re close, right? Oh, wow! His jaw is really moving up and down whenever I talk. It''s working!"


    I practiced using Luiz''s voice and have Victoria moves Luiz''s jaw up and down. As for the shape of his mouth, it''s difficult to move it ording to what I want. He even tried to close his mouth shut, but I made Victoria opened it forcefully. I hope no one noticed the ck slime inside his mouth.


    "Are you ready?" Shirley asked.


    We nned to walk with these group of people on the street to the square to gain everyone''s attention. Ms. Wendy and Candy will stay behind until all of us are nowhere within sight so they can see if anyone is secretly following us.


    Although I can see all around me with my Divine Vision, it will be difficult to concentrate on other things while doing something important. I need to learn how to do multiple tasks at once.


    "AYE-AYE, PRINCESS!" Victoria replied to Shirley.


    Why is she so excited? And it''s pretty funny to hear a girl''s voiceing out of Luiz''s mouth.


    "Alright. We have spread the news that I''m in this city. Soon people will see us escorting Luiz to the square and they will follow us after we leave this building. Let''s go!"


    With Shirley in the lead, Oleg and I carried Luiz in between us. We just pulled each arm and drag him with us since his joints is still dislocated. I have no intention in fixing them.


    Of course before we leave the building, we had his head covered with a bag. We won''t reveal his identity until we reached the stage at the square. It''s to make people curious who the man we bring is


    Once we''re out of the building, there aren''t that many people outside. But as we continue our march to the square, more and more people are looking from the side of the street, and also follow us in the back. All of them are curious about what we''re doing.


    The rumor that was spread to the people is that the stampede was nned by someone. And the princess is here to prove it. Since Shirley was also present during the battle, some of the hunters trusted the rumor when they see Shirley leading the march. Of course they are surprised to see that Shirley is the princess. They thought fromst night''s festival that she was just a noble. Not a royalty.


    There are also some hunters who didn''t do much during the battle and instead tried to flirt with her when Shirley is busy taking injured people to healers. They don''t dare to look at her now.


    Soon we reached the square and we walked up the stage we previously made for the festival thatst only a couple hours. It was a really short festival that makes those who went to rest right away after the stampede unable to attend. Like Kron did.


    Once we''re at the stage, we tied Luiz to a pole we prepared before so we can at least make him stand. I stand behind the pole while Oleg is near Shirley to protect her.


    "People of Melk! My name is Shirley Lucia Tatrama! Sister of the King of Tatrama, Albert! I''m here to tell everyone about the stampede we experienced the other day!" Shirley shouted.


    Lucia? I never know her full name before. Well, even if I heard it before, I don''t think I''ll remember it anyway since she''s just Shirley to me.


    "She''s a princess!?"


    "She saved my life in the battle!"


    "Oh shit! Did I really tried to flirt with a royalty? Will I be punished?"


    There are many voices talking after Shirley leaked her identity. But those are something we expected.


    "I am here to tell you all the truth about the stampede! It was all nned by some evil group who wanted to test their strength! What happened is just an experiment for them! An experiment to see how powerful they are with their controlled monsters!" Shirley continued.


    Experiment? I never said anything about it, right? I just thought that the stampede is just to show the cult''s strength. Well, that seem good enough for the citizens so it''s fine.


    "There is exist an evil organization in this world with the intention of destroying the world! And the stampede that happen in this city is just the first step toward that goal!"


    Come on, Shirley! Raise their hatred! Make the people of this kingdom hatred to the Evil God Cult ingrained into their souls!


    "After interrogating this man we caught during the stampede, we know that it also happened in other cities as well! Not just Melk! There are other victims than us in other cities!"


    The crowd turned noisy after hearing what Shirley said.


    "What? Really?"


    "Oh no! What if my parent got caught in the stampede?"


    "My hometown! Is my hometown safe?!"


    Everyone is so loud that Shirley has no choice but to make stay until everyone calmed down. She looks so lost with all the noise here. I guess I should help her a little.


    "Who is it?! Who is the one responsible to all this?! Who are the crazy bastards that think people''s lives are so useless in their eyes and tried to kill us all just for an experiment!"


    It was me who said it. But because of the noise around, no one knows where the source ising from. Well, except for those who stand on the stage. Oleg and Shirley looked at me with a confused expression when I suddenly said something, but because of my question, more and more people turned silent because they all want to hear the answer. Who is the one responsible to the destruction of the cities?


    After the people started to quieted down, Shirley looked at me with gratitude and continued her speech.


    "Calm down, everyone! That''s why I''m here! I will tell you what I learned from interrogating this man! You all deserve to know the truth! We have nothing to hide, so calm down and listen to what I say!"


    Nothing to hide? We know that stampede is going to happen but instead of stopping it before it happens, we make it happen so we can stop it and show tell people the truth. We have a lot to hide, my dear Shirley. But it''s good to say that here since it''s what people wanted to hear.


    I don''t think that Shirley is the kind of girl who lies like that. If I''m not wrong, the ones who wrote her speech is Ms. Wendy, Candy, and Ka. With the help of Victoria. And maybe Sonia as well. She''s going to Albert''s ce and here over and over again to help Shirley with her speech.


    I only heard that from Victoria so I don''t know the truth. I think it all happen when I was taking my nap.


    "The stampede happened because of this evil organization! This Evil Cult! We don''t know their name yet, but they are a cult with evil intention!"


    Evil Cult is a cult with evil intention! Oh, wow! I''m so surprised to know the truth!


    This part is so stupid. Who is the one responsible for this part? My guess is Ang.


    "There are many cities in our kingdom, but there is a reason why Melk city is being targeted. It was because of this man!" Shirley pointed at Luiz.


    "This is the man responsible for the stampede to happen in this city! This man joined the cult for a long time and told the cult that if they are targeting a city, why not Melk? This guy is¡­ Luiz! The governor of this area!" Shirley said as she took off the bag covering Luiz''s head to show the people his identity as the one who should be ruling this city.


    "What?!"


    "No way!"


    "It''s all his fault?"


    Everyone is unable to believe it at first. But since it was the princess who said it, and she also saved a lot of lives during the stampede, most people believed right away.


    Then it will be my turn soon.

 Chapter 177 - Blame Everything On Luiz!

    "This guy is the one responsible for the death of our friends and our families! Luiz!" Shirley shouted.


    "You¡­ you bastard! It was all your fault that my husband died!"


    It was one woman who spoke first. She''s around thirty years old. Oleg looked shocked when he saw her.


    When I looked at him for confirmation, he spoke in a low voice that only I can hear. I have told him that my hearing is very good so he knows that I can hear him.


    "That''s my sister-inw." He said.


    Sister-inw? Doesn''t that mean it was Oleg who killed her husband?


    Well, in any case, it was indeed Luiz''s fault that her husband died. If he didn''t suggest to sacrifice this city, all of these would never happen. But if these things didn''t happen, I wouldn''t know what to do since all I''ve prepared after returning back to the past is for this moment.


    From here on, it''s unknown area. I don''t know much more of what will happen after I altered the future this much. And even if I didn''t alter it, I don''t know much about the past anyway.


    First it was Oleg''s sister-inw who shouted. Then the others followed.


    "My house is destroyed by monsters, you bastard!"


    "Some people even stole valuables from our house when we were evacuating!"


    "Yeah? My son died because of him!" A big man shouted.


    "You don''t even have children." Someone smaller next to him said it. I can hear them even when their voice is low.


    "I just want to shout something."


    Alright, big guy. I like you. Keep shouting whatever you like.


    And just as I hoped, he and the guy next to him shouted many things.


    "You stole my sandals!"


    "That house you live in was mine!"


    "My crush married someone else because of you!"


    "My neighbor died because he slipped on a banana peel and fall from a cliff! It happened three years ago but I me you for it today!"


    Alright, those two keep shouting nonsenses that some agents took notice of them and started to keep watch on them.


    While the others are shouting their grievance of the losses of their loved ones, those two are just here for fun. Once everyone started shouting, they want to get involved even though I think that they didn''t lose much during the stampede. And they look so happy cursing Luiz.


    Well, the agents will do something if they are found to be suspicious anyway. I''ll leave those two to them. For now, it''s still Shirley''s turn.


    "Wait, everyone! Calm down first! There''s more to what we have found out! Please listen carefully since this will affect everyone. Not just the people in Melk, but in the whole kingdom as well! And probably, even the world!"


    After hearing what Shirley said, everyone calmed down a bit. Other than those pair who seems to have something they want to say. What is it this time I wonder? Something about their shoes?


    Then Shirley started exining about the danger of the Evil Cult who is evil to everyone. We need a name from them. We can''t just keep calling them Evil Cult or Evil God Cult.


    Hmm¡­ maybe we can! Since it just shows that they are really evil. I need to thanks Ang for that if she''s really the one who told Shirley to say it.


    But it''s now my turn here. I see the script I put under Luiz''s clothes and read it.


    "You wench! If you''re not here then my n will go smoothly!" I said with Luiz''s voice.


    I think my voice acting is so good that it makes Shirley shudders. Or is it that Shirley never heard of any curses directed at her that she''s not used to it?


    Everyone is stunned to hear what ''Luiz'' said. Even Luiz himself. He tried to turn his neck to look at me but he can''t since his body is tied. I thought this was part of the script.


    Seeing no one is reacting to the script, I guess I should do some improvisation.


    I smacked Luiz''s head and warned him.


    "Hey! Don''t you dare insulting her highness! The royalty of this country is working hard to improve the lives of the people, but what have you done? As a noble, you should be helping the people! Not sacrificing them!" I said. This is with my own voice.


    Then seeing me doing all the talking, those who knows the truth was shocked. But they just let it be since after I insulted her, Shirley is unable to react properly even when we had the scripts.


    I guess it just mean that script and me are never meant to be.


    "Who the hell are you!? You''re just one stinking guard! If not for this Magic Restriction Cor, I would have killed you again and again!" This time I spoke with Luiz''s voice. I also had Victoria turn his head toward me. But his expression¡­ instead of anger, it was a mix between surprise and confusion. What? Never see someone so good at talking to himself?


    "It''s exactly because of that cor that I can do whatever I want!" Again, I speak in my own voice. But I haven''t finished talking yet. Just to make people''s animosity is aimed at him more and more.


    "Did you forget? Our kingdom banned any kind of very. But why did you have this thing in your mansion? Not just sacrificing the citizen. You also took ves as well? Or maybe you are trading ves?" I continued.


    I med Luiz for all kind of crime. I thought I would keep talking to myself until everyone has collected their thought so we can continue, but Hill is there among the crowd with a helping hand.


    "Hey! Don''t tell me it was you who took my son!? He went missing three years ago! So you took him as a ve and sold him somewhere!? You deserve to die!" Hill said.


    With that at the start, some people started shouting about their missing families and friends as well. I don''t know if Luiz is involved in trafficking, but he deserved to die indeed.


    As for the two who came here just to have fun¡­


    "Don''t tell me it was you who kidnapped my grandma!? I know she''s on herst breath, but to think you had her kidnapped as well¡­ She''s over a hundred years old!"


    "Did you forget? My grandpa is looking for her. I heard that he found her and then got married after that. They lived the rest of their short lives in the woods."


    "Of course I know that. We''re twins! Both grandpa and grandma forget that they''re in love with each other so each encounter it felt as if both of them fall in love again for the first time. I just wanted to shout something."


    "I know. Although they have forgotten us as their grandchildren, isn''t it romantic to fell in love again for the first time with the person you swore your life to?"


    Gyahahaha! So they are fraternal twins! I thought they were close, but I never thought that they are twins since they look different. And the story about their grandparent is true? Forgetting things sucks, but to be able to fall in love for the first time again and again is so sweet of the couple. I hope for the best to those old couple who keeps falling in love again and again until the end of their lives.


    I think this is the first time in my life that I want someone to be my friend. And there are two of them! If possible, I would like to meet themter. But since I am so busy, I think that would be difficult.


    Now that all the animosity of the citizens of Melk have been aimed at Luiz, Shirley tells everyone in the audience about what we know about the cult and only things that they can know. Not things like we are deliberately let the stampede to happen. That''s one thing that must be kept secret no matter what.


    While Shirley is exining what she can tell to everyone, a female voicee out from Luiz''s mouth.


    "Roy. You have a talent with talking to yourself." It was Victoria. She''s talking while still in Luiz''s mouth.


    "I spend a lot of time alone in my previous life after all."


    "You''re just like a little girl ying with her dolls. Are you sure it''s okay to say something like previous life in front of this guy?"


    Although we speak in a low voice, of course Luiz can still hear us since Victoria is talking from his mouth.


    "It''s fine. He''s going to die anyway. With this many people hostile against him, it''s impossible for him to stay aliveter. But there seem to be no assassin after his life so far."


    "I think it''s because Shirley is the one doing the talking. She told everyone what we know, so whether this guy is still alive or not, it doesn''t matter to them."


    Victoria is right. There''s no point in assassinating people to shut them up when the information has already been leaked. But I''m worried if they will think that we know about HGB in the cult members mouth. But I hope it will be fine since no one will think that someone has the power to see through things.


    Seeing Luiz has a serious expression, I can''t hold back telling him the truth.


    "Hey. Wanna know the truth? Actually, I came from the future. The stampede should have destroyed more than half of the city, but I prevented it by telling the king about it. Have you fallen into despair?"


    Luiz has the look of a man who has fallen into despair. He must be thinking that I''m right since he was being targeted. And with this, he no longer has any desire to fight back anymore. Since he thinks that anything the cult will do, will be in vain with me knowing about the future.


    What he didn''t know is I have no other knowledge about the future after this. But I won''t tell him about it.

 Chapter 178 - Do You Want To See Public Execution!?

    "Let''s mark today as the day we will never forget! Remember the losses we have today so no one else will feel the same as we feel today! Let''s make a world where our future, our children can y andugh!"


    "OOOOOOOHHH!"


    Nice. Seems like Shirley is getting the hang of public speech. The first time she enters the stage, she was speaking as if she''s reading a text. I don''t think anyone noticed it. But now, she can express herself better. I think she had made some improvisation as well other than sticking to the script. But it''s better than the script that I see.


    Shirley¡­ you are cheating with writing the speech on your palm. I can read it easily.


    But it''s a good thing that she gained experience today. Maybe in the future, she will give another public speech again since she''s a royalty. This experience today will make her grow into a better¡­ public speaker?


    Shirley speaks a lot about the cult that we know, but that doesn''t mean Luiz, the perpetrator of the stampede, only has to listen without talking back.


    "So what if you people die!? You are all trash! Garbage! You all only good enough to be served as a meal for the monsters! Why won''t you all just die!?" I shouted insults using Luiz''s voice.


    The already despaired Luiz fell deeper into despair. I think his mind is already gone.


    There was some research about this case that I read before. I think it''s about someone who received a great shock his mind can''t handle it anymore. In the case that I read in my previous life, his mind regressed into that of a child. As for Luiz, he hasn''t showed any other symptoms than this nk expression of his.


    I don''t know if it''s just an act or not, but whatever the case, he will die today. We can''t let him live no matter what condition he''s in.


    Hearing my insults, Shirley has a scared expression on her face. Why did she have to do that every time I threw an insult? She needs to get used to insults.


    "You have a lot to say, don''t you? Why don''t I make it so you won''t be able to speak again?" I said with my normal voice.


    Then I let Victoriae out of Luiz''s mouth as I wrapped a cloth to cover his mouth. It means my voice acting time has ended. Now I only need to y as Shirley''s guard.


    "Roy. Your shamelessness is on another level." Victoria whispered as she moved from my palm to right next to my ear.


    "What shamelessness? I''m just ying my part."


    While we are having a small chat, someone in the crowd shouts to have Luiz died.


    "Kill him!"


    "Avenge our families!"


    "He must die!"


    "KILL! KILL! KILL! KILL!"


    It was just one and two at first. Then everyone shouted to kill him right on the spot.


    I guess our works to make Luiz and the cult as everyone''s enemy works too well. I think it''s time for closure.


    Meanwhile, I see the funny twins are shouting other things than kill. With this much noise, I can''t hear what they are shouting. But I think I heard someone shouted to kill Luiz in a detailed way. Like sinking him in ake. Maybe these shouts came from those twins.


    But still¡­ to think that everyone wanted him die as well. We''re doing too well in agitating the people.


    For these angry people, insults work better than words of encouragement. Rather than having someone in high position saying let''s work together, it''s easier for these people to understand insults thrown to them by the one at fault, Luiz.


    But it works even better when the two is cooperating well together.


    "Calm down, everyone! He will surely be punished with his life for what he''s done! But please remember that the cult is still there! Everyone needs toe together as one so we all can defeat that Evil Cult!" Shirley shouted at the top of her lungs.


    Everyone cheered for her. In this timeline, we all can work together. I hope nothing bad happens in this timeline like what happened in my previous life.


    And now once the cult realized that we know of their existence and their danger, they should be quieted down a bit. And we''ll use that time to get stronger.


    I thought that everything is over. We will take Luiz somewhere outside the gate and kill him so his corpse can be used as bait for monsters toe again near this city. Monsters are necessities for hunters to survive after all.


    But I was wrong. It''s not done yet.


    "Kill him!"


    "Kill him!"


    "Kill him!"


    There are still some people shouting to have Luiz killed. They wanted to see him die right in front of them.


    "Calm down! We will kill them but not in front of everyone!" Shirley tried to calm the people but she failed.


    "No! Kill him right here!"


    "If you don''t show us his dead body, we can''t trust you!"


    Tsk! Don''t they know that there are children watching? We gained too much attention that children who don''t know anything curious about what''s happening on stage and they are watching us right now.


    I don''t mind killing Luiz in public, but I don''t want children to be traumatized by that. But for the adult, I don''t mind if they are traumatized.


    Seeing that everyone is shouting to kill him without mercy, I have an idea. But first, I need to make sure that the children are not watching.


    "Victoria. Sneak into the crowd and tell everyone in the n to keep children away from the square. Just make sure they can''t see anything is fine as well.


    "Alright. Are you going to kill Luiz here?"


    "No. Just a bit demonstration of what they wanted to see." I said in whisper.


    Victoria then left my side without anyone noticing. Having a monster that canmunicate is really useful.


    After seeing that the agents and also my friends moved to block the children from viewing the stage, I make my move.


    "You really want to see him die here?" I asked the people despite Shirley''s confusion of my action. I should have told Victoria to ry a message to her as well.


    "YES!" Everyone shouted in agreement.


    "I''ll grant your wish!"


    I took out a dagger and simply cut off Luiz''s left ear.


    "HMPHHH!!"


    Although the scream was muffled by a piece of cloth, everyone can hear it clearly. And they are all quieted down when they see the cruelty of what I did.


    "What? You think I''ll let him die quickly? Of course not! I''ll have him die in agony! After a long torture! Now, do you want to see him die here!?" I asked again.


    Everyone is afraid of what they see. They must have thought that someone will use magic to kill Luiz since that''s what a normal public execution should be. But thest public execution should be many years before I was born, so I don''t know about it. And no one would use a knife to execute someone.


    This is that kind of world after all. Since Aura user went to extinction in the past, no one would bother improving their physical ability. All kind of battle and conflict are solved using magic. But now in front of them, they see someone who didn''t use magic for execution.


    I also have looked around and see that there are no children seeing this sight. Some of the kids are being taken by agents dressed in guard uniform and told them that kids should not see this. And some just simply stand up in front of the kids so they can''t see what''s going on.


    But of course some kids would still understand what''s going on hearing the scream of their governor and what I just said. At least they didn''t see it directly.


    "Isn''t this what you want!?" I asked again. And no one answered. Everyone is scared of me.


    "Enough! Luiz will be executed away from the city and that''s final! Take him away before he dies! Surely there are no objections, right?" Shirley asked.


    I see¡­ she''s fine with cruelty and violence in front of her, but she can''t handle insults. That''s interesting.


    I cut of the rope that tied Luiz and picked him up on my shoulder. I walked off the stage and everyone is avoiding me. They made a path for me to walk. Everyone is looking at me in fear.


    That''s good. Although it was just an improvisation, I have another goal in my mind as to why I did that.


    Making everyone hostile toward the cult is already done. Then another thing is that gruesome disy of me cutting of Luiz''s ear. I think I left his ear on the stage, but I don''t care.


    That disy of violence, by the princess'' guard, will make anyone who have evil intention to the princess, think twice about it. I see some men whispering dirty thoughts while I was still on stage. They didn''t even bother to hide their expression. Everything is shown on their face. Although I can''t hear what they''re whispering about, I know it should be something bad. Especially since some of them tried to approach Candy and the others while she''s doing her job hidden within the crowd.


    But now, those people have terrible expression on their faces. They are afraid. Afraid of me who is acting as the princess'' guard. And that mean they will be afraid of the royalty who hired someone as violent as me as their guard.


    I don''t know how long we will stay in Melk, but I think Shirley will walk around the city during the time we''re here. Maybe even alone at times. That''s why her safety is important.


    I don''t want Albert to find out that something happened to Shirley when she''s under my care.

 Chapter 179 - Killing Luiz And Some Stalkers

    The crowd make a path for me to walk through. I also make sure to walk to a direction where no kids are watching. Since the pained Luiz on my shoulder is leaving a trail of blood on the ground from his ear. His blood even dirtied my clothes. Good thing it was borrowed.


    When I was outside of everyone''s sight, Victoria approached me and stayed on top of my head.


    "You just cut off his ear in front of everyone!"


    "Thanks for the exnation of something that I did. Yes, I know." I said.


    "Now no one will purposely cause trouble to Shirley knowing that you are her guard."


    Seems like Victoria noticed my intention. That mean I don''t need to exin it to her again.


    "Where are you going now?" Victoria asked.


    "Out of the city. We need monsters to return back to the forest so I will use Luiz as their feed."


    "Is that all?"


    I think Victoria noticed something is wrong as well. That''s why she asked.


    "Well, there are several people following me. I think they are not in the crowd before and were hiding inside one of the building nearby. Now that I''m leaving the square, they left as well and started following me. I can see them with my Divine Vision."


    There are about seven people following me. I can''t see if they have HGB in their mouth since they are too far. I need to turn my sight toward them to see clearly if they have HBGs or not, but if I do that, they will be suspicious.


    I have two possibilities of why they are following me. Both are because of Luiz.


    First, they wanted to kill Luiz. My voice acting was so good that they should think that it was Luiz himself who''s doing the talking. That''s why when some secrets were leaked thanks to my voice acting, they needed him dead in case I''m not really taking him to be killed.


    Second, they are trying to save him. They will try to ask Luiz about everything that happened. From how the stampede didn''t work, to how he and the captured cult members leaked the information despite everyone we captured have HGB in their mouth and didn''t took their own lives. As for Luiz, he didn''t die because we put the Magic Restriction Cor on him. And we don''t have any other Magic Restriction Cor anymore since it was used for ves, and very is banned in this kingdom. That''s why they wanted to know the truth.


    To achieve any of those goals, they need me to die. So, whatever their goal is, killing me is their highest priority to get to Luiz.


    I walked outside the gate and approached the horse carriage we have prepared to carry Luiz to the forest. Although it will be faster if I run, I need to act like normal people here if I want to kill them all.


    And while putting Luiz on the carriage, I can pretend to prepare the horse while looking at the seven stalkers.


    I haven''t trained my Divine Vision to be able to zoom in and see through things while in my see all around vision. I just made up that name on the spot here.


    That''s why I need to face them within my sight so I can tell if they have HGBs or not.


    There are seven of them. And that''s obvious since I said it before. Five of them are males, and the other two are females. All of them has HGBs in their mouth. That mean they need to be killed.


    Oh, wait! There''s another person behind them! Which makes eight. That man is following the seven stalkers a bit away from the reach of my see all around vision. That''s why I thought there are only seven.


    Alright, Roy. Think! Why would there be another man behind the stalkers stalking them? Does he have HGB in his mouth? Yes! That mean he''s their ally.


    And since I''m not alone here, I can ask for suggestion from others.


    "So, there are seven of cult members following me, and another man behind them. Anyone has ideas to why he''s stalking my stalkers?" I asked the other two people here. If I can count Victoria as one.


    "..."


    "Alright. Luiz doesn''t say anything. So, Victoria?"


    Luiz didn''t say anything other than groaning in pain. I thought he might have any idea since he''s a fellow member of the cult. But if he knows something, I can check his reaction from our deductions.


    "I think those seven are to either kill Luiz or rescue him. And thest one is probably either the leader or the fastest member. He will escape in case things went south during the mission. Then he will report to the cult about it." Victoria said.


    Hearing Victoria''s guess, Luiz''s body twitched a bit. She might be right.


    Then I drove the carriage to the forest. The seven stalkers and their stalker also followed me.


    There are no other horses here, but five of them has reached advanced level in their wind element. Which enables them to fly. One of them is my stalkers'' stalker.


    I guess he might really be the fastest or the strongest among the bunch.


    They all fly high into the sky so I can''t see them. Three of them are carrying those who can''t fly. Then as soon as I reached the forest, they descended and fly low since they can hide themselves behind the trees.


    The shaking inside the carriage makes the tied cloth on Luiz''s mouth undone, then I see him about to shout something. I think he wanted to warn the eight of them that they have fallen into a trap. But I won''t let you.


    I used my air magic to make it so Luiz unable to say anything. But he tried to turn his body to face the stalkers to warn them using his expression. Although it''s difficult for him to do that with his joints dislocated, he''s using his muscles alone to move his body.


    I guess I''ll just kill him now.


    I threw a knife imbued with my Aura and pierced Luiz''s heart. He died without having the chance to inform whoever following us.


    "Is it fine to kill him like that?"


    "It''s fine. We want him to die anyway. Victoria. Transform into sniper rifle. Thest guy is quite far away, but I want to take him down first. Hopefully, they are not prepared to cast their Wind Wall to block the bullets."


    After transforming, I put around twenty small rocks inside the rifle, and startpressing air to shoot the stalkers. Then I put the rifle on the carriage, beside Luiz''s corpse. I also used my other hand to grab the spearhead in my pocket.


    I stopped the horse carriage, and they are still closing in and stopped when they see me within their range of attack. Instead of taking me out already, they might be waiting for order.


    I stepped down from the carriage and pretend to prepare for Luiz''s execution. But he''s already dead though. I just do it so I can find their leader.


    And it was indeed the man behind them who is the leader. He seems to have given the order to kill me as the other seven prepared to cast their magic. But they are toote.


    As soon as I realized he is the leader, I grabbed the rifle beside Luiz''s dead body and shoot him. After shooting him, with my spearhead, I cut off Luiz''s neck cleanly and grabbed the Magic Restriction Cor from him. I''m thinking of putting it on the stalkers'' leader''s neck.


    The leader got shot down and no one can react immediately to that. None of them think that they are the one being hunted. And that''s my chance to kill them all.


    I quicklypressed the air inside the rifle again and shoot the other stalkers one by one while moving toward their leader. I got six of them, but thest one, one of the two women, managed to react quickly to dodge my bullet. It only left a scratch on her face.


    Luckily, she is not one of the flying ones. So even if she runs, I can catch up to her. I just go to where their leader is.


    The other six, I killed them with a bullet through their heads. As for their leader, he is still alive because I aimed at his stomach. And I put the cor on him so he won''t be able to use magic anymore.


    "Wait here while I kill that woman. Though she might have killed herself before I killed her."


    "Huff¡­ so you know about the explosives in our mouth? Who are you?" The man asked.


    "A clown."


    After replying, I chased after the escaping woman. When I managed to get close to her, she prepared to cast an attack magic on me.


    "Hey! Fighting a losing battle, why won''t you just blow your own head!?" I provoked her.


    She then stopped her magic and smiled at me.


    "Good idea. Everything, is for the True God!"


    And boom. She blows her own head. Why would she run when after that she would kill herself? Maybe it was ingrained into their brain to make sure that one of their members have to report immediately to the higher ups in case their leader is unable to do that. But since she can''t escape from me, she killed herself.


    I ignored her dead body. It can be used to feed the monsters as well like Luiz''s corpse, and the other stalkers'' corpses.


    I returned to where the man I tried to capture is and see that he is putting his finger on the hole on his stomach. Is he trying to kill himself that way since he can''t use magic?


    This guy is much more dedicated to the cult that he doesn''t care about the pain at all. Unlike the prisoners I caught. Or maybe it''s because the wound is not on his crotch?


    Seeing him like that makes me think that it''s impossible to get some answers from him. I guess I''ll let him die.


    "Here. I''ll lend you my knife if you want to kill yourself. I can''t just take off the cor since you might try to attack me."


    I threw a knife next to him to which he grabbed it and without any hesitation, without saying anything, he stabbed his own heart with the knife.


    He''s dead. All of the stalkers and also Luiz have died and they will be nourishment for the forest.


    I guess it''s time to return. But before that, I need to spread these corpses around the city to make monsters return not just in one location. Such a pain in the ass.

 Chapter 180 - Unexpected Guests

    "That''s thest one. With this, monsters should be returning here soon." I said as I put thest corpse of the people I killed in the forest. I was careful to not let the location I put the corpses near the main road to another city. But it took a while until I finished it.


    "Roy, why do you have to do this? I don''t think you''re the kind that care much about other people not rted to you." Victoria asked as she is on my shoulder in her small slime form.


    "You''re right that I''m not one to care about other people. Other than children. But this is rted to my past regret after all. And despite my knowledge of the stampede, I let it happen. The result of my action should be better than if I stopped the stampede before it happened, but there are still casualties. I hope by doing this is enough for the survival of this city. We''re leaving soon, right?"


    "I don''t know. At least Shirley and the agents will stay here for a while."


    "Since I was asked to babysit Shirley, I''ll stay as well until she is finished with whatever she''s doing. Let''s go back now."


    After the stampede, the people will be busy rebuilding the city. As for the hunters, although they have the options to leave the city, there are still many of them who are residents of Melk city. That''s why the returns of the monsters to the forest is important for the development of Melk.


    The meat from the monsters can be shared to the people, and everything else can be taken care of by the guild and whoever will be in charge of Melk. I think that''s what Shirley nning on doing here. Finding someone to be in charge of Melk temporarily until Albert decide it.


    Let''s hope the next person won''t be anyone from the cult. If Albert the one who decide it, then I can trust this city to whoever the person Albert send.


    We return to the city and see that everyone is already returned to doing whatever they were doing before Shirley''s speech. The only difference is everyone stays away from me. No one dare to look at me. And when they see me, they escape as fast as they can, or pretend to not see me.


    I''m being hated. But that''s fine.


    "Roy. You''re crying."


    "I''m not! These are¡­ sweat!"


    I denied that I''m crying. I''m fine being hated! It''s true!


    Let''s quickly return to the hotel, change my clothes, then I can join everyone hating Shirley''s guard.


    I want to find an open restaurant and get some meals, but I don''t think there are any business open today. I hope at least Lina is back at the hotel so she can cook me some foods.


    Then I can wash my sadness away with food. Or is it digest?


    I returned to the hotel, and as I opened the front door, I was greeted by two man.


    "Hey! Been a while!"


    I close the door instantly after seeing the face of the man greeting me and a smiling old man beside him.


    I didn''t expect this at all!


    Because I thought that this city has been cleared out of the cult members, I let my guard down and didn''t use my Divine Vision! That''s why I didn''t notice that these two are here!


    Albert the king himself is here along with Ian the butler!


    I''m fine with Ian being here, but Albert? Is he here for inspection? Or is it because he has another job for me?


    Think, Roy! Think!


    But you may suck at thinking as well, so enough with it and just escape!


    That''s right. Escape is always the best options.


    I quickly turn away from the door, and before I even move one step, Candy is already there and stopped me with a hug.


    "I won''t let you go!" She said.


    "I won''t let you go either!" I hugged her back as tight as I could.


    Then the door opened again. This time it was Albert who opened from the inside.


    "Roy. You''re so easy to capture." He said.


    "Then what if you''re in the same situation with Marie hugging you?"


    "Then I will never let her go!" Albert said proudly


    "Right?"


    "Umm¡­ Roy? You can let go now." Candy said as she patted my back.


    "Never!"


    "Hohoho¡­ then please continue hugging inside the hotel. You''re making getting too much attention standing here and hugging Ms. Candy." Ian said.


    I agree with Ian, so I entered the hotel right away. While still hugging Candy.


    "Roy! This is embarrassing!"


    "You''re the first one to say you won''t let me go! And Iply!"


    "Just let me go! I''m busy!"


    Candy''s face is blushing really hard. Her face, ears, and neck are red. I guess she must be really embarrassed by the situation.


    Without any other choice, I let her go.


    As soon as she left my embrace, she exits the hotel. Maybe her business isn''t over yet. But I don''t think she can concentrate on her job when she''s humming so happily.


    "You two are really close. What about your other girlfriends?" Albert asked.


    "Of course we''re all close."


    I looked inside the hotel. And this time, my Divine Vision is activated. Unfortunately, I didn''t see Lina in the hotel. But at least there''s a substitute chef right now.


    "Ian. I''m hungry. Please cook me some meal."


    "May I presume your ''some'' means ''lots''?"


    "Yes, please."


    Ian left to the kitchen, while Albert and I move to the dining hall and get a table. Victoria also transformed into her human form and sit with us.


    "Now, what is your business here? When did you get here?" I asked Albert directly.


    "I just arrived a moment ago. I ride on Ian''s back as he transformed into a giant falcon and flew here from Cassau."


    "You were in Cassau?"


    "Yeah. I missed my daughter, Lana. I went there with Marie, and now Marie choose to stay there while I''m going here with Ian."


    I think Albert arrived while I was outside the city. While I''m still busy cing the corpses of the stalkers and Luiz. Since Ian is flying, I might have noticed it. And it might be during the time when I was at the opposite side of where Cassau is so I didn''t notice at all that he''s here.


    But the fact that he''s here means that Sonia should have known about it, right? Why does she love to keep secrets from me?


    "Where''s Sonia anyway?" It was Victoria who asked.


    "I think she''s helping Shirley and the others. I heard from her about what happened here during our flight. You really did well making the cult as the enemy of the kingdom. I thank you for that. But to cut of someone else''s ear in front of everyone is not something I''d like everyone to see."


    "At least none of them would dare to go against the royalty now. Isn''t that good?"


    "Hah! As expected of you!"


    Albert seems to have noticed that what I did is for the kingdom. It''s something that I rarely do.


    "So, what are you doing here? I don''t think you''re here just for greeting me, right?"


    "Well, officially, I will arrive here in a few days after receiving letters from Shirley. When Migu-Mustache is nearby, I will have Ian take me there and then I will be arriving here officially." Albert said.


    "You almost called his name correctly!"


    "So you did remember his name!?"


    "What? Who? Mustaguel?"


    "Well, enough joking. I''ll be staying here for a few days until Miguel arrive. Then I will handle everything. From what I heard, the burden of taking care of this city is too much for Shirley alone to bear."


    "So, you''re here because you''re a doting brother?"


    "I won''t deny that."


    "That mean you don''t really have business with me, right?" I asked curiously.


    I really don''t want to take another job. I want to rest. No more taking job from Albert. It''s fine to do that, right?


    "Yes. You have been a great help. You deserve a rest. By the way, I heard that you made some friends here and y a new card game. What is it?"


    Seems like he also heard about the hold ''em poker from whoever it is rying a message with Sonia. I think it''s Ms. Wendy. Was it necessary to tell him about that?


    "Victoria. Exin it to him."


    I found it a pain to exin it to Albert so I let Victoria do the honor. And once he understands the rule, we might be able to y some card game while waiting for the other.


    During the time Victoria is exining about the new poker game to Albert, Ian finished cooking. He seems to made some meal for himself and Albert. Well, after flying so far, of course they would be hungry.


    After the meal, we chatted a bit and I finally return to my room and rest. We didn''t y any games at all since I noticed Shirley and the others are arriving soon. I escape to my room before they gave me another task to do.

 Chapter 181 - Crafting Equipment

    Few days gone by, and Albert officially arrive at Melk. He will take care of the city for a while and appoint someone to be in charge of the area after Luiz''s death.


    Of course hearing the king himself arrive, the people be busier preparing to receive him. And I got more bored since I don''t have much to do.


    I wanted to go somewhere and hunt monsters, but when I went scouting, the monsters near the city hasn''t increased much. But it''s a good thing that they are returning little by little.


    Since I am no longer needed by the others, I went my own way deep in the forest with Victoria. To where I store the Giant Smander''s tail. I''m thinking of making some protection for me. And if there are some leftovers, I would make some for the others as well. I think mostly it would be for Ka since her fighting style is a closebat. And since she''s a healer as well, protecting her is the most important duty as a group.


    "Roy. You can''t just keep running away from works. You are needed by everyone." Sonia said as she suddenly appears out of nowhere like usual.


    "Actually, I can. The stampede is over now and whatever works needed to be done, anyone other than me can do it. And although the numbers are few, Albert also brought some people that can be used as manpower to help as well. I can leave everything to them." I said.


    As for Victoria, since she can''t go hunt monsters as well, she followed me since she was bored. And with her knowledge of armor from her previous world, I hope I can make more things.


    "Well, since that''s what you think. Anyway, what are you two doing going into the forest? I heard that you two just became lovers. Don''t tell me you want to do it in the forest!?"


    "As expected from a subus. Your thoughts went that way in an instant. We''re going to where I store the tail of a Giant Smander is. I''m thinking of making some protection garbs for myself."


    "Why? What''s wrong with your Aura? You can just use Aura for protection, right?" Sonia asked.


    "Having double protections mean I can endure more attack. And also, Giant Smanders are monsters with resistance toward fire attack. I hope with this new equipment I''ll make, I can resist magic attack. At least from fire magic. I can''t cut magic with Aura after all. I hope I can do it in the future."


    Being unable to protect myself from magic attack is the biggest weakness an Aura user has. Sonia and also Victoria has told me the legend about an Aura user that can cut magic, but I think that''s still too far for me if the story is true.


    At least for now, my goal is to be able to improve my Aura so I can step on air first. My air element magic should be helpful so I can do that, but the magic stones for cultivating my air element is not done yet.


    And I also wanted to improve my summoning level as well. But there are no monsters nearby. If I want to do that, I have to go further from the city. But if I go too far, the others will be worried.


    I have too many buts and ifs here. Since the stampede is over and the future is unknown, I started to overthink about everything. Maybe I was overthinking in the past as well, but now I do it more frequently.


    In the end, everything is for the sake of my survival. Overthinking is fine as long as I don''t overdo it.


    For now, since there is no urgent matter at hand, I can overthink as much as I want.


    Well, not for long. Since I have arrived at our destination, I will focus myself on crafting some equipment.


    "We''re here. Let''s start making something."


    We entered a cave inside the forest where I store the Giant Smander''s tail is. I haven''t even taken the scales off of the tail, so that''s the first thing I do after I arrive despite saying things like let''s start making something.


    "By the way, does Smander''s meat edible?" I asked the two old- I mean experienceddies.


    "Whatever the case, this one''s meat is already rotten. Why didn''t you pick some meat right away and brought them to the hotel?" Sonia said.


    Well, the smell is terrible. She''s right, the meat is rotten. But I think the scales are still fine. So, let''s take off the scales off first.


    "Yeah, I forgot about that. What about the body of the Giant Smander?" I asked Victoria.


    Since Victoria is helping Shirley and the others much more often than me, and she also often goes to the guild, she should know about the aftermath of the Giant Smander''s body.


    "After being taken by the guild, they grabbed some volunteers to taste test the meat. So far, there have been no side effects. Which means soon everyone would be able to taste it. This is the first time we tried to consume Giant Smander''s meat after all, so they need to be careful first." Victoria exined.


    Then she continued and told me that although there had been multiple cases of hunters subjugated Giant Smanders, none of them brought the Giant Smander''s meat before since Giant Smander''s nest usually deep in a cave and is difficult to bring back their meat. And its other parts of the Giant Smanders are valuable, like its ws, fangs, and scales. So, they are more important than its meat.


    Although I don''t know what they were being used for since there is no cksmith in this world. Maybe they are being used as knives or other kitchen utensils? Or maybe they are being processed into some kind of jewelries?


    After some time of taking off the scales, I threw away the other parts since they are not needed. The fact that the meat is still there after a few days meant that there are no monsters nearby. Which is as expected after the stampede.


    "Alright. Victoria, please show me a good armguard for me. One that is fit to be hidden under my sleeves." I asked Victoria.


    Then Victoria transformed into an armguard which is the one I used to have her transformed into before I used her as grappling hook. I already wore it before so I got used to it quickly and I decided I will make one simr to that.


    I didn''t do anything fancy to build the equipment. Just hammering and cutting the scales so I can shape them into what I want them to be.


    As a prototype, I turn one scale of the Giant Smander into an armguard. The shape is quite simple. Simpler than the armguard that Victoria shows me before. But since this is just for experiment, it''s fine.


    "Alright, Victoria! Attack me!" I ordered Victoria to test the endurance of the prototype.


    Victoria in her human form, has one hand transformed into a hammer and strikes me lightly. I blocked it with the armguard without using Aura at all.


    And I stopped the hammer easily. The experiment was a sess! The scale armguard is working!


    "Good! This size makes it easy for me to hide it under my sleeve. But before that, let''s try hitting it until it broke. Victoria! Harder!"


    "Okay! You''re the boss here!"


    Victoria said as if she was forced to do it.


    This time Victoria used various weapon to attack. A sword sh, hammer strikes, spear thrust, axe swing, and my armguard able to protect me. Her attacks make a scratch on my armguard, and finally, on the 12th attacks, my armguard broke. Luckily before the axe hit my arm, I covered it with my Aura so I''m not hurt.


    "12 attacks! Great! Next, let''s make another one and try attacking me while I covered the armguard with my Aura!" I said.


    I quickly made another one simr to the one that got broken. Since I made one before, I did it faster and tried it with Victoria again.


    This time, the protection on my arm is stronger than before because of my Aura. After having Victoria attacked me for a hundred time, there''s no sign that it will break at all.


    "Great! With this, I can make a great armguards and shin guards for me!" I feel excited that I can build my own armor.


    But when I looked at Victoria, she seems worried about something. It''s the first time I see her like this.


    "Victoria, what''s wrong?" It was Sonia who asked first. Seems like she also noticed that Victoria is weird today.


    "Nothing. Just¡­ I can''t seem to get any stronger than I am. No matter how much I trained, I won''t be able to get stronger or faster. The best thing I can do is to alter my weight to improve the damage. And now the duty of being your armor is disappearing, my job is getting lesser and lesser." Victoria says her worry.


    "¡­that''s it?"


    "What!? We''re about to enter a war against the cult! And you think these thoughts of mine is useless!?" Victoria is angry at me. It''s the first time I''ve seen her like this. I always thought that Victoria is the most chill person I have met. But even she has some worries.


    "Well, first, you are from another world. Your imagination is your strongest weapon now since you can transform into anything you want now. Strength? Rather than improving your power, you can increase your arsenal. Transform into something else instead of sword and hammer. There''s no magic in your world, right? But you have the idea of air gun. That means there''s a way for you topress some air without magic and use it as a gun."


    "Hmm¡­ you''re right! My worry is totally useless now. I still have a lot of ways to get improve other than physical strength. Thanks, Roy!" Victoria smiles at me.


    "Rather, I was confused since you should have known about it more than I do. Does the stampede affect you in a way?"


    "I think it did. There are several times that I was outmatched by a monster."


    "Sigh¡­ my slime forgets that she is a slime¡­ anyway, I haven''t done talking about your strength yet. Did you forgot that just the second time we talked after I summoned you for the first time that you told me you have other abilities from the slime that you can use after I improve my level?" I remind her of the time she told me that time travel is one of the slime''s ability. And there are other abilities she will regain as I improve my level.


    "¡­right! And I have transformation ability and weight changing skill. As for the next one¡­ it''s probably¡­ I got it!"


    "What!? Do you know what ability you will regain?"


    "I won''t tell you about it! I''ll show youter when I can do it!" She said.


    Seems like she has returned to her cheerful state. That''s good. The gloomy Victoria is not something I want to see.


    After that, we made the armguards and shin guards for me. When I tell Sonia to ask if the girls wanted to get some equipment, they refused since they think it might look ugly on them since I''m not a professional.


    I guess I''m the only one getting some new equipment.

 Chapter 182 - Secret Meeting

    During the time when Roy and the others are busy in Melk and doing their own businesses, somewhere in an unknown location unmarked in any maps, a discussion is happening.


    "What the hell happened!?" asked a man in priest clothing and a white mask. Rather than a mask, it was more like a helmet that covers his whole head.


    "The experiment is a sess. With the invention we make, we can make it so monsters can follow our simple orders. That''s what happened." Another man with ab coat replied.


    If Roy, Albert, or anyone from their group listened to this conversation, they would realize who these people are.


    That''s right. These people are the higher ups of the cult who gave the order to destroy several designated cities by using monsters.


    Other than the two masked people, there are several other people there. One of them is Veronica.


    These people are called because the higher ups haven''t received any news from the stampede. They even send some people to scout the area where the stampede happened, but they haven''t returned.


    "I understand that your invention worked, but what I asked is why have we never received any news at all!? What about the people we send to investigate!?" The masked man asked.


    "Maybe there are some trouble on the way. Please be patient and wait until they return. My guess is the mages around the targeted city are stronger than expected, so the stampede is longer than we thought. And that''s why there had been no news at all." The researcher said to calm the masked man down.


    "It might take a while for them to return here. Even I who just left Melk a day before the stampede only arrive yesterday. Although they should be faster than my horse carriage, it will still take some time for the people you sent return."


    The one who said it was Veronica. Although she is a traitor of the cult, no one knows about it other than Roy''s group. And her acting is very persuasive that no one thinks that she is a traitor.


    No one looks at her with suspicion, but there is one person who looks at her in contempt. It was Celestine. Another person who, like Veronica, was sent to Melk after the Orc Emperor appearance in Melk.


    The clothes she wears shows her cleavage openly making men unable to look away from her.


    If Roy is here, he will recognize Celestine just from her look alone despite never seeing her before. He will say something like, ''She''s the leader of the big boobs faction!''


    Celestine always hated to bepared with Veronica. She always thought of herself being superior from Veronica. And seeing her talking to the masked man makes Celestine hate her even more.


    "Veronica. Celestine. You two were sent to Melk city after the Orc Emperor''s subjugated, right? Tell me about that city."


    The masked man told Veronica and Celestine to exin their experience when they stay in Melk.


    Celestine about to exin to the masked man, but she refrains to do so because of their failure to do their job. So, she looked at Veronica and told her with her eyes to be the one talking.


    "We might have underestimated that city. The mages in that city are stronger than we thought. The army we sent were all annihted when we tried to kill someone who was about to level up. But I doubt any of our people leaked our secrets."


    "Do you think the one responsible for their deaths is the same group as the one who subjugated the Orc Emperor?" The masked man asked.


    "The rumor that was spread by the guild is that someone called Kron is the one responsible in the Orc Emperor''s death. So, we were careful to not provoke him. But Kron disappear from the city just a day after the Orc Emperor''s subjugation and haven''t returned to Melk during my time there. So, the possibility that he was the one who killed our army is small."


    Veronica and Celestine''s job in Melk is to take care of the powerful mages in Melk before the stampede so their n can go smoothly. But they failed since they encountered Roy''spany.


    After that event, Roy left Melk for a while and didn''t return to Melk until it was close to the day for the exam. And that''s why both Veronica and Celestine unable to investigate who is responsible in the annihtion of an entire army. Although Veronica realize it after Sonia told her about it.


    Ever since Sonia told Veronica that it was Roy''s party who was responsible for the Orc Emperor''s subjugation, she had a slight hope that Roy and the others can stop the stampede. Especially if they are being helped by the king.


    But for now, she is ying the role of the evil one. As an important member of the cult. So she answered everything honestly.


    "So the both of you think that it''s impossible for the stampede to not destroy Melk, right?" The masked man asked.


    "¡­ other than the stampede, the person in charge of making sure the city is destroyed has chosen to stay behind. And he''s an expert level mage in two elements at least. So unless they have someone who has reached expert level as well, it should be impossible to stop the stampede." Veronica said.


    She had told Roy and the others that Luiz is an expert level mage, but she is still doubtful about them being able to stop the stampede. Until the day after the stampede when Sonia visits her in the middle of the night to inform her what happened. And now Veronica is more hopeful than ever that she can finally say goodbye to the cult that raised her and used her.


    "Not just Luiz. I also left some people to disturb the city''s defense in case they can hold back the stampede. And one man among them has just became an expert level a few days before the stampede began. Which makes there are two expert level making sure the city is destroyed. There might be survivors among the people of Melk, but our goal should bepleted this way."


    Not wanting Veronica to gain all the credits, Celestine said that to the masked man.


    Veronica is surprised when she heard that. Sonia didn''t tell anything about how Roy stopped the stampede so she doesn''t know at all that there is another expert level mage. She doesn''t know of the fate of that other expert level mage.


    What if he survives? He will then tell the cult how the city survives the stampede. Many thoughts entered her mind, but she still has an expressionless face to show the others.


    "Is that so. It''s good news to have another expert level mage under us. When he returns, tell him that his rank will be raised."


    "I will." Celestine smiled thinking that she will be the one taking the credits from Veronica.


    When she was told to visits Melk together with Veronica, she didn''t like that idea at all. She has always beenpared to her. And she hated the idea that the higher ups think that Veronica is at the same level as she is.


    That''s why when she was in Melk, she quickly told Veronica that she will pick someone from her faction who will lead the army so she can gain some credits. But only after killing some weaklings, somehow, the army who went on a mission never returned.


    And so, her stays in Melk were lengthened. But there''s no clue at all as to why her people never return. Which makes her think that there are some hidden experts in the city.


    She is also the one who send people to spy on Veronica. They are disguised as Veronica''s people.


    While thinking so, someone entered the room in a hurry.


    "Report! The stampede in Hirugas is a failure! And most of our people there have been killed during the stampede!" The messenger reported.


    "What!? Who killed them!?" Asked the masked man.


    "We don''t know. But from the corpses the witness says, it seems to be the work of the monsters!" replied the messenger.


    In Hirugas, the one in charge of taking care of the stampede and evacuation in that area is the current Prime Minister''s son, Hector. He told the agents there to disguise the death of the cult members as if it was the works of the monsters. He ordered it just in case someone from the cult survives and reported it to their boss.


    As for the witness, it was a fifteen years old boy who has just recently joined the cult. He joined just after Roy left that city. That''s why no one from the agents who were send to protect Hirugas noticed that there is a survivor from the cult in that city.


    "You mean that while the stampede is a failure, we are the one who received casualties as well? How could that be!?" The masked man shouted in anger.


    "Whatever the case, our research hase to fruition. We can control stampede to happen. What about the flight transportation?"


    Suddenly, there was a voice of a maning from a door that no one other than the masked man can enters. He is the leader of the cult. The man who proimed himself as the True God and the one people from the cult worship.


    "My lord! The transportation is a sess! We used the wyverns to transport monsters directly into the city. Soon we will be able to use the wyverns and other flying monsters as our means of transportation!"


    The masked man then kneeled toward the door, followed by the other people who are there.


    "Good. Once we control the sky, we can control the world. And destruction wille after."


    The one who called himself as the True God makes world destruction as his and his cult''s goal.


    Veronica''s body shivered each time a wordes out from the door. She can''t take being there any longer and wish that the one behind the door doesn''t realize her betrayal.


    Not just Veronica. Even others who are extremely loyal such as the masked man, also shudders from hearing the voice from the door.


    "Melk. Are there any other unresolved issues from that city?" The man behind the door asked curiously. It was because after hearing about the death of one of their experiment, the Orc Emperor, he was slightly curious about that city.


    Celestine and Veronica shook their heads and replied that nothing worth mentioning happened.


    But there''s one thing that they didn''t report. It''s about someone almost destroyed a practice target by throwing a button and no one knows who did it. Veronica knows that it was Roy who did it and keep it as a secret, while Celestine never thought of that event as something important so she forgets about it.


    Which is good, since if they reported about it, the man behind the door will know that it was the works of an Aura user. A non-magic ability that should have been extinct for a thousand years.

 Chapter 183 - Veronica Returns To Melk

    Few days after I finished making equipment for myself, I was ying cards with the boys. Hill, Kron, Oleg, and Mustache. We didn''t y with Albert since it''s no fun ying with someone who can tell lies. But he insists on joining so he is the dealer while Victoria is leaving with the girls.


    We didn''t bet money and just use matchsticks to y. We''re just doing it for fun after all.


    By the way, there are still some leftovers left of the Giant Smander''s scales. And since no one else needed and wanted physical protection, I turned them all into throwing knives and a pair of daggers. I wanted to have something big as weapon, but it''s difficult to carry them with me. Especially when I''m in town.


    After Albert''s arrival at Melk, he managed took charge of the city and it slowly restored the city back to normal. And now we were supposed to not have anything else to do in Melk and thought of returning to Cassau, but something importantes up.


    Two days ago, Sonia appears in front of us bringing message from Veronica. Veronica is returning to Melk together with some other cult members. She was sent here to investigate about the stampede and how the city is not destroyed.


    She said that there was a new cult member who survive the stampede, and he reported about how Hirugas city managed to fend off the monsters. That''s why the cult sent their people to the targeted cities, and Veronica''s destination is Melk.


    Which is great now since Albert is here as well, so we decided to stay here for a few more days. The only thing left for us is to make Veronica leaves other cult members'' eyes when she is in this city and makes her meet Albert.


    She said since it''s an important mission, she travels to Melk by flying. And with her power as an expert level wind mage, she should be arriving today faster than the other cult members.


    Which mean once she arrived in Melk, we should have enough time before the other cult members arrive. Probably they will arrive tomorrow.


    That''s why we are ying cards not in the hotel, but in an empty building. This is the ce where we will have our meeting with Veronica.


    Of course not all of us will be there. Oleg, Hill, and Kron will not stay for the meeting. They just leave the difficult things to us. Albert will do the talking and Mustache will be his bodyguard. As for me, I will hide and watch the area in case there are some cult members trying to spy on us.


    We told Veronica to enters the gate normally so we have time to look for cult members before she arrives in this building.


    "Hey. Why won''t you let her just fly to this building? It''s faster that way, right?" Kron asked.


    "Even in the cult, she was being spied on by other people. Even if she says that she wille alone, that doesn''t mean the people spying on her will leave her alone. Making her walk from the gate will make sure that she will gain people''s attention on her. Then I will use the time before she arrives here to see if she brought any spies with her." I replied.


    "You really think that she got the look as good as you say? That will make all men turn their eyes on her?" Hill asked me.


    "Most men should be attracted to her looks as long as they don''t have simr taste as you have." I said to Hill.


    "Hmm¡­ I see. So Hill has a unique taste. Why does it seem like everyone other than me knows about his taste?" Kron asked.


    "¡­rather than that, we are confused as to why you never realize it after all this time." Oleg said.


    We have been regrly meeting with each other and y some games together to pass the time. Victoria has taught us many other card games from her world, but the one we enjoyed most is Hold ''em Poker.


    During the time we gather together like this, we are equal. Even when the king himself is participating in the game, we talked to each other normally. Other than Mustache who insist to speak to Albert in honorific.


    We talked about many things. From our friends, girlfriends, family, and every little thing as well. Albert said these group can be trusted, so I told them that Ie from the future, and that''s how I know that the stampede will happen.


    Albert also told everyone that he has twin children instead of just one. And his daughter is under my care. Hence, I was nicknamed as Kidnapper by the guys.


    Since both Albert and Oleg are married, they can open their heart to each other about their wives and situation at home. We are just close friends here. Not a king and his vessels.


    "Hmm? Seems like she''s here."


    I see with my Divine Vision that there are a crowd of people, mostly men, looking at the same direction. To the gate. So I know that Veronica should be here.


    "Then we''ll be going. Good luck with the interrogation!" Oleg, Hill, and Kron, leave the building.


    Then I also leave as well to check if Veronica brought some spies she doesn''t know with her.


    "Albert. Tell Sonia to contact the Victoria that Veronica is here."


    Victoria and Sonia are the only two people who have meet Veronica before. As for me, I was in hiding so she never actually sees me.


    After Victoria finally take full control of the slime, she told me to call her through Sonia instead of summoning her directly if I want her toe. Of course if it was an emergency, I can directly summon her. But since this is not one of those moment, I called her through Sonia.


    After telling Albert that, I leave the building and look for Veronica.


    She didn''t get herself surrounded by men, but most men are staring at her from a distance. It''s easy to find her, but it''s difficult to find the spies among them.


    She keeps walking around through a path that we nned instead of walking directly to her destination. It''s so that we can find anyone who is following her.


    And after walking around, I don''t see anyone who is following her. There are some men who tried to flirt with her, but she refused them. Those men don''t seem to be bad people since they gave up pursuing her. Maybe it''s because I put a lot of men like them in prison after the stampede, and that makes these people afraid of going too far.


    I don''t see any trace of spies following her. That''s good, so I return back to the building and hide inside the room beside where she will have a discussion with Albert.


    When Albert sees me entering the room, he knows that everything is clear. I also see Victoria is also there in her human form. Other than the two and Mustache who is guarding Albert, Shirley and Candy are there as well. As for Sonia, she will be hereter.


    Soon, the door opened and a gorgeousdy entered the building. It was Veronica.


    As soon as she sees Albert, she''s down on her knee and greet him.


    "Your majesty."


    "You can stand up and take a seat over there. Do you know the reason we called you here?"


    "Yes. It was to ask about the cult''s next action." Veronica said as she stands up and sit on the sofa in front of Albert.


    "Well, that''s true. But that''s not the main reason we called you. Some of us still don''t believe that you are really wanted to leave the cult, so we''re here to ask you that. Will you ept the interview?"


    "If that''s what you wish."


    Veronica agreed to be interrogated. She also knows that she can''t be trusted by us, so sheplies with our request.


    "Alright. First, tell me your name."


    "Veronica."


    "Okay. Next is, do you really want to leave the cult?"


    "I am."


    "Please tell us the reason."


    "I never wanted to be part of the cult. They just wanted to use me for my appearance to gather more believer. And they are the one who is responsible in the death of my parents. Not only I want to leave the cult, I also desire to thoroughly destroy them. But it''s impossible for me alone to do that."


    Veronica answered.


    I looked with my Divine Vision and see that Albert has one of his hand behind his back, raising two of his fingers and making a peace sign. It''s a signal for me that she is telling the truth.


    "Does that mean you want to join us?" Albert asked.


    "If your goal is to destroy them, then I will." Veronica said confidently.


    "Our goal is not just to destroy them. We are going to protect everyone as well. So, will you join us?" Albert invited her to join us.


    But what does it mean by joining? Don''t tell me he''s still want me to build a n, and makes her join the n?


    "I will."


    "Thank you for joining. We are nning to build a n in Cassau. The n will mainly take request from me, the king. And most of the requests should mainly be rted to the cult. As for the leader of the n, he is Victoria''s master."


    "SO YOU JUST LEAVE EVERYTHING TO ME AGAIN, YOU DAMNED KING!"

 Chapter 184 - Testing My New Skill To The King

    After hearing that Veronica was going to join my n, and the establishment of my n will really happen, I smashed the door and barge into their room as I shouted ain to Albert.


    Why does he want to have me do everything for him? Is it because I came from the future? My Aura ability? The fact that my summon came from another world? My reliability? My charm? My awesomeness?


    ¡­I think those are the reasons why he believes in me. Especially my awesomeness. But that doesn''t mean I have to do everything he says.


    As I barged into the room, no one is surprised with my reaction. Do they already expect this? Or is it that I''m predictable?


    As for Veronica, she should be able to notice my location since she is an expert level mage, but she must have not expected that I move too fast from where I was behind the wall, to the door, and smash it open. That must be why she has a shocked expression seeing me.


    Or is it because she never expected me to be so handsome that I am her type? Let''s stay positive and think of it that way.


    "Oh, Roy! You have met Veronica before but I don''t think she has seen your face before. Veronica, this is Roy. Victoria''s master. And he will also be the leader of the n that you will join eventually. As for the name of the n¡­ how about The King''s Henchmen?"


    There''s one thing I learned to do during my free time after the stampede and crafting my equipment. It''s a littlebination of my air element magic and my Aura ability.


    First, Ipress air in front of me, or anywhere within my body''s reach, then I covered it with my Aura. Then with any part of my body covered with Aura, I pushed thepressed air toward my target, then once it gets close to my target, I let it explode. My manipting objects remotely with my Aura is still difficult for me and I can''t use it for a long time, so I have to move quickly.


    This is also served as a practice for me so I can quickly learn how to step on air. I managed to touch air by doing this, but for me to take a step on air is still impossible. The air Ipressed can''t hold my weight, and the speed of my steps is too fast or too slow that thepressed air burst before I can move forward.


    But this time, I used it as an attack.


    With the airpressed, but only as strong as a shoulder taps, I pushed thepressed air forward with a p toward Albert''s face. As it gets closer to Albert''s face, I let it explode and the impact hit him on his right cheek.


    "Air p!"


    I shouted the name I just made for this technique. And Albert got knocked back and fell on the chair''s armrest.


    "Argh!"


    Of course since it''s just at the level of a shoulder pat, it doesn''t hurt much. Albert is just overreacting.


    "That''s freaking hurt!"


    "It doesn''t."


    "Of course it does!"


    "It doesn''t."


    "You will be given death sentence!"


    "No, I won''t."


    "Miguel! Kill him!" Albert ordered Mustache to kill me.


    "My apologies, your majesty. He''s beyond my strength to kill." Said Mustache calmly.


    Meanwhile, the girls are looking at us as if it was daily urrence, while Veronica is shocked to see that the King is being attacked in front of her.


    "Don''t worry, Veronica. This is how they are bonding with each other. Men are like this." Sonia said to Veronica.


    "Really?"


    "Yeah. You''ll get used to it soon. Since they are acting like this in front of you, it means that they have chosen to trust you. You should be d." Sonia said.


    Veronica is still confused hearing Sonia''s remark.


    As for me, I''m still in a heated argument with Albert.


    "You want to kill me? That''s impossible! I''m too important of a chess piece for you that you will never think of killing me for real!" I said.


    "Oh, yeah? I have other methods to make you suffer! I''ll make sure you will receive difficult mission once your n is established! That''s right! Your n will undoubtedly be built sooner orter! You can''t escape from being its leader!" Albert said.


    Man¡­ Is he doing this because he trusts me, or is he doing this because he wants to make me suffer?


    "Enough, you two! We''re in an important discussion here! You can yter after we''re done!"


    The only one here who dares to say that to Albert is his own sister, Shirley who is watching the discussion. As for the others, there are some who have enough courage to do that, but they don''t want to do it. They are the oldest people here, Victoria and Sonia. But they just watched us arguing.


    We were still haven''t finished our quarrel even after Shirley told us to, but Victoria choose to ignore us and continue the discussion themselves.


    "So, you are here because of a mission, right?" Victoria asked.


    "Yes. I was told to check on this city is destroyed or not. If not, I need to find the reason why." Veronica answered.


    "I see. Then why don''t we make up a reason for that instead of arguing?" Victoria said that to Albert and me.


    "I guess we can settle our scoreter." Albert said.


    "There''s nothing to settle about. Now let''s make up some story." I said.


    "Once these two are like this, you should be careful and listen carefully so the story they made won''t be too messed up. They will enjoy this a lot." Candy said to Veronica.


    Alright, so we need to make a story about how the stampede is over without destroying the city.


    "First, let us tell you what happened here after the stampede is over first. Once we do, you can understand the story better. We will just tell you about what everyone knows, so in case someone from the cult asked you about it, it won''t be a lie." I said as I took a seat next to Albert.


    We told her that after the stampede is over, the story that we told everyone in the city is that we managed to capture one person involved with the stampede. He is the governor himself.


    Then through some kind of interrogation, we managed to make Luiz talk. He couldn''t use magic since we have a Magic Restriction Cor used on him. We told Veronica that it was taken from Luiz''s pce.


    Of course Veronica knows that the Magic Restriction Cor is something we took from one of her people during the time they targeted Ang when she was about to breakthrough. But she didn''t deny everything we said and listen closely to us.


    Then we made a public appearance with the tied-up Luiz in front of everyone, and told them everything we knows as if it was something we learned from Luiz.


    "And that''s basically everything that happened after the stampede. Do you have any questions?" I asked.


    "Hmm¡­ so you telling this mean that it''s fine for the cult to know about this? About how you guys are trying to make the cult as everyone''smon enemy to unify everyone in this kingdom. You''re making the cult guilty about every crime you point at us. Then using that, you called out to every citizen and told them that the cult is their enemy. Am I right?" Veronica summarized what we told her.


    "That''s basically it. But we''re also nning to make every other country to make a move against the cult. This is also the reason we let the stampede happened on purpose and let many people die as a result. Although it''s something we wanted to avoid, it''s a necessary move from our part to let people know the danger that cult gives." Albert said.


    "Alright. I have no more questions. Even if other people from the cult tries to investigate, if those are what the people here knows, they will find the same answers however they investigate."


    "Yeah. As long as people from our side keep their mouth shut." I said.


    "Don''t worry. I have told everyone to never get drunk until everything is taken care of, and only speak what everyone knows as well."


    Seems like Albert has made a move and told our allies here to shut their mouth.


    "Now as for the story of how the stampede is over¡­ let''s say that the princess was here during the stampede, and she brought a really powerful bodyguard. That bodyguard is a tamer who has two Living Armor as his contracted monsters. Make it so the story goes like this. The princess'' bodyguard found some powerful magic weapon from inside a dungeon, and he gave those weapons to his monsters. Making them powerful enough to kill a Giant Smander." It was Shirley who suggested that story.


    And seeing from the girls'' reaction, seems like they have prepared this answer. Which means we won''t have our turns in making the story.


    "Hey! What about my version of the story!?"


    "Yeah! Mine as well!"


    Albert and Iined, but Shirley replies calmly.


    "We don''t know when the people following Veronica wille, so the faster we finish the story, the better it is for us."


    After that, the girls started chatting with Veronica about her living condition in the cult, her past, and what makes Victoria sympathized with her during their first meeting.


    As for Albert and me, we arepletely forgotten. If it''s like this, then I should be allowed to go home, right?

 Chapter 185 - So Secretive!

    While Albert and I just listening, I remembered something else.


    "Hey. Have you found an inn?" I asked Veronica where she will stay.


    "Not yet."


    "Then you should go and quickly find one. You can''t use the governor''s pce again, you know? It''s being taken over by the king and the princess."


    Then Victoria suggested an idea.


    "How about staying in our hotel?" Victoria asked.


    "That''s a bad idea. There are some other cult members who will arrive, and possibly, they wanted to pick the same inn as Veronica. And Veronica''s ce might be used for their meeting ce. Once you''re done here, you should quickly go find an inn. But before that, we need to finish our discussion first." I said.


    After saying that, everyone returned to their own position from before and listened closely to our discussion.


    "Alright then. what is the cult nning to do now that the stampede is over? Are they nning to have another big event?" Albert asked.


    The big event he mentioned is something like the stampede, or something else that might cause trouble for the kingdom.


    "Not within the next few years. The lord said that after the stampede, we will focus mainly on improving our strength, research, and getting more people to join." Veronica answered.


    "But that''s before we realized their existence, right? Now that we will spread their existence to everyone in this kingdom, do you think your lord will make a change in n?" Albert asked.


    "Hmm¡­ I don''t know, but I don''t think he will care about it. But that''s a different story with the Archbishop. He is devoted to the lord. So, when things go wrong like this, he might send some people to take care of anyone who is possibly be a danger to the cult. Which is why he''s sending me here."


    "Then let''s say that most of the monsters are defeated by Shirley''s bodyguard. That way, they will start concentrating on the royalty instead of the people. And since we know their goal, we are also better prepared."


    So, Albert choose to let himself be the bait. Looking at how confident he is, he must have prepared this in advance. Probably ever since I told him about the cult. And that''s the reason he''s sending his own daughter and sister to me. To make sure they are safe.


    "Then, when the people from the cult arrive, they should be looking for you, right?" Albert asked Veronica.


    "Yes. We''re nning to meet in three days whether everyone arrives or not." Veronica replied.


    "Then¡­"


    Albert looked at me. Then everyone followed suit.


    "What? Why are you looking at me like that? Don''t tell me it''s another job? Then I won''t do it!" I said.


    "Don''t worry. Your job is just to kill some people. You and Victoria will kill those cult members travelling here. It''s a good chance for you to improve your summoning level as well, right? If you''re using Victoria as weapon, it will be faster to improve. Who knows if you can breakthrough before going home?"


    "¡­"


    I nked for a few seconds there. Raising summoning element? Killing mages works as well? What the hell!


    Did I just killed the expert level mage, Luiz, without using Victoria!? Did I just let that stalker kill himself instead of stabbing him with Victoria as a sword? Did I just let those people die without getting any benefits!? How could I be so stupid!?


    After finishing the Giant Smander, I know that my summoning element started to increase. After that, I thought that since the monsters nearby are gone, Victoria and I can''t go out to hunt monsters. That''s why I never get my summoning level improved after the stampede.


    And I just let Luiz die without trying it!? He''s such a diamond! An expert level mage! Even more, in two elements! I should be able to improve my summoning element by a significant amount! It should be no surprise if I actually have broken through intermediate level!


    "¡­Roy? What the hell is wrong with you?" Candy is worried about my state.


    "Ah! He must be shocked! He has a chance to kill an expert level mage to improve his summoning level, but he didn''t do it. I mean his decision was correct at the time, but he didn''t consider about improving his summoning element one bit. And there were even eight mages chasing after us and he just let two of them kill themselves. While the others, he didn''t have me kill them. Now he remembered all of that, he went into shock." Victoria exined.


    "¡­he''s stupid, isn''t he?"


    "Yes, he is."


    "There''s no doubt about that."


    Shirley, Sonia, and Victoria agreed to the same thing. Even Candy and Albert nodded as well.


    "Forget it. I''m not the kind of man who clings into the past." I said.


    "That''s the problem! You have to cling to the past instead of forgetting it! We have so many difficulties just because you don''t remember much about your past! Anyone can say that but you!" Albert shouted in anger.


    Everyone who knows about meing from the future looked at me in disdain. As for Veronica, she doesn''t know it yet so she is curious about what happened.


    "You don''t need to know yet. I''ll tell you once you leave the cult. Now that we have nned a story about how the stampede is over, let''s talk about her leaving the cult. Any ideas? If not, then Albert and I will make up some stories about it and it will take a lot of time once we start our discussion." I quickly change the subject. But still, it''s good that I remember a few things rather than not remembering at all, right?


    "Just have her die. We can fake her death and when the other cult members arrive, we can let them return to their headquarter to report to their boss." Albert said.


    This time, it seems like we''re not ying around and he just quickly make a sound suggestion.


    I''m confused. Does he want me to kill those cult members before they arrive, or does he want to let theme?


    "Anyway, I don''t think I can leave so soon. They will be suspicious if I didn''t return. I think it will be best if I have a safe ce to go to once I faked my death. Maybe after the n was built? Then I would need a disguise so no one from the cult will recognize me." Veronica said.


    She can''t leave the cult at the moment so she suggested to leave once the n is established.


    As for her disguise, she can dye her hairter. Maybe put on some fake scars on her face if she doesn''t mind it. The problem is her hip. That area is something that we find it hard to be disguised.


    "We''ll think about thatter. For now, about their headquarter. Where is it located?" Albert asked.


    "We don''t have any real location for it. Every once in a while, the lord suddenly disappears from his chamber with a letter left hanging on his door saying where the next headquarter will be. The lord himself has never shown his face to anyone. Probably even the Archbishop himself never seen him even though he''s the only one allowed to enter his chamber. As for us, we only ever heard of his voiceing from the door of his chamber." Veronica answered.


    What the hell!? So secretive!


    "I see. Then how did he build the cult? It has been there for a long time, right?" I asked.


    "All of the members of the higher ups select their sessor once they choose to retire. As for the Archbishop himself, he said that he was appointed by the lord just before the previous Archbishop died. But no one knows if that has ever happened or not, so there''s a chance that the current Archbishop is different from the Archbishop I first met." Veronica answered.


    "Then shall we charge into their current headquarter and destroy them right away? It''s faster that way, right?" I suggested.


    "The Archbishop is a master level mage in at least one element. If you think he can be killed, then please kill him right away." Veronica said with a serious expression.


    "Master level!"


    Everyone is shocked hearing that someone has actually reached a master level. Just Luiz alone, an expert level mage in two elements prove to be difficult to handle. What about a master level mage?


    "Let''s scratch that idea. We''ll do what we can for now. Roy, you will be our strongest card for the war against the cult. That''s why we need you to get stronger. Two years. After our works in Melk is over, I''ll give you those two years you always wanted so much to grow stronger, without giving you any job. I can delegate Miguel, or maybe Hill, Oleg, or Kron to do those jobs. They already agreed to help us to the best of their abilities. For now, you will be patrolling outside the city and find the cult members who areing here. Then once Veronica''s mission is over and she will return, confront her with Victoria and fight. We need evidence to prove that Veronica is fighting against someone who killed the rest of the cultists." Albert told everyone his ideas. I think that is a good idea.


    "Then I should pretend I''m losing and retreat, right? And Veronica will report everything that happened truthfully." I said.


    "Right. Among everyone here, you are probably the only one who can endure her expert level wind magic. We need it to be a real fight between a tamer who tamed a Living Armor, and Veronica, the expert level wind mage."


    "Make me a tamer and also a wind element mage. That way, they won''t be suspicious why I can escape from you." I said to Veronica.


    Then after our discussion is over, I return to the hotel so I can get a good sleep since I probably won''t have enough sleep for the next few days.


    Although I wanted to improve my summoning level quickly, I hope the cult members who areing here are not expert level mages.

 Chapter 186 - Veronica Leaves Melk

    A week has passed since our discussion, and I think I have killed all the cult members who are trying toe to Melk. But my summoning element hasn''t increased to intermediate yet. I still regretted how I didn''t kill Luiz back then.


    So far, there has been no one tried to make a contact with Veronica, so we thought that it''s safe for her to stay in our hotel. And we are probably right in doing that since we also learned more about the cult.


    First, their researchb. The cult has done a lot of experiment, using monsters and even humans. Just like how they did a research to get monster follows human''s order.


    The location of theb isn''t known yet. Although their headquarter moves a lot, theirb shouldn''t be able to move like that since they have done many evil experiments. But it seems that other than their head of research and the Archbishop himself, no one else knows where it is located.


    But since we found out that the Orc Emperor has found its way to Melk, I think it should be near this area. Unless that Orc Emperor capable of a really long-distance travel. That''s why Albert told the agents to look around in case they found something unusual.


    Now that he mentions it, does that cave they used for recruitment still there? I told Albert about it and he ordered the agents to look for that cave.


    I also went there, but after I arrive, I don''t see any trace of it being ab research even after I used my Divine Vision. And so, I left that ce for the agents to investigate. They should be better in finding clues than I am.


    Other than the researchb, we found clues about some of the higher ups'' faces. We let Victoria turned into something we can mold, and have Veronica exins to us how they look like.


    After shaping Victoria into their appearances, Veronica would exin their color since Victoria can''t change it. Their skin color, hair color, the color of their eyes, the clothes they usually wear, and some of the cult members wear a mask, so she told us about how they look like and the color of their mask.


    Veronica also exined to us that there might be some of them who wanted to leave the cult like she does. So if possible, we are not allowed to kill them.


    One of them is Celestine. The leader of big boobs faction.


    "She might be annoying since she always thought of me as her rival, but I never thought of her as a bad girl. There might be some circumstances as to why she joined the cult. So please if possible, talk to her first."


    That''s what Veronica requested. Although Celestine thought of her as rival, Veronica doesn''t think of it that way. But what if she''s the one sending spies on Veronica?


    Veronica just insisted on us hearing Celestine''s goal first before making a decision. Although if I met her first, I might kill her on sight before¡­ she seduces me. Thought I never told the others about this, Victoria already figure it out.


    So they gave me a n in case I encounter Celestine first. But I won''t tell anyone about it. I already received permission from everyone to do it, but I will keep this as my secret weapon against Celestine. Though I doubt it will work that easy.


    If it does, then¡­ whatever. Huehehehe.


    Though I don''t think I will meet her.


    Today is supposed to be the day that Veronica returns to the cult''s headquarter which may or may not be at the same location anymore. She said that if they moved, they would have someone to wait and report to those who are trying to return there about their new location.


    From what she said, their headquarter has been moved many times since she joined. It has never stay in one location for more than six months. And the shortest time in their new spot is just two days. So short! Why does that lord of theirs loves to move around a lot!? And don''t tell me that lord of theirs always carried that door whenever they moved? Or is it that he has too many of the same door.


    Wherever their new headquarter is located, there is always that same door in sight. Even when Veronica asked the Archbishop himself, he doesn''t even know the reason is.


    Anyway, that''s about everything that Veronica told us about. As for today, the n is for her to returns to the cult''s headquarter, and she will encounter me and fight.


    And¡­ DAMNIT, ALBERT! YOU SAID I CAN ENDURE HER ATTACKS, BUT YOU WERE WRONG!


    If any of Veronica''s attack hits me, even with I covered my whole body with Aura, I would still take a heavy damage! Even her Wind sh can cut off my limb! And Victoria is acting as my tamed monster, so I can''t use her as my shield!


    So I quickly escape and have Victoria stop Veronica from following me. With this, it should be enough, right?


    When I asked Albert why we have to do this, he just said just in case someone can detect lies like him.


    Now that I think about it, every move he made and ordered, he considers that someone else has the same ability as he is.


    We don''t know if they really have someone who can detect lies, but just in case they do, Albert made some precautions. That''s why Veronica will only tell the truth of what she knows and experience in Melk. It''s also more believable if she told the truth.


    I escaped from Veronica''s ferocious attacks with my Aura covered my feet, and kicked the ground as strong as I can tounch me forward and make it seems as if I am flying in low altitude. This way, she will think that I am a wind mage.


    After a while, I had Victoria summoned while she''s still fighting Veronica when I reached the hotel.


    And of course, I greeted Albert with an Air p on his cheek.


    "Endure my ass! I almost died!"


    "I mean dodge. Not endure. But you''re still fine, right?"


    "What will we do now?"


    "Well, the story is that you attacked everyone from the cult who ising. But as for her, we make it as if you are trying to flirt her, but she rejected you. Feeling ashamed, you attacked her out of nowhere not knowing that she is expert level mage. Now that you have returned, you make a false information about her as a suspected cult member and failed to kill her since she''s too strong. Then I will send some agents to chase after her."


    That''s our n. To follow Veronica without her noticing. But since she''s an expert level mage, if we''re too close, she would notice us right away. And Albert also told the agents to only follow her as long as they found traces of her. If not, they should return immediately.


    Too many works, I say. Well, as long as I get my break, that''s fine.


    ...¡­.


    The day after she left Melk, Veronica has already at the cult''s headquarter. And as if she was expecting this, she has her usual expression on her face as she witnessed that the headquarter is moved again. The only one left in the headquarter is the Archbishop who was about to left as well.


    "Veronica? That was quick of you. How about the mission?" the masked Archbishop asked.


    "Well, it actually like this."


    Veronica started exining everything Albert and Roy told her to say. About how the princess went there incognito when the stampede happened, and she brought a powerful bodyguard with her, until she shed with said bodyguard and he managed to escape from her.


    "What?! How could he just tell them about us!? Why didn''t he kill himself!?"


    "Probably because of the Magic Restriction Cor was put on him." Veronica replies calmly.


    "Hmm¡­ there''s more to it than that. Probably, they already know about us even before the stampede happened. Then they used the stampede as a chance to tell the world about us. It''s not like it will be a problem to our lord, so we can continue with what we''re doing. There will be no big event within the next ten years unless something happens along the way. Until then, we will continue getting stronger and find more people to join us. By then, no countries can match us."


    Hearing how the cult doesn''t have any big n like before, Veronica feels better. That means she won''t have to kill anyone for about that long. But that also mean that it will be difficult for her to leave the cult since faking her death might meant ''something that happened along the way'' and the cult will be more active because of it. Veronica feel helpless about it.


    "I think it might be because we became more active this year than the previous year. That''s how they know about us." The masked Archbishop continued.


    "If that is all, then I will take my leave and prepare for our move." Veronica about to leave when the Archbishop grabbed her arm and stopped her.


    "Wait! You have a scratch on your arm. Sword''s wound?" The Archbishop asked while sending off a powerful pressure on Veronica.


    "Y-yes. That person seems to be the princess'' bodyguard who stopped the stampede. He seems to be a tamer since he has a powerful Living Armor as his contracted monster. And there were witnesses saying that he has another one, but I only fought one of them alongside the mage himself."


    Veronica told him about the barbaric princess'' bodyguard who tried to flirt with her, then attacked her since she rejected him. Then as soon as he found that she is more powerful than him, he escaped by having the Living Armor stopped her from chasing. That''s how he managed to escape.


    "A Living Armor given a powerful equipment? Interesting. You may leave"


    The Archbishop stopped sending pressure on Veronica as he said that. And Veronica left that ce.


    "Living Armor, huh? There''s no way Aura user still exist in this world."


    The Archbishop said when Veronica has disappeared from his sight. No one heard about what he said.

 Chapter 187 - New Diving Spot

    "So¡­ let me get this straight. You are finally free from the works given by Albert, but still have to do some works that you initiate yourself? And that''s why we''re here." Victoria said.


    It has been a week since I fought Veronica. After that, Albert choose to stay in Melk for a while longer, while the others and I returns to Cassau. And we brought a new friend as well. Kron ising with us.


    As for Hill and Oleg, they didn''t follow us. Oleg stays in Melk while Hill will return back to Mellian. They will protect their own cities, and cooperate with the nobles who are in charge of their cities.


    Albert has talked with the nobles in Mellian, and he said that they can be trusted to fight against the cult and protect the city and the citizen. As for Melk, he''s the one choosing the city''s new leader. Of course the person he chooses is someone he can trust. And that''s why he''s still in Melk at the moment.


    Although the stampede gave us a lot of casualties, we gained several trusted allies as well. And we even got a spy working in the cult. Though I don''t think she will stay there for long since she wanted to leave.


    I don''t get why she wanted to leave and destroy the cult at the same time. Why can''t she destroy the cult from within? Is she afraid of dying? If so, then I can understand since if I were in her ce, I would do the same. My life is more important than world peace.


    But since she''s still with the cult, we''ll get her to learn everything she could from within. And we learned that the cult doesn''t have any big n in the next ten years. But there''s still a chance that it won''t take ten years until they make another move. That''s what I experienced in my previous life.


    Although I don''t remember much, I still learned a lot from hearsay. I think it was five years from now when Albert found out about the cult and spread the news to all over the continent. And after that, many heroese and go, fighting the cult. And one of them is Ang who still alive until the day that I died.


    But now, things have changed. Albert has found out about the cult way earlier, and we have gotten a lot of allies to help us. Albert also will meet other countries'' leader and inform them of what happened. So, I think it will be less than five years when the cult will make another big move. That''s why I needed to get stronger.


    And now, after returning to Cassau, ying with Daniel and the kids, I received good news and bad news from Sam.


    Good news: All our merchandise has been sold out.


    Bad news: same.


    Which means I needed to stock up on more treasures. And that''s how Victoria ended upining.


    I''m fine with working though. I''m just not fine having to do everything someone else asked. Treasure hunting is something that I wanted to do in the first ce, so I''m fine with doing it.


    "Yeah. I''m fine with diving. I enjoy swimming. And it''s also good as well since no one bothers to fight the monsters from the sea so we can hunt them as much as we want. For now, I will go diving and hunting treasures a lot, until I breakthrough to intermediate level in my summoning. Maybe I''ll get there in a few days. Then once I get home, I will cultivate my air element using the magic stones that I make. Doing those two will make me reach intermediate level in those two elements, and hopefully, within these two years, I can reach advanced level in both elements."


    Two years is a long time, but it''s also short as well. Some people can reach advanced level in two years, while some were stuck in beginner level their whole lives no matter how hard they cultivate.


    And more importantly, I want to improve my uses of my Aura as well. There are too many things I want to do in these two years, but I don''t know if two years is enough to do all of that.


    Though it would be boring to just training in two years. I hope there will be something like ''Two years passes just like that'' happened. But I don''t think it will.


    "So now you will skip ss because you have finished your exams?" Victoria asked.


    "I hope that will be the case. Ms. Wendy still chooses to stay as a teacher there. We will hear more about the result from her. Will the school really give us graduation degree after what happened? If they will, I won''t return there."


    Ms. Wendy said that she will take care of our graduation. The school told her that the students needed to pass another exam because of the stampede, but Ms. Wendy tried to prevent that. Especially when two of their students make achievements during the stampede. So she supported us who have passed the exam so we can freely improve our strength to fight against the cult.


    Most of the teacher agree with her since it will be easier for them to teach fewer students. But the final result will depend on the school itself since I heard that there are several students killed during the stampede. And they thought that by attending sses, the students will be better prepared for battle. How stupid are they? They have never had to teach lesson about fighting monsters before. Even if the students stay there for a while longer, they won''t improve since even some of the teachers never really fight against monsters.


    Since Albert is still there, I think he will make sure that we don''t have to attend any more. We are his trump cards after all. He needed us to get stronger than anyone.


    Finally, we reached the shore. And this time, we''re in a different shore than we previously did our treasure hunt. I wanted to see if there are more monsters here since although we needed to get more supplies, my main goal is to improve my summoning level.


    If Victoria went hunting alone, she won''t be able to win against powerful monster. Even if she could, it would take her some time before she can finish them.


    "Alright. Let''s go!"


    I said after I stripped my clothes until I only wear shorts, and dive into the sea.


    "So you made those armguards just to remove it from your body?"


    I ignore Victoria''s sarcasm and dive into the sea anyway.


    I never thought that our first battle will be underwater, okay!?


    The first thing I search is an empty ind where I can store my loot is. The previous ind is too far from here, and I don''t want to go there unless there are no other inds nearby.


    Luckily, I found one rather quickly. I memorized that ce and went diving near that ind.


    Under the water, I found that this location has more fishes than the previous spot. But why is there no fisherman boat here? This ce is good for fishing, right?


    When I looked to the bottom of the sea with my Divine Vision, I understood the reason why. There are too many fishing boats sunken in this area. Maybe that''s the reason no one dared to go fishing here. There are too many victims in this area.


    What could be the reason those boats sunk? Is it monster? If so, I think I found a good area to improve my summoning level. I hope they will give me a lot of experience.


    Experience is a name that Victoriae up with for the method of improving summoning level. It came from her world, which is as expected.


    Basically, every time a summoned monster defeated monster, or to be exact, living being, since human is a target as well, the summoner will get some experience. And when the summoner gather experience enough, they will increase their level.


    Back in school, what we learned about summoning is that our summoned monster gained magic from the dead monsters they defeated, and that magic is taken by the summoner to improve their level. But I think I like Victoria''s exnation more. So I started calling it as gaining experience.


    Other than the fishes here, there are a lot of sea monsters. Most of them should be delicious. I killed them all, and put them on the empty ind so I can have Lina cooked them for me.


    Then after I had enough of hunting monsters, I started my treasures hunt.


    Most of the boat here are fishing boats, so I don''t expect to get anything nice. But at the bottom of the sea, there are a lot of huge seashells, with a lot of pearls inside of them. So I brought those seashells to the ind and decided to give them to Sam to sell. She should be able to get some nobledies to be interested in these pearls. Of course I will ask her to leave some for the girls.


    Today I didn''t get as much as I usually do, but it''s okay. I have a lot of free time right now.


    As I returned home, I began thinking of the series of events that happened until today.


    I still feel excited over the fact that I managed to stop the stampede, but there are still a lot of casualties that can be avoided if we just choose to stop the stampede before it happens.


    And there''s also someone who I never get to meet in this lifetime. The nodding guy.


    Is he okay? Is he still alive? Or is he dead during the stampede? I rarely go to school so I never met him, but he''s the only guy I knew in my past life in Melk.


    Well, I don''t know his name, but he''s the only one who would greet me every day. I''m just feeling lonely not meeting him in this lifetime.


    Oh, nodding guy¡­ I hope you''re okay and keep nodding and greeting other people.

 Chapter 188 - Killer Dolphins

    The day after I find the new diving spot, I returned there. This time, I get all the pearls I couldn''t get yesterday and store it on the empty ind so I could finish my job faster and explore the sea as much as I want today.


    I grabbed a lot of giant seashells, even more than yesterday. Then I put them in that empty ind, and go back into the sea.


    There aren''t many sunken ships, and most of them are just fishing boats. So I can only look for something other than valuables from ships. And most of what I found, are giant seashells with a lot of pearls inside of them.


    Although Sam would be mad at me for only finding pearls, it should be okay. We can just tell our clients or business partner that it''s difficult to find other treasures underwater.


    In fact, I''m more confused about how I could easily find a lot of treasures in the previous spot. That area must be a path used by sailor to go to another location. And there''s a lot of danger in that area in the past, and that''s why there are many sunken ships of merchants under there.


    But now, that area doesn''t have many sea monsters. And that''s why I''m moving spot. My goal is to improve my summoning level after all.


    And so, I dived into the water to seek for powerful monsters, but not too powerful that I can''t handle. And seeing how there are a lot of fishes here, if I report this to the guild and find the reason why all those fishing boats sunk, I would be rewarded by the guild. Then I will gain achievement, and it would be easier for me to build a n by then.


    That''s right. I gave up on persuading others to not build a n, or ask them to not let me be the leader. They are too persistent in having me as their leader. It''s not like I have a great leadership or anything like that, it''s just they thought it''s a pain in the ass to be the leader of the n. So they choose me as the leader.


    And now, back to swimming.


    There are more fishes here, and also a lot of sea monsters as well. But they are all not that strong. Once they leave the sea, they won''t be able to do anything. And I don''t think that they can cut the thrown by fishermen. This ce is a good spot to go fishing.


    But I won''t tell anyone yet. At least until I kill those killer dolphins first.


    Since I often went diving, and I can see clearly underwater with my Divine Vision, I often see dolphins. The friendly creatures that makes people, especially tourists, to feel excited when they see them jumping to the surface.


    Those who often travelled with ships would often encounter them. Dolphins are friendly and smart animals, butpared to monsters, they are too weak. That''s why wherever sailor spot dolphins, they would memorize the dolphins'' path, because that path is safe from monsters and predators.


    In the previous spot, I see a lot of those friendly dolphins. I would even sometime y with them. And that''s also why I often see ships sailing near that area as well.


    Dolphins are helpful creature for sailor. That''s why whenever fishermen identally caught one of them, they would free those dolphins back to the sea.


    But in this new spot, there''s a group of creatures that looks simr to dolphins. But these dolphins are much bigger than normal dolphins, stronger, faster, and more ferocious. This is a group of killer dolphins.


    These dolphins know how to cooperate with each other. They can easily topple boats and ships when they work together. Maybe these killer dolphins are the reason there are too many fishing boats on the bottom of the sea.


    No. That''s wrong.


    From what I see, although they are strong, they can''t destroy those boats like the ones I saw at the bottom of the sea. They can topple them and sink them, but not destroying some parts of the boats. Most of the boats I''ve seen at the bottom of the sea, has holes and few ces broken. That means there are other monsters here than these killer dolphins. And that monster should be stronger than these dolphins.


    I''ll think about thatter. for now, I''ll fight these dolphins first.


    There are about six of them. And they are obvious in their hostility toward me. Seems like they are territorial creatures. They don''t want me to trespass into their territory.


    All six of them surround me. In front, behind, left, right, up, and down. They are very smart in their strategy. But that will only work on enemies weaker than them. Not me.


    But I hate the thought of being surrounded, so I have to get out of here first.


    I had Victoria transformed into a spear, and with me fast swimming method, I pierced through the dolphin in front of me. But killer dolphin''s reaction is faster than I thought, and it didn''t hit its vital. But I got its tail, so that one would have difficulty swimming and continue the fight.


    Five more to go.


    I looked behind me and see the other five dolphins are chasing after me. And they are really fast! They can catch up with my speed!


    Oh, wait! That''s wrong. I''m the fast one. Normal human can''t swim as fast as I can. I''m the weird one among humans.


    The dolphins actually faster than me! And since they are a natural swimmer, they can maneuver better than me. Maybe I should learn swimming from dolphin.


    And not just they are faster than me, they are actually trying to corner me to a reef! These dolphins are the smartest creature I''ve ever fought other than humans.


    By the way, humans are both the smartest creature, and also the stupidest one as well. We are such an interesting specimen.


    I got cornered, but I don''t think I''ll lose against them. So, I turn my body toward them, and transform Victoria into a broadsword.


    But instead of attacking, the killer dolphins are keeping their distance. Don''t tell me that they have a way to attack from distance?


    They sure did! The dolphins suddenly screamed at me, and that scream pushed me back to the reef! Although I receive no damage, I can''t move because of this attack. What the hell is this!?


    I feel the broadsword in my hand is shaking. This mean Victoria has something to tell me.


    I transformed Victoria to cover my ear, and put in some air there so she can talk to me. With Victoria''s slime body, the air won''t leak.


    "Dolphins used echolocation to navigate in the sea. So even without light, they can still see in front of them. They used some kind of ultrasound and I think that''s how they attacked you." Victoria exined.


    Sound? That mean I have no way to protect myself, right? If it''s something I heard, then I can just cover my ears. But it''s not like that. Maybe that sound these killer dolphins makes, making the water vibrate and that''s how they pushed me back.


    I don''t know if the theory that Victoria said is correct or not, but I can see that the water in front of me is really vibrating toward my direction. Whether it''s that echolocation, ultrasound, or whatever it is, it''s a way for these dolphins to hunt for prey.


    But I''m not giving up. These dolphins wanted to surround me again with the reef behind me instead of another dolphin, but I won''t let them do that.


    Before the dolphins surround me again, I pushed myself upward and swim as fast as I could. With my Aura covering my whole body. And the dolphins chase after me.


    If they wanted to follow me, they are free to do that.


    I swim faster and faster to the surface, and jumped high to the sky. Well, not that I could get there by just jumping. It''s just a figure of speech.


    And the five dolphins also jumped as well. And since they are faster than me, they could jump higher as well.


    They must be thinking that with that echolocation, these dolphins can attack me even in air.


    They are not wrong, but I won''t let them do that.


    I transformed Victoria into a grapplehook, and shot the hook toward one of them. Then I pull myself to that dolphin, and shed its head after I transformed Victoria into a sword.


    I do the same thing to the four other dolphins, and that''s how I could quickly finish the killer dolphins.


    As for thest dolphin who survived after my escape from them, I chased after it after I return to the sea. Thankfully, my Divine Vision can reach to where it went hiding.


    These dolphins don''t have much attack power, but they are the smartest creature I ever fought. If there are more of smart creatures underwater like these dolphins, I don''t think I can win like this.


    And so, after killing all the dolphins, I didn''t return home yet. But I practice to swim faster. That''s the only way I could survive in case I encounter smarter and stronger monsters here.

 Chapter 189 - Giant Crabs

    The seas have too many uncertainties. There are too many unknown monsters here.


    It has been two days since the time when I encounter killer dolphins. After that, I encounter some other killer dolphins. Thanks to my experience in fighting against them, I no longer has difficulty when I fought them. But there are more of them than I thought.


    Even today, I encounter at least fifteen of them. Maybe this is near their nest.


    This time, I swum further from the shore. There should be more treasures I can get other than pearls. I already have a lot of them stocked on the empty ind, but I still see some at the bottom of the sea. At least I won''t have any trouble of empty stock for a while. But they were all just pearls though.


    This time, I swum to the bottom of the sea and swum around there. I saw several giant crabs hiding under the sand. I wanted to have some of them for lunch. Maybe brought home some of them.


    I heard from Sam that some sea animals are difficult to obtain, so she hoped that I could capture some of them to breed. Then we can have a crab farm or something. That will make our profit increased again.


    But¡­ the crab around here are gigantic. Most of them are over one meter in length. And I think I saw some more bigger than three meters.


    Are they difficult to fight? Let''s try them. I don''t think they are harder to fight than those killer dolphins.


    I provoked one of the crabs toe out of hiding, and the whole lot of theme out! Well, seeing how they move, I don''t think they are faster than those killer dolphins.


    They are approaching me at the same time. Prove that they are not a smart species. I guess I''m right that they are weaker than killer dolphins.


    I easily dodged their attack, and with Victoria as a broadsword, I shed one of the crabs.


    It''s hard!


    Even when I''m using my Aura covering Victoria, these crabs have really hard shells! Not as hard as Giant Smander that I killed, but it''s'' still hard enough for my weapon covered with Aura to breakthrough.


    I don''t think I can use that drill like I did with the Giant Smander well underwater. I guess my only options is to continue attacking them until they die. This should be good as well for my Aura training.


    I attacked the same crab again and again with the broadsword. In the first ce, I chose the broadsword as a weapon because of its usefulness in continuous attack underwater by following the current. And this is the first time I use it for that purpose since all the other of my underwater fights are done with just one attack.


    I keep shing the crab over and over again without ever stopping my arm. There are already scratches on the shell of the crab I fought. Then when the crab about to attack me with its w/pincer, I transformed Victoria into a shield to block it.


    Another thing I did not expect, is that the crab''s attack is stronger than I thought. And since I have no proper footing underwater, I got pushed back easily.


    Good thing that I still managed to block the attack. Now I know that I have too many weaknesses in underwater fights. It''s a good time for me to fix them.


    If I have a terrible footing, then let''s use the water as footings.


    When the crab attacked me again, I put Victoshield in front of me to guard, and also cover my whole body with Aura. With the water pressure while covering my whole body with Aura, it makes it harder for me to move. But it''s a good idea only for blocking attacks as I haven''t moved back when the crab''s pincer smashed my Victoshield.


    But there''s a dy after I blocked the attack, and when I''m about to attack since my Aura also stopped me from moving. I need to practice more so I can control my Aura even smoother so I could reduce the dy.


    Then I repeated my actions. Attacking the crab continuously, then blocking its attack. I feel the control over my Aura is getting better and smoother, but I can''t do that for long since there are a lot of crabs here.


    When I was about to attack the crab again, I noticed that another crab won''t sit still and attacked me from the side. My reaction is fast enough to block it, but I haven''t covered my body with Aura. That''s why I got pushed away from the first crab that tried to attack me again as it missed its swing.


    Maybe it''s a good idea to get pushed back some time. I can get away from being surrounded that way.


    There''s a reason why I wanted to improve so badly. Of course mainly is that I want to get stronger and better in fighting. But other reason is¡­ I saw an underwater dungeon nearby.


    Unlike the previous dungeon which only has the underwater part at the entrance, where the eels are delicious, this time, the whole dungeon arepletely underwater.


    And it doesn''t seem like this dungeon was sunken. This dungeon seems to have been there ever since it was created. It''s totally an underwater dungeon.


    But the monsters that I see with my Divine Vision, might be even stronger and smarter than the killer dolphins. And I haven''t seen everything yet.


    Since it''s a dungeon, there might be traps hidden there. That''s why I need to improve my swimming and battling technique. Although I have my Divine Vision helping, there might be some traps I will get caught on.


    When I told Victoria about the dungeon, she said to let her in that dungeon so she can scout there first before I enter. It''s so great to have an immortal summoned monster.


    Fighting underwater is still difficult for me to do. Even after I shed dozens of times at the same position, the crab''s shell is still difficult to prate.


    Maybe there are other parts which are easier to hit to kill the crab, but this is also for my development as well. I have to find a way to be able to break through their hard shell. Because unlike that time with the Giant Lizard, it''s unlikely that I will encounter other monsters that won''t move when I drilled through their defense.


    This time, I stopped attacking the crab''s body and went for its legs. Although they are covered by hard shells as well, that part should be easier to damage.


    And after ten hits, I managed to break one of its legs.


    I keep doing that to its other legs, and also to other crabs. After that, I broke their pincers. As for their bodies¡­ I don''t think I can destroy them when I''m underwater, so I brought them to the surface, and kill them there¡­ not.


    Just killed one of them so I know that it works, and brought the rest home to be cooked. Although they don''t have legs or pincers anymore, their bodies should still be delicious.


    They are big, so I only brought home two of them, and some seashells in the empty ind. As for the rest of the crabs, I think they will be eaten by other sea monsters. I don''t think they will still alive by the time I return here tomorrow.


    And so, I returned home with big catches.


    When I arrived home, I instantly went to the kitchen where Lina is and brought them the giant crabs.


    "Sorry. They are too though so I have to destroy their legs and pincers before I can bring them home."


    "Don''t worry. If They are simr to normal crabs, then their bodies would still be delicious if I cook them right. Please wait for dinner."


    I helped Lina carries the two crab''s bodies that she will cook for tonight. I can''t wait for dinner.


    As I was about to take a bath, I see someone knocking on the door. There are no other people here since everyone is doing their own training and cultivating, so I''m the only one here. I don''t like greeting guests since I might forget them right away, but I have no choice since I''m the only one there. And I don''t think it''s right to let a slime do it for me. I don''t know what form Victoria will be when she opened the door since she''s very unique.


    I used my Divine Vision to see who the guest is, and I think she''s somewhat familiar. I guess I forgot about her.


    I opened the door and see the girl happily smiled at me.


    "Master! I have returned and hoped to get your guidance."


    "¡­who are you?"


    "HOW COULD YOU FORGET ABOUT ME! YOU''RE SO CRUEL, MASTER!"


    "Ah! You''re the loud girl!" I said as I finally remember who she is.


    "YOU''RE THE ONE WHO SAID THAT I HAVE TO KEEP MY VOICE DOWN! YOU CAN''T JUST FORGET ABOUT ME WHEN I SPEAK NORMALLY!"


    "I know, I know. Sorry about that. You can lower your voice again now."


    "NOT YET! I HAVE TO ADJUST MY VOICE FOR A FEW MINUTES SO I CAN HAVE MY VOICE LOWERED!"


    There''s a strange species entered my house. She''s so loud and can''t adjust the volume of her voice easily. So, I let her in because she will bother the neighbors if she continues talking like that outside.

 Chapter 190 - A Disciple

    "You cane in for now. Then, we can talk once you can adjust the volume of your voice."


    I allow the girl to enter the house and let her sit on the dining hall. If I''m right, then she is someone who wanted to be my disciple. But in what? In critical thinking? I don''t know how to teach that to others. Maybe Ka will be the perfect teacher for her.


    For now, I''ll confirm her desire ining here first.


    "Have you¡­ adjusted your voice yet?"


    The girl shakes her head. What is it that makes her unable to adjust her voice easily? It''s quite normal for other people to do it, but she finds it difficult to do so.


    She lets out a voice from time to time to make sure that her voice has lowered. Just like how I practice to copy other people''s voice.


    While I''m waiting for her to adjust herself, the girls have returned from their training and cultivating. Sophie, Shirley, and Candy just return from their training outside, and Ka and Ange down from their room after a day of cultivating.


    Ian and Ruby have just returned from grocery shopping, and the kids and Penny are just wake up from their naps. And everyone is waiting for this loud girl to say what she wants.


    Too long! If it''s this long, then we might end up finishing dinner first!


    I guess we have no choice but to let her talk after we finished dinner.


    "You can have your chatter. For now, please stay for dinner."


    The one who said that is Ruby. She noticed that if we wait any longer, dinner will be cold then.


    "THANK YOU, MA''AM!" Loud girl shouted loudly.


    We ate the crabs I got today. And they were delicious. Maybe we should really breed some crabs so we can get more of these easily. How about I make a pond in that empty ind for the sake of breeding? I''ll think about thatter.


    For now, this loud girl whose name I forgot, her ning here should be to ask me to teach her. I can just ask Ka to do that since I think she''s a better role model than me.


    Back then when she asked for my help in saving her vige, I don''t think she has manifested her magic yet. That means she''s younger than me. For someone who hasn''t manifest her magic yet, the only thing I can teach her is to make decision in any kind of situation. As for teaching her magic control, I can teach her once she has manifested her magic.


    Maybe it''s a good time to teach Hannah as well? She''s eleven years old now. In four more years, she will manifest her magic elements and attend school. And since the cult won''t make a move for ten years, and we also nning on building our strength as well, we might need Hannah to fight in the future as well.


    That''s something I hate. To let children grow and fight our battle. And in ten years, that''s when Daniel turns fifteen and manifest his magic elements as well. Maybe I should have gone with Veronica to their headquarter in the first ce and kill them all.


    Teaching kids so they can fight the war¡­ that''s the most disgusting things to do as an adult. I don''t want Ka to bear that burden, so I guess I won''t let her teach this loud girl. Then Hannah and Daniel as well. And if the war isn''t over yet, even Lana.


    I hope Albert can quickly destroy that cult.


    For now, my goal is to be stronger in these two years. And then, I''ll be a surgeon and doctor, while teaching other doctors about all kind of healing methods and surgeries that I know from the future. If I spread them now, there will be more people that can be saved from the war.


    After the dinner is over, the loud girl finally able to speak in lower volume and no longer shouting. Then she finally says why she''s here.


    "I want you to be my teacher!"


    "Okay. What''s your name and how old are you?" I asked.


    "I''m Jewel! Fourteen years old!"


    "Oh? She''s two years younger than us!" Ang said.


    "I know, Ang. I can count. I can do math quite well." I said to Ang.


    "But you would sometime say that you forgot your age, right?"


    "Yeah. But I can just use your age or Ka''s for my age."


    Both Ang and Ka said that they are already sixteen years old now. Since I forgot when my birthday is, why don''t I just make my age the same as the girls? And so, I have decided that I''m sixteen now.


    "What do you want to learn from me?" I asked Jewel.


    "Back then, you taught me how to keep cool in panic so I can make a good decision in any situation. I want to do that as well! Although I haven''t manifested my magic yet, I still want to learn another way to survive. Where to run away, how to ask for help, I want to learn those things so I can survive!" Jewel said.


    That''s a nice way of thinking. I guess that time she asked for my help, and that message I gave her, makes a huge impact on her life.


    "Alright. Tomorrow, you cane back here. Wear something easy to move."


    "Roy, you''re going to train her?" Ka asked.


    "Yes. I''ll teach her body first. Before anyone manifest their magic elements, and even after that as well, it''s our own body that will help us the most. I''ll train her body first tomorrow while giving her some tips to survive. If anyone wants toe as well, feel free to join."


    There might be other people who wanted to join the training. Physical training is important no matter how powerful your magic is. Even if you can destroy a mountain with magic, it''s useless if you are too slow to dodge enemy''s attack.


    What I''m nning is just physical improvement by running in the forest with uneven terrain.


    Ka and the girls who are used to go on adventure and on a guild mission outside, might have better stamina. But that doesn''t mean they can run in the forest as much as they want. Running in an uneven terrain will drain your stamina faster.


    I don''t need them to be faster. Of course if that''s possible, that would be great. What I want is for them to be more agile. That way, even if they can''t outrun their enemy, they can still dodge their attack


    "I want to join!"


    While I was thinking what kind of training will I give, Daniel shouted that he wanted to join as well.


    "You can''t."


    "Why!? Why do you always leave me out all the time!?"


    Daniel looks like he''s about to cry. He must be really lonely all this time I left him behind. I thought it''s a good idea to leave him to Ruby and Penny, but I was wrong. I need to be with him more.


    "We will y tag tomorrow morning. And the training is in the afternoon. That''s when you have your nap, right?"


    "What about training?" Daniel asked.


    "The tag is the training."


    "Alright! Awesome!" Daniel shouted in joy.


    "Heh! You said training, but isn''t it just ying?" Ang snorted. She must be thinking that I''m tricking Daniel.


    But no. For children, they will learn more by ying. ying tag will help his physical ability to grow.


    So I started to exin and everyone is paying attention toward me when they noticed my serious expression.


    "Hey, guys. Veronica said that there won''t be any big moves in the next ten years. That mean we probably won''t have any clues about them for the next ten years."


    Some of them noticed what I meant right away, but some others don''t.


    Then I looked at Daniel who is still being happy knowing that he will y with me tomorrow.


    "No! You want him to join!? You can''t!" Ruby who knows my intention, rejected that idea.


    "I''m sorry, but with all the knowledge I have, it''s impossible for me to end everything."


    Since Jewel is here, we speak in a way that won''t make her finds out what''s going on. If she became my disciple, I can tell her what''s going on. But not now. So she just listened our conversation while having a confused expression.


    "Ten years. In ten years, Daniel will be my age. Hannah will be twenty-one years old. Lana will be ten years old. I''m sorry, but we are too weak. Even back then, it still wasn''t over after thirty years. That is why I agree to be Jewel''s teacher."


    "Umm¡­ what are we talking about?" Jewel can''t hold it anymore and asked about what I''m saying.


    "I''ll tell you tomorrow. So, will youe tomorrow afternoon?"


    "Yes!"


    "Great. By the way, where do you live now?"


    "Hmm? In a nearby inn."


    "If you want, you can move here and sleep in an empty room."


    "Really? That would be great! I''ll go back to the inn now and bring my stuffs here. You can continue with what you''re talking about."


    Jewel then leaves to grab her stuffs from the inn.


    As for us, the mood is really bad at the realization that one day, Hannah, Daniel, and even Lana would have to fight.

 Chapter 191 - Planning For Training Camps

    Penny and Ruby apany the kids after dinner and leave the table while the rest of us were not moving. Even the ghost Sonia is just floating next to the table without saying anything.


    "Even if there are no war, we should still teach and train kids so in the future, they will be able to get stronger on their own and survive. We can disguise the training into ying so kids can enjoy them. Lina, how was the project to get the properties of the neighbors to build a park?" I asked Lina.


    "Well, it''s going well. Maybe in a few weeks, all the neighbors will leave. We can start building the park after that."


    "Good. Victoria, does your world has something that we can put in the park to help improve their physical abilities?" This time, I asked Victoria.


    "Yes. There are several of them. And there are some sports that kids might enjoy. I''ll tell you when we started the project." Victoria said.


    "Okay. I never thought that we would have a serious discussion just because I epted a disciple. Any questions?"


    Surprisingly, it was Ang who has some question.


    "Is physical strength the most important thing?" She asked.


    I smiled hearing that question. Of course the answer is obvious.


    "The answer is no. The most important thing is survival. Destroying the cult and everything elsees next. Everyone has different type of body. Some needs a long time to gain strength, and some only need a few weeks. Improving your body''s strength is just another mean for survival. If you feel like it''s less important for your survival, then you are free to not train your body. There are many other ways to survive, like asking for help, let other people do the fighting and run away, and for Ang, I think it''s best if you concentrate in your magic. I want to train the kids physical strength so they have another means of survival before they learn magic." I exined.


    "Good. Then I won''t join you guys tomorrow. I''ll just continue what I''m doing. Cultivating, and practice my magic." Ang said.


    "Hey! Everyone can decide what they want to do, but how about we did a training camp every few months or so? Then we can see how each other''s progresses are. We have two years after all. I don''t want to spend two whole years just by training. We can also take the kids for a vacation as well. Maybe finding a huge empty ind, or we can ask Albert if he has any privatends somewhere."


    Victoria suggested something good. This way, we have something to look forward to. I agree instantly with her idea.


    "That''s a good idea! We can also invite Albert as well. And he will be the one to pay the expenses!" I proimed.


    Unfortunately, Albert will return to the capital right away after he finished taking care of his business in Melk. So, he won''t return to Cassau.


    As for Marie, before we returned to Cassau, she already returns to the capital with n. Ruby said that she wanted to stay for a while longer with Lana, but she can''t because the royalties can''t leave the capital for too long. So, she returned with her trusted guards who already knows that she came here to meet her daughter. If we tell her about our training camp, she will most likely agree so she can meet with Lana. So, I told Sonia to ry the message to Marie.


    We''re taking care of Lana quite well. And when I say we, I mean Penny and Ruby. I heard that they became closer with Marie during her stays in Cassau. It''s good to have royalties as friend, right?


    Now the mood has be better. We no longer talk about the future where the kids will fight, but we focused on the training camps. Where should we go, what should we bring, and many other things they wanted to do for the vacation.


    It''s good to have Victoria with us. Thanks to her, we have something to look forward to.


    After that, Jewel returned carrying some of her belonging with her. Lina then guide her to her room. We have a new member in the family, I guess.


    There''s one other person. Kron.


    He wanted to join the n when it''s built, but he won''t stay in this ce. He stays in an inn nearby and said that he will go on a training alone. So I taught him about magic control so he can get stronger. Will he join our training tomorrow?


    We chatted quite a while untilte and we finally returned to our own room. And of course, Sophie wanted to sleep with me like usual. She usually wanted to sleep with me once or twice a week whenever she feels lonely.


    Seeing Sophie enters my room, Victoria choose to sleep in her own room. I guess I can''t sleep on Blobbybed tonight.


    As we wereying on the bed, Sophie asked me something.


    "Hey, Roy."


    "Hmm? What is it?"


    "Knowing that children will grow up during war time, don''t you want children of your own?" Sophie asked. I know where this is going.


    "I want to have children. Lots of them. But not now. There are too many things to do. Maybe in a few years."


    "Hmm¡­ I see¡­"


    "Well, I''m fine with doing the deeds though."


    I said as I kiss her and hug her.


    We only fell asleepte in the night.


    Did we do it? We did it! Huehehehe. She took my first time in my second life.


    But what about pregnancy?


    There''s a contraceptive potion that makes women unable to get pregnant after they did the deeds. It only works within 24 hours after drinking it. Sophie already drunk it before she enters my room. I didn''t peek on her. She told me about it after we did it.


    When morninges, Sophie who usually woke upter than me already left the room. Since everyone wanted some privacy in this house, I usually refrain to use my Divine Vision to peek on them. Usually doesn''t mean always, and this is the unusual time when I used it.


    I saw Sophie is in Ka''s room, with Ka, Victoria, and Candy. What are they discussing about?


    Since it''s those four, maybe it''s about me. Or is it that Sophie is telling the others about what we did?


    When the breakfast is done and everyone is in the dining hall, I see those fouring together. Though Ka''s and Candy''s face are beet red. I think I know what Sophie told them.


    As for Victoria, she looks pretty normal. Well, she doesn''t have internal organ like that of human. She''s just transformed into a human body, but her internal organ is still that of a slime. Well, slime doesn''t have any internal organs. At least ck Slime doesn''t. So I don''t know if she''s blushing as well or not.


    After breakfast, it was Sophie said something.


    "Roy. How about we tell Jewel everything?"


    "Hmm? Are you sure?"


    "Yes. I think it''s better if she knows about it early. Since she is your disciple, you should trust her more. I think she can be trusted." Sophie said.


    "I agree. You also thought it''s better to have more allies and friends, right?" Ka said.


    "Hmm? What is it? What are you talking about?" Jewel asked. It''s praiseworthy that she doesn''t shout anymore.


    So I start telling her everything.


    "So, Jewel¡­ the truth is¡­ I came from the future."


    The first thing that I told her is the fact that I came from the future. I also told her about the cult, their evil ns, and that everything we have been doing is to prevent that to happen and to destroy them.


    After I told her everything, her brain seems to freeze as she seems to be unable to close her mouth.


    "EEEH! MASTER CAME FROM THE FUTURE!? AND SHIRLEY IS A PRINCESS!? THAT BABY IS THE KING''S DAUGHTER!? YOU''RE TRYING TO SAVE THE WORLD!?"


    I guess the shock is really big if she returned to her ways of talking. I mean shouting.


    "Don''t shout so loud! We wanted it to be a secret, you idiot disciple!" I scolded Jewel.


    "I mean, aren''t you amazing, Master? You can make the king trust you and even let his own daughter to be raised by you? I don''t know about the cult, but I will do anything I can help with the war! The war might still be far away, but by that time, I will be a disciple you can be proud of!" Jewel proimed.


    "That''s good. But don''t you think you can easily change the volume of your voice so easily? Didn''t you say that it''s difficult to adjust itst night?"


    "I''m in too much shock and awe after hearing Master''s achievement that I speak normally. This happened every time I heard something shocking." Jewel said.


    "Aaah¡­ this girl is weird. Well, since you''ve heard everything, is there any questions you want to ask?"


    "Yes! Can I be Aura user as well? There''s still another year before I can go to school and manifest my magic, so I wanted to have another power like Master''s"


    Hmm¡­ I wanted to teach other as well, but to see other people''s potential of bing an Aura user, I have to pour my Aura inside their bodies. Victoria said that my control isn''t that good to do that yet and I might kill other people just by doing that, so I don''t know if Jewel has potential or not. But I guess I can just train her body harder.


    "I don''t know if you can do it or not, but if you want, I''ll make your training even harder. Don''t expect too much though." I said to Jewel.


    "It''s fine! I''ll do my best! Even if I can''t be an Aura user, I can just my magic in the future!"


    It''s great to have a motivated disciple. I wonder how strong she will be in the future. Will she be as strong as Ang in my past life? I hope so.

 Chapter 192 - Training Start

    Like I promised, in the morning, I yed tag with the Daniel and Hannah. Well, Jewel somehow ended up joining as well, so it was the four of us ying tag.


    ying tag is good for children''s physical development. That''s why I suggested it. And the kids can also enjoy ying.


    Though there''s one thing I didn''t expect. Children have unlimited stamina.


    I thought that my stamina is the best since I mainly fight in a melee battle. It was obvious that I have quite a lot of stamina. But when ying with kids, it''s like I''m still losing in term of stamina against Daniel. How does kid have infinite stamina?


    Though after lunch, Daniel and Hannah directly went to sleep. Their exhaustions were dyed until their stomach is full. And the simr thing happened to Jewel as well. But I force her to stay awake since we''re going out to train.


    There are several participants in this training. Jewel, Ka, Shirley, Lina, Ian, and Kron whom we just met as we were about to leave the city.


    When he asked me where we''re going, I said that I''m going to train these group. Hearing about training, Kron decided to join.


    And acting as the teachers are Victoria the slime, Sonia the ghost, and Roy the handsome.


    Although the handsome one is still considered rookiepared to the other two, the handsome one still took the job seriously.


    We leave the city and enter the forest. And after a few minutes of walk, we stopped.


    "Alright. To be honest, I kind of expected this line up when I said anyone is free toe. But I still want to hear your reasons. Let''s start from¡­ Jewel." I asked Jewel first about her reason for joining the training. I can expect what everyone''s goal ining here, but I''m still interested to hear iting from their mouth.


    "I WANT TO BE LEARN MANY THINGS FROM MASTER!" Jewel shouted.


    "Not so loud!"


    Jewel''s answer is quite predictable. She hasn''t manifested her magic yet, and we don''t know if she can gain Aura or not. But at least I will teach her what I can.


    But for her to be so spirited after almost exhausting herself from ying with kids¡­ I guess she has a lot of stamina.


    "Then, how about Ka?" This time I asked Ka.


    "I just want to learn more in what I can do. The more I learned, the more things I can do, and the more options I will have. You''re the one who taught me that." Ka said.


    "See that? That''s what someone learned from me! You will also learn a lot by watching me, Jewel." I proudly said to Jewel.


    "SO COOL! PLEASE TAKE CARE OF ME WELL, SENIOR SISTER!"


    Seems like every time she got excited, she will start shouting again.


    "Umm¡­ Although he taught me many things, I''m not his disciple. I''m his girlfriend." Ka clearly stated her status.


    "THAT''S EVEN COOLER!"


    I see¡­ no wonder that Evil God or whatever he called himself created a cult. I felt great knowing that my disciple worships me this much. And I bet that Evil God feels addicted to this feeling, he decided to built a cult where more people worship him.


    "Roy. Before you feel good from having someone worshipping you, we need to continue on what''s more important." Victoria said.


    "Right. Next is, Shirley!" I continue asking the others their goal ining here.


    "I learned from thest stampede that I''m stillcking in stamina. Although I can fly with my wind element, and have enough mana to fly for a long time, I''m still get tired easily. I don''t think I can learn Aura, but I will at least improve my stamina." Shirley replied.


    Yeah. When I saw her back then, if I didn''t stop her, she would faint. Even Ang and Sophie, although they didn''t fly around, they still have a lot of stamina during the battle. It''s good to know your own weaknesses.


    "Right! That''s my reason as well! To improve my stamina!" Kron suddenly spoke.


    "That''s wrong. Knowing you, you''re just interested in the word training."


    "¡­I thought that if I join you guys, I will have simr build to Hill''s people he brought from Mellian. You''re the one who taught them the training set needed to have such build, right?"


    "If you want such build, just go to Mellian and ask Hill and the guards over there. I''m not nning to have these group do the same training. It will mainly be stamina and agility. Not strength and power like those people." I said.


    "Hmm¡­ that''s fine. I can just join you today, then I will go to Mellian tomorrow. You can call me back when the n is built."


    In the end, Kron decided to continue with us and leaves for Mellian tomorrow. Just how much does he want those muscles? Well, if that what he wants, then it''s fine. Having someone big might be helpful as well.


    "Then,stly is Lina. I think you have the same answer as Ian, so you can answer for him."


    "Yes. We needed physical strength as well to be perfect servants, Master."


    From how she said ''we'' instead of ''I'', it seems like they have reached an agreement.


    "OH! YOU CALLED MASTER AS MASTER AS WELL! ARE YOU FELLOW DISCIPLE?"


    "No. I''m just Master''s maid."


    Lina answered Jewel''s question calmly.


    Well, one called me Master because of our master and disciple rtionship, while the other called me Master because of our master and servant rtionship. But both are calling me Master. As for Ian, he called me Master Roy.


    Now everyone has been asked, they should realize their goals in this training. Now it''s time for some motivational speech.


    "Alright. Since you have recognized your own weaknesses and your goals in joining the training, the image of what you want to be after the training is over should be clearer. Those with clearer image of what they want to be will gain more than those who don''t have. That''s why I asked you about it." I said.


    Then I pointed to a certain spot and everyone''s eyes followed my finger.


    "If you go over there, you will reach ake. Your training is to get there before the sun sets. And you are not allowed to use magic unless you have to fight monsters. And¡­ START!" I signaled the start of the training.


    As soon as the training start, Jewel and Kron instantly dashed to the area I pointed at. They didn''t ask how far theke is, but just started running as if they are in a race. Shirley also wanted to run as well, but Ka managed to stop her.


    "No, Shirley! Don''t run! Although we''re here to improve our stamina, we don''t have to go to theke as fast as possible. Our goal is to get to the destination within the time limit, and not to be the first one to go there. We all will go together. Just like Roy said before, physical strength is not the most important thing. The most important thing is to achieve our goals. For now, our goal is to get there. But we don''t know how far theke is, and what kind of monsters are there. We''ll go together, and we''ll run over there by matching our pace with the slowest one. That way, no one will be left behind"


    As expected of Ka. She already made a n to go together. This is the safest way to go there. And looking at what she carries on her bag, there are several water bottles and some light snacks as well. She is well prepared for the training even though I didn''t tell her everything.


    "Oh! What about those two!? Roy, aren''t you going to stop them? Kron is fine since he''s strong, but Jewel hasn''t even manifested her magic yet! You have to go stop her!" Shirley said.


    I just smiled at her without saying anything.


    Of course it''s dangerous for her. That''s why without telling anyone, I had Victoria stuck on her clothes and follow her. If there''s a danger approaching, Jewel can also call Sonia to inform me.


    But I''m not going to tell anyone about it. They are free to do whatever they want to go to theke. I will watch them from afar and protect them if needed. Making them know the feeling of helplessness is also a way of training. If they know how helpless they are alone, they will need to find a solution to get rid of their helplessness. That''s what I''m teaching them now.


    "Seems like he won''t give us any answer. Let''s go! If we stay here any longer, we won''t get there before the sun sets. Who knows how far thatke is?"


    Then, they unanimously decided that Ka will be their leader. They are moving into the forest in a diamond formation with Lina in the lead, Ka and Shirley in the middle, and Ian behind them. Although he''s old, he''s the most fit among them all. Is that because he''s a butler?


    Now that everyone has gone, let''s watch how they''re doing.

 Chapter 193 - Go To The Lake

    I watched as they all moving to theke with my Divine Vision. In the first ce is Kron. He''s still running without slowing down. It has been about half an hour since the training started. I guess he has a lot of stamina. As expected of a veteran hunter. If it goes on like this, he will arrive first.


    In the second ce is Jewel. She''s already tired of running, so she takes a short break. Not only she''s tired, she''s also thirsty. But I didn''t tell her to bring some water, so she can only stop to rest.


    If it''s like this, then it will be soon when Ka''s group passed her by. Then Jewel will be saved. I have told her to be calm, and I thought that she remembers my advice after hearing how she wanted to be my disciple yesterday. But in the end, she hurriedly run toward theke and ignored my advice.


    This is also a lesson for her. I won''t help her unless she''s in danger.


    As for Ka''s group, they are moving in a steady pace. Whenever they heard the sound of a stream, they will split up. Two people will stay in the same spot, while the other two will get some waters. Although I said no magic, Ka still told Shirley to create water container from ice so they could carry it. Since it''s not a movement magic, it should be okay.


    After getting some waters, they will regroup back in the ce the other two stayed in. I think it''s because they wanted to catch up with Jewel. If they move away from that route, they will not be able to meet Jewel.


    Hmm? Jewel started moving again. I guess it will be a while until they meet.


    Oh? She''s not moving toward theke, but to the river. I guess she''s too thirsty. If it''s goes on like that, she won''t meet Ka''s group.


    But then she stopped before moving. She grabbed a branch from the ground, and marked the path she takes. She wrote water, and an arrow pointed at the river. That must be her message in case Ka''s group passed by.


    Jewel went to the river and dives her head into the water. After finished drinking, she returned to her previous spot where she wrote the message, and erase it. And then she continues going to theke.


    Hah! She''s quite smart, isn''t she? But she''s too hotheaded. If she''s much calmer, she''s about as smart as Ka. Now that she''s tired, her mind is cooled down a bit and she must be thinking it would be great if Ka''s group catching up with her. She must be regretting her rash decision to run alone.


    Now she''s walking to theke. She''s waiting for Ka''s group to catch up without moving a step outside the route.


    I looked around her and see that there are no monsters there. Ka will catch up to her soon, so I think it''s a good idea to watch how Kron is doing.


    He has gotten quite far that my Divine Vision can''t reach him anymore, so I have to get closer to him. I can leave Jewel to Victoria until she meets Ka''s group.


    When my vision reached Kron, I can see him fighting three goblins. Since they are quite weak, Kron decided he wanted to beat them with his fists. It will take quite a while, but as a veteran hunter, he should be able to beat them. He knows the danger of even weak monsters such as goblin has, so he won''t let his guard down. I hope.


    Kron finally managed to defeat one of them after fifteen minutes, and goes for the next one. But the goblins decided to escape.


    What will you do now, Kron? If they escape, they will call for reinforcement. You should have known about goblins, right?


    And I''m right. Kron won''t let them escape, but he can''t catch up with them. So he has no choice but to use his magic to kill them before they escape. And those two goblins died with Kron''s Wind sh magic.


    And now¡­ he''s stopped? He''s looking around. Then he looked above at the sky, and clicked his tongue. Don''t tell me¡­


    I approached Kron quickly knowing what happened.


    "Oh, Roy! It''s good to see you here!" Kron looked at me as if I''m his savior.


    "Theke is over there." I pointed at where theke is.


    "Thank you!" Then Kron run to theke again.


    I can''t believe he''s lost. Well, knowing how he can fly, he must be thinking that he can fly whenever he wants if he got lost. But I told him to not use magic unless it''s an emergency, so he refrains from flying.


    It won''t be long until he arrives at theke. I don''t have to worry about him since there are no strong monsters in the path. For now, let''s go back to see how Jewel is doing.


    I retrace my steps back to where Jewel should be. But before I can see her, there are several monsters blocking my way. I have been evading them so I can watch the other, but seems like they followed me from my smell.


    Well, I can defeat them easily since they are just wolves. And since it''s not a stampede anymore, let''s try the usual.


    "Hello. Ie in peace." I said to the wolves. Thought I doubt none of them understand my words.


    And as expected, they ignored my greetings and start attacking me. I guess it will be the first time I tried using my daggers I made from the leftovers of the Giant Smander''s scales.


    I made two daggers, and I tried to wield both of them together. Dual wielding is difficult, but this is a practice anyway.


    Two daggers. One in my right hand, one in my left hand. To use them well, I need to get used to them. I can practice to use one to attack, and another for defense, or maybe both for attacking, or even using both for defending. I can swap which hand is for attacking, and which is for defending. Quick thinking is important in dual wielding.


    But the wolves are too weak that I only needed less than five minutes to take care of them although it''s the first time I wielded two daggers in real fight.


    Well, I can trainter. For now, the others are more important.


    When I see Jewel again, she already grouped up with Ka''s group and they went together to theke. And I see Victoria is with them chatting. Well, since Jewel is fine in the group, it''s fine for her to not protect her, I guess? Maybe she''s giving some advices as their mentor.


    But they are not safe yet just because they are together. They encountered skeleton soldiers after a few minutes. Skeletons wearing helmet and carrying swords.


    I heard that skeleton soldiers are from people who turned into monsters after they died. And they carry equipment they have from the day they died. So skeleton soldiers are humans who used to be soldiers.


    Not to forget, that it has been about a thousand years since Aura user disappear. There are no more people who fight using sword in hope they can gain Aura ability. Which means these skeleton soldiers are about a thousand years old. Even the equipment they wear are rusty.


    And it''s easy for the group to defeat them. Lina and Jewel are notbatants, so they stayed in the middle while the other three are protecting them. Well, two actually. Just Shirley and Ka.


    As for Ian, his fighting method is quite interesting. He can change form into that of a huge falcon. And he used his talons to attack the skeletons in high speed. He would also grab a skeleton and dropped it from the sky to its death.


    Now I understand how he is so fit despite his age. He fights like a beast he transformed into instead of using his other magic. Well, he could even carry Albert from Cassau to Melk, so it''s obvious how strong he is.


    There''s only one skeleton soldier left, and it seems Ian asked the others to let him subjugate that skeleton. Then Ian transformed again.


    As a Beastform mage, he has three transformation. First is normal human form, then next is their beast form. Lastly is in human beast hybrid form. Half-human, half-beast.


    Ian transformed into his hybrid form, and he turned into an old man with wings, and talons as his feet. That''s so cool! Not the old man part.


    Then he grabbed a sword dropped by one of the skeletons, and fly as fast as he can to thest skeleton and stabbed it with that sword. Is he trying to be a flying warrior? Maybe he wanted to learn more fighting methods.


    All the monsters are defeated and they continue going to theke. There are no more obstacles on the way, and reached theke right before the sun sets.


    As for Kron, he''s taking a nap while basking under the sun. He wakes up when the others arrive.


    "Congrattions oning this far! Now, how do we return?"


    "Go to hell!" Kron is angry.


    Well, since they are tired, I guess I should help them return.


    I turned Victoria into a wagon, and have everyone ride the wagon as I pulled them back to the city.


    With my speed, we reached just before the gate is closed. At least I won''t have to carry them over the wall.

 Chapter 194 - A New Monster Appears

    It has been one week since Jewel became my disciple. We only went for training about three times a week. Other time, I went to the sea for treasure hunting.


    After that day, Kron went to Mellian so he can grow some muscle by training with the guards. I bet Hill is extremely happy. Not just Kron ising, he''s also gaining some muscles. I''m fine as long as he no longer targeting me.


    As for the others, they don''t take part in the training every time. Other than Jewel who is my disciple, the others only participate about once or twice a week. It''s fine. They should learn things moderately. They don''t need to force themselves to do it.


    But the training does work for them. They told me that they gained a bit of stamina after training. Although it''s obviously not much since they only trained for a bit.


    Today, we''re not training. I will go diving today, and I spent the whole night cultivating my air element.


    I don''t see much progress in my cultivation. I think I''m not quite talented in magic. But the improvement in any element is important for my growth, so I refuse to give up. And I think once my air element reached intermediate level, I can make other people near me breathe underwater. Then I could have theme with me to the underwater dungeon I''ve seen.


    I haven''t entered that dungeon yet. I have discussed with Victoria and Ka about the underwater dungeon, and that I needed Ka to go with me so I can have a healer. Then, I will be the only person who can conquer underwater dungeon. Although no one will know about it.


    That''s why I keep cultivating my air element. And thanks to the Giant Smander''s scales leftovers, I can make more container capable to endure even more air pressure. Then turning those magic stones'' elements into air element will be faster.


    At this rate, maybe I can reach intermediate level in a few months. Compared to how fast the others are cultivating, my cultivation rate is quite slow. That''s just proof of how talented the others are.


    As for summoning element, I can tell that I''m about to breakthrough. Maybe today, if I encounter a strong monster, I will be able to reach intermediate level then. And that''s why I''m in a hurry to go to the sea as soon as possible.


    "Victoria. When I reach intermediate level, what should I do? Should I go to the Monsters World and make a contract with another monster or not? What should I prepare before going there? And what new ability will you gain?" I asked Victoria while on the way to the sea.


    "Well, of course before you''re going there, you need preparation first. Probably some food and water supply since we don''t know where you can obtain them yet. Once you decided on the schedule, you can unsummon me back to that world first so when you opened up a portal, I will put you in a safe location. Then we can search together for a monster you want to make a contract with. As for my new ability, you can see itter. You''ll be surprised. Anyway, what kind of monster do you want to be contracted with?" Victoria asked.


    Hmm¡­ there are many options. Maybe there are a summoner among the monsters in that world. If I can make a contract with them, I can summon as many monsters as I want by ordering that monster. Wait, no! I need a safe ce first. Maybe I''ll start with finding monster who own a territory and the leader of its group. That way, I can build a safe house in that location and I can go there whenever I''m in trouble in this world. That would be perfect.


    "A leader of a territory, I guess? I want to build a safe house where I can go whenever I want. When I enter that world, I can return whenever I want, right?" I asked Victoria about that world.


    "Yes. But I think it''s better if you stay there until you find your target monster. That way, you can encounter more monsters while practicing as well. the monsters in that world are more varies than in this world, and also stronger. So you can improve faster over there. Either in your summoning element, or your Aura, or even both. Then you might also find some Pear-y Fruit in that world for Lina, or any one of the kids who awakened as summoner."


    Staying over in an unknown world filled with powerful monsters¡­ That''s too difficult. Even before I reached intermediate in my air element, I should learn how to step on air first before I entered that world.


    That''s why, while I''m going to the sea, I tried to walk on air as practice. So far, I can step three times on air. That''s good, but not enough if I encounter any flying monsters.


    After a while walking and practicing, I have reached the sea! I can proudly say that I can take four steps on air now! Still not enough, but that''s a progress!


    When I''m about to enter the usual spot, I see that there''s a different type of monster than what I usually see around here. And like me, that monster can walk on water. It doesn''t use Aura to do it, but I guess it must be magic.


    Don''t tell me that thing is the boss around the area here?


    Its appearance is that of a¡­ what is it? Its whole body is blue like the sea, walking on two legs and has two arms like human. And it even equipped with weapon! A spear-like weapon, but there are three pointy des at the end of that spear. It''s about the same height as I am. And seeing its gill, and its webbed fingers, I can tell that it''s a powerful sea monsters, but still dare to challenge me outside of water.


    ¡­wait, we''re above water, so that thing is still superior than me. Since it can also use water magic, I''m totally at disadvantage while fighting that monster. Anyway, what is that monster called?


    "Victoria, what is that thing?"


    "Hmm¡­ what is it again? I don''t know. Most of sea creatures are still undiscovered, so we don''t have names for most of it. Maybe this one is still undiscovered as well. You can name it however you want then." Victoria said.


    "Really? I can name it however I want? How about James?"


    "¡­that''s a human name. Not the name of a species. Why don''t you see first if that monster has intellect and able to speak or not? If it can, you can just ask that thing what kind of species it is."


    "I guess you''re right. For now, let''s call it Fishman from Fishmen species. If that thing can talk, we''ll ask it."


    I then approached the Fishman while also walking on the surface of the water, and raised my hand for greeting.


    "Hello! Ie in peace. I''m a human being, Roy. What''s your name and your species?" I politely introduce myself and ask for the other party''s name and species.


    "RRRRAAAAAA!!"


    The Fishman roared at me with hostility. I guess it can''t speak. And I don''t think Rra is its name, nor is it it''s species. It''s just angry at me. Probably since I''m the one killing the monsters in this area.


    Then after screaming at me, without any warning, the Fishman attacked me with its water magic.


    The Fishman made pirs of water raised from behind it, and it shoot the water pir at me. I dodged them all easily, and one of the pirs I dodged, hit a reef behind me and made a hole in that reef.


    "Damn! If I got hit by that thing, I''ll die with a hole in my body!"


    "That Fishman is strong! Probably the boss of this area! I''m sure if we defeat it, your summoning level will increase!"


    "You think it will be easy? That magic is so powerful that I can only dodge it! I''m considering of running away now." I said.


    "You can''t! If you do, that Fishman might cause problem to the sea! That Fishman is unable to speak, but it''s smart enough to wait for you toe and challenge you. If you escape, who knows what kind of problem it can cause. Seeing those water pirs, I''m sure that Fishman is the one responsible in sinking those boats."


    "I see¡­ By the way, you called it Fishman as well. Does that mean the name is official?"


    "You''re thinking about that now? How about you kill it first? Fishman is a simple name that anyone cane up with, so it won''t be strange if someone already named that monster Fishman." Victoria said.


    "That mean I have to be more creative. Victoria, let''s kill that fish face!"


    Seems like running away is not an option. I guess I will have to risk my life to defeat this thing.

 Chapter 195 - Defeating The Fishman And Reaching Intermediate Level

    Fishman. That''s what I decided to call this monster.


    It''s blue in color, has a face that looks like a deep-sea fish, walking with two legs and have two hands with webbed fingers.


    I hate its face. He looks like it is mocking me. Must be that fish lips.


    The Fishman is wielding a spear like weapon with three pointy des instead of just one. What was it again?


    "Victoria, what is that weapon?" I asked Victoria who has wide-knowledge about weapons.


    "It''s called Trident. A weapon I expected humanoid sea monsters would wield. It''s the first time I ever see one though." Victoria answered.


    "What is the difference between trident and normal spear?"


    "¡­as you can see, trident has three des instead of just one."


    "Oh, wow! Thank you for exining! I didn''t know about that!" I said sarcastically.


    While chatting with Victoria, the Fishman stopped its magic and attacked me with its three-headed spear. I mean trident.


    Looking for melee fight, eh? That''s better than using magic. Come at me!


    I transformed Victoria into a spear and sh against the trident wielding Fishman. I didn''t bring my own spear since I wanted to gain Experience by using Victoria so I can improve my summoning level.


    The shaft of our weapons hit each other. But I''m stronger than the Fishman, so I can push it back. Then I pushed it away and aimed my spear at his chest. I can see where his heart is with my Divine Vision, and that''s where I''m aiming at.


    But the Fishman is quite fast and it is able to block my attack with the trident. He''s parrying my attack so my spear missed its target.


    But I haven''t done yet.


    With the momentum from being pushed, I spin around and raise my spear high to swung it down in vertical sh. But the Fishman stopped my spear by the gap between the two des on the trident.


    That! That is the difference between a spear and a trident! What I want to know is the use, not the visual differences! Why is Victoria answered with something obvious?


    Well, this is also obvious as well, and I expected it to block it anyway. I just wanted to see if trident is more useful than a spear.


    From what I can tell, trident''s range of attack is wider since it has three des. Making it easier to hit the target. And it also has another means of defense by stopping an attack in between its des. Other than that, everything is about the same as spear.


    From my perspective, it has more advantage than a spear, but I still prefer spear since I have one. If the one I have is a trident, of course I will choose trident.


    I have a lot of disadvantages here. First, although I''m stronger physically, the Fishman has more experience in handling its weapon. That also mean I can learn something from the Fishman.


    Then, it can use magic. I don''t know if the Fishman can only use water magic or has other element as well, but I have to make sure it won''t use magic on me again. That''s why during our battle, I don''t always push it back and make sure to let it thinks that I am a bit weaker than it. By doing that, the Fishman will be confident in defeating me without using magic. I''m doing it so I can learn to use spear or simr weapon better.


    Victoria is better in swordsmanship, and she doesn''t know much about using spear other than what she had seen in the past from other Aura users. As for in her previous world, there are no more real weapon fighting in her time. And although they are still existing in her world, they are very rare. She only ever seen from fictions about wielding spear. That''s why I have no teacher to teach me how to use a spear.


    As for Sonia, she''s also a swordswoman. Both Sonia and Victoria learn from the same master after all.


    That''s why, although the weapons are different, fighting this Fishman makes me learn a lot about wielding long weapon.


    I''m not learning technique of just one certain type of weapon. Although Sonia says that it''s better to master just one weapon than learning everything, I''m not aiming to be a master of one. Especially since I have a monster that can shapeshift.


    Of course I will have a main weapon Victoria or Blobby will transform into, but I will change my weapon ording to the situation. For example, using a spear in narrow space is just a stupid thing to do. Using a sword when the opponent can attack me from distance is stupid as well.


    And against this Fishman, I''m using a Victospear while pretending to be pushed back while knowing that I''m stronger than this Fishman. I''mcking in technique, but I''m faster and stronger, which makes it easy for me to dodge and block its attack while learning its technique.


    After thinking that I have learned enough, I no longer holding back and try to kill the Fishman right away.


    I pulled back my Victospear and prepare to trust its heart. This time, I used my full power so I can kill the Fishman in one shot.


    ¡­eh?


    When I trusted my Victospear, I know with my Divine Vision that it won''t be able to dodge or block my attack. That''s why I felt confident. But I miscalcte one thing.


    We are standing on the sea surface!


    The Fishman used magic to stand on the water, and my Divine Vision is unable to see its magic.


    When I trusted my spear, I didn''t see any muscles movement telling me that he''s trying to dodge, and I can''t see that it''s actually stopped using magic that let it stand on water and let its body sink into the sea.


    ¡­well, I''m doomed.


    The sea is its territory. On the sea surface I can still dodge its water magic, but in the sea¡­ water is everywhere. I won''t know when he''s using his magic.


    The only thing left to do is either to kill it before it used magic, or to run away. But as Victoria said, I can''t run away knowing that it mighte back for revenge. That mean I have to kill it.


    Then I also stopped letting myself stand on the water and sink into the sea. I see it getting further and further away from me.


    its swimming speed is slightly faster than me. If it''s like this, he will be able to escape. I have to improve my swimming speed right away!


    But how do I increase my speed?


    Then Victoria moved to my ear as I am still chasing after the Fishman and whisper to me something.


    "Roy. Remember that Fishman''s hands and feet. His fingers and toes, or whatever they are called, are webbed. Try to use Aura to make simr things on your feet. You should be able to swim faster then."


    Making simr things, huh? I haven''t been able to materialize Aura, but I should be able to just make sure that there won''t be any water slipping through in between my toes. Let''s try that.


    After I did what Victoria suggested, my swimming speed got faster and I should be able to catch up to that Fishman.


    I should have realized it from seeing how fishes can swim fast. They don''t have spot where water slipping through on their fins and tails. Well, it just meant that I learned one more thing.


    I chased after the Fishman from his blind spot. But it''s difficult since that monster is a water mage as well. It can notice me from the movement of the water. And it even tries to crush me with water pressure.


    But little by little, I managed to catch up with him. Although it was a bit difficult to escape from the water pressure, once I got out of there, it was quite easy to dodge its next attack since my Divine Vision can see where the water moves.


    Knowing that he can no longer escape, the Fishman turns to face me with its trident. But I''m faster than that monster now. And trying to stop me when I''m stronger, faster, and can predict its moves by seeing his muscles movement is futile.


    I easily pierced Victospear into his chest. I missed its heart slightly, but that''s okay. With a hole in his chest, it''s impossible to fight back.


    With the monster stuck in my Victospear, I pushed it out of the water. I jumped high to the sky with it and attacked it mid-air while there are several water snakes from its magic that''s chasing after me from below.


    The Fishman died quickly and at the same time, the water snakes returned into water again.


    I can feel magic dwelling inside me. Looks like I''m about to breakthrough my summoning level. I think it''s best if I find some ce to cultivate.


    I go to the empty ind where I store my loots and cultivate for a while. I let Victoria down on the ground. She''s been quiet for a while.


    In just a few minutes, I finally managed to enter Intermediate level! I feel so happy I want to dance.


    "Victoria! I finally did it! I''m an intermediate level now!"


    But Victoria didn''t say anything. Is something wrong with her?


    "Victoria?"


    I approached Victoria with worry. What if it''s the side effect of leveling up for her? I never heard about this though?


    Then the ck blob suddenly moves again. I think she''s okay now.


    "Victoria, you made me so worried. What happened?"


    Then¡­ a macho voiceing out of my ck slime.


    "H Amigo!"


    "¡­whuh?"

 Chapter 196 - Hola Amigos

    "H amigo!"


    The ck slime that has always been with me suddenly changed after I breakthrough to intermediate level. The voice is changed from a feminine voice of a woman, to a macho voice of a man.


    This is not Victoria. This is someone else. Blobby? Or is it another person?


    "Who are you and where is Victoria? And what is that amigo?"


    "That''s just a greeting my first master used to say to other people. I was a summoned monster long before Victoria died and her soul transferred to my body. I''m the real ck slime, or should I say I''m the original personality of who you called Blobby. My name is Javier. That''s the name my first master gave to me. But you can call me Blobby like usual."


    "My name is Roy, but you can call me The Great One like usual."


    "¡­your personality is the same as ever."


    I feel a sense of familiarity from Javier. He''s Blobby after all. But what does this mean? Howe there are multiple personalities in Blobby? And where''s Victoria?


    "You don''t have to worry about Victoria. I have received permission from her to take control of this body for a while. She''s also listening at the moment. Unfortunately, this will be the first time and thest time we meet each other. Once Victoria returns, this body will be in her full control. That''s why I want you to listen carefully to what I have to say. With both you and Victoria listening, I think it would be fine even with your terrible memory."


    "¡­we just met and you already make fun of my forgetful trait? How long can you stay in control?"


    "Until I changed back to Victoria. After that, I will never be able toe out again. Even when you improved your summoning level to advanced level. Now, where do you want to listen to my story?"


    "The king''s bedroom. Or wherever Albert decide."


    "You still don''t trust me and want Albert to detect if I spoke any lies? That''s fine."


    "No. He''s just smarter than I am. If he listened right away, he might be able to make up some ns. What you''re going to tell me is something rted to what happened, right?"


    I just make some wild guess, but I don''t feel that I''m wrong.


    "Yes. That mean Victoria won''t be with you for a while. Is that fine?"


    "Yeah. She will agree with me here. If she''s inside Blobby with you, you should be able to contact her, right?"


    "¡­she said she''ll leave everything to you. And she has many questions to ask me, so I won''t be able to speak much with you on the way. I''ll tell you everything I know when you''re there."


    "Okay. But at least you have to greet the others so they know what''s going on."


    Then I quickly return to my home and told everyone that I''m going to the capital in a hurry. I contacted Sonia to gather everyone in the house before I left.


    Once I returned, everyone is looking at me with worry. Those worries changed into confusion when Javier spoke.


    "H amigos"


    "¡­what?"


    Of course they would be confused. I can guess what H means, but what is amigo?


    "This is Javier. He appears and took control of Blobby for a while, so Victoria will be unavable until he''s gone. But he has something important to tell me, so I''m nning to go to the capital so Albert and I can listen to what he says." I summarized what happened.


    "So you''ll be going to the capital? When?" Ka asked.


    "Right away. Ian, if I rode on your back to the capital, how fast will you get there?"


    "Probably around midnight."


    So fast! Even me, if I run with full speed, I would arrive at the capital tomorrow at noon if I''m leaving right away! Now I''m jealous of those who can fly. I need to learn Air Steps soon.


    "Then can I ask you to bring me there? And Sonia, inform Albert that I''m meeting him."


    "Okay." Sonia said.


    As for Ian, he asked for Ruby''s permission first. Seeing how important the situation is, Ruby permitted Ian to leave with one condition.


    "Bring Lana with you as well. Since you''re going to meet her parents, it will be a shame if she didn''te with you."


    We will be flying, but I don''t have to worry about Lana''s protection if she''s with me. I can make Air Shield around her body. It''s a weak protection, but if it''s useful against normal wind. If it''s hit by wind from magic, it will break easily. And Ian can make Wind Shield as well to protect Lana. She will be safe on flight.


    "Sure. Jewel, even when I''m not around, don''t ck off on training!"


    "YES MASTER!" Jewel shouted.


    She still can''t control the volume of her voice well. But it''s getting better. As long as it doesn''t involve me, she won''t raise her voice. Like when Ka or the others asking her something, she will answer normally. But only when I told her to do something, she will raise her voice.


    Is it because she worships me?


    After preparing ourselves, I ride on top of Ian''s giant falcon form with Lana in my embrace. Although my Air Shield should be able to protect her from the wind, it''s still better if I embrace her.


    We flew very fast and within few minutes, even with my Divine Vision, I can no longer see Cassau. Make me envious again with those who can fly.


    With this speed Ian flew, I can match him if I run onnd. But there are many obstacles, and there aren''t any in the skies. That''s why I won''t reach the capital so fast.


    Back in Cassau, Shirley also wanted to return to the capital. But she must have noticed from my reaction that it''s something urgent, so she held back from asking.


    She can fly as well with her wind element, but unlike Ian, she needed mana to stay in the air. She won''t have enough mana to fly all the way to capital. That''s why she can''t join us. She will return home in another time.


    Then midflight, Sonia appears and informs us on how to meet Albert, while I''m making funny face to entertain Lana.


    "Roy¡­ your face might traumatize her so stop it. Albert says that you need to enter the capital from the north. The security in the capital is heavily improved after the stampede. But for tonight, all the guards patrolling the north area are our people. They know we''reing. After you enter the capital, you can directly enter his chamber from the open window." Sonia said.


    "Oh! It really is as you said! We will talk in his bedroom!"


    Suddenly, the ck slime who has been quiet all this time speak.


    "How''s Victoria?"


    During the whole time he''s quiet, it means that Victoria is asking him some questions. It took so long so maybe they have something simr. I hope it''s not their hobby.


    "We''re good. My first master and Victoria both came from the same world. I had a lot of fun talking with her. Seems like that greeting I learned from my first master, ''H amigo'' is from anothernguage in her world. It means hello friend. Victoria and my first master lived in different countries in that world. And their mainnguage also different. Victoria''s home country''snguage is simr to thenguage we use in this world, which was called English in that world. While my first master''s country''snguage is Spanish." Javier said.


    "You''ve been watching us ever since I summoned you, right?"


    "Yes. But I only know now that my first master is also from another world. I thought the way he spoke is just gibberish. Turns out it was anothernguage. I should have learned more about hisnguage."


    "Was your master an Aura user?" It was Sonia who asked. I guess she''s also curious about Javier''s first master.


    "No. But he''s a genius in magic. He awakened five elements at once. Fire, Water, Wind, Earth, and Summoning. Other than his summoning element which stays as beginner level since I can''t fight, everything else has reached master element." Javier said.


    "Then¡­ does that mean you''re able to talk with him when he''s just a beginner level in summoning element?" I asked. If he could do that, then why did he keep quiet in both this life and in my previous life?


    "I know what you want to ask, but I''ll tell you everything when Albert is with us. It also involved how Victoria and I share a body."


    "Okay. Then¡­ are you really a ck slime, or you were also a human in the past like Victoria?"


    "Born as ck slime. Raised as ck slime. Living forever as ck slime. I''m immortal after all."


    "Are there any other summoners between your first master and me?"


    "Yes. Several of them. But only you who has reached intermediate level in summoning element. None of my previous masters are Aura user. I was considered as flop even when I show them how smart I am by talking to them. After my first master died, I became wild monster and returned to Monsters World. Then each time a summoner activated a portal for their first summoning close to where I am, I quickly throw myself into the portal to be their summon."


    "Can''t you attack like Victoria? Turn yourself into human form and attack with weapon?"


    "I couldn''t before. Since I always summoned by mages who aren''t Aura users, neither I or all my previous masters thought of that."


    "Then¡­ are you the one who returned me to the past?" I asked something I always curious about.


    "Yes. I''ll tell you about itter. We have reached the capital."


    Now I will know how I returned to the past and for what reason. I can''t calm down knowing that I will find the reason about my return to the past even though I always told others to calm down.


    Wait! Does it mean Javier alsoe from the future since he knows that he''s the one who brought me to the past!?

 Chapter 197 - Why I Was Returned To The Past

    We have reached the capital so quickly. It''s all because we''re flying. I seriously need to learn Air Steps. It''s just a name I made for the technique to run on air. So far, I can only take four steps. But that''s not enough. I want to do it infinitely. Or at least until my mana run out.


    There are several guards who see us entering, but none of them makemotion. They are all our allies who knows about the stampede and now that we''re Albert''s important friends. Maybe Albert has gained more allies since then. The stampede at Melk has unite the people. If the news has spread, there should be more people fighting with us.


    Since we have permission, we directly go to the pce and enter through the king''s chamber''s window. Albert is waiting for us. And Marie is also there waiting for Lana, while n is sleeping on the bed.


    I jumped off Ian''s back and enter the window, and Marie quickly grabs Lana from my arms.


    "Did you really take a baby with you to fly in the middle of the night?" Marie looked at me angrily.


    "Umm¡­ I make sure that she''s well protected from the wind."


    "Marie, it''s okay. Lana seems to be happy." Albert said.


    "Of course, she''s happy! She''s meeting her mother and brother again. The bed now is full with me and the children, so you will sleep on the floor." Marie said.


    "Wait, Marie!"


    "Don''t shout! Look! n is waking up!"


    Albert no longer dared to speak a word. Marie is the boss at home after all, so it''s as expected.


    Then Albert took us to an empty room since we can''t have serious talk near sleeping babies.


    It''s just five of us in the room. Not including Javier. Albert, Ian, Mustache, Sonia, and me.


    "H amigos!"


    And like usual, Javier greets the new faces.


    "Can''t you just greet them normally?" I asked.


    "Speaking anothernguage makes me feel superior to you who only speak onenguage." Javier said.


    "Tch! Let''s talk."


    "Okay. I''m a ck slime, and I''m over two thousand years old. But that doesn''t matter. All the things about me, I have talked about it with Victoria. I''ll just tell you what''s important. One of them is the future youe from, Roy." Javier said.


    Now it''s time for the serious talk. But are we really doing it with Javier turned into a human head? Just the head?


    "Umm¡­ Javier was it? Can you transform your whole body into human form instead of just the head? It will be better if you do that rather than just the head talking."


    "Okay."


    Then from the ck bald human head, grows a body under it. Scary. This is like that horror story I read in my previous life. Don''t tell me that was written from true story?


    Now Javier has the form of a tall bald man wearing robe. He said that he''s a ck slime and not a human. Which mean this form is of someone familiar to Javier.


    "Is he your first master?" I asked.


    "Yes. He was the strongest mage at the time. He''s the man I admire."


    "More importantly, you just said that you''re going to tell us about the future, right? Does that mean after Roy died, you continued living and that''s what you''re going to tell us?" Albert asked.


    "Yes. I will tell you why I returned Roy back to the past, and what happened in the future. Roy has told you everything he remembered until the day he died, now I will tell you about what happened after he died."


    The atmosphere changed. If someonee from the future saying that he sent someone to the past after a while since that someone died, that means there''s something wrong in that future and they tried to prevent it from happening. It must be rted to the cult.


    "I''m a rare type of monsters who can use several types of ability. And if I be someone''s summon, I need that someone to level up before I can use other abilities. As you may know, my shapeshifting ability, weight-changing, and hardening, are all things I can use when my summoner is just a beginner level. As my summoner leveled up, the ability I can use will increase. And this is the first time ever my summoner leveled up, but I always know about this ever since I first made a contract with my first master. But there is one ability that I can only use when I''m not contracted to anyone. It''s to return back to the past. And that''s what I used to make Roy returns to the past."


    "I see¡­ why me?"


    "Because of your Aura ability. Back then, I never talked to you because although I''m interested in human world, I have no expectation from all the time my summoners tried to kill me. And you tried to kill me too!"


    "Sorry."


    I remembered how I was so disappointed to only have one element and only summoned a ck slime. I''m very sorry about that, Javier.


    "Then when you went crazy and trained your body instead, and you gained Aura, when you first used me as weapon to kill monster, that''s the first time in two thousand years that I felt happy thinking that maybe this time will be different. But you died too soon of overconfident. How stupid of someone who invented Shameless Survival Arts."


    I''m really embarrassed by thatment. Even Albert is smirking at me. But it''s not the time to make fun of me so he held back hisughter.


    I want to ask about Victoria, but I''ll do thatter.


    "In the future, you all lost. I don''t know how or why because at the time, I''m just a wild monster without summoner living in the Monsters World. The cult went on rampage and destroy everything. Then they also entered Monsters World and destroy everything as well. At the time, Victoria is already in our consciousness and suggested to return to the past. With my ability, I can transfer the memory of someone to the past. Victoria suggested to return you to the past because not only you are an Aura user, you are also living in the time when everything started to change."


    "I see¡­ but why is Victoria''s memory of the future is gone? And howe you don''t know that she''s from another world? And how is her consciousness entered you after she died?"


    "It''s another one of my ability which can only be activated when I have no master. I can grab another people''s consciousness after they die, and collect them in me. This is something that activated on random. Even I don''t know how and why it was activated. I had many other consciousness other than me and Victoria. I don''t know about her home world because she''s mostly just sleeping and we never talk about it. As for her memory, it was because of my ability to return someone to the past. Other than my target and my own consciousness, I can''t really turn other people''s memories to the past as well. That''s why Victoria not only doesn''t remember about the future, she also doesn''t remember about me and the other consciousnesses. But she still remembers the time when she was alive, and the life she lived as ck slime."


    Then Javier continued.


    "Then as I have returned to the past, which is one day before you summoned Blobby, we decided to let Victoria took control of our body even though it means that our other consciousness will disappear. Even though she lost her memories when she''s with us, she still has the memories of the time she was alive. She could be a good teacher for Roy to learn Aura. I will only appear when you reached intermediate level. Then I will disappear after Victoria takes control. That''s why this is the only time I can speak with you. And Victoria is now someone irreceable to you. I can''t just take control of this body again. It''s better if she continues living than us."


    "I think that''s enough information for now. Let''s take a break. Ian, make me something sweet." I asked for a break.


    "Understood."


    Ian then leaves the room, while I was sitting on the sofa summarizing what Javier told me.


    Future, bad. Victoria was there. She returns to the past, but lose memories. I was chosen thanks to Victoria''s suggestion. It''s because the time is close to when everything went worse, and also because of my Aura ability. What else is there?


    I think that''s about everything that we learned just now.


    "Do you understand everything?" Albert asked.


    "I thought you are the smart one."


    "But you always make things simpler." Albert said.


    "Well, to make it simpler, future is bad. Return to the past to change it. No difference with what we''re doing."


    "¡­what about Victoria?"


    "She will return and Javier will go. Like he said, Victoria is irreceable."


    "¡­you really did make it simpler." Albert said.


    "But it''s not everything. Javier hasn''t told us about the past. He''s at least two thousand years old, so he should know about something. And his first master is the strongest mage at the time. We need to learn everything from him. That''s why I said to have a break before we continue so we can clear our minds."


    "¡­is that all?"


    "Well¡­ I''m also hungry and craving for something sweet."


    "As I thought."


    Then Ian returned with a cake and we eat it. We continue our talks after we finished the cake.


    When did he have the time to bake a cake?

 Chapter 198 - The True Identity Of Uneaten Beef

    "Is there anything from the future you can tell us?"


    Albert asked Javier about any event in the future that can be a key information to use against the cult. The only thing Javier said is that we lost.


    "I don''t know. After Roy died, I never made any contract with other summoner. I just learned about it when they started to attack Monsters World. Now I''m going to tell you about the past." Javier said.


    The past. I think what he''s going to say will be important.


    "I became a summoned monster and apanion of someone powerful before Victoria died. I think Victoria died during the time I was with that summoner. He was an Aura user, but his Aura is too weak. Even weaker than Roy''s during the time he first received Aura ability. That''s why I never thought of him as an Aura user."


    I see. So, because he''s too weak, Javier didn''t consider him as Aura user. But his magic is powerful. Javier considered that master of his as powerful mage instead of Aura user since he rarely used his Aura ability.


    "Well, his Aura ability is weak, but he still managed to obtain a new ability which makes him a true Aura user."


    "You mean like my Divine Vision, Victoria''s wings, and Sonia''s charm magic?" I asked.


    "Yes. And what he got was the ability to detect lies."


    "What!?"


    "Seriously?"


    "No way!"


    Albert, Sonia, and I are shocked hearing that revtion. Sonia and I quickly turn our eyes to Albert.


    Ian and Mustache also surprised, but they keep quiet.


    "Yes. My master at the time was the founder of Tatrama Kingdom, Albert''s ancestor, and the man in that storybook, Rama. The one who sealed the Evil Mage''s power. And he is also the author of that storybook himself, the Uneaten Beef. He only left two stories which meant to be clues for the future." Javier said.


    "Wait! The one that was sealed is the Evil Mage''s power and not the Evil Mage himself?" I asked.


    "Yes. That Evil Mage didn''t get sealed. Only his power. He managed to escape before he was killed. The magic tool Rama used at that time, broke after being used on the Evil Mage. I don''t think we can find that magic tool again."


    "¡­does that magic tool make anyone whose power is sealed to live long?"


    "¡­probably. Rama said that there''s a side effect on the people whose power got sealed. I don''t know if that''s what happened to that Evil Mage. But if he can live so long without his power, I''m sure he will gain another mean to reach his goal."


    "¡­building a cult with the Evil Mage as their god." I said in low voice.


    "Roy, you sure that he''s the one behind that door Veronica told us?" Albert asked me. His voice a slightly shaking from the horror of reality. Although it''s just our assumption.


    "I can''t say for sure, but the possibility is high. Just like I did. If I can''t do everything alone, I''ll have other people do it for me. That''s why I told you about the cult. If I''m the Evil Mage, or this Evil God, I would do the same when I lost my power. Finding allies to do what I want." I said.


    This is too much. From what Javier told us, there''s a possibility that our enemy is a thousand years old man. Even worse, if that guy still has a little of magic despite having his power sealed. Anyone who has manifested magic, can cultivate and increase their level. Probably, that guy has worse talent in magic than I am at the moment his power was sealed, but a thousand years of cultivation can surpass talent.


    But I didn''t tell the other about it. It might make them fall into despair. We need hope after all.


    "Albert, have you made a group for excavating dungeons and ruins to find ancient magic tool? We might be able to find something useful that can kill him." I asked Albert. This is something necessary for us after all.


    "Not yet. We are stillcking in numbers. We need more people to do that. Soon, the news of the cult will spread in the whole kingdom. I''ll try to recruit more people then. I''ll concentrate in finding people from the area where the stampede happened. The people would be more motivated with revenge in their mind. I have several reports of capable hunters and students who seem to have great potential from the people I send." Albert replied.


    "That''s good." I said.


    "Not good enough. The key yer in the war will be you because of your Aura. Why did this Evil God eradicate all Aura users in the past? Most likely because they are obstacles for him to be the strongest. That''s why Roy, you, as the only Aura user at the moment, are going to attempt in being the strongest in the world." Albert said.


    ¡­so in the end, I have to be the one to kill the Evil God. I thought of letting Albert do everything for me, but in the end, Albert told me to be the one to finish it. I have thought of this many times but still¡­ can I cry?


    "That''s also the reason I had you returned to the past. As the only Aura user, with proper guidance, you might be able to be the strongest and defeat the Evil God." Javier said.


    "Too heavy. The burden is too heavy for me to bear. Why can''t you find someone in the distant past to return to the past and told them everything? Then they can kill the baby Evil God, right? Easy." I asked Javier.


    "I also thought of that, but as you can see, I am incapable of speak to my anyone until my master reached intermediate level in summoning element. And as you can see from Victoria''s case, she received partial memory loss where she doesn''t remember much about us, the other consciousnesses inside the ck slime. If I returned someone to the past, they will remember everything he did until the day he died, so what will change will only their own life. And I don''t know anyone in the past who is rted to the past Evil God and can change the mind of the Evil God, or kill him."


    That makes sense. If only Javier doesn''t need to increase his master''s summoning level before theymunicate, it will be far easier.


    As for how Victoria able tomunicate with me, it must be because of her memory loss. That memory loss is a side effect of returning to the past that let her able tomunicate with me as soon as she became someone''s summoned monster.


    After asking Javier about it, he also thought of that as well. But there''s another thing I''m concerned about.


    "What about my air element? I didn''t have aptitude in air element before, but after I returned to the past, I had it. Was it because of returning to the past as well?"


    "Well, maybe. The fact that you manifested air element meant that you actually had the aptitude for it no matter how low your talent is."


    "Thatst part was unnecessary!"


    I know it, alright! I know how I''m untalented in magic. But I still feel bad whenever someone point it out.


    Then that means not everyone is talented in the elements they awakened in. And that''s why many people unable to be a hunter and choose other jobs. They just don''t have the ability, and wealth, to cultivate and improve their magic.


    "Is that everything you wanted to tell us?" I asked.


    Javier told us about the future, how the cult even targeted Monsters World, how I was chosen to change the future, how Victoria lose her memories and how she canmunicate with me while other consciousness can''t. Javier never knew that Victoria came from another world. Victoria never told that to her other consciousness in the past life. I wonder why?


    Even if I asked her now, there''s no way she would know the reason.


    Then Javier also told us that his master is the founder of this kingdom, Albert''s ancestor, Rama. As Rama''s partner, although he didn''t do much and only watching, he witnessed how Rama sealed The Evil God''s power. Should I call him Evil Mage or Evil God? Whatever.


    And there are many other things Javier taught us after that. Well, he can''t teach me about Aura, but since his previous summoners, two of them are powerful mages, Javier can at least teach us about how to improve our magic. I need to inform the others after I return, so I write down everything Javier taught us.


    There''s not much I can learn from all of this since Javier didn''t know much about air element, but he knows a lot for other elements. It was also thanks to the other consciousness inside the ck slime as well. Although they are not as powerful as the powerful mages who summoned Javier, I still learned a lot.

 Chapter 199 - Javier Disappears And Victoria Returns

    "Any other question? I don''t want to take much of Victoria''s time anymore."


    Javier asked if we have other questions. He taught us about improving magic using the method that his first master and the founder of Tatrama used in the past. I think the others will dly try those stuffs after I told them. Wait, I can just tell Sonia to tell them so they can improve faster rather than having them wait for me.


    But for now, it''s time to ask Javier some questions.


    "Tell me everything you know about summoning element." I asked.


    "Summoning element. What do you want to know?"


    "Which part of everything you don''t know?"


    "If you give me the freedom to tell you whatever I want, I might not give you the crucial information since I have to summarize everything. Just tell me what you want to know."


    I guess he''s right. If I asked him to tell me everything, he might end up telling me what I already know.


    "Is having my summon kill enemies the only way for us summoners to improve our level? Or as Victoria says, gaining Experience?"


    "Yes. That''s all I know. Even my first master, the strongest mage at the time, can''t do anything about it. People always say that I''m the only w that my first master had. If it was any other monster, he would have reached Master level in all of his elements." Javier said.


    "By the way, what was your first master''s name?"


    "His name was Mario. By the way, Victoria is saying something when I told her about my first master''s name. ''That''s not Spanish name! That''s Italian name!'' is what she said."


    That mean other thanmonnguage and Spanish, they have Italian as well. I don''t know what to do with this information, so let''s forget it. Mario ismon name in this world as well after all. And there''s no Italian here. Maybe.


    "Back to the summoning element. What is Pear-y Fruit?" I asked again.


    "That''s the only fruit that can makes summoner able to summon another monster. You might have already known about this, but I''ll tell you again. After eating Pear-y Fruit, each time summoner level up, they will be able to make contract with another monster. But it only works until you leveled up twice. That mean, since you have entered intermediate level, you can make contract with another monster. Then once again after you reached advanced level. But after that, you can only make contract with another monster if you ate another Pear-y fruit before you reach expert level. Pear-y Fruit is¡­ A magical fruit that shaped like a pear."


    "¡­I have a question. Is an orange called orange because it''s orange, or it''s called orange because the color is orange?" I asked.


    "nguage was invented a long time ago. Probably even before I was born. Anyway, I can only tell you what I know. Pear-y Fruit is rare in this world, but it''s quitemon in Monsters World. It''s a staple fruit for most monsters. When you enter Monsters World, you should grab some for your maid and other summoner to consume. Or you can sell it for wealth. I''m sure many people would love to pay a lot of money for it." Javier suggested me to find some Pear-y Fruit and sell them.


    "Good idea, but no thanks. Pear-y Fruit is well-known in the past, right? If we sold them publicly, then sooner orter this Evil God will notice that someone has the knowledge from the past. Our only advantage is that we have knowledge of the future and a bit of knowledge from the past. Other than that, nothing at all. If this Evil God noticed the Pear-y Fruit, no doubt that he will assign task to his cult to eliminate everything rted to Pear-y Fruit. By the way, is the Evil God a summoner?"


    "I don''t think so. During the fight with Rama, he didn''t summon any monsters. But I believe he still has the knowledge of it." Javier said.


    "That mean he has no way of entering Monsters World at the moment. But he can still teach his worshippers who are summoners to do it." Albert thought out loud.


    "I think it should be fine. The monsters in that world are generally stronger than monsters in this world. Even if they are the same species, monsters summoned from that world will be stronger. That''s why unless those summoners are powerful, I don''t think the Evil God will go with anyone to that world. He has to protect his summoners friend instead when hee to that world. I think that''s why he only attacked that world after he finished with this world." Javier exined.


    "So, the difference between summoners and tamers are basically from where they gained their monsters?" I asked.


    "That''s one of it. Tamer can tame as many monsters depend on how powerful the tamer is, while summoners needed Pear-y Fruit to be able to summon new monster. Summoned monsters are harder to raise, but when the monsters'' level raised, or when the summoner''s level raised, the increase of strength is higher than when tamer''s monsters. The biggest difference is of course the fact that summoners can open a portal to Monsters World, or wherever his summoned monsters are." Javier said.


    Doesn''t have powerful summoners meant that he won''t be able to enter Monsters World calmly. He has to go there while protecting his summoners friends. So, I guess he must be looking for summoners so he can brainwash them. Probably the easiest way is to find summoners with multiple elements whom has great potential to reach expert level, or even master level. I don''t think it''s the Archbishop. Although it seems like he trusted the Archbishop, the Archbishop doesn''t seem have summoning element from what I heard.


    Another thing to consider is another world where Victoria and Javier''s first master, Marioe from. There''s a possibility that someone from the cult is also from that world.


    Just from how Javier''s first master, Mario able to be the strongest mage in his time, and from everything that Victoria know, if the Evil God had someone like that, even if it was in the past and said person already dead, the knowledge this Evil God learned from person from another world will be dangerous. Maybe this Evil God is actually someone from that world. That would be bad.


    The knowledge of that world is far too advanced than knowledge of this world. Maybe I should ask Victoria to teach me more about what everyone in that world learned. At least just themon knowledge should be better than nothing. She should know about themon knowledge, right? I hope she won''t teach us about the bad thing in that world. Like her hobby or her hobby.


    Well, if she wants to enjoy her hobby, that''s fine as long as she doesn''t bother anyone. She has tried to spread that virus to other girls and even published novel which is quite well perceived. That is fine, but she can not use me as the model!


    After that, Javier continued answering Albert''s question. I have done finished asking since all I''m curious about has been answered. Well, most of them. So, I let Albert get his turn. Sonia seems to have some question as well.


    While they are having some Q&A session, I was there sitting while thinking on how to get even stronger. Just Sonia''s and Victoria''s advices alone doesn''t seem to be enough to learn more about my Aura ability. And the fact that I''m not really motivated must be the biggest issue. Well, can''t do anything about motivation. I''ll take care of that part slowly.


    After Albert and Sonia finished asking questions, Javier turns at me.


    "Roy, you are by far the least talented mage that have ever summoned me."


    "I don''t need you to remind me that!"


    "But with my- with Victoria''s new ability she gained from you leveling up into intermediate level, you should be able to get even stronger. Although you have muscles, you used your head better now than in your previous life. Your death must have so traumatizing for you." Javier said.


    "Yeah, yeah. Just get to the point. You''re trying to tell me about Victoria''s new ability, right?"


    "Yeah. Her new ability is¡­ Cloning. She can make as many clones as she wants, but other than the main body, all the other clones doesn''t have any intellect. You can say that they are all Blobby."


    "AWESOME! Wait! Does that mean crafting some light armor was useless?"


    "No. You still need them so your Divine Vision can improve. You can''t use magic or have someone helped you next time you encounter All-Seeing Eye."


    "Does that mean you know where to find them?" I grabbed Javier''s shoulder and shook him.


    "Yes. In Monsters World at least. I have told Victoria where to find them once you entered, and also where you can find Pear-y Fruit. You can ask her once you have entered that world. Oh, I also told her several powerful monsters which might be good for you to make a contract with. You can also ask her that."


    "Great! Thank you very much for everything! We''ll try our best to save the world!"


    After giving us some more advices, Javier''s human form turned into a blob like a normal slime. Then it turned into a female human form. Victoria must have returned.


    "Wee back!"


    "It''s nice to be back."


    There are a lot more to do, but for now, we need to get some rest. Tomorrow, I''ll have some discussion with Albert on what to do.


    Then Victoria said that she has something to discuss with Sonia, so she left me a clone of slime to turn into Blobbybed! This is awesome!


    I asked what they are going to discuss, and Victoria said that it was something that I forgot to ask Javier. It''s not important to me, but it''s necessary to inform Sonia.


    She will tell me about it if she thought I needed to know. I''ll just ask her tomorrow if everything is okay.

 Chapter 200 - Experimenting With Victorias Clones

    The day after Javier gone, we gathered together again when Albert is not busy. It''s about what I forgot to ask, but Victoria asked Javier about it.


    "So, Rama wrote that story about you, from another Aura user who can see the past?"


    "Yes. That''s what Javier told me. He made the Evil God as the hero in the first book because at the time of the publishing, stories about anti-hero protagonist won''t be able to be released. Everyone wanted to be a hero. If people started to have a dream about bing an anti-hero or viin, it will be bad for the kingdom that he just built." Victoria exined how the Evil God became a hero in Rama''s book.


    Now that I thought about it, there are too many plot holes I forgot to ask Javier! And now that he''s gone, I will never know about them! How can I be so stupid!


    "What about that Aura user who can see the past?"


    "Javier said that she and Rama went to fight the Evil God together. Then she left looking for the Evil God after his power is sealed. She told Rama that she''s going to kill the Evil God before something happened again. Looking at the present, we can tell that she failed to kill the Evil God. Maybe she never found him?"


    "And you spoke to Sonia about itst night?"


    "Yeah. Just informing her on how in the story, the author seems to know about us."


    "And Sonia forgot to ask about it to Javier? I thought I''m supposed to be the forgetful one."


    An Aura ability that lets you know about the past¡­ that''s really useful. But it''s kind of scary.


    Aura user will gain new ability from what they desired in their heart. That mean that person who can see the past truly desire to see something in the past. What is it that made her want to do that?


    Everyone want to see the past, but for that person to truly desire it from within her heart, there must be something happened. Though I won''t ever know about it. I guess I''ll forget about it.


    "But it''s good that everything that we learned are the most important parts. Now we need to discuss about the future instead of the past." Albert said.


    "Like I said, we need to find other ancient magic items. There should be something we can use against the Evil God. And he should have told some members of his cult to do that as well. To enters Dungeons and Ruins so they can find magic items for themselves. Just like how they disguising themselves as weak mages to enters dungeons." I said.


    "You mean back when you found that fis stocking?" Victoria asked.


    "Now that you mentioned it, I heard that there''s a Living Armor who wears fis stocking. That Living Armor is the one responsible in killing the Giant Smander."


    I noticed Albert is grinning at me. He must have thought of teasing me. I won''t let him have his fun.


    "I feel pretty sexy at the time. Wanna try wearing it?"


    "¡­no thanks."


    It has been a long time since the ident, so I''m quite cool with saying it. But I don''t want to wear them again. That Fis stocking, I already returned it to Sophie. Though she said that anyone can wear it if they want.


    "Basically, what we do won''t be changed. We''ll try to find anything that can be used against the cult and that Evil God. Sonia, try to contact Veronica if there are any summoners who are close with the Evil God, or the Archbishop."


    "Last time I met her was a few days ago. She said that she''s traveling to another country, so I might not be able to meet her until she says it''s clear. She will call me when she arrives." Sonia said.


    "Which country?" Albert asked.


    "I don''t know. She didn''t tell me. But she said that the cult is trying to spread their belief to the people of that country. Which probably means that that country is still safe from the cult."


    "I see. I''ll try to contact other kings and leaders of their countries and tell them about the cult. We might be able to stop the cult before they spread to the higher ups of other countries. It will be terrible if any of the kings have joined the cult." Albert said.


    I guess that''s it for the discussion about the future. Now for another important thing¡­


    "Victoria, try to make clones as much as you can."


    "You want to try it here?"


    "Yes."


    Soon, the room is filled with ck slimes. She can make this many? It''s a lot!


    "I think there are roughly a hundred of my clones. Like Javier said, they don''t have intellect, but can still follow your order like Blobby. They are group of Blobbies!"


    Blobbies? What a funny name.


    I grabbed one Blobby and try to transform it into an armor. But it''s too small and just barely able to cover my face.


    Then I had the Blobbies to gather around me and turns into the armor I used during the stampede. Not all of them gathered around me, but just about twenty of them.


    "Wait wait wait! Do that again!" Victoria suddenly said.


    "What?"


    "Do that again! But this time, say ''Transform!'' while making a pose!" Victoria said.


    "¡­fine."


    She has so many things that she wants to fulfil. Just what is up with her world?


    But I still do it anyway. It seems fun.


    So, I did it again, and dozens of Blobbies surround me.


    "TRANSFORM!"


    And made a pose with my arms spread open to left and right, and I raised my left foot as well.


    And I¡­transformed into a clown. A clown in all ck.


    "Why a clown!? Why not that armor before!? It was cooler with the armor!" Victoria asked angrily.


    "This is way funnier. Look at this belly! So fluffy! Touch it."


    Of course, the clown I transformed into is that in the form of rence. The fat clown. Using Blobbies, I got even fatter. Unfortunately, the color is all ck. What kind of clown wearing all ck? Clown should have worn something bright colored.


    Then Victoria, and even Albert, touching my huge belly.


    "Oh, this is so fluffy indeed. Wait! This is not what I want!" Victoria shouted angrily.


    "How many months is it, Ma''am?" Albert asked.


    "8 month. The due date is soon." I said jokingly.


    "Don''t y around, you two fools!" It was Marie who told us to stop.


    I guess I shouldn''t go any further. She must be jealous seeing her husband touching someone else''s belly.


    Marie is here with Lana in her arms, and n is being carried by Ian. Both few months old babies are looking at me happily.


    "Gyahaha!"


    "Au gyaha! Pleb! Ha!"


    "Wait! Did Lana just spoke her first word!? And that is not something I want a baby to say as her first word! Even more, from a royalty!"


    Did I hear it correctly? Lana just said ''Pleb'' at me andughed? I''m fine with beingughed at, but who the hell taught her that word?


    "Lana? That''s just a random word, right? You didn''t actually say something, right?" Albert looked at Lana worriedly.


    Albert and I were the only ones worrying about Lana''s first word, while the others areughing.


    "Come on, Lana! Say, Dada!" Albert said.


    "No! Say, ''You have failed me, father''." I said.


    "That''s too difficult for a baby to say!"


    "But you didn''t deny that, right?"


    While we both arguing, Lana spoke again.


    "Pleb! Ahaha! Pleb!"


    "Lana! No! You can''t say that word!" Albert shouted.


    "Pleb pleb."


    This time, the voice ising from the baby Ian carried.


    "Even n? Please say Dada or Mama like normal babies!" Albert begged


    And today is marked as the day that both babies spoke their first word. Let''s pretend that I didn''t hear anything. No babies said anything about plebian.


    "Anyway, let''s continue the experiment. Have four Blobbies spread into four corners of the room."


    After hearing my order, four Blobbies moved toward each corner of the room. I had them on standby there.


    "What are you trying to do, Roy?" Victoria asked.


    "This!"


    Then I used my summoning magic to make a portal. Since the blobbies are the clones of my own summoned monster, I hope that I will be able to open up a portal to each of them if they are separated. This way, I can move quickly to another location using portal.


    Then, as I hoped, two portals appear in the room. One is in front of me who is still wearing my clown transformation, and another is in front of the Blobby that I targeted.


    Then I quickly jumped into the portal and I appear in the location where the other portal is.


    "Is that¡­ the portal that summoners can use to travel to Monsters World?" Albert asked.


    "Yes. And by using my clones, Roy is able to make a portal to travel in this world. I guess that''s what he wanted to do." Victoria said.


    "That''s right, but I still need more experiment." I said while making portal and transported to different corner of the room.


    Then I grabbed the Blobby in that corner and try to rip it in half.


    Unlike the real ck slime which is immortal, the clone is able to take damage and got destroyed. But it was still able to endure when I tried ripping it in half. I can only do it when I put a little bit of Aura. But that mean even the clones are quite strong.


    "¡­are you nning to give a clone to us just like Sonia''s essories?" Albert said. He is sharp indeed.


    "Right. This way, I can travel to a lot of ces. But the mana consumption is quite high. I don''t think I''ll be able to do it anymore today. I''m tired. I''ll go back to my room today. See you tomorrow."


    Having been exhausted, I return to the guest''s room in the pce and slept as soon as I lie on the bed. Making a portal is good, but it was too exhausting.

 Chapter 201 - Taking Care Of Spies In The Palace

    I wake up when it''s time for dinner. Good thing that everyone in the pce are people Albert trust. They are fine seeing amoner like me entering anywhere inside the pce. Other than some ces which are restricted to men. Though I can see them with my Divine Vision.


    I entered the dining hall and the dinner is already prepared. And as usual, Mustache and Ian refused to join us in the table.


    "You''re not going to join, Mustache?" I asked Mustache.


    "No. No matter what, I''m still his majesty''s guard. And I already have my dinner." Mustache answered.


    "Don''t you have any time to cultivate or practice? Getting stronger is important, you know? Even more in this current time."


    "Don''t worry. Whenever I''m not guarding his majesty, I always used that time to practice and cultivate. As his majesty''s guard, I have to be stronger than anyone."


    "I see. Suit yourself. Anyway, you seem to have befortable with being called Mustache now." I asked.


    "Yes. Thanks to this Mustache, his highness n feel secure whenever I''m around. And I think her highness Lana feels the same way as well."


    Just as soon as Mustache spoke, the twin babies shouted something.


    "Pleb-pleb"


    "Ahaha! Pleb!"


    "¡­seem to me that they are making fun of you." I said after hearing what the babies are saying.


    "¡­doesn''t matter. I''ll keep being Mustache for a while longer."


    After chatting for a while with Mustache, I took a seat on the opposite side of Albert and eat the dishes that has been prepared while they are still warm. Well, from my experience, whether the food is warm or not, anything Ian cooked is delicious. But they are tastier when they are warm.


    "So, what will you do now?" Albert asked me after we finished our dinner while Ian and the maids cleaning up the table.


    Is it just me or that maid showing her cleavage at me on purpose?


    When she made an eye contact at me, she winked. I guess it was on purpose.


    "By the way, who''s this maid? First time I see this one." I asked.


    "Hmm? No. We haven''t hired any new maid or servant inside the pce." Albert said.


    Hearing that, I understand what''s going on. Albert also smiled at me.


    It has only been a few hours since I exhaust my mana using portal, but during that short period of time, he actually reduced the security inside the pce and make it easy for spies to enter. Then when I wake up, I will be the one to take care of them.


    Just what has been going on in the past few hours?


    Anyway, this maid is a spy. Or more like, this man is disguising himself as a female maid with fake boobs to enter the pce. I wonder where''s the real maid is.


    I looked around to see if there are any other spies before capturing this fake maid. And there are only one other spy hiding in near the window. If it''s me, I can easily capture them. Should I?


    "Albert, there are two unknown people here. Should I capture them dead? Or alive?" I asked Albert who is still calm despite telling him that there are spies.


    Seeing how calm the other was, I know that this is something they prepared already.


    "Capture them alive. Or dead if you can''t. Those spies are already here, right? They already see Lana, so I can''t let them free." Albert said.


    "Okay."


    Then I grabbed Victoria who is already there, and make clones of her.


    I transformed her cones into a whip, and swung it at the fake maid.


    The fake maid was shocked that I tied her¡­ him out of nowhere. He tried to use magic, but I kicked him toward Mustache to let him restrain this fake maid.


    It''s great using clones. I can still have other weapon, while letting some clones turned into a rope to restrain that fake maid. I can also use clones as bullets from now on! That mean I can improve my summoning level and gain Experience by shooting enemies!


    Blobby''s cloning skill is perfect for me!


    After capturing the fake maid, I quickly change my target to the one hiding near the window. There''s a hidden passage there. I don''t know how he knew about it, but that''s where he is at the moment.


    Thinking that he''s safe, he chose to stay still until I opened the hidden door to the passage easily, and grabbed him and threw him to where the fake maid is.


    So easy.


    "Just two of them." I said.


    "Thanks, Roy. Good that you''re here. By the way, the real maid is safe and she''s with Sonia at the moment." Albert said calmly.


    "Hah! So, you are indeed using me freely while I''m still here! Well, I need a reward."


    "I''ll transfer some money to your cardter." Albert said.


    Then I returned to my seat along with Victoria in her human form. Sonia also soon appear with us.


    "These two will be undergoing some questioning. I doubt they are from the cult. The cult is busy at the moment because their stampede failed. They are either from noble who are hostile to me, or spy from another kingdom." Albert said.


    "I don''t care about them. Do whatever you want with them." I said.


    "I will. It''s a good thing that we reduce the security only a few hours during the time you take a nap. They don''t have the time to send messages to their boss. Now, back to what I''m saying. What will you do now?"


    "I''ll go prepare myself to go to Monsters World and get myself a new summon. After that, I''ll go to other cities and lend our friends some Blobbies. I think this information is too important for those two spies. Are you sure it''s fine for them to hear it?" I asked while pointing my finger to the two spies who are being tied with a real rope by Mustache at the moment. After he finished tying them up, I ordered those Blobbies to disappear, and Poof! They''re gone. So simple.


    "Don''t worry about them. They can only choose to die, or join us as our ally. I''ll be the one taking care of the interrogation."


    If Albert is taking care of the interrogation, then no matter how good they are in lying, Albert will find out about it. He might just ask some yes or no questions. That way it will be easier for him to get something out of these two spies.


    Oh, right!


    "Albert, do you have any Magic Restriction Cor?" I asked.


    "Hmm? Although it was made that those things are forbidden, we actually have lots of them for the prisoners on death sentence or sentenced for life. We don''t want them to cause any trouble after all. What do you want with them?"


    "I want a some of them. They are quite useful when encountering someone with a lot of information. Though unlike you, I will have a harder time interrogating."


    Though I can''t detect lies as good as Albert, I can see other person''s heartbeat. But if they are good in lying, I won''t be able to tell if they spoke the truth or not from their heartbeat.


    "Sure. I''ll give some to you. But remember that those things are forbidden. If anyone finds out that you have them, it''s considered a crime just to owning some of those. I think you''ll be fine in Melk or Mellian since the captains of the guards are your friends, but still be careful. Just possessing those things will guarantee you to wore them during your time in prison¡­ though it will be fine for you."


    "Haha! There''s no prison that can contain me!" I said proudly.


    Then I turned my head to Ian who is quietly watching us.


    "Ian, you can go back to Cassau. And bring some Blobbies with you. I''ll try going back via portal. I wonder if distance matter in making a portal?"


    "I think it will be fine. After all, summoner can make a portal to Monsters World which is basically another world. I don''t think distance matter." It was Victoria who answered.


    "Ian, you can go back tomorrow since it''s already dark. And since we''re in no hurry, you can take your time flying. Just contact Sonia once you''re there."


    Then I threw a Blobby at him which transformed into a wristband on Ian''s arm.


    "A wristband?" Ian asked.


    "Yes. Although they don''t have intellect, they are still following my orders. I make it so that any Blobbies I give out will protect the people I give them to. Now you will have protection against physical attacks. If they ever get destroyed, contact me again so I can give you another one. Oh, you can think of them as a piece of essory that you can wear and take off whenever you want."


    "They are pretty useful. I''ll take care of this one well." Ian said with a smile on his face.


    If I give them out to everyone, I will still have enough for me alone in case Victoria is not with me. Just turning them into an armor need dozens of Blobbies.


    I hope like Victoria said, these Blobbies allow me to make portal no matter how far the distance is.

 Chapter 202 - Learning About Advanced Technologies

    The next day after I captured the two spies, we send Ian off as he''s returning to Cassau.


    "Roy. We''re not going back yet, so what are we doing here?" Victoria asked.


    "Learning. Albert, you free today, right?"


    "Yeah. You told me to clear my schedule for today. What are we going to do?" Albert asked.


    Then I looked at Victoria who is confused as well.


    "Victoria will teach us about technology from her world, while you will record anything useful and discuss them with researchers. Javier told us about some methods that his first master, Mario did to became the strongest mage at the time, right? And he''s supposedly came from the same world as Victoria. I hadn''t asked you before, but what do you know about anything Javier taught us? Some of them are something I don''t understand." I asked Victoria.


    "Oh! I understand what you want to do! What Javier told you is some method to improve the use of magic. Like using air to make me bigger that I have told you about by changing the properties of the air in the area. Then to make ice frozen for longer, using another element as support, those are actually something everyone from my world should have learned. They aremon knowledge to us. Well, for that Mario, I think he is talented as a mage as well. At least as good as Ang." Victoria said.


    "That mean you understand some of it, right? By the way, why didn''t you be a powerful mage in the past if you have such knowledge?"


    "Oh, I just thought that using Aura is cooler. I was also toozy to cultivate. And when I gained ability to fly, I choose to travel around the world instead of improving myself. And then I died. I regret that I didn''t put enough effort."


    ¡­she''szy and I''mzy. We''re perfect for each other.


    The biggest difference is that she knows what she''scking and that''s why she thought of escaping when fighting against the Evil God, but die anyway, while I die because of overconfidence while not knowing what I''mcking.


    Yep! I''m stupid!


    "What about the training camp? I think it''s better to talk about knowledge from my world when everyone is here. Miguel, Kron, Hill, Oleg, Wendy and even other agents can learn as well. Maybe we''ll arrange it so that not just us, even those in Melk and Mellian cane as well. It''s a training for all of us. And to make it so that everyone knows each other. Who knows if there will be a day where everyone will gather in one ce to fight?" Victoria suggested.


    "That¡­ is a good idea! Let''s do that! I have a good ce for that after you informed me about it. Though since you have portal already, it will be easier for us to meet." Albert agreed to Victoria''s suggestion.


    "Though as you can see from yesterday, I can only use portal a few times. The mana consumption is great only when opening the portal. For maintaining, closing, and when someone is entering the portal, the mana consumption is not big. But I can only use it five times max at the moment." I said.


    "Don''t worry about that. I''ll provide you with as many Mana Potions as you want."


    "That bitter drink? I often heard in my past life from my patients that those drink are much more bitter than the medicine I gave them. And I agree to that. I don''t want to drink them if possible."


    "Don''t you know? If you mix honey with them, it will be easier to drink. Honey doesn''t change the effect of Mana Potions, so many experienced hunters mixed honey with Mana Potions. That''s also what I did in the past before my father passed away and I became the king. I would go on a quest, and drunk Mana Potions like water."


    "Why doesn''t anyone know about that!? That''s an important information! In my past life, there are no healer in the vige where I opened my clinic. When they are wounded, they woulde to me. They would say that they rather die than drinking Mana Potions! If this information spread, we can save more lives!" I said.


    "¡­I''ll get someone to spread the rumor. The one who taught me this was my senior hunter. He died about two years ago. I guess he died before telling everyone about it."


    Too many people died in my clinic because they chose to not drink Mana Potions even though they have it. Vigers would knock on the door to my clinic and brought hunters who are on a quest nearby. But it was toote when they were brought to my clinic. Before they died, they would say something like how they regretted that they didn''t drunk the Mana Potions. That''s how I had a lot of Mana Potions in my past life.


    "Then we have taken care of how we will go there. It''s a private ind owned by me, the king. The ind is safe from monsters, but there are several inds nearby with a lot of monsters. We can go there during the camp." Albert said.


    "That mean I have to go there and left some Blobbies in that ind, and I have to go to Mellian and Melk to get other guys as well. What a pain."


    In the end, I still have too many things to do even during this break. As long as it makes us stronger, it''s fine.


    "Then about knowledge of technology from my world¡­" Victoria about to continue when Albert stopped her.


    "Wait! If it''s about research, let''s talk with Marie. She''s a genius researcher. She''s on hiatus from researching because of our children. But she will return to do research soon. How about it, Marie?" Albert asked his wife who is taking care of the twins while sitting on the sofa.


    "Sure. I''m also curious about these so-called advanced technologies from Victoria''s world." Marie said.


    I never know about Marie being a researcher. Her burden because of delivering only the crown prince at that time was so huge that she became mentally unstable. Good thing she is fine now. And that mean we also have a researcher as well.


    "You seem enthusiast in returning to yourb. Is something the matter?" Albert asked Marie.


    "Yes. After the twins were born, I thought that I don''t have to go back to my research since my children is more important than any research. But after hearing more and more about the cult, and how dangerous the future is, I don''t want to let my children to grow to fight in the war. But I don''t have the power to defeat the cult. All I have is my knowledge and my research. Then hearing about how advanced the technologies from Victoria''s world, I thought that this might be the way for me to join. I also hope to reduce the burdens on Albert''s shoulder." Marie said.


    "You always think of me? Oh, Marie¡­"


    "Albert¡­"


    The two husband and wife hugging each other with their kids in the middle.


    "Excuse me, but I''m curious about Victoria''s world. Can you stop hugging and continue on the pressing matter?" Sonia said.


    What the hell is this subus saying? For someone who wanted to be loved so much, she sure hates to see other people being happy.


    There''s only one thing to show Sonia.


    "Victoria!" I shouted Victoria''s name.


    Surprised being called suddenly, she looked at me and realize my intention. Then she opens her arms and shouting my name as well.


    "Roy!"


    We ran to each other and when we get close, Victoria jumped at me. I hugged her with all my might.


    Although we did it just to piss off the subus ghost, still, bonus point on romance for me. I don''t think I ever hugged anyone this tight before. Though I can do it with Victoria since she can endure it.


    "Why are you two also hugging!? You''re doing it just to make fun of me, right!?" Sonia shouted.


    ""You are correct!""


    Both Victoria and I answered together.


    "Fuck you!"


    She doesn''t like it when she''s the only one who is not hugging anyone. Well, she''s a ghost after all.


    Oh, wait! Mustache is also here! He must be jealous as well.


    "Mustache!" I released Victoria from my arms and charged at Mustache.


    "Wait, no! No No No! I''m not hugging any men!" Mustache stopped me from hugging him. But there''s another person who can hug him.


    "Miguel!" It was Victoria trying to hug him.


    Am I fine with my girl hugging other men? The answer is no. But it''s Victoria I''m talking about.


    Mustache epted Victoria''s hug, but just before Victoria hugged him, she turned her form and changed to look like¡­ Hill. It was toote for him to dodge it.


    "No! Revert back to your female form! Please!"


    "Haha! Pleb!" Lana shouted happily.


    She keeps saying pleb again and again. And I think I saw Soniast night trying to teach her to say ''Bad influence''. There''s no way a baby can say those words! More importantly, why is she trying to teach a baby those words? She''s not going to say that while pointing at me, right?


    After this short moment of fun, we return back to the topic. We spend the rest of the day listening to technologies from Victoria''s world, and many questions from Marie.


    ¡­I don''t understand most of them.

 Chapter 203 - Return To Cassau Using Portal

    Both Albert and I, left Marie and Victoria talking about technologies from Victoria''s world. One reason for that is because I don''t quite understand what they''re saying. Another reason is because Victoria would sometime say something like how a certain technology can makes it easier for her to enjoy her hobbies. She''s still trying to rope more people in with her hobbies. So, I just talked with Albert while those two are busy.


    "So, when should I start to put some Blobbies for the all around the ce? Let''s see¡­ the private ind for the training camps, Melk, Mellian, and obviously Cassau. Then the capital, I already gave you, Marie, and Mustache each one Blobby."


    "Thanks for that. Can these Blobbies turned into anything I want just like Victoria?" Albert asked me about the Blobbies.


    "Theyck intellect but can still follow order. I already gave them order to obey the people they are attached to, and also to protect them from physical attack. You can test if Your Blobby can turn into a key in case you got captured by enemy. As for the protection, let''s find out if it''s working by punching you." I said as I pulled my back my fist so I can throw a punch at Albert.


    "Wait, no! Anyone but you!"


    Albert tried to stop me, but he failed. My fist is getting closer and closer to his face. But the Blobby on him suddenly moved from where it was before, to Albert''s face and formed a shield to stop my punch.


    "Haa¡­ luckily, it works. What would happen if it doesn''t work, you idiot!?" Albert shouted.


    Mustache who is watching our interaction from the sideline also panicked when he saw me throw a punch at Albert. He''s a good guard.


    "If it doesn''t work, obviously your face will get hit. Bruise or ck eye is normal when you get punched in the face. Anyway, I can''t tell if it works or not. I might have unconsciously told the Blobby on you to protect your face from getting hit. Let''s have someone else to hit your face." I gave another suggestion to Albert.


    "Why does it have to be my face getting punched!? Miguel! Come here!"


    "Umm¡­ no, sir. I also don''t want to get punched for no reason." For the first time since I met him, this is the first time Mustache disobeyed Albert''s order.


    It means¡­


    "Punishment time!"


    I grabbed a wooden chair nearby, and swung it at Mustache. The Blobby with him blocked the chair, and the chair got destroyed as a result. Only leaving two of the chair''s legs on each of my hands.


    "Why did you do that!? And why did you use a chair!"


    "Punishing you for disobeying Albert, and testing the Blobby if it can protect you." I replied calmly.


    "Didn''t you just say that we can''t tell if you''re the one hitting!?" Mustache asked angrily.


    "Then I guess I''ll do it."


    Albert then grabbed a wooden leg chair from my hand and swung it at Mustache''s face. So barbaric this king is.


    And just like before, the Blobby with Mustache blocked the attack and the wooden leg chair broken in half. Albert didn''t even hold back his strength if it breaks like that.


    "¡­ Your Majesty?"


    "What is it, my loyal guard?"


    "Why did you do that!? What if it doesn''t work!?"


    "But it does works." Albert replied calmly.


    "I mean¡­ AAARGH! It''s all his fault! Because of him, Your Majesty''s mind is corrupted!"


    Mustache suddenly pointed his index finger at me. Why is it suddenly my fault?


    "I didn''t corrupt anyone. Albert already has the talent to piss people off from the beginning. I just pushed him a little." I said.


    "Your Majesty! You shouldn''t interact too much with that person! He''s a bad influence for Your Majesty, the queen, your children, and even the kingdom!" Mustache said to Albert.


    "You see, Miguel? I need a little¡­ bad thing in my life, okay?" Albert replied.


    "But it doesn''t have to be him!"


    While the three of us talking, I can hear Victoria, Sonia, and Marie shift the topic from research to us.


    "What are they doing?" Marie asked.


    "Just boys doing boy things." Sonia replied.


    "In my world, there''s a saying about boys will always be boys. They never really grow up. Only their toys getting bigger." Victoria said as she told the girls about saying from her world.


    That¡­ is pretty much urate.


    "Albert, you haven''t answered my question yet. Should I go all over the ce right away?"


    After ying around for a while, I asked again.


    "Hmm¡­ Victoria can recall any of her clones, right?"


    "Yes. She did that after I experimenting with the portal. All the disappeared clones returned to her." I replied as I remembered the event before I went to take a nap yesterday.


    "Can she select which of her clones to return to her body?"


    "Hmm? Victoria?"


    I asked Victoria since I didn''t know about it.


    "I can sense where my clones are as long as I concentrated. If I want to, I can recall any clones far from me back to my body. Though I don''t think there''s a reason to do that." Victoria answered for me.


    "That is useful in case the enemy captured one of the Blobbies. My n is to mail to several location with your clones attached to the letter. It''s just in case those letters are missing or the messenger got robbed by bandits. This way we don''t need to have Roy travel all around the kingdom." Albert said.


    "That is a good idea. Now I just need to focus on getting stronger." I said.


    "Yeah. That''s why you don''t have to worry about anything else. I want the training camp to begin at least after you make a contract with a new monster. With your new monster, we can also hope for a good battle experience by sparring."


    "I see. I''ll try to scout the Monsters World first for a few days. I will start looking for a monster to make a contract with as soon as I can walk ten steps using Air Steps. Ten steps should be enough to escape to safety."


    Just six more steps and I can reach ten steps.


    Wait! I just think of that technique as a way for me to walk or run mid-air! I shouldn''t have done that!


    Four steps should already be enough already. As long as I don''t step on them as if I''m running. But more like leaping or jumping. That way, four steps should allow me to get further.


    But improving the numbers is a good idea as well. I think I''ll practice until I can take one or two more steps. This technique needs a more skilled air mage to do it. I need to reach Intermediate level faster.


    I''ll practice for another week or two and then scout the Monsters World before I look for a monster. I think that should be enough to gain another step in my Air Steps.


    The next morning after breakfast, Sonia joins our table to inform us that Ian has reached home.


    "He just informed me about it. He said he has returnedst night, but he doesn''t want to bother you to return right away. So, he told me to inform you after breakfast." Sonia said.


    "That''s okay. Tell him that I''ll open up a portal soon. Once he''s ready, inform me right away. Victoria, can you sense your clone in Cassau?"


    I asked Victoria as Sonia disappear to Cassau.


    "Yes. I can feel the presence of my clone in that direction."


    Victoria pointed her finger to where Cassau is located.


    If she can sense her clone, with our connection as master and contracted monster, I can also sense Blobby''s location. I''ll try to use that as a guide to where I should open my portal from now on.


    "They are ready." Sonia returns and informed me right away.


    "Wait! I''lle with you. Though I need you to return me before dinner since Albert will be lonely." Marie suddenly said she wanted to join us. Well, I don''t mind though.


    "Marie! Why would you follow a guy like him!?"


    "And why are you making it as if she''s having an affair with me!?" I shouted back at Albert.


    "Well, if I know more about portal, I might get something from it for my research. It''s okay, right? I''ll be back before dinner after all." Marie said.


    After receiving permission from Albert, Marie will being with us. Along with the twins.


    After everyone is ready, I opened up a portal by concentrating on the presence of Blobby in Cassau. And it works!


    The portal opened and we can see Ian, Ruby, and the others as well. Seems like they wanted to see if they can travel to the capital as much as they want from now on. Especially Shirley.


    "Alright, Albert. We''ll be going now. Since we know how useful the Blobbies are, I want you to buy a property in the capital so I cane back here any time I want."


    "What about the pce?"


    "You want people to see an unknownmoner going in and out the pce however he wants?"


    "I''ll get you a house as soon as possible. How about Ian''s house?" Albert asked Ian who is on the other side of the portal who is receiving Marie and her babies who just entered the portal.


    "I''m fine with that. It''s not a big house though." Ian answered.


    "That''s fine. Here, another Blobby for you to put in Ian''s ce." I threw a Blobby at Albert and entered the portal.


    And to not waste anymore mana, I closed the portal immediately even though Albert wanted to say something. Well, that doesn''t matter.


    After returning, I informed Ka and the others what I learned from Javier. Then in the evening before dinner, I returned Marie and n to the pce. I think she wille here more often since I can use portal.


    Now for the next schedule, I will go find another monster to contract. I wonder what kind of monster will it be? I hope it''s a powerful one I canmunicate with.

 Chapter 204 - Entering Monsters World

    Two weeks has passed since I returned from the capital. I think I''m ready to scout the Monsters World now.


    I practiced a lot and I managed to have more steps for my Air Steps. Just like I thought, being able to take several steps for running and leaping are different. Now I can take seven steps mid-air, and when I leaped forward, I can roughly reach 1 km in distance. Much better than if I''m running.


    My portal is very useful. I can go back and forth to the capital easily. Some Blobbies Albert sent has arrived to their destination, and I have greeted those in Melk and Mellian. As for other cities, I don''t know anyone there.


    And when I travelled to Melk with portal, Ms. Wendy was just preparing to call Sonia to inform us about our graduation.


    "Roy. You, Ka, and Ang can visit the school anytime you want to receive your graduation degree. It took a while but you can finally graduate." Ms. Wendy said.


    "What about Ms. Wendy? Are you going to continue being a teacher?"


    I asked Ms. Wendy if she will stay as a teacher or not. With her strength and knowledge, she can choose any job she wants. Though I think she will stay as the kingdom''s secret agent while performing any kind of job.


    "I will continue my teaching job. Although it won''t probably be in Melk. I have told Candy about this before that I wanted to be a teacher after everything is over. Though I doubt it will be over soon. So, I wanted to be a spy who y as a teacher. Or maybe professor if I''m to be assigned to teach higher education. That''s why I''m curious about what Javier taught you. I''ll wait patiently for the training camp so quickly get a monster already."


    That''s what Ms. Wendy told me when I visited her.


    As for Oleg''s case:


    "When the training camp is ready, contact me right away. I''ll bring several people I trust with me. And can I bring my wife as well?"


    "Sure. The queen enjoys talking with other girls. And as a fellow wife, they have something inmon." I replied.


    "My wife is one month pregnant. She''s quite afraid of what to expect during pregnancy. Having other mothers with her would be great. She doesn''t have much friends in Melk."


    "Really? Congrats on being a father!" I congratted Oleg.


    "Thanks. Is it okay to bring so many people?" Oleg asked.


    "Don''t worry. Albert will be there to tell everyone to keep the training camp as secret. Those who lie will be killed. As for me, I''ll try to see if there are anyone with HGB in their mouth. No traitor will survive the training camp."


    "¡­I''m having second thought of getting my wife there hearing you say killing so lightly."


    That''s what happened when I visited Oleg.


    As for Hill and Kron who is visiting Mellian:


    "Training camp!? I''ll join!" Kron agreed to join right away.


    "This portal is really useful. I''ll be sure to treat this Blobby as our child. You are free to visit whenever you want."


    I got a chill hearing that from Hill.


    "I''ll be sure to visit more often!" That''s what Victoria said.


    As for me, "I won''te back! We will only contact each other using Sonia! I''ll only open the portal when it''s important!"


    And then I left quickly.


    Then today, it''s finally the day when I will scout the Monsters World for a while. I''ll just go there for a few hours, then go back. I have no n in looking for a monster to make a contract with today.


    I have sent Victoria yesterday to find a safe location for me to enter. She told me to open up a portal 12 hour after I sent her. There might be difference in time between the two worlds, is what she said.


    It will be the time soon for me to open the portal. I made sure that I filled my belly before I go and take some supply. I also left a Blobby in my room so I can open a portal there where I put all my belonging.


    When summoners open up a portal to Monsters World, the location the portal will appear is random. Unless their contracted monster is there. If the contracted monster is in Monsters World, summoners can make a portal to where their monster is located. And it''s safer that way as well.


    But when summoners open up a portal from that world to this world, they will automatically open a portal right to where they were before entered the portal. Unless they also have a contracted monster in this world as well.


    I should be able to do it as long as Victoria can sense a connection to Blobby in my room. And even now, if I''m focusing my connection with Victoria, I can sense her even when she''s in different world. And for thest few hours, she doesn''t move from her spot. She must be in a safe ce then.


    Finally, it''s time. Since everyone is curious about the Monsters World and want to take a peek, I will open the portal in the first floor instead of my own room.


    Everyone already waiting for me to open a portal. Now that I''m ready,plete with my new armguards and shin guards, I opened a portal in front of everyone.


    The oval shaped portal appears in front of me. I can alter how big the portal will be, but since it consumes more mana and I will be the only one entering it, the portal is just big enough for me alone to enter.


    When everyone saw the Monsters World, everyone is silent because there''s one thinge to mind after seeing what''s in front of us. And Ang is the one who breaks the silence.


    "That¡­ is that a dragon''s corpse?"


    "Yes. Though it''s just a skeleton now."


    The one who answered is Victoria from the other side.


    "What the hell happened?" This time I''m the one asking Victoria.


    "Who knows? But seeing skeleton of dragon or any other powerful monsters aremon in this world. I choose this location because when we''re near the proximity of this skeleton, no weak monsters dare to go nearby, which makes this ce safe." Victoria replied.


    Well, I can''t just stand there and watch. I have to go before I''m out of mana. I need to save it so I can return home. Although I am bringing some Mana Potions, I can''t waste my mana just to watch a skeleton of a dragon.


    "Well then, I''ll be going. Be back in few hours." I entered the portal and as soon as I''m in the Monsters World, I closed the portal.


    I didn''t notice it before because the appearance of the dragon''s skeleton is too shocking, but it seems that it''s night at the moment in Monsters World. Just like Victoria said.


    "Victoria, where should we go now?" I asked.


    "Wherever you want. We''re just here to experience what this world is like, right? Just go anywhere you want and fight the monsters here."


    "Then can you show me the way to where we could find Pear-y Fruit? Javier told you where it''s located, right?"


    "I know where to go. Although Javier told me about where I could find them, I used to explore this area before you summoned me. I didn''t understand why I would go exploring, but now after hearing from Javier I understand that it was everyone''s idea to go exploring. And by everyone, I mean Javier, me, and other consciousness inside Blobby."


    "How many consciousness were there?" I asked.


    "I don''t know. I forget."


    "I see. Don''t mind it."


    "Of course I mind! Don''t you see that we are the perfect partner? A slime who loss her memory and a man wit terrible memory. We''re such a perfect couple!" Victoria said proudly.


    "And you''re proud of that!?"


    Even when she''s the closest person to me, I still have difficulty understanding her.


    "Roy, the location of where we can find the Pear-y Fruit is over there. It''s quite far, so I suggest you to use your Air Steps." Victoria pointed her finger to where I can find the fruits, and then she transformed into a sword.


    It''s not that I want to use sword, but sword is the most all-rounder weapon I can use. And I expect that we will encounter a lot of monsters here, so it''s a preparation for battle.


    "I won''t use Air Steps for now. I''ll save my mana in case of emergency. For now, I can use my Divine Vision to see and evade monsters."


    "Alright. Whatever you want."


    I run to the direction Victoria pointed. Even with my Divine Vision, I can''t see the Pear-y Fruits yet. They must be quite far. Just like Victoria said.


    But I still choose to run onnd while evading monsters. Safety is always number one!


    If they are monsters I see for the first time, I would change direction and evade them. But if they are monsters like wolves or goblins, I can defeat them easily. Although they are stronger than the same monsters in my world, they are still considered weak here.


    I hope I can at least grab one fruit for Lina. Then I''ll help her looking for her second monster once she leveled up.

 Chapter 205 - Found Pear-y Fruits

    "Hey, Victoria?"


    "What is it?"


    "What about animals? Are there any animal in this Monsters World? Like chicken, cow, sheep, any animals that can be considered as livestock. What about their existence in this world?" I asked.


    "Hmm? I don''t think I ever see any of them. All I ever saw in this world is monsters. Chicken monsters, cow monsters, everything is monsters."


    "Even earthworm?"


    "Earthworm? Why ask?"


    "Because one is chasing after us from underground! And I see three others following that one!"


    "Run faster! Earthworms in this world are no joke! Some of them even have evolved and able to swallow a small ind!" Victoria panicked.


    This is the first time I see her panicked this much. I guess Earthworm are that dangerous. To think that such a small creature in human world turned into ind-eating monster¡­ this world is more dangerous than what I have heard from Victoria.


    "I think we''ll be fine. I''m faster than them even onnd." I said as I tried to calm her down.


    "I just don''t want to see them! They look disgusting!"


    I looked again at the creatures that following me from underground. Victoria is right. They are disgusting. But in my previous life, I see many other disgusting things than Earthworms. I was a surgeon back then and what I see after cutting someone''s stomach open¡­ I don''t want to talk about that. Parasites are so damn scary¡­


    I hope I won''t encounter simr case in this life.


    "Oh? Those Earthworms are fighting each other now. I guess we''re safe now."


    Using my Divine Vision, I see the three Earthworms are attacking each other. The one that has been chasing me this far seem to lost interest in me and fighting the other two Earthworms.


    And while the Earthworms are fighting, we are already far away from them that my Divine Vision can''t reach them anymore.


    Then as we continued marching toward the location where I can find Pear-y Fruit, someone appears next to us.


    "H amigos!" It was Sonia who appears as she greeted us just like Javier.


    "H." Victoria replied Sonia''s greeting.


    "H indeed. You can freelye and go between two worlds now?"


    "Yes. But it seems that it took some time for me to arrive here although I left as soon as the portal is closed. How long have you guys been here?"


    "About an hour or so."


    I told Sonia to try follow us into the Monsters World. Initially, I asked her toe qith Victoria who will get there first, but Victoria says no. She said that there might be monsters that can kill ghosts.


    So, I told Sonia to forget that idea. But Sonia insisted ining as well since she will be useful formunication with everyone in human world. Since she refused to be left behind, I told her toe after I entered that world. I should be able to protect Sonia in some way.


    But for monsters to have the ability to kill ghosts¡­ are they also ghosts? That seems to be the most likely answer. Can theymunicate with humans? Are they used to be humans? I won''t know the answer unless I met them in person.


    And if they can attack, that means there should be a way for Sonia to fight, right?


    "So, what did I miss?" Sonia asked.


    "A great battle between three giant Earthworms." I replied.


    "¡­I don''t think I want to see that."


    "We''re going to get some Pear-y Fruit for Lina. I never thought that it was so far." Victoria said.


    Anyway, I continued running to our destination while having a chat. Of course I am still evading ces with powerful monsters or if there are too many of them.


    "Victoria, in that ce where Pear-y Fruit is located, won''t there be a lot of monsters? Since I heard that some monsters ate them like regr fruit." I asked Victoria.


    "Yes. There should be many kinds of monsters there since that ce has a lot of Pear-y Fruits. What about it?" Victoria said.


    "What about it? What do you mean what about it!? If I''m going there, won''t I just be their target!?"


    "Don''t worry about it. It has been a long time since thest human entered this world. I think for those monsters, they will only think of you as a new kind of monster. Most of the young monsters shouldn''t know about the existence called human."


    Oh, right. Since they don''t know what a human is, they would think that I''m just another monster looking for the fruit¡­


    "But I will still be attacked, right!? There are even monsters who fighting the same species as they are!"


    "Just prepare for battle. It''s not like you are not ready for it right? By the way, is today''s goal is to harvest some Pear-y Fruits?" Victoria changed the topic.


    "Sigh¡­ that''s right. After getting some Pear-y Fruits, we''ll return. After resting for a few days, we''ll go back to this world and that time, we''ll be looking for another monster to make a contract with. Do you have any good monsters? One that have intellect and capable of ournguage."


    Since Javier has told Victoria about some useful monsters to make a contract with, we can just go look for them instead of exploring to unknown area. It''s faster that way.


    "Yeah. Javier told me about many kinds of monsters that you should make a contract with." Victoria said.


    "Good. Tell me about thatter. It looks like we''ll arrive soon."


    I can see that there are many Pear-y Fruits hanging on the trees ahead of us, but they are being protected by monkey-like monsters.


    Once we get to a good ce I think is safe, I stopped. The three of us are looking at the monkey monsters protecting the Pear-y Fruits.


    The monkeys are less than a meter tall, with their boss seem to be around 120 cm tall. They have brown fur all around their bodies, a pair of arms which are longer than their legs, and a tail as long as their arm with ck color at the tip of their tails.


    "Victoria?"


    "They are called Long-Tailed Monkey. Or just monkey for short. Although they prefer fruits, they are omnivore and extremely territorial. I don''t think we can avoid battle." Victoria exined.


    "¡­ and you led me to their territory?"


    "The only ce that I know where we can find Pear-y Fruits is here, alright? I''m immortal so I never care about how dangerous this ce is."


    "¡­there are too many of them. And each one of them is very strong. If I get surrounded, it will be over. Let''s find an opportunity to steal at least two fruits. One is for Lina, and the other if we can find a solution to grow that fruit in our world. It will be great if I can grab a lot more of them."


    I see those monkeys easily lift their own body with just one hand while swinging on the branch. They could even lift their body weight with their tails. And they are quite fast.


    I need to find a route where there are less monkeys and grab as many fruits as possible, then open a portal to return right away.


    "Well, good luck, Roy. Although I''ll be going home first, the one to arrive first might be you. Bye-bye."


    And Sonia left us here as she returns home alone. Did she forget that I can just open a portal for her to go home right away instead of being dyed when she teleports between two worlds? I haven''t used much magic since I arrive, so I should be able to create a portal two or three more times.


    Let''s forget about Sonia for now and just get those fruits.


    "So, any n?"


    "Run as fast as possible, grab some fruits, then escape to the sky. I''ll try to open up a portal mid-air."


    Just a simple n from a simple man. Simple man who can easily leap to the sky,


    When I saw the opportunity arrive, I quicklymence my n.


    When I entered their territory, only the closest monkey noticed me. Then I jumped from branch to branch like those monkeys, and that previous monkey already shouted a warning to its allies. Everyone now has noticed a trespasser entering their territory.


    Good thing it''s still night here. Most of the monkey are still asleep. But they woke up because of the warning and now all of them are chasing me. By the time their leader appears, I already grabbed five fruits.


    And now with the leader''s appearance, it''s time to escape. Using the tree trunk as a step, I jumped to the sky. Then I leaped further with my Air Steps, but I''m still inside their territory. Then I jumped higher for the second Air Step, and then the third as well. Now I''m too far for those monkeys to reach.


    As I fall down from the sky, I opened up a portal right below me back to my home in Cassau. And I seeded transferred back to my world as I crashed to the floor and destroyed it.


    "¡­wee back, Roy. What happened?" It was Ka asking.


    "Just fifty meters free fall to escape from monkeys."


    "Hmm?"


    Of course she would be confused with that exnation.


    Then everyone gathered because of the loud noise from the floor being crashed and asked me about my scouting.


    "Lina, here. That''s the Pear-y Fruit I told you about. Eat it right away and soon, after I get my second monster and your level has increased, I''ll take you to that world so you can get another monster."


    I give one of the fruits I got to Lina and she smiled happily with the gift she received.


    "Thank you, Master! When that timees, please take care of me!"


    "I will."


    I looked outside and see the sun is still up. But I''m already tired, so I left the exining to Victoria as I go to sleep in my room.

 Chapter 206 - Which Monster Should I Get?

    "You''re going back there already?" Ka asked.


    "Yes. From my previous experience there, I can open up a portal mid-air and entered it. It''s good for escaping. But I don''t want to destroy our house, so I''ll go there from another ce."


    It has been two days since I returned back from Monsters World. I don''t need to have Victoria to find me a safe location again since back then, she created a clone of herself and left it near the dragon''s skeleton. I''ll be going there again until I find a better location.


    I wanted to go there right away yesterday, but I need to fix the floor I destroyed first. That''s why I will enter that world from the empty ind I used to store my loots. Now no one will scold me if I destroyed the ground.


    My goal this time is to find a monster. And it might take longer in that world. Maybe days or weeks. And if possible, I would like to improve my Divine Vision by defeating more All-seeing Eye.


    "Alright then, I''m going! Ka, don''t forget to bring Sunny with you if you''re going on a hunt. I hope Lina can reach intermediate level before I return."


    Lina had eaten the Pear-y Fruit as soon as I gave them. Now just like me, she will be able to make a contract with another monster.


    As for the rest of the fruits, I gave them to Marie for research if we can cultivate them here. Though one of them was eaten by Ang because she was hungry. I''ll go grab some more if I found any.


    After saying goodbye to the others, I go to the empty ind. I already gave Sam a lot of treasures so it should be fine to not go diving for a few months.


    Only Victoria and I will go there. Sonia won''te with us since an hour dy is too long. In exchange, we left one Blobby in the house. If anyone has important message to give me, they could just destroy that Blobby. Victoria will notice that the Blobby in the house is destroyed and will inform me about it. Then I will open up a portal and return as quickly as possible. Though Sonia said that she will visit us in Monsters World from time to time. Especially during night when everyone is asleep.


    As for meal, I stored some in my room which I will grab when I''m hungry. And Lina said that she will make some meal and left them in my room once a day. I don''t have to cook my own food then.


    I finally reached the empty ind and opened up a portal directly to where the dragon''s skeleton is.


    "¡­this skeleton is as overbearing as usual. Are you sure that the one who killed this dragon is no longer here?" I asked Victoria.


    "Yes. If such monster is still here, you would have noticed it, right? Javier also said that this ce is safe."


    Well, if Javier said so, then it should be fine. Hearing it from Victoria is quite doubtful knowing that she lost her memory.


    "Are we going right away?" Victoria asked.


    "No. First, tell me what kind of monsters you and Javier thought would be good for my next monster. I want to have a clearer idea of what type of monster they are."


    "I see. I''ll tell you what Javier and I discussed. But it was just a suggestion, so if you find a better monster, you should make a contract with it."


    "I understand."


    From what Victoria said, it seems like there are several monsters that they thought would suit me. They already know that I wanted a monster with intellect, right? That means the monster they suggested should be able to understand ournguage.


    "Alright, first, since you loved to go diving, I suggested a mermaid. A sea monster with human upper half, and the lower half of a fish."


    "Hmm¡­ I don''t think so. I think that Fishman I fought is better since without lower half of a fish, it can also survive outside the water. Though I don''t know much about mermaid''s ability. Can they live outside the water?" I asked.


    "Well, since the upper half is that of human, they should be able to. But for moving onnd¡­ I heard that they have magic to transform their lower half into human legs, but I''m not quite sure."


    "Then mermaid is rejected. I think I will fight more onnd than underwater. Though I will consider mermaid for my third monster. Next!"


    It''s useless to have a mermaid monster, since all the battle I fought is onnd. Maybe if they can use magic to transform their legs like Victoria said, it would be good. Well, if I encounter them in this exploration, I will consider it.


    "Then¡­ next is minotaur. Minotaur has the lower half of a cow or a bull, the body of human, and the head of a cow or a bull."


    "The head of a bull? How''s their intellect? Are they as smart as human or as smart as a bull who will charge at everything?"


    "¡­next is-"


    "So, they''re stupid monsters and you suggested me to make a contract with them!?"


    "Well, your monster doesn''t have to be smart, right? Why do you want a smart monster anyway?"


    "It''s easier to give them order. For monster thatck intellect, giving them simple order is easy. But if they are given moreplicated order, they might not know how to do it. That''s why I want a smarter monster." I said.


    "I see¡­ then Minotaur is rejected. Next is Centaur. A monster with the human upper half, and horse lower half. You might also be able to ride them as your steed."


    "Riding a monster, huh? Tell me more."


    "Well¡­ not much that I know about them. They are extremely mobile in t area, but terrible in mountain. As for fighting, I heard that they mainly use spear as weapon."


    So, they are monster which is good for riding, huh? But only on t area. Hearing that they have a horse lower half, I can kind of understand. But to use a spear as weapon¡­


    "Since I mostly use a spear as well, our characteristic might ovep, so another no from me." I rejected centaurs.


    "That''s your reason? But yeah, I can agree. It will be weird if the centaur and the rider both use spears. And you''re also good at running after all."


    "Running is always an option for me! That''s why I have to be good at it!" I said proudly.


    "Yeah, yeah. Next is¡­ vampire. They look like human but they have a bat-like wing. They have a sharp fang and drink blood. They are quite strong. Though I never met one before."


    "¡­so, this time is a half human and half bat? You really like half human that much, huh? Half fish, half cow, half horse, now it''s half bat?"


    "Since you wanted monsters with intellect, we thought that those half human monsters would be a good idea. So, what about vampires? Although I said they have simr feature with bats, it''s only the wings." Victoria asked.


    "They seem to be interesting. I''ll consider it."


    Victoria then about to talk about fictional vampires from her world, but I stopped her. What can I gain from learning about fictional monsters? Real monsters are here.


    For now, I''m considering about vampires. They might be good monsters to make a contract with. But they drink blood, so they might ask for my blood. I''ll think about itter.


    "Thenstly, is werewolf. It''s a-"


    "Let me guess. A monster with the upper half of a human, and lower half of a wolf." I''m trying to guess what a werewolf is.


    "No! What''s with that!? That seems creepy! They are indeed looked half human, but not like that. Instead of having half body, they are closer to human like vampires, but they can transform into a wolf. If they are big enough, you might be able to ride them."


    "Really? Tell me more!"


    "Well, they have three forms. First is their human like form, but they have wolf ears on top of their head instead of human ears. Second is wolf form which is basically a wolf. Third is¡­ like a wolf but can stand and run on two legs, and instead of a paw, they have human like hands with sharp nails."


    "¡­aren''t they just human with Beastform element like Ian?"


    From the characteristic that Victoria said, there''s not much difference between werewolves and humans with Beastform element.


    "Yeah, but their human form is much stronger than average human. They are monsters after all. Javier said that in the past, he saw a battle between a wolf Beastform mage against a werewolf. The werewolf won by andslide without even transforming from their human form." Victoria said.


    Whoa! I know from Ian that Beastform mage are already strong since they need a body which capable of handling their beast form. But a werewolf can defeat such mage, they must be really strong.


    And their transformation might be useful. They can be my ride, or run in the wild freely while other people will think that they are just wolves. This one stole the top spot from the vampires.


    "Alright then, we''ll go look for these Werewolves. I''ll make a contract with the strongest werewolf here!" I proimed.


    So, my target has been decided. A werewolf. A powerful one that I hope can help me in many ways. This will be interesting.

 Chapter 207 - Crossing The Ocean

    "You sure about getting a werewolf?" While we were still discussing in front of the dragon skeleton, Victoria asked.


    "Yeah. They''re strong, right? Even Javier agreed. That mean their strength are quite remarkable."


    "Yes. I heard from him that even the weakest werewolf alone is enough to give trouble to an Orc Emperor. Though the Orc Emperor is not the mutated one like the one you fought." Victoria said.


    "Ah¡­ right, mutated monsters are much stronger, aren''t they? Maybe if I found one while looking for the werewolves, I should make a contract with one."


    I remember how much trouble that Orc Emperor gave me before. Although that one was mutated thanks to the cult, I can still imagine how strong normal Orc Emperors are. If the weakest werewolf able to fight Orc Emperor, what about the strongest?


    I''m also much stronger than I was back when I fought that mutated Orc Emperor. And I want a monster at least as strong as I am. A powerful Werewolf should be a good option.


    "What about Vampires? They are capable of using magic, you know?" Victoria asked.


    "Really? Then a Vampire it is!"


    Hearing that they are capable of magic, I quickly change my mind.


    "But vampires only active at night. They are nocturnal creatures who rest during the day." Victoria continued exining about vampires.


    "Then a Werewolf! Why do I want a monster that can only be active at night? I will also fight in the day, you know?" I said.


    "Nah, I''m just asking. Anyway, my first thought has always been to have you make a contract with either a Vampire or a Werewolf. Anyway, either of them has hierarchy. So, either Vampires or Werewolves have a leader in their group."


    "Can they be reasoned with? If possible, I want to negotiate with the leader of the Werewolves."


    "Negotiate to do what?"


    "To raise an army of Werewolves. We need more allies to fight against the cult." I said.


    "Well, you can only see about itter. I''ll tell you where it is, so go there quickly. I think it should take a week to go to where the Werewolves are."


    "You should have told me that sooner so we won''t waste time! Let''s go! Where are they located?"


    "That way."


    I quickly run to the location Victoria pointed. Good thing it''s not where the Monkeys'' location is. Wait, are those monkeys good enough to be contracted? Hmm¡­ I don''t think they were smart enough tomunicate with from the time I saw them. Let''s focus on the Werewolves.


    Just after an hour of running, I see something weird.


    "Hey, Victoria¡­"


    "Hmm? What is it?"


    "If we continue going straight, we will be at the sea. Don''t tell me¡­"


    "Yes. The location of where the werewolves are is across the sea."


    "¡­and to cross the sea, I need¡­"


    "A week. But with your speed, you should be able to get there in three or four days." Victoria said calmly.


    "That''s too far! Is there any ind I can rest on mid-way? Or you want to say that I should go there without a rest? That''s impossible!"


    "¡­everything is for the sake of getting a powerful monster."


    "¡­let''s try it. After that time fighting that Fishman, I think that my swimming speed is faster than my running speed. And every time we find an ind, you''ll leave a Blobby in that ind. That way, if I don''t see any other ind on the way, I can make a portal to that ind and camp there."


    After deciding what kind of monster I want to make a contract with, I don''t want to change it anymore. Werewolves seem to be great since their wolf form is big enough for me to ride. Although I might be faster than them, it''s still a good idea to ride a wolf.


    And so, after reaching the beach, I only stop for a while just to take off my clothes. They will be an obstruction if I want to swim fast.


    And then, I dived into the sea. Luckily, there are no monsters in the area where I dived in. I want to see if there are a lot of treasures in this world, including under the sea, but for now, contracting a monster is more important. I''ll go treasure hunting another time.


    I only swim close to the surface. It''s because the water pressure is lesser and in case I''m being chased by a monster, I can quickly escape to the surface. Then I''ll just run on water and find a safe ce to escape to.


    ...


    What the hell is this? I have been swimming for twelve hours straight!


    After swimming for twelve hours, of course my body would get exhausted. Especially since there are a lot of unknown monsters in this world. The worst thing is that, I see no ind in sight. There are no ces for me to rest.


    Should I go back to human world? If I do that, when I return to this world the next time, I will probably go to that dragon skeleton again.


    I can''t do that. I have decided to get stronger, and I will! It''s just¡­ I''mcking motivation.


    I thought that I would be able to safe the world just by letting Albert know about the future, but that''s not enough and I have to continue taking care of everything. I need something to motivate me.


    If I don''t do this, I''ll die. No, that''s an example of bad motivation.


    If I don''t do this, everyone die. That''s even worse motivation.


    Argh! I''m too tired now and all my thoughts turn negative in an instant! I need rest!


    Think happy thoughts! Think happy thoughts!


    Can''t do that. Too tired.


    I can only see the water below me getting shallower and shallower.


    Wait! The water is getting shallower! That mean there should be an ind nearby!


    After thinking that there might be an ind nearby, I swim even faster. Using my Divine Vision to its full strength, I can finally see an ind!


    My speed is getting faster and faster. The ind that I could see as blur even with my Divine Vision, slowly bing clearer. And my speed didn''t drop at all. In fact, I think it''s getting even faster.


    I guess this is me. I''mcking motivation, but what can really motivate me is the prize in front of me. As long as the prize is unknown, there''s no such thing as motivationing from me. I''ll do everything normally.


    Should I tell the others? They might give me more reward.


    ¡­no that''s a bad idea. They would end up abusing it. I''ll keep it to myself.


    "¡­Roy, you suddenly getting faster. Is there any ind in sight?" Victoria suddenly covered my ears and speak to me.


    "Yes. I can finally rest now."


    "¡­are you the kind of man who be extremely motivated with the prize in sight?" Victoria asked again.


    ¡­SHE KNOWS! I just found out about it, and she realizes it at once! I want to keep it a secret, but now she will tell the others!


    While I was thinking on how to answer that, a helping hand arrive at the right moment.


    "I HAVE ARRIVE! Wait, we''re swimming?" Sonia suddenly appear and get confused when she noticed I''m swimming.


    "Oh, hey Sonia! How''s it going on the other side?" I asked Sonia instead of answering Victoria''s question.


    "Oh, they''re doing fine. Today, they''re just doing some light training, and then we went to y with the kids and shopping. Jewel is your disciple so it''s alright if we used your money for her, right? Anyway, right now everyone is asleep. They are too tired from having fun today. As for tomorrow, our n is to do some quests from the guild so we can build a n faster." Sonia exined what the others did today.


    I''m so jealous! While I''m exhausting myself swimming, they are having fun! And Sonia said that my money is for Jewel, but I believe everyone is using it! It''s my money! Not theirs! They should have gotten a portion of my ie since I told Sam to share it with the others!


    Ah, whatever. As long as Victoria doesn''t tell the others about my weakness, a little sacrifice is nothing.


    "It''s okay. Jewel is still feeling reserved around us, right? I hope with that bit of money, she will open up more." I said.


    "Sonia! Tell the others quick! Roy''s weakness is that he only be motivated with the prize in sight! Other than that, he won''t be too motivated in doing anything else! Tell Albert and the others fast! To make him stronger, we have to get him motivated!" Victoria shouted.


    AAAAH! SHE SAID IT!


    And after she said it, Sonia smiled and disappear! Even though it took her a while to travel between worlds, she doesn''t mind travelling back just a few minutes after she arrive!


    But I still have another secret weapon!


    Although I be more motivated with the prize in sight, that depends on what is the prize!


    I''m rich and strong. My way of fighting is too different than anyone else. It would be difficult for even Albert to find something that will interest me.


    I thought of that as I finally arrive on the ind. Luckily, the ind is empty. I quickly transformed about eighty Blobbies and turned them into a shelter and a bed. Not caring about Victoria asking me about my motivation anymore, I went to sleep right away.


    Today is a long day.

 Chapter 208 - Planning To Negotiate

    "You really slowed down considerably when there''s no ind in sight¡­"


    "Shut up! I''m busy now!"


    Today, I woke upte because I was too tired yesterday. And after making a portal back to my room in Cassau and grabbed some meal that Lina cooked and left in my room, I continue travelling to where the werewolves should be.


    Though this time, I no longer swimming.


    Swimming, although for me it''s faster than running, it''s also exhausting. With the stronger pressure from water and my whole body is moving, I get tired easily. That''s why this time, I''m running. Doesn''t matter if my speed slowed down, I still choose to run this time.


    So, what if I didn''t reach the Werewolves'' nest in a week? Ten days? Two weeks? A month? I''ll just be patient and continue running while looking for any ind I can rest on. And each time I encounter an ind, I left a Blobby in that ind so I can make a portal to that location when I needed rest in case there is no more ind while I''m continue moving.


    And running also saves stamina. Although swimming built more muscles since I need to move my whole body, and the strength from water pressure is also building up my endurance, I prefer running this time. And running on water didn''t take much Aura. Just a little on each sole of my feet. Though I will still swim from time to time to build my strength.


    And right now, Victoria just stated that I''m slowed down because there is no prize in sight. No ind to stop at. And every time I see an ind, I would get faster.


    I''m worried now when I return back and Albert or the others will give me unreasonable request with something as an exchange. But I won''t be swayed so easily! They won''t be so easily getting something that will motivate me!


    Hmm? I see another ind. Let''s nt another Blobby on that ind. Rest for a while and then continue moving forward. With this pace, we should be able to cross the ocean in longer than seven days. But it''s fine. I still have two years of break from fighting the cult.


    Now then, I have reached the ind. And this ind is considerably bigger than other inds I passed by before. There are also monsters in this ind. And observing with my Divine Vision, there''s a dungeon in the middle of this ind!


    What to do? Should I explore the dungeon or continue to where the werewolves are? What to do?


    "Roy, what''s wrong?" Victoria asked after seeing me confused with my decision.


    "I see a dungeon in this ind. Now I''m considering if I should get a werewolf first or should I enter this dungeon. Though if I enter this dungeon, that mean I will stay in this world for much longer."


    "I don''t think it''s such a hard decision for you. Did you forget already? I have already told you that monsters and even animals in this world are stronger than in humans world. Do you think you are ready?" Victoria asked.


    "¡­you''re right. I''ll mark this ce with a Blobby so I can return at ater date. Maybe with everyone as well. For now, I''ll focus on getting a monster."


    I haven''t encountered any powerful monster in this world so far other than the Earthworms and that group of monkeys. Which is good since I don''t have to fight pointlessly. But if I could encounter any powerful monster quickly, I might get interested in contracting them. And then I can get home faster.


    Maybe I should just get home every day instead of staying here all the time? Nah, I''ll just stay here for a while longer. Good thing Victoria is here with me so I won''t get lonely. And Sonia would visit every day as well.


    ¡­but travelling everyday is boring. I guess I''ll rest for a little longer here.


    And finally, after twelve days of running, swimming, and leaping on air, I have finally crossed the ocean!


    "Finally, I have arrived!"


    "No. Not yet. The Werewolves settlement is still quite far. You took your time crossing the sea." Victoria said.


    "That''s not a sea! That''s an ocean! It''s way bigger than a sea!" Iined.


    Taking twelve day to run with my speed, that''s no longer a sea. That''s an ocean.


    And now, my running speed is almost as fast as my swimming speed. Crossing the ocean sure does improve my physical ability. Even I can finally take ten steps mid-air now.


    "So, where is the Werewolves'' nest?" I asked Victoria.


    "That way. I think there''s no point in scouting that area since Werewolves have a keen sense of smell. If you get too close to their settlement, they will notice you. Maybe their sense of smell can even reach as far as your Divine Vision is. The only thing you can do is go there directly and talk to their leader. The Werewolf King." Victoria said as she pointed their location.


    "Werewolf King? I wonder if he wants to be my contracted monster?" I asked again.


    "You want the Werewolf King as your contracted monster? Well, I can kind of guessed it, but that would be difficult. The Werewolf King is the same as any other Werewolves. It''s a title given to the strongest Werewolf. Unlike Orc that has Orc General, Wizard, and Emperor, Werewolves are all the same."


    "But just like human, they are individually different, right? I think if they can speak, the negotiation will work well." I said confidently.


    "You think it will be that easy? They are a species that loves battle the most. No matter what kind of negotiation you are offering them, battle is unavoidable." Victoria said.


    "That''s even better! You didn''t tell me that they love battle before. Now I''m almost one hundred percent sure I can get a powerful werewolf as my contracted monster!"


    "Even better?"


    "Victoria, what do you know about the state of this Monsters World?" I asked.


    "The state of this world? It''s basically everyone for themselves. Survival of the fittest."


    "Survival of the fittest, right? Is there any monster out there who will go all the way trying to conquer this world or are they fine with just staying in their home?"


    "¡­I think I understand what you''re trying to do. Most of the monsters with high intellect would make a shelter or home for themselves so they won''t go all the way to pick a fight with other species. That mean even though the Werewolves are famous for their love of battles, they don''t go out of their settlement to fight a battle against other monsters. But they will still fight against trespasser." Victoria said.


    "It''s good that you catch on quickly. What I will give them is a war. A war that will happen in my world, but in this world, it will still be a while until that wares. I''m sure a race that loves battle won''t reject this offer. Then after I contracted a Werewolf and establish an alliance with the Werewolves, Albert will do the rest for negotiation. I''ll just open up a portal for them toe and go to human world. If I make a contract with the Werewolf King, the other Werewolves should obey their king, right? At least until the king is dethroned." I exined.


    "Giving a war to a race that loves battle¡­ there is indeed a high chance that it will go smoothly. But I still think that you will end up fighting against them anyway before you negotiate."


    "Yeah, that''s a problem. Maybe I should improve my Divine Vision first? Victoria, do you know where we could find All-seeing Eyes?" I asked Victoria.


    "Javier said that their location should be in this continent as well. But it''s much further than where the Werewolves is. Maybe it would take even longer time than for you to cross the ocean."


    "Sigh¡­ I guess I''ll fight the Werewolves first. Maybe I can ask for a one on one duel against a Werewolf."


    And from what Victoria heard from Javier, it will still be awhile until I reached their location. That''s why I decided to find a safe ce first in this new ind/continent to mark with Blobby.


    So, I asked Victoria to lead me to where we could find a safe ce. Maybe another ce with dragon skeleton?


    "In that mountain, there''s a cave where Javier used to rest. I think that should be a safe ce. But if not, it should be fine since there''s only weak monsters in that area. You should be able to defeat anything in that area." Victoria pointed at a mountain in sight even without my Divine Vision.


    "Let''s go there first before continuing our journey. Having a safe ce is our priority."


    While going to the Werewolves'' settlement will took me a few days, going to the cave only took me about one hour. It is easy for me to reach there. And the cave entrance is at the wall of a cliff. It will be difficult for other monsters to enter.


    When I entered the cave, it was upied by some kind of bird monster. But I killed it with ease and feast on its meat. I''m craving for a fried chicken now.

 Chapter 209 - The Power Of Fried Chickens

    It has been three days since I arrive in thisnd. But I haven''t returned back to my world yet. Though I can still send a message back to my room when I grabbed the meal Lina cooked and told her how I wish for a fried chicken. The next day after I wrote that letter, I received a lot of fried chickens waiting in my room.


    Now I have stopped my journey because the Werewolves'' settlement is close. It''s within my sight, but I won''t get close to it yet since I need to be at full strength there in case something happened, so I took a rest.


    Victoria said that their sense of smell should be able to notice me about as far as my Divine Vision can see. That''s why after I see the settlement, I stepped back a few kilometers and rest there. Hopefully, I won''t be noticed.


    "You really think you won''t be noticed here?" Victoria asked.


    "You''re the one who told me their range of smell is! If they can sense me here, then it''s fine. And it''s not like they are the kind of race who would just stay behind in their settlement, right? They are part wolves after all, so they need to go on a hunt for food as well. I''ll be waiting here until Lina cooked a lot of fried chicken to share with the Werewolves. I just sent her a message to cook a lot of them before we departed this morning. Though I don''t know if she has prepared for it or not." I said.


    "I think it should be fine. Lina should have noticed it already. Whenever you go, Sophie would always sleep in your room. If not her, it would be Daniel and Hannah ying in your room. They would have noticed your message and gave it to Lina."


    "¡­first time I heard about it. So, my room is a yground for the kids, huh? I hope they will quickly build a park so the kids can y there instead." I said.


    It has been what? About three weeks since I came here? Maybe four weeks? I don''t know since I think I run non stop throughout the night as well. My stamina has been certainly improved a lot that it even surpassed Victoria''s expectation.


    She told me that it''s not normal for even an Aura user and an air element mage to have gained this much stamina. I don''t know since I never met any of them before, but I think I''m quite gifted in term of stamina.


    Victoria said that my speed and power is about the same as average Aura user, but my stamina is way beyond that. I think I should learn endurance battle.


    I have a lot of stamina, but if I''m mentally tired, I would exhaust my stamina faster than even below average Aura users. I got panicked so easily despite my ability to hide the expression from showing on my face. Though sometime, I''m still able to keep my head cool despite the panic in my mind and able to find a way out in difficult situation.


    If I end up really fighting against the Werewolves, should I use my stamina to my advantage? As long as I''m able to keep calm, I should be able to do it. But what if Werewolves have more stamina than me?


    Let''s stop thinking about it. If I continue thinking stuffs like that, it''s no wonder that I''m easily exhausted mentally. For now, let''s rest.


    After an hour of rest, I think Lina should have prepared a lot of fried chicken in my room. Can I seduce the Werewolves with fried chicken? Or maybe they prefer beef? I think steaks would be better, but I already told Lina to make fried chicken, so fried chicken it is.


    "Victoria, I think it''s time to move." I said.


    "You''re going to them directly?"


    "More like, they have been watching us for thest ten minutes. No wonder there are no monsters here. Seems like this ce used to be their hunting ground until there are no more preys in the vicinity. Since they are just watching, I can expect some intellect from them, right? They should be able tomunicate."


    Then I walked toward where the Werewolves are watching. There are three of them. One female, and two males. Those three, just like Victoria told me, have wolf ears on their heads. All of them are wearing clothes.


    Seriously, what did I expect? They won''t wear anything?


    Wait! Does it mean they have tailor?


    But can those things be called clothes? They are more like¡­ swimsuit that Victoria shows me before. They only covered the important part. The males are only wearing pants with their upper body bare. As for the female, it looks like the bikini that Victoria shows me. Seems like they are made from the fur of their preys.


    More importantly, as a man, I have a big question for the male Werewolves. Aren''t they itchy down there?


    I approached the three Werewolves and the three became more wary of me. And when they were about to charge at me, I raised both my hands.


    The three of them be confused, and carefully approach me. Then when we have each other in sight, I said what I always spoke to the monsters I encounter.


    "Hello! Ie in peace!"


    Will this work? Can they understand me?


    Then the three Werewolves approached me while still being hostile. Does it mean it didn''t work?


    "Who are you?" One of the male Werewolves asked.


    Thank god they understand me! I don''t know what to do if we can''tmunicate!


    "Can you take me to your leader? If you have any of course. I might have something that will interest the Werewolves race."


    Then the two male Werewolves looked at the only female Werewolf. Does it mean her status is higher than the other two? Or is she the leader?


    "You can speak to me. Whether it will be something good or not, I will decide if we can bring you to the king. Speak!"


    So overbearing! At least between the three, she''s the leader. But she''s not the king. Now, how can I convince her to bring me to the king?


    "Well, first, let me introduce myself. My name is Roy. A human and a summoner. This ck slime on my shoulder is Victoria. Nice to meet you." I bowed down my head slightly after putting down my hands.


    "Hah! There''s no need for Shelia to tell you her name!" One of the male Werewolf said.


    "You just told him her name, you big doofus!" the other Werewolf scolded the stupid one.


    Haha! They are an interesting bunch.


    "Sigh¡­ just like that idiot said, my name is Shelia. Now, what do you want from us? I''ll tell you this, we only love two things. Good food, and good fight. If you are here for neither of them, you should scram!" Shelia said.


    Good food and good fight? That''s easy.


    "Well, actually, the negotiation might involve those two things you love. So first, as a greeting, I will give you¡­ this!"


    I offered her a box filled with fried chicken. I took them out just before I approached the Werewolves.


    Seeing what I have in my hands¡­ or more like smelling it even though the box is closed, I can see the three Werewolves are already drooling.


    Then I opened the box and the Werewolves can no longer hold back their appetites.


    "These are fried chickens. Please have some. Once I meet your king, I can give you more if the negotiation seeds."


    Without any warning, Shelia grabbed the box and wolfed down the fried chicken alone and only gave the two male Werewolves two pieces each.


    They eat the fried chicken heartily and even ate the bones as well. I don''t think what''s inside the box is enough for three of them. Even I need at least two more boxes until I filled my belly. I wonder how much they eat?


    "Alright, you passed! I''ll bring you to the king as long as you give me more of these. You have more of these foods, right?" Shelia asked.


    "Don''t worry. Roye from human world where there are many more of delicacies. Fried chicken is just the tip of the iceberg." Victoria said.


    "Good! By the way, what is iceberg?" Shelia asked. Even the other Werewolves also confused.


    I guess in this climate, and from their clothes, they never see ice before. They never knew about an existence called iceberg.


    "Iceberg is some kind of frozen water floating on the sea. Don''t worry, what I meant is that there are more delicious foods in where Roye from. If the negotiation with your king is going well, at least one lucky Werewolf will have the chance to enjoy those food as long as Roy is alive." Victoria said.


    One lucky Werewolf¡­ If their aim is only for food, then they are lucky indeed.


    "Good! You said that there will be a good fight as well, right? I trust you for now, so I''ll take you to our king. Let''s go, guys!"


    I followed them to their settlement to meet their king.


    This is the power of fried chicken! Shelia trusted me right away just because a box of fried chicken!


    While following the Werewolves, I sent another message home asking Lina to cook more fried chicken.


    Everyone back home would be confused why I asked for fried chicken. I''ll tell themter after the negotiation with the Werewolf king.


    Can I conquer the Werewolves with fried chicken?

 Chapter 210 - Meeting With Werewolves

    "Follow me!" Shelia said.


    Then the three Werewolves run toward their settlement so I can finally meet their king.


    I followed them and running behind them. Seeing that I can catch up, they ran even faster. Though I didn''t increase my speed. I don''t know if I''m going to fight or not, so I''d rather keep my abilities as secrets. But Victoria warned me.


    "Roy, if you''re not catching up with them because you want to keep your speed as secret from them, don''t do that. Werewolves hate dishonest people. Once you lie to them, it will be difficult to regain their trust however many fried chickens you have." Victoria said.


    "Damn it!"


    I had no other choice but to catch up with Shelia and the others. Seeing that I can catch up, she smiled lightly and go even faster. And I continue matching my speed with them.


    The three Werewolves keep looking at me from time to time. I don''t think they are checking if I can catch up to them. They are checking if I have more fried chicken.


    "You''re quite fast! Are humans as fast as you?" Shelia slowed down and run beside me. I don''t think she has shown her full speed. Me neither, but since she''s leading the way, I''ll match her speed.


    "No. I''m just a rarity among humans. Most of them used magic to be faster, but I don''t know how fast the other humans are. I''m more¡­ physically gifted." I replied. I haven''t told her that I''m an Aura user.


    "So, each human is different, huh? Interesting. What kind of fight are you going to give us?" Shelia asked more.


    "The enemies are humans as well. And most of them are powerful mages. Our side iscking manpower. I''m actually here as a summoner trying to get a monster to make a contract with me. But if I could make some allies along the way, that would be better."


    "What''s a summoner?"


    "It means a mage who awaken to summoning element. We can summon a monster from this world to my world and help me fight against enemies. Victoria here is my first summoned monster." I patted the blob on my shoulder while we''re still running.


    "Hmm¡­ I don''t understand it. But I think I have heard about human and human world from the old grandpa. Hey, get that grandpa to meet the king as well!" Shelia ordered the two male Werewolves to get someone she called grandpa.


    How long is a Werewolf''s lifespan? If they can live for a thousand years, this grandpa might know about Aura users and about summoners. I hope that''s the case.


    Finally, we reached the Werewolves'' settlement. The two male Werewolves left Shelia and I, and they went to that grandpa. As for Shelia and I, we just walked.


    "Wee to our home!" Shelia weed me.


    This ce¡­ is just a rocky mountain area. Rather than houses, Werewolves live in caves. And not any natural cave. I can see traces of attacks on the rocky wall. They build their own caves by destroying part of the wall.


    "You all live in caves?" I asked Shelia.


    "No. We basically sleep anywhere we want. The caves are there to shelter us from the rain. And if there are not enough caves, we build another one. Well, there are two people who have their own ces. Grandpa and the King. Grandpa lives in a cave far from us, and the King lives in that building." Shelia pointed her finger at a mountain quite far from the other Werewolves, and then pointed at a big dome-shaped building in the center of the settlement.


    That cave where the grandpa lived is quite far. No wonder she asked someone to get him since she''s taking me to the king.


    As for the king''s building, it''s just one bedroom, and the rest of the building is one big room. Probably for some kind of meeting or discussion. And that ce has several big windows for others to see and hear what they''re discussing. I guess there''s not much privacy among Werewolves.


    But there''s one more giant building next to that dome shaped building. It''s a¡­ colosseum. A big oval shaped building with a huge arena in the middle and ce for audience to watch. And it''s maintained quite well. I guess that''s just show how well they use that building and shows how often that ce is used. For fighting I presume.


    I won''t ask Shelia about it since it''s not within my normal sight. I''ll ask about itter if possible. But I think my guess is correct.


    While walking to the king''s ce, everyone watching me curiously. They are wondering what kind of species I am, I guess? And what am I doing here? I guess they will listen to my conversation with the king and that grandpa. Everyone has wolf ears on their heads. And wore only the minimum. The female Werewolves wear some kind of fur bikini just like Shelia, and the male Werewolves wear fur pants which should be itchy.


    And I can see the two Werewolves who left us are already entered that building with a really old Werewolf being carried on the back of one of the Werewolves. He must be the grandpa. The grandpa is also wearing simr pants as other male Werewolves, so his muscles is easily seen. For a grandpa, he''s absurdly strong. Why does it seem like he''s gathering his strength on his hand that''s clenching a cane?


    Seems like he''s eager to fight. Fighting me? I need to be prepared.


    Then the two Werewolves and the grandpa Werewolf informed the king who was sleeping that I''ming. Probably. I don''t know what they''re talking about.


    As soon as I entered the meeting room, everyone looked at me curiously. The other Werewolves who are interested also watching us. There is no privacy here.


    I was about to greet the Werewolf King first, but suddenly, the grandpa Werewolf who had been gathering his strength on his feet, leaped at me and swung down his cane.


    "HIYAAA!"


    I''m kind of prepared about it, so I quickly grabbed Victoria and turned her into a shield, and block the grandpa''s cane.


    So damn powerful! Even the ground where I''m standing is cracked! Thanks to my Aura, I can defend it well. But my left hand which is holding Victoshield is shaking like crazy!


    "Hey, grandpa! What are you doing!? He''s my target so I won''t let you fight him first!" Shelia shouted.


    I''m her target? So, she already decided that we''ll be fighting? I really can''t avoid battle, huh?


    Finally, the grandpa stopped putting his strength on the cane and I returned Victoria back to her blob form on my shoulder since I don''t feel any more enmity targeting me.


    "Hahahah! So, you''re a human, a summoner, and an Aura user! I never thought that I would meet another Aura user in my life!" Grandpa Werewolf said.


    So, he really knows about Aura user!


    "You know about Aura?" I asked Grandpa Werewolf. I''ll call him this from now on since it''s easier to remember.


    "Of course I know! Over thest one thousand three hundred seventy-eight years of my life, I only ever be defeated once! And it''s by an Aura user around a thousand and a hundred years ago! Come on, boy! You can do what you want to do here first. I''ll be the king for today." Grandpa Werewolf said.


    "Umm¡­ Grandpa? What about me?" The Werewolf King asked.


    "It was just a title for you. I have always been the king for thest thousand years and no one is stronger than me! You are the king because you were the second strongest after me. And now, you are just the third strongest! Shelia is the second strongest! So, after I die, Shelia will be the Queen of Werewolves!"


    "So, I''m really just a figure. Whatever. It''s not like I don''t know." The Werewolf King whose name I don''t know sulked.


    "So, what do you want? You''re a summoner, so are you thinking of making a contract with me?" The grandpa Werewolf seem to know about contract as well. He''s old after all¡­


    "Yeah. I actually wanted to make a contract with the king as well, but I think I''ll ask Shelia since you''re so close to death. I know you''re dying, grandpa."


    Even though he''s a Werewolf, the organ inside his body is simr to that of human. That''s why I know he''s dying. Though there''s no one here surprised about the fact that he''s dying.


    "Hahaha! So, you knew! But that doesn''t matter. What are you going to ask us the Werewolves? It''s not just about contracting one, right?"


    "Yes. I want to ask for an alliance between the Werewolf tribe, and the kingdom I''m affiliated with. War ising in our world. And if we lose, they wille to this world. Our enemy will destroy everything. That''s why I''m hoping to create an alliance with the Werewolves."


    "Sure! Let''s do that!" Grandpa Werewolf answered so easily.


    "¡­that''s it?" I asked. And the other Werewolves don''t seem to be confused by the quick decision. Instead, they are happy that they will go on a war.


    "Under one- no. Two conditions. First is food."


    "I can take care of that. I have given Shelia and two other some samples. I can''t give you unlimited supply, but only what we have." I answered.


    "That''s fine. As long as they''re delicious, we''ll enjoy them. Then next is¡­ you have to duel against me!"

 Chapter 211 - Ill Be The Werewolf King If I Win

    "You have to duel against me!" Grandpa Werewolf said to me in a loud voice and everyone who watched the discussion heard it.


    "¡­aren''t you dying? Do you really want to die quickly?" I asked.


    Then Grandpa Werewolf pulled my head closer and spoke in a low volume so only I can hear him. Well, Victoria who''s on my shoulder can hear him as well.


    "That''s the thing. You see, we are proud Werewolves. But over the years, other Werewolves don''t have as much pride as we used to have. We love battle. That''s true in the past, and in the present as well. But it has been a long time since we have a real battle with our lives on the line. We haven''t fought for real in a long time. That''s why our feeling toward battle is no longer the same. We used to think that dying in battle is an honor, but now, we just fight for fun without having to kill anyone other than our preys." Grandpa Werewolf said.


    "Honor in death? That''s stupid. I rather like the way it is now where you don''t have to die. Don''t tell me that you asked for a duel because you wanted to die with honor?" I asked.


    "I don''t have long to live anyway. My age has long surpassed the average lifespan of a werewolf which is three hundred years. I surpassed that by four times. I have lost too many precious things in my life. That''s why I want to die with honor. If you can''t kill me, you''ll die. It will be a deathmatch. We will fight in the arena with everyone watching. Before I die, I want to show everyone the pride of Werewolves. Take it or leave it!"


    Grandpa Werewolf release me and return to his seat. For an old Werewolf, he seems so powerful.


    Let''s sort out my thought first.


    Werewolf King is decided by the strongest member of the race. And the strongest right now is Grandpa Werewolf. Even after over a thousand years, he''s still the strongest.


    Then about the Werewolf King in-name only. He''s the third strongest, but looking at his face, he should be older than the second strongest, Shelia, and took over the King title before she was born. And since he''s still holding on the title, I can guess that Shelia never fought him before. But Grandpa Werewolf and everyone seem convinced that she''s stronger than the King. Or maybe they have fought, but Shelia refused to take the title just like Grandpa Werewolf?


    No, let''s think about the deathmatch instead. What could I gain whether I win or lose?


    If I lose, I will obviously be dead. It''s a death match after all.


    If I refuse, then there will be no more discussion. And I''m no longer a guest and free for anyone to fight. After seeing how I blocked Grandpa Werewolf''s attack, all the Werewolves watching should be itching for a fight with me to see how strong I am. Is that the main reason he attacked me in the first ce? So I could have no way out?


    If so, then he''s wrong. I can make a portal and leave this ce anytime I want. But that mean I will gain Werewolves'' hostility.


    Then the only choice I have is to duel and win. Give Grandpa Werewolf the honor to die in battle. I have to think of ways to win against him. And I also don''t know how powerful a Werewolves are. I only know a bit of Grandpa Werewolf''s strength from that one sh. And I think he''s still holding back.


    Let''s stall for time. A few days should be enough.


    "Hey, since we will be fighting, If I won, doesn''t that make me the Werewolf King?" I asked. This time, of course everyone heard it.


    And everyoneughed at me when they heard my deration.


    "Hahaha!"


    "What is he talking about?"


    "There''s no way Grandpa Werewolf will lose!"


    "Right! He has been the strongest for ages!"


    I can feel how much everyone trusted this grandpa. Theyughed at how I challenged the grandpa, and no one denied that I can''t be the Werewolf King.


    "HAHAHA! What are you talking about!? There''s only one rule we obey. The strongest one is the king! I have always been the king for centuries. Since there''s no one that could be a challenge to me, I delegated Red to be the king in-name. He is the smartest among us so no one denied my decision. As for you, like I said. Only the strongest can be the king! So, of course if you can defeat me, you will be the Werewolf King! Is there anyone here who disagree with me!?" Grandpa Werewolf asked all the Werewolves watching.


    """AWOOOOOO!!"""


    And everyone answered by howling. I guess I will be the Werewolf King if I win. Can''t they just say yes or no instead of howling? They are so loud.


    "Then if I win, Shelia, you will agree to be my contracted monster, right?" This time, I asked Shelia.


    "I will only obey the strongest! I''ll even be your ve if you win against Grandpa!" She said.


    "Umm¡­ no. I just want you to be my¡­ what is it? Friend? Partner? Basically, I will only have you fight by my side as long as either of us are still alive." I said. Although a ve is a tempting offer, I want a partner who will fight by my side.


    "¡­"


    Suddenly, everyone turned quiet. What''s wrong? Did I say something wrong?


    "Did you just ask me to be with you until death do us part?" Shelia asked with a blush on her face.


    Wait, what!? How did it end up that way!? I''m asking her to be my partner¡­ IT''S TOTALLY MY FAULT!


    "Umm¡­ no. I mean to say that you will be my contracted monster. That''s what I said! Don''t misunderstand!"


    But no one seem to hear me. The female Werewolves are all squealing thinking that I just confessed to Shelia. How did this happen?


    "¡­congrats, Roy. Another girl fell for your trap." Victoria said.


    "Shut up! Well, it''s not like I hate her. But does it always this easy to get girlfriends?"


    "Your love life in your second life is in Easy mode. Other than that, everything is in Hell mode." Victoria said.


    "I don''t understand what you said. For now, let''s continue with the discussion. I haven''t finished talking yet."


    I waited until everyone calmed down and about to speak when Grandpa Werewolf interrupt me.


    "Alright. If you win, not only you will be the Werewolf King. You can also have Shelia as your mate. And not just her. You can also ask other Werewolves to be your mate. It''s your privilege as the king."


    "¡­I just want-"-


    "It''s okay. I understand. Shelia is a good girl. I''m worried that she won''t find any partner since she doesn''t seem to be interested in any men among our tribe. She will only obey the strong, but I''m the only one here stronger than her. It''s good that you take interest in her. But you will have to fight me first!"


    ""AWOOOO!!!""


    ¡­seems like it''s impossible to fix the misunderstanding. I can tell Sheliater that I don''t mean it like this. For now, it''s about the duel.


    "Well, that''s that. So, I want to make the duel even better. How about we have opening match before our duel? I''ll bring my friends over so we can watch other battle before the main match, our deathmatch. Let''s say¡­ two battles! You will send two Werewolves and I will send two humans. They each will fight one on one before our match. That way, you can learn about mages."


    And I can learn about what Werewolves can do before my fight. Though I won''t say it.


    Since Grandpa Werewolf said that they haven''t experienced a fight with their lives on the line, I can guess that when they duel, it''s not a battle to the death like what I will do with the grandpa.


    This way, I can let two people gain experience in battle as well. Who should I ask to fight?


    "Opening fights you say? That''s interesting. How soon can you gather your fighters?" Grandpa asked.


    "Well, probably two days. We''ll return here in three days. You should prepare your fighters as well."


    "Good! I''ll be waiting!"


    Sigh¡­ I guess the negotiation is going well. I just need to have a deathmatch.


    Wait, that''s the most important part! How can I win against someone physically stronger than me with a millennium of experience?


    I think I''ll cultivate my air element before going back here. I hope I can improve my magic even by the slightest amount.


    I opened a portal right to my room and all the Werewolves suddenly stopped and looked inside the portal. It''s not the portal which interest them. It''s the fried chickens inside the portal.


    "Let''s say that these are friendly gifts from me. Share it with everyone. I think my maid cooked enough for the whole tribe."


    I take out all the fried chicken and put them in the center of the room. Everyone is drooling from the smell. And the three Werewolves who have tasted them is doing their best to hold back their appetite and jumped on the foods.


    Then I gave Grandpa Werewolf a Blobby to put it somewhere I can transfer to next time Ie here.


    "Then¡­ see you in three days."


    I said my farewell and entered the portal. As soon as I''m in my room, I closed the portal.


    "Roy, who are you trying to bring?" Victoria asked.


    "Sonia!"


    Instead of answering, I called Sonia toe. She''s in the house so she should hear my voice.


    "What is it?"


    "Tell Albert that I have something important to discuss. Ask him if he''s free so I can open up a portal to the pce. I''ll ask everyone to go there as well."


    "Okay." Then Sonia disappear.


    "You''re going to tell everyone that you get a new girlfriend?" Victoria asked.


    "That''s not it! I want to discuss who should we send to fight. And also, ask everyone to go there to watch the fight as well as getting along with the Werewolves."


    "I see. But I will still tell the others that you get a new girlfriend!" Then she escaped from my room.


    Sigh¡­whatever. I hope I can win the deathmatch.

 Chapter 212 - The First Fighter Is...

    Finally, the time hase to return to the Monsters World. We will have three matches today in the arena.


    And I''ll be bringing Ang, Ka, Sophie, Sonia, Candy, Lina, Shirley, Ian, Jewel, Albert, Mustache, and¡­ a lot of food to share with the Werewolves.


    As for the other two fighters who will fight, it''s a secret.


    "Albert, aren''t you busy? We might stay for longer than I thought." I asked the king who skipped work.


    "Don''t worry. Prime Minister Lowe and his son, Hector, can handle everything else. I have taken care of the most important jobs." Albert said.


    We are in the living room of our house in Cassau. The kids won''t being because it''s night time here, but it''s day in the Monsters World. At least in the area I will transfer to. That''s what Victoria told me.


    I thought of getting Kron toe and be a fighter, but if I open up a portal too many times, I''ll be too tired. So, only those in Cassau and the Capital wille. As for Marie, she''s staying in our ce with her twins.


    Another reason we don''t bring children with us is because there will be death in the fight. Either me, or Grandpa Werewolf. If I die, I won''t be able to bring everyone back to human world, that''s why I brought Lina with me. I have taught her to create a portal during the time I''m at home. She can only open up a portal just once. At least that''s good enough to bring everyone back home.


    "Are you ready?" I asked everyone.


    "What about you? You''re having a deathmatch over there?" Ang asked worriedly.


    "Don''t worry. I won''t die. Probably¡­ Let''s go!"


    I open up a portal and someone already waiting for us in front of the portal. He''s one of the male Werewolves I first encounter. And we are right in the center of the Arena, In the Colosseum.


    "You''re here. And they are?" He asked.


    "This one is the king of my country, and the rest are fighters and supporters. Help me carry all the foods."


    Without hesitation, the Werewolf quickly helped carrying the food with instructions from Ian.


    "¡­these are all¡­ not like before." The Werewolfined.


    "Obviously. These are just the ingredients. These two will cook them after the fights are over. It will be good if you bring some meat with youter. The match is the main priority. We''ll be having a party after the match is over. Whoever wins in the end, there will be no hard feelings." I said.


    "I see. I''ll tell the others to hunt some meat. You can wait here. Everyone should have noticed you''re here from your smell."


    "By the way, where''s your partner? The other Werewolf with you before?" I asked about the other Werewolf who was with him.


    "He will be fighting. After you left, we decide to have the strongest Werewolves to fight. One is Shelia, and the other should be Red. But Jack challenged him and won. So, it will be Jack and Shelia before your fight. We''ll put these ingredients to the King''s Home. As for you guys, just find a seat where you want to watch the battle. The best spot is over there." The Werewolf pointed to the seat closest to the arena.


    "Alright, we''ll go there. Let''s go, guys!"


    I bring everyone to the best spot as that Werewolf and Ian brought the ingredients to the next building to store until the fights over. After they store the ingredients, Ian returned alone telling that the Werewolf is telling the others to hunt some Boars as per Ian''s instructions. Good thing that there are boars here. I heard that the Werewolf was about to suggest some weird monster''s meat from Ian.


    Little by little, the Werewolves started to crowd the audience seats. They are all watching us curiously.


    And finally, four Werewolves enters the Colosseum. Start from the Werewolf King in-name, Red, then the third strongest Werewolf, Jack, the second Strongest, Shelia, and finally, Grandpa Werewolf.


    All the Werewolves howled when they see those four enters. Or more like, the three strongest and an extra. I feel more and more pitiful toward Red. He used to be the second strongest. Then be the third while still being a king. Then the fourth, and still a king.


    For a tribe that decided their king by strength, it must be humiliating for him. But I don''t sense any self-pity from him. In fact, I feel that he''s proud to have another powerful Werewolf in the rank.


    I guess if the strongest decide you''re the king, then you are the king indeed. No one will object the decision made by the strongest.


    ¡­that''s also why I can only fix the misunderstanding with Shelia after I beat Grandpa Werewolf. Anything I say before that will only be misunderstood. I also need to say it clearly in a word that doesn''t have any other meaning.


    "Is she the one?" Candy whispered to Victoria who turned into her human form after we arrive here.


    "Yes. It''s stupid crazy how Roy can get more and more girls so easily." Victoria replied.


    "It''s impossible for him to just so easily get more girls just by misunderstanding. He must have done it on purpose. Victoria, next time, stop him from saying unnecessary stuffs." Ka said.


    It was totally not on purpose!


    Sophie who heard their whisper just smiled at me. As for Ang, she looked at me angrily like I''m some kind of yboy. Wait! Maybe I am one?


    Well, she''s just angry because she''s still single.


    As for Albert, and Mustache as well, they are enjoying the view. The view of female Werewolves wearing bikini-like outfits.


    "Must be good that we didn''t bring Marie, right?" I teased Albert.


    "I''m just interested in how the Werewolves looks like. Hmm¡­ so that''s how Werewolves look like, huh? There''s not much difference from humans other than those wolf ears. As for their canines, they are difficult to be noticed by other people. As long as they hide their ears, they can hide among humans in our world." Albert said.


    "You just admitted that you''re looking at their appearances. I''ll tell Marie."


    "Then I''ll turn you into a wanted criminal. Good luck with that."


    We both know that neither of us will do what we said. We''re just teasing each other.


    "Hohohoh! You brought more people than I thought. At least two of them are there for the fight, right?" Grandpa Werewolf approaches me followed by the other three Werewolves.


    "Yes. The one who will be fighting are-"


    "No need to tell me. We only interested in battle, not before the battle. And food as well, but we will enjoy thatter, right? Well, only one of us though." Grandpa said.


    I know that he will be going all out against meter. He wanted to win the duel, but what he wants the most is the excitement of the battle instead of winning or losing. He is also too old already. He should have died a long time ago. It''s impossible for a race like Werewolves to live for more than a thousand years is what Victoria told me before we return here. But he''s still alive. And since there are no more challenge for him, he decided that this will be hisst fight. Although he will be aiming to win, he wanted someone to put an end to his boring life. That''s why he''s asking me.


    For someone to only lose once in their lifetime, and that lifetime is over a thousand years old, he will be the strongest opponent I will fight. The only good thing is that it will be a one-on-one battle. I need to only concentrate on killing him.


    "Don''t worry. I will be the one to enjoy the feast. It will be for your funeral after all." I offered my right hand to him for a handshake.


    Seeing that, he grabbed my hand. Seems like even Werewolves know what a handshake is.


    Both of us put a lot of power on our hand. I wanted to test how strong he is, but seems like thinking the same thing as well.


    After about thirty seconds, we finally let go. My hand is so red right now. Good thing it didn''t break before I fight.


    "Let''s just begin the first fight, shall we? Jack! Show everyone the how strong you''ve be!" Grandpa ordered Jack to get on the Arena.


    "AWOOO!!! I''ll be winning it!" Jack jumped down to the Arena in the middle, and everyone cheered on him.


    Although the building is oval, the Arena in the middle is square. The size is quite big. About 30x30 Meters. And there''s wall separating the Arena and the audience seats.


    I guess I should send my first fighter as well. But before that¡­


    "Ka, can you heal my hand? It''s not broken, but it''s painful."


    "Bear with it. I want to converse my magic for the battle. I''ll be going now." Ka said.


    I guess I will keep it red for a while longer. I''ll just ask someone to give me ice for my hand.


    And our first fighter is Ka. Although I want Mustache to participate, Ka volunteer before I decide who will fight. She wanted to test how strong she has be now.


    And as a supportive boyfriend, I agree with to let her participate. During thest three days, she also did a lot of sparring against me and Victoria. I can say that she''s much stronger than before.


    I guess I''ll see how it goes.


    The two fighters entered the Arena and the cheers from the audience is deafening. Then after the two stood at the center of the stage, everyone quieted down.


    By the way, how do we start the fight? Has it already started as soon as the fighters enter the Arena?


    "Now, begin!"


    Seems like the signal for the startes from Grandpa Werewolf. And it was so simple.


    Now the battle has begun, I hope Ka can win this fight.

 Chapter 213 - Werewolf Transformation And Kaylas Secret Technique

    After the signal from Grandpa, the battle began.


    ¡­though the two fighters are just there watching each other. They are being careful.


    "Ka has reached intermediate level in earth element, right?" I asked since we''re waiting until they make their moves.


    "Yeah. Earth, healing, and light, all of them has reached intermediate level. I think in a few months, she can reach advanced level in one of them. That''s also what Ka said." It was Candy who answered me.


    "All of you has gotten stronger when I''m gone, huh? Let''s get to the training camp as soon as we''re done here. How about next month?" I suggested.


    "That''s only if you''re alive until then. You''re about to have a deathmatch, right? What if you die?" Albert asked.


    "Don''t worry. I will win. Maybe?" I answered¡­ without any confidence in my words.


    "Yeah¡­ I hope you will win." Albert said.


    Then Ka makes the first move.


    She took out the brown wand that allow her to manipte earth. And seeing Ka makes her move, Jack started running at her. He''s going in a straight line to face Ka directly. What a stupid move.


    Ka easily raised an earth wall in front of her when Jack got close on her. The wall is not big. Just less than two meters in height, and thirty centimeters in width. But that''s more than enough to stop Jack''s rush.


    Ka raised the earth wall timely as Jack rushed toward her, and the wall was built in less than a second. Jack who was unprepared, crashed on the wall head-on.


    Thanks to Ka''s magic control, she finished built the wall quickly, and the durability of the wall is high as well. Able to stop a Werewolf''s head-on attack.


    Other than Grandpa Werewolf, this is the first time they see magic. No one understand what has happened.


    "What was that?" Shelia asked.


    We''re sitting next to each other''s group so we can have a chat while watching the fight.


    "That was magic. It''s the first time in thousand years since Ist saw it. This fight is also to let you guys witness what we will never experience just by staying in our own settlement. Magic is another way for humans to fight. Unlike us who fought in closebat, they used magic for fighting. Some would use magic for close quarterbat and fight us head-on, but most of them would attack from distance." Grandpa said.


    "Grandpa didn''t tell us about magic before! Why didn''t you tell us from the start?" Shelia protested.


    "I thought that you will be fine. Like how I did the first time I fought a human. I always won my whole life other than that one time I lost against an Aura user. Even when the opponent is a mage, I would always win." Grandpa said proudly.


    Hmm¡­ that''s just makes it feels like my chance of winning is getting lower. Let''s watch how the fight goes on.


    After blocking Jack''s head-on charge, Ka gathered the rocks around her from the stage on her wand, and turns it into a rapier. That''s the weapon she used. Although she''s not an Aura user, her skill in wielding a rapier is as good as an expert martial artist. That''s what both Sonia and Victoria said.


    There are many people in the past who are talented in certain type of martial arts, but never lucky enough to awaken their Aura. They would help children with potential to be an Aura user to master their weapons. That''s what Sonia said.


    And Ka''s skill in rapier is about as good as those people. But can she win with just that against a Werewolf who is much stronger and faster than average human?


    As long as she stays calm, Ka would be able to win. Although she''s wielding a rapier, she''s also using magic.


    While Jack recover from hitting the wall, Ka already made several earth spikes floating close to her. That''s not what an earth mage can do. That''s the ability of her wand. There''s actually a thin line of rocks connecting the spikes and her wand.


    Then she threw those spikes one by one toward Jack who has just recover. She thought of this technique for a while, but managed toplete it yesterday when we were sparring. She''s really a genius.


    Jack surprised by the attack, dodged the spikes to the side. His speed is still faster than Ka''s attack, but Ka keep throwing spikes toward Jack until finally, one of the spikes stabbed him in his right thigh.


    "Aaargh!" Jack screamed in pain.


    Seems like Ka decided to finish the battle as soon as it started. But that mean¡­ I won''t be able to get enough data about Werewolves. Jack also hasn''t transformed into a werewolf form yet!


    Then Jack pulled the spike out of his thigh, and smiled.


    "So, this is magic, huh? You''re better than I thought. I will get serious no- WAIT! CAN YOU STOP ATTACKING ME!?" Jack shouted.


    Jack was about to say something, but Ka never stopped her attacks. She keeps making a new spike each time she throws one. She never gives any chance for Jack to fight back.


    ¡­this was my strategy that I taught her before. Just after she joined our party. I guess she learned it too well.


    "Master! Ka is winning!" Jewel said.


    Not just Ka''s training going well, Jewel''s also doing her best as well. now she no longer shouted at all times. I''m a good teacher, aren''t I?


    "Yes, she is. When your opponent is stronger than you, you should do any means necessary to win the fight. While your opponent is still looking down on you, that''s your best chance to win the battle. Keep attacking and don''t let your opponent has any chance to fight back." I used this chance to teach Jewel as well.


    "That''s cheating!" Shelia who heard me protested about how the fight is going.


    "No, it''s not." And the one who denied that is Grandpa Werewolf. "It''s a fight. Two sides are doing their best to win by using any means necessary. We can see that female human is more experienced than Jack. So, what if he defeated Red? It''s useless if he lost anyway. Keep these in mind since you will have your turn next. All these fights you have with our fellow Werewolves are useless against race like human. They fought differently after all. Learn well since you are the strongest after me. Don''t embarrass yourself byining how you lose. If you lose, you lose. That''s all there is to it."


    Grandpa also used this chance to teach Shelia.


    I looked at Red, and I can see that he''s smirking. Don''t tell me that when he fought against Jack, he lost on purpose? Just so Jack will get himself humiliated in our fights? That''s smart. Maybe I should make a contract with him instead of Shelia after the match.


    Jack was furious because Ka didn''t let him catch a breath. He quickly escapes from her range, and finally, transformed into a werewolf form.


    He turned into¡­ there''s not much change there other than hair growing all over his body. Or is it fur? There''s fur covering his chest, arms, and legs, in the same color as his hair, brown. His hair grew longer as well. Other than that, his nails are longer now that they can be called ws instead.


    So, this is a werewolf transformation. As for their wolf form, I don''t think it''s a good idea to use it in a fight. So, I don''t think I will see one.


    Jack''s speed grown faster now. I can still follow his moves, but the other humans beside me have difficulties seeing Jack''s movement.


    Wait! Where are the wounds!? Don''t tell me Werewolves have self-recovery ability just like my spear? Or is it that my spear is actually made of Werewolves'' bones, fangs, and ws? I''ll ask Grandpa after this fight end.


    Seeing Jack transformed, Ka didn''t lose her cool. She also used her secret technique as well.


    Using her earth magic as well as her wand, she created a giant humanoid shaped golem!


    Earth mage should be able to create golem and use them to attack when they reached at least expert level. But she can do it now thanks to learning magic control and also her wand. And instead of letting the golem fight like how summoner used their monster, she''s in control of the golem.


    In fact, she''s inside the golem''s head right now! Being covered by those earth protecting her in the shape of a head, she''s safe as long as Jack can''t reach the head of the golem.


    With this, the battle should reach near its end. I''m getting excited just by watching.


    All of us, especially the boys, whether it''s human or Werewolf, getting excited to see this giant earth golem that Ka controlled.


    As for Victoria¡­


    "GIANT ROBOT VERSUS WEREWOLF! GO, ROBOKAYLA!"


    I don''t understand how she''s more excited than everyone else. But she has terrible naming sense like I have. But shouldn''t Roboka be more¡­ better looking? It''s embarrassing for her if she knows that her name is used on that ugly looking golem.


    And the battle enters its next phase. I should cheer for Ka as well.


    "GO KAYLA! WIN THIS!"

 Chapter 214 - Conclusion Of The First Match

    It''s not the first time I''ve seen Ka''s golem. When I returned to human world, beforeing here, Ka practiced controlling this golem with me as the sparring partner. Since she''s trying to defeat a Werewolf, she used me as a practice target since my speed is quiteparable to the Werewolves. Though I don''t know if they are still hiding their power or not at the time.


    I can say that Ka can control the golem smoothly now. But the price for that is the ugly appearance of the golem. It''s just giant tube-shaped earth, on top of another tube, connected to the giant tube-shaped body.


    For the sake of improving endurance of the golem and the smoother control over the golem, she has to sacrifice the look. I''m not talking about the beauty of the golem''s appearance, but other things like joints for better movements of the golem as well, the reach, and yeah, maybe the looks as well.


    Ka can learn thatter as she grows stronger. But now, her goal is to defeat the Werewolf in front of her. So, she doesn''t need to care about her golem''s appearance.


    She can do what she should only be able to do when she reached extreme level while still in intermediate level thanks to the wand. When we asked Sam''s appraiser, Jeremy, about the wand again, he told us that this since its function is to manipte earth, using the wand to create golem is the best choice.


    ¡­I already know that, I just asked him for a confirmation.


    The biggest w about this golem is the mana consumption. If the fight prolonged, Ka would lose without a doubt.


    "Roy, don''t you think that I can do that as well? Bing a giant robot like that with you controlling me? I want to do that!" Victoria asked me to do the same.


    "I don''t know what a robot is, but I''m interested as well. But you can''t be that big, right?"


    "I alone can''t do it. But if I have a lot of clones, I should be able to do it now! So first, I need to be able to increase the number of clones I can make."


    "How will you do that?" I asked.


    "Just like before. Let me kill a lot of enemies so I can grow more. Don''t worry about it. This time, I can control if I want the experience I gained is for me or for you. And you also will have another summon, right? You can ask that monster to fight for you while I improve myself." Victoria exined.


    Well, as long as I don''t have to wait for too long to reach advanced level, I guess I can agree with her n.


    "So, what''s a robot?" I asked.


    "It''s¡­ something like that!" Victoria pointed at the golem Ka controlled.


    "Oh¡­"


    So, Victoria herself unable to exin what a robot is. Maybe first, is because she doesn''t understand it but it''s quitemon in her world. Second, she''s respecting myck of knowledge of her world.


    In any case, I want to try making another giant golem I can control just like Ka''s. As for the appearances¡­ I''ll leave that to Victoria. I bet she has another wish-fulfilment thing she wanted to turn herself into.


    Back to the battle between Ka and Jack. Jack has transformed into a hairier version of himself. His wound has recovered, and he became faster and stronger. His ws are sharper. Now he doesn''t need to care about crashing on another earth wall again. Jack can break through that wall now.


    But¡­ now he has self-recovery ability, isn''t it hard to win a fight against a Werewolf? How did some Aura user able to defeat Grandpa Werewolf?


    "You''re wondering on how we can be defeated, right? Don''t worry, our self-recovery ability is not omnipotent. We can''t do that forever."


    Grandpa Werewolf seems to have noticed what I want to ask about and informed me about their self-recovery skill.


    "Does that ability only work when you''re in that form?" I asked.


    "Yes." Grandpa answered simply. I guess he won''t answer any more than that. This grandpa knows how to keep his abilities as secret. But for self-recovery, I guess since every Werewolf has the same skill and I will witness another one after this, he doesn''t mind telling me about it.


    The fight continues. Ka''s golem keeps enduring Jack''s attacks. And every time a part of the golem is cracked or broken; Ka would recover that part.


    While Jack seems impatient to break through Ka''s defense. He keeps moving fast while dodging Ka''s attack. Although the golem''s movement is smooth, it''s not good at quick movement. So, Ka can only defend. As for Jack, he can only attack and dodging the golem''s attack. He keeps attacking again and again, and keep moving as to not getting hit, while not caring how tired he will be.


    I can see Ka inside the golem''s head. She''s sweating a lot, but she still keeps calm and see the situation.


    Jack''s speed has slowed down since he moves around a lot, but he didn''t seem to care about it. The chance for Ka to win wille soon!


    Finally, when Jack''s speed slowed down considerably, Ka makes her move!


    She swung the giant earth golem''s right hand and hit Jack with it. The punch hits Jack! Jack was blown away to the wall on the right side of the wall where I''m standing.


    Then Ka''s golem chased after Jack. It''s not faster than a Werewolf, but since Jack is still recovering from that hit, Ka can reach him before he moves. Then Ka swing the golem''s hand back, and pushed it forward to where Jack is.


    That''s right! She didn''t throw a punch, and just pushed Jack to the wall. Then she keeps the golem''s hand pressing Jack to the wall.


    I can see that inside the golem, Ka makes her move. She didn''t stay in the head of the golem, but moving down to the body, and to the hands that''s pressing on Jack.


    While being pressed, Jack pushed the hand back. He''s stronger than the golem which Ka no longer control. Ka instead manipting the inside of the golem so she can move freely inside.


    As Jack pushed back the golem''s hand, from the palm of the golem, a hole opened and Kaes out of it. With the rapier in her hand, she thrusted it toward Jack''s body and makes multiple stab wounds.


    Ka is sweating since she consumed a lot of mana. She must have exhausted a lot of her mana, and that''s why she changed into a melee.


    Jack who is busy pushing on the golem''s hand, unable to defend himself and get stabbed again and again. Maybe because he''s tired that his self-recovery ability doesn''t work well. His wounds are still recovering, but at a slower rate.


    Then finally, as the wounds stopped recovering, Ka attacked again multiple times, and finally stopped her rapier in front of Jack''s throat.


    "Ugh¡­ I lost¡­"


    Jack finally surrendered. The first match is over with the human race''s victory.


    "Good job, Ka!"


    "We won!"


    "MASTER! KAYLA WIN! MASTER! MASTER! LOOK!"


    "I''m looking, I''m looking. She''s grown so much. She''s a genius after all. Not as much as Ang, but still a genius." I said.


    We are so happy with Ka''s victory.


    "I''m a genius? You can praise me more, you know?" Ang turned cocky hearing my praise.


    "I mean in magic. In everything else, you''re an idiot."


    "What was that!?"


    While Ang trying toin, the audience finally snapped and cheered loudly. Some of them even louder than Jewel when she''s shouting.


    "Awesome!"


    "Humans are strong!"


    "Good job, Jack! But she''s better than you!"


    The Werewolves doesn''t seem to care that they are losing. They are just more interested in seeing the battle. They throw praises after praises to Ka who won, as Ka and Jack shaking hand in the arena.


    "Nice fight. I gained a lot of experience thanks to you." Ka said.


    "Yeah, me too. I never thought that magic is so amazing. It''s a shame that I can''t use magic, but I still prefer a head-on fight anyway. I hope we have another chance to fight." Jack replied.


    That''s one down. Two to go!


    Seeing the atmosphere, Albert just watching everyone''s reaction. Then he suddenly had an idea.


    "Roy! Are you thinking what I''m thinking?" Albert asked me.


    "Of course! I will win my fight against the grandpa!"


    "Not that!"


    "So, you think I''m going to lose?"


    "That''s different! I want you to win, but I''m not talking about that!" Albert seems to be not in the mood for jokes. I guess I''ll answer him for real.


    "I know, I know. You''re thinking of creating a fightingpetition, right? I have thought of it ever since Grandpa Werewolf asked me for a duel." I said.


    "So, you understand. I''ll make preparation after we return. Hopefully, I can start the event in two years. That should be when you started going to college, right?" Albert asked.


    "But I''m going to a medical school, though? Not a magic school."


    "I can take care of thatter. For now, let''s enjoy the duel."


    ¡­is he already preparing to give me more works two yearster? Isn''t it too soon?


    Since it''s Albert, he must have thought of giving me a lot of work already. Seems like my peaceful life is still so far away from me.

 Chapter 215 - The Second Fighter

    "Since it''s apetition, anyone who wanted to be dubbed as the strongest must be interested in participating. We need to make sure that we''re not just letting everyone participating. There will be chaos if even D or E-ranked hunters participating. How about making only college students can participate?"


    I have given up on refusing Albert. So, why not make sure that I won''t be able to participate? That''s why I made the suggestion.


    "College students from all around the kingdom, will fight for the spot of the best mage and the best institution in the kingdom. I bet there will be more people wanted to attend college then. Many college students are mostly those whose parents forced them to enter, or just people who extremely curious to get stronger other than from the normal ways. But if there''s a goal to be called the strongest, more people will attend college. And this will also help gather those strong people in one ce and make it easier for us to watch them. Then we can invite them to join our cause as well." I continued.


    "That''s a great idea. But you''re only suggesting that because you don''t want to participate, right? Since you''re aiming for a medical school and not magic university. Well, I''ll think of a way to get you participate." Albert proimed. Seems like he won''t give up on getting me participate.


    "Oh! Oh! Tournament Arcs! And instead of joining one, I will be making one as well instead! I have a lot of ideas from my world! Should I use the format in that anime? Or that novel? Everything seems interesting!" Victoria who overhears our conversation, suddenly joined happily.


    "I take it that you have several ideas on how we should make thepetition, right? Let''s discuss itter after the fight is over. There are still two more fights for us. And one of them is mine¡­"


    As I said that, Ka has finally returned to us greeted by the cheers of everyone. Including the Werewolves nearby.


    "Ka! You''re so strong!" Ang praised Ka for her victory.


    "Thank you."


    "That golem was amazing! Did you make it while thinking to be able to move inside the golem as well? That''s genius!" Candy also givepliment to Ka.


    "Thanks. But I still have a lot to improve."


    While we''re showering her withpliments, the Werewolves nearby also do the same.


    "Good job,dy! You''re so strong!"


    "Humans are amazing!"


    "I can''t wait to see the next battle!"


    That''s right. There are still two more battles. And the audiences already extremely excited to watch them. Everyone except one. Grandpa Werewolf still have the same expression watching the battle. Though when Jack gave up, he looked a bit disappointed. I guess he expect everyone to have the pride of Werewolves to keep fighting until death. Well, once I''m the Werewolf King, there will be no fight to death among allies. The fight between Grandpa Werewolf and I will be thest deathmatch. After that, there will be no more of it. Unless I lose. But I have no n on losing.


    While Ka returned to us, Jack also returned to his seat with Grandpa and the other three.


    "Sorry, grandpa. I lost." Jack returned and apologized for his lost.


    "Not like I expected anything from anyone. This is why I decided to have Red take cares of everything while I live in solitude. All the Werewolves have grown weak! But what disappoint me most is that¡­ humans have grown even weaker!" Grandpa Werewolf then looked at us humans.


    "What did you say!?" Ang didn''t take that kindly. But before she takes a step to the grandpa, I grabbed her wrist and stop her.


    "Ang. Stop it. He''s right though. He has lived for over a thousand years. Even longer than Victoria. There are a lot of magic techniques, skills, and technologies lost in time. No doubt that among the strongest mages a thousand years ago, Grandpa Werewolf has fought quite a number of them. But he only ever lost once, and it''s against an Aura user." I said.


    "¡­Roy, can you really win your fight?" Ang looked worried that I might lose the fight.


    "I have no choice but to win. If I lose, I''ll die." I said. Although my face shows no expression, my heart is beating wildly. I need to keep calm so I won''t get exhausted too early in the battle.


    "Then I guess I''ll win the next battle. I''ll cheer on your fight with my victory!" Ang confidently said as she left the us and step on the arena.


    "She''s your next fighter? Is she as strong as that girl from before?" Shelia asked me.


    "Well, she''s strong enough to be our representative in this battle at least. You''re going next, right? Good luck."


    After that, Shelia also entered the arena. Maybe she''s wishing for a good fight like before.


    As she leaves for the stage, Grandpa Werewolf opened his mouth.


    "Sigh¡­ look how much the pride of Werewolves has deteriorated. I was hoping Jack at least wanted to fight more. But he gave up rather quickly. And your fighter also so weak. Where are the strong people from the past?" Grandpa Werewolfined.


    "If you''re looking for a fight, you should have left this settlement. There should be many strong monsters in this world, right? It''s your own decision that make you stay here for so long." I said.


    "That''s right. I regretted it a lot that I didn''t try to leave. When I decided that I don''t want to stay here anymore, I was too old and supposed to have died soon. I was too old already at the time, and unable to move like I did in the past. But I''m still the strongest Werewolf here. Now I have grown much older and need a cane to walk, I''m still the strongest here. My days filled with disappointment."


    "Grandpa. You talk as if you''re going to die today." Red asked.


    Seems like he never told anyone that we''ll be having a deathmatch.


    "That''s right. My fight against Roy is a deathmatch. Even if I win anyway, I don''t think I will continue living for long. I will give my all for my fight and you don''t have the right to stop me!" Grandpa Werewolf shouted.


    Red, and also Jack who is nearby, wanted to stop Grandpa Werewolf from making a rash decision. But seeing his will, they don''t have the courage to stop him. Red just looked at me in hope that I can stop him.


    "Why are you looking at me? If I don''t go all out, I''ll be the one to die. I can''t afford to hold back as well. And this is the pride of the Werewolf he''s so proud about. Let this be thest thing you will learn from him and don''t disappoint him anymore." I said.


    My side also didn''t try to stop me even though I told them that my fight will be a deathmatch. They have too much faith on me. They must be thinking that I have some kind of n to not kill Grandpa Werewolf and win the fight as well.


    But I don''t have any kind of n to not kill. I will fight until either of us dead. Hopefully, I will be the one doing the killing.


    Everyone that I brought here, all of them have a big weakness. They are too reliant on me. Whether it''s thanks to my Aura ability, or because my knowledge of the future, they thought that if I''m involved, everything will be fine. That''s what always happen after getting to know me.


    If they''re with me, everything will be fine. That''s what they thought. After all, ever since I returned to the past, I have never experienced any failures. But in my past life, failure is all that I am. They need to know that I can fail as well.


    Will I show them that by losing the fight? No. In fact, I think it''s better if I can win the fight quickly. They might end up putting their trusts in me more, but as I always say, surviving is more important.


    They have seen my effort to get stronger and to keep them safe. But they have never seen me in difficult situation. That''s the main reason why they have too much faith in me. That''s the reason why the people I brought here are those who have too much faith in me. I need them to see me in difficult situation. Maybe winning the fight by a thread? That''s too difficult. Even winning my fightter will be hard.


    While thinking so, the two fighters are greeting each other in the Arena.


    "I''m Ang. You''re the girl who will be Roy''s lover, right?"


    "That will only happen if he wins against Grandpa. Though I doubt it will ever happen. Grandpa has been the strongest for over a thousand years already." Shelia replied.


    "Let''s hope that he won''t die of old age before the fight against Roy. What''s your name?"


    "My name is Shelia. And I won''t forgive you for that remark!"


    "First you need to win against me. I doubt you can do that though."


    Hmm¡­ seems like Ang has learned the way to provoke her enemies. That''s what I wanted from her, but I don''t think that''s the case. That''s just her personality.


    Provoking the enemies is a way to make them unable to keep their cool and make their attacks more predictable. But I doubt Ang knows that. She just speaks everything from her mind.


    If she did it on purpose, I would be surprised.


    "The first fight is over. Now the second fight, begin!"


    Grandpa gave the simple signal that the fight begins.


    Let''s see how strong the second strongest Werewolf after Grandpa is.

 Chapter 216 - Partial Transformation

    The second battle has started, and the two fighters instantly rushed at each other. Shelia using her own speed, while Ang used the help of wind magic to improve her speed.


    Ang is still unable to fly with using her intermediate level wind magic, but she can use wind magic to support her and improve her speed. Now her speed is about as fast as Shelia''s. But Shelia is still not using her full speed, so Shelia won in term of speed.


    But the most important thing here is that Ang is rushing toward Shelia right away. She didn''t use her magic or use that speed to keep her distance from Shelia, but she''s rushing toward her! That''s a bad decision to take for any mage. Well, any average mage.


    There''s one thing I haven''t told Ang before. I already told her that she''s a genius in magic in my previous life, and she has proven it in this life as well. She is already much stronger than any intermediate level mage, and she is still improving.


    What I haven''t told her is something I realize in this life, but not in my previous life. It''s that she''s a genius in battle as well. Her instinct on using what type of magic, where to move, and how to attack, are top-notch. She grows in every battle. I believe if she were to fight a powerful advanced level mage, she can handle it herself.


    She rarely asked for a spar with me, but before I return to this Monsters World for the match, I asked her for a spar. That''s how I noticed that she''s talented in battle as well. No wonder she can gain fame in my previous life.


    During our sparring session, I asked her why she did a certain move. Her answer was she didn''t know either, and just thought that it was a good decision. That''s why she did it. And that''s an answer talented people will give when they are asked. I''m so jealous of her talent.


    Our ways of fighting are different. Not that I''m fighting close quarterbat and she''s using magic. That''s obvious. What I meant was our ways of thinking during battle. She did everything instinctually, while I''m strategizing in my head before I made my move.


    Thanks to that, during our sparring session, we both gained a lot. Though I don''t know if she realizes it or not. Even if she doesn''t realize it, I won''t tell her about it. She doesn''t need to think about it. I''m afraid that her way of thinking will change if I told her. She''s already good enough this way. I''ll just give her advices from time to time.


    Now, Ang is facing Shelia in the Arena. They are rushing to each other in a straight line.


    Seeing that, Shelia happily ept the challenge. She pulled her right hand back. Then, that arm transformed and turned hairy as her ws growing longer and sharper as she swung it toward Ang horizontally.


    But Ang used her wind magic to boost her jumping power and jumped above Shelia. She dodged Shelia''s attack easily. Then right when she''s above Shelia, she''s throwing a Fireball at her. It hits her directly.


    Everyone I brought thought that it will end soon, but I don''t think so. I can see clearly that Shelia is unharmed. She''s blocking the Fireball using her transformed right arm. There''s only slight burn in that arm.


    "Oh! Both of them are amazing!" It was Sonia who appears suddenly like usual who said it.


    "You''re here? Are the kids asleep?" I asked.


    "Yes. Ang''s fighting now, so the first match is over? Who won?"


    "Ka did."


    "That''s great!"


    Although I can bring Sonia with me using portal for faster travel, she chose to stay with the kids since everyone is leaving. She waited until the kids are sleeping and teleported here.


    "Is she your friend?" Grandpa Werewolf asked after being surprised that there''s a ghost appeared suddenly close to him.


    "Yes. She''s¡­ our watch ghost. She''s over a thousand years old just like Victoria, but they both are still younger than you."


    "I see¡­ she seems weaker than the ghosts in the Haunted Forest." Grandpa said.


    "Are the ghosts over there can fight?" Sonia asked curiously.


    "They use some kind of magic that attack people mentally usually." Grandpa replied.


    "That''s great! Roy! Next time, you should take me to that forest! I''ll learn how to fight as a ghost!" Sonia said.


    Using magic to attack people mentally¡­ that''s just like her charm magic. Well, as long as she''s getting stronger, I will support her.


    "Sure. By the way, Grandpa, what''s with Shelia''s transformation?" I asked about the battle instead of the direction to the Haunted Forest. I can just ask other Werewolves about it.


    "That''s her partial transformation skill. She''s the only one among our tribe that can use it. She''s well-versed in doing it and use it as advantages in battle. That''s how she ends up bing our second strongest after me." Grandpa replied.


    Partial transformation, huh? That seems useful. Now I''m thinking of making a contract with her again. Well, I can think of the contractter. My head is already full with this match and the next one.


    Let''s see¡­ Shelia fights by using her partial transformation as her advantage. The battle continues and they both are dodging each other''s attack really well. Ang has a lot of mana. And she''s only using small amount of mana for each magic she used to attack and dodge Shelia. As for Shelia, she quickly transformed her legs, and always change her pace making Ang confused.


    Shelia usually used her normal legs, but she transforms them so she can be faster. But when Ang attacked, Shelia would transform her legs back to normal and reduce her speed on purpose. Ang''s attack would miss the target thanks to that. But her transformation isn''t totally visible. As soon as she transformed any part of her body, she would return the, back to normal again. Not many people noticed that.


    The audience got excited watching the battle since this is not as one-sided as the previous battle. And this time, they are watching other magic than earth magic.


    Ang would use her earth magic from time to time, but only for blocking Shelia''s attack she can''t dodge. She would use her Fireball mainly to attack, and wind magic to moves. She hadn''t used ice magic yet.


    I''m curious about their reaction when they see ice for the first time. I guess Ang keeps her ice magic as a trump card since I told her about it.


    Shelia got close to Ang again this time, and attacked Ang with her left hand still not transformed yet. This has been her strategy in the fight. She would use a dualbination of left and right. But the most unexpected thing is her partial transformation.


    Since partial transformation didn''t take as much time for transforming as normal transformation, there are no dy when she transforms part of her body. She used that to attack Ang.


    She would sometime attack with her left or right normally. When she about to hit Ang, she would transform her hand to make the attack stronger and faster. But that''s where the danger is.


    Ang would be unable to predict if it''s the first attack or the second attack when Shelia would transform her hand.


    Sometimes, Shelia''s first attack is already with her transformed hand. Other times, the first attack is just a decoy for her second attack. Ang would be confused to dodge or block the attack.


    If Ang blocked or dodged the first weak attack, she will have trouble dodging the second strong one. But it''s a good thing her casting speed is very quick. She managed to block the strong attack in time.


    If Ang blocked or dodged the first strong attack, Shelia would retreat back and prepare for another chance to attack.


    It''s just shows how experienced Shelia is in battle. The title as the second strongest is not just for show. If she fought another enemy, she would have won the fight easily. But it''s Ang she''s fighting right now.


    While Shelia used her experience, Ang keeps growing as she fights. She started to notice when Shelia will use her strong attack, and when Shelia will use her weak attack.


    But still, if it''s goes on like this, Ang would lose if she exhausts her mana first. Although she has a lot of mana, Shelia''s stamina might be better. But I don''t think neither side will prolong the fight on purpose.


    Both sides have great instincts in battle, which makes the match even more interesting. Even Grandpa Werewolf would sometime give praises to Ang and Shelia. But that makes him even more excited for our battle next. I shouldn''t have sent Ang if I know this¡­


    And then, Ang casted Ground Spike with her magic. A number of spikes protruding from the ground in arge scale. That must have consumed a lot of her mana.


    Shelia jumped to dodge it since she can''t move on the ground. That''s when Ang casts several Wind shes at her. She must have thought that since she''s mid-air, she''s unable to dodge them.


    But that''s wrong!


    Shelia run on air just like how I used Air Steps!


    "WHAT THE HELL!? TH-THAT! WHAT IS THAT!?" I know what I see, but I was shocked when I see it. Werewolves able to run on air!


    "Hmm? That''s just a skill only powerful Werewolves can do. In this tribe, she''s the only one who can do that other than me. That''s why I''m so disappointed with most Werewolves in this generation. They are too weak." Grandpa Werewolf answered me.


    He can do it too? That''s just make my chance to win even lower! How can I win against him if he can run on air, while I can only take several steps?


    Shit¡­ I''m gonna die.

 Chapter 217 - The Wind Is Quite Strong

    Shelia uses some kind of skill just like my Air Steps. I''ll call it Air steps as well. But she''s better at using it than me since it''s her racial skill.


    Seriously, who would have thought that Werewolves can run on air?


    "¡­Roy, can you imagine?" Suddenly as we watched the battle, Albert asked me something.


    "What is it this time?"


    "Just imagine this. An army of Werewolves running down from the sky. That would be scary if they are our enemies¡­" Albert said.


    "¡­we have to make them our allies no matter what. Make sure that scary thing is the future of what the cult will see."


    "That''s why you have to win no matter what and be the Werewolf King. Then one day when you reached advanced level in your summoning element, get another tribe to join us as well." Albert suggested.


    "That''s my intention in the first ce. But are you sure to have me raising my own army which would be stronger than any other army in the kingdom?"


    "I trust you."


    That''s what Albert said. And that''s also why I bring him here as well. I''m d to be trusted so much, but I need him to understand that I can''t do everything. I don''t have any intention on attacking the kingdom, what would happen if one day I have that kind of desire? I doubt I will though.


    Ang now faced with bigger problem. Fighting against Shelia who can move mid-air, it will be easier for Shelia to dodge her attack. And Ang also has difficulty following her speed. To hit Shelia, she must use a faster type of magic or arge-scale magic just like the Ground Spikes she used. But it must reach where Shelia is.


    "What''s wrong? Can''t hit me? Then it will be your loss!" Shelia said.


    "The fight is still on going. And I haven''t given up yet!" Ang replied.


    Still mid-air, Shelia rushed down toward Ang. This time, both her arms already transformed. Shelia wants to finish the battle now.


    Shelia swung both arms while she''s still in a distance. Turns out, she can attack from a distance as well!


    It''s just like Wind shes. But Ang who seems to have predicted that, or maybe it''s instinctually, makes a giant Earth Wall in front of her to protect herself. She built threeyers of wall, but two of the walls are easily destroyed by Shelia''s attack. And thest wall is almost destroyed as well. The attack left huge scratches on the wall in cross shape.


    But Ang doesn''t seem to have given up. She still has the same confidence as when she entered the Arena. She just looks up at Shelia who stays mid-air. Shelia can''t stay in one ce, so she keeps running mid-air. Can''t she just jump on the same spot if she doesn''t have the intention to attack? That seem to be tiring.


    I''m still thinking of how strong Shelia ispared to Jack. Isn''t the gap too big? With her Air Steps, that long distance shes, those are the things that any Werewolves can learn when they got even stronger. But she''s the only one who have gained those abilities in this tribe other than Grandpa Werewolf.


    The only weakness Shelia has is that she never fought against other species. Maybe some monsters that attacked the settlement or her preys, but she never had any real battle against other species. That''s why she''s trying to adapt by keep moving to not let Ang''s magic hit her. For Shelia, Ang is an unknown enemy with her various magic skills.


    But now it seems like Shelia already adapted to Ang''s attack and tries to finish the fight. And if Ang had any ns, she won''t be able to use them when Shelia''s mid-air and keeps moving.


    Well, I don''t think Ang has any ns in the first ce. But she must have thought of something when I see that she has a rxed expression on her face.


    "I can''t fly yet, so it''s impossible for me to fight up there." Ang said.


    "Hah! Does that mean you''re giving up?" Shelia asked Ang.


    "No. Since I can''t go up there, then I should get you down here!" Ang said.


    Then Ang raised her hand to the sky. Not aimed it at Shelia.


    I have told her that hand gestures are not important in casting magic, but she said that doing it makes it easier for her to use her magic. Although now she no longer aimed her hands toward her enemies now, she would still do that from time to time.


    But this time, instead of aiming for her enemy, she''s raising her right hand to the sky with her palm opened as if she''s reaching for something.


    I''m interested in what she will do. Then I noticed that it''s arge-scale magic that might reach the audience seats!


    ""EVERYONE, BRACE YOURSELVES!""


    Both Grandpa Werewolves and I shouted at the same time. Seems like he noticed it to. But I never thought that he''s someone who worry over his kin since he wanted the Werewolves to restore back their pride. But I guess he only wants the Werewolves to do that in a fight, and not when they are just watching from the side.


    We both noticed that Ang is casting arge-scale magic that might affect everyone in the Colosseum including the audiences.


    Grandpa just stayed in his original position while everyone else is confused with our warning. But since both Werewolves and my group are the people who have put their trusts in us, they are bracing themselves from whatever ising.


    Meanwhile, I''m grabbing my disciple and gather my girlfriends around me to protect them. As for Albert, he can take care of himself.


    And it''sing. Arge-scale wind magic that pushes everything down to the ground. The targeted area is just the Arena, but it was so powerful that it reached everyone who are seated at the front seat.


    Ang controlled her magic so that it won''t affect her. As for Shelia, unfortunately, she doesn''t have the ability to create a foothold in mid-air. She can only keep moving, but not stay in one ce. That''s why when the wind ising and pushes her down, she dropped quickly and crashed to the ground. Good thing that was not the ce where Ang''s Ground Spikes are.


    "GUAAAGH!"


    That must have been painful.


    Meanwhile, everyone in the front seats are bracing themselves from the wind. The Werewolves who have strong physical abilities are still able to stand on the ground. But Albert and everyone from my group other than me is unable to do that.


    They are all kneeling on the ground. I''m still able to hold my ground while holding on Ka, Sophie, and Candy, with Jewel, Lina, and Shirley behind me. I''m acting as their shield. Though they are all still kneeling from the force of the wind. I''m just holding on to them so they won''t get blown away.


    As for Victoria, she''s attached to my body. She will be fine.


    "Your Majesty!" Mustache shouted when he sees Albert on the ground.


    Then he quickly casted a wind shield to block Ang''s wind. His level in wind element is higher than Ang''s. Thanks to that, he can block the wind perfectly.


    Albert then able to stand up again thanks to Mustache''s magic.


    "She''s able to have this much power while still intermediate level? I thought that Roy calling her as genius is just an overstatement. She will surpass you in no time, Miguel." Albert said.


    "As long as she uses her power for the sake of the kingdom, I would be happy to have her surpass me. But I will still try to get stronger than anyone." Mustache said.


    Well, that''s great to have so much confidence. The more powerful allies we got, the less work I will have.


    Meanwhile, I''m pulling the girls toward Albert and Mustache. His shield is useful for us. It can protect us from the wind. Though I wish he made it bigger.


    "Thanks, Mustache. We''ll stay here for a while." I said.


    "Oooh¡­ magic sure is nice. Sorry for intruding. Your name is Mustache, huh?" Grandpa Werewolf also sheltering under the shield.


    "Hey! It''s cramped here! I won''t be able to concentrate like this!" Mustache protested.


    Well, let''s ignore him. I don''t think he will undo his magic since Albert is being protected by his shield.


    There''s one more person in our group that wasn''t here. It''s Ian.


    As soon as I told everyone to brace themselves, he instantly turned into a Giant Falcon and fly outside the Colosseum. He''s away from the wind while still keeping watch at the fight and at Albert. He must have no worry since I''m here and Mustache will no doubt protecting Albert.


    Then Mustache make the shield bigger and we no longer stuck together anymore. Though we still standing so close to each other, it''s not as cramped as before.


    In the Arena, Shelia tries to stand up. Looks like the fight is still not over.


    "This is nothing! I can still fight!" She shouted as she''s trying to stand up.


    How will the match go? This magic must have consumed a lot of her mana. But she''s still not giving up. How will she proceed with the match?

 Chapter 218 - And The Winner Is...

    Shelia slowly standing up from the ground despite the pressure from Ang''s wind.


    We also slowly no longer feel the wind thanks to Ang controlling her magic. Since Shelia is already down, instead of attacking a huge area, she concentrates only on pushing Shelia down on the spot. That''s why we no longer feel the wind, and Mustache stopped casting his wind shield.


    To think that Ang can do this while still intermediate level. First, she used arge-scale magic. Then she concentrates all that magic on one spot. No one taught her about it. She''s just too much of a genius. If only she were a bit smarter in other area¡­


    Well, no point in thinking it that way. She''s strong because she''s like this. That''s all there is.


    Shelia must have felt that the wind is getting stronger and it''s harder for her to stand up. So, she transformed into a Werewolf. And this time, it''s no longer a partial transformation. It''s a full transformation.


    Since she''s wearing bikini-like clothes, it''s easy to tell her transformation. Previously, the others can''t see Jack''s legs since they are covered with his pants. But now, everyone can see that Shelia''s legs have hair grown on them.


    Not just the legs. Her arms, back, both side of the front body, the back of her neck, all of them are covered with fur the same color as her hair, ck. The front part of her neck, the middle part of her chest and down to her waist, are not covered. Is there any reason for that? Or is that special only for female Werewolves?


    Her hair has grown longer as well. She already has a long hair from the start, which reached her hip. But now, they almost touched the ground when she stands up straight.


    I wonder¡­ if the Werewolves had a bad haircut, will they just transform themselves to let their hair longer? Then when they transformed back, will they return to normal again? I''m curious.


    Shelia who is in her Werewolf form is enduring the wind, but she''s still unable to move a step from that spot.


    Suddenly, the wind stopped pushing Shelia down while Ang should still have some mana left. Shelia seems confused, but she decided to attack Ang right away.


    But before she attacked, thanks to that moment of confusion which should be less than a second, Ang able to attack her again with her wind magic. But this time, it''s not pushing her down. Instead, the wind circling around and lifted Shelia up. It''s a tornado!


    Shelia who focused her body to attack, got lifted up by the tornado. She spun around inside the tornado without being able to do anything. If she kept her calm, she should be able to escape by using Air Steps. But this is her first time fighting a mage after all, so everything is new to her.


    "It''s not over yet!" Ang shouted.


    Then she¡­ throws a fire into the tornado! It turned into a Fire Tornado!


    The Tornado actually didn''t give Shelia any damage. It was just a normal wind magic after all, not from Wind shes. But Ang added fire into the Tornado, and now Shelia is enduring the fire while being spun around.


    "AAAAAAH!!" Shelia screamed.


    ¡­Ang is too violent. And she hasn''t used her ice magic yet. Why?


    But she still made good decisions. To hit a quick enemy, she needs to use arge-scale magic instead of a small one. If she uses a small-scale magic, no matter how powerful it is, Shelia would still be able to dodge it.


    But now, Shelia is inside the Fire Tornado. With how fast the wind is, and the fire inside, there''s no way anyone would be able to breathe normally.


    I can clearly see inside the Tornado. Although Shelia is unable to breathe and the fire burns her fur, she''s also not giving up. I think those two on the Arena are very simr to each other.


    Shelia forced herself to breakthrough the tornado. She used Air Steps and follow the wind current, and after gaining speed, she left the tornado. I''m the only one who can see that though. Everyone just though that Shelia is defeated.


    "She''sing out." I said to make everyone knows that she''s still fine. Other than the burnt part of her body, and her visible exhaustion.


    Though Ang also already tired as well.


    There''s not much damage in this battle, but both sides exhausted everything they have. Shelia is out of breath, and Ang is out of mana. Though they still have some reserve.


    "Go Shelia! Show these humans how strong we Werewolves are!" Jack shouted.


    "What are you talking about!? You lose to a human already and the gap between you and Shelia is too big! You speak as if everyone is about as strong as Shelia!" Grandpa Werewolf angry at that remark.


    Air Steps and¡­ Wind sh? Both are skills that Werewolves can get when they be stronger. But only Grandpa Werewolf and Shelia able to do it. The gap between those two and the rest of the Werewolves are too big.


    "I have returned, your majesty."


    While we are still watching the match, Ian who was flying in the sky in his Giant Falcon form returned next to us.


    "Oh, Ian. You''re also an advanced level wind mage, right? Why didn''t you put up a shield like Mustache?" I asked.


    "When Master Roy told us to brace ourselves, I don''t know that it would be a wind magic. So, I made sure to escape the range of whatever Lady Ang is trying to do. I know everyone will be fine with Master Roy on their side, but I apologize if I did anything wrong." Ian apologized.


    "There''s nothing wrong with it. If I think Ang''s attack is too powerful, I would escape as well. Let''s go back watching Ang''s fight. Shelia just escaped from the Tornado and hide behind it. You can''t see it from here."


    Just like I say, Shelia is behind the Fire Tornado. She''s in the sky falling without using Air Steps.


    Then after a while, she run on air around the Tornado, and attacked the unprepared Ang using her Wind sh with both her hands.


    Ang noticedte, but she still managed to dodge the attack. But she''s dodging by jumping to the sky with the help of her wind magic. It was a bad decision to jump that high when she can''t fly.


    Hmm? Seems like Shelia''s attack managed to scratched Ang''s right foot. Shelia didn''t attack Ang while she''s in the air maybe because of her exhaustion. Which is good since Ang might still have a chance to win then. But because of the injury on her right foot, shended terribly on the ground while Shelianded perfectly.


    "You seem exhausted. Why don''t you surrender?" Ang provoked Shelia.


    "You''re in a worse state than me. You''re the one who should give up." Shelia replied.


    "Yeah¡­ I think it''s a good idea to rest. But I still have enough mana left for myst attack. If you can block it again, you win." Ang said.


    "Me too¡­ I can only do one more attack. Let''s make this ourst round!" Shelia challenged Ang.


    This will be theirst attack. What will they do?


    Shelia is the same as usual, charging at Ang. But her transformation is gone and now she''s back to her human form with no fur covering her body. But herst attack might be with her partial transformation. I see that her right hand transformed with long sharp ws attached to it.


    As for Ang¡­ she''s also charging forward? She must have another idea.


    The audiences cheered on the two of them. Although those two didn''t take much damages, this fight is better than thest since thest one is more one-sided. Everyone is enjoying the battle.


    When the two are only three meters apart, Ang casted her magic. It''s the ice magic that she hadn''t used at all during the fight. She finally used it now.


    With her ice magic, she froze the ground in front of Shelia. And Shelia who never see ice doesn''t know that one can slip when walking on ice. Shelia slipped and lost her bnce.


    If Ang cleverly made the n to freeze the floor, she''s smarter than I thought. But when I looked at my side, Ka is smiling while giving a thumb up toward Ang. Looks like it was Ka who told Ang to do it. It must be because after I told her about the match, she asked more about Werewolves and I told her about how the Werewolves doesn''t seem to have ever seen ice before.


    This Ka and Angbination is perfect. Ka as the brain, and Ang as the muscle. I mean magic.


    Shelia didn''t fall, but she lost her bnce. Then Ang pulled back her fist, and struck her fist to Shelia''s jaw. She doesn''t have powerful punch, but with wind magic helping her pushes forward her fist, the punch is getting stronger.


    Shelia instantly knocked out and lost her consciousness.


    "Huff¡­ huff¡­ I won!"


    Shelia shouted. Then because she''s too tired, she''s also fainted and about to fall down. But after I see her punch connect to Shelia''s jaw, I quickly run toward her, and grabbed her before she falls down.


    "Well, can it be called as victory? Let''s have Ka heal you for now. You can rest now." I said to Ang before she lost her consciousness.


    Then the audiences cheered at the end of the two''s battle. It was so close. No one knows who will be the winner until the very end.


    I''m about to return to Ka, but I don''t see any Werewolvesing to get Shelia. They are too excited after witnessing the fight, they forget to care about her. I guess I''ll bring her with me. Since Ka has rested enough, she should be able to heal these two.

 Chapter 219 - Grandpa Werewolfs Name

    I carried the two unconscious girls to my seat where Ka is already prepared to cast healing magic. She has drunk a bottle of Mana Potion after her fight. Of course she added honey in it.


    "Ka, heal these two."


    "I''m on it." Ka replied.


    I put the twoying on the floor and Ka immediately casted healing magic. Since she has reached intermediate level in her healing element, she can now casted Area Heal. Although the effect is smaller than normal heal that targeted a single individual, using Area Heal doesn''t waste as much mana as casting two normal healing magic.


    "This is¡­ healing magic?" Red said as he sees healing magic for the first time.


    "I know what you''re thinking, Red. You thought that if she casted healing magic on me, I would be able to live much longer, right? Unfortunately, that''s not the case. Healing magic at that level is unable to heal aging body. And second, I refuse to live longer without having anything to look forward to!" Grandpa Werewolf said as he realizes what Red is thinking.


    Grandpa Werewolf is right. Healing magic is unable to heal aging body. If that''s the case, then there would be many people who lives over their lifespans already. I don''t know about master level healing mage though. They might still be alive. But if that''s the case, then everyone should know about them, right?


    Although the two aren''t injured much, they are too exhausted. But at least healing magic is able to recover stamina slightly as well. I already know that these two girls are already healed, but they haven''t wake up yet since they are too tired.


    "Ka, there are no more wounds on them. But keep casting healing magic on them so they will recover their stamina." I said.


    "Okay."


    Theplexion of the two unconscious girls are getting better. They will soon regain their consciousness after a few more healing magic from Ka.


    It has been quite a while since the fight is over and the girls'' treatment started. We can start thest match right away, but neither of us choose to do so. We will wait until both Ang and Shelia regain their consciousness.


    Both Grandpa Werewolf and I don''t want there to be any burden on any of us during the match. We don''t want to have any useless worry while fighting. Even though we both know that these two are okay, we still choose to wait until they wake up.


    And also, I want everyone, including Ang, to watch my fight. There won''t be any simrity in my fight with any of the battles they have seen me fought before. It''s totally different, and I might lose my life. I want them to witness the limit of what I can do. My limit at the moment I mean. I''m still growing stronger and surpass that limit soon.


    As for Grandpa Werewolf, he''s waiting for Shelia to regain her consciousness. It''s what I thought he''s thinking, but I might be right.


    Shelia is the only Werewolf in the tribe that he put his trust the most to be the strongest. Shelia as the strongest and Red as the smartest, is what I imagine Grandpa Werewolf is thinking.


    He wanted everyone, especially Shelia, to regain the pride of the Werewolf. The tribe that loves battle the most. To have other Werewolves to gain the power of full-fledged Werewolf just like Shelia''s Air Steps.


    That''s what I thought he''s thinking. I also used this chance to stall for time to strategize my tactic against Grandpa Werewolf.


    "Seems like they wille to soon. They''re alright." I said.


    Since I''m a doctor, of course I know when someone is fine or not. And these two are already healed and should wake up anytime soon.


    Just as soon as I thought of that, I see that Shelia is the first one who''s about to wake up. She opened her eyes and see that everyone is surrounding her.


    "This is¡­ so I lost, huh?" Shelia said.


    "Look beside you. You got knocked out after that punch, but as soon as she delivers that blow, she fainted. I say that it was a draw. I hope you will grow even stronger from now on as my contracted monster." I said.


    "That will only happen if you win against me next. You might say that it was a draw, but for us Werewolves, there''s no such thing as draw. It was her loss." Grandpa Werewolf said.


    Well, if he takes that as our win, then I will dly ept it.


    "Yeah. That was my loss. This girl¡­ Ang is powerful. I felt like I almost had no chance at all in the fight. She kept dodging and blocking my attack. I only managed to hit her for real just once near the end of the battle, while her attacks keep hitting me."


    She knows how to take a loss and to analyze it. I bet she will grow even stronger from now on. And with Ang by her side, there might be grow some rivalry between both of them and they will grow stronger side by side. That will be great.


    But I need to take care of the obstacle first. This grandpa who needs walking cane to walk will be my greatest enemy so far. He''s already having difficulty walking, but chose to fight to his death.


    Will he even be able to stand up straight for the fight? Maybe his transformation will help him put some strength in those legs. Back when he swung down that cane of his, he can do that without transforming. Now he will transform, he will get even stronger.


    And what if he had another special skill for powerful Werewolf other than Air Steps and Wind sh?


    While I''m thinking about it, Ang finally wakes up.


    She opened her eyes slowly, then when she saw everyone is watching her, she quickly stands up.


    "Where is she!?"


    Ang must have thought that the battle is still on going.


    "Next to you. The battle is over already. After thatst blow, both you and Shelia fainted. I say that it was a draw, but Grandpa Werewolf said it was their loss. So, we won, right?" I said.


    "There''s no way I would ept that! Shelia, let''s fight again!" Ang asked Shelia for a fight.


    Did she forget she''s already low on mana? And how did she get so energized after fainting?


    Then after Ang asking for a fight, she lost her bnce and almost fall to the floor, but Shirley and Candy grabbed her.


    "We both no longer have any power to fight, but I''ll ept that re-matchter." Shelia said.


    Well, I guess the battle is about to start soon. Should I dy it a bit longer?


    "By the way, I forgot to ask you this. But do you know something about this self-repair spear I have?"


    I grabbed the parts of the spear in my pocket and pour some magic in it. The spear repaired and returned to the form of a normal spear.


    "Self-repair weapon, huh? And it smells quite familiar as well. Wait! It''s the smell of my uncle! I guess he died and you humans turned him into a material for this weapon." Grandpa Werewolf said calmly.


    Using a monster as material is quitemon, but to think that it was the rtive of the monster used as the material saying it calmly is frightening.


    "Hmm¡­ It''s a nostalgic smell. He was weaker than most of the Werewolves at the time, but he loves fighting more than anyone. He must be happy to be used as a weapon and continued fighting."


    Is that fine? Having hisst enemy used his uncle as weapon is fine? I need to change tomon sense of the Werewolves after I became the king.


    "Do you think you have a chance after seeing the two matches? You asked for those matches so you know about Werewolves, right?" Grandpa Werewolf asked.


    "So, you knew? Yes, I did. I still think that I have a chance. I might not be as strong as the Aura user of the past, but I''m trickier to fight than anyone you''ve met." I said confidently. Well, I''m not that confident, but I''m just putting up a front.


    "Tricky? All humans I''ve fought are all tricky. Let''s have a good fight, shall we?"


    "Hah! You don''t mind that I''m using your uncle to stab your behind, right?" I tried to provoke him, but I might have said it wrongly.


    "Pfft! Ahaha! Roy! You need to change the wording! That was hrious!" It was the slime on my shoulder who''sughing.


    Hmm¡­ using your uncle¡­ stab your behind¡­ those were indeed the wrong words. I guess I''m unable to think calmly. Let''s take a few breaths before fighting.


    "You don''t mind if I bring this one with me, right? I''m a summoner after all." I asked while pointing at Victoria.


    "I don''t mind. It won''t be my first time fighting against a summoner and their monsters. Though I doubt you can have her fight since slimes are too weak to cause me trouble." Grandpa Werewolf proudly said.


    "Then¡­ before we fight, I have something to ask. What''s your name?"


    "Right. I forgot to tell you my name and everyone has been calling me Grandpa all this time. Then I''ll introduce myself. My name is Doraqy" Grandpa introduced himself after all this time.


    "You''re a friggin'' Werewolf, Goddammit!!! Not a Vampire!" Shouted Victoria.


    I don''t get what she''s talking about, but I guess I''ll call him Grandpa Werewolf as usual since that name is difficult to pronounce.

 Chapter 220 - Finally, Its My Turn!

    "That''s a difficult name to remember." I said.


    "No! It was an easy name to remember, but that name should belong to the Vampire! Not a Werewolf!" Victoriained.


    "That was just from the imagination in your world, right? It was just a fiction in your world. This is the real thing. His name is¡­ Dora!"


    "Now he became an explorer!"


    Why does Victoria have too many things toin? Just what the hell is going on in her world? Do they actually fight over fictional characters?


    "You can just call me Grandpa like usual. Now¡­ shall we?"


    The both of us looked at each other and nodded. The atmosphere changed. Everyone now feels the intense pressure of the next match before it started.


    Then both of us jumped at the same time from the audience seat to the Arena.


    While mid-air, I already pocketed back the Uncle Spear I split to pieces, and prepared Victoria in my hand to transform immediately. I already worn my arm guards made from the Giant Smander''s scales since I returned to this world. I also wear the shin guards as well. But now I need a new name for my spear. Not a Self-repair Spear, or Uncle Spear. That''s just weird.


    Grandpa Werewolf also transformed while both of us are still mid-air before our feet touched the ground. He transformed into a gray Werewolf, but there''s one difference from the other two Werewolves. He has a tail!


    But I have to stop thinking about it for now. Because I know that once his foot touched the ground, he will move toward me. There will be no signal for us to fight. I already know from that he loves battle more than anyone. That''s enough for me to know that once we both entered the Arena; he will attack right away.


    And I''m right. As soon as both our feet touched the ground, he instantly leaped forward toward me. Good thing that I jumped quite far away from him. I have enough time to protect myself.


    That was what I thought, but looking at his attack, I have better idea. Instead of protecting myself, I should go for the counter. Good thing Grandpa choose to attack from close range instead of from distance.


    He swung his right hand horizontally. As soon as he''s swinging his hand, I jumped above his hand, grabbed it with my right hand to alter its trajectory and to put more strength in my attack, which is a hit on his temple with my left knee.


    Normally, it should make any average people to have their brain shaken, and possibly knocked out in one hit. But this Grandpa is not normal at all. He got hit by a strong attack, but he just smiled instead.


    He put more power into his right hand which is being grabbed by me, and swung it back. I''m still holding onto it because if I let go, he will attack me with his left. But as he swung his right hand, I let go of his hand and thrown away to the wall. But Inded nicely on my feet. I stand up in a rxed manner, and so did Grandpa Werewolf. We stare at each other. I guess it''s time for a short chat.


    "Hey! You have a tail!" I said.


    "Yeah! Once Werewolves got even stronger, they will grow a tail when they''re transforming. And I''m the only one who have a tail in this tribe. Proof that I''m the strongest, and also proof that everyone else is too weak! What a disappointment."


    He keeps saying how he regretted the regression on the Werewolves. I got bored of it.


    "That tail looks so fluffy!" I said.


    "It is indeed! I would sleep every night while hugging my tail since they are so fluffy!" Grandpa replied.


    Damn, I''m jealous! I wanted to hug fluffy tail as well! I guess I won''t fix the misunderstanding with Shelia. Just so that once she grows stronger and grows a tail, I can sleep with her.


    While we were chatting, the audience finally realized what''s going on. There''s no signal to the battle and the fight already started. It was too quick for everyone to realize it. That bout only takes about a second, then suddenly I was thrown to the wall andnded safely. No wonder no one is a match against Grandpa.


    Oh, God! I don''t want to die! I shouldn''t have agreed to the match! Or maybe agreeing but never returned here! I think I will have to use my trump card. But let''s see if I can continue without having to use my trump card.


    That mean¡­ I have to use everything else!


    This time, I''m the one rushing forward. The Uncle Spear in my pocket will be usedter. This time, I had a lot of Victoria''s clones to turns into my armor. The one I wore when fighting the Giant Smander. With how well I can control my Aura, my armor is stronger than that time. And there''s no ears and cape as well. Those are hindrances.


    As for weapon, I transformed the real Victoria into a sword. Since it''s the most versatile weapon I can use. I covered Victosword with my Aura as well.


    As I rushed toward Grandpa, I thought of what kind of attack I should use. Since the one I have confident the most is a stabbing attack, I used it. I pulled Victosword back, and prepared to stab Grandpa.


    Then when he''s within my reach, I pushed the sword for the first attack. It was a very fast attack, but Grandpa still calmly blocked it with his arm.


    But that''s a wrong decision. His body might be strong, but that''s still part of the body. Any attack it received will give Grandpa some damage.


    I thrusted the sword to his left arm which is trying to block it, but it only managed to pierce about one cm. That will be healed with his self-recovery skill. So, I quickly attacked again.


    While the tip of the sword is still in his arm, I swung it down powerfully so it will give more damage. His left arm is now wounded and he''s bleeding. But as I thought, his wound already started to heal. I need to think that his self-recovery skill is much better than Jack and Shelia.


    This time, I''m continue swinging my Victosword. I''m trying to give Grandpa as much damage as possible withbinations of quick attacks, but Grandpa Werewolf seems to have noticed it as well. He no longer thinks of blocking my attacks, and choose to dodge it while trying to give me a counter.


    Of course since I know that, I already prepared for it. This time, none of our attacks hit each other. My Victosword would sh empty air, and so did Grandpa Werewolf''s ws. But there''s a big difference here.


    Grandpa Werewolf would dodge once he saw my Victosword''s trajectory after I swung my weapon, while I would make my move once I see his muscle is about to swing which way. I''m reading ahead to dodge the attack before he moves, while he dodge my moves after he saw it slightly.


    I''m just barely dodging his attack while he still has some leeway. Just show how much faster he is. I thought that I should be faster than Shelia, but to think the gap is still this much. I guess I can''t keep fighting this way.


    I keep swinging Victosword while dodging his attack, looking for a chance to surprise him. For the audience, it must be a sight to behold. With the Werewolves thinking that it''s the first time their real Werewolf King fight this way. They must have only seen him ending a fight so quick since no one is a match against him.


    While on my side, the king and his guard were shocked to see the fight. It''s their first time seeing a close quarterbat since they only know about magic. As for the others, they might have seen it before since we asionally went on quests as a party, but this is their first time seeing me fight an opponent I can''t hit.


    Unlike the two matches from before, this match is extremely silent since no one is cheering. They just want to see how the battle goes and how it will end.


    Finally, I found a chance!


    After dodging Grandpa''s attack, I spun my body clockwise and tried to hit Grandpa with my weapon. Grandpa sees that I''m making a huge swing. He chooses to step back to make my Victosword miss. But that''s only if I''m using normal weapon.


    While spinning, when my back is facing him and my body hid my weapon, I transformed Victoria into a huge hammer, and the handle is longer than Victosword. Grandpa is making the wrong decision by stepping back.


    Then when my eyes met his, he noticed that my weapon is no longer a sword and tries to block it. But the hammer is so big and I made a huge swing. Even if he''s blocking it, he will still be blown away.


    Grandpa''s arm unable to fully block therge surface of the hammer, as some parts of his body also got hit by it. Then I put more strength on the swing to throw him away to the wall.


    Grandpa''s back crashed the wall. The wall is destroyed and some Werewolves on the front seats of that part almost fall over to the Arena.


    I did it! That''s the first real damage he received in this battle!

 Chapter 221 - Pummeling Grandpa Werewolf

    During the first sh, I was the one thrown to the wall. And this time, it was Grandpa Werewolf''s turn to be thrown to the wall. Although Inded safely, Grandpa''s back crashed on the wall. The shock was enough to make the Werewolves on the front seat to lose their bnce. Good thing none of them fall into the Arena. And they should be sitting instead of standing.


    During the first sh, we stopped for a while and have a little chat. But this time, I won''t let him have any moment to rest.


    Even before he crashed to the wall, I already rushed over him. Just as he was about to recover from the crash, I''m already right in front of him.


    Now, what should I do to him?


    1st option, I smash him with Victohammer. But I doubt it would kill him. I don''t see much damage from the previous hammer smash. When I the hammer hit him, He let go of his footing to reduce the damage. Then he took the hammer with the side of his body and his arms. That makes most of the damage he took is just from the time he crashed to the wall. If I swung my hammer again, he would be prepared now.


    2nd option, using spear to pierce through his body. He will still be prepared for it. And his skin and fur are too thick. Even Victosword only pierced a little bit.


    3rd option, using Victosword to sh him over and over again. Hmm¡­ I don''t think so. As long as he endures the sh, he would still be able to move as usual. And I don''t think my sh will be able to damage his vital as well. He will counter me in no time.


    Then thest option, or at least from what I can think of. Usingbination attacks of punches and kicks. Those are the fastest attack I can use and I rarely use them on monsters. But if I want to stop him from moving, that''s the best option.


    The 4th option it is!


    But there''s no way I would purposely hurt my own fists. I guess I should get Victoria and her clones transformed into a knuckleduster. No, I might need to use my palm and grabbing as well. I guess a gauntlet is better.


    Although I''m wearing armor now, I ignore defense for now and go all out in my attack. Victoria and her clones transformed into gauntlets, shoes, elbow pads, and knee pads as well. in case I need to use my elbows and knees as well.


    "This- Urgh!" Grandpa Werewolf about to say something when my right fist hit his jaw.


    From the beginning of the match, I already use my Divine Vision to focus only on Grandpa Werewolf and the Arena. I can see the movement of his muscle. That''s why when Grandpa opened his mouth, that''s a good chance for me to hit his jaw. But of course, that''s not everything.


    After that one hit, I quickly throw another punch with my left. This left straight hit his jaw again.


    Then Grandpa Werewolf started to move. Either to counter attack or to block, I don''t care. As soon as I see his muscle moves, I attacked that part. First it was his left shoulder. He might have wanted to block my attack with his left, but I won''t let him. Then it was his right shoulder. I hit him again on his shoulder.


    When I see his lower body''s muscles started to tensed up as well, I kicked his knee or his thigh. I have to keep attacking before he can move. I hope I can win the fight this way, but I doubt it will be that easy. Though I will keep attacking like this.


    Right jab, left hook, right elbow, left knee, right kick, liver blow, uppercut, knee to the jaw, I didn''t stop at all. Even when I didn''t see his muscle moves, I would still continue attacking.


    The audience got stunned again to see that the battle suddenly turned one-sided. Only my friends are happy with what they''re seeing. But no one knows that Grandpa Werewolf still keep his calm even after I''m pummeling him again and again.


    In fact, he''s smiling!


    He''s happy that he''s fighting for real after a thousand years!


    But my attacks should still give him some damage. Or is it that his self-recovery skill is much more powerful than even Shelia''s?


    Although my attacks did some damage, I didn''t see his inner organ being hurt. Or maybe they have been healed instantly. Whatever the case, I must not stop my barrage of attack!


    And then, I see Grandpa Werewolf''s muscle on his right shoulder moves. As usual, I punched his shoulder to stop him from moving. But this time, he endured it and still moves his right arm. He raises his right hand and swung his w toward me!


    I was so close to him, but I can see where his attack trajectory would be. Afraid that it might be a long-distance attack as well, I ducked on the spot instead of backing away. And I was right. The wall on the opposite side had a huge ws mark on it. I think some of the attack hit the Werewolves, but it''s not the time for me to worry about them.


    After he swung his arm, I grabbed his right arm, and pushed it to the wall, right to the left side of his head. Now his upper arm is chocking on his neck and his right shoulder is dislocated.


    "AARGH!!"


    This is the first time he''s screaming in pain. Before, he was mostly surprised by my attack. But seems like dislocating his shoulder and pressing his arm on his neck do the trick. But now I can''t do much anymore.


    My right hand is busy pressing his right hand to have his upper arm chokes his own neck. I can only attack with my left and my kicks. And if he tries to attack me with his left, I have no choice but to release him and step back.


    His limbs are iling since he''s unable to take a breath. Not only I''m choking him with his own upper arm, I''m also making sure that he doesn''t have much air in front of his mouth and nose with my air magic.


    But obviously, Grandpa Werewolf is not a normal enemy. He still put his strength on his left arm and tries to attack me. So, I have no choice but to step back. I release his right hand and he finally able to catch a breath. But his right arm now dangling down and he''s unable to move it. I guess that''s still a good result.


    Since it seems like he won''t let me get close again, I retreated back a few steps and rxed my body to rest even for a second. That barrage of attack is tiring for me too.


    "Aaargh! That''s hurt! It''s been a while since I got attacked so one-sidedly! Boy, you''re good!" Grandpa Werewolf praised me.


    "It''s not boy. It''s Roy. I guess they are kind of simr. Why not Broy?" I said.


    "Hmm¡­ just like you said, you are much more trickier to fight. Most of the fights I had, are against a much more prideful opponent. So, when they see me down, they stopped attacking. And I am simr to them as well. But this is really the first time I fought against someone like you. Even at this age, I still got to experience something new, huh?" Grandpa ignored my remark and continued speaking. Is Broy really a bad name?


    "Well, if someone says that they have a lot of experience and know everything, I say that that person is a liar. Do you have other things you wanted to experience? I might be able to help you with that. What about giving up? You never give up once in your life, right?"


    "Haha! Good one! But no, that is something I will never do. I AM THE PROUD WEREWOLF! THERE''S NO WAY I WOULD GIVE UP!" Suddenly Grandpa Werewolf screamed. His scream is more than twice louder than Jewel shouting.


    If I cover Aura on my eardrums, will the voice be quieter? Oh, it is a lot quieter! But I won''t do it in a fight, so I guess I''ll stop doing it. But it might be a good idea if don''t want to be bothered at home.


    Hearing Grandpa Werewolf scream, every Werewolf got shaken to the core. The Proud Werewolf inside them must be ashamed of what they have been doing so far. To not grow stronger like the Werewolves of the past and lost their prides.


    Well, I can fix thatter once I became the Werewolf King. But I will still abolish deathmatch among Werewolves.


    Grandpa Werewolf then fixed his dislocated shoulder. Unlike most humans whose joints I dislocated, seems like he knows what to do.


    "Shall we continue, Roy?" Grandpa asked.


    "I still prefer you to give up, but sure."


    This time he''s rushing toward me while I''m still standing on the ground. The gauntlets and everything are already transformed back to the ck armor. Then with my right hand in front of me, I made a gesture like I''m about to snap my finger.


    "Will it be magic this time!? Bring it on!" Grandpa Werewolf shouted.


    It is indeed magic, but I doubt he will be able to endure it. I practiced this magic a lot to use against him. This is one of the trump cards I saved for the fight against him.


    Then when he''s five meters in front of me, I snapped my finger and the magic is activated.


    "AAAAAAAARRRGHHH!!!" Grandpa Werewolf screamed again. This time he''s suffering more than when I dislocated his shoulder.


    Everyone watching is shocked to see that Grandpa Werewolf is screaming all of a sudden. Even everyone I bring with me. No one knows what I did, other than I myself and Victoria.


    "Huhuhu¡­ You''re one evil bastard, Roy!" Victoria praised me while still in armor form.


    I guess I can say that it''s extremely effective.

 Chapter 222 - The Match Goes On

    And so, Grandpa Werewolf is screaming after I snapped my finger. What did I do to make him like that? The answer is easy once you see he''s pinching his nose.


    "Aaargh! What is this smell!?" Grandpa Werewolf shouted.


    That''s correct! I use my air magic! And this time, I''m not using it make the air thinner and have him harder to breathe. I''m using air magic to create a smelly gas! The kind that any creature with powerful sense of smell would suffer from.


    I''m still beginner level in my air element, but somehow, I can create a mmable gas, sleeping gas, and smelly gas. It''s more of gas element than air element, but what''s the difference? Victoria said that air is a mixture of gases after all, and seeing how I can create many types of gases, I think she''s right.


    Though I don''t know why I''m still unable to create poisonous gases. Maybe since there are many kinds of poison as well and I''m unable to think of one to make.


    As for mmable gas, I just thought of air that will make fire bigger or will explode once fire touches them. Sleeping gas, air that makes people go to sleep. Though I won''t use it on myself when I have difficulty sleeping. And this smelly gas¡­ I used my own fart as example.


    And Victoria''s teaching helped a lot as well. It''s difficult to imagine Oxygen, Hydrogen, and other gens. That''s why I used imagination instead of difficult knowledge.


    Maybe the reason why I can''t make poisonous gas is because I don''t know what type of poison I want to make. Will it be one that kill people? Or just hurting them? If it''s just for hurting them, how painful it will be? What is the side effect? I can''t imagine that much since I know too much about poison. I''m a doctor after all.


    And with my sense of survival, I would like to create poisonous gas that kill people instantly. But somehow, I can''t do it. Then when I want to use other type of poison, like the one that gives you rashes, I started imagining what other side effect to have and my image of the poison mixed. Then the magic I want to use is abruptly cancelled. One must have a good image of what magic they want to use after all. That''s why I give up creating poisonous gas. At least for now.


    Grandpa Werewolf is suffering from the smell, and I used that as a chance. This time, I used Victosword as weapon and continuously shed at him. Since I can''t cut deep enough to hit his vital, I just shed at him randomly. His blood painted the ground around him, but I still shed at him.


    Then when he started to make his move, I stepped back quickly.


    "Damn you!"


    Grandpa Werewolf is angry because of it. Well, purposely attacking someone''s weaknesses will always make anyone angry. Even this Grandpa who seems to be always calm would be angry.


    Then Grandpa Werewolf swung his left hand at me. But this time, instead of dodging, I stay on the spot and prepare to receive his attack. With Victospear that is.


    Before he finished his swing, I thrusted Victospear at his iing hand. Combining my attack with his force, my Victosword makes a hole in his left hand.


    The de of the spear pierced Grandpa Werewolf''s hand. Then before he can grab my weapon, I transformed Victospear''s shaft smaller and lost its de, then I pulled it back.


    That hole in his left hand is the biggest damage he received other than the dislocated right shoulder that has been fixed. The smelly gas is not included.


    And then, I snapped my finger again. Grandpa Werewolf screamed from the smell again, and I attacked him again.


    I have been doing repetitive attack over and over again in this match, but since it worked, I continue doing it.


    I attacked him, he tried to fight back, I counter him, then snapped my finger, smelly gas appears in front of him, then I attacked him. It keeps going in circle.


    And of course, since Grandpa got hit by the same trick again and again, his anger builds up.


    He swung his right hand this time, and even though I pushed my Victospear at his hand, he didn''t stop at all! I''m not prepared to take this damage!


    I tried to gather my Aura in the spot where his w is attacking, but my defense is still too weak. I got damaged badly just by that one attack.


    "Roy!" Sophie shouted my name seeing me injured badly.


    The armor of Blobbies is destroyed, my shirt is torn, and there''s a wound about 2 cm deep from my left chest to my right stomach. Close to my lung and my liver. If I didn''t gather my Aura on those area, I would be dead in one hit.


    But it''s still way too strong. I kneeled on the spot from the damage.


    "Using smell to gain advantages¡­ I apud for your effort! But this is the end, Roy!"


    I guess I won''t be able to fight back like this, huh? That''s what I want Grandpa Werewolf to think!


    I used more Blobbies to cover my body. Not as an armor, but to press the wound tightly like a bandage.


    In the end¡­ I''m not good at defending. Then let''s attack him!


    Ignoring the pain on my chest, I walked toward Grandpa Werewolf. I can finally see some wounds recover slowly! His self-recovery skill is getting slower, now I can see my chance at victory!


    "Hah! You''re approaching me in your death? That''s good! Come here!" Grandpa weed me with open arms. That''s just stupid.


    "I''m not dying. I''m winning. With this range, there''s no way you can attack me, right?"


    I stand up straight while enduring the pain on my chest. His chest is right in front of me. He''s about 2 meters tall when he''s standing straight. He usually bends down a little when he''s about to attack, but now he thinks that he''s winning after hisst attack hit me, he''s standing straight. I still need to look up to see his face, but with this range of less than 5 cm between each other, there''s no way his attack can reach me.


    What''s he gonna do? Hug me?


    I don''t think Werewolves learn to fight this close. But my attack power will be greatly lessened as well.


    My first attack while enduring the pain is a headbutt to his chest. Then while maintaining my close distance with him, I throw a series of short and quick punches. The damage isn''t as great as the time I pummeled him to the wall, but from how his wounds are recovering slowly, I''m sure he got some damages on him.


    I stepped on his toes to stop him from moving back and increasing the distance, and throws an uppercut to his body. His big size is a weakness when we''re fighting this close. The only way to fight this close for him is if he learned grappling moves. There''s no way he knows about grappling when even I needed to learned from Victoria who knows about it in her world.


    I also want to use my grappling moves, but any poor execution will only give him a chance to fight back. I''m not that experienced in grappling. I should have learned more about it. So I only throws a sessive quick and shorts attack.


    Grandpa tried to attack me. He reaches forward both his arms with me in between, and pulled back only his hands. His w would stab my back this way, but his attack is so obvious since we''re this close.


    I jumped when his w is so to me. Grandpa Werewolf unable to stop his attack, so he ended up attacking his own body with his ws. And I added more injuries with a kick as Inded and kicked his hands whose ws are still stabbing his body.


    While his ws are still stabbing, I finally increased the distance, and with Victosword and Uncle Spear, I attacked him. shes and stabs. He can only attack if he pulled his ws, but that will only increase the damage. He shouldn''t be able to fight back this way.


    I was wrong. He''s still managed to attack me.


    What I don''t expect was that while he still has his hands stuck on his chest, he tried to bite me! I''m too slow to dodge, so I gather my Aura on my right shoulder, and let it get bitten.


    "AAAAAAAAAAARRRGGHHH!!" This time, I''m the one screaming.


    It''s hurt, dammit! It''s hurt!


    Grandpa sunk his teeth into my shoulder, and at the same time, he pulled away his own hands from his chest.


    I''m right in front of him, so I received that back punch directly while not prepared my Aura. I received the full impact of that attack. And the worst thing of all is that his jaw is not letting go of my shoulder. Which mean I got swung by that punch and my shoulder received deeper wounds.


    I already dropped my Victosword when he bit my shoulder, so only Uncle Spear is on my left. I gather my Aura on the tip of that spear and stabbed Grandpa''s chest when he''s about to attack me again.


    The pain of that stab makes him opened his mouth and I kicked his chest so I can finally be released. But there''s a bit of my flesh still in his mouth.


    "AAAAARGH!!"


    It was too painful, so I helped myself by crying. Crying makes me feel less of the pain after all. I also rolled on the ground. I don''t intend on acting cool and endure the pain at all. If I can relieve the pain by crying even a little, I will choose to cry.


    Now¡­ what should I do? He''s just too strong. And I don''t think he will ept my surrender.


    Good thing I haven''t use everything in my arsenal. He won''t expect what I will do next.

 Chapter 223 - I Can Run On Air Too!

    It''s hurt!


    My body hurts! From that w attack and that backfist attack, and the bite on my shoulder! Everything is painful!


    I still managed to use the Blobbies to wrap them tightly around my shoulder as well. But my right arm is still painful to move. At least the Blobbies will help me move my shoulder.


    I snapped Uncle Spear again and pocketed them to useter.


    This time, I made another finger snapping gesture again with my left hand. Seeing that gesture, Grandpa Werewolf who was about to charge at me moves sideways. He''s afraid that he will be distracted again by the smell.


    I don''t have any intention on using that magic again. I only made that gesture to stall for time to cool my head from the pain. They are too painful and I need a while to rest. Good thing Grandpa Werewolf got baited by my finger snap.


    I don''t need to snap my finger to let out that smell, it''s just a distraction. And it''s useful to trick him.


    The pain is still there on my shoulder and my chest, but I somehow managed to keep a cool head and prepare for a counter.


    I snapped my fingers while Grandpa Werewolf is on the move. Then noticing that there is no smell at all, he must have thought that he escaped from the area I made that smell, but I haven''t done anything yet.


    The real smelly gas is already in front of me. Right where Grandpa Werewolf ising. He''s not prepared to smell it right there, so he was distracted by the smell.


    I used that chance to get some distance and grabbed Victoria who was thrown by his bite. I can just summon her to me, but I won''t do that to reserve my mana.


    I transformed Victoria into a Desert Eagle, and some Blobbies to do the same. Now I''m equipped with guns on both hands. Using other Blobbies as bullets, Ipress the air inside the guns and shot them toward Grandpa Werewolf.


    I shot a bullet once with the Blobbygun on my right, then shot another one with Victogun on my left whilepressing air on Blobbygun and reloading the bullet, then I shot with my Blobbygun again and do the same with Victogun. I keep repeating the process.


    Using Blobbies are really convenient. It seems as if I have unlimited bullets. And I can attack from a safe distance. Although the Aura I pour to those bullets doesn''tst long, it was still quite effective since the Blobbybullets are sharp and pointy, and I had them spin very fast.


    They don''t pierce Grandpa Werewolf''s fur, but it''s still enough to damage him. Only enough to damage his skin. And since I shot rapidly non-stop, he has no choice but to defend. I have enough time to rest while he''s defending.


    But this isn''t enough to defeat Grandpa Werewolf.


    I keep shooting until I feel like I can move better. Then I threw away Blobbygun to the ground and transform Victoria into a whip.


    I attacked the whip, not to damage Grandpa. But to wrap it around his limb.


    Grandpa tried to block my whip with his hand, so I had Victoria moves the whip and wrap it around his hand. Then while grabbing Victowhip, I leaped toward Grandpa and shrink the whip at the same time to make myself faster.


    Mid-flight, I pulled my other hand and makes it as if I''m about to throw a punch at his head. Grandpa tried to block my punch with the other hand which is not being wrapped, but the punch neveres.


    It was because I changed into a kick. When Grandpa''s hand is in front of his head, I move my body so my feet will reach him first. And then with both my feetnded on his chest, Grandpa Werewolf blown away. And since the kick hit straight on his bleeding chest, the damage is doubled.


    While he''s mid-flight, my hand still holding onto Victowhip. Then I swung the whip around and spin. Grandpa Werewolf were spun around, and then I throw him to a certain ce. The ce where Ang used Ground Spikes before.


    I aimed Grandpa at the spike which was protruding diagonally at us. I didn''t let go of the whip from his hand, I just make the whip extendable.


    Grandpa''s back hit the spike right on his spine. But only the spike got destroyed. Even his spine is so damn strong!


    But since the whip is still connecting us, I shrunk the whip again and use both my feet again to kick him. The Ground Spike got destroyed. Then I see his hand is reaching toward the whip wrapping his hand! He must have wanted to throw me the same way!


    "Victoria, release!"


    In panic, I shouted to have Victoria release Grandpa. I don''t need to shout it out, but I guess I panicked too much.


    Grandpa slowly stands up and walk out of the destroyed Ground Spikes. Damn! How could he stay that calm!


    But still, old age has taken its toll on him. He looks extremely exhausted. I still have a chance to win!


    "Roy¡­ you aren''t like any other Aura users I have fought. Not even the one I lost against. But you are much more of a genius than him even though you''re weaker. But that''s makes this fight even more interesting!" Grandpa shouted.


    "Well, I''m not happy at all! Can''t you just drop dead already!?"


    Even with the two of us talking, no one watching interested in our chat. They are already realized that this is a real deathmatch with both our lives on the line.


    The Werewolves looked intensely at Grandpa Werewolf trying to learn everything they can from him in his veryst fight.


    As for the humans¡­ they all looked worried now. They finally realize that I''m not joking when I said I might lose and die. The girls have tears down on their cheeks, but none of them take off their eyes from me. Well, everyone except Ang.


    I don''t know if she''s not worried at all or haveplete faith in me. I think she''s the one who believed me from the first ce that I might die. She''s an idiot after all, and I told her to not think too much and just believe in what we say. So, she must have believed from the start that I might really die.


    Even Albert looks so worried. I hope if I win, he will give me less work to do.


    Now then, what to do? Should I enter extremely closebat again? That will only give him chance to counter attack since he has experienced it.


    I''m about to shot Grandpa Werewolf again, but then he used his long-distance attack! He swung his arms in a cross shape, and it targeted at me. I can only jump to dodge it.


    He finally used his Wind sh-like attack. Then while I''m mid-air, I tried to shoot at him again, but he quickly run on air. And not straight at me. He moves in a zig-zag manner. I can''t hit him with that speed of his.


    But at least he loves close quarterbat more than attacking from distance. Which is good for me.


    He then gets close to me while I''m still mid-air, and about to sh his ws at me, but I used Air Steps to move mid-air and dodge.


    "You can run on air as well?"


    "You''re not the only special one!"


    I dodged by jumping to above him, then I made another step right above me. I stepped on it with while upside down, and kicked the air powerfully and dropped down very fast. I transformed Victoria into a gauntlet again, put all my strength on my left, and punch Grandpa down from above!


    With the speed I''m falling, the force of my punch, and gravity helping as well, Grandpa fall to the ground headfirst.


    Then I made another step, and make my fall even faster as I aimed my knee at Grandpa Werewolf''s head. The impact creates a crater in the middle of the Arena.


    I hope this is my chance to win.


    Like before, I pummeled him down again and again. But since my right shoulder is injured badly, I only attacked with my left.


    Of course Grandpa can counter it this time. He forces himself to stand up, and charged his body toward me! A Body m!


    It''s not an attack I would imagine a Werewolf would do, so even though I saw his muscle movement, I did not expect it and unable to dodge in time.


    I got blown away, but I tried to fix my bnce on air andnded safely on the ground. But that blow hit my chest square and blood ising out of the gap of the Blobbies Bandages. The red blood painted my waist down to my feet.


    Again, it''s too painful! I''m lucky to still be able to stay conscious with this much pain!


    But there''s a good thing. Right now, I''m in the right position where I can use my trump card.


    This will be my veryst attack!

 Chapter 224 - Lets Awoo Together!

    Now is the time to do it!


    I stood on the spot while Grandpa Werewolf started to rush toward me. Good thing that he''s running straight at me.


    When he started running, I also prepare to charge forward as well. I picked Uncle Spear again to pierce him with it. Then when he got closer, I threw Victoria to his face and have her block his vision for a while.


    I didn''t use smelly gas this time. I need him to keep moving forward while his vision is blocked.


    He keeps charging at me even though his vision is blocked. It was thanks to his sense of smell that he knows my position. What he didn''t know is that he just passed on the Blobbygun I threw on the ground before. I haven''t had Victoria make those Blobbygun disappear yet. It was for this exact moment!


    Once I see his body is above the Blobbygun, I opened a small portal in front of me. Barely enough to have my arm enters it. And the other portal is right above the Blobbygun, just behind Grandpa Werewolf after he passed it.


    I thrusted Uncle Spear into the portal and the spear appear behind Grandpa Werewolf. While Grandpa swung his arm to attack me. But he stopped right beside my face. It was because Uncle Spear stabbed him in his heart from behind. Grandpa was surprised that he was suddenly got hit from behind


    This is my trump card! Portals!


    Good thing I saved my mana. And Grandpa didn''t prepare to get hit from the back despite that''s the first thing I said before the match begin. Although it was a bit misleading, I did say that this will happen.


    Then I released the spear, and kicked it into the portal so the whole spear wille out from the other side, and pierced him deeper in the heart. Once I see the spear entered, I closed the portal.


    Grandpa fell forward. This time, the battle has ended for sure. Although he''s still alive, he will die soon. Uncle Spear has pierced his heart. Even with healing magic, he has already injured badly and won''t recover.


    "Haaaaah- finally, it''s over!"


    I relieved a sigh as I fall back and lied down on the ground. It was too much. This battle uses everything I have. My body is hurting and my shoulder got bitten. Good thing those wounds can still be closed with healing magic.


    "Ugh¡­ so I lost, huh? That was such an interesting match. You are too weak to bepared with other Aura users, but you used strategies to ovee your weaknesses. I have no more regret."


    Grandpa Werewolf said as he slowly raised his body and sat cross-legged. He''s out of strength now for real. And he knows death ising.


    "Grandpa!" Shelia enters the Arena from the audience seat, followed by Red, Jack, and some other Werewolves. They must be the ones closest to Grandpa Werewolf. In the end, he is quite loved by everyone in his tribe.


    "Roy!" And I''m also loved by my friends and girlfriends as well. All of them running here looked worried about me. I don''t even have the strength to sit down, so I justy on my back while looking at the sky, waiting to be healed.


    "Don''t shout. Your voice is ringing in my head. Just heal me already, the fight is over." I said while still looking at the sky.


    Ka then hurriedly casted a quite powerful healing magic on me. It''s not an Area Heal, so Grandpa Werewolf were unaffected by it.


    I can see that my body is healing. Though the scar might stay for the rest of my life. It''s not like I hate scars, so I don''t mind if I have it. In fact, it might look cool. Though I still hope the bite marks will disappear.


    Thanks to Ka''s heal, I have enough power to sit down now. With the help of Sophie pulling me up to a sitting position, I faced Grandpa Werewolf who is in hisst breath.


    "Well, I guess I won." I said while smiling.


    "Yes, you did. Since I''m too old now, there are many moves that I can''t do. Though that is just an excuse. A loss is a loss. And even if I''m still in my peak, you would still have other ns to bring me down, right?" Grandpa asked.


    "Who knows? But if the situation is different, I will refuse to fight and escape as fast as I can. That is always an option for me."


    "Hah! Just like my uncle said, fighting a stronger opponent is much easier against a tricky one!" I don''t know why he''s so proud when he says that. And I think his uncle is a wise Werewolf despite being weak. And that might be the reason why he''s proud of his uncle.


    "Roy, you really stabbed him with his own uncle from behind. Though that''s not what I like to see." Victoria suddenly interjected.


    "YOU SHUT UP!" Can''t she feel the atmosphere? Someone so loved by many people is dying here.


    "You! Healer! Use your healing magic on Grandpa!" Shelia asked Ka to heal Grandpa Werewolf.


    Shelia then quickly left my side and started to cast healing magic on Grandpa Werewolf, but it''s not working.


    "Don''t waste your mana on me, youngdy. I know when my time is up." Grandpa Werewolf stopped Ka on using her magic anymore.


    "But Grandpa¡­"


    "It was fun. I had the greatest battle ever on myst day. Shelia, Red, and everyone else. I always said that you are all disappointment since you are too weak. But the truth is I''m proud of you to be able to live in harmony in the tribe. It''s something we don''t have before my reign as the king. But you all heard what Roy said before. About the iing war. You all now need to get even stronger than I am! In theing war, we have to proof everyone that we are the strongest race! From now on, you will follow Roy as your king!" Grandpa Werewolf dered that I''m the Werewolf King from now on.


    "Grandpa¡­"


    "This spear¡­ My uncle must be proud to have his own body turned into weapon that ends up used by the Werewolf King. I''ll tell you his name as my gift to you." Grandpa said to me.


    Please not a difficult name, please not a difficult name!


    "His name is Reiz. The Weakest Werewolf in the past who aimed to be the strongest. With this spear, I hope you will lead the Werewolves toward victory and grant his dream to be the strongest." Grandpa asked me to be the strongest.


    "Well, I don''t know about being the strongest, but I promise you that I will try my best to protect everyone and survive. That''s what I''m trying to achieve in this lifetime." I said.


    "This lifetime? I see¡­ you''re from another timeline. I hope whatever you want to change will change. Farewell¡­ Werewolf King." Grandpa said on hisst breath. After that, he closed his eyes and no longer breathing. Though he seems satisfied seeing the expression from his face.


    Everyone mourned on his death. The death of the Werewolf King who reigned for over a thousand years. This is the saddest moment on this tribe''s history.


    After a short moment of silence, Red approached me. I''m also trying to stand back up with the help of Candy and Sophie.


    "King."


    "What is it?"


    "The war ising, right? And we will lose everything if we lost." Red asked.


    "Yeah, that''s right. And not just you, my world and your world, both will be destroyed by this enemy if we lose. The only option we have is winning."


    "I see. Then can you promise us that you will help us to get stronger?"


    "What the hell are you talking about? That''s obvious, isn''t it? I will turn you all into a terrifying army to fight in the war. There should be a few years until wares, so I will make sure all of you are strong enough to protect the tribe. I''ll tell you the detailter, for now, I want to rest." I said.


    "That''s good. Everyone! Today has finallye for us to greet the new Werewolf King! Don''t feel down because we lost the previous king! We need to celebrate because that''s what Grandpa wanted! To die peacefully and leave the fate of the tribe to the next strongest person! He might be a human, but he''s still the Werewolf King! Our King!"


    Red suddenly shouted and told everyone to celebrate. He''s a good leader. I''ll just leave everything to him like Grandpa did.


    After another moment of silence, a Werewolf suddenly howled.


    "AWOOOOO!!!"


    That was the first one. Then the howls keeping. All the Werewolf including Shelia and Red howled.


    "AWOOOOO!!!"


    "AWOOOOO!!!"


    After finally everyone stopped howling, all the Werewolves looked at me. Is it time for them to kneel to me? I don''t think they have such tradition. Maybe there will be another ceremony to crown the next king.


    ¡­


    ¡­


    Why is everyone just silently looking at me? Don''t tell me!?


    "Cough! A-Awoo?" I copied their howl shyly.


    Is it the right answer?


    ""AWOOOOO!!!""


    "AWOOOOO!!!"


    It is the right answer!


    "Yeah! Awoo! Yeah! Let''s Awoo together!"

 Chapter 225 - Plan For The Werewolves

    I am too tired after the fight, so I asked Albert and Red to take care of Grandpa''s funeral and the aftermath.


    They will arrange the feast with Ian and Lina to cook the meal. Most of it is meat. Good thing I told them to bring some vegetables as well.


    As for me, I moved to the Werewolf King''s residence where Red should be living. It''s the only normal-looking building in the area. I''ll ask Ka and Angter to build some more houses with their earth magic.


    For now, the King''s abode is good enough to rest. The bed is made of stone, but I don''t care since I have Vitoria with me. And I''m not alone. Ka and Ang are both with me since they are tired as well.


    So, I have Victoria creates clones of her. I have some transformed into a double bed for Ka and me, and another single bed for Ang.


    I slept for about an hour when someone woke me up.


    "What is it? Time to go home?" I asked Albert, the one who woke me up.


    "No. You''re the king now. You need to give a speech and some order. I can''t negotiate with other Werewolves now. They will only follow your orders. And you haven''t delegate anyone to be your representative. If you want to go home soon, you have to do everything first." Albert said.


    "Hmm¡­ then I''ll stay until tomorrow. Good night." And I tried to go back to sleep.


    "Just wake up already! Even Ka and Ang are already awake! I''m not like you, I''m a busy person! I need to go back to the capital quickly!"


    "So, in the end, it was you who needed something, huh? Well, you have no choice but to stay! Good night!"


    Annoying. I''m trying to sleep here.


    "Roy! You need to wake up fast! Victoria just made some meal from her world!" It was Sonia who wake me up this time.


    "I''m up! Where''s the food!?"


    "See? It''s that easy to wake him up." Sonia said to Albert.


    "I''ll try that next time. Come on, Roy! You need to greet everyone." Albert said.


    Sigh¡­ I guess I have to do it.


    As soon as I leave my bed and enters the meeting room, everyone cheered for me. For their new king.


    It''s not a bad feeling.


    "Don''t look so smug! I''m still a better king than you are."


    "And I''m a king for one hour. Just shut up and let me enjoy the moment!"


    Why does Albert always need to say something to ruin my fun?


    "Oh, Roy! You wake up!"


    "King is here!"


    "Master, here''s some water for you."


    Lina gave me a ss of water while I''m listening to everyone praising me. Then she gave me some food to eat as well.


    Being a king is fine, but does a king have to be watched while eating? They just need to focus on their own meal, not me!


    "You''ll get used to it soon. I can give you some advice as a fellow king. I''m more experienced than you after all." Albert said smugly.


    "No need. I already figure out what to do."


    For now, we enjoy the feast until all the food we brought is gone. Wasn''t it just one hour since I slept? And if They needed at least about half an hour to cook the foods, it''s still too fast for all the food to be gone!


    I guess I''ll just enjoy the meal in front of me.


    "It was as delicious as usual, Lina. Thanks for the meal."


    As usual, Lina blushed when I give her praise. She''s so healing.


    Well, now it looks like the feast is over. I guess I should make some rules and give orders to the Werewolves. And I need to make a contract with Shelia as well.


    "Shelia, Jack, Red,e here!" I called for the three most influential Werewolves.


    "What is it?" Shelia asked as the three approached me.


    "Just some order to give. I will mostly spend my time in human world, so I won''t be able to do much here. That''s why, Red, you will be my representative here. You can stay in this ce and do the same thing as you did before." I said.


    "I knew it will be like this. I''ll take that job again." Red said.


    "Wait! I''m stronger than him, so why is it him and not me!?" Jack protested.


    "Because you will only need to focus in getting stronger. Red, do you want to focus on getting stronger or lead the Werewolves?" I asked Red.


    "Well, I like my previous position quite much. So, it''s obvious I will choose to do it again. I will still try to get stronger, but I think there are many Werewolves here who will surpass me in strength in no time. Especially after they became so enthusiastic after seeing your match. That''s why I will focus on the well-being of the settlement." Red said.


    "Good. Then as for Jack, your goal for now is to get as strong as Shelia during her match or even stronger. You need to be able to run on air like she did, and also to be able to use your ws to attack from distance."


    "So, it''s training for me, huh? I''ll ept that!" Jack agreed to train.


    "You¡­ how many Werewolves in this tribe again?" I asked Red.


    "About 120 Werewolves."


    "I see. Jack, you will leave the settlement and train fighting other monsters. You will only return to the settlement after one month. You will bring five other strong Werewolves with you to train. Then after one month, you will return with everyone. Then those five Werewolves will be leader of their own squads from the rest of the Werewolves. Each squad will be responsible for different things. Two squads for the defense of the settlement, one squads for hunting, one squad on standby, and thest squad will go outside again to train and gain experience. Then that squad will return after another month. What each squad will do will change every month. I need both Red and Jack to discuss about it yourself. If you think that there''s a need to have more squad, just do it. Those who left for training have to return after one month has passed. As for the rest who stays, that doesn''t mean they don''t need to train. They can use the Colosseum and have a fight among Werewolves. But no killing! Make Grandpa''s death as thest deathmatch among you!" I said.


    "I see. That way, everyone will grow stronger. So, you want my duty to make and arrange the squads, and Jack is to train those who are leaving and help them getting stronger. Is that right?" Red asked.


    "Yes. After the fifth month when everyone has left to train and return, no need to send another squad to leave. Have apetition to decide the rank of the strongest Werewolf. The squad with someone who has the highest rank during thepetition will be rewarded with¡­ more delicious food than what we have. As for Red and Jack who don''t belong to any squad, they are free to join any squad before thepetition. But each of them has to pick different squad to enter."


    After experiencing today''s match, I can see thatpetition will make people, or in this case, Werewolves, desire to be stronger. Especially if they can get a reward from it.


    Hearing about thepetition and the reward, every Werewolves got excited about it. They can''t wait until the day they can show their strength.


    And it''s also a good experiment in what Albert and I trying to do. Apetition in humans world to make everyone stronger.


    I see that Albert understood my intention when he nodded. It''s good to have someone understand you. Though we still need Victoria''s suggestion since there might be something interesting from her world that we can use here.


    "Wait! What about me? Why am I not included in the squads! I want to eat delicious food as well!" Shelia protested.


    "As for you, you will be contracted with me. You will spend more time with me in my world, so you don''t have to worry about foods. And with you here, everyone will try to get you enter their squad since the winner will be obvious. I can''t have that. But don''t worry, you will gain a lot of experience in my world. Maybe even more than those who train in this world. And whenever you return here, you can teach everyone about what you experience in my world and spar with them. And since you are my contracted monster, you are not allowed to be weaker than them, okay? You have to stay as the strongest in the tribe!"


    "I will do my best!"


    I heard jealousy from the other Werewolves. I guess I need to have them experience human world as well. I''ll bring them there sometime in the future. They will need to get used to that world since the war will happen in that world after all.


    "Now as for the challenge to be the Werewolf King¡­" I wanted to suggest something about it, but Red stopped me from continuing.


    "You will stay as the king at least until the war is over. We have agreed while you''re asleep to join the war. If you''re not the king, it will be impossible for us to participate in the war after all." Red said.


    "So, everyone has agreed, huh? That''s good. Then I don''t have anything else to worry about."


    Now, I need to focus on my own strength. I can leave the rest to Red and Jack. Though I will visit them from time to time.


    At least I have finished taking care of the Werewolves for the next five months. Then after five months, I will visit back here to see if the experiment about thepetition going well or not.

 Chapter 226 - My Second Monster

    "So now¡­ I guess it''s time to make a contract with you. Are you prepared?" I asked Shelia.


    I wanted her to be my contracted monster because of her strength, you know? Not about her bing my partner. Well, she will be my partner in the end, but not as lover. Should I fix the misunderstanding?


    "I am prepared. What should I do?" Shelia asked.


    "Well, first, I need to fix the misunderstanding. What I meant by saying I was to be a partner in battle. I will summon you to fight with me and probably for other needs as well." I tried to fix the misunderstanding.


    "Other needs!?" Shelia was shocked when she heard that.


    "Oh, my! Roy is such a sinful man!" Candy teased me.


    "Wait, no! Other needs as in adapting yourself to my world! Not that ''other'' other needs!"


    Why isn''t anyone helping me fix the misunderstanding? I might end up getting them a new sister!


    "You see Victoria there? She''s my contracted monster. You can just treat me like usual, and I will have you help me in many ways whenever I summon you." I said. But it seems like Victoria heard me.


    "But I''m also his lover as well. I''m both his contracted monster and his lover. So, you might be both as well." Victoria said.


    "You''re not helping!"


    "So, you want me to be your lover as well? That''s fine! I''ll ept everything the king says!" Shelia said.


    "And you''re not listening! I mean¡­ Aaargh! Lina, summon Sunny!"


    Since I don''t know what to say, I can only show Shelia an example about master and summon rtionships.


    "I understand. Sunny!"


    Lina summoned Sunny, and Sunny appears in front of her. Then Lina lifted Sunny up.


    Now that I think about it, I need Sunny to fight a bit more so Lina can reach intermediate level and contract another monster. Does she have any interest in contracting a Werewolf? I''ll ask herter.


    "See, basically, you will be simr to Sunny there. You don''t have to be a lover." I said as I pointed my finger to Sunny who is being carried by Lina. Realizing that I''m using her as an example, Sunny danced and waved her leaves at me and Shelia.


    But another person interjected.


    "Oh, Roy! You justplimenting Shelia by saying she''s as pretty as a flower! Such a sinful man my boyfriend is!" It was Ka''s turn to tease me.


    "Wait, no! That was not- I mean I¡­"


    "Thank you! It''s the first time someone said I''m pretty like a flower! I''m so happy!"


    Why are you blushing, Shelia! And why are all my girlfriends trying to push you onto me so bad!? It feels like everything has been orchestrated well. Who''s the one responsible for this!? And although she''s a sunflower, Sunny is still a monster!


    "I mean Shelia will be my summon, simr to how Sunny is Lina''s summon! And you''re not listening!"


    "Being called pretty like flower¡­ I feel so happy!"


    You''re misunderstanding!


    "Good for you, Shelia!"


    It''s your fault, Ka!


    "Must be nice being told like that."


    I didn''t say it like that, Candy! But why is everyone thought of it that way?


    "Now we need to arrange the order of the girls who will sleep with him."


    Why are you involved in this, Sophie? Don''t tell me that it''s your fault!


    "He also told me that I''m such a babe before! I feel so good listening to his praises!"


    ¡­Victoria, you can shapeshift yourself into whatever babe you want.


    And then Albert tapped my shoulder.


    "Must be nice being so young and have so many girlfriends." Albert said.


    "Are you involved with them in any way?" I asked.


    "No. But after Ka woke up, your girlfriends seem to be discussing something. Somehow¡­ they seem to be able to work well together. Must be nice to have a harem of good girls."


    "I''ll tell Marie that you wish for a harem."


    "That''s not what I said!"


    Now he will understand my feeling a bit.


    Getting a new girlfriend already? What are they thinking?


    "Roy, they are actually worried about you." It was Sonia who suddenly appears next to me who said it.


    "Worried? What did I do to make them worried? I''m doing things the same way as before though."


    "Yes, you did. But it''s the first time they realize how close you have always been to death. They never see you that way before, right? At most is that you''re injured and asked Ka for a healing."


    Well, Sonia is right. And thest time I injured myself badly was a long time ago when I first defeated the All-seeing Eye. I almost lost my hand. Then I stitch it back together and asked Ka to heal me.


    But I don''t think that Victoria would suggest this idea. That means it was all either Sophie''s idea or Ka''s to get me together with Shelia. I doubt it''s Candy''s idea since with her job as an agent, she must have been close to death before.


    "So, it''s either Sophie''s idea or Ka''s, right? Why would they do this? Being close to death and getting a new girlfriend is totally unrted."


    "Actually, it was Candy''s."


    "What!? Shouldn''t she has experienced being close to death before?"


    I was shocked by Sonia''s reply.


    "The girls are discussing about what they need to do to help you. No one can help you to get stronger since you fight differently from others. Well, other than Victoria that is. As for the others, they want to help you so you will not be dying again. So, they proposed an idea that you always said. To gain more allies. But none of them are good at making friends. There might be some men who wanted to help them, but they all will have some ulterior motives, so they choose to not looking for mor allies. That''s why Candy proposed to help you get as many girlfriends as possible. Any woman who is close to you, the girls will try to get them be your girlfriends. That way, they will have more people protecting you."


    "Trying to get me more girlfriends to support me? That doesn''t make any sense at all! But I will support their decision!" I said.


    "¡­you just want to be a harem king, right?"


    "Says the harem queen. At least I''m not using my charm magic. Though I still don''t understand what kind of charm I give that they are attracted to. Well, other than I''m handsome, a good listener, able to say cheesy lines, strong enough to give them a sense of security, handsome, rich, and handsome."


    "¡­you just said handsome three times. Though I''ll give you credit for one. The one that give the girls a sense of security. I think that''s what make them decided to be your girlfriends. I don''t know about Victoria though. And maybe there is someone who fell in love with you thanks to your cheesy lines."


    Victoria¡­ my guess is that I''m simr to her favorite fictional character in her world. That''s my best guess.


    "Well, since it hase to this, will you be both my girlfriend and contracted monster then, Shelia?" I asked Shelia who is still chatting with the girls.


    Since it''s what the girls want, I''ll take her in! But I''m getting more confused as to why it became so easy for me to get more girlfriends. And I haven''t sleep with all of them yet. Maybe soon.


    "Sure! You''re the king after all. And we Werewolves follow the king''s order."


    Shelia said that as if I''m forced her to be my girlfriend. Though that''s not the case when her face is as red as a tomato. And I will make sure she will dress herself better instead of that bikini clothes when she''s in human world!


    "Alright then, with your permission, I''ll make a contract with you. ''Contract''!"


    Thanks to the ghost and the slime, I get an idea to how to use contract magic. It''s simr to how tamer do it. Though somehow, I can only use it to a monster from the Monsters World, while they can only use them to monsters in human world.


    I just need to use magic normally while imagining that I''m connected to Shelia, then say the word ''Contract''.


    After saying the word, there''s a string of light connecting me to Shelia. I can faintly sense a string connecting me with Victoria as well.


    After that, the string disappears and I can feel my connection with Shelia. It''s done.


    "That''s it?" Ang who is curious about contract magic asked.


    "That might be so. I have witnessed a tamer casting contract before, and it''s over just like that." Candy said.


    "Finally! Now let''s go home! But before that¡­"


    I approached Lina. Since everyone wanted me to get more girlfriends, it''s okay, right? And I''m not dense enough to not notice her feeling. Though it''s weird how it ends up this way just after showering her with praises.


    "Lina, will you be my girlfriend?"


    "Yes! Finally! I have been waiting for this day ever since I decided to be your maid!" Lina looks so happy. And so are the girls. While Albert is burning with jealousy. Wait! Mustache as well! Well, whatever. Albert already has a wife. As for Mustache, I don''t care about him.


    "Master! To be able to seduce two women in one day! As expected from my Master!" Jewel said. It''s a surprise that she''s not loud.


    I heard someone whispered. It was Shirley and Albert.


    "Brother. I think I just saw something weird happened."


    "Me too, sister."


    "And I see that you''re jealous of Roy as well. Should I tell Marie?"


    "Don''t!"


    Just a siblings'' quarrel. I let them be.


    "Well, since our business here is over, let''s go back. Shelia, youe with us as well. As for the other Werewolves, good luck in getting stronger! I''ll visit you soon!"


    And that''s how I ended up getting my second summon, and two more girlfriends. What a day¡­

 Chapter 227 - Wolf Form

    After we returned back to human world, the first thing I did is¡­ resting. My body is already healed, but I''m too tired. I''m forcing myself to be calm during the match that I''m mentally exhausted.


    And I somehow ended up getting two more girlfriends. Am I lucky or not? I''m not a romantic kind of person, so I don''t know what to do. I''ll just spend a whole day with each of themter. Hopefully, that will suffice.


    Let''s see¡­ Ka, Sophie, Candy, Victoria, Shelia, and Lina. Six of them!? That''s a lot! And those girls decided to let me have more girlfriends? I need to be careful interacting with girls next time. Though if they are interested in me like Lina did, I would end up epting them. I''m really such a sinful man.


    Well, as long as they know that I''m not a romantic person and won''t expect anything romantic, I won''t mind. But if they expected something like that from me, I guess breaking up with them is a good choice.


    Anyway, after returning back to human world, I sent Albert''s group back to the capital. He was quite angry when he realized that I''m saving my mana during the match while considering to return him back to the capital.


    Well, if he returns to the capital normally, people would be worried. Why does the king who is supposed to be staying in the capital suddenly somewhere else? They will think that there''s a kidnapping or something. And then, there will be chaos even if the Prime Minister tried to give an exnation.


    I guess I can take that anger as Albert worrying about me. If he can worry about me that much, he shouldn''t give me too much workster.


    The first few days after we return, everyone train harder. My girlfriends don''t want me to bear all the burdens alone. They are so lovely.


    My disciple''s respect toward me skyrocketed. Even though she hasn''t manifested her magic, she''s working hard in training her body. Maybe she could be another Aura user? I hope I won''t be the only Aura user anymore. And whoever the other Aura user is, I hope they are on our side.


    Shelia was confused by many things in this world. Though it seems as if she''s enjoyed them together with the girls. I thought that female Werewolves would be¡­ wild. But I guess she''s still a woman. I mean she''s happy to be called as pretty as flower. Though I didn''t call her like that, she perceived it that way thanks to my other girlfriends.


    And the first thing the girls did after Sheliaes, is to get her dressed. Now, she''s still lightly dressed but it''s less revealing than before. They consider her transformation as well as to not let the clothes be ripped after transformation. Though because she''s attractive, she still gains a lot of attention.


    As for her ears, we had them covered by a beanie. Now her wolf ears won''t attract anyone''s attention. And she also said that what she wears now doesn''t restrict her movements much, so she agreed to wear them. Not just in this world, but in Monsters World as well.


    She said that the clothes are good to show to her fellow Werewolves who share the same taste. Though what she loves the most about human world are the foods. She only stopped eating when I told her to. Good thing I''m rich. I guess I should teach her the importance of money. I''ll give her some pocket money once she gets used to this world.


    Though I still unsummon her once in a while. She said everyone in Monsters World is doing fine.


    After a week of resting and enjoying myself, it''s finally time for me to go back to training. I did spend a whole day with each girlfriend I have. Though I won''t say about how lovey-dovey my love story is.


    And so today, I took Shelia with me to the forest to see more of her abilities. Though the others followed as well. Even the kids! It will be fine since everyone''s here to protect them. And it''s also good for the kids to enjoy the outside as well. So, I brought everyone to theke where I had Jewel and the others go before. It''s pretty safe over there and the kids should enjoy swimming on theke. Though I might need to kill someke monsters first.


    Other than the difficult path I had Jewel and the others arrive there during training, there''s a better path that makes it easier and faster for carriage to enter. I rented a horse carriage since it seems that Daniel loves travelling. That''s why I''m taking the kids with me in a carriage instead of going there alone and make a portal for them to enter.


    "It''s ake! Can I swim, Roy?" Daniel asked as soon as we arrive at theke.


    "Hmm¡­ I think it''s fine. Just don''t go in too deep. There are still monsters inside theke." I replied after checking inside theke. Most of the monsters are deep in theke. I think it''s their time to rest. Maybe they had just finished their meals. Then it''s good since they won''t attack us due to hunger.


    "Yaaay!"


    Daniel, Hannah, and Jewel run into the water and y in the shallow area. They sshed each other with water. Sophie is with them to watch over the kids. And Shelia also seems to want to y with the kids as well. Over the past few days, she''s getting along with the kids really well. After all, in term of mentality, she''s closer to them than to me. She''s like a kid that I have to tell her everything that she sees.


    "Shelia, I know that we''re here for training, but you can y with them for now. I''ll call you after everyone is here."


    "Really? Yaay!" And Shelia run toward the kids after taking off her clothes and returned to her original bikini-like fur clothes.


    There are only six of us there since I''ll be picking up the others with portal.


    First, I opened up a portal back to Cassau where everyone is waiting. After making sure that everyone is there, I opened up another portal to the capital.


    "You''re finally here! Let''s go, Marie!" Albert while still in his royal outfit about to enters the portal. But I kicked him back.


    "You''re noting. I''m here only for Marie and n. You still have a job to do." I said.


    "What? No, I don''t have any job today!"


    "That''s wrong. Did you forget that I gave an essory to the Prime Minister as well to contact me through Sonia? He told me that you are busy today. So, you''re noting."


    After letting Maria and n enters the portal, I closed it instantly before Albert enters. Now everyone is here, let''s do what Ie here first.


    "Shelia! Come here!"


    Then Shelia, still wet from ying in the water,e over my way.


    "What is it? Can it waitter?"


    "It won''t take long, so it''s better to finish it soon. I just want to check on your wolf transformation. You can transform into a wolf, right?"


    "You mean the Wolf form? I can. Should I do it here?" Shelia asked.


    "Yes."


    Then after getting my permission, Shelia transformed. Now she''s a wolf, and not just a Werewolf with human form. She looks just like any other ck wolf, but she''s about the size of a horse.


    "What''s the biggest change in this form?" I asked. And everyone who is curious alsoe over and check on Shelia''s Wolf form.


    "It''s faster than my Werewolf form. It said that Wolf is the origin of our species, that''s why in this form, we have a tail. While we need to get stronger so we can grow our tails in Werewolf form." She said as she wags her tail.


    Yeah¡­ it''s weird to see a wolf without tail. Anyway, there''s one more important thing I want to say. Her tail looks fluffy! Her whole body looks so fluffy! I want to hug her!


    "Shelia is so fluffy! You''re so cool!" Daniel said as he hugged Shelia''s tail.


    "Hehe! I''m also very fast now! Wanna see my speed?" Shelia asked.


    "Yes!" Daniel shouted.


    "Well, Shelia, you can run around theke. I also want to see how fast you can go." I said.


    "Alright. Watch me!"


    Then the ck wolf run very quickly around theke. I think she''s slightly faster than Grandpa Werewolf''s speed in his Werewolf form. Is this the real speed of the Werewolves'' Wolves form? I''m d to have them as our allies.


    Then Shelia returned to us quickly. Daniel, Hannah, and Jewel apuded at her speed and praise her.


    "Can you run on air in that form?" I asked.


    "Yes." Shelia then jumped and performed somersault mid-air while proving her words.


    "Great! Can I ride on your back?"


    "We pride ourselves in this form, but since it''s the king''s order, I can let you ride on my back."


    "Then I want you to let me and anyone I give permission to ride on your back from now on. That''s okay, right?" I abuse my power as the king.


    "Fine. Here you go."


    Shelia lowers herself so I can ride on her back. But seeing how Daniel and Hannah wanted to ride as well, I brought the two of them with me to ride Shelia''s back.


    "Alright, you can run around theke again. But lower your speed since we have kids on your back."


    We ride Shelia around theke. Daniel and Hannah seem to be having fun feeling the wind from her back. I''m sitting behind the two kids to make sure they won''t fall. And Shelia also having fun since the kids are enjoying it.


    With this, I have checked on all of Shelia''s ability. But it seems like I can only return to training for real tomorrow.

 Chapter 228 - Relaxed Day By The Lake

    "This is so peaceful."


    I said t myself seeing everyone enjoying the pic and ying in theke.


    Although Shelia prided herself to not have anyone rides her back in her Wolf form, she''s already letting everyone here riding her back. Mostly because she enjoys ying with them. Especially with the kids. She also has been running for an hour with only stopping to let different people ride her back.


    Shelia''s running onnd, on the water, and on air while letting anyone on her back enjoys the wind. When I asked if she can swim, she said that she''s not as fast as when she''s running, so she doesn''t enjoy it much. Though from her answer, I can tell that at least she can swim.


    From what I see, she has the potential to be even stronger than Grandpa Werewolf. It will be my duty to make her stronger as her master and the king of the Werewolves. But if she ended up be stronger than me, will she want to be the next king? Nah, Red said that my position will stay as it is at least until the war is over. I need to use my position wisely until then.


    Then after we have our lunch, Shelia suddenly said something to Ang.


    "Hey, Ang! Let''s fight again! This time, I will win without a doubt!" Shelia challenged Ang. After she lost that time, she must have wanted to fight her again, but she seems to have forgotten about it since she''s enjoying this world.


    "Sure! Let''s fight!" As for Ang, she also wanted to get stronger by fighting as well. She''s eager to fight Shelia since their fight back then was so close. No one can predict the winner until the very end. Though this time, I stopped them from fighting right away.


    "You two, not here, not now. And you must not fight until death or causing a big injury against each other. If you want to go all out against each other, you have to ask for Ka''s presence and also mine. The two of us have to watch your all-out fight so we can heal you after the match."


    Although I''m not a healer, I''m still a doctor. I can at least fix broken bone or reattach lost limbs. Then I can ask Ka to heal them so their injuries won''t persist.


    "Then, tomorrow!" Shelia shouted.


    "Tomorrow is fine, but after we finished our training. So, in the afternoon before the sun sets, you and Ang will fight. IS that fine with you, Ka?"


    "It''s fine. And you can just use your portal to transport me if I''m not with you." Ka replied.


    That mean tomorrow after training, I have to witness Shelia and Ang fight again. As long as the two be stronger, I don''t mind. At least they shouldn''t get themselves killed or injured badly before the fight against the cult.


    The cult has been quiet for a while, and it will be five years until they make their move. That''s what Veronica said before.


    Now that I mentioned her, it has been a while since we heard report from her.


    "Sonia, is there no report from Veronica about the cult''s movement?"


    "Not at all. She only reported about her whereabouts. Should I ask her?"


    "No need. Just ask her next time she called you."


    If she doesn''t have anything to report, at least that mean the cult is not preparing any big moves at the moment.


    Well, at least that''s good.


    "By the way, Albert told me about your training camp. He said that the training camp should be just once and to be scheduled at the end of your two years training." Sonia continued rying message from Albert.


    "Well, I don''t mind that. The training camps was also suggested to let the kids have something to look forward to after all. But now I have my portals, I can take them anywhere I want. I''ll ept that suggestion. By then, I hope I would be able to make more portals. Hopefully, I have reached advanced level in my summoning element at that time so I can make a contract with my third monster."


    After two years, I wonder how strong everyone will be? By then, Jewel also have manifested her magic for a year and graduate from school, right? Then maybe she can go to magic college at the same time as us, right?


    Jewel''s growth is too slow. She has be stronger, faster, and have more stamina than before, but she''s on the slow side. I think she''s not going to be skilled in physical department. Although her body growth might have affected her in some ways. I think she has grown more than half centimeters in this week alone. Well, I hope next year, she will get some good elements manifested and she has good aptitude in magic.


    Today is the day where all Introductory school epted new students, and they will manifest their magical elements today. And Candy is going to the school in Cassau to check if there are someone with good magical attributes. Then she will rmend those students to the king to join us. I hope she gets good ones.


    Well, since she''s in Cassau, she can just tell meter about anyone she found interesting. Then I will see if they or their rtives have explosives in their mouth. If they don''t have any and no criminal records, she will rmend them to Albert. I don''t know about other cities though. I hope whoever tasked to check on the new students will do a good job selecting the people to join us. We can''t have a cult member mistakenly taken into our side.


    I guess I should get some rest for today. Maybe tomorrow I will go back to Monsters World and finally fight some All-seeing Eye to improve my vision ability. Once my Divine Vision improved, I should be able to see inside a dungeon with dense mana. I''m still nning to enter that dungeon I found in Monsters World while crossing the ocean.


    "Hey, girls! I forgot to tell you something. Soon, I will enter a dungeon in the Monsters World that I found. Anyone want to join me exploring that dungeon?" I asked if there are someone interested ining with me for the exploration.


    "In a few weeks? Why not soon?" Ang asked.


    "I''m nning to kill some All-seeing Eyes first before entering that dungeon. Maybe tomorrow I will go to Monsters World. Since I need to kill them without using magic and get some help, I will be going alone. Only Victoria with me to guide me to their nest. Unless there are Werewolves who know their location. Shelia, do you know about All-seeing Eye?" I asked Shelia.


    "Yes. As long as we don''t enter their sight, they won''t cause us trouble. And since they always dodge our attacks and they can easily hit us back, none of the Werewolves want to fight them. And you have killed one before? That''s amazing! As expected of the king!" Shelia feels happy that I managed to kill one in the past.


    "Yeah, but since you know their whereabouts, I''ll ask you to guide me there. And you will try fighting one as well. As a closebat fighter, fighting an opponent who can read your moves, you will learn a lot and you will be able to fight smarter. Maybe I''ll take some Werewolves with me as well?"


    Then once I finished one or two All-seeing Eyes, I can let the other Werewolves fight them. If they can''t finish an All-seeing Eye, I will help them.


    "Really!? I have always wanted to defeat one of them! I can''t wait for tomorrow! Ang, we''ll put our re-match on-hold! This is more important!" Shelia said.


    "Hey, Roy! I''m also interested in that monster after seeing you fight it before! Let mee as well!" Ang asked to join.


    With her fighting that monster, she will learn a lot as well. I think it''s a good idea.


    "Sure. Then tomorrow, we''ll be going to the Werewolves settlement. As for those who are noting, don''t ck on your training."


    "Master! I thought there are no cases of anyone ever defeating All-seeing Eye before! Does it mean you wrote history?" Jewel asked. Looks like she studied well. She even knows that story about no one have ever defeated All-seeing Eye before.


    "Yes. But I want to keep it as secret for a while longer. I can''t be too famous since I''m a secret weapon for the fight against the cult. Don''t tell anyone, okay?"


    "You''re awesome, Master! Can I be as strong as you?" Jewel asked.


    "No, that''s impossible." I said inly


    Seeing Jewel looks so dejected, I feel bad.


    "I''m not saying you''re weak. It''s just that I don''t think you will be able to be an Aura user like me. And you will only manifest your magic in one year. I don''t know what elements you will gain, but with these many people you can learn from, you can be stronger in different things than me. I wish to see you be that strong one day."


    "I will! One day, I will gain enough strength to defeat All-seeing Eye alone!"


    d that she returned back to her cheerful self. I also need to be stronger to not be surpassed by my own disciple.


    After we return back to Cassau, Candy informs me about the potential allies from the new students. And she found no one good.


    Some of the new students have good elements. She wanted to see if they are good candidate to be our allies. But it seems that the agents have collected a lot of information about the new students, and Candy decided that none of them are good enough.


    When I asked, she said that it''s because of their personalities. All of the new students who have good potentials are all assholes.


    Well, I guess not finding new allies is better than getting assholes as our allies.

 Chapter 229 - Training With All-Seeing Eyes

    Today, I''m trying to improve my Divine Vision.


    We''re in Monsters World today, and I found the nest of All-seeing Eyes.


    Although it''s called nest, each All-seeing Eye lives a bit distance from each other. They are monsters that live individually. They don''t need to gather in a group. So when I encounter one, I don''t need to worry about other All-seeing Eyes.


    Fighting them is so easy. I can''t believe I almost lost my hand when I fought one before. I guess it''s thanks to my Divine Vision I got from them. As a thanks, I''ll kill three of you today!


    I''m much faster and stronger than in the past, so I can defeat them without the help of burning them anymore. And each monster, it took less than five minutes to defeat them. Of course, each time I fought one, I''m more experienced in handling them and the time it took is shorter and shorter.


    After I finished defeating three of them one by one, I turn my head toward everyone I brought here.


    "See? That''s easy, right?" I said.


    ""No way in hell!""


    Shelia and Ang both shouted at the same time.


    "We can''t predict their moves like you do!"


    "And they have too many tentacles as well! It''s difficult to dodge them!"


    Both of them protested.


    During this journey, I''m bringing Ang, Sophie, Lina, Shelia, and Jack and five other Werewolves who were supposed to go training.


    This type of monsters is a good opponent for the Werewolves. They usually fight only by instinct, but since their opponent will be able to predict their movements, they have to think about the moves they need to make. Though it seems like they are unable to do it by following my example.


    "I''m not asking you to do exactly as I did. That''s impossible for your current strength. You can fight in a group first. Fighting one on one against them is impossible."


    I said as I split the Reizpear in put the pieces in my pocket. I started calling this self-repair spear, Reizpear since the day Grandpa Werewolf told me about his uncle name. I also stopped calling it Uncle Spear anymore. Glory to my naming sense!


    I brought the Werewolves because that''s what I nned from the start. As for Ang, she was interested in defeating one All-seeing Eye alone. Of course I won''t let her do that yet. But I think she will be able to do it on her ownter.


    As for Sophie, even though she hated fighting, she still wants to get stronger and thought that it might be a good idea to follow me. And it will be safe for her as well since I will protect her.


    Sophie would only training when she''s with other girls or me. Unlike the others who also want to get stronger on their own. But that''s fine. At least she wants to get stronger on her own will and not because anyone is forcing her to do it.


    I never force anyone to get stronger. Of course it would be great if everyone is strong, but if they don''t want to fight, they can choose to stay behind like Ruby and Penny. Taking care of the house is also another way to support us.


    As for Lina, her summoning element has already reached intermediate level! And now she can make a contract with another monster!


    Sunny has also be bigger. She can walk and stand straight on her own! She even started to run! She used her vines, roots, and branches to help her do it. And her Seed throw is also stronger now.


    The reason I brought Lina is to find a monster for her. And to my surprise, she wanted to have an All-seeing Eye as her next contracted monster!


    I mean, that thing is just tentacles attached to an eyeball! It''s creepy! Why would someone wanted to have it as her summon?


    At least their Divine Vision is useful. If it canmunicate with Lina on what it sees, then our group will get even stronger.


    Seems like Lina thought so since she knows what my Divine Vision can see. Then she decides that it''s a good idea for her to get another one with the same power. And I think it''s the first time ever that someone have All-seeing Eye as their summon. Though I need to have her make a contract first.


    It''s difficult since most All-seeing Eyes will be hostile as soon as we are on their sight. No matter how I raise my hands and say ''Ie in peace'', they won''t listen and just attack us.


    So, we decided to do it like a tamer. Attack them until near death, then force a contract on them. Victoria said that it''s just like some pocket something, but let''s ignore her.


    We have encountered three All-seeing Eyes, but they are killed by me alone to improve my Divine Vision. Now the next one will be for the others'' training, and won''t be killed.


    "So¡­ the next one will be fought by the magic group plus Shelia." I suggested.


    "Me too?"


    "Since you will fight with us more often, I need you to get used in cooperating with the others. We will also try to fight an opponent with just the two of uster. But for now, it''s to get you used with magic first. Then after that, it''s the Werewolves turn to defeat an All-seeing Eye. We can practice our teamworkter as many times as we want."


    And so, I went looking for another All-seeing eye.


    Good thing the girls train their body as well. Although their speed can''t keep up with mine and the Werewolves'', they have a lot of stamina that they didn''t break a sweat when we reach the monster.


    As I instructed, only Ang, Lina, Sophie, and Shirley fought. Though Victoria wanted to join as well, so it will be five on one.


    Their strategy was quite simple. Lina would summon Sunny and Sunny will restrain the monster''s tentacles with her vine while shooting seeds from her sunflower-like head. But the All-seeing Eye has more tentacles than Sunny can take. That''s where Victoria and Sheliae in. Victoria would protect everyone from the rest of the tentacles, while Shelia would attack the eyeball and cut off the tentacles with her ws.


    Sophie would use lightning magic to paralyze the monster, and Ang is the finisher. I wonder why no one in the past managed to defeat that thing before? It seems quite easy with this lineup.


    After Ang uses her magic, the All-seeing Eye doesn''t seem to be hurt much, but it became scared of us. I think Ang used her full power, but this monster still manages to survive that attack? It must have good magical resistance.


    Though it''s a good thing that this monster is afraid of us. Now it''s a chance for Lina to make a contract with it.


    "Lina, you can do it!" I cheered for her sess.


    I and the others are surrounding the scared eyeball so it won''t be able to escape. But since it might still be able to escape by seeing a gap between us, I grabbed one of its tentacles so it won''t be able to move far.


    "Contract!" Lina used her contract magic to the All-seeing Eye monster.


    The monster was panicked at first, but seeing how it can''t escape from my restraint, it gave up and willingly be Lina''s summon.


    After the contract was made, I release my restraint, and the monster run to hide behind Lina''s back. Hey, I didn''t participate in fighting you before. So, why are you afraid of me? Maybe it watched me defeated the previous All-seeing Eyes so it''s afraid of me.


    "As long as you obey Lina, I won''t harm you in any way." I said to the scared eyeball.


    Seems like it understands me and no longer hides behind Lina.


    Well, that take cares of two things already. Making the mage groups defeat one, and getting a new monster for Lina. The monster is a bit creepy, but it should be very helpful in our future fights.


    After that, Lina and Sophie decided to return home first by using Lina''s portal. She also wanted to introduce her new monster to the other. So it''s only me, Ang, Shelia, and Jack''s group.


    I found the next All-seeing Eye already, and let Shelia, Jack, and the Werewolves to fight it on their own without magic.


    This battle seems to be more difficult than before, but after about one hour, they managed to kill the monster. They all look so happy for being the first in their tribe to defeat that thing.


    Shelia''s teamwork with the others has increased. I think she''s very good in adapting with the others.


    So, the next one is for Ang herself to defeat All-seeing Eye.


    She has a lot of problem when she fought it alone, so I let Shelia help her. The two managed to bring down the monster. It will still be a while until Ang can defeat it on her own.


    I guess that''s the end of today''s training. I brought Ang home while Shelia wanted to stay here for a while longer. She seems to still have a lot of stamina to continue and want to join Jack and the others in their training. I''ll let her do whatever she wants until next time I summon her.

 Chapter 230 - Island Dungeon

    A few days after improving my Divine Vision, it''s time to test it. Which mean I need to go to a dungeon, to check if my Divine Vision is able to see through inside the dungeon which has never been entered before. And I found two of them.


    One is the underwater dungeon near my new diving spot in Cassau. But I don''t dare to enters it right now. Maybe once my air element has reached intermediate, I will challenge that dungeon.


    The other one is the dungeon I found in an ind during the time I crossed the ocean to find the Werewolves'' whereabouts. But since it''s in the Monsters World, the monsters inside that dungeon might be much stronger than the same monsters in human world. But I think it''s a good ce for training, so I decided to go there.


    And obviously, I asked the others if they are willing to enter the dungeon.


    "Dungeon. Found. Monsters World. Come?" I asked.


    "I understand what you want to say, but it''s annoying if you say it like that. Ask properly this time." Candyined.


    "Sorry. I found a dungeon when I crossed the ocean in the Monsters World. It was during the time when I''m going for the Werewolves'' settlement. I crossed the ocean for days and I stopped on an ind where I see an entrance to a dungeon. I can tell since my Divine Vision seems to be unable to see through that area. And so, I marked that ind with a Blobby so I can go there againter. And thatter is soon since I want to see if my Divine Vision can now see through that dungeon or not. There''s also what Victoria told me that monsters in that world are much stronger than the same monster in this world. That''s why I didn''t enter it before. And so, I-" Before I continue, Candy stopped me.


    "Okay, I got it! You can talk one word at a time. Your exnation is too long that Ang already give up listening! She''s even helping Lina doing the dishes!"


    I looked at the kitchen where Candy''s finger is pointing at. I can see that Ang while looking dumbfounded helped Lina doing the dishes. Even though she''s someone who rarely do chores, she took the initiative to wash the dishes just because my exnation is too long. Although I make it quite simple, it seems that exnation is still too much for Ang''s brain.


    It seems fun so let''s continue.


    "It seems that Ang has difficulty in processing too many information that I spoke even though I only said everything in the simplest way anyone can understand. But I will continue my exnation in this way since it seems like the kids are interested in hearing my story. I can''t believe Ang''s brain is worse than the children''s brain. I guess it''s because while the kids wanted to hear my story, Ang is using her brain to fully understand my story. So, if Ang listen to my story like how the kids doing it, she will understand what I say. Ang, you can return here before you destroy any tes."


    Howe she doesn''t get it? After all this time, did I still overestimate her brain capacity?


    "Basically, I found a dungeon in Monsters World, and I''m asking if there''s anyone who want toe with me there?" I asked.


    "It was so simple! If you had said it this way from the start, even I can understand it!" Ang seems angry. Well, that''s my goal after all. Teasing her is fun.


    Candy just sighed at our interaction while the others just smiling at us since it''s just our usual banter.


    And that''s how I returned back to that dungeon with Ka, Ang, and Shirley. Lina wanted to get her new monster adapted to fighting in human world so Lina, Sophie, and Candy take a quest together from the guild. As for Jewel, it''s a rest day today so other than daily exercises, she stays at home and y with the kids. Ian will watch the house while everyone is away.


    "So, this is the dungeon that you found. This ind is quite big. How deep is the dungeon?" Ka asked.


    This will be my first time using my Divine Vision after it''s upgrade. Although I can''t see as deep as outside the dungeon, it''s still enough to see about 200 meters. Which is quite good. But I haven''t seen the end of the dungeon. I think it will reach the Volcano which stand in the middle of the ind.


    "I think it reach that volcano. There are some areas near that volcano that I can''t see. I can see much clearer now inside the dungeon, but I haven''t found any treasure chests. Maybe this dungeon doesn''t have any treasure, but there are a lot of monsters inside. This ce might be good for training." I said.


    And then I summoned Shelia before we entered the dungeon. I already told her that I will call her at this time, so I don''t need to use portal to summon her. Just the one where my monster will suddenly appear next to me.


    "Is that the dungeon? I smell many kinds of monsters from the inside, while I don''t smell any monster from outside the dungeon." Shelia said.


    I forgot to check on the whole ind, but when I looked over with my Divine Vision again, Shelia''s right. There doesn''t seem to be any monster outside the dungeon. I can only see monsters inside the dungeon and in the sea. Even though the ind is beautiful, has a lot of trees and fruits, there doesn''t seem to be any monster in this ind outside the dungeon.


    Is this ind a safe area from monster? Maybe I can progress with my n to build a base in Monsters World here. I thought of building one in the Werewolves'' settlement, but I think this ce is better. But that depend on the dungeon.


    "Let''s go in first. The entrance area doesn''t seem to have powerful monsters. But that''s just from our world''s standard. We need to progress carefully."


    After entering the dungeon, we encounter goblins. They are stronger than the goblins from our world, but we still easily defeat them. I just watched everyone fight. If I see powerful monster I think the others can''t defeat, I will participate in the fight.


    Our strategy is simple. Victoria and Shelia will act as the vanguard, Ang and Shirley is the damage dealer, and Ka is our support. And I''m just watching everyone from behind. Nice view. Is Ka wearing Sophie''s magic fis stocking under her pants? That suit her.


    "What are you looking at, Roy?" Ka asked when she notice me being very quiet.


    "Everything. We will see another group of monsters soon. Still goblins, but the numbers are higher than before." I replied.


    "Hmm¡­ does it suit me?" Ka asked.


    "Perfectly!"


    "So, you did see everything, huh?"


    Ka said as she approaches me while looking angry.


    "Wait! I''m sorry, okay? You''re the one asking me if the stocking suits you so I looked at you because you asked!" I tried to apologize and make an excuse.


    Wait, something is wrong with what I said¡­


    "I didn''t say anything about the stocking though."


    Ah, shit¡­ what should I say here?


    "¡­you really know me well, Ka. As expected of my first girlfriend!"


    "¡­I''m just teasing you. It''s not like I don''t know that you always use your power this way. Just don''t use it too much, okay?"


    "Yes, Ma''am!"


    We continue to fight another group of goblins after advancing quite a bit. Then I see that the path ahead is split into two. To the right is more goblins, and to the left are orcs. When I asked which way we should go, everyone agree to go to the left. Seems like everyone is bored to fight goblins.


    There is no danger at the moment, so we continue walking in rxed manner. That''s when I see something unusual happen.


    "What the hell!?" I shouted as I suddenly looked back.


    Hearing my shout, everyone stopped and prepared for battle, but there''s no fighting.


    "What is it, Roy? What do you see?" Shirley asked.


    "The goblin group we first fought suddenly reappear again!"


    "¡­what?" Everyone is confused.


    "Don''t you know that in the dungeon, the monsters would respawn again after some time? Usually it''s after one day, but they have reappeared just in less than thirty minutes? Something is weird in this dungeon. Wait here, there''s something I wanted to check."


    I left them with only taking Reizpear with me. I returned to the ce we first fought the goblins, then I defeated all the goblins quickly. After that, I returned to where everyone is waiting. I''m running with full speed, so I just left the others for less than five minutes.


    And when I returned to the others, my guess is correct! The goblins I defeated has magically appear again! This is great!


    "Roy, what is it this time? You''re smiling." Victoria asked.


    "Well, it seems like once we get further into the dungeon, the monsters we previously defeated will reappear again. It''s weird to see monsters suddenly appear just like how Sonia would appear suddenly near us."


    "Does that mean we can enter this dungeon as many times as we want and the monsters will still be there?" Ka understand what I''m thinking.


    "That''s right! I haven''t seen any treasure chests, but the monsters here is good for training. I don''t think it will go on forever like this, but at least we can use this dungeon to train as much as we want before the dungeon stopped making monsters reappear again in an instant like this. But if the monsters in this dungeon is around the same level as Orcs, I don''t think we can train here forever. Let''s see if there are other powerful monsters in this dungeon."


    This dungeon is perfect for training since the monsters appears as soon as I reach further in the dungeon. Once Jewel manifests her magic, I''ll bring her here to train.

 Chapter 231 - Perfect Training Spot

    We keep advancing deeper in the dungeon, and the deeper we go, the stronger the monsters are.


    We have encountered Goblins, Orcs, Ogres, Cyclopes, some tiger-like monsters, Giant Centipede, and Giant Rats. Although if we took a different route, we will encounter other type of monsters.


    Now, unlike before, there''s only one path to take. We''re in a room deep in the dungeon, and the path to take is visible right in front of us. But there''s a monster protecting this room. It''s a Werewolf.


    "Shelia, is he your rtive?" I asked jokingly.


    If the monster is part of the tribe, then he will know that I''m the king. Though I don''t think I have seen this one before.


    "No. It''s the first time I see him. And look! He has a tail in his Werewolf form! That mean he should be as strong as Grandpa, right?" Shelia said.


    I want to continue chatting, but the Werewolf attacked us all of a sudden. He swung his ws from distance and his attack will reach us soon.


    "Get down!" I shouted.


    Everyone gets down after hearing my shout, except for Shelia who noticed the attack and jumped with me.


    Well, at least we know the Werewolf is not friendly.


    "Roy, I think the system in this dungeon is different. Any monsters in here only have one goal which is to stop intruder. Even if they should be a race that have intellect like the Werewolves, they won''t stop attacking even their own kind. And I don''t think this one has intellect. In any case, it''s good to encounter Werewolf here. You are an expert in fighting in closed space after all." Victoria exined.


    Well, seeing how he doesn''t try to interact at all with us who have Shelia on our side, I guess Victoria is right. Then, let''s defeat him and progress to the boss room!


    But Shelia seems to want something.


    "Roy, wait! I want to fight him alone. I want to see how strong I am now." Shelia said.


    It seems like she wanted to test her strength against a real Werewolf. One strong enough to have grown his tail on his Werewolf form.


    "Sure. But if I see you in danger, we''ll help you right away." I said to Shelia.


    Then she faces the Werewolf alone, and we just watched her while rxing and sitting on Blobbysofa.


    The dungeon Werewolf fought Shelia. He''s stronger than Shelia, but Shelia is faster. Seems like even if they have tails, Werewolves like Shelia who has her own will is much stronger. I guess I won''t have a turn here.


    I just need to worry about their stray attacks. I''ll prepare Victoria to transform into a wall just in case.


    Since the battle is just a one on one match, the dungeon Werewolf decided to no longer use his long-distance attack. The two of them exchanging punches, kicks, and ws.


    Even though Shelia is faster, she''s not used in fighting in this closed space, so she got hit several times. She needs to get used to it.


    Little by little, Shelia learned how to fight in this closed space. The dungeon Werewolf got hit t over and over again, while his attack started to miss a lot.


    The winner is obvious.


    It took a while, but Shelia is thest one standing. We apuded her for her victory, and Ka healed her right away.


    "Do you need some rest?" I asked Shelia if she want to take some rest.


    "No need. I can go on." Shelia replied.


    Well, if she says she can go on, then let''s continue.


    "I can''t see through that area. It must be near the center of the volcano since I feel it''s getting hotter. And the mana is too dense that I can''t see through even though I just upgraded my Divine Vision. Let''s be careful. I''ll create a portal right away as soon as I sense danger."


    This way, whatever the danger is, we will be able to escape.


    We entered the path, and we reached a in area. This should be the center of the volcano, but there''s nova here. Instead, it''s a grassy in. Next to the path we take, there are other paths reaching to the in. Seems like those are the paths we will arrive from if we took different way.


    And in the center of the in, there''s a sword stabbed to the ground. Is that the treasure of this dungeon?


    "A sword! A legendary sword that protagonist will take and use against evil!" Victoria shouted happily.


    "That''s just a story. Let''s see¡­ There''s nothing strange about the sword other than it being stabbed to the ground. I''ll try pulling it out."


    I take a step forward, and grab the handle of the sword. The sword is light, but I carefully pulled it out from the ground. There''s no rust in the de, so at least this sword should be some kind of magical item.


    I pulled out the sword, and in that instant, I feel the ground moving. It''s an earthquake!


    More importantly, under the hole the sword was stabbed, I can seeva even without using my Divine Vision!


    This is dangerous, so I stabbed the sword right back at the hole. The rumbling stopped right away.


    "¡­what was that?" Ang asked.


    "It seems like once the sword is pulled, the volcano will erupt. It might even cause the dungeon to be destroyed. Let''s keep the sword here for now. Tomorrow, I''ll get Sam''s appraiser to appraise this sword here." I said.


    With Jeremy''s appraisal, we should be able to figure what this sword is.


    "Tsk! You almost be a swordsman there if that sword is better than your spear."


    Let''s ignore Victoria''s words. It''s better to safe than sorry.


    "Well, let''s go back now. We cane back to this dungeon again and travel through different route and map the whole dungeon. Shelia, will youe with us or will you return to your home?"


    "I''ll go with you! The meals are more delicious over there!" Shelia shouted in excitement.


    I guess that mean she''s staying over.


    I opened a portal and we return back to Cassau in an instant.


    After gathering everyone, including Jeremy, and also after kidnapping Albert from his duty, I told everyone about the dungeon and the sword.


    "So, that sword is like a seal to stop the dungeon from being destroyed, right? Now, can I go back?"


    Since Albert not in the mood to chat, I kicked him into a portal that goes to the maids'' room. I hope Marie will get angry at him.


    "So, Jeremy, will youe with me tomorrow to appraise the sword?" I asked Jeremy.


    "Sure. Since you haven''t been diving for a while, I''m free most of the time."


    And so, we returned back to the dungeon the next day.


    Everyone also joined after listening that the dungeon is good for training.


    I brought everyone to the first goblins'' room where there are several paths to take.


    "From now, we''ll split and map the dungeon ording to the path you take. Shelia, you will follow Candy, while Ang will follow Ka. As for the rest, decide on your own. I''ll take Jeremy with me through yesterday''s path. How good is your magic, Jeremy?"


    "I''m a nonbatant. Please protect me."


    As expected. Well, the reason I choose the same path as yesterday is because that''s the path I know to be the safest at the moment. I am confident in protecting him until we reach the sword.


    And the reason I take everyone to the entrance of the dungeon is also for everyone to map the dungeon. If the strongest monster is about the same strength as the dungeon Werewolf, they should be able to take care of it themselves. With Ang in one group and Shelia in the other, they will be able to take care of most monsters.


    I think splitting Candy and Shirley is also better. Oh? They really end up splitting. Well, that''s good.


    "Well then, I will wait at the end of the dungeon. Good luck, everyone!"


    I transformed some Blobbies into a cart and put Jeremy in the cart. It''s faster this way.


    The monsters I encountered, are defeated instantly, and we reached the in soon after.


    "So, this is the sword. Please wait for a while until I finished appraising it." Jeremy said while checking on the stabbed sword.


    I took a nap while waiting for him to finish and for everyone to arrive, and got woken up when Jeremy finished appraising. Everyone also has arrived while I''m sleeping and wanted to listen to Jeremy''s appraisal.


    "This sword is a sealing sword. It''s light, strong, but not sharp. I don''t think it''s good for fighting, but I''m not a swordsman so I don''t know. This sword is here to seal this volcano from erupting. And the special ability of this sword is to summon monsters again and again until the mana near the sword fully disappear. Once there''s no monsters reappear any longer, the power of this sword will disappear and the volcano will erupt. Probably this whole ind will disappear." Jeremy exined.


    "Well, I guess that mean we can train here until monsters stop appearing. Once the rate of monsters'' reappearance slowed down, we''ll stop using this ce for training. If we enter the dungeon every day, how long will it take until the mana around the sword disappear?" I asked.


    "Hmm¡­ I think it''s a hundred years."


    "¡­we don''t have to worry about anything and train here as much as we like. Let''s go home now."


    And that''s how we got a good training location. Though the limit is just in how many times I can open a portal. But I think my magic will increase soon. I feel like I will reach intermediate level in my air element soon.

 Chapter 232 - Rhino Girl

    Time skip.


    What is time skip?


    It''s something an author would do in his/her series whenever there''s nothing important happening after a certain event or usually when the protagonist going for a long training to improve. The author would go on write something like ''one yearter'' or ''few yearster''. It''s because the author is toozy to exin the protagonist''s daily life during a certain arc.


    Sometimes, it''sing all of a sudden.


    And god, I hate time skip! It''s like the author is just going on with the story while sometime skipping some of the important event in the story!


    On this book I read in between training, there''s a time skip! The protagonist went on a training for five years, and when he and his friends reunited, every one of his friends has changed!


    Why is that female character became slutty? Why is protagonist''s best friend has lost his arm? And there''s even a character whose personality changed now as if he''s a different person! And when will the author exin what happened with them?!


    Anyway, it has been one year since when we discovered that ind dungeon we used for training, and today we''re celebrating Jewel''s magic manifestation.


    "Congrats on manifesting your magic! You have registered as a hunter like we told you, right?"


    "YES, MASTER! I HAVE REGISTERED! NOW I CAN GO TO SCHOOL AND WHEN I GRADUATE, WE CAN GO ATTEND THE SAME MAGIC COLLEGE TOGETHER!" Jewel shouted happily.


    Why is her shouting way of talking returned? Is it because she''s happy?


    Well, I''ll let her scream all she wants today. Good thing I have improved my air element. Now I can block sound using air shield. Though it''s still too weak to be used properly as a shield other than being a silencer.


    At least it''s good to not let the neighbor be annoyed by Jewel''s scream-like way of talking. Though we don''t have any neighbor after we built the park. But in exchange, there are lots of children going to the park to y.


    That''s right, the park is done already. Sam has already bought all the properties nearby, and I built this park with the help of everyone.


    And thanks to Victoria''s knowledge of her previous world, I built some attractions that children would enjoy. Like swing, slide, seesaw, sandbox, and jungle gym. The kids enjoyed ying them every day.


    With this, the kids will have a ce where they can y while also moving their body. It''s good for kids to train by ying instead of just training. They will at least have better stamina than others who never actually leaves their houses.


    And today, with delicious cake on the table baked by Lina, we are celebrating Jewel''s magic manifestation.


    "So, what elements did you get?" Ang asked.


    Everyone has gotten a lot stronger. But none of the mages among us has gotten so strong as fast as Ang. In just one year, all four of her elements have reached advanced level! And she''s still 17!


    "I HAVE MANIFESTED TWO ELEMENTS! ONE IS LIGHTNING ELEMENT, AND THE OTHER IS BEASTFORM!" Jewel replied.


    "That''s good! Lighting element, you can learn from both Candy and Sophie. As for beastform¡­" I looked at Ian who looked at Jewel kindly.


    "I will do my best to guide Lady Jewel, Master Roy."


    Then Ian approached Jewel.


    "Have you decided on what animal you wanted to transform to? Most of the Beastform mages choose birds or other flying type animal. And we can''t pick any monster to transform into." Ian asked Jewel what she wanted to transform into.


    Then Shelia interjected.


    "Wolf! Transform into a wolf! Wolf is the best animal!"


    Then everyone also gives a suggestion on what animal is the best.


    I also start thinking about what is good for Jewel. Her physical strength is weak even after training under me, but with her beastform, she should be able to cover that weakness if she picks a powerful animal.


    But I think it''s best for her to decide it herself.


    "That''s enough. Looking at her expression, Jewel must have decided one already. Tell us what animal is it."


    While being pressed by the others on what animal it would be, Jewel keep the same smiling expression all the time. She has learned to keep her head cool and make think carefully on what to do.


    "IT''S RHINOCEROS!"


    ¡­what the hell?


    "Not tiger, not wolf, not bird, not even horse, but a rhino?" I asked for her confirmation.


    "YES! THEY''RE BIG AND STRONG! GOOD TO COVER FOR MY WEAKNESS! AND THEY ARE ARMORED WITH THICK SKIN! THEY ARE ALSO FAST EVEN WHEN THEY CAN ONLY CHARGE FORWARD!"


    Well, I guess she''s right. But she''s still a girl, so howe she decides it so easily? A rhino doesn''t seem cute at all. What if she grows a horn on her nose?


    "I EVEN TRIED IT IN MY ROOM BEFORE!"


    And of course she already did it¡­ sigh¡­ it means there''s no way to undo that. She will be a rhino girl from now on. A Thunder Rhino Girl. Not because of her lightning element, but because of her loud voice. I have gotten used to the peace in this house that I sometime forget to use Divine Vision at all time.


    "Sigh¡­ fine. I think everyone is slightly disappointed by your choice, but since you have decided and going through with it, we''ll respect your choice. Can you show us your transformation?"


    "SURE!"


    "Wait! Not here! Let''s do thatter after we finish all the foods here while they''re still warm!" I said.


    And after the table is clean from the food¡­ we still waited until Ian and Lina finished doing the dishes. We only left with portal after everything is clean.


    The location where we''re at is theke. It''s peaceful and there''s only few monsters here.


    "Alright, you can transform here." I said to Jewel.


    Then Jewel took some distance from us to start her transformation.


    And I¡­ sped my hands together and pray.


    "No horn on her nose. No horn on her nose."


    And the other girls who see me praying, do the same as well.


    ""No horn on her nose. No horn on her nose.""


    The result is¡­ there''s no horn on her nose! But it''s still weird!


    It''s like she''s wearing a gray armor instead of transforming! And her head¡­ there''s no transformation at all! It''s just looks like she''s wearing an armor and a mask! And the rhino head mask is not worn on her face, and just hanging on her forehead!


    "¡­Ian, is that normal?" I asked the other beastform mage we have.


    "¡­I think so. From what I learn about beastform in my youth, there are two kinds of beastform transformations. Some will transform their body into simr to the animal they can transform to like me, and rarely, some will only look like they are wearing clothes or costumes simr to the animals they can transform into. This is the first time I''ve seen one, so I thought this kind of transformation doesn''t exist." Ian exined.


    That mean Jewel got the rare kind of costume transformation, huh?


    "Ian, does the transformation depend on the animal they are going to transform, or will it depend on the mages themselves?"


    "I think it depends on the mages. And they will still be counted as an advanced level right from the start."


    "THAT MEAN I''M ALREADY AN ADVANCED LEVEL MAGE! AWESOME!"


    I guess that''s her luck, huh? Well, we should be d that it doesn''t look that bad.


    "Can you show us your beast transformation?" I asked Jewel.


    "SURE!"


    This time, she transformed into a real rhinoceros. The size, the horn, the color, everything is just like a real rhinoceros. Well, other than the fact that she talks. And she''s shouting, not talking.


    "MASTER! SEE?! THIS IS MY TRANSFORMATION!"


    I moved away from her and decided to test her rhino form.


    "Jewel! Charge at me!"


    Jewel started running. She''s quite fast, but not as fast as me or the Werewolves. But it''s a good speed.


    Her horn about to hit me when I stopped it with both my hand. I grabbed the horn and only pushed one step back. And that''s when I''m using my Aura! Rhinoceros is really a powerful animal.


    "Now, use your neck and lift me up!"


    I tried to hold my ground, but I failed. I got thrown to the sky, but Inded perfectly.


    "You''re so strong! Now, let''s try your hybrid form and attack me!"


    Now she transformed back to her armored form, and tries to punch me. I stopped it with one hand, but I can tell her strength has improved.


    "Good! Now defend this!"


    She crossed her arms to block my punch which is not covered with Aura. Her armored arm is very strong! I can feel my fist hurting from that punch, and Jewel doesn''t seem to be hurt at all!


    "How is it, Jewel?" I asked while holding my fist I used to punch her.


    "I DON''T FEEL ANY PAIN AT ALL! THIS FORM IS VERY STRONG!" Jewel shouted happily.


    Well, I guess it means she choose the correct one. I''m d that she''s happy with her choice.


    Then everyone surrounds her and start asking questions and touching her body and armor. Other than Ian obviously.


    "Ian, please take care of her."


    "I will, Master Roy."


    While we are celebrating Jewel''s magic manifestation, Sonia appears wearing a grave expression.


    "Sonia, what''s wrong?" I asked.


    "¡­Roy, it''s finally here. Veronica said she has to leave the cult as soon as possible or she might be killed."


    Our joyous atmosphere changed as soon as Sonia said that.


    There''s no time, I''ll hear her exnation together with Albert. I quickly returned everyone to Cassau, and go to the capital and discuss our next move.

 Chapter 233 - Veronicas Situation

    "What''s the emergency!?" Albert burst into the room followed by the Prime Minister''s son and Mustache. His name was¡­Hex?


    "I know you''re forgetful. His name is Hector. Although his status is just the Prime Minister''s son, most of the duty of Prime Minister has already been under his care. It will only take some time until I can announce it officially that he''s the Prime Minister. As for Lowe, the current Prime Minister, I let him take care of anything cult rted in the capital. Now tell me what''s your emergency?" Albert re-introduced Hector to me again. The name was so close so it''s fine, right?


    "I don''t know the full story yet. Sonia just told me that Veronica''s life is in danger. Ie here right after hearing that." I said.


    "Alone?" Albert asked.


    "Yeah. It''s better if Ie alone in case I need to travel far to save Veronica."


    I can now use Air Steps as many times as I want after my air element reached intermediate level. I was helped from watching thepetition between the Werewolves a few months ago. I watched a lot of the Werewolves using Air Steps. They have gotten stronger and most of them are able to use Air Steps.


    As for thepetition, I found it boring. But the others don''t seem to think that the battle is boring. Albert also think the same thing, but since the audiences loved it, he will still continue with thepetition in the kingdom. That''s why we have thought carefully on the format of thepetition together with Victoria. But we need until a certain item she suggested to be finished. Marie is busy nowadays making that thing, and make me babysit n as well.


    Well, that''s forter. For now, it''s Veronica''s life which is more important.


    "Then, where''s Sonia?" Albert asked.


    "Veronica called her again, so I told Sonia to ry a message to Veronica about good methods for escaping and hiding in case she needed it. But if her opponent is an expert level mage or above, those methods will be useless."


    "I hope she will be able to survive until you arrive. Let''s wait for Sonia. While we''re waiting, Hector here have something to say to you." Albert said.


    "What is it?" I asked Hector who stands behind the king. Seems like just like Mustache, he can''t afford to get too close with the king. Well, it''s his problem. Not mine.


    "I''d like to thank you. My father and I have been thinking of ways to make more people want to get stronger. Thatpetition you created help us a lot. I hope you will be the first winner of thatpetition."


    Oh! I know this! This is an ass-kissing moment! First time I experienced it. Not bad! No wonder those with power keep people like him around them. Does it mean he has something to ask of me? But he is wrong on one thing, so his ass-kissing has failed.


    "Sorry, but I don''t intend to participate. My power is best kept secret from the enemy. Thatpetition will be too big and a lot of people will hear it. There''s no way the cult would not notice." I said.


    "See? Kissing his ass won''t work on someone like him. He already noticed you''re up to something, and you failed when you speak wrongly. Being direct with him is the best thing to do. Anyway Roy, Hector have an important matter that he thinks you''re the best candidate for it. But I said to not give you any job for one more year. And it''s not like you''re the only one who can do it, so it''s fine." Albert exined.


    "So¡­ his presence here is totally unneeded, right? You can return to your job now."


    "Well, this is his job. Helping me. With him, we should be able to make more ns to rescue Veronica."


    True. I guess he can stay.


    "Let''s rx for a bit and y chess while we wait. You''ve been too busytely. You don''t even realize when both n and Lana already able to walk. n''s first word was ''Mama'', and Lana''s first was ''Woy''. I took that as Roy."


    The twins are now a bit over one year old. They keep running around in the house and in the park. And since n has grown, Marie would leave him under my care. Well, it was Ruby and Penny mostly. While Albert and Marie got busier and busier. At least Marie still has some time to meet her children while it''s difficult for Albert to meet them. He can only meet his own children about once a month.


    "That''s not true. Their first word is ''Pleb,'' and you know it!" Albert said.


    "And you''re proud having your own children calling people plebs?"


    We yed chess for some time while waiting for Sonia to arrive. But only after one round, both the King and the future Prime Minister are already closed their eyes and took a nap. That''s why I just y and chat with Mustache.


    Although he''s also busy being Albert''s guard, he can manage his time to rest while letting other people to protect Albert.


    Well, they can have this chance to take some rest. They have been too busy nowadays. And Victoria is enjoying putting the two in certain position. I won''t tell what kind of position it was though.


    And after waiting for a while, Sonia finally appear. I quickly got those two woke up to listen to Sonia''s report.


    "What happened?" Albert quickly asked Sonia.


    "Well, there''s a betrayal in the cult." Sonia replied.


    "She betrays the cult without consulting us? That''s a bad choice." I said.


    "No. Not her. It''s Celestine." Sonia said.


    "¡­who?"


    Who is this Celestine again? I forgot her already.


    "The big boobed one." Sonia replied.


    "Ah! The other one beside Veronica, huh? Then how is Veronica the one whose life in danger?"


    "I''ll tell you how this happened from what Veronica told me." Sonia start telling us how it ended this way.


    It started when one of the higher ups who was a criminal got bored and want to destroy a whole vige just for fun. The other doesn''t care about what he did, so they leave him be. Even Veronica is holding herself back to not rouse suspicion.


    But Celestine tried to stop him because there are a lot of kids in that vige. Veronica found out that Celestine is in charge of a certain orphanage, and cares about children a lot.


    "Wait! She''s a good girl? What about her putting spies watching on Veronica?" Albert asked.


    Right, there were some spies watching her before. We thought that it was Celestine who put spies watching Veronica.


    "They are from Celestine''s faction who knows the truth about Celestine. They spied on Veronica to see if she has any desire to leave the cult or not." Sonia said.


    Why does it have to be so confusing? If only those two get along, this won''t happen.


    So, Celestine killed that criminal before he destroyed a vige. But other found out about it, then the helmet man ordered the cult to kill Celestine.


    "Archbishop. Not helmet man." Albert said.


    "But he did wear a helmet, right?"


    Anyway, Celestine escape right away. When Veronica heard about that, she went to look for the spies that was sent by Celestine, and interrogate them without telling the other higher ups, and not even anyone in her faction. Those spies are the ones who knows about the real Celestine who cares about her children.


    At first, it was like a real interrogation without torture. But one person can''t stand it anymore, and that person leak the truth to Veronica. And when Veronica learns the truth, she asked the spies to have them cooperate with her in saving both Celestine and the orphans.


    Then Veronica decided to do something. She''s going to the orphanage Celestine is in charge of, and destroy it, while Celestine''s spies that she caught will rescue the children. It''s a dangerous move by Veronica.


    "So, when Celestine finds out about Veronica destroying the orphanage, she will go after Veronica in revenge. But if the cult finds out that Veronica is actually sheltering the orphans, they will target Veronica as well because they will think that Veronica is in cahoots and might n for another betrayal. That''s why her life is in danger, right?" Albert concluded.


    "The orphans and the spies are on the run hiding from the pursuers, while Veronica is pretending to go after Celestine alone while the truth is that she went into hiding. If Celestine hasn''t realized her orphanage is destroyed by Veronica, Veronica should be safe for a while." Sonia continued.


    "So¡­ we have three mission. Saving Veronica, shelter the orphans, and hopefully, getting Celestine on our side as well. Is that it?" I said.


    "Hmm¡­ yes. For now, you need to find the children first. Veronica should be strong enough to handle herself for a few days. I''ll look for a good ce to shelter the orphans and mark it with Blobby. You will transport them with your portal. Then, look for Veronica and transport her as well. As for Celestine¡­ what do you n with her?" Albert asked.


    "Well, I have one sincest year before Veronica leaves. But I don''t think it will work in this situation. I''ll figure it outter. For now, I''ll take my leave. Sonia, you know their whereabouts, right?"


    "Veronica still have the ring you gave her so I know where she is. As for the orphans, Veronica gave me their location, but since they are on the move, it might be difficult." Sonia said.


    "Once we have a n on what to do with the orphans and the spies, we''ll contact you through Sonia. Good luck." Albert said.


    Then, it''s time to find some orphans.

 Chapter 234 - Reunion In The Border City

    Summary of the previous event:


    Big boob is a good person.


    Big boob went rogue.


    Big ass search for big boob''s spies.


    Big ass tried to cover big boob''s ass even if she might end up getting misunderstood.


    I''m trying to save everyone.


    I guess that''s everything.


    "¡­Roy, you sure love to make things simpler." Victoria said.


    "Making things simpler makes me able to quickly make a decision on what to do." I replied calmly.


    Right now, I''m above the sky flying¡­ I mean running on air to reach the destination. Seems like the orphanage that Big Boob- I mean Celestine is in charge of is at the border of the kingdom. At least it means I don''t have to go beyond the border to different country.


    Now I don''t have limit on how many steps I can take on air. It''s all depend on my mana. And I have done a lot of cultivation to improve my mana as well. I can even open a portal dozens of times!


    But¡­ there''s nowhere close to the border that I can transport to. No Blobbies sent that way. Which mean the closest city to the border is the capital. I have to run all the way from the capital to the border.


    Whenever I see a city, I have the desire to mark those cities with Blobbies, but I''m afraid that the citizens would think of those Blobbies as wild monsters and attack my cute Blobbies. And I don''t know any good empty spot in that city. So, I just skipped those cities.


    "You know what they''re gonna say when they see you flying above their city?" Victoria asked all of a sudden.


    "Don''t worry. I''m being careful enough to hide myself in the clouds. There shouldn''t be anyone seeing me running in the sky." I replied calmly.


    "That''s not what I want. I want the people to say, ''It''s a bird!'' ''No! It''s a monster!'' ''No! It''s SuperRoy!'' like that." Victoria said.


    "That''s stupid. The first person is an attention-seeker. Why would anyone be shouting when there''s a bird in the sky? The second one is blind. Howe the second person unable to differentiate between birds, monsters, or me? I don''t even have wings! The third person has normal eyesight, I guess. I like that name, SuperRoy. I guess it''s something ''Super'' from your world, right?"


    "Yeah. One who wears a bright red underwear outside his pants. You should try that sometimes."


    "Why would I do that? That''s just weird!"


    I think there are a lot of context that Victoria didn''t tell me about just to make me curious about what she''s talking about. She loves it when I reacted to anything she said.


    "So, what''s the n, Roy?" Victoria asked.


    "First is to find the orphans. They shouldn''t be far from the border city. Especially if they have children with them. And the sudden disappearance of the orphans should be suspicious even if Veronica destroyed the orphanage. There should be some witnesses we can ask. Maybe Celestine is there as well? Let''s find some info in that city first."


    There''s no way anyone won''t get suspicious if an orphanage suddenly got destroyed. And there might be Celestine''s spy that Veronica released on standby there in case Celestine returns to that city. If I can find out about the spy, it will be easier that way.


    "And what will you do to Celestine? Are you sure you''re still going to use that n we talked about over one year ago?" Victoria asked again.


    Back then, when we said farewell to Veronica before she returns to the base of the cult, Veronica told me about Celestine.


    Veronica told us that Celestine hates men because we would instantly look down on her breast. As for Veronica herself, she''s fine until she turns her back to men.


    One time, Celestine identally leaked that although she hates men, she still wants to find a lover one day. So, after everyone have a discussion, they decided to have me¡­ seduce Celestine!


    Basically, I need to find her, look into her eyes, and use some cheesy lines. It''s for the good of the world so I agree with the n reluctantly. Does someone feeling reluctant to do something have a happy smile on his face? I don''t know. I didn''t look at the mirror at the time.


    With my Divine Vision, I can still look at her breasts while maintaining eye contact. I should be the only man who can do it!


    "I''ll see what happen first. I think it''s a bad timing to seduce her since at the moment, her mind is full with the thought of the orphans and is looking for Veronica. But if she calmed down, I might be able to seduce her." I said.


    "¡­Roy, you''re smiling."


    "Can''t help it! I''ll try my best to keep a poker face when I see her." I said.


    "¡­you don''t deny that you want it, huh?"


    "Oh! I can see it already! That''s the city closest to the border, Jion. What a funny name." I said as I finally can see the city.


    "¡­it''s too far for me to see."


    "I didn''t say you can see it. I said that I can see it. I''ll descend soon. The monsters here are quite powerful, but let''s ignore them."


    After Victoria can see the city, I descended somewhere no one can see, and walk normally to the city. I transformed Victoria into a backpack to make people think I''m just a traveler.


    I enter the city, then look for an inn I can stay. I didn''t bring anything, so I''m fine with the cheapest inn. But to be safe from being seen as suspicious, I look for a better inn. Not too cheap, and not too pricy. I don''t want to be suddenly targeted after all.


    I heard from the guards that there''s a sudden increase of people entering the city after the orphanage suddenly got destroyed. And I can see that most people here are being wary and have explosives in their mouth as well. Seems like they are here to look or either Celestine, or Veronica, or both of them.


    But what shock me the most is that there''s a familiar face in this town, drinking at a bar alone.


    Seeing him in this town, I look around in case I see another familiar face, but there''s no one I know. Which mean it might be the worst situation for him.


    I see the bar owner kicked him out of the bar. I guess I should greet him and ask what happened.


    "Hey. It''s been almost two years since west met." I greeted the man.


    "Huh? Who are you? rence! Is that you, rence?" The man recognizes my clown identity.


    "It''s been a while, Thomas. How''s the circus?"


    That''s right. This person is the circus master who once visited Melk. I had the opportunity to be the clown and the main performer of the whole show. Everyone loves me.


    "That¡­ the circus¡­"


    "Let''s enter the bar again, but no drinking for you."


    I brought Thomas back into the bar. The owner was mad when he saw us entering, but I gave him some money to let us have some privacy. He left the bar to me. He even gave me the key and told me where I should leave the key if when I''m leaving. It''s the power of money!


    "So, what happened?"


    "¡­they''re all dead because of the stampedest year." Thomas said.


    "You mean because of the cult!?"


    "Right. Melk was the city where the princess and the king first found about the cult''s existence, huh? No wonder you know. But¡­ because of the cult, most of my circus family are dead. We were on a tour, when that city is under attack."


    So¡­ in the end, I already have someone fall because of the cult. I should have told Thomas to go to Cassau, right? But I guess the circus has its own schedule.


    "The strongman?"


    "He got stepped on by monsters."


    "The contortionist?"


    "Got pushed by people running about."


    "Tightrope Walkers?"


    "Never see them since that day."


    "Trapeze Artists?"


    "One died, the other lost both his legs. He should be returned to his hometown."


    "¡­damn. I''m sorry to hear that. What are you doing now?" I asked worriedly.


    "Just spending the rest of my money on drinks. I don''t have anything I want to do. My life is over when the circus is gone." Thomas said as he grabbed a bottle from the bar, but I stopped him from drinking.


    "What about building another troupe? I''ll be the sponsor this time. I''m rich, you know?" I gave a suggestion.


    "Are you sure?"


    "Yeah. As you know, because of the cult, we know that there will be fight. Probably even war. But that doesn''t mean we can''t have anyughter. I need you to spreadughter to everyone."


    "Spreadughter¡­ that''s my dream."


    "So is mine. But I''ll need you to hire people on your own. I''m busy after all. If you decide to agree, go to Cassau. That''s my new home. Be the local circus there and entertain everyone. I will y as rence from time to time as well."


    "¡­fine. I''ll start from the start again! Will you help me as our sponsor?"


    "Sure!"


    We shook our hands. Seems like he now has the will to continue living.


    "Well, I have some question for you. My goal ining to this city is to investigate about the destroyed orphanage. What do you know about it?" I asked while putting my air magic as a silencer just in case someone can hear us. I know there''s no one here, but I''m being careful.


    "I actually saw the orphans. No one believe me since I sound just like a drunk old man, but I saw the orphans are kidnapped and being taken outside, to the north of this city. What is exactly your job?" Thomas asked.


    "Will youe to Cassau now?" I didn''t answer Thomas'' question.


    "Now? I don''t have any money left! And it will take weeks until I reach there. You haven''t answered my question."


    "Tell the first person you see that I trust you, and they will tell you everything."


    I opened a portal back to Cassau, and throw Thomas into the portal.


    "I''m still busy here, so I will be away for a while. Take care of this guy for me."


    The person close to the portal is Ian. And while Thomas is confused at what happened, I close the portal. Ian and the others will exin everything to Thomas.


    Now I have one more reason to hate the cult. They destroyed my favorite circus!


    I will surely destroy everything rted to the cult!


    And then¡­ I can be a clown again!


    Wait! I want to be a clown and a doctor, so will I be a clown doctor? Or doctor clown?

 Chapter 235 - Orphans Found

    The orphans were kidnapped and taken outside of the city. That''s what Thomas told me before I kicked him into the portal. Hopefully, the kidnappers he mentioned are actually Celestine''s spies.


    But what is their rtions with Celestine? Did they grow up together? I don''t think they are people whom Celestine just know after she joined the cult. If so, they can''t be fully trusted.


    That''s why Albert and Hector made up a n to figure that out.


    I will take all the orphans and those spies to a ce Albert prepared, and Albert will take care of finding out if they can be trusted or not with his lie detection skill. He will be with Mustache and other powerful agents so, once they are found to be lying and unable to be trusted, they will be killed.


    Though I need to make sure that none of them have the explosives in their mouth first. How do I convince them that I''m with Veronica?


    For now, finding the orphanses first. They are taken outside the city, so I need some clues.


    And so, when night fall, I sneaked to where the orphanage is. As expected, it was being watched by members of the cult. But at least it''s good that the orphanage wasn''t burnt. I forgot what Veronica''s elements are, but I think this is the work of her wind element, and no fire element. That mean the clues are still there.


    After my air element has reached intermediate level, the range and size of my magic has increased. So, I put all the members of the cult and some innocent passerby to sleep with my sleeping gas.


    Sorry, innocent passerby, but this is urgent. And it''s dark after all. You need to get some sleep.


    After everyone watching the orphanage fell asleep, I summoned Shelia.


    "Roy, where is this? Are we fighting someone?"


    Her first thought is that we''re fighting someone already. Well, it might not be wrong.


    "Probably we will get our fightter. For now, I want you to memorize the smell of people from this orphanage. Find the clothes, or nket, and memorize those smell. We''re searching for the orphans from this orphanage to rescue them." I ordered Shelia.


    "Just sniffing? That''s easy."


    Shelia then proceed to look for any remains in this orphanage. Whether anything that should have the children''s scent in this remains.


    In this one year, Shelia has grown much stronger. Although she hasn''t reached the level of Grandpa Werewolf, her improvement is much greater than the Werewolves who went on training in Monsters World.


    She hasn''t grown a tail in her Werewolf form yet, but she told me that whenever she transformed, she felt something from her back. I think she will grow a tail soon since she told me that the feeling is simr to the tail she had when she''s in her wolf form. There''s something that she can move, but that thing isn''t there yet.


    "Roy! I found a mixed scent of multiple people going that way!" Shelia pointed to the north. Just like Thomas said.


    "Alright. We''ll move on air while evading people''s eyes. We''llnd once we''re outside the city. After that, you''ll take the lead." I said to Shelia.


    Then we jumped to the sky, and run toward the north. It''s already dark, and the streets are empty other than the red-light district. But they are busy looking at other people instead of the sky, so we are safe until we leave the city.


    "They''re going this way!"


    I followed Shelia''s lead to further north.


    Back when I enter the city, I asked the inn owner if he has a map of the viges nearby. Since the inn is often used by hunters, he has one. I''m not confident in my memory, so I had some Blobbies copied the map exactly as it is, and didn''t make them transform back to their slime form. They stay as a map, rolled inside my pocket.


    I pulled the map out and look at where we''re going.


    The map is all dark because the Blobbies can''t change their color, but I had themyered on some importantndmark and viges, so I know by the thickness of the map.


    "Yup, if we continue like this, we will reach a vige. Hopefully, we can find the orphans there." I said as I put the map into my pocket again.


    "Hmm¡­ Roy, I think I smell something burning ahead. Maybe they are fighting." Shelia said.


    "Let''s speed up! It will be bad if even the cult managed to capture just one kid!"


    If there''s a battle, that mean not everyone is targeting the orphans. Some are protecting them, and that''s how it became a fight. I don''t think the orphans are old enough to have their magic manifested, so it must be Celestine''s spies protecting the orphans. As for the vigers, I hope they are okay.


    I''m still unable to see the vige even with my Divine Vision, but soon after, I see something is burning.


    "Shelia, wear a mask to not let anyone discover you!"


    I throw a wolf mask made of Blobbies to Shelia who grabbed them and put it on her face, and I also have them surround my body and transformed into Ninja! It has been a long time since I became Ninja.


    Ninja is already considered as criminal in the capital, so what if more people treat me as criminal somewhere else? And in case the vige is destroyed, the vigers can either me the cult or Ninja. And people might end up thinking that Ninja is a cult member. Then the real cult member will try to find out if Ninja is one of them or not.


    In any case, we need to hurry. The fire is getting bigger. Everyone in the vige must be panicked.


    At least the orphans must survive!


    And then we can use the orphans to force Celestine to join us! This makes me feel like the bad guy.


    And then while making sure the orphans are safe, we can be relieved since Celestine will join our cause! This one is better.


    We finally reached the vige. Most of the vigers are leaving the vige and watch as their vige is being destroyed. I can see some of them died. I hope the orphans are not among the dead bodies.


    Hmm¡­ there''s no dead children. Good.


    "Hey! What happen here?" I asked the vigers.


    They are suspicious of me since I''m covering my face, but some of them only care about their house, so they told me what happened.


    "Two groups of people are fighting! One group brought children here, and the others are targeting those children! And they''re destroying my house!" Someone said.


    "What about the children?"


    "They are still in the vige!" Someone else replied.


    I can see that the two groups are fighting, with one group is trying to protect a certain house. That building is not on fire, and I can see through that house that there are a lot of children crying.


    "I can smell the scent from the orphanage in that building! Let''s go!" Shelia said.


    I can make all the fire disappear just by making all the mmable gas disappear. Although I want to cover myself in this fire, the children are in danger. I have to be quick.


    "Wolf! We''re fighting the one attacking that building and the people protecting it!" I gave an order to Shelia, in which she nodded.


    I have told Shelia before to not use real name when we''re in disguise. So, she''s called Wolf, and I''m Ninja. But this is the first time we use our disguise for a mission together.


    I only put out the fire near my surrounding, and I killed one cult member right away as soon as I saw him. Everyone was shocked to see someoneing.


    There are about three people protecting the house, and nine people left attacking it. One of them has died by my hand.


    "There''s no time for introduction! The orphans have to be safe!" I shouted, signaling that I''m the allies of the orphans.


    I put out some fire that has reached the house, and shot some cult members with Victogun.


    Meanwhile, Shelia is attacking the cult members one by one. The fight is done in less than two minutes.


    The three cult members who protected the house are safe, and all the children still alive, although some of them have breathe in too much smoke. But with my improved air magic, I can change the properties of the smoke inside their lungs. Air element is perfect for doctors.


    "Is this all of the orphans?" I asked one of them.


    "Yes. Are you¡­"


    "I''m Veronica''s friend. If you want me to help you, throw those explosives in your mouth. Although I heard about you from Veronica, I still don''t trust you since you''re also members of the cult."


    The three of them put their fingers inside their mouth and threw the HGB away. I shot the HGB and they exploded. I don''t want anyone near that thing.


    After checking that the three of them don''t have explosives any more, I asked Veronica''s whereabouts.


    "So, where''s Veronica?"


    "Lady Celestine has found out about the orphanage destruction, so Lady Veronica said that she will hide somewhere in the forest to the west of Jion. But I think Lady Celestine is already on her track. Please help those two!"


    "That''s my n. For now, all of you, go to sleep!"


    I used sleeping gas to make everyone fall asleep. I still don''t trust them enough to show them my portals.


    Then I contacted Sonia to tell Albert that I''m bringing the orphans. He will take care of them.


    Now¡­ it seems like Celestine is already on her way to Veronica. That mean no more seducing her.


    ¡­I''m not unhappy, okay!

 Chapter 236 - Looking For Veronica

    Now what? Should I go to where Veronica supposed to hide right away? I guess that''s the case.


    I don''t mind if Celestine has found Veronica first. Veronica should be able to hold for a while against Celestine. But if the cult sent specialized people to chase after either of them, and they have found out that Veronica is actually helping Celestine, it will beplicated.


    For now, I need to exin some things to the vigers.


    The fire has gone, and one by one, the vigers have returned to see the status of their own house. Some houses are still standing, some are totally destroyed. But a white-haired old man who seems to be the Vige chief suggested that some those whose house is still standing to let people whose house is destroyed stay for a while until they can rebuild the house.


    Should I give them somepensation? It''s not like I''m the cause of their problem, right? And I''m disguising myself as criminal. There''s no way I can help them.


    So, I approached the Vige Elder to exin the situation.


    "Are you the Vige Chief?" I asked the white-haired old man.


    "I am. Thank you for stopping the fire. But do you know who those people are? And where are they now?" The Vige Chief looked at the dead bodies of the cult members I killed.


    "How much do you know about the stampede that happened all over the kingdom few months ago?" I asked if the chief knew about the existence of the cult or not.


    "Although this vige is not like the city where they can easily get information, as the chief, I have the privilege to collect information from merchants, hunters, traveler, and vigers who returned from the city. I heard about evil cult. Are they rted to the cult?"


    "Yes. These people who died here are members of said cult. And those who disappear are orphans whom these people tried to kidnap. As for me, you can call me Ninja. If someone asked you about these people, just tell them that Ninjae here and kill everyone. I''m leaving now."


    There''s no need to exin further to the chief. Unless they want to fight the cult, I don''t think I need to exin everything. Just letting them know that I''m Ninja who killed these people should be enough. Now, if the cult asked the chief, they will target Ninja.


    I left the vige along with Shelia. We went directly to where Veronica supposed to be hiding with Sonia showing us the direction we should take.


    "¡­Roy, there''s one thing I forgot to tell you." While on the way, Victoria have something to say.


    "What is it?"


    "Actually, Ninja is a term from my world. You should have known that, right? Then when Javier told me that his first master was from my world, I started to think ''what if there''s another otherworlder in the cult?'' If there is really one person from the same world as me, then that person would notice Ninja and find you no matter what."


    I stopped my advance when I heard Victoria''s confession.


    "Then why did I call myself Ninja!? I will be their main target now!? Wait! Maybe I can use this to my advantage. Ah! I''ll think about itter!"


    I continue running again since there''s no point in thinkingplicated stuff when I have something important to do.


    "Right! We can use it for our advantage! Although Ninja is a term from my world, you are not someone from my world! If someone asked you about something from my world, you won''t understand it, while I will try my best to keep my mouth shut! That way, we can tell if someone is from my world or not. If they are members of the cult, we should kill them before they can do anything." Victoria exin while we''re on the move.


    "You sure you''re fine with killing your own kind? Don''t you have something that you like to share with them?" I asked.


    "I don''t mind. This is my error after all. I shouldn''t have given you a name that people from my world will notice. Well, it already happened, so let''s use it as our advantage in finding more people from my world if there are any. And if we''re sure that they are part of the cult, you can kill them. If you''re not sure, we''ll investigate about them more before we decide if we could kill them or get them to be our allies."


    That''s a good idea. Just by learning about air from Victoria alone is enough to get my air element so strong. What would happen if someone from her world able to use magic? That would be dangerous. Otherworlders need to be eliminated as soon as possible. Well, if they became our allies, it should be fine.


    "Roy! I can smell several people in the forest!" Shelia shouted.


    Seems like there are other people than Veronica and Celestine. When I get closer, I can see them. I don''t know if they are expert level mages or not, so it''s better if I slowed down my pace. Seems like we are getting closer to where Veronica is.


    To make sure our secret way ofmunication, Sonia, not being found by the cult, I told her to leave.


    Suddenly, I felt danger approaching.


    "Shelia, get down!"


    Shelia and Iy our stomach to the ground at the same time, then soon after I heard the sound of winding toward us and shing the trees.


    That wind is from wind magic! And a powerful one at that! It might be Veronica''s magic since she''s an expert level wind mage!


    But even if I thought that it was Veronica''s magic, and even after the wind passed above us and cutting the trees around, we stilly on the ground. We waited until it''s clear to move.


    "What was that!? So powerful!" Shelia asked.


    "Probably an expert level wind magic is fighting. It''s probably Veronica. But let''s stay down for a while."


    I checked the situation, and see that the people I see from before in front of us are already dead. They are split in half in their body. Some of them noticed the attack, but it was toote for them to escape, so they got their neck decapitated. But some of them still alive and they keep moving forward.


    Scary! This is how powerful an expert level mage is? I don''t want to get closer.


    But if I don''t help her, Veronica might die. And our potential helper, Celestine, will also die as well. I don''t think all of the cult members chasing after them have died. Since they know that they will be fighting two expert level mages, they should be bringing several expert level mages as well.


    Well, at least with that attack, there are fewer people chasing after the two. But I might die if I don''t sense the danger!


    "So, there are an even more powerful mage in this world, huh? I can''t wait until the war ising." Shelia said. She''s always keen on fighting more powerful mages after staying in our world for a while.


    "Umm¡­ I don''t want the war to happen though. Well, for now, let''s advance carefully. Victoria, you need to transform into a snake and scout ahead. I''ll be following you once you''re at the edge of my vision." I ordered Victoria to scout.


    "Okay. And if possible, I''ll try to make contact with Veronica. You just need to figure out how to get everyone out of there safely." Victoria suggested.


    "Yeah. I might need some reinforcement as well. I''ll call other Werewolves once we get closer and see the numbers of our enemies we must defeat."


    I have tested it and I can call other Werewolves to my world even without contract. But I have to use portals to call them over. I can''t just summon them in front of me like how I summon Victoria and Shelia.


    How did the knowledge of summoner''s portal magic disappear?


    Maybe because we''re too strong.


    We can call as many monsters from Monsters World as we want. And this Evil God think that we''re dangerous, so after killing all Aura users, he started killing summoners.


    I have no proof of that, but I think my guess is right.


    But what about tamers? I guess he thought that the monsters in this world is less dangerous than monsters from Monsters World.


    "Let''s go. Victoria is already ahead." I told Shelia that we can move now.


    But once we move only for a short while, there''s a huge earthquake and the ground is split.


    "Escape to the sky!"


    This time, I told Shelia to escape to the sky.


    The earthquake is so strong that the ground where we were standing is split. Good thing Victoria is fine. She''s still moving ahead to where Veronica should be.


    "An earthquake this time?"


    "There should be an earth mage as well. Probably also an expert level. We''ll wait until the ground stop shaking and we''ll continue our advance onnd. There''s nowhere to hide in the sky."


    Shelia nodded and once the ground stop shaking, wended on the ground and continue our advance.


    Although the trees are cut, they can still be used for our hiding spot.


    We advance carefully from then on. And once I can see more people, I open up a portal and call some Werewolves. Just twenty should be enough.


    Now, how do I make my entrance?

 Chapter 237 - Celestine And Veronica

    This event happened while Roy is still looking for Veronica.


    Veronica was on the run, and is hiding in the forest. It was because of what she heard from Sonia about how to hide.


    She can escape by flying, but she didn''t do that because she will leave no trace when she''s flying. She doesn''t know what Celestine''s elements are, but she doesn''t think that Celestine has wind element. And even if she does, Veronica doesn''t think that Celestine''s wind magic has reached expert level.


    Veronica need to leave a trace so Celestine can find her and chase after her. It''s so that in case when both of them encounter other cult members who are tasked to kill any one of them, they can take care of the cult members together. But having Celestine to do that without prior notice would be difficult since Celestine''s goal is to kill Veronica to avenge the orphans.


    Of course she doesn''t know yet that the orphans are safe. Since the orphanage is destroyed by wind magic, and she heard rumor that it was someone with simr feature as Veronica who destroyed it, she only thought of killing Veronica.


    But Roy thought that having someone about the same level as Veronica might increase the chance of her survival in case she encounters assassins sent by the cult. In case the two of them were found by the cult members after the two met and fight, their battle will be able to dy the cult members from approaching the two.


    Roy didn''t ask Veronica to hide in a safe ce. He told Veronica to run to open space like the forest so she can escape by flying at any time in case something happens. And it''s also to make fewer casualties. If she hides in the city, there would be many people died if it ends up with a fight.


    While on the run, Veronica finally noticed that one person is approaching her. It was Celestine. And when Celestine gets closer, Veronica can feel the ground shaking. It was Celestine''s earth magic that she uses to make Veronica lost her bnce.


    Although losing bnce, Veronica didn''t panic. She just waited until Celestine appear so she can talk some sense to Celestine.


    "Celestine. I''ve been looking for you." Veronica said calmly.


    "Looking for me, or trying to run away? I don''t think your action after destroying the orphanage is that of someone who is looking for me. You destroyed the orphanage because you know how important those orphans to me, right? You left a lot of dead bodies around the destroyed orphanage, but there''s no corpse of children. Where are they?" Celestine asked.


    "They are safe. We need to hurry and leave before the cult finds us. My friend ising and he should be able to help us getting out of this mess." Veronica said.


    "This mess? What mess? You''re just tricking me, right? You wanted to capture or even kill me and return me to the cult so you will gain more achievement. I can''t trust you. Where are the children!?"


    "They should be in a safe ce that even the higher ups won''t notice. Listen to me, I''m not your enemy. I also want to leave the cult for a while already." Veronica said while trying to calm Celestine down.


    "¡­what?"


    Then Veronica spoke in low tone in case someone is eavesdropping even though she knows that there shouldn''t be anyone nearby.


    "I''ve been ying as a spy sincest year to inform the cult''s movement to someone. I nned to leak more news about the cult, the cult has no n in moving for a few years. All the small moves are made by individuals or groups from the cult and the Archbishop doesn''t mind them doing what they want. And I have been watching you for a while as well while you''re putting spies on me. I thought that you are too kind to be in the cult, so I want to get you out of there as well. You''re putting spies on me to watch over me, right? You want to see if I''m with the cult since you think that I''m being forced." Veronica exins.


    And it seems like Celestine still trust Veronica a bit, she''s starting to open up.


    "¡­I heard report from them that you would sometime cry in secret when you kill someone untilst year. After that, you never cry anymore, but you lock yourself in your room more often. I guess it must be because you already figure out what you want to do, huh? Good for you."


    "You knew about that? That''s embarrassing, but you''re right. I''ll call my friend now, and we can figure out everything¡­ I guess we can''t do that now. We are being surrounded. We need to kill them all first. For now, you can think that I''m taking the orphans as hostages. And you have no choice but to follow my order." Veronica said.


    "Wait, you were luring me here for them? So that you can kill them all?" Celestine asked.


    "Yes. A friend told me that rather than just hiding and escape, I need to kill as many as possible while doing it. These guys must be being kept as secret even from us and their mission is to kill anyone who betrays the cult. And some of them might be as strong as we are. That''s what my friend told me, but I think he''s right. Will you help me killing them all?"


    "¡­sure. But if you lie and the orphans are not safe, I will kill you and your friends."


    "Deal!"


    Celestine thought that if what Veronica said is true, that mean she can also have a way out of being part of the cult and save the orphans. Much like Veronica, she is also forced to be part of the cult since she was young. Although her luck is different.


    Veronica doesn''t have anyone she can trust in the cult, while Celestine found some people who sympathized with her in the cult. But Veronica was approached by Victoria, and no one from outside the cult approached Celestine.


    The two agreed to temporary truce until all the pursuer has been taken care of.


    "Celestine, get down!"


    Veronica casted a powerful Wind sh toward a direction where she sensed a lot of pursuersing. Many are killed, but none of them are expert level mages.


    Multiple magic was casted and aimed toward the two. Those pursuers are either have known that Veronica is actually helping Celestine, or doesn''t care at all that Veronica is there.


    They are the most loyal members of the cult raised from they were born, and brainwashed to only follow someone''s order. Most likely, the one who gave them order is the Archbishop.


    "Tsk! There are too many of them!" Celestineined.


    Then she casted a powerful ground-shaking magic that split the earth. Many non-wind element mages lost their bnce, and some of them fall into the fissure. Celestine attacked those who have fallen with her magic.


    "Even after all that, there are still about fifty of them. Just how many things are the cult kept secret from us?" Celestine asked.


    "Too many, I guess. Especially since the two of us are just there for publicity and to get new members joining us. We are just being used for our appearance. And our acting is good enough to make them think that we won''t betray the cult." Veronica said.


    "Hah! Can''t agree with you more!"


    Then, the two sensed more people ising. About twenty of them.


    "Tsk! There are more peopleing! Veronica, if I die here, please escape and take care of the orphans." Celestine said thinking that this might be the end. But for Veronica, it was not despair that ising. It''s hope.


    A ck snake wrapped her leg and continue moving toward her shoulder and whisper in low voice that only Veronica can hear. Celestine didn''t focus on Veronica, so she doesn''t realize that a snake is next to her.


    "No, they are not enemies. They are my friend''s allies. We''re safe now."


    Just as Veronica said that, the new presences approaching in high speed toward the pursuers from the cult.


    Celestine prepared to cast Earth Wall to protect the two, but there''s no need to it since the new presences actually killing their pursuers.


    "What the¡­ those are¡­ monsters? They look like humans." Celestine asked.


    "They are Werewolves. My master called them to help you get out of here."


    It wasn''t Veronica who replied. A new voice appearing from Veronica''s shoulder, and Celestine finally see a snake on Veronica''s shoulder. The snake then jumped and transformed into a beautifuldy, whose breasts are bigger than Celestine, and have bigger butt than Veronica.


    "¡­Victoria, this is not your usual appearance." Veronica asked.


    "It has been more than a year since west met. Of course I have changed!" Victoria said shamelessly.


    "Are you Veronica''s friend who will help us? A beastform mage?" Celestine asked curiously.


    "No, I''m not even a mage. I''m a summoned monster. It''s my master who will save you. Look, he''sing this way!" Victoria pointed at a man approaching from distance.


    The appearance of the man soon became clear, and the two expert level mages can see him.


    "Hello, I came in peac¡­ why did you transform like that!?"


    The man, Roy, was about to approach Celestine and Veronica peacefully, but he was shocked by the appearance of the third bombshell who is his own summon and one of his girlfriends.


    Meanwhile, the Werewolves that he called, already attacking the pursuers. When one Werewolf killed a mage, that Werewolf quickly move and help the other Werewolf who hasn''t finished their target.


    Veronica sighed in relief seeing Roy appear. She thought that she can finally left the cult after all these years.

 Chapter 238 - Killing The Assassins

    Good. Quite a lot of the enemies have died thanks to the Werewolves. The Werewolves are so eager to test their strength against mages.


    We would sometime have a practice sparring between the Werewolves and us, but no one is using their full strength since it''s just a practice. That''s why the Werewolves wanted to fight mages with full strength.


    And the Werewolves I brought here are those who have learned how to use Air Steps. That''s why the mages got so confused as to how the Werewolves suddenly attacked from above. And no one expected a closebat fight.


    Although the Werewolves like a head-on fight the most, as the king, I ordered them to sneak attack the mages. Some of them might hate it, but I''ll give them a proper rewardter. All they want is just food after all. Delicious foods.


    Seeing the Werewolves are busy, I approached the two bombshells and a slime. They are talking right now seeing how the situation instantly changed. Seems like Victoria is introducing me to Big Boobs. I mean Celestine.


    "Hello, I came in peac¡­ why did you transform like that!?" I asked Victoria.


    I''m focusing my sight on the Werewolves and the enemies, and I didn''t focus enough on her. I knew that she transformed into a human form, but I never thought that it would be that way!


    Her face is still the same, but her boobs are bigger than Celestine''s, and her ass is bigger than Veronica''s. Just why are you sopetitive in that area!?


    "What are you talking about? I have always been like this!" Victoria shouted.


    "No, you''re not! Anyway, you''re Celestine, right? Veronica told me a little about you. I''m Roy."


    I introduce myself to Celestine whom I finally met today. But damn! Those are huge!


    No, Roy! Maintain, eye contact! It''s important! You can do it, Roy! Just see that area with your Divine Vision, while using your real eyes to focus only on her eyes!


    That''s it, Roy! You''re doing a good job!


    I offered my hand for a handshake, but she didn''t take it. Well, it''s fine.


    "You''re a summoner and she''s your summon? What about the Werewolves? Are you a tamer as well? It''s the first time I''ve seen Werewolves. Wait! What about the orphans!?" Celestine asked worriedly.


    "They are safe. The spies you put on Veronica managed to protect all of the children until I arrive. Though maybe some of your friends died. They are in the safest ce from the cult at the moment. As for your other questions, I''ll answer themter. For now, let''s take care of the enemies in front of us. I''ll see youter!" I said as I waved my hands toward the two expert level mages, and get some distance from them.


    "¡­why is he running away?" Celestine asked Victoria.


    I can still hear her for a while, so I concentrate on what they''re talking.


    "Because the enemies are mages specialized in assassination, and they have the confidence in killing two expert level mages. Which mean they should have some other expert level mages. Maybe more than two. Or worse, they have a Master level mage. In any case, if we''re gathering together in one spot, it''s obvious that a single magic can hit everyone. And since we just met, we won''t be able to cooperate well. It''s better to fight alone in this situation rather than forcing ourselves to cooperate. So, the simplest n here is to fight alone. You two should split up now and help the Werewolves killing the enemies."


    After Victoria exined, she transformed into a snake again and left that spot.


    Celestine and Veronica then agreed to split up to defeat the enemies.


    I''m going to the north where the Werewolves seems to be in trouble. Celestine went to the west, and Veronica to the east. As for the south, Shelia is there. And seems like Veronica is going after her to help her.


    Seeing the situation, I think there are 4 expert level mages in each direction.


    The Werewolves can fight in close range. I''ll just shoot the opponent with Blobbygun.


    There are 3 mages, and 4 Werewolves. But the Werewolves are blocked with an Ice Wall that they can''t prate with their strength.


    I shot the Ice Wall in its weak spots, and the Ice Wall is destroyed. With just this much strength, I don''t think the expert level mage is of ice element.


    The Werewolves instantly approach the mages. They quickly divide themselves into two groups, and each group is fighting one mage. The two mages they are fighting don''t seem to be the expert level mage. That means it''s thest one.


    I distracted the expert level mage by shooting at him. He''s trying to help the other two, but I stopped him.


    The other two mages soon died, and only the expert level mage left.


    He then started to cast a magic to attack me. I just hope that it''s a fire magic since I can extinguish it.


    And he is really a fire mage! Now let''s hope my air magic is enough to extinguish the fire.


    The huge fire start to move toward me, but I stand still, and start to use air magic to change the properties of the gas in front of the fire into non-mmable gas.


    The mage is shocked to see that the fire suddenly disappears. It started well, but mid-way the fire suddenly gone.


    ¡­doesn''t it seem like fire magic has a huge w? I mean I''m just an intermediate level air mage, and he''s an expert level mage. And that fire is the biggest I ever seen. But I stopped it just by changing the properties of the gas in front of the fire.


    Now, what if I can make a type of gas that can''t freeze? Then I don''t need the fis stocking to protect myself!


    Seeing the huge magic, the Werewolves realized that he''s the strongest mage and decided to attack him together. While he''s being distracted by the disappearance of the fire, the Werewolves killed him. He''s not prepared to cast any magic to defend himself, so he died being sliced by the Werewolves'' ws.


    "Alright, now four of you, make sure that no one escape this area! I''ll see if the other three need some help."


    ""Understood!""


    The Werewolves split up to see if someone is escaping. And if someone has left for a while, the Werewolves can find them by the smell. No one can escape even from the air.


    I went to check on how the others are doing, and they seem fine. Veronica and Celestine are more experienced in fighting than the expert level mages they are fighting. And with the help of the Werewolves, the fight is over quickly.


    As for Shelia and Victoria, it still goes on. Victoria is now acting as Shelia''s armor since the ice mage''s attack is quite powerful and Shelia needed some protection.


    The ice mage has quite strong defense as well, Shelia and the other Werewolves have difficulty in breaking through the Ice Wall.


    I can see that the ice mage is the only one left, and I think he''s prepared to escape.


    Seeing that he has no hope in finishing the mission, he waited for a chance to escape.


    Unfortunately for him, it''s difficult to escape from a Werewolf.


    When he thought he found a chance to escape, Shelia quickly intercept him. He tried to attack Shelia with Ice Spikes, but Victoria is protecting her. Shelia just ignore the iing attack, and shed his head.


    It''s safe now. All the enemies have died. But we still need to be careful.


    "Roy, is it over?" Veronica asked as she and Celestinee over after finishing their enemies.


    "Wait for a while. If you want to leave the cult for good, you need to be extremely careful. Wait and see if the Werewolves find some traces of escaping enemies." I said.


    After a while a Werewolf approach me and inform me about the situation.


    "We found a trace of enemies who escaped. But it started to fade, so some Werewolves tried to go after the smell."


    "Alright. How many of them?"


    "Just two. They split and went to different direction."


    The Werewolf pointed to two different direction. One to the north, another to the east.


    "I''ll go to the north one. Veronica, you will go to the east with Shelia." I gave the order to follow the two suspected cult members.


    "What about me?" Celestine asked what her role will be.


    "Well, can you fly?" I asked.


    "No."


    "Then you can either wait here, or try to follow Veronica. Victoria, apany her while we chase the two."


    "Okay!" Victoria then transformed back to her human form. This time, no excessive transformation. Just her normal one.


    I quickly run with my Air Steps to the north. My speed is slightly faster than the Werewolves, so I can pass the other Werewolves chasing the escaping mage.


    I can finally see that the one trying to escape is facing a Werewolf. The Werewolf is Jack. And Jack easily killed that one.


    "Jack, go back to where we were, and gather all the corpses in that spot."


    "Understood!"


    Then, I quickly went to the other one.


    Veronica''s and Shelia''s speeds are about the same. And the two of them managed to catch up with the escaping mage. That''s all of them then.


    I ordered the Werewolves to gather the corpses as well. It''s necessary for Veronica to fully escape from the cult.


    Then I returned back to where Celestine and Victoria are waiting. Now, it''s time for some clean up.

 Chapter 239 - Cleaning Up

    "Now, can you tell me who you are and how you''re going to help me escape the cult?"


    After we finished taking care of the cult members who are after her and Veronica, we gathered together. Though Celestine is still putting up her guard since she''s still unable to trust me. Especially since I seem like the orphans'' kidnapper.


    And I also don''t know if the cult members we killed are aiming for only Celestine, or also Veronica. We have already killed them all.


    The cult will be wary if they never heard of these assassins'' return. So, I need to take care of how the cult will perceive this.


    Albert, Hector, and I have discussed about this before I left to look for these two. To make things easy, I just need to make sure the cult will think that these two were dead. But the cult reached them first, and all of them have died. Which makes the two pretend to be dead difficult since the cult will undoubtedly be sending someone to check about the assassins'' mission.


    "Well, first, I need to make sure that the cult will think that the two of you are dead. You want to leave the cult, right?" I asked Celestine.


    "Yes. Actually, I¡­"


    "That''s enough. Just yes is enough. As for what kind of past you''re gonna tell me, there''s a ce for thatter. I just need to figure out how to take care of this problem first."


    I don''t need to hear about her past. I can have Albert listen to her. I think it will be easier for her to believe in Albert than me. As for Veronica, I''ll bring her to Albert as well. The two can decide on what they want to do after talking with Albert.


    Both of them wanted to leave the cult, but neither of them had said that they want to destroy the cult. Maybe if I told them about my previous life, they will join us since there''s no other choice because the cult is trying to destroy everything. I think Veronica can be trusted, but I don''t know about Celestine. And they are free to make a choice in what they want to do.


    Well, before continuing our discussion, I have something to give Celestine.


    "Hey, catch this!"


    I threw a ring toward Celestine. The ring is made of Victoria''s clone, with the sand needed to summon Sonia. I have changed the essories to be made of Blobbies so they just need to have one. Well, other than Veronica''s whom I have difficulty to meet.


    "A ring? We just met and you already want to marry me?" Celestine was surprised after catching the ring I threw.


    "That joke is over one year old already!" I shouted.


    "Roy, in her defense, she only met you today. So, she must be thinking that you''re asking her hand in marriage for real." Victoria exined.


    Right, I think I remember that Veronica told me about this. She said that Celestine wanted to have a normal love life. Finding a man who loves her not because of her boobs. And probably, seeing how I never focus on her boobs, making her thinks that I''m a good candidate.


    ¡­or maybe it''s just my wild imagination. Giving a ring is amon gesture in proposing to someone after all.


    "Sigh¡­ tap the ring twice and you will know." I told her.


    Veronica tapped the ring without equipping it, and soon, Sonia appears in front of her.


    "Nice to meet you, I''m Sonia. A ghost. And a messenger between Veronica, Roy, and anyone who have simr equipment." Sonia introduced herself.


    "This¡­ so this is how youmunicate with people outside the cult, huh? I''ll ask about thister. For now, what do we need to do?" Celestine asked.


    "Well, Sonia, can you ask Albert if he can send a lot of his agents to this area? We''ll make it as if everyone here died after being killed by them. We''ll also make the cult think twice if we show them our strength. They won''t dare to mess in this kingdom." I said.


    "Alright. But he''s probably sleeping now." Sonia said.


    "Then wake him up in the scariest way possible. You''re a ghost."


    After that, Sonia left for a while.


    It only took her a minute until she returns.


    "How is it?" I asked Sonia.


    "He said it''s fine. Just do your best in making sure the two expert level mages leave the cult." Sonia replied.


    "I mean his expression when you scare him."


    "He was quite prepared for mying, so he didn''t get surprised."


    "That''s disappointing." I said.


    "Roy, focus on your goal first." Victoria reminded me.


    So, I need to make sure the two expert level mages to leave the cult. And I think we have killed four other expert level mages.


    "So¡­ Celestine, I need your help in burying all these corpses. Then, the agents wille probably tomorrow, and stay for a while and patrolling the area. Once the other cult members arrive, they will think that those agents are the ones killing all these cult members. If they report it to the helmet-man, they will think that we are far more powerful than they expected. As for the two of you, we will look for a corpse of someone with simr features with you two, and ce them along with the other corpses."


    But there''s one w in this n. There is no corpse with simr feature with these two!


    "Roy, did you remember what I told you about stic surgery?" Victoria asked.


    "Hmm¡­ about how it can change someone''s appearance, right?"


    "Right. I''m no doctor, but you are. You can inject some Blobbies into the necessary area of the corpse. And if the corpses are burned, people will think that the corpse of someone with big boobs is Celestine''s, and the one with big ass is Veronica''s." Victoria whispered to me so the two won''t hear us.


    I think the twodies are quite sensitive when someone is talking about those parts of their bodies. They seem to think that we''re talking about their bodies. Let''s make sure I can keep maintaining eye contact.


    But to inject some Blobbies to change the corpses'' physical appearances, huh? I think that''s a good idea. Let''s try it!


    I found two female corpses with simr appearances with the two except for the obvious area, then I stabbed a syringe made of Blobbies to pour some Blobbies inside their body.


    The result is¡­ they grow bigger!


    Now we just need to burn them so everyone will think that they are Veronica''s and Celestine''s corpses.


    If they still suspicious about the corpses, let''s me Ninja. I can inform the agents to me everything on Ninja.


    "Well, that''s one thing taken care of. Then¡­ Celestine, may I ask you to bury the corpses? And if you can use fire magic as well, please burn some corpses along with your fake corpses."


    "Sure."


    Celestine then split the earth with her magic. So, I was right that she''s the one who make the ground shake before.


    Then after having the Werewolves put the corpses inside the crevice, Celestine closed the earth.


    With this, we''re done here. The cult will think that the kingdom''s agents are the one killing the assassins, and buried them here, where there are no people nearby. Good thing I told Sonia to get Veronica hides here.


    "Now, are you finally going to tell us about yourself?" Celestine asked.


    "No. If you only want to leave the cult, then this will probably be thest time we meet. My goal is to destroy the cult. It''s better if you don''t know much about me. You can find some ce to build an orphanage where you will take care of the orphans. And Veronica, you also have the choice to live peacefully without caring about the cult at all. I''ll let you discuss what you want to do with the guy on the other side." I said.


    Let them discuss it with Albert. He''s the king after all. Though, why did he go to sleep already? Does it mean he already interviewed all the Celestine''s spies and the orphans as well? Though I guess he should be awake now since he knows that I already meet the two and about to bring them to him.


    "The guy on the other side? Is that Albert you talked about? Don''t tell me that you''re together with the King of Tatrama, Albert?" Celestine asked. But the one who answered is Veronica.


    "Yes. Ever since before the stampede, I have already cooperating with him and the king. Roy, I have made up my mind. I''ll help you destroying the cult." Veronica said.


    "That''s good. But you will still need to have a talk with Albert first. He has a lot to ask you two."


    Since we have already trust Veronica, it''s better if I brought her along with Celestine as well to meet Albert. She will be strong enough to handle Celestine in case she''s lying about wanting to leave the cult.


    Now¡­ how should I take them to Albert?


    "Hmm¡­ sigh¡­ Can you to trust me and go to sleep?" I asked sincerely.


    "What? Ugh¡­ this¡­ some kind of magic tool?" Celestine asked.


    "You can think of it that way for now. Sorry about this, but I''ll be taking you to meet Albert. You should be able to meet the orphans over there. With your level, you will wake up soon. Good night."


    After making the two expert level mages fell asleep, I had the female Werewolves carry them. I opened a portal, and had the Werewolves bringing the two inside. After that, the Werewolves returned and I closed the portal.


    "Good job all of you! I''ll bring the rewardter."


    I returned all the Werewolves, including Shelia, back to Monsters World.


    Now I just need to return to Jion, and pretend I was there all-night sleeping.


    Tomorrow, after finding a good ce to mark with Blobby, I''ll return to the Capital with portal.


    ¡­tonight is a very long night.

 Chapter 240 - Expert Level Mages, Get!

    I wake up early today. And while eating breakfast, I asked the inn owner about the delicacies in the city. Everyone would be happy to receive souvenirs from this city.


    After buying souvenirs, I threw them all to my room in Cassau with portal. I have written a message saying that they can take anything they want. As for me, I still need to meet the agentsing to where the battle wasst night.


    I left the city normally, and when I''m sure that no one is watching, I quickly change direction toward the locationst night. As for the burnt vige, I can ask the agents to take care of it.


    Once I''m there, I noticed many people are watching. Some of them are the cult members. I think they must havee here by following the traces of the assassins we killedst night. Let''s ignore them for now.


    I put on my Ninja outfit, and approached one of the agents who knows I''m Ninja. I told him about the vige, and inform him about what rumors need to be spread.


    Then it''s time for my acting skill.


    "Someone is watching! Over there!"


    I pointed at the location where one of the cult members who is watching us is hiding. Some of the agents quickly chase after the guy.


    But then, the guy fought back. Seems like he''s an expert level mage. Now, I need only to make sure that everyone is safe.


    "He''s an expert level mage! Retreat! We''re no match for him! Leave the corpses buried in the ground! Our expert level mages aren''t here! We''ll die if we confront him just with our strength!"


    Just by shouting, I also informed the cult that we have expert level mages as well. Though the truth is that we have none at all. Unless Veronica and Celestine decided to join us.


    Good thing the agents has prepared to escape. Since the battle was overst night, Albert should have noticed that we won''t be fighting anymore, and just sent wind mages here. They are flying all over the ce to escape, and the opponent will have to let us go.


    I also told him that we buried the enemies herest night. Now, let''s see what he''s going to do.


    I hide on top of a tree, a bit distance from where he can sense my presence, and see what he''s doing with my Divine Vision.


    Seems like he''s an expert level in earth element. He easily dug up the ground, and easily found the corpses. Some of the corpses are burnt, and has a clean cut.


    When he sees the two corpses I modified, one with big boobs and the other with big ass, he stopped for a while. I guess my n to make the cult thinks that the twodies are dead is working.


    After confirming the two corpses, he escaped without checking other corpses. Seems like he doesn''t care how much they sacrifice for their mission.. Should I follow him?


    Even if I follow him, I probably won''t end up meeting the Archbishop. Even both Celestine and Veronica doesn''t know about these people. Which means they are being kept secret away from the headquarter. And their headquarter keeps changing location.


    Wait! One of the higher up is a researcher, right? Maybe he will go theb instead of the headquarter. And theb shouldn''t be able to move as frequently as the headquarter. Probably, theb is the only ce that can''t move. If I follow him, I should be able to reach there.


    Good thing I left some Blobbies on the ground as a trap. Once they are being stepped, they will stick on the sole of his shoe, and follow him all the way to theb.


    ¡­I was wrong. Seems like he''s much more careful than I thought.


    Once he noticed something strange with his shoe, he threw them away. He escapes barefooted.


    Seems like it will take longer until we can find their location. Well, even if I found their location, we''re still too weak to fight against them. Who knows if they have more expert level mages there? Tens, dozens, maybe even hundreds?


    I think it''s best to continue getting stronger at the moment. For now, let''s go back to the capital.


    I''ll let the agents take care of the dug-up corpses. They will return here soon.


    I opened the portal, and return to the Capital, in a house that Albert prepared.


    Everyone knows by now that the owner of the house is a traveler. So, the house is empty most of the time, and when someone is home, no one notices when we entered the house. And some of the neighbor are actually our allies. So, this ce is safe.


    I look around the capital and find where Albert is. He''s with Veronica, Celestine, and her spies. I think it''s better to not call them spies anymore. What about Celestine''s loyal subordinate?


    They are in a building at the edge of the capital. Are they going to build the orphanage there?


    I entered the room where they are chatting through the open window.


    "Roy, you''re here. How is it?" Albert asked.


    "There''s one person I suspected to be from the cult watching the location this morning. He''s an expert level mage. I let the agents escape and watched him digging up the corpses we buried. He stopped when he found the two fake corpses of Celestine and Veronica. Then he escapes right away."


    "I see. Well, I think the two will be safe for now. The cult will think that you two have died. But you should disguise yourselves from now on. Oh, right! Roy, they can be trusted. The orphans are in the next room, but I think you already know. They also decided to join us destroying the cult." Albert said.


    "Hmm¡­ that''s good. If that''s all, then I''ll return to Cassau now."


    "Wait, Roy! You''re not interested in her past?" Albert said. Though his eyes keep wandering about from Veronica''s lower half, to Celestine''s upper half. As for me, I don''t need to aim direct my eyes toward them.


    "Not really. They are safe, they have chosen to leave the cult and join us, what else is there to know?"


    "Actually, I want them to go to Cassau and they will join your n. There''s a house you just bought to expand the park, right? That will be the ce where the new orphanage will be. The twodies will stay in Cassau, while the other neers will leave the kingdom and find some information about the cult. That''s fine, right?"


    "I don''t mind. But are you sure letting them leave just after joining? Are you sure they can be trusted?" I asked.


    "I can trust them after asking them a few questions. But it doesn''t matter. The cult already know that we are nning to fight them after all. And since both Celestine and Veronica will stay in Cassau, I think it''s best for you to know about Celestine a bit. As for Veronica, you already know, right?"


    "Fine. So, what about Celestine?"


    Albert told me what he was told by Celestine herself. And since his lie detection didn''t activate when he listened about her past, he knows that she said the truth.


    From birth, she was raised to be member of the cult. As she grows into a beauty, she instantly ced in high position in the cult to attract more people into joining.


    Then she was tasked to be in charge of an orphanage. That''s when she noticed how she likes children.


    The orphanage was built to teach the children about the cult. But as Celestine became closer with the children, she stopped teaching the children about the cult since she knew how evil the cult is, and doesn''t want the children to be evil.


    Her loyal subordinates were also the older orphans from the orphanage. When they knew about her decision to safe the orphans from the cult, they agree to help.


    Whenever an orphan is old enough, Celestine would fake their death, and her spies would bring them away to live in another city or another country.


    "So, basically, she was evil, but the orphans changed her. Now she doesn''t want the orphans to suffer the same fate as she did, so she has betrayed the cult for a while, right?"


    "Yes. The cult knew about it for a long time, but they leave her be in case Celestine actually betrayed the cult for real. Now it already happened, it''s good that Veronica acted quickly. Now Celestine and the orphans are safe, though some of Celestine''s subordinates died before you reached that vigest night. Well, that''s about it. What do you think?" Albert asked.


    "¡­what do you want me to think? There''s nothing to think about. She has decided to join us, and we have more allies. That''s all that matter. You want me to bring them to Cassau, right? That''s fine. But we need to disguise them first."


    "Oh, Roy! I have an idea!"


    Like usual, it was Victoria who has some kind of idea. I wonder what will it be this time.


    So, there''s some kind of special underwear from her world that will help ttened girls'' asses and boobs. Victoria make some Blobbies and gave them to the twodies. She brought the two to another room, and when they returned, Veronica no longer has a huge ass, and Celestine''s chest is t.


    I''m slightly disappointed, but I make sure to not show it. Unlike Albert and Celestine''s underlings.


    "Well, that''s good, but people would still look at them for their beauty. But I guess they just need to apply some make-up. Well, let''s go get the orphans and return to Cassau. Daniel would be happy to get a lot of new friends¡­ what?"


    Both Veronica and Celestine seems to have something they want to say.


    "It''s just¡­ that''s the first time someone praise me for other things than my hip. I feel happy. Thanks." Veronica said.


    "Me too. That''s the first time someone looks at me in the eye and not my breasts when they praise me. It''s a strange feeling." Celestine said.


    What? Are they like Lina who likes to be praised? Don''t tell me I have a chance with both of them!? Just by praising them!?


    "¡­Roy, you just keep raising gs again. Sigh¡­" Victoria sighed.


    As for Albert and the Celestine''s underlings, they are looking at me in jealousy. Let''s ignore them.


    It''s not like I want to get more harem member, you know!?


    And it''s not like they like me. They were just surprised to hear some praises. And now I feel slightly depressed thinking about this.


    Well, at least we have gained two powerful allies.


    Let''s bring them back to Cassau and have them experience a normal life outside the cult. The girls will surely enjoy having more friends they can bring to go shopping.


    ¡­and my wallet will surely not enjoy it.

 Chapter 241 - Easy Dungeon Clear

    It has been a week since the two expert level mages became our neighbor. And I found myself watching the house they live in more often. Though I didn''t do it at night and morning since someone would sleep with me.


    The two expert level mages have adapted with their new lives. I think Veronica smiles more often now than back then. Both Celestine and Veronica enjoy thepany of my girlfriends. And they would often go shopping together.


    With my money!


    They need to get their own money now, so I suggested the two to register to the guild and became hunters. With two expert level mages, the creation of the n will be quicker. And I heard that Kron has reached S-rank now. He said that he will visit Cassau soon. I guess we''ll build the n once he''s here. It''s easier to get recognized if he''s with me.


    But it will be a while until he''s here, so I guess I''ll go enter a dungeon. The underwater dungeon near my diving spot. It has been a year since I found it, but I haven''t once entered it. I guess today is the day.


    And just like every morning, we gathered in the dining hall and I ask what their n for today will be. Celestine, Veronica, and the orphans also eating with us.


    The oldest orphan is a boy about the same age as Hannah. And he would always look at Hannah shyly. You''re too young, boy.


    And the youngest is a little girl the same age as Lana. Both her and Lana is inseparable just after their first meeting. n seems jealous when he sees her sister is being taken.


    Both Celestine and Veronica were shocked when they hear that n and Lana are Albert''s children. They have heard that the king has a sessor and it''s a boy. They don''t know that the queen gave birth to twins. And their daughter is already capable of using ice magic well.


    Well, let''s go to the main business here.


    "So, I''m going into an underwater dungeon near my diving spot. Anyoneing?" I asked if there are anyone who wants toe.


    "Roy, I don''t think there will be anyone who is interested in going there other than you. You''re the only one who can breathe underwater and fight there. Water mage might be able to do something, but I think it''s better if you scout that dungeon first. Once you have cleared the dungeon, and you think that it''s fine for the other to enter that dungeon, then you can ask someone toe with you." Ka said.


    Hmm¡­ she''s right. Although with my intermediate level air magic I can have several other people breathe underwater, I can''t force them to fight underwater. I guess it''s another lonely dungeon exploration. Sigh¡­


    "There''s an underwater dungeon? I''m curious! Can Ie?" Celestine seems interested in joining me exploring the dungeon.


    Ever since she came here, she encounters many things for the first time. Especially since all her life, the cult is the only thing that she knew. She''s able to reach expert level, but she never once entered a dungeon.


    She''s also very active in taking quests from the guild and enjoyed getting paid since she always has money when she''s in the cult without even doing anything.


    When I said that I get a lot of money by diving, she''s interested in going to the sea. And she also enjoyed shopping clothes with Veronica and the girls. Especially since they can wear the ttening underwear made of Blobbies, they can now buy cute clothes that doesn''t fit them before.


    And seeing other girls interested in having ttening underwear as well since they can buy any clothes they want without caring about the size, I gave them some Blobbies. Good thing Victoria has improved a lot and can make hundreds of clones now.


    And since the ttening underwear is so popr, Lina decided to create some by using the vines from Sunny and the sticity of her All-seeing Eye''s tentacles. They can be regenerated after a while after all.


    As for the All-seeing Eye, Lina decided to name it¡­ Elsie. From All-seeing, to Elsie. At least it''s better than my naming sense. Which is to name it Eyesie.


    "¡­I want to go as well. Can Ie?"


    Not just Celestine, Veronica also interested in many new things as well. and I don''t think the two of them have entered a dungeon before.


    But since they never knew many things, I can''t take them with me.


    "Well, can you two swims? And I don''t think that you two even have swimsuits. Sorry, but I can''t bring you even though you are the two strongest people here. I''ll take you to another dungeon some other time." I said.


    "Then once you return from the dungeon, we all can y in theke. We can teach both of them to swim then. And since theke is safe, we can bring the children as well. How about it?" Sophie suggested.


    "Theke! I want to swim in theke! Can Ie?" Daniel is excited hearing that we will go to theke. As for the orphans, none of them understand anything except the word y. They are always excited to go and y.


    "Sure. Let''s go there the day after tomorrow. I don''t know how deep the dungeon is after all. I might only return tomorrow. Orter if the dungeon is a short one"


    And so, we make a new promise to go and y in theke.


    Theke has always been our location to try new magic we learned, sparring, and rxing. And it''s good as long as no one goes in too deep in theke.


    So, the girls decided to go out to go on another shopping spree. Just how much did they spend in just one week? Good thing I didn''t summon Shelia. Or my expense will increase even more.


    And so, I went on another lonely dungeon exploration again. Even Victoria decided to join shopping with the girls.


    I hope fifty Blobbies I bring with me will be enough. If not, let''s escape.


    I dive into the sea where the dungeon is located. Now I can see clearer inside of the dungeon. I hope there won''t be any monsters that can fight from distance.


    I don''t think there will be any trouble. The only water monster that have caused trouble to me is only the Fishman. As long as there aren''t any Fishman, I will be able to clear this dungeon easily.


    ¡­though there are many types of delicious looking fishes. If I open a portal underwater, I will be sucked in instead and bring a lot of water with me. So, I can''t transfer these fishes from underwater to outside. Unless there''s an emergency and I need to escape as soon as possible.


    This dungeon is easy. I think this dungeon is for fish delicacies. There are some treasures as well, but they aren''t worth mentioning. Just amon loot that I can find in other dungeons. Though they will be sold at a quite high price, so I will bring them back and gave them to Sam.


    ¡­if I want to open up a restaurant, entering this dungeon regrly will be the easiest way to get the materials for cooking. But I think I''ll just go there every time I want to eat some seafoods.


    Only I need to eat these delicious seafoods. Other doesn''t matter.


    I finally reach the end of the dungeon. And there''s only one treasure chest left after defeating a shark monster. I open the chest and see that it''s some kind of¡­ what is this thing?


    I can feel some kind of air magic in this tube-shaped thing. Will I be able to breathe underwater by equipping this thing?


    Oh? The middle part is narrower than the side. I guess that''s where I should bite it.


    I bite the tube, and deactivate my air magic to see if I can breathe using this equipment or not.


    Oh! It works! But I don''t need it. I guess I''ll give it to someone. But who? Let''s just keep it for now.


    I guess that''s it for this dungeon exploration. Let''s go back. We''ll be having seafood for dinner.


    Just like usual, I left the sea, run on water or the sky when no one is watching. I thought of using portal to return quickly, but I want to run today since the weather is nice.


    I have transferred all the fishes with portals, so I just look like a hunter returning from a quest.


    I enter the city normally through the gate, and greet the gatekeepers who knows me since I often leave through this gate to go diving.


    I thought that maybe if I walk around the city, I will be able to meet the girls while they are shopping.


    I was right that I can meet them, but they are not shopping at the moment.


    Some men surround them and try to flirt with them. I guess they must be outsiders since they don''t seem to know about Ka''s nickname as the Nutcracker.


    What will the girls do, I wonder? I don''t have to worry since there are two expert level mages in the group. Let''s just watch the show. If I guess correctly, either Ka or Jewel will say something to make them stop.


    It''s interesting, so let''s watch how it goes.

 Chapter 242 - Annoying Thugs

    Roy left to go exploring the underwater dungeon. And hearing that there''s a dungeon underwater, the two neers who never experienced much of the life outside the cult are interested to go there. But they are unable to swim, so they can''t join Roy.


    At first, they thought it would be great to explore another dungeon, but they were suggested to practice swimming instead. And before practicing swimming, it''s good for them to have a swimsuit to wear. That''s why they went shopping after Roy left them. Leaving only Ian, Ruby, and Penny behind. They are watching the house and the orphans. And it''s also because they already have their own swimsuit and don''t need to buy another one.


    Victoria who decided to not join Roy, suggested for the girls to go to their usual store. It''s a huge clothing store, built by using Roy''s money and Victoria''s idea of fashion. Some of the clothes are notmon in this world.


    Roy doesn''t mind building the store as long as he received some of the profit into his pocket.


    Some of the employees of the store is also Albert''s agents. Once the girls entered the store, they quickly enter the second floor which is private and not for other customers to enter.


    In there, Victoria used her clones to show examples of the swimsuit they are going to wear, and have the girls try them. Once the girls are happy, the employee will make the clothes that they want using any color the girls wanted.


    It seems simple, but since it''s girls shopping, it took a lot of time. Just to pick one swimsuit and it''s already afternoon.


    After leaving the store, they went to have some lunch and eat some sweets.


    Then after leaving the restaurant, that''s when trouble approaching.


    Several men who noticed the girls approach the girls forcefully.


    "Hey, girls? Why don''t you join us and have a lot of fun? I''m sure it will be way more fun than just hanging out with just girls." A man said.


    They are just some kind of thugs who have been hanging around in the city for a while. They are outsiders who don''t know about the girls'' poprities as the Nutcrackers.


    Lately, there have been several ouws entering the city. Roy and the agents staying in the city noticed them, but since they don''t seem to be rted to the cult, Roy and the others just leave them be. Hoping that they won''t cause any trouble.


    But seems like, trouble is approaching the girls. But the girls are unfazed even though they are outnumbered.


    Back then, it was usually just Ka, Ang, and Sophie who would be flirted with. But now, even though they are in arge group, the thugs still surround them.


    There are 10 girls. Ka, Ang, Sophie, Shirley, Candy, Lina, Jewel, Victoria, Veronica, and Celestine. But the men are about twenty of them surrounding the girls. They are double the numbers of the girls.


    When it was just Ka and few others, Ka would just bust their nuts. And the onlookers would apud her for it. But now, there are no one who wanted to get close to them since there are so many thugs. Even the guards and some powerful hunters would ignore them and don''t want to get into troubleter. As for some who knows Ka and the others, like the guild staff or Albert''s agents, they just watch with interest.


    Including Roy who has just returned, and find a good ce to hide to watch and listen. He even bought a snack on the way to eat while watching the situation progressing.


    Of course the two expert level mages noticed him, so he waved at them. The two then think that this is a normal urrence since Roy decided to not help, and the girls have some n in this situation. They decided to leave everything to the girls.


    Since they were in the cult, they can just kill anyone who overstep their boundaries. But now, they can''t do that anymore if they want to live a normal life. So, they just watch how the other taking care of this.


    "I''ll take care of this." It was Jewel who said that in whisper.


    Jewel stepped forward, take a deep breath, and shouted to the men surrounding her.


    "HEY! WHAT ARE YOU DOING HERE IN BROAD DAYLIGHT! DON''T YOU HAVE ANY JOB TO DO!? OH, RIGHT! I BET YOU DON''T! THAT''S WHY YOU''RE HERE TRYING TO FLIRT WITH THIS LITTLE CUTE ME! DO YOU HAVE NO SHAME AT ALL!? I KNOW I''M CUTE, BUT YOU''RE JUST WAY TOO OLD FOR ME!"


    Jewel shouted with her loud voice that everyone within 300m radius would hear her. It''s one of the things that Roy taught her.


    Since she has a loud voice, why not using it to gather all attention to her? Though she was told by Roy to not shout when he''s in vicinity.


    Of course right now, Roy is nearby. But Jewel doesn''t know it. So, she shouted at the top of her lung.


    Just by her shouts alone, more and more onlookers woulde to see what''s going on. Which makes the previous onlookers who don''t dare to watch closely to return.


    And her shouts also attracted more guards toe.


    "Shit! Guards areing! Let''s escape before the situation escte!" One of the thugs suggested.


    Of course Jewel hasn''t done shouting yet. She has more things to say.


    "WHY ARE YOU TRYING TO RUN AWAY!? YOU''RE JUST HERE TO CHAT WITH US, RIGHT!? THERE''S NOTHING WRONG WITH JUST TALKING! OR DON''T TELL ME THAT YOU''RE REALLY THUGS!? HAVE YOU DONE SOMETHING EVIL THAT MAKES YOU AFRAID OF THE GUARDS!?"


    While Jewel is shouting, the other girls justughed. They know that the thugs no longer dare to approach them anymore and tried to escape. And Jewel attracting everyone''s attention also to make these thugs be remembered by everyone watching. From now on, whenever any of them show their face in the city, someone might report them to the guards.


    The guards then running over immediately hearing Jewel saying that the thugs might have done something evil. But the thugs also escape before any of them got caught.


    "Remember this, you little shit! I''ll make sure that you and your friends will experience hell on earth!" Said the first man who approach them as he escapes.


    "And¡­ they escape. So easy." Jewel said. Now in her not so loud voice.


    "Haha! Good job, Jewel! Roy will be proud of you!" Ang praised Jewel.


    "Really? Well, usually, Ka is the one to take care of the situation. I wonder how Master will do it? Will he just beat up everyone?" Jewel asked.


    "No. He will do something much worse and much more shameless. Then those men will have their hearts shattered, their mind broken, and¡­ their sexualities might have change. So, it''s either hell or heaven if Roy is involved." Ka answered.


    "Sexuality?" Veronica asked.


    "Well, I will be d to exin! It happened less than two years ago when it was just Roy, me, Ang, and Ka. We were in Mellian when¡­"


    Victoria then exins what happened in the past happily. Or more like¡­ she''s trying to rope other girls to be interested in¡­ the same thing as her.


    Hearing about how it ends up with Roy getting to know Hill and being targeted by him, everyoneughed.


    As for Roy who watched everything, he returns home while thinking that Jewel has grown up. Just like Ka, Jewel now can think of a n herself. Roy is happy that there is another cool-headed figure in the group who can strategize. Although hearing her screaming doesn''t make her seems like a cool-headed person at all.


    Everyone returns home not caring that they had just make a new enemy. It''s not like they need to care about the thugs at all. Even if they tried to retaliate, they are not strong enough to be able to defeat everyone.


    What Roy and the others doesn''t know was that the thugs are a gang of evildoers. And the leader of that gang is interested in the girls, so he told his subordinates to get the girls no matter what. But the n failed when Jewel started shouting and attracting everyone''s attention.


    The leader who was peeking at the situation, leaves the building he''s hiding and try to find out where Jewel and the others live. Since it''s a building in the city near the park, and the park there''s a lot of children ying and many adults watching the kids, he can blend in with the people.


    Night finally came, and everyone should have been asleep at this time.


    The thugs have sneaked back into the city, and prepared to get their revenge, and in the dark, they approached the building Roy and the others live in.


    And the first who noticed they areing is Roy and Lina, with Elsie telling her that some people areing.


    Lina calmly call everyone via Sonia without waking the nonbatant.


    No one in the city other than those who are involved would know, that there will be bloodbath that night.

 Chapter 243 - Just A Normal Night For Other People

    That night, after the underwater dungeon exploration and the trouble in the city with the girls, I didn''t fall asleep. I thought that since we made another enemy, they will sooner ortere for us. If so, they will surely attack here. At the earliest, tonight.


    I don''t mind leaving everything to the girls, but I want to see if these thugs have some powerful backing behind them for them to be able to enter the city and do whatever they want.


    And if they were actually sent here because one of the girls is being targeted, I need to find the one who hired them to do it.


    From what I''ve seen this afternoon, none of the thugs and the people nearby watching has any explosive devices in their mouth. So, I guess they are not from the cult.


    But just because they are not from the cult mean that they are not evil. There are too many evils in this world. And I won''t deny if someone told me that I''m evil.


    ¡­alright, maybe I will.


    And soon enough, I can see a group of people, numbered about a fifty, entering the city. It''s more than twice the number of thugs from this afternoon. Some guards opened the door and those people entered the gate normally.


    I guess it means that the guards are involved in this. Probably, some noble is also involved. That''s why these thugs can easily enter the city and do whatever they like.


    As for the reason¡­ well, it has been more than a year since we stay here, so it''s normal for noble who stays in this city to know about some of us. Especially the girls.


    That noble might fancy any one of the girls, and wanted to bring her home. Or maybe everyone. So, he paid some thugs to do it for him.


    Though it''s just a guess.


    Well, I''ll see if it''s true or not. I can just find the one who ordered this attack, or kidnapping attempt, and interrogate them. If they are reallye from nobility, I will just get Albert here.


    To hell with Albert''s sleeping time. Everyone''s safety is more important than his sleeping time.


    In any case, I need to do some work. Some of the girls are my lovers after all.


    I need to prepare a battlefield.


    When I went down to the first floor, Lina was already there talking with Sonia.


    "Sonia, some thugs entering the city. And they are probablying here. Wake everyone up including Celestine and Veronica in the orphanage." Lina said.


    "Okay. They will be here soon." Sonia said. Then she nced at me and disappear.


    Lina then finally noticed that I''m here.


    "Master, are you going out?" Lina asked.


    Even though our rtionship should be lovers already, she still calls me as her master. I''ll just leave it be, but Victoria keep making fun of me thinking that it''s some kind of fetish.


    Even if it''s a fetish, it''s not mine! It''s Lina''s!


    Anyway, she knows about the thugs entering the city thanks to Elsie, the All-seeing Eye.


    Lina had both her summons to stay in the building. Elsie looks a bit disgusting, so she was put in Lina''s room while Sunny is in the entrance of this building.


    ¡­does an eyeball have gender?


    "Yeah. We can''t disturb the neighbor after all. I''ll make sure that they won''t wake up until sunrise. I''ll leave everything here to you and the others. No mercy. Once everything is over, gather all the corpses in one ce, and I will take care of the cleanup. I need to see if there is someone behind this." I said.


    "Understood. Be careful, Master."


    "You memorized the codes we agreed on, right? We''re in the city and Sonia is here with us, but just in case I can''t contact Sonia, I will make some hand signal within Elsie''s and my sight."


    Then Victoria interjected.


    "She might have memorized the code, but I doubt you have." Victoria said.


    "I have you to cover me in that area in case I forgot something." I said with a smile.


    Then I left the house and went to all the nearby houses to use sleeping gases on the neighbor. This way, they won''t wake up until morning tomorrow. Unless something big happening.


    Then I went to hide and see how the situation unfold.


    In the park, only Lina, Celestine, and Veronica preparing to greet the guests. As for the others, they just watched from the window. How fast will it end?


    Then all the fifty thugs seeing that the three beauties outside the house, they approached them with lecherous smiles. If I was there, I would have cut off their head already.


    Well, I don''t have to worry about them. I just need to take care of those who are not going to the park. The one who have just arrived, and watching the situation calmly. Did he really think that it''s safe?


    I''ll keep watch on him, and let him escape once the thugs in the park have been taken care of. There''s a chance that he might escape to the one who gave the order in case they are really being paid for it.


    So, I gave a signal by gesturing my hand to show Elsie that it''s fine to kill everyone. I also gave the signal that I will leave for a while, and to not wait for me to return.


    Lina who received the signal from Elsie, looked my way, smiled, and nodded. Now, I just need to watch this guy.


    ...¡­.


    In the park next to Roy''s and the others'' house, the thugs have arrived.


    "Hahaha! Don''t tell me you''re here to greet us! Well, I don''t mind. But what about the others? Are they home? Don''t worry, after the three of you, we will capture the others as well. He promised that we can have fun with everyone other than the target! Ahahaha!" The manughed.


    The three girls didn''t care about the man. They just waited for Roy''s order.


    Then, Elsie who is inside the house, gave a signal to Lina that it''s fine to kill everyone, and that Roy will be away for a while.


    Lina then looked at the direction where Roy is, and smiled telling him that it will be fine.


    "Why are you looking away? Don''t tell me that you''re praying for someone to safe you!? Is he your boyfriend? The one who stays in the house with you? Don''t worry, we will return you to him after we''re done with you. Though your body and your mind might be broken by then. Hahaha!"


    All of the thugsughed. They don''t care about the noise they made. It was because they were hired by a noble in the city, who has bribed the guards to not patrol this area.


    Roy was right that it was a noble who targeted the girls. As for the girls in question, it was Shirley. The princess of the kingdom. Though the noble himself doesn''t know that Shirley is actually the princess. He just wants her because of her beauty.


    He was also entranced by other girls, but for him, Shirley is the number one. So, he hired these thugs and told them that they are free to do whatever they want with other girls.


    What the noble and these thugs doesn''t know is¡­ they are trying to attack the strongest girls in the kingdom.


    "Lady Celestine, Lady Veronica, Master said that we can kill them all without mercy. Then, I''ll return home. Best of luck you two." And Lina calmly walk back home, ignoring the thugs.


    "Well, Celestine, I think it''s too much if both of us fight them. Let''s decide on just one of us to do it." Veronica suggested.


    "Let''s do it together instead. I''ll attack all of them right away, you''ll attack those who dodged my attack. That way, it will be over in a second." Celestine said.


    "Let''s do that then."


    Meanwhile, the thugs were angered to see that Lina just walked back home nonchntly.


    "Hey! Where are you going!? I won''t let you go home! I''ll make sure all of you will¡­ what the hell?"


    The lecherous smile of the thug, turned into despair in an instant.


    Before he finished his sentence, Celestine, who has learned about magic control slightly, split the earth. A lot of the thugs fall into the crevice except the man who was talking and some others who were able to fly and noticed the danger.


    Then, Celestine pressed the earth strongly, and all those who have fallen inside the crevice were crushed to their death and buried right away.


    Then, those who managed to dodge Celestine attack, realized that they are too weak against the twodies. They instantly tried to escape, but Veronica precisely cut them with Wind shes, stronger than the Wind Shield that the thugs have created to protect themselves.


    No one survive except for the thug who talked since he''s not being targeted. The man dropped on his knees in despair, while the twodies approaching him.


    "What should we do to him? Roy said that we can just kill him, right?" Celestine asked.


    "I guess it''s fine to kill him. But Ka said that there''s something she want to try. She wanted to test her interrogating skill." Veronica said.


    Then the both of them looked at the window which Ka is peeking from. She''s the only one who is still watching while the others already no longer care since it was done quickly.


    Ka shook her head. Telling the two that the guy is not good to interrogate.


    "Well, I guess his luck has run out then." Veronica said as she swung her hand and shed the man with magic.


    "Haha. I guess this will be the only thing in our lives that will still be simr to when we were in the cult. Killing assholes like these. Well, I''ll go gather all the corpses and put them somewhere for Roy to take care of." Celestine said as she opened up the ground again, and rise the corpses and move them with earth magic to gather them in one spot, before covering them to make sure that no one can notice them.


    As for Veronica, she casted wind magic to make the air flow and make the smell of blood disappear.


    Thus, that''s the end of the thugs in just a few second. While no one in the city realize that something is happening.


    "He said he has a target, right? What if the one who hired them won''t give up?" Celestine asked.


    "Isn''t that why Roy is leaving? You don''t know yet how strong he is, so I guess that''s why you''re worried. Don''t worry. He''s not just strong. He''s also tricky. I bet before the sunrise; he will return. Let''s go back to sleep." Veronica said.


    Just like Veronica said, Roy is busy chasing after the man whoes to watch the thugs capturing the girls.


    And Roy will never forgive anyone who tried to mess with him or his people. Especially if they tried to capture his lovers.

 Chapter 244 - Chasing After The Thug

    Whoa! They make it look so easy to kill fifty people!


    Celestine sunk most of them to the ground, and Veronica took care of the rest who managed to dodge.


    There''s only one man left. I don''t know why but it seems like he''s being spared.


    Then the two looked at the window where Ka is. Seeing Ka shook her head, Veronica killed the man.


    I guess Ka needed to try something, but she doesn''t think that the man they spared is good enough for it. That''s why she shook her head and tell the two to kill him.


    All of the bad guys aiming for the girl have died. Except for the one watching them from afar.


    He watched the event unfold in shock. Never in his wildest dream that whatever they are nning to be destroyed in a matter of seconds. Leaving none of the thugs alive.


    Although he''s watching from afar, there''s no way the two expert level mages would not notice that he''s watching. They should have realized it from the beginning. So, after killing thest one, Veronica look straight to where this man I''m watching is hiding.


    Noticing that one of the girls is looking at him, he became so scared. He made an instant decision to escape as soon as possible.


    How strong is this guy? Probably an advanced level at most. I can easily defeat this guy.


    And where is this guy running to? Instead of escaping from the city, he''s entering the noble district. I guess he''s really being paid by a certain noble. Let''s contact Albert just in case.


    While chasing the guy into the noble district, I called Sonia.


    "Sonia, tell Albert that there''s some noble who tried to mess with us. Ask him if I should kill this noble or he will take care of it." I said to Sonia.


    "Yeah, the thugs who came said that they have a target. I don''t know which one is their target though. But at least we know that they are being paid to capture one of the girls. They also said that they can enjoy other girls other than the target. It''s a good thing that Celestine and Veronica joined us." Sonia said. Then she disappears to make a contact with Albert.


    Yeah. It really is great to have both Celestine and Veronica join us. Though even if they didn''t join, I still believe that other girls are still able to handle the situation. It was just a mere fifty of them. But it will take more time than letting Celestine and Veronica do it.


    And while I''m at it, seems like I''m not the only one chasing after the escaping man. Celestine also curious about him and start running in the street following after the man. Though somehow, there are no guards patrolling in the area. Must be bribed by this noble.


    ¡­shit. Since Celestine is also running, now I''m focused on her much more than the man. Let''s just approach her and ask her to go together.


    "Hey, Celestine. Why are you chasing after him as well?" I asked while running beside her.


    ¡­they''re bouncing and bouncing and bouncing. I guess she must have forgotten to wear the ttening underwear. Just keep making eye contact, Roy.


    "I''m curious. Everyone seems to put their trust on you. I also trust you because you give me and the orphans a new house, but I still don''t know how strong you are and what you''re nning. I want to see it for myself." Celestine said.


    "So, it''s just curiosity, huh? That''s fine. But we need to be careful. Who knows if this noble is from the cult or has connection with a cult member? It will be bad if they know who you are. Victoria, make a disguise for her." I ordered Victoria.


    "Okay!"


    With my Divine Vision, I can see it clearly. Victoria had some Blobbies envelop Celestine, and transformed them into a new set of clothes. And for a second, the Blobbies transformed into a skintight full-body suit. Damn, that''s dangerous in many ways!


    But it''s just one second and then Celestine''s dress transformed into a ck dress with her boobs size changed into average size.


    "You like what you see?" Victoria asked.


    "Not really. The man is entering the noble district, and his destination should be a noble with quite high position. I thought we can live peacefully in this city until the war, but it seems like it''s not happening. I hope after we take care of this guy so there won''t be anyone messing with us in this city anymore."


    I pretend to not know what Victoria actually meant.


    Victoria was about to tease me, but Sonia returned.


    "Albert said that in case a noble is really the mastermind, you need to transfer him before you meet the noble." Sonia said.


    "No killing?"


    "As long as it''s not the noble, it''s fine to kill everyone else."


    Good. As long as no one will be able to mess with me again in the future, I don''t care if they die or not. Though I still want them to die, I trust Albert to decide the punishment for this noble.


    "Oh? Seems like the guy is about to enter a mansion. Let''s hurry up so we can eavesdrop on them. Want me to carry you?" I asked Celestine if she wants me to carry her so we can get there faster.


    "Do it. I''m not a wind mage, and speed is my biggest weakness." Celestine said.


    Then I quickly carried her in my arms, as she wrapped her arms around my neck.


    I jumped to the roof with Celestine in my arms, enters the noble''s mansion through the window and eavesdrop on them talking.


    The man hurriedly enters the room which already has three people in it. One of them probably is the mastermind, and the other two are his henchmen. Maybe some lower nobles.


    The three nobles are a tall one, over 2m tall, the one sitting on the middle, the white haired one, and a skinny noble.


    So, before they talk, I opened a portal from the capital to call Albert.


    "Hey, Roy. I thought you were alone." Albert said while looking at Celestine.


    "She''s curious about how I do things. But I guess I won''t do much since you''re here. Let''s listen first what sort of discussion they are having."


    I know that everyone in this mansion, other than the nobles are sleeping. Some because it''s alreadyte, and some because I made them to sleep. So, it''s fine even if we eavesdrop on them from the door the man just entered.


    "That was quick. So, where is she? I can''t wait to have fun with Shirley." Said the noble sitting in the middle.


    So, their target is Shirley. Hearing that their target is his sister, Albert seems outraged. If I didn''t stop him, he would have barged in right away. We need to hear more.


    "Sorry, Celestine. I guess Albert will take the show rather than me." I said.


    "Don''t worry. I''m also curious on what he''s nning with these people." Celestine replied.


    I checked if the nobles inside have explosive devices in their mouth. Seems like one of them have it. The skinny noble. I told about the existence of the cult member to Albert and Celestine.


    I should have had Albert investigate the nobles in this city as soon as I move here. Or did he escape my vision?


    The man who was asked by the noble looked angry when he heard the question.


    "Are you kidding me!? You never told me that they have expert level mages! Two of them at that!" the man shouted.


    "What? There''re two expert level mages in my city!? Howe I don''t know about it?" The nobles are panicked hearing that.


    "I don''t know and I don''t care! I have told you about what happened, and I don''t care if you don''t pay me anymore! I will escape this city! Don''t hire me ever again!?" The man yelled and about to leave the room.


    If he opened the door, he will see us.


    I guess it means the eavesdropping time is over. I told Albert and Celestine to step back.


    The man then opened the door, and I quickly shed his neck with VIctosword. Grab the head, and throw them into the room.


    "KYAAAA!!" the white-haired noble screamed.


    Why is he screaming like a girl?


    I entered the room without disguise since I know their fate after what they''ve done. Followed by Albert who hides himself behind me, and Celestine next to me.


    "Who are you!?" the skinny cult member noble asked.


    "You don''t know me? You''re the one who hired him and his people to raid my house and kidnap the girls living there! Howe you didn''t know about me!?" I said.


    "Guards! Guards! Come here quick!" The noble in the middle shouted to call his guards.


    His voice is quite loud and able to wake up the guards, and the guards quickly enter the room and surround me.


    Albert is hiding his face, so no one knows that the king is here.


    "So, it''s three nobles, the thugs, the noble''s guards, and the city guards as well, right? You are all guilty." I said.


    Other than the skinny noble, no one else has HGB in their mouth. Then, we need to make sure that he''s captured alive.


    "Guards! Kill them!" the middle noble gave the order.


    But before any of the guards make their moves, Albert stop hiding and show himself to the nobles.


    "Kill us? I''ll take that as assassination attempt to kill me then." Albert said calmly.


    The guards ignore Albert, but the three nobles can''t hide their shock seeing the faceing out of hiding.


    "Y-your Majesty the king!?"


    "Yup, that''s me. How do you do? Terrible it seems." Albert said.


    How will Albert proceed with their punishment? At least I know that they can''t escape their fate.

 Chapter 245 - Sometimes, I Wish I Dont Have Divine Vision

    Albert surprised the everyone in the room with his appearance. No one expected that the king who should be at the Capital would be in Cassau.


    "Y-your majesty! What can I do for you?" The white haired noble in the middle stand up in a hurry.


    "What I expected from you as the noble of this kingdom. And you three have disappoint me. I''m going to ask you something. How many times have you done this in the past?" Albert asked.


    So, he actually wanted to interrogate the nobles right away. Did he really think that we''ll be safe here while being surrounded by the guards? I guess we are. Since he has me and Celestine with him.


    I just need to make sure that no one is able to escape.


    "W-what is your majesty talking about? T-there must be some kind of misunderstanding, right?" The man keeps talking while stuttering.


    "Not just targeting women, you also bribed the guards, huh? I expected you to be rightful nobles, but this is what you do with your power?"


    "T-this is a misunderstanding! I apologize if we did something that make us seems like we''re the bad guys, but we were thinking about this city!" The man made up some terrible excuses.


    He''s a terrible actor. He should have just admitted to his crime so Albert can give him lighter punishment.


    As for the other two nobles, they just stood there in fear. Or so it seems. The skinny cultist noble probably just pretending to be frightened.


    "So, it''s a misunderstanding when I heard clearly that you''re ordering your men to kill me? Then what about you saying that you can''t wait to have fun with Shirley?" Albert asked.


    "That¡­ Shirley is my pet! Right! She''s a pet! I hired this guy to walk Shirley! And I can''t wait to y with Shirley now that she''s home!"


    ¡­this guy just can''t shut up. If he stays quiet, Albert would not know that he''s lying. And his punishment can be lightened. If this goes on, all three of them will be beheaded undoubtedly.


    Obviously, hearing all his excuses, Albert is angry.


    "You think I will forgive you if you make suchme excuses! We heard everything you say! And the girl you''re targeting, Shirley, is my sister! My sister who wants to build a n in this city! What''s your excuse now!?"


    Hearing that the girl that the noble is targeting is Albert''s siter, everyone who heard that panicked. And some of them even about to escape. But I won''t let them.


    "Celestine, can you block all the escape from this mansion? Cover all the doors, windows, and all opening with Earth Wall or something." I whispered to Celestine.


    "Easy. Done."


    As expected of an expert level mage! She finished it in just matter of seconds! Once she mastered magic control, it will be even faster.


    Just as she finished with her magic, the guards decided to escape the mansion. I guess they prefer to be branded as wanted criminals rather than caught ones.


    And of course, no one is able to escape the cage built by Celestine. Even if someone managed to make a hole in the wall, she can sense it and restore it in an instant.


    I feel like I''m extremely lucky when I remember that I have defeated some expert level mages.


    Of course since the window is blocked as well, the nobles noticed that they are already caged.


    "This is-! We''re being captured!" The tall noble yelled.


    "What? Didn''t your guest have just told you that there''s two expert level mages over there? I brought you one of them. Until reinforcement arrive, I will have you all locked here. Even your wife and children. Of course if they are innocent, they can leave. But I''m sure that you three won''t be able to leave."


    Whoa! Albert ying the bad guy! He must be really angry knowing that the nobles he appointed to target his own sister.


    Well, I guess he can take care of everything here. I''ll take care of other things.


    "Albert, who''s the owner of this mansion?" I asked.


    From the look, it seems as if the white-haired noble is the leader. That make it seems as if this is his mansion. But I ask just in case.


    "I don''t know. You transported me when we''re already inside. Hey, who is the owner of this mansion?" Albert asked the three nobles.


    "It''s him!" The white-haired man quickly pointed his finger to the tall noble.


    "Me?"


    Seeing his reaction, that seems to be a lie. And of course, Albert noticed it.


    "Is this your mansion, Ben?" Albert asked the skinny noble who is also a member of the cult.


    "No, your majesty." Ben said.


    Then Albert signaled to me that this Ben is not lying. Which makes the owner of this noble is the white-haired man. Well, I don''t really care about it though. I just need to take care of small things.


    "Celestine, stay with Albert. I have somewhere to go."


    "You''re leaving?"


    "I''ll be exploring this mansion."


    I ignore the guards who are watching me in fear and leave the room.


    This is inside the noble district. Somehow,moner is forbidden to enter this area. So, I never explore came here before.


    I thought that since this city is safe from the cult in my previous life, there won''t be any trouble if I chose to live here. That''s why I never really scan the city fully. Even thest time that I run on the air, above this noble district, I was so high in the sky that only the edge of my vision barely able to see the ground. That''s why I never know about the basement.


    Next time I enter a new city, I will make sure to scan the whole city from above the sky, to under the ground.


    "Make sure to remind me to do it, Victoria." I asked Victoria to remind me.


    "Yeah, yeah. Fully scan the city you entered. But these nobles, doesn''t seem to be part of the cult. Other than that skinny man you told me about. Just don''t forget to see the bigger picture. These guys aren''t worth destroying."


    "No, they need to be destroyed. These guys tried to destroy my peaceful life. If I''m in another city, I should be fine. I just need to be vignt in case I see something strange. But I live in this city, so I need to exterminate insects like these." I exined.


    "Well, whatever. So, where are you going? The basement? What''s under the basement?" Victoria asked.


    "ves. There are a lot of ves under this mansion. And there''s even a room where someone is ''ying'' with a ve. The kind of ''y'' he''s doing don''t harm the ve, so I think we can save that forst. We''ll save the other ves first, then we save that veter."


    "Who is ying with the ve, and is the ve a girl or a boy?" Victoria asked again.


    "¡­he could be the son of the white-haired noble. And the ve is a girl." I replied.


    "Hey! We need to save her first!"


    "¡­maybe you''re right. She''s not harmed physically, but it''s her mentality that got damaged. Let''s go there quickly."


    I hastened my speed, and ignore all the locked ves in the basement. I entered thest room in the basement, to be greeted by a young man, slightly older than me, forcing a ve to spoil him.


    "That''s not how you do it! You will let me sleep on yourp, and you will sing luby while patting my head! Let''s do it again! Not now! I need to suck on my pacifier first!" The young man said to the ve while he''s only wearing diaper.


    ¡­this is torture to my eyes. And it''s also hurting my ears when I heard him said that.


    "¡­I see why you want toe herest." Victoria said.


    "¡­I''ll put him to sleep with sleeping gas. Victoria, you''ll free the other ves. Make sure the Magic Restriction Cors are taken off as well. They will be usefulter."


    Victoria left me to save the other ves, and I approached the confused woman. She''s about 40 years old. What kind of fetish is this? No, I don''t want to know.


    Victoria should have known what fetish is this, but I won''t ask. There are some things best forgotten.


    I take out a Blobby, turned it into a key and unlock the ve''s cor. Then I without hesitation, put the cor on the man.


    I ignore the confused woman, and quickly reunited with Victoria.


    After saving all the ves, I took everyone back to the room where Albert is.


    I informed Albert about the ves, and told me to just transfer all of the nobles and the guards to a prison in the capital. Everything is up to him now.


    Oh, about the crazy man in the basement, I also transferred him to the prison. Now I just need to wait for their judgment.


    As for the maids and servants, they are being ced under house arrest. None of them are allowed to leave the mansion.


    As for the ve, they are taken to my house in the Capital.


    While transferring the nobles, I plucked out the skinny noble''s HBG from his mouth and kicked him inside the portal while he''s confused. At least he won''t kill himself with it.


    I also have the nobles and their guards to wear the cors. Now they won''t be able to use magic anymore.


    I return home with Celestine. Then in the park, she shows me where she hid the corpses. I quickly transport the corpses and threw them to an empty ind.


    After that, I asked Candy who is still awake to sleep with me. There''s something I have to forget tonight¡­

 Chapter 246 - Just Another Peaceful Moment

    The next morning after breakfast, I decided to walk around the city. I haven''t properly checked the whole city since I moved here. And it''s also to see if there are more people hiding something bad.


    Since there''s no n for today, I decided to do it.


    Hmm¡­ now that I think about it, this city is quite big. There are many ces I haven''t entered yet.


    Let''s see¡­ this city can be divided into two area. Themon area is near the wall, and the noble district in the middle of the city.


    The noble district is basically the ce where the nobles in this city lived.


    As for themon area, it''s divided again into four. First is the residential area, which mostmoners lived in including me.


    Then there''s business district where most stores are located. The hunter guild is also located there to makes it easier for hunters to buy supplies.


    After that is the academy district where the school and college are located. Jewel is going to the school in this area. I will also attend the medical school here in the future. The medical school is next to the magic academy, and they are affiliated to each other.


    Lastly, it''s the slum. That''s the ce with the least security in this city. Most bad people hide there. And that''s the only ce I ever explore in this city after we moved here.


    I thought that since there''s a slum in this city, that ce might be used for the cult members to hide. And I was right. After moving here, I killed several cult members until I no longer see any of them in the cult.


    And knowing that there is no more cult member in the slum, I think that''s the reason why I let down my guard and no longer care to explore the whole city. And that''s a mistake. After all, instead of those in the slum, the nobles have more influence and more dangerous.


    As for the residential and business district, I''m there most of the time I''m in this city. I think these ces are safe.


    And so, I went to check on the slum again and the noble district. Everything odd that I see, I reported them to the agents staying in this city. They will report to Albert who is investigating this city incognito.


    The agents also looking for the guards that were bribed by the noble to let the thugs enter the city.


    I think that should be enough to make the city safe. We have just been focused on the cult that we forget about the other criminal. But thanks tost night''s event, we have be more wary on other threat than just the cult.


    Well, that''s one thing taken care of, I guess. I''ll just go check on the city regrly from now on. I guess once a week?


    As for the nobles fromst night, Albert told me via Sonia that they have too many crimes written under their name. They can''t avoid death penalty.


    As for their maids, servants, and everyone in their mansion, they are still being investigated. But seems like the nobles'' wives and children also did something bad as well. Although it''s lighter than those three, they still deserve punishment.


    Albert will soon announce the removal of those three and their family from nobility.


    The former ves, most of them are from Cassau. So, I''ll bring them hereter along with Albert who want to investigate other nobles in this city.


    I guess today, I only need to make sure that no one escape from Cassau.


    In the evening, Albert has finished investigating about the nobles in this city and he''s resting in my ce.


    He told me about the noble cult member we captured. Only he alone is a member of the cult, as everyone in his family don''t know about it.


    He was put in solitary cell for Albert to interrogate further.


    "Sigh¡­ this just makes two. Melk city, and Cassau. There are too many cities in this kingdom and I don''t know how will we finish checking them all." Albert sighed.


    "Hmm? What about the capital?" I asked.


    "Peoplee and go frequently in the capital. It''s nearly impossible to have everyone checked. If only I could have at least one noble ally in each city in this kingdom. That would take care of many things. Melk is already taken care of, but I haven''t found anyone good enough in this city."


    "Idiot. There are already three vacancies in this city. You just need to appoint someone you can trust to take care of this city. Then that''s one more thing taken care of." I suggested.


    Albert pondered for a while, and he suddenly stand up from his seat.


    "That''s right! I can just alter their identities into a lower noble from countryside, or make them a rtive of a noble! As for who¡­ I guess one of the agents will be good. Alright, I need to go back and discuss it with Hector! Return me home now, Roy!" Albert asked me to transport him with portal.


    "Is that how you ask for a favor? I guess that''s how a king did it."


    I quickly open a portal and threw Albert into the portal.


    "Is that how you treat a king!?" Albert shouted before I closed the portal.


    "Yes."


    I closed the portal before he couldin.


    Now, this city should be safe. I''ll just think of what we''ll be doing tomorrow in theke. I guess we will have barbeque again. Nice¡­


    I can''t wait especially knowing what kind of swimsuit the girls have bought yesterday. I can forgive them using my money for those swimsuits.


    Since it''s their first time wearing such outfits that reveal too much of their bodies, Celestine and Veronica both are trying them on in their own room. Nice¡­


    One thing I learn from them is that they can sense people within their range, but they can''t tell what those people are doing. So, I''m safe.


    The next day, I used portal to travel everyone, including the orphans, to theke. Today is a rare asion of where the park next to my house is not full with children.


    Since theke is a long distance from the main road, and we also hunted most of the monsters there, there''s shouldn''t be anyone who knows about thiske other than us. That''s why a few month ago, I built a shack near theke since the girls said that they don''t want to wear swimsuit from home. I don''t get why they do that, but I don''t mind.


    Wearing swimsuit from home is much easier than bringing clothes and change them in the location. I can just transport everyer when we''re done ying.


    Since we''re just ying, I called Shelia here as well. She''s well-liked by the orphans as well as they yed with her wolf form. She allowed all the children to ride on her back as she run around theke. It has be some kind of attraction.


    ¡­ the girls have changed. But there''s something disappointing. Celestine and Veronica didn''t dare to wear revealing swimsuits! They wore a shirt and shorts!


    I guess I wished too much.


    Whatever. At least the others are already used to them so they are fine wearing swimsuits.


    After praising the girls with their new swimsuits, they are all running to theke. And y. They sshed each other with water, and y with the children.


    ¡­what about swimming practice?


    I guess that''s forter. I still have someone I need to call first.


    It was Kron. He said that he''sing and told me to transport him with portal here.


    As for the reason he''sing¡­ because it''s time.


    It''s finally the time for us to build a n!


    I opened up a portal to a Blobby that he has, and the two portals connected with each other.


    "Hey, Kr- Wha-!!"


    "I can''t stop!!!"


    What I don''t know is that he''s currently flying at a high speed, so when I opened a portal, I was mmed by his body and got blown away.


    We both got sunk into theke, and I can see Kron losing his consciousness. As for me, I''m barely managed to protect myself with Aura, so I didn''t receive much damage. But I need to get thrown away since if I don''t, it will only give more damage to Kron and he might die. Even now, he''s already lost his consciousness and we sunk deeper into theke.


    I pushed some air into his lung with magic, and carried him to the surface. But damn, his body has grown bigger! Hill and the others in Mellian have sessfully turned him into¡­ this bulk of muscles! I think he got the body than even bigger than the biggest among Hill''s people.


    ¡­since he''s unconscious, I guess we can''t discuss about the n here. Let''s have him rest in the shack. I will just enjoy swimming today.


    We yed until the children started to get tired, and sleepy. The girls also taught those who can''t swim, while I''m teaching some who wanted to dive. We enjoyed so much today, but Kron didn''t even enjoy anything. He''s still fainted in the shack.


    And since we have finished ying, the girls need to use the shack to change again. So, I carried him outside.


    Like I said, why do they need to change in the shack instead of at home?


    By the time everyone has changed, Kron finally wakes up.


    "What did I miss?"


    "Girls in revealing clothes ying with water."


    "¡­so, I missed half of my life''s worth of happiness?"


    "Probably more. Why are you flying anyway?" I asked.


    "Since I was just in the next city, I thought that it would be faster if I just fly here."


    "I see. So, you''re stupid. I have told you and show you as well that using portal is much faster, but you ignore my warning. The girls have changed, so let''s discuss about the n at home." I said.


    "I''ll go home on my own this time. It will be weird if no one notices the appearance of an S-rank hunter in the city. See youter!"


    With that, Kron returns to Cassau on his own. I guess I''ll introduce Celestine and Veronica at home.


    By the time Kron arrives, we are about to prepare for dinner.

 Chapter 247 - Clan Creation

    "Alright, so, since Kron is here, let''s finally build a n. We have enough achievement to do that, right?"


    After dinner together with Kron and everyone, I suggested to finally build a n.


    I have no interest in this, but this is important since the n will mainly be the force to fight against the cult.


    Albert and the king''s soldier will be the one fighting in the frontline in the war. But as for us, we will do many things. Especially with my portals, I can transport many people and supplies to anywhere that have Blobby.


    It''s mainly me who will be the secret weapon against the cult. The others in the n will be counted as my allies. That''s why Albert told me to be the leader, but I don''t want to stand out as a leader of a n with two expert level mages and an S-rank hunter as its members.


    "Right. We have more than enough achievements with Kron as an S-rank hunter. What else should we discuss?" Ang asked.


    "Yeah, we will obviously use this ce as the base of our n. But who will be the leader? Is there anyone who want to volunteer? As for me, since I want to keep my power as Aura user as secret, I don''t want to stand out. So, if possible, I don''t want to be the leader. Why not Shirley since she''s the princess?" I suggested Shirley to be the leader of our n.


    "No thanks. If people find out that I''m a n leader, there will be more nobles give request to us. That''s what you hate most, right?" Shirley said.


    "Hmm¡­ you''re right. Then, who else?"


    "Obviously it will be you. Now, let us discuss why you will be the leader instead. You just need to listen." Ka said.


    I guess I can''t escape being a leader. But now, how will I hide myself from the cult? It will be dangerous if their Evil God wannabe knows that I''m an Aura user.


    "Alright. Then, I''m going first. He will be the leader since his elements are weak. Air element which everyone underestimates, and summoning element with supposedly only summon an immortal and weak ck Slime, which is me. Everyone will think that he''s weak and became the leader because he''s being pushed to do it. He will stand out, but no one will think that he''s strong. And I guess no one will disagree with me." Victoria exined why I''m a good choice to be the leader.


    Hmm¡­ she has a point. Then, if I be the n leader, other people will just think that the others are pushing me around since they don''t want to be put in a troublesome position.


    But I also don''t want to be put in a troublesome position!


    What is the duty of a n leader? Taking request from the guild or directly from request giver, negotiating the content of the quest with the quest giver and also the reward, and what else?


    Most likely, it will be desk job and paperwork. But I can still delegate other people to do it. I just need to focus on negotiation. I guess I can take the job.


    "Fine. I guess I''ll be the n leader. Although what Victoria said is what other people will perceive of me, I think I will still be the busiest one around. So, I need someone to take care of the paperwork and financial of the n."


    "Penny and I can do that since we won''t take part in any of the mission." Ruby volunteered to do it.


    "Are you sure?"


    "Yes. We have decided to do it a long time ago in case we really end up creating a n. Penny and I are mostly stay at home. And we can also have Lina help us as well since she can just send Sunny and Elsie away with you on mission, while she stays at home. And while you''re not calling her, Sonia will also help us." Ruby exined.


    I guess that''s the ideal situation. Now, I just need to y as the leader who is being pushed around by the n. It will be easy.


    "Then, it''s decided. If we continue discussing about it, it will just end up with you guys making excuses about why I should be the leader. Then, is there anyone who knows the requirements needed to build a n? I''ll be going to the guild tomorrow to for the n creation."


    "Oh! I heard that we need to have at least five people to propose for the creation of the n, and a huge amount of money for it. So, it''s best if you and four otherse with you to the guild. Having all of us enter the guild will make it too crowded." Candy said.


    "Alright. So, who will being with me? I guess Kron will have toe since we need to show people that an S-rank hunter is joining our n. That makes three more. Who else?"


    As of now, we have Ka, Ang, Sophie, Shirley, Victoria, Candy, Lina, Jewel, Veronica, Celestine, Ian, Kron, and me. That makes thirteen hunters in our n. Who knows if there will be more people joining?


    Other than Kron who has reached S-rank, we have Candy who is an A-rank. Ka, Ang, Shirley, and I are B-rank. Sophie, Lina, and Ian are C-rank. As for Jewel, Veronica, and Celestine, they are still E-rank since they have just registered.


    Veronica and Celestine never registered before when they are still members of the cult. And since we''re being careful, the two didn''t use their real name to register. Just their shortened name. Veronica is Nika, and Celestine is Ceres. I hope no one notice who they were.


    "Then, we can have Candye as well since she''s an A-rank hunter. As for the other two, one will be me, and the other is¡­"


    Before Ka finished speaking, thest person who wille with me volunteered.


    "I will go. It''s better if we show them that we have an expert level mage in the n, right? Although I''m still E-rank, no one will underestimate my power." Veronica volunteered toe.


    She''s right. And having an expert level magee will advertise our n as well. But that mean there will be more people who want to give us request directly.


    "Roy, I know what you''re thinking. Don''t forget that you are the leader. It''s your decision to take or refuse a request." Ka said.


    "I guess that''s five. If everyone agrees, then the five of us will be going to the guild tomorrow. The rest of you are free to do whatever you want."


    The next day, five of us entered the guild and ask the guild receptionist about n creation. The other four are waiting on the side and look at the requests posted on the board, while I alone ask the receptionist.


    "Excuse me. I want to ask about n creation. What is the necessary requirement to create one?" I asked.


    "n creation? Please wait a minute! I will ask the guild master toe!" The receptionist quickly left her desk and go to where the guild master is.


    Why is it necessary? I thought that we just need to bring five people and pay some money. Or is it that the requirement has changed since Ka asked about it? If it''s Ka, I think she has asked the guild more than a year ago since we just moved here.


    I guess it has changed now. Well, whatever it is, I can do it.


    I told the others that we might be called to meet the guild master. And soon enough, the receptionist returns and called us to meet the guild master.


    "Mr. Roy and his party, please follow me to the office."


    After entering the office, the receptionist also enters to prepare some tea for us and the guild master. He''s sitting on his desk while doing some paperwork. But after we enter the office, he stopped his hand and stand. Letting use in and sit.


    "So, a guild creation? It has been a while since there''s a n in this city. Do you know what happened to the previous n?" the guild master asked.


    The previous n? It has been a while? Then there''s only one answer.


    "The n was disbanded." I replied.


    "Right. They were rich enough tost for a while, but their money didn''tst long. They only took mission from the guild. The guild will help n to raise further since we will be cooperating once the n is established. But we need to know how good the n is. That n was not good enough toplete many of the tasks given to them, so we can''t trust them. And no one is going to them to submit a request. That''s why the n was disbanded. Are you still serious in establishing a n?"


    "Yes. After all, we have someone who will give us mission. So, we won''t have any trouble about trust or money. That person is rich enough to give us many quests to take. As for other people, I will decide if we should take their requests or not." I replied calmly.


    "I see. I guess you''re prepared. But that doesn''t mean that I will ept your proposal. The n I previously said has been disbanded for a year. And since then, the requirements for a n establishment have changed."


    "Alright. What are they?"


    "First is money. It''s needed to show us that you have no trouble with it."


    "That''s easy."


    "Next is members. The n need at least five members to be built. I see that it''s done as well, but is this everyone?" The guild master asked.


    "No. At the moment, we have thirteen members."


    "Good. Then, next is your base."


    "It''s our home next to the newly built park. We''re the one who built the park as well."


    "Really? My grandson often told me that he ys there every day. Thank you for letting my grandson y there."


    "It''s okay. That park is free for everyone toe and y."


    The guild master look to be about 60 years old. I guess that''s old enough to have grandson.


    "Thenstly, you need to finish a quest given by the guild to prove your strength. It''s the new requirement for a n establishment. Hey, prepare that request for me!" The guild master asked the receptionist to bring over a request.


    "Just one request?" I asked.


    "Yes. But to be qualified to take the quest, you need to pass a test prepared by the guild. I hope you''re prepared."


    I guess we will be busy today.

 Chapter 248 - Easy Test

    "So, what kind of test do you want us to take?" I asked the guild master.


    "Before I decide on the test, I want you to fill this form."


    The guild master gives me a paper. In it, I need to write the name of the n, the leader, and all the starting members of the n along with their hunter rank.


    I let Ka write it down. I forgot to discuss the name of the nst night.


    And she didn''t disappoint. She wrote a name that I can agree to say that it''s much better than if I''m the one who think about the name.


    Ka returned the paper to the guild master, and he checked the content of the paper.


    "The name of the n is "Wolf''s Crown" is that right?" The guild master asked.


    "It''s a temporary name. But it might be permanent as well." Ka answered.


    Wolf doesn''t have a crown. Rooster has. But I think Ka mean it''s about me bing the Werewolf King. She thought that Wolf''s Crown is a good idea. We''ll discuss itter with the others.


    "And the leader is Roy, a B-ranked hunter."


    "That''s me."


    "And the members are¡­ three E-rank hunters and an S-rank hunter!?"


    The guild master was shocked when he saw the rank of the n''s members.


    "That''s right. One of the three E-rank hunters has just awakened her element. As for the two E-rank hunters, although they have just registered, they are powerful mages. And the S-rank hunter is a solo hunter." I exined.


    "Why is the S-rank hunter not the leader? Or at least the A-rank one?"


    "Majority votes."


    "I see. Well, if majority of your members decided that you are fit to be the leader, then I will ept this. As for any new members, once you admitted them into your n, you have to report it within one month since they joined you."


    "Okay."


    The guild master then continues exining about what the n should do. It''s basically what we already know, so Kron got bored of it and already sleeping.


    After he finished exining, I guess it''s time for the test.


    "So, what kind of test do we need to do before we take the quest?"


    "Just a friendly match. One of you will have to fight someone I have chosen. She''s in the guild right now, so we can do it now. As for the location, let''s do it in the open area north of the city. Please wait for me over there while I go get the opponent you will be facing."


    "Just one person?" I asked.


    "Yes. And you must survive for fifteen minutes against her."


    "Survive? Not winning?" I asked again.


    The guild master didn''t answer and just smiled. I guess it''s just a survival for fifteen minutes. That''s easy!


    Then, the guild master asked us to leave first while he gets our opponent. I can see who she is. She''s an old white-haireddy. I think she looks familiar, so I''ll ask Ka about her.


    "Ka, the opponent seems to be an old white-haired woman. And even though the guild master know that Kron is an S-rank hunter, the test is just for one of us to fight and survive for fifteen minutes. Probably that woman is also an S-rank hunter. Do you know her?"


    "An old woman? Maybe she''s Nana." Ka replied.


    "What do you know about her?"


    "Do you remember dius? That got caved in inside the dungeon and need us to help them out? She was the leader of that party. Although that party is now disbanded after that event. Since then, she moves alone. But there''s a rumor that she wants to rebuild dius again and started recruiting female hunters. She only ever epted female hunters." Ka exined.


    "Oh, right. They''re also the one who saved Jewel''s vige from bandits, right? Should we let Jewel have a go with her then? But I think the guild master would prefer if I''m the one going. Get Sonia to call the others so they can watch the test if they want to. Well, the result is obvious after all."


    I told Ka to call Sonia. Then, Sonia will call the others to watch the test.


    I can still see the guild while we''re walking out of the city. The guild called that Nana while everyone is interested as well. I think there will be many audiences watching the fight.


    If Nana is the one we saved back then, that mean she knows that Victoria is a talking slime. And she probably knows that I''m fighting closebat if her former party member that I forgot her name told Nana about me before they were disbanded.


    Well, it doesn''t matter to me. Even if everyone knows that Victoria can talk, no one will expect that she used to be human.


    Soon, we arrive at the in outside the city. There are few traces of battle here. I guess this is the ce where the test for n creation will be.


    After waiting for a while, the guild master and Nana arrive. They brought a lot of hunters who want to watch the fight. Then behind them, I can see Ang and the othersing this way.


    "So, who will take the test?" Ang asked.


    "I will. I think this is also a test from the guild master as well. Although I told you guys about the test, I think this test will be boring to watch."


    "Master! That''s Nana! I know her! Can I fight instead?" Jewel asked. She seems to be interested in showing that Nana how strong she has be.


    She has just awakened her magic a few days ago. No matter how good her magic is, it''s impossible for her to win.


    "No need. This test is not about winning, but more inpleting a quest given. That''s what a hunter is. Completing a quest given to them. Not defeating the opponent. If the guild master told us that we will have to defeat her, I will ask the other to do it. But for survival, anyone can do it. For now, I want you to keep your beastform as a secret. There are too many people watching." I said to Jewel.


    But it seems like the guild master heard about it as well since he smiled. I guess I was right that this is aboutpleting a quest given by him, which is to survive for fifteen minutes.


    Then both Nana and I walked to the middle of the in, surrounded by the hunters interested in watching.


    "It has been a while. I forgot to thank you for saving us back then." Nana greeted me first.


    "No problem. I also have forgotten about you. I''m sorry about my terrible memory."


    Hearing my reply, Nana fumed in anger. That''s the art of provocation. Once the enemy is provoked, their attack will be easier to read.


    Before the test started, I summoned Victoria in front of me in her Slime form. Even though this is the talking monster that saved her before, Nana ignores her and instead preparing to cast her magic as soon as the match start.


    "If you two are ready, then we will begin the match shortly. Are you ready?" The guild master acted as the referee.


    Nana and I just nodded at his word.


    "Then, the test begins now!"


    Nana quickly put her hands forward as she tried to attack me right away, but I''m faster than her.


    As soon as the guild master announced that the test begun, I kicked the ck Slime in front of me toward Nana.


    Then, as soon as Victoria is in front of Nana, she transformed into a giant ball to block her vision.


    And when Victoria touched her, Victoria enveloped Nana and trapped her inside the ball. There''s nothing she can do inside of the ball.


    "Done! Do we need to wait fifteen minutes? I don''t think she can do anything else anymore." I asked the guild master.


    "Yes. You are right that the test is aboutpleting a quest. I told you to survive for fifteen minutes, so we will wait for fifteen minutes." The guild master said.


    "I think it''s best if you stop the test right now. As you can see, she can no longer able to do anything else. And more importantly, I attacked her trauma instead of her body."


    "Her trauma?"


    After remembering about Nana from Ka, I know that she has a trauma about stuck in a closed space. It''s called ustrophobia. It''s an intense fear of being in a crowded area, or in a locked space.


    I remember her and her party being caved in under the earth. And I also remember how I get them out. I had Victoria caged her party to be inside of her, and I threw took them out.


    Being inside of Victoria again, she must have remembered how it is like being locked in a tight space again, and how the shaking inside of Victoball after I threw them out from the underground.


    "Let me out! Let me out! I can''t stand being here! Get me out of here!"


    And as I expected, she''s panicked. Her trauma resurfaced after being trapped inside Victoball again.


    I think Victoria is trying to calm her down by talking, but she''s too panicked. If we continue like this, she will faint soon.


    "It''s over! Get her out! You passed!" The guild master shouted.


    "There''s still fourteen minutes more though? Did I really pass?"


    "Yes, you passed! Just get her out already!"


    I let Nana out, and she instantly fainted. That was too easy.


    Ka quickly approached her and casted healing magic on her.


    "Was that necessary?" The guild master asked me angrily.


    "Yes. This test is not just about thepletion of the quest, right? You also want to test the ability of the leader. Especially since I''m not the highest ranked in the n. You want to see what I can do. So, if it was the anyone else who will step forward other than me, you will fail the test no matter the result is. So, I stepped forward, and show you how decisive I am as a leader and why I''m the perfect leader of the n. It''s also to show every hunter here that my n is not something they need to mess with. So, how''s the result?"


    "¡­they are all perfect A''s. Including cruelty. Let''s go back to the guild now and I will show you the quest you need to take to be able to build a n."


    With that, the test is over. Anyone else other than me should be able to survive for just fifteen minutes, but I figured out what the guild master is thinking. That''s why I choose to step forward this time.


    Now, what kind of quest will he show us? I don''t think it will be as easy as this test.


    But¡­ I think I stood out too much in this test. Well, at least there''s no cult members among everyone watching. And I haven''t used my Aura at all. Even if I stand out here, I think everyone will forget about me once the n is established, and weplete many difficult quests. They will end up start talking about my other members since I will rarely take a quest.

 Chapter 249 - The Quest

    We returned back to the guild again after the test. Why is the test so far away in the first ce?


    Even if I ended the test too fast, the original mission is just about fifteen minutes, right? Maybe the guild should build an arena somewhere in the city instead.


    Even once we returned to the guild master''s office, the receptionist who was tasked to prepare the quest hasn''t arrive yet. What a problem¡­


    "I''m sorry. It seems that she hasn''t returned yet. Please wait a little longer." The guild master said.


    "Since we have shown our faces, there''s no need to have all of us here, right? Then the three of you can go home first. Roy and I will stay and wait." Ka suggested.


    "Wait! Me too?"


    "Obviously. You''re the leader after all."


    Sigh¡­ I guess that''s true.


    The guild master permitted the other to go home. Now, there''s only four of us here. With Nana who is still fainted. We brought her here since it will cause trouble if we left her unconscious outside.


    "Guild master, you need to build some kind of arena here so we don''t need to go outside." I suggested.


    "That is a good idea, but weck the budget for it. The noble in charge of this city also doesn''t allow us to build arena. He thought that it''s just a waste of money and space." The guild master replied.


    Well, the noble in charge of this city will be changed soon. I think the new guy will allow the arena to be build. And also, since thepetition Albert and I made will bemenced soon, interpersonal battle will be more popr and more people will use the arena.


    There is an arena in this city, but it''s only for the students of magic academy or the introductory school to go to. And it''s only used when they have events like sparring, or practical exam like what I did in school in Melk. I guess the guild can just cooperate with the academy.


    While we are still waiting for the quest, Nana finally awake.


    "This is¡­ the guild?" Nana asked in confusion.


    "Yeah. Sorry if I was too rough, but that''s the easiest way to win that I can think of." I apologized.


    "You! Tsk! I''m leaving this city! I don''t want to meet you ever again!" Nana stormed out the guild in anger.


    I guess locking her in a tight space is too much for her. I''m sorry.


    But I don''t think we will meet again in the future, so goodbye.


    "You are too cruel with your method. But your decisiveness in doing it make you a great leader. That''s why you passed the test. And you are also sharp. You know that I''m testing the leader just because of the mission given. But I think it will be difficult for you to receive any jobs if they found out how cruel you are." The guild master said.


    "I don''t mind. It''s not like I will ept every request given to us. Why don''t you tell us about the quest we will take first?"


    "Alright. Since it will be a while until the request arrive, I''ll tell you about it. It is a request that can only be shown to S-rank hunters, so you won''t find it on the board. The quest is to investigate something."


    "Investigation?" Ka asked in surprise.


    I guess it is indeed surprising. Why would such request can only be taken by S-rank hunters? And why is he giving us this quest?


    "I know that you are confused, but it''s a difficult quest that no one has everpleted. It used to be put on the board to let any hunters of any rank to take, but it''s an unpopr quest. And those who have taken this quest never returned. That''s why we made it so only S-rank hunters able to take on this quest. But no S-rank hunters wanted to take this quest at all. That''s why we asked you to do it."


    "So, what is it that we need to investigate?" I asked.


    "About missing people in a certain vige. The request giver is someone from that vige who is now living in this city. He said that there are multiple cases of missing people in that vige. So, he brought all his family to live in this city because he''s afraid. It''s just an investigation, but if you can take care of the source, the reward will be doubled. Since there are too many hunters disappear after taking this quest, the guild will be responsible for the reward. It has been months since we received this request, but no one able toplete it. We''re in a bind since even the guild''s staff who went to investigate also never returns." The guild master exined.


    "Hmm¡­ what would happen if we refuse to take this test?" I asked.


    "ording to the new rule about n creation, if you refuse to take this quest or fail to finish it, you are banned from building a n for a year."


    "¡­I guess we can''t refuse it then. So, who is the one that gives you this quest? Where does he lives now?"


    "He opened an inn in the residential district. His address is¡­"


    "Alright. Ka, you go and ask him about his vige and the missing people. And also tell the others what kind of mission this is. I''ll wait here."


    "Okay."


    This makes only us two alone in the office. Since we have nothing else to talk about, the guild master returns to his job.


    I have nothing else to do, so I transformed Victoria into a bed so I can sleep.


    "That''s one convenience summon." The guild master said.


    "Just using whatever I have. This one cannot die no matter what I do, so I''ll just use it however I like."


    I didn''t lie. It was from my previous live that I tried to kill Blobby.


    Summoner can get a new monster once their slot is open after the previous monsters died. But Blobby can''t die. That''s why I need to learn to live with the used to be useless ck slime.


    But now, she has be a part of my life. And I also learned the secret of summoning element. There''s no way I would ever want to part with her.


    I think I slept for about an hour when the receptionist finally returns.


    "Why did it take you so long!? Our guest has been sofortable that he''s building a bed!"


    "I''m sorry! But the noble who is in charge of that vige seem to have been caught doing some crime and he''s taken to the prison. I don''t know what to do, so I asked other nobles about it. Seems like someone else wille to substitute him from tomorrow." She said.


    ¡­I guess that''s my fault. That noble should be one of the three that I met that night.


    "Do we need that noble''s permission to go there?"


    "Because of the missing people, he put a checkpoint between that vige and this city to not let anyone pass unless they have received permission. You can take the quest, but you won''t be able to pass that area." The guild master said.


    "Is there only one path? What about flying? Or through the forest instead of the main road?" I asked.


    "Well, you can do that. But the monsters around that area is too strong for normal hunters. I guess it''s fine with you since you have an S-rank hunter. I don''t think you need to get permission to pass that area if you pick different route. Alright! You can take the job."


    "Good. I and some others will leave to that vige first, but we will leave some people in our base. Once you have gotten the permit, just bring it over to our base. I will go through another way, while those who stays will go through the main road once they received the permit. They will give the permit and report about us taking the quest to the guards in the checkpoint. That''s easy, right? No need to waste our time like this." I suggested.


    "Then we''ll do it. I hope you will seed with this mission."


    "Me too."


    I finally left the guild. I should contact Albert so he can quickly send someone here.


    Once I returned home, I told everyone what happened. That it was just a waste of time waiting there. Though I end up napping for an hour.


    "Ka, what do you got?"


    After telling the others that we can take the quest, I asked Ka if she received some information.


    "He said that he doesn''t know what happened. Every night, someone from the vige suddenly disappear. He was the son of the chief. The chief told him to ask the guild for help, and also to have him and his wife to never return to the vige until everything is over. That''s the only thing I got." Ka said.


    "At least that''s something. So, we can conclude that at least the kidnapping only happened at night. Alright. Tomorrow, I will go to that vige and open up a portal for you guys." I said.


    "Wait, Roy! Just because it''s faster that way doesn''t mean it''s good! Don''t take away the fun of travelling!" Kron protested.


    "But¡­" I looked at everyone''s expression. It seems like they agree with Kron. "Fine. We''ll go tomorrow morning by horse carriage. Or maybe wolf carriage. Let''s go there normally."


    We''re now one step closer to the creation of our n, Wolf''s Crown.


    Since there are many hunters that went missing, I guess this mission will be difficult. I told everyone who wille to prepare themselves and get some rest.


    I asked Lina and Ian to stay behind in case the guild''s staffe to give us the permit. As for Lina''s summon, we''ll only bring Sunny with us. Elsie is useful for the protection of the house.

 Chapter 250 - New Skincare Product

    For this quest, we might need the smarter members toe, and some power as well. But Ka said that she will stay at home, so I will Jewel. It will be her first mission, so she needs to gain experience. That''s why she will be assisted by Sunny who will watch over her.


    Other than Jewel, Kron insist ining. In fact, even if I told him not to, he will just fly over to that vige alone.


    After that is Candy. Since she was a former agent of the kingdom, investigating is one thing she excel.


    I think those three alone should be enough to handle the mission. They can contact those standing by with Sonia in case of danger after all. But Celestine insist ining as well. Just like Jewel, it will be her first mission as well. As for Veronica, she thought that it''s enough to have one expert level mage going.


    I also went to Monsters World to ask if there are any Werewolves willing to be used to pull carriage. But they are too prideful to do it, so I guess there won''t be any Wolf carriage. But Shelia wille in her human form.


    "Well, good luck you five! And a flower! I''ll wish you all the best!" I waved my hand to say farewell to the ones taking the mission.


    "You''re going with them as well! Why are you acting as if you''re not going!?" Shirleyined.


    "I mean people went missing, right? That''s scary. I''ll just stay at home." I said.


    "Rejected. If you stay, I will confiscate your money and I will ask Lina and Ian to not cook for you during the duration of the quest." Sophie said.


    "Why!?"


    ¡­somehow, Sophie has be scarier and scarier. What the hell happened to her? Is it my fault? Probably it''s my fault.


    As expected, when good girls go with bad boys, they will turn bad as well. But I''m a good boy!


    "With your eyes, it''s easier for the job to bepleted. That''s why you have no choice but to go." This time, it''s Ka who ordered me.


    Having no other choice, I left home with the other to take the quest.


    I wanted to take it easy today, but I guess that''s impossible.


    I got the horse carriage from Sam, and left the city toward the vige where missing people are reported from. It should take us one day with horse carriage to get there. As expected, flying is much faster. But at least I can take it easy inside the carriage.


    We used the main road for a while, then once we get close to the checkpoint, I left alone. I sneaked past the checkpoint and open up a portal so the whole carriage can enter.


    "In the end, we still need to use portal." I sighed.


    "At least we can take it easy. There hasn''t been any sighting of monsters so far. But after the checkpoint, there should be some dangerous monsters. We need to prepare to fight." Candy said.


    "So, how long will it take for us to go there?" I asked again.


    "At this pace, we should be able to reach there after lunch tomorrow. On the map, we should be able to reach ins which should be a good ce for camping." Jewel said as she looks over at the map.


    "I see. Jewel, prepare for battle. Monsters areing. They are just boars, so you should be able to handle them alone. Shelia, prepare to support her just in case."


    I can see several boars ahead. Probably about five of them. We will encounter them soon, so I asked Jewel to prepare.


    "Why can''t it be me who will fight!? I want to fight!" Sheliained.


    "Fine¡­ there''s a lot of monsters, but none of them are in front of us. You can fight them. You know their location, right?"


    "Yeah, I can smell them. Then, I''m off!"


    "Just don''t fight any monsters ahead! They will be for Jewel."


    "I know!"


    Then, Shelia left the carriage to enjoy fighting some monsters. Werewolf is such a battle addict monster. Good thing I have became their king.


    "You can see that far? Even with my sense as an Expert level mage can''t sense that far. I can only detect some monsters nearby. I heard that your eyes can see through things as well. Have you been enjoying the sightstely?" Celestine asked.


    Oh no! She noticed! What should I say to make her forgive me?


    "Pretty much. This is useful as a doctor, though I''m still not one at the moment. I can see your internal organs are working perfectly. I think you will live a long life if you''re this healthy."


    I hope she will be distracted by my medical skill. Although my memory suck, It''s just mostly about people''s names and faces. Not about the knowledge I learned.


    "Really? That''s good. I always take care of my body and my skin. Especially now that I''m surrounded by younger girls, I''m conscious about my skin." Celestine said.


    Good job, me! The topic changed to skincare! Now, I can let someone else handle it.


    "If it''s about skincare, then Victoria is the best to ask." I said as Victoria talk in her slime form.


    "Huhu¡­ skincare and women can''t be separated! Although I''m a slime and can transform to anything I want, I''m still learning how to take care of myself!" Victoria said.


    "Then, what else should I do? I think I have done everything to take care of my skin." Celestine asked. Candy also interested in learning.


    Looking at her, I don''t think that Celestine is any older than the girls. Probably younger than Penny. I never ask and I don''t dare to ask. If she thinks she''s a bit older than the others, I guess that means she''s doing a great job in taking care of her body.


    What about Veronica then? Is she the same age as Celestine? Or is it the effect of reaching expert level?


    Victoria then exins all kind of necessary things for skincare.


    "Ah! I''m d there''s someone older with us! Ruby and Penny doesn''t seem to care about it, but finally, I meet someone who understands!" Victoria said happily.


    "Why are you so excited?" I asked curiously.


    "Because of my past! In my world, the city I lived in has a lot of pollution. That''s why as a woman, I need to take care of my skin even from my teenage years. But here, there were almost no pollution at all young girls don''t need to care about it. But as expected, older woman still cares about her beauty!"


    ¡­again, what the hell is wrong with her world?


    Long distancemunication even better than using Sonia, her hobbies, technologies, knowledge, everything is much more advanced than here.


    From what I heard, the people in that world lives as if they are in a hurry. It''s as if everyone ispeting which one invent better things.


    "Oh, I also made something with my clones. If you put them in your face like a mask, I can have them to absorb all kind of dirt unnoticed with naked eyes like dust or dirt. It will make your skin shinier. It''s still under experiment, but if you want to try it, please do!" Victoria promoting her product.


    Absorbing dirt on my face? That seems like a money-making product.


    With my Divine Vision, I can see that although from the outside it''s seems normal, most people have dust covered their faces. The dust is so small and stuck on our faces, and even if we wash our face with water, it will still be there.


    "Victoria, I''ll take one now. I''ll use it right away. I can see if the dirt on my face will be absorbed or not." I said.


    "Here! Please give me the review about this after you''re done!"


    "Master! Should I take one as well!?" Jewel asked.


    "You''re still young, so you don''t need to mind about your skin yet. But if it can really absorb dust and dirt, you can use it. For now, take care of those boars first. You can see them now, right?"


    I put on the Blobbymask while Jewel leave the carriage. Kron is the one driving the carriage and he stopped so we can watch Jewel fight.


    I often had Blobbymask over my face, but it''s the first time I feel that they are doing something on my skin. I guess back then, they were just for show. Used only for its purpose, which is to cover my face. Not to clean my skin.


    With this, I can have glowing skin on my face! Maybe.


    "Master, look at me!"


    Jewel said to me, and transform into her rhino form. Not the hybrid one. I don''t think there''s any usefulness in her hybrid form at the moment, that''s why her rhino form is much better.


    And as she charged forward in her rhino form, she enveloped herself with lightning.


    The boar in front of her died in an instant, but since it''s difficult for her to maneuver in that form, she only got one hit. That''s why with the lightning around her body, as long as the boar hit her body, they will be shocked by lightning. And she will turn back and defeat the other boars after passing them all.


    And that''s how Jewel finished defeating all the boars. She returned to the carriage along with Shelia who has also finished her side.


    "Good job, you two. Let''s go so we can get to the camping spot sooner."


    We continue moving toward the vige, while I''m still wondering about Jewel. Her defense might be greater now, but the opponent we''ll be facing in the future are mages from the cult.


    If the enemies are earth mages, she can endure their attack. But what about other elements? She might still be able to protect herself for a while, but that''s it.


    Maybe it''s better if she''s the one with that fis stocking¡­


    As for the Blobbymask¡­ they will be one time use product that can only be sold in Cassau. I''m going to get more money!

 Chapter 251 - Invisible Barrier

    The day after we departed, we are soon about to arrive at the vige. That''s where I see some anomalies.


    "I think I can see the vige of our destination. But something is very weird there.


    Everything seems¡­ normal from the outside. Just the outside.


    Let''s check the map just in case.


    "Jewel, I can see a vige. Is that the destination we''re going to?"


    Jewel has the map, so I asked her.


    She''s smart enough to read a map. I can as well, but I''m just confirming it with her.


    "Yes, it is! If we go straight this road, we will reach that vige! Finally, my first mission!" Jewel said happily.


    "And it might also be our most difficult mission so far." I said.


    "Hmm? Roy, what do you see with those eyes of yours?" It was Candy who asked.


    "I can''t say anything conclusive as of now. Let''s move forward until I can see more. Let''s stop right now and move forward on foot. I''ll send back the carriage to Cassau. Shelia, scout ahead for us. Make sure no one notice you, and tell me what you can see or smell."


    "Alright. I''m going."


    Shelia left the carriage and move forward alone. I''m sure her sense of smell and my Divine Vision has simr range, but the fact that she hadn''t reported anything mean she didn''t find anything suspicious.


    Then, Kron stopped the carriage and I sent it back to Cassau. The horses were slightly panicked when they see a portal, but enter it anyway after I start pulling their reins.


    "Roy, what is so strange about the vige?" Candy asked curiously.


    "There are several things that bother me. First, there are a lot of people in that vige. Unlike what the quest says, there don''t seem to be any missing people. In fact, the number of the people is more than the house. There are about sixty people in that vige, and only twenty houses. But the numbers of adult alone are more than forty. Even if they are married and live together, the number doesn''t match." I said.


    "What does that mean?" Celestine asked.


    "It means that the vige can''t provide housing to everyone in that vige. My guess is that the hunters who went for this mission are among them as well. And somehow, they are unable to leave. I''m afraid that if we enter unprepared, we might be unable to leave as well. Especially with the thing that bother me the most."


    "What is it? Is it rted to why they are unable to escape?" Celestine asked.


    After leaving the cult, she experienced many things and has be more and more curious about things she doesn''t knows. I''m d that we have someone powerful who wants to learn. Unlike a certain future Elemental Master who hate learning.


    "All of the people in that vige, the whole organs inside their body, even their blood, are ck. That''s not the color of living human''s inner organs. I''m scared that if we enter that vige, we might end up like that." I said.


    What kind of thing able to turns human body like that? This is getting scary.


    "Roy, our mission is just to investigate. We don''t need to solve the problem."


    Candy reminds me of our mission.


    "I know, but I want to make sure that whatever is happening to them won''t happen in Cassau as well. I''m fine with sending Shelia since I can summon her here any time I want. I''m making sure that she''s staying within my sight. Hmm? I think I found someone familiar."


    I said when I somehow managed to see two women that I think I have met before.


    "Oh, great. Now, it''s a guessing game. Since Ka isn''t here, I guess it''s my turn to guess who it is." Victoria said.


    So, she actually makes my inability to remember stranger''s faces and names as a game, huh? Well, as long as I find out who they are, I guess it''s fine.


    But for those two, I remember the situation we met. So, it''s not really a game for her.


    "Victoria, there are two girls that look familiar. Those two are together with Nana when they were being caved in under the destroyed dungeon. The two that actually said thanks to us." I said.


    Good thing that yesterday I remember about Nana and her party. If it was not for yesterday''s test, I won''t remember these two at all.


    "Oh, then they are Jessica and Ellen. Don''t you remember, Ellen is the one we''re together with when we first entered a dungeon near Cassau?" Victoria asked.


    "I just remember it. If not yesterday''s meeting with Nana, I would not remember at all. Oh? Shelia doesn''t seem to be able to get closer to the vige. Something is wrong with that vige."


    Just like I said, Shelia seem to not be able to get closer. It''s like something is blocking her. Something invisible. But I don''t see anyone casting a barrier. Is it not magic?


    Then, Shelia called Sonia. She''s saying something to Sonia while pointing toward the vige. Then Sonia tried to go there as well, but she fails. What the hell is wrong?


    I opened up a portal toward a Blobby that I gave to Shelia and asked her without entering the portal.


    "Shelia, Sonia, what happened?"


    "There seem to be something near the vige. It makes us unable to go further." Sonia exined.


    "Is that so? Victoria, try to get some Blobbies over there."


    I ordered Victoria to have some Blobbies enter the invisible barrier. And just like with Shelia and Sonia, none of the Blobbies are able to enter.


    "Does anyone sense something strange?"


    "Yeah. There''s nothing blocking us, but something is preventing us to get closer. Before you open the portal, I didn''t sense anything. But now, I can sense it slightly. Whatever it is, it can make Blobbies that doesn''t even have any intellect to stop even if you order them." Victoria said.


    "Hmm¡­ what about you guys?" I asked the others.


    "Nothing strange here." Kron answered first.


    "Same!" Next is Jewel.


    "Hmm¡­ whatever it is, it''s not magic." Celestine said.


    None of the humans able to sense anything strange. What about Sunny who''s wrapping her vines around Jewel?


    She shakes her leaves. That''s Sunny''s reaction.


    "Does it mean you sensed something, Sunny?" I asked the sunflower.


    This time, the flowerhead nodded.


    "I see¡­ That mean, whatever it is, it only affects monsters. I guess for now, it will be us humans who will enter. You will keep watch on the surrounding." I said as we entered the portal.


    As soon as everyone entered the portal and get near the invisible barrier, I close the portal.


    "If this barrier is really something that block a monster from passing, it does make sense that those inside that vige are unable to leave. And that mean¡­ we''re facing a really bad situation."


    "Just bad, right? Not the worst?" Victoria asked.


    "Worst is if it''s something that will get me killed. I don''t see anything like that at the moment, and I can still use portal multiple more times. If there''s any danger inside the vige, we''ll escape with portal to this ce."


    "And what is that bad situation?" Jewel asked.


    "Well, since it''s only monsters that can pass this barrier, that mean everyone inside that vige is no longer humans."


    Everyone is shocked by my deduction. But it''s true.


    It has been a few months since the mission was given to the guild, but everyone is inside the vige alive albeit no longer human. And I can''t see any well or water source in that vige! If they need water, they need to pass where we are right now since there is a river behind us.


    That mean¡­ they no longer have any need for water. Or maybe, even food.


    "Alright everyone, it''s nning time. What should we do?"


    "Roy, how about forcing the Blobbies to enter? If you force them, they might enter the vige." Victoria suggested.


    "Let''s try it. Give me three Blobbies."


    Once Victoria created three clones, I threw each Blobby into the invisible barrier with different strength so the location they willnd is different.


    The first throw is the closest one. Just ten meters. The second is thirty meters. The third one is over fifty meters.


    The first Blobby, quickly trying to get back here. And so is the second Blobby.


    As for the furthest Blobby, it''s trying to get away from here. I guess it''s closer to go over there than over here.


    I keep watching the Blobby until it stopped. And that''s about 80 meters from here.


    "I guess monsters are still able to get there. But they have to be forced to." I said.


    "But we can go there if you open a portal inside so we don''t need to pass this barrier. I have to go there so I can talk with Ellen and Jessica since I''m closer to those two than you. If we are still able tomunicate with them, we will ask them what happened." Victoria said.


    Hmm¡­ I guess those two are someone we can trust better than other people in the vige.


    Wait! I have better idea!


    "How about we go there, try tomunicate, and then we will bring some of them back to Cassau so the guild can examine what''s wrong with them? Then our mission is done, and we can leave the rest to the guild." I suggested.


    "Wait! Why just some of them? What about the other people inside!? You want them to stay there?" Kron protested.


    "We don''t know what happened to them. What if it''s some kind of contagious disease? It''s dangerous if we brought all of them when we don''t know much about them. Let''s just bring those two girls and some vigers to the guild. We''ll use portal so we can get back faster. I''ll try to make them sleep with my sleeping gas so they won''t know that I can use portal. Sonia, tell the others that we no longer need the permit."

 Chapter 252 - Bringing Back Some People To Cassau

    After carefully making up the n, I open a portal to the inside of the barrier where the thrown Blobby was waiting. Though after this, I told the others that we will go back home with the kidnapped people¡­ I mean people who we will bring back to Cassau.


    "Alright, we''re in. Now, let''s go and talk with Ellen and Jessica about the situation in this vige and their condition. How did they be this way? But don''t let down your guard since whatever it is that cause them to change, might happen to us. It might be unnecessary, but I will use my air magic on you all so you don''t need to take a breath just in case. Let me and Victoria do the talking. And I don''t know how far the range of my magic is, so don''t get too far from me." I exined to the others.


    Everyone nodded in agreement. From now on, only Victoria and I will speak. I just hope that whatever cause this won''t affect Victoria as well since she''s already a monster.


    And I am not forgetting to cover my whole body with Aura. This way, my chance of survival will be higher.


    Now, about how we should make contact with Ellen¡­ I''ll just throw Victoria toward her direction. I hope we can stillmunicate.


    This is getting scarier and scarier. Especially since everyone seems lifeless. They are all have despaired expression. I even see some people in the furthest house from here died. They have knives stabbed through their hearts. They choose to kill themselves.


    I''m just d that there are still many people who didn''t choose to take their own lives.


    I also don''t see any food remains in the vige. They don''t need either water or food. Just like Victoria.


    Wait! Those ck inner organs look simr to Victoria! Don''t tell me that it''s an experiment to create ck slime or turning someone into a ck Slime? Or is it that their inner organs turned into a monster?


    "Victoria, their inner organs seem simr to you. I''m afraid that they might be ck Slimes just like you. If so, that mean these former humans need those ck Slimes inside their bodies to live. It''s just a spection, so you need to get them talk first. I''ll throw you toward Ellen right now. I''ll leave everything to you. We''ll wait here and guard this ce. As for the others, don''t touch anyone yet other than Ellen although I know you will be fine. Make sure to keep your distance from the infected people."


    Everyone''s expression turned into shock as I exined about this nightmare in reality in front of us. I hope I''m wrong.


    "Are you ready?" I asked Victoria before I throw her.


    "Yes."


    "Then, good luck."


    I threw Victoria right toward Ellen. She''s just sitting there lifeless without any expression, right next to Jessica.


    Ellen was surprised that something suddenly dropped on her head, then she was so happy when Victoria said something to her. But to not raise any suspicion, Victoria covered Ellen''s mouth.


    Jessica was also surprised, but she held her breathe to not leak any noise. Then the two girls, with Victoria on top of Ellen''s head, entered one of the houses in the middle of the vige, with only one old man inside of it.


    They talked for a while and then the old man asked someone to enter the house. A woman and a kid who might be her son. Those two, Ellen, and Jessica are the people we will bring to Cassau. I told her that they need to be examined once they''re at Cassau. And there might be some risk as well.


    While waiting for them to return, I''ll go check on their body. I thought everything was ck, but I was wrong. Their blood is ck, but the rest of their organs are only covered by ck coating. The real color of their hearts, brains, lungs, and everything else are still normal.


    But if their blood is ck¡­ it might spread to all organs inside their body, and their organ will turn ck for real. I can see some vigers'' organs have turned ck instead of just a ck coating.


    Those who choose to kill themselves, have some of the corpses have their eyes turned ck. Even their tongues are ck as well. They must be people who get this kind of condition early.


    But what about missing people? Are they being returned here?


    And then, Victoria and four others returned to our location. Sneakily so that no one will get suspicious. And if they know that we might be able to get them out of here, all of them will fight for that.


    "Roy, we''re here!" Victoria said.


    "Okay. Celestine, do you sense anything odd?"


    I asked Celestine. Her sense might be able to notice something I don''t. But she just shook her head.


    "Alright. Let''s get out of here before anyone noticed you''re gone. But before that, I''m sorry for the inconvenience."


    I have Victoria create a lot of Clones, and have them wrapped around the four''s bodies without a single gap. I made sure that they can still breathe as well. I tried to make them sleep with sleeping gas, but it doesn''t seem to work.


    "Victoria, what about the missing people?"


    "They have returned. But after they returned, some other people went missing as well. Until finally everyone went missing, and everyone has returned. It''s crazy. I feel like this is some kind of crazy experiment. Once the mad scientist is done with the experiment, they returned these people back to the vige. No one remembers how they end up disappearing, and suddenly returned." Victoria exined what she discussed with Ellen and the others.


    "I see. That mean at least there are no more missing people. But we can''t bring them to Cassau. Let''s have them somewhere outside the city and have the guild master himself toe. All of you, put these on your hands."


    I gave everyone some Blobbies and turned them into gloves. It''s better than to touch these infected people directly.


    Although the four people who, we will bring back to Cassau are unable to sleep because of my sleeping gas, they are still unable to see, hear, smell, and talk at all. Thanks to the Blobbies wrapped around them.


    Now it looks like we carried four body bags. Although they are wriggling around. Sorry¡­


    I opened up a portal close to the city. It''s in the forest, so I cut down all the trees nearby.


    "Celestine, with your earth magic, build a building to iste these four. And made just one door that any earth mage can open. No need for window since I''ll be making sure that no one will run out of air here. As for Jewel and Kron, you three will exin the situation to the guild master and bring him here. Candy will report this to Albert. I''ll open up a portal now."


    Celestine quickly build a dome-shaped building about the size of the dining room in my house.


    Then after sending Candy away, I quickly called Sonia to tell Lina to summon Sunny back to her. I also summoned Shelia since these two are waiting outside the barrier near the vige.


    After summoning Shelia, I told her that it''s over and she can go back to Monsters World.


    "Oh, right! I forgot!"


    I called Sonia again to tell Albert toe so I can examine these four. With his permission, I will be able to do it even without medical license.


    "You''re going to examine them yourself? I thought that once you tell the guild master, the quest is over?" Celestine asked.


    "Yes. The quest is over. But I need to know what happened to them. You can go back now. Or do you want to stay?"


    "I''ll stay. I''m also curious what happened to them."


    Then, Sonia returns. Telling us that Albert is ready toe. I guess that mean he''s not busy today. Which is good.


    "Roy, Candy told me everything. What happened?" Albert asked me as soon as he arrive with portal.


    "For now, wear these gloves." I gave him another pair of Blobbygloves.


    "Mask as well. Although you''re making everyone able to breathe with your magic, a mask might be necessary." Victoria said.


    "Okay. Albert, do you know any powerful healing mage? We might need one. If you know anyone with advanced level healing magic, call them. If not, I''ll just ask Ka toe." I asked.


    "I know one, but I don''t know if I can trust that person. Thest time we talked was long before I met you. For now, let''s have Ka toe here. If she can''t do anything to these infected people, I''ll try contacting that person."


    Then soon enough, Kron returns while bringing the guild master, the receptionist girl from before, Nana, and also someone I don''t know.


    "Kron, who is he?"


    "He''s the guy from that vige that lives in Cassau after giving the quest. He might know something so I brought him here since he was in the guild." Kron said.


    "Alright. Now, quick introduction. Guild master, King. King, guild master." I quickly introduced Albert to the guild master as I gave the neers Blobbymasks and Blobbygloves.


    "We''ve met before, right? Nice to meet you." Albert said.


    "Y-y-y-your majesty! It''s an honor to see you here!" The guild master quickly kneeled in front of Albert, followed by the other three who are confused to see the king in this ce.


    Even Nana who seems angry when she arrived here, look respectful toward Albert.


    "No worries. For now, can you exin about the quest?"

 Chapter 253 - The Mission Is Over, But The Danger Isnt

    The guild master and the man from the vige exined to Albert about the quest we took. After that, I let Celestine open the dome-shaped building she just made and let everyone enters. Once everyone enters, she closed the door.


    I also called Ka toe here. But she can open the dome herselfter.


    "Alright. All of you need to put on these masks and gloves. And keep your distance in case it''s contagious." I said to everyone.


    "You told me that there''s some unknown condition affecting the vigers and the hunters that didn''t return from the mission. What is it?" The guild master asked while still trying to be careful in front of Albert.


    "For now, keep your distance from them and don''t touch them. I''ll show you their condition." I said.


    "Roy, these people are alive, right? I can see them struggling inside these bags. I think it''s better if you just brought back some of the corpses from that vige so you can do some autopsy without being afraid of any side effect to the victims." Albert suggested.


    Right! I forgot to do that! Let''s tell them a little lie.


    "You''re right. I have brought some corpses from that vige. I put them somewhere else. I''ll go grab them in a bit. For now, I''ll get their head out of the bag first. That way, you can ask them question and tell them why we treated them this way. Victoria."


    I ordered Victoria to get those Blobbies to open the body bags only on the head area. There''s one child here, so I think I''m too cruel to let a kid be treated this way. But I''m just being careful. I''ll apologizeter.


    Before the body bags opened, Celestine let me out of the dome and I open a portal directly to that vige, sneakily enter that vige and trespass into a house with a lot of corpses, wrap one of them with Blobbies and bring it back to the dome. When Celestine noticed my return, she let me in.


    The duration of when I left was so fast that the air inside the dome hasn''t decreased much. The longest time the air I produce canst without needing me to cast a magic and when there are other people is about fifteen minutes. And I just left for about two minutes.


    "I''m back. Here''s the corpse." I dropped the corpse on top of a bed made of y.


    "You''re too fast. I had just finished introducing myself and telling them why they are treated this way. So, whose corpse is it?" Albert asked.


    "I don''t know. He should be thetest one to die."


    "Ah! He''s the first hunter I sent for this mission! A C-rank hunter!" The receptionist girl said.


    "I see. From the look of it, he died by stabbing himself in the heart. Now, I will proceed to do the autopsy. It might be a little graphic, so Celestine will build a wall between the surgery room and the four victims I brought back."


    "Wait! Before that, you need to exin what happened in that vige first." It was Nana who asked me to exins. She''s a senior so I guess she''s right.


    "First, that vige is surrounded by something invisible. Like an invisible barrier. Am I right?" I asked the four victims.


    "Right. None of us able to get outside the vige. It seems like something is preventing us to escape from that vige. Whenever we tried to pass it, there is some kind of feeling that makes us think that it''s dangerous to go further. Like an instinct that stopped us from moving forward." Ellen exined.


    "Yeah. I''m a summoner so I know that''s the case since I tried to let the monsters from our n to enter first. We have another summoner in the n, you know? Then when I tried to pass it, I can do it just fine." I lied.


    I didn''t try to pass it. I just threw a Blobby to pass the barrier and transport to that side with portal. And of course, Albert is the only one who knows it since he can detect lies.


    "That''s right. We can enter the vige just fine. But once we''re inside, I felt that I was attacked by someone and fell unconscious. When I woke up, I can no longer escape from the vige. That''s also the case with other vigers and the hunters as well." Ellen exined.


    "But I didn''t see anyone that can attack us. And Celes over there is an expert level mage who can detect a presence of anything that has magic. Either they are humans or monsters. She told me that there''s no one other than the vigers nearby. And she said that the barrier is not made of magic. I thought that it will cause problem if I appear in the vige, so I sneaked in and grabbed only these people and bring them here."


    I used Celestine''s nickname she used for registering as a hunter.


    "She''s an expert level mage!? But she''s just an E-rank!" The guild master was shocked when they heard that someone nearby is an expert level.


    "Why do you think that I have the king himself as my sponsor? And don''t leak this information to anyone. This is a secret, okay?" I said while putting my index finger in front of my lips.


    Everyone nodded. Followed by Albert himself. He nodded not in agreement, but telling me that they didn''t lie.


    "Before that, don''t you think these treatments of the victims are too inhumane? They are my sister and my nephew!" The man who gave the quest said.


    "So, she''s your sister? That doesn''t matter. We need to know that whatever affecting them is contagious or not. It will be dangerous if a city as big as Cassau is affected by this. For now, Ellen, can you tell us your symptoms?"


    "Hmm¡­ I don''t feel anything weird at all. But because no one can leave the vige, the supply of food and water has diminished. But the weird thing is that we can stay alive without needing water, food, or sleep." Ellen said.


    "And since all of you are unable to leave the invisible barrier that only monsters cannot pass, do you think that you have be monsters?"


    Hearing my question, everyone is shocked. That''s the obvious reaction to have.


    "That is why I need to restraint you and make sure that this is not contagious. I will also need to examine your condition and see if it''s something that can be cured. Ellen, you just need to be patient and wait until I figure out what causes this. And the people from that vige needs to exin everything that happened in that vige from before the mission as well. Hmm? Seems like she''s here."


    As soon as I said that, the earth dome is opened and Ka entered while carrying my medical kit.


    I''m not a doctor yet. I still haven''t received my medical license. But getting a medical kit somehow is an easy feat. Anyone can buy it. Medical license was only necessary to get a job in a big hospital, or anywhere in the city. In the countryside like I did in my past life, there''s no need for a license. As long as you can be called a doctor, everyone will choose to trust you for their health.


    ¡­just shows how low people''s intellects are.


    "Roy, what do I need to do?" Ka asked after greeting everyone. She''s serious in helping since Ellen is her friend.


    "For now, just watch me doing the autopsy for the corpse. If you see anything odd, tell me. I might have missed it even with my vision. We might be able to cure them from this condition." I said to Ka. Telling her to be my assistant.


    "Guild master. While he''s at it, we need to discuss what we need to do with that vige. We''re lucky that the previous noble in charge of this area isted that vige and put checkpoints in the main road toward that vige. Although he did it out of fear. We need some sample of whatever it is that causes monsters to be unable to get in or out of that vige. I will discuss it with the next person in charge to not let up the istion at the moment. As for the sample¡­ how about I give you a quest for some hunters to do it?" Albert said while I opened up the body of the corpse with Blobbyscalpel.


    "But your majesty, who will go there? I think this mission will be too dangerous even for S-rank hunters." The guild master asked.


    "Then I will submit a request to Roy''s n. He can do it. Right, Roy?"


    "Hey! I''m busy now!"


    "After you''re done with this obviously."


    He knows that I can protect my body with Aura. That''s why he thinks that whatever causes this, I won''t get affected as long as I cover my body with Aura and use air magic to breath. I hate it when someone knows me too much and ask me to do too many things.


    "You still have one more year of break, right? Do you want me to put this quest on hold untilter or you want to finish this as soon as possible?" Albert asked.


    "Obviously the faster the better. Put some huge reward for me. By the way guild master, with this my quest is over, right? Did we seed?"


    "Umm¡­" The guild master doesn''t know what to say. Just say that the quest ispleted! It''s just an investigation after all.


    "I think it is. Your job is to investigate, right? and you have investigated it enough to tell that vige is dangerous. Am I right, guild master?"


    "Your majesty is right! From today, your n will be acknowledged by the guild!" the guild master proimed.


    Good. That mean, after taking care of this conditions the vigers had, I will have more breaks.


    But for now, the content of this corpse''s body is more important. I''ll think about the nter.

 Chapter 254 - Another Black Slime?

    "Alright, it''s done!"


    I said as I finally peeled off all the ck coating inside the corpse and putting them in a ss case.


    After peeling off the coating, the corpse''s internal organ looks just like a normal human''s organs.


    I even split the skull of the corpse so I can peel its brain''s coating. As for the organ that have been infected, like the corpse''s eyeball, there''s nothing I can do. Even Ka''s healing magic doesn''t seem to have any effect on the corpse, or the victims.


    "How is it, Roy?" Albert asked.


    "ording to Ellen''s information and what I can see from the corpse, I don''t think that it''s contagious. You will no longer need those gloves and masks, and the infected people no longer needed to be restrained. But you four are still need to stay here."


    I had Victoria release the restraints on the four infected can now move on their own. I don''t need to carry them any longer.


    "So, you four were either attacked by an unknown person or drugged, right? Though that might be untrue since we won''t really know the answer until we find the perpetrator. At the very least, we know how to cure you from this disease."


    "Really!? Please, help them!" It was Nana who asked for help.


    "Whoa! Why is it you that asking me? Aren''t you the terrible leader of a party who couldn''t handle her own party and have everyone else leave? And are you fine staying in this building? What about Ellen and Jessica?"


    Those three were trapped in a dungeon before. That mean Nana might not be the only one with ustrophobia.


    "As long as there are other people, I''m fine." Nana answered.


    "I was a bit afraid when you suddenly restrained me, but I''m fine." This time, it''s Ellen.


    "Although I was trapped back then, I don''t have any fear of closed space. I was just surprised that you somehow suddenly restrained me without a single gap." Jessica said.


    I guess they are fine here.


    As for the two vigers, the sister of the quest giver is hugging her child and the quest giver is hugging them. I''m sorry, what I said was a lie. I still don''t know if it''s contagious or not. That''s why I had you approach them on purpose. At least I know that as long as you don''t touch the ck thingy directly, it won''t spread.


    But from the look of it, you are still fine. That mean touching won''t spread it.


    And Albert is looking at me slightly angry. I know he must have noticed my lie.


    "Don''t look at me like that. You also did it before." I said to Albert.


    What I meant is the fact that he let the stampede happened on purpose and letting many people died as the result. Just to show the people that we have an enemy that we need to fight against.


    We''re both guilty here.


    "Sigh¡­ how will you cure them?" Albert asked.


    "Whatever I do, it will just be an experiment for the first time. So, there might be danger in it. And it might not be one hundred percent recovery as well. You''re a smart king, so you should have realized what I will do after seeing me doing the autopsy, right?"


    "¡­you''re saying that the ck coatings are needed to be peeled off, right? But what about the brain? Are you telling me that you need to cut their skull?" Albert asked.


    "Probably. But first, there''s another thing we have to try first. Look at this."


    I showed everyone about the ck coating that I peeled off inside a ss case.


    "What about it?" the guild master asked.


    "Now, Victoria, create some clones."


    Victoria made some Blobbies and I put some of them on the ground and only picked one. Then with one hand on a Blobby, and the other in a ss case, everyone can see what I mean.


    "They look the same! Are they ck Slimes as well?" Albert asked.


    "Probably. That''s what I will experiment. If it''s a ck Slime, can you absorb them into you, Victoria?"


    "So that''s how you intend to help them! You want me to absorb the ck coating without having you to cut off their skulls, right? You want me to see if I can absorb them from any ce?" Victoria noticed what I wanted her to do.


    "That''s right. But that''s the most difficult part. For now, let''s see if you can absorb it or not."


    Instead of Victoria, I had the Blobby to do it. If the clones can do it, it will be easier for me to cure the infected.


    I put the Blobby on the ss case as well, and I can see little by little that the Blobby is absorbing the ck coating.


    During the operation, I used Blobbies as my surgery tools. But they won''t absorb it on their own, only when either I or Victoria made them to.


    "Oh! It''s absorbing¡­ that thing! Does it mean¡­" The guild master and everyone watching was surprised seeing that the Blobby I had can absorb those ck coating.


    "That''s right. It means that this thing is also ck Slime. And since it can be absorbed by my summon''s clones, we can assume that these ck Slime is either weaker than mine, or the weaker clones of the real body. So, is there any ck Slime in your vige?" I asked the vigers.


    The two adults shook their heads. But the kid one shouted as if he remembered something.


    "I remember! I see that the old beggar in the vige sometime would y with a ck ball like that! When we asked if we could y with that ball, the beggar was so angry at us!" The kid said.


    "Beggar? Is he a summoner?" I asked the adults vigers.


    They looked at each other and shook their heads.


    "We don''t know. It was about two years ago when he suddenly appears in the vige. We don''t know where he sleeps at night either and he never seems to work." The man said.


    "Oh! Because he was never registered as a viger, no one really cares about him. But I never see him in the past few months. Don''t tell me that he''s the one responsible for this!?" The woman asked.


    Hmm¡­ there''s a high chance that he''s a summoner. But to think that there''s another ck Slime as well.


    "Victoria, has Javier told you if there are other ck Slimes either in this world or the Monsters World?"


    "No. There should be no other ck Slimes. Unless¡­" Victoria hesitates to continue.


    "Unless what?"


    "Unless back then, a long time ago, Javier made some clones of himself, and he forgot about it. Then once he became a contracted monster, that clone of his is counted as separate from his body. That''s why it''s weaker than me. Whether it''s true or not, the fact is that there''s only one true ck Slime. Which is me. That''s what Javier told me. You know what power ck Slime has, so if there are other ck Slime¡­ you know, right?"


    Victoria stopped from speaking anymore because there are other people here. But Albert, Ka, and I understand what she meant.


    The biggest power of a ck Slime is its ability to go back to the past. I don''t know how Javier has the confidence in saying that there''s only one ck Slime, but it''s true that anything with the power to turns back in time is dangerous.


    "Well, I''ll leave the discussion forter. For now, we can be clear that Victoria and her clones are able to absorb the ck coating in the infected people''s body. We can easily cure them. But about the blood, they are ck already. Even if we cure the organs, the infected might still die because of the ck blood. That''s why whoever want to be the first person to be cured will have to risk their lives. I need to absorb the ck coating carefully while making sure that the blood will turn red. Ka, when you try to heal Ellen, her blood turned red for a while. I need your help in carefully healing only some area so their blood will turn back to red while Victoria absorb the ck coating. We need to work together. So, is there anyone willing to volunteer for the first operation?"


    Hearing that they need to risk their lives, they hesitate to do it. And the young kid is being hugged by his mom. I don''t intend to do it to the kid on the first try. And it will be cruel to do it to his mother while the kid is waiting. That means there''s only either Ellen or Jessica left.


    "I''ll do it." Jessica volunteer first.


    "Are you sure? You might die? How about we grab some other people from that vige so he can experiment on them?" Nana suggested.


    "I don''t need you to worry about me. I''m no longer a hunter who needed every little advice from you anymore." Jessica said.


    Whatever happened with the former dius, is not my problem. They can take care of it themselves.


    "Alright. Jessica, take off your clothes. Celestine, build a wall so no one can see her stripping. But Jessica, during the operation, at least the king will need to see it for himself if it works or not. And obviously, I will as well. Since my sleeping gas is not working on you, you will have to stay conscious at all time. That mean when I cut open your body, you might feel pain. Please endure it as much as possible."


    Now, it''s time for my first surgery after returning back in time.


    The autopsy didn''t count.

 Chapter 255 - Surgery Done

    Before I begun performing the surgery, while Jessica is stripping on the other side of the wall, Albert approached me.


    "Roy, do you really need to cut open her body?" Albert asked.


    "Not really. But I''m trying to keep my see-through ability as a secret. I can inject Victoria or Blobbies into Jessica''s body, and absorb the ck coating with them. I can see the result with my eyes directly, but no one would be able to do it. It will be suspicious if I told the others that the surgery is done when others are unable to see anything. And this is something that only I can do. No other medical practitioner can do it. As for Victoria, it seems that there are already too many people knows about her able to speak. I won''t keep it as a secret anymore. But my abilities are best to keep secrets." I said to Albert in a voice that only us can hear.


    "I see. What took her so long there?" Albert asked why Jessica is still not finished yet.


    "She''s already stripping, but she is preparing her heart. While we''re at it, why don''t you go and get the dean of the medical academy? If I show him about this, I will be epted right away, and can graduate as soon as possible. Possibly, I would get my license right away. That would be perfect." I said.


    This is something that only I can do since I have a ck Slime. And since there''s a whole vige filled with people with this condition, they have no choice but to let me do it. That mean, they will have to give me a medical license so those vigers can trust me. This way, I don''t need to attend college.


    "¡­I know your true intentions. You don''t want to attend sses, right? Fine. I''ll get the guild master to call him. I''m fine with you not attending the sses, but I need your status as a student so you will enter thepetition we prepared. I''ll have you join no matter what!"


    Then Albert went to the guild master to go get the dean of Cassau Medical University. And the guild master ordered the receptionist to go.


    How will I enter thepetition without magic? That''s impossible. Even if I end up staying as a student, it''s impossible for me to stand out and be picked as a representative of a medical school.


    The most he can do is appoint me as a medical official of thepetition. That''s it.


    No matter how I think about it, it''s impossible for me to join thepetition.


    Jessica took a long time to prepare herself, and the receptionist girl has returned with two old men. One is the dean, and another one is a professor in surgery. I''ll let Albert do the talking. He can convince anyone that I''m capable. By using his status and power if it''s necessary.


    "I''m ready!" Jessica shouted from the other room.


    "Alright. Begin the operation."


    I entered the operating room with Albert, the dean, the professor, the guild master, and Ka as my assistant.


    As for the others, they are waiting in the waiting room. Celestine made an opening on the wall so they can see the operation.


    Of course the viger man is not allowed to see by his sister, and was told to keep his nephewpany.


    "First, I will tell you about anesthetics. I am an air mage who managed to reach intermediate level. I can cast sleeping gas to make you sleep, but as you experienced it, it won''t work on you. I can also cast a pain-relieving gas which makes one don''t feel pain, but it will onlyst for about one hour and I''m unable to cast it continuously yet. Once I cut your body open, you will still feel pain slightly even with it. Please endure it."


    Jessica nodded.


    "That''s what air element can do? It''s amazing. Air element is truly the perfect for medication!" the professor said.


    "No wonder he''s rmended by his majesty. Let''s see how he will perform this surgery. Then we can decide to give him a licenseter." The dean said.


    Nice! That was just by air element. What about my summon?


    "As for the surgery tool, I will use my summon, a ck Slime. It can shapeshift into anything, and can absorb dirt and stain as well. Making it the cleanest tool for surgery." I said as I transform a Blobby into a scalpel.


    Now, I just need to perform the surgery in front of these people. I''m confident in seeding.


    A great anesthetic, and clean tool. That makes the chance for sessful surgery to increase by a lot.


    What if I said that my eyes can see through things and close up on any object? I will be the greatest doctor in the world! This world at least, not Victoria''s. Her world is scary.


    But I also want to be a clown again. Even Thomas is starting to build another circus troupe. I will get busy as a doctor clown or clown doctor. I will be busy but at least it''s something I will enjoy.


    Whatever, I''ll just do the operation here now.


    "Jessica, do you want something to bite so you can endure the pain?" I said to Jessica before I opened her body.


    "¡­please do."


    "Victoria."


    I told Victoria to transform into something Jessica can bite. And Victoria get her clones to do it instead. They are breakable unlike Victoria, but I''ll let it be. It''s not like she has the jaw strength of a lion or something.


    I open up Jessica''s chest with a scalpel. She''s screaming but muffled by the Blobby she bites.


    I started from her heart first. I absorbed the ck coating with Blobby little by little, and get Ka to heal Jessica.


    "Ka, heal."


    "Right now? Are you sure?"


    "Yes. Try to target only on Jessica''s inner organ. Not her whole body. You can do it, right?"


    Ka already mastered magic control really well. she can target her healing magic only on a certain wound instead of the target''s whole body. Making her only spent as little mana as possible, and making the healing progress as well as if targeting the whole body. So, I''m not afraid of her identally closing Jessica''s chest while I still perform the surgery.


    Everyone was shocked by how well Ka can aim her healing magic precisely.


    Ka has learned human anatomy even though she doesn''t want to be a doctor.


    I ignore their reaction, and continue cleaning Jessica''s inner organ. Once I absorbed some ck coating, I had Ka heal Jessica''s inner organ. It was to make the blood cleaned of the ck coating as well. And it worked!


    I can also directly have Blobbies absorb all the ck coating at once but having multiple Blobbies covering the infected. Even their blood. But It will be too surprising if I do that right away. Let''s try it on the second er.


    This is too easy, but since I''m holding back my true ability, it took some time until I finished healing Jessica. Once the ck coating no longer covering her lungs, I used anesthetic gas on her and she quickly fallen asleep.


    "Good. She won''t feel any pain now. And it proves that she can sleep again from now on. Let''s continue with the rest of her organs." I said.


    While I''m operating, I also exin what I''m doing to the dean and the professor. They are also looking at the corpse I did my autopsy with, and examining it. They didn''t bring their own surgery tools, so I lend some Blobbies to them.


    Huhu¡­ I''m one step closer into getting my medical license.


    Once I finished absorbing all the ck coating in Jessica''s body, even her brain, I stitched her chest part with Blobby as the stitches, and after that, Ka healed her whole body. I made the stitching disappear after that, and there''s no scar in sight. Which surprise everyone watching again.


    "Air element mage, and a summoner who summoned a ck Slime¡­ he''s too good to not be a doctor. And with his skill, it will be a shame to not get him a license already and have him help a lot of people. I''ll make sure to get him a license." The dean said.


    "But there are many things that I think he can help us create. Maybe we should put him as my assistant in surgery experiments first. We can discover many new possibilities of healing method with him." The professor said.


    Now I can show them about the surgeries from the future that I know. I don''t care if any of them decide to name the surgery after them since I just want people to be healed.


    Soon, because of Ka''s healing, Jessica is already awake and up.


    "How do you feel?" Albert asked.


    "Umm¡­ normal? What about the surgery?"


    "It''s a sess. At least from my perspective. You need to go back to that vige first to see if the barrier works or not. If it no longer working, that mean you have returned into a human again. Now, I have seeded the operation. And I found a better method in doing it with less pain. Do you want me to continue with the others?" I asked the professor and the dean.


    "We''ll examine Ms. Jessica first. Ms. Jessica, if you don''t mind?" The professor then performed medical checkup on Jessica, and found nothing abnormal. He then examined Ellen before her surgery, and found nothing abnormal again.


    "Hmm¡­ other than the inner organs, there''s nothing strange with your health. No need for food, water, and sleep, that should be a blessing. But the fact that they are considered monsters is the only w in their condition." The professor said after examining Ellen.


    "That''s right. I''ll ask the next patient if they want to be cured or not. Their condition is too good to be healed. If they were not trapped in that vige, I think some of them would be happy. Now, Ellen, will you want to be cured or not?"


    I asked the rest of the infected one by one if they want to be cured. And their answer is that they all want to be cured.


    If it was me, I will hesitate with my answer. Not needing food doesn''t mean you can no longer eat, right? It just meant that food is no longer necessary, but you can still eat them if you want. It will be useful to not need food depend on the situation.


    ¡­maybe I should try to infect myself with Blobbies so I won''t feel hungry. But I still love food, so I hope I can still eat then. But it''s scary to have something in my body. I guess I''ll consider the situation before infecting myself with Blobbies in the future.

 Chapter 256 - Rare Flower

    The first surgery with Jessica, I took the long way on purpose. If I do it too quickly, they will be suspicious of me since this is the first time such condition appears. Even I never heard of it in my previous world. Probably because there''s no cure, someone decided to keep it as a secret. I''ll have Albert asked the noble we captured before if he knows something about itter.


    As for the second surgery with Ellen, I didn''t cut open her body. Since I can pretend that I''m a genius who knows when the exact moment that Ka need to cast her healing spell. I can''t tell anyone that I have my see-through ability yet.


    So, I just stabbed a Blobby that I turn into a syringe into Ellen''s body, and absorbed the ck coating from there. I just said to the others that I can absorb just the ck coating without harming the body.


    Jessica protested since she needed to be naked and be sliced open on her chest while Ellen didn''t need to. Making me look like a pervert who just want her naked. That''s wrong. It''s just one of the reasons, but not the main reason why I ask her to be naked. And I have the right excuse to say to her so, she forgives me quickly. And she even asked to join our nter. I''ll think about it with the otherter. Though, I don''t think we should increase our members just as soon as we established the n. Maybe sometime in the future I will ept her.


    I finished curing Ellen rather fast. Then continued with the viger kid, and his mother. I finished the three in the time I did an operation on Jessica. She still looked angry the whole time.


    ¡­if she''s this angry at me, then why would she ask to join my n?


    "Other than the first one, the others were done rather quickly. How fast can you cure everyone in that vige?" Albert asked.


    "Probably¡­ if I have supplies of mana potion for Ka so she can cast healing magic the whole time, I can probably finish it in¡­ at most two days. But that will be too stressful for me and Ka, so maybe a week? And more, we need to know if after we cure them, they can pass through that barrier or not. Also, do you think that everyone wanted to be cured?"


    "What do you mean?"


    "Albert, you are the busiest man here and I kidnapped you. Once you returned, you continue being busy. What if I had a Blobby infected your inner organ just like these people? You will be able to work non-stop without being tired, hungry, or thirsty. You don''t need rest, food, or water. The only disadvantage of this condition is that you are no longer a human being. And for hunters who would sometime take a quest that took them days, they will no longer need to camp and rest since they can continue moving at night. And they also won''t have to spend any expense for food and water. This condition has more advantage than disadvantage." I said honestly.


    Thinking that Blobby can do this to my body as well, I can''t wait to try it. but to do that, I need someone to be sacrificed first. I''ll ask Albert to give me a prisoner to do the experiment on.


    "I guess for now, we need to investigate about the invisible barrier first. I''ll give you nice reward to do it as a task for your newly built n." Albert said.


    Good. Now, to the most important event today. Can I get my medical license?


    I approached the dean and the professor who is discussing something.


    "Excuse me, dean and professor of medical academy, I haven''t introduced myself properly. My name is Roy. An air and summoning element mage. And I also wish to be a surgeon as well. Nice to meet you." I introduced myself properly.


    "Ah! We''re currently discussing about whether we can get you a medical license right away or not. I thought that it might be good to get you a medical license as soon as possible, but you are still too young. There will be too many people who will hate you if you suddenly received a license just like that. So, we''re considering our next actions." The dean said.


    I had some ideas in mind to take care of that, but before I was able to say anything, Albert interrupted.


    "Don''t worry about it. I have some great ideas for that. That''s why we will discuss it privatelyter. How about you all return back to the academy. And the guild master can return to the guild as well. as for the people Roy cured¡­ they will stay in Roy''s n base temporarily so Roy can watch over them in case they have some kind of side effects from the infection." Albert said.


    ¡­there goes my chance. Since the king has already spoke, whatever I say won''t be heard by them. Albert is acting like he''s my dad or something. At least that mean these people won''t think to make a mess with me.


    Now, what should I do? It''s already dark. I guess I should return back to the vige quickly to investigate the barrier and see if there''s anyone suspicious. I''ll ask the kid about the homeless man''s descriptionter.


    "I guess we''ll return home now. Celestine, we don''t need this dome anymore. You can destroy it. As for you four, just like the king said, you will stay in my ce. Since you haven''t eaten for months, we need to prepare a lot of foods for you, huh? How do you feel?" I asked the patients.


    "Now that you mention it, I feel hungry all of a sudden." Ellen said.


    "That''s because your stomach has been empty for months. Grab some drinks first." I said as I look at Ka. She has already prepared some water when I called her. She''s always one step ahead.


    Ka then gave each patients a bottle of water to drink. And all of them emptied the bottle in one go.


    "Ah! Wait, Roy! You need a permit to pass the checkpoint, right? I''ll write it for you since the one in charge of this city hasn''t been decided yet. If it''s a royal decree, there''s no way a normal guard will refuse it." Albert said.


    I just nodded to his words. I guess he already expected me to take action tonight to investigate the barrier and see any trace of the other ck Slime''s master.


    That night, after taking everyone to our base, Albert and I transported to the outside of the vige with Ellen who we knew can keep secrets.


    "Umm¡­ Roy and his majesty¡­ is it okay if wee here together?" Ellen asked.


    "There''s no one else to ask. The one who knows Roy most among you four is just you. You already know how he fight in closebat, and you didn''t tell anyone about it, right? That mean you can keep a secret. That''s why we take you here with Roy''s portal since you won''t tell anyone about Roy''s portal." Albert said.


    "Anyway, why are you even here? You should be home already." I asked Albert who followed us here.


    "I''m curious about this barrier. Can we put the same barrier around the capital? If so, any stampede won''t be a problem. You also think that the perpetrator might still be here and the possibility that he''s a member of the cult, right?"


    "That''s just a possibility. Ellen, we''re here. Try to pass this barrier. If you can, then you arepletely cured." I said to Ellen.


    "I want to try it again! Hmm... I can''t."


    Victoria transformed into her human form and tries to enter the barrier, but she failed. There''s nothing blocking her, but she just instinctively felt that it''s dangerous to enter any further.


    Then, Ellen tries to enter the barrier. And she can do it easily. There''s nothing blocking her anymore.


    "I''m fine. Should I keep moving forward?" She asked.


    "Let''s go together. The barrier is about 80m deep. Let''s have you walk the whole way through first."


    The three of us walked easily inside the barrier while Victoria is just watching from the outside.


    "That''s it. You''re no longer a monster. Congrattions." I congratte Ellen for returning back into human again.


    "Now that''s one thing taken care of. Let''s investigate about the area here first." Albert said.


    "You do that. Ellen will be with you and Victoria will watch you from afar. I will see if there''s anyone that looked like the man in description around the vige."


    And so, I left the others as I look around the vige to find the perpetrator. I ran in the air and look over the vige and anywhere outside the vige a few times, and didn''t see anyone in the description. I guess he''s no longer in the vige anymore.


    I returned to Albert''s location and see him digging something.


    "Found something?" I asked.


    "That was rather quick. Look at this. This is a rare thing that I thought supposed to be extinct already."


    What Albert shows me is a flower, with a giant potato-like root under it. What is this nt?


    "This is called Dragon Dung Flower. Because the root has simr look like a dragon''s dung, and has simr effect of repelling nearby monsters. Making other monsters afraid of getting closer." Albert exined.


    "¡­whoever named a flower like that, need to die." I said.


    "I''ll bring this one back with me so Marie can research on it and see if we can breed this flower and get them around the capital. Then other cities as well."


    "At least we found something already. Now, where''s my payment?" I asked.


    "I haven''t submitted the quest formally, so it''s not a quest. And I''m the one who find out about this flower. I''ll change the quest into going to the vige and cure everyone. No one spared. Even with all the advantage, it will be dangerous if someone we can''t trust have that much power."


    Albert is right. Just not needing to sleep alone can have someone finish a lot of things in one day. That''s a power no human should have.


    I returned back to Cassau with Ellen and Victoria after sending Albert to the royal pce. I''ll do the formal investigation once I received my medical license.

 Chapter 257 - Returning To The Infected Village

    A few days after that, I received my medical license.


    Finally!


    But on one condition. I need to have a status as a student in the medical academy even though that there''s no need for me to attend sses. And the registration of the new students can only be taken once a year, and for this year, it''s already over. Which mean I can only be a student from next year.


    And as of now, my medical license is only temporary.


    In my previous life, there''s only a lifelong license. No temporary ones. Once someone received a medical license, they are considered as a doctor for the rest of their lives. But as for me, I need to extend my license next year if I still want to be a doctor. What a pain in the ass.


    I think there''s some other things that the dean, the professor, and the king discussed without telling me. I don''t know what it is that they are discussing, but I''m afraid of my future. Why does someone else have to be the one who decide my future? And they are not even my parents!


    Whatever, I''ll just think about it next year. It''s a medical school anyway, so it''s impossible for me to enter thepetition.


    Albert said that whatever that Marie and Victoria is inventing, it will also make appearance during thepetition and makes thepetition bigger. It will surely be a huge thing.


    It will be historical since thepetition will go on annually. And next year will be the first time ever. I hope thispetition will light the desire to get stronger for everyone.


    And I think that even if I don''tpete in thepetition, I will still be there anyway to check if anyone is from the cult or not. Sigh¡­


    I''ll just focus on the matter at hand first.


    So, Albert has formally sent me the quest to cure the vigers and investigate about it. This time, I''ll do it openly and ask the vige chief and the hunters there.


    And that''s why I''m going there again, with two horse carriages, bringing some people from my n and also the former infected people, and the previous quest giver and his wife.


    The members I brought are Ka, Jewel, Celestine, Ang, Ian, and Kron. Ka is needed for her healing magic. Celestine and Ang will build a temporary hospital in the vige with their earth magic. And Ian and Kron will be the muscle to move things around. Including Jewel whose strength increased in her rhino hybrid form. Also, Ian is necessary for the meal since all the patients have empty stomach since they have never eaten for months.


    As for Ellen and Jessica, I brought them there since they are acquaintances, and they are needed to prove that they can pass the barrier along with the vigers I brought. If it''s only the vige woman and her child, the hunters in that vige will think that it''s some kind of conspiracy that the hunters are unable to leave.


    Once we reached the checkpoint, I told the guards that there will be no need to put the checkpoints anymore ording to the king''s order, and have the guards ry to the other guards in different checkpoints that they are dismissed.


    I heard from Albert that after the nobles were captured, there are also several guards who were fired and imprisoned. So, it''s necessary for these guards to return back to Cassau since theyck guards for the security of the city. At the moment, Albert is sending some of the agents from the capital to help. Though they will have to return there soon.


    The next day, we finally reached the outer part of the barrier.


    We stopped to let the cured patients get their hearts prepared. It''s the moment that they will truly feel relieved that they are no longer a monster. Though Ellen has already tried it alone. I don''t know if she had told Jessica or not about it.


    I passed through the barrier easily. I didn''t bring Victoria with me. She''s back in Cassau. Though once I passed the barrier, I will summon her. She is the most essential member for curing everyone.


    After passing the barrier, I summoned Victoria and about to say hello to everyone in the vige. It should have been started with ''Hello, I came in peace!'' But it seems to be impossible.


    Someone, in the house full of dead people, is trying tomit suicide. That''s why I have no choice but to change how I say my greeting.


    "Everyone, stop taking your own lives! I have arrived with the cure! And you all will be able to leave this vige!" I said so loudly to make sure that even that one who tried tomit suicide will hear it.


    If I want to make it louder, I can just tell Jewel to do it. But it''s so sudden and I have to stop that person frommitting suicide. That''s why I''m the one shouting. Even though I''m still a little bit away from the vige.


    Hearing my shout, everyone quickly gets out of the vige, and see their ray of hope! Me!


    Of course no one would believe me right away, but I''m here with the vige chief''s son who submitted the original request to the guild, and his sister and nephew who should have been here a few days ago. I also brought Ellen and Jessica who they im to be quite popr since they used to be in a party with an S-rank hunter. This way, it will be easier for the hunters to believe me. It''s also why Kron, an S-rank hunter, ising as well.


    Then, once everyone is watching me, the vige girl who I cured spoke to them first.


    "It''s true! He can save us! He saved me and now I and my son can enter and leave this vige. He will be able to save everyone as well."


    "That''s right! Some of you should have noticed that the four of us have been missing the past few days. It''s because he enters this vige a few days ago, and brought us out to be examined. And now, he is the only one who has the cure." Ellen also said to convince the hunters.


    Nice! Everyone is looking at me like I''m their savior. At least all of them looks like they believed it.


    "Guys! He''s the messiah!" It was the quest giver who suddenly said it.


    ""He''s the messiah!"" Everyone said.


    "Wait, no! I''m not the messiah! I''m just a doctor!" I denied it.


    It does feel nice to be worshipped, but too much just makes it creepy.


    "Enough! I''m just a doctor!" I keep denying them calling me messiah.


    "¡­this scene looks familiar." Victoria whispers lowly.


    At this moment, I don''t really care about what she meant anymore.


    Since it was too loud, I made a barrier with air magic to make the surrounding voices turn silent. Then I asked Ang and the others to prepare a make-shift hospital where I will treat the patients. I will only heal about twenty people in one day. As for those who will be healed first, I don''t care as long as everyone is healed.


    Then I told everyone about their condition. How they no longer need to eat, drink, and sleep anymore. And how once they are cured, they will be hungry. That''s why I only let ten people to be healed first.


    If I healed everyone in one go, we won''t have enough supply of food for everyone. But if it''s twenty, those who are healed can go fetch water and hunt for food outside since the barrier won''t stop them anymore.


    But if I healed the hunters first, they will leave right away and won''t return. That''s why I only will heal hunters from the second day.


    I brought some supplies with us but I don''t know if it will be enough. They have no supplies of food for month, so they need to stock up some more again from the start.


    Then, while the others are building the temporary hospital, I went to the vige chief to ask him some questions.


    "Chief, do you know about the homeless man who was in the vige a few month ago before this tragedy happened?" I asked.


    "The homeless man? What about him?"


    "We assume that he''s the one who attacked the vigers and bring them somewhere, then turned you all into¡­ this. Once you are turned to this, you are returned back to the vige. That''s what I hear from your daughter."


    "Really? It''s a mistake to lend him the stable to rest. He shouldn''t be let in the vige!"


    "But it''s already done. Do you know where he is?"


    "Sorry. I don''t think there''s anyone here who knows about his whereabouts. No one care about one homeless man when everyone is panicking about not being able to leave the vige." The vige chief replied.


    "I see¡­ do you know anything about Dragon Dung Flower?" I asked about the flower this time.


    "¡­that''s a stupid name for a flower."


    "I agree. But that flower is the reason why you are unable to leave the vige. It''s a flower that any monsters will instinctively feel danger when they''re nearby. I think that whoever that homeless man is, he turned everyone into a monster, and nted those flowers around the vige. While I''m curing the infected people, my n will find all the flowers. This is no longer a quest from you. It''s a quest directly from the royalty. I hope for your cooperation with us in the next few days."

 Chapter 258 - The Quest Is Completed

    The first day in the vige, I healed ten vigers. All of them are men who can work and hunt animals and monsters for food.


    After treating them with the food and water we brought, they quickly left the vige to get more supplies for the rest of the vigers.


    Seems like doing it ten times is exhausting for Ka even with Mana Potions. She slept instantly after the tenth patient leave the hospital.


    As for the other members, they are patrolling outside and inside the vige. Those who are patrolling inside were looking for a trace of the homeless ck Slime summoner. And those who are patrolling outside were looking for the Dragon Dung Flower. I didn''t ask them to take care of the flowers yet. Just locating them.


    The quest given by the king is to cure everyone in the vige. If we destroy the flowers first, some people might leave the vige right away thinking that living without having the need for food and water is good. They will think that they have no need to work anymore. That''s why we''ll take care of the flowers after everyone is cured.


    Just like I told Albert, it might be over in a week.


    The second day, another ten people is in the hospital. Five vigers and five hunters. And just like we feared, someone asked if they can just get out of the vige without being cured since.


    "No way. You can, but I will kill you if you do so. My quest is given directly by the king to cure everyone here without sparing anyone. If you don''t want to be cured, I will dly kill you."


    After saying that, everyone shut their mouth and didn''t dare to ask any more. They must have been afraid that we have an S-rank hunter and an expert level mage here.


    By the way, Ellen and Jessica is leaving in the second day, together with the five hunters who were just cured. Just like I thought, the hunters will try to leave this ce quickly without caring about the fate of the vigers. Good thing I only healed the vigers with family in the first day.


    The chief and the vigers said that fifteen people is more than enough to stock some supplies from hunting and fetching water. So, on the third day, I only cured the hunters. This way, the number of people staying in the vige will be lessened.


    The fourth day, I cured the rest of the hunters, and the children of the vige. It''s because children don''t eat as much as adult.


    I spend my free time walking around the vige. I asked the chief and the vigers about what they know about the homeless man, and even investigate the stable the chief lend him to sleep. But I didn''t find anything. I guess he must have left the vige after infecting everyone here.


    Let''s imagine what he''s thinking. He entered this vige to conduct an experiment. Before he grabbed a viger for experiment, he nted the Dragon Dung Flowers around the vige. Then, once he nted them, he started taking a viger and conduct an experiment somewhere. He either put them to sleep or knock them out. Once he grabbed quite a number of people, the chief asked his son to submit a request to the guild. Hunters started to take the request and go to this vige.


    By that time, the homeless man''s experiment bear fruit, and he returned the missing people back to the vige. But he didn''t have enough, so he also grabbed the hunters and other vigers until everyone is infected.


    Then, after no other hunters entered the vige, he left the vige since there''s no one else to experiment on. I guess that''s what happened. I discussed this possibility with Victoria, Ka, and the others as well.


    I''ll tell Albert to put up wanted posters with the homeless man''s description since I can''t find any clues of his whereabouts.


    After seven days, like I expected, everyone is cured.


    "Thank you, messiah, for curing us." The chief said.


    "Like I said, I''m not the messiah!"


    It''s annoying to be called the messiah for a week.


    "By the way, the person who did this to you has disappear. So, I want you to keep the fact that I have cured you all as a secret. I don''t want that person to be wary of me since I want to capture him." I said to the vigers.


    I don''t want to capture him. With the wanted posters, someone must be interested in capturing him. I''m just afraid in case he''s rted to the cult. It will be dangerous if the cult knows about the effect of a ck Slime inside your body. Though for me, they will be easier to find than having explosive devices in their mouth. But I will still be careful about anything that possibly rted to the cult.


    After saying goodbye to the vigers, we''re finally home. I just opened a portal back home since the other hunters, including Ellen and Jessica, are all already left.


    I reported the situation to Albert, and left everything to him. Now, I''m back to my break again.


    What should I do in this one year before entering the medical school?


    Right! I forgot! Training camp!


    We have a training camp, together with the guards at Melk and Mellian, and all Albert''s agents. I should bring the Werewolves as well at that time. I think there''s still a few months before the training camp.


    I guess until then, I continue getting stronger and take quests while making name for my n.


    ...¡­.


    Two weeks before Roy and his n took the quest, someone left the vige. He was the homeless man who experimented on the vigers and the hunters who visited the vige.


    Although he looked haggard, he''s actually an advanced level mage in ice element, and wind element.


    He knocked out the people he will experimented on, or kidnap them in their sleep and escape quickly with his wind magic. Then, injected those people with clones of a ck Slime, which is his summon.


    Unlike Roy''s ck Slime, his was different. The ck Slime is already capable of making clones of itself even when the summoner was still beginner level in summoning element.


    As for the origins of the ck Slime, it was part of Javier''s clones, way before Javier first contracted with his first master. And Javier forgotten about it.


    When Javier made a contract, his connection with that clone disappear. And it''s as if the clone is its own entity.


    And about forty years ago, the Javier''s clone identally got summoned and became the homeless man''s summon.


    Now, the homeless man has found a good way to use the his summon. His goal is to attain immortality. And he''s halfway there with achieving it after experimenting on the vige, with the result of no longer needed food or water anymore. No more sleeping is just a side effect to him.


    And so, he left the vige to report to his old friend, who is a fellow researcher.


    He managed to get an appointment with his friend, but what he didn''t know is that his friend is the head researcher of the cult.


    "So, you''re halfway through your research to immortality, huh? Using the clones of a rare ck Slime as substitute for human''s organs." The cult''s researcher said.


    "That''s right! But I don''t know if it can cause longevity to people''s lives or not. I do know that once the clones spread inside their body, they no longer need to eat or drink or sleep anymore! If it can stop the process of aging as well, we might as well be immortal!" The homeless man excitedly exined.


    "It''s your summon, right? Let''s try to use the real ck Slime instead of its clones. We can research it by experimenting it on me. And if something happened, you can summon it from my body, right? It will disappear from my body and I will be normal human again." The researcher said calmly.


    "Are you sure? Then let''s do it!"


    Then he injected the real ck Slime, which is actually clone of the real ck Slime, into the researcher''s body.


    A few dayster, the researcher''s inner organ turned ck. And he no longer needs to consume anything anymore to live.


    "I see. This is useful. Good job in discovering it!" the researcher said to the homeless man.


    "Then, should I summon it? It won''t do anything if the real ck Slime is unable to create its clones."


    "There''s no need for you to do that anymore."


    The researcher, calmly cast a fire magic on the homeless man, and killed him. The homeless man died without knowing why he was killed.


    "This way, I can be closer to the True God! Even closer than that shitty Archbishop!"


    That''s his real goal in lending his own body to be experimented. This way, he can do more works without being tired, and research more, for the sake of the Evil God.


    Then the researcher asked his subordinate to clean up the corpse of his former friend. And at that time, he remembered a small detail of a report from the past, and asked his subordinate who wrote it.


    "Hey, if I remember correctly, there''s a kid who can summon a ck Slime in that city you were watching, right?"


    "Yes. It was in the city of Melk, just days before the stampede."


    "Hmm¡­ it was after his test that someone unknown suddenly appears, right? And we thought that the failure of the stampede might be connected with that unknown person."


    "You are correct."


    The researcher is trying to connect the dot about Roy, and the unknown person.


    "Tell me more about that ck Slime summoner."


    "Well, he''s weak. His awakened elements are summoning and air. His summon is a weak ck Slime which he used as a throwing weapon during that test. So, we assume that he''s just an idiot."


    "¡­an idiot, huh? Well, doesn''t matter. It just means that he probably already died although the stampede was a failure. There''s no point in looking for him anymore. ck Slimes might be useful for a lot of things. That''s why I''m curious about summoner who made a contract with ck Slime. Though if he''s stupid, I won''t think of making him my subordinate. I''ll just enjoy my new body and research more for the sake of our lord."


    And just like that, Roy almost being targeted by a higher up of the cult personally. But Roy is safe because the report says that he''s stupid.


    In Roy''s past life, the researcher is known as someone who never rest. His infamy was spread through the whole world when Albert found out that he''s connected with the cult.


    ¡­if Roy''s memory about people is a little bit better, he would be able to connect the rumor with the ck Slime infection.


    Though because of this event, someone powerful in the cult is looking for anyone who has a ck Slime as their contracted monster.

 Chapter 259 - Training Camp Starts!

    Several months have passed since the day we established our n and healed everyone in that vige. After that event, we found no clues about the homeless man''s whereabouts. I''m afraid if he''s actually a member of the cult.


    As for the Dragon Dung Flower, Marie managed to breed that flower somehow. Although the range is less than the one we found, it''s still useful. And Albert has spread the flower around the capital, except for the main entrance. This way, mages who are tamer, or summoner who always have their monsters with them, will still be able to enter or leave the capital.


    Soon, the seeds of Dragon Dung Flower will be spread to every city and vige in the kingdom. The only way for monsters to be able to enter the city, is from the main gate, or from the sky. Maybe from water as well if the city is next to the sea or river, just like Cassau.


    At least this way, we won''t have any trouble with stampede anymore. But the Dragon Dung Flowers are still under experiment. We don''t know if it can stop a stampede or not. Especially when we know that we can still force monsters to get inside. Just like how I threw Blobbies into the barrier to get it pass through.


    I don''t know the fate of that homeless man, but at least we received something from him.


    And I don''t think that what happened in that vige is affected because of my return to the past. Which means that it''s something that won''t change the future as I know it. At least that''s what I hope.


    We received not only the Dragon Dung Flower, but also the knowledge that Victoria''s clones are able to make us work non-stop without consuming anything, and we don''t need to rest at all.


    Albert and Marie would ask me to do it for them when they want to finish some works quickly. And now, Marie''s research is over and she''s now enjoying her moment with her children more often.


    The twins are two years old now, and Lana has be more proficient in ice magic. Weirdly, Victoria would often ask Lana to make snowman. Well, I guess it''s just Victoria being Victoria.


    Anyway, it''s finally the time for training camp!


    I transported a lot of people into Albert''s private ind. Of course I already nted a Blobby in that ind, and patrolled that ind and other inds nearby. Just like Albert said before, the ind is free from monsters, but the other inds have a lot of monsters.


    There is only one building there, which is Albert''s vi. But it''s fine since it''s training camp. I''ll just get every earth mage to build shelters. It will be a part of their training.


    And so, I went all around the cities in the kingdom with portals to Blobby that has been ced to the leader of agents in their designated city. Albert sent those Blobbies via mail.


    Some of the agents were surprised, but they are already prepared since Albert has inform them by using secret codes that some of the agents need to gather in one spot, and will be transported via portal.


    Of course the one who has Blobby in Melk is Oleg, and the one in Mellian is Hill. And I''m slightly afraid when Hill is actually had me open a portal to his room. I had my back against the wall at all time.


    In total, we have about 5 hundred people in the training camp. Some couldn''t make it since we still need people to keep the cities under protection, but the most important ones are here.


    Our n is just to teach everyone about how to use magic efficiently, and improve their strength. I assigned Hill to improve the strength, while for magic, we have at least one teacher in each element. And obviously, I will teach air element and summoning element. It''s good if we have more people that can use portal even if it''s just two-way trip. Unlike what I can do with Victoria''s clones.


    We gathered everyone to an open area, including even the children and the family of the people here thate along so they can learn as well. Including the orphans from Celestine''s orphanage.


    I''m going to teach the children that there are no useless elements. I won''t like it if they wished for an element so bad, that when they grow up, they will despair when they didn''t manifest the elements they wish for.


    And my real goal is to show these people, who rarely meet me, to know that I''m the most important member of this group that aim to destroy that evil cult.


    So, I stand up in front of everyone and introduce myself. Using air magic to increase the Volume of my voice so it reaches everyone.


    By the way, although they haven''t been epted into my n, Ellen and Jessica were invited since Albert said the more people the better. Especially when he already said that they can be trusted.


    Though there''s one more person who will be epted into my n if she asked. It''s Ms. Wendy. But even though she''s here, she hadn''t asked to join yet. Candy is trying to convince her while she''s here.


    "Nice to meet everyone here. Some of you might not know me so I''ll introduce myself. I''m Roy. The leader of Wolf''s Crown n. I''m telling you this since his majesty Albert has told me that all of you can be trusted. I''m a person from the future, in which we will fight against the Evil God cult, and eventually we will lose. I''m here to change that future. If you think I''m lying, you can ask Albert here. He has the power to detect lies." I said as I bravely pointed my finger to the king. To show these people that I think of Albert as equal.


    Almost everyone is shocked with that revtion. It''s normal for anyone to not believe me. I''ll leave the believing part to Albert.


    "I think my introduction is over. Next, Albert will exin more. He is more trusted than I am."


    Albert then stand in front of me and started his speech. Of course I helped him increase his volume.


    Basically, what Albert say is about the future, his power to detect lies, and hope that everyone will fight together. As most of these people are the kingdom''s agents and guards of the cities in the kingdom, everyone chooses to put their trust in Albert. But I can sense that some individuals are looking at me curiously. Like Hill, Oleg, Ms. Wendy, Ellen, Jessica, and Thomas who know me personally.


    I asked Thomas to be here so he can find a good member of the circus troupe among these people.


    I told him that we''re preparing ourselves in a war against the cult before, but it''s the first time he heard that I''m from the future.


    Thomas is nning to help us with the circus. By touring around the world, we can find if there are any ces that have a lot of cult members gathering. Though his real goal is to have the circus so famous by touring around the world. That''s his dream.


    Thomas hasn''t found anyone to be a member, so I told him to join the training camp with Albert''s agreement.


    Having some agents that can travel around the world freely is good after all.


    After the speech is over, it''s my turn again to say something.


    "Because of Albert''s ability to detect lies, he tells everyone the truth since he can trust you. It''s fine to leave right now, but don''t spread this story to anyone else. Is there anyone who wants to leave?"


    I asked first in case someone don''t want to take part in the war. But seems like Albert''s speech raise their morale and instead, they are even more willing to fight the cult. Especially since most of the people here are those who failed to save someone during the stampede.


    The stampede was stopped back then, but not without casualties. And now they know who to me, and that we are trying to improve ourselves to be able to fight them, none of them want to leave.


    "Good. Then, the training camp start now!"


    With that as the signal, Celestine, Ka, and Ang instantly build a shelter by using earth magic. It''s very sturdy and detailed. Unlike what people thought about earth magic at all which is usually just an ugly looking earth wall.


    "As you can see, we have no others ce to sleep here other than Albert''s vi. But there''s no way that we allow you to sleep in the same building as the king. Which is why the earth mages today will learn how to control your magic properly and build a sturdy shelter. There will be at least one teacher teaching one element. And these three will be teaching earth magic and probably some other elements as well. It''s fine to build a shelter that can only stand for one day, but every earth mage will need to be able to do it. if not, some of you might need to sleep outside. By the way, the building that these three just built is for your family who won''t participate in the training. They will build more if that''s not enough. Good luck you all!"


    With that, the training camp started with earth mages practicing hard to build shelters since none of them want to sleep outside. Those who don''t have earth element will watch how the earth mages control their magic to build a sturdy shelter. They may have different elements, but the basic of magic control is the same. Imagination.


    While everyone is busy training, Albert approached me.


    "Seems like they are motivated to learn and get stronger. What will you do now?"


    "Taking a nap. The others can watch over them."


    "So, you don''t have anything to do for the rest of the day? Then I''ll appoint you to babysit the kids. Marie and I will also train with the others. See ya!"


    Albert run to the others as Mariee and bring me her children. Daniel and Hannah see that and now I can''t sleep since I have to babysit all children that y around me. Even the wives of the guards or agents choose to watch the training.


    ¡­I still think that babysitting children is much more exhausting than training. I shouldn''t have said that I will take a nap.

 Chapter 260 - Teaching Summoners

    I''m exhausted from ying with the children. Then, when it''s time for dinner, the group of wives, maids, and butlers, prepared the dinner. Since Albert also brought the nobles he can trust, there are a lot of maids and butlers. Albert has already auditioned everyone, including the lovers and servants of the participants, if they can be trusted. Luckily, everyone is clear.


    Some of them who has earth element, started practicing with the other to built shelters. When they found out that they are too weak alone, some suggested to cooperate with the others. Which is good.


    I never forced anyone to do everything by themselves. If one person can''t do it, then the people will do it. if two can''t then three. And that''s how we have enough shelter for everyone. As for those who bring their families, they went to built a small shelter enough for their family.


    Most of them only have enough ability to make a shelter that can stand for just one night>Which mean they need to rebuild it again tomorrow. I hope once the training camp end, they can build even stronger shelter.


    As for other elements, we only teach them about magic control at the moment. As for the practice, we''ll do it tomorrow. I will also teach those with summoning element and air element tomorrow.


    There aren''t many participants with either one of those elements, so I will teach summoning element tomorrow. As for air element mages, they will learn their other element first. It''s good that no one here only have one element like Lina who only has summoning element.


    As for the numbers of summoners here, there are only seven of them. And for air mages, only two.


    There are several healers in the group as well. They will be taught by Ka. Although some of the healers, and even some other mages here, are one level higher than the teacher, or maybe higher, no one seem toined. I guess it''s because Albert is here and it''s the first time that they learned such knowledge.


    The knowledge we will teach them are from my future knowledge where magic control is known, and from knowledge from the past mages we learned from Javier.


    After the dinner, most of the people choose to rest since we have nothing scheduled for the night. As for me, I sleep in the wild, with Blobby as my sleeping bag. That''s enough for me.


    The next day, it''s finally time for everyone to learn about what their magic can do. But first, I need to show them a demonstration first.


    I gathered everyone, including those who are not summoner.


    "Alright, summoners please step forward!"


    Seven people stepped forward. 3 of them are males, and the other four are females.


    "I called everyone here to tell everyone something which seven of you can learn. It''s about summoning magic. There''s not much I can teach, so just one day should be enough to cover everything you need to learn. First, is this!" I grabbed a Pear-y fruit from a bag.


    Before the training camp, I explored the Monsters World and harvesting more of these fruits. As of now, I''m fine even if I''m being surrounded by dozens of those monkeys protecting these fruits. And I keep gathering these fruits for these moments where I can give them to people I can trust. Or people Albert believe we can trust at least.


    "This fruit is called Pear-y fruit. As for the reason why I introduced this fruit to you all, is to show you its effect to summoner. If other mages eat these fruits, nothing will happen. But for summoner, this fruit is great. If you eat this, whenever your level raised, you will be able to make contract with another monster. But it can only affect for leveling up twice. Which mean if you''re a beginner level summoner, you can make contract with two other monsters when you reached intermediate level. But if you ate this when you''re an expert level, you can only make a contract once more when you reached master level. As a proof, here''s my first summon that you already know, Victoria."


    I summoned Victoria who was with other girls to in front of me.


    "Then, next is my second summon, Shelia."


    After summoning Victoria, I summoned Shelia. I already informed the Werewolves about what I''m nning. Of course those battle addict monsters agree to join the training camp.


    Once Shelia appear in front of everyone, the people watching were shocked even though that I have just told them the truth. Am I that unreliable that no one can believe me? I''m sad¡­


    "As you can see, I have two contracted monsters. And I''m a summoner, not a tamer who can do that right away. I''ll give you seven each one fruit. Tell me if you have raised your level twice so I can give you another fruitter."


    I gave each of them a fruit, and they quickly devoured it. Why so impatient? It''s not like they will increase their level today.


    "Next is what I have shown everyone here. Portals. As you might have guessed, I can open a portal connecting my location with my contracted monster, or part of my contracted monster. Which is how I can make a portal to many different ces since I used Victoria''s clones as the destinations. But other than that, there''s one more ce where you can connect a portal. It''s called Monsters World. Which is where summoned monsters came from. Unlike tamers who can only tame a monster in this world, summoner need to summon a monster from another world to make a contract with. If you unsummon your monster, they will return to their world. And you can open a portal to your monster. But if your monster is here, your portal will connect randomly to that world."


    I wait patiently until everyone understand. No way everyone could understand about Monsters World right away, right?


    "Which mean, you can forcefully make a monster to be your contracted monster by going to that world. You can open a portal to that world, and make a contract like how tamer did it. That''s how I made a contract with Shelia here. By the way, although she looks like human, she''s a Werewolf. I made a contract with her by defeating the Werewolf King, and I ended up bing the Werewolf King. All the Werewolves in that tribe will follow my lead. And I asked them toe join us in this training camp."


    I opened a portal to the Monsters World, and Werewolvesing out of the portal. Just about ten of them. With just this much, I have shown everyone here how strong I am. I can summon an army of Werewolves anytime I want.


    "Well, for the summoners, you don''t have to force yourselves to do it like me and be the king of a species or a tribe. You can make a contract with any monsters you like. And for these Werewolves, you can ask them to apany you in a spar. This way, everyone will know how much progress they make. Werewolves, in the spar, don''t kill anyone. They are all our allies." I ordered the Werewolves to not kill.


    "Understand. But this much¡­ do you think we have enough allies?" It was Red who asked after seeing the numbers of people in the training camp.


    "It will never be enough until we''re sure we can destroy the cult. They have the power to destroy this world, and Monsters world after all. We can never be sure and can only grow stronger." I replied.


    If this number is enough, we would have no problem in attacking right away. Finding the present location of the leader of the cult, and kill everyone rted. But when I asked Celestine and Veronica, they both said that this amount of people is just barely cover the amount of one of their factions. The big boobs faction, or the big ass faction.


    "Alright, that''s it. You are dismissed. From today, you can learn about each element that you have by asking the assigned teachers. As for summoners,e with me."


    I finished telling everyone about summoners magic, and the fact that the Werewolves are our allies as well. Then, I gathered the summoners with me along with Lina.


    "As you know, you can kill your contracted monster to free a spot. But if you don''t want to you can keep it. It''s better to have a monster that you can bond with after all. Though if you want to get a new monster by killing your previous one, I will help you find a good one by bringing you to Monsters World. Is there anyone here who want to do that?"


    Everybody quieted down and no one replied. But soon, everyone shook their head. I guess they have bonded with their monsters.


    "Then, once your level increased, you can enter Monsters World to find your next monster. You can ask me to go with you. And if you have any preference, tell me so I can find it before we go to Monsters World. Though if you want to find a monster yourself, it''s fine."


    Then, one of the female summoners asked a question.


    "Do we need to get a strong monster?"


    "No. Even one that can help you in daily life is fine as well. Lina."


    With my signal, Lina summoned her two monsters. The sunflower, and the All-seeing Eye.


    "Lina''s sunflower monster, Sunny, sometime would help Lina cooking. As for the All-seeing Eye, Elsie, she''s on surveince duty. To be able to protect my home when I''m away. Although both of them can fight as well. Just get any monster that you think can help you. Is there anyone here who has reached intermediate level?" I asked.


    Everyone shook their head. And one man exined.


    "There''s no need to. After all, whether we''re a beginner level or even master level, the power of our monsters won''t change. And our other elements are more powerful than the strength of our monsters. But I guess that''s not true anymore since we have eaten that fruit."


    "Right. And also, not all monster like that. Victoria gained a new power once I leveled up. And Shirley can get stronger on her own. Each monster is different. I guess for today, I''ll teach you to open a portal to your monster before you open a portal to Monsters World. To do it, you need to¡­"


    Today, I taught the summoners to connect a portal to their monster that has been summoned. Only two seeded, while the others failed. It''s fine since we have time.


    I''ll let them practice on their own tomorrow since tomorrow I will teach the air element mages.

 Chapter 261 - Teaching Air Mages (Not!)

    Yesterday, I''m done teaching summoners. They will need to practice by themselves to be able to create portals. If they needed guidance, they can just ask either me, or Lina since she can also use portal well.


    Other than making portals, the summoners only need to increase their level by using their monsters to defeat other monsters. But since they are practicing with portal first, they will need to have their monsters by their side so they can open a portal to a safe location.


    I think once they are better in opening a portal, I''ll bring their monsters to nearby ind that has a lot of monsters so they can increase their level. Maybe within two or three days, the summoners should be able to open a portal at least three times.


    As for the Werewolves, none of the participants dare to spar against them at first. So, I told them to fight among themselves. That way, the participants might be interested in sparring against them. And I also told the members of my n to spar against the Werewolves. Just to show the participants how strong a Werewolf is, and how a mage can fight them.


    But the Beastform mages seems more interested in sparring against the Werewolves than other mages. Especially after they saw how Jewel is challenging Shelia. She knows how weak she ispared to Shelia, but she never gave up. Well, it''s a sparring after all. If it''s the real thing, Jewel might choose to run away instead. I''m her master after all.


    There are other mages of other elements that I haven''t taught to anyone before. Like water element mages. We just taught them the basic of magic control, and hope that they can teach each other with the same element about their understanding of their element. Just like how me can get this far in other elements.


    Right now, I''m in front of the two other air element mages, in the beach. Since they are air mages, I need to know their magic capacity first. How long can theyst underwater, or in any location that needed them to use magic to breathe.


    "Well, nice to meet you two. You already know me so I won''t introduce myself again. For now, can you tell me how long you canst by breathing only by using air magic? And how often have you done it?"


    In front of me, there are two girls. One is an agent who is a few years older than me, and the other is Oleg''s wife that he brought over.


    "I never used it on purpose. But I don''t know if I ever do it unconsciously. I don''t know how much I canst." The agent said.


    "Same here. I even almost forgot that I have air element." Oleg''s wife said with a smile.


    ¡­seems like it will be difficult to find their limit. If I know how long they canst, I would be able to tell their limit. On how much air they canpress to use Air Gun, and how many times they can do it.


    "Then, how about you dive into the sea, andst there for as long as you can? That way, I will know your limit." I said to the two.


    "¡­why not just do it onnd?" Oleg''s wife asked.


    "Because I can''t tell if you''re using your magic or not when you breathe."


    "But I don''t want to get wet¡­" Oleg''s wifeined.


    Sigh¡­ it''s difficult to teach. I respect Ms. Wendy and other teachers who managed to went through this shit over and over again with their students.


    "Don''t worry about getting wet! Why don''t youe with me to Albert''s vi, then I''ll give you some clothes that you can wear underwater! Though they are actually my clones. Come!"


    Victoria who was with me as a Slime on my shoulder, suddenly transformed into a human and ask the two mages to follow her.


    Before I can say anything, they left to Albert''s vi.


    And¡­ I can see that Victoria brought more and more female mages with her. What about training!?


    I guess it will be dyed. Other people also can''t learn since most of the teachers are the girls from my n. Other than Kron and Ian who can still teach.


    And of course, when they are in the vi, they are happily looking at the prototype of the clothes made of Blobbies.


    While I don''t know what to do, Albert approached me.


    "Roy, how''s your teaching?"


    "Albert, how''s your learning?"


    "¡­the teacher enters my vi."


    "¡­the students enter your vi."


    ""Sigh¡­""


    Both of us sighed together. But it seems like for other participants, they took this chance to have as much fun as possible. Including Kron who is supposed to be teaching. As for Ian, he''s already right behind me.


    "I guess we should dy the training until tomorrow." I said.


    "Are you sure?" Albert asked.


    "Well¡­ three¡­ two¡­ one¡­ and¡­ now."


    "KYAAA!!! This dress is so cute!"


    "I want that one!"


    "Oh! I like that!"


    The girls in Albert''s vi started to shout in excitement seeing the clothes that they never see before. Though all of them came only in one color, ck.


    Victoria also prepared for this as well since she brought the manager of the clothing store with her to this training camp, along with a lot of clothes as well.


    At least she''s promoting the store that was built with my money. I have a share with that store, so I will get money once they start buying the products from that store.


    "¡­so loud." Albert said.


    "By the way, your wife is already choosing four sets of matching clothes. Two of them are the size of toddler. I guess for the rest of the camp, you will have to wear matching outfit with them." I said to Albert.


    "¡­please don''tugh at me at that time."


    "I willugh as much as I want to."


    "So, what do we do now?"


    "Whatever you want. It''s not like we have an actual schedule at all. The one who were assigned to be the teacher can teach whenever and whatever they want. We just announce it in the morning that we will teach this or that."


    "¡­sox. Well, how about we go and y with the others? Do you have something to y with?"


    "How about¡­ what was it called again? Right, beach volleyball. It''s a sport from Victoria''s world. Just need two posts, a connecting the two posts, and at least two yers on each side." I said.


    We have be bored of doing the same thing whenever we''re rxing on the beach, or by thekeside. So, Victoria invented a kind of sport that people can enjoy. Or more like just telling us about a sport from her world.


    So, Albert called other men while I prepared the venue. Good thing I told Victoria to left some Blobbies to be the and the ball. As for the posts, I just used two trees for it. I can easily move them with my strength, or just ask someone to do it with magic.


    When the venue is prepared, I can see from afar that Albert actually brought everyone. So, I made some more venue nearby. This way, we can have multiple match at once. But we need to show the others how to do it first. So, I asked Kron to y on the other side.


    When I was about to ask Kron, I looked at something good! Praise the God! Celestine and Veronica is approaching us in their bikinis!


    I sped my hands together toward the two while they are still afar. Albert looked confused, but after looking toward where my sight is locked, he did the same. Followed by Kron, then almost everyone else.


    ""Thank you very much!"" Those who sped their hands together, said their gratitude to the two approaching expert level mages.


    "Roy, I see that you''re nning on ying volleyball. What about training?" Veronica asked.


    "Well, seems like the girls are all busy enjoying something. So, I thought of dying the training and y instead. And we can also train by ying, right? How about you? Wanna y as well? We need at least two more members to show everyone what a volleyball is."


    "Sure. We''re in!" Celestine replied after the two nodded at each other.


    And so, we yed a two on two match. With me and Veronica on one side, and Celestine and Kron on the other side.


    When the game started, everyone is left in awe since it''s the first time they see a game that can be yed using magic. This way, the yers can improve their magic as well while ying.


    Victoria''s original game doesn''t use magic. But we thought that it would be boring, we started using magic to y. Which is how this game came to be.


    For example, we have the first game here. Veronica will be the one to serve. She throws the ball so high in the sky, and use wind magic to fly and spiked the ball. The ball fall so quick toward the opponent''s side, but Celestine raised the soil to block the fall with earth magic. The rule is that as long as the ball isn''t falling in the t ground, the game is still going. So, it''s still fair to use earth magic.


    Since I pretend to be losing, after a few times going back and forth, I let Kron''s spike boosted with wind magic to fall on the ground. That way, Kron and Celestine received the first point.


    The funny thing is¡­ the guys were looking at Celestine and Veronica at the beginning. But then, one by one, the girls returned, wearing bikinis or other type of swimsuits. Some of them have their own swimsuits, and some are made of Blobbies. The boys were afraid of being called as perverts, so they started to concentrate on the game.


    "You guys understand the rule, right? This way, you can y while controlling your magic. This sport is good for improving your magic control and your physical strength. As for the magic used, as long as it won''t kill anyone, it''s fine to use it."


    With that, everyone is interested in ying and started to build their team. Since there are a lot of people who want to y, I told them that one team will have five people at most.


    And everyone started to enjoy ying as well, so I build some more venues.


    What about the original training session? I forgot about it. I''ll do it tomorrow. We are not in the mood to learn something serious.

 Chapter 262 - Magic Beach Volleyball

    So, today, instead of teaching the air element mages, we ended up having a volleyball tournament. Hurray!


    Why!? How!?


    No one seems to be in the mood to either teach, or learn anymore. They all wanted to practice what little they have learned. And Magic Beach Volleyball is the perfect asion to do it.


    Even though it''s all started just because I want to know about the two air mages their limit by diving underwater as long as they can. And then, Oleg''s wife said that she doesn''t want to get her clothes wet, so Victoria said that she will show the two some clothes.


    ¡­and then volleyball tournament happened. It doesn''t make sense.


    But since I am participating in it, I will be the champion!


    I have said it before thatpetition is boring to me. But for the others, it''s some kind of entertainment which they enjoyed. I only said that it''s boring when I''m not taking part in it. like thepetition between the Werewolves that I no longer pay attention to. So, when the fightpetition happens next year, I want nothing to do with it. Not even watching it.


    Thispetition is just for fun, so there''s actually no rule here and no reward either. Just us, ying around in the beach with a ball.


    We made a tournament with 8 teams. Each team has 5 yers, and unlimited number of substitutes. Which mean anyone can participate.


    As for the team, we just put 8 team leaders, and anyone can join any team they want. I''m one of the leaders. And Albert as well. But he won''t y. Instead, he will lead his team from the side.


    He didn''t participate since he knows that no one here will go all out against him. Except for me who might want to smack his face with the ball.


    No, scratch that. I really want to smack his head.


    Some people decided that their magic is not to their advantage, so they just choose to watch, or just y lightly on the other field.


    Anyway, right now, I''m ying with four other yer whose name I don''t know. I told the Werewolves who wanted to y to pick different team, so I''m the only one physically strong in this team.


    "Everyone already knows the rule?" I asked my teammates.


    "Yes!"


    "Then, does each of you know what your magic can do in the game?"


    "Yes!"


    ¡­this is just a game for fun. Why are they so enthusiast like a kid again?


    By the way, the kids are just ying with Blobbyball whatever kind of game they want while being watched by the monsters. Shelia is also there since she loves children.


    Soon, our first game started. It''s against Celestine''s team. And obviously, most of the male audiences are rooting for her all girls team. While on my team, we have three men including me, and two women.


    The first game started, and I served the ball to the opponent''s field. I used my Aura to get the ball as fast as possible to the other side. It worked and I got our first point. If it''s like this, I don''t need any one of my teammates, right?


    The second serve, they are already prepared and casted a wind barrier right above the. The ball is still too fast and can breakthrough the barrier, but it''s still slowed down the ball considerably. Making it easier to receive.


    They countered by having Celestine spiked the ball while using her fire magic as well to cover Blobbyball with fire. Her fire magic is not as strong as her earth magic. In fact, it was still in intermediate level since she chooses to only focus on her earth magic. But her fire magic is about as strong as an advanced level fire mage''s fireball. She has been training with us much longer than the others after all. About few months since she has be our friend.


    The one who received the ball don''t have the magic to protect himself from the fire, so we lose one point. Or is it that Celestine purposely aiming at the man since she''s well-versed in seducing people with her body?


    Even I who should be able to react quickly, is unable to take my eyes off of her. Actually, I did. But my Divine Vision is focusing on her.


    Now that I think about it, unlike Veronica who detested to be used by the cult for her body, Celestine only detested how the cult treat the orphans. She doesn''t mind with men ogling at her breasts. She just won''t think positively about those men. That''s why I have always make sure to look directly to her eyes whenever we talked, while using Divine Vision to focus¡­ on other things.


    And now, she relies on me. and her hatred to men who only looks at her body, reduced. But if she has to use her body to win, she will do it. No wonder she picked a team full of girls with nice bodies. Scary¡­


    The men are useless in this match. I have no choice but to swap the two men other than me, with two women who wanted to y. After that, the match was intense but it ended with my win.


    What makes it good with being in a team filled with women is that they love hugging. So, when we win, we did a group hug. Nice¡­


    Though seeing my girlfriends'' eyes are not smiling is a little scary. What about that time when you all agree to get me as many lovers as possible? Is that a lie?


    We progressed to the final after that. We had several substitutions made already and now, no one from the original members is here except for me. the other teams also did substitutions as well. some of them are because they were knocked out by the opponent''s powerful magic. They needed to be treated by the healers.


    By the way, the opponent for the final is Albert''s team. Of course, he''s just watching from the sidelines and only give order to his yers. One of his yers is obviously Mustache. As for the other members, all of them are those who have deep loyalties to Albert.


    "Are you ready, Roy!? You will lose this round!" Albert proimed.


    "I will win easily." I said.


    There''s no way I can lose if I knew their weakness, right?


    Since this is the final, everyone stopped what they''re doing and watched the game with interest. Some of them also started to ce a bet. And I ced a bet on my team.


    The game started with Mustache serves the ball first. He didn''t use any magic to do it. Seems like it''s some kind of Albert''s strategy.


    Our team easily received it. Then a girl teammate passed the ball to me and I spiked it really hard toward Albert''s face direction. Even if he''s not ying, I can still aim for his face. It''s just one point after all.


    Mustache realized that the ball is going to Albert''s direction, and blocked it from hitting Albert. But the ball fell to his field. And that mean I got the first point!


    "Woohoo! That''s one easy point!"


    ¡­


    Why is everyone quiet? Even my teammates? We''re one point ahead, you know?


    "¡­Roy. Do you know that you''re evil?" Albert asked.


    "I do."


    "Sigh¡­ this is the first time that most people here know about it. that''s why everyone is shocked that you''re actually aiming at the king''s face just to get a point." He said.


    "Aiming at the opponent''s weaknesses is the basic fighting. Whether it''s a war, a fight, or even a game. Does no one know about this?"


    I looked at everyone. Of course, they know about it. But I guess none of them expected this to happen in a volleyball game with no reward at all. So, I continue speaking.


    "Rather, I''m worried. If they were shocked by just this much, what will happen when the war happened?"


    "¡­what about it?"


    Albert is smart. He should have known what I''m about to say. But instead of saying it himself, he let me do the talking. As for his goal in doing it, I guess it''s to let everyone knows what kind of person I am.


    "We still don''t know if there are more of those cultists in this kingdom. What if they are another evil noble? What if they are so close to you? Worse, if they are your friends, lovers, or families. I don''t think they can kill them. But I will."


    "¡­aren''t you just imagining it?"


    Damn! He''s good in acting! I guess I am as well. After all, what I said is not just my imagination. I think most people here already know, but I will say it.


    "Don''t you remember that guy whose name I forget? You know, the one who was supposed to be your personal secret guard? He''s actually a member of the cult. And not just that, he''s also aiming at your wife. And you kept such person so close to you without knowing anything. If it not for me killing him, all of these won''t happen."


    Now everyone here knows that I''m the wanted person, Ninja.


    It''s weird that we have such conversation during a beach volleyball match where everyone is barely covering their bodies.


    "¡­I guess you''re right. I pray such things won''t happen again. But if someone close to me is aiming for my life again, I hope you will be there for me again." Albert said.


    "I also hope that it won''t happen again. Come on! It''s time to continue the game!"


    After that, I easily won the match. But at least after our conversation, everyone is more motivated in getting stronger. Although most of them are already tired, all of them choose to train. Individually, or in group.


    Nice. This way, just on the third day, I can tell that this training camp is sessful in getting everyone motivated.

 Chapter 263 - Teaching The Air Mages For Real This Time

    The next day, everyone returned to training. With me teaching the two air mages again. This time for real.


    The two air mages already know the limit of their air magic yesterday. After the volleyball match.


    Yeah, everyone became so motivated after that final between my team and Albert''s. It was amazing the effect of trying to smack his face to everyone here.


    I just wanted to smack his face with the ball. After that, I just made up reasons Why I did that. Valid excuses which only truths were spoken. Albert understand that, and he made me y along with him. Good thing it worked.


    Now, I am teaching the two air mages who has prepared to learn. I think even if I told them to go dive underwater again, they willply this time and not making excuse like not wanting their clothes wet again.


    We still train on the beach, but this time, it''s crowded with kids who yed volleyball. It has be popr activity for everyone. Other than the kids, there are some people who yed it when they are not training.


    "Now, the first thing I want to teach is Air Shot. I''ll give you each a rifle. I made this from the scale of a monster. Don''tin about how it looks. I did my best."


    I gave the two air mages one rifle each. I just need for it to has a barrel with one open end, a bigger ce for thepressed air, and a ce for the projectiles. I made it so it can fire a stone or pebble.


    "This look terrible."


    "Not cute at all."


    "You two are going to make me cry! If you want the real thing, it will look like this! I asked Marie to build some of these, but she has other things to create first. Just make do with those two!"


    I said while transforming Victoria into a better shaped rifle to show them. Once Marie prepared new rifles for them, those ugly rifles will be exchanged.


    "Sigh¡­ anyway, here''s how you do it. First,press some air in this area, then aim for the target, and burst thepressed air. That''s simple."


    I demonstrate how to use it, and aim at the target practice I made. The shot went right through the middle of the target. I did it again one more time and hit different target perfectly.


    "It''s simple. Justpress air, aim, and shoot. And it didn''t take much mana. I think you two can at least shoot about one hundred times at this stage. Today, your goal is to hit the target from twenty meters distance. That''s about the same distance that mages would cast their magic to attack their opponent. By the way, the recoil is pretty strong. It might affect the aim. So, hold the rifle as steady as you can."


    The girls already excited to try it. So, I asked Oleg''s wife to do it first.


    She aimed at the closest target, which is just five meters ahead. She fires the bullet, but the recoil is too strong for her. She stepped back just from one shot. As for her shot¡­


    "I hit it!"


    "No, you don''t! Your target is the five meters ahead, but you hit the one thirty meters away!"


    "Isn''t it good that I can hit from that distance?"


    "It''s good if you actually hit the one you targeted! If it''s the real thing, I will be the one who get shot when the war happens!"


    The one she hits was thirty meters away from us. And the practice targets weren''t set in one row. But some are on the right of the five meters one, or on the left side. As for the one she hits, it''s the furthest to the right.


    I''m worried that our ally will be the one who will get shot.


    "The recoil is too strong. I''m not strong enough for this." Oleg''s wifeined.


    "Then you need topress less air. That way, the shot will be weaker and you can''t shoot long distance. But at least you can handle the recoil. You don''t have to put the same strength on every shot. You can alter it between weak or strong. If you can''t defeat your enemy with the strength that you put, at least you can annoy them. Now, try again! This time, hit the one you aimed!"


    This time, Oleg''s wife put smaller amount of airpressed into the rifle, and shot the target. She hits it! Although unlike my shot, her bullet doesn''t pierce it. And it just grazed the side of the target. But at least it''s an improvement.


    "Good. Now, get used to it little by little. Practice until you know how much amount of air that you can stand, and the distance you can reach. Don''t bother much about the power. That can be taken care of once you get stronger. For today, your target is the one in twenty meters. Try to aim closer to the middle. Next, you!" I asked the agent to do it this time.


    "By the way, you haven''t said any of our names since the start of the lesson. Don''t tell me that you don''t remember our names?" The agent asked.


    "¡­my memory sucks. I won''t be able to memorize too many names." I said.


    "¡­fine. I''ll forgive you for that at least. His majesty already warned me about this."


    The agent forgives me, then she started to aim at the target practice.


    And what did she mean about Albert warned her? Don''t tell me that he''s actually making fun of me?


    I''m fine as long as I know your face, okay? As long as I know that you''re our allies, it will be fine.


    The agent tried to do it with ording to my instructions, and after witnessing Oleg''s wife''s practice.


    Her first shot missed by only a few centimeters. I guess that''s what I can expect from an experienced agent.


    Then her next shot was close to the middle of the target. And the bullet almost pierce through the target.


    "Well, that''s good. You both managed to do it after two tries. You can also put some other magicter. For example, wind magic to alter the direction, or fire magic to burn the bullet, and hit the enemy while it''s hot. I think that will give more damage to the enemy if the level of your fire element is low. Now, continue until you hit the target!"


    I ordered the two to continue shooting. I made another target so both of them can practice together.


    After one hour, the agent managed to hit the twenty meters distance target slightly on the edge, and Oleg''s wife just scratch the target. That''s good enough for me. They can practice on their ownter.


    "Alright, good job. Now we will practice other thing. We will need someone to practice this on, but I''ll teach you what you can do on your own for now. Does any one of you is a fire mage?"


    The agent raised her hand.


    "I see. Have you trained your fire magic yesterday? Or two days ago?"


    "Yes, I have."


    "Good. Create a fire on your fingertip. Concentrate while making it as big as you can."


    The agent did as I said. The fire is about the size of a human''s head. Which is pretty good since fire is difficult to control. At least that''s what I heard.


    "Alright. Keep concentrating and make itst as long as possible."


    Then put my hands close to the fire, and use air magic. I made non-mmable gas around it. just enough to make the fire smaller.


    "What!? How did this happen? I''m sure I''m giving my all in this!" The agent was shocked.


    "Actually. There are many types of air. Or should I say gases. I used air magic, to create non-mmable gas around your fire. Next is mmable gas."


    This time, the fire above her fingertip got bigger. So big that she can''t handle it anymore, so she has to stop her magic so it won''t go wild.


    "That one just now is mmable gas. Don''t think that air magic is useless. It can change the properties of air around you. What I can do is not much at the moment. mmable gas, non-mmable gas, sleeping gas, and some others. Since you have a fire element, the mmable gas is good to make your fire bigger. And if your enemy is a fire mage, you can make your enemy''s fire magic disappear into nothing. Air magic is awesome, right? By the way, I''m also a doctor. I can use air magic to relieve pain during surgery, and create anesthetic gas. For other types of gases, please ask Victoria. She knows much more than me."


    I said that as I let Victoria turns into her human form. She will be the one teaching them from now.


    I guess that mean I have nothing else to teach.


    While no one is looking, I opened a portal back to Cassau. I wanted to eat some sweets today. No one can bake a cake in that ind since there''s no ingredients for it. I''ll just make sure that no one knows about it.


    Oh, right! I''ll buy some sweets to bribe those who realize it. That should be good enough, right?

 Chapter 264 - Survival Training

    A week has passed since the training camp started. Today, we''re nning to explore the nearby inds for practice. They need to use what they learn on real target after all. Though some decided to stay since they don''t want to fight. Like the wives of the participants. Oleg''s wife also chooses to stay. They will take care of the children while the other will leave the ind.


    The n is to stay in other inds overnight. There are about 5 inds filled with monsters, so the participants will be grouped with anyone they want. As for me, I will watch them from above. I will move from ind to ind to check on everyone''s progress.


    The only monsters they have fought after training were just the Werewolves. And the result most of the time, the Werewolves win. Though some of the participants shows potentials and able to defeat a Werewolf in a one-on-onebat.


    But if they only fight against the Werewolves, they won''t be able to adapt in fighting against other monsters. That''s why they will try to survive in other inds. I will only help when it''s necessary.


    Lina and some other summoners only sent their monsters. I don''t know about tamers. Do they increase the level of taming element in the same way as summoning element? I don''t know. I didn''t ask some tamers among the participants. But those tamers decided to go so they can find strong monsters to make a contract with.


    "Alright! Now, go to your desired inds on your own!" I said as the opening of the survival practice.


    "Wait! You''re not transporting us with portals?" Albert protested.


    He will join the survival as well. Though, I doubt he will do much. The people in his group are those who are loyal to the king and don''t want Albert to do anything. But at least his intention in joining the survival is good. Well, Shirley and Mustache are with him, so he will be fine.


    "I won''t. You all have learned many things in the past few days. Why don''t you just build a boat, or even a bridge to cross the sea and get to your ind? Some of you have received a map to reach any inds in the area, right? Just go by yourself. It''s not like I can use portals to help you at all time. The time limit is in two days. In two days, if some of you haven''t returned after it''s dark, only then I will find you and bring you back here. You can return anytime you want before the time limit. It''s just a training after all. Let''s see¡­ I will patrol the inds every hour. When it''s night, I will only patrol once or twice. If you want to return, but have difficulties in returning on your own, give me a signal. I ced some Blobbies and pouches filled with soil for contacting Sonia, in some ces I think safe. Just tap the pouch once to call Sonia, twice for me to open a portal to that Blobbies so you can return, and three times if it''s an emergency. If it''s an emergency, I will go there with portal right away."


    I informed everyone about the rule during the survival training.


    "As for your meal, think about it yourself. You can go to your destination anytime you want. That''s all from me. Good luck."


    After finished telling everyone about the rule, I went to go diving for a bit. There are lots of giant pearls near this ind. I haven''t finished getting all of them yet.


    As for patrolling, I can take my time. And I don''t think anyone here is stupid enough to leave right away. They must be getting some supplies first before they leave. Water and foods.


    By the time I get enough pearls, I surfaced and see that some people are already leaving. Some are using boats made of earth magic, some fly with wind magic, and some freeze some part of the water and walk. They are all have be more creative than before. It''s also a lesson that I taught after finished teaching summoning element and air element. Just like what I taught Jewel before she awakened her magic. To do anything you can with your abilities.


    Don''t tell me that I''m talented to be a teacher? If so, that''s awesome!


    "Roy, what are you thinking?" Sonia asked me after I resurfaced from the sea. She''s been following me for a while already. Or more like following Victoria.


    "I''m thinking that I might be a good teacher." I said proudly.


    "Hah! If you can''t even remember the name of your students, you are not a good teacher at all!" Victoriaughed.


    Hmm¡­ she''s right. Well, doesn''t matter. I prefer to be a clown.


    I think Thomas has found some people with potentials to be in the circus. Though they will need to be tested first. If they can perform well, Thomas will consider recruiting them. And those people are all Albert''s agents. Which mean that once Thomas'' circus troupe went on tour around the world, they will be doing some scouting around the world to find the whereabouts of the current cult''s HQ and their researchb located.


    But it will still take some time until the world tour can be achieved. Thomas need to make his circus famous in this kingdom first. Once the circus'' fame well-known to other kingdoms, the circus will start its world tour.


    Now, it''s finally time for me to patrol.


    There''s only one way for me to be able to patrol five different inds quickly. By running on air.


    Right now, I''m just barely faster than Shelia, the fastest Werewolf. I won''t let her surpass me anytime soon though.


    I run on air with a ck Slime on my shoulder, and a ghost by my side. It seems like everyone is doing fine since no one has contacted Sonia.


    Everyone should be going to the safe ce before exploring any further. Well, that''s how a normal people would n. Some might have prepared a camp, and some only passing by to memorize the location where I put the Blobbies at.


    First ind.


    Albert is here. He''s doing well with his group members defeating the monsters. He only defeats the leftover. Even Shirley defeated more monsters. Seems like even if this is a practice, no one is willing to put the king''s life in danger. As for the princess, even when the others told her that it''s dangerous, she''s still going forward to defeat monsters on her own.


    That''s not the n Shirley would have made. She must have been irritated since she''s not getting any action. She should have joined another group.


    As for other groups in this ind, they are doing fine.


    Second ind.


    I see Kron is flying alone. He''s always said that he''s bad in group battle and would choose fighting on his own. I want to greet him mid-flight, but it seems he''s being targeted by a monster with a long-range attack from below.


    ¡­he''s doing fine. I won''t bother him.


    Oh, the air mage is here. She''s the agent. And she''s supporting his group and sometimes other groups as well by sniping them from distance. From what she shows me, I think her Air Shot is effective within fifty meters distance. Nice.


    This ind is done. Next is the third ind.


    I said that this ind has the most beautifulndscape despite the monsters. That''s why almost everyone here is girls. There''s no other group. Just one big group enjoying having fun in this ind. Seems like they take turns in having fun and being on watch duty. Well, I don''t mind them doing this.


    The leader of this group is¡­ Celestine and Veronica. Along with the girls from my n. Ka, Sophie, Candy, and Jewel. But the one doing the leading is either Celestine or Veronica. Maybe one of them is the vice leader? As for Shirley, she''s with Albert. And Ang is at the fifth ind. Which has the strongest lineups of monsters. Lina is staying behind and sent Elsie and Sunny to this ind.


    The fourth ind¡­ is where Hill''s people and Oleg''s people is.


    They seem to have a friendlypetition. With Hill as the leader of one side, and Oleg with the other. They tried to defeat more monsters than the other. I think that''s a good idea. But why is Hill and his people only in their underwear? That''s poison to my eyes.


    The fifth ind.


    Ang, Shirley, and other Werewolves are here. Including some people who want to test their limit, I guess. Some of them are already injured. Good thing that they have some healers with them.


    The healers are quite strong in their other elements. Maybe they''re mainly focusing in their other elements first before improving their healing element.


    Ang and the Werewolves were not in a group. They choose to separate. Just like Kron, but against harder opponents. Well, Kron also having it hard when he''s being targeted by multiple monsters already. Maybe Kron''s goal is actually to get more experience when he''s being surrounded?


    I guess everyone is doing fine. I''ll go back to the vi and patrol againter.

 Chapter 265 - Sharks Attacks

    It''s survival training for the others, and I don''t want to waste my time watching over everyone. I said that I will patrol every hour, but that''s a lie. Other than the fifth ind, the other inds are not as difficult. Unless the participants are extremely unlucky, there''s nothing wrong will happen.


    As for Ang and the others in the fifth ind, although they were initially Went off on their own,ter, they group up together. Seems like they know their limit. Well, other than the Werewolves who choose to keep fighting on their own.


    Although they decided to group up, whenever they encounter a monster, they would take turn in fighting it. After one monster is defeated, the next mage will step forward. When there''s a monster one mage can''t defeat, the next mage will help.


    As for the Werewolves, they keep getting injured in fighting strong monsters. But their recovery rate is fast enough to get them healed for the next fight. That''s why I know that everyone will be fine.


    And while everyone is training, I''m also training. It''s not like I''m always cking.


    But unlike the others, I am in a location with even stronger monsters than those in the fifth ind. It''s under the sea.


    Around the second ind, it''s infested with a lot of shark monsters deep underwater.


    There are small sharks, shark Fishmen, Shark-Octopus hybrid, Shark with legs, Shark with arms, and many other types of sharks. What I don''t get is that every time I encounter a shark, Victoria seems happy and would sing. But the song she sang doesn''t have any lyrics and was just doo doo doo. Probably another thing from her world. Again, just what the hell is wrong with her world?


    As for me, I''m fine with fighting these sharks. Each of them has unique style of fighting. But in the end, I''m still getting bored. Especially since shark doesn''t taste that good. I want something I can eat and taste good!


    By the way, there''s a reason why I stayed here despite being surrounded by these sharks. It''s because I felt someone is watching me.


    Right, I felt it. Not saw it.


    Even when I''m using Divine Vision to the fullest, I still can''t see whatever is watching me. and whenever I tried to get closer to the source, the numbers of the sharks approaching me increased.


    There''s one time that I can barely see the thing that watched me. It has a fish tail. Probably another kind of fish monster. Maybe another shark monster since these sharks keep annoying me. But I don''t think that''s the case.


    I know since I keep fighting these sharks that sharks have vertical fin tail, which when they swim, they would swing it left and right. But the one watching me has a horizontal fin tail that swung up and down. Like a dolphin or whale.


    Don''t tell me that''s a mermaid?! I don''t know, but if there''s a monster I canmunicate with, I would love to meet them.


    And the main reason why I want to catch up with the one watching me is because of its eye. Since it can see further than my Divine Vision while being underwater, I can guess that that thing has better eyesight underwater. If I defeat it without using magic, my Divine Vision could be improved again.


    But it keeps running away whenever I tried to get closer. Or is it swimming away? Even with my speed, that thing is still faster than me. I''m curious about what that creature is.


    I guess I would never know if it keeps escaping from me.


    If that thing has an eye that can see well only underwater, I would have surfaced, and look at it from outside of the water. But right now, I''m way too deep and my Divine Vision won''t be able to reach this far. If I can''t reach that thing today, I will give up.


    Damn, these sharks are persistent! And Victoria won''t keep her mouth shut either! Now that doo doo doo is stuck in my head. Please don''t let the next one a shark so she will stop singing!


    And my wish¡­ wasn''t granted. This time, I encounter a shark with a turtle''s shell. And it''s difficult to defeat it.


    Even when I tried to attack its head, it will hide is head inside the shell. And that shell is much harder than the Giant Smander''s scales. Sea creatures are scary.


    I guess I can only give up on chasing the one who is watching me. This Turtle Shell Shark is annoying!


    I swam away from the watcher hoping that there won''t be any more reinforcement in case that one is really the one who called these sharks. I don''t know if it''s true or not, but at least the numbers of shark around me has decreased.


    I defeated the other sharks, and finally get a chance on a one on one against the Turtle Shell Shark.


    The weapon that suit against that thing is¡­ the drill I used to enter the Giant Smander. But this shark is much smaller in scale and move faster as well. Then, let''s try to fight it with Reizpear. My self-repair spear.


    I hold my spear with both hands, with my left hand holding the middle part of the spear, and my right is holding the end of the spear. This is a technique I practiced a lot in my free time.


    I can use it well with Victoria as my weapon, but I practiced it for Reizpear.


    I spun the spear with my right hand to the limit of the Reizpear''s endurancebined with my Aura, and hold the spin with my left hand so from the middle part of the spear to the tip, it''s still straight like usual. But from the middle to the end, the shaft is twisted weirdly. Some part even started to crack. And that''s when I stopped spinning the spear.


    I quickly charged toward the Turtle Shell Shark. The shark quickly hides inside its shell, but I still attacked it with Reizpear.


    Once I''m within the range, I let go of my left hand and pushed the spear with only my right hand. The spear was released from my restraint, and twisted while moving forward. This way, the effect will be like I''m using a drill to the shell.


    The spinning tip of the spear hit the shell, and drilled through the shell. The shark''s blood filled my vision. I feel so happy about the fact that I finally have a special move against strong armored opponents. Though in the end, Reizpear broke apart. Good thing it''s a self-repair spear. I instantly pour some magic so the spear returned to its shape again.


    It''s the first time that I used that move in a real fight. I need to remember the w I had when I used it so I can fix it. But overall, it''s a powerful move.


    If it''s outside of water, I can putpressed air behind my right hand, and burst it as I attack so I have more power. There are still a lot of thing I can improve in this move.


    But damn! If only I have the ability to remember in skill-learning as learning people''s name, I would be perfect. But I guess one can''t wish for everything.


    This move, when I tried to use it in ake, it made a small whirlpool. And this time, when I''m using it deep underwater, there''s a small whirlpool, but it''s stopped quickly by the water pressure.


    I guess that''s it for today. I can no longer get to that one that watched me, so I''ll leave. I also need to patrol on the inds to see how everyone is progressing.


    I quickly went out of the sea, and run on air to see each ind. From the first to the fourth, the number of people is decreasing considerably. I don''t think that they have given up.


    And when I look at the fifth ind, I can see the reason. Everyone is moving to the fifth ind to test against stronger monsters since the previous ind is not satisfying for them. Though some people are entering the third ind because of the view. They are rxing while taking turns fighting monsters. Well, that doesn''t matter as long as everyone is improving.


    On the fifth ind, I see that many people are there like I thought. They are doing their best fighting monsters there. Probably they thought that the previous ind wasn''t enough, so they move.


    Since there''s no one who has contacted Sonia, it means that everything is going fine. At least it''s good that the people are mainly in the fifth ind, and the third ind. Which mean I don''t have to go on the other three inds to patrol anymore. I hope they will stay in those two inds.


    I return back to the vi today. I''ll be patrolling againter. And tomorrow, everyone should be returning safely. I hope everyone will return on their own so I won''t have to pick them up.


    I''d like to take a rest, but it''s difficult. Especially since Victoria''s doo doo doo stuck in my head.


    I guess I''ll take a restter then.

 Chapter 266 - Survival Training Is Over

    Everyone finally returned on their own. None of them called for help, and no one choose to overstays. If there are any who choose to overstay, I''ll leave them be anyway. They are free to practice for how long they want. But they won''t be my responsibility to protect anymore.


    Everyone returned with a satisfied expression on their faces. Telling me that their training in this one week has been sessful.


    And so was mine, you know? I managed to use my new special move in a real fight. Although it needed some more improvement, it was considered as sess to me since I can break a shell that is much harder than the Giant Smander''s scale. I need to give a name to that technique. But I''m bad at it, so I will think it carefully.


    Those who stayed behind, weed them with a huge feast filled with any kind of seafoods that I got. But the shark delicacies seem to be ignored until thest second. The other dishes are more delicious after all. Though in the end, everything is gone.


    And while everyone is enjoying themselves, Albert stepped forward and make a speech.


    "Everyone, thank you foring. Tomorrow is a free day, and the day after, you will all return back home. Unless you have been assigned to other ces. I have given the order to some people to change the location they will be assigned to. They will also be given new tasks." Albert said.


    Seems like even today, he''s still doing his work as the king.


    "And we have an announcement to give you. Soon, universities around the kingdom will be epting new students. Some of you might think that going to magic academy after bing this strong is useless, but don''t worry! Soon, we will be holding a new event only for students of magic universities all around the kingdom! It''s a tournament to decide which university has the strongest mages! If you want to participate, you will need to be registered as one of the students of any university in the kingdom! If you think that you are the strongest, or you want to test your strength, go enter a university and participate. This only applies to those who haven''t graduated yet."


    So, this is the announcement he''s making, huh? Well, it doesn''t matter to me. I''m not participating after all. I mean it, you know? I''m going to a medical school after all. Although I''m already a doctor.


    "What are you thinking, Roy?"


    Ms. Wendy suddenly approached me and asked what''s on my mind.


    She''s also joining this training camp, and already getting along with many people.


    And since she said she want to be a teacher, I don''t think she will participate either. I guess we''rerade in not going to participate.


    "Just thinking that I''m d to not have to take part in it." I said honestly.


    "Hmm¡­ is that so¡­" Ms. Wendy smiled.


    I feel like her smile is scary. What is it? Is there something I don''t know about? Is this another one of Albert''s scheme to get me do some work? I''m scared.


    I feel like I have been scared a lot more often in this three year after returning back to the past, than my whole life in the previous life.


    "What is it? Why are you smiling like that? You''re scaring me!" I said.


    "Hmm? Nothing. I''m just happy with the result of my training. That''s all."


    Albert! Come here and tell me that she''s speaking the truth! Please!


    But Albert didn''t notice my peril and continue speaking about the tournament in the future.


    "The tournament is actually a preliminary. We can find out who is the strongest mage in the country with it. But after that, we will have a meeting with other kings to hold the world-wide tournament. The participants of this kingdom-wide tournament, will be carefully selected to participate in the world-wide event as well. Then, the strongest mage in the world will be decided! I believe no one wants to let go of this chance, right?"


    After hearing Albert''s announcement, everyone here shouted in excitement. Either they are male or female, everyone wants to have a go in bing the strongest. Well, except for me and those of my n who already know about this.


    No matter how strong I have be, I will still choose to be a coward. This time, I will survive no matter what and won''t pick any stupid decision anymore. Hopefully.


    "Of course, we have other goals as to why we will hold this tournament. The same as to why we all gathered here. It''s to destroy the Evil Cult!"


    After hearing this line, everyone quieted down. Seems like none of them have forgotten about this real goal. I''m so proud.


    "First, with the goal of bing the strongest, I hope that everyone, not just those who participated in training camp, but other people as well, to be stronger. The stronger we be, the more chance we have in destroying the cult!"


    Albert is stating the obvious here. Of course, when we be stronger, we have more chance of victory. But it''s easy to understand. Especially to those with low intellect. Like Ang and few others. As for the Werewolves, they don''t care about the tournament since it''s apetition between humans. But they are excited about the war instead.


    ¡­the war is still a long time, my friends. I hope they have enough patience to wait.


    "Second, the tournament will be a gathering of the strongest mages. We might be able to use this chance to find any cultists using this tournament as the bait. This way, we can reduce their power little by little. And during the world tournament, we might be able to get some clues about where they are hiding from the cooperation of other kings. Don''t forget that our real goal is to destroy the cult! We have to stop them from killing our beloved anymore! Only we can protect our beloved from them!"


    I see many people is holding their anger. They must be those who lost their beloved during the stampede. Some of them are clenching their fists. I see a man and a woman is hugging each other. I don''t want to know their story. Must be something tragic.


    "That''s why, for those who want to participate in the tournament, I wish you the best. For those who can''t participate, there are other ways to support your friends. Never give up hope. We will surely destroy that Evil Cult to the very core!"


    After that, Albert finished his speech and returned to eat with his wife and his children. The festive mood just changed into this serious mood. I''ll just eat until I''m full.


    While I''m eating, Albert who was supposed to be with his family, approached me instead.


    "What is it? I''m eating here." I asked Albert.


    "Girls'' talk. I can''t participate in it so I moved here." Albert said.


    We ate in silence for a while, and then Albert is the first one to open his mouth.


    "Roy, I want to thank you. As the king and also personally, as just Albert. As the king, I want to thank you for approaching me and informing about the future tragedy. With this, we can prevent more tragedy from happening." Albert said.


    "Hmm. I was just trying to let you do everything when I informed you so I won''t do anything. But it turned out this way where we have to cooperate together. Though it feels nice to do something good. I also managed to stop the stampede from destroying Melk and just received minimum damage."


    "Yeah. You keep wanting to leave everything to me even now. And you even did more than me. Sorry to keep pushing you on everything." Albert said.


    "Don''t worry about it. Though I will keepining whenever it happens. But if there''s a task that someone else can do, don''t give that job to me. I''m already busy with the n. Anyway, is that what you''re here for? To say something sentimental? I''m warning you that I''m easily moved to tears. You might see me cry and it''s pretty ugly." I said.


    "You''re admitting that you''re a crybaby? I haven''t thanked you yet as Albert."


    "It''s probably something like delivering the twins and saving your wife. What else? Letting Shirley join me? Babysitting Lana? I guess that''s it."


    "¡­yeah, that''s about it. Can''t I be the one who said it so I can see you cry?"


    "No. that''s why I said it first." I said.


    After that, Kron, Oleg, and Hill noticed us and joined as well. And the five of us started to talk nonsense and ying around.


    ¡­this is great. I''m enjoying my life despite the uncertain future.


    Unlike my past lonely life, I''m surrounded by my friends and have a lot of lovers. I feel that every day is a blessing.


    Oh, shit! I''m starting to tear up! Come on, hold it back! Please! Can''t let these people see me crying! They will make fun of me!


    The party went on until everyone is tired. Everyone is sleeping outside tonight. No one cares about building a shelter, or entering Albert''s vi.


    Whether it''s a king, servant, noble,moner, everyone is sleeping outside.


    As for me, I went for a dive. No one can see me crying underwater.

 Chapter 267 - Home Sweet Home

    "Bye! Good bye! See you next time! That one, I don''t want to see you again."


    Finally, the training camp is over. I opened a portal close to the city they were returning. And I waved to everyone who passed the portal.


    All of them have agreed to keep most thing as secrets. Except for the training methods which is useful for other people as well. But only to our other allies who were unable toe. And they can''t tell other people as well.


    Of course, there''s a limit to it. I told those I taught air magic and summoning magic to not tell anyone no matter if they are allies or not. Air element doesn''t mean much even if we keep it as secrets, but the portals from summoning magic is our trump cards against the cult. Though I think some summoners in the cult already capable of doing it since they will attack Monsters World in the future.


    It''s time for those from Mellian to return.


    "Roy! I''m gonna miss you!" Hill approach me with arms spread open as if he wants to hug me. Of course, I stopped him with my foot on his face.


    "I won''t. I''m extremely happy that you''ll be leaving. Farewell." I kicked him into the portal. Then the others from Mellian entered the portal as they bid their farewell¡­ while showing us their muscles. Enough with that!


    I have given everyone here the good training set to improve their stamina, and speed. Unlike those from Mellian in the past, whom I gave the training sets to make their body bigger. But when I gave the new training sets to them and told them that it''s mainly about increasing speed and stamina, they politely refused. Though I don''t know if flexing your muscles while saying no thanks is considered polite or not.


    ¡­actually, it doesn''t. Refusing while flexing your muscles is not polite at all. That''s just weird.


    Next is Melk. Oleg, his wife, and their baby. They actually brought their baby to this training camp. It''s a boy. And he''s getting along well with n. Well, their baby is just over one year old, while n and Lana are already two.


    "Roy, See youter."


    "Yeah, bye!"


    This time, our farewell is totally normal.


    "Roy, thank you for guiding me with air magic. Now I have power to protect my baby. Although I don''t want to participate in the war, I will try my best to protect my family." Oleg''s wife said.


    "Good for you. As for me, I don''t want to participate in the war, but there''s something that only I can do. I can''t escape from it. I''m so jealous of you¡­ anyway, good bye. We''ll meet again once your weapons are prepared. I''ll bring them to you." I said.


    There are two air element users here other than me. I already gave each of them the prototype of a rifle, but I don''t think that weapon is good for long. So, I had Marie to build new ones for them. Each of them will receive one rifle, and one pistol. Rifle is too conspicuous. But a pistol can be hidden under your clothes. Of course, I asked Marie to made them to be able to use anything small as the bullet.


    As for me, I also asked for a gun as well. Just for precaution since Victoria might be too busy toe with me one day. Though I hope that won''t be the case.


    I can use Air Shot without using medium like guns, but using it will increase my uracy. That''s why I asked Marie to build a custom gun only for me. I asked her to build it strong enough to be used as melee weapon.


    The happy family entered the portal. Then next is Ms. Wendy.


    "Hmm¡­"


    "Hmm?"


    "¡­why aren''t you entering?" I asked Ms. Wendy.


    "Oh, I have been ced in Cassau for my next mission. I''ll be joining your n then." Ms. Wendy said.


    "So, you received a teaching job in Cassau? Hannah will be happy when she knows that you will teach her two years from now."


    Hannah is thirteen years old now. It has been three years since I returned to the past. Hannah is now also has joined the physical training like Jewel did back when she asked me to be my disciple. And since she is often being surrounded by older women, she became more mature than girls her age. But she''s still ying with Daniel, Lana, and other children. The kids loved her as their big sister.


    As for Daniel¡­ he no longer asked to sleep in my bed anymore. Now he has his own room filled with toys and books. Sometime, the kids from the orphanage would sleep in his room. Which is why he no longer feel lonely. But now, I''m the one feeling lonely. Though I have girls lining up to sleep with me.


    "Well, not as a teacher. But as a professor at the magic school. I will be teaching some things I learned here to the students." Ms. Wendy said.


    "Is that so? I guess that''s great then. Once everyone improved considerably from your lessons, you will be praised as the one responsible for the students'' development. Or another teacher will be jealous of your achievements, and tries to get all the praises by saying that everything is their achievements. Good luck with that."


    "Ah¡­ that is too realistic. I can feel that it will actually happen." Ms. Wendy sighed.


    Well, since she won''t be going to Melk, I closed the portal after making sure that everyone has left. Next is the Capital.


    When I opened it, Marie enters first followed by the others. She brought n and Lana over to the capital. Lana''s existence is still being kept as secret, but because we gained a lot of allies, we can have one of the servants in the pce to pretend to be Lana''s mother. And when Lana and n were seen together, they will just say that Lana is a child of the servant, and since their age is simr, the two will be seen ying together more often. Though those two will still visit Cassau from time to time. Especially if both Marie and Albert are busy.


    Then, after Mustache enters the portal, I get a bad feeling.


    "Roy, take care of his majesty." Mustache said that and then he left.


    "Wait, what!? Albert, you''re not going?" I asked Albert.


    "No. I have business in Cassau as well. Bring me there with you." Albert said.


    "It''s not something that will annoy me, right? Please tell me I''m right."


    "I don''t know about that. Though it will benefit me. Let''s go!"


    ¡­seems like after these two years passed, Albert already prepared a lot of troublesome stuffs for me to do. He must have been holding back a lot of tasks for me to do until the two years mark is over. And today is the day he will give me troublesome stuffs.


    If I have to say, this is the part of my second life that I hate the most. Being depended upon felt great, but being depended on too much is annoying as hell. But if it''s for the peace of the world, I guess I will have to do it. But I will still refuse if it''s too troublesome!


    I close the portals, and all that left is those from Cassau. It''s finally time to go home.


    I opened a portal close to the city, and once everyone entered the portal, we all entered the city. Good thing the gatekeepers during this time are our allies. Everyone who is rted to those corrupt nobles who wanted to capture the girls are all dismissed or imprisoned. And the new noble in charge has recruited guards that can be trusted. Some of them are our allies who knows about the cult and fight with us. And they are the ones who couldn''t join our training camp.


    We greeted them on our way in, and I let the others to tell them the events that happened during the training camp. Then we continue to our base.


    "Home sweet home! It''s been a while since we''re home!"


    "What are you talking about!? You''re home almost every day!" Shirley shouted.


    I guess everyone knows that I keep going home from time to time. Let''s pretend I don''t know what they''re talking about. This way, they won''t ask for gifts.


    "Sam! Been a while! Is there anything I need to know since I''m gone?" I asked Sam who didn''t participate in the training camp, and keep working. Just like I said on the first time we met, I gave her riches. And now, she''s famous in town as the richest merchant. Though half of her actual ie went into me.


    "¡­it''s just less than twelve hours since you''re gone. No, there''s nothing new. Since you all have return, I will take my leave. Contact me if there''s something important."


    Just like that, Sam left. She''s such a workaholic. Though she still takes care of herself just fine, so we don''t need to worry about her. She''s still visiting Ruby from time to time.


    Everyone seems tired, so I suggest everyone to rest until noon. I hope by that time, Albert will forget what he''s here for.


    Oh, right! I guess Ms. Wendy will need a room since she will be staying with us from now.


    I let Lina help her move in. We will gather again for lunchter.

 Chapter 268 - Discussion About College

    We gathered for lunch and discussed our next action.


    "So, Ms. Wendy, will you be joining our n?" I asked.


    "Yeah. But my main profession will be a professor though." Ms. Wendy said.


    "Isn''t it the kingdom''s agent?"


    "As an agent, I have to do my task seriously. I have to think that teaching is my main job." Ms. Wendy replied.


    Although she said that, she has a smile on her face. She''s actually very happy being assigned to do a teaching job.


    "Between teaching Introductory school students and college students, which one do you like more?" Candy asked.


    "Well, I don''t know about college students since I haven''t taught them yet, but I think I will enjoy teaching them more. After all, Introductory school is optional. The students cane and go as they please. But for college, the students there should be those who are interested in learning. Though I hope that''s the case."


    "Well, if it''s you, you will be popr in no time. Just like when you entered Roy''s school as a new teacher. Be careful of the boys there. Most of them are children from nobility who thinks that they are better than anyone. Some of them might force themselves on you." Candy said.


    "After the training camp, although I''m not the strongest, I can handle some boysing on to me. And if I have some kind of difficulty, I can just ask Roy. He''s like the secret underworld boss of this city."


    Everyone looked at me after Ms. Wendy said that.


    "What? Of course, I will protect everyone here. But don''t expect that I cane save you every time something happened. And it''s not like I will know something about the college. I''m not going there anyway." I said.


    "¡­haha. Is that so?" Ms. Wendy smiled.


    "¡­you''re scaring me. Ever since Albert decided toe here, everything anyone said is scaring me. If you have anything to say, please say it and don''t keep it as secret." I said as I made eye contact with Albert.


    "I''ll tell youter. Don''t you have something to ask the others? I''ll wait until it''s over. Just treat me like air." Albert said.


    "You do know that I manipte air, right?"


    "¡­just treat me like a statue."


    "I used statue as a punching bag."


    "¡­Roy, you need to take care of your possessions properly. Anyway, just ignore me."


    "I always kick something I ignore."


    "Howe you kicked something you ignore?! That''s not ignoring at all!" Albert protested.


    Sigh¡­ in the end, I still have to listen to him, right? I guess I''ll ask the other first.


    "So¡­ everyone, what are you going to do? Will you enter college or no?"


    "I will enter Cassau magic academy. I will join the healing major, but I will try to enter earth and light elements ss as well. Anyway, with what we have and what the college can offer, there''s no point in going there other than for the tournament, right? College only gave some amount of magic stones, which we already have a lot of. From Roy diving into the sea, or from dungeon exploration. And we already have a lot of money as well. Any college we enter won''t matter." Ka said. And as usual, what she said is very logical.


    I only thought of going to medical school only for getting the medical license after all, so I don''t have anything to say about her opinion.


    "So, Ang and Shirley, you two were nning to go to the college in the capital, right? Are you still going with that n?" I asked Ang and Shirley.


    "Yes. I don''t know about other people, but this is my chance to fight the others here outside of sparring in the tournament. I will still attend the college there." Ang said.


    "As for me, I will attend while letting everyone knows that I''m the princess. I believe going to the capital is the best choice." Shirley said.


    "You can just go there back then with Marie, you know? You don''t have toe here first." I said.


    "But we have many things to bring. Oh, right! We''ll be using your house in the capital. It''s not like anyone is living there after all." Shirley said.


    "I guess it''s fine. I heard that there are multiple cases of people attempting to rob something from that house. Though it''s pretty much empty."


    "And give us a lot of allowance since you''re rich." Shirley shamelessly asked for money.


    "No. Your brother is the king! Just go ask him for money!" I pointed my finger to Albert.


    "She said that she wants to be independent. So, I won''t give her a single penny." Albert who has been quiet for a while suddenly spoke.


    "Statue doesn''t talk!"


    Going to college is fine, but why do I have to give them allowance? They can just finish quests from the guild.


    "Don''t worry. I won''t ask you anymore. I''ll ask Ka instead. Right, Ka?" Shirley said.


    "Sure. I''m the one managing Roy''s financial. I will make sure that everyone received their share fairly. Like usual." Ka said.


    "What do you mean by everyone!? And why is it usually like this? Don''t tell me that you have been taking money all this time from me!"


    "Don''t worry about it. Everyone does. It''s not like you need to have so much money for yourself." Ka said calmly.


    ¡­I need to keep watch on the money I have. Always!


    "Sigh¡­ so, what about everyone else? Who else is going to college?"


    "Me! Me! Master, I''m going as well! But I''ll take the exam for magic academy here! I don''t want to go too far to the capital!" It was Jewel who said it.


    "I see. Anyone else? Candy? Sophie? Lina? What about Kron?"


    "I already have my degree. I can''t attend university anymore." Candy said.


    "I only have interest of serving my master." Lina said.


    "As for me, I''ll go to medical school. This way, I can assist you." Sophie said.


    "Nice! I''m looking forward to that!" I said.


    I will be the surgeon, and Sophie is the nurse. I can already see that I''ll be pping the naughty patients who tries to go for Sophie. And when I did, I will tell them that I''m a doctor. I can heal bruises. And then with Ka as well, we''ll be the perfect team.


    "I won''t go to school. I have allergic reaction to anything rted to education." Kron said.


    "Oh, yeah. That''s a terrible condition." I said sarcastically.


    I know the truth that he''s going to be the official of the tournament. Albert asked him because of his rank as a hunter. He will be the referee for the tournament. I think Hill and Oleg were also asked to be the ref as well.


    "As for me, I''ll go attend the ghost academy." Suddenly, Sonia spoke.


    "¡­ a what academy?"


    "Well, it''s more like a ghost town in Monsters World. They have be ghosts much longer than me. I think I can learn many things there. A Werewolf told me about this. She said that she''s interested in going there as well. She will be wearing a ne filled with the soil so I can go to that ghost town. So, if you need anything, it might take a while until I arrive." Sonia said.


    Seems like she doesn''t want to be left out and unable to do anything. Being our way ofmunication is already good enough, but she''s not satisfied with just that after watching us putting so much effort in going stronger.


    "Well, what do you think, Albert?" I asked Albert since the two of us are the ones who asked for Sonia''s service the most.


    "I think it''s fine. How long will the message be dyed? Just one hour, right? I think that''s already fast enough. Usually, it takes days for mail to arrive, you know?" Albert replied.


    "Then it''s fine. Juste back from time to time, okay?" I said to Sonia.


    "Yes!" She answered happily.


    "Now it''s my turn, right?" Albert said.


    ¡­I guess I can''t escape from this, huh?


    "What is it that you want to say?"


    "Actually, for the extension of your medical license which will expire soon, you will have to attend Cassau Magic School. You will have to go to air element ss." Albert said.


    I kind of guessed that that was what he will say to me. Attending magic school. But just air magic? That mean it''s still impossible for me to attend the tournament, right?


    "You will still be considered as a special student in the medical faculty taught privately by a doctor, but you will be the teacher in air element sses." Albert said.


    "¡­what?"


    "Well, assistant teacher to be exact. But you will be the one who mainly teaches. The dean of medical school, is also the dean of the magic school. And he''s also the headmaster of the Introductory School. He has three status since those position meant nothing. Most educated people would just go joining the magic research school instead. You know, the one that teaches students to invent something new? Since if the students inventing something new, the teacher''s name will be spread as the one responsible for the students'' upbringing." Albert continued.


    "¡­what?"


    What does that matter with me being a teacher? One week and I can''t remember the name of just two people. But now I have to be a teacher for real?


    "Anyway, you will be Wendy''s co-worker. Get along with her, okay?"


    "¡­what''s the reason for me to be the teacher?" I asked.


    "Well, the dean who watched your surgery before, is also an air element mage. He''s the professor of air element sses as well, but there''s no students there after the first ss. He wants to get the students to be interested in air magic, and you gave him the chance to do that. Though he will mainly watch your lectures since he also doesn''t know much about air element." Albert said.


    So¡­ the dean is actually my enemy! He''s the one destroying my peace!


    "Let''s go meet him right away. He''s also someone we can trust with our n. You wille as well, Wendy."


    That''s how I got forced to be a teacher. Or was it a professor? An assistant professor? A lecturer? Whatever it is, it means that it''s impossible for me to skip sses like I thought I would do in medical school.


    Two years will pass soon, and my peace will be over as well¡­

 Chapter 269 - Meeting The Dean Again

    And so, we''re going to have a meeting with the dean from before. Since I''ll be teaching soon, I should get to know his name first.


    "Albert, what''s the dean''s name?" I asked Albert as we''re going to the academy district to meet him.


    "His name is Dean." Albert said.


    "Dean is the dean? I guess that''s easy to remember."


    "You''re not going to react by saying something like he''s suited to be a dean since he was born?"


    "Why should I? I should be d that he has an easy to remember name. I''ll thank his parent if we meet."


    Since I can''t escape being a teacher if I want to keep my medical license, I will need to find a way to cooperate with the dean. Let''s try asking him to schedule my ss just once a week. That should be enough.


    "Roy, if you''re thinking of bribing the dean, it won''t work. He''s quite famous in education world as someone who doesn''t take any bribes. Which is why some people from nobility hated him, and he''s loved by themoners." Ms. Wendy said as I was thinking of bribing the dean.


    "I''m not thinking of bribing anyone, but how did you know so much about dean Dean?"


    Albert twitched when I said it. He knows I''m lying.


    "I''m an agent specialized in espionage. I need to know about someone who is going to be my boss. And don''t call him dean Dean in front of him. He doesn''t like it. Just call him Dean." Ms. Wendy said.


    I guess bribing him won''t work then. But if I said that I will show him my medical skills, he might change his mind. I won''t bribe him with money, but I will bribe him with knowledge. That''s fine, right?


    By the way, there are three of us going to meet the dean. Albert, Ms. Wendy, and I. Since the dean is someone that Albert says that he can trust, he''s going to introduce Ms. Wendy as well. Whether he''s going to tell the dean about Ms. Wendy being an agent, I don''t know and I don''t care.


    Anyway, my goal is to be a doctor. A licensed doctor. As for to build a clinic or hospital, I don''t have any ns yet. At least I want to spread future knowledge of medical skill, medication, and surgery methods so that the development of medical knowledge will improve. And I might not need to heal patients anymore since there will be many people who can do it. That mean I can focus being a clown in the future. Nice.


    We entered the academy district, and see many people, mostly in the early 20s, walking around. There are also a lot of cafes and restaurants in this district targeted toward the students. I often went here only for those cafes and restaurants.


    Even though Albert is walking around openly, no one noticed that he''s the king of this kingdom. In fact, everyone''s eyes are focused to the beauty, Ms. Wendy. And since I''m walking beside Albert and Ms. Wendy is walking behind, everyone just thinks that Ms. Wendy is either my or Albert''s servant.


    "Wendy, if it troubles you, you can just walk beside us. If you can''t walk directly beside me, walk with Roy in between us." Albert said.


    Ms. Wendyplied and walk beside me.


    "Should we hold hands so people will think that I''m your son?" I asked the two jokingly.


    "¡­no one will think that you''re my son. Instead, people will think that I''m the third-wheel since you two walk side by side." Albert said.


    Everyone watching must have thought that Ms. Wendy will be a student. But no, she''s going to be a professor. I can hear some of the men started to n on how to steal her from me. First, she''s not my lover. Second, she''s way too powerful for anyone here. Please if anyone want to be stupid, do it in front of me so I can enjoyughing at you.


    We arrived at the campus, entered the building and went directly to the office. He''s there doing some paperwork so fast. No wonder he can handle multiple jobs at once.


    "We''re entering." Albert said without knocking on the door.


    "Ah, your majesty! Pleasee." Dean said.


    "It''s funny how no one noticed that you are the king on our way here." I said as I took a seat next to Albert.


    "It''s obvious since I never make my appearance public here. Even thest time I''m here was incognito. And it was because Shirley and the others are being targeted." Albert said.


    "That''s right. Most people in this district are youngster. Either they are children of a noble, ormoner, none of them ever has the chance to meet your majesty." Dean said.


    I guess that''s right. It''s not like there are many chances for other people to meet Albert. As for me, I met him when I sneaked into his room. Awesome, right?


    "So, why are we here?" I asked.


    Albert looked around first, then he looked at me. I guess that mean he''s asking me if there''s someone eavesdropping us.


    I look around with my Divine Vision, and see that no one is here. So, I nod my head as the signal.


    "So, Dean, is this room safe?" Albert asked Dean.


    "What? Yes. This room is safe. Anything that goes here can be kept secrets."


    I guess Dean noticed that we''re about to say something serious.


    And then, Albert started to speak about the future, and how I came from the future. I guess he wants me to have another ally I can trust with my secret. And he''s also well-known as well. It will be useful for him to know more.


    Albert also told him about the tournament.


    "So, I want your name to be listed as the founder of this tournament. Is that okay with you?"


    Dean is silent for a while. Then after thinking, he nodded and agree to Albert''s demand.


    "Fine. But I need to know everything about this tournament first so I can answer every questionter." Dean said.


    "It''s nice of you to do it. It will give you more work to do, but I will expect great things from you. We also need evidence of your involvement. So, I will need you to write a proposal to me about the tournament as I said. Then I will give you a reply, and you will get to have an audience with me. After that, we will ask other universities to join the tournament." Albert said.


    "I understand. There are many things that doesn''t make sense at first. But if I consider Roy is someone from the future, it started to make sense. I will trust your majesty''s decision in trusting him."


    Then Dean looked at me.


    "So, your medical knowledgee from the future? I''ll tell the professor in medical faculty that you are raised by a great doctor as the reason for your extraordinary knowledge. Is that okay?" Dean asked me.


    "That''s fine. This way, the others will be less suspicious toward me. By the way, why am I here?"


    "You''re here to take the test so you have the qualification to teach here. There are no other professors here who are air mages other than me. I''m the one responsible in teaching air element. I can pass your test right away, but I need some evidence that you took the test. So, this is just for formality. As for Wendy, someone else will test you. You have to pass it with your own power." Dean exined.


    A test, huh? I guess that''s fine if it''s only for formality. Dean will pass me anyway.


    "What is the content of the test?" Ms. Wendy asked.


    "It depends on the examiner. But what you''re going to teach is mostly battle-oriented magic, it will probably to test your power."


    "What about me?" I asked.


    "You just need to be able to hold your breath underwater for fifteen minutes. By the way, you will actually be registered as a student as well. I will say that you have quite exceptional use of air magic, and that''s why you will teach other students. After all, to teach here, you need to graduate university first. But you hadn''t. That''s why you need to at least be a student here for at least two years. After that, you can graduate anytime you want." Dean exined.


    So, it means that I still have a chance to enter the tournament? I don''t want that! I looked at Albert and he just looked away. You told me that I will be a professor, not a student! Damn it! This king is a con-artist!


    "As for teaching, you can hold lectures as much as you want. If you want to only hold lecture once, that''s fine. Twice, that''s fine as well. But the rule of a teacher or professor is to teach the student as much as possible. Please finish the ss only when you have told everyone everything you can share." Dean said.


    "That''s fine. So, when can I hold the test? Can I do it today?" I asked.


    "Anytime you want. You can do it today as well. What about Wendy?"


    "I''ll do it today as well." Wendy said.


    "Good. Go to the arena. That ce is mostly used for practical exam for the students. And no one is using it during other times. I will go get the examiners for Wendy''s test." Dean said.


    "Then, that''s everything from me. Roy, take me back to the capital." Albert said.


    After using the portal to transfer Albert, we left the office while Dean is still shocked from seeing the portal. I know where the arena is, so I don''t have to ask for direction.


    When we arrive at the arena, it is empty as Dean said. But not for long. Once the information about the tournament spread, this ce will be used for practice more often.


    And even if I''m a student, I won''t participate!

 Chapter 270 - Recruitment Test

    Ms. Wendy and I both are waiting for dean Dean and the examiners to arrive in the unused arena. He said that this ce is only used for practical exam. And other times, there are no one is here at all. After all, once mages learned something, they would choose to use it right away on a real target. Which are usually monsters. I hope there''s no bullying here.


    Every student who attended magic academy would have already signed as a hunter. Which is why sometimes, I see that most of the quests in the guild are taken.


    I don''t know what needed for students here to graduate. Exam? Writing papers? Or just after a few years, they would automatically graduate? I''ll ask Ms. Wendy for now.


    "Ms. Wendy, what are the requirements to graduate here?"


    "Hmm? Back during my student day, I just need to be able to use my magic well. To pass the minimum damage to the target like back during your exam when you hit eight on the target. Although it was optional for you before, it is important for college students. And you also need to write a paper about something you learned here. I guess that''s it? There''s no time limit on how long you can stay as student. But the longer you stay, the more people willugh at you. By the way, how much do you know about college?" Ms. Wendy asked.


    "Not much. I only know about graduating medical school, not magic school. After learning everything, I need to be an intern at a hospital or clinic for a year. After that, wrote a paper and that''s it. Please tell me more about college." I said.


    "Well, first, you can just call me Wendy. We''re no longer teacher and student. We''re co-worker. As for college, let''s see¡­ anyone who passed the exam can attend any ss they want. There''s no restriction. And obviously most student would only pick the ss with their element. Every Monday, there will be a new schedule posted on the board. You see the board as soon as we enter the university, right? That''s where important information like schedule and other things are posted. Every lecturer woulde before weekend to write their schedule for the next week. Some of them only teach once a week."


    I can see the board from here. And there''s indeed a schedule posted there. So, once I became a teacher, I can just write the schedule there and decide when and where I will teach, huh? Hmm¡­ I think I will be assigned a ssroom. That mean I will only teach there, right?


    As for the format, anyone can enter any ss they want. Not restricted to their elements. Doesn''t that mean that anyone even those without air element can attend my ss, and they can just teach what they learn to other people outside the ss? I guess that''s show how easy education can be spread. But the fact that most people doesn''t know mean that those who learned it are toozy to teach other people.


    Magic school has be more and more useless to attend. It''s better for everyone to just hunt monsters outside. The only good thing is that everyone will receive resources every month. Which is why mostmoners would attend college.


    Then, Dean and two other examiners arrive.


    "Alright, let me introduce you two to your potential co-workers if you passed this test." Dean said as he introduced the two examiners.


    Though I don''t care about them. It''s not like they will try to cause trouble to an air magic professor. I don''t know if they will cause trouble to Ms. Wendy though. I mean Wendy. I need to get used to it. Having two lives of calling her Ms. Wendy made it stuck in my head.


    The two are lecturers of wind magic and fire magic respectively. The wind mage is so old. I guess he''s looking for substitute after he retires.


    Well, doesn''t matter. I''ll just take my own test. Wendy can take care of herself.


    "So, where should I dive?" I asked Dean.


    "Wait. I''ll build a pool for you." Dean said.


    Dean casted an ice magic to create four walls to surround me, then he casted a water magic to create water and sunk me. I should have taken off my clothes first beforehand.


    "If you can''t hold it any more, just knock on the ice block on the top. I will release you then." Dean said.


    Then Dean covered the top with another ice magic.


    I see¡­ no wonder the test is just fifteen minutes. No one should be able to hold for too long in this cold. But for me, it''s easy. I just need to cover myself with Aura. I will still feel the cold, but at least it''s better this way.


    And so, I just stay inside the box full of water as I watched Wendy took her test.


    The two examiners are discussing something. I don''t know since I''m terrible at lip reading. And there''s nothing I can hear here. I''m trapped in a box.


    The fire mage examiner who is still in his thirty I guess, is saying something to Dean. ording to my experience, he''s bootlicking Dean. He wants to gain his favor. Probably saying something like how awesome his magic is and how smart he is for proposing some kind of test.


    None of the two examiners here are cult members, but I already hate that one.


    The two examiners then started talking to Wendy and Dean. Dean looked at Wendy, and Wendy says something after nodding. I guess they are exining to her about her test.


    Both Wendy''s wind element and fire element have reached advanced level. So, it should be easy for her to pass the test. And her strength is way above average advanced level mage. Combined with her experience, it should be a breeze for her to pass.


    Then, the examiners prepared several targets. Why are there many of them? And not just ones that will calcte the strength of the attack received, but also a normal wooden target that can be destroyed. What is the test?


    Seeing how the fire mage examiner is smiling, I think it''s his fault. He probably doesn''t want Wendy to pass the test. Just as she said, she''s already being targeted.


    Why? I guess it must be because she''s a beauty. Once the students know that there are two lecturers, they will obviously go to the prettier one. Then once everyone knows how good her lesson is, everyone will go there.


    I think the test has started.


    So, it''s just Wendy moving around quickly with wind magic, while attacking targets with her fire magic. That should be easy.


    Wendy started the test. She quickly moved around from one ce to another as she casted simple Fireball to attack the targets. I see that the targets are much stronger than the ones back in Melk where I only rated 8. Probably it can reach even higher than ten thousand.


    And just as I guessed, Wendy''s simple Fireballs hit the targets, and each attack has about 12000 points on average. That''s just Fireball! If she used even stronger magic, that target will be destroyed!


    The wind mage examiner and Dean looked at Wendy proudly. As if they found a treasure who can lead the students to be even much stronger. But not the fire mage.


    He seems to beining to the other two. So, he''s just here to make things harder for Wendy, huh?


    Seems like Wendy will have another test. But I think both the wind mage and Dean already agreed to ept Wendy. I think she''s already safe as a wind magic professor. But the fire mage is stillining with bitter look. I''ll just enjoy him being facepped from this ice box.


    They prepared even more targets, and even obstructions. Seems like that fire mage is also an earth mage. He used Earth Wall to build several obstructions. Now, Wendy can''t go toward the targets directly. She needed to maneuver during flight, or during her run.


    Then, as the test started, the fire mage started attacking Wendy. He''s shouting something. Most likely an excuse to let him do whatever he wants. But that''s not enough to stop Wendy who aspire to be teacher.


    Wendy keep dodging the fire mage easily as she attacked the targets. She quickly finished all the targets, but the idiot fire mage keeps attacking her.


    He finally stopped after he exhausted all his mana. Then he''s being reprimanded by Dean. It''s a shame that I can''t listen to them.


    Then Wendy tapped Dean''s shoulder, and pointing at me. Oh, right! How long have I been here? It should have been more than fifteen minutes, right?


    Dean looked my way in panic, and shouting something. Probably telling someone to destroy the ice wall.


    Wendy shot a Fireball, and the Ice Wall on that side is destroyed. The water leaked out, and I finallye out while looking rxed.


    "How long has it been?" I asked.


    "It has been one hour! How do you feel? Sorry that I forgot about you." Dean apologized.


    "Don''t worry. I actually quite enjoy the show. If there are more things to show, I think I will stay there for some more hours."


    Dean just smiled wryly to my remark.


    "Anyway, you two have passed. Come backter so I can inform you about your duty. I think you need a change of clothes." Dean said.


    Yeah, I''m drenched. I guess I''ll go home now.


    "Wendy, you''re going home?"


    "No. I want to explore the campus first. See youter." Wendy said.


    I look for an empty area, and use a portal to go directly to the base. Though I need to walk back to the campus since I haven''t nted any Blobby there.


    After I return back to the campus, Dean and Wendy are already waiting for me. We''re only here to listen to Dean''s exnation about sses. I can give lectures anytime I want since Dean gave me a ssroom, but Wendy need to discuss the schedule with that fire mage and that wind mage.


    And that''s all for today. I''m now officially a student, assistant professor, doctor, businessman, hunter, and clown. I''m a busy man.

 Chapter 271 - Test Examiner

    Today is finally the day for the entrance exam. And as the assistant professor of air element, whose professor is the busy dean Dean, I will be the one to see the practical exam.


    The exam is simr to what I did before, but it won''t be inside an ice box. It will be just a normal pool, made of Blobbies. So, fifteen minutes underwater should be easy.


    Though after this, once ss has started, they will just attend ss at least once, then they won''te back again thinking that it''s worthless to learn more about air element. They will just attend other sses while enjoying the privilege of getting magic stones.


    I remembered how I took the test to be an assistant professor. Dean forgot that I was also took the test while he is being awed with Wendy''s performance. His reaction was quite funny.


    It was cold, but I have experienced even colder water way deep into the sea. There are even times when I faced a monster that can freeze water. But as long as I can defeat them before they freeze the water, it was easy.


    It is now the time for the written exam. Unlike before when I took the test in the arena, right now I''m behind the campus in an empty area. I can see everyone is trying their best for the exam from here clearly. Ka and Jewel were put in different room. I can even see Sophie in the medical school campus. She''s trying her best as well.


    The questions in the exam were easy. As long as you listen during ss in Introductory School, everyone is sure to pass. As for Sophie''s exam, there are some simple questions about human anatomy. She studied it with me so I''m sure she''s fine with those questions.


    I guess I''ll wait until the written exam is over. It will still go on for another two hours. I should take care of some things I can only do.


    Cleaning up some cultists.


    Since it''s the time for entrance exam, there should be many people entering this city. And obviously, some cult members are here as well.


    But the question is, should I kill them right away, or not?


    If I kill every cult member, it would end up alerting other cult members.


    For example, if I kill someone who tries to take the entrance exam, it will alert a fifteen years old cult member who is going to awaken their elements soon. They can''t use magic yet, so they obviously won''t have any explosive device in their mouth. It''s useless for those who can''t use magic after all.


    I''ll just inform the agents in this city about those cultists'' existence in this city. They will take care of everything. Even making the cultist''s death looks like an ident. I will just start killing after school starts.


    Oh, right! I should inform Veronica and Celestine to never leave the house without disguising themselves. They need to wear ttening underwear every time they left the house. They are too famous. Who knows if some of the cultists that entered this city are their worshippers?


    They only looked at the girls'' bodies instead of their face. So, I hope no one recognize them from the face. But it''s rude to remember people only from their body!


    I''d like to call Sonia to inform the two, but she''s in Monsters World right now. Attending ghost academy? She has been there most of the time since that time we had discussion about one month ago.


    She said that there are some ghosts who want to be exorcised? I''ll go there after she finished learning everything. Do your best, ghost!


    I quickly returned to the base to inform Celestine and Veronica. Celestine is ying with the orphans, and Veronica is taking a bath. Hmm¡­


    Oh, shit! No time to watch her bathing! I''ll just have Celestine inform Veronicater.


    "Celestine, what are you doing?" I asked as I approached her.


    "Just ying with the children. Is the exam already over?" Celestine asked.


    "No. Just informing you to be careful since there have been many neers in this city."


    "I see¡­ it''s time for entrance exam after all. Have you seen any of them?"


    "Some. But I want you to still be careful. Tell Veronica about this to. Do not forget to disguise yourself before leaving the house. Even if you are just ying with the children." I said.


    "I understand. I''ll go get changed soon. Good luck with the test." Celestine said.


    "What do you mean good luck? I''m the one examining the test."


    "I mean that the students who take your test should be prideful bunch since they already know that they can pass the test. They will make fun of you instead for being a professor who doesn''t teach since they will leave your sster." Celestine exined. She knows since that''s what we discussedst night over dinner.


    "Hmm¡­ that''s right. But I''m fine with it. I''ve told you before that I''m a clown, right? A clown''s duty is to make fun of everything, while also being made fun of. By the way, Thomas'' circus will soon perform. You haven''t seen me perform, right? After four or five times performing, I will finally perform again as a guest clown. I can''t join right away since if everyone thinks that I''m the main member, the standard of performance will raise high. That''s why I will just asionally be the guest clown. I still need to inform the agents about the cult members here so I''ll take my leave. See youter!"


    I left the base and start looking around the city for other cult members. I should have done this every year, butst year, and the year before that, I just walked around in the middle of the school year when I identally see someone with explosive device in their mouth. That''s when I search around the city. I only look around once I found someone with explosive devices in their mouth. If I hadn''t found any, I wouldn''t conduct a patrol.


    I guess it mean I need to patrol more often. Sigh¡­ I don''t want to do that!


    Even if I leave them be for a while, it''s not like they will suddenly start a genocide. I''ll just do it like usual and patrol once I found one.


    After patrolling and informing the agents, I return back to the campus just in time for the written exam to be over. I returned to my post next to the Blobbypool and waited for the exam takers to arrive.


    ¡­I should build a Blobbypool from time to time for the children to have fun. It''s not like I can always bring everyone to theke or the beach. Especially since I''ll be busy from now.


    Finally, a group arrive. What is this? They agree toe together?


    Oh? The female agents that I taught is also here. She looks surprised when she sees me. I guess Albert didn''t tell everyone that I will be teaching here. Let''s pretend we don''t know each other, okay?


    Seems like she noticed my intention and nodded. As expected of my student!


    For now, I''ll greet everyone first.


    "Wee to the air element magic practical exam. I''m the examiner here, Roy."


    "Hey, Roy! Can''t you just pass everyone here? I have gathered all the air mages who take the exam. I hear that we can pass easily just from this exam. Just pass everyone here and you will be praised by your peers that everyone has passed. Then you can rest easy since you no longer need to monitor us. That''s a win-win situation, right?" A man who seem to be the leader, stepped forward and said so cockily.


    I guess that''s cool he gathered every air mage here, but he''s annoying.


    "It''s true that you can pass easily. But you need to take the exam no matter what. Don''t worry, this is the easiest exam. The only way you can fail is if you are not an air mage. You just need to stay underwater for fifteen minutes. You can dive inside the pool, or just dunk your head. This test is easy, but it took times. So¡­ one, two, three¡­ there are eleven of you. That''s more air mages than I expected. You can all take the test together since the pool is quiterge. That way, the exam will be over sooner, and everyone can go home. How about it?" I exined the rule to everyone.


    "There is no way I would dive in there! As I said, just pass us already! There''s no need for a test that has a hundred percent rate of sess!"


    The cocky man is angry. Why? Don''t tell me that he''s actually not an air mage? He gathered everyone thinking that I would be afraid, huh?


    I have got an idea.


    "Why are you so insistent on not taking the test? Don''t tell me that you''re not an air mage, and just here thinking that you can pass if you gathered every air mage who take the exam? That''s stupid. By the way, once you''re here, you have to take the test. If not, you''re already considered failed the exam."


    "You! You''re just a stupid professor who doesn''t teach anything! Don''t talk back to me!" Cocky man is angry.


    I looked at his nametag. For the exam, everyone must wear a tag. And cocky man''s name is Mason.


    By the way, I just find out today that the female agent''s name is Sara.


    "I guess you failed the exam, Mason. Congrattion on being the first mage who failed air element practical exam. Good luck in your other exams." I said.


    Once you take an exam, you can do other exams as well before it''s dark. It will increase exam takers'' chance in passing.


    "You! I will remember your name, Roy! I will tell my Papa about this!" Mason said.


    Did he actually just say Papa? That Papa must be spoiling his son too much then.


    "So, the spoiled cocky brat has left. The rest of you are really air mages, right? Just take the test. If you want to do it faster, just do it all together. I prepared a towel for you. Just dunk your head into the pool, and wait fifteen minutes. That''s all."


    After Mason left, the other exam takers no longer care about him and just take the test. All of them passed easily.


    And it seems like that cocky brat is really not an air mage. After he left, he tried other exams, and failed terribly. He just wanted to pass easily by pretending to be an air mage. I guess I will face his Papater. Should I call Albert?


    For now, ten people pass, and one failed. I guess I should wait in case there are other air magesing. It''s the most annoying part of being an examiner. Maybe I will wait while practicing new tricks for my future performance.

 Chapter 272 - Cassau Magic Academys Entrance Exam

    During the time Roy is watching the practical exam, this is what happened with the two other members of Wolf''s Crown who take the entrance exam in Cassau.


    Ka and Jewel went together to take the test, and they entered separate ssroom for the written exam. There are about one thousand people who take the entrance exam for Cassau Magical Academy, but the number of people who are epted is just three hundred of them. Just 30% of the exam takers.


    From those one thousand, about thirty of them are among the participants of the training camp who live in or near Cassau. Those thirty, other than Roy''s n members, are in the know of the tournament ahead, and aiming for the title of the strongest. Though, only half of them still remember the real goal of the tournament. To fish out the cult members from their hiding spot, and to motivate more people to get stronger for the future war.


    Dean has sent a letter formally to Albert, and Albert has formally epted the tournament. Now, they are already sending invitation to all magic academy in the kingdom to join the tournament.


    While Dean is in the capital, Albert also contacted the dean of the capital''s magic academy, who is actually a participant in the training camp as well, to cooperate. The dean of the capital''s magic academy has agreed to join. Now, they only need the agreement of several other magic college so the tournament will take ce soon.


    But as the magic academies never have anypetition among themselves while the magic academy at the capital always imed to be the best academy in the kingdom, most academies will agree to participate in the tournament to take the title.


    As for the venue, it will take ce in Cassau as the founder of the tournament. And Albert will ''officially'' watch the final of the tournament. He''s nning to watch other matches as well by utilizing Roy''s portal.


    Back to the exam, Ka and Jewel both have finished their exam and reunited at the entrance of the campus. Both of them gained a lot of attention, but they just ignored those who attempting to get close to them. And those who forces the girls are punished by the girls.


    "Jewel, which exam will you take?" Ka asked Jewel.


    "Master said that Beastform mages are very rare. I can easily pass the test just by informing the examiner that I have Beastform element. So, I guess I''ll watch you take the test and then go to Master''s ce. He must be bored. Which one will you take, Ka?" Jewel asked.


    "All of them. Starting from healing, earth, and then light. Passing more than one test will give more chance to be epted. If one can pass only one element, but that element is amon one like my earth element, and they can''t pass other test, they might be failed to be epted since there would be other people who passes multiple exam. You''re fine since you''re a Beastform mage. But if there''s another Beastform mage, your chance in being epted will be lower. It''s better if you take the lightning element exam as well. I''m going for healing first, then earth, andstly is light element." Ka gave a suggestion.


    "I see. You''re right. I''ll inform the staff that I''m a Beastform mage first, and take the lightning exam. After that, I''ll watch your tests. I''ll see you on the beach for your earth element exam then." Jewel said as she left to inform the staff and go to the lightning element exam takes ce.


    Cassau''s academy''s district is connected directly to the beach, but the beach there is a ce that Roy never step his foot since there are many other beaches more beautiful and quieter than this away from the city.


    As for healing element exam, it takes ce in the biggest hospital located in academy district, Cassau University hospital. It''s located right next to the medical school which Sophie is currently taking exam at.


    And as Ka arrived at the hospital, he met Sophie.


    "Sophie, has your test ended?" Ka asked.


    "Yes. I''ve been waiting for you here. Come on, I''ll take you to the exam ground. It''s inside that tent next to the hospital."


    Sophie brought Ka to the exam ground, and once they entered the tent, they saw multiple goblins being restrained, and wounded. Seeing those, Ka has predicted what the exam is going to be.


    "Oh, it''s you!"


    Suddenly someone spotted Ka and Sophie, and hurriedly walk to the two.


    "It''s been a while! I thought you won''t go to college!"


    "Ga? It''s been a while since the stampede in Melk. You''re the examiner?"


    The one Ka meet is Ga, the healer who participated during the stampede in Melk.


    "Yes! After that stampede, I quickly graduated and became a hunter in another city. Then, I quit being a hunter and decided to teach healing magic in college. Since you''re here, and your healing magic is better than mine, I think you can pass easily."


    Ga brought Ka to a cage with a goblin in it. Sophie also watched from the side as she''s interested in seeing the test.


    "The exam is for healer to heal wound. This might be a little gory, but it''s the least we expect of a healer."


    Then someone who is also a female examiner, approached the cage and casted Wind sh toward the goblin inside. The goblin lost its arm as it was cut very cleanly.


    "¡­do you remember Roy?" Ka asked.


    "Roy? Isn''t he your boyfriend? Are you still together?" Ga asked.


    "Yes. If it''s him, he can connect the separated limb back together with his surgery. He''s also a medical student, and magic college student, while being an assistant professor as well there. Since you''re also teaching at the same college, you might meet him quite often. He''s terrible at remembering people''s faces and names, so you need to tell him first who you are then." Ka said.


    "What? You mean he''s the¡­"


    "Done. The wound is healed. Did I pass?"


    Before Ga finished speaking, Ka already casted healing magic to the goblin and healed the wound. Though she can''t connect the lost limb or regrow one, the healed area is very neat unlike what other healers can do.


    "So fast! And it''s very neat as well! Back then, your healing magic is already shocked me. And now, it''s shocked me even more! You have improved by a lot in these past years, huh? It''s easy to see that you did as requested. What are you going to do now?" Ga asked.


    "I will take the other exams for my other elements as well. Then, see youter." Ka said her farewell as she left the tent leaving Ga behind with the wind mages who cut off the goblin''s limb.


    "Yeah¡­ there''s no doubt that she will be epted. That was so fast that I couldn''t see when she finished her magic." Ga said to the other examiner.


    "¡­I saw it, but I still don''t believe it. She already prepared her magic while she''s talking, and the healing process is too fast almost like in an instant. She will undoubtedly be the best healer in the kingdom at least. Even I can''t do as good as she is even though I''m already advanced level." The other examiner said.


    "Ah! Professor think so too? Even back when she was still intermediate level, she was already exceptional during the stampede. If not for her, there would be many more casualties in Melk. I think it''s pointless for her to attend college."


    The other examiner is actually the professor of healing element. Without a doubt, Ka will be epted right away since the professor herself saw Ka''s magic.


    "You knew her from the stampede? After we finished the exam, I want you to tell me more about her. And her boyfriend Roy as well. I know that we received two new staffs, but I never thought that Roy is also a student in both magic school and medical school. I''ll treat you to a meal as a thanks." The professor said.


    Meanwhile, Ka and Sophie are already at the beach, and reunited with Jewel who had just finished her lightning element exam.


    "How''s your exam?" Ka asked.


    "It was easy! If Sophie tried it, she will also pass easily!" Jewel said.


    "Haha. But I''m not interested in it. I''ll just be a doctor and help Roy. I don''t want to participate in the tournament." Sophie said.


    "What a shame¡­ if you entered magic academy, then most of the members for the world strongest title from this kingdom will be filled with the members of our n."


    The three proceed to the earth element exam location as they chatted along the way. The next test is easy as well. one just need to use earth magic to protect themselves from the wave created by a water mage.


    While others have some part of the sand wall crumbled, Ka''s sand still stand still very strong without crumbling at all. She passed another test easily.


    "What''s next? Light element?" Sophie asked Ka.


    "Yes. I think that would be the easiest one." Ka said.


    The three entered the next location for light element test. And the test is the easiest one so far just after air element test. This one also has a high rate of sess.


    One just need to maintain their light for thirty minutes, without the light turned dim. The light''s brightness needs to be able to illuminate a room. If the light dimmed before the time limit and unable to illuminate the whole room, then they would fail.


    Anyone can enter the room, but only one person can try it at a time.


    The test is easy since those who have light element can illuminate their room or house every night used to illuminate the room. Those who failed are mostly those who rarely used it. That''s why the sess rate is almost as high as air element exam.


    And as usual, Ka passed the test as well.


    Then the three went to explore the campus ground.


    "Jewel, what''s your lightning element test?" Sophie asked.


    "Oh, I just need to strike as many steel rods as possible. Easy, right?" Jewel said.


    "Hmm¡­ I guess you struck them all, right?" Sophie asked.


    "Right! If it''s you, I bet you can do it as well. And even better than me!"


    The three continue exploring the campus, until they finally go to Roy''s location to apany him since they know how easy that guy feel lonely.

 Chapter 273 - Dont Cheat, Angela!

    While Those in Cassau are taking the entrance exam, the same thing happened in the capital as well. Ang and Shirley have been transported to Roy''s mansion in the capital. And they are not alone. Ian and Ruby were there as well. Ian will be the butler of the mansion.


    Shirley actually can just live in the pce along with her brother the king, but she would prefer to live with her best friend, Ang. That''s why the two asked Roy to live together in his mansion. And it''s not like Roy will live there anytime soon.


    "Good luck, you two. I will pray for the best to you two." Ian said to the two girls as they left the mansion.


    "Especially you, Ang. Make sure you answer the question very very carefully. Don''t be in a hurry to finish the questions you don''t understand. Just finish everything that you know first, and do the restter. Just take your time, okay?" Ruby said worriedly.


    "You don''t need to worry about me, Ruby. Just enjoy the capital while we take the test." Ang said proudly.


    Hearing that, Shirley got suspicious of Ang. She then grabbed and touched Ang all over her body, and even flipped her skirt and shirt.


    Meanwhile, Ian gentlemanly looked away from the event happening in front of him.


    "Whoa! What are you doing, Shirley!?"


    "Hmm? What are these? Cheating sheets? Are you going to teach during the exam?" Shirley asked angrily.


    "Umm¡­ Roy said that I will surely pass this way. If I write down everything that shoulde up during the exam on paper, and hide them with me for the exam, I will surely pass. Please don''t take them?" Ang pleaded.


    "No. You can''t cheat during the exam. No matter what, cheating is bad. And Roy is a bad influence. Don''t cheat during the exam. Everyone studied hard for the exam, and I won''t forgive anyone who cheats!"


    Shirley is angry. Rather than toward Ang, her anger is directed toward Roy who advised Ang to cheat.


    "Hmm? We still have time before the exam started. I have something to discuss with Roy first."


    Shirley then entered a room where Roy put a Blobby in, and tapped on the Blobby. It was still morning, and Roy was woken up by Victoria who shakes his body during his sleep, and told him that there''s an emergency with the Blobby in the mansion. Roy then quickly open a portal, and saw the angry Shirley in front of him.


    "Umm¡­ princess? Is something the matter?" Roy asked.


    "Well, you told Ang to cheat, huh?" Shirley asked.


    "Oh, that¡­ I thought I did something bad to anger you. I never asked her to cheat, you know?" Roy said calmly.


    "Really? Because there are multiple cheating sheets hidden all over her body. You said that it wasn''t you who taught her to do it?"


    "No, but I predicted everything. I know that if I told her to study, she won''t understand a single thing. But if I told her to write cheating sheets, she will have to wrote everything that she thought they would appear during the test. Unknown to herself, what she''s doing is called studying. I told her to hid the cheating sheets under her clothes, but I never told her to peek on them. Now, if she sees any questions that she learned while making those cheating sheets, she will know the answers. It will increase her chances to pass, right? I also predicted that if it''s you, you will find those cheating sheets before the test, and will throw them away. What I didn''t predict is that you will call me here." Roy exined.


    "Oh, I see. You''re right. Sigh¡­ Ang is actually smart, but she needed to be taught in a roundabout way. Alright, you can go home."


    "Now, you must have understood that you have to keep her mind on those cheating sheets, right? If not, she will forget everything she learned. Her socializing skill is high and she can remember people''s name unlike me. But on studying, her memory is way worse than mine. Good luck."


    Roy return back home as if he''s escaping. And since he''s already up, he has no choice but to go to the campus earlier.


    As for Shirley. She told Ang that she can''t bring those cheating sheets with her. Ang keepsining the whole time to the campus.


    As for Shirley, she knows that she has to keep Ang''s mind only to those cheating sheets. If her mind wanders off somewhere else, everything that she learned will disappear.


    ''What a troublesome friend I have! How is such girl can be a legend in the future? Well, her magic is exceptional. But her intellect is questionable on things other than magic and battle. She''s also has great fashion sense, and easy to talk to. Don''t tell me that Roy has been doing many things for her in this life? And now, it''s my turn to babysit her? ¡­I''ll ask Roy to write the manual on how to work with her. Sigh¡­ I thought I already know everything about her.'' Shirley thought.


    Shirley tries hard to keep talking about cheating, and they finally reached campus right before the exam started. Shirley sighed in relief that her work is done. Now, she can only pray for Ang''s sess.


    When the exam is over, the other students quickly went for the practical exam for their test, but Shirley is still sitting on her seat worried about Ang. And then, Ang approached her.


    "Shirley! It''s amazing! I know most of the answer for the exam! I must be a genius! This way, Roy can no longer make fun of me!" Ang said proudly as if she''s waiting until only the two of them remain.


    Hearing that Roy''s n seeded, and Shirley''s hard work on keeping Ang''s mind on track paid off, she let out a happy smile as she hugged Ang.


    "That''s great! You''re awesome! Roy will praise you a lot when we return! Let''s returnter tonight so you can receive his praise as soon as possible!" Shirley said happily.


    "Really? Ehehe¡­" Ang smiled shyly.


    No one knows that in Roy''s past life, back during the stampede on Melk, Ang lost her best friend. Someone whom Roy doesn''t know in both lives. And After her best friend died, that''s when she decided to study harder, work harder, and cultivate harder than anyone else. That''s how she became a legend.


    But now, that tragedy didn''t happen. Ang is now blessed with a lot of friends to watch her back.


    She might not be smarter like the Ang in Roy''s previous life. But after everything that happened and what Roy told her, she can focus more only on bing stronger. And in this future, she will be even more powerful than the Elemental Master in Roy''s previous life.


    ¡­but she will still need someone to guide her.


    Then they heard a knock, and someone entered the room they''re in.


    "Your highness, it''s me." The woman who entered the room, kneeled in front of Shirley.


    "It''s you from the training camp! You''re a professor here? You can raise now." Shirley recognized the woman as someone who participated the training camp. She was one of the summoners who was taught by Roy.


    "Yes. And the dean is also someone who participated the training camp. His majesty told us that you''re taking exam here. He said that it''s fine to not do anything. I''m just here to show myself." The woman said as she stood back up.


    Her name is Rinne. Professor who is responsible in summoning ss, and ice element ss. Since she will teach Shirley and Ang, she shows herself to them. Though during the training camp, it was those two who taught Rinne about ice magic.


    "You''re a summoner, right? Are you going to ask Roy''s help once your level increase?" Ang asked.


    "I am a summoner indeed. But I won''t ask him for my next monster. I will create a party with me to explore that Monsters World and find a good monster. We will still ask him since he said that will send us a Werewolf to guide us." Rinne replied.


    "I see. Well, are you an examiner for the exam?" Shirley asked.


    "No. I left the exam to the other professors. It should have started now."


    "Thanks foring. We''ll go take the test right away. You can go back to your work. From now, just pretend in front of everyone that you don''t know me. For you and the other staffs, I''m just a student here who is a princess. Just treat me like the other students. Probably to not make it suspicious, slightly treat me better than the others."


    "I understand. I wish you luck for the exams." Rinne said. Then she left the two and returns to her work.


    "I guess now it''s time for the other exams. Which one are you going to take?" Shirley asked Ang.


    "Everything. You?"


    "Same here. Let''s go and surprise everyone. Once we show them our power, I hope no one will bother us anymore."


    Back during their walk to the campus, many people tried to stop them. But Shirley was upied only on making Ang focus on the cheating sheets.


    Those people are either men who take fancy on those two, or some noble''s children who knows that Shirley is a princess. But Shirley just ignored them all, and Ang keeps begging for her cheating sheets. And then, after the tests are over, no one dares to go after them.


    The entrance exam this year was marked as the day where two exceptional students of the academy take the tests. A princess, and a monster who destroyed everything. But since she was too pretty to be called monster, she was called as an angel. Angel of destruction.


    If Roy is here, he will ask, "Where''s the Elemental Master?"

 Chapter 274 - Entrance Exam Is Over

    "Hmm¡­ Victoria, is there any other card tricks to do?" I asked Victoria.


    "There are many, but I''m not that interested in watching them before. I guess that''s it for now. How about using something other than a deck of cards?" Victoria suggested.


    "You mean two decks of cards?"


    "No."


    "Three decks!? That''s a lot!"


    "No! I mean like juggling with knives or bncing yourself on top of a huge ball. There are many other clown tricks that you can do with your physical ability. Just think of them yourself!" Victoria is pissed.


    Right now, I''m still waiting until the exam is over. After that ten people who passed, there are some other people who also tried the air element exam. But those peoplee individually, and not because someone asked them to go together just like the first batch. At least they were all good mannered. I hope most of them get epted.


    Since it was boring, I decided to wait while practicing new tricks for my future performances. Victoria taught me several tricks she saw in her world.


    "Fwah! That''s fifteen minutes! I passed!"


    There''s only one person who is taking the exam right now. And he just pulled out his head from the water just right on time.


    "Fifteen minutes and three seconds. Are you sure that you''re an air mage? The others before you are much better than that. Even the shortest was seventeen minutes." I said to the examinee.


    "I''m always bad in air magic. That''s why I never cared about it. I only take this exam so I have more chance in being epted." Said the boy who is about the same age as me.


    "That''s because you move around too much. The more you move, the more air you needed. If you stop moving, you should be able to hold for much longer. Probably twenty minutes or more."


    Air element doesn''t need much mana. It''s normal for someone with air element to be able to breathe underwater for one hour. The reason for it to be just fifteen minutes needed to pass the test is because if the mages have other elements, they would unconsciously store some magic so they can use their other elements that they thought are more important.


    I can hold for much longer from the start since my other element is summoning, which I rarely used at first until I can open a portal. And since Victoria was with me at all time, I don''t need to summon her. That''s why I can focus my magic only on my air element. And because I often went diving, my lung capacity has increased as well. I could stay underwater for the whole day! Awesome, right?


    "Yeah, but I don''t like water." The examinee said.


    "What do you mean you don''t like water? Do you have rabies?" I asked.


    "No. I just don''t like it."


    What''s with that ominous reply? Don''t tell me¡­


    "Hey, when was thest time you took a bath?" I asked.


    "¡­I think I''ll leave for the other test now. Thank you very much." He tried to escape.


    The man''s name is Alfonzo. I can see it from his tag.


    "Alfonzo, dunk your whole body into the pool. This is an order. If you fail toply, I will fail your test under hygiene problem." I said.


    "What''s with that!? It''s not like people have to bathe to live, right?" Alfonzo protested.


    "You''re right. But even if you pass the test, there will be no professors who would allow you to enter their ss. Alright, I will still pass your test, but I will report about your hygiene problem. Even if you have good marks in your other tests, you might not be epted. Good luck."


    Alfonzo left the venue angrily.


    In the entrance exam, the more practical test you pass, the more chance you have in being epted. Of course, if you pass only one element, but you pass with an excellent record, you will be epted as well even if your writing exam is terrible. But that doesn''t stop these examinees to take various tests. Unless they are extremely confident with one element. Or they have a rare element. Like Jewel''s Beastform.


    As for Ang, I know she can pass just from the practical exam. But she still needs to pass the writing exam as well or I will scold her harshly once she returns.


    As Alonzo about to leave, he stopped. I can see that there are three beautiesing this way. Though they are not here for the test. They are probably just here because they know I''m bored.


    He must be thinking of getting closer to them, but I won''t let him do that.


    "Excuse me,dies! I know that you''re here for the tests, but please don''t go this way. The examiner is a rapist who will attack any girls in sight. But if you still insist oning, I will apany you. I will make sure to protect you from that beast." Alonzo said.


    "The beast here is you! And stop flirting with my lovers or I will fail you for real this time!" I shouted angrily.


    The three beauties that have just arrive are Ka, Sophie, and Jewel.


    "What!? Lovers? That''s impossible! Why do you have lovers while I''m still single? And it''s lovers! Which means all of them!?"


    "Only two. The other one is my disciple."


    This guy is annoying. If he is a cult member, I would have killed him as soon as I saw him. Unfortunately, he isn''t. Though I can make him look like one. Should I?


    "There''s no way that''s right. After all, they are way above your level. That''s impossi-BUAA!"


    Alonzo was about to wrap his arm around Ka''s shoulder. And Ka obviously doesn''t want that so she kicked Alonzo in the nut. The Nutcracker is here!


    "Don''t touch me." Ka said.


    "Urgh¡­ that''s hurt. But I''m fine! My physics is much better than average people after all!" Alonzo said as he quickly stood straight up even though he was just kicked in the nut.


    "How about your mentality? Girls, I will introduce you to this guy. His name is Smelly, and he never takes a bath at all." I said.


    "Ew, disgusting!" Sophie said.


    "Urgh!" Smelly groaned.


    "Ah! Ka''s shoe just touched him!" Jewel shouted.


    "Shit. Disgusting. Roy, can I clean my shoe here?" Ka asked me.


    "Here''s the towel. As for water, you can scoop it from the pool with Victoria." I said as I hand her a towel and Victoria who has transformed into a bucket.


    "Guh! Is bath really that important!?" Smellyined.


    "Obviously."


    "Totally."


    "Get fifty meters away from me."


    Sophie, Jewel, and Ka answered respectively.


    "Uuuu¡­ I''ll remember this!"


    ¡­this is the first time someone said that just because he never takes a bath.


    "He never takes a bath? That''s just disgusting." Ka said as she''s cleaning her shoe.


    "I think it''s best for you to return back home. The people who takes the air element test here are¡­ exceptionally annoying." I said.


    "You''re right. I will go home now. What about you two?" Ka asked the other two.


    "I''m going as well."


    "Me too!"


    The three who have just arrived, left so quickly. I me it on the annoying exam takers.


    It seems like I will be alone again. Well, it''s fine. I have Victoria to help me learn more tricks.


    After waiting for a little more time, there are only few people who takes the test. And finally, it''s over. I can go home now.


    After dinner, Victoria told me that the Blobby in the mansion in the capital is sending a signal just like this morning when Shirleyined about Ang''s cheating sheets.


    When I opened the portal, it was only Shirley and Ang who wants to return. Ian and Ruby choose to stay in the capital.


    "So, what''s up?" I asked.


    "Roy, listen to this! I took the exam, and I understand the answer to a lot of questions!" Ang said happily.


    I know the reason how she can pass. I took a nce to Shirley and we made an eye contact. I understood it clearly.


    "That''s great! You will pass for sure!" I know that she will pass easily just from her practical exam. There''s no way the school will refuse her once they see what her magic can do. But I will still praise her.


    "Now, you can no longer make fun of me for being stupid! I''m so happy today! How about tomorrow we book a restaurant? My treat!" Ang said.


    ¡­that must my money she''s about to use. Is there any way for these girls to not use my money? I guess I''ll let her do what she wants. For now.


    While I was feeling dejected, Shirley approached me.


    "Roy."


    "What is it, Shirley?"


    "I can finally understand the difficulty of being a parent."


    ¡­yeah, if we look at it from the side, it looks like I''m the father and Ang is the daughter who seeks to be praised from her father. Unlike Lina''s feeling of love, Ang''s feeling is more like a kid who wants recognition from her parents.


    "¡­you''ll get used to it." I said.


    "Is this why you let her go to the capital with me? You want me to take care of her? If she''s alone, you will refuse to let her go, right?" Shirley asked.


    "You''re right. It''s good to have you here. She can take care of herself, but she would always use magic as the first resort in case something happened."


    "Sigh¡­ I''ll try my best. Please tell me more on how to take care of Ang. I never knew that you did so many things to her."


    "I''ll write you the manualter. For now, congrattions on taking the tests. Without a doubt, everyone here will be epted."

 Chapter 275 - Kings Meeting

    Everyone passed the test easily, but there''s an even more important event happening than everyone''s entrance exam.


    Back to two years ago, after the kingdom stopped several Stampedes that happened around the same time, Albert has prepared many things so he can report this to the other kingdoms.


    Back when after Roy and the others just saved Candy as they are trying to kill every cult member who tried to attack Ang for trying to breakthrough, they found out from interrogating the twins they interrogated that in a city in another kingdom, kingdom Arturo, there''s a recruitment for joining the cult. After hearing that report, Albert decisively sent out some of his trusted agents to spy on said kingdom.


    The result was¡­ they found nothing. The cult hides their existence well in that kingdom, and probably hides even better than the cultist in other countries. And that only makes Albert feel suspicious.


    He didn''t tell Roy yet about this since he''s still hasn''t found any evidence at all. And there''s no point in telling Roy at the time. They were not as close as they are today, and at the time, Albert still hasn''t fully trusted Roy yet. He believes everything Roy said about returning from the future, but he truly able to trust Roy after he helped Marie delivering her babies. Ever since then, as long as he doesn''t detect any lies from Roy, he would believe in anything he says even if they are just spections from Roy''s terrible memory. If it''s a spection, it''s Albert''s duty as the king to find out if the spection is right or wrong so he can protect the kingdom.


    Then, the Stampedes happened. And Albert used his sister, Shirley, to inform the citizens of Melk first, that the reason for the Stampede in Melk is because of the Evil Cult. By preparing a speech, and Roy''s excellent acting skill, the people believed Shirley.


    After that, the information of the Evil Cult was spread so quickly since Albert has prepared to do it before the Stampede. He regretted that he has to sacrifice a lot of innocent lives for this, but the result is that everyone in the kingdom realized their existence.


    Once Albert finished cleaning up the aftermath, he asked for a meeting between the leader of four countries in the continent.


    It is the continent of Ileri. There are many countries in this continent, but only four of them has the biggest territories. The others are just minor kingdoms that mostly stay under the radar.


    The four major countries are Tatrama Kingdom in the south, Arturo Kingdom in the east, Varadis Kingdom in the North, and finally, Consenza Empire in the north.


    And in the center of the continent, there''s a rich city that doesn''t belong to any of them. Not even a part of any minor countries as well. That city is a neutral city which must never be a part of any countries because of an agreement in the past. It''s called Lenko city, which is led by a Mayor which regrly changed every ten years.


    And whenever a major incident happens, and one of the leaders of the major countries asked for a meeting, it will happen in this neutral city of Lenko.


    And the meeting which Albert asked for after the Stampedes,menced in this city.


    In the meeting which is only attended by the leaders of each major countries, Albert informed about the existence of the cult. And he used his lie detection skill to see if any one of the leaders here is part of the cult or not. And the result is¡­ none of them are. Not even the king of Arturo kingdom which the recruitment for the cult should be take ce at.


    The four leaders then proceed to continue the discussion, and agreed to help each other in case they find any clues about the cult. And they also discussed other things.


    Now, over two years have passed. And Albert asked for another meeting. This time is to inform the other kingdoms about the tournament and the goal behind this tournament.


    Shirley and the others are taking the entrance exams in the capital, but Albert is away from the kingdom. He''s already in Lenko to wait for the other three''s arrival. He''s there with Miguel, and several other people as his bodyguards.


    "Wee to Lenko city, King Albert."


    The one who greeted Albert is Gilbert, the mayor of Lenko city. A huge over two meters tall man. He kneeled in front of Albert.


    "No need to kneel. Our position is considered to be equal even though you''re just a Mayor." Albert said.


    "I know. I just want to know the feeling of doing it. And I don''t like it. That will be thest time I will ever kneel." Gilbert said.


    "¡­I don''t hate that kind of personality. Have the others arrived yet?" Albert asked.


    "No. But they will soon."


    "I see. By the way, you''re free to join us for this meeting, you know?" Albert invited Gilbert.


    "No need. We, people of Lenko, doesn''t care about the life outside this ce. No matter what happened between other countries, it won''t matter to us." Gilbert said.


    "Shame. I thought of you as a friend."


    "You just think so because our name is almost simr. The difference is just ''A'' and ''Gi''. You said it two years ago."


    "Okay. By the way, is there anything strange in this city? Are there any neers from outside?" Albert asked.


    His goal ining early is to see if there are cult members in this city. If there are, it will be dangerous since four leaders of major countries will be here.


    "No. We don''t ept outsiders. We still let people in the city, but before dark, we ask them to leave. We don''t care even if they have to sleep outside or there are monsters outside. The only way for outsiders to live here is to marry one of the people here. I didn''t join your meetingst time, but I thought something bad is happening. That is why I told the people to not get married anytime soon. And those who have left the city in this two year, they are no longer considered as the citizens of this city anymore. Only the leaders of four countries, or their representatives, and their associates, are allowed to enter. But only when a meeting is scheduled."


    "I see. That''s harsh, but still a good idea. What''sing is something very dangerous. I hope you, and the future Mayor of this city, will continue to protect this city. You can go back do what you''re doing now. I want to take a walk in this city and look around. The meeting will only start in two days after all." Albert said. He never senses any lies in everything Gilbert said.


    "Okay. Enjoy your walk."


    Gilbert leaves Albert.


    Albert and his bodyguards then enter their mansion in the city. Each country leader has one mansion for when they have a meeting in this city. And each one is located simr to the location of their countries. And Albert''s mansion is in the southern area of Lenko city.


    Albert let his guards to rest, while he and Miguel will walk around the city. He wanted to make sure that no cult members here.


    He kept surveying the city until it''s time for the meeting. He didn''t find any cult members in the city. But he''s not Roy who can see through things, so he''s not so sure. At least with his glib tongue, he thought that he would be able to find someone. But so far, anyone who talked to him were not members of the cult.


    And then, it''s finally time for the meeting. Albert, as the one who suggested the meeting, arrive first.


    He''s inside of thergest building in the city, which only used each time a meeting urs. There''s only a waiting room for each kingdom, and a big meeting room with round table and four chairs around it. And a representative of their country can only have one bodyguard entering the meeting room. And of course, the one standing with Albert is Miguel.


    Among the four leaders, he''s the youngest person along with the Empress of Consenza Empire. But no one among these four people think of others as lower than themselves. Everyone is a leader of a country after all.


    The second one whoe after Albert is the Empress of Consenza, Lynn, and her female bodyguard.


    "Hello, King Albert!" Lynn said as she raised her hand as a greeting.


    "Hello, Empress Lynn." Albert did the same.


    "The other two haven''t arrived yet?" Lynn asked.


    "They will be here soon."


    Just as he said that, someone arrive. This time, he''s alone without his guard.


    "Hello, King Albert, Empress Lynn. Let''s ignore thest person and start quickly." The neer greeted the two as he raised his hand.


    "Hello, King Harold. We can''t do that. We need to wait until thest person arrive." Albert said as he raised his hand in greeting.


    "Hello, King Harold. You need to be patient." Lynn said as she raised her hand as well.


    The neer is King Harold. The king of Arturo Kingdom. A bald man with tanned skin.


    And finally, thest person arrives.


    "Sorry I''mte! Let''s start the meeting!"


    Without any greeting, thest person, King Henry of Varadis Kingdom, enters the room and take a seat right away. He''s the oldest one here. His hair has all turn white. He''s also alone like Harold without bringing a bodyguard.


    Albert, Lynn, and Harold ignored Henry''s impoliteness and take a seat at their own seats.


    And thus, the meeting begun. While three of them noticed that one person is an impostor. Since that person didn''t do the secret signal as everyone agreed.

 Chapter 276 - The Meeting Continues

    "Other than trading, we barely have any other connection with each other. And there''s also the fact that some people believe in their own country''s supremacy. Thinking that their country is much better and much stronger than other countries. And that''s led people especially in the border to keep having conflicts." Albert said.


    The meeting has already started, but despite there''s an impostor acting like the real leader of a country, the meeting continues normally.


    The other three know that one person is an impostor, but there''s nothing they can do at the moment.


    "So, you want to ease the people, huh? How?" Lynn asked.


    "How about those people do it themselves? I''m proposing for us to held a battle tournament between the strongest of each country. The winner will be crowned as the strongest. It''s that simple." Albert said.


    "A battle tournament! That''s a great idea!" Harold agreed to the idea right away.


    "Easy, King Harold. Albert hasn''t finished telling us everything." Henry said.


    Then, Albert continues.


    "Before that, what can you all tell me about the search of the cult that I had told you two years ago?" Albert asked.


    "I don''t know about any cult, but I received a new information about some kind of organization being active in the empire. And there are some Stampedes happening around the empire as well. I don''t know if they happened because of that Evil Cult or not. We''re still investigating it." Lynn said.


    "There''s nothing happening in my kingdom! I have told my people to eradicate anyone suspicious for being involved in a dangerous organization. There are many killings, but I don''t remember how much of them died." Harold said.


    "Aw, Harold! You''re such a tyrant! As for my country, I received no information about any organization or cult. I''m still working on it. Though, I don''t think there are any traitor around me. If there are, they would be dead already, or will die soon." Henry said.


    Albert listened carefully to the report from the three leaders and make sure that he didn''t miss any lies. Especially from the impostor.


    "I see. So, no one has found their location yet, huh? That mean we just need to prepare ourselves. Previously, it was Stampede. Who knows what strategy they will use next time? That''s why I''m proposing for a tournament. With the title of being the strongest as a reward, people will work harder to be stronger. And they can protect the country if there''s any danger like the Stampede or the cult doing something even crazier. And if we promise them more rewards, there will be even more people motivated." Albert exined.


    "Sigh¡­ I''m toozy for it. But there''s an unknown danger ahead, so I think I will agree to that. What a pain¡­" Henry sighed.


    Then, the four of them had a discussion about the tournament rules. And Albert also told them about the kingdom-wide tournament between universities as a test for the world-wide tournament.


    The meeting is over once everyone agrees to sent their representatives, and decided on the location. Further discussion about the tournament will be held again after the Tatrama Kingdom tournament between universities. They will hear the report about the tournament from Albert, and decide if they will follow the same format or will make new rules.


    "It''s over, right? Then I will return now. My people will be happy to get a chance to beat up some people from your countries! Ahaha!" Harold said and he left the meeting room.


    "Well, as he said. It''s over. So¡­ sigh¡­ fuck!" Albert cursed as soon as he knows that Harold left.


    The room is soundproof. Once you left the room and the door is closed, no one outside can hear anything that was said inside the room.


    "I guess Arturo Kingdom has been taken over then." Lynn said.


    "He''s good. His personality is the exact replica as the real Harold. But not just that he forgot the secret sign, he also called us Kings and Empress. This cult is too dangerous to be left alone." Henry said.


    "I was also suspicious of you, you know? Old man Henry. You said so many lies after all. Well, let''s take this somewhere else. If we stay here for too long, he will be suspicious. You know the drill, right?" Albert said. Then he left the room with Miguel.


    After him, Empress Lynn and her bodyguard left as well. And finally, King Henry left.


    Two years ago, Albert make them promise to remember a secret sign for them just in case an impostor trespassing the meeting. Although back then, Albert was still too young and seems impatient. He''s also suspicious of many things after hearing about the future from Roy. That''s why he told them to do the signal no matter what during the next meeting.


    Now that he has grown up a bit, before the meeting, he regretted what he did. It was too embarrassing for him. Even when he greeted Lynn the first, his face is red while Lynn has a teasing smile pasted on her face.


    But when Harold enters the room, he was lucky to get the others do the signal as he said.


    The signal is simple. Those who brings their bodyguard just need to raise their hand and greet the others politely. Being polite is not something that these people do. The four leaders of each country are getting along well. They will be polite when it''s in public, but in private, they all just good friends despite Harold being easily annoyed.


    Then, those who are not bringing their bodyguard will act impolite and curse at each other. As for between those who bring and those who aren''t bringing bodyguard, they will ignore each other until the meeting started.


    Henry didn''t bring his bodyguard since he wanted to tease Albert for the signal, but seeing Harold didn''t do as instructed, he was actually panicked during the whole meeting. So, instead of cursing Harold, he just kept quiet. That''s also why Albert was suspicious of him.


    But during the meeting, Albert knows that Henry is the real one because of his lies.


    Henry is an old man who''s already a king since Albert''s father''s reign as the king of Tatrama. And because of the rtionship between the four countries are good, Henry quite often visited Albert''s father in the past. And he and Albert get along really well. He''s also getting along with Shirley as well.


    It was back when Henry became so busy that he might not be able to visit anymore. He said that he will visit Albert soon who treats Henry as his grandfather. But Albert already able to detect lies at that time. So, Albert knew that Henry was lying, and told Henry naively how he can detect lies. Henry then apologized, and told him to keep his power as secret no matter what except for the people he can truly trust.


    That''s why Henry knows that he can just tell lies to Albert, and Albert can deduct the truth from Henry''s lies. And Henry only told lies during his report. Because instead of those who said only lies, those who mix the truths and the lies are even harder to trust.


    Those who only spoke lies can be trusted to only speak lies. But those who mix the lies and the truths cannot be trusted in which one is a lie and which one is true.


    After they all left, the four of them stayed in their mansion. But there''s an ancient magic tool in the mansion of each four leaders. It can only be activated by a drop of blood of the royalties. This is a secret only told from a parent to their child. Outsiders don''t know this secret. And even if they do, there''s nothing that they can do.


    The ancient magic tool will open a door to a passage that will lead the royal family to a secret meeting ce. The building of this secret passage has been agreed by the first leader of this city and the four country leaders.


    Albert entered his mansion, and bring Miguel to his chamber.


    "Don''t let anyone enters this room no matter what. Tell them I''m tired and need some rest. But if they say it''s something important, give a signal to Sonia. I''ll be taking her with me so if she sensed a signaling from you, I will return right away. I gave a signal to her this morning to return to this world for a while in case something happened. She should already be in this world. Let''s call her first."


    After telling Miguel to stand guard, Albert tapped on the ring on his finger. And soon enough, Sonia appears.


    "It was you who gave the signal? I have been waiting at home, you know. Good thing I''m not bored since Daniel is with me." Sonia said.


    "Sorry, but this is important. There''s a chance that a whole kingdom has beenpromised. I''m going to a secret meeting and introduce you to important people. I will give them a ring each so they can contact me." Albert said.


    "¡­are all those people all kings?"


    "A king and an empress. If you want, you can also tell Roy about this and the content of our meetingter."


    "Okay. But I don''t think he''s that much interested in it. He will just say that it''s your responsibility as the king and told you to do everything yourself."


    "¡­I guess you''re right. Let''s go."


    Albert poked his index finger with a needle, and dropped his blood on the magic tool. Then, without any sound, a passage is opened on the floor. The king and the ghost then entered the passage.

 Chapter 277 - Secret Meeting Of Kings

    "Sorry I''mte. Thanks for waiting." Albert said to the three people who are already inside the secret meeting room.


    The three people are King Henry, Empress Lynn, and her bodyguard, udia.


    "First, is it really okay for me to be here?" udia asked. She''s worried because she''s not a royalty. She''s just Lynn''s aide.


    "It''s better for you to be here. Lynn is a terrible without you by her side. Rather, if you''re not here, I will ask her to return and bring you back here." Albert said.


    Lynn was not as terrible as Albert said. But when she took udia to be her aide, she became a much better leader which can''t bepared to before. Lynn trusted her, and the other kings also decided that udia is easier to talk than Lynn. That''s why Albert and the other kings also trust her. Of course Albert trust her because of his ability.


    "I think it''s good that you''re here. That fake Harold''s reaction when he''s talking, it was as if he doesn''t care who you are. The real Harold would try to talk to you at all time. Even during a serious meeting. That''s just proofing that he''s a fake Harold. This one doesn''t even look at you." Henry said. He''s the oldest and the wisest among the four leaders.


    "This fake Harold seems to know the content of our meeting two years ago. And he also knows the real Harold''s personality and acted really well. But the fact that he doesn''t focus on udia one bit is disturbing. This will be our main discussion now. But first, I want to introduce you to someone."


    Albert tapped his ring and Sonia appears in front of him.


    "Nice to meet you, king and empress, I''m Sonia. A ghost." Sonia introduced herself to the people inside.


    In the passage, Sonia thought that Albert bringing her would shock other people inside. That''s why she suggested to wait with Miguel until Albert called her.


    "A ghost? I didn''t know that you''re a tamer, Albert." Henry asked.


    "I''m not. Sonia doesn''t belong to anyone. She''s actually¡­"


    Albert told the other three about who Sonia is and how she can be here without anyone taming her.


    "So, we canmunicate with each other as long as we have that ring?" udia asked.


    "That''s right. But it''s not the ring. It''s the soil inside of the ring. I will give Old Man Henry one, and Lynn one."


    As soon as Lynn received the ring, she threw the ring toward udia without hesitation.


    "udia, take care of it for me."


    "I understand."


    This is a normal event with Lynn and udia. Albert has witnessed it a few times.


    "You really trust udia that much, huh?" Albert asked.


    "I am. With all my life."


    Hearing Lynn''s answered proudly, udia has a happy expression on her face.


    "Well, I guess that''s fine. Now, about Harold. Does anyone know anything regarding Arturo Kingdom?" Albert asked.


    Everyone was silent. No one heard anything from that kingdom. Even the spies they put in Arturo never returned.


    "¡­let''s think of it as the worst-case scenario. Arturo has been taken over by the cult. As for the real Harold, he''s either had been killed, or he''s being restrained. Somehow, they can get information from the restrained Harold." Albert said.


    udie raises her hand. She has something to say.


    "Um¡­ everyone knows that King Harold has a thing for me, right? Though I don''t want to ept his feeling." udia said.


    "Of course you shouldn''t! You must always be with me! Don''t ever go to his or anyone''s side!" Lynn shouted.


    "I know, your majesty. Well, actually, he used to send me bunch of love letters and invitation to be his aide and wife. He started it about four years ago. He even asked me to be his fourteenth wife which of course, I refused. But he''s still sending his letters almost every month." udia said.


    "Fourteenth wife? He already had thirteen of them? Well, I know someone who had a harem, but not that much. Still, depend on how he encounters other girls in the future, he might even surpass that number." Albert mumbled to himself while thinking of his friend.


    "Actually, that was the first time he sent me a love letter. A few month ago, he asked me to be his twentieth wife." udia said.


    "Reject him! I haven''t even married, and he''s married six times in four years!? Kill him! Burn him alive!" Lynn said angrily. Though it was amon sight for everyone here to see Lynn sulking.


    "Lynn, first, he needs to be alive first for you to kill him or burn him alive. Anyway, udia, you''re telling me that he''s still sending you a letter until a few month ago and then he stopped?" Albert asked.


    "Yes. Thest letter was three months ago. But after this meeting with the fake him, I think he''s actually sending me a secret message. Especially since in hisst letter, he said that he finally gave up on me even after saying that he won''t give up so many times. I even brought that letter with me. here."


    udia put the letter on the table, and Albert read it.


    "Hmm¡­ I see. I don''t get any secret message from this letter. Maybe you will find it in the previous letters. Can you check on them?" Albert asked.


    "I will once we return."


    "Once you figure out the secret message, if there''s any, contact me Via Sonia. It might take a while for her to visit since she''s currently busy." Albert said.


    As he said that, Sonia interjected.


    "I will be busy in the next two months so during that period, it will take time until I arrive. But after that, I wille as soon as possible." Sonia said.


    "Oh? Your study is almost done? That''s good." Albert said.


    "Wait! A ghost studying? Is there a school for ghost?" Henry who has been quiet for a while asked.


    "More like a ghost town. The ghost over there are more experienced than me. they can even lift heavy object. As for me, I can barely lift this letter." Sonia said as she pinched the paper in Albert''s hand and lifted it.


    "I think this should be enough. I have a more important information to share. If we stay too long here, that fake Harold might be suspicious. I have something important to tell you. It''s about the friend I have. He''s the one who has a harem. He''s actually the man who told me about all of this."


    Without hiding any secrets, Albert told everyone here about Roy. About his special ability, and the fact that hee from the future. Then he also told them about Javier and Monsters World.


    He can''t afford to keep a secret if he wanted a cooperation. A cooperation between kingdoms will be difficult if one side keep too many important secrets. There are many things that should be keep as secret, but some things are better said to gain others'' trust.


    "Wait! You have twin children!? And your wife was fine after that!?" Henry asked.


    "Yes. It was a risky move since that''s the first time anyone actually tried it. But Marie is strong and decided to have both babies. Don''t worry, Old man Henry. Once he''s spread the knowledge of the treatments, no one will suffer the same thing that your niece experienced." Albert said.


    Harold''s niece had a pregnancy simr to Marie. She was pregnant with twin children. After giving birth to one, the other child died and she also died. That''s one thing that he regretted, and the reason why the development of medication in Varadis is much more advanced than in other countries. Most of Roy''s knowledges as a doctor are from books written by a Varaditian doctor in the future.


    "If we have the chance, I want to meet him." Henry said.


    "He''s azy man, but I will bring him no matter what in the world-wide tournament."


    "Beingzy is fine. As long as they are smart. If they are smart andzy, they will still try their best in working, especially to prevent them to work more. If they are stupid andzy, there''s only doom in front of them. I think your friend is a smart andzy man." Henry said.


    "Yes, he is. I will make sure that he can meet you and Lynn at least once no matter what. We can have hime here right away, but I think it''s best if I bring him instead." Albert said.


    He still keeps Roy''s portal as secret. Although he thinks it''s fine to tell those here, it''s best if Roy can show it to them.


    "I want to see him too! Ask him if the future me is still a perfect beauty or even more perfect!" Lynn said.


    "Your majesty, you have never been perfect. If you want to be perfect, you must do your duty yourself without involving me." udia said.


    "Don''t worry! I know what you want! You also want to ask him about the future you, right? I will ask him as well."


    Although the topic has changed, the mood turns brighter after Lynn acted as usual. She might not be as good as others in leading her country, but he''s best in brightening the mood like this.


    "Ahaha. I will make sure that you can meet him. I guess that''s it. For now, be wary of anything that enters and leaves your country. Especially if it''sing from Arturo. And never ever reveal anything we discussed here to anyone. The meeting is over. You can go back to your mansion." Albert said.


    Then, Lynn and udia left the room as they still bickering about.


    "I guess I need to work hard even in this old age, huh? I want to be a smart andzy man. Albert, let''s save the world together." Henry said.


    "Yeah. We will do it no matter what. It''s either we win or we die." Albert said.


    "¡­isn''t it obvious? After all, if we lose, they will destroy the world and kill everyone." Henry said as he teases Albert for saying something obvious.


    "¡­I think I get why I can get close to Roy easily. He has simr personality as yours."

 Chapter 278 - Roy The Swindler

    Crash!


    "¡­"


    Crash! Crash! Crash!


    "Stop doing it! I''m awake now!"


    It was the morning a few days after the entrance exam. The result of the exam will be outter, but I was forced to wake up early because there''s a ghost who just learned to touch objects, and she keep dropping tes and cups on the floor.


    Crash!


    "I said stop it! I know you''re happy since you can touch and lift some objects now, but that doesn''t mean you are allowed to destroy everything! You''re just like a kid wanting for attention." I shouted at Sonia who keeps dropping tes on the floor.


    "I am indeed wanted to get your attention. I''m returning back to the Monsters World now since Albert''s business is over. I''m here to inform you that." Sonia said.


    She has returned yesterday saying that Albert has some important business that needed Sonia''s assistance. I don''t know what it is, but I think there''s another annoying matter happening. And soon, Albert will ask for my help. I hope he can take care of it himself instead of asking for me to do it.


    "I see. Thanks for telling. But was it necessary for you to destroy all the tes and cups here?"


    "That''s not everything. There are still a lot of these. See? I''m smashing another cup."


    Crash!


    Sonia dropped another cup to the floor to proof that there are still other cups in my room.


    "Enough already!" I shouted.


    "By the way, why is your room has too many decorations?" Sonia asked curiously.


    "Back then, I used my room as a warehouse whenever I go outside by connecting my room with portal. So, there are many things here. Obviously, the girls didn''t like it. So, I take them all into the storage room. Then, my room be empty. Though I''m fine with living in an empty room, the girls didn''t like it. So, the girls decided to decorate my room with tes, cups, jars, and paintings. You''re the ghost of this building so howe you didn''t know?" I exined.


    "I made your room as a forbidden ground. I won''t enter there unless for something important. Anyway, I''m leaving now. Can you open a portal there so I can get there faster?"


    "So that''s why you''re waking me up, huh? Fine. Just leave quickly."


    I opened a portal to the Monsters World, connecting to a Blobby that is being carried by a Werewolf who apanying Sonia to the ghost town. That Werewolf is carrying a ne with the soil from under this building so Sonia can follow her.


    But as I opened the portal, I see the Werewolf. She''s sleeping. Naked. And I''m totally awake now.


    "Alright, you can close the portal now, or I will tell Victoria and the others about this."


    I quickly closed the gate not because of Sonia''s threat. Yes. I''m doing it because of my own will.


    But still¡­ looking at them directly is much better after all. No clothes to restraint the body so I won''t see the weirdly shaped parts. I like them no matter what, but if I have to choose, seeing them naked directly is much better.


    Anyway, I''m no longer sleepy. While It''s still early in the morning. Even Lina has just wake up.


    Since Albert has just finished an important business, if it''s rted to the cult, he will contact me. if not, then there''s nothing to do. Which is a blessing.


    I guess I''ll do my daily training earlier than usual.


    Even after three years since returning to the past, I never skipped daily training unless I''m busy. Though the time that I did the training varies. Sometimes it''s early in the morning like this, and sometime during the afternoon since I usually just wake up at that time.


    After I return from my training, everyone already wakes up and the breakfast has been prepared. Other than some people who are in the capital. Like Ang and Shirley since they are waiting for their result. And Shelia is also here since she said she wanted to have Lina''s fried chicken. I think it''s because fried chicken is the first delicious meal that I have given her.


    After breakfast, it''s time to go to the campus for the exam takers. It''s finally time for their result to be posted.


    I have no doubt that everyone, even those in the capital, will be epted. If not, I will question the examiners.


    And now, since the Introductory School has finished awakened all the students'' magic, I guess soon it will be the time for them to have the explosive device in their mouth. What a weird ritual.


    I think I''ll go patrol the academy district today and see if I can meet Ka and the others.


    I will have as much fun as possible while killing some cultists!


    I won''t do much in public, but I will find any cultists hiding in empty alleys and kill them.


    I left the house and quickly find two people in an alleyway. What a perfect coincidence.


    "Victoria, I found two people." I told my aplice, Victoria.


    "Are they strong?" She asked.


    "Neither of them reacted when I get this close. They are either good actors, or weaker than expert level mages."


    "Okay. We''ll do n A like usual."


    "Understood."


    We have been doing this every time I see new people in the city who has explosive devices along with Victoria. At first, I just killed them directly. But now, thanks to Victoria''s strategy, at least I can have fun doing it.


    ¡­not the killing part. Having fun killing people is a mental illness. What I meant by having fun is the process before the killing.


    ¡­that still makes it sounds like a mental illness.


    Anyway, it''s time to put n A in action!


    I walked into the alleyway, and intentionally colliding my shoulder to one of the guys walking there. Then I fall to the ground.


    "AAARGH! You hit me! Argh! It''s hurt! You just broke my shoulder! Argh!"


    n A, involve me intentionally colliding with the other party, pretending to be in pain as if I broke my bone, and asked the other party money for healing. Of course, I will ask for money and still kill the other party.


    Victoria said that it''s one of themon strategies of swindling in some short of fictional story in her world. As expected from that weird world! Even swindlers have some incredible strategies!


    I can see the two men are confused, and angry. One is about to attack me, but the other stopped him and whispering something. Probably something like don''t attract too much attention and just give me what I want.


    "Tsk! The shoulder that hits me was your right shoulder! But you''re holding your left shoulder!" The guy I collided with protested.


    "That shoulder is fine! But this one is because of falling! Now pay forpensate my broken shoulder! Argh! It''s painful! Argh!"


    How is it? My acting skill has been progressing well since I have been doing this for some time.


    While the guy I collide with is angry, the other guy stopped him.


    "It''s okay. I''m a healer. Here, Light Heal! Now your shoulder should be healed and you don''t need anypensation, right?" The other guy who is actually a healer used healing magic on me.


    What the hell? I was too shocked since there has never been any healer among the cultists I killed. I guess there will be some eventually. But now what? He just healed me so I can no longer ask him for money.


    I guess I''ll do it the old way.


    I quickly get up from the ground, transformed Victoria into a sword, and shed the neck of the healer. He needed to be killed first just in case.


    "What!? You-"


    Before the guy I collided withpleting his sentence, I already made my move and shed his neck as well.


    "Tsk! How would I know that one of them is a healer!? Let''s throw this people away before anyone notices!"


    I open a portal to the basement of my home. That''s where Sunny should be at the moment. She will enjoy absorbing these two''s blood as nourishment. What a scary flower.


    "Let''s go for the next one¡­ I guess we will dy our patrol. Wendy is here."


    I looked up at the sky and waved my hand to show Wendy where I am. And I''m right that she''s actually looking for me.


    "Roy! Something happened to Ka and the others! You have to go to the campus right away!" Wendy said as soon as she descended.


    "What level is the problem? From one to ten. One is where the girls can just ignore it, and ten is where the only solution is to kill everyone involved. Beyond that, running away is the only option."


    "¡­the difference from one to ten is too drastic. Anyway, it was Ka who asked you toe. She said if it''s you, you might be able to use this as a chance." Wendy said.


    "A chance for what? I guess I have to go there to check on the situation then. What a pain¡­ It''s just the day when the result of the exam is posted. What would happen during the school year?"


    "Everyone will be focused on the tournament once it''s announced. No one would bother on other things by then." Wendy said.


    "You''re right. I think that''s the only thing I''m looking forward for the school year. Let''s go. They should be waiting for me."


    Since themon sense of this world make people think that air element is too weak and unsuitable forbat, the chance of the students diligently going to my ss will decrease once they find out about the tournament. They will prefer to take other sses, subjugating monsters, or cultivating.


    If my guess is right, then we can use this chance as Ka said to announce the tournament. For now, let''s take a look at the problem the girls are facing.

 Chapter 279 - A Conflict Already?

    I arrive quickly with Wendy at the courtyard. I don''t have to hide myself even when everyone sees me descending. They just thought that I''m a wind mage.


    I look at themotion and see Jewel is arguing with a man while Ka is watching from behind her. As for Sophie, she''s on the way here after seeing the result in her campus. She must have made an appointment with Ka and Jewel to meet here. But never expected that there''s amotion.


    The man Jewel is arguing with is¡­ the one who said that he will call his papa. The fake air mage who wanted to take the air magic practical exam. And why is there an old man behind him? Don''t tell me that''s his papa?


    Is his papa a noble? Or a rich man? It''s annoying that I faced too many simr temtes like this. Why does having money make you an asshole? Why can''t you just be an asshole even without money? I respect those people. Though I might kill them if they are too much of an asshole.


    Wait! I think I remember his name! Let''s try to remember.


    First, he''s a boy. That makes him his parents'' son.


    Second, his parents probably spoiled him rotten. That''s how he instantly depends on his papa.


    That should be enough for a clue. His name is Hisson! It was because he is his papa''s son!


    Wait! It was the papa who named him. So, it should be Myson! No, it was Mason! I remember it!


    "Huhu." I leaked out augh for remembering his name.


    "What is it?" Victoria asked.


    "Nothing. Just some detective game."


    If I told Victoria, she will make fun of me. Let''s just stop themotion.


    I was about to go there, but I see that Dean is alsoing. I''ll just go with him then.


    "What''s going on here?" Dean asked.


    He looks around carefully and see that there are two sides making a ruckus. And one side has Ka behind her.


    Seeing Ka, I''m sure Dean has decided which side he will support. But I think it''s a good chance to let this be for now.


    I approached Dean but I didn''t do anything yet since I don''t know the whole story.


    "It''s her! She''s the one in the wrong! How could she be epted just because she''s a Beastform mage? That''s a discrimination toward other mages who took multiple exams!" Mason said.


    "HE IS WRONG! I ALSO PARTICIPATED IN THE LIGHTNING ELEMENT PRACTICAL EXAM AND PASSED IT! IT''S ALL STARTED WHEN HE''S TRYING TO FLIRT WITH KAYLA!" Jewel shouted.


    She must be really angry since her shouting has returned. Well, I''ll allow it this time. She''s trying to protect Ka from this asshole after all.


    Then, Mason''s papa approached Dean. Since he''s Mason''s papa, does that makes him Mapapa?


    "Dean, I''m a Duke in charge of another city. My power might not be much here, but¡­ you know, right?"


    Oh! Mapapa is trying to bribe Dean! I think I heard that Dean is not someone who received bribes. Even more, Dean is already connected with the king himself. Why would he let a Duke disrespect him?


    I''ll better suggest an idea to Dean.


    "Dean, it''s a good chance to inform everyone about the tournament. The sooner everyone knows, the more motivated they will be to get stronger faster before the tournament." I whispered.


    "You''re right. Let''s do that."


    Dean ignored Mapapa who is angry because someone who is not a noble is disrespecting him. Oh? That fire mage examiner who examined Wendy is also here with Mapapa. Well, bad guys will always stick together with simr people.


    "Jewel passed the lightning element exam with an excellent result. The best one we had since I first assigned as the dean of this university. But if that''s what you want, I can arrange it so that only one of you will be epted, while the other will leave. The two of you have to fight in the arena. The winner will be epted. How about it?"


    A tournament? I suppose that''s a good idea. Dean can gather everyone in the arena, and tell them about the tournament after the fight. I should tell the agents here to spread the news to everyone. The staffs, the students, and probably some people with influence in the city that can spread rumors fast. Like inn owner or bar owner.


    Jewel epted the duel right away, while Mason asked for the rules of the duel.


    "Anything other than killing is permitted. If you kill your opponent, it will be counted as your loss." Dean said.


    That''s the rule that we''re going to use for the tournament as well. Using magical tools are permitted as well. and seeing how Mason asked that question, he must have a lot of magical tools to use.


    Hmm¡­ I keep saying to everyone that we need to get stronger. But I haven''t told them that it''s fine to get magical tools. The one that I often see being used ais Ka''s wand that allow her to gather soil and shape it into anything she wants. As for the fis stocking, Sophie never talked about it. But I often see it being worn by someone who is going for a quest. I''ll ask Sam to get some magic toolster.


    Well, now everyone is going to the arena. They are interested to see a battle. And the agents I asked to inform other people also doing well. There are many people entering the arena and the arena is filled to the brim. Some people even can''t get a seat so they are standing. They need some kind of entertainment to talk about.


    Mason is preparing himself and I can see he is wearing a protective magic tool. He''s wearing a robe that can reduce the damage taken to the owner from magic attack. I remember that robe is quite amon sight during the war. Maybe I should get one as well?


    As for Jewel, she''s ready as she is. I just gave them a single advice before she enters the stage.


    "Jewel, don''t finish the fight too fast. Let him cast a few magic."


    "Master, didn''t you always say to take care of everything as quickly as possible?" Jewel asked.


    "Yeah. But this is just a show. And we have more benefits this way since we''re about to tell everyone about the tournament today. It''s better to entertain everyone" I said.


    "You''re going to tell it today?" Sophie asked.


    Sophie and Ka are here as well as Jewel''s seconds.


    "Yeah. We''re using you and that guy to make a show about what to expect in the tournament. Jewel, I know you can win easily, but still, be very careful."


    "Understand, Master!"


    Jewel confidently enters the arena.


    As for me, I have a seat prepared near Dean. We will be sitting close to Mapapa since I want to threat him as wellter.


    The one who will be the referee is Wendy. The other professors are toozy to do it, but they still want to see the match.


    I ignore how Mapapa keepsining about something. He even dared to threat Dean. Well, he won''t dare to do anything ever again soon.


    "Both duelists, you can enter the stage. The fight will begin after I give the signal. The rule is no killing. Everything is permitted. Any questions?"


    Oh! That''s much better than when Grandpa Werewolf just say begin.


    "No." Jewel said.


    "I have a suggestion. How about other than leaving, the loser must follow the winner''s order?" Mason asked Wendy. He''s being stupid right now.


    "¡­you can ask Jewel for her agreement. Not me. I''m just here to be the referee." Wendy said.


    "Fine. I agree. Of course, it works if you lose as well, right?"


    "Haha! I won''t lose! Let''s just begin the battle!" Mason said confidently.


    How could he win? He''s someone who couldn''t even pass any one of the exams. He even faked being an air element mage just so he can at least get one exam passed. He thought he can outsmart me. But he doesn''t know that he needs to be smart first to do that.


    As for Jewel, she has improved a lot. Her physical weakness improved thanks to her Beastform magic. And her lightning element, although it''s still weaker than Sophie''s element and still in intermediate level, she can even fight an Orc General evenly.


    She doesn''t have any magical tools unlike Mason, but she is more experienced in fighting. Unless Mason has some kind of powerful attacking magic tools, it''s impossible for him to win.


    As for Mapapa, he keepsining about the treatment his son received. Should I keep his mouth shut then?


    ¡­I guess I shouldn''t. I want to see his expression once I told him that we have even more powerful backing than Mapapa and his status.


    "Alright! If there is no more question, we will begin the fight soon. Mason! Are you ready?!" Wendy asked Mason.


    "I am ready." Mason said.


    "Jewel! Are you ready?!" This time, she asked Jewel.


    "READY!" Jewel shouted.


    "Then¡­ the duel begins!"


    ¡­damn! That''s one way to start a duel! Kron will be the referee for the tournament, right? I''ll ask Wendy to teach him how to start a fight then. Maybe I should ask her to be the referee as well?


    Anyway, the duel has begun. Everyone is excited because it''s rare for them to have some kind of entertainment.


    ¡­I think it''s good that I don''t see Mason''s mother here. If she''s here, I have to call her Mamama.

 Chapter 280 - Announcing The Tournament

    The duel begun, and I''m totally not interested. Especially since I know who will be the winner. But since she''s my disciple, I''ll just watch her fight and evaluate itter if needed.


    I''m not really a proper mage ording to themon sense of this world. So, if it''s a magic battle, there are many other people who are better at evaluating how Jewel fights. But I still need to have some dignity as her master.


    ¡­to hell with dignity. She fights, she won, and that''s good. For me, result is everything. The process, as long as it doesn''t hurt yourself or other people important to you, it doesn''t matter.


    Her opponent makes the first move. That Mason started with a fire magic.


    Hmm? Is that even a fire magic? I know I shouldn''tpare it with Ang, but even the first time that she casted a fireball, back when we just became a party just the two of us, her fireball is already bigger than that. And she''s just a beginner level who hasn''t learned magic control yet.


    And yet this guy, he seriously thinks that he''s worthy to be epted? And he''s shamelessly agreed to a duel with that weak magic and just supported with a magic robe to protect himself?


    Well, at least he will be a goodugh for everyone here. And those who are in the simr level as that Mason will be d to not act like he did and embarrass themselves.


    For now, let''s see how Jewel reacts.


    Jewel easily dodged the weak magic but she still didn''t make other moves. She''s just standing there and watching the opponent. And she has the dissatisfied expression knowing that her opponent is too weak and won''t be enough for her to get stronger.


    If it was me, I have many ways to embarrass him in public. But it''s Jewel''s moment. And she''s not like me who will go out of her way to embarrass her opponent, and kill him at ater date while no one is around.


    Whoa, that makes me sound really evil. Well, anyone who bes a burden to me have to die. That''s what I decided. Either I have to face them directly, or waiting until I have the chance. Though I mostly did the waiting since I don''t dare to go face the enemies unless I know that they are weaker than me.


    But¡­tely, I faced the enemies more often than waiting. I guess I have changed. It''s the change that I don''t want. Let''s stick to being a coward again from now on.


    The opponent keeps casting Fireball, and Wind sh at Jewel. But they were all easily dodged by her. And this¡­ makes the audience bored. Even some of the audience, who is just beginner level mage and not a hunter, are able to do what Mason did. So, they are disappointed to see the level of his performance. To think that someone this weak isining about not getting epted. That''s just ridiculous.


    Seeing the audience, Jewel looked around and finds me. She''s asking with her eyes if she can just finish her opponent quickly.


    I nodded at her and she returns her gaze toward the enemy.


    Jewel transformed into a rhino. Not the hybrid transformation, but the full transformation.


    Her transformation shocked everyone since no one would have thought to transform into a rhinoceros. Most Beastform mages would transform into a flying animal. And transforming into and animal is considered stupid.


    But not for Jewel. She considered the rhino''s thick skin to be very useful and that''s how she decided to transform into a rhinoceros.


    And not just that. While she''s in her rhinoceros form, she casted a lightning magic as well. It''s one of the most useless magic ording tomon sense of this world, Lightning Armor.


    It''s considered as useless because no one fights close quarterbat.


    Lightning mage can cast this magic after they reached intermediate level. But no one would think of using it.


    And now, everyone will watch how a body d in lightning is very useful in a fight. A rhinoceros body though.


    Ka charged toward Mason while ignoring all his magic despite being hit. She''s already much stronger than a normal rhinoceros¡­


    When she gets close to Mason, Mason finally stepped aside to not get hit. But he was toote.


    Even though Jewel missed him, her lightning d body gave a shock to Mason.


    "Aaaaaah!!"


    "YOU''RE STUPID IF YOU THINK DODGING ME THAT SLOW WILL SAVE YOU!"


    Why does she have to shout whenever she''s transformed? Was it because rhino is a loud animal? I don''t know that. I have never encountered a rhino before. I don''t even know if rhinos still exist or not. For animal to survive in the wild, they have to be able to fight against monsters. That''s why I''m doubtful if they are still exist. Most people only ever seen rhino from picture books. If they still exist, that mean the ce they live in must be far from any monsters and very safe. I want to go there someday.


    Mason got slightly paralyzed, and this time, he can''t dodge Jewel''s next charge.


    This time, the audiences'' excitement is at its peak. It''s their first time seeing someone uses Lightning armor like she did. And they can''t wait for her to hit Mason.


    "Ah! Wait! I giv-"


    Before Mason finished his sentence, Jewel already hit him. She didn''t strike him with her horn, but she lowered her head so her horn is in between his legs. Then, using her neck, she lifted him up and throws him to the audience seat.


    "Aaaaaa!!"


    Mason flew beautifully in an arc toward¡­ my location. No, it''s near me where Mapapa is.


    Well, the duel is over. I should do my part now.


    Mason crashed toward Mapapa, and that annoying fire magic professor. They are sitting next to each other after all. And there''s no way they can use magic to stop his crash. He''s Mapapa beloved son.


    Only this area worried about Mason''s condition and Mapapa''s. the other areas shouted for Jewel''s victory.


    "The winner is Jewel!" Wendy announced.


    Let''s wait for a while until the people calmed down.


    I approached Mapapa, annoying fire magic professor, and Mason in between them.


    "Don''t move or I kill you. Before any of you decide to do or say anything stupid, listen to Dean''s announcement soon."


    On the sitting fire magic professor and Mapapa, I put my hands on their shoulder as if I''m their good friend. But I''m holding a Blobbyknife on each hand as I threatened them while cing them on their necks.


    "Do you know who you''re threatening? You won''t be able to leave this ce alive." Mapapa said.


    I also see some people who I presumed to be his bodyguard about to attack me. But they are wary of the knives pressing on Mapapa''s neck. As for the fire magic professor, no one cares about him.


    "Believe me I will still alive. As for you, even if I kill you, it won''t be a crime. Now, listen." I said.


    We see Dean raise from his seat, and about to say something.


    "Congrattion, Jewel. You are worthy to be a student here. As for Mason, as promised, you will have to leave. More importantly, I have an announcement to make. It''s about College Battle Tournament!" Dean announced.


    Everyone is confused about what he said. As for me, I''m curious why the name is so simple. Was it Albert who suggested the name? So that I can remember the name of the tournament?


    "I know all of you are confused so I will exin. This is a tournament between all the colleges in Tatrama Kingdom! Several students from each college will be selected to participate in the tournament. This is the first time a tournament will be held! And we can finally know which college is the best among all the college in this kingdom!"


    ""WHOOOOAAAAA!!""


    The audience got even more excited from the announcement.


    "I have proposed it to his majesty King Albert, and he agreed for us to held the first Battle Tournament! And we will prepare a reward for the strongest team! Does our college have what it takes to be the strongest?!" Dean asked.


    ""OOOOOOOO!!""


    "Good! I deliberately let these two duels, so you can experience what kind of fight that will happen in the tournament. But that was slightly disappointing because one side is too weak. But you did really great, Jewel. I''m proud to say that you''re our student."


    Oh, Jewel''s face is so red right now. She''s embarrassed. That''s my cute student you''re praising, Dean.


    "There is a reason why his majesty agreed to my n. It''s because of the Evil Cult. Many people must have heard, or even involved in the Stampedes that happens two years ago. And it was that Evil Cult who did it. His majesty said that we need something that will motivate everyone to get stronger. Which is this tournament! Not just it will tell which college is the strongest, it will also tell who is the strongest student! With that in mind, I wish that only the strongest one will participate. To do that, those who are willing to participate will fight like what you see before to decide who will participate. The rule of the tournament will be decided at ater date, but we can still decide who is the top mages among you. The detail will be exinedter. Let''s aim to be the strongest!"


    I heard a lot of chatters. Some regretted that they didn''t choose to attend college, some regretted that they have already graduated, and obviously, the students are excited.


    As for me¡­


    "You heard that? Dean has made a direct contact with the king. And because of his majesty, I was asked to teach here. Both Dean, I, and some other people, have direct connection with his majesty. If you want to use your status, I will use his. If you do anything that will cause hindrances for the tournament, like bribing your way in to let your weak-ass son to be epted, or do anything that cause me trouble, I can kill you. And it won''t be considered a crime. Are you still trying to act tough?"


    The two shook their heads. As for Mason in the middle, he''s sweating bucket. I don''t care about his injuries. He can just die. That''s a terrible thing to say as a doctor.


    "Good. I have memorized your faces. If something happened, it will be your fault. Don''t ever cause me trouble again. The one this bastard tried to flirt with is my girlfriend. And I won''t forget it."


    I released the two and leaves the arena. There''s nothing else for me to do.


    As for Mapapa, he hurriedly told his people to leave this city. And that fire magic professor, he''s thinking of quitting. At least Wendy won''t have any problem with that guy anymore.


    Now, with the tournament announced, I don''t think there will be many air mages who wanted to take my ss. They will choose other sses and use their spare time to practice. Though I still need to give lecture at least once a week.


    Sigh¡­ school will start next week. I have put my schedule to only teach in Monday. And then I need to arrange some time to teach the doctors about medical treatments. I''m so busy.

 Chapter 281 - Only One Student Attending My First Class

    Since that announcement day, Mason and Mapapa disappeared from Cassau. As for the fire magic professor, I heard that he''s quitting. And since there''s no other fire mages more qualified than Wendy, now she''s responsible for both fire and wind magic whose professor is about to retire. But it seems that professor dyed his retirement because he''s interested in the tournament.


    Even after being responsible for two sses, Wendy is making sure to held six sses in a week! How diligent!


    As for me, once a week should be enough. I''ll keep holding a ss every Monday. As for the time when I can teach about medical treatment, I can do it when the professor and doctors are free. I think it should be in Saturday. That mean I only need to work on Saturday and Monday. Which is pretty nice.


    Today is Monday. And on the previous Saturday, the doctors are mostly busy. So, it will start the next Saturday.


    That mean, today is my first day of teaching!


    And there''s no one here! I have this ssroom for myself!


    Just as I thought, announcing the tournament will make the students pick on other sses. And since the tournament will decide which college is the number one in the kingdom, the professors are more motivated in teaching as well. Because if their student is the champion, they will be the one who take the credit.


    Though if either Ka or Jewel win the tournament, or if even any one of the participants in the training camp win, that mean those professors didn''t do anything much. I should tell Ka and Jewel to not take sses to often then. I don''t want those professors to gain the credit for someone else''s achievement.


    Or maybe, I should have them prove themselves and letting the professors know about their worth. That way, those two will end up being the ones teaching the ss.


    Well, it''s those two. I don''t think there''s any need for me to say anything to them. They can do whatever they want. I believe in them.


    As for Sonia, she''s already studying about medical treatment even before she told me that she wants to be a doctor. Maybe I should have her with me when I teach the doctors. I should bring Ka along as well for her healing magic.


    As for those in the capital, Ang and Shirley, I don''t think there will be any trouble. Shirley is the princess, and Ang is her best friend. And I don''t think there will be anyone, including the professor, who is stronger than Ang.


    Once she attended the first ss, she won''t be attending there anymore other than for apanying Shirley. And if there is nothing that Shirley could learn to improve herself, she will attend ss less and less.


    Well, I won''t care about them anymore. Today, until my session is over, I will have the whole ssroom to myself.


    Well, not alone. Victoria is here with me.


    So, I just spend the times alone with her ying some board games from her world. We''re ying a game from her world called 4 in a row. With Victoria''s clones, I can make what''s needed easily. I''ll give report about this game to Sam to make our business bigger.


    It''s 9 in the morning, and my ss session is three hours. Only fifteen minutes have passed no one enters my ss.


    I thought that Dean would be interested in taking my ss, but I guess he''s too busy after announcing the tournament. I heard that there are many people who didn''t take the entrance exam, but still want to participate. Well, Dean should be able to handle it himself.


    Since he''s also the dean of the medical faculty, we will meet on Saturday when I will teach other doctors. Unless he''s busy again.


    While I''m still ying 4 in a row with Victoria, someone approached my ssroom. I know her. She''s one of the two air mages during the training camp. Her name is¡­ Sara.


    Her appearance is¡­ quite in. I know that she''s a beauty, but because I keep being surrounded by beauties, she doesn''t stand out as much as the others. Even here, the people''s attentions are toward Ka. And maybe Jewel as well.


    Well, since she''s alone, I can let Victoria out like this. We just continued ying even after she''s here.


    "Excuse¡­ me? It''s empty here." Sara entered my ssroom to see that only us two here ying.


    "Yes. You cane in. No one would bother going to air element ss. Especially after the tournament announcement." I said.


    "I see¡­ Are you teaching then?" She asked.


    "If it''s anyone other than you, then I will teach them. It''s just the first ss so I thought an introduction should be enough. By the way, the dean is also an air element mage. He will attend my ss only when he''s not busy. Today he''s busy. That''s why no one is here. Since it''s just you, I don''t think an introduction will help you with your air magic since I have taught you before. Do you cultivate your air element already?"


    "Not yet. But it should be soon that the magic stones turned into air element magic stones. I can start cultivating then."


    I have taught my two air element students on how to acquire air element magic stones. They should be prepared soon and they can start cultivating then.


    "That''s good. Anyway, what is your other elements?" I asked her since I never cared about it during the training camp.


    "Only earth element." Sara answered.


    "Whoa, earth element basically means that you have unlimited ammo. Earth element and ice element can make bullet out of soil or ice. And their shape can be changed as well. Have you told Marie about this when you requested for your own customized rifle?" I asked.


    "¡­Yes, I have. And you were there as well. You are practically next to her majesty when I requested it." Sara scolded me.


    "¡­sorry. Anyway, what about your other sses?"


    "I don''t think I can learn more from the earth magic ss. Though I asked Ka to teach me if there''s something new. She''s so diligent that she chooses to stay instead. That''s why I skipped ss and choose to go here since the schedule shed." Sara exined.


    "I see. Let''s wait here until ten. If no one else ising, we''ll practice shooting real target. I''ll lend you a Blobbyrifle since I don''t think you bring your rifle. What is the strongest monster you killed with Air Shot, and how far is the distance?"


    "Well, it was a wolf. And the distance is just ten meters. I don''t have enough strength yet to endure the recoil if Ipress to much air."


    "I guess we''ll also train your body as well then. For now, wanna y this game?"


    I let Sara y the board game with Victoria. And once it''s ten o''clock, I used a portal to transfer the three of us to a field outside the city. Of course, I wrote a message on the board in the ssroom saying that today''s schedule is located outside. If they can''t find us, it''s self-study.


    So good to have the privilege to teach my students anything I want. In fact, I heard that in my previous life that there are some professors who actually never showed up even after giving the schedule. They only gave self-study most of the time.


    Once we''re in the grass field, I pointed at a cow monster feeding on the grass. Good thing there''s only one of them here.


    "Try shooting that cow from here." I told Sara after giving her a Blobbyrifle simr to the prototype that I gave her during the training camp.


    She easily hit the cow on the body. The distance is about fifty meters, and the power of her shot wascking. She aimed higher just so she can hit the cow. But it was as if the cow didn''t feel it at all.


    But still, for her to be that good in aiming¡­ she''s a much better sniper than I am.


    "Make a bullet with a rock or soil with the shape sharper like this. Then before shooting, make it spin inside the barrel." I said as I showed her a Blobbybullet that I often used.


    She did as I say. This time, she aimed lower and her shot hits the cow''s body almost to the same spot as before. She''s talented in this¡­


    And because of the spin and the sharpness of the bullet, the cow is injured. It looked at us in anger and begun charging toward us.


    "Let''s see if you can kill it before it reaches us." I said.


    She continues shooting toward the cow. She quickly adapted to the new spinning bullet and keep targeting the same spot over and over again.


    For her to be able to shoot toward the lodged bullet stuck in the cow''s forehead¡­ even I can''t do that just a while after learning it. She''s talented in this.


    But I''m an expert in closebat battle. Not in shooting. I should be proud that my student can surpass her teacher.


    After the cow died, I picked another target. If there aren''t any target, I used Blobbies as targets. I keep apanying her even though my time should be over an hour ago.


    I''m just too amazed with her progress.


    I guess today''s ss is over. I''ll teach again next Monday. As for Sara¡­


    "Sara, on Saturday, I will be teaching doctors about new treatment to a patient. I want you toe and try using anesthetic gas to the patient. You haven''t tried it before, right? This is a good chance for it. If you''re free, visit the hospital at¡­" I told her the time and location for my medical ss.


    "Okay."


    Maybe I shouldbine both medical ss and air magic ss together?


    No, that would be confusing to non-air element mage. Let''s just be happy with teaching two days a week.

 Chapter 282 - Quest From Guild

    Today is Tuesday. Just one day after my scheduled ss which I only taught one student. I have free time today so I decided to go diving after a while.


    As for the 4 in a row game, Sam is already asked some people she knows to build it. She says that it will be sold well once people learn the rules. After she built one, she will have someone y it in a bar or anywhere with a lot of people watching. That way people will be interested in ying it and would buy them for recreation with their friends or families.


    I was about to leave, when I noticed someone approached our home. It''s the receptionist of the guild. Maybe she''s here to give us request. I hope not. Please just passing by.


    And I was wrong. She knocked on the door and Penny opened the door. And hearing someone is at the entrance, the others who are training in the basement which we arranged into a dojoe out to see what''s happening.


    Jewel is sparring lightly with Shelia whom I summoned to this world. And Hannah is also there learning from Victoria. Victoria is teaching her self-defense technique called judo throw. What is judo? I asked her before and it''s another grappling martial arts from her world. And it seems that some of the joints dislocation techniques I learned from her are considered judo technique as well.


    Hannah''s childish innocent has gone as she''s growing up. Knowing the danger in the future, she decided to learn as many things as possible before she manifested her magic. She''s so busy nowadays as she''s still ying with Daniel and Lana. As for n, he rarely stays here since he needed to learn about etiquette as the crown prince. But when he does stay here, he ys as much as he can.


    "Roy! The guild is asking for you!" Penny shouted. She knows that I can hear her from my room with my improved hearing sense as Aura user and she doesn''t want to go all the way to the top floor just to return back down again.


    I have no choice since it''s my duty as the leader of the n. Sigh¡­


    "What can I do to make sure that you return quickly to the guild with good news?" I asked her as soon as I see her.


    "¡­you really don''t want to waste time, huh? Well, let''s get to the main point. The guild master asked me to give you this request. This request has been there for a while and no one haspleted it. The quest is about subjugating minotaurs. We don''t know how many they are as the hunters who got dispatched died or escaped in fear. The location is in¡­"


    ¡­she exined everything in one breath just because I told her to be quick. I guess that''s expected of a guild receptionist. She needed to be able to speak quickly and clearly so the other hunters who lined up won''t wait for too long.


    "Okay, we''ll take the quest. You can go back to the guild now." I said.


    The receptionist leaves, and we''re deciding who are going for the subjugation.


    "Well, since I don''t think I will do quests often, I think it''s a good idea for me to take a request once in a while. I''m going for this request. I also feel bored since I have no ss today. Who else ising?"


    "For someone who doesn''t want to work, you''re too excited for this mission. Do you really want to see a minotaur?" Victoria teased me.


    "Well, I am. You said it before that it''s half human half cow. I''m curious. I''m also thinking of what would be a good monster to be my next summon. If this cow is capable ofmunicating, I''m considering it to be my next summon. That''s still far a way though. I don''t know when I can reach advanced level." I said.


    "Minotaurs don''t talk. They taste good though. I''m going!" Shelia said. She wanted to take part in the quest. She''s also already a registered hunter now and a member of our n.


    "Sigh¡­ there goes my expectation. I guess I should just stay at home."


    "You can''t do that. You already decided to go." Victoria said.


    I guess she''s right. I shouldn''t have decided anything too quickly next time. As for Victoria, since I''m going, of course she will as well.


    "I''m going as well! I don''t have any ss today!" Jewel shouted.


    "Well, I guess it''s to be expected that everyone who doesn''t have ss today will go. Maybe we shouldn''t have everyone attend college at the same time so those who don''t can be put on standby. I guess that''s¡­"


    I was about to say that we have decided everyone who is going, but I can see Hannah''s lonely expression.


    I looked at Penny who smiled at me. She knows what I wanted to ask, and she nodded at me. I guess that mean she''s fine with Hannah''s decision if Hannah want to join.


    Knowing the danger in the future, one child slowly growing up knowing that she might participate in the war. It''s just one child, but if the war also takes too long, there will be more children do the same. Losing their childhood to war.


    Hannah''s case is still pretty good since she''s still ying with Daniel and the orphans. And she had just done this when she''s thirteen. Only two more years until she manifested her magic elements.


    I see many cases in my previous life. Cases which make me care too much toward children. And this is also why I took Daniel in even when I don''t have a home and shamelessly asked Ruby to take care of him in her brothel.


    In my past life, because of the war, many children were orphaned. And when there''s an attack, most casualties were the children since they are powerless. That''s why I''m worried about the children.


    As for the adults, they have awakened their magic. Even if they work as a farmer or maybe a chef, they have manifested their elements. It''s their own fault to not trying to get stronger. That''s why I looked for a way to get stronger, and identally awakened Aura. But it takes too long for that to happen, and I died too soon just after getting it.


    I hope we can destroy the cult quickly so no children will be the victims of the war. But I guess I hoped too much.


    Damn them for leaving no traces!


    "Hannah, you want toe as well?" Since Penny has decided to support Hannah, I will do the same and asked her if she want to join.


    "Can I really?" Hannah surprised seeing I invited her. She''s thirteen now so she knows that I care for the children, including herself. That must be why.


    "Lina, we''ll take Sunny with us. She will be the one guarding Hannah. Hannah, you will be wrapped with Sunny''s vines. I will protect you as well, but don''t let your guard down, okay?"


    "Okay!" She answered happily.


    ¡­that''s not the expression I want to see on a kid when we''re going to kill some monsters. I hope before Daniel grows up, the cult will be gone.


    "Is it fine to let Hannahe along? I thought that you will be the one who will refuse it no matter what." Victoria asked.


    "Then, can you tell me a way to destroy the cult within two years? If so, please tell me."


    "¡­this is what happened if you know too much, huh? You have to make difficult decisions. I thought of you better now." Victoria said.


    "What the hell did you think of me as, huh? Anyway, go ask Veronica and Celestine if any one of them want toe. Just one since the other will need to stay."


    "Got it!"


    Victoria left with her human form to the orphanage. I''ll just go back to my room and change. I''m still in my pajamas even when I met the guild receptionist.


    Jewel also enters her room to change and she also helped Hannah on what she needed to bring. Even if I have portal that I can use to grab anything in the storage from far away, it''s still best to bring your own stuffs with you.


    It seems the expert level mage we will bring with us is Veronica as she''s already flying here with Victoria on her shoulder. It''s double V!


    After everyone is prepared, I opened a portal to the nearest location to the destination of the quest.


    "Why did you mark a cave as your transfer location?" Veronica asked as soon as we all transferred.


    "Obviously for hiding spot in case of danger. The more Victoria can make her clones, the more location I can transfer to. And since she can make quite a lot of Blobbies, I put some in good hiding spots. And this is the closest one to our destination." I exined.


    "So, where are we going?" Veronica asked. She wasn''t there when the receptioniste so she doesn''t know.


    "It''s a vige in that mountain." I pointed at the mountain which should be over twenty kilometers away.


    "¡­and this is the closest spot?" Veronica asked.


    "Yes. How many people you can bring with your wind magic?"


    It''s a good choice that she''s the oneing with us. Since she''s a wind mage, she can fly and bring some people with her. This way we can get there faster.


    "Everyone. But you don''t need me, right? You can fly on your own."


    "Yeah. Let''s go! Hannah, don''t be afraid. We will protect you no matter what." I said to Hannah.


    "Yes! I believe you!" Hannah said innocently.


    It''s good that she still has some of her innocence. I became even more spirited seeing it. I''ll do my best in this quest!

 Chapter 283 - Minotaurs

    We''re flying (running) in the sky toward the vige of our destination. That''s the vige where a Minotaur should be. I don''t know how many of them are there, and it seems like Minotaurs are strong monsters. Even though they''re cows?


    At least we have one expert level mage with us. In case they are too powerful for me, Veronica can kill them easily. I hope.


    Other than me, everyone is flying with the help of Veronica''s wind magic. I''m just running on air. I have be even more proficient in Aura that I no longer use air magic as much as before.


    What about running on air without Aura and just with air magic? By only changing the density of air so you can step on it? I have been practicing but that seems difficult. Maybe once I reached advanced level, I can do it. Once I can do it, I will teach the air element students about this. Unless by that time I already no longer teaching. Which I hope that will be the case.


    I can finally see clearly with my Divine Vision. I thought there are some people doing some farming before. But who would have thought that they are on their four, eating the vegetables! Turns out, they have a cow head. I guess that''s how a minotaur looks like.


    There seem to be dozens of them. As for the vigers, they are hiding inside their house. Unable toe out, and can only eat what they already have in their house. No wonder this is an urgent mission. If they waited for some more time, they would have died from starvation. Or worse, once the vegetables have been eaten by the minotaurs, they might end up entering the houses.


    Seems like the minotaurs doesn''t care much about the people. They are here just for food. But if it stays this way, the vigers will die.


    Should we kill the minotaurs or evacuate the vigers? I need to know how powerful they are first.


    Oh, there''s one minotaur far from the others. That one is outside of the vige. I think that one is a good target practice. Let''s fight that one first.


    "Veronica, have you fight a minotaur before?" I asked Veronica first if she has an experience fighting one.


    "No. This is the first time I see them." Veronica said.


    "Then we need to confirm how strong they are first before we faced all of them. We also need to make sure that no one in the vige will be at risk while we fought them. I''ll go face that one outside the vige first."


    I descended and start my advance toward the lone minotaur. The others also descend to see my battle.


    The minotaur has body of a human, but its legs and head are that of a cow. And this one is a female! Being naked, and with the upper body of a human, this minotaur is showing its boobs! And they are bigger than Celestine''s!


    "Damn! Her boobs are even bigger than Celestine''s!" Veronica eximed.


    "It wasn''t me who said that! It wasn''t me!" I shook my head and pointed at Veronica who said it.


    "I know. Just go and fight that minotaur!" Victoria shouted.


    Sigh... how can she said it so easily? I''m just thinking about it but she''s saying it.


    Well, it doesn''t matter. I''m going to kill this minotaur first. I don''t care about non-human''s boobs! But if they are look more human-like like Shelia, I might care.


    Now, how will I kill it? Should I attack it from distance, or assassinate it without it noticing? Or just a head-on fight?


    Shelia said that their meat taste good. That mean the Werewolves can defeat them. I think I can easily win in a one on one fight, but let''s just keep our distance from it and shoot it.


    I prepared Blobbygun and about to shoot it. But I tried to see how close I can get to it first.


    Thirty meters, and it still eat the vegetables.


    Twenty-five meters and it still enjoying the feast.


    Twenty meters and it finally noticed me! It looked at me! Should I shoot now?


    Huh? It ignores me and continue eating? Don''t tell me that minotaur is a friendly monster that won''t attack unless their life is in danger?


    "Victoria, Shelia,e here!"


    I choose to not attack the minotaur and called Victoria and Shelia. I should have done this from the start.


    "What is it?" Shelia asked.


    "I want to ask you two what you know about minotaur. Why is that monster didn''t attack me when it noticed me?"


    "They never attack first. They would only fight back and never be the one to initiate attack. That''s what I heard from Javier. Though that was about minotaur in Monsters World and not this world." Victoria said.


    "Huh? No. They would always attack us when they noticed us getting closer. Are we talking about the same monster?" Shelia said.


    Two different answers, huh? What''s their biggest difference? One is a slime and one is a Werewolf. One is known to be the weakest monster, and another is a predator. That''s obvious then. The minotaur doesn''t sense danger from me. And Shelia hasn''t entered the twenty meters range from it.


    "Shelia, try to get closer to that minotaur."


    "Can I kill it?" Shelia asked.


    "Not yet. Just get closer first."


    Shelia takes three steps forward and she enters the minotaur''s range. The minotaur noticed, looked at Shelia, and it started to have a ferocious look. I guess I''m right that they only initiated the attack when a predator gets closer. If they are not considered a predator, the minotaur won''t bother fighting.


    But why do they not think of human as predators? Are we too weak? I''m stronger than Shelia, you know?


    Whatever. The minotaur is charging toward Shelia and about to attack her. Since it''s my turn, I''ll be the one killing it.


    I shot the monster at its knee, with enough strength in my shot to pierce through a General Orc. The bullet didn''t pierce its knee, but the impact is strong enough to make the minotaur stumble. I guess it means minotaur is stronger than General Orc. Maybe about the same as Emperor Orc. But I have grown much stronger than when I fought the Emperor Orc. I could even defeat this orc with just using Blobbygun.


    Though the biggest difference is that Emperor Orc can use magic. So, this one is much easier since it can''t use magic.


    I keep shooting Blobbygun, with even stronger power. And it died in the third shot to the head.


    Hmm¡­ that was easy. But for Jewel, it might be a challenge. And Hannah is also here as well. Well, it''s no problem for us still.


    "Shelia, you stay outside the vige. Just kill any minotaur that you see, but don''t get into the vige until I summoned you. As for everyone else, we''re entering the vige. There''s nothing to be afraid of since they won''t attack first."


    We entered the vige calmly while ignoring the minotaur. Some even walked close to us, but ignore us when they thought that we are not considered as enemies.


    I have several theories about this, but I think the most usible one is because they entered this vige. The vigers are still hiding inside the houses, but their smell should still be here. That''s why because I am a human as well, they don''t think that we can do anything to them since they think that we are the same as the vigers.


    Though they noticed Victoria, they don''t care about her since she''s just a slime.


    I approached one of the houses which has some people inside and knocked on the door.


    "Excuse me! We''re hunters taking on your request!"


    "Don''t shout! We don''t want to arouse these monsters'' anger!"


    But the one replying is also shouting? He''s an elderly. I think he might be the vige chief and that''s why I choose toe here.


    "Don''t worry, they don''t think that we are strong enough to be cause them problem. But if we want, we could defeat them right away. We''re just here to confirm your request. You want us to defeat these minotaurs, right?"


    "Yes! Kill all of them!"


    "Understood. Please stay inside your house and wait. We''ll take care of them all soon."


    We regrouped and discuss a n for defeating the minotaurs.


    "Veronica, you will watch from the sky and defeat the minotaurs from there. Just defeat those who are about to escape. Jewel and Shelia will fight them directly. We''ll start as soon as I summoned Shelia here. As for me, I''ll be somewhere with Hannah and Sunny. We will shoot them from distance for support. Hannah, this is what you have decided. This is not a sparring that you always watch us doing. This is a real fight. Experience it for yourself." I said as I patted Hannah''s head.


    "Yes!" Hannah replied.


    I carried Hannah on my back, and summoned Shelia right away.


    "Shelia, hunt these minotaurs!" I gave an order.


    "Okay!"


    Now, the hunt has started. I jumped to the rooftop of the previous house, and prepared to snipe everything from here. Sunny also here preparing to shoot her seeds toward the minotaurs. Hannah will help Sunny find the targets.


    As long as the minotaurs are defeated, the request ispleted. With Veronica here, this should be a breeze.

 Chapter 284 - Big Minotaur

    It wasn''t a problem for us to defeat the minotaurs. Veronica can easily fly in the sky as she kills several minotaurs in one swept. Expert level mage is too powerful. And there''s also a master level in the cult. Scary¡­


    As for Jewel, she''s doing fine in a one on one against a minotaur. I had Hannah and Sunny teamed up to support Jewel from afar.


    Shelia also doing fine. She''s used to fight them in Monsters World after all.


    As for me, I just shoot those who are about to escape, or those who targeting other than those three who are fighting. And I spotted a kitten in one of the houses. So cute.


    Let''s kill all these minotaurs for the sake of the kitten.


    The vigers heard loud noises from outside that they tried to peek outside from the window of their houses. They seem excited seeing several minotaurs died. But because the noise never stopped, they are still too afraid to go outside.


    Everything is over after Jewel shocked thest minotaur to death with lightning magic. I think she can handle any monsters that can''t use magic. Minotaur is about as strong as Orc Emperor without magic. Unless her enemy is something huge like Giant Smander, she can defeat them easily as long as they can''t use magic or have other racial skills.


    As for Hannah, she''s already tired. Even though her job is just to spot an enemy and told Sunny to shoot at it, she''s spent all her mental energy just for that. This is her first battle after all, and she hasn''t manifested her magic as well.


    Well, if the cult hasn''t been destroyed for a few more years, she has no choice but to get used to this since this is her choice.


    I carried Hannah and Sunny down from the rooftop, and we regrouped back near the biggest house.


    "Hannah, how do you feel?" I asked her who is still on my back tired.


    "¡­mostly tired." Hannah said.


    "Well, I''ll bring you back right away then. Jewel, you''reing with her and Sunny. Exin to Penny and the others that I will bete. As for Veronica, you can decide if you want to go home right away or not."


    "I''ll go back. I will leave exining things to the vigers to you. What should we do to the minotaurs?" Veronica asked.


    "Shelia said that they are delicious. Let''s bring home some, and leave three to the vigers here. It should be enough for them tost until they can get their own food." I said.


    "Yeah! They are delicious even when they are raw! I''ll go ask Lina to cook them this time!" Shelia said.


    I guess that mean she''s going home as well. I''m going to be alone again for a while then. Sigh¡­


    "Then I will stay alone. I''ll open a portal over there so the vigers can''t see it."


    We moved to a ce where the vigers can''t see us, and I opened the portal as soon as the minotaurs are gathered.


    The destination is the storage room. Jewel carried Hannah and Sunny on her back, while Veronica just entered the portal nonchntly. Shelia and I throw the minotaurs one by one, and after leaving three for the vigers, Shelia entered the portal. I closed it after seeing her drooling while looking at the minotaurs.


    "Are you sure you want to eat minotaurs?" Victoria, the only one left with me, asked.


    "Why ask?"


    "Well, don''t you think that they look slightly simr to human? Only the upper part of their body though. You can eat them?"


    "As long as I know that they were monsters and not human, I think I can eat anything. I don''t think anyone in this world would be bothered about it like you." I said.


    "¡­even after over a thousand years, mymon sense is still that of while I''m still in my homeworld. We don''t eat animals that have simr feature as human after all. Hmm¡­ maybe some country does, but most people don''t." Victoria exined a bit about her world.


    If I was raised in her world, I think I will feel the same as well. Well, it doesn''t matter now. Delicious foods are delicious. As long as they are not human, I''m free to eat them. But I hope they are not poisonous.


    Now, let''s call the vige chief. I hope I''m right that person from before is the chief.


    "Excuse me! We have defeated all the minotaurs here! You cane out now!" I said after knocking on the door.


    "What about the big one?" The old man asked.


    "What big one?"


    "The three meters tall minotaur?"


    "There''s one more? At least that one is not in the vige."


    I didn''t see any minotaur that big. Maybe that one leaves the vige before wee here.


    "Then kill that one first and bring back the proof! Otherwise we won''t leave!"


    Damn! This old man is annoying!


    "The request is just to defeat the minotaurs here! Why should we kill the minotaur who aren''t here?"


    "Shut up! Or I won''t pay the reward!"


    "You shut up or you will be stuck in your house until you die of starvation!"


    Does logic work on this old man?


    "¡­I''m sorry. I will give you more reward if you defeat the big one and bring back the proof. Please kill it."


    Oh? It worked?


    "That''s much better. I''ll go find that big one. Meanwhile, like I told you, there are no more minotaurs left in the vige. We also left three of them for the vige since we thought that you mightck food since you lock yourself in your house for a while. Whether you want to leave the house now or not is up to you. But once I killed the big one, you have to open the door and give me the reward you promised. See you in a while."


    Now, I need to find that big minotaur. I hope this one can''t use magic like the others. What if this one is just like that Orc Emperor? That will be annoying to kill.


    Since I didn''t see any minotaur other than those in the vige, that mean the big one is not in the direction we came from. I''ll go search the other side then.


    I guess I''ll summon Shelia again. Let''s call her once we''re outside the vige.


    "Why did you call me again?" Shelia asked as soon as I summoned her.


    "Seems like we''re missing one. The biggest one. About three meters tall. Help me find it." I said.


    "Bigger! More meat! I''ll go!"


    And she left just like that. I guess she traced the smell of the big one. I''ll follow her.


    She''s too focused on searching the big minotaur that I don''t have the chance to say anything to her. Each time she stopped, she started sniffing around and move quickly again.


    As long as it''s rted to food and battle, she will be too focused that she ignores everything else.


    "I can smell it!" Shelia shouted.


    I can see it as well. This one is bigger than other minotaurs we defeated. And this one is carrying a weapon as well. It''s just a wooden log, with a rock attached to the tip to make it looks like a hammer.


    Shelia transformed into her werewolf form, and run as fast as she can toward the big minotaur. The minotaur finally noticed her, but it was too slow. Shelia quickly attacked the neck of the minotaur with her ws.


    ¡­that''s one thick and strong neck. The minotaur only bleeding slightly from the scratch even with Shelia''s strength.


    "Big one! More meat!" Shelia said as if she was possessed.


    Well, at least I don''t have to fight again. I''ll just watch and support her in case she needed one.


    Just how good do they taste if she went this wild for one? Now I''m curious. Lina should be cooking it right now.


    The big minotaur with its big weapon tries to fight back, but it''s way slower than Shelia. I guess this will take some time, but Shelia should be able to handle it herself.


    "Shelia, do you need any help?" I asked just in case.


    "No!"


    "The sooner we defeat that thing, the sooner we can go home and eat!"


    "Help!"


    That''s quick! To change her mind just because of food. I guess she''s too hungry today.


    I don''t think shooting it will do any help. I guess it''s time to use Reizpear again after a long time.


    I used the technique that once used against the turtle shark. I forgot to name it.


    I twisted the spear while stopped it with my other hand, then I stabbed toward the minotaur''s heart from its back while it was busy fighting Shelia.


    "How should I call it? Ah, right. Twisting Spear!"


    I shouted the name as I pierced its heart. The de of the spear easily went through its chest and exit on the other side.


    The minotaur dropped as it lost its strength.


    "Alright, I''ll cut off its head and bring the head back to the vige. You can bring the rest of the body home."


    "Minomeat!" Shelia shouted as she entered the portal.


    Minomeat? As in minotaur''s meat? She has simr naming sense with me. She learned from the best.


    I return back to the vige with the head of the big minotaur, and gave it to the old man. He''s really the vige chief.


    Then he gave me the reward from the quest and for the big one as well. He''s so happy that everyone can leave their home now.


    I guess I''ll go home now. I need to give report to the guild as well. They will be surprised to hear that I finished their quest in less than one day.

 Chapter 285 - First Medical Class

    It feels like us defeating the minotaurs was too fast. In just a few hours, we finished the job, and I reported the news right away to the shocked receptionist. They don''t believe me right away so they gave a request to some hunters who can fly to see if we really finished the quest or not.


    Well, that doesn''t matter to me. I just did as the request said, and reported back to the guild. The vige chief has given me the reward, and there will be some more from the guild. But I had to wait a few days until the hunters they sent returned.


    On Saturday, the hunters returned just as I was about to teach medical lesson. They were shocked that I was right. Am I really so difficult to believe? Which part of me makes other thinks that I can''t be trusted?


    Anyway, after taking the reward from the guild, I left to the hospital along with Ka who will be my assistant as a healer and Sophie. I used my privilege to bring her with me even though she''s just a first-year student. Since Dean will be attending as well, no one canin as long as he permitted it.


    And on the way, we met Sara who is going to the hospital as well because of my invitation. So, the four of us went there together. Since Sara and Ka were both earth mage, they have something inmon to talk to. And it was Ka who taught her earth magic during the training camp. They are pretty close.


    In the hospital, we met Dean who brought us to the operating room. During this period in time, the operating room was mostly used to amputate patients'' limbs. Not reattaching limbs back. And that''s what I''m going to do today.


    Inside the operating room, there are many people, mostly old people, who want to watch. Some of themined and say that I''m too young.


    "If you''re here toin, then leave. I''m here to teach, not to listen toins."


    Unlike during other times, this lesson will improve the survival chance of the patients. There''s no way I would joke around at this time. It''s time for me to get serious.


    Some of the people here were angry at my remark, but Dean shut them up. Though few of them actually left the room. That''s much better since the room is too stuffed.


    Though there was one person who curiously asked me something. And since it''s not ain but a serious question, I answered honestly as well.


    "Why do you bring your own healer? I''m a healer and I''m her professor in her ss as well. And I''m also a doctor. Can''t I be the healer if you need it?"


    It was a man in her forties who asked. If he looks twenty years older, I might realize who he is. But that doesn''t matter. What matter is the answer to the question.


    "Depend on your ability. You might be able to, but I don''t know how good you are in healing. And that''s why I think it''s better if I bring my healer with me. If you wonder what I''m saying despite all your knowledge and experience as a healing element professor, I''ll proof it to you."


    In front of everyone, I had Victoria made clones of Blobbies, and turned some of them into two scalpels. Then one by one, I shed each of my own arms. Left one first, then right one.


    "Ouch! It hurts! Now, can anyone here who is a healer heal only one of my arms?"


    I asked everyone. Seems like that man is not the only healer here since I can see some other people reacted.


    Usually, healer can only use healing magic that targeted someone''s whole body. Even the weakest healing magic can only target the whole body. So, everyone who think that way shook their heads when hearing my question.


    "It was knownmonly that no one can heal only one part of the wound. But Ka can do it. Ka, please heal only my right arm."


    I asked Ka to heal only one part of my body. And with only a light healing magic, the wound on my right arm is closed and healed.


    "See? Do you know what it means?"


    I totally acted like a teacher here.


    "¡­that mean while performing surgery, the healer won''t identally close the wound and makes the operation easier since the healer can heal any part that shouldn''t be wounded. Like if the surgeon identally cut too deep." The doctor who asked replied.


    "That''s right. Though the reason I''m here is to teach everyone medical treatment that doesn''t necessarily need healers to help. But healers are important as well to increase the chance of survival to the patients. You can ask Ka about healing magicter."


    This way, these professors and doctors will have to ask Kater about healing magic.


    "Like I said, I''m here to show you how to do it without the help of any healer. But there''s a need for another mage that can raise the chance of survival. It''s air mages. I''m also an air mage, but since I was appointed as lecturer, I will have my student to do it. If any of you are air mages, or have acquaintances who are air mages, this will help a lot. Can someone bring the patient?"


    I heard that for the healers, the entrance exam was to heal goblins. But this time, the patient is a human.


    It was someone whose arm were cut from a monster. The patient arrived yesterday afternoon, but I told Dean to not do anything to the patient other than healing the arm so the bleeding stopped, and froze the separated arm that is luckily brought back by his party members.


    I told Sara how to create anesthetic gas to make the patient sleep and to not feel pain during the operation.


    "That was a gas made of air mages to make the patient sleep and won''t feel any pain during the operation. Air mage can put these gases inside a strong container so it won''t leak, and let the patient breathe it before surgery. I want to get my air element students to learn this, but there are too few people attending my ss. So, at the moment, the supply of these gases is extremely limited. If there are any medical students who are also air mages, tell them to attend my air element ss on Monday. I''ll tell Dean to allow them even if they are not a student of the magic college as long as they are either doctors or medical students."


    Again, as long as it''s rted to saving people, I am serious. Though In battle, I will prioritize my own life first. That''s why I have to spread my knowledge.


    I heard from Dean that among these people, some of them are quite famous for writing books about medical knowledge. It''s good for them to spread my knowledge in their books. Especially since I''m terrible in writing.


    I performed the surgery slowly and carefully, while exining things at the same time as well.


    "Time is of essence here. It''s better to be fast and precise. But since we have a good healer here, I performed this operation slowly so you can understand it."


    I also told them the importance of medical tools'' hygiene. Since I''m using Blobbies that can absorb dirt, I''m fine. But the others need to know the danger of using dirty tools during surgery.


    "Can the separated limb be reced by other people''s limb? Or even other species?" Someone asked me.


    "I don''t know the exact detail as further research need to be done. But I think it''s good if we used other people''s limb as long as they have simr blood type. There are several blood types differences, but I still don''t know everything yet. If you have the resources to do it, please research it. We can save more people if we know about blood types."


    I didn''t know this before. In my previous life, someone tried using other people''s limb to attach it on someone. But the result was bad.


    I know about this knowledge from Victoria. In her world, they already know about difference in blood types. She doesn''t know how they can find the differences since it was tested in the hospital, but she''s confident about the fact that there are different blood types. And I believe her.


    If I use my Divine Vision to see a closer look at the blood, I might be able to differentiate between blood types. But to exin it to someone will be difficult unless I told them that I''m an Aura user with vision ability which I want to keep as a secret.


    I finished the surgery as neat as possible, and with Ka''s healing magic, the wound is closed without any scars. Then I told someone to let the patient rest and have someone watched over his healing progress. Several doctors volunteered to do it.


    After answering some questions, we left the hospital. That makes the end of my first ss about surgery. I hope they will do research about the difference between humans'' blood type. Just knowing that alone will improve the chance of survival.

 Chapter 286 - Testing New Guns

    ¡­it''s boring.


    It has been three weeks since ss started and no one other than Sara and Dean who only asionally attending my air element ss.


    As for my other ss, the doctors attending actually increased. Some of them are doctors who left my ss after seeing how young I am. When I looked at their eyes, they turned red and looked away embarrassedly.


    Well, returning to my ss means that they prioritized people''s lives than their own pride. I won''t make fun of them for returning.


    Teaching other doctors was fine, but for teaching my air element ss, I am so bored. No one ising, and I already taught Sara most of what I know. I also made her some container to fill with oxygen or anesthetic gas to sell if she wants to. If she wants to give them for free, that''s fine as well.


    And Dean, before I teach him about other type of gases, I taught him about Air Shot first. Using Blobbyrifle I lend him to shoot. Since his other element is ice, he can make unlimited bullet as well.


    Then I told him he doesn''t need any rifle. Justbinepress some air behind the Ice Spikes and the Ice Spikes can go much faster. He followed my advice well and don''t need rifles.


    As for Sara, she can create rifle from soil, but having her own rifle is much better since there''s no need to wait until the rifle was made. And the durability of the soil rifle is not that good. To have a detailed design, she needed to sacrifice endurance. And to make it more durable, the design became so terrible and the power is weaker.


    Good thing that today her rifle is finally done. At least I can spend the ss by seeing how effective the rifle that Marie created will be. That''s why just like usual, I waited until it''s ten o''clock so I know that no one else will attend my ss, and then use portal to travel outside the city.


    And then I opened up a portal to the capital and grabbed Marie over here.


    "Y-your majesty! Why are you here?" Sara asked.


    "Well, this is my product after all. I want to see it being used for the first time. Tell me if there''s anything that I can improve." Marie said.


    "That''s what she said. Anyway, it''s good that no one else is attending my ss. But it''s still boring." I said.


    "No one is attending?" Marie asked.


    "Other than Sara and Dean, no one. They choose to attend other sses."


    "I think it''s because you scheduled your ss on Monday. That''s when other professors also scheduled their sses. If you want more students, you should pick other time." Sara said.


    "Nah, Monday is good. Boring mean it''s peaceful. I can learn magic tricks for my future clown performance, or learning other things from Victoria during that time."


    Although it''s good that no students attending my ss, I still want people to get stronger. Why don''t they want to learn about air element magic? It''s not that weak after all.


    Well, they are just like me if I never met Victoria. It was her who taught me everything I knew about air element. If I never met her, I would be the same as those students.


    We started testing Sara''s new rifle. And the result was¡­ amazing!


    The power and speed of the bullet was much faster than Blobbyrifle, and the recoil was also weaker. I guess this rifle is a magic tool now.


    "Marie, just what did you do? That''s a magic tool now!"


    "It is. I also made a handgun for Albert to use while not needing air mage topress the air. In Victoria''s world, it wasmon topress air without magic. I just tried it and it''s useful for Albert''s hidden weapon."


    "That''s great! And don''t forget about yourself. You might need it as well."


    "Obviously. I already have mine. It''s in my pocket here." Marie said.


    I hadn''t focused my Divine Vision on her so I didn''t know. She has two guns on her. She used both of them?


    "One is mine the other is yours. You said that you might need one just in case. Here."


    Marie gave me one of the guns. It''s the bigger one while she has the smaller one.


    When I grabbed the handle, I know that this was made for me. It fits in my hand. Can''t wait to try it.


    Without any warning, I aimed the gun toward a cow monster that can''t be seen by the other two people here. Three if I counted Victoria.


    I inserted a BLobbybullet inside my new gun, aimed it toward the cow, and shot it.


    The bullet run straight toward the cow''s skull, pierced it, and stuck on its brain. It died soon after.


    As for the gun, I barely feel the recoil. I know I''m strong, but with that much airpressed inside the gun, I should have felt more recoil. Although there''s a sounding out, it''s not loud like when I was using Victogun without silencer.


    "Whoa! This is amazing!" I shouted happily.


    "Please tell me next time you want to shoot. By the way, you can use this silencer if you need."


    Marie gave me a tube for me to attach on the gun. It''s a silencer specially made for the gun.


    I tried shooting again with even more power, and there''s barely any sound.


    "You''re truly a genius! But this mean that you can mass produce this weapon, right?"


    I''m worried that someone will misuse this weapon. If it doesn''t need air mage topress air inside the gun, then everyone can use it. Even children.


    "Don''t worry. I won''t mass produce it. I built those alone without any assistance from other people as well so no one knows how to build it other than me. I only made five. Two is for me and Albert, one is for you, and the other two are rifles for Sara and Stephanie. The one belonged to other than Albert and I need air magic to use. Other than these five, I won''t make it again unless yours are broken."


    Oh, that''s good. At least only Albert and Marie have the ones that don''t need air magic. But there''s something I don''t know about.


    "If you''re thinking about Stephanie, she''s Oleg''s wife. The other air mage in the training camp." Sara exined without being asked.


    "Amazing! You already capable of handling Roy!" Victoria who has been quiet for a while, amazed by how Sara knows what I want to ask.


    "I''m an agent after all." Sara said proudly.


    Does being an agent makes her able to do that? I don''t think so. It''s just mean that she''s already used being with me.


    "Anyway, while I''m here, I want you to try my gun as well." Marie said.


    "¡­why?"


    "I haven''t tried it yet. ording to the blueprint, it should be okay. But I still don''t know if it will explode or not."


    "So, you''re saying that it''s fine if it exploded in my hand?" I asked.


    "That''s right. Anyway, you can notice it if it will explode or not if you focus your vision on it while shooting."


    Marie then taught me how to use her gun. I need to pump air first without using magic. And the more I pumped air, the harder it is for me to cock the gun.


    I don''t think I need to pump too much air since Marie is not as strong as I am. In fact, I don''t know if there are a human as strong as I am.


    "I think that''s too much. I can''t cock it that much. Well, try it first. Then for the next shot, if your hand is still there, try pumping fewer air."


    If my hand is still there!? I don''t think it will explode seeing how confident she is with her work. But still, hearing it makes me scared.


    Well, here we go.


    Bang!


    The sound was much louder than when I used Victogun. It shook the monsters who heard it. but the result was good. It worked, not exploding, and my hand is still there.


    "That''s a good result. Let me try it this time." Marie asked for her gun back.


    "Here. But the recoil might be too strong for you. Be careful."


    Marie then take a shooting stance with only one hand holding the gun.


    "Wait! Use both hands! Doing it with only one hand for the first time might be too much for you." I said.


    "Oh? I saw you doing it with one hand so I thought that is how you do it."


    "Marie, don''tpare your strength with his gori''s strength. He can shoot with one hand easily because of his strength. But for you whocked physical training, you need to hold the gun with two hands." Vitoria exined.


    Marie did as Victoria said, cocked the gun, and shot it. The recoil is still too much for her that both her hands thrown up above her head. Good thing that she didn''t hit her own head.


    "Well, that works. I have to say that I did a great job making these weapons." Marie praised herself.


    "Are you done? You''re going back?" I asked.


    "Yeah. Take me back to the pce. Oh, Roy! I forget. You might need to take some time off from teaching soon. Albert has some work for you to do." Marie said.


    "Sigh¡­ finally the time hase for him to depend on me. I don''t wanna¡­" I pouted while opening a portal.


    "It''s for the sake of the world. Then, good bye!"


    Marie bid her farewell. And my time is also over so I bring Sara back to the city.


    I wonder what the job will be?

 Chapter 287 - Big News From Albert

    Few more weeks passed, but there has been no increase of the number of students attending. It''s just Sara, and Dean who asionally visited when he has time.


    But during the Saturday ss, Dean always attend. And Sara would as well as she''s increasing the number of gases she can use. Now she can say something in a deep male voice. Which surprised me most of the time we''re in ss.


    She loves to y a prank on her teacher. How disrespectful!


    It''s just us two in the ss, and she would suddenly speak in a deep male voice. I thought that someone has ovee my Divine Vision and suddenly appeared behind me. Turns out it was just Sara being bored and y a prank on me with the help of Victoria.


    I wish they would stop doing it, but since I''m bored anyway, I let them be.


    My ss usually just end up with real practice instead of theory one hour after lesson start. Which is at ten.


    From nine to ten, it''s just Sara and I waiting until ten. And when Dean was free and joined my ss, I would teach him some theories about air magic in the first hour, and then let him join our practice.


    That''s what we''ve been doing for a while.


    And sometimes, Ka and Jewel would join us when they don''t have any sses. Or if their sses were too boring.


    Marie has also perfected the guns she made. They were given to me, Sara, Albert, Marie herself, and Oleg''s wife. I''m the one delivering it to Oleg, and he will be the one giving it to her.


    Today, just like any other Monday, I entered my ssroom with Victoria on my shoulder, and wait. Sara was already there, and the three of us just chatted like usual for an hour. Dean won''t being today, so it''s just us three.


    Maybe Jewel and Ka will visit us soon. That''s what I thought when suddenly, a group of peopleing this way. Thought they would most likely just passed by this ss. That''s what most people I seeing here are doing.


    Though what I did not expect was that they are actually entering my ssroom.


    So, in confusion, I asked them a question politely.


    "Who the heck are you people?"


    "Roy, be polite. They might be your students." Victoria whispered to me as she''s already on my shoulder.


    "We want to learn about air element. We thought that learning more about air magic can get us stronger." Someone said. He seems to be the leader who asked his friends toe here.


    Good thing that he''s not like Mason who acted like a leader but he''s so not a leader material. His friends seem to be listening to him.


    Even if you are slightly good looking, I forgive you for wanting to learn.


    But all of them are boys. About six of them. And none of them are among those who take the entrance exam with me. I guess they are second year students or above.


    Well, at least the leader seems polite. And I won''t get bored if there''s more students attending.


    Although I keep saying that I don''t want to teach, Not getting myself bored is more important. And since they want to learn, I will teach them.


    "Let''s just be honest here, Joe. You''re here to see what Ka''s boyfriend looks like. And I have to say that he''s disappointing." One of the guys said to the leader whose name is Joe.


    Sigh¡­ so it''s just another Joe. Well, at least they are here and I won''t get bored.


    "Fine. Ka said that she already has a lover who taught air magic here. That''s double the disappointment. Not just air magic is weak, your appearance is also disappointing! I''m not here to learn about air magic! Heck, I don''t even have aptitude in air element! And you are just a¡­"


    Before Joe finished his sentence, he fainted and dropped to the ground.


    "Joe? What''s wrong with you, Joe?" The other guys looked at Joe worriedly.


    It''s my fault and I''m not sorry. I used air magic to make Joe sleep. I think if I left him be, he will continue saying nonsense. I mean, which part of me look disappointing? I look good all around. Just ask blind people!


    "All of you, get him out of here. And if none of you actually here to learn air magic, don''te back." I said calmly.


    All of them carried Joe out of the ssroom in confusion and there''s only the three of us left again.


    "Sigh¡­ what a pain. Why do these kinds of people always show up?"


    "Mostly because Ka and everyone else are top quality beauties. So, they don''t believe if someone is their lover." Victoria said.


    "If so, they should have just asked Ka right away. Going after me will end up getting bad impression from Ka. What a pain¡­"


    And I remember that this is the first day it happens. Not counting the day when Mason tried to get closer to Ka and blocked by Jewel. Which mean more people like them might visit me in campus.


    I no longer had the motivation to teach anything, so I guess ss is over. I told Sara that, but I will still stay in the ssroom because it''s my duty. She dly apanies me. I guess she also doesn''t have anything better to do.


    While thinking of taking a nap, I see something flying with my Divine Vision. It''s actually someone, not something. That''s Sonia flying in the sky. Since she''s a ghost, doesn''t that make her something?


    Anyway, Sonia is flying while carrying a little amount of soil from hernd. That''s how she can freely fly now. But flying around here, I guess that mean she''s no longer studying in Monsters World.


    I tried calling her by tapping the ring on my finger.


    Sonia who just teleported here, has a big smile stered on her face.


    "Well¡­ I guess congrattion for you now that you can travel on your own." I said.


    "Thank you! I have learnt everything that they could teach me. I can now carry heavier stuffs. And I can teleport along with the things I carried as well! Aren''t I amazing!?" Sonia seems proud of her achievement.


    "That is indeed amazing. So, should I go to Monsters World and exorcize some ghosts?"


    "I don''t think you should. Some of the ghost actually thinking of possessing you. They tried to possess the Werewolf who was with me before, but I and some good ghosts protected her. And they agreed to not let youe and exorcize them anymore. Unless you are confident." Sonia said.


    "I''m not confident. I won''t go there then. Can you pass through things like before while carrying objects?"


    "If its'' just this ring with soil in it, I can. But bigger than this, I think that''s impossible." Sonia answered.


    "That''s fine. You can go back now and enjoy travelling." I said.


    "Okay! I''ll¡­ Albert is calling me. See youter!"


    Sonia disappear as soon as she sensed that Albert is contacting her. I think something is happening.


    Soon, Soniae back with a message from Albert.


    "Roy, Albert said to take him hereter for dinner. He has something important to say." Sonia gave me the message from Albert.


    "Do you know what he''s going to say?" I asked curiously.


    "I might be. But it''s better if you heard it from the guy himself. I think it''s about a job that only you can do. So, prepare yourself."


    Sonia sad that and then she disappeared.


    Something that only I can do¡­ I guess it''s not the time for me to reject that task then.


    "Alright then, Victoria, wake me up if someone ising. I think I need to have my mind well-rested before meeting him." I said as I transformed some Blobbies into a bed andy down on it.


    "Can I join too? If it''s important, then it might be for the sake of the kingdom. I want to hear it if possible." Sara asked me if she can join uster.


    "You cane for dinner, but whether you are allowed to listen is up to Albert." I said.


    Later in the evening, I opened a portal to my mansion in the capital first and let Shirley and the others return. They don''t know that Albert ising when I asked them.


    After that, I opened a portal to the pce. Albert, Marie, n, and Mustache entered the portal.


    "Well, dinner is ready. Let''s eat first, shall we?"


    I think I might need more tables for the future. Just in case we have some more people joining the n.


    After dinner, Ruby and Penny bring the children to the bed. Hannah was reluctant at first, but since she can''t do anything, she agreed to leave the table. As for Sara, Albert allowed her to stay.


    Just in case, Albert asked everyone to keep what we heard here as secret. Everyone agreed and seeing Albert nodded, I know that no one is lying. I guess that mean what he''s going to say is that important.


    "Someone is impersonating the king of Arturo Kingdom, King Harold. There''s a possibility that the whole kingdom is under the cult''s control already."


    ¡­fuck!

 Chapter 288 - Important Mission

    "So¡­ basically, what you''re saying is that someone is impersonating the King of Arturo Kingdom. And you''re sure that he''s an impersonator, and not the real person, right?"


    I asked Albert for confirmation. In my past life, I only remember about the war against the cult. But there''s no rumor about a whole kingdom surrendered. Maybe I changed the present, or someone already impersonate that king without anyone noticing?


    "Yes. About that¡­"


    "Wait. There''s a troubleing this way."


    I stopped Albert from continuing because I can see a horse carriage ising here. No, it''s two carriages. One of the carriages is carrying that person I knocked unconscious with air magic. He''s actuallying here to cause trouble? Just what the hell is with the nobles in this kingdom?


    "Roy, what''s going on?" Albert asked.


    "I put someone who wanted to cause trouble this morning in ss to sleep, and now he''sing this way with presumably his parents, and another carriage. I don''t know anyone in the other carriage.


    "What kind of trouble?"


    "Just someone who takes fancy on Ka. He found out that I''m her boyfriend and tried to pick a fight. I put him to sleep before he did anything. Oh, wait. The other carriage has someone among the people he brought this morning. What a pain." I said.


    Albert should have the usual reaction of letting me do whatever I want, but this time, he''s really angry. I have never seen him like that before. Well, considering that what he''s here to say is something rted to our neighbor kingdom and might affect even the world, he is obviously angry seeing that the nobles of this kingdom acted like children and do as they please.


    Seeing Albert look angry, it''s Ka who speak first.


    "I''m sorry. I should have taken care of it myself." Ka apologized.


    "No need to apologize. Even if you try to do anything, this might still happen. We live surrounded by idiots. Albert, do you want to take care of this or you want me to do it myself?" I asked Albert.


    "Let theme in. I''ll make sure that once they leave this building, they get what they deserve." Albert said imposingly.


    Sometimes, I forget about it since we''re very close. But he''s still a king after all. He''s the wise king of Tatrama that I heard about a lot in my previous life.


    "Then, Veronica, Celestine, Mustache and I will go bring them in. Let''s take everyone including the carriage drivers as well." I said.


    "Even the drivers?" Veronica asked.


    "Whether they are innocent or not is Albert''s decision. Anyway, why are they here? The nobles in this city should be tamed already, so I guess they should be from another city, right?" I asked Albert.


    "You might not care, but I have ced a new person in charge of this city. They should be here to greet him. Then their son found out that you''re not rted to any nobles so he bravely, or idiotically, picked a fight." Albert exined.


    "I see. Well, we''re off!"


    The four of us waited until the carriages stopped in front of the house. Not just the two students this morning, even their father and their bodyguards are looking at Veronica and Celestine. Despite their mother also in the carriages.


    That Joe from this morning turned his eyes toward me and smiled evilly.


    "I''m here to pay you back for what you did this morning." Joe said.


    "I''m here because someone wanted to meet all of you. Bring them all in."


    It''s easy to fight weaklings. And since I brought only the strongest, except for Mustache whom I brought in case someone among them knows him and stopped being stupid, we easily outmatch them and force them to enter my house. Seems like no one knows about Mustache here.


    "Who do you think you are!? Do you know who I am!?" Joe''s father shouted.


    We also don''t care that we force his wife in as well. They have been doing whatever they want, and now they will face repercussion. I dropped them in front of Albert and let them go.


    "Then, do you know who I am?" Albert asked.


    "Who the hell are¡­ Your Majesty!?"


    "Let me hear your excuses. I might spare you if you tell the truth." Albert said.


    Noticing the person in front of them is the king, all of them are scared.


    Joe''s father just made some excuses saying that he''s here to greet the teacher. Which is obviously a lie. That''s just makes Albert angrier.


    "That''s a lie. I have heard the truth from Roy and Ka when we noticed you''reing. We''re in emergency state fighting against the unknown cult, and you''re here because your son is being stupid!? Are you really a noble of this kingdom!? You''re dismissed from your position. From now on you are no longer nobles of this kingdom." Albert said.


    "What!? But¡­ your majesty¡­" Not just Joe''s father. But Joe''sckey''s father who is also a noble was affected as well. I think he''s just here to kiss Joe''s father''s ass.


    "You can go back to your houses now. I will do the formalityter. But know this! If you escape, you will be branded as criminals! If you want to keep a small amount of your wealth, you have to wait patiently until the decree is issued. If you escape, I have ways to track you down. Now, leave!"


    They tried to plead, but we kicked them out of the house.


    I sprinkled some of Sonia''s soil to their bodies and carriages. Sonia can now stay invisible in front of others, so she will be perfect to watch over them. She will report to me or Albert if they tried to do anything. And once everything is over, she can teleport back here along with the soil.


    "Roy, my mood is the worst right now so I''ll give you your task. You will first go to the west, to Consenza Empire, and meet the Empress. Then go to the north, to Varadis Kingdom, and meet the king. I have told them a little about you, and they also have met Sonia. You can bring Sonia with you as a proof. Just introduce yourself so they know you. When you meet the Empress of Consenza, you must introduce yourself in front of her aide and bodyguard, udia. As for the King of Varadis, you need to tell him some medical knowledge. Especially about giving birth to twins with simr situation as Marie before."


    Meeting the other king and empress, huh? I know that Albert will ask me to do it someday, but it''s too soon. It must be because of the King of Arturo''s impersonator.


    Well, at least we have a way to go to another country now once I give them Blobbies.


    "After that, I want you to see Arturo Kingdom. See if the real king is still alive or not. If he''s still alive, give him this letter. He will be able to trust you then. As for your next move, once you meet him, we can discuss things easily either with Sonia as our messenger, or having us meet each other directly with your portals. If he''s no longer alive, just return. Your mission is over."


    Albert then gives me a letter.


    "This¡­ it''s a love letter?"


    "That''s a love letter from King Harold, to Empress Lynn''s aide, udia. Only us kings and empress know about his affection toward udia. That will be the proof that I am the one sending you and you can be trusted." Albert exined.


    "Well, now everyone here knows about it though. You already gave the essories to call Sonia to the other two, right?"


    "Yes. I will tell Sonia to inform them of your arrival. Once you can transport them with your portal, we will have the advantage of information with how easy we can share with each other."


    "So¡­ my job is to travel the whole continent, huh? That might take a while." I said.


    "It''s fine. And once your mission is over, I hope that I can purge all the corrupt and evil nobles in this kingdom. Anyway, the reason why I want you to go to the west from the north is just in case someone in Arturo Kingdom notices youing. They will think that you are from Varadis and not Tatrama. This might endanger old man Henry, but we agreed to do it." Albert said.


    "Brother¡­ how''s the old man?" Shirley asked.


    That Henry must be the King of Varadis and he''s close enough to Albert and Shirley for them to call him old man.


    "Well, he''s fine. He seemszy as usual, but I think he will continue to live long." Albert said with a smile. His mood seems to be better when he thinks of someone close to him.


    "That''s good. Then, what about the tournament? After the kingdom-wide tournament, we will hold the tournament between four countries, right?" Shirley asked.


    "We will still hold the tournament a few months after our tournament is over. We need a location to be the venue of the tournament. Since we''re the one proposing, we can''t hold it in this kingdom. And since Arturo Kingdom is dangerous now, it will either be in the Consenza Empire or Varadis Kingdom." Albert exined.


    I thought of creating the tournament so people can get motivated to get stronger. But who would have thought that we will face the cult in the tournament? I thought at least some people will sneak in, but not a whole country.


    And the mission is just to meet the leader of each country. They will decide the next move after I meet the real King of Arturo, Harold. If he''s still alive.


    I think this should be easy.

 Chapter 289 - Departing To The Empire

    The day after Albert gave me the task, I asked for leave from Dean. Both for the magic college and for the medical school. I told him that Sara might be able to teach a little about air element in case he wanted to learn more or there are some students who are interested, and also I told him that Sophie should be able to teach a little bit of medical knowledge from the future that I have taught her. That way, they can learn something before I return.


    I will still asionally return by using portal, but since the mission is too important, I won''t do any teaching for a while. It''s better to focus on one thing first.


    The nobles who visited mest night were hurriedly return back to their home. From what I heard from Sonia who eavesdropped on them while being invisible, it seems like they won''t cause any trouble. They just hide their wealth before Albert arrive with the decree. As for their fate, I let Albert decide it.


    Albert has returned to the capital, this time, he''s not taking n with him. He left him in Cassau as he''s trying to clean up most of the nobles in the kingdom before I return. With focusing mainly on Cassau, and several other cities that have important allies like Mellian with Hill there, and Melk with Oleg. And there''s also more cleaning up in the capital. He will be busier and that''s why he left n in the care of Penny and the others in Cassau.


    I can leave Cassau with the others. Especially since Lina made a contract with an All-seeing Eye, Elsie. Elsie will watch over the surrounding when I''m away.


    Sigh¡­ I''m finally going to go to other countries. But not with the circus troupe! I always hoped that a world tour with the circus will be the time when I can travel the world, but I guess that''s impossible with the current state.


    At least my main mission is just to introduce myself to other kings and see if the King of Arturo is still alive or not. Albert has written me the characteristic of the man, and he also made man''s feature by using Blobbies. I can have Victoria shows me that head of the king by using Blobbies and I will remember him.


    Now, it''s time to go. First stop is the Consenza Empire. I have to meet Empress Lynn, and her aide, udia. Did I get their names right?


    I was about to open a portal to the closest city to the Empire, but someone stopped me.


    "What is it, Celestine?" I asked to Celestine who stopped me from leaving.


    "I''m going too." She said.


    "Okay. Where are you going? I''ll take you there." I said.


    "¡­I mean I''m going with you to Consenza Empire, Varadis Kingdom, and to Arturo Kingdom as well. I''m going with you for this mission. Take me with you."


    "¡­what?"


    "I''m travelling with you."


    What is she talking about? Travelling with me? Why? Why does she think that it''s necessary to go together?


    "You know, I can just use portal once I''m at the location. You don''t need to go with me. I''ll open a portal on each stop and you can go there. And you won''t get bored during the travel as well."


    I made a suggestion that usually other people would agree with. It''s much easier to just let me travel while the other can stay at home. I also won''t have to worry about my travellingpanion if I go alone.


    "No. I still think it''s better if I go with you on the way. You can carry me. I won''t move much so you don''t have to worry." Celestine said.


    I was about toin, but before I can say anything else, Victoria interrupted.


    "That''s great! Celestine, you can go with Roy. And I will stay home with the others. As long as someone is with Roy, he won''t feel lonely. And it doesn''t have to be me! Roy if you need me you can summon me anytime. Good bye!"


    Victoria bid her farewell as she brought the others to leave the room. I guess it''s just me and Celestine now. There''s no choice but to bring her with me. Seems like her goal is to have a chat with me instead of going to other countries. I''ll listen to her.


    "Then, let''s go."


    I opened a portal to the closest city to the border and the two of us left together.


    I don''t get why she wants to go with me. If it''s just a talk, she can just ask me or barge into my room while the others aren''t there just like the others. But I guess she wants to talk to me in private no matter what at this time. Is it rted to Arturo Kingdom or other countries?


    I don''t know. In any case, I will bring her with me. There''s no way I can leave her.


    "Get on."


    Once we left the city, in some ce that no one can see us, I asked Celestine to get on my back so I can carry her while running on air. Since she can''t fly, I have to carry her on my back.


    "On your back?" Celestine asked.


    "I like it best when both my hands are free. In case something happened, I can react quickly. If I carry you in my arms, I won''t be able to do anything. Even if you are an expert level mage, I still like it better if my hands are free." I exined.


    "That''s the reason? Not because you want to feel my breasts on your back?" Celestine teased me.


    "So you know. I tried to make my own desire unnoticed but it seems like I failed." I said without making any expression on my face.


    "Don''t worry. I know that you are right. With how you fight, it''s best if both your hands are free. Let''s go."


    After teasing me, without hesitation, she hugged me from behind and trust her body to me. I fixed her position on my back so I can run freely, and then I jumped to the sky.


    "Oh! This is amazing!" Celestine said as I run on the sky.


    She wrapped her arms around my neck tight enough to not make her fall, but not too strong to choke me. I also put an air barrier around us so we can talk with ease. Though the wind still enters the barrier, it''s not enough to cause problem in talking.


    The city was close to the border of the Empire, and after one hour of running, we can finally see the wall separating Tatrama Kingdom and Consenza Empire.


    Maybe because of the cult, they are increasing their security. There are some people flying around above the wall to see if someone is entering Empire illegally.


    Since my job is to be sneaky, I can''t get caught and have to stay hidden. There should be a gap where I can enter.


    If the Empress has been informed of my arrival, she might have reduced the security. But if Albert told her that I can bypass the security easily, then she won''t do it. I guess Albert told her to not worry about security. But instead, they increased it. Probably to see if I can pass it or not. If I can, once I meet the Empress, she will ask me the w in her security.


    That''s fine. It''s much interesting that way. At least as long as my life is not on the line, I can y along.


    I can see that there''s a hidden passage to enter the Empire, but I won''t go through that unless it''s impossible to pass the security. Probably that passage is for the previous King to visit the Empire incognito. Or the previous Empress/Emperor to visit this kingdom. It was too well-built for it to be used by bandits or other people.


    I can wait until it''s dark, but I want to test their security. Everything might just be because I''m overthinking about how the Empress want to test me, but it''s fun this way at least.


    Once I got the chance, I run close to the border wall. This way, once I see an opening, I can enter easily.


    All the guards seem serious, but there has to be a gap in their defense.


    I was right. One of the flying mages is too high above. And since wind mages who don''t have enough magic control won''t be able to stay in one ce and have to keep moving, it''s impossible for him to see everything.


    Meanwhile on the wall, the guards are only focused to their front. It''s easy to bypass them.


    With Celestine on my back who tightened her grip, I jumped on the wall right below the flying wind mage and in between the guards on the wall. It was easy.


    When I meet the Empress, I''ll tell her about magic control. They should have known from Albert that I''m from the future, right?


    "Well, that was easy." Celestine said.


    "Well, finding a blind spot with my eyes is easy. I''ll run faster from now. We should be able to get to the Imperial Capital in three days with my speed. Unless I want to take it slow." I said.


    "That''s fast! I guess being able to fly makes everything easier." Celestinemented.


    "It is. I bet you''re jealous right now."


    "I have always been jealous of those who can fly. Well, being carried like this is not bad as well."


    "You will be carried for the next few days until we reached Arturo Kingdom. You''d be bored of flying by then."


    Going to the Imperial Capital is not that long. But for the journey to the Varadis and then Arturo, might takes a month.


    I think it''s best to have a rest in each capital for a day or two before leaving again.

 Chapter 290 - Alone With Celestine

    Going in a straight line to the Imperial Capital mean we have to cross a desert. I heard that it''s the vastest desert in the whole continent.


    I think that it''s right. I have been running on the desert for hours and I haven''t seen any civilization at all. Well, there are some ruins that I think came from the civilization from a long time ago. But they have been gone for some reason.


    Since it''s a desert where no one dare to cross, I don''t need to run on air anymore. I don''t need to worry about people watching since no one else is around. Though I think that it''s a good spot for the cult to hide, I didn''t see anything rted to the cult here. Well, other than thedy on my back.


    I run up on the sand dune in the desert and¡­


    "Woohoooo!!"


    I slide down the dune with using Blobbies as board. I carried a lot of Blobbies enough to not need Victoria by my side.


    I run up on another dune and slide down again.


    "Woohoooo!!"


    This is fun.


    "Roy, I want to try that as well." Celestine suddenly said from my back.


    "Okay. Then¡­ let''s do it on that dune next." I said as I pointed at the dune in front of us.


    I run up on the dune, and let down Celestine from my back.


    "Here''s some Blobbies¡­ you don''t need them?"


    I was about to give her a Blobbyboard, but she refused it.


    "Roy, what do you see around you?" Celestine suddenly asked.


    "Sand and more sand. And another sand. And then sand and cactus. And sand. Oh, that''s a rock." I answered honestly.


    "Yes. And I''m an expert level earth mage. I can easily manipte the sand around us into a wave that I can ride. It''s also thanks to the magic control you taught me. Let''s call it¡­ Sand Wave."


    Instead of sliding down the dune, Celestine used her magic to create a wave of sand. And carrying the two of us with it!


    "Oh! This is amazing!" I shouted excitedly.


    "During our time in the desert, I''ll be the one carrying you. But only within the limit of my mana. Let''s go."


    Celestine is standing with a calm expression as she let the Sand Wave carry us. And since the Sand Wave we ride is sinking our feet to the ankles, we don''t need to worry about falling. We just need to bnce ourselves.


    I spread my arm open and let the wind blow on my face. It''s a rare opportunity to get carried by someone else and let the wind hit my face without me needing to do anything. Of course, I still maintain my Air Barrier only enough to not let sand hit our eyes or enter our nose and mouth.


    As for breathing, I have been letting Celestine breathe with my air magic. We don''t need to worry if the air is poisonous or not. I heard that some area in the desert has poisonous air but as long as I''m here, it will be fine.


    The speed of the Sand Wave that Celestine controlled is not as fast as my running speed. It''s not even as fast as Wendy''s flight magic. But at least it''s faster than any ordinary horse carriage. I''ll just enjoy taking the ride with her.


    "This is your first time using this magic?" I asked Celestine while we''re moving.


    "Yes. It''s thanks to learning about magic control. If I hadn''t, I won''t even think about doing this. And this is also good for training as well." Celestine replied.


    "I see. Well, since we''re in desert, you can do whatever you want. I make sure that any poisonous gas won''t enter your lung. I heard that some areas have poisonous gases."


    "Thanks. I heard that too, but I think it''s safe here. But just in case, please protect me."


    "I will. I also heard that this is the biggest desert in the whole continent. Now that I''m here, I feel like it''s true. If you''re tired, let''s stop and prepare to camp."


    "Hmm? You''re not marking the ce with Victoria''s clone and returning to Cassau with portal?" Celestine asked curiously.


    "I won''t. I might use my portal to grab something back from Cassau, but I won''t use it to return. If I return, I don''t think I want to travel again. Though if you want to, I can transport you back." I said.


    "¡­no need. I''ll be going with you all the way to Arturo." Celestine said.


    I still don''t know the reason why she insisted oning. Though from the look of it, I doubt that it''s because she finally fell for my charm and want to be my lover. But I think the reason why Victoria left me with her is because she thinks so or she noticed that Celestine has something to say to me in private.


    Well, if she wants to talk, she will talk. I''ll wait until she''s ready.


    The skies turn orange and night will follow. It''s time to rest.


    If I''m alone, I can go on even at night. But out of consideration for Celestine, I ask her to stop.


    The Sand Wave that carried us stopped and created a huge dune. After we stopped, Celestine prepared a shelter for us without saying anything.


    It''s just a simple dome-shaped shelter with diameter of five meters. There''s only one room and two Blobbibeds that I made.


    "You don''t need a separator between the beds? You don''t need any privacy?" I asked Celestine.


    "No need. I trust you that you won''t make any moves on me. You practically see everyone''s naked bodies after all, but you still hold yourself back."


    I let my desire out at night though with any one of my lovers. Well, she doesn''t need to know that. But it''s true what she said. If it was me before returning to the past, there''s no way I can hold myself back in front of such beauty.


    "Roy, there''s something I want to ask you."


    Finally, it''s time. We both lying on our own Blobbybed as she lies on her side toward me and spoke. It must be the reason why she''sing with me.


    "What is it?"


    I still look up to the ceiling when I asked her what she want to ask.


    "You¡­ Roy, you don''t trust me at all, right?"


    So that''s what she wants to ask. Whether I trust her or not. Well, the answer is¡­


    "You''re wrong. I trust you, but I trust you the least among everyone." I said.


    "What''s that supposed to mean?" Celestine raised her upper body on the bed as she looked at me curiously.


    "What makes you think that I don''t trust you?"


    "Well, I don''t really get how to say it¡­ Veronica for example? During a quest from the guild even before you built the n, whenever we''re going together, I feel like you can trust Veronica with your life, but not me. Is it because you trust me the least?"


    Well, I guess that''s true. Whenever we''re out for a mission, sometimes, it was just the three of us. It was when I tried to show those two expert level mages the ropes about how to be a hunter. I would unconsciously move closer to Celestine whenever she''s about to use her magic as if I don''t want her magic to hit me. But it seems like my action burdened her heart.


    "Unlike Veronica, you joined the cult out of your own volition. And you betray them for a reason as well. Children. If, one day they decided to use the children in some way, I have no doubt that you will return to them. I''m just being paranoid." I answered honestly.


    "I see. I think you''re right that I will return. I also liked how I destroy everything in my path. But once they assigned me to be in charge of the orphanage, I changed and I just want to protect the children. Some of them are even children that I turn into orphans myself, and I didn''t feel guilty at all. As someone who was in a high position in the cult, I turned blind eyes when they decided to use a Stampede to destroy cities. I was fine. Then, when someone decided to kill some time by torturing children, that''s when I felt that I had enough. You know the rest after that. Now, I want to destroy that cult no matter what. But if they decided to use children in some way to threaten me, I think you''re right that I will betray you. When that timee¡­" Before Celestine finished her words, I stopped her.


    "Enough. That time won''te. I told you that I trust you the least, but you are the easiest one to trust. As long as I can protect the children, you won''t betray me. So, it''s basically me trusting you because I know how to fulfil the condition to make me trust you. That''s actually pretty smart of me. As for the others, I trust them unconditionally now. Which is weir. If any one of them ever betray me, I don''t know how to live with myself. As for you, you are easier to think. That''s just sounds rude, right?"


    "No. That is good. Please continue thinking of me that way. As for me, I will always trust you. Thank you for telling me."


    Just after saying that, she quickly falls asleep. She''s sleeping while still turning her body this way. But her face is smiling. Which part of what I said is good for her?


    I think I''m simr with her. At first, I just want to live peacefully and only think about myself. Then, other peoplee into my life. And I feel like my life is much better with everyone instead of being alone. I want to protect everyone.


    ¡­now I feel like ying hero just like the stories I read. I thought that ying hero is not something that I want to do no matter what, but now I keep ying hero. Just show that I also changed, huh? Is this for the better or for the worse?

 Chapter 291 - Arrived At The Imperial Capital

    After a good night sleep, Celestine carried us with her Sand Wave magic for a few hours. We still hadn''t seen any cities yet, but I can see some people already. I think it''s best to stop now.


    "Celestine, there are people ahead. I''ll carry you on my back again from now."


    "Okay."


    We stopped and the Sand Wave dropped and be another dune on the desert.


    Seems like the ce with people are actually a road toward some city. Those people are travelers.


    As for the city, I can''t see any at the moment.


    "Hey, do you want to stay in a city or camp again?" I asked Celestine who is already on my back before we took off.


    "Anything is fine. We can get Lina''s cooking anywhere with your portal." Celestine said.


    "Then let''s continue. If I see a city before it''s dark, let''s stay at an inn."


    "Are you sure? King Albert told you that the mission is to be sneaky, right? What if we were seen?"


    "Fake beard!" I said as I used Blobbies and turned them into a fake beard on my face.


    "Oh, disguise."


    "As for you, you just need some light make up and wear that Blobbies underwear."


    "Okay. I want to disguise myself as a man!" Celestine eximed.


    "¡­why?"


    "I just want to!"


    "Then we''ll stop before we enter any city."


    Using Sand Wave to travel is quite slow. And the travel time from three days if I run turned into four. If we stay in a city, it will turn into five or more. But it''s okay. We don''t have time limit for this mission.


    As for King Harold, I think it''s fine. If he''s still alive, the enemy won''t kill him anytime soon. He is more useful alive than dead. So, even if we take months to get to Arturo, he might still be alive. Though the case will be different if King Harold is long gone.


    "Roy." While I''m running in the air, Celestine spoke.


    "What?"


    "Thank you for trusting me even for a little."


    "It''s the continuation fromst night? Sure. If I can''t trust you, I won''t give you a piggyback ride." I replied.


    "Are you sure it''s not because of my breast?" Celestine teased me.


    "¡­"


    "You''re hesitating."


    "¡­anyway, you know that I trust you now. And I will do my best so you won''t betray me. That''s simple. Is this why you want toe along with me?" I asked.


    "That''s just one reason, I guess. But that''s the one that stuck in my mind the most ever since you took me in."


    "It was Veronica who asked me to take you in. You should thank her."


    "I already did." She said.


    We just talked while enjoying the view as I run. When the sun is going to set, I can see a city. So, just like the agreement, we will stay in the city.


    We stopped and prepare our disguise. I grabbed my clothes because Celestine said that she wanted to disguise herself as a man. At least there won''t be any problem with men trying to woo her.


    We entered the city through the gate. The gatekeeper just asked us our intention in entering the city, and we just said to stay the night as our goal is the capital. They let us in easily.


    "Well, now that we''re in a city, what should we do?" Celestine asked.


    "Find an inn first, then going on a gourmet tour." I said.


    "I want sweets."


    "Foods and sweets then. Let''s go."


    I found an inn easily, and we asked for two rooms. But Celestine still want to sleep on a Blobbybed so I lent her some Blobbies.


    There''s nothing happening in this city. Maybe because Celestine is disguising herself as a man so no one is bothering us.


    The next day, after leaving the city, we continue our journey normally. Nothing bothering us and stopped us. No bandits in sight, and we ignored the monsters except for any flying monsters that got too close to us.


    Three days passed and I can finally see the Imperial Capital.


    "Let''s stop here and put on our disguises. Are you going to be a man again?"


    "Hmm¡­ I''ll put on some make up and the ttening underwear. But I''ll be a woman this time." Celestine said.


    "There might be some men causing trouble, but they won''t be a problem. I''ll get Sonia to tell the Empress that we''re here and can meet her anytime she''s ready."


    I called Sonia and told her that the Empress just need to give me the schedule of when we should meet and where. It''s the Imperial Castle and there should be some hidden passages there. I can enter the castle easily.


    After Sonia''s gone, she returned immediately.


    "Roy, she said that she cane anytime you want after the sun set. udia will be with her all the timeter."


    Right. I almost forgot that there will be another person with Empress that I have to meet. An even capable leader than the Empress herself is what Albert told me.


    "Let''s visit them during their bath time!"


    "I will stay with them until you arrive." Sonia said before she disappeared.


    I guess that mean I can''t enter the bathroom then. I heard that during my previous life, the Empress is the most beautiful woman in the whole empire. I''m curious about her.


    "Let''s go. I miss the sweets in the Imperial Capital." Celestine said.


    "Wait, you''re from the Empire?"


    "I was born there, raised there, being rebellious, left that ce, and now I''m back again." Celestine said.


    "¡­killing innocent people is not what I''m thinking when people said ''being rebellious'' is. So, you actually want to go back home?"


    "That too. I want to meet someone." Celestine said.


    "Then you should do that first before meeting the Empress. Wait, are you nning to meet the Empress as well?" I asked.


    "Yeah. I''ll meet her first."


    We entered the Imperial Capital and find an inn easily. This time Celestine just asked for one room. Well since she''s not disguising herself as a man, I think that''s okay. If she''s still a man, I would probably say no to staying in one room. I don''t want other people to think that I''m swinging that way.


    ¡­it must be thanks to Victoria''s influence. She has corrupted my mind.


    Two men staying in one room is actually normal, but thanks to Victoria, I can''t think of it as normal anymore.


    The inn we are staying in is close enough for me to see inside the Imperial Castle. And I can see the Empress is doing some paperwork together with another woman who seems to be her aide. That must be udia.


    And that Empress who is rumored to be the most beautiful in the Empire¡­ is surprisingly t and short. I mean like really t.


    It''s not just because I''m travelling with someone who carried two melons all the time, but hers is really t. And she''s quite short as well. Is she still a child?


    While I was wondering, Sonia appears next to me.


    "Roy, I told Albert that you''re already in the Imperial Capital. He also freed his schedule so once you are meeting with the Empress, he wants you to create a portal and transport him here." Sonia said.


    "So, he wants toe as well. That''s fine. I can also proof the Empress that my portal is amazing." I said.


    Then just like usual, I''m going for a gourmet tour. This time, I followed Celestine since she''s more familiar with the Empire.


    She never greeted anyone here. I guess the people she knows are not among the people we encounter. So, we returned to the inn and wait until it''s dark.


    "Alright, it''s time." I said.


    "How are we going there?" Celestine asked.


    "There are many hidden passages, but the Empress didn''t lock her window. Maybe Sonia told her to unlock the window. We''ll enter her chamber from the window. Are you ready?"


    I asked Celestine who wore a robe this time. Seeing her wearing one, I transformed some Blobbies into a robe as well. Now I can cover my head with the hood and feel more mysterious.


    Once no one in the surrounding is looking, I jumped out of the window of our room and run directly toward the Empress'' chamber. We quickly arrive there.


    I opened the window andnded perfectly inside the chamber where twodies and a ghost are waiting.


    I took off the hood covering my head and introduce myself.


    "Nice to meet you, Empress of Consenza. I''m Roy."


    "We have been waiting for you. Though I didn''t expect for you to bring yourpanion with you here." The Empress said.


    "She''s my friend and also someone who was born here. Her name is¡­"


    Before I introduced Celestine to the Empress, Celestine stepped forward herself and took of the hood covering her head.


    "It has been a while, Lynn. I''m sorry for leaving you and everyone." Celestine said.


    "¡­eh?"


    Sonia, the otherdy, and I are confused with Celestine''s words. As for the Empress herself¡­


    "Sister Celestine!"


    The Empress ran toward Celestine and gave her a big hug.


    "¡­what?"

 Chapter 292 - Imperial Princess

    So¡­ what the hell is going on here?


    I arrived in the Empress'' Chamber and introduce myself to the Empress and her aide. Then, Celestine took off her hood and the Empress jumped on her. The Empress is even calling Celestine sister. Does that mean¡­ Celestine is the Empress'' sister?


    The Empress and Celestine are hugging each other so tight that I don''t think they will listen to what I say anytime soon. I guess I''ll just talk with udia.


    "Well, that was unexpected. Anyway, I''m Roy. You''re udia, right? The person whom the King of Arturo takes fancy with? Albert told me that I need you to be here."


    "¡­right. I''m udia. Empress Lynn''s aide. I heard of you from King Albert during the meeting between kings. It was thanks to you that we found out about the existence of the cult. Though the King of Arturo doesn''t know it since King Albert told us after someone impersonate him."


    I shook my hand with udia as we''re getting to know each other.


    "I see. Let me hear more about what Albert told you. Just in case he''s spreading rumors about me."


    "Well, he told us that you are his friend. And that you have a harem. And you came from the future as well as your Aura ability." udia said.


    "¡­that''s basically everything then. Should I really be here to introduce myself when you already know a lot about me?"


    "Well, we don''t know your appearance. And King Albert said that it will be easier if everyone has meet you at least once."


    Should I call him here then? He should already be ready toe over.


    "Then should I go get the other person?" I asked udia.


    "There''s going to be another person? I never heard of anything about it before." udia looked at Sonia for confirmation.


    "Well, he decided it abruptly. I forgot to tell you about it." Sonia said.


    I think Sonia is keeping it as secret from the others. Feels like after she returns from the Ghost Town in Monsters World, she has be even more yful.


    "Ah, Roy. While we''re at it, how about you call Victoria as well." Sonia said.


    While we''re watching the heartwarming hug of the two, I summoned Victoria here.


    "Oh, Roy. Where is this? It looks like a rich person''s room. And¡­ what am I seeing?"


    Victoria is asking about how the twodies ended up hugging each other.


    "Well, you know that the opposite attracts, right? Like ma. That''s how it ended up that way."


    "¡­that''s rude to the t girl." Victoria said.


    "Who''s the t girl!"


    Suddenly the Empress who is still hugging Celestine looked at us angrily. So, she''s angry when being called that, huh? I''ll keep that in mind.


    "Well, I guess it''s time I call Albert. This will be the first time you''ve seen my portal, right?"


    In front of the two confuseddies, I open up a portal toward the Blobby in Albert''s possession. And the other side of portal is in Albert''s office.


    "Whoa! What is that!?" The Empress said while still not letting Celestine go.


    "This¡­ is portal that summoner should be able to use. More importantly, why are you hugging Celestine?" Albert exined and then asked the Empress as he entered the portal. I close the portal soon after he passed through.


    "Don''t you know the opposite attracts? Just like ma. And you can see that they are quite the opposite when you''re looking at their chest." I give the same answer as when Victoria asked.


    "Who is the one with t chest!?" The Empress looked at me angrily.


    "I didn''t say that you have t chest. Since Celestine has huge breasts, the opposite is actually un-huge. Not t." I said.


    "Oh¡­ wait¡­" The Empress is confused.


    "What is it?" I looked at the confused Empress.


    "Hmm¡­"


    While the Empress is still confused, I looked at Albert.


    "I see why udia is important. Who would have thought that the Empress was quite a bit¡­ slow?" I said to Albert.


    "She''s not a bad leader. She''s just a little slow. Now, can anyone tell me what''s going on?" Albert asked.


    "I''ll tell you everything that I hadn''t inform you yet. Lynn, can we move somewhere?" Celestine asked the Empress in her embrace.


    "No!"


    Why is the Empress so spoiled? Just what is going on!?


    Since it won''t progress like this, I asked Victoria to create some Blobbisofas for everyone here. Now everyone can be rxed. Other than Celestine who still can''t let Empress Lynn off of her.


    "Let''s talk. Celestine, who are you exactly?" Albert started the conversation.


    "I am Celestine. The eldest daughter of Consenza Imperial family. I''m someone who was supposed to take the role of bing the empress instead of Lynn." Celestine said.


    "Wait. So¡­ that mean I have three princesses staying in my house?" I asked.


    "Three princesses? Just who are you?" Empress Lynn asked.


    "Someone very special. If you paid attention, you should have known about me from Albert''s story." I said calmly.


    "There''s my sister, Shirley, and then my daughter, Lana, and who would have thought that Celestine is a princess? Wait! Does that mean the cult already has information about the Empire!?" Albert asked.


    "No. I kept the fact that I''m a princess a secret. Not many people other than the Imperial Family know who I am." Celestine said.


    Then, Celestine started telling us about her life story that she hasn''t told us yet.


    Just like she said, Celestine is the eldest daughter and the first in line to be the next empress once her father died. But the previous emperor finds out about her true nature. Celestine is actually evil.


    It was about twenty-three years ago when she was just fifteen and manifested her magic that she started using her magic to attack everyone. Everyone except her sister who is nine years younger than Celestine, that she is fond of.


    "Wait! You''re twenty-nine years old? Celestine being thirty-eight I can understand, but you''re just like a kid!" I shouted.


    "Who is a kid!? And don''t shout! What if a cult member is here!?" Lynn said.


    The more I know here, the less Empress-y she is.


    "Don''t worry. My Air Barrier won''t leak any sound prate and leave the room. So far, there''s only a few cult members in the city. But none of them are in the castle. But there''s one former cult member though." I said as I look at Celestine.


    "Wait, sister Celestine? You¡­"


    "¡­right. After father kick me out and make everyone think that I''m dead, I joined the cult. Not for my survival, but for my evil desire."


    Celestine told us about how she encountered the cult. She was already fifteen and already beautiful by that age. She identally bumped with the former faction leader of the big boobs'' faction of the cult. That leader raised her to be the next leader of the faction after she died.


    "Wait! Breasts can be groomed to grow naturally into that size!?" This time, it''s Victoria who stopped Celestine''s story.


    "Sister! I want to hear more of that!" Lynn also asked for the detail.


    "Mine''s already big since I was thirteen. Let me continue."


    Celestine continues her story while Lynn looked depressed. Even if there''s any way to grow them, it''s toote already for her.


    Then the story is something I already familiar with. She became the leader of the faction, in charge of an orphanage, care about the orphans, betrayed the cult, and joined us.


    "When I was in charge of the orphans, I started to be reminded of when I was ying with Lynn. That''s why I betrayed the cult." Celestine said.


    Although I know that she said the truth, I still looked at Albert for confirmation. He nodded, telling me that everything she said is the truth.


    "Are you sure that no one in the cult knows that you are the princess?" Albert asked.


    "I don''t think any of them know. Since I was too evil, father always make sure that I will always stay in the castle and almost had no chance in going out at all. Even for awakening my element, I did it in the castle. I haven''t told anyone about being an imperial princess ever since I got kicked out. If someone in the cult knows, it''s not because I told them about it." Celestine said.


    Seeing how the castle is safe from cult member, I think no one knows.


    "Albert, there are no cult member with any explosive devices in their mouth in this castle. Doesn''t it mean that the security in this castle is much better than your pce?" I said to Albert.


    "I guess you''re right. Though after youe, the security has been increased a lot and I don''t think there''s any more cult member in the capital." Albert said.


    "Well, since I''m done with what I''m here to do, I''ll be leaving. Lynn, it''s fine for me to kill any cult members that I found, right?" I asked Lynn.


    "You already called me casually? Well, that doesn''t matter. Whoever it is, just kill them. Even if they have high position, kill every single one of them in the Imperial Capital." Lynn said.


    "Okay. Albert, you''re going home now. As for Celestine, you can stay here with Lynn. I''ll visit you tomorrow. If anything happened, contact Sonia."


    I opened a portal and returned Albert back to his office. After saying farewell to Celestine and Lynn, and also udia who is watching, I went on a hunt.


    It sure was surprising to hear that Celestine was a princess. Will she return here or will she continue to be together with us? I''ll let her decide her own future.


    ¡­so, she''s thirty-eight, huh? She looks not much older than thirty. Was it because she''s an expert level mage? If so, I bet the girls at home will cultivate more diligently.


    The girls back at home will be interested in that more than the fact that she''s a princess. Well, we already have two princesses at home after all.

 Chapter 293 - Cleaning Up Imperial Capital

    After leaving Celestine with Lynn, I went on a hunt for the cult members in the Imperial Capital. I got permission to kill everyone no matter what their status is. But I still need to put on my disguise. Should I be Ninja again?


    "Victoria, give me another disguise other than Ninja." I asked Victoria who is with me.


    "Just a facemask and long ck hair is enough for your disguise. If I add some breast, you will look like a woman." Victoria said.


    "Just the mask and long hair then." I said.


    "Okay. But, are you sure you want to kill all the cult members here? It will be too suspicious if you do that."


    "You''re right. I should have asked if there are some sort of criminal organization here. I''ll kill them as well. Let''s go back and ask."


    "¡­it''s not even five minutes since you left."


    Does it matter how long I''ve been gone? In fact, since I only left for a while, those three should still be there. So, I open a portal from the Blobbies in Celestine''s possession.


    "I''m back." I said as I entered the portal and see Celestine, Lynn, and udia are still in the Empress'' Chamber.


    "Who are you!?" Lynn shouted.


    "It''s me, Roy. I''m wearing disguise to assassinate the cult members here." I said.


    "What are youing back here for, Roy? It hasn''t been a while since you left."


    Celestine asked while she''s still being hugged by her spoiled sister who is actually older than me.


    "It will be too suspicious if I just kill the cult members who have explosive devices in their mouth, so I want to ask if there are any organized criminal in the Imperial Capital that I can kill. This way, it will be seen as if the death of those cult members is rted to the organized criminal." I said.


    "Oh, you''re smart! You will be much smarter if you had thought about that before you leave." Lynn said.


    "And you will not be seen as childish if you just let go of Celestine."


    "Never!"


    Instead of letting Celestine go, Lynn tightened her embrace. Celestine just smiled wryly.


    "udia, tell him."


    Lynn asked udia to tell me about any organized crime that I allowed to kill.


    "Well, there are many reports from the citizen about some gang members viting thew. Though we don''t know their whereabouts are." udia said.


    "Just tell me about them and their characteristic if they have any. I can look for them with my eyes. Albert has told you about my ability, right?"


    "¡­you can see through everything and see things from far or even any small things that can''t be seen with normal eyes. The see-through part is a bit disturbing, but I''ll try to get used to it." udia said as she shyly covering her chest with her arms.


    "Don''t worry. I''m a doctor as well. There''s nothing that I haven''t seen."


    And I can enjoy seeing one thing over and over again and not getting bored.


    "I guess you''re right." udia said as she rxed her stance.


    "As for you, I think you need to manage your diet. What you ate is too hard to digest. I think it''s fine once in a while, but I think you ate that too much." I said.


    "¡­now that''s a bit disturbing."


    "Other than that, you are very healthy. Just watch what you eat and you can maintain your body for a long time." I said.


    "What about me!?" Lynn suddenly asked me.


    "You? Just give up. You can''t grow anymore. Unless you want to grow horizontally which I won''t suggest. Other than that, you''re healthy as well." I said.


    "That''s rude! I didn''t ask about my breast!"


    "I mean your height. But now that you mentioned it, your breast as well."


    "Hey!"


    Lynnined. I just ignore her as I was listening to udia''s report about the organized crime in the Imperial Capital. Seems like there are several of them. And only some has distinctive characteristic like a tattoo or some mark. I''ll go after them.


    "Alright then, I''ll be leaving again. And I thought of giving you two these tomorrow, but today is as good as any day. So¡­ Victoria."


    "Okay!"


    As soon as I called her name, Victoria who noticed my intention created some clones of Blobbies. I gave some to udia, and some to Lynn. Thanks to Victoria who still go hunting monsters from time to time, the amount of the clones she created has increased by a lot. And by sacrificing the endurance of her clones, she can create even more. So, I can still have a lot of Blobbies for myself.


    "This way, I can create a portal to anywhere those Blobbies are. Make sure to keep them with you at all times."


    I also exined how these Blobbies are still following my order so they can automatically protect the wearer in case of danger. But can only be done once, and they will be destroyed right away. Though once they are destroyed, Victoria will notice and she will inform me. Then I can protect the wearers.


    "I guess that''s all. I''ll be going now."


    I left through the window again and went directly to a location of an organized crime that I found.


    ording to udia, these people would rob expensive stuffs from the rich, and sold them. There were no evidences where they sold the stolen objects to and where they hide them. But I found where they hide it easily with my Divine Vision.


    They are hiding under a rich man''s house. Probably a merchant. And good news, the merchant is actually someone with explosive device in his mouth. He''s a cult member hiding in this territory. Though as for the gang members who did the stealing, I don''t see anyone who has explosive device in their mouth. I guess that merchant manipted those people to steal for him.


    Well, that doesn''t matter. Let''s kill him and all the gang members that I see.


    I''ve been acting too cocky for a while. I think it''s best to be careful again. I''ll check if there are any expert level mages among these people.


    Hmm¡­ I think I''m safe. Then, let''s kill everyone without being seen. Using a spear is difficult for an assassination, so let''s use Blobbyknife. No, I think shooting them from afar is the best. Let''s find a good position and make sure the silencer works well.


    One, two, three¡­ I keep shooting the gang members who are alone one by one. And if there are two or more people who by any chance are lining up, I try to kill them in one shot.


    So far so good. And since the Blobbybullets disappear as long as Victoria willed it, there are no evidence in what is killing them. There is not even a trace of magic there.


    After killing the gang members that I can see, it''s time to kill the merchant. He''s already asleep and the wall is blocking him. I can''t shoot him through the window from this spot, so I moved to another spot where I can see him through the window, and shoot a bullet. The bullet this time is Victoria herself.


    Before Victoria hit the window, she transformed into her slime form andnded without any sound. Then, she opened the window from a small gap. As soon as the window is opened, I shoot a Blobbybullet through the merchant''s head and he died in an instant.


    After that, Victoria locked the window again, and I summoned her to my side.


    "Now, there''s no trace of me. Not even a broken window." I said.


    "I think that''s too much work just to kill one man. You are too careful." Victoria said.


    "Being careful is good. I can stay alive as long as I''m careful. Let''s go find other cult members."


    After killing that merchant, I went around to kill other cult members in the Imperial Capital along with some thugs that I see.


    The next morning, there were rumors about the invisible hero who killed bad guys. That was me! I''m a hero!


    Though the guards of the Imperial Capital are now searching for me and informing the citizens that I''m actually a criminal. I think it''s the same as when I first became Ninja. Now I did it again, but in a different country. Will I do the same in Varadis Kingdom?


    After checking if everyone''s is awake, I returned to the Empress'' Chamber to see that Lynn is no longer hugging Celestine.


    "You''re back. Are we going to continue our mission?" Celestine asked.


    "You still want toe with me? I thought that you only want toe here."


    "I said that I''ll apany you, so I''ll be with you until we meet the King of Arturo. I also have met King Henry in the past. I don''t know if he still remembers me or not." Celestine said.


    "No! Why are you leaving again!?" Lynn protested.


    "I won''t feel safe until I destroy the cult. I''m not going to atone for my sin in killing innocent people. I''m doing everything for the future of the orphans." Celestine said.


    "Well, I''m thinking of staying here for two more days. How about you return to Cassau and introduce your sister to everyone there? I''ll pick you up again when we''re leaving." I suggested.


    "Okay. Wannae, Lynn?" Celestine invited Lynn toe.


    "Sure! udia, please take care of everything while I''m gone!"


    "¡­you always asked me to do everything though." udia said.


    Seems like she has a lot in her mind. I tapped her shoulder as I opened a portal for Celestine to return home. Then Victoria alsoe along while leaving some Blobbies for me.


    "Now that they''ve gone, can you tell me the specialty of this Empire? I want to bring home souvenir for the others."


    I spent the next two days buying souvenir for everyone, and then picked Celestine back to the Empire as we''re about to continue our mission.


    Next stop, Varadis Kingdom.

 Chapter 294 - Leaving The Imperial Capital

    I have picked up Celestine and Lynn who were on vacation back in Cassau. Now, Lynn has to return to her duty while Celestine will apany me on my journey.


    Damn! I missed home so much that once I return, I don''t even want to go out again! But I need to go for this mission. Once the kings are able to meet each other easily by having them use my portal, my mission will be done. That''s when I can truly be rxed.


    I said goodbye to Ka and the others who are at home and told them to wait until my mission is over.


    "Sister, are you leaving?" Lynn asked Celestine.


    "I am."


    "Sis, you don''t need to atone for what you did in the past. You can just stay here with me and rule this Empire with me." Lynn said.


    That''s an interesting offer. If it was me, I would consider it deeply.


    "I''m not atoning for my sin. Even now, I still enjoy killing people. The reason I betrayed the cult was because of the children. Being with children remind me of the past when I need to take care of you all the time. That''s why I can''t forgive the cult for ying with children''s lives. As for killing people, I''m actually still enjoy it. I have fully embraced the evil in me. But now, instead of innocent people, my target is the cult itself." Celestine said.


    Fuck! She''s still evil! At least I know her evilness is not directed toward me but the cult. But what would happen once the cult is gone? The orphans would grow up already.


    "But sis, I heard from Veronica that before, during your time in the cult, you were longing for a man who doesn''t like you only because of your breasts. Why won''t you stop fighting and find a man?" Lynn asked.


    "Ahaha, so Veronica still remembers, huh? Well, I did long for a man before. But not for love. It is so I can have a child of my own." Celestine said.


    Oh, so she just wanted to be a mother for real this time. Not bing the caretaker of the orphans anymore.


    "Does that mean you''re no longer looking for a partner?" Lynn asked.


    "Not anymore. I have him." Celestine said while pointing at me.


    "¡­wait, me!?" I was shocked when she''s pointing her index finger at me. Does it mean I have another lover?


    "Yeah, I can just ask youter. I know that you are fine with me. You refused to have children until you know this world will be a safe ce for your children to live in. I''m fine waiting until the cult is destroyed, you know? Then, we can have kids. I want a lot." Celestine said.


    "Yeah, I want a lot as well. But is this how easy I get another girl? And now, the reason why the girls want to be with me are getting weirder and weirder!"


    "You don''t want to?" Celestine asked.


    "I want to!" I replied honestly.


    "Then let''s destroy the cult as soon as possible. I promise that once I have my own kids, I will care for them more than killing people." Celestine said.


    What the hell? That makes it sound like she will continue being evil after the cult is gone. Don''t tell me that I have been keeping the most dangerous person with me all this time?


    "¡­I don''t really get it, but congrattion on your engagement. Please destroy the cult as soon as possible and have a grand wedding!" Lynn said.


    "Sure. I promise." Celestine said.


    So¡­ it''s official? Just like that?


    "¡­just what did I just witnessed?" udia who has been watching us from the start asked.


    "That¡­ everyone around me is weird. That''s the truth." I said to her.


    "Then please leave quickly. I don''t want to witness another weird thing." udia said.


    "Celestine, let''s go!"


    "Ah, which way are you going to go?" udia asked as we are preparing to leave.


    "Through the sky, directly to Varadis." I replied calmly.


    udie seems pondering about something. Then she opened her mouth.


    "That mean you will have to cross the sea, right? Probably for a few days. The distance from the capital of Tatrama to here is not that far, but from here to the capital of Varadis is so far. Normally, it will take about three months to get there from here." udia said.


    "Thanks for the reminder. Celestine, are you fine with the journey? Do you want to stay here or at Cassau? I can still transport you with portal once I arrive at Varadis." I asked Celestine.


    "Don''t mind me about the journey. I just need to stay still while being given a piggyback ride from you all the way What about you though?"


    "It''s just a few months. I can run even longer knowing I have your breasts pressed on my back." I said.


    Since we have known each other for a while, Celestine who used to hate when a man is staring at her breast is fine with me making jokes about it. As long as she''s not angry, I think it''s still fine.


    "That''s the answer I expected from you. Let''s go. Lynn, I will visit more often. See you!"


    "Bye-bye sis! Come meet me more!"


    The sisters waving at each other as I carried the older sister on my back and run on air to the direction of Varadis. It''s still early in the morning and the sun has just risen. Not many people will look above to see someone is running in the sky, so I don''t need to worry about being seen.


    The little sister keeps waving her hands with a sad expression as we leave.


    "Don''t you want to stay a bit longer?" I asked as I run.


    "No need. She''s an empress now. She can''t be spoiled too much. Being with the strict udia is much better as an empress." Celestine said.


    "She''s strict? I never noticed. I guess you heard about it from Lynn during your stay in Cassau, huh? Anyway, why are you stilling with me? I don''t want to hear another big surprise saying that you are actually the illegitimate daughter of Varadis King or something."


    "No. It''s not that shocking. I was just a wife candidate for his son." Celestine said calmly.


    "Ah, I see. I guess I imagined too much. Then are you going to greet him?"


    "Yes. That''s the n. As for the king of Arturo, I don''t know much about him. Other than he''s a womanizer like you." Celestine said.


    "Hey! I''m different! He goes after women, while women go after me! Wait, since he''s a king, I should expect that there are women who go after him, huh? I guess we''re a bit simr."


    During our journey, we keep having small chat like this. Whenever we see a town in sight, we will choose to stay in that town. Other times, we would camp outside.


    Eight dayster, we finally reached the coast city.


    "Sea! I missed the smell of the sea!"


    "Good for you. You always spend your free time diving for treasures back at home. What''s our n?" Celestine asked.


    "We''ll rest here for three days. I want to go diving around here. After that, we will continue our journey! Let''s find a hotel with a bath. It''s been so long since I took one."


    "Then I have a suggestion. Go to a vige in that mountain. There''s a hotel with a hot spring. And because the journey to get there is difficult with the road not maintained well, it''s not crowded. We can go there through the sky easily." Celestine said.


    "A hot spring, huh? I never went to a hot spring before. I''m interested. I think I will get everyone stay there."


    I tapped the ring on my finger and Sonia appears in front of me.


    "What is it, Roy?"


    "I want you to ask everyone that we''re going to stay at an inn with hot spring. Ask them if they want toe." I said.


    "I''M IN!"


    "Whoa! You''re a ghost so you''re free to do whatever you want. Just go ask the others. I''m going to look at the hot spring first."


    "I''ll go tell Marie as well! See youter!"


    Then Sonia disappear. She moves so quickly. And after her training, she can take a bath now.


    Haha, a ghost taking a bath. Won''t water juste through her body? When I asked her, she said that she feels refreshed after bath anyway. Weird.


    In less than one minute, she returns and told me that everyone is going. Even those in the capitals. Tatrama''s capital and Empire''s capital. I guess Celestine will meet her sister again so soon.


    With Celestine on my back, I ran in the sky andnded outside the vige. I can see the hot spring, but something is strange. The hot spring is being upied by a group of harpies. A humanoid monster with wings attached to their arms.


    And other than a few vigers, no one else is there. It''s a very quiet vige. It must be because of those harpies.


    Since it will be suspicious if we enter with just two people but many people suddenly stay in the hotel, I transported everyone before we enter the vige.


    Other than Albert who is busy, Ian also didn''te. He will take care of the children while we''re away along with several agents in Cassau he contacted. Does he not want to have honey moon with Ruby?


    Marie is alsoing. Both Marie and Shirley exchanged pleasantries with Lynn and udia. Lynn also introduced udia who will join us to everyone.


    With arge group of people, we entered the vige. With this many people, those harpies won''t be a problem.

 Chapter 295 - Diamond Mine

    The harpies weren''t any problem at all for us. Especially since the girls heard about hot spring, they decided to do everything to return peace back to the vige.


    As for the Empress herself, she and her aide, udia who want to join as well, discussed something in private with the vige chief just as soon as we entered the vige.


    Turns out, it has been about one month since the harpies entered this vige and take control of the hot spring. The vigers can''t defeat them, and those who left the vige to make a request to the closest guild were killed by the harpies before they left too far from the vige. And those who were about to enter the vige were also killed. Making the vige totally isted from the whole world.


    Good thing that Celestine remembered about the hot spring in the vige and told me to go there before we cross the sea. If not, we don''t know how long the vigers can survive with the supplies they have. Even the vegetables that they farmed were robbed by the harpies.


    As a thanks for saving the vige, we are all free to stay in the hotel. Well, their empress is here so it''s not like they can ask us to pay when she''s the one helping them.


    Finally, it''s time for us to take a bath in the hot spring¡­ is what I like to say. Since the harpies destroyed the wall in the hot spring that separates men''s bath and women''s bath, I''m not allowed to join them.


    "Why!?" I asked.


    "Obviously, we¡­ wait, it''s just me who is protesting?" Lynn look around to see that no one else cares that I''ll be taking a bath with them.


    "It''s fine. With those eyes of his, it means he can always look at our naked bodies every day. Even if we told him to stay outside, he will still look at us. Instead, if we let him join us, his lovers can talk to him so he will be too upied to look around him." Shirley said.


    "But it''s different! Being naked on purpose in front of the opposite sex is not normal no matter what!?" Lynn protested.


    "¡­I guess we are already too used to it by now. Also, it''s not like we will let any other men join us. Well, it''s your choice to let him join us or not." Shirley said.


    "Then he can''t go in until we leave!" Lynn.


    That''s how I ended up walking around the vige. My eyes are still focused to the hot spring, but I''m wandering around the vige as I wait for them.


    ¡­is what I want to do, but this hotel is too suspicious. Why is a building this big and fancy is in a not so rich vige like this? Even the house of the vige chief is many times smaller than the hotel. I always curious about this since I entered this vige, but because I don''t want to ruin the girls'' mood, I didn''t say anything to them.


    If there''s a big old building in suspicious ce, that mean there''s something valuable either inside that building or around that building. That''s what the stories I read tells me. I guess I should go outside the vige to look around. But if I''m too far, I won''t be able to peek on the girls.


    Hmm¡­ I can take a peek on the girls anytime I want, so I guess I''ll walk around now.


    I entered the mountain area, and I finally see something extremely valuables. I can see an entrance to a cave, which if I''m right, is actually a diamond mine! I''m rich!


    But is it safe? Let''s keep going now.


    "Roy, where are you going?"


    "Whoa! You surprised me!"


    I was shocked to hear that a ghost is suddenly next to me. I''m too concentrated on the cave and didn''t expect anyone to call out to me.


    "Victoria noticed that you are moving while carrying her clones. I also feel the soil in your possession keep getting further and further. We thought that something is happening, so Ie to ask you about it." Sonia said.


    "Well, I was curious about how the hot spring hotel we''re in, is far too big for a not so rich vige. That''s why I look around the vige to see if there''s anything valuable around here. And I found a diamond mine! I''m rich!"


    "Really!? We''re rich!" Sonia shouted.


    "¡­please don''t remind me that you girls keep taking all my money. At least not today. Now I don''t feel like going there anymore."


    "Just go there already and confirm it! It''s not like we keep spending all your money until they are gone."


    "But there''s a huge tortoise monster inside that cave. I guess that''s why no one else enters that diamond mine. Let''s go back for now and discuss it with the others first. I also want to take a bath in the hot spring."


    Inside the dungeon mine, I can see a huge tortoise monsters hiding inside its shell. I know that tortoise is an animal that can live for hundreds of years. And if it''s a monster that big, it should be more than a hundred years. Maybe even five hundred years! Even the diameter of its shell is around fifty meters.


    But that huge size is also its weakness. In an enclosed space like the mine, that tortoise shouldn''t be able to move around much. If I had the others with me, that monster should be easy to defeat. That''s why I suggested we take a step back and discuss with the others first.


    After my bath obviously.


    After knowing about the diamond mine, I returned back to the hotel where I can see that the girls are already prepared to move.


    "Where are you going?" I asked them just in case.


    "Diamond mine. You can take your bath and we will go there on our own. Defeating the huge tortoise should be easy with all of us going." Ka exined.


    "I want to watch my sister fight! This is the first time for me to watch an expert level mage use her magic!" Lynn eximed.


    "Then I guess I should refrain from going all out. Celestine, you will be the star today." Veronica said to Celestine.


    ¡­so, I guess I won''t monopolize the mine on my own. I guess that''s fine. This way, they will use their own money from the mine instead of getting them from me.


    "By the way, after Sonia told us about the mine, I remembered about how the supply of diamond diminished from the record around a hundred years ago. The mine was owned by the Empire, so you can''t monopolize the mine. Though we will reward you if you help us get rid of the tortoise." udia said.


    "You''re going as well? I thought you''re just an aide that help Lynn with her duty. Not to fight." I said to udia.


    "I''m not much of a mage. I''m still intermediate level as well. I want to see the condition of the mine. And if possible, I want to buy magic stones from you. I''m a water mage so I should be able to advance very quickly with the magic stones you got from diving. I heard a lot about you in thest hour." udia said.


    "Just give us the money. You can contact Sonia and I will bring them to you. If you want more, you should ask Sam through Sonia. She''s the one doing business. Anyway, be careful."


    I bid them farewell as I entered the hotel. There''s no girl with me, but taking a bath alone is fine as well. And I don''t need to worry about anything. They have two expert level mages with them. Even if there''s something happened, Sonia will contact me right away.


    There''s no one in the bath so I can be rxed. Although the vigers wanted to take a bath in the hot spring as well since it has been a while for them to go there, we asked them to not enter for today. Not even when the vige girls wanted to enter during the girls'' bath time. And since I have the options, I don''t want any men during my time as well.


    I sunk my body in the hot spring for an hour, and then I left the hotel. I see that the vigers are still wanted to enter the hot spring so they waited for all of us to leave. They entered as soon as I leave. Though we will returnter at night.


    Wait, since the vige has been taken over by the harpies for a while, that mean they don''t have any meal for us, right? While I''m gone, I''ll go hunt some monsters then. We have Lina who will cook for us.


    For now, I''ll go back to the mine and see the girls'' progress.


    Inside of the mine, I can see the tortoise is stabbed by a spike protruding from the ground. A Diamond Spike! It must be Celestine''s doing. She used the diamond inside for her attack. Lynn is extremely surprised and happy to see how strong her sister is.


    As for me¡­


    "Hey, is tortoise meat delicious?"


    We had a feast with delicious tortoise meat during our time in the hot spring hotel.


    Two dayster, it''s time for me to go cross the sea.

 Chapter 296 - Good Spot

    I transported the others back home while leaving Celestine, Victoria, and I to continue our travel to Varadis.


    "What a shame, huh? You didn''t get the mine." Victoria said.


    "It''s not like I have to get the mine. And I think the Empire might need it more than me. Anyway, the sea is vast. I can dive in any part of the sea and I will find some treasures. Even right now, we''re about to cross the sea. But I''m not going to dive. Let''s continue running toward Varadis. We''ll stop when we find an ind to rest, or if we can find a ship on the way, we can sneak in and rest there. It''s best if it''s a pirate ship. We can also grab their treasures. Celestine, were there any pirates in around the area we''re going to travel?" I asked Celestine.


    "There used to be some. I don''t know if they are still there or not." Celestine said.


    "That''s good enough. Let''s go!"


    udia said that it usually takes a few days to cross the sea, then about one month to reach the capital. I will try to get there in two weeks or less.


    With Celestine on my back, and Victoria who wanted to tag along this time on my shoulder, I started running on the sky.


    When there''s no one around, I descended and run on the surface of the sea. Since the travel takes a while on ship, there''s only about one ship every day to cross the sea. And we just passed the ship that going toward Varadis a while ago, so I descended.


    Since there are the three of us, the conversation never stopped. But Celestine decided to take a nap on my back, and there''s only two of us talking. At least I''m not bored. Though these two women would sometimes talk about something only women understand.


    I continue running until I see something swimming fast under us. The speed is much faster than my running speed. Just to be safe, I ascended to the sky again.


    "Roy, what happened?" Victoria asked.


    "Something big and scary is swimming below us faster than me. It''s safer for us to be in the sky. There''s no soil as well so it will be difficult for Celestine to fight here." I said.


    Celestine who noticed that her name is called, woke up. I exined to her about the monster under us.


    "What kind of monster?" Celestine asked.


    "Big, long, scaly, sharp fangs, mustache." I exined how the monster look like.


    "How big?" Celestine asked again.


    "Hmm¡­ about a hundred meters in length. Why?"


    "That''s probably a Sea Serpent. It''s considered as a sacred beast by the people in the shore of the Empire. It''s even called as the protector of water. That monster is why there have been no attack from the sea by other countries for centuries. Though I don''t know if it''s true or not." Celestine exined.


    "So, it''s about as old as Victoria? Maybe the Sea Serpent knows Javier."


    "Are you going to greet the monster? Please don''t do that. The monsters you greeted before are all weaker than you. But this one should be much stronger. Let''s just flee. Go higher, Roy!" Victoria said.


    "It''s toote. The monster is about to jump and block us. Let''s dodge it first and then escape. If this thing is a protector of the Empire, why would it attack us?"


    "¡­I killed people for fun." Celestine said.


    Oh, right. Thedy I carried on my back is a really evil woman who killed people for fun. Even if she''s the princess, if the serpent is the protector of the Empire, she is her target to kill.


    "Let''s dodge first. If we can''t escape by running, I''ll use portal to transport us elsewhere." I said.


    The Sea Serpent jumped out of the sea very high, and it blocked us from moving forward. I was about to change direction to dodge the Serpent, but I noticed that''s impossible.


    "It flew!"


    The giant Sea Serpent which size is over a hundred meter is flying right in front of me. It stopped while focusing its eyes on us. I can feel that it''s an intelligent monster. There''s no way we can defeat it. I guess I should greet it.


    "Hey there! We came in peace! We just want to cross the sea to get to the kingdom as soon as possible!" I greeted the serpent as it still focused on us. I don''t sense any hostility so I hope we''re safe. Though I have prepared to open a portal in an instant just in case it attacked us.


    But still, a Sea Serpent that can fly. Doesn''t that make it a Sky Serpent? Or is it called Sea and Sky Serpent? What about onnd? I don''t see any legs so I think it can''t walk. Maybe it moves like a snake onnd?


    The Serpent opened its mouth. Is it a breath attack?


    "Oh, my! An Aura user! It''s been a long time since I met one! A thousand years? Nice to meet you too!" The Serpent replied back.


    "¡­"


    I was too shocked toprehend what just happened. Let''s calm down first.


    First, it talks! Second, it''s very friendly! Third, it knows about Aura user!


    Alright, I calmed down now. Let''s have a small chat then.


    "Well, I never expected that you can talk. I have never met any monsters in this world that can speak. Those who can are summoned from Monsters World. I want to continue our talk, but¡­ as you can see, I''m unable to stay still while in the air. How about we find an ind to rest so we can have a chat easily?" I suggested to find an ind.


    "Oh, sure! It has been a while that I met a human as polite as you! I know an empty ind. I''ll take you there! Get on top of my head!"


    Oh, God! This Serpent is so friendly that I felt guilty thinking of it as enemy! Since we have been permitted to stand on its head, I jumped there. The serpent then flies and carried us on its head.


    "Oh! So fast!"


    "Ahaha! This is not even my fastest speed! I can go faster, but I''m afraid that you will fall off my head!" The serpent spoke kindly.


    "Don''t worry! I can stick my feet on your head with my Aura. It shouldn''t be a problem for me."


    "Then, I''ll go faster!"


    The Serpent fly faster than before. Much faster than the speed it used before. I can feel Celestine tightened her grip around my neck, and Victoria make a tentacle around my arm so she won''t fall off. Though even if she falls, I can still summon her back. I doubt she will die anyway if she falls.


    The Serpent brought us to the direction of Varadis Kingdom. It must be so kind that after I said that I want to go there, it''s considering which ind is best for a chat and flew to an ind in the direction of the kingdom.


    If I''m a tamer, I would tame this monster right away. But I''m not a tamer so that''s impossible.


    We arrived at the ind, and I dropped Celestine on the ground. She must be feeling better since we''re on an ind.


    "Let''s talk now! Who are you?" The Serpent asked with its head rested on the shore of the ind.


    "My name is Roy. And as you noticed, I''m an Aura user. These two are mypanions during my journey. She''s Celestine, and that one is my summon. A ck Slime named Victoria." I introduced ourselves to the mighty and friendly Serpent.


    "Oh, you''re also a summoner! I was also my master''s summon! He''s also an Aura user! I don''t remember much about the world I was born since I made a contract when I was just a baby. I am a hybrid of Sea Serpent and Sky Serpent. Which is why I can fly as fast as I swim. As for my name, my Master gave me the most precious name in the world! My name is¡­ Spot!" Spot proudly announced his name.


    ¡­that''s a name for a dog. Not a serpent. What kind of master was he?


    I won''t say anything about his name. He treasured that name very much.


    "I was just swimming around happily when I noticed the contract with my Master is broken. It was about a thousand years ago. I don''t know what happened to him, and since I''m in this world when he died, I can''t go back to my home world. That''s why I thought that if I ever met another Aura user, I want to talk to him and ask if he knows about my master. He died a long time ago so I don''t think you know about his death." Spot said.


    "¡­no. Actually, I might know why your Master died."


    If it''s a thousand years ago, that''s when that Evil God started to hunt on Aura users. It''s easy to guess why Spot''s Master died.


    "Really? Please tell me!"


    This might be a chance for me to gain him as our ally. Having the king of the sea as our friend will be beneficial against the cult.


    But¡­ let''s just be careful to not anger Spot.. He seems to be a good boy.

 Chapter 297 - Telling The Past With Puppet Shows

    "Well, Spot, you''re really a friendly monster, huh? Are you used to be with humans?" I asked Spot before telling him the truth about his master''s death.


    "Not really. I more used to killing them. The one I''m used to are Aura users. That''s why I''m friendly with you. Then, while sinking most ships that tried to cross the sea and disturbed me in the past somehow, I ended up beingbeled as a sacred monster." Spot said.


    So, he knows that the people in the coast of the Empire worshipped him. Does that mean in the past Varadis Kingdom really waged a war on the Empire? But they were stopped by Spot. Good Spot.


    "It has been so long since I met an Aura user! I was so excited seeing you running on the sea surface. And then you ascended to the sky as if you noticed me approaching you! That must be your ability gained through Aura by defeating a certain monster, right? I know that some Aura user prefer to keep their ability as secret, so I won''t ask more. Can you tell me about the disappearance of Aura users? I was just a baby a thousand years ago." Spot said.


    In a brief moment, I made an eye contact with Victoria. She noticed my intention and turned into her humanoid form.


    "Before that, can I ask you something? Have you met a ck Slime in the past?" Victoria asked.


    "Whoa! You transformed into a human! Wait, you''re just changing your shape into simr to a human. You''re still a slime." Spot said.


    "You''re right. Can you answer me?"


    If Spot has met a ck Slime in the past, that might be either Javier, or any other consciousness in the ck Slime. Way before Victoria joined the party. But if Spot has met a ck Slime before, Victoria can exin things easier.


    "Hmm¡­ no. I don''t think I have met any before. And if they are so small, I might have met one but I don''t remember. Sorry." Spot apologized politely. He''s too friendly for a monster that look so scary!


    "No problem. Well, if you met, that might be this body before my consciousness entered." Victoria exined about how a ck Slime has multiple consciousness and Javier or the others might have met Spot before.


    "Oh, that''s awesome! As for me, I keep getting bigger and bigger. I can''t transform at all." Spot said.


    "By the way, I am Victoria. I used to be a human and an Aura user in the past before I died. About a thousand years ago. So, I might have met your master before." Victoria said.


    "Amazing! I''ll tell you what I remember about my Master! He''s¡­ well, he looked younger than Roy. But he already capable of running in the sky like Roy. His ability is¡­ Well, he died anyway so I don''t think it will be a problem if I tell you. He used a sword and when he swung it, he can sh enemies that are in the distance." Spot said.


    "Oh, just like Werewolves. Maybe your Master defeated a Werewolf to get his ability. He must be quite strong then." I said.


    I know from my experience from fighting Grandpa Werewolves who said that in the past, Werewolves back then are much stronger than the current Werewolves. Maybe Victoria knows Spot''s Master.


    "Hmm¡­ I don''t think I''ve heard of him. Let''s ask Sonia." Victoria said.


    Oh, right. We have another monster who used to be an Aura user in the past.


    I called Sonia who was surprised to see a talking monster. But she got used to it soon.


    "I have heard of a swordsman who can attack from distance using his sword. But I didn''t really care about him since he''s not a part of my harem." Sonia said.


    ¡­she only cared men who were charmed by her. I forgot about that.


    "I see¡­ maybe the man you''ve heard about was my Master. I guess he failed to be famous. He said that he wanted to be the strongest swordsman. But he died soon after. What a shame. Thanks for telling me." Spot said.


    "Since we''re talking about Aura user and the past, I think I should stay here. Roy, do you want me to call Albert?" Sonia asked.


    Right, calling Albert here is a good idea.


    "Yeah. And while you''re at it, contact Lynn and udia as well. We''re still in the Empire and they need to know about the monster they called sacred." I said.


    Sonia leaves, and soon after returns. Telling me that Albert, Lynn, and udia are ready to go. So, I opened a portal twice. One to Albert''s location, and another to Lynn''s location.


    All three of them were shocked to see the size of Spot. And his charming smile.


    "Hello, King and Empress! I''m Spot!" He introduced himself energetically.


    Albert, Lynn, and udia introduced themselves after that. Then they chatted a bit, and finally, we returned back to the real topic.


    "Let''s talk about how the Aura users disappeared. We don''t know what started it, but someone started to¡­" Before Victoria continued, Spot stopped her.


    "Wait, can you not make the story boring? Even if it''s important, if you told me in a boring way, I''ll be asleep before listening to everything." Spot said.


    What the hell did this spoiled snake said!? Make it interesting? Just how spoiled was he in the past?


    I looked at Albert, and he nodded telling me that Spot said the truth. He will fall asleep before the important part was told.


    "What if we told you the summary? Will you understand it?" I asked.


    "That''s still boring."


    "What do you want you oversized snake!? Do you want us to do a puppet shows or something!?" I shouted in anger.


    "Oh! A puppet shows! I love puppet show! Do it!" The oversized snake shouted happily.


    Roy, you''re an entertainer. Do it properly.


    "Alright! That''s what I want as well! Let''s go! Celestine, prepare the stage! I will use Victoria and Blobbies as the puppets. Albert will help as well." I gave the order to everyone.


    "Wait, me too?" Albert asked.


    "Obviously! The other doesn''t care about Aura users in the past so they don''t know how the story progress. They just care about the future. Sonia will help as well. Let''s go!"


    After the stage is prepared, two men, a slime, and a ghost go behind the stage. We arrange the puppets to what we want. Somehow, Albert is more enthusiastic than I thought.


    "Well, this is interesting after all. Once we destroy the cult, history will say that we convinced a monster to help us by using a puppet shows. I want that written in history books." Albert said.


    I also want that as well. that''s why I became even more enthusiastic as well.


    The show started. It goes from how the Evil God started its hunt. From attacking Sonia and her lovers.


    "Ah! You''re a bad human!" Spot said angrily.


    "Wait! I''m no longer a human! I''m a ghost!" Sonia said.


    "So, you were a bad human, and now you''re a good ghost?" Spot asked.


    "Yes. Let''s continue with the story."


    Each time the story became too intense, Spot got angry. We made some made up sob story as well to lure Spot to be engrossed in the story, while making sure that he will help us.


    "Oh! So sad!" Spot said with tears falling from his eyes.


    "It is!" Lynn hugged the Serpent''s beak as the two cried.


    I think the story worked too well. but for Celestine and udia, those two knows that we made things up. But they didn''t say anything.


    After telling how Victoria died, we yed the part when the first king of Tatrama Kingdom became a hero and a king. We add some fighting scenes and I have to say that my acting as the defeated Evil God was done very well.


    Then I started telling about my past live. And then how I returned back to the past.


    "Oh! You have a harem! Me too! The Sea Serpents in this area are all my children and grandchildren. I have a lot of partners!"


    That''s what Spot said when we told him about my harem.


    "Oh, are they obeying you?" I asked.


    "Yes! My children, grandchildren, and more, are all obeying me! They are good kids!" Spot said happily.


    Does this mean that if we get him as our ally, we can control the sea? Albert and udia both are excited to hear that. As for Lynn, it took a while for her to get it.


    The story is over, and it''s finally the decisive time.


    "So¡­ will you help us?" Albert asked.


    "I will! I can''t forgive the Evil God for killing my Master! He might not be the one who killed my Master, but he killed my friends! Sonia and Victoria are my friends, so I have to avenge them!" Spot said.


    "Thank you very much! With your help, our chance of winning raised a lot!"


    We seeded! The puppet shows worked! Spot is now our ally!


    "If you need any help in the sea, I will help you. If I can''t do it, I will send my children. Wait here, I will introduce my children to you all."


    Spot then dive into the sea to call for his children.


    Meanwhile, we cheered on the empty ind that we received another powerful ally. Even Celestine who is an expert level mage doesn''t have the confidence to defeat Spot.


    I should also go get the others to introduce to Spot.

 Chapter 298 - New Friends

    It was just a few hours since we left the hot spring hotel and I returned everyone home, and I called them again with my portal. Bringing everyone with me to introduce them to Spot and his family.


    While waiting for Spot to returns, everyone was confused by the stage made of rocks in the empty ind. So, Celestine exined the importance of the stage to persuade Spot to join our cause.


    "A puppet shows? I want to see!" Jewel shouted.


    "No, we''re done for the day. There''s no more puppet shows anymore." I said.


    "What a shame. Then, will you do the puppet show to the King of Varadis?" Jewel asked.


    "Hmm¡­ maybe? Depend on the person himself."


    "If it''s that old man, he will dly see it." Shirley said.


    If someone close to him said it, it must be right.


    "Then if you are going to do it again, call me! I want to watch!" Jewel said.


    "Yeah, sure. But don''t expect that I will do it. I might be too tired to do it or too annoyed." I said.


    It''s been a while since Spot left, but he hasn''t returned. So, we just chatted a bit.


    I also called Shelia and the other Werewolves to get to know with Spot''s family.


    And after waiting for just half an hour, Spot returned along with five other Sea Serpents. Those five are much smaller than Spot.


    "Oh, he has returned. He brought five other Sea Serpents." I said to the others to inform of Spot''s arrival.


    Spot''s length is over a hundred meters, while his five children were less than half of that. The longest among the five was about fifty meters. Which is still very big, butpared to Spot, they seem so small.


    "Oh, wow! There''s a lot of you here now!" Spot said as he surfaced. He rested his head on the shore, and the other Sea Serpents also did the same. Is that afortable position for them?


    "Yeah, I thought it would be great if I show you my friends."


    I proceed to introduce everyone first. Including the Werewolves who seem eager to fight. Though I told them to not fight. But it seems that one of the Sea Serpent also eager to fight as well. Let''s ignore them.


    "Oh! You have a lot of Werewolves with you! Are you a tamer as well?" Spot asked.


    "No. I just made a contract with Shelia over there, while the other followed me since I defeated their previous king. Now, I''m the Werewolf King of their tribe. They will follow me at least until the cult is destroyed." I exined to Spot.


    "I also only brought five of my children here. They are the smartest among my kin. They understood humannguage but can''t speak them. I have a lot more, but they don''t understand humannguage. But these five are considered the elders so the others followed these five. At least one of them controlled one part of the sea. They are Wan, Tuh, Techree, Vowa, and Shicks." Spot introduced his family to us.


    So¡­ his children''s name is One, Two, Three, Four, and Six? Where''s Five? And why is he naming them like that? Should I ask?


    It seems like I''m not the only one who want to ask him about their names. Is this Spot''s naming sense?


    "None of them can speak humannguage, but they can understand when you talk to them¡­ wait, what?"


    While Spot is talking, one of the Sea Serpent growled lightly. Is that how theymunicate? By growling?


    And the growling one is the one who wanted to fight. If it''s the normal urrence, it''s probably that one refused to follow us unless we are stronger than them. That''s just like how I received the Werewolves approval.


    "King, I think I understand what they are talking." One of the Werewolves, Jack, approached me.


    "Tell me."


    "That one wanted to fight. And us Werewolves are also itching for a fight. Please let us fight."


    "Sigh¡­ so that''s as expected, huh? Let''s wait and see. If it''s a fight it wants, you will fight it. Probably not alone. It''s impossible for any of you to fight it alone." I said.


    "Understood. I''ll tell those who are willing to fight just in case."


    Jack left to inform the other Werewolves while Shelia approaches me.


    "Shelia, you don''t want to fight?" I asked her because it seems like she won''t take part in the fight.


    "No. I want to see how strong the others have be." Shelia said.


    "Okay."


    ROAR!!


    Then we heard Spot roared at the Sea Serpent.


    "Spot! What''s wrong!?" I asked.


    "Vowa said that he wants to fight! He doesn''t want to follow someone weak, so you need to prove your power! I''m currently scolding him so please wait." Spot said.


    "If it''s a fight he wants, then some Werewolves are also itching for a fight. If you don''t mind, how about we let Vowa fight some Werewolves as a test? That way, we can estimate each other''s strength." I suggested a fight.


    Spot then looked at Vowa who nodded at my suggestion.


    "He agreed. About the fight¡­"


    "Don''t worry. He is a Sea Serpent so it''s hard for him to fight onnd, right? We will only send five Werewolves who are capable of running on air. The fight will be at the sea. As long as Vowa didn''t dive too deep, it won''t be a problem for each side." I said


    Vowa nodded with a big grin on his face. This one loves to fight.


    "Alright then. All of you, you can get on top of my back. We will watch their fight from the sky while the other Serpents will watch from the sea."


    With Spot''s permission, we get on top of his head to watch the fight. Some who can fly or run on air prefer to go on their own.


    Vowa moves with an aggressive manner and make a huge wave hit the ind we were just in. he was so excited for the fight.


    So are Jack and the others who want to fight. They are so excited that they have transformed to their Werewolves form. No longer a human one, but the hairy one. But Jack is the only one who has tail while the others haven''t yet.


    Without any signal, the two sides shed already. Vowa charged with a headbutt to Jack, while Jack is enduring the attack. Although he has transformed, Jack is still overwhelmed by Vowa''s power.


    Just with that exchange, it''s obvious that Vowa''s strength is much higher than Jack who is supposed to be the second strongest Werewolf after Shelia, but Jack is not alone. The result is still unknown.


    I don''t know how a Sea Serpent fight, so I''ll ask Spot.


    "Spot, how does a Sea Serpent fight?" I asked Spot right under me.


    "As you can see, we fight in close range with our body. Like a body blow, using our tails to attack, biting, headbutt, and if the enemy is much smaller than us, we just ate them. For long range, we have our breath attack." Spot exined.


    "Is it water thates out of your breath?" I asked.


    "No. It''s like a non-elemental magic attack, I guess? That''s what my master said when I show it to him."


    Vowa got attacked from all side, but none of the attacks damaged him badly. Instead, he swung his tail and used it to attack two Werewolves who then got blown away back to the ind. They are injured, but they can still move. I''ll have Ka heal them after the fight.


    Vowa must be feeling annoyed as he finally used his breath attack. The Werewolves dodged it, but the breath attack hit the ind we were before, and destroyed half of it. It''s a small ind after all, but the power is terrific!


    "¡­Spot, how strong is your breath attackpared to that?" I asked Spot.


    "About five times stronger."


    Damn! He can destroy a whole city with one breath! So powerful!


    The battle continues and Vowa seems getting tired. He also had several wounds on his body. As for the Werewolves, they are also tired. But both sides are still enjoying the fight.


    I guess I should stop it before anyone dies.


    I jumped from Spot''s head, and run toward Vowa. I then transformed Victoria into a hammer, and swung it at its tail as it is about to hit one of the Werewolves.


    The hammer hit the tail, as it''s being blown back. Everyone then confused that I suddenly interrupted the fight.


    "Let''s stop the fight here. We''ll call it your win." I said to Vowa.


    "But, king!" Jack about to protest, but I stopped him.


    "There are five of you, but you still unable to win after this long. I have seen enough. You have grown stronger, but not enough to win against Vowa. Take it as your loss and train more. I don''t want anyone dying here." I said.


    The Werewolves then stopped fighting while Vowa is still looking at me.


    "I guess we lost then. You don''t have to help us anymore." I said to Vowa who then replied with a roar.


    "He said that he will help. As long as you allowed him to fight the Werewolves." Spot tranted it for me.


    I looked at the Werewolves who happily agreed.


    "Sure! But next time, I won''t lose!" Jack shouted.


    "As long as none of you died, I will agree. Then, I''m happy to get your help against the cult, Spot." I said to Spot as the leader of the Sea Serpents.


    "I''m happy as well. I can avenge my Master this way. The pleasure is all mine."


    With this, we have powerful allies in the sea.


    Without making any contract, I tamed the strongest monster I''ve ever encountered.. Seems like saying that I came in peace actually worked this time.

 Chapter 299 - To The Second Stop

    "Everyone has agreed to team up against that evil cult now. They''re trying to get to know with your friends." Spot said as we returned to the half-destroyed ind.


    Just as he said, the other Sea Serpents are looking at the others curiously. Are they trying to memorize our smell?


    "Then I have something for you. This¡­ let''s make something easier for you to carry. Let''s keep it as a Blobby and stick it to your body. It will be glued to you unless you force it to leave. That thing is Victoria''s clone. And inside of it, there''s a little bit of soil. That''s Sonia''s soil which you can use to call her. If there''s anything you need, or if we have something to ask of you, we will contact each other through Sonia." I said as I stick a Blobby to his forehead.


    "Oh! A long-distancemunication by using a ghost! You''re smart to be able to think of this!" Spot said. He''s extremely happy to be able tomunicate with a human being after a long time.


    "Of course, if Sonia is free, you can call her anytime you want." I said to Spot.


    "Okay! I won''t bother you much! But if I started to get lonely, I will call her! Though I think it''s best if I just follow you." Spot said.


    "¡­what?"


    "Oh, sorry, I forgot. Unlike ordinary Sea Serpents, I can change my size into that of a regr snake. I can follow you anywhere! Can I?"


    Spot is looking at me with puppy eyes. No wonder he''s given a dog name.


    He then reduced his size into that of a snake about one meter to prove that he can do it. then he snuggles¡­ or is it warping his body to my leg?


    I don''t have the heart to reject him, but I''m afraid of what will happen since he''s still considered a wild monster. Not contracted with a tamer or summoner at all. What would happen if he changes his mind?


    I looked around to ask for the others'' help, but they pretend to not notice me. Albert just patted me on my shoulder instead of telling me what to do.


    Well, at least I know that Spot has always spoke the truth. Then¡­ let''s treat him like a pet.


    "Then, if you don''t mind, you cane with us. But what about the sea?"


    Spot is known as the protector of the sea by the people in the shore of the Empire territory. If he''s gone, I don''t know what those worshippers of his will think.


    "Don''t worry. I can have one of my five children to be in charge of this sea. As for the other four, they will be put into different seas along with their children." Spot said.


    "Then¡­ I''ll ask you to put someone in the sea territory of Tatrama Kingdom. It will be better if that one is near Cassau since that''s where my home is. Though I will ask of you to refrain in killing people too much."


    "Don''t worry! We never kill anyone unless we are provoked. Most of the humans we killed are pirates or bad guys who disturb us by using magic. If you told us to not kill anyone, we won''t!" Spot said.


    "I''m not saying that you shouldn''t kill anyone. I''m saying to not kill people too much. Well, thanks for your help. As for you, what else you can do?" I asked if Spot has any other abilities.


    "Well, other than what Vowa showed you and much stronger, I can fly, change size, and can camouge so no one can see me when I fly." Spot said.


    "Really? Then can you take us to Varadis Kingdom? We want to meet their king. It will be much faster if we could ride on your back."


    "Sure. Shall we, then?"


    "Wait. Just return to your original size first. I''ll transport the others home first."


    While I used portal to returns everyone home, Spot is telling his children to guard different part of the seas. It''s lucky for one of them to be in the Sea next to Cassau. But I hope that Serpent won''t cause any trouble to the fishermen.


    "Umm¡­ Roy, why am I still here?" Albert asked.


    "Yeah! Why am I still here as well!?" Lynn asked as well.


    And not just Lynn. Her aide, udia, is also staying.


    "Obviously, it will be faster to bring you two to meet the King of Varadis. Then, after meeting him, I''ll return you back to your country."


    "As long as I''m with my sister, then it''s fine! Let''s go!" Lynn happily agreed to join.


    As for udia, she seems eager to fly. She already figures out why she isn''t returned back to the Empire. Same as Albert. But she didn''tin.


    "I''m busy though¡­" Albert said.


    "Don''t worry. With Spot''s maximum speed, he can take us there in just a few hours. Spot, back then, that wasn''t your full speed, right?" I asked Spot this time.


    "So, you know!? You''re right! I''m a hybrid of a Sky Serpent and Sea Serpent. My speed is far surpassing any other Sea Serpents. I don''t know about Sky Serpents since I never met one in this world. But Sky Serpents were known to be the fastest type of Serpents back in my world. I''ll show you my real speed this time." Spot said proudly.


    "That''s great! Then, we''ll ride on top of your head. Come on, Albert!" I took everyone to Spot''s head.


    "Won''t we fall? If we''re going that fast, then we will fall due to the speed. And there''s nothing to hold onto on Spot''s head." Albert feels reluctant to go by riding on Spot''s head.


    "Don''t worry, I can transform me and my clones into a seat with safety belt. It will be like riding a roller coaster!" Victoria said.


    "I don''t know what a roller coaster is, but do that. I don''t need it so you can do it for the others."


    I can just stick my feet to Spot''s head like before. Well, I don''t me Albert for being afraid. But for me, I''m very confident with my physical strength and ability. And also, my sense of bnce. I think the speed will force me to fall even with using Aura, but I will try to endure it. It''s like some kind of training where I don''t really need to do anything other than standing still. I like this.


    Finally, everyone rides on top of Spot''s head. Victoria made a seat for everyone to sit on. Even Celestine. I guess she won''t be pressing her breasts on me anymore. What a shame.


    "Then¡­ Let''s go!"


    Spot instantly uses his maximum speed. Without even elerating! That''s a cheat!


    I thought I am confident that I can endure Spot''s speed. But turns out, I still underestimated it. I need to use my Aura fully to endure it.


    As for the others, they are looking at the scenery with delight. Even Albert no longer feel afraid. Does that seat really thatfortable?


    Well, even with those seats, it will be difficult for them to look around if I didn''t cast an Air Barrier magic around us.


    "So fast! You''re amazing, Spot!"


    It will be even better if your name is not a namemonly used for pet dog. I can''t really say something like that when I gave my monster Blobby as a name, huh?


    "I am amazing!" Spot said proudly.


    We fly very quickly. In just one hour, the sea that I need to cross for a few days is already behind us. With him, we can finish this mission quickly.


    "By the way, I want to ask you something."


    "What is it, Roy?"


    There''s one thing I want to ask Spot after hearing about his past. It''s about his homeworld.


    "Do you want to return to Monsters World to meet your kin?" I asked.


    "No." Spot said without any hesitation.


    "No hesitation at all! Why?"


    "In that world, it''s survival for the fittest. I was just a baby back then, but even though I''m stronger now, I still prefer this world. I also have my family here." Spot said.


    "I see¡­ well, in that world, I even saw a worm about your size. That world is truly scary."


    "I know, right?"


    And three hourster, we finally reached the capital of Varadis. We''re right above the royal castle, but no one can see us because of Spot''s camouge.


    "We''re already here!" I said to the others.


    We''re still above the sky with Spot floating around the castle.


    "So fast! That was awesome!" Albert said.


    "I want to go again!" Lynn said excitedly while hugging her sister''s arm.


    Celestine just smiled, while udia seems to agree with Lynn to go again.


    "No, I''ll call Sonia to tell the king that we''re here. After meeting him, I''ll return you with portal." I said.


    Finally, we reached out second stop. I wonder what kind of king he is?

 Chapter 300 - Meeting King Henry

    "Sonia, tell the king that we have arrived." I spoke to Sonia as soon as she appeared.


    Right now, we are right above the royal castle of Varadis Kingdom. High in the sky, we are riding on top of Spot''s head. A Giant Serpent who have destroyed and killed a lot of people in thest one thousand years, while being extremely friendly toward me wand my friends as soon as he found out that I''m an Aura user. Good thing he has be our friend now.


    And now thanks to his children, some areas of the sea are safe to travel. I just hope they won''t cause trouble to the fishermen. But while we''re on the way, we had a chat and Spot told me that his children only satisfied by eating deep sea monsters. Which is difficult for any fishermen to catch. I guess it will be fine then.


    "Whoa! So fast!" Sonia is impressed seeing that we''re already in Varadis.


    "Yeah. Can you tell the king for me? Right now, he''s all alone. So, it should be fine for you to go to his location. If he said that he can''t meet us right away, we''ll y around in the capital first." I said.


    "I see. I''ll go to him right away." Sonia disappeared after she said that.


    "So, are we going to get him into our alliance against the Evil Cult?" Spot asked.


    "He''s already in. But he doesn''t know me yet. Since that self-proimed Evil God killed all Aura users in the past, there are no one else other than me who can use Aura. At least from everyone I met. Which is why I''m the most important person in this alliance. And I don''t have anyone who has a talent in awakening their Aura around me. I have told many people how to do it, but none of them are capable yet." I exined.


    "Oh. My Master was barely awakened his Aura a few days after he summoned me for the first time. He said that he practiced how to do it for over ten years already at the time. Which is why he''s very happy. And I was happy with him even though I still don''t understand anything about Aura yet. I came to knowter that awakening Aura is so difficult." Spot said.


    "And yet this guy awakened his Aura just after a few months." Victoria interrupted our talk.


    "It was because I have experienced it in my past life. Once my physical strength is about as strong as in my previous life, I can use Aura instantly since I have experienced the feeling of using Aura. And now, I''m way stronger than I am in my past life." I said proudly.


    While chatting, Sonia returned back to us.


    "How is it, Sonia?" I asked.


    "We can go in right away. He also said that he will introduce us to someone who will be his heir." Sonia said.


    "Oh! Old man has decided already? He''s going to retire soon?" Albert asked.


    "Yes. His heir is his son called Keith. He''s calling him now."


    "Then we''ll wait until that guy entered the room." Albert said.


    No one noticed that I used a slightly serious tone when I said that. Why? It''s because after we stopped here, I can see that there are a lot of people here who has explosive devices in their mouth. While we were flying, I can''t see much because we are going too fast. But now we stopped, I can see everything clearly.


    If it like this, it should be soon when the fate of this kingdom will be simr to Arturo where the king is reced by a fake.


    Good thing we arrived here quickly. It''s thanks to Spot.


    From now, until I met the king of Arturo, I won''t stop in any other ce other than for resting. Or maybe doing some clean up as well.


    I have been doing this mission lightly from the start. Just like how we ended up in the hot spring and retrieving the diamond mine to the Empire. I guess I should be more serious about this mission.


    The king''s heir entered the room, and I waited until the king seems to have finished exining things.


    While the king down there is exining things to his heir, we in the sky also discussing something.


    And now, it''s finally time to meet the king. And while doing so, all of us are wearing ck robe of Blobbies to make us feel mysterious.


    "Ready?" Spot asked.


    "Yeah. Just bring us down. Once we''re in front of the window, you can turn smaller while I take everyone with me entering his chamber." I said.


    "Let''s go!" Spot said.


    Quickly, all of us entered the king''s chamber through the window, and see two people in it. The king of Varadis, Henry, and his son, Keith.


    As soon as we entered, Albert quickly grabbed King Henry and put him down.


    "What is the meaning of this!?" King Henry shouted, but I already used Air Barrier around the chamber to not let any sound out of the chamber. No one can hear us from the outside.


    "y along, old man." Albert whispered in a low voice to not let his son heard him.


    King Henry jolted when he recognized Albert''s voice.


    "Who the hell are you people!?" This time, it''s Keith who shouted.


    "Don''t you remember me?" Celestine asked as she showed him her face.


    "Lady Celestine! I thought you died!" Keith said.


    How rude! Not thinking that Celestine died of course. But recognizing her from her breasts instead of her face.


    And that is the proof that he''s a member of the cult. One of Celestine''s worshipper. Well, other than the explosive device in his mouth.


    "I''m still alive. I yed dead because of Veronica. I''m looking for her to kill her so it will be best if she thinks that I''m dead." Celestine said.


    Turns out, Celestine''s real goal ining here is because she knows that the prince of this kingdom is her worshipper. I just found out about it while we''re still in the sky when I told everyone that this guy is a cult member. Well, as long as she''s still on our side, everything should be okay.


    "It''s good to see you well! But seems like we will have some guests arriving soon." Keith said.


    "No problem. They''re already dead. We killed them on the way here." Celestine lied.


    "I see! By the way, some of us already decided to find another person to sub in for your position. But I refused since there''s only you who can do it!"


    Do what exactly? She''s a faction leader just because of her boobs! Do what? Jiggle-jiggle?


    "What is the meaning of this, Keith!?" King Henry who realized what happened shouted in anger.


    "It''s like this, father. You have been sitting on the throne for a long time without announcing your heir, so I asked for help. And finally, soon, this kingdom will be mine! While I''m at it, Lady Celestine, if you don''t mind, you can be the queen of this kingdom." Keith shamelessly proposed to Celestine.


    "You already rejected me once though?" Celestine said.


    "¡­what?"


    "Oh! So, it''s really you! You have grown up into a beautifuldy." King Henry said calmly despite the position he''s currently in.


    "Huh?"


    "So¡­ the y is over?" I asked.


    "What?"


    Keith is confused with our conversation. Though I didn''t expect that King Henry still remembers that Celestine was the princess of the Empire who was almost became his daughter-inw.


    In his confusion, I quickly run toward him, grabbed his jaw with my left hand while my right hand is inside his mouth to pluck out the explosive device.


    I quickly threw the explosive device to Albert who caught it as soon as he released King Henry from his hold. Then I grabbed the Magic Restriction Cor in my pocket that I have prepared before and wrap it on Keith''s neck.


    "Damn! I was just here for a greeting, but the first person I met is already a cult member! Old man, you almost give your kingdom to the cult." I said.


    "Sorry. You''re Roy, right? Nice to meet you in this not so nice situation. But thanks to you, my kingdom is saved. Though about that Celestine¡­ you''re really the former princess of Consenza, right? I thought you were dead. And Keith also thought you were dead. You yed dead twice?" King Henry asked.


    "We''ll exinter. For now, we have something more important, Old man." Albert said as he removed the hood covering his face.


    "You! You''re the King of Tatrama! Lady Celestine, what is the meaning of this!?" Keith shouted.


    "It means both Veronica and I yed dead and betrayed the cult. I always hated it when you tried to use any means to get close to me in the past, but thanks to that, you stupidly told me who you are. That''s why Ie up with this n to make you told your father everything." Celestine said.


    Well, that''s not really everything. But if his goal is just to ask for help to get the throne, I guess you can call it everything.


    "Keith, I''m disappointed in you. You''re no longer fit to be the king of this country anymore. I''ll continue ruling this kingdom until I find the right heir." King Henry said.


    What a way to have our first meeting. But seeing his reaction, I think King Henry is someone we can trust.


    But still, this city has too many cultists around. It must be thanks to Keith''s power that he let those people in. It will take a while for me to clean up everything.. But for now, we need to have a discussion first.

 Chapter 301 - Some Things Cant Be Inherited, While Some Weird Things Can

    "So, about what you were talking about with Keith, what do you mean by that?" King Henry asked Celestine, but before Celestine replied back, someone else interrupted.


    "Huhuhu, old man, you forgot something. I''m also here!" Lynn uncover her robe and show herself to King Henry.


    "E-Empress of Consenza as well!?" Keith panicked seeing two leaders of other countries appeared in the king''s chamber.


    "Oh, yeah. You''re here. Anyway, back to the topic¡­?" King Henry just ignored Lynn.


    "Hey! Don''t ignore me!" Lynn protested.


    "Sorry. Good that you''re here, udia." King Henry greeted udia who removed her robe as well.


    "It is nice to meet you too, King Henry. Though the situation is not very nice." udia said.


    "You''re right. Sigh¡­ now I have to pick someone else to be my heir. Good thing his position hasn''t been officialized yet." King Henry regretted that the future of his kingdom almost fell to the cult without any effort.


    "It''s all thanks to Roy and Celestine. If not for them, we will never know about it until it''s toote. It was quite lucky that we arrived here so quick. Thanks to our new friend, Spot." Albert then introduced the floating Serpent the size of a snake. Spot has transformed into a smaller version of him and look just like a snake.


    "Hello, old man! Sorry that I sunk your ships!" Spot said.


    "Sunk my ships?" King Henry confused with what Spot just said.


    "That one is Spot. He''s the Serpent who roamed in the sea between Consenza and Varadis. Centuries ago, when your kingdom wanted to attack the Empire, it was his fault that the attack failed. He destroyed the sailing ships that caused ruckus in the sea." This time, it was me who spoke.


    "It''s you? I have read in our past documents that such thing actually happened. Well, I don''t mind. Those are things from the past. And thanks to that, we ended up having good rtionship with each other." King Henry said.


    "Oh! You forgive me? You''re a good old man!" Spot said.


    "But you''re older though. Anyway, I need exnation. There are many confusing things happening at once. I''d like to have someone bring tea over, but I don''t think any of you want anyone else to notice that you''re here. And I don''t know if there are any other cult members in this castle." King Hendy said.


    "Seventeen. Including the guards and servants, I can see about seventeen in the castle at the moment. As for the tea, I''ll bring it."


    I turned around and make sure King Henry''s son unable to see me making a portal. It''s a small portal that can be covered with my body. Though I still let King Henry to see.


    I have asked Sonia before to tell Lina to prepare tea for us and told her to put it in my room. So, I just grabbed them with my portal. Now, we have tea for us.


    "So, that¡­ that thing is what Albert told me before. That seem very useful." King Henry said. Seems like he understood that I want to keep this power as secret from Keith so he didn''t say what it is.


    "It is. But I''m special since I can do more thanks to Victoria."


    I only said the gist of it. I know he realized it from listening to Albert that Victoria is my summon, and she can create clones of herself. And those clones are where I connect my portal to.


    "I heard that you will give me one." King Henry said.


    "Right. Here. Keep it with you at all time."


    I put the tea on the table, and throw him a Blobby after.


    "I''ll be sure to keep it safe with me. You''re Roy, right? You can just call me Henry or Old man like the others. I prefer to be casual."


    "Okay. Anyway, I''ll let you and Celestine talk first. As for your son, he won''t be able to do anything for a while. Even asking for help." I said.


    "That''s fine. So, please tell."


    "Alright. Here''s my story."


    Celestine told the old man about her past. About how she ended up bing a leader of a faction in the cult and how she''s still evil despite joining us.


    "As for my engagement with him, you remember why it doesn''t work, right?" Celestine asked.


    "Yeah. It was my son being stupid. You were so young back then and he refused it because your boobs size is too small for him. I also didn''t want you to be paired with my son who is a few years older than you, so it''s actually a good thing. Sigh¡­ our love toward big breasts are inherited from our previous king several generations before us. It was said that the reason he wanted to attack Consenza was because the princess at the time has a big breast." Old man said.


    "PFFFT!" I spit my tea back to the cup. Disgusting.


    "So, your love for breasts were inherited?" I asked.


    "Yes." Old man replied.


    "But her breasts size was not inherited from her ancestor?" I pointed at Lynn''s chest.


    "It seems so." Old man said as he sighed.


    "Hey! I''m still the most beautiful in the Empire!" Lynn protested.


    "Ah¡­ how time flies¡­ many things changed. Even people''s taste." Old man said.


    "Hey!"


    "But at least your sister got all the good part."


    "HEY!"


    Lynn''s tone is getting louder and louder. Just shows how angry she is.


    "Huh? So that girl was Lady Celestine? Huh? So, I rejected Lady Celestine? Huh?"


    And there''s someone who has a lot of regret over there. Let''s ignore him and put Air Barrier around him as well so he won''t be able to listen to our next conversation.


    "Let''s talk about our real reason foring here." I started the serious conversation.


    "Oh! Another puppet Shows!" Spot shouted excitedly.


    "¡­no, just a normal story telling. We''ll talk, and then I will bring Albert, Lynn, and udia back where they belong. Should I do that now?" I asked.


    "Yes. We have met and there''s no more reason for me to stay. And I have other business to attend." Albert said.


    "Okay, Victoria."


    I ordered Victoria to cover Keith''s eyes so he won''t be able to see what happened. Then, I opened two portals. One is to Tatrama, and the other is to Consenza.


    "I''ll take care of everything here first. Then, I will go to Arturo. But seeing how many people have explosive devices in their mouth just in this castle alone, I think I will stay here for a few days. I hope nothing happens to the king before I reach there. If he''s still alive." I said.


    I did this mission leisurely that I almost had Old man Henry as the next victim. I''ll clean up everything here as fast as possible, and go to Arturo right away.


    "Hmm¡­ they disappear after entering the portal. That''s interesting. Now, let''s talk."


    I told him all that I have told Lynn and Albert. And seems like he''s smarter than the others and able to use time wisely, so my talk with him is over sooner than I thought. There are many things that Albert and udia asked, but Old man Henry can guess the missing part from my story with hypothesis and they are right most of the time. I enjoy talking with Old man Henry.


    "Hmm¡­ just what you did in this life is enough to make a huge change. You alone already made two higher-ups of the cult to switch side. It might be just two and the cult still has a lot of members left, but it''s still two expert level mages. And if not for you, I wouldn''t know that my own son is conspiring against me. Can I talk to him?" Old man wanted to speak with his son.


    "Sure."


    Victoria unwrap herself from covering Keith''s eyes, and I also undid the Air Barrier.


    "Keith, why did you do this? Selling the kingdom to the cult?" Old man asked his son.


    "I also never expected it to go this far. At first, I just joined the faction because of my interest. Then I thought that these people could help me get the throne. And when I realized everything, it''s toote." Keith said.


    "You''re such a disappointment. I was already thinking that you are not fit to be the leader when you rejected Celestine back then. And recently, I thought that you''re fit to be a leader. But turns out, I almost gave the kingdom I have protected to the cult unknowingly. Do you know what will happen to you after this?" Old man asked.


    "Death sentence." Keith said calmly.


    "¡­that should be the case. But since the citizens don''t know about this, I will spare your life. You will stay in the dungeon until the cult is destroyed. I''ll make up some lies to tell the others."


    "¡­I''m sorry father."


    "Sigh¡­"


    Hmm? That''s it? That was fast.


    "Then¡­ should I clean up the rest of the cult members in the capital?" I asked.


    "No. You can kill everyone outside the castle, and those who are not a noble. As for those in the castle, tell me everyone. Good thing today is my granddaughter birthday. All the servants and the guards are all here for the birthday party. And all the nobles in this city will attend. But it seems one of my sons won''t be attending." Old man said as he looked at Keith.


    "Birthday party? I want to go! There''s a cake, right?"


    "¡­you can be one of the servants there."


    "If I''m not the one eating, there''s no point in going. I guess I won''t be joining. Oh, wait! I guess I can wait here until all the guests arrive, and I will tell you if any one of them is a cult member. As for the rest of the capital, I can do it after the birthday party. I guess I''ll y as the servant."


    "Good. Then, I want you to tell me the servants who are cult members. You will rece one of them. What about you, Celestine?" Old man asked Celestine.


    "I''ll be a servant as well. I''ll disguise myself as a man. Hearing how your family loves big breasts makes me uneasy to stay here without disguising myself." Celestine said.


    If she attended the party as she is, everyone''s attention would be on her instead of birthday girl. I guess a disguise is necessary.


    Now, we wait until the party started. As for Keith, I covered his head with Victoria''s clones, and imprison him in the basement of my house.. Old man will instruct meter on what to do with him.

 Chapter 302 - Birthday Party

    "Everyone, thank you for attending my daughter''s birthday. She''s already thirty, but what the hell. She wanted to have a birthday party, so here we are. Hopefully, she can get a spouse from this party."


    "Dad!"


    Old man Henry made an opening speech for her daughter birthday. She''s thirty and wanted to hold a birthday party? That''s nice.


    I want to go to birthday party every day. Any party that has a lot of foods. Whoever is celebrating, I don''t care.


    Right now, Both Celestine and I were pretending to be a servant in this party. So, we can''t just eat whatever food is served. Instead, we are serving the food. But of course, I still grabbed some while no one is watching.


    Just as old man instructed, I killed some servants and guards who are actually cult members, and substitute them. Old man told the others that we both, and several other people, are temporary workers. Turns out, the old man has several trusted people on his side already. Long before he knows anything about the cult. As expected for someone who stays as a king for a long time.


    How old is he now? I think he''s in his eighties. But his body is that of a man in his fifties. Seems like he watches his own health carefully.


    "Ahaha! Well, it doesn''t matter if she finds any candidate here or not. She''s free to pick any man she likes. Julia, you are already thirty. You can''t keep acting spoiled forever." Old man said to her party. The girl who is celebrating her birthday, Julia.


    "I''ll do whatever I want!" Julia shouted.


    "Okay, okay. Then, enjoy the party. I''ll go grab a servant or two to chat with me." Old man said lightly.


    Seems like the king''s antics are pretty well-known to everyone here. Although some people looked like they hated how the king prefer to talk to a servant, they didn''t say anything.


    "Oh, right! Before I forget, I have something to tell you. It''s unfortunate, but my son, Keith, is unable to attend the party. Well, enjoy yourself!" Old man said as he walked toward our direction. Seems like the servants he''s going to talk to is us.


    "So, how is it?" Old man asked me.


    "It''s scary that about half of the people attending here have explosive devices in their mouth. Celestine?" I asked Celestine if she knows anyone here.


    "There''s no high-ranking cult member here who doesn''t have explosive devices in their mouth. At least from what I know. And there are some people here whose face I know. They are from my faction." Celestine said.


    "¡­ it''s still weird how those people only know you from your body, and doesn''t know who you are from your face. You are not disguising your face at all, and there''s not much difference than your usual appearances other than your body." I said.


    "And I recognized who she is from her face despite not meeting her for years! I''m an expert in this regard." Old man Henry said.


    "And I''m terrible at remembering people. Well, as long as those people are not important, there''s no need to remember them." I said.


    Because Celestine and I are chatting with the king, the other servants are doing our jobs.


    "Old man, just how often did you talk with servants? Although there are some people ring at us hatefully, it seems like most people here are used to it." I asked.


    "Every time there''s a party. I have been talking with other noble on my daily life and for my duty. Why would I talk to them again? They will just start bootlicking. As for the servants, I can ask them how their life in the capital. They can give me suggestion if there''s something that I can improve. As for other nobles, they just want something to improve the content of their wallet. I thought that Keith was better than the others, but it seems like I was wrong. I need to find someone else to be my heir. Among my children here, do you see anyone else who seems to be from the cult members?" Old man asked.


    Then he told me the characteristic of his children who attended this party. He didn''t point his finger to not make anyone suspicious of him why he''s pointing at his child while talking to a servant.


    As for Celestine and I, we just slightly bowed our head to not make it seems as if we are disrespectful. And since we''re in the corner, it''s easy for me to put Air Barrier to not let any voices leak out to other people.


    I looked at the people that old man told me. And I see that some of them have explosive devices inside their mouth.


    "Old man, just how many children do you have?"


    "Lots."


    Yeah, when I thought that''s it, turns out there''s more. I won''t ask anymore.


    After all his children are checked, this time I told him of the nobles who are members of the cult. Just how many people in this kingdom that has already been influenced by the cult?


    "Sigh¡­ turns out, I''m walking on a thin line. I''m already old, but I haven''t found anyone to be my sessor. I''ll think things through from my children who are not cult members."


    "That''s suck. Well, what will you do to them?" I asked the king.


    "Leave it to me. Good thing I have several people I could trust with my life long before we know of the cult''s existence. I''ll discuss it with them. Luckily, none of them are cult members. At least those who are here." Old man Henry said.


    "Then, what should I do now?"


    "Hmm¡­ how about you just go out there and kill the cult members who are not a noble? Thanks to this birthday party, all the nobles in the capital are here. I don''t think there''s anyone outside the castle that will give us trouble if they died. Then you can returnter after the party. I might need something from you to help me with all those cult members." Old man said.


    "Okay. I''ll leave now. Celestine, what about you?" I asked Celestine, but it was the old man who replied.


    "It will be suspicious if both the servants I talked to suddenly disappeared. She will stay with me here."


    "I guess you''re right. Then, I''m off. But is it fine if I just leave? I''m supposed to be working here."


    "Don''t worry. Undo your magic."


    Old man told me to undo my Air Barrier. Seems like he will say something to make me leave.


    "Antonio! You can go home now! Give your family my regards!"


    ¡­that''s it? And that''s normal thing for him to say? I guess I''m Antonio now.


    The others also looked at us, and then turned their heads right away. This is totally normal here? Just what kind of weird existence is this old man? And why is everyone used to it?


    "I will your majesty. Thank you for your kindness." I left the party while the other nobles not caring about me at all.


    As for other servants, some of them are looking at me enviously. Seems like they have experienced talking with the king alone and want to leave as soon as possible.


    After I leave the castle, I quickly find a ce where no one can see, and went on a hunt.


    Although it''s night, it''s weird how there are still many people in the capital. It''s difficult to find a cult member who is roaming alone in an empty area.


    It will take a few days until I can clean up everyone. Though luckily, I don''t think that any of them are expert level mages. Since I''m running in the air, and none of them noticed me when I''m in their range. Unless they are good actors. But I doubt it.


    I just finished those who I can kill tonight, and returned to the castle after the party is over.


    The party is over, and all the guests are already home. Only the king himself stayed behind, Celestine who is still disguising herself as a servant, and the girl who is celebrating her birthday who is drunk at the moment.


    I peeked on them and wait until she''s gone.


    "Daddy! Why is the man I want to marry doesn''t want to marry me!?"


    I see a daughter is crying and want to be spoiled by her father. Is she like this when she''s drunk, or she isn''t drunk at all?


    The king was just smiling at her.


    "I''m already thirty! Why won''t you marry me?" This time the drunk princess is asking Celestine.


    "Please don''t worry. I know someone who is already thirty-eight, but she hasn''t married yet. Being unmarried in your thirties doesn''t make you worth less." Celestine said while still pretending to be a man.


    Thirty-eight? She''s talking about herself? And that princess is proposing to Celestine?


    "Anyway, what about the person who is eavesdropping over there!? Are you nning to marry me?"


    I was surprised since Julia¡­ she''s pointing her finger to my direction. And there''s no one else other than me who is eavesdropping.


    The king is confused, while Celestine is surprised.


    Since I have been found out, there''s no reason for me to hide myself anymore.


    "Well, I''m back, old man. As for your highness Princess Julia, I would have never thought that you are an expert level mage."


    Hearing what I said, old man Henry is the one who is shocked the most.


    The previously drunk princess, is no longer seem drunk anymore.


    I take what I said back. I thought that there''s no way an expert level mage is a good actor. But there''s one in front of me. And since the king is surprised as well, it seems like he only finds out about it today.


    Hmm¡­ should I call Albert to see if she can be trusted? Let''s do that. He has no need for sleep.. I''m the one who decide if Albert is allowed to sleep or not.

 Chapter 303 - The Shocked Princess Is Interesting

    I just opened a portal to see that Albert is having a dinner with Marie. As for their children, they are still in Cassau being taken care of by the others.


    "Albert,e here quick." I said to Albert who has just finished dinner.


    I thought that it''s alreadyte so he''s sleeping, but why is he having a dinner sote?


    "Again? It''s the second time you called me." Albert said as he stood up.


    Good thing that there''s only Marie and Mustache in the dining hall. As for other servants, Albert told me that those in charge during meal time are those who knows about me so I don''t have to hide the fact that I can use portals. But this is a miscalction to think that he''s having a dinner sote.


    "That''s the king of Tatrama! Why is he here!?" Julia was surprised to see Albert inside the portal.


    "Oh, princess Julia wasn''t it? I think I got the gist of what''s going on. I''m going right away. Marie, I''ll be leaving." Albert said as he entered the portal.


    "Okay! See you!" Marie send of her husband with a smile.


    Albert seems to get why he''s being called. He knows that I want to know if this princess can be trusted.


    "Though I don''t know that you are having a dinner sote." I said.


    "Hmm? It is dinner time back home, you know? What time is it anyway?" Albert asked.


    "It''s almost midnight." I said.


    Then Victoria exined.


    "That''s because of the time zone differences. The capital of Tatrama and the capital of Consenza doesn''t differ much, but it takes a long distance to travel here."


    Victoria teaches us about the difference of time in different area. It was because the sun doesn''t shine everywhere at once. I know of time difference between this world and Monsters World, but who would have thought that in this world there are a lot of time differences as well. Maybe in the Imperial capital of Consenza, there is still a slight difference of time as well. Interesting.


    "That''s an interesting knowledge, but I still haven''t found out yet why you''re all here getting friendly with each other? Who are you? Who is he? Why are you talking to the King of Tatrama so casually? How did you do that?" Princess Julia was still confused about many things.


    "Well, first, are you an expert level mage?" I asked.


    "How do you know?"


    "Because you sensed me when I eavesdropping on you. Only expert level mages can notice me at that distance. And probably some special cases like me. I know that because the person you proposed to while you''re drunk, or pretending to be drunk, is also an expert level mage." I said while pointing at Celestine.


    "Really!?" Julia was shocked to hear that there''s another expert level mage here.


    "And then, does your sense only work on noticing if people are nearby? Because it seems like you didn''t recognize that the servant you are proposing to is a woman." I said.


    "You''re a woman!?" Julia asked Celestine.


    "I am." Celestine answered lightly.


    Hmm¡­ Julia''s reaction is so interesting. Let''s continue.


    "Then, do you know that when she said she knows a thirty-eight years old woman who is still single, she is talking about herself?" I said.


    "Really!?"


    "Once we have taken care of everything, I nned to be his lover and have a lot of children though." Celestine said.


    "Seriously!?" Julia keeps turning her head alternating between me and Celestine.


    At Celestine''s word, not only Julia was shocked. Albert, Victoria, and old man Henry are surprised as well. But for Victoria and Albert, they must be thinking that it''s as expected of me.


    "And do you know that her name is Celestine? She''s the older sister of the current Empress of Consenza, Lynn?" I said.


    "What!?"


    "And she almost became your sister-inw since in the past, she was almost betrothed to your brother Keith."


    "¡­"


    Seems like she was so shocked she''s unable to say anything anymore. But I''ll keep going anyway.


    "But your brother refused since her breasts was too small."


    "¡­"


    "But now her breasts be so big, he worshipped her."


    "¡­"


    "But your brother is a traitor."


    "¡­"


    "He actually joined the Evil Cult to usurp the throne from your father."


    "¡­"


    "And now, he''s being restrained somewhere else. That''s why he''s unable to attend your party."


    "¡­"


    She hasn''t moved for a while. But seeing from her working inner organ, I don''t think she fainted. Let''s continue.


    "And I was in the party to see if there are other traitors among the noble."


    "¡­"


    "Turns out, almost half of the participants are cult members. Even some of your brothers and sisters are cult members as well."


    "¡­"


    "If your brain can''t handle this much, I suggest we stop for today. I don''t think your brain can handle the truth of why we''re here." I said.


    "Wait, if you think so, there''s no need to call me now, correct? You can just do this, and contact me tomorrow." Albert said.


    "Then you might still be sleeping because of the time differences." I said.


    "¡­maybe next time we had a meeting with other kings again, each of us should bring our own watches so we can adjust the time." Albert said.


    "Hmm¡­ then we might need to have several watches each from four different time zone. One from each capital at least. We don''t want Roy to suddenly barge in while we''re busy. Even with Sonia to contact, it''s still best to have them. Roy, you will need them as well." Old man Henry said.


    He''s right. I don''t want to open a portal here to see the king is bathing. Or what if they have some kind of weird hobby, and I suddenly open the portal to see their most awkward moments?


    "WHAT THE HELL!?"


    While we were chatting, princess Julia finally returns to her senses. It takes too long.


    "There are many things I want to ask, but first, we almost lost our kingdom to the enemy before we knew it? Isn''t brother Keith the one who suited to be the next king the most? But he''s actually coborating with the cult? Isn''t that cult our enemies? They already killed so many of our people! It was thanks to brother Keith that they are freely roaming in our kingdom?"


    "Julia, wee back to your senses! I never thought that you have reached expert level. You kept it as secret? If not, I want to celebrate your achievement. With you by my side, there won''t be many people who would dare to pick a fight against me." Old man Henry said calmly to the confused princess.


    Seems like he''s the same kind of person as me. We both can be very calm, especially when we see other people panicked. I like him.


    "That''s not important right now! What about other nobles?" Julia asked.


    "That''s why I returned here. Old man wanted to discuss it after the party is over. We''re here to discuss of what to do with other nobles, and your siblings who are rted to the cult." I said.


    "And, and, what about him? I mean her?" Princess Julia pointed at Celestine. "You said that her breasts are big, but I don''t see it!?"


    That''s what she''s curious about?


    "Abracadabra!"


    Victoria said some words I don''t understand. Probably anguage from her world.


    Then, I see everything clearly.


    The ttening underwear that Celestine wore, disappeared. And her busts were pushing on her shirt from the inside, but the buttons on her shirts were unable to hold it back. Two of the buttons were flying. Both of them are flying toward old man Henry''s direction.


    While I''m still amazed by what I just seen, I quickly move to protect old man Henry from death. Killed by buttons. With my quick reaction, I grabbed the two flying buttons.


    "WHAT THE HELL!!?" Julia is surprised again to see Celestine''s breast suddenly growing big.


    Although her chest area is now opened, Celestine was still quite lucky since the most important parts are still covered.


    "That''s her real size if they''re not restrained." Victoria said.


    Just like Julia, us three men were also amazed by what we''ve seen. We all have seen how big her breasts are. Well, the other two have never seen them directly, but they are still big when she''s wearing her usual clothes.


    Albert, with his palm covering his face, muttering something. I can hear him keep muttering ''I have Marie, I have Marie'' over and over again.


    As for old man Henry¡­


    "¡­you know what, if you hadn''t protected me and those buttons ended up hitting me and getting me killed as a result, I won''t regret it."


    "¡­neither will I. Though we both need to be alive so we can destroy the cult." I replied.


    "That''s true."


    After everyone calmed down, we told princess Julia about everything that we know.


    ¡­only half of it. Her brain already can''t take any more than that. But since Albert has asked her some question, which she answered truthfully and make him able to trust her, it''s fine to continue again in the morning.


    As for Spot who was with us the whole time but no one noticed at all, he had been wrapping himself around my waist since before the party began. He has been asleep since then. And even when I ran around the city, he''s still sleeping. What a cute pet.. I also want to sleep the whole time.

 Chapter 304 - Continuing From The Previous Night

    Since it was toote in the night when we returned and told Princess Julia about what she wants to know, but unable toprehend everything in one night, we stayed the night in the king''s chamber. And in the morning, we will have to tell Princess Julia more about everything.


    With Blobbies to build a wall to separate which area will be for Celestine and which for the men, we slept in the king''s chamber. I had a lot of fun chatting with the old man the whole night. Mostly about medical knowledge that I learned in the future. Most of them are research from this kingdom, and some of them are actually in experiment at the moment, so it''s easy for him to understand what I''m talking about. And it''s fun to speak to someone who can understand.


    Some of the old man''s children are actually doctors as well. But among them, there are some who are cult members. He will teach his children who are not cult members about what I told him.


    Now, in the morning, after breakfast, Princess Julia returned to the king''s chamber to continue what we talked the previous night. Though there were several guests for the king, the old man refused them saying that he''s toozy to do anything today. Those guests just gave up on meeting him.


    ¡­everyone is already used to his antics. Old man even told the servants to just bring his meals to his chamber saying he doesn''t want to leave the chamber at all today other than going to the toilet or take a bath.


    Anyway, after Princess Julia entered the chamber, we continued fromst night. Though this time, Spot is awake and floating around the chamber.


    "A snake is flying!?"


    That''s the same shocked expression fromst night. I thought that since the most shocking part of the story is already discussedst night, I won''t see that expression again today. Seems like she can still get shocked again.


    "Hello! My name is Spot! Sorry for destroying your ships!" Spot said to Julia.


    Since he was asleep the whole-timest night even before the birthday party, he hasn''t met Princess Julia yet. And he greeted the princess in the same way that he greeted the old man. He said it as if the princess is the one sending the ships.


    "Nice to meet you, I''m Julia. But what''s that about ships? I never get on one before." Princess Julia said.


    "Spot, those things were centuries ago. Human can''t live that long. Unless they are like Victoria or Sonia who became a monster." I said to Spot.


    "Oh, right! That was so long ago! Anyway, nice to meet you!" Spot said.


    "Wait, what was that about Victoria and the other person? I know that Victoria is a smart monster and you canmunicate with her, but she was a human before?" Princess Julia said curiously.


    "Hmm¡­ I forgot to inform you that. But you¡­ you are so curious about many things, but your mind can''t handle too much information. Do you think you can handle what I will tell you?" I said.


    "¡­let''s talk about the most important thing first. So, there will be war? And in your timeline, although the King of Tatrama can hold off for a while in the war, we are still losing? No, maybe we are losing from the beginning since my kingdom might have already be taken over." Princess Julia said.


    "That''s probably the case. Since both Arturo kingdom and Varadis kingdom has been taken over, we were losing. But now, I have changed the present a lot, hoping that we are able to defeat the cult this time." I said.


    "Alright, I get it. Now, what about Victoria used to be a human?" Princess Julia asked.


    "I will let Victoria told you about that. And I will call Sonia as well. Don''t attack any monsters here since they are our allies. Oh wait, I forgot to ask. Are you asking everything with the intention to join our cause in destroying the cult, or do you have other intention?" I asked.


    "And you, why did you tell me everything without knowing my intention? What if I told you that I''m a cult member? A high ranking one who doesn''t have any explosive devices in my mouth? Isn''t that dangerous?" Princess Julia asked back.


    "Well, you have a really funny shocked expression. And if I tell you why, you will make more of that expression. Are you sure you want me to say the reason why? Victoria hasn''t told you how she became a monster yet."


    "¡­I can just say that it''s because you trusted me. That''s all I needed to know. Thanks for your trust. I will listen to Victoria first. If my mind still has some more capacity to understandplex situation, I will listen to itter." Princess Julia said.


    Then, I called Sonia so Princess Julia can be convinced easily. If we have two monsters who used to be humans in the past and know each other as well in the past, she has no other choice but to believe our words.


    I guess that''s it. I don''t have to tell her anything anymore. I''m too tired already. Just yesterday, I told the same things two and a half times. Once with Spot, by using a puppet shows. Then, with old man Henry. But talking with old man Henry was fun. Then, I only talked about half of it with Princess Juliast night. And another half this morning.


    I''m already toozy to tell about this story anymore! And there''s one more person that I have to tell! The king of Arturo kingdom! If he''s still alive¡­


    I want to let other people to be the one telling the story, but I know that if I''m the one saying it, it will be more convincing. It''s thanks to my acting skill, and also the fact that I experienced it.


    ¡­alright, I doubt my own acting skill. But it''s still considered as a skill.


    Next time, I will tell Albert to do it for me. In front of the King of Arturo kingdom, I will transport Albert with portal, and had him tell the truth to that king. Unlike old man Henry or Lynn, I don''t think that king will be easily convinced even with Celestine around. I don''t think he has met her before.


    While thinking so, I have seen Princess Julia making that funny shocked expression several times. Can she continue hearing more?


    "I think that''s enough. Let''s just get to the main point. Old man Henry is already agreed to help us destroying the cult. What about you? Not as the princess of this kingdom, but as an expert level mage. We arecking in both manpower and strength. With you on our side, we can be stronger." I said.


    "Yeah, that''s much simpler. Instead of aplex story, it''s much easier to understand like this. But why are you telling me so much?" Princess Julia asked.


    "You have a funny shocked expression that I can''t get enough of. Isn''t that right, old man?" I asked old man Henry who is busy working on some papers in his desk.


    "Yes. Among my children, she''s the one who is funniest to tease." Old man said that, then he returned to his works.


    "Dad!"


    "Let''s finish this quickly. There are still a lot of cult members roaming around in this city. Although there are no more of them in the pce, it''s better if the capital city of Varadis kingdom is safe. I want to get rid of them sooner." I said.


    Hearing what I said, old man''s hand stopped from working and he looked at me.


    "Roy, here''s a list of criminal organization hiding in the capital. Some of them are rted to my children. I marked the one that is rted with my children who are cult members. Can you get rid of them all?" Old man Henry handed me a paper with a list of people or organization, and their location. As I thought, it''s easy to talk with him since he knows what I wanted.


    "I''ll try. What will you do with your children?" I asked.


    "Punish them and interrogate them. Bring Keith back here. Before you leave."


    I used portal to get Keith back from the basement of my home in Cassau. His crotch area is wet from his pee. I guess a night is too long for him to hold it.


    "Princess Julia, I don''t need to hear your answer. I know that you love this kingdom, so even if I don''t ask you to join us, you will help protecting this kingdom. Old man, I won''t sleep here anymore. I''ll just leave the city and entered through the gate like normal, and find an inn. I''lle back hereter to report."


    With that, Celestine and I left the Royal Castle and entered back to the city through the gate. Of course, Victoria and Spot is with us. Spot is camouging himself and flew right next to me. No one can see him but me. It''s thanks to my Divine Vision. I can see things that can''t be seen.


    "Is this necessary?" Celestine asked.


    "The gatekeeper is a cult member. He will record whoever entered the gate. We''ll enter with disguise and told him that we''re brothers. I need you to disguise yourself as a man. Who knows if there are other cult members from your faction here?"


    Even if there are none, just her breast size is too eye-catching.. Even normal people would look at it.

 Chapter 305 - The Cult Members I Dont Want To Kill But I Would If I Have To

    It has been three days after we leave the royal castle and stayed at an inn. Celestine and I went on to clean up the cult members who knows Celestine''s face. I mean Celestine''s body. She knows them from the time they worshipped her. She has great memory to remember all those people. And I forgot the owner of the inn already.


    After all those who know her died, I wanted to let her return back to Cassau since I will mostly move alone from now on. Not that she''s a deadweight, but it''s just easier to move around alone.


    In fact, she has been very helpful to me. If I moved around alone, I could only kill about less than half of what we achieved together. But this time, it''s impossible to bring her with me.


    The rest of the cult members in this royal capital that we needed to kill, are mostly of nobility. And those people are old man Henry''s responsibility. He said that he already made some ns together with his trusted allies. I don''t know if I can trust them or not, but since old man insisted, I won''t force him. In the end, he''s the king and I''m just amoner. He knows what to do as a king, while I can only watch the result.


    Then, there are some more cult members who are not belonging to any noble family. Those are my targets, but I want to let Celestine return and rest. She has been with me the whole journey so she needed some rest. As for me, I''m way physically gifted than her. There''s nothing to worry about my stamina.


    "That''s why you can go back and rest. Victoria cane with you as well." I said to Celestine in the room of an inn we stayed.


    "No, I''ming with you. Celestine can go back alone. I also don''t need to rest." Victoria said.


    "¡­I see. Then, I''ll take that offer. It has been a while since I met the orphans back home. Once this royal capital has been cleaned up, bring me with you again to thest stop." Celestine said.


    "Do you also have some kind of connection with the King of Arturo?" I asked.


    "No. We''re totally strangers. But I just want to see the end of this mission that I voluntarily participated. You have to bring me with you no matter what."


    "Okay, I understand. Once everything here is done, I''ll bring you back with me and we can continue our journey together. Arturo Kingdom will be ourst stop before we return home." I said.


    Then, I opened a portal back to Cassau. I already informed Lina and the others through Sonia that Celestine will return while I will stay in Varadis. I have said it before, but if I returned home withoutpleting my mission, I won''t have any more motivation toplete the mission.


    I think Celestine also wanted to see this mission to the end. That''s why she''s feeling slightly reluctant to return.


    We said our farewell, and it''s finally time for me to move alone. Well, not alone. Victoria is with me, and Spot as well. He''s wrapping himself around my waist like a belt.


    "Roy. you don''t need her anymore?" Spot asked.


    "It''s not that. It''s just the some of the targets will be impossible with her around. But I think I will need you to do some works." I said.


    "I''ll do it! Is it to kill and destroy? That''s what I do best!" Spot said.


    "That might be the case. I''ll ask your help if I need it. I need to discuss how to do it with old man Henry first. I''m going to his ce now."


    From the inn we''re staying, I can see that the old man is alone in his chamber. It''s a good time for a visit.


    I leave the inn normally, and with Spot''s camouge, we went to his chamber on Spot''s head. He''s still smaller than his original size, but enough for me to ride on his back. Or is it neck? Maybe it''s tail?


    Oh, wait. If I use my Divine Vision, I can see his anatomy. I know which part is his neck, and which part is his body.


    Let''s say that we divide his original size by twenty parts of the same length. It''s the length of his head. Let''s name each part as well from one to twenty.


    So, one is his head. Then, two to three is his neck. Four to sixteen is his body. That''s very long. Which must be why it takes a while until he digests everything he eaten. Then, seventeen to twenty is his tail. And I''m sitting on number two. I guess that means I''m sitting on his neck.


    We quickly arrived at his chamber, and the king who was not prepared to receive any guests was shocked. But he returns to his calm quickly.


    "What''s wrong? You didn''t even contact me through Sonia." Old man asked.


    "This is not something I want anyone to hear. Not even a ghost. I''m here to give you report about the cult members that I couldn''t tell you before." I said with a serious tone.


    "It''s that important? I''ll hear it." Old man stopped his works and looked at me directly.


    "¡­they are children. Most of them are in their early teenage years and hadn''t awakened their magic yet."


    "Roy!" Victoria shouted in anger. She must be thinking that I returned Celestine back because I''m going to kill children. She''s half right. The reason I''m telling this to old man Henry is in case he knows a better option.


    "¡­I see. That''s difficult. What are you going to do?" Old man asked.


    "If there''s no other choice, I will kill them." I said without any hesitation.


    "¡­damn, boy! You''re crazy! But I guess for someone who hated the cult in two lifetimes, that''s as expected. I have a better idea."


    "What is it?"


    "In a vige near this royal capital, there''s someone I know. He was my best friend before and after I became the king. He''s as old as me. If you ask me who is the person that I can trust the most, it''s him. His magic element is one of the rarest. It''s hypnotism." Old man said.


    "Hypnotism!? I had never known that there''s such element. And you trusted him?"


    "He''s my best friend and there are so many times that we yed around just the two of us. He has all the time in the world to hypnotize me, but he never did that. How about we meet him right now? With Spot, we can get there in just a few minutes, right?" Old man asked.


    "It''s easy! I''m very fast!" Spot said proudly.


    "So, you want to ask his help to hypnotize the children? I guess that''s a better choice." I said.


    "Right. That''s why I wanted to ask him first. Let me do the talking. Because of his element, there are many dangerous people targeting him. After I became the king, I made sure to make everyone involved to think that he had died, but he just moved to a nearby vige. It has been a while since we met, so I hope he still trust me." Old man said.


    "Then, let''s go. Do we need to get Albert?"


    "No need to bother him. But if you can''t trust him, you can call Albert here."


    "¡­I''ll trust you, old man. And if there are too many people, he might be wary of us. Spot, let''s go!"


    If old man''s best friend can hypnotize those children, there''s no longer any need for me to killing them.


    Some of the children are from different orphanages. That makes those in charge of those orphanages is the most suspicious of all. that''s why I hadn''t attacked that ce yet and killed those in charge.


    Weirdly, the children are still under fifteen years old. Which mean none of them has awakened their magic. And that''s weird since it should be useless to put those explosive devices in their mouth. There''s no way they can be activated by those kids. But what if the cult already made a remote one that can be activated by someone else? Then maybe those children are forced to join the cult.


    Thanks to meeting old man Henry, my mind cleared up a bit. I should have thought of this stuff from when I noticed that those kids have explosive devices in their mouth.


    Thanks to old man, we might find a way to help those kids. It''s with old man''s best friend. But how can this person hypnotize the kids? I guess that''s why we needed to meet him first.


    With us sitting on Spot''s back, I mean neck, we reached the vige in just one minute.


    The two of us covered ourselves with robes because we don''t want anyone to notice that the king is here. Of course, the robes are made from Blobbies.


    It''s good that there''s no one here with explosive devices in their mouth. This ce is close to the capital so I thought there are some cult members in hiding here, but I guess I was wrong.


    We reached a slightly bigger house than the rest in the vige, and I can see a grandpa is ying with his grandson in the garden of their house. He must be old man Henry''s friend.. I hope he can help us.

 Chapter 306 - Russell

    There''s a grandpa and his grandson ying in the garden, while there''s a woman inside the house. That must be the mother. As for the father, he seems to be away at the moment. Probably hunting.


    Well, I don''t care. I''m just here to see old man Henry''s friend. Probably that grandpa.


    As we get closer to the big house, the grandpa in that house noticed us and stopped ying with his grandson. He and his grandson then proceed to greet us.


    "Wee to our humble vige! I''m the chief of this vige, Russell!" The old grandpa greeted us. He''s the mayor of the vige.


    "Greetings! And I am the one who rule over you, Henry!" Old man Henry said as he removed his robe. Was that necessary?


    "Grandpa Henry! It''s you! Wait, it''s my turn! Hm¡­ And I am the grandson of the chief, Russel Jr!" The chief''s grandson said.


    Wait, so this is a normal thing here? Or is it just them? Well, I don''t want to be left out so I''ll join.


    "And I am the not so normal passerby, Roy!" Hmm¡­ I think my introductioncked impact.


    "Not bad." The chief said.


    "I know, right? He has great potential." Old man Henry said.


    Potential to do what? To be what? You need toplete your sentences, old man.


    "And I am the Destroyer from the sea, Spot! Nice to meet you all!"


    Suddenly, Spot joined us. He said the first half imposingly, while thetter half is how he is normally. As for the Destroyer from the sea, he''s right about that.


    Spot also leaves my waist, and started floating in front of me. at first, the grandpa and grandson duo were surprised, but seeing how friendly his introduction was, they must be thinking that Spot is a nice monster. They must be thinking that I''m either a summoner or a tamer.


    "Wow! A talking and floating snake! Nice to meet you too!" Russell Jr. already getting friendly with Spot.


    "Sigh¡­ is this how you greet each other? I''m Victoria, a ck Slime. That''s all I''m going to say."


    Victoria also joined introducing herself, but she did it normally.


    "Two talking monsters! That is so cool!" Russell Jr. shouted.


    "Well, they are mypanion. I have something important to ask of you and this is only something that you can do. Let''s talk somewhere private." Old man Henry said.


    Maybe he noticed that he will be asked something serious, his demeanor changed.


    "Understood. Then, let''s enter my room for a chat. Though since the wall is so thin, other people might hear our conversation. I guess we need a change of ce." Russell said.


    "No need. Your room is fine. As for other people, they won''t listen to anything in your room. Let''s talk there. The faster we find a solution, the faster we canplete the mission." I said.


    "Mission? You want me to participate in whatever mission you are in?" Russell asked old man Henry.


    "We''ll talk first. May wee in?" Old man Henry said.


    "Okay. Junior, you go and help your mom." Russell told his grandson to leave. It''s also not something that a kid should hear.


    Then, Russell Jr. entered the house and told his mother that they have guests. I guess we will wait until the tea is served before we get into a real talk. But as soon as I entered the room, I should put up Air Barrier right away.


    "So, what can I help you with?" Russell asked.


    "First, how much do you know of the Evil Cult?" Old man Henry asked. I should leave it to him to do the talking.


    "They are bad guys. Some of them even entered this vige as bandits. If not for your warning about the cult, this vige would be gone already. We have been wary of any travelers entered this vige ever since. Have they started something again?"


    "Not started. It hasn''t ended yet in fact. I just knew a few days ago that my son, Keith, the one that I thought would be suited for the throne, he was actually a member of the cult." Old man Henry said.


    "What!?" Russell was extremely shocked to hear that.


    "Not just him. Almost half of my children are members of the cult. If not for Roy and hispanions, we would never notice how much their influence has spread. I almost give my kingdom to the cult. Sigh¡­" Old man Henry sighed. That''s one thing that he regrets the most recently. Each time we talked, the topic always ended with how he regretted about it.


    "¡­I''m sorry to hear that. What can I do for you? Hypnotizing your children? I think with how smart you are, you already know what you''re going to do without my help." Russell asked our intention in visiting him.


    "I want you¡­"


    "Wait. Tea ising."


    I stopped old man from continuing since the tea is about to be served. Both Russell Jr. and his mother then entered the room bringing us the tea and some cookies.


    "Thank you Junior. You''re a big help to your mom." Old man Henry said as he patted Russell Jr. on his head.


    "Hehe, I made these cookies. I''m going to live in the capital in the future, and be the best chef in there!" Russell Jr. said and then he left the room with her mother.


    "¡­I wish I could provide a future to the children. But I need to find the right heir for the kingdom. And the cult¡­ they are too dangerous." Old man said after the two leave the room.


    "Then, can you tell me what''s going on?" Russell asked.


    "I''ll tell you everything I know."


    Then, old man proceeds to inform Russell everything that I have told him. This time, I''m the one listening to the story instead of telling it.


    After listening to everything, Russell looked at me.


    "So, you''re from the future?" Russell asked.


    "Yes."


    "And the world was destroyed by the cult?"


    "I didn''t witness it myself, but that''s what I heard from Javier who came from even distant future and brought me back to the past." I said.


    "Then, tell me your reason why you tried to change the future."


    "Sure. It was because¡­"


    "Wait, I don''t need to hear it from you. If you trust me, let me read your mind. I will see your past as well." Russell said.


    "You can do that? I thought your magic is just to hypnotize people." I asked.


    "It was just Henry who said that my magic is Hypnotism. It''s actually some kind of mental magic that affected people''s mind. Hypnotizing is just one of them. And I can also read people''s mind. Though I rarely used this power. Anyway, I haven''t trusted you yet. If you want to earn my trust, let me see inside your mind." Russell said.


    "Sure. I don''t mind. It''s not like I have any secrets that I want to keep. Everyone around me already know them all."


    Like, seriously. I have told many people that I came from the future, and returned to the past. What else do I hide? That I was a doctor? No, I even discussed about medical knowledge with doctors in Cassau, and even old man Henry. As for anything else¡­ I have nothing to hide.


    And in fact, letting people read my mind is much easier than telling them the truth. They can see for themselves what will happen in the future if I don''t intervene.


    Then, Russell closed his eyes. Just in case, I undo my Air Barrier and other magic as well. who knows if they will intercept his magic? And also, I rxed my body and make sure I don''t leak any Aura at all.


    Soon after, my eyelids grow heavy. I started to get sleepy. This must be the side effect of his mind reading skill. I don''t have to worry about anything since Victoria is here. And he''s someone old man Henry trusted as well. Let''s just take a nap for a while then.


    ¡­


    "Roy, wake up."


    "Hmm? Can I sleep again?"


    "No. He''s done reading your mind."


    Reading my mind? Oh, right! I was asleep because old man''s best friend casted a magic on me. His name¡­ shit, I forgot.


    "My name is Russell." Russell said.


    "Oh, right. Then you must have known that I can''t memorize people''s name well. Sorry about that." I said.


    "It''s fine. And I can trust you now. I will help you." Russell said.


    "Help me with what?"


    "Brainwashing those children. That''s what you want me to do, right? You''re here to find a solution that doesn''t involve you killing children, right? I''ll help you with that. I also don''t want children to fell victim to the cult." Russell said.


    "Really? Thanks, Old man''s best friend!"


    "Just call me Russell."


    "But why did you choose to trust me? There''s nothing worth-mentioning about me that can make you trust me this easily." I asked.


    "You''re right about that."


    "Hey! At least don''t say that so bluntly!"


    "Anyway, it''s because I noticed your reason to destroy the cult. It''s just because of your selfishness. Not because of your righteousness. If you did it because of your sense of justice, then I will never help you." Russell said.


    "Why?"


    "I have read the minds of many people with sense of justice. But those people are easily influenced by other people. Especially by smarter people. And most of them are those who ended up entering the cult. They entered this vige and I hypnotized them to kill themselves far from here." Russell said.


    "You can make people to kill themselves!? Man, you''re so powerful!"


    "But there are some conditions that I need to be achieved first. Though with my position as the vige chief, it''s easy to do. Anyway, I can trust you because you just want a peaceful life with your harem. You already know what you want to do, and to achieve that, you need to cult to be destroyed. That''s why I trust you. Let''s get along from now on."


    "Alright, Russell. Pleased to make a new old friend." I said.


    With this, I hope I don''t need to have those kids killed. The reason I need all the cult members in the capital is just because of my fear. Afraid that in the future they will bring more trouble. But if Russell can help, then I don''t need to kill them anymore.


    I don''t want to feel the guilt of killing children on my own.. If possible, I''d like to avoid that.

 Chapter 307 - Investigating The Orphans

    This afternoon, we will proceed with the n. What n?


    Actually, after Russell agreed to help me with the cultist children, we made a n to get Russell hypnotizes them. But that would be difficult.


    It has been a long time, but Russell was actually quite well-known thanks to his rare magic element. He has been targeted especially by some nobles who wanted to abuse his power. Although it has been a long time since he shows his face in the capital, that doesn''t mean everyone has forgotten who he is.


    That''s why I need to get the children to be able to meet Russell. It''s basically kidnapping. Not just basically, it is kidnapping.


    As for old man Henry, I brought him back to his royal castle. He has a lot of work to do since about half of his own children are cult members. And there are also a lot of nobles under his rule.


    As for the fate of that one who was Celestine''s worshipper, I don''t care. Old man will take care of him.


    I checked on the children again in the capital just in case. Not all of them are from the same orphanage. I can see other children in other orphanages have explosive devices in their mouth as well.


    I guess the orphanages here, most of them are rted to the cult. Or the orphans, as they were looking for a job to do, they ended up taking some jobs from the cult without them knowing. They might even willingly put the explosive devices inside their mouth by tricking them.


    I shouldn''t have made a judgement easily just to kill all the children. They might be forced to do it because of money. d that I discussed about it with old man first.


    There are three orphanages that has orphans with explosive devices in their mouth. And looking from their reaction, and how they are happily ying with each other, I don''t think none of them realized that the thing inside their mouth is an explosive device.


    But if that''s the case, what about those who have grown ups and left the orphanages? If they recognize that what''s inside their mouth is explosive device, do they choose to live with it?


    Hmm¡­ I guess if they ask the orphans to join them while they were young, that will be enough time for the cult to brainwash them to join the cult. Children are easily influenced by other people especially those who are close to them. That might be the reason why the cult can brainwash them without using hypnotism like Russell.


    Well, that''s just spections. I need to find out if they are real or not. That''s why I''m investigating it.


    "Where are you going, Roy?" Spot asked me while floating beside me in camouge. No one can see him.


    "Investigating the orphanage. I''m trying to see what''s going on before we took an action this afternoon. Since there are three orphanages, I don''t think we can capture them all in just one day." I said.


    "What about killing them? That''s easy and simple. I like that. If you don''t want to do it, I will." Spot said.


    ¡­he''s a monster. He doesn''t care about humans at all other than Aura users. And also, those who he considered as my friends. That''s what I learnt about Spot. As long as I am around, he is a good ally. But I wonder what would happen if I leave him be? Will he start to attack my friends?


    "Well, I thought that if we brainwash them or help them in some way, they might end up changing side. They are still kids, so their future is still unknown. They are easily influenced as well. We should be able to get them to our side with Russell and old man Henry''s help." I replied.


    "Being human is so difficult. Why can''t you just survive, eat, and reproduce? That should be easy. Killing everyone in the way." Spot said.


    "That''s how monsters and animals do it. We are humans so we make simple thingsplicated. Only some smart and strong humans can makeplicated things simple." I said.


    "Humans sure love to do weird things. Whatever, I will just follow you. Just tell me if you have something you want me to do."


    "Okay. Though I want to ask you if I should prepare meals for you or will you find food yourself?"


    If Spot is going to be with me from now on, then I will most likely treat him like a pet. With his size, I wonder if I could prepare foods that could satisfy him.


    "No need. When you''re asleep at night, or when you don''t need me to do anything, I can hunt my own food. And whenever I changed size to this small me, I don''t need much food. I could even stay without eating for another three days. No need to care for my meals. You just need to focus on destroying that cult." Spot said.


    "Well, that''s convenience. I''ll take that offer then."


    No need for food for three days? Even if I have the same condition as him, I still like to eat. I don''t want to have no need for food.


    Well, maybe I want to. That''s convenience. But I will still eat a lot though.


    While watching the orphanage, I see two older kids, probably around twelve or thirteen, taking a younger kid with them. The older kids have explosive devices inside their mouth.


    "Spot, can you use your camouge on me? I want to tail those kids." I said.


    "No problem!" Spot said. With him around, I can follow people easily. And he just needed to wrap himself around any part of my body to do it. Just like usual, it was around my waist.


    "What happen if you fall asleep while the camouge is on?"


    "Then you will be invisible until I wake up, or I let go of you."


    Well, at least if he''s asleep, I should be able to force him to let go of me with my strength if he''s still in this size.


    Then, I followed the kids. They are going somewhere while looking around to see if anyone is following them. That''s suspicious, alright.


    Then, I see the three of them sneaking out of the capital through a hole hidden in the wall. The hole is too small for adult, but kids their size should be okay to enter. I''m too big for that hole.


    They don''t leave the capital through the gate because children are not allowed to leave without their guardians. I guess that''s why they need to leave the city this way.


    I can''t follow them through the wall, but since I''m camouged, I can just jump over the wall. The security around here is low. Even the guards are sleeping while standing. No wonder it''s easy for the kids to leave.


    I followed them for a while, and they finally reached a small hut in the forest. There are no monsters around here at all, so I guess the people inside the hut keep defeating the monsters nearby.


    The hut is just the size of a bar, and there are about ten people inside. None of them have explosive devices in their mouth. Why? Let''s see what happened. Though I can see the explosive devices are stored in a box inside that hut. And some were being pocketed by some men.


    I entered the hut from the opened window, and stuck my feet to the ceiling. I can hear everything clearly here.


    The older kids introduced the younger kid to the ten scary-looking people. These ten men are faking their smile. It''s creepy. Even the kid is scared.


    Then, one of the men told the kid that they will give him a job before he leaves the orphanage. He said that the older kids are working for him and get money for it. Hearing that, the young kid is convinced.


    Then the man said that as proof of joining the ''office'', the kid has to insert a device inside his mouth as a proof. That''s the explosive device. I really want to kill these men right here right now.


    The kid happily obliged. And the men cheered because they have another person joining them.


    The kids then left the hut to return to the capital. And as soon as they left the hut, the menughed.


    "Haha! This is job is too easy! We just need to convince children to put this thing inside their mouth while promising them some work that they can find anywhere in the capital! The person who asked this is so weird, but I love him since he gave us more money than what we spend!" Someone who seems to be their boss shouted happily.


    So that''s what happened. These guys are hired by someone who seems to be a cult member. And to hire these people, that person must be quite rich and smart as well. since none of them are rted to the cult, they won''t know anything in case they got caught.


    "Boss, do you know who the guy who hired us? If we could just kill him and get all his money, we won''t need to work anymore!" One of the men asked.


    "You stupid idiot!" The boss shouted in anger and punched the guy.


    "Don''t you know? The guy who hired us is strong. When he first hired us, we had three of our strongest mages followed him. But they all died. That''s show how powerful he is. Don''t bother thinking about killing him! We received money, and that''s enough." The boss said.


    "The boss is right! We get more money than some hunters. Why would we kill the person who gives us money?" Another person said.


    Well, I know how the kids have explosive devices in their mouth now. Should I kill these people?


    Maybe not. Not this time. I don''t know if the guy who hired them is strong or not. I''d be happy if he is one of the men I have killed. But I doubt it. I''ll inform this to old manter.


    It''s about time to kidnap some bad children.

 Chapter 308 - Dont Try This No Matter What

    Now, it''s time to kidnap some children. Anyone who have seen me today, please don''t try what I''m going to do. Although there''s no one here who knows me when I disguised myself, please don''t try it by any means. It''s just ast resort that I need to do. Probably second tost resort since thest resort consist of murder or assassination.


    With Victoria and her clones, I disguised myself. Fake beard, fake mustache, wig, fake physical appearances, wearing all ck. No matter who saw me, they would think that I''m a suspicious person. There''s also a caravan made of Blobbies that will be needed for my n.


    And this is a technique that I learned from Victoria. since I don''t have to kill kids anymore, she dly helped me find a solution in kidnapping the orphans right in the middle of the capital, which should have a high security. She said that it''s popr in her world.


    Why would a kidnapping technique be popr? Her world keeps getting scarier.


    So, what I need to do is¡­ oh? There are two orphans ying nearby. Both of them have explosive devices inside their mouth. Let''s put what I learned into practice.


    I pulled the Blobbycaravan that I made, and pretend to be a merchant. Then I approached the kids


    "Excuse me, kids. Do you know the road to the hunter guild?" I asked politely.


    "Old man, who are you?" One of the orphans is wary at me and protected the other kid.


    "I''m just a merchant. I want to sell potions to the hunters. Do you know the way?"


    "It''s straight that road, and then go left, and right, and left again, and left again. I don''t know where the guild is, but if you go there, there should be someone who knows where it is. You can ask them instead." The kid said.


    Seems like he''s smart enough to trick a suspicious person who approaches him. Well, that''s not really considered as a trick. He just doesn''t know where the guild is, and the location he pointed is quite crowded with people walking around. He probably just doesn''t want me to stay around them for any longer. I guess I can''t ask direction from them anymore.


    "Thank you, kid. Here''s some candies for you and your brother." This is the trick that I learned. Offering kids with candies.


    "Oh! Candies!" The other kid shouted and running toward me to grab the candy.


    "Wait! That candy is suspicious!" The kid who gave me directions tried to stop him.


    "It''s okay! I know that I look suspicious, so I will eat one. I have five in my pocket, so one will be for me, and you two will receive two each. Here. The candies are not dangerous."


    Since that kid is smart, I put one candy into my mouth to prove to him that it''s not drugged. The kid then believed that the candies are not drugged, and both of them happily took two each.


    "Hohohoh, you brothers seem happy with those candies!" I said while pretending tough.


    "We''re not brothers. We just grow up in the same orphanage." The smart kid said.


    "Orphanage? Then there should be more kids, right? How about I give more candies for you to share with other kids?"


    "Really? Thank you, old man!"


    The smart kid caught the bait!


    "They are inside the caravan. You can get in and take as many as you want." I said.


    Then the two kids happily entered my caravan. But as soon as both of them entered, I closed the door, and use air magic to produce sleeping gas inside the caravan. I can see the kids are screaming inside, but I blocked the voice with Air Barrier.


    They soon fall asleep, while no one noticed it. some passerby just looked at us curiously, but decided to ignore us when the kids seem happy with me.


    So, the n is simple. I will entice the kids with candies, ask them to get inside the caravan, and put them to sleep.


    Damn! For me to do this, I''m so evil! But it''s all for the greater good. If they don''t know that they unknowingly joined the cult, if they are smart enough, they will regret it in the future. But what if they are evil from young? Like Celestine?


    ¡­let''s not think about it. At least Celestine has weakness with children.


    "So, how is it? Kidnapping children? Do you feel guilty?" Victoria asked.


    "A little. But it''s all for the greater good. Rather, I''m more curious why this method was popr. No, wait! I don''t want to hear the reason." I said.


    "Yeah¡­ even with all kind of advanced technologies, humans are just being¡­ human." Victoria said.


    "Spare me from any moral lesson. I just kidnapped some children and I need to get some more." I said.


    "How many will you get?"


    "Russell said that he can hypnotize about ten people in one day. That''s his limit. So, I will stop around that number. The orphanage these kids are from, there are about five children who have explosive devices. And to not make it suspicious to the cult, I will go grab some totally innocent children who don''t even know anything. I will be the evilest human being today. And the next few days. Let''s grab some more children. This method you taught me is easy to use."


    I will keep using this method to kidnap children.


    ¡­I keep saying that I will kidnap children. But that''s not our goal. Let''s change it. I will protect these children from the clutch of the Evil God Cult! That does sound better.


    I used portal inside the caravan, and transported the children to Russell''s vige. There, he will perform hypnotism. No, healing. He will perform healing ritual to cleanse their minds.


    Let''s go get the next targets. Other children from the same orphanage. They are ying in other location.


    I did the same thing to those children, and in just three hours, I already got all five of the children with explosive device, and another four innocent kids. The innocent kids will sleep until I return them back, while those who have explosive devices will be healed by Russell, and got their HGBs taken from them.


    Russell will ask the kids while they are hypnotized about how they got those things, and brainwash them to made them think that taking anything from strangers is bad. Yeah, they shouldn''t even receive any candies from me either. Sorry, kids.


    "How is it?"


    I asked Russell after he has ''healed'' them all. I used portal to get here along with thest batch of the children.


    "It should work. I also made it so they will think that the people who gave them the thing inside their mouth are bad guys and must be avoided." Russell said.


    "Then, can I return them now?"


    "Yes. But about those bad guys¡­ have you told Henry?"


    "I have done that before I do this shit. I will take care of them now. But I don''t know if every one of them will be killed. That''s why I''m d if your hypnotism work. If they see anyone of the bad guys who I hadn''t killed, they will escape. If I see their react like that, that mean another target for me to kill." I said.


    "¡­so merciless. But I guess that''s fine. Whoever decided to y with the lives of children, should die. Good luck."


    "Yeah. I''ll be back tomorrow with other kids."


    I returned the kids back to the capital with portals. I just made them staying asleep in a park.


    As for me, I waited until someone finds the kids. With Spot around my waist, I can stay invisible. Though I don''t think it will work for expert level mage. But other than the princess, I don''t think there are other expert level mages here. At least at the moment. If there are any, they must be good actors like the princess.


    Someone found the orphans, and woke them up. When they were asked what happened, they just answered that they were sleepy while ying. Seems like Russell''s hypnotism can alter their memories.


    Now that they have gone, I will go find some bad guys to kill. They don''t have explosive devices in their mouth, so I don''t know if I can kill them all. I already forgot their faces.


    But I can''t do that right away as a ghost suddenly appear in front of me.


    "Roy, go to Henry''s chamber right now. And call Celestine once you''re there." Sonia said with angry face.


    "¡­did you tell Celestine?"


    "Henry told me to call you, I asked. He answered. Julia was there too. Then before I came here, I told Celestine. Now you have to feel the wrath of two expert level mages. Three if Veronica decided to join. She was there when I told Celestine." Sonia said.


    ¡­seems like I will die today.


    "Roy! Spot and I will mark the bad guys with Blobbies. You just need to find them and kill themter. At least I have better memory in remembering people''s faces than you. And if I find someone among them who walk alone, I will kill them myself or have Spot devour them." Victoria said.


    "Okay! I am good at devouring people!" Spot said. Since Victoria was an Aura user in the past, Spot also trusted her somewhat.


    The two monsters leave me alone before I agree to that.. Seems like I will receive the punishment alone.

 Chapter 309 - Punishment Time

    It''s time to meet old man Henry. And princess Julia should be there as well. Then I also have to get Celestine here with portal. Sonia has told her why I had her return back to Cassau this morning. It''s all because of old man Henry.


    I know that the truth will be revealed soon, but not this soon. Now I have to face the rage of two expert level mages. Or three if Veronica joined.


    ¡­I guess I can just call Celester after being scolded by princess Julia. That way I can endure being scolded in a one-on-one instead of those two going at me together.


    Right! Let''s do that!


    And since Victoria is away, there''s no one else who will scold me.. Let''s go!


    I have to get there on foot since Spot is away with Victoria. I hope no one will notice me. Good thing it''s alreadyte.


    With Air Steps, I approached the king''s chamber, andnded on the balcony.


    "Come in."


    Just as soon as my foot touched the balcony, princess Julia called me in. She''s an expert level mage so she can detect my presence as soon as I entered her range. And I have watched her from before that she''s been waiting for me to arrive.


    "¡­excuse my intrusion." I said politely.


    Then, I was greeted by a princess with expression of anger on her face.


    Well¡­ here we go.


    "I told Sonia so you wille with Celestine. Where is she?"


    Eh? So, she''s the one who told Sonia to inform Celestine?


    "Umm¡­ it''s fine. I will still be scolded againter so Ie here first, and then go get herter." I said.


    "No. Bring her here right now!" Princess Julia said in anger.


    ¡­oh shit. There''s no escape. I have no choice but to use portal to get Celestine.


    Hmm¡­ wait! Princess Julia hasn''t seen me using portals yet! Once I show her my portal, she will be too shocked to continue talking. Then I should be scolded by Celestine only!


    Let''s do it!


    With princess Julia and old man Henry watching, I opened a portal to call Celestine. Since old man has seen it before, he''s not really surprised. But as usual, princess Julia''s expression is something interesting to watch.


    I was slightly satisfied when I looked at princess Julia''s expression, but it all changed into a despair once I look at the other side of the portal.


    There, Celestine is standing with a fierce expression. It''s as if she''s ready to kill me at any moment. But that''s not the reason for my despair.


    The reason for my despair is¡­ everyone else is there! Ka, Sophie, Candy, Veronica, Jewel, Lina, and even Shirley and Ang who were supposed to be in the capital of Tatrama were there!


    With Celestine in the lead, everyone entered the portal. Afraid that there will be more peopleing, as soon as everyone that I see through the portal entered, I closed it quickly.


    "Roy. Do you have any exnation?" Celestine asked.


    "¡­I''m just a coward. That''s the only exnation I can give."


    It''s true. I''m a coward and always have been. Although I''m getting stronger and sometime my confidence gets me thinking that I can defeat everyone, my default personality is that of a coward.


    I''m afraid of the cult. Afraid of what the future of the children who joined the cult will be. So, killing them is better than letting them be. That''s my thought as a coward. Though if my head is clearer just a little, I can just ask for old man''s help as soon as I noticed those orphans with explosive devices in their mouth.


    Although he agreed to help me by asking his friend, I still think what would happen if I didn''t ask for his help.


    Oh, well. Let''s ept their scolding for now.


    "It has been a while, your majesty. If you don''t mind, we''d like to give Roy a scolding before we introduce ourselves. Is that okay?" It was Shirley who asked old man politely. Since she''s well acquaintance with him, she acted as the leader.


    "Ah! Oh, it''s been a while, Shirley. You can just call me old man like before. As for his scolding¡­ Roy, make it so I won''t hear you. I still have some works to do."


    ¡­and I have no ally right now. Well, it''s all my fault. Let''s do this!


    "You asked me to return since your next targets are children?" Celestine asked.


    "I''m sorry."


    "And you even think of killing them?"


    "I''m sorry."


    With Celestine as the vanguard, everyone started to scold me. The others are scary, but the scariest ones are my own lovers. Ka, Sophie, and Candy. As for Celestine, she''s not my lover yet. And Lina, she just smiled and not saying anything. That''s still scary. Victoria still hasn''t returned yet. And Shelia doesn''t know anything about this. She''s in the Monsters World at the moment.


    "Let''s go to your punishment right away." This time, it''s Ka who spoke.


    "I''m ready to receive your punishment!" I said.


    "First, bring us all to a wide and empty area." Ka said.


    Then, I opened a portal connecting to the empty ind where we get to know Spot before. I still have a Blobby there.


    Everyone entered there. Including princess Julia. But the old man is too busy so he just waved his hand.


    "Don''t use your Aura to protect yourself. Endure everything with your body."


    "¡­what?"


    Before I could react, Ka''s kick hit me in the gut.


    "You will receive on hit from us each. Whatever hit you, don''t protect yourself with Aura." Ka said.


    ¡­is this the day I die?


    After Ka''s kick, it was Sophie''s punch. After that, it was Lina''s gentle p. This one doesn''t hurt at all. After that, it was Candy. Her punch struck my gut. Continued with Jewel knee to my nose. What a ruthless disciple. Should I be happy since she followed my teaching, or angry because she used it on me?


    And¡­ that''s the physical punishment. The rest are¡­ magical.


    Started with Shirley who freezes my feet to the ground, then ice spikes from both Shirley and Ang. Hey, Shirley¡­ that''s two attack from you. Although the tips of the spikes are dulled, they still hurt.


    After that, Veronica used her wind magic to blow me to the sky. Since I''m can''t use Aura, I fell down to the sea really hard. It was painful.


    "Julia, do you want to hit him?" Celestine asked princess Julia as soon as I returned back to the shore.


    "Um¡­ I think that''s enough of a punishment?" Princess Julia said. You''re an angel.


    "Then that mean I got one from you. Now I''m allowed to hit him twice." Celestine said.


    ¡­fuck.


    Without any warning, I suddenly got blown away to the sky once again. This time, it''s because the ground was raised with Celestine''s magic. And as I was about to fall to the sea, the earth under where I should fall raised from under the sea, and hit me back to the ind. That one hurts me the most.


    Knowing Celestine''s adoration toward children, I do deserve that. But I hate it! I wasn''t even allowed to use Aura to protect myself, so some of my bones are cracked. Then, Ka approached me.


    "Tell me where your broken bones are. They will be healed, but other wounds will not."


    ¡­since it was too painful to endure the cracked bones, I have no choice but to agree. I just hope old man can help me find a healerter.


    Ka healed my bones, and that''s all. I''m still bruised all over my body.


    "¡­you''re all scary." Princess Julia said after witnessing my punishment.


    Yeah, this is also the first time that they are truly angry at something. I guess children are off-limits from now on. I will never think of killing children again.


    "Your punishment is over. I''m not satisfied, but let''s go back." Celestine said.


    While my body is still in pain, I opened a portal and we all returned back to old man Henry''s chamber again. Though this time, Victoria and Spot were there.


    "Wee back." Victoria said.


    "Roy! What happened!? Was it the cult!?" Spot asked me worriedly.


    If I said I was being punished, since the others are not Aura users or used to be one, Spot might attack them. I guess I can''t say that to him.


    "I fell from the sky." That''s the truth though.


    "That''s why you should just leave flying to me. Although you can do it, I''m better, faster, and safer." Spot said proudly.


    "¡­I''ll do that next time. Well, my punishment is over. Old man, these are my friends."


    "I''ll introduce everyone." Shirley said.


    Since she''s close with old man, I let her introduce everyone.


    "I see. Nice to meet you all. Now, I will tell Roy about the orphanages¡­ I guess everyone want to listen as well. So be it."


    Hearing that old man is about to inform me about the orphanages, everyone listened carefully.


    "They are normal orphanages. The ones in charge just don''t care since all they need is feeding the orphans until they have awakened their magic to leave the orphanage. Until then, they just need to make sure the children are not starving. That''s all. The three orphanages just let the orphans by themselves. That''s why the orphans are easy targets. As for other orphanages, the caretakers are doing a good job. No one in the management of the orphanages are rted to the cult. They properly guide their orphans to get proper jobs." Old man exined.


    "What about the person who paid those bad guys to put explosive devices into those orphans'' mouth?" I asked.


    "I haven''t found out anything about them. You''re going to investigate it now, right? Can you do it? With those injuries?"


    "¡­do you happen to have any healer¡­ oh? Thanks, Ka. I guess I''m okay now."


    When I want to ask for a healer, Ka healed me. I guess this mission is more important.


    "This time, we''re going with you. We have quite a number, so we can split up." Ka said.


    I guess I won''t be alone again.


    "Well, that''s the case. Old man, if I find anything, I''ll inform you about it. We''ll be leaving then."


    I used portal again to get everyone outside the gate. I hope we can find all trace of the cult.

 Chapter 310 - Splitting Up The Works

    "So¡­ why are you following us?"


    We left the city and right now, we''re outside of the gate at a location where I marked with a Blobby. I used portal to get there with everyone, but there''s someone I didn''t expect to follow us. It''s princess Julia.


    "So that''s how it feels to travel with portal. It''s so useful! Anyway, I''m here to help you. This is my kingdom, so I thought that it''s best for me to participate. Although we''re allies, I don''t want to leave everything to other people. Especially those from other kingdoms when this is mostly the problem of my kingdom." Princess Julia said.


    That''s¡­ the total opposite of me who wanted to leave everything to other people. She''s a diligent princess. And she''s also an expert level mage.. She''s probably much stronger than other mages here, but much weaker than Veronica and Celestine since those two have learned magic control.


    "It''s the problem of the world though¡­ alright then, we''ll split up into three teams. One will go to the hut where I found the thugs who were hired to put explosive devices inside the orphans'' mouth, and another is to look inside the city for anything suspicious. Then thest group will look outside the city if there are any hiding spots like that hut." I exined the n.


    As for the group, the first group that will attack the hut will consist of Victoria as the leader since she knows where it is, Celestine who is extremely angry at them, Shirley, and Lina who will be there with Elsie and Sunny. Elsie can watch the surrounding if the person who hired those thugs will appear or not.


    As for those patrolling the city to look for anyone suspicious, smarter people will do that. They are Ka, Jewel, Candy, and princess Julia who knows theyout of the capital.


    The third group will be me, Veronica, Ang, and Spot. The four of us are strong and can fly. We can cover a lot of areas together.


    As for Sophie, she will return to Cassau


    Actually, I can do it alone or with Spot. But since they are angry at me, I can''t just tell them that I don''t need them.


    ¡­sigh. On one hand, I want to get as much help as possible. On the other hand, I don''t want these girls to do this. Just what exactly do I want? I thought that I want to live a peaceful life while letting other people do everything. But it seems like they have be part of my life now and I don''t want to see them suffer in guilt for acting toward the children.


    I need to be more selfish and ask the others for help more often. Just like how I''m worried about them, they are also worried about me.


    "Three groups, huh? The capital of Varadis is the biggest city in the continent. I have been to other capital city, but ours is the biggest. I don''t think just three groups are enough." Princess Julia said.


    "You''re right. Well, the three groups are just us. I will add another group."


    After saying that, I used portal into Monsters World. Right where Shelia is.


    And noticing that it was a portal instead of just summoning her directly to my side, the other Werewolves quickly getting ready and entered the portal.


    "They are Werewolves. They will be the fourth group which will act separately. They will be split up since it will be faster that way. Shelia, can you track the smell of these explosives?" I asked Shelia.


    "Hmm? They are those things that got attached into the inner side of the bad guys'' mouth, right? It will be difficult, but if we get closer to them, it should be easy." Shelia said after I handed her some explosives. Shelia then gave those explosive devices to the other Werewolves so they can recognize the smell.


    "That''s fine. Some of you will roam inside the city, and some will roam outside. Those who are outside the gate will need to be in your wolf form. And those inside will need to hide your ears. If you find any, kill only the adults and let those who are young be. Don''t kill the young ones."


    "Understood, my king! I will obey your order!" Shelia said as she kneeled.


    It''s the sight I only seen a few times. She would do that and call me king when she notices how serious I am with the order. If it''s other order, she will still obey me but she won''t kneel.


    "Good. Now, go!"


    The Werewolves then quickly leave. Seems like they know who will be outside of the city, and who will get inside since I see half od the Werewolves who came already transformed, and they split up. As for Shelia, she chooses to go inside the capital.


    Why did I send the Werewolves? It was because if there are any witness watching them killing, no one will be able to find them since they will already be back to their home world. Then, those who were tasked with the mission inside the city will be able to freely do what they want. They can just me the Werewolves for their actions. Both Ka and Jewel already understood my intention.


    "Wait! You''re a king? A Werewolf King? Are you a Werewolf?" Princess Julia asked.


    "No. I''m a human. But I''m stronger than their strongest fighter, so I became their king." I said.


    "So, you''re a king of all Werewolves?"


    "No. Just their tribe. By the way, Shelia, the female Werewolf who kneeled toward me first, is my summon. I don''t know if there are other Werewolves tribe. But if there are, I don''t think they will bow down to me. Not until I prove my strength first." I said.


    "By the way, if our job is inside the capital, you don''t have to get us out first." Princess Julia said.


    "Can''t do that. You also need to be wary of the guards. If they noticed something happened when no one entered the gate, they will think that the culprit is someone from the inside. And I noticed that some of the guards are toozy so it''s easy to trespass into the city. You are the princess, you want to know that too, right? Which one can be trusted, and which one you cannot trust?" I said.


    "I suppose you''re right. Well, we''re off. Good luck all of you!" With the princess in the lead, the other three followed her.


    I don''t know yet what her elements are, but if she''s confident she can enter the tightly guarded city, then I guess it''s fine. As for the other three, I don''t need to worry. Ka is the smartest, and Jewel is my disciple who follow my way of thinking. And not to forget that Candy was an agent. She''s good at sneaking in.


    "Roy, what should we do after we killed all those thugs?"


    It was Celestine who asked.


    "I don''t know if all of the thugs will be there at the same time. And you can ask Lina if Elsie saw something suspicious. There might be a chance that the one who hired them will appear. Be careful since we don''t know if that person is an expert level mage or not. Since this kingdom is almost fall to the cult, and with how many cult members inside the city, it''s hard to believe that there''s no expert level mages at all here to supervise everything." I said.


    And there''s a chance that it might not be just one. That''s also why I separated the three expert level mages. Even though I can fight evenly against an expert level mage, there''s no shame in having an expert level mage with me.


    After confirming their mission, Victoria and her group leave. Which only leave us who will patrol outside the city.


    "So, what is our mission?" Ang asked.


    "We will go further. The Werewolves are taking care of things closer to the city so we don''t need to check around that area. I made our group the strongest on purpose as well so in case they needed reinforcement, I can send you to them with my portal. We will ride Spot and see the surrounding. If there''s anything suspicious, we will check them. It''s that simple." I told them my n.


    "Hmm¡­ so¡­" Ang looked confused even after telling her my n. That''s as expected of Ang.


    "You just need to go where I told you and kill whoever I told you to. No need to think of other difficult stuffs." I said.


    "I guess that''s easy. Though, I don''t think we''re the strongest. I get why Veronica, Spot, and you were chosen. But why me?" Ang asked.


    "Unlike everyone else, you are the most bnced fighter. You''re not that smart in other areas, but in a fight, you''re a genius. You don''t have any obvious weakness as well with your four elements in advanced level." I said.


    "That''s right. And whenever we had a spar, sometimes the only way I can win is just with brute force since I''m higher leveled than you. Otherwise, you are the most versatilebatant we have."


    It was Veronica who spoke. Ang would often ask the two expert level mages for a sparring session. Which end most of the time with the expert level mages'' victory. Buttely, whenever they fight, Ang almost never seem to be at any kind of disadvantage other than having weaker magic. Which causes problem for both Veronica and Celestine.


    I can say proudly that other than me, the secret weapon against the cult will be her. That''s how highly I think of her.

 Chapter 311 - Iron Maiden

    "So, how many people were there in the hut?" Shirley asked Victoria who has been there before.


    "There are about thirty of them. Seems like that hut is being used for their hideout and where they rest. There should be about five people guarding that hut, so the other twenty-five can rest. That''s what I found when I look around with Spot. All those people we saw this morning are there. No need to ask Roy since he won''t remember. This morning, there are just about ten of them. I suppose thirty is all of them." Victoria exined.


    Victoria was investigating it together with Spot during the time Roy received his punishment. She thought of marking them with her clones, but seeing all of the people she saw this morning are inside the hut, there''s no need to mark all of them..


    "That''s good. If all of them are in there, I can just kill them all in one go." Celestine said.


    "¡­I don''t think that there is any need for me and Lina to be in this group." Shirley said.


    "We''re here just in case there are other people approaching the hut, or if there''s another simr hideout nearby. Master must have thought that since he hasn''t seen everything around here, he wants me to have Elsie at look the surrounding area." It was Lina who spoke.


    "By the way, when we were punishing him, you didn''t hit him hard. Why?" Shirley asked as they were still on the way to the hut.


    "He''s still my Master after all. And he has said it many times that he''s a coward. Shouldering the burden of the world alone just because of his memory from past life must have taken its toll on his mind. Even more when he''s a coward. Though we can''t just forgive him easily. He almost tried to kill children. That''s unforgivable." Lina said.


    "I guess you''re right. Even the mission to meet the kings is going to him. At least it''s good that his memory sucks. If he has a good memory, he will probably do many other jobs. Who knows what kind of conspiration were there in the future?" Shirley said.


    "Whatever it is, for now we will focus on this mission. I''ll summon Elsie to watch our surroundings."


    Then, Lina summoned Elsie in front of her. She didn''t summon Sunny just in case they need an escape route so she can used portal and return back to Cassau.


    Around them, there are some Werewolves, in their wolf form, running around. The four girls are not attacked because all the Werewolves know who they are. They are their king''s precious friends.


    "Victoria, is their hideout we''re going is over there?" Lina asked Victoria while pointing toward the direction they were going.


    "That''s right. is something the matter?" Victoria asked.


    "That hideout is being attacked by wolves. Probably the Werewolves who transformed. And there seem to be one especially strong mage in that hideout." Lina said.


    "What!? We must hurry and kill them all before giving them any chances to escape!" Celestine said as she runs on her own toward the direction Lina pointed.


    "How many people are there?" Shirley asked.


    "Hmm¡­ Elsie saw thirty-one. One more than what Victoria told us."


    "Then that one is probably the guy who hired them. And since the Werewolves are in trouble, that one is most likely an expert level mage." Shirley said.


    Shirley and the others would sometimes spare their time by sparring with the Werewolves. Sometimes, they asked the Werewolves to just fight in their wolf form. That''s how Shirley knows how powerful they are in their wolf form. Although not as powerful as their Werewolf form, they can still cause trouble to Shirley.


    And since there''s one mage who can cause trouble to a group of Werewolves, that mage must be stronger than an average advanced level mage. And probably has reached expert level. That''s what Shirley thought.


    "Is there any Werewolves nearby?" Shirley asked.


    "Hmm¡­ Jack! Come here!" Lina called Jack who was nearby.


    "Huh? You''re the king''s maid. What''s wrong?" Jack approached Lina and asked.


    "Why are you not in your wolf form? Anyway, go and tell other Werewolves to surround that hut over there. Make sure that no one escapes. That ce is one of the hideouts of the bad guys we''re trying to kill. Let Celestine takes care of the strong mages, while the Werewolves can take care of the others." Shirley said.


    "You''re not my king, but since you''re his friend, I''ll tell the others to do as you say." Jack said.


    Then he transformed into his wolf form, and easily passed Celestine who''s going the same way. But when Celestine noticed that a wolf is going there, she quickly jumped and rode on the back of the wolf. She will arrive faster that way.


    As for the reason why Jack was not in his wolf form despite Roy telling him to, it''s because he thinks that there''s nothing to worry about. His sense of smell is great and other than Roy''s friends whose smells he already familiar with, there are no other people.


    "We should be quick as well. Let''s go!"


    Then the Shirley and Lina run toward the hideout, with Victoria clung onto Shirley. Elsie also followed from behind them. It looks just like a scene in a horror story. Two girls being chased by an eyeball monster.


    When they reached the hideout, the see many people died. Most of them died with spikes stabbing their bodies from the ground.


    "This must be Celestine''s magic. Is everyone of them died?" Victoria asked.


    "Not all of them. Let''s get rid of the rest. As for Celestine, they are a bit distance from here. Seems like that mage is really an expert level mage. Let''s take care of everything here so we can meet her quickly. Though I don''t think she will need any help." Lina said.


    Thus, the girls started cleaning up the hideout. And once they were done, they look around to see if there are some kinds of secret they can get.


    While Shirley and the others cleaning up the hideout, Celestine is fighting an expert level mage.


    "Huff... so you''re still alive, Lady Celestine. I used to worship you more than even the True God himself. But once I reached expert level, I got recognized and got promoted."


    The expert level mage was indeed a cult member. And that person was a former members of the big boobs faction who worshipped Celestine. And Celestine herself recognize who the mage is.


    "Zoe, you''re a woman with huge breasts as well. I still wonder why you worshipped me?"


    "The bigger the better!"


    The expert level mage Celestine faced is a woman named Zoe. Although hers were big, they were not as big as Celestine.


    "So, why would you pretend to be dead, and then return and fight me? Have you betrayed the cult?" Zoe asked.


    "I have. There''s something I want to protect. Being in the cult makes me unable to do that. And now, you''re aiming for what I want to protect. No mercy to you." Celestine said calmly.


    The angrier she is, the calmer she appears. That''s how Celestine is at the moment. Her anger is at its peak.


    "Something you want to protect? Don''t tell me that it''s children? Hah! Once they grown up, you will kill them anyway. Why would you protect something so fragile?"


    "The reason doesn''t matter. I will kill you right here right now!"


    "Try it, you bitch!"


    Zoe casted a huge fire toward Celestine. She''s an expert level in her fire element, and she''s proud of it.


    But her mistake is that Celestine is much stronger than in the past. Celestine in the present has learned magic control after joining with Roy.


    If she''s just an average expert level earth mage like in the past, she will still get hurt despite the defensive magic she has. But this Celestine is different.


    Celestine create a barrier with earth magic. Multiyered. Her speed in casting magic is extraordinary. Even though the fire approached her quickly, the barrier protected her in time. Celestine receives no damage at all.


    "Is that all? I guess that''s all I can expect from you. Now, it''s my turn. Die!"


    This magic is something that she learned from Victoria. Along with Ang and Ka who were earth mages as well.


    From the ground, something like a coffin. It''s called Iron Maiden. A torture device from Victoria''s world, where someone will be trapped inside the coffin with spikes all over inside of the cab, and will stab whoever trapped inside.


    Zoe never thought that the magic will appear from behind her, and she got trapped inside easily. Her scream echoed inside the Iron Maiden, as she died in extreme pain.


    "I''ll thank Victoria for this idea." Celestine said.


    Just as she was about to return back to the enemy''s hideout, Shirley and Lina approached her.


    "Is it over?" Celestine asked.


    "There''s nothing worth-mentioning in the hideout. How about you?" Shirley asked back.


    "There you go. I don''t know if she has anything with her."


    Celestine calmly opened the Iron Maiden, and the girls can see a corpse of the expert level mage unable to leave since her body is stabbed.


    "¡­I guess we''re done here. Let''s check if she has anything we can give to Roy. Now, we should join the Werewolves and look around to see if there is anything suspicious nearby. The Werewolves were just ordered to kill, and not for looking for clues."


    Victoria volunteered to check on Zoe''s corpse. The corpse is all red from the spikes of the Iron Maiden, and there''s nothing of importance that she carried. So, they left and joined the search with the Werewolves.

 Chapter 312 - Defeating Three Expert Level Mages Easily

    "Hmm¡­ there are still some Werewolves who roamed around here. Let''s go further."


    While we were riding on top of Spot, I checked the situation to see where we should check. And since there are still some Werewolves nearby, I asked Spot to go further away from the capital. If it''s within one or two hours of travel with carriages from there to the capital, that should be a good hiding spot for the cult.


    "Are we going to split up there?" Veronica asked.


    "Yes."


    "Then, I''ll just get off here. I''ll inform you through Sonia if I find anything." Veronica said, and then she jumped off of Spot''s back and fly to the opposite side. She must be thinking of going to the other side..


    "Then I will go as well! Good luck you two!" Ang also did the same.


    With this, we can cover more areas.


    "What about me? Will it be better if the two of us split up?" Spot asked.


    "Then, let''s do that. If you find anyone suspicious, like human is walking around in the night, or guarding some location, contact me through Sonia right away before attacking them. You know how to do it, right?"


    "I know! I have seen it multiple times!"


    After that, Spot continued flying to the same direction while I take off and started running around. Although running in the sky is faster, since I need to look closely, it''s better if I run on the ground.


    I look around the mountain area where I dropped off from Spot. There are some caves here, but most of them are upied by some monsters. I don''t need to care about the monsters now., but the humans.


    Since it''s close to the capital, if there are any humans who camped nearby, they are suspicious. But they might just be a normal travelers or hunters as well. Then, I just need to check their intention in camping there.


    ¡­though I haven''t found anything. Well, other than some monsters who started chasing after me. But they are much slower than me so I don''t need to care about them.


    I wonder how the others are?


    The group who will return to the city should be able to pass the guards easily. Although they can''t fly, with Candy there who was a special agent, she can lead the others to find a way to enter the capital. Or maybe the princess herself knows a secret passage to enter the capital.


    Maybe they used the ruckus caused by the Werewolves who trespassed to enter the capital. In any case, entering should be easy.


    But what if they find something suspicious? I don''t think any cult members inside the city would cause a ruckus inside the capital before taking down the country. They were so close in getting the country.


    And even if there are some problem, they should be able to take care of themselves. Ka, Jewel, and Candy have experienced sparring with expert level mages. Even Candy has fought one in a real battle back during the stampede. His name was¡­ let''s just call him the Mayor.


    Though that fight ended with me who finished him, that was still a good experience for her.


    And there''s also Princess Julia who is an expert level mage. With so many Werewolves in the capital to help, there should be no big trouble appear.


    As for those investigating and destroying the hut that was used as the hideout of the thugs who were hired by the cult¡­ that was a long sentence. That ce should be easy for Celestine to take care of alone. Especially knowing how angry she is. I wonder if her offer to be my lover in the future still okay?


    Though I think the one going to the hideout will have some problem. And they might be the one asking for a reinforcement first. Once they call for help, I will go to Ang or Veronica and ask either one of them to help.


    Oh? I found someone. Let''s check on them.


    There are some people, sheltering inside one of the caves under a hill. Three of them. All females? Maybe they are a party of hunters. Just like the one in Cassau, that¡­ whatever. That party full of women.


    Though when I checked further with my Divine Vision, I didn''t see any of them have Hunter Card with them. I guess they are not hunters then. And they also don''t have explosive devices inside their mouth. That''s just make them more suspicious.


    Let''s see¡­ the three of them are quite beautiful. Two of them have huge breasts and the other one has huge ass. Are they candidates to seed Celestine''s and Veronica''s thrones? To be a leader of a faction? And they are all expert level mages?


    Let''s just be careful. Since they are not children, I guess it''s fine if I kill them.


    But how do I kill three supposedly expert level mages?


    Well, they are inside a cave without anyone guarding the entrance. They must have high confidence in their presence detection ability. Or is it that they don''t trust each other? And they are on guard with the other members?


    In any case, I just need to destroy the hill they were under, and make them caved in inside that cave. Unless they have one earth mage, it will be difficult for them to escape.


    Good thing the top of the hill is far from their range. I run on air and get there, while the three under the hill still can''t detect my presence.


    If Spot is here, destroying this hill should be easy. But I can do it as well.


    I transformed some Blobbies into a hammer, and strike the hill over and over again. The sound should have reached the three inside the cave, and they must have felt slight earthquake from me pouncing from above them. But by the time they reacted, the hill is destroyed and they got trapped in the cave.


    Seems like one of them is earth mage as they are still safe inside the cave. With her magic, it was easy to make a way out.


    But I won''t let them leave.


    Just as soon as the way is opened, I was already in front of the newly made passage, and entered it.


    The three of them noticed my presence when I stand in front of the passage. That mean the three are expert level mages as I expected.


    If it''s outside, there''s nothing I can do to them other than escaping, but inside a closed space, there''s no way they will use their magic randomly. That will be my advantage.


    With my full speed, I entered the half-destroyed cave through the newly made passage, and instantly brandished my Blobbysword toward the earth mage and killed her in an instant.


    "What the! Who are you!?" One of the women asked.


    "I am Nin- oh right. I forgot to put my disguise. I guess you all will die tonight." I said.


    Then, I quickly shed at the other woman who is about to attack me and killed her in an instant.


    I need some answer, so I can''t kill all of them. I guess thest one will be kept alive.


    Thest one is a fire mage. I quickly used air magic to change the properties of the gases in the surrounding into a non-mmable one, and then using sleeping gas to make her faint.


    But I guess that didn''t work against an expert level mage. Or maybe she''s also an air mage? I guess hitting her is the right way to knock her out.


    I kicked her in her gut and broke three of her ribs. While she''s in pain, I used portal to grab one Magic Restriction Cor from my room in Cassau, and put it on the mage.


    "Ugh¡­ who are you?" She asked.


    "I''m the one asking questions here. Why are you with them despite one of the women I killed is from different faction? You and that one on the ground are from big breasts faction, while that deaddy is from big ass faction. Are you candidates to be the next leader?" I asked


    "How did you know!? Don''t tell me that there''s another hidden faction in the cult!?"


    Whoa, I''m right. They are indeed from the cult. That was still surprising even though I expected it.


    "For now, go to sleep. I will interrogate youter."


    I knocked her out with a chop to the back of her neck. I don''t know if using sleeping gas will work on her, so that''s the best solution.


    "I guess I''ll use portal to move her to old man''s chamber. Since he''s inherited his ancestor''s love to big breasts, this should be okay, right? Let''s show her cleavage more and write him a message before sending her."


    The message was written on a paper though. Not on her chest.


    It says to keep her for a while until I return.


    After sending the cult member, I was about to continue exploring when suddenly, Sonia appears.


    "Roy! Ka and the others inside the city need reinforcement!" Sonia said.


    I thought the one who would call me first would be Victoria. but turns out, it was Ka.


    "Alright, I''ll send Veronica right away." I said.


    "Not her!"


    "Not Veronica? Then, Ang? Or maybe Spot?"


    "Not her either! Get everyone! There''s a chaos inside the capital! The rest cult members in hiding noticed that they are being targeted! Ka and the others are fighting against two expert level mages, and there are some cult members who hide monsters in the basement of their house! The city is in chaos! Go back with everyone, including the Werewolves!" Sonia exined.


    ¡­what the hell?

 Chapter 313 - Meanwhile In The Capital

    Meanwhile, the four girls who were tasked a mission inside the capital entered the capital easily after bypassing a sleepy guard. Ka easily build a stairway to pass the tall wall right next to the sleepy guard, and while the other guards are not paying attention to their direction.


    Candy is the first one to notice the sleepy guard, and with Jewel''s help to watch when the other guards are not paying attention, they easily climbed the wall.


    "¡­I guess we have to increase the security. Maybe increasing the number of guards for more shifts so no one will be too sleepy to guard the gate."


    That''s what the princess of Varadis, Julia, said as soon as they entered the capital.


    "Think about itter. Although we have the most freedom in this mission, that doesn''t mean we can take it easy. Even though you''re a princess, we won''t treat you as one since this mission is important." Ka said to Julia..


    "Wow, you''re so strict. That''s fine though. Anyway, it''s the first time we met. I''m Julia."


    "I''m Ka, she''s Candy, and this one is Jewel." Ka introduce everyone in the group to Julia.


    "Are you the girls'' leader?" Julia asked.


    "Not really. Well, Candy was a former agent for the Tatrama Kingdom. She told me before that whenever she''s on a mission, it''s best to not talk to her about any topic unrted of the mission so she can concentrate better. As for Jewel, she''s so loud that it''s best if she''s not talking right now." Ka said.


    "¡­that''s a unique group of friends that Roy has. Anything else I need to know?" Julia asked.


    "Not really. Well, other than both Candy and I are Roy''s lovers, and Jewel is his disciple. Although officially Jewel is his disciple, we all have learned everything he knows."


    "Wait, who''s there!?"


    While they are talking and checking around the surrounding to find anything suspicious, Julia sensed someone''s presence hiding behind a wall. Since that presence is hiding instead of walking in the middle, Julia thought that might be an enemy and not the patrol guard.


    "It''s me, Shelia."


    The one who came out of hiding is Shelia, Roy''s summoned monster.


    "¡­princess, next time you sensed someone''s presence in hiding, don''t shout. You might alert other people resting in their houses. You can sense that there are normal citizens resting in their houses, right? What do you sense when you shouted?" Ka asked.


    "¡­nothing. Seems like the ones around here are all sleeping already. But you''re right. Sorry about that." Julia apologizes.


    "Anyway, what are you doing here, Shelia?" this time, Ka asked Shelia.


    "I smelt you while I''m nearby. I thought that it''s best if I go with you guys. Sooner orter, the other Werewolves will cause ruckus. We have found several people with the smell of that explosive devices around and killed them. But there are still a lot of those smell. I think you might need someone to help you find them." Shelia said.


    Over the time she has be Roy''s summon and lover, she is also someone who has received his teaching as well. And unlike other Werewolves, she''s much more obedient and can restraint herself from having a good fight. Although when she ended up fighting, she had the most fun. She''s the second strongest meleebatant after Roy.


    "Thanks for that. If we can''t find anything today, Roy will have more job tomorrow." Ka said.


    "True that."


    Then, the group move with Shelia in the lead, leading them to where the smell of the explosive devices the thickest.


    "What do you mean by that? Aren''t you here to help him so he won''t work too much alone anymore? Even I can figure that." Julia asked.


    "Unlike Roy, we have no way of seeing through things. We can only depend on our own eyes and judgements to find something or someone suspicious. Add Shelia''s smelling sense to that, however much we can do, it''s not enough to match what Roy can do alone. That''s just how good his eyesight is. Even if we take cares of what we find here, when Roy returns, he can find more by himself. In the end, the reason he asked us to be the one in charge of the capital is so we have more knowledge of theyout of the capital. Then we can deduct by ourselves where the suspicious location that maybe Roy''s eyes haven''t reached yet and inform him about itter so he can see it for himself."


    Ka exining the reason why they were chosen. And she even knows why the Werewolves were sent into the capital as well. It''s to cause ruckus.


    But for princess Julia, she was more dumbfounded by one thing that she just learned.


    "Wait, so he can see-through our clothes as well? That''s his ability?" Julia asked.


    "Yes."


    "And you''re fine with it?"


    "We''re used to it. He was also a doctor in his past life and present life. Having see-through vision helps him to see if someone have some kind of disease. And with the knowledge of the future, he might be able to cure some illnesses that in the present, there''s no cure for them yet."


    "But he can still see me naked."


    "¡­yes, he can."


    "¡­I should have hit him real hard in that ind. Maybe burn him alive." Julia said in regret.


    "So, your element is fire? The one that has reached expert level?" Ka asked.


    "Yes. I have two elements. The other one is the useless air element, so I can just concentrate in improving my fire element." Julia said proudly.


    "¡­that''s stupid."


    "Idiot."


    "Ignorance is bliss, they said."


    "What a shame."


    Ka, Shelia, Candy, and Jewel, said some remarks that can be put as insult toward Julia. Even Candy and Jewel who were supposed to be quiet can''t help but say something about it.


    "What do you mean by that? What about air element is so good that you think it''s a shame to not train in it? It''s just for helping me breathe in all kind of environment. Other than that, it''s basically useless!" Juliained.


    "No, air element is not useless. There are no useless elements, only people who don''t know how to utilize them. Roy has two elements. Summoning and air elements. Both have reached intermediate level, and he became stronger thanks to that. If you''re curious about air element, you can ask himter." Ka said.


    "Air element can make me stronger? You must be joking." Julia sneered at Ka''s remark.


    "Enough. We''re here. That building is where the smell of the explosive devices concentrated the most." Shelia said after they have arrived.


    "This ce¡­ it''s the mansion of the prime minister. Sigh¡­ even the prime minister is rted. Just how close we were to get taken over?" Julia sighed.


    "Now, what to do? If there is at least one expert level mage inside, that person would detect our presences as soon as we get close. Should we just mark this ce and discuss itter with Roy?"


    It was Candy who asked for suggestion. If she was still working as an agent, she would find no trouble in risking her life just to get one information. But since she has been with Roy and the others, she''s no longer intent to risk her own life. She knows how much important her life is to Roy.


    "For now, how about¡­"


    "Watch out!"


    Before Ka spoke about her strategy, Julia warn her and the others about an iing attack. It''s just one huge Ice Spike flying toward them which easily dodged by the girls.


    "Damn! This person hasn''t move at all when we''re in range, and just suddenly attacked us out of nowhere! This one is a guard in that mansion. And an expert level mage. Be careful." Julia shouted.


    The girls then ready for battle when the expert level mage approached them.


    "So, it''s our princess. What are you doing here?" A man in guard uniform approached Julia and the others.


    ''For now, let''s be careful to not let him know our intention'' is what Ka about to tell Julia. But it was toote.


    "The prime minister is involved with the Evil Cult, right? I''m here to bring justice!" Julia said.


    "¡­you''re stupid."


    "Idiot."


    "Sigh¡­"


    "Even Ang knows when to shut up."


    Ka, Shelia, Candy, and Jewel insulted Julia for real this time.


    "Huhuhu¡­ princess, you''re gonna die here for knowing our secret!" The man said.


    "¡­and there''s another idiot who couldn''t keep a secret." Ka said.


    Since the enemy is just one expert level mage, she thought that it would be over if they work together. But Ka noticed that there''s another person who casted a fire magic toward them from the same direction the first magic was used to attack them.


    Ka quickly made a multyered Earth Wall to protect everyone.


    "Huff¡­ so, you are closer to us and attacked first. In case we survive, you had someone else further than you to attack us. You''re not that stupid after all, huh?"


    Although Ka appearposed, she''s actually panicked. There''s no way they could defeat two expert level mage who can work together.


    So, Ka quickly made a decision. If it''s Roy, he would do the same. Protecting their own lives first before defeating the enemies.


    "Shelia! Howl!" Ka said to Shelia.


    "AWOOOOOO!"


    A Werewolf howl can be used to call reinforcements. But it''s so loud that it will alert everyone nearby. They can no longer be discreet anymore.


    Ka and Candy quickly prepared for a fight. As for Jewel, she escaped.


    Jewel understood that someone have to call for reinforcements. So, she was about to contact Sonia when suddenly, a Werewolf were blown away in front of her after attacked by several monsters. That monsters did not appear from outside, but from under a basement of someone''s house.


    Thinking that there are too many powerful enemies in the capital, Jewel quickly told Sonia to have Roy get everyone.


    As for the Werewolves, even those outside the city will enter the capital after they hear Shelia''s howl.


    There will be a war inside the capital of Varadis. That''s what Ka, Jewel, Candy, and Shelia thought.

 Chapter 314 - Saving The King

    If I had known that things are going to turn this way, I wouldn''t have asked Veronica, Ang, and Spot to split up.


    Two expert level mages in the capital? And there''s a chaos?


    Now that I think about it, I don''t think I saw old man Henry when I used portal on his chamber. He must be busy protecting the capital. I hope he is well-protected by someone he can trust. In this moment, if one of his children who has joined the cult approaches him, his life will be in danger.


    What about the monsters hiding under some houses? I should have checked from the ground instead of the sky as expected. There are some areas that I haven''t checked, so those monsters must be appearing around that part of the capital..


    But¡­ there are no monsters being held near the castle. I''ve been looking around there for a while, and I know there''s nothing worth mentioning. Maybe I saw some monsters, but those are either tamed or contracted as the owner''s summon. But if what Sonia said is true, the monsters that being released are neither tamed or summoned. And they were being hidden deep in the basement.


    "Sonia, tell the old man to hide somewhere safe alone first. I''ll open a portal directly toward Spot, then Veronica, and Ang. Tell me once he''s in a safe location. I''ll have Veronica and Ang transported to his location. After that¡­ what about the Werewolves? Shelia is inside the city. If Ka told her to howl, the other Werewolves would hear it." I asked.


    "She has howled. That''s what Jewel told me." Sonia said.


    Does it mean that princess Julia, Ka, Candy, and Shelia are together, while Jewel contacted me? Must be so.


    If Ka decide to have one of them escape, that mean they are possibly in danger. And it''s two expert level mages. I hope princess Julia can hold them back.


    After Sonia disappear, I opened three portals right away. With how much magic power I have, I can open several portals simultaneously. But it used too much magic, so I limit it to three. The location where the portals are connected, is where each of my groups that got split up before go.


    The three of them entered the portals, with Spot reducing his size to easily enter the portal, and asked me what''s going on.


    "Roy, why did you call us? Is there something happening?" Ang asked.


    "Trouble in the capital. Ang, you help Ka and the others right away. Veronica, you will protect the king with Spot. Now, we wait for Sonia to return telling us he''s in a safe spot. I''ll open a portal to where Victoria is."


    Just as Victoria and the others with her, who are fortunately not separated, entered the portal, Sonia appears. I don''t have time to tell Victoria''s group what happened. I''ll tell herter.


    "Roy, the king is safe but not safe. He''s surrounded by his guards and he is being put together with his children in the audience chamber. You can''t open a portal directly there." Sonia said.


    "Then change of n. I will go to old man''s ce with Spot, while Veronica and Ang will be transported to Jewel''s location. As for Victoria and the others, you will return to the capital from different location. I''ll open a portal to the inn Celestine and I stayed in. Ask Sonia what happened. Good luck!"


    Without letting them ask me questions, I told them where to go. Sonia will inform them what happened, and they can decide what to do by themselves.


    I opened two portals, and let them leave first.


    "Spot, let''s go as fast as you can to the castle." I said.


    "So, we''re raiding a castle?" Spot asked.


    "Hmm¡­ that''s right. Let''s go!"


    With the others already in the capital, the situation hopefully won''t get worse. I don''t know if the people can get to safety. Or even if the guards can protect them.


    Seems like having the Werewolves entered the city is a miscalction. Though if thing didn''t go this way, the whole kingdom won''t know how close they are to get taken over.


    Oh, right! There''s another thing I can do! Let''s call Sonia again!


    "What is it this time?"


    Sonia appears in front of me while we are in the sky.


    "Tell Albert the situation, and have him prepare our allies to get here. Those who were in the training camp. Have them disguise themselves so no one knows that Tatrama Kingdom is unrted to the situation."


    "So, more reinforcements, huh?" Sonia said.


    "Maybe. Tell him that I will only open a portal if the situation is too dangerous for us alone to make our move. So, it might be a false alert. Also tell him that I might send old man to his location."


    "Understood."


    Even though I said that it will turns dangerous, I hope it won''t turn that way.


    I can see the castle now, and there are too many people inside the audience chamber. Why is no one fighting instead?


    "Spot, don''t go too fast now. Stay floating here. I want to see the situation." I said to Spot who instantly stopped.


    In the city, I can see Jewel in hiding, and some Werewolves fighting. The citizens are panicked, and locked the door. But the battle sometime destroyed their houses. I think casualties are unavoidable.


    I can''t see Ka and the others. They must be fighting outside the range of my Divine Vision. What a huge city. Though Veronica would help them soon.


    The biggest problem is for the citizens, the guard, and everyone else to know which side is the good one. The one we''re fighting is the cult member who should have been staying in the capital for a while. If they interact with the people regrly, they will be seen as the good side. But our side has the princess.


    Sigh¡­ there''s no need to think about them now. The old man''s life is more important.


    In the audience chamber¡­ everyone other than the king himself has explosive device inside their mouth. The king is trapped, but it seems like those people has no intention to tell the old man as he''s still acting calm.


    There are some guards who are not cult members as well, or I hope that''s the case. But the closest one to old man Henry who sat on the throne are his children. A son, and a daughter. But they seem to be wary of each other. I guess even cult members don''t know of other members in the cult.


    "Spot, let''s just barge into the chamber. You will m your body to the one on old man Henry''s left, and I will go to the right. After that, we will protect him."


    With Spot''s speed, even expert level mage won''t realize what hit them. If there are any expert level mage here, I will let Spot fight them as I protect old man.


    Spot smashed the wall of the castle and charge through everything, and as we are right in front of old man, I jumped to the right while Spot moved to the left. Both of us easily knocked down the two beside the old man. But the room is still filled with people from the cult.


    "Your Majesty! Who are you!? Why are you taking his majesty as your hostage!? What is your demand!?" One person who seems to be a noble in high position shouted.


    And then, everyone getting ready to fight. From what I see, it looks like there''s only one person who is experienced in a real fight. It''s one of the guards. Fortunately, or unfortunately, that man doesn''t have explosive device in his mouth.


    ''Roy, thank you for saving me. Everyone here is the ones that you told me have explosive device in their mouth. Seems like they can''t wait any longer to take control of this kingdom.'' Old man Henry said to me in a whisper.


    ''Yeah, but how do we escape from this ce? We''re surrounded. The only thing I can do is to not let anyone kill you. By the way old man, do you have any ideas?'' I asked the old man.


    ''Leave it to me.'' Old man said calmly. I guess he has a n to save his own life now that I''m here.


    "Hey! All of you, shitty bastards who thinks of taking over this kingdom! Do you think I don''t know that you are all members of the cult!? I''ll tell you what, you are toote to act! This man here is my reinforcement! Don''t you know that I have been discussing alliance with other kingdoms? He''s the one who was sent to find any traitors in my kingdom and kill them all! Even if you are my own children, my own blood, there''s no mercy to those who betrays the kingdom. Kill them all, Joy!"


    Old man shouted to tell everyone what our n will be. I guess Joy is what my nickname will be in this kingdom. But¡­


    "What the hell, old man! You want me to kill everyone here!? Are you crazy!? Can''t you see how outnumbered we are!?" I shouted back to the old man who gave me difficult job. Why does things always turn bad whenever I''m involved?


    "This much is nothing though. Look at this." Spot said.


    Then Spot takes a deep breath and¡­ I guess the next move is predictable.


    I jumped and grabbed the old man to protect him from Spot''s breath attack which killed more than half of the people here. His breath attack continues toward the mountain area where I was before, and destroyed it.


    ¡­I guess this job is doable.

 Chapter 315 - Why Wont You Just Kill Yourself?

    Now the members of the cult have decreased to less than half thanks to Spot. His breath attack is about the same strength as his child. I guess he''s still holding back.


    "¡­my castle¡­"


    "Old man, things like castle can be rebuild. But people''s lives are¡­"


    "You killed about half of the nobles here, and some of the people you killed are my children."


    "¡­all of them are members of the cult who are thinking of betraying the country. But that was Spot''s fault, not mine."


    I med Spot instead. Spot also hasn''t asked for my permission before attacking. This is why I''m worried in letting him join us since he''s not contracted with me, and although he follows whatever I say, he thinks of me as equal.. Not as a master and servant. Monsters without contract are too difficult to handle despite their intellect. Next time, I won''t greet any monsters I encounter again.


    "And that wasn''t even my full strength!" Spot said proudly.


    "Sigh¡­ that was a wrong move I made. I shouldn''t have provoked everyone here and told you to kill everyone. I''ll just retreat to a safe ce. Take me to Albert. And also, if there are still some people here who doesn''t have explosive device inside your mouth, go put these Magic Restriction Cor on your neck by yourself. I will bring you with me to safety. Just leave the rest to Joy here and his monster friend!"


    After telling me that he wants to go to Albert''s ce, Sonia who he asked toe appear in her invisible mode. Only I can see her though. Maybe Elsie as well. And Sonia who understood what old man Henry said disappear and should be informing Albert right now that he''s having some guests.


    As for me, while we were talking, I hid my hand on my back, grabbed several Magic Restriction Cors through a portal. Since there are about five guards who don''t have explosive devices, I grabbed seven. Maybe I will find use for the other twoter.


    Then, I pointed at the five guards and told them to step forward.


    "Put it on yourself. That''s the only way I can guarantee your lives when everyone here is trying to conspire against me." Old man Henry said to the five people I picked.


    "¡­you said it like you''re the bad guy, old man." I said.


    "Even if they are my own children, they choose to destroy what I tried to protect. Those disrespectful bastards need to receive their punishment." Old man said.


    As the guards put the Magic Restriction Cors on themselves, I was prepared to open a portal. I don''t care anymore if it was being seen by the others since everyone here will die anyway. But there are two people who somehow tried to grab the cors and put them on themselves.


    "Father! I don''t know anything about conspiracies! Please let me live!" Said one man.


    "I was forced toe here at this time! Father, please spare me!" And another woman added.


    "¡­Joy."


    Knowing what old man intended, I threw another two cors for his two children. Seems like these two realize that they have no chance against Spot. By the way, the other people here are still frozen stiff from Spot''s attack, and can''t react properly. I guess none of the people here are expert level mage.


    I need to quickly get rid of them all and go help the others.


    I open the portal, and kicked in the seven people, while old man walked by himself. I don''t care about the others reaction, and after I closed the portal, I quickly take out my Reizpear and killed the closest ones to me first.


    At this time, Albert should have prepared the reinforcement. And they all should be those who were in the training camp. I don''t really see him.


    "Spot, you just need to kill the ones who are trying to run away. You are way too strong to fight in this ce. The whole castle will be destroyed, and I will be med for it if you attack like before. At least you don''t need to use your breath attack." I said to Spot.


    "That''s a pain, but I will do it. Being human is tooplicated. I''m fine doing it, but I need to let loose from time to time." Spot said.


    "¡­you should have said that sooner."


    Let''s just kill everyone here first.


    Some people are still trying to escape, but they are bitten to death by Spot, or he mmed his body to those people trying to escape. Aren''t these people nobles? They should at least be experienced in using magic, right? But they must be extremely spoiled that they have no need to raise their own hands.


    Those people are easy to defeat, but there are some guards, and other nobles who are actually experienced in using magic in a battle. They are the problem here.


    "The monster is too strong! Kill that man first!"


    One of the nobles shouted, and he also casted a magic to attack me. He''s right though that I am weaker than Spot. But that doesn''t mean I''m easy to kill.


    Well¡­ I was easy to kill. In my past life. But not anymore.


    With my Divine Vision, I don''t need to look toward the person behind me who tried to cast a lightning magic. I dodged before his magicpleted, and the lightning magic hit another noble instead. Then I stabbed that person''s neck with Reizpear.


    But this number is still too much for me alone. I guess using Blobbyguns is the best option here.


    I snapped Reizpear to pieces and pocketed them, then I transformed some Blobbies into two guns, and shot Blobbybullets toward the nobles who hasn''t prepared their protection. Though some of the nobles are wearing magic equipment to protect themselves, so after shooting them and the bullets didn''t pierce them, I change my targets before other people hide behind those with protection.


    ¡­there''s something that have been stuck on my mind for a long time. Doesn''t Reizpear sound like it''s a pear instead of a spear? I''m really suck at naming.


    Now, everyone except for the twelve people who have some kind of protection spell have died. I think one or two of them are old man Henry''s children.


    Since they are using protection spell and unfamiliar with magic control, they can''t cast multiple magic at once. Should I wait or should I tried to pierce their barrier?


    "Shit! How did you know that we''re members of the cult?" Someone asked.


    "Instead of asking me that, why won''t you kill yourself with that explosive device inside your mouth? It was put there so you can kill yourself before leaking any information, right? If you can''t risk your own lives, you shouldn''t have joined that cult and put those dangerous stuffs inside your mouth." I said.


    After I said that, some people realize that there''s no way out and kill themselves by exploding their own head. But some people are too afraid to kill themselves it seems.


    "Let''s assemble and build a n to fight back!"


    One of them gathered the rest of them, and they hide inside someone''s Light Barrier. Probable the barrier of the guy shouting.


    I just let them since if they are together, it''s easier to kill them at once.


    But what the guy said next turns the hope of those people into despair.


    "All of you, we have no chance of winning! If you don''t want me to kill you, go explode your own head!"


    "What!? I thought we are going to made a n!"


    "The n is to not let any information of the cult leaked! If you won''t kill yourself, I will kill you!"


    Now, I don''t have anything else to do, right? That guy will kill the rest.


    Sigh¡­ I can''t just wait here for them all to die. I need to go save the others. I should break that barrier and kill them all. Or maybe I''ll take them to Albert just like the people from before? Let''s grab some more cors then.


    "Hey, those who doesn''t want to die can wear these cors and old man Henry might forgive youter. I don''t know. But at least you will live a bit longer." I said.


    Hearing what I said, two people quickly tried to leave the barrier, but that guy killed them before they leave.


    "If any of you move, I will kill you!"


    Sigh¡­ it''s a pain in the ass. I guess I''ll just kill him first.


    I transformed the Blobbies into a sniper rifle, and repeatedly shot the barrier at the same spot which will go directly to his head if the barrier is broken.


    If he dodges, well, at least the barrier is broken. And I might hit other people instead. Whatever, they are all bad guys.


    Seeing that there''s a chance of living, the rest of the cult members attacked the guy together while I tried to destroy the barrier.


    Other than the guy who threaten the others, there are five people left. Those five attacked the guy together, and that guy finally died while also managed to kill three people. Leaving only two people left. A man and a woman.


    What is this? Some kind of survival game where they have to kill to survive? Well, this world is like that in the first ce.


    "Congrats on choosing to live. Put these cors and pluck out the explosive devices from your mouth. Then I will bring you to old man." I said.


    "¡­who are you to my father, the king?"


    Oh? She''s his daughter? Whatever, the rest is up to old man and Albert who''s there.


    "I''m his new friend."


    Then I opened a portal and kicked the two people inside. Albert and old man were surprised to see there are more people, but I ignore their reaction.


    "I need to help Ka and the others. Find anything you can through them and discuss among yourself your next n." I said.


    I''m not interested in what they can find other than the identity of the Evil God himself. I just need to do things and they will think of our next move. As long as it will end with the cult being destroyed, I''ll help them as much as possible.


    Now that the old man is safe and everyone here has died or captured, I will help Ka and the others.

 Chapter 316 - Im Already Used To Fight Expert Level Mage

    The king has been saved and there are no other cult members left in the castle. Maybe they are al fighting outside.


    It seems that those who are not too strong or experienced in a battle chose the easy way, which is attacking the king directly, while the other cult members choose to fight.


    Now the question is¡­ do we need reinforcement here?


    The Werewolves seems to be doing fine even though they are outnumbered. They are a race that loves battle after all. Maybe it''s best to let them be.


    But that doesn''t mean the reinforcement are not needed. Let''s open a portal one more time and ask Albert and old man Henry for their opinion.


    "I think it''s best if we sent some people specialized in espionage mission to walk around and find evidences of the cult members'' wrongdoings." Albert said..


    "Yeah, you have killed all the nobles in the castle. Looking through their mansions is a good idea." Old man agreed.


    "Now, how many of you are best in espionage mission? One, two, three¡­ eight. I''ll send you these eight people to find some evidence of the cult."


    Albert then ordered the eight people to enter the portal. I also gave them some Blobbies to disguise themselves. And the eight people quickly move on their own ord to different directions.


    "Do you need anything else?" Albert asked.


    "Hmm¡­ what about you, old man?" I asked old man Henry instead.


    "There will be many things that I need to take care of. At least I hope the rest of my surviving children are not rted to the cult." Old man said.


    "Then, I guess I''ll get princess Julia to find her siblings while I take care of whoever she''s fighting. Old man, is there any safe house in the capital?" I asked.


    "There''s one right behind you. Through the wall where you and Spot destroyed when you enter, you can see that big mansion with green roof. Oh, wait. It''s dark so you can''t see it. It''s the¡­"


    "My Divine Vision can see through the dark as if it was day. I can see which one has green roof." I said before old man finished his sentences.


    "¡­that''s one convenient ability. If none of my children left rted to the cult, please protect them." Old man said.


    "No thanks. That will be princess Julia''s problem. Not mine." I said as I closed the portal and leave the castle with Spot.


    "You heard that, Spot? We''re going to princess Julia first. It''s that way." I said as I pointed toward the direction where princess Julia is.


    "I can see her as well. Just like you, I can see through the dark as well. Deep under the sea, it was much darker there. Though there are some monsters that can emit light." Spot said.


    That was interesting. I haven''t seen any monsters when I dive even during the night. I guess I need to go deeper then.


    In any case, we need to check on the princes and princess first. Though I don''t remember much about their appearances, they should live in the castle as well, right?


    There are no other cult members, but there are still people inside the castle. Since I have entered the castle several times, and I don''t see anyone having a reaction when I arrive, I don''t think there are other expert level mage among them.


    Well, they are alive at the moment. Let''s quickly go to where princess Julia is.


    Princess Julia is fighting against an expert level mage. As for Ka, Candy, and Shelia, they fight the other expert level mage.


    Princess Julia is fighting evenly against her enemy. As for Ka''s group, they are pressuring their enemy. They work well together.


    "Spot, you go and kill that mage who is fighting Ka and the others. I will help princess Julia." We split up after that since the fights happen in different location.


    As for Ang and the others, they are busy fighting the monsters. Howe no one notice that someone keeping some monsters in their houses? There are many things here that needed to be fixed by old man.


    Oh? Jack and some other Werewolves are having difficulty against someone. Maybe that one is another expert level mage. They are still fine, so it''s best to leave them be for now. And Celestine is going their way as well.


    I approached the expert level mage princess Julia is fighting, and before he noticed me, I used my Blobbyrifle to shoot him to death. When the bullet entered his range, he was distracted from the fight. But the bullet is too fast for him to react, so before he could put any kind of barrier, the bullet pierced his left eye and entered his brain before exiting from the back of his head.


    I was aiming for his forehead though. So, he could move a bit, huh? Maybe there will be even stronger expert level mage in the future that we will fight.


    "Roy! Thank god you''re here! Ka and the others are in trouble, let''s help them quickly!"


    Before princess Julia could run, I grabbed her arm and stopped her.


    "They are fine. But the old man''s life was threatened. That''s how I came herete. I was saving your father first. Anyway, he asked me to protect the rest of his children who are not involved with the cult. But I don''t know any of them, so I want you to do it instead. By the way, be careful. I only know that they are not a cult member since they don''t have explosive devices inside their mouth. It any of them were like this guy, an expert level mage who doesn''t have explosive device inside his mouth, your life is in danger. Just be careful. By the way, old man told me to get his children to a safe house. It''s that one over there." I pointed to where the mansion that old man said that it was a safe location.


    "¡­first, I thank you for telling me this. Second, thank you for saving my father. Third, I hate you because of what you can see with those eyes of yours. Andstly, that safe house my father told me is my own house that I bought secretly even from him. And he dares calling it his safe house?" Princess Julia said in anger.


    What''s that about hating me? Did Ka already tell her? I want to see her reaction though. What a shame.


    "It seems that whatever you do in the capital is seen through even without my Divine Vision. Though your strength is still unknown to the old man until recently. Just go quick and save your family. Leave the rest to us." I said.


    "I want to help more, but one of my siblings might be a future king. Please save the kingdom."


    "Ah! Before you leave, how popr are you?" I asked.


    "¡­what?"


    "I mean does everyone in the capital knows your face?"


    "¡­yeah they do. I think that''s the case. Why ask?"


    "If you find any civilians, you will need to calm them down. That''s all there is to it. Though it seems that the people here choose to lock themselves in their own house, that doesn''t mean all of them are inside. There might be some hunters who thinks it''s best to leave their house and fight the monsters, or civilians whose house is destroyed and need to find a safe ce. You''re the princess, I''ll leave them to you." I exined.


    After saying that, I left before she could ask anything anymore.


    I run toward where Ka is, and I see the expert level mage is easily being swallowed by a huge floating serpent. That¡­ is a nightmare. I mean I remember clearly before I died that my arm was eaten by a monster. And then there''s a monster swallowing a person whole while that person is still alive.


    I can see well how that person entered Spot''s throat. I guess even an expert level mage can enter panic when being eaten alive. That mage forgot how to use magic.


    By the way, Victoria is here as well. she must be here since Celestine and the others can take care of themselves, and she need to inform Ka''s group of what''s happening. She can also be used as a shield during the fight. No wonder they can have the upper hand while fighting an expert level mage. Though in the end, Spot finished everything.


    "Ka, Candy, go kill the monsters roaming in the capital. As for the mages, Shelia, tell the other Werewolves to show their Werewolf form and only kill those who have the scent of the explosive devices. There are also hunters fighting the monsters. You can y along as one of the monsters."


    Shelia obeyed my order and will tell the other Werewolves that they don''t need to hold back anymore. This way, the cult members will be dealt by the Werewolves, and the rest of the monsters will be defeated by us and the hunters.


    "What about you, Roy?" Ka asked.


    "Let''s see¡­ seems like we have the upper hands against the monsters since there are a lot of hunters helping around. I''ll check around to see if there are anyone who needs help. Victoria, stay with me. I gave too many Blobbies to Albert''s spies that entered here."


    "Albert is helping as well? That''s good." Victoria said as she stuck herself on my shoulder.


    "Not really. The spies'' job is to find any evidence of the cult in the capital. Old man Henry is also safe with Albert in Tatrama. For now, I need to make sure that no one escapes the capital."


    Seems like the war will be over soon. Let''s just kill the rest of the cult members who are hiding. I also need to find those basements where the monsters are being kept.


    Anyway, what about the orphanages? Seems like the orphans who have explosive devices in their mouth are too scared too move. Maybe I''ll use this chance to get them to Russell telling them that it''s a safe ce. Let''s just do that.

 Chapter 317 - The Night Continues

    Let''s kidnap the orphans first before helping the others with the capital. Since the king is already in a safe ce, we can take our time. At least I don''t think there will be anyone else here that can threat us.


    "Sonia, inform the others that I won''t join them in the fight yet. I''ll be kidnapping all the orphans. I hope the orphanages haven''t been destroyed yet."


    I asked Sonia to ry a message to the others who are fighting..


    "Sure. Where are you taking them?" Sonia asked.


    "Russell''s vige." I replied.


    "That''s King Henry''s friend, right? The one who will erase the children''s memory about the explosive devices? I suppose everyone will agree then." Sonia said and then she disappeared.


    Just erasing their memories? Is that what old man Henry told her? I guess he doesn''t want the fact that Russell is brainwashing the orphans to leak.


    It will also cause more problem if the truth is known. I should be quick then.


    First, I need to get some help. Let''s open a portal to Albert''s ce.


    When I opened the portal, I can see that the people with explosive devices that I delivered to that side are being restrained. Albert must have conducting interrogation at the moment. But what about the guards without explosive devices?


    "What is it, Roy?" Albert asked.


    "I want to use this chance to kidnap the orphans and bring them to Russell. I''ll have Russell cooperate with me and tell the orphans that they are being taken to a safe ce since the capital is in chaos. I need old man''s help." I said.


    "How''s the capital?" This time, old man Henry is the one asking.


    "It''s going well. At least from my view. I don''t think there are other strong people left in the capital. I can leave the rest to the girls, the Werewolves, and the hunters here." I said.


    "Hmm? What Werewolves?" Old man asked.


    "Old man, he''s a summoner. And unlike other summoner, he entered Monsters World and made a contract with the monster there. The monster he made a contract with after he fulfilled their condition is a Werewolf. Which ended up turning him into the Werewolf King." Albert exined.


    "¡­seems like there are many other things that you haven''t exined, huh?" Old man looked at me.


    "Do I really need to tell everything? It''s not like it was important at the time I was exining." I said.


    "Fine. Have you talked to Russell about this?"


    "Not yet."


    "¡­then I will go. Albert, take care of my children here. Put them into the dungeon and make sure none of them escape." Old man said to Albert.


    ¡­that''s not taking care at all. that''s imprisoning them. Taking care, and putting them into the dungeon, has different meaning.


    Hmm¡­ maybe it''s the same. Well, whatever.


    "And also, I will bring two guards that I brought with me here. As for the other three, let them return to the capital and help with the others." Old man said.


    "Are they clean?" I asked.


    "Yes. They will be by my side along with some of my trusted people from the past." Old man said.


    "What about those people? Why weren''t they there in the castle with you before?"


    "¡­there are monsters appearing in the capital. How would I know what kind of problem they are facing? I believe they must be worried about me since I disappeared. I''ll be with these two going to the castle while you go and find those orphans."


    Old man said as he entered the portal. Followed by the five guards.


    I also said goodbye again to Albert. Though I might meet him againter.


    "What about Julia?" Old man asked. That''s the first thing he''s worried as soon as he returns back here.


    "I told them to grab her siblings and bring them to the safe house. She was quite angry that you made the house she bought secretly as your safe house." I said.


    "I''m the king. It''s obvious that I know a lot of secrets." Old man said proudly.


    "But you never realized that the person who was closest to you is betraying the kingdom¡­"


    "Enough of that. As soon as you found the orphans, what will you do?"


    "I''ll gather them in one location and put them to sleep. Then I will grab you as well to go to Russell''s vige. I didn''t give him Sonia''s soil before since I wanted to keep it as secret. We can''t contact him through her, so I''m thinking of sending Victoria first. How about it, Victoria?" I asked Victoria.


    "Sure. I will inform Russell, and then you can open a portal to me to return. Or if you need me, just summon me back her." Victoria said.


    Now that she has agreed, I open another portal connected to Russell''s vige and send her there.


    As for old man Henry and the guards, he told three guards to help the civilians, and the other two to follow him back to the castle. I think he''s going to ask for help from his trusted men.


    "Now, where should we go?" Spot asked.


    ¡­that''s the biggest problem I have right now. I don''t know what Spot need to do that is very safe.


    Should I ask him to get rid of the monsters? He might not hold back and destroy everything. Even that attack from the castle must have made everyone to be wary.


    "¡­aren''t you hungry?"


    "Not really."


    I asked just in case he wanted to leave for a while to fill his stomach. But I was wrong.


    "Hmm¡­ I don''t think there''s much you can do. You are a big help, but I want human problem to be solved by humans." I said.


    "Then, what should I do? I''m fine with just wrapping myself around you without doing anything, you know?" Spot said.


    Tell that to me from the start!


    "Then, you can do that. I will ask for your help when we''re in deep trouble, or when we need to travel somewhere very fast." I said.


    "Just call me if you need help." Spot said as he turns small and wrapped himself around my waist like a belt.


    ¡­just in case, I need to get even stronger than Spot. Let''s set that as my goal.


    Then I run toward the orphanages where the orphans have explosive device in their mouth. Even those that I just kidnapped this afternoon.


    They are panicked, but seems like the orphanages are still safe. That''s obvious knowing that there''s no benefit in attacking an orphanage. Unless the caretaker is a corrupt person who saved all their money in the orphanage.


    I put them all to sleep. Even the caretaker. Then, I gather everyone in one orphanage so I can bring them with old man Henryter.


    As for the caretaker¡­ maybe it''s best to kill them. Let''s throw them to the street and hope that a stray monster killed them. Like a stray Werewolf or something. Of course, no one would know that the Werewolf was under my order, right?


    Let''s go to the other orphanage. I think it''s fine to not go to the orphanages without any orphans who have explosive device in their mouth. The three orphanages are the worst orphanages in the capital. That''s what I''ve seen so far. Maybe other people will just think that the three orphanages are destroyed terribly and the orphans escaped to the slum or somewhere else.


    There are more than fifty orphans that I need to transfer. They are all sleeping in one big room in one of the three orphanages. Now, let''s get old man Henry.


    I have been using portals too many times today. Let''s find old man normally now. Who knows if I need to use portal again after sending him to Russell''s vige?


    Right now, old man is at princess Julia''s mansion with his children. He must have finished talking to his men and is waiting for me.


    "Old man! Princess! It''s me! Let me in!"


    The door to the mansion is locked, so I knocked on the door and shouted loudly to call old man Henry.


    "Don''t shout! What would happen if someone heard!?" Princess Julia said.


    "No one heard it. Old man, it''s time. I have gathered all the orphans. Let''s go." I said.


    "That was quick. As expected of you."


    "And princess, do you have any essories with you?" I asked princess Julia.


    "What essories?" She asked back.


    Instead of replying, I look all over her body and find a bracelet with Sonia''s soil in it. Ka must have given it to her before. She''s quick to notice things that I forget.


    "That bracelet. Tap on it."


    "Like this?"


    Just as she did as I said, Sonia appears in front of her.


    "You called?"


    Sonia noticed that the one calling for her is princess Julia, and realizes that it was just a test.


    "You can call her and told her a message that you need to deliver to other people. She will ry it for you." I said.


    "¡­this is just like the children story I read. You rub the magic ss shoe, and a genie appears to grant you one thousand and one wishes." Princess Julia said.


    What is that? Children story exclusive only in Varadis Kingdom?


    "Julia, we''ll be leaving now. As for you, my other children. Stop disappointing me. I don''t want to have my children get killed by him again." Old man said as he pointed at me.


    It was Spot''s fault though.


    In any case, he and two guards, along with some people I don''t recognize but they seem to be the people old man trusted, entered the portal. He will ask for Russell''s help himself although Victoria has told him the story.


    As old man entered, Victoria also returned. Now, I can''t use portal much anymore. But the fight is almost over. Most of the cult members are killed, and the monsters are easily defeated when the hunters cooperate together. Although there were some casualties, at least none of them are among my friends and lovers.


    Let''s just aim for the cult member now. It''s cleaning up time.

 Chapter 318 - The Chaos Inside The Capital Is Over

    Now what?


    Since the orphans has been delivered to Russell, I guess it''s time to kill the cult members who tried to escape.


    I have told Shelia to ry a message to the Werewolves, but I don''t know if they can handle all the cult members or not.


    I guess before that, I need to check on the situation first.


    I''m on top of princess Julia''s mansion. And inside the house, under where I am, I can see princess Julia and her siblings are discussing something. Probably princess Julia is telling the others about what happened. I just hope that she won''t leak too much secrets.


    And there are some who are much younger than her. Probably they are old man Henry''s grandchildren..


    ¡­he already has grandchildren, but he''s unable to pass on the throne because his heirs are unfit, huh? Let''s hope that he picked someone good in the near future. Although he''s healthy, he''s still too old to stay in the throne for too long.


    That''s enough of his family. They are safe under princess Julia''s protection. Next is Ka and the others.


    They are joining Ang and other hunters to fight monsters that appear from the houses of cult members hiding in the capital. How did those monsters enter here? Don''t tell me that the cult''sb where they did many kinds of vile experiment is nearby? I want to check on the area, but I need to go to Arturo first. I guess I''ll return here after going to Arturo.


    Ka helped everyone by healing them when they are injured. But when there''s someone whom is getting healed by Ka and used that chance to flirt with her, Ka just strikes at their legs with Earth Spikes. Scary.


    Now, those people have no hope in continuing their hunter life with their legs disabled. This is not the moment for her to be flirted, huh? Then, someone''s friends decided to fight Ka, but they are too weak despite one of them used advanced level magic. Ka is too strong against average hunters.


    After that, unless they are extremely injured, they don''t want to get near Ka anymore. Though she ended up being popr with girls.


    Why is she attacking them so quickly? Don''t tell me that she''s still angry about me keeping a secret? That I even thought of killing children? No matter what''s the case, I should never made Ka or other girls angry anymore.


    Jewel also joined the fight. She was in hiding before, but I guess she fights now because she knows Ka and the others are safe. That is a good thinking. Without knowing if the other can survive or not, there need to be at least someone who can ry a message to me, and that''s why Jewel stayed in hiding until recently. I''m such a good master for my disciple to do what I taught her.


    Candy, well, she returned to her old job. Doing some espionage stuffs and entered some rich people''s houses to find some evidence of the cult doing bad things in the kingdom.


    How do I know? Well, I can see her searching for documents inside someone house, while there''s another agent inside that house as well. Seems like they meet with each other as soon as I left her.


    And there are also some people other than the spies that I brought from Albert''s ce. They must be old man Henry''s men. I don''t see any explosive devices in their mouth, so I guess they are fine and old man can truly trust them.


    Ang¡­ she''s enjoying fighting so much. At least she''s good enough to not destroy people''s houses.


    There are some men trying to approach her, but seeing how powerful she is, they rejected that idea. I think she used to say that she wanted to fall in love with someone in a romantic way. How will she meet a good man if she''s like this?


    Veronica and Celestine also captivated the men. I forgot to tell them to wear the ttening underwear. Though when those people realized that they are expert level mages, no one dares to approach them. But they must be thinking that the city is safe with two expert level mages here.


    Lina is in my room at the inn Celestine and I stayed. Elsie is there with her. She must be using Elsie to watch the surrounding, and then tell Sonia to ry a message to the others of where to go and who has explosive devices in their mouth.


    Oh? Lina is looking this way, smiled and waved. I waved back to her. She can''t see me but Elsie can. She must have noticed that I''m looking at her.


    Shirley is evacuating the citizens who are outside to somewhere safe. She received the news of where to go from Lina.


    There are some people with explosive devices among the civilian she helped, and Shirley is watching them from time to time. Lina must have told her already. Since those people have no interest in escaping the capital, I can take care of themter.


    Shelia and the Werewolves did as I ordered. They transformed into their wolf form, and attacked only those whom have explosive devices in their mouth. Their sense of smell is so great. And when there are other people saw them, the Werewolves would only target the cult members.


    And those who tried to escape were killed. They split in two teams it seems. Just like before. One in the capital, and the other is outside.


    I guess everyone is doing well.


    After seeing the situation, I think it''s best to make sure that no one escaped. But this capital is too big. Let''s have Spot help this time then.


    "Spot, are you awake?"


    "What is it? Do you have something for me to do?" Spot asked excitedly.


    I thought he was sleeping while wrapping himself around my waist. Seems like he wanted to have more actions.


    "I want us both to cover the outside perimeter. The Werewolves were helping by killing anyone who tries to escape, but I don''t know if that''s everyone. We will fly around toward the opposite direction, and kill anyone, except for the Werewolves and the children." I said.


    "That''s easy. I will go now if that''s all."


    "That''s all. You can go."


    After getting my permission, he leaves and flew to the right. I guess I will go left and we will meet on the other side. Though he''s faster so he should have covered more distance than me.


    I want to go as well, but I need to tell Sonia to not let anyone leaves the capital.


    "Sonia, tell the others to not leave the capital. Spot, I, and the Werewolves will kill anyone who tries to leave."


    "Even if they are innocent?"


    "Let''s hope Shirley can bring them to safety instead of having them escape instead." I said.


    After that, Sonia disappears.


    I also run as fast as I could while looking for anyone who seems to be escaping, or anyone suspicious outside.


    I should also refrain from using portals and running in the air anymore. I have used portals too many times, and I think my mana is almost empty. I still need to return old man Henry back here. And the girls might also need to return back to Cassau. They have sses.


    My usual sneak mission turns into this after asking the others to help. Although the result is not as good as when I''m taking care of things alone, and there are many casualties, I like it this way better. It''s faster this way. And the girls also learned more about how I do things as well.


    Now, they know about how difficult it is what I''m trying to do. Alone.


    I keep telling them that I''m going to do some clean up, but they never asked how troublesome it is. They just believed me that I will do well. That is fine, but that will hold back their growth.


    Should I bring them to Arturo?


    Hmm¡­ maybe not. That ce seems to be much more dangerous than here. Spot will be important for me to sneak into the kingdom. With his camouge ability, the only people who can notice me should be expert level mages or higher. I doubt there''s a master level mage there, but maybe there''s also some magic tools for detecting enemy as well. I need to be careful there.


    Let''s not think about that ce now and focus on killing people here.


    During the firstp around the capital, I found no one escaping. But when I passed Spot, I shouted the number of people I found.


    "I found no one!" I shouted.


    "One for me!" Spot shouted.


    Seems like he found the guy first.


    Then the secondp, I killed one man. And shouted the number I killed.


    "One for me!"


    "Three including the one before!"


    ¡­is that a challenge? He''s faster than me, but if I''m lucky, I can kill more people than him.


    Each time we passed each other, we shouted the numbers of people we killed. It''s also a good way to pass time. And we''re not the only ones defeating anyone trying to escape. The Werewolves did that as well.


    Some Werewolves even try to keep up with us, but they failed. I have grown much faster than average Werewolves.


    The battle continues until dawn when everything is over. I killed sixteen, and Spot killed forty.


    Okay, I lost.


    Before the sun rise, Old man contacted me through Sonia telling that he should return once the battle is over. So, I brought him over at the empty castle.


    "¡­now, it''s my problem." Old man said.


    "I''ll go meet the girls. They might want to return to Cassau. And I''m already tired, so I''ll leave everything to you." I said.


    "¡­it''s me who''ve left everything to you. Thank you very much for saving my kingdom."


    This is the first time I''ve seen old man acted so¡­ kingly. He bowed down with respect toward me, amoner from another kingdom.


    "¡­just prepare a hell of a feast after I wake up. We can celebrate itter."


    After saying that, I reunited with the girls who have regrouped, and thanked them for helping me here.


    They said that they want to rest so I return them to Cassau. Leaving Celestine, Victoria, Spot, and I behind. I guess Celestine will keep staying with me to Arturo.


    Now¡­ I''ll sleep. Good night.

 Chapter 319 - Leaving Varadis

    It has been three days since the battle against the cult members inside the capital of Varadis Kingdom. I have to say that old man Henry is a wise king. He managed to calm the people down, and me everything to the cult. He even med his own children for joining the cult in front of the people and harshly decide their punishment.


    Thanks to that, the hatred that was aimed for the old man Henry originally for letting the cult run amok, turned into pity. They think that he''s a good king and now know why he hasn''t decided an heir to the throne. His children are mostly unfit to rule. And everyone then helping each other in rebuilding the capital.


    The cult members in the capital has been taken care of, but we don''t know what happened in other cities. Are there more people who joined the cult? We don''t know.


    Though old man said that he will take care of the rest, together with his children who hasn''t joined the cult but interested in the throne. This will also be a test to see if any of them are fit to be the next king..


    And seeing how he harshly decide a punishment to their siblings who got caught, I don''t think anyone dares to betray his trust again.


    This is the conversation that happen when old man asked his children to take care of other cities in the kingdom:


    "So, I want each of you, other than Julia, to leave the capital. I want each of you who has ambition to be a king to prove to me how well you can rule a city. And even if you don''t want to be a king, at least show the people in that city that you are fit to be called as member of the royal family. Find any cult members, and kill them. No mercy toward those who have joined the cult. This task is also dangerous as we don''t know if there are more expert level mages in other cities. If any one of you made a contact with the cult, report to me as soon as possible. If you decide to join the cult, I will make sure to send someone to kill you. That''s all. As for where you will be sent, I''ll think about it after the reconstruction of the castle."


    That''s what old man Henry said to his children.


    By the way, I know this because I was told to hide and listen to the conversation.


    "Why is Julia staying? Don''t tell me that father want her to rule this city?" One of the siblings asked in jealousy.


    "No. It''s because she''s an expert level mage. I want her to protect the capital since we are at our weakest while you are all gone."


    Hearing that their own sister is an expert level mage, everyone is surprised. The funniest part is that they all have the same expression as princess Julia when I told her many shocking stories. I can see that they all blood rted. If Celestine was there, I bet everyone''s attention then would be focused on her.


    "Brothers. Sisters. I don''t want to kill any of you, so there must be no more betrayal among us. Is that clear?"


    Her siblings nodded after princess Julia said that. The hierarchy here has been updated with princess Julia sit at the highest position after the king. I wonder about the queen? I''ve never seen her. Maybe she has died? Well, that doesn''t matter to me. It''s their family matter.


    Anyway, that was what happened between the royal family. or at least what''s left of them.


    Next is my n members. They helped with rebuilding the capital. But only after all of them are not busy with school or other matter.


    I told them that they just need to stay in Cassau, but they won''t listen. So, I told them that I will only open a portal for them twice, so they need everyone to be free when I open a portal. Then I will return them back home before dinner so Lina can prepare them the meal.


    Because of that, Shirley and Ang who have sses in Tatrama''s capital can''t help us. They just send their regards. Though Albert visited here from time to time to teach old man how he handles the cult in his own kingdom.


    As for me, I changed my profession. I who was just an Aura user, changed into Aura User Construction Worker.


    "Why did I end up bing a construction worker!?"


    I shouted loudly in old man Henry''s office room.


    "Why? Well, it''s because I told the others that the city needs to be rebuild. They will rebuild the city, but for the castle, I told everyone to not mind it. There are some kind people who wanted to help, but I refused. I keep telling them to ignore the castle until their homes are repaired. And I will have someone fix my castle at the time. That someone is you. You should be honored. Now, don''t be noisy. I''m too busy. I also need to pick someone to be the Prime Minister. What a disaster..."


    That''s how I ended up bing as construction worker. Though thanks to Celestine''s help, the castle was fixed in just three days. Earth mages are the best for building somethings. And it''s even better the higher their level is, and how good they are in magic control. Thanks to Celestine, the castle is now sturdier than before. I''m just here for some muscle works.


    Not just we''re fixing the broken part that Spot destroyed, we also reinforce the whole castle and making new passages for the king. In the end, we had so much fun building new passages that old man told us to stop.


    "Enough! The castle has no more need for too many passages!"


    "I just made two new ones. The rest were already there so we fixed them up." I replied.


    "¡­just how many passages did my ancestor build? Anyway, aren''t you in a hurry? You need to go to Arturo as fast as possible. There''s a chance that the whole kingdom has fallen, and each city is filled with powerful mages. We don''t know if that Harold is still alive or not." Old man said.


    "Not yet. I''m going to teach your daughter some new tricks before I leave. Although portal is useful, there''s a chance that I might use it many times just like that night. I don''t have as much mana quantities as average mages. That''s why I don''t know if I could return here as much as possible, and tried to teach her everything before I leave. After that, maybe I can have my student teach herter once I leave. It''s not like she has any ss since I''m here."


    My only student in Cassau, Sara, is one of Albert''s agent. And she''s one of the two air element mages that I taught. Now, I have three with princess Julia who is totally new in air element despite having it for fifteen years.


    She has many questions to ask, but I patiently answered them. Maybe there are a lot of exmation mark when I replied, but if I said that I was patient, then I''m patient. No one need to think otherwise.


    The castle was done, but teaching wasn''t done. I brought princess Julia to an empty ind to test her new skill.


    "Alright, you can try what I taught you. Now,bine fire magic and air magic to make your Fireball bigger."


    Then, princess Julia closed her eyes and make a huge Fireball high above her head. Probably fifty meters from thend. And the size of that Fireball is much bigger than anything I''ve seen. Even Ang''s Fireball which I improve with my air magic was not that big. I guess that''s the difference between two people cooperating and one person who have those two elements trying the same thing. And add her level, the Fireball is more like a sun. A second sun since it''s still bright.


    Then, princess Julia dropped that Second Sun into the sea. The sea water evaporated and the sound of explosion resounded. And the same princess Julia''s funny expression pasted on her face despite she''s the one doing it herself.


    "Aaa¡­. WHAT WAS THAT!? WHAT WAS THAT!" Princess Julia shouted.


    "That was your fire magicbined with air magic. If you have improved your air magic, your Fireball might be able to get bigger. And you also need to have proper magic control so your magic won''t run wild." I said.


    "No wonder they said that I''m an idiot. If it has so much power, even as an advanced level I could fight against expert level mage alone."


    "Exactly! Now you know how awesome air magic is, you can learn more and be even stronger. Let''s go back to the capital. I''m going to leave to Arturo after introducing you to my air element magic student." I said.


    After returned to the capital, I asked Sonia to tell Sara that I will bring her here, and she needs to teach princess Julia about air element. Since she''s also an agent, she needs Albert''s permission.


    Then I introduce her to both princess Julia and old man Henry. Since I will be leaving, Sara will be the one reporting to Albert or me in case something happened again.


    After that, I rode on Spot''s back together with Victoria and Celestine toward Arturo Kingdom. The capital of that country will be myst stop before I can finally go home.

 Chapter 320 - Mysterious Forest

    "Here is fine, Spot. Let''s stop here."


    We were on our flight to Arturo, when I asked Spot to stop and descend right before we entered a dark forest. Although it''s still bright, the forest is too dark for average people. Not me though.


    "Why are we stopping here?" Victoria asked right in front of the forest.


    "I heard from old man that this is one of the most mysterious location in the entire continent. Even though it''s sunny, the forest is too dark. Not many people have explored this forest. Although it seems as if cutting through the forest to go from Varadis to Arturo is faster, people would choose to travel through sea route since it''s safer that way. If I have to guess, this ce is perfect for hiding spot. Maybe while we''re on travel, we could find the cult''s base or former base in this forest.." I exined.


    That''s also why I asked Spot to fly this way instead of crossing the sea.


    The life of the king might be in danger if he''s still alive, but after realizing how close Varadis was to be under their control, I need to be more thorough in cleaning up the problem. Though after this mission is over, I will leave everything to the kings and have a good rest.


    "So, how is the forest to you two monsters?" I asked Spot and Victoria who were both monsters.


    It was because I heard that this ce is where the Dragon Dung Flower originated from. That is why there''s no monstersing in or out of this forest. Unless there''s a real dragon dung there.


    "The forest is dark, but it''s not difficult for me to see." Spot said.


    "And there''s nothing that prevent us from entering. I think we''re fine." Victoria said.


    I guess the Dragon Dung story was fake. But there might be some truth in it. because I didn''t see any monsters inside the forest, or outside it. At least from within my Divine Vision''s range.


    "So, are we going in?" Victoria asked.


    "No. Let''s rest for today. We''ll enter the forest tomorrow." I said.


    After that, we prepared to camp right outside the forest. I don''t think anyone wille here. And if anyone indeeding, they are suspicious.


    The next day, we prepared to enter the forest after breakfast.


    "This is supposedly one of the most dangerous location in this continent. Let''s be careful. We will ride on Spot''s back like before, but he will be smaller and slower. Is that okay, Spot?"


    "Sure! This forest seems interesting!" Spot said excitedly.


    Well, if he''s happy, I don''t think he will swallow anyone anytime soon.


    Inside the forest¡­ there''s nothing other than very tall trees that covers the sun. the leaves are mostly green, but there are trees with purple leaves, pink, and other color. I don''t get why this ce isbeled as dangerous. Maybe because there''s some kind of effect if you breathe in the surrounding air directly. If that''s the case, it''s good that I protected everyone with my Air Barrier before we enter this forest.


    "Roy, do you see anything?" Celestine asked.


    "Nope. Not at all. Do you sense anything?"


    "When we reached expert level mages, our senses increased so we can sense magic close to us. That''s how we detect people. When we entered this forest, I didn''t feel anything. But now, I feel like I''m being surrounded by¡­ everything here. These trees must be dangerous." Celestine said.


    If she says so, I guess that''s correct. I should be careful and maintain the Air Barrier around us at all time.


    "Does that mean you always sense me just from¡­ breathing? Since I mostly breathe thanks to air magic." I asked.


    "Not really. But if I concentrate on how people breathe, I might be able to differentiate between you and other people." Celestine replied.


    "That remind me of boys in my world. They can differentiate their parents'' footsteps just by hearing. That''s how much they want to keep their secrets."


    Victoria suddenly spoke. She must be feeling nostalgic after hearing something simr. But I thought there''s no magic in her world? And what kind of secrets do boys want to keep from their parents?


    I will never know. It''s because I''m not from that world, and I have no parents. But whatever Victoria said always piqued my interest. But let''s just stay curious and never ask her for the truth. I don''t think I can handle it.


    "Then how about I breathe the magic? You might find out what makes this ce dangerous." Victoria asked. But there''s one w I can see in her n.


    "¡­you don''t even have lungs. How will we know that the trees are dangerous If it doesn''t affect you?"


    "We won''t know if we don''t try."


    After saying that, Victoria jumped off of my shoulder andnded on the ground, so I asked Spot to stop.


    Because I don''t know if the air will affect our body even if we don''t breathe it in, I put arge Barrier enough to cover Spot''s body which is already smaller than his real body. And Victoria is already outside the range of my barrier.


    Since it hase to this, we can only watch.


    "Hmm¡­ there''s nothing wrong with me." Victoria said.


    The trees around us have pink leaves. It''s dark since the sun is covered by the trees, but I can see the color. If this ce is not dangerous, this will be a beautiful scene. Though we still don''t know what makes this ce dangerous. Maybe the dangerbel will be lifted if there''s really nothing dangerous?


    "I guess it doesn''t affect me. Then¡­ OH MY GAWD!"


    Suddenly, Victoria shouted. What is it? I looked around, but there''s nobody around us.


    "What is it, Victoria?"


    "Roy! What are you doing with Hill! No, don''t do that! Actually, do more!"


    "WHAT THE HELL!? STOP THAT!"


    I punched Victoria as hard as I could to make her returns to her sense. And maybe the trees here have an effect that gives the people who breathe their scent to fall into hallucination. In any case, whatever Victoria is seeing must be stopped. So, I tried to surround Victoria with Oxygen. I don''t know if this will work, but I hope if her lung is filled with it (If she has any), she will return back to normal.


    "Huh? What? Where''s Hill?"


    Victoria looks confused after I used my air magic. I guess it works. But maybe I need to upgrade my ability to cure the condition faster.


    "That was hallucination, I guess. Maybe this ce is good for me to improve my air magic. Then I can use hallucination gas to my opponents." I said.


    "Call it Hallucinogen gas. I like that one better. Anyway, it''s a shame that that was just hallucination." Victoria said.


    "It''s not a shame! You''re the shameful one to think of something like that! Anyway, if no one has any problem, I''d like to have Victoria test every tree I can see. At least let''s stay in this forest and leave before it''s dark. We''ll continue to go to Arturo tomorrow." I said.


    "Then I''ll go back to the Empire. I want to tell Lynn about everything that happened directly. Call me back tomorrow before you leave." Celestine said.


    "Sure. Spot, sorry but you don''t have anything to do."


    "It''s fine. What Victoria did look funny anyway." Spot said as he turned small and wrapped himself around my waist.


    Then I opened a portal to the Empire and let Celestine go there.


    Today, let''s have a lot of experiment.


    "Victoria, I want to test if the different color of the tree leaves gave you different hallucination. Around here, the color of the leaves is pink. Let''s go to the red one nearby next." I said.


    "¡­I shouldn''t have volunteered before. Sigh¡­ let''s do this quickly."


    Then, I run quickly to where the leaves are red. I throw Victoria outside my Air Barrier, and waited for her reaction.


    "YOU F***ING SWINE! WHAT DID YOU JUST SAY!?"


    After waiting for a while, Victoria shouted in anger. I guess the effect of the trees around here is anger. As for before¡­ it was most likely lust. Though I want it to be wrong.


    "Okay, Victoria. That''s enough." I said as I grabbed her and return her back to my Barrier.


    "Uuu¡­ I don''t want to do this¡­" Victoria said.


    Sorry, but there''s no way out for you. As long as you don''t transform, you won''t be any danger whatever hallucination you see. That''s why you''re the only one I can ask. Though I won''t tell her that.


    I think Victoria knows that as well. And she thinks that this will improve my air magic as well. So, she agrees to follow through this n.


    "That was interesting. Let''s get to the next one." I said.


    "Can''t you just go back here aler? I''m too embarrassed to think of what''s going to happen to meter." Victoria said.


    "No. I want to see everything today first. Of course I will return hereter after the mission. But while you''re willing to be experimented, I will have you breathe in most of the trees here."


    And so, we spend the day experimenting on the effect of each color of the trees until it''s dark outside. After it''s dark, stopped and take a rest outside of the forest. Though Victoria needed to be hugged the whole night after that because of embarrassment. So cute.

 Chapter 321 - Result Of The Experiment, And Arrival At The Capital

    "I won''te back here ever again!"


    The next morning, Victoria shouted that before I opened a portal to grab Celestine so we can continue our journey to Arturo. Most the hallucination that we tested on her, made her so embarrassed that she needed to be spoiled after all that.


    By the way, Spot had a greatugh.


    About the hallucination gas, or what Victoria called Hallucinogen gas, there are several colors of leaves that we found. Each color has different effect. And when we found leaves with same color but in different location, they have the same effect.


    Here''s the summary of the experiment.


    Pink Leaves:


    "Roy! Hill! Don''t do that! Please do that! Don''t do that but please let me see if you''re doing that!"


    That''s what Victoria shouted.. I don''t want to delve deeper into what she means. But from her reaction, it seems that the pink leaves gave lewd hallucination. And that''s also depend on the person since I took a sniff a little, and see what I want to see. Not between boys, but between me and my lovers. It means that what we''ve seen depend on the person who smelled it.


    But I quickly cure myself from the hallucination with my air magic that I improved while I''m here. I have clearer image to cure each condition the leaves give now.


    ¡­though there''s one thing that bothers me a lot. It''s Victoria.


    "Roy! If you havepleted researching this gas, let me sniff it! It''s a good source for my book!" Victoria said.


    Her books were quite popr with¡­ same-minded people. And she was quite sessful as an author. I keep saying that she can write whatever she wants as long as she doesn''t use me as reference of her characters in her story. Though I doubt she follows my rule.


    Though we ended up agreed on it since I told her to experiment on my magic once I can produce themter. Let''s just hope that I won''t get popr for the wrong reason.


    Then the experiment continues.


    Red leaves:


    "You Motherf***ing, F*, F*, F*!"


    ¡­there were a lot of F words in her sentences that I have to censor them in my mind. But the one that start with mother, doesn''t that just mean a father?


    Whatever the case, red means rage. Those who smelled it will feel extreme rage that they will shout curses. And Victoria even transformed into her human form and fought me. But since she''s angry, her moves are predictable and I can stop her.


    Yellow leaves:


    "Don''te near me! Aah! AAAH!" Victoria scream in fear.


    That''s right. Yellow is fear. Victoria seems as if she''s extremely afraid of something and want to escape from that scary hallucination that scares her.


    Green leaves:


    "No way! Really!? I won the best-selling author award!? Thank you very much!"


    Green leaves gave people who sniff them happy hallucination. Victoria in her human form has a huge smile on her face.


    Blue leaves:


    "No way¡­ I shouldn''t have done that. I''m much more useless than a pebble. It''s best if I lock myself in a room and nevere out ever again¡­"


    She looked very depressed. So, I thought that blue leaves mean depression. It''s scary in a way.


    White leaves:


    "Aaahh¡­ it''s so peaceful. I wish every day is this calm¡­"


    ¡­me too. I want everyday to be calm as well. I guess white leaves give calmness. This is also useful for me as a doctor. And probably when I want to escape from reality. Using this with sleeping gas might make people sleep more easily. Probably they will have good dream as well. I''ll try itter once I seeded in producing this calming gas.


    Then thest color of the leaves that I found. It''s also the most dangerous one. It was because the location where I found it is filled with corpses. Animals, monsters, and even humans, all of them are just corpses here.


    When I ask if Victoria still wanted to continue, she asked if I will stop her no matter what if it''s something dangerous. Of course I agree. And then she sniffs on the area under the tree with ck leaves.


    ck leaves:


    "DIE! DIE! KILL, KILL, KILL, KILL, KILL!"


    Victoria attacked me with the intention to kill. This ck leaves is the scariest of all. It makes those who sniff it to attack other people with the intention to kill. And using my curing gas also takes a lot of time, so I need to dodge Victoria''s attack for a while.


    This time, she''s using her technique without anger. She''s trying to kill me by using strategy. Unlike that time with red leaves. This just makes it harder to stop her, but I did it in the end since the effect of the hallucination is gone.


    In the end, the result of the experiment was amazing.


    These gases that were produced by the leaves, able to control people. It''s no longer just hallucination.


    From Victoria''s exnation, she always sees something that is not real, but she thought very real. That''s what triggered her emotions.


    So, if I can produce these types of gases, I could create chaos anywhere I want. If I could produce the same gas as the ck leaves and spread it in the middle of the enemy ranks, they will kill each other as a result. Probably the ck leaves are the reason why the forest is dangerous.


    I will return here some time in the future to improve my air magic. But for now, I need to focus on the mission.


    So, I called back Celestine who was being hugged by her sister so we can continue our journey.


    "How was the experiment?" Celestine asked.


    "It was enlightening." I said.


    "It was embarrassing." Victoria said.


    "That was funny!" Spot said.


    Confused that each of us gave different answer, Celestine asked Victoria who refused to answer.


    "In summary, the leaves produce different types of gas depend on their color. That''s what we learned. Though one color is both amazing and dangerous at the same time." I exined to Celestine the effect of the ck colored leaves.


    "Isn''t that amazing? You can destroy the cult from the inside if you can produce the same gas. What about other color?" Celestine asked.


    "I''ll exin itter when Victoria isn''t with us. She''s already helpful with the research, so I can''t say something that will embarrass her. Though it''s good to keep this as ckmail material." I said as I teased the sulking Victoria.


    "Don''t do that! If you ever tried to ckmail me, I will hate you for the rest of your life!"


    The rest of my life she said. Then after I die, she won''t hate me anymore, right?


    I guess the reason she can''t say that she will hate me for the rest of her life is because that''s too long.


    "Let''s go. We should save the king of Arturo as fast as possible. We have dyed our journey for a while." I said.


    "Yeah, right. If you hadn''t meet Spot, you wouldn''t even get to Varadis at this time. You might have crossed the sea, but you won''t reach the capital yet. It''s all thanks to Spot we can travel fast." Celestine said.


    "Yeah! I''m very fast!" Spot said proudly.


    "But we need to be really careful this time. We will stop at every city we passed. If there are any report telling that they''ve seen us, they will just think that we''re wind mages who can fly fast, beastform mages, or summoner or tamer who ride on the back of a flying monster. We''ll call ourselves as travelers who want to see the world as our disguise. Is that okay?" I asked Celestine.


    "Let''s say that we''re a couple on our honeymoon to see the world. I think that''s more believable than just travelers." Celestine said, to which I agree.


    I haven''t even married anyone yet, but already went on a honeymoon? Other girls will be jealous.


    We continued our journey and stopped at every city we see for a day or two. We continued that way until we reach the capital of Arturo Kingdom.


    In every city, there are a lot of people who have explosive devices in their mouth. As expected, this whole kingdom has fallen to their clutch. Though there are some who don''t have explosive devices, I don''t know if I can trust them or not.


    Celestine also see many people she recognizes as her worshippers. Good thing she''s wearing ttening underwear. No one will think that she''s the same Celestine as the one they worshipped.


    "Finally we''re here. What do you think, Roy?" Victoria asked me as we can see the capital within our sight.


    "¡­I''m currently doubtful that the king is still alive. Probably they keep him barely alive. Victoria, can you transform into him again?"


    Old man Henry, Lynn, and Albert has told me about the king''s appearance. And Victoria mimicked how he looks like. The three told me that she''s the exact replica of the man, so I know how he looks like.


    I can see some areas around the entrance of the capital, but I haven''t seen anyone with simr appearance as the one Victoria mimicked. There''s also a chance that he''s not being held in this ce. Maybe he was brought to the base of the cult. Or he has died.


    "In each city we enter, we haven''t met any expert level mages. But this is the capital, so we need to be careful. If anyone sensed someone suspicious, don''t react. Act as if you don''t know they are looking at you." I said to everyone, in which they nodded.


    Now, let''s enter the capital.

 Chapter 322 - At The Gate

    "Wait! We need to examine you first before you enter!"


    As we were about to enter the gate, the gatekeeper stopped us and told us that he needs to examine us. That''s weird since when other people entered, none of them were examined. Did he think that we''re suspicious? Let''s just stop and let him do his job first. Well, if it''s his job.


    Celestine and I entered the gate side by side. As for Spot, he''s pretending to be my belt. And Victoria is my beard.


    Nowadays, I no longer have her transformed as a grappling hook under my sleeve anymore. It''s because I already capable of running on air. And I no longer wear protective gears like shin guards and arm guards anymore since I can use Blobbies for them. Those materials from the Giant Smander during the Stampede are no longer useful to me..


    That mean even if the guard is checking my body, there''s nothing suspicious. Well, maybe my weird-looking belt is a bit suspicious, but I can me it on my fashion sense.


    "What examination? The others passed the gate without any examination. Why do we need to do it?" I asked.


    Now that he''s in front of us, I can see clearly that he''s aiming for Celestine. Even though she hides her breasts size, she still has a pretty face. Celestine always care about her appearances after all. That''s how she looks younger than she is.


    "Not you. But her." The guard said without hiding his intention.


    "Please don''t touch my wife." I said while protecting Celestine behind me from the guard.


    "What do you think you''re doing? I''m the gate keeper here. You have to obey my order!" The guard shout in anger.


    "WHATEVER YOU DO, I CAN SHOUT VERY LOUD! I CAN MAKE SURE THAT MANY PEOPLE WILL PAY ATTENTION TO US IF YOU DO ANYTHING INDECENT TOWARD MY WIFE!" I shouted loudly. It''s about as loud as Jewel''s voice.


    "Don''t shout!" the guard panicked because he never thought that I would scream. This is also so other people can learn how to handle people like him. Those who heard my shout looked at us curiously. With this, those people watching won''t fall victim to this guard''s crime.


    I also see someone who seems to be his higher-uping down the stairs after hearing my shout.


    More people mean I have to be more careful. So far, I haven''t found anyone suspicious to be expert level mage. But there''s no shame in being wary. Let''s escape once things go wrong, or just kill everyone here first then escape.


    Just when I think of that, the boss of this shameless gatekeeper who is going down the stair, stopped for a bit. And his face has a frightened expression. But he calmed down, and continued going down the stairs to meet us who cause trouble.


    "What''s going on here?" The boss asked.


    Though I noticed that his expression when he saw me and Celestine turned slightly, but his expression returned to normal quickly.


    ¡­I know this guy.


    Not from my previous life since I don''t remember anyone else from that time, but from this life. Old man Henry and Albert told me about this guy. That''s right. He''s a royalty of this kingdom.


    I need to find a way to talk to him in private. But why did he react when he was so close before? I don''t think he''s an expert level mage. If he is, he would react long before I entered the gate.


    He''s disguising himself as a guard. I wonder why? We also need to be wary of him.


    "Sir! Listen to this! This this gatekeeper is trying to molest my wife!" I said to the man in disguise.


    "No, sir! I''m just doing my job! She''s actually suspicious! That''s why I stopped them!" the gatekeeper tried to make some excuses.


    The disguised royalty stopped to think for a moment about the situation, but I won''t let go of this chance. I summoned Sonia and she appear in front of me while being invisible.


    ''Sonia, tell that guy to bring us to chat privately.'' I said in whisper that only Sonia can hear.


    ''Did you find something?'' Sonia asked.


    ''Probably.''


    After that, the disguised royalty suddenly changed expression again after Sonia whisper something to him. He looked at me to which I nodded.


    "You two,e with me to my office. And you, don''t use your privilege as the gatekeeper to stop every woman and molest them. If I found you doing the same thing again, I will make sure you get punished harshly."


    After that, we followed the guy upstairs and enter an office room. Knowing that we''re alone, I put Air Barrier to block our voices.


    "¡­so, do you need something?" He asked me while still being wary.


    That''s also what I will do when someone extremely suspicious asked me to talk with him in private. In any case, even I need to make sure that he won''t be a problem. And if he tries to do anything, I will restrain him.


    Again, just as I thought of restraining him, he started to prepare to cast a magic silently. Don''t tell me that he can read my mind? That''s impossible. If he can, he won''t be surprised when I asked Sonia to ry a message to him.


    Since his magic might be dangerous, I was about to restrain him without question, but he quickly raised his hand and aimed his magic toward me. Celestine about to cast a magic, but I''m faster. I quickly get behind him, and with a Blobbyknife on his neck, I asked him to stop attacking us.


    "That''s enough of you. As long as you don''t do anything that will harm us, I won''t attack you." I said.


    "¡­how can I trust you?" He asked.


    "I don''t know. But it''s you who needed someone you can trust. That''s why when the ghost told you to talk with us in private, you agreed." I said.


    "¡­fine. What do you want?" He asked.


    I put down my Blobbyknife, and take off my disguise. Which is just a fake beard.


    "First¡­ what did you do? I don''t think you can read my mind, so¡­ you can see the future?" I asked.


    "How did you know!?"


    Oops. He admitted.


    "From your reaction. Don''t worry, I won''t kill you." I said.


    "¡­but you killed me many times already. Each time happened just because you''re wary of me. I can only see one second to the future. But you''re several second ahead of me." He replied.


    "I''m just fast. Now, I need your help, Crown Prince." I said.


    "How did you know!?"


    Not just him, but everyone here other than me and Spot who doesn''t care were shocked. Including the ghost and my fake beard.


    "He''s the Crown Prince!?"


    "No way!"


    "I guess if it''s him, he can notice this guy is a Crown Prince. Though I''m more surprised that he remembers the Crown Prince''s appearances."


    Thest one who said that was Victoria. Of course I remember. I tried hard.


    "Sonia, go tell Albert that I need him now." I asked Sonia to tell Albert.


    "Sonia? Your wife is called?" the Crown Prince asked.


    "Not her. It''s the ghost. She''s invisible at the moment."


    He shudders after I said that.


    Although I remember his face, I forgot his name. The only thing that I remember most about his appearance is his red hair. He''s wearing a blond wig at the moment, but I can see his real hair color under the wig.


    "So, you can really see the future, huh?" I asked.


    "That''s right. Anyway, who are you?"


    I told him the truth about who I am and why I''m here. From his reaction after seeing the future, I know that he''s no match to me. That''s why I told him.


    "My real name is Roy. But I''m disguising myself so don''t use my real name. We''re here to see if the real king, your father, is still alive or not. King Albert of Tatrama, King Henry of Varadis, and even Empress Lynn of Consenza, know that the current king is a fake. What do you think, Crown Prince?" I asked.


    Hearing what I said, the Crown Prince slumped on his chair and sighed in relief.


    "Finally! I''m not the only one who noticed!" He said with tears in his eyes.


    He probably found out about it from seeing the future.


    "We''ll talk more about thatter after we get one more guest. Or maybe more. Depend on the guest. Do you know any expert level mage in this city? We need to be wary and probably get to somewhere far from them." I asked.


    "No, around this gate, I don''t think there are any expert level mages here. I''m the strongest here, and I''m just advanced level. Though I don''t think any of the expert level mage I find in this city is stronger than you." Crown Prince said.


    "You know that just in one second?"


    "Whenever I really want to do something, the future changed ording to what I''m doing. For example, when I was afraid of you, I did my habit of testing you. In that one second, I would try to cast my fastest magic, Wind sh at you. Then I can see the future of what happened after that magic even when I didn''t use it in the end. It''s very useful, but I don''t know why I get this power."


    "That is very useful, and I might know how you got that power. Hmm? Seems like we can continue now."


    Sonia returns and just nod telling me that Albert is free now.


    I check around the surrounding again to see if anyone is an expert level mage, when I open a portal to let Alberte.

 Chapter 323 - Taking The Crown Prince For A Chat

    "K-King Albert! How did you suddenly appear here!?"


    As soon as I opened a portal, just like everyone else who saw it for the first time, the Crown Prince of Arturo reacted the same way as the others.


    "This voice¡­ you''re really Crown Prince Fabio? If not for Roy, I won''t believe that it''s you. Your disguise is quite good." Albert said as he enters the room. I guess that means I don''t need to maintain the portal anymore, so I closed it. I thought Albert would just talk through the portal, and noting here.


    Well, as long as I don''t use portal too many times, I can allow it.


    "Yeah, but one man found out about me." Prince Fabio said as he looked at me.


    "He''s not normal.." Albert said.


    Like usual, the reason why I brought him here is to see if this guy can be trusted or not. Meeting the real Crown Prince just as soon as we entered the gate is already a huge achievement.


    "By the way, you''re really Fabio, right? Not a fake?"


    Albert asked with the intention to see if Fabio is the real Crown Prince.


    "I am. I''m hiding myself by pretending to be a guard. Though by some chances, I get promoted and be the captain. Now, I''m responsible for examining those who want to enter or leave the capital." Prince Fabio said.


    "And you''re not doing a good job at all. the gatekeeper even tried to molest Celestine even when I said she''s my wife." I said.


    "¡­sorry." The Crown Prince apologized, then he continued, "So, how did you ended up here? You just appear out of nowhere." He asked Albert this time.


    "That doesn''t matter at the moment. We''re in a hurry or your kingdom will fall to the cult." Albert said.


    "¡­how much do you know?" Prince Fabio asked.


    "The Harold that we met a few months ago, was a fake. He''s not the real Harold. That''s why we suspected that Arturo has fallen."


    "¡­and?"


    "Even Varadis was almost fallen as well. The one old man Henry about to appoint as his sessor was member of the cult. If not for Roy going there beforeing here, we will never know. Now, it''s your turn. Tell us everything that you know."


    "Not here, not now. I can''t even trust my own siblings. Let''s talk moreter tonight. It might take a while, but luckily, tomorrow I''m free. We can chat as long as we want." Prince Fabio said.


    I guess he doesn''t even trust this office. Even if I told him that no voice can leak, he also can''t trust something he never sees.


    "Alright. Later tonight. As for the location, we will arrange it. Roy, bring me back." Albert said.


    Then, I opened a portal again back to his pce. It''s dark over there. Must be that time difference.


    "Just what is that? Magic tool?" Prince Fabio asked.


    "We''ll tell youter. For now, you can continue with your job. I''ll meet youter." I said.


    We were about to leave, but he stopped us.


    "Wait! I want to ask you a favor." Prince Fabio said.


    "What is it?"


    "My sister. Although I don''t know if I can trust my other siblings, my youngest sister is just seven. I want you to take her away from this kingdom. Take her to somewhere safe." Prince Fabio begged.


    "That''s easy. Just stay with her tonight. I''ll find you twoter."


    Albert said the we will arrange the location. I can guess that it''s probably in Albert''s pce. That mean prince Fabio''s sister will be safe in Tatrama. Or even better, in my own house.


    After that, we leave that ce. We ignored the guard who tried to molest Celestine, and find an inn. That guard tried to follow us to see where we''re staying, but we managed to escape his sight.


    I look around to see any inn located close to the castle so I can see clearly the situation in the castle. If the fake king is still acting, he needs to learn all that the real king knows. That mean he must be imprisoned somewhere nearby.


    The inn we choose was quite expensive, but that''s no problem to the rich me. We asked for a big room for both of us. The receptionist said that the security in this inn is the best, but I doubt it if the cult is already here.


    So far, no one thinks that we are suspicious. But we also haven''t met any expert level mage. From What Fabio said, there were some that he suspected to be expert level mage. He saw them killing him in one second. Or maybe he only noticed their killing intent in that one second? We can talkter tonight about his ability.


    The room we''re staying is facing away from the castle, but that''s no problem to me. Since this ce has its own bathroom, we can finally take a bath after a few days. And I said to myself that I need to focus on the castle, not the bathroom many times¡­


    Though the castle is still too far from my sight. I can only barely see the entrance. I need to get closer, but that will be suspicious. I should just have Spot camouge me so I turn invisible, but the danger of expert level mages was still there. I guess I should do it tomorrow.


    For today, we need to act like a loving couple and go on a gourmet tour around the capital. I doubt they will erase local delicacies just because they take control of the kingdom. Right?


    So far, I haven''t found anywhere where the real king is located. So, we returned back to the inn, put some Blobbies in our room as disguise in case an expert level mage is nearby, and look where Crown Prince Fabio is at.


    He''s at a small house near the gate, with his sister. Only two of them living together.


    The ce is also safe since I don''t see anyone suspicious. In fact, we''re the most suspicious group here.


    I knocked on the door, and entered the house after he let us in.


    "She''s your sister?" I asked as I looked at the little girl who is only one year younger than Daniel. She''s holding prince Fabio''s hand and had no intention of letting go.


    "Yes. Her name is Luna. And¡­ she''s just like me. She can see the future. But her power seems to be much stronger as she can see few second ahead of me. We never told anyone about our power other than to our father." Prince Fabio said.


    "I don''t want to leave Fabio!"


    "Don''t worry, Luna. You are safe with him. Isn''t that right?" Prince Fabio asked me.


    "That''s right. And there are many other kids you can y with." I said.


    "Umm¡­ where will you take her to?" The prince asked.


    "My home. Don''t worry, it''s the safest ce I can think of. Even Albert''s children stay there. She can get along with them. Though they are just three years old." I replied.


    "If King Albert can trust you with his children, then I can do the same. Are we going there?"


    "Yes. Let''s go now. Celestine will stay here just in case." I said as I opened a portal.


    When I told Sonia that we will bring Prince Fabio''s sister, Albert told me to have a discussion at my ce. This is also the first time I will return home. But I need to focus on the mission first.


    I had told Sonia to tell the other back home that I will return temporarily. I will of course return back here to Arturo since I haven''t found the king yet.


    We entered the portal, and greeted by Shirley who hurried here together with Ang. If they just return back to the pce, I could bring them along with Albert.


    "Fabio, it''s been a while. Luna too." Shirley greeted Prince Fabio and Luna.


    "Shirley!" Luna let go of Prince Fabio''s hand, and run toward Shirley and hugged her. I guess they know each other. They are both royalties after all.


    "Even Shirley is here. Seems like King Albert trust you with his life." Prince Fabiomented.


    "Wait for a while. Have you had dinner? You can also have a second or even third dinner here. Seems like my maid prepared quite a feast."


    I let Shirley introduce everyone. Then, I closed the portal, and opened three new ones. Each portal connected to each leader of a country.


    "King Albert! Empress Lynn! Even King Henry!" Prince Fabio was shocked to see that not only I brought Albert over, but also the other king and empress. Even Marie and udia joined us. and through the portal to Varadis, I can see Princess Julia waving at us.


    "No need to be so formal. Just call me old man like usual." Old man Henry said.


    "In this continent, this is probably the safest location from the cult. There are two former cult members live here, but they have betrayed the cult and joined our cause, so they are not a problem." Albert said.


    "Before I tell you anything, I have many things to ask." Crown Prince Fabio said.


    The we decided to tell him what we know first before he exins to us what happened to the kingdom.

 Chapter 324 - Crown Princes Fabios Story

    "Then, I want to ask you one important question first. Are you with the cult or not?"


    Albert directly asked Prince Fabio something that will decide if he can be trusted or not.


    "Obviously no. I knew that the cult was bad before my father disappear. And I only noticed that the disappearance of my father was rted to the cult few months after he was substituted." Prince Fabio said.


    "I see. You can be trusted. Now, what do you want to ask?" Albert asked.


    "There are many things I want to ask, but I''ll make it simple. How can I trust you lot?" Prince Fabio asked..


    "I let that guy answer that question." Albert said as he pointed his index finger toward me.


    "Why me? If you answered him, it will be more believable."


    "You''re the proof." Albert said.


    I''m the proof? Hmm¡­ oh, I see. He wants me to tell Prince Fabio about his own lie detection skill. That''s why I''m the proof since his ability was inherited from his ancestor who was an Aura user. And that''s probably the case as well since not just the prince Fabio, but his sister Luna can see the future. And I''m the one who''s supposed to tell him that.


    "Alright. Prince Fabio, it was quite surprising both you and your sister can see the future. I know why. That''s the same reason as to how Albert have the ability to detect lies." I said simply.


    "He can detect lies?!"


    "That''s right. That''s why he asked if you are with the cult or not. Since he didn''t detect any lie when you replied, you can be trusted. It''s that simple." I said.


    "Does that mean each royalty from each kingdom has ability?" Prince Fabio asked.


    "Not that I know of. At least Lynn and old man Henry don''t have it. The reason you have ability is because you inherited it from your ancestor who was an Aura user. That''s the most likely answer since only Aura users or their descendants have abilities other than magic. And I am probably the only Aura user left in the world."


    Then, I started exining to Prince Fabio about what Aura user is. As for Luna whom he brought here with, Daniel is chatting with her and asked her to y with him.


    ¡­what about me? Doesn''t he miss me at all? I feel sad thinking that he doesn''t think much of me anymore. As expected, taking too much mission away from home is terrible for my rtionship with Daniel. As for the others, they are fine since I can ask them for help. But Daniel is too young to bring over. Does he hate me now?


    I finished exining about Aura to Prince Fabio, but he still doesn''t get why he can trust us.


    "I get how you can trust me. It''s all thanks to King Albert''s ability. But how do I trust you? I lost my father without knowing how and why."


    "Because our goal is to destroy the cult. I came from the future, and in the future, the world is destroyed by the cult. This time, we won''t let that happen."


    This time, I told him about the future. He might be able to see one second to the future, but I''m someone from the future. The real future and not one that he sees every day.


    With the help of the kings to convince him, he finally believed us and exins what happened.


    ¡­well, Prince Fabio didn''t believe it for a while, so I asked Albert, old man, and Lynn to convince him. We also told him many things so he can trust us. I think it''s faster if we just ckmail him, but we wanted him to join us without being threatened. But finally, he believed us.


    Then, he started telling us what he knows about the kingdom.


    "Luna has told me long time ago that she can see the future just like me. She also said that the only other person who knows about her secret is our father. Father also know that I can see the future although it''s a weaker version that Luna''s. We never really noticed it when he got substituted, but one day, when we were all having family dinner together, which is quite rare, Luna suddenly turned stiff even though the dishes were her favorites. She looked at our father fearfully, and then looked at the whole family. Lastly, she looked at me with tears in her eyes. I thought that she must have seen a terrible future, but a minute has passed a long time since then. Luna''s power let her sees the future one minute ahead. That''s why I noticed she''s thinking of something suspicious. After dinner, I brought her back to her room so we can have a chat in private. When no one''s around, I asked her what''s wrong. And she said that the person we''re eating with is not our father. In her future vision, she can see that person who disguised himself as our father was shocked after he heard of what Luna was about to say."


    "¡­and what was she about to say?" Albert asked.


    "She wanted to ask about what happened with her previous vision. Father said that her vision helped him a lot and that''s also the reason why all the dishes that night were her favorites."


    ording to Prince Fabio, Luna saw the king with a scary expression and with the intent to kill. In that one minute, Luna saw every single members of her family were killed by the fake king after some strangers entered. Just because the fake king doesn''t know that Luna has future vision and answered wrongly. That''s why Luna was scared stiff.


    Then, Prince Fabio also asked for a private time with the king. In which he realized that the fake king doesn''t know about Prince Fabio''s and Luna''s future vision. So, he thought of a n.


    He asked one of his brothers from different mother, to help him arrange something. The king has many wives and this brother of him is someone he can trust the most.


    He asked to arrange for his own and Luna''s death. This brother is someone he can trust, so Prince Fabio doesn''t mind telling him the truth. After hearing his n, Prince Fabio''s brother agreed to do it, while risking his own life to stay in the castle and spies on the fake king.


    Though Prince Fabio and his brother never really had a chance to meet again after that. But that mean I have someone to contact in the castle. I just need to be careful of anyone who can detect my presence.


    "So, both you and Luna pretend to be dead? Then you decided to join the guards? Am I right?" Old man asked.


    "That''s right. And this fake king¡­ he didn''t do anything that change the capital or the kingdom at all. in fact, he rules and acts as if he''s our real father. The biggest difference is that there are more people entering the capital. I know that because that''s my job. Each time someone new entered the capital, I would test them with my future vision. I would see what they will do in the next one second. That''s also how I know that there are several people who entered the capital who can kill me in an instant. As I''m proud of my strength as an advanced level mage, those people are more powerful than me. That''s why I thought they must be at least expert level mage." Prince Fabio exined.


    "¡­as expected, Entering the castle will be difficult. But if I can find your brother, things will be easier. Then, what about the fake king''s reaction after you and Luna died?" I asked.


    "¡­what we expected of father if he''s the one who heard the news. He asked the other children topete for the throne. After that, I heard that our siblings got split up. As for the one I asked for the favor of helping us escape, he''s still in the castle as he has no interest in the throne." Prince Fabio said.


    "¡­if he reacts the same way as your father did, then¡­"


    "Probably my father is still alive. He''s imprisoned somewhere in the castle. Since he never told the fake king that Luna and I can see the future, he must have known that my death is a fake. And that battle for the throne was something that he came up with."


    "At least we have good news. Then my n is to sneak into the castle, meet your brother, and find the location of your father. Do you have anyone else in the family that you can trust?" I asked.


    "Why ask?"


    "If you have someone you can trust, you can tell them the truth. And that person might be able to help you. Since the fake king told his children to fight for the throne, I don''t think all of them are in the capital. Isn''t that right? If you tell them that the king is an impersonator, they will stop fighting." I said.


    "You''re right. I also think that if I could ask them to protect Luna, I can do more things alone while in the capital. But I don''t know who to trust. But there''s someone who I believe his personality will never change. Unless he got substituted like my father. He loves fighting more than being a king. If it''s him, you can probably bait him with a good fight." Prince Fabio said.


    "Then we will ask for his help just in case. Now, do we need to make you dead again this time?" I asked.


    "No need."


    "Don''t tell me that you want to return as a guard and stay in the capital?"


    "No. Let''s turn me into a criminal who escaped from the capital. That will create some trouble that will make you able to infiltrate the castle easier." Prince Fabio said.


    Hearing that, I smiled. So, I just need to cause some trouble and have him med for it.


    "That''s what I do best."

 Chapter 325 - Finalized The Plan

    "Then where will you stay? Are you going to stay here?" I asked.


    "No. Can you take me to where one of my brothers is at? The one who loves battle the most. I''ll convince him to join our side." Prince Fabio said.


    "If it''s him, don''t you think that he will join the cult instead? Since the cult is going to fight everyone?" I asked again.


    "¡­I''ll try my best to convince him." Prince Fabio said without any confidence.


    If the guy is a battle-crazed mage like Ang, then I have many ways to convince him. As long as I offer him a good fight, he should join us..


    We continued discussing our n to save King Harold. And we prepared a n.


    First, I will return to Arturo with Prince Fabio who will return as a guard. Then, I will leave the capital and look for Prince Fabio''s battle-crazed brother. I will use portal to make Prince Fabio to go there while bringing Albert as well as a lie detector. We will convince him while making sure that he can be trusted. I hope at least he doesn''t have explosive device in his mouth.


    After that, I will return back to the capital again with Prince Fabio. I will go find his other brother who helped Prince Fabio and his sister escape from the castle. But the castle might be heavily guarded, and I can''t just open a portal there. That mean I need to go in alone and ask him everything while telling him that he can trust me. I hope he also doesn''t have explosive device in his mouth.


    And since he''s working in the castle, he might have some guesses where the real king is located. I will also look where he is, but I will still ask him just in case. I can''t bring Albert with me since I can''t use portal, so I need a way to trust him.


    After meeting him, I will report to Prince Fabio, get him escape the capital, disguise myself as him, do a big crime that will brand him as a criminal, and escape. Making people think that the guard Fabio is disguised as, escaping from the capital with his sister.


    During that Chaos, the security in the castle should be lowered. I will return back to the castle, and save the real king. Maybe find someone who looks simr to the king, kill him, and swap the king''s body with the dead body. The cult will think that King Harold is dead. That way, they won''t think that we have saved the real king.


    "By the way, Prince Fabio, is there anyone you know with simr appearance with the king to swap his body with?" I asked.


    "The gatekeeper who tried to molest your wife before. If you change his hair color, and make some slight alteration, he will look simr. He can die for all I care. He lets thieves groupe in and those thieves would pay him. And stop calling me Prince Fabio. I''m disguising myself, you know?" Prince Fabio said.


    "What''s your disguised name then?"


    "¡­Albertus."


    Albert then stand up and make a victory pose.


    "My biggest fan. I''ll give you my autographter." Albert said proudly. Annoying. Why can''t he call himself Roy or something?


    "I called myself with that name so in case I did something wrong, the one who will be med is the person called Albert or something simr."


    This time, I''m the one standing up.


    "Haha! He hates you!" I pointed at Albert as he slumped on the chair.


    "By the way, Celestine wasn''t his wife. They are just disguise to get in the capital." It was Shirley who exined my rtionship with Celestine.


    "What? I thought they were married for real!"


    "Roy is a good actor." Shirley said.


    I don''t think I have acted all lovey-dovey with Celestine though? What makes him think that we''re married for real?


    Well, that doesn''t matter.


    "So, once I located the king, I will kill that gatekeeper, get you transported you to your brother''s location, create chaos in the capital under your name, save the king and swap his body." I said.


    "Okay. Shall we go now?" Prince¡­ no. Let''s just call him Fabio. Fabio asked if we should leave now.


    "Not yet. But the others will go home though."


    I opened three portals for Albert, Lynn, and Old man to return.


    They entered the portal, but before I closed it, Albert said something to me.


    "By the way, the battle to decide who is going to be each college''s representatives for the battle tournament has begun in most colleges. Even the one in Cassau." Albert said.


    "Really? Ka, how''s the result?" I asked Ka who listened to our discussion the whole time. The others are here as well, but Ka is the only one who participate in making a n to save the king.


    "It''s positive so far." Ka said.


    I guess that means all of us are doing well.


    But now since the candidates is being selected, and I''m not participating, that mean I won''t enter the tournament. Which is a great news.


    "I''ll listen to it after I finish my mission." I said.


    "Oh, By the way, Tatrama will send youngster to fight, huh? For me, the only one candidate who will one hundred percent participating is just my daughter, Julia. Prepare yourself."


    Old man then returned to do his work. And at the other side, Princess Julia is waving her hand.


    There''s only one candidate announced, but she''s an expert level mage. I guess that''s normal if he wants his country to be the victor.


    "Hmm? What tournament did you talk about?" Fabio asked.


    "You don''t know? Is it being kept as secret by the fake king or it hasn''t been announced yet? Well, the tournament is¡­"


    I exined what tournament we are talking about. But as I exined, I realize the possibility of why the fake king didn''t announce the tournament.


    ¡­he''s trying to send participants, who are all cult members that he can trust. That''s why he doesn''t bother to tell anyone else. Probably all of them will be expert level mages. And when they kill someone in the tournament, they will just say that it was an ident or something.


    The tournament turned dangerous just by Arturo Kingdom participating. But I will trust Ka and the others who will represent Tatrama in the tournament.


    "That''s the first time I heard of this. Just like you said, the fake king will probably send all expert level mages to participate so he can im victory. And the cult might be using the chance when everyone is focused on the tournament to do big things." Fabio said.


    "Don''t worry. In the first ce, I already know the danger of this tournament when we nned it. But if that brother of yours know about this tournament, he will probably try to participate in it no matter what the cost. Am I right?" I asked.


    If he''s really like Fabio said, he will join the tournament. But since Fabio doesn''t know about the tournament, there''s a chance that his brother doesn''t know either.


    "¡­we have to go there quickly to convince him before he received the information. He loves fighting too much." Fabio said.


    "A moment please. I need to do some training. Veronica, please."


    I asked Veronica to be my training partner.


    "What should I do?" Veronica asked.


    "Game of tag. I will find you and try to touch you. You will try sensing my location at all time. I should have done this from the start so I can improve my sneaking ability." I said.


    After that, Veronica leaves. I know where she is, so I just need to get to her and touch her. But that''s the most difficult part since once she notices that I''m approaching, she will escape. I need to bypass expert level mages detection ability.


    "Umm¡­ is it necessary to y now?" Fabio asked.


    "Veronica is the same as Celestine who stayed behind. They both are expert level mages with ability to detect people approaching. All expert level mages can do that. At least those I have met. This will be a good practice to sneak into the castle. As for you, y with your sister and get to know everyone here. They will be the people you can trust from now on." I said as I leave to go after Veronica.


    It was not easy learning to hide myself from expert level mage. Even with Spot''s camouge, we were still detected. But once I covered myself with Aura, Veronica had a harder time detecting my presences. But I can''t bring Spot with me since he''s too strong. As for Victoria, since she''s just a slime, she was hard to detect in the first ce.


    Which mean I have to learn to control my Aura.


    After ying tag for two hours, Veronica had a harder time detecting my presence but I still couldn''t touch her. Even the closest one I''ve ever been is five meters from her. At least that''s something.


    That mean as long as I''m at least five meters away from other expert level mages, they won''t sense me. I think this is enough to infiltrate the castle, but let''s continue while training just in case. I''ll practice with Celestine there.


    "Alright, Fabio, let''s go."


    We returned back to Arturo with ns. Luna waves her hands at her brother who is leaving. She will stay in Cassau with her new friends.


    ¡­Daniel, why aren''t you waving your hands? I''m so sad.

 Chapter 326 - Another Expert Level Mage

    "So, we''re leaving?"


    "Yes. But we will return. Will you stay here or you want toe with me?"


    As soon as we return back to Arturo, we exined everything to Celestine who was standing by at Fabio''s house. Then we discussed our next action there before returning to the inn.


    "Hmm¡­ I think it''s best if I stay here so you can open a portal back here easily. You can be rest easy knowing that I''m here to detect if anyone nearby is expert level mage. Are you leaving right now?" Celestine asked.


    "Yeah. It''s best if I leave now. You can make up some excuse why you''re alone in case someone asked." I said..


    "I see. I hope you will return with good news. What about Crown Prince then?" Celestine asked.


    "I will stay here acting as a guard like usual. Until it''s time for us tomence our n. And just call me Fabio or my fake name, Albertus." Fabio said.


    After discussing what each of us are going to do, we were about to leave when something unexpected happened.


    "¡­this feeling. The mana in the surrounding is being affected greatly. Someone about to breakthrough!" I said.


    It waste in the night when we feel someone is breaking through to the next level. But this feeling is much stronger than what I previously feel when the girls'' level increased.


    "It''s when someone about to enter expert level!"


    Celestine as someone who has experienced it know what happened. It''s when someone in advanced level about to enter expert level.


    This mean there will be another expert level mage in this kingdom. Is this person an ally or not? I guess I need to dy our n for a bit.


    "Let''s find out who it is quickly! Spot, camouge and take us to the source of this." I asked Spot.


    "Roget that."


    Spot then quickly transformed into a serpent big enough for the three of us to ride on.


    "Why are we going there?" Fabio asked.


    "We need to know if this person is rted to the cult or not. If not, we have to protect this mage. And since it''s near the capital, it might be someone that you know. We will dy our n slightly and meet this mage. If possible, we will bring this mage to join us. And there''s a chance that expert level mages in the capital is going there to see as well. Celestine and I will take care of those mages approaching, while you go protect that mage closely." I said.


    I hope this mage who is about to breakthrough is not a member of the cult.


    There''s also a chance that this person is not alone. This person might have someone who will protect him or her. That bodyguard also might think that we are enemies. We have to be careful.


    Riding on Spot''s back, we quickly leave the capital toward where we sense the magic affected the most. A few second after we leave, I can see other people flying toward the same direction as us. they must have been curious about the person behind this as well.


    Some of them have explosive device in their mouth. And some flying cult members were carrying someone else and fly slower. The person they are carrying could be expert level mage.


    But Spot fly faster than them and our distance grew. I can no longer see them, but I know they are going to the same direction. I told what I see to Celestine and Fabio to get them prepared.


    "That cave. The person is inside that cave. And there are nobody guarding that cave. That person is¡­ a woman. Probably in herte 40s, but she''s getting younger thanks to breaking through. As expected, raising magic level will make us younger. But the effect can only be seen once you''re breaking through expert level." I told the other what happened.


    "Late 40s? Since you said she''s getting younger, she''s probably much older than that, right?" Fabio asked.


    "Probably. The good thing is that there''s no one protecting her. That mean we don''t need to exin anything to anyone until she finished breaking through. And I don''t see any explosive device in her mouth. But we still need to be careful." I said.


    Though I doubt that there''s a cult member who is breaking through alone. I asked Celestine, and she said that she was being protected heavily even though the people around her are her worshippers. I hope this one is not rted to the cult.


    "Alright. Fabio, you guard the entrance of the cave. Once she finished breaking through, exin everything and try to persuade her. You''re the Crown Prince so you should be able to do it. Celestine, build some wall to cover this ce. Then you will protect this cave from the outside of the wall. Spot and I will fight those who approach. Let''s hope that there are no expert level earth mages here. Spot, you can kill everyone you see other than us. Even if they are not with the cult, we can put the me on dangerous monster roaming here."


    I gave the order to the others. Then, we jumped from Spot''s back, and Celestine build a wall around the cave. Fabio is inside the wall, but with my air magic, he and the mage inside won''t have any problem breathing.


    Spot and I split up to fight anyone approaching while Celestine will stand guard in front of the wall.


    "Spot! No need to hold back!" I shouted.


    "Nice!"


    Spot then instantly used his breath attack to destroy thendscape. Many of the people approaching us died. Most of them are cult members.


    "¡­maybe hold back a little. Just don''t destroy the capital by mistake." I said.


    If he really went all out, the whole capital will be destroyed and all our n will be useless.


    Not just that the cult will be even more wary than before. We also stopped them from taking control of Varadis, so they should have been alert to us and trying to find our identities.


    Thanks to Spot''s attack, most people decided to retreat. I choose to fight those who areing from elsewhere. Spot can take care of those people.


    ¡­now that I think about it, isn''t it a good time to infiltrate the castle? Well, I doubt that all expert level mages in hiding are going here. But after this event end, the security in the castle should be increased.


    Should I have another expert level mage join us, or should I save the king whose status is unknown?


    Whatever. We''re already here, so let''s persuade her. But after we take care of these pests.


    If this many people fight together, they should be able to defeat Spot. But these people don''t seem to know each other, so teamwork is impossible.


    Oh? There are two mages fighting Spot. They seem to be expert level mages. I''ll help himter.


    Those two let other mages pass to approach the cave. I need to take care of them first before helping Spot.


    They are all members of the cult. And this is an open space. It will be difficult for me to defeat them all. But good thing there are only five of them. Not more. Let''s snipe them from afar.


    To surprise them, I shot the one behind first. The rest stopped, then I shot the two in front to death. Leaving only two left.


    Those two created Wind Barrier to block the bullets and stopped. Trying to find my location.


    While they are stopping, I aimed somewhere else where some people are still trying to approach the cave and kill them. And soon, other than those two and the other two who are fighting Spot, everyone else is either dead or retreated.


    I approached the two mages and kill them with Reizpear, and about to help Spot when I notice that Spot, although he''s wounded badly, he''s winning.


    I will contact Sonia to tell Ka to heal himter. I don''t need to help Spot here. So, I returned back to Celestine who seems to have killed several people on her own, and told her that everything is over. Then, I see that the two expert level mages are dead after Spot attacked them with another breath attack. He will return as well soon.


    "Seems like she has broken through. Fabio is talking with her. Let''s go in." I said to Celestine who destroyed the wall she built.


    Hmm? They seem to be friendly. Do they know each other? What is Fabio''s rtionship with that woman? They both happily hugged each other and cried.


    We both have entered the cave, and with the torch illuminated the cave, Celestine also can see that the two here are hugging.


    Then, Fabio released the hug first, and turned at us.


    "Guys, I want to introduce you to my mother, the queen, Carmen." Fabio introduced us to the expert level mage.


    "¡­excuse me?"

 Chapter 327 - Queen Carmen

    "Like I said, she''s¡­" Fabio was about to exin, when I stopped him.


    "Give us the exnationter. Let''s go somewhere else. Celestine, you will¡­"


    "I can go back on my own to his house. The security should be decreased now since many people are focusing on finding her identity. I''ll be going now. Just exin everything to meter." Celestine then leaves the cave.


    And as she leaves, Spot entered and wrapped himself around my neck.


    "Roy, I''m tired." Spot said..


    "You did a good job dealing with two expert level mages. I''ll have Ka heal youter. You can rest now." I said.


    Getting my permission, Spot sleeps around my neck. Carmen, the Queen, looked at the serpent around my neck curiously. Then she looked at me.


    "And you are?" Queen Carmen asked.


    "Roy. Fabio''s¡­ friend maybe?" I said.


    "Oh my! My Fabio got a friend! You''re his first friend ever that he introduces to me! I''m his mother, Carmen." Queen Carmen proudly looked at her son. She''s so happy that his son has a friend.


    "Mother!"


    "Anyway, let''s get out of here first. I''ll bring us to Albert''s ce." I said as I opened a portal to Albert''s office in his pce.


    Let''s ignore the confused queen. I have seen too many people with the same expression whenever I opened a portal in front of them for the first time.


    In Albert''s office, Albert isn''t here. I thought that just a few hours ago when I returned him to his home, it was at his office. So, maybe he was working. But now, he''s not here. But instead of him, Marie is here.


    "Roy? And Prince Fabio as well? Oh! Queen Carmen! It''s been a while!" Marie greeted us as if she expected me toe and waited for me here.


    "Marie? This is¡­ Tatrama?" Queen Carmen asked curiously.


    "Marie, did you know that we''reing? I haven''t told Sonia that I wille though." I asked.


    "Albert said that in case something went wrong, you will either appear back in your house or here. So, someone always here whenever Albert is not working. It''s just by chance that I''m here. Usually, it would be one of the servants. For now, Albert is taking a break. He will return soon."


    Just as Marie said that, the door is opened and Albert entered the room.


    Before he said anything to us, he quickly turns around and faced someone I don''t know behind him.


    "If you need anything, wait for tomorrow. I will be very busy tonight. Good night."


    Albert didn''t let him see any one of us inside his office. He must be someone he can''t trust then. Well, he said that he''s taking care of the kingdom before I finished my mission. He must be doing something with that guy. But I won''t care.


    "So¡­ is it about Queen Carmen?" Albert asked.


    Then, Fabio pulled me toward Albert, and the three of us talking in whispers.


    "Why are we here? Don''t tell me that you don''t even trust my mother?" Fabio asked.


    "Not yet at least. Don''t tell me that you forgot that your father has been swapped? We need to make sure of this." I said.


    "Roy is right. The cult could even swap the king without anyone noticing. We don''t know if this Queen Carmen is the real thing or not. Or if she has joined the cult thanks to being influenced by the fake king or not. She''s the closest one to the king after all." Albert said.


    "I know, but¡­ I just feel conflicted." Fabio said.


    The three of us finished whispering and see that Marie is chatting with Queen Carmen.


    Seeing us finished whispering, the two looked at us.


    "So, just to make sure, you''re the real Queen Carmen, right?" Albert asked.


    "I am the real one. Hearing that question, it seems that you already know that my husband has been swapped." Queen Carmen replied calmly.


    "Do you know that the Evil God Cult rted to King Harold''s disappearance?" Albert continued asking as if he''s interrogating Fabio''s mother.


    "No."


    "Are you rted to the cult?"


    "No."


    "What will you do from now on?"


    "Kill the man who impersonates my husband and whoever nned it." Queen Carmen answered with killing intent. As she is an expert level mage, everyone here can feel the dread. But we are already used to have expert level mages around us, and Fabio himself is living on the edge. We''re not changing our expression at all after feeling her killing intent.


    "Rather than killing the impersonator, would you want to rescue the real King Harold instead?" This time, I''m the one asking.


    "If he''s still alive, I will save him. But I will still kill the impersonator. I won''t give that chance to anyone else."


    "We might need to wait for years until that happen. I know it''s best to kill him, but we want to make the cult unaware of our presences. At least his presence." Albert said as he pointed at me. We want to keep my presence as a danger to the cult as secret.


    Albert also showed me that we can trust Queen Carmen by nodding his head. That mean she will be the fourth expert level mage after Julia in our alliance.


    Isn''t it amazing? Almost each country has their own expert level mage with us. Princess Julia in Varadis, Queen Carmen in Arturo, then Celestine can be considered from Consenza. As for Tatrama, Veronica is here. She''s the only one who is not part of any royal family.


    "Anyway, can you tell us how and when you realize that he''s father''s impersonator?" Fabio asked his mother.


    "It was days after the news of your and Luna''s death. I was depressed, and hee to my room to console me. That night was also my turn to¡­"


    "Wait, no! I got it! Don''t exin anymore!" I said.


    I got a bad feeling for it. She finds out that the king is a fake, and that''s that. There''s nothing more to listen!


    "What do you mean, Roy? Mother hasn''t finished talking." Fabio said.


    As for Albert, he''s thinking of why I need to stop the discussion. Marie seems to know what Queen Carmen want to say as she''s smiling.


    Just as Albert looked as if he realized what Queen Carmen about to say, Queen Carmen spoke.


    "During our nighttime activity, I can feel his shape was different. It looked simr, but when used, the shape was different." Queen Carmen said.


    "AAAAH! I don''t want to hear that!" I shouted.


    "I should have known. I should have known." Albert said in regret.


    "Uugh¡­ Mother¡­ that''s embarrassing." Fabio said as he covers his face with his hands in embarrassment. I don''t think he will recover anytime soon.


    "After realizing, I need to make a decision. Do I tell the others or not? I don''t know anyone I can trust since I''m isted from the other wives. So, I faked my death. I jumped off the cliff and make them think that I killed myself in depression after my children died. Then, I live on my own. I used to be a hunter before I became the queen, so I''m used to it. And I''m already quite powerful. I was already advanced level in water element. Maybe since I used water element magic to produce water many times, it has improved and now I have reached expert level in my water element." Queen Carmen said.


    So, her element is water. the one that raised to expert level. Is it good? Maybe. And that''s also the reason why she can survive after falling off of the cliff. The sea is her ally. She can then swim far away to escape. She did well so far.


    "Mother is so strong. I know that you''re a water mage, but I never know that you are so strong. Anyway, we have another information then. The queen has died, but no news at all to the people. Even though I''m a guard, no one said anything about her death. Don''t tell me that she''s also being substituted?"


    ¡­Fabio ignored the fact that her mother slept with someone else other than his father. That must be too much of a shock that he ignores it. My condolences.


    "Maybe you''re right. I need to be more careful when I sneak into the castle. Let''s return now so I can go find your battle-crazed brother. What will you do, your majesty?" I asked Queen Carmen.


    "I will help you rescue my husband. Tell me your n." Queen Carmen said.


    "Then we can return back to Arturo again, and have Fabio tell you everything. I will leave after sending Celestine back to the inn we stayed." I said.


    Queen Carmen might not believe it if any of us tell her the truth. But if it''s her own son, she should believe him. And the two need to spend their time together after separating for a long time.


    We return back to Arturo, where Celestine is waiting in Fabio''s house.


    After sending Celestine back to the inn we stayed, I quickly leave the capital to where I can find Fabio''s brother.


    ¡­did I forget something?


    Oh, right! Spot!


    He''s still sleeping around my neck. I guess I''ll send him to Ka to heal. I''ll tell Ka to inform me once Spot is awake so I can take him with me again.


    ¡­will he be a good boy without me? I can only hope.

 Chapter 328 - Do You Want To Be My Summon?

    After returning back to Fabio''s house where Celestine is waiting, Celestine and I said our farewell to Fabio and his mother, and the two of us return back to the inn. Fabio will exin everything to her mother about our n. I also have given her Blobbyne filled with Sonia''s soil. She will learn how to contact Sonia from Fabio.


    ¡­I forgot. Fabio also hasn''t tried to contact Sonia yet. Well, I think they will be fine. I have told him that he only needs to tap the essories to call Sonia. I have told him that the ghost is our important ally who can ry message to anyone who carries her soil.


    It''s a long night, and I''m tired. I have to go out as soon as I wake up. I hope Fabio''s battle-crazed brother is someone I canmunicate with..


    About this brother¡­ his name is¡­ let me think for a bit.


    I think it''s some kind of animal. Big one so¡­ elephant? No, smaller. Rhino? That''s Jewel. Oh, right! Bear! And his name is Bernard!


    Am I right? I hope I''m right.


    Bernard live in a city with the highest rate of monster attack. It''s near the border with Tatrama. That mean it''s a long way from the capital here.


    I can ride Spot like usual, but he''s injured. He will be healed soon thanks to Ka, but it''s best to wait until he''s fully healed. That mean I will run first until then. I hope Spot can be healed during my journey.


    Fighting two expert level mages at the same time must be exhausting. I didn''t see the detail since I was cleaning up other pests.


    So far, the reason I managed to win against expert level mages is because I have the element of surprise. It was rare for me to fight against them directly. And even when I was fighting directly, I used many surprising moves. Does that still count as element of surprise? If it was a magic element, my level would be master already.


    I woke up at noon, and after having meal to fill my stomach, I discussed our n with Celestine.


    "So, I want you to stay here and teach Queen Carmen and Fabio about magic control. I might not be gone for long, but just knowing about magic control makes a lot of differences. Especially since Queen Carmen is an expert level mage. Are you okay with this n?" I asked Celestine.


    "Sure. If not for the situation, I would reject it and travel with you. But this city is too dangerous for just the two of them." Celestine said.


    "That''s right. Many times, I have thought that everyone is thinking too much. Although the king has been swapped, I still hoped that it wasn''t the cult who did it. But seeing that there are too many people here with explosive devices, I know that the chance of the one responsible for all this is the cult. Anyway, I''ll be leaving soon. Be careful." I said.


    "You''re the one who needs to be careful the most. Even if that Bernard doesn''t have explosive device, that doesn''t mean he''s not rted to the cult."


    "I know. Albert and Fabio will be there once I arrive. Oh, and¡­"


    "I know what you want. I''ll try to get as many information as possible while I''m here. Some of my subordinates who saved the orphans back then were here. I''ve seen them when we first arrive here. Though I was disappointed that they don''t recognize me from my face¡­" Celestine said.


    Oh? They are the good ones who betrayed the cult for her, right? Their dedication to big boobs is top-notch. I just hope they will know the differences between Celestine''s boobs and the next big boobs faction leader of the cult. As long as they don''t betray us, it''s fine. Albert has confirmed their intention that they agree to betray the cult, so I hope they know what they''re doing.


    "In that case, I think that''s fine. I''ll leave everything here to you then. I would like to call the others to help, but it seems that the colleges in Tatrama are already preparing to select the participants for the tournament. They are busy, so I can''t call them. Then, I''ll see youter."


    I leave the city normally. Through the gate where Fabio is working. He saw me leave, then he returns back to his office.


    As for the annoying gatekeeper, I guess this isn''t his shift yet. I''ll kill him after I find the king.


    After making sure that no one is watching me, I leaped to the sky and run to the direction of the border city where Bernard is. It will be quite a long journey.


    But since it will be just me and Victoria until Spot returns, I can try the gases experiment from the mysterious forest. I have grabbed each leaf with different color that I have tested on Victoria, and put them in a box. Tightly locked without letting any air in or out because of the danger.


    I grabbed those boxes from the storage room in my home, and Victoria said something weird.


    "Herees Roy. He took the first step to be the biggest and the baddest drug dealer in this world."


    "I''m experimenting with gases. Not drugs. And I don''t think baddest is a correct word."


    "Whatever the case, here''s Roy experimenting with dangerous substances." Victoria said.


    "Not really. The first one I want to try is the white leaf. It will produce gases that make us calm. I don''t think that''s dangerous." I said.


    "Yeah, that thing was great. I felt really calm at that moment after breathing it in. It will be good if youbine it with your sleeping gas. Probably for your surgery as well."


    Yeah, that''s why for now, the calming gas is important. But if possible, I want to be able to produce the gas from red leaf before returning to the capital of Arturo. The ck leaf was pretty awesome as well, but not everyone in the capital is from the cult. If I used that one, everyone will try to kill each other. At least if it''s the red one¡­ that thing is still terrible. But at least I don''t think the red ones is to the point of killing. It just makes you hate someone to the point of fighting them. But still, innocent people can get hurt as well.


    But if I know a ce where only cult members gather, they will fight each other to the death. That would be awesome.


    It has been two days since my journey started, and I failed to produce any result. Maybe my level is still too weak. Or maybe, the one that producing the gas is not the leaf. But the trees. The leaves just decide what kind of trees they are.


    But now Spot is fully healed, I can get to my destination in a few hours. I''ll practice more some other time.


    Sonia has informed us that Spot is healed, and he''s eager to join us. He didn''t cause any trouble at all despite being far from me. I guess he''s not that bad.


    "Spot, once my summoning element leveled up, do you want to be my summon?" I asked Spot.


    "You think I can? I''m in this world now. Not in that world."


    "I can just transport you there, and make a contract with you there." I said.


    No matter what, summoning element and taming element are too weird. Howe one work so simr to each other, but can only work in different world? The biggest different would be that tamer can tame as many monsters as they can, while summoner can only make a contract with up to five monsters, but only able to do that every time we leveled up, and after we ate Pear-y Fruit as well.


    Tamer can make a contract with any monster they see, but we can only make a contract with monsters when we''re in Monsters World. But what if tamers go into Monsters World? Will they be able to make contract with the monsters there? If so, thebination of a summoner and a tamer will be the greatest of all.


    "Hmm¡­ I''m already your friend, so I don''t think you will need to make a contract with me. How about you find another powerful monster instead to make a contract with? Then we can grow even stronger." Spot said.


    "You''re right. I''ll do that then. But that will still be in the future once I reached advanced level." I said.


    The only reason I asked Spot was because I''m afraid of him going wild and not following my order. but after leaving him under Ka''s care and nothing happened during that time, I think I can believe him more now. Maybe I should trust him more.


    "Then, what kind of monsters do you think is good for me?" I asked.


    "Looking at how you need to give a lot of order and a lot of monsters at once like the Werewolves to be under you, I think I know one. But that monster is very rare. When you''re about to get one, take me with you to that world. I''ll try to find that monster. If you have it with you, you can summon even a hundred monsters at once. Maybe even more." Spot exined.


    A hundred monsters just by getting one monster? I want that!


    "So, what kind of monster is it?" I asked.


    "The ruler of the sky. They look like a human, but they are still monsters. It''s an Archangel." Spot said.


    Angel? Does that mean there''s really a god?

 Chapter 329 - Prince Bernard

    "Angel is just a type of monster. They are unrted to any kind of god." Victoria is the one who spoke.


    "You know about angels?" I asked.


    "Javier told me before, but he said that they are extremely rare and hard to find, so it''s easiest to not look for them." Victoria said.


    "I know where they were though. But it has been a thousand years, so I don''t know if they still in the same location." Spot said.


    "Then, once I leveled up, let''s go check that ce first. For now, we''ll go find this Bernard."


    Riding on Spot''s back, we arrived at the town where we supposed to be able to find Fabio''s brother at. He''s supposed to be a general. I guess he should be somewhere where the guards are stationed.


    There''s no need for me to enter the city normally since I might be gone by after visiting Bernard. But how will Fabio convince him?


    First, let''s see if there are any cult members here.


    Hmm¡­ from the look of it, the number of cult members in this city is much less than in other cities in Arturo. Not even ten people have explosive devices in their mouth. And among those people, none of them are the guard, or have respectable position. Just travelers or hunters. I guess this ce is not a strategic location for the cult members to gather.


    Maybe because this Bernard is battle-crazed, he chooses to fight nearby monsters himself or with the guards. That''s why the number of hunters is much less than in any other cities.


    I guess I can ignore everyone else but Bernard. Now, where is he?


    I tried to remember Fabio''s description of him. He''s a short adult man whose height is barely 140cm. He likes battle, but he''s weak so he''s losing all the time. What a weird person. And he''s supposed to be older than me?


    He should realize his own weakness. Well, I don''t mind as long as he''s someone we can trust.


    And I easily found this guy. He''s inside a mansion in this city. He''s sleeping with a pregnant woman. I guess he''s married in the time after Fabio faked his death. Is his personality the same?


    Should I meet his wife as well? I don''t think I should yet. For now, let''s wait until he''s alone to approach him.


    I don''t know where to wait, so I just intrude into his mansion and wait until he''s all alone.


    After waiting only for a while, he wakes up and left the bedroom. I''ll follow him. Good thing there are not many servants in this mansion. There are many hiding spots for me.


    He''sing this way. I look around to see that there''s only the courtyard over here. He might be going there, so I go over to the courtyard and waited for him.


    Just as I thought, he entered the courtyard. There are no one else here. The servants are busy inside the mansion, and I don''t think there are any expert level who can sense us here. Should I greet him right away?


    "Heh! You think I don''t know that you''re hiding there! Come out and let''s fight!"


    Suddenly, shorty Bernard said that. Don''t tell me that he noticed my arrival? Doesn''t that mean he''s an expert level mage? I thought that he''s weak.


    Should Ie out of hiding?


    As I was about to leave my hiding spot, Bernard did something unexpected.


    "What do you want from me?"


    Hmm? Why didn''t he wait until Ie out to say anything?


    "I know you''re there! Come out!"


    ¡­don''t tell me that he''s¡­


    "There''s no one who can hide from me!"


    I looked at him closely, and see that he''s not looking at me. in fact, each time he spoke, he looked at different location.


    ¡­I guess he''s just stupid.


    "Hmm¡­ I need to be more intimidating. Let''s try this one. Show your face or face the consequences! That''s not enough."


    Oh, god! This is embarrassing to watch! I''ll juste out now.


    "Actually, I''ve been here for a while already." I said as Ie out of my hiding spot.


    "¡­"


    "¡­you''re Prince Bernard, right?"


    "Wait a minute. I need to manage this embarrassment first. You should havee out when I first spoke so I won''t be this embarrassed." Prince Bernard said.


    "¡­take your time. While waiting, I have someone who want to meet you. I''ll bring them to you." I said.


    "Ah, okay. Wait! Are you an enemy!?"


    Suddenly, Prince Bernard prepared to cast a magic at me.


    "Come out and let''s fight!" I said, copying the word he said first.


    "Gyaaah! That''s embarrassing! Stop that!"


    Let''s ignore him and contact Sonia to tell Fabio that I''m ready.


    Soon, Sonia returns and tell me that Fabio and Queen Carmen is ready to meet Prince Bernard. She also said that Albert is ready anytime.


    So, while Prince Bernard is recovering from his embarrassment, I opened two portals to let Fabio, Queen Carmen, and Albert toe.


    "¡­he''s Prince Bernard?" Albert asked.


    "¡­yes. He''s my brother. What happened?" Fabio asked.


    "Many different versions of ''I know you''re there!''"


    "Don''t remind me again! Oh, who are you people and how did you get here?" Prince Bernard asked.


    "Did you forget about me?"


    Fabio took off his wig and show his red hair to Prince Bernard.


    "Brother Fabio! You''re still alive! And¡­ Oh! Queen Carmen!" Prince Bernard was shocked to see that his brother is still alive.


    "Just call me mother. Your mother is a good friend of mine. Shame that she died early. But it''s good since she doesn''t have to experience the same thing I did." Queen Carmen said.


    "W-what happened? How did someone who is supposed to be dead is still alive!?"


    And this is where Fabio exined everything, while Albert decide whether Prince Bernard can be trusted or not. This will keep happening many times again in the future, so I need to get used to this. But it sure is boring when they exining things, and I have nothing to do. And when I''m the one doing the exining, I''m toozy.


    Let''s just hope that everyone we exined to can be trusted.


    "That''s what make him decide for us to fight for the throne!?" Prince Bernard shouted.


    "That is exactly what the real father himself wanted in case I really died before taking the throne. He has told me that is what he''s going to do just in case." Fabio said.


    "Anyway, you don''t look as battle-crazed as I expected. Do you really love to fight?" I asked Prince Bernard.


    "After the news that brother Fabio died, I change. I was about to get married back then. And now, I''m married and my wife is pregnant with my first child. I think I should be more careful with my own life and stop fighting as much as possible." Prince Bernard said.


    "You''re married!?" Queen Carmen was shocked to hear that.


    "We didn''t announce it because of the situation. The two of us left the capital under the pretense that we''re going to fight for the throne and show my ability to rule this city. But I have no intention to be a king. I just want my child to live peacefully. But it seems that''s impossible. I''ll help you as much as possible. Anyway, are you going to talk to our other siblings?" Prince Bernard asked.


    "If possible, I would. But I don''t know if I can trust many of them at this moment since they willingly followed the impersonator''s order. I believe the one who will end up to be the next king will be another impersonator. Or worse, our own siblings have joined with the cult. For now, our goal is to rescue the real father." Fabio said.


    "I see. Then, are you going to leave now?" Prince Bernard asked.


    "Yes." Fabio replied, but that''s not the answer I want to hear. So, I denied that.


    ""No.""


    Not just me, Albert seem to have something we need to do first. I let Albert speak.


    "I think it''s best to introduce ourselves to your wife first since Fabio, Queen Carmen, and probably King Harold himself will stay here. I think it''s best for the three to stay here, but only after King Harold''s condition is good. Until then, he will be under my¡­ or his friends'' care." Albert said as he pointed his index finger at me.


    "As for me, I need to kill the cult members roaming in this city to make sure that this ce is safe. We need a safe ce from the cult inside this kingdom. Albert, how about sending some of your people here?" I suggested to Albert.


    "I''ll do that. After you kill them all, return immediately. You also need to introduce yourself to Prince Bernard''s wife." Albert said.


    "Understood."


    I leave the mansion to take care of the cult members in this city. So far, I didn''t see anyone suspicious to be expert level mage, or higher ups of the cult who doesn''t need explosive devices in their mouth. But just in case, I keep looking around for two hours before I return to Prince Bernard''s mansion to greet his wife.


    After meeting the wife, I took Albert back to Tatrama, and I returned back to Arturo with Fabio. As for Queen Carmen, she said that she will stay here in hiding. And to help Prince Bernard''s wife as well through her pregnancy.


    Next is to meet Fabio''s other brother in the castle.. I hope this will be easy.

 Chapter 330 - Prince Toni

    "Any news?"


    After returning back to the capital, I asked Celestine if she received some news from her subordinates. Hopefully, they found where the real king is imprisoned.


    "Because of what happened after Queen Carmen''s breaking through to expert level, many cult members died. Thanks to that, the security is increased. But only from the cult members. The normal guards don''t even notice anything." Celestine said.


    "And how did your subordinates know that?" I asked.


    "My subordinates were not that well-known in the cult, but some people still remember their face. They pretend to still be in the cult while feeling depressed because of my death, and that''s how they get the news."


    I guess that should be expected. Not all cult members well-known to other cult members, so it''s good to pretend to still stay in the cult. But if they got caught, there will be danger as well. Although I don''t know them at all, I hope they are doing fine.


    "Tell them to be careful of being found out that they have betrayed the cult. What about the castle?"


    "No one dare to go near the castle even if they are pretending to still be in the cult. Though they heard that after the fight for the throne started and most of the royal children leave the castle, no one else has ever leave the castle. Which mean the one you''re looking for might still be there." Celestine said.


    "I hope Toni is still alive and well¡­" Fabio said.


    Toni is his brother who helped Fabio and Luna to escape the castle. And he''s the one I''m going to meet tonight.


    Even if he''s alive, it will still be dangerous since we don''t know if he''s already joined the cult or not. Maybe the fake king is already tried to persuade him? In any case, just sneaking in is difficult. And I can''t make any trouble right away since that will only it harder to rescue the real king. I can only create trouble after knowing his location, how to get there, and how to escape.


    Well, escaping is easy with my portal. But going there¡­ maybe I''ll get Victoria to sneak in? She''s a slime, so no one will notice her. And she can blend in with the environment. She just needs to shapeshift into something else when someone is nearby.


    Or maybe I can get Sonia to bring Victoria''s clone with her and sneak into the castle? With Sonia''s upgrade in being a ghost, she should be able to do that. But her presence is much clearer than Victoria''s.


    I don''t think that''s a good idea. I can''t let Victoria or Sonia meet Prince Toni because that will only create suspicion. I need to meet him myself, and show him the proof that I''m with Fabio.


    "Fabio, is there anything that can prove your brother that I''m your ally?" I asked Fabio.


    "I have one. This handkerchief is something that he gave me in the past when we were kids for my birthday. He will know that you''re with me. Take it with you."


    Fabio gave me a handkerchief with his initial printed. A big ''F'' as in F**ker.


    ¡­thanks to experimenting on the effect of the trees with red leaves on Victoria, I learned many words. How about F in Fabulous?


    "Then, I will scout the area and try to make contact with Toni. Fabio, you will return to your job. In case that I will take action to rescue your father tonight, I will contact you and prepare to do some action while disguising myself as ''Albertus''."


    "Understood. I''ll go back to work now. What about father''s body double?" Fabio asked.


    "How strong is he and what are his elements?"


    I asked about the gatekeeper that we will swap with the real king.


    "Weak. Just intermediate level in earth and beginner level in fire. He has no motivation to get stronger. He just abuses his status as gatekeeper." Fabio said.


    Intermediate level, huh? I guess it will be easy to take care of.


    "Then, I will take care of himter. Depend on the king''s condition, he might die right away or suffer for a while. I''ll be leaving then. Celestine, you can go back to the inn or meet your subordinates."


    "I''ll tell my people to stay here to spy on this kingdom. Is it fine to give them Sonia''s soil?" Celestine asked.


    "Sure. That will be great. Other kings don''t even have spies here since they mysteriously disappear. Here you go. See youter."


    After grabbing some essories filled with Sonia''s soil, I ride on Spot''s back to the castle. I have him camouged us both in case someone is looking. As for expert level mages'' detection, I just need to fly higher than they can detect.


    From what I learned, each mage has different range for their detection. But both Veronica and Celestine can detect up to 30 meters. And they are among those with higher range. That mean I should be safe if I look from 40 meters.


    "Spot, fly slower. And go a little higher. Victoria, give me some Blobbies."


    "You''re going to throw them?" Victoria asked.


    "Yes. Just to test if there are expert level mages around."


    For now, I dropped one Blobby to ten meters of a guard. That guard didn''t notice it. That Blobby was also being covered by my Air Barrier, so it doesn''t make any sound when it hit the ground. The only way to detect it is to see it directly or have great detection ability.


    Then, I dropped another Blobby while the previous one is disappearing. This time, it''s five meters to the guard. And the guard still didn''t notice it.


    I should have practice it with either Veronica or Celestine before¡­


    Maybe that guard is not expert level mage? I''ll try to find someone who seems strong.


    Though I don''t know how to decide that. I just keep throwing Blobbies five meters away from everyone I see. But those inside the castle, I need to sneak in first. And that will be difficult.


    Oh? I found him. That Toni is in a chamber with balcony. Can I have him get to the balcony? And the location¡­ there are some guards, but they are too far from his chamber. The closest ones are the two in front of his room. Why would there be guards protecting his room in the castle? Must be the fake king''s order.


    I cover my whole body with Aura, and jumped from Spot''s back to the balcony. As for checking the guards, they don''t matter anymore. Though unfortunately, I didn''t find where the real king is located.


    I think it will be suspicious if I suddenly casted Air Barrier here. The expert level mages would be able to notice when I casted it. That mean we can''t speak too loudly.


    I knocked on the ss door lightly while making sure the guards at the entrance can''t hear, while showing the handkerchief to Toni.


    Toni heard my knock, looked at the balcony and was surprised to see me standing here. But he didn''t leak any voice after seeing the handkerchief.


    He unlocked the door, and I entered his room.


    "You''re Toni? I''m Roy. Fabio told me that we can trust you." I said in low voice.


    "But can you be trusted?" He asked back. I suppose that''s to be expected.


    "The other countries'' leaders have found out that the current king is a fake. And Fabio has informed us what he knows. King Albert of Tatrama sent me here to rescue the real king if he''s still alive. And I have met Empress Lynn and King Henry as well. Fabio said that you stayed in the castle after faking Fabio''s and Luna''s death. Do you have any ideas about this fake king? And do you know where the real king is?" I asked.


    "¡­the more I meet this impersonator, the more I think that he''s a fake. As expected of brother Fabio to realize that sooner. I should have gone with him. About this impersonator, he''s acting like father. And like I said, he''s acting. So, every move he made is carefully calcted. Even greetings. But because I have been suspicious since Fabio told me, I know for sure that he''s not the real father. And it seems that this impersonator is closely rted to that Evil Cult who attacked cities in Tatrama. As for the real father, I don''t know exactly where he''s being held. But I see this impersonator entering a warehouse discreetly several times. If father is still alive, that might be where he''s locked." Prince Toni said.


    "Where is this warehouse and what''s being stored there?" I asked.


    "It''s over there to the north. As for what''s being stored, the warehouse was owned by a merchant who is well-known for his love for magic items."


    "Magic items¡­ there might be some good items to steal as well. How about you? Do you want to escape this ce?" I asked.


    "I''d love to, but I think you need someone to get you news from the inside. I''ll stay here until I had enough. If only there''s a way for us to contact each other."


    "There is. Come to the balcony. That ce is safe since no one is near that ce."


    The two of us get to the balcony, and I called Sonia there who introduced herself to Prince Fabio.


    "She''s our main way ofmunication. Not just to me, other kings and Fabio himself are connected through her. Whenever you have something important, just tap this brooch. She wille. But make sure that you are in a safe location before calling her. And since it''s dangerous for her toe here, I will have someone else in this city where she will appear. Then, she wille to you. You just need to wait until she appears so you can ry messages to us." I exined to Prince Toni.


    "I see. Using a ghost is to be a good idea ofmunication. What will you do next?" Prince Toni asked.


    "Rescuing your father. But I need look at his condition first, and then I will create a big trouble."


    Thus, I exined our n to rescue the real king.. I hope this will work as nned.

 Chapter 331 - Rescuing King Harold

    After I left the castle, I looked at the warehouse that Prince Toni told me. If it''s as he guessed, then the real King Harold is being imprisoned there. And that warehouse should be where a merchant stored his valuable collection.


    Said merchant was supposed to be well-known for his love of magic tools. Hearing that, I made a n to cause a trouble by stealing from that warehouse while disguising myself as ''Albertus''. If the real king is locked there, the cult members in this city, including the fake king himself will be in trouble once I sneaked in. I need to make sure that ''Albertus'' will only leave a trace of himself stealing some magic tools, while erasing all traces of me looking for King Harold.


    When I leave Prince Toni, he said he wanted to exchange a message with Fabio. So, Sonia is staying behind. As long as he wasn''t caught calling Sonia, I think it will be fine.


    I arrive at the warehouse, and was shocked to see that the warehouse is heavily guarded but only on the outside it seems. Does no one truly notice how suspicious this ce is?


    I looked through the wall, and the many magic items here. I see a hidden passage lead to a cell where someone is locked.


    He''s badly injure. Both his arms, his legs, all his fingers and toes, his ribs, all are broken. His limbs are twisted in a weird way, but he''s still alive. Not for long if I don''t save him quickly. His stomach is empty. I guess no one cares about him anymore and he''s useless to feed. The filthiness in that cell just want to make me puke. The imprisoned manying on his own pee, and there''s vomit, blood, and poo all over the floor.


    Is that the real king? If so, I guess I should praise him for surviving this long.


    At this time, there are no doctors who capable of healing him. Unless an expert level mage appears to heal him, he won''t live for another day. But if it''s me, I can heal him as long as I grabbed him and perform surgery.


    But first, I need to see if he''s the real king or not. Well, if I beat the gatekeeper who will be his substitute the same way, he will look the same other than his empty stomach. I guess I''ll get Queen Carmen to see him first. Though I don''t think Queen Carmen will notice him. She couldn''t even tell if the current king is a fake until she sleeps with him. Should I go check the castle again and see the king? Yeah, I''ll do that.


    I returned back to the castle to find the king. This time, since I''m not looking for Prince Toni, I can focus on seeing the king. Previously, since I was just focusing on Prince Toni, I could careless about other people. That''s why I forgot to check the king''s appearance.


    ¡­I found him. If the man in the cell can stand up, he will be at the same height. If he''s healthy, he will be at the same weight. I guess that was the real king indeed.


    Sigh¡­ I spent too much time already. I need to save him fast.


    "Sonia, tell Celestine to go to Fabio''s office."


    I called Sonia while I''m going to Fabio''s office right away at the gate. That''s where I first met him.


    After arriving, I quickly put the guards to sleep¡­ I was wrong. Everyone is already sleeping. Just how terrible is their discipline? But that''s fine. That''s making it easier for me to do this mission.


    I grabbed the sleeping gatekeeper, and brought him to Fabio''s office who is waiting for me. Seems like Celestine was already here before I contacted Sonia. Well, that''s much better.


    "Here''s the n. I''ll kill this guy, and take you two to Prince Bernard''s mansion. Sonia, tell Ka and Sophie that I need their help. They need to prepare for a surgery. Fabio, once you''re there, tell Prince Bernard to prepare a room with a bed. I will do the surgery there to save your father." I said.


    "What happened to father?" Fabio asked, but I ignored him.


    "I will make some trouble while disguising myself as Albertus, and pretend that this guy is an aplish. That way, no one will think that it''s weird for the two of you to disappear." I said to Fabio as I pointed my finger to the still sleeping gatekeeper.


    "Tell me, what happened to father?" Fabio asked again.


    I paused for a bit, then I casted Air Barrier to make sure that no one can hear us.


    "I will give the same injuries to him, as what your father experienced. You will see for yourself." I said.


    Then, I asked Victoria to create some Blobbies and turned them into a club. All the damage that King Harold received were from blunt attack. The torturer must be enjoying that very much.


    First¡­ his ribs.


    "AAAAAAAAHHH!!"


    After I hit his ribs with the club, the sleeping gatekeeper woke up in pain and scream. But that''s not over yet. I just broke four of his ribs, but the king has all his rib broken. So, I hit him again in the chest.


    Celestine looked calm while seeing me torturing the gatekeeper. Fabio was¡­ shocked. He clenched his fists in anger. But that''s not over.


    I almost forgot. This guy has explosive device in his mouth. Let''s take it out first before he kills himself.


    After plucking the explosive device, I continued bashing him with the club.


    I might not have the best memory, but I remember pretty much the injuries that King Harold received. And I attacked this gatekeeper in the same spot.


    Skull, shoulder de, cor bone, both arms, all his fingers, both legs, and all his toes. After that I twisted them in a weird way that it should be impossible for a human to do that unless they have no bones.


    "This is what happened to my father?" Fabio asked.


    "Well¡­ this guy is dead after I broke his legs. Too much pain and he died of shock. Should be good for me to swap him with the king now. As for the king, he''s stronger than this guy. He''s still alive, but won''t be for long. Now, you two go to Prince Bernard''s mansion, and exin to Queen Carmen and Prince Bernard. Sonia, don''t forget to exin to Albert as well. I''ll be leaving now."


    Sonia has returned after telling Ka and Sophie that I needed their assistance to watch what I did. Is she interested in watching me bashing someone with a club?


    Anyway, I asked her to tell Albert what happen as I opened a portal to get Fabio and Celestine to Prince Bernard''s mansion.


    Now, I will be with Victoria. I''m disguising myself as ''Albertus'', while Victoria shapeshifted into the gatekeeper.


    Although the warehouse is heavily guarded, I can still sneak inside. I don''t need to hold back as I''m making trouble, so I just smashed the rooftop. Though I made the sound silent so no one noticed.


    We dropped to the floor where we are surrounded by many kinds of magic items.


    "Victoria, grab everything that you can and put them in one spot. We''ll take them to an empty indter. We will then select which one we should take and not dangerous. I''ll go get the king."


    Good thing that there''s no guard inside the warehouse. And from the look of it, it has been a few days since someone visited King Harold. That''s just makes it easier for me to swap him.


    Once I arrived at the cell he was imprisoned, I used Blobbykey to unlock the cell and asked him, "If you''re the real King Harold, blink twice. I know you''re conscious."


    Through much effort, King Harold blinked his eyes twice.


    "Good. I will save you, but you need the will to live if you want to survive. You got this far on your own, so I don''t think you are too weak to give up, right? I''ll heal youter."


    Then I used portal to get the gatekeeper''s corpse, and throw it to the floor. I carried King Harold without caring of the filth, and return to where Victoria is.


    The portal has caused some scenes as several expert level mages noticed. But they are not panicking yet and just calmly asked someone to open the door to the warehouse.


    "Victoria, you done?"


    "Yes."


    This time, I opened two portals. One to Prince Bernard''s mansion where Celestine is already waiting in a bedroom, and another to an empty ind. Victoria threw all the magic items into the empty ind, as I carefully handed King Harold to Fabio who is waiting.


    "Wait for a bit. I will save you for sure." I said to King Harold who is still trying hard to stay conscious.


    Noticing another weird magic is used again, twice this time, the guards outside can no longer stay calm and attacked the door with magic to open it.


    By the time they entered the warehouse, Victoria and I already exited through the hole in the rooftop that I made. I also carried a lot of magic items to make them think I''m just a thief.


    Now that I have left, I can just run on air and make them think I''m a wind mage.


    After running for a while and making sure that they can no longer sense me I used portal and transported to Prince Bernard''s mansion where Queen Carmen is crying in front of her husband.


    I quickly opened another portal to Cassau to get Ka and Sophie who are already prepared, and asked the other to leave for the surgery. Sonia said that Albert want toe, but I needed to do surgery so I told Sonia that I will get him after the surgery is over.


    "Can you save him?" Fabio asked.


    "No doctors in this time can, but I''m not from this time." I just said that and closed the door. leaving only me, Ka, Sophie, and Victoria to save King Harold. I also asked Spot to leave and wait.


    Thanks to being an Aura user, my hands move quickly. With Sophie''s assistance and Ka''s healing, I used surgery tools made of Victoria''s clone to fix all the broken bones and the inner injury that King Harold received.


    Even though I''m fast, it still takes more than twenty hours to finally finished with the surgery. I have to say that it was faster than I expected. Both Sophie and Ka who are already exhausted, are sleeping on the floor as I opened the door and inform the other.


    "The surgery was sessful. He will wake up in few hours."


    I''m also tired, so I carried the girls to a room prepared by Prince Bernard, and the three of us sleep together on the bed.


    This is the first difficult surgery that I did after returning to the past. I might encounter more once the war happens. Good thing I have taught some doctors to do it.


    After thinking that, I fell asleep. Twenty hours of surgery takes too much energy after all

 Chapter 332 - King Harold Awakes

    I woke up to see that Ka and Sophie already gone. They are having a meal prepared by Prince Bernard.


    As for King Harold¡­ he''s awake. But Queen Carmen next to him doesn''t notice that. I guess King Harold want to be alone. Now that he survived, he has many things to think of.


    I guess I should go.


    Oh, right. I''ll get Albert as well.


    As I connected a portal to Albert''s location, Albert entered the portal and told me to bring Lynn, her aide udia, and old man Henry.


    I get them all toe to my bedroom and all of us went to the dining room as I grabbed my breakfast.


    "Oh, Roy, you''re awake? And you brought the others as well." Fabio said as he noticed me walked to the dining room.


    Celestine, Prince Bernard and his wife are there as well, as Ka and Sophie have just finished their meal.


    Since the sooner we finished our business, the sooner I can go back to Cassau, I grabbed the dishes and bring them to where King Harold is waiting.


    "He''s awake. I''ll eat in his room so we can talk. And bring that porridge for him to eat." I said as Fabio grabbed the porridge for King Harold.


    We entered the room where King Harold is resting, and Queen Carmen was shocked to see that I''m bringing my meal inside the room.


    I get some Blobbies to transform into a chair and a table for me so I can hear the discussion while eating. Sophie and Ka also looked at King Harold''s condition to see if he''s getting better.


    "Don''t worry. He''s already awake. He probably just afraid to open his eyes for a while. Thinking that being saved was just a dream. King Harold, open your eyes. You must have heard the news that Queen Carmen, Prince Fabio, and Princess Luna died. They are all wrong. Queen Carmen and Prince Fabio is here in Prince Bernard''s house. As for Luna, she''s in a safe ce. By the way, your crush, udia, is here as well." I said.


    "What?!" King Harold who was faking his sleep, opened his eyes fully after hearing his family members who were supposed to be dead are still alive.


    "Good morning. I forgot to say that King Albert, King Henry, and Empress Lynn are all here. I''m your savior and doctor, Roy. Nice to meet you." I introduce myself while I''m at it.


    "¡­eating meal while introducing yourself to a king is not a proper ethic. Why can''t I move my body?" King Harold asked.


    "Obviously because you just had a surgery. Most of your bones were broken and I have fixed them. Though you have received healing as well, it''s best for you to take it slowly. I''ll let you have family time while I eat. The others will wait before we can have our discussion."


    It''s a tearful reunion of King Harold and his family. Some of them at least. He has been taken for a long time alone and tortured so badly until he couldn''t even move a finger. But his will is so strong that he''s still alive even after all that torture.


    The surgery went well, and Ka has healed him with healing magic. Even now, while I''m eating, Ka is casting a healing magic at him.


    Healing magic can''t heal his weak muscle after not moving for a long time. He needs to recover naturally.


    While he''s still in bed unable to move, Fabio, Queen Carmen, and Prince Bernard each telling him their own story of what happen after he was swapped.


    "We don''t know when you were swapped. We acted normally. But I can tell you what I did after I know that the current king is a fake." Fabio said.


    The first one to speak his story was Fabio. He told the king how Luna found out that the current king is a fake, and how they faked their death with the help of Toni.


    "So, it was thanks to Toni. They told me while I''m in the prison that Luna and you died. That''s when I thought it must be a fake. With you two who have special ability to see the future, you would realize that I was swapped. So, when I heard about the news that you died, I have to hold back my smile from appearing because I knew that you must have begun to act. Though I would have never thought that it would take this long for me to be rescued." King Harold said.


    "Sorry that it takes too long, father."


    "It''s fine. At least I''m still alive."


    Queen Carmen and Prince Bernard were confused about Fabio''s special power, and Fabio said he will exinter after everyone have taken their turn.


    "Right now, Luna is in a safe ce. It''s at Roy''s home. She is happy to made new friends there." Fabio said.


    "Oh, right. I forgot to call her as well."


    After saying that, I called Sonia to tell someone there that I''m bringing Luna here. Then after receiving a reply, I opened a portal and Luna is already in front of the portal.


    "Father!"


    Luna run to the bedside and looked at her father tearfully.


    "It''s fine. They will heal soon."


    Luna also hadn''t seen Queen Carmen and Prince Bernard for a long time and she hugged Queen Carmen only. As for Prince Bernard, I guess she doesn''t get along well with him. He was such a battle-crazed man before.


    After that, it was Queen Carmen''s turn. She told King Harold how she realized that he was swapped. During that time, I asked Celestine to cover Luna''s ears. She doesn''t need to know about what Queen Carmen is talking about yet. She can learn that in the future.


    "Hmm¡­ your turn was supposed to be once a month. And considering when Fabio faked his death, I guess it only took Fabio and Luna to find the truth that I was swapped in less than a week. I don''t know night and day during the time I was imprisoned, so I can''t tell how long I''ve been there. Anyway, it''s amazing that you have reached expert level. As expected of my queen." King Harold said.


    "You say that, but don''t you want to increase the number of your wife again? With udia over there?" Queen Carmen asked.


    "I was. But not anymore. At least until this damned cult is destroyed."


    So, he intended to woo udia again after everything is over? Well, not that it matters to me.


    Lastly, it was Prince Bernard who introduced King Harold to his wife. They were never married officially, but the people here already treated them as a husband and wife.


    "I''m a grandpa? That''s cool." King Harold said.


    With how many wives he has, he was surprised to get a grandchild? Does that mean Prince Bernard''s son is his first grandson?


    I know that the baby is a boy with my eyes. Though I haven''t informed Prince Bernard yet.


    "Anyway, what about the others?" King Harold asked after he finished talking with his family members here.


    "Can we start the discussion now? Though I think an introduction is necessary first. Well, I''m Roy. The man who saved you. You already know Old man Henry, Albert, Lynn, and udia, so I don''t need to introduce them. Then, the healer there is my lover, Ka. The one nursing you is another one of my lovers, Sophie. The curious ghost is Sonia. That Slime is Victoria. This serpent wrapping himself around my waist is Spot. And Celestine will introduce herself."


    I think it''s best for her to introduce herself with her status. It''s to see his reaction as well.


    "My name is Celestine. Expert level mage. Formerly, I was a cult member with high position. Though I betrayed them and joined Roy and the others here. My other status is I was the former princess of Consenza Empire, and also the older sister of current Empress Lynn." Celestine introduced herself.


    "¡­what exactly did I miss?"


    Not just King Harold, the other who don''t know that were shocked as well. Well, we never told that to the other since we were busy thinking of a way to rescue King Harold.


    "Before we discuss our next move, there are many things that we need to inform you about. From Roy, the cult, tournament, andstly, our next move. King Harold, are you prepared to hear them right now, or do you need to get some rest before we continue?" It was Albert who spoke.


    "I''ll listen right now. My mind is clear. We can continue." King Harold said.


    The first thing that Albert said is about Fabio''s power. Which he also has a simr power. And then he pointed at me while telling about my power and what Aura user is.


    "You can see through things!?"


    Of course the first thing in anyone''s mind is perverted thought. They are right. but I won''t tell them.


    "I can. I can tell that the gender of your grandchild is a boy. Congrattion in advance. He''s also quite healthy baby. If you need my help for the delivery process, you can contact me through the ghost. By the way, even Albert''s children were delivered by me personally. And I have more knowledge than ordinary doctors thanks to my memory from the future."


    Obviously, the first thing I need everyone to know is that I''m a doctor. Now that they know I''m a doctor, the thought that I''m a pervert because of this power should be diminished.


    After that, Albert, Old man, Lynn, and Fabio exined everything to King Harold.


    As for me, I went down to the dining room again to get second and third meal.. I''m still starving.

 Chapter 333 - Whats Our Next Move?

    When I returned back to King Harold''s room, the others have finished exining things.


    "Now that the four of us have gathered here. Let''s think of our next move. For now, the most important event is the battle tournament. Tatrama Kingdom, Consenza Empire, and Varadis Kingdom have all informed the citizen about the tournament, but other than Tatrama Kingdom, Consenza and Varadis would like to witness the tournament within Tatrama first before deciding the participants. As for Arturo¡­ we think that the fake king and the people behind him, the cult, didn''t tell anyone about the tournament on purpose so they can decide their own participants without telling the citizens. Most likely, all of them are expert level mages and rted to the cult. And during the tournament, the cult might do something. Thanks to Roy, my country is the most prepared to receive any kind of attack. I will send some people to Varadis and Consenza before the tournament begun. As for Arturo, other than this city, I don''t think there''s any need to send people in any other location." Albert exined what he will do before the tournament to prevent any more destruction by the cult.


    "A tournament, huh? Sigh¡­ if only I was careful, I would enjoy that tournament to the fullest without caring about any cult. I guess there won''t be anyone from my royal family participating." King Harold said.


    "You might be wrong. One of your children might be on the list just for show. The worst part is if they have joined the cult." I said.


    "Do you think that my children are stupid enough to join the Evil Cult?" King Harold asked.


    "Anything can happen. Even the one I want to pick for the throne turns out to be a member of the cult. You can''t be too careful even with your own child. Take it from someone who experienced it." It was old man Henry who gives King Harold an advice.


    "Hmm¡­ you''re right. I think my next move would be to persuade my royal family to join us. But if they are fighting for the throne, and find out the crown prince is still alive, the situation might get worse. Carmen, Fabio, Bernard, I will ask you three to support me with all your might." King Harold said to his family members here other than Luna who is still too young.


    "Understood, father. I''ll contact Toni in the castle to ask him if there are anyone of my siblings whom we can persuade. He risked his life staying in the castle so we can get some information directly. As his brother, I can''t just sit still." Fabio said to which Bernard nodded.


    "Should I infiltrate the cult? I''m an expert level mage as well, so I might have a chance to participate in the tournament." Queen Carmen asked with Luna in her embrace.


    "No. It was too dangerous. The cult is happy when they received new members, but if they are too strong, they will be put under surveince instead. Take it from a former cult member." It was Celestine who spoke.


    "You guys have it good. Arturo has the queen as expert level mage. Varadis has Princess Julia who will participate. Tatrama? Roy. As for me, I don''t have any expert level mage I can trust." Lynn said.


    "Did you forget your own sister? She can join with you since for Tatrama, we will send college students for the tournament. Though most of them are people who have been trained by Roy who has future knowledge. And the person himself will participate as well." Albert said.


    "Wait, I''m still participating? The selection should be over, right? I said it before that I don''t want to participate!" I protested.


    "Okay. Anyway, Celestine can join Varadis if she wants to." Albert said.


    He said okay, but I doubt that''s what he really means. I hate him. But if I''m not in the kingdom tournament, I doubt the people will like it if my name is on the list. They willin, and Albert as the king doesn''t have any choice but to remove my name. I guess it''s fine then.


    "I''ll join. And it will be some time until the tournament begun, so we can find good candidates and nurture them. Maybe we can have more expert level mage before the tournament." Celestine said.


    With this, she will take part in the tournament, not as a participant from Tatrama, but the Empire instead. Not that I mind it. She was originally from the Empire after all.


    "This tournament was made so all mages have the desire to get stronger and to prove the world that they are the strongest. It''s also to make them prepared for the war against the cult. So, it''s best to announce it after the tournament in Tatrama is over. The preparation should have beenpleted and the necessary tools were already built. You can see the battle and spread it to your own country then. If we give this tool to the fake king of Arturo Kingdom, they will have no choice but to announce it. After that, we will give more or less six months of time for preparation until the battle between countries. But if you already have candidates, you should tell them to improve their strength first." Albert told Lynn and old man Henry. As for King Harold, he can''t do anything about the tournament since it''s in the hand of the fake king.


    The tools he said is something to record the battle, and broadcast it to another tool. That''s something from Victoria''s world called Television to watch things recorded and sent from a camera. They are amazing invention thanks to the genius Marie.


    "Wait, you have been talking about the tournament. What about retrieving the kingdom back to the real king? The real king is here, you know?" I asked.


    "Let''s not do that yet. Our power is too weak. Although the qualities of our mages are better thanks to your knowledge of the future, just the expert level mages that they have is too much for us to handle. What do you think, Hal?"


    Albert asked Hal, which is King Harold''s nickname. The four leaders getting along nicely and don''t need to call each other with honorifics. I also don''t want to, but I guess I''ll use honorifics for now. Somehow, calling them king, queen, prince, or princess making it easier for me to remember their names.


    "I agree. It''s too dangerous if we make our move too soon. But it''s good to leave it be as well. if a whole kingdom is taken over by the cult, once the war begins, the other kingdoms will know from where they will attack. From Arturo. That way, you can concentrate your power to the border of this kingdom." King Harold said.


    I guess he''s right. If Arturo Kingdom has been retrieved back from the fake king, we won''t know where the cult will appear when the war happens.


    It''s so annoying when the cult keeps moving their base. And I haven''t found where they might be located even though I have travelled far.


    "Then, the mission is over, right? I can go home now?"


    "What mission?" King Harold asked me.


    "Saving you, and getting you four together." I said.


    "Yes. You did a great job. But stay here first so we can go home. If you''re not here, we will be stuck here." Albert said.


    I hope they won''t hold a discussion too many times in the future after this.


    "Then, our next n is to prepare for the tournament. Which county should we hold this tournament?" Albert asked.


    "Not my country. Although many cult members have been killed thanks to Roy, there might be some still hiding. And not Arturo either obviously. And since you''re the one who suggested it, the people will think that you have prepared something for this tournament and have the advantage if you are the host. Our best choice is at the Consenza Empire." Old man Henry suggested to which everyone agreed.


    "If everyone agrees, then I will be the first host of the tournament. As for the venue¡­ udia! Think of something!" Lynn ordered udia for ideas where thepetition will be held.


    "Sigh¡­ we need a good location and to build the arena that can hold a lot of audiences from all over the continent. But I have no idea how a good Arena should be built." udia said.


    "Victoria will help you with that. With her knowledge of her previous world, she will build a good arena. I''ll lend her to you since I can summon her any time I want."


    Victoria agree to help udia to build the arena, and she jumped from my shoulder to hers. I can rest easy about the arena. And if Celestine goes there, she can help build it and the arena will be done quickly.


    "I guess that''s settled. If there are any issue, let''s contact each other with Sonia. Sorry, Sonia, but you will be busier and busier from now on." Albert said.


    "No worries. I have been stuck in one ce for a thousand years. Doing some works is much more fun." Sonia said.


    After talking a bit more, Albert and the others are ready to return. Finally, I can go home for real this time.. At least for a month, I hope I don''t need to go anywhere other than to the campus for teaching.

 Chapter 334 - The Tournament Participants From Cassau Has Been Decided

    "Daniel, I''m finally home!" I shouted as soon as I returned back to my home in Cassau after so long. Although I have returned once because I met Fabio, that doesn''t count since my mission is not over.


    "Roy! Ah! Hmph!" Daniel looked away.


    He was about to run and hug me, but then he suddenly realized what he was doing and looked away and started sulking. That''s so damn cute! But I''m still lonely.


    "Come on, Daniel. I''m home for real now. And I won''t go for too long anymore anytime soon." I said.


    "You can''t! You have to leave to save the world! But I still don''t like it when you leave for too long!" Daniel said.


    No amount of healing magic that Ka casted on me can heal my heart this much. I''m so blessed!


    "Then next time I leave, I will go home as much as possible, okay?" I said.


    "¡­promise?"


    "I promise."


    I said as I linked my pinky with Daniel''s. My fatigue from the mission has disappear. Being home is the best after all.


    And not just Daniel, I can now sleep with my girlfriends again at night! Though I will prioritize being with Daniel for a while.


    My rtionship with Daniel started as a pity. Then I grew to be attached to his innocence. Other then my girlfriends, he''s my source of healing. Though I wish he doesn''t have to grow up. But that''s impossible.


    "Lana too! Pinky promise with Lana too!"


    After Daniel, there''s another smaller child who is just three years old. She''s Lana. Albert''s daughter that he kept secret from the world because we''re afraid of the cult. Though in the end, Albert did a good job that Lana doesn''t need to be kept as a secret anymore. But he still thinks that it''s a good decision for her to stay as she is, so we still kept the fact that she''s a princess as secret.


    Our kingdom has grown strong enough to protect a little girl from the cult. But we still kept her here just in case since Albert said that there have been multiple cases of intruder attempting to kidnap n. They are not rted to the cult. In fact, they are ordered by someone in the nobility whose house has been destroyed because Albert found evidences of their crimes. They tried to get their revenge by kidnaping n, but they failed. And those former nobles are facing death sentences.


    That''s what Sonia told me. Once a week or so, Sonia would appear and give me reports even though I don''t need them. That''s why I still know the recent news even while I''m in a mission.


    "Sure. Here." I offered Lana my pinky, and she took it with her pinky as well.


    "Pinky promise! If you break the promise, all hell break loose" Lana said with a smile on her face.


    ¡­that''s scary! Who the hell taught her that words!? I look around to see the others'' reaction, but they are all smiling after hearing that. Does it mean everyone is guilty?


    After our discussion in Prince Bernard''s mansion, we each return to our own home. But this time, I didn''t bring Luna with me. At least for now, Prince Bernard''s home is safe. Fabio, Prince Bernard, and King Harold are all there. And there''s also an expert level mage, Queen Carmen, staying behind.


    They said that they will try to talk to King Harold''s other children and wives and persuade them to fight the fake king. They will fight during the Battle Tournament between the four countries. Which should be when the defense in the capital is at its weakest. While other countries will secretly help them.


    And as for me, my job will be to send the army with portals. And I don''t need to travel much anymore since I have marked each country with Blobbies. Though there are still some unexplored location for me, I don''t think I will go there anytime soon.


    Celestine went with her sister to the Empire. She will help teaching the mages over there about magic control.


    As for Varadis, I have taught some to Princess Julia. But Albert will still send several agents to each country to cooperate with and teach them magic control. Of course those agents were the ones who participated in the training camp.


    Now, I can rest easy. Maybe I will go to campus to see whoever will be participating and representing the college I work at. Though I believe Ka and Jewel would pass easily. As for Sara, I don''t know much about other students. But If there are many other agents like her who attend the same college, she might have some difficulties.


    "Ka, how do you decide the participant for the tournament?" I asked Ka.


    "Just a normal battle. Though I pass easily because they need at least one healer. Other than me, there are Jewel, Sara, another agent from the training camp, and a rich man''s kid." Ka said.


    "It''s already over? And a rich man''s kid? I get how you four passed. I taught you all by myself. At least the three of you. I don''t know about the other agent. But what''s with the rich man''s kid?"


    "He entered thanks to rmendation of the professors like me. The tournament needed five mages from each college. We decide three by a tournament. The top three will be the representative. It''s already difficult for the others to ept when Sara and Jewel entered the final. Both of them are first-year student, so the upperssmen disagree. Though the third ce is an agent who participated in the training camp. And he''s a third-year student." Ka exined.


    "What about you though? Any healer can do, right?" I asked.


    "The dean said that to make sure we have more people from our n, and he said that he still needs to understand the rule and to be careful in case all of us will fight together at once. So, he rmended me who is excellent earth mage, and a good healer as well. though they will still send some other healers than me, but they won''t be on the list of the participants." Ka exined why she got rmended.


    "And the rich man''s kid? I doubt Dean would ept any bribe." I said.


    "The dean doesn''t ept any bribes. But because he insisted on rmending me, he let other professors decide who''s the other rmendation will be. And as you might have guessed, several professors got bribed and let the rich man''s kid participate. The dean himself said that it was fine. Rather, it will be too suspicious if all the people we send is too strong. Other colleges will think that we have prepared this for a long time, and proposed the idea of the tournament because of it and let some students dy their graduation. Though he can easily exin that all of us are still students, he said that it''s a pain to exin to those who doesn''t want to understand." Ka said.


    I understand. I understand that feeling clearly, Dean. It''s annoying when other people don''t want to listen to you. Especially when you said the truth.


    "But with how the tournament will be, I doubt this rich man''s kid will survive. The most annoying part is that he keeps annoying us three; Jewel, Sara, and me, just because his daddy is rich. We agreed to let him fight first so he knows how weak he is." Ka said.


    "Is he that weak?" I asked.


    "He only cultivates his magic and never once go fight a monster. He''s an advanced level mage, but his magic is too weak." Ka said.


    "If you are fine with that arrangement, then that''s fine. Is there anything else I need to know?"


    "The tournament will be held in Melk. We''re going home for the tournament." Ka said.


    "Melk? Why?"


    "Because of the stampede. Albert said that it''s to show everyone that we can recover. Though the damage in that city is not as big as the other cities three years ago, it was still one of the targets. The people will see how strong we are by keep standing up even after we fall. That''s what Albert said." Ka said.


    I guess that''s good. I also don''t need to travel there since I already marked that ce.


    "Well, congrattion on being selected. I''ll go take a nap." I said.


    "No, you just sleep for a long time after the surgery. You don''t need any more sleep." Ka said.


    "Then I will y with Daniel. It has been a long time since I can spend time with Daniel."


    "No. It''s Monday today, and you have ss to teach. You have been away for too long that the other professor think that the dean is ying favorite."


    "But, Mooom!"


    "I''m not your mother. I''m your girlfriend. At least you need to be present today. Sara is having trouble with having too many students." Ka said.


    "What? Isn''t my ss supposed to be the emptiest ss?"


    "Sara shows her air magic and entered the final before losing to Jewel. Of course that makes other students interested in air magic. She said that there are even many who are not air mages who attend the ss. It was too much for her alone to bear. Go there and save her."


    "Sigh¡­ I guess I have no choice then. Sorry, Daniel. I will y with youter." I said, but the one who replies is not Daniel. Instead, it was Lana.


    "You broke your promise! Now, all hell break loose!" Lana said with eerie voice.


    "Stop that! That''s scary! Alright,e on out now whoever taught her those words! I won''t get angry, I promise!"

 Chapter 335 - Back To Teaching

    Having no other choice, I go to the campus to teach air element. It''s a good thing that I need only to teach for a few hours every week.


    As for medical knowledge, I actually hoped that I get more time to teach the doctors about it. But once a week, with everyone attending truly want to learn and not having someone with troublesome pride that won''t allow someone younger to teach them, it was fun.


    Air element though, there is only one student. Sara. Though sometimes Dean would attend as well. But now, thanks to Sara getting a spot in the tournament, the poprity of air element in the campus risen. And Sara has been teaching them as my assistant when I went on a mission. That''s what Ka said.


    Now I have returned, I will be the one teaching them. Though I don''t know how much she has taught them, so I need to have a discussion with her first before ss.


    What I didn''t expect was that there are more than fifty students already in my ss even before it started. Sara was among them. But¡­ most of them are boys. Should I say as expected?


    Well, Ka, Jewel, and probably Sophie as well, they are all popr. But they have me, so the boys don''t have a chance at all. as for Sara, I think she''s still single. And with how strong she was, many boys approached her.


    I bet only half of the ss has air element. Or even less. I''m prepared to be disappointed.


    I entered the ss and act like a teacher should be.


    "Good morning, ss! I''m sorry that I have been gone for a while because of some urgent business. But thanks to Sara, she substituted me and should have taught you well. In case you don''t know me, I''m Roy. For most of you, we meet for the first time today." I said as gently as possible.


    "Leave! We want Sara to teach us!"


    "Yes! Leave!"


    "This is not your ce!"


    It started with one boy shouting. He was sitting next to Sara.


    After he shouted, the other boys shouted as well. Let''s see¡­ about ten of them?


    "First, I''m her teacher who taught her air magic. I might not be there during the selection battle, but if you saw her using air magic, it was thanks to me teaching her. Which mean if you are here to learn mora bout air magic, this is your ce. But if you are not here to learn, then leave. You''re bothering those who wanted to learn." I said strictly.


    "Hah! What are you going to do then!?"


    The first boy who shouted asked, challenging me.


    ¡­I''m too tired to care about little fight after my mission. Let''s just put those who shouted to sleep.


    "Go to sleep." I said as I activated air magic to spread sleeping gases. But I control the spread of the gas so it will only go to the boys who were shouting before.


    One by one, the ten annoying boys fall to the ground and fainted. The tenth boy realized that it was because of my magic, but it was toote when he reacted.


    "Now, to those who are still conscious, I just use air magic to put all these boys to sleep. This is something that Sara can''t use that well. She can use it, but can''t control it as good as I just did. Now, if you are not here to learn, leave my ss. Take the sleeping students with you as well. Just know that I''m the strongest man here." I said imposingly.


    Seeing what happened, the students who were rxing and although they didn''t say it out loud like the other, still made fun of me, shocked in fear.


    Realizing that fighting me is useless, they tried to leave the ss.


    "Stop. Bring these fainted students with you. They will wake up after a few hours."


    The students returned, taking the fainted boys with them, and leave me ss.


    Originally, there were fifty of them. Now, forty-six of them leave the ss, leaving only four students including Sara.


    "Sara, what have you taught while I leave?" I asked Sara.


    "Nothing. None of those people are air mages. As for these three, this is their first day in this ss." Sara said.


    "None of them air mages? Then why were they here?"


    "Because of the selection battle. When it started, some noticed me doing well in the battle. Then, they saw me in this ss alone. When I asked them if they want to learn air magic, they said that none of them are air mages. So, I kept ignoring them. Now that I was selected for the tournament, they became even more persistent. But thanks to you, they are leaving." Sara exined.


    ¡­why are the men in this world are so annoying? Is it the same in Victoria''s world? Are most men like this when they see women?


    Sigh¡­ I just hope they won''t cause trouble to us anymore.


    As for the other three students, I can see their reaction when I put the bad students to sleep. They are excited and their eyes are sparkling. Two of them are girls, and one is a boy. Let''s ask them just in case.


    "So, you three are still here. What do you wish to learn?"


    "I want to learn that Air Cannon like Sara did!" one girl said.


    "Me too!" The other girl next to her said.


    "I want that too! And the thing that made those boys asleep!" The boy said.


    "Why do you want to put people to sleep? If you have the same impure motives as the boys just before, I won''t teach you anything." I said.


    "No, it''s not that! My other elements are too weak for me to improve. Even other students can do better when we have the same level. So, I thought I will have a chance in bing stronger with air magic."


    "Okay. But just in case you will do something bad with what I will teach you, sleeping gas is not the worst I can give you. You got that!" I said imposingly again. This time, I slightly used Aura so I seem to be more overbearing than before. This is a good way to intimidate people.


    The boy shivering in fear, but his eyes still have determination.


    "Understood! If I do something bad in the future, then kill me!"


    This boy has determination. Maybe I will ask him why he go so far to get stronger. Who knows if he can be our reliable ally in the future?


    "Well, let''s start the lesson then. I can continue from where we werest time, but this is the first ss for the three of you. You''re lucky that air element ss is not popr. Since most of you are new, I will teach from the start again. Sara, if you don''t want to listen, you can go to other ss." I said.


    "I''ll stay here." Sara said.


    "If that''s what you want."


    Then, I started the ss with an introduction to air element.


    It has been a while since I teach, so I hope I didn''t get rusty.


    ¡­well, I never really had any other students other than Sara, so this is actually my first time teaching in ss.


    Dean didn''te. He usually would attend my ss from time to time. I guess he''s busy since the tournament is getting closer. Probably helping at the site of the tournament, Melk. Cassau is closer to Melk than any other colleges in this kingdom after all.


    I also didn''t see him in his office. If he''s still there at the time I teach the doctors about medical knowledge from the future, I will bring him back with portal.


    My lecture went well. The other three students listened properly to my lesson. And when there''s something they don''t understand, they asked questions. Good thing those questions are something that I can answer.


    "Alright. ss is over. It has just been one hour. Next is practical training. Hmm¡­ I''ll go ask for permission to use the Arena. It''s empty today."


    Since I don''t want to use portal, I''ll just have some practice in the Arena.


    The one I need to ask for permission is Wendy. She was surprised to see that I have returned. And I just sigh as I answered that I just returned and have to teach already.


    Wendy easily gives me permission until my ss is over


    I went to the Arena where Sara and the others already waiting. I asked Sara to not bring out her gun because I don''t want the others to think I''m ying favorite. Though I might give them some guns I made by myself.


    The first thing I taught them is to shoot an object. I grabbed several rubber balls for training. In case it hit other people, it won''t hurt as much.


    The result was quite surprising. The two girls'' progress was average. Probably just like me during the first time practicing it. As for the boy, he can already shoot in a straight line. He just needs to improve his uracy.


    I praised them all for getting that far and told them to practice more even outside my ss. Should I say the ss went well?

 Chapter 336 - Return To Daily Life

    After finally finished my first day of teaching after taking a long break, I returned home and y with Daniel, Lana, and other kids from the orphan. I told the orphans that Celestine will be away for a little longer, so in case they need anything, they can ask Veronica.


    Some kids turn sad hearing that, but they love Veronica all the same and said that they will patiently wait until Celestine returns. So heartwarming¡­


    At least the good thing today is that there is no hell broke loose. I''m sorry that I broke my promise, but I have them y with me as much as possible after I finished my ss. We yed until the kids fall asleep.


    After they both fall asleep, I went to Sam to ask her if there''s anything important that I need to do. But it seems like she''s doing really well and don''t need me to do anything yet. And she asked if she can get more share since she became busier.


    I thought that since I''m already rich, I agreed. Now, I only received ten percent, but that''s fine. She has many people working for her now and she needed more money than me.


    And while I''m at it, I went to the empty ind where I put all the stolen magic tools from Arturo, and bring them all to Jeremy, to have him appraise them and get those items put to good use.


    I gave some defensive tools to those who doesn''t have defensive equipment, and some magic tools for improving a certain element to those who have that element. Now we have gotten stronger. Though I told them to not use them in the tournament.


    After that, Sonia appears and told me to bring Shirley and Ang back here for dinner. She said that they want to inform me about the participants from the capital. Though I don''t really need to hear them. After all, I know that these two should be able to get selected. And it''s not like I have to get report of everything.


    ¡­I guess that''s the fate of being a n leader. I just told those who qualified good luck.


    There''s one more thing. Hannah doesn''t seem to like ying with the kids as much as before. Now, she is studying about everything that will be taught at introductory school. She seems impatient to get her magic.


    But that''s good. So, when she awakens her magic in the future, she doesn''t need to attend sses. She just needs to take the exams and graduate. Though whether she wants to go to college after that or not is up to her.


    It''s time for dinner, and we have a huge feast for celebrating my return. Other than Shirley and Ang, Ian and Ruby returned as well. I also told Shelia that she can bring several Werewolves to feast.


    Victoria is busy chatting with the girls about everything we experienced during the mission. And as for Spot, he seems to be popr among the children. They love ying with him, and Spot love to y as well. Though he''s still dangerous.


    "So, how is the capital? You two get qualified, right?" I asked Shirley and Ang.


    "Easily!" Ang said.


    "Sigh¡­"


    Instead of answering confidently like Ang, Shirley sighed.


    "What''s wrong, Shirley?" I asked.


    "Well, just like Ka, I got qualified thanks to rmendation. I really wanted to kick those noble bastards in their asses, but I don''t have the chance to. Our way to get qualified is simr to here in Cassau. Three from battle, and two rmendations. I got one rmendation, while Ang easily beat everyone and be the strongest. But I really want to fight those annoying nobles!" Shirley said.


    "Since there are two rmendations, don''t tell me that the other one is for another rich kid?" I asked.


    "Well, he is rich and a noble as well. But he''s unlike the other kids from nobility, and his strength is real deal. He probable able to fight evenly against an agent who participated in the training camp. He''s unlike the guy from here." Shirley said.


    So, it''s just the professors in Cassau who got bribed. That noble kid from the capital is truly talented. I''m curious about his strength. If he trained like the agents, he could be a lot stronger than them. I wonder if he''s famous in my past life? Though I doubt I will remember even if I heard his name.


    "Ka! I won''t hold back! Let''s go all out during the tournament!" Ang said.


    "Actually, you need to hold back so you don''t kill anyone. Killing others mean we will be disqualified." Ka said.


    "In any case, let''s have a good fight!" Ang said.


    The reason for no killing rule is for the participants to consciously holding back. That is also a way to learn magic control. We wanted everyone to learn magic control through practice.


    There might be some people who dissatisfied because of such rule. And when they lose, they will im that it was because of an unfair rule. That''s just stupid.


    If they don''t like the rule, don''t participate. It''s that simple.


    The rule should obviously have been told to everyone already. Those whoined are just idiots.


    Now, the tournament is getting closer. I like how there are many people who have be interested in getting stronger. Like the three new students of my air ss elements. But there''s one problem for me as the one who proposed the idea.


    ¡­just watching them fight is boring. At least, for me it is.


    I hope I won''t be forced to watch all the fights.


    "Roy, I want to check on my kid who is staying near here. I will return tomorrow." Spot said after we finished our feast.


    "Sure. You don''t have to tell me when you want to return. Just return back here anytime you want. This is also your house now. And if I need to go somewhere for another mission, I will call you. Though I don''t know if Sonia can speak underwater." I said.


    "Then I might take a leave for a while. Just call me if you need anything. Though I will probably return soon because the foods are delicious." Spot said before he flew through the open window to the sea.


    With him and his children protecting the ocean, we are safe if there are any cult members who travel through the sea route. And not just cult members, pirates as well.


    After that, my daily life returns back to normal.


    Teaching air elements on Monday, teaching medical knowledge in Saturday, and went diving once in a while.


    Jeremy also appraised the magic items I brought when he''s not working. The one I already gave the others are somemon magic items which he easily appraised. And most of the items he appraised are no longer working and have no magic in them anymore. What a shame.


    When I''m free from teaching, diving, or ying with the kids, I would return to the Mysterious Forest to learn about the gases produced by the trees. Since the leaves not working, I tried the bark of the trees.


    Victoria refused when I ask her to be tested, but she finally agreed when I said that I only need to test one type and she''s free to decide which one she wanted. Obviously, it''s the white calming one.


    The result? The bark really is the one producing the gases. But after a few days, the bark no longer producing the gases. Which mean they will only produce the gas for a long time when they are still part of the trees. If I take them away, they are still working, but not for long.


    It was fine when I tested the calming effect on Victoria. When the others hear about it, they wanted to test the calming effect as well, so I tried them on everyone. Seems like the weaker the magic level we have, the stronger they affected us. I learned that when Veronica tested its effect.


    Since everyone but me has tried it, it''s time for me to test it.


    I know the effect is not dangerous, so I just tried the calming effect in my bedroom.


    Ahh¡­ it feels good¡­ so calm¡­ I wish everyday is like this¡­


    This feels so nice¡­ I want to stay like this forever¡­


    "Roy! Wake up!"


    "Huh? What''s wrong? Is there any problem?"


    I look around to see that everyone is surrounding me around the bed. Is there any emergency?


    "You''re the problem! Do you know you have been staying on bed for a whole day? Twenty-four hours!" Ka shouted in anger. No, it''s more like worry.


    "Twenty-four hours!? So, this calming effect is dangerous as well." I said.


    "It is dangerous! Even when we tickle you or hit your cheek, you never move at all! We even called Sara to help you using her air magic, but you haven''t taught her about how to cure you from the effect of those barks!" Ka exined.


    ¡­this is not a calming gas. It''s a sloth gas. Making the people who smell it toozy to do anything by giving them the hallucination that everything is fine and calm.


    And it''s also my fault as well. When the others smelled it, I was there to cure them. But no one can cure me and it takes twenty-four hours until the effect wears off.


    I will teach Sara how to use this magic so next time, she can cure me. That mean she needs to be present the next time I do my research of these gases. I don''t want everyone to worry about me anymore.


    Though my main concern now is that I''m starving.. I''ll think about it more after I fill my stomach.

 Chapter 337 - No Help From Albert This Time

    "You want me to see your students?"


    It''s afternoon of my free day, and Daniel and the others are ying together so I don''t need to y with them. That''s why I choose today to meet Albert and request him to meet my new students.


    "Yes. I want to see if they can be trusted." I said.


    "Sigh¡­ Roy, I know that my lie detection is useful, but you can''t always depend on me whenever you meet someone new. If it''s like before with Fabio or Julia or even Spot, it was fine. But they are your students. You need to decide for yourself if they can be trusted or not. If you continue depending on me, I doubt you will be able to trust anyone else in your life other than those you already know." Albert advised.


    He''s not wrong, but it''s a pain to do that myself. I just want it to be done quickly. That''s why I asked Albert to see if they can be trusted.


    It has been a few times I taught those new students. At first, like usual, it was every Monday. But they asked to have another ss, so I scheduled it for Tuesday. Which mean I have to teach them twice every week.


    I have gotten Daniel and Lana''s permission for that so no hell will break loose this time.


    The three new students are¡­ now that I think about it, I never asked for their names. Well, that doesn''t matter.


    "Don''t tell me that you hadn''t even asked for their name yet?" Albert asked.


    "How did you know?"


    "I have known you for a while and that''s something I expected of you. Just because you are terrible in memorizing name, doesn''t mean you can just ignore the name of your students. Especially since you will see them for a long time. You''re such a pain. Anyway, I won''t do it." Albert said.


    "Then I guess I don''t need to trust them anyway. I just need to teach them like usual." I said.


    "¡­you give up so easily. What if they became powerful in the future?" Albert asked.


    "Then they will be powerful enough for you to notice and you will see them if they will join us destroying the cult or not. I''ll take my leave now."


    Since I have decided to not trust my students with the cult matter, I returned home.


    I''ll just teach them normally about air magic, without telling them anything more than necessary.


    Hmm¡­ now that I think about it, Albert is right. Ever since I met him, each time I met someone whom I think will be a reliable ally to us, I would ask him to meet them. And I almost never decide for myself if they can be trusted or not any longer.


    Well, Albert is useful after all.


    And I can''t really trust anyone so easily anymore. Though I just tantly told Ang and Ka about returning from the future so easily in the past. But not anymore.


    Especially since old man Henry''s own son almost betrayed his kingdom. Who would have thought that someone old man wanted to appoint to be the next king belong to the cult?


    I guess I will continue relying on Albert from now on.


    Few dayster, it''s time for my ss again.


    I teach my students like usual. And we spend most of my lesson practicing outside.


    Since there hasn''t been any other students, I just said that my ss will be outdoor all the time, so they don''t have to go to the campus.


    Now that the girls have been able to shoot their projectiles in a straight line, but their aim is still off. As for the boy, he''s doing well. Although his range is low, he can hit the mark within twenty meters. Beyond that, he would either miss or hit the mark, but the power is too weak.


    That''s why I told him to focus on that twenty meters range. To improve his power and uracy, and not be hasty and attack a target from beyond that range. Making sure that he would always hit the target within that range. That should be enough to defeat enemies.


    He said that he started to work as a hunter, and able to defeat low-rank monsters on his own.


    Since everyone also has made progress, I taught them about other things. Like making fire bigger with air magic.


    The two girls seem to be fire mages both. I think fire element is the mostmon element to be awakened. That''s why there are more fire mages than mage of other elements.


    These two are not that talented in using Air Cannon. Although they have improved, they still think that wasn''t enough. So, when I taught them that they can make fire bigger, they became overjoyed. Thinking that they are not useless anymore.


    So¡­ the reason these three finally joined my ss is because they thought that they were useless in other sses. I guess that''s to be expected.


    After ss is over, I was told to go to the guild and meet the guild master. I guess it''s time to return and be the n leader again.


    When I was away, the guild still asked the n for a job that is too difficult for other hunters to do. And the n also received jobs from the nobles in the area as well. Must be Albert''s influence.


    Probably when I was away, Albert doing a major cleanup of the bad nobles. And somehow, he advertised our n saying that his sister is in the n. So, when the nobles needed something, they asked for our n''s help. And since they know that Shirley is with us, they don''t cause trouble.


    But now I have returned, I''m the one who have to take the job. What a pain. Seems like in the end, all hell will break loose.


    "So, why am I here?'' I asked the guild master.


    "I have a job for your n." He said.


    "What job?"


    "Cleaning up monsters."


    "Huh? That should be something that other hunters would agree to do. Why ask my n to do it?" I asked.


    "¡­because of the tournament. The news has been spread that the tournament will begin next month, so most of the hunters who are interested in watching went over there. They don''t even mind if they have to camp outside the town for a month when I told them that it will be too crowded. If you look at the guild, you can see that it''s almost empty. They are all too excited to watch the tournament. That''s why wecked manpower and have to request your n to do it. Please take this job! We will pay more than the normal fee!" The guild master pleaded.


    Next month¡­ I can go over there easily. That''s why I never asked when the tournament will be. Ka and the others also haven''t gone yet. Maybe they will leave soon.


    I should ask Dean if he has prepared a lodging for the participants. Maybe he has? My guess will be the Wendy''s hotel back during the stampede. That should be where Ka and the others will stay.


    About the quest¡­ I think I''ll ept it.


    "Fine, we''ll take the quest. Where should we clean up the monsters?" I asked.


    "Really!? Thank you! We need you to clean up the monsters on the road to Melk. There will possibly many people who are still want to go there. Though if you clean up other areas as well, that will be perfect." The guild master said.


    "Understood. I''ll take my leave now."


    After returning to our base, I told the others that they don''t need to take the quest.


    "I''ll use this chance to let Victoria and Shelia to grab some experience for me to improve my summoning level. Ka, when will you leave to Melk?" I asked Ka.


    "In a few days. The rich man''s son said we just need to take a carriage a few days before the tournament, but I think it''s best for us to leave on foot. The four of us will leave together, but that rich man''s son will leave alone. Although the one being tested is our individual strength, it''s still a good idea for us to get to know each other. Though we already know each other." Ka said.


    "I guess Sara will tell me about her leave tomorrow. Since Melk will be crowded, I think Albert will ask me to get another leave from teaching again. And since both Sara and I will leave, I need to tell the other students to do self-study then."


    Then, I summoned Shelia and told her and Victoria to subjugate as many monsters as possible without causing any trouble. I will also help whenever I feel bored.


    Those who aren''t participating can still go there with my portalter. Since Wendy is here as well, I asked if the ce the participants will stay is her hotel from before, and I was right. She also said that the rooms we used from before are not for rent, so I can go to my room right away with portal.


    I''ll go there before the tournament. Today, I will defeat monsters until it''s time to y with Daniel again.


    Since not all hunters go to Melk, we still receive some help from other hunters. So, we decided to divide the location where we will defeat monsters so we won''t interfere with each other.


    This quest doesn''t have time limit and we can report to the guild when we think that the numbers of monster appearing is low.


    It''s an easy job for Victoria and Shelia to do.. I hope I can get to advanced level in my summoning before the tournament between kingdoms.

 Chapter 338 - Shirleys Group

    This is what happen during the time Roy taking the quest to clean up the monsters within Cassau.


    In the capital, Ang and Shirley both are preparing to leave for Melk. They didn''t ask Roy to transport them with portals because just like Ka, Shirley thought that it''s best to travel together to get to know each other better.


    "Princess, why do we have to travel on our own instead of taking a carriage together?" One of the members from the capital asked. He''s a son of a noble, but not a bad one. His name is Frederick.


    "No need to call me princess. Just call me Shirley." Shirley said.


    "I can''t do that. No matter what, you''re still the princess." Frederick replied.


    "Sigh¡­ whatever. We have various reasons. First, it''s to get to know each other better. The main reason why the tournament started is because of the cult. We need to get everyone to be stronger. And what would make them interested in growing stronger other than the title of the strongest? It seems simple, but just because of that simple title, we have everyone interested in participating. You''ve seen what happened during the selection for the participants, right? Not just those nobles, but alsomoner won''t give up. We even managed to find some diamonds in the rough." Shirley said.


    "You''re right, your highness. Thanks to the tournament, everyone is more determined to grow stronger. There are even some people who regretted that they didn''t go to college because of it. I believe next year entrance exam will be filled by so many people interested in winning the championship." Frederick said.


    "That''s right. The stronger we are, the more chance we have in defeating the cult. And it''s not just individual strength, but also teamwork and cooperation as well. That''s why this journey is important. And by showing out strength and weakness with each other, we can cover our weakness and improve our strength just through discussion. You can see if the other has some kind of weaknesses, and ask the other if they can see yours during our journey. By the time we arrived at Melk, we would all be getting much stronger than before leaving." Shirley exined.


    "As expected of your highness! Now I understand why this is important!" Frederick praised Shirley for her to think of travelling as a way of training.


    "It''s not that awesome. I can think of this because I met a certain man who taught me many things. And he also taught many other people as well. I believe there are other from different teams who were taught by him." Shirley said.


    "A certain man? So it''s not Ang? I thought you get stronger because you were always with her." Frederick asked.


    "You are correct to think that I''m getting stronger thanks to Ang. But our strengths are mostly thanks to that man. Although Ang is a freak with her magic and battle sense. Sigh¡­" Shirley sighed because she took care of Ang ever since they attend college together. Ang''s intellect in other things than battle and magic is truly something else.


    She then looked at Ang who is happily chatting with the other two members. One is a man, and the other is a woman. Those two are both mages who were in the training camp. That''s why Ang is close to them.


    Not just those two, there are many other agents in different colleges who got selected to representing their college. Some were in the training camp, and some were not, but they got taught a lesson by those who attended the training camp.


    Frederick also looked at the three who are happily chatting and asked another question.


    "It seems that other than me, everyone else is already know each other. Am I right?"


    "You''re right."


    Shirley didn''t exin how they met, and Frederick understand that. Among the people there, Frederick is someone that Shirley trust the least.


    One reason why the journey is important is to get to know Frederick better. To see if he can be trusted or not.


    During Roy''s mission, Albert has examined many people in the nobility. One of them is Frederick''s father.


    Albert has told Shirley that Frederick''s father can be trusted. In fact, the person himself has been asked by Albert to join his cause and destroy the cult together. Frederick''s father has given full support to the king.


    But as for the person himself, Shirley need to check if he''s good or not. And she has to do it herself since Albert won''t help her to see if Frederick is full of lies or not.


    As for Frederick, he just thought that the other two members are just the princess'' bodyguards.


    While the group continuing their journey, Ang noticed something approaching and Shirley quickly ordered everyone to stop.


    "As for other reason, it seems that you can see for yourself." Shirley said to Frederick as she and the other three prepared to fight.


    Although he waste by a few seconds, Frederick also prepared his magic to fight as well.


    "Hearing about my journey, there would be many dissatisfied people who will attack me. Probably to kidnap me to be a hostage. Frederick, have you killed anyone before?" Shirley asked.


    "No. Although I''m also a hunter, I only killed monsters before." Frederick replied.


    "There are several people approaching us in a hurry. We''re going to fight them. Would you like to experience killing someone for the first time?" Shirley asked again.


    "If possible, I don''t want to kill anyone, your highness. But I will if the situation deemed it to be necessary." Frederick said.


    "Good answer. Try to capture them all. I want to ask them what''s their intention ining after us. If you can''t capture them, kill them. Well¡­ if we have the chance to fight obviously."


    "Excuse me?"


    Frederick was confused after hearing that, but Shirley ignored him as she looks at Ang whom already flying with her flight magic toward the opponents, and defeated them all in an instant.


    Shirley was calm because she''s already used to Ang''s extraordinary talent in magic, but the other three were not.


    The two agents know that Ang is strong, but they never thought that she would be this strong. Even in the selection battle, she never uses that much strength against the other challengers.


    "Shirley! I''m done!" Ang said with a smile.


    "Sigh¡­ I told you to not go all out from the start! We need to extract information from them!" Shirley shouted.


    "There are some who haven''t died yet. Just ask them. It''s not like we need to ask every single one of them. And Roy always said to hit first, ask questionster. I just did as he taught us." Ang said.


    "Yeah, but that''s too much! He can still hold back, but you didn''t hold back at all!" Shirley said in anger.


    "But I didn''t kill everyone though." Ang sulked.


    Suddenly, someone appeared from behind them and about to grab Shirley. Frederick and the two agents noticed that and about to protect her, but that was not necessary at all.


    Because when the attacker was just one meter away from Shirley, Shirley already froze the attacker''s body.


    "Y-you monsters¡­" The attacker said before he lost consciousness from the cold.


    "That''s rude! Anyway, let''s ask those who are still conscious why they attacked us."


    Shirley ignored the three shocked people as she interrogated someone. As for Ang, she was not good at interrogating, so she just keeping watch of the situation.


    Then, the two agents quickly realized the situation and helped Shirley interrogated the attacking group.


    As for Frederick, he was still in shock.


    Back during the selection battle, he watched all the fights. Since he was already rmended by the professors, he doesn''t need to participate. But he still wanted to fight to see his limit.


    After watching everything from the start until the final, he thought that there are many excellent mages. But other than Ang who seems to be difficult to see through her strength, he thought he would still be able to fight everyone else and win. As for Ang herself, he might need to put more effort, but he thought he would still win.


    But now, after witnessing Ang and Shirley''s effortlessly defeating a group of people attacking them, he changed his mind.


    ''I thought princess Shirley was strong already. I don''t mind her participating through rmendation. But who would have thought that she could effortlessly defeating an enemy approaching her from behind when I could barely react?


    More importantly is that Ang. She was too strong! Does that mean she hasn''t used her true strength at all during the selection battle? I can understand that if the reason is because she knows her opponent''s strength. They seem to have known each other for quite a while. But seeing Ang effortlessly defeating almost all of the enemies so quickly, and killed more than half, it seems like I was wrong. Not just I couldn''t defeat her, but if I could survive a few second against her, that''s already a huge achievement.


    And these two said it was that Roy who taught them both many things. I wonder what kind of person this Roy is? If I meet him, can I get as strong as these two? Maybe we will meet during the tournament. I can''t wait for the tournament. I''ll get as strong as possible during the journey.''


    Frederick thought as he got excited thinking of the future.


    In truth, one reason he got that strong is because he loves magic. And simr to Ang, he was talented as well. Though not as talented as she is.


    The five continued their journey after getting all the information they can get from the attackers. On the way, they get attacked several more times, but they easily handle them. And as they got closer to Melk, the strength of the three people other than Ang and Shirley have improved.


    As for how strong Ang and Shirley is, the two haven''t used all their strength yet. No one can tell how strong they have be.


    And although the goal of this tournament is to get stronger before their sh with the cult, both Shirley and Ang are excited to finally be able to fight Ka''s group without having to hold back like during their sparring sessions.


    Who will win the intercollege tournament?

 Chapter 339 - In The Capital Of Arturo Kingdom

    In Arturo Kingdom, in the capital, the king is enjoying himself in his room. The fake king to be exact.


    "This King Harold is truly blessed. He was gifted by excellent children that he doesn''t even need to do any work at all. Just wait and leave everything to them. I was lucky to have simr feature with him and chosen to be his impersonator. I even got the chance to sleep with his wives. Though it''s a shame that the queen killed herself. Although she''s the oldest, she''s the fairest of them all."


    The fake king said that while drinking wine and enjoying the night view through the balcony.


    Suddenly, someone flew inside the chamber he''s resting.


    "Is it okay for you to be so rxed?" The guest asked. He knows that the current king is an impersonator, so he doesn''t need to be formal.


    "It''s fine. I left everything to Toni. He''s excellent, and he has no interest in taking the throne. As for the king''s wives, none of them realized that I''m an impersonator. That''s ridiculous. I guess that''s to be expected if they only married him for status and wealth. But now they have chosen to follow their children to support them to be the next in line for the throne." The fake king said.


    "Hah. They don''t even know that whoever fit to be the king will be killed and reced. We have found impersonators for some of them. It will be best if we find one for each child. Then, by using their poprity, we will get the whole kingdom to join us. Everything is for the True God." Said the guest.


    "For the True God." The fake king replied.


    "But about this Toni. I haven''t found anyone to swap with him yet." The guest said.


    "I think it''s best to leave him be until our influence spread more in the kingdom. He''s too excellent in his job. I doubt the one who will impersonate him is good enough to do his job. And the best part is that his mother has joined us. And I have asked her to persuade him to join us. It will take time, but it should be fine." The fake king said.


    "I see¡­ you were chosen because of your simr feature, but who would have thought that you are smart enough to think that yourself?"


    "Thank you for thepliment. Though I''m still worried about who was it that having breakthrough to expert level. I''m still intermediate level, so I''m afraid if I get attacked." The fake king said as he took off the wig that makes his hair look simr to the king''s hair.


    In Arturo kingdom, Red hair means that the person is from royalty. It has been that way since a long time ago. But now, red hair has be moremon. So, it''s no longer absolute fact that everyone with red hair are royalties. That''s whymoners who were born in the kingdom would dye their hair to other color if they have natural red hair. But everyone is free to have any hair color that they want. It''s not against thew to walk around in public with red hair. It''s against thew when the person who did it is iming to be from royalty even though they are not.


    "I think whoever that person is, they must have long gone. This person might be a summoner with a powerful summon that could defeat multiple expert level mages. But that summon must be injured and not as powerful as before because of the injury. That''s why the summoner escaped. I have asked some people to find that person, but there are no traces of their location. Don''t be afraid. As long as you are still useful in this kingdom, I will protect you."


    "Thanks. It''s relieving to have expert level mage such as you to protect me." The fake king said.


    Suddenly, the expert level mage looked outside and be wary of the surrounding.


    "What''s wrong?"


    Seeing something strange is going on, the fake king wore his wig again and hid behind the mage.


    "Hmm¡­ it seems like it''s nothing. I felt that something is approaching, but there''s nothing here. I guess I''m too tired. I''ll go take a sleep now."


    The mage then sleeps at the bed in the king''s chamber. He can do whatever he wants to the fake king because even though the fake king has the highest status in the whole kingdom, the mage is more powerful and has higher status in the cult.


    And the fake king also felt safer when the mage is around him, so he didn''t mind it.


    Meanwhile, at the direction where the mage looked at before, there''s an invisible ghost floating.


    "That was scary! I thought he wouldn''t notice me. I guess this is too close. But it''s good since now I know the range that they can detect me. And now I can just teleport to Toni''s location right away instead of teleporting somewhere else and fly toward Toni''s location since no one is that close to him in his room."


    The ghost is Sonia. The friendly ghost from Cassau.


    She was contacted to meet Toni, so she teleported to the location of one of Celestine''s subordinate in Arturo, and travel on her own. Out of curiosity, she tried to get close to the fake king and ends up almost got noticed by the mage near him.


    But now since she knows the range the mage can sense her, which is already difficult to do since she''s a ghost who can hide her presence, she feels safe to teleport to Toni''s location directly.


    Sonia teleported directly to Toni''s location, but someone entered Toni''s room so she has to turn invisible again and wait until their conversation is over.


    "Mother, what''s wrong?"


    The one who entered the room is Toni''s mother.


    "I''m just worried since you work too much. How about you rest for a while?" Toni''s mother asked him to take a rest.


    "Later. I still have some work to do. But if you have something to say, I can still listen." Toni said while his hand hasn''t stopped moving.


    "Well, actually, mother just made friends with some noble wives. Turns out, they are much more fun to hang around with. I shouldn''t have unting my status and just have a good chat with them. My mind is clearer now." Toni''s mother said.


    "Oh, really? That''s good. With whom?" Toni asked casually.


    "It''s the one from Bloom family. Your father introduced us to each other. And we promised to meet again tomorrow. How about it? Do you want to go to? I''ll ask your father for you to take a day off tomorrow."


    Hearing what her mother said, Toni''s hand finally stopped moving. His head is looking at the document, so his mother can''t see his shocked expression.


    "A-aah. I don''t think that''s a good idea. Maybe some other time. I''m just too busy. This is also for the good of the kingdom." Toni said in refusal.


    "I see. That''s fine then. But I don''t like that. It''s good that you think of the kingdom, but you need to think about yourself more. Well, I will return now. I''ll ask you again some other time."


    With that, Toni''s mother leave Toni alone in his room. Except he''s not alone.


    "Toni, what''s wrong? Was it that Bloom family she said?" Sonia asked.


    "Yes. That''s also why I asked you toe here and ry the news to father. Is father doing well?" Toni asked.


    "His health has improved. But he still has difficulty walking. He''s sitting on a wheelchair to move around with Queen Carmen pushing the wheelchair. What is the news you''re talking about?"


    "¡­that Bloom family is close with the cult. After my father is reced, that family keeps growing in wealth. And I see that impersonator is close with that family. But in the past, father said that Bloom family did something that makes the rtionship between father and that family deteriorated. Father has always been trying to find any evidence of that family doing something wrong so he can bring them down. But seeing this impersonator getting close with them, it can be said that the Bloom family has fallen to the cult." Toni said.


    "You mean¡­ your mother is¡­"


    "That''s right. Mother has also finally joined the cult. And she probably did it willingly. Sigh¡­ just how much does the cult want to destroy my family!" Toni shouted in anger.


    Luckily, the room is soundproof. His voice can''t be heard even by the guards outside his room.


    "¡­sorry to hear that." Sonia said.


    "It''s okay. After brother Fabio told me that the king has been swapped, I expected this. But it''s still painful to know. If you are going to fight the fake king and the cult, can I ask you to spare my mother?" Toni asked.


    "I can tell the others, but you can''t expect it would happen. Roy has no mercy toward the cult unless Albert or one of his lovers told him to not kill her. And he has to see your mother first so he knows her appearance and to not kill her. As for the other, they won''t kill her if I told them not to. But if she has joined the cult, the only one fast enough to stop your mother from exploding her own head is Roy." Sonia said.


    "If it can''t be helped then just kill her. But at least I want her to be captured unless it''s impossible. That''s what I asked of you."


    "I''ll tell Roy to do that. But we can''t really count on his memory, so don''t have high hopes." Sonia said before she disappeared.


    Now that Toni is truly alone, he just noticed his cheek is wet with tears.

 Chapter 340 - In Prince Bernards Mansion

    Still in Arturo Kingdom, but this time, it''s not the capital.


    This is the mansion in the city near the border between Arturo and Tatrama. This is where the real king is nning to fight the fake king, and also where he is rehabilitating after months of torture.


    In one of the rooms, King Harold is trying to walk. He''s unstable and already have difficulty to stand up. But he never gives up. King Harold take a step slowly while bncing his body. It''s a difficult task for someone who has been restrained and tortured for months, but he faces it with determination.


    He tried to walk to someone in the opposite direction. She''s Queen Carmen, and someone who loves him dearly. Unlike his other wives. Though it''s kind of difficult to tell since she only realized that he has been reced after sleeping with the fake king.


    "Come on, honey! Just a little more! Just five meters more!" Queen Carmen cheered her husband.


    "Go, daddy!"


    Other than Queen Carmen, there are several other people watching him. They are the king''s children.


    He has many children, but these three are those he can trust at the moment. They are Prince Fabio, Prince Bernard, and Princess Luna.


    Just like the queen, Luna was also cheering for her father to try his best. Even though with her Future Vision which can see further than Fabio she saw many times that his father will fall, she also saw how determined her father is and love to see him working hard. He is her pride.


    "If my wife and my daughter said so, then I can do it!" Harold said.


    It took him more than thirty seconds just to walk five meters. And that''s already an improvement.


    Queen Carmen has prepared a wheelchair for Harold. During his rehabilitation, it was her who pushed the wheelchair. Even when Bernard told her that he can let one of the servants to do that, she refused anyone to take that job from her.


    "What''s wrong, you two? Your father just broke a record and he can now walk further. Soon, he won''t need a wheelchair anymore. Though he might need to walk with a cane for a while. Why aren''t you praising him?" Queen Carmen asked the two men watching.


    Although they both happy seeing their father progressed so much, they just listened to a new information. That''s why they have gloomy expressions.


    "Bad news?" King Harold asked.


    "Yes. Sonia just told us a really bad news. She has gone to inform other kings as well. She has died a long time ago, but she''s still working hard." Bernard said.


    "What news?" King Harold asked.


    "That''s¡­ sigh¡­ It''s Toni''s mother. She has joined the cult. That''s what Toni told Sonia."


    Fabio exined how Toni realized that someone has joined the cult, and his mother now has been influenced by them as well. And Fabio exined how Fabio was told to meet them, but he refused saying he''s too busy.


    "That woman! As expected, it was not a good idea for you to marry that woman!" Queen Carmen shouted in anger.


    "Yeah. I need to think carefully the next time I married someone." King Harold said.


    "You''re going to marry more!?" Queen Carmen shouted.


    Meanwhile, Bernard looked at his father in confusion.


    "Father, why are you so calm?" Bernard asked.


    "Because Toni is doing his best. He knows the danger of staying there, but he still chooses to do that so we have someone from the inside. I need to be calm so we can prepare more. So, when the timees that we fight against them, we can save Toni and hopefully everyone as well. Not just those staying in the capital obviously. Everyone in the whole kingdom as well. I think it''s best to check my other children as well." King Harold said.


    His other children are fighting to get a chance for the throne. King Harold need to know if they will be able to help or not.


    "Though I''m d that you changed from being a battle maniac who keeps losing, to this. You''ve changed after you realized you''re going to be a father. I''m proud of you." King Harold said to Bernard.


    "Thank you¡­ wait, is that what you think of me!? Battle maniac who keeps losing?" Bernardined.


    The familyughed seeing Bernard''s reaction. It was as if they forgot that someone close to them has joined the cult.


    Suddenly, Queen Carmen noticed something approaching. She knows because of her detection skill as an expert level mage. Although she was still familiarizing herself with it, she knows when something is approaching. Thanks to Celestine''s instruction, she''s getting used to her power easily.


    "It''s Sister Jill!"


    Luna with her Future Vision, got excited to see that the ones approaching is someone she knows. She''s another daughter of King Harold, but from different mother than the three here.


    Before Luna run toward the guest, Fabio stopped her.


    "Stop, Luna. We need to see if she can be trusted or not. You can''t approach her when we don''t know if she''s dangerous or not. Father, should I call Sonia to contact Roy to get Albert?" Fabio asked.


    "No. I think it''s best to see it for ourselves if she can be trusted or not. Bernard, can you arrange it so she will meet you while we''re listening? Carmen, take Luna somewhere safe." King Harold said, but the one who refused that idea is Luna herself.


    "No! I will be the one to see if Sister Jill can be trusted or not! After all, I''m still a princess!" Luna said.


    Seeing Luna determined to see for herself, King Harold agreed.


    Bernard arranged a room where King Harold, Queen Carmen, Fabio, and Luna can hear everything.


    Then, Jill entered the room with her assistant. A man whom everyone hasn''t meet before.


    "Brother Fabio, imagine yourself attacking sister Jill and that man." Luna said.


    Luna can see the future, but that future can be changed ording to her action. But because she''s too weak, even if she attacked the two guests, there''s nothing that can confirm if they are dangerous or not.


    That''s why she asked Fabio''s help. He also knows how Future Vision works, so he thought of attacking his sister with magic ten secondster. That should be enough for Luna to see the rest.


    "Jill, why are you here? And who is that man?" Bernard asked Jill. He acted as if everything is normal.


    "Can''t a sister meet her beloved brother? Oh, this is my assistant." Jill said.


    "Just say what you''re here for."


    "Sigh¡­ well, if you want me to be direct, then I will. Do you know that we''re fighting for the throne? And I don''t think that you are interested in it. I want to ask you to join hand with me to help me raise to the throne." Jill said.


    "So, you want to be the next queen?" Bernard asked. Although he is looking at Jill, he can see Fabio hiding who will tell him if he can trust Jill or not.


    In their hiding spot, Fabio was about to attack when Luna stopped him.


    "Brother Fabio, that''s enough. Sister Jill doesn''t know anything, but that assistant is from the cult." Luna said.


    Fabio noticed that she''s shaking in fear after seeing the future, but she chooses to stay strong for her family.


    "You did well, Luna." Fabio praised his sister.


    Then, Fabio gives Bernard a signal to tell that the man is dangerous. He pointed at the man, and crossed his arms into X-shape. And Bernard noticed that.


    "We have something important to tell you, Jill. But this man won''t be invited." Bernard said.


    "¡­we?"


    While Jill is confused, Fabio appears and attacked the man with the intention to kill. But the man noticed it although it was a bitte, so he wasn''t injured badly.


    "What do you mean by this, Prince Bernard?" The man shouted.


    "What are you doing!? Wait, Brother Fabio?" Jill was about tosh out at Bernard for attacking her assistant, but she was surprised to see that the person attacking him is her brother who was supposed to be dead.


    And then, a huge amount of water is being controlled and trapped the assistant inside of the ball. That''s Queen Carmen''s water magic.


    "Queen Carmen? And¡­ father!?" Jill was shocked again to see someone unexpected in that ce.


    But the one who was shocked the most is the man trapped inside the water. Jill''s assistant.


    Seeing the situation is not good, he tried to break away from the water, but his magic is too weak.


    Having no other choice, and seeing that the real King Harold is there, he knows his n won''t work. So, he exploded his own head while still being inside the water.


    Queen Carmen controlled the water to not let the explosion affected anything outside of the water. Thanks to that, no one injured because of the explosion.


    "What the hell is going on!?" Jill was confused seeing that her assistant''s head suddenly exploded.


    "You all have been tricked. My wives, my children, you are all tricked by that fake king iming to be me. Now, the hindrance has gone. I will tell you everything." King Harold said.


    Since they don''t want to have a discussion somewhere with a headless corpse, they changed room. King Harold and everyone told Jill everything, including what seems to be the n of the cult.


    "Aha¡­ ahahaha¡­ so¡­ they will rece me like how they reced father. What have I been doing all this time?" Jill said in regret.


    "In fact, this might be better. Having you split up makes it easier to see if each of you can be trusted or not one by one. We decided that that man can''t be trusted. And we are powerless to stop him from killing himself. That''s how most of the cult members instructed. They will kill themselves with explosives inside their mouth before we can extract information from them." King Harold said.


    "So, if I can''t be trusted, you will kill me?" Jill said.


    "Yes. And fact is, you still can''t be trusted yet. We''re here to check that. You might think that I''m a cruel father who will kill his own daughter, and I won''t deny it. Now¡­ Carmen, what are you doing?"


    Before King Harold asked his daughter a question, he looked at Queen Carmen who was pushing the wheelchair, but now she moved after contacting Sonia. And Sonia has disappeared again after appearing for a short while.


    "I''m calling Sonia to call Roy to call King Albert. It will be easier to do that." Queen Carmen said.


    "¡­I just told you that we don''t need to do that. Sigh¡­"

 Chapter 341 - Incoming Attack

    "Roy, you have to go and meet King Harold right away. And bring Albert with you. I will tell him to get prepared so you can bring him here before going to Bernard''s mansion."


    That''s what Sonia suddenly told me just before I took a nap.


    She suddenly appears in front of me, and told me something important is happening and I have to go bring Albert with me.


    And as soon as she finished rying the message, she disappeared into Albert''s location.


    Is my break finally over? I don''t want that!


    The tournament will happen next week. I don''t want to get busy even before it''s started!


    Such is the fate of being relied upon. I''m just too awesome, I guess.


    I suppose I need to inform the others that I''m leaving.


    I get down and meet Lina who is sweeping the floor.


    "Lina, I''m going for a bit. Seems like something happened in Arturo." I said.


    "Will you return for dinner?" Lina asked.


    "Hopefully I will."


    It''s quite empty in the base now. Ka and Jewel leave two weeks ago.


    As for me, I still teach my ss as usual. Though Sara wasn''t there. So, I only taught the other three students. But yesterday was myst ss because I was supposed to go to Melk as well. I just told them to study by themselves after teaching them how to cultivate air element. Though it''s the same as other elements. I just taught them how to make air element magic stones out of magic stones for other elements.


    Soon after informing Lina, Sonia appears and told me that Albert is ready.


    "Good. I''ll bring him here. As for you, go and tell Spot that I''m leaving. Ask him if he wants to go." I said.


    Today, Spot is at the sea with his child. I forgot which number is this child is.


    He would sometimee here to y, but since we didn''t do any big jobtely, he stays in the sea more.


    I opened a portal and let Alberte here, as I see Spot flying here quickly while looking excited at what we''re going to do.


    "Roy, where are we going?" Spot asked.


    "To Arturo Kingdom. We''re going to meet Fabio and the others." I said.


    In the past few weeks, I have been regrly visiting them. It was mainly for Harold''s recovery. And I have gotten close enough with them to not have to speak with honorifics to them. I''m the onlymoner in this continent who doesn''t have to speak to all kings without honorifics. I''m amazing!


    But before I opened a portal, a little and lovely girl approached us.


    "Father!"


    It was Lana. Somehow, she noticed that her father is here. She was supposed to be in her room.


    "Lana, have you been well?" Albert asked.


    "Yes! Are you working?" Lana asked Albert.


    "Sorry. I''ll y with you some other time."


    "Promise?" Lana said as she offered to have a pinky promise.


    I''d like to see Albert''s reaction.


    "I promise." Albert said as he wrapped his pinky to Lana''s.


    "Pinky promise! If you break the promise, all hell break loose!" Lana said the same thing when she made me do pinky promise.


    And Albert¡­ he has an indescribable expression on his face. Shock, anger, fear, I can see them. And he looked at me as if I''m the one to me.


    "Don''t look at me like that. Someone taught her those words while I was busy travelling saving Harold." I said.


    "Then who!?"


    "Doesn''t matter. Let''s go now."


    I opened a portal and said my farewell to Lana. Though I hope I can return quickly.


    In Bernard''s mansion, right in front of us, there''s another woman I don''t know. It must be her fault that I''m here.


    "Thank you foring, Roy. Sorry to asked you to be a courier, but we need Albert here." Fabio said to me.


    "So, I''m not needed here? Can I return?" I asked.


    "No! I can''t go home if you return now! You want to save your magic, right? Don''t use portal unnecessarily!" Albert shouted.


    Sigh¡­ I guess it''s unavoidable.


    "Who is he?" The unknown woman asked.


    "An important ally. As for the other one, you should know him, right?" Fabio asked.


    "Yes. He''s King Albert from Tatrama. How did hee here?"


    "That''s not important at the moment. Albert, you know her, right?" Fabio asked Albert.


    "Yes. She''s your sister, Jill. Has she fallen to the cult?" Albert asked.


    "That''s what we want to know. Please help us."


    "Sure."


    Howe he agrees to help them but refused me when I asked him to see my students? Just because they aremoners, you can''t just ignore them!


    Well, it''s not like those three students are important. I''ll get them strong enough to be recognized by Albert.


    And interview session happened. We have one person to interview, and everyone here is focused on her. I''d like to y with Luna instead, but we are not that close. I think she''s being wary of me. Just what did she saw in her vision that makes her afraid of me? Other than killing my enemies in case I found them.


    So, the new princess I met today is called Jill. She''s going after the throne, and thought of getting Bernard''s support. She''sing here only with her trusted assistant, who ended up cannot be trusted at all as Luna noticed that he''s dangerous. He killed himself by using the explosion inside his head. I can see the corpse in different room.


    "I thought I had a reliable ally to make me the queen. But I was being used as a puppet. I guess I''m not fit to be the queen." Jill said.


    "What else did he told you to do?" Harold asked.


    "Other than ruling my territory, he asked me to prepare some liquors for my meeting with Bernard. Wait!" Jill suddenly shouted as if she realized something.


    "Hmm¡­ there''s a bottle of drink with the corpse of your assistant. And there''s a sign that it was recently opened, and closed again. Seems like there''s poison in it." I said.


    "How did you know? Wait, poison? He asked me to drink it together with Bernard!" Jill shouted.


    "I guess it''s clear then. He''s going to kill you and Bernard at the same time. And he can just spread the rumor that both you and Bernard kill each other for fighting the throne. Or maybe they have prepared a recement for you two. Is he the only oneing with you?" Harold asked.


    "Oh no! He said that there will be some peopleingter! What should I do?" Jill panicked.


    Meanwhile, everyone looked at Albert to hear his decision.


    "She''s not with the cult. That''s the truth. And everything she said is the truth as well. She''s just being used and probably going to get killed. Now, what should we do?" Albert asked.


    "They are nning to kill Bernard and Jill together, huh? And the onesing soon should be here to check if Bernard and Jill are both still alive or not. They are going to ask the man who blew his own head about the situation. Since he died, I suspect that those people wille here to finish the job." Harold said.


    Sigh¡­ this is annoying. I don''t want to stay here to be targeted all of a sudden. I guess I need to prepare to open a portal right away.


    "Bernard. Let''s go get your wife to safety first. Seems like something will happen soon." I said to Bernard.


    "Oh, right! Let''s go!" Bernard said.


    I will leave the discussion to those here. But why is Luna wanted to stay when Bernard asked her to get his wife together? She''s acting like a princess. A real princess who worries about the kingdom. She''s too young to do that. This world is too cruel to let a child mature too fast.


    We went to Bernard''s room where his wife is resting, and told her that I will get her to safety. I told Lina to prepare a room after opened a portal and brought Bernard''s wife there. She will be safe with Lina and the others there.


    After that, Bernard and I returned to where the other is. They are still discussing about the next n while Jill is cowered in fear.


    "Damn, you all! You take too long to think! How about making it simpler! Let''s make them think that Bernard is a strong candidate for the throne and he has expert level mages with him! So, when those people attacked, it''spletely normal that we can fight back. And just make a story that Bernard would dare to imprison his own sister for trying to poison him. That''s easy, right?" I suggested since they haven''t made a decision yet.


    ""¡­that''s it!"" Harold, Albert, and Fabio shouted at the same time.


    "That way, it won''t be shocking if Bernard gained power! We can have our own army!" Fabio said.


    "Imprisoning Jill might make him feared by the people. But that will also show everyone what he will do to those who targeted his life." Albert said.


    "And that seems to be fit with his previous personality. In fact, I''m still wondering how Bernard doesn''t have an army yet. Just guards. Bernard, with my guide, I will make you a strong candidate for the battle which you can''t win since Fabio is the crown prince!" Harold imed.


    "¡­what about my opinions?" Bernard asked.


    "Rejected!" Harold said firmly.


    I guess it''s decided. And I also need to stay here for a bit longer and see those iing group. I hope it won''t be too many.


    "AAAAAH!"


    Suddenly, Luna screamed as she crouched down and hold her head with her hands.


    "Luna, what''s wrong?" Fabio asked.


    "Idiot. That''s the signal for the iing danger within one minute. We need to get ready."


    Less than one minute of the attack. I need to get as much information as I can from Luna.


    "Luna. Don''t be scared. Tell me what will happen." I asked.


    "The mansion got destroyed out of nowhere!" Luna said.


    "That mean they don''t even care if Jill''s assistant is still alive or not. They are just here to kill everyone. Luna, I ask you again to not be scared. Do you actually see that any one of us died?" I tried to calm Luna down.


    "¡­no. I don''t see anyone dying."


    "That''s because I''m amazing. Now, let''s get you all to safety first. I''ll stay here and kill everyone. Though I need Bernard to stay here. Just in case someone escaped, we need them to witness Bernard is here and still alive. And also, Fabio and Carmen. You two will fight if it''s necessary." I said.


    It''s been a while, but I guess it''s time to fight cult members again. What a pain they are¡­

 Chapter 342 - A Mother And Her Two Sons Are Stronger Than Expected

    It was a long minute.


    Since Luna saw the future, we quickly prepared for it. I get Albert, Harold, Jill, and Luna transported to Cassau where I transported Bernard''s wife to just a few moments ago. As for the rest, we will fight.


    Fabio is stronger than Bernard. At least that''s what the two recognized. And Carmen is an expert level mage. We will fight whoevering.


    And I can see three peopleing. Two of them are flying, and one of the two is carrying one man. They must be the one who were sent to kill Bernard and Jill.


    Since we''re going to show them that Bernard is increasing his power, we will have to make sure that we are capable. We have to kill them all if possible.


    And as the fake king received information about Bernard''s sudden growth, Harold and the others will help Bernard to grow.


    "Spot! Wait for my signal, and then you can fight them with us!" I said.


    "Oh! You''re letting me fight? That''s great." Spot is excited to get an action.


    "Yes, but you must not say anything. And they have to think that you are Carmen''s summon. Carmen, do you understand?" I asked Carmen this time.


    "I see! You want to make it as if I''m the one making the breakthrough previously, and escaped here pretending to be under Bernard''s protection. Understood. I just need to pretend to give Spot some order, right?" Carmen asked.


    "That''s right. Soon, they will destroy the whole mansion. Get close to me. Victoria will be our shield." I gave the order.


    I focused my Divine Vision to the surrounding. ording to Luna''s Future Vision, the mansion will be destroyed altogether. No fire, no lightning, and the building just got destroyed. Which mean it''s highly likely that the magic that will destroy this ce is an earth magic.


    And to be that strong, one should be at least an expert level mage in their earth element. Let''s assume that all three of them are expert level mage.


    And then, as I expected, the one carrying someone dropped the man, and that person is casting an earthquake magic. But this is less powerful than Celestine''s. Though it''s more than enough to destroy the mansion.


    The mansion got destroyed. Some servants caught under the rubbles, and died. But some still survived. As for us, I had Victoria protect us.


    "Alright. Soon, the earthquake will over. Carmen and Spot will fight those who are flying. There are two of them. If they try to escape, and already too far, don''t bother chasing after them. It''s fine to let them leave, but killing them all will gain us more time. Spot, don''t use your breath attack. As for the expert level earth mage, Bernard and Fabio will fight him together. I will support you from afar." I said.


    "Us? Really?" Bernard asked.


    "Yes. Fabio, you will need to disguise your hair. Wear this." I gave him a Blobby which transformed into a wig on top of his head, and hides the color of his hair.


    "And Bernard, I know you''re weak, but I don''t know how weak you are. We have given you the instruction of magic control, and you should have improved a lot, right?" I asked Bernard.


    "Yes. Although my level didn''t improve, I''m much stronger than the time I pick a fight with everyone." Bernard said.


    Did he really pick a fight with everyone? Well, that''s not important now.


    "Good. As soon as the earthquake stopped, we will move. Carmen will ride on Spot''s back and fly to the sky, and you two will follow me from behind as I clear the rubbles blocking us." I said.


    It will be difficult for them to see me using physical strength plus Aura to destroy the rubbles. They might sense that we are moving in a straight line, but they will just think that we are using magic because they will be upied by Spot''s appearance.


    But seriously, did they really nning to kill Jill''s assistant as well? Wasn''t he a cult member? I guess they really don''t care about their own life.


    Or maybe that assistant would have killed everyone with poison, and escape before destroying the mansion. They are too dangerous as expected.


    And then, the earthquake stopped.


    I can''t waste too much time to surprise the enemies, so we have to move now.


    "Now!" I shouted.


    Just like I said, Spot flew with Carmen on his back. They will be fighting two enemies. As for me, with Victoria as a huge shield, I broke through the obstacles with the two princes behind me. I will see their growth after learning magic control as I supported everyone with my sniping skill.


    "What the-!"


    As expected, the earth mage didn''t expect us to survive. He was shocked to see a huge serpent suddenly ascending with a woman on its back. And this is when I will attack first.


    As soon as the obstacles are cleared, I quickly transformed Victoria into a rifle, and shoot the mage on his leg. That''s enough to stop him from escaping.


    "Aaah!" The mage falls over as the two princes casted fire magic together. But that mage still managed to block the fire with am Earth Wall he built in haste. Though the wall destroyed soon after.


    Hearing the mage screaming, the two flying mages above looked over here for an instance. That slight distraction is what gets one of the two got swallowed by Spot.


    ¡­that''s too fast. One of them is down already. I guess all of them will die here.


    Well, I no longer need to support Carmen and Spot. They are enough to kill the other mage. As for the other two¡­ it will take time, but they are going well. especially after I wound the enemy''s leg.


    The two must be training hard and also did some sparring with Carmen to gain experience in fighting expert level mage. And Carmen also practicing to get used with her new power.


    What about Harold? How strong is he? Probably around advanced level.


    The two princes attacked the enemy from different location as the two keep moving around. I guess that''s a good strategy against one enemy.


    And in the sky, Carmen is fighting with the wind mage one on one. She''s just using Spot as her footing since she can''t fly.


    She created a huge Water Ball. But she didn''t use it. Instead, Carmen takes some of the water from it drop by drop, and attacked the enemy with it. Now it looks like it''s raining for the wind mage. Needles rain. Each drop of water can pierce through flesh.


    ¡­I never expected water mage to be that scary. Water magic were more used as protection in my past life. That''s what I know. But using that method to attack, She''s amazing. She must have been an amazing hunter before she became the queen.


    Well, since it will be over soon, I guess I don''t have to do anything else. I''ll just get Harold and the others to get back here.


    I opened a portal and see that everyone is ready to go. They must have heard from Luna that I''m picking them up.


    "How is it?" Harold asked everyone entered the portal.


    "You can see for yourself. It will be over soon." I said as I pointed at Fabio and Bernard.


    "As for Carmen, she''s up there with Spot. I''ll go check around the city and see if there''s anyone suspiciousing with them." I said before leaving them.


    Suspicious person, where are you?


    I run around the city but I didn''t see anyone suspicious. Does that mean only three of them attacking? Are they that confident?


    I guess I''ll go back to Harold and the others.


    As I expected, it''s all already over. Harold is praising his wife and his sons that they have gotten stronger. And Luna is looking at her brothers with awe.


    As for the other sister, I think her name was Jill, she''s in shock to see that everyone is too strong. It wasn''t even that long when I transported them to Cassau, and they returned so quickly to see two mages defeated. They obviously didn''t see Spot swallowed a man whole.


    "So, what''s your next move?" I asked as soon as I returned.


    "Bernard will use this chance to increase his power. And he will tell the people that Jill is being used by her assistant. Bernard will take Jill under his protection. People will still be suspicious why Bernard allowed Jill, whose assistant is nning to kill them both, to stay with him. When the news reached the fake king, the fake king will connect how the person who broke through to expert level from before is with Bernard. We will send him a report with using Bernard''s name before any spies informed him. If there are any. There are many other things we''re going to do like sending Sonia to Toni to tell him everything before the news reached the fake king. And¡­"


    "Enough! Too much! I''ll leave the rest to you! Are we done here?" I asked.


    "Yes. We can return now. I have asked important questions to Jill while we''re in Cassau. Let''s go back since the tournament is close. Oh, right. Is there anyone here who want to watch the tournament? If you want you cane with him now." Albert asked.


    "Carmen, Fabio, and Luna as well. You three can go. You two can learn a lot just by watching the fight. I want to get Bernard to go as well, but he''s needed here. And Luna will be safe over there while we''re busy. As for Jill¡­ she will stay. She will do as I say from now on. Take care." Harold said.


    I return back to Cassau, and bring Albert to his pce.


    It''s also the first time Carmen meet the others. Though most of them are not here, she can get to know Veronica who is a fellow expert level mage.


    Soon, it will be the time for the tournament.. My guess would be either Ang''s group or Ka''s group to win.

 Chapter 343 - Return To Melk After A Long Time

    A few days after taking care of small business in Arturo Kingdom, we are leaving for Melk to watch the tournament.


    "Is everyone ready?" I asked.


    "Even if we''re not and forgot something, you can bring us back in an instance. Let''s just go right away." Candy said.


    "I suppose you''re right. Let''s go then."


    The group who will be leaving for Melk are me, Lina, Candy, Sophie, Daniel, Hannah, Lana, Wendy, Carmen, Fabio, and Luna.


    Penny doesn''t want to go and said that she will take care of the base while we''re away together with Sonia whenever she''s not busy. And Veronica said that she will take care of the orphans while Celestine is away.


    Carmen and the royalties staying here are already getting along with the others. Carmen is the only water mage here, so she doesn''t have anyone to talk to about water magic. But she still takes some time to practice with Veronica or me. And she''s getting along well with Marie who sometimese over to y along with n.


    By the way, Albert, Marie, and n will not being with us. They will leave normally by themselves, so they can watch the final.


    Luna ys with Daniel and the other children. She enjoyed ying so much that she feels reluctant to go to Melk while the orphans are staying. But since Daniel, Hannah, and Lana ising, she no longer feels reluctant.


    As for Fabio, he''s the only male here other than me. We talked and y card a lot, and when we can''t he would go with disguise on and take a quest from the guild.


    Since he stayed in our ce, the guild master thought that he''s our new member. That''s why despite just receiving his hunter card, he received some quests which should be difficult for a normal E-rank hunter. Though for him, those quests are still easy.


    We arrived at the hotel in Melk where we stayed at before. Not in the lobby since there should be other people there, but in my previous room. Wendy said that this room is not for other people, that''s why it''s best to go here.


    "I''ll go meet the staffs of the hotel. What about you?" Wendy asked.


    "I''ll meet Ka and the others. Wait, Ang is here as well? Is it fine for people from different group to stay in one ce?" I asked.


    "It doesn''t really matter, right? And they don''t mind it." Wendy said before she left the room. She has been going in and out of Melk and used my service many times in the past few days.


    Ka, Jewel, Sara, Ang, and Shirley are all staying in this hotel. Together with their teammates I suppose. I''ll go greet them.


    Ah, I forgot to ask Wendy for the others'' room. Well, that can be taken care ofter. But this city sure is crowded today. So many people want to watch the tournament.


    I believe once the Television that Victoria and Marie made spread, it will be popr. At that time, people won''t bother toe so far here to watch they can just watch the tournament from their home.


    We also have a Television installed in our base. And Penny and Veronica will be there to see the first battle. If it can be broadcasted as it was intended, during the final, there will be a huge television installed at the square of many cities so the citizens can watch it.


    We also have sent the television to Lynn, Henry, and Harold. They will be able to watch the tournament.


    In truth, we were supposed to install television in every kingdom. At least each king needs to have one. But because there''s a fake king, we only gave these televisions in secret. Though after the final, people will hear about this thing.


    I get to the dining hall where Ka and everyone else is chatting. They don''t care if they are from different team. Ka and Ang are best friends after all.


    "Hey. Been a while." I greeted them.


    There seem to be two tables where everyone is seated. There are more, but those are taken by other guests. This area is the noisiest one.


    In one table, there are Ka, Ang, Shirley, Jewel, and a man I don''t know. Since I don''t think he''s trying to flirt with Ka, I don''t mind. He''s probably one of Shirley''s teammates.


    The other table is taken by Sara, and three other people. They nodded at me with respect when they saw me.


    Nine people. Which mean thest person who isn''t here is the other rmended participant from Cassau. I guess if he''s as Ka said, he won''t stay in a hotel like this.


    "Oh, Roy. You''ve arrived. And the others as well." Ka said.


    It has been a while since theyst met, so they are hugging each other. Meanwhile, the man I don''t know is staring at me.


    "What is it? I won''t hug you. I don''t know you, and even if I do, I won''t hug men." I said.


    "I don''t need a hug. I''m just curious about who this Roy is after hearing so much about you. When I ask Ka, Ang, and Princess Shirley, they said you won''t participate. So, I thought I won''t have the chance to meet you." He said.


    Instead of answering, I just starred at the man. I guess he''s not like the other noble children who used their family status. He''s a good guy, probably.


    "I''m the one who propose the tournament. I don''t think it''s a good idea for me to participate. And I''m also not a student. I''m a professor."


    I''m about to say that I taught most of the participant, but that''s wrong. I just taught those who teaches them. And I don''t know most of them. In fact, other than those who are here, there shouldn''t be anyone else I know.


    Oh, wait! Maybe one of the summoners I taught during the training camp is here!


    Well, even if they are here, I doubt they will use their summon much. Unless they have increased their level and got another summon. But if they have another monster, I will ask them to only summon one monster. I also have told them to do that so we can keep it as secret from the cult that summoners can summon multiple monsters. It was back after the training camp. I hope they still remember it.


    "Is it true that other than me, the other participants from the capital is taught by you?" the man asked.


    "No. I mean I taught those who taught them. I didn''t teach them directly. Well, other than Ka, Ang, Shirley, Jewel, and Sara over there. Wait, that''s half of you." I said.


    "Then can you teach me as well?" The man asked.


    "Unless you have summoning element or air element, I can''t teach you directly. Just go ask other people." I said.


    As I chatted with him, the others are done with their reunion and return to their seat. Candy grabbed a new table and bring it close to us so everyone can gather here.


    "By the way, how did you arrive here? I didn''t see you from the front door. Did you all fly here?" the man asked again.


    "No. But I can be anywhere I want. I can appear from above, or below. Or even behind you." I said with a slight hint of joke. I doubt he will believe me right away anyway. Though I never expected someone would continue my words.


    "Or even in your wildest and darkest dream. You will wake up in fear from seeing his face even in your dream."


    It was the cute little girl, Lana, who is speaking while climbing on my seat and take a seat casually in myp. She loves sitting on someone''sp and be spoiled. This time, she chooses me.


    "Alright, seriously. Who taught you that word?" I asked.


    "A ghost." Lana said.


    So, it''s Sonia? Or is there another ghost I can''t see even with my Divine Vision? If there''s another ghost, Sonia should have told me. Or maybe it''s all just Lana''s imagination. And Ghost is her imaginary friend. I think I will never know the truth. Unless Sonia appears and told me that it was her fault.


    "Well you nice to meet you, but my friends are here. Talk to youter." I said as I held Lana, and put her on Lina''sp.


    Haha. There''s Lana, Lina, and Luna sitting next to each other. Will there be a Lena or Lona?


    The friends I''m talking about are two people I haven''t met in a while. They are Kron and Oleg. Though Oleg''s wife is here as well. She''s chatting with Sara as a fellow air mage.


    As for Hill, I doubt he will be here. Or maybe he is. I think he might be one of the officials just like Kron. Well, who cares about Hill? Not me.


    "It''s good that you''re finally here. Though it will be better if Albert and Hill are here so we can y poker."


    ¡­apparently, it was Kron who cares about Hill.


    Since there''s nothing scheduled, I just spend the rest of the day chatting with the two friends I rarely met nowadays.


    Kron said that he will be the referee for the tournament. And Oleg will try to increase the security of the city.


    At night, after the kids fallen asleep, it''s finally time for me to clean up a lot of cult members. With this many people entered the city, there should be cult members among them.


    And I was right. So, I killed them in the dead of the night. As for some whom I cannot kill right away, I informed Oleg about them. He will take care of the rest.


    Finally, tomorrow is the day when the schedule will be set for the tournament. Because most of the officials are Albert''s agents, Albert asked them to arrange it so Ka''s team and Ang will only meet at the final.. Excellent choice.

 Chapter 344 - The Day Before The Tournament

    I woke up inside the room in the hotel the next morning. Other than me, Daniel is here as well. She''s sleeping with me.


    As for Lana, she''s sleeping with Hannah. No, I was wrong. She''s sleeping with Luna and Carmen, while Hannah sleeps with Jewel. Or more like it was Jewel who intrudes into Hannah''s room. Seems like Jewel had a lot of fun talking with Hannah.


    I look around and see that everyone has already awake. Well, most of them.


    Last night, after hanging out with Kron and Oleg, I patrolled the city to find any cult members. I found some, but none of them are exceptionally strong. Maybe there are some expert level mage in hiding with no explosive devices inside their mouth. I wouldn''t know.


    Though I will keep killing any cult members that I find. And if there are someone causing trouble, I will bring them to Oleg. He''s also the head security for the tournament so he''s extremely busy. I also have given him a lot of Magic Restriction Cors just in case there are expert level mages. As for those who have reached advanced level, I think the guards here are enough to keep watch on them. They joined the training camp and should be strong enough.


    Though we need to be careful to not get found out that we have such cors. And I doubt those who wears them will be allowed to live.


    I have also seen the venue for the tournament. It looks simr to the Arena in the Werewolves settlement. Albert must be the one giving them the ideas.


    And today should be the day when for the schedule of the tournament. Let''s ask Ka or Wendy how it goes. Or maybe Shirley. Let''s ask any one of them fixtures.


    Breakfast has been served. And Lina is obviously helping the chefs in the hotel.


    I woke up Daniel and went down for breakfast together. Almost everyone is already there.


    "Daniel, go wake up Carmen, Luna, and Lana. It''s time for breakfast." I said.


    "Okay!"


    Daniel go to their room, as I take a seat at a table where three other men are already there. Kron, Oleg, and Fabio whom is already friendly with the two.


    "Morning." I greeted everyone.


    "It''s rare for you to wake up early." Kron said.


    "It is. By the way, how''s the fixtures?" I asked Kron who is the official staff.


    "It should be announced at noon. Each team will send their representative to check on it. Just wait patiently." Kron said.


    We ate breakfast together as we chatted. We mostly just talking about random nonsense. Though Fabio seems happy to get along with the two. I wonder if he will get along with Hill as well.


    Then someone else looked at a free seat next to me, and take a seat there. He''s Fred. One of Shirley''s teammates from the capital.


    "Can I sit here?" Fred asked.


    "Sure." Fabio said.


    Among us four, Fabio is the one with the highest status. Although the other two treated him normally like a friend, they still know how to behave in front of a prince. That''s why the one who should allow Fred to join our table or not is Fabio.


    I already told Kron and Oleg that Fabio is a prince and Carmen is a queenst night. And the two still treated them normally. They have gotten used in hanging out with a king after all. Though when I asked, Kron just said that it''s normal for me to be close with another weird dude. Is Fabio a weird dude now?


    As for Fred, he doesn''t know anyone here other than me. But he''s still approaching us. I don''t hate that behavior, so it''s fine. And I think Fabio is also interested in one of the participants. That''s why he allows Fred to join our table.


    We just chatted as Fred is trying to get along with us.


    Then I asked him, "Have you heard anything about the schedule for the tournament?"


    "No. Butter at noon, Princess Shirley will go to the arena. That''s where she will be given the announcement of the fixtures, and she will tell uster." Fred said.


    "Don''t call her princess in public. We don''t know who is trying to harm her." I said.


    "Sorry. But calling her casually is¡­"


    "If you can''t call her by her name, just call her team leader or something. She''s the leader from your team, right?" I asked.


    "I guess I''ll call her that from now." Fred said.


    I look to see that Shirley is talking with Ka and Wendy. They are still here. I think they will leave soon.


    I can just ask Kron about it, but I doubt he will leak the information easily. Although he''s kind of dense, he is someone who can be trusted with a secret.


    Soon after, Ka, Shirley, and Wendy leave together to the Arena to hear the announcement. Ka is the representative from the team from Cassau, and Wendy is the supervisor of the team. Probably, the professor in charge of Shirley''s team will be there as well.


    Kron and Oleg also leaves because they have a meeting with other official staffs. And since Fabio is happily talking with Fred, I''ll just go for another patrol.


    Well, since I already did a patrolst night, I don''t think there will be a lot of cult members anymore. Though I still need to be vignt. Who knows if there are some cult members who have just arrived today?


    But my main goal is not that. I want to look around Melk because it has been a while since I''m here. And I''m not alone. I''m with Lina who is on break. Well, I''m the one forcing her to take a break and go on a date with me. Because if I never asked her, I don''t think she will ever take a break from her maid duties.


    Especially if she has another nightly duty for me. she would be tired the next day, but she would insist on working.


    What a hardworking maid.


    In the end, it''s not a patrol. Just a regr date.


    We walk around to see my old school, Red Tail, Sam''s old base where Lina used to work at, and many other nostalgic locations.


    None of them were destroyed during the stampede. But the buildings nearby, some of them have been renovated.


    I still have the key for Red Tail, though I never went here again. I''ll tell Albert to use this ce as another base for his agents here. Or maybe just give the whole building to Oleg? I''ll ask Ruby when I''m in the capital. If I remember.


    My old school was still there. No renovation at all. And I can see Mr. Wig is still teaching there. With a whole different type of wig.


    After that, we had a lunch at a restaurant. It''s just a normal date the whole time. No patrol at all. Though it''s thanks to the cult members not being nearby.


    "I had fun today. Let''s walk around again tomorrow." I asked Lina to do it again tomorrow.


    "But tomorrow should be the opening of the tournament, right? We need to watch it."


    "Actually, we don''t. It''s not like either Ka''s team or Ang''s team will fight in the first day."


    "But the Arena will be crowded. If there are any cult member, they should be inside the Arena to watch. You can''t just fly into the arena and kill someone there, right?" Lina said.


    I guess she''s right. That mean I can no longer go on a date until the tournament is over.


    We return to the hotel to see that Ka and Shirley already returned. As for Wendy, I don''t know where she goes.


    "So, when will you two fight?" I asked Ka and Shirley.


    "In the final. I think the drawing is rigged." Shirley said.


    "That''s obvious. The final will be watched by your brother. We can''t give weak performance in front of him. And there are other important people who will watch the final. That''s why we can''t have you two fight in the first day. When will Albert arrive anyway?" I asked Shirley.


    "He''s already on his way. Probably in three or four days. Though he can be here faster if you want." Shirley said.


    "Nah, it''s a pain. I''ll just wait unless he needs me."


    Then I asked them about the tournament. They will schedule it so there will be two matches in one day. Though for the first day, the two teams don''t have a fight scheduled. So, we will only watch the fight of other teams.


    "Will you watch the first fight?" I asked.


    "Obviously. The arena has been arranged so each team has their own private room where we can watch the tournament." Ka is the one who answered.


    "Can I enter the private room? I''m also a professor after all." I asked.


    "No. Even if you can, you will end up using that room for sleeping and won''t watch the match. You will need to watch the fight somewhere else."


    What a pain. I guess I need to do this job anyway. And instead of watching the tournament, I will watch the audiences instead.


    Sigh¡­ it''s the fate of someone awesome. Everyone relies on me that I don''t have much freedom to do anything I want.


    Wait, that''s the same as marriage. Does that mean I''m already married to the girls? Since when?

 Chapter 345 - First Match And I Got Bored

    Finally, it''s the first day of the fight! Hurray!


    Though I''m totally not interested in watching people fight. Peace is the best. But for now, we need people to get stronger, so it can''t be helped.


    Did I, the one who massacred hundreds of cult members, said that peace is the best?


    Well¡­ there''s only one way we can achieve peace. It''s through violence! This is the most contradicting thought in the world.


    It can''t be helped if the opposite side is not someone you can negotiate with, right?


    Anyway, the fight will start soon. But there will be an opening speech from someone. I don''t know who that person is. Probably some noble who is one of the officials, and that person must be someone that Albert can trust.


    When we n for the tournament, after telling everyone in the training camp, Albert told several other nobles to help. And after I told Dean about the tournament, Albert has prepared everything so the officials are all people he could trust. That way, there would be no bribing. Though I don''t know about the selection process of the participants for each college. But since one of the participants from Cassau entered through bribing, I think there will be a lot more child of a noble entered through the same way.


    They all will regret to participate not knowing that most of the other participants who didn''t enter through bribing were much stronger than average mages. Colleges with participants who entered through bribing will lose easily in the first round. Turning them into embarrassment for the whole kingdom if they got defeated too fast. At least, the need to be able to put up a good fight before being defeated.


    Then, the one who will give the speech appear and stand in front of the podium. If the Television worked, the kings should be able to watch it already.


    Other than the participants and the officials, we are watching from the audience seat. It''s too crowded here and people are even waiting outside the Arena. Maybe it will be a good idea to introduce Television as soon as possible. I''ll talk with Albert about it.


    I left the kids under Sophie and the other''s care since I can''t watch it together with them. As usual, I need to make a round. This time, inside the Arena. Though it''s a good thing that they didn''t build the Arena to be huge. This way, I can see everything with my Divine Vision.


    Maybe Albert put that into consideration when he nned this? If so, as expected of him.


    I look around while not caring about the speech. So far, I didn''t find anyone with explosive devices inside their mouth.


    Next, I look outside the Arena. There are too many that I could miss someone. Why are they waiting in front of the Arena anyway?


    Since I didn''t find anyone again, I sighed in relief as I finally listened to the almost finished speech.


    "Then, let''s see who among the thirty teams will be the champion!" The guy who makes the speech ended it with that line.


    So, it''s thirty teams, huh? That''s quite a lot.


    Let''s see¡­ so it''s about two teams who got seeded and won''t have to fight in the first round. They will instantly be put in the top sixteen. I guess luck is also strength.


    The two teams that got seeded¡­ they don''t look happy. Instead, they seem tense. Maybe they are worried if they are strong enough topete or not. But since no one looks cocky because they got seeded, I don''t think any of them bribed the college to participate.


    And there are some participants whoined how they didn''t get seeded. Like the other participants from Cassau whom I just see his face today. Though Jewel shut him up. I guess he''s afraid because she got selected thanks to her strength.


    Damn, he''s so weak!


    Now the speech is over, and the first fight will begin. The audience cheered for the participants. And there are some audiences from the same city as the participants who brought a banner saying ''We will win!''. Let''s see if they can win or not.


    ¡­many people enjoyed the match, but some found it boring like me. I think I had enough.


    The format of the match is a one-on-one match. Each team will send one person. When someone lose, the winner can continue to fight the second match. Just like that until all five members of one team defeated.


    Which mean if the first participant is too strong, that person can fight five times so their team will win.


    I don''t enjoy it, so I stand from my seat and about to leave when the slime on my shoulder whispered something in my ear.


    "Roy, where are you going?" Victoria asked.


    "Out. The fight is too boring. They seem stronger than an average mage, but I still find it boring. In fact, it''s not just me who got bored." I said as I looked at other people in the audience seats yawning.


    "Then be thementator. That will make the fight more interesting." Victoria suggested.


    "I''ll ask Kronter. Ka''s team and Ang''s team won''t fight today, right?"


    "That''s right. Ang''s team will fight tomorrow in the afternoon, while Ka''s team will fight the day after in the morning. Though they will only meet at the final." Victoria said.


    "Then I''ll try to find thatmentator. And I''ll ask Albert to put a Television in front of the Arena so everyone can watch it."


    "Just call it TV. And for those will be set in public, just call it screen. Television can be owned privately, but for screen, they will be put in a ce like the square or in front of the Arena so everyone outside can watch it." Victoria said.


    "If everyone can watch it for free, no one will attend the match in the Arena, right?" I asked.


    "Not really. How about you sell a merchandise. Like a shirt that says ''I support this team!'' only in the Arena. At least those from the same city wille.


    "Hire people to do the chores in the Arena and selling beverages. After the tournament, the Arena should be able to be used for other purposes as well. Maybe suggest it to the Guild master to settle a quarrel between hunters in the Arena. That way, people will stille." Victoria said.


    "Good idea. Tell that to Albert when we meet him. For now, how about finding somementators for the next fight in the afternoon? No, wait. Maybe the afternoon fight is too soon. I guess it''s for tomorrow then." I said.


    I left the Arena after seeing that Sophie and the others are still engrossed in the fight. I can also see the invisible Sonia above them. It''s funny how the people behind them looked as if they are cheering for Sonia.


    After leaving the Arena, I didn''t return home. Because I found two people I want to meet.


    "Did you find a cult member?" Victoria asked.


    Victoria whom also have no interest in the match is also leaving with me when I asked if she want to watch with the others. But my other monsterpanion, not the Werewolf but the Serpent, is flying above the Arena while camouging so no one will notice him. He''s interested in the fight.


    "No. But I found two people who might be a good candidate for being thementators. I''m going to ask them right away." I said.


    "You think they will do it for free?"


    "It won''t be for free. They will be paid." I said.


    "But I doubt the officials will have some budget to hire two more people. If they volunteer to do it for free, then the officials will agree." Victoria said.


    "I will be the one paying them. For now, I will ask them if they are interested or not."


    I walked toward the two people who are also like the others, waiting for the result of the match outside the Arena.


    I know that I have terrible memory, but I know these two people. It was back when we publicly decided the punishment for the Governor of Melk who betrayed the people after the Stampede. These two are the funny twins who keep talking shit and had a lot of fun while the others are shouting in anger.


    With these two as thementators, the match should be much more interesting than just watching two people in the Arena used fancy magic.


    Just like how I remembered, one of them is big and the other is small. They are fraternal twins. Though unlike Lana and n, they were born normally.


    "Hey you two, I have a good offer for you two. Will you listen?"


    I approached the two while they are chatting to wait for the result of the match.


    "Who the hell are you?" The big one asked.


    "Probably just trying to scam you. How about you go with him? I''ll wait for a day. If you end up naked in the street, I won''t go." The small one said.


    "What if I go with him, but you''re the one ended up naked in the street?" The big one asked the small one.


    "Why would I get naked on my own? Anyway, I refuse whatever you are offering." The small one refused.


    "If you agree to my offer, you can watch the match in the Arena and don''t have to wait for the result outside like this." I said.


    ""We''re listening."" The two answered together.


    If the two became thementators, I doubt I will get bored easily.

 Chapter 346 - Hiring Commentators

    Inside a restaurant, I brought the twins to have a chat. I''m treating them for a lunch at a restaurant they wanted. I don''t mind how expensive the price is since I''m rich.


    "Whoa, the foods here are delicious!" The big one said.


    "Seriously! Can we ask for more?" The small one asked.


    "You''re smaller than me, but you eat way more." The big one said.


    "It''s fine. Eat to your heart content. I have money and I''m the one who''s going to ask you two for a favor. Eat first, then we can talkter." I said.


    Around our table, I casted Air Barrier so that no one can listen to our conversation. Though it''s not like it''s a top-secret matter. But being careful is always good.


    The small one eats more than the big one. But the biggest eater here is me who already grabbed my fifth te.


    "Damn! You can really eat!" The big one said.


    "I''ve never met anyone who can eat more than me before. You''re amazing." The small one said.


    "It''s just eating. Don''t get amazed by everything." I said.


    While eating, I also take a look at the Arena. It was close to the restaurant we''re at, and I can see that the first match is finally over. The next match will be heldter.


    After finishing our meals, we finally had a talk.


    "So, why are we here?" the small one asked.


    "To eat, obviously! We can have a talk anywhere, but we''re here to eat. Though the talk shoulde now." The big one said.


    I wonder if they can be a good pair to bementators.


    "Well, first, my name is Roy. I''m a¡­ hunter, a doctor, and professor in Cassau university." I said.


    I don''t know which one would be good enough to introduce myself to them, so I picked those three. I could add that I''m a clown as well, but I doubt they will believe me.


    Oh, wait! Maybe they were there during the first time I perform as rence? Back then it was in Melk, so there''s a chance that they know rence.


    Nah, let''s not do that. Although what I will ask them will be rted more closely to the clown since it''s about entertainment, I can''t tell them I''m a clown. After all, people always rte clowns to idiots. I can''t let them think that I''m an idiot. At least for now¡­


    "Wow! That mean you''re a smart hunter. Cassau university¡­ they participate in the tournament, right?" the small one asked.


    "That''s right. Although what I''m about to ask you two is not about them. It''s about the tournament as a whole." I said.


    "What is it about?" The big one asked.


    "Idiot! Introduce yourself first! How could he asked something from someone who won''t give him their names? I''m Steven. We are twins, and I''m the older one." The small one, said.


    "Oh, right. I''m Dwight. The younger one. We''re both hunters. Though we can only kill weak monsters. That''s why our ranks never increased from C-rank." the big one said.


    So¡­ it''s Seven and Eight? At least they are easy to remember.


    "Actually, I want to offer you two a nice job. Do you know that some people found the match to be boring? I''m one of them. I want you two toment during the match so everyone can feel that the match is more interesting." I said.


    "You mean like¡­mentors?" Dwight asked.


    "It''smenters, idiot!" Steven said.


    "Actually, it will be calledmentators. I want to ask you two to be thementators for the duration of the tournament. Until the final." I said.


    "Why us?" Steven asked.


    "Because you two are interesting. It was back then after the stampede, where everyone heard from the princess about the governor. I heard how you two are capable of riling people up. And you two were quite funny." I said.


    "That time? You were there? And you still remember?" Dwight asked.


    "Yeah. That was an important event for the whole kingdom after all. while everyone was there listening seriously or getting angry, you two were just making up jokes one after another. That''s why I still remember." I said.


    "So¡­ you want us toment on the match, right? Does that mean we will attend every match from now on?" Steven asked.


    "That''s only if I get the permission of another person. If you want to try it, you''ll meet himter. How about I bring you to the next match, and see how you do it? the other person will be there as well, so we can listen to yourment. Though we will ask you to not make fun of the participants too much. I''m fine if you do it, but since some of them are nobles, they might get angry and will target you. Though I will protect you guys if that ever happen. As for the payment, I''ll tell you that it will be a lot." I said.


    "Wait a moment, please. We need to discuss it together. Just a few minutes." Steven said.


    I nodded and let them have a discussion. Though I heard that it''s going to be a positive answer from start to finish.


    "We''ll do it." Dwight said.


    "Okay. I''ll prepare something in the Arena. I''ll get you two thereter." I said.


    Now, it''s time to call Albert.


    Albert agreed to my n, and wille here. Since he''s in a carriage going here with Marie and n, I can use portal to get them here. Albert said that everyone in the escort team are those who know me, so I don''t have to hide my portal.


    I also made a suggestion from to install a screen at the square right away, and he agree. Though we will do it at night so no one will be bothered. There are too many people there.


    I asked for a room in the Arena. Since there are only thirty teams while there are thirty-two private rooms, I can easily get one. It''s nice to see that many people know me.


    I return to the restaurant, and grabbed the twin into the private room before the second match. Albert is already there, while Marie and n are disguising themselves and sit with Sophie and the others.


    "This is the important guy who will decide if you can be hired or not." I introduced Albert as important guy. They won''t believe that he''s the king since the king was supposed to be on his way.


    "Nice to meet you, important person. I''m Steven and this is my brother, Dwight. You will witness how good we are at talking." Steven said confidently.


    "I''m looking forward to it. Just like Roy, I got bored easily with normal match. Do your best to not make me bored." Albert said.


    What they will do ismenting on the second match. But this is just a tryout and won''t be broadcasted for everyone to hear. Just them, Albert and I.


    ¡­I''m someone from the future, but I learn many new words from Victoria like broadcast and other words.


    The match start, and the two begins with introduction of the first fighters.


    "Oh! The guy casted water ball to protect himself! That''s new. Who would have thought that water ball can be used like that?" Stevenmented.


    "Actually, there are many ways to use magic. He just knows one thing more than you in water magic. But that won''t be enough to stop his opponent from casting fire magic. Water can stop fire? That''s true. Unless the fire is much bigger and stronger than the water." Dwightmented.


    I guess they are still experienced hunters after all. they know a lot about many different magic.


    "Oh! This time, he dodged instead of blocking the attack! That''s just like how you dodged mum''s question when she asked you who stole her money." Dwight said.


    "Hey! That was supposed to be a secret! Just like how you were unable to hold your pee during a hunt. You were already an adult at the time, you silly!" Steven said.


    "That¡­ is why I keep wearing diaper at all time. Even now." Dwight replied shamelessly.


    While listening to the twomenting on the fight, Albert and I just smiled.


    "How is it?" I asked Albert.


    "They are embarrassed at first, but they doing well after getting used to it. And telling some jokes from time to time is a good idea to entertain the audiences. You did well to find these two." Albert said.


    "They seem to be having fun being thementators. And they keep making jokes about each other. Their experience as hunters also helped them in recognizing the magic. This way, even those who are not familiar with elements other than their own will be able to understand more. And they can also learn their own element better. Maybe we need another person as an analyst. Someone who is well-versed in knowledge of all type of magic. Though such person will be difficult to find." I said.


    "We can''t find such person in hurry. But we should be able to prepare someone for the tournament between countries." Albert said.


    We are still listening to how the twinsmenting the match. The second fight, third fight, until the match is over, they are getting better and better. I guess they''re hired.


    "By the way, since we have TVs and broadcasting tool, does that mean you won''t ask for Sonia''s help anymore?"


    If TVs and cameras are getting popr, Albert won''t need Sonia anymore as a way ofmunication.


    "No. For the more important matter, we will ask Sonia. And even more important matter, we will ask you to gather everyone together." Albert said.


    I guess Sonia will still be busy after other ways of distantmunication are invented.

 Chapter 347 - New Addition To The Tournament

    After the second battle of the day is over, Albert agreed for me to hire thementators


    Then, Albert revealed his identity to the twins.


    "It''s interesting to watch the match with you two talking. Everyone will enjoy the match more. I approve of you two as thementators. I will look forward to the next match."


    "¡­"


    "¡­"


    The twins are still shocked after hearing Albert''s true identity that they can''t react properly.


    "Say something. You''re in front of the king." I said.


    "Oh, right! We will do our best to analyze the next matches until the final!" Steven said.


    "Good. From tomorrow onwards, I will watch the matches from my seat. I''ll see you again tomorrow. Keep making the matches interesting. Just be careful to not provoke someone you shouldn''t provoke. Though if you do, just report it to Roy here. He will take care of them." Albert said as he pointed his finger at me.


    Me? Well, I''m the one who found the twins after all. They are my responsibility.


    After that, Albert asked several more questions and the twins answered them honestly. I guess Albert still want to know if they can be trusted or not.


    After the second match is over, the Arena is empty other than some cleaning staffs and earth mages fixing the destroyed parts. Maybe we should consider about the damage from the fight as well. Probably it''s a good idea to let several light mages prepared here so they can protect the audiences with their Barrier magic. Barrier made by light mages are clear and people can see through the barrier.


    Though it''s a good thing that the first day ended with no exceptionally strong mages although some part of the stage is broken.


    The stage in the Arena is 20x20 meters. It''s big enough for two mages to fight, and small enough for the audiences to be able to see everything. This is also simr to the mostly unused Arena in Cassau university.


    Albert and I visited the officials in a room in the Arena. They are still discussing about the first day and speak concern about what I''m thinking. Seems like I don''t need to tell them about the light mages.


    Kron and Oleg are here as well. And since most of them are those Albert can trust, I''m fine showing my face to them. Though they are still surprised to see Albert toe earlier.


    "Y-your majesty! You''re earlier than expected!" One of the officials said.


    "I had help. Though my carriage will bete. I have watched the second match. It was prepared nicely, but we can do better. I have some suggestion to make." Albert said.


    Suggestion? If it''s from the king himself, that''s an order. I can just deny what he wants if it''s something disadvantageous, but Albert''s suggestions are all good. including installing screen in both inside the Arena, and in the square.


    That mean I have to bring all those items here. Well, I''m the one who first suggested that idea so it''s fine. Or was it Victoria who suggested it first?


    While we had a meeting, Spot who was watching the match finds me and wrapped his body around my waist. And he instantly falls asleep. Is it tiring for him to watch a boring match?


    After getting everyone to agree, I installed the screen in the Arena right away, and then in the middle of the night, I installed a screen in the square. People will be surprised to see something unknown suddenly built in one night, but that''s not my problem.


    As for the technologies, Marie said that it will be difficult for anyone to learn about how it was made, unless they kidnapped Marie. That''s why it won''t be a big problem if someone stole the screen. Though the thief will still be given punishment.


    As for Albert, he stays in one of the nobles'' mansion. Someone he revoked their nobility status in the past. But the mansion is still maintained. Maybe Albert decided to stay there back after denouncing that noble while still hiring the servants of the house.


    That''s why Albert, Marie, n, and Lana stayed there. For protection, Oleg and his family will stay there at least until Mustache arrives.


    I also asked for the review of the TV from Veronica who watched the fight in Cassau. She said that the picture was very clear as if someone is trapped inside the TV. Victoria said that it was thanks to the technology from her world,bined with magic in this world that the picture is very clear.


    Lynn, Harold, and old man Henry also watched in their own ces. Only Harold spoke about the match. Old man and Lynn only said about the TVs.


    The next day, as expected, people are gathering at the square to see something new. Though there are some of Oleg''s men who will inform the people when the match is about to start.


    I brought the twin to the same empty room as yesterday, which we have modified. There are another TV here, and magic item to let their voice be heard loudly. Of course their voices will be heard by the camera that broadcasted the match as well, so the people watching from home can hear them. Though only some people have TVs in their home.


    Before the first match started, Kron exined to everyone that there will be some changes. Not in the match, but outside it. The officials also have exined it to the participants so they have to ignore what Steven and Dwight said.


    And now, it''s time for the two to appear.


    "Good morning, everyone! What a good day to kill each other!" Dwight said.


    "Idiot! It''s a match! No one is killing anyone! Sorry about this idiot, but from today, the maych will be analyzed andmented by us. I''m Steven and here''s my partner, Dwight." Steven said.


    "¡­Maych. You said maych. Were you so nervous you bite your tongue?" Dwight said.


    Steven just ignored him and continued, "Before we start, we will introduce the participants from the two teams who will fight."


    "Yeah. And as yesterday, we have two mayches. The first mayches will be¡­" Dwight teased his brother.


    "Enough with the teasing already! I''m sorry I was nervous, okay!"


    "Apologies epted. Now, we will introduce the yers who will fight. The first cheam will be¡­ oh shit."


    "Cheam! You said cheam! Who is the nervous one now!?"


    This time, it was Steven who teases Dwight.


    Those dialogue they spoke were not scripted. They truly bit their own tongue. But thanks to their teamwork, it turned funny for everyone who hear the two bantering. The audiences areughing while still confused about the big screen on the Arena.


    While they are introducing the yers, I also checked the square. The people are confused, but after seeing that they can see the match from there, everyone rushing to that ce. Especially street vendors who saw that as an opportunity. Good thing Oleg''s men are already prepared.


    Back to the Arena. This time, I didn''t see anyone who look bored. In fact, even if the match is boring, they are looking forward for thementators'' talking and joking around. The audiences areughing together. It just like that time I performed as a clown in the circus.


    Now this is amazing. I picked the right people for the job.


    And the first bout is already over.


    "That''s an amazing usage of wind magic. Instead of using Wind sh or any othermonly used offensive wind magic, he made the wind blow and push the opponent outside the stage. ording to the rule, there are several methods to win. When the opponent fainted, the opponent gives up, or the opponent fall outside the stage. And despite being overwhelmed, he won by pushing the opponent off the stage. He''s a smart one." Dwightmented.


    "You don''t need to tell the rules that everyone already knows. Though the opponent seems to beining that it didn''t count. Maybe you are right to tell the rule again. But do you think it will be useful in real battle?" Steven asked.


    "Obviously. Imagine instead of falling from the stage, the opponent will fall from a cliff. Even if you are weaker, you can still win. Though it also depends whether the opponent can fly or not." Dwight said.


    From time to time, the smart one changed. This time, it''s Dwight who is the smart one while Steven is asking question. It also depends in what element they have since the two have different elements despite being twins. Maybe in the future, n won''t have ice magic like Lana? Who knows?


    "I guess you''re right. But that mean just being powerful is not enough to win this tournament. Though by using that rule, those with wind element has advantages." Steven said.


    "You are right. They might be able to fly, but they still need to find a way to win. Continuously using flight magic will spend too much mana. In the long fight, they are the one with disadvantages." Dwight said.


    "Look. Seems like Kron won''t ept thatin since they have been given the rule already. He''s the referee and most people here should know him, right? He''s from Melk after all." Steven said.


    "¡­I don''t know that. I have been in Melk all my life, but I don''t know him."


    "That''s why you need to watch your surrounding! He was one of the strongest hunters back when he was active in Melk. His achievement during the Stampede was so great. Though it''s a wonder why he''s still single."


    "Because he''s bald."


    "Maybe you''re right. He''s not that old but he''s already bald. What a shame. Look at how many disappointed female audiences. Oh, wait. They areughing at him."


    "And he''s looking at us. He''s looking at us! He''s angry! Stop talking about baldness! You also have a bald spot, right?" Dwight said.


    "Bald spot is different from being bald. I''m still lucky." Steven said.


    "Maybe he''s angry because we made fun of him for being single instead. Well, I can''t do anything about that." Dwight said.


    "You also can''t do anything about his baldness either. Sigh¡­ Let''s continue to the next bout. Seems like both sides are ready. But the referee is not ready. Come on, Kron! We want to watch the battle!" Steven said.


    From exining the magic, the strategy, and the rule, to making fun of Kron. They are already used tomentating.


    The match be more interesting as everyone can learn from what the twins said.. Now I''m not bored anymore.

 Chapter 348 - The King Has Arrived

    The first match of the second day ended well. Everyone epted the two new addition to the tournament, namely Steven and Dwight. And people already used to the TV at the square and in the Arena. The number of street vendors stopping by increased a lot, but Oleg''s men made sure that it won''t be too crowded. Luckily, everyone is disciplined and there are no troublemakers.


    Oleg told me that most of the troublemakers stopped causing trouble after the Stampede. They don''t want people to think that they are from the cult.


    As for Steven and Dwight, they are happily enjoyed the audiences'' praises for them. Not just that they are funny, they are also pretty knowledgeable about magic as well. Though the only one who doesn''t like them is Kron. But not to the point where he would hate them.


    Though I don''t know if Kron will still be able to get a girlfriend or not.


    It''s lunch break, and people should be resting and waiting for the next match, but the officials are gathering together including Albert.


    During the first match, he was with Marie and the others in normal audience seats, and not in the VIP seat prepared for him for the final. Though he said that he, Marie, and n will watch from there during the second match where his sister will fight.


    And I was forced to be in the meeting as well. Don''t they know that it''s lunchtime? I''m starving.


    I fill my stomach with the snacks sold in the Arena while listening to the meeting. While next to me are Steven and Dwight who were called here. They seem nervous unlike the time they arementating.


    "Steven and Dwight, right?" one of the officials asked.


    "Yes!" Dwight replied.


    "We''re thinking of having three matches in one day starting tomorrow. Do you think that you can talk that long? Even the first match, I heard you two talking for almost two hours straight. I think you can do well for the second matchter, but what if we add another one? People reacted to the tournament positively. Even more after you two came today. If you can do it, we will do one match in the morning, and two more after lunch," the official asked.


    "We can! We even capable of talking nonsense for ten hours straight in the past!" Steven replied loudly.


    Ten hours straight!? Just what kind of nonsense need that long? Anyway, that n is impossible.


    "I disagree with that n. Just one match took almost two hours. If we add another match, it might not over yet even after it''s dark. It also depends on the strength of the two teams. Like before, the winning team only need to send three participants. If the two teams are evenly matched, both sides might send all five participants and the tournament will be longer," I said.


    Everyone agrees with me, so the schedule will stay with two matches in one day.


    After that, I received a real and had a lunch with Albert''s family as well in the hotel we stayed.


    After lunch, we chatted for a while and returned to the Arena. Now I need to look around for suspicious person again. Though I haven''t found any, which is suspicious as well.


    Howe a big event where even the king is watching and the cult doesn''t even think of causing trouble? Or maybe because of the Stampede, they started to think that Melk is a dangerous city for cult members. If it''s thetter, then I can rest easy.


    "Alright, everyone! Thank you for waiting! It''s me again, Steven, with my partner which is unfortunately my twin brother, Dwight! We meet again!" Steven said.


    "What do you mean by unfortunately!?" Dwight protested.


    "It is what it is. Do you think our parents wanted to have a twin? All twin babies are all identally born. The mother gets pregnant, and BOOM! Twins! Do you really think that just because they are twins, they will get along?" Steven said.


    "If you hate me that much, we can settle itter privately. More importantly, we have a special guest starting today," Dwight said.


    Albert is staring at the twins from his seat. He doesn''t like it when people are making fun of twins. He had twin children after all. Though he kept it as secret from the world.


    Steven and Dwight were lucky to be born normally. As for n and Lana, they needed my help with my knowledge of the future. Though I''m d that I can start spreading the knowledge I have to other doctors in Cassau, and also to old man Henry whom I still meet regrly.


    "Okay then, everyone, please wee our special guest! His majesty, King Albert!" Steven introduced the special guest to the audiences.


    Albert stand from his seat and greeted everyone with a smile.


    Everyone looked at him with respect. And since there''s no one reacting otherwise, I can conclude that there are no cult members here. Even those in the square are looking at the screen the same way.


    "It was also thanks to the invention of the Queen herself that we can see the king clearly and so close. She was the inventor of the¡­ Telelevision Screen where you can watch the Arena. We have an amazing couple as our country leader." Steven said.


    "Yeah! It would be better if you said it correctly. It''s Television. Or TV for short. You put an extra le there." Dwightined.


    "Who cares! Anyway, this is the first match that his majesty will watch, and it''s also the team where his sister, Princess Shirley, will fight! Will we be able to witness how strong her highness is?"


    "Though we already did. For most of us here, people of Melk, myself included, we have witnessed Princess Shirley fighting to protect us in the Stampede. Though at the time, she kept her identity as secret and only reveal it after the Stampede. Anyway, let''s introduce both teams first! The first team is from the Capital University! It''s the team with her highness in it. And¡­ oh! Look at that girl! She''s Ang! She''s someone from Melk! Those from Melk must have known that she''s a genius. Alongside another girl, Ka, they made a great hunter party. And they both fight for the city as well during the Stampede! Despite they were still 15 or 16 at the time, Ang and Ka are the most important members during the Stampede!"


    ¡­I guess they are popr in their own hometown. But¡­


    "But what about me!? I''m the leader of said party, and no one remembers me!" I said. Though it''s not loud enough for other people to hear since they are excited to watch their heroes fight.


    "Because you are not famous. And you kept your identity as secret. That''s why no one knows you."


    Suddenly, the empty seat next to me was taken. It was by none other than Wendy who know the truth.


    "But that doesn''t change the fact that I''m sad. Anyway, why are you here? You can watch the match closer in the private rooms for the team, right?" I asked.


    "I just wanted to feel the excitement here. I''m not from Melk originally, but during the Stampede, I was here. And they are also my student. I want to watch them from here. It''s just by chance that my seat is next to you," Wendy said.


    "Well, that''s fine then."


    "Do you know the other team? They are all exceptional mages and all of them are those who participated in the training camp. I told you this because you might have forgotten about them," Wendy said.


    I look closer to the other team, and there is indeed someone I recognize. He''s one of the summoners I taught. His summon was¡­ I think it was Orc Wizard. Fighting him is the same as fighting two mages at once. And that was before his summoning element leveled up to intermediate level. Has he increased his level and get another summon? Even if he does, I don''t think he will summon all his monsters.


    After listening to the introduction of the two teams, there is a huge difference between the two teams'' reception.


    Most of the audiences cheered for Ang''s team. Because they are considered as heroes during the Stampede. As for the other teams, there are some supporters who came from their city. But their voices can''t be heard because not only the audience in the Arena, but also those who are watching in the square are shouting for Shirley and Ang to win.


    "¡­I feel sorry for the other team. Though I think the result will be obvious," I said.


    "You really want Ka and Ang to fight?" Wendy asked.


    "Yes. Ang is overpowered with her talent, but Ka is smart in her own way. Ka might have some strategies for when she fights Angter. But¡­ the weak point of Ka''s team is that rich man''s son who is currently trying to flirt with Ka. Oh! He now knows about Ka''s nickname, the ''Nutcracker''."


    I can see that the man is crouching down in pain.


    Back to the Arena, Steven and Dwight finished the introduction of the two teams.


    "And now, we will begin the match!" Dwight said.


    "No, we won''t. For today, andter in the final, there''s one person who will start the match. It has been arranged previously. If you will, your majesty," Steven said.


    Albert stood up from his seat and everyone is silent.


    "I may have beente for the previous three matches, but from what I heard, all the participants have fought well. I''m proud to be your king. And now, we will witness another two teams who are aiming to win this tournament. Just because one side is more well-known than the others, doesn''t mean that the other team is weak. All of you, fight to your heart content! Now, the first fighters, please step forward into the stage."


    One person from each team entered the stage. From the capital team, it''s Fred. A noble''s son who seems much better than any other nobles.


    "Now¡­FIGHT!"

 Chapter 349 - No Holding Back!

    Right now, I''m watching the fierce battle in the second match of the second day. It''s Ang''s team, against a team with one of the summoners I taught in it. Though that summoner is still hasn''t taken this turn yet. Since he already has an Orc Wizard and probably the strongest one in the team, I guess his turn would be thest one. And everyone in his team are those who participated in the training camp.


    As for Ang''s team, it was the man from nobility, Fred, who appears first. He fought well despite not having learned magic control yet. If he learned about it, he might be as strong as Shirley and the others. Though he might still far from Ang who is a freak.


    The fact that he''s not famous enough for me to remember his name means he hadn''t reached his full potential in my previous life. Unless he''s with the cultter. I hope that''s not the case.


    "What a fierce match we witness here today! It''s just the first match, and the fight is already so intense!" Dwight said.


    "Just a first match? Do you think that the next match will be at least this exciting? Are you sure?" Steven asked.


    "If I''m the one who arrange the lineup of the fighters, I would arrange it so that the weakest one wille first. And thest one will be the strongest one. The arrangement of the fighters is also a strategy. Making the weakest onee first mean even if they lose, they will still reveal the opponent''s hand. That will make the next fighter prepared for the next fight against that person." Dwight said.


    "I suppose you''re right. But what if the first one is the strongest so the team can defeat the enemies on his own, so the other teammates still won''t reveal their secret. That will also be useful, right?" Steven asked.


    "You''re right in thinking that way. But If the strongest one lost, then the other teammates will have their spirits broken and unable to fight well in the next match. Of course what I said was just if I''m the strategist. We still don''t know if the two fighters on the stage is the weakest or not. Though I hope the fight continue to be this good until it''s over." Dwight said.


    Dwight might be right that Shirley decided to put the strongest er. In case her team is strong enough to not need all five yers fight until the final, they can keep the strongest fighter''s ability as secret. If I''m right, it should be Ang who willest. But knowing her personality, I think she might want to fight as soon as possible. I also thought that she would fight first.


    Hmm¡­ maybe it''s thanks to Shirley. She managed to properly takes care of Ang that Ang would listen to everything she says. Or it''s just Ang who has grown up.


    "Keeping your secret for the final is a good idea, but do you think it''s possible? Everyone participating in this tournament are the five strongest of the college they are from. It will be difficult to not get a chance to fight. But if they use their strongest as their fourth fighter and the second strongest as theirst, that second strongest can be the trump card who won''t be used," Steven said.


    "You''re right. In the end, a strategy is also important for this tournament. Whether they want to send their strongestst, or first, or maybe, even the strongest is not their trump card, it''s all a good strategy. Oh! It seems like Frederick from the capital is winning! The opponent is down on his knee, and unable to dodge the next attack. He gives up! The winner is Frederick!" Dwight announced the winner.


    So, he won, huh? I guess he''s pretty strong. But he''s damaged quite badly to continue the next match.


    Because of the rule of not allowing a third party to interfere the match, they can''t send a healer to heal him. Each team has their own healer. Some of them are participants like Ka, and some are not.


    And because Fred is not a healer, he has no choice but to endure the pain. But he can give up going to the second match if he wants to.


    "Oh! Seems like Participant Frederick refused to leave the stage! He''s keen on fighting in the next bout! And his team allowed it! What do you think, Dwight?" Steven asked.


    "If it was me, I think I would give up. But this is a team battle, and the prize? They will be dubbed as the strongest. Do you think anyone participating here would give up easily? Only weaklings want to do that. As for Frederick, I can''t speak for him, but he must be entering this tournament because he''s aiming to be the strongest," Dwight said.


    "You''re right! I don''t know about Frederick, but I know that you will give up if you''re in his ce!" Steven said.


    "That''s what you''re agreeing with?!"


    "Do you think all of the fighters thought that way?" Steven asked again while ignoring his brother.


    "Hopefully that''s the case. There''s no way that some kind of idiot would bribe his way to represent his college, right? If there is, and he''s a weakling, he''s not a fighter. He''s just aughingstock. Though that will be entertaining as well, right?"


    The two now started exining what they think about this tournament is. Damn! I never thought that they would be so smart!


    They know how to make people entertained, and how to analyze and exin about not just the magic used by the fighters, but also the tournament as a whole as well despite no one exined it to them.


    But they''re right. A weakling who bribe his way to be a participant is inside the private room for Cassau University. He seems to be in panic. Did he only realize about the tournament now?


    Other than him, there are also several other people who are panicked. That''s what you get for bribing.


    I look at Wendy who is sitting next to me and know that she''s thinking of the same thing as well.


    "Wendy, go and see the team. Seems like that guy is about to say or do something stupid," I said.


    "Can you believe that I''m the only one who deny his rmendation while most professor agree? There are some who doesn''t agree, but they won''t speak. This morning, he even said it proudly that his father will be watching his fight, so he asked to be put as the first fighter tomorrow. Yesterday''s fights were not as intense as today, so he must be thinking that everyone is about the same level. Though hearing he wanted to be the first one, Ka and the others happily agreed. If he wants to change it now, that''s impossible. Anyway, I''ll take a look at them now. I''ll be backter. Hopefully, for Ang''s turn," Wendy said as she leaves her seat.


    Well, that''s only if Ang got her turn. But seeing that this is our hometown, I guess she wants to show everyone how strong she has be. Everyone who lives here in Melk, want to watch Ang, Shirley, and Ka''s fight as they are their heroes. That mean, Shirley and Ang will fight.


    The match continues, and Fred is defeated while I watched Wendy scolding the annoying guy in the private room.


    After Fred, it was the male agent''s turn who won the match, and lose on his second. Then the female agent fought, winning against the one who defeated the male agent, but lose against the opponent''s fourth fighter.


    Now, both teams only have two fighters left. The first three fighters of both teams are almost equal. That''s how they ended up with this.


    The opponent still has the ice mage who defeated the female agents, and the summoner who will be thest one. Seems like the ice mage didn''t go all out against the female agent. He''s reserving his strength for the next match.


    As for the team from the capital, it was Shirley and Ang who haven''t got their turn yet. And the next match is Shirley''s turn.


    "What a turn of event! Both teams are almost equal, and now they are both down to theirst two fighters! And from the capital, it''s her highness, princess Shirley!" Steven announced.


    "But will it be okay? The opponent is facing the princess of the kingdom. He might hesitate, you know?" Dwight asked.


    "Not necessarily. Wait, his majesty he has an announcement to make," Steven said.


    It''s still in the middle of the match, but Albert is standing from his seat to make an announcement to not hold back. I guess it''s good for him to arrive early so he can say this.


    Even if he didn''t say it, the agent from the other team would still go all-out. But people would still me him for going all-out whatever the result might be. But if Albert is the one allowing it, the people can''t get angry.


    "What an exciting match that we have witnessed today! But it''s not over yet. I''m sorry for stopping it, but it''s something that I have to say. NO ONE IS PERMITTED TO HOLD BACK! Even if the opponent is a noble, or a princess, no one is allowed to hold back! Use all your strength against your opponent and show everyone how strong you are! Do not disrespect the tournament! Not just this match, but all matches have to be fought with the intention to win! That''s all I have to say. Do not disappoint me! You can continue the match."


    Thanks to Albert''s announcement, it won''t be a problem if the ice mage going all out and injure Shirley. And no one will me him for hurting Shirley. Though I think Shirley would still win it. But I don''t know if she could win against the summoner.


    Well, I can only know once they fight.

 Chapter 350 - Shirleys Match

    "Then, Princess Shirley will fight against Zack! And none of them are allowed to hold back! We have just heard about the announcement from his majesty. This way, Zack will be fine if he injured Princess Shirley. Though that necessarily mean that Princess will be injured," Steven said.


    Thanks to Albert''s announcement, no one would think of holding back in the tournament whoever they are fighting. Though I don''t think anyone who attended the training camp with me will hold back in the fight. If they do, Albert will be angry. No one wanted to feel the rage of the king.


    "What do you mean by that, Steven? Do you think that Princess will win? Even though you just see how capable Zack is?" Dwight asked.


    "The winner is still unknown before the match happened. But we, people of the Melk, especially the hunters and guards who protected the city from the Stampede few years back, have seen how capable princess is in fighting. And ever since, Princess Shirley must have grown a lot stronger than that time. As for Zack, we still don''t know fully how good he is. But I expect some surprise to happen," Steven said.


    "You expect the Princess to lose?" Dwight said.


    "That''s not what I said, you idiot! I said that Zack might still hiding some trump cards in the previous fight. He only used his ice magic then, right? Maybe he has a few more elements as strong as that," Steven said.


    "You''re probably right. And Princess Shirley herself is also an ice mage. We will witness two amazing ice mages fighting on the stage. And this won''t be thest bout either! The capital team still has Ang, and the other also has another mage who haven''t fight yet! We still won''t know who will be the winner of this match!" Dwight said.


    "And Kron has signaled the start of the battle! Let''s see who will prevail!"


    The battle hasn''t started, but everyone is already excited since they will see Shirley fight again. Even outside, at the square, everyone is stopping what they''re doing and have their eyes locked to the big screen.


    Hey, you street vendor! That give that hotdog to the buyer already! If not, I will go there and take it from him! This is not a good time to stop their movement. And why is the buyer also stopped?


    The match started with multiple ice magic attack. When Shirley attack, the opponent used ice shield. When the opponent attack with ice magic, Shirley defended with ice shield as well. So far, neither of them used their other element to fight.


    "What an intense match we''re seeing! Ice Spikes are flying all over the ces. Some are deflected by the other''s Ice Shield and went toward the audience seat, but thankfully, we have light mage prepared all around the stage to quickly cast Light Barrier just in case situation like that happen. Seems like not just the participants who are strong, even the officials are capable mages as well," Dwight said.


    "Please refrain inmentating about the official at the moment. Can''t you see that the Princess Shirley and Zack fighting on the stage? Comment about that instead!" Steven said to his twin brother.


    "Then you do that! Their match is too amazing that I can''t do my job to deliver properly. I don''t even know who is attacking who!" Dwight shouted.


    "Right now, it''s¡­ hmm¡­ this is an amazing battle for all ice mage who watched it. They will learn a lot from this fight and can get stronger as well," Steven said.


    "Now you''re talking about other ice mages!" Dwight said angrily.


    I have to say that this match is much better than other fight I''ve watched before even if those two didn''tmentate. Though hearing them just make things better.


    But there''s one thing that they didn''t see. It''s that Shirley is still looking calm, while the opponent can''t no longer have theposure to continue the battle this way. He will probably use his other element soon.


    And just as I expected, that guys used earth magic to attack Shirley from below. But Shirley managed to predict that as well, as she leaped to the sky and fly. Did she know that the opponent has earth element?


    Oh, wait! They both are in the training camp! And since Shirley is someone who responsible on teaching the ice mages, she must have known that guy''s other element. I guess those who attended training camp can''t hide their elements to each other.


    The opponent seems to have given up on winning. But he''s still nning on making Shirley to waste her magic so thest fighter can win. Thest fighter for that team is the summoner who has fire element as well. Combined with the Orc Wizard who can use fire magic as well, Shirley will have to fight two mages at the same time after this match.


    But I guess the summoner needed to reserve his mana for the match against Ang. That''s why this guy is trying to waste Shirley''s mana and stamina at the same time.


    "This is the longest bout I''ve witnessed ever since I startedmentating. But it seems that Princess Shirley will be victorious. The opponent has spent too much mana that his Earth Wall finally broken by the Princess'' Ice Spikes. But it seems to be tiring for the Princess as well. Will she be able to go on with thest opponent?" Dwight said.


    The battle is not over yet. Turns out, the opponent still hadn''t given up. He pretended to be tired and made the Earth Wall weak on purpose. It''s all to get Shirley let down her guard. And as expected, Shirley let her guard down.


    He got Shirley with a surprise attack using everyst bit of his mana to use his most powerful Earth Pir that raise and can reach Shirley who is flying. Shirley reacted too slow as her legs got hit by the pir. That must have hurt. Her leg is broken. She needs to get healed soon.


    But Shirley also hasn''t given up as she used a Tornado to finally blow the opponent outside of the stage while enduring the pain.


    "Th-the victory goes to Princess Shirley!" Steven announced the winner of the match.


    "WHOOOOAAAAAA!!"


    The audience gives standing ovation toward not just Shirley, but her opponent as well. in the end, that match was too amazing for them to watch.


    "That was intense! Who would have thought that after all that, Zack got defeated by leaving the stage?" Steven asked.


    "That''s wrong. Just look at Zack right now. He''s unconscious. Even if he got blown away andnded on the stage, he would still lose because he''s unable to fight any longer. But really, this battle is too great. Even his majesty is standing as well," Dwight said.


    "But still, Zack is amazing. He pretended to be weak so Princess Shirley let down her guard. Had she reacted any slower, he would have won. But in the end, he still lost. Not just that, he even made Princess Shirley casted powerful magic in the end. This way, even if she continues the next match, she won''t have enough mana left to cast other powerful magic," Steven said.


    "Yeah, but she must have injured her leg quite badly from thatst attack. The Princess already have a hard time standing. I doubt she will continue fighting," Dwight said.


    Kron then asked Shirley if she wants to continue, and Shirley insisted on keep going.


    "Oh! Princess Shirley decided to continue! Is it okay? She''s injured badly there. I can see her right leg is swollen. I think it''s broken," Steven said.


    "But look at his majesty! He nodded and agree to let Princess Shirley fight! His majesty must have faith in his sister," Dwight said.


    Or maybe he has faith in me as a doctor. I don''t see anyone whom I taught about medical knowledge around here. That mean I will be the one performing the surgery if anything happened.


    But to break the Princess'' leg¡­ that guy got guts. If her injury got worse, the opponent''s team will be hated by the audience. Though Albert will stop it before it goes too far.


    "Wendy, I''ll be leaving," I said to Wendy who sat next to me. She has returned after scolding the stupid guy in the middle of Shirley''s match.


    "You won''t watch the next match?"


    "I''ll watch it from the infirmary. Her leg is broken and I will fix it."


    I also see that Sophie is leaving her seat ande this way after seeing me standing up. She knows that I will perform a surgery on Shirley and wille to assist me.


    As for our healer, Ka, she didn''t move at all despite watching Shirley got injured.


    Well, they are enemies at the moment. That''s why Ka won''t help Shirley at least during the duration of the tournament.


    That''s fine since we can ask another healer to heal Shirleyter. Though the difference in the quality of the healing magic will be huge.


    Seems like Fred asked Shirley to leave the stage, but she refused. Well, I''ll watch her lose from the infirmary.


    I told Sonia to tell Ang to get someone to bring Shirley to the infirmary to be healed.


    As I entered the infirmary with Sophie, the match is over. And Shirley lost. But the injury she received from before didn''t seem to get worse. I guess the summoner didn''t aim at her leg.


    He only used fire magic and didn''t call his Orc Wizard. And he aimed urately at Shirley who is flying. Shirley was falling to the ground, but Ang caught her and told the others to bring Shirley here.


    Albert look worried a bit, but he looked at the direction of the infirmary. Despite not having a see-through vision, he can tell that I''m already here.


    "The patient will arrive soon. And they brought a healer as well. Tell me if you know her from the training camp or not, okay?"


    "If the oneing here is the healer from the capital, then yes. She''s from the training camp." Sophie said.


    "I guess Shirley won''t have to worry about not participating the next match then. Here we go."


    Shirley arrived quickly while being carried by the male agent in her team. And the healer from the capital is the same person that Sophie told me. We quickly began the operation as the noise made by the audience can be heard here.


    Seems like they decided to take a break before thest fight. It was too intense and the stage needed to be repaired. And the earth mage responsible in repairing it takes his time doing it.


    I guess Shirley should be healed by the time Ang''s fight started.

 Chapter 351 - Quick Fight

    I finished the surgery so quickly that Sophie had a hard time keeping up with my speed.


    "As a surgeon, you need to have a good physical ability. Your speed, and precisions are important so the patient can be healed quickly. Your stamina is important for difficult surgery that might need hours to operate. Even in my past life, although I''m not a well-known surgeon, I still had to operate a patient for twenty hours straight," I said to Sophie who is catching her breath with just fifteen minutes operation. Though it''s more like because of the pressure.


    "I understand," Sophie said.


    "Good. I don''t need you to be as strong as I am. Don''t overexert yourself," I said with concern.


    "I know. Though a twenty hours operation? What kind of illness it is?" Sophie asked.


    "Brain tumor," I replied.


    "So, you cut open someone''s skull and touched the brain directly?" Sophie asked.


    "And that was still a normal operation. There is a more difficult patient that needed to be operated for seventy hours straight. It says that they needed several surgeons to operate one man," I said.


    "Then what kind of patient is the most difficult? At least for you." Sophie asked.


    "Pregnant woman," I replied without hesitation.


    "What illness?"


    "That''s the thing. Pregnancy is not an illness. Even back then when I helped Marie, I''m not a hundred percent confident. Sometimes, the baby died for no reason after they are born. Sometimes, they died in the womb. Sometimes, the mother died even when they are healthy after giving birth. Every pregnancy is different. For me, they are the most difficult patient," I said.


    "Hmm¡­ and you want to have children in the future?" Sophie asked.


    "Obviously! Delivering babies are the most rewarding when it seeded. Whether it''s through normal way, or through operation. After my first time delivering a baby, that was when I first realized that children are precious. Though that will still be in the future," I said.


    I finished suturing Shirley''s leg, and asked the healer to heal Shirley.


    In the room, there are four of us if I don''t include Victoria. Everyone here knows that this is my second life, so I don''t mind telling them about it.


    And during the operation, I used a gas to make Shirley not feel any pain while she''s still conscious. So, she heard everything we talked.


    "Alright, it''s done. Victoria, support her leg. The people need to know that she''s okay," I said.


    "Is the match still not over?" Shirley raised her body and asked.


    "It hasn''t even started yet. The earth mage purposely let the reparation goes slow. It also to let the one who defeated you take some rest for thest bout. And everyone is still worried about you. Now go and show them that you''re okay. I''ll be watching from the audience seat," I said.


    After that, all of us went to separate direction after leaving the infirmary. Shirley and the healer go to where her other teammates are, with Victoria as Shirley''s support for her leg. As for Sophie, she returns to where Lina and the others are watching.


    I also return back to my seat next to Wendy.


    "How is she?" Wendy asked.


    "She''s fine. She will be healed for her next match," I said.


    "I can''t believe that the first one to be injured badly would be her. What about Zack?"


    "Who?"


    "The guy she defeated."


    "Their healer is enough to heal him. He doesn''t need any surgery," I said.


    I looked at the stage and see that the reparation ispleted. And the twomentators keep talking the whole time the reparation is undergoing. They are too good at talking.


    "Oh! It seems like thest fight for the day will begin shortly. Who do you think will win, Steven?" Dwight asked.


    "As someone who was born and raised in Melk, I want Ang to win obviously. Though I don''t know how strong her opponent, Max, is. He only used Fireball to defeat her highness. Oh, look! Look at the bench for the capital team! Princess Shirley is healed and she will cheer for her team from the bench!" Steven said.


    Hearing that, everyone''s eyes looked at the capitals'' bench. Even the camera operator also did the same to let those at the square see Shirley.


    Shirley noticed that everyone is watching, so she smiled and waved her hand. Albert smiled slightly after seeing her seems healthy, and took a nce at me. That''s his way of saying thank you, I guess.


    "So far in the tournament, Princess Shirley is the first one to get seriously injured. But it seems like she is fully healed now. That mean she will be able y for her next fight in a few days," Steven said.


    "I''m so d that her condition is stable. Anyway, the main actor here is not the princess. It''s the two who are already standing on the stage! Everyone, please wee Max and Ang!" Dwight announced.


    "Wait, the match hasn''t started yet, so what is Max doing?" Steven asked.


    "That''s¡­ he''s summoning a monster! What a surprise, he''s a summoner! And his summon is¡­ oh my god! It''s an Orc Wizard!" Dwight said.


    Just like he said, Max summoned the Orc Wizard before the fight started. That''s fine as long as it''s not an attack magic toward the opponent.


    "An Orc Wizard? That mean not just Ang has to face two enemies, but she has to face two mages! Can she handle fighting two at once? Even more, it was known that summoned monsters are much stronger than simr monsters in the wild. The odd seems not good for Ang¡­" Steven said.


    "Yeah, but do you remember about the Orc Emperor case in the past? Where Kron and several other hunters defeated an entire Orc settlement led by the Orc Emperor? I remember that Ang and Ka were there as well. In fact, it was her party who first found the settlement. She should at least have the strength to fight multiple Orcs at once. But since her enemies have human as well, it might still be difficult to win for her," Dwight said.


    Why do I keep being forgotten? It was me! That clown in the guild was me! Not even my name, they didn''t even remember that a clown was there! I''m so sad and disappointed.


    After analyzing the two fighters, Kron finally started the match. Max quickly split up with the orc and the two attacked Ang at the same time. Max with his fire magic, and the Orc Wizard with its earth magic.


    Everyone is shocked, not by how Max attacked. But by how Ang used two attributes at the same time to defend herself. An earth magic more powerful than the Orc Wizard, and an Ice Shield to protect herself from the fire.


    "What an amazing performance by Ang! She blocked two attack at the same time! And¡­ what?"


    Steven was confused while stillmentating. And not just him, the audiences as well. it was because of Ang''s magic.


    Everyone is quiet now. Even the twomentators who can talk non-stop stopped talking.


    What Ang did was simple.


    After blocking the attacks, Ang flew to the sky, and used multiple magic at the same time to defeat the two. A Wind sh to attack the Orc Wizard, and Fire Balls and Ice Spikes toward Max.


    Max couldn''t defend himself, so the Orc has no choice but to go there and protect him. That''s the weakness of splitting up. They should have stayed together. Though the chance for them to win would still be small.


    Ang''s Wind sh missed, but the Fireball hit the Orc Wizard''s Earth Wall. As for the Ice Spikes, Max melted it with his fire before they reached him.


    But now, the two enemies are at the same spot. Ang quicklynded on the stage, and raised a Dome shaped wall to block the two from escaping, and an opening in one side so Ang''s attack will reach.


    The two weren''t prepared, but the Orc Wizard instinctively raised another Earth Wall in front of the opening. Unfortunately, Ang added more power in her fire magic. She added wind to make the fire bigger. It''s not as big as when I added mmable gas since the wind not only carried the mmable gas, but it was still too powerful for the Earth Wall by the Orc Wizard to endure.


    The wall got destroyed easily, and the two inside the dome got barbequed. Though I think Ang is still holding back since I know she has no intention in killing them.


    The fire didn''t damage the two directly, but the heat and the burnt oxygen made the two lose their consciousness. Ang won easily.


    "¡­th- THE WINNER IS ANGELA!"


    The first one to react is Kron. He knows how strong Ang is and has sparred with her several times, but this was also his first time seeing her fight like that. Is it the influence of going to college? I doubt it. She''s not that smart academically. But her intuition and instinct are top-notch. She learned about magic from her surrounding, and improve them by herself. That''s how much of a genius she is.


    "S-SHE WON! ANGELA WON THE FIGHT IN AN INSTANT!" Dwight shouted.


    Finally, it was as if time moved again. Everyone cheered seeing her victory.


    "Strong! Too Strong! The enemy has a powerful summon and it was as if she was outnumbered, but that is no problem for Ang! That''s just how strong she is! She has be much more powerful than back then! I can''t believe what I just saw! She finished the fight in an instant! And¡­"


    Steven and Dwight can''t stop their praises to the victor, Ang. And the person herself is smiling and waved at everyone in the audience.


    I just looked at everyone''s reaction and see mainly three difference expression.


    First is those who seem to be excited at how strong someone can be. Then, those who think that reaching that height is impossible for them but got excited at her strength. Lastly, those who seem bitter.


    Now, my job here is to investigate those who seem bitter at seeing Ang''s strength. I''ll skip the participants because they may just be bitter since they will face Ang in the future. As for the others, I hope I can remember their faces.. I''ll check if they are from the cult or not.

 Chapter 352 - Suspicious People

    "The fight is over. Now, I have some work to do," I said as I stand from my seat.


    "Work? Wait, did you find any of them?" Wendy next to me asked.


    "Possibly. I won''t be back at the hotel. And tell Ka and Jewel that I might not be there for their match tomorrow. But if the job can be finished in one night, I''lle," I said.


    After that, while no one is moving from their seats as they are enraptured by the quick and overwhelming victory of Ang.


    As I stood from my seat, Albert is ncing at me. I just raise my hand slightly to say that I''m busy and he nodded. Even though he has no far sight like me, his vision is still good.


    I left the Arena. This time, unlike yesterday, outside of the Arena is empty since most people are at the square watching the fight. But I still went to an empty alley just in case.


    Then I opened a portal toward Victoria''s location.


    "Victoria, we had some work to do," I said.


    "You found them?" Victoria asked as she release herself from Shirley''s leg while creating clones to take over.


    "I''ll follow them for now. Let''s go."


    "What about Spot?"


    "He''ll follow me as soon as he noticed that I''m no longer in the Arena. Shirley, congrats on winning. See youter," I said to Shirley.


    As for Fred, he was too focused to Ang on the stage as he doesn''t notice me opening a portal. That''s why I dare to use a portal even though I still haven''t fully trusted him.


    There are about three people from the Arena who seem bitter at Ang''s strength. There are actually more, but those people are with other teams participating in the tournament. That''s not enough to be suspicious of them. They are just analyzing their opponent.


    Other than those three, there are five others with the same bitter expression watching from the square. I''ll investigate them all to see if they are from the cult. If they are, since they don''t have explosive device in their mouth, I can only suspect that they are expert level mages.


    Let''s see where they are going after the match. It''s difficult to keep focusing my sight on eight of them. I need Victoria''s help.


    "Victoria, make a clone and turn them as small as possible. I will attach them to each one of them. Eight clones will do," I said.


    "So, there are eight people. Understood," Victoria replied.


    Victoria did as I say, and now, I have eight peanut-sized Blobbies in my hand. Now, to attach them to the suspicious people while I still remember how they look.


    The square is still crowded, and the five targets are having a problem getting out of the crowd. They just waited until everyone else leaving. And I use that chance.


    If they are expert level mages, they should be able to notice when I threw the Blobbies at them. That''s why I need to get close to them.


    Luckily, there''s someone who sells peanut for snacks during the fight. I''ll just disguised myself as that guy who is leaving the square, and pretend to be selling peanuts. I stole some of them from that guy. Well, it doesn''t count as stealing if I left some money behind, right? He was also happy to find the money and the note I left behind.


    I get closer to the targets one-by-one, and when I''m near them close enough to touch them, I stuck a Blobby on their clothes. Those Blobbies then will move to the inner part of the clothes so they will be harder to find.


    That''s all five from the square, now it''s the three in the Arena.


    Hmm¡­ luckily, some people from Melk are happily used their fire magic as a firework. Some of the spark hit other people, but it won''t damage them. It''s fine for me to threw the Blobbies at them I believe.


    Everyone is merry at Ang''s victory. Well, those who are from Melk I believe. And each time the person closest to the three shot a firework, I threw a Blobby.


    They don''t seem to notice the Blobby. Now all eight people are marked. Let''s follow them.


    First, two out of the three from the Arena, they are entering different private room for the participating team. I guess they are some kind of analyzer for the team. They seem bitter while telling the participants something.


    I guess those two aren''t cult members.


    As for the other one¡­ he''s already gone. Let''s follow the other people at the square first.


    Three of them are crying. Don''t tell me that they are gambling for Ang''s team to lose? I guess the odd is quite huge after all. they must have spent a lot of money for gambling. Well, it''s their own fault.


    Then three left to go.


    "Roy, thest guy from the Arena and one person from the square are meeting up," Victoria reported.


    "Well, they are suspicious. Let''s see about the other one from the square," I said.


    "As for thatst guy, I don''t think you need to worry. He''s someone from the same school as you, Ka, and Ang. And whenever you''re not around, that guy would try to flirt with either Ang or Ka. He must be bitter because the gap between them have be too big," Victoria said.


    "Is that so? I don''t remember him at all," I said.


    "I don''t doubt that. But if you want, I''ll keep all my clones to all eight of them," Victoria said.


    "Yeah, do that. Let''s follow those two now. Oh, and Spot ising this way."


    Spot flew toward me and as usual, he wrapped his body around my waist.


    "Where are you going, Roy?" Spot asked.


    "Following suspicious people."


    "Do we finally have someone to kill?"


    "Probably."


    Since Spot is here, I asked him to let us ride him. Flying is better than walking. Especially since he has camouging ability.


    Thest two people are moving farther than my Divine Vision''s range, but Victoria told me where they''re going.


    They are entering the same inn. I doubt that those two men are staying in one room, but they entered a room with someone else in it. Let''s eavesdrop on them.


    I covered my body with Aura, as we dropped from Spot''s body andnded on the rooftop. But since Spot can still use his camouging skill even in his small form, we are still invisible to normal people.


    And with my Aura covering my body, expert level mages have a hard time detecting my presence. I got close enough to hear them talking with my heightened senses.


    "How was the Princess'' match? Is she strong?" the man waiting in the room asked.


    "She is strong. It will be difficult to kidnap her and use her to ckmail the king," the man watching from the square replied.


    "Sigh¡­ I thought that since she doesn''t have any royal guards with her, she would be an easy target. But she hasn''t reached expert level yet, right?"


    "That''s right. But there''s a surprise in the match as well. The Princess'' teammate, thest one to fight, her name is Ang. And she''s about as strong as expert level mage even though she hasn''t reached that level yet."


    "Seriously? Should we return to kidnapping at the king''s son? But we keep failing. Everyone we sent were either killed or imprisoned."


    "In any case, we need to find a way to conquer this kingdom. It''s the Archbishop''s order. This way, we can be closer to the True God and we will get promotion. Let''s attack the king when he''s resting tonight."


    Yup. I don''t need to hear anymore than that. They are saying about True God. That''s the Evil God that the cult worshipped. Enough for me to confirm that they are from the cult. And since they are given the order directly from that Archbishop who is a master level mage, they must be expert level mages.


    Good thing that they are in a single cramped room together. Now I can finish this mission before dinner.


    I broke the window, entered the room, and quickly shed the three cult members with Victosword. Unfortunately, one of them is still alive. The one who watched the match in the Arena.


    He quickly used Wind sh to attack me. I covered my body with Aura, and protect myself from the attack with my right arm covered with transformed Victoria. But the transformation is too slow. The Wind sh is too fast that it managed to hit the unprotected area of my right arm before Victoria finished her transformation. Though I grabbed the tip of my Reizpear and killed the mage.


    That Wind sh not only injure my right arm. It also destroyed the wall to the next room and killed the person staying.


    I need to get out of here before anyone noticed me.


    "Victoria, don''t loosen the grip on my arm. The bleeding is quite bad, but I need to get out of here fast. Spot, back to the hotel."


    It''s been a while since I was hurt like this. Thest time was¡­ when I fought Grandpa Werewolf.


    The pain is still bearable, but I need Ka to stop the bleeding before I lost too much blood. I also need to give report to Albert.. What a pain.

 Chapter 353 - I Was Told To Rest

    As soon as I entered the hotel, I quickly went to where Ka is at.


    "Oh, Roy. You''re back already?" Candy asked.


    "Yes. I finished some work but I might have more. Candy, Wendy, you two wille with me to meet him tonight," I said.


    I just told Candy and Wendy that we will meet Albert. Even though I didn''t name him because there are other people than us here, they know who I''m talking about. And as expected, Fred is confused.


    And I saw Ka descending from the stairs. Just to be quick, I raised my injured arm which is covered by Victoria.


    "Ka, heal," I said as I make Victoria unwrap herself from my arm so blood start dripping from my injury.


    Seeing that I''m injured, those who know about my strength looked at me with concern. Ka also hurriedly approach me to heal my arm.


    "Did you let down your guard?" Ka asked.


    "And they are more resilience than I expected. Sorry," I apologized.


    "Geez¡­ When was thest time I need to heal you? You''re leaving now?"


    "Yeah. I don''t know if I can cheer on you tomorrow, but good luck. You too, Jewel. And Sara. And the dude I don''t know his name. And your fifth annoying member."


    After my arm is healed, I took Candy and Wendy with me to meet Albert. We are riding on Spot''s back.


    It is the first time Wendy rode on Spot, so she was a little bit scared. But she got used to it quickly.


    "Why are you taking us?" Wendy asked.


    "So, you know what order to give to other agents. You two must have known all the other agents'' face, right? Those who participated in the tournament and those who didn''t? It''s just to let the information spread faster. Though I''m sorry if in the end, it was unnecessary for you toe," I said.


    "No problem. The fact that you called for us mean it was that urgent. Even if we are not needed, it''s best if we at least listen to your report. You didn''t get the others because you want them to focus on their matches, right?" Candy asked me. She knows what I''m thinking.


    "Right. And I doubt they will lose the first match tomorrow."


    "Even if their opponent is full of agents like Ang''s opponent?" Wendy asked.


    "¡­how many teams have the members full of the agents?" I asked.


    "About seventeen. Two are the seeded teams," Wendy said.


    "What about this morning''s team and yesterday''s winners?" I asked.


    "Yesterday afternoon was a match between two teams full of agents," Wendy answered.


    Which mean that we already lost two teams full of agents. Why aren''t the official made it so all the teams filled with the agents will fight those who aren''t in the first round? That way, the second will be filled with all sixteen teams with powerful mages.


    Maybe the officials made the draw fairly. That''s why Ang''s team faced against a powerful opponent right away.


    As soon as we arrive at the mansion Albert is staying, we greeted Oleg who is still staying as his guard in Melk until Mustache arrive.


    "Is Albert in?" I asked.


    "He''s inside. Should Ie as well?" Oleg asked back worriedly since I didn''te here alone.


    "If you want to."


    He decided to follow us inside.


    Albert has been notified by Sonia that we''re arriving. As for Marie, I can see her sleeping with Lana and n. Sophie must have sneaked Lana to them after the match is over.


    Once we meet Albert, I told him what I saw, what I heard, and what I did to him.


    "So, they were the ones responsible for the kidnapping attempt for my son? Did you kill all of them?" Albert asked.


    "I did. They are all expert level mages, and we are fighting at an inn. And someone else in the next room was killed as well. I don''t know who," I said.


    "Is there anything strange that you see after you killed them all and left the ce?"


    "No. Everyone there were scared, which is the normal reaction. They just got surprised that the room is suddenly destroyed. I don''t think any of them are cult members. Though I might be wrong," I said.


    "Sigh¡­ just how many expert level mages do they have? They really thought that Ang is as powerful as expert level mage?" Albert asked again.


    "Yes. After reporting to the guy waiting at the inn that kidnapping Shirley is too difficult, someone reported that Ang is too strong. They must have thought that Ang and Shirley are staying together and decided to return to kidnapping n. They said that they were sent by the Archbishop to conquer this kingdom."


    "That mean they will keep sending people here. Or the capital. Since I''m away from the capital, they will target Hector," Albert said.


    "Is he the Prime Minister already?" I asked.


    "Yes. Hector will do the job as the Prime Minister. As for Lowe, he didn''t retire. He just picked more difficult job which is to negotiate with some dangerous people to get information about new arrival at the capital."


    "Well, now what? Should I go patrol more often?" I asked.


    "No need. You brought Wendy and Candy so they can quickly report this to all the other agents, right? Those two will inform everything to other agents, while Oleg will inform the guards. Tell everyone to improve the security and investigate any suspicious people. Just like Roy said, you might need to observe their expression when they saw powerful participants. Don''t be too conspicuous. Maybe send some agents as the street vendor at the square as well."


    Albert started making some ns to increase the security around Melk. Tomorrow is a different day. There might be more arrivalsing from other ce.


    Even now, there are many people who stayed outside the gate and built a tent there just to watch the match. I guess I should check on those campers as well.


    The three quickly do the task given to them. But¡­ what about me?


    "As for you, you need to rest. Sonia told me that you were injured. Although Ka should have healed you, you must have loss some blood. Just sleep here since Oleg will be gone for a while," Albert said.


    I took his offer and sleep in the guest room. Because of the loss of blood, I was tired and quickly went into slumber.


    ¡­


    "Wake up!"


    I woke up after hearing someone is shouting. And it''s not the gentle voice of any of my lovers. It''s a male voice.


    I looked at the source of the voice, and see a mustache.


    "Oh, Mustache, you''re already here?"


    "His majesty told me to hurry, so I asked a wind mage to bring me here. Seems like there''s a trouble, huh?" Mustache said.


    "Not really. In fact, I just prevented the trouble from happening. What time is it?" I asked.


    "The time for team from Cassau to fight. Don''t you need to watch them?"


    "After patrol the area. Seems like I sleep longer than I expected. Is Albert already at the Arena?"


    "Yes. I was told toe here and wake you up before the match ended. His majesty said that you need to at least watch Jewel and Ka fought." Mustache exined.


    "What about the annoying dude?" I asked about the member of Cassau team who entered through bribery.


    "He was covered in magic items, but he still lost quickly. That was also the first time someone used magic items in the tournament. Many peopleined, but because the rule said that it''s fine to use any magic items as long as they are not used for killing, everyone reluctantly epted it," Mustache said.


    "Well, he''s going to be theughingstock of everyone watching. I bet his father is losing face letting his son fight in the tournament. I don''t think he has enough magic items to go for the final."


    "Before I left the Arena, it was Sara''s turn. She was the third fighter, but she defeated two opponents on her own. She''s fighting the third one when his majesty asked me toe here," Mustache said.


    "Two opponents? That mean she''s strong enough for the cult members to take notice, right?" I asked.


    "Even on my way here, I see some people doesn''t like her to win. Just like you said, we are going to investigate them carefully. We will make sure those who are following them to not get too close since they are most likely expert level mages. Just leave the patrol to us. You need to watch the fight," Mustache said.


    I guess I can still watch Jewel fight. I don''t think Sara alone is enough to win the rest of the match. But for Jewel, she can do it. That mean Ka won''t have to fight.


    I don''t see Victoria and Spot around me. Albert must have brought them with him. That''s why Mustache is fine leaving his side.


    Since I didn''t get a ticket, I watched the match from the rooftop. It was right at the time for Sara to win her third fight, and will fight thest fighter. I guess the other agent managed to defeat one opponent then.


    Sara lost the match, but she was apuded by the audience for her strength. Everyone is now expecting a fight as great as yesterday, and Sara did it well.


    Next turn is Jewel.. This should be a piece of cake for her.

 Chapter 354 - Cassau Universitys Victory

    "What a powerful fighter Sara was! She defeated three enemy''s fighters on her own! But what a shame that she got defeated in the fourth fight. The opponent is a strong one, but the team from Cassau only need to send two people to defeat four of them," Dwight said.


    "Two? What about the first one?" Steven asked.


    "Other than the magic items he used, he was nothing special. Seriously, how did he qualified to participate in this tournament? At least he can be sent as the first fighter to scout the opponent''s strength. As for Sara, if she''s at her full strength, she should be able to defeat thest opponent. What a shame that she spent too much mana in the previous match. But what''s more surprising is that she used air element to fight! That''s the first time I''ve seen someone used air magic to defeat their opponent! Her match is a valuable lesson for air mages. If they are well-trained, no one can say that air element is weak," Dwight said.


    "That''s right. She raised a rock from the ground, and used it as some kind of projectile by pushing it with air. I don''t know how she did it, but since it was not a wind magic, I''m sure that it was air magic," Steven said.


    "You''re an air mage as well, right? Do you think you can do that?" Dwight asked his brother.


    "I will train hard after this match is over!" Steven said with determination.


    "Good luck with that. Now, team from Cassau is sending the youngest participant in the whole tournament, Jewel. She attended college as soon as she finished her introductory school. But being able to represent her university, she must be quite strong," Dwight said.


    "It''s a shame that Ka didn''t step forward for this match. But if Cassau win, they can keep their trump card for the next round. Though they need to defeat the opponent first," Steven said.


    Seems like Sara overwhelmed her opponents in the previous bouts. I couldn''t see it since I was still sleeping, but she did well. Good thing I can still hear the report from the twomentators. Though I can still ask herter in the hotel.


    Next up is Jewel. She seems confident. Well, the opponent is an earth mage. He defeated Sara because Sara used the earth as her projectiles, but this guy is better than her in earth magic.


    Well, can''t me her. Sara is more focused on her air magic nowadays. Even more, she didn''t use her gun. At least thanks to her, air mages are willing to get stronger and won''t be underestimated again.


    Even the twomentators are still talking about Sara''s air element after Jewel stepped on the stage. Should I promote my ss so more students wille apply to Cassau University? Nah, I don''t think I want to keep teaching next year. By that time, Sara should be able to teach the others. Or Dean himself can.


    "The fight started, and Andrew quickly attacked Jewel with Ground Spike! The range of that attack is wide and Jewel should be hit already. Don''t tell me that the match is over already?" Steven looked at the stage curiously.


    "Yeah, that attack is too fast and difficult to dodge. I didn''t see Jewel fly, so she''s not a wind mage. Is she like the first fighter Cassau sent? Wait! She''s still standing there! She didn''t dodge, or block the Spikes with magic! Is that a magic item?" Dwight asked.


    "That''s¡­ that''s not a magic item! She''s not taking any damage because she''s a beastform mage! It''s just a partial transformation, but the beast she transformed is a rhino! The animal with the highest defense in the world! Well, if you don''t count turtles," Steven said.


    Just as Steven said, Jewel is transformed into her half beast form. Which is the Jewel with the gray armor and horned mask. Seems like her defense increased. Is that Aura or the magic itself? I don''t think that''s Aura, so that mean the beast Jewel can get stronger? That''s amazing.


    All of you! Look at her! She''s my disciple!


    "I see. So that''s a rhino transformation. Thanks for telling us, Walking Animal Encyclopedia," Dwight said.


    "That name is too long."


    "Sorry, walking animal."


    "¡­one of these days, I''m going to tell our mom that you''re the one ruining her dress twenty years ago," Steven said.


    "Don''t say that! Everyone can hear it! And mom is watching from the square!"


    "That day is today!" Steven shouted.


    Well, they are just acted like usual. I wonder if n and Lana will be as close as those two in the future?


    "All those Spikes didn''t damage her at all. she''s invulnerable against earth magic. Well, at least the opponent''s earth magic. Oh! She''s transformed into a full rhino and charged straight at Andrew!" Steven continuedmentating.


    "Hey! Don''t just continue on your own! Sorry, mom! It was because Steven being bad! Anyway, Andrew raised severalyers of Earth Wall to protect himself from Jewel''s charge. That should be enough for Andrew to block her charge and give him some time to think of a n¡­ oh, no! Jewel broke through all the walls down! Nothing can stop her!" Dwight said.


    Jewel charged at the walls without stopping and hit the opponent with her body. If it was her horn, he would be dead already.


    This is something that is unthinkable in a fight between mages. A direct hit with one''s own part of the body. That''s why for beastform mages, it''smon for them to transform into a flying beast. Though I heard about a beastform mage turned into a wolf from the Werewolves, I doubt there are many of them right now. They just want to be safe and to fly in the sky.


    Jewel''s opponent knocked unconscious just with one attack, and the victory has been decided with Ka not having to take part in the fight.


    "The winner is Cassau University, with Jewel as thest fighter!" Dwight announced.


    "That is something. To transform into a rhinoceros. A beastform mage has one chance to think of what kind of animal would they like to transform. And Jewel must have thought a lot about transforming into a rhinoceros. I don''t know the reason, but she must have considered it carefully and took a long time until she decided," Steven said.


    That''s wrong. Once she awakened her beastform and returned home, she already transformed in her own room without telling anyone. It took her less than an hour to decide that she wants to be a rhino. We were all worried that she might grows a horn on her nose.


    But seeing how much she has gotten more powerful; I realize that she picked the best choice in bing a rhino. As her Master, I''m very proud.


    Well, now that the fight is over, and those with bitter expression this time are being taken care of by the agents and the guards. I guess I''ll go check on those camping outside the wall.


    ¡­after eating some meal. I''m hungry.


    Luckily, there are many food stalls nearby because of the tournament. I bought a lot of them that the seller is worried about what to sell for the second match. Why aren''t you happy that I bought a lot?


    With bread on my right and meat skewer on my left, I went outside the city.


    Since the match is on and it''s time for lunch, there should be no one outside right now. They are all must be inside the city. And I indeed found no one. So, I look over at what they have. Since there are many tents that still aren''t being cleaned, which I guess because the campers are going to stay here until the final, there are some stuffs inside the tent.


    I just nced over at them slightly since I don''t know what I should find. But I still found nothing.


    Well, other than several goblins approaching the tents. Since everyone is watching the tournament, there are no one hunting. And the guild is practically empty. I guess I shall report the goblins'' appearance to the guild.


    I subjugated several goblins, while letting the rest escape. After that, I reported it to the guild. There will be an urgent subjugation request from the guild soon.


    There are some tents that have been ransacked. Well, that''s the fault of the campers for leaving the tent like that.


    Anyway, after getting more meal to fill my belly, I returned to the Arena to watch the afternoon match. I see that Ka is the only one inside the private room, so I went there.


    "Ka, congrattion on progressing to the second round. Where are the others?" I asked.


    "I ask them to get some rest. Although Jewel didn''t use much energy for her battle, I still told her to rest. As for the rich man''s son, he was taken by his father. His father asked us to withdraw his son''s participation for the next round, but because the officials have been given the list of the participants, I told him to ask the official instead. I doubt they will let him leave. And if he''s thinking of withdrawing his own fight, the father will lose face for letting his weakling son participate. At least we won''t have much trouble because of him now," Ka said.


    "Well, he got what he deserved. I''ll watch the next match from here, is that okay?"


    "That''s fine. You''re also our university professor after all."


    The next match was not as intense as the previous two matches. But they brought a lot of supporters, so the Arena is lively.


    Well, nothing happened today.. I hope it will continue until the end of the tournament.

 Chapter 355 - The Day Of The Final

    It''s finally the time for the final of the tournament. The teams? Obviously, it''s Ang''s team against Ka''s team.


    Let''s recap on what they went through to get there. First, it''s Ang''s team.


    Other than Shirley and Ang, it was Fred who showed his improvement the most. Not the two agents in the team.


    In the first match, he was the first to fight. And then, he grows faster than the other agents. And during the semifinal, he is the third to fight. At least that''s what Shirley told me.


    Both Shirley and Ka would ask for my advice after their fight. And they told me what they think of their teammates. That''s why I know all of this.


    That Fred, he started to use strategy during the quarter-final. Unlike the first two matches where he would try to overwhelm the opponent with his magic. And he also improved his magic control after being taught by Shirley and the others. He also asked Ang, but he couldn''t understand her exnation.


    The two agents also have improved. But not as big of an improvement as Fred''s.


    On the second round, Shirley didn''t fight. Instead, it was Ang who became the fourth fighter. It was also to let Shirley''s injury healed. Although the first three fighter can only defeat two of the opponent''s team, Ang defeated the rest by herself.


    On the third round, Shirley returned as the fourth fighter and Ang didn''t get a chance to show her strength. And the same happened in the fourth round. And they finally will fight in the final against Ka''s team. And since Ang didn''t have the chance to fight in the previous two rounds, she must be frustrated and will go all out during the final. At least that''s what I imagined Shirley is nning.


    Ang''s team keep fighting the team filled with the agents from the first round. That''s because the other teams are defeated in the first or the second round.


    And Ka''s team also experienced the same thing. They only fought team filled with the agents who we taught previously. Whether it was arranged by the officials or not, at least the people enjoyed the matches.


    Next is about Ka''s team. Ka herself never fought during all previous four rounds. Sara and Jewel alone were enough to defeat theirpetitors. Some even said that just Jewel alone is enough.


    Everyone is astonished by Sara''s usage of air element magic, and Jewel''s transformation. No one was capable of making Jewel use her lightning element. Which makes her still hides her full-strength.


    The funny thing is the rich man''s son. In the first round, he used several magic items to protect himself. But he still lost.


    That rich second generationined to the team and the officials to let him withdraw from the fight, but their plea was rejected.


    And so, in the second round, he who has exhausted all his magic items was lost in an instant. The third and the semifinal, he surrenders right away after entering the stage. His father lost face because of it. His son had be theughingstock of the whole kingdom.


    Well, not the whole kingdom yet. The whole city. But the news will be spread soon.


    He was unlucky because he was put in a strong team which canpete for the champion. Other rich second generation who bribes their way in were luckier because their teams lost rather quickly. They must be thanking him for being theughingstock instead of them.


    And because of that, he has been silent. He no longer tried to flirt with any of the girls. And Ka has been venting her anger on him every match saying that even if he''s weak, he shouldn''t surrender so quickly. At least he should let the opponent use one magic.


    That''s how the two team reached the final.


    As for me, I have been so busytely. Turns out, there were many other cult members hiding in the city. Good thing Candy and the others noticed them. They were just suspicious, so I was asked to follow them and eavesdrop on their conversation.


    It was hard because they might be expert level mages. But finally, I managed to kill them and capture some.


    Yesterday, the day after the semifinal, it was a break to let the two teams take a rest. So, Albert and I use that time to interrogate the captured cult members.


    Unable to endure my torture, some of them speak of their hideouts. And I busted those ces with Mustache, Oleg, Candy, and the others.


    Of course, I''m in charge of charging at one location alone. I justpress mmable gas and blow the whole hideout after someone with fire element tried to attack me.


    But even after all that, there were some who escaped. Not from my area in charge of, but some other ces. They will surely tell the others about what they witnessed.


    As expected, we couldn''t keep the strength of our mages as secret. Well, at least only those who attended college. There are still many other powerful mages in the kingdom who didn''t participate.


    And now, I''m watching the final.


    "Finally, we''re here! It''s the final of the first intercollege tournament of Tatrama Kingdom!" Steven announced. In which, everyone in the audience replied with a cheer.


    "WOOOHOOO!"


    "GO, PRINCESS!"


    "ANGELAAAAAAA!"


    "GO SARA! GO JEWEL!"


    Everyone has their favorites for the fight. And that guy who screamed Ang''s name is totally crazy.


    "We can feel the excitement in the whole city. Even yesterday, someone extremely ugly was approaching me when he asked who I think will win," Dwight said.


    "Yeah¡­ wait, that was me!" Steven shouted.


    "But since I''m thementator, and I have promised to be neutral, I only said that he should just watch the match," Dwight said.


    "No, you didn''t. You shouted in my ear, ''Ang will win!'' loudly. You are just like that guy who screamed Ang''s name," Steven said.


    "ANGELAAAAAAA!" Someone in the audience shouted Ang''s name again.


    "Hear that? That''s just like you. What neutral? We both picked different team," Steven said.


    "Oh, yeah. You think Sara and Jewel will win? You do know that the match is unfair, right? From the capital, there are five participants. From Cassau, there are only three participants. The difference in number is obvious," Dwightmented.


    "You''re wrong. It''s not three. It was four. Three is only the number participants from Cassau has send. Let''s ignore the guy who gives up. Ka still hasn''t show us her hands. She was in a party with Ang, so we should expect that they should be evenly matched. Also, from Cassau, Sara and Jewel are exceptional. In the capital, other than Ang, it was Princess Shirley who shows us how powerful she is. Though for the others, we have witnessed their growth as well. but not enough yet to be called exceptional," Steven said.


    "Yeah, but Ang is far above the rest. All her four elements are too strong that I think she''s capable of fighting expert level mage. I think it will be soon when she can reach that level. I don''t know about Ka''s strength, but I know that she''s a healer. Do you think she can defeat Ang?" Dwight asked.


    "Well, that''s the thing. During the tournament, we have witnessed many unexpected oues. Someone who defeated the opponent despite being inferior is something we have seen several times. By the way, you remember what we did yesterday, right?" Steven asked his brother.


    Did they do something other than betting who will win?


    "Yeah. That was interesting. Everyone doesn''t know it, but after we becamementator, we thought that this job very suited to us both. We had so much fun that we didn''t think that it was a job. And yesterday, we went around the city to find Ang''s and Ka''s schoolmates, and also active hunters during the time they were here, to ask them how they were during school days, their days as hunters in Melk, and who they think will win. The result is¡­ over seventy percent answered that Ang will win. She has been powerful ever since then," Dwight said.


    Whoa, did they really do survey? They did more than justmentating, huh? Maybe I should give them some bonuses.


    "And what a surprise! Of those seventy percent, more than half of them said that Ang will win, but it will be a close match. They said that although Ang is stronger, Ka has always been the smarter one. Ka might have some ns against Angter. Well, we won''t know until we see them fight," Steven said.


    There''s that many people who know that Ka is smart? The twins really asked those who know the two and not a total stranger who pretend to know. How did they do that?


    "But there''s something that I realize after interviewing everyone. It seems that both Ka and Ang are close to one man!" Dwight shouted.


    "That guy¡­ we must kill him! How dare he grabbed the two girls! He must be killed before he hurts the two girls!"


    "But we found no clues about the man. Maybe he has disappeared from their lives? In any case, he has be our public enemy. So, what if he''s not a criminal? The guy who yed with their hearts must be punished! Public execution!"


    ¡­whoever they interview, I will kill them first. What kind of nonsense did they said about me?


    I am indeed close to them, but it was because I''m in the party, and I''m the leader of the party!


    I am close to Ka because she''s my lover. And Ang is a good friend. We are not like that! Though Ka is fine with me getting more lovers. Who knows about the future?


    After the tournament, I''ll pay the twins a visit to give them their sries. But I will still smack their heads!


    Kron entered the stage, and the vanguard of both teams stepped forward. The male agent from the capital, and the rich man''s son from Cassau.


    "The match began!" Kron announced that the fight begun.


    "I give up," Rich man''s son conceded.


    "The winner is Cale!" Kron announced the fight is over.


    It''s the same thing that we have witnessed twice previously. During the third and fourth round.


    "It''s here! He''s still gave up even though it''s the final! Isn''t he embarrassed?" Dwight said.


    "I don''t know why he wants to participate. It''s called a battle tournament, and obviously, someone will get hurt. But he''s too scared to get hurt. Though it''s good since everyone isughing," Steven said.


    "In any case, the real fight will start now! Who will be the first champion of this tournament? We will see the answer soon!"

 Chapter 356 - Theres A Popularity Contest?

    This is the final of the tournament. If the cult is nning to do something, it should be around this time when everyone is gathered in one ce. Well, two ces actually. One in the Arena, and the other in the square.


    I''d like to stay and watch the fight while hearing the two sillymentators, but I can''t do that.


    "Roy, the final is between your friends, right?" Spot asked.


    Right now, we are on the rooftop of the Arena. And I''m not alone. It was because there are many other wind mages who want to watch the final without paying the ticket. Since I''m one as well, I can''t just kick them out. Though their eyesight is worse than me so they can''t see as clear as I could.


    "Yeah. It''s between Ang''s team and Ka''s team," I said.


    "Then you should watch their battle. I will take care of those monstersing this way," Spot said.


    What he meant is that there are many monstersing this way as if it''s a Stampede. But in a smaller scale than that time. If Spot is fighting them alone, I think he can do it.


    "Are you sure?" I asked.


    "Yeah. I''ll be back before the final is over," Spot said as he flew outside the city.


    I am nning on subjugating them myself, but if he wants, he can do it.


    I havee to a realization that Spot is surprisingly kind. Not just to me because I''m an Aura user. But everyone else he got along with. Well, mostly it was because they are my friends. I don''t have to worry about him attacking any of us anymore. In fact, I shouldn''t have think of that from the start.


    Since he''s taking care of the monsters, I cany back and watch the match.


    Hmm¡­ so far, the first few matches were not that interesting. Cassau''s agent won against the capital''s male agent. Then the capital''s female agent won against Cassau''s agent who was too tired already because of his previous match. After that, it was Sara''s turn.


    Sara easily defeated her opponent. She didn''t waste much mana as well. She pretended to prepare to attack the opponent with Air Cannon on the rock she raised from the ground, and when the opponent prepared to block it, Sara made a pitfall under her opponent''s leg, making her fall and be an easier target for the Air Cannon. Sara won the match.


    It''s the first time that she used a pitfall on an opponent. No one can predict that she would do it.


    "The winner is Sara from Cassau! It has been an interesting match so far excluding the firstedy routine," Dwight said.


    "That''s not match for you but aedy routine?" Steven asked.


    "How else should I exin it? He gave up as soon as the match started just like Cassau''s previous two matches. It''s already a routine where everyone wouldugh at him. That''s aedy routine and not a match at all," Dwight exined.


    "I see. That makes sense. But enough with theedy act. We''re here to watch something amazing. And they give us something great to watch! Both sides are down to theirst three fighters, and we still can''t see who will win the match. Are you still thinking that the Capital team will win?" Steven asked.


    "I don''t know, Steven. I am indeed supporting them to win, but there are too many unknown factors here. As for the next bout between Sara and Frederick, I think Sara will win. But overall, the Capital team is stronger. Still, Ka is the smarter one. She might have some ns against her best friend, Ang. We can only watch the excitement from here," Dwight said.


    Next is Sara against Fred. Just like Dwight said, I think Sara will win this.


    Sara easily st away the fireing toward her with the st of her air pressure. Sara win easily because her opponent''s elements are ipatible with hers. Not just she can make the fire disappear with her air magic, her earth element can block the fire from reaching her.


    Fred has only learned about magic control a few days ago, and for the tournament, he only focused on training his fire element. That''s why he lost against Sara.


    Well, at least he managed to make Sara wasted mana many times. Which will make things easier for Shirley.


    "You''re right. Sara did win against Frederick. But the next bout will be difficult for her because she will be fighting against Princess Shirley. And she wasted quite a bit mana from her previous fight. But wait! We have an announcement for everyone!" Steven announced.


    What announcement? And why are the officials letting them do what they want? What about the matches?


    Seems like even Ka and the others were confused. So, they also don''t know about the announcement, right? What kind of surprise this time?


    "Yesterday, just as we went looking for those who knows about Ang''s and Ka''s past, we also asked them and the citizens one more question. ''Who is the most beautiful participant in the tournament?''" Steven said.


    ¡­they really enjoy doing those stuffs, huh? To think that they did a poprity contest as well¡­


    If I ask them to be thementators for the tournament between countries, will they do the same as well? Probably.


    "So, we made people vote and we will announce the result now! Actually, we were thinking of announce it after the tournament is over, but now is a good time to do it! Why? Because¡­ the top five of the voting are the fivest standings in the tournament! All five of them are the top five!" Dwight said.


    "Obviously, the most beautiful girl is not voted just because of their appearances. But because of their strength and the effort they put in this tournament as well. That''s why for those who are not voted, you are still beautiful," Steven said.


    "Don''t flirt while we''re working."


    "But what if your future sister-inw is listening?"


    "I will feel sorry that she got seduced by your terrible flirting. Anyway, we will announce the top five of the most beautiful participants from the bottom!"


    This is not part of the tournament, but I think it''s Albert who nned it. He probably thinks that Sara will be too tired after fighting, so he asked the twins to announce it right now. This way, Sara can catch a breath. And Shirley is someone who wants to fight other at their full strength.


    Albert must have heard about the voting, and predicted that these five will be thest fighters. He told the two to announce it right now when only those five are left standing.


    "The fifth ce is¡­ Sara! It''s no wonder because in this whole tournament, she''s the one who fight the most. While the others defeated one or two opponents, Sara herself defeated three opponents in every match she fought. We also have the citizens leavingments about her. Like how powerful she is, air magic is amazing, and there''s even a little girl saying ''I want to be like big sis Sara!''. She has a lot of fans," Dwight said.


    Hearing that she''s being praised, Sara blushed. Hey, you need to rest.


    "The fourth one is Ka! Although she hasn''t fight at all, she''s ranked fourth. It was also mostly because the people who voted for her are from Melk. And they have been healed by her during the stampede," Steven announced.


    She''s the fourth ce? If she fights, I think she can get second or even first ce.


    "The third one is Jewel! Surprisingly, many people love to see her Rhino hybrid form. They say that she''s so cute," Steven said.


    "And powerful. She has defeated all her opponents just by using her transformation. Does she have other elements? We don''t know. Just like Ka, seems like she''s still hiding her strength," Dwight said.


    That leave two more. Shirley and Ang.


    "The next one is¡­ let''s announce the second ce and the first ce together. Second ce is Princess Shirley, and first ce is Ang!"


    ""WOOOOOOOOOO!!""


    Everyone screamed at the name of the two girls being called. Even some who are at the rooftop are shouting. I hope this ce can endure this many people standing on it.


    "This is surprising because I thought the princess would be the winner. But it seems that Ang''s prowess is just too amazing. Some even called her ''Elemental Master'' because of her four elements. Each of those elements are equally strong. Fire, ice, wind, and earth. Those four might be four of the mostmon elements to have, but so far, she''s the only one who has all four elements," Dwight said.


    "It''s also because the tournament is held in Melk. If not, both Ang and Ka won''t be listed that high. Ang would lose from the princess, and Ka wouldn''t even be on the list. But that''s just my guess. Let''s see what they wrote about Princess Shirley. ''She''s a princess!'', ''I thought a royalty doesn''t have to be strong and can just bezy since everyone around her worship her. I''m sorry. You''re amazing'', ''I''m d to be born in Tatrama!''. There are many more of thosements. And she''s also so close in the number of voting with Ang. The difference is just thirty votes. Even the third ce, Jewel, her votes is two hundred fewer than Princess Shirley," Steven said.


    "As for Ang, most of them are praises about how strong she is. And question about how she can raise all elements to be that strong. Well, most people would mainly focus on one or two elements, but she improved in all of them. All these five girls¡­ no. Not just these five. All the participants of the tournament are amazing role models for everyone so they can get stronger. All of them are amazing in their own way," Dwight said.


    "Except for some."


    "Except for some. Well, this is just the first tournament. Next years, there will be another tournament. But the location where it will be held will be changed. Seeing all the fights in this tournament, I have a great expectation for next years. I hope Ang and the others will still participate."


    "And I hope I can still be thementators for next year. Let''s get back to the main event for today. It''s Sara against Princess Shirley! Seems like Sara managed to catch a breath while we announced the result of the voting," Steven said.


    "That''s fine. if both sides can use their full strength, the audiences will enjoy the match more. Let''s begin the sixth bout of the final!"


    Well, that was interesting. So, there''s a voting like that, huh? If I have to vote, I would pick Ka for the obvious reason. But to think that Ang is so happy down there because of the result of a voting¡­ well, that''s just like her.


    Anyway, the next bout has begun. Who will be the winner?


    Good luck to those who are fighting. This fight can''t be decided by voting after all, so do your best!

 Chapter 357 - The Match Continues

    Finally, the match between Sara and Shirley started. After the result of the poprity contest that the twins created was announced, we''re finally back on course with the battle.


    "Your highness, I won''t hold back!" Sara said.


    "That''s what I''m hoping for. Let''s see who will be the winner between us!" Shirley replied.


    Sara has air and earth element, while Shirley has ice and wind element. If Sara is willing to use her gun, she might be able to win. But she doesn''t have it with her.


    As for training, although Shirley has learned about magic control, I taught Sara more because she''s a student in my ss. But the difference in experience is obvious. After all, Shirley has fought many times after I taught her magic control, while Sara¡­ I don''t know, but I don''t think she has more experience than Shirley in magic control. And because Shirley is used to see me shooting, I think Shirley will win this time.


    Normally, whenever she fought after exhausting herself, Sara would focus more on wasting the opponent''s energy instead of winning. But now, Sara is going all out from the start. She has no intention on letting Shirley win. Must be because it''s the final.


    Although Sara is an agent, and she knows that the main goal of this tournament is not finding who is the strongest but to make everyone interested in growing stronger, she is not someone who want to lose on purpose. And I believe everyone in the final has the same feeling as hers.


    "What an amazing performance by the two fighters! Although Princess Shirley has the upper hand, Sara also didn''t let up her fight. She''s still going strong!" Steven said.


    "It also seems that she''s changed her strategy. Instead of shooting the projectiles toward the princess directly, she changed the trajectory midway! I don''t know how, but that''s definitely air magic. You need to learn from her, Steven. Who knows if you can be as strong as she is?" Dwight said.


    "Obviously, I will try to improve my air magic. But if there will be more fight in the Arena, I think instead of being a hunter, I will continue with my path as amentator. This is my calling!" Steven said.


    "Yeah, but what about in-between the matches? How will you live if you''re not a hunter?" Dwight asked.


    "That''s why you''re the little brother."


    "You want me to pay for your living expenses? No way!"


    As usual, the two are still close as ever.


    On the stage, just like Steven said, Sara is shooting her projectile first, but her target is thepressed air she prepared beforehand. Once the projectile hit thepressed air, depend on where Shirley will move, Sara altered the trajectory by sting thepressed air toward Shirley''s direction.


    They don''t always hit, but it does cause problem for Shirley. Sara doesn''t intend on saving her energy. She used everything she got against Shirley.


    Seems like Shirley doesn''t have the freedom to converse her mana anymore. From the sky, huge Ice Spikes is falling down. Shirley doesn''t care about saving her energy anymore, she attacked randomly on the stage.


    Sara obviously had a hard time dodging the Ice Spikes. She protected herself using Earth Wall, but the Ice Spikes pierced through them. if Sara protected herself with multipleyers of Earth Wall, Shirley would create more Ice Spikes to hit Sara.


    Sara can''t protect herself any longer, so she used her final attack. Under thestyer of the Earth Wall, shepressed more air than usual. And then, she sted the whole wall at Shirley.


    Shirley was surprised with Sara''s final attack, but she barely managed to dodge it. She doesn''t want the same thing happened to her again like in the first round.


    And then, Shirley finally hit Sara and knocked her out of the stage.


    But before anyone could announce the result of the match, the flying wall is falling toward Ang''s direction.


    Everyone panicked seeing that wall is falling at Ang. If it''s toward the audience seat, the officials can block it. But since it''s going toward Ang in the bench, the officials can''t protect her.


    I looked at Ka and saw a glimpse of her smiling. Don''t tell me that this is part of her n? If so, she''s so wicked. But I don''t think this much will cause any trouble for Ang.


    As for Ang, she calmly looked at the falling wall, and sted the wall with a simple Fireball. The wall is destroyed, and Ang is safe. She only used Fireball to stop the wall.


    After ascertaining her victory, she looked at Ang who destroyed the wall. And then she looked at Ka. Seems like she also noticed that it was Ka''s n. Well, it worked that Ang spend a little bit of her mana. But it was just the amount used for a Fireball, so it wasn''t much.


    Ka smiled at Shirley who is looking at her. She''s bing more and more evil. Good job, Ka!


    "Oh! That giant Earth Wall was sted at Princess Shirley, but she dodged it! But the wall continued toward Ang who destroyed it with a simple Fireball! What a powerful Fireball. As for the one who did it, Sara, she got knocked out of the stage after Princess Shirley countered her with Wind sh. What an exciting match!" Dwight said.


    "I''m d that I can watch them fight this close. But I''m also afraid if we''re going to get hit with stray magic. Well, good thing that we have a lot of officials to protect us in case such things happen. But for those watching from the rooftop, Hey! That''s why tickets are important! If you don''t want to get hit, then buy tickets!" Steven shouted.


    "This is still the first tournament. But thanks to them, we can have more preparation for future tournament. There will likely be more guards at the rooftop so no one can watch the match for free. If you want to watch it for free, go to the square!" Dwight shouted.


    I looked at the square after he said that. But¡­ there''s no space to move at all. Everyone there are standing and watching, without any gap at all. Those in the middle won''t be able to leave. But it''s not like they want to leave.


    ¡­it must be hot over there. Can they even breathe? Maybe there are some kind air mages helping over there. Even the food sellers in the square have run out all their foods. Seems like they are the happiest because of this tournament.


    "Because of the damage at the stage is too much, we will be taking a break for few minutes to repair it. As for Cassau team''s next fighter, it will be Jewel. But can she fight flying opponent? All this time, it was Sara who defeated the flying opponents. Jewel only defeated the rest who are not wind mages," Steven said.


    "Well, that''s the thing. She has been using her beastform from the first round, but she hasn''t used other magic. Maybe we will see it soon. Oh, the officials fixed the stage quickly this time. I bet even they want to watch the match as soon as possible," Dwight said.


    "Seems like Princess Shirley is drinking a Mana Potion before returning to the stage. We need a stricter rule. Fighters are not allowed to drink Mana Potion on the stage. But off the stage, it''s still not against the rule. Kron can''t do anything about it, so he allowed it. If it like this, the fighters would destroy the stage before winning the match so they could take a rest and regain their mana," Steven said.


    "The fight starts now. Jewel didn''t transform instantly like usual, while Princess Shirley fly to the sky. How will Jewel fight if she can''t reach her?" Dwight asked.


    The answer is her second element. Jewel''s lightning element.


    Jewel has improved in her lightning element more than Sophie, and she''s about the same level as Candy. Well, Sophie is learning to be a doctor, so her magic practice is slower than the others. As for Candy, she''s focused on all elements. But for Jewel, she can use both her elements at the same time. She just needs to transform into a rhino form, and cast lightning magic to practice. That''s why her growth is the fastest.


    Shirley might be able to fly in the sky, but as advanced level mage, Jewel can summon lightning from the sky. The sky is not safe for Shirley, but it''s safer since Jewel can only use her lightning magic on her. But can she move faster than lightning?


    "Oh my god! She''s a lightning mage! And an advanced level at that! She summoned lightning from the sky and now Princess Shirley can only dodge the lightning! Can she move faster than lightning?" Steven asked.


    "Dodging is not the only option. Princess Shirley can create Ice Shield to protect herself temporarily. But it will still be impossible for her highness to attack. Jewel has been hiding a powerful move all this time!" Dwight announced.


    Just as he said, Shirley used Ice Shield and Wind Shield to protect herself. Because of that, she can only fly in the sky while Jewel attacks her. And when Shirley has an opening to attack, Jewel was already transformed.


    Rhinoceros and lightning element are powerfulbination. Shirley is powerless and lost the fight soon after she got hit by a lightning. It''s nearly impossible to block and dodge numerous lightning from the sky.


    "The winner is Jewel! She''s so powerful!" Dwight announced the winner.


    "I can''t believe it! She''s a lightning mage but she managed to hide it all this time? But don''t you think that her highness seemed to know Jewel''s lightning element?" Steven asked.


    "Ang and Ka are best friends. We know that already. Maybe they have introduced their teammates to each other before. Probably long before the tournament. Anyway, we managed to see another spectacr match. Princess Shirley is being healed now and has regained her consciousness before Ang''s match. Isn''t it amazing? The next match will be Jewel against Ang. None of them has the same elements as the other. Ang with fire, earth, wind, and ice elements, and Jewel with her beastform and lightning element. Who do you think will be the winner?" Dwight asked.


    "We can only watch. Alright, Kron! Start the match already! We don''t want to wait any longer!"


    Everyone in the audience shouted for Kron to start the match without any resting time for Jewel. Kron looked at Jewel and she said it''s fine for her to continue.


    "And the match begins!" Kron started the match.


    It''s getting interesting to watch how strong they have be. Whoever win the tournament, I don''t care. After all, they have given their all.


    I''d like to watch the fight until finish, but the approaching ghost means that I can''t do that.. I have some business to attend.

 Chapter 358 - Watching The Match From A Restaurant

    In a restaurant near the square, it was close enough for the people dining inside to watch the screen installed in the square. Especially after the staffs of the restaurant arrange it so all the tables are facing the screen.


    Since the square is crowded with people, some slightly wealthier people choose to watch from the restaurant. Even when the restaurant charged those people more because of the tournament, all the restaurant near the square are filled to the brim. They even put some tables outside their restaurants.


    In one of the restaurants, two men are watching the screen calmly.


    "So, that''s the Television those people are talking about. We need to find a way to make it ourselves. Using it formunication is important," said one man.


    "I''m rather worried of how they found out about our people hiding here. Everyone we sent supposed to be capable of sneak mission. The opponent this time is too powerful. Even other kingdoms are easier to infiltrate," the other man said.


    "Not anymore. It has been a few months, but in Varadis Kingdom, it has suddenly be harder to infiltrate. Even the prince was somehow caught as one of us. As for Arturo, that Prince Bernard suddenly showed his strength. He''s a strong candidate to be the next king now. And he is very well-protected with that expert level mage with him. That summoned monster was too powerful even against several expert level mages. If it continues, we can''t spread our influences anymore. But at least it was only one city. Not a big trouble for us. But where is the Stampede? The monsters should have been here now with everyone only focused on the tournament," said the first man.


    These two are two other cult members who just infiltrated Melk.


    All the cult members have been cleaned up by Roy and the others, but some still managed to escape and report it to others. As a result, the cult sent these two expert level mages to infiltrate the city while sending monsters for another Stampede in Melk. Unfortunately for them, those monsters are low in numberspared to thest Stampede, and Spot alone is enough to take care of them all.


    "A tournament with the purpose to let the people grow stronger so they can defeat us¡­ the king is too smart. But if we managed to conquer the kingdom before anyone too strong appear to fight us, we don''t have anything to worry," the second man said.


    "True. Other than these mages in the final, there''s no one that can bepared to us. But whoever managed to find those who sneaked in and defeat them, that person must be more powerful than those in the tournament. Don''t forget, we''re here to find them. They are too dangerous for the cult," the first man said.


    "Don''t worry. All those who managed to escape has reported that whoever attacked them, they only act when there''s no match scheduled. Either at night, or yesterday during break. Since it''s the final, I don''t think our enemy will take action now. Soon, this ce will be surrounded by monsters. Although there are many hunters here to watch the tournament, with these many people focused on the match, the casualties will be high. Once the king is busy with the aftermath, we''ll find a way to either kidnap his son, wife, the princess, or kill the king directly. After that, conquering this kingdom will be a piece of cake," the second man said.


    After saying that, the two men suddenly feel sleepy. The second man then quickly fall asleep. Not noticing that he will die soon.


    "Oh, you just said a cake. I want some," said a new voice.


    "¡­who are you?" the man who hasn''t fall asleep asked.


    ...¡­.


    [Roy''s POV]


    As the battle between Jewel and Shirley finished, I received a report from Sonia about two suspicious people in a restaurant. I looked over where she pointed at, and asked her to eavesdrop on their conversation.


    Possibly, because they think that the people are all too focused on the screen, they let their guards down and couldn''t sense the approaching ghost.


    I also went down from the rooftop of the Arena, and approached them inside the restaurant. They don''t even sense me using sleeping gas on them. The improved sleeping gasbined with slight effect of calmness from the white leaves tree in the mysterious forest. I haven''t mastered it all yet, but I thebination of the calmness with my sleeping gas is better than just using the sleeping gas. Which could make expert level mages fall asleep in a matter of seconds.


    "Oh, you just said a cake. I want some," I said to the man who hasn''t fallen asleep.


    "¡­who are you?"


    The man is fighting his sleepiness. As expected of an expert level mage. For the other one, he was too unprepared.


    "I think you are looking for me, right? The one who stopped your ns many times. The people sent here previously were too weak. I thought you would be a little stronger, but it seems that you are as weak as they are," I provoked the sleepy man.


    Sonia told me what they are talking after I arrived here. And from the look of it, there is no one suspicious here other than these two. The others are too engrossed with the match on the screen that they don''t care about what we''re talking.


    Shit, I also want to see Jewel''s match against Ang! Seems like it''s still going on. Must be a great fight then. And I missed it because of these two.


    I grabbed two Magic Restraining Cor and put one on the sleeping cultist, and about to put another one on the sleepy guy, but he used Ice Spike to kill himself. How crazy.


    At least I found someone for Albert to interrogate. And this one should be knowledgeable about the cult. They should be in higher position that the expert level mages we previously captured.


    As for the dead body, I threw it to the ocean for Spot''s child to eat. The blood, I asked the waiter in the restaurant who is actually Albert''s agent to clean it up. I also transported the sleeping guy into a prison.


    I don''t remember the face of the waiter, but Sonia told me about him. So d to have a ghost haunting me. I mean haunting people for me.


    "Sigh¡­" I sighed as I slumped down on the chair that the previously sleeping cultist seated.


    I''m toozy to return back to the rooftop of the Arena, so I''ll watch the match from here. Unfortunately, because of the people in the square cheering so loudly, I can''t hear thementators. But from what I see, the match is going on so intensely.


    "Waiter! Please bring me the food from this whole page. All of them," I ordered some food while watching.


    At least I can have a meal while watching here.


    But seriously, did they really think that a smaller scale Stampede will be able to cause problem when they approach this city filled with hunters?


    It will be a problem, but not a big one. Their real goal is Albert or anyone in the royal family.


    Maybe there''s a danger in the capital as well? Should I go there?


    "Sonia, go to¡­ the Prime Minister and ask him the condition in the capital. I found some people who want to cause trouble here, so maybe there will be some in the capital as well," I said to the ghost.


    "His name is Hector. I''ll be leaving for a while," Sonia said as she disappeared.


    Well, let''s watch the match while watching the surrounding as well. If I see someone who is watching this seat because of those two previous men sitting here. They might be from the cult as well.


    One reason I ordered a lot of the dishes listed in the menu is because I''m hungry. Another reason is that those who ordered lots of dishes are too eye-catching. If someone pretend to not see, they are the suspicious one.


    People will look at my table, and start talking about how I eat too much. But that''s what I want. If they don''t talk about it, they must be thinking of other things. Though everyone is too focused on the match that no one is looking this way.


    Well, let''s just eat while watching the fight.


    Ang didn''t fly like Shirley did. Flying just makes her vulnerable against lightning from above. I wonder how she realizes that? In any case, Ang has proven to everyone again that she''s a genius. Unless those people know nothing.


    When Jewel used lightning magic, Ang would protect herself with earth magic. When Jewel is charging at her to fight in close range, Ang would make pitfall or use ice magic to make the floor slippery.


    The match has been going on for a while, so I think Ang only learned doing that after experiencing Jewel''s attack for a while.


    In the bench, which I can see from the restaurant with my Divine Vision, I can see Ka is watching closely at Ang''s attack pattern. She must have known that Jewel will lose and she will be thest one to fight so she''s trying to find Ang''s weakness.


    Jewel is frustrated that none of her attack hits Ang, and that creates an opening for Ang to attack. And Ang won the match. Which mean the victor will be decided with these two best friends from Melk.


    Should I watch it from the Arena? Nah. The closer it is to the climax, the more likely the cult will act.. I''ll be watching from here again for thest bout.

 Chapter 359 - Angela Versus Kayla

    On the bench of Cassau''s team, the team members other than one obvious person are surrounding Jewel to see if she''s okay after get knocked out by Ang.


    "¡­I''m okay. I just need to rest," Ka said as shey on the bench after being eliminated.


    "Is it frustrating to lose?" Ka asked.


    "¡­it is. But it''s fine. After all, Ang has been trained by Master the longest," Jewel said.


    Just as she said, Roy has trained Ang the longest. After all, she was the first person that he met after returning back to the past.


    "Don''t say that. She might be the longest to learn magic control, but she got this far because she got what weck. Talent. You should know from Roy that she''s so talented that in the future, she was considered as one of the strongest in the war. Not just because she trained hard, but because she has talent. But now, because of Roy, she can be much stronger than the Ang in his previous life. As for you, you are his beloved disciple. We are all training under him, but you''re the only one he epted as disciple. He must be proud to see you get this far instead," Ka said.


    "¡­haha. Master is¡­ wait, where is he?" Jewel asked.


    They all know that Roy was watching from the rooftop, but now that Jewel looked up, she can''t find Roy anymore. He was not there.


    Hearing that, Ka and the others also looked up. Shirley on the other side also looked up seeing that. It''s not just Shirley. King Albert, Queen Marie, Sophie, Queen Carmen, Prince Fabio, Lina, and even Kron who was supposed to be the referee are looking up.


    Seeing that Roy wasn''t there, they know that something happened. But they know that he can handle it by himself for now. If not, he will ask Sonia to get the others to help him.


    They are ignoring thementators as they looked to the rooftop. As for the people watching from the rooftop without buying tickets, they are looking at each other and asked if it was them who were being looked at.


    "Something must have happened. Well, it''s no wonder since this is a big event that must have gained the cult''s attention. Even before, he got hurt because he was careless. I just hope that he won''t get hurt again. Well, I''ll be going now. Wish me luck," Ka said as he walked up to the stage.


    Seeing that, Kron''s attention turned into Ka.


    "Are you sure you''re fighting now? Roy isn''t here," Kron asked Ka.


    "Wait, he''s gone? Where did he go?" Ang asked. She only noticed now that Ka and the others were looking up looking for Roy.


    "There''s only one thing now that can distract him from our fight. Well, that doesn''t matter. If he has finished his business, he should be watching us from somewhere else. Even if he doesn''t, we can show him the proof which one of us is the stronger one," Ka said.


    "And the proof is¡­"


    "The prize reward," Ka replied calmly.


    The two fighters just talked as they stand in the middle of the stage. Even though Kron is there, the two ignored him and just talk.


    Steven and Dwight are talking so loudly to make the match more exciting.


    "This is really the final match! Who would have thought that it would be like this! Two girls raised in Melk, joined a party together. They became best friends, and now they are separated after entering different college, they reunited and face each other in the final match!" Steven said.


    "On one side is Ang. She was the one who defeated the most monsters during Stampede even though she was just intermediate level at that time. The other is Ka. She was the one who healed the most people during Stampede when she was also just intermediate level. Now, the two should have be much stronger than that time and will show us an amazing match. We still don''t know what Ka hides, but we will see it soon," Dwight said.


    The two on the stage are talking for a while, but no one wanted to interrupt them. They patiently waited until the two finished talking even though they can''t hear what the two said. Other than Kron.


    "The main winner in the end will be Roy. He''s the one who taught us both how to get stronger," Ka said.


    "Haha. I guess you''re right. He taught us the knowledge from the future so we can grow stronger," Ang said.


    "We were the first two people to meet him after returning back to the past. Roy knew you because of your achievement in the future, and saved me while you two were on a quest. We will show everyone how strong we are because of him. Kron, I''m ready," Ka said to Kron after finished her chat with Ang.


    "Me too. Let''s get started already," Ang said.


    The two no longer need words. They just have to prove to the world their strength. The power they learned from Roy.


    Although Roy learned those knowledges not by himself, but from other people in the future, Ka and Ang only know that everything is because of Roy. That''s all they needed to know.


    "Well, good that you two are ready. But the stage is not prepared yet. They say that they''re going to expand the stage slowly. Probably King Albert do this to dy the match so Roy can watch after his business is done," Kron said.


    After looking up in search of the missing Roy, Albert asked the official to make the stage bigger and told them to slightly dy the match until the stage is done. While Ang and Ka were chatting, some earth mage officials made the stage bigger. This was a preparation because Albert knows that Ka is an earth mage.


    If people know, it might seem as if Albert is favoring Ka over Ang, but that''s wrong.


    In fact, making the stage bigger is also favorable for Ang as she has more freedom as well. But for who the winner will be, even Roy doesn''t know it.


    "The final match, START!"


    Kron began the match as loud as he can. Then, he quickly flew away so he won''t get caught in the middle of the fight.


    As soon as the match started, Ang flew to the sky. She knows that Ka''s earth magic is powerful and she needed to escape from the ground as quickly as possible.


    Although Ang''s earth magic is more powerful, Ka''s magic control is much better. Combined with the wand that helped her manipte the earth, it won''t be a surprise for Ang if she was defeated in an instant. That''s why she escaped to the sky as soon as possible.


    But that''s also the wrong choice. Ka took out her wand, and manipte the earth. She created a huge hand protruding from the ground, and pped Ang down back to the stage.


    But Ang reacted quickly. She couldn''t dodge, so she protected herself with ice magic. Instead of making an Ice Shield, she covers her own body with an armor of ice.


    Because she also learned to improve her physical ability, she can withstand the impact from the p with the armor on. But that''s not the only reason she used ice armor.


    As she falls to the ground, she used wind magic to push her. Not to the sky, but pushing her body with wind horizontally to one direction. That way, instead of receiving impact from the fall, she slides away thanks to the ice armor, and quickly stand back up.


    Ang then dispersed remove her Ice Armor from her body, turn them into multiple Ice Spikes small in size, and shoot them all to Ka. Ka quickly created an Earth Wall to protect herself.


    So far, Ka hasn''t received any damages, but Ang was already hit once by the huge hand pping her down.


    "¡­what a spectacr way to start the match! I couldn''t even follow it with my eyes! What happened? What did they do? How are they so strong!?" Steven shouted.


    "I don''t understand it much, but from what I can tell, Ang quickly tried to escape to the sky. In which Ka stopped her with that huge hand. That hand was made so quickly that Ang was unable to dodge it. She falls, slides away, and quickly counter attacked. But Ka blocked her attack. So far, we still couldn''t tell who will win the fight. We cannot keep up with the match, so if we are silent or ourmentaries were dyed, we''ll apologize in advance," Dwight apologized politely.


    Back to the stage, the two started talking again.


    "You''re always good at reading ahead, aren''t you, Ka?" Ang asked.


    "And you always exceed my expectation. I never thought that you will slide away,"


    Ka replied.


    Ka then used her wand to collect rock, andpress it as small as possible. Then, she threw it to the sky.


    Ang knows that if she looks away, Ka will attack her. That''s why she stepped back so her vision is wider and she can see the thrown rock and Ka at the same time. But that''s another mistake of her, because Ka make the thrown rock shine with her light magic. The light is so bright that Ang needs to squint her eyes.


    "Oh, no!"


    Knowing that she will be in trouble, she looked down and move while only looking at the ground. And that''s when Ka burst thepressed rocks, and manipte them to make the shape sharp, and fall toward Ang''s direction. Some of the rocks still shine, which will distract Ang when she looked up.


    But Ang didn''t look up. It''s because she can still see the rock''s shadow on the ground. She waited until the right time to create a thick Earth Wall. Right at the time when some of the rocks are above the Wall, so some rocks gotunched toward the audience seat, which then blocked by Light Barrier by the officials.


    "That was close! If she used it anyter, she would have gotten hit!" Dwight said.


    "That wasn''t close at all. Ang timed her magic so it will protect her at the right time. If she used Earth Wall sooner the Wall will be destroyed with Ka''s attack. Ang looked at the trajectory and the location of the rocks by looking at the shadow so she canunch the first row of the rocks away and protect herself from the rest."


    "Wait, who?" Steven asked.


    The one who exined was neither Steven nor Dwight. It was a new voiceing from the speaker which makes the two fighting on the stage paused for a bit, and smiled.


    "Hello, everyone. You might not know me, so I''ll introduce myself. My name is Roy. Currently, I work as a professor in Cassau university. But that doesn''t mean I''m supporting them. I will be neutral and analyze everything on the stage so everyone knows what happened. If you don''t believe me, you can ask the guild master for who I am. I am in the same party as Ang and Ka back then. How could you all forgot about me? I''m so sad. Anyway, because I was the leader of that party, that''s right, I''m the leader of that party, I will stay neutral and analyze the match here because I''m the one who know most about their strength. Please enjoy the final," Roy said.


    He finally appears to watch the two fight. Those who knows him smiled, except for the twomentators.. It was because Roy suddenly appears while his body is covered with blood.

 Chapter 360 - Quickly Taking Care Of A Business In The Capital

    They took Jewel to the bench after she was defeated by Ang. I''d like to continue watching until the final is over, but I can''t do that.


    Why? Because Sonia returns with a grave news.


    "Roy, the capital is under attack. Hector is captured and unable to use the ring to contact me because he was tied up. It was luck that you sent me there just in time. Seems like Hector and his people will be used as hostage to threat Albert. I told Ian and Ruby to be careful beforeing here," Sonia said.


    "What the fuck! Oi, waiter! Come here!" I called the waiter who is one of the agents.


    "Can I help you, customer?" the waiter asked.


    "Yes. Spread the news that the capital is under attack, and gather everyone who is free in the hotel right away. I''ll meet Albert to tell him the news, and I''ll transport everyone to my mansion in the capital," I said.


    Hearing the news, the waiter quickly leaves the restaurant despite the boss of the restaurant, who is just a normal man, shouting the name of the waiter.


    I quickly leave the restaurant and go to Albert''s location with portal while making sure that no one saw me.


    Albert and Marie were looking up when I appear. He knows that I''m behind him, but he''s still looking up. And so are Ka and the others. They must be looking for me.


    "Albert, the capital is under attack. Your Prime Minister is being held and tied up. I''ll go there immediately while bringing several agents with me," I said.


    "Take care of yourself and finish it quickly. You want to watch the match between Ka and Ang, right? I''ll dy the match as long as possible," Albert said calmly even though his wife beside him looks panicked.


    "You don''t have to do that, but okay. It will be best if you can make the stage bigger. The two can go all out in a bigger stage. Then, I''ll look for Candy to bring her with me. Spot is busy taking care of the monsters outside the wall, and I told Sonia to get Spot apany you while I''m gone after he''s done with the monsters. Then, see youter," I said to Albert as I leave his side.


    Candy is somewhere in the audience, looking for any other infiltrators among the audience. That''s why I can''t use portal.


    When she saw me, I waved my hand and gestured to her to meet me.


    "What''s wrong, Roy?" Candy asked.


    "Trouble in the capital. Let''s go back to the hotel. I told someone to bring agents who are free to meet me in the hotel. I''ll take them and you to my mansion in the capital, and you need to ask Ian if anything happened. As for me, I''ll go back to Cassau and bring Veronica with me," I said.


    "Okay. Let''s go," Candy said.


    I used portal to take us to the hotel where it''s already filled with about twenty people. Most of them were the participants of the tournament who have lost previously.


    I just opened a portal for them and let Candy do the exining to them. Then, I opened a portal to Cassau where Veronica is already prepared. Seems like Sonia is quick to tell her.


    "Roy, I''m ready," Veronica said.


    "Good. We''ll be transporting directly to where Hector is being held."


    We then transported to where Hector is being held. The two of us were prepared to attack anyone there, but seems like other than Hector and few other agents, there are no other people.


    But with my Divine Vision, I can see that some people noticed us suddenly appear anding our way.


    "The Royal Pce can be rebuilt!" Hector shouted as I took off the cloth covering his mouth.


    Hearing that, Veronica instantly used a highly destructive wind magic that destroy the area where the assants are. I also pointed at where those assants are that Veronica can''t sense because they are too far.


    Then I quickly grabbed the hostage and use portal to my mansion in the capital where Ruby is helping the injured agents.


    I left Veronica in the pce. She can handle herself.


    I continue looking and see that most of the bad guys don''t have explosive devices in their mouth. I guess the cult is sending expert level mages now because this kingdom is too hard to conquer.


    In my mansion, Candy and the agents I brought have gone. They split up and fight the expert level mages in groups.


    There are about ten expert level mages, and three of them are in the pce. Veronica is fighting those three by herself.


    As for the other seven, another three are fighting three groups I just brought. The other four are capturing the nobles and killing the civilians. Good thing they are separated. I''ll take care of those four by myself.


    First is the two who killed the civilians. One of them is earth mage. He killed the people with Ground Spike and happilyughed like a mad man.


    With my fastest speed, although I''m still slower than Spot, I sprinted toward his direction and stabbed Reizpear in his chest. To make sure that he died in an instant, I used Victosword in my other hand and sliced his neck. One down, three more to go.


    I couldn''t save the people here since he has killed everyone, but it''s no time to mourn. And there''s no point in mourning for the death of strangers. I''ll mourn after the cult is destroyed.


    Next is a woman who killed the civilians. She''s also an earth mage. I killed her the same way as the previous earth mage.


    Why is there more earth element expert level mage in the cult than other elements? The cult must have a good source to get earth element magic stones.


    Two more to go.


    These two are grouped up while I killed the other two. Now, I have to face two expert level mages on my own.


    "Roy, you seem like you''re in a hurry. Do you really want to watch Ang and Ka fight so much?" Victoria asked as I was watching the two expert level mages left.


    "Yeah. They are the two friends I made soon after returning to the past. Not including you obviously. And one of them is my lover now. I want to see how much they have progressed already. Their fighting styles are different, so it will be interesting to watch. Even I who got bored easily want to watch their match so bad. I''ll take care of everything here so I can return before the fight is over," I replied.


    Two expert level mages. An open space. Once they split up, I will just end up wasting time chasing after them. I need to kill one fast, then I''ll chase after the other one whom I expect to escape after I killed the first one.


    With my fastest speed, I sprinted and killed one of the mages, the woman who has justnded after she flew to meet the other mage. If she used her flying magic to escape, it will be difficult to catch her.


    Just as expected, the other one tried to escape while attacking me with magic. He''s an ice mage. Good.


    As long as he doesn''t try to freeze me and just attacked using Ice Spikes, I only need to endure the spikes.


    He retreated while using ice magic to freeze the ground as he slides backward. It''s also useful if he wants to let me slip as the ground is frozen and slippery. But he doesn''t know that I''m not stepping on the ground. Just 1cm above the frozen ground, I used Air Steps.


    The confused mage casted Ice Spikes at me, but I redirect those Spikes because I can see them clearly. If I tried to block it, my speed will slow down.


    The ones that will stab me, I used Blobbies to cover my hands and redirect those Spikes to not hit me. As for those that won''t stab me, I ignore them even if they hit my head and blooding out. I need to go back to watch the match!


    Because he''s an expert level mage, the numbers of Ice Spikes he created is too many for me to dodge or redirect. That''s why some of them hit me. But none of them stabbing me. Just the sides of the Spikes hit me, so there are some bruises there and there. And I''m bleeding from my head. But I just endure it.


    As I got closer, the man turns back so he can focus on escaping. He must have thought that I''m a closebat fighter. If he escapes, my identity as an Aura user will be known. I must not let him escape!


    I restore Reizpear from my pocket into its original form, and threw it like a javelin into the mage''s body. Reizpear pierced his body, and he falls to the ground where I finally kill him. That''s four.


    As for the other six expert level mages, they have been defeated. Three by Veronica, and three by the agents.


    I''m d to see that the result from the training camp shows. It means we now have the power to repel the cult.


    "Veronica, you done?" I asked Veronica. She''s the first one I approach after I killed the mages on my side.


    "Yeah. I''ll stay here in your mansion until Albert return. You want to watch the match, right?" Veronica said.


    "Thanks. I''ll get Albert return as fast as I can," I said as I leave her.


    This time, I''m going to Candy''s side.


    "Roy, we''re done here. We will investigate the situation, so you can return first. Tell me the resultter, okay?" Candy said.


    And that''s how I ended up in thementary room with my body covered in blood.


    Now, let''s see if I have the talent asmentator.

 Chapter 361 - Continuation Of The Battle

    I have returned! And this time, I''m doingmentaries when two girls I know the longest are fighting. Ang and Ka.


    They might have had sparring session many times in the past, but this is different. It''s real battle. Though no killing.


    I''m in the room with Steven and Dwight so I can tell the audience what happened in the fight as someone who knows them the longest.


    I wiped the blood around my body using some Blobbies to absorb the blood in front of the two shockedmentators. I turned off the magic device that let the sound from this room to be heard outside so I can talk to the two first.


    "Don''t worry about my appearance. It''s something unavoidable. But it''s all good. Let''s continue withmentaries," I said.


    "¡­is it okay already?" Dwight asked.


    "It''s not a problem in this city. I have taken care of those hiding inside Melk. These wounds are from the fight somewhere else. I can say that for now, we are safe. Don''t worry," I replied.


    "¡­if you say so. Let''s continue then," Dwight said.


    The two who were supposed to be fighting were standing still and smiled as they are talking about something. Probably about me barging in here.


    I can see Albert is looking this way. He must be curious about what happened. I will tell himter. For now, the match is more important.


    Steven turned the magic device back on, and we started talking again.


    "Wait, you''re their party leader? I don''t remember you at all," Steven said.


    "I''m sorry that the leader has the weakest magic, okay? But the reason they got so much stronger is because of my guidance. That is the truth," I said.


    "I don''t believe you," Steven said.


    "I might not have the same elements as any of the two, but it''s undoubtedly that I''m a professor in Cassau. I''m teaching my students to be strong, you know? Though since it''s a university, I was limited to only teach one element that I have," I said.


    "What element is it?" Dwight asked.


    "I have two elements. Summoning and air elements. And I have the privilege of teaching air mage in Cassau University," I said.


    "Wait, air element!? You taught air element!?" Steven shouted.


    "If you wonder how Sara be so strong with air magic, that was because of me. And I can teach other elements as well despite not having them. But what I teach will be different. For air magic, I can teach many things. But for other elements, I taught only magic control,"


    Then, I started to exin a little about magic control and how useful it is. I''m trying to poprize magic control to the world so people can get stronger despite their low level.


    Well, it''s not like I can make low-level mages win against higher level mages, but I can make them survive a little longer in a direct confrontation. Though I didn''t exin more about magic control and told everyone that they can learn from not just me, but from many other universities. They have some people from the training camp after all.


    "Well, if you''re interested, just find someone who has learned about magic control to teach you. For now, the final is more important. The two are waiting until my exnation is over as they are recovering. Ka! Ang! I won''t root for either of you! Just fight however you like!" I shouted.


    The match continued. Some people started to get interested in magic control now and they watched the match seriously. It''s as if they are trying to steal the skills of either Ka or Ang.


    Ka attacked again. This time, just like before, she used Rock Throw. But the rocks are bigger and sharper than before. At the same time, she also used light magic to create another source of light which will confuse Ang. If she looked at the shadow of the rocks, she will misjudge the distance and unable to protect herself anymore.


    But that''s useless for the spirited Ang. Seems like after I returned, the two are no longer holding back.


    Ang creates a Tornado with her wind magic to blow away the thrown rocks. The tornado also moves toward Ka so she could be blown away as well. And if she tries to cover herself under the earth, she won''t be able to do anything as Ang prepares the next attack.


    "Oh! The tornado is so strong that if Ka is not hiding under the ground, she will be blown away! I don''t think Earth Wall alone is enough to protect her," Dwight said.


    "That''s wrong. Look under Ka''s feet," I said.


    "Under the¡­ is she using the earth to support her legs alone? What about the upper body?" Dwight asked.


    "Do not underestimate these girls. Other than practicing magic to this level, they also trained their body and stamina. And if Ka couldn''t handle that much, she will make more supports from the ground. Hiding herself from Ang will be the wrong decision. Ang, although she''s academically challenged, she''s a genius in magic and battle. She can make a quick decision that will defeat her opponent right away. Ka, knowing Ang''s genius, she needs to read ahead and make sure her decision is not what Ang''s expected. This battle could be very long, or be over quickly. Don''t look away from the two," I said.


    And then, Ka shows the giant robot that she used once back during her fight against Jack in Monsters World. This time, the robot is much smoother. Which mean, her movement should be better than back then.


    "What is that! Is she a summoner?" Steven asked.


    "No. That is earth magic. Using her precise control of magic, she created a huge golem like creature that she can control from the inside. She''s now well-protected and can fight in close-range," I exined.


    "Earth magic can do that!?"


    "Like I said, magic control. Ang should also be able to do that, but she''s more focused in attacking than defending. As building a golem like that isplicated, it''s a magic that the smart Ka is perfectly suited for. One that can protect her, and attack at the same time. And if you look at the golem, you can see that the legs of the golem are short, while the length of its arm is long. That means Ka inside the golem is closer to the ground and can cast earth magic, while the arms of the golem can reach far," I exined.


    I can''t say that it''s a robot because no one knows what a robot is. Only Victoria and people from her world. Golem is more well-known by the people and what I introduced to the people. Though I still call it robot myself.


    And seeing the giant robot, the children watching got excited.


    Ka used the long reach of her robot to p Ang, but Ang dodged and fly to the sky.


    "Oh! This time, Ang managed to fly! She was blocked the first time she tried to fly. This time, Ang should have the upper-hand!" Dwight said.


    "That''s wrong. Please watch," I said.


    Ka''s robot swung its arm. And as it reached its furthest length in a punch, the arm detached from the body as it flew toward Ang. There''s a small string of sands connecting Ka and the detached arm, and manipting the thrown arm, she made the arm spin.


    Ang tries to dodge, but as the arm was spun and in an unpredictable way, she can only try block it while trying to escape.


    Ang was hit by the spinning arm as she falls back down to the ground. She slides on the ground using Ice Armor.


    "Oh, she falls again! Luckily, she slides on the ground instead of hitting it and received an impact. I thought that golem can only hit something close, but seems like Ka''s control of the golem is too good. But this time, Ang should be injured considerably from the spinning arm. And look! The arm regenerated and the golem returns back to normal! What an insane ability!" Dwight shouted.


    "But don''t you think that she''s wasting mana? I don''t think she can use that golem for a long time no matter how well her magic control is. Well, Roy, what do you think?" Steven asked me.


    "As everyone knows already, in this tournament, Ang is the strongest participant. It''s impossible to hold back against her. Ka''s only way to win is if she goes all out against Ang without reserving her mana at all. The moment Ka let down her guards, victory will be in Ang''s hand. And I have seen the two spar many times, but this is the first time Ka fight this way against Ang. Ang must be confused on how to win against Ka as well. The only way any one of them can win is to go all out. They are just that good," I said.


    "I just no longer care about who will win! You two, fight to your hearts content!" Steven shouted.


    "Huh? Aren''t you betting on Ka? You don''t mind if she loses?" Dwight asked.


    "Just look at the match! Do you think anyone would regret watching it? No matter if we lost the bet or win it, I don''t think anyone will be sad. In fact, they will train hard so they can participate in the next tournament. Though they need to get into university first," Steven said.


    "Not really," I said.


    "What do you mean?" Steven asked.


    "Well, this is a tournament arranged by his majesty. But you can arrange a tournament yourself so you don''t need to attend university. Though you can''t participate in the same tournament next year, you can make your own. You just need to gather rich people to prepare the reward, and people wille. Melk already have an Arena. You just need the reward," I said.


    "That''s right! One year is too long! Let''s gather all the rich merchants and nobles to sponsor the next tournament! That way, we don''t have to wait until next year!" Dwight said.


    Hearing that, the people, especially hunters who are unable to participate here, got fired up. They can''t wait until that free-for-all tournament. As for the merchant, they should be able to realize the profit they can get from the tournament.


    But that''s not my problem. Ka and Ang are still fighting. This is the most important event today. I''m d that I finished my business quickly and return here before the match is over.. Even with the injuries I had, I have to watch it until it''s over.

 Chapter 362 - The Champion Is......

    The fight still goes on for two hours straight without showing any sign that it will end.


    Victoria would protect herself whenever she got hit, and to not let get the impact from falling to the ground injure her, she would use Ice Armor on her to slide on the ground. She also used earth magic at the same time to tten the ground.


    As for Ka, she''s well-protected inside the giant robot. She''s still got damaged time to time, but that''s not a problem to her. Instead, the robot took most of the damage. But Ka quickly repaired the robot. Still, for her to maintain the robot for this long without taking Mana potion, she has a huge amount of mana saved.


    I think her mana quantities are higher than even Ang. But Ang is more powerful.


    As for me, I''m doing my best to analyze the situation and exin it to everyone. I couldn''t keep up with the twomentators'' chatting, but if it''s exining, I can do that.


    "Ah! Ka got hit by fire attack this time! Even though the golem could protect her, it''s impossible for her to protect herself from the burns!" Dwight shouted.


    "That''s wrong. Did you forget what Ka is famous for in Melk?" I asked.


    "That''s¡­ oh, right! She''s a healer! Then, she must be ignored the damage, and heal herself while inside of the golem. Just how much mana does she has?" Dwight asked curiously.


    "From my guess, she has more mana than any other participants in this tournament. Obviously, she has more than Ang''s as well. But Ang''s attack is much more powerful, so we still can''t see who will win," I said.


    "Roy, you were their party members, right? And you''re the leader as well. Howe you don''t know about Ka''s mana quantities? Even if you have grown much stronger now, it should have been obvious in the past, right?" Steven asked.


    "There''s no way I would be able to know that. You do realize that I''m in a party together with Ang and Ka, right? We can see that the two of them are powerful. As for me, even though I''m an air mage, I''m the one who taught Sara to use air magic to fight like you all saw from her match. The three of us are strong individually as well. That''s why none of us ever depleted our mana when we''re together," I exined.


    "I don''t remember much about you, but there''s one thing I still remember. It was during the school exam that was disyed publicly. I remember two excellent students, but there''s just one extremely weak student. He used his weak slime as a throwing weapon, and threw it to the target making him only able to reach eight point. You are that Eight, correct?" Dwight asked.


    "Oh, you remember that much? That''s right. Eight was me. What about it?" I asked back.


    "After your turn, someone from the crowd destroyed the target practice with unknown magic. Was that you using air magic?" Dwight asked.


    So, this is what he wants to ask about. Whether I''m the mystery person or not. He''s quite sharp, huh?


    "I''ll leave that to your imagination. Seems like Ka is too tired to maintain the golem now. We need to watch it carefully since the battle might reach the climax soon," I said.


    Our attention returned back to the stage where Ka''s robot''s right arm is no longer in its original shape. It''s either because she has exhausted her mana, or because it''s another one of her ns.


    I can see what Ka is doing inside the giant robot. She''s nning something. Even though she looks tired, she hasn''t given up yet.


    As for Ang, she''s also tired because she has been using wind magic to fly most of the time. Her flying speed is not high, but she''s still tired because most of her mana consumption is from taking hit from Ang''s attack and dodging them.


    Ka left the control room of the robot while leaving the robot as it is. Then, she used her light magic to make the giant robot shines. The robot''s body shines brightly and makes everyone unable to look at it directly. Except for me.


    She''s leaving the robot, and while Ang is covering her eyes with her arms, Ka raised the earth to make herself at the same height as Ang right behind her.


    As everyone finally get used to the light, they can see Ka is using her wand as a weapon, in her case it''s a rapier, and thrusted it on Ang''s chest. Of course she''s not that evil to make the rapier sharp. It was blunt at the tip so it won''t kill Ang.


    But that''s also a miscalction, because now, Ang knows where she is, and used all four elements to attack Ka.


    Ka was blown away and hit the ground hard. She fell unconscious in an instant.


    "We have the winner! Ang is the final victor of the tournament!" Kron announced.


    The whole Arena, no. The whole city cheered at the result of the long battle between the two best friends.


    "I can''t believe it! I watched the fight with my own eyes, but I still couldn''t believe it! That precise control of earth magic, the use of Ice Armor, and many other things that I''ve seen today! These two are unbelievable mages!" Steven shouted.


    "But what happened in thest move? I couldn''t see it well because of the shining golem. Roy?" Dwight asked me.


    "I can see it well. My eyes can adjust to the light better than most people, so everything was seen clearly by me. Seems like Ka knew that her mana is about to run out, and she doesn''t have any kind of magic attack that can defeat Ang in the sky. So, she musters all of her mana to raise the earth so she can be right at the same height as Ang is in the sky. Then, she used her wand covered with soil into some sort of weapon, and stabbed Ang. But Ang didn''t lose, and she countered with all her four elements to finally defeat Ka. Maybe she wanted to make sure that Ka will absolutely be defeated. That''s why she mercilessly used all four elements," I exined.


    "I see. So, in the end, Ang is the stronger one," Steven said.


    "Not really," I said.


    "What?"


    "The result was because of the rule of the tournament. No killing. Ka made the weapon blunt as she doesn''t want to kill Ang. If it''s a real fight and not a tournament, Ka is the real winner. She will make her weapon sharp and pierced through her enemy''s heart without mercy. Maybe because Ang knew that, she attacked Ka with her four elements because she knows she would have lost if it''s a real fight. But the rule is the rule. The winner of the tournament is Ang. Even though Ang doesn''t look happy, and Ka fainted with a smile on her face, the match ended with Ang''s victory. They have given their all for this tournament," I said.


    Yeah, this match is the best one among the other matches in the tournament.


    I''m kind of worried about Ka, but I will let her rest for now. I''ll just find someone else to heal my wound. Well, my wounds can be stopped by first aid. Maybe I''ll wait until Ka wakes up so she can heal meter. I''m a doctor anyway.


    Since this is the final match, I paid the twins their sries, and add some bonuses as well. Though I still smacked their heads for saying some useless things. Then I left the room.


    "Sonia, go tell Candy and Veronica the match is over. Ang is the champion. And ask them if they needed some help. I''ll bring some more agents to the capital if they need some," I said to Sonia.


    She also watched the match when she''s not being called. Though she disappears from time to time.


    As for Spot, after I return to Melk, he has been with Albert and stayed in his camouge.


    Let''s give report to Albert now. He''s going to give the reward to the winner. It''s best to report him before that so he can give the reward with a smile.


    "Albert, I''m here to report," I said.


    "You''re not going to Ka?" Albert asked.


    "I''ll do thatter. About the capital, it''s fine now. Veronica and Candy are there. I think it''s best to return you to the capital tomorrow or the day after," I said.


    "I agree. I''ll listen to the rest of the reportter tonight. For now, you need rest and stay by Ka''s side. I have a reward to give," Albert said.


    Ka is still unconscious and was brought by Jewel and Sara to the infirmary. I went there and did some first aid. The team should have our own healer other than Ka.


    As soon as we''re the only two left in the room, other than Victoria, Ka wakes up.


    "Hey. Congrattion. What is it again? Oh, right. You won the battle, but you lost the war. AM I saying it right? Anyway, that was a close one. I''m proud of you," I said as I patted her head.


    "Yeah, that was close. Ang is so strong. After our match she will only get stronger. She''s amazing," Ka said.


    "Heal yourself for now. If you have some spare mana, heal me as well," I said.


    Ka healed her wounds and mine. Now, we both don''t look like we were injured at all. It was as if neither of us fight at all today. I never thought that she still has enough mana to heal us both.


    "Should we go and watch the closing ceremony?" I asked.


    "No. Let''s stay here. I want you to hug me until everything is over," Ka said.


    I hugged her and even after the closing ceremony is over, she still doesn''t let go. She wants to be spoiled today after her loss against Ang. I''ll let her be spoiled for today.. Though if she asks me, I can spoil her every day.

 Chapter 363 - After The Final

    Both Ka and I have been healed. And after she drunk some Mana Potions, we left the already empty Arena.


    People have left the Arena, but they are excitedly talking about the fight that just happen. And I can see not just Ang''s team who ended as the winner, but even Jewel and the others from Cassau were also being surrounded.


    "Seems like it will be difficult for you to walk home. Do you want me to use portal?" I asked Ka.


    "No. Carry me through the sky in your arms. There''s no need to hurry back to the hotel. It will be surrounded after all since both teams participating in the final stay there," Ka said.


    "Haha. You lost once so you want to be spoiled?" I asked.


    "If I want to be spoiled, you will spoil me anyway. Let''s treat this as a special event," Ka said.


    Just as she wished, I carried her in my arms as I used Air Steps to run in the air. There are no more people flying in the sky anymore. Those who were on the rooftop to watch the match for free already left.


    Spot is still with Albert as I''m worried if the cult will still try to do something again here. That''s why I can''t camouge myself. Though for those watching us from the ground, they will just think that I''m a wind mage taking Ka home.


    But¡­ because of her poprity now, some people are looking at me angrily. She''s mine!


    Through the open window in the highest floor of the hotel, which is my room, we entered the hotel. We can see many people are down here congratting the champion and the runner-up as well. Some of them also here to see the top five from the poprity contest closely.


    They saw me carrying Ka, and Ka noticed as well. She just calmly waved her hand toward them, and they started screaming non-stop crazily.


    We entered my room and I rested Ka on the bed. I need to meet Albert tonight, but for now, I will take a rest.


    After I wake up, Ka is still there sleeping next to me. seems like Lina or someone enters my room to check on us, and then they left seeing us sleeping. There''s a message saying that I can go down to eat dinner quickly once I woke up.


    Seeing Ka is still sleeping, I left her be.


    As for the others who are injured, Sara, Jewel, Shirley, and Ang as well, someone else must have healed them. I can see that they are gathering in the dining hall just chatting. Luckily, there are no one else other than those who stay in the hotel. Seems like all the fans have left.


    Though I never expected that the twins, Steven and Dwight, are here.


    "What are you doing here?" I asked the two.


    "Oh, Boss! You woke up already!" Steven said.


    "Good to see you''re healthy, Boss," Dwight said.


    "What? Boss? Why are you calling me Boss?" I asked.


    "You''re our boss because you''re the one paying us sry for being thementators. And we''re grateful to you because thanks to you, we have be more popr. I thought we would end up as weakling hunters for life, but we can now be paid for advertising some merchants'' business product in the street. We can retire from being a hunter and focus on beingmentators now," Steven said.


    "But that will only happen if there are fights in the Arena, right? Has there someone who want to make another match already?" I asked.


    "Some merchants are discussing about it. They intend to monopolize the tournament, so it will take a while until they reached an agreement. But Boss, you never told us that the meal here is delicious. If I know about this, I would eat here every day," Dwight said.


    "It''s thanks to my maid. I don''t know about other cooks, but most of the meal here since I arrive were made by my maid. Once we leave the city, I don''t know if the food will taste as good or not,"


    We ate dinner together, and the twins left the hotel after they are full. Ka also has wake up and ate dinner together with us. seems like no one will have permanent injury despite their intense performance.


    But¡­ why are they looking at me? By them I mean Ka, Ang, Shirley, Lina, Sophie, Jewel, Wendy, Fabio, Carmen, and even Hannah.


    "¡­what?" I asked.


    "You were gone just as the match started, and return while being injured to watch the match. What happened?" Sophie asked.


    "I will tell it to Albert after this. You all want toe?" I asked.


    Everyone nodded. I guess I''ll bring everyone together with me then.


    "What about the children?" Sophie asked.


    "Take them all with us. Have them stay over at his ce together with his children. Let''s go."


    I used portal to get all of us to the ce Albert is staying. And it seems like he''s already prepared for my arrival, together with Kron, Oleg, and Mustache who are waiting.


    "So, how was the capital?" Albert asked.


    I told everyone about everything that happened. And since Candy is at the capital, I asked Sonia if she can return now after telling everyone.


    I brought Candy here with portal and she informed us what happened after I left.


    "The Prime Minister said that he will take care of everything, and Veronica stays just in case there are any remains of the cult. Some parts of the capital were destroyed. Many people died. The guards were unable to react in time, and captured the Prime Minister in the pce. They somehow managed to enter the pce and kill some guards and servants and went toward the Prime Minister without destroying anything," Candy exined.


    "Though some parts of the pce were destroyed because of Veronica''s attack," I said.


    "Yes. The assants, which were ten expert level mages, are all died. They are too strong to be restrained. I''m sorry," Candy apologized.


    "No problem. There are some of them that Roy captured here today beforehand. I''ll ask them if they know anythingter," Albert said.


    "Thank you, your majesty. From our guess, we think that those ten mages were asked to capture the Prime Minister while you are here in Melk. Other than the Prime Minister, they are also going after the nobles in the capital. But some of them are evil bastards who enjoyed killing civilians just for fun," Candy said.


    "I killed two mages who killed civilians, and two other mages who were capturing the nobles. Though I didn''t look for those nobles," I said.


    "They are fine. Because the mages that captured them have been killed, the captured nobles are spared. They were just tied up and unable to ask for help," Candy exined.


    So, they are just like Hector, huh? But that''s weird. If they want to conquer the kingdom, wouldn''t it be best if they kill everyone instead of capturing them?


    "Roy, do you remember Old man Henry''s best friend?" Albert asked.


    Old man''s best friend? I think his name was Russell¡­ that''s right!


    "Someone in the cult is a psychic element who can hypnotize people and manipte them," I said after thinking for a while.


    "That''s probably the case. And since they didn''t do it before, the cause might be because they only have the hypnotist only recently, or the mage can only be trusted only recently after raising them for a while. The cult might think that if Hector and the nobles were hypnotized, they can take control of the kingdom. Or even making them rebel against me. This is getting harder and harder. What a pain¡­" Albert sighed.


    Having someone who can manipte mind in the enemy''s side is just cheating! Howe I never knew about it? Did I change the future too much? Or the hypnotist in the cult was totally unknown even in my past life. That would be scarier.


    "At least we know one thing," Albert said.


    "What is it?" I asked.


    "The next time they will attack," Albert said with conviction.


    That''s right. If this attack is nned because Albert is away from the capital during the tournament, the next attack will be¡­


    "¡­it will happen during the next tournament between kingdoms," I said.


    "Roy, bring me to Varadis and Consenza to fetch those two. Then bring them all to Bernard''s mansion in Arturo where Harold is. Queen Carmen and Fabio wille as well. Let''s go,"


    "You''re not going back to the capital first?" I asked.


    "Bring me there tomorrow with Miguel to make everyone think he''s carrying me home with flying magic," Albert said.


    Before we leave, I returned the others back to the hotel and asked Sonia to greet the other kings before meeting them. Since Harold said it''s fine, I sent Fabio and Carmen first over there to exin what happened and what could possibly happen.


    As for Candy, I returned her back to the capital.


    Today as well, I used portals many times. After getting everyone to Bernard''s mansion, I quickly fall asleep in a room in his mansion without listening to their discussion.


    I only said that I will return them back after I wake up before I fall into slumber.

 Chapter 364 - Surprises For Surprises

    I woke up to see myself in Bernard''s mansion in Arturo. Seems like after falling asleep, no one wakes me up as they are still having a discussion.


    I go to where everyone is to see if they made some ns for the cult or not.


    "So, what will you do now?" I asked.


    "We''ll return to our own kingdom for now. As for you, the only thing we ask you for is to get stronger," Old man Henry said.


    "And as our transport method. We need you to bring us back home," Lynn said.


    Well, that''s what I do most of the time. Though I stopped training as much as before because I have to teach now.


    "Don''t worry, Roy. I heard from Dean that you should have cover the lesson that can be taught. As for the rest, he said to not worry about teaching them at the moment. You don''t need to teach anymore, and Sara can cover for you. You will be able to train hard again," Albert said.


    "That''s good. I want to at least be able to get my third contracted monster before the tournament. And if possible, I want to increase my air element level as well. Maybe I should practice in Monsters World then," I said.


    "I Understand. As for the lineup for the tournament, you won''t be in it anymore. But you will be busier because you need to travel more, and to have you find and kill or capture any cult members. We suspected that the cult will take action to all countries during the next tournament. And we will also add some more rules for the tournament, like more members as substitutions. So, we will dy the tournament as much as possible. Try to get much stronger during that period," Albert said.


    So, the tournament will be dyed. That''s nice. I still don''t know how I can get stronger. I have only fought against weaker opponents now, and the only injury I received are just because I let down my guard, or some that I intentionally take because I was in a hurry.


    If I enter Monsters World, I will be able to find stronger monsters to train with. And while I''m at it, it might be a good idea to scout the next monster I want to get as my third summon.


    Once I be and advanced level summoner, I''ll eat another Pear-y Fruit. I hope I can still be expert level, or even Master level in the future.


    And once my summoning level improved, I can make more portal as well. That is also important.


    Hmm¡­ I guess I should make some excuses to Daniel why I''m leaving him again.


    Sigh¡­ if only the cult would just destroy itself.


    "Wait, someone ising. It''s one of the maids here," I said.


    I can see a woman in maid uniform is approaching us and stopped before the door to this room. She knocked on the door lightly.


    "What is it?" Bernard asked.


    "Prince Bernard, there''s someone here to see you. He said he''s a messenger from the king himself and has an important message to deliver to you. He''s staying at the inn before going to meet youter in the evening."


    Messenger from the king while the king himself is here? All of us looked at the king who is confused himself and shakes his head in denial.


    "No, it wasn''t me. It must be from the fake king," Harold said.


    "It''s from the fake king, but you still can''t reject the messenger. Meet him here somewhere I can listen," Albert said. He''s thinking of listening to detect if the messenger will speak lies or not.


    "Wait! He''s not alone. Two guards, no explosive devices. We don''t know if any one of them, or even the messenger himself is a member of the cult. Maybe all of them, including the messenger, are expert level mages from the cult," I said as I looked at the closest inn where I found the messenger.


    "You can see them?" Lynn asked.


    "They stayed in the closest inn here. And they are checking this mansion. Albert, if you want to hide, I don''t think you can if any one of them is expert level mage. How about you pretend to be a butler? Carmen and I will pretend to be Bernard''s guards," I suggested.


    "Alright. As for the others¡­ you can go home now. As for Harold, Fabio, and Luna¡ª"


    "I''ll stay. I won''t listen in the same room, but I''ll pretend that I''m a servant here as well," Fabio interrupted.


    "Hal and Luna will go with me to Varadis. I think my ce is safe now after that time with Roy there," Old man Henry suggested.


    After making sure that the messenger of the king and his guards are too far to detect my magic, I send old man and the others back to their own kingdom, with Harold and Luna following old man Henry.


    Harold can now walk with the help of a walking cane. His muscles have recovered slightly, but he still has difficulty walking, so he still spends most of the time in a wheelchair.


    We prepared ourselves before the messenger arrive. And just in case, I told Sonia to ask Toni if he knows anything.


    "Toni said that he doesn''t know it. He never heard of this from the fake king himself," Sonia said.


    Well, this has be more confusing.


    "Tell him that it''s better to not ask the fake king about this just in case," Albert said. And Sonia disappears again.


    Later that evening, the messenger finally arrives soon after with his two guards.


    Albert who is pretending as a butler, opened the door and lead the three to the meeting room where Carmen and I have waited. Other than Bernard, the four of us including Fabio who is in the next room, are wearing disguises using Blobbies just in case.


    Now that I get a closer look, I can see that the three are also wearing disguises like fake beard or wig. I informed Bernard and Carmen about this while Albert is bringing them here.


    It''s a brave move from Albert to confront the three alone. Does he have faith in his strength? Or is it because he knew I''m watching?


    "Wee. Now, what message do you bring from the (fake) king?" Bernard said.


    There''s a pause between his word. He couldn''t say that the king now is a fake, so he whispered it in low volume so no one could hear it. But I did.


    "Before that, this is not a ce for strangers to hear it. I don''t want your guards or your servant to hear about the message," the messenger said.


    "I refuse. These people here are those I trust the most. If they can''t hear it, I won''t hear it either," Bernard said.


    "¡­even if those people can betray you in the future?" the messenger asked.


    "They will not. Even if they did, it will only because of my fault," Bernard said.


    "¡­fine. But what you hear can''t be leaked outside no matter what."


    "That depend on the content of the message."


    No further conversation was made. Bernard refused to let us leave, but the messenger insists on making us leave.


    Then, one of the guards patted the messenger on the shoulder.


    "It''s okay. We are risking our lives just by being here. If we die, there''s nothing we can do," the guard said.


    I think I got the gist of it. They are really not a messenger from the fake king. There''s no way someone as important as a messenger would let a guard touches his shoulder like that.


    "Sigh¡­ okay. We are actually not messengers from the king," the fake messenger said.


    Nailed it!


    And as I''m acting as Bernard''s guard, I stepped forward in between Bernard and the fake messenger to protect Bernard.


    "We''re not here to cause trouble. Actually¡­ sigh¡­ whatever. I''ll just take off this disguise," the guard who patted the messenger then removed his disguise.


    I don''t know the guy, but it seems that it''s a face that Bernard knows.


    "Francesco!?" Bernard was shocked to see the face of someone he knows here.


    "And me as well," the other guard also removed his disguise.


    "Dominic!?"


    "I guess it''s my turn now," this time, it''s the messenger.


    "Roberto!? Why are you here!?" Bernard asked.


    "You know them?" I asked Bernard.


    "They are my brothers!"


    The three are Bernard''s and Fabio''s brothers?


    "We are here because¡ª"


    "Wait! Your turn is over. It''s now our turn," I interrupted the fake guard''s sentence. The one who removed his disguise first, Francesco.


    "You sure like weird things, huh?"


    As expected, Albert who understands me removes his disguise first.


    """King Albert!?"""


    "It''s good that you know me. Next is someone more important than me to you," Albert said.


    This time, Carmen stepped forward and removes her disguise.


    "I missed you three," Carmen said.


    """Queen Carmen!?"""


    Haha! They have the same reactions as Bernard!


    "Lastly, it''s me!" I removed my disguise as well.


    """¡­who?"""


    "That''s the expected reaction! Well, let''s get the others here as well. FABIO, COME HERE!"


    I called Fabio''s name loudly. He''s in the next room, but I shouted so loud because this is just so interesting.


    "Huh? Fabio?" the fake messenger is confused.


    And then, after hearing my shout, Fabio hurriedly entered the room and surprised to see his three brothers.


    "Francesco? Dominic? Roberto?"


    """You''re alive!?"""


    "That''s not all. I''ll get the others."


    I opened a portal toward the Blobby in old man Henry''s possession, and a portal opened right in front of him.


    "Get the man in wheelchair and his daughter here," I said.


    """King Henry!?"""


    Of course the three know who old man is. They looked at the portal curiously and see someone they know on the other side.


    Seeing the three, old man realized what happened, and a few secondster, Luna appears while pushing his father''s wheelchair.


    "Father! And Luna as well!?"


    "What the hell is going on here!?"


    An eye for an eye and a tooth for a tooth.. Obviously, surprises for surprises.

 Chapter 365 - The Three Princes Stories

    Oh, wow! This is hrious. The three guests are actually other royal children in disguises. Bernard was shocked, and so I let the others remove their disguises as well.


    As expected, they don''t know me. But their reactions when they see Albert, Carmen, Fabio, and then Luna and Harold are worth it.


    "¡­what is going on here?" Harold asked.


    "Well, the messenger and his guards are actually your sons. There''s no message at all from the fake king. Or at least I don''t think that there''s one. They are here disguising themselves to do something. That''s why I have you return here," I said.


    "¡­you forgot someone else," Harold said.


    "¡­who?"


    "Jill."


    Oh, right. His daughter who thought of getting Bernard under him for the fight for the throne. But she failed instead.


    Right now, she''s in a room in this mansion. She''s deep in thought. Probably regretting her decisions so far.


    She''s unable to return back to where she was supposed to be in charge of because of her own decisions while being influenced by her former assistant who is part of the cult. Now, the city should be filled with cult members. That''s why returning there will be dangerous for her.


    Remembering his own sister, Bernard hurriedly get a servant to bring Jill here and as expected, she was surprised as well.


    "Francesco? Dominic? Why are you two here? And Roberto, I thought you were supporting Fiorentina to be the next queen? She''s opposing Francesco''s faction. So, why are you here?" Jill asked.


    Hmm¡­ I think I get the gist of it a little bit. The one named Roberto was supposed to be supporting the one named Fiorentina. And Fiorentina was fighting against Francesco for the throne. And Jill wanted to build a new faction before?


    "¡­Jill? You''re here? I thought you were nning to built a new faction. So, you''re trying to recruit Bernard?" Roberto asked.


    "Well, that''s impossible now since the real king is here with the crown prince," Jill exined.


    "Real king¡­ fake king¡­ things started to get clearer now. But who is that guy? He''s acting so casual in front of three kings," Dominic asked.


    "I''m an executioner. If I find any one of you to be rted to the cult, I''m the one who will kill you," I said. I didn''t see any reaction from them that tells me they are from the cult. But I still keep my guard up.


    Well, now that we met three people whom we don''t know yet to whom they put their allegiance to. Are they loyal to the kingdom? To the fake king? To the cult? Or to their own greed? Good thing Albert is still here.


    "Well, I have something to take care of, so I won''t participate your discussion. See you next time," Old man said.


    After saying that, he returns back to his desk. Then, I close the portal.


    "Now, I''ll exin to you three first about why am I here," Harold started the discussion.


    He started telling his three sons about what happened from the start. From how he suddenly got kidnapped, imprisoned and tortured for information, and left to dead in the prison once his usefulness expired.


    After that, it was Fabio''s turn. He didn''t tell the three about his ability and Luna''s ability to see the future. He just told them that Luna sensed that the king has been swapped, so Fabio nned their deaths so they can escape from the cult''s grasp with his sister.


    After that, Carmen told them about how she was depressed after Fabio''s death, but then she found out that the current king is a fake. When she was telling them about how she found out about it, I make sure that Luna won''t be able to hear it. The royal children''s faces turn red hearing that.


    "Mom!" Fabioined that his mother spoke too much.


    "Don''tin to your mom. I''m quite proud of what I can do in the bed, and you''re all the result of it," Harold said.


    "At least don''t say it in front of Luna. She''s still too young," I said.


    I''m right behind Luna while closing her ears. If I cover only her head with Air Barrier, she might be panicked that she suddenly unable to hear anything. That''s why I close her ears with my hands. Though I still put Air Barrier around her.


    At least she didn''t listen to it and curiously looked at me. Seeing her look curious, I guess even in the future, this result is unavoidable. Me, covering her ears or making sure she won''t listen with other means.


    Then, it goes back to Harold exining about the cult and Toni who chooses to stay in the danger zone to be our informant. He also told that Toni''s mother has fallen to the cult, and the others'' mothers might as well be fallen.


    "That¡­ to think that we all almost fallen to the cult! DAMMIT!" Francesco shouted as he punched the table. Well, he''s not well-trained so the table didn''t break at all. If it''s Bernard, even if he hadn''t trained for long, the table might be cracked.


    Next is stories from the three''s side. Started from the fake guard called Roberto.


    Like Jill said, he was in his sister''s faction. But just a few months ago, there was an assassination attempt. He was lucky since he just breakthrough to advanced level light mage so he put barrier in time, but he was still injured. So, he pretended to be dead. But somehow, there was another Roberto by his sister''s side. That''s when he knows something was wrong, so he went to Francesco for help.


    "Wow, there are so many people faked their death in this family. You''re pretty lucky you haven''t been discovered so far," I said.


    Albert didn''t react at all telling us that he''s speaking the truth.


    "I guess just like father, someone swapped Roberto with a fake," Fabio said.


    "Is there any magic element that can help someone turned into another person?" I asked.


    "None that I know of. But someone actually did it. it might be two people, or just one person who travels a lot and made those two''s disguises," Albert said.


    First, there''s someone who can brainwash. Next, there''s someone who can disguise themselves. Not to mention the Archbishop who is a master level mage. At least this time we know a little bit about our enemies.


    Then as for the other two, seems like they are brothers from the same mother. Dominic has been following Francesco from the very beginning.


    At first, Francesco was thinking of finding someone suitable to be the next in line, but no one was good enough, so he decided to do it himself with the help of Dominic. He gained enough reputation to be a strong contender to the throne.


    So far, nothing unusual until Roberto came and told Francesco that there''s another Roberto by Fiorentina''s side. Everything was told by Francesco alone as Dominic just nodded to his exnation.


    "I see. So, you two are brothers from the same mother?" I asked Dominic.


    "That''s right. Everything Francesco said was right," Dominic said.


    This time, Albert reacted. Which mean he''s not Francesco''s real brother. He said that what Francesco said was right, and Albert didn''t react. But after I asked if he''s Francesco''s brother, Albert reacted. I guess we found the rat.


    But he doesn''t have explosive device in his mouth. He could be an expert level mage. Good thing I grabbed one Magic Restraining Cor before they arrive here.


    "Francesco, can you ask your brother anything that only you two know?"


    "What? You don''t trust Dominic?" Francesco asked.


    "I don''t."


    "¡­Dominic, what''s your most hated food until you were six?" Francesco asked.


    "Fran, why are you asking me that? You don''t believe that I''m another fake, right?" Dominic asked.


    "Dominic. Answer the question," this time, it was Harold who forced Dominic to answer the question.


    "¡­it''s carrot, okay? I never liked carrot!" Dominic said.


    "No. That''s what Dominic hate until now. But there''s another food that he doesn''t like until he was six. But now, he can handle that food. Now, what is it?" Francesco noticed something strange with Dominic.


    I have to say that this fake Dominic is the greatest actor so far. He even acted surprised after seeing Albert''s face. Maybe he knows Albert''s face as well, or he reacted the same as the other two previously.


    "¡­it''s bell pepper?"


    "¡­wrong."


    As soon as Francesco said it was wrong, I quickly run behind the fake Dominic, and put the cor on him. His reaction was quite fast, but luckily, he''s a fire mage. I can stop the fire by my air magic before I put the cor on him.


    "Well, now we have one of the fakes. This guy seems to be an expert level mage. His reaction when I moved was as fast as the expert level mages I fought previously," I said.


    "Tsk! How did you know that I''m not the real Dominic?" the fake asked. But I''m not the one answered it.


    "¡­Dominic never touched fish at all during meal until he was six.. Who are you and where is my brother?" Francesco asked the fake Dominic with anger.

 Chapter 366 - Hes The Fake One!

    "So, it''s time for some interrogation. Who have questions here?" I asked if there''s anyone who want to ask the fake Dominic something first.


    "You think just because you put the cor around my neck, you will make me speak? I won''t tell you anything!" the fake Dominic shouted.


    Hmm¡­ it seems that he''s convinced that we can''t make him talk. He won''t be able to kill himself, but we need to get him to talk.


    Let''s see¡­ among the gases from the trees in the mysterious forest, I can use the white calm one and the green happy one. Neither of them can get anyone to speak the truth. Should I use torture? But he might still refuse to speak.


    Well, if he lies, Albert will know and we can simply conclude that the real answer is the opposite of his words. I guess we''ll just ask him normally.


    "Where is the real Dominic!?" Francesco asked first while I''m still wondering how to interrogate the fake Dominic.


    "I''ll tell you that. There''s no reason for us to keep him alive after we got everything we want to know from him. That''s my answer. Probably, it''s the only truth that wille out of my mouth no matter what you do," the fake Dominic said.


    "You!"


    Francesco is angry hearing his brother was killed. The others also have the same angry expression. But Harold still looks calm. Well, that''s only on the outside. I can see his heart is beating fast hearing that his son was killed.


    "Francesco, calm down," Harold said.


    "But father!"


    "We need to get as many information as we can from him," Harold said.


    As for me, I''m checking his body. How could someone be swapped for a while and no one noticed it? What kind of disguise he''s wearing?


    "It hurts! It hurts!" the fake Dominic screamed in pain as I pulled his hair. I''m just checking if it''s his real hair. The same hair and the same color as the real Dominic. This guy has the same red hair as the royalty from Arturo.


    "His hairstyle and color are the same as the real one?" I asked.


    "¡­yes," Fabio is the one answering.


    "Harold, you don''t have any illegitimate children, right?" I asked Harold, to which Carmen looked at Harold angrily.


    "I don''t. I always make sure to only make children with women I have wed," Harold said.


    "Then, I guess it''s true that everyone has at least one doppelganger that look simr to you in the world. It''s not from magic, right?" I asked the fake Dominic.


    "It''s real! My hair, my face, my body, they are real!" the fake Dominic shouted. Seems like even after all he said, he can''t endure pain and spoke the truth easily. I guess torture can work.


    "Hmm¡­ Carmen, go and get Luna to another room," I said to Carmen.


    Telling her to take Luna, Carmen and everyone else realized that I''m about to torture the fake.


    Let''s see if he can handle this.


    I grabbed his left index finger and broke it totally. Not bend it to the wrong side, but I just grip it really hard that the bones are broken to pieces.


    "AAAARGH!!"


    "Well, that''s one. You still have neen left including your toes. You should tell us everything so I can grant you death you wish for," I said.


    "I''ll tell you nothing!"


    Maybe this is also a good target practice for my air magic. I haven''t tried the other leaf colors yet.


    I imagine the blue colored leaf and the effect that will happen to those who smelled the tree. It''s the one that make people feel depressed.


    I think it worked a little, but not to the point where the other side is depressed like Victoria showed me back then.


    I broke all the fingers in his left hand while the depressing gas is on, then I changed it to a happy one while saying something to him.


    "If you choose to answer honestly, I can grant you death. I told you about this before, right?" I said.


    "Huff¡­ huff¡­ re-really? Can I die if I speak the truth?" the fake Dominic asked.


    "Yes. Well, that depend on your answers," I said.


    It worked! So, I canbine two or more types of gases to make him speak the truth!


    The fake Dominic looked as if there''s a light at the end of the tunnel.


    Albert and the others looked at me in fear, but I don''t care.


    "Well, anyone has questions for him?" I asked again.


    "How did you swap with Dominic and where?" Harold is the first one to ask.


    "¡­back before you were swapped. I also managed to influence the real Dominic''s mother to join the cult. You were swapped because of my help. I drugged you and let other people enter the castle," the fake Dominic answered.


    "You! You killed Dominic a long time ago!?" Francesco asked in anger. There''s a trace of tears on his cheek. Well, he just found out that his brother died a long time ago today.


    "Yes. At first, we wanted to find someone to swap the crown prince Fabio, but since there''s no one among us that look like him, we swapped Dominic instead. And then we swapped the king. The rest is as you know it," the fake said.


    Francesco dropped on all four after hearing that and cries. It''s no time to be sad, so let''s ignore him.


    "How long has the cult nned to capture my kingdom?" Harold asked while ignoring his own son''s cry of agony.


    "I don''t know when it really started, but I joined the n about five years ago."


    Well, knowing how long the cult has been, I think it might be much longer than that. But still, why is the cult so silent for a long time and started to act now? If only they would act in¡­ let''s say a hundred yearster, then I won''t have to be so busy today and let the people of the future take care of it.


    "Is there anyone else who have been swapped?" Harold asked.


    The fake Dominic then reported every single members of the family that has been swapped, or those who have joined the cult that he knows.


    "¡­those are the ones that I know of. There might be some other," Dominic said.


    "¡­this is getting more and more difficult. How will we stop them from taking my kingdom?" Harold sighed.


    What else do we need to ask? So far, Albert didn''t inform us of any lies from the fake Dominic. If there are other questions we need to know about the cult, we can just ask Celestine or Veronica.


    "Sonia, ask Toni if there''s any questions he wants to ask to the fake Dominic," Albert said to Sonia after calling her.


    The three were surprised to see a ghost suddenly appears.


    "She''s the kind ghost that helped us tomunicate with others even if we''re far apart," I told them simply.


    "Oh, so that''s how you can gather here," the fake Dominic said.


    "That''s not all. Most of it were thanks to me," I said. It might be a little shameless for me to say it like that, but it''s the truth.


    "¡­who are you anyway?" the fake Dominic asked.


    "Someone very important. Next is¡­ what is your n ining here? I don''t believe that you''re here just because Francesco told you to," I asked.


    "¡­I''m here to kill Bernard if I have the chance. He has gained too much power in a short term in the battle for the throne."


    Well, that''s to be expected.


    Then, Sonia returned. She has a question from Toni.


    "Toni told me to ask him if he knows someone who will participate in the tournament. Since he''s acting as a prince, he might receive more information than the others," Sonia said.


    "Well¡­ just two people have been decided. Both are expert level mages. I was also asked if I want to go, but my role as Francesco''s brother is more important than the stupid tournament."


    "Then, what is the cult''s n during the tournament?" It was Albert who asked.


    "¡­Making sure that all kingdomspletely fall," the fake Dominic said.


    After that, Albert and the others have more questions to ask the fake Dominic. About the identities of the two people who have been guaranteed to participate as well.


    After Sonia told Toni about it, she returns bringing us some news. It turns out one of the two are among the recently hired elite guards of the king. And it''s someone he''s trying to investigate at the moment. Whenever Toni goes out of his room, it was him who would apany Toni. He seems to be proud of his lightning element, so he must be an expert level in his lightning element.


    Damn, that''s the most destructive element and he made it to expert level? He''s dangerous.


    "That''s all I know. Now, please kill me!" the fake Dominic begged me.


    "Harold, I''ll let you take care of this guy. Albert, shall we return?"


    "Yeah. There''s nothing else for us to do here. Harold¡­ take care, okay?"


    "¡­you too, Albert. And Roy as well."


    I left the fake Dominic to Harold, and then returned with Albert back to Melk.. After telling the others there, I brought Albert to the capital together with Mustache while I stayed behind in Melk.

 Chapter 367 - Training Before Going Home

    It has been three days since I returned back to Melk from Arturo. The city has gotten quiet now since most people have returned back. But it''s still quite crowded.


    As for the Arena, the merchant finally organized a tournament to decide who will be the main sponsor of the tournament arranged by the merchant. They will send representative hired by their own group, and fight each other. The winner will be the main sponsor.


    As for how it will go, I don''t really care. It''s just the people of Melk will get busier and the Arena will attract people from outside. Maybe they will make the city bigger in the future.


    Steven and Dwight were hired to be thementators again. They happily epted it. Though I told them that in the future, I might ask them to bementators again. I didn''t tell them about the big tournament, but they agreed instantly. Saying that they are grateful to me for the chance of getting a better job that they like.


    After returning from Arturo, Shirley insisted on hearing the discussion that happen in Arturo, so I told her what I remembered. Including the three guests who arrived at Bernard''s mansion, of which one of them is a fake.


    "King Harold must be going through such difficulty. But despite his usual attitude, he''s still a smart king. I believe he can handle it well."


    That''s what Shirley said after I told her what happened. I don''t know how good he is as a king, but if he could make Bernard gain strength in short period for the battle for the throne, I guess he''s just that good.


    And it''s finally time for them to return home.


    "Roy, we decided to go back the way we came here. We will go on foot. Both the capital team and Cassau team will go together to Cassau, then we will split up and go to the capital," Shirley said.


    "¡­you said that it was both teams, but aren''t the number is too little? There''s just five of you," I said.


    In front of me, there are only Shirley, Ka, Ang, Jewel, and Sara. As for the other team members, I didn''t see them.


    "The agent from my team, and the two from capital, have something important to do. Probably rted to the chaos in the capital. As for Frederick, he returned home quickly with a carriage after hearing the news about the problem in the capital," Ka said.


    Oh, right. He''s a noble from the capital. Maybe his family is one of the victims who got captured. Or maybe even killed. I heard from Candy that some nobles fought back and got killed without being taken as a hostage.


    "Then¡­ what about the other guy? Theughingstock for the tournament?" I asked. Though he''s not that important, I asked just in case. His pride might have been hurt too bad and he would think of taking revenge despite it''s all because of his own decision.


    "I think it''s fine to ignore him. He came here proudly with his family, and left here humiliated. Though I don''t know if he will return back to the campus or not. At least he and his father don''t have the face to meet other people right now," Ka said.


    "I see. That''s good. Hmm? Sophie, you''re here?"


    Sophiee by while we were discussing about how they will return.


    "Yeah. I''m thinking of going back with everyone as well. And Lina said that Sunny will join us," Sophie said.


    "Then I''ll join as well!"


    Suddenly, Victoria left me and transformed into her human form and said that she wanted to join.


    "You too?" I asked.


    "Yeah. And it''s beneficial for us if I managed to defeat more monsters as well. Anyway, what about you?" Victoria asked.


    "I''ll stay here for a while. Since Mustache left with Albert, I''ll be the guard to protect Marie until she returns to the capital," I said.


    "That''s a good idea. Since Albert is gone, she might be the next target," Ka said.


    Yeah. I''m afraid that the cult has failed many times and they will attack anyone rted to the royalty. Not just Marie, but Shirley or n, or even Lana whose existence was kept hidden.


    "I''ll bring the children to Cassau for now with Lina and the others. Well, see youter."


    I gathered the kids together, and brought them to Cassau. Well, other than n and Lana.


    After that, I went to the mansion they are staying and told Marie that I will stay for a while.


    "We will leave to the capital tomorrow with the guards. But you can take us three to the capital right away."


    That''s what Marie said.


    In the end, I don''t have to guard her anymore and I have some free time. Should I go back to Cassau to hold a lecture? Nah, I''ll pass on that.


    I''ll use this chance to get stronger as well.


    I also need to practice my air magic to create hallucination. That time I used depressing gas on the fake Dominic, it might have been luck since I''m unable to do it again. But now Victoria is gone, and I''m too afraid of practicing it on Spot, I need to find a monster to experiment on.


    "Roy, where are we going?" Spot asked.


    "Training. I want to find a monster whom I can tell its expression for experiment. Do you know any?" I asked Spot.


    "Oh, you mean like what you did to Victoria in that forest? Hmm¡­ if it''s the depressing one, I know a good one. It''s a Vicious Ostrich," Spot said.


    A green ostrich that is¡­ vicious. If I remember correctly, it''s a flightless bird with a long neck and can run fast. Their kick could even kill someone in one hit. Maybe I''ll train my kicking as well.


    "Why only depression?" I asked.


    "When they are depressed, Vicious Ostriches would bury their head on the ground. If your magic worked, they will do that" Spot said.


    That''s good. I need monsters that I can tell their reactions from the gases I''d like to test. And Vicious Ostrich is a good target.


    After that, I went to look for where the Vicious Ostriches can be found. It''s close to the border to Arturo, but since I''m riding Spot, I can get there in less than one hour.


    I finally found a flock of ostriches. There are too many of them, but it''s good for my kicking practice. Maybe.


    The size of the Ostriches is huge. Even their legs are just a little shorter than my height. The legs looked thinner than my arms, but the power behind every kick was so strong. I even saw one during the war before I died that there''s a summoner or a tamer who contracted with a Vicious Ostrich and ride it to the war. The ostrich kicked many cult members, but it died because it''s weak against fire. The smell of a fried bird was appetizing. I wonder how they taste? Let''s find out today.


    I dropped from Spot''s back right in the middle of the flock. As for Spot, he went away and look for other monsters to feast on since I said that I will take care of the ostriches.


    "Alright! Kicking party begi¡ª"


    Before I finished my word, a kick was directed right to the back of my head. I barely managed to dodge it.


    "Fuck! Their kicks are faster than expected! Well, it''s not training if it''s not at least this much. Let''s go!"


    I won''t use Reizpear, Blobbies, or any magic. I will only fight them with my legs, and Aura.


    An ostrich in front of me tries to kick me, but I also kicked at the same time. Our leg hit each other, and even though mine is covered with Aura, I can still feel the pain.


    I think this might be too much. Well, I''ll escape if I can''t handle it anymore.


    The kicking match began, and I''m at the obvious disadvantage. Not only their legs are longer, they are more powerful as well. But I can endure it if I cover my body with Aura.


    "Oh? A footwork? That seems useful."


    One of the ostriches moved its feet as if dancing. Left, right, I don''t know which foot it will use to attack me. Even with Divine Vision that can see its muscle''s movement, I still don''t know which foot it will attack me with.


    And I suddenly got hit right on the chest. I was lucky to keep my Aura covering my body.


    "Ugh¡­ wow, that was amazing. I think I can learn more than just kicking. Fine, Bring it on! I will leave some of you alive for my experiment! The rest will be nuggets!"


    Even with Aura, I still couldn''t hit the ostrich after it used that strange footwork. But after a while, I copied their footwork and I finally managed to get a clear hit on its body.


    That''s one down and¡­ fifty more to go?


    If I''m surrounded, it will be the end of me. I need to make sure they won''t be able to surround me and just make it a one on one battle.


    The next ostrich spread its wings while doing that weird footwork. I see, it can be used to intimidate the enemy. I also tried to raise my hands above, and its eyes are focused on my hand. It worked as well for distraction.


    After defeating the first twenty ostriches, the rest was easy to take care of. I only left about ten tied up to the trees nearby for my air magic experiment.


    Coming here is a good idea.. I can still get stronger.

 Chapter 368 - Learning Two More Types Of Gas

    I think I got the gist of kicking technique. I also learned footwork like the ostriches did, and also the usefulness of intimidation just by raising my hands. If I have weapon in my hands, the effect might be doubled. Coming here is worth it.


    Now, with ten ostriches left tied up to different trees, I will practice my air magic to induce hallucination like the trees from the Mysterious Forest. Spot said that depression is easily visible by their reaction, but I want to try other types of gas as well. But for now, let''s try one by one.


    First is the calming gas. I already can do that, so it was easy. The ten ostriches that were screaming and kicking the trees trying to escape, are now calmed down. This type of gas is easily learned for me. Maybe because the calming and sleeping gases are simr. But the two can bebined to get a good sleep.


    I tried it on myself once before, and I promise to not use it on me again ever! Though after the cult is destroyed and everything is over, I want to have that kind of sleep again.


    Well, that''s the white leaves tree one. Next is the second gas that I can use among seven types I found in the Mysterious Forest. The green leaves that gives happiness. Which will make everyone who inhale it turn happy.


    But how do Vicious Ostriches show their happiness? Through kicking? Or maybe jumping around. Let''s see if it works on them.


    I used the happy gas on one ostrich, and it suddenly stood up and jumping around while making a funny voice. Is it how it shows happiness?


    I know that I can use the happy gas. And the ostrich''s reaction means that it worked. I''ll try it on another ostrich if it will react the same way.


    The next ostrich I tried on also reacts the same way. That''s how it shows its happiness. I don''t know what kind of happiness they are reacting to, but it must be something amazing for the ostriches.


    I guess I won''t train these two gases anymore.


    Next is the depressing gas. Just calling it like that makes me depressed.


    I sessfully tried it once on the fake¡­ Harold''s son in Arturo previously. I will try it again and this time, to the ostriches.


    Spot said that they will bury their head into the ground if they are depressed, so it will be obvious if it works or not.


    The ostrich I targeted is different from the previous two as I''m trying to find when the effect disappears.


    I''m trying to use the depressing gas, but I don''t know if whate out is the same gas that I wish for or not. After all, air is invisible. Even with my Divine Vision, I couldn''t see it clearly.


    I could see some dirt or unknown object floating in the air, but not what type of gas is in the air. It''s just makes it harder to see if my air magic work or not.


    I used the calming gas at first because I could see clearly if they reacted. The effect of the calming gas shouldn''t disappear anytime soon, so it will be obvious if my other type of gas will work or not. But the one I used on didn''t react at all.


    Then, I tried it on all the other nine ostriches including the happy ostriches. And I seeded in making two ostriches buried their head to the ground in ten tries. That''s just twenty percent chance of sess.


    Let''s try this gas until I seeded in using it one hundred percent. After I seeded in it, I will try other gases. It will take some time until Ka and the others arrive at Cassau after all.


    I''ll practice until my mana run out today!


    And it took me two days until I finally have a hundred percent of sess. All ten ostriches are now burying their head to the ground. It''s kind of funny seeing them like that.


    I used the calming gas so they can get out their head from the ground and catch some breathe. I also give some food for the ostriches. I don''t want to find other ostriches at the moment.


    But the greatest improvement I made so far is not the depressing gas, but the calming gas. Now, I can use calming gas just a little to breathe it in myself to not make myself lost my cool.


    I was shouting in anger as I keep failing, and when I think of using the calming gas on myself just a little, I''m back to normal. This will be useful when I''m or someone else is panicked.


    Now, three out of seven gases were learned. Next is¡­ which one should be the most useful? Sexy hallucination, something that makes you angry, something that scares you, or something that will make you kill anyone in sight?


    Everything is useful. Though I don''t know about the sexy one. Victoria seems happy with it. But I''m not with what she''s seeing.


    I guess next is angering gas. I''ll just call it infuriating gas. If I used it on my enemies, they will lose their cool. Imagine if they gathered together, and I spread these gases. They will fight each other.


    As for gas that makes people killing each other, I think that might be difficult. After all, I can''t imagine what they are seeing to the point that they are trying to kill each other, other than anger or hatred.


    Although they seem simr, they are vastly different. Victoria would attack me furiously when she was angry. But her attacks were predictable. But under the trees with ck leaves, she would attack me with cool mind. She would use any means to kill me.


    Well, the former intent to hurt me, but thetter want to kill me. I''ll figure this er. For now, the infuriating gas.


    This time, the chances are lower. One every twenty times! Which makes it¡­ five percent.


    At least it worked. And the ostrich I targeted then shouted angrily at me, or the ostriches close to it. Is it a shout or a chirp since it''s a bird?


    Anyway, just as the name suggest, Vicious Ostrich became vicious after inhaling the infuriating gas. That''s wrong. In fact, they became more vicious after inhaling the gas.


    This time, I trained in this gas for about a week. Now it feels like these ten ostriches have be my pets. Delicious pets. I raised them to be eaten. Wait, that''s livestock. Not pet.


    I seeded in using this infuriating gas on all the ostriches with a one hundred percent sess rate. I can do many things with this gas.


    Maybe I''ll try to create chaos in the capital of Arturo with this gas? No, I''ll do thatter. I guess I will inform Albert first that I can do it so he will think of a n.


    Well, now that it has been a while, they should arrive anytime soon. I''ll go back to Cassau now.


    ¡­after butchering the ten ostriches. I feed them well, so these ostriches should be more delicious than the previous ones I killed.


    "Spot! We''re going back to Cassau!"


    I shouted. These past few days that I''m here, Spot has been flying around somewhere to fight other monsters. I told him that he can go back to the sea, but he refused.


    "Oh, we''re back already? Good, I''m bored."


    "Then you should have return on your own. Let''s go."


    I opened a portal and before I enter, I throw all the ostrich''s meat into the fridge in our base. Once Lina should have been there with the kids. I missed her cooking.


    I returned back to Cassau, and greeted the kids. Hannah is jogging around the city trying to build some stamina, so she''s not there to greet me when I return.


    I just yed with Daniel, Lana, and n until Ka and the others returned.


    They returned the day after I came back.


    "Wee back! How''s your journey?" I asked.


    "Nothing worth mentioning. The monsters are just the same one and we didn''t feel any kind of growth at all individually. But we tried to improve our teamwork, which is nice," Ka said.


    "That''s good. Teamwork is important. So, Shirley and Ang, how long will you stay here? And how do you want to return back to the capital? Should I use portal? Or you want to ride on Spot''s back? Or treat it as training and return there on foot again?" This time, I asked Shirley and Ang.


    "We''ll stay here for a while and return with your portal. I think the people in the capital can''t wait to see the winner of the tournament right away," Shirley said.


    "Okay then. Enjoy your vacation. Sara, when do you think you can start teaching?" I asked Sara this time.


    "I can start teaching as soon as possible," Sara said.


    "Then next Monday, I will give myst lesson. You can start arranging your ss for the week after."


    With that, I can start training in Monsters World as much as possible.


    I hope nothing happened when I''m gone.. It takes some time for Sonia to travels between two worlds, so it will be toote if there''s an emergency.

 Chapter 369 - Last Day Of Teaching

    It''s been a while since I teach, and now I''m back at campus. I should have ss soon, but for now, my destination is Dean''s office. He''s already back to the campus right away after the closing ceremony.


    "Dean, you''re busy?" I asked.


    "Oh, Roy. What''s wrong?" Dean asked back.


    "Do you know what happened in the capital right during the final? It''s been a while so the news should have been spread already," I said.


    "Oh, you mean that. The cult was going strong and attacked the capital right when his majesty was in Melk. There were some casualties including some nobles as well, but since his majesty returned faster than expected, the aftermath was quickly taken care of. Do you have something to do with it?" Dean asked.


    "Yeah. I stopped them from destroying the capital any further, and I''m the one who brought Albert back to the capital," I replied.


    "Thank you for your hard work. So, what kind I do for you?" Dean asked.


    "I''m thinking of quitting and letting Sara be in charge of teaching air element from now on. Albert said that I need to get stronger than anyone and I agree. I have to leave for a while," I said.


    "I see¡­ if Sara agrees with it, then I don''t mind. I also have learned few things from you, so if Sara can''t do it, I will be the one teaching when I''m free," Dean said.


    "Good. After the tournament, the news should have reached here that Sara''s air magic is powerful enough to bring us to the final. There will be more students attending it now."


    "By the way, where are you going? If it''s you, you should be able to go back from time to time easily, right?" Dean asked.


    "I''m going to the Monsters World soon. I can get there and back easily with portal, but for Sonia to travel there on her own, it will take some time, so any messages she brought to me will be dyed. Oh, wait! If I asked Lina to open a portal for Sonia, it might not take any time at all¡­ hmm¡­ but I''ll still quit anyway," I said.


    "Well, if you have decided to do it, then feel free to do it. If you need anything, you can contact me. Maybe I can help. And if you want to go back to teaching, I will wee you with open arms. What about your ss today?" Dean asked.


    "This will be myst ss and I will introduce Sara to be their teacher from now on. They must be happy to be taught by someone more popr."


    "What about your medical ss? Other doctors have been wanting to learn more," Dean asked.


    "I wrote some notes about the medical knowledge I know from the future. Including those I have taught them, and some that haven''t. But if you find any patient with the condition that I haven''t taught other doctors but there''s a note about them that I wrote, feel free to call Sonia to contact me. I will return immediately."


    After chatting for a little bit longer, it''s finally time for my ss. I said farewell to Dean.


    There are many other people I''d like to say my farewell, but for now, I need to teach my ss first.


    When I look at my ss, the usually empty ss is now filled to the brim with students I never met. Even more than that time after I return from my mission to rescue Harold. But this time, it''s different.


    "Good morning, ss. I have an announcement for you. Sara, pleasee to the front."


    Right after entering the ss, I called Sara toe to the front. Everyone quieted down as they are admiring the woman who defeated the most fighters in the tournament. I think some of them were in Melk to watch the tournament as well. Not just hearing about Sara from hearsay. Which is good as well since they know what to expect when theye to the ss.


    "I am resigning from teaching, and the dean and I agree to let Sara be the one to teach you about air magic. She has learned most things about air magic from me, so I believe she can teach well. And she has agreed as well to do it. In case she''s unable to teach for some reason, the dean agreed to do it. Everyone, please apud her."


    Huhu¡­ I acted like a good professor here. How is it? I''m nice, right?


    "Thank you everyone. I''m still a student just like you all, but I will surely teach you what I know. Though there are still some magic that I don''t understand, I hope I can teach you well," Sara said.


    "And since this is myst ss, if you have any questions, I will try to answer them. Of course I will prioritize the four original students. Actually, it was one. And then the three joined. And now, you all joined."


    I don''t think all of them are air mage. I don''t remember most of them, but I think there are some freshmen who took my test to pass the entrance exam. I don''t remember their name though.


    I see many students raised their hand and among them are from my previous student. As for Sara, she has returned back to her seat and didn''t raise her hand. I guess it''s to be expected since she can just ask me anytime she wants. Unlike the other students.


    "Professor, how much can youpress air?" it was from one of my previous students.


    "It depends on how much mana you have and your level. Once I became intermediate level, my shot became more powerful. Though I usually didn''tpress to much air because of the recoil. Sara will teach you more during her lesson about that. Alright, next."


    "What else is air magic is useful for?" It was from another one of my previous students.


    "For me, I''m also a surgeon. Using air magic, I can create a certain type of gas that will make anyone who inhale it fall into a deep sleep and won''t feel any pain during the operation. Next."


    I keep answering questions patiently one by one. Well, I''m quite irritated from some stupid questions. But as a professor, and since this is myst day, I keep answering the questions.


    "How much did you get paid for teaching?"


    "I didn''t really care since I''m already rich even without taking this job. It''s something I was told to do to spread the usefulness of air magic."


    "How rich are you?"


    "Why ask? You want to be my boyfriend? Sorry, but I don''t swing that way."


    "What''s the use of a surgery if we have healer?"


    "What if we don''t have a healer?" I said.


    Sometimes, I also answered the question with another question. This will also help the students to imagine what would happen and think about it themselves.


    "Where can I buy your jacket?"


    "It''s from my own store in business district. It''s located at¡­"


    "What''s your rtionship with Ka and Ang?"


    After someone asked me this question, everyone is looking at me seriously. They want my serious answer.


    "We were both from Melk and joined a party together. Although Ang is now in the capital, we are still in the same n. And I''m also the leader of the n. Sara over there is ourtest member. Ang is my friend, and Ka is my lover. Though there are more of my lovers in the n, it''s not a n for me to build my harem. In fact, the referee from the tournament, Kron, is also a member as well. But he''s still single," I said.


    Then, someone quickly raised his hand and without waiting for me to pick him, he asked a question.


    "How do I join the n?" he asked.


    "We don''t ept applicants. And the people who can join are mostly those who are close to us. Don''t expect to join our n, alright?"


    What I mean close means they must be close enough to know that I''m from the future. Which mean none of them will join my n. Unless I know that I can trust them and I told them myself about everything.


    "What can I do to get stronger?"


    "Train more."


    "What if I still can''t get stronger after training?"


    "That mean you''re doing it wrong. You need to learn what method you''re suited with, and learn how you will fight. Will you try to overwhelm your enemy with your magic? Or will you attack them from far while keep running? There are more ways to get stronger than just cultivating. Like learning a way to use magic. Air Shot that Sara used is one of them. And don''t forget to train your body as well. It will be useless if you have a lot of mana, but couldn''t chase the enemy and letting them escape.


    I keep answering the questions even though the time for ss is over. And there are even more people entering the ss and asked me questions as well. Even Ka and Jewel are here watching me with interest.


    Finally, there are no other people raising their hand. I guess it''s over.


    "Since no one else has questions, I''ll take my leave. See you if I have the time."


    I left the ssroom together with Ka and Jewel who waited for me. They say that they heard about me answering questions, so after they finished their sses, they quicklye to my ssroom and wait so we can go home together.


    This might be thest time I''m in the campus, so they decided to explore the campus before going home.


    Why do I need to explore it if I can see everything?

 Chapter 370 - To The Monsters World To Train

    "What!? You''re leaving already!?"


    I was saying my farewell to the people I know that I''m going to leave for a while, or maybe a long time. It will be difficult for me to return immediately if there''s an emergency. That''s why I need to say good bye.


    But that was me. I''m the one who asked if the other party is leaving already. Not that they are the one asking me.


    "Yeah. We have enough resource and we need more experience for the newbies. Thanks to you, most of our troupe members are excellent people. They might be an agent, but they sure can perform well. I''m sorry to inform you about this when you really wanted to be our clown. But don''t worry. You can return anytime you want!" Thomas said.


    That''s right. I''m talking with Thomas.


    His circus troupe has been revived, with all new members. Most of them are agents who will travel with the circus.


    Thomas just told me that his circus troupe will tour around the continent to the other kingdoms as well. I thought it would be a little further in the future, but I guess he was that capable in rebuilding the circus.


    I really wanted to join the tour though¡­


    "Well, it can''t be helped if you''re busy. Don''t worry. I''ll make sure that our audience will enjoy the show. Although our clowns are not as good as you alone, they are still capable of making peopleugh," Thomas said.


    "But I really wanted to join you¡­"


    "Then you need to destroy the cult as fast as possible. Only then, you can freely do whatever you want without thinking of the consequences," Ka said.


    Ka and the others were here as well. We are in a huge tent for the circus. They are cleaning up after their performancest night and will leave on a tour tomorrow.


    "His majesty told me that as soon as I''m confident with our performers, I should take them on a world tour. The agents will be useful to spy other ces while their main job will be to perform. Once we found something suspicious, we will tell his majesty about it, and his majesty will decide if we need to call you or not. I hope we don''t need your help so you can concentrate on getting stronger," Thomas said.


    As a thanks for helping him reviving the troupe, Thomas and some other performers show us some performance that I never seen or did before. I apuded while still pouting because I can''t join them.


    Let''s see¡­ who is that that I missed? I have told Kron who is training somewhere, Oleg back in Melk, and even Hill. And then some other people I know. I guess next is people from other countries. Let''s start with Consenza since Celestine is still there.


    As for Ka and the others, they returned back to our home after watching the circus performance. Well, it''s not like I need to bring them with me to other countries.


    When I meet Celestine, she was in the imperial castle with Lynn and udia. They are thinking carefully of anyone who are good enough to join the tournament. And Celestine will represent Consenza under different alias because we don''t want anyone to know that she''s the former leader of a faction in the cult.


    ¡­she just needs to hide her breasts, and everything will be fine.


    There are some capable people whom she has taught personally to get stronger. But I doubt I will get the chance to enjoy the match.


    Next was Arturo. I said goodbye to Harold, Fabio, and those who are in Bernard''s mansion.


    As for Francesco, he returns back to the city he''s in charge of with Carmen to protect him.


    They have spared the fake Dominic''s life for a while and asked him about all the cult members in Francesco''s city. And Carmen are there to kill them.


    As long as Carmen wasn''t surrounded, she should be fine. and in case anything happened, she can contact me before I left. I told Sonia to give her that message.


    Lastly is Varadis. I choose this cest because I need to give old man my notes about future medical knowledge and so he can ask me about it before I leave. He was not as busy anymore since his children are now getting along, and none of them are thinking of joining the cult. At least that''s what he told me. I''ll just trust his decision.


    I returned back to Tatrama, and this time I''m going to the capital. Veronica was still there, but since everything has calmed down, she wanted to return back to Cassau. As for Candy, she was still busy even though Wendy is here to help.


    I went directly to Albert''s location and say that I''m leaving to the Monsters World.


    "When will you be back?" Albert asked.


    "Hopefully once I have my third monster," I said.


    "I hope that''s the case. Please return before the tournament began. We will dy the tournament as much as possible," Albert said.


    Now it''s time to go back to Cassau and y with Daniel until he''s satisfied. I brought Lana from the capital as well since she''s still a secret and Marie will be busier.


    "Spot, are youing with me to the Monsters World?" I asked Spot as I enjoyed the night view on his back. The kids enjoyed the sight as well, but they went to sleep soon after.


    "I''ll go. It''s been a long time since I was there," he said.


    "Then, I guess it will be the four of us. You, Victoria, me, and She who is already there. The four of us will fight a lot of monsters. Prepare yourself."


    "I am always ready to fight. When will we leave?" Spot asked.


    "In two days. Tomorrow will be a rest day," I said.


    "Then I''ll go to my children tomorrow to tell them I''m leaving," Spot said.


    We returned back to our home and carried the kids to their room. Shirley and Ang are still here.


    "I''ll take you back to the capital tomorrow," I said to Shirley.


    "Okay," Shirley replied simply.


    I went to sleep, and the next day, I tried to rest but Daniel asked me to y with him. I guess when you have kids, you will never really get a rest day.


    I transported Shirley and Ang to the capital before going to bed. And the next day, as soon as we finished our breakfast, I went to the Monsters World. Directly to the Werewolf Settlement.


    We have tried to get Soniae to this world with the help of Lina, and it was possible to shorten the time for her to get here. Though she will need my help to return back to our world quickly as well.


    "Roy, where are we going?" Spot asked excitedly as he''s looking at his home world.


    "We won''t ride you. We will go on foot without any real destination. Our goal is to fight strong monsters so we can get stronger. You can go back to your home if you miss your family, Spot," I said.


    "I won''t. And I don''t even remember where they are. This ce is somewhere I have never been to," Spot said.


    "Well, if you see something familiar, you can tell me. Let''s go!"


    The four of us, run toward a forest next to the settlement.


    There are many monsters there, but Shelia and I can defeat them easily.


    "Oh, Shelia, you''ve grown stronger and faster now!" I praised Shelia.


    "Thank you! When you didn''t need me in your world, I spent my time hunting strong monster," Shelia said.


    "Sorry. The monsters in our world is much weaker, so if I want you to get stronger, you can only fight the monsters here. And you can tell me if you want to visit our world. I''ll summon you even if you only want to y with the others," I said.


    So far, the monsters we encountered are not strong enough for us to struggle. I need even stronger opponents to grow.


    I think I''m a bit different to other summoners like Lina. She could easily increase her level just by letting Sunny keep defeating monsters. But for me, back then, I need to defeat a Giant Smander to increase my level. Other than the number of monsters I needed to have Victoria and Shelia defeat, I also need to defeat a really powerful monster as well.


    "This ce is not good! Let''s go deeper to the forest!" I shouted.


    "Okay!"


    It was just me, with a Serpent around my waist, and Victosword on my hand, running alongside Shelia who transformed into a Werewolf, running deep into the forest in search of strong monsters.


    We are running side by side in search of a powerful monsters. And when we found one that looks like strong, we decide who will fight it and who will clear the monsters nearby while the other is fighting it.


    ¡­I don''t think it''s enough for me to grow stronger.. I need to find even stronger monsters. Where should I go now?

 Chapter 371 - Lava Monster

    It has been three weeks since I entered Monsters World. Though I still return back to human world whenever I could.


    The monsters here are stronger than the monsters in my world, but it''s still not enough for me to increase my level despite Shelia and I defeated so many of them.


    Shelia and I would split up, and defeat the monstersing our way. I only used Victoria and Blobbies as weapons because I prioritize my summoning element.


    In search for powerful monsters, I thought that some special location will have powerful monsters to defeat. If they don''t have intellect tomunicate with me, I won''t think of asking them to be my summoned monsters. Though I still need to improve my level.


    The first ce I thought of was a volcano. It''smon that there''s a powerful monster in a volcano, right? Maybe a fire dragon or something?


    Well, that''s why we''re going there.


    There''s no dungeon here, but the volcano is filled with monsters. Most of them are fire type. Like Fire Rats, Fire Boars, Fire Bird, and Fire other things. There''s also a Fire Goblin, but that''s just look ridiculous.


    Other than fire, some monsters can spewve once we get closer into the volcano. And they are also stronger than the previous fire monsters as well. It''s a proof that I''m right. There must be some kind of powerful monster deeper in the volcano.


    But it''s too hot! I took off my clothes so I only wear shorts. As for Shelia, she''s also wearing the bikini-like suit that''s worn by the Werewolves before I came. And we''re walking close now instead of splitting up because I can use air magic to protect us from the hot air. But maybe because it''s far hotter than the average temperature, my Air Barrier is not enough to block all the hot airing. We''re still sweating like pigs.


    I''m just luckier since I can use Aura to cover my body, but Shelia is covered in fur, so she has it harder.


    "Spot, your body is cold, so it''s better if you''re wrapping yourself around Shelia here," I said.


    "Okay."


    Spot then do what I asked, and he wrapped himself around Shelia''s neck. Shelia enjoyed the cold sensation of Spot''s body. Well, Spot was a hybrid of Sky Serpent and Sea Serpent. His blood from the Sea Serpent might be the reason why his body is cold. Well, I don''t know about that since I''m not a researcher. But it''s true that his body is cold.


    "Roy, do you really think that there''s a monster here?" Victoria asked.


    "Even if there are none, I still want to train here. I want to see if I could sh through fire. That would be cool, right?" I said.


    "Yeah, but there were only some Aura users who can do that. And it''s possibly because of their special ability," Victoria said.


    "In any case, my biggest weakness is magic. If the opponent attacked me with a huge magic that can cover a whole area, I will die. That''s why I want to learn cutting through fire since it''s the most difficult one to stop. Well, there are lightning and wind as well, but this ce has a lot of fire monsters, so I''ll try cutting fire first," I said.


    "I see¡­ If it''s earth or ice, you can block them. but if it''s fire, wind, lightning, or even water, it''s hard. Well, good luck," Victoria said.


    "Shelia, you don''t have toe here if you don''t want to," this time, I spoke to Shelia.


    "No, I''m going. Just like you, I might need to fight fire mages in the future. Even if I don''t try to block the fire, I need to be faster to dodge them. And going with you might help me find strong monsters to defeat as well," Shelia said.


    "Okay. If you''re tired and want to leave, just tell me."


    We continue going deeper toward the volcano. And there, I finally see it. A powerful monster that I don''t think I could defeat, but will be useful to train with.


    "Everyone, I found it. The monster has no body. It''s all justva. But there''s some sort of core inside theva that I think if we destroy it, it will die. Though I want to test fighting it closebat," I said.


    "The monster is made ofva? That''s difficult. And even if you attack its core, your attack will melt before reaching it. Are you sure you''re going to fight it?" Victoria asked.


    "I will. Shelia, you will fight other monsters nearby. Spot will help you if you''re in trouble. Victoria, this is a chance to test cuttingva," I said.


    "¡­Roy,va and fire are different. Lava is originally rock. It should be easier to cutva than cutting fire," Victoria said.


    "But I think if I can cut throughva, I might learn how to cut fire. Let''s see if my theory is right or not. Shelia, if it''s too difficult for me, I will use portal to escape."


    "And you will summon me after that, right? I understand. Let''s split!" Shelia said.


    And so, we split up. Shelia with Spot, and Victoria is with me. I''m ready to face theva monster.


    I entered a cave where theva monster is, and the temperature raised again.


    "Damn, it''s getting hotter again! Victoria, you don''t feel the heat?" I asked.


    "It''s a bit warm which is nice. Good thing this ck Slime is immortal," Victoria said.


    I focused using Air Barrier to protect me from the heat around my body, but I feel like my body is going to melt if I didn''t cover it with Aura.


    I went in deeper, and finally faced theva monster. It''s a¡­ how should I say it? It''s like a mud monster, but withva? It has hands, and a big mound with two holes for the eyes.


    Seeing me, its instinct as monster made it react in order to kill me. I guess I can''tmunicate with it.


    How should I fight it? At least using Victoria and Blobbies as weapon is the only way to do it since they won''t melt.


    I sh, and I sh, and I cut, and I stab, and I sh, and I sh, but theva monster didn''t take any damage. It seems that I have to destroy its core deep inside its body. The only way to do it is to reach that deep.


    Suddenly, there''s a new hole in its head. And Fire ising out of it!


    "Ava that can breathe fire? Well, this is a monster after all."


    Getting closer seems to be harder once it started breathing fire. If I touch its body, I will melt. If I dodge, it will attack me with fire breathe. Maybe this is too much for me. I shouldn''t havee here.


    But I''ll fight until I can''t take it anymore. Maybe three minutes?


    The only way I can think of is to cover my body with Victoria as my armor, and forcefully breaking through to the core of the monster. But I will still feel the heat even if I do that.


    Before I knew it, I have been fighting for one hour. What three minutes!?


    I am now being surrounded byva, and in front of me is the head of theva monster. It''s going to attack me with fire breath!


    The only way to escape is to use portal.


    ¡­let''s face it. If I can''t sh the fire, it will be the end of me. This is totally unlike my personality to fight until I get pushed this far, but there have been several times that I do it. Let''s believe!


    I will sh that fire and survive!


    I will use my strongest swing to cut the fire!


    I closed my eyes, and imagine that I could cut the fire.


    sh, sh, sh! I need to do this one sh to cut the fire!


    I ignored my own body as I no longer cover it with Aura, and just cover the Aura on my Victosword. I don''t even wear any protection, and my shorts are burning. I will be buck naked soon, but all I need to do is a sh attack. An attack that can cut anything, and just like Shelia''s w attack that can reach far.


    I raised the VIctosword above my head, and prepared to swing it down. I think I heard Victoria shouting something, but I''m too focused in this to listen to her right now.


    Theva monster breathes fire and somehow, I have the feeling that I need to cut it now. So, with all my might, I swung it down. Just a sword covered with Aura, and I didn''t even use air magic to protect myself from the heat or breathing.


    One swing. That''s all it takes to finally defeat theva monster.


    The fire breath attack got split into two with my Victosword, and the sh continues to reach further than the sword. It reached the head of theva monster, and split it into two right in the core.


    Theva monster died, and itsva is turned into a normalva. Not being controlled by the monster.


    And I¡­


    "That''s freaking hot!"


    "It should be! And how did you do that!? You actually did it! You split the fire into two, and the attack reached that far!" Victoria asked.


    "I don''t know! Let''s get out of here and practice it on weaker monsters to test it!"


    I opened a portal to where Shelia is and told her that I defeated the monster.


    "Yeah, that''s good and all, but you don''t have to be naked anymore, alright?"


    I just remembered now that my shorts are burnt. Is my little brother alright? It is. Thank God!


    I grabbed a new pair of shorts and began fighting weaker fire monsters.. If it works on fire, will it work on other elements? Well, that''s one reason for this training.

 Chapter 372 - Cutting Fire

    After defeating theva monster, I reunited with Shelia and fought weaker monsters. I let her hunt as much monsters as she wants, while I, with Victosword in my hand, is facing a fire-spewing rabbit.


    The rabbit is fast, but not as fast as I am. And it spit fire from its mouth. My target is to see if I can cut that fire.


    It won''t instantly attack me with fire as it is a timid monster. It will try to escape. But I keep chasing it to provoke it until it attacks me.


    Once I cornered it, it started to get angry and faced me.


    "Alright, rabbit! Come at me!" I shouted.


    "I wonder how a fire monster can''t get burn by its own fire, but after it died, it can be cooked with normal fire. How about you try eating it raw?" Victoria asked.


    "No way! Unless it''s sushi or sashimi."


    The rabbit then starts spitting fire at me from its mouth, and with my Victosword, I shed the fire with a vertical sh. But the fire still continues, so I dodged it.


    "Oh, that was a fail. How did you cut the fire in two again?" Victoria asked.


    "I was naked," I said.


    "Then, how about you get naked again?"


    "¡­I''m sorry. I was just joking. Maybe it''s thebination of skill, mindset, and timing. I think I got the skill right with my Aura, but my mindset is different now. As for timing, I need to adjust it a little," I exined.


    Although I can use many kinds of weapon, I think I can say that I''m pretty skilled in all of them. that''s why I''m confident with my skill. As for timing, my Divine Vision is very helpful with that.


    But mindset is¡­ let''s remember what happened during the fight against theva monster.


    I was surrounded byva, and the head started attacking me with fire and I shed it


    No, that was what happened, not what I was thinking.


    What I thought was the same. For survival. I have to live. And I rejected the idea of running away from the fire. It''s also because I can''t escape other than using portal, which I restrained myself to use.


    And¡­ I didn''t think much when I shed it. Maybe I thought of something, but does emptying my mind work?


    If I empty my mind and it fails, I would get my face burnt by a rabbit. That''s not funny. And I don''t think emptying my mind is the right answer. After all, I''m the kind of guy who think too much. An overthinker.


    And what I thought was¡­ shing. To keep shing and sh everything. Maybe that''s the answer.


    Monster, sh! Lava, sh! Fire, sh! Air, sh! Human, sh! Anything, sh!


    sh everything, and survive! I think that''s the answer.


    Well, I can only know if I tried. Let''s provoke the fire rabbit again.


    This time, the rabbit spit fire at me again. And I shed it while thinking of shing everything.


    The fire got split! I did it! Though at the end, the fire rejoined again and continue flying toward me. I ducked down to dodge it.


    "Huff¡­ I think I got the right mindset and skill. Rather than mindset, it was more like a will. My will. Lastly, it''s about timing."


    The only thing I can do with it so to keep training. I will look closely at the fire, and sh it so I won''t make the same mistake as before.


    "Alright,e on, rabbit!"


    This time, I swung toote. Only the end of the fire got split.


    "Again, rabbit!"


    This time, the fire didn''t split at all. Did I not put enough will in my swing? Let''s try again.


    And finally, the fire split into two and flew beside me with my head in between. I did it!


    Well, with theva monster, it was just luck mostly. But now, I managed to time it right. but that''s only with a sword and not other weapon. My Reizpear is still hasn''t been used yet.


    "That''s good. let''s find other fire monster and provoke them.


    I keep looking for fire type monsters and provoke them to attack me with fire. So far, my rate of sess is about forty percent. That''s pretty low.


    I need to get used to it so I can use it with a hundred percent chance of sess just like the two new gases that I learned with the ostriches.


    I keep mastering it only with my Victosword, and when I can do it perfectly, I tried using other weapons including Reizpear. It took me three days to perfected shing fire.


    "With this, I should be able to handle fire. I need to train it with fire mageter if I can use it in real fight or not. I''ll ask Candy or Ang once I returned.


    For now, let''s try shing other things. Wind¡­ I don''t know about it. And lightning is difficult to find. I''ll ask the other after I returned to attack me with magic. I guess the easiest one to find would be water.


    So, my choice is between a hugeke or sea. But at the sea, the water keeps moving waves after waves, so it might be harder than a stillke, so I guess I''ll go to theke.


    "Shelia, our training in the volcano is done. Next, we''ll go to theke. Let''s leave," I said.


    "Finally. It''s so hot here. If we stay here for another day, I might leave you behind," Shelia said.


    Since both of us don''t want to stay in the heat anymore, we quickly leave through the sky. We rode on Spot''s back to find ake.


    "Where can we find ake?" I started wondering if there are anyke nearby.


    "I have been staying near fire for a while, so let''s find a hugeke where I can fit in even with my giant form," Spot said.


    I agree with him. And since we don''t know where to go, I let Spot decide which direction to go.


    I thought that while riding on Spot''s back, we don''t have to worry about monsters. But seems like I was wrong.


    There are some kind of bird monsters that can fly even faster than Spot. They can''t hurt Spot, but for us on his back, it will be dangerous if they hit us with that speed while we are speeding as well. So, I asked Spot to stop.


    "Shelia, you''ll take care of the left side, and I''m going for the right side."


    Maybe because they don''t think they can hurt Spot, they don''t dare to face him from the front. That''s why the monsters are only on the right and the left side.


    Maybe this is good for training my long-range attack. I don''t have any kind of powerful long-range attack. Even using Victorifle can still be blocked by magic.


    Let''s see if I can do it like Shelia and use Victosword to sh an enemy from distance.


    I need to use the power of my will again probably. The will to defeat the enemies from distance.


    I have practiced it before, and the weapon more suited in shing is what Victoria call as Katana. I transformed Victoria as a Katana, hold it with both my hands while resting the dull part of the de on my right shoulder, then I swung it diagonally with my Aura and will inserted.


    It hit! But it''s too weak. Maybe because of the distance. If they were closer, I should be able to cut them.


    Let''s put more strength and will to make the distance further, and my sh wider.


    Oh? I hit one and this time, it died. So, I guess the range is just five meters. At least I know I can attack from distance.


    But now, knowing that I can attack them, they no longer hover in midair and use its fast speed to move around, and attack me.


    Damn, they are too fast!


    But well, since they areing, I don''t need to attack them from distance.


    I transformed Victokatana into Victohammer and made the head of the hammer sorge that I can hit even two bird with one swing. It''s not two birds with one stone, but two birds with one hammer.


    I''m done on my side, and when I looked at Shelia, she''s almost done as well. She can react fast enough to keep up with the speed of the birds. Maybe that''s her monster''s instinct. That''s something that I as a human won''t be able toprehend. And only monsters who loves fighting like Werewolves can have it.


    Now I wonder if defeating Grandpa Werewolf is totally a fluke.


    "Spot, I found ake! It''s that way!" I pointed at a wideke under a waterfall.


    "I can''t see where you''re pointing at! You''re on my back!" Spot shouted.


    "Sorry!"


    This time, I properly directed Spot toward theke. The location is beautiful, and I don''t see any monsters. It''s a wide grassy area next to theke, so we can rest easy.


    Though there are still monsters under theke. But I don''t think we need to care about them at the moment.


    "Let''s rest for a bit. We''ll continue training after lunch."


    Can I cut water? I''ll find out soon.

 Chapter 373 - Cutting Water

    Aaah¡­ this is nice. Fishing on ake and enjoying the view.


    Wait, I''m here to train! Not fishing!


    I have learned to cut fire, and able to sh a target from distance as well. I might no longer need to use Air Shot again in the future, but the range of my sh is not far enough so I will still need Blobbyrifle.


    Since I can cut fire now, I''m trying to cut other things. Which is water. And that''s the reason we''re on akeside. But because there weren''t any monsters and it''s too calm, we''re all rxing. Shelia and Victoria are ying in the water, and Spot is swimming happily since theke is so big. In fact, it should be called sea instead ofke.


    And there''s a waterfall falling to theke from up high. The spectacle was amazing. And the volume of water falling is crazy. Spot even swimming up the waterfall from below for fun. Maybe I should try it as well.


    As for the monsters inside theke, maybe they are afraid of Spot. That''s why none of them areing out.


    And yup, there are no fish to be caught. I just put out a fishing rod just for the atmosphere. And I think I have rxed enough.


    Well, for my next training, just theke and the waterfall should be enough for me to train with.


    Since there are no enemy, using Blobbies should be enough rather than using Victoria.


    "Victoria, Shelia, you two can rx more. I''m going to start training," I said.


    "We will y a bit more, and then we will hunt monsters nearby together," Victoria said.


    "Me! Me! What about me!?" Spot asked.


    Spot is¡­ I don''t know what he wants. I suppose it will be best to let himy as much as possible. Oh, that''s right! I have a suggestion for him!


    "Spot, for now, you can y around as much as possible or hunt monsters. You are free to do what you want. But, after I finished my training, I''m going to ask you for a spar. Will you fight me?" I asked.


    "A fight? You''re asking for a fight? I guess we haven''t fought before. I think that''s a good idea. Let''s fight once you be stronger! I''ll go swim a bit more and then I''ll fight some monsters," Spot said.


    Is it just me or he''s actually looking forward for our fight? I hope he won''t try to kill me.


    "You sure you want to fight Spot?" Victoria asked.


    "Well, the reason for this journey is to get stronger. And so far, there are no other monsters stronger than Spot, so it''s best if I gained experience from fighting him. Though I hope neither of us will go too far and have to die. Or more like I hope I won''t die," I said.


    After that, I left the three of them to do what they want as I walked into the middle of theke. The water is pretty calm around here despite the waterfall. And even using my Divine Vision, I still can''t see the bottom of theke.


    First, let''s try my long-distance attack.


    I jumped to the sky, and swung my Blobbysword down. And there was a sound of something hitting the water and a ssh was created. I guess it worked. But the power is too weak.


    That''s also another thing I need to improve.


    I turned my Blobbysword into gloves and I grabbed Reizpear from my pocket. I poured some magic into it and the Reizpear returned to its original form. I''ll practice with this instead of Blobbies.


    I jumped again, and this time I used a thrust attack with Reizpear. The attack hit the water and it''s deeper than the previous sword sh. As expected, I''m more proficient with spear rather than sword.


    This time, I step on theke water and with my Reizpear, I attacked the water. Inserting my will to my attack, and the water is split.


    But because the volume of the water is too much, I can only see the path where my spear touched.


    Well, that will also be my training. I need to be able to split the water deeper and further.


    It''s impossible for my attack to reach the bottom in just a few months of training, but at least I know how to do it. This way, the next time I''m training, I know what to focus my training at.


    I know I can cut water now, but just that alone is not enough. So, I keep training and training.


    Of course I still rest regrly and returning to Cassau to ask if there''s anything going on.


    When there''s nothing important, I would return back to Monsters World and train.


    With my strength, I can only cut water for three meters deep. But that''s good enough after only training for a few days.


    I''d like to challenge Spot after I can split the waterfall in two from the bottom.


    Well, maybe not that much. That might take years for it to happen.


    As of now, I couldn''t even cut the strong waterfall. At least I need to do that first.


    With Reizpear, I shed the surface of theke again and again.


    I can see the improvement, but it was so little.


    Probably less than half centimeter every day. Some days, it''s even less.


    I guess I also need to train my muscle as well.


    So, I trained using Victoria''s method. To stand still under the fierce waterfall and meditate. Without Aura protecting me.


    That doesn''t seem to be helpful, but when I tried it the first time, I couldn''t even stand still. I got pushed by the waterfall.


    I guess she''s right that training under waterfall is useful. I can improve my will and endurance.


    So, I spent eight hours trying to stand under the waterfall, and another eight hours improving my technique. The rest are for other training and rest.


    The result, I notice my improvement more. Though I still couldn''t stand still under the waterfall.


    It took me three months until I can stand still under the waterfall.


    I have be stronger now. My body is slightly more muscr. I can see it with my Divine Vision.


    But for my outer appearance, it doesn''t change much.


    Well, the girls told me that I''m heavier now whenever I returned home and sleep with them. But that''s muscle and not fat.


    And today, while meditating under the waterfall with Reizpear in one hand, I closed my eyes. I didn''t even use Divine Vision to see. Everything was dark.


    Then I quickly opened my eyes, and swung Reizpear upwards to split the waterfall.


    It doesn''t split it all the way to the top. Just slightly over five meters. But that''s a huge improvement in just three months.


    "¡­wow. Am I actually a genius? I think I can beat anyone I fight," I said.


    "Shelia, listen to what our master just said. He actually thinks that he''s a genius. Very funny," Victoria said.


    "Just because he became stronger, he thinks that other people won''t get stronger as well. I''m embarrassed to hear that," Shelia said.


    "Isn''t it fine? Confidence is important after all," Spot said.


    "But overconfidence is something that no one should have. Especially him," Shelia said.


    ¡­they are making fun of me. I''m training hard, but they are making fun of me.


    But they are right. I shouldn''t be overconfident.


    The three monsters also trained hard and grow stronger.


    Shelia''s improvement is visible from the way her attacks is stronger than three months ago.


    Victoria, although she can''t get stronger, her technique improved a lot. Maybe because she witnessed the result of my training that she told me from fiction stories of her world bear positive result, she trained her technique from something she remembered.


    Though she will still mostly be used as my weapon. But at least there will be more monsters that she can defeat alone.


    As for Spot¡­ I don''t know. I know that he would sometimes fly over my head in high speed, and hunt monsters to eat. But he was strong from the start, so it''s difficult to tell if he''s growing or not.


    I guess it''s time for my promise.


    "Spot, do you mind if we spar? I want to see my progress," I asked Spot for a spar.


    "Are you sure you want to do it now? I thought your training is not over yet," Spot asked.


    "It is not over yet. But I don''t think I will get stronger just by doing the same thing every day. I also need to gain experience. After our spar, we will leave this ce and go back to hunting powerful monsters. I have marked this ce with a Blobby so I can return here anytime I want. I still haven''t fulfilled my mission to split the waterfall into two," I said.


    "Then let''s do it. Where should we fight?" Spot asked.


    "Here is fine."


    "Where is here?"


    "Anywhere. Thend, the sky, theke, we will fight in this ce. As for the time¡­ let''s do it in two hours. I''m starving," I said.


    We finally will fight today.


    Spot is very strong, and even after training for three months, I still don''t know if I can beat him. But that''s fine. I just need to see the result of my training.


    And so, our time for spar is approaching¡­

 Chapter 374 - Sparring With Spot

    Me against Spot.


    An Aura user against a Giant Serpent.


    A 19 years old young man against an over a thousand years old monster.


    I wonder if this is the right decision. Just because I want to get stronger doesn''t mean I have to risk my life doing it.


    I hope he will hold back his power.


    There''s only me and Spot facing against each other on akeside, with me carrying Victoria and Reizpear in my hand, and Shelia is in a safe distance from us.


    "Roy, are you ready?" Victoria asked.


    "I don''t think I am, but let''s do it!" I shouted.


    Looking at him again, he is so big and long. And I even told him that our fight can be anywhere. Land, sky, or even underwater. I shouldn''t have said that.


    "¡­"


    "¡­"


    "¡­"


    "¡­Roy, when should we start?" Spot asked.


    "Oh, right! Shelia, give us the signal!" I said to Shelia.


    Shelia from far away, looking at the two of us. And seeing that we both are prepared, she raised her hand high.


    "BEGIN!" Shelia shouted as she swung down her hand.


    Spot is huge, stronger, and faster. And my clear advantage is I''m small. I need to make the first move!


    But I was toote. As soon as Shelia gave the signal, Spot''s tail already moved and he swung it at me like a whip from the side.


    I quickly covered Aura on Reizpear on my right and Victokatana on my left as I blocked the tail. But it was still too strong that I got pushed far into the middle of theke. But Inded safely on the surface of theke.


    Still, as soon as the battle begin, Spot instantly put me in a disadvantaged position. With theke under me and only sky above, Spot can swim or fly as he wants. I should have told him that the battle is only on the ground¡­


    Well, it can''t be helped. I already said that the battle can be anywhere, so let''s do it!


    Spot flying toward me in high speed, but luckily, my eyes already used to his speed. I know when he will arrive, so I waited until the right time.


    I transformed Vitoria into an armguard on my left, and hold Reizpear with two hands. It''s time to test my special skill against Spot.


    Well, I only have one skill. Which is¡­ oh, shit! I forgot its name!


    I guess I won''t shout the name again until I have an easy to remember name.


    It''s the skill where I hold Reizpear with both hands. I hold the middle part of the spear tightly with my left hand, and with my right, I spin the end of the spear as much as possible while pouring magic on it so even if it breaks, it will recover instantly.


    With Aura and my will infused to the spear, I release my left hand as I pushed the spear forward when Spot is about ten meters away from me.


    The spear spun so fast it creates a small tornado toward Spot.


    Spot noticed my attack can reach him, so he changed direction. But my attack scratched him on his left side and left a long wound.


    The wound is not that deep, but it should still hurt him.


    "Wow, that was amazing. But that''s not enough, Roy!" Spot said as heing toward me.


    The attack didn''t have effect on him?


    Oh, wait. I need to dodge it.


    From the sky, Spot ising down in a fast rate. I dodged it to the side in time, but Spot''s already predicted it as he swung his tail at me.


    I should have dodged much further than this.


    I blocked the tail, but I still got pushed deep underwater. This is to be expected from Spot, huh?


    Well, the water is also where I can maneuver freely. But I can''t attack him from distance underwater. I need to get out of here fast.


    I quickly swim to the surface, but each time I got closer, Spot would block me. I tried to attack him many times as well, but he''s much better swimmer than me and dodged all of my attacks.


    But still, it''s not like I have to swim, right?


    I opened a portal connected to Shelia waiting next to theke. Thanks to that, she got wet from the watering out of the portal as well.


    "Sorry, Shelia," I said.


    "Should I help? I''m your summon after all," Shelia suggested.


    "Hmm¡­ no. I want to fight Spot on my own first."


    "Okay then. Good luck."


    Then I run to theke to face Spot one more time.


    As he''s raising to the surface, I attacked him again with my spear.


    The same thing happened again and this time I got blown away to the sky. At least it''s better than being underwater.


    We keep exchanging attack in the sky. Well, I mostly dodged him.


    Whenever I can''t dodge, I would use portal to move location after throwing Blobbies away. I can''t just keep travelling to where Shelia is.


    Fighting Spot, I realize something.


    I''m suck at fighting monster.


    I can fight human well. Maybe some humanoid monsters as well.


    But for monster like Spot, it is extremely difficult.


    And because of my summoning element, I have to defeat powerful monster to get stronger!


    Maybe I need to have a strong and huge attack prepared in case like this. There might be other monsters that I can''te close with no matter what.


    We''re fighting mostly in the sky. Spot may be thinking that it''s difficult to hit me when both of us are in the sky, so he keeps trying to make me fall to theke again. But each time he tries that, I dodged. I won''t fall again into theke.


    Seeing that we are unable to end the fight like this, Spot used his breathe attack. The attack that makes him breathe some a non-elemental magic. Will I be able to cut it?


    I really want to dodge, but I have to see if my training against mage is useful in this situation. Although the attack is a non-elemental kind, it''s still a magic attack.


    I pour my magic, Aura, and my will into Reizpear trying to block the attack.


    Spot fire his magic breath, and it''s right in front of me.


    I thrusted my spear forward with my technique that I used to make the spear spun as I attack, and the tip of my spear hit right in the middle of the breath.


    I stopped it! I can now block magic attack!


    "Where are you looking, Roy?"


    Without me noticing, Spot is already above me as he swung his tail at me.


    I guess this is my loss.


    I lost my consciousness as I fall because I used everything on thatst attack to block his magic.


    When Ie to, I was soaked. My body is hurting all over. I can see that I have several cracks on my bones.


    "¡­shit. That was painful," I said when Ie to,


    "Roy, you okay?" Victoria asked me worriedly.


    She is currently wrapping my body like a suit. I guess she thinks my bones are broken and she''s right.


    And next to me is the worried Shelia and the small version of Spot.


    "Sorry. I didn''t expect that you would let down your guard," Spot said.


    "That was my mistake. Not yours. Anyway, congrattion on your victory. I guess it''s still too soon for me to fight you. But I learned a lot in our fight, so thank you," I said.


    I need a special finisher against monster. Just using my technique to spin the spear as I thrusted it is not enough.


    Fighting the cult, there won''t only be mages in their side. There will also be monsters they raised and controlled. I don''t know if they have something even stronger than Spot or not, but it''s best to be careful.


    "Ugh¡­ I''m hurt and tired. Let''s go home for today. We''ll go back training after resting," I said to the three monsters.


    Thanks to Victoria covering my body tightly, there''s no problem in moving. Every movement is done by Victoria.


    I opened a portal back to Cassau, right in my own room. I asked Shelia to get Ka to heal me.


    Kaes in just a few secondster along with the other girls. Oh, Candy is here as well? I guess everything in the capital has been taken care of.


    "What happened?" Ka asked.


    "Just a spar with Spot. I''m still too weak to do that I guess," I said.


    "Now what? Do you want me to heal you or improve your recovery rate?"


    "Just improve it a little. Recovering injured body naturally can make them stronger. And it''s a good time for me to rest for a while," I said.


    "Next time you spar with Spot, ask me toe with you so I can heal you right away," Ka said.


    "Okay. I''ll leave the rest to you. I''m going to sleep. Good night."


    I need to think of a special skill to defeat powerful monsters as well.. But I guess I''ll do that after I wake up.

 Chapter 375 - A Break From Training

    I''m still resting in Cassau after a week passed.


    Thanks to Ka increasing my natural recovery rate, my bones are getting healed and stronger now.


    In the long term, natural recovery is much better than using healing magic. And since this is the first time that I got injured this badly without having anything important scheduled in the near future, it''s the first time I heal my body naturally instead of using Ka''s healing magic.


    And since I''m taking a break from training, I spend my time ying with Daniel and Lana. I also supervised Hannah''s physical training since next year, she will attend introductory school and finally awakened her magic element.


    As I watched her training, I still asked Victoria''s and Sonia''s opinion if I could train other people to be Aura users.


    "I think you should give up on that. Unless the person you''re training is ready to die, just tell them how you awaken your Aura safely from your past life. We still don''t know how our master can see someone''s potential to be Aura users," Sonia said.


    And that''s how I gave up in training people to be Aura users.


    As for Victoria, although we are in human world now, she is still with Shelia hunting monsters so my summoning level can increase.


    Since I don''t have any other things to do, I spent most of the time cultivating to improve my air element level. I haven''t given up on this as well.


    Everything is fine in this world. As expected, the cult didn''t make any big moves when I''m away. They must be thinking of doing something during the tournament which Albert and the others are trying to dy as much as possible.


    By the way, does Albert already decided the date of the tournament? I guess I''ll pay him a visit while I''m here.


    Victoria said that she''s going to hunt monsters with Shelia a bit longer, so it''s just me and Spot going to the capital. I directly opened a portal to where Albert is after getting permission to visit.


    "I heard that you fought with Spot. How was it?" Albert asked.


    "I lost miserably. My bones are broken and I needed to rest for another week. Has the date for the tournament been set?"


    "One year. That''s the longest we can dy. Any more than that and we can''t predict when the cult will do something. That''s why you have to go train and get another summon as fast as possible," Albert said.


    "It''s easy for you to say¡­ Just fighting Spot and I lost easily. And he was still holding back. If he wants to, he can easily kill me," I said.


    "That''s right! Though I was surprised when you stop my magic breath! But that was much weaker than that time in Henry''s castle!" Spot said.


    What he said is during the time old man Henry got taken into his castle during the chaos there. The attack that destroyed half of the castle and destroyed a mountain.


    As expected, Spot was holding back when we fought. If his breath attack is slightly stronger, I will die in an instant.


    "Hmm¡­ so you learned something to protect you from magic? That''s good," Albert said.


    As expected, he knows my weakness. I keep forgetting about this, but Albert is a wise king. Maybe because I never see him as a king in this life after getting to know him personally.


    "Well, there are many things I have to improve. Once I recovered, I''ll go back to Monsters World. How about you? Is everything okay here?"


    "Well, there are some issues here and there, but there''s nothing that we can''t handle," Albert said.


    "That''s good. If there''s anything troubling you, take care of it yourself," I said as I opened a portal since I''m leaving.


    "Shouldn''t it be ''if there''s anything troubling you, call me''?" Albert asked.


    "Nah, that''s too much trouble. I''m going to Harold''s ce now. Bye."


    On the other side of the portal is Bernard''s mansion. Harold now can walk on his own and no longer need wheelchair.


    I was surprised to see Jill, the girl who was aiming for the throne, is doing some paperwork on the desk.


    "Is she working?" I asked Harold.


    "Yes. Surprisingly, she''s good in doing detailed work like paperwork. Seems like I don''t know anything about my own children¡­" Harold said.


    "Well, that''s your problem. Not mine. Anything new?" I asked.


    "Nothing. Oh, Carmen has just returned from helping Francesco with his territory. There might still be some cult members over there, but they will be more careful in their n now. As for Francesco himself, he''s doing well," Harold said.


    "Okay then. I''ll be leaving now."


    "Wait, you just came here to ask me that and leave?"


    "What else should I do? You can take care of everything here. Oh, right! Luna, you don''t want to stay in Cassau with Lana and Daniel?" I asked Luna.


    Luna then running toward her father and hugged his leg.


    "I''m staying here with father," Luna said.


    ¡­children are cute, aren''t they? I can''t wait to destroy the cult so I can have children of my own. The girls also wanted to have children.


    How many children will I have? Do I need to build a bigger house?


    "If that''s what you want, then so be it. After my body is healed, I will stay in Monsters World most of the time, so you can''t go travel as you wish then. While I''m still recovering, you can get Sonia to tell me you want toe and y. Alright, I''ll be going to old man Henry''s ce now. See ya!"


    The next destination is Varadis.


    Old man is working and I can see his daughter who is an expert level mage, Julia, is teaching several people about magic control. Most likely, they are the squad who will be sent for the tournament next year.


    "Old man, you have prepared your squad?" I asked old man.


    "Not yet. They are all people I can trust, but their strength is not enough to face all-expert level mages from the cult. That''s why Julia is training them," old man said.


    "Hmm¡­ at least you have prepared the candidates. Is there anything you want to ask?"


    "You''re not asking if I have anything new?"


    "It''s just us. I know you love to hear about medical knowledge more than asking for my help. If you don''t have anything to ask, I''ll be going to Consenza now," I said.


    And then, we had a two hours discussion about human body. Using my own body as an example for growing stronger with natural recovery, I exined a lot. Old man also stopped his work to take note of my exnation.


    "I see. So, your bones will be stronger and can endure stronger collision without breaking?" old man asked.


    "Well, if the collision is too strong, they will still break. But that''s right. My bones will be thicker and stronger. To be strong, I need to endure the pain. It''s annoying. And since we don''t'' know when the cult is going to attack, I can''t just let my body recover naturally over time. Now is fine since we expect them to attack during the tournament and won''t make a big move anytime soon. Though I don''t want to keep breaking my bones," I exined.


    "I learned a lot. Thank you. You can go now," old man said.


    Lastly is Consenza. I also want to check how Celestine is doing.


    "Hello Celestine, udia, been a while," I greeted the two of them as I entered the empress'' office.


    "Hey! What about me!? I''m the empress!" Lynnined.


    "Oh, yeah. You''re here as well. Hi," I said.


    "¡­no respect to the empress. Off with your head!" Lynn shouted.


    "You seem to be doing well, Celestine. Don''t you miss the orphans?" I asked Celestine while ignoring Lynn.


    "And now he''s ignoring me¡­" Lynn said.


    She is fun to tease with. This empress doesn''t seem very empress-y. Though maybe only when I was around.


    "Don''t tease her too much, Roy. And yeah, I missed the orphans. Good thing after Sonia told me that you''reing, I asked for some free time from teaching the mages from the empire," Celestine said.


    "Oh, you have prepared the lineup for the tournament?" I asked.


    "Yeah. There''s even another expert level mage among the rank of imperial guards. Maybe I shouldn''t participate and help you take care of things behind the stage," Celestine said.


    "Oh, well, let''s go home then. udia, see youter," I said.


    "Yeah, bye!" udia waved her hand as I opened a portal back to Cassau.


    "Hey!"


    Suddenly, Lynn stopped us.


    "What''s wrong? Don''t want your sister to be taken?" I asked.


    "That too! And ask me if I''m doing well!" Lynn shouted.


    I look at her and see if anything changed.


    "You seem to have gained weight. That''s a proof that you''re doing well enough to have eaten that much. It''s not bad that you gained weight. Instead, I think you are at the ideal weight nowpared to your size. I see that you''re doing well," I said.


    "Sigh¡­ just go. I don''t want to see you anymore," Lynn said.


    I can just ask Celestine about what happened in Consenzater at home, so I don''t need to waste her time.


    After returning back to Cassau, the orphans were happy to see Celestine again after a long time.


    And I rested for another week until my body is fully healed, then I returned Celestine back to Consenza as I and the three monsters entered Monsters World again to train.

 Chapter 376 - Seven Months Later

    The tournament was scheduled to happen next year. I still have time to improve my summoning element.


    After that time I broke my bones fighting against Spot, I have been training for over seven months already, with having a week break every month.


    And each time I see myself in a bottleneck, or have something I want to try, I would return back to theke in the Monsters World and spar against Spot again and again. Which resulted in me breaking my bones again, and needed to rest for at least a week. That''s why I took a rest for a week every month.


    My body is now much stronger than before. And I can use my Aura better.


    Today, I''m at theke again. The reason is not to spar with Spot again. It''s to see how much improvement I made.


    This time again, I will try to split the waterfall into two.


    The first time I did it, it was back during my first sparring session with Spot. I managed to cut the waterfall only up to five meters. This time, surely the difference will be great.


    I stand below the tall waterfall. Now that I look again, it is very tall. Probably about 300 meters tall. That''s even longer than Spot''s body even in his real size.


    This time, I can stand under the waterfall casually. I don''t have to put much effort unlike that time I first tried it.


    I calmly stand under the waterfall with the self-repair spear, Reizpear, in my right hand.


    I swung Reizpear upward in the middle of the waterfall, and I split the waterfall up to a third of its height. That''s about a hundred meters!


    "Great. That''s about twenty times the height of the first time I did it. A good improvement in just seven months," I said to myself.


    "Wow, you actually reach that high! Will you fight me again?" Spot asked after watching me split the waterfall.


    "No. Over the past seven months, I feel like my summoning level only need a little more experience to finally level up. I''m going to find a strong monster to kill. I thought that with ake this size, I could find one strong monster here. But seems like I was wrong. All of them are weaker than Spot and too afraid toe out of their hiding spot. I guess we should split up then," I suggested.


    During these past months, Shelia was also interested in training under the waterfall. Now, she can endure the waterfall and do some shadow boxing when I was meditating under the waterfall.


    As for Victoria, she doesn''t change much other than learning some new techniques against average monsters.


    "I''m already perfect as I am," she said proudly when I asked her about her improvement. Seems like there''s not much improvement for herpared to us.


    "How do we split up?" Shelia asked.


    "Hmm¡­ wait, even if we split up, we won''t be able to contact each other without Sonia here. I guess we''ll go together. Where should we go? Probably a dungeon is a good ce to go. Let''s find a dungeon," I suggested.


    "Oh, I found a dungeon about three months ago! It might be a good ce to start!" Spot said.


    During my training, whenever we''re not sparring, he would explore the area and hunt whatever monsters he fancies. It should be expected that he found one or two dungeons. Though I wonder why he didn''t clear the dungeon on his own?


    "You''re not clearing the dungeon on your own?" I asked.


    "I thought that you might be interested to do it after your training is over," he said.


    ¡­what a considerate monster! He''s so kind to me!


    "Thank you, Spot. You''re so reliable like always," I thanked him.


    "No problem! Shall we go?"


    "Where is the dungeon anyway?" I asked.


    "It''s deep in a forest all the way over there. There''s a huge tree as high as the sky. That''s the entrance of the dungeon," Spot said.


    "The dungeon is inside a tree? That''s interesting. What kind of monsters are there inside the dungeon?" I asked.


    "Elves," Spot said casually.


    "Elves you say!? The dweller of forest!? Those humanoid creatures who can use magic and expert in archery!? With the male extremely handsome and the male extremely handsome!?" Victoria shouted.


    You just said the male extremely handsome twice. That makes me reluctant to go there.


    "Probably just like us Werewolves. Those who lives outside the dungeons and inside the dungeons are different. For us, we can tell if the Werewolves is from inside or outside. And those from inside the dungeon are considered as enemies. I guess it should be the same with elves," Shelia said.


    "I guess that means it''s impossible tomunicate with them, right? Let''s go there and test their abilities. If they are strong, after reaching intermediate level in my summoning, I''m interested in making them my next contracted monster," I said.


    "No, Roy. There''s an even better monster than the elves. I found their settlement as well. I''ll tell youter once you leveled up," Spot said.


    Really!? If there''s something even better, then I''m interested.


    But better monsters can still be difficult to persuade to be my monster. Should I be their king again just like what I did to the Werewolves?


    I''ll seeter. For now, it''s about improving my level.


    "Alright. Let''s go there and fight some Dungeon Elves. Since they are humanoid monster, I should be able to fight them. Does anyone know about elf race?" I asked as we rode on Spot''s back and flew toward the dungeon. Spot is not flying in high speed so we can enjoy the view.


    "Me! Me! They are handsome and handsome!" Victoria said.


    "Anyone other than Victoria, please. Whatever she said, most likelye from her world. Not elf race from this world," I said.


    "I don''t know about their look other than their long ears. Grandpa once told me that they are cowards and weak. I guess you shouldn''t expect too much from them," Shelia said.


    If that''s the case, the dungeon should be easy to clear. I hope at least there are some treasures to loot from there.


    "No, they aren''t weak. At least a long time ago, even before I became a summoned monster, I heard stories of how strong they are. But maybe because it has been over a thousand years since then, their strength dwindled. But if it''s Dungeon Elves, they should be stronger than the weak elves Shelia said," Spot exined.


    "Well, we will only know once we get there."


    Since it''s quite far, we enjoyed the view while chatting on Spot''s head.


    One hourter, I can see a huge tree from far away.


    "Is that the tree you said? That''s one huge tree. I think the size is even bigger than the capital of Tatrama," I said.


    The tree is so big that the branches of the tree can be called as trunks instead. And on top of the tree, I think we can walk on it since it''s so dense with leaves and branches under it.


    "Spot! Let''snd on the top of that tree! I''m interested to see if we can walk on it or not!" I said.


    "Let''s go!"


    Spot then increases his speed and we reached the huge tree in no time.


    "Oh! We really can walk on top of the tree! This feel amazing!"


    Although we are not tired, we choose to rest here for a while before entering the tree dungeon.


    The entrance of the dungeon is at the bottom of the tree, and at the top, there''s nothing here but leaves, branches, and cloud.


    "Roy! Go and tell the others! Let''s have them enjoy pic here before exploring the dungeon!" Victoria suggested.


    "That sounds great. But it means we''ll explore the dungeon tomorrow. I guess that''s fine. Spot, Shelia, before I call the others, let''s take care of the flying monsters here first. It''s not safe to have a pic around them," I said.


    There are many flying monsters that built their nests on top of this giant tree. But somehow, there''s not many of them.


    I thought that since this ce is huge, there will be more of them. But I guess that''s fine. It means I can take care of the monsters up here faster.


    After taking care of the monsters, I opened a portal and inform everyone about the pic. Since Albert, Lynn, old man, and Harold are free, they all wanted toe as well.


    With so many people I have to bring, I need to open portals many times. I guess I was right to explore the dungeon tomorrow once my mana recovers.


    "THIS IS THE TOP OF A TREE!? IT''S AMAZING!"


    That''s the loud voice of Jewel. It''s been a while since Ist hear her so loud.


    Everyone here enjoyed the pic. And I made sure to have some Blobbies to cover the leaves so they won''t bet burnt when we''re doing some barbeque.


    The kids also enjoying ying tags here. Well, they are free to run as much as they want since this ce is evenrger than the capital.


    And I¡­ built a tent far from the others just so I can have a ''private time'' with my lovers.


    I thought I could rx as much as possible, but it seems that would be hard. Especially since there are some elves who have been watching us for a while. Though they think that they are hidden safely.


    Since they seem to have intellect, I''ll try talking with themter.. But for now, let''s rx with the others.

 Chapter 377 - Meeting A High Elf

    After rxing with everyone at the top of the dungeon tree, I opened several portals to bring them back to where they from. But none of them take a step forward.


    "What''s wrong?" I asked.


    "You''re not returning? I thought that you would return and rest until tomorrow so you can explore the dungeon in full strength," Albert asked.


    "Well, we are being watched by elves. They seem weak and have no interest in fighting, so I''ll try to get to know them first. If they are dangerous, I will leave immediately," I said.


    The elves who are watching were the elves thate from outside the dungeon. The elves that can reproduce on their own, and not exist because of the dungeon.


    They have been watching us for a while already, but none of them seems to have any interest in confronting us, so I left them be. But I''m still curious about their intention, and to see if they are useful or not.


    Maybe if they are coward, and don''t like fighting, but they have other use, I can get to have them cooperate with me. That''s why I''m going to meet them first before entering the dungeon.


    But still¡­ for Elves to stay so close to a dungeon where Dungeon Elves appear in, that''s actually weird. What if I mistook them with the Dungeon Elves?


    Well, it won''t be any problem if I leave them be until after clearing the dungeon. But I''m still curious about them.


    "Depend on their answer, I might return homete today. Don''t worry, I can still open a portal few more times. I''ll return immediately if it''s dangerous," I said.


    "Well, if you say so. And it will be great if you ended up bing the king of the elves just like what you did to the werewolves. Good luck, Roy," Albert said.


    After that, everyone entered their preferred portals to leave. I said preferred because Luna and Carmen decided to go to Cassau without saying anything to me instead of returning to Arturo. Well, if they need me, they will contact me.


    I will go meet the Elves and return after I finished talking with them. And tomorrow will be the day that I entered the dungeon.


    I keep trying to see inside the Dungeon, but I can''t see far. Only about a hundred meters. Beyond that, I can''t see anything.


    Maybe there are a powerful monster inside the dungeon. I hope that monster is enough for me to increase into intermediate level.


    After watching everyone is on the other side of the portal, I quickly run toward the peeking Elves.


    "Hi there, Ie in peace!" I greeted the Elves.


    The Elves who were not prepared at all, surprised seeing me so fast approaching them in no time.


    There are three Elves. All of them are male. They have long ears, and all of them are good looking.


    I already hate them, but Victoria isn''t. She already started fantasizing about whatever I don''t want to be included in.


    With me, Spot, and Shelia already surrounding them, they have no way to escape. But how do theye up here? Is there a path that we can go to get down from the tree? Maybe there are.


    "W-who are you!?" one elf asked.


    "My name is Roy, and I came in peace. Probably."


    "Ah, umm¡­ this is a weirdbination, isn''t it? A giant serpent, a werewolf, a slime, and a¡­ hairless ape?" the elf said.


    "Who the hell is an ape!? I''m a human! I originally came in peace, but now I''m here to fight! Or should I just kill you!?"


    Who is the ape? Why am I a hairless ape? It''s obvious that I''m not even an ape!


    "Don''t kill us!" the elves screamed in fear.


    ¡­they are truly cowards just like Shelia said.


    "Take me to your leader," I said.


    The three elves afraid of me now and willingly bring me to their leader.


    We followed them with Spot around my waist like usual.


    There was indeed a hidden gap on the leaves that can be moved. Probably using the elves'' magic. That''s why I never saw it before.


    The three agilely go down the tree by jumping from branches to branches. They seem to be an expert in running in the forest and trees.


    But they look so cocky that they keep ncing back at me as if saying that I can''t keep up with them.


    Well, they are very wrong.


    Shelia can run on air like me, so she''s fine just falling without stepping on the branches. As for me, I used Aura so I can walk easily even if in a vertical wall. Or in this situation, trunk.


    "What? If you can go faster, then do it. I don''t want to waste my time with you," I said to the elves.


    We go all the way down to the bottom. And I can see that there''s an elf''s settlement at the bottom. They made their houses on top of other trees. Not the dungeon tree.


    "Alright, we''re here. Now, where''s your leader?" I asked.


    "Follow me," one elf said.


    I followed him into a huge building made of wood. This one is not on top of a tree, so it''s easy to see the difference.


    "Oh, you have returned. Did you enjoy ying too much outside?"


    There''s a female elf who seems to be the leader. She''s not even looking at us as she spoke.


    But since the elf with me didn''t reply at all, the female elf turned and was shocked to see me.


    "Ah! A human!"


    "See! I''m a human and not an ape! There''s a huge difference!" I said to the elf who brought me to the leader of the elves.


    "W-what does a human want with us? We don''t have anything to give. And please don''t destroy our home," the female elf then quickly gets down on all four and kowtow. Just what the hell happened with the elf?


    In any case, I don''t think they are good enough to be my next summon. I''ll just give up on them and find better monsters. Though if they have anything they can exchange with us, I''ll at least try to cooperate with them.


    "I have some questions to ask, and you will answer them all truthfully," I said as I intimidate the leader of the elves with Aura.


    "I will do anything you say, just please spare our lives!"


    ¡­just what makes them so cowardly? During Spot''s time before he became a contracted monster, he said that the Elves were quite strong.


    I''ll see if I can learn anything about them from her.


    The elf I''m talking to is the only High Elf in this forest, and possibly the only one left in the world. That''s why she be the leader of the elves. Her name is Elestias. I''ll just call her Tia before I forget her name.


    She has been alive for only five hundred years. The one who said only were Spot and Victoria, not me.


    That''s why she doesn''t remember about the strength of the elves a thousand years ago.


    She was born already a High Elf. I don''t know which characteristic made her high. And even Tia herself doesn''t know.


    She has been here ever since she was born, and the only strong elf she knows was her father. Thest warrior of the elves.


    After he died, there have been no other powerful elves since then. And because they have found this ce, away from powerful enemies, they don''t need to grow stronger. They just need to learn elves'' magic to control nts as tradition.


    That must be the magic that let those elves get to the top of the tree.


    "So, why do you think that the elves are safe when you actually live just next to a dungeon?" I asked curiously.


    "¡­what? There''s no dungeon here," Tia said.


    "It''s that giant tree! There''s a dungeon inside! Don''t tell me that you have never explored inside the tree? And Spot even said that the monsters inside the dungeon are Dungeon Elves!"


    "¡­EEEEH!"


    "You don''t know!?"


    Howe they don''t know about it despite living here for five hundred years!


    "Wait, some elves mentioned that they met the deceased loved ones several times. Probably they unknowingly entered the dungeon. Some of them never returned after looking for them thinking that they are alive. Maybe after elves die, we will live on forever as a dungeon monster?" Tia said.


    "That''s not Dungeon Elves! That''s Zombies! The monsters inside the dungeon are Zombies!" I said.


    "Now that you mentioned it, back when I explored the dungeon, the elves couldn''t even walk normally. I guess they are Zombies indeed," Spot said.


    "At least we know the monsters inside the dungeon. But still, are elves this stupid!?"


    Not just cowards, they are also idiots. They have been living next to a dungeon, but never know about it.


    It seems like it''s impossible to learn anything about the dungeon from them. Let''s just ask what they can do instead.


    "Now, what are you capable of? What''s the greatness of your magic?"


    "Well¡­ we''re capable of exploring the forest. There''s nothing in the forest that can hide from us," Tia said proudly.


    "¡­you never know about the dungeon after five hundred years, and you''re telling me that you''re capable of scouting inside the forest?" I asked.


    "¡­in our defense, we can explore the forest, but not inside a tree. We will look for the entrance and make sure no other elves can enter the dungeon," Tia said.


    "What about your magic?"


    "We are good with nts. We can make them grow faster than normal crops," Tia said.


    I think it will be good if I asked them to be farmers. But do I need them to be farmers?


    Wait! There''s one important thing that they might be able to do!


    "What about nt type monster?" I asked.


    "I don''t know, but if they are nts, we should be able to make them grow faster," Tia said.


    Okay, I will ask them to grow Sunny into a powerful monster. And ask them to grow some fruits, vegetables, and probably gets them to grow some other crops like cotton as well.


    Now, what can I give them in exchange?

 Chapter 378 - Yellowsun

    "Hmm¡­ I''d like to offer you an exchange with your nt magic, but what do you want so we can have an equal exchange?"


    I could force them to do what I want, but it will be dangerous if somehow some of the elves are capable fighters or mages. And I have no interest in making a contract with them because of their cowardly nature. I''m the only one allowed to be a coward!


    Well, I''m a tactical coward and the elves are coward in¡­ many things.


    If they''re this afraid to every little thing, it will be dangerous for me to bring them anywhere.


    "in exchange¡­ I-I want to enter the dungeon inside the tree with you!" Tia said.


    "Are you sure? I don''t think you are courageous enough to fight monsters," I asked.


    "I-I am the queen of the elves! I need to make sure that we live in a safe ce! If that tree is a dungeon as you said, it will be dangerous if we stay here any longer. Who knows if the monsters inside wille out or not?"


    "So, you want me to bring you inside the dungeon? I''m fine with it since I''m trying to conquer that dungeon. But is that it? That''s all you wish for?" I asked.


    "Well, if possible, I want to find other ce where we can live. I''m sorry, but I want you to help us find a better location," Tia bowed down requesting for the safety of the elves.


    "I know a ce, but does elf need to live in a forest?" I asked.


    "No. We can live anywhere. Even in a desert. With our magic, it will just be a while until we can grow our own forest," Tia said.


    "Really? Then, is this forest was made by the elves?"


    "Everything other than the giant tree was made since my parents'' generation," Tia said.


    "Then I know a ce. I''ll tell you after we conquer the dungeon. We will leaveter after I take a rest. Do you have anything else to ask?"


    "¡­no. We will immediately find the entrance of the dungeon and block it with trees and nts so no other elves can enter and no monsters can leave the dungeon. And¡­ we have no fighting power here, so if possible, I''d like you to stay in our vige," Tia offered to let us stay in the elves vige.


    That''s weird. She was supposed to be afraid of us, but she asked us to stay with them. Isn''t she worried that we might kill the elves?


    "Can you really trust us enough to let us stay here?" I asked.


    "¡­I''m afraid of monsters attacking us more," Tia said.


    I guess her fear of the monsters are much bigger than her fear of me.


    "Shelia, you will stay here with the elves. Is that okay?" I asked Shelia to stay here until it''s time to go enter the dungeon.


    "Sure. The ce where you will take them to is our vige, right? I think it''s best for them to get used to us werewolves," Shelia said.


    Ever since she became my summon, Shelia has been hanging with Ka and the others quite a lot. Which makes her smarter than average werewolves who only loves battle. Well, maybe not as smart as Red who managed the vige. But she''s still smart enough to know what I''m thinking.


    "That''s right. And it''s also safe since the werewolves can act as their guards as well. Well, I will tell them about the elves if the elves wanted to leave this ce," I said.


    After that, I left Shelia there with Tia as I return back to Cassau. I told Ka and the others about the elves and the fact that the monsters inside the dungeon are most likely zombies. Elf zombies.


    "So, are you going to make them your next monster?" Sophie asked curiously.


    "Nope. They are too cowardly. But as long as I can give them safety, they would willingly work for me. That''s why, Lina, I will bring Sunny with me tomorrow. Hopefully, they have a way to make her stronger," I said to Lina.


    "That''s okay. And Sunny also seems happy to be able to get stronger," Lina said.


    All of us then look at Sunny who is dancing knowing that she can get stronger with the help of the elves. Seems like she can''t wait to go meet the elves.


    "Lina, do you want toe as well? I think as someone who knows Sunny the most, it''s easier for you to exin about Sunny to the elves," I asked Lina if she wants toe.


    "Then, I''lle with you. I''ll go to bed now and told Elsie that she will stay here," Lina said.


    "You''re sleeping this early?"


    The sun was just set, and we were just finished dinner but she''s already going to bed.


    "I need to prepare for tomorrow''s lunch and dinner for everyone early in the morning. I don''t know when I will return," Lina said.


    As usual, Lina is the most hard-working member of the guild. How should I reward her? Like usual, I guess?


    "Thank you, Lina. As expected, you are the most reliable maid," Iplimented Lina.


    She loves to beplimented. Especially by me.


    "Lina, you''re the best!"


    "Love you, Lina!"


    Everyone else alsoplimented her as Lina bowed her head toward us, and returns to her room. I can see her face is red from all thepliments she received. She''s cute as usual.


    The next day, we prepared to go back to the elves vige to meet Tia and Shelia whom I asked to stay there.


    "¡­what''s going on here?"


    In front of me is Shelia. And right beside her, while clinging to her arm, it''s the Queen of the elves, the High Elf, Elestias.


    Tia is clinging on to Shelia''s arm without any intention of letting her go.


    "¡­apparently, elves are the kind who are scared of the people they first met, but once they warmed up with the other party, they will be extremely attached to them," Shelia said.


    ¡­ attached like this?


    "Since when has she been clinging to you?"


    "Even in sleep."


    I made a good decision to not make any elves as my next summon. Though I still haven''t increased my level yet.


    If someone as pretty as Tia is clinging to me, I would be happy. But not letting go no matter what, I would be annoyed. Happy, but annoyed.


    "Tia, let Shelia go," I said to Tia.


    "No!" Tia pouted like a child.


    "Shelia, scare her a little," I ordered.


    Then, Shelia transformed into her wolf form, and scare the High Elf to the point that she wet herself.


    "¡­go get changed before we enter the dungeon," I said.


    "Yes, sir!" Tia said as she run away to get changed.


    As we waited for her to change, Shelia returned back to her normal form.


    Victoria and Spot are checking on the entrance of the dungeon which has been blocked by the elves.


    "It''s amazing! It was as if those trees have been there for a long time!" Spot said.


    I can see the entrance that there are many simr trees are surrounding the entrance. And I also see several elves shaking in fear in their house. they won''t be living in fear anymore once we''re done here.


    Tia returned after changing, and I introduced Lina and Sunny to her.


    "Tia, that''s Sunny. The nt monster I want you to use your elf magic if possible," I said.


    Tia didn''t say anything. She''s just standing there with her mouth wide open. It was as if this is the most shocking thing in her whole life.


    "T-that''s the Yellowsun!" Tia said.


    "Yeah, sun is yellow. And her name is Sunny. A sunflower. She is yellow indeed," I said.


    "I mean she''s a monster called Yellowsun! It''s still in its infancy! Why haven''t you grown it yet!?" Tia asked me in anger.


    "How would I know what kind of monster she is? Sunny can''t speak. Though she understands ournguage. Do you know about her species?" I asked.


    "Yellowsun is¡­ considered as our god. The story has been told since our ancestor''s time. Yellowsun is a very rare species which when they grow up, they can be stronger than anyone. Their nt magic is the strongest and could even create a forest on its own in just a matter of days. We elves have been worshipping Yellowsun as our deity for protecting our previous vige. But after the one who protected us a long time ago died, and have no sessor, we were forced to leave," Tia exined.


    "¡­Sunny, you''re a god?" I asked Sunny who replied by shaking her head.


    "Anyway, since you know much about Sunny, can you exin to us about her? And also help her grow. You asked why she''s still in her infancy. Does that mean Sunny need outside influence to grow?" Lina asked.


    "Right! Come with me!"


    We followed Tia to a room, which seems to be her bedroom since there''s a bed made out of leaves here.


    Tia then grabbed something hidden in her room, an empty ss.


    No, it''s not empty. There are a few drops of water inside.


    "This is a magical water that is very rare. This few drop is probably thest of it. It''s called Magqua," Tia said.


    Magqua¡­ magic aqua¡­ magic water.


    I''m not the only one with weird naming sense.


    "So, what does this Magqua do?" I asked.


    "Just let it be. The Yellowsun will do the rest by herself," Tia said.


    So, this Magqua can get Sunny grow?


    Just as Tia put down the ss to the floor, Sunny then leaves Lina''s said and crawled toward the water. Then, Sunny entered the ss and let her roots suck the Magqua.


    "¡­nothing happened," I said.


    "It''s maybe because the quantity of the Magqua is too little, or the Magqua has been expired," Tia said.


    "Magic water has expiration date?" Victoria asked.


    "I don''t know. It was given to me by my father. And there''s only this little bit of water left," Tia said.


    Suddenly, Sunny wriggling around. It was as if she''s having a spasm.


    "What''s wrong with Sunny! You didn''t do anything bad to her, right?" I grabbed Tia''s cor and lifted her up.


    "No! It''s working! The Magqua is working! She''s evolving! Now, she needs a life force! A strong one!" Tia said.


    A strong life force. A sacrifice?


    No, someone doesn''t have to die. Sunny is a flower. Getting a life force from other nts might be better.


    That''s right! The dungeon tree! It''s a dungeon, but it''s still a tree with roots!


    I quickly grabbed Sunny as I run toward the giant tree, and put Sunny on the ground.


    With a little bit of strength left, Sunny is trying to dig under the ground. I helped her so it can be done sooner.


    And as I finished digging deep down to the root of the giant tree, Lina and the others arrived to see Sunny entering the ground.


    I can see Sunny''s roots are connecting with the giant tree as Sunny started to regain her strength.


    "She''s going to evolve!" I shouted.


    My shout was heard by the elves as theye to watch curiously.


    I originallye here to improve my summoning level, but seems like Lina is the one who get the most of it. It''s good though.


    With this, Sunny can be stronger!

 Chapter 379 - Sunnys Evolution

    "¡­so, how long should we wait?" I asked Tia.


    "I don''t know. I have done everything my father said to make Yellowsun grow. But maybe this one is different. Though I don''t really know since this is actually my first time doing this. And I''m the oldest elf here," Tia said.


    "Maybe it''s because the Magqua is not enough?" Lina asked.


    Lina is the one who is worried the most since Sunny is her monster. Of course Lina wants to make Sunny stronger, but if it''s dangerous, she will refuse it.


    Summoner can only have one monster unless they eat Pear-y Fruit. It means when they have a monster they don''t like as their summon, they need their monster to die first before making a contract with another monster.


    And the fact that Sunny is still alive, and she''s Lina''s monster from the day she awakened her magic, just show how much she cares about Sunny.


    "Maybe that''s the case. I think it''s best for us to wait," Tia said.


    "Isn''t there a better option? Sunny can understand ournguage, so we just need to ask her what she needs. Lina, you''re her master. Ask her," I told Lina to ask Sunny if she needs something.


    "I''ll try."


    Lina then walked toward the hole that I dug. That''s where Sunny is absorbing the life force of the dungeon tree directly from the roots.


    "Sunny, is everything okay? Do you have anything you need?" Lina asked.


    Tia, Shelia, Victoria, and Spot are also looking into the hole to see Sunny. The other elves are curious as well, but it seems like they are still afraid of us so they won''te any closer.


    I can see that Sunny seems like thinking about something. Probably it''s something necessary for her growth.


    Seems like she has realized something. Sunny is growing her vines so long as they grabbed¡­ my leg?


    "¡­Sunny, if you want a living sacrifice, I won''t do it," I said.


    I can see her shook her flower head. I guess I won''t die. But what does she want?


    Sunny then used her vines to hold me up. But why am I being held upside down?


    "Sunny. Head is supposed to be above, and feet should be below. This is wrong," I said.


    "Master! Seems like Sunny needs something from you! As she needs something to make her evolve, she found what she needs from you. And looks like Master is the only one who have it," Lina said.


    Something important for her growth¡­ and it''s only something that I have¡­ is it handsomeness?


    Just as I thought about it, a new vinee out of the hole where Sunny is, and pped my cheek.


    "What was that for!?"


    "Master. Whatever you''re thinking must be wrong. That''s why she pped you," Lina said.


    "How does she know what I''m thinking!?" I said.


    "Probably because we have been together for so long. Anyway, it''s not what you were thinking. What she needs from you is probably Aura. Sunny wants you to pour your Aura into her," Lina said.


    "Of course I know that! I was just thinking of a joke, but before I say anything, she pped me!"


    So, Sunny needs Aura? I doubt that''s the case for her species. Maybe each one of them are different from the energy that they suck.


    And for Sunny, she sucked the energy from a tree that is actually a dungeon, and she wants my Aura as well. Let''s try it out.


    "Sunny, I''m going to pour my Aura into you. Can you let me down?"


    I''m still hanging with my leg being held by Sunny''s vine while my head is below. I can hold this position for a long time, but I don''t want to.


    But even after I asked her, Sunny refuses to let me down or put me back in the right position. She shakes her flower head to my plead.


    "Why!? Just put me down! Lina, please ask her to put me down," I asked Lina.


    "¡­can''t do that. You have to be the one talking to her," Lina said.


    "¡­alright, Sunny. You want to evolve or not?" I asked Sunny down in the hole. She replied with a nod.


    "Then I will help you if you put me down!"


    This time, she shook her head.


    "What do you want from me!? A fertilizer?"


    She shook her head again.


    Alright, let''s think. What does she want? Sunny, although we were hunting monsters a few times together just the two of us, I still don''t know how to get close with her.


    Unlike Victoria, Shelia, or Spot, Sunny can''t speak. But seems like for the elves, her species is considered as their god. But I doubt that Sunny wants me to worship her.


    The only thing I can think of is¡­ Lina.


    "Okay, if you put me down, I will spend more time with Lina andpliment her a lot. Is that what you want?"


    And Sunny then gently flip me and put me down slowly. Not on the ground, but into the hole that I dug.


    I also looked at Lina who seems to be happy hearing I will spend more time with her. I was right that this is the correct answer.


    "Alright, where should I grab?"


    Right in front of Sunny, I asked where I should start pouring my Aura. And Sunny replied with a headbutt to my chest. I guess I need to pour my Aura to the flower head.


    I hold Sunny''s flower head to my chest, and pour my Aura into her. Sonia and Victoria said that it''s dangerous for an inexperienced Aura user to pour their Aura into someone else''s body, but maybe it''s fine for a monster. I''ll stop if I detect anything dangerous. I don''t want Lina to hate me.


    As I pour a little Aura into her, Sunny''s body jerked a little and she''s started shivering as if she''s in pain. But that stopped soon after she got used to it.


    I guess it''s right that pouring Aura inside someone else''s body is dangerous. Then, can I use this method in a fight?


    As I pour Aura into Sunny, I can see that Sunny is changing.


    It''s obvious since even though we are few meters underground, but there''s a light here! And it''sing from Sunny''s head!


    Sunny is a sun! No wonder her species is called Yellowsun. They just like another sun but from a flower. Wait, that''s just the exnation for what a sunflower is!


    Sunny didn''t change at all except that the petals around her head turn shiny.


    Oh, wait! She''s getting bigger now!


    Her size is getting bigger as the hole we dug no longer fit for the two of us. I who was hugging Sunny''s head now is riding on top of her flower head.


    "It''s here! That''s the Yellowsun at the peak of its adulthood!" Tia shouted. Followed by the cheers of the elves who worshipped Sunny''s species.


    Sunny grows bigger and bigger. Although her size can''tpete with the dungeon tree, it''s still very big. About half the length of Spot when he''s in his original size.


    I was so shocked that I forget to pour more Aura, but it seems like she no longer needs it as she''s already perfectly evolved.


    Finally, her growth stopped. But the shine from her petals are still there. And they are concentrated to the middle of the flower.


    Wait, is this an attack? Just like Spot''s magic breath?


    And as I guessed, Sunny shoots a beam of light toward a mountain far from here. And she destroyed it with one breath!


    "Oh! You''re amazing, Sunny! Just like me! But that was a light element magic, right? Mine is non-elemental magic. But that''s about as strong as my breath attack!" Spot said happily.


    "Sunny! You''re so great!" Victoria also shouted happily seeing Sunny''s growth.


    Just bying here, Sunny has be so powerful already thanks to the elves. If they still want to move to a safe ce after the dungeon exploration, I will dly help them.


    Maybe there are other things than farming that they can do. But just farming is more than enough.


    Hmm? Lina seems to be shocked. What''s wrong with her?


    "Lina. Aren''t you happy that Sunny became so strong? Why do you look so shocked?" I asked.


    "¡­yes, I''m happy. But I''m more surprised by it since¡­ I became advanced level just from that attack," Lina said.


    "¡­what!?"


    It should be me! I''m the one who wants to increase my level! But just by that one attack, and she''s already advanced level and can contract another monster!?


    "¡­that''s amazing. I''m irritated by how you ended up surpassing me easily, but I''m also happy by it. Do you have any monster you want to make a contract with?" I asked.


    "There''s one here," Lina said without hesitation.


    Don''t tell me¡­


    "Our god Yellowsun has descended! Rejoice!" Tia cheered along with the other elves.


    "Elestias, I have something I want to ask you," Lina said.


    "What is it, oh Master of Yellowsun?" Tia asked.


    If Lina is the Master of Yellowsun, then I''m the Master of the Master of Yellowsun.


    "Because of that evolution, I can now make contract with another monster. Will you¡ª"


    "I will! I will dly be your summon and help you in any way possible! Although Ick in strength, I can do many other things! And because I''m the queen of the elves, I can get all elves to help you!" Tia said as she realizes what Lina is going to ask.


    "¡­that''s good. I guess I don''t need to enter the dungeon again. What about you?" Lina asked Tia.


    "I''ll do anything you say! If you tell us to stay, we will stay. If you tell us to leave, we will leave!"


    "¡­I want you to move your vige to live together with the Werewolves," Lina said.


    "We will prepare to move immediately!" Tia said as she ordered the elves to prepare to move.


    ¡­what is this? I no longer need to bring her with me into the dungeon? Well, that''s fine.


    And they will live alongside the werewolves? I hope they can get along.


    I think it should be fine since I''m the Werewolf King, and Lina is the Master of the Elves Queen.

 Chapter 380 - Enter The Tree Dungeon

    "So, are you two still going inside the dungeon?"


    I asked Lina and Tia if they still want to go inside.


    Sunny has evolved into a big sunflower. Wait, she''s shrinking and returning back to her original form.


    Since it''s impossible for her to carry me again, I jumped from the flower head andnded on the ground.


    Sunny has grown so powerful that she can shot a light element magic attack and destroyed a lot of monsters in one shot that Lina suddenly became advanced level mage already. That mean there''s nothing for them to gain inside the dungeon.


    As for Tia, well¡­ she''s going to be Lina''s summon from now on. And if Lina told her to move to the werewolves'' settlement, they will do it.


    "I won''t go. I''ll try to get to know Sunny better now. And I will make a contract with Elestias. No, I''ll call you Tia as well from now on," Lina said.


    "You can call me whatever you want, Master. I can''t believe I will be in the same rank as the great Yellowsun. As your summon. I¡­no, we the elves are willing to do anything you say," Tia said as she kneeled down in front of Lina.


    "¡­should I take them to the Werewolves'' settlement to farm?" Lina asked me.


    "That would be great. And you will be worried if we left them alone, right?" I said.


    "Master, you can go explore the dungeon now. I''ll stay here with Sunny and Tia," Lina said.


    "You should quickly make a contract with Tia. I''ll grab one Peary-fruit for you. I hope you can still grow as a summoner and make one, or even two more monsters to be your summons," I said.


    Getting two more monsters mean that she will be at Master level. That would be great.


    I don''t know her monsters'' overall strength previously. Sunny was good, but not that strong. Even Elsie can defeat her easily. But now, even when Elsie can see everything, she will be in trouble if they fight.


    And Elsie herself is an All-seeing Eye monster. Her strength is in her vision, and not herbat ability. Good thing Sunny be so powerful after evolution. Though Sunny seems to prefer her old form as that is the form she''s using right now.


    She''s dancing right now. She must be very happy to evolve. Thank me you little sunflower! I gave you a bit of my Aura!


    Good thing she didn''t suck too much or I will be in trouble if I can''t use Aura inside the dungeon.


    After that, it''s the High Elf, Tia.


    ¡­I don''t know her strength, but at least she''s an intellectual monster that we canmunicate with, and also the leader of her species.


    Even if she doesn''t have powerfulbat ability, her nt magic should be able to help Sunny a lot. And they will be helpful as farmers so we can have unlimited supply of crops.


    I waited until Lina finished making contract with Tia, and after I gave her one Pear-y Fruit, I and the three monsters entered the dungeon.


    As expected, the monsters inside are zombies. Not elves.


    Well, since the elves vige is right outside this dungeon, the monsters are actually elf zombies. So, it''s still elf.


    "Urgh¡­ the smell of corpses," Shelia said as she has the best smelling sense among us.


    "Sniff¡­ it''s smelly indeed. Shelia, if you don''t want toe, you may leave. We have seen how the elves are, so we can''t expect the monsters inside to be powerful," I said.


    "No. I can''t just give up from the smell. I also need to train to endure it. Who knows if someone will use smell to attack us werewolves in the future?" Shelia said.


    "Good. At least cover your nose with Blobbies if you can''t take it. Victoria!"


    "Aye-aye, sir!"


    As soon as I call her name, Victoria creates clones of herself, and those Blobbies transformed into a face mask for each of us. Except for Victoria herself.


    We walked deeper into the dungeon and finally see an elf zombie. When the zombie noticed me, it suddenly turns its head toward me, and started running.


    Probably since it''s an elf, its movement is nimble. Though it moves toward me directly without a strategy so I can easily predict its movement and kill it with one sh of Victokatana.


    Since my goal is to improve my summoning element, Spot is not allowed to fight, and I can only use Victoria or Blobbies as weapon. And Shelia is free to do anything she wants.


    "Hmm¡­ they are easy to defeat. Or maybe because the elves who died recently are much weaker. That mean the deeper we go in, the more likely we fought older elves. We may end up fighting against Tia''s father who is an elf warrior," I said.


    "You may be right. And if he''s as strong as what Spot said, you might be able to increase your level to advanced," Victoria said.


    This tree is so big. There might be more than just elf zombies. Though since the elves can live peacefully right outside the dungeon, I doubt they are strong enough to be a problem to me. Though if they actually died over five hundred years ago, they might be difficult to fight.


    "Whoa, there are lots of theming. Shelia, you ready?"


    "¡­I''ll try to not touch them," Shelia replied.


    Right, they are zombies.


    It wasmonly known that once they bit you, you will be one of them. Not touching them is the best choice when fighting them.


    I can do it easily since I use Victoria as weapon. And as for Victoria herself, I protected her with my Aura.


    But for Shelia, the only way she can defeat them without touching is by shing the air from distance. But this is an enclosed space.


    Although the tree dungeon is huge, the inside is like a maze. It''s quite cramped.


    As for the maze, I can''t see through everything, but enough to see where the dead end I should avoid.


    Will I find treasure chest? It''s been a while since thest time I found a treasure chest inside a dungeon. Thest time was the fis stocking, I guess. And Sophie still wears it from time to time.


    Since I can cut fire now, I don''t need to wear it again. I''m already embarrassed when I remember that time after defeating the Giant Smander, Victoria removed her transformation on my legs so I was seen wearing fis stocking back then. Good thing she didn''t remove the mask.


    I easily defeated the zombies. And Shelia also did well.


    She can control her sh to be as small as possible and only target one enemy at a time. That''s a good control of her power. If Ipared her to back then when she fought Ang, she is much much stronger now.


    Although Ang herself is still getting stronger. I won''t know who will be the winner if they fight again seriously.


    "Oh, there''s a treasure chest! It''s a dead end, but let''s go there!"


    I found a chest after we defeated the group of zombies and move forward for a while.


    There''s a monster guarding the chest, but it''s just an orc. An orc zombie. Still not a challenge to me. I wonder how deep should I go so I can reach advanced level?


    "What''s in it? What''s in it?" Spot asked curiously.


    "Hmm¡­ it''s just a bunch of magic stones. Let''s take them home and share it with the others."


    The inside of the chest are all magic stones used for cultivating. Some of them are the familiar air element. I can make them on my own, so I don''t really need them. though maybe the quality is much better than the ones I made. I''ll just take them home for now.


    "It''s a bit disappointing, but at least we found something. Hopefully, the next chest will give us something better," I said.


    This is one weird dungeon.


    The entrance of the dungeon is close to the ground, and we need to go up to go deeper.


    But, once we enter it all the way up, we need to go down. Deep down to the underground.


    We''re still climbing up, so I don''t know what we could find.


    I can barely see that right under the tree, it''s hollow. Probably that''s where we will go through to enter underground.


    For now, we will explore the dungeon. Going underground can be der. It''s not like we have to finish everything by today.


    "Let''s take our time exploring the dungeon and grab all the treasures. Clearing the dungeon can take time. Even after over five hundred years, there''s nothing happening to the elves'' vige after all," I said.


    "Yeah. I can''t bear to stay here for more than one day. We will leave using portal once we''re done for the day, right?" Shelia asked.


    "¡­" I didn''t answer.


    "I know you''re just teasing me. I won''t fall for that trick!" Shelia proimed.


    I guess she''s not as innocent as she was back when she became my summon. It''s no longer fun to tease her anymore.


    "Today, we will go all the way to the top. We will find a ce that seems to be good for me to mark with a Blobby, and then use portal to go to where Lina is. We''ll go back home together after that," I said.


    Although I look calm on the outside, I''m actually desperate to find a strong monster in this dungeon. I truly hope that I can increase my summoning level in this ce since Monsters World is so big, and I don''t know where to find other strong monsters

 Chapter 381 - Going Down The Tree Dungeon

    We''re back!


    After exploring the dungeon yesterday, we reached the top of the dungeon.


    We can''t go further above unless we destroyed the ceiling, and above us is the ce where I brought Ka and everyone else to rx two days ago.


    I marked the ce with a blobby and left the dungeon.


    And today, I''m back to explore more deeply into the dungeon. We''re going down.


    We can just destroy the dungeon wall and go down directly from outside the dungeon, but this feels more like a dungeon exploration.


    We found more treasure chests yesterday, but most of them are either useless or magic stones. I gave them all to the appraiser to appraise. He''s working hard under Sam that I think he forgot that he''s Albert''s agent.


    "Oh, there are more elf zombies here. Probably theye from the bottom after our fight yesterday," I said.


    "Roy, what do you think about those zombies? I''m asking you because you''re a doctor," Victoria asked curiously.


    "As a doctor, huh?"


    I watched the zombies seriously with my Divine Vision. I''m looking into their bodies.


    As a doctor, I''m also curious about this. How does the dead still able to move? And they also have instinct to attack us as well.


    The inner organs of the zombies are¡­ not moving. Only their body, muscles, and bones. As for their brains, I don''t know if they are still functioning or not. Probably just partially. The part where they allow the zombies to attack us instinctively.


    After watching more, Ie into a conclusion.


    "Yup! It''s magic. They died, and became zombie because of magic. There''s no way the dead can move like that unless it''s magic. Those who died and be a zombie, they are already monster who moves because of magic."


    That''s the answer I can think of.


    I can find out more if I grab them and do some experiment, but I don''t want to do that. Let the dead stay dead. It''s simpler that way.


    "So, they don''t have feelings, right?" Victoria asked.


    "I doubt they have. Why are you so curious?"


    "Well, in my world, there are many movies about zombies. But the actors acting inside the movie never called them as zombies. I don''t know the real reason, but for me, I think that it''s because the story needs the audiences to sympathize with the victim and don''t want to call them zombies," Victoria exined.


    "¡­that''s totally unrted to us. That''s just your world. Though as for me, if I died and be a zombie, but I still regain my feelings, memories, and personality, I want you to call me zombie. It''s simpler that way. Like usual, your world is one who likes toplicate things," I said. She has told me about many situations that actually simple, but the people in her world just makes themplicated. I guess magic makes the differences.


    "Let''s stop the chatter and continue the exploration. I''d like for us to find a strong opponent at least by today," I said.


    Thus, we go deeper into the dungeon. We''re going down now.


    So far, the monsters are about as strong as yesterday. But once we''re close to the ground, the elf zombies are getting stronger and nimbler. Seems like it''s around here where we will encounter older elves who died long time ago.


    "Oh, they are using archery! That''s just like you said, Victoria," I said.


    "Yeah! Elf and archery is a set! Though I don''t know how the elves outside don''t use archery anymore," Victoria replied.


    Both Shelia and I have extraordinary physical capabilities, so dodging the arrow is an easy thing for us to do.


    Seems like not just their instinct as monster appear once they became zombies. They still remember how to use bow and arrows even after they became zombies for a long time already. Or maybe it''s because they have been zombies for a long time that they started to remember to use bow and arrow?


    I looked at the bow and arrows that they are using. They seem to be made of the materials here. From the wall of the dungeon itself, which is actually the trunk of this tree dungeon.


    "Not just remembering how to use bow and arrow, they also remember how to made them. I think we can expect stronger monsters here," I said.


    We''re continuing going down, and as we are supposed to be at the base of the tree, about to go further down, there''s an iing arrow.


    As the arrowe close to me, I grabbed it easily with my hand.


    "Whoa, I didn''t even see the attacker. Let''s move cautiously from now on," I said.


    The one who shot the arrow is too far for my Divine Vision inside this dungeon. That mean the zombie we''re about to face is much more powerful than the previous zombies we fought.


    But that arrow, even if it hits me, it will only scratch me. There''s no killing intent behind the arrow shot. It was just like a greeting to us.


    "Victoria, gun," I said.


    It''s just in case that we got attacked again, I will shoot the attacker at the same time. The enemy this time is one that attack us from distance.


    Elves'' body are much simr to human. As long as I pierced their head with a bullet, they will die. Unlike the werewolves who have thicker skull to protect them.


    I prepared a Blobbygun filled with Blobbybullets in my left hand, and Victokatana on my right. I can use each hand well. It doesn''t matter if I use my right hand or my left hand. I can aim and well and the strength is about the same with each hand.


    I walked in front, while Shelia is behind me.


    As we approached where the attacker shot the arrow, there''s no one here anymore. But another arrow ising and this time, as I watched the arrowing here fast, I shot toward the same direction where the arrowe from while dodging the arrow.


    I don''t know if my shot hit the attacker or not, so I approached the source of the attack as fast as possible. Unfortunately, the attacker has gone. But there''s a trail of blood on the ground. Though after following the trail of blood, it stopped. Seems like the attacker know that I''m following it from its blood, so it covered the wounded area to not let any blood spill.


    "This one¡­ is an expert in sneak attack! And it can see well here. Maybe I should just fight it using Reizpear instead so I can improve my Divine Vision. But an opponent this strong might be the key for me to increase my level. Hmm¡­ what should I do?"


    "Just keep using me. You can find more elf zombiester. Probably. Until your summoning level increased, don''t bother improving your eyesight. Your real enemy is the cult, not a dungeon," Victoria said.


    She''s right. the real enemy is the cult. And I can see them fine as long as they don''t hide deep inside a dungeon. I guess I''ll follow her advice.


    If I want to, I can just hunt All-seeing Eyes more. I have gotten used to fighting them so it''s easy to defeat them.


    The trail of blood stopped, and after we entered deeper under the tree dungeon, there are no more attacks. But there are some stronger opponents this time. The elf zombies here no longer just use bow and arrow. They also used swords or spears.


    I think each one of them are capable of fighting an Orc Emperor alone. But I''m stronger than them after training for so long.


    With the help of Shelia, we defeated the stronger elf zombies in no time. But as we go in deeper, I see there are many elf zombies waiting to ambush us. This time, not just they are stronger. But they are smarter as well. Though they are probably weaker than the one who shot an arrow at me.


    "Shelia, prepare for ambush. Don''t get hit by the arrow. Who knows if we might be one of them if we got hurt?"


    "You think it''s possible for zombies to spread the virus through arrow?" Victoria asked.


    "Probably. And it''s not virus. I think it''s magic. Or maybe it''s a magic virus?" I replied.


    No matter how powerful a virus is, I doubt there''s a virus that can make the deade back to life. But if it''s parasite, it might be possible. Though I didn''t see any one of the zombies infected by a parasite.


    "The smell is getting worse here," Shelia said.


    "They have been corpses since over five hundred years ago. They should have been dposed and be just bones, but I guess being zombies mean their body stop dposing. That''s how the smell got so bad. They have been like this for a long time," I said.


    As we got closer, some elf zombies appear in front of us and shoot their arrows at the same time. But with a swing of Shelia''s w, the arrows can be stopped. Then I run forward and kill the archers.


    The other elf warrior zombies, which I call those who use swords and spears, alsoing at me. But they are no match for us. But it seems like my Experience gone up quite a bit. From defeating them.


    "As expected, the stronger the zombies are, the more Experiences I got," I said.


    Then I hear Victoriaughing. She seems happy.


    "What?" I asked Victoria.


    "Experience. You''re using the term from my world. I''m just happy hearing that," Victoria said.


    "It''s simpler and easier to understand as well. If you have other things that is easier to understand, tell me," I said.


    We continued going down without letting our guards down.

 Chapter 382 - Last Elf Zombie

    We keep going down and finally, we reached a gate. Beyond this gate is a hallway leading deeper down to treasures. After that, it''s dead end


    "Hmm¡­ he''s expecting us," I said.


    "Who?" Shelia asked.


    "There''s an elf zombie inside. He''s waiting for us since a while. It''s the one who shot arrow at us previously. I can see a bullet wound in his arm," I said.


    "Yeah, and I can feel my clone inside the gate," Victoria said.


    Since I used Blobbybullet, Victoria knows the location of where the Blobby is. And its lodged inside the elf zombie''s left arm. I think it will be difficult for him to use his bow anymore.


    Well, that''s if he''s a normal elf. He''s a zombie now. I don''t think he can feel pain anymore.


    "Since he''s been waiting for us¡­ let him wait a little more. We''ll take a rest here. There''s no other zombies nearby, so the smell is not that bad, right?" I asked Shelia.


    "Yes. It''s fine if I take off the mask here," Shelia said. But she didn''t take off her Blobbymask.


    "Let''s just rest and drink some water to hydrate ourselves. I don''t think I can enjoy eating our meal here," I said.


    And so, we wait.


    Of course I still make sure to keep surveince on the elf zombie inside the gate. Since he cane out at his own will.


    This time, the zombie seems to have emotion and intellect. Maybe we canmunicate?


    No, he''s just a zombie. Even if he has emotion and intellect, it''s best to just kill it. And this one is should be the strongest elf zombie in this dungeon. After all, beyond the gate is the deepest area of this dungeon.


    There''s no other monster here, and beyond the gate, there are only treasures other than the elf zombie.


    Yup, I''m going to be rich. I mean richer.


    "Roy, how long should we wait?" Spot asked.


    "What? You can''t stay still for a while longer?" I asked back.


    "The enemy is just one, right? Since there are only zombies in this ce, I can''t eat them. They taste disgusting and poisonous. I''d like to go out of the dungeon and hunt my own food. Just you and Shelia alone are enough to defeat it, right?" Spot said.


    "You might be right. Do you want to leave with portal?"


    "No, I''ll leave on my own. Just use portal if you''re done here," Spot said as he quickly separated from us.


    I don''t think there are any monsters that he will have trouble with, so it''s fine to leave him be.


    As for the elf zombie, he''s already feeling impatient. He''s standing still while tapping his foot on the ground.


    "Shelia, once the zombie makes a move, prepare yourself. We will wait until he opened the gate himself, I will kill him. But if I fail to kill him in one shot, you will do it," I said.


    "Okay. You sure love to do things the easy way, huh?" Shelia said.


    "If you want to fight him, you''re free to do that, you know? I enjoy seeing everyone around me get stronger. And I know how much you love to fight," I said.


    "Yeah, I love fighting. But I prefer to fight an enemy who doesn''t smell as bad as these zombies. Let''s finish it quickly," Shelia said.


    I guess even werewolves have their own preferences. If I don''t take a bath for a year, she might refuse to be near me. Well, that''s impossible. Taking a bath is one way for me to rx. It''s impossible for me to not take a bath for a long time.


    And after waiting for another hour, the elf zombie inside finally makes a move. Since his arm is wounded, he can''t use his bow and use a sword instead.


    "Shelia, he''sing," I said.


    I''m going to kill the elf zombie in one shot. Let''s suppress my killing intent as much as possible.


    And as soon as the elf zombie opened the gate, I run forward and swung Victokatana on the small gap. But the elf zombie has quick reflex, and he stepped back after blocking my sh with his right hand.


    But that''s not over. After I attacked, I kicked the gate open and let Shelia enter to finish the job.


    "Wait! I give up!"


    Suddenly, the zombie surrendered. And Shelia who was about to kill him stopped.


    As for me, well, I''m not going to stop.


    I quickly approached the zombie again to kill it.


    "Please, stop!" the zombie said.


    As if I''m going to stop. But what Shelia told me next makes me no longer want to kill him.


    "Roy, he has simr smell to Tia. Not because he''s an elf, but something simr," Shelia said.


    Hearing that, I quickly change my target.


    As I was about to cut his head, I stopped, and change direction so instead of cutting his head, I will cut his legs instead.


    Now, the elf zombie lost both his legs. Though he''s not dead yet. I mean he''s dead because he''s a zombie, but not dead as in¡­ not moving. I guess that''s the easiest exnation about zombie''s death.


    "You don''t feel pain?" I asked the zombie.


    "Not at all. Though there are still some blood left in my body, so I can still spill some blood," the zombie said.


    Zombie doesn''t feel pain indeed. But with both legs and his right arm gone, he won''t be able to move anyway. His left arm is wounded, but he doesn''t feel pain. Now that I look closely, his wound in his left arm makes it difficult for him to put his strength into his grip. That must be the case.


    Shelia said that he smells slightly simr to Tia. Let''s ask him directly.


    "Do you know Elestias?" I asked.


    "You know my daughter?" the zombie asked back.


    "So you''re indeed Tia''s father. Nice to meet you. I will kill you now," I said.


    "Wait, no! Well, I want to die, but I want to hear more about my daughter first!" the zombie said.


    "She''s fine, and she became my maid''s summoned monster just the other day. Now, die!"


    "Wait! Please exin in detail first!" the zombie said.


    "You''re a pain in the ass. Your daughter is fine, she and the elves are living outside this tree, and she''s going to move with the werewolves soon after I return from here. What do you need to ask?"


    "¡­actually, I have heard everything. I only want you to tell my daughter to leave this ce because we never realized that this huge tree is a dungeon. But since you''ve taken care of that, you can kill me. I don''t want to live another day as zombie," he said.


    "Okay."


    As I raised Victokatana, Victoria transformed into her human form. Now, I can''t kill him.


    "Wait! That''s just weird! Roy, you can bring her here, right? Let''s have her reunited with her father before you kill him!" Victoria suggested.


    "Why should I?"


    "Because he''s just like us. He experienced death. You also have some regrets, right. And I also have many things in my world that I regret. But for him, it''s just meeting with Tia, right? You can do that easily," Victoria said.


    ¡­she''s right.


    Well, it''s not like I had any family or loved ones in the past, but Victoria might have some. She regretted how she can''t say farewell. That''s probably the case with Tia''s father as well.


    Without asking for the zombie''s permission, I quickly opened a gate to Tia''s location. I had her carry one Blobby with her so I can travel to her location easily. Lina should have exined about it to her.


    When I opened the portal, I see Lina and Tia together. Sunny is there as well. Lina probablye to the Monsters World today without me knowing.


    "What is it, Master of Master?" Tia asked.


    Master of Master? I guess that''s how she calls me.


    "Meet your daddy," I said as I stepped aside so the elf zombie can see her. He''s standing on his knee since I cut him below the knees.


    "¡­Elestias. Been a while," Tia''s father said.


    "Father, hello" Tia said.


    ¡­


    "Say something! Why are you two so casual!?" Victoria shouted.


    "Well, it''s not like we have anything to say to each other," Tia said casually.


    "Yeah. And what I want to tell her has already been taken care of," her father said.


    "And what is that?" Tia asked her father.


    "Just for you to move away. Have you prepared everything?"


    "Yeah. And look, she''s my Master! And her other summon is Yellowsun!" Tia proudly introduced Sunny and Lina to her father.


    "Oh, that''s amazing! Please take care of my daughter. Well, I''m going to die again soon. Farewell, my daughter."


    "¡­goodbye, father,"


    ¡­so casual.


    I guess each family are different.


    "Now that you have said your goodbye, it''s time to die," I said.


    "Wait! You''re a summoner, right? Portals, a ck Slime, and a Werewolf. Seems like time has passed for a long time and manymon knowledges during my era has disappear," he said.


    "What about it?"


    "Monsters who fight back will give you more magic to improve your level than those who don''t. Give me my sword," he said.


    Is that the case? I looked at Victoria who shakes her head. Seems like she doesn''t know about it.


    Maybe since I killed most monsters using sneak attacks, makes it harder for me to grow.


    In any case, defeating a zombie who only have one arm left is easy.


    I returned him the sword that he lost after I cut his right arm. He''s grabbing it with his left hand. There''s no power in his grip, but he''s still trying to sh his sword at me.


    I just easily killed him with Victokatana before his attack reach me. So easy.


    The elf zombie died with a smile on his face. As for me¡­


    "Finally! I''m advanced level summoner!"


    I don''t know if it''s because he fought back, but in any case, I finally reached my first goal for this training.. Now I can proceed to the second goal, which is getting a powerful monster to make a contract with.

 Chapter 383 - Thats Kayla With Wings!

    Alright, that was an anticlimactic end for a dungeon exploration. But at least we get the treasures. And I have leveled up now!


    On the portal that I haven''t closed yet, Shelia entered it and go to the other side where Lina is. As for me, I''m taking all the treasures and put them in our storage room for Jeremy to appraiseter.


    If I can''t use any of them, and no other members of our n want them, they will be sold.


    Now, I need to think of a good monster to be made as my next summoned monster. But I guess I''ll rest for now.


    Since the portal to where Lina is hasn''t been closed, I entered there.


    "How''s Tia?" I asked Lina about Tia''s condition after seeing his father.


    "Perfectly normal. Well, her father supposed to be dead a long time ago. She was a bit surprised at first seeing her father zombified, but she''s back to normal now," Lina said.


    Just watching their interaction previously makes me think that the two are strangers. The two acted very casually to each other even though one of them is a zombie.


    Oh, right! I forgot to ask the elf zombie how he regain his memory. Well, he''s dead now for the second time. I guess I will never know.


    "Tia, here''s the sword and bow that your dead father used. Do you want them?" I asked Tia.


    After putting all the treasures at the end of the dungeon, I grabbed the elf zombie''s equipment including the sword and the bow. I don''t think Tia can use them, but maybe she will keep them as keepsakes.


    "Hmm¡­ I''m not a warrior, but I know that these weapons are in terrible shape. Even the ones that my father left behind the first time he died are still better," Tia said.


    "Then we don''t need them."


    I decisively destroyed the sword and bow. There''s no one who needs them. Everyone has magic.


    And even if they can''t use magic, I gave everyone a small dagger for their safety. They are much better than handing them sword since they are amateur.


    Except for Ka. She can use rapier. Though she doesn''t need to carry one since she has that wand that can help her control earth easily.


    Now what? Oh, right! Spot!


    I was about to open a portal to call Spot, but I spotted him approaching from the sky. He''s camouged, so no one other than me can see him.


    As soon as he got close to us, he undid his camouge skill and let himself be shown.


    The elves who are not used to that sight were surprised, but since it''s not their first-time seeing Spot, they return back to normal rather quickly. Though some of them are still looking at Spot''s majestic size.


    "Hey, Roy! You done over there?" Spot asked.


    "Yeah. I was just about to get you," I replied.


    "I was about to enter the dungeon again, but I smelled you here. By the way, how is it? Did your level raised?"


    "Yeah. Now, I need to find another monster. Though I will rest for a while before that."


    "Oh, about that, you don''t need to look for them. I just found where they are. Do you remember the monster I suggested to you?" Spot asked.


    The monster he suggested? Oh, right!


    Back then, I asked him if he wants to be my next summoned monster once I leveled up. But he rejected that idea since it will be more advantageous for me to get another monster since he''s pretty loyal to me.


    And the one he suggested was an Archangel.


    "It was an Archangel, right? A type of monster unrted to a god. Though they have been rted to god by many religions," I said.


    "Yes. I don''t know about that, but it was indeed an Archangel. And I found the Angel''s Sanctuary in the sky just now. No one noticed me, but I immediately return here to report. Once you are ready, let''s go there," Spot suggested.


    "Oh, really!? Are they strong? And what is the difference between Angel and Archangel?" I asked.


    "I don''t know how strong they are, but at least from what I heard in the past, they are capable fighters. And they can use light magic, healing, and they can fly with their wings," Spot said.


    "That''s Ka with wings!" I said.


    "Maybe you''re right. She''s the closest one with the definition of Angel," Spot said.


    I already have Ka, but do I need another one?


    A monster that will follow my order, can heal me and can use light magic. But Spot said that they are capable fighters. I''m interested.


    If there''s a hierarchy like the werewolves, and I can make a contract with their leader, I think that would be great.


    Not just I am the Werewolf King, I will also be the Angel King. That sounds weird.


    "As for the differences between Angel and Archangel¡­ I don''t know. But at least the Archangel is more superior than Angel. That''s all I know. If you want to know more about them, let''s visit them soon," Spot said.


    "Yeah, let''s do that next week. I have fought the zombies too much I want to rx for a while. And during that time, I will also help the elves to move to the werewolves'' settlement and introduce them to each other. Tia, is everyone ready to move?" I asked Tia.


    "We''ll be ready soon. I have informed everyone that we''re going to move because of the dungeon and our great Yellowsun¡ª"


    "She''s not yours. She''s Lina''s," I interrupted her.


    "¡­right. We are currently collecting all kind of seeds so we can farm them. With the help of the Great Yellowsun, I think it would be easy to make a forest over there," Tia said.


    Sunny can help them grow a forest? I''m interested. I want to see Sunny''s other abilities as well. Maybe I should bring everyone over to introduce them.


    Should I bring Albert as well? I''ll ask himter.


    "Alright, I''m going home now. Lina, how about you?" I asked.


    "I''ll go home on my ownter," Lina replied.


    "Then, see youter."


    I left Lina behind in Monsters World with Sunny and Tia as we entered the portal.


    "Oh, Roy! You''re home?" Sophie asked.


    "Yeah, I''m back. I''m an advanced level mage now!" I said happily.


    "Congrattion! Have you thought of a monster to help you next?" she asked.


    "There''s a candidate, but I''ll take a break now. I''m going to get the elves and the werewolves get along. Only after everything has been taken care of, I will leave again. I hope nothing dangerous will happen," I said.


    "So, what''s the candidate monster?"


    "An Archangel," I replied.


    "How do they look like?" Sophie asked.


    "Spot said that they are humanoid, simr to us, but with wings. They are also capable fighters, can use healing magic and light magic. Basically, it''s Ka with wings," I said.


    "You called?"


    Just as I said that an archangel is simr to Ka, the person herself ising down from upstairs to greet me.


    "I''m home," I said.


    "Wee home. Did you just say anything about me?" Ka asked.


    "It''s about my next monster candidate. I said that an Archangel is simr to you. Capable fighters, and can use healing and light element magic. But with wings," I exined again.


    "But they are monsters, right? They could be as old as Spot or Victoria. If you have an archangel as your next summon, then I might be able to ask them how to improve my healing and light element," Ka said seriously.


    As expected of Ka! Her desire to learn is truly something.


    If she can learn a lot from archangel, she can get even stronger. Though I need to make a contract with one first.


    That mean I have to try meeting them first. I hope they are willingly going to be my contracted monster. That way, I won''t have any problem like getting involved in a battle I don''t want to be a part of.


    "When are you going to meet them? Tomorrow?" Ka asked.


    "No. I will move the elves to the werewolves'' settlement tomorrow. Probably might need to take a few days. Wannae and watch them grow a forest?" I invited Ka and Sophie. Of course I will ask everyone as well.


    "Sure! I''m interested in their nt magic as well. And I haven''t seen Sunny''s giant size. I want to see that if possible," Sophie replied.


    "I''lle as well. Tomorrow is Sunday and there''s no ss," Ka said.


    Oh, so today is Saturday? I never cared about what day it is when I''m in Monsters World.


    In fact, I never cared about the day. I only care about them when I was teaching. After that, there''s no point in remembering what day today is.


    Good thing all the restaurants I love to visit open every day.

 Chapter 384 - Im The King Of (not) All Monsters

    "What are you going to do now?" Sophie asked.


    "I''ll inform Albert and the other kings that I got the greatest farmers under me. Well, technically, they''re Lina''s. But I''m Lina''s master. I''ll rest for a while and then I will probably be called by Albert to meet him soon," I said.


    I told the two to inform everyone else that they''re going to meet the elves tomorrow, and I informed Sonia to tell the other kings.


    With how big thend in Monsters World, this mean I can have unlimited supply of crops. Hopefully.


    And just as expected, Sonia returns and telling me to meet them all. As for the location, let''s do it here.


    Since they said to meet them as soon as possible, that mean they are currently free and should be in a good ce where no one else can see them. A ce where it should be fine if I open the portals to.


    There''s an empty room that I prepared in our base for this asion, so let''s open the portal from there.


    "Hey! Been a while. Since that day on top of the tree. Wait, that was just two days ago. Or was it three?" I greeted everyone.


    The onesing from the capital are Albert, Marie, and also Shirley and Ang as well. The two must be visiting Albert when Sonia visited.


    From Arturo, it''s Harold, Carmen, Fabio, Luna, and one other man. I remember him being the fake guard. He''s Roberto. The one who got reced by the cult and have to stay in hiding in Bernard''s mansion.


    From Varadis, it''s old man Hendry and her expert level mage daughter, Julia. Now that I think about it, this is the first time for Roberto and Julia toe here.


    From Consenza, it''s Lynn, udia, and Celestine. And as soon as she arrives here, Celestine quickly leaves to meet the orphans.


    "Tell us about the elves," Albert said.


    "The current elves are weak and cowards. They don''t have warriors in their rank. But their nt magic is amazing. It can help grow any kind of nts. Tomorrow, I will have them moved to the werewolves'' settlement."


    Then, I also exined to them about how the queen of the elves ended up bing Lina''s contracted monster. It was mainly because of Sunny. And we will also probably watch Sunny helps the elves in growing a forest near the werewolves'' settlement.


    "¡­you''ve got powerful allies with you. The military strength of the werewolves, and the farming skill of the elves," Albert said.


    For the two newbies who don''t know much about me, Roberto and Julia, they can''t contain their shock after hearing what I did. I''m now as strong as a country. A small country.


    "Wait until I got my next summon. I think I have a good candidate," I said.


    "Yeah, good luck with that," Albert said.


    "Wait, you''re not curious about the candidate?"


    "Nope. Just tell me after you got it," Albert said.


    Well, it''s also not confirmed that I will be able to get an archangel to be my contracted monster. I just know their whereabouts from Spot.


    "So, I''m going to move the elves tomorrow. Anyone wants to meet them?"


    The four kings raised their hands. I guess that''s to be expected.


    And for the two who are unused to this situation, they think that it was weird to see the four leaders of each country are raising their hands because of amoner.


    After that, everyone also follow suit. I guess I''ll be taking everyone then.


    I think it''s fine. I doubt any of the werewolves or elves wanted to cause trouble with me.


    After confirming everyone''s agreement, they return back to their own home. Except for Ang and Shirley who chose to stay. And Luna and Carmen are staying as well.


    As for Celestine, she''s still with the orphans. I guess I''ll take her with us tomorrow.


    The next day, I had everyone wait in the werewolves'' settlement. I have returned Shelia here yesterday to inform all the werewolves that the elves areing. And they easily agreed to it.


    "You''re our king after all. And we promised that you will stay as the king until that evil cult is fully destroyed. As for me, even if you''re no longer the king, I will still be your contracted monster," Shelia said.


    "¡­that''s nice. To have everyone loyal to you because you''re their king. I''m a king myself, but my own son nned to steal the throne from me," old man Henry sighed.


    "Seems like we need to learn a thing or two from the youngest king here," Harold said.


    Old man had his kingdom nearly taken by the cult, while Harold''s kingdom is already taken. It happens because they trust the wrong person. And mostly because of the cult''s trickery.


    As for me, I don''t have any human calling me their king. They are all monster with different mindset than humans. And the two species, the werewolves and the elves, put their trust in someone at the top of the hierarchy.


    The werewolves decided their king by strength. I was quite lucky to win against Grandpa Werewolf and make the werewolves promise to not fight for the title unless the cult is destroyed. And even if we failed to destroy the cult before I die, their lifespan is longer than human''s. They can take care of themselves once I die. Shelia and Red are two reliable werewolves and can take care of their kind.


    As for the elves, they believe in the High Elf, Tia. And they are all worshipping Sunny, who is Lina''s monster. And I''m Lina''s Master. Which mean they are loyal to me as long as Lina calls me her Master.


    That''s why I don''t have to worry about being betrayed.


    Oh, right! Spot''s as well!


    His children are taking care of the sea in human''s world.


    I''m truly the king of monsters! Well, not all monsters.


    Then, I opened a portal to where the elves are. Lina is there with Sunny, Tia, and other elves.


    They entered the portal and see the ce that will be their home from now on.


    "Elves, my name is Roy. I''m the Werewolf King even though I''m a human. This will be your home from now on. This is Shelia, some of you should have known her. She''s my contracted monster and the strongest werewolf at the moment. And that one is Red. He''s the representative of the werewolves since I''m busy in humans'' world."


    I introduced Tia to the two most important monsters first for her. I hope nothing bad will happen between the two races.


    "Nice to meet everyone. I''m Elestias. A High Elf. We elves have no military strength other than our nt magic, so I hope we will get along well from now on," Tia said.


    Having the Werewolves protecting them is what they want. I hope they will get along. I have suggested some things to Red so the two races can live together in peace.


    "And then these people are my trustedrades. Members of my ns, and kings of the four kingdoms in my world."


    Then, I introduced Tia to Albert and other kings. And everyone other than Albert also haven''t meet the werewolves as well, so I introduced them to the werewolves.


    "Alright, can you really build a forest?" I asked Tia after everyone has introduced themselves.


    "Yes. With the help of the Great Yellowsun, it should be done soon. The Great Yellowsun is still getting used to her new power, so it might take two days to finish," Tia said.


    "Two days is still too fast! But that''s great! Can you do it now?"


    Tia nodded. And then, Red lead the way to where the elves will build a forest at. It''s just two kilometers from where the Werewolves are.


    I told him to create a gap between the two races because it''s impossible for them to live in harmony right away. As for the border, I will ask Celestine to build a meeting ce. Not just for the two races, but also for us in case we can''t hold a meeting in humans'' world.


    Just outside of the werewolves'' settlement, it was like a wastnd. There''s nothing here.


    Can the elves really build a forest in this ce?


    Tia and the other elves then discussed something. Then those elves started running around and spreading seeds all over the ce.


    "Master of Master, we need water. Is there a river orke nearby?"


    Tia asked me, but I don''t know since I also never seen a river here. I asked Red instead.


    "There''s a huge oasis over there. And since we have good physical ability, it''s no problem for us to go there every day for water," Red exined as he pointed where theke is.


    "Hmm¡­ we might need to change our location then¡­" Tia said.


    But I have a suggestion.


    "Wait! Carmen, if we create a path from theke, you can use your water magic to increase the amount of water, right? And it can be a river. And with Celestine and other earth mages, we can have theke raised into a mountain. That way, you can have watering down and you don''t need to go far just to fetch water. Let''s try that first," I suggested.


    We''re going to change thendscape here. Rather than destroying, we''re building something. Isn''t that amazing?


    This mean the building of the forest will be dyed.. But no one have any problem with that, so it''s fine.

 Chapter 385 - Creating A Forest

    And so, I brought Celestine, Ka, Ang, and Carmen to where theke is. We''re going to make a mountain and river.


    Is it possible? Well, it''s magic after all.


    And with Ka''s wand, it should be doable.


    "So, that''s theke. It''s big, but not as big as theke I trained in before," I said while we are on Spot''s back flying to theke.


    As for the settlement, I left the other kings to watch how the elves work and get to know with the elves and the werewolves. They need to know who the monsters that will be our allies against the cult. And there might be more!


    "So, how will we make the river?" Ang asked.


    "For a river, the water needs to flow from a higher ce, to a lower terrain. We might need to make a smallketer for the end of the river. Theke this size should contain a lot of water, but we don''t know if they wille endlessly or not. And we need to see whether the water is safe to be drunk or not," Ka said.


    Well, she''s smart as usual. Now, we can have a n. To make a small river that ends on an artificialke.


    "How about making the elves move over here instead? That will be easier, right?" Ang asked.


    It''s rare for someone like Ang to ask a smart question. Is she getting smarter as well?


    "They said that their safety is the most important thing for them. That''s why they need the Werewolves. As for the Werewolves, if I told them to move, they will move. But if I said that we have to move because of the elves, the werewolves will think that the elves are too cocky to ask their king to do what they want," I exined.


    "Being a king is difficult, isn''t it?" Ang said.


    "Yes, it is. Ka, what should we do first? Raise a mountain, creating a path for the river, or creating artificialke for the end of the river?" I asked Ka, our strategist this time.


    "We''ll see first if the water in theke is safe for consumption. Carmen, can you do it?" Ka asked Carmen.


    "Yes. I can tell if any water is safe to drink or not," Carmen said.


    Really? Being a water mage is really convenient, isn''t it? if her drinks are poisoned, she can tell and won''t drink it. And she can also create her own water. I''m so jealous.


    Oh, wait. I''m jealous of mage of other elements as well. Well, let''s forget about it.


    After arriving at theke, Carmen checked if the water is safe, and it is.


    It''s not just Carmen who can do it. Spot can tell if the water is safe to drink or not as well. Though the werewolves have been drinking water from thatke for centuries. It should be fine.


    As for the monsters inside theke, I don''t think any of them are a big problem. I guess it''s safe.


    And then, we flew on Spot''s back to a good location where the river should end. Ka decided it to be right in the middle of where the elves will build the forest.


    I guess that''s a good idea. Let''s ask Tia about it.


    But the fact that Ka never doubted that we can build a mountain, a river, and ake is pretty amazing. She must have thought of a good n to do it.


    To think that there will be a day where I will build a forest, a mountain, ake, and a river¡­ I''m surrounded by amazing people, aren''t I?


    "Oh, that would be a good idea. We have some nt seeds useful for theke as well," Tia said.


    I guess that''s decided. Theke will be where the border between the elves vige and the werewolves'' settlement is.


    As for the meeting ce, we will build it next to theke.


    "Alright, let''s do it!" I shouted in excitement.


    "Ah, Roy! You don''t need to help us. We can do everything with magic," Ka said.


    ¡­ I''m a sad man now.


    She''s right though. They can just travel with Spot. And they don''t need me to carry anything since Ka''s wand is extremely useful here with not having the user to feel the weight of the soil they are carrying.


    And she refused me when I said I can help with the portal. She says that it''s a training.


    Ka goes to where the artificialke will be made, and with the help of Ang and Celestine, she made a giant robot even bigger than that time she fought Ang with. That robot will be used to make the mountain.


    There''s some part of the robot that was made by a huge stone. Well, a mountain can''t be made with just soil.


    But how will they raise ake?


    Each time the giant robot arrives at theke, our earth mages raised the ground little by little. And Carmen helped to raise theke as well.


    And there''s nothing I can do, so I just watch the progress.


    It''s been a week since then, and the mountain, river, andke are finished. Now, we just need to open a path from theke so the water can flow in the river.


    And so, the kings take another day off to watch the creation of the river. We are all riding on Spot''s back. Except for the werewolves and the elves who are waiting at the artificialke. They have be closer over the past week.


    We arrived at the mountain, and see at the end of the river, there''s a wall blocking the water from theke to enter the river. We just need to destroy it.


    I jumped from Spot''s back carrying Ka who will do the honor of opening the path.


    With her earth magic, the wall sunk and the water flow into the river. I quickly carried Ka back to ride Spot again.


    "Let''s chase the water!" Spot said excitedly.


    We not only raised theke. We had Carmen to increase the volume of water little by little every day, so even after the water flow into the river, theke won''t dry and still have a lot of water left.


    Spot flew as fast as the watering down. We above just watched the beauty of a river we just created.


    Finally, as the water reached theke, everyone cheered in unison. Both elves, werewolves, and humans as well.


    "Now, we can build a forest!" Tia eximed.


    Wee down from the sky and watched how the elves and Sunny create the forest.


    Sunny turns into a giant in the middle of where the forest will be, and she¡­ absorbing power from the sun, I guess?


    The elves then started chanting some unknownnguage, which is probably the source of their nt magic. And soon enough, the wastnd suddenly changed into a grasnd. And seeds started sprouting, and slowly growing into a tree.


    That''s amazing. Although I''m not a farmer, I don''t think the soil here was supposed to be a good ce for forest to grow. But the elves changed that with their magic.


    And then, after Sunny absorbed enough power from the sun, Sunny faced down to the newly made grasnd, and turns bright as she''s sending the power of the sun. Or at least that''s what I think.


    The sprouts'' growth then elerated, and be trees. One meter, two meters, and they stopped at three meters of height.


    "I think that''s the limit of the Great Yellowsun can do at the moment. But this should be enough for us to live in," Tia said.


    "THAT WAS AMAZING! YOU CREATED A FOREST OUT OF NOWHERE!" Jewel shouted.


    Well, this is truly an amazing experience, so I will let her be. She''s allowed to scream for now.


    "It''s done already?" I asked Tia.


    "Not yet. The trees are still unable to bear fruits yet. They need to grow more. Maybe we need the Great Yellowsun''s help one more time so the trees are fully matured. Only then, we can use our nt magic to grow some fruits. The one we used previously are only to make the trees grow faster, not to make them bear fruits," Tia exined.


    I guess there are other nt magic that the elves can do.


    At least witnessing this amazing event is great to show what the elves can do. We have witnessed how easy it is for them to grow crops.


    As of now, building their homese first.


    "I guess that''s it. Tomorrow, Spot, Victoria, and I will visit the angels. Shelia will stay here with the werewolves and the elves. I will summon you when I need you," I said.


    "Okay," Shelia replied.


    "The kings will go back to their own homes. As for everyone else¡­ you can do whatever you want. Lina cane and go to this ce whenever she wants. If any of you want toe, just ask Lina. I will be busy," I said.


    Let''s go greet the angels, shall we?

 Chapter 386 - Searching For The Angels

    The day after we see the amazing nt magic, I returned to Monsters World. I see that the forest has grown more than yesterday.


    I also saw Lina and Sunny here. Theye here early in the morning.


    "Lina, how is it?" I asked.


    "The forest ispleted. Now, the elves are building their homes above the trees. The werewolves are watching with interest," Lina said.


    "Is there any conflict between the elves and the werewolves?" I asked again.


    "I don''t think there''s any. But if you want to know more, you can ask Tia or Shelia," Lina replied.


    The elf and werewolf that Lina mentioned are discussing something along with Red who is listening. The three of them are deep in thought.


    "What''s wrong?" I asked.


    "King. It''s like this, the elves are here because they want protection. But I don''t think that it''s fair for them to not give us anything. That''s why we''re discussing about what they can give us. We are too different after all," Red said.


    "What about vegetables? You werewolves have started eating fruits and vegetables, right? Not just meat?" I asked.


    "¡­"


    Red didn''t answer.


    "¡­don''t tell me that you only eat them whenever I bring some with me?" I asked.


    "I guess that''s settled. In exchange for fruits and vegetables, preferably sweet ones, we will protect the elves," Red said.


    Eat your veggies!


    Well, they are supposed to be carnivores after all. They are part wolf.


    It was me who introduced them to vegetables. They are all cooked and seasoned, so they taste better. Maybe I should ask Lina to teach some of the monsters here to cook.


    But I think sweet fruits suit their tastes


    Since the exchange is done, I bid my farewell as I ride on Spot''s back to the sky.


    "So, where are we going?" I asked Spot who knows the direction.


    "To the sky," Spot replied.


    "Yeah, I can tell that we''re flying. But which part of the sky?"


    As we are in the sky, far higher than the ground, I can''t even see the ground with my Divine Vision. So, there''s nondmark that can tell me where we are. Or since we''re in the sky, it should be called skymark?


    Clouds are moving and changing, so they can''t be used as a mark. And so is the sun.


    Maybe the easiest way to tell is to drop from here to the ground, and go up vertically.


    "The ce where the angels reside is called Angels'' Sanctuary. It''s some kind of civilization above the sky. They have nond, but they can stay in a certain cloud that even we can walk on. It''s a rare cloud that only exist in this world. At least I haven''t found any cloud I can ride in your world," Spot exined.


    "Wait, if it''s a cloud, then it should be moving, right? It won''t stay in one spot?" I asked.


    "Most likely. That''s why I only fly to where I found it previously. After that, we need luck to find it again," Spot said calmly.


    So, it won''t stay in the same spot. I thought that we can finish it in one day, but I guess I still underestimate the weird things in Monsters World.


    "Well, we can take our time for now. We still have few months left before the tournament begins," I said.


    "You won''t participate in the tournament? What a shame¡­" Spot said.


    "I''ll be busy cleaning up the cult. They will attack at that time. Though I also don''t want to participate anyway."


    And after the tournament¡­ there''s a high possibility that the archbishop and the one they call as their god will act. And the real war will most likely happen since I have busted most of their ns without them knowing that it''s my fault.


    Maybe we shouldn''t have introduced the tournament this soon when our strongest trump cards are the four expert level mages we have. Celestine the earth element mage, Veronica the wind element mage, Julia the fire element mage, and Carmen the water element mage. Only those four are expert level mages.


    But at least we have knowledge from the future. If we wait longer, someone who have discovered those knowledges in my previous life, might have spread those knowledges to the cult and they will be stronger than they are now.


    Even now, some of us who are still advanced level mages, are capable of defeating several expert level mages.


    If they have the same knowledges, our advantages will be gone. It''s best to destroy them before they know about such knowledges and be stronger.


    It has been several hours since we start taking off, but we haven''t found any clues of where the Sanctuary is. And there''s no Angels on sight at all. Though we have to defeat several flying monsters, but they are not a problem to us.


    During that time, I used my Divine Vision the whole time. And it''s been over ten hours, so my eyes are tired.


    "Spot, let''s descend here and mark the ground. We''ll go again next time. I don''t think my eyes can take it anymore. I need some rest," I said.


    If I move my body for hours, I still don''t need rest and can still move well. But this is the first time I used Divine Vision for so long. I just realized again the weakness of Divine Vision. It took too much of my concentration. Although my body is still fine, my mind is tired from seeing too much information.


    "Okay. I''ll find a goodndmark for you to mark with Victoria''s clone. We will continue our search next time," Spot said.


    After that, Spot is descending vertically with his head facing the ground. I''m fine since I can use Aura to stick my feet to Spot''s body so I won''t fall. Good thing I''m alone. Victoria doesn''t count as she''s stuck on to me.


    I''d like to go home right away, but I never thought that the ground down there to be filled with monsters. Insect type monsters. And a lot of them!


    "So¡­ should we find a better spot, or defeat those monsters first and mark this ce to return here next time? I might need to take a day rest," I asked Spot.


    "I''ll just defeat them with my breath," Spot said.


    And then, Spot stopped descending and took a deep breath. He then used his non-elemental magic breath to destroy the¡­ not just the monsters, but thendmark as well.


    ¡­at least we have a clearndmark here now.


    ...¡­..


    Somewhere in human world, in a certainboratory, someone from the higher ups of the cult, the researcher, received a surprising report from one of his subordinates.


    This event happened few months ago


    "¡­is this real? The ck Slime''s summoner is still alive? And he discovered a way to fight using air element magic?" the researcher asked his subordinate.


    "Yes. It was a report from someone who watched the final match. I heard of this when I reported about my job to the archbishop. Someone mentioned it to the archbishop about the tournament. Since you mentioned about this ck Slime summoner before, I thought that you might be interested in him," the subordinate said.


    The researcher was the one who got himself infected by a clone of a ck Slime, and be unable to get tired, or need to consume water or food anymore.


    "I see, I see¡­ he''s interesting. If he could survive the stampede, and be acquainted with the strongest mages in that stupid tournament, he might be something. Since he''s still alive, that means he still have the ck Slime with him. Well, I don''t care about those advanced level mages. Bring him to me. I will have him create as many clones as possible and creates my own immortal army!" the researcher said.


    "Should we use force on him? Or do we need to ask him nicely?" the subordinate asked.


    "Ask him nicely first. And promise him a good reward. He might be interested in the reward. Just tell him¡­ that you will give him something really expensive and rare. Whatever it is, I don''t care since we won''t be giving it to him. If he refuses, you can take him by force. It should be easy. His air magic shouldn''t be that powerful against you who have ascended to master level. In case you can''t capture him, which should be impossible, just kill him. I just need the ck Slime," the researcher said.


    "¡­am I really as strong as master level mage?"


    "No. Butpared to expert level mages, you are far stronger. With my research, I made you a master level mage artificially. You can''t grow stronger, but you should be stronger than those people. Even if they have an expert level mage protecting him, you can kill them all easily! Go and bring the ck Slime to me! Once you do, you will be immortal as I am!"


    The subordinate then left theb.


    Just as the researcher said, the subordinate is a master level mage. But it was made artificially through research and experiment.


    And that one subordinate is the only one who was a sessful experiment. The researcher made that experiment as his subordinate. He used brainwashing magic to make that experiment loyal to him.


    And with that, danger is approaching Roy.. He doesn''t know that just by taking a break for one day in their search will turns out into him meeting his strongest opponent so far.

 Chapter 387 - Dangerous Person

    Today is a rest day. Yesterday, I have been using my Divine Vision for a long time and it''s straining my eyes. That''s why I choose to rest today.


    Tomorrow, we will return searching for the Angels'' Sanctuary in the sky again. But next time, I won''t keep using my Divine Vision too much. Probably just enough to see farther than average people''s vision.


    Or maybe I''ll just trust Spot to find it by himself. I should have asked him to look for it today.


    Well, he seems happy devouring the foods Lina cooked today. I guess today''s rest is necessary for him as well.


    He might not show it, but I think Spot is tired after helping us building a mountain, river, andke.


    As for Lina, she is introducing Tia to our world. Of course, we make sure that she''s covering her long ears to not gain attention. And Shelia is with her.


    The two are humanoid monsters who can mingle with humans. And Shelia loves to walk around as well.


    It should be fine since Lina and Sophie are with them. And our n is popr enough that no idiots dare to pick a fight against us.


    ¡­but even though I''m the leader of the n, I''m the least popr among them. Even our other male member, Kron, is more popr.


    Well, that is fine.


    Today, I''ll just rest here in the base. The kids are ying outside along with some members of the n. The only ones in the building other than me are Victoria and Spot, who seems to always be by my side, and Veronica.


    After knowing her better, I realized that Veronica is an introvert. Rather than going outside, she prefers to stay at home and reading books. That''s why since the others are with the kids, she''s staying inside to read books. I just hope it''s not any kind of book that Victoria wrote.


    As I also have nothing to do, I spent the day reading books as well.


    What? I''m quite a studious man, you know? I''m a doctor after all.


    What I''m reading was medical books, essays, and records that I received from the hospital where I taught the doctors about future medical knowledges. These stuffs are not something that I should be able to get, but because of my status now, I can read it.


    I''m interested because some of them are rted to the knowledge from the future that has been spread. If what''s written is true, it will help with the doctors in this time. If there''s some mistake, I can fix it. If it''s totally wrong, I rip them apart. There''s no need for anyone to read such nonsense.


    But if there''s something I don''t know about, I just keep it in my mind and ask for other doctors'' help to see if it''s true or not. Who knows how many people can be saved if it''s true?


    Victoria is also reading with us. As for Spot, he''s sleeping around my waist. Somehow, he''sfortable staying there.


    We were just reading in silent, when I suddenly feel a chill.


    It''s not cold, so I don''t know why I feel chilly.


    Although I was supposed to be resting and not using my Divine Vision for today, I had no choice but to use it. I feel like my life is in danger.


    Is it because I''m an Aura user that I realize something is happening? Or is it because I have gone through so many experiences? I don''t know. I just feel like something is targeting me.


    And then, as I look further outside of the city, I see someone walking casually outside the city. It''s a girl. With a mohawk hairstyle. Shaved clean on the side, and raising in the middle. Weird.


    But I can feel that she''s the source of my uneasiness. I don''t think it''s the mohawk.


    When I moved my eyes toward her direction, even though I don''t need to, that mohawk girl suddenly looked at me!


    I was frozen on the spot. This girl is dangerous!


    "Roy, what''s wrong?" Victoria asked.


    Seems like I worried them too much that both Victoria and Veronica stopped reading, and Spot woke up from my uneasiness.


    What should I say? That I''m afraid of a girl with mohawk? Let''s ask Veronica just in case.


    "Veronica! Mohawk! Girl! Mohawk! Dangerous!" I said.


    "A girl with mohawk? Don''t tell me¡­!"


    "You know her?!" I asked.


    "There''s someone in high position in the cult, only lower than the archbishop. No one knows his name, but we just call him Professor. He always had this one subordinate, a girl with mohawk, to do everything he asked for. Even though I''m an expert level mage, I always afraid of her. Although she has presence like the archbishop, she seems weaker. But she feels much stronger than me," Veronica said.


    "You mean she''s member of the cult and she''s most likely a master level mage!? And she''sing here!?"


    Why is sheing here? That Professor Veronica talked about is giving her an order? What''s the order?


    Most likely, it was the result of the tournament. But if it''s because of the tournament, she should be targeting Ang first. But I never heard of her being targeted.


    Is it Ka? She''s the runner up, so it''s unlikely for her to be the target because of the tournament. Ang is more dangerous for the cult than Ka at this moment.


    And targeting Ang should be better for the enemy since she''s close with the princess, Shirley.


    I guess it''s not about the tournament.


    Then, the other reason is that they found out about Veronica and Celestine.


    Since Celestine is in the empire, it''s Veronica they are targeting. But I doubt they have evidence of Veronica being here.


    That means, it''s just a personal errand. That Professor is aiming something that can be found here.


    For now, it''s best to get everyone to safety.


    "Sonia, go get the others!" I ordered Sonia.


    As Veronica is getting ready, I grabbed something from the storage.


    It''s a Broadcasting Camera. A magic item that Marie invented with the help of Victoria. It will allow what it seen to be broadcasted to TVs.


    It won''t be seen from the screen in Melk, but for the four kings, they can see what the camera sees.


    "What are you going to use that for?" Victoria asked.


    "She''s a master level mage. I will approach her and ask her why she''sing here for. There might be battle, so I will let the others to watch how powerful a master level mage is. Though I hope she''s not that strong," I said.


    "You''re going to challenge her!?" Spot asked.


    "Most likely. Among everyone here, only I can act fast enough to retreat if something happened. And if I think that we have a chance if I put everyone together against her, then I can just have everyone help me," I said as I put the camera on my chest. I used Blobbies to hold the camera there.


    It''s good that the camera is small in size. It won''t be suspicious like this.


    After everyone returns, I told them about the mohawk girl and transport them to safety. To Albert''s pce. I had Sonia inform the kings as well. They will see what happen on TV.


    "Are you sure you can do it alone?" Sophie asked worriedly.


    "No. Because I almost never been alone. Victoria, Spot, and also Shelia will be with me if the battle happens. And I had Veronica toe save me after a certain time passed. I''m not confident in winning, but I''m at least confident in retreating," I said.


    The n is that I will confront the woman with Victoria and Spot hidden around my body. Then, if the battle truly happens, I will summon Shelia to help me. And then Veronica will help me after fifteen minutes passed, or she judged that I''m in trouble. She will be watching it from the TV we had in our base.


    "Understood. If it bes too dangerous, just retreat. If you think we can defeat her with everyone, prepare a portal and we will help you. Keep the camera with you. If you need anything, just say it out loud. And we will send you messages through Sonia. She will stay invisible next to you," Ka said.


    As expected, she already has a n.


    "Alright, now, you go," I said to them to let them go to Albert''s pce.


    As for the kids and orphans, I transported them to my mansion in the capital after putting them to sleep so they won''t get panicked. Ruby and Ian will take care of them.


    "I''m leaving now!" I said.


    "Be careful. She has been sent to many difficult missions, and she returned alive. Even to a mission that Celestine and I reluctant to take despite us being expert level mages. That just shows how powerful she is," Veronica warned me.


    "Understood. If I choose to escape before you have your turn, destroy everything here before escaping yourself. We don''t want the cult to find any evidences of us here," I said.


    I''m sweating right now. Just the thought that I might fighting a master level mage makes me afraid.


    When was thest time I was this afraid? I don''t remember.


    Does that mean I''m strong? Maybe.


    But I doubt just being strong is enough to defeat Mohawk.


    Well, maybe everything is just my imagination. Mohawk is here just by chance and not for any mission. I hope that''s the case.


    But the fact that she''s ring at me even though I''m far away and using Divine Vision scares me so much.


    I hope I''m just overthinking it.

 Chapter 388 - Meeting The Mohawk Girl

    "Roy, if that person is really a master level mage, then I can''t hide from her even if I am invisible. Just expert level mages are enough to be able to sense my presence," Sonia said as we were preparing ourselves.


    "Then, we have two options. You will pretend that you''re a wild monster sticking to me, or I''ll pretend that I''m a tamer and you''re my tamed monster," I said.


    "Or maybe you can just pretend that you are possessing Roy''s body. You''re a ghost, so if you''re possessing someone, it won''t be too suspicious," Victoria said.


    She''s right. maybe possessing me is a better story than her being a wild monster.


    Wait! She is indeed a wild monster! A ghost! No one ever tamed her, or make a contract with her! We just live in her house.


    She''s our pet. Our pet ghost. That''s the most usible exnation. Though I won''t tell her that.


    We also have a pet serpent. He''s wrapping his body around my waist like usual. And he''s our strongest member so far. He will be the most important member in our fight.


    Shelia is with Ka and the others in Albert''s pce. I will summon her right away if the battle happens. She will watch it from the TV over there and prepare herself before I summoned her.


    "Alright, Roy. You''re ready?'' Spot asked.


    "No. Let''s go anyway," I said.


    While the mohawk girl hasn''t entered the city and knows where I live, I need to let her see me outside of Cassau. If her target is me, she will follow me after she saw me.


    "Victoria, stay on my shoulder. With a slime on my shoulder, I would be more eye-catching," I said to Victoria, in which she agrees and transformed into her blob form and stuck on my shoulder.


    I can see her with my Divine Vision, but if I focused on her, she will realize where I''m looking for like before. That''s why even though I''m using Divine Vision, I''m not focusing my eyes on her. But all 360 degree of my surrounding. And I only need to follow someone who is away from the city. She shouldn''t be able to notice me until we saw each other then. I hope.


    If the battle truly begins, I''ll take both of us to the Monsters World. I hope the camera will still work and people here can still watch the fight. That way, they can learn how to fight master level mage and know what to expect in case I called for their help.


    Maybe I should have took all the expert level mages together so it will be faster to call them all at once with just one portal. Well, this is something that was nned in a hurry. I hope we can get the best result.


    I walked toward where the mohawk girl is. She''s calmly walking out there as if there''s nothing to worry about. That just shows how powerful she is. She doesn''t need to care about monsters outside.


    I started running when I was about to get within her sight, so if she''s looking at me, she will chase after me. If she''s a wind mage, I have low chance of escaping though.


    As the mohawk girl saw me, she ignores me. But soon after, she locked her sight at me and started following me.


    Since she''s not flying, I guess she''s not a wind mage. Or maybe she''s hiding her full strength.


    "Alright, she''s following us. Let''s get further away from the city. If she''s a master level mage, we have to get as far as possible from the city," I said.


    "¡­Roy, I don''t think she''s chasing you," Victoria suddenly spoke on my shoulder.


    "What do you mean, Victoria?" I asked.


    "She''s not looking at you. She''s looking at me," Victoria said.


    "Hmm¡­? For what reason is she following you? But if you sensed she''s looking at you, I guess you''re right. Do you have any idea?"


    "Other than she''s my fan, I have no other ideas," Victoria said.


    "You never show yourself to public that you''re a slime. It''s impossible for anyone to know you are an author," I retorted.


    As soon as I thought that we are far enough from the city, I slowed down. And the mohawk girl stopped when she gets close to me.


    "Hello, is there anything I can do for you? I notice that you''ve been following me for a while," I said to the mohawk girl.


    It started. Once the battle begins, in a few minutes, Veronica will fly over here to help me. though I hope we won''t fight.


    "I was tasked with a mission," the mohawk girl said.


    "What mission?" I asked.


    "To ask you nicely to follow me since my master wants your ck Slime. If you refuse, I will stop asking you nicely and have youe by force. If that''s too difficult, I have to kill you and take the ck Slime," she said.


    ¡­isn''t she being too honest?


    But I guess battle is unavoidable. Let''s talk before it truly happens.


    "I see¡­ who is your master?" I asked.


    "Many called him Professor," she replied.


    Veronica''s right! She''s the subordinate of that Professor!


    "What kind of professor? I also taught in college, so I''m sort of professor myself," I said.


    "Professor who experimented on many things," she said.


    "Alright, you said that you''re going to ask me nicely. But before you make your attempt to ask me nicely, let me ask you some questions. Probably a lot of questions. After that, you can ask me nicelyter," I suggested.


    I know that sounds stupid, but I''d like to get as many information as I can get from her.


    "Okay. I''ll ask you nicelyter. Ask me anything," the mohawk girl said.


    ¡­I think she''s stupid. Stupid and honest. If I can bring her into our side, that will be great.


    "Roy, I''ll go to Albert''s location and see if he can detect lies spoken through the camera to his TV. Whenever I return here, that mean she''s telling a lie," Sonia said before she disappears.


    "What was that?" the mohawk girl suddenly spoke.


    I guess she noticed Sonia.


    "I''m actually a tamer. And that was a ghost I tamed," I replied.


    "Oh, the report says that you only have two elements. Summoning, and air. But I guess the report is notplete," she said.


    Hearing that, I got the chill. Does that mean someone in the cult already targeted me?


    I''ll add that to my questions.


    "I have a lot of questions for you, so if you don''t mind, you can take a seat first," I said as I let Victoria turns into a chair for me to sit, and creates clones of herself to make the chair for the mohawk girl to sit on.


    Of course the real reason why I offer her a seat is not for her to be rxed. Well, that''s one of them. But the real reason is that in case she''s about to fight, the Blobbies can restrict her temporarily. And I also have a Magic Restraining Cor with me. This way, she won''t be able to use her magic. But I can''t put it on her right away.


    "First, tell me your name," I said.


    "I don''t have a name. Professor only call me ''you''," the mohawk girl said.


    "Then, for convenience, I''ll call you Mohawk," I said.


    "Understood. You can call me Mohawk."


    She''s surprisingly obedient. Maybe that''s why she''s following this Professor''s order. And she''s even allowing me to have a chat with her.


    As long as I can ask her all kind of information before she asked me nicely toe with her, it should be fine.


    "Who is this Professor?"


    "Smart man. Have to follow his order. He''s always right."


    Obviously, only a liar would say ''I''m always right''.


    "Are you always this honest?"


    "Professor use some technology to brainwash me to never tell lies," Mohawk said.


    "And you know you''re being brainwashed?"


    "Yes."


    Alright, this is weird. But I guess this mean it''s easy to ask her anything. And since Sonia isn''t here, she''s speaking the truth. Or that Albert can''t tell lies from watching the TV.


    "Can you tell a lie?" I asked Mohawk so I can test it.


    "If I was asked to," Mohawk replied.


    "Alright, I have a candy in my hand. Look at this."


    "I''m looking."


    After making sure that she''s looking at the candy, I clenched it in my left hand, while showing her my two hands clenched into fists.


    "Tell a lie. Which hand is the candy in?"


    "It''s in your¡­ right hand," Mohawk replied incorrectly.


    If Albert able to detect her lies, Sonia should be here soon.


    And just as I hoped, Sonia suddenly appears behind me.


    "That was a lie. That mean she didn''t speak lies before," Sonia whispered, and then she disappears.


    "What was that?" Mohawk asked.


    "I asked her to go back to the home and tell my maid to do theundry for my clothes," I said.


    I have confirmed that she never speaks lies. Other than when I asked her to lie.


    That mean she''s really being brainwashed to never tell lies, unless she was ordered to.


    But this is disturbing as well.


    The fact that this Professor is sending someone who can''t lie means that he has the confidence in her toplete any jobs she received.


    As I thought, I must not let her ask me nicely toe with her.

 Chapter 389 - The Honest Mohawk Girl

    Now, what should I ask? Maybe why she''sing after me. Let''s ask that.


    "So, Mohawk, why are you looking for me?" I asked.


    "Because you are the master of that ck Slime on your shoulder," Mohawk replied.


    She''s really targeting Victoria! Why?


    "You''re looking for this little thing? Can you tell me the reason?"


    "Because Professor asked me to," she said.


    "¡­ I guess that''s to be expected after you told me about Professor. Why does he want my Slime?"


    "Because it''s a ck Slime," Mohawk replied.


    "¡­why is that Professor wants a ck Slime?"


    "Back then, someone did an experiment with a ck Slime. And the result is that the ck Slime can enters someone''s body and infected that person''s inner organ. Those who are infected will be able to live long, without the needs of consumption. They don''t need water or food to live. And they also don''t need to sleep. Though they will be considered as monster, so Dragon Dung Flower is their weakness," Mohawk exined.


    Wait, infecting inner organs? That''s the quest we took back then! So, the person who did it is this Professor? And now he knows that I have a ck Slime, which is Victoria.


    If he gets his hand on Victoria, he can make his own immortal army. That''s dangerous!


    "So, the one who did that experiment was Professor?" I asked.


    "No. It was someone who wanted to get his recognition. That person shows the result of his experiment to the Professor, and then Professor asked him to experimented it on himself. After that, I killed the man," Mohawk said.


    "¡­and why does he want my ck Slime? Isn''t one for him enough already?"


    "I don''t know. He just said to bring you with me. Or at least just the ck Slime," she said.


    Maybe because he realized that the slime used on him was just a clone and now, he wanted the real ck Slime. He wants to be an immortal, and want to build an army of immortal.


    No matter what, I must never let the cult get Victoria.


    "Okay, I get it now. Next, what are you?"


    "I''m Professor''s subordinate and someone you call Mohawk," Mohawk replied.


    "No, I mean are you some sort of his experiment? And what experiment was it?"


    "I was not supposed to answer that question," Mohawk said.


    "So, there are some questions you won''t answer? Is that the Professor''s order?"


    "Yes. Because he''s always right," Mohawk said.


    That''s fine. All I need to do is to trick her. She seems to be too honest. I''ll have to trick her somehow. Though the people watching will think I''m a bad guy. Well, they are not wrong.


    "Then, can I ask you everything that the Professor told you not to answer?"


    "Three things. My experiment, theboratory''s location, and the headquarter of the cult," Mohawk said.


    Only those three? I thought that there will be more. I guess the Professor never expected her to be this honest. And he must have thought that it will be difficult to imagine what other question other people will ask.


    Or maybe because everyone other than the cult members were killed by her after realizing her identity.


    For now, it''s good that this Mohawk is gullible. She will answer everything I asked. I should pick my questions carefully other than those three.


    Or maybe¡­


    "Now, I will ask you nicely. Will you¡ª"


    "Wait! I haven''t finished asking you questions! You can ask nicelyter after I have finished asking everything!"


    That was close! If I didn''t interrupt her, she will ask me toe with her. If I refuse, she will force me or even kill me since her target is only Victoria.


    "I won''t ask you about what''s being experimented on you, the location of theb, and the location of the headquarter. But I will ask you this. If the Professor said you can be honest with him, when he asks you those three questions, how will you answer? From the first question to thest," I asked.


    Will this work? If it is, that just shows how gullible she really is. I wish I don''t have to kill her, but if she''s being brainwashed, I have no choice but to kill her. It''s too dangerous if I let her be since she knows where I live.


    "That is not the question that I must not answer, so I will answer it. Starting from my experiment," Mohawk then started exining about herself.


    I never thought that it''s working. I am sure Albert and the others in the other side will write everything down.


    Mohawk doesn''t have any memories prior to her experiment. She is only capable of remembering things after she was sessfully experimented on.


    And her experiment was¡­ to create master level mages artificially.


    She said that she''s the only sessful experiment. Though I think that Professor might have some more sessful experiment that he never told her. But at least her exnation is useful.


    She''s a lightning element mage. And that''s the only element she''s capable of after the experiment. She can''t use other elements even though the Professor said that prior to the experiment, she can use other elements.


    She was then brainwashed, by using some sort of magic tool that the Professor invented, not with the help of a psychic mage like Russell, old man Henry''s friend. She was brainwashed to not have any weakness, and only speak the truth. Though the Professor ended up telling her to not answer three questions.


    She was also used as experiment to improve her strength. No wonder her muscles inside her body seems weird. They are much more solid and stronger than they should have been.


    I think that''s everything she knows. After asking her other things rted to her experiment, she doesn''t know anything more.


    "Then, the next question. The location of theb is here," Mohawk said, as she shows me apass.


    Thepass''s needle didn''t point toward the north as it should be, but to the east. I believe that needle is pointing toward where theb is.


    "This is apass that will only point toward a designated target. Always. And thispass is designated to always point at the Professor. It''s something from ancient time," Mohawk exined.


    That means, even if theb is always changing location, thepass will point toward theb because the Professor is most likely to be there. At least it''s good to know.


    But does it mean the location of the headquarter is the same? Can only be found by anotherpass?


    "Lastly is the location of the headquarter. The headquarter of the cult is always where the Archbishop is. Only a few members of the cult havepasses like this. One of them is the Professor. Professor then will tell me and his other subordinates where the location of the headquarter is, and I will inform other cult members if they need to go there," Mohawk exined.


    I was right. The location of the headquarter and theb can only be known by select few people.


    This mean, I have to get thatpass from her. I will find the Professor, and then, I can have anotherpass that will point toward the headquarter of the cult.


    Can I get it without fighting? Maybe persuade her somehow. Just in case we ended up fighting, I''m afraid that thepass will be destroyed.


    Just as I was thinking of what to do next, Sonia appears behind me and whispered some messages from the others.


    "Roy, Albert says to get thepass. And Russell is with Henry watching this. He said he wanted to test if he can break the brainwashing since she''s too pitiful. Try to capture her if you can," Sonia whispered.


    "Tell them that if she''s too strong, I will either kill her or escape. I will at least try to get thepass," I said in whisper.


    After that, she disappears and should have returned to ry my message.


    And so, as my brainstorming session is over, I will just have fun while rxing and ask her some weird questions to dy as much time as possible to calm my head.


    The questions I asked are too varies and weird. Like her favorite meal, good ce to visit, if she remembers her family, and many other stupid questions. I also asked her about what she knows about the Professor, the Archbishop, the cult''s True God, and even the status of the big breast faction and big ass faction. I need to know if they have realized that both Veronica and Celestine are still alive or not.


    ¡­shit, I''m out of questions. I even asked something that might end up having the girls kill meter like Mohawk''s breast size. I hope the kids are not watching this.


    "Is that all?" Mohawk asked.


    "How do you know about me?"


    "Someone watched the tournament. He was from Melk and watched you back then before the stampede in Melk how you have a ck Slime. And when you be thementator, you said that you''re a professor in Cassau."


    It was me! I''m the one who leaked about my own location! I''m so stupid!


    I guess this is it. She will ask me toe with her now.


    "¡­I think that''s all. you can stay seated while you ask me what you are here to do," I said.


    "Then¡ª"


    "Wait, before that, I need to be in a rxed position first," I said.


    And then, I walked closer toward her, and stopped in an eptable position. I need to make her guard down first. She''s a master level mage. Even though it''s artificial, I am still afraid to get too close to her and capture her right away.


    Then, I get into crouching start position. It''s a position where my explosive power will be used at its fullest, and elerate me into my fastest speed in short time.


    "I''m ready now," I said.


    "Will youe with me to meet the Professor?" Mohawk asked.


    "No."


    As soon as I refused, I leaped forward toward her back, and put the Magic Restraining Cor on her neck. I also make the Blobbies she''s sitting on to restrain her, and used calming gas and sleeping gas together to make her sleep.


    After that, I used my hands to restrain her myself. I also didn''t forget to grab thepass, and instantly throw it into a portal connected to Albert''s location.


    I hope it''s over with just me restraining her like this.

 Chapter 390 - The Fight Against Artificial Master Level Mage Begins

    Even though I''m restraining her, I can feel that she''s strong. Her body is unlike any mage ever have, and probably closer to me who have trained it. Maybe even stronger. She might be able to release herself from me.


    I need help.


    "Spot!" I shouted.


    "Understood!"


    Spot then grow bigger, not to his real size, but just about three meters length, and wrap himself around Mohawk''s body like a phyton. Just from the strength alone, without Aura, Spot is stronger than me.


    Just in case, I summoned Shelia to make sure Mohawk won''t be able to do anything.


    But¡­ something is weird. Mohawk is not affected at all by my gas. I''m still too weak after all. Just intermediate level in my air element.


    "Hmm¡­ you restrained me after you refused. I guess I should fight now. But this is weird. I can sense air magic used on me? And then, you have another monster with you. I guess it''s normal since you''re a tamer. But what about that summoning magic I just sensed? You have another summoned monster? I need to report everything to Professor. I suppose I shall capture you instead of killing you," Mohawk said in calm manner.


    The fact that she''s still calm despite being restrained by the three of us who have the strongest physical ability means she still have some power to spare. The experiment that was tested on her¡­ she''s dangerous.


    But she can sense the magic used by me? No matter what, she must not return to that Professor.


    At least she shouldn''t be able to use her master level lightning element magic since I have put the cor on her. Now, I need to knock her out.


    "Roy! I can''t hold it any longer!" Spot said.


    I have to knock her out fast! She''s much stronger than expected.


    The cor won''t reduce her physical strength, and my gases can''t affect her. I have to knock her out with a powerful hit.


    I transformed Victoria into a hammer, and smash it to Mohawk''s head.


    "Ouch. You''re much stronger than average human. You''re about as strong as an Orc Emperor," Mohawk said.


    "Thanks, but the fact that you didn''t even flinch mean you''re much stronger than me! Why won''t you faint already!" I shouted.


    She''s too strong! Even her skull is not fractured after I hit her with Victohammer. Seems like every part of her body has been altered by that Professor. But why the mohawk?


    "Roy, she''s about to break free!" Spot shouted.


    "Shelia! Break her bones!" I ordered Shelia.


    "I can''t! Her body is to strong!" Shelia shouted.


    She has tried it as soon as I summoned her here.


    I should have hurriedly found my next monster instead of watching Ka and the others changing the terrain. Having another monster will surely help me in knocking this Mohawk out easier.


    No, that''s wrong. If I started looking for the angel earlier, I might not return here today. That alone will endanger the others who are staying at the base. At least I''m lucky to be home when she appears.


    "This is getting troublesome," Mohawk said.


    "Then you need to get knocked out faster!" I said.


    Shelia is not strong enough to break her bones. Spot is not strong enough to restrain her. And I''m not strong enough to knock her out even when I used Aura covered hammer.


    That mean, there''s only one choice left. Kill her.


    I transformed Victoria into a katana, and swing it down toward Mohawk''s head. I have to kill her before she started fighting back.


    A hammer might not work since it''s a blunt weapon, and her skulls and bones have been tampered so her body is powerful. But a ded weapon will injure her no matter how small the wound inflicted is.


    For a hammer, I can only use Aura and my will I trained for months in Monsters World, to make it harder. But for a katana and ded weapon, I can make it sharper. No matter how powerful her body is after being altered, there''s no way she won''t die from my sh.


    As the de fall upon her neck, she notices the danger and quickly uses all her strength to escape from Spot''s restraint, and get away from my attack. I missed. But I expected that.


    Before she uses that monstrous strength to take off the cor, I have to kill her. I can''t let her use any magic. But unexpectedly, she''s about as fast as I am.


    Actually, she''s much faster. But she must have no experience in a melee fight. That''s why her moves are predictable. But because she''s faster, she narrowly dodged every single sh that I threw.


    "Melee attack? Are you a monster?" Mohawk asked.


    "Your strength and speed are beyond normal! You''re the monster here!" I shouted.


    This is dangerous. If the Professor have other sessful experiment like her, we have close to zero chance of winning against them.


    This is ridiculous! Why is such powerful enemy never appeared in my past life!? If she''s this strong, she should be famous. Especially with that hairstyle.


    It means there are still many things that the cult is hiding even among themselves. Even Veronica doesn''t know much about her other than being much stronger than Veronica and Celestine.


    How long has it been? Veronica should be here soon. Even if it''s not fifteen minutes yet, she should have judged it to be impossible for me to fight alone.


    Finally, I can see Veronica flying fast here.


    "Hmm? I can sense someone ising fast. You have a helper?" Mohawk asked.


    "No. Helpers. I have a lot of them. They just won''t appear yet unless I called them," I replied while still trying to hit her.


    But she keeps dodging. Even though she has no experience, her physical ability and athleticism is far above mine. Before long, she will get used to it. I can''t let her get used to it.


    Mohawk also has many chances to attack me with, but as expected, she doesn''t know how to fight with her body. She only knows to use magic. That''s why she never attacked me even though it''s easy for her to defeat me.


    But I can''t take it easy just because she doesn''t know how to fight.


    I can see Veronica is preparing to use a magic. I need to stop Mohawk for a while to make sure Veronica can get a hit. Let''s use Victogun.


    "Oh? This is your air magic that a tournament participant used. I guess you''re really a professor in air element," Mohawk said.


    How can she stay calm!? Does nothing affect her at all? Or maybe she still hasn''t used everything she got?


    Shelia and I then split up and move so Mohawk is between us. Shelia used her distant w attack, and I used Blobbygun. I will use the flying sh that I trained for months as my secret technique against her.


    Mohawk couldn''t do anything but taking all the attacks with her body. And then, Veronica''s magic unleashed.


    Her powerful Wind sh, strong enough to split the ground, is approaching Mohawk while Shelia and I won''t get hit.


    "Such powerful magic. And I''m being surrounded. I can only jump to dodge it," Mohawk said while still being calm.


    She jumped high with her enhanced strength. Why won''t anything hit her!?


    I need to be calm. Let''s take a small dose of calming gas before continuing my attack. She also hasn''t removed her cor yet.


    I''m calm now. Let''s think carefully on how to kill her.


    ¡­attack her until she got hit. And then, attack more.


    Now, while she''s still in the air, it''s easy to aim at her. But let''s take her even higher. Good thing everyone here can fly or run on air.


    I jumped as well, grabbed her leg, and throw her higher into the sky. The thinner the air is, the better for us. I have used my air magic to let the others breathe normally even if they are high in the sky.


    "Huff¡­ I have difficulty breathing here," Mohawk said. Still in a calm manner.


    She can''t dodge now. Let''s attack her!


    "Spot! Prepare for the big attack!" I shouted.


    Spot quickly turned into a big serpent, and readying himself to use his non-elemental breath attack.


    Veronica noticed that we will fight in the air where Mohawk is useless without her magic, and attacked her with series of Wind shes. And so is Shelia who swings her ws left and right continuously.


    Our attack hits Mohawk, but she still doesn''t react much even though an expert level mage is attacking her. As for me, I used Victogun to shoot her arms and make sure she can''t even tough the cor on her neck. Or we will be doomed.


    I looked at Spot who has prepared to shoot his breath attack from right below Mohawk.


    "Now!"


    Spot''s breath attack goes up far into the sky as it hits Mohawk perfectly. Normal people would have their body destroyed instantly, but I can''t expect the same thing will happen to Mohawk.


    I need to look closely and prepare my next move before Spot''s attack is over.

 Chapter 391 - Calling Two More Monsters For Help

    We are in the middle of a fight against an artificial master level mage. And Spot is currently using his strongest attack, his non-elemental magic breath attack, on the mohawk girl.


    Unfortunately, as far as I can see, it doesn''t have much effect on her. She''s there in the sky taking hit while still look calm. Even though we are in the sky and she''s supposed to have difficulty breathing.


    I even used air magic on her so there are no gases around her mouth and nose. But seems like she doesn''t know that another effect after the experiment is that she doesn''t need to breathe anymore.


    Maybe because she treats it like normal, she never thought of it as the effect of the experiment. Or maybe because she was experimented again after the Professor received the ck Slime''s.


    No matter what, this Professor need to be taken care of quickly before he made another artificial master level mage. Maybe there are already several of them in the cult. Or even if they are not an artificial master level mage, just the body of the experimented subjects like Mohawk is enough to give me, an Aura user, a problem.


    Spot''s attack stopped, and Mohawk continues falling down from the sky. Though I won''t let her drop to the ground.


    "I think I received some damage," Mohawk said.


    You have to! If not, I will be in despair since everything we did to you is not working!


    This is just one enemy. Who knows how many other the professor has?


    At least I need to show everyone how to defeat this one so everyone can expect how powerful they are when we encounter more of them in the future.


    This thing that that Professor created, with both amazing physical and magical abilities, we have to find a way to defeat it. If not, everything we nned wille to naught.


    During the tournament in a few months, we have to think that the enemy will send more Mohawks. Probably.


    Even using my Divine Vision, I can''t see her weakness. Maybe it''s her heart just like normal people, but piercing her heart has proven to be difficult.


    "I can''t use magic with this cor on," Mohawk said calmly.


    Oh, no! She''s going to rip the cor apart! I have to prevent her from doing it!


    Again, I used Victogun to shoot rapidly toward Mohawk''s hand so she can''t touch the cor on her neck, but I think her pain resistance has increased now. Probably because she has gotten used to taking hit.


    This is bad! She''s taking off the cor!


    "Get away from her! She''s taking off the cor!" I shouted.


    Even though we tried hard to prevent her to do that, she''s still managed to easily grabbed the cor, and rip it off from her neck.


    For me, it''s easier to use Victoria and transform her into a key to release the cor. But I can also do that. That''s why the cor is useless against people with extraordinary strength like me, or even Shelia. Though she''s a werewolf and not a human.


    Mohawk then prepared her magic as she falls down from such great heights. She doesn''t care that she''s falling and unable to do anything about it, and just casted a powerful lightning magic at us.


    Quickly, I opened a portal to each of them, Veronica, Shelia, and Spot, and had them get inside the portal toward my location. Behind me to be exact, so I can protect them.


    I''d like to transport them all somewhere else, but my summoning magic doesn''t work that way. Only my contracted monsters or clones of them toward my location, or vice versa. Which mean I have to get those threee to me, before I used portal to move away.


    But I can''t do that since the enemy''s lightning element magic is too fast is too strong. But at least we have discussed on what to do in case any of this happen before the fight.


    Veronica would create barrier using her wind magic on the surrounding area, Shelia in front of her, and Spot will wrap himself around the two. Meanwhile, I will be in front of them protecting them from the magic, as I used what I practiced for months. Cutting through magic.


    This will be the first lightning element magic that I will cut. Can I cut it?


    No, that''s wrong. I have to believe that I will cut it.


    With Victoria as my katana, I raised her high with both hands gripping on the handle. And when I think the timing is right, I swung it down vertically as strong as possible. Since Mohawk is also right in front of me, beyond her lightning, it''s possible to hit her if I attack in a straight line.


    "REACH!"


    I shouted hoping that my attack will reach the falling mohawk girl.


    Meanwhile, I did it. I split her lightning apart. Though it didn''t hit me, her lightning was about to return as one again behind me. Luckily, Veronica put her barrier. Though Spot got hit lightly on his tail, and it was burnt.


    I don''t know how much damage he took. I need to focus on killing the enemy first.


    My sh attack continues, and hit Mohawk''s right arm. Her right arm separated from her body as blooding out from the below her shoulder. She no longer has her dominant hand. I know because she has the habit of moving her right hand before her left.


    "Oh? That was not magic. And that''s not projectile from your air magic as well. What was that?" Mohawk asked.


    From our time fighting, I realize that she''s full of curiosity. Should I try using distraction on her? That won''t work unless I have something that can kill her in one shot.


    Thatst sh was a miss. She narrowly dodged it and just sliced her right arm. If I used it again and she noticed it, she will be able to dodge the next one.


    She''s wary of me now. I need to use that attack againter. Maybe closebat is a better choice here. I hope she won''t have any time to use her magic when we''re so close since I won''t be able to dodge it.


    Though I won''t go that close to her like the time I restrained her. This time, I used my Reizpear as my main weapon. With its range, when she''s about to cast magic, I should be able to react if I noticed it early.


    Which mean I have to focus my Divine Vision only on her and I can''t watch my surrounding. I need to at least have Elsie here to watch the surrounding.


    And just Elsie is not enough. I need another powerful ally. Lina''s other contracted monster, Sunny.


    "Elsie! Sunny!" I shouted.


    Lina who is watching from the TV in the capital should realize that I''m thinking of getting the two monsters over here as well. I opened one portal to where Lina is, and Lina summoned her two monsters and let them enter the portal.


    "Spot!"


    "On it!"


    Spot quickly flew toward where Sunny and Elsie falling from, and they safelynded on Spot''s back.


    Sunny then transformed into a huge sunflower that she no longer needed Spot''s help to reach this height. And Elsie jumped on top of the flower head to help with Sunny''s aim.


    "Elsie, aim! Sunny, shoot!"


    Elsie will control where Sunny is aiming, and Sunny will shoot her light beam.


    Elsie will also look at the surrounding while I''m focusing on Mohawk. We don''t know when someone wille after all. We made quite a ruckus over here.


    Waiting for Spot and Sunny to use their powerful beam to attack, Veronica, Shelia, and I attacked Mohawk non-stop. This time, we only attacked her from one spot so it''s easy for me to protect them.


    "Now!"


    Spot and Sunny''sbined beam are targeting Mohawk. But now that her cor has been taken off, she can protect herself with magic.


    And her lightning magic can produce a barrier that can protect her from Spot and Sunny''sbined attack.


    ¡­master level mage is a cheat! She is a cheat!


    Just how much differences between expert level mage and master level mage? Even advanced level can still defeat an expert level mage.


    But now, one expert level mage, one Aura user, and four monsters, are still not enough to defeat her. Though I still managed to cut her arm off.


    ¡­ wait, what the hell is that ck sphere above Mohawk? Is that lightning fully concentrated in one spot? Is that even possible!?


    Oh, no! She''s throwing it toward us!


    But good thing the target is just one thing unlike her previous lightning attack.


    "Victoria! Give me a Blobby!"


    As soon as I get a Blobby from her, I threw it to the sky, right above a forest far from us. There shouldn''t be any humans over there.


    The ck sphere ising, and this time, I don''t need to cut it. Instead, I opened a huge portal in front of me, connected to the Blobby I just threw.


    The ck sphere falls toward the forest, as I was about to attack Mohawk since she''s letting her guard down after that big attack.


    But I can''t do that.


    "Roy! Dangerous!"


    I heard Shelia screaming after she''s looking at Elsie. What''s the danger?


    It''sing from the area where the ck sphere is as it''s about to touch the ground.


    This¡­ I need to protect everyone!


    I gathered everyone in Spot''s back with Sunny returned to her small size, and had Veronica put a barrier protecting us. I also stand in front of everyone to protect them just in case.


    The ck sphere hit the ground, and it exploded. But that''s not the worst part.


    From the explosion, numerous lightning spread from over there and spreading like fire everywhere. Even toward us who are far from the explosion!


    "Embrace yourself!" I shouted.


    Being attacked by numerous lightning is not funny. I''ll die no matter how strong I am. I have to be quick and sh every lightninging this way.


    One, two, three¡­


    Ten, eleven¡­


    Twenty, twenty-one¡­


    It keeps goes on that I lost count. Some of my shes were toote and my hand got burnt lightly from the lightning, but if I stop, the others will die.


    After a whole ten minutes of shing the lightnings, it finally stopped.


    And my heart is almost stopped as well seeing Mohawk is already on the ground with a calm expression despite her right arm is cut off.


    How do I kill her?

 Chapter 392 - The Battle Ends

    Now, the mohawk girl hasnded on the ground. She is free to move with her extraordinary speed from various experiment conducted on her now.


    "Alright, Veronica, Sunny, Elsie, keep your distance. The only ones allowed to fight close range against her are Shelia, Spot, and I. Though she is still quite amateurish in closebat, her physical strength is above mine. Be careful," I said to the others.


    Veronica, Shelia, Spot, Elsie, and Sunny nodded. Sunny is now in her small flower form, while being carried by Elsie. Sunny will shoot at Mohawk from distance with the help of Elsie as her aiming support.


    Then I continued, "Jewel, Sophie, and other lightning element watching the TV, learn Mohawk''s lightning magic. As for the others, see if you can find a way to defeat master level mage with extraordinary physical ability."


    I told everyone watching TV to look carefully. But¡­ is it still working after that many lightning strikes me? Though I managed to cut all the ones approaching us, it might affect the Camera.


    When I asked Sonia through the TV, Sonia appears and told me that it''s still working. Good.


    Now, let''s analyze the enemy again.


    Her magic is so powerful, but so far, they are not something I cannot cut. Her physical ability is extraordinary from the various experiment she received, and she''s stronger and faster than I am. But she''s inexperienced in fighting with her body.


    Next is her inner organ. Although she was thrown high to the sky and have trouble breathing, it was as if she doesn''t need to breathe in the first ce as she''s still has that calm demeanor. Even after I cut her arm off, she''s still not panicked. My various type of gases doesn''t work on her.


    And her fall to the ground, I don''t see any visible injury outside. But several of her bones are fractured. At least I know she''s taking damage.


    She said that the ck Slime experiment was only conducted on the Professor, but that Professor might have taken some part of the Slime from his body, to infect her. Or maybe it''s something that naturally spread. Since she was very close to the Professor, she got infected by the ck Slime from the Professor.


    In any case, Mohawk herself doesn''t realize that she''s simr to the Professor with some part of her inner organs were already infected.


    I was about to start fighting again when she started to speak. I guess we will use this chance to recover our stamina.


    "Huh? So it''s you, Veronica. I thought you were dead. Turns out, you just betrayed us. Am I correct?" Mohawk asked.


    Veronica didn''t answer, and just looked at me.


    "Just answer her questions and dy the fight as much as possible for now. I''m thinking of a n," I whispered to Veronica.


    Veronica then nodded, and she replied to Mohawk''s question.


    "It has been a while since west met. And I still don''t know what I should call you. Can I call you Mohawk like he did?" Veronica asked.


    Let''s ignore them as I''m nning to continue the fight.


    "I will call for help when the time arrives. I will prioritize in having the expert level magese first. If there''s anyone unavable, contact me through Sonia. And Sonia, tell the agents in Cassau to not let anyone approach this location. From the previous attack, there should be many people curious about it. Some of them might have left the city to see the situation," I said.


    Veronica and Mohawk still chatted, but I guess it''s difficult for the introverted Veronica to continue talking. She''s already out of topics.


    "By the way, don''t you feel any pain from your right arm? It''s gone, you know?" I asked as Veronica doesn''t know how to continue the conversation any longer.


    "Yeah, this is the first time I got injured. Usually, in every mission, it would be over with just one magic. So, I never really got injured. It''s slightly distracting. I guess this is pain," Mohawk said as she looked at her missing right arm.


    "I''m curious, can you feel pain or not? Just because you are slightly distracting, it doesn''t really mean that you feel pain. You know, I''m sort of a professor myself," I said. Though I''m a professor in air magic and not in research.


    "Hmm¡­ how do I prove it?" Mohawk asked.


    I suppose it was because she''s experienced too much in being used as guinea pig. That''s why when I asked for her cooperation to research if she can feel pain or not, she didn''t refuse it.


    "Let''s see¡­ that was your right arm. If I do the same to your left arm, how do you feel?" I asked.


    Did I just trick a gullible person that I will cut off her left arm after cutting her right arm? Yes. Do I feel guilty? No.


    "Maybe the distracting feeling will change from my right to my left. Or maybe both right and left will feel the same," Mohawk said calmly.


    "Let''s try it, shall we?" I said as I move forward to sh her with Reizpear.


    "Please, don''t. I don''t know what to do if I also lost my left arm," Mohawk said, but I don''t care.


    I still continue regardless of what she said. Good thing because of the conversation, she lets down her guard a little, so I can approach her.


    I swung my Reizpear from my right to left so I can cut her left arm, but my intention is actually to target her heart.


    But thanks to her ridiculous speed and reflexes, she jumped back as my Reizpear only scratched her left arm and the left side of her body slightly.


    But my attack is not over yet. I stopped swinging Reizpear, and pulled it back, and then I thrusted it toward her body. She was jumping, so she couldn''t dodge it. But she was quick enough to use her lightning magic to create barrier and protect herself from my attack.


    Though my attack should have damaged her considerably.


    Seeing her got blown away, the others started attacking her. And I also called for help.


    "Celestine! Julia!"


    I didn''t call for Carmen since she''s a water element mage. It will only cause more damage to us if she ys a part here.


    Celestine quickly build a wall surrounding Mohawk with only one opening, where Julia instantly uses her strongest fire magic to attack from that opening. This will damage Mohawk more than just if she received the fire magic.


    Veronica and I also helped, with both of us make the fire bigger.


    Unfortunately, Mohawk''s barrier is too powerful for us. But even if it''s her, there''s no way she can handle the heat.


    And then, Spot and Sunny go to another side of the wall, where they shoot their beam magic toward. And as the beams got closer to the wall, Celestine made another opening.


    This time, her barrier can''t handle it and it broke.


    It''s working! She took the hit! Now, for the finisher¡­ huh?


    "Roy! What are you doing! Quick kill her!" Celestine shouted.


    "¡­no. There''s no longer any need to continue fighting. Cease your magic. We''re done," I said.


    The others are curious because they don''t think it would end so easily. Only Elsie and I can see what''s going on.


    And then, Celestine broke down the wall covering Mohawk, as we can see her body is crumbling.


    "¡­what the hell is going on?" Julia asked.


    "Most likely, because her power came from experiment and not through cultivation, her body finally can''t bear her own magic anymore. I saw this happen when she tried to make another barrier after you all broke the previous barrier. She failed and got her body destroyed instead," I exined.


    As I was about to attack her before, I see that her body is cracked and crumbling. It was as if she was a stone that got hit over and over again.


    "¡­is this over?" Veronica asked.


    "¡­Mohawk, can you still talk?"


    I asked Mohawk because I know she''s still alive.


    "¡­what happened? I can''t move. I can''t use magic."


    She still talks as usual. With her calm demeanor. It''s unthinkable of how much pain she should be receiving, but unable to express. Just prove how evil the Professor is.


    "Your body can''t handle the magic and your enhanced strength as it crumbles. No wonder the Professor desperately desire the ck Slime. He wanted to create perfection. Experimental subjects who will be able to endure his crazy experiment," I said.


    "Is that so? I lost?"


    "Yes," I replied.


    I have no other questions to ask her. And I don''t think it''s good for the others to see her dying. I''ll just kill her right away then.


    "Wait! Don''t kill her yet! Albert said to transport him here so he can ask something. And Russell also said to bring him as well. He wants to try undoing her brainwashing," Sonia said.


    I guess there are some questions he wanted to ask.


    I opened two portals, one to where Russell is. He''s with old man Henry who entered the portal with him.


    The other is to the capital where Albert is. Not just Albert, but everyone else who was watching entered the portal as well.


    "Ka, see if you can heal her enough tost Albert''s questions and Russell''s attempt in clearing her mind," I said.


    Damn, I''m tired.


    Such enemy and there will be more of theming? What a pain.


    Iy down on the ground as I used calming gas to clear my mind. And Sophie thene over as she let my head rest on herp.


    Not just me, Veronica, Shelia, Spot, Sunny, and Elsie are all tired. As for the other two who camete but very helpful, Julia and Celestine, the two are witnessing Albert''s question curiously with the others.


    At least I can say job well done. Though I hope I won''t fight another master level mage in the future.. Artificial or not.

 Chapter 393 - Undoing The Brainwash

    Mohawk is unable to move. Her body started crumbling. Her legs can no longer support her, and she''s unable to use magic anymore.


    "How did that happen?" Jewel asked.


    "Most likely, it''s because she used magic beyond what her body can handle. Since she was too powerful, she would usually only use magic once to defeat her opponents. But this time, not only she used two powerful lightning magic to attack. She also needed to maintain her barrier for a long time. Which is why her body can''t handle the power inside her anymore. Not only she can no longer use magic, her body also started crumbling," Ka assumed. It''s amazing how she can think of that answer after just one look.


    And Ka is also trying to heal Mohawk. Not that we want Mohawk to stand up again and continue our fight. I deemed it to be impossible. We just want Ka to dy her destruction so Albert can ask her questions, and Russell can try to release her from her brainwash.


    "So that''s what happen. I think you are right. In the end, being an artificial master level mage will never be as good as the real thing," Mohawk said.


    "You can still talk? Then, I have some questions to ask you," Albert said.


    "Hmm¡­ I can''t release her brainwashing yet. I think in this condition it''s best to not release it," Russell said before Albert interrogate Mohawk.


    "Mr. Russell, nice to meet you. I heard a lot about you from Roy and old man Henry. What do you mean by you can''t?" Albert asked Russell.


    "Well, part of the brainwashing is to make her not feel any pain. All kind of pain, no matter in which part of the body it is, the source of that paines from the brain. And she lost the feeling of pain in her brain through brainwashing. I can try to release the brainwashing but if I do, she will probably die from shock due to the pain before you ask her anything. It''s best to ask her right away," Russell exined.


    "You can undo the brainwash?"


    Suddenly, Mohawk seems interested in something. Which is quite rare.


    She was also interested in a few things during our fight, but I can see that her heart is beating faster knowing Russell can release her from the brainwash.


    "I don''t know. I can only try," Russell said.


    "Then, I want you to do it. There are many things that I wish to remember, but the Professor lock those memories away. Those things still lingering in my mind even after all this time," Mohawk said.


    "But you will die soon after."


    "Not that it will change anything though. Even if you didn''t release her from the brainwashing, she will still die from her body crumbling down like that. She will die anyway. But there are some questions that she needs to answer first before Russell tried to do it. If you answer it honestly, there might be a chance for him to release your brainwash before you die. Now, answer Albert''s questions," I said to the mohawk girl while I''m stillying with my head rested on Sophie''sp.


    I told her that so they can hurry with the interrogation. I''m tired, and I still need to return them back to their hometer. I just close my eyes as I listen to Albert asking Mohawk questions, and Mohawk answering him.


    Though, Celestine grabbed the camera strapped on my chest with Blobbies, as she pointed it toward Albert and Mohawk so the others who are still at their home watching the TV, will know what Albert is asking about.


    We were d that we can defeat the artificial master level mage despite the difference in strength. She is much stronger than us even though we outnumbered her. But if she gained her level not through experiment and through cultivation, then we have no chance in winning as she can fight back. Though I hope the real master level mage won''t be as strong as her physically at least.


    Well, even if they are not strong physically, it will still pose a problem for me to approach them.


    Oh, Albert is asking Mohawk if she knows of anyone in the cult who is at least as strong as her, or maybe stronger. I''m curious as well. If there are many of them, it will be difficult for us tomence our n during the tournament.


    Though if the cult only decided to send their weaker members, we canmence our n during the tournament. And what I meant by weaker members are those under master level mage. I can take care of several expert level mages at once now. But just one master level mage, that will be difficult.


    Albert continues asking Mohawk about everything he wants to know, and some questions that I haven''t asked her yet. I was just too focused in dying instead of questioning her back then.


    Though, even when everyone is rxed now that the fight is over, there''s one person who doesn''t look well. It was Ang.


    So, while everyone is focused on Albert and Mohawk, I called her over.


    "Ang, what''s wrong?" I asked.


    "¡­she was too strong. I don''t think I can defeat her. Can we really win against the cult now that the tournament is getting closer?" Ang asked.


    I also want to know the answer. But I can''t show her that we are weak. For Ang, she needs confidence that she can be stronger than anyone. I can''t tell her that we can''t win against the cult if they have many others master level mage.


    I believe that once she reached expert level mage, she should be able to handle a master level mage. We need her to be stronger than anyone.


    Since this is a serious talk, I raised my body and stand in front of her as I put my hand on her shoulder.


    "We can. But we need your help. In the past few years since after returning to the past, I think I have spoiled everyone too much. After this, when I return to the Monsters World in search for the angels, I want you, and everyone else who is interested, toe visit the Monsters World as well. But I won''t guide you this time. You will have to get stronger on your own. Find strong monster, enter dungeons, and desperately fight against an enemy that is stronger than you and win. You need experience. Are you still willing to get stronger?"


    "¡­I will. If I don''t, there will be more victims. Isn''t that why you wanted to destroy the cult?" Ang asked.


    "Not me. I don''t think about other people. I started this because I was thinking of myself. I want to live in peace, so I thought of destroying the cult," I said.


    "Well, whatever. I''m not that smart anyway, so I will think that you did it for the good of everyone instead," Ang said. I think her spirit has recovered now.


    Not just Ang, I also want everyone to get experience. They also need to do it alone and not in group. They have been spoiled too much by spending times, even when exploring dungeons, with other people who are about as strong or stronger than they are. Which restrict their growth.


    In this case, I think the one with the most experience in our n is Kron.


    Even now, he''s still exploring the world to gain experience and get stronger.


    I guess that''s it. From now on, we will act separately until before the tournament. I just hope nothing serious happen during their journey to get stronger.


    Albert has finally finished asking Mohawk questions, and it''s time for Russell to try and undo the brainwashing put on her. But if he can do it, there''s a high possibility that she will die from the pain of her body crumbling.


    I guess it''s my turn now.


    "Ka, keep healing her for a while longer. I will use pain relieving gas to make her not feeling much pain once her brainwashing is undone. Russell, do it now," I said.


    Actually, I don''t want to hear what she wants to know after her locked memories returned after she was released from the brainwash. But I have no choice since I''m the only air mage here and she might have some important information after the brainwashing is undone. I should have brought Sara here.


    Mohawk''s expression which was calm all the time, changed into a pained one. She can feel pain again now. And despite I''m using pain relieving magic, it''s impossible that she can endure the pain of her body crumbling. And this is also the first time I''ve seen someone whose body crumbles.


    "AAAAAARGHH!"


    Mohawk screamed in pain. Even her scream is louder than Jewel''s voice. It must be really painful.


    "My-MY NAME IS JENA!"


    Oh, wow! She remembers her name. Next must be her dying message. This is something that I experienced many times as a doctor with dying patient. And I always hate it. Which is why I''m reluctant to approach her now.


    And obviously, like many other dying patients I had in my past life, her hand is reaching out to someone she can trust. In this case, it''s me again. Why!?


    "Please! My vige! In the border between Arturo and Varadis! My first mission after the sessful experiment is to kill everyone in my home vige! Please, bury them all! The location of my vige is not known by many, so none of them have been buried!"


    Yeah, of course this happen. Jena will ask me to do something difficult. Though I am more powerful and more resourceful than my past life, so I can do it. But it''s still a pain.


    After telling me the location, she finally lets out herst breath.


    "Father¡­ I''m sorry that I killed you¡­" Jena said before she stopped moving.


    "¡­at least we know that Russell can undo the brainwashing," I said casually.


    "How can you say something like that after what you witnessed?" Julia asked


    "I''m a doctor. Listening to patients'' dying message is upational hazard. Since old man is a doctor as well, I thought you are one," I said.


    "She is one. But even though we are doctors, we never have to face dying patients since we are royalties," old man Henry said.


    "Must be nice then. Let''s go home now," I said.


    Sigh¡­ now I have to go to that vige and bury some dead people.


    They haven''t be zombie yet, right?

 Chapter 394 - Digging Graveyards

    One day has passed after the battle against Mohawk. I mean the mohawk girl, Jena.


    I am nowpletely healed, and about to go to a certain vige. Toward Jena''s hometown where she massacred everyone after her the Professor sessfully experimented on her.


    It''s her dying wish to have everyone buried. Though if she was not being brainwashed, I would never do this.


    Many are wondering why I did this even though this is very not like me. Well, the answer is because of my regret in my past life.


    I was a mediocre doctor, but I still had many patients visiting me. And some of them didn''t make it. They left me with dying message that I could never fulfil.


    But now, I have the power to fulfil someone''s dying wish. She''s not my patient, and in fact, she was my enemy. But I will try to fulfil her wish.


    After her brainwashing got undone, she said her name and her wish in front of other people as well. That mean even if I don''t go, someone else will go in my ce because of their own kindness. That''s also my other reason why I go. I''m surrounded by many kind people.


    Well, another reason is because the Professor told Jena to aim at her vige. It might just be a test from the Professor to Jena after being brainwashed, but there might be other reasons as well. that''s why I''m going to investigate it before returning to Monsters World and search for an angel.


    As for the others, Albert and the kings are discussing again about our next move after realizing the possibility that there might be other master level mage among the cult. Veronica and Celestine were there with them as well to tell them again what they know about the cult before they betrayed them.


    The other girls are at the base preparing to go to Monsters World to explore by themselves. They said that they will move separately other than those who choose to stay like Sophie and Lina.


    Well, Lina can just send her monsters to go. But Sophie, she''s doesn''t really like fighting. That''s why she chooses to stay at home to protect it.


    That''s fine since she''s an advanced level now. At least she''s not as bad as the spoiled rich kids who only cultivate with a lot of resources, but don''t have any experience in fighting. And she''s focusing on bing a doctor more than a mage anyway.


    Right now, I''m on top of Spot''s back near the border between Arturo and Varadis. I''m looking for the vige that Jena said. She said that it was within Arturo''s territory, but the country never knows about it. They survive on their own and with some merchants who are passing by from time to time.


    When Harold heard that, he doesn''t know what to say since it was way before he was being swapped.


    And the kings probably discussing about viges within their territory which were abandoned as well. I don''t care about that since it''s not really rted to the cult.


    "Spot, I saw the vige. It''s over there," I said while pointed where the vige is.


    "Like I said, I can''t see where you pointed your finger at when you''re on top of my head!" Spot said.


    "Oh, right. Sorry. A bit to the left, and you should be able to see it soon," I properly guided Spot this time.


    We reached the vige in just a few minutes of flying. Of course we went there after using portal to Varadis first.


    The vige is¡­ abandoned.


    It smells really bad as many corpses lying all over the ce and not being taken care of.


    I looked all over the vige and didn''t see anything worth mentioning. I guess that Professor only wanted to test Jena''s strength by sending her here.


    This was her hometown and she was forced to follow his order to kill everyone here. Including her own family.


    Seems like the cult also knows about some viges that the country abandoned. That''s why they targeted this ce. Took Jena from this vige, experimented on her, and get her to kill everyone in this vige.


    "¡­this is so cruel," Victoria said.


    "Should I say as expected of the cult? Anyway, we now have the item needed for finding where that Professor is. Albert and the others will decide what to do next. Though I doubt we will do anything anytime soon. Probably we will only raid theb right before the tournament. We will let them decide our next move," I said.


    I Use air magic to filter the air so we don''t have to smell the stench. This makes breathing easier.


    Even after their death, no one has ever taken a step around here. That''s why Harold is trying his best to fix everything so he can prepare what he should do after he returns to the throne. But we need to destroy the cult first before he can return. Or at least just those in Arturo.


    I dug many graves and buried all the corpses that I found one by one. It''s not that bad since I can move very fast.


    I guess that''s everyone. As for the smell, it will disappear one day.


    "We''re done here. Let''s go back," I said.


    "Where?" Victoria asked.


    "Where the kings are holding the meeting. I need to return them back after all," I said.


    When I opened a portal to the meeting room, I sensed the atmosphere turned serious.


    "¡­let''s leave and return againter," I said.


    "Wait! Don''t just leave after youe! Our discussion is not over yet!" Albert shouted.


    "I''ll be back once the discussion is over," I said calmly.


    "Just stay here. It''s not like our next discussion is something serious," old man Henry said.


    "I don''t trust you after seeing the atmosphere," I said.


    When I was about to step back, the ground and the wind are pushing me into the portal. It''s Celestine and Veronica''s doing.


    I guess I can''t escape from this ce.


    "Fine, I''m here now. Now what?"


    "I want to ask you what is in that vige," Harold asked.


    "Nothing. Just dead people. Some are burnt from the lightning magic Jena used. Only few corpses still have their whole body intact," I said.


    "So no one knows the existence of that vige. I''m a failure of a king," Harold said.


    "At least you can be a good example of what a king shouldn''t do for your sessor," I said calmly.


    After chatting for a while, they returned back to the discussion.


    "So, everyone agrees to dy the tournament again?" Albert asked.


    "But how?" Lynn asked


    "The fake king is asking us about the technology for the TV. And we will install it in every country before the tournament. We will say that there''s an error during the installment so we need to adjust it and it will take a while before that happen," Albert said.


    "Hah! And the screens in Melk were installed in one night. Make a better excuse," I said.


    "Hmm¡­ bandits stole the TV during the delivery," Albert suggested.


    "That''s better, but after the tournament, do you think the fake king will believe it since he must have collected information about strong people in Tatrama?"


    "¡­we''ll think of a better way. There''s still few months time before the tournament begin after all," Albert said.


    "Just add a new rule saying each country will have two teams. That way, it''s normal for them to think that the dy is for training purpose. To search for good candidates for the second team. That''s easy, right?" I said.


    "I see¡­ that does sound like a good idea. We will adjust the rule again and see if the fake king will agree," Albert said.


    Is this why it takes so long for their discussion? Thinking of a way to dy the tournament?


    Just askzy person to do that. They are good in making excuse. Even more if they arezy but smart at the same time.


    "Then, next is about theb," Albert said as he takes out thepass pointing toward theb of the cult.


    "What should we do? Raid that ce?" Harold asked.


    "Wait, it''s been a while since I gather you all here, but you only talked about this now?" I asked.


    "We have many questions to ask Celestine and Veronica," Albert said.


    I guess that''s fine then.


    That mean I have to wait here more. I should have brought something so I won''t get bored.


    In the end, we decided to raid that ceter before the tournament.


    Even if there''s a possibility that the Professor will escape long before then, we will still raid that ce.


    After all, weck power. Even if we raid it now, there will only be casualties among us. It''s best to do itter after everyone has gotten stronger.


    And I took a nap most of the time during the discussion. I just heard the result after they woke me up.


    "It''s over now? Let''s go back. Tomorrow, many of us in the n will go to Monsters World. Including the four expert level mages we have. Try to not have any problem that needs our help during our time there," I said.


    Finally, I will return to search for the angels again.. I hope we can reach an agreement just through conversation and not battle.

 Chapter 395 - Giant Shadow In The Sky

    The day after meeting with the kings, I entered the portal to the Monsters World along with everyone who wants to raise improve their strength. All of them want one thing. Which is the power to defeat those who are stronger than them.


    Those who entered with me including; Ka, Ang, Jewel, Candy, Wendy, Veronica, Celestine, Julia, Carmen, Fabio, Kron, and Lina''s two monsters, Sunny and Elsie.


    When I asked Kron if he wants toe with us, he happily agreed. But as he had never entered Monsters World as much as the others, I told him to go with a group in the first few days before splitting up.


    And that''s the case with Wendy as well. She took a break from teaching and decided to join the others in pursuit of strength.


    The two will group up together with Candy.


    As for Julia, Carmen, and Fabio, they will go together with Ka. Those three have never entered Monsters World, so Ka is the best person to guide them.


    And since Carmen and Julia are both expert level mages, it should be easy for them. I don''t know about Fabio though. But I think he''s quite powerful for his level.


    As for the rest, Veronica, Celestine, and Ang will go on their own right away. And Jewel will go along with Lina''s two monsters, Sunny and Elsie.


    I''m kind of worried that Elsie is not in our base, but I have tasked several werewolves to watch the base along with Sophie and Lina back home. They agree easily knowing that they will be eating Lina''s cooking.


    I guess that''s everyone.


    "Alright, we''re off. Lina, if anyone needs anything, open a portal and let Sonia in into Monsters World. We can''t wait several hours for her to arrive if it''s urgent," I said.


    "Okay. And you too, Master. Don''t force yourself. If the archangels refuse to be your contracted monster, and fight is unavoidable, just retreat if you can''t handle it," Lina said.


    "Don''t worry. If it''s really impossible, I will give up and find other monsters to make contract with," I replied.


    After everyone entered the portal, I enteredstly and closed the portal. Now, they can only depend on themselves to survive. Though I will open a portal to their location once a day and bring them some food. After all, some monsters here are too poisonous to eat.


    Probably not once a day. Every three days might be good since I can bring them three days'' worth of food every time for each of them.


    As for the candidates for the tournament in other countries, there are other people training them than Celestine and Julia in Consenza and Varadis. The two expert level mages can concentrate in getting stronger. After all, just the artificial master level mage has proven to be too much for us.


    Worse of all, we don''t know if there are other artificial master level mage again, and they are even better than Jena. Which mean no matter how many times they used their magic, their body won''t crumble. That will be our nightmare.


    "Okay, everyone, we will split up from now. Like I exined before, since we can''tmunicate through Sonia, in case of danger, I gave you several small Blobbies. Make sure you keep one of them safe at all time, and when you are in danger, destroy one of them. That way, Victoria will notice and I wille to you as fast as possible," I exined.


    "This sure is convenience," Julia said.


    "Yeah. Though not as much as Sonia since we can just ry a message. If it''s like this, Roy will not know what kind of danger we are facing. It will be too embarrassing if I called him just to say that I''m starving," Kron said jokingly.


    "If it''s just food, you won''t have much trouble. Especially if you find beast-type monsters. Usually, they don''t have poison. You can eat them," Shelia said as the original inhabitant of this world.


    Shelia herself said that she wants to go alone. Though I will summon her if I''m in danger. And when I meet the archangel, she told me to summon her right away. If the archangel is as strong as Spot said, it will be a huge increase in our strength.


    After telling them to be careful, we each travel to different locations. With me making another portal toward where we werest time we are in search of the Angel''s Sanctuary.


    "Roy, after the business with the archangel is over, I''m splitting up with you so I can get stronger on my own," Spot said.


    "Okay. Are you going back to where you were born?" I asked.


    "Most likely. If my parents are still alive, I might be able to ask them how to get stronger even more. Though I don''t know if they will still ept me or not since I have been gone for a long time," Spot said.


    "Alright. For now, let''s continue our search. I will depend on you for this, Spot. I will just use Divine Vision once in a while to spot the Sanctuary instead of using it all the time," I said.


    We flew with me on Spot''s back in high speed. We''re still looking for where the Sanctuary is.


    It''s a pain that there''s a ce that keeps moving all the time. Not just the cult headquarters, but this Sanctuary as well.


    In the cult''s case, only the people moving around. Not the whole ce. But the Angels'' Sanctuary, it keeps moving since it''s above the cloud. The wind keeps blowing the cloud and it won''t stop moving.


    "Man, there are a lot of monsters here. Way more than before," I said.


    "At least I won''t get hungry. Just by opening my mouth and many of them entering it at once," Spot said.


    "Yeah, right. Oh, what''s that?"


    While flying in the sky, I can see a shadow of a huge monster above me. It was so huge that it covers the sun.


    "Hmm¡­ that''s a monster? Wait, a dragon!? Let''s escape!" Spot shouted.


    A dragon? Will that dragon be interested to be my contracted monster? And why is Spot afraid of the dragon?


    As I look with my Divine Vision this time, I can see that¡­ the dragon is much bigger than I thought. It was many times the size of Cassau!


    "¡­Spot, is dragon dangerous monster?" I asked.


    "Not just dangerous! They are famous to attack anyone that they don''t like. They don''t like if someone getting close to them, they don''t like if there''s something in their sight, and they don''t like many things! If any of us are considered as something that dragon hate, we will be doomed!" Spot said.


    I never thought that dragon would be such difficult creature. But can they be my contracted monster? I think they will be more powerful than archangel.


    "I know what you''re thinking. But don''t ever make a contract with a dragon! Someone who tried it in the past failed and they got eaten instead. Rather, many summoners who entered this world in search for a powerful monster, tried to make a contract with dragons. And they are all die trying," Spot said.


    "Seriously!? I guess that exin how the knowledge about summoners able to enter this world is forgotten. Let''s descend and find somewhere to hide. If that thing finds us, I''ll use portal to get us out of here," I said.


    Can''t be helped. Let''s forget the idea of making a contract with the dragon¡­


    Wait! I have a better idea!


    "No, Spot! Let''s face the dragon," I suggested.


    "Are you crazy!?" Spot shouted angrily.


    "No. I have an idea¡­"


    I told Spot and Victoria about my idea. And they agreed to it easily.


    "That¡­ sounds good. Wait, I''ll turn smaller first so it will be easy for me to enter the portalter," Spot said as Victoria is excitedly jumping on my shoulder.


    While preparing to go and face the dragon, I asked Spot about what he knows of them.


    There are various dragons, and from the characteristic of the dragon that I saw with my Divine Vision, Spot concludes that the dragon is called a Kaiser Dragon. The biggest dragon with gigantic body harder than metal.


    They are actually quite smart and capable ofmunicate with, but they are easily infuriated by many things. Just like the effect of my infuriating gas.


    Which is why, my strategy is to get close to his nose, and use calming gas in full power.


    That time, it failed to shows any effect to Jena, but I''m still expecting something to happen to the dragon. Even if it won''t make a contract with me, as long as we can establish good rtionship, that will be good.


    I hope it will work.


    Although Spot is afraid, he still charged to the front of the dragon''s face. It was huge. Even Spot''s real size is nothing in front of this Kaiser Dragon.


    "Kill."


    A loud voiceing out of the dragon''s mouth as it takes a deep breath.


    "Roy! We''re being sucked in!" Spot said.


    "No, shit! Just how powerful is its lung alone!? Spot! Try to endure it!" I said.


    Since the dragon is taking a deep breath, it''s a chance for me to use the calming gas.


    I created the calming gas in front of me as it keeps being sucked by the dragon. We are more than twenty metes in front of the dragon, but we still get sucked in.


    I hope the calming gas will have an effect before we enter its mouth.

 Chapter 396 - Kaiser Dragon

    "Spot! Can you move back faster!" I shouted.


    "I''m already using all my power! This Kaiser Dragon''s lung is too powerful! Roy, prepare a portal!" Spot shouted back.


    "Aaaah! We''re going to get eaten!" Victoria is panicked.


    Did I overestimate my air magic again? I shouldn''t have tried it. I''m just wasting my mana here. This way, I won''t be able to fight the angels if we meet themter.


    The sucking power of the dragon is too strong. Despite inhaling so much calming gas, there''s no visible effect on the dragon. It still looking at us in anger. Should I add happiness gas?


    Let''s do that. When someone is happy and calm, everything else won''t matter to them.


    We still get closer and closer into his mouth. The smell is really bad. And just one tooth of the dragon is about as big as Spot''s head. We''re going to die like this.


    I guess it''s time to escape. Let''s look for the Angels'' Sanctuary next time. We still have a few months left before we take actions.


    "Spot, we''re lea- wait a minute. The dragon''s mouth is closing."


    When I was about to tell Spot that we''re leaving, the Kaiser Dragon''s mouth is closing and we''re no longer being sucked in.


    "Spot, keep your distance ahead of the dragon. Let''s see if it''s already calmed down and we canmunicate," I said.


    "¡­Roy, you''re crazy if you think that you canmunicate with a dragon. But let''s try it!" Spot said.


    We take a distance from the dragon as we finally able to see its whole face. And we need to get so far away just to be able to see its whole face!


    "Hello! Ie in peace! Can you talk?"


    Oh, it has been a while since I said that word.


    "Who¡­ are¡­ you¡­?"


    Unlike before, the voice this time is much slower. I guess the dragon is being careful to not kill us identally. Unlike before when it said ''Kill!''.


    Let''s introduce ourselves first before we get to know about the dragon.


    "My name is Roy. An Aura user and summoner. This little thing is a ck Slime, Victoria, and the Serpent I''m riding is called Spot. Nice to meet you."


    "Hmm¡­ Aura user¡­ been¡­ a¡­ while¡­" the Kaiser Dragon said slowly.


    You talk too slow! Must be difficult being big.


    "And¡­ ck¡­ Slime¡­ Not¡­ Javier¡­?" the Kaiser Dragon asked.


    "Wait, you know Javier?" I asked.


    "Old¡­ friend¡­"


    "Oh, I see¡­ well, actually, this ck Slime was Javier. There''s a story as to how it became Victoria," I said.


    "Tell¡­ me¡­"


    Well, if this dragon is an old friend of Javier, he must have met Javier less than a thousand years ago. After the ck Slime was given a name. Let''s tell this Kaiser Dragon about Javier, and everything we can say to it.


    Turns out, this Kaiser Dragon is a male, and his name is Alejandro.


    Alejandro has been friend with Javier long before they have their own names. Just Kaiser Dragon and ck Slime. Theirst meeting was Javier telling him his name, and giving the Kaiser Dragon the name Alejandro.


    We told Alejandro about the truth of Javier, humans world, and the cult while I still using my magic to make Alejandro inhale as much calming magic as possible.


    "So¡­ that''s¡­ what¡­ happened¡­" Alejandro said slowly.


    "Umm¡­ you can speak normally. No need to be so slow," I said.


    "Understood. Anyway, the Monsters World is going to ruin because of the cult? If it was anyone else who said that, I will think that they are crazy. But if it''s you who knows Javier, then I''ll trust you," Alejandro said. This time, he speaks faster than before.


    "Then, will you help us? I''m a summoner, but if you don''t want to make a contract with me, it will still be helpful if you can help us," I said.


    "¡­no. I can only act normally now because of your magic that makes me calm. After you stopped using your magic, I will return to be in bad mood again. After all, the source of my current mood is still here," Alejandro said.


    "Hmm? You said that the reason you changed is still there? And you know it? Why won''t you make it go? It should be easy for you, right?" I asked.


    "I can''t do it alone. And I keep scaring other who approaches me, so I can''t ask for help," Alejandro said.


    "Then, I''ll do it. What should I do?" I asked.


    What is it that makes a Kaiser Dragon, someone so powerful and big that can eat Spot even in his original size whole? It must be something dangerous.


    "My back is itchy," Alejandro said.


    "¡­what?"


    "Like I said, my back is itchy," Alejandro repeated his words.


    "¡­that''s it?"


    "Just look at my body! You should be able to see why I''m in constant bad mood all the time! I even hear rumors about me being the scariest monsters in thest few thousand years even though the reason is because I can''t scratch my own back," Alejandro said.


    His body? Well, even with my Divine Vision, I can''t see everything since he''s too big. But if the reason is that his back is itchy and he can''t handle it, then¡­


    "Your limbs are too short. And your neck won''t help you look at your back. It''s also short. Rather,pared to your body, everything else about you is much smaller," I said.


    Short arms, short legs, short tail, and short neck. All thosebined and it''s impossible for him to scratch his back. And he had it for thousands of years already?


    Just how big is the tick on his back?


    This time, I used Divine Vision to see his back. Just the range that I can see. And I was surprised to see that his back has be an ecosystem with many monsters inhabiting it.


    "¡­Alejandro, you have be a living ecosystem. There''s a forest on your back, water source, probably from the rain, and monsters living on your back," I exined to Alejandro what I can see with my Divine Vision. And that''s not everything on his back.


    "What!? Oh, I heard about Aura users a little from Javier. He can''t help me since he has no power, but I still listened to him talking about everything he experienced as a summoned monster. You are strong, right? Then I want to ask you to take care of everything on my back and scratch it," Alejandro said.


    So, in the end, I still have to scratch his back?


    Well, at least I won''t get bored looking for the Angel''s Sanctuary all the time. I can take my time defeating monsters on Alejandro''s back.


    "What do you think, Spot?" I asked.


    "If it''s just defeating monsters, as long as none of them are as strong as a dragon, I should be able to help," Spot said.


    "Then, let''s stop our search again today and spend the rest of the day clearing up his back. It''s weird to see so many trees rooted on his back," I said.


    It should be painful for Alejandro since living beings are living on his back. But he only feels itchy?


    "That''s the case. We will help you defeat the monsters and scratch your back. And then, will you help me destroying the cult?" I asked.


    "Yes. Though I will not make a contract with you. I''ll just be like Spot and help you whenever I could," Alejandro said.


    "But how will you help us? I don''t think my portal is big enough for you to fit in. You won''t be able to get into my world because of your size. Can you change your size like Spot?"


    "No. But I can use magic. You can just open a portal big enough for my magic," Alejandro said.


    "That might be a good idea. But what kind of magic can you use?"


    "Highly destructive magic," Alejandro said.


    With his size, probably what he meant by highly destructive is something even bigger than Spot''s breath attack. Now I''m interested.


    "Other than that, I can use Dragon''s Intimidation. No one able to stand still when they feel my intimidation. And many has fainted from it. It should be useful for you," Alejandro said.


    "Yeah, that might be good. Can you try it on me now?" I asked.


    "Sure. But because of your magic, I''m too calm. So the effect is lessened by a lot," Alejandro said.


    "Alright. Spot, Victoria, brace yourself," I said.


    And then, Alejandro used his intimidation.


    I feel intimidated by it. My body and my mind are telling me to get away as far as possible, but I endure it with using Aura and my will to protect myself.


    It''s over. I endured it, but the two monsters didn''t. They both fainted and now we''re free falling from the sky.


    I quickly run and grab Victoria who falls from my shoulder, and quickly wake Spot up.


    "Spot, wake up! You''re falling!"


    After using various means to wake him up, he finally awakes as he looked up to the sky in fear.


    "Roy, try to not get his help as much as possible," Spot said.


    "¡­yeah. That was too powerful, but it might be useful. Next time, I''ll tell you to escape before he did it again," I said.


    And that was Dragon''s Intimidation when the power is lessened since I make him calmer. Just how powerful is his real power?


    Anyway, to get his help, I need to clean his back from the monsters and everything that shouldn''t be on top of a living being. I guess one day will be too difficult for it.


    It hasn''t been long, but let''s ask the others if they want toe.

 Chapter 397 - Were The Dragons Backscratchers!

    "So, what should we do?" Victoria asked.


    "Cleaning up Alejandro''s back obviously," I said.


    "But how?"


    Hmm¡­ the monsters here might be good for training. Maybe I''ll get some other people to help us. As for the forest, maybe we need either Sunny or the elves. Or we can just ask Julia to burn everything. Though I don''t know if Alejandro''s back can take it.


    I think he can. After all, it''s been so long since this ecosystem was built behind his back and he''s still alive. I believe he can endure fire. Though I''ll ask Sunny first if she can do it.


    "For now, let''s take a look around his back," I said.


    "Okay. But he''s very huge. As expected of a Kaiser Dragon. I can''t even see where his wings are," Spot said.


    Now that he mentioned it, I also haven''t seen Alejandro''s wings. And with a body this size, a p of his wings should be enough to create a wind as powerful as a hurricane. We will be blown away if that''s the case.


    "Let''s move carefully as to not get blown away by the wings," I said.


    This time, I no longer use air magic to make Alejandro calmer. Which mean I can''t talk to him any longer or he will just get angry and try to kill us again.


    We look around the back of Alejandro. And when we feel it''s quite windy, we figure that that''s where his wings are. Let''s avoid that ce. I also didn''t see any monsters here. I guess it''s normal since no monsters dare to live around Alejandro''s wings.


    "Wait, what''s that?"


    I spotted something near the ce where Alejandro''s wing is attached on his back. They are stones. Wind element magic stones.


    "¡­they should be magic stones with high quality. Let''s grab them and give them to our wind magester," I said.


    Thankfully, using Aura to stick my feet on Alejandro''s back, I don''t have to worry about being blown away.


    But this sire is incredible. Howe on the back of a living being, a whole ecosystem was made? There is even a forest. And since it''s on Alejandro''s back, the trees must have obtained nourishment from his blood. No wonder he''sining about being itchy for so long.


    Even humans get disturbed just by mosquito bites.


    I am standing on Alejandro''s thick scale on his back. With my Divine Vision, I can see red and white under me. It''s Alejandro''s blood and bones. Since we''re on his back, I think it''s his spine.


    Well, let''s ignore his anatomy. We''re here to clean the forest and the monsters. We''re the Dragon''s Backscratchers!


    After making sure of the locations of Alejandro''s wings are, I opened a portal to everyone who ising to this world and told them about what happened. I ask them if they want toe and be the Dragon''s Backscratcher.


    Seems like they all have split up. Other than Fabio who is with Carmen, and Jewel who is with Lina''s two monsters.


    "¡­no. Anything but that name," Ka said.


    "I agree with Ka. Well, I think I find a good location myself. And since that''s the back of a dragon, I don''t think I can use my earth magic freely," Celestine said.


    Other than those two, there are many other who refuse to take part in being the backscratcher. It must be because of the name.


    I told the wind mage that being close to Alejandro''s wings should be a good ce for them to cultivate. And they happily entered the portal.


    "We''ll be staying here for a while, but we won''t help you cleaning the monsters and scratch the dragon''s back," Veronica said.


    ¡­and in the end, the ones helping me are Shelia, Jewel, and Lina''s two monsters.


    "Sunny, can you uproot every tree here?"


    I asked Sunny, in which she replies with a nod.


    "You have gotten that much stronger, huh? That''s amazing. I''ll be counting on you for the forest. Let us take care of the monsters," I said.


    We can divide the job in two since Alejandro''s pair of wings separated the forest to the one on the upper half, and the one on the lower half.


    "Shelia and Jewel, you two take care of the ones close to his head. Over here. As for me, I''ll take care of the ones close to his ass. Sunny will start uprooting the roots of the trees from here while Elsie will protect her. Alright, Spot, Victoria, let''s get close to his ass!" I shouted themand.


    "Don''t say it like that! It feels like we''re wiping his ass!" Victoriained.


    I ignored herin as I walked to get past the strong wind made from Alejandro''s wings. I can see Ang, Shirley, Veronica, Wendy, and Kron already started cultivating with the magic stones from here.


    Good luck, everyone!


    I passed them all and enter the forest on the lower back side of Alejandro.


    There are many monsters on Alejandro''s back, and most of them are flying monsters. Though there are some beast type monsters as well. I guess they will climb up on his back whenever he''s resting.


    But if there''s so many monsters here, I guess he never dip himself into water. If that''s the case, the monsters here won''t survive.


    Well, his back is good for training purpose. I''ll tell him to do itter after everyone''s training is over. For now, let''s defeat those monsters as soon as possible. That way, we can continue our search for the angels sooner.


    Though if there are any good candidate to be my next summoned monster here, I will stop searching for the archangel. Probably until I reached advanced level in my summoning element.


    "Roy, the monsters here are not as strong as those onnd. I want to try and fight them alone," Victoria said.


    "That might be a good idea. Spot, let''s split up as well. It will be done faster that way," I said.


    "Okay. Should I destroy the trees while we''re at it?" Spot asked.


    "Hmm¡­ I think it''s fine. just be careful and not damage Alejandro''s back any more than it already has," I said.


    "Yeah, I don''t want to feel his intimidation again," Spot said as he left.


    "Victoria, good luck," I said to Victoria and leave this ce to her.


    Just as she said, the monsters here are not as strong as the monsters onnd in this world. She might be able to handle it herself.


    Wait, I just improved to advanced level in my summoning. Did she get another new ability? Maybe that''s why she wants to test it here. Well, even if she didn''t get any new skill, that''s still fine. After all, there''s no one else that I can trust more than her.


    I trust many people, but she''s the number one. Unless it''s rted to her hobbies of course.


    It took some time until I managed to defeat the monsters in the area. Let''s check on Spot and Victoria.


    For Spot, he has done well as usual. I don''t have to worry about him.


    "Let''s check on Victoria. or do you want to help the others?" I asked.


    "No need. Since it''s their training, I don''t think it''s a good idea to bother them with my visit," Spot said.


    In the area he manages, there are many trees that got blown away. The trees have fallen from Alejandro''s back. I don''t know where they willnd. I hope it''s not where the werewolves and the elves are living.


    We checked on Victoria, and she''s also doing well. Though not as well as us, it''s fine since she can''t receive damage.


    And there''s only one monster left that she needs to defeat.


    It''s a cyclops. A big humanoid monster with one eye.


    Victoria turns her two hands into swords as she keeps shing them at the cyclops.


    And as the finisher, she stabbed the cyclops'' eye to kill it.


    "Bravo! In swordsmanship, there are still many things I can learn from you. And I don''t think you have taught me dual-wielding before. Teach me when you have time, will you?" I asked.


    I learned how to use weapons from her. Although I mainly use spear now, I practiced in everything else as well. But I haven''t learned about dual-wielding from her.


    I have used dual-wielding before, with one hand holding Reizpear and the other hand is wielding Victokatana. But I haven''t learned any technique yet.


    "I can teach you someter. Is everything over?" Victoria asked.


    "We just need to take care of the forest. Once all the monsters and the trees disappear, if Alejandro still feels itchy, I will turn you into a rake to scratch his back," I said.


    "¡­we''re really bing the Dragon''s Backscratchers, aren''t we?"


    Since we''re done here, we take a walk on Alejandro''s back. I think we''re going to the direction of his bottom.


    As we got closer, I noticed that even though there are still a lot of empty space down there, there are no monsters there. That''s weird.


    "Spot, did you finish everything over here?" I asked.


    "No. I saw that there''s no monsters here, so I turn around. But it''s¡­ ow! I can''t go any further!" Spot suddenly said as if he''s afraid of something.


    "Me too!" Victoria also unable to move further down Alejandro''s back.


    "What''s wrong you two?" I asked.


    "Don''t you remember about the Dragon''s Dung Flower? Well, there''s no flower here. But we''re closer to the source. That''s why we can''t get any closer," Victoria said.


    That mean we''re getting close to his ass? Well, even I don''t want to get closer. But¡­ maybe they will be useful.


    No! I can''t just enter it and grab them as if we''re mining! And I don''t want to collect those that have fallen to the ground!


    Let''s not talk about this to Albert. If we do, he will ask me to get as many as we can.


    "We''ll go back to where the others are and see if Sunny have finished clearing the forest on the upper back. And do not mention anything to anyone about this. I don''t want Albert to ask me to collect¡­ you know? Just don''t," I said.


    Victoria and Spot both nodded after hearing it.. Now, we return to the upper back.

 Chapter 398 - I Wont Collect Them!

    When I return to the upper half of Alejandro''s back, Jewel and Shelia has taken care of every monster here. They are awesome.


    As for Sunny and Elsie, they are busy taking care of the forest. Sunny is using the trees near her as nourishment, and when they are shrinking from Sunny absorbing them too much, Elsie used her tentacles to pull them out.


    I can see from where the trees were supposed to be, blood ising out. I guess I''ll call Kater after every tree have been cleared out so she can heal Alejandro.


    Although the monsters have been taken care of, clearing the forest will take some time. So, we decided to take a rest here tonight. Though Sunny is still not tired at all and can continue absorbing the trees. Or maybe it''s because she''s absorbing the trees that she doesn''t need to rest.


    In any case, I can leave it to her. She will tell me once she''s done with this part so she can go down on the lower part of Alejandro''s back. Let''s try talking with Alejandro now.


    "¡­Roy, you do it alone. I don''t want to meet him unless I have to," Spot said. It''s rare for him to not be around me. But I guess Alejandro''s intimidation still scares him.


    "Okay. You can get some rest. Victoria and I will meet him," I said.


    "¡­I''ll pass this time. I''ll stay here instead. I''ll give you some clones to bring just in case," Victoria said.


    ¡­I guess Dragon''s Intimidation is too scary. And that was not his full strength!


    Anyway, since it will still take time for Sunny to finish everything, I''ll have a chat with Alejandro.


    This time, instead of flying in front of him, I walked on top of his head. This way, he won''t be able to kill me by sucking me into his mouth like before.


    "Alejandro, can you hear me?" I asked.


    "Who''s that!? How do you know my name!?" Alejandro was surprised.


    "It''s me, Roy. Or do you want me to stand in front of your eyes instead?" I asked.


    "Yeah, do that. I don''t like it when someone is talking next to my ears," Alejandro said.


    I guess I can''t escape from being in front of him. Well, at least he''s not as hostile as before.


    "Hey, can I call you Andro? That''s sound easier for me," I asked.


    "Oh, a nickname? Sure!" Andro said.


    "Okay. Andro, we have cleared the monsters on your back. And some of the trees are still there, but we''re currently taking care of them. I brought some of my friends to help. I''ll introduce you to themter," I said.


    "Oh! No wonder my back feels a little lighter. I''m still itchy, but it''s better now," Andro said.


    "At least you won''t have any problem with staying in constant bad mood again. Once we cleared everything, you will help us, right?"


    "No," Andro said without hesitation.


    "Why!?"


    "Well, I asked you to scratch my back. Once the itches are gone, only then I will help you," Andro said.


    "Fine. That''s the promise anyway. Well, since my friends are taking care of your back, let''s have a chat, shall we?"


    "Okay! It''s been so long since I have someone I can talk to," Andro said.


    Well, with how he keeps being in bad mood over itches on his back, it''s no wonder he scares off everyone that approaches him.


    "Anyway, when was thest time you dive into a water?" I asked.


    "Never. There''s noke fit enough to hold my body, and the sea water is just awful," Andro said.


    "¡­no wonder there are many living beings on your back. And how does Javier talk with you if you have never stopped flying?"


    "Well, even before he became contracted monster, he has been staying on my back for who knows how long," Andro said.


    "Then, how did you two get separated?" I asked.


    "That day, after he told me his name from his master and gave me a name, it''s raining and water enters my eyes. I shook my head like usual, but I only realize that Spot forgot to stuck his body on me when I saw him falling. That''s thest time I saw him," Andro said.


    ¡­that''s ridiculous. Whose fault was it? Andro for shaking his head, or Javier for forgetting to stuck his body to Andro?


    In any case, I don''t think I want to think that thest time I will interact with someone so close to me will be over just like that. It''s too sad.


    "So, you have been flying all this time and you nevernded once in thousands of years?" I asked.


    "Well, thest time Inded, I broke my own legs due to my weight. That''s why I keep on flying,"


    ¡­his life is full of inconvenience.


    "About your meal, you just suck in every monster in front of you?" I asked.


    "Right. That''s why when you are in front of me, I thought of sucking you in since I was hungry."


    "What about now?"


    "There were some birds in front of me. I''m not hungry anymore," Andro replied.


    When he said birds, I don''t know how big they really are for him to not feel hungry anymore. But at least one of the sources of his bad mood is gone. There''s only his itchy back left.


    "Anyway, there''s something around the base of my wings. What are they?" Andro asked.


    "Oh, it''s probably from my friends. They are wind mages whom are currently cultivating their magic to improve. Seems like doing it next to your wings makes their progress increases a lot more. Do they bother you?" I asked after exining about Ang and the others cultivating with wind magic stones on his back.


    "No. Instead, the feeling was rather pleasant. I like it," Andro said.


    "Good! Then, the next time they tried to cultivate again, I''ll bring them here. Don''t worry, they are all good guys. I''ll introduce youter after I scratch your back," I said.


    "I can''t wait to meet everyone. It''s been so long since I had friends," Andro said something sad.


    We continue chatting for a little longer, when I noticed that it''s already dark.


    "Andro, I''ll go check on the others. We will spend the night on your back, so don''t just suddenly change trajectory all of a sudden, okay?" I said.


    "Sure. But since the forest has been cut, don''t you need a shelter?" Andro asked.


    "Don''t worry. Victoria, the ck Slime, can make a lot of clones of herself. We can use them as our shelter," I said.


    "Okay. See you tomorrow?"


    "Yeah. See you tomorrow."


    In the end, this Kaiser Dragon is just one lonely dragon who have been alone all this time. Although he doesn''t have much to talk about, he''s a good listener.


    I told him about everything I experienced from my previous life to after returning. It''s fine, because I don''t think that even if the cult members can enter this world, they will be able to find Andro easily. And I have told him to not trust anyone I haven''t introduce to him.


    Which mean I have to bring everyone in my world as well. I''ll go tell Sonia tonight to inform the others.


    "And that''s the case. Make some free time tomorrow for me to bring you here," I said to many open portals that I opened. Thanks to increasing my level in summoning to advanced, I can open more portals and make them open for much longer. Victoria also able to make even more clones now. Though I don''t think she has any new ability.


    "¡­this time a Kaiser Dragon? With the size even bigger than the capital?" Albert asked.


    "Yeah. I''m lucky to have meet him while searching for the angels," I said.


    "¡­at least we have another powerful ally. But you didn''t make a contract with him?" Albert asked again.


    "He said it''s fine to let him help like Spot did. Though I can only open a portal for him to use his magic. It will also be troublesome if a Kaiser Dragon suddenly appears in our world. That will only alert everyone instead because of his size," I said.


    "And how''s the backscratching progress?" old man Henry asked.


    "For now, Ka is currently healing the spot where the trees were. She will continue tomorrow after Sunny cleared up the rest on the lower back," I said.


    I wish we could have more healer among us. That way, Ka won''t have to carry the burden of healing everyone alone.


    "By the way, that''s a dragon, right? I want to ask you something important. Is the effect simr? Your new friend, the Kaiser Dragon''s dung, and the Dragon''s Dung Flower?" Albert asked something that I wanted to hide.


    "Even if you''re asking, there''s no way that I will go there to collect some poops! Why don''t you do it on your own tomorrow!?"


    "¡­at least it''s working. That might be useful as well, you know?"


    "I know! But do I want to know? No!"


    After chatting for a little longer, I closed the portals.


    Even after healing, we will still have to scratch his back.. Well, I don''t think that will be a problem.

 Chapter 399 - The Dragon Is Afraid Of My Friend

    Sunny and Elsie has cleared all the trees on Andro''s back. And Ka also has healed the wounds. It''s time for the scratching part.


    "Well, since you''re the only one who can do it, you should do it. We won''t be able to help," Ka said as she rested on Andro''s back.


    Since I''m going to introduce everyone to Andro, she will stay here until I finished scratching his back. Well, first, I need to know which area is itchy the most. Let''s talk with Andro.


    I run to Andro''s head and asked him about it.


    "Andro! Which part is the itchiest part? We have taken care of everything else. And the wounds are all healing now," I said to Andro.


    "Oh? No wonder I feel my back is lighter. Well, there are many parts that feel itchy," Andro said.


    "Yeah. Wounds that are healing are itchy. But which part? If I just scratch everything but you still feel itchyter, it will be annoying to go back and forth," I said.


    "And how can I point where it''s itchy? With my finger? Are you mocking me?"


    Oh, right. His limbs are too short for his giant body.


    "Hmm¡­ give me a minute," I said.


    After that, I go back to Andro''s back, grabbed a paper and a pen from the base along with Sonia.


    "What''s wrong, Roy? I thought you will introduce everyone together," Sonia said.


    "I''ll introduce you to Andro first. I''ll exinter," I said.


    I put the paper on the t area on Andro''s back. I''m going to draw his body.


    Hmm¡­ now that I have drawn him, he is more like a flying turtle than a lizard. I guess it''s just my imagination that all dragons are lizards with wings. Some of them actually turtles with wings. Or is he tortoise?


    And then, on the paper, I draw squares with numbers in it. From one, to a hundred. Ten squares horizontally, and ten squares vertically. That''s the position of Andro''s back that he will tell me if they are itchy.


    From one to fifty is above his wings, and the rest are below his wings. It will be easier for him to exin where it''s itchy.


    "¡­so, you want me to ry his message to where he feels itchy the most?" Sonia asked.


    "Yeah. Please do it for us. Since once he feels better, he will be our most powerful ally so far. Though we can''t bring him to our world," I said.


    "Sigh¡­ fine. Let''s meet him," Sonia said.


    After finished the drawing, I show it to Andro. I stick the paper on Blobbies so Andro can see it better.


    "Here''s the picture of your back. And this is Sonia, my ghost friend. You can tell her the number of the location that you feel itchy. She will ry the message to me," I said.


    "Oh, a ghost! Ghosts are scary," Andro said.


    "You''re a fricking dragon! Howe you''re afraid of a ghost!?" I shouted.


    "Don''t worry about it, Roy. It''s once in a lifetime moment for me to feel more superior than a dragon. Let him fear me," Sonia said.


    "¡­Andro, she''s our reliable ally. With her help, we canmunicate easily no matter the distance. Especially since the war ising. Although for her, it will take some time for her to travel between two worlds. I think you won''t see her that much, but I hope you try to get along with her," I said to Andro.


    "I''ll try to not get scared. For now, it''s number 7," Andro said the part that he feels itchy as he looks at the paper.


    "Understood," I replied as I quickly run toward the location marked number 7.


    With this, it should be done faster rather than scratching everything but not knowing if he really needs that part scratched or not.


    "Roy, that seems useful for human as well. Numbering part of your back," Victoria said as I transformed her into a rake.


    "Yeah, but I don''t need to. I have been using you all this time to be my backscratcher," I said.


    "¡­turns out, I have been a backscratcher for a long time," Victoria said.


    After that, when I Andro feels that the part I scratched with the rake is no longer itchy, Sonia would appear and told me to go to the next part.


    Sometimes, I need to scratch it just a few times. But other times, I have to scratch it a lot of times.


    Andro is really strong. Even if I use all my power, without using Aura, his back won''t even get wounded. And when I use Aura, instead of pain, Sonia would appear and ry a message from him saying to do it like that.


    ¡­I guess my training for today is by scratching Andro''s back. It helps improving my strength.


    "Roy. He said that thest one is number 94," Sonia said.


    "That''s thest one? It''s faster than I thought. I guess numbering his back works well," I replied.


    "Oh, and he''s no longer that afraid of me now. I guess my time being more superior than a dragon will be over soon," Sonia said as she disappears.


    Well, if Andro became too attached to her, that will be a problem in a way. After all, we need Sonia the most among us tomunicate with each other. Although I can use portal, I don''t know of a good time to suddenly open a portal to the kings. Who knows if they are in the middle of a meeting with someone we can''t trust?


    If she''s staying here for too long, it will be difficult for us tomunicate. Well, I''ll think about it when I have toter.


    After I finished, I go to where the others are resting at the moment and tell them to meet Andro. I also told those who are cultivating to stop for a while today to meet Andro. After all, those wind elements mage will probably meet him more often than the rest of us.


    "Wait! Kron is breaking through!" Veronica said as I was about to get Kron.


    "Really? I guess we''ll dy the introduction for you guy. Alright, the wind mages will stay here to protect Kron just in case monsters appear. The rest will meet Andro with me now," I said.


    I can''t believe that we will have another expert level mage now! And it''s Kron. I thought that it would be Ang or Wendy. But this is fine. Since Kron loves to go on adventure on his own, his chance of survival will increase now. And now, he can go to even more dangerous ce. And if he meets some expert level mages from the cult, he will be able to take care of them on his own. This is a nice surprise.


    After I gather everyone, I put them all on Spot''s back. We will ride to the front of the Kaiser Dragon instead of walking on his head. It''s easier for him to see us all this way.


    "Andro! Hey! How is your back?" I asked.


    "Never been better! This is the first time in thousands of years that I feel so good," Andro replied.


    "That''s good to know! Anyway, here are the people I''d like to introduce you to¡­ why are you all so quiet?" I asked everyone riding on Spot.


    "¡­well, I know that we are on a dragon''s back. And the size is even bigger than the capital. But seeing him in front of me like this is¡­ too intimidating," Ka said.


    "That''s right. It was really crazy when Roy said that he wants to talk with the dragon at first," Victoria said.


    "Don''t worry. He''s a nice dragon once you get to know him. Also, he hasn''t used his Dragon''s Intimidation yet. That alone can make even Spot lost his consciousness," I said.


    "Right! Want to experience it yourself? Then I''ll¡ª"


    "Stop right there! Do not attempt to use it again when everyone is here! And now that I''m not using my calming gas, the effect should be much stronger than before! We all will fall to our death if you use it again now!" I interrupted Andro before he finishes speaking.


    "I see¡­ I guess you will never feel my full intimidation then," Andro said.


    "I hope that''s the case. Well, these are my friends. There are some who are still around your wings since one of them is breaking through. I''ll let you meet themter. Anyway, here they are! King, king, king, empress, queen, queen, princess, prince¡­"


    "Wait! Are you going to introduce us just like that!? Introduce us properly!" Albertined.


    "Then introduce yourself! Andro is our friend now, so you can''t be afraid of him!" I shouted.


    "Though I am still a bit afraid of your ghost friend¡­" Andro said, but I choose to not listen.


    "Just at least make sure Andro knows your faces!"


    This time, they each introduce themselves to Andro properly. Although some of them have been staying on his back for a while, this is the first time they see his face.


    Some of them are still frightened by him, so those who can endure his presence better introduce the others who are too scared to talk. Though after everyone introduce themselves, they can finally talk properly. Especially after knowing that the dragon is afraid of the ghost. And they know the ghost better than the dragon.


    With this, I can send any one of them here so Andro can protect them just in case. Now we have a moving fortress.


    Hmm¡­ will he allow us to build one on his back? That seems difficult. Maybe if it''s just tents, it should be fine.. Or else, he willin about itchy back again.

 Chapter 400 - Angela Is Learning

    After introducing everyone, we returned back to the wings area where we see the other wind mages are protecting Kron from monsters approaching. But thanks to Andro''s wings'' pping, not many monsters approaching him. Though those who approached are more powerful. But at least they are good enough to be their practice targets.


    "Well, for now, I''ll bring you all back," I said to the kings.


    "No. It''s really been a long time since I fight. I have taken care of everything and let Hector do the rest for today. I''ll do my own training now. And I think it''s safer for me to train here with everyone," Albert said.


    "Yeah. As a leader, it''s difficult for us to find a time to fight. I''ll do it as well," old man Henry said.


    And so, everyone joined as well.


    "¡­you should have told me yesterday. The monsters yesterday are weaker than the monsters now. Oh, wait. There are some weaker monsters approaching. I guess you can take care of them," I said.


    "Sorry, but I can''t be of help here. I can''t use my earth magic in this ce," Celestine said.


    "Oh, right. Well, what''s your other magic elements?" I asked.


    "I don''t have any. The reason I can improve my earth element so fast is because I don''t have to focus on other elements. Though I think my improvement rate is not as fast as Ang''s," Celestine said.


    ¡­I should have asked her about her other elements early on. Well, I guess it won''t be much problem if she''s always on the ground.


    Maybe I should find another wand to manipte earth just like the one in Ka''s possession. With that, she should be able to bring soil everywhere.


    Or maybe I can make her an armor? Made from a certain mineral that earth mage can use. Maybe stone? Or iron?


    "Celestine, what is the strongest mineral that you can manipte with your earth magic?" I asked Celestine.


    "Why?" Celestine asked.


    "Well, I''m thinking of making some sort of armor or protection that you can manipte yourself. Maybe I''ll make one for Ka as well. Though she has the wand, so she doesn''t really need it. If you want, I''ll try to make something fashionable, so you can wear it anytime. But¡­ I guess the only magic you can use with it won''t be much, but at least it should be enough for you to build a barrier with it when you are in the location without any soil or rocks like this ce. Do you want it?" I asked.


    "I''ll think about itter. While I''m in this world, I''ll try to find a dungeon and hopefully, I''ll find a good treasure. As good as Ka''s wand," Celestine said.


    I guess that''s better than an armor of rocks. In fact, I can''t see anything fashionable about rocks.


    "Since I can''t be of help here, bring me down. I''ll go find a dungeon on my own," Celestine said.


    "Oh, if you find any good dungeon for practice, left a Blobby to mark the location. I''ll bring some people over there to practice in the future. The same goes for everyone who finds dungeons. Well, I''m bringing Celestine down with portal now. Is there anyone else leaving?"


    And so, Celestine, Ka, and some others decided to leave. Leaving the kings behind. They are fighting bird monsters right now.


    "Sister! Get stronger faster so you can go home sooner!" Lynn said to her sister.


    She''s the spoiled empress of Consenza. At least she has a good subordinate with her.


    As for her subordinate¡­ she''s being hit on by a king of another country, Harold. Even though his wife was there with him. Oh, she pped him and told him to go fight a monster on his own. Well, he gets what he deserves. Maybe?


    While I watch the others fighting, there''s someone who is only watching Kron. It was Ang.


    "Ang, what are you doing?" I asked.


    Usually, it would be Ang who wants to fight monsters. But now, despite seeing so many monsters nearby, she didn''t move at all. It''s fine since the others are here. And she''s strong enough to protect herself. I guess she must be thinking of something while watching Kron breaking through.


    "I''m learning," Ang said.


    ¡­excuse me?


    Learning? Ang is learning? That''s something I would never imagine her to say after knowing her for so long. What is she learning?


    "What are you learning?" I asked.


    "Hmm¡­ how do I exin? Well, Kron is breaking through in his wind element, right? And the other expert level mages, when they were breaking through, only one element increased, right? What if I cultivate all four elements I have and breaking through all of them in one go?" Ang asked.


    "That''s¡­ that''s something that many people have studied, but never reached any conclusion. So, they gave up and say that it''s impossible for anyone to breakthrough in more than one element at once," I said.


    "I guess that''s impossible, huh?" Ang said.


    "No. I said that they gave up. If it''s you, I think it''s best for you to do what you want to do. Do you want to try breaking through all your four elements at once? Or give up just like those people? For me, I think you are much better than those people in magic. They only research magic and probably none of them are as strong as you are. If you think you can do it, then do it. I said it before that unlike the others, you are much more of a genius in magic. You have to find a way to get stronger yourself," I said.


    "I see. I will leave this ce now and find a ce to cultivate my other elements. Whether I fail or not, you will support me, right?"


    "I will," I replied.


    "Thank you. Then¡ª"


    "If you''re leaving, go with Spot. It will be faster that way," I said.


    "Hmm? I can leave on my own," Ang said.


    "It''s faster with Spot. And you won''t have the time to change your mindter this way. Also¡­ seems like Spot wanted to leave this ce as soon as possible. Although we''re friends now, he''s still afraid of Andro. Let''s go now and I''ll introduce you to Andro before you leave," I said.


    After that, I introduce Ang to Andro, and then Ang leaves with Spot. Spot will returnter after bringing her to a good location.


    Since the location for her to cultivate her wind element is here, and I know a volcano that she can go to train her fire element, she only needs two more location.


    For her ice element, she said she wants to go to a peak of the highest mountain here. I think that will be dangerous since a location like that might be nested by powerful monsters. Just like the volcano. Though I defeated it before, so she''s safe.


    But she said that they will be a good opponent for her as well. What matter for me is that she''s fine.


    As for her earth element, she doesn''t know where to go. But Ka and I suggested for her to find a ce with a lot of mineral. A good mining location. Maybe she can also ask Celestine about where to go to since she''s probably looking for the same ce.


    It''s unrted to Ang, but for other elements that is not mentioned, like light element, water element, lightning element, air element, and even healing element, I asked the others to inform me in case they found a good location to cultivate.


    "There''s two conditions for a good location to cultivate. And only one of them are needed so it can be considered as good. A ce abundant with that certain element, or a ce with the absence of that certain element," Ka said. She''s the one who read books the most, so her words are believable.


    Which mean for light element, it''s best to train in a location without any light. Probably deep underground.


    Water is the sea. It''s simple.


    Healing? I don''t know. Hospital?


    Lightning? There should be a ce where lightning struck very frequently. I heard that there''s a ce like that in our world. But there are already many lightning mages cultivating there since it''s quite popr. I hope we can find a ce like that in this world.


    Air? Well¡­ Victoria said that there''s nowhere on earth without any air. And because air is too widespread all over, it''s difficult to find a ce with a lot of concentrated gas in one ce.


    "The best choice would be if you go to the space. Go beyond the atmosphere of the earth," Victoria said.


    Going to the outer space¡­ that''s something I have never thought about. Maybe I''ll go try it out after I find the angels.


    After a while longer, Kron finally finished breaking through. I opened portals to let the tired kings and empress to return back to their own country.


    "How is it? I''m already an expert level mage, Roy! Aren''t I so awesome?" Kron said proudly.


    But¡­


    "¡­I feel like the discussion we had during the time you are breaking through is more important than you breaking through. Ah, well, anyway, congrats. I''ll introduce you to Andro now," I replied halfheartedly.


    "¡­why are you so rude? Just say that you''re grateful to have another powerful mage!" Kron said. Though I ignored him as we all fly toward Andro''s face since Spot is gone.


    Well, since the rest are wind mages, and I can fly on my own, it''s a simple matter.

 Chapter 401 - New Way Of Transportation Through The Sky

    "And that''s everyone. What do you think?" I asked Andro after introducing everyone to him.


    "I''m happy to have a lot of friends. But they won''t stay with me much, aren''t they? You are busy with what happened in your world, right?" Andro asked.


    "If I find anyone who doesn''t want to participate in the war and just live peacefully, I''ll bring them to you. I don''t think it''s a good idea to build something on your back after youined how itchy your back was, but we should be able to build some tents. And there''s even a huge dent on your back where we can collect water from the rain. We''ll make you a living fortress in this world, where everyone who only want to live peacefully without doing anything take refuge," I said.


    Though I''m the one who wants to live peacefully the most. Well, it will be difficult for us if I''m not fighting. And even if I don''t participate, in the future, the cult will attack this world. After that, where else should I escape?


    That''s why I can''t stop fighting now. But after the cult''s many failures, they will do anything they can to destroy the worldter. Most likely during the tournament.


    And I hope they will be fully eradicated at that time. And that is the reason why we''re in a hurry to get stronger.


    "Anyway, since you''re no longer in constant bad mood, you should also be able to make friends with any monsters in front of you, right?" I asked.


    "Well¡­ seems like rumor about me being an evil dragon has spread too much here. So, all of the intellectual monsters who canmunicate are afraid to meet me. And those stupider monsters can''t be made into friends," Andro said in a sad tone.


    "¡­I hope you will find a good friend. Though I will be staying in this world most of the time for the next few months, so we will often meet," I said.


    "Really? We will talk every hour?"


    "No way! Just once in a day is more than enough! And I will probably only meet you once a week," I said.


    This dragon is just one lonely dragon. That''s what you get when you didn''t wash your body for so long. You will be itchy all over your body and no one wants to befriend you.


    "But I will at least tell anyone who wants to cultivate their wind element to have a chat with you whenever possible," I said.


    "Good! Thank you, Roy." Andro said.


    There are many weird monsters.


    Werewolves who love fighting, serpent who is extremely friendly toward me because I''m an Aura user, the cowardly elves, and this lonely dragon. What kind of personality do the angels have? I hope they are not the annoying kind.


    "Well, I guess this is it. I will be leaving now."


    "You''re leaving already? Why won''t you stay with me for a little longer and chat?" Andro asked.


    "Obviously, because I want to get stronger. Now that I''m an advanced level in my summoning element, I want to find a powerful monster that can help me in destroying the cult. Since you won''t do it, I need to find someone else," I said.


    "I see. And what is the monster that you think good enough for you?" Andro asked.


    "Well, Spot told me that an Archangel is really strong. I''d like to check them first before making a contract with them. In fact, we were in search of their sanctuary when we encountered you. We made a stop here for a while, and it was worthwhile that we get to know each other," I said.


    "Yeah, and I am so d to be able to meet with so many new friends. Anyway, if it''s the Angel''s Sanctuary you''re looking for, we just passed it," Andro said.


    "Wait, what!?"


    "Before you came here, I saw their sanctuary floating in the cloud. I didn''t crush into them, but once they got close to my wings, they should be blown away further. If you don''t leave now, you might not be able to meet the archangel," Andro said.


    Really!? We just passed by the sanctuary we''ve been searching for? And now it gets further and further because of a p from his wings?


    "Andro! Sorry, but I will have to leave now!" I shouted as I was about to leave.


    Since Spot is with Ang, I will go there flying on my own. Since it was just now, it shouldn''t take too long if I move now.


    "I hope you can make a new friend over there," Andro said.


    "Wait, where was the sanctuary when you pass them?" I asked.


    "Hmm¡­ it was on my left side," he replied.


    "Above your body or below?"


    "Above. Since it was closer to my wings, it should have blown away quite far by now," Andro said.


    "Okay. Thank you, Andro. I''ll be leaving now."


    Before I go to where the sanctuary is, it''s best if I ask for the other''s confirmation if they saw anything passing by or not.


    "Sanctuary? No, I didn''t see anything." Veronica said. The others also didn''t see anything. I guess I''ll try finding it on my own.


    "Roy, it''s my time to shine!" Victoria suddenly said as I was about to take off.


    "What is it?" I asked.


    "Since the sanctuary was blown away by the wind, it''s best if you go along with the wind as well. Looking at how powerful the gale was from the p of his wings, it seems like being blown away will be faster than if you leaped from here and start running," Victoria exined.


    "So, you want me to get blown away? I think that''s a good idea since we can go faster that way."


    "Not just being blown away! You need to glide so you don''t need to use your Aura and your magic. And if it''s your physical strength, I think you are strong enough to endure it and still have a lot of stamina after," Victoria said.


    "Just tell me what it is."


    While Victoria started exining, Veronica, Wendy, and Shirley who were about to cultivate, curiously gather around seeing that Victoria is about to make something unusual again.


    "It''s called¡­ Hang Glider!" Victoria said as he jumped from my shoulder to the ground. I mean Andro''s back.


    "And what is that?"


    "It''s a glider that you''re hanging onto!" Victoria said.


    "Well, that is quite self-exnatory. But what is a glider?"


    "It''s a¡­ this triangle thing with a ce you can hang onto at the bottom. And it''s¡­ hmm¡­?"


    "Just show it to us! You can transform into it, right? And if it''s something that can easily get blown and elerate with the help of a wind, it might be useful for those who have wind element! Can''t you see everyone is curious!?"


    "Oh, sorry. Well, it''s something like this."


    Victoria then transformed into¡­ a triangle thing with a ce I can hang onto at the bottom. That is indeed the right exnation!


    "Hmm¡­ so, it''s called a glider? And this triangle thing is working like a sail on a boat? The wind will help to elerate and move the glider forward. Seems like your world has some fun stuffs. Something that I know it can be fun. Not the weird things that you have told me about," I said.


    "Yeah! Now that you mentioned it, I should have shown this to the wind mages before. This way, they can fly faster, and use less magic. Though it''s difficult to hide," she said.


    "You can make your clones transform at will, right? Since now that I have leveled up, you should be able to do it better now no matter how far the clones are. Maybe the clones can now transform with just the will of the one holding them?"


    "Oh, right! I haven''t tried that yet! Maybe this is the ability I learned after you leveled up!" Victoria said.


    It''s weird to see a glider talk like this. Even though it''s the first glider I''ve ever seen.


    "Let me try it for a bit," I said.


    As I lifted the glider, I can feel I was being pushed by the wind. This should help me gliding in the sky. Oh! Now I see why it''s called glider!


    "So, I just need to hold this ce?"


    "Yeah. And I will support your body like this."


    Victoria then wrapped something like a belt around my waist. At least it''s not all about my grip strength. If so, it will be dangerous for the others.


    After holding on to the glider correctly, I jumped a bit and got blown away by the wind.


    "Whoa! So fast!"


    While in the air, I bnced the glider so we can follow the wind. I''m only trying here first to show the other wind mages. As for the sanctuary, well, they are secondary at the moment.


    Hmm¡­ this is faster than if I run on my own. But what if Ibined my running and this glider?


    "Victoria, no need to hold my body. For me, just holding on the rod is fine," I said.


    After my body is free, I tried running in the air. Now I''m much faster when I follow the wind direction. But it''s hard when I tried to fight against the wind direction. Well, since it''s Victoria, I can ask her to transform back when we''re going upwind.


    I return back to where the others are, and let Victoria trains her clones to transform from distance.


    Before, I need to set amand on the Blobbies before giving them away. But if they can transform by the will of those who are holding them, I don''t need to pre-set themand anymore. And it''s better this way.


    ¡­seems like they enjoyed the glider so much. That''s good.


    Since they are wind mages, Victoria doesn''t need to exin to them how to control the glider.


    Now that we have another way of transportation. Our wind mages can go faster now while using less magic.


    I''ll go tell Ang about thister after I meet the angels.

 Chapter 402 - Meeting The Fallen Angel

    "Let''s go now before the sanctuary got even farther!"


    After training in how to control the glider, I show it in front of the wind mages and they are quick to learn how to do it since they can use wind magic. Unlike me.


    And since they now have their own Blobbies that can transform at their will, I will continue my search for the angels. Though their Blobbies are stronger than back then when I was still an intermediate level, they are still breakable. I told them to be careful with it.


    And now, I''m right next to Andro''s wing. Trying to glide toward where the sanctuary should go to.


    "Then, we''ll take off now! See youter!" I shouted to Veronica and the others who are staying behind. They still want to cultivate there.


    With Andro''s wing as a boost for my glider, we flew away very fast. It''s about as fast as Spot in his full speed. I still hope that I can at least run this fast in the future.


    "Wooohooo!! This is amazing!" I shouted in excitement.


    "I know, right? Although I was more of an introvert in my previous world, I always wanted to go hang gliding. Unfortunately, in my lifetime, I was unable to. Then, after I die and reincarnated to this world, I learned how to use Aura. And when I was told that I can get a special ability, flying is the first thing thates to mind," Victoria said.


    "Then, do you have any other interesting from your world?" I asked.


    "Many. Let''s see¡­"


    "Wait! Just the good things. Not the weird and bad things," I said.


    "There are still many. Well, I can''t tell you everything since this world''s technology is not as advanced as my world''s, but I can tell you some. Though I think it''s best to talk about itter. We''re flying right now, and it''s best for us to just enjoy the wind and the view," Victoria said.


    "Right. Oh, and tell me if you see the Angels'' Sanctuary. Don''t forget our real goal in flying," I said.


    "Yeah, but¡­ hmm?"


    "What''s wrong, Victoria?" I asked.


    When she was about to say something, she suddenly stopped. Does it mean that someone is destroying a Blobby to call me?


    "Oh, seems like Ang and Spot found one ce already. Only one more, but it seems that Ang chooses to stay over there for a little longer. Which mean Spot will being for us soon," Victoria said.


    "I see. Well, if it''s him, he should be able to notice where we areter. Does he follow me by the smell like the werewolves?"


    Maybe he has simr powerful smelling sense like the werewolves. Just like how he somehow noticed that we were leaving the tree dungeon previously.


    I enjoyed the flight for about one hour when I suddenly caught a glimpse of a ruin above the cloud. Is that the sanctuary?


    I look closer to it with my Divine Vision, and see that there are many humanoid creatures, with very simr appearances as us human, but with a pair of wings on their back. They must be angels.


    But why do they look depressed? Is something the matter?


    "Victoria, I think I''ve found it. But it seems like it''s not a good time to meet them. They seem to be in a bad situation," I told Victoria.


    "Hmm? What''s wrong with them?" Victoria asked.


    "They just look listless right now. Something is going on with them," I said.


    "Then, do you want to leave now and return again next time?" Victoria asked.


    "No. In fact, this might be an opportunity for me. If I can somehow help them, the archangel might be willing to be my contracted monster," I replied.


    "¡­you''re such an opportunist. But do you really want them to be your contracted monster?" Victoria asked.


    "What do you mean?"


    "Well, you don''t want to fight them to be your contracted monster. But how will you know if they are strong enough if you''re not fighting them?"


    "¡­does it mean I still have to fight them? I guess it''s inevitable. Good thing I have this glider to preserve my stamina and magic," I said.


    Let''s check the ce first before wend.


    First, like Spot said, it''s above a cloud. And seems like the cloud can be stepped on, just like a normal ground.


    And above the cloud, there are many buildings made of stones. Simr to stone building made by humans. But many of those stone buildings are destroyed? If the angels are at least as strong as what Spot told me, they should be able to rebuild those buildings again. Don''t tell me that they are actually weak?


    Well, able to fight and able to lift heavy weights are different.


    For example, when I was fifteen, I am not strong enough to lift a weight of over one hundred kilograms. But at that time, after the Mellian guards learned how to train their bodies and became muscr, each one of them should at least strong enough to lift weight of over one hundred kilograms. But if we fought back then, I could easily defeat them all if it''s a fight without magic.


    But now, I''m already much stronger than those Mellian guards and can easily lift much heavier object. Well, that''s not the point.


    The point is that, the angels might actually be good in fighting, but not in lifting weight.


    Maybe the problem they are facing is their destroyed home. If I could help them, it will be easier for me to negotiate with them.


    Anyway, what could cause such destruction to happen? An earthquake? Or in this case, cloudquake? Is that even possible?


    ¡­that''s actually possible.


    Now that I think about it, I think I found the reason why the buildings above the cloud are destroyed. It''s because of Andro.


    Since he said that the sanctuary was close to his wings, it got blown away with much power. No wonder if the buildings above the cloud can get destroyed like this.


    "Let''s get there and greet the angels, shall we?"


    Inded on the floating cloud after Victoria returns back to her Slime from and rested on my shoulder like usual. I miss the time when she was my grappling hook. But I don''t need that anymore.


    The angels are looking at me curiously, but I don''t feel any hostility. They seem to have lost all their will to live. Just because their homes are destroyed?


    "Hello! I came in peace!"


    I said that, but no one reacted. Don''t tell me that they are unable to speak ournguage?


    "Does anyone understand what I''m saying?" I asked.


    Still, no one reacted. What an annoying creature these angels are!


    "Hello? Hello!?"


    I look around, and as if they lost their interest in me, no one is looking my way. What the hell!?


    There are male angels and female angels. They are all wearing white clothes that covers most part of their bodies. They seem very conservative.


    "Hey, you! Can you tell me where your leader is?"


    Since no one is reacting at all, I''ll just ask someone if they can bring me to their leader.


    But when I asked one of the male angels, he suddenly broke down to tears as he pointed his finger to the middle part of the cloud.


    Over there, I can see a male angel with three pairs of wings. That means six-winged angel. Is he the archangel?


    But¡­ the thing is, that angels'' body is being trapped by a fallen rock from a building. Now that I look around, I see that the rocks are just put together, without any glues or cement. Obviously, the buildings will fall apart.


    Never ask an angel about architecture. I make a note in my mind.


    That six-winged angel is being healed by other angels who are crying. That''s why even if his body is crushed, it keeps healing. But overtime, his ribs will get broken from the weight of the rock. That''s why he needs to be healed again and again.


    Just lift the rock from him! If everyone works together, it should be easy!


    When I approached the literally ''Fallen Angel'', he noticed me.


    "Oh? A human? It''s rare for us to have a human as our guest¡­ sorry, but I will probably die soon," the fallen angel'' said.


    "No! Lord Graham! You can''t say that!"


    Other angels then told him that he can''t die yet. At least I know that the angels here respected this fallen angel.


    "So¡­ why is no one lift the rock?" I asked.


    "Because¡­ no one¡­ is strong enough¡­" the fallen angel said.


    "¡­does no one here know the word teamwork?" I asked.


    "¡­what''s that?"


    "You can just lift the rock if everyone works together! That''s what I mean!" I shouted. Looking at how ridiculous they are, I''m kind of reluctant to make them my contracted monster.


    "Working together?" the fallen angel asked curiously.


    "AAAH! Just let me do it!" I shouted in anger.


    And so, with my Aura concentrated on my fingers, I stab my fingers onto the rock, and threw it away easily. Like I said before, the me right now can lift heavy object easily.


    "There! You''re free now and you won''t die anytime soon! Unless you force me to kill you!" I shouted.


    "This¡­ thank you very much! You are my savior! No, you are our savior!"


    With the fallen angel, whose name seems to be Graham, in the lead, all the other angels followed to kneel in front of me.


    But then, other angels started asking for help.


    "Oh, Lord Savior! Please save my trapped son as well!"


    "And my friend!"


    "And my father!"


    "¡­do it yourself, youzy bastard!"


    There''s no way I can keep calm with them around me. Let''s get our business here done faster so we can go home.


    Even if I ended up having Graham as my contracted monster, I just hope that I won''t interact with them much.

 Chapter 403 - Do I Need Angels?

    These annoying angels refused to work together so much that I can''t handle it anymore.


    "Victoria, we really don''t need them to be our allies, right?" I asked Victoria who is resting on my shoulder.


    "¡­let''s leave. There should be many other powerful monsters that you can choose to be your next summon," Victoria agreed.


    I was about to leap into the sky when multiple angels surrounded me and stopped me from leaving. Some of them are grabbing my legs, some of them are blocking my path, and some even used light barrier to stop me! Isn''t this a teamwork?


    "If you guys can do this much, you should be able to rescue everyone together! You don''t need my help in everything, you shitty angels!" I shouted in anger.


    "I see¡­ so you refused to rescue my kind. Then, I can''t let you live any longer. I won''t consider you as my savior again. From now on, you are my¡­ no. Our enemy," Graham said as he and the other angels grabbed their weapons and prepare to fight.


    "So be it! And show me how strong you are! This way, I can see if it''s worth iting here or not!"


    I have prepared myself to get into a fight with the angels, but I never thought that it would start like this.


    More importantly, their weapons of choice are spear! I can learn spear techniques from them. I hope.


    Since they are using spear, it''s normal for me to use spear as well. I won''t use Victoria this time, so I will use Reizpear.


    If they are strong, I will think about making the archangel as my next summoned monster.


    Let''s see¡­ I''m being surrounded by winged angels all around me. And there''s a barrier preventing me from escaping.


    Since I''m unable to float unless I move my feet, after they caught my leg, Inded back on the ground and kicked away the angels who caught me.


    Now, not only around me, there are angels wielding spears floating above me. And they actually thinking of fighting me instead of saving their people.


    The number is¡­ the leader of these angels, the archangel Graham, is away from me. He''s still inside the barrier and already holding a gold spear which seems to be more powerful than the other angels'' spears.


    As for the other angels, there seem to be about thirty of them surrounding me. And since from their previous reaction on how I lifted the rock trapping on the archangel, I can tell that they are physically weaker than me. Which mean I still have hope on winning.


    Let''s try defeating them without killing them. And since they can use healing magic, it should be fine to injure them as long as they are not dead yet.


    ¡­I''ll refrain from cutting their limbs. Though this will only be a choice if I am stronger than them.


    That means breaking their bones are fine. Good.


    "A man with a spear against all of us? Are you crazy?" Graham asked me.


    "¡­ for me, you are far more crazier. You can help the others by working together, but you choose to fight me instead. Something is wrong with your head. If you''re proud of your strength, you should be able to help the others easily," I replied.


    I can ask Shelia or the others to help, but let''s see their spear techniques first.


    Since it''s impossible for me to defeat them easily because of their healing magic, I will call Sheliater. Or maybe Spot as well. But I think just Shelia alone to help meter will be good.


    "Roy, do you want me to help?" Victoria asked.


    "No. For now, I need to see how powerful they are," I replied.


    Being surrounded with only a spear in my hand, let''s try fighting them without Aura first.


    "Come!" I shouted as multiple angelse toward me.


    ¡­yes, all of the angels areing toward me all at once together at the same time. From left, right, front, back, and above.


    Which means¡­ they are crushing against each other.


    "Hey, move!"


    "No! You move!"


    "Get away from me!"


    "Where''s the human? Where''s the human!?"


    "Haah¡­ haah¡­ being crushed like this feels so good¡­ Oof!"


    ¡­that was me. No, I didn''t say that. I just hit the guy who said that with the butt of my spear. And he''s knocked out in an instant.


    Seriously, just how bad is their teamwork!? They manage to hold me back here in this barrier, but when they have to fight, it turns into something like this!? They are crushing each other!


    Shit. Just why did I have to suffer so much just to search for these angels?


    I can''t waste my time any longer. There''s no point in continuing in this stupid fight. Let''s forget about how I won''t use my Aura.


    I thrusted Reizpear in an empty spot between the stupid angels, then with my strength and Aura, not to the point where I use my full strength, I swing Reizpear around and hit them all.


    "¡­this battle is soical. Let''s get out of here fast," Victoria said.


    I agree. Though I only managed to defeat twenty of them in one swing. There''s only eleven of these winged idiots left. The Archangel, Graham, and ten other angels.


    Though if the others got healed fast, they will return.


    Although they are stupid, I feel pitiful if I have to kill them. So, I broke the de of Reizpear on my own. Now it''s just a staff.


    These ten angels are now fighting me one on one. That''s good. Knowing that they are too weak together, they choose to fight me alone.


    The first one stepped forward. He''s an angel about with simr height as me. But he''s too skinny.


    He''sing at me with his spear, and I blocked it with my staff. Now, it''s a training. I won''t use my Aura anymore.


    We exchanged attacks and I can tell that his skill in using his spear is much better than mine.


    Victoria taught me how to use spear, and I gained a lot of experience when I fought with only my spear. But the angel I''m facing is more technical in his spearmanship than mine. Though after a few bouts, I managed to get the upper hand as I learned how to handle my spear better.


    I swung my staff upward, and the end of my staff hit him right on his chin. Knocking him out in an instant.


    As I thought, no matter how better they are in using spear, their biggest weakness is that their physical strength is too weak. I can ovee his technique with brute force alone.


    "Next!" I shouted.


    Seems like the angels have somewhat recovered. And they are preparing themselves to fight again. This might take a while.


    "Victoria. Sorry, but I might stay here for a while longer," I said.


    This is also good to train my stamina and endurance.


    I don''t think I am good enough to dodge all their attacks. Though I won''t let them hit me on purpose.


    Now that they realize fighting one on one impossible to win, and having too many of them fight at once also hard, the archangel gave themmand to group up into two or three angels at the same time to fight me.


    "Do not fight him alone! And do not go out with too many people! He''s experienced in fighting!" Graham shouted.


    Well, he''s right. But from what he said, it seems that he also somewhat has experience in fighting. At least even more than the angel I fought previously.


    Though the biggest problem still exists. If he can givemand well like that, howe the angels can''t cooperate together!?


    My second battle was against two experienced angels. Though I still win through brute force. And I managed to copy their technique.


    Now, my spearmanship is almost as good as the angels. And with my strength, I have surpassed them.


    When three angelse at once, since I have gotten used to their attack pattern, there''s no problem in defeating them. Though they still get healed and return back in line.


    Wait, since when was there a line to fight me!?


    "A chance!"


    While I was distracted by the line, an angel noticed that my back is open andunched an attack. A thrust aimed at my heart from my back.


    Unfortunately for him, my Divine Vision lets me see my surrounding without the need to face the other way. It''s another easy victory.


    ¡­honestly, if they are trained, they could be as strong as the werewolves. Maybe stronger since they have magic. But these angels live too long in stupidity. At least they seem to be worth training.


    Though if it''s impossible for them to obey mymand, I refuse to take them in.


    "Wait, is this all the angels here? All of them are lining up to fight me?" I asked after seeing the line getting longer.


    "That''s right. You have to rescue those who are trapped under the buildings, or you will fight all of us!" the archangel said loudly.


    "You''re all idiots! If none of you staying behind with those who are trapped, who will heal them if they''re dying!?" I shouted.


    "¡­they can heal themselves," the archangel said.


    "Then why did you give up on living when you were trapped!?"


    "¡­kill him!"


    Shit. Even the cowardly elves are much better than these angels.


    "¡­next time I read any literature with a phrase ''The heart of an angel'' or ''Angelic heart'' I will cross out the words," Victoria said.


    "Is that all you can think of right now!?"

 Chapter 404 - Twelve-Winged Archangel

    So far, I learned a lot of spearmanship from the angels. It was worthwhile staying here and entertain these angels.


    But it has be too repetitive!


    They approached me, use the same technique, and fail. Then, I knock them out.


    At first, it was difficult. And as it became too repetitive, I became bored. Why are they so stupid!?


    "Tsk! You''re stronger than I thought. But soon, you will fall. And you will rescue the trapped angels!" the archangel, Graham, said.


    "Like I said, if you want to save them, save them yourself!"


    This guy, and the other angels, know that I''m a human. But they don''t seem to know about Aura. I guess none of them have lived for more than a thousand years.


    And that just makes it easier for me to fight them.


    It was too easy in fact my moves became repetitive as well.


    Now that I don''t care anymore, I have used Aura to defeat them faster. After all, if everyone is knocked out, no one would be able to heal them.


    Even those who are just lining up preparing themselves to fight me, I knocked them out with the staff of Reizpear. At least I''m still kind enough to not kill them.


    "Come on! If you''re all going to keep this stupid act, it will lead you to your extinction!" I shouted.


    After all, it was really easy if I choose to kill them. Though I don''t know about the archangel since he still hasn''t made any action yet.


    If they choose to provoke me more with their stupidity, I will kill them all. No mercy for them.


    "Enough! All of you are too weak against him. I''ll take care of him alone!" Graham said as he stepped forward with a spear in hand.


    The spear in his hand is made of gold. And seems to be much stronger than the other angels'' spears. Let''s see how good he is.


    "After all this time and you only step forward now? How about we make a bet?" I suggested.


    "What bet?" Graham asked.


    Obviously, what I want is manpower.


    Although the angels are weak, I can see that they have potential to be stronger than werewolves. Especially since they can use magic.


    Werewolves themselves have self-recovery skill, but angels have healing magic, and also light magic. Though I haven''t seen them use their light magic.


    Well, other than shooting beam like Sunny did, I don''t know other offensive magic a light mage can use.


    "If you win, I will rescue everyone that got trapped under the building. If I win, you will be my next summoned monster, and have all the angels obey my order," I said.


    Well, I will rescue the angels whether I win or lose. After all, I needed more people, or in this case monsters, to help us and be our allies. And even if I lose here, I just need to rescue the angels. Easy. Though I don''t think I will lose here.


    "Good. I agree with that condition. Let''s fight!" Graham said.


    And as expected of their stupidity, he agreed without any hesitation.


    But this guy seems to have confident in his skill. Let''s see what he got.


    Oh? He''s faster than the other angels. But not fast enough for me to counter.


    As he swung his golden spear, I blocked it with my staff. Unexpectedly, his attack was much stronger than the other angels''. I have to use Aura on the staff to block his attack.


    Now, this is a real fight. A fight where my only choices are to win, or to escape. I don''t want to die a stupid death again after all. I will escape if I think I''m going to die.


    Graham was confused why I could block his attack, but he decided to ignore his confusion and continues our exchanges.


    He''s better in his technique, speed, and weapon quality. But I''m better in term of power. Though his healing magic will help him recover if he ever got injured.


    This might take a while until it''s over, but I can learn a lot from him.


    A good technique, even when the man using it is visibly weaker than the opponent, can hold much more power than a muscr man without any technique.


    ¡­fuck.


    I''m not losing the fight, but I enjoyed it. Why?


    I was supposed to be someone who fought with a clear goal in mind. Not for the sake of winning. But look at me now!


    Is it because I have gained confidence in my strength? Or is it that I just want to prove the result of my training?


    I just want to live in peace after destroying the cult, but I''m enjoying a fight now.


    And it''s also because Graham is someone I can fight on par with after Grandpa Werewolf.


    If it''s like this, one day I will die the same way as I did before in my previous life. I don''t want that. I have many things I want to protect now.


    Alright, Roy. That''s enough enjoying the fight. Keep rational mind, and find the opponent''s weaknesses. Find a chance to win this in an instant instead of wasting too much time fighting.


    I have learned enough to be able to improve myself next time. And once I win, Graham will be my familiar and I can ask him to train me. Let''s just win this already.


    "Tch! I can''t win like this. Everyone! Attack him!" Graham gave the order to the other angels who were watching. And they obeyed as they flew toward me while Graham take a step back to catch his breath and use healing magic on himself.


    So, once he''s cornered, he will be smarter? Should I call Shelia and Spot to help?


    Not yet. I want them to know that I''m the strongest when Graham be my familiar. I will make sure no one disobey my order next time.


    For the werewolves, I defeated their king and became the next Werewolf King. And they easily obey my orders. They also said that they won''t fight for the title at least until the cult is destroyed.


    But for the angels, I need to show them how powerful I am to make sure that they are afraid of me. Different person, different treatment.


    Let''s go all out as well now. I don''t want to be someone who enjoys battle too much again.


    And to put fear into their hearts, I recovered Reizpear''s de back to the shaft. Now, it has be a normal spear instead of just a staff.


    As expected, some of them have frightened expression in their faces.


    Can my Aura be used to cover the de so I won''t give any fatal injury? There''s no need to try it out. I have this power to kill.


    But what if they won''t obey me after I killed some of them?


    ¡­I''ll try not to kill them.


    With my spearmanship learned from them, I shed their arms and legs easily. They can heal themselves, so it will be fine.


    I keep shing, thrusting, and swinging my spear toward the angels as more of them got knocked out faster. And they seem to be out of mana as their healing rate is slowed down.


    Good. This way, I can finish this faster.


    "He''s just one human! Kill him!" Graham ordered.


    Seems like he no longer wants me to rescue the trapped angels anymore. Well, I don''t care. I''ll just kick everyone''s asses.


    Oh? As I was about to fight back, some of the angels in the back used light magic to blind me. Well, that won''t work on me. I have my Divine Vision.


    "Blinding me won''t work!"


    "What!? He''s fighting with his eyes closed!?"


    Seeing that they have no chance, Graham¡­ he gritted his teeth and whispered something.


    Although I can''t hear him, and my lipreading skill is not that good, at least I know that he''s saying something like ''I have no other choice''.


    "Move away! I will use everything I have to kill him!" Graham shouted.


    And then, as he ordered, the other angels move away and keep their distance.


    Meanwhile, I see that Graham is¡­ transforming?


    Wait, there are three more pairs of wings on his back!? He has twelve wings now!?


    "Now, you''ve seen my final form. I will kill you right now," he said.


    "¡­what about rescuing the angels?"


    "Die!"


    He ignores me as he charged toward me with the gold spear in his hand.


    He''s much faster now, but since he''s charging straight forward, I can predict his movement.


    But I was wrong.


    As I was about to face him, he suddenly changes direction. Graham who was in front of me is now in my right side.


    I can''t block him. So, the only thing I can do is¡­ to escape.


    As I saw him suddenly moves to my right side, I ignored his presence and run forward. His attack missed, and I gained distance.


    "Huff¡­ that was close. So you''re faster now? So what?" I provoked him.


    "What? Of course I will kill you!"


    "That''s wrong. I won''t lose after all. So, prepare yourself to be my familiar," I said.


    I can still see a chance for me to win. And there''s also something that I want to try.


    Well, for this fight, I will use Victoria to the fullest.

 Chapter 405 - Using Portals To Fight

    The twelve-winged archangel is difficult to fight. He was just faster than before, but that''s enough to cause me trouble.


    Of course I can still react fast enough to dodge or block his attack, but if the battle continues for a long time, I will lose.


    He can heal himself, but when my attack gave him some damage, he let the other angels to heal him instead. Which mean he still has a lot of mana to use.


    And then, Graham suddenly gets some distance from me. And he''s aiming his shining gold spear at me.


    Wait, shining?


    Oh, no! It''s a light beam from his light magic!


    I pulled my spear back, and in a thrusting stance, I waited for him to release the beam.


    "Light Beam!" Graham shouted the name of his magic.


    I focused my sight on him, so when he makes a sudden movement, I can react. Meanwhile, the beam is going straight at me, as I thrusted my Aura to my spear and pierced it at the magic.


    Not just Graham, all the angels watching are surprised seeing that the powerful beam that Graham unleashed didn''t hurt me at all. And in fact, my spear pierced through the beam. And the force of the spear continues flying toward Graham, and injured his body.


    "Ugh! Heal me!"


    Well, that''s what happened each time he got injured. It''s annoying that I have to continue fighting endlessly.


    I can try using air magic to calm him down with calming gas, but for now, I need to fight him normally first. I want to see how strong I am now against a powerful enemy. After fighting that artificial master level mage, I know that just being strong alone in physical strength, is not enough.


    "How did you do that? That was not magic, wasn''t it?" Graham asked.


    As expected, he and the angels here don''t know about Aura. Maybe the only thing they know about human is that they use magic, or they are summoner. Let''s ask him right away.


    "Before we continue our fight, I have a question to ask you. What do you angels know about us humans?" I asked.


    "That''s right. You should have worshipped us thinking that we are the envoy of god. But why do you act like that and be hostile toward us?"


    "Are you seriously asking me that? I wasn''t hostile at you at all! I was extremely disappointed by your stupidity! I was about to leave, when it was you angels who prevented me from leaving!"


    "I guess the only way to solve this is if one of us lose."


    "You''re a total idiot!"


    Do angels never care about other people''s opinions beside their own?


    I guess it''s time to use Victoria''s ability to the fullest. Combined with my summoning magic.


    I had Victoria made a lot of Blobbies, and threw them all around me. Some of them are on the ground, and some I made to have wings on it and float stationary without moving at all. Unless I had Victoria made them move.


    "What''s this? ck Slimes? You think you can defeat me with the help of these little weaklings?" Graham asked.


    "Yes. With this, my chance of victory increased by a lot. Probably close to a hundred percent already. Let''s continue our fight, shall we?"


    Graham charged forward at me again. But when he got close, I know that he will change direction. So, what if I make it so it was too close for him to change direction?


    As he passed a floating Blobby, I opened a portal in front of him, which connected to in front of me. The distance suddenly changed. Graham who was supposed to still have enough leeway to maneuver and change direction, suddenly got greeted by the de of my spear.


    "What the¡ª"


    Graham quickly flew back with the help of his wings, but I managed to graze his cheek with my spear.


    "Oh, you reacted faster than I thought. I thought you are just fast, but with slow reflexes. I guess I was wrong," I said.


    My new skill, since my summoning level has increased and my mana quantity also improved because of it, is to use portal when I am fighting with the enemy. This way, anywhere I attack, as long as I opened the portal, I can reach the enemy.


    If I had thought of this when I fought the artificial master level mage, I could defeat her on my own. Maybe.


    Again, I pulled back Reizpear, and opened another portal directly in front of Graham. Thanks to his previous charge, there''s a Blobby attached to him right now. It will be easy since I can use portals to connect the two of us.


    I thrusted Reizpear into the portal again, and Graham flew back to avoid my spear. Then I pulled Reizpear quickly, and close the portal, and open it again toward another Blobby. This time, it''s not the Blobby attached to his front. But the Blobby on his back. Which mean my attack wille from his back.


    The de of Reizpear stabbed him from the back. But it was not fatal as I didn''t hit his vital organ.


    "Ugh! Everyone, get him again!"


    I guess even after increasing the number of his wings, and became so much faster, he still can''t win against me. Well, that''s fine. I thought of this skill while thinking of using it against multiple enemies as well.


    This time, I opened a portal one by one, while running around. Since I can only open a portal from me to the monster I made a contract with, or her clones, I need to made some distance between one portal to the next. And the portal I opened can''t move as well. So, this way, I opened a path to anywhere within this area.


    I still remember of course to where each portal is connected. Which mean, I have the advantage of the terrain now. If only I could have as good memory in this as remembering names¡­


    When an angel about to attack me, I entered a portal and attacked different angel. Some angels tried to enter the same portal that I entered, but I close it before they entered.


    If I close it when they are in the middle of the portal, nothing happened. Just the separated part will return back to normal. But the ce they go to will be the ce with most of their body parts intact. Which mean if it''s just a head, that head will disappear and rejoin with the rest of his body.


    If only I could split their body when I close the portal, I would have another powerful skill. Unfortunately, the portal doesn''t work that way.


    Though it''s good to know.


    That''s why I closed the portal before the angels entered so I can get some distance from them.


    The fight continues for another hour, and I still maintained the portals. Though I feel a little tired now. I guess I will close the portals now.


    "Hah! Are you done with those things?" Graham asked.


    "Yeah. I think that I don''t need to use it anymore. Anyway, does no one feel tired after fighting me for so long? And to think that some of you who got their bones broken are stilling back again and again to fight me. Are you all masochists?" I provoked the angels.


    "I am! How did you know?"


    Someone actually admitted it. And he was the angel who was enjoying himself while being crushed by the stupid angels who attacked me all at once before. He was the first angel I knocked out.


    "No wonder you are persistent in fighting me. You just want to feel pain," I said.


    "You are ri¡ªhmpf!"


    Before he could finish his sentence, another angel approached him and blocked his mouth.


    "No! Because we know if we keep this up, we will be able to win sooner orter!" Graham said.


    No, that''s impossible. After all, for a while already, I already noticed Spot is already here. Right above our heads. He''s watching us while camouging himself so he won''t get found out. I guess he feels disappointed to see that the angels are much weaker than he had thought.


    If I asked him toe, he could defeat everyone easily. Maybe Graham will give him a bit trouble, but not to the point that Spot will lose.


    I can''t ask Spot to join, but I can ask someone else. It''s Shelia.


    She will fight the angels and see for herself how strong the angels are. Though I doubt she will lose. I think she''s about as strong as Graham when he only has six wings.


    Well, let''s call her.


    I used my normal summoning magic and teleported Shelia here in an instant. She was confused for a bit, and realized what''s going on as she prepares her fighting stance.


    "Shelia, meet the angels. They were not that strong, so please don''t identally kill them," I said to Shelia, who is looking around at the angels¡­ weirdly.


    "Something is wrong with the angels," Shelia said.


    When I look around, I see that the angels are¡­ separated between two types. The female angels who are looking at Shelia with interest, and the male angels, including Graham, who is covering their eyes with their hands. Though they can still see through the gaps between their fingers.


    "I-indecent! Y-you! How could you wear something like that around!? T-that''s exposing your skin too much! You can''t show other people except your mating partner too much skin!" Graham shouted while pointing at Shelia.


    What crossed my mind after seeing that was¡­ an easy victory.. I should have brought Shelia here sooner.

 Chapter 406 - One Punch To Finish The Battle

    And here we are. In the Angel''s Sanctuary which was mostly destroyed by Andro''s p of wings. And we were supposed to be fighting the angels right now. But the fight stopped as soon as I summoned Shelia.


    Shelia just appear after I summoned her, and there''s nothing wrong with her. Shelia is in her normal clothes, which is the bikini-like clothes that the female werewolves wear.


    She has other normal clothes, but when she''s fighting, as to not hinder her movement, she wears her usual attire. The outfit that only covers her important parts.


    I don''t know about the angels, but it seems like they are too conservative with their choice of clothes. Since all the angels here, whether they are male or female, only wear white clothes that cover most of their body part. Their clothing didn''t hinder their movement, so they can fight normally.


    And so, the conservative male angels, were too embarrassed seeing Shelia appears in front of them with a lot of exposure.


    "Y-you should cover your body more!" Graham shouted.


    And that''s how our intense battle stopped. Just because of Shelia''s appearance.


    Hearing that and seeing how Graham is still peeking at Shelia from in between his fingers that cover his eyes, I''m thinking of something evil to finish the fight sooner.


    And seems like Victoria understands me.


    "Victoria, would you like the honor of defeating them?" I asked.


    "This finishing move is the evilest thing in my mind. But I will do it anyway," Victoria said.


    Since we no longer need to use our special move with too many Blobbies, those Blobbies around us disappear. And Victoria jumped away from me.


    In front of all the angels watching, Victoria transformed from her usual ck Slime, into a beautiful and voluptuousdy wearing sexier bikini than what Shelia and the female werewolves usually wear.


    But this transformation, Victoria didn''t use her usual form. Which is the original Victoria. Not the Victoria from her previous life, nor the Victoria in the past after reincarnating to this world. It''s another person that I think Victoria knew from her time in her original world.


    Well, I suppose she will be embarrassed to be seen by others when it''s her usual appearances. But this sexy stranger is fine, because it''s not really Victoria''s real look.


    But when we''re alone, she doesn''t mind wearing even sexier clothes than this in her usual form. Considering our rtionship, that is something normal.


    Now, with Victoria transformed like that, it''s obvious that the angels can''t take it anymore.


    "UWAAA! S-So indecent! What are you doing!?" Graham shouted.


    "No! I mustn''t look! I mustn''t look!"


    "I have a mating partner already! I have a mating partner! But¡­ too much temptation!"


    Graham and the other male angels scream in agony. Though what the hell about that mating partner? I guess the angels don''t have any concept of marriage, or dating. No wife, no husband, no lovers, just mating partner. That''s just like¡­ wait, that''s normal, right? Among monsters?


    Meanwhile, the female angels are¡­


    "¡­wow! She''s a werewolf, right? So that''s normal in their culture? I''d like to wear something revealing like that. But that''s too much."


    "I know, right? But that human seems to act normal around the twodies. Is that much normal with humans as well? I''m curious about them now."


    "So beautiful! Maybe I can seduce my mating partner like this back home? I have to try it. But where do I get to wear something like that?"


    That''s the female angels'' reaction. They are¡­ well, they act just like girls. Even Shelia, when she first enters our world, she was fascinated by the fashion of us humans. Especially the female humans.


    "All girls love beautiful things," Victoria said as she transformed her outfit to that from our world. One where it''s not that revealing, but still fashionable.


    And obviously, the female angels are fascinated with the fashion. And the battle is now changed into a fashion show with Victoria as the model.


    "Well, how about that? Will you surrender now and made a contract with me? If you do, I will not only rescue the trapped angels. But I will also bring fashionable clothes from our world to everyone here!" I said.


    "I won''t give up! I will never surrender to something like temptation!" Graham shouted.


    "Then how will you fight when you can''t even hold your weapon!? You dropped your own spear in the middle of a fight just so you can cover your eyes with your hands!"


    I pointed my finger at the gold spearying on the ground. Graham dropped it as soon as Shelia appears.


    Graham then hurriedly grabbed his gold spear and collected magic to the tip of that spear. I know that magic. He used it once before.


    He''s going to use Light Beam to attack me. Does he really think that he can aim at me with one hand, while the other hand is covering his eyes? Oh, he''s still peeking through the slit between his fingers.


    But it was easy for me to block as I just need to swing my spear in front of me.


    Now that he''s feeling uneasy seeing two sexydies around me, all his movements are predictable. What a disappointing end. I will finish it fast.


    Since he can''t do anything else, he charged right at me with his spear in his hands. This time, he''s holding it properly while trying to maintain his sight only at me. Though as I said before, his move is predictable.


    Combined with how I have gotten used to his speed, I know when to react. So, I split Reizpear into pieces again and pocketed the pieces. I don''t need it anymore. And there''s something more satisfying than stabbing the archangel with a spear.


    To punch him in the face.


    I pulled back my fist as I prepared a big swing. I''m confident that with the archangel''s condition at the moment, he won''t move away like before. And I will hit him square in the face.


    And as he gets closer, although it was still quite far, I started moving my legs. It''s the footwork I learned from the ostriches. With this, his spear won''t hit me.


    And while he''s still in distance, I moved my body so my left side is at the front. With this, the power of my swing will be stronger.


    And then I swing my fist. With an arc from above my head, and swing it down to the earth. And as expected. Midway, during the time my fist is swinging down, it meets the archangel''s face right in the middle as his spear missed my body.


    Graham noticedte as my right fist is getting closer, so it''s impossible for him to change direction and dodge.


    With that, I punched Graham as hard as possible to the ground. Or the cloud.


    His head hit the cloud hard, and make a dent on it as his body bounced up. That''s the first time seeing somebody bounced after getting punched to the ground. Maybe because it''s a cloud.


    He has lost his consciousness. This is my victory.


    The angels looked at me in fear. And Shelia seems to have a lot ofins since she didn''t have any action at all.


    Everyone, either the male angels who were unable to take a look this way before because of the two sexydies, and the female angels who were fascinated by thedies'' outfits, are speechless seeing their leader got knocked out in one punch.


    "Your leader has lost! He will be my contracted monster soon and you all will obey me!"


    With amanding tone, all the angels reluctantly agreed to be my subordinate. I have a lot of teaching to them. But seeing how they fight, I can say that they have a lot of potentials. Enough for them to be at least as strong as the werewolves, or even stronger.


    "Now, you all have to work together to rescue those angels who are still trapped under the rubbles! Oh, you can heal him as well. His skull is fractured from my punch."


    I gave the order to the angels to work together. At least it was just to lift up some heavy rocks to rescue the other angels.


    And then, they will learn how to fight as a team in battleter.


    Maybe I should train the werewolves to fight as a team as well?


    "¡­I have nothing to do here," Shelia said all of a sudden.


    "¡­sorry. I never expected the angels to be this stupid. Do you want me to transport you somewhere else?" I asked.


    "No need. Since that guy will be a fellow familiar as well, I think it''s a good idea to deepen our bond. And he also needs to get used to see what I wear," Shelia said.


    "You''re right. If the cult has already found the sessors for the big breasts faction and the big ass factions, or if there are any other faction in the cult, he won''t be able to do anything. Though his biggest concern right now is whether he can wake up or not. I think I hit him too hard."


    I look at the archangel who is foaming from his mouth. Will he ever wake up?

 Chapter 407 - Three Days After The Fight

    Finally, the archangel wakes up. After staying ina for three days!


    "Uh¡­ I lost?" Graham said as he slowly regains his consciousness.


    "That''s right. Now, you have to keep the promise. You will make a contract with me and be my familiar. This way, I will work you to the bone."


    For the werewolves, I don''t have to give them this order. It was because they love fighting. And participating in the war is something that they wish for. Other than for the sake of saving the world.


    But for the angels, they arezy, and stupid. That''s why for thest three days, I have been busy.


    "I see¡­ fine, I''ll do it! But do you really want a familiar who is weaker than you?" Graham asked.


    "I want an army. By making a contract with you, I can have the other angels to be under my control. Their teamwork is terrible, that''s why I''m thinking of getting them learn to fight. I''ll ask the werewolves so they can fight and gain some experiences," I said.


    "The werewolves¡­"


    "I will also make sure that you guys are used to seeing girls with revealing clothes. You will see them a lot in our world."


    Hearing that, Graham blushed hard. His cheeks are as red as tomato. If he''s a girl, I would say that''s cute. But he''s a man, and seeing him blushing that red just from thinking of seeing girls showing their skin is disgusting.


    After getting his confirmation, as the loser, he kept his promise and let me make a contract with him. He is my pawn now.


    "Nice to have you around. I will introduce myself formally now. My name is Roy. A human. I''m also an air mage, a summoner, and an Aura user. You have met my two contracted monsters. The ck Slime, Victoria, and the female werewolf, Shelia. By the way, I am also the king of the werewolves after defeating the previous king."


    "¡­no wonder you are so strong. You defeated the previous Werewolf King. Anyway, I''m Graham. An archangel and the leader of the angels in this ce. I have some questions to ask you, Master."


    So, he''s going to call me Master? That''s fine.


    "What is it?"


    "What is Aura?" Graham asked curiously.


    I suppose he''s curious about it. If he''s like Grandpa Werewolf, he would have various means to fight me. But he didn''t. He only relies on his technique and magic.


    I can answer his question, but that will take a while.


    "Are you sure that''s what you''re going to ask me first? Even though you have been ina for three days after I smashed your head to the ground?"


    "It''s been three days! Oh, no! What about the angels!?"


    Graham run out of his room he was resting in, and take a look outside. There, he saw that everything is normal. Except for the few people that I brought here with me to help recovering this ce after getting destroyed by Andro.


    "After defeating you, all the angels are afraid of me. They have no choice but to do what I told them to do. So, as for the first step, I told them to work together and recover this ce they live in. I know the potential that you angels have. That''s also the reason why I still choose to have you as my familiar. If you were slightly weaker, I will refuse to have anything to do with you lot," I said.


    "¡­so, our existence can go extinct if we were slightly weaker, huh? That''s just sad."


    ¡­I didn''t say that. But as expected of an angel, he decided to have his own way of thinking.


    "But you didn''t use your full strength, right?" I asked.


    "How did you know?" Graham was shocked to see that his secret has been found out.


    "Just a guess. Anyway, it''s time you show yourself to everyone."


    I let him meet the angels on his own. And soon enough, all the angels here areing to meet the archangel who has made a contract with me. Some of them cry as they realize that their freedom has gone. Am I such tyrant?


    "Now that everyone is here, I will tell you all why you have to follow me. The world is in danger."


    I started exining to them that the cult is aiming to destroy my world, and this world afterwards. It''s difficult to exin to someone who keeps having their wild imagination run free. It was far easier when I exin things to Ang.


    After they finally get that the world is in danger and I''m recruiting army, with the help of Graham to persuade them, the angels agree to help. Whether he was forced by me or not doesn''t matter. What matter is the result.


    To get the angels used to the fashion sense of the werewolves, I brought over some werewolves. Though I had them wear something that doesn''t reveal as much as their usual clothes. But some of the angels are still too shy to see them. It wasn''t that bad, was it?


    Though we have already gotten the female angels'' cooperation since they are interested in our world''s fashion sense. I just need to bring the girls here.


    "Okay, now that everyone knows what will happen in the future, I need you all to learn how to fight. I know you are strong, but you are too stupid. That''s why you will have to fight the werewolves regrly. I''ll take you all somewhere you can meet regrly. Does the angels need to stay in this cloud that keeps moving?" I asked.


    "No. We stayed here so we can live in peace without having to get bothered by other monsters. We can live anywhere," Graham said.


    "Good. Then, I want you all to move to the settlement that we built. It''s a ce where the werewolves and the elves are living in harmony. Hopefully."


    I don''t know how they''re doing since I haven''t returned there once since we finished with getting the water source closer to the forest. I hope they are fine.


    "Will it be peaceful there?" one of the angels asked.


    "There will be no real peace until the cult is destroyed. What? You want to live without doing anything while knowing that danger is approaching? I know a ce where you can do that. Though once the cult started to invade this world, you have no choice but to die since you will be too weak to fight against them. Those who wants to let their beloved die, raise your hand so I can move you somewhere peaceful until that day."


    After saying that, the angels were too ashamed that they are thinking that peace is an easy thing to have. None of them raised their hands. At least that means they have motivation to defend themselves.


    What should I do? Should I build a new ce for them to live? Or bring the whole cloud over there. I guess bringing the cloud is easier. I''ll ask Spotter.


    Wait, maybe it''s best to just ask all the angels to move the cloud together. It will also improve their teamwork.


    Then, how should I attach this cloud to the ground? Maybe I''ll ask the elves to grow a tree and put the cloud there.


    I will let Ka and the others take over. Seems like the angels are too scared of me. It''s best to let Ka do the rest. What a wonderful woman. At least this way, they won''t think that all humans are scary. Just me.


    "Graham, you''ve been sleeping for three days. Go get some food, water, and rest. I''ll talk to you againter," I said.


    "Understood. And after that?" Graham asked.


    "I said it before. I will talk to youter. Don''t make me repeat myself."


    I hope there''s a way for them to get smarter.


    As I was finally alone, I jumped to the highest peak in this ce and start thinking of what to do next with the angels. What training will be good for them, and how powerful Graham really is.


    Three days ago, Spot was watching me fighting Graham. And after thatst punch, he undid his camouge and scares everyone here. And he said to me that he didn''t think that Graham used his full strength during my fight. And Shelia added that there''s another smelling from him different from that of angels.


    And I believed them. Although at that time I was still hesitating whether I should make him my familiar or not, after hearing about Graham from the two, I decided to take the gamble.


    Will he be much stronger than during our fight? Or that''s just our assumption and he''s that weak?


    But the person himself said that he hasn''t gone all-out.


    "Roy."


    When I was still thinking, Spot called me.


    "What?"


    "Do you think that you can really change them into warriors?" Spot asked.


    "I hope that''s the case. The werewolves are true warriors. They will teach the angels to fight."


    "After watching you fought them, I was disappointed seeing how weak they are. But I guess you see their true potentials, right? Enough to convince you to make a contract with the archangel," Spot said.


    "They could be as strong as the werewolves. And with healing magic, I have an army of healer who can fight. This is also a trial for me. I guess I''ll be a teacher again," I replied.


    Although I want the angels to learn how to cooperate with the others, once the war started, I am thinking of sending them separately. With their healing magic, they can be an addition of other groups or going on their own.


    I don''t think that they are cowards like the elves. They are just stupid.. And it''s my job as their master and their boss to teach them.

 Chapter 408 - Grahams Real Power

    Everyone is busy moving the cloud to the settlement of the werewolves and the elves. We have decided that it will be safer for them all to gather.


    Now, I''m the leader of the three races. Werewolves, elves, and angels.


    The werewolves, they became my followers after defeating their previous king. And I became the current Werewolf King. Being the Werewolf King is enough to get their loyalty.


    As for the elves, they are not mine to control. But because their leader made a contract with my maid, all the elves obeyed Lina. And Lina obeys me. Which mean they are still under me.


    And the angels, they are stupid. I don''t know if they have hierarchical structure, but they don''t seem to disobey the archangel. I''ll ask them about itter, but for now, I think they won''t cause any problem to me. They are afraid of me after seeing me knocking Graham out for three days.


    And he wasn''t even using his full strength. But no one knows about it.


    Which is why, right now, I''m in a wastnd beyond where the forest of the elves to see how powerful he is.


    There are only Graham, Shelia, Spot, Victoria, and me here. No one else is watching. They are more interested in the culture of the angels and walking around on top of a cloud.


    I mean of course that''s amazing! It''s like a dreame true to be able to walk on top of the cloud.


    Though if we made too much noise, I think they will move their attention away from the cloud and toward us.


    Of course, since Graham is showing his real strength, we can only see how powerful he is by sparring. That''s why I''m already fully equipped with Reizpear in my right hand, and Victoria in my left prepared to transform into anything I have in mind.


    "Do we need to go this far?" I asked the archangel who hides his wings, so the number of wings on his back is six. Like the time when I first met him.


    "No. But I don''t want others to see this," Graham replied.


    So, this is some kind of transformation again? And it won''t be just growing six more wings like before? What will it be?


    "Some angels already know about this, but I prefer to not show it to them. And as you are my master, I will show you everything. But¡­ can she please cover her body more?" Graham said as he shyly pointed his finger to Shelia who is still in her bikini-like outfit.


    "Get used to it. You will live with the werewolves now. The two sides will spar more often so both of you can grow stronger for the war. During the war, there''s no time to get dressed. At least that''s what I learned in my past life," I said.


    I remember that time, when I participated in the war, some of the mercenaries were still taking a bath. And the cult attacked at that time, so they had no choice but to fight naked.


    It was a beautiful sight when I see the naked girls fighting without thinking of covering their important parts. But for the men¡­ it was a traumatic experience seeing that thing swinging around.


    Though now that I have Divine Vision, I can still see them. Not by choice most of the time. But at least I''m lucky that most of my allies are women.


    "Really? Then, will I have to be naked in the battle one day?" Graham asked. He was shocked after hearing that some people go to war naked.


    "Not really. Back then, we were in defensive battle. That''s why the enemies were more prepared since they are on the offensive. But if we''re the one attacking, I believe we will be prepared enough to wear our clothes when it''s time to fight," I replied.


    We were attacked from left and right back then. It was lucky that we were able to go for quite a while without losing until I died.


    But now, I have returned back in time. And I''m much stronger, with our side more prepared. This time, we will win the war and destroy the cult.


    The best-case scenario is if we don''t ever go to war, and we destroyed the cult easily. But I think that''s hoping too much.


    "Let''s get started already. Show me what you got!"


    Hearing mymand, Graham closed his eyes. And soon after, three pairs of wings are growing on his back. That''s the transformation I witnessed before when we were fighting.


    But this time, it''s different as Spot and Shelia noticed something weird is happening, and they raised their vignce.


    If Spot even raised his vignce, I guess Graham will be at least as strong as Spot. Does it mean I got the jackpot by making a contract with him? We''ll see.


    "What the¡­"


    The new wings on his back, is changing color. From the white wings with white feathers like the angels, they changed to a ck one. With ck feathers.


    The six pair of wings have two different colors now. From the top, it''s white. Then ck, white, ck, white, andstly, it''s ck.


    And not just that. A part of Graham''s face, there''s also some kind of mark like a tattoo. It''s on the right side of his face. From the forehead, to the right cheek.


    "This is me at my full strength. I am a hybrid of an angel, and a demon," Graham said.


    "¡­and, what does that transformation gives you?" I asked.


    "Although I''m not as fast as the time when I fought you before, these ck wings give me more power," Graham said.


    He then swung his gold spear down to the earth, and I can feel his power has increased. Now, he''s no longer the unbnced fighter like before who focused mostly in his speed.


    I asked him to do some more attack, and I can see his speed is faster than when he had six wings, but slower than when he had twelve white wings. But the current Graham can adjust with his own speed now. Unlike the extremely fast him.


    If he used this transformation instead of the twelve white wings, I would have lost against him. Most likely. Since his strength is now more bnced.


    Well, maybe I will not lose since I can use portals now in a fight. But it will be harder for me to win. Only at that time though.


    "Is enhanced strength the only power you got from your demon''s bloodline?" I asked.


    "No. I can also create a shadow clone of myself from my own shadow. And my shadow will be as strong as I am," Graham said as he created a shadow clone of himself.


    The size of the shadow, the number of wings, and everything look simr. Except it''s all as ck as a shadow.


    But to creates a clone that as strong as the original¡­ doesn''t it mean that I really hit the jackpot!?


    "Wait! If that''s your shadow magic, andbined with your light magic, if you use your light magic to create a huge shadow and create a clone from that huge shadow, will it be a huge clone? And if so, will it be as strong as you are?" I asked.


    "That''s right. Well, I''ll show you," he said.


    He looked around, but doesn''t find a good ce to use light magic since it''s still bright. The sun is right above us, so the shadow is small.


    So, I asked Spot to turn big and cover him with his shadow. There, Graham used light magic to shine a light that will make a huge shadow of himself from under Spot.


    The previous clone has disappeared, but now, the giant shadow moved. The giant shadow raised into another clone. Now, there''s a giant angel there. Including the spear as well.


    "Because he''s bigger, he''s stronger than the original me," Graham said.


    "¡­if you can do that, you didn''t have to give up your life just because of being trapped under a rock, you stupid winged idiot!"


    I remember how he just gave up from being pressed by the rock. I need to make sure the angels can be much smarter than this.


    "Like I said, this form is not something I want to show to everyone."


    "Stop giving excuses! Lives are at stakes!" I shouted. Then I asked, "Can you only make one clone?"


    "Yes. Only one."


    "Let''s test how powerful you are. You and your clone, will fight against me," I said.


    "You alone?" Shelia asked.


    "Don''t worry. It''s easy for me to win. I just want to test how powerful he is," I said.


    Shelia jumped to Spot''s head and they watched us from distance.


    As he said, Graham is more powerful now despite being slower than the full-speed of the twelve-winged archangel. And with two of them, it was a difficult fight.


    But now I know how powerful he is. I don''t need to fight any longer. Especially seeing how happy he is thinking that he could defeat me.


    The result? It''s my victory.


    Although I said that I might lose before, it was while I still thinking of learning more about how he fights. But since I have seen it, and there''s no difference in technique between this transformation and before, I can win easily by using some tricks.


    This is why idiots will die so fast in battle. Good thing that Ang is genius in magic and fighting. Though I hope she won''t get tricked.


    I told Graham to heal himself before returning back to the settlement. Or is it a vige now?


    In any case, I really hit the jackpot with making a contract with him.. It means I got two powerful allies just from him alone.

 Chapter 409 - Finding A Place To Cultivate Air Magic

    After seeing Graham''s full strength, I told him to get the angels trained with the werewolves. After that, I''m thinking of cultivating my air magic.


    ¡­should I go to outer space?


    ""Let''s go!"" Victoria and Spot spoke together.


    "Do we really need to? I don''t know much about outer space as Victoria, but won''t it be scary over there? I mean there are no air and no gravity over there! That''s what you said, right?" I asked Victoria.


    "Don''t worry. Some humans from our world has gone to space. And as long as you keep maintaining your air magic around you at all time, there shouldn''t be any problem. At least I hope that''s the case," Victoria said with some doubts.


    "Why did you have to say thest part!? Now I don''t feel like going there anymore¡­"


    "If it was in my original world, it''s really impossible for human to survive out there alone without any preparation. But this is magic world. Or at least it''s the Monsters World that is connected with the magic world. I wonder if we can connect my world to your world?" Victoria asked.


    "I don''t even want to try it. That seems scary. And how could we connect to that world? There''s no monster over there, right? You think I can make contract with a human and make them my familiar? Anyway, tell me more about going to outer space. What do we need?"


    "I don''t think you really need it, but a spacesuit would be good. Although you can just cover your body with air, I think it''s safer that way. As for that, I can just transform into a spacesuit. I guess we''re ready then," Victoria said.


    "No, we''re not ready. Let''s just cultivate normally on earth, which is way safer than out there," I said.


    "But your magic is weak. And you need more training than other people even in air magic. Even Sara is already an intermediate level in air magic. She cultivates at a faster rate than you. If you don''t hurry up, you won''t reach advanced level before our raid to theb," Victoria said.


    Seems like she receives information from Sonia who enters this world from time to time.


    Sara is already intermediate? When I first taught her until I left the university, she was still a beginner level. Her improvement is much faster than mine. Soon, she might be reaching advanced level.


    I''m not jealous. After all, she''s my student. In fact, I''m proud that my teaching helps her progress that fast.


    But what about me? Do I really need to go to the outer space?


    "¡­Victoria, tell me more about outer space," I asked again.


    "Well, it''s cold. No air, and there''s radiation as well. I don''t know how to exin radiation, but it''s best to keep your air barrier up at all time. Since there''s no air, there''s no sound as well because the sound can''t travel without air. Maybe keep using your Aura as well is a good idea," Victoria said.


    "¡­why does it seem like there is more and more danger in going there? Anyway, why are you interested in going there as well, Spot?" this time, I asked Spot.


    "Of course! I have never seen anything above the sky! As you already know, I''m a half Sky Serpent. We just love to fly," Spot said.


    "Yeah, but the first time we met, you were under the sea, right?"


    "I''m a half Sea Serpent as well!" Spot said.


    That means he loves flying and swimming, right? What about onnd?


    "So, you want toe as well? If I ride on you, we can go faster. But I can''t cover your body with Aura. Wait, maybe I can if I think of you as my extension. Just like weapons," I said to myself.


    "That means we''re ready! Let''s go!" Spot shouted.


    "No. Let''s do some tests first. But before that, let''s ask someone who has been in the sky the longest," I said.


    If it''s Andro, he might have some experience in flying higher. Though I doubt he can stay for long.


    I used portal to go to where Andro is, and asked him about outer space.


    "I have tried it twice. The first time, I was out of breath in just a few minutes. The second time, I tried holding my breath. I could stay for a few hours, before I need to take another breath. As for gravity, I don''t think that''s true because I remember that I still feel my weight at the time. Although the scenery changed. It was still bright at the time, but suddenly, it turned dark," Andro said after I asked him.


    "There are multipleyers of atmosphere in the sky. You haven''t passed everything to be in zero gravity area. That''s why gravity was still effective. Maybe what Roy needs is just to go to that ce instead of going to outer space," Victoria said.


    I received important information now. Which mean I can still survive up there even without needing to go pass the atmosphere and to the outer space. Maybe the area Andro went to is somewhere my air magic can be cultivated faster.


    Wait, that mean I can just go to the highest peak of this world, right? Does the highest peak reach thatyer Victoria said?


    Let''s check on itter.


    "There. Are you convinced to go up there?" Victoria asked.


    "Maybe just the ce where it turns dark. Beyond that, I need more testing," I said.


    "Let''s go there then! Don''t forget to help me with my breathing!" Spot said. He is the one who is interested in going up there the most.


    "At least just go until thatyer. I''ll cast a magic that allow you to breathe without having me maintained it at all timeter. It should be enough for one hour at least," I said as I sat on top of Spot''s back. He''s not in his original big form, and just the smaller version. But still enough for me to ride on his back.


    Spot flew to the sky with an obvious joyous expression that telling me about how much he wants to go higher.


    Like Andro said, it was still bright when we ascend to the sky. Wait, that sounds like we were dying.


    Anyway, it was still the same bright scenery as we were flying to the sky. But as we reached a certain height, the sky above us turned dark, and I can see stars. And because of my air element, I can feel that the air here is thinner. This must be the ce that Andro went to in the past.


    "Oh! The view is amazing! It''s dark up there, but below is so bright! It''s blue and green! And there''s a bit of brown down there!" Spot said.


    "The blue one must be the sea. The green is thend. And that bit of brown is¡ª"


    "That''s our friend Andro. From up here, he seems small," I said before Victoria finishes her sentences.


    As Spot said, the view from here is beautiful. Now, I really wish I could go further even though I was scared shitless just before. Though I will test itter if I could survive or not. But for now, let''s enjoy the view.


    "¡­wait, we''re not here to enjoy the view! I''ll try cultivating now and if my progress rate is much faster than usual, I will be cultivating here," I said.


    "What about going further? Aren''t you curious?" Victoria asked.


    "I am curious. But I need to focus on getting stronger and defeating the cult. Spot, once one hour has passed, go down. We''ll go up again some other time," I said.


    "¡­hey, Roy. Once you''re done today, bring me back to human world. I want to see if the highest peak of the world can reach this ce. I have never been to the top of the highest mountain before," Spot said.


    "You like it that much being here, huh?"


    "Yeah. But in our world, if we tell Sara or other air mages about such ce if it exists, I can go there anytime with them around. I don''t have to be with you at all time," Spot said.


    "¡­are we breaking up?"


    "What''s that supposed to mean? Anyway, I just love the view here and would like to go here anytime I want. Even without your help. That''s why I want to find such ce," Spot said.


    "But I will need to test it first. If the progress rate is not different than cultivating down there, I don''t think there''s a need to go looking for the highest peak," I replied.


    "Then I hope your progress rate will increase."


    I hope that''s the case as well.


    Now, with Spot just flying at the same height without ascending or descending, I started cultivating on top of his head. From now on, I won''t be able to use air magic to help Spot breathing. That''s why I told him to go down after one hour.


    One hourter, I opened my eyes as Spot is descending to the ground.


    "So, how is it?" Spot asked.


    "¡­I have made more progress than I did down there."


    "That''s great! Now, bring me back to humans world!"


    I guess we really end up separated from now on.


    Well, at least I have made a new friend. A Kaiser Dragon. I''ll ask him to go up so I can cultivate next time.


    With the wind mage on his back, and me on his head, Alejandro is the perfect friend for cultivating our magic. At least only the wind and air mages. And since it''s dark above, maybe light mages as well.


    In any case, this is a great discovery.. I will tell Sarater about it.

 Chapter 410 - Going To Space

    Now what? We just found out that cultivating air magic up high where the air is thin is helpful to increase the rate of cultivation. If we go higher, there''s a chance that the improvement rate will increase even further. But do I need to risk my live by going there?


    I''m interested, but frightened at the same time. I need to test it to see if it''s safe or not.


    ¡­let''s grab some monsters to experiment on!


    I''d like to get a monster that I can tell their expression to bring with me. Let''s find a monster that is very simr to human. And I know one.


    It''s the monkey from the forest where the Pear-y Fruit grows. Though thanks to the elves, we can grow our own Pear-y Fruits so we don''t need to go there anymore.


    This time, I''m no longer afraid of being surrounded by the monkeys. I grabbed two of them and put them into Blobbycage.


    Next, I asked Andro to fly higher.


    "You want me to do what?" Andro asked.


    "Your body is gigantic. Although your limbs and neck,pared to your body size are much shorter, they are still big. I want just the top of your head to go beyond the sky, while the rest of your body is still under theyer so you can still breath. I want to conduct an experiment to see if I could go higher with these monkeys," I exined.


    "I see. As long as I can breathe, it should be fine. But I won''t go any higher," Andro said.


    Because Spot is away in humans'' world, I need to ask someone else who can help me in the sky. And my choice is Alejandro. Although I can run on air, I want to do the experiment while standing still. If I keep running around, I won''t know where I amter.


    After passing through theyer where the sky is below me, I grabbed the monkey I put to sleep before, and put it into a different Blobbycage.


    After the monkey woke up angrily, I attached the cage with a huge and long Blobbypole. It''s so that I can raise the cage with the monkey inside as high as my magic can reach it.


    It''s a test to see how high can a living being survive up there. Of course, I will make sure the monkey able to breathe. Though since it was panicking too much, I used calming gas on it.


    As for the other monkey, it will be used as a spare in case the first one die. I think two is enough.


    Now, the first one. While I am still standing on top of Andro''s head, I raised the prisoned monkey higher. And I waited one minute before I go even higher.


    But how do I get higher when Andro is staying at the same height? By making Blobbies and transform them into stairsteps. It''s also a test to see how much steps Victoria can make with her clones.


    Hmm¡­ I think we can go even higher. How high are we in the sky? I don''t know. But I can still go higher.


    I have reached higher and higher as the Blobbysteps have reached five hundred steps. But Victoria said that she can''t go any further. She can only make more Blobbysteps if she recalls all the Blobbies I spread to the others.


    Though I told them to make the steps smaller. Just enough for my toe to step. That way, we can reach even higher. Why didn''t she think of that?


    Finally, at the 2000 steps from Andro''s head, I can see the monkey above me in the cage is floating. There''s no more gravity up there, but I can still feel it. And the pole I''m holding is really light right now.


    "Whoa, he''s floating. That''s outer space, I guess." I said.


    "Prepare yourself. The monkey is not being protected by Aura, right? We don''t know what will happen to him," Victoria said.


    One minute, two minutes, five minutes¡­


    One hour passed, and there''s nothing happening with the monkey.


    "¡­I guess it''s fine up there. Though while waiting, I cultivated for a bit and the progress is much faster than around Andro''s head," I said.


    "Do you want to go up there?" Victoria asked.


    "I''ll check it with the other monkey as well. With one being higher than the other, I can tell up to where it''s safe to stay," I said as I throw the other cage higher. Since I don''t need to use a pole, I just make a string with Blobbies and reel it back when it goes too far. Just like fishing.


    When the monkey I threw goes a bit higher than the previous one, it dies soon after.


    "Hmm¡­ let''s try to cover the first monkey with my Aura, and get it as high as that one," I said.


    I tried it, and the monkey survive even in the same height where the second monkey died. I guess this is where I will cultivate. I''ll try to not go any higher.


    Let''s attach another fishing line from Andro to me so I won''t get stranded in spaceter. I hope within a few weeks, I can reach advanced level in air element.


    After that, it will be raiding theb.


    "Let''s cultivate here. After attaching myself to Andro first, though," I said.


    "But won''t you get too far? Andro keeps moving, you know?"


    "I can use portal to travel, so it''s easy¡­ wait, what if I leave a Blobby here and use a portal to outer space? It can be used as a weapon as well. Maybe I will add another one at the deepest part of the sea as well. Why didn''t I think of it before?"


    "What''s important is that we find a ce where you can cultivate now. When you reach advanced level, what will you do?" Victoria asked.


    "At that time, my mana should be increased as well so I can open more portals. And I want to be able to use all kind of gas with various effects. If you have other type of gas that I would like, I can try it as well," I said.


    "Hmm¡­ there''s a type of fuel that makes fire invisible. But that''s liquid and not a type of gas. Though if you can use it, that would be amazing if you paired up with a fire mage like Julia," Victoria said.


    An invisible fire, huh? But that''s liquid and not gas. I guess that''s impossible for me at the moment. In the future? Who knows?


    "Then I''ll just focus on using other type of gases from the mysterious forest that I haven''t learned yet. Let''s go to the space now. Victoria, cover me with the slime. Make sure that there''s no gap at all," I said.


    "Do you need me to do that? You have seen that the monkeys don''t even need protective gear to survive," Victoria asked.


    "Safety first."


    "¡­says the guy who went into the deep sea right after learning how to swim," Victoria sighed.


    That''s right. I was stupid back then, but now I''m still stupid. Better kind of stupid anyway.


    Wait, is there other kinds of stupid?


    As I tried my first time going into a zero gravity, I take a deep breath. Although I know it''s safe since I''m fully covered with the ck Slime, and using air magic as well as my Aura, this is a totally unknown area to humans. At least humans of my world and not Victoria''s.


    I feel my body lighter, and as my whole body entered zero gravity, I can no longer tell which way is up and which way is down. Other than up is above my head, and down is under my feet. Though I can see a brown spot surrounded by blue color above my head. That''s supposed to be our friend, Andro. I guess that way is down then.


    "This is amazing! Weird, but amazing!" I shouted. Though the only one who can hear me is Victoria as out there, there''s no air. Or maybe it''s too thin. But it''s not enough for my voice to travel. That''s why although I saw the monkey was suffering, I didn''t hear any sound at all.


    "Maybe one day we can go to the moon. Though the moon in Monsters World is smaller than the moon in humans'' world¡­ wait, what!?"


    All of a sudden, Victoria is shouting. And because I''m the only one here, with how close she is, my ears are ringing.


    "Don''t shout like that! What''s wrong anyway?" I asked.


    "¡­after entering zero gravity, I can tell you something."


    "What is it?"


    "I can feel my clones from the moon. And many of them at once," Victoria said.


    "¡­what? Have you been to the moon in the past?" I asked.


    "No. That is not a moon. That is your world, Roy. Humans world," Victoria said.


    Wait, my world? But we went there via portal. So, this ce is not actually a different world, but we are actually on the moon of humans'' world!? And for the Monsters World, we are on its moon!?


    "¡­so, what''s your point?" I asked.


    "Why are you not surprised at all!? We know something that no one have ever known!" Victoria shouted.


    "What''s that got to do with us anyway? Doesn''t that just make it possible for humans to go to Monsters World without using portals¡­ wait!"


    "Now you know. Which mean there''s a possibility that the cult can go here anytime they want without using portal. If they have air mage and can fly, that should be enough to travel," Victoria exined.


    So, they don''t need summoners to travel between worlds? Does their god know about this? That''s possible.


    Hmm¡­


    Hmmmmmm¡­


    "Sigh¡­ I can''t think of anything to do. I''ll just tell this to Albert and the kings, and let them think of what to do with this information," I said.


    "¡­I guess you''re right. Let the smarter ones thinks," Victoria said.


    "Yeah. I''ll just cultivate here for an hour, and then meet Albert after that," I said.


    If we are the only ones who know about this information, there''s no need to be panic. Unless there''s an extraordinary monster that can travel between two worlds easily.


    Why does it feel like my peaceful life that I dreamt of after destroying the cult is getting further and further?


    Nah, this won''t be a problem. Even if it does, my beef is only with the cult.. Let Albert and the other leaders think.

 Chapter 411 - To The Peak Of The World

    After cultivating for a bit in the space, I directly opened a portal to humans'' world. Of course, as Victoria told me, I choose a ce away from humans'' settlements. It''s because of the vacuum. If I opened a portal somewhere close to a city or a vige, the whole vige can be sucked in.


    How did I enter the portal even though the power of the vacuum is quite strong? My leg is stronger than the suction force. That''s all there is to it.


    "¡­so, this is the aftermath of being sucked in into the space, huh? Horrifying," Imented after seeing so many trees, rocks, and monsters got sucked in into the space.


    "But it''s good as another method to fight, right? I know that you will choose to use it against the cult one day," Victoria said.


    She''s right. If it''s like this, let''s say that I opened a portal to space in theb we''re going to raid. Everything and everyone will be sucked in. Though I doubt we want that. We also need to find anything that can be used against them.


    So, I guess I will be the only one raiding theb first. And then, in case fighting is unavoidable, I would either kill everyone by opening a portal, or calling for help.


    ¡­let''s not use the portal to space as much as possible. What Victoria told me about radiation, I don''t know if it will affect the surrounding or not after I opened the portal. Maybe this ce is already affected when I transported here. Though I still use my Aura to protect myself. And also Victoria as my spacesuit.


    This ce is somewhere I found before meeting the ostriches. Somewhere I doubt anyone would go to. That''s why even if this ce is filled with radiation, it should be fine since no one woulde here.


    Though I''m still confused as to what radiation is. I just heard from Victoria that it''s something extremely dangerous. Even though how she told me doesn''t make it sound dangerous. If I have six arms, won''t I be much stronger and able to use all kind of weapons at once?


    But if she says it''s dangerous, then I won''t risk my life for it.


    "You''re going to tell Albert about it?" Victoria asked.


    "With our current technology, it is still impossible for anyone to fly to the sky and go to the moon. But if they have something special like air magic, powerful flying monster, or maybe some sort of ancient artifacts, it is still doable. I''ll just inform Albert about it and let him do the thinking. But I guess it means that even if we made a safe ce in Monsters World, it is not really safe," I exined.


    After chatting for a bit, I opened a portal a bit away from where I was so the radiation won''t follow. I hope I was right though.


    Good thing it''s night and we can see the moon. So, I told Albert everything about the moon while pointing at it.


    "¡­so, the moon is actually a. And that is the Monsters World?" Albert asked for confirmation.


    "That''s right! Or at least that''s what Victoria told me. Victoria, what about it?" I asked Victoria.


    As we are talking with Albert, Marie who is interested is listening to us. seems like she wants to build a rocket that Victoria exined.


    "Well, it''s my clones, or what Roy called the Blobbies. In here, I can feel where every Blobbies are ced. But as for those in Monsters World, I can''t sense it. But as long as I know where I ced them, Roy can open a portal to that Blobby even when it''s difficult to sense. And when I was in Monsters World, I can''t sense the Blobbies in this world. But when we enter the space, I can sense the Blobbies in both worlds. There are some in the we were before taking off, the Monsters World, and some are in the moon of that world. Which is here. So, that moon over there is Monsters World," Victoria exined.


    "Well, I don''t know if that information is important at the moment or not, so I just tell you everything and as usual, let you do the thinking while I''m trying to get stronger," I said.


    "¡­why do I always have the most difficult part?" Albert sighed.


    "How about we swap? I''ll do the thinking, and you will risk your life?"


    "No thanks. I like being in this position," Albert replied.


    "Then don''tin. As usual, just think of a way to destroy the cult," I said.


    I have informed Albert about the moon. Now, about cultivating ce. I''ll tell Sara about it. If Spot finds a ce in this world, that can reach thatyer we previously entered before going to space, she can go there with Spot. Or maybe ask a wind mage to bring her there.


    Let''s meet Spot first.


    I opened a portal to the Blobby that Spot carries. And he is currently flying in the sky, facing a tall mountain in front of him.


    "Hey, Spot. Is that the ce?" I instantly asked him after jumped on his back.


    "Yes. I went there once with my Master in the past. But we are far too weak against the monsters there. Though, I don''t know about it now. I want to test my strength first," Spot said.


    "Then I''ll stay here and watch. Anyway, where are we?"


    "Far south of the continent. It''s the ocean below us," Spot said.


    If it that far, it''s impossible to get Sara here alone. Though Spot can bring her with him if he wants to go there.


    "And how did you end up there in the past with your master? I thought you were too weak back then," I asked.


    "He got lost in the ocean when we were travelling by ship. Before we go higher to the peak, he was tired and rode a dolphin all the way back to the continent. I was still small and unable to carry him on my back," Spot said.


    Riding a dolphin? That sounds interesting.


    But for Spot to fly for quite some time, it must be really far.


    "We''re here. Let''s go to the peak right away. I''ll ask you for helping me breathe, Roy," Spot said.


    "Leave it to me."


    This ce has strong monsters? I bet some of the girls would like to be here. Let''s ce a Blobby so I cane here anytime I want.


    Hmm¡­ Spot said that this ce has many powerful monsters. But I guess a thousand years is more than enough for a weak serpent, to be much stronger than anything here. Though this ce is still good for everyone to go and train.


    There aren''t many that can obstruct Spot''s journey to the peak. And when there are some who are strong enough, they are beaten to death by Spot in a few minutes. I guess they are strong indeed tost for that long.


    But still, this mountain area is huge. Normal people would have difficulty breathing at this height, but it''s still not the peak yet.


    "Whoa, the peak of this mountain is much taller than the highest peak in my world," Victoria said.


    "And how high was that?" I asked.


    "Over 8 km from sea surface," she replied.


    "But we have passed that height when we were going to space," I said.


    "I know. Magic is amazing."


    It is. Something that her world can do after so long, with so many research, experiments, and failures, but we can finish it in one day.


    And being here, makes me think that the world is much bigger than just the continent. I just hope that there''s no cult outside the continent that will cause ruckus to my home.


    That way, after destroying the cult in our continent, I won''t have to face other problem again. Like the cult trying toe here from another continent.


    But humans are humans. We are greedy.


    If someone greedy from outside the continent knows about our continent, that person would most likelye and try to conquer us. If so, war will still happen whether or not the cult is destroyed.


    But at least it should be fine. After all, Javier said that the cult destroyed Monsters World after destroying humans'' world. Which mean they are strong enough to stop the conqueror wannabe. If there are any.


    And that means, if we could destroy the cult, there won''t be anyone strong enough to kill us. Which means we are still safe because of our strength.


    ¡­shit, I think too much. I thought I would let Albert do the thinking, but here I am thinking. It''s a pain, so I won''t think much about it anymore. Let''s just enjoy the view as blood is flying from the monsters Spot defeated and devoured.


    "Hmm? Spot, we''re here. Beyond this, is the same as we experienced in Monsters World. The day will change into night. I doubt there will be any more monsters here, but be careful," I said.


    "Haha! We''re finally here! Let''s go to the peak and watch the scenery before going back down!" Spot said excitedly.


    But it''s a good time to rest as well. I''ll take that offer.


    We reached the peak shortly after, and rested there while watching the starry sky above, and the blue ocean below.


    We watched the scenery for a while longer, and use portal to transport back to Cassau.. I''ll tell Sara about that ce so she can go with Spot whenever she wants.

 Chapter 412 - Cultivation Spot For Earth Mages Is Found

    Since now the air mages have a good ce to cultivate, I told Sara about it through Sonia. Since she is most likely to be a member of this country for the tournament, it''s best to tell her first about it. As for the ss, I bet Dean can teach them students whenever he''s free.


    After telling Sara that she can go to where she should cultivate, I return back to Monsters World. Since I''m the only one who can cultivate in space, I can''t bring Sara with me.


    I returned to Andro''s head. Not the top of the head, but right in front of his face.


    I waste time chatting with him before I go cultivate my air element. I don''t know how long I will stay in space, but it might be a long time. So, I chatted while snacking to fill my stomach.


    Since I said that I''m going to cultivate, Spot won''te with me. He is with Sara so he can help her go to where she should cultivate.


    He told me that whenever he''s not busy, which is during the whole time I am cultivating, he will apany Sara at all time so he doesn''t need to bring her to the mountain. He can just fly high and let Sara cultivate on his back, while he''s enjoying the view. At least until the raid to the cult''sb.


    Well, as long as both sides agreed, I don''t mind it. I also told Sara that any air mages that she can really trust, she can bring them with her to cultivate. She''s also an agent, so she can investigate if the students in her ss can be trusted or not. Though I didn''t allow her to tell my secret about being an Aura user.


    Anyway, let''s just cultivate and improve myself.


    After finished chatting with Andro, I connected a line from Blobbies and connected it to my own body, before covering myself with Victoria as my spacesuit. And then, I jumped to the sky. Higher and higher until I feel no weight in my body. The area without gravity.


    "Good luck! I''ll enjoy the view while you''re busy," Victoria said.


    And if I''m not busy, I will enjoy the view as well.


    And so, I started cultivating until hopefully, someone increased their level before me and needed my protection. I''ll have Victoria wakes me up in case that happen.


    Thankfully, two months after cultivating with a break there and then, I reached advanced level in my air element. Making me have two advanced elements.


    But none of the other members are breaking through to the next level. Or at least those who have broke through, didn''t need my help. I hope that''s the case.


    And since no one is calling me, it''s time to test my air elements. This time, I won''t experiment a new gas on the ostriches anymore. But the monkeys from the Pear-y Fruits forest.


    I have grown fond of those monkeys after killing them during experiment of going to space.


    Well, one of them died in space, and the other one, I dropped it back to the earth. That one should be dead.


    Let''s practice new gases until I can use everything perfectly. Hopefully, those gases will be effective now at least to expert level mages. But for master level, just a slight effect might be useful.


    And so, I spend my days training my air magic. Of course, I taught those gases to Sara, who has reached advanced level before I did even though the ce I cultivated at is much better. That''s talent, I guess.


    But at least there are two people who can use various types of gas among us. And she will be a great asset, not just for the tournament. But for the war as well.


    I hope the others are doing fine. At least I haven''t heard of any bad news from them.


    If they miss me, they will contact me. But I guess none of them miss me. I feel so lonely¡­


    ...¡­.


    Meanwhile, deep under the ground, Celestine is talking with Ang, who is looking for a ce to cultivate her earth element.


    The two met up coincidentally, and decided to go together into a dungeon that they found, hoping that they can improve their earth element.


    Ang has found the other three location for three of her elements, and those three elements were already close to breaking through. And she is looking to get all four of them to reach the next level at the same time, which is unprecedented. No one has managed to do it.


    For wind element, it was on Andro''s back. The fire element, it was on a volcano. The ice element, she found it all the way to the north where it''s the coldest. And now, she is looking for a ce good for cultivating her earth elements, and met Celestine by chance.


    The two then coordinated together to find a good ce, and reached this unknown underground dungeon.


    "The first time I entered a dungeon, it was an underground dungeon as well near Cassau. Be careful of being caved in. Though our earth magic should be strong enough to handle it," Ang said.


    "Some of the monsters here are much stronger than other ces. There might be something even stronger than them inside. Don''t let your guard down," Celestine said.


    The two explored inside the dungeon together, and defeating all the monsters they found. When they find treasures, they would bring them to a safe ce, until they finished capturing the dungeon. They will ask Roy to get those treasures appraised by Jeremy.


    Now that many of the members are in Monsters World, entering dungeons left and right, the amount of treasures that Roy bring to Jeremy was too much. Luckily most of them are useful to increase the strength of everyone. And even if none of the members want it, it can be given to someone the kings trusted to help fight against the cult.


    Unsurprisingly, the cult is standing by and not doing anything big during this period before the tournament. Albert and the others are right that they are nning on making the big move around the time of the tournament.


    Ang and Celestine went deeper under the ground, until it''s impossible for light to reach. It was extremely dark, and the only source of light is the torch that Ang lighted with her fire magic.


    Although the two of them are capable earth mages who can sense the movement of the surrounding area from the vibration of the ground, losing one sense in a dangerous location is not something anyone wants. Only Roy is capable of exploring the dungeons without a care because of his Divine Vision.


    "You feel anything?" Celestine asked Ang.


    "No,"


    "Be careful. We don''t know what kind of monster is this deep underground," Celestine said.


    As they went in deeper, Celestine noticed something strange.


    "Ang, from here on, the shape of the dungeon is not natural. It''s as if a monster is digging deeper to make the dungeon goes further down," Celestine said.


    "You mean we''ll fight something like a mole?" Ang asked.


    "A mole, huh? You might be right. be careful and enhance your sense so you can sense right under you," Celestine said.


    As they went in further, they encounter more monsters, but none of them should be able to dig this deep. They seem to just found the hole, and went in out of curiosity. And they encountered Ang and Celestine to just die in an instant.


    "If Ka is here as well, we could be a trio of amazing earth mages!" Ang said. To which, Celestine just smiled.


    Just like the two of them, Ka is also looking for a good ce to cultivate. And if either side finds one, they will contact the other right away.


    As they finally reached the deepest area, they see a small pond of water.


    "A pond? I guess it''s natural if monsters need to survive this far down," Celestine said.


    "Is the mole inside the pond?" Ang asked.


    Just as she asked that, the two girls feel vibrationing from the ground. Not an earthquake, but a huge monster surfacing from the pond.


    The monster is not a mole. Rather, it was a frog. A frog with huge ws on its hands, which makes it possible for it to dig this much.


    The froges out of the water, and prepared to fight the two.


    "Hmm¡­ I think this might be the strongest monster we encounter. Probably multiple times stronger than those we encountered before," Celestine said.


    "That''s good. At least it will be an interesting fight," Ang said with full of confidence that she could defeat the frog.


    "Since there are two of us, how about we decide only one of us will fight it, while the other tries to cultivate in this ce? We haven''t tried to cultivate because we are exploring this dungeon, but now we reached the deepest part, there shouldn''t be many monstersing," Celestine suggested.


    "Sure. How do we decide it?" Ang asked.


    "Well¡­ let''s keep our distance first. The first one who is targeted by the frog will fight, and the other will cultivate. But we still need to be careful, so just five minutes of cultivation should be more than enough to see if this ce is a good ce or not," Celestine said.


    "Okay."


    The two then spread to right and left, and wait until the frog attacked one of them.


    The frog is being wary to the two, and just waited.


    Because there''s one big weakness that the frog has, but the two don''t know yet.


    The frog can''t see in the dark. That''s why the path that the frog dug is random and moving left and right as if the one who did it was drunk.


    And so, the three just stay at standstill, until Ang can''t take it anymore and killed the frog in one shot when it''s not ready.


    "¡­I guess we should try to cultivate together then," Celestine said.


    "Yeah¡­ but let''s dispose of the frog first. I don''t want to cultivate in an area next to a corpse of a frog," Ang said.


    And that''s how the two find a good area to cultivate their earth element.


    And while Ang is already cultivating, Celestine contacted Roy by breaking a Blobby to tell Ka about this ce.. He immediately returns to the dungeon with Ka so she can cultivate with them.

 Chapter 413 - Preparing Angela To Breakthrough

    The date has been set for the raid on theb. Just a week before the tournament started. Though the tournament will start around next year. It has been dyed quite a lot.


    Although I haven''t went to the location of theb yet, the kings have sent scouts to find the general location of theb from thepass. And it was located in the east side of Arturo.


    Because of the distance from Arturo to Consenza, which is where the tournament will be held, it will take more than a month for anyone to travel from there to Consenza normally. Which is why I will be sent to theb a week before the tournament. So, when something happened in theb, no one who is going to the tournament will realize that the cult''sb has been attacked.


    And since I can use portal, I can travel to any country I want without wasting too much time.


    Also, Albert, Lynn, and old man Henry will only inform the fake king of Arturo about the tournament, six months before the tournament begins. Will it be fine, I wonder?


    And about our progress, it seems to be going well. Ang and Celestine found a good ce to cultivate, and told Ka about it. And Ka has reached expert level because of it. So fast.


    Candy also has reached expert level in her lightning element. Though she hasn''t found a good ce to cultivate, she is still older than Ka and the others, so it''s natural that she became expert level. Right now, she''s apanying Jewel and Lina''s two monsters and helping them exploring a dungeon. She said that she''s trying to go for expert level in fire element as well before the day of the raid.


    Wendy and Shirley both also have reached expert level after cultivating the whole time on Andro''s back ever since the first time they were there. I never seen them stopped cultivating other than to rest and eat.


    And thest one to reach expert level mage was¡­ Fabio. And his element that reached expert level mage is fire element. I brought him to the volcano after telling him about the ce which should be good for cultivating. And the doting mother Carmen, decided to wait for Fabio until he finished breaking through before she trains again.


    Everyone is amazing. They can reach expert level so fast. Though the one that surprises me the most is the fact that Ang hasn''t reached expert level yet.


    She''s going the hard way. She''s trying to fuse all her elements and breakthrough all of them at once. Which means, unlike the others who has to breakthrough their elements one by one. She''s improving them together. This is something that no one has ever seeded before. But if it''s her, I believe that she can do it.


    As for me? Well¡­ right now, I''m watching a group of monkeys trying to kill each other. I havepleted all the gas types from the mysterious forest. And this murdering gas is so amazing. I can use this against the cult. They will kill each other then.


    I can use the infuriating gas, but making them angry and fight doesn''t necessarily mean they will kill each other. It seems like they are just trying to hurt each other. So, the gas that will make them kill each other is much better.


    The other two I learned, the fear gas and the lust gas, were effective as well. though I don''t want to use the lust gas as much as possible.


    ¡­unless it''s my private time with my lovers.


    When I use the fear gas, the monkeys were running about. No one cares about other things but themselves. Even some monkeys who were carrying their babies, would leave their babies behind. Unfortunately, whatever they are afraid of doesn''t seem to be the same. If only I can make it so that they would only run toward one way, it would be better.


    But at least I finally managed to use all type of gas from mysterious forest. Now¡­ let''s fight some monsters to improve my fighting skill and my Aura as well.


    "Roy, Ang is calling," Victoria said all of a sudden.


    When she said that, it means that Ang has destroyed a Blobby that she carries with her. And that''s the signal that mean I have to go her way as soon as possible.


    "Let''s defeat other monsters another time. Ang is far more important than monsters," I said.


    I quickly opened a portal to where Ang is, and see that she''s no longer cultivating inside the dungeon for her earth element. She''s outside, along with Celestine and Ka.


    Although Ka has reached expert level in her earth element, it seems that the dungeon is good for her light element as well. That''s why she''s staying to improve her light element.


    She also asked for the angels'' guidance for her light and healing elements. With her brain, she will be much stronger than the angels even though they have the same two elements. At least she is already far smarter than them.


    Though the angelstely haven''t been disappointing. They have improved albeit just a little. It''s a good idea for them to live alongside thepetitive werewolves.


    "What is it, Ang?" I asked Ang who called me.


    "It''s time. I will breakthrough all four elements today," Ang said.


    "I see¡­ I''ll get everyone to protect you. This is something unprecedented so it''s best to get everyone''s help. And don''t do it today. You should rx first, and fill your belly with delicious food. You''ll try doing it once you are totally ready," I said.


    "Okay. Then, let''s get back to Cassau. I missed Lina''s cooking," Ang said excitedly.


    After taking Ang, Celestine, and Ka to Cassau, I used portals to travel to where the others are, and informed them about Ang before bringing them all to Cassau. Even Kron who loves to go exploring in Monsters World alone decides toe along.


    I also told Albert and the other kings about it.


    "Is it dangerous?" Albert asked.


    "I don''t know. But I believe in Ang," I said.


    "¡­I wish her the best. Marie, would you like to witness Ang breaking through?" Albert asked his wife.


    "No. I think it will be too difficult for me just to witness her breaking through. I don''t know what kind of effect it will have to the surrounding," Marie said.


    Hmm¡­ she''s right. This might be the most dangerous situation to breakthrough. I mean four elements breaking through at once? Fire, ice, earth, and wind elements?


    Not just it will be dangerous for Ang, but the people trying to protect her as well. I''ll look for a good ce for her to breakthrough in Monsters World, and ask the monsters to protect her as well. Who knows what kind of monsters we will encounter?


    I found a good ce near the monsters'' vige and asked the werewolves and the angels for help as well. Well, I mean forcing the angels to help. Though thanks to Ka''s persuasion, it was easy. She is getting along with the angels really well. And no, she didn''t ask her while wearing sexy outfit. She asked them nicely and they agree to help.


    Of course I didn''t ask for everyone toe. I only asked some so there will still be enough monsters to protect the vige.


    We had a st partying back in Cassau, together with the children as well. It''s like a celebration even though Ang hasn''t break through yet.


    After one good night sleep, everyone is ready to go.


    I used portals and let them enter first before me. Like before, Lina and Sophie choose to stay. They wish Ang good luck together with Penny and the children.


    Also, it seems like time has gone pass so quickly. And Hannah will turn fifteen next year and will attend introductory school right before the tournament. Well, I have taught her everything I can teach for now. But once she awakens her magic, she will have a lot of powerful teachers to guide her.


    As I enter the portalst, everyone is ready in their position. Celestine and Ka build a dome with one door open for Ang to breakthrough in. Everyone told her good luck before leaving the dorm, until it''s just me and her alone.


    "Isn''t it great? The first time you broke through, everyone is protecting you. And now, the number of friends we have has increased. Though that time, the enemies were humans. But now, the enemies will be monsters. And because of your strength, the monsters appearing might be much stronger than those we have fought before," I said.


    "Not just the number increased. They are also much stronger than back then. Though I''m still worried if I can do this or not," Ang said.


    "Then we''ll stop here. I won''t let you continue if you are not confident," I said.


    "¡­you have that much trust in me, huh? Is that because I was the Elemental Master in your previous life?" Ang asked.


    "When I met you first, that was indeed the reason I approached you. It has been so long since then, and I know that the one I can trust the most is you. My past life is what made me approach you, but the reason I''m staying with you is because I trust you. It''s that simple," I said.


    "You always love simple things. Fine, I''ll do it. If you trust me that much, I feel like I can do everything," Ang said.


    "Ang! Do your best!" The voice ising out of my shoulder. It''s Victoria.


    "I will," Ang said. This time, full of confidence.


    As I leave the dome, Ka closed the door.


    "Well, let''s see what kind of monsters we''ll be facing."


    With Reizpear in my hand, I am ready to fight anything.


    ¡­as long as it''s not as strong or even stronger than Andro.

 Chapter 414 - First Wave

    We are preparing for battle outside the dome where Ang is about to breakthrough. We have three shifts to protect her. It''s a strategy I nned beforehand. This way, one shift can guard Ang. Another one can rest, while thest one will be on standby in case the first shift can''t handle it.


    Unsurprisingly, the werewolves don''t want to be a part of the shift. They just want to fight at all time. Well, that''s fine.


    And the angels, because of their healing magic, they will be on standby duty at all time. Supporting those who are guarding Ang, and be the reinforcement if needed.


    Well, the main reason is because they are not interested in working. And that''s the only way I can force them toe and help us. At least they believe me when I said that the world will be destroyed if they didn''t do anything.


    And now we know that there''s other way to get here without portal, although there shouldn''t be any technology that is advanced enough for space travel, there''s also a chance that the cult will attack this world first before humans'' world. I hope that''s not the case.


    But if that is the case, that mean I have changed the future too much. Well, I don''t care. As long as the cult is destroyed, I don''t care even if some amazing people in the future were never born in this lifetime.


    That will be a shame if those powerful people who can help us would never be born, but I can''t hope that even if they are born, they will help us anyway. I just need to get the people around me to be stronger. And I think I''m doing a good job at it.


    Well, back to protecting Ang.


    As the leader of the angels, Graham will be the one to lead them to heal and support the others. I believe they won''t have much toin if their leader is the one giving the order.


    Shelia is with the werewolves ready to fight at all time. I hope they won''t push themselves too hard.


    As for me, I will also be ready to fight at all time. I have the most stamina among all of us, so it will be fine even if I have to fight for days. But unlike the werewolves, I won''t fight right away.


    As for Spot, he is currently cleaning up the nearby monsters even before Ang started breaking through.


    I can also call for Andro, but he''s too big. But I already told him that Ang is breaking through, so if he feels the magic fluctuation, he cane over to help if he wants.


    Ka then built another dome for us to rest. As she is an expert level mage now, the durability of the dome should be good enough to endure damage for a while. I don''t know if it can endure for a long time because we don''t know how powerful, and how many monsters wille.


    "Everyone! She has started breaking through!" I shouted to get everyone prepared.


    With Elsie here as well, I don''t need to use my Divine Vision at all time. I just need to wait until she reacted before activating mine.


    Of course, Sunny is with her. The two is a pair now.


    It''s strong. The magic fluctuationing from Ang is iparably strongpared to those Kron and the other expert level mage during their time breaking through. The enemies this time will be powerful.


    "It''s hot here," Julia said.


    "No, it''s cold. And slightly breezy," Shirley said.


    "That''s probably because of Ang. All four elements affecting the surrounding. Though I don''t know about the earth," I said.


    "It is slightly vibrating. Not enough for mages of other elements to feel," Ka said.


    "Just prepare yourself. If you can feel the change, the monsters should be able to. But¡­ I told you that we should have three shifts, right? Why are you all preparing to fight?" I asked.


    "Just let us fight. It''s not like any of us are stupid enough to go all out the whole time," Ka said.


    Though after she said that, I see some people shyly looked away. I''m marking you all.


    "Sigh¡­ if you are tired, just ask for some healing from the angels. It should be able to recover your stamina a bit. We don''t know how long Ang will stay in this condition," I said.


    And so, we wait. I also gave some snacks for everyone here prepared by Lina so they won''t feel hungry.


    And the first monster toe is¡­ Spot.


    "Roy! The weak monsters are escaping! They are afraid of something!" Spot said.


    "Really? Noting here, but escaping? Do you see any powerful monster approaching them? Other than you, obviously," I asked.


    "No. Or at least I can''t see them. And I used camouge so those weaklings won''t be able to sense my presence. But I think something ising," Spot said.


    Something that Spot can''t see and feel, but it can make weak monsters to escape. The answer is underground.


    I used Divine Vision to see under the ground, but I didn''t see anything yet.


    "Roy, the earth is vibrating even more," Celestine said.


    Just as she said that, right at the edge of my Divine Vision''s range, I see an earthworm the size of Spot.


    Both Elsie and I reacted at the same time.


    "Earth mages! Underground! It''s a giant earthworm the size of Spot!" I shouted.


    "Eww!" the girls said at the same time.


    Oh, shit. The earth mages here are all women. Ka, Celestine, and also Sara whom I brought as well were feeling disgusted. And even men would feel disgusted seeing a giant earthworm.


    "Enough with the eww-ing! Everyone, don''t let your guards down! Oh, wait. There are three giant earthworms," I said.


    ""Ew!""


    This time, it''s not just the earth mages. All the girls eww-ing at the same time. I''ll allow it because I feel the same.


    Back when I first entered this world, I also saw earthworms about their size. And the bigger one was eating the smaller earthworm. But this time, even though they are of different size, none of them are eating each other. I guess something here is much more appetizing than their own kind.


    And then, I also saw a group of goblins approaching. But when they feel the presence of the earthworms, they retreated. At least it means we only need to fight the strong monsters and can just ignore the weak ones. Though it will still be annoying, at least it''s not as annoying as fighting all of them.


    "Master! The angels noticed many flying objects approaching! They are most likely monsters," Graham reported.


    "Wind mages and werewolves who can run on air, go greet those flying monsters!" I gave anothermand.


    First is something underground. Next is something flying. Maybe we should have let Ang breakthrough in the sky so we will only face flying monsters.


    But that mean our power will be weakened because not all of us can fly.


    At least it''s good that we are not in the sea. After all, only one person here has reached expert level in water magic.


    My job for now is just to give the order and be themander. I''m also responsible for the supply. If they are hungry, or out of magic and needed mana potions, I will give them some.


    At least it''s good that my turn is noting yet. Let''s see how they handle the earthworm.


    Since Sara''s earth magic is still in advanced level, she will be the one digging a path for the other two to get closer to the earthworms, while the other two will be the one attacking the earthworms.


    They are sensing the location of the earthworm from the vibration. And when they feel that the earthworms are getting closer, Ka and Celestine pressed the earth from left and right of the approaching earthworm. Squashing it while the earthworm hasn''t even seen the light yet.


    Other than me and Elsie, no one can see the dead earthworm. It''s disgusting.


    There are still two more, and Ka and Celestine used the same tactic like the first time. Leaving only one more earthworm. And this one is the biggest one.


    When the two is about to use the same tactic again, the earthworm is changing direction and move upward to the surface. It must have noticed something is strange.


    "Jewel! One earthworm is going your way!" I shouted. Although it was quite far from me to Jewel''s location, I can make my voice louder by using air magic.


    "I UNDERSTAND!!"


    ¡­and Jewel''s shout is much louder than mine.


    Just as the earthworm surfaced in the location I pointed at, Jewel already transformed into a lightning coated rhino, and charged through the head of the earthworm.


    Now that is someone who is not afraid of getting dirty.


    Oh, wait. Carmen is there using water magic to clean her. When did they discuss it?


    As for the flying monsters, it was incredibly easy. Or maybe because the strong one hasn''t arrived yet.


    Most of the flying monsters are defeated by Spot alone. The angels didn''t do anything, and only Kron and Veronica managed to kill some. Good. No one is wasting their mana and stamina.


    At least they can still rest and let Spot do the most. Though I doubt they want that.


    In any case, the first wave is cleared.. I hope the next one won''t be too difficult.

 Chapter 415 - Making Giants Killing Each Other

    "Seems like we have cleared too many monsters nearby before this. That''s why only underground monsters and flying monsters appeared just now," Shelia said as she and the werewolves finished defeating the flying monsters.


    Probably it''s as she says. Because they have been frequently hunting monsters, either for food or for training purpose, there weren''t many of them for the first wave. Though after this, I don''t think there will be wave after wave. It will be a powerful torrent that never stops until Ang finished her breakthrough instead.


    That is why I asked everyone to work in shift. But I guess I am asking too much as many of them don''t care about their shift.


    At least I hope they know their limit. Once they are tired, they will rest instead of fighting.


    "Alright, there won''t be anymore shift. Just fight however you want," I said as I flew to a group of Giantsing this way.


    I know that the others can defeat them. but it will take some time because these giants are powerful enough to endure many magic attacks. So, while the werewolves haven''t noticed them, I alone approached the giants.


    They are looking for the source of the magic fluctuation, which is Ang. That''s why I have to kill them.


    Or maybe, I don''t have to kill them. Instead, I will make them kill each other.


    I have practiced it on the monkeys, and now I will be targeting bigger targets.


    Now that I''m advanced level, it should be easier to affect them with the gas.


    As I used the gas to make them kill each other, the werewolves noticed that I''m facing the giants alone and thought that they want to help. They don''t need to do that though.


    "King! I will help¡­ what the hell?"


    It was Jack who said that. He run as fast as possible here, and when he noticed something is strange, he stopped all of a sudden.


    "Step back, or they will target you. I alone am enough here. Take care of other ces," I said.


    Jack is the second strongest werewolf after Shelia. Though the gap between their strength is bigger since I brought Shelia too many locations. But he is much stronger and faster than the time he fought Ka. But I still think that Ka will still win if they fight once again.


    Jack stopped after witnessing the giants are punching each other with the intent to kill. My magic is working really well on them. Though the amount of mana I used is much more when I use it on a single giant, than when I used it on three monkeys.


    One giant equal to four or five monkeys. Is that how math works? I don''t know. After all, even five monkeys will be squashed easily by the giant with one hit.


    Maybe it''s because they have bigger lungs?


    In any case, the giants and the surrounding monsters are easily defeated without having the others to lift a finger.


    This time, not just Jack. But many other members of our group, including the angels and the humans, watched the giants killing each other in horror.


    "Umm¡­ Master? Is that your doing?" Graham asked.


    "Yes. Oh, right. I haven''t shown you what other thing I can do, huh? Maybe I should have brought you over during the time I experimented on the monkeys," I said.


    "¡­Master! I promise you that I and the angels will be loyal to you for the rest of our lives!" Graham said as he kneeled in front of me.


    Is he that afraid of me using this gas on the angels? I even see the angels nearby kneeled down like Graham did.


    "Don''t worry. I won''t use it on you guys. Unless I have to. But I hope it won''t get that far," I said.


    With this, the angels'' loyalty toward me is increased a lot. I doubt any of them dare to betray me after seeing that.


    Knowing that this side is totally secure, they split up and searched for enemies on their own instead of waiting. Sigh¡­ there are too many battle-crazed people here.


    Well, I will be the one staying behind with Elsie, Sunny, and the others who choose to wait and see.


    I looked inside the dome where Ang is, and see that while closing her eyes, she seems to be in pain. But she endures it.


    Four elements, which opposing each other like ice and fire, are forcefullybined inside of her. Making her feels chaotic energy inside of her.


    At least that''s what I think. I can only wish her for the best and protect her for the iing hostiles.


    The others are spread too wide and creates several small gaps letting some monsters they didn''t kill to pass through. I guess I can''t just sit still after all.


    But before theye close, Shirley appear from the resting area and used powerful ice magic to build an ice wall covering the dome.


    "I can''t just sit still while monsters are trying to kill my friend," Shirley said.


    Her ice element might still be at advanced level, but she is cultivating it in the north where it''s the coldest, so it will not be long until she reached expert level. But her wind element has reached expert level already.


    Shirley flew to the sky as she used Ice Spikes to shot the enemies to dead. Sometimes, when the enemies are crowded in one ce, she would use a wide area Wind shes so she can defeat many of them in one go.


    "Shirley. You are too much in a hurry to cultivate your ice element already before you get used to your expert level wind element. Try to use less mana but with the same strength as before," Veronica said as she is the senior one in wind element.


    "Right. Sorry. I''ll get used to it in this battle," Shirley said.


    This is also a good time for those who have recently improved their level to get used to their new strength.


    Veronica is acting like the mentor to the two recently improved wind mages, Shirley and Wendy. While Celestine is mentoring Ka, and Julia is mentoring Candy. Though in Julia''s case, because Candy is learning more things even before she became expert level, the two are teaching each other.


    As for Kron, he has be expert level for quite a while, and doesn''t need any more guidance.


    I wonder if any of us can reach master level before the raid. Though I won''t hope too much, it''s still best if someone can reach that level.


    I believe that as long as Ang can breakthrough to expert level safely, she alone is enough to fight one artificial master level mage. I don''t know about the real master level mage though.


    I looked at everyone and see that everyone has be much stronger now even though some of them haven''t increased their level yet. I actually moved to tears thinking that we can finally have a chance against the cult.


    "Roy, you''re crying," Victoria said.


    "Yeah. We havee this far and everyone is now much stronger than when we first met. I truly wish that we can destroy the cult. So many expert level mages here. And they are much stronger than average expert level mages," I said.


    "You''re too emotional. But you''re right. I also never thought that you would be able to cut through magic. Even among Aura users of my time, it was just a legend," Sonia said. When did she get here?


    Because this is an important event, I asked Sonia to stay in this world as long as possible. As for important matter in my world, I told Albert to take care of it himself.


    And now, I also have a small camera attached to my body. Because Marie found out that Monsters World is the moon, she enhanced the signal transmitter and receiver so it can receive and transmit signal between two worlds. The Monsters World and the humans'' world.


    Although Albert and the others can only see the dyed broadcast because of the distance, Marie did it.


    I think Albert is watching me making the giants killing each other now. And soon, he will hear the conversation about me crying.


    With this many people here, Ang doesn''t need to worry about her safety and can focus everything on breaking through. And even someone is injured, we have many healers flying in the sky.


    Oh? I see some angels lifted their spears and participating in a battle. I guess even among them, some of them would end up bing battle-crazed as well after being close with the werewolves for a while.


    Seeing them using light magic to shoot from distance, Ka also tried to do it. She couldn''t do it before, but now that she has learned a lot from the angels, she can use Light Beam to shoot light to the enemies. And this is much faster than throwing rocks to the opponent.


    I see Candy and Wendy joining together to make a big fire with Candy''s fire magic and Wendy''s wind magic, to burn many monsters far from here. They have slowly getting used to their new strength.


    But when will Ang finish breaking through? I hope it won''t be too long.

 Chapter 416 - More Incoming Enemies

    And so¡­ three days have passed ever since Ang started breaking through. And she hasn''t finished yet!


    "This must be the longest breaking through in history. It has been three days, and she''s still there. Breaking through all four elements at once to expert level must be difficult," I said.


    "But is she fine? She hasn''t eaten or drink the whole time she''s inside there," Victoria asked.


    "She''s fine. There''s no change in her body. And she''s not dehydrated as well. I think that''s a bit scary as a doctor. I wouldn''t want to stay without eating for three days," I said.


    "Is that why you refused to get my clones to infect your inner organ?" Victoria asked.


    "Obviously. Food is more important," I said.


    Right now, I don''t have anything to do as the others can handle it. And they also started using the shift system now and started guarding Ang in turns. As for some who are on standby, they are either resting, eating, or even cultivating.


    Since everyone is strong enough to handle everything so far, I don''t need to do anything. Though for the others, they started to make a bet on how much monsters they can defeat. And I am not allowed to take part. Why!?


    I can only fight in close range, so even if I participated, they can still defeat more. But I am not allowed to take part in it? That''s ridiculous!


    Oh, they know that I can use portals many times now. That''s why I was stopped from participating. Tsk!


    Anyway, now that it''s already three days of protecting Ang, I asked for some more reinforcements. Including Oleg''s group from Melk and Hill''s group from Mellian. It''s a good ce as well for them to improve and get stronger.


    This way, when weaker enemiese, our stronger members can sit back and rx, while watching our weaker members fighting and giving them guidance as well. This is nice.


    And the camera is still working as well, so Albert can watch what''s going on here.


    So far, it has been quite peaceful despite many ces is covered with blood here.


    "Is it just me or the monsters are much weaker than during the Stampede back then?" Oleg asked Hill.


    "I don''t think so. We are also steadily getting stronger as well. Though not as strong as Kron is. He''s already expert level," Hill replied.


    "Haha! If you focus more in your personal strength, you can be as powerful as I am!" Kron said proudly.


    "Hmm¡­ no thanks. I''d rather protect my city with my babies," Hill said.


    "Sure then. But why do you call your men as babies? They are all adult," Kron asked.


    "Well¡­ it happened," Hill said.


    ¡­what the hell? Don''t tell me those guys who have been training their body for the sole purpose of keeping their distance to Hill, has changed their ways? Hill has affected them that much?


    I''m d that I didn''t stay in Mellian for too long then. Cause I don''t want to see the sight of that.


    Not just those from Tatrama. People from other countries that their kings can trust were here as well. Though it''s not as many as those from Tatrama.


    Like how Celestine is busy right now because the people she gave her guidance for the sake of the tournament are here, so she''s watching over them now. They are those who will participate in the tournament, and already know what we are going to do. They are getting along with Ka and the others.


    Though I believe, just like in the tournament in Melk, none of them would hold themselves back in case they are facing each other. They are still interested in being the strongest after all.


    Though now that there are several expert level mages as well from Tatrama, I think it''s good if other countries have more expert level mages as well. Because I think we are overpowering them. But since Celestine and Julia will represent their country, I think it will still be interesting to watch.


    Though with their experience as expert level mages, they still have the advantages than those who just recently improved.


    "Master! New enemies approaching!"


    All of a sudden, Graham shouted of a new iing enemy. The only reason he announced the warning is because he thinks that the new enemies are much stronger than the previous ones we fought, or because they are an intelligent species.


    "Thanks for the information. I''ll go and greet them now," I said as I looked at the direction where the new enemiesing from.


    "They are still too far, so I don''t know if your eyes can see them now," Graham said.


    "Then let''s go there," I said as I run, with Graham flying at high speed above me. Then I asked him, "what kind of enemies is it this time?"


    "They are vampires. They have strong body, fast, and they suck the blood of living beings," Graham said.


    That''s just like the vampires in story. But is that all?


    "What about their magic? Do they have any?" I asked again.


    "Probably something rted to blood. And if theye here after sucking the blood of every other monsters they encountered on the way, they might be really powerful," Graham said.


    Blood rted magic, and they might have sucked a lot of blood from the monsters they encountered. I want to think that they can be negotiated with, but I can''t hope too much. I''ll meet them while getting reinforcement to prepare to fight. They will fight after I give the signal.


    "Graham, create a giant clone of yourself. We might need it. Sonia. You''re here?"


    "What is it, Roy?" Sonia appears after I tapped the buckle of my belt.


    "Get the werewolves ready. Things might get¡­ physical."


    "The enemy is physically gifted, huh? I''ll tell Shelia and the other werewolves. What about Ka and the humans?" Sonia asked.


    "They will stay here to protect Ang. There might be other powerful species approaching while I''m fighting the vampires," I said.


    "Understood," Sonia left after she said that.


    Can I negotiate with the vampires? Even if I can what should I give them? Blood? How much?


    Let''s think about it carefully first. They are monsters. And I have experience in turning monsters into allies.


    First, it was the werewolves. I defeated their king, and be their next king.


    Next was the elves. They are cowards, and I gave themnd and security.


    Lastly, the angels. I used force to get them loyal to me.


    ¡­there''s nothing I can give to the vampires other than making them understand through violence.


    Let''s talk with them first before we fight.


    I can finally see them now. They have pale skin as if they never leave their house. Don''t they ever get tanned? It''s the sun is bright right now.


    Oh, wait. I guess vampires being creature that can only walk during the night is just a myth. They are walking normally now.


    There''s one thing that makes me want to kill them right away. They are all good looking!


    Though I just want to kill the male ones. Kill them before Victoria even fantasize things about them.


    Most importantly, they have sharp canines in their mouth. And it was also longer than human''s canines. Do they ever bite their lips, tongue, or even the inside of their mouth with those sharp things when eating? The pain must be much worse than being bitten by a normal human''s teeth.


    And the vampires I see far in front of me¡­ are following one of them who seems to be their leader. He''s a vampire who seems to be a ten years old boy if he''s a human. But I think they live longer than humans, so he must be many times older than me despite his height is about as tall as Daniel''s. Now I miss Daniel.


    Since we know the leader now, I''ll go and see if we can talk or not.


    "Good afternoon, vampires. What can I help you with?" I tried to be polite.


    "Who are you?" the vampire boy asked.


    "A friend of the source of this magic fluctuation," I replied.


    "I see¡­ then, not just your friend. We will also suck the blood of everyone here!" the boy shouted.


    After that, multiple vampires jumped at me in high speed. Not fast enough for me though. I can easily see them and dodge. But rather than dodging, I''d rather kill them in the spot.


    I know that I want to see if they can be turned into ourrades or not, but we can''t take the risk. He has said that his intention is to suck Ang''s blood. And I won''t let him and any other vampires get closer to her.


    As they get close to me, I quickly used Reizpear and Victokatana to kill the attacking vampires. With both weapons, I killed them all easily.


    "¡­you''re quite strong. Even though we have drunk quite a bit of blood, you can still overpower them with your strength. What are you?" the boy vampire asked.


    "A human," I replied.


    "So, what''s a human?" the boy asked again.


    After asking that, one of the vampires next to him who seems to be much older than old man Henry, whispering something to him. Probably telling him what a human is.


    "Oh? It seems like your kind has the most delicious blood. Everyone! It''s a feast!" the boy shouted.


    Really? My blood is delicious? I don''t think so. Probably only for the vampires.


    This time, all of the vampires areing at me. And I used intimidation on them by using Aura and my will. Thanks to the experience with Andro, I can somehow use something simr to his intimidation. Though it''s much weaker, it''s still enough to handle the weaker vampires.


    "I will kill anyone with the intention to harm me or my friends," I said intimidatingly.


    While that happens, the group of werewolves finally arrive with Shelia and Jack in the lead. Seems like they really want to fight the vampires.


    "Finally¡­ FINALLY! Vampires versus werewolves! I can finally see it happening in front of me!"


    ¡­let''s ignore the ck Slime who has her dreaming true in front of her. But she''s right that this will be a great battle between the werewolves and the vampires.. As long as the werewolves are strong enough to handle the vampires, I won''t lift a finger anymore.

 Chapter 417 - Vampires Versus Werewolves

    Vampires against werewolves. Which side will win?


    Obviously, as I''m on the side of the werewolves, and I''m their king as well, I will support the werewolves to win. Though it seems like it will be a little difficult.


    The vampires have gained more power after drinking a lot of blood from the monsters they encounter this far. As for the werewolves, other than transformation, they don''t have anything else that can improve their strength in a short time.


    Other than Shelia, Jack, and several other werewolves, most of them were overpowered by the vampires. Some even got their blood sucked and only make the vampires stronger. Although the werewolves have regeneration power, blood loss can''t be regenerated. Which makes the werewolves weaker, while the vampires grow stronger.


    But for now, the battle is still even because we have more werewolves than the vampires. When a werewolf got injured or get their blood sucked, the other werewolves would rescue them so there are no casualties at all. They have gotten much better in their teamwork.


    In the past, just like the angels, they would prefer individual strength over teamwork. Though the angels were much worse. But now, they know that if they can''t win the fight alone, they will ask for help.


    Other than the werewolves, we have one archangel here who is helping. He''s Graham. Though he didn''t fight and just letting his clone do all the fighting. It''s because the werewolves are moving too much, and the clothes covering their body have been ripped. Making Graham unable to see the fight and just letting his giant shadow clone fight the vampires.


    "I-indecent! Fighting while naked!" Graham shouted.


    "They are still wearing clothes," I replied.


    "But it''s no difference than being naked!"


    "Like I said, get used to it!"


    If it''s just one or two girls showing their skin, Graham can now endure the sight. But since there are too many of them, and with the female vampires got their clothes ripped by the werewolves'' ws, the sight was too much for Graham.


    "Go there and fight with the others!" I gave the archangel amand to fight.


    "No! The sight is too much for me. I can just let my clone to fight. And he doesn''t even have any blood in him, so the vampires won''t get stronger," Graham said.


    "¡­you may be right. Well, just don''t get in anyone''s way then."


    Seeing the giant twelve-winged shadow clone fighting the vampires, I can see that the appearance of the giant clone is very helpful for the werewolves. But if Graham is fighting as well¡­ he might cause problem instead since he doesn''t know where to look.


    Meanwhile, the vampire boy who is the leader of the vampires was angry seeing how the vampires lost against the werewolves despite being the stronger one.


    "What the hell are you doing!? They are just a bunch of werewolves, but you can''t kill them!? Suck their blood and get even stronger!" the boy shouted.


    "Say the boy who doesn''t want to lift his finger," I provoked the boy.


    "¡­you, do you really want me to fight?" the boy asked me.


    "No. I want you to die. Though if you prefer to keep your life, you can withdraw instead," I continued provoking him.


    "I will kill you and drink all your and your friend''s blood!"


    The boy charged at me ignoring the old vampire next to him trying to stop him.


    I just stay calm when he''s approaching, because I have someone I can trust to protect me.


    Well, not Graham. Although he''s right next to me, he''s not the one I mentioned.


    It''s Shelia. The strongest werewolf.


    As the boy get close to me and throw a fist, Shelia caught his fist with her palm and stopped the attack.


    "You will never touch our king," Shelia said.


    "Get away, you stinky dog!"


    The vampire boy and strongest werewolf started fighting away from me after Shelia baited him to fight her. At least one of the strongest vampires will be busy.


    As for the other strong vampire, the old man, Jack approached him and challenged him to a fight.


    "A puppy picking a fight against the vampire lord? Know your ce!" the old vampire shouted.


    "I know my ce. It''s in front of you. Stopping you from approaching our king and his friends," Jack said as he swung his ws at the old vampire, in which he dodged it.


    While the top fighters of both sides started fighting, I''m focusing my Divine Vision to see the surrounding area to see if the vampires brought some other monsters to fight. But it seems like they are the only species nearby.


    "Roy, who is our new guest?"


    All of a sudden, Spot flew beside me and asked about our new guests.


    "They are vampires. Just let the werewolves fight them. Graham is helping them though. Just the clone," I replied.


    "Oh, what a shame. I wish I had stronger opponent myself," Spot said.


    "I wish there won''t be any more enemies instead. How are the others doing?" I asked.


    "They are fine. Though some were injured while protecting Ang, the angels healed them and they recovered enough to fight again."


    "Good. You can go patrol the area again to see if there are more iing enemies. Seems like Ang will stay there for a while longer. Maybe a week."


    "One week? Really?"


    "I don''t know. It''s just my estimation. Though it''s best if we leave some enemies alive since Ang would most likely try out her new strength after reaching expert level," I said.


    "Knowing her, I think you are right. I''ll take a look at the surrounding and see if the others needed help. Do the werewolves really not need any help?" Spot asked.


    "Don''t worry. I''m here," I said.


    Spot left this ce and take a look at the other area. I also used my Divine Vision again to see how the others are doing, and they are still fine despite their injuries. I take a look at Elsie who noticed me right away, and she shook her head telling me that she hasn''t seen another waveing.


    Seems like after those monsters near the dome is defeated, the others can take a breather while we are still busy with the vampires.


    Well, since there''s no more enemiesing at the moment, we''ll just focus on the vampires.


    The other werewolves are finally gaining advantage. Seeing that their leader, the vampire boy, is fighting Shelia, the vampires who were fighting the werewolves were distracted and the werewolves used that chance to gain advantage.


    What? The vampires also have regeneration magic? That''s annoying.


    But the werewolves still have advantage in number. And the vampires seem to be using the blood they suck to regenerate. Which makes them weaker every time they got injured.


    Hmm¡­ it will take a long time for the werewolves to finish all of the vampires. But if I help, it can be done faster. Though I won''t help them in fighting, I can help by provoking the vampires.


    "The vampires are losing! Keep attacking them, werewolves! We''re winning! Show them that the werewolves are the strongest race!"


    Of course I won''t forget to cheer the werewolves to raise their morale. The werewolves howled, and their attacks are much better than before.


    Even though it''s physically impossible for them to increase their strength all of a sudden, a good motivation can make their attack stronger. That''s why while I provoke the vampires, I didn''t forget to raise the werewolves'' morale.


    "Tsk! Duke! We''re no match against them! There are too many of them! Let''s withdraw and call for reinforcement!" the vampire lord who is fighting Jack shouted.


    It seems like the vampire boy is a duke. And hearing that they still have reinforcement, I''m guessing that they still have vampire king or queen.


    If the vampires withdraw from here, they will ask for reinforcement. Which mean, the fight will be harder than now. But if all of them die here, the vampires staying behind will notice sooner orter that this troop is defeated, so they will stille here anyway. But we will fight one less troop then.


    I guess the correct answer will be to defeat the vampires here. I hope that the next time the vampires are here, Ang has finished breaking through so she can participate. And I will need others'' help as well. Not just the werewolves.


    "Eradicate all the vampires! Don''t let them retreat!"


    "Vampires versus werewolves, with the werewolves winning. This is a good material for my next story," Victoria said to herself.


    What story? That''s obvious. Something that only she likes. Let''s ignore her.


    Many vampires have fallen. Each time a vampire fall, the werewolf who killed them will help other werewolf who is in trouble. Although the troubled werewolves don''t like it that they are being seen to have trouble, they don''tin at all because they know that they are not strong enough. And instead, it will motivate them to grow stronger.


    It''s amazing. I have such species under me. And I have to show them how right they are making me their king.


    I guess once the vampire king or queene, I will fight as well.


    Ever since Ang begins breaking through, it has been three days. Which mean for the next reinforcement of the vampires to arrive, it might take another three days at least. And I still don''t know until when Ang wille out of the dome.


    Though the vampires haven''t been defeated yet. The duke and the lord, along with some other vampires are still fighting.


    But we are winning, so it''s fine to ignore them.. Just leave them to the werewolves.

 Chapter 418 - Werewolves Victory

    For now, let''s watch how the fight continues.


    I can see everything, so I will exin one by one.


    Let''s see¡­ there are three battles going on. Shelia against the vampire duke boy, Jack against the vampire duke, and the rest of the werewolves and the vampires.


    For now, about the werewolves and the vampires.


    It was not easy for the werewolves, but they slowly but surely gained advantages, and started killing the vampires. Once several of them were defeated, it was obvious which side will win.


    Although the vampires said that they need to retreat, they were unable to because of the werewolves.


    Since that side was done, I don''t need to exin any more about that, right?


    Next is Jack against the vampire lord.


    That vampire looks to be the oldest among the vampires. Though I don''t know if he''s really the oldest or not. But at least I know his status is higher than most of them. And seems like the only one with higher status is the vampire duke boy.


    That vampire lord looks about as old as Grandpa Werewolf. But he''s much weaker, so I guess his age should be less than Grandpa Werewolf when he died.


    And because Jack has improved a lot ever since then, he is just slightly weaker than Grandpa Werewolf when I killed him. At least that''s what I thought.


    But their strength seems to be evenly matched. That vampire lord must have drunk a lot of blood himself before. That''s why they are evenly matched.


    If it''s me, I can easily defeat that old vampire. It will be even easier if I can trick him. But for now, Jack is the one fighting. It''s rare for him to find an equal match after getting so strong. As for Shelia, she''s already way stronger than him. Probably even stronger than Grandpa Werewolf when I fought him.


    That old vampire realizes that he''s evenly matched with Jack, so he tried to suck Jack''s blood to get stronger. Obviously, Jack didn''t allow him to. Though each time he shed blood, that old vampire will try to get that blood into his mouth. Seems like just a little bit of blood can still make him stronger.


    I learned a lot about vampires today. This way, in case their reinforcement arrives, I can expect what they can do. Though I want to see if they can use magic or not.


    Oh? They can use magic! And it''s to use the blood they drunk and used it to create an object they can use. And in this case, that old vampire is using blood to creates a sword.


    "You''re much stronger than expected, little puppy. Although I used quite a lot of blood for this sword, there''s no way for you to win. You should have let us retreat if you want to live, puppy!" the old vampire said to Jack.


    That seems to be a provocation toward Jack. But Jack is already used to spar with me during thisst few month, so he''s used to provocation worse than that.


    "If you want to provoke me, you should have done better than that! I have fought with a much stronger swordsman than you, so it''s you who is at disadvantage!" Jack said.


    Is the one he called a stronger swordsman is me? I''ll give him a rewardter. Probably a sack of dog food. Nah, a sack filled with chicken nuggets for him. But the sack will be smaller than the sack for dog food. I will let him choose.


    With the old vampire got weaker after creating the blood sword, Jack should have gotten the upper hand. But the old vampire''s swordsmanship was better than mine. Though if I fought him, I can overpower him with brute strength. But it seems like watching him using sword can teach me something.


    Even though Victoria is a swordswoman, because shecks the strength, she can''t show everything she knows to me. That''s why watching a good swordsman fighting will only help me improve.


    "Roy, look at how he wields the sword. It was as if the sword is weightless," Victoria said.


    "As for you, you can literally change the weight of the sword. And your sword is really part of your body," I said.


    "I''m talking about sword skill and not ck Slime''s racial skill. Just watch and learn. Though I think Jack will still be the winner in the end," Victoria said.


    I agree with her. Although my skill is not as good as the old vampire, he is weaker and slower than me. Once Jack is used to the old vampire''s skill, it will be done in an instant.


    And just as I expected, when the old vampire swung his sword, Jack parried the sword by using his ws on the side of the de.


    After losing his bnce, Jack wed the heart of the vampire out and eat it. I know that he''s a monster, but I don''t expect him to eat the heart of a vampire. I only know him as a werewolf who loves fried chicken and chicken nugget.


    I hope he won''t get used to the taste of raw food again like before he met me.


    "Don''t worry, my king. Cooked meals are more delicious," Jack said.


    Then why did you eat his heart?


    At the same time, Shelia is still fighting the vampire duke boy. And that vampire boy is about as strong as Grandpa Werewolf.


    "Shelia! He''s about as strong as Grandpa Werewolf!" I shouted.


    "Really? That''s good. Now that I have be stronger, I want to see if I can beat grandpa or not," Shelia said.


    "You are not strong enough to defeat me!" the vampire boy said.


    This vampire boy''s blood magic is much better than the old vampire. Because he only used very little amount of blood to create two daggers which he held in each hand. It''s dual-wielding vampire now.


    Maybe I can meet other vampire that use spears or other types of weapon as well. Though if they are hostile, I don''t want to meet them. But since they will be here anyway because Ang hasn''t finished yet, I''ll just watch how the vampire boy fight.


    It''s ws against daggers. And two weapons, if I can say that ws are weapons, are shing.


    It might look like the vampire boy is stronger. But Shelia is better in fighting.


    Shelia is in her werewolf form with her tail out, and as she blocked the daggers, she parries them and did a spin. While doing so, she makes sure that her tail will hit the boy, and it did.


    Although it''s just a tail, it''s still strong enough to get the vampire boy lose his bnce. And Shelia used that chance to w at the boy again. But the vampire boy is fast enough to react as he dodges, and throw a counter. In which Shelia has no choice but to block it. And the strength difference makes her take three steps backward.


    I can see well that Shelia has more experience in fighting than the vampire boy. Probably because although the boy is strong, he let his subordinate do the fighting instead. That''s why hecked experience. But his current strength means that the difference won''t be too much.


    Seeing that he has no advantage fighting on the ground, he lets out blood wing appears on his back. The wings are red and it ps as the boy flew. And Shelia who can run on air, won''t let him get away.


    "So, vampire can fly as well, huh?" I said.


    "Alright. What else is the same characteristic with the fictional version of vampires in my world," Victoria said.


    ¡­let''s ignore her.


    The two are fighting in the sky now. And the sound of shes between daggers and ws can be heard. Some vampires and werewolves who were fighting stopped to see what''s going on. But the werewolves reacted quickly and kill the stopped vampires.


    As they fight, Shelia got used to the boy''s strength and shed her ws at his unprotected arm. Severing his right arm from the body.


    Weirdly enough, the boy didn''t react much. Other than the fact that there''s a string of blood connecting the severed limb to the body.


    The boy smiled, as it turns out that he can manipte the severed arm as long as the blood string is connecting it with his body.


    The severed arm, with dagger still in its grip, is stabbing Shelia from the back. Shelia notices toote as she''s unable to dodge, but she was quick enough to not get hit in the vital as she slightly leaned her body sideway. That way, the dagger stabbed on her shoulder instead of her vital.


    But Shelia is smart. The moment the dagger is stabbing her shoulder, she knows that the boy will let down his guard at that moment. And in that exact moment, Shelia is already had her other hand prepared to sh the boy with full power.


    As the boy smiled, he realized that Shelia is still attacking. He had not time at all to dodge, and his body is severed into pieces. But he didn''t die yet.


    "Urgh¡­ please don''t kill me," the boy said.


    I approached the boy, and checked why he''s still alive even though his head is away from his body. Is it because of his blood magic?


    "How are you still alive?" I asked.


    "It''s his heart. It''s still beating," Shelia said.


    She notices that? I look at the separated chest of the boy and see his heart is beating indeed.


    That mean the only way to kill them is by destroying the heart, huh? Is that why Jack ate the heart of the old vampire?


    Does it mean he knows that the only way to kill vampire, or at least the stronger vampire, is to destroy their heart? Did he learn that by instinct?


    I guess monsters are still monsters.


    Shelia then stepped on the heart and destroys it. Killing the vampire boy instantly.


    The morale of the surviving vampires dropped as the werewolves easily defeat them.


    With this we have protected Ang for three days. But there''s no sign of hering out at all.


    I guess we will continue protecting her for a few more days.

 Chapter 419 - Delaying The Vampires

    The day after we defeated the vampires, there haven''t been any powerful monsters yet. As usual, I can leave it to the rest. Though because people like Hill and Oleg are busy, I brought them back to their city. But we still have a lot of manpower here, so it''s fine. And I will bring them back here again in two days if Ang hasn''t finished breaking through.


    I wonder how she feels at the moment? Will she be hungry after she finished breaking through? I''ll just ask Lina to prepare Ang''s meal at all time.


    Though when Ang hasn''t finished breaking through yet, I am the one ended up eating those foods. But it''s all good.


    "Spot, how''s the surrounding?" I asked.


    "Same as usual. Many monsters, but none of them are extraordinary," Spot said.


    "Then, let''s take a walk around. Though you will be flying," I said.


    "Where to?" Spot asked.


    "Where the vampires came from. I want to know how long until the rest of the vampires arrive if they really wille," I said.


    Now that we''re leaving, I need to appoint a leader. And the one I pick is obviously Ka. So, I killed the ogre she was about to fight.


    "Ka, leave it to the others. I need you to do something," I said.


    "You want me to stay as the temporary leader while you''re away, right? Are you going to where the vampires are?" Ka knew what I was about to ask from her.


    "You''re amazing as always. That''s right. I want to know how long until they arrive. Make sure you remind the others to not use everything while taking care of the weaklings and save their strength for the big battle. I''ll be going now!"


    I kissed Ka and ride Spot away toward where the previous vampires wereing from. That''s the most likely ce for the other vampires toe from.


    With Spot''s speed, it doesn''t take long before my Divine Vision can see where the vampires are. But from the distance and the time it took for Spot toe here, the estimation time for the vampires to reach us should be around two or three days. Unless all of them can fly.


    Though I believe, just like before, they will drink the blood of all monsters they encounter before arriving. I can also see that they are drinking blood from the goblins. Do they drink from all living beings no matter how disgusting they are?


    My guess is that as long as it can make them stronger, they don''t mind. Though from yesterday''s event, when that vampire boy said humans'' blood is delicious, I think they still have their own taste. Not that I like the taste of blood. At least it''s good to know that human''s blood is more delicious than goblin''s blood.


    "There they are. What will you do, Roy?" Spot asked.


    "Decrease the number and dy their march as much as possible," I said.


    For this, I have prepared somethings. Blobbygrenades filled with gas.


    I asked Victoria how to improve the reach of my gas, and she said that I can just throw it. And that''s how she exined what a grenade is. It''s a throwing weapon that will explode.


    And so, we prepared Blobbygrenades, filled with many gases. Calming gas, sleeping gas, depressing gas, infuriating gas, and even the killing gas. Not the gas that will make those who inhale it die. But the kind that will make them kill each other. Though it will be great if I can use such gas.


    "Hmm¡­ there are lots of vampires. Probably, more than three hundred. If they started killing each other, not just we will have fewer enemies. But they will be weaker as well because they will use a lot of blood. But still, I haven''t seen their leader yet. They must be far behind," I said.


    I don''t think that my gas can affect those with powerful magic like expert level or even master level mages. As for monsters, I believe that the vampires'' leader, whether it''s a king or a queen, can resist my gas somewhat. But for the other vampires, they don''t have that much power.


    "Let''s throw it to several locations with the most vampires," I said while looking down at the vampires from the sky, on Spot''s back.


    "Making them kill each other? Roy, I think you are the evilest human than any other humans I''ve ever known. And you think the cult is evil?" Spot asked.


    "Oh, they are evil indeed. The reason I''m seen to be eviler than them is because they did evil things to me first. If they didn''t kill me in my previous life, I wouldn''t go this far," I said.


    "Don''t mind him. He''s just justifying his evil act. If you listened to him seriously, you are just an idiot," Victoria said to Spot.


    Protecting my friend is not evil. And that''s the truth.


    I prepared five Blobbygrenades filled with the killing gas, and threw them at five different spots. Though I hope that some of them will be inhaled by the leader of the vampires.


    The vampires looked confused when they see a ck ball falling near them. They stopped their march for a while, and I gave the signal to Victoria to destroy her clones.


    "Victoria, now." I said.


    "Okay!"


    The five ck balls disappeared in an instant. Making the vampires wary of the situation thinking that someone is attacking them. But they are half right. Someone indeed attacking them, but it''s not from the outside where the vampires are currently looking at. They are searching for the perpetrator outside of their group, but where they should be wary are their own kind instead.


    In less than three second, one vampire already killing someone next to him. I wonder if they drink blood from their own kind?


    Maybe because they are affected by the gas, they don''t think about drinking the blood and just went into frenzy as many vampires started to kill each other. Most of the affected vampirese from close to the Blobbygrenades. Though the grenade is gone now, the gas is spreading to every vampire there.


    "What are you doing!?"


    "Stop it!"


    "Hey! It''s me!"


    "DIE!!!"


    The panicked vampires don''t know what to do as their friends or families are killing them. Maybe I should have used the infuriating gas instead. But still, lowering their number is more important. Using the infuriating gas won''t make them kill each other. They can still be healedter if they are injured, but if they die, there''s nothing they can do.


    "In horror fictions, it''s normal for human being to scream because of vampires. But this is truly a scene from horror movie. Vampires screaming in horror from other vampires killing them. This could be a hit!" Victoria said.


    "What? You''re thinking of writing action horror this time?" I asked.


    "I have always been writing many kinds of stories. My favorite part is writing the subplot instead of the main plot," Victoria said.


    Okay, I regret that I asked. It''s kind of obvious what the subplot is.


    "And there''s a character that I wrote based on you," Victoria continued.


    "Like I said, never use me as the material for your story!"


    Oh, no! What if her readers noticed that? I will be popr in a way that I never wanted. That will be hell.


    I wish no one noticed it.


    The vampires started killing each other. Unless those who inhaled the gas were killed, the killing won''t end.


    Hmm¡­ Ipressed a lot of gas inside of the Blobbygrenade, so I expected more of them to be affected. But it seems like many of them are powerful enough to resist the effect of the gas. Though they are not powerful enough to protect themselves against the affected vampires and they die.


    Until finally, a group of vampires appear and killed those who got affected. They seem to be their elite force consist of the vampire nobles. That''s just my guess though. But it might be close to the truth.


    I still have some grenades, so let''s throw them. Though they are not the killing gas, it should be enough to dy them.


    Those who inhaled the fear gas, were afraid to get closer. They are afraid of something that blocking their path, even though what they see is just a hallucination.


    Those who inhaled depressing gas, give up on everything after seeing their own kind killing each other.


    Those who inhaled the infuriating gas, were angry at other vampires and another battle begins.


    And those who inhaled the lust gas¡­ well, they are doing what I expected to do after inhaling the gas. Some are good for the eye because they are all good looking. But it makes me angry instead.


    But those effects are temporary. They will continue their marchter.


    But as all of that event is happening in front of them, I haven''t seen any sign of their leader. Which one is it?


    Until finally, I see a male vampire about my age, is looking directly at me from the ground. He''s looking at me angrily and is the only one who noticed my location even though we are far, and Spot is using his camouge ability. He must be their leader.


    I show him my middle finger as I try to memorize his face with my terrible memory, before returning back to the dome.


    If he can see that far, he might have some good pair of eyes. Maybe if I defeat him, my Divine Vision will improve.


    Well, let''s report it to the others. A huge battle ising. Whether Ang is done with her breakthrough or not, the battle can''t be stopped.


    ¡­maybe I shouldn''t have provoked him?


    Well, it''s toote for that. They areing because of Ang anyway.. It''s best to kill them.

 Chapter 420 - Four Elements Joining Together Like A Puzzle

    When Roy left to see check on the vampires, he made Ka be the one in charge. Ka knew that she will be the one to lead in case Roy is gone, so it''s already expected for Roy toe to her before leaving.


    Nothing changed at all, but because Ka doesn''t have a pair of eyes as good as Roy''s, hermand would often slightly dyed. But thanks to her being close to the angels, she doesn''t need to see far as she can hear the situation from them despite theirziness to fight.


    It wasn''t justziness that makes them refuse to fight. But because many of the female werewolves have their clothes ripped and show too much skin. Which makes the angels reluctant toe over to help because they are too shy from seeing the werewolves.


    But not the female angels. They are dependable in the fight.


    Firstly, it''s because rather than being ashamed from seeing girls with too much exposure, they are interested instead. And they have gotten along quite well with not just Ka, but also other girls including the werewolves.


    And seeing them fighting despite their messy clothes, the female angels were inspired to do their best as well. They no longer just stand still and wait until someone is injured to heal them. They took their weapons, and charged at the enemies.


    Especially now that they knew about Ka being the leader, they will do their best to not let her down.


    "If you can do this much, you should have let Roy lead you," Ka said to a representative of the female angels.


    "¡­he''s scary," the angel said.


    "That''s because you are unable to cooperate. Now that you have be much better in cooperating, if you show him what you can do, he will respect you instead and won''t use fear to control you anymore. And instead, you will be considered as his friends. Tell this to the other angels. Including the male ones," Ka said.


    "Really?" the angel asked.


    "Yes. If he still won''t give you respect, I will tell him to do it. I have that much power as his girlfriend," Ka said proudly.


    "Great! I''ll tell the others about this. They will surely show you greater strength in this battle!" the angel said as she left to tell the others about what they discussed.


    As the angel left, Candy who is resting approached Ka.


    "Roy control them with fear, but you manipte them with their feelings. Once they show their strength, they will be free from Roy''s fear but instead, they will feel gratitude toward you and will follow you. And as someone who cares about Roy the most, you will make them do what Roy wants them to do. Isn''t that right?" Candy asked.


    "You''re right. It''s their fault anyway to not have any motivation. When I first saw them rxing when Roy wasn''t around, I know that they are what Roy wants to be. Living in peace. But they live in a fake peace because they don''t know the real danger of the cult, while Roy is living his life with fear of the cult at all time. He wants to be like them, but unable to. That''s why I''m angry at them for not doing anything," Ka said.


    "You''re right. If they didn''t meet Roy, they will just be weaklings who can''t grow. Well, they''re not that weak, but it''s true that they won''t grow stronger. They won''t be able to survive once the cult starteding to this world," Candy said.


    Candy knows that Ka doesn''t care at all about the angels'' intention. Whether they want to rx or train, it''s not important for Ka. The most important thing for her is Roy.


    At first, she only wanted to be his girlfriend because of the sense of security that he gave. But as she grows stronger, even much stronger than the people around her, she realizes that the strength that Roy seeks isn''t there yet. And as each day passed, the more she realizes how powerful the enemies are, and how much important Roy is in her life. And she realized that she has totally fallen for Roy who have to do everything to survive.


    She knows how much trauma the cult gave him. After all, each night when they are sleeping together, it shows on Roy''s face. The expression of fear and despair was shown when he''s sleeping.


    That''s why Ka wants to give her best to Roy. To fulfil his wish to live in peace.


    Not just Ka. Everyone who has slept with him, and sees his frightened expression, want to do the same.


    For all his effort, they all want to give him the reward he deserves the most. But to do that, they have to help him destroy the cult.


    Roy has told them that his intention in destroying the cult is not for the sake of the world. But for the sake of himself. Ka and the others as well. They did it not to save the world, but to save Roy.


    That''s why Ka tries to manipte the angels to help. As long as they are helping Ka, they will help Roy as well.


    "Even right now, he should be either stopping the vampires by himself, reducing their number, dying them, or provoking them. After hearing about the vampires from Shelia, we need the angels'' help no matter what," Ka said.


    "Do you think he knows what you''re doing in the background?" Candy asked with a smile.


    "I have never told him. But even if he knows, he will be grateful instead," Ka replied.


    "You''re right. Well, I guess I should join the fight now. See youter," Candy said as she left to fight the monsters.


    Ka watched the surrounding to see if there''s someone who needs any help. But now, everyone has gotten stronger. They all know how to handle the enemies themselves. Even if they don''t, they know how to ask and give help.


    "¡­did he give me the role because he knows there''s not much to do? Or he appoints me as the leader so I can get the angels'' help? Maybe he just didn''t give it much thought. That''s very him," Ka said to herself.


    In a dome built for resting, Fabio and Kron is looking at the battlefield.


    "¡­it''s truly amazing how he can get this many people to fight together," Fabio said.


    "Unfortunately, you can only see this happening when people have an enemy to defeat. Let''s say the cult didn''t exist. No one ever thought that people from four different countries to fight together. Though if the cult doesn''t exist, Roy wouldn''t even care about it. He would just find somewhere he can live peacefully," Kron replied.


    "I wonder what they really want? The cult I mean."


    "I don''t know and I don''t care. And even if you know, don''t even think to sympathize with them. Whatever their goal is, the process to reach that goal mean the death of everyone," Kron said.


    "I know. But as a future king, I need to know so I can prevent such thing to happen again. But you''re right. For now, destroying the culte first. Though we are fighting monsters unrted to the cult. But if we could kill every single monster, at least in our world, it would be great as well," Fabio said.


    "No, that''s not great at all. I''m a hunter, and monsters are my sources of ie. Also, once we no longer have monsters to use our power on, humans will start to use it against each other. It''s good now that the cult is there to fight. But what if both monsters and the cult disappear?" Kron said.


    "Hmm¡­ I never thought of it, but surely, that is crazy. I never thought that you are someone who thinks things deeply," Fabio praised Kron.


    "What do you mean by that!? Well, maybe you''re right. I''m just repeating what Roy told me before. It was back then when we were ying poker together," Kron said.


    "Let''s be grateful to Roy then. If not for him, we won''t get united like this," Fabio said.


    "No, let''s not do that. If we do, he will act cocky and I hate that," Kron said seriously.


    Fabio and Kron, as the two only two men who were brought to this world to train by Roy, are getting along really well. And the two now always took shift together. Whether they are fighting or resting.


    Not just them. Everyone there is close to each other even though they just met. It''s almost unthinkable to see people from different origins to be so close. And they all fight with one clear goal in mind. To destroy the cult.


    Although the present battle is not rted to the cult, it''s rted in the process of getting stronger. If they couldn''t even handle this much, destroying the cult is but a dream.


    They all respected Roy who is currently showing a middle finger to the vampires'' leader not knowing that they will fight the angry and highly motivated vampires.


    Meanwhile, Inside the dome, Ang is struggling. With four different elements forcefullybined to breakthrough, she is in so much pain. Although she is not Roy''s girlfriend, she''s the one who knows him the longest. Not counting Victoria.


    That''s why she believes in him. And since he said he believes that she can do it, she will do her best to be able to do it. Enduring the pain she''s in.


    From time to time, the dome started falling apart. But Ka or Celestine would notice it and restore the dome back to normal. Or Ang will be buried under the rubbles.


    Ang thought that if she can''t raise all four elements into expert level at once, she could justbine all the elements inside of her before breaking through. That way, she only needs to raise onebined element instead of four.


    Finally on this day, her four elements started fusing together.


    Ang can sense her four elements. The fire, the water, the wind, and the earth. They all started joining together like a puzzle. This way, she can still use all her four elements.


    She had other thought, which is to mix all four elements. But her instinct told her not to do that. Because she will lose three elements instead and be one. That''s why she''sbining them like a puzzle. This way, she can still use all her four elements.


    No one ever thought of doing this. Only Ang with her instinct as a genius in magic can think of this. Roy''s judgement of her as a genius was not wrong. And Ang believes him.


    Although her elements started joining together, it will take a while until they be one full picture. Maybe days or weeks. But Ang never give up.


    ''Roy and the others are doing their best to protect me.. I will also do my best!'' Ang thought.

 Chapter 421 - The Power Of Water

    Now I have met the vampires. And even provoked their leader. But I didn''t return back quickly. There''s other thing I can do. Not just dying the vampires'' arrival.


    "Roy, we''re going back now?" Spot asked.


    "Yes. But we won''t go there directly. We will defeat every single monster on the way so the vampires can''t get stronger. Although I have reduced their number and their strength, it will still be a problem if they somehow ended up getting stronger again," I replied.


    "I see. That''s a good idea. Though the monsters we will encounter should be weak. It won''t be fun then," Spot said.


    "Defeating monsters has never been fun. I just kill them for a reason. And we''re doing it right now to protect Ang," I said.


    And if we killed all the monsters we encounter on the way, not just it will help us by not making the vampires stronger. It will help the others who are protecting Ang to have some rest.


    As I jumped down from Spot''s back to the ground, I called Sonia to inform the others about the vampires. Though Albert and the others watching should have known about it. I''ll ask them if they want to participateter.


    Spot turns himself smaller and floating next to me who is travelling on the ground. Of course I didn''t walk. I''m running in high speed, enough to focus my sight and search for every single creature with blood flowing in their body. Because I believe the vampires won''t eat leaves. Though I don''t know if there are any vegetarian vampire.


    ¡­aren''t vegetarian vampires just elves? They do eat fruits and vegetables. But do they get stronger after eating them? Well, the elves I know are cowards so I will never know.


    Wait, I have werewolves, angels, and elves as my allies. But are they the only group left in this world? Aren''t there other werewolves, angels, and elves out there? Just like how there are so many vampires?


    Hmm¡­ after this, I''ll ask them if they know anything about it. This way, if they ended up bing our allies as well, we will be much stronger.


    Though I don''t know about the elves. Maybe our elves are the weakest one while out there, there are more powerful elves. If our elves meet them, they won''t agree to help us because our elves are too weak.


    I''ll just ask themter. For now, improving Ang''s strengthes first. Seems like she will stay in the dome for a while longer.


    When shees out, I wonder how powerful she will be?


    Oh? I finally found a group of monsters. They are beasts type monsters, but none of them are as smart as the werewolves. Though I see some minotaurs. They are cows, right? Walking on its hind legs and carrying a huge axe? How did they forge an axe in this world?


    That doesn''t matter. For now, it''s axe versus axe. Though I need to know first if they can be negotiated with or not.


    "Stop right there, or I will have to kill you all," I threatened the cows.


    "Mooo!"


    "I don''t ept moo as an answer. Die!"


    Seems like they can''t be negotiated with.


    I have learned spear techniques from Graham, and sword techniques from Victoria while also learning it from watching the vampires. But now, it''s time to learn about axe.


    ¡­it''s just swinging. There''s not much technique since axe is heavier than sword or spear. But the power it has is much more than sword or spear. At least, if I use axe as a weapon, I can cleave my enemy easier than when I use sword.


    And with my Victoriaxe, I cleaved the biggest minotaur in two. The other minotaurs were frightened when seeing their strongest member died in one hit. And I used that chance to kill the rest of the enemies.


    "You killed them all. that''s good. But from the look of it, you will leave a lot of dead body that the vampires can use to get stronger. How will you get rid of them?" Victoria asked.


    "Drop them to the sea. I will use portal on a Blobby floating on the sea and let sea monsters eat them," I said.


    "What about the blood remains in this area? How will you clean it?" Victoria asked again.


    "Do you really think that the vampires will grab the grass and start chewing them so they can absorb the blood on the grass?"


    "The possibility is not zero," Victoria said.


    "¡­wait, I''m imagining them right now and that''s a hrious sight. Let me clear my mind first," I said.


    What I''m imagining is the leader of the vampire that I provoked before, is grabbing a single de of grass, and start sucking on it like a candy for the blood remain. He thinks that''s the most delicious treat he ever tasted. And I can''t hold back my smile imagining that.


    "You''re started smiling weirdly. Don''t imagine weird stuff," Victoria said.


    "You''re to me for making me imagining weird stuff!" I shouted.


    She''s the one who started this. How did I ended up getting med for it?


    "About the Blobby deep in the sea. Let''s try opening a portal to it. The water from the sea should be good enough to wash the blood away," I said.


    "And the water pressure will erase everything. Though I''m interested to see that," Victoria said.


    Since we have an agreement, I started opening a portal into the sea. Once the portal is opened, the water wille out instantly. But I''m curious as well.


    The portal opened, and water is gushing out of it. Not only did the water wash the blood away, but it also destroyed the nearbyndscape. The ground sunk, the trees are down, and there''s no longer any grass in the path of the water anymore.


    I quickly closed the portal and see a horror scene. What would happen if someone is in front of me?


    "¡­if you open it in front of the vampires, their number will be reduced by more than half," Victoria said.


    "You''re right. But let''s not do that as much as possible. It''s a power we can''t control. Unless Carmen is with us," I said.


    As an expert level in water magic, she should be able to help me control the water. the destructive force of the water is too much. I''m underestimating the power of water.


    Hmm¡­ with that much power, if I open a smaller portal, it will be easier to control, right? Let''s try it right now.


    I targeted a tree in a distance, and opened a small portal in front of me targeting that tree. The size of the portal is even smaller than the tip of my pinky finger. And when the portal opened, I closed it right away after knowing that water ising out.


    The result? The tree is still standing. But with a hole in the middle of the trunk the same size of the portal.


    "¡­I think that''s much more powerful than if I used Victorifle," I said as I can see that not just the tree in front of me has a hole, but every tree behind it. Even the furthest tree that had a hole is more than 50 meters from the first tree.


    "Your shot will only damage the first tree. But water pressure can damage the trees behind it as well. If you can move your portal, you can use it to cut the tree," Victoria said.


    Unfortunately, I can''t move a portal. Though I can build a wider and thin portal so the tree can be cut down.


    This will be my trump card. Unless the enemy is a powerful water mage, it''s nearly impossible to block it.


    "¡­well, let''s continue defeating the monsters on the way back. Other than for cleaning the blood remains, I won''t use it unless I know that only the enemies are in front of me," I said.


    "Yeah. If you have an ally in front of you when using it, they will die," Victoria said.


    After that experiment, I continue defeating more monsters. On the way back.


    I just defeated those running on the ground, while those flying in the sky were defeated by Spot. As for under the ground, fortunately, there hasn''t been any ever since the first wave.


    When I return back, I was greeted by an amazing sight in which, the angels are fighting as well.


    "¡­what is this? How did it end up like this?" I asked myself.


    "I''m a good leader."


    The answer came from Ka.


    "You''re amazing. So, what did you do?" I asked.


    "I told them that you won''t threaten them if they show how useful they are," Ka said.


    "I see¡­ though I will still do it for a while so the angels won''t get cocky," I said.


    "What about the vampires?" Ka asked.


    "You''ve heard it from Sonia. They will arrive around three days from now. At least I know that they can still be affected by my gas," I said.


    "That''s good to know."


    "Though I want you to beware of the leader. He noticed my hiding spot even though we''re far and Spot is using his camouge skill. If he appears, I will be the one fighting him," I said.


    And so, we started preparing for the arrival of the vampires.. Let''s make a huge banner saying "Wee, Vampires!" from where they should appear.

 Chapter 422 - Greeting The Vampire King

    Finally, we will face the vampires. Not just a group of vampires like before, but hundreds of them.


    This feels more like a war and Albert thought that it''s a good way to gain experience for the real war. That''s why he sent his best agents here. Lynn and Old man Henry also did the same. While Harold doesn''t have anyone to send because he has no power in the kingdom at the moment.


    Including the angels and the werewolves, we have about three hundred people. About the same as the vampires. Though I have reduced their number, so we should have outnumbered them a little.


    And the one acting as themander will be Albert himself. He said that it''s a good way to train for the real thing in the future.


    Lynn, old man Henry, and Harold were here as well. But they won''t do much.


    As for me, I''ll be fighting their leader. The one who saw me when I was scouting on them, and made them kill each other.


    And now, I''m thinking of checking on the vampires again before the sh.


    "Albert. I''ll be checking on them for a while. Take care of the rest here," I said.


    "Leave it to me. I''ll make sure that those vampires won''t reach Ang," Albert said.


    "Not just that. At least don''t get any of my friends killed. As for the rest, I don''t really care," I said.


    "Please care about them! They are our allies, you know? They will be in the frontline for the battle against the cult," Albert said.


    "Sure, sure. I''m leaving now."


    I ignore Albert''s shouting as I ride on Spot''s back toward the vampires'' location.


    If they have the same pace as before, they should be reaching our location in two-hour time. But when I reach that ce, I didn''t see any of the vampires.


    When we fly even further, I finally able to see them. They are faster than before, but somehow their number increased to more than four hundred.


    "Why are they increased!? Don''t tell me that there are more vampires in this world other than the one I saw previously?"


    "Maybe so. This mean we''re the one being outnumbered, right? How will we do it? Do you want to reduce their number again?" Victoria asked.


    "Not this time. I might need to save my power against their leader. He''s looking this way again. Seems like he has a good pair of eyes," I said.


    "Will you fight with just Reizpear and Aura to improve your special ability?"


    If I could defeat him without using magic or others'' help, I believe I can see better with my Divine Vision. I can see further with less energy used. But this is not just about me. I have to protect Ang and the others. So, I can''t allow myself to hold back.


    "I won''t do that. He seems to be much stronger than I can imagine. He even brought more reinforcements with him. That''s why they werete, and quicken their pace. Look. He''s flying this way to greet us. Victoria, transform," I ordered Victoria to transform into a sword, while I hold Reizpear in my other hand. Spot also be wary of the flying vampire. As he stopped and float in one ce without moving.


    "Greetings, human, serpent, and slime. I''m the Vampire King. What can I help you with?" the vampire politely said as he is floating with his blood wings.


    "Greetings. I want you and your army to leave. The previous vampires disturbed my friend''s cultivation, so we had to kill them. If you don''t want to reduce the poption of vampire, don''t approach us," I said.


    "I see¡­ so, the reason for this magic fluctuation is your friend''s cultivation, isn''t it?" the Vampire King said.


    "That''s right. Since I saw you as the previous group''s reinforcement, I had to cause trouble for you," I said.


    "Hmm¡­ that is difficult. You see, I''m here because my son didn''t return. I never thought that he would be killed. So, I''m thinking of revenge against you for killing my son," he said.


    "And if you kill me, my friends will avenge my death. It will never be over. I guess we will have to fight until only one side remains," I said.


    "I suppose you''re right. Shall we start killing each other now?" the Vampire King asked.


    "No. I''m out numbered. We can fightter when you got closer," I said.


    "And when will we reach your friends?" the Vampire King asked again.


    "It should be around three or four hours,"


    "Good. I''ll see you then."


    The Vampire King descend slowly to where the other vampires are.


    Damn, he was so calm! Even though I''m pretending to not be panic, he was so close! Does he really believe that he can win? That he can avenge his son''s death?


    As for his son, I think he was the one that Shelia killed. Though if he was the one that Jack killed, I would be surprised.


    "What now? We return and report the others?" Spot asked.


    "Soon. Spot, fire your breath attack at them. We will return after causing more trouble for them." I said.


    "After provoking them, you will make them even angrier? As expected of Roy. Retreating while reducing their troops," Victoria said.


    While Spot prepares to fire, I also prepared some Blobbygrenades to throw. This time, all of them are filled with killing gases. But that''s not all.


    When the Vampire King lets down his guard, I told Spot to fire that instant.


    "Spot, now!" I ordered.


    Spot''s breath attack hit a lot of the vampires and they died instantly. Unable to endure his powerful breath attack.


    When the Vampire King was quite far from me, he noticed that we attacked his army and turn around to face us. But before he started flying toward us, I threw all the Blobbygrenades at the vampires.


    "YOU BASTARD!"


    Seeing that his kind is starting to kill each other, he aimed his anger toward me. There''s no longer any trace of the previously calm Vampire King. Just the face of the angry man.


    Of course I''m not letting this chance go.


    I transformed Victoria into a rifle, and snipe him from afar. Now that my air element has reached advanced level, the power of my Air Shot is much more powerful than when I was intermediate level.


    The bullet pierced him in the chest, but he was fine because his heart is not destroyed. And he started charging at me, but I keep shooting at him instead. Stopping his charge.


    I rapidly shoot the Vampire King without caring of the recoil. With my strength and my Aura, I don''t need to care about the recoil as I can shoot as many times as possible without having the aim shifted. I can also shoot rapidly as well.


    "I hit him all the time, but his regeneration rate is so powerful. As long as I didn''t destroy his heart, he won''t die. But he''s protecting his heart with his hands and flying in zigzag. It''s difficult to aim at his heart," I said.


    If it''s Sara, she has better uracy than me. Though she needed the help of a scope so she can see far, if it''s her, she should be able to aim at his heart.


    Knowing that he can''t get closer to me, he retreated.


    "Protect me!"


    He gave the order to the vampires who were not affected by my gas. And I use that chance to kill even more of them.


    "Roy. More of them areing," Spot said.


    "Let''s retreat when they get closer. They are not fast enough to catch your speed, right?" I said.


    I shot the approaching vampires, but when there are too many of them, and they are within five meters of Spot, we retreated. Spot didn''t use his full speed as I still want to kill some of them.


    But down there, I see something strange other than the vampires. They are keeping pets.


    "Seems like they know how to get more blood now. They are bringing their pets with them," I said.


    "So they can drink their blood before the fight? That''s quite smart actually," Victoria said.


    "Yeah. I''ll shoot the pets as well then."


    Now that the Vampire King is angry, there''s no way that they''re going to stop. He will order the vampires to chase after us.


    Now, they will use their strength to arrive earlier. But the vampires don''t know that the news have reached Albert and the others.


    When the Vampire King greeted us, he only greeted me, Spot, and Victoria. But he didn''t see the invisible Sonia whom I brought with me. And Sonia has reported it to Albert.


    And that''s why when I returned, Albert is scolding me because I provoked the vampire even further.


    "Why did you do that!?" Albert asked.


    "Fighting angry enemies is much easier than collected enemies. It''s that simple," I replied.


    "Yeah, but now they wille here highly motivated to kill every single one of us!" Albert shouted.


    "Albert. The vampires fight with their body. Before they can reach you, you can defeat them with magic. Did you never consider it?" I asked.


    "I did. But to get some experience in a real battle, I asked expert level mages to not participate," Albert said.


    "Why did you do that!?"


    Now I''m the one who wants to scold him.

 Chapter 423 - Bravely Going Alone

    Sigh¡­ I thought that even though we are outnumbered now, we can still win easily because of the help of the expert level mages. But it seems that I was wrong.


    Why did Albert want to only give the chance for everyone to fight, except for the expert level mages? It will be easier if they join and defeat the vampires, right?


    But no! The expert level mages are just for support and reinforcements in case we''re losing! Even the angels and the werewolves were not part of the n. Only humans with power of advanced level or lower.


    "We need a strategy that didn''t include the expert level mages because they are powerful. During the real war, they will most likely be given other jobs. The werewolves and the angels are also our trump cards. I can''t ask them to not participate, so I told them to protect the areas other than from where the vampires will being. By the way, what are you making?" Albert exined his intention, and then asking me what I''m doing.


    "It''s obvious. I''m making a banner that says "Wee, Vampires!" so they can see our hospitality," I said.


    "If your hospitality means you will kill them, I don''t want to buy the dictionary you''re reading," Albert said.


    I ignored him as I painted the nk of wood with paint. As they are vampires, they might love red color, so I wrote the message in red.


    "¡­do you think vampires can read? Even the werewolves and elves can''t," Victoria said.


    "Ah!"


    "You totally didn''t expect that! They won''t react at all to your ''hospitality''!" Victoria shouted.


    She''s right. The werewolves and the elves can''t read. But after they are under me, I get Sophie or the others to teach them writing and reading. Sometimes, I would even bring Daniel and the other kids so they can learn together with the werewolves. Though after the lesson is over, they started racing. The kids would ride the werewolves in their wolf form, and the winner will get a treat.


    Now that the orphans have know me better, I don''t mind telling them about this world. They also said that they will help us once they get older. Though I hope they don''t need to do that in the future.


    But now that I was reminded of the monsters being illiterate, why do I have to do something troublesome?


    "Tsk! If I know they are illiterate, I won''t have to do this," I said.


    "You are the only one who would ever think of doing something like this!" Victoria shouted.


    "Master! Instead of writing, how about pictures?" suddenly Jewel suggested something good.


    "That is a good idea. Let''s draw it," I said.


    "What good would that be!?" Victoriained.


    "They will stop momentarily and admire my work of art," I said confidently.


    "Just don''t do that! And Jewel, don''t give him weird suggestion!" Victoria said.


    "Sigh¡­ fine. Let''s leave now, Victoria," I said.


    "Leave where?" Victoria asked.


    "To the battle of course. We''ll leave the other vampires to Albert and the others, while we fight the Vampire King. If we enter the same battlefield, there will be too much hindrances for our fight," I said.


    "You''re going to face him right now?" Albert asked.


    "Yeah. See youter," I said.


    This time, Spot is not with me. He will be watching the fight nearby instead, while I fought the Vampire King alone. Well, not alone since Victoria is with me.


    "Graham, Shelia, you two can do whatever you want. Just don''t be hindrances to Albert''s strategy, okay?" I ordered my two other familiars.


    "Understood, Master," Graham said.


    As for Shelia, she left right away. She said that the vige is often under attack because it''s in the way of weak monsters to reach here. Even though there are many werewolves and angels staying behind, she wanted to see it for herself.


    I think Graham also think the same as he flies to the same direction Shelia go. Even if there are any strong monsters attacking, those two should be enough to handle it. Three if I include Graham''s shadow clone.


    I left with Victoria and Sonia, who is invisible, to report to Albert once I encounter the vampires.


    "Victoria, turn into a katana right now," I said.


    "Right now? Isn''t it too fast?" Victoria asked. But she still transformed into a katana.


    "Not really. And prepare a lot of small Blobbies as well," I said.


    "You''re thinking of fighting while using portals?" Victoria asked again.


    "It depends on how the fight goes, but yes. The vampires won''t die unless their heart is destroyed. Maybe I should have made a contract with them instead of the angels? But how they consume blood and use it for the source of their power could be a weakness as well, while the angels and the werewolves don''t have any obvious weakness. So, I guess it''s fine the way things are," I said.


    "What if they surrender?"


    "If they truly think of surrendering, I will let them leave. Maybe. If I could get their cooperation to fight the cult, then it''s fine to let them live," I said.


    And I finally reach the vampires as we talked. They have stopped and are waiting to meet me whoe alone. Seems like their king asked them to stop to watch the situation first.


    "Human. What is your name?" the Vampire King asked.


    "My name is Roy. Nice to meet you. And you are?"


    "I''m the Vampire King, Avan," he introduced himself.


    "So, why are you stopping, Avan? Waiting for me?" I asked.


    "Yeah. Twice that you got us by surprise, but it won''t happen again."


    They are much smarter than the werewolves and the angels. If it''s the werewolves, they would attack me if I do the same thing to them as what I did to the vampires. And if it''s the angels, they will fight me as well. Though the angels would be too easy to fight.


    But the vampires, they stopped and watch the situation first. How clever.


    "I can tell you that I won''t do that anymore. You have gotten closer to my friends now. Except for the Vampire King, whom I judge to be the strongest among you, the rest can go and fight my friends. I won''t stop you or kill you unless you attacked me first," I said.


    "¡­go," Avan ordered his army to go.


    And as promised, I will not do anything to them unless they attack me first.


    "Oh, and if you surrender in the face of my friends, you can say so. If you all sincerely won''t fight us anymore, they will stop fighting. You can also appoint someone else as the leader in case you are surrendering. Of course the one you appointed has to be someone other vampires will follow. You can also appoint more than one leader," I said.


    "¡­everyone in Marquess rank, you all will be the leaders. As for those in Duke rank, you will fight him with me," Avan said.


    "¡­It won''t be a one on one?" I asked.


    "I won''t underestimate you anymore," Avan said.


    So, I will fight the Vampire King and the Vampire Dukes? As for the Duke, one of them should be as strong as the vampire boy that Shelia defeated, right?


    If it''s a one on one, I can win easily. But it''s not.


    I guess I should be d since their most powerful members will be fighting me instead. Albert only need to mind the others.


    Since their duke rank vampires won''t fight, and our expert level mages also won''t participate, I guess we are simr in strength. Just that the vampires outnumber us. Well, if it''s Albert, I can trust him to do well. After all, he is also the one inmand during the war in my past life. And he can stop the cult for so long until after I die. Though I don''t know how long that is.


    So, even though we are outnumbered, Albert should still be able to do something here. Even if he can''t Harold and old man Henry will help him. As for Lynn¡­ well, I don''t know. But at least udia can be trusted.


    Other than Avan and four other vampires, everyone else started walking with those he called as Marquesses at the lead. I will do as I say and won''t do anything to them.


    But it seems like not all of them will walk forward. Some of them have starteding here in hope that they can kill me.


    "Stop!" Avan shouted, but the attacking vampires ignored him and attacked me.


    "You killed my son!"


    "You made me kill my own brother!"


    Well, that''s understandable seeing how they are angry. But I won''t let them kill me.


    There are about ten vampires getting close to me, with dozens more of them behind. Well, it''s ten first.


    I swung Reizpear and Victokatana quickly as I killed the ten approaching vampires.


    "I said I won''t attack unless you attack first. Since you attacked me first, I will kill you," I said.


    The other vampires, including those who are marching forward and Avan, were in shock seeing how easy it is for me to kill ten vampires. Maybe it''s because they have drunk a lot of blood before, so they don''t expect to not be able to do anything at all.


    As for the dozens of vampires behind those I killed, they no longer have the will to fight. Not only they won''t fight me anymore, they also deserted and escape without following the rest to go to Ang''s location.


    At least I can still reduce their number even if it''s just a little bit.


    "What are you looking at? Still want toe at me?" I provoked the vampires. But they are too afraid and continued their march instead.


    Now, it''s just me and Victoria, against five vampires. One Vampire King, and four Vampire Dukes.


    Maybe it should be five, but since that boy died, there''s only four Dukes left.


    Well, here we go.

 Chapter 424 - Two Against Five

    With all the other vampires left, leaving only five of them behind, I still have the confidence to win. Maybe.


    Should I go all out and kill all of them? Or It''s better to show them that I''m much stronger than them and they can''t win? That way, there''s a chance of them following me. But since I don''t have any spot left for another familiar, I don''t know if I can trust them or not.


    Maybe I should try to dy the fight as much as possible. If the other vampires surrendered in the face of Albert''s army and return here, these five will realize that there''s no way they could win. Maybe at that time, Albert cane here and have a talk with the Vampire King to see if they can be trusted or not.


    Though it might be difficult since Ang hasn''t finished yet. There could be other powerful monstersing. What if they are as powerful as Andro? Even Spot would lose his consciousness facing his intimidation.


    After killing the previous group of vampires that attacking me, I kept my words and no longer kill anyone else as I let the vampires continue. And I got the confidence to win because of that.


    Maybe I should stop being overconfident and think of how I should fight them.


    As for the Vampire Dukes, I can estimate how powerful they are from the vampire boy that Shelia faced. But for the Vampire King, Avan, he should be much stronger. I can''t just say that I will win. At least I should say I can dy them as much as possible until Albert has taken care of the vampires.


    Wait, is that¡­


    "I hope you don''t mind if we fight you together. You were so strong previously, so I think we need our five strongest members to fight," Avan said politely.


    Did he always act this polite? Maybe because he thinks that he''s winning. Well, I never said that I''m going to face them alone, right?


    "Don''t worry. I''m not alone as well. You already saw my partner the ck Slime, right? And also, someone else ising," I said.


    "Is it the serpent? He might be the most difficult one to fight," Avan said.


    "No, not him. But first, I want to ask you one question. You said that we killed your son, right? Which one is your son? The one that looks like a small child, or the one that look like an old man?" I asked.


    "Both of them are kids. I don''t know which is which from how you exined. But my son is the Vampire Duke. The one who led the vampires," Avan said.


    Both of them were just kids? That old vampire is a child? How old is this guy? And how old was that old vampire? The same age as that vampire boy?


    This is confusing. Can''t all living being have simr lifespan?


    "Then, I''ll introduce you to someone who will be arriving soon. She''s the one who killed your son. A werewolf," I said as Shelia descended from the sky.


    "Roy, what''s going on?" Shelia asked.


    "I''m the one who wants to ask you that. Why are you here?" I asked back.


    "I don''t want to miss a powerful opponent. He''s the Vampire King, right? And the rest¡­ it''s not a one on one? I guess it''s good that Ie here," Shelia said.


    Avan then looked at Shelia curiously.


    "So, she''s the one who killed my son? A werewolf this time? Just who are you, human?" Avan asked.


    "I''m Roy. I already told you that," I replied.


    "He''s also the Werewolf King because he defeated our previous king, and also the Angel King if they have the king," Shelia said.


    Angel King? That sounds weird. But I guess that might be right.


    "What about the serpent?" Avan asked.


    "He won''t participate unless he has to," I said.


    If Spot is here, we might be able to defeat these five faster. But I told him to help Albert in case they are in dire situation.


    "So, it will be five against two, huh?" Avan said.


    Meanwhile, I whispered something to Shelia.


    "Shelia, that king is mine. And I think individually, they are already stronger than the vampire boy from before," I whispered.


    "I understand," Shelia said.


    "Good. But there''s no strategy. Other than I will only try to hold back my power. Just in case that they surrender and willing to be under me. Though for you, you don''t need to hold back. Fight however you want," I said.


    "Is it fine to kill them?" Shelia asked.


    "If you can. They are more powerful than the vampire boy, so good luck trying," I provoked Shelia.


    And as expected, I can feel her fighting spirit is soaring high. With this, it should be enough for Shelia to fight two or three of the dukes. But for Avan, that''s not enough yet. He might be stronger than Graham and Sheliabined. Unless I took him by surprise likest time.


    "Are you two done discussing the n?" Avan asked.


    "What about you? Don''t you need to n against me? As you have seen it before, I''m quite strong, you know?" I said.


    Though I can see that they have some sort of protection made of blood covering their hearts. It will be hard to shoot it with a gun. But from his reaction before, he still took some damage. Though they are all already healed by now thanks to their regeneration power.


    "Then¡­ DIE!" Avan shouted.


    At the same time as he shouts, all five of them are charging toward me. Targeting the strongest one first is amon strategy. And they are using it already. Seems like on the way here, they already discussing among themselves on how to kill me.


    When I was prepared to receive their attack, they changed their direction from me, and targeting Shelia instead. I see. This is a good tactic. But it will fail because they are using it on me.


    All five of them are attacking Shelia. No matter how strong she is, she will definitely get injured. Or even die. But I won''t let that happen.


    Those five attacked Shelia at the same time in a high speed. They must have used some blood they consumed for that. But I easily blocked four of them including the Vampire King''s attack.


    They are already using blood to create weapons. And I blocked them.


    I blocked two of them with Reizpear on my right, stopping one of them with my foot, and as for the Vampire King, as expected he''s the strongest one. I stopped him by blocking his attack with Victokatana on my left. But because I blocked all four attacks at the same time, I got pushed back a little. But I''m still fine.


    As for thest vampire, Shelia reacted fast enough to block her sword, and counter attacked with her ws. But her ws hit the female vampire''s arm instead, and cutting it off.


    As Shelia about to give the killing shot, the vampires are all stepped back. I can see that the female vampire''s arm is quickly healing. Seems like as long as she attached her missing arm, she won''t need to use a lot of blood.


    With how much she needs to recover her cut limb, I can see easily now that she''s the weakest after that attack. Previously, they seem to have the same strength. But now, she''s the weakest.


    "Oh, wow! I''m stronger than a Vampire King and three Vampire Dukes! I''m so amazing!" I said.


    "You think we used our full power in that attack!" one of the Vampire Dukes shouted.


    "And do you think I blocked all four of you with my full strength?" I asked back.


    Avan then stopped that one from getting provoked any further. I guess he knows to not easily get provoked. This might be a little harder than expected.


    "Don''t get provoked. He''s an expert in mental battle. Keep your calm," Avan said to his friends. Or is it subordinates?


    Although he didn''t say it out loud, it was still enough for me to hear it.


    "You have experienced what he can do to our mind. He makes the lesser vampires kill each other. If you go along with him, you will lose right away," Avan said.


    He called those vampires lesser vampires? I guess other than those with higher status, he won''t notice them.


    And what makes me an expert in mental battle as he says was the grenades I threw before. The one that makes them kill each other.


    Hearing what their king said, the vampires are calming down. I guess using gas on them will be difficult. Not that I have any n on using them though.


    "Shelia, for now, that female vampire is the weakest because of your attack. Unless she drank some more blood, she won''t recover her strength and should be the easiest one to kill," I said to Shelia.


    "Even if that''s so, I want a good fight. Not an easy fight. Since you don''t have any n, it''s fine to do it, right? You told me to fight however I want," Shelia said.


    "Fine. Just be careful," I said.


    At this time, the other vampires should be arriving. I believe Albert can handle them, so I don''t need to care about them. For now, what''s in front of me is a bigger problem. But so far, I don''t see any possibilities of us losing.. I hope it continues this way to the end.

 Chapter 425 - Fighting In Wolf Form

    Two against five. But we are not losing at all.


    I think even if it''s a one on five like it was supposed to be originally, I still won''t be losing. Though if they still have some trump card left, I don''t know.


    I''m d that Shelia came though. With her cooperation, the fight should be easier. And so far, the vampires don''t have any way to attack us from the distance. If that''s really the case, then winning should be easy. But I won''t let down my guard.


    This time, two vampires are moving forward at the same time after they had a short discussion. I couldn''t hear them, but seems like they have a n.


    "Shelia, you fight those two. I will watch the other three," I said.


    "Okay," Shelia said as she charged toward the enemies.


    She seems to be having fun. Even though this is a life or death situation, she''s having fun. As expected of a werewolf. A species who loves battle.


    The two vampires that Shelia fight wield different weapon. They are both male vampires, but one of them is wielding a sword, while the other is wielding two daggers. One in each hand.


    I guess the vampires'' weapons are sword or dagger. Maybe because they don''t need to use much blood? If it''s a spear, it will be longer and need more blood. But sword or dagger will use less.


    Well, maybe there is other reason why they used sword or daggers. It will be disastrous if I keep thinking that they are only using sword and daggers when they suddenly use other weapons. Maybe they can use their blood to transform into any kind of weapon just like Victoria.


    For now, I''ll watch Shelia fights. Of course I won''t forget to look at the Vampire King and the two other vampires who are not fighting. If they are trying to hurt Shelia, and Shelia can''t dodge it, I will protect her.


    I know that Shelia has a regeneration skill, but that doesn''t mean that I will let her get hurt. Though if it''s Graham, and he''s still annoying, I will be the one to hurt him instead. But he''s not here, so let''s not talk about him.


    Shelia is doing well against two Vampire Dukes. Although back then, when she fought the vampire boy, I think she had some difficulties. But the vampire boy was too confident with his regeneration skill and let Shelia cut off his arm. Which ended up badly for him because he never expected Shelia to be able to react so fast just by her instinct.


    But these two vampires are much experienced than that vampire boy. They won''t purposely let themselves be hurt for the sake of winning. And now, Shelia seems to be in trouble. Though I won''t help her at the moment. Unless the other three vampires decided to join, or Shelia''s life is at stake.


    If it''s Shelia, she also can get herself injured purposely so she can win. But seems like she''s smarter than that and won''t do it. She has witnessed how badly things can go with that n after that after all.


    When Shelia is blocking the vampire with sword, the one with daggers would attack her. Because the enemies have three weapons, it''s difficult for Shelia to block them all. Even when she blocked a dagger, the vampire still has another dagger to attack. And the sword wielding vampire will help.


    Shelia gains some distance after receiving the attack from the dagger, and swung her arms to attack the two from distance. But the two vampires summoned a pair of blood wings on their back and dodge it by flying. Although they used more blood now, it will still be difficult for Shelia to win.


    Oh? Shelia is transforming into her wolf form? Well, this is the first time I''m seeing her using that form in a battle. How will she fight?


    Shelia on all four, is running to the sky. Charging straight forward. As for the vampires, they are in front of her. But Shelia only focused on one enemy. The one with the daggers.


    Yeah, that one is the most troublesome enemy among the two. Good quick decision.


    The sword wielding vampire tried to sh his sword at Shelia, but Shelia ignored him. With her speed, and the durability of her fur, she ignored the sword and continue charging forward at her target, the vampire with dual daggers.


    "¡­that''s just like Jewel. She must have learned it from that disciple of mine," I said.


    "It is a simple move, but it''s quite powerful. Though as a wolf, I think her attack would be weaker than a rhino. How will she finish that vampire?" Victoria said.


    The answer can be seen right away.


    Shelia faces the target with her mouth wide open, and she bites on the vampire''s arm. She quickly rips it off of the vampire''s shoulder, and kicked it away.


    Since the vampires can regenerate, and it will be faster if the lost limb is nearby since it can be reattached quickly, that was a good move to kick the arm away.


    She''s a wolf, and not a rhinoceros like Jewel. Although she can m her body on the enemy, using her fangs are more effective than mming her body on the vampire.


    "AAAARGH!"


    The vampire screamed in pain after losing his arm. I guess even he didn''t expect to get hurt like that.


    As for the other vampires, they are watching with surprise. Why are they surprised? It''s obvious that a werewolf can transform into a wolf.


    And then, they whispered something as the three vampires who are watching raised their index finger and aimed them toward Shelia.


    ¡­don''t tell me!


    I quickly moved toward the three vampires, and use Reizpear and Victoshield to block their line of sight. Instead of blocking their fingers, this is better since their uracy will be lowered.


    What they did was shooting a bullet made of blood. A Blood Bullet if I have to name it. And using a drop of blood means that they won''t spend too much blood with that attack.


    My strategy is right to cover their line of sight instead of blocking their fingers. None of their blood bullets hit a big target like Shelia in her wolf form. And Shelia is now moving around after all, so it''s difficult to hit her.


    "I won''t let you do that. If you decided to participate in the battle, I will join as well," I said.


    After saying that, the two other vampires were stunned because they didn''t expect me to react so fast. As for the Vampire King, Avan, he quickly changed his aim from the sky where Shelia is fighting the two vampires, to my head.


    Oh, shit!


    I tilted my head slightly as he shot his blood at me. The blood scratched my forehead as blood dripping on my face.


    "Hey! What if I turn ugly because of that!?"


    "Don''t worry, you won''t," Avan said.


    "So, you think that I''m handsome?" I asked.


    "The opposite. Since you''re already ugly, there''s no point in turning you uglier," he said.


    Is that provocation? I''ll show him how to provoke your enemy.


    "Don''t lie. I know you want to hurt my face because you don''t like seeing someone more handsome than you. I''m sorry to say this, but there aren''t many people more handsome than me. At least I haven''t found any," I said.


    "I''ll kill you!"


    It worked too well as the Vampire King aimed all ten fingers at me. Well, I guess the time is over for me to just watch Shelia fights. Now, it''s time to join in the fight.


    Shelia against two vampires, and I against three vampires including the Vampire King. After seeing how they can attack from distance with their Blood Bullet, I know that this battle won''t be easy.


    I don''t need the Victokatana any longer. It''s best to use Victogun. And with a wider surface area, the Victogun can be used to block the enemy''s Blood Bullets.


    To make sure that none of them will try to aim for Shelia, I used the pole of Reizpear to shove the three vampires away as far as possible. Their ribs should be broken from how strong I swung my spear, but they all healed quickly. They must have quite a lot of blood reserve. And the Vampire King also failed to attack me.


    "You two, ignore the werewolf! Just attack the human from distance! You are too weak against him!" Avanmanded the two vampires in front of me.


    That is a good strategy. If those two keep shooting at me, I won''t be able to focus only on Avan. And I won''t be able to help Shelia.


    But their enemy is me. They don''t know that I can use portal to move toward Shelia in an instant. Though I won''t use it anytime soon. Maybeter.


    While the two vampires are aiming at me, I already aimed my Victogun at one of them, the female vampire, and shoot her at the heart. Though I missed and I didn''t hit her vital.


    "Well, I can shoot as well, so your n might not work," I said.


    "We''ll see about that," the Vampire King said.

 Chapter 426 - Killing Two Vampires

    While Shelia is fighting two Vampire Dukes, I will fight the Vampire King, and carefully paying attention to another two Vampire Dukes. But as long as they are aiming at me, it won''t be a problem. I can shoot them as well after all.


    "What are you waiting for?" I said to the Vampire King who is preparing to fight.


    "Just a small preparation." Avan said.


    For a while already, he already equipped himself with a Blood Sword. But now, he''s gathering blood from his body into the sword, and changing it into a giant broadsword.


    Not just it became a weapon that needed two hands to wield it, the size also about as big as a person. And he lifted that broadsword easily.


    As for the sharpness, I don''t need to think about it. After all, I also have a transforming sword. It''s something that can be adjusted by will.


    But with a weapon that big, it''s not only good for attacking. It''s also good for defending.


    As for me, I have Victogun on my left hand, with gauntlet that goes up to my elbow so I can also use it as a shield. I need the gun so I can counter the Vampire Dukes trying to shoot me or Shelia.


    I need to focus on many things here. Can I fight the Vampire King while doing that?


    Let''s stop thinking of dying them and fight however I can. This is no time to hold back.


    Though I still shoot at one of the Vampire Dukes aiming at me before the Vampire King fights me. My aim is not as good as Sara, but it''s enough to hit the opponent. But I still hope that I can hit their heart.


    "Your enemy is me!" Avan shouted as he lifted the broadsword above his head to cut me down.


    "Then don''t bring other people with you!" I shouted back, while blocking the broadsword with Reizpear and Victogun.


    His strength surpasses my expectation as my feet sunk to the ground. And at that moment, the uninjured vampire shoots her blood at me.


    As fast as possible, I stopped blocking the Vampire King''s attack and dodged it sideway. The Blood Bullet misses me, as I tried to shoot at the shooter while swinging my spear to the Vampire King.


    Luckily, my shot hit her in the neck. But she is recovering again. Meanwhile, the Vampire King blocked my spear with his broadsword.


    The sword that he swung down, stuck on the ground and he didn''t pull it out. He''s just moving away from me and hide behind that giant broadsword, and adjusted the position of the sword slightly so Reizpear will hit the sword.


    "Man, you''re experienced in battle. Unlike many other enemies I have faced. Probably even stronger than the previous Werewolf King I defeated," I said.


    "Don''tpare me, the Vampire King, to the king of puppies!" Avan shouted.


    "But puppies are way cuter!"


    I''m notparing his strength to the Werewolf King. For strength, this Vampire King was much stronger. Probably because of all the blood he drank on the way here.


    What I''mparing is their quick decision in a battle. He can quickly make a decision to move behind his sword instead of lifting it and use it to protect himself.


    Not that I am far more experienced in battle. I just have a wild imagination.


    Unlike most of my enemies who can make quick judgements because of their instincts, I am thinking a lot of what should I do in case something happen in my imagination. So, when something truly happens simr to my imagination, I can react quickly.


    Experience is not something that can be earned easily. Especially if I keep facing enemies weaker than me. So, I exchange those experience with imagination. Of course I still did a lot of sparring to cover my weaknesses.


    And so far, I can say that I''m doing well.


    But it won''t be long if I be overconfident and cocky from my own ability.


    That''s why I will no longer think that I can win easily and dy the fight until Albert is done.


    My goal, is to kill my enemies. And the enemy in front of me is the Vampire King.


    While the two Vampire Dukes are recovering, I don''t need to use Victogun, so I changed it into a gauntlet and wielded Reizpear with both hands.


    But before I can do anything, the Vampire King lifted his Blood Broadsword and the dirt from the ground he stabbed are flying into my eyes.


    I covered my eyes with Aura so the dirt won''t hurt my eyes. As for seeing, I have no problem with it even if I close my eyes.


    After that, with a thrusting stance, I twisted Reizpear and thrust it forward. I used my Aura and my will to strengthen my attack.


    My attack was too fast for the Vampire King who is carrying a heavy weapon, but he still has enough reaction speed to block the tip of my spear with the handle of his sword. But my power is too much for him as he got blown back so far.


    "My King!"


    The male vampire who was supposed to be targeting me lost his focus after seeing that his king got blown away. And I used that chance to kill him.


    With Reizpear in my hands, I pierced his heart. And when I was about to go for the female vampire who was supposed to be the weakest after spending too much blood, she was already flying with her Blood Wings. Keeping her distance as she shoots Blood Bullets at me.


    Instead of using blood she consumed to recover herself fully, she used it to escape and attack. This one is a much better fighter than the one I just killed.


    "How dare you kill my uncle!" Avan returned by flying while shouting.


    So, this one is your uncle? He doesn''t seem to be much older than Avan himself. Having a long life is confusing.


    "Then, if you don''t want anymore of your family members to die, you should have given up and leave this ce! Although they are not participating in the fight against the vampires, there are still many other humans about as strong as I am. You''reing here just to die!" I shouted.


    There are many expert level mages after we stayed in this world for a while. Like Veronica, Celestine, Julia, Carmen, Ka, Kron, Candy, Wendy, Shirley, and even Fabio.


    Although they are not participating in the fight, they are still there watching until it''s time for them to fight.


    Not to mention, we still have the werewolf army and the angel army there. The vampires'' loss is inevitable.


    "I don''t care. There shouldn''t be anything that stands higher than us vampires!" Avan shouted.


    ¡­monsters are idiots.


    The werewolves, they are idiots who loves to fight.


    The elves, they are idiot cowards.


    The angels, they are just idiots. They don''t even know what teamwork is.


    Now the vampires, they are prideful idiots.


    This settles everything. It''s nearly impossible for the vampires to cooperate with us to destroy the cult. I shouldn''t expect any help from the prideful vampires.


    I looked at Shelia and see that she''s still having trouble fighting the two Vampire Dukes, but so far, nothing can threat her life yet.


    "SHELIA!" I shouted her name.


    While in mid-battle, Shelia focused her attention toward me.


    "Kill the enemies!" I gave the order.


    Since we are no longer need to let them live, it''s fine to kill everyone.


    Albert might have the same problem as well if he''s thinking of getting the vampires'' cooperation. But once he judged cooperation is impossible, he will give the same order to eliminate the enemies.


    Shelia nodded slightly and continues fighting the two Vampire Dukes. As for me, now I only need to fight one female Vampire Duke, and the Vampire King.


    "I will use all my strength to kill¡ª"


    "No, you won''t."


    Before the Vampire King finished his sentence, I used a portal to a Blobby that I ced close to him before our fight, and then I shed Reizpear at him. Trying to aim for his heart. But I failed. His reaction speed was just too fast.


    Now that I have decided to kill the vampires, there''s no need to hold back anymore. Kill before the enemies used all their strength!


    "You!"


    In anger, the Vampire King attacked me with his broadsword. But instead of blocking it, I used Victogun and shoot at his arm.


    I''m trying to hit his wrist, but it hit his arm instead. But that''s enough to weaken the grip of his sword, and the sword missed.


    And then, I tried to kill him with Reizpear, but the female vampire is shooting at me, so I have to dodge.


    Should I kill the female vampire first, or should I kill the Vampire King first? Doesn''t matter. Kill anyone easiest to kill.


    So, I withdrawn from the two, and help Shelia who is being attacked by two other vampires.


    When Shelia is attacking a vampire, I killed the other one.


    Because I have given the order to kill everyone, she knows that there won''t be anymore fair fight if that''s what it''s called. Even if she''s mad at me, it was her who came here without my order after all.


    Now, it''s three against two. Should I summon Graham so it will be a three on three?

 Chapter 427 - The Vampire King Is Getting Stronger

    The Vampire King is still looking at me the same way as before. Although he''s angry, he has started calming down after I killed two Vampire Dukes easily.


    Now, all that''s left is him, the dual-daggers wielding vampire, and the female vampire. But other than the Vampire King, those two are looking at me with despair in their eyes. They know that they are no match against me.


    But why is the Vampire King still calm? Does he have a secret technique? If not, no matter how prideful he is, he should be giving up so the vampires can survive.


    I wonder if the vampires that Albert and the others are facing is as prideful as he is. Though after seeing these two Vampire Dukes are looking at me with despair, I doubt that the rest of the vampires are as prideful as the Vampire King.


    Which means, everything happened because of the king''s order. He would sacrifice his kind just toe here.


    "So, are you still not giving up?"


    I provoked him further to see his reaction. The other two vampires are looking at the Vampire King hoping that they have a way out. Either the Vampire King still has a trump card that can make them win against me, or retreating.


    "I still have a way to win," Avan said.


    A secret technique? Should I kill him right now before he makes any move then?


    As I quickly charged at him, Shelia did the same. Unfortunately, there''s no Blobby near their location. That''s why I have to run as fast as possible.


    Seeing me running, Avan smiled as he grabbed the cor of the female vampire. Wait, is he going to throw her at me?


    "Die for my sake," the Vampire King said as he threw the female vampire at me.


    He really doesn''t care about other people. I mean vampires. I guess his intention ofing here to avenge his son might be a lie. Or maybe it''s the truth. But his son is the only one he cares about other than him.


    Anyway, I don''t need to know about his motive. I only need to kill him.


    Both Shelia and I think the same thing at the same time. Shelia is shing her ws from distance to attack the Vampire King, and I thrusted Reizpear toward the Vampire King from distance. Ignoring the body of the female vampire who is blocking the way. Cutting her neck, and her lower body at the same time.


    But because we didn''t hit her heart, she didn''t die. Which mean that even after cutting their neck, they still won''t die yet. But the damage she received must be quite a lot, and she will need a lot of blood to recover her wound. She won''t be able to fight for a while, unless she ignores her injuries, and just attacks me.


    But looking at her separated head, I can tell that she didn''t expect her king to use her as body shield. That''s really cruel toward one''s own subordinate.


    Our attacks flying toward the Vampire King, who is also grabbing the daggers wielding vampire with him. Is he thinking of using that vampire as a shield again?


    No. He flies to the sky so I aimed Victogun at him. This is faster than using Reizpear.


    But in the sky, he''s using the other vampire to block my bullets, as he sunk his fang on the neck of the vampire he''s using as a shield.


    "He''s drinking the blood of his own kind!?"


    I didn''t expect that he would do that. I thought that was not possible. But the separated head of the female vampire is looking at the scene in shocked expression. She didn''t expect that as well? So, it''s against their moral to drink the blood from their own kind? Or it''s against human right? I mean vampire right.


    If he can get stronger by that, I can''t let that happen. I shoot at him again with the Blobbybullet, and when the bullet hits the vampire shield, I used portal so I can be in front of the Vampire King instantly to bring an end to his life.


    I thrusted Reizpear at his heart once I entered the portal, but what happened was unexpected.


    He grabbed the de of Reizpear with his hand, and stopped it before it hits his chest. And he also dropped the skinny vampire whose blood has been suckedpletely. He''s a quick drinker.


    Oh, shit. He''s stronger now.


    But instead of killing me, he just threw me away, and he focused his eyes on something else. The other vampires'' body.


    Is he thinking of drinking their blood as well? But not the female vampire? Is it because she was too far from him?


    "Shelia! He''s aiming for the vampire Duke''s corpses! Get the corpses away from here!" I shouted an order to Shelia.


    She instantly understood, as she grabbed the female vampire who has recovered her body, and another vampire corpse. But it was toote for her to get to thest corpse as the Vampire King has collected it, so Shelia quickly retreated from the location.


    Without even thinking of killing the shocked female vampire, Shelia is running as fast as possible. In her wolf form, with the female vampire and the corpse on her back.


    The Vampire King ignored Shelia as he enjoyed the meal. And I attacked him again, but he grabbed my spear again. Though this time, my attack is not over yet as I used my leg to kick him in the crotch.


    The Vampire King got hurt from that king, and in pain, he released his fangs from the corpse. I quickly transported that corpse using portal to somewhere else.


    After that, I tried to sh his body with Victokatana, but he grabbed the de again.


    "That was quite smart of you to get rid of the corpses. But I still drank enough to be stronger than you!"


    "How can you recover so fast after getting kicked in the crotch!?"


    Without thinking much, I asked him what I''m curious about the most. Even if he can recover himself, that was too fast.


    As a man, no matter the species, will feel insurmountable pain when they are getting hit in the crotch. But he recovers almost instantly! I regret not to kill him right away.


    As he tries to sunk his fang on my neck this time, I destroyed Reizpear so I can get away from him, and transformed Victoria at the same time. I gained some distance before I use magic to repair Reizpear back to normal.


    I can just let go of Reizpear, but that mean I will give up my weapon.


    "What a shame. I think your blood should be the tastiest blood I ever taste. But it seems like I need to kill you first," Avan said.


    "Is it fine for you kill your own kinds and drink their blood?" I asked.


    "For vampires, it''s against our moral code to drink from our own kind. But the main reason that it was forbidden for us to do so, is because when we drink our own kind''s blood, we will get much stronger than drinking from any other species. But we will lose our own mind as well, and will start attacking our people. But for me, I''m powerful enough to not lose my mind. At least with only this much blood I drank," Avan said.


    "The fact that you''re even thinking of drinking from your own kind mean that you have lost your mind," I said.


    "I had to do it because you''re too strong. Even if that puppy didn''te, you can still defeat us five alone," he said.


    And then, he showed me his right index finger, where there''s a little bit of blood on it. I don''t think he got attacked there, so why is he bleeding?


    Wait, that''s not his blood!


    I used my hand to touch my forehead that got injured by him with his Blood Bullet before.


    "Oh, you''re quick to realize that. Let''s have a taste, shall we? Hmm¡­ your blood is delicious as expected," the Vampire King said as he sucked his index finger with my blood on it.


    Since when did he touched me? I didn''t see or feel anything at all.


    Oh, fuck! He''s much stronger than me now! Drinking that vampire''s blood made him that much stronger!


    Wait! What if the vampires that fight Albert''s army drink the blood of their own kind as well? We won''t have any chance of winning if half of the vampires drink the other halves'' blood!


    I have to finish this fight quickly and return back to Albert''s location. But can I win against him?


    I can summon Graham and Shelia, but they might be helping Albert right now. Shelia is running to them after all.


    "¡­hey, Vampire King. Don''t tell me that your army is¡ª"


    "That''s right. None of the Vampire Dukes will do it. But half of the vampires I brought will, and I already told them beforehand to drink the other vampires'' blood if they are at disadvantages and can''t win. The victory is ours!"


    "¡­then, I will kill you first before I can return," I said.


    "You think you can defeat me? I''m already stronger than you!"


    This guy, after he drank the blood of the vampire, is already more than twice stronger than before. If it''s the regr vampire, they could be as strong as the Vampire Dukes after drinking blood. But what about the Vampire Marquesses? They will be about as strong as the Vampire King. And they will lose their mind, so the battle will be harder because their move will be unpredictable.


    Even with our expert level mages, victory will be difficult.


    My job is to make sure that this one, who is much stronger than any vampires, to not get there. Killing him will be the best option. And I can''t ask for help now.


    Now, it''s a one on one battle.


    He''s stronger than me, and we''re fighting in an open space. Although I can use portals, I don''t have any other advantages.


    I wish I can return back in time and kill him instantly before things turn this way.

 Chapter 428 - Fight In Space

    The Vampire King has be much stronger than me, but with my portals, I still have a chance to win. Though the Vampire King can still get stronger.


    First, he can just drink my blood. That means I must never let him wound me again, or he will just get stronger.


    And then, it''s because there are still vampire''s corpses in the area. They are the ten vampires who wanted to kill me even though I allowed them to leave.


    Although I think the power he gained will be lesser than when he drank the blood of the Vampire Dukes, he can still get stronger.


    Though if what he said about losing his mind is right, I might have a chance to win if I let him drink more blood. He will lose his mind, and his moves will be predictable.


    But I don''t want to trust in a small chance like that.


    Usually, those who I fought and get provoked, will have their moves easily read. But they were all at most as strong as me. But this one is already stronger than me.


    I guess I''ll change the venue. I doubt he can fight in space, right?


    Let''s cover my body with Victoria first, and then use air magic to help me breathe. Once I can grab the vampire, I''ll bring him to space.


    "Do you think protecting your body with protective armor can help you win against me?" Avan asked me when he sees me covering my body with Victoria.


    "Yes," I said confidently.


    Now, how do I grab him? Well, for now, let''s break apart Reizpear first and put them in my pocket. I''ll make him think that I will fight barehanded.


    "You''re still using that sword even though I''m barehanded?" I provoked the Vampire King.


    "I had enough of underestimating you. But still, no matter what you do, you won''t be able to win."


    Why is he saying something that contradict to his own words? First, he said that he won''t underestimate me. But the next sentence, he''s saying that he is underestimating me. Just how much pride does he have?


    Now, I need to get closer to him. Let''s calm down first by using the calming gas, and think clearly of a way to win. I need to get him as far away from the vampire''s corpses, so I will bring him with me to the space. He won''t be able to survive out there, right?


    Then¡­ he''s gone!


    Noticing that he''s no longer in front of me, I quickly transformed the gauntlet part of Victoriarmor into a gun, and shoot at the area where the vampire corpses are. And I was right that he was there, grabbing one corpse with only a stabbing wound in his heart. That''s the only corpse with intact limbs.


    He also blocked the Blobbybullet with his hand. Damn, he''s too strong.


    I can no longer stand still, so I charged at him emptyhanded.


    As he finished drinking the corpse''s blood, I finally arrive and throw a punch at the Vampire King, in which he dodged it.


    But I keep throwing punches. They are not slow, but he was just much faster. Though I didn''t use my full strength, so I can still throw a stronger and faster punch. But I didn''t do it so I can surprise him.


    And as expected, he finally had enough of dodging my punches, and caught my right fist with his left palm.


    "With that strength, you won''t even be able to hurt me," Avan said.


    "I''m not going to hurt you. I''m changing the venue," I replied calmly.


    When he was confused, I grabbed his left arm with my left hand, and opened a portal behind me.


    Before he can think about what I will do, I already use all my strength to pull him into the portal which is going to the space. Combined with the vacuum power from the opened portal, I can bring him with me.


    "How will you fight in this ce? I believe that no matter how powerful you are, you won''t be able to survive here for long. Oh, wait. You can''t hear me because there''s no air for sound to travel. What are you doing making me look stupid!" I shouted.


    "Roy! You''re the stupid one here! You''re being covered by me from head to toe, so I''m the only one seeing you look stupid!" Victoria shouted back.


    "Oh, if it''s you, then it''s fine," I said.


    "How is it fine!?"


    I looked at the panicked Vampire King who is unable to breathe. The broadsword in his right that he keeps holding to this ce is finally let go. But as there''s no gravity, the broadsword is still floating next to him.


    I run on air¡­ whatever it is, I run by using Aura and kicked the sword away from him. This way, if he wants to use weapon, he will need to use more of his blood.


    No air, nond, no gravity. Avan doesn''t know what to do. But after seeing me kicking his sword away, somehow, he''s calmed down.


    As I gain some distance from him, he used blood to create wings. But why is he calm?


    "Maybe he''s using the reserve blood to survive in this ce. If you can hold long enough against him, he will still die after using all the blood he has," Victoria exined.


    That sounds usible. That mean I still have to fight him, right? If I escape, he might still able to go back to Monsters World¡­


    Wait, where''s the? Is the Blobby floated away from the? Well, that''s fine. I can just use portal to return.


    But I can''t return now until I know that the Vampire King is dead.


    "Let''s fight here, Vampire King!" I shouted.


    "Like I said, he can''t hear you!"


    This time, I''m using Reizpear again to fight. It''s kind of weird that we fought, but there''s no sound at all.


    Avan created another sword. This time, it''s not the giant broadsword like before, but slimmer and thinner. But it''s still bigger than regr sword. He must be thinking of saving his blood.


    But still, he''s already stronger than me. I can win if I hold on long enough that he wasted his blood, but I doubt he will let me. Seems like he doesn''t care about his life anymore, and just thinking of killing me.


    I blocked his sword with Reizpear. Seems like because he''s preserving his blood usage, so the speed is lowered. That''s why he''s slower than before.


    Still¡­ it''s funny to fight someone who is upside down.


    Wait, is the one being upside down him, or me?


    There''s no up or down here, so it''s confusing.


    Let''s just calm my mind with calming gas, and fight.


    Avan maintaining his speed and strength ever since he started fighting. Not getting stronger, or weaker. Seems like he''s quickly adjusted himself to fight in this ce.


    Because he''s flying with wings, his movement is also smoother than me. but because I''m stepping with my feet, my movement is sharper. That''s the difference between us, but neither of us have advantage.


    But I can wound him with Reizpear, while his attack is blocked by Victoriarmor. Each time my attack reached him, his attack is getting weaker, but soon enough his strength returns. As long as I keep this up, I can win by chipping his strength away.


    We fought for a long time in space already. I don''t know how long I have been here, but it should be more than one hour since I brought him here.


    The Vampire King Avan, started getting tired. His attacks are getting sloppy and slow. His wings are smaller now. He doesn''t have enough blood to survive a few more attacks.


    Finally, the Vampire King gave up. He let go of his sword, and the wings on his back disappear.


    He spoke some words, But I can''t hear him. Let''s use air magic between us so we canmunicate. Will it work?


    "Can you hear me now?" I asked.


    "I can talk now?" Avan asked.


    "I used air magic. I couldn''t hear what you said after all. Are you giving up now?"


    "¡­kill me. There''s nothing else I can do. But I can''t tell the vampires to surrender and retreat. I¡ª"


    "Enough. Die," I said as I pierced Reizpear into his heart. I don''t want to hear dying messages. Especially from my enemy.


    For whatever reason they are attacking, I no longer care. Albert and the others can take care of it.


    After stabbing his heart, I keep stabbing it until I know that his heart no longer working, and no amount of blood can restore his life.


    The Vampire King is finally dead, and he died in space. His body is floating with no destination.


    "Haaa¡­ I''m tired," I said.


    "You have fought well. Though fighting in space is quite amazing. Let''s go back quickly before your magic run out, or you won''t be able to use portal anymore. I know you almost exhausted your magic as well. The battle went for quite long after all," Victoria said.


    She''s right. if the battle continues for another hour, I won''t be able to use portal to return.


    Hmm? What is this feeling?


    "Roy, can you feel it too?" Victoria asked.


    "Yeah. It came from that. Is that Monsters World?" I asked.


    I feel a little bit of mana fluctuation, and it suddenly disappears. It was quite powerful that I can feel it from this ce.


    "I hope that''s Ang finishing her breakthrough," I said.


    "Then let''s go back quickly to check!" Victoria said impatiently.


    If that''s true, then we have the strongest mage in our rank.


    I quickly opened a portal to an empty ind in Monsters World, and opened another one from there back to where Ang is breaking through to see that the battle over there is over as well.


    ¡­Damn! We are amazing!

 Chapter 429 - Humans Against Vampires

    Roy let go of the vampires approaching Ang, while he faces the Vampire King and four other vampires.


    The approaching vampires stopped when they see an army of humans in front of them. The humans are outnumbered, but none of them are showing any sign of despair.


    Albert will be the one to lead the humans, while Lynn, Henry, and Harold will support him.


    Other than the four kings, there are several faces that Roy is getting along with. Other than the expert level mages.


    They all will participate in this battle alongside other humans.


    Those people are Jewel, Oleg, Hill, udia, Bernard, and Sara.


    Since they are not expert level mages yet, they are allowed to participate.


    As for the expert level mages, they are either watching the fight so they can learn something and help in case they are losing, or protecting other areas.


    The angels and the werewolves were not here because they will protect other areas as well. Even if an army of vampires is approaching, that doesn''t mean other monsters will stop attacking.


    "Stop right there! If you move any closer, it means war!" Albert shouted when he sees the vampires.


    The vampires paused for a bit. But they didn''t care about Albert''s threat, and move forward.


    "Sigh¡­ so you want war, huh? Everyone, attack!"


    With no other interaction between two sides, the battle began between humans and vampires.


    Vampires with weak long-distance attack, unable to get closer easily because of humans'' magic. And two humans that stand out the most among hundreds. Lighting strikes the vampires, and bullets flying at them.


    But the vampires are well prepared. They are protecting their hearts, and the frontline of the army of vampires created a shield from blood to protect everyone behind them.


    "Oh, they are also prepared for the war. Roy shouldn''t have provoked too much. He''s such a pain sometimes¡­ often¡­ always¡­" Albert sighed.


    "But if not for him, some of us would have died already and the cult has taken over half of the continent. With Arturo and my kingdom at their hand," Henry said.


    "But there are things that he shouldn''t do. But I can''t say anything to him, and his girlfriends just supported him," Albert said.


    "At least he''s not alone. And as long as he didn''t do anything that cross the line, it should be fine. He let you be in charge even though you said that you won''t allow expert level mages to participate because I think he believes in you," Lynn said.


    "Then you don''t know him enough. Instead of me, I think he believes that the expert level mages can clean up after my mess in case things go wrong so everything will be fine. That''s what he''s thinking. Everyone! Surround the enemies!"


    Albert gave anothermand to surround the enemies. This way, they will attack not just from the front. But the sides as well. As for the back, no one can go there. Because they will be spread too thinly and will only make an unnecessary weakness.


    With attacks from the sides as well, the vampires started to build Blood Shield on their sides as they march faster and faster. Until finally, the ten Vampire Marquesses split up and lead ten groups different way. They break their own formation and fight however they like.


    "Since the Vampire King is being taken care of by Roy, they have ten different leaders. I guess that''s smart," Harold said.


    "Hmm¡­ I can learn something from them. I forgot to create groups, so it will be difficult for us who only have one leader," Albert said calmly. He still thinks that victory is still within this grasp.


    Without giving any order, the army of humans figure out themselves that they can''t rely on Albert''s order all the time, so they fight however they like as well. Albert smiled because he knows that this is what''s going to happen.


    He has listened to others opinion prior to the fight. Including those who are hunters, and guards who protect a city that often gets attacked. And he only gave hints of what they should be doing in case there are no orders from him.


    "I need to figure out who will be the leader of the guards, the leader of the agents, the leader of the hunters, and other types of leader so I only need to order those people. And they will ry my order to the rest," Albert said.


    "That''s no different than being a king. You just need to give the order, and other people will do it for you. I think you''re doing fine already," Henry said. In which, Harold nodded.


    Next to them is Lynn who writes everything down on her note. She has a reliable subordinate in udia, but that doesn''t mean she can just rely everything on her. That''s why for this fight, she ordered udia to take part on the battle, while Lynn herself will learn from watching Albert and the other kings.


    The battle progressed well for the humans, as they are winning. No casualty at all for the human because they have healers that Albert and the other kings brought. Although their healings were weaker than the angels, it was still enough.


    The vampires tried to attack the humans from distance with Blood Bullet, but before they shoot, Sara would shoot them first with her rifle which was made by Marie. Her eyes have much better vision than average humans despite having no special ability like Roy.


    But she couldn''t shoot all of them, and some humans get hit by Blood Bullet. But the healers were prepared, so those who got injured can go back to the battle quickly.


    Albert gave orders from time to time, but it was the army themselves who did the most. Which makes them feel confident.


    But whenever their confidence raised, they would pretend to not hear Albert''s order and do things the way they want. But their own ns failed instead. Which make them think twice about disobeying Albert''s order, and make them realize that Albert is a capable leader.


    Those who disobeyed him were mostly those who are not from Tatrama. And they will all be scolded by their kingter.


    Some vampires started flying, but the wind mages were already prepared. Albert has been informed about their ability to fly from Roy after their first encounter.


    While looking at the sky, they saw something else other than vampires and humans. It''s a wolf running toward him in the sky, with two people on its back.


    That wolf is Shelia, and the two on her back are a female Vampire Duke, and a corpse of another Vampire Duke.


    Shelianded in front of Albert after dropping the two vampires, and with one-foot stepping on the female vampire''s head, she gave a report to Albert.


    "Hey, human king! The Vampire King can suck the blood of his own kind, and he got much stronger than when the vampire boy I fought a few days ago drank my blood. At this point, he''s already much stronger than Roy," Shelia said.


    "Really? If any of these vampires started drinking the blood of their own kind, it will be difficult. Why are you bringing them here?" Albert asked.


    "So, the Vampire King won''t drink their blood. Though I failed to get another corpse, so the Vampire King should be much stronger now," Shelia replied.


    "This is getting harder. Sonia, you there?" Albert called Sonia.


    "You want me to prepare the expert level mages?" Sonia who had watched the situation from the start in her invisible form, already know what Albert is thinking.


    "That''s right. Call them all here. And if the angels and werewolves are free as well, get them here," Albert said.


    Sonia then disappear to inform the others, and Ka and the others arrive soon after.


    "Do we fight now?" Kron asked.


    "Not yet. Hey, vampire. Can you tell me about what happen when you start drinking the blood of your own kind?" Albert asked the female vampire whose head is being stepped by Shelia. She''s still alive, but has no will to fight.


    "¡­We will get much stronger than when we drunk the blood of other species, but we will lose our mind. It''s against our ethic to drink blood from our kind, but our king did it," the female vampire said.


    "You answered honestly. Do you think that the Vampire King ordered the other vampires to start drinking the blood of their own kind if things go wrong in this battle?" Albert asked.


    "There''s no way that will happen!"


    But as soon as she said that, amotion ensues.


    A vampire start screaming from another vampire who bites his neck.


    Not just one or two, but as many as half of the surviving vampires started drinking the blood of the other half.


    "¡­seems like I was right. Expert level mages, go and fight them. We can''t afford to lose anyone in this battle," Albert said.


    "How¡­ how could this happen?" the female vampire watched the sight in shock. Shelia no longer stepped on her head because she knows that the female vampire has no will to fight anymore.


    "Because your king is crazy, and half of your army is filled with vampires as crazy as your king," Albert said.


    He didn''t show it to anyone, but after witnessing vampires biting another vampire''s neck, he is panicked. Because he expected to win without casualties. But if the vampires started getting stronger, it will be difficult to win without casualties.. In fact, winning itself will be difficult despite having expert level mages to help.

 Chapter 430 - Angela Finally Awake

    "Other than bing stronger and losing their mind, what else will happen?" Albert asked the female vampire.


    "I don''t know. We also thought that those were just myth. And there hasn''t been any case of someone drinking another vampire''s blood," the vampire said.


    "There have to be at least one case of a missing vampire. After all, your king suggested this n to half of the vampires here. Which mean he already know that it will work," Albert said.


    "¡­there were some missing vampires. But they were just some low-rank vampires, and no one cares about them gone," the vampire exined.


    Albert start thinking for a bit.


    In the battlefield, Ka and the other expert level mages have started fighting the crazed vampires. Those vampires don''t even care how injured they are, and as long as they are not dead yet, they will attack anyone in sight. Even their own kind.


    Basically, the battle has changed.


    It''s humans against crazed vampires, normal vampires against crazed vampires, and crazed vampires against other crazed vampires.


    The normal vampires were actually not fighting. They are trying to withdraw from the fight, but because the crazy vampires are blocking them, they had no choice but to fight back. Ignoring the humans they should be fighting.


    Seeing the battle, Albert looked at the despaired female vampire next to him.


    "What are you doing?" Albert asked.


    "¡­"


    "Don''t you see that your own kind are being massacred?" Albert asked again.


    "Then what should I do!?" the female vampire shouted.


    "What''s your rank?" Albert asked.


    "¡­Vampire Duke," she replied.


    "That mean you are second only after the king, right? What about the queen?" Albert asked.


    "The queen and the king are different tribe. We are at war with them. we think that whatever the source of this is, we can get stronger and defeat the queen," she exined.


    "So, the king and the queen are not a couple. And they are probably not even a family. Well, doesn''t matter. It means that there are other vampires than your group, right? Hmm¡­ let me think for a bit longer," Albert said.


    At this time, the werewolves and the angels have appeared to help. The angels quickly healed those who got injured and bitten by the vampires. So far, there have been no casualty at all. But the crazed vampires who have lost their mind are too powerful. They would even break through the magic of the expert level mages forcefully, and fight back.


    The human healers have spent their mana to heal so many people, and now, only the angels and some higher leveled healers can heal others.


    Celestine and Ka would create a trap to capture the vampires, but those vampires even broke through the cage as if it was nothing. It''s getting more dangerous if it goes any longer. The vampires also started drinking the blood of their own allies'' corpses.


    The longer the battle continues, the stronger they will be.


    "Sigh¡­ since you''re second only to the king, I need to ask you to get the vampires together. Either you will retreat or you will join us fighting the crazy vampires, it''s up to you. We will no longer kill you unless you still want to fight us," Albert said to the female vampire.


    "But¡­ I don''t think anyone will follow me since the king is still alive," she said.


    "No. He will die. Or he might have already died. The one fighting him, Roy, is strong," Albert said with full confidence.


    "But that human was overpowered by my king. And even if my king died, I don''t think everyone will follow me," the vampire said.


    "It''s fine. Even if the enemy is stronger, Roy has many tricks under his sleeves. As long as his mind is still clear, defeating someone stronger than him is easy for him. And I will tell you this as a king of a country. A leader who cares about his people, will have the people''s trust. Since there are still many vampires who haven''t drink vampire''s blood, they are still clinging to hope of survival. Go out there and help the vampires retreat. Or you will lose every single vampire that are here," Albert said.


    "¡­you won''t kill us?" she asked.


    Instead of answering her, Albert gave an order to everyone.


    "Everyone! Ignore the vampires who are retreating! Focus only on those crazed vampires!"


    Seeing Albert gave the order, the female vampire quickly go to a surviving Vampire Marquess, and told him that they should retreat so they can survive.


    There weren''t many vampires who would obey her. And she only leaves with those who want to leave. She also told them to carry the corpses of their allies with them.


    "That''s a good decision. Not the best, but good enough," Harold said. To which Henry nodded.


    "Letting them go? What if they ask that Vampire Queen to attack us?" Lynn asked.


    "They will know that we are too strong since we could even stop those crazed vampires. They will think twice before attacking us. Or there will be another way," Henry said.


    "What way?"


    "Thatdy vampire and those who are retreating, wille back here and ask for help. We don''t know what kind of conflict between the two tribes, but if it''s not something that can be finished with just the Vampire King''s death, they will ask for our help. And then, we will have the vampires as our allies. Not many, but we will still be stronger," Albert exined.


    Lynn nodded in understanding. Making their former enemies turned into allies is something good. But that''s only if they will return to ask for help, and pay it back.


    And even if the Vampire Queen''s army decided to attack them, Albert knows that Roy won''t let that happen. He will either told Albert that the Vampire Queen''s army ising, or finish them himself.


    Despite the vampires retreating, the battle is still not over. There are still fifty crazy vampires left, but they have drunk a lot of blood of their own kind.


    Their strength has surpassed even the attack of the expert level mages. Whether they are being attacked by wind, earth, fire, or water magic, they can endure it and only got a slight injury.


    "They can still get injured! Attack them more! Werewolves, aim at their heart!" Shelia gave themand to the other werewolves.


    "Angels! Heal the injured, and support the werewolves!" Graham also lead the angels to help.


    The battle is far from over. To defeat one vampire, they will need five expert level mages, and several werewolves. Even worse, as long as the vampire corpse is still remaining, the other vampires woulde together and drink the blood of the corpse. Which only make them stronger.


    The only one who is fine here is Jewel.


    With her transformation into a rhino, her skin is thick enough to not get the vampire''s fang pierce her. But for normal attack, she will still get injured. Though with her lightning element, the attacking vampires will be stunned, and the other can defeat that vampire.


    That''s the strategy that they devised after seeing how amazing Jewel''s rhino form is. But it is still difficult to get the vampires focus on Jewel.


    "When will Roy return!?" Kron shouted.


    "That Vampire King must be much stronger than the ones we''re fighting. He wille as soon as he killed the Vampire King. We must endure it," Fabio said.


    "Rather than that, won''t it be much better if we can defeat them all before Roy returns? We can tell him that he''s so weak against just one vampire, while we''re facing about hundreds of them. His expression will be priceless," Oleg said.


    Hearing that, not just Kron. But Fabio and everyone who hears that sentence, be encouraged and think that it''s best to defeat them before Roy returns.


    "¡­I don''t know what happened, but it seems like the group with Kron and the others have their morale raised all of a sudden," Albert said when he sees the location of where Kron and the others are.


    Suddenly the atmosphere changed. The magic fluctuation in the area be much stronger.


    Instantly, the battle paused. All the humans, werewolves, angels, and vampires, are stopped and looked at one direction. To the dome where Ang is breaking through.


    Ka quickly recovers from the shock, and stabbed a vampire in the heart with an Earth Spike, before shouting.


    "Ang will finish her breakthrough soon! Everyone, fight!"


    Ang''s shout wakes everyone from their stupor, and they return back to fight. As for the vampires, they wanted to ignore those people and just charge at the dome where Ang is, but they are being blocked.


    "We don''t need Roy. As long as Ang has broken through, we can end the battle before Roy returns," Albert said.


    "Is she waking up soon?" Lynn asked.


    "Maybe she''s already awake. Roy has left some food near her, so she might be eating her fill since she hasn''t eaten for a while. Let''s protect her a little longer. We can only check on her after the battle is over, or she wille out herself soon," Albert said.


    Just as he said. Inside the dome, there''s a starving girl who is filling her stomach with her favorite foods. Those foods were cooked by Lina, and Lina cooked them everyday because she knows that they are the food that Ang loves.


    "I think it''s time for me to go out."


    The girl inside the dome said as she feels the battle outside the dome.

 Chapter 431 - Elemental Master

    "I think it''s time for me to go out. The others are fighting to protect me. This time, I''ll be the one protecting them."


    Ang has finished filling her fill, and prepared to go out. She made an opening on the dome without much effort.


    Even though the dome was there to cover her, it was still built by two expert level earth mages. Ka and Celestine. Which mean, the earth dome was by no means weak. But Ang can open the dome easily without using much effort.


    With just a wave of her hand, the dome opened. And she can see the battle in front of her.


    Everyone is protecting her from the iing monsters. At least that''s what she thought.


    It''s true that the vampires areing for her. But at this moment, they are no longer here for her. They just attacked everyone in sight. Including their own kind.


    "Something is weird, but as long as my friends are fighting them, it means that they are my enemies," Ang said calmly.


    Then, she''s flying using her wind magic vertically to the sky to see the surrounding. Her flight speed is too fast. Faster than even Veronica who has been an expert level wind mage the longest among them. Although she''s still slower than Spot, her speed is already the fastest among humans. Unless there are master level wind mage.


    She''s already faster than Roy. But in real battle, no one knows who will be the winner.


    She''s looking at the battlefield, and see Albert leading the army. She quickly went to his location.


    "Albert! Who is our enemies?" Ang quickly asked him.


    "Ang? Have you break through to expert level?" Albert asked.


    "I did. I want to test it now. Anyway, who is our enemies? They seem like humans. But are they monsters just like the werewolves, angels, and elves?" Ang asked.


    "Yes. They are vampires. At first, we are winning. But they drunk the blood of their own kind, and be stronger while losing their mind. They even started fighting among themselves. If not for the angels, many of us would have die already."


    When Albert was talking to Ang, Ka noticed that Ang has already left the dome, and went to her to greet her.


    "Ang. It''s been a while," Ka greeted Ang.


    "Ka! I miss you!"


    The two best friends are hugging each other in front of the king who is being ignored.


    "How are you feeling?" Ka asked.


    "Strong!" Ang replied confidently.


    "That''s good. Are you going to join the fight?"


    "I am. But where is Roy? I don''t see him anywhere," Ang asked.


    "He''s taking care of the Vampire King somewhere else. Shelia said that the Vampire King right now is already stronger than him, so it might take a while until his fight is over," Ka said.


    "I see. Well, that''s just like him."


    The two never lose their trust on Roy. They know and fully confident that Roy is fine, and he will return victorious. But for when he will return, they don''t know yet.


    And of course, no one know that Roy has just finished killing the Vampire King in space. No one would expect that Roy will bring the Vampire King to outer space just to kill him. That''s just show how powerful the Vampire King is.


    "Let''s defeat everyone before he returns, shall we?" Ang said as she flies toward the battlefield.


    Ang arrived and see about ten vampires fighting. Six of them are fighting the human army, while the other four were fighting among themselves.


    Ang put her hand in front of her, and easily use magic.


    It was an ice magic. Or at least it was seen as ice magic for others.


    She used ice to freeze the ten vampires, but that''s not all she did. Because if it''s just that, other people have tried it, and the vampires can destroy the ice.


    But with her strength, the ice she created is very strong, and won''t break easily. It helps with stopping the movement of the vampires.


    The ice only freezes the lower body of the vampires. Not the whole body. But that''s what Ang wanted to test.


    Now, all her four elements havebined into one. Whether it''s fire, ice, wind, or earth, she can use whatever she wants at the same time. Which mean, although the ice was meant to stop the vampires, it''s not cold at all for the vampires.


    But it was the opposite.


    "AAAARGH!"


    "It''s hot!"


    Although the vampire lost their mind, they can still talk. And the vampires who have their lower body frozen, were feeling as if their lower body is being burned by fire.


    "The ice is burning? That Ang has grown monstrously strong," Ka said with a smile.


    "Burning ice? That''s impossible, right?" Lynn asked.


    "We don''t know the limit of what magic can do. No one has reached that level. Someone can reach master level, but that doesn''t mean they know the limit of magic. The only thing we can do is just to get stronger as much as possible. And Ang is showing us how powerful and amazing magic truly is," Ka exined.


    Ka is still with Albert and the other kings as Ang was too fast. She couldn''t follow her at all. Although she can move by using the earth as a wave and surf it, it was far too slowpared to an expert level wind mage.


    And with Ang who has surpassed average expert level wind mage, no one can keep up with her speed.


    Ang continuously using magic which are new for others to see. She boosted her flying speed with the help of fire magic, blowing the enemies away with fire, and many other things which shouldn''t make sense.


    "¡­that was fast," Ka said to Ang who has returned back to where Ka is. The others have also gathered after Ang defeated the vampires they were fighting.


    "Right now, you are the strongest one among us," Albert said, full of praises toward the newly risen expert level mage.


    "Not really. I need to fight Roy first to see which one of us is the strongest," Ang said.


    "You want to fight Roy for that?" Ka asked.


    "No. I want to fight Roy because I know that he''s the only one I can fight all out with at the moment. Using all four of my elements. No, they are all havebined into one, so I only have one element, which contains those four elements. What should I call it?"


    "We''ll just call you Elemental Master. You were one after all," Ka said.


    "I think that''s fine. So, shall we fight?" Ang said all of a sudden. As if she''s picking a fight with everyone. But her proposal was only targeted to one man.


    "¡­why are you picking a fight with me right away? I just returned from space; you know?"


    The one Ang talked to has just returned. Hended next to her after a short run from where he transported using portal.


    "I want to test my strength," Ang said.


    "We''ll do thatter. There are still many enemiesing, and both of us are tired. Albert, are you going to lead the battle again?" Roy asked Albert.


    "¡­I can''t do that. Everyone is tired just from fighting the vampires. I''ll ask you to return us to our homes," Albert said.


    "Wait! Something ising! Something huge and dangerous!"


    All of a sudden, Roy warned the others. He also prepared a portal to Albert''s pce so those who are tired can leave right away. He''s too tired and can''t open too many portals now, but he still needs to save his magic for the iing enemies.


    Many people entered the portal because their kings ordered them to, but some are still waiting there to see what Roy sees.


    The monsters that appears are big and strong. Various dragons, behemoth, and many unknown monsters that humans had never encountered.


    "Oh, no! If it''s like this, the vige will be destroyed!" Lynn shouted.


    "¡­don''t worry, we''re fine," Roy said calmly as he looked up to the sky.


    From the sky, their huge friends appear. It was the Kaiser Dragon, Alejandro.


    The gigantic dragon with short limbspared to hisrge body is descending from the sky, and roared loudly.


    "Embrace yourself!"


    Roy used a lot of magic to stop the loud roar from reaching the others. But it''s not only the roar that''s dangerous. It''s the Intimidation from the Kaiser Dragon which makes many of them copsed.


    There are only two people left standing, while the others are on the ground looking at Alejandro in fear. The two are Roy and Ang.


    The other monsters who appeared, quickly escaped from the Kaiser Dragon. And no one wanted toe back ever again.


    Just with his appearance, Alejandro is capable of destroying the will of monsters that no one dares to approaches.


    Alejandro then approached Roy and the others. Although the distance is still quite far, that''s just how close he can get to the others.


    "Sorry, I''mte," Alejandro said.


    "No. You''re on time. Thank you foring," Roy replied.


    With that, the battle to protect Ang to breakthrough is finally over.. With zero casualties.

 Chapter 432 - I Can Go Home Now

    When I return, the battle was just over, and I can see everyone is surrounding Ang, so I went there as well.


    She picked a fight with me right away? But I''m too tired, so I refused it and said to do it next time.


    Maybe because she has finally broken through that there are more monsters approaching. And their strength levels are iparable to the strength of the Vampire King.


    The approaching monsters are powerful. Like dragons, a four-legged giant beast that might be behemoth, a Giant bird covered in me, and many other strong monsters that no matter how powerful I am right now, it''s nearly impossible to defeat them.


    So, before theye, I opened a portal to Albert''s pce to get everyone to safety. After everyone entered the portal, I thought of getting the werewolves, elves, and angels to enter as well since this ce won''t be safe any longer. And the vige will be destroyed if just one of those monsterse.


    If it''s just one of them, I believe that with my strength, I can defeat it. But there are just too many of them.


    But before Albert and the others left, I see my good friend approaching. The Kaiser Dragon, Andro.


    He roared loudly, while inducing his intimidation into the roar. Making all the monsters retreat in fear, while also making some of us copsed. Though they are still conscious, only two of us are still standing. Ang and I.


    Seeing that, I know that Ang is already stronger than Spot. As for me, if I go all out and use everything, only then I can barely defeat Spot. The same Spot who is afraid of the Kaiser Dragon''s intimidation.


    Despite his strength, it seems like I''m stronger than him mentally.


    "Sorry, I''mte," Andro said.


    I just told him that he came on time, and thanked him foring.


    Seems like I got one of the strongest monsters as my friend. It''s amazing that I can befriend him just by scratching his back.


    I scratched his back, and now he''s scratching my back. If he arrives a littleter, we all would have gone by that time, and the vige might have been ransacked by the monsters. So, I am very grateful to him.


    While waiting for everyone to recover, I let those who have entered the portal toe back. Good thing I haven''t closed the portal yet, or I will spend more manater when I return them back to their own kingdom.


    And those who have transported with the portal, didn''t feel the full intimidation from Andro, so they are fine and can still walk.


    Other than those who came from Tatrama''s capital, the others entered the portal and return back to Monsters World.


    I use this chance to introduce Andro to everyone.


    "This is Alejandro. Our big friend. He won''t be able to help much when we''re in our world, but in this world, we can rely on him," I said.


    "Nice to meet you all! I''m Alejandro. Roy call me Andro. You can call me anything you want," Andro said.


    "¡­Roy, you have so many amazing friends. Not just the kings of the four countries, but also this gigantic dragon," Oleg said.


    "I know, right?" I said proudly.


    "I think I should go now. Visit me often, okay?" Andro said, as he flies off somewhere after seeing everyone is afraid of him.


    I think he knows that with him staying here, it will be hard for those who got hit by his intimidation to recover. That''s why he left. I''ll visit himter as a thank. Maybe I should roast some monster and throw them into his mouthter.


    "Huff¡­ he''s gone. I feel better now. I feel sorry for this, but this can''t be helped," Albert said.


    "Ow¡­ I''m too old for this," old man Henry said.


    As for the other king and empress, Harold isughing while Lynn is on the verge of crying. She''s being consoled by Celestine.


    "I think it''s best that you return for now and get some rest," I suggested.


    "That''s right. But I also have something to discuss. Possibly, with everyone here. Everyone, get some rest tomorrow. And then Roy, please gather everyone in two days. We''ll meet in the monster''s vige," Albert said.


    "Okay."


    He probably wants to give reward to those who did well. I don''t know how the battle goes, but I can ask Kater.


    I opened a portal to Consenza, Varadis, and also to Bernard''s mansion in Arturo. Celestine chooses to go to Consenza with Lynn, udia, and her army. Fabio and Carmen also want some time with their family as they entered Bernard''s mansion and greeted by Luna who has been waiting for a while. She must have known the exact moment that I opened the portal from her Future Vision.


    Next is those from Tatrama. I opened several portals to everyone to return. We have the most people after all. And Oleg and Hill will return back to the city they protect.


    "Roy, I have something to tell you."


    Before Albert leaves, he wanted to say something to me.


    "What is it?" I asked.


    "I let the female vampire that Shelia brought with her alive, and she retreated with some vampires," Albert said.


    "Why!? What if they return to get revenge!?"


    "I don''t think she will do that. But I don''t know about the other vampires. She told me that there''s a Vampire Queen who is from different tribe than the Vampire King you fought. They don''t get along well. My guess is that the Vampire Queen will use this chance when the troops of the Vampire King is at the weakest to eliminate them. And the female Vampire Duke I let go might return here asking for help. She''s different from the Vampire King who told the vampires to drink blood from their own kind. If she reallye back, I''ll be the one negotiating with her," Albert said.


    "You want to get the vampires as our allies?" I asked.


    "Yes," he said confidently.


    "If you''re that confident, you must have something nned already. I''ll get the werewolves to inform me if theye. I''ll make sure that they won''t fight the vampires. I also need to go to the vige first to see the situation there before returning to Cassau," I said.


    "Good. Then, see youter," Albert said as he entered the portal.


    Now that everyone except for the usual group from Cassau has returned.


    "Do you want to return right away, or you want to see the vige before leaving?" I asked the others.


    "I''ll return and get some rest. I never expected the battle to go this long," Ka said.


    "Since we won''t be fighting anytime soon, I''ll be returning as well," Ang said. Seems like she still wants to fight me.


    Following those two, the others also returned back to Cassau. As for Shirley, she has left with Albert to the pce.


    Well, all that''s left are the Shelia, Graham, and me. Let''s check on the vige before returning home.


    "How''s the vige?'' I asked the two as Shelia and I run, and Graham is flying next to us.


    "There are some monsters attacking us, but we''re fine. The elves helped build fences to protect the vige by using some kind of nt," Graham said.


    "We will be having a great feast from all the monsters we caught," Shelia said.


    So, it''s food for the werewolves? That''s fine, I guess. I will give them some chicken nuggetster as a reward.


    As for the angels, I don''t know what they want. And the elves, I will let Lina take care of them.


    When I arrive at the vige, I was greeted by the Elf Queen, Tia.


    "Wee back. Thank you for your hard work," Tia said.


    "Is there any problem here?" I asked.


    "Not at all. The werewolves and the angels are very helpful. Though they are tired and resting at the moment," Tia said.


    "That''s good. So, this is the fences you made?"


    I look around the vige, and it is being surrounded by fences made of nt.


    "It''s not much, but it can hold weak monsters like goblins. Even though we are coward, there are still other things that we can do," Tia said.


    "I see. Shelia, Graham, and Tia. There''s a chance that the vampire will return. As long as they are here not to fight, don''t fight them. Albert has something that he wants from them. I don''t know what it is, but it should be good if he thinks so," I said.


    "¡­do we have to let them in the vige?" Tia asked. Seems like she''s afraid of the vampires.


    "You don''t have to. We were just at war with each other. Just have them stay outside the vige, and contact Sonia, or use the Blobby in your possession. I''lle as soon as possible," I said.


    "Understood." Tia said. Graham and Shelia nodded as well.


    "Oh, and in two days, everyone will return to have a meeting in the vige. Albert said that it''s something important."


    "So, it will be the first time that that building will be used," Tia said as she pointed at the building in the middle of the vige, near the artificialke.


    "Albert might want to ask for your attendance as well. Well, we can only know in two days. Since everything here is alright, I will return now. Have a good rest," I said.


    I used portal to return back to my room, and as soon as I lie on the bed, I instantly fell into slumber.


    What a tiring day¡­

 Chapter 433 - My Boring And Peaceful Day

    Finally, a day off. No training, no protecting, just me and everyone rxing.


    What should I do now? Everyone has their own way to spend the time. Even Victoria is locking herself in her room to write new stories about vampires.


    Ang, Ka, Sophie, and Lina are going shopping.


    Candy and Wendy are going somewhere.


    I guess I''ll y with the kids then.


    "No! You''re not allowed to y! We''re going to have a game of tag! If you y with us, you''re going to cheat!" Daniel said when I asked the kids if I can y with them.


    Now, how do I fix my broken heart and soul? More sleep?


    ¡­I always wanted to have some peace, but now that I have a momentary peace, I don''t know what to do. And everyone is busy. I don''t want to bother them.


    But a boring and peaceful day is great. I don''t need to do anything.


    Well, I''ll just go find a good ce to sleep. Although Victoria is busy, she still made some clones for me. I can turn them into a bed somewhere. Theke we used to go for a pic is a good ce. Lina also nted some beautiful flower there, so the sight has be more amazing.


    But when I transported there, Jewel is already there. She''s with Hannah who wants to learn some fighting skill.


    "That''s right. You can use your leg to kick higher. It''s rare for the enemy to focus on your leg when you are this close. Especially if they are too used in using their magic. They will think that as long as your hands are in sight, they can do anything," Jewel said to Hannah.


    "But my kickck power," Hannah said.


    "As Master said, if youck power, then instead of hitting once, you need to hit multiple times more," Jewel said.


    She''s acting like Hannah''s master and happily taught her what she wants to learn. I think it''s best to not bother them anymore.


    I guess sleeping won''t be a choice after seeing someone using their rest day to train. I can''t show her my weakness as her master. Though I think I have shown a lot of weaknesses to her.


    Let''s just walk around Cassau. Who knows what I will see? Other than Ang and Ka changing their clothes in the fitting room of a clothing store.


    When I started living in this city, there are too many unruly men who keep trying to hit on the girls. But now, many people here have known to not cause trouble to them, or anyone rted to me. People here are grateful to me for keeping bad guys out of the city. Though I can''t say anything about huntersing from outside.


    And as expected, there are some outsiders who are trying to force their ways with girls in the street. Everyone avoided them as they proudly saying that they are B-ranked hunters.


    ¡­it''s another peaceful day.


    "Roy, you''re not going to help those girls?"


    Candy and Wendy who were passing by, noticed me and approached me. And Candy asked me if I''m not going to do anything to those thugs.


    "It''s my day off, and I don''t want to do anything that will cause trouble," I said.


    "¡­so, you know that your method in taking care of people like them will only make new enemies for you?" Candy asked.


    I nodded in agreement.


    That''s right. Usually, my method will end up with people like them to hate me to death, and think about revenge. That''s why I don''t want to do anything. And it''s not like those girls are in trouble since they seem to be calm.


    "If you want to help them, you can," I said to Candy and Wendy.


    "Roy, look. Those girls are air mages." Wendy said as she pointed at the girls.


    I look closely at those girls and¡­ as expected, I don''t remember them. Maybe they were my student, or Sara''s. I think it''s Sara''s since I don''t remember about them.


    There are two girls who are being harassed. And each girl has a small pebble in their hand. They aimed those pebble at the men, and shot them with enough power to knock those men out instantly.


    "Hmm¡­ they packed quite a punch. Nice shots," I said.


    The two girls heard my praise, but they look away in disdain as they left. They are really not my students.


    "They hate you. Did you do something to them?" Candy asked.


    "You''ve seen what happened. I don''t even know those two. Anyway, where are you going now?" I asked.


    "We''re going to buy some underwear," Candy said.


    "¡­Can Ie?" I asked.


    "Obviously not!" Wendy is the one answering.


    "Well, have a nice day," I said as I left the two.


    Seriously, today is very peaceful. Why can''t days like this continue for the rest of my life?


    It''s because of the cult.


    Let''s stop thinking about it, or my day off will be gone while thinking about them. I should rx for today.


    Oh? The arena is crowded with people. I guess after the tournament, the arena will be used more often. Let''s watch the fight since I have nothing else to do.


    Compared to the tournament, the fight in the arena is in a much smaller scale. It''s mostly about two sides in disagreement, and decide the result by duel.


    Most of them are just lower-level mages, so it was not interesting for me who have trained with expert level mages.


    There were some B or even A-ranked hunters fighting. But they are not interesting.


    I left after watching three fights.


    I went to the restaurant, but on the way, a pickpocket kid is trying to grab my wallet. But I move faster than him.


    I grabbed all the money and the Hunter Card in my wallet, and put them in another pocket. Next, when he grabbed my wallet, I also grabbed his pouch which is full of money. I even have a time to write a note saying that his money has been stolen while trying to steal my money.


    After that, out of boredom, I watched his reaction. The shock in his face after knowing that his money has disappear is priceless. I don''t care for what reason he''s stealing, but once he''s trying to steal from me, he''s my enemy. There''s no mercy even if he''s a kid.


    Though I don''t think he can read as he threw away the note right away. He returned back to where I stole his money with teary eyes.


    Once he saw me, instead of apologizing, he attacked me out of nowhere.


    "Return my money!"


    The boy, who seems to be about twelve or thirteen, shouted as soon as he finds me.


    "Return my wallet first," I said.


    I know that he has thrown away my wallet when he saw that it was empty.


    Well, most of my money is in my Hunter Card after all. Although I have some money in my pocket, even if they got stolen, I still have my Hunter. That''s why I don''t mind losing my wallet.


    But this kid just shouted to return his money and making it as if I''m the bad guy. What an annoying kid.


    He even makes sure that everyone in the street hears his shout.


    Well, I''m bored anyway, so let''s y along with him.


    "Those money¡­ those money are for the medical bills! My mother is hospitalized and I need those money to pay for surgery! She''s in the university hospital and if they didn''t do the surgery anytime soon, my mother will lose her life!" the boy shouted.


    Many people watching by sympathized with the boy. Is he going to challenge me in acting? Boy, my acting skill is far more superior than yours.


    "But my wallet is more important than a stranger''s life! It''s my heart and soul even though it''s empty! I inherited it from the mother of my neighbor''s cousin''s friend''s nephew!" I said.


    "¡­That''s just stranger! Please give my money back so I can pay for the surgery!"


    By this time, the guards have arrived. But none of them seem to know me as they are trying to arrest me from stealing.


    Is the boy''s acting more persuasive?


    Well, I guess it''s time to speak the truth.


    "Alright. That wallet means nothing." I said.


    "So, you will give my money back?" the boy asked.


    "Now, boy. I didn''t say that. By the way, I''d like to introduce myself. I''m surgeon and here''s my medical license. Now, tell me the name of your hospitalized mother, and what illness she has. Or else, you''re the one lying and you will be the one getting arrested," I said while showing him my medical license. I also show it to the guards.


    Now, the guards are confused since I spoke the truth, and realized that the boy is the one lying.


    "So, what''s your mother''s name, and what''s her illness?" I asked again.


    "Ah! Seems like I got the wrong person. Sorry." The boy quickly escaped the guards. He''s quite fast. He must have run a lot and trained those legs.


    Well, I don''t care. At least I had waste five minutes ying with him.


    Now what?


    There''s nothing else interesting happening today. But that''s a good thing for a day off. Although it''s boring, I don''t hate it. Boring is good.


    And I spent the day in a boring way without anything interesting.


    I slept well after that, and when I wake up, it''s time for more work. Albert asked for a meeting with everyone in Monsters World.. And there will probably more job for me so I can''t get another boring day again for a while.

 Chapter 434 - Victory Feast

    Today is the day for the meeting that Albert scheduled. Good thing that we built the ce for the meeting to be big enough to hold a lot of people. Everyone who participated in the battle can join us.


    But before we go there, Albert called me through Sonia to meet him right away. Not knowing what he''s nning, I go there to meet him.


    "What''s up, Albert?" I greeted the king of Tatrama.


    "What''s up?" Albert replied casually seeing me arrive.


    "I know that everyone here already knows the truth, and know that you two are good friends. But please don''t act so casually toward a king in front of the others," Marie scolded us both.


    "Even if I''m the Werewolf King? And the leader of the angels as well?" Iined.


    "That''s a king in different world. Or different to be exact. And King of different races. By the way, I have already figure out how to travel between. In theory at least. I need a lot of experiment before that can happen," Marie said.


    ""Don''t even think about it anytime soon.""


    Both Albert and I replied together at the same time. Seems like Victoria wanted to say something, but Albert and I spoke first.


    "You have already made so many amazing inventions. There''s no doubt that the cult has marked you as a target. Either for assassination, or to capture you for your intellect. If you build something that can help us travel betweens, they will ignore everything and aim for you whatever it takes. As your husband, I can''t take that risk," Albert said.


    "He''s right. Too risky. Just writing down the idea is bad enough. If somehow it was leaked, it will be disastrous. At least put off that idea until the cult is destroyed," I said.


    With her help, she can make many other inventions that will help us fight against the cult. I don''t want her to be targeted by the cult this early. Well, another reason is that she''s my friend''s wife.


    "I understand. I won''t speak about this matter ever again until the cult is destroyed," Marie said as she left the two of us alone, and went to her children.


    Now that we have more people we can trust, and his pce is filled with them, Lana is no longer staying in my ce as she can show herself to everyone here. And about her magic that she can use ever since she was born, she can use it exceptionally well. In fact, I heard from her aunt, Shirley, that Lana is already intermediate level ice mage. And she hasn''t awakened her other elements yet! If there are any.


    As for n, he was raised well that he doesn''t feel any sign of jealousy to his sister. In fact, he was more of a smart kid than a talented one. He understands everything that was taught to him.


    The twin has grown really well. I''m so proud even though I''m not their parent. I''m just the doctor who delivered them.


    There''s something I''m curious about the space travel that Marie told us all of a sudden.


    "Victoria. Was it you who asked her for a method for space travel?" I asked Victoria.


    "¡­that''s right," she replied.


    "I know what you''re thinking. You want to see if the world you were in originally is one of thes out there, right? I know you miss home after reincarnated in this world a long time ago, but you''re in too much hurry. Not only you will risk Marie to be targeted by the cult, but also everyone else as well. Be patient for now," I said.


    "¡­I understand. Sigh¡­ I just wanted to show you how amazing my world is. I''m sure you will realize the greatness of fujoshi," Victoria said.


    "Never!"


    Nope. There''s no way I would like that stuff. She has tricked me about fujoshi before, and I won''t get tricked again. I already know what a fujoshi is. I''m smarter than I was before.


    "Anyway, let''s get to the main point. I called you here to bring all of these to the meeting ceter," Albert said as he spread his arms to show me what I will bring.


    "¡­there''s a lot of tables and dishes. Are we going to have a feast?" I asked.


    "That''s right. I had the servants to cook a lot of dishes for everyone. Including a lot of meat dishes for the werewolves, and vegetarian dishes for the elves. Although they didn''t participate directly, I heard that they built fences to protect the vige," Albert said.


    Just as he said, there are a lot of dishes to bring. They should be enough for everyone. Maybe.


    The werewolves and I eat a lot, so we might need more meat. Does the vegetarian dishes delicious? I''ll try them as well. I''m not picky about food like the werewolves or the elves. As long as they are delicious, I want them all.


    Oh! There are cakes as well. Let''s hide one for myselfter.


    "Roy," Victoria whispered to me.


    "What?"


    "I want that cheesecake."


    "Chocte cake is better. I can only hide one cake, or it will be suspicious if there are two or more cakes to hide."


    "¡­I hate you."


    "You hate chocte cake?"


    "You have to share with me," Victoria said.


    Although she doesn''t need food, she can still taste them. And she likes sweets and cakes.


    When I asked her about it in the past, she said that it was like a dreame true to be able to eat as many things as she wants, without having to pay attention to her weight. But she still regrets that there are many dishes that are not exist in this world.


    When I replied by saying that I never need to care about my weight as well, she didn''t talk to me for three days. It''s a taboo to say it in front of women. At least the women around me.


    After getting everything to the Monsters World, with the help of the servants as well, I told the Werewolves, the elves, and the angels, to not eat anything until everyone has arrive.


    And the werewolves replied by saying that they will protect the food with their lives. While looking at them and drooling.


    Can I trust them?


    I suppose I have to bring everyone here as fast as possible before they start eating.


    Everyone has prepared to go, so I don''t need to use portal to many locations. I also let them bring family and friends as well. Of course, only those who have been approved by Albert can join. And he needs to meet them from before, and not meeting them today for the first time.


    And so, the ce is filled with kids from four countries ying together with werewolves'' children, angels'' children, and the elves'' children as well.


    If yesterday was a peaceful and boring day, today is a peaceful and not boring day.


    "Today, we will celebrate for our victory against the vampires! Congrattion to everyone here! Have a feast for today!" Albert simply announced.


    I don''t think that''s the main reason that we''re all here. There should be another important thing that he will discuss with us. But for now, let''s hide the chocte cake before anyone notices.


    No one is looking? Good. I will transport the chocte cake to my room, and eat it aler.


    "If you can''t bring home the cheesecake, then I should eat as much as possible here!" Victoria said as she transformed into her human form.


    "Just because I saved one forter, doesn''t mean that I won''t eat other dishes here!" And I dered that I will taste at least each one of the dishes here.


    "Roy. Albert is calling for you," Sonia suddenly appeared as I was immersed in the fried rice.


    "Food."


    "Roy. Henry, Harold, and Lynn are calling for you as well," Sonia said again.


    "Food."


    "Roy. It''s important," Sonia won''t stop until I go and meet the kings.


    "Food!"


    Finally, she left. And then, the oneing next is Ka.


    "Roy. We''re going to meet Albert and the others right now. If you don''t, I will tell everyone that you stole the only chocte cake here. Obviously, someone noticed. But I don''t know if Albert notices. Go right now."


    ¡­that''s a threat. Am I someone who will surrender to a threat? Yes.


    "¡­I''ll bring some food to eat during our talk," I said.


    Everyone here is having a feast beside the artificialke, while we are inside the meeting ce. The building next to theke.


    When I enter, the four kings have been waiting, along with the usual group.


    Only I and Shelia stand out as we are bringing our own food to the meeting ce.


    "¡­yes, you can eat while we''re having a discussion," Albert said as soon as he saw me entering the building with a tray of foods.


    "Thank you. Now, this must be the real reason why you''re asking everyone to gather. Just tell us," I said.


    I don''t think he has started the discussion since everyone is curious about what he wants to say.


    "This is very important. The world is in danger," Albert said seriously.


    "¡­why don''t you tell me something I don''t know instead?"

 Chapter 435 - Pointless Meeting

    "Like I said, the world is in danger," Albert repeated his words in a serious tone.


    "And like I said, tell me something I don''t know. I know about the cult from the start, and I knew about the world in danger ever since Javier told us about it. And everyone has already known about it. You should exin yourself why you''re saying it twice," I said.


    Javier has told us that the world is being destroyed by the cult. First, it was our world. The one that I died protecting. Next was Monsters World. Because of Monsters World getting destroyed, Javier used his power to return me to the past and made sure I canmunicate with Victoria right away.


    Normally, I need to reach intermediate level first to be able tomunicate with Victoria. But Javier, and the other consciousnesses in the ck Slime, including Victoria herself, used the power to make Victoria able to talk with me, and also to get Javier meet me once I reached intermediate level.


    That was why I am not interested in this talk if it''s just about the world is in danger. I know about it from the start. I don''t know what happened after I died, but Javier has told me what will happen after I died.


    "Well, let me exin. From the previous battle, when we''re up against the vampires, I realized that none of us knew the danger we are facing. Most of them think that everything will be fine. Especially since we have Roy and several expert level mages. That''s why I knew that weck in our sense of urgency," Albert said.


    "I see. That is true. I didn''t sense it at all until the vampires started drinking other vampires'' blood. Once the vampires have grown stronger, and we are losing, only then that our people started to think about the fight seriously. If Ang didn''te out sooner, some of us might have died," old man Harold exined.


    "Old man is right. Thanks to Roy, we are more prepared and stronger as well. That''s why most of us feel normal even if enemies are attacking. In fact, we are fine because we know that other people, like Roy or any expert level mages, will help us. We trulyck the sense of urgency," Albert said.


    Really? A sense of urgency? I always know that the world is going to be destroyed though. Must be other people.


    "Well, isn''t it fine as long as they fight? Or don''t tell me that you never give them motivation to fight?" I asked Albert and the other kings.


    "¡­"


    Wait, no one answering? They just told the people that we''re going to fight, but never gave them any motivation.


    "Well, other than the kingdom and the world is in danger, I have never given my people any other kind of motivation," old man Henry said.


    "Me too. I thought it was enough to have an army of people whom I can trust. But they just follow my order, and no more than that," Albert said.


    "As for me, I don''t even know whom I can trust other than Celestine and udia. The people I brought with me are loyal. But to the empire, and not to me. Which is great, but that mean they are unlikely to put their lives on the line in a battle like before against the vampires to protect someone they don''t even know. They treated it as a simtion battle and not a real battle," Lynn said.


    Well, that''s their problem. There''s nothing I can do about that.


    As the three finished talking, all of us then look at thest king who hasn''t speak a word.


    "What are you looking at? I''m not even a king anymore. Someone took my ce. Trusting just one person is already good enough," Harold said.


    Well, that''s the king who is not a king anymore.


    "So, what you all need are motivation, right? Figure it out yourself. I don''t know what you expect from me about this thing," I said.


    "Well, I started thinking about this after the fight. When I saw that there are more powerful monsters than the vampires, I realized that the cult might have something even more powerful than them if they could destroy this world," Albert said.


    "That should be obvious, no? And the reason I tried to destroy the cult as soon as possible is so that they won''t gain enough power to do that yet. Kill them before they grow stronger, or creating more invention that will help them do so," I said.


    "Victoria, and Sonia as well. Can you tell me something? If Roy fight against powerful Aura user during the time you were both humans, can he win?" Albert asked Victoria and Sonia.


    "Yes. Unlike most Aura users, Roy used tricks as well in his fight. So, can he win? Of course," Victoria said, in which Sonia nodded in agreement.


    "I mean if Roy won''t use any kind of tricks. Will he be able to win with his current strength?"


    "No."


    "Definitely no."


    Victoria and Sonia said.


    Well, I also don''t expect that with my power, I could defeat powerful Aura user of the past.


    "If the story is right, the Evil God thinks that Aura users can stop him. Even with Roy who has defeated an artificial master level mage, he is still weakpared to Aura users of the past. Doesn''t it mean the enemy is much stronger than we thought?" Albert said.


    "¡­the enemy has always been stronger than us. That''s obvious. What are you trying to say? That there''s a level of magic beyond master?" I said.


    Beginner, intermediate, advanced, expert, and master. Those are the five level of magic that we always know.


    Expert level can be considered as the strongest since there hasn''t been any record of a master level in history, and master level was considered as a legend which is impossible to achieve. But what if there''s another level beyond that? And someone in the cult, probably the one called the Evil God, is that person.


    Hearing that, everyone was stunned. They thought that master level was already too strong. No one would have guessed that there is other level beyond master. But it''s not something that we know about.


    "So, Ang, what do you think about it?"


    Seeing everyone is still stunned, I asked Ang. Instead of fear, what she''s feeling is hope.


    "Doesn''t it mean that I can grow much stronger again?" Ang said casually.


    "Isn''t that right? From the time I told you and Ka about the past, I have only asked you to do one thing. Grow stronger. If the enemy is a master level mage, then we just need to grow stronger than that. Motivation? I don''t know about that. But I know that there are many among us who wants to be the strongest. Albert, old man, Lynn, and Harold. All of you might be the leader of your country. You can lead people, but you don''t know their desire. Just the previous tournament is already proof enough that many people wish to be the strongest. And the next tournament, between four countries, there will be more people who wants to be called as the strongest. All of you have underestimated people''s desire," I said.


    Doing it to protect themselves, to be the strongest, to protect other people, for fame, for wealth, for the reward given to them, there are many easy ways to motivate people. Sense of urgency? All hunters know that every mission they took, might be theirst one. The guards? They must know that if they can''t protect anything, they shouldn''t be a guard.


    Sense of urgency might be important, but being in a hurry won''t give much progress. Each people have their own pace. One can slide down from a hill without stopping, but others need to walk with the help of a cane to progress. If those with cane sliding down the hills, once they stop, they won''t be able to stand up.


    "¡­so, this discussion is pointless. Roy is right. We can''t ask everyone to save the world. They will fight, but for different reason. There''s nothing we can do even if we are the kings," old man Henry said.


    "If the enemy is strong, we need to be stronger? That''s sound simple. But there''s really nothing else we can do," Albert said.


    "See? Now that the meeting is over, there''s other dishes that I haven''t tasted yet. Right now, my motivation is to eat every single dish at least once. Now, if you''ll excuse me. I have food to eat," I said as I was about to leave.


    "Ah, Roy! Wait!" Albert called.


    "What is it?"


    "I also want to eat. Especially the chocte cake that you hide. Bring it back to the table," Albert said.


    "How did you know!?"


    "I have been aiming at it from the start. Of course I know when it''s missing from the feast," Albert said.


    I thought Ka told him about it.


    "Then, I want something in exchange," I said.


    "No. Cake, or there won''t be any more feast for you in the future," Albert threatened me.


    "¡­I hate you."


    "Nothing you can do about it."


    With no choice, I grabbed the cake from my room and put it on the table with other dishes. The smell of the chocte even raises the appetite of the werewolves who loves meat.


    At least I need to get the biggest slice.

 Chapter 436 - Drowned Guests

    The feast continued while the kings are still discussing about something. Helping each other with making a motivational speech, I guess?


    For me, I don''t need it. Kill the enemy so I can gain my wish of peace.


    The enemy might be stronger than even master level mage. But if it''s the person who killed all Aura users in the past because he''s thinking that Aura user can defeat him, I might be able to kill him. Though that will be difficult.


    Just being able to cut through magic might not be enough. I might need other thing as well. Even Javier''s master can only seal the guy.


    Let''s see what I can do. I can shoot him, sh him, stab him, crush him, but I still need other things. My magic is too weak, so the best thing I can ask is for other to get stronger. Luckily, Ang has grown much stronger than anyone I ever fought.


    Oh, right. I promised her for a fight. Well, I''ll do it next time.


    Also, seeing how powerful the monsters in this world, the cult might have quite a lot of powerful tamers. That way, it''s not impossible for them to tame a dragon. Maybe even Alejandro.


    For now, eating is the most important thing.


    Let''s forget about difficult things for today, and eat to my heart content¡­


    "Wait, where are the meat!? Where are they!?" I shouted and gaining everyone''s attention.


    "There are meats, and there are werewolves. Where do you think they could be?" Kron said while biting on a steak.


    "As I thought, I shouldn''t have joining that discussion. Werewolves! Don''t you dare touch the cakes!"


    This might be stingy for me to act like this and ordered the werewolves something stupid, but I won''t let them eat the cakes since they have eaten all the meat.


    "Don''t worry. We''re full," Jack said while patting his own belly.


    What about the angels? What are they eating?


    Well, they seem to not be the kind like werewolves that grabbed everything that fits into their mouth. They gracefully only eat what they want, as much as they can fill their stomach, and done just after that.


    For once, I like the angels over the werewolves.


    As for the elves, I can''t see the difference between them and goats as they are eating green vegetables.


    Other than eating, there are many kids and family having fun entering the artificialke. Since we built thatke, there hasn''t been any fishes inside there. And other than the middle part which is so deep, it should be fine if the kids are not going there.


    The kids are ying peacefully. Well, actually no. When kids are ying, there''s no doubt that it will be noisy. And it''s amazing to see kids from different races ying together.


    The children of the elves were afraid of going too deep into the water. They can only go as deep as their ankles. They are coward just like their parents.


    The children of the angels don''t want to get wet. They are flying above theke.


    The children of the werewolves are y fighting in the deeper part of theke.


    The children of humans¡­ being led by Daniel, they are pranking the children of other races. Sshing water to the angels that don''t want to get wet, pulling the elves deeper into theke, andughing at the werewolves.


    Daniel is being taught well by me.


    "Daniel is growing to be an evil child. How do you think about it?" Sophie asked me as I was eating while watching the kids.


    "I taught him well," I said proudly.


    "Only you would say that. By the way, have you told Ang when and where you two will fight?" Sophie asked.


    "Not yet. Ang had told me that she wants at least a week in Monsters World to get used to her power. I think the soonest we can fight is next week," I replied.


    While we''re chatting, Daniel is running over here while shouting something.


    "Roy! There''s something under theke!"


    "There''s no way that anything could be there. We built theke, and I have seen it many times that there are no other things under there. There''s not even a fish. Only some water nts that was nted by the elves. Maybe that''s what it is," I said.


    Although I said that, I haven''t used my Divine Vision at all since I was too focused on eating. There''s no need to use it when I''m having fun seeing things normally.


    "Roy! There''s something in theke!"


    This time, the one who shouted was Sara. She has a good pair of eyes, so this time, I believed it and used my Divine Eyes to see what''s wrong.


    There''s shouldn''t be anything in theke, right?


    Wait, there are really something inside theke! There are several corpses inside theke!


    "Tell Albert that the vampires are here," I said to Sophie and the others nearby.


    "They''re here? Should we prepare to fight?" Sara asked as she grabbed her rifle. She always carried it with her ever since she received it.


    "No need. They are drowning and unconscious. Get all water mages here so they can get the water out of the vampires'' lungs," I said.


    Since there are kids inside theke, the water mage can''t use magic to get the drowned vampires out of theke. So, I asked the werewolves to grab them.


    I pointed at where the vampires are under the water, while the werewolves will dive and take them out of theke, to where the water mages are ready to get the water out of the lung. There are also some healers to heal the vampires just in case. Sophie is also there to massage their chests so they can start breathing again. Unless the vampires have drowned for too long, they should be able to recover.


    Everyone was wondering about the vampires. Especially the family and friends of those who participated in the battle.


    Why are they back again? And most importantly, why are they drowned?


    "Look! That''s the female vampire from before," Shelia said as she pointed at a familiar female vampire that Albert let go. She''s the Vampire Duke, so she should be the one with the highest rank.


    "What happened here?" Albert and the others have arrived, and confused as they see the situation.


    "Well, the vampires are here. Not in a way that any one of us would expect. They are drowned and carried by the river to theke," I said.


    "Are they dead?" Albert asked.


    "I don''t think so. Not yet anyway. If they are killed before they are drowned, there''s no way to revive them. But if they are just drowned, it''s possible for them to survive. Don''t you know? I''m a doctor," I said proudly.


    "But how could this happen?" Albert asked.


    "I don''t know. For now, I will help the others to revive those drowned vampires first. But what I do know is that¡­ vampires can''t float," I said as I massaged the chest of the female Vampire Duke to make here back to live after Carmen get the water out of her lung.


    Yes, I picked her first even though there are other vampires who had their lung cleared out of the water.


    The girls aren''t looking at me kindly, but this vampire should be the one whom we can trust the most. At least she''s the only one that Albert has meet and talked with. So, she must be the first toe back to live.


    Just a few seconds after massaging her chest, her heart has beating again. I wish her heart won''t beat for a few more minutes. But if that''s the case, I don''t know how to exin it to the girls.


    Though after the Vampire Duke has returned back to life, other female vampires are being treated by the girls. Sigh¡­ I guess I can just let the others to do it since everyone needs to learn first aid.


    "Is she waking up?" Albert asked.


    "Soon. With us nearby, they won''t be able to do much. But let''s get the kids and nonbatant away from here. Elves! Get the kids to y around in the trees!" I told Tia and the other elves to take care of the kids.


    Since they are kids, they will love tree house. That''s what I am thinking. And I was right as the children of the elves started showing off about their tree houses to kids of other races. Daniel seems to be the one who is excited the most. I guess I''ll try building er.


    "Just what could have happened?" Lynn asked.


    "I don''t know. But since there are no obvious wound from anything, I don''t think that they are fighting something. Maybe water is their weakness? They can''t swim. Or maybe they loss a lot of blood to survive underwater. I know for one that even the Vampire King could survive in outer space just by using energy from the blood he consumed. Since they might want to drink some blood, everyone needs to keep their distance from the vampires. They might attack us as soon as they woke up," I said.


    If that''s the case, then what is it that cause them to use a lot of blood before they were drowned? And what were they doing upstream?


    I guess we can only wait until they are awake.

 Chapter 437 - Going Upstream For Investigation

    "So, what should we do with the vampires? Do we kill them?" Graham asked.


    "Idiot. If we''re going to kill them, we don''t need to rescue them in the first ce. Put them in a cell for now, and wait until they wake up," I said.


    "But we don''t have a prison cell," Graham said.


    "But we can build it. Ask Celestine, Ka, or Ang to build one. Also, just in case, put them in separate cell so they won''t be able to drink each other''s blood. Meanwhile, you and Shelia wille with me," I said.


    "We''re going somewhere?" Graham asked again.


    "We will be looking for any clues of how the vampires ended up drowning to this ce. If there are any monsters over there, we will kill them. It will be dangerous if somehow, a powerful monster is nesting nearby," I said.


    Maybe, after being scared of Andro''s intimidation, there''s a monster who didn''t escape too far, but instead, it is staying nearby and built a nest. If it''s a smart one, I can threaten it to bring Andro back here if it will cause trouble. And if it''s a weak monster, I can just kill it. Though I doubt a weak monster can drown dozens of vampires.


    We have fished out about thirty-five vampires including the female Vampire Duke. As for the rest, I don''t know if there are any Vampire Marques or other lords. But I doubt they will cause trouble to us since they have lost.


    Even when some of them drank the blood of their own kind and be many times stronger, they still lost against us.


    Whoever drowned them into the river won''t be any average monster.


    "Wait, I''ming as well!" Ang said as she flies and follow me.


    With this, we have four people checking on the area. And we are among the strongest of everyone here. Won''t the defense of this ce be much weaker?


    Since we have several other expert level mages, I think they can protect themselves if the vampires are trying to attack, or if there''s other monsters attacking. It should be fine, but won''t it be too much if we''re fighting the enemy upstream?


    Well, the sooner we stop the danger, the better it is.


    So, we decided to have two of us run on foot, while the other two flying. The two running are obviously Shelia and I, while those who are flying are Ang and Graham.


    Although I can see the surrounding with Divine Vision, it''s still better if there are other people watching with me. Especially since Shelia''s sense of smell can reach even further than what my eyes can see. She can even find something that I can''t see. Like the remaining smell of whatever attacking the vampires, and where they went. I hope that''s the case so we can find them and kill them right away.


    Since we built the river quite long, it''s still a bit distance from theke. But we can cover that distance in a short moment.


    The four of us were moving at the same speed originally, but when Ang speed up little by little, the rest of us refuse to lose and raise our speed as well. Even Shelia transformed into her wolf form, which is much faster than her werewolf form.


    Graham is thest one even when he has all twelve wings out. In front of him is Shelia and I, with me in front of her just a little bit. And with quite a distance, Ang is in the first ce.


    After breaking through, she''s the fastest among us. Though not as fast as Spot, her speed is already amazing. She''s flying while being boosted with fire magic as well.


    "Stop!"


    I told everyone to stop as soon as I see multiple trails of footsteps. Probably, this is where the vampires are drowned. Though I didn''t see any monsters nearby.


    "Is this where they were drowned?" Ang asked.


    "Probably. There are multiple foot steps going into the river, but never leaving the river. Though there are some who didn''t even get close to the river," I said.


    "Sniff¡­ I smell the vampires we captured. But there are other scents that is both familiar and unfamiliar as well. Probably, the ones who did it are other vampires," Shelia said.


    "Ang, Graham, look around and see if you can find anything," I ordered the two of them.


    They both fly away leaving only Shelia and I behind.


    "Do you smell anything else?" I asked Shelia.


    "Just vampires. They smell like blood," she replied.


    Let''s check on the area first before returning. I don''t think we should chase after the attacking vampires. But as long as we know where they wereing from, we can go there anytime we want.


    "Roy, I found where the trails end. The vampires must have been flying," Ang said as soon as she returned with Graham.


    "As long as we know the general direction, it''s fine. We can also ask the vampires we caught the location of the vampires," I said.


    "¡­Master, you are thinking of the vampires we caught like fishes," Graham said.


    "I am. They areing from the water after all. Now, they don''t have a ce to return to. I think that''s the reason why Albert wanted to meet them. He must be preparing a ce for the vampires to live," I said.


    "Really? Won''t they stay in the vige along with the other monsters?" Ang asked.


    "I don''t think that''s the case. Especially after they fought with us. If the others are not a species that we have fought before, it''s still fine. But now that we have fought, there is hatred between us. My guess is that Albert will bring them into our world and live among humans," I said.


    After guessing Albert''s intention, the four of us racing back to the vige. This time, as Graham and Shelia prepared from the start, the standing this time is different.


    The first ce is Ang, second is Shelia, and third is Graham. That''s what they think as they race back to the vige.


    ¡­they forgot that I can use portal and travel there instantly. So, I waited for the three to return after grabbing some fruits. The fruits that the elves are growing are sweeter than those farmed by humans. I like them.


    And when the three returned, they are shocked to see that I am already waiting for them. and then they remembered that I can use portal.


    "¡­this is why Daniel and the kids don''t like to y with you. You are cheating," Ang said.


    "It''s not cheating. There''s no rule in ying after all," I replied.


    Though when Daniel said he didn''t want to y with me because I cheated, my heart was shattered. It took me a while until I fixed my broken heart.


    I guess it''s time to report to Albert. He''s with the other kings right now.


    "Yo. I have returned," I greeted the kings.


    "How is it?" Albert asked.


    "There were footsteps. And Shelia smelled the scent of vampires other than the vampires we caught. Seems like that Vampire Queen or her army is fighting them near the river," I said.


    "And when they drowned, they disappear? Why?" Albert asked.


    "Don''t know. Probably because they know vampires are creatures that can''t swim."


    "Do you really think that the vampires can''t swim?" Albert asked.


    "We can ask them once they wake up. I bet they will say that they can''t swim. They should be able to survive underwater, but they sink like a rock underwater. Do you want to bet?" I asked.


    "¡­no thanks. You''re rich, and you''re asking a king for a bet. I don''t know how much money you will ask for betting," he replied.


    There goes my chance to get more money.


    But still, do I really think that vampires can''t swim? Maybe if they learned it, they can swim. But seeing so many of them drowned and get carried over here, I want to believe that they can''t swim.


    After all, it''s funny to see a species that cause us quite a trouble to have such obvious weakness. And if they really can''t swim, just Carmen alone is enough to defeat all of them.


    Which mean, just in case the Vampire Queen is attacking us, we can just ask Carmen alone to fight the Vampire Queen and her army.


    "So, you know where the enemy ising from?" Albert asked.


    "I think I can guess the general direction. But I need to go there first to confirm it. And we can just ask the vampires soon," I said.


    We''re right in front of the cell of the Vampire Duke while enjoying the feast. And I know that this female vampire is already awake and pretending to be sleeping. She must be thinking that she''s in the worst situation since she''s being imprisoned.


    Since she was drowned, let''s wake her up by sshing water on her face. Well, it''s more like pouring instead of sshing.


    "Cough! What are you doing!?" the vampire shouted.


    "Since you have been awake for a while already, you must have noticed that we''re going to interrogate you, right? You will answer our question or I will drown you all into theke."


    Let''s start the conversation as joyful as possible by threatening the vampire.. It is joyful to me at least.

 Chapter 438 - How They Drowned

    "You''re evil," The vampire said after I poured water on her.


    "If you are wondering how I killed your king, you just found the answer. Now, we will ask you questions and you will answer everything truthfully. Or I will ask our water mage to drown you all. You and every vampire that we fished out of theke," I threatened her again.


    "Please don''t! Vampires can''t swim! We can stay long enough underwater using blood as our energy, but we can''t swim! If you do that while we are vulnerable, we will die!" the vampire shouted.


    "Then you should answer everything truthfully."


    More importantly, I was right that the vampires can''t swim. If only Albert would bet on it, I would get some money. But I guess it''s fine as well this way.


    But howe vampires can''t swim? Let''s see their bodies.


    Hmm? They are far weaker than before. They must have used all the blood they have to survive underwater.


    If I have to guess, when they start drinking blood, the blood they drunk will be energy for their body. And that will make bones and muscles denser and more solid. Like steel. Which makes them too heavy to be underwater and unable to float. They can only sink into the water.


    And but once they used all the blood as energy, their bones and muscle will return back to normal and they should be able to float.


    Well, that''s just my guess. Whether it''s true or not, I can only know about it once I experimented on the vampires. Though even if I do that, I doubt the result will be something useful for us human. And it''s not like they are our ally, so I don''t need to help them.


    Maybe I should start doing experiment on the monsters around me. The werewolves, the angels, and the elves. That way, if there''s something wrong with them, I can help.


    I''ll just do that when I''m free. Seems like I will be busy from now on. After all, it will be the time to raid theb soon.


    "I''ll be the one asking questions since she''s afraid of Roy. Now, can you tell me how you were drowned?" Albert asked.


    Well, even if it''s anyone else asking, he can still tell if she spoke the truth or not. But if she believes that a lie is the truth, Albert''s lie detection skill won''t activate. So, unless she was somehow brainwashed by someone, Albert''s lie detection skill can be trusted.


    "¡­we were being chased by the Vampire Queen''s army all the way back here. We tried to go upstream, but there are more Vampire Dukes among them, while we only have one Vampire Duke, me. And since all of us have used a lot of blood, we don''t have the energy to escape or fight back, so we dive into the river hoping that we can survive long enough until they leave," the vampire said.


    "By the way, can you swim if you hadn''t drunk any blood at all?" I asked.


    "We can float, but as we mostly used blood as our energy, we won''t be able to move anyway," she replied.


    I guess I''m right that they can float after using up the blood they had consumed.


    So, they must be waiting underwater for the vampires chasing after them to leave, but the vampires under the Vampire Queen waited for them long enough until they used up all the consumed blood, and started floating and being carried by the torrent. After that, the vampires chasing after them left while thinking that this group of vampires will die anyway.


    Albert also seems like he figured out about it as well. So, they must have been entered the river for a while for them to used up all their consumed blood. How long was it until they consumed everything?


    "What should we call you?" Albert asked the female Vampire Duke.


    "¡­you can call me Carrie," the vampire said.


    "Alright, Carrie. Tell me everything ever since you left the battle against us," Albert said.


    And then, the vampire told us what she and the remaining vampires from the army experienced after leaving the battle.


    As someone with the highest status, she led the vampires back to where they were before attacking us. To their hometown before they decided to move after feeling Ang''s process of breaking through. They wanted to live close to where such powerful magic ising from.


    Unfortunately, the Vampire Queen''s army has taken that ce from them. So, Carrie and the rest had no choice but to escape unless they want to fight with the Vampire Queen. Since their king has died, Carrie had no way of victory.


    And then, the enemy vampires started chasing after Carrie and the others. Since they are outnumbered, and has used a lot of consumed blood on the battle against us, the only route they can go is back here.


    Carrie managed to kill one Vampire Duke, but there are too many enemies and they don''t want to drink the blood of other vampires even if they are the blood of their enemies. After witnessing what happened with their former allies in the battle with us, they don''t dare to do it. That''s why they choose to keep escaping, until they are cornered and exhausted all their energy.


    They arrived at the artificial river we created, and gambled with their own lives hoping that they can survive by diving into the river. And that''s how they ended up getting fished out by us.


    "¡­you have no ce to return in the end. Thinking of conquering a new ce to call home, you had no ce to return to in the end. That''s stupid," Albert said.


    "¡­what will you do to us?" Carrie asked.


    "First, I want to ask you about the Vampire Queen. How did two sides ended up fighting each other? If possible, I want to cooperate with the Vampire Queen instead," Albert said.


    Cooperate with the Vampire Queen? I guess since we have a lot of monsters with us, he''s thinking of getting monsters to help him. But this time, it''s for him and not for me.


    But they are vampires. How will Albert convince them to not attack humans?


    "¡­I don''t know. As for us Vampire Dukes, we picked the side of our king just because we knew him the longest. But how long we know him doesn''t matter in the end when we truly don''t know the real him," Carrie said.


    "I guess I will need to meet the Vampire Queen then," Albert said casually.


    "Wait, you''re not going to force me to go there with you, right?" I asked Albert.


    "No."


    "That''s good."


    "But you will voluntarily help me with it. For example, I will tell my chef to teach Lina the recipes of the cakes we¡ª"


    "I''m in! Let''s go!"


    I have to choose between food, or avoiding battle. In the end, I picked food. But it doesn''t mean that I''m confident that I can win the battle.


    ¡­alright, I''m actually really confident that I can win. Especially since we can ask expert level mages to help, and it seems that the Vampire Queen is not someone who tells her subordinate to drink the blood of their own kind.


    And also, I could even kill the Vampire King who had strengthened his power after drinking the blood of a Vampire Duke.


    And with the Blobby under the sea, I can use portal to sink all the vampires. They can''t swim anyway. I can just ask Carmen toe with us. Or even if it''s just weaker water mages who works for Albert, it should be fine.


    "Our goal is not to fight them. Try to befriend them instead," Albert said.


    "You think that''s possible if you take these vampires in?"


    I pointed at Carrie and the other vampires in the cages. Some of them have woke up and looked at us.


    "Let me do the thinking. You don''t need to do anything. Hopefully."


    This time, Albert asked Ka to release Carrie from the cage. Since it won''t be a problem because we are here, she did it.


    "So, I have a proposition to you. Not just you, but all the vampires here. All thirty-five vampires that we found here. Would you like to live in my world?" Albert asked.


    "¡­what?"


    "You might not know about this, but we are from different world. We call this world as Monsters World, and our world as humans world. We cane here because a summoner can use portal to transfer between two worlds. And you know the strongest summoner here," Albert said as he pointed at me.


    "¡­what do we get from living in your world?" Carrie asked.


    "Chance of survival. At least as long as you obey the rule, you can live however you want," Albert said.


    "¡­let me talk with the other first," Carrie said.


    "Sure. Take your time," Albert said.


    Is he so free nowadays? Seems like he didn''t do much these past few days. Or maybe he had done everything yesterday so he can have several days off.


    Well, if the vampires agree to live in our world, as long as they don''t cause trouble for us, I won''t have to be a vampire hunter.


    ¡­but vampire hunter does sound cool.


    I''ll just leave the negotiation to Albert.

 Chapter 439 - Who Want To Come?

    During Albert''s talk with Carrie, all the other vampires have awoken. And seeing us in front of them, they realized that the other vampires that attacked us have all been defeated.


    If I use the depressing gases on them, they might take their own lives.


    ¡­let''s not do that since Albert still needs something from them. But can they give it to Albert?


    I know what he wants. It''s the vampires'' loyalty. But that''s difficult to get. They are monsters after all.


    Maybe Albert will get a summoner or tamer to tame the vampires and make them their familiars. That should be possible to trust them then. But the chance of me bing a vampire hunter will be zero.


    Wait! I''m already a vampire hunter. I killed their strongest vampire. There''s no need to aim for that title anymore.


    Now that all of the vampires have awake, Ka opened their cages. We don''t need them anymore since they won''t attack us out of nowhere.


    They don''t have any spirits. Seems like everything is too much for them.


    Losing the battle, losing their hometown, and they have no home to return to.


    That''s what you get when you mess with me.


    Carrie brought all the vampires together to discuss about Albert''s idea. Although they hadn''t heard what Albert needed from them, they think it''s best to talk about it first.


    As for me, I''m about to return to eating. But Albert stopped me. At least Graham the archangel doesn''t eat much. Since I can''t go over to eat, I can just ask Graham to bring me the food here.


    Albert also asked someone to bring another person over. He told me that the one''sing is a summoner I taught before back in the training camp. I already forgot about them.


    He said that this guy has reached intermediate level, but he hadn''t made a decision of what monster he will make a contract with. I guess his next monster will be Carrie if the vampires agree.


    But would the vampires agree to have the Vampire Duke to be their leader and obey her? I don''t think so. They are not even vampires who obeys their king to drink the blood of their own kind.


    "You want us to live in their world?" one of the vampires asked Carrie.


    "It''s up to you. I''m not your king or queen. For me, I want to go somewhere safe. But I will need to ask the human king what he needs from us," Carrie said.


    "Since everyone is here, I''ll tell you what I want. I want you to live in my world, and be my soldier. I want your loyalty. I will give you a ce to live, and you will do as I say. There will be battleing soon in our world, and I will need as many helps as I can get. And if you don''t want to be under me, that''s fine. As long as you obey the rule of not drinking the blood of humans, you can stay in our world as much as possible. I will still pick some people that you are allowed to have their blood sucked out. But if you still choose to drink the blood of human other than those I allowed, I will have this Roy over here to find you and kill you. Since he''s the Werewolf King as well, he can have the werewolves under him to find your location by your smell," Albert said.


    So, I ended up as ckmailing material? Well, if they didn''t break the rule, I won''t have to do anything.


    "So, other than drinking blood of humans, we are free to do everything else?" Carrie asked.


    "Other than that, I will offer you, or anyone who is interested, to be a familiar for a summoner under me. Of course you can refuse it," Albert said.


    "¡­let us discuss it before answering," Carrie said.


    Now that Albert has told them what he wants, it''s up to the vampires to decide.


    "Roy, after this, we will be visiting the Vampire Queen," Albert said.


    "Yeah, sure. Let''s get everything done before I return you back home," I said.


    If I refuse, it will take longer until everything is over.


    After a while, Carrie and the vampires have finished their discussion. Though it''s not really a private discussion, so I can hear them clearly.


    "So, how is it?" Albert asked.


    "We will all live in your world. But we won''t follow you other than when we participating on the fight you talked about. Can you tell me about that fight first?" Carrie asked.


    "Well, simply put, it''s a much bigger scale than the battle between us. In fact, it''s something that will affect both worlds," Albert said. Then he exined about the cult, the fact that I''m from the future, and the fact that the cult will destroy everything.


    The vampires are too shocked to say anything. They just nkly stare at Albert or me. We just let them cool down for a bit.


    "¡­so, there will be war?" Carrie asked.


    "Yes," Albert replied.


    "And if you lose your world, they will attack us even if we don''t want to have anything to do with it?"


    "Yes again."


    "¡­I guess I have no choice but to go with you. Does everyone here with you know about it? Including the monsters?" Cassie asked again.


    "Yes. Though they are not under me. They are under Roy," Albert replied.


    "¡­we will go with you. I won''t make a contract with your summoner, but if there are any vampires who are interested, feel free to do so," Carrie said.


    "Sure. But I won''t ept you as the leader of the vampires. I know that some of the vampires won''t obey you. So, I will ask you all individually if you want to live in our world or not," Albert said.


    Yup. That''s Albert''s idea of finding someone he can trust.


    He instantly asked someone who is obviously doesn''t like the idea of being under human.


    "Sure. I will live in your world, and join your war," he said.


    Albert then looked at me, and pointed his thumb at the vampire who just answered. I guess he''s lying.


    And I quickly charged at the vampire, severed his arm with the de or Reizpear, and use it again to stab at his chest. Not deep enough to kill him.


    "You mustn''t lie, fanged fool," I said to the vampire.


    "Fanged fool? Don''t you know a better word for insult?" Albert asked.


    "I''m not good at making names," I said.


    "Sigh¡­ Anyway, if you don''t like it, just say so. I will only let those who speak the truth and can be trusted to live in my world. If you want to live there but don''t want to join the war, that''s fine. You can say that. But if you lie, well, this guy is a bad guy who made you kill your own kind. I doubt you can forget about him. Even if you didn''t see him killing your king, you saw him making you kill each other," Albert said.


    With that, the vampires became wary of their own word. As for the vampire I attacked as an example, he''s still alive. But he won''t be allowed to live in our world, so he will leave after this.


    After that, as he said, Albert started asking the vampires one by one. They are afraid of lying after witnessing what happened. Either that, or those who lie and said that they don''t want toe to our world is being ignored by Albert.


    In the end, there are just twelve vampires who wille, including Carrie.


    "Twelve? Well, that''s fine. As for the other twenty-three, you are free to leave. It''s fine if you won''t be together again, right?" Albert asked.


    "It''s fine. We have discussed it before. From now on, we will live for ourselves and not for anyone else. We will think about everything by ourselves," Carrie said.


    Yeah, I heard that when they were discussing about it.


    "Excuse me, but¡­ for us who doesn''t want to go to that world, is it fine if we stay in this vige?" one of the vampires asked.


    "Well, it''s up to you. But know this. Each race in this vige have their own leader. But all of them are under Roy. So, if you choose to stay in this vige, you agree to have Roy as your leader. And he''s much scarier than I am," Albert said.


    The vampire who asked no longer has the intention to stay in this vige anymore. Including those other vampires who want to stay.


    It''s great that we have more allies. Just twelve of them. And among those twelve, only five of them will be Albert''s soldier. Including Carrie.


    "Hmm¡­ just five, huh? Well, I will let you live in our world for a month as a test. All twelve of you will live with Roy and his friends for a month, and after that, you can decide what do you want to do," Albert said.


    ¡­so, I will be babysitting them?


    "Don''t worry. It''s not like he will stay with you at all time. And as long as none of you break the rule, he won''t do anything to you," Albert continued.


    Twelve vampires. Five of them will be soldiers or agents. That''s good enough.


    Next would be a meeting with the Vampire Queen. Will there be a fight?

 Chapter 440 - Leaving The Feast Early

    "So, does vampires only drink blood?" Albert asked Carrie.


    "¡­no. We can survive just by drinking blood alone, but we can still consume other meal just like other species. Though we prefer meat than vegetables," Carrie said.


    "Just like the werewolves, huh? Well, you are now free to join our feast. It''s a feast to celebrate our victory against you though. For those who doesn''t want to go to our world, you are free to go anywhere. But before you join the feast, I want to ask you where the Vampire Queen is if you don''t mind," Albert said.


    "You''re going to meet them?"


    "Yes. As long as they have no intention in attacking us, everything is fine. And if they want to live in our world, I will need to do some adjustment so your group won''t stay in the same ce as them," Albert said.


    Other than the remains of the Vampire King''s army, Carrie and the others here, Albert still wanted to get more vampires? Is he going to build a vampire city in our world?


    If there are too many vampires in our world, it will only bring more trouble since there''s no one who can control them.


    "Oh, and if there''s any of you who make a contract with our summoners or tamer, you have more freedom. As long as you obey your master. Which mean you are free to go anywhere, suck the blood of anyone with your master''s permission, and other stuffs. That''s up to you though. Now, tell me where the Vampire Queen is."


    Freedom? Isn''t that more like very? Well, I can''t say anything about it because I''m a summoner and he''s right.


    Even though I said that, I still gave them a lot of freedom. When Shelia or Graham want to explore our world or stay in their world, as long as they don''t give me trouble, it''s fine.


    Though Graham still can''t handle it when the girls are wearing slightly revealing outfits, so he rarely explores my world. I hope he''s used to it since I brought all the angels to live with the werewolves who only wore revealing outfits.


    Carrie told Albert the general direction of where their home that the Vampire Queen captured. She doesn''t know where the Vampire Queen is, but the vampires over there should know where she is. I guess that''s a start.


    "Alright, let''s go to where it is. Do you want toe as well?" Albert asked Carrie.


    "¡­can I refuse?" she asked.


    "Well, I guess you don''t want to meet them. Don''t cause any trouble here. Or maybe you can, but there are werewolves and angels here who are ready to fight you if you do anything. Roy, let''s go."


    "Sigh¡­ of course I can''t refuse it. What a pain. Spot! Come here!"


    I called out to Spot who is swimming in theke. He''s sleeping there. I guess even though it''s an artificialke, the water is good enough for a sea serpent to swim in.


    Spot quickly fly to where we are and asked us if we want to go somewhere.


    "Spot. I''m thinking of meeting the Vampire Queen. Will you help me go over there?" Albert asked.


    "Sure. Let''s go!" Spot said as he transformed into his original size.


    Obviously, Carmen wille with us. They are vampires who can''t swim. It''s best to have her with us in that case.


    So, it''s just us four. Spot who will bring us there, the king of a country, a queen of another country, and a plebian.


    The other must be thinking that it''s too tiring to be in a huge battle twice in a row, so they refuse toe. But are they alright with sending me who can cause trouble easily? I guess they have that much faith in me.


    The three of us ride on the top of Spot''s head. Spot didn''t hold back at all as he used his full speed. If I didn''t had Victoria to transform into a saddle for Albert to sit on, he will fall already and died a horrible death.


    With Spot''s speed, we can reach the location of Carrie''s former hometown in less than two hours. I guess that''s quite far. Even more when I feel that Spot''s speed has increased by a lot.


    "Spot, have you gotten faster?" I asked.


    "Oh, you noticed? Seems like going with you benefits me greatly. After helping you guys defeat so many enemies, my strength has grown so much more than before I joined you guys," Spot said happily.


    The stronger he became, the better it is for us.


    "That''s great. Keep up the good work," Albert praised the serpent.


    "Thanks. But I don''t think I can handle Alejandro''s intimidation yet. I want to be at least strong enough to guard myself from that," Spot said.


    I think he will be fine. If he keeps being around powerful monster like Andro, he will get used to it and won''t get intimidated easily by other simrly powerful monster.


    We''re finally at a ce where I can see Carrie''s old home. There are about a hundred humanoid being over there, which I assume that all of them are vampires.


    I remember how the Vampire King noticed me from far away, so if the Vampire Queen is here, she should be able to see me. But so far, there were no vampires in this ce that noticed us flying toward them.


    "That''s the ce she told us. But I don''t think the Vampire Queen is here. Should we go greet them?" I asked Albert.


    "Yes. Although it''s quite far, we are still neighbor. There aren''t any other viges or nests that we passed by, right? Let''s greet them," Albert said.


    Greeting our neighbor without any preparation. I hope they are not someone who are easily get mad. Or I might end up killing them all.


    Well, maybe not me. But Carmen can. Though I can also summon a lot of water just by opening a portal underwater. But I can''t control it.


    Maybe I can just summon water by portal, and let Carmen control the water. That way, she doesn''t have to use a lot of magic.


    "Spot, let''s make sure everyone can see you before wended in front of them," I said.


    "Sure."


    Then, Spot fly above them in a speed slow enough for everyone so they can see us. And with his size, Spot''s appearance is obvious as he can block the sun from reaching them. It''s always funny to see people reacting to Spot''s appearance. Even if they are vampires.


    After flying above them, wended in an open space big enough for Spot''s real size tond, before he transformed into his small size while we jumped from him.


    "Nice to meet you all, neighbors! May I ask who among you is the leader of this vige if this ce can be considered as one?" Albert said politely.


    "¡­we have three dukes in this ce. You can talk to us," someone stepped forward with two other men behind him.


    "So, you are all Vampire Dukes? Well, I''m here to negotiate for a peace treaty between us. We''re¡­ how far are we from the vige?" Albert asked me.


    "Hmm¡­ the previous Vampire King''s army reached us after more than a week of travelling on foot. Let''s say ten days on foot. But if they fly as fast as possible, the vampires can reach our vige in just a few hours," I said.


    "Okay. We''re about ten days away from this ce. Since I don''t want to have any problem between us, so I want to ask for a peace treaty. May I ask where the Vampire Queen is?" Albert asked.


    "You! You said about the Vampire King before! What''s your rtionship with him!?" one of the dukes asked me.


    "I''m the one who killed him after he and his army trying to attack us. Do you want to test it?" I threatened the vampires.


    "Roy, we''re here not to make any more enemies. Let me be the one talking," Albert stopped me from stepping forward.


    I have to say that we are good partner. He knows that I''m just acting to make them afraid. He asked me toe here just for that reason. This way, the negotiation will be over sooner.


    "Well, if you know the Vampire King, you should have known that they left this ce and trying to conquer another ce, which is the ce we absolutely have to protect. So, we killed most of the attacking vampires. To make sure that there won''t be any vampires trying to fight us anymore, I''m here to negotiate with the Vampire Queen. Please tell me where she is," Albert said.


    A king must be able to act. That''s what he told me when we were drinking together in the past. And the king must be able to act really well that no one can tell that he''s just acting.


    My acting skill is still worse than Albert''s, but after apanying him several times, I can say that my acting skill has improved. Maybe other than being a circus clown, I can act in a y as well.


    Maybe I should y something funny. I''ll ask Victoria if she knows any goodedy drama from her world that I can y well.


    "¡­"


    The three Vampire Dukes discussed it with themselves. Will they show us where the Vampire Queen is? I hope so. I also don''t want to fight unnecessary battle.


    If we can be at peace with the vampires, we don''t have to worry about them anymore.

 Chapter 441 - Take Me To Your Leader

    Chapter 441 ¨C Take Me To Your Leader


    The three Vampire Dukes discussed about letting us meet the Vampire Queen. They also asked for other vampires'' opinions. I can hear them talking from here.


    "So, should we tell them where our queen is?" Vampire Duke #1 asked the others.


    "No. They can''t be trusted. Even if what they say is the truth, they are still someone who killed vampires," Vampire Duke #2 said.


    "But if that''s the case, we are powerless against them. What if we ended up provoking them and they started aiming for our queen''s life?" Vampire Duke #3 said.


    That''s basically what they are discussing. We just stand here while waiting for the conclusion of their discussion.


    I get Victoria to creates clones of herself, and transform them into chairs so we can take a seat. And to show them that I''m the one in charge, my seat is a throne while the other two are just sitting on normal chairs.


    "¡­we have a king and a queen here, but you''re the one sitting on a throne?" Albert asked.


    "Yes. I always love it when I feel superior to you," I replied.


    While waiting until the vampires are finished their discussion, Albert and I just chatted randomly like we usually do. As for Carmen, she watched us with interest and a smile. Sheughed when we started making jokes on each other.


    "Haha. You too are so funny. I wish you two to keep being good friends to Fabio and my children," Carmen said.


    "That depend on his personality," I replied honestly, which deserves me a p by Albert.


    "He''s still the future King of Arturo. Once we retrieve Arturo back, Harold will return as the king temporarily. No one wants a king who got easily captured and swapped. We will make it so it''s Fabio who is the one in charge of¡­ the rebellion. The citizens will support him if he be the king that way. Whatever his personality is, you should get along with him," Albert said.


    Carmen justughed at us. Well, Fabio is a good guy. As long as he keeps being himself, I don''t mind being friends with him.


    After a while, the vampires have finished their discussion and approached us.


    Since we''re trying to be polite, I had no choice but to turn my throne into a normal chair. Then, I prepared more chairs for them to sit on.


    "¡­we''ll just talk while standing," Vampire Duke #2 said.


    "Okay. So, what''s the result?" I asked.


    "First, can you show us the proof that you are not hostile at us?" Vampire Duke #1 asked. I guess he''s the wisest one among the three Dukes.


    "How?" Albert quickly stopped me from speaking and interrupted.


    I was about to say that it''s because I haven''t killed anyone there, but I guess that''s the wrong answer.


    "Just tell us how you find this ce," Vampire Duke #3 said.


    "Oh, that. The vampires who returned here after losing against us were chased by you guys, right? To the point they drowned themselves? Well, they are still alive. About thirty of them. And I asked the only Vampire Duke among them. She told me about the Vampire Queen. So, before the same thing happened again, we want to make peace with you," Albert exined.


    "They are still alive!? Kill them!" Duke #2 said.


    "Can''t do that. Twelve of them decided to live in our world. They will be under me from now on. As for the rest, they will live freely in this world. You can hunt them if you want," Albert said.


    "Your world?"


    "We are humans from our world. And we have a vige over here which has monsters of three races living there. They are the werewolves, the elves, and the angels. The leader of the angels is his familiar, and he''s also the Werewolf King because he defeated the previous Werewolf King," Albert said while pointing at me.


    "This guy is the Werewolf King? You must be joking."


    The Duke #2 doesn''t seem to like me and provoked me. For now, I won''t fight him. I''ll try to keep my mind calm with calming gas. Let''s ignore him as well.


    "¡­don''t they use to say that human blood is delicious? Should we just kill them and drink their blood?" Duke #3 whispered to the other vampires.


    Well, that''s not something that I can ignore.


    "Which part of me stronger than the Vampire King who has drunk the blood of his own kind don''t you understand? You want to kill us and drink our blood? Are you willing to let everyone here die for your gluttony?" I infuse my Aura to my word so I can intimidate them. And as expected, the three of them freeze in fear. They won''t dare to say anything about killing us again.


    "Roy, enough. Don''t pressure them," Albert said.


    I stopped my intimidation and stared at the three. While the other vampires behind them who feels my intimidation are unable to look at me.


    "You are frozen just by sheer pressure. We''re here to negotiate. Show us where the Queen is, or not," I said.


    "I-I''m sorry, but¡­" Duke #1 stopped his words.


    "But you can''t just let us meet the queen? That''s fine. Tell us how we can meet her then. But if you are trying to pick a fight, I''m ready," I said.


    I think that''s enough of my performance. Next is up to Albert.


    "We won''t kill any vampires who won''t hurt us," Albert said.


    "¡­will you wait for us while we talk to our queen?"


    "How long does it take to go to her ce?" Albert asked.


    "If we go by flying as fast as we can, we can get there in a day," Duke #1 replied.


    That''s about as far as this ce from the vige. On foot, it''s more than a week. But when they retreated and tried to return here, it''s not even a day when they arrive. Though in the end, they retreated back to the artificial river in one night. I guess they''re pretty fast.


    "I''m a busy man, so I can''t wait until tomorrow. And it''s easier if we just follow you back to your queen''s ce," Albert said.


    "That¡­"


    "Can the Vampire Queen read? Wait, I don''t think that''s the case. If only she could read, then we can just ask you to deliver a letter from us to schedule a meeting. It''s also our fault toe here uninvited. Hmm¡­ what to do?"


    If it''s only to meet the Vampire Queen, we should be able to get their permission easily. But we came here and told them that we are strong enough to fight against an entire vampire army and killed the Vampire King. They are hesitant to let someone that powerful to meet their queen. These guys are amazing for being so loyal to their queen. But if they ended up making enemy out of us, they will be med if we ended up killing their queen.


    "How about this. I brought two humans here, who are more than capable of killing all the vampires here. And one of them is a powerful water mage who can summons water. The fact that we didn''t drown you all right away meant that we want to negotiate. We know from the vampires we rescued that you can''t swim. So, if someone on that side use you of disloyalty and brought us to them, you can say that you are being ckmailed. Or is it that you want to see if we can drown you all first?"


    Of course it wille to this. ckmailing. Let''s threaten them by saying what we can do to kill them to make them do what we want. But Albert said it in a polite way.


    ¡­does it make any difference if ckmailing is done politely or not?


    "Don''t worry. We really want peace. Even more, we can also bring benefits to each other if your queen agrees with this peace treaty," Albert said.


    "To hell with that! Now, you started ckmailing us! We won''t let youe close to our queen no matter what!" the Duke #2 shouted and started charging at us.


    He''s quite fast. But that''s as expected of a Vampire Duke. Still, he''s no match for me.


    Just as his hand about to grab Albert''s neck, I quickly grabbed his neck and twisted it. Not just that, I also use some strength to remove the head from the neck.


    And with just one move, one of the strongest vampires here got defeated easily.


    "I know you won''t die from this. You have enough blood to recover your head. Your weakness is your heart. And I can easily kill all of you if I want to," I said.


    As I thought. The vampire whose head was removed, started growing a head from the body. I don''t know how, but he shouldn''t be able to live anymore once his brain is disconnected from the body. But the vampire easily grows a head, including the brain as well.


    As long as the heart is not destroyed, they are practically immortal.


    "¡­we''ll take you to our queen. Please don''t kill us," Duke #1 said.


    Now, that''s easy. But it took a while.. Well, it''s time to do more travelling then.

 Chapter 442 - Shes Similar To Our Ghost

    Chapter 442 ¨C She¡¯s Simr To Our Ghost


    "Alright, get on. It will be faster this way," I said as Spot transformed back to his original size.


    The three Vampire Dukes looked at each other and decided to have the Duke #1 to be the one guiding us to the queen.


    Although he was scared at first, he carefully jumped on top of Spot''s head and take a seat on the Blobbyseats I prepared. It''s so that other people than me won''t fall over. And I just sat on Spot''s head cross-legged without sitting on Blobbyseat. I don''t need to.


    While being watched by the other vampires, Spot started to move as he fly to the sky. The unprepared Duke #1 screamed because of the speed, but got used to it soon after.


    Since I put Air Barrier around us, we can still talk with each other despite the speed.


    "So, which way is your queen''s home?" I asked the Vampire Duke.


    "We''re going the opposite way!"


    The Vampire Duke, still unused to the speed, think that he needs to raise his voice. Well, he might have gotten used to moving at high speed, so he unconsciously raises his voice. It''s normal for those who have used to such speed, without putting air or wind barrier around them to speak loudly. Because of the wind pressure is too strong for sound to travel.


    "You can just talk normally. I''m using magic so we can do that. Spot! Turn around! We''re going the wrong way!" I shouted. Just after I told someone that he doesn''t need to shout.


    "Oh, okay! How far is that ce?" Spot asked.


    We looked at the vampire to ask the distance from here to the queen''s location.


    "¡­it should be a five days travel on foot. So¡­"


    "One hour it is. Spot, let''s finish this soon so we can go home faster," I said.


    "Okay!"


    Spot increased his speed even further. With this, it won''t be a problem for us to reach the queen in just one hour.


    "So, how was your queen like?" Albert asked the vampire to get to know who we will meet.


    "She''s the most beautiful vampire in the world," the vampire said as if he''s singing praises for his queen.


    "I mean her personality," Albert said.


    "Her personality is as good as her appearance," the vampire said.


    ¡­alright, he''s gone. Seems like this Vampire Queen can entrap other vampires this much. This is no longer loyalty to the queen. It''s worship to the queen instead.


    "Does she have children? The Vampire King has a son that we killed, so I don''t want to make the same mistake to kill her family before meeting her like when I met the Vampire King," I said.


    "Anyone who bes our queen''s husband will be killed by me and all the male vampires! Though if she makes all of us as her lovers, it will be fine," the vampire said.


    ¡­I feel like I''m familiar with the story. About a seductress who seduces men to be her harem. She ended up bing a ghost though.


    So, this one is a Vampire Queen with power to seduce the male vampires? Is she some kind of hybrid between a vampire and a subus? Maybe I can let Sonia to help us negotiate with the Vampire Queen because they are simr.


    "Then, what about the female vampires?" Albert asked. Seems like he noticed the simrity between the Vampire Queen and our ghost.


    "They respected her for being able to stand above the male vampires," the vampire said.


    So, the male vampires love her and the female vampires respect her? Then, what is the reason for the feud between the Vampire King and the Vampire Queen?


    "How did you and the Vampire King''s group ended up fighting each other," Albert asked.


    "I don''t know how it started, but there''s a disagreement between him and our queen which made him, along with those who follow him, to leave this ce. The disagreement turned into hatred and we started killing each other," the vampire said.


    That''s it? I guess he doesn''t know everything.


    But still, if the Vampire Queen is someone who can use charm magic like Sonia, it will be dangerous to meet her without preparation. For me, I once dispelled Sonia''s charm right away on our first-time meeting. It''s thanks to my Aura. But for Albert, it will be difficult.


    "Albert, I''ll take you back for now. How about you get lovey-dovey with Marie first so you won''t get charmed by the Vampire Queen? Don''t do it too much since I''ll be opening a portal to you once we can talk peacefully," I said to Albert.


    "I also don''t want to have you watch us. I''ll wait with her then. Don''t forget to call Sonia," Albert said.


    In truth, after I started thinking that the Vampire Queen might be able to use charm magic, O already called for her and she''s already in invisible state. To keep her as a secret from the Vampire Duke who is guiding us.


    "I won''t. She''s busy," I said, but I still pointed at her location behind me with my thumb so Albert and Carmen know that Sonia is here. Though I don''t know if Carmen knows about Sonia''s charm magic or not.


    Noticing that Sonia is already there, Albert nodded. Then, I opened a portal back to the vige where the feast hasn''t ended yet and transport Albert back while grabbing the freshly prepared meal. Seems like Lina and the other chefs keep cooking even in the middle of a feast. At least I can enjoy the dishes I missed.


    I walked to Carmen and told her about Sonia and the possibility of the Vampire Queen having charm magic.


    "It doesn''t work on women?" Carmen asked.


    "I don''t know. But back then, when I first purchased the haunted house Sonia is in, none of the girls are affected. Are you going to meet her?" I asked her.


    "I will stay. It will be bad if she has stronger charm magic than Sonia and you got charmed. At least I will be there," Carmen said.


    She''s right that rather than Albert, it will be more dangerous if I''m the one who get charmed. But I have Victoria with me.


    She''s transforming into my undershirt right now. So, just in case anything happens to me, she will transform into a spiked undershirt that will stab me just in case. Not to the point that she will kill me. just enough for me to open my eyes wide.


    "I''ll do that. Like this?" Victoria quickly test it out.


    "Ouch! Like that, but not know! That''s hurt. Just when we met the Vampire Queen, and you think I started acting weirdly. You''re the one who knows me the most, so you should be able to notice if I acted out of the line," I said.


    "But you did that a lot. Well, I''ll try my best," she said.


    As for the other two with us, Carmen and the vampire, they are confused why I suddenly screamed in pain. Well, I won''t tell them.


    And in case Carmen got charmed, I guess I''ll bring Harold here.


    ¡­will that work? She doesn''t even know that Harold has been reced until she slept with the impersonator.


    Well, I hope charm magic won''t work with the same sex. Though in the end, Harold might be the one who got charmed


    I can finally see it the ce where the vampires live.


    Just like the previous town, the houses were built mostly from wooden log. But there''s a castle in the middle of the town.


    Using my Divine Vision, I can see inside the castle that there''s a woman sitting on the throne alone.


    Just like when I first met the Vampire King, the Vampire Queen also noticed me right away.


    "Carmen, she''sing," I said.


    The Vampire Queen who noticed me, quickly fly too the sky toward us. I had Spot slowed down so we can greet her.


    "Hello, I came in peace," I said to the flying Vampire Queen who has summoned her Blood Wings.


    Oh, no wonder that the Vampire Duke with me worshipped her. She''s a real beauty. The most beautiful woman I''ve ever seen. She''s even more beautiful than¡­


    "Ouch!"


    Under my shirt, I feel prickling sensation as Victoria stabbed me with needles enough to make me bleed. Thank you, Victoria.


    Since she has the gut to charm me, I don''t need to be polite against her.


    I used my Aura to the fullest to protect myself from her charm, and shouted at her.


    "If you dare using charm on me again, I will kill you just like how I kill the Vampire King!" I shouted loudly to intimidate her. It works.


    And since I also used air magic to make my voice louder, the Vampire Duke with me was so scared that he wet his pants.


    ¡­I need to apologize to Spotter.


    One thing I know for sure, she used charm on people she sees for the first time. And that''s make her dangerous enough for me to make a decision to kill everyone here.


    But since Albert has some kind of intention, I won''t do that.. At least until I know she can''t be trusted.

 Chapter 443 - She Want To Come?

    Chapter 443 ¨C She Want To Come?


    "¡­you''reing here and threatening to kill me? Do you think I will let you?" the Vampire Queen asked.


    "You have no choice, or we will kill every single one of you. Look above you," I said as I pointed up to the sky.


    "What? It''s raining? No, what the hell is that!?" the Vampire Queen, and the duke we brought with us, were surprised when they checked above their heads.


    Waterdrops are falling, but it''s not raining. Above us, is not cloud. But water.


    That''s right. A huge amount water that Carmen prepared to drown all the vampires. She can make water float in the sky.


    Is it normal for a water mage to do that? Or is it because she''s also a wind mage? I don''t even know her other elements, but I know that she''s the one who did it.


    "You''re just one lonely vampire who can''t trust anyone, and resorted in using charm magic. Never use your charm magic in my presence again, or I will truly kill you," I threatened the Vampire Queen.


    "You dare threatening our queen!?"


    In front of the Vampire Queen, the Vampire Duke #1 who was supposed to be wiser than the other Vampire Dukes, start attacking me. And just like I did to the Duke #2, I broke his neck and remove his head from the body.


    Now, the top of Spot''s head is dirtied by blood and pee. I feel sorry to him. But he can just dip himself into ake or a sea and clean himself. Though if there''s any stain, which I hope there won''t be any, I will offer my help to clean him.


    What? I have scratched the back of a dragon. Washing a giant serpent''s head should be easier.


    "Oh, wow! See how easy it is for me to remove his head? Well, he''s going to regenerate soon. But if I destroy his heart, he won''t return back to live, right? But he''s weaker than you who is the queen. Though I have killed the stronger version of the Vampire King who has drunk the blood of other vampires. You should have known that it wasn''t just a myth that you can get stronger after drinking the blood of your kind, right? I will ask you this one more time. Never use charm magic or whatever it is around me ever again, or I will eradicate every single vampire here," I threatened the queen again with my voice imbued with Aura. She will feel the dread even more.


    "¡­how did you know I can use charm? You''re just a human," the queen asked.


    "I experienced it once, and also prepared to receive it after asking this one about you. What about you? How did you know that I''m a human?" I asked back while throwing the head of the Vampire Duke at her. though the head is disappearing and started regenerating from his body.


    "I heard the story from my parents. Human is the most dangerous creature. They could be smart, could be stupid, could be strong, could be weak. They are the most unreasonable creature, while could be a reasonable one as well," she said.


    Wow, that''s correct! I was surprised at that. Her parents taught her well.


    "So, will you let us have a chat with you? You can also bring your trusted people with you as well. I will also bring someone who really wants to talk with you," I said.


    "¡­you cane into the castle. There''s a huge ce which is suitable for negotiation. You can wait here while I brought other people with me," she said.


    "Sure. But can you really trust them when you need to use your charm?" I provoked her.


    "¡­"


    The Vampire Queen didn''t answer at all. She knows that they only worship and love her because of her charm. Once he undid her charm on them, there''s a high possibility that they will turn their back on her.


    "Here''s a life lesson for you. You can ask this ghost about it since she experienced it before she died. We will wait for you in that room. As for this vampire, I''ll just drop him here," I said as I kicked the vampire who dirtied Spot''s head.


    Then, we quickly entered the ce she told us about. I also opened a portal to let Alberte, but he''s not the only oneing. Marie and Harold also entered the portal. Seems like they are worried if something would happen with their loved one.


    So, as we waited for the vampires, I told Carmen and Harold about Sonia. A ghost who was an Aura user and has the special ability to charm men. And now, they be even warier of the Vampire Queen.


    Though Harold is in more danger than Carmen.


    After all, why would a man who has been told about someone with charming magic voluntarilye other than to see the Vampire Queen herself? And he''s someone who keeps flirting with other women despite having his own wife with him!


    As for me, I called Ka to heal my body which has been stabbed by Victoria. The bleeding has stopped, but I still ask for her healing. Though she refuses to leave as well for the same reason why Marie is here. I feel so happy. And a little bit scared.


    Meanwhile, Spot is entering the portal to return back to the vige so he can wash his head. Though I told him to not wash the blood on theke where everyone is drinking from. He flew away somewhere else after I told him that.


    As for the Vampire Queen¡­ she ended up having a st with Sonia.


    What the hell!? Don''t tell me that Sonia has been charmed by her?


    Though I don''t think that''s the case since the two of them seem happy from the bottom of their heart. Does meeting someone you can share your experience with make you so happy? Should I meet someone who returned back in time? Though I don''t need that to be happy.


    "So, where is the Vampire Queen?" Albert asked.


    "You really can''t wait for her, huh?" Marie replied.


    "No! I mean I can''t wait for the negotiation! Not from meeting her!"


    ¡­what the hell am I seeing?


    "Victoria, if you think that Roy is getting charmed again, you can stab him a bit deeper," Ka said to Victoria.


    ¡­being loved sure feels great. But if she loves me too much, I guess it could be painful. And her love hurt. Literally. Like needles piercing my body. Literally.


    "The Vampire Queen is having a st with Sonia at the moment. But she also has grabbed some vampires with her. All of them are female vampires. I guess they are the ones she can trust without using charm magic," I said.


    ""All of them females you say!?""


    Victoria, Ka, Marie, and Carmen asked at the same time. Good thing only Ka and Victoria are here for me. If Sophie, Lina, Candy, Shelia, and even Ang are here, it will be too much for my heart, body, and soul.


    I know that Ang is not my lover. But she would never miss the chance to hit me.


    "They''reing here," I said.


    And the threedies instantly stand in front of the men as if to protect us. How can we start our negotiation this way?


    "I''m sorry for making you wait," the Vampire Queen said as soon as she entered the room. Though she was surprised to see that several new humans appearing out of nowhere, she changed her expression quickly. Did Sonia tell her about me? That does make it easier for us to negotiate.


    "For now, how about an introduction. My name is Roy, and she''s Ka. The one who want to talk with you is Albert. He''s a king of a country in our world. And with him is Marie. The water mage from before is Carmen, and that''s her husband. Which is a king from another country," I started introducing everyone but Victoria. And also Spot who is not here.


    I believe that no matter how close Sonia is with the Vampire Queen, she won''t tell her about Victoria. She''s our secret weapon.


    At least I won''t introduce her to the Vampire Queen yet until I know she can be trusted.


    "I''m the Vampire Queen. You can call me Arin. And these are my trusted vampires¡­"


    Arin started introducing the female vampires she brought.


    So far, I didn''t feel anything strange with me. And Albert is the same as well. Though for Harold, who has multiple wives and keep wanting more, seems like he has fallen for the vampires. But Carmen is stepping on his toes, so the only thing he can do right now is to endure the pain.


    "Now, let''s get to the discussion. I want an agreement with you to get into conflict with each other. Between the vampires under you, and the vige that he created," Albert said as he pointed at me who is the founder of the monsters'' vige.


    "I can do that. But if that''s your main reason to be here, he doesn''t need to bring you here, right? You have other intentions, I guess?"


    That''s right. If it''s just that, I don''t need Albert toe. I can just negotiate alone, and be thest one standing.


    Wait, that''s battle royal. Not a negotiation at all.


    "That''s right. The real reason I''m here is to ask if there are any vampires who are interested in living in our world," Albert said.


    "I do. I''m interested,"


    Surprisingly, without any hesitation, it was the Vampire Queen herself who raised her hand.


    ¡­a Vampire Queen in our world? Won''t that be dangerous?

 Chapter 444 - The Reason She Wants To Come

    Chapter 444 ¨C The Reason She Wants To Come


    We just asked if there are any vampires who are interested in our world, and the first one who wants toe without any hesitation is the Vampire Queen, Arin, herself.


    She didn''t ask why, for what, or anything. She just jumped at the opportunity to go to another world and live there.


    Even the vampires she brought with her didn''t stop her at all. In fact, after their queen raised her hand, the rest also raised their hand to follow her.


    "¡­Sonia, what have you told her?" I asked Sonia.


    I thought that during their time chatting with each other, Sonia might have told her about everything. About the cult, our world, and the reason we want the vampires in our world. Which is to be soldiers against the cult.


    "I only told her about my past, and a little bit about fashion. Well, even if she''s a vampire, she''s still a woman. I bet even she doesn''t want to wear the same thing over and over again," Sonia said.


    Albert and the others also listened to what Sonia said. And the women in our group nodded in agreement.


    Women and fashion just can''t be separated. Even the werewolves and the angels are all interested. I don''t know about the elves though. But Lina might have taught them herself about fashion.


    "We haven''t told you the reason why we want vampires in our world yet. But let me ask you something first. Why do you want toe with me, and why are your subordinates also want toe as well?" Albert asked Arin.


    "As for me, I just enjoy chatting with Sonia. I think I can learn more from her. And seeing the girls with you wearing nice clothes make me want to wear something nice as well. Not this cape with high cor all the time," Arin said.


    So, there are no other clothes other than the one they wore? What if they got dirty? Letting it smell bad?


    Well, I don''t need to think about it too much. They are monsters after all.


    "And what about the other vampires here?" Albert asked.


    "We will follow Queen Arin wherever she goes," one of the vampires said.


    "They are my most trusted vampires. They don''t have high rank other than the two Dukes I brought, but they can be trusted. All of them are those who knows about my charm magic but still choose to follow me," Arin said.


    Since Albert didn''t react, that should be the truth. And I also looked at the ten vampires here. Their heartbeats are still normal. No other reaction from them other than nodding in agreement.


    "Do you not trust men?"


    It was Harold who asked.


    "¡­I never met any male I can trust. But I will try trusting you," Arin said.


    "What you mean by ''you'' shouldn''t include Roy. Just Albert is fine," Ka said.


    "Understood,"


    ¡­what does she mean by not trusting me? What is it that she''s thinking that makes me can''t be trusted?


    "Roy said that he''s going toe here peacefully. But I believe that when he arrived, he did something that forces you to stop being hostile at him, right? Can that be called ''peacefully''?" Ka asked.


    "That''s right. You threatened her right after meeting her," Victoria whispered. She''s still a secret, so I won''t show her to the vampires.


    "But she''s the one who uses charm magic on me first. She deserves it," I whispered back to her.


    In fact, I still can''t trust her enough to let her live in our world.


    "¡­before you decide if you want to go, I will need to inform you about why I offer you this chance. Actually¡­"


    The same story. Repeated over and over again. And when we found other people, monster, or whatever it is that might be a great asset for us, we will repeat the story again and again.


    "There''s a waring? Then, we should be allowed to drink a lot of human''s blood, right? We can drink the blood of the cultists. I don''t think it''s a bad offer," Arin said.


    "¡­I''m still shocked to see how quick you made your decision. Is humans'' blood what you''re really after?" Albert asked.


    "I''ve heard about them being the most delicious blood. The temptation might be too great if we move to your world, but we can endure it. I even don''t remember thest time I drank blood," Arin said.


    So, it has been so long since shest drank blood. That''s why she believes that she and the vampires who wille along can endure it. I think we need to test it.


    "Albert."


    "I know. Open a portal,"


    Albert realizes my intention as I opened a portal back to the vige where the feast is going on.


    The people over there are looking curiously at the portal thinking that we will return soon. But Albert just poke his head out and called someone. It''s a girl who seems to be a tamer or summoner. I don''t remember.


    Albert picked a girl because the vampires can''t trust men yet.


    Once the girl entered the portal, I closed it.


    "She is a summoner just like Roy. And she can make a contract with one of you. We need one vampire, preferably with high rank, to make contract with her. With her as mediator, we should be able to contact each other easier. And as her familiar, you can''t disobey her," Albert said.


    "That''s it? That seems easy," Arin said as she stepped forward to make contract with the summoner.


    "No! Please let me do it. I can''t let our queen be under someone else," one of the vampires, who seems to be a Vampire Duke, volunteered herself.


    The contract was made so in case we need to ry a message, the message can get there faster. The contracted vampire will go to this world or our world depend on the summoner. As for the other vampires, we don''t really care as long as they obey the queen. And I just need to give the Queen a Blobby anyway.


    "The remains of the Vampire King''s army will also be there. Please don''t kill each other," Albert said.


    "Don''t worry. It''s not like I hate them," Arin said casually.


    "Hmm? Then why do you fight them?" I asked.


    "The Vampire King fall for me without me having to use my charm. And he decided to kill everyone else to get me. But because I have more vampires, he can''t win and left to get stronger before returning and fight us again. Though in the end, he never returned," Arin said.


    ¡­that''s it? Women fight for fashion and men fight for love? I can''t say I understand, but seeing Harold nodding, I guess he understand the mind of the Vampire King.


    "Okay. So, do you want to increase more vampires or just this much toe to our world?" Albert asked.


    "There might be more. Anyway, as long as I''m alive, all the male vampires in this ce will obey me. They are all my ves. Though I will only ask the female vampires," Arin said.


    She thinks of them as her ves? Well, that means even if they died in the war, it won''t be a big loss. We can also use them as our bait.


    "Hmm¡­ then, other than the remains of the Vampire King''s army whom I will brought to my world, you can seduce other vampires. And since you will be leaving, how about you inform all the vampires here first?" Albert suggested.


    "Inform them what? They will obey me anyway," Arin said proudly.


    No matter what, I must never let her seduce any humans other than the enemies.


    "Tell them you will be leaving and have someone be in charge. As for the vampire who made a contract with our summoner, she cane and go to this world ording to her master''s will. You can appoint her as a messenger, and appoint someone else to be in charge of this ce. This way, it will be easy to gather all of you when the war is happening," Albert said.


    "I understand. I will discuss it with the others. Then, when will we begin living in your world?"


    "Tomorrow. Roy will pick you up along with those who wants to go. As for the one who made a contract with our summoner, she can go there right away," Albert said.


    And so, after giving some more detailed instruction to the vampires and Albert is satisfied with the result, we return back to the vige. But there''s no more food. They''re all gone.


    "¡­I''ll go grab some fruits from the elves'' home. When will you be back, Albert?" I asked.


    "I''ll discuss it with Carrie and the other vampires who wille first. The feast is over. You can bring back those who wants to go home. I think I see some children napping. We have gone for quite a long time. But it''s great that we managed to finish it in one day," Albert said.


    "Then, I will bring everyone back. Just contact me if you want to go home."


    With that, our business with the vampires is done. And we gained more powerful allies again.. Though I hope the vampires won''t cause trouble in our world.

 Chapter 445 - Getting The Vampires To The Humans World

    Chapter 445 ¨C Getting The Vampires To The Human¡¯s World


    Today is the day that I should bring the vampires to our world. I did it during the evening so no one will be suspicious since it''s dark. And also, we need to teach them how to adapt in this world. Which will take about one night of lesson.


    But before bringing them here, I need to get the Vampire Queen and Carrie to meet first. Both sides have been told that they have to get along. If they can''t, they will be put in different location. Lynn, old man Henry, and Harold are ready to take them in in case they can''t get along. But we''ll see if they will shake their hand and forget about the past or not.


    In the vampire castle we meet Arin yesterday, I brought Carrie and the other drowned vampires. Just those who wants toe to our world.


    In total, there are thirty-five vampires here. Twelve are former Vampire King''s army, and the rest are under the Vampire Queen.


    "So, can you two get along?" I asked the two sides. Albert is also here to watch.


    "I''m fine with it. As long as we won''t get into another conflict, it should be fine. And the cause of our feud has died. The Vampire King. We can start over again," Arin said.


    They have discussed it with the other vampires so it''s easy for them to reach that decision.


    "We''re fine as well. After hearing how stupid the beginning of our feud is, I think the correct decision is to forget about the past. I might have killed some of your subordinates, but let''s start over from the beginning," Carrie said as the leader of the drowned vampires.


    I don''t want to keep calling them the remains of the Vampire King after they decided to get along with the Vampire Queen. So, the drowned vampires are good enough title for them for now.


    The two shook their hands, but I just looked at Albert.


    "Well, I will ask each one of you individually again to see if you can truly be trusted or not. Let''s start from Carrie''s side," Albert said as he started asking the vampires one by one.


    He did it yesterday, and he did it again today. It''s just too difficult to trust someone to get along after fighting for too long.


    The end result was good. Only six vampires decided to stay behind. I don''t know if the four from the drowned vampires will live with the rest of the vampires here or not.


    Combined with the Vampire Duke who became our summoner''s familiar, there are exactly thirty of them. And only two of them are males. They are from the drowned vampires.


    "Hmm¡­ it will be difficult to get them to stay in one vige. Seeing that there are way too many females in the vige will raise suspicion to everyone," Albert said.


    "It''s not like you have to do that. You can set them in different ces. Just pick those you can trust to live separately from the others," I suggested.


    "Right. For now, they will all live in Cassau. You will supervise them for a while and hopefully, after one month, they all can be trusted," Albert said.


    And I can''t escape from babysitting job.


    But Cassau is a city next to the sea. And the vampires can''t swim.


    Well, as long as they don''t get anywhere close to the beach, it should be okay.


    "Since it has been decided, you all can stay in the same city. The city is called Cassau. A city inside my kingdom. And it''s also where Roy''s home is. He will supervise you along with his friends. You can ask him or his friends if you need anything. After one month, I will see your performance. If you want to go somewhere, as long as you can be trusted in that one month, you''re free to go," Albert said.


    With that, I opened a portal back to our base. As for Albert, he returns to his own home and will be busy taking care of the kingdom again.


    One of the reasons he''s busy is that the cult has been too quiet. Even if they are preparing for something, they have been too quiet. And we need to make sure that we can raid theb safely.


    The kings have sent most of their elite members to guard Consenza. Especially the venue for the tournament. After all, the cult must have sent someone to scout the area.


    Well, I only need to care about the raid. And it''s not the time yet.


    The vampires entered the portal cautiously. Even the drowned vampires, whom I brought here with portal, are still wary.


    As for those who doesn''t want to stay in this vampire town, I opened a portal near the monsters'' vige. They are free after that. And as long as they don''t cause trouble to us, we will never meet again.


    "Hmm¡­ it doesn''t feel any different from our world," Arin said.


    "Of course it doesn''t. The real difference is the people and the culture. As for other things, the two worlds are basically simr," Ka said.


    Everyone has been waiting for the vampires to greet them. As for the ce they will be staying at, we have built another building next to the base which can fit up to fifty people. I''m rich after all. And everyone will only think that it''s normal since Ka is the runner-up of the previous tournament. They just think that she has a lot of guests.


    Fame and wealth despite not being a part of nobility. We are awesome.


    "These girls will teach you about our world. Your main goal in this one month is to go to the Hunter Guild, be hunters, and then you can start gaining money from the job. We will also tell you about thew in this world. Other things than that, you can ask Ka, Ang, Sophie, or other girls. If you have a profession that interest you, you can tell us about it. Study hard, everyone," I said.


    We gathered in the new building to show them where they can rest. As for the room arrangement, we let them decide it themselves.


    The main show for tonight is the Vampire Duke which has be Albert''s summoner''s familiar. She has stayed in this world sincest night, and can tell the others about what she sees from her point of view. Which will make the other vampires bing more interested in this world.


    "So, we can drink the bloods of humans here, right?" one of the vampires asked.


    She must have asked that after being told how delicious a human blood is.


    "You can. But only to those humans who break the rules. Like thieves, murderers, and other ouws. If you decided to let them live so you can drink their blood again next time, that''s fine. But make sure you won''t get noticed," Ka said.


    "Oh, about that. There''s something interesting, you see. In the past few days, I noticed that there are bandits outside the city. During the day, they entered the city and stole something in the street. But they are growing in number, and I think they are nning for something. Now that this city has be more famous, there are many people with evil intention thinking of doing something. How about for tonight, we will raid the bandits''ir? There should be around fifty of them. I think just thirty of you is enough. And you can also taste human''s blood for the first time," I suggested.


    Using the vampires to defeat the bandits, I can see how well they perform.


    "Can we keep them alive and lock them in a cage? That way, we can farm their blood without having to work hard," one of the vampires suggested.


    That is crazy. Other than keeping them alive and letting them escape, that is also an option. But I don''t want a blood farm near the children.


    "You can do that. But not now. If you want to do that, you need to live somewhere else far from here. I don''t want such farm anywhere close to the children. Maybe after one month, those who wants to farm blood, will have to leave this city and live somewhere else. Albert will help you find a good location. Probably somewhere bandits and criminals aremonly seen," I said.


    "How strong are they?" Arin asked.


    "I don''t know. I doubt they are weak. But I don''t think they are strong enough to survive against you vampires. Well, how about we go there and see for ourselves? Everyone here can fly, right?"


    "Yeah. Since we were going to move here today, I told everyone to drink blood of monsters just in case. We have enough to be able to fly," Arin said.


    Carrie also nodded as well. Seems like she''s doing something while waiting for me to pick them up. That''s good. at least this way, they won''t damage the poption of monsters nearby.


    "Then, follow me. Ang, Shirley, Veronica, and Wendy wille as well," I said.


    And in the dark of the night, thirty vampires and five humans fly in the sky.

 Chapter 446 - Easy Victory For The Vampires

    Chapter 446 ¨C Easy Victory For The Vampires


    It''s the vampires'' first mission after entered our world. They will start living here from now on, so I want to see if they can obey the rule, follow order, and hopefully, they can be independent.


    Although there are some vampires who don''t want to follow Albert and be soldiers, I want to see them in the mission as well.


    The five of us, me, Ang, Shirley, Veronica, and Wendy, will watch over them. In case they try to escape, or the bandits managed to escape them.


    "Oh, I can see them," the Vampire Queen, Arin, said.


    "I thought you can see them from further here. You did saw me when I arrive at your castle, right?" I asked.


    "Rather than seeing, it was more of sensing your presence. And I somehow can tell when you are looking. I can tell where you were before is because you are watching me. As for the group you called bandits, I know where they are but I can''t see them.," Arin said.


    "So, you can tell someone''s presence, and if they are watching you, you will know instantly?" I asked.


    "That''s about it. Well, I don''t know how to exin this. And it seems like we can get this power once we be either the queen or the king," Arin exined.


    At least Arin can tell someone''s presence. I will talk to Albert about this. Maybe, he will ask her to live in the capital. That way, the capital will be safer since there''s someone who can detect presence.


    "Anyway, I have a question. How do vampires raise their rank?" Wendy asked.


    "Oh, right. Why aren''t there more kings or queens?" I also asked Arin.


    "To raise our rank, we needed to fight more and defeat powerful enemies. I managed to be a queen after defeating a Giant Smander on my own," Arin said.


    Oh, a Giant Smander? I also managed to defeat one in the past. Back when I was much weaker than I am now. Back when I was disguising myself as a living armor. And the armor I wore was something simr to a flying mammal. And I¡­ also wearing the fis stocking.


    Now that I don''t need the fis stocking anymore. It''s in the possession of Sophie who would wear them from time to time. Especially at night.


    I hope the stocking can protect her. But I hope even more that the time when the stocking will be of use would never happen.


    Sophie doesn''t want to join the war. Her personality is not well-suited for killing people. She will stay at home and protect the children.


    "Should we attack them right away?" Arin asked.


    Now that we have gotten closer to the bandits, we stopped. We are hidden by the trees in the forest. And since the vampires have good eyesight, all of them can see the bandits. Though that''s not the case for the humans except me.


    "You will decide how to do it yourself. I want to see how you can handle it," I said to Arin.


    Arin looked around at the vampires, and quickly make a decision. I guess she''s a capable leader. Unlike the Vampire King.


    "For now, we will split our group in three. Each will have ten people. I will lead one group, Carrie will lead the second group, and the third group will be led by Eve," Arin said.


    Originally, the vampires came from two sides. The Vampire Queen''s side, and the Vampire King''s.


    Getting them to work together is difficult. That''s why Arin split the group with Carrie leading the group of vampires from the remains of the Vampire King''s army.


    As for Eve, she''s the vampire who made a contract with our summoner whose name I can''t remember. Even the name of this vampire, I can only remember it after Arin said it.


    Since she has stayed in this world longer than the other vampires, even if it''s just one day longer, she will lead a group herself.


    "Each group will attack from different sides. They have more numbers, but we should be fine. After killing one, drink their blood and move on. Don''t drink their blood dry. We need to show Roy that we can also choose to capture the enemies instead of killing them. Only kill them if there''s no other choice," Arin said.


    Wow, she''s sharp! Had she told them to kill everyone, it would be harder for me to trust them. But if they choose to capture them, Albert can give them various mission. Not just to kill.


    Maybe it''s best to build them a prison. All the vampires will be the warden. And those captured will never leave. They can only be the vampires'' meal. And we don''t have to worry about the vampires attacking other people if they can be satisfied with just that.


    Well, I will see how this mission goes first. And there will be other mission that they need to take during this one month of trials.


    The vampires departed. Meanwhile, we also leave to watch them.


    Ang will watch Arin''s group, Veronica will watch over Carrie''s group, and Wendy and Shirley will watch Eve''s group.


    As for me, I don''t need to move as I can watch everything from here.


    The three groups advanced at the same time. And the unprepared bandits were surprised. But still, the bandits are human mages. They can attack the vampires from distance.


    But the same can be said to the vampires as they use Blood Bullets to shoot at the bandits. Still, the power difference is too great. The vampires are more used in closebat than attacking from long distance.


    They had no choice but to endure the enemies'' magic. And that''s no problem for the vampires who can regenerate as long as their heart is not destroyed.


    It was easy to enter the banditir. And the first group who managed it first was Carrie''s group.


    Well, that''s to be expected since they have experience fighting humans. Although they didn''t manage to kill even one of us, they still have experience in fighting against magic.


    Carrie did not participate in the war since her job was to fight me. But the others in her group did. They might have given some suggestion in dealing with magic.


    As the first group that managed to defeat the enemies in front of them first, they are also the first who will taste the blood of human.


    ¡­I can see their ecstatic state after drinking a bit of blood. And they about to suck them dry, until other vampires who haven''t drank yet stopped them and reminded them to not kill them. And when it''s time for them to drink the blood, they are stopped from drinking too much by those who drank it first.


    As for Arin''s group, even though she''s the first one to drink blood, she can still maintain her rationality and stopped from drinking too much. Since she''s the queen, it''s easy for her to stop the others.


    And then, for Eve''s group. I think Eve had tasted human''s blood when she explored this world with her summoner. That''s why she didn''t drink any and watch over the other vampires.


    I guess she has been taught well by her master.


    The vampires managed to capture thirty bandits. They have drunk the bandits'' blood enough to make them faint. And even those who didn''t faint, they don''t have enough power to move. That''s one way to stop them from moving.


    But that means there are still twenty bandits. Though since the vampires outnumber them this time, it won''t be a problem.


    Some wind mages tried to escape via the sky, but they were stopped by the vampires as they have spread the Blood Wings on their back. The vampires flying speed are actually slower than the wind mages, but they used the blood they consumed to boost their speed. It was easy to catch them.


    Finally, there''s only one man left. The bandit leader.


    He came out wearing magic robes to protect himself. I know that one. That''s quite expensive, but they aremonly used during the war. Especially by hunters.


    Though that is useless as the vampires didn''t use magic. Does blood magic count as magic? Is that even magic?


    Seeing how Arin easily shed her Blood Sword at the bandit leader, the magic robe is useless against vampire.


    And as the queen, she grabbed the leader and bite on his neck to drink his blood. After she has enough, she dropped the bandit leader on the ground and cheered for their victory.


    "Well, that was surprisingly fast. The vampires are so strong. How did you manage to stop them?" Ang asked Shirley as we all entered their.


    I''m also curious about it since I didn''t see it myself.


    "Well, Albert is a good leader. And none of us have been bitten by them," Shirley said.


    I don''t know because I only see the result and not the process. And since Albert can do it without any casualty, I can expect more from him.


    Now, what to do with these fifty bandits? I can''t just bring this many people to Cassau.


    Well, since the vampires have shown us what they can do, I don''t think there''s any reason to let the bandits live.


    For now, I''ll put the Magic Restraining Cor on the bandits.. They won''t be able to do anything else anymore.

 Chapter 447 - One Month To Learn To Be Human

    Chapter 447 ¨C One Month To Learn To Be Human


    "What should we do with them?" I asked the others on what to do with the bandits we captured.


    "You gave the mission to the vampires, but you don''t know how to deal with them?" Shirley asked.


    "That''s right. And there''s no mission about bandit extermination in the guild as well, so we can''t get a reward. Not to mention, these vampires are not hunters yet," I said.


    "Sigh¡­ for now, since you have put the cors on them, you can transport them to an empty ind or isted location somewhere. Just do it fast before the vampires started their feast," Shirley suggested.


    When I looked at the vampires, some of them have started drooling. Is the taste too delicious for them to hold back?


    I quickly opened a portal to an empty ind, and get Ang to build prison cells there. I''ll check on them tomorrow. I also need to report Albert about it.


    "So, how does human blood taste?"


    Just in case, I asked the vampires.


    "It''s the most delicious blood I ever drink!"


    "Can''t we go to war quickly? We should be able to drink more blood in the war, right?"


    ¡­they''re addicted to it. I hope they can endure it. but we will need to think of a way to get them to drink blood regrly.


    "Also, some human tastes different. The weaker ones are delicious, but their leader was the most delicious," Arin said.


    "So, the higher their magic level is, the more delicious their blood taste?" I asked.


    "I think that''s the case. And the more we drank their blood, the higher chance we can evolve into higher rank. Living in this world might not be a bad idea at all," Arin said.


    "You do know that if you drink more than you should, and even started attacking humans, especially innocent humans, I will have to kill you, right?" I put some pressure in my words to make them understand the situation they''re in.


    Feeling my pressure, the drooling vampires wipe their drool and started paying attention to me seriously. For now, they can be trusted. But it''s just the first night. They still have a month to prove themselves.


    "And don''t try to escape. Or I will release the werewolves to search for you," I said.


    "I understand. We will try our best to only drink when we are allowed to," Arin said. And as the representative of the vampires, the other vampires also nodded in agreement. Including the vampires who used to be part of the Vampire King''s army.


    Have they started to get along? That''s nice.


    "Don''t worry. As Albert said, as long as you prove yourself to us that you can be trusted, you can have more freedom. Maybe he will let you be the guards for a city. Being a guard means you have the authority to a certain extent to protect the city in various way. For example, like killing a criminal who fight back. But I will ask you to at least not drink their blood in public. Well, that''s just an example. If you want to live another way, there''s other options than just being a guard," I said.


    Hearing that they might have the chance to drink blood however they want, their motivation is rising. Are they this easy?


    "That''s why for this one month, you will learn a lot of things from us. If you have any question, you can ask us. Maybe that way, you can find other job that is more suited," I said.


    "We will try our best to live up to your expectation. Now, what do we do? Do we have more mission?" Arin asked.


    ¡­they ended up bing too motivated. They can''t wait to get another mission.


    "It''s the most important mission. Pretending to be humans. Night time is the time where most criminals like bandits and the like toe out. It''s where trouble appears more often. Because it''s the time for most humans to rest and sleep. That''s why you will try to rest at night as well. It''s not like we will give you mission all the time. Tomorrow, you will explore the city in small groups. Watch what other people is doing, try eating what they eat, drink what they drink, and learn what they do. I will have some other business to attend, so you can ask other people to guide you around the city," I said.


    For Shelia and Graham, blending in is simple. Because they are my familiars, and they can''t disobey me if I ordered them to. I just need to give them an order, and they will follow it obediently.


    But these vampires, only one of them is a familiar. And the rest are actually wild and dangerous vampires. Telling them to do something doesn''t mean they will obey.


    Since they will be our important allies against the cult, Alberts want to train them to obey orders. Not just from him, but also other people as well.


    The vampires then returned home. I guess they already memorized the route to take. Veronica and Wendy then followed them. Leaving me, Ang, and Shirley behind.


    "Why aren''t you leaving?" I asked.


    "What will you do tomorrow?" Shirley asked.


    "I need to go to the hospital to do some experiments. If it works, the vampires won''t need to attack humans," I said.


    Victoria told mest night, after meeting the Vampire Queen with Albert and the others, about blood bag.


    She has told me in the past about blood type. And the hospital is helping me researching about it. This way, if there''s a patient who loses a lot of blood, they can use blood transfusion to regain the blood they lost.


    It''s still in the middle of experiment since we don''t know how many blood types out there.


    If it''s sessful, we can just donate our blood, and get the vampires work their asses to buy some blood instead of hunting people. But if the blood of those with higher magic level is more delicious, it might be difficult if those who donated their blood are people with low level. The vampires will start looking for higher level mages on their own.


    Well, I will see the experiment tomorrow.


    I guess that''s what Shirley is curious about as she returns back to the base soon after. Does everyone forgot that I can use portal to get home sooner?


    Maybe they just like flying more.


    "What about you?"


    This time, I asked Ang who hasn''t left yet.


    "When will we fight?" Ang asked.


    "¡­Aaah, right. We need to see your full strength at one point. Have you tested it yet?"


    "I have tested it on monsters. But being in a real fight will help me more than trying it on weak monsters," Ang replied.


    "How about on stronger monsters?"


    "I tried sparring with Shelia, but the gap now is too big. The only one left I can think of is you or Spot. But I think I can learn more from fighting you."


    She had a spar with Shelia? Was it during the meeting with the Vampire Queen? Probably.


    Back then, after I returned, I see Shelia looked down. And she seemed exhausted. So, that''s because she''s sparring with Ang?


    It''s amazing how powerful she has be. I hope Ang can reach master level in the future.


    "It''s best to test it sooner, but I have vampires to take care of. Scheduling it for next month will be too long as well. How about next week? By that time, the vampires should have gotten used to this world and we don''t need to watch them all the time anymore," I said.


    "Next week then. Let''s do that."


    After confirming the date, she flies away. In the end, they have forgotten about my portal even though I just used it to transfer the bandits to an empty ind. Well, that mean I don''t need to waste my mana.


    Now, should I go report it to Albert?


    Nah, I''ll do that tomorrow. Albert and Marie both also curious about blood transfusion. For tonight, I''ll just tell Dean that they areing.


    I just said to the vampires that humans are mostly sleeping at this time, so it''s obvious that Dean is sleeping as well. But it should be fine to wake him up, right? After all, the king and the queen areing here. It''s an important information.


    I opened a portal to the Blobby that Dean has, and entered a bedroom which I assume to be his. Since he is not married, he sleeps alone. It would be awkward if I entered his room to see him and his wife.


    When I woke him up, he was quite angry for being awoken in the middle of the night. But after I told him my purpose ining here, he''s wide awake.


    "Shit! I need to inform the hospital quickly! And all other researchers should be at their home right now! Why did you have to inform me now and not earlier!?"


    Before I could answer, he run out of the house. Again, another person who forgot I can use portal. If he told me that I can be the one rying the message to the other doctors right away, I can do it since this is important. But I guess he won''t need me.


    At least I can go to bed early today.

 Chapter 448 - After So Long, Im Back To The Hospital

    Chapter 448 ¨C After So Long, I¡¯m Back To The Hospital


    The next day, I opened a portal to the pce first to get Albert and Marie. Along with the twins.


    "Hey. What''s our schedule?" Albert asked.


    "You asked me as if I''m your assistant or something. What do you want to do first?" I asked back.


    "For now, let''s have n and Lana y with the other children first," Marie said.


    It''s been a while since they yed with the other children. Not counting the time we were having our feast in the monsters vige.


    The twins unable to contain their happiness to be able to y with other children. After all, although they are happily living with their parents in the capital, it''s nearly impossible for them to y with other kids. Unless there''s other noble''s kids about the same age as them.


    Although there were some, most of them didn''t stay in the capital. And only visited from time to time when Albert invited them. And he did that a lot to see if they are people he can trust or not.


    "Roy, look! I can make many things with my ice!" Lana shouted as she built a sofa made of ice.


    "Hmm¡­ that''s amazing. But since you''re here to y with the others, there''s no need to use your magic. Just y with everything around you, okay?" I said to Lana.


    "Okay!"


    As soon as I said that, she and her brother run to the park to meet with other children who are already ying there.


    ¡­It will be dangerous if I let her use magic whenever she wants. Good thing she did it indoor.


    "¡­you will be a good father in the future. Unlike me," Albert said.


    "It took a long time for her to not call me "Pleb" anymore though," I replied.


    And to make it worse, I need to act and speak in a way that will make the twins trust me. Because we don''t know if any one of them inherited Albert''s ability to see through lies. I hope at least n inherit that ability since he will be the king in the future.


    Though the future king is ying with mud along with other children outside.


    "Lina and the others will watch over them. Now what?"


    "How''s the vampires?" Albert asked.


    "You want to meet them? They are in that building. I told them that they can explore the city while being guided with Ka or the others. But they seem to be unable to hold back their excitement," I said as I looked over the building they''re in and see them getting dressed nicely.


    Well, the vampires always dressed nicely. But their dress was too formal to go out. They will be seen as if they are nobles instead.


    Well, some of them are indeed nobles. Vampire nobles. Though it''s best to get them dressed as a hunters or just normal people so they don''t cause problem.


    "Let''s meet them first," Albert said.


    I guided the king and the queen to the next building. All of them already know that Albert and Marie are the king and the queen and be as respectful as they can.


    "I brought them to a bandit exterminationst night. They did well to not kill anyone. But they seem to love the taste of human''s blood too much. As for the bandits, I put them in an empty ind," I said to Albert.


    "What will you do to them?" Albert asked.


    "This might sound crazy, but I think it''s best for the vampires to have a human ranch. Specially made for them so they can raise bandits or criminals for their blood. Maybe a jail is easier to say," I said.


    "Hmm¡­ I''ll think about it. We''ll see what happen after one month," Albert said.


    We can''t really decide whether the vampires will be good to work as a warden or not. Well, that is obvious. They only stayed here for one night.


    As for the bandits, well, maybe killing them will give them salvation.


    Man, we''re here with vampires who drank the blood of humans, but I''m the cruelest one. That''s just show how superior I am to them.


    After seeing the vampires, it''s time to go to the hospital. I didn''t use portal since they want to walk around. They put on disguises by using Blobbies I gave them so they can walk around incognito. And we stopped many times before finally reaching the hospital.


    Once we got to the hospital, Dean greeted us. Since he saw me with two unknown people, he instantly recognized them as the king and the queen.


    "Umm¡­ what should I call you two with?" Dean asked as he''s wondering if the two want to stay incognito.


    "Don''t worry. We will remove our disguise once inside. You can call us by our titles or our names," Albert said.


    After that, Dean brought us to the deepest part of the hospital. Where no one should go wandering about. Even the staffs in the hospital, only some who are allowed toe and go.


    Of course I already have the permission. Other than me, it was Sophie who has the permission. They think that she''s my assistant.


    And now, she even in theb trying to find a cure to a disease that I told her about. Since I was busy with other things, I can''t do it myself. It''s good to see her being helpful.


    Though the main reason we''re here to day is not her. We just greeted her and continue walking even deeper.


    And inside, we see several people being experimented on.


    It might look as if we''re trying to do something evil like the Professor from the cult since we do human experiment as well. But these people are criminals on death sentence. They agree to prolong their life for medication purpose. So, it''s not like we force them to be ourb rats.


    Still, some of them died. That''s why only doctors with strong mentality, are allowed to work on them.


    ¡­basically, mad doctors. I''m included in the list. And Dean as well. Although he didn''t show it to public, he''s that kind of guy who will do various experiment for the sake of humanity.


    "¡­tell me your progress," Albert said.


    "So far, we found five different blood types. For now, we call them blood type 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. But there might be more. Using the equipment we have, we can tell those five blood types. But there are still some that we can''t tell. Like Roy''s blood. Which mean we still don''t know what type of blood he can get," Dean said.


    "Then, if he''s wounded badly and in need of blood, he can''t recover?" Albert asked worriedly as I''m the strongest one against the cult. I''m feel honored.


    "That bring us to the next experiment. Victoria said that it''s possible for a patient to get blood transfusion from their own blood. They will donate their blood weeks before surgery, and the doctors will use it. It''s still in the testing though," this time, I''m the one exining.


    "That''s right. For Blood Type 1 to 3, it''s safe to transfuse blood from the person to themselves. But 4 and 5, there''s some side effect. We don''t know if there''s some sort of mutation in their blood, or it''s because of the blood type. That''s why we will need more people to experiment on," Dean said.


    "And the blood saved is in a bag?" Albert asked.


    "Yes. And it''s being stored in a certain box that will help us to make sure the blood can still be good as long as possible," Dean said.


    "Roy. You wanted the vampires to get money so they can buy some blood? What if weck blood in the future? Those blood bags will be useful in the war," Albert asked me.


    Dean was confused because we''re talking about vampires. I''ll tell himter.


    "Not now. Just an idea at least. Once we figure out more about blood transfusion, we can publicize our work and get more people to donate their blood. That way, we can get more. The cult might learn about this as well, but it should be fine," I said.


    I mean that even if the cult learned about blood transfusion, during the war, most of them will die before getting blood transfusion. At least I''m going to make it happen that way.


    And we also need to test if people with the same blood, but with different magic level can be safely have blood transfusion. There are many things that doesn''t exist in Victoria''s world that we have to learn from scratch. But at least Victoria''s knowledge from her world helped us a lot.


    "And you said that the higher magic level the mage is, the more delicious their blood for the vampires. You''re going to charge them a lot of money to get the blood of an expert level mages, right?" Albert asked.


    "I will also ask them to donate their blood. At least those with me. In case they are wounded in the future and Ka''s healing unable to heal them as they lost a lot of blood, they can get their own blood transfused into them. Probably, I will ask them to donate blood at least once a month," I said.


    With blood transfusion, we can have higher chance of survival in the war. Even if we loss a lot of blood, we will be able to recover. But I hope the knowledge about this will spread to other doctors faster.


    Marie also asked Dean about the equipment to test blood types and see if she could make an even more advanced equipment. And she even thinks of something to appraise people''s magic level.


    ¡­why didn''t I think of it?


    Anyway, once our business here is over, we returned home. Seems like the experiment is going smoothly so far.


    And since I''m someone who will fight at the frontmost area, undoubtedly, I will be the one who will need a lot of blood. I hope they can find my blood type soon. Or at least find a way to tell that it''s fine if my blood can be transfused to my bodyter.


    This is an important experiment that we have to seed no matter what. Not only will it be great during the war, having blood for surgery will increase the chance of survival for the patient.


    And this time, it''s something I discovered. Not from the knowledge of the future, but from me.. Even though it''s mainly from Victoria''s knowledge, at least I can be proud that I''m the one who discovered this method in this world.

 Chapter 449 - Registering Two New Hunters

    Chapter 449 ¨C Registering Two New Hunters


    Now that the matter about blood transfusion has progressed, I hope we can see the result soon and we can start transfusing blood to other people. And after Cassau University hospital has started doing it during surgery the survival chance of the patients has increased greatly.


    The hospital now has be the most advanced in performing medication. Even old man Henry, the king of a country which was said to be the most advanced country in medication, started sending some doctor he can trust to learn here. And he would sometimese over as well.


    Hearing suggestion and advice about our research from his country, I hope the doctors here can see the result quickly.


    Though I think that someone in the cult should already know about blood transfusion. Specifically, the professor who created the artificial master level mages.


    If it''s him, he should have done something simr since he''s involved in human experiment.


    He did it to innocent vigers the cult kidnapped. As for us, we did it to prisoners on death row.


    ¡­can''t say that we''re good as well since some of them ended up dying. But thanks to their sacrifice, we made a lot of progress.


    Though Victoria asked why the blood type is numbered instead of named. It''s not like we have found all blood types.


    And why is the blood type in her world is named A, B, C, D, and O? Wait, there''s no C and D? But why after A and B, it''s O?


    At least we have found a way to differentiate between three blood types. And with Marie''s help in creating better equipment, we should be able to progress even faster. Though for now, it''s best to tell the others that they should donate their blood and saved it for emergency. At least they need to do it in their free time.


    But Marie and Shirley rejected the idea. Albert also disagree to have them donate their blood.


    "We are from the royalty. If someone is ying around with our blood, it might be used for something bad. Even if the hospital and Dean can be trusted, we don''t know if anyone will raid the hospital and look for the documents for the research. At least, I want only Roy to take our blood. As for the ce to store it, build a new box for our blood in the pce," Albert said.


    "I agree. Also, even if the blood transfusion worked, it will be a problem if the royalty got blood transfusion frommoner''s blood. We''re fine with it, but as royalties, there are things that we shouldn''t do. Though it should be fine for Shirley," Marie said.


    Being a royalty is difficult. But why is Shirley fine then? Will she leave the royal family like Celestine?


    At least they should get their blood taken regrly. About once a month.


    Well, we need to see how long can blood be stored first. If it''s less than a month, we need to take blood every two weeks.


    Since we''re talking about blood, what if we leave the job of taking blood to the vampires? They are experts in taking blood.


    Obviously, the reason is that they are vampires. Not only they will take our blood, they will also drink it for themselves if they are not supervised.


    After transporting Albert, Marie, n, and Lana back to the capital, I asked what the vampires were doing.


    "We went on a shopping spree!"


    Arin said happily. I can see her wearing new clothes, just like any other girl in the city. And she donned a lot of jewelries as well.


    Other than her, the other vampires also the same. Just how much did they spend my money? I''ll get them to work soon enough.


    "Do not wear too much jewelries outside, or you will be targeted. You should be fine, but you will cause trouble to me if people attacked you too often. Keep it in your ce. And you can only buy those things today with my money. Next time, you will use your money," I said.


    "Does that mean we''re going to work?" Arin asked. And the other vampires also interested in listening. I guess they are more interested in human''s blood than clothes and essories.


    "Thirty is too much. You will be spread into several groups tomorrow, and register at the guild to be hunters. Have you picked who you want as your guide?" I asked the vampires.


    And the vampires then started moving. They gathered around the girl they want as their guide. Most of them are surrounding Ka.


    "Ka, are you fine with that much?" I asked her.


    "It''s fine. I can think of something," Ka said.


    "Okay. Then¡­ the two male vampires who doesn''t have a guide will be with me tomorrow to register. You two have problem with this arrangement?"


    I asked the only two male vampires among thirty of them. Arin didn''t bring over the male whom she had charmed. And these two are from the drowned vampires who want toe.


    The two looked at each other and obeyed. It''s been a while since I''m doing something with only men.


    The next day, the three of us entered the guild. The two vampires then registered and be E- rank hunters.


    "Alright. Next is to pick a mission suitable for your rank. Your rank is a measurement for your effort. The higher your rank is, the more mission you can take. That''s why you can''t take the most difficult mission yet," I exined.


    "Why? We should be able to finish even the most difficult mission on the list. I mean, it''s just several Goblin Emperors. They don''t seem strong," one of the male vampires said.


    These two are Vampire Marquises. They are those who were supposed to lead the army when the king and the dukes are fighting me. Hearing what they said about how they can easily defeat several Goblin Emperors, show just how powerful they are. And since the monsters in that world are far stronger than in this world, it should be easier.


    "Just do it in the proper step. If you go for the high ranked mission right away, instead of raising your rank, you will end upbeled as suspicious instead. And you won''t ever be able to raise your rank," I exined.


    I didn''t know much about it at first, but since I am the leader of a n, I should learn about the rules of being a hunter. That''s how I ended up knowing things that I have no interest in.


    Instead of taking the mission to defeat Goblin Emperors, we grabbed mission to defeat wild boars. The two vampires feel dejected at how easy it was.


    We left the city and I told them to find the boar themselves without my help. They can do the job on their own as their real strength is even stronger than normal S-rank hunters.


    And before noon, the two have defeated ten boars.


    "¡­it was too easy," one of the vampiresined.


    "It is. Anyway, you have your reason toe to this world, right? So, which vampire do you fancy?" I asked directly.


    "What!? How do you know?"


    "It''s obvious for me. You two are the only males who willingly want toe and live in this world. As for the female vampires, most of them are interested in the fashion. But I doubt that''s the case for you two. Although you two bought clothes as well, they are clothes for blending in on this world. Not for showing off. You two came here because the girl you like are here, right?"


    "Not me. I''m here because my sister wanted toe here. And I started to think that this world is a nice one," one of the vampires said.


    Which mean only one male vampire is here for the girl he likes.


    "Anyway, you have seen how much they love the things in our world. Whoever you wanted to woo, or if you want to give your sister everything she wants, you need money. It''s to get her clothes and essories. The more money you have, the more likely that girl will fall for you," I said.


    Seeing how the amount of my money reduced by more than half yesterday, those vampires must be happy to be able to buy things that they can''t have in their world. I still have a lot of money, but I need the vampires to not waste my money anymore. That''s why at least I want these two vampires to work hard and get rich.


    But seems like only one of them wants to go to where the girl he likes goes. As for the other, it''s for his sister. Well, I can just say that it''s because his sister might want things to buy in this world. That''s easy.


    Hearing my exnation, the two vampires be highly motivated and quickly returned back to the guild to get another quest.


    We keep doing it until the guild is closed at night. And by that point, the two vampires already reached D-rank. It''s the fastest rank up in history.


    Once they reached S-rank, they can get more money from just one mission. And when they are rich, I will ask them to pay the money the vampires owe me.


    This is the real reason why I go with these two instead of with the other vampires.. They are easy to manipte.

 Chapter 450 - ID For The Vampires

    Chapter 450 ¨C ID For The Vampires


    After the two male vampires became hunters, the other vampires also be hunters as well. though none of them raised their rank to D in one day other than the two male vampires.


    In the end, the girls love shopping more than taking request. They would only go on a quest when they emptied their pocket. Or in this case, their card. Since the money is saved in Hunter Card.


    Though I still keep some changes in my pocket. Just in case I need it. But I can use portal, so it''s not really necessary. It''s because of a habit since before I died.


    Anyway, with this, the vampires won''t have any trouble getting money.


    ¡­maybe they will. After all, their spending is too much. I don''t think they would be able to pay back my money at all. That''s why at least if the two male vampires be B-rank hunters, they can get a lot of money from just one mission and I can get a share from them.


    Though D-rank mission''s reward is still too little. I guess I''ll get more money after they reached B-rank first.


    Anyway, now that they have be hunters, are they vampire hunters? Or hunter vampires?


    The next day after registering the vampires as hunters, they take mission on their own. I didn''t go with them. Or at least that''s what they think.


    I make sure to keep watch on them at all time to make sure that they won''t attack humans. Other than bandits and criminals.


    It was easy to persuade them to not kill humans just by telling the female vampires that humans make clothes. But I still need to watch over them in this one month. They will be our important allies against the cult.


    As for Eve''s summoner, one of Albert''s agent, she moved to this city for a month. And she lives together with the vampires. For being the only human among vampires, she sure has some guts.


    As for the male hunters, after giving part of their money to their loved ones, one to his sister and one to his crush, they go out for another quest. They do separate solo quest hoping that they can do more mission with more reward.


    Seems like I won''t have anything to do with them soon. But I need to make sure that their addiction to human blood won''t be a threat to the people living here.


    Ah! Now that I think about it, I forgot about the bandits!


    It''s been two days since they got captured and transported to an empty ind. They haven''t eaten or drink anything at all. I guess I''ll kill them. There''s no reason to keep them alive.


    I used portal to the empty ind to see that some of them have died. Well, I''m sorry about that. But I''m going to kill the rest of them anyway.


    During this hard time when we have such an obvious enemy, theye together and nning something terrible. They want to use this chance when the country is too busy with the cult and attacked cities and viges until none left alive. I''ve witnessed that many times in my past life.


    This time, I have power. I won''t be powerless again in front of such situations. Unless Albert decide to build a human ranch for the vampires, or have something for them to do, I will kill them.


    Alright, that''s over. Now, the ind is empty again other than some prison cells. It''s good for when we capture other enemies.


    As for the corpses, I threw them into the sea so they can be used as fish foods. At least they are useful for something.


    Now, back to watching the vampires.


    There are thirty of them. It won''t be good for the hunters if they keep taking quests. I guess I should give a suggestion to Albert so they can be separated. Maybe I''ll ask Hill in Mellian or Oleg in Melk to take care of them. If I told the vampires that they are my friends, I doubt they will dare to do anything to them.


    "Sure. I''ll have Sonia inform Oleg and Hill about the vampires so they can prepare a ce for them," Albert said that night after all the vampires returned from their quests. They have been resting happily and chatted a lot with the girls about their experiences.


    "No need for that. They should have enough money in a few days for them to find their own ces. Since I''m an advanced level summoner, the clones that Victoria can make has increased in number. Putting one Blobby on each vampire should be easy. In case they break the rule and started attacking people, I will find them. Though I need to hear about such incident first, so it might be toote by then. But at least it''s good enough," I said to Albert.


    "I see. Well, at least keep Arin and Carrie in Cassau. As for the rest, they are free to stay or leave. I''m thinking of creating a vige just for them, but if they like living in the city more, I won''t do it. I''m thinking of preparing their special ID that tell the guards of the city they will be staying that they are vampires. And the vampires need to inform the one in charge that they will stay in that city even if it''s just one day," Albert said.


    "That''s a good idea. I guess I''ll let the vampires stay for a little longer before letting them go freely. At least until you have prepared the identification for them."


    "Oh, what about you?" Albert suddenly asked me.


    "What about me? What do you want to ask?"


    "Aren''t you going to spar with Ang? I''d like to watch it. When will it happen?" Albert asked.


    "¡­do you want to die that much? Do you think that watching us fight won''t harm you in any way? You''re the one who witnessed her fighting against the vampires back then. If you want, I will prepare a front row seat just for you."


    I know I only heard about it, but from what they told me about Ang''s magic, it was so powerful. I don''t know if I can win or not.


    It''s just a spar? It won''t risk anyone''s life? I truly hope that''s the case. But I don''t know how powerful her magic is.


    Ang has grown much stronger. And so am I. So, this is basically our first-time sparring using our new strength. Neither of us know how powerful we are. Though I''m in a better situation because I fought the Vampire King and can calcte how powerful my attack is.


    As for Ang, she hasn''t found any opponents that she can go all out with. That''s why she requested for a sparring session.


    Talking about sparring, I was reminded again back then when we were just students in Introductory school. Back then, she would throw a fireball on myher region. I hope that won''t be the case again.


    "¡­Please put on the camera on each of you so we can watch it. Of course if both of you agree to it," Albert said.


    "I''ll ask Ang first. Though the camera might be destroyed during the fight, so don''t expect too much. Anyway, the fight should be in five days. We will fight in Monsters World," I said.


    "Understood. I hope you two can learn something from your sparring. You two are currently our strongestbatants. And don''t get injured too badly. I don''t want something happened to any of you," Albert said.


    After that, I returned back to Cassau. It''s night so the vampires won''t go out. Though some of them are patrolling with the guards they started to get along with in hope for a sip of blood from any bad guys they found.


    Albert has informed the guards and the one in charge of Cassau about the vampires back after we went to the hospital. They were shocked and scared, but they have started to open up with the vampires and allowed them to go with them patrolling the city.


    I heard that there were some thieves that the vampires have caught. They were unconscious when the vampires drank their blood, so it should be fine since those thieves won''t notice it.


    "How is it, Roy?" Ka asked me as soon as I returned home.


    "Albert will do something about the vampires. Like giving them some sorts of identification and they have to report to the one in charge of the city. It should be fine, right?"


    "So far, they are doing good. I think they can be trusted. But let''s watch over them for a little longer. How about your preparation for the fight?" Ka asked.


    "What preparation? We''re just sparring. Don''t say it as if it''s something huge," I said.


    "It is something huge. The only Aura user, against the only multielement expert mage. It will be something," Ka said.


    Multielement. That''s what Ka called Ang''s element. Since all four of them havebined into one, Ka gave it a name. And she made it easy for me to remember. Good girl, Ka.


    "You might be able to watch it from home. Let''s get to sleep since there are more things for us to do tomorrow. Like vampires and vampires," I said.


    Few days passed after that, and it''s time for Ang and I to fight. There''s no important event during that time. And soon, the two of us will fight.


    There''s no need for a winner in a spar, but I hope that if there''s any, it will be me.

 Chapter 451 - Everyone Is Hyped For Our Spar

    Chapter 451 ¨C Everyone Is Hyped For Our Spar


    Somehow, Ang allowed for our fight to be broadcasted. At least only to those with us. We won''t let it shown to everyone in the world after all.


    I hope the cult doesn''t know yet how to hack the signal and watch our fight. If so, our secret will be leaked. Though I don''t think it''s possible unless they have a genius and someone from another world like Victoria.


    As for a genius, they have the professor. He must be thinking about how the TV and the camera works ever since their first appearance in public during the tournament. Though I don''t think he will understand what a radio wave is. Even I don''t. Only Marie understands it. But if someone from another world told him about it, he will be able to do it.


    Also, it seems like the news spread within us about the spar. Everyone would ask me if I''m prepared, or can they go watch it. It was too annoying.


    Why is someone trying to hype up the fight? It''s only a spar!


    We will only try to attack each other without thinking of hurting the others. That''s what a spar is. Don''t hype it up!


    In the end, those who are close to us will watch it from TVs. Including the four kings.


    Well, I hope this will be a good lesson for everyone to learn. After all, Ang''s magic is one of a kind. What was it called again? Oh, right. Multiememem. I mean multielement.


    ¡­Good thing I didn''t say it out loud. That was too embarrassing if anyone found out I can''t say it correctly.


    It is now one day before the sparring that everyone is getting hyped about. Though I think they will be disappointed by my performance.


    Well, I''m looking for a good ce to fight while flying on top of Andro''s head.


    "You''re going to fight Ang? Why?" Andro asked.


    "Not fighting. It''s sparring. She recently grows much stronger and needed someone she can test her magic on. And since she thinks that I''m a suitable target practice, she asked me. Though if it''s a one on one fight, I have the advantage. But if it''s one against many, she is more powerful. Well, we can only tell how strong she is after the fight," I said.


    "Don''t worry, Roy. You are strong as well. I know that. Not many can endure my Intimidation. You and Ang are the two who can. Wait, that mean she''s about as strong as you are, right? I take back my word. You might be injured during the fight," Andro said.


    "Like I said, it''s a spar! Not a fight!"


    "Doesn''t matter. Either one of you could get injured after all. So, should I fly lower? Andro asked.


    "That''s right. Just low enough for you to fly without hitting anything. I don''t want you to broke your limb from your own weight. Keep flying while I''m looking for a ce for our spar," I said.


    The reason I asked Andro instead of Spot like usual is so I can use Andro''s Intimidation to keep monsters away from the ce Ang and I will fight.


    I don''t want to have other things like weak monsters to be in the way of our spar. It will be too troublesome since I they will be obstacle.


    I know it''s just a spar, but I don''t want to be the loser just because there''s a stray wild boar obstructing me.


    As for Ang, well, she can burn everything including the boar. She should be fine against many opponents at once.


    Against Ang¡­ although I said that I don''t need preparation, I''m doing it right now. What a hypocrite.


    Well, it''s not like I want to fight near ake or any water. Because even if I swim in it, Ang might be able to freeze the wholeke over.


    Trees are fine. they can be used for hiding spots. So, the forest is a good idea.


    But we might end up fighting mostly in the sky. So, even if there aren''t any trees, it''s fine.


    For now, I want a ce without any water in sight. At least within the radius of 10 kms.


    "Found it. Here should be fine," I said after finding a good location.


    It''s a huge forest, and the closest water source is a river. And it''s not that deep, so it should be fine.


    "Should I use it here?" Andro asked if I want him to use Intimidation in this ce.


    "Not yet. Go a bit to the left. Closer. Closer. There. You can use it here. This will be where we start the spar. Though we might end up going everywhere, but this will be where it begins," I said to Andro.


    "Alright. I will use my full strength with my Intimidation here. Endure yourself," Andro said.


    "Give it your best shot!"


    Because I need Andro for his intimidation, Victoria doesn''t want toe with me. Even though she doesn''t really feel it as much as Spot did, she doesn''t like the feeling of being intimidated. That''s why I left her at home. She''s with Arin chatting about whatever it is. I hope she won''t bring Arin or the other vampires to join her in her hobby.


    Andro then used his Intimidation at full strength from the middle of the forest. And I can see many monsters are running away. Some of them copsed, but I can kill themter.


    But his Intimidation was too frightening. Even my legs are shaking because of it. I wonder how the cult can kill him? Just how powerful were they after conquering our world?


    "Nice one. I''ll go and kill the fainted monsters. After I can stand straight," I said.


    "I wish you two the best then. I won''t be able to watch you, but at least I can make sure no monsters near me can approach you," Andro said.


    "Thanks. Still, I wonder why her instinct is telling her to fight me? If it''s magic, she should practice it with other expert level mages. I''m proficient in close-rangebat, while she''s good at long-range. We are notpatible. Just one magic hit me and I would lose already," I said to myself while looking at the ce we''re going to fight in.


    "Maybe she has that much faith in you? I don''t know since I''m just your new friend, but isn''t she the one who knows you the longest?" Andro asked.


    "Well, the only thing I can do is to not disappoint her then."


    Now, what do I do? Should I borrow Sophie''s fis stocking? I don''t want to wear it.


    Maybe I''ll get a magic cloak like the bandit leader''s use? I still have it in my room.


    That might help. And with the cloak, I can hide my hands inside. Which will make Ang confused.


    ¡­nah, I won''t wear it. If I''m going all out, I need to lessen the weight on my body as much as possible. I might fight while only wearing my pants tomorrow. Though Victoria will be my armor. She''s light and have high endurance.


    I guess this is it for the preparation. There''s nothing else I can do.


    I bid my farewell to Andro before returning back to Cassau. Everyone is getting prepared in the base with a huge TV so everyone can watch it. Just why is everyone so hyped about a sparring?


    "Wee back! Did you find a good ce?" Sophie asked after greeting me.


    "At least it''s a good ce to start our spar. I don''t know if we will move somewhere during the fight. Where''s Ang?" I asked.


    "She''s taking a quest from the guild. She said that it''s boring to just wait and want to do some quests as a warm-up," Sophie said.


    "Well, I guess I should do something as well. It''s been a while, so I guess I''ll go diving and get some money," I said before leaving the base.


    It''s been a while since I went diving. Way before I started training in Monsters World to raise my level.


    Another reason is that because Ang is taking a quest onnd, I need to do something that will not bother her. And fighting underwater monsters will help the fishermen be safe and they can catch more fishes.


    Though since I have looted a lot of treasures nearby, I think I need to go further and deeper.


    And since I''m going diving, it''s easy if I bring Spot with me. He''s faster than me.


    He brought me much further than where I used to dive. We even passing by his child who is protecting this area of the sea.


    As Spot is a Sea Serpent as well, I don''t need to cast Air magic on him. I only needed to use it on myself as I found ship wreckages and started looting the unopened boxes. I transported them all to Sam''s warehouse directly so her subordinates can take care of it. This should be enough to cover all the spending by the vampires.


    Just like that, the day passes and it''s the day for the spar. We scheduled it during the night when everyone is not busy so they can watch it.


    ¡­They hyped our spar because they are bored.. Just another thing that humans would do.

 Chapter 452 - The Day Of The Spar

    Chapter 452 ¨C The Day Of The Spar


    The next day, I was woken up by Ang in the morning. Despite Candy is sleeping next to me and the both of us are naked, Ang entered my room without a care. Though it seems that Victoria is quick to react as she turned into a nket to cover us both.


    "Roy! It''s the day for the spar! Wake up!" Ang shouted.


    "Hnn¡­ the spar was scheduledter in the evening. Not in the morning. Let me sleep a bit longer," I said.


    Because of her shout, Candy is awake as well. Though I think she has been awake before I do.


    "Ang, can''t you wait a little longer? The both of us are naked here," Candy said.


    "Oh, sorry! I didn''t know you''re here!" Ang said.


    "I thought it''s alreadymon for everyone here to know that Roy would sleep with someone at night. Thanks to Victoria, you didn''t see something that will embarrass you. The spar will beter in the evening. How about you warm up with me first? Let''s go after I have breakfast," Candy said.


    "Okay! I''ll be waiting!"


    Ang left my room after that. She seems to be impatient to start our sparring session right away.


    Well, today, I also need to watch the vampires for a bit. Although they seem to be able to blend in, it''s best to keep watch on them for now.


    "How can she enter the room of a man who has many lovers so easily? Didn''t she know that we might do something that might scare her for life?" Candy asked.


    "What thing? What will scare her? She''s a romantic person who is looking for the right man, so she of course has quite the imagination. The spar today makes her so impatient that she forgot about everything. I hope she can find the right person that can stop her from being wild," I said.


    "What about you? Why won''t you be her lover?" Candy asked.


    "Like I said, she''s looking for romance. And I can''t give her that," I replied.


    "But if she''s the one asking, you will agree, right?" Victoria asked.


    "Obviously. By the way, you sure are used to seeing my night activities now. Is voyeur your new hobby?" I asked Victoria.


    "Although I write amazing stories, I still write some normal stuffs of rtionship between man and woman. I don''t always write about rtionship between men, you know?" Victoria said.


    "Yeah, yeah. Candy, don''t get injured in the warm up. Ang is too excited today, so she might use stronger magic because of it," I said to Candy who is rising from the bed.


    "I know. You can sleep a little longer," Candy said as she''s getting dressed and left my room.


    "Wait! I''ming too!"


    Seems like Victoria wants to watch Ang and Candy warming up.


    Well, even if Victoria sees what Ang can do, it doesn''t mean that Ang will use the same magicter.


    Maybe Ang would even use something totally new? She has that capabilities after all. It might be a difficult fight, but I doubt either one of us will be injured badly. It''s just a spar after all.


    After sleeping some more, I woke up during lunch time. And there''s a feast in the dining hall.


    "¡­It''s just a spar, so howe it became something to celebrate?" I asked Lina.


    "It''s not just a spar. It''s something that you and Ang will use everything you have in. So, I prepared nice meal for you two. Enjoy them," Lina said.


    Just what is wrong with everyone? Well, not that I would reject delicious meal in front of me.


    Ang also seems to have returned from warming up. And when I look at Candy, it seems that she got slightly hurt from training with Ang. Though she has been healed by Ka, I can still see the remains of the injuries inside her body. Just how much did they fight?


    After lunch, Ang drank a lot of mana potions and said that she''s going to rest in her room. Did she spend too much magic just for training?


    "Candy, what did you two do? It''s not just a warm up?" I asked Candy.


    "Well, I wanted to test my full power as well. But it seems that she''s way stronger than me. Don''t worry, I''m fine now," Candy replied.


    "That''s good. Next time, try not to injure yourself in training. You are precious to me," I said.


    "¡­Roy, even if you think that it will just be a spar, don''t think of it lightly. Ang will go all outter. ept her intention well, or you will be the one who got hurt," Candy said.


    Seems like she knows that Ang won''t hold back. I''ll keep that in mind.


    Maybe I need to find a bigger ce. 10 kms radius seems to be small now.


    After lunch, Sonia suddenly appears in front of me.


    "Roy. Kron is calling for you. He''s in Bernard''s mansion," Sonia said.


    Kron? That''s rare for him to call for me. In fact, it has never happened before.


    As for being in Bernard''s mansion, after the battle against the vampires, Kron and Fabio ended up bing good friends. And he said that he will help Fabio and King Harold for the time being, until they recapture Arturo back. I don''t know how long that is, but with Kron at their side, I can rest easy.


    As I arrive at Bernard''s mansion, I was greeted by a fist from Kron.


    "You little fucker!" Kron shouted.


    I easily caught his punch and asked him what''s wrong.


    "What the hell is wrong with you?"


    "I''m just jealous!"


    "Why are you jealous?"


    "Various reason!"


    "And you''re venting it on me?"


    "Yes!"


    ¡­I don''t get this guy sometimes.


    "Sure, sure. Throw your punches as you like. I will block all of them though," I said.


    While being watched by the royalties of this kingdom, Kron keep venting his anger by attacking me. as long as it''s just physical attacks, it''s easy for me to stop them.


    "Anyway, what happened?" I asked again after Kron is tired.


    "You''re going to spar with Ang, right? Kron asked once as well, but he lost miserably. I guess when everyone is hyping up your spar, he thinks that he''s weak. That''s why he''s angry," Fabio exined.


    "¡­that''s stupid," I said.


    "It''s okay. I''m calm now. Sorry for troubling you," Kron said after he calmed down.


    Of course that was thanks to me using calming gas on him.


    "So, what''s wrong? I doubt that''s the only reason you asked me toe, right?" I asked them.


    "You''re going to broadcast your fight, right? Make sure that the camera won''t bet broken at all time because of your fight. I want to watch how powerful you two are," Kron said.


    "That''s it? Like, seriously? Just why is everyone hyping up about this spar? We did a lot of sparring even before this, but it never became this big," I asked.


    "No matter what, it has be too big among us. Just show us what you got. This will make other people who watched it feel more motivated to get stronger. Isn''t that what you want?" Harold said.


    "¡­fine. Though I don''t know about the camera being destroyed or not since I will focus more on the spar than the camera. If that''s all, I''ll be going home."


    Basically, everyone wanted to watch this more than the previous tournament. When I say everyone, it means our allies.


    I heard that not only the kings. Those who they can trust also received TVs and can watch them. Including in Mellian and Melk.


    Isn''t it too much for just a spar? And Ang will go all out? Is she going with the intent to kill?


    Sigh¡­ I need toy on the bed until tonight to set my mind in the right mindset for the spar. Seems like I can''t be as rxed as I thought I would be.


    I onlye out of my room for dinner, which is just a light meal since I''ll be moving a lot. They are filling, but not enough to make my stomach full. Still, perfect to eat before battle.


    "Ang, are you ready?"


    Ang was also staying in her room resting after her training with Candy. She has a serious expression on her face.


    "I''m ready," Ang said.


    "Then, we''ll be leaving. Don''t get your hopes up thinking that it will be an intense battle," I said before opening a portal for the two of us to enter.


    But other than us and Victoria who can''t be separated from me, Sonia also entered the portal.


    "You''re going to watch us fight? Be careful not to die," I said.


    "Don''t worry. I''m a ghost. And the only thing that can hurt me is your Aura. As for that, don''t forget that even if I look like this, I used to be an Aura user as well. At least as long as your attack is not targeted at me, I can easily dodge it. I''ll be invisible most of the time, so don''t mind me."


    After saying that, Sonia then disappears. But I can still see her. Though I''m pretty good at ignoring, so it should be fine.


    We are in the forest that I checked yesterday. And now that I looked at the surrounding again, there are no monsters nearby. Thanks to Andro''s intimidation.


    "Roy, are you ready?" Ang asked.


    "Shall we?"


    And with that, the sparring that everyone hyped up too much is begun.

 Chapter 453 - The Spar Started

    Chapter 453 ¨C The Spar Started


    Ang''s expression turned serious as the spar was about to begin.


    Man, just looking at her, I can tell that she''s strong. At least at the moment, she''s stronger than that mohawk artificial master level mage that I fought before.


    Well, at that time, that mohawk was underestimating us and didn''t use her full strength. So, before she knew it, her body can''t take any damage anymore.


    But Ang is different. There''s no opening at all. I feel like if I get closer to her, she will keep her distance using flight magic.


    ¡­isn''t this a totally unfair match? She''s even faster than me!


    The only thing I can do to get close to her is using portal. That should be easy if I opened a portal on the Blobby she has.


    But this is a spar, so let''s not do that. Though if I managed to stick a Blobby on her, it should be fine if I opened a portal there.


    Well, since she''s serious, I should be serious as well. I guess this is why everyone told me to be careful. They know that Ang will think of it as a real match.


    And it will be disrespectful if I didn''t treat it as one as well.


    Well, for those watching, don''t me us if the cameras are broken during our fight.


    Maybe I should have asked Sonia who is watching to carry one? She can grab a light object after all. It should be easy for her as she''s the only one who can watch this fight without being afraid of dying.


    I grabbed my Reizpear, and transformed Victoria into my armor. Just with enough gap for the camera on my chest to see in front of me.


    The fight has started. There''s no need for a signal. We both know that, but neither of us make a move.


    We can''t go on like this, so I made the first move.


    I''m in a normal stance of spear-wielding, with the tip of Reizpear is aimed at Ang since the start.


    I clenched the shaft of the spear strongly so I can push it forward with the slightest movement at the right moment. Even though we''re facing each other, I''m still going to use a sneak attack.


    She''s a powerful mage, so if I use magic, she will know it right away. But that''s not the case if I use Aura. There''s no way for her to know that.


    I looked into her heart to see when is the right time to attack. I''m going to attack her when she''s the most rxed, in between her heartbeat.


    Although she''s just standing there, she''s not rxing at all. Still, she''s just a human. She will have a single moment when she''s rxed even during this tense atmosphere.


    That''s the same for me as well, though with Victoria covering my whole body, I doubt Ang can tell when I am rxed.


    I need to move my hand as fast and as strong as possible, during that moment.


    And that moment is¡­ NOW!


    In a gap between her heartbeats, I pushed my spear forward as strong as possible, and use my Aura and will to push my attack forward. This way, even if my spear can''t reach her, my attack can still reach her.


    This should be perfect. A one hit kill. With just one attack, Ang will be defeated.


    In fact, I used a lot of power enough to kill someone. Even a powerful monster with strong defense.


    But that''s not the case with Ang.


    Somehow, she can react quick enough to block my attack. She raised an Earth and an Ice Wall at the same time. And not just that, she also jumped sideway to dodge my attack.


    The thrust I throw managed to break the doubleyer wall down, and it scratched only on Ang''s shirt as she managed to dodge it.


    Even though I should have caught her by surprise, she managed to dodge it. As expected of a genius. Not only she''s a genius in magic, she''s a genius in fighting as well.


    But I can''t be rxed yet. Her attack ising!


    She casted several fireballs at me, but I''m faster than her attack.


    Although I''m slower, my attacking speed is faster. It''s because I am trained for it, while she needs the help of wind magic to make her faster. With this speed, I can move Reizpear fast enough to sh at all the fireballs she throws.


    But those are just distractions as she used Wind sh at me. A normal Wind sh is already faster than a Fireball, but her Wind sh is much faster than normal.


    I can''t pull back my spear in time to stop the Wind sh, but I still have Victoria.


    My left hand which is covered by gauntlet, transformed into a katana as I shed on the Wind sh.


    In just a short moment, we exchanged attacks. I managed to hit her clothes, while she couldn''t even put a scratch on my Victoriarmor.


    But does that mean I''m the winner? No. In the first ce, as a mage, she has more advantage than me.


    Should I summon Shelia and Graham? I shouldn''t. This is a spar, and I''m the one she asked. The only time I use my summoning magic is when I need to use portals. Not to call my familiars.


    After I shed her Wind sh, I ran toward Ang in hope to close the distance. But as I exined before, she''s faster than me and can maintain the distance to her advantage.


    Maybe because she saw my thrust from before, she can tell at what distance my attack can be dodged. She''s about a few steps farther than when we started, which mean she can dodge it now if I use the same attack with the same speed.


    What a scary girl. She noticed that with just one exchange. And how she maintained that same distance is annoying.


    Still, that attack was not my fastest attack from the distance. Don''t forget about my Victogun.


    "Sigh¡­ someone in full armor wielding a gun? In my world, that doesn''t make sense at all," Victoria said as the katana on my left changed into a gun.


    I heard that they are from different era. Armor and a gun. Maybe the armor that I had her transformed to. There are other types of armor after the inventions of guns, but for my fighting style, the older version of armor from her world is most suited.


    Now that I''m also an advanced level air mage, I canpress more air in a smaller space. Which mean the bullet I shot will be faster than my thrust. before


    Although the damage is weaker, it''s still a fast attack. At this distance, Ang shouldn''t be able to dodge it.


    As I shot the bullet, Ang didn''t expect it at all as she''s slow to react. But she''s still a powerful mage as she casted a quick Wind Shield to protect herself from the bullet.


    But with her being busy with protecting herself from my shot, there''s no way she could concentrate on attacking me, right?


    I was wrong.


    Even though she''s using her wind magic to move and to defend herself, she can still use other magic at the same time to attack me as the ground under me turned sharp and several Earth Spikes about to pierce through my body.


    Just how powerful is she now?


    With my quick reaction, I managed to dodge them all. But I purposely didn''t jump high to the sky.


    Although being in the sky means that she won''t be able to use her earth magic, it will still be disadvantageous for me to fight in the air since she''s faster than me. Being in the ground is much better.


    Once I''m in the sky, I bet that she won''t let mee down at all. That will be bad.


    That''s why I prefer to be on the ground despite the danger of her earth magic.


    As I was about to shoot her again, I was blocked by a huge Ice Wall.


    The Ice Wall in front of me then get closer to me, and the shape changed from just a normal wall, into a sphere that surrounds me. I''m being locked inside this igloo.


    The weird thing is, it''s not cold at all! In fact, it''s the opposite! It''s freaking hot inside here!


    This must be what the others told me. About how her ice magic can be hot, and her fire magic can be cold.


    This is dangerous as I won''t be able to react quicklyter. What if the wind is cold or hot when she attacks me?


    For now, I can endure this heat. It''s not as hot as it was when I was in the volcano. But I need to get out of here quickly before she depletes my energy.


    Breaking the igloo was easy, but I need to break it somewhere Ang won''t be able to react. Good thing I can see her through the igloo.


    I can see where she is, but I didn''t destroy the wall in front of her. I destroyed the wall on the opposite side instead. She won''t be able to attack me right away, but she can gain her distance.


    Still, I have portals with me.. But for now, I won''t use it until she''s totally not prepared for it.

 Chapter 454 - The Waiting Game

    Chapter 454 ¨C The Waiting Game


    As soon as I got out of the igloo, Ang trapped me again. This time, I''m inside an earth dome. And it''s also hot in here.


    "Sigh¡­ does she really think that she can beat me if I''m trapped inside?" I said to myself.


    "Roy, don''t be overconfident. It''s hot in here, so she''s going to deplete your energy. What will you do now? If you go out again, you will be attacked again," Victoria asked.


    "For now, nothing," I said.


    "Nothing?"


    "Although we spare a lot in the past, and she gained a lot of experiences fighting various people, there''s one type of enemy that she has never experienced fighting against. Someone who won''t do anything. I''m being trapped? That''s right. I can escape anytime I want, but I will stay here for now. She has experienced fighting against Ka who is smart. And she''s trying to win against me by using traps. She needs to know that I can provoke her just by doing nothing. Sonia, I know you''re here. Don''t tell Ang about what I just said. She needs to understand it herself," I said to an empty spot. I know that Sonia is there, but she didn''t reply.


    Ang has be much stronger. But she needs to know that there are many kinds of opponents that she will fight. And I will provoke her by not doing anything.


    She''s wasting her mana on depleting my energy, but did she forget I can use portal? Maybe that''s what she''s waiting for. She might have realized that the Blobbybullets that I shot before are still there for me to transfer to with my portal. But I won''t do anything for now.


    The other watching can also learn a thing or two from not doing anything. It''s good since I can rest as well.


    Inside the Earth Dome, I transformed Victoria into a bed and a nket. Ang won''t know that I''m using this chance to rest. She should have used brute force even more instead of letting me rest. As for the heat, I can survive the heat in a volcano. This much is no problem.


    I guess this is something she needs to improve on. Any heating out of her magic outside fire magic, won''t be as hot as when she''s using fire magic. She will only waste her own mana doing this.


    I don''t care if the others who are watching are angry at me for not doing anything. It''s their own fault if they think that the battle will be intense the whole time.


    We have two cameras. One is on me, and the other is on Ang. As for those who are watching, they put two TVs side by side. One will broadcast it from my point of view, and the other will be from Ang''s point of view.


    It must be weird for them to see one screen is dark, while the other only shows a picture of this Earth Dome I''m in without moving. I know because I can see Ang is looking here.


    Do I really just need to rest and not do anything? That''s right.


    I can also do the same thing like before. During our first exchange.


    I can wait until she''s rxed and attacked her out of nowhere. This time, she really won''t expect it since she can''t see me inside the dome.


    Maybe she''s waiting for me to use portal? She can sense magic after all.


    But that''s not my problem. I can rest here with my Aura. Though I won''t use it all the time since I need to save some energy.


    I mostly depend on Victoria. But a nket in this heat? At least there''s a bed.


    I can also use portal to grab some water to drink, but if Ang noticed that I used magic without escaping from this ce, she will know what I''m doing.


    So, I just do nothing. Nothing until she started realizing something is wrong.


    I''m a patient man. In fact, it''s my dream to not do anything in a peaceful world. Not doing anything in this ce is something easy for me to do, so that''s exactly what I''m doing.


    As I keep waiting, suddenly something is changed. The heat is gone. It''s back to the normal temperature again.


    I guess Ang has realized what I''m doing as she doesn''t want to waste anymore mana. But fifteen minutes is quite long for her to realize it, right? I should be proud about it.


    But I''m still trapped in this Earth Dome. Though she doesn''t need to use her magic anymore to maintain this dome.


    I can see her sweating. She must be stressed from not seeing my reaction at all for fifteen minutes, and keep being wary at all times. That will only tire herself out.


    I guess it''s about time for me to go out. And I do it in a simr way like our first exchange.


    I stand in my stance, preparing to thrust at her. But I only have my right hand on the spear, as my left is changed into a huge shield.


    The purpose of the shield is for me to break through the dome and charge at her. Even though she stepped back and get more distance than before, as long as I caught her unprepared, she will still get some damage.


    It''s waiting game for both of us. But since she can''t see me, I''m at advantage. Still, the two of us have a lot of pressure just by waiting.


    Ang is sweating a lot more, but I don''t care. Though my mind will be distracted easily if it takes too long.


    Let''s use calming gas for a bit.


    And as soon as I used it on myself, Ang jolted. She reacted just from that little bit of magic.


    Come on, Ang. I know that this shouldn''t be how you fight. But doing something like this won''t do you any good. Just use your magic instead of waiting. You''re much better in brute force than strategizing.


    Maybe she realized that a long battle is disadvantageous for her, she changed her fight. She made the Earth Dome shrink to capture me.


    Now that she used magic on the earth, I don''t think I can destroy it easily. But I still charged forward anyway.


    With a huge shield to charge through the dome, I destroyed the wall.


    I also changed the grip on my spear into a back hand. It''s to throw Reizpear at her.


    That''s right. Although I can thrust my spear and the attack can get farther with my Aura and will, there''s a simpler way to attack from distance. By throwing the spear.


    As soon as I see her in an unobstructed view, I threw the spear away like a javelin. Reizpear flew forward in a low altitude, but the power is enough to reach Ang before it hits the ground.


    Ang never expected me to throw my weapon away. And as it was infused with my Aura, it has power to break through the barriers she hastily puts.


    But on thest second, she used Ice Armor to stop the spear. Only the tip of Reizpear reached her arm, and only grazed the skin. She bleeds, but it''s not something that she will have a trouble over.


    Another thing she didn''t expect is that right after I threw Reizpear, I transformed Victoria into a whip and threw it. The whip follows the path of the spear, so it won''t be stopped by the barriers she puts.


    The whip reached her, and I had Victoria to wrap it around waist before pulling Ang to me.


    "Endure it," I said to Ang, as I throw a fist at her gut.


    My punch was strong enough to break three of her ribs, but this is not a punch to finish the fight. Just a punch for a warning.


    As she falls in the ground in pain while holding her stomach, I shouted at her.


    "What the hell is wrong with you!? Trapping me? That''s not how you fight! Just because you got stronger, you think you can fight smarter? Use brute force! That''s what you''re good at! Don''t think too much and fight however you like!"


    This is something that I keep in my mind for a while since the fight started. Although I used calming gas before, it''s something that won''t get off of my mind.


    Why would she do something that is so unlike her? Keeping her distance was fine, but trapping me? Did she think she get smarter after breaking through?


    Probably after breaking through, she has sparred with several other people. Those I know are just Shelia and Candy. And because she keeps winning, she became overconfident and tried to use the same thing that she did on them to me.


    That''s a big mistake.


    If I''m just another mage, that might be the correct answer. But I''m an Aura user.


    "If you still fight like this, I''ll finish you right now! What''s your answer!?"


    She slowly stands up while holding the ce I punched her, and looked at me.


    "¡­sorry. Seems like I''m not myself. I''ll fight you for real from now on," Ang said.


    "Good. Come!"


    This is where the real fight begins. I need to keep Ang in her ce. To make her not being overconfident anymore, I have to defeat her.. I will no longer think of this as a normal spar anymore.

 Chapter 455 - The End Of The Spar

    Chapter 455 ¨C The End Of The Spar


    Now that Ang will go all out for real this time, my chance of winning is lowered. Though I hope the depleted mana and her broken ribs will help me win it, but it seems that it won''t.


    Ang used Ice Armor tightly around the part where her broken rib is. That should reduce her pain. But is she okay with the cold? Maybe it''s not cold at all for her.


    If I want to, I can win the match easily back then before she goes all out. Back when she''s only trying to trap me and do whatever it is she''s nning.


    But I can''t do that. If I did, Ang won''t be able to see how powerful she is. She will not use her usual way of fighting.


    Using her head means that she''s getting smarter. But if doing that makes her growth pace slower, I won''t let her.


    As someone who asked her to get stronger, I have responsibility to make her strong enough so she can survive against the cult.


    Like several others, Ang doesn''t really need to join me fighting the cult. But because of just one meeting, everything changes.


    I know that she would fight the cult willingly in the future if I let her be, but I told her my story and the future as well, and she decided to help me. I won''t let her good intention goes to waste.


    "Are youing or what?" I provoked Ang.


    "Prepare yourself, Roy," Ang replied.


    "Says the unprepared one who got her ribs broken."


    Without a care that I''m an expert in fighting closebat, Ang flies toward me while shooting several magic. And they are all of different element as well. Fire, ice, wind, and earth.


    I can sh the fire and wind to stop them, but for the ice and earth magic, even if I shed them, unless they are destroyedpletely, the pieces will still continue going my way and hit me. Though with Victoriarmor, they don''t mean much. Still, they are magic. It''s best to not get hit at all.


    Reizpear is now on the ground because I threw it, but I attached a Blobby on it so I can get it back anytime I want. For now, it''s best to fight Ang first without grabbing it.


    With Victoria as my katana as well, I charged forward and shed it at Ang, but she stopped it with her barriers. This time, she''s really going all out as she doesn''t care how much mana she''s wasting. But what about the time I was trapped? Did that not amount much at all? She didn''t deplete much mana as I thought it should be? Seems like I''m the one underestimating her.


    But I can still attack continuously. If my attack is stopped, then I can just attack again until the barrier is broken. But as I was about to swing the katana for the second time, Ang disappears from in front of me.


    She''s not above, but below. She''s burrowing herself into the ground. Did she think that my attack can''t reach there?


    Well, I don''t know about it myself since I never attacked the earth. But there''s a first in everything, right?


    I shed my katana on the ground while it was imbued with Aura and my will. The result? The ground is splitting. While it was not as powerful as Celestine''s magic that split the earth, I can still reach Ang. Because I''m focused the attack on her alone.


    Still, her movement underground is like a fish in the sea. She''s not as free as in the sky, but she can easily move and dodge my attack.


    Seems like she enters the ground so she can rest for a while after getting her ribs broken. But I won''t let her. It was her own mistake that makes her injured. Should I enter the ground?


    While I was thinking about entering the ground, the ground is rising. And from it, a golem was created.


    It was not as smooth as the golem that Ka created during her match against Ang, but this is still an earth golem that a powerful expert level mage created. Seems like fighting onnd is a mistake. I should have fight in the sky from the start. She also won''t be able to use magic to trap me.


    Well, I guess that''s that. I need to take care of this golem first if I want to defeat Ang who is currently catching her breath.


    Still, an earth golem is no match against an Aura user. I destroyed it in an instant to see¡­ there are ten more of them.


    Just ten? She should be able to use more. I guess she doesn''t want to use too much as she has more magic to test. But this is not enough!


    I defeated all ten golems easily, and shed on the ground again to attack Ang. But Ang seems to have rested enough to calm her mind, and rise from the ground.


    Hmm¡­ this is bad.


    Ang appears with both her hands in front of her, and attacked me instantly. Using magic of four elements at once. She''s thinking of finishing the match sooner and use her finishing move.


    I got the feeling that this is not something that I can sh. Even if I shed it, I can only stop one element as the other can still reach me. I need to block it.


    I transformed the katana into a big shield imbued with my Aura, and blocked the magic. But even if I used all my power, I still got pushed back.


    After her attack stopped, I quickly shoot at her with Victogun. She dodged it, but as soon as the Blobbybullet misses its target, I used a portal to appear behind Ang.


    The bullet I shot wasn''t that fast, so once it was dodged, I opened a portal to where the bullet is and Ang is within my arm reach as I threw another punch at her. My punch destroyed her Ice Armor, and broke more of her ribs.


    "Gotcha."


    No, it wasn''t me who said that. It was Ang.


    Right after I punched her, she used her fire magic to cover the area we are in with fire. This is not something I can dodge and cut.


    The magic I can cut is something that is thrown at me, not something that can stay in ce like this because even if I cut it, the fire will not be extinguished right away and can still grow back. Though if it has a source, I can cut it. But the source of the fire is Ang herself, so I need to defeat her if I want to escape.


    Worse of all, the fire that touched my body was frozen and turned into a hot ice. I''m instantly being covered by a zing ice. Although I have Victoriarmor, it wasn''t enough to stop the heat. And it''s hotter than when I was being trapped.


    I guess we reached the climax of the fight. Since Ang is too injured to test more of her magic, she wants to finish it right here.


    I feel like my skin is melting, but I don''t care. I need to defeat Ang quickly.


    But as I was about to finish her, the match is over. Ang can no longer stand as she fainted from the pain of getting hit.


    I just got her twice, but the match is over. I guess I punched her too hard.


    Still, although the fire has gone, the ice isn''t! Still able to be maintained even though the mage has fainted? Talk about a cheat.


    This just proves that Ang is on another level. Though I still defeated her.


    But since the hot ice is only on Victoriarmor, and didn''t reach my body at all, I can get them off of me easily. I just need to get Victoria transformed away from my body.


    The ice separated from Victoria and dropped to the ground. They even burned the grass. Ice burning the grass? Talk about magic.


    "Sigh¡­ she has way more potential than that, but she started it in a wrong way," I said as I picked Ang up. The sparring session is over and the winner is obvious.


    I don''t feel sorry at all to those who were hyped from the spar. But it''s still a good lesson for them to not be overconfident just by reaching new level of strength.


    "I''ll be going to the hospital to operate on her broken ribs. I''ll take Sophie and Ka with me," I said to the camera. This way, Sophie and Ka will be ready to go.


    Though if it''s the two of them, they should have prepared to leave from the start since they know that someone will get injured.


    I thought that since it''s just a spar, the injury won''t be this bad. It was supposed to be Ang testing her power with me as her guinea pig, but we didn''t get to see her use everything.


    Still, that fire around her and how it froze around me to burn me alive was a good one. No matter who got hit, the ice will be stuck on them for a long time.


    And the golem as well. She needs to learn more from Ka on how to create a smoother golem with smoother movement. Once she did, she can summon golem to do the fighting. Though I doubt she will like that. But it''s good enough to support her.


    Now that the spar is over, the surgery will begin. She''s going to be fine. After all, I am the best surgeon in the world.. At least for now.

 Chapter 456 - Her Change Of Heart

    Chapter 456 ¨C Her Change Of Heart


    "How is it?" Sophie asked me as I was checking on Ang''s body with my Divine Vision.


    "She fainted because of the pain. I punched her too hard for her to endure. I guess no matter how powerful your magic is, if you are not used to pain, you will still end up losing with just two hits. It''s no wonder that the so-called Evil God is afraid of Aura users. They can''t take damage. Although in the war we will fight mostly mages, we need to prepare about the monsters they will use and have our body well-protected," I said.


    "But it''s not like we can just start training our body now," Ka said.


    Before I said anything, I turned the cameras on me and Ang off so that no one can hear us. though I will still tell some people about it.


    "The Blobbies I gave you should be able to turn into a flexible armor that won''t hinder your movements. Learn to transform those Blobbies at will. If your Blobbies aren''t enough to form into some sort of protector, tell me so I can give you more. I can''t tell this to everyone because everyone will want it. Also, have Sam to gather as many protective equipment as possible to give to everyone. Something light and easy to move in for mages," I said.


    I thought that a mage should have more advantage against an Aura user who fight in close range. But because of Ang''s blunder of not fighting in the way she used to, I can win with just two punches. Although those punches were not at my full strength, it was still strong.


    If we fought monsters that fight in closebat during the war, we will lose. Even the Artificial Master level mage I fought, the mohawk girl, had a stronger body than most mages.


    I told everyone to train their body, but the most that they did is to train their speed and stamina. Not endurance of their body. But as long as they keep the fight from distance, they should be able to win.


    I don''t want them to focus on other strength. They can continue practicing their magic. Probably, by improving their barrier magic, or have them use magic to create armor like Ang did.


    "Ang is fine if you cast healing magic on her ribs and her inner organs around this area. She doesn''t lose any blood at all. Just a good rest and she will recover quickly," I said while pointing on the area where the ribs are broken.


    "No need for surgery? Then why are we here?" Sophie asked.


    "I''m panicked, okay? If the strongest mage among us got injured too badly, I can''t calm down," I said.


    With that, there''s nothing else that Sophie and I could do. But if there''s something I forgot¡­


    "Ah! I forgot to bring Sonia back with us. Well, she can travel here on her own. It should be fine," I said.


    "But it will take time, right?" Sophie asked.


    "But it should be fine. Ka, if you''re done, we''re going home."


    After Ka finished healing Ang, I carried Ang back and let her rest in her room. I also see other people who watched, and they told me that they learned a lot.


    Just what did they learn? The sparring session was over too quickly in a disappointing way. Ang could be much stronger than that, but she chooses to fight different way. Well, at least now Ang knows to not use the same method of fighting, unless it''s against an opponent who is clearly weaker than her.


    Her strategy is good for capturing the enemy, but not good for a fight. Though if I''m not being covered by Victoriarmor, I might be the one losing the spar in the end. Getting burned by ice is a painful way to lose. Not just for the body, but also for the mind.


    And element with the property of another element will make anyone who is unprepared lose their mind while screaming in pain.


    If Ang used thatst magic from the start, I would never be able to get close to her at all. The chance of victory is zero.


    Now that the spar is over, I will have to return to watching over the vampires for the next three weeks. After that, I need to prepare for the raid. Though I can have the others watching over the vampires. I doubt they will break the rules after seeing how much fun they have in this world.


    Although the extremely hyped spar is over, I''m not tired at all. I even managed to get some rest during the spar. I guess I''ll find something to do.


    I''ll just watch the vampires who are helping the guards keeping the city safe. Seems like Arin is also helping them today.


    "How is it? Have you adapted to this world?" I asked Arin as soon as I reached her. We''re on a rooftop of a building.


    "Pretty much, yeah. It''s a good ce," Arin replied.


    "What about your desire to drink blood?"


    "It''s not bad. We even received blood bag from the hospital thanks to you. Although drinking it directly tastes better, it''s still good enough for us. Though I want to ask you to get some blood form stronger people," Arin said.


    "Can''t do that. Unless they are near their expiration date. I guess the closest time you can have one is in a month after someone donated their blood," I said.


    I have told our friends about the benefit of donating blood. And some of our expert level mages have done it right away after I told them. Once the expiration date of the blood is discovered, there will be more blood for the vampires to have. Though we can''t let them drink any blood donated by our friends until they are near expiration date.


    As for the blood of the royalties, the vampires won''t get a taste of them. Albert said it''s just in case someone is trying to do something with the blood of royalties.


    "That''s fine. At least we can use the expiring blood to good use. Though I hope they won''t taste bad," Arin said.


    "By the way, there''s a thief entering that shop. What do you want to do?" I said to her while pointing at the shop the thief entered.


    "I didn''t notice that. I''ll knock him out and drink his blood. Oh, there seems to be rumors spreading in the city about vampires. Not a bad rumor though. It''s just about us drinking blood of bad guys," Arin said.


    "If the people can ept you, you might not need to live in hiding anymore. I''ll try to have Albert get his people to spread more rumors about vampires around the kingdom. This way, once you are truly needed, you won''t have to hide yourself about being a vampire. Well, that might take a long time so be patient," I said.


    "Don''t worry. At least I enjoy this life. I''ll be leaving first. I have a thief to catch," Arin said as she flew to where the thief is. I don''t think he''s a powerful mage, but even if he''s powerful, I doubt he can do anything to Arin.


    After walking around in the night, I returned back with my portal to my room to see that Ang is there waiting for me.


    "You need to rest more. You just had your ribs broken," I said.


    "Roy. Do you think I can be as powerful as me from your past life? I think even though we''re the same person, we have different reason to grow stronger," Ang asked.


    "You''re worrying about that? That Ang doesn''t exist in this world. And you''re already much stronger than when I witnessed her power back then. Even if you have different reason to grow stronger, that''s not a problem as long as you still want to get stronger," I replied.


    "¡­I was too proud with my new strength that I thought I can do other things. But I guess fighting the normal way is what you like most, right?"


    Liking her way of fighting? I never thought of that at all. I said that because I know she is much more powerful if she used magic normally. No need to think much about n or strategy, and use brute force to break through everything. That''s the simplest and easiest way to fight.


    "Rather than the way of fighting that I like, I like the Ang who fight that way. You are best in using brute force to defeat your enemies and I like that. Ka is best at using her brain and I like that. The others also the same. Lina''s cooking, Sophie''s desire to learn medicine, Candy''s way of thinking as a former spy, and everyone as well. Do what you''re good at and what you want. From our spar, I can tell that even though you are trying to trap me, you don''t look like you wanted to do it. That will only make you weaker," I said.


    "I see. Sorry about the spar. I''m not myself at the time," Ang said.


    "Get some rest. You need it. I don''t know what happened with you that make you think you''re not yourself, but I hope you can solve it. Good night," I said.


    "¡­good night," Ang said before leaving my room.


    Now, it''s just Victoria and me.


    "What?" I asked Victoria who is watching me.


    "You know why she''s here, right?" Victoria asked.


    "I''m not that dense. Of course I know. Though I don''t know how she changed," I said.


    "Then, what''s your answer?"


    "The same as usual. I won''t make a move, but if she does first, I''ll ept her."


    "Sigh¡­ you know that she has fallen for you. Why won''t you be the one confessing if you''re going to ept anyway?"


    I know that Ang has somehow fallen for me. Though I don''t know why.


    She was someone who is long for romance. I know that back when I first be Ka''s lover. And she should have known that I''m not a romantic man at all.


    "Anyway, she knows that I won''t make a move on her. I guess she''s still sorting her mind before she can be forward with her feeling. I''ll wait for her until then. Though if she ended up going with another man, that''s fine as well as long as she''s happy."


    With how close we are to war; I don''t want to have my mind upied with trying to get another woman to be my lover. If she confesses, I''ll agree. If she won''t confess, I won''t do anything.


    I need to destroy the cult until I can be at peace. No matter how many women I have, as long as the cult exist, I won''t have a peace of mind.


    "¡­your trauma is so severe," Victoria said.


    "¡­you''re right."

 Chapter 457 - Vampires Graduation

    Chapter 457 ¨C Vampires¡¯ Graduation


    "Congrats for your graduation!"


    That''s what Albert said as we are celebrating the vampires'' graduation after one month of trial living in this world.


    There were no rule-breaking vampires at all. In fact, they are pretty obedience. I guess that''s to be expected of the vampires who lost against us.


    Though as for the vampires that the Vampire Queen brought, it was because of her that the other vampires obeyed the rule. She must be really enjoying the time in this world. At least it''s much better than living in Monsters World is what Arin said. There is little to no culture in that world.


    In this past month, many things happened.


    After my spar with Ang that ended up rather quick for something that everyone is so hyped about, we sparred normally. Not where we''re trying to defeat each other, just one where she will use new moves on me.


    Seriously, had she used all these moves at that time, I would have lost. But it''s great seeing that Ang is returning back to her normal way of fighting. At least if she''s alone, she must never try the same thing again. Unless it''s against an opponent who is clearly weaker than her. And if she''s with someone else, like Ka, Shirley, or the others, she is free to trap the enemies.


    Other than me, she also asked the other to spar as well. Though after sparring with the others, she left somewhere to train. She''s still in this world. Not in the Monsters World.


    And I heard that she''s in Mellian taking difficult quest from the guild from Hill. But now that we''re celebrating the vampires'' graduation, she''s here after I contacted her.


    As for the others, we are training normally. Sometimes, we took quests from the guild or from Albert and the nobles. I Didn''t forget that we are a n.


    There were some missions which were difficult for even A-rank hunters toplete. But for us, it was easy even when I''m not participating. And taking requests from the nobles mean the reward is huge. I''m getting richer again. Though the vampires are still haven''t paid their debt. But at least the two male vampires are already B-rank hunters and should be able to pay their debt soon. That was extremely quick.


    Some vampires decided to try living in another ce during this one month. I brought them to Melk, Mellian, Tatrama''s Capital, Consenza''s Imperial Capital, Varadis'' Capital, and also to Arturo where Bernard''s mansion is.


    I told them to only move within those area since the influence of the cult are bigger outside of those area. Especially in Arturo.


    They not only go there for sightseeing. They also took requests from the guild from time to time. And they helped the guards who have been told that they are vampires to keep the peace.


    Some of the vampires even managed to capture some cult members. And those cult members exploded their head when they are captured by the vampires and have their blood drained. But it was okay for the vampires since they can just regenerate their own head.


    Then, the vampires told me that they don''t want to suck the blood of the cultist. Because even though their blood tastes delicious, the blood used to regenerate their lost head was much more than the blood they can get from drinking the blood of those who exploded their own heads.


    Even though they said that, they still drink a lot of blood. At least enough for them to gain some weight. In fact, I was surprised to see that they can still gain some weight. I thought it was something magical that won''t let them gain weight after drinking a lot of blood. But I guess overdrinking blood can still make them fat. Though since they can manipte blood, it was no problem for them to lose all that extra weight.


    Other than that, what we found about the blood was interesting. In the right ce, the blood that we have drained and put into the blood bag, can stay for three weeks and still be able to be used. Though I don''t think they canst for too long. Maybe thirty or forty days. But at least that''s a good discovery. As for the taste, the vampires said that they are still good after three weeks.


    And I also used my own body for the experiment. Although no one else has the same blood type as I am, and it hasn''t been discovered yet by the researchers, we tried to infuse my own blood that has been taken, to my own body. And it worked! It was a crazy idea, but it''s something important to me.


    As someone who will most likely bleed a lot since I''m fighting in close range, this discovery means a lot for my survival. Maybe in difficult situation, I can decide to be more reckless rather than escaping. Though I still prefer to escape.


    "Well, aren''t they lively?"


    After Albert giving the speech, he and the other kings approached me.


    "What are you going to do with the vampires?" I asked them.


    "For now, we will ask them what they want to do. We also asked some individual vampire if they want toe to our country. Trying to befriend them will benefit us a lot," old man Henry said.


    "So that''s why you''re sending them to different country? Well, if you think that''s good, then it''s fine."


    "Yeah. But we will respect their decision. We will ask them what they want in this banquet," Albert said.


    The main reason why we did this banquet for the vampires'' graduation is because the vampires wanted to wear the fancy dress that they bought. They don''t have any reason to put on those dress for daily lives. And if they wore those dresses, they might cause trouble instead since they are not from nobility.


    But it''s not only the vampires who are wearing fancy dresses. The others also do the same. Oleg, Hill, and even Kron.


    As for Oleg, he brought his family with him. That''s why he can''t afford to wear his usual clothes. His wife nagged him to wear something fancy. His wife is happily showing off her dress to the otherdies. As for their children, they are ying with Daniel and the others.


    Everyone here can be trusted. That''s why even though amoner''s wife is talking with the queen, it was fine. Though in any other event, such thing will be punished harshly.


    Well, it''s just the usual for us.


    After the banquet proceeded for a while, everyone is gathered around the vampires. Albert is going to ask them what they want to do.


    Some of them want to stay in Cassau, but some want to go somewhere else they like. Some wanted to travel around the continent. But they are all agreed on one thing. They will help us in the war against the cult.


    At first, some of them doesn''t want it. But now, all of them want to fight the cult. Maybe I can ask Arin to go back to her world and get more vampires with us.


    "I''ll go whenever my master is going," Eve said. She''s the only one who has a master. And seems like the two are getting along well.


    "Carrie and I will stay in Cassau. We even applied to be a member of Roy''s n."


    The Vampire Queen and the Vampire Duke from the opposing party, ended up bing best friends. Just how did that happen? I missed a lot of things.


    When I asked Ka, she said that because Carrie is not originally Arin''s subordinate, her point of view is different. Most of Arin''s subordinate are not her friends. They are just her subordinates, and treated her as a queen. But that''s not the case with Carrie, so Arin liked being with her.


    "Tonight, I want to announce my wedding. I know that many of you will be busy, but you are all invited to my wedding," One of the male vampires said.


    ¡­isn''t he the one who stays here because of his sister? Not because she''s trying to woo another vampire? How did he ended up bing the first to get married between the two?


    When I asked Ka, she said that the other vampire was rejected. But he stands back up again and now is targeting another vampire. Seems like they progressed better with his current target than with his previous crush.


    Well, as long as he won''t cause any trouble, it''s fine. I think the two male vampires have also started enjoying their lives in this world as well. Especially since most monsters here are much weaker. They don''t have to worry about their own safety, and as long as they don''t break the rules, they can live peacefully. Though they still love drinking blood and that''s why they agreed to join in the war.


    After the banquet is over, I transported all the vampires to where they want to go, and get the guests back to their home.


    Five dayster, we attended the vampire couple''s wedding. Although some of them are busy, they can still watch the wedding live from TV while doing their work.


    When I asked Arin, it was the very first vampire wedding. Vampire doesn''t have the tradition of getting married. They choose their partner and that''s that. I guess this is a breakthrough for the vampires to really coexist with humans.


    Though it''s a marriage between vampires. Maybe one day there will be a marriage between human and vampire. But looking at the difference in our lifespans, it will be difficult.


    Well, at least I''m not busy with the vampires anymore. Now, I can focus on my preparation for the raid. And the date for the raid has been set. One week before the tournament.


    After theb is destroyed, during the tournament, the cult will make a move.. I hope things will go well.

 Chapter 458 - Night Before The Raid

    Chapter 458 ¨C Night Before The Raid


    Time goes by quickly during the time I''m training and preparing myself. Tomorrow, I will raid theb of the Professor.


    I thought that he would be wary after he lostmunication with the mohawk girl, and she never returned. He should be wary about it. But it seems like, ording to Albert''s intel, there is something out there in the direction of thepass. They have encountered some mysterious group of people walking through the area they are keeping watch.


    The agents didn''t get too close to theb because we''re afraid if there are any other master level mage in theb. Even if they are artificial, none of the agents have the power to fight against them.


    Thetest information was about a few weeks ago when a huge number of people from the direction the arrow in thepass pointed, are going to the direction of Consenza.


    From that information, we are correct to think that the cult is nning to raid the tournament. And the huge amount of peopleing means there will be a war.


    It will most likely to happen in the final, when the strongest mages from each country who participated in the tournament are too tired after their match.


    It''s unavoidable. But at least the cult won''t get stronger. Though we are powerful as well since we have no master level mage. But I don''t think the cult will send their strongest mage right away.


    I will be busy during the tournament, so I need toplete my mission as soon as possible before resting.


    Those who are spying on the ground near theb are always in constant danger. Once any master level mage, even if they are artificial, notice their presence, death wille for them. That''s why they are disguising themselves as a homeless people trying to live out in the wild. Good thing the soil is good for farming. If theb is near a desert, it will be difficult to put the agents to investigate.


    But the location thepass is pointing at is not that close to where the agents are farming at. It''s because they decided that getting too close will get them to be discovered by the artificial master level mage that the professor might have created. Even worse if they have other real master level mages.


    How do the agents got closer without getting too close? By following thepass. But they didn''t move straight toward where the needle is pointing. They are moving slightly to the side, so when thepass direction changed slightly, they can pretty much estimate the distance from where they are to the location thepass is pointing.


    That''s pretty smart of them.


    "Roy, you keep reading those reports over and over again. Go get some rest. Tomorrow is a big day," Victoria said. She''s in her human form, which is quite rare to see nowadays.


    "I''m fine. I can also sleep after casting calming gas on myself. It will help me sleep a lot better. I need to double-check the reports again and again. But when ites to the real thing, I doubt the reports will be correct," I said.


    I know that the real thing will be different. Once I transported myself to where the agents are, I will return them back to the capital and will face the mission alone. Well, I won''t really be along. I will have Shelia and Graham with me. And when there are too many enemies, I will call the others to fight.


    But for the start, just me and my familiars are enough. I can use Shelia''s sense of smell to detect the enemies outside the range of my Divine Vision, and use Graham''s shadow clone as a scout.


    But is it fine for all three members to be close-range fighters? We can still use long distance attack, but our attacks are pretty much obvious. I mean we just swing or thrust our weapons or ws toward the enemies. But if there''s a mage with us, their attack won''t be as obvious.


    Though I will need to refrain having a mage for now. If the enemy can detect someone from their magic, we don''t need to bring our powerful mages with us. I can just call themter. Though we can still use magic, we are good enough to conceal it.


    I can''t detect someone''s presence by their magic, so I asked Ang and Veronica if they can sense our magic at close range. Turns out, Graham and Shelia can conceal their magic so they won''t get found out too soon.


    Though if it''s the artificial master level mage, even when I used Divine Vision at her from distance, that mohawk can still sense that someone is looking at her. How many mohawks will we face? I hope there won''t be any of them.


    "You are reading the documents again. That''s the fifth time you read the same thing," Victoriained again that I keep reading them.


    "Sorry. This will be thest time. Maybe."


    "Not maybe. It is. If you''re too nervous, it will affect everyone here even if they won''t participate in the mission. You need to rx and show them that you can do it and will do it well. Enough reading and get some rest. Even if you can''t sleep, at leastying down on bed will make you better," Victoria said.


    "I can sleep though. Fine. I''ll stop reading. Victoria, bed."


    It has been a while since I had Victoria transformed into a bed in my own room. Since I usually sleep with other girls, she sleeps in her own room most of the time. I guess it''s her turn to sleep with me. Especially since I have an important mission tomorrow.


    "How are you feeling?" Victoria asked.


    "Normal. I used calming gas on myself, but I am not sleepy. Though I won''t use sleeping gas on myself," I replied.


    "Do you think something can go wrong after reading the documents that many times?"


    "It can. The Professor should have long realized that the mohawk girl will never return. But he made no obvious move. Theb must be trapped already. Even if there''s no trap, any important items in theb could be destroyed already. We might just go for a wild goose chase. Also, they might be able to tell the location of ourpass. It will be difficult, though still doable thanks to some agents who keep travelling while carrying thatpass to distract thepass the cult has," I said.


    "What will you do if it''s a trap?" Victoria asked.


    "I just need to report it to Albert. But that mean the cult''s force during that will attack during the tournament will be powerful. And I will still need to investigate theb. After I cleared all the enemies within theb, I''ll bring Wendy and Candy to investigate the whole ce. They are better at finding clues than me even with my Divine Vision," I said.


    "I guess we can only know tomorrow," Victoria said.


    "As for me, theb being a trap is fine. As long as the enemies waiting are strong ones that we can defeat. The cult''s force will be weakened if that''s the case," I said.


    "How about them not realizing at all that we are raiding at theirb? That would be the best oue," Victoria said.


    And so, whileying down on top of Victobed, Victoria and I chatted about the useless what if cases that might or might not happen. Not just for the ride, we also talk about other stuffs. But it was fun time to spend the time.


    I also checked the others to see their condition. Ang couldn''t sleep as she enters Ka''s room and they have a chat there. Jewel is sleeping without a care. Candy and Wendy are having sleepover together. As for the vampires that stay in Cassau, they don''t really care about my mission. They don''t even know what the cult did other than what we told them.


    Sophie is sleeping with the children. She will be a good mother in the future. Though I''m still afraid of having children before the cult is destroyed.


    Just like Victoria told me before. My illness is really bad. The fear against the cult, no matter how powerful I have be now, is too big and can''t be erased that easily. I have to destroy the cult first before I can truly be free. I''m just a man imprisoned by his fear and trauma. Even if I have better life now than before, it''s not something I can forget.


    No matter how many safe ces I built, my mind and my heart won''t be at real peace until I know we defeated that Evil God. And we made quite a big progress in that regard. We''re going to raid theb of the cult. If we can kill the Professor, things will get easier during the war. Not easy, just easier.


    I chatted with Victoria for a while until I finally fall asleep. After breakfast, I will leave right away. And once I used portal to where the agents are, I will summon Graham and Shelia. That will be thest magic I will use until we encounter the enemies.


    ¡­maybe I''ll ask Lina to make me breakfast before I go.. I can''t fight in an empty stomach.

 Chapter 459 - Mission Start

    Chapter 459 ¨C Mission Start


    In the morning, Lina has prepared breakfast not just for me, but for Graham and Shelia as well whom I will bring with me on the raid.


    "Good luck, Master," Lina said before I leave.


    She has a sad expression as she doesn''t want to have me leave. But this is important for me. It''s a huge step for me to destroy the cult and have a peace of mind that I long for.


    As for the others, they are all still resting. They might be called by me, so they need to save their energy as much as possible.


    If there are many artificial master level mages, I will need to get the others to help me. That''s why I gave everyone a Blobbymask to disguise themselves. Even I will wear one. I will wear the armor that cover my whole body by utilizing Victoria''s ability.


    As for Shelia and Graham, they don''t really need a mask because they are monsters and they don''t live in our world. Although they asionally stay in our world, they are mainly living in Monsters World. That''s why it should be fine.


    Though for Shelia who often stays with me, she will be in her werewolf form from the start. This way, it''s impossible for the cult to realize her usual appearance that she uses in our world.


    After bidding my farewell to Lina, I opened a portal to where the spies are and looked around to see if we are being watched or not.


    Hmm¡­ there are no other people here than the agents. We are not being watched. That''s good.


    The ce I''m in has been reconstructed for the acts of the agents. One male and one female. There''s a small hut shabbily built, with thend next to it have crops started sprouting. This makes a perfect disguise so anyone who sees them will think that they are just a couple who is trying to live in the wild by building a shelter and farming.


    "Any news?" I asked the couple.


    "After that big group left to Consenza, there hasn''t been any other movement. But theb might be empty," the female agent said.


    "Please be careful as we don''t know if it''s a trap or not," the male agent continued.


    "I will. You two can go back and tell Albert that I''m here. Thanks for your hard work," I said as I opened a portal directly to the pce where Albert is waiting for them.


    The two entered the portal, and I closed it when they are kneeling toward Albert, and the king himself is looking at me. We didn''t exchange any word at all as I close the portal.


    Now I''m all alone, I summoned Shelia and Graham by to me.


    "You two ready?" I asked my two familiars.


    "I am ready, Master," Graham said.


    "I hope I get to have a good fight," Shelia said.


    "I hope you win all the fight," I replied to Shelia''s wish.


    I have informed the two about the importance of this mission. And there''s a chance that someone might even lose their life. Still, Shelia agreed to follow me. As for Graham, it takes some time to get him agree. But after the persuasion from the other angels, he decided to follow me for the job.


    Well, if he doesn''t agree, I can just force him toe anyway. But it''s good that he ended uping willingly.


    "Alright. Shelia, transform into your wolf form so I can ride you," I said to Shelia.


    "You''re not going to run on your own?"


    "It''s best to save my energy as much as possible. As for you, your stamina is near infinite. It''s fine, right?"


    "Okay. What about Graham?" Shelia asked.


    "He can fly and follow us," I said.


    At first, I thought it''s fine if Shelia and I just run toward theb. But now that I think about it, she''s faster in her wolf form. Faster than me. This way, I can reach there sooner.


    Why didn''t I ask Spot toe with me when he has camouge skill? It''s because he has another important mission. Reconnaissance. He''s going to watch the cult enter Consenza. Along with Sonia.


    Those two, with their invisibility and camouge, won''t be detected easily. And even if someone does detect them, they are monsters. And since they are not contracted monsters from a summoner or a tamer, the cult won''t notice that they are being watched. Though if the cult noticed them, they will think that the monsters are probably someone''s familiar. That''s why I told them that in case someone is getting closer, they need to pretend to be wild monsters.


    If their lives are still in danger, Sonia can teleport somewhere safe, while Spot can fly as fast as possible to escape. Only master level mage can catch up with his speed, but Spot said that it''s fine if he encounters one. He wants to fight them himself. I hope Spot will be safe if he ends up fighting someone.


    "Alright. We can go straight to theb. Tell me if you smell anything weird. Graham, you don''t need to catch up to Shelia''s speed. Just fly ording to your own pace to the same direction. If I need you, I can summon you directly to my location. And it''s best to create a shadow clone right away," I said.


    "Do you want me to create a big one, small one, or the same size as me?" Graham asked.


    "A big one. Running or flying behind us. That way, in case we encounter someone, they will think that we are being chased by that clone," I said.


    "The way of a coward seems run deeper than I thought. Well, I''m fine with that," Graham said.


    Graham thinks that saying my n as the way of a coward is an insult. But for me, it''s a praise. I am indeed a coward after all. As long as I''m not as stupid as the angel, it''s all good.


    We run toward theb in one line. With me riding Shelia at the front, Graham slightly behind us, and his shadow clone is chasing after us. So far, there are no other people beside us. But it''s just in case we encounter them on the way.


    "Shelia, please don''t talk at all in case we meet someone when you''re in this form. I want them to think that I''m just riding a slightly bigger wolf. Only speak when you sensed something," I said.


    "Woof!" Shelia replied.


    "¡­you don''t have to force yourself to bark."


    "Woof-woof!"


    Seems like she''s not forcing herself. But barking is what a dog does, right? Not a wolf? Well, I will just say that she is a giant dog instead then.


    We continue running straight toward where theb is. It''s quite far because the agents didn''t dare to get closer since there might be other artificial master level mage in theb. It''s about fifty kilometers, I guess. Well, it''s not a distance that needs a long time for us to reach.


    I looked at thepass in my hand. It''s pointing precisely at where we are going. I also need to trick the other side to think that we''reing their way.


    I don''t know about this magic tool, but if it can point somewhere, there might be another magic tool in theb that can point to where thispass is. That''s why I need to trick them just in case.


    After I get closer to theb, I asked Shelia to stop when no one is around. Well, we haven''t even found a monster on the way. Let alone the enemy.


    It''s quite suspicious that no one is protecting the area near theb, but I guess they are all going to Consenza. Even if some are still here, I need to get them all to die.


    After stopping, I dig a hole on the ground and bury thepass along with a Blobby there. After that, we move to the right instead of going straight forward. We will circle theb. Since we have guessed the distance to theb, it''s quite easy to get the distance right. Although there might be some slight error because we don''t have thepass anymore, it should still be fine since we can still detect the location with Shelia''s sense of smell and my Divine Vision once we get closer.


    After circling theb for a few minutes, we return to moving straight to theb. Like before we didn''t encounter anyone at all. And soon enough, Shelia smelled something.


    "I smell some people. There were traces of them disappearing, which mean they have gone. But one of them are still remaining. Maybe the guard of theb?" Shelia said.


    "Get closer so I can see," I said.


    Few secondster, I can finally see a mysterious building in the middle of nowhere. That must be where theb is. I could even see the entrance, but surprisingly, it only has one person to guard it.


    Maybe I''m right that they can look at where mypass is. That''s why they put more guard on the side we were supposed toe from and didn''t care much about this side.


    I don''t know, and I won''t bother to find out about it for now. I need to go to theb quickly, grab everything important and kill everyone in sight before finally destroying theb.


    But that building sure is huge.. I might need to call someone to help me investigate.

 Chapter 460 - Big City Under A Roof

    Chapter 460 ¨C Big City Under A Roof


    When we got closer to the building we assume where theb is, I am looking through it with my Divine Vision to see how big it really is. And the size was so big that it couldn''t even be said as a building anymore.


    "¡­Rather than a building, it''s more like a city under a roof. There must be other facilities than just theboratory. For now, we will look around this ce first. Once it''s clear, I will use portal to get Candy and Wendy to investigate this ce," I said to my two familiars. Three including Victoria.


    Like I just said to them, this ce is more like a city under a roof. It has lodging, a farm, a ranch, and other things so this ce can be maintained without ever going out.


    But maybe because the people inside have gone, or they are focusing to protect the other side of the gate to the direction of where I hid thepass is, there is no one here except for just one guard at the entrance. Even inside this ce, there are no other people.


    But the guard might not an average mage. The guard couldn''t detect my position from where he is. That mean he''s not master level mage. I can tell from seeing his normal heartbeat rate that he''s not acting.


    But he might still be an expert level mage. Still, for us who have fought a lot of them and probably someone stronger than an average expert level mage, it won''t be a problem for us.


    Soon after, Graham and his shadow showed up. Now, what to do?


    Well, this is a raid. Not a secret espionage mission. I don''t need to hide from the enemy, but the less they know, the better it is for us.


    But since no one is here, I can just kill that guard. It will also deplete the enemy''s strength even if it''s just one person.


    "Graham, use your shadow to kill the guard. I doubt he will get reinforcement," I ordered Graham.


    Graham nodded, and his shadow clone approached the guard.


    When it has reached within twenty meters of the guard, even when it''s in the man''s blind spot, he realizes quickly and attacked using an Ice Spike. I guess he''s an expert level mage.


    But the giant shadow clone is stronger than an average expert level mage. Graham''s clone is as strong as Graham without his magic. And his spear technique is great as well.


    The shadow clone easily dodged the Ice Spike, and flies toward the man. The man notices that the monster is stronger than he thought, so he aimed his hand to the sky.


    Is he going to call for reinforcement by giving a signal using his magic? But he''s too slow.


    The giant shadow clone is faster than that and easily cut the man''s hand with its spear. Even when the man is screaming in pain, there are no one to ask for help nearby. His shout can''t be heard by his friends that is not here.


    The man dies soon after the shadow clone repeatedly stabbed his body with his giant spear. That was easy and fast.


    "Now is how to enter the gate. There''s something in the gate that I don''t know. Something like a magic item. Maybe it will send some sort of signal once someone opened it without permission? We need to be careful. Victoria, there''s a gap under the gate. You should be able to send a Blobby inside through there. Once the Blobby is inside, we will enter with portal. And then I will open a new portal to get Candy and Wendy here," I said.


    "Roger that," Victoria said.


    "Who is Roger?" Graham asked.


    "You just need to shut up and do what I say. No questions from you. Only reports," I ordered Graham to shut his mouth.


    Still, who is this Roger?


    Anyway, Victoria sends a Blobby inside through the small gap under the gate. And I used portal to enter it.


    "It''s huge. It''s really a city under one roof. Where should we search information?" Victoria asked after entering the portal.


    "Let''s ask Candy and Wendy. They are better for this job," I said.


    I opened a portal to call the two special agents and they are already prepared and have worn their masks to cover their identities even before I called them.


    "Is this theb?" Candy asked.


    "More like the city where theb is. I hid thepass outside, so we don''t know the direction where thepass is pointing anymore. For now, let''s split up. Wendy will go with Graham, and Candy will go with Shelia. Victoria, me, and Graham''s shadow will check on the other gate first. If there are more guards at that side, it means they know the location of thepass," I said.


    "Alright. Wendy, you and Graham will check the surrounding from above. Shelia and I will enter each door one by one. Roy, contact us through Sonia if you see anything suspicious."


    Since this is where Candy can show her best ability, she will be in charge here. I don''t have any problem with that. Though I can''t tell what''s suspicious and what isn''t.


    "Roy, is it safe?" Wendy asked if she can fly without being seen.


    "There are no one within my sight. It should be fine around this area. But beyond this, there are probably a lot of people. Be careful," I said before leaving to my destination.


    With that, Candy and Shelia enter the first door they see. It''s some sort of lodging for the guard probably. Wendy and Graham fly above them. Wendy is being carried by Graham. Graham is holding her hand as her body is dangling. So, Graham is unable to see girls in revealing outfits, but still fine holding girl''s hand directly? I guess just holding hand is not that exciting for him, huh.


    As for me, I''m being carried by the giant shadow clone to the other side of the gate. Where I should be entering from if I go straight without changing direction.


    This ce is really big as I couldn''t see the other side for ten minutes. That''s almost the size of the Capital. I guess this ce is not somewhere anyone would investigate. And they must have a lot of time to build this ce since none of the building was built normally without the help of earth mage. At least that''s what I see.


    Still, it''s weird that I didn''t see anyone. Though there were some building that goes deep under the ground. They must be theb. Or at least one of them is. There were some people there under the ground, but for now, I need to take care of those guards on the surface first.


    I was right that there are more guards in this side. Which mean they can tell where thepass is. And one of them is holding simr lookingpass which pointed at where they are watching. Since that tool is a pair, I don''t need to worry about anything else after grabbing that one, right? And I can grab the previouspass. I can use themter.


    "What to do now, Roy?" Victoria asked.


    "They don''t even bother closing the gate on that side. We can just fight them right away. And since none of them reacted, there are no master level mages or even artificial one on that side," I said.


    "How many of them are there?" Victoria asked.


    "About fifty of them."


    "If they are all expert level mages, you think you can win?" Victoria asked.


    "As long as I can get in the middle of them, I can have them attack me with magic. Their magic will hit other people as well. Whether they care about other people or willing to kill their own friends, it should be easy," I said.


    "Do they have explosion devices in their mouth?"


    "Hmm¡­ most of them do," I said after seeing the inside of those guards'' mouth.


    "What if they decided to kill themselves with the explosion once you are in the middle? You can''t dodge them or cut them, right?" Victoria said.


    "¡­You''re right. I need to think carefully on what to do. I guess using the gas that will make them kill each other is better. No, let''s get them angry first by using infuriating gas," I said.


    Without them noticing, I had Victoria made a lot of clones which I will insert the gas in.


    I will use the infuriating gas to start making them angry at each other. And after they started using magic to fight, I will use the killing gas. This way, it will be more effective since they will only think about killing each other.


    During that chaos, Graham''s shadow clone and I will start killing them. Once their anger and killing intent are aimed at me, I doubt they will be sane enough to use the explosive devices to kill themselves and me in the process.


    ¡­Though killing themselves means that they are no longer sane. Well, whether they kill themselves or not, they are not sane since they decided to join the cult.. And I have no problem killing them all.

 Chapter 461 - Killing The Guards

    Chapter 461 ¨C Killing The Guards


    There are about fifty of them. Although they are gathering together, it''s not like they are near each other. I will need several Blobbygrenades to throw.


    And because they are most likely expert level mages, they will know instantly when the grenades are close. They might either attack it, or flee. I hope they won''t flee.


    Which mean the grenades will be destroyed before they reached them. So, I need to throw them in a way so that even after the grenades are destroyed, the air inside will spread to them. I need to throw the grenades from different spots.


    For that, I can ask Graham''s shadow to help. I will throw some grenades from the right, while he''s throwing it from the left.


    I also mixed some grenades with killing gases for the first few grenades we will throw. Though I will throw more of themter.


    "Alright. You will throw all of this ten second from now. I will move to that side," I said to the shadow clone.


    It''s weird talking to a clone, but seems like Graham''s shadow clone can understand order. Or maybe it''s because I''m its master''s master.


    Five seconds after giving the shadow clone the order, I''m already at my position. Only five seconds left before we will throw them all.


    Four seconds before throwing. None of them noticed us.


    Three seconds left. They started to disperse. Why won''t they get closer to each other instead?


    Two seconds left. One second left.


    Now!


    Though I didn''t throw it right away. I waited until the grenades that Graham''s shadow reached where the enemy can detect it first.


    Wait for it¡­


    Finally, someone noticed the approaching grenades and can see them. They then used magic to attack the grenades and destroyed it. Good thing it was just a Fireball. If it''s a wind magic, the air inside might be blown away.


    But as some of them throw their Fireballs at the grenades that the shadow clone threw, I threw my grenades at the same time. I threw them one by one with powerful strength so that even if they are destroyed, the air inside will still reach them.


    They must be so conceited if they didn''t even bother creating magical shield or barrier. But that''s great since some of them have been affected. Once they started fighting each other, I will throw more.


    Some finally noticed the shadow clone and me, but they are toote as chaos started with some of them shouting at each other.


    "Don''t shove me!"


    "Hey, that was your fault!"


    "Move away! I can''t see anything!"


    "Finally, I can get revenge for when you ate my pudding!"


    Yeah, I agree. If someone eat my pudding, I will also get my revenge.


    Because of that, those who noticed me unable to react as fight broke out. And soon enough, after throwing some more grenades, most of them are affected and start getting angry at each other. And some even doing it with the intent to kill the other party.


    I will make them have more killing intent as they kill each other. This time, I threw the grenades filled with the killing gases.


    Let''s watch carefully and make sure I won''t get affected by the gases I created. I won''t take a breath from now. I will use Air magic on myself so I don''t need to breathe.


    Because there are a lot of expert level mages fighting each other, it''s difficult to join in and kill them. Though there will surely be some gap I can abuse since they are too angry to think about other things.


    About ten of them has fallen, but they should be those with weaker magic level. The rest are using quite powerful magic.


    Because of the noise, the people under the ground should notice that something is happening. I need to get them all focused on me so Candy and Wendy can focus on the investigation.


    Someone used Fire Pir to kill another expert level mage, and I used that chance to kill the one who casted the Fire Pir. As they are angry at each other, they didn''t notice that someone is getting inside the chaos to kill them. Though they noticed the giant shadow clone, but the shadow killed them before they aimed their magic at it.


    Hmm? Someone is aiming at me? He''s not affected by my gas?


    Don''t tell me that he''s an air mage. I forget that there might be other air element mages than me. but seems like he is the only one as he''s reaching his hand out forward at me.


    And from that hand, a powerful lightning strike those in front of him. Even his allies.


    "Die, you spy bastard! And the rest who got affected by some sort of magic don''t need to survive. Just die all of you!"


    Lightning magic. It''s fast and powerful. Even though it''s an expert level lightning magic, and is faster than Jewel''s lightning magic which is still in advanced level. But because I trained a lot with Jewel, I can dodge it barely. It''s doable because he''s not as experienced in using his lightning magic and can only use it to shoot it directly to his target. Unlike Jewel who can change her lightning direction.


    Seems like he''s too confident with his lightning magic that he didn''t even see that I managed to dodge his attack. It''s good since he hasn''t casted any shield or barrier magic.


    I quickly approached him and stabbed Reizpear into his chest. Killing him instantly.


    It has been a while, and they are expert level mages. They won''t get angry at all times because of my magic, and the effect of my gases has been reduced greatly by now. The only thing I can do is killing them myself.


    I pulled out Reizpear, and quickly spun around and sh all the nearby enemies. But it''s not powerful enough to kill them. But after I stopped spinning, I retreated from that spot while shooting Blobbygun at the injured mages. Killing them when they least expect it.


    Now, there are only 8 mages left thanks to Graham''s shadow clone''s help.


    "Are you the one with the otherpass?" the man holding apass said.


    There''s no reason to answer his question. And I know that my air magic won''t have much effect on them anymore. Let''s just kill them.


    Thanks to my enhanced speed after training for so long, I can get to them before they could react. I shed Reizpear again and killed four of them before the fifth person stopped it with her Earth Wall.


    But this woman didn''t notice that the shadow clone is on the other side of the wall and stabbed its spear to her head. There are only three mages left.


    Now, it''s a technique I learned to face them without even moving my body. It''s time to use it. The condition has been fulfilled. It''s when they know that they are too weak against the enemy they are facing.


    "All I need is just one person I can interrogate. Two of you will die here."


    I threatened thest three of them. How is that a technique to kill?


    Well, it''s because they are cult members and have explosive devices in their mouth. Only two of them though.


    Without hesitation, after realizing that I''m too strong for them, the two with explosive devices explode their own head. Leaving only one man left alive with horror in his eyes.


    "So, it will be you whom I will interrogate, huh? That''s fine," I said.


    "¡­"


    The man didn''t answer. But instead, he pointed his hands at his own head and killed himself that way. How stupid.


    "Sigh¡­ now all of them have died. There''s no one I could interrogate. Well, I can grab someone from undergroundter," I said to myself.


    I stepped on the corpses, and grabbed the otherpass. It''s pointing to where I hid mypass. I will give them to Albert as souvenir.


    I was about to left this ce. Or at least that''s what someone who is pretending to be a corpse is thinking.


    "Oh, wow! Someone is still alive," I said with a huge smile on my face while looking at the man who pretended to be dead. I can tell with my Divine Vision.


    "AAAAAH!"


    Why is he so scared? I''m smiling, so he should answer with a smile.


    I knocked him out easily, and wrap the Magic Restraining Cor around his neck. Then, I used portal to transport him somewhere.


    Albert has told me before that if I could capture some prisoners, I will need to bring them to a designated ce where the rest can be taken care of by Albert''s trusted people.


    "¡­Roy, your smiling face was so evil. It was like watching a horror movie. Your performance can win an award and get a prize," Victoria said.


    "Just like that? Isn''t living in your world so easy then?"


    "Well¡­ same as here. Only for those who are talented and the rich. As for the rest, they will need to work hard until they can show their talent or they are rich," Victoria said.


    Well, I don''t need to bother about it since I don''t live in that world. And I don''t think I will go there. Also, I''m already rich. Talented? I''m the only Aura user here.


    Now, let''s check on how the others are doing.

 Chapter 462 - Investigating The Surface City

    Chapter 462 ¨C Investigating The Surface City


    After finishing all the enemies, I buried thepass together at the same ce as the firstpass. I don''t know if there are otherpasses that can point to where those twopasses are, so it''s best to keep it buried for now.


    I will let Albert have it, but not now. I''ll just inform him about itter. If he also thinks that there might be otherpass that can point to where the twopasses we have are, it''s best to keep them hidden. Or at least away from the capital.


    After that, I looked around the city to see if there are anyone else. Though other than those who are under the ground, there are no other people above ground.


    The underground was also big, but instead of as big as the city, it goes deeper instead. There might be other powerful mages inside, but since none of them has noticed that I''m looking at them, I guess it''s fine to say that there is no master level mage here. Even artificial one. Unless the underground is deeper than I thought and the master level mages are way deeper under the ground. But for now, I think we can continue with our mission safely.


    After that, I returned back to where we entered, and run toward Candy''s position while making sure that Wendy can see me so she will catch up with us.


    "How is it, Roy?" Candy asked after she left an empty building.


    "All enemies here are cleared. We can investigate everything above the ground. But there are many people under the ground. Should we bring an earth mage with us?" I asked.


    "Hmm¡­ Ka is smart, but when she needs to think a lot of stuffs, she tends to stop for a while or she won''t be able to concentrate. Ang is strong, but she''s not suited for this mission. At least don''t call her yet. Go get Celestine. Not only she''s a powerful expert level earth mage, she''s also a former member of the cult. There might be things that she will remember while we are investigating," Candy said.


    So, we decided to get Celestine. She''s in Consenza with her sister, the Empress of Consenza. Although she''s not in Cassau, she also has prepared toe with us in case we need her help. That''s why as soon as I opened a portal, Celestine with determined face entered the portal without hesitation.


    "What''s the situation?" Celestine asked as I closed the portal. She didn''t even see her own sister waving her hand.


    "Many people are underground. I believe all of them are members of the cult who are left behind to protect this ce," I said


    Celestine didn''t reply and just looked at me intensely. I know what she wants me to say.


    "No, there are no children in this ce," I said.


    "Do we just need to destroy everything?" Celestine asked.


    "Not until we have investigated everything. But since we will need to go underground, we need your help," Candy said.


    "Candy, what did you find?" I asked Candy.


    "These buildings are lodgings for the guards. There were diaries inside, and some of them have useful information. Though it means we need to investigate all the buildings here. Roy, you need to go to the other side of this city and grab any documents from all the building. Wendy and I will grab everything here. What about you, Wendy? What did you find?"


    After being asked by Candy, Wendy pulled a paper with a hand-drawn map. She must have drawn it when she''s stopping before.


    "During the ruckus near the other gate that Roy caused, I also look at the building over there and drew a map of this ce. There were some suspicious building and I marked them in this map," Wendy said.


    Ipared the map and the surrounding view and see that the ce to enter the underground area is among the one that she marked.


    "This is where people cane and go under the ground. As for the other suspicious buildings, there''s no one there. I will grab everything and transport them so Albert can sort them out," I said.


    "Wait, what about me? You called me here and I will have to wait until your job is over before we can continue?" Celestine asked.


    "With your earth magic, you can tell the location of the people underground, right? Find a ce that is built differently. Either from different material than the others, or have been enhanced a lot to ensure protection. That ce is the most suspicious. I can''t tell which building is reinforced, so I will be counting on you. If you can draw a map, that will be the best," I said.


    Now all of us have our own mission. Well, except for my familiars that only need to act as bodyguards.


    Since I won''t be fighting for now, I don''t need to bring Graham''s shadow clone anymore. I let it stay with Celestine to protect her while she''s busy drawing a map.


    I can see most things under the ground, but I don''t know which one that we need to investigate the most. And the worst part is that there are several people lying inside a certain room. All of them have mohawk as their hairstyle!


    About five of them. If they are released here, it will be disadvantageous for us since they can destroy everything. If only we have another brainwashing mage with us. Russell is too old and unfit to go on a journey. We can only finish things here first before getting him to help undo their brainwashing.


    For now, those five mohawks are sleeping. I can leave them forter.


    What about any suspicious people? Like the Professor?


    I can''t tell which one is the Professor since many of them are wearingb coats. But at least Celestine is here. Maybe this is why Candy asked me to get Celestine instead. At least it''s good that there are no children in this ce, is what I like to say.


    But there is something deeper than what I can see. It''s like inside a dungeon that has never been explored with abundant magic. I can''t see through it. If there are children inside there, and I destroyed everything, Celestine will be my enemy instead. I don''t want that.


    I didn''t lie when I said to her that I didn''t see any children. I just couldn''t see if there are any.


    Let''s save the excuse forter. For now, I need to grab all the documents, diary, and everything else that seems important and transport them. though I doubt some of them are really important since they are mostly just the guards'' diaries.


    Oh, wow! I found something funny!


    In one of the lodging that is obviously upied by a man, there''s a diary. The cover of the diary and the pen to write it has pink bear as their ornaments.


    It''s pink, it''s a bear, and the writing inside is so messy that I couldn''t read it. If you like lovely stuffs, your writing needs to be lovely as well! What is this? I''m a doctor, but his writing is much worse than mine! In fact, we might need experienced pharmacist to trante this.


    Well, that''s not my problem. Let''s take everything that I can. Except that pink brief with bear picture on its back. That''s just weird.


    I also entered a suspicious building that Wendy marked. And it''s suspicious indeed.


    "There''s nothing here at all," I said.


    "Do you think they realized that this ce has been discovered and the owner grabbed everything here before they leave?" Victoria asked. She also agreed that this ce is suspicious.


    "Probably. Let''s find anything we can find. There is no hidden ce here though¡­ wait, there''s writing on the bed," I said.


    I lifted the bed and turned it upside down. There are a lot of writings. Why would anyone draw gravity under the bed?


    Well, it''s suspicious as well. I''ll just transport the whole bed, wardrobe, desk, and everything here that has writings on them.


    Maybe this ce is not just for the guards. It also for the researchers to think of their ideas. And as they have too many ideas, they started to write all over the ce.


    ¡­does it mean that I have to bring the whole building next to this that has a lot of writings on its wall? The other building that Wendy marked?


    Just how did she know that these two buildings are suspicious when she can only see them from the outside? Is this what a special agent can do? Maybe I should go and take a lesson from them as well.


    ¡­Nah, it''s too much pain.


    After grabbing everything, I returned back to where everyone is and transport everything that they have taken. I also inform them about the building with a lot of writings in the wall. The two agents then followed me to the building and write everything and just send their report. I don''t need to bring the whole building with me.


    "Alright. That''s everything on the surface. Celestine, what about the underground?" I asked.


    "I found some ce that has been reinforced differently than the rest. They are suspicious," Celestine said as she gave the map she drew to Candy.


    "So, what''s the next n?" Wendy asked.


    "Enter the underground, strip everyone naked so we know they didn''t bring any suspicious magic tools, put cors on them, and transport them. Unless we have to kill them," I said.


    "¡­that''s a good n, I guess. But we need a route. We''ll take this route so we can check on the suspicious area one by one," Candy said while drawing a route on the map.


    Now the map and the route have been prepared. It''s time for raid number two!

 Chapter 463 - Entering The Underground

    Chapter 463 ¨C Entering The Underground


    "To go through that route, we don''t need to enter through the entrance from that building, right?"


    I asked Candy while pointing my finger to the suspicious building. I have checked that ce several times, and other than being the entrance to underground, I didn''t see anything else.


    "That''s right. Since we have Celestine with us, she can just make an opening and surprise the enemies. There are mages under here, right? Probably expert level earth mages. Those average mages are no match against Celestine. She can kill them all before she creates an opening for us to go through," Candy exined.


    "There are many people to kill though. Roy, tell me which one should I kill," Celestine said.


    I guess that''s a good n.


    There are multipleyers below the surface. To put it simply, it''s like there are multiple floor under the basement. So, it''s like first floor of the basement, second floor of the basement, etc. And I can only see through the fifth floor under there. Beyond that, the magic is simr to a dungeon that has never been explored for a long time. I can''t see through it clearly.


    Even if I enter the third or even fourth floor, I doubt I can still see through it. But if it''s the fifth floor, I should have better vision on what''s below there.


    Let''s take one step at a time. Or more like one floor at a time. What''s deeper there, I don''t need to focus on it yet.


    "Celestine, can you sense the people down there?" I asked Celestine.


    "Yeah. There are five people right under us. But before this, there were more," Celestine said.


    "Right. Those who were here before are most likely the scientists and researchers. They left after those five people arrive. At least one of them is an expert level earth mage. Though it''s possible that all of them are expert level," I said.


    "And they aren''t doing anything?"


    "Probably, they are trying to trap us. As soon as we opened a hole, they will attack us right away. Still, five people is too little. ording to the route that Candy prepared, it''s best if we enter from here. Celestine, can you create Ground Spikes at them? Not stabbing them from below, but from above. While at the same time, open a hole just enough for me, Shelia, and Graham to enter," I suggested to Celestine.


    "Okay. That''s easy. Give me the signal when I should open it," Celestine said as she crouched down with one hand touching the ground.


    As she crouched down, the enemies below us also prepared to do something. I need to be quick.


    "Master, may I suggest something?"


    Before we put our n into action, Graham suddenly interrupted us.


    "What is it?"


    "May I suggest to create my shadow clone directly under us so it can fight the enemies, and while they are distracted, we can attack at that time," Graham said.


    ¡­is he saying something smart all of a sudden? And he can create clones even though it''s not from his shadow, but somewhere else?


    "You can do that?" I asked Graham.


    "I can do it recently. Although I don''t look like it, I trained myself a lot after losing against you," Graham said.


    So, even though he''s stupid, losing against me increase his motivation to be stronger and now he can create shadow clone somewhere else?


    "Tell me more about your shadow clone that you recently discovered," I said.


    "It''s the same as before. I can only create one clone of myself from the shadow. But this time, it doesn''t have to be my own shadow. As long as anything has a shadow, I can summon a clone of myself," Graham said as he made the giant shadow clone that has been with us disappears.


    "You don''t need to see the ce yourself? It''s underground so it''s difficult, right?" I asked again.


    "But you can see it for me, right Master? Once you tell me the general direction of the shadow, if I can sense it, I can create a shadow clone," Graham said.


    This n is better than just letting Celestine do everything. Let''s do it.


    "Celestine, once you sensed the enemies are fighting something, you can open a path and attack them at the same time. It''s just a shadow clone, so it''s fine if you kill it," I said to Celestine.


    "Okay."


    Now, let''s see a ce where shadow exist. There''s a source of light under there, so there are many shadows under there including the enemies'' shadow. Let''s find the biggest one.


    Hmm¡­ it''s not much, but the biggest shadow is under one of the enemies. Though I think any one of them is fine.


    "Graham, it''s under there where I point my finger at. The shadow of our enemy. Can you do it?"


    "¡­I can," Graham said after concentrating a bit to sense the shadow.


    "Do it now. Everyone, prepare yourself."


    To distract the enemies from Graham''s shadow clone that is being created, I stepped on the ground as hard as I could without destroying anything. The vibration from me stepping above them should be felt by the enemies, and as expected, they became wary and start preparing their magic.


    They didn''t even notice that under them, a shadow is slowly raising. A shadow with six wings and a spear.


    The shadow clone then attacked the owner of the shadow. Stabbing him from behind.


    That action makes the other beside the stabbed man surprised, and Celestine used that chance to open an opening to let me, Shelia, and Graham enter. While not forgetting to create Ground Spike to stab one of the enemies.


    Since it came from above them, should it be called Roof Spike? Whatever.


    Defeating the rest of the enemies is not a problem. And we safely entered the first floor of the basement.


    "Alright, Candy and Wendy will start investigating from this ce. Celestine and Graham will stay with them and protect the two. Shelia and I will capture the researchers in this floor," I said.


    "Capture? Not kill?" Shelia asked as she run to follow me.


    "Capture. These are Magic Restraining Cors. Put them around the captured people''s neck. But if they are too strong, you can kill them. Which way are you going? Left, or right?" I asked as we see two paths in front of us.


    "To the left. I smell people there," Shelia said.


    "Once you captured them all, tie them up and cover their mouth so they won''t be able to talk. After you''re done, look for more people. But don''t go underground yet without everyone," I said.


    "Understood."


    With that, Shelia and I split up.


    I can see that where Shelia is going, there are mages there. And I didn''t see anyone that look like a researcher. Don''t tell me that she can smell which way that has strong opponents with her nose? If so, it will be useful. I will ask herter.


    As for where I''m going, most of the people in my direction wearsb coat. I need to capture them. Though some of them started inserting the explosion device into their mouth. They are thinking of killing themselves. They have that much loyalty to the cult.


    Still, that''s not everyone. Some of them are hiding in fear and even plucked out the explosion device from their own mouth. But some of them have started killing themselves.


    I don''t know if it''s through research or magic, but we really need to be careful of the enemy''s brainwashing technique. But from the look of it, it''s not always a sess.


    When I encounter them, none of them are strong enough. Even the strongest among them was just intermediate level. I guess they focused on their research more than their strength.


    Some of them tried to fight back, but when they realize that they are too weak against me, they decided to get closer and destroy their own head. They want me to get hurt by the explosion.


    Though I can knock them out faster than they can approach me. With Blobbygun inserted with non-lethal Blobbybullet, I can knock them out from afar.


    I put the cors around their neck, and after grabbing all of them in this area, I throw them into a portal. But that''s not everyone in this floor.


    Some are trying to escape to the surface. I guess I need to stop them first before any of them managed to leave this ce.


    I opened a portal to the surface where I put a Blobby beforehand, and greeted the escaping researchers before knocking them all out.


    Now, the rest should be easy for Shelia alone. She killed some enemies, but that''s not a big deal. I hope. But it''s great that she can follow my order and captured some enemies.


    After that, we reunited with the others and help them investigate this whole floor. Well, not me.


    Since I will probably use portal many times, I took a rest before we go deeper under the ground. Once everyone has gathered everything they can grab in this floor, I will transport them and we will continue to the next floor.. I hope the next floor will be as easy as this floor.

 Chapter 464 - Its Called Lift Because It Lifted Things

    Chapter 464 ¨C It¡¯s Called Lift Because It Lifted Things


    That''s the first basement floor that we cleared. There are several more and I can''t see beyond the fifth basement floor.


    "Roy, how did theye down to the underground? There''s no stairs at all in this ce," Wendy asked.


    "There''s that box thingy over there. That thing can go up and down and stopped at every floor. Though at every exit, it has been guarded tightly. Should we enter from that thing?" I suggested.


    "That''s not thingy. In my world, it''s called esctor," Victoria exined.


    "I see. That''s an easy name to remember. It helps those inside to elevate to higher level, or go down," I said.


    "And in some part of the world, it''s called lift," Victoria continued.


    "Because it lifted people up and down? That sounds even simpler. I will call it lift from now," I said.


    The name aside, now that we have cleared the whole level, we need to go down. Should we enter it using the lift, or do we breakthrough them. Hmm?


    "Wait, the lift is being used," I said.


    When we looked at the ce where the lift should be, it started making a sound and start moving. I can see it moves from the fourth basement floor, to the second which is right below us.


    And then, the people who are waiting there, entered the lift and went down to the fourth floor. Seems like the lift can''t bring us even lower. We will need to take the stairs after reaching the fourth floor.


    "They are all moving to the lower floor. All of them, including the guards and the researchers," I said.


    "Roy, do you see any lift other than this one?" Candy asked.


    "Nope. Not at all. It''s the only one here and right now, it''s being used frequently. Now that all of the people under there are gathering at the fifth basement floor. Seems like they are nning to keep what''s beyond there as secret even if it took their lives. What should we do?" I asked for a n.


    "Hmm¡­ Roy, you and your familiar will go there and defeat them all. Try to get what they are protecting before they could destroy whatever it is. If possible, capture as much as possible. Celestine, are they going inside the reinforced room underground?" Candy asked Celestine.


    "No. They are gathering at the fifth-floor underground," Celestine replied.


    "Understood. Then, Celestine will go with us and investigate every ce here before going down. Roy, you will have to get down there as fast as possible before they started erasing evidence of their researches. They should have realized by now that we are taking everything. It''s a fight in an enclosed space. Even if there are many expert level mages, you can do it, right?" Candy said full of confidence.


    It feels good knowing that someone who loves me have that much confidence in me. I will make sure to do the job well.


    "Alright. Graham, Shelia, let''s go," I said. We will jump down the tunnel of the lift andnd on the box. There are several people about to enter it. They are thest group of people who haven''t been taken to the deepest floor.


    "Try to not cause as much destruction as possible! And wait for us before you enter the ce that you can''t see. Or if something happened and you have to enter that ce, tell us through Sonia!" Candy said before we jumped down.


    "I understand! See you soon!"


    With me as the vanguard, we jumped down the tunnel.


    After the first floor, each floor was deeper than before. But it shouldn''t be a problem for Celestine to create a path to enter deeper floor with her magic.


    As for us, this much height is not a problem if we fall. Flying is easy for us. But now, I let gravity do its job.


    In the box full of people, some of them are wary of what''s going on above them. but they think that they are save underground, and the box is also from reinforced steel. One of the reinforced locations that Celestine told us before.


    But it will still get damaged, right? Let''s try it. We can also destroy it so the people down there won''t have any way of escaping from this ce.


    "Hammer," I said to Victoria.


    Victoria then obeyed and transformed into a hammer with extreme weight. And while falling down, when I was about to reach the box, I swung it down to destroy it and kill everyone inside.


    The hammer let out a loud noise when it hit the box, and crushed it. Everyone inside dies instantly being crushed in that small box.


    Wended safely. But right inside the fourth floor, people are watching us jumped down the tunnel and destroyed the lift easily.


    "K-kill them!"


    Toote. Shelia already swung her ws and Graham has thrown several light magic attacks at them from distance. The enemies don''t even have the time to put up their protection magic as they died from the attack.


    But not all of them died. So, I charged at them and knocked all of them out with the butt of Reizpear.


    There are many other people underground. We can''t wait for them to escape. Seems like the ce they are going is locked tight and they are knocking on the door to that ce. Seems like someone is inside. Is it the Professor?


    Worst of all, some researchers entered the ce where the mohawks are sleeping. They are probably still in their testing period and can''t be used properly yet. It will be dangerous if all of them are artificial master level mage.


    I quickly put the Magic Restraining Cors on all the people I knocked down, and transported them all before continuing deeper.


    There are many suspicious things I see inside, but we will take care of themter. For now, we must make sure that those mohawks won''t wake up from their sleep. Seems like the researchers have difficulty in waking them up.


    I can tell that the mohawks are alive from how their blood is still flowing. Their inner organs also worked properly. And rather than ina, they seem to be just sleeping. But they can''t be woken up easily like they are ina.


    Whatever the case, I can''t let them wake up.


    "Shelia! Graham! Follow me!"


    After taking care of the unconscious people, we run toward the ce where the mohawks are sleeping. Even if I have to kill them, they mustn''t wake up.


    We arrive there faster than expected because we just kill everyone on the way. They were all the guards anyway. Not researchers.


    When we arrive, I see that one of the mohawk''s blood flow is different. Seems like he''s on the verge of waking up. So, with my Reizpear, I stabbed his heart before he wakes up.


    "Knock them all out!" I gave the order to my familiars.


    They knocked all the researchers, and wrap cors around their neck. Before transporting them with portal.


    Now, only the sleeping mohawks are left. It will be dangerous if I transport them t the same ce as the others. But good thing that we have prepared for it.


    Before we left, Old man Henry told us that in case we managed to capture any artificial master level mage who are not dead, it''s best to transport them all to a designated ce in Varadis where Julia is waiting. Russell will be there as well to use his brainwash magic on the mohawks.


    When I opened the portal, I was greeted by Julia.


    "Roy, are they dead?" Julia asked.


    "No. They seem to be sleeping. Although I have put the cor on them, they have the strength to destroy it themselves if they are as strong as the Mohawk Girl from before. Be careful. Do you need some help?" I asked.


    "Maybe. If these people are artificial level mages and they somehow wake up thinking that we are enemies, they will attack us. Although I''m stronger now, I don''t have the confidence to defeat them alone," Julia said.


    "Wait a moment."


    I opened another portal. This time, it''s to Cassau.


    "Hey, I captured some mohawks. Anyone here want to help Julia watching over them?" I asked the group who have been preparing to go once I asked them. Though they didn''t expect that I''m calling them not to fight but to watch over some people, they quickly make a decision.


    "Bring Veronica with you. In case they woke up, if they used to be members of the cult, they will recognize Veronica and won''t attack her all of a sudden," Ka suggested.


    Veronica also agree and she willingly stepped into the portal to where Julia is. Now, with two expert level mages and a brainwashing mage, I hope even if any mohawks wake up, they won''t attack right away.


    After bringing all the mohawks and Veronica to Varadis, I close the portals.


    "Now, it''s time for rumble."


    In the fifth floor, there''s a hallway with several rooms on the side. And at the end of the hallway, it''s the locked door where all of the people are trying to get in. I can now see what''s beyond that door, but only barely.


    Beyond that door, there''s another path going somewhere. Maybe it''s an escape path.


    But to get to that ce, I need to fight all the enemies blocking the way.. I hope they will just surrender.

 Chapter 465 - Someone Is Faking His Sleep

    Chapter 465 ¨C Someone Is Faking His Sleep


    "Shelia, Graham, defeat everyone."


    As we approached the hallway to the locked door, I ordered my two familiars to defeat everyone.


    Killing the enemies is fine, but it''s better if they could be captured. But in this ce, it''s difficult to hold back when the enemies are attacking.


    And it''s also useful for training my two familiars as well.


    Graham is an archangel. He can fly and has wings on his back. So, he''s only used in fighting outdoor. As for indoor, his wings make it difficult for him to move in an enclosed space. Though he can make his wings disappear and fight only using his spear and light magic. And if he does that, he won''t be able to fly and his movement will be really limited in this ce. That''s why he needs training.


    As for Shelia, she''s also only used in fighting outside in the wild. But she''s much better in fighting with her instinct. She learns faster than Graham in fighting inside.


    The two started fighting the resisting enemies, while I need to stop the researchers from destroying the evidences. Some of them have entered the rooms on the side of the hallway, and grabbing the documents.


    Seems like even if their lives are on the line, some of them still chooses to guard their researches before their lives. I respected that if they are not from the cult. But these people are those who are willingly join the cult.


    If only they didn''t dedicate themselves to the cult, they would have helped Marie a lot in her research.


    Well, it''s not time for regret. Let''s stop them before they destroyed the documents.


    While the hallway is busy from the fight, I jumped over them all and entered the room where some researchers are grabbing the documents. Those things must be important.


    I knock them out quickly with the butt of my spear, and put the cor on them quickly. For this mission, we were given a lot of magic restriction cors. Albert got a lot of them from many nobles who own ves illegally. Just how many of them are there?


    I heard that there are many cities in Tatrama which has the people in charge changed after Albert visited them. He must have been really busy.


    That''s what a king should be. Busy. Though I think he has a lot of people helping him, like the Prime Minister, the former Prime Minister, and me. There must be some others, but they are not important for me to know.


    "Hey! Someone entered this room!"


    One of the mages who was supposed to be busy with Graham and Shelia, saw me entered the room and told the others.


    It''s quite smart of them to cast magic from outside the door, but they are too slow as I stabbed them all with Reizpear. They shouldn''t have stood in line in front of the door.


    Well, let''s go to the next room. Graham and Shelia still look fine.


    "Hey, mages! Ignore them! It''s better if they didn''t find any documents of our researches! Destroy every room in this floor instead!"


    One of the researchers who was knocking on the locked door at the end of the hallway, shouted.


    Oh, no. Now, I need to take care of everyone.


    I doubt all of them are expert level mages. Let''s use sleeping gas on everyone here. Good thing I have casted air magic on Shelia and Graham, so they won''t be able to breathe in the gas I produced while still breathing normally. This magicsted for three hours, and I have casted it on our allies.


    Some of the enemies who were about to destroy the rooms, along with all researchers, fall asleep soon after I spread the sleeping gas. As expected, once I''m fighting in a closed space, I''m unbeatable!


    Well, not really. My magic work less on expert level mages, and even less on master level mages. Though I can eliminate the weaker enemies, while identifying the strong enemies. If there are strong enemies in the group, I can decide if I should run away or fight after everyone has already sleeping.


    Just like right now.


    I thought that since all researchers and weak enemies have fallen asleep, I don''t have to worry about anything. But, there''s one researcher who is pretending to be sleeping.


    My sleeping gas doesn''t work on him. And I can tell that his reaction was quiteter than the others who are affected. He''s just acting like he got affected by my gas. I can see his inner organ working as usual.


    If he''s an average expert level mage, he should be affected by my gas a little. If he''s an artificial master level mage, there''s no need to act like this since he should be able to recognize that the strength that we are showing is not that powerfulpared to an artificial master level mage.


    My guess is that he''s an air mage, but he has another element of which has reached expert level mage while still working as a researcher. The worst part is that he''s thinking with his brain to escape from this situation.


    That''s why even though I should be taking care of the other expert level mages along with Graham and Shelia, I approached the researcher instead to put the cor on him. He''s the most dangerous enemy here so far.


    For now, I put the cor on the researchers around him. And when it''s time to put the cor on him, he finally reacted.


    As I was about to reach my hand to him, he quickly raises his body and pointed his wind magic at me. But he''s toote. I''m much faster than him and more prepared.


    Before he points out his hand toward me, I already removed that hand from the shoulder.


    "AAAH!"


    "That''s a pretty good acting. But I can see through you," I said.


    "How did you know!?" the man asked while groaning in pain.


    "Doesn''t matter. Seems like you have quite the status since you''re both a researcher and quite a powerful mage looking from your magic. I''ll capture you for interrogation along with everyone here. Only those who didn''t die though."


    I put the cor on him and then knock him out. This time, he''s not acting. He''s really lying on the ground out cold.


    I start looking around again to see that Graham and Shelia almost finished everyone.


    They both are wounded, but it''s not a problem for them. Shelia has her self-recovery ability, while Graham can use healing magic. Those wounds will be healed soon.


    It''s also an easy fight because the enemies can''t use their strongest attack since they would just kill everyone. Though if they do that, it''s better for the cult since this ce will be destroyed. I guess none of them thought that way.


    "Graham, Shelia, don''t rest yet. We need to transport those who are still alive. As for those who died and killed themselves using explosion, we will leave them be."


    There are some headless corpses among the enemies we fought. They must be devout members of the cult. Unlike most of the researchers here.


    I see some documents have been destroyed before we reach here. But at least we managed to save some documents. I guess mission is halfplete after reaching this far. Now, there''s only the big door in front of us left. One which I can''t see through clearly after dozens of meters.


    "Good. Let''s take a rest here for a while. Or if you want, you can help Candy and the others investigate this ce," I said to my two familiars.


    "I''ll stay here. Fighting indoor is harder than I thought," Graham replied.


    "Me too. Next time, please have a spar with me in an enclosed ce like this," Shelia said.


    "Sure. I''ll tell Sonia to inform the others that I''ming to them."


    I looked above me and see that the three girls, Candy, Wendy, and Celestine, are still on the third basement floor. I can see that they have a lot of things to carry. Let''s quickly help them transport all those things with portal.


    As for why I didn''t use portal to go to them right away, it''s so that I can save my mana. There''s a huge possibility that we will fight a really powerful enemy after entering that door.


    "Did you find something?"


    After meeting up with Candy and the others, I asked them if they discover something important.


    "A lot. Please transport them all," Candy said as she dumped a lot of document in front of me.


    "Whoa! If it''s just me, I wouldn''t think of getting this much. I might be able to find something hidden in the upper floor, so I''ll go there first. Wait for me with Graham and Shelia. They are resting at the moment," I said to the three.


    Candy and Wendy are expert agents. They are good at finding something hidden. But that doesn''t mean they can find everything. What if there''s another writing under the bed? They can''t see that, but I can.. That''s why I need to check everything else before meeting up with them againter.

 Chapter 466 - Destroying The Steel Door

    Chapter 466 ¨C Destroying The Steel Door


    I didn''t find anything after going back to the surface, so I went down again. Candy and the others are already at the fifth basement floor together with Graham and Shelia.


    "There''s nothing hidden that I can see. I guess we really took everything," I said.


    "That''s good. There are some burned papers, but we managed to get some. Please transport them all," Candy said while pointing at the stacks of paper in front of me.


    That''s a lot. I think some of them are reports written by Candy and Wendy themselves.


    If I gather the evidences alone, I won''t be able to get that much. As expected, a special agent is special indeed. And we have two of them with us now!


    "What do we do now? Should we breakthrough this door?" Wendy asked.


    "Let''s give report to each other first about what we found while Roy is resting. I''ll go first. I found many documents about human modifications. It''s probably rted to the artificial master level mage," Candy reported.


    "Oh, I''m next. I also found some mohawks sleeping in the room above us. One of them about to wake up when I arrive, so I killed him. They are being forced to be awoken by some researchers, but other than that one I killed, the rest are still sleeping. I brought those sleeping mohawks to Varadis so they can be researched. And in case they have been brainwashed, Russell can undo their brainwashing," I said.


    I didn''t find anything else other than that. But I have used quite a lot of magic. From air magic on all of us, making gases to disturb the enemies, and portals to transport the evidences. I need to take a rest from time to time, but not too long since we haven''t found the Professor yet.


    Next, Wendy and Celestine also gave their reports.


    "Everything I found was about researches. There''s nothing that says anything about the cult''s n to attack during the tournament. I guess this ce is really ab," Wendy said.


    "The reinforced rooms in this ce were mostly for experiments. It''s so that the human experiment won''t be able to escape just in case. I see that all of the reinforced room has at least a bed in it without any other important items. Though I''m not an agent, so I might be wrong," Celestine said.


    But I think she''s right. the artificial master level mage should be able to destroy thisb and dug to the surface even without magic. If they have created another artificial master level mage again, who is much stronger than the one we fought, it will be difficult to progress. If my guess is right, we will at least meet one of them after we enter that locked steel door.


    "Celestine, what can you sense beyond that door?" Candy asked.


    "My detection magic can''t sense too deep inside it. It''s like¡­ a dungeon in Monsters World," Celestine said.


    "Yeah, that''s right. The dungeon in Monsters World have never been explored by humans and still have abundant amount of mana. Which makes it difficult for me to see through it. Beyond that door, I can only see tunnel going further in. I can''t see anything beyond that. Though we are indeed at the lowest floor. Unless they built another underground facility beyond what my Divine Vision can see," I said. I agree with Celestine''s deduction saying that it''s simr to a dungeon.


    "Then, we will continue after resting for a while. We will progress while thinking that we are in a dungeon. Which mean we will fight monsters. ording to Roy, the cult has controlled a huge number of monsters in his past life. Maybe this is where they got the monster. As for the abundant mana, I think there is some sort of magic resource inside that is being monopolized by the cult. That''s why they built theb here. This time, we need mages who will fight," Candy said.


    Mages who will fight, huh? We are underground, so mages with only powerful AoE attack won''t being. Though the mages in my n learned how to use concentrated magic so any one of them will be fine.


    But since we''re underground, it''s best to have an earth mage. Still, that won''t be enough if the enemy also has earth mages with them. And it''s not good if we bring too many people as well. Maybe two or three.


    "How many people should we bring?" I asked Candy.


    "It can''t be too much. Just us and there are already six. Not including Graham''s shadow clone. For a dungeon exploration, it''s already more than enough. But it''s not just dungeon exploration. It''s also investigation. It''s best if Wendy and I didn''t do much in battle and only focus on investigation. So, I will say just two people should be enough," Candy replied.


    "I''d like to suggest Sara. We might need more air since we''re in an underground dungeon. If there''s another exit, and the cult realize we are here, it''s possible that they will block the exit. Even though we have Roy here, having Sara with us will be a huge relief since Roy will most likely move on his own. And she''s also an agent so we might find more things," Wendy suggested.


    "Yeah. Sara is an earth mage as well. I agree with that. As for the other one, who should we bring?" I asked.


    "Obviously Ang. We might enter battle more, so it''s best if we can finish the fight earlier," Candy suggested.


    With everyone''s agreement, I opened a portal to Cassau and brought Sara and Ang to this side after resting for ten minutes.


    "Ang, Sara, don''t forget to put on your mask," I said to the two.


    Then, the Blobby that they have transformed into a mask that covers their face. Everyone has gotten better to manipte the Blobbies that they have.


    "Sara, we will swap on making everyone''s lung protected by the possibly poisonous gas or whatever it is inside the dungeon. Every hour, we will exchange who will use the magic. You will do it first now. Also, make sure that you will only shoot your gun with rock bullets created from the dungeon. We don''t want them to know who we are," I said to Sara.


    "Understood."


    Sara is also an agent, so I actually don''t need to give the order. Though I still have some pride as her teacher.


    And she also has gained fame from the previous tournament with her air magic. That''s why it''s best to cover it and make them think that it''s her earth magic that kill the enemies.


    Now, we have three agents with us. And Ang is with us as well. We already have four expert level mages with us. Celestine is an expert in earth element, Wendy in her fire element, Candy in her lightning element, and Ang is multielement. With this much power, we could even destroy a country.


    "What about me, Roy? What should I do?" Ang asked. She''s eager to fight.


    "Fight however you want with only the strength of advanced level magic. Don''t use anything stronger in case they can report it to the others during the tournament. Though if the battle is too hard, you can go all out. Just try to not destroy the dungeon so we won''t get caved in," I said.


    "Okay. That''s easy," Ang said.


    I hope that''s the case. Though if it''s her right now, I think she has a chance to win even if she uses only the strength of an advanced level mage when she''s fighting an artificial master level mage. Even if she couldn''t defeat them alone, she has us to help her.


    "Now, how should we open the door?" I said as I touched the steel door. It has some sort of mechanic that I don''t understand.


    "Simple. Breakthrough it forcefully," Ang said.


    "¡­I think you have been influenced too much by me," I said.


    "Rather, I''m more confused why you''re not the first to suggest that idea," Candy said.


    It''s because I think that this mission is important and the one taking charge of this mission is currently Candy.


    "I can do it. I can somewhat manipte steel with magic," Celestine said.


    "Really!? That''s awesome!" Ang shouted.


    "Yeah. It''s not that bad. Just like Roy manipting the property inside the air, I asked Victoria about earth as well. Instead of manipting the steel directly, I will manipte the mineral that''s simr to the earth. Ang might be the strongest mage that we have right now, but I''m still someone who has been an expert level mage the longest. I need to show my seniority from time to time," Celestine said.


    I see. Just like how I change the property of gas in the air, Celestine is manipting the mineral inside the steel that is simr to the earth. There is more to magic that what everyone thinks. And it''s all thanks to Victoria who came from different world with different perspective.


    "This mean I can still grow stronger. Celestine, please teach me how to do it after this mission is over," Ang said.


    "You have the tournament ahead of you. Let''s focus on that first," Celestine replied.


    Celestine approached the steel door and touched it with her hand. And then, the steel door in front of us crushed easily. That''s scary and awesome at the same time.


    "The door is open. Let''s go!"


    We proceed into the dungeon-like ce under theb. What will we encounter?

 Chapter 467 - Splitting Up

    Chapter 467 ¨C Splitting Up


    All of us proceed after we broke through the steel door. There were supposed to be some expert level earth mages in the fight in front of the door. But none of them managed to break the door. That''s just shows how powerful Celestine has be. Even Ang asked her to teach it to herter. And Sara who is still an advanced level earth mage is also interested.


    As for Ka, once she heard about it, she will ask Celestine about it. And then, she will ask Victoria and learn it in no time. Soon, Celestine won''t be the strongest earth mage we have anymore.


    Well, I doubt about that. Ka is still focusing on her healing element and light element as well. So, Celestine who only need to focus on her earth element might still be able to get stronger.


    "Let''s proceed. Shelia and I will be at the front, and Graham will be right behind us. In the middle, Celestine will stay with Candy and Wendy. After that, Sara and Ang will be on the back."


    Sara is good with her eyes and her aim. Although my Divine Vision is better, if it''s without using ability, she has better eyesight. Putting her there means that if we got attacked from behind, and Ang didn''t manage to defeat the enemies from behind, Sara can take care of it.


    Celestine will be guarding for Candy and Wendy. As for me and the familiar, we''ll be the vanguard.


    "Okay. But if there''s a fork in the path, we need to split into teams. Roy will go with me, Celestine, and Shelia. Wendy, Ang, Sara, and Graham will take another path. If there''s a need to split up again, Roy will go with Celestine and I will go with Shelia. Wendy will go with Graham, and Ang will go with Sara. Am I clear?" Candy organized us into groups. And I think that''s pretty bnced group.


    "Clear. Let''s do that. But we will stay as is until there''s a split on the way," Wendy replied.


    It''s very bnced. Wendy, Candy, Sara, and I will be split because we''re good at investigating. Though I''m not as good as the other three, my Divine Vision would help a lot.


    Sara needs to go with Ang because she''s the weakest here. She''s only advanced level while the rest of the mages, other than me, are already expert level. That''s why she was put with the strongest.


    Even though those two just got summoned here, they are ready to fight. Well, everyone is ready to fight. After all, I''m the one who prepared them.


    Though for now, the tunnel is linear so we don''t need to split up at all.


    We proceed deeper into the tunnel, and we entered a big room with a group of monsters waiting for us. In through that room, there are four paths to take. I guess it''s great that we have prepared our group.


    "Wait. I smell a lot of monsters," Shelia said.


    "Yeah. I can see them now as well. Shelia, is your smell affected by the fact that we''re in a dungeon?" I asked Shelia.


    "Probably. There were various smells inside the tunnel, so it''s difficult for me to tell which is which."


    When I noticed that there are monsters ahead, I already concluded that this ce is a dungeon. And a high leveled one at that. After all, the monsters here are enough to even cause A-ranked hunters a problem.


    "Can we pass them without fighting them?" Candy asked.


    "That''s possible, but it might be difficult. If they are monsters that have been controlled by the cult, they will chase after us if we let them alive," I said.


    "I guess we should defeat them quickly. It''s a big room, but with so many monsters and us using magic left and right, it will be difficult. Only use small magic to defeat them or we will end up getting caved in," Candy said.


    "Understood," Ang replied.


    "Graham, Shelia, and I will approach them. Make sure to not hit us," I said.


    With me and my familiars at the front, we faced the monsters ahead. Though before we reached them, some of them have fallen because of the others'' magic. That makes it easier for us to defeat the fallen monsters.


    I don''t know what kind of monsters they are, but I have seen some of them. They were there during the war that got me killed in the end.


    At that time, it was difficult for many A and B-ranked hunters to defeat even one of them. But now, we can defeat them easily.


    Maybe because they are not strong enough yet that we can defeat them. That''s good. That''s why it''s best to defeat the cult early before they can raise their power even more.


    Although there are some unknown variables such as the mohawks, the known variables are weaker in this time than when I died in my previous life. I will use as many advantages that I can get to destroy the cult and have a peace of mind.


    The monsters that I had difficulty to sh using Victosword in my past life, was so easy to cut now. That''s just how big difference it is from then and now. Especially since I have two former Aura users as my teachers.


    And seems like these monsters have some resistance against magic attack. Although I told Ang to limit her strength to that of advanced level mage, it was supposed to be easy for her to defeat several of them in one go. But since the monsters are not normal, they only stumble and fall after being hit by Ang''s magic.


    But we can still kill them once they have fallen.


    I hope the monsters here are stronger than the monsters we will fight on the rest of this mission. That way, we can finish the job faster after knowing the strength of the enemies.


    "Candy, after investigating the undergroundb before, do you think the Professor is working his research and experiment in that ce?"


    I asked Candy after we finished the monsters.


    "¡­That''s what I''m thinking too. For someone with high status in the cult, there''s no ce well-equipped for him to do his research. Even the queen''sb is more advanced. Rather than for him, that previous ce we investigated was used for collective research than for individual research. It''s possible that we''re going to the ce that the Professor is currently located. Though my guess is that he already escaped and regrouped with the archbishop and the rest of the higher ups of the cult," Candy said.


    I also agree with her. For someone with high status, there''s no ce for him in theb. I guess we will find out soon after we investigate the whole ce.


    "Alright. There are four paths ahead. Celestine, which path should we take?" I asked Celestine since she wille with me.


    As for me, I don''t have any path that I want to go to. With my Divine Vision, what I can see through those four paths are limited. Just a tunnel going deeper.


    "I''m kind of curious with the second path from the left. Let''s take that one," Celestine said.


    "Graham and I will take the fourth path," Wendy said.


    "Then, Shelia and I will take the third path, while Ang and Sara will go to the first path on the left," Candy said.


    Everyone agreed with the arrangement. But before we enter the path, it''s best to use air magic on them all first in case they ran out of breath. We don''t know if the dungeon has been blocked or not on the other side.


    "I''ll do it. Roy''s magic is more important than mine. His portal will be used a lot for this mission, so it''s best for him to reserve some mana. As for me, I''ll be going with Ang. She will take care of the fighting, while I only need to focus on supporting her and investigation," Sara said.


    That''s good. This way, I can save more mana for when I use the portals. And in case some of them are in danger, I might need to use more portals than I thought. But I think they will be fine. Unless there''s a powerful master level mage on the way, they should be able to defeat anything in the way.


    "How long will your magic help us breathe?" I asked Sara.


    "Six hours."


    "¡­That''s twice more than me. As expected, I''m not talented in magic despite being in the same level," I sighed.


    "But you can use different types of gas that I don''t understand," Sara tried to console me.


    "Yeah, but after I teach youter, you will understand to use it right away. Well, let''s just finish this job first so we can go home earlier," I said.


    We split up into four group as arranged. If they are in trouble, they can just destroy a Blobby that I gave them. Victoria will receive the signal and I will know if they are in danger.. But if they can also get Sonia to inform us about what they find, and if they need our help.

 Chapter 468 - Its A Dinosaur

    Chapter 468 ¨C It¡¯s A Dinosaur


    Celestine and I entered the second path from the left. We split up with the others because there are four paths to take.


    "Celestine, what makes you pick this path?" I asked Celestine.


    "I don''t know. I just have some feeling about this path. And I think it''s best if I''m the one going to this path," Celestine said.


    "Can you detect if someone has earth element magic? Maybe that''s the case," I randomly guessed why Celestine picked this path.


    "No. For example, Sara and Ang are both earth element mages. But I don''t know that they are earth element mages until they told me," Celestine said.


    "Hmm¡­ What if it''s because the enemy ahead is an artificial master level mage? Because this one is iplete unlike the precious mohawk, you can sense the earth element that this enemy has. Maybe that''s why Wendy picked thest path since she detected a faint wind element."


    "Maybe. We can only know after we see what''s inside. Though I also feel simr things on the other paths," Celestine said.


    If that''s the case, maybe each path will lead to earth element artificial master level mage. I hope everyone will be okay.


    Normally, I would think that the group splitting is too weird. After all, Celestine and I are together.


    I can be considered as the strongest among everyone in the alliance. And Celestine is one of the longest expert level mages that we have. The two of us together is too much.


    Logically, I would be partnered with Sara since she''s the weakest. But because she''s an agent, she needs to be grouped with our strongest mage, Ang. Since the goal is to investigate this ce, we have to split up this way.


    As for my familiars, I think Candy decided it because that''s how we split up back when are investigating the surface area of this ce. Candy with Shelia, and Wendy with Graham.


    That''s why I am partnered with Celestine.


    We walked deeper into the tunnel, and encounter various powerful monsters that we haven''t seen before. Though they are still not that strong. We can easily defeat them.


    Though the one who did the most is Celestine. It''s because I need to save my magic for portals and various other usester. If the Professor is indeed somewhere deep in this dungeon, there should be a lot of research that he did. And that''s why I might need to use portal a lot more.


    "¡­There are a lot of monsters with powerful defense. Typical of monsters in cave-type dungeon with earth element. Though the strange feeling is still up ahead. I don''t know if it''s a monster or a human," Celestine said after defeating a lizard type monster.


    "Since they are here, they must be an enemy. As soon as you noticed what it is, I will move ahead and kill it in an instant," I said.


    "Not going to capture them?"


    "Safety first. Until I know that the enemy is weak, I will go with the intent to kill from the start."


    Human or monster. Whatever in front of us, we need to proceed.


    Whether the Professor is here or not, at least we need to clear everything in this ce. Once we do, we cane back here anytime we want in the future to investigate even deeper.


    If so, then why do we have to investigate this ce from the start?


    Well, after we''re done here, it''s not like there will be people who are free and will guard this ce the whole time. After all, the tournament is up ahead. And the cult will do something big at that time. We need every manpower that we have.


    During that time, there''s a chance that someone from the cult wille here and destroy everything. That''s why we need to grab as much as we can today just in case.


    Though I think we have grabbed everything.


    Well, I can''t say for sure. I''m not a pro at this.


    "Roy, it''s ahead. Whatever it is, it''s inside that room," Celestine said as she pointed at the room in front of us.


    It''s a room from the dungeon, but there were some modifications made by humans. Like having a door. Though the door is a normal wooden door instead of the steel door like before.


    It''s a big room, but there''s no one in there. That''s suspicious.


    We enter the room carefully while being fully alert. Even if there''s no one here, there must be something that makes Celestine feels strange things.


    "Roy, there''s an envelope in that table."


    Victoria saw the envelope. I think that it''s from the owner of this room. But when I see closer with my Divine Vision, I can read the first two words in the letter inside the envelop. Dear Intruder.


    I checked the letter again, and there''s a writing in the envelope. It says, to the intruder from Professor.


    "¡­He knows we''reing. That''s already expected though."


    I checked if there''s any trap in the envelope. And when analyze it enough to know that there''s no trap at all, I opened it.


    [Dear intruder.


    I''m the one you looking for, the Professor.


    I don''t know how you defeat my creation, but you should have thepass it has. Thatpass will bring you here. If you can somehow get this far, you might be able to meet me. I won''t run, but it''s up to your power if you can find me.


    You should be able to realize that you are inside a dungeon that has been modified. It''s a good dungeon with a lot of resources I can use for my experiment. I am at the exit of the dungeon. Or should I say that it was the entrance? Whatever.


    If you break through the steel door, there''s a magic that will be activated and destroyed the surface area where you came from after thirty minutes. You will be trapped inside the dungeon and you can only go to the other exit through the dungeon.


    If you''re lucky, you will still be alive. And I will promise you that I will keep it that way if you give me the ck Slime. Whether you are Roy who is the master of the slime, or someone else, if you manage to survive and find the exit, I will keep you alive if you can help me get the ck Slime.


    I left a gift for you in the room. I hope you will like it.


    Sincerely, the Professor]


    ¡­he called himself the Professor. I guess we still didn''t get his name. But does it mean there''s something else in this dungeon?


    As expected, he knows that we areing. He even knows my name. If we managed to get to the exit, he will be waiting there with his army. Even with how they have reduced their number thanks to the cult making a big move, there should be some powerful people left behind.


    "Roy, I found something," Celestine said.


    "Yeah, me too. Tell me yours first. I''ll tell you mer."


    "It''s inside that ss cage."


    Celestine pointed at the ss cage inside the room. I didn''t see anyone inside there. Just an empty room, with moving brown goo inside it.


    Wait! A brown goo? Is it a slime? I don''t think it''s a slime.


    "¡­Victoria. Your cousin?" I asked Victoria.


    "No. In case you forgot, I used to be a human. My cousin should be a human as well. If I had any," Victoria replied.


    "That''s the thing that makes me feel weird. And it''s rted to earth magic. That''s why I can sense it. Though I finally noticed it when we''re this close," Celestine said.


    A brown goo with earth magic that makes an expert level earth mage feel uneasy. That might be dangerous.


    And as I thought so, the brown goo gets bigger and the shape changed into a four-legged beast. It looks like a reptile. A big reptile with spiky armor and a bludgeon on its tail.


    "That''s a dinosaur! What was it called again? Right! Ankylosaurus!" Victoria shouted.


    "Thank you, my dinosaur encyclopedia. Are they some sort of creature that can change from a brown goo?" I asked.


    "No way. They supposed to be extinct in my world and if you know about dinosaur, there should be exist in this world, right? At least in the past? Do you think they came from goo?" Victoria asked.


    "I don''t know. What I know is that a Brown goo is disgusting. I can produce one, but I''m not proud of it," I said jokingly.


    "That''s disgusting."


    "Enough chat. It''sing!"


    "You''re the one talking nonsense!


    The brown ankylosaurus hit the ss cage with its tail and destroyed it. Why would anyone put something dangerous in a ss cage? Even if it''s for research, can''t they use something even stronger than ss?


    "Celestine, ording to your description, it has earth magic, right? Then we can assume that it can use magic. We need to be careful. Let me handle it from the front, while you attack it from the rear!"


    "Understood. Let''s finish this quickly," Celestine said.


    Since we faced a brown goo in this path, the others should be facing simr goo in other paths. Maybe the Professor wrote letters and put it on the other three paths as well.


    I need to defeat it fast and check how the others doing.

 Chapter 469 - Fighting The Transformed Goo

    Chapter 469 ¨C Fighting The Transformed Goo


    A brown goo turned into a dinosaur. And now, there''s a possibility of that dinosaur to use magic and destroy everything.


    So, we can only fight by letting Celestine take care of the dinosaur''s magic to not destroy the dungeon, while I will fight upfront.


    And although I hate the Professor, I want to have faith in this modified room that it can endure the attack of the dinosaur.


    The dinosaur the brown goo transformed to was called ankylosaurus. A dinosaur with spiked shell armor on its body, with a tail that seems powerful and a bulge at the tip. Like a bludgeon.


    The swung of that tail was enough to destroy a cage made of ss. In fact, even a baby with a stone might be able to break that ss. Why is it a normal ss and not reinforced ss? Did they have enough faith in their ability to not make this goo to attack them?


    I don''t think this monster is something summoned from the Monsters World. And it''s not tamed from the wild as well. It must be from the experiment they conducted.


    For now, while dodging the dinosaur''s attack, let''s see closely inside of the dinosaur.


    ¡­it''s all just brown goo. There''s no inner organ at all. Does it mean that they can''t be defeated? I doubt it.


    The Professor wanted the ck Slime, Victoria. It''s because of the experiment that makes people in the vige back then to not have the need of meal, water, and would never get tired. But it was still possible to kill them.


    Even the Blobbies can be destroyed easily. Maybe for this goo, I need to destroy it like that.


    I keep dodging the tail of the dinosaur, and finally, I made my move.


    With Reizpear, I stabbed the de on the base of the tail. The butt of the dinosaur.


    But as it''s just a goo without any inner organ, it seems like it doesn''t feel any pain at all. And it keeps trying to attack me with its tail.


    "Celestine! Victoria! Any idea on how to defeat this thing?"


    I asked the two who are here with me if they know how to handle the enemy.


    "Destroying it again and again until it won''t recover anymore," Victoria said.


    "How about using your gas to make it sleep?" Celestine suggested.


    "I''ll try!" I said.


    Victoria''s idea is basically the same as mine. But Celestine''s idea might worth a shot.


    I used air magic to concentrate a lot of sleeping gas inside three Blobbygrenades, and threw them toward the dinosaur while stepping back.


    As the three grenades hit the dinosaur all at the same time, I had Victoria destroy her clones. The gas will spread as close as possible to the dinosaur, while we don''t have to worry since I protected us with my air magic.


    And the result was disappointing. The dinosaur didn''t even react at all and continue smashing its tail anywhere inside the room. Though the room has dent in various ces, it still able to endure the dinosaur''s attack.


    "Roy, I''ll try stopping its movement!" Celestine said.


    Inside a room? Well, with her metal maniption magic, she should be able to do it.


    The room was made by some sort of reinforced metal. But with Celestine''s magic, she can use this ce for her advantage.


    Though it seems like manipting metal is so tiring for her. The expert level mage who can split the ground is tired from using metal maniption. I need to make sure we seeded in stopping it and defeat it quickly.


    The metal all over the room turned into a chain that stopped the dinosaur''s limbs from moving. Including the tail.


    "Finish it, Roy!" Celestine shouted.


    Like usual, if one hit can''t finish the enemy, I need to hit it more. And since piercing attack is useless, shing attack should be simr as well. That''s why I transformed Victoria into a hammer and smashed the dinosaur until it got ttened on the ground.


    "It''s not working!" I said.


    "What are you talking about? Isn''t it totally being crushed?" Celestine asked curiously.


    "That''s its original form! The brown goo from before! I keep smashing it each time it moves or trying to change its shape! I''ll try burning it this time."


    This time, I used air magic to create a mmable gas around the goo. Since I crushed it over and over again, the goo turned small. But it will return back to its dinosaur form if I stopped attacking.


    After creating the gas, I took a flint from my pocket to light a fire, and throw it to the goo. I''m not a fire mage, so this is what I can do.


    Seems like fire is quite effective. Should I call someone else to do the job?


    Just when I think so, the goo turned into a human form. A naked man.


    "Hey! Are you okay!?"


    Seriously, that goo we fought was a human experiment? That Professor is truly crazy.


    No matter what, that Professor need to be killed. Once we have gathered information from him, I will be happy to kill him.


    The goo that turned into a human didn''t say anything. And looked at me with hostility, so I jumped back while blocking his fist with Victoshield.


    Wait, what is this pressure? It''s much stronger than even Orc Emperor''s punch! Only gigantic monster can have this much strength in their fists! And it''s on the body of a human being?


    I got blown away to the wall and leave a huge crack. For someone who is confident with his physical ability, that was a huge shock. But I quickly regain my footing.


    "Roy! Are you okay!?" Celestine asked.


    "I am. That goo turned into a human, but his inner organ is dying. There''s nothing we can do to help him. I will kill him. You just need to protect me." I said.


    During the short moment since he throws his fist at me, I managed to analyze his inner organ. And it returned back to a normal human''s organ. Other than its deteriorating quickly. He''s dying.


    The worst part is that there are two hearts inside. I know very well that they are the hearts of human beings. One heart is the size of an adult, while the other is a heart the size of a child.


    Which means, the Professor is experimenting with children. Something that neither Celestine nor I will ever forgive.


    That''s why I told Celestine that I will be the one to kill the dying man in front of us. But that man didn''t go down without a fight.


    He finally used it. Earth magic. And since the metal in this room has been used to restrain him, he can freely manipte the earth.


    Though Celestine was quick to react. She seems to be weaker than the man in front of us. So, it''s another artificial master level mage. Though this one is probably still in testing period. Unlike the previous mohawk girl.


    "I can''t hold it much longer! Roy, kill him!" Celestine shouted.


    "I will."


    While Celestine holding the room we''re in so the enemy''s earth magic can''t be used to attack us, I charged at him with Reizpear in hand. When the de of the spear touched his chest, I feel quite a lot of resistance. It''s as if he''s wearing a powerful armor even though he''s naked. It''s his skin.


    Still, I didn''t give up and pour more strength and Aura into my attack. And I finally managed to pierce his heart. Just one of them. The big heart inside the body.


    This time, he feels the pain. Unlike back when it''s a dinosaur.


    He should have died. But he has two hearts. Leaving his smaller heart still beating in the chest. The right chest.


    "Did we do it?" Victoria asked.


    "We''ll see."


    "You''re not going to finish him?"


    "We''ll see."


    "You keep saying we''ll see twice. What will we see? Oh!?"


    Victoria then noticed what I meant. I also didn''t think that it would turn this way.


    The human I stabbed, turned small. Now, he''s just a child. Seems like after piercing the big heart, leaving the small heart, it will make him turned into a small child.


    If my guess is correct, then this child form is the child that was experimented. And the adult form was the adult who was experimented. They were fused into one and turned into a brown goo that can change shape.


    "It''s a child!"


    Celestine shouted and hurriedly approached the dying boy. Like I said before the inner organs is deteriorating quickly. Even now, it''s impossible to revive him even with my medical knowledge from the future.


    "¡­Roy, made him swallow a Blobby," Victoria said.


    "You mean forcing him to stay alive with Blobbies inside as substitute for his organs? That might work."


    I realize what Victoria wanted to do, so I did as she said. I had her create a Blobby and made the boy swallow it. After a while, the Blobby inside the body started changing shape and became the boy''s new inner organ. I hope the boy can still survive after this.


    Though I don''t know if he still regains his memory. Is it the memory of the child, or the memory of the adult? We don''t know.


    What I can do is bring him to Varadis and hopefully, if he''s being brainwashed, Russell can undo it.


    "They finally did it¡­" I said to myself.


    "Using children for experiment? They have done it from a long time ago," Celestine said.


    "That too, but that''s not what I meant. That dinosaur we fought before. If it''s just me, it''s nearly impossible to win against that dinosaur before it transformed into a human. They have finally created a secret weapon against Aura users. If this is thepleted version, they should be easy to defeat with the help of the others. I hope that''s the case."


    A goo that doesn''t feel pain, and can continuously attack using its body and even magic. Most Aura users during Victoria''s and Sonia''s era will be defeated by such things. I guess this Evil God is still afraid of Aura users even after exterminating all of them.


    I need to figure out a way to defeat such things again in the future.


    Anyway, what about the others? Are they also fighting goo? I guess I will visit them for now. If there are other simr rooms like this one that they entered, there might be other letters from the Professor. If not, that mean the Professor has some way to tell that we will enter this room. Or he thinks that there will be a group that will investigate the whole ce, so he can just put a letter in random ce and wait until someone took it.


    I can''t wait to kill him.. But before that, we need to collect information from him.

 Chapter 470 - The Others Also Fighting Goos

    Chapter 470 ¨C The Others Also Fighting Goos


    While Roy and Celestine fought the goo, the others also entered simr looking room in the path they have taken.


    Shelia and Candy entered the reinforced room with a ss cage as well. Candy found the letter with the same content as the one Roy found. The Professor has too much time to spare.


    "Candy. There''s something inside the ss," Shelia said as she can smell something is inside it.


    "Hmm? Brown goo? A living one?" Candy analyzed the thing inside the ss cage.


    "Maybe it''s Victoria''s friend," Shelia said.


    "I doubt it. This must be the thing that was told from the letter."


    "Let''s kill it then!"


    Unlike Roy and Celestine, this time, it''s Shelia who attacked first. The goo realized the killing intent from Shelia, and transformed into a dinosaur just like the one Roy fought.


    Shelia''s attack didn''t do much on the dinosaur as it has no effect.


    "Interesting. Fine, I''ll sh you with my ws until you''re dead!"


    For this fight, Shelia just attacked at the dinosaur again and again. Part of what can be called as the dinosaur''s flesh got all over the room as Candy hid her body behind the desk so she won''t get dirtied.


    But Candy realized that the separated flesh of the dinosaur is moving and trying to return back to the ce where Shelia is fighting the dinosaur. So, she used fire magic at it.


    But the magic resistance of the goo is too strong. Even just a small part of it, Candy needs to use higher firepower to burn it to ashes.


    "This might be a bit difficult. Shelia, let me fight it. Seems like physical attacks are useless against it. Magic can damage that thing, but I need bigger firepower," Candy said to Shelia who is still fighting the thing that no longer look like a dinosaur.


    "Okay! I guess I need to train even more," Shelia said.


    Unlike Roy who instantly thinks of another way to defeat the enemy in front of him, Shelia is not that smart. She''s a creature who loves fighting and the only way she can think of to defeat enemies she can''t hurt is for her to be stronger.


    Candy burned the dinosaur with a powerful fire magic, and just like the situation with Roy, the dinosaur turned into a human.


    "Hey, are you okay!?"


    Seeing that the enemy in front of her turned into a human, she thinks that it was a human experiment and after defeating it, it turned back into a human. But that''s wrong.


    The naked man in front of her tries to attack Candy, but Shelia quick enough to notice that as she pierced her ws to the chest of the enemy.


    "That was close. If you get hurt, Roy will be sad. I don''t want that," Shelia said.


    "You do know that if you get hurt as well, Roy will still be sad? Anyway, thank you for saving me. But what is this thing?"


    While Candy is curious about the thing in front of her, the fit adult male body transformed into a senile old man. And the two prepared to fight again, when a portal opened.


    "I''ll take care of that guy. Seems like you faced the same thing as I did. I''ll bring him to Varadis to see if the people there can cure that guy."


    Roy appears from the portal, grabbed the senile old man, and opened another portal to Varadis after pouring something ck into the man''s mouth.


    "You fought that thing as well?" Candy asked.


    "Right. You also got the letter? Anyway, you can continue going this path. If you have the same letter, I guess the paths will be connected again ahead. We''ll be meeting there before the exit. See youter."


    Roy left as quickly as he arrives. This time, he''s checking on the others.


    Wendy and Graham has difficulty facing the goo in front of them. The dinosaur has been defeated after series of wind magic and light magic attack from the two of them, but the human the goo transformed into was too strong for them.


    "He can use earth magic to defend himself. My wind magic is not strong enough! Graham, stall it for five minutes! I''ll try something bigger!" Wendy said.


    "Can you really defeat it? Sigh¡­ why do I have to do this? Well, shadow clone! Let''s defeat that thing!"


    Graham who has called his shadow clone to help him fight, but still found no way to defeat the enemy. So, he agreed to stall for time with just him and his clone.


    His clone will fight up close since it doesn''t matter if it dies, while Graham attacked using light magic from afar. But the enemy is not just strong. He''s also an artificial master level earth mage.


    "Alright, I''m done. Graham, move!"


    Wendy used a powerful and concentrated wind magic toward her opponent and trapped him in a wind sphere. Where every wind inside is hitting him again and again as sharp as a sword.


    "Is it done?" Graham asked.


    Suddenly a portal opened. The man from inside the portal quickly pierced the chest of the enemy. It was Roy who attacked the enemy.


    "You also fight one as well? And you have the letter? Man, the Professor is the most annoying creature in the world," Roy said as he pulled out Reizpear from the enemy''s chest.


    "You also fought one?" Wendy asked.


    "Right. Shelia and Candy also fought one as well. I bet Ang is fighting the same thing. I''ll take this guy¡­ I mean girl to Varadis and have the doctors there see if they can find anything," Roy said.


    The man turned into a little girl after being stabbed by Roy. Just like before, Roy put a Blobby inside her mouth to keep her inner organs from deteriorating, and transported her with portal.


    "That goo from before is most likely immune to physical attack. But when it transformed into human, it''s not. But even in human form, they are still strong enough to kill me if I''m not careful," he said.


    "Then, you''re checking on Angst?" Wendy asked.


    "Right. The two over there are both mages, so they should be fine."


    After saying some other things like the paths will connect, Roy left again. This time, it''s toward Ang''s location.


    Ang is currently fighting the dinosaur alone while Sara ignores the fight and investigate the room.


    "Other than the letter, there''s nothing important in this ce," Sara said after checking the room.


    "Really? What about Victoria''s friend here? It keeps regenerating over and over again how many times I attacked," Ang said.


    "How about using stronger magic?" Sara suggested.


    "Nah, it''s also good for my training. I''ll use stronger magic once I know I can''t defeat it with my current strength," Ang replied.


    Just as Roy told her, Ang only uses the strength of an advanced level mage instead of using her full strength of an expert level mage.


    "It''s also good using earth magic in this ce. Maybe I can learn to manipte metal like Celestine," Ang said.


    "Don''t take too long. Our mission is to investigate this ce, not to fight. If the weaker version of you have trouble, the others might have difficulty fighting the same thing. We must hurry to help them."


    Even though Sara said that they need to hurry up, she''s still calm.


    "Don''t worry. If anything happens to them, Roy wille to help them," Ang said full of confidence.


    "But from the letter, it seems like we will be facing the Professor after leaving this ce. If he helps the other, he might have used quite a lot of mana to use portal. Well, he can just drink mana potion to help recover his mana."


    "Right? Though it seems like he''s already here."


    At the same time Ang said that, a portal opened.


    "You''re not done yet?" Roy asked Ang as soon as he saw her fighting.


    "It will be done soon," Ang said.


    "Once you defeated that form, it will turn into a human. I''ll fight that so we can finish sooner," Roy said.


    "Is the human form stronger than this one?" Ang asked.


    "At least it can use magic. And the physical strength is simr to the one you''re currently fighting. You should have defeated that thing sooner so it will transform and you can fight it before I arrive," Roy said.


    "Sigh¡­ I guess I''ll finish it now," Ang said as she casually used zing ice magic. The ice that burns on the enemy.


    The ice stuck on it, so no matter what the enemy is doing, it won''te off.


    And the dinosaur transformed into a human being. It instantly used earth magic trying to attack, but Roy is faster and stabbed his heart. And Roy did the same thing to this enemy like the three from before.


    "What are they?" Sara asked.


    "I don''t know. But it has two hearts. Once one heart is destroyed, it will transform again. The one I fought transformed into a small kid. Candy''s enemy turned into an old man. Wendy''s enemy turned into a little girl. And this one turned into another old man. What I can guess is that it''s an experiment tobine two or more beings into one. At least two of them are humans," Roy exined.


    "How cruel!" Ang shouted.


    "Well, since you''re done here, I''ll be going back to where Celestine is. See youter."


    Just like that, they defeated the four brown goos. In which all of them turned into earth magester on.. And their body transported to Varadis to be checked.

 Chapter 471 - Giant Tortoise

    Chapter 471 ¨C Giant Tortoise


    "Are they done?"


    After I finished checking on the others and transport the human experiments to Varadis, I returned back to Celestine who is resting after spending too much mana. She''s still not used to manipting metal, and how she tries to stop the enemy from using earth magic was too tiring for her.


    She has drunk some Mana Potions, but she''s still tired. Though we can''t move forward if she keeps resting.


    "They are doing fine. Though the enemy they are facing are all earth mage as well. But from the looks of it, the room in this ce is more reinforced. I guess it''s the reason why you felt something strange from this path. Can you sense anything ahead?"


    "No. After defeating that goo, there''s no other thing that makes me feel weird. I have rested enough. Shall we go?"


    She looks tired, but if she says that she has rested enough, I think we can still go on. Though from now on, I will be the to fight most of the time. I am confident in my stamina more than my magic.


    "Then, we will go ahead. If the paths we take connected ahead, we will see each other soon. The others should be okay even if they fought the same enemy again. I guess it''s difficult for us since we only have you as the only mage here," I said.


    "Maybe we should get another person?" Celestine suggested.


    "Not now. Let''s get as far as we could just the two of us. At the exit, the Professor should have prepared something to greet us. I might ask for the others to help before we leave the dungeon," I replied.


    For now, I need to inform the others first. I called Sonia toe and she appears in front of us right away.


    "Any news?" Sonia asked.


    "Yes. Tell the others that the Professor is waiting for us. I might need everyone''s help so they need to prepare themselves. I''ll transport this letter to portal. You can inform Albert and the kings after Ka read the letter," I said as I opened a fist-sized portal so I can transport the letter. I didn''t say anything to those on the other side because if I opened the portal for too long, I will waste my mana.


    "Okay," Sonia replied.


    She then disappeared and appear again on the other side of the portal just before I closed it. Now, let''s move.


    Just like in the three other rooms when I visited them, I left a Blobby in this ce as well so I can check on this ce again in case we missed something. I put them somewhere conspicuous because if the Professor realized that there''s a Blobby in this ce, he will use it to gain immortality. To insert the Blobby inside his body so he can survive without food, water, or rest.


    Though maybe he already has one in his body since he knows the effect. There''s no way he would miss it.


    Still, for my name to be written in the letter¡­ I hope he just thinks that I''m just someone with a lot of powerful mages as friends. Seeing that the goo from before is immune against physical attack, and my Aura doesn''t affect it, if he knows about it, that Evil God will do anything he could to destroy me. I hope the Professor is too greedy to get the ck Slime and didn''t tell the Evil God about me.


    Being used as a bait might be useful to get him out in the open, but I have too many friends. They might be used as hostages since the Professor knows we live in Cassau.


    "Oh? A monster?"


    As we move forward in the dungeon, trying to find the exit, we encounter a monster blocking the path. It''s just a normal Ogre, and not one that has been experimented. Though I don''t know if it''s controlled or not.


    I killed the Ogre with one hit of my spear easily. I guess it''s not experimented as it has the strength of a normal Ogre.


    "Still, for a man alone to defeat an Ogre this easily, it should be nearly impossible unless he has magic strong enough to even destroy this tunnel. Though I''m just talking about regr mage. Not our mages who are far beyond average," Victoria said.


    "You''re right. I forgot that the monster I can easily kill now are something that regr mages will find it hard to defeat. Still, we need to be careful. Oh? There are two paths again. One to the bottom level, and another one to the upper level. Celestine, which way should we take?" I asked Celestine.


    "The upper path should take us to the exit since we''re below the ground. But we''re here to investigate, so let''s go down first," Celestine replied.


    "Okay."


    I left a Blobby in in the room I defeated the Ogre, and climbed down to the lower level.


    Just like before, there were monsters as well. Seeing how there are monsters, seems like it has been a while since the cult members who explored the dungeon cleared the monsters. Or maybe it''s this dungeon''s fault to keep making monsters appear as fast as possible? I don''t know. The truth about dungeons are something that everyone can only specte.


    There were some monsters who were quite strong, but they are not strong enough to defeat me. I can easily defeat them with one hit.


    As we go deeper, I finally see something.


    ""Stop!!""


    Celestine and I shouted together. I guess she can also sense it at the same time I see it using my Divine Vision.


    "Celestine, you can sense it?" I asked.


    "Right. You can see it? What is that monster?" Celestine asked.


    That''s right. What she sensed is a monster under there.


    "Something like a giant tortoise. But its limbs are being tied with a quite powerful chains it seems. Even the neck. But the most important thing is that on its back, the shell, there''s mineral growing on the back of its shell," I said.


    "¡­Roy, do you think that monster is what the cult is hiding? The source of some magic resources for experiment?" Victoria asked.


    "I don''t know. But that''s probably the case. If we read the documents we found on the way, we will know it. But we didn''t read any and just grab everything. For now, let''s see if I canmunicate with it. That monster doesn''t seem like one to appears in this dungeon," I said.


    "I agree. The feeling is different. Also, halfway through the lower level, it feels like the ce is not natural. Something like being created by humans," Celestine said.


    Hmm¡­ maybe that monster is used for breeding purpose. To grow magic resources on its back.


    "Let''s be careful while encountering it. Its mouth has been closed as well. I will release the bind on the mouth of the tortoise first. Be careful since it might release some sort of magical beam like Spot can do," I said.


    We entered the room where the giant tortoise is. It''s a big room since it was made to fit the tortoise. Though how the tortoise was put here is something I don''t know. Maybe it was put here since it was just an egg.


    As we enter, the tortoise also saw us. But it only looked at us for a moment, and then it closed its eyes again. It was as if the tortoise has given up trying.


    On its back, I can see some parts of its shell has been dug many times, and some have started growing some sort of ores. Well, if this monster has been raised by humans, there''s a chance that it can understand ournguage.


    "Hello, I came in peace. Please don''t attack as we''d like to talk. If you''re harmless, we would even let you go," I said.


    I don''t know if the tortoise can understand or not, but seeing as its eyes are looking at me curiously, I guess it''s worth a try.


    "Victoria, transform into your original form," I said to Victoria.


    "What about your disguise?"


    "Use Blobbies for it. I will need you to make an appearance so the tortoise know that I can be trusted with monster," I said.


    We only spoke in low tone so the tortoise can''t hear us.


    And then, Victoria started transformed into a blob of slime and rested on my shoulder.


    "It''s fine. He''s not a bad guy. He has a lot of monster friends," Victoria said to the tortoise.


    The tortoise''s eyes are ncing between Victoria and I. Well, it''s obvious that it can''t react. It''s being chained after all.


    "For now, I will release the chain blocking your mouth. I hope I won''t hurt you," I said.


    After Victoria introduce herself, I had her transformed into a key so I can unlock the bind covering the tortoise''s mouth. It''s connected to the one holding its neck, so I had to release it as well.


    "Alright. Seems like you can understand my words. But can you speak?" I asked the tortoise. Though I don''t think that it can talk.


    "I can," the tortoise replied.


    "You can talk!"


    Although I want to believe that it''s a monster that can talk, I was still surprised seeing how it talked so calmly.


    But it''s good since we can ask it questions.. I think we can get something from it.

 Chapter 472 - Different Kind Of Freedom

    Chapter 472 ¨C Different Kind Of Freedom


    "Wow, you can talk as well!" Victoria said happily.


    "A slime without a mouth can even speak. Why can''t I?" the tortoise replied.


    "We''re just surprised. Can you exin about this situation?" I asked.


    "About how I can speak? I have been surrounded by humans since as far as I could remember. Me and my siblings. That''s how I can speak. Though when I start to be able to speak, they started locking my mouth. They only open it regrly so I can be fed. Though I was only allowed to eat some kind of ore," the tortoise exined.


    "Is that the ore growing on your back?" I asked while pointing at the magic ore on its back.


    "That''s right. We have the ability to grow any kinds of mineral that we eat on our shell. Even when we eat just a little, we can grow a lot more in our back. That''s why they are locking me here. They want to get as many of this ore as possible," the tortoise said.


    "What about your siblings?"


    "They were fed different kind of ores and put in different location. I haven''t seen them for years," the tortoise said.


    I see. This kind of tortoise can grow a huge amount of ores on their back, with only a little bit of ore for them to consume. They are good for breeding.


    But¡­ from what I heard; it doesn''t seem like the tortoise doesn''t hate it. Maybe it''s because it has been raised in confinement since very young for years.


    "Hey, what''s your name?" Victoria asked the tortoise.


    "The humans that came here keep calling me the tortoise. I don''t have a name."


    "Then, is it fine if I give you a name?" Victoria asked.


    "Will you? I will be honored. Make it a good name," the tortoise replied.


    "First, are you a boy, or a girl?"


    "A boy."


    "Then¡­ how about Red?" Victoria said excitedly.


    "We already have a Red. He''s a werewolf," I said. Howe she forgets someone''s name when I was the one who often forget it?


    "Oh, right. I rarely talk with him, so I forgot. Then¡­ I don''t know what name to give," Victoria said.


    "Howe!?"


    "It''s a set with are you a boy or a girl question," Victoria said.


    "That doesn''t make any sense. Anyway, how about we call him Heavyback or something. Let''s make an easy name to remember," I suggested.


    "¡­I feel like that''s how a Viking named their dragon. Well, if he agrees, that''s fine," Victoria said.


    "Heavyback, is it? That''s a cool name! My back is heavy indeed, and it''s an easy name to remember!" the tortoise agreed with the name. I guess that''s good.


    "Sigh¡­ what if there are other tortoises as well? How will you name them?" Victoria asked.


    "Shinyshell, Leggone, Neckgone, Hidelimbs, and other tortoise rted name," I said.


    "¡­You two are such a pair. Neither of you have good naming sense," Celestine said to both me and Heavyback.


    Is it? But it''s so easy to understand though. Shinyshell is if the tortoise has shiny ores on its back. Leggone, Neckgone, and Hidelimbs are because they can do that. What other names I would give?


    "Those are cool names! If you meet my siblings, can you give them those names to them?" Heavyback requested.


    See? Even Heavyback agree with me.


    "Wait, what do you mean by us meet your siblings? What about you? You don''t want to leave this ce?" I asked.


    "Why do I want to do that? I can stay here without doing anything, and given food to eat. I just need to sleep and let those peoplee so they can harvest the ores growing on my back. I like it here. Though it''s a shame that they never gave me a name, you have given me a good name," Heavyback replied.


    I guess he has been living his whole life without ever experiencing freedom. He thinks that a life in this room is the only thing he needs.


    ¡­If it was me, I might do the same. Sometimes, freedom can be poison. Some people don''t need it. And one of them is Heavyback.


    "Wait, you don''t want to meet your siblings?" Victoria asked Heavyback.


    "Not at all. If they are the same as me, they should be strong as well and can endure their shell being dug. They should be fine," Heavyback replied.


    Hmm¡­ now that I think about it, the name Heavyback is too long. I''ll just call him HB.


    "Don''t you want freedom?" Victoria asked.


    "I''m already free. I can sleep and stay here as much as I want," HB replied.


    "But you will be able to taste real freedom outside this ce. The group of people who captured you and your siblings, and they locked you up in this room, they will be defeated by us. You can only wait for your death here," Victoria said.


    "No, Victoria! That''s not something you should say!" I shouted, but HB already heard everything.


    "So, if I kill you all here, I can be free?" HB looked at us with hostility.


    Oh, no. Things went wrong. For someone who thinks that he''s already free, one shouldn''t tell him that he will be free when what we do is actually restricting him in his mind. Unless he can experience another kind of freedom that he will enjoy, we won''t be able to persuade him.


    HB started inhaling air from the surrounding, and about to let out a breath attack. As an air mage, I can tell that it''s just air. Buting from a monster, it might be really powerful.


    So, while HB has his jaw wide open, I kicked it to close it before he can let out his breath attack. The breath attack got canceled, but I managed to get him angrier.


    "Sigh¡­ it''s all your fault, Victoria. Celestine, use Blobbies to unlock the chains. I will transport him somewhere else," I said.


    But before Celestine released HB, I put three Blobbies somewhere on HB''s body so I can go to where he is to ask some more.


    After Celestine released the chains from him, HB still tries to attack me. But I opened a portal to an empty ind on Monsters World so he will go there when he''s charging at me.


    And as HB entered the Monsters World and experience the blue sky and the sun for the first time, I said something to him.


    "I will talk to you againter. For now, taste a real freedom you have never experienced. I might bring your siblings here if I find them. But we will still destroy the group that captured you and locked you in this ce. Not because of you. But because they are going to destroy everything if I didn''t destroy them first. I will exinter once we''re done here. Just wait and enjoy the sun!" I said.


    "The sun¡­"


    HB said something, but I closed the portal before he finished his words.


    "So, we will release the other tortoise?" Celestine asked.


    "We will need to find them first. If the others found this ce as well, which I think they should be since they are better at investigating, and there are other tortoises, I will ask them to leave a Blobby at the rooms where the tortoises are. I will release them to the same ce HB is before we exit this dungeon since there''s a possibility that the Professor and the cult is thinking of destroying this dungeon."


    I have given the others several Blobbies to left in any important location that they found. I will ask them after we meet up.


    After closing the portal, I grabbed the ore that falls from HB''s back so I can show it to the others.


    "Alright. Before we go upstairs, let''s check this ce again. Celestine, do you sense anything?"


    I have told Sonia to ry a message to the others. And since she hasn''t ryed a message from the others to me, at least I can say that they haven''t found anything worth informing yet. Maybe we took the shortest path.


    "There''s nothing here other than the chains. Let''s bring them home since they seem to be very strong," Celestine said.


    "They could even hold the giant tortoise, HB. They might be useful if we want to capture the enemies. Since there''s nothing else here, let''s go back upstairs."


    I opened a portal to where Albert told us to bring the evidences in the capital, and threw the chains inside. I just told the people in there that it''s a strong chain and might be usefulter.


    On the way to the upper floor, we didn''t see any monsters.


    We encounter several rooms in the dungeon, but there''s nothing inside. Still, we double-checked them so we won''t miss anything.


    "There''s not much of stuffs worth taking here as well. I guess they must have taken the really important stuffs somewhere else. Probably the exit of this dungeon," I said.


    "¡­Roy, how long do you think the Professor has waited for us?" Celestine asked.


    "Hmm? Well¡­ we did defeat the Mohawk Girl months ago. If the Professor prepared for our raid since then, I guess it''s normal for them to take important items away from here. Also, the back of HB''s shell has a lot of ores already. I guess it has been a while since they were harvested."


    Seems like we won''t find something really important in this raid. And the Professor might not be there at the exit.. Still, we can only move forward to know what will happen.

 Chapter 473 - Meeting Up With The Others

    Chapter 473 ¨C Meeting Up With The Others


    "There''s another way down from here. I guess we should go down again. Maybe we''ll find other tortoises," I said to Celestine after we climbed up the stairs in the dungeon.


    We have progressed quite far but there''s still no sign of exit. Just how big is this dungeon?


    When we were at the previousb, we need to go deep underground. It was so far down that I could barely see the surface. And after that, we go deeper again, before we finally started going up. I think this is the biggest dungeon I''ve ever explored.


    "Let''s go down quickly. I have started to get tired of this ce," Celestineined.


    Me too. If it''s just a normal dungeon, I would be interested in exploring it. But there have been many modifications in this ce. The dungeon has been renovated and there were experiments that we need to investigate. It''s a pain to do so many things.


    We went down to investigate the lower area. Like before, there are some rooms that were used for experiment. I grabbed some stuffs, and put them all in the Blobbycart that I pull.


    After meeting HB, we entered other rooms and grabbed a lot of evidences. But since I don''t want to spend more mana to made portal, I had Victoria made some Blobbies, and turned them into a cart so I can carry the evidences easily. And with my strength, going up or down the stairs while pushing the Blobbycart is easy.


    I took everything I could carry, and when the cart is full, I transported the content using portal. With this, I won''t have to use portal too many times just to deliver some papers.


    And as we continue going down, Celestine stopped me.


    "Roy, I sense two peopleing from below!" Celestine said.


    "Wait. They might be our friends. I''ll go closer to take a look."


    I couldn''t see the pair thate from below. But as I get closer, I can finally see who they are.


    "Celestine, don''t worry. They are Ang and Sara. Seems like we reunited with them first," I said.


    The two that areing are Ang and Sara. The girls who entered the first path. Seems like our paths connected to each other.


    "Hey! It''s us!"


    I shouted to the two when Ang suddenly prepared an offensive magic to attack us. And when she hears my voice, she canceled her magic.


    We reunited right there, and start discussing about what we found. And seeing that I have Blobbycart with me, the two put down everything they carried into it.


    "You found a lot. Did you check everything?"


    "Yeah. Though it seems like you found a lot more than us," Sara said.


    "Actually, Roy just grabbed everything he could put into the cart. Even the whole desk instead of opening the drawer and grab everything there," Celestine said.


    "Well, for him, I guess that''s to be expected. Unfortunately, I''m not that strong. Though we managed to grab everything important," Sara said.


    Most of the stuffs she carried are papers. About some kind of research. Well, it''s ab after all.


    "So, did you find a huge tortoise?" I asked the pair.


    "Yeah! It''s so big! Though I didn''t try to talk to it. After finding the tortoise, we just left a Blobby so you can get it," Ang said.


    "Really? I thought that if it''s you, you would try to get the tortoise and talk to it instead," I asked Ang curiously.


    "I would like to. But since I''m holding back my power so I can only use the strength of an advanced level mage, it will be difficult if I ended up having to fight it. And I might need my power to defeat the enemy at the exit since they seem to be preparing for our arrival," Ang said.


    Right. But We don''t know yet if there will be people waiting for us or not after having them wait for us for so long. Though I won''t tell it to her. We need everyone to be prepared at all time. If I told her about it, she might let down of her guard.


    Well, even if she lets down her guard, she''s still Ang. Her instinct can protect her from danger.


    "Roy, I''ll take care from here. Celestine wille with us while you go down there and transport the tortoise. It''s better to transport the tortoise right away instead of doing itter after everything is over. Just in case the dungeon is destroyed," Sara said.


    Celestine agreed to the n, so I transported the whole content of the cart again with portal, and run down to where the tortoise is instead of using portal there.


    Sara has told me the location of the portal and show the magic ore she picked from the back of the tortoise. And it''s different from the ore that I got from HB. Seems like different tortoise, different mineral.


    I see the simr tortoise in the simr room where I found HB before. And just like HB, this one is also tied up with a chain.


    Let''s get it done fast so I can go back to where the others are.


    "Hey. I know you can understand me. I met another tortoise beforeing here. I don''t know if he''s your sibling or not, but I will transport you to where he is. Don''t resist," I said.


    I released the chain tying down its limbs. I also opened the bind on its mouth so it can talk.


    "Is he my brother?" the tortoise asked.


    "I don''t know. But I''ll tell it to you straight. The people who imprison you in this ce are bad guys. And I don''t like them. So, I will get you out of here. You don''t have the right to refuse," I said to the tortoise as I opened a huge portal.


    When I looked at what inside the portal, I was shocked to see¡­ HB is turned upside down. And he can''t recover from that position.


    "¡­What are you doing?" I asked HB.


    "¡­I fell," HB replied.


    "¡­I don''t know if he''s your brother or not. You can go there and help him if you want to. If you don''t, that''s fine. He''s annoying after all. If I see any other tortoise, I will bring them here. But don''t expect anything since I might not found any," I said.


    "Why? Since you found us, you should help all of us," the new tortoise asked me before it entered the portal.


    "Don''t expect anything. The people who imprisoned you are someone who doesn''t care about the lives of other. Not just other species, but also fellow humans as well. Your siblings might have died a long time ago," I said.


    "I see¡­ But if you find any, please get them here as well," the tortoise said as he entered the portal.


    I closed the portal thinking that this tortoise is much more polite than HB. Why is this one so different from the previous one?


    After finishing my business with the tortoise, I returned to where I met Sara and Ang. They should be going up already.


    After running for a while, I finally meet up with the others. Not just Celestine, Sara, and Ang were there. Candy, Wendy, Shelia, and Graham are also there waiting for me. This is where we reunited.


    "Hey. Did you see any tortoise on the way?" I asked Candy and Wendy.


    "I entered a simr room like you said. But other than the chains, there were no tortoise or any other monster inside. Maybe the one in my ce has died," Wendy said.


    "We also didn''t find one. It''s just simr room with chains," Candy said.


    "And there''s a faint smell of a monster from that ce. It has simr smell on Celestine. And now that you''re here, I can smell it even stronger. There must be a tortoise there in the past. But because of the faint smell, it must have died," Shelia reported.


    Candy and Wendy also told me that they found reports about the tortoise''s condition in a room near where the tortoise was imprisoned. And from what we find, each tortoise has different minerals on their back. I was right about that.


    I think I also get simr report about the tortoise. Though I didn''t read any. I just grabbed everything, and put them into the cart. It''s faster that way.


    "Now that we are all here, I guess we''re closer to the exit. Should I bring the others here?" I asked their opinions since we might enter battle soon.


    "No. With your eyes, Shelia''s scent of smell, and Celestine and Ang''s detection, we can be prepared for what''s toe. Just call them when you see something dangerous ahead, or the exit is in sight," Candy suggested.


    "I guess you''re right. For now, put all the evidences on this cart. We might add some more that we findter. I''ll transport themter if it''s full, or we''re near the exit so I can get the others toe at the same time," I said.


    After taking a ten minutes break while discussing about what we found, we move again.. With all of us here, moving forward is easy even if we find another goo here.

 Chapter 474 - Fighting Multiple Goos

    Chapter 474 ¨C Fighting Multiple Goos


    In a big room inside the dungeon, we encounter ten goos at once. I guess we should take care of them real fast.


    "Ten of them at once! Mages! Attack!" I gave the order.


    It''s not the first goo we encountered after meeting up with the others. Before we reached this room, there were some goos. But only one at a time would appear. And now, there are ten of them right away.


    And our n is simple. Since we have experienced fighting them already, we don''t need to think too much.


    At first, the mages will attack first. Candy, Wendy, and Ang. As for Sara and Celestine, seems like their earth magic is useless against them. So, only three of us attacked.


    After that, once the goo turned into a human, the rest of us stabbed the heart of the enemies. I and Graham can use our spear, Shelia can sh them with her ws, Celestine and Sara can use Ground Spike to pierce their heart. Or Sara can just use her gun to shoot at them.


    Some are too strong that we need to attack them several times until we can pierce their heart. But with all of us working together, it wasn''t hard.


    And now, fighting ten goos at once, Candy, Ang, and Wendy attacked at the same time. Candy use her fire magic, and Wendy used her wind magic to spread the fire. As for Ang, she can do both actions at once.


    Even more, Ang still used the strength of advanced level mage. Not her real strength. She''s much too strong now. I think she will ask me to spar with her seriously in the future. And the chance of me winning is so slim.


    Among all of us, she''s the one with the highest chance to reach master level. If she asked me to fight her in the future once she reached that level, I won''t be able to do anything against her. I will lose without knowing the reason why.


    Though if I could still get much stronger than I am now, I can still win. But it''s nearly impossible to see how much growth I have. I can only do so in a real fight. That''s why for me, experience is important.


    Though once the cult is destroyed, I don''t want to have anything to do with training or getting stronger anymore. But if Ang still want to fight, I guess I need to make sure that I am still fit a while after the cult is destroyed. She deserves it. But if she doesn''t want to, that will be the best.


    Back to the fight. Because of the huge fire inside the room, the air is burned. But it''s not a problem for us since Sara used air magic on all of us.


    "Is it over now?" Candy asked.


    "Not yet. Burn them a little longer. They haven''t transformed yet," I said.


    With my Divine Vision, I can tell that not all of the goos have transformed into humans. Just some of them.


    "Graham! Shelia! Sara! I will point where the goos that have transformed into humans. You will kill them. The first three are the one on the right, third from the right, and second from the left," I gave the direction to where the humans with two hearts are.


    "Can we kill them instead of attacking just one heart?" Shelia asked.


    "That''s fine. I think we have grabbed quite a lot of them from before. Capturing them is optional, but we have spent too much time in the dungeon, so whatever is the fastest for you," I said.


    "Good! Now, die!"


    The three of them aimed their attacks to the direction I pointed.


    Sara with her gun. I don''t need to worry about her aim since she''s a better marksman than me. As for Shelia, her sh attack affected a wide area. And she can attack continuously. Graham used light magic to attack from afar. Her power is weaker than Shelia, and his aim is worse than Sara. He also can''t use his attack continuously like Sara. So, before he could kill his target, Shelia killed it after killing her target.


    "Hah! I''m still the better familiar than you!" Shelia proudly said to Graham.


    "¡­That''s fine. I''m not going topete with you. The sooner we destroy the cult, the sooner I can be free. I have that goal in mind," Graham said.


    I guess the reason he participated willingly in this mission is because of that purpose. He''s right. Once I have destroyed the cult, I won''t have any other purpose to call for them. Maybe I will go to Monsters World asionally, but I don''t need to call them unless it''s for something important.


    It seems like as long as what we''re doing is rted to the cult, I can use him well. That''s makes it easier for me to ask him to do something.


    "Next one is¡ª"


    "Wait, I''ll do it myself."


    I was about to continue pointing at where the next goo that transformed into a human is, but Ang stopped me. She wanted to take care of them herself.


    Since we don''t need to grab all of them for research, we can just kill them.


    "¡­Roy¡ª"


    "It''s fine. I don''t see anyone there with the heart of a child. Ang, you''re free to do what you want."


    I know what Celestine is worried about. And this time, there really is no one among them who has the heart of a child. Killing a child is taboo for Celestine. And probably all of us as well. That''s why I told her what I see with my eyes.


    Hearing my reply, Celestine sighed in relief. And Ang smiled happily knowing that she can do whatever she wants.


    And she did. She burned all of the goos until there''s nothing else remaining. Even after transforming, they were quickly got burned to ashes.


    "¡­I guess for the next goo we fight, we can leave them to her," Sara said.


    "¡­Did you really teach her something at school?" Candy asked Wendy.


    "¡­I might have given her some guidance, but most of it was her own doings. I''d like to say that she''s the student I''m proud of, but I didn''t teach her much, so I can''t really say it. Still, I''m d she''s on my side," Wendy said.


    We have experimented on the goos on the way here. Once they transformed into a human with two hearts, I tried to talk some senses to them. But no matter what we said, they never reacted.


    But once we destroyed one of the hearts, and talked to them, they reacted slightly. Which mean we can only get something from them once we destroyed one of their hearts. So, we have to pick one who dies among the two in that one body.


    Before we came here, we encountered some. And I always told them to never aim their attack toward the smaller heart of the two. And they transformed again before I transported them.


    As for the rest of the research, I can leave it to the doctors in Varadis and Russell. They are the best doctors in the continent. At least other than me and some doctors in Cassau. Though I also get some doctors from Cassau to go to Varadis to help with their research.


    We finished everything so quickly thanks to Ang. And the next goo we encounter, Ang defeated them all.


    "It''s fine. I didn''t waste as many mana as I expected. Using advanced level to improve my magic is a good idea of training."


    Seems like she got better in just a few hours we''re in this dungeon. Just what the hell is with that growth rate!?


    "Wait! Let''s stop here and get some rest. My vision is clearer now. Up there, the mana is not as much as it is here and my vision is clearer. There seems to be many things renovated by human hands, but there aren''t humans at all there. Let''s rest here for a while."


    Seeing that the vision is clearer now, the exit should be closer. We will soon reach the exit and find the Professor. Maybe. We don''t know if the Professor as still waiting for us or not.


    "Are you going to call the others now?" Candy asked.


    "Not now. Once we get closer, I will call for them. Sonia, tell the others that I will call them soon," I said to Sonia after I summoned her here.


    Sonia has been so busy today. Not only she''s watching at Consenza with Spot, she also keeps rying messages everywhere. If only we could find a simr ghost to Sonia to help us¡­


    "It''s fine. I have been staying still in that house for a thousand years. Doing so many things in one day makes me feel better instead," Sonia replied after I asked her about my concern.


    "That''s good. We''ll start moving after resting for thirty minutes. Tell them that they can rx during that time," I said.


    If they are too tense before we call them, they will just get tired instead once we call them. Sometimes, waiting is more tiring than fighting. It wears you off mentally.


    Once we''re rested enough, it''s time to move again.

 Chapter 475 - Calling Everyone

    Chapter 475 ¨C Calling Everyone


    "¡­I can finally see the light."


    "Don''t say it like you''re dying. Just say that you can finally see the surface again."


    Victoria replied to my words. She''s right that I can finally see the surface. But it''s just slightly above the ground. Not even half meter tall from where I see.


    "I can''t see much. Only some people''s feet. Anyone with foot fetish would be happy to trade ce with me," I said jokingly.


    "Good thing there''s no one with foot fetish here. Anyway, what should we do now?" Victoria asked the others.


    "We haven''t finished checking everything under the ground yet. But if Roy can see that far already, if they have artificial master level mage out there, not the goo, then they would notice us soon," Candy said.


    "Not really. They can sense me when I''m looking at them. Just like that mohawk girl back then. But before I looked at her, she never detected my presence. Probably like the Vampire Queen, Arin. Though in case I''m wrong, we need some n. Should I get the others here now?" I asked Candy.


    "Sure. Other than Veronica and Julia who might be busy in Varadis keeping eyes on the mohawk that you brought over previously, the others are free toe," Candy said.


    Since we''re this deep underground, I hope the mages above the ground won''t be able to tell that I used magic to open up portals.


    "Everyone, be mindful of the surrounding while I opened the portals. We have a lot of people to bring over," I said.


    When everyone turns their back on me to watch the surrounding, I opened a portal. This room is quite big, so everyone can be here.


    I opened several portals at one by one. Good thing we rested frequently since I have used magic many times already today.


    On the first portal, Kron, Fabio, and Carmen entered the portal. They were at Bernard''s mansion in Arturo. All three of them wears Blobbymask to cover their identities. It will be terrible if someone from the cult realized their identities. Except for Kron.


    Kron is wearing his trademark blue bandana he got after he turned bald from the cult member who exploded himself. I think that''s the main reason why Kron joined with us to fight the cult.


    Since he''s a powerful and quite well-known hunter, even if the cult realizes his identity, they will just think that Kron is hired by someone. He''s just a hunter who will work for money.


    Hmm¡­ but if he got caught, the cult might be able to tell that the other members of our n are rted to the mission as well. I guess it''s a correct decision to get him wear a mask.


    "Alright, I''m here! Where''s the enemy!?"


    Kron shouted as he entered the portal.


    "Not here. Move aside. I will open another portal to get other people. This room is pretty big, but we can''t just get everyone enter the portal all at once," I said.


    "Oh, sorry," Kron apologized.


    "You can wait until I called the everyone to hear the situation. I''ll open the next portal now," I said.


    After Kron, Fabio, and Carmen move out of the way, I opened the second portal. It''s connected to the capital of Tatrama where several of Albert''s men are ready to fight. Once they entered, Candy took charge of them and get them out of the way as well.


    The third portal, I connected it to Cassau. Ka, Jewel, Shirley, and Lina''s monsters, Sunny and Elsie, entered the portal first. After that, it was the vampires turn.


    After we have scheduled the date of the raid, I gathered all the vampires back to Cassau to get them fight with us in this mission. With Arin in the lead.


    They all have be our allies that we can trust. At least after they talked with Albert, Albert told me that none of them said any lies when they said they are willing to participate. And I trust Albert''s decision to let them join.


    Sophie and Lina didn''t participate. Lina can''t fight, and Sophie doesn''t want to fight. They just stand on guard in Cassau. Protecting the children.


    Seeing that we are all here, Ka looked at the situation first and told those who came with her to move to the side. She knows that they are not thest one that I called here.


    And then, thest portal. It''s connected to the Monsters Vige in Monsters World. A group of angels and werewolves entered the portal.


    "That''s everyone, I guess. Now that we''re in this ce, I think we have quite the number. Candy, give the report of the situation to everyone," I said while taking out a bottle of mana potion so I can recover my mana slightly.


    Elsie and I looked around to see the situation. Are there any other people inside the dungeon? How many enemies are above the ground? And if there''s another building in the surface.


    Elsie can draw now after ying with the children. She loves drawing. And so, with one of her tentacles holding a paper, and another tentacle is holding a pen, she started drawing the surface area.


    Seems like Ka has given her the order to do this right away as soon as Elsie got transported. Elsie doesn''t care about the situation, but she will do everything as ordered. So is Sunny.


    Well, in fact, all the monsters here don''t care at all about the situation. Only who, when, and where they need to fight. I also gather everyone here so they can tell that those who are here are not enemies, while other than us are enemies.


    "Is that the map of the surface? Thanks, Elsie!" Candy thanked Elsie after Elsie finished her drawing.


    There were several legs above the ground that I can see. All of them are human''s legs. I hope that''s the case.


    If it ended up as some sort of monsters with the legs of humans, that will be scary.


    There is also a building above. Probably, that''s the realb of the Professor.


    "How many people are there?" Candy asked.


    "Around thirty. And we can expect them to be at least expert level mages with the possibility of some of them being stronger because of experiment. What''s our next move?" I asked after informing the situation above the ground.


    "¡­Investigation will be difficult if the enemies are powerful. From now on, Roy will take the lead. Not me. The purpose of this mission is investigation, but if the Professor is here, we have to capture him no matter what. As for the rest, we can kill them. The building and any other stuffs above the ground, are allowed to be destroyed," Candy said.


    So, we won''t grab any other documents? Well, that''s make things easier. We can just destroy everything then. Though I think finding important documents will be important as well.


    "Okay. For now, Candy, Wendy, and all the agents, won''t fight unless it''s necessary. You will grab everything that seems important with you. Although finding documents might not be our most important mission now, we might still be able to find something. Though our fight might cause a lot of them to be destroyed, so try to grab as much and as fast as possible. Celestine, how can we tell the Professor from other people?" I asked Celestine, the former member of the cult.


    "He loves to wears yellow," Celestine said.


    "¡­what?"


    "He always wears yellow. Whether it''s hisb coat, shirts, pants, or even his hair, all of them are yellow. He loves the color yellow," Celestine said.


    "¡­Any chances of him wearing other color to disguise himself?" I asked.


    "There''s a possibility of that happening, but from the first time I met him, everything about him other than his skin is yellow. Even his hair. It''s too much yellow for my eyes. Try asking Veronica if there''s anything that she knows. I tried to not interact with him as much as possible," Celestine said.


    I guess asking Veronica as well is necessary. But before I called Sonia, Candy already did and told her to ask Veronica about the Professor.


    "Anything else other than yellow?" I asked Celestine.


    "Nothing. Though if my guess is correct, if he can do it, he will try to change his skin color to yellow," Celestine said.


    Wait, so if he still wants the ck Slime, he will try to change its color to yellow? Isn''t Yellow Slime amon monster? Easiest to kill? Maybe after he found out about the ability of the ck Slime after it spread inside human''s body, he tried to experiment with Yellow Slime. Though since they are monsters that can be killed, of course he won''t find anything.


    Sonia returned with a message from Veronica. The content is mostly the same. But with an extra addition.


    "Veronica said that the Professor loves the color yellow too much. Even if he tries to disguise himself, it will be easy for Roy to find him. And if he has the clone of ck Slime used on him already, Roy can just find him after looking at his inner organ," Sonia said.


    "Oh, that''s right. I almost forgot about that. I guess we have two clues to find the Professor. The color yellow, and the ck Slime. If I find anyone with simr features, I will quickly go to his location. I guess just me and my familiars are enough. As for the rest of you, fight the other enemies. Let''s go!"


    With that, we started moving toward the exit. We are close to thepletion of this mission.. Things are moving well.

 Chapter 476 - Exiting The Dungeon And Capturing The Professor

    Chapter 476 ¨C Exiting The Dungeon And Capturing The Professor


    "Alright, let''s move!"


    I said after I have Victoria transformed into a ck armor to cover my body. I''m going as the Living Armor who killed the Giant Smander back then. During the Stampede at Melk.


    But this time, I''m much stronger. If there''s a simr Giant Smander, I can kill it with one hit this time. Though what we will face are most likely humans, there are still possibilities of monsters they are experimenting to fight us.


    "Oh, it has been a long time since back then. Do you wear fis stocking under there?" Kron asked.


    "No way!" I replied.


    "But I can transform into one if you want to," Victoria said.


    "NO WAY!" I replied again.


    That time, when we finished taking care of the Giant Smander, she transformed the armor so I only wear the upper part of the armor, while my pants under there was lifted up so people can see me with my fis stocking. That was embarrassing. And Kron remembers it.


    About that fis stocking that can endure fire, right now, Ka is the one wearing it under her pants. And seeing her wearing it, I gave her a thumb up.


    Ka noticed that I''m giving her a thumb up, and realized what I meant. She just replied with another thumb up from her.


    "Ka. What was that? Youmunicate with Master without a word?" Jewel asked.


    "It''s something you can do with someone you know well. If you know what''s in his mind while he did some gesture to you, it''s easy to figure out what it is he''s doing," Ka replied.


    I guess Jewel doesn''t know about me wearing a fis stocking. That''s good. I don''t want to be seen as a weird Master by my own disciple.


    ¡­I''m already weird though? So, I guess it''s fine. What I don''t want is to be seen as a pervert who wears fis stocking as a hobby.


    We run up to get closer to the exit. And as we run closer to the exit, I can see more people. And the building up there is tall. But I haven''t seen anyone wearing yellow, or anyone with ck Slime in their body.


    And as we run, we have fewer and fewer people. Because the agents would split up to continue investigate the ce we missed, while we continue running toward the exit.


    It''s good so far because no one seems to notice that we areing. Though there is a ce near the tall building with a lot of goo inside. I guess there will be a fight. But with this many people, it should not be a problem.


    "I can see the exit! Melee fighters! Stay at the front!"


    Slowly, the people outside the exit realized that people are getting closer to the entrance of the dungeon. They were not quite prepared. I guess they are at most just expert level mages.


    Hah! Just expert level mages? The me in the past would think of them as people I would never think I''d be able to surpass. But now, they are just enemies I can kill easily as long as I remain focused.


    I won''t let down my guard, but I will still focus more on capturing the Professor. And with so many of us here, we can defeat any average expert level mages.


    Even one werewolf or one vampire is enough to fight one expert level mage. Though for the angels, it will be difficult for them in a one on one fight. But they are more of a healer than a fighter.


    "There''s an attack from the dungeon!"


    I heard one of the people outside shouting. Must be the guard. Shouldn''t they know that we''re going to attack them? At least that''s what I think from the letter from the Professor.


    But I guess it has been so long since they think we''re going to attack, and they let down their guards. Maybe they think that we''re not going to do anything because the tournament is near. Especially since the Professor should know that I''m getting along with Ka, Ang, and most of the finalist of the college tournament back then. So, he thinks that I, the master of the ck Slime, is going to Consenza because my friends will participate.


    But that means there''s a high chance that he won''t be here. Well, let''s look for him for now. I''ll ask Sonia and Spot to watch over if they see anyone yellow getting closer to the Consenza.


    The guards are all earth mages. They prepared to block the exit using their magic. But that won''t be a problem for us.


    They might want to use powerful magic to trap us inside the dungeon and destroy the exit. But we have the most powerful mage below master level mage here. Ang.


    "I''ll take care of them!"


    Ang flew above our heads toward the exit, and used magic stop the magic of the enemies. They are not strong enough to handle Ang.


    A tsunami of soil killed the guards easily. Ang won''t hold back now that we''re closer to the end of this mission. Though some of the guards are wind mages who can fly, so they weren''t affected.


    But we managed to get out of the dungeon. Let''s get to the tall building now. I can see everything clearly again, and I see someone at the top of the building. He''s quickly changing his clothes to a normal whiteb coat and disguising himself in panic. But I know he''s the Professor from the inside of his body.


    "Fire mages and werewolves! You will go to that ce and destroy all the goos there! As for the rest, go to that building over there! Graham! Shelia! You two wille with me and greet the Professor."


    Fire magic is the most effective magic against the goo. And the werewolves will be the one finishing them once they are transformed into human being. After that, if I take too long to put a Blobby inside their body to make their organ function properly, they will die. That''s why I need to get to the Professor first if I want to help everyone.


    Ka, Jewel, and the others who are not fire mages, entered the building through the front door. There were some expert level mages guarding the ce. But they won''t be difficult to handle.


    The difficult ones are in the middle of the building. There are multiple mohawks standing by there. And they are not sleeping. Unlike the mohawks I see when I first entered the undergroundb previously.


    But since they haven''t made any move, we can progress with the mission. And even if they tried to fight, Ka and the others should be able to hold them back until I finished capturing the Professor.


    As for Graham, Shelia, and I, we directly go to the top floor of the building. We flew over there right away while the Professor is alone there. No one is here to protect him.


    As we reached the height of the highest floor, I smashed the wall with Victohammer. I''m pretending to be a living armor, so I won''t speak. And I will only use hammer as a weapon for now.


    "Uwaaa! M-Monsters are here! Guards!"


    Seems like the Professor has no battle strength. Other than experimenting and research, he''s weak in everything else.


    There''s ck Slime inside his body. Which mean I can''t knock him out. But I already told Graham and Shelia that we won''t try to knock him out, or killing him. So, they need to restrain him.


    The two quickly grabbed the Professor''s arms and legs, and I wrapped a Magic Restricting Cor around his neck. Even if he''s weak, it''s still better if we make sure he won''t be able to use magic. But that might not be enough, so I stripped him naked. He might have some magic tools with him after all.


    "What is it? An angel? A werewolf? And a Living Armor? Who the hell managed to get you all under their control!?"


    Me. The one you think as Living Armor. Though I won''t say anything yet.


    I injected a needle into his body, with Victoria. This way, I can directly absorb the ck Slime''s clone. Since it was the clone of the ck Slime from a long time ago, Victoria can''t absorb them from afar like her clones. That''s why I can only do this.


    "You! You''re absorbing the slime from my body! No!"


    Now that all the slime inside his body has been taken, I smack him in the head lightly. And he got knocked out unconscious just like that.


    Oh, no. Two mohawks are approaching. I have to be quick before we start fighting.


    The fainted Professor got transported to Tatrama where Albert can interrogate him. He won''t expect that the king will interrogate him as he will think that the king should be going to Consenza. But that''s just a body double. The real king is still staying in Tatrama, until I am ready to use portal to transport him to Consenza.


    "Shelia! Graham! Two mohawks approaching. I will only fight with hammer for now. So, Shelia will fight one alone, and for the other one, Graham, his shadow clone, and I will fight. I will still pretend that I can''t talk. Let''s kill them all so we can go home."


    Our real mission is over. But now, we will fight artificial master level mages. Not the goo, but the mohawk.


    I can see several mohawks are splitting up to fight other people. There might be casualties in this fight.. Though I hope it won''t be my friends who died.

 Chapter 477 - Against A Fat Mohawk

    Chapter 477 ¨C Against A Fat Mohawk


    The two mohawks didn''t hear when I gave the order to my two familiars. And when they broke through the floor to reach the floor we''re in, I will stop talking again.


    Before the mohawks broke through the floor, Shelia already made a move and charged at one of them. I guess she know his location from the smell.


    Shelia kicked the man as far as she could. Since we''re fighting against a mohawk, if we fight too close with the others in this ce, there will be casualties. That''s why Shelia kicked him as far away as possible from here, and followed him soon after.


    I don''t expect that all of us will survive, but we need to reduce as many casualties as possible. Though Shelia''s real reason why she kicked the man away most likely because she wants to fight him herself. She hasn''t had enough of fighting powerful enemies so far.


    Our real mission is over, now she can do whatever she wants. As for me, Graham and I will take care of this fat old man with mohawk.


    Although the enemy is an old man, he''s still a mohawk. I mean he''s still an experimental result to create a master level mage. His body is about as strong as the mohawk girl I fought in the past. And since I will only fight using a hammer, it might be difficult. But Graham and his clone should be able to help me.


    Before the match started, I looked around the facilities outside the dungeon we just exited from. There are other mohawks facing other people. But none of them are working together, while we have teamwork and have trained for this situation. And I think Arin and Ang can take care of one mohawk each.


    As for the rest, there are werewolves and vampires who can help. And several expert level mages. Also, the angels can heal the injured. Even if they can''t defeat the mohawks, they should be able to stall for time until someone managed to defeat one first.


    I''d like to be the one who defeated the mohawk first, so let''s get it done quickly.


    Graham created a shadow clone from his own shadow thanks to the light entering the building from the hole I created to enter this ce. Now, it''s three on one against the fat mohawk.


    "An angel, a shadow, and¡­ a man in armor? I have been tasked to protect the Professor. Where did you take him?" the fat mohawk asked.


    A man in armor? That''s me. I guess even if he''s artificial master level mage, he can still tell the difference between a real monster and a human wearing armor. Though I won''t say anything to him back. It''s best to keep it as secret.


    I swung the hammer in my hand down at him, but he easily blocked it. Though I didn''t use my full strength, that should be more than enough to squash any average people to death.


    "Wait, the armor seems to be a living being. Is it a Living Armor?" the fat mohawk asked again.


    Is it their trait to keep asking questions? Maybe the Professor''s curiosity is nted in their brain because of the experiment.


    "So, you are inside the Living Armor to protect yourself, while the living armor moves your body so you can fight? I guess that''s to be expected. There''s no way anyone could be this strong without experiment from the Professor."


    Good. The fat man thinks I''m inside the Living Armor to protect myself. At least I can still cover my identity. He didn''t think that the Living Armor is the ck Slime.


    "Enough questions. I''ll kill you now and get everything done faster!" Graham said.


    Graham and his shadow clone approached the fat mohawk, and thrusted their spears at him. But the fat mohawk grabbed the shaft of their spears before the de reached his skin.


    "You''re an angel. An angel and a Living Armor? So, the man inside the Living Armor is a tamer who tamed powerful monsters. I guess if I defeat him first, I don''t need to mind the monsters."


    After the fat mohawk said that, he aimed a magic at me from his hand. It''s a powerful wind magic much stronger than what Ang can use. I guess his element that reached master level is wind element.


    I strengthened VIctoriarmor with my Aura to protect myself. Just the armor is quite durable. Andbined with my Aura, I shouldn''t receive any damage.


    But when the wind sh appears, it hits me right on the chest. The armor protected my body well, but I still feel the pain. But it''s not over yet as the fat mohawk continuously casted Wind sh to attack me. Even the wall of the building has been destroyed.


    Seems like this building won''tst long. There are also other mohawks fighting in the lower floor.


    I need to get this one away from this building.


    Graham keeps attacking the fat mohawk, but the fat mohawk only focused on me. Which mean, I just need to get away so he will chase after me.


    "Running away? No. You''re looking for a better ce to fight. Fine, I will follow you."


    As expected, he followed after me.


    I run away as far from the building as possible. And because he''s a powerful wind mage, his speed is much faster than me. But luckily, I managed to escape to an emptynd quite far from the building.


    I faced the fat mohawk with the building behind him. Now, all his attack that is focused on me won''t reach that building.


    "I''ll kill you now and ask you where the Professor is," the fat mohawk said.


    "How do you ask dead person?" I asked back.


    "Oh? You finally talked."


    Oh, shit! Though I hope he won''t recognize who I am just by the voice. It''s not like he knows me already.


    I''ll keep quiet from now on. There''s no need to talk with him anymore.


    With that, I changed the head of the hammer to be bigger as I swung it down to the fat mohawk.


    "Again, with that attack. You already know that it won''t work against me-!"


    This time, the head of the hammer is much bigger. And also, Victoria altered the weight to be at the heaviest, while I use my full strength and Aura. It''s much faster than before, so he barely blocked it with his arms crossed after the tip of the hammer touched his rising mohawk. But he''s quick, so he only got injured on his arms that tried to block the hammer.


    "How did you get so much stronger!? And the weapon changed size!"


    I didn''t reduce my strength as the hammer is being stopped. His feet have sunk on the ground, but he still has a lot of strength.


    To defeat him, just like before, I need to get him to waste as much mana as possible. Or, I need to use more powerful attack to defeat him. Though I''m not alone, so we can defeat him without having to get him waste his mana first. After all, we need to be quick so we can help the others.


    Graham and his shadow clone finally appear, and tried to pierce the fat mohawk''s body with the spear. This time, the de reached his body. But it didn''t hurt him much. Still, Graham is an excellent fighter. He rapidly attacked the fat mohawk in the same ce to make the wound bigger.


    "Oh? I can''t fight because my hands are tied with the hammer. Just how strong is the Living Armor? The Professor would have liked to have it along with the ck Slime," the fat mohawk said.


    But that ended up as hisst words.


    "You won''t get anything from us. Die already!"


    Graham and his shadow clone usedbination attack together. And finally, the two''s spears pierced the fat mohawk''s chest and stabbed his heart.


    I already see that the mohawks in this ce doesn''t have ck Slime corrupting their inner organ, so I don''t have to worry about their recovery. They will still die if their heart or brain stopped working.


    "That was quick. I don''t think Master need toe this far just to swing a hammer," Graham said as the fat mohawk no longer breathing.


    "But if I used it somewhere else, it will destroy everything. Look at the crack on the ground you''re standing on? With this much strength, I will disturb other people''s fight. Let''s go back quickly and help the others," I said to Graham.


    "What about Shelia?" Graham asked.


    "She wanted to fight a strong opponent, and she''s getting one. Try to find anyone else in trouble first. As for me, I need to survey the surrounding and see if there''s anyone else nearby," I replied.


    With that, Graham and his shadow clone returned to the building and seek for people in need for help. As for me, I flew away and look around with my Divine Vision to see if there''s anything worth watching.


    Seems like other than at the entrance of the dungeon, there''s really nothing else nearby.. I guess I''ll help the others too now.

 Chapter 478 - Shelias Side And Angelas Side

    Chapter 478 ¨C Shelia¡¯s Side And Ang¡¯s Side


    In the corner of my sight, I can see Shelia is still fighting the artificial master level mage that she kicked away. He''s a green mohawk.


    Right now, I''m in the air looking at how everyone is doing. And I see Shelia''s first. She seems to be having some problem with the green mohawk as the fight is not over yet.


    "Do not interrupt me! I will be fighting him alone!"


    Seems like Shelia notices me from the smell. So, she said that she doesn''t need any help. The green mohawk seems to notice me as well since when I''m looking at him, he looked back. That might be the reason Shelia shouted.


    The others are still doing well, but I''ll watch how Shelia is doing.


    Inded in a ce near the two, and stood still. Showing them the gesture that I will only watch and not do anything. Shelia understands me right away.


    "It''s two against one? I''m a bit at disadvantage then," the green mohawk said.


    "No, it''s still a one on one. He won''t participate," Shelia said.


    "Really? But you should have realized that you can''t do anything to me no matter how strong you are. It''s my first time seeing a monster that can talk, but I guess I will have to kill you. I wish that I could give you to the Professor to be experimented, but I guess that won''t be possible," green mohawk said.


    Why do the mohawks talk so much? Is it because of the experiment?


    "Then, I will use my full strength against you."


    Shelia is already in her strongest form. The real werewolf transformation. Not the one that makes her look like a human female. It''s the form of a standing wolf. But in this form, she is much stronger, and faster than her usual form. And not just that. Her regeneration rate is much faster in this form as well.


    So, how will she use her full strength?


    She told me to not get involved in the fight. But if she''s in danger, I will help her.


    "Awoooo!"


    Shelia howled while in that form. And from the ce we were before, I heard several werewolves howling as well. they must be the werewolves who are still fighting. Seems like howling increases their morale.


    Oh? Shelia became even faster and stronger. But the green mohawk used wind magic barrier to block all her attacks.


    "Like I said, I will no longer let down my guard and you can''t do anything to me. Give up," the green mohawk said.


    "ROAAAAR!"


    Now she''s roaring? And her attack became even faster. I can see that the wind barrier is about to be destroyed.


    "Oh, that''s dangerous. I''ll take your arms."


    Calmly, the green mohawk casted Wind sh at Shelia''s arms when she''s trying to punch him.


    And he did it. Both Shelia''s arms got cut off. And that''s also when he let down his guard.


    Shelia then used her fangs to attack. She bites the green mohawk on the neck, and easily severed the head from the neck. The green mohawk, with a shocked expression in his face, died instantly.


    "¡­seems like your fang is much stronger than your ws," I said to Shelia.


    "Yes. I need tobine biting and shing in my attacks. I guess I need to train more," Shelia said.


    "Okay. For now, you are not allowed to join the battle until your arms grow back. It''s an order. Take a rest," I ordered Shelia and left.


    I know that she can grow her limbs back with her regeneration ability. As long as the head is not separated, she will still be fine. That''s why I was still calm when I saw her arms got cut off.


    There are still more mohawks near the building where we captured the Professor is. I wonder why they have to be mohawk?


    Maybe I will get the answer after the mission is over. Old man Henry is busy researching the mohawks I previously captured after all. Maybe I''ll bring the corpses of the mohawks here to there. It might be helpful for them to research.


    This time, I found Ang fought a mohawk. The mohawk this time is a thin girl.


    "Why are you attacking us?" the thin mohawk girl asked Ang.


    "All I know is that you''re involved with bad guys. If you want to know more, you should ask someone else. Though I won''t let you do that. I will kill you here," Ang said.


    "We''re not involved with bad guys. All the researches and experiments we do are all for the sake of the world," the thin mohawk girl said.


    "For the sake of the world''s destruction. You forgot one extra word," Ang replied.


    "Why do you think we are going to destroy the world?"


    "Because that''s what the goal of the people you are involved is. No more questions. I am not smart enough to answer all your question."


    This time, the opponent is an artificial master level mage in ice element. I wonder how Ang will win against her?


    "No! Don''t help me! You can watch from the sideline!"


    Seems like she noticed me as well. Since I have the permission, I''ll watch from the sideline. As for the other mohawk, I can watch them from here.


    The mohawk creates an ice field on the ground, and Ang stopped it from reaching her with her fire. But the fire slowly got taken over by the ice. They weren''t extinguished. They were frozen.


    Unlike Ang''s ice that is hot, or fire that is cold, the fire from Ang got frozen. Little by little, the ice is getting closer to Ang.


    But Ang used earth magic to create Ground Spikes and attacked the mohawk. This time, it''s really a battle of magic.


    Ang with her multielement should be at advantage because of how she can use her four elements. But the mohawk''s ice is too strong. Ang will surely be stronger again in this fight.


    This time, Ang engulfed herself in fire. The fire around her body is so hot that I can feel it even from this far. But the person inside the fire doesn''t seem to feel any heat at all.


    That''s fire armor. It''s totally useless against physical attack, but against ice magic, it should be useful.


    "Howe you don''t feel the heat? And why aren''t your clothes burned?" the mohawk asked.


    "Training!" Ang replied.


    While being covered with fire, she created Fire Spears and threw them to the mohawk. But the mohawk''s Ice Shield protected her.


    "You made a hole in my shield. You''re dangerous," the thin mohawk girl said.


    "I''m going to make a hole in your body though."


    This time, Ang created even more Fire Spears. And they are all bigger than before and also much hotter.


    Wait, that spear looks like Reizpear. I guess since magices from imagination, when she''s thinking about spear, she''s thinking of Reizpear which is my main weapon. It''s because for her, I''m the strongest person she ever faced. And with that image in her mind, her Fire Spears will be much stronger.


    And I''m right. The Fire Spears destroyed the Ice Shield made by the thin mohawk girl. Before this, Ang needed three Fire Spears to make a hole in the Ice Shield. But now, one Fire Spear is enough to melt the Ice Shield. Not made a hole, but melt.


    "This is impossible. You haven''t reached master level mage yet."


    "It is possible. I''m a genius and I will keep growing stronger!"


    Did she call herself genius? Well, confidence is good. And maybe it''s because of that confidence that she created even more powerful magic again and again.


    The thin mohawk girl is unable to keep up with Ang. While Ang easily creates several Fire Spears instantly, the thin mohawk girl can only create one less Ice Shield in that time. And finally, she no longer has a shield to protect her.


    "This is my final attack. I feel sorry that you have been used as experiment, but you have to die so we can have a better future."


    Ang created a gigantic Fire Spear, and throw it at the thin mohawk girl. With no more protection, she tried to block it with her arms. But that''s pointless. Her arms broke, and the spear pierced her body.


    No blooding out of the corpse. It''s because the Fire Spear closed the wound instantly with extreme heat. That''s scary. And disgusting. Even though I''m a surgeon.


    "¡­That was well done. Only the side that got burn though. As for the rest, it''s pretty much raw. Maybe some parts are rare," I said jokingly.


    "That''s a human body. Not a steak. Anyway, how''s the other?" Ang asked.


    "So far, so good. If you have rested enough, let''s split up and help the others. Shelia also managed to kill one mohawk. Though she''s resting now until her arms grow back," I said.


    "She fought until she lost her arms?" Ang asked again.


    "You mustn''t do that. You''re different from her," I said.


    "I know. Well, I''ll go help the others now. Is there anyone I should be worried about?"


    "No. They are doing well. You are free to help anyone. I''ll go see Arin. She''s alone fighting a mohawk just like you. See youter then."


    The two of us split up. I will go see if Arin, the Vampire Queen, can fight on her own against the mohawk. But since she has simr regeneration skill as the werewolves, she should be fine. Unless shecked blood.


    Well, I gave the vampires a job to eradicate another bandit group a few days ago.. They should be full before this mission started.

 Chapter 479 - Arins Side

    Chapter 479 ¨C Arin¡¯s Side


    I was about to go to where Arin is, but I guess that was not necessary. It''s because that Arin is being blown away to this location.


    She stopped near my location, with her bodyying on the ground. She''s covered in blood. Her opponent must be a wind mohawk. I mean a wind element artificial master level mage.


    Arin quickly stood up, and looked at me.


    "He''s stronger than I thought!" Arin said.


    Though I didn''t reply her. And it seems like this wind mage is more powerful than the previous fat mohawk I fought. Maybe I should help her.


    "I''ll take care of this myself. If I can''t do this much, there''s no point in me migrating to this world," Arin said.


    Actually, there''s a point for that. You helped us a lot and even willingly join us. You even gained Albert''s trust, so you are very helpful. Though I didn''t say that since I still pretend that I can''t talk.


    Wait, maybe I don''t have to hide the fact that I''m not a Living Armor. The mohawks can tell that I''m just someone inside a monster. Though I won''t help her much this time. She can fight however she wants.


    But for now, I''ll check the others first. I think the others might need my help even more. And she has some blood bag carried with her. if she lost too much blood, she can drink them.


    For the vampires in this mission, we gave them the blood donated from our expert level mage so they can carry it with them. They are quite the delicacy for the vampires. So, they don''t want to use them for this mission since we told them that they are free to use it however they want if they didn''t drink the blood for the mission. I think they want to drink the bloodter instead of during this tense situation. They prefer to savor itter.


    Though after research and experiment, it''s best to donate blood at most every two months. Our body needs time until we canpletely recover from the loss of our blood. And that''s why we need two months.


    And the higher your magic level is, the faster your body can recover. So, expert level mages might only need to do it once a month or even less. But just to be safe, I still told them to just do it every two months. And I think we need to have more people to donate their blood.


    As for how, we will think about itter. For now, the missiones first.


    Ka and Jewel are fighting one mohawk. They keep attacking the mohawk to get him overuse his magic and get destroyed just like the mohawk girl I fought the first time. That''s a good idea. When I asked if they need my help, they refused it and said that I need to help others who are in bigger trouble.


    I looked outside a building, and see several agents, werewolves, and angels fighting two mohawks. There are no other expert level mages because they are busy with other mohawks. I need to help them.


    And it''s not just the mohawks who are the trouble. There are some other mages in this ce. Most of them are expert level mages.


    Even though our advanced level mages can hold them back, they are still troublesome since there are too many of them.


    I thought that they should be going to Consenza already, but it seems like they are not going there. But if I think about it, there''s a possibility that those who are going there will be much stronger, and maybe have even more numbers than those staying behind here.


    We need to be quick, so we can go back to rest before the tournament started.


    When I arrive to help the werewolves fighting a mohawk, the werewolves be even more spirited. Their ws and fangs keep wounding the mohawk, until the mohawk finally die. After that, we quickly helped the angels and the agents to defeat the other mohawk. Though some of the werewolves prefer to fight the expert level mages instead. That''s fine since I''m here to help.


    With that, only the expert level mages remaining here. The werewolves, agents, and angels can take care of them. Though I think some of the agents died because I came toote. I shouldn''t have watched the others fight, but I''m more worried about them than these agents. Sorry, but I''ll make sure weplete this mission.


    The other have stalled the mohawks for a long time. It seems they don''t need my help, so I returned back to Arin whose head got sliced with Wind sh on the forehead. Her brain is free for all to see.


    "Tsk! I need to take the blood from the blood bag. I''m still far too weak," Arin said.


    "Seems like the others have been defeated. But that''s fine. I''m the strongest one left here. Once I''m done with you, I can take care of the others," the mohawk said.


    There are too many mohawks here, so I can''t keep calling them all mohawk or it will be difficult to differentiate. Good thing this one has a distinct feature.


    This one is mohawk has unibrow. A unibrow mohawk. Unibrohawk.


    Even after fighting Arin for a while, Unibrohawk is still calm. Seems like he can stay longer than the others.


    Arin drank the blood from the blood bag after her head recovered. Maybe because of the quality of the blood, she seems stronger than before.


    Arin shoot Blood Bullets from her finger toward the Unibrohawk. But they got blocked by his Wind Shield.


    "You have gotten stronger than before. Is it the blood? But you''re still not strong enough to defeat me," Unibrohawk said.


    "Yeah. I need to drink more blood," Arin said. And this time, she''s charging toward me.


    She wants to drink my blood? Well, that''s fine. She has drunk it once, just a little bit. And it makes her stronger.


    Back then, when I fought the Vampire King, he also drank a drop of my blood. But it doesn''t affect him much because it was too little. And Arin who drank more, received more power.


    This Unibrohawk¡­ if Arin got strength increase like the Vampire King, by drinking the blood of her fellow brethren, she can defeat him easily since she''s much stronger than the Vampire King back when I defeated him. But there''s no way that she would do it since she will lose her mind.


    That''s why, her other option is to drink my blood who is nearby. And I let Victoria to make a slight opening next to my neck so Arin can drink my blood from there.


    "You''re letting her drink your blood? What a kind master you are to let your tamed monster drink your blood," Unibrohawk said.


    I''m not her master though. Arin is a wild vampire. Tamed by civilization of this world.


    Unibrohawk just watched Arin sink her fangs inside my neck. I feel a slight pain, but it''s nothing I can''t endure. Just a little bit of blood. And as experimented, I can recover my loss blood faster than even expert level mage. Since the mission is about to end, I can rx after this. That''s why it''s fine for Arin to drink my blood.


    If the mission still takes a while longer, I would refuse it and join the fight.


    "AAAAARGGHH!"


    After drinking my blood, Arin let go of her fang and screamed. Her scream is filled with bloodthirst and I can see Unibrohawk is affected by it.


    "Seems like your master''s blood is different. You have be even stronger¡ªhuh?"


    Before he could even notice, Arin already disappear from next to me. And she''s already behind his back as she throws a punch toward him.


    Unibrohawk couldn''t use his magic on time to protect himself, but his body is still quick enough to block Arin''s punch. But that''s useless as his arms got broken from blocking her punch.


    But Arin''s attack is not over yet. She threw more and more punches. Her strength not juste from her body. She used the blood of me, an Aura user, to increase her attack.


    And since I''m an expert at fighting closebat, her strength is much stronger than if she used the blood of the expert level mage to improve her strength. That''s just our theory, but it seems like we''re spot on.


    Even though she became stronger when she used the blood of expert level mage, she''s not a mage. She''s still a closebat fighter. That''s why the blood of an Aura user is much better in improving her strength than the blood from expert level mage.


    "Ugh! This¡­"


    "DIE!!!"


    Arin attacked the Unibrohawk with series of punches and she never stopped her attacks. It''s simple, but very effective as Unibrohawk got damaged more and more without being able to cast any magic to defend himself.


    Just like that, Arin won the fight.


    "I won!"


    "Don''t be happy. If I''m not here, you won''t be able to defeat him," I said.


    "But I still won! How''s the other?" Arin asked.


    "They are¡­ finishing their job. Seems like we managed to kill every single one of them. Let''s return to where the others are."


    Arin has potential to defeat artificial master level mage. But she still needs my blood for it. She has to get even stronger.. But I think she is motivated to get stronger now that she knows her strength is not enough to win against the cult.

 Chapter 480

    Chapter 480: Mission Over


    We regrouped with everyone after all the enemies in this ce died. Only five agents died for this mission. As for the rest, the angels are healing the wounded at the moment.


    Not just the people. The goos also have been defeated as well. We can rest easy...not.


    ¡°I¡¯ll go check around the perimeter to see if there¡¯s any other people or even facilities nearby,¡± I said to Candy and the others.


    ¡°Oh, please check if you know where we are. I think we are inside Arturo¡¯s territory. But I don¡¯t know where exactly it is,¡± Candy said.


    ¡°Hmm... I can sense my clones from the south. It¡¯s where we entered the underground from. Theb of where thepass is pointing,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°I see... Then, please check that ce without using portal. If you can estimate the distance, that will be great. I think we are at unexplored area from the map,¡± Candy said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll do that. Roy can check around if there¡¯s any enemies nearby,¡± Wendy said before she flew away.


    .....


    I guess that¡¯s what I will do. Though before leaving, I have something I need to do first.


    I need to check on the monsters.


    ¡°Shelia, how¡¯s the werewolves?¡± I asked Shelia.


    ¡°They are doing well. Their injuries have been healed, and there¡¯s no casualty among us,¡± Shelia replied.


    ¡°Good. What do you want to do now? The mission is over. I just need to patrol the area. Do you want me to return the werewolves back to the Monsters World?¡± I asked.


    ¡°We¡¯ll stay here and see if there¡¯s any smell we can track. If we find anything, we will inform you,¡± Shelia said.


    I looked at the werewolves, and they seem to not have enough of fighting. Well, this is better anyway.


    ¡°Okay. How about the vampires?¡±


    This time, I asked Arin who is together with the other vampires.


    ¡°If possible, we¡¯d like to return. We have used a lot of blood for this mission,¡± Arin said.


    ¡°Then you can stay here and wait for us. I will use portal to bring everyone hometer.¡±


    After that, I looked at the angels who seems to desperate to go home.


    ¡°...I¡¯ll return you all home together with the werewolves. Be patient. Just stay here and heal everyone.¡±


    I don¡¯t need to ask them what they want. I just gave them the order. And since they can¡¯t disobey me, they had no choice but to follow my order.


    The werewolves have split up to follow the scents they found. I also need to check around the area before I can finally go home.


    This ce is surrounded by trees. I guess we¡¯re in the middle of a forest. When I asked Fabio if he knows about the dungeon since it¡¯s close to Arturo, he said that he didn¡¯t know that a dungeon exist around this ce. Maybe no one has ever informed the kingdom about it.


    Though from the looks of it, the ce has gone through a lot of modification by humans. I think they should have been in this ce around two or three decades ago. Maybe even more.


    Well, I¡¯ll leave the investigation of this ce to Candy and the others.


    I run on air quite far from where we were. Until my sight can¡¯t see the entrance to the dungeon we exited anymore. So far, there¡¯s no one nearby. No other buildings as well.


    I made a round trip around the area just so the center, which is the dungeon entrance, is barely within my sight. I didn¡¯t see anyone. I guess they are all busy with the tournament.


    Though I found something else. There are several other dungeons nearby. Though they seem to have been explored regrly, so I can see through it with my Divine Vision.


    I saw some werewolves entering the dungeon. I guess the people from theb where I captured the Professor is would regrly visit the dungeon. That¡¯s why when the werewolves are following the scent, it leads them to the dungeon.


    I didn¡¯t see anything powerful inside the dungeon, so I can leave it to them. Though if they see something weird, I hope they will inform us about it. I¡¯ll just report to Candy about the dungeons I found.


    After surveying the area some more to make sure I didn¡¯t miss anything, I returned back to where Candy and the others are.


    ¡°Roy, did you find anything?¡± Candy asked.


    ¡°There are some dungeons nearby. But they have been visited by some people, so I can see through it,¡± I said.


    ¡°Really? Then, if there are more than just one dungeon, I guess they have been going around this ce for quite a long time.¡±


    ¡°Probably. Oh, there are werewolves who are exploring the dungeon. I guess we can hear more from them,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s good. Celestine, is the Professor has been with the cult even before you joined?¡± Candy asked Celestine.


    ¡°Yes. Or at least, he has been there since I became a leader of a faction,¡± Celestine said.


    The big boobs faction. Which was led by Celestine to rope more people with simr fetish to join the cult.


    Though that faction must have existed for a long time. Maybe there¡¯s someone before Celestine who was their leader.


    The case must be simr to the big buttock faction which was led by Veronica.


    ...It¡¯s sad to see people¡¯s desire being used like that. Had I known about their factions in my past life, I would have picked...


    Wait, that¡¯s not important now.


    ¡°We will continue investigate this ce before the werewolves return. Once they havee back and report what they found, you can use portal to bring the monsters back to their world and the others as well. We will leave some agents to stay here to continue investigating. For now, help us finding something under the rubbles,¡± Candy said.


    The building has been destroyed. Only the upper part. But the lower part, there are many holes on the wall. Proof that there were battles there.


    Most of the agents are inside that building to find something. But there are some papers under the rubbles. Which is difficult for the agents to retrieve.


    ¡°I guess that¡¯s what I will do. Elsie, go help the others find anything under the rubbles. Tell the earth mages where the thing you find is, and they will take care of it. I¡¯ll go look on that side.¡±


    With Elsie and the earth mages¡¯ help, we managed to find many documents, and some tools that we don¡¯t know about. Must be something the Professor, or the people from theb invented.


    By this time, Albert must have learned a lot from the Professor. If he¡¯s already conscious. I think I hit him pretty hard.


    After working for a while, the werewolves have returned. They also gave simr reports of the dungeons.


    ¡°There were some monsters that have been imprisoned inside those dungeons. The cage holding them is quite strong. Though we left them be since you might want to see them. Other than that, the scent we followed have started to disappear. A lot of them must have went away for quite some time already,¡± Shelia said.


    ¡°Thank you for the report. We will check on the dungeonster. Roy, please tell me the location of the dungeons,¡± Candy said.


    I talked with Shelia and the werewolves about the dungeons. And the numbers of dungeons they find is the same as the numbers of dungeons that I see. So, that¡¯s everything. I don¡¯t need to go out again to check.


    ¡°It¡¯s finally over. I¡¯ll bring you and the angels back to your world. Shelia, what do you want to do?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll stay in this world for now. I want to eat Lina¡¯s cooking,¡± Shelia said.


    ¡°Yeah, me too. Candy, is everything finished?¡± I asked Candy.


    ¡°Yeah. I have split up some groups to stay here, some other to check on the dungeon, and another group to the ce we entered the dungeon from. Please transport a group to that ce,¡± Candy said.


    So, before going home, I need to transport some people to where we entered the dungeon from. The ce with undergroundb.


    Some of the agents died, so Candy changes the arrangement a bit before I transported them.


    After they leave, I opened a portal to Monsters World. The werewolves, Graham, and the angels entered the portal and they can return home already. Seems like the angels are tired from continuously using healing magic.


    The same for Ka. She used healing magic more than earth or light magic during the fight against a mohawk. The aftermath of a job is the time for the healers to shine the most.


    I returned Fabio and the others to Arturo. And then, Candy, Wendy, Shirley, and some people are going to the capital of Tatrama.


    Finally, me, Ka, Ang, Jewel, Sara, and the vampires returned to Cassau. Although Sara is an agent, she needs to rest before the tournament.


    Next on our list is the tournament. I won¡¯t watch it as I need to be careful of what the fake king of Arturo and the cult would do. But I hope nothing bad will happen to the people I know.

 Chapter 481

    Chapter 481: It¡¯s a Good Day... Not!


    I slept wellst night after finishing our mission. We captured the Professor and thebs. They are still under investigation, but Albert will tell me anything important once he has interrogated the Professor.


    As for the doctors in Varadis, they are also busy experimenting on the few mohawks I captured and still sleeping. Other than for research, they want to see if they can cure them. If those artificial master level mages can be our allies, our power will increase greatly. Though I won¡¯t put too much hope in it.


    And since it looks like the mohawk won¡¯t wake up anytime soon, I returned Veronica herest night. If they are in need of help, they can contact us by contacting Sonia, or destroyed a Blobby that they have to alert me.


    By the way, Sonia and Spot who were guarding Consenza, saw several suspicious people enter the country. So far, none of them were expert level mages. Because if they are indeed expert level mages, they should have realized that something is amiss even when Sonia is using invisibility, and Spot is using his camouge.


    Though the cult must be nning something. If there are too many expert level mages at once waiting at Consenza, the expert level mages from the cult will be suspicious.


    Instead, since there¡¯s an expert level mage in Consenza that Celestine trained. Just one girl whom got trained by Celestine. But that¡¯s enough since with her detection skill, if she noticed someone detecting her presence, she can tell that they are expert level mages.


    This way, she can report if there¡¯s any mages who can detect her presence among the peopleing to Consenza.


    .....


    I have slept well and feeling refreshed. Maybe because I¡¯m extremely fit physically that I have recovered my stamina quickly. As for the others, they are still sleeping. Though since it¡¯s me we¡¯re talking about, I just don¡¯t want to leave the bed. And that¡¯s why I return back to sleep again.


    Mentally, I¡¯m not exhausted as well. I have long prepared about this. Though the same can¡¯t be said to the others. They didn¡¯t exhaust their stamina and mana, but they are still too tired. And they need to participate in the tournament as well, so they need to recover to their best as soon as possible.


    It will be one week until it¡¯s time for the tournament. I will transport the participant with portal tomorrow. It will be weird if they only made appearance on the day of the tournament.


    Anyway, I was forced to be awake since down there, at the dining hall where breakfast is being prepared, a dog is trying to eat them all. She¡¯s not a dog actually. A werewolf.


    If I don¡¯t stop her, all the food will be gone before the others awake.


    ¡°Enough eating, Shelia! The others won¡¯t have food to eat!¡± I shouted at her.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine! Lina said that she bought a lot of ingredients for today to celebrate yesterday¡¯s mission,¡± Shelia said while munching on a fish dish.


    ¡°Oh, then it¡¯s fine. I will eat some as well before the others wake up then,¡± I said before taking a seat as well.


    Last night after returning from our mission, Lina didn¡¯t prepare much seeing how tired everyone was. And being the only one excited about food seems wrong, so I also eat only a littlest night. And by little, I mean three portions of regr meal for me.


    As for Shelia, Lina has prepared a whole table for Shelia alonest night. Though today, the food is more thanst night.


    ¡°You can finish everything here. I don¡¯t think the others will be able to eat so much after they wake up since they are too tired. I¡¯ll make them some easy to digest food once they wake up. So, feel free to fill your stomach,¡± Lina said.


    ¡°Thank you, Lina! You¡¯re the best!¡± Shelia praised her.


    ¡°Yeah. I have gone to a lot of restaurant, but your meal taste much better,¡± I also didn¡¯t forget to praise her. It¡¯s the easiest thing we can do to her who loves to beplimented.


    ¡°If it¡¯s not enough, you can tell me. I will make you some more since we have a lot of ingredients,¡± Lina said with a smile.


    Her reason to live is simply to be of serve to me now. I just praised her a few times when I first met her, and she bes like this now.


    Now, another step to the cult¡¯s destruction has been taken. The Professor. I feel some weights lifted from my shoulder. Feel like today is going to be a good day.


    ...Or not. I sensed Sonia appears beside me. the only one who would contact me this early in the morning is none other than the king, Albert.


    ¡°...What is it?¡± I asked Sonia.


    ¡°Albert wants you to bring the other kings ande to his location as soon as possible,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Have you told the other kings?¡± I asked again.


    ¡°Yes. They are all ready to go as soon as possible. Henry was a bit busy with the people you brought over, but he has some time. Lynn and udia don¡¯t have anything to do until the tournament opening ceremony. As for Harold, he¡¯s always free. Also, please bring Celestine or Veronica with you. Both of them together also fine,¡± Sonia said.


    I looked at where the two are sleeping, and see that they have already awake. I told Sonia to call those two and see if any one of them woulde with me. Both of them said that they are willing toe. So, after the two had a light breakfast, I will bring them with me.


    ¡°I¡¯ll leave now. Shelia, take care of everyone here.¡±


    I told Shelia to protect everyone and I opened four portals at once to let the kingse here, and use the portal toward Albert¡¯s location so they can go there directly.


    All of us entered the portal to where Albert is as he greeted us.


    ¡°Wee. I¡¯ve been waiting for you,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°It¡¯s not that long since you contacted Sonia, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. But I have been waiting since then.¡±


    ¡°So, what is this ce?¡± Old man Henry asked.


    ¡°This is the ce where the Professor is being detained. I have asked him many things for a whole night. That¡¯s what I will report to you,¡± Albert said.


    I can see dark circle under his eyes. He must be sleepy. I¡¯ll use sleeping gaster on him after we finished our discussion so he can sleep well.


    We brought Veronica and Celestine to the detained Professor. His eyes are covered, so he shouldn¡¯t be able to see us.


    ¡°Is he the real Professor?¡± I asked the two.


    ¡°I think he is,¡± Veronica said.


    ¡°Who¡¯s there!? How do you know me? We shouldn¡¯t have any traitor at all!¡± the Professor shouted after hearing us talking.


    We can get two things from that reaction. He is the real Professor, and the cult still don¡¯t know that Veronica and Celestine are both traitors.


    ¡°He said he has erased his own name and let himself be called the Professor. I have asked him everything I could ask, so we don¡¯t have any need of him anymore,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°So, can I dispose him right away?¡± I asked Albert with a hint of killing intent. Everyone in this ce sensed my killing intent and are shaking.


    ¡°Not now. For now, our discussiones first,¡± Albert said as he led us to another ce.


    It¡¯s like a meeting ce used by the king for important matters. And it is indeed an important matter.


    With Albert in the lead, he told us about everything important that he learned from the Professor.


    ¡°Some of his words are lies, and I asked him mostly questions that he can only answer with yes or no, so I can guess the real answer thanks to my ability,¡± Albert said before he started telling us what he learned.


    It¡¯s true that they are aiming for the moon. In other words, they are aiming for the Monsters World. But from what the Professor told Albert, it seems like they are going there by using some sort of high-tech vehicle that is so fast and can reach the moon in days.


    ¡°What about portals? Does the Professor know about portals?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think so. I asked him if he knows about other ways to go to the moon, and he said that he doesn¡¯t know any other ways. But the so-called Evil God might have kept it as secret. But at least at the moment, it¡¯s impossible for them to have many peoplee to Monsters World at once,¡± Albert said.


    That¡¯s good. Even in Monsters World, there are other ces that I avoided because of the danger. I learned those ces from the monsters I know including Andro.


    Albert continued telling us what we know, and it¡¯s finally thest important thing to report.


    ¡°So, ording to the Professor, children have higher chance to be artificially modified into master level mage,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°That shithead!¡± Celestine was angry when she heard that. But thanks to Lynn being here, she didn¡¯t destroy anything.


    ¡°Wait, children? There are no children among the mohawks that we faced. Don¡¯t tell me-¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right. They are sending those children to Consenza.¡±


    Albert said after hearing my guess. And Celestine looked as if her energy has all drained from her body.


    ¡°...It¡¯s nearly impossible to capture them alive during war. And how many will be there?¡± I asked while holding back my anger.


    ¡°Fifty of them.¡±


    Fifty of them. It¡¯s impossible to capture them alive. Which mean we... have to kill them. Unless we have other ways.


    ¡°Old man, quickly do more research on the mohawks I brought to you. If you find any way to stop them without killing them, tell us. Albert, have you asked how the Professor control them?¡± I asked Albert after giving an order to a king of another country.


    ¡°They are being brainwashed. But without using magic,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Sigh... Old man. Ask Russell if they can alter the brainwashing on those artificial master level mages to make them follow our order instead of the Professor or anyone else. If we find a way to do it, we don¡¯t have to fight those artificial master level mages. Though the battle will still be difficult, at least we could incapacitate their strongest assets,¡± I said to old man Henry again.


    ¡°I will tell him about it. Also, can you lend Victoria and Queen Marie to help us in the research? If they can do brainwashing using a tool they created, we might be able to create a tool to alter the brainwashing. Marie is a genius inventor, and with Victoria¡¯s idea from her world, the two of them could be a better pair than Victoria and Roy,¡± Old man Henry said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll allow it. Though I will ask Marie first,¡± Albert said.


    As for Victoria, she already jumped from my shoulder to old man Henry¡¯s shoulder.


    ¡°We don¡¯t have much time before the tournament, but let¡¯s do our best!¡±

 Chapter 482

    Chapter 482: Lenko City Has Been Captured


    Apparently, children, even though they haven¡¯t manifested their magic elements yet, they have the aptitude to be artificially turned into master level mage. That¡¯s why the Professor experimented on children.


    ¡°I see. Let¡¯s kill him now,¡± I said without hesitation.


    ¡°Not yet. He might still have some other information that we can get,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Yeah, but he¡¯s a thinker. Not a fighter. What if he has a n for when he¡¯s captured like now? If the cult somehow managed to get him back, it will be too dangerous,¡± I said.


    ¡°Just let him be for now. I¡¯ll take care of it. Don¡¯t worry, after I finished absorbing all information he knows, he will die. I¡¯m thinking of asking him moreter,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t let him rest. If he¡¯s resting, his mind would be calmed down and he can think of a way to trick you. He might have realized that you have some sort of lie detector skill since he¡¯s smart,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re right. I¡¯ll ask someone to keep him awake at all time and never get a chance to rest,¡± Albert said as he called someone to keep the Professor upied.


    .....


    Just having children as the enemies is enough to make some of us hesitate in fighting. And other than the children, we will face other enemies as well. We can expect that some of them are actually unwilling to fight, but thanks to the brainwashing, they will end up fighting to their death.


    The worst part is that if we kill those children, Celestine and probably some other people will refuse to take part in the fight. Not just that. They might even betray us to protect the children.


    Sigh... I hope Victoria, Marie, Russell, old man Henry, and other researchers in Varadis, will be able to help us find the solution for their brainwashing quickly. We only have less than one week to find the solution, or we will go through the hard way.


    ¡°Well, anything else?¡± I asked Albert since it seems that the discussion is not over yet.


    ¡°Alright. Most of the things that the Professor knows are about his research and invention. Not just he invented something to brainwash people, he also experimented on monsters to make them stronger, while also obey him or someone he assigned. He knows very little about the cult¡¯s n,¡± Albert said.


    Albert continued telling us about the monsters and other stuffs. Seems like many mutated monsters are under the cult¡¯s control. Though some of them managed to escape. Just like the Orc Emperor that I faced back then after my first time bing a clown.


    It has been so long since then. I wonder how Thomas is doing? He¡¯s in Consenza because he knows there will be crowd before the tournament. I¡¯ll join up with him and perform again as a clown before the tournament. It¡¯s also a good disguise as no one will think that the circus is rted to our alliance. And rence the clown is the strongest clown in the world. Or at least that¡¯s what I think. I doubt there¡¯s any master level mage who became a clown. That¡¯s why I think I¡¯m the strongest clown.


    I will bring the others as well, so I won¡¯t go there right away. Maybe tomorrow since everyone will still need to rest.


    ¡°One more thing. Seems like while we are busy with fighting the cult, the cult is targeting another location and they captured it,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°They captured a location? Is it somewhere in Tatrama Kingdom?¡± I asked.


    Since Albert is the one telling this to the other kings who didn¡¯t know about this news, it must be something recent.


    ¡°No. The location doesn¡¯t belong to any country,¡± Albert said.


    Somewhere that doesn¡¯t belong to any country? There¡¯s such ce?


    ¡°You mean the neutral city, Lenko, in the center of the continent!?¡± Harold shouted.


    Lenko City in the center? I think I have heard it before. It¡¯s the neutral city in the center where when there¡¯s something important for the four leaders of each country woulde and have important discussion.


    ¡°Right. That ce has been taken over. And Gilbert has died,¡± Albert said.


    Gilbert? udia informed me who doesn¡¯t know much that Gilbert is the mayor of the neutral city.


    It¡¯s also the ce where Albert and the others realized that the king of Arturo has been swapped with someone else. And the reason is because that fake king didn¡¯t use the code they agreed on, and the fact that the fake king didn¡¯t try to approach udia at all.


    ¡°So... that means there¡¯s no longer neutral city?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s that. The center of the continent has been on dispute ever since a long time ago. As for why they took it now when it¡¯s close to the tournament, it seems like they want us to focus on Lenko more than other ces. Even the tournament. What should we do about that city?¡± Albert asked.


    This is not a discussion that I can help with. I don¡¯t know what that Lenko City is good for. I¡¯ll just listen to how they can find the solution for it.


    Seems like they agree that it will be dangerous to leave it be. Since it¡¯s in the center of the continent, it makes it easy for the cult from that ce to go to any other country. So, we ended up having someone to go there. Not me since I¡¯m important to protect Consenza.


    ¡°We¡¯ll go. They won¡¯t notice that the real king of Arturo is the one to take over Lenko. As for the territory, we can discuss itter after the tournament is over. Since Carmen and Fabio are already expert level mages, and Kron is a good friend of Fabio, I think we can do it,¡± Harold said.


    ¡°Okay. I will send some free agents as reinforcement. You can use them as you wish,¡± Albert said.


    No one will think that Harold who was supposed to be dead to take over Lenko.


    ¡°Oh, about Arturo. Does anyone hear something from Toni? He¡¯s still being trusted by the fake king, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°He¡¯s doing well. And because they are focusing on the tournament are have left to Consenza, the security is low. Toni has more freedom, but his mother still trying to get him to join the cult,¡± Harold said.


    Toni is our important ally and also one of Harold¡¯s son. He¡¯s staying behind in the capital of Arturo despite the danger. And he¡¯s doing extremely well. For me personally, I think he¡¯s more suited to be the king than Fabio if they recapture Arturo. Though I know nothing about being a king. I¡¯m good at being the king¡¯s friend though.


    After that, we discussed some other things. But I don¡¯t really need to listen to that, so I focused my sight on the tortured Professor.


    He is being held upside down, and from time to time, his head is dipped into a basin full of water. Well, he won¡¯t be able to think calmly now.


    Seeing the Professor being tortured, I feel slightly relieved. For such person to y with humans... And there¡¯s also the other cult who let it happens. As expected, I won¡¯t be able to rest easy until I could destroy the cultpletely.


    Finally, the discussion is over. And I returned everyone back to their home. As for Harold, tomorrow, Spot will bring him, Carmen, Fabio, Kron, and some other people to the city of Lenko. Since I have never been there and never nted a Blobby in that ce, I can¡¯t go there with portal.


    I have told Harold to nt a Blobby somewhere no one can notice once everything is done in Lenko.


    Anyway, once Harold has finished taking over Lenko, he will quickly go to the capital of Arturo to retrieve his kingdom back. He and his family will be extremely busy.


    He won¡¯t participate in the battle with us in Consenza, but taking over his kingdom back is also an important mission. I hope things will go well for them. And for us too.


    ¡°Alright. I¡¯ll be leaving to Consenza tomorrow and join up with Thomas in the circus. When will you be there?¡± I asked Albert.


    ¡°You can transport me there a day before the tournament. I will be busy until then with the Professor and other stuffs,¡± Albert said.


    And so, I returned back to Cassau where everyone has been waiting for us.


    I told them about what Albert found out from the Professor. And as expected, they started to show hesitation when they heard our enemies are children.


    ¡°...We will really fight children?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°I hope we won¡¯t. Marie, Victoria, old man Henry, and the others are trying their best to undo the brainwashing. At least we need to make those children to not fight us. Though if some of them have grown up, I will kill them,¡± I said.


    I don¡¯t want to kill children if possible. And if they have grown up, they are no longer children. So, I won¡¯t hesitate to cut them down.


    But if there¡¯s no other choice, I will kill them. That¡¯s the only salvation I can give them.

 Chapter 483

    Chapter 483: A Trouble Right Away


    Today, I brought everyone to Consenza. Just those in Cassau. Including Daniel and the children. As for the kings and people from other countries, I will take them here next time. Before the tournament.


    ¡°Celestine, you can bring everyone to sightseeing the capital. I¡¯ll go meet Thomas and see if I can join back to the circus,¡± I said to Celestine. She was born here, and is the sister of the Empress. She knows this ce more than the others.


    This time, I¡¯m really alone. Other than some Blobbies hidden under my clothes. Because Victoria is busy in Varadis trying to create something to undo the brainwashing.


    She¡¯s not an inventor or researcher, but her knowledge from her world has helped Marie creates many amazing inventions. That¡¯s why I hope their teamwork can create something great again.


    Though the time limit is too short. I hope they can at least do something in this short time.


    Well, let¡¯s forget about those things. They are not my problems at the moment. I also let the girls and the children go on their way to enjoy the capital of another country.


    After they heard about how the cult is using children for experiment, and they seeded in creating more artificial master level mage with them, the girls are depressed. That¡¯s why they need to rx more for the next few days. And I will entertain them with my clown performance.


    .....


    Though for them, they have treated me like a clown for a long time.


    I have scheduled a meeting with the owner of the circus troupe, Thomas,ter in the afternoon. So, I will take a walk around this city first. And clean up some trouble along the way.


    Because of the tournament, people starteding to the capital of Consenza from all over the continent. The ce where the tournament will be held is in the huge arena outside the city. It was newly built with the help of Celestine and some carpenters. Just using earth mage alone is not enough to build an amazing building. Though it helps getting it built faster.


    For now, let¡¯s check on the Arena. There¡¯s no one there other than some people who maintains the ce. They are people that Lynn trusted.


    They have been informed of my arrival and will help me in any way. Though I don¡¯t know if I need their help or not.


    The Arena only have the roof above the spectators¡¯ seat. Not above the stage. If it¡¯s raining during the match, won¡¯t it be difficult for the audience to see the battle? What if one of the fighters is a water mage? They will be at advantage when it¡¯s raining.


    I entered the arena from the sky, and as Inded on the stage, a man greeted me. He¡¯s the one in charge of showing me around. Though I am already looking around.


    ¡°Are you Mr. Roy?¡± the man asked.


    ¡°Just call me Roy. I won¡¯t stay here for long, so you can do your job,¡± I said.


    ¡°I need to see the evidence that you are the person our Empress talking about,¡± the man said.


    Well, I guess that¡¯s to be expected. Since the cult should have been on the way, or even already been here, they need to see that I¡¯m the real Roy. I show him my Hunter Card which has my ID to the man.


    ¡°Here¡¯s my Hunter Card. Is this enough?¡± I asked.


    ¡°It is, but Her majesty the Empress said that you can show me something else. She said that without magic, you can smash a stone with just your barehand. Can you show it to me?¡± the man asked.


    ¡°...Is it really just to proof my identity, or is t because you want to see me break a stone barehanded?¡±


    ¡°Because I want to. May I see it? You can destroy that rock off the stage over there,¡± the man pointed at a rock the size of a human head at the side of the stage.


    ¡°Why is there a rock in this ce anyway?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I put it there after I was charged with the task to guide you around the arena,¡± the man replied.


    Hmm... for now, I¡¯ll put a hole in the rock with my finger. That should be enough.


    It was done quickly that the man didn¡¯t even notice that I already made a hole in the stone.


    ¡°Done. Now, I want you toe with me,¡± I said.


    The man walked closer and see a hole I created with my finger. And when he¡¯s focused on the hole, I covered his eyes with my hand, opened a portal to where Lynn is, and bring him over.


    ¡°What are you doing!? Wait, where is this? Your majesty!? How did I end up here!?¡± the man looked around in confusion.


    I transported us both to the office where Lynn and udia are working. The two were not as surprised as the man seeing me enter without permission. But they are confused as I¡¯m bringing someone else with me.


    ¡°Oh, Roy! You already go to the arena?¡± Lynn asked as she realizes who the man I brought with me is.


    ¡°What else did you tell him other than breaking a stone barehanded? And how many other people have you told?¡± I asked Lynn casually without any honorific. The man looked angry, but udia said something first.


    ¡°Her majesty, we need to keep Roy¡¯s identity as secret other than to those who knows him already. Once his identity got leaked, we don¡¯t know what the cult would do,¡± udia reminded Lynn.


    ¡°...Ah! That¡¯s right! I forgot! Hey, you! You didn¡¯t tell anyone else about him, right!?¡± Lynn shouted at the man I brought.


    ¡°No, your majesty!¡± The man has a scared expression on his face. I¡¯m not Albert who can detect lies with his ability, but I can see someone¡¯s heartbeat.


    ¡°Really? I remember that what I told you for the mission is a secret, right?¡± Lynn asked.


    ¡°Yes, your majesty! I kept it as secret!¡±


    Still lying it seems. Let¡¯s break his arm before asking him more question.


    While the man is still kneeling down, I kicked his arm and broke it.


    ¡°ARGH!¡±


    ¡°Seems like you¡¯re lying. Tell me the truth. Who else did you tell?¡± Lynn asked him again.


    ¡°...My wife, your majesty.¡±


    Sigh... I guess I need to go and get his wife then.


    I asked the man where his wife is and he was crying and beg me to not harm her.


    ¡°Just tell me where your wife is. If she¡¯s with the cult, I will kill her though,¡± I said threateningly.


    ¡°Please, don¡¯t! I beg you!¡±


    ¡°Roy, I found his address. He lives in that house. it¡¯s visible from the window,¡± udia opened the window and pointed at a house in the city.


    She knows that I have Divine Vision, so I can see where it is her finger is pointed at.


    I jumped out of the window, find the house, grab the woman inside, and return back to the pce without anyone seeing me. I didn¡¯t use portal this time.


    ¡°Is it her?¡± I asked the man.


    ¡°Please don¡¯t kill her!¡±


    ¡°Even though she¡¯s a member of the cult?¡± I asked.


    At this time, the woman finally recovers after I suddenly grabbed her and bring her here. She looks around, and see that she¡¯s in front of the Empress.


    ¡°Honey? Why am I here? Why is your arm broken!?¡±


    I let go of the woman, and she quickly run over toward her husband. Though what I¡¯m looking at is the explosive device in her mouth.


    Sigh... it¡¯s just the first day, and an incident already ur. What a pain.


    I grabbed the woman again, opened her mouth, and plucked out the explosive device in her mouth.


    ¡°See this? This is the proof that she belongs to the cult. Now, tell me who else have you told about his mission?¡± I asked the woman.


    ¡°W-what are you talking about!? What is this cult you¡¯re talking!?¡±


    I guess I¡¯ll ask Albert even though he¡¯s busy.


    ¡°Oh, right. Lynn, when did you tell him about the mission?¡± I asked Lynn.


    ¡°Just this morning. I think that you might be arriving soon, so I told him to guide you around the arena. I shouldn¡¯t have done that. I¡¯m truly sorry about how things went this way,¡± Lynn bowed her head to me.


    And seeing that, the man and his wife be more afraid of me. They finally know now that I am higher than the Empress of their country.


    Well, I guess I will dy my meeting with Thomas today. I need to bring these two to Tatrama so Albert can ask them.


    ¡°Well, I will return soon. The others are enjoying the city with Celestine. For some of them, it¡¯s their first time going to Consenza after all. After I return, I will look for more members of the cult. If you heard of someone killing people around the capital, that might be me. After all, there are many other people with explosive device in their mouth. See youter,¡± I said to Lynn and udia as I used to cover the head of the two people with Blobbies, and put Magic Restricting Cor on them as I opened a portal to where Albert is.


    Just the first day at Consenza and there¡¯s already trouble. What would happen during the tournament?

 Chapter 484

    Chapter 484: Meeting Thomas


    ¡°Luckily, Lynn only gave the order this morning. The wife hadn¡¯t told anyone yet, but it seems like she was nning to at night when her husband is sleeping. As for the man, he doesn¡¯t even know that his wife is rted to the cult. Well, they are in the middle of a chat right now. Though both of them are wearing cors and are being tied,¡± Albert said.


    Right now, I¡¯m in Tatrama after transporting the man who was supposed to be my guide around the arena, and his wife.


    I was just suspicious about the man because Lynn stupidly told him how strong I am. It¡¯s just breaking a rock with my strength, but it¡¯s a key information that the cult, especially the Evil God, that must not know yet.


    We are still skeptical if the Evil God is still the same person who killed all Aura users in the past or not. We are moving ahead assuming that he is the same person so we can be prepared for anything.


    ¡°Then, that was really close. If I didn¡¯t get suspicious, the cult would have known that I¡¯m an Aura user,¡± I said to Albert.


    ¡°Yeah. That was really close. But don¡¯t me Lynn. I too, knowing that I have a friend that can crush a boulder barehanded without magic, I want to boast about you,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°I¡¯m not ming her. She¡¯s justcking experience even though she has been an Empress longer than you have been a king. Seems like when Lynn gave the order, udia wasn¡¯t there so she couldn¡¯t stop her in time. I bet udia is scolding Lynn right now. If I bring Celestine in, she would be crying non-stop,¡± I said.


    .....


    ¡°Still, do you really want to continue hiding the fact that you can use Aura? I don¡¯t think it¡¯s as important as you thought it is,¡± Albert asked curiously.


    ¡°Not really. I actually don¡¯t mind much that there will be more people know that I¡¯m an Aura user. I just think that it could be a good bait against the cult. If they know about Aura, they will put off everything to get to me. If they don¡¯t, that means the Evil God is not the same person as the one who killed Sonia and Victoria in the past, and he didn¡¯t spread the knowledge about Aura to the cult. I don¡¯t know when, but let¡¯s use my status as Aura user one day during the right moment. The tournament is close, but even if they bring many strong people to fight, I don¡¯t think they will bring every single members of the cult there. Which mean it¡¯s still a long way until their destruction,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s a good idea. There will be a right time, but it¡¯s not now. Well, I also have new information I received from the Professor. Want to hear it?¡±


    Oh? He still managed to get more information from the Professor? If he¡¯s not a king, he will be a really talented interrogator.


    ¡°What is it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s about the invention to travel to the moon, or should I say the Monsters World,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°What about it?¡±


    ¡°It might have been sessful, but because they don¡¯t have a way tomunicate, they don¡¯t know yet. They used mages to power the vehicle, so I guess it¡¯s pretty big and can hold a lot of people at once,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°...doesn¡¯t that mean Marie is in danger? Well, she has always been in danger ever since she invented the Television with Victoria. I guess nothing change,¡± I said.


    ¡°Actually, ever since the Television has been used for the college tournament, people have entered the capital. Some of them are members of the cult. But so far, Miguel managed to find any suspicious people and kill or arrest them,¡± Albert said.


    Miguel? Who is this guy again?


    ¡°You know him as Mustache,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Oh, right. How was he? I have never seen him for a while already.¡±


    ¡°He¡¯s an expert level mage now. And he¡¯s been so busy with the security of the pce and the capital. Though I will bring himter to Consenza as my bodyguard, so you will meet him again,¡± Albert said.


    Well, as long as he didn¡¯t shave his mustache, I can tell who he is.


    ...is this just like how the members of the cult can only tell Celestine from her breasts and Veronica from her butts?


    ¡°Well, if that¡¯s all, I will go get some rest before asking the Professor even further. What do you want with him? He doesn¡¯t know anything,¡± Albert asked about the man I brought.


    ¡°He will stay prisoned here for a while until the tournament and everything else is over before he can return. Or maybe I can have him returned to see how evil the cult is? Whatever. If he¡¯s annoying, just kill him. I¡¯ll tell Lynn that he won¡¯t being back soon,¡± I said before opening a portal to return back to Consenza.


    ¡°Okay. See youter,¡±


    With that, I returned back to the pce in Consenza and see the Empress is crying from being scolded by udia.


    ¡°...I thought I need to bring Celestine here to make you cry, but I guess udia alone is enough,¡± I said to the crying Empress.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, I¡¯m sorry, I¡¯m sorry, I¡¯m sorry...¡± Lynn keeps apologizing over and over again. I guess I won¡¯t scold her anymore.


    ¡°Okay. The woman is a member of the cult, but the man isn¡¯t. Since the woman is going to tell other members of the cult about her husband¡¯s mission, it means she will meet them soon. And there¡¯s a ce where they gather together at night. I¡¯m going to at least kill those peopleter tonight. See youter,¡±


    I used a portal back to the Arena, and look around again at the arena. I can see some mysterious tools around the Arena. If they are another explosive device, whoever nted them are thinking of activating them during the tournament.


    Other than the screens, cameras, and the microphone for thementators, there shouldn¡¯t be any other magic tools in the arena. udia has informed me about everything that should be ced. I don¡¯t think they will be activated anytime soon, but I have reported about it to udia before I close the portal.


    After checking the Arena, I¡¯m thinking of patrolling and search the cult¡¯s hideouts in this ce. But I almost forget to do one thing.


    I opened a portal to the Monsters Vige. It¡¯s on the Blobby that Red, the representative of the werewolves, had.


    ¡°Red, I want you to get some werewolves to move and see if they can find the scent of humans in that world other than those you know. There¡¯s a chance that the enemy has started invading your world, but there¡¯s no evidence yet. Just tell me if you find anything,¡± I said.


    ¡°Understood. If we find any who are still alive, can we kill them?¡± Red asked.


    ¡°If they have more than one, you can kill them and leave at least one person alive. Don¡¯t go too far since I might summon you all soon. But after that, you can continue look further,¡± I said.


    After giving the order to Red, I closed the portal. The werewolves will think that it might be a good way to practice since they almost failed in defeating a mohawk before. But since there will be a fight soon, they won¡¯t go too far even if I didn¡¯t tell him.


    As for other races, they are useless in tracking. Well, not really useless. It¡¯s just that the werewolves are too good at it, so they don¡¯t really have much presence other than when I need them. Especially the elves. I don¡¯t know what they are doing in the forest they created. Worshipping Sunny?


    After telling the werewolves about the mission to track any human¡¯s trace, I patrolled the capital and kill any cult members who are walking in an empty alley.


    Since the tournament will begin soon, there are many members of the cult roaming in the capital. And it¡¯s difficult to find them walking alone. I guess I¡¯ll snipe them from afar tonight. Now, it¡¯s around the time of my meeting with Thomas. My return as rence ising.


    I entered the restaurant we¡¯re meeting in, and see that Thomas was already there waiting for me. Well, actually, I saw him even before I entered the restaurant.


    ¡°Thomas, how¡¯s the business?¡±


    After greeting him and had a small chat, I asked him about the circus.


    ¡°It has be so popr now. Though when we were at Arturo, we were scared shitless. Hearing that we are going to perform in front of many members of the cult scare me. Though since the performers are all special agent, they are rather calm about it. I¡¯m the only normal person in the circus,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°How were the performers?¡±


    ¡°They are doing really great. In fact, some of them are willing to pursue their career in circus performance after the cult is destroyed.¡±


    ¡°Me too. If the cult is destroyed, I am interested in performing more regrly. Though I don¡¯t want to do it too much,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re going to return as rence the clown, right? Later tonight, try not to outperform the other performers. It was difficult to meet the expectation of the audience after you performed,¡± Thomas said.


    I guess he¡¯s right. I¡¯ll hold back more next time, and let the others get the spotlight.


    I got my role back quickly and will perform right away tonight after training with the other performers. So, after the meeting at the restaurant, I greeted the other performers.


    Once the show is over, it¡¯s sniping time.

 Chapter 485

    Chapter 485: After the Show is Over


    ¡°Ladies and Gentlemen! That¡¯s rence the clown! He will be staying and perform with us for the next few days until the tournament begun!¡±


    Thomas as the master of the circus said as my performance ended. It¡¯s a great performance. I held back as much as possible while still giving the audiences theughter they deserve.


    I also see Ang, Ka, Celestine, Daniel, and the others apuding andughing at my performance. It¡¯s good to see them who had low spirit when they entered the tent tough and have such high spirit.


    They were low in spirits because of the news that we are going to face children as our enemies. At least I can help to raise their spirits this way.


    After the show is over, the audiences left the tent inughter. Talking with their friends and family they brought here about the performance. And even though I hold back from doing too much on my own, they are talking about rence¡¯s performance.


    Not just that. They were also astounded by the others¡¯ performances as well. That makes everyone¡¯s effort worth it. The other performers, who are agents, are happy with the result.


    ¡°Are they always like this after every performance?¡± I asked Thomas while removing my clown¡¯s garb.


    .....


    ¡°Yes. They enjoyed performing so much now. Though they never forget their real duty. But I hope in the future, their real duty is to perform in circus and not investigating that cult anymore. That¡¯s why I hope you can bring an end to them as soon as possible,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°I agree. I also want to do that, but it will be difficult. Even now, we don¡¯t know if they will go all out bringing everyone with them or not here. But we will try our best. Anyway, what will you do now?¡± I asked Thomas.


    ¡°For now, like I said before at the end of the show, I will stay here and let the circus open for a few more days before the tournament. Once the tournament begun, everyone will be focused more on the tournament and not the circus. We can¡¯tpete with that. We will be on break at that time,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°What about you? Like I said before, there will be dangering soon. Will you stay here? Or should I transport you to a safe location?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Can you do that to me? Honestly, I¡¯m afraid of the cult and I don¡¯t want to be here. Just bring me to a safe location. As for the other performers, you can ask them. I¡¯d like them to be safe, but they are special agents first and not circus performers. They are most likely wanted to stay here, but some of them are not gifted in magic. Still, it¡¯s their preferences. They are free to do what they want,¡± Thomas said.


    And so, I asked all the performers if there¡¯s any of them who wants to leave this ce and go to a safe ce.


    Only some of them would go. They were not gifted in magic as they barely reached intermediate level. Some of them are even just beginner level. But they are quite athletic. That¡¯s how they joined the circus.


    Though they can¡¯t bepared with me, an Aura user. Maybe they can be Aura users, but I don¡¯t know. Well, I have taught them how I, Victoria, and Sonia became Aura users. Though I don¡¯t think they can be Aura users in the future, at least they have tried.


    I still haven¡¯t given up yet in finding more Aura users to help me fight the cult. Even though the werewolves, the angels, and the vampires are much stronger than if any one of them manifested Aura in the future, if their special ability is great, they might be our strongest assets. Though the chance is really close to zero.


    Even I, in the past, can only start using Aura after years of training. Using the experience and the sensation in how to use Aura, in this life, I can be Aura user faster than before. It¡¯s difficult to teach others. Though somehow, I did well as air element teacher.


    After telling them that they are going to leave after thest day of the circus here, I told them to enjoy their stay as I left after saying goodbye. Though I will be back tomorrow.


    It¡¯s time to kill some cult members.


    It¡¯s difficult to find who they are anymore since not many of them have the explosive device in their mouth anymore. Which mean it¡¯s likely that there¡¯s a lot of expert level mages here. And I also need to worry about the children here. Who knows if any of them are actually artificial master level mage who are waiting for their moment to kill us all?


    Fifty of them? At least I hope that half of them have grown up and can¡¯t be called children anymore. That way, I won¡¯t feel bad for killing them.


    I wonder how Victoria and Marie doing? I hope they find a way somehow to stop the children.


    I¡¯m now using Divine Vision to check on the inside of people¡¯s mouth to see if they have explosive devices or not. If there are any artificial master level mage, or even a real master level mage, they would notice that I¡¯m looking at them. If so, I will quickly leave the capital to fight them. Letting myself be the bait.


    I think the artificial master level mages who wille here are stronger than the ones we fought during the previous mission when we¡¯re trying to capture the Professor. But I have confidence to dy them as much as possible if killing them proves to be difficult.


    But so far, I didn¡¯t see anyone reacting to me looking at them. Which is good since I can just take care of assassinating the other cult members.


    Victoria is not here, but I can use Blobbies to snipe on the enemies. Though the Blobbybullets will stay since Victoria can¡¯t make them disappear because she¡¯s too far, I can at least return back to using pebbles. Good thing I still have a lot of sharpened pebbles with me.


    I have killed about ten of them. But there are still a lot more. Once they found the corpses, they will think that the murderer could be Sara or me since it¡¯s quite well-known thanks to the college tournament that we know how to shoot Air Cannon.


    But that¡¯s only if the corpses are found.


    Since I only killed those who walk alone, I quickly grabbed their bodies and store them somewhere else before I will use portal to transport them all to be fish food.


    As I was about to find another target, Sonia appears in front of me.


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Harold and the others have reached Lenko City. They will invade the city soon,¡± Sonia said.


    Hmm? Spot is the one carried them, right? I thought that he could get there much faster.


    ¡°They just arrived? Why is Spot so slow?¡± I asked.


    ¡°It¡¯s because you¡¯re not there. They don¡¯t have any security measure to keep themselves on his back. So, Spot only fly with reasonable speed enough to not make them fall. Only Kron there who can use Wind Barrier to protect them all from the force of the wind,¡± Sonia said.


    ...Oh, right. I forgot about that. It¡¯s because they are things that I do.


    Whenever we are riding Spot, I would use Victoria or Blobbies to create seats for the others. And then, I would use Air Barrier so the wind force because of Spot¡¯s speed won¡¯t blow us away and we can still have a conversation there. I forgot about that.


    ¡°That¡¯s why they will camp in the forest nearby tonight, and willmence the n to capture Lenko tomorrow,¡± Sonia continued.


    ¡°Tell them that if they are in need of help or in danger, they have to contact me as soon as possible,¡± I said before Sonia leaves.


    I guess that¡¯s all she¡¯s here to tell me. Which mean Victoria and Marie haven¡¯t found the cure for the brainwashing yet. But at least there¡¯s no bad news.


    I killed some more cult members, and after I had enough for the night, I used portal to transport them into the sea. Well, not that there¡¯s a Blobby on the sea surface. There are some that are in the deep sea, but they are used for attacking. Not transporting. And I can¡¯t open a portal to the bottom of the sea in the middle of a city.


    But there¡¯s a Blobby I put in an empty ind, at the wall of a cliff facing the sea. The portal will open there, and the corpses will free fall to the sea.


    Just like that, the first day at Consenza ended. Tomorrow, I will find more cult members and kill them.


    Maybe I should ask the others to help. Like Sara. She¡¯s a better sniper, and it¡¯s good for us to practice our marksmanship. I¡¯ll ask her tomorrow. For now, it¡¯s time to sleep.


    ...Oh, fuck. I forgot to find an inn to stay.


    Let¡¯s see... the others are staying at the same inn. Even Celestine who lives in the pce. But at least Lina has her own room alone. I can sleep with her tonight.


    ...Sleeping while being surrounded by tentacles from an eyeball and from a sunflower seems like something out of horror stories. I should have at least informed Lina and her monsters that I¡¯ming.

 Chapter 486

    Chapter 486: Into the Sewer


    The next day at the capital of Consenza. I stayed here while hunting and assassinating any cult members that I found.


    So far, most of the one I killed has explosive devices in their mouth. But that doesn¡¯t mean the cult only send weaklings here. I can see some people reacted when I get too close. They are probably expert level mages. As for artificial master level mages, I haven¡¯t seen any.


    After one day rxing, the girls left the capital to practice. They have a tournament soon, and they are practicing either by sparring or subjugating monsters. They also take requests mission from the hunter guild.


    I keep forgetting that I¡¯m also a hunter and it has been too long since Ist took a mission. Maybe I should get one today.


    It¡¯s the hunter guild. If there are any ce in the capital where various people wille, that should be it. It¡¯s not suspicious at all toe to the hunter guild if you are a hunter, or if you are requesting the assistance of hunters by submitting requests.


    Let¡¯s see if there are any interesting mission. I can¡¯t just keep killing people during my stay here. People will be suspicious that there are less people in the capital. Though I think there¡¯s already some rumors flying around about a murderer. I bet there will be a wanted poster about me. Though no one will know my appearance as I wear Blobbymask during my hunt.


    I entered the guild to see Ka kicking a man in the nut. It¡¯s been a while since Ist seen that.


    .....


    Ka also notices me, but she pretends to not know me as she picked a mission together with Jewel. Jewel also notices me after Ka told her, and she also pretends that we are strangers.


    On the quests board, I see several jobs where I can do. And I found something. It¡¯s subjugation of sewer rats. A rat type monsters that usually appears in the sewer under the city. I can see easily where the rats are.


    In the posted quest, I just need to defeat thirty of them. Since they are weak, thirty should be easy for most intermediate mages. Even beginner mages should be able to do it if they go in a party.


    ¡°...Excuse me, but... you have quite a high rank. Are you sure you want to take this job? It¡¯s something that even E-rank hunters can do,¡± the receptionist said after I showed her the quest I¡¯m taking.


    What should I reply with? That I¡¯m also looking for any possible hideouts for the cult? The sewer is really big and even goes further from the capital. Even my Divine Vision can¡¯t see everything at once.


    ¡°I¡¯m the dweller of the dark. Being in a dark ce calmed me down,¡± I said.


    ¡°...okay. Another weird hunter. Sigh... I thought since he¡¯s quite attractive, he¡¯s normal,¡± the receptionist said in whisper. But I can hear it.


    ¡°Thank you. I am attractive indeed.¡±


    ¡°W-wait, you hear that!? Please forget that!¡±


    ¡°No way. I would never forget the time when someone called me attractive. Though I keep forgetting who called me attractive unless they are my lovers. Then, I¡¯ll be leaving,¡± I said as I left the guild.


    By the way, Jewel and Ka who were taking another mission, were next to me when I said that. They stared at me with t gaze. What? I¡¯m attractive, right?


    Anyway, it¡¯s time to go into the sewer.


    As a precaution, the entrance to the sewer is being guarded tightly. No one can enter the sewer at will. It¡¯s because it will be dangerous if suspicious persone and go as they please. They can destroy the capital if they used powerful magic under the capital. Oh, it¡¯s also a problem if monsters came out of the sewer.


    I get the permission to enter after showing the proof that I took the mission to subjugate the sewer rats. Even high-ranking hunters need to get permission to enter.


    ...it¡¯s smelly. Good thing I¡¯m an air mage. I protected myself with Air Barrier to not let the stinky smell stuck on me.


    Thirty sewer rats. That¡¯s easy. And as proofs of subjugations, I need to cut the tip of their tails. And if possible, I have to destroy the whole corpses, or they will start piling up in the sewer. And the whole capital will be smelly.


    Well, it¡¯s easy with my portal. Though why are there many ratsing at me at once? Seems like they are afraid of something from far ahead. Maybe I¡¯m right that somewhere further in the sewer, someone dangerous is hiding. Possibly, from the cult.


    Well, it¡¯s time to take care of them. Using a spear in this tight space is difficult, so I just use Reizpear after I broke it in half. It¡¯s just a short spear now.


    In this tight ce, I¡¯m the best. There¡¯s no way anyone can defeat me. Unless they are crazy people who thinks of burying themselves by using powerful magic.


    In an instant, I defeated all fifteen iing rats. I¡¯m halfway to the missionpletion. Though that¡¯s not my real mission.


    The sewer is like a maze. But it¡¯s not a problem with me since I have Divine Vision. Even if the ce I¡¯m going ended up to be a dead end, with my speed, I can return back to where I came from quickly.


    And in no time at all, I have finished my mission to subjugate thirty sewer rats. But I haven¡¯t finished exploring the sewer.


    ¡°Urgh... if I¡¯m not an air mage, I would never think of this idea. Hey, let¡¯s go to the sewer and stay there for hours! Am I an idiot? Sigh... I¡¯m so bored that I started talking on my own... huh?¡±


    After exploring the sewer for hours, and I¡¯m no longer under the capital but somewhere else outside of the capital, I started talking to myself. And that¡¯s when I finally noticed that there are more sewer ratsing here. Just like that time when I first entered, they seem to be afraid of something as they are running here. Looks like it¡¯s a jackpot.


    I killed the rats, and continue deeper. And there, I see that the sewer is well-maintained. It¡¯s not as dirty as other part of the sewer. As if some people are staying there.


    And when I get deeper again, I finally see traces of people. It¡¯s a hidden room.


    There¡¯s a meal at a table in a hidden room in the sewer. Seems like someone has been hiding here for a long time and built this hidden room.


    I entered the hidden room in silence. I see someone is there in what seem to be the kitchen. He doesn¡¯t have an explosive device in his mouth, but he might be expert level mage. At least he¡¯s not an artificial master level mage.


    But there¡¯s another hidden door from this hidden room. Behind that hidden door, there¡¯s a big room and severaldders attached on the wall leading to the exit. It¡¯s as if this ce is a secret meeting ce.


    As expected, the meal is still warm. It means the person in the kitchen has just finished cooking it.


    It looks delicious as well. And it really tastes delicious. There¡¯s no poison as well since I have eaten it and I feel fine.


    Wait, I just finished the meal of a stranger. I¡¯m just the worse kind of guy, aren¡¯t I?


    Oh? Someone ising down from thedder in the big secret room. And this time, the person has an explosive device in his mouth. I guess the owner of this ce is rted to the cult.


    At least I won¡¯t feel guilty eating his meal. Let¡¯s grab a sewer rat and put it in this room. This way, that man will think that the culprit is the rat. Not me.


    Now, what should I do? Raid this ce alone, or ask for the others¡¯ help.


    For now, I will return back to the sewer and see if there will be other cult membersing.


    And as expected, the man was furious seeing that his meal is gone. And he killed the rat with an Ice Spike. He¡¯s an ice element expert level mage.


    Thanks to my training, I can stay within close range of expert level mages without being seen. But if there¡¯s any artificial master level mage, I would be found out quickly.


    Thedders inside the big secret room led to different location. And the closest one is right above the room. It¡¯s leading toward the forest next to the capital. And I can see Shirley is subjugating monsters nearby.


    I¡¯ll greet herter. There are more peopleing to the secret room. Meeting the angry and hungry expert level mage.


    None of them are stronger than expert level mage as they don¡¯t know that I¡¯m peeking. Seems like they have a secret meeting today. Let¡¯s see if I could get closer to them.


    I¡¯ll use portal to go to where Shirley is, and then use thedder close to her to go down to the secret room. That way, I should be able to eavesdrop on them.

 Chapter 487

    Chapter 487: The Underground Meeting Room


    I opened a portal to see Shirley is freezing a giant mantis with her ice magic. Has her ice magic reached expert level yet?


    ¡°Hey, Princess! Have you reached expert level in your ice element as well?¡± I asked her after entering the portal to her location.


    ¡°Yes. I have just reached it recently,¡± Shirley replied.


    ¡°That¡¯s great! You¡¯re amazing!¡± I said.


    As for me, I am just an advanced level in both of my elements. Summoning and air. And with my talent, I don¡¯t know if I can reach even further. Though for my summoning element, it¡¯s up to my monsters. They need to defeat even stronger enemies.


    Well, me too since I used my monster as a weapon. Maybe if I kill a lot of artificial master level mages, I can be expert level in my summoning element. I have eaten my second Pear-y Fruit, and I can make a contract with another monster once I breakthrough to expert level.


    Though that seems to be still far away in the future. But for now, the mission is more important.


    .....


    ¡°What are you doing here?¡± Shirley asked.


    ¡°Under the ground we¡¯re walking, it¡¯s a sewer connecting to the capital. And there are hidden rooms where the cult members are gathering and discussing something. I want to see if I can eavesdrop on what they are discussing,¡± I said.


    ¡°Alone? How many are there?¡± she asked.


    ¡°Alone is fine. I¡¯m not going there to kill anyone. At least not yet. There are fifteen of them. and only five have explosive devices in their mouth. We are not close enough for them to notice us if they have expert level mages. And I don¡¯t think there are any artificial master level mages in there,¡± I said.


    Shirley then continues fighting the monsters nearby. Most of them are giant mantis. But she still offers her help to me.


    ¡°Do you need my help? Or anyone?¡± Shelia asked.


    Hmm... she¡¯s all alone. No one else is here. Shirley must be taking a request to defeat the giant mantises in this area alone for her training. I think it¡¯s fine for her to help.


    But what should she do? Oh, right. Distraction.


    ¡°Five minutes after I enter the underground, I want you to go over there, and get wild. Use-low level magic on the surrounding while pretending that you didn¡¯t detect the enemies under you. Do that for at least ten minutes. Make sure only low-level magic so you can still have mana in case theye out to fight you,¡± I said.


    I pointed at where the closest ce to where the meeting room is so Shirley can use her magic there.


    ¡°Should I use magic there, or from somewhere else and use magic targeted there?¡± Shirley asked.


    ¡°Either one is fine. Just be careful in case theye out to fight. For now, I don¡¯t have a n to kill them all yet,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. Five minutes after you enter, right? Where will you enter from?¡± Shirley asked curiously.


    ¡°From here.¡±


    I walked to a grassy area. There¡¯s a hidden door under the grass. The door is covered by soil, and grass have grown. That way, it won¡¯t be suspicious. Unless there¡¯s an earth mageing here. But from the look of it, the door hasn¡¯t been opened for so long. Or maybe the cult has killed those who found the door.


    ¡°This area has only weak monsters. Which is why there are not many people who woulde all the way here. I used the giant mantises to practice my magic. And since this ce is quiet, I thought that it¡¯s good,¡± Shirley exined why no one seems to have found the entrance.


    I guess that makes sense. The giant mantises are not a monster that will give you nice reward. Even though they are stronger than goblins, they are still considered weak. It¡¯s because mages would attack them from afar before the mantises could even get close.


    I dug my finger on the ground, and grabbed the handle to the door. I opened the door and see a wooden door. And it¡¯s locked. Good thing it¡¯s not locked with magic tool and just ordinary lock.


    I transformed a Blobby into a key, and opened the door.


    ¡°Alright. Five minutes from now. I¡¯ll see youter,¡± I said to Shirley.


    ¡°Be careful, Roy,¡± she said.


    ¡°You too.¡±


    I closed the door and enter the underground. I have just finished a mission involved with the underground, and now I keep going into the underground again. Am I a mole?


    Sigh... Victoria is not here so any jokes I made will not be retorted. I miss her already.


    There has been no news from the team at Varadis. But I won¡¯t ask since I might end up ruining their concentration.


    I walked into the tunnel while covering myself with Aura to not let the expert level mages know that I¡¯m getting closer. My stealth mode has improved so much that they won¡¯t be able to notice me until I get right behind them. Though killing fifteen people in stealth mode is impossible. That¡¯s why I want to hear their discussion first.


    I reached another door toward the meeting room. If I open it, I can go down thedder and be right at the meeting room. Though I will end up being caught.


    At least it¡¯s good that there¡¯s no soundproofing in the room or the door. I can hear what they are talking inside.


    ¡°...She¡¯s noting. Yesterday, she sent a signal that says she wille. But she didn¡¯te at all.¡±


    ¡°Hmm... suspicious. But who are we talking about?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s her. That one who married a guard of the Empress.¡±


    Seems like they are talking about the woman I captured and brought to Albert. She¡¯s not here. She¡¯s all the way in Tatrama and will die soon.


    ¡°Why do you think she¡¯s trying toe here? Did she have an important message?¡±


    ¡°From the signal, it says that she has a message to say. But it¡¯s not important to call for everyone, and I¡¯m the only one who waited for her. But I called you all here because it seems like she has gone missing from the capital.¡±


    The one who said that was the guard of this ce. The man whose meal I ate and I me the rat for it.


    Seems like they are discussing about what message the girl has, and why was she missing. The answer to both questions is me and me.


    ¡°About that, seems like there are several other people who have gone missing like her. They are all just low rank members, but it happened to several people at once. It was as if someone is targeting only us. It¡¯s not a random attack.¡±


    ¡°That might be right. But we don¡¯t know for sure. There¡¯s also another person missing. It¡¯s the cold-blooded murderer whom I tried to recruit. Seems like he was near those low-rank members when he was missing. It could be that the culprit is targeting him, but our members got caught up. Or maybe that murderer is the culprit and he escaped from the capital already.¡±


    It¡¯s good that I didn¡¯t just kill all cult members. I also asked udia to give me wanted posters of criminals so I can kill them. Seems like the one wanted man I killedst night was not a member of the cult. Though I still kill a lot of cult members.


    ¡°Right. But we need to be careful as well if the culprit is a bounty hunter. Many of us has bounty on our heads.¡±


    Alright. There¡¯s no important discussion other than from what I caused. And Shirley has started casting magic above us. she¡¯s from far, but her magic is targeted right above the meeting room.


    Ten people raised their heads together, while the some from the five who have explosive devices in their mouth are confused. I was right that those ten are expert level mages. But it seems like some with explosive devices are expert level mages as well.


    ¡°...No, it¡¯s not us. Someone is probably just training their magic. And it¡¯s too weak. At best, they are just intermediate level. Let¡¯s ignore them. They are not attacking us.¡±


    ¡°Right. Let¡¯s stay here a little longer until whoever practicing magic leaves. At the moment, they don¡¯t know that there¡¯s a hidden room underground.¡±


    I know though. And I¡¯m right so close to them.


    Now, they don¡¯t seem to have anything important to discuss. They just waste their time having a small chat with each other. Though the man whose meal I ate is cooking another meal. And someone else is asking him to cook for them. Now, he¡¯s cooking for all fifteen people.


    They are all in the meeting room with warm meal, while Shirley above us has stopped casting magic. Now, I guess I should capture them all if possible.


    They are having a meal. It¡¯s the time when people lower their guard the most. I should be able to do it.


    And so, I kicked the door open and jumped down into the meeting room. It¡¯s time to fight.


    ¡°What a nice meal you all have right now!¡±


    ...No! No, you idiot! Don¡¯t think with your stomach! I should have said something much more threatening instead!


    Sigh... it seems that the meal I stole just wasn¡¯t enough. Well, let¡¯s fight anyway.

 Chapter 488

    Chapter 488: From Fifteen to Two


    Fifteen mages. Five with explosive devices, and ten without. Though all those with explosive devices in their mouth that I have encountered weren¡¯t expert level mage, I shouldn¡¯t think that¡¯s the case now. After all, we have defeated a lot of them and captured them. Though I don¡¯t know if the cult knows that we captured them or not. There were no witnesses after all.


    But the cult should be suspicious how there are too many expert level mages who never returned from their mission. As for the artificial master level mage who died, the Professor seems to never told about their deaths to the cult as he wanted to monopolize the ck Slime alone. Or at least that¡¯s what Albert know after interrogating him.


    Just because all fifteen of them are expert level mages, doesn¡¯t mean I can¡¯t defeat them. None of them realize that I was so close to them listening in.


    And I have more than fifteen Magic Restraining Cors. Back then when I just moved to Cassau and some nobles caused trouble, I grabbed all the cors I see. Also, Albert and the other kings also gave them to me as much as they can. That¡¯s why I have tons of them. Though they are all stored in different ces.


    Albert store them in his treasury in his pce. Lynn and old man Henry also store them in their own ce. As for Harold, it was mostly Bernard who collect them and store them in his mansion.


    I am someone who can easily go in and out such important ce. Though I¡¯m rich, so I don¡¯t need to steal them.


    And they said that one day, when the decisive battle against the cult will happen, they will make use of all the treasures inside. They will give their sacred treasures to important people who allied with us.


    .....


    Wait, why do I keep thinking of things that¡¯s not important at time like this? I need to defeat fifteen of them in this huge meeting room.


    For now, let¡¯s use sleeping gas on them all.


    ¡°Who the hell are... you...¡±


    Some of them started to feel sleepy. And I used that chance to put the cors on them. As many as I can.


    Oops. Just when I was about to wrap a cor on the next person, someone else casted a fireball at me. I guess six people is good enough. And two of them are those who have explosive devices in their mouth. Maybe I should have aimed at all those without the explosive device in their mouth.


    ¡°Kill him!¡± one of them said.


    Since this room is quite big, I can use Reizpear freely. Though the de part of the spear has been removed. So, it¡¯s just a staff.


    It¡¯s necessary if I want to capture them. As they seem to be rather important for the cult since they have gathered here instead of other cult members at the capital, they should have quite the status. That¡¯s why I will try to not kill them.


    Now, among the nine people here, one of them who has explosive device in his mouth is sleeping. This one is not an expert level mage. But the other two with explosive devices aren¡¯t sleepy at all. I was right that there will be some expert level mages with explosive device in their mouth.


    But as long as I can get close to them, I can defeat even expert level mages in an instant. I have to keep moving.


    ¡°This cor... I can¡¯t use magic! Take this cor off of me!¡±


    ¡°No. The enemy is still here. We can¡¯t get close to you since he might-¡±


    Before the second person finished his word, I smacked his head with the staff in my hand. And using the momentum, I swung the staff around and hit two more people. Now, there¡¯s only five people left.


    ¡°Fire Wall!¡±


    Someone finally made a protection by using a wall of fire. He doesn¡¯t even care that he¡¯s attacking his allies with his Fire Wall.


    ¡°Aah! What are you doing!¡±


    ¡°...There have been too many times that our members never return. And among them, there are many expert level mages. Probably, he¡¯s the cause. I don¡¯t know what magic he has and how he can stay so close near us while none of us could detect him, but just what he did as soon as he entered is enough to raise our suspicion that he could be the strongest one here. We should stall for time until ¡®He¡¯ arrives. Even at the cost of our lives.¡±


    Seems like among them, someone can still have calmposure. He could even figure out that I killed many of expert level mages already.


    Hearing what he said, the others here prepared to fight for their lives. Well, not all of them.


    ¡°Are you kidding me!? There¡¯s no way I would sacrifice my life! I raised my level to an expert just so I don¡¯t have to have that thing in my mouth ever again! I¡¯m not going to sacrifice myself! I¡¯m leaving!¡±


    The one who said that is an expert level earth mage. And he used his magic to change the terrain of the meeting room which is under the ground, so he could escape. But before he can do that, the previous person who creates the Fire Wall used a Fire Spear and kill the guy.


    ¡°The cult doesn¡¯t have the need for someone who won¡¯t die for them. Even if you don¡¯t have the explosive device in your mouth anymore, you have to put your everything for the True God. If you¡¯re thinking of running away, I will kill you myself.¡±


    This guy is dangerous. He¡¯s smart and he can put the other members in ce.


    Just as I thought of that, he casted several Fire Spears and attacked everyone who has the cors on and fainted after I hit them.


    ¡°He put the cors so they won¡¯t be able to use magic. That means he¡¯s going to ask us for information instead of killing us. If anyone here got caught by him, kill them. Even if that person is me!¡±


    So cruel and decisive. I never heard of someone like him from Celestine and Veronica. And even Albert who is interrogating the Professor, never said anything about this guy. Which mean although he has quite the status, he is not in a very high position. But if he keeps living, he will have the same level of influence as Celestine and Veronica back when they were at the cult, and he could have his own group. Which will be dangerous seeing how he can lead people.


    The worst part is that this guy is thinking of stalling for time until someone appears. Who is this ¡®He¡¯ he¡¯s talking about? Must be someone powerful. Shirley above us who is still practicing her magic will be in danger. I have to finish things here as soon as possible.


    If I put the cor on any one of them, they will be killed. That means my only way of capturing them is to knock them out first. Let¡¯s use the gun.


    I let go of the staff, and transformed Blobbies into guns. One in each hand. And I shoot the enemies as much as possible with a dull bullet that won¡¯t kill them. but the force should be strong enough to knock them out.


    ¡°Tch! Ice Shield!¡±


    Someone used Ice Shield, but I targeted someone else instead. As for the Fire Wall, it has been extinguished after I used air magic to change the property of the air here to something that is not mmable. And the enemies already have difficulty breathing.


    ¡°He¡¯s too strong!¡±


    ¡°And fast!¡±


    ¡°And handsome!¡±


    ¡°...who said that?¡±


    ¡°Can¡¯t I justpliment myself!?¡±


    Of course the one who said that was me. I don¡¯t want any men to call me handsome even if they are right. The best praises alwayse from beautiful girls. Though I just hope they weren¡¯t lies.


    It was difficult since they don¡¯t care about their own lives. They used powerful magic underground that would even harm them. And those I knocked unconscious; they were all killed by those who are still alive.


    And now, there¡¯s only two people left. The one who might be a good leader, and the guard of this ce whose meal I stole and me it to the rat. I guess that makes sense since he was in charge of this ce.


    Above us, Shirley has stopped casting magic and take a rest. She must be waiting for me to get out.


    ¡°Hey, you said that there will be someone elseing, right? Before you die, tell me about him,¡± I asked.


    ¡°...You¡¯ll meet him soon. And as soon as you see him you will die. That¡¯s how strong he is.¡±


    After saying that, both men faced each other and try to do a double suicide. But they are so close to each other so I knock the two of them out at the same time before they kill each other.


    From fifteen, there¡¯s only two people left. Well, at least that¡¯s better than nothing.


    I put cors on their neck, and use portal to transport them to Albert¡¯s ce. He can take care of them. Or maybe someone else as he will being soon.


    I left the ce and greeted Shirley who is waiting for me under the shade of a tree.


    ¡°You done, Roy?¡± Shirley asked.


    ¡°Not yet. Put on a mask to cover your identity. Someone will being soon. Someone strong,¡± I said.


    He¡¯s probably a master level mage. An artificial one. That¡¯s why those people stalled for time since they think he can defeat me.


    And the artificial master level mage that should be here are... children. I know that Shirley won¡¯t leave if I told her. That¡¯s why I told her to cover her face.

 Chapter 489

    Chapter 489: The Side Effect is Having No Roots on the Side


    I calmed myself down with calming gas, and let my mana recovers. Although I didn¡¯t use magic much during the fight, I still don¡¯t know who will being and I need to prepare myself for it.


    ¡°Should we call the others for help?¡± Shirley asked.


    ¡°Not yet. You all will be busy for the tournament. Even if the cult is nning for something, you don¡¯t want to lose on purpose, right? You will still want to win. I¡¯ll ask for help if it¡¯s necessary. You can just rest or train. Or maybe watch me fight this guy who will being. Who knows if you can learn something?¡± I said.


    If the oneing is a wind or ice mage, Shirley who has both elements can learn something. She can still grow stronger. Just like everyone else.


    ¡°Then, I will watch by the sidelines,¡± Shirley said.


    ¡°Okay. I¡¯ll try to not get the fight too close to your location. But you need to raise your barrier at all time. Since there were expert level mages in the underground meeting room before, and they have quite the faith in the strength of this guy, he should be much stronger than any ordinary expert level mages. Probably an artificial master level mage,¡± I said.


    Shirley reacted slightly after I said that there¡¯s an artificial master level mage who wille here. She¡¯s sharp. She must have realized from my word that the oneing should be a kid who has been experimented.


    .....


    ¡°Just watch and don¡¯t do anything unless I ask you. And even if I ask you for help, just use magic that can restrain the enemy. Don¡¯t use any powerful offensive magic. If we can capture him instead of killing him, that would be ideal.¡±


    Though killing him might be impossible since she¡¯s here. I don¡¯t want her to see me killing a kid.


    After that, there¡¯s no more chat. Shirley is obviously anxious about the personing, but I used calming gas on her. She realizes that she somehow calmed down, and looked at me in gratitude.


    And just one hour after waiting, I finally see someone above the sky. He¡¯s a wind mage.


    As expected, it¡¯s a kid. A boy around twelve or thirteen years old. Maybe after the experiment, he has grown a bit. But the fact that the Professor himself calling them kids at present, could mean that they are still children for him. I guess the chance of them having grown enough to be called adult is close to zero.


    And just like the other artificial master level mage, he has a mohawk. Just why!? What¡¯s with them and mohawk? Is it a necessary step to experiment on them?


    The Professor be like, ¡°I¡¯m gonna shave your hair. But just the sides. And you will be stronger.¡±


    Is that why?


    Or maybe the secret is that he¡¯s ying with their brains. But only need to do it on the side. That¡¯s why he thinks it¡¯s a pain to shave everything.


    If it¡¯s me, I¡¯d rather shave everything.


    Wait, maybe the surgery cause something to their hair roots. But only on the side. So, once their hair grows back, it¡¯s only in the middle.


    I haven¡¯t seen if they still have hair roots on their scalp. Maybe I should check with this one. And when I capture this guy and bring him to Varadis, I¡¯ll go check the other mohawks as well.


    In any case, as expected of an artificial master level mage. He realizes that I¡¯m looking at him. But he doesn¡¯t care at all and continue going tond in another location where another path to the underground meeting room is.


    Though after he sees that no one is there, he will being.


    ¡°Shirley, he¡¯s checking on the underground meeting room first. He will being here soon,¡± I said.


    ¡°What is he look like?¡± Shirley asked.


    ¡°Mohawk. Again. And he¡¯s a child. Probably twelve or thirteen. Also, his vocal cord has been damaged. He shouldn¡¯t be able to talk well,¡± I said.


    The kid¡¯s vocal cord is damaged. He should be mute, or unable to talk properly. That¡¯s what I see with my Divine Vision as he enters the underground meeting room. And as expected, he has no hair roots on the side of his hair. Having a mohawk is the side effect of such experiment.


    ¡°His damaged vocal cord... was the injury intentional? Or is it from an ident?¡± Shirley asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. The other artificial master level mages we had seen are able to talk normally. But this one is different. Whatever the case, I need to capture him and bring him to Varadis. If Victoria, Marie, and the others can do some research on this boy, the chance of them inventing something before the tournament will be higher,¡± I replied.


    ¡°You really think they can made something so quick?¡± Shirley asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. But the start of the tournament is not the deadline. The real deadline is when the cult starts their attack. So, I have high hope that Marie and the others can at least do something,¡± I said.


    ¡°I agree. Marie has always been a genius inventor. I¡¯ll just have faith in her. I¡¯ll go hide now. The kid should being soon, right? Good luck,¡± Shirley said as she went and hide behind a tree.


    Since she has taken care of the monsters here, there¡¯s no need to worry about her safety. Only the effects of our battle can harm her. But as long as the target is me, her barrier should be able to protect her.


    As the boy looked around the meeting room and didn¡¯t find anyone, he started looking into the sewer. But he still didn¡¯t find anyone.


    As for me, while waiting, I drew a map of the sewer to give to Lynnter. Or maybe udia.


    Though I don¡¯t know how long thister will be, so I opened a portal right away to Lynn¡¯s location. And she¡¯s busy in her office with udia helping her.


    ¡°Hey! I have no time to chat, so I¡¯ll be quick. Here¡¯s a map for the sewer. There are some hidden rooms. And I found one that was just used by the cult. Go get some people to investigate the sewer,¡± I said.


    ¡°Is there something going on?¡± Lynn asked.


    ¡°I will probably fight a kid soon. I¡¯ll try to capture him, but that might be difficult. Shirley is here in case I need help. See youter,¡± I said as I close the portal.


    I know that when I opened the portal, the mohawk kid sensed it and he¡¯s getting out of the underground sewer through the ce he entered from, and flew this way.


    The reason I used portal is also to bait him toe here. If I didn¡¯t, he might go check the sewer and keep going until he finds someone. Though I don¡¯t know why he didn¡¯te to me right away when he sensed me looking at him.


    Now that he¡¯s getting closer, I can see him better. For being a kid, he has a really strong body. He¡¯s just a little bit weaker than me if I don¡¯t use my Aura. But he still looks like a kid as his muscle is not bulky. Though our weight should be simr even though there¡¯s an obvious difference in height.


    He also has an explosive device in his mouth. Maybe the Professor or whoever ordered him put it in his mouth. Which mean in case we fight, I have to incapacitate him, and pluck out the explosive device while wrapping a cor around his neck. Though if I can put him to sleep, I don¡¯t need to be in a hurry.


    Hended in front of me, but beforeing to me, he looked at where Shirley is hiding. Well, if he can tell where I am, it¡¯s obvious that he can tell where Shirley is.


    For now, even though he can¡¯t talk, I¡¯ll try asking him questions.


    ¡°Good afternoon. May I ask what your name is?¡± I asked the boy.


    I know that the mohawks aren¡¯t named. But for now, let¡¯s act as if I know nothing about them.


    The boy didn¡¯t answer as he just keeps staring at me.


    ¡°Can you hear me?¡± I asked. And he replied with a nod.


    ¡°Can you talk?¡±


    He replied with a shake of his head.


    ¡°Hmm... this is quite difficult. For now, I¡¯ll ask you some questions. You can answer it with a nod for a yes, and shake your head for a no. If you have some questions, can you write something in the ground so I know what you¡¯re going to ask?¡±


    He shakes his head. What? Don¡¯t tell me that he can¡¯t write or read?


    ¡°Can you write or read?¡±


    The boy replied with a shake of his head.


    ¡°Then, I will be the one asking you questions. Is that fine?¡±


    The boy didn¡¯t answer right away, but then he nodded his head. I guess he¡¯s curious where the other cult members are. But he can¡¯t ask a stranger as he needs to know if I¡¯m his ally or not first.


    For now, it¡¯s questioning time.

 Chapter 490

    Chapter 490: The Enemy Has Two Elements!


    This questioning time is not for the sake of hearing an answer. He can only reply with yes or no. And I don¡¯t know what to ask since he can¡¯t reply with other answer. He can¡¯t talk, and he can¡¯t write or read.


    This questioning time is to make him let down his guard so I can have the element of surprise. I need to capture him and bring him to Varadis. This way, Marie and the others can test their invention on him. Once their invention work on this boy, we can assume that their invention will work on other artificial master level mage that wille.


    For now, I¡¯ll ask him random questions.


    ¡°Hey, do you know that it¡¯s time for kids to take a nap?¡± I said. To which I can see Shirley with her palm covering her face.


    The boy answer with a shake of his head. Which mean he doesn¡¯t know that kids take a nap at this time. But after that, it seems like he was curious about Shirley¡¯s reaction as he looked at her hiding location.


    ¡°Oh, don¡¯t worry about her. She¡¯s a shy person. Just like me. Which is why we cover our face with a mask,¡± I said.


    I can¡¯t make him hostile to us. I need to catch him by surprise.


    .....


    ¡°Leave her be. I¡¯m more curious about you. Where did youe from? Oh, wait, you can¡¯t speak. But you can at least point to where you came from, right?¡±


    And then, he raises his hand. I prepare myself in case he suddenly casts a magic to attack me. But it¡¯s not an attack. He just raises his hand first, before he points his finger to where he came from. He¡¯s pointing to the east. Probably from Arturo. Or maybe that city in the center of the continent, Lenko.


    ¡°So, you¡¯re from the capital?¡± I asked.


    For now, let¡¯s pretend to not know and just say that he¡¯s from the capital. Well, the capital is where he points at as well. We are at the west side from the capital right now.


    He shook his head and raises his hand which he used to point the west a bit higher.


    ¡°Oh, further than that? Is there another city that way? Hmm... Are you pointing at a city beyond the capital?¡±


    He nodded his head. And I keep guessing random answers until I finally say the correct one.


    ¡°You¡¯re from Arturo? You¡¯re from another kingdom?¡±


    The boy nodded his head.


    ¡°Oh, I see. Well, I should have guessed it sooner. I know that there are many peopleing here for the tournament. We too came from another country. We¡¯re from Varadis. We¡¯re hunters who wants to see the tournament. Isn¡¯t it amazing that we finally have a way to find who is the strongest mage in the continent? I used to dream of being the strongest as well. But I¡¯m too weak and can only take low-rank quests. But I want to see the gap between me and the strongest mage. Though just any one of the participants should be stronger than me already,¡± I lied.


    The setting is we¡¯re hunters from Varadis who want to see who is the strongest mage. I want to tell the kid that we are weak to let down his guard.


    But the kid didn¡¯t react at all. I guess knowing that I was looking at him made him think that I¡¯m not weak at all.


    ¡°What are we doing in this forest even though we¡¯re weak? Well, although we¡¯re weak, we have good teamwork! I have a really good eyesight that can see things from afar. And with my eyesight, she will aim to where I told her and shoot magic from afar. That¡¯s how we became good enough to stay here! Though it seems like there are not many monsters left here. And I¡¯m thinking that it¡¯s time to return. By the way, what about you? You should be younger than me. From what I can tell, you¡¯re younger than fifteen. Do you have innate talent in magic that awaken your element when you¡¯re this young?¡± I asked.


    I¡¯m also probing if he will say the truth or not. I know that he¡¯s a sessful experiment of the Professor. If he nods his head, that means he can lie. If he shakes his head, that means he is still na?ve and can only say the truth. Unless he doesn¡¯t know the real answer.


    He started pondering for a while, and he finally replies with a nod. He can lie.


    Maybe because he can¡¯t speak, he spends most of the time thinking. That¡¯s why he knows when to lie. And he can only nod or shake his head, so no one will think that he¡¯s lying. What a pain.


    Well, it¡¯s not like I¡¯m going to interrogate him.


    ¡°Wow! You must be so talented! I envy you! By the way...¡±


    I walked closer to the boy while asking him a question. So far, he didn¡¯t get suspicious of me. And I can get closer to him easily.


    ¡°...since you¡¯re talented, would you like to join our party? You can be the main attacker, while the two of us will be your support. This way, you don¡¯t have to worry with your back. We will end up being seen as riding on your tailcoat, but we¡¯re fine with that. How about it? The split will be fifty-fifty. You will get half, and the two of us will get the other half. How about it?¡± I asked while approaching him closer and closer.


    He refused my offer. But I keep negotiating further while approaching him closer step by step.


    ¡°How about 60:40?¡±


    The boy still refuses. So, I keep negotiating.


    ¡°61:39?¡±


    He shook his head.


    ¡°67:33?¡±


    He keeps refusing.


    ¡°Fine, 70:30?¡±


    The boy still refuses. But I have reached within an arm-length to him.


    ¡°Final offer, your arms!¡±


    I transformed Blobbies into a sword, and swung it at his arms.


    He is about as strong as me without Aura and magic. But I still have the upper-hand with my experience and technique. I managed to cut his right arm, but for the left arm, I only managed to put a scratch.


    ¡°No!¡± Shirley shouted. She must be thinking that I¡¯m killing the boy. But no problem. I¡¯m only cutting his arm off. As long as it¡¯s properly stored, I can reattach it backter. But I need to be careful of the boy first.


    He keeps his distance as he flew back with wind magic. Meanwhile, I kicked his separated arm toward Shirley¡¯s location.


    ¡°Freeze it so I can reattach it backter!¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re too cruel to a child!¡± Shirley said as used ice magic to freeze the separated arm.


    ¡°Good. I can reattach itter. Now that the enemy is hurt, I can... oh shit. He¡¯s also a healer,¡± I said as I saw the wound on his arms, the wound got healed in an instant. The control of his healing is to his whole body, not to the wound alone. But seeing the wound instantly healed means that he¡¯s at least expert level in healing magic.


    ¡°Fuck, you¡¯re a healer? Also, a master level?¡±


    He shook his head. As long as his healing is not master level, it should be fine. I heard that a master level healer could even revive the death. It was just a myth. Or at least at this time, I can only hope so.


    Seeing that I¡¯m hostile, the boy raised his left hand toward me and cast a Wind sh to attack me.


    That¡¯s fine. As long as he is not used to use magic without pointing his hand toward his target, I can dodge it easily. His hand might be fast, but not enough to get his attack hits me.


    Also, the lost of one arm means that he needs to adjust his body bnce now. It¡¯s impossible to adjust it right away. Even if he has a strong body, since it¡¯s not through training but through experiment, he shouldn¡¯t be able to bnce his body well so quickly.


    ...though he¡¯s flying now. Bnce doesn¡¯t mean much if he can just fly in the sky. Although he looks unstable flying in the sky, he can still do it well. As expected of an artificial master level wind mage.


    Still, a wind element and healing element. This could be troublesome. He can heal from any wound I give him. Which mean I have to knock him out quickly before he can use any healing magic if I want to capture him.


    I need to get serious. If I half-assed this, I would die.


    ¡°WhO Are yoU?¡± the boy spoke with weird tone.


    ¡°Fuck! You can talk!?¡± I asked.


    ¡°It iS PAinfUl tO speAk. WhO Are yoU?¡± the boy asked again.


    ¡°At the moment, I wish I am someone who can save you. Please do not resist. I have to make sure you won¡¯t be able to use magic so you won¡¯t harm anyone,¡± I said.


    My n is to cut off his arms, and then put the cor around his neck. If he has no arm, he won¡¯t be able to remove the cor forcefully like the Mohawk Girl back then.


    But this fight might be harder. Especially since my goal is to capture him and not to kill him.


    Well, if I¡¯m in trouble, I¡¯ll just ask Shirley to help. She¡¯s already informing the others through Sonia that I¡¯m fighting. Reinforcement will arrive. But I want to capture him before the others arrive.

 Chapter 491

    Chapter 491: Capturing the Boy


    The boy is a healer. But no matter how good his healing is, he shouldn¡¯t be able to recover the loss of blood. Well, I don¡¯t know about expert level healer or even master level healer. I think they should be able to heal it.


    The boy might be an expert level healer. And I also don¡¯t know if he can regrow his own arm or not. This will be a difficult fight. But I can¡¯t give up. I need to bring him to Varadis so we can find something that can stop those artificial master level mages from fighting us.


    ¡°By the way, have you reached master level in your healing? Just like your wind element?¡± I asked the boy.


    The boy shook his head without hesitation. I think this time, the boy didn¡¯t lie. That mean he¡¯s at least an expert level healer.


    ¡°So, you¡¯re an expert level healer?¡± I asked the boy again.


    ¡°WhaT DOeS iT maTteR?¡± the boy said with hoarse voice.


    ¡°It does matter. Since you can¡¯t regrow your missing limb back, it means I have a chance to defeat you. Don¡¯t prepare yourself,¡± I said as I charged at him who is flying now.


    .....


    ¡°ShoULdn¡¯T iT Be PrePArE YoURSelf?¡± the boy asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t want to fight. I want to win. Please lose for the sake of the world,¡± I said.


    Before I can reach him, He tried to push me away with his wind magic. As expected of a master level wind mage. Even if he¡¯s not a real master level mage and just an artificially made by someone, his magic is too powerful. And as it¡¯s a wind magic, I can¡¯t see it even with my Divine Vision.


    But I¡¯m an air mage. Even if I can¡¯t see the wind, I can feel the movement of the air in the surrounding. Once I sense the strange movement of the air, I can tell where the wind ising from and when it will reach me.


    The winding from him is fast and strong. I can¡¯t cut his magic in time, but since it¡¯s not an offensive magic that will harm me, but instead it¡¯s for pushing me away, I can just let myself get carried by the wind. Though I need to think of a way to win.


    Now that I have tasted his wind magic, I can at least estimate how fast it is now. Next time, I can react properly.


    After getting carried by the wind for a while, I escaped and start running toward the boy again. He didn¡¯t move from the previous spot. He just stays there floating in the same spot. That¡¯s just how confident he is, I suppose.


    I run again toward the boy. And when I get closer like before, he also used wind magic to push me away. I don¡¯t know why he didn¡¯t use offensive magic, but this is good. Now that I have experienced it once, I can react properly.


    Just as the wind that is trying to push me reach within my range, I swung Reizpear to cut it. Using my Aura to cover Reizpear and my will to cut even magic, I did it easily.


    The boy was shocked to see that I can cut through his magic. That¡¯s good. Now that he¡¯s unprepared for this, I tried to cut his left arm now. He managed to dodge my first sh, but I won¡¯t stop with just one attack. I have already expected that he can dodge my attack after looking at his body. That¡¯s why attacked him multiple times.


    He managed to dodge the first few shes and thrusts attack, but I still didn¡¯t stop at all. And slowly, since he is not used in fighting with his body, he slowed down and I managed to scratch him. But my aim is to cut off his arms. One arm is down already, but I need to cut his other arm.


    Though It will still be bad if he can use magic without aiming with his arms. That¡¯s how I trained my friends to use magic. If this mohawk boy can do that, it will be dangerous. I have to put the cor on him quickly as well.


    Good thing that the people in the underground meeting room died. I don¡¯t need to use portal to get one. I have used several cors and wrap them around the neck of the cult members, and they were killed by their own allies. Except for two whom ended up getting caught.


    The boy managed to not get his left arm cut, while I also sh his other parts of the body so he won¡¯t think that I only aim for his arms. And now, when he¡¯s having difficulty keeping up with my speed, I get around his back and put a cor on his neck.


    Or at least that¡¯s what I tried. The boy quickly escaped far from me after I get to his back. By flying forward. So, I chased after him again.


    It will be bad if he can gain some distance. He¡¯s a master level wind mage even if it¡¯s just artificial. He will escape and the fight ahead will be more difficult.


    That¡¯s why I used Blobbies and change it into a whip. With the whip, I wrapped it around his waist. Now, he won¡¯t be able to escape from me unless he cut the whip.


    ¡°I won¡¯t let you go. I will kill you right here,¡± I said.


    ¡°No! Don¡¯t kill him!¡±


    The one who said that was not me or the boy. It was Shirley who ended up following us as we started fighting in the sky.


    I know that. I don¡¯t have any n to kill him. But if I say that I will capture him, he will think that it¡¯s fine because no matter what I do, I won¡¯t try to kill him. And he will still be alive no matter what. He can attack me however he likes if he thinks that way.


    But if I made him think that I will kill him, his moves will be limited. And capturing him will be easier. That¡¯s my n. I guess Shirley didn¡¯t realize it. I guess since I¡¯m fighting a kid, she can¡¯t keep her head cool.


    So, I red at Shirley with intent to kill. It¡¯s the first time she felt my killing intent and it¡¯s aimed at her. She felt the fear and stopped. I hope he realizes what I intent to do now.


    ¡°YoU aRE Not WEaK,¡± the boy said. I guess he¡¯s still thinking about my lies back then.


    ¡°Thanks for the praise, but that doesn¡¯t make me happy!¡±


    Seems like the boy has adapted to his loss of his arm. And he can now use his offensive magic with his left arm, he used Air sh on me. This time, I used my long-range sh attack to cut his magic from far.


    I used my full power so even after I cut his magic, it would still reach the boy. But when my attack and his magic meet, an explosion urred. My attach couldn¡¯t reach him, and we cancelled each other¡¯s attack.


    ¡°I guess that means I¡¯m about as strong as an artificial master level mage. I am still not as strong as a master level mage. What a pain,¡± I said.


    With this, if I meet the leader of the cult or the Archbishop who are both estimated to be real master level mages, I will lose in an instant.


    Should I wait for reinforcement? But I had shown my killing intent to Shirley. I guess I can¡¯t have her join.


    As for the others, it seems like they choose to wait for further information. The only one who woulde right away after hearing the report is Ang. But since she¡¯s not yet here, I guess she¡¯s training somewhere far away.


    But if they hadn¡¯t received further information after a while, they will alsoe over here. That will take some time. I guess I have to take care of this myself.


    Hmm... I guess there¡¯s only one thing left I can do. Well, I will do it then.


    I run on air at full speed toward the boy, and the boy used Wind sh again toward me. But I didn¡¯t cut it. Instead, I used my left arm to block it.


    It¡¯s impossible to block a magic with my arm. Especially since the enemy is master level mage. But that will make him drop his guard. No one will think that I will sacrifice my arm to reach him.


    ¡°Get my arm!¡± I shouted at Shirley to wake her up from the shock. She stared at me who lost an arm, and then chased after my falling arm.


    As for me, I managed to reach the boy and cut of his left arm as well. And I quickly let go of Reizpear, and grab the cor from my pocket and wrap it around the boy¡¯s neck.


    The boy was surprised, but he can¡¯t do anything now. And without any magic resistance from him, I put him to sleep with sleeping gas as he starts falling. But I caught him, and chase after his falling arm.


    An arm for two arms. And I will reattach it soon. I hope there won¡¯t be side effects.

 Chapter 492

    Chapter 492: Bringing the Boy to Varadis


    Right as I put the boy to sleep, the others finally arrive. Seems like they meet each other on the way here.


    And as expected, they were shocked to see the armless boy, and me who lost an arm. Good thing the three arms have now been frozen by Shirley.


    As for my wound, I used Blobby to wrap tightly around it. It¡¯s very painful, but I can endure it. at least for a few more minutes.


    ¡°Ka, heal the boy first! And then, we will go to Varadis to reattach his arms and my arm. The boy will be a good material for research,¡± I said.


    ¡°Ah! Okay!¡± Ka said.


    It might be a bit difficult to reattach the boy¡¯s right arm since he has healed it on his own. And that might cause his left which hasn¡¯t been healed to be longer than his right after I reattach them. But that doesn¡¯t matter as long as the boy is alive.


    As for me, although I can sew back my left arm on my own, doing it in Varadis might be better since they have experts over there. Maybe I¡¯ll call Sophie to help.


    .....


    ¡°Sonia, tell Sophie that I will get her to reattach my arm,¡± I said.


    ¡°What about the surgeon in Varadis? You¡¯re not going to ask them to reattach your arm?¡± Ka asked me.


    ¡°They will be busy with the boy. And I feel better if Sophie is the one to do it. As for you, I will need your healing after the surgery. I will be conscious during the whole operation as well so I can instruct you and Sophie. As for the others, if you want to hear how powerful the boy is, you can ask Shirley. She watched us fight the whole time. I¡¯ll be backter to finish the request I took to the guild and to report everything I heard in the underground meeting room to Lynn and udia,¡± I said.


    ¡°There¡¯s an underground meeting room? Hmm... it¡¯s true! There¡¯s a big room underneath us!¡± Ang said. Since she is an expert level in her four elements, she can sense the ground under her.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. You, Sara, and Celestine can go check on the underground meeting room. It¡¯s connected to the sewer underneath the capital. Since you three have good sense of your earth element, it¡¯s best if you three can check it out first. There are no dangerous monsters, so it¡¯s fine. But it smells bad. That¡¯s why Sara¡¯s air magic is important. Well, I¡¯ll be going now. Ka, let¡¯s go!¡±


    I opened a portal to Victoria¡¯s location in Varadis. Seems like we forgot to tell everyone here that we¡¯reing as they didn¡¯t expect it at all.


    ¡°Oh, Roy! Youe to visit? Wait, what happened!? How did you lose your arm!? And why is that kid has no arms!?¡± Victoria who greeted me while discussing something with Marie and some other people in Varadis, including the king, old man Henry, were shocked to see me like this.


    I entered the portal with the boy on my back, and my own frozen arm in my intact right arm. As for the boy¡¯s arms, Ka is carrying them.


    ¡°I met the artificial master level mage, this mohawk kid. The only way I can defeat him without killing him is this way. He might be good for researching something for you guys. Now, while Sophie, Ka, and I will perform surgery on me to reattach my arm, the surgeons from Varadis will operate on the boy...ter. I think it¡¯s best to keep him armless for now. Well, the surgeons can watch my operation. As for the boy, Ka will heal his left arm. This way, the boy¡¯s arm length will be the same. Hopefully. Though they will be shorter than before, at least he¡¯s still in his growth period. If he can still grow. For now, myselfes first,¡± I said.


    With that, everyone readied themselves for my operation. Victoria will help bing our medical tools as well. And Marie will watch us out of curiosity.


    The surgery was done well. It took less than one hour. Which is good enough.


    Sophie, Ka, and the others are doing exactly as I instructed. I know that the doctors here have learned on how to reattach separated limbs from my medical knowledge, but I don¡¯t know how many people they have operate. Maybe zero. That¡¯s why I instruct them to do it.


    After my surgery is done, Ka healed me againpletely. I tested my strength in my left arm, and it¡¯s as good as it was before. Surgery was done perfectly.


    ¡°Now, about the boy. The reason I cut off his arms is because his body is strong enough to rip the cor apart. If he wakes up, his kicking strength should be powerful enough to kill anyone in one kick. But it¡¯s difficult for him to remove the cor this way. I think binding his leg with magic from expert level mage should be good enough to stop him. Ka, use your earth magic to bind his legs,¡± I said to Ka.


    ¡°There¡¯s no soil here. I might end up destroying this building,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°Oh, right. Here¡¯s your soil,¡± I said as I opened a portal to the outside.


    Ka, collected the soil with her wand and use them to bind the boy¡¯s legs. This way, the boy won¡¯t be able to escape. Even if he¡¯s strong, he¡¯s not strong enough to remove the bind of an expert level mage with force.


    ¡°I think it¡¯s okay to reattach his arms now as long as you bind his arms as well,¡± I said.


    And so, with my instruction, only the surgeons from Varadis performed the surgery to reattach the boy¡¯s limbs. By the way, old man Henry is one of the surgeons. He¡¯s in fact one of the best doctors in this country. Is that the requirement to be the king? I don¡¯t think that¡¯s all.


    The boy¡¯s surgery was done well as well. We just need to see if he can move them. though that would be scary, so at least we will do itter.


    ¡°Now, what to do with the boy?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I have some ideas. But for now, inhuman as it is, I will try as many things as possible to at least make sure the brainwashed artificial master level mages to not be able to fight us,¡± Marie said.


    ¡°Yes. I also have some ideas as well. Good thing you brought the kid. There¡¯s something different I want to try on them that won¡¯t be effective to adult. Roy, aren¡¯t you busy? You should go back soon,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°You¡¯re right. Sophie, Ka, what will you do?¡± I asked the two.


    ¡°We¡¯ll return with you,¡± Sophie replied, and Ka nodded.


    ¡°Okay. If the boy proves to be too strong and can somehow escape Ka¡¯s binding, contact me right away. See youter,¡± I said as I used portal to go back to near the capital of Consenza.


    As for Sophie, I returned her to where she was before. Back at the inn taking care of the children. Since Lina was there as well, I can take Sophie with me.


    ¡°I¡¯ll go back to the sewer and return back to the capital through there. What about you?¡± I asked Ka.


    ¡°I¡¯ll go meet up with Jewel. We took a request together,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°Okay. See youter,¡± I Said as I leave.


    I entered the underground meeting room again through the door I entered before, and traced back to the capital. Since I entered with permission from the guards who watched the sewer, it will be suspicious if Ie out and return to the capital from somewhere else.


    I returned to the capital and greeted the guards before going to the hunter guild.


    ¡°Here¡¯s the subjugation proofs. Rat¡¯s tails. There are more than thirty. There really is no one else taking the quest, huh?¡± I said to the receptionist.


    ¡°Not only the sewer rats are weak. The sewer is smelly as well. That¡¯s why no one wants to go there. But why are you not smelly?¡± the receptionist asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m an air mage. The bad smell is from the air in the sewer. Since I can protect myself with Air Barrier, I won¡¯t get the bad smell. Unless I swam in the sewer, which I did not do,¡± I said jokingly.


    ¡°I see. Air mages can do that, huh? I heard that there¡¯s an awesome air mage from Tatrama who will participate in the tournament. I think from now on, the people will know how important air mages are,¡± the receptionist said.


    She¡¯s good. She¡¯s smart enough to realize that. In the future, I think she could be a good guild leader.


    ¡°Though in the end, I still came from the sewer. I need to take a bath first. Can I get the reward now?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Oh, right. Here¡¯s your reward. There are some bonuses because you subjugated more than the what¡¯s needed. Thank you forpleting the job.¡±


    After that, I find an inn with a bath. I don¡¯t want to sleep while being wrapped by tentacles anymore.


    After taking a bath, I reported what I found to Lynn and udia. Celestine and Sara were there too as they have finished exploring the sewer.


    With the map I gave her previously, Lynn will order the guards to increase the security in the sewer. I think there won¡¯t be anymore sewer rats request on the guild for a while.

 Chapter 493

    Chapter 493: The Cult is Recruiting Criminals


    Today is a quiet day.


    There¡¯s nothing of importance today. Even though I had a difficult battle just yesterday.


    Yesterday, I found hidden rooms in the sewer. And then, I fought the cult members. Those two things are something that I already think of as natural, so they are not a big problem for me. The biggest problem was after that.


    I fought an artificial master level mage that I must not kill. A young boy barely in his teen.


    I even got my left arm severed. It has been reattached back. And there¡¯s no wound at all. No scars either. And I captured the boy.


    If I didn¡¯t have the element of surprise and didn¡¯t severe his right arm at the beginning of the fight, I would have lost my life. Well, maybe not. But I will end up having no choice but to kill the boy, which I¡¯d like to avoid as much as possible.


    And now, the boy is being researched. Marie, Victoria, and other people in Varadis will experiment on the boy so they can test what they invented. From what I heard from Victoria yesterday, it seems like they are nning on making something that will erase the brainwashing. And that¡¯s good enough to stop them from fighting.


    .....


    The tournament is getting closer, and the big war will happen soon. Since the boy came from Arturo, we can say that they wille from over there. Or at least the highest number of enemies wille from there. There might be other cult membersing from other location, but the number will be less since Arturo has been almostpletely taken over by the cult.


    As for Harold himself, I haven¡¯t heard anything from him. But from what Sonia told me, everything in Lenko is going fine. And they don¡¯t need my help. I guess that ce will be taken over by Harold soon.


    As for his children, other than Fabio who is helping Harold and Carmen in Lenko, they are all preparing themselves to attack the capital of Arturo soon. Or maybe they are already leaving by this time. They will attack as soon as I see the fake king in the capital of Consenza.


    The fake king wille here with powerful guards. That¡¯s obvious. Which mean, the defense of the capital will be at its lowest when the fake king is here. There must still be some people, but the strongest one wille here for their big n.


    Toni himself, the one who chose to stay in the den of the enemy, was asked if he¡¯d like to visit Consenza. But he uses logical reasoning to keep staying in the capital. I heard that he made an excuse saying that the king¡¯s job must be done even when the king is away, and he¡¯s the one doing them.


    Well, he will be an amazing ally when Harold and the others attack the capital of Arturo. That¡¯s why I can¡¯t leave this ce before I see the fake king is here.


    I can juste and go from Cassau back to here with portal, but I don¡¯t know when they will arrive. That¡¯s why I choose to stay at an inn here.


    And today, nothing happened. Should I visit that Lenko city and help Harold? But like I said before, I can¡¯t just leave here.


    As for the cult members here, they are being very secretive. I hadn¡¯t seen any single person with explosive device in their mouth. And I¡¯m toozy to go to the guild and take a request.


    I can¡¯t y with the children. Because once I see something is wrong, and the children noticed it from my reaction, they will be full of worry.


    And that¡¯s why I¡¯m sitting alone in the audience seat in the Arena. Doing nothing.


    It¡¯s a pain to keep watch in the busy capital. And this Arena is quite far from the capital, which makes it a perfect location to rx. I can also see one entrance to the capital from here. And that entrance is supposed to be the one that the fake Arturo King will enter through if he¡¯s travelling through the normal route. I have heard the news from Toni that he has left Arturo.


    As for the cult members in Consenza without explosive device in their mouth, I can only hope that some of them will do something suspicious so I can tell that they are from the cult. I¡¯ll just take a walk around the capital and see those cultists¡¯ reaction.


    Maybe I will start bounty hunting again while looking for the cult members? Well, I¡¯ll do thatter. I¡¯ll just enjoy cloud watching from the Arena for a while.


    I don¡¯t expect that I can spend two whole hours watching the cloud. I guess that¡¯s already long enough. Let¡¯s go back to the capital and start bounty hunting.


    Hmm... I see that in the restaurant, there¡¯s a woman with a bounty in her head, talking to two other people. From what I heard in the underground meeting room; the cult is trying to recruit even criminals with bounty in their heads. If my guess is right, the two people are cult members who are trying to recruit the woman.


    Well, let¡¯s enter the restaurant and eat like a customer would while eavesdrop on them. Good thing there¡¯s a good seat close to them. With my enhanced hearing since I became an Aura user, I should be able to hear their conversation.


    I enter the restaurant, take a seat close to the three¡¯s table, and order some meals. While waiting for the meal, I listened to the three people¡¯s conversation.


    ¡°...so, that shop is a good target. It doesn¡¯t have good security. Although it looks shabby, we should be able to get something,¡± the woman said.


    ¡°I see! As expected of our big sister! Let¡¯s go there tonight!¡±


    Seems like they are currently nning on stealing something. It¡¯s not about recruiting her. I guess I was wrong. Well, I can still get something from capturing her.


    For captured criminals with bounties in their heads, we can bring them to the guards or to the guild to be examined. And we can then get a reward right away.


    It¡¯s quite difficult since there are many people aiming for the bounty. Even now, I can see some two people aiming for the woman. And the two of them have Hunter Cards in their pocket. Which mean they are hunters. Though I can¡¯t tell if they are cult members or not.


    I¡¯ll just watch them for now.


    As the meal I ordered arrives, the three leaves the restaurant. And the two who were stalking them leave soon after. I just looked at them from the restaurant with my Divine Vision while I still eat.


    The three who leave first entered an empty alley as they realized they are being followed. And then, one of the guys following them tries to capture them. A fight happens in the middle of the city.


    Finally, the other guy arrives. And he didn¡¯t help the other guy capturing the woman and her friends. Instead, he killed the bounty hunter with powerful magic. Expert level magic.


    I finally find one expert level mage from the cult.


    Now that I have finished my meal, I leave the restaurant and go to where they are in the empty alley. From what I saw, the magic he used on the bounty hunter is a fire magic. At least he doesn¡¯t have the detection skill of earth mage or wind mage who can detect presence by the vibration on the ground or from the wind.


    ¡°How about it? Would you like to join us? We can give you everything,¡± the expert level mage said.


    ¡°You think we can trust you?¡± the woman asked.


    ¡°I can tell you this. If you decided to join us, we will help you in any way possible so you can reach expert level. What do you think?¡±


    I¡¯m right! He¡¯s from the cult, and he¡¯s trying to recruit the woman. Now, what should I do? I can just kill them all here, or I could stalk him and find where the others are hiding.


    The answer is obvious. Killing more of them is better than killing just one. I¡¯ll stalk him for now.


    Oh, seems like one of the woman¡¯s subordinate refused his offer. And he just killed him without hesitation.


    Seeing that, the woman and her other subordinate looked at the man in fear as they agreed to join the cult.


    ¡°Good. Then, since you have agreed to join us, please meet uster tonight at our hiding spot in the forest. We will inform you further of what we¡¯re doing, and how you can get stronger. We have a lot of expert level mages. Maybe you can be one of us in the future? I¡¯ll see youter. Goodbye.¡±


    The man then leaves the alley. It¡¯s good that now I have the location of their hiding spot. Or at least one of them.


    Good thing I didn¡¯t act right away and wait. I guess I¡¯ll ask the others to help me raiding the cult¡¯s hiding spot tonight.

 Chapter 494

    Chapter 494: The Cult¡¯s Hiding Spot


    ¡°The tournament is a few days away, but you¡¯re going to take us on a raid mission tonight?¡±


    As I told the others about the cult¡¯s secret meeting in their hideout in the forestter tonight, Ka asked.


    I¡¯m the one who said that it¡¯s best for them to rest, but I¡¯m also the one assembling everyone toe here.


    Right now, we¡¯re in the pce in the capital of Consenza. We¡¯re in a meeting room arranged by Lynn and udia as I reported what I found.


    Just like the pce in Tatrama, this imperial pce is also filled with people that we can trust. Lynn, udia, and also Celestine have investigated fully about everyone who works here, and those who have the permission toe and go to this pce, to see who we can trust. Even if none of them has the ability like Albert to detect lies, I should believe their effort.


    Still, unless Lynn leaked something stupid like before, I think it¡¯s going to be fine.


    ¡°Kind of. I will go there soon to check the ce. If I see any kids who noticed my presence, I¡¯ll assume that they are artificial master level children. And if that¡¯s the case, the mission will be changed from destroying them to identifying them. And then, we will defeat them one by one when they are separated. It should be easy since we can tell from their hairstyle,¡± I said.


    .....


    ¡°Master! What if they choose to have mohawk as their hairstyle and not because of the experiment to turn them into master level mage!?¡± Jewel asked.


    ¡°They need to be killed as well so that no one will ever think that having a mohawk is a good idea,¡± I said resolutely.


    ¡°No! If you don¡¯t know that they are with the cult or not, don¡¯t kill anyone!¡± Lynn protested.


    But I¡¯m doing it for the sake of the world. What if there¡¯s a child who sees the mohawk and think that they have an amazing hairstyle? If a city is filled with people with mohawk, that would be scary.


    Just imagining it makes me shudders.


    It will be like: Hey, I¡¯m a mohawk. You no mohawk? When will you be a mohawk? How is your mohawk? Where is your mohawk? Why not mohawk?


    ...that will be too scary.


    Maybe if they wear leather jacket and pants, it will suit them. I¡¯ve seen some with mohawk that actually suit them in my past life.


    Wait! Were they from the cult back then? Well, I was too weak, so I can¡¯t tell.


    ¡°So, basically, kill the mohawks. But not all mohawks are bad. Some are bad, so they are allowed to be killed. Some are not bad, so don¡¯t kill them. Is that it?¡± Jewel asked.


    ¡°Oh, you¡¯re getting smarter again every day. That¡¯s amazing!¡± I praised my disciple.


    ¡°Sigh... she¡¯s started to bing more and more like you. I think that would be nightmare,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°Why? Her exnation is easy to understand though?¡± Ang said.


    Now, all eyes are on Ang. Seems like she¡¯s the only one who didn¡¯t realize that Jewel and I are just ying around. It¡¯s scary how she can easily get influenced by other people.


    ¡°...Ang, no matter what, if you are in doubt, trust us. That¡¯s easy to do, right?¡± I said as I put my hands on her shoulders.


    ¡°I don¡¯t get it, but I just need to trust you, right? That¡¯s easy.¡±


    As long as she won¡¯t trust strangers easily, it should be fine.


    ¡°Let¡¯s continue with the n. So, they will have a meeting tonight about recruiting people? And they will be most likely to be criminals? Am I right?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°Probably. I was just thinking of wasting time today by bounty hunting, and identally encountered someone from the cult is recruiting the criminal. Since they are criminals, I don¡¯t think they will have any problem in destroying the capital or harming the innocents. That¡¯s why the cult is recruiting criminals. It¡¯s just a guess, though. But I think I¡¯m right,¡± I said.


    ¡°If that¡¯s the case, then not just the criminals. The people who are dissatisfied about the Empire will dly join the cult if they are recruited. Even if they are just weak mages,¡± udia said.


    ¡°I think you¡¯re right. Well, I¡¯ll go visit their hideout right away. As for you guys, I think it¡¯s best if you stay here and ask udia if there are any people or group that she thinks are dissatisfied with the Empire. You can watch them closelyter. Once the cult members approaching the hideout, I will open a portal here. Those who wants toe can stay hereter tonight,¡± I said.


    After we finished discussing on what to do, I left the pce from the window and run directly to the forest where the cult is hiding.


    Since I have killed and captured those who were going to the underground meeting room, there might be a slight disturbance in the cult¡¯s hiding spot. Since I heard that they are going to recruit someone, but that recruiter won¡¯t be able to attend, the rest members of the cult who will be attending the meeting tonight will be confused at first for the absences of several important people.


    Well, I can use that to my advantage. What¡¯s important is to see that there aren¡¯t any kids in the meeting tonight. I hope the kid I captured and bring to Varadis is the only kid who is already here at the capital. The rest, they won¡¯t being until the cult¡¯s n started.


    So far, from what we found, we know that the cult will attack Consenza with a huge army. It¡¯s because we gathered all the kings and powerful figures in one ce. The cult won¡¯t let go of this chance.


    I don¡¯t know why they didn¡¯t attack the kings when the four kings had a meeting where they realize that the Harold at that time was a fake. Probably because they don¡¯t think that Albert and the others won¡¯t be a nuisance in their n as they are confident that they can take over each country one at a time.


    But now that they realize it would prove to be difficult, they will attack the kings at once when they are in one ce, while also taking care of powerful mages who wille. Probably, they are also trying to recruit those powerful mages.


    Not only the participants from each country. The guards of the kings will be approached as well. Also, there will be a lot of famous A or S ranked hunters who want to watch the tournament and wille to see who is crowned as the strongest.


    If the tournament progressing normally, I have no doubt that Ang will be the one crowned as the strongest even if it¡¯s a team battle. She will have a lot of trouble in the future as the strongest, but for her, it will be a good way to train as well.


    For an A or S ranked hunter, reputation is important. Being dubbed as the strongest should be their goal. Maybe I¡¯ll ask Albert to make a tournament where everyone is free to enter in the future. Well, I¡¯ll think of itter. We need to stop the cult from killing Albert and the others.


    I finally reached the forest, but I don¡¯t see any ce where the cult should be hiding. I should have followed that woman to this ce.


    It¡¯s already dark and the gate is closed. Which means, anyone who is walking around near this forest is suspicious. Let¡¯s find someone and follow them.


    After looking around, I finally found a group of suspicious people. They are not the woman or the man that I saw before. But as they are suspicious, so I followed them. If I¡¯m right, they are going to the hideout.


    I followed them quietly as I use Divine Vision to see the surrounding area. Seems like the ce they are going is quite far. And they can¡¯t run since it¡¯s dark.


    Oh, I can see a light source over there. Is that where these guys are going? Let¡¯s check it out.


    As I get closer to the source of the light, I see many people are gathering there. Some have explosive devices in their mouth, some don¡¯t. And as I am bringing the wanted poster with me, I can see that there are many people with bounty in their heads.


    The woman I saw at the capital today is here as well. I¡¯m right. this ce is where the cult is gathering. But it seems like the event hasn¡¯t started yet.


    Is there a kid in this ce? Let¡¯s see... so far so good. At least those who havee here are not children. I guess that¡¯s to be expected since no one is willing to join an organization in which a child younger than them is their boss. They are mostly criminals after all.


    Well, now that we know there¡¯s no children, let¡¯s kill them all. And maybe capture some, but that¡¯s not important at the moment. Killing them is much easier.

 Chapter 495

    Chapter 495: Raiding the Cult¡¯s Hiding Spot


    There are no children here. Some of the people have explosive device in their mouth, but some don¡¯t. But I still should assume that all of the cult members are expert level mages.


    Other then those from the cult, there are some people I recognize from their wanted posters. As expected, the cult is trying to recruit criminals. I won¡¯t have any problem with killing them all.


    And since udia didn¡¯t tell me that there¡¯s a spy among them, I won¡¯t have to worry about killing our own in this ce.


    Now, should I call the others right away? Or should I wait until whatever event they are in gathering people to this ce is happening? In any case, it¡¯s good that so many enemies are gathering here.


    I need to make sure that not a single enemy escaped. Good thing there¡¯s not a single mohawk among them.


    For now, I will keep my distance so I can use portal without being seen. I¡¯ll just ask the girls and the werewolves to help. That should be more than enough.


    First, I opened a portal to Lynn¡¯s location. That¡¯s where I told the girls to gather. Only those who want to participate. And I see all of them are here.


    .....


    ¡°You¡¯re all here? Well, doesn¡¯t matter. Just put on your mask so you won¡¯t be seen,¡± I said.


    ¡°How many enemies we¡¯re facing?¡± Ka asked as she walked through the portal.


    ¡°I see about a hundred of them. That¡¯s quite a lot. Let¡¯s assume that all the enemies are expert level mages. Other than that, there are many criminals with bounty for their heads. No children. We can kill them all,¡± I said.


    ¡°What about artificial master level mages? Do you see any?¡± Ka asked again as everyone has entered the portal.


    ¡°Nope. I didn¡¯t see a single mohawk among them. And none of those who have gathered there noticed me looking at them. Though I don¡¯t know if there will be someone elseing or not. Whatever event they are having, it hasn¡¯t started yet. Oh, wait. I¡¯m seeing something,¡± I said.


    Back to where the criminals and the cult members are gathering, I can see some of them are having a spat. And they are all those with bounty in their heads. Criminals. I guess that¡¯s to be expected since it¡¯s a gathering of criminals.


    ¡°They are having an argument. Though it won¡¯t be a surprise if they started fighting since they are criminals. Other than the expert level cult members, the other should be easy to kill. I¡¯ll go call the werewolves to help making sure that no one escapes from there,¡± I said.


    I opened the portal to Shelia¡¯s location. Good thing she¡¯s with the other werewolves at the moment.


    ¡°Shelia, go get around thirty werewolves and enter the portal. I will exin it after you¡¯re all here,¡± I said.


    Shelia then go away looking for other werewolves, while five other werewolves who were there with her entered the portal right away.


    Shelia then entered the portal leading about forty werewolves.


    ¡°...I said thirty, but you got forty? Combined with the previous werewolves, we already have forty-six werewolves including you. Well, whatever. That¡¯s fine,¡± I said.


    And then, I pointed my finger to where the cult members are gathering.


    ¡°Over there, the cult members are gathering criminals to recruit them to the cult. There are about a hundred of them, but there will probably moreing. I want Shelia and the werewolves to make sure that no one escapes from here. And if any of you werewolves can track the smell of someoneing, go and kill them as well. There shouldn¡¯t be any children, so it¡¯s fine to kill them all,¡± I said.


    ¡°Roy, don¡¯t you think that our number is too little to fight? They have a hundred,¡± Veronica asked.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. Many of the enemies are criminals who hate each other. There won¡¯t be any cooperation among them. And even the weakest among us could defeat any average expert level mage. We have enough number to kill them since they don¡¯t have any artificial master level mage here. But if any of you see a mohawk approaching, stall for time as long as possible. Other than Ang and I, no one should approach them one on one. You must fight in a group. Got it?¡±


    Everyone nodded with serious expression. Though the werewolves look happy. I guess they just can¡¯t wait to have an action.


    ¡°Good. The enemy is having an in-fighting because of the criminals gathered there. It¡¯s a good time for a surprise attack. Let¡¯s go!¡±


    After my signal, everyone dispersed. None of them attacked the enemy straight. They surrounded the ce first even without my order. That¡¯s just how capable they are now.


    As for me, I will go right to the center of the enemies and start causing ruckus.


    Though I didn¡¯t run straight forward to the location. I run to the sky, and as I reached right above the hideout, I stopped running and let gravity pull me to the ground. I¡¯m freefalling right to the middle of the enemies.


    The enemies started fighting among themselves. But the cult members don¡¯t pay it any mind. Even if they kill each other, it doesn¡¯t matter to them. They are just recruiting them. and if they died because of a dispute, for the cult, it¡¯s just another weakling who won¡¯t be able to join them.


    Just like back then. When I was just returned back in time, and stumbled upon the cult¡¯s recruitment.


    The cult let the new recruits to fight monsters to death. And only those who survive will join them. But none of them seeded since I killed not only the new recruits, but also the monsters as well.


    But this time is different.


    Back then, in Melk, the enemies are weak. They are probably advanced level mages at most. But I managed to kill them all. And now, the cult members have expert level mages with them.


    Unlike before, it¡¯s impossible for me alone to fight them all. But unlike before, I¡¯m not alone.


    And that¡¯s how I will defeat all of them.


    Back when I gathered everyone nearby, I used air magic to protect themselves from what I will be doing. Spreading dangerous gases that will create chaos. The infuriating gas that will make them angry and attack each other. Well, they are doing it now. But I will still use it.


    ¡°Someone ising! From above!¡±


    Someone notices me because I didn¡¯t intend to hide myself. And as the enemy started attacking me with Fireball, I stepped on the air to make my fall faster. And that¡¯s how I easily dodged their magic.


    As Ind on top of someone¡¯s head and killing him instantly, I used infuriating gas to make everyone lose their cool. Though I might not need to use it on the fighting criminals, but they seem to have stopped after they saw me easily kill someone.


    ¡°Who the hell are you!?¡±


    Why should I answer? There¡¯s no one who will retort to my joke. Victoria is still busy after all.


    I swung Reizpear and killed two more people. I can see that everyone is charging in and ready to fight. Though since I¡¯m the focus of the strongest people here, the expert level mages, the others might only get to fight the weaker ones.


    For now, I¡¯ll go and find those who don¡¯t get affected by my infuriating gas. They should be expert level mages that should be killed immediately. As for the others, they should be weaker.


    I found two of them standing in a row, so I threw Reizpear straight at them. it also pierced another man behind them.


    ¡°He¡¯s armless now! Kill him!¡±


    Am I? I have Blobbykatana in my hand though? Well, no one would ever imagine that I¡¯m using a sword to fight against a group of dangerous mages.


    The cult members are already organized, but the criminals are still in shock. And they easily inhaled the infuriating gas, which makes them angry and they started casting various magic at me. They don¡¯t care if their magic would hit other people.


    The cult members who didn¡¯t get much effect from the gas, couldn¡¯t prepare themselves as they got hit by the stray magic while I casually dodged those easy to predict magic. And I shed my Blobbykatana toward the cult members, while moving toward where my Reizpear is. Still stuck in the body of the men I pierced through.


    I can¡¯t use a gun since Victoria isn¡¯t here. I would just waste the Blobbies that I have since I can¡¯t have the Blobbybullets disappear without Victoria¡¯s help. That¡¯s why I will use Reizpear and other melee weapons.


    Some of the criminals who sensed something is wrong in the center of the hideout started to retreat. But they don¡¯t know that werewolves are going to bite them to their deaths. No one knows.


    While I¡¯m busy moving around, dodging the enemies¡¯ magic while killing them, Ang could easily defeat several of them in one go. I think it won¡¯t take long until everything is over.

 Chapter 496

    Chapter 496: I¡¯m the Drillman!


    Even though the enemy outnumber us, they are not organized enough to defend against us. That¡¯s why the battle is supposed to be easy.


    But I was wrong.


    There are many people who are criminals, and they are easy to kill. But among the cult members, there are some group of expert level mages, who have extraordinary coordination. And they are giving a lot of trouble to the werewolves. I need to back them up quickly, but I¡¯m still busy since I¡¯m right in the middle of the enemies. I can only have faith with the others.


    ¡°This... don¡¯t tell me, you¡¯re an Aura user!?¡±


    What!? Someone noticed that I¡¯m an Aura user?


    ¡°What is it? What is Aura user?¡± Another person asked.


    You don¡¯t need to know. We¡¯re in the middle of a battle, and you need to die since you know that I¡¯m an Aura user.


    .....


    ¡°It¡¯s from a children fairy tale that I read a long time ago. It¡¯s about someone who fight not with magic, but using something else, which is called Aura. I never thought that story is real. There¡¯s an Aura user here!¡±


    ...from the look of it, he¡¯s a fanboy. As a reward, I will kill him using Aura.


    I too, called it Aura at first because of the story I read in the past. I guess it¡¯s normal for those who read the same story to call me Aura user when they see me fighting with weapon.


    Hmm... In the future, any enemy who has seen me fight must be killed. Good thing I did well so far. And I will continue doing so. It¡¯s so that they won¡¯t be able to give report about me being an Aura user.


    Still, he was quite loud. There are a lot of people here who heard him shouting that I¡¯m an Aura user. I should have locked the air around him so his voice won¡¯t be heard after he first noticed that I¡¯m an Aura user.


    I ignore everyone, and use Blobbykatana to kill him and the enemies nearby. And I also didn¡¯t forget to watch other people¡¯s reaction when they heard that I¡¯m an Aura user. If by any chance, some of them have high authority and knows that the Evil God had a beef with Aura users, and he somehow managed to report back to the cult about me, I will be in danger. Not just me. Everyone I know will also be in danger. I can¡¯t have that.


    I was right. Some of the cult members nearby have some reaction when they heard that I¡¯m an Aura user, and they tried to escape as fast as possible. Unlike other cult members I faced in the past, these guys choose to escape without hesitation.


    Usually, the cult members whom I fight will only escape after fighting a bit longer. Until they realize that I¡¯m too strong for them. Which is different for these guys who escaped as soon as possible.


    But the fact that they didn¡¯t know that I¡¯m an Aura user right away, means that they had never read the same fairy tale that I and the shouting guy read. I guess it wasn¡¯t a popr story.


    Let¡¯s see... four people escaping. Two men, and two women. None of them are wind mage, so the werewolves should be enough to catch up with them. But I need to be sure, so I have to be the one killing them myself. Only their deaths can calm me down. Also calming gas as well. That thing is too effective.


    Alright, let¡¯s take killing those four as my main objective tonight. None of them are very fast, so they should be easy to kill. And while chasing them, I can kill those in the way as well.


    Oh, other people started to use wind magic to fly. But they are easily stopped by Ang, Shirley, and Veronica. Wendy who is also an expert level in her wind element, is staying on the ground to fight instead. But I won¡¯t care for them for now. My main objective at the moment is those four.


    Previously, I said that I can¡¯t use Blobbybullets. But as long as the bullets aren¡¯t made of Blobbies, it should be fine to shoot the enemies.


    And so, I grabbed some stones on the ground, and use them as bullets. The sizes are different, but I can just adjust the shape of the gun.


    And to make the chase easier, I take my first two shots at the two who run the fastest. The two men. And they got hit.


    One got hit on the back and made a hole through his heart and killing him. The other got hit in his thigh. He falls on the ground, and one of the two escaping women stomped on him while they running away.


    I chased the women, while stabbing the man on the ground with Reizpear I have retrieved back. Killing him instantly.


    When I was about to shoot at the two women, they ran even faster while using earth magic to protect themselves. I guess the reason they are running behind the men is not because they are slow. But because they can protect everyone with their magic. But they were toote as they didn¡¯t expect that I will shoot them. I should have killed the women first.


    The women raised Earth Wall while escaping. But they are not strengthened since they didn¡¯t focus on the magic. They are only focusing on escaping. So. even if it¡¯s a magic from two expert level mages, I can just breakthrough the wall easily by mming my shoulder on the wall.


    And as I broke through the wall, the two disappear!


    Well, not really. They think that they are smart that they chose to escape through underground.


    Well, they are smart indeed. None of them would have expected that I can see through objects. I have been following them with my eyes, so I know where they are. Still, they escaped underground while covering the hole they entered with magic. It will be difficult chasing after them.


    But I continue chasing after them. They didn¡¯t run deep enough. Just about two meters under the ground. And since I don¡¯t want them to notice me following them by the vibration on the ground, I used Air Steps to run on air. Just one meter above the ground. It should be enough to trick them to think that I stopped chasing after them.


    By this time, We¡¯re already away from the center of the cult¡¯s hideout. Well, I can leave everything to the others. I will continue chasing these two.


    Now, how do I kill people hiding underground? My attack is powerful enough to reach there, but the enemy is still expert level mages. Once my attack hit the ground, they would notice me attacking and use magic to stop me.


    But I can¡¯t just stop here and let them escape. So, I used Blobbies and transform them to a drill. As huge as possible, with the amount of Blobbies I have in hand. The result, it became a drill big enough for me to enter the hole I made with it.


    The two women seems to keep moving in a straight line, so I run faster ahead of them. And when I was about several meters ahead of them, I moved and drilled through the ground by spinning the Blobbydrill in my hand. The two women were shocked that they suddenly sensed me again.


    By the time they stopped running, my drill is right in front of them. I changed the drill trajectory toward the women, and running toward them. With the drill spinning this fast, just one hit and they would die.


    In this situation, one of the women grabbed the other and threw her toward the drill as she escaped even deeper underground. As expected, the cult is cruel toward themselves. Well, no mercy to them. So, I just drilled through the woman that was used as a shield, and then I continue chasing after the other woman.


    This is a story of how a woman is screaming while being chased by a man with a drill underground, which is totally weird even for a horror story. But this is not a horror story. The woman is indeed being chased by a drill. And I¡¯m the man with the drill. I¡¯m the Drillman!


    As she¡¯s shouting underground, there¡¯s no way her voice could be heard by someone above. I ignored her scream as I continue chasing after the woman. Somehow, it ended quite ridiculous as the woman died easily. She could have used earth magic as we¡¯re underground, but she didn¡¯t do it. She has all the advantage to kill me, but she was too scared.


    Sigh... if only Victoria is here, she could have said something interesting.


    I guess it¡¯s fine as long as the job is done. Let¡¯s go back to the cult¡¯s hideout again, and kill the rest of the enemies. The group with excellent coordination is still there. Even with the werewolves¡¯ regeneration skill, they are still in trouble. I will go help them first.

 Chapter 497

    Chapter 497: Destroying the Enemies¡¯ Teamwork


    I approached the werewolves who had some difficulties fighting the coordinated cult members. Shelia and Jack are there, but it seems like it will take some time until they can defeat the cult members.


    As for the others, seeing that this group is difficult to handle, they leave and choose to fight other people first. Reducing their number as much as possible.


    They can leave things here to the werewolves because the werewolves have some experiences fighting against expert level mages. And no offensive magic those mages can use can kill the werewolves in one hit. Especially with the werewolves¡¯ regeneration skill. They can heal themselves as long as they have stamina. And it will take a lot of time for them to exhaust their stamina.


    Which mean it could be a long battle. Unless someone help them.


    The others are fighting other cult members and criminals in this ce. That means they won¡¯t be able to help. But I can help now that I have killed those four who were escaping. That¡¯s why I¡¯m going to support the werewolves.


    The coordinated cult members are five people. I¡¯m watching them from afar to see what they can do. Seems like each one of them has different element.


    One man can use fire magic. Fireman.


    .....


    Another man used ice magic. Iceman.


    An old man used wind magic. Wind Oldman.


    A woman used earth magic. Earthwoman.


    Finally, a woman with lightning element. Lightning Woman.


    Good. Now, it¡¯s easy for me to tell who is who after giving them nickname. Simple nickname which I will call other people as well in the future.


    As for the werewolves, there are ten of them. Five werewolves led by Shelia, and another five led by Jack. As for the other werewolves, they are fighting other people. But despite having ten of them, they are unable to defeat those five mages.


    The simplest n to defeat them is to destroy their coordination. The difficult part is how.


    They are protecting each other. Unlike any cult members I previously fought. People who would sacrifice their own allies to do anything.


    I think it¡¯s best to just kill one person first. For now, the Earthwoman. It¡¯s because of her powerful defensive magic. The Iceman also has powerful defensive magic, but ice magic is more bnced in offensive and defensive magic, while earth magic is more focused on defensive. That¡¯s why defeating the Earthwomanes first.


    Now, for the n. I approached Shelia and Jack. These two werewolves are the only werewolves who can defeat expert level mages in a one on one situation. I know what Shelia can do, and Jack is the second strongest werewolves. He should be able to defeat one.


    ¡°Shelia! Jack! Kill the earth mage first! That Earthwoman! Once we do, their defense should be weakened!¡± I said while putting Air Barrier around us so no voice can get out and the enemies won¡¯t be able to hear us.


    ¡°I see. But approaching her is difficult. How should we do that? Attacking from distance is not enough to break her wall,¡± Shelia asked.


    Whenever someone get close to them, those five mages would attack them using magic. That¡¯s why it¡¯s nearly impossible to defeat them.


    If it¡¯s Ang, she alone can defeat all five of them easily. As for me, I am best in fighting an enemy one on one, or by surprise attack. Which is impossible to do now. So, we can only fight them head on. Or we can wait until Ang or other people finished their part. But I don¡¯t want to wait as we don¡¯t know if there will be more peopleing or not.


    ¡°Get behind me. I will transform Blobbies into a huge shield to protect us from their attack. It should be enough for us three to get close to them. as for the other werewolves, let them distract the enemies,¡± I said.


    ¡°Got it. Let¡¯s go, King!¡± Jack shouted.


    There¡¯s no one named King here though. Oh, right. It¡¯s me. I¡¯m his king. I forgot.


    I transformed Blobbies into a huge shield. About the same size as the drill I used before, but I made it thicker for defense.


    And then, with that huge shield in hand, I run toward the Fireman. Not the Earthwoman. It¡¯s because once the other mages see that the Fireman is attacking us, I hope they will not do anything until we get too close to them as they choose to believe the Fireman that he can handle us alone.


    Shelia and Jack are running behind me, hiding behind the shield. They didn¡¯t ask me why I¡¯m charging toward the Fireman. They don¡¯t care as long as we can get closer. I have told them the target is the Earthwoman, so as long as we can get closer, the two will target the Earthwoman instead.


    I was right that the Fireman starts attacking us while the other mages are busy with other werewolves. He used Fire Spears to attack the shield. But the shield won¡¯t be prated easily.


    Not only it¡¯s because the shield is thick, but also because I put Air Barrier in front of the shield. It¡¯s impossible for my barrier to protect us from magic, but if it¡¯s fire magic, I can use non-mmable gas for the Air Barrier to extinguish the fire.


    Although the fire magic is stronger than my air magic, the shield can do the rest. This way, the strength of the fire magic will be lessened a lot. This is also the reason why I charged at the Fireman.


    As the one holding the shield, I run at the front. Which means the two werewolves behind me have to adjust their speed. I also can¡¯t use my full speed because I made the shield to be heavy. But this speed should be enough to reach them.


    ¡°Enemiesing! I can¡¯t stop them alone!¡±


    The Fireman informed the other four. And now, all four of them shift their focus to the big shield.


    ¡°If the fire is not enough, I¡¯ll make it bigger with my wind,¡± Wind Oldman said.


    Wind Oldman added wind to make the next Fire Spear stronger. But my shield can still handle it as we get even closer.


    ¡°Even that is not enough? Then, I will use my magic,¡± Lightning Woman said.


    I guess it¡¯s time to split up.


    ¡°Shelia! Jack! On my signal, we will split up! Don¡¯t forget our objective. And even if you can¡¯t reach the objective, at least take someone else down!¡± I said to the two werewolves.


    ¡°Understood,¡± Shelia said.


    I watched the Lightning Woman closely and wait for when her attack wille. Lightning magic is difficult to control. Just like Jewel and Candy told me. It¡¯s because they are the fastest magic. That¡¯s why as long as I know when the magic will be casted, if we can move beforehand, it won¡¯t be a problem. Unless the magic released is an AoE magic.


    But that¡¯s unlikely. I made Shelia and Jack running behind me so they can only target one spot. The shield.


    ¡°Now!¡±


    Just as the Lightning Woman about to cast her magic, I gave the signal to split. And we jumped to the side. Shelia jumped to the right side, while Jack and I jumped to the left.


    I no longer have the shield in my hand. It has changed into a gauntlet for my left hand, while I held the Reizpear with both hands. I restored the spear to its original form after I broke them apart as we jumped to the side.


    No one would expect we dodged the lightning, but they are still experienced mages.


    ¡°Raise the wall!¡± the Iceman shouted.


    They raised an Earth Wall facing toward me and Jack, and Ice Wall facing Shelia. They can¡¯t raise one wall to protect everyone, so they raised two.


    If it¡¯s Ice Wall, Shelia alone should be enough. For Earth Wall, I am enough.


    I thrusted Reizpear to the wall, right to where the Earthwoman is standing. This way, as long as I put Aura and my will to get my attack reach her from afar, I should be able to break the wall and hit the target.


    At the same time that I broke the Earth Wall, Shelia broke the Ice Wall. I guess since they didn¡¯t expect us to be able to get this close, the magic used was weaker than expected.


    My thrust was dodged by the Earthwoman. She didn¡¯t die, but it hits her side. As for Shelia who broke through the Ice Wall, she charged toward the injured Earthwoman and killed her before the other mages can raise other defensive magic.


    Now, the target is down. But It¡¯s not over as Jack has now entered through the hole in the wall that I made.


    Seeing that the target is down, Jack changed his target to another mage. The Wind Oldman. I guess he¡¯s smart enough to not let the one who can fly to escape.


    We killed two of them in one go. Three more, but the fight will be easier now.

 Chapter 498

    Chapter 498: More Iing


    Two out of the five well-coordinated mages have been defeated. There¡¯s only three more, but I don¡¯t need to help. Still, if there¡¯s a chance, I won¡¯t miss it.


    Only the ice mage, fire mage, and lightning mage left. Their defense should be easy for the werewolves to break.


    Maybe I should help them by killing the Lightning Woman first. She has the most firepower.


    While those three are in shock when they see two of them got defeated, I threw Reizpear at the Lightning Woman and killed her. Leaving the Fireman and Iceman left.


    I approached the Lightning Woman¡¯s body to retrieve Reizpear, and left this area. Only two more. There¡¯s no need for so many of us to be here. And so, I left this ce and do other things. Watching the enemies and my friends fighting.


    I will watch and see as much as possible. Are we winning? How many casualties? And also, to see if the bodies lying on the ground are truly dead or not.


    Right now, the enemy no longer has the advantage in number. We have killed half of them. I don¡¯t think the others will need my help, but I will still watch the battlefield.


    .....


    Oh? Seems like Jewel has reached expert level in her lightning element. She defeated another expert level lightning mage on her own. Jewel also didn¡¯t use her Beastform magic.


    Well, if she did, everyone will know her identity. After all, there¡¯s no other Beastform mage who would pick a rhinoceros as their transformation. Unless they awakened their Beastform element some time after watching Jewel fought. I think they will be popr soon.


    Now I started imagining that there¡¯s an army of rhinoceros coated with not just lightning. But also coated in fire, ice, or even flying rhinoceros with wind magic in the war against the cult. That will be hrious.


    I wonder if there will be an army of hippopotamus. That will be even funnier.


    Wait, now is not the time for my imagination to run wild. Now that Jewel has became even stronger, the chance of us losing the fight against the cult will be smaller. Though Jewel and those who participated in the tournament might not participate in the war soon. I will try my best to make sure they won¡¯t get involved and can just focus on the tournament.


    From Consenza, Celestine will participate. She will disguise herself so the cult won¡¯t notice her. though it¡¯s just adjusting the size of her breasts.


    From Varadis, Julia, old man Henry¡¯s daughter, will participate. Those two, and the mages they take with them, will be a great match against Ang and the others. I heard that those two will not hold back. Just what we expect them.


    Though I hope they won¡¯t get injured too much in case the battle still not over yet after the tournament is finished.


    Oh, I found someone ying dead. It¡¯s thepanion of the woman I saw today. Let¡¯s kill him. He must be wondering why this happen while ying dead. He¡¯s just here because his big sister wanted to join the cult so she can be an expert level mage. But that chance will nevere.


    I pity him toe here not by his own will. But the fact that he¡¯s here doesn¡¯t change. He will be killed just like the others here.


    I approached the guy, and he¡¯s visibly shaken. He never thought that he would hear someone walking casually to his location in the middle of a big battle. Seems like he¡¯s just a coward who had no choice but to be a criminal under that criminal woman. Well, he will still be killed.


    I raised my Reizpear with the de pointing down, and pierced the man¡¯s chest from the back.


    ¡°Ugh... Why...?¡±


    ¡°Hmm? Why what?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Why... did this... happen?¡±


    ¡°Why do you think this won¡¯t happen? You decided to ally yourself with a criminal who has a bounty in her head. And you decided to apany her to join the Evil God Cult. Why do you think you won¡¯t be killed?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...This is... the Evil... God... Cult...?¡±


    Or at least that¡¯s what we called it. After Shirley¡¯s speech back in Melk after the Stampede, we somehow get everyone to call the cult as Evil God Cult.


    ¡°Even if you don¡¯t know, you should have known that they are evil. They killed your otherpanion today. You saw it yourself, right? After all, the person who did it killed your ally in front of you. Well, your life will end soon. No more questions. Goodbye.¡±


    I pulled Reizpear out of his back, and the man¡¯s heart no longer beating.


    ...Is there any point to me talking to a dead guy? Maybe it¡¯s because I¡¯m so lonely now. It has been so long since I don¡¯t have Victoria by my side. I wonder if her research will bear fruit?


    I can only put my trust in her and Marie. They should be able to figure something out.


    Now, I need to continue watching the battlefield. There are still some people ying dead. No one noticed that they are still alive. That¡¯s why it¡¯s my job to kill them.


    Oh, there are quite a lot of them ying dead. Most of them are the criminals who are going to be recruited by the cult. But there are some people with explosive devices in their mouth ying dead. They are willing to take their own life, but still choose to y dead? I¡¯ll help them so they won¡¯t be ying anymore. They will die for real.


    I also watched how the others are doing. Seems like there are some who faces quite capable mages. But our side are much more capable. Which mean as long as the enemy is not artificial master level mages or a real master level mage, we can defeat anyone. Though if they put children or innocent people as shields, we won¡¯t be able to fight well. It¡¯s a good thing that Sara and I can snipe from afar. This way, we can target the real enemies even if they took hostages.


    Even now, Sara is sniping the enemies from afar. Using earth magic to hide herself underground, she sniped the enemy one by one. She will be important for the war. Maybe I need to go back to college to see if there¡¯s any talented sniper as well. I¡¯ll ask Sarater.


    As I finished taking care of all those who were ying dead, the others also finished thest remaining enemies. No survivor among the enemies. Only dead bodies.


    Everyone then gathered around me. No casualties at all. Only some small injuries that don¡¯t even need to be healed by Ka. Just some bandages and it will be fine. Though I still tell Ka to heal everyone with Area Heal.


    ¡°Why? They can be healed without my magic,¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°I know. But you will participate in the tournament. Just having a bandage will make the opponents think of them as your weakness. Also, some of the smarter cult members will start guessing why you get injured. Why would someone who participate in the tournament be injured when there¡¯s only weak monsters near the capital? They will start consider that fact with the fact that many cult members have gone missing from the capital. They will start thinking that you are involved with the missing cult members,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s true. I¡¯ll use Area Heal. Everyone, gather together. Though the werewolves don¡¯t have to since they can heal themselves,¡± Ka said.


    Ka used Area Heal and everyone in the area had their injuries healed. Even my fatigue is slowly disappearing. Although I don¡¯t feel much fatigue, it will still add up if I¡¯m not rested.


    ¡°Okay. All the people here have been defeated. Let¡¯s wait here for a while to see if there will be more enemiesing or not. Tell me if you want to go home. I¡¯ll open a portal if you want to,¡± I said.


    None of them want to go home as they started chatting and rxing. Even in the middle of dead bodies. I guess I should take care of the dead bodies first.


    I asked some werewolves to gather all the dead bodies in one ce, and then I opened a portal and drop them all into the ocean. They won¡¯t be missed.


    ¡°Are you sure that you don¡¯t smell anyone escaping?¡± I asked Jack.


    ¡°No, my king. No one escaped. All of them have been killed,¡± Jack said.


    ¡°Alright. Let¡¯s wait here for a while, and if no one sense anyoneing, I will return you. As for me, I will camp here tonight,¡± I said.


    Now, there¡¯s no more dead body. Though the smell of blood is still thick. I only use air magic to block the smell for me and the humans. As for the werewolves, it¡¯s a bad idea to block their sense of smell. Let them suffer!


    Actually, they enjoy the smell of blood. Especially if they are the blood of the enemies they defeated. What a crazy species.


    Just as we were rxing while ying card games, Shelia reacted.


    ¡°Someoneing. Two people. From over there,¡± Shelia said.


    I used Divine Vision to see the location she pointed to, and see two people walking this way. And those two noticed that I¡¯m looking at them.


    I guess the night is not over yet.

 Chapter 499

    Chapter 499: More of Them!?


    I looked to the location Shelia is pointing at with my Divine Vision, and see two people walking this way. They calmly walk in the forest in the middle of the night. That alone is enough to be suspicious of them, but there¡¯s more.


    ¡°Two people iing. A man and a woman. Both have mohawk and they noticed that I¡¯m looking at them,¡± I said to the others.


    ¡°Two artificial master level mages? Are they flying?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°No. They are walking.¡±


    ¡°A man and a woman... at least they are not children, right? Let¡¯s kill them,¡± Celestine said.


    ¡°Obviously, we will kill them. Other than the werewolves who can¡¯t wait to fight, the mages should hide and wait for the right moment to attack. They will still notice you¡¯re here, but they will focus more on me and the werewolves,¡± I said.


    Ka and the other mages went into hiding on top or behind the trees. They won¡¯t attack yet, but they are prepared to raise their defensive magic as quick as possible.


    .....


    The enemies are master level mage. Artificial ones. So, our defense won¡¯t be good enough if they targeted us. But it should be enough to dy their attack from reaching us. Even if it¡¯s just less than a second, it could be life-saving.


    ¡°It¡¯s just two enemies. We can just fight one on one, right?¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°It¡¯s too dangerous. The previous mohawk kid that I fought has two elements. One master level wind element, and he is also an expert level healer. If any one of the enemies is also a healer, it would be difficult. Even worse if both of them are. And since they are walking, we still don¡¯t know what their elements are,¡± I said.


    ¡°But we are werewolves, my king. We are the race of warriors. We want to fight as much as possible,¡± Jack said.


    Right. If I keep telling them to do something they don¡¯t like, they will end up disobeying me in the future. I guess I need to let them have their freedom to fight once in a while.


    ¡°Fine. All of you werewolves will fight one of them. While I will fight the others. As for how you fight your opponent, I don¡¯t care. Whether you want it to be a one on one, or if you want to fight using numbers, I don¡¯t care. Just don¡¯t die, and win,¡± I said.


    Jack and the werewolves smiled happily hearing that. As for Shelia, she didn¡¯t even move from my side. It looks like she doesn¡¯t have the intention to join with the other werewolves.


    ¡°You¡¯re still here?¡± I asked.


    ¡°The other can take care of themselves. I¡¯m your contracted monster. I¡¯ll stay with you unless you want me to leave,¡± Shelia said.


    ¡°Okay. Hey, werewolves! Man or woman? Who will you fight?¡± I asked the werewolves.


    ¡°Which one is stronger?¡± one of the werewolves asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. They hadn¡¯t use magic yet.¡±


    The werewolves then started discussing, and they finally decided on fighting the man. Which mean Shelia and I, along with the others, will target the woman.


    I had Shelia inform Ka and the others before the enemies arrive. They still walk casually in the forest and they don¡¯t seem to be in a hurry.


    I also look around the area in case there will be more enemiesing, but that doesn¡¯t seem to be the case. Just for recruiting members, having two artificial master level mages is already too much. Add the expert level mages, and it¡¯s just too much for recruiting criminals.


    Shelia has returned, and the enemies are already within sight.


    ¡°Hmm? Where are the others?¡± the man asked.


    He must be asking about the other cult members here. Well, they are all killed.


    I was about to answer, but Jack and two other werewolves quickly charged at the man to attack him.


    Three at the same time? I thought it would just be one of them. Well, I will...


    Wait! I was wrong! There are more peopleing! Three more! Making it five mohawks!


    ¡°Three more iing! Fight as you see fit!¡±


    No more need for ns. The enemies are too close. Just the two in front of us can kill many already.


    Now that they heard my warning, the others no longer need to hide and attacked the man and woman in front of us first.


    ¡°I will take care of this man!¡± Jack said.


    ¡°Just don¡¯t die!¡± I said as I run to the sky with Shelia next to me.


    Behind us, Ang is also flying. I need to get Ang to dy one enemy as long as possible.


    ¡°Ang! Go over there and fight the fatty mohawk! He¡¯s alone, so you don¡¯t need to worry about other enemies!¡± I said.


    Ang then turned to the location I pointed to fight the fat mohawk. As for Shelia and I, we will face the oneing here by flying.


    He¡¯s obviously a wind mage. Since I¡¯m afraid of what the cult will know if he escapes, I need to kill him. As for the other mohawks, I don¡¯t think they will be as fast as this guy.


    Let¡¯s hope that he¡¯s just a wind element mage, and doesn¡¯t have other elements. And let¡¯s kill him instantly.


    ¡°Shelia, don¡¯t hold back! Go all out and kill him with one hit!¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay! Should we attack from distance?¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°No. Attack him directly.¡±


    I have fought artificial master level mages several times. And I know one of their weakness. It¡¯s only something that any closebat fighter can do.


    None of the artificial master level mage would expect that we will fight in closebat. No matter how much the Professor has increased their physical strength, none of the mohawks would think that they will be attacked from close range. Unless their enemies are monsters.


    It¡¯s because this is a world of magic. And no one knows that there¡¯s other way to fight without using magic.


    The artificial master level mage would notice using, but they won¡¯t use any defensive magic right away. They prefer to watch and learn of their enemies first.


    And the human enemy they have fought, all of them were mages. They would use magic from distance and they won¡¯t get too close to the enemy. That¡¯s why the mohawks who are confident with their magic don¡¯t need to raise their shield until their enemies started casting their magic.


    Just like right now.


    The man we are facing doesn¡¯t even care that we are approaching as he continues flying toward our direction. He is waiting for us to cast our magic so he can defend himself.


    But he will never sense our magic. Because we won¡¯t use them! I can already use Air Steps without using air magic. Just purely with Aura.


    I only use air magic for breathing right now. And it¡¯s not even an offensive magic. As for Shelia, her magic is just her regeneration magic. Which help her heal herself. That¡¯s why the enemy didn¡¯t react to our appearances at all until we are too close to him.


    As we finally reached within three meters of the mohawk, he finally stopped flying forward and just stay stationary in the air with his magic. But he didn¡¯t use defensive magic. He must be thinking that we are here to ask him something.


    And when Shelia and I are getting even closer, the mohawk finally noticed something wrong since we didn¡¯t stop. I pulled Reizpear back with both hands, and Shelia pulled her arms back.


    We attacked the mohawk together before he could even react. No matter how strong your body is, if you never experience any real fight, it will be useless.


    Both Shelia and I attacked the mohawk diagonally as we made a huge cross scar on his body which killed him instantly. Though I just created one attack with my spear, it was considerably deeper than Shelia¡¯s attack which left ten scars on the mohawk¡¯s chest.


    ¡°That¡¯s one down. Four more to go,¡± I said.


    ¡°What should I do?¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°We will split up here. You will go check on the werewolves, while I go and check the others. As for Ang¡¯s side, leave it forter,¡± I said as we split up in the sky.


    Shelia returned back to where the werewolves are. Now that I didn¡¯t fight the woman with mohawk, all the werewolves are facing two expert level mages at the same time. As long as they didn¡¯t get killed in an instant, it should be fine.


    For now, I will go and check our wind mages¡¯ side. Shirley, Wendy, and Veronica are all there facing a mohawk with fire element.


    Their wind is not strong enough. In fact, the wind got pushed back and made the fire bigger. They need someone from other elements to help them. That¡¯s why I need to support them first.


    As for Ka and the others, they are still on the way. Though Sara already helped the three wind mages with her sniping skill.


    If I¡¯m going there, Ka and the other doesn¡¯t need to help. Let¡¯s have them split up so they can help Ang or the werewolves.

 Chapter 500

    Chapter 500: Boosting Me Forward with Wind


    ¡°Ka! Go help the werewolves or Ang. I¡¯ll help Shirley. The werewolves seem to be facing tough opponents. Two of them. And Ang¡¯s opponent seems to be stronger than average artificial master level mage,¡± I said.


    ¡°Alright. Which way is to Ang, and which way to the werewolves?¡±


    I caught up with Ka and the others who are rushing toward Shirley¡¯s location, and tell them to not chase anymore. And I pointed to where Ang is, and where the werewolves are. For the werewolves, they just need to go back to where they came from.


    ¡°Jewel and I will help Ang. The others can go back to where the werewolves are. How strong are the two enemies the werewolves are facing?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°About the same level as average mohawk. But they are cautious. That¡¯s why the werewolves are having problem,¡± I said.


    Unlike my fight before, the werewolves unable to get too close to the enemies as the enemies already put up their guards before the werewolves reached them. And once the werewolves hit their defense, the two mohawks attacked them with magic.


    Some werewolves got injured, but their regeneration skill healed them fast. Still, if they are not careful, they would die.


    .....


    With Shelia and the others helping them, it should be okay.


    Now, I will go to Shirley¡¯s location. She¡¯s there with the other wind mages, Wendy and Veronica. It¡¯s a good thing the enemy is not a fire mage. But he¡¯s an earth mage. And his defense is most likely impregnable by wind magic of a lower level.


    If I¡¯m not wrong, Shirley¡¯s other element is ice, while Wendy¡¯s other element is fire. But they were all not good enough to break the defense of the enemy. As for Veronica, she doesn¡¯t have other elements. There¡¯s nothing they have that could destroy the enemy¡¯s defense.


    Even Sara¡¯s bullet won¡¯t be enough to pierce his defense. Ka is approaching her currently and told her to go back and help the werewolves.


    I finally see Shirley and the others even without Divine Vision. And they also noticed meing.


    ¡°His element?¡± I asked the three about the enemy they are facing. I hope he just has one element.


    ¡°So far, he only used earth magic. Even our wind magicbined is not enough to destroy his wall,¡± Wendy said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll take care of it. But it seems like I will need to add more speed. Push me with your wind!¡± I said.


    With mymand, the three stopped attacking. And all of them used wind magic to give me a boost as I transformed Blobbies into a drill.


    ¡°UWAAA!! TOO FAAAAST!¡±


    With three expert level wind mages, my speed, even if I don¡¯t move my legs, is already faster than Spot¡¯s max speed. Which is scary. But this might be the only way I can destroy his wall.


    Seems like I don¡¯t even need to spin the drill. I¡¯ll just transform it into a huge pointy shield so I can destroy the wall.


    With this speed, even if I cover my arms with Aura, I will still end up with broken arms. That¡¯s why I changed my posture. From holding the shield in the middle, to holding the shield on the side, while using my feet to step on the middle of the shield. This way, at the moment of impact, in case it¡¯s not enough to break the wall, I will add more power by using a drop kick to add more damage to the wall. I¡¯m more confident with my legs¡¯ strength than my arms.


    I looked at the man inside the Earth Wall, and he¡¯s also looking at me. Though he can¡¯t see through the wall like me, he can still sense something is approaching with high speed. But he doesn¡¯t know what it is. Since it¡¯s not magic.


    Maybe he knows that magic is used, but he doesn¡¯t know what ising. After all, the magic is only used to push me forward as fast as possible.


    It¡¯s finally here. The moment of impact. I need to time it carefully.


    The pointy part of the shield has touched the wall, and it¡¯s still digging in. I need to time it perfectly so the moment my momentum slowed down; I need to kick the shield forward.


    The thickness of the wall is about one meter. If it¡¯s a normal wall, or magic from a lower level earth mage, I can destroy it easily. But this is a master level magic. Even if it¡¯s an artificial one, it is still powerful.


    But thanks to the boost given by our wind mages, I managed to pierce through half of the wall. Now, I just need to kick it once the shield stopped moving forward. But maybe that¡¯s not enough.


    ¡°Push me even more!¡± I shouted. And the three wind mages... no. Two wind mages boosted me. Shirley and Wendy.


    As for Veronica, she¡¯s preparing something. Still, two wind mages giving me a boost while I giving a dropkick to the shield is enough to break through the wall.


    Not just that. The shield not only making an opening, but it continues going forward to the enemy.


    I have let go of the shield after kicking it. But before letting it gopletely, I transformed it into a form that I¡¯m very used to. A spear.


    The shield, now is the spear, is flying toward the enemy. The enemy was shocked to see a shield transformed into a spear as it tries to pierce him. The man quickly raised another wall. This wall is not as strong as the previous wall, but it still managed to stop Blobbyspear.


    The spear is just a few millimeters away from his face as the wall stopped the spear in the middle. Just a little push and I can kill him.


    I run toward the spear about to punched the butt of the spear, but the man is about to step back and dodged it. I¡¯m still too slow.


    The good thing is, Veronica finally used her magic to push the spear even before I reached the spear. Making the spear move forward and stab the enemy before he dodged it. That was nice.


    ¡°Good job, Veronica! Though how did you know that my attack will be stopped?¡± I asked.


    ¡°We fought him first before you came. And he seems to have a lot of experience in fighting. That¡¯s why I thought he would use another wall to stop your attack. If you didn¡¯t transform the shield to a spear in time, we won¡¯t win,¡± Veronica said.


    As expected of someone with the most experience. Even Shirley and Wendy didn¡¯t expect the enemy to put another wall. Still, if it¡¯s only one person who pushed me forward instead of two, we won¡¯t win.


    ¡°Seems like we need to gain more experience. Even from watching, we can gain some experience,¡± Wendy said.


    ¡°That¡¯s something that you have to find on your own. Now that this guy has died, I will go help the werewolves,¡± I said.


    ¡°What about us? Are there any other enemies?¡± Shirley asked me.


    ¡°You cane with me to where the werewolves are, or you can help Ang. Though I don¡¯t think she will need much help, you can gain some experience by watching, right? The werewolves seem to be in trouble even when Celestine and the others helping them. I need to go there as fast as possible. I¡¯ll open a portal to where Sara is so we can get there faster,¡± I said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll go with you. How much trouble do they having?¡± Shirley asked.


    ¡°...Shit. Some of the werewolves are already injured, and their regeneration skill is not enough to heal themselves. I should have gotten Ka over there instead. Let¡¯s go!¡± I said.


    I opened a portal to where Sara is sniping the enemy, and quickly charged to the enemies. Some of the werewolves had their limbs severed and their regeneration skill is not enough. They will die soon.


    The enemies, two mohawks, a man and a woman, are protecting each other¡¯s back. The woman is an ice mage, while the man is a fire mage. And their teamwork is much better than the werewolves who prefer to fight their own way.


    I should have taught the werewolves how to fight together. I¡¯m a failure of a king. Or at least that¡¯s what I thought. For the werewolves, I seem to be a good king since I¡¯m bringing them to many fights.


    The three wind mages fly toward the enemies as well to help. And while we¡¯re moving, two huge Earth Wall appear on the left side and the right side of the enemies. They are Celestine¡¯s magic.


    Celestine then put her hands together as the two Wall approached the enemies to crush them in between them. Everyone thought that the fight will be over, but that¡¯s wrong.


    The woman used ice magic to destroy the wall on the left, while the man used fire magic to destroy the wall on the right. Just like that, the two enemies are still alive.


    But they have fought for so long. Their mana should be depleted soon and they will die.


    I can¡¯t wait for that. There will be more casualties if that happens. That¡¯s why I need to get there fast.

 Chapter 501

    Chapter 501: The Enemy is a Summoner


    I peeked at Ang¡¯s side, and she should be able to defeat her opponent soon with the help of Ka and Jewel as her supports. If she can finish her battle sooner, she will be able to help me here. Though I hope we can defeat the enemies right away before Ang helped us.


    These two mohawks are too strong. Even several expert level mages, Shelia, and the werewolves, are not enough to defeat just two of them.


    The enemies¡¯ magic is just average. I mean average among the artificial master level mages that we fought. Not weak enough to be defeated in an instant, and not strong enough tost long. But their teamwork is dangerous. It¡¯s as if they knew each other even long before they got experimented. They had a good teamwork even before that.


    I guess it¡¯s just like the previous five expert level mages we fought. There will be more enemies with great teamwork that we will have to face. We also need good teamwork.


    But the thing is... I mostly work alone. Even if I gave amand so we can have a teamwork, it¡¯s mainly focused on me being the tank, or made the finishing move. And for the future mission, I will also mostly work alone. That¡¯s why it¡¯s not really teamwork.


    The one who can put everyone to good use is Ka. I should have asked her toe here instead. She¡¯s a good leader.


    Other than Ka, Jewel and Shirley can also lead. Ka is smart from the start. Jewel is my disciple, but she has better vision of the others since she can¡¯t do much alone like I can. As for Shirley, she¡¯s a princess. She was born to lead, and have been taught many things before we met.


    .....


    Next time, I¡¯ll just watch them instead of leading. I¡¯ll make three groups. Each group will be led by one of the three. That will be good for them to learn more about tactics in battle.


    I heard from Albert that there will be a team battle during the tournament. But I think I will miss it, so I won¡¯t know. I¡¯ll just leave it to Ka and the others.


    I¡¯m finally arrive to help the werewolves. Three werewolves are dead already, and two others got fatally injured. Their regeneration skill is not enough to heal them. One of the fatally injured is Jack. I need to stop the bleeding first so when Ka came here, he will be healed.


    Jack has been stabbed by multiple Ice Spears. And the Ice Spears also froze some area around the part that he got stabbed. I quickly pulled out the spears, and sew his body with Blobbythreads. Without Victoria, I can¡¯t waste too much Blobbies. But I need her to be with Marie. At least I need to heal the wound and melt the frozen part before Jack dies of frostbite.


    ¡°Candy, melt the ice with your fire magic. Don¡¯t use big magic so you won¡¯t hurt Jack,¡± I said to Candy.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine if it hurts. The pain will wake me up,¡± Jack said. He¡¯s acting tough.


    ¡°Too much pain will kill you. Your regeneration skill is not enough to heal you. For now, take some rest. Once you¡¯re rested enough, and if we haven¡¯t defeated the enemies yet, you cane back,¡± I said before I run toward the enemies.


    Their teamwork is too good. But I need to be the main focus of the fire mage. It¡¯s because my sh can cut fire. As for ice, I can cut it as well. But it¡¯s a little harder than fire. I need to do something that will defeat the enemies as soon as possible.


    The one with fire magic is the mohawk man. And he¡¯s standing back to back with the woman. From my position right now, he¡¯s on the left. Let¡¯s do it.


    While the enemies are distracted by the werewolves and the others, I need to approach them.


    I raised my right hand, and then pointed it to the right side. The mohawk woman. It¡¯s a signal for Sara to distract the woman with her sniping skill.


    She understood it right away and shoot at the woman while she was distracted. But her Ice Shield is too strong for Sara¡¯s bullet to pierce. Still, that¡¯s enough to distract the woman.


    With this, only the man will pay his attention to me. Though Celestine is helping by keep attacking with her earth magic toward the two.


    The enemies don¡¯t have time to attack us anymore. That¡¯s good.


    The man used Fire Wall to stop the werewolves from getting close, but that¡¯s also my chance. The Fire Wall will reduce his vision. And he won¡¯t be able to sense an attack which is not magic.


    And I thrusted Reizpear forward toward the man. This should be good. My attack can pierce the fire, and hit him if it continues. But seems like that¡¯s not enough. The mohawk man is too used in a battle. Not just magic battle, but his move to dodge my attack is precise as well.


    When my attack hit his Fire Wall, he noticed an attack ising, so he jumped to dodge it. And he didn¡¯t just jump. He also put his hand on the woman¡¯s shoulder as a pivot, and also to inform her of an iing attack. With his grip, he informed the woman to where she needs to move even though he¡¯s in the air. And my attack only hit the ground a bit away from them.


    ¡°Tsk! They are cooperating too well. This won¡¯t be easy.¡±


    Good thing Ang has defeated her opponent. She is flying this way and wille soon. I retreated and hide behind a big rock to open a portal to where Ka and Jewel are. If only Ang can just stay with the two a bit longer, she will be here instantly. She keeps forgetting that I can use portal. But I used it to transport her to this forest from the pce though?


    ¡°Ka, too many injured werewolves. Their regeneration skill is not enough. Go heal them first. Jewel, you don¡¯t need to hide your Beastform. Go all out. They are too strong together. If we can just split them up, we can kill them easily,¡± I said.


    Or so I thought. What happened next is beyond anyone¡¯s imagination.


    The mohawk woman, after seeing that my attack can reach the two, she did something. The enemies don¡¯t know me since the Fire Wall blocked their vision, but they know that someone from that position attacked them and it almost reached them. And she... summoned her monster.


    ¡°Shit! She¡¯s a summoner!? I didn¡¯t expect that at all!¡±


    A summoner, in the cult that tries to go to the moon, where summoned monsters came from. I thought if there are any summoners in the cult, their leader would get them to open a portal to the Monsters World.


    This prove one thing. They really don¡¯t know that summoner can open a portal to Monsters World. Which is good. As long as we destroyed their research on space travel, it¡¯s impossible for them to go to Monsters World.


    The monster that the mohawk woman summoned is not an ordinary monster. It¡¯s a Giant! A gigantic humanoid monster!


    The height of the monster is about ten meters. It has the strength to eliminate all of us with one sweep. Dangerous.


    ¡°A giant? First time I see a giant this small,¡± Jack said as he has been healed by Ka.


    This is still small? Well, I guess Andro¡¯s size is many times biggerpared to this little giant.


    ¡°Tell me more about giant,¡± I said.


    ¡°They are huge and strong. Usually, they are much bigger than this. Maybe this one hasn¡¯t reached adulthood yet. I heard about them from Grandpa. He said that even a young giant has enough strength to destroy an entire settlement. Grandpa said that he witnessed the extinction of a species by the giants,¡± Jack said.


    ¡°How can we defeat it?¡± Candy asked.


    By overpowering the monster?


    Now, what¡¯s the n? At least it¡¯s just ten meters. The height of the trees in the forest is about 15 meters. Which means, the guards in the capital won¡¯t notice about the monster yet. If they noticed, there will be chaos in the capital. And it will be difficult to continue our mission there.


    I guess it¡¯s time to test her leadership.


    ¡°Ka! n!¡±


    ¡°Me?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°You¡¯re better than me at this. What to do?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...target the giant¡¯s legs. Make it falls, and then use magic to kill it. Get the werewolves to aim for the legs. Not all of them. Some will need to distract the giant and the two mages. Celestine and I will also use our magic to target its legs. Roy and Sara will snipe the mages. Ang who wille soon will be the finisher with her powerful magic. The others will do as they see fit,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°Got it. I¡¯ll get Sonia to ry the n to the others,¡± I said as I run to where Sara is.


    I called Sonia, and had her inform the others here about the n. And I arrived at where Sara is to tell her personally about the n.


    ¡°Understand? Keep moving while targeting the enemies. The giant is putting the two mages on its shoulders. Left one is the woman, right one is the man,¡± I said to Sara.


    ¡°I can see them. But do I need keep moving?¡± Sara asked.


    ¡°Yes. A sniper whose position has been known is useless. Or at least that¡¯s what Victoria said. Please make me a lot of bullets before you go,¡± I said.


    With this, I don¡¯t have to waste Blobbies to shoot. Now, let¡¯s fight the giant.

 Chapter 502

    Chapter 502: Fighting the Giant and Two Mohawks


    Sara made me a lot of bullets made of rocks. They are all sharp bullets. Once the bullet hit someone, it will pierce through them.


    Maybe from now on, I need to keep a lot of bullets somewhere where I marked with Blobby so I can grab them when needed. This way, even if Victoria is not with me, I can still use a gun. I¡¯ll ask Sara or the otherster. Just the earth mages. If it¡¯s made of ice, they will melt before I could use them.


    After Sara gave me the bullets, we split up. Sara is not as fast as me, so she only moved a bit distance from where she was, and prepare to snipe the mages on the giant¡¯s shoulder.


    As for me, I still run. I run all the way to the opposite of where Sara is.


    Now, my target. Who will be the first one to die? The mohawk man, or the mohawk woman?


    If the summoner, the mohawk woman dies first, the giant won¡¯t have anyone ordering it. That could be good, but it¡¯s also dangerous at the same time. Well, I¡¯ll just snipe anyone I can. Maybe even the giant¡¯s eyes.


    The bullets I have are sharp, but I don¡¯t know if the power of my bullet is enough to pierce through the giant¡¯s thick muscles and bones. But I will try. If I can¡¯t hit the mages.


    .....


    The two mages seem to be used to standing on the giant¡¯s shoulder. They can bnce themselves there even when the giant is swinging its fist around trying to hit the nearby werewolves.


    If Ka told me that I¡¯m the main attacker in closebat, I would have tried to talk with the giant. But since I¡¯m responsible for sniping, I won¡¯t have the chance to talk.


    I found a good spot on top of a tree, and aimed my Blobbyrifle toward the mages. With this distance, I don¡¯t think the mages¡¯ attack will be effective.


    When I aimed at the mohawk man, he noticed that I¡¯m aiming at him. But I don¡¯t care even if he knows. I will only distract him so the others can take him down.


    I shot once at the mohawk man, but I missed. Not because he dodged. But it¡¯s because the giant is moving.


    The bullet hits the giant¡¯s shoulder, right below where the mohawk man is standing. It only pierced through the giant¡¯s skin, and it doesn¡¯t go any deeper. Blooding out from where the bullet hits, but it¡¯s not fatal. It¡¯s impossible to defeat the giant with it. Unless I can hit him a thousand times.


    The mohawk man creates an Ice Spear, and he¡¯s trying to hit me from afar. That¡¯s impossible unless he has great magic control, which I doubt he has.


    I¡¯m still staying on top of the tree without a care, and continue aiming at the mohawk man. Shirley noticed that the mohawk man is aiming at me, so she attacked the mohawk man at the same time the mohawk man is attacking me.


    His Fire Spear missed far from me. Meanwhile, Shirley¡¯s Wind sh was blocked by the giant¡¯s hand. Seems like the mohawk woman ordered the giant to protect the mohawk man after sensing that he¡¯s attacking me.


    But that gives a chance for Sara to aim for her. Sara used her sniper rifle, which is created by Marie. It has high durability, so Sara canpress the air inside the rifle as much as she can, without having to worry that the rifle will break. On top of her rifle, there¡¯s a scope as well so she can see better. I don¡¯t need one because of Divine Vision.


    The bullet was shot powerfully from the rifle, and it¡¯s flying toward the mohawk woman. It hits her on her left arm. But because of her enhanced physical strength, the bullet didn¡¯t pierce through her arm. Instead, the bullet is stuck inside. If the bullet is coated with poison, she would have been poisoned. But that¡¯s dangerous for the shooter as well, so I¡¯ll pass on that.


    After Sara hits the woman, Sara quickly move to another ce and hide. This is how we fight.


    Sara and I are in safe ce while keep moving. Meanwhile the werewolves are attacking the giant¡¯s legs.


    Seems like some of them can¡¯t follow orders well. They attacked the giant¡¯s head instead. But they can be a distraction, so it¡¯s fine. Though they are blocking my line of sights.


    As for our mages, since Ang arrives, we are on the offense. The giant can¡¯t do anything to the mages as they are too far from it. It can only target the werewolves whoe close. But even the werewolves can attack from distance.


    Seems like the giant has good magic resistance. But that doesn¡¯t mean our attack doesn¡¯t hurt it.


    From time to time, our mages and the werewolves would target the two mages on the giant¡¯s shoulder. But the mohawk woman created Ice Shield to protect herself and the man.


    With this many people on our side, including monsters, just defeating two mages and a monster takes a lot of time. The battle against the cult will be much more difficult.


    Now that I think about it, it seems like in my past life, during the war, I only get picked to fight in the easiest battlefield. Or the cult was underestimating us.


    But now, we have done many things. The cult won¡¯t be stupid to underestimate us anymore. Which means, the battle ahead will be much more dangerous than in my past life.


    Finally, the giant¡¯s right leg got damaged too much and the giant can no longer bnce itself. The giant fell, along with the two mages on its shoulder. It¡¯s time to kill them all.


    While the mohawk man falling, I aimed my rifle toward him, and shot a powerful bullet at him. The bullet hits him in the stomach, and got stuck in his liver. He¡¯s not dead yet, so I shot another bullet to kill him.


    As for the mohawk woman, Sara killed her with a headshot. As expected, she¡¯s a better marksman than me.


    The giant fell on the ground, shaking the ground. All the werewolves attacked the giant¡¯s head, while the mages attacked its chest from above. Wendy and Veronica grabbed Jewel and Candy so they can attack from the sky. As for Shirley and Ang, they can attack the giant themselves. They have other elements that have reached expert level other than wind element.


    Celestine and Ka attacked from below. They pierced the giant¡¯s limbs with Ground Spike so the giant won¡¯t be able to move. And after a barrage of attack, it was finished with Ang¡¯s powerful magic.


    Ang created a ball on her hands made of magic from four elements, and throw it toward the giant. Creating a huge hole on its chest. The giant is finally dead.


    It took so long just to fight three enemies. We must consider that the enemies will have other powerful mages or monsters. Maybe even a fully grown giant. Which should be much bigger than this one.


    If I went with the werewolves, I might be able to quickly hurt the giant and make it fall. But since there are too many werewolves attacking one target, I might end up getting hit from the werewolves, or hitting the werewolves. That must be why Ka told me to snipe from distance.


    After killing the giant, we gathered around the giant to see the corpse. And I will use a huge portal to move its corpse somewhere else.


    The werewolves also gathered the dead bodies. And I opened a huge portal to drop the dead bodies to the sea.


    ¡°This battle was so loud. Even if the guards couldn¡¯t see the giant, the noise we made should reach there,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°I guess it¡¯s time to rest. I¡¯ll bring everyone back, while I¡¯ll be the only one staying here,¡± I said as I opened two portals after moving the giant and the mohawks¡¯ corpses.


    The werewolves entered the portal to Monsters World, while the others returned to the inn instead. Except for Ka and Celestine.


    ¡°You two, where would you like to go?¡± I asked her.


    ¡°We¡¯ll go to the Imperial Pce. I¡¯ll report to Lynn and udia of what happened,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°Do you think they¡¯re still awake at this time?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Anyone would be awake if they heard a loud noise. If you¡¯re staying behind, be careful of not just the cult members who wille, but also the guard who will scout the area,¡± Ka said.


    I opened a portal to Lynn¡¯s location, and see that she¡¯s awake as expected. Her face tells me that she wants to know of what¡¯s going on.


    ¡°I¡¯ll tell Sonia as well to inform Albert and the others. You can just stay on guard here,¡± Ka said before entering the portal with Celestine.


    Hmm... It¡¯s obvious that once someone came here, they will know something big happened from seeing the aftermath of the fight. Well, I don¡¯t care about that. I just need to move when I see someone approaching.


    This time, I won¡¯t know if the oneing is from the cult or not. I guess tonight¡¯s mission is over.

 Chapter 503

    Chapter 503: There¡¯s Nothing Important I Found Today


    I stayed behind in the forest, while the others have returned. I¡¯m not nning on sleeping tonight.


    Since I can¡¯t have Victoria with me, let¡¯s get someone else. A ghost. At least until someone needs her.


    I called Sonia and asked her about the situation in Lento.


    ¡°Sonia, how¡¯s Harold and the others in Lento doing?¡± I asked.


    ¡°There were some expert level mages, but there¡¯s no artificial master level mage at all. Carmen, Fabio, and Kron are enough to handle everything there. And now, they are marching toward Arturo after returning back to Bernard¡¯s home with Spot,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°What about the capital of Arturo? Have you asked Toni if there are any artificial master level mage there? Any mohawks?¡±


    ¡°When I told him that the cult has strong mages with mohawk hairstyle, he said that he has seen them. But after the fake king leaves the capital, there are no more mohawks in the capital. It was way before we got the report of Lenko city¡¯s fall,¡± Sonia said.


    .....


    I guess that¡¯s to be expected. They are from Arturo in the east. If they go directly to the west, Consenza, they will need to go through Lenko in the center. When they passing through, they make the city into their base before continuing their journey.


    I guess they would arrive soon. Probably soon after the fake king arrives here.


    ¡°Is there anyone in Lenko?¡± I asked Sonia.


    ¡°Harold left his daughter, Jill, to take care of the city while Harold and the others march toward the capital. Before you ask, she¡¯s doing well now and Harold believes that she won¡¯t betray her family as she¡¯s not influenced by the cult,¡± Sonia said.


    I guess that takes care of the city in the center of this continent.


    ¡°What about Albert and the others? When will they send their soldiers to stop the cult?¡± I asked.


    ¡°All of them have been waiting in a city near the Imperial Capital. Once someone reported that the fake king will arrive soon, they will be informed and move to stop the rest of the cult members who are approaching the capital. I will inform you when that will happen,¡± Sonia said.


    There will be too many expert level mages, or artificial master level mages that we will fight. I don¡¯t think just the soldiers alone is enough to handle everything. And there¡¯s also the tournament as well. Ang and the others will be busy.


    I guess assassinating the enemies one by one is the right answer. Killing the enemies one by one, and when someone noticed something is odd, or any artificial master level mage noticed me looking at them, I will escape using portal. After all, if I run, I won¡¯t be able to escape any wind mohawk. I mean mohawks with wind element magic. I would have died before I could escape.


    But that will be difficult. This will be a war. Everyone will be fighting, and I will not have the leeway to sneak into their strongest mages.


    Once the morninges, I will return back to the capital to check if there¡¯s any cult members left in the capital. I think we have killed a lot of them tonight.


    I chatted with Sonia about the current situation more, and we stopped when Sonia is called and had to go.


    ¡°Someone contacting me. I¡¯ll see youter,¡± Sonia said as she disappears.


    I guess I¡¯ll be alone from now on. At least I have spent a while chatting with her. Let¡¯s patrol the forest seriously now.


    There¡¯s no one elseing to where we fought the giant is other than some people with simr yellow robes. That¡¯s the uniform of the guards of Consenza. They will report to Lynn, but Ka has told her everything in full detail herself.


    I also looked at them to see if they have explosive devices in their mouth or not. And it¡¯s good that none of them have it.


    I heard from udia that there were no reports of anyone reaching expert level other than some mages that Celestine personally trained. So, if any of the soldier noticed my location from far, that means they are expert level mages.


    I didn¡¯t hide my presence, but none of them noticed me. I guess none of them are hiding their level.


    I heard that in Varadis, Julia also trained some of the mages to reach expert level. Which mean the tournament will be more spectacr than I would expect. Still, I don¡¯t think anyone would be able to defeat Ang. Unless the participants from Arturo are artificial master level mages.


    But they won¡¯t be any problem. The problem is those who are hiding. Maybe the fake king will be guarded by artificial master level mages instead. The kings and their bodyguard will be seated in a VIP room where they can watch the match in the best position. Which means Albert, Lynn, and old man Henry will be in a room with potentially artificial master level mages.


    But with Mustache who has reached expert level guarding Albert, it should be fine. Veronica will also be a guard for Lynn. That¡¯s what I heard from her as she doesn¡¯t want to participate in the tournament. But isn¡¯t this position much more dangerous?


    But it¡¯s good as well since she was a former member of the cult. If there¡¯s anyone she recognizes from the fake king¡¯s guard, she will inform Lynn.


    The guards from the capital noticed the remains of our battle against the giant, but there¡¯s no corpses there. They were suspicious that someone is hiding there. If they are someone I know, I would have talked to them telling them everything is fine. I¡¯ll just leave them to Lynn and udia to take careter.


    When the guards are checking near the location I¡¯m hiding, I moved so I won¡¯t be seen. It was easy to avoid them.


    I keep doing so until morning when the gate is open. Though I didn¡¯t walk through the door. I just use portal back to Lynn¡¯s pce.


    Seems like she¡¯s already awake. And Ka, Celestine, and udia are all here. Are they having a sleepover party?


    ¡°Hey, there are guards checking on the forest where we fought the giant. I think you need to tell them something,¡± I said to Lynn.


    ¡°...Don¡¯t call me ¡°Hey¡±. I am the empress, you know?¡± Lynn protested.


    ¡°We¡¯ll tell the guards that we sent someone to take care of a dangerous monster in the forest. Since the kings from other countries will visit us, it¡¯s normal to get dangerous monsters subjugated,¡± udia said, ignoring Lynn¡¯s protest.


    ¡°Okay. That¡¯s good. I¡¯ll be taking a nap for now and patrol the capital,¡± I said as sat on the bed of the empress and then lie on it.


    ¡°Hey! Who told you that you can sleep here!?¡± Lynnined.


    ¡°Since Victoria is not with me, I can¡¯t have quality sleep on Blobbybed. I don¡¯t have enough Blobbies to spare. And since you¡¯re the empress, the quality of your bed should be good. At least it¡¯s half as good as Blobbybed,¡± I said.


    ¡°Damn! I¡¯m jealous of how good that bed sounds, but also angry at how amoner like you can be so casual to me!¡± Lynn said angrily.


    ¡°Roy. I think you should just go. Albert¡¯s substitute has been staying in the capital for a while. You can just sleep on his bed there,¡± Ka said.


    Oh, seems like Albert¡¯s substitute is already here. I don¡¯t know when he arrives. Maybe I swept a nce at him before, but since he¡¯s not suspicious, I let him be.


    Howe someone who is impersonating a king not suspicious? I guess I just don¡¯t think that he¡¯s really a king since I can see through his disguise. But since he¡¯s Albert¡¯s subordinate, he should know me.


    I¡¯ll do as Ka said and go to where Albert will stay once he arrives. He knows about me as expected. In fact, he was one of the agents who went for the training camp. I have forgotten all about it.


    He told me that I shouldn¡¯t sleep on the bed that will be used by the king, but I replied with the fact that I¡¯m Albert¡¯s best friend. There¡¯s nothing he can do about it.


    Until I need to transport Albert here, I will sleep here. That¡¯s what I decided. The bed is much better than the one at the inn.


    After I wake up, I start looking around the capital again. The good thing is that Sophie won¡¯t be taking care of the children, as Jewel and Ka took a break from taking request from the guild. So, I spent the day looking for any cult members while having a date with Sophie. Only until after lunch.


    After that, I had a date with Ka. She seems to be the one working the hardest. And I need to get her rxed.


    I bet she doesn¡¯t only think about the tournament. She¡¯s also thinking of the iing cult members that I have to fight, while she¡¯s in the tournament.


    I can¡¯t say to her to just leave everything to me. She will still continue thinking about it after all. So, at least I want her to be rxed before the tournament.


    Today, there¡¯s no suspicious people I see. And I feel more rxed than before after rxing with Sophie, and Ka after that. This might be thest day I can take it easy before the battle.

 Chapter 504

    Chapter 504: It¡¯s Time to Move


    Finally, it¡¯s the day for me to leave. Today is not the day of the opening ceremony for the tournament. But today, Albert and old man Henry are already here with Lynn. I have brought them from their home country, and they have reced their substitute that were sent here.


    ¡°I have asked many things to the Professor, and some of the cult members that you caught. The n won¡¯t change. I have told my army who are hiding near or in the capital to leave and stop the cult members approaching in discreet. Roy, are you sure the fake king of Arturo is here?¡± Albert asked me.


    ¡°Yeah. They should be at the gate by now,¡± I said.


    Before I transport Albert and old man Henry here, I was outside the capital. Looking for the carriage from Arturo. And it¡¯s finally here. The fake king has arrived. Apanied only by expert level mages. Everyone other than the fake king should be expert level mages.


    I know it because there are no one inside the carriage that can tell I¡¯m looking at them. So, I pretend to be a hunter and walked within the range of their detection skill. All of them, except for the fake king, are expert level mages.


    Which mean, just Veronica and Mustache should be enough to fight them in case Albert, Lynn, or old man Henry are attacked during the tournament since they will be seated in the same room. Candy and Wendy won¡¯t participate as they will check the audience if any of them is suspicious.


    And for the participant from Tatrama, other than my friends, Albert sent some other agents that the others know to fill the number. Good luck to them all.


    .....


    ¡°Old man, how about you? Do Marie and Victoria invented something new?¡± I asked old man Henry.


    ¡°That seems to be the case. But the experiment is still going on. They said that if you find any kids in the cult, you should open a small portal to Victoria. If you don¡¯t see any kids, you don¡¯t need to call her,¡± old man Henry said.


    ¡°Understood. Where should I go now, Albert?¡± I asked Albert.


    ¡°Old man has sent his army to where the cult is supposed to be camping. Somewhere between here and Lenko. As for you, you will go to where my army is, and transport them all to Lenko city. I have asked Spot to be our ride. With his full size, he should be able to bring the whole army on his back,¡± Albert said.


    So, Spot is waiting in Lenko? It has been a while since Ist saw him. I heard that he¡¯s doing well helping Harold and the others.


    ¡°Oh, right. What about Harold and the others?¡±


    I¡¯m curious about the state of Arturo. Harold should be attacking the capital right around this time.


    But the kingdom is not just the capital. There should be other cities in Arturo that have been infested by the cult members. Even if Harold managed to retrieve the capital back and return to the throne, his battle won¡¯t be over yet.


    ¡°Thanks to Toni¡¯s help, the capital of Arturo is already under his control. We made sure to get him as many supports as we can afford, so they will stop any news about it to leave during the tournament, or the battle you will be facing. It¡¯s to make sure that Harold will have enough power to stop more invasion from other cities that have been conquered by the cult,¡± Albert exined.


    Seems like I underestimated Harold and the kings. Just because I¡¯m from the future where they lost, that doesn¡¯t mean they will lose this time. They are all exceptional kings. Though I don¡¯t know about Lynn. But at least she has a capable subordinate that we can trust.


    ¡°That mean I have to finish the battle as soon as possible, right? That might be difficult depending on how many mohawks they are sending,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yes. But you can get the werewolves, angels, and vampires to help you. It should be fine,¡± old man Henry said.


    ¡°If the enemy has a summoner with strong summoned monster, we might get a lot of casualties. Even a few nights ago, we lost few werewolves against two mohawks and a giant,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Casualties are something unavoidable during war. The result is what matters. Everyone who will join the battle know that. They are willingly risking their lives for their country or their loved ones. This is a battle that we can¡¯t lose no matter what,¡± Albert said.


    I know. Well, let¡¯s not care about other people. Just kill the cult members.


    I put on Blobbyarmor. I received more clones of Victoria, and have the leeway to create something like this. Old man Henry delivered it to me after I transported him here.


    How dare a slime get a king to be a courier! That¡¯s very Victoria. And me.


    About the n, it will be a pincer attack. Old man Henry¡¯s army will stop the cult approaching from the front, while I and Albert¡¯s army will attack from Lenko¡¯s direction.


    Once we see the enemies, I will open portals to call the angels, werewolves, and vampires. I hope we have enough people.


    From the information Albert has gathered from the Professor, the cult members are gathering in a camp, away from the capital. And in during the final match of the tournament, they will march toward the capital.


    Which mean, they are still waiting for everyone to arrive.


    The n is to defeat everyone right away, and wait for the rest of the enemies toe. This way, we might also find where their headquarter really is.


    By defeating the enemies in the camp, the next one to appear should being from where the headquarter is. We will get Elsie to watch where they came from, and have someone followed the trail. I hope we can find where they are hiding.


    Stopping the cult¡¯s n to kill all the kings at once in Consenza. Defeating the remains of the cult in Arturo. Cities by cities. And finally, attacking the headquarter of the cult.


    That will be our n. Each time new enemiese from the same location toward the camp we will be attacking, the more likely that the location of their headquarter can be traced.


    After taking care of everything else, we will surround their headquarter to not let them have a chance of moving to another location. It¡¯s difficult to trace them because they keep moving. But I hope that this will be the end.


    Finally, we are getting closer to destroying the cult. For me, it has been so long including the fight against the cult in my past life. And I never thought we would be able to reach this far in a few years when we couldn¡¯t do anything for decades.


    But will it be that easy? I don¡¯t know. After all, who knows how many master level mages they have? Not the artificially made one. But real one. Mages who reached master level through effort.


    What if there¡¯s another level beyond master level? What if the cult has someone like that?


    No, I can¡¯t start being negative when the battle is right in front of me. What I can do is to fight. Swinging and thrusting Reizpear, using transforming weapon, shooting from afar, and moving with portals. Those are things that I can do.


    Well, maybe my air element will be useful. Though I doubt it¡¯s useful against expert level mages or air mages. But doing what I can do is the key to victory.


    There won¡¯t be any expert level magesing with us. The strongest mages are only at advanced level mages. But it should be okay against the enemies¡¯ expert level mages.


    We have armies from Consenza, Tatrama, and Varadis. And while we are hunting down the cult, they are practicing their teamwork. It should be okay. We can do this.


    And so, I left Consenza to Lenko city. I said to Albert that I will open a portal when we¡¯re close to the enemy camp instead of having Spot carry them all from Lenko.


    ¡°Hey, Spot. Are you ready for a big fight?¡± I greeted the serpent floating in the sky in camouge.


    ¡°I am. Let¡¯s go right away!¡± Spot said.


    Before I jumped on top of Spot¡¯s head, I look around the city I¡¯ve never been to. Lenko city.


    It¡¯s just like any other city. But something must have changed after the cult took over this ce. And it changes again after Harold taken over this ce.


    ¡°Not a bad city. The view is great as well. Next time I visit this ce, it won¡¯t be for battle.¡±


    I jumped on top of Spot¡¯s head, and we fly through the sky toward the enemy. Soon, the battle will start. Lives will be lost, but such is war.


    But the only thing I need to think is to destroy the cult. I must not think of dying. Or letting my friends die.


    That¡¯s why I decided to bait the cult with the tournament. It¡¯s to let my friends stay in safer ce, not at the battlefield. Though once their match is over, they must be thinking of joining me. That¡¯s why I need to get rid of the enemies fast.


    ¡°Spot! Full speed!¡±

 Chapter 505

    Chapter 505: Searching the Enemy


    ¡°Roy, have you seen the enemy camp?¡±


    As we fly in the sky, Spot asked me if I have seen the camp where the cult will gather. But so far, we haven¡¯t found it yet.


    ¡°Not yet. You¡¯re using your camouge, right? We can fly a little lower. Maybe they decided to camp underground,¡± I said.


    ¡°Are you sure about that?¡± Spot asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. But from what I have seen of so far, the cult has the tendency to stay underground,¡± I said.


    That¡¯s right. From the raid to the Professor¡¯s location, they made a five-floor basement under the ground that goes to a dungeon we needed to pass. Also, here, they had a meeting room under the ground. The sewer. Ignoring the bad smell of the sewer. Or maybe the smell never reached their hiding spot there. I don¡¯t know since I always protect myself with Air Barrier back then.


    If the enemy is hiding underground, it will be difficult to fight them unless we have expert level earth mages. But our expert level mages are all busy with the tournament. Trying to bait the fake king, and some other hiding enemies, telling them that the kings are gathered in one ce. Ang and the others will be important for the protection of the royalties.


    .....


    I heard from the girls that some of them will not go all out and pretend to be weak so they can lose as soon as possible. But for Ang and some others, they really want to test their ability on each other. I hope they won¡¯t get hurt too much.


    They will stay in Consenza. That¡¯s why Albert and old man Henry can send their armies to help me while leaving only the minimum number of guards to protect their countries. Though for Lynn, if she sent out her army, the cult will be suspicious. That¡¯s why they will be staying behind to protect the empire.


    We have been flying in the sky for a while, but there¡¯s no sign of the enemy at all. Maybe they are hiding deeper underground. That will be dangerous, so I hope that¡¯s not the case. I guess I¡¯ll call for help for now.


    ¡°Spot, I will open a portal and get Elsie toe here,¡± I said to Spot, in which he stopped and stays stationary in the sky to make it easier for Elsie to enter the portal.


    I opened a portal to where Lina is and asked her if I can borrow Elsie earlier than expected.


    ¡°You want to borrow Elsie? Sure. But take Sunny with you as well. They are already a pair that can¡¯t be separated when there¡¯s a fight,¡± Lina said.


    ¡°Sure. Elsie, Sunny, let¡¯s go!¡±


    It¡¯s always a weird scene no matter how many times I have seen it. An eyeball with tentacles is walking. And one of the tentacles is holding a potted nt. A sunflower, with tentacles. There¡¯s a lot of tentacles here.


    Adding to the fact that one of the eyeball¡¯s tentacles is wrapping around the tail of a giant flying serpent as it¡¯s looking at the surrounding. What a sight.


    ¡°...I just can¡¯t get used to the sight of different type of tentacles are wrapping around each other like best friend,¡± I said to myself.


    ¡°Why don¡¯t you add more? You can have your ck Slime to grow tentacles, right?¡± Spot added after hearing what I said.


    ¡°Too many tentacles give me the creep. I¡¯ll pass on that,¡± I said.


    And now, we continue looking for the enemy camp. We only fly just a little higher than the trees in case they are hiding deep underground.


    If they do hide underground, there really is not much that I can do. Since that mean they obviously have air mages to help them with breathing, I can¡¯t use my gases as freely as usual.


    Although the enemy is still waiting for more people toe, the first one to camp should at least have several strong people in charge. Probably more than one mohawks. And as the strongest within our joined army, I will have to fight them all alone.


    Probably not since Spot is here. He should be able to handle one or two mohawks. As long as they don¡¯t have good teamwork like the pair from before. But at least even if they have a giant with them now, Spot¡¯s breath attack can defeat it instantly.


    Even if the giant is a fully-grown one, Spot will be able to defeat it. That¡¯s what I believe.


    ¡°Elsie! You see anything?¡± I asked.


    Elsie shook her head. I mean eyeball. Whatever it is.


    Any closer than this and the imperial guards would have seen them. And it¡¯s not under the ground as well. Maybe instead of camping, they took over a vige.


    I haven¡¯t seen any vige nearby. There¡¯s no vige around this part in the map that I am holding right now. It¡¯s the Blobbymap made by Blobbies imitating the map that udia showed me before.


    Unless there¡¯s a vige recently made that haven¡¯t been registered to be part of the empire yet. Then where should I look?


    Obviously, somewhere with water source. There¡¯s noke nearby, but there¡¯s a river. Let¡¯s follow the river and see if we can find them.


    ¡°Spot, seems like we¡¯re looking in the wrong area. Let¡¯s follow the river and see if the enemy is there,¡± I said.


    ¡°A river? Which way? If you¡¯re pointing your finger above my head again, I¡¯ll drop you here,¡± Spot said.


    Seems like he¡¯s angry that whenever I told him to go somewhere I else, I always pointing my finger to that direction while I¡¯m above his head. Which makes him unable to see where I¡¯m pointing.


    This time, I instructed him to the river with words. And we arrive in no time thanks to Spot¡¯s speed.


    Now, where should we go? Upstream or downstream?


    Upstream, we will be further from the capital. And there¡¯s a vige a bit far from here that exist in the map. But it shouldn¡¯t be where the cult is hiding. Well, we won¡¯t know until we see it for ourselves.


    ¡°Spot, there¡¯s a vige upstream. Let¡¯s check it first. If that vige hasn¡¯t been taken over by the cult, it means they are downstream,¡± I said.


    ¡°Understood.¡±


    The vige we arrive in is quite peaceful. There are children ying as well, and there are farms that have been well-maintained. Which mean it¡¯s impossible for them to be members of the cult. Unless they have been members since a long time ago. But I don¡¯t think the cult will attack from here.


    ¡°Negative, huh? Let¡¯s go downstream. Be careful since if the enemy is a mohawk, they would notice us,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. If that¡¯s the case, once the enemy noticed us, you will drop here while I will bait them away from there to reduce the enemy¡¯s strength. The one who noticed you should be strong, right?¡± Spot said.


    ¡°That¡¯s a good n. Let¡¯s go!¡±


    Once I jumped off of Spot¡¯s back andnded on the ground, I will open a portal to get the army here.


    But since it¡¯s not in the area between Lenko and the imperial capital, I need to inform the other army marching from the capital. Seems like our pincer attack won¡¯t be of use here.


    ¡°Sonia, the enemy is not between Lenko and the capital. The pincer attack won¡¯t work. Tell them that I will open a portal to the rest of the army toe here,¡± I said after calling Sonia.


    ¡°There¡¯s no pincer attack? Seems like the battle will be much harder than expected. I¡¯ll tell Albert and the others,¡± Sonia said before leaving.


    We continue flying downstream, and I finally see a vige that is not exist in the map.


    It may look like a vige with the houses made of logs. But that¡¯s a fake. The houses are built with earth magic to shape into a house, and they used logs only to cover the earth. This is it. This is where the enemy is.


    ¡°Spot, we found it. But I haven¡¯t seen any strong enemies,¡± I said.


    ¡°How many of them are there?¡± Spot asked.


    ¡°A lot. But we have more people with us. Still, they don¡¯t have all of them gathered over there yet,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. I will prepare my breath attack here. You keep looking for the strong enemies. If someone detected you, tell me where to aim and that¡¯s where I will attack,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°Is it okay if I pointed with my finger?¡± I asked.


    ¡°As long as you are within my sight.¡±


    I looked toward the fake vige and finally, I see three people with mohawks. And the two of them noticed me quick.


    ¡°They noticed me. Attack that ce!¡±


    Instead of aiming to where the mohawks are, I aimed to where there are many enemies. This way, I hope a lot of expert level mages will be lost.


    After saying that to Spot, I run to Spot¡¯s tail to grab the two tentacle monsters, and jumped down. That¡¯s right when Spot let out his breath attack.


    His attack hit the fake vige and destroyed it. Many people died, but some managed to escape. And I no longer look at them since the mohawks will know about me.


    After attacking the fake vige, Spot turned tail and fly as far away as possible. I see someone fly extremely fast to where Spot is without using Divine Vision to not alert the mohawk. At least none of the mohawk are children.


    Now, it¡¯s time to get everyone here.

 Chapter 506

    Chapter 506: The War Started


    Once Inded with Elsie and Sunny wrapped around my arm with their tentacles, I instantly opened a portal to get the army here. It¡¯s the army that was supposed to attack the enemy from behind. Though since the pincer attack strategy won¡¯t work because they are not where we expected them to be. These guys will be the one attacking from the front. And I still think it¡¯s still possible to do pincer attack with me here.


    ¡°Just charge ahead and you will find the vige where they are staying! Kill them all! I will go around behind the enemy to transport the other army! Prepare your armbands!¡±


    I shouted the instruction to the army. The armbands I said is to make sure none of us will fight each other.


    There will be two armies fighting the cult here. One is Albert¡¯s army, and the other is old man Henry¡¯s army. To make sure that they won¡¯t end up fighting each other, every single one of them are wearing purple armbands either in their left or right upper arm.


    Why purple? Because it¡¯s hard to create the color purple. The ingredient for it is a certain type of flower that only grows in Tatrama. This way, the enemy will not be able to pretend to be our allies by wrapping armbands of other color in their upper arms.


    By the way, I¡¯m also wearing one as well. I wore it on my left upper arm over my Blobbyarmor. Thanks to old man Henry bringing more Blobbies to me, I don¡¯t need to worry about the quantity of Blobbies I have at the moment. Though I will still only use Blobbygun with rock bullets that Sara created for me.


    After I move to the other side of the battlefield, I opened a portal to where the other army is waiting and gave them the same instruction. Now the armies from Varadis and Tatrama are all here. It¡¯s impossible for us to get ally from Arturo when the kingdom is still in trouble, and from Consenza, they need to protect the capital and won¡¯t participate. At least until the tournament is over and the capital is safe. I hope that will be the case.


    .....


    Now that the human army has all arrive. It¡¯s time for the monster army.


    I move again toward another location with Sunny and Elsie, and opened two portals. But this time, we are closer to where the enemy is. And one of the mohawks left behind noticed me using magic he didn¡¯t recognize. He hurriedly running to this location instead.


    Meanwhile, thest mohawk left behind doesn¡¯t even notice me even though he¡¯s closer to me. Don¡¯t tell me that he¡¯s just a normal mohawk and not a result of experiment. I still wonder why someone chooses that kind of hairstyle willingly. Though this guy is wearing ck leather jacket and pants. At least it fits him.


    Anyway, I opened two portals. One is to where the vampires are waiting, Cassau. And the other is to Monsters Vige.


    Only vampires enter through one of the portals. As for the other portal, I need to wait patiently until all the angels and werewolves who are going to participate to pass the portal. And the mohawk is getting closer to us.


    ¡°Even if you don¡¯t want to, you need to wear the armbands. But well, since the werewolves can transform and your arms will be bigger, it¡¯s fine to wear it on your forehead as a headband. Make sure that our own allies won¡¯t attack you. They have been informed of you, the allied monsters, will help fighting the cult. But that doesn¡¯t mean they won¡¯t attack you out of fear. Make sure the cloth is visible. Now, you can fight however you want. Good luck, everyone!¡±


    After saying that, everyone dispersed. Like how we talked before I transported them here, the vampires and the werewolves will go all out right away. As for the angels, like usual, they will focus more on healing our allies.


    This is why both Albert¡¯s and old man Henry¡¯s army didn¡¯t have any healer among them. Other than those who can fight and heal at the same time, most of the healing came from the angels. Not only they can heal, they can also do it from the sky.


    Let¡¯s see how the cult members will react. They are those who believe in what they call True God even though we call him Evil God. How will they react when they see angels are helping us? I hope most of them will feel conflicted because they thought that since they are serving a god, there¡¯s no way angels would go against them.


    Though angels are just monsters. They don¡¯t belong to any gods. They are free monsters that do whatever they like. Though most people don¡¯t know about it.


    Now, I will face the mohawking this way. Though it seems that Shelia and Graham noticed what I¡¯m nning.


    I run past the running and flying werewolves, vampires, and angels, to face the iing mohawk. With the strongest werewolf and the leader of the angels behind me.


    I run with my full speed and charged at the mohawk directly. The enemy noticed that I¡¯ming with full speed and stopped to defend from my attack.


    Like usual. Their weakness is obvious. They think that they are fighting mages because the oneing at them is a human.


    Although there are a werewolf and an archangel behind me, I ordered them to go help the others and leave this one to me. Now, I¡¯m facing the mohawk one on one.


    The mohawk didn¡¯t expect that I won¡¯t stop and maybe he¡¯s thinking that I¡¯m just passing by. It¡¯s because I¡¯m holding back my killing intent as much as possible.


    But when I get him within my range, once I see he reacted to something, I thrusted Reizpear at his heart. Killing him instantly.


    The artificial master level mages can tell that even though I¡¯m pretending to be a living armor, I¡¯m inside it. As for expert level mages and lower, they will only think that I¡¯m a living armor. I don¡¯t know about our allies, but as long as they don¡¯t think of me as hostile, I don¡¯t care what they think of me. Though some of the mages from Albert¡¯s army should have known since they were in the training camp. Or at least that¡¯s what Albert told me. I don¡¯t remember anyone from there except for Sara. Not even the summoner I taught.


    That was easy. But I won¡¯t let down my guard.


    For now, I can leave the rest of the enemy to the others. I will keep watch of the surrounding area with Elsie who is still attached to my arm with Sunny.


    ¡°Elsie, we¡¯ll be watching the surrounding for the iing enemies in turns. You and Sunny will take the first turn, and I will do the next after resting for a while. Inform me if you see any new enemies who are stronger than the werewolves or the vampires. Anyone that notices you are looking at them,¡± I gave an instruction to Elsie.


    Even though she¡¯s not my contracted monster, she will still obey me because I¡¯m her master¡¯s master. Lina is my loyal maid after all. She ordered her monsters to obey me. Though for her newest contracted monster, the Elf Queen, she didn¡¯t even participate in the battle. She¡¯s nonbatant along with the entire elf race in the vige.


    But we¡¯re fighting in the forest though. They should be able to use their nt magic to help. But I guess it¡¯s better if those without any motivation to not participate at all or they will just be a burden.


    But the archangel is here because he was forced to. He¡¯s my contracted monster after all, so he won¡¯t disobey me. And the chance of him being a burden is low. Especially if I just asked the angels to heal and not to fight.


    ...I just hope they won¡¯t stupidly heal the enemies.


    For now, I need to take a rest even though I¡¯m not tired. I drunk a bottle of mana potion to recover my lost mana after using portals. It might not be needed right away, but it¡¯s best to be prepared.


    We don¡¯t know how long we will stay here. One day? Two days? Until the tournament is over? A week? A month? I don¡¯t know.


    I can only prepare myself for what¡¯s toe. I have a lot of mana potions after all. Thanks to the elves, the mana potions I have are much more effective than normal ones. The ingredients are the same, but the one grown by the elves are of much better qualities.


    They are growing fruits and vegetables. That¡¯s how they fight. By farming.


    Once our rations run out, I will open a portal to grab whatever they have harvested. I have asked Lina to tell the elves to do that.


    While the enemies need their supplies to be delivered, our side just need me to open a portal. Though once I die, it¡¯s obvious that we will lose. Even if I have no ns on dying, the chance is not zero.


    Alright. I have rested enough. It¡¯s my turn to watch over the surrounding.

 Chapter 507

    Chapter 507: The First Day is Over


    Only the enemies bring their expert level mages with them. There are none of them among us. But because we are more prepared, so far, we are doing well. Even when I haven¡¯t helped them at all, our armies managed to defeat the cult members.


    It was mostly thanks to the werewolves and the vampires though. But if they can¡¯t get close, our mages were the one giving the finishing attacks. The werewolves and the vampires helped a lot with distracting the enemies.


    As for the angels, they have been healing our side nonstop. But now that Ka has taught them how to properly control their healing magic, they didn¡¯t waste too much mana for small wounds. And they also healed us in turn, so not all of them used healing magic at the same time.


    At first, only about thirty percent of the angels here healed us. But after a while, that group fell back and the other thirty percent of the angels stepped forward and continued healing. As for the rest of the angels, they are for emergencies. For a more serious injuries, or if there are some other things they can do.


    Even if their leader, the archangel Graham, doesn¡¯t have much motivation to fight, the rest of the angels are willing to fight. I guess it¡¯s just him who is the bad influence among the angels. If only another angel is their leader, I would never think of them as a stupid species of monster anymore.


    That¡¯s how the battle has been going on so far. But now, the enemy started to realize that we are stronger than expected and much more resilient. Just like the cult, the army we brought with us are also those who are prepared to die. But the hatred we have toward the cult is much bigger.


    Albert, old man Henry, and Lynn are... well, probably it¡¯s udia and not Lynn. They picked the army that will fight from those who have been affected by the cult. One way or another, they have a huge hatred toward the cult. That¡¯s why they are prepared to die in this fight.


    .....


    For Tatrama¡¯s army, well, there have been several stampedes that were organized by the cult. Some of the casualties might havee from the friends or families of the soldier. The same could be said with Varadis¡¯ army.


    Not just anyone, but the crown prince, old man Henry¡¯s own son, was teaming up with the cult. Other than him, there were many other people as well. Though I and Spot had killed a lot of them back when we first arrive at Varadis.


    As for Consenza... I know nothing. But since udia said that it¡¯s fine, I can just believe her. Though they are staying in the capital of Consenza to protect their empress.


    That¡¯s why we have higher morale than the enemy. Is what I thought.


    But it will be difficult if they started to call monsters to help them. I don¡¯t know if they have more summoners with powerful monsters, or tamers, or they would use the same method they used during the stampede in Cassau or other cities in Tatrama before.


    That is why I will try to not participate in the battle as much as possible. It¡¯s to reserve my strength against the possibility of monster attack, or any powerful mohawks.


    The worst part is that there will be children with mohawking. And I must not try to kill them.


    Since they haven¡¯t arrived yet, I can rest easy and take turns with Elsie to watch the surrounding. Though she has longer turn than me.


    But now, it¡¯s about time. I won¡¯t be able to keep watch for a while since the battle has been going on for a while. It should be time that the cult noticed that they won¡¯t be able to do much, and they will try to escape. But we won¡¯t allow it.


    The vampires, werewolves, and I, will hunt all the cult to the veryst. No one is allowed to escape.


    ¡°Elsie, stay here and keep watch of iing enemies. I¡¯ll be looking for those who are trying to escape,¡± I said to the eyeball monster.


    After giving instruction to her, I run in the sky to chase after the escaping enemies. And when I chased after one, a werewolf saw me and chooses to stop chasing after the guy I¡¯m chasing and went elsewhere.


    I¡¯m chasing after a wind mage who is flying in low altitude. For those flying higher, Spot will defeat them. He will eat them whole.


    Spot who was baiting for the other artificial master level mage, has finally defeated him. Some parts of his scales have scratches, but he¡¯s fine. The angels can heal himter since he¡¯s still able to endure it. Though I don¡¯t know if he needs one or not.


    I chased after the flying guy, and passed him easily. It¡¯s either because my speed has increased, or his speed has reduced due to the long fight with the others. Or maybe both.


    And as soon as I got close to him, I thrusted Reizpear forward to stab him from behind. The de of the speares out from his chest. It pierced through his heart.


    I raised the spear with his body still intact, and swing it down to throw the body away. There are still some who tries to escape, but those who can fly has been defeated by Spot.


    Now, the harder part. The earth mages trying to escape to underground.


    They are quite far, but thanks to the help of our earth mages who noticed the enemies are underground, they can dy the enemies slightly. I can chase after them with a huge drill in my hand.


    Oh? We have a summoner with us. That summoner has a giant mole as his summons. How convenient.


    The giant mole chases after the earth mage that escapes underground. There¡¯s no way they can be faster than a mole that can move well underground.


    With its giant ws used for digging, the giant mole ripped the enemies into shreds. What a monster. And probably because we instructed our allies to wear visible purple cloth somewhere on our body, that giant mole has one tied on his head like a ribbon even though it¡¯s a male. Is that its master¡¯s preference? I think he will get along with Hill.


    I also managed to kill one earth mage and another mage following him underground with my drill. It¡¯s a powerful drill if the enemy is just an expert level mage. They should be at least at Ka¡¯s level of magic control so they can defend from my drill.


    Well, it¡¯s impossible to know about magic control in this time. I think there should be a few more years until someone studied it.


    Still, if the enemy is too strong, even with weak magic control, we won¡¯t be able to defeat them easily.


    Ie out of the ground and look for more enemies trying to escape. Seems like the enemies this time won¡¯t just mindlessly kill themselves. Unless they are caught.


    Their goal this time is to report to the other cult members who weren¡¯t here yet about our attack. And of course, we won¡¯t let them do that.


    The werewolves and the vampires managed to stop those who are escaping and kill them. The werewolves enjoyed the fight as it¡¯s what they life for. And the vampires enjoyed drinking the blood of expert level mages. The vampires will continue growing stronger in this fight. Even stronger than the werewolves. Maybe some of them will rank up. There will be more Vampire Dukes among them.


    As long as the vampires have no intention in turning their fangs into us, it should be fine. They have be dangerous existence ever since they entered our world. We need to bribe them with more beautiful dresses and essories. Should I go diving again after this?


    Though I just need Carmen alone to stop all the vampires. Their weakness is water after all. They can¡¯t swim.


    Now I have seen it. I have seen where most of the cult members are running. It¡¯s toward the north. That might be where their headquarter is.


    After defeating all of the enemies in the fake vige, I told the werewolves to trail the scent of the enemies and see if they came from the same ce. Some of the soldiers from thebined army wille as well to scout. Only those with wind element magic.


    ¡°Everyone, good job. Now, let¡¯s take a rest for a while until the scout returns. I doubt that¡¯s the end of it. If you are injured, ask the angels for healing magic. But if it¡¯s just light injuries like scratches, don¡¯t bother asking for healing. We also need to save the angels¡¯ magic because the enemy¡¯s strongest forces haven¡¯t arrived yet,¡± I said to everyone.


    I asked the vampires to gather all the dead bodies in the fake vige. They will be the source for the vampires¡¯ strength. That¡¯s why I won¡¯t dispose of them first.


    Just like that, the first day of our fight is over. We camped at the fake vige while waiting for the report from the scouts.

 Chapter 508

    Chapter 508: Iing Enemies from Different Direction


    At night, I gave the report to Sonia about what happened. The first day is over without any casualties. And everyone is resting other than the scouts.


    The scouts are the wind mages who are specialized in speed. Helped by the werewolves who can keep up with their speed. Though one of the werewolves turned into a wolf, with a huge eyeball on its back. And the eyeball is using one of its tentacles to hold a potted sunflower.


    Elsie and Sunny will help with the scout searching the enemy¡¯s location. As for me, I will be resting while asionally watching the surrounding.


    Just like that, the first day of the fight is over. There¡¯s no more reinforcement from the cult. But that doesn¡¯t mean it¡¯s over.


    The Professor said that there will be more artificial master level mages from the cult fighting. And most of them are children who shouldn¡¯t even awakened their magic element yet. And those children still haven¡¯t been seen yet.


    It will be dangerous for us if theye. Not only they are artificial master level mages that are much stronger than any artificial master level mages we fought previously, they are also just children. Many of us will be hesitant to face them. Not only killing them, just casting an offensive magic toward children is difficult for the soldier.


    Though I don¡¯t think they will send their artificial master level children on the first few days. But I have fought one before near the capital. There¡¯s nothing absolute in this world.


    .....


    Well, maybe some things are absolute, but most things, especially things rted to living beings, are not absolute. That¡¯s what I think.


    It¡¯s almost dawn, but there has been no report from the scout about the enemy¡¯s location. I only managed to get one hour of sleep. But that¡¯s good enough since we¡¯re at war with the cult.


    Until now, we don¡¯t know where their headquarter is. Even when Elsie and the others are tracing to where a few expert level mages from the cult appeared yesterday, I still doubt that the location of their headquarter is over there. But we have no other hints of where they were, so we can only wait.


    What if all the cult members who will be participating here are gathering in other ces first far from the headquarter? That would make our effort to search for the headquarter of the cult to be in vain. Or maybe they have moved again before this happens. That mean they are extremely careful.


    Though I know that the cult doesn¡¯t know that summoners can use portal to transport people. That means we might have a chance to go after them if their leader has just left.


    I walked to Arin, the leader of the vampires, who is looking at the other vampires. They are all gathering around the prisoner with thirst in their eyes. I hope they won¡¯t drink blood needlessly. Though Arin is doing well stopping the vampires.


    ¡°Are you still thirsty by any chance?¡± I asked Arin who is sitting on the ground. In the past, just her sitting on the ground will get her scolded by her followers. But none of them are scolding her this time.


    ¡°Don¡¯t you know thew of delicious food? Even if you are full, you will always think that there¡¯s still some room for your favorite dishes when they are in front of you,¡± Arin said.


    ¡°You¡¯re right. I agree with you there. I¡¯ll leave the prisoners and the vampires to you. Don¡¯t let the vampires drink too much. The battle is far from over,¡± I said as I leave her alone.


    Law of delicious food. Even if I¡¯m such a gourmet who visits restaurants one by one, I do have favorite dishes. I totally agree with Arin. Though the amount of my favorite dishes is much more than her.


    Wait, the one who has the most delicious blood for the vampires is me, right? Is she actually saying that she wants to drink my blood?


    ...that¡¯s only for emergency. Other than that, I won¡¯t let her drink my blood. Unless I¡¯m already bleeding, and the blood is out of my body. She can lick them. I wonder if she would lick the ground where my blood was shed? No matter how delicious my blood is, I doubt she will do something so embarrassing.


    And then, I used Divine Vision again to check on the surrounding. They finallye. more reinforcement from the cult. And the number is a lot more than those who stays in this fake vige.


    There are some mohawks who noticed me. Luckily, none of them are children.


    Does it mean that all of the children with mohawks will attack us at the same time? Many lives will be lost then. Though I will put my trust on Marie¡¯s invention with the help of Victoria. I hope whatever it is, it will be very effective on them. Though there are still no children here, so I can still let Marie perfected her creation.


    By the way, about Marie, she won¡¯t be at the tournament. Only her body double will be staying by Albert¡¯s side. And she warned Albert to not get too close with her or she will be jealous. And like Lana used to say, all hell will break loose.


    The twins are under the care of Sophie. They are also in the capital along with Daniel and other children. And since Hannah is already a mage, she will help Sophie to protect the children. Though I still forget to ask her what her awakened elements are. But since she never asked me for instruction, I guess it¡¯s neither air element, nor it is a summoning element.


    Well, back to the battle. The enemy¡¯s reinforcement ising, but they are from different location to where I sent the scout. So, I opened a portal to get the scouts back here.


    ¡°Iing enemies from different location! Come back quick!¡± I said to the scouts in the other side of the portal. And they hurriedly entered the portal. Ready to fight.


    I also told everyone to prepare for battle. It has been a while since the previous battle ended, so almost all of us are in perfect condition. Some mages still have their wounds from the battle not healed yet. But they are just scratches.


    ¡°Spot! From that location! There are five mohawks this time!¡± I said to Spot.


    ¡°Okay. Get on top of me and we¡¯ll do it like before. Bait the wind mages to chase after me, and I will fight them alone. If I take too long to return,e and help me,¡± Spot said as Inded on his back.


    ¡°Arin! Graham! Shelia! Each of you will fight one mohawk at a time. Try to split them up! As for the rest, good luck!¡±


    Just like before, I ride on top of Spot¡¯s head and looked at the direction of the artificial master level mages. Spot also prepared to use his breath attack when any of the artificial master level mages started chasing at us.


    And now, there are two of them who are flying toward us. I told Spot to attack the location where most of the enemies are concentrated at. Many of them died because of that. I am really d that Spot is on our side.


    Still, two artificial master level wind mages. I guess each of us will fight one.


    ¡°Spot, let¡¯s bait them for a while. The other three mohawks, we will leave them to the other monsters,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    With Spot¡¯s breath attack, everyone knows where to attack. The armies are running toward the enemies. Except for the vampires. They know the enemy ising, so they had their fill first of the prisoners. It doesn¡¯t matter if they ended up killing the prisoners.


    With Shelia and Graham in the lead, they charged straight to the enemy. Arin may have ate start, but after having her fill of blood, she could pass them in no time.


    Let¡¯s believe them. We will do what we can do over here. Spot and I will fight the two artificial master level wind mages chasing after us.


    ¡°Shall we split up here?¡± Spot asked.


    ¡°I think it¡¯s fine. We¡¯re already quite far from the others. Good luck, Spot!¡±


    After wishing him good luck, we split to the opposite direction. Spot changed his direction to the right, while I go to the left.


    The two mohawks still chasing after Spot. But when I looked directly to the eyes of the mohawk woman, she changed her direction and chased after me.


    To make my fight easier, I need to bring her down to the ground. So, after running for a while, and the mohawk woman started to get closer, Inded in the forest.


    The woman will soonnd on the ground. That¡¯s what I¡¯m aiming. She won¡¯t expect that I will be attacking just as her feet touched the ground.


    But just when I swung Reizpear and attacked from distance, she quickly dodged it by ascending a bit higher.


    I guess it should be considered normal. Not all mohawks have the same weakness. Some of them are more experienced than the others.


    But I will defeat her here and return to everyone.

 Chapter 509

    Chapter 509: Battle in the Second Day


    This one could be the most experienced mohawk I¡¯ve ever fought. She managed to dodge my surprise attack right away when many other mohawks I¡¯ve fought couldn¡¯t. But I will still win.


    Where¡¯s the me who always thought of escaping as an option? Well, not only I must not escape, I also can¡¯t. The enemy is faster than me and can detect me from far away.


    Though I think that me has long gone. I wonder since when? Rather, I feel like I almost never escape from the enemy I faced at all.


    I don¡¯t know if that¡¯s good or not. But I know that I can only defeat the enemy in front of me if I want to survive.


    She¡¯s an artificial master level mage with wind element. Does she have other elements she can use? Rather, I¡¯d like her to not use her other elements at all.


    Wind mages were seen as the most versatile mages. They can move freely in the air, and although their attack power is lower than most elements, it can reach further than any other elements and difficult to be seen. Because it¡¯s wind.


    But for me, I should be able to detect it as long as her wind magic affecting the air nearby. Still, fighting from distance is stupid. I have to get close to her no matter what.


    .....


    After she dodged my attack, I rushed toward her and thrusted forward Reizpear toward her. Even if she¡¯s faster, if I can block her movement, I should be able to reach her. And I secretly hid a small Blobby to throw at her. If I could attach just a single Blobby on her, I can win. I will use portal to reach her from anywhere.


    But I have to be sure that the Blobby I threw to touch her. If not, it would be a waste of Blobby.


    I can just look for the Blobbies that missed, but that will take time. The battle won¡¯t wait for the others. This is war.


    But the enemy keep moving around. Throwing a Blobby will be difficult. So, I hid a Blobbygun with a Blobbybullet in it. It¡¯s smaller than any gun I¡¯ve ever used. Thepressed air inside will be weaker than normal Blobbygun, but the shot should be good enough to reach her when she¡¯s unaware.


    For now, I will keep chasing after her and attack her with Reizpear until I see an opening. There should be one soon. An opening.


    I keep chasing after the mohawk woman while making sure that she won¡¯t be able to escape to the sky in this forest. And now, she¡¯s moving while thinking that my attack will be blocked by the trees. And it will save her mana instead of flying to the sky and block my attack with magic.


    She¡¯s smart. But that¡¯s what I expected. This way, she won¡¯t escape to the sky. And she doesn¡¯t know that I didn¡¯t use my full force when my attack got blocked by a tree.


    Our battle keeps going, until I finally see an opening. She has gotten used to fighting in the forest and dodging my attack. And now, she¡¯s about to unleash her magic to me.


    She¡¯s concentrating on her magic while trying to dodge my spear thrust. And that¡¯s an opening I can use to shoot my Blobbygun.


    If I timed it too early, she will notice and dodge it in time. If it¡¯s toote, the Blobbygun would be blown away by her wind. So, I have to time it right before her attack started.


    Just as she started swinging her arm, likemon mages do when they used their magic, I aimed at her torso and shoot my small Blobbygun at her. Aiming at her torso will give me more chance to hit her than other parts of the body.


    And it hit! She also canceled her magic because of the pain that my Blobbybullet gives. And now, the Blobbybullet is inside her belly. Just a little bit, and it would pierce her liver. I guess her enhanced strength saved her. But that¡¯s actually my n.


    While she¡¯s in pain, I opened a portal in front of me right to the front of the mohawk woman, and I thrusted Reizpear right into the portal. It¡¯s one hundred percent a hit. And I aimed it on her chest.


    It didn¡¯t hit her heart. But I used my full power, to swing the de of Reizpear that pierced her, so I can sh her heart while it¡¯s still in her body. With the sharpened de using my Aura, I killed her instantly.


    If the de wasn¡¯t sharp enough, instead of killing her, I would end up dragging her body with my spear. That¡¯s why I sharpened the de of Reizpear with my Aura.


    ¡°That¡¯s one down. Four to go. Now that I¡¯m this far, I guess I¡¯ll help Spot first.¡±


    I collected the Blobby stuck in the mohawk woman¡¯s body, and run through the sky to where Spot is fighting the other wind mage mohawk.


    I see them fighting in the sky. Their speed is about the same. The mohawk man used Wind sh at Spot, but Spot¡¯s scale is too strong. Did he grow stronger?


    As for Spot, he can¡¯t use his breath attack since it might hit the others. But with his full size, he swept his tail toward the mohawk.


    Obviously, the mohawk couldn¡¯t defend himself. He¡¯s considerably injured, but there¡¯s no sign of him giving up.


    I guess I don¡¯t need to help Spot here. He can handle it himself. I¡¯ll go to where the others are. I guess the one who will need my help will be Graham. Let¡¯s check on him.


    When I found Graham, he¡¯s fighting away from where Arin and Shelia are fighting. The three of them have sessfully separated the artificial master level magesing.


    As for Graham, he and his shadow clone have the upper hand. I don¡¯t think he will need any help now. And when I look at Arin and Shelia¡¯s location, they also have the upper hand. I guess I will take care of the others and make sure no one will escape.


    Now that I have returned to help the others, our strength increased. We weren¡¯t losing even though many enemies are expert level mages. But we¡¯re not winning either. Until I arrive to help.


    There are more expert level mages than those who were waiting at the fake vige. But so far, we have no casualties. The angels managed to heal the injured ones before they died. And once in a while, I see the angels using Light Barrier to protect the others. Seems like they are doing well.


    But the angels only focused on defending and healing. That¡¯s why I have to help them clear the expert level mages quickly.


    ¡°Watch out! It¡¯s a powerful Living Armor!¡±


    One of the enemies shouted. This is nice. They don¡¯t expect that there¡¯s a human being inside the armor. But if the enemy is artificial master level mage, he would notice.


    Using Reizpear in my hand, I killed dozens of expert level mages to boost the morale. Now that many of them have been defeated, the others won¡¯t lose as they casted their magic toward the enemies.


    Most of the magic got blocked by the enemies¡¯ barrier, but no one in our army stopped their attack. Even if the opponents are a level higher, there¡¯s no way they can defend themselves for so long under the barrage of magic.


    When I see that everyone is doing well in this area, I moved to another area where our allies are having difficulties.


    ¡°Stop that Living Armor! Find the summoner or the tamer and kill them!¡±


    That is a good strategy against a real tamed Living Armor. Not this fake Living Armor.


    Again, I killed dozens of the enemies and move to another battlefield. By this time, Shelia and Arin have finished their enemies and started helping. Arin helped the others, while Shelia is going to where Graham is to help him. Although Graham had the upper hand, he doesn¡¯t have the finishing move. He can only damage the enemy little by little.


    Maybe I should have helped him right away. Well, as long as he didn¡¯t die, it¡¯s fine. Even if he got himself injured, he can heal himself.


    Just like that, we managed to win against this wave. But that doesn¡¯t mean the wave is over.


    ¡°Those who can still move, trace the enemies¡¯ direction and look for their headquarter! Elsie, you go as well! The rest will take a break here!¡±


    The battle this time went for quite a while. But no casualties again this time. Still, many are injured. Though the angels are healing them.


    I didn¡¯t forget our n. To find the enemy headquarter and kill whoever this Evil God is as soon as possible. That¡¯s why I ordered those who can still fight to move.


    The tournament will only start tomorrow. Although we have fought the enemies twice, I didn¡¯t see anyone among us who wants to return. That is good. Though they still need to rest.

 Chapter 510

    Chapter 510: Finding Where the Cult Hides Their Monsters


    It¡¯s bad. Just as we all thought the battle today is over, right before the sun is setting, Elsie¡¯s group who is tracing the enemy headquarter informed me of more enemiesing this way. But the fact that they areing from the same direction as thest wave, I think the chance of the current enemy headquarter is in the same direction is high. But we still can¡¯t be sure.


    Now that more enemies iing, I transported Elsie and the scouts back to the fake vige where we are resting. After the previous fight, we returned to the fake vige so we can get some rest. And not just that. It¡¯s so we can prepare a trap and ambush the enemy in this situation, where the enemy doesn¡¯t have any artificial master level mages with them.


    This wave doesn¡¯t have anyone noticing Elsie¡¯s nce. So, at most, they are just expert level mages. And if we are prepared to ambush them and set a trap, we can defeat them all with the least amount of effort.


    Actually, we used a lot of effort in preparing the traps. And after we prepared a lot of them, we get a good rest for a while. Still, once the enemy ising, we don¡¯t need to try too hard to defeat them. And I also don¡¯t need to fight or bait the artificial master level mage away from here.


    The best part is that both Albert¡¯s and old man Henry¡¯sbined army has prepared thoroughly about the trap. I think it was after the first day that leaders of both armies got together and talk about the n. And they said to me right after we returned to the fake vige that they will fight the next iing enemies on their own if there are no artificial master level magesing. And I agree.


    I told the vampires and werewolves to stay a bit distance from the fake vige. As for the angels, I told them to hide their wings and be the healers in case we need them.


    Now, what should I do? Leaving the rest to the armies today and look around to where the enemy ising from? Continuing our search for the enemy headquarter? Or stay here and help the army?


    .....


    ¡°Roy, you can just go with Shelia and Graham. I will stay here and help the army in emergency,¡± Arin said.


    I¡¯d like to believe what she said, but after looking at them drooling at the prisoners, I don¡¯t know if some of them want to have a bite on the new enemies. Or worse, they will aim their fangs on our own.


    ¡°...I¡¯ll just leave with Shelia. Graham, you stay here with the angels. No matter how prepared our armies are, some of them might still be wounded since the enemy is stronger. the angels might not have enough mana to heal everyone. But you have the most mana, so you should be able to heal the wounded, and fight at the same time with your clone in case of emergency. I¡¯ll go with Shelia since she has better tracking skill than you,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. That means if we are doing well, I won¡¯t have to do anything, right? That¡¯s good. I don¡¯t want to keep fighting without resting,¡± Graham said.


    ¡°This is war. You will keep being tense until the war is over whether you like it or not. And like I said in the past, if we can kill whoever started all this, even if you¡¯re my contracted monster, I will have no more need to summon you and get you participate in things like this ever again. Let¡¯s hope that we can kill the mastermind as soon as possible,¡± I said to Graham.


    He¡¯s the one whocked morale the most. But if I said that he can be free after all this, he might be a little bit more motivated. I saw him before when he fought a mohawk that he¡¯s still holding back and refuse to go all out. I know that because back when I first met him and ended up fighting with him in order to improve my spear technique, he was much better than when he fought the mohawk.


    If only I could get him to fight the enemy like when he fought me, with the help of his clone, he should be able to kill a mohawk faster than anyone. He¡¯s such a painful monster to have. But a powerful one, so I can only hope he will work better after this.


    I can see Graham¡¯s eyes changed. It feels as if there¡¯s a fire within. I guess baiting him with freedom is the right answer. Well, it¡¯s because of this situation. If it¡¯s not during a war, he would either ignore what I say, or even fight back.


    As a summoner, I hope there¡¯s a way to cancel a contract with a monster. This way, I can truly promise Graham that I will free him. But unfortunately, there¡¯s no such thing. The contract is until either one of us died.


    Many summoners who doesn¡¯t like their contracted monster would kill their own monster so they make contract with another person. It¡¯smon to happen until the summoner get a powerful monster. In fact, in my past life, I tried to do it as well. But I was too weak and Blobby is immortal.


    But now, I can kill Graham. But that¡¯s not what I want. So, the only thing I can do is promise him freedom and never ask him to help me again in the future after the cult is destroyed.


    Maybe there¡¯s a way to cancel a contract after my summoning level increased. Maybe expert level? Or even master level?


    If there¡¯s a way to cancel a contract, I will do it to Graham in the future. As for Shelia and Victoria, I will ask their permission first. Though I hope Victoria won¡¯t ask for it.


    Now, it¡¯s time for me to be the scout. I used portal to transport Shelia and I back to where Elsie noticed the iing enemy. And when I looked at the enemy reinforcement, there¡¯s really no one who noticed me looking.


    But it¡¯s still bad, because they are not directly in front of me. They are a few degrees on the west. Which means we still can¡¯t tell where the enemy headquarter is. Just how difficult it is to find it!?


    Well, I also didn¡¯t think that we would find it in just two days. But not finding any clue at all is simply annoy me. I hate this. I hate the cult.


    Though since I don¡¯t see anyone flying in the sky, I can just run in the air far from where they can detect me. And Shelia can do that as well.


    ¡°The enemy came from different direction than before. How can we find the mastermind?¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°Keep looking. Even if the ce we¡¯re going end up not where we want, there should be important figures from the cult in that ce. We can ask them moreter. And we can also get the prisoners to tell us where the Evil God is. Unless the vampires have drunk all their blood,¡± I said.


    ¡°You think they will say anything?¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°I doubt it. But if they think they are smart and try to lie, we have someone who can detect lies. And we can eliminate some ces based on their lies,¡± I said.


    ¡°I see. Being humans during a war is difficult. For us monsters, we just need to fight until death so the war is over. Well, as long as we werewolves can get our share of fighting, and you are still our king, we will do anything you want us to do,¡± Shelia said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll be counting on you.¡±


    ¡°Wait! I smell some people going to different direction. It¡¯s over there!¡±


    Shelia suddenly smelled some people moving on their own instead of going with the others. It¡¯s a bit behind of enemy reinforcement. Maybe that¡¯s why Elsie didn¡¯t notice them.


    ¡°Let¡¯s go over there and see who they are and where they are going. Maybe we can find some clues,¡± I said as we chased after those moving on their own.


    Finally, I can see a group of five people moving somewhere. None of them noticed using, so it¡¯s safe to say that they are not artificial master level mage. Though it¡¯s obvious that none of them have mohawk, we can¡¯t truly be safe just by knowing that. Who knows if someone managed to create a hair restoration potion? And what if there are mohawks who think that¡¯s a good hairstyle? I can only feel safe knowing that they didn¡¯t notice me looking at them.


    ¡°What should we do? Kill them?¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°Not yet. It seems like they are going somewhere. And from what I can see at the direction they are going, there are a lot of monsters hidden in a cave. They must be tamers trying to get all those monsters,¡± I said.


    Finally, the opponents will bring monsters with them. Everyone in the fake vige should be able to handle the enemies, but if these monsters areing, it will be bad. I guess I¡¯ll stop the search now and kill those monsters first.

 Chapter 511

    Chapter 511: Monsters in the Cave


    ¡°There¡¯s a cave with a lot of monsters? Are they being caged?¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°Yes. I see them not moving at all inside the cage. I don¡¯t know much about tamer, but maybe they have simr power as summoners that will force their contracted monsters to do anything they say. But if that¡¯s true, there¡¯s no need for the cult to put those monsters in a cage. Maybe there¡¯s another reason they were put inside a cage,¡± I said.


    Monsters in a cage. And they are being controlled by the cult members. The most likely thing that happen is another experiment.


    I have known about it for a long time. The cult is ying with monsters¡¯ lives. They would control the monsters, and modify them to be stronger. just like the monster that killed me in the past, and the Orc Emperor I fought back near Melk. Though I don¡¯t know about the monster that killed me. I was too weak at the time. Maybe that was just how strong that monster is normally.


    ¡°They are monsters, right? So, you¡¯re fine with killing them?¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°Hmm... maybe. For now, let¡¯s kill those people who seem to be tamers first. If they are truly tamers, the monsters should no longer be connected with a contract anymore and will run wild. We¡¯ll see about it,¡± I said.


    ¡°Hmm? Now that you mentioned it, I can smell the scent of various monsters. There¡¯s even the slight scent of a werewolf. And I might be wrong, but there¡¯s a monster that has a simr scent to Graham. Can you see them?¡±


    .....


    What? A werewolf and an angel?


    Well, I only saw the caged monsters before without seeing what type of monsters they are. But now that I looked again carefully, I can see that there are several humanoid monsters there.


    ¡°...We¡¯ll go after the tamers first. As for the monsters, we¡¯ll take care of themter. They are still being caged, so I don¡¯t think we need to be worried,¡± I said.


    There are only five people moving on their own toward the cave. None of them are artificial master level mage. But they might be expert level mages in elements other than taming. With the two of us here, it should be easy.


    We have been scouting for a while since we left everything to the army. I also left a lot of cors for them to put on the surviving enemies so they will be our prisoners. Or as the vampires¡¯ meal. Are they doing okay?


    Just as we were about to chase after those five people, Sonia came to report what happened.


    ¡°It¡¯s done. No one escapes. Many of the enemies are still alive. Only few people die. But none of them are from our side,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Just how did they capture so many people?¡± I asked curiously.


    ¡°Other than those who can fly, all of them fell into a pitfall filled with spikes and oil. Then, the fire mages burned them all. When you leave, the earth mages on our side built a moat around the fake vige and covered it with a thinyer of soil as a trap. The wind mages escaped through the sky, and some earth mages noticed the trap. But the werewolves helped by pushing them all into the pitfall,¡± Sonia said.


    What the hell? That sounds like a very simple n! But it works really well!


    I guess that¡¯s how it is against expert level mages. If the enemy have any artificial master level mages, we won¡¯t be able to seed with the n. Whoever nned it must be smart.


    ¡°Alright. Tell Graham and Arin that I will open a portal soon. They need toe here,¡± I said.


    If there are any werewolves, angels, or vampires in the cave, they might be someone that our monsters recognize. That¡¯s why I will call them hereter.


    After giving the message to Sonia, Shelia and I chased after the five cult members who seem to be tamers. Only two of them noticed using closer. They tried to attack us with their magic, but we are faster. We dodged their attacks, make the other three sleep with my gases. After that, Shelia knocked the other two unconscious.


    ¡°Don¡¯t you think that we have captured too many prisoners?¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°For these five, I will get Albert interrogate them. Maybe we will find out more about enemy¡¯s tamers, summoners, or their monsters,¡± I said.


    I put cors on the five cult members, and transported them to a prison in the capital of Consenza. It has been designated as a ce for me to transport the prisoners whom I find suspicious and might have a lot of information. Though I need Albert to get there without being found by those from Arturo. Especially the fake king of Arturo and those he brought with him.


    Now we just need to check the cave. I opened a portal to where Graham is, and see Graham and Arin are both already prepared toe. I also see Elsie on the other side.


    ¡°Elsie, I will be busy for a while. I will leave you to keep watch on the surrounding. And for now, I won¡¯t send another scout until we return,¡± I said to Elsie who nodded her head. I mean eyeball. I mean... whatever.


    ¡°So, why am I here?¡± Graham asked. He seriously doesn¡¯t have any interest at all. And now that he has somehow gotten used to seeing girls wearing revealing outfits, I don¡¯t know how to exploit his weakness anymore. And he¡¯s bing more and more of a pain in the ass.


    ¡°Sigh... There are monsters in the cave over there. And I think some of them are angels, werewolves, and probably vampires. I¡¯d like you three to see them yourself. And go talk to them as well. Whether they want to help us fighting the cultter or not, I need to make sure that the contract has been nullified first,¡± I said.


    I guided the three powerful monsters into the cave, and we see various monsters inside. There¡¯s even a sky serpent as well. Though this one is smaller than Spot. Other than that, there¡¯s an Orc Emperor, Smander, and various powerful monsters. But they seem weird.


    ¡°What do you three thinks?¡± I asked.


    ¡°They look a bit different from the same monsters that I have encountered in the past. Maybe they really have been modified like you said,¡± Shelia said.


    ¡°Monsters modification, huh? Oh, there are three vampires here. Though I have never meet them before. I¡¯ll go talk to them,¡± Arin said.


    Three vampires, huh? They look just like humans. They are being imprisoned in the same cage, with several other monsters. Though they seem to be very quiet.


    For now, I will open the cage and see what happens. I used Blobbykey to unlock the cage. Surprisingly, the monsters inside didn¡¯t attack us. Well, even if they attack us, we can easily defeat them. Unless they have been modified so bad that they became too strong for me.


    ¡°You three vampires over there! Do you know me?¡± Arin asked the three vampires.


    ¡°...¡±


    None of them answered. They seem to have lost all their energy.


    ¡°I¡¯m the Vampire Queen, Arin. If you can speak, talk!¡±


    The vampires still didn¡¯t answer at all.


    Sigh... how can we get an answer like this?


    ¡°Shelia, Graham, you two go check if there are any werewolves and angels. Here¡¯s a Blobby to unlock the door of the cage,¡± I said while giving my two monsters a Blobby each that will transform into a key. As for me, I¡¯ll stay with Arin for now.


    ¡°They didn¡¯t answer anything at all,¡± Arin said to me.


    ¡°Hmm... Hey! Are you all still under contracts?¡± I asked the monsters loudly to find someone who can answer. But none of them replied.


    This is annoying. What should I do now?


    Oh, right. They are vampires. Let¡¯s bribe him with blood.


    I grabbed a blood bag with my portal. It¡¯s filled with my blood. And Arin knew that as she¡¯s looking at it while drooling.


    I also grabbed three cups so I can share the blood for the three vampires. And I pour the blood on the cups, while leaving a bit behind in the bag for emergency useter before returning it with portal.


    ¡°Drink this. You might feel better after you had drunk this blood,¡± I said to the vampires.


    The vampires slowly moved toward the cups and drink it at once. Their expression changed after they drink my blood. Of course they will. My blood is the greatest delicacy among vampires. Though I won¡¯t let them have it for free if they want.


    ¡°So, can you talk now?¡± I asked the vampires.


    ¡°We want more blood!¡±


    ¡°Wrong thing to say,¡± I said as I killed one of them with one hit.


    Seeing how easy it is for me to kill a vampire who has just drank a bit of blood, not just the two vampires there. All the monsters watching are looking at me with fear.


    Now I¡¯m confused. Who is the monster again?

 Chapter 512

    Chapter 512: Modified Monsters


    After killing one of the three vampires, not only the two vampires left are quiet. The monsters watching are also shaking in fear. That mean at least the vampire is much stronger than most of the monsters here. At least that¡¯s what the monsters here recognize.


    ¡°You are so stupid thinking of attacking me for my blood. Can¡¯t you see clearly that I have the Vampire Queen by my side? If she follows me without being bonded by a contract, why would you think of attacking me, huh? Are you looking for death instead?¡±


    I guess I intimidated the vampires too much. What if they refuse to say anything because of fear? Then I think killing them would be much better.


    ¡°Roy. Don¡¯t you have some questions to them?¡± Arin reminded me to interrogate the vampires.


    ¡°Oh, right. Let¡¯s just move to the important part. We¡¯re in a hurry, you see. Can you tell me about this monster prison?¡± I asked the vampires about the existence of this cave.


    From what I see, I think this cave was made by an earth mage. Probably an expert level one. It was too newpared to what a cave should be. But it¡¯s still at least a few years old.


    Just as the vampires about to speak, I heard a voice speaking from the corner of the cage. It¡¯s still in the same cell as the vampires.


    .....


    ¡°So what if you¡¯re just a bit stronger than a Vampire Queen? The people who locked us in here are much stronger than that,¡± he said.


    He¡¯s also a monster. He has the appearance of a lizard who is walking with two legs. No, I guess he¡¯s not really a lizard. He has wings on his back. A dragon? What was it again? The race that look like a dragon?


    ¡°...You¡¯re a lizard?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m a proud member of dragonic race!¡±


    Oh, so easy to provoke. I guess he¡¯s really from dragonic race.


    In my memory of what I have read about dragonic race, although my memory is bad, I think I read something about them being distant descendant of real dragon like Andro. They are weaker than real dragons but they are smarter. Or at least that¡¯s what I read.


    ¡°Just answer my question. After you speak, none of the monsters here dare to leak a voice. Does it mean you¡¯re recognized as the leader? Even though there are bigger monsters than you? Well, I don¡¯t care. Anyway, it¡¯s simple. I ask, you answer. That¡¯s all. Do you understand?¡± I asked the dragonic man.


    ¡°You think I will talk to a human!? Dream on!¡±


    ¡°...you¡¯re annoying. I¡¯ll call you Gecko from now on. If the Vampire Queen can¡¯t make you talk, I need to get someone bigger,¡± I said to myself.


    ¡°Who the hell is a gecko here!?¡± Gecko shouted.


    I ignored the gecko that is leaping toward me. I turn my back toward him, and opened a portal directly to Andro¡¯s location. And just by opening the portal, all the monsters here feel the sheer pressure of the mighty Kaiser Dragon. Even though only his eye can be seen through the portal.


    ¡°W-what is that!?¡± Gecko shouted. And I ignored him.


    ¡°Hey, Andro! It¡¯s been a while!¡± I greeted the Kaiser Dragon on the other side.


    ¡°Oh, Roy! What can I do for you?¡± Andro asked.


    ¡°Well, I actually want you to teach this gecko a thing or two. But it seems like I don¡¯t need to do that anymore,¡± I said.


    ¡°Gecko? Oh, that dragonic man? He is a gecko indeed. HAHAHA!¡±


    Andro¡¯sughter was so loud that even got Shelia and Graham who are deep inside the cave shaking.


    ¡°So, Gecko, do you want to answer my questions?¡± I asked Gecko politely. If intimidating him can be called as polite.


    ¡°Yes! Please ask away! I will answer everything truthfully!¡±


    ¡°Okay. I guess that¡¯s it. Sorry, Andro. I took your time,¡± I apologized to Andro.


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind. I was bored anyway. Well, I¡¯ll see youter then!¡± Andro said before I close the portal.


    If only I can bring him to this world. We can defeat all the cult members with just a p of his wings. And the cult won¡¯t dare to fight us. Except maybe for the few master level mages.


    Anyway, it¡¯s questioning time.


    ¡°Why are you here? All of you monsters of different species here being locked in a cage. Why?¡±


    ¡°...We are either monsters that got summoned from our world, or monsters from this world, that have been tamed forcefully and became the strength of whoever did this to us,¡± Gecko said.


    Oh, so not all of them are from this world. But aren¡¯t there too many monsters to be summoned? What about the summoners? If they have summoners among the five whom I previously killed, they don¡¯t need toe here. They can just summon their monster from afar. But I guess that means there are no summoners among the wave.


    But does it mean they know the existence of the Pear-y Fruits? Well, it¡¯s not like I¡¯m the only one who know about it.


    ¡°So, all of you are contracted monsters?¡±


    ¡°Unfortunately, yes. But somehow, I feel like the contract disappears a few moments ago,¡± Gecko said. He truly changed after seeing Andro.


    I guess I killed their tamers on the way here. But what about summoned monsters?


    Surprisingly, there¡¯s a way for the cult to forcefully destroy a contract. That¡¯s what Gecko said. I¡¯m interested in it, but it seems like the side effect is the monsters will be weakened. There are some other side effects as well. Including the summoner became disabled person. I guess I won¡¯t do it with Graham then.


    Gecko told me that the cult uses their summoners to summon a monster. After that, they will forcefully summon a monster, and destroy the contract. It was well-known that summoned monsters are generally stronger than the same monsters in this world.


    That¡¯s why the cult summoned monsters from Monsters World. After the contract was broken, they used their tamers to create another contract. This way, the summoner will have a slot to summon new monster. They keep doing it until the summoners can¡¯t do it anymore. That¡¯s why there are so few summoners in the cult.


    And then, with the help of the tamers, they would do experiment on the monsters to make them even stronger. Probably, one of them is the monster that killed me.


    ¡°So, all of the monsters here have been modified?¡±


    ¡°...yes. For me, they just made my ws and fangs stronger. But some were experimented until they lost their mind. Those who are in this cell are monsters who still have their senses and only lightly modified,¡± Gecko exined.


    I looked at the vampires and Arin who is talking with them. Arin nodded at me telling that those vampires are different than normal ones. Is it their fangs?


    I guess I found a ce where they keep their monsters. But I doubt it¡¯s just this one cave. There must be other locations as well. And I can¡¯t rest easy since the monsters here look powerful. Most of our allies would be dead if these monsterse out and fight us. Good thing I killed the tamers. But is that all of them? Five? There should be more, right?


    ¡°Is there anyone here who still has a contract binding them?¡± I asked.


    Some of them raised their hands. But not all of them have hands, so some just raised their chin or do something to tell me that they still bound by a contract.


    Now, what should I do? Should I kill them all?


    ¡°Is everyone in this cell intellectual species that can talk and still have their senses after the experiment?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. There are some monsters who can still speak in the other cells. But their minds have slowly corroded and turned into wild beasts,¡± Gecko said.


    ...Aren¡¯t they all beasts? If a monster said they are beasts, I guess that¡¯s different then.


    ¡°Alright. All of you in this cell will be transported somewhere else using my portal. But first, I have to ask if any of you are still contracted to a summoner instead of a tamer. If so, I will think of another way,¡± I said.


    Fortunately, all of the monsters in this cell are contracted with tamers. So, they can¡¯t be summoned from distance. Though I still don¡¯t trust them.


    ¡°Good. You have meet Andro, right? The Kaiser Dragon? I will transport you all to his back. You can wait there until I finished with things here,¡± I said.


    ¡°Wait! You want us to stay on the back of the mighty Kaiser Dragon!? Are you insane!?¡± Gecko shouted.


    ¡°No. I¡¯m perfectly sane. That¡¯s why I still can¡¯t trust you all yet. Maybe some of you are still contracted with summoners and will end up fighting against uster. You lied thinking that I will leave you in this cell instead. Don¡¯t worry. At least at the moment, I have no intention to kill you,¡± I said as I opened a portal on Andro¡¯s back.


    ¡°Oh, is that you, Roy? It hasn¡¯t been long since you contacted me though?¡± Andro noticed that I opened a portal on his back.


    ¡°Yeah! Sorry, but I need these monsters to stay on your back for a while. Will you help me?¡± I asked Andro.


    ¡°No problem. It¡¯s not like I will do anything special to them. In fact, I might not notice they are there at all,¡± Andro replied.


    ¡°Umm... I¡¯d like to stay in this prison instead,¡± One of the monsters suddenly spoke.


    ¡°Rejected! Move your ass or I will force you to!¡±


    Some of the monsters didn¡¯t like the idea of moving to Andro¡¯s back, so they fight back. But with Arin and I here, we managed to get all of them to move.


    I¡¯ll ask them more questionster. There are still many cells we haven¡¯t checked. Though the rest are monsters that have lost their minds. Maybe I¡¯ll just kill them.

 Chapter 513

    Chapter 513: At the Last Cell


    After I transported the man/monster from the dragonic race along with everyone in the cell to Andro¡¯s back, I continue to the next cell.


    Even if some of them can fly and can fly away from Andro, I don¡¯t care. I told Andro to keep his intimidation at all time until I return. Just a little bit of intimidation should be enough to keep the monsters stay at his back.


    The second cell, I see more monsters. But good thing that they still have their senses. I can talk to them. Maybe I shouldn¡¯t open a portal after entering each cell. I¡¯ll just gather all those who will be moved to Andro¡¯s back together. So, I told those at the second cell to wait. And since they listened to me when I spoke to Gecko, I don¡¯t have to keep repeating what I say.


    In the second cell, some of the monsters are still connected with contracts. But no summoning contract. They got contracted by tamers. They are fine to be moved then.


    On the third cell, some of the monsters have lost their mind. I peeked at the fourth and see all of them lost their mind. I guess this is where they separate the line.


    But at least those in the third cell didn¡¯t attack me right away as soon as I entered the cell. I tried to ask them something, but conversation never happened. Seems like those with senses have given up on living. We have depressed monsters here.


    ¡°Alright. I will kill you all here then,¡± I said.


    .....


    ¡°...Sorry, but if you point your hostility to us, we will attack you even when we have no will to live,¡± one of the humanoid monsters with fish head said. He was a summoned monster from Monsters World. So, unlike the fishman that I fought in the past, this one has intelligent and can speak. Though I will kill it.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I¡¯m strong,¡± I said full of confidence.


    ¡°...That¡¯s reassuring. Please give me instant death.¡±


    ¡°Try not to fight back and give me trouble,¡± I said.


    ¡°...But you just said that you¡¯re strong?¡± the fishman asked.


    ¡°I am strong. But I don¡¯t want to waste my strength killing you all. Also, can¡¯t you just fight among yourselves here? That will make it easier for me to kill you,¡± I said.


    Right after I said that, the fishman attacked the orc emperor next to it. It¡¯s a brawl in a prison cell. For someone who has lost their will to live, that fishman seem to be enjoying a fight.


    I asked them to fight each other so I can save my stamina for the war. There are still a lot of cells deeper in the cave. It¡¯s something that an expert level earth mage built, so I guess it¡¯s to be expected for it to be so deep.


    If I can just call Celestine over here, she can easily destroy everything here in an instant. But tomorrow is the start of the tournament, so I won¡¯t ask her to do it.


    I dodged a monster that attacked me, and then with Aura gathered on my feet, I stuck myself on the wall and walk to the ceiling and just wait until the monster rumble here is over. Though there are some flying monsters that tried to attack me, I¡¯m doing fine.


    And when only three monsters remaining, with the fishman being one of them, I came down and killed the monsters.


    Now, to the fourth cage. But it seems like I won¡¯t even be able to get a proper conversation. I¡¯ll just use the irritating gases on the fourth cell and so on so they will fight among themselves. I¡¯ll kill thest one standing myself. For now, I¡¯ll transport those in the second cell to Andro¡¯s back.


    Now, I can go until the end of the cave and let the monsters fight among themselves. Though I won¡¯t use the gas on the cell where Shelia, Graham, or Arin entered. I told them to look around if they see any werewolves, angels, or vampires that they know.


    Well, beyond the third cell, the rest are mindless monsters. I might just kill them all in the end.


    As I keep spreading the gases on the cells, and the noise became too loud from the monsters fighting, I see Graham stopped on his track in front of the seventh cell while Arin and Shelia have gone deeper. Don¡¯t tell me that he¡¯s not motivated to look at the cell.


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong, Graham? I¡¯m going to get the monsters fight among themselves. It¡¯s best for you to keep going in case you find anyone you know,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Master, will you look at them? They are just monsters like me. And they used to have intellect. But look at them right now! They became mindless monsters because of some humans!¡± Graham shouted in anger.


    ¡°You think I don¡¯t know that? Didn¡¯t I tell you about how evil the cult is? Move your feet. I¡¯m going to kill the rest of the monsters. If there are any angels that you know, if you don¡¯t move fast, I will kill them,¡± I said to Graham while spreading the gas to the cell in front of him.


    ¡°...I¡¯ll go,¡± Graham said while looking dejected.


    What is it? Does he feel even less motivated now? What an annoying guy. I think the Graham who used to feel shy whenever he sees girl with revealing outfits are much better. I couldugh at him back then. Now he¡¯s just a depressed angel without motivation.


    For now, I¡¯ll continue going to the next cell one by one and use the irritating gases. I can use the one that makes them kill each other, but this is fine. That one uses more mana after all.


    When I asked Sara if she wants to learn my gases, she said that she don¡¯t need the irritating gas, depressing gas, or the one that make people kill each other. She doesn¡¯t need them because she fights from distance. As for other gases, they have other purposes and very convenience.


    Which mean I¡¯m the only one who can exploit all the gases however I want since I can fight both in close range and long range. And with the grenades, I can use the gases from afar as well. Seems like having Aura and air element both is the bestbination.


    Soon enough, I see Arin and Shelia returned. Seems like they have finished looking for the monsters.


    ¡°I have seen all the werewolves here. None of them are the werewolves I know. But I don¡¯t like how someone robbed them of their will, so I killed them myself,¡± Shelia reported.


    ¡°That¡¯s fine. What about Arin?¡± I asked the vampire.


    ¡°There are some other vampires as well. But I didn¡¯t do anything to them,¡± Arin said.


    ¡°That¡¯s fine. I will take care of things here. I will transport you back to the fake vige,¡± I said as I opened a portal.


    ¡°What about Graham?¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°...I¡¯ll take care of him as well,¡± I said.


    The two monsters entered the portal and I closed it right away. And then, I used Divine Vision to see the cell at the deepest. Which means, the monsters have long lost their mind. And I see Graham entered the cell and killed every single monster except for one. An angel.


    I didn¡¯t waste any more time as I run while spreading the irritating gases on the cells I passed. And I stopped in front of thest cell to see Graham is hugging the angel that is trying to kill him.


    ¡°Georgia! It¡¯s me! Your brother!¡± Graham said to the angel he hugged.


    ...This is the worst. Not only it¡¯s someone he knows. It¡¯s his own sister. And she has lost her mind from the experiments.


    ¡°...Graham. What will you do now?¡± I asked Graham.


    ¡°What!? Don¡¯t you dare kill my sister! Even if you¡¯re my master, I will kill you!¡±


    ¡°Fine. I will leave her in your care. Whether you will kill her yourself or you want to bring her to the monster vige, it¡¯s up to you. Just so you know, as long as the cult still exist, this kind of things will continue to happen in the future. Whether it¡¯s another angel, a werewolf, a vampire, or even a human being, they don¡¯t care. The only thing I want you to do, and what I keep reminding you about, is for you to help me destroy the cult. That¡¯s all. What will you do now?¡± I asked.


    ¡°This... I¡¯ll find a way to get her back no matter what! Master! Please help me! And in return, I will do my best to destroy everything rted to the cult!¡±


    This Graham is different. From now on, he won¡¯t be baited with freedom anymore. But with the strong hate toward the cult.


    I always wanted Graham to be like this. But I don¡¯t want it to be this way. Seeing his own sister being used as an experiment and lost her mind is the worst thing that can happen to him. Though I never thought he would have a sister.


    ¡°Hmm? I see some of the enemies approaching. Five of them, and they are all mohawks,¡± I said while looking outside.


    ¡°Master. I will kill them myself!¡± Graham said while still hugging her sister.


    I used the sleeping gas and calming gas on her so she will sleep quickly. And then, I transported her back to the fake vige. The other angels should know about her.


    After telling them to take care of her, I closed the portal.


    ¡°Five mohawks at once. I will go as well. But are you confident that you can win?¡± I asked Graham.


    ¡°This will be the first time you see me go all out. Just watch,¡± Graham said.


    ¡°Fine.¡±


    One against five. Maybe two since Graham has his shadow clone. I¡¯m curious at how strong he is since he said this is the first time he will fight seriously. Maybe Graham is actually the strongest monster that I have.

 Chapter 514

    Chapter 514: Graham¡¯s Anger


    Graham and I left the cave to face the five mohawks. All of them are artificial master level mages and they realized that I was looking at them. Although they didn¡¯t stop going toward the fake vige¡¯s direction, since I keep looking at them while showing my hostility, they slowed down and had a discussion before changing their direction and move here.


    ¡°All five of them are running here. Since there are no children, you are free to kill them,¡± I said to Graham.


    ¡°I don¡¯t care even if they are children or not. Whoever did that to my sister deserve to die!¡± Graham said.


    ¡°I can¡¯t have you do that. No matter what, don¡¯t ever kill children even if they are enemies. We need to try other means first,¡± I said.


    ¡°That means if there¡¯s no other way, it¡¯s fine to kill them, right?¡±


    ¡°...Just don¡¯t kill children or I will forcefully give you the order. Don¡¯t forget that you¡¯re my contracted monster.¡±


    This Graham is dangerous. I don¡¯t know if he is as strong as he thought he is. Ever since I met him and we fought, I would never imagine that he would be like this. Though if he¡¯s stronger than back then, I am confident that I can beat him. Though I don¡¯t know if I am stronger than him or not. There are many ways to fight. Including the cowardly way.


    .....


    ¡°Fine. It¡¯s not like I can disobey you anyway. And you have many ways to kill me. I know that since I have seen you fight many times,¡± Graham said.


    Seems like he knows that without having me to tell him.


    ¡°You said you are confident that you can defeat all five of them alone. How will you do that?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Just watch. I will go alone from here,¡± Graham said as he spread all his wings and flies toward the mohawks. He¡¯s much faster than what I thought. Even faster than Spot! Just how many secrets does he have?


    But now that he will follow me to destroy the cult, I can rest easy. He is the greatest ally that I never thought I had. Well, if he truly can fight all five mohawks on his own.


    He runs ahead of me, and then he summoned his shadow clone and fly together to the mohawks.


    By this time, the mohawks¡¯ attention turned from me who was looking at them, to Graham whom they can see. How can someone defeat five master level mages alone in a direct fight? Even if they are artificial master level mages, it was not supposed to be easy.


    Oh? Now, he¡¯s holding his spear with just one hand. As for the other hand... seems like he can create a shadow spear from his shadow. Both him and his shadow clones are holding two spears.


    Using two weapons at once is not easy. I also sometimes fight using both spear and katana or gun. With its length, I used the spear mostly to defend. Well, it mostly depends on the situation though.


    But using two spears at once, and both spears have the same length, is difficult thing to do. Even if I can do that, it¡¯s thanks to Victoria or Blobbies changing their shape. I guess I can still learn something from Graham. Unless he¡¯s just an idiot fighting without a care.


    ...He¡¯s an idiot fighting without a care. Graham approached one of the mohawks who raised an Earth Wall to block him. But Graham doesn¡¯t care as he let his shadow clone hit the Earth Wall. Then, using his own shadow clone as a step, he jumped over the wall and targeted another mohawk who is already prepared to cast a magic.


    Graham received a Fire Ball directly on his face, but his two spears pierced the enemy. And he doesn¡¯t care at all since he can use healing magic on himself. By the time he¡¯s going for the next mohawk, the burns on his face has all disappear.


    And now, Graham used light magic to shoot a beam toward the next enemy. Right after he shot it, he creates a Light Shield in front of him.


    It¡¯s not enough to protect him from artificial master level mages¡¯ magic. But he has healing magic. Also, it was to distract the opponents. He still has his shadow clone helping him.


    When his shadow clone pierced its spears into two mohawks at once, I stopped at a distance. There¡¯s no longer any need for me to help Graham.


    Graham fights recklessly. But it was because he has healing magic, light magic, and his shadow clone. I think his strategy came from watching me fight many times in the past with different strategies.


    But the fight is not over yet. He still has three mohawks to fight. One of the mohawks that his shadow clone pierced with its spear is still alive. Maybe it¡¯s actually two and a half. He won¡¯t live long with that kind of injury no matter how much he has been strengthened.


    Oh, wait. It¡¯s three. He¡¯s also a healer. An artificial master level mage who is also a healer is annoying. And Graham knows that.


    Graham now fights while focusing on the healer. But the other mohawks stopped him. Should I help?


    Wait! Is his shadow clone shooting a beam?! His clone can also use magic!? That was surprising. I didn¡¯t expect that at all.


    A shadow clone which is exactly the same as the original. It can use the same light magic and probably Graham¡¯s healing magic as well. It uses the same high level of spearsmanship like the original. And unlike the original, it¡¯s fine to be sacrificed. Someone who is not afraid of dying. And as long as the original has enough mana, no matter how many times the shadow clone is destroyed, the original can summon it again and again. And it can be a huge clone, or a small one.


    That¡¯s cheating. Why didn¡¯t I awaken my shadow element? Two Roys using Aura. We might be able to progress our mission to destroy the cult even faster.


    Hmm... I guess the reason I didn¡¯t see Graham¡¯s clone using healing magic on Graham is because Graham can use it himself.


    Now, his clone has defeated the healer mohawk. Two more to go. But now that it¡¯s two against two, Graham has the upper hand. As long as the opponents didn¡¯t keep their distance. But if there are no wind mages among them, they won¡¯t be able to escape anyway.


    Oh, that¡¯s interesting. Graham grabbed the shadow spear while holding it close to the de as he attacked his enemy with it. The enemy then stepped back to dodge his attack. Except that Graham slid his other hand on his real spear, to hold it at the other end of the spear. The butt of the spear.


    He did that while swinging his real spear upward. And then, he swung it down with power toward the enemy. Thanks to him holding the butt of his spear, he can reach the enemy while swinging it down. Even though he received many injuries until he can use that move, he doesn¡¯t care. Healers are such a cheat.


    Now that it became a one on two fight. And thisst enemy, Graham and his shadow clone pierced all four spears toward the mohawks¡¯ chest. With Graham stabbing the mohawk from the front, and his clone stabbed the opponent from behind. That¡¯s a cruel way to end someone¡¯s life.


    After that, Graham made his clones and his shadow spear disappear. But Graham¡¯s anger is not something that can easily disappear. He just found out that his sister was used by the cult after all.


    ¡°You! You! Shithead! Fuck you! Kill! Die!¡±


    Graham shouted in anger while stabbing the corpse of the mohawk again and again. And now I¡¯m also looking at the other corpses to find that one of them is actually still alive.


    I approached the living one and stabbed him with Reizpear to finish him off. Now, all of them has died. And I really don¡¯t need to do anything since Graham finished everything on his own. Well, if I didn¡¯t count the one that I finished myself.


    ¡°Graham, that¡¯s enough,¡± I said to Graham.


    ¡°Die! Die! Die!¡±


    Graham didn¡¯t listen to me.


    ¡°He¡¯s already dead. And if you keep wasting time like this, we won¡¯t be able to find out who did everything,¡± I said to Graham as I grabbed his spear to stop him from stabbing the corpse any longer.


    ¡°Huff... Huff... Who did it?¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re asking me that right now? I don¡¯t know. My guess is the Professor. I¡¯ll ask Albertter if the Professor knows something about any monster experiments. For now, let¡¯s go back. We also need to see if there¡¯s something we can do to your sister,¡± I said.


    After I said something about his sister, Graham finally calmed down.


    ¡°Georgia... What will you do to her?¡± Graham asked.


    ¡°Probably to keep her locked. Until we find a way to return her to normal, it¡¯s impossible for her to live anywhere. Even in the monster vige,¡± I said.


    ¡°...I understand,¡± Graham said.


    And so, I opened a portal back to the fake vige. I can see the angels are looking at Graham with worry. Even if he has a bad personality, he is still their leader after all.

 Chapter 515

    Chapter 515: Graham¡¯s Past


    After returning back to the fake vige, Graham went toward his sister right away. His sister is being held by the angels who knows her. But she¡¯s trying to fight back after she woke up from my magic.


    From what I saw in the cage, it seems like the monsters have been programmed to not fight their own allies. Even though she was inside a cell full of other mindless monsters, she didn¡¯t fight at all. But once Graham entered the cell, she started fighting him.


    She used light magic to attack since she has no spears in hand. If she had her spear, she might be even stronger than Graham and no one can stop her.


    I think I saw a weapon rack at the entrance of the cave. But I didn¡¯t think that they were weapons because I focused on the monsters. And there were some logs used by big monsters as a club. Probably. That¡¯s why I thought those things were decoration.


    I¡¯ll return back to the caveter to pick the weapons. Maybe there are amazing magic weapons like Reizpear.


    For today, I will no longer send scout. Maybe I¡¯ll start sending Elsie and the other tomorrow. I¡¯ll let them take a rest today. Even if their trap worked, they should be tired after all.


    I¡¯ll call Sonia and give report to Albert now.


    .....


    ¡°...That¡¯s all. Since we might find something from the monsters, I¡¯d like to be able to meet Albert directly. Tell him that I need him toe when he has free time. It might take a while questioning the monsters,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. For the cult to somehow captured Graham¡¯s sister was out of expectation. What about the other monsters?¡± Sonia asked.


    ¡°I¡¯ll ask themter to see if they lost someone like Graham did. Just having one of them in the cult¡¯s side will give trouble for those in our side who knows them. I¡¯ll ask the humans as well if they have someone missing. That¡¯s why today we won¡¯t look for the enemy headquarter,¡± I said.


    ¡°Understood. I¡¯ll ry the message to Albert, Lynn, Henry, Ka and the others. See youter then,¡± Sonia disappears after saying that.


    I get why she wants to tell Lynn and old man Henry. But for her to inform Ka and the others as well despite the fact that they¡¯re going to be busy with the tournament and protecting Albert and the others... I guess Ka asked Sonia to ry everything I said to Albert to her as well. I just hope she won¡¯t overdo it. She doesn¡¯t need to know everything here.


    I know that Ka must have realized that as well. That¡¯s why she will probably be the first one to be informed. And then, she will tell Sonia to not inform the situation here to some others depending on the content of the report. I¡¯ll just trust her with everyone there. She¡¯s smart.


    I started to get everyone to report if they have any missing family members or friends. Though when I asked the werewolves, they said that even if they meet their own missing family members, they won¡¯t hold back and continue fighting. That¡¯s just how they are.


    After getting the reports, I see that Graham is still trying to talk with his sister. They have put a cor on her so she won¡¯t be able to use magic. But her strengthened body is still troublesome for the angels, so they asked the help of the werewolves. That will only get the werewolves tired before fighting. I guess I will need to do something.


    I approached Graham¡¯s sister who is being held by four werewolves, and used sleeping and calming gases on her. It took a while, but she finally calmed down and fell asleep.


    ¡°Tie her hands with this rope. It¡¯s made by the elves and strong enough to not break when I tried to with my full strength without Aura. She won¡¯t be able to fight back anymore,¡± I said.


    Now that she has calmed down, I tried to leave. But Graham stopped me.


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°...Can I talk with you?¡±


    I have a bad feeling about this. Don¡¯t tell me it¡¯s a shback? And he¡¯s asking for my advice? But I also can¡¯t say no to my monster. Especially if I want to see his loyalty. Not his loyalty to me. but toward his hatred to the cult. I guess it can¡¯t be helped.


    ¡°Sure. Let¡¯s go somewhere quiet,¡± I said as I lead him to the forest.


    Now, it¡¯s just the two of us. and I waited until he speaks first.


    ¡°...As you already know, I¡¯m a half angel and half demon. My twelve wings have white and ck color,¡± Graham said.


    Of course I know that. I have seen it several times. Including when he was so angry, he fought five mohawks alone. He was showing his zebra patterned wings even though he used to say that it¡¯s not something he wants to show to anyone.


    By the way, I called it zebra patterned wings because that¡¯s how it looks like. Instead of just three pairs on top being white and three others ck, it became stripes instead. Just like a zebra. It¡¯s like his back is has stripes.


    Actually, it was first called as such by Victoria. And I copied it from her.


    ¡°...my mother is an archangel, while my father is an archdemon. They both died when my sister, Georgia, was just born. They died from being stepped by a colossal zebra,¡± Graham continued his story.


    ...Colossal zebra? It¡¯s like... a zebra that is so big, right? I never knew such monster exist. But the name is self-exnatory.


    Wait! Is that why he doesn¡¯t like the color of his wings that has zebra pattern? Somehow, the story started in a ridiculous way.


    ¡°I managed to survive while protecting Georgia. But our parents died. Anyway, as you can see, I¡¯m half angel and half demon. I inherited both my parents¡¯ trait. But Georgia is a full archangel. She didn¡¯t inherit anything from my father other than blood rtion.


    ...No, I didn¡¯t see that. How could I know that she¡¯s a full archangel when she¡¯s not spreading her wings? But let¡¯s get him continue his story. I don¡¯t want to waste too long listening to his story.


    And it does take a long time. Graham is reminiscing about his happy time with his sister as Graham became the leader of the angels. That¡¯s why there are some angels who knows about his sister. The two siblings used to rule the angels together.


    Though it¡¯s just a bad leadership. They ended up bing stupid when I met them. Though slowly, they improved their intellect little by little. They even able to look at girls wearing revealing clothes now. Unlike back then when they were so embarrassed just to see it.


    They rarely meet any monsters since they live in a floating cloud ind. They are just lucky that they never encounter any monsters. Until they got sted away by Andro¡¯s p of wing.


    Anyway, it happened long before that. Graham¡¯s sister suddenly disappeared without a word. Even after years of looking, they never found any traces of her.


    If my guess is correct, that was because she got summoned by someone from the cult. That means the cult has started growing their monsters from a long time ago. And that also means that there are still many other monsters they controlled all around the world. Does it mean the war is long from over?


    ¡°...I never thought that I would see her. In this way! She doesn¡¯t even remember me anymore! Master! Please, help my sister! I will do anything for you!¡± Graham pleaded.


    Oh, the story is over? I guess that¡¯s it.


    ¡°I can only ask other people to help. Whether they can do it or not, they can only try. And whether you like it or not, you will still continue killing the cult members with me,¡± I said honestly.


    ¡°That¡¯s fine. Though this time, I¡¯d like to help you with everything I got,¡± Graham said.


    ¡°If you¡¯re cool with it. Though next time, try to not get too crazy like before. If you die too soon, you won¡¯t be able to see your sister anymore.¡±


    ¡°Understood.¡±


    Just like that, the shback is over. It¡¯s just amon story. Losing someone they love because of the cult. But he was lucky enough to meet her again. But for me, even though I don¡¯t have many people I loved in the past life, there were some I have known since I became a doctor. If I meet them now, they won¡¯t even know me. But that¡¯s fine. As long as I can kill everyone rted to the cult, I know that those people can live happily. At least they will be much happier than living while not knowing when they will attack your vige.


    That is why I didn¡¯t try to meet with those people. I don¡¯t know if they are still alive or they have died. Or even the fact that they will still be born in this world or not. I had young regr customer in my days as a doctor in a vige after all.


    I returned back to the fake vige to see everyone is tired. It¡¯s just the second day. And the war is far from over.


    At least we need to survive until the tournament is over. Or until the final. At least at that time, one of the losing sides will be able to help us. Either it¡¯s Celestine or Julia, just one of them will be a great reinforcement to us.

 Chapter 516

    Chapter 516: Sealed Skill Unsealed


    Today is the day of the opening ceremony. But it¡¯s impossible for me to attend the ceremony. It¡¯s because we have new arrivals from the enemy side. And they are much more than the previous two days!


    Let¡¯s see... Just the artificial master level mages alone are numbered over fifty! And here, those who can defeat just one artificial master level mage are too few.


    It seems that I still underestimated the cult. I never thought that they would send so many mohawks on the day of the opening ceremony.


    But there were some good things as well. Though considering that we have to face so many enemies makes me think that those things were not good enough. Well, I can only do my best.


    One of the good thing is that there are no children among the iing mohawks. All of them are already adults. Which means that all of us won¡¯t hesitate to kill them all. Though they need to be strong enough to do that first.


    The other good thing is about the angels. But for now, I will check on the situations first. Despite the fact that I¡¯m facing ten mohawks at once.


    First, thebined army from Arturo and Varadis. Despite being obviously weaker than the enemies, their teamwork is much better. They should be able to handle the enemies for a bit.


    .....


    The greatest dangers are still the mohawks. There are over fifty of them. With ten of them are busy fighting me alone. It¡¯s good that I managed to get ten of them focused on me.


    As for the rest of the mohawks, The monsters are taking care of most of them.


    Another good thing that I said before is about the angels. Though it happened not in the way that anyone would experience.


    Yesterday, Graham reunited with his sister, Georgia. Georgia was separated from her brother a long time ago as she was possibly got summoned by summoner from the cult. And she got experimented by the cult until she lost her mind.


    Georgia doesn¡¯t even remember her own brother. She even tried to kill him. Though I have taken her to Monsters Vige.


    I have told the angels and the monsters over there to take care of her.


    Once the angels heard about Georgia, some of them, without hesitation,e over to this side to help with the war. Thanks to that, even though there weren¡¯t many, we got some reinforcement.


    Graham, with his reckless way of fighting after he found a reason to fight, fought three mohawks at once. I hope he won¡¯t die.


    The angels also fought the mohawks with strengthened resolution. They are very helpful right now when we have to fight too many mohawks.


    As for the werewolves, they just love this situation. They want to get the chance to fight artificial master level mages. And they refuse to let the angels to take the spotlight. That¡¯s why they became even more motivated after seeing the angels fight. Especially Shelia.


    Shelia never told me about this, but I know that she¡¯s thinking of herself as my righthand woman. It¡¯s because I¡¯m the Werewolf King. And she¡¯s currently the strongest werewolf that we have. That¡¯s why she feels that her position is being threatened by Graham¡¯s strength as he has shown to everyone with his reckless way of fighting that he¡¯s stronger than her.


    Shelia thinks of him as her junior. And now, she¡¯s started thinking of him as a rival. I hope this way, both Shelia and Graham will get stronger together.


    Meanwhile, the vampires also helped fighting the mohawk together. Arin herself can fight a mohawk one on one. But I gave some of the vampires something that can boost their strengths. My blood. I only gave blood bag filled with my blood to the vampire dukes. It¡¯s because I hope they can defeat the mohawks if they drink a bit of my blood.


    The result, as I am busy fighting ten mohawks, the rest of the mohawks are busy with the monsters.


    Oh, that was close. One of the mohawks I¡¯m fighting was using a Wind sh to attack me. But I can dodge it. I also need to focus on my fight.


    Other than the three monster races, I also brought here the monsters that I freed from the cave. Gecko and the other modified monsters.


    I have let Albert to meet themst night. And Albert told me that they are willing to help us fighting the cult. Or at least for this war. So, I gave them purple armbands for them to wear to let them recognize friends or foes.


    Since Albert said that they are good, I can at least believe that they won¡¯t attack humans from our side. Though not all of them. Just Gecko, the modified vampires, and some other monsters. As for the rest, they were released and can live freely.


    The fight this time will be long, but it¡¯s not something that we can¡¯t handle. Though the fight is not my biggest concern. It¡¯s those who are retreating after seeing me fight. They know that I¡¯m an Aura user and most likely, they will retreat to inform the so-called Evil God.


    For that, I will leave it to Elsie and Sunny. Elsie will look for those who are retreating, and instruct Sunny the direction where she will shoot her beam. Sunny has grown big and has became the target of the enemy thanks to her size. But the enemies are too busy with other opponents. And once they knew that Sunny only aimed her attack to those who retreated, they choose to not target her and can only fight the others first. But I know that they are waiting for a chance.


    Leaving them aside, this is the first time in a while that I got hurt this badly. Not counting the injury I got on purpose the sake of victory. Seems like handling ten of them at once is too hard for me.


    But I remember something from this fight. It¡¯s that I¡¯m weak.


    I remember that I had to use any means possible to survive in my past life. Hence, I created what I called Shameless Survival Arts.


    It has been so long since I used one. I guess I must have grown much stronger since I didn¡¯t use them for a long time. And the one that I¡¯m proud of is how I ended up getting a beautiful girl to fall for me, Sophie.


    And now, when I¡¯m being pressed like this, it¡¯s time to use it again. One of my arts.


    There¡¯s no battle skill among the arts, but I can use it to gain a little bit of advantage.


    I took a deep breath and let my magic hold as much air as I can in my lung. Seeing it, the mohawks prepared themselves to receive my attack. Three of the earth mages raised three Earth Walls in different directions. And the rest are hiding behind the walls.


    Since I have fought them for a while, they must be thinking that earth magic can protect themselves better than magic of other elements.


    They are right if I fight normally. Though this time, they should have chosen to create Wind Barriers instead.


    After they prepared to receive my attack, I started using one of my skill, screaming.


    ¡°AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA!!!¡±


    No one is prepared to receive my scream, which has been enhanced by air magic. All of them, including some people fighting near us, got dizzy after hearing such loud noise. And they covered their ears with their hands. And that is my chance.


    While they are busy covering their ears, I stopped screaming as I rushed toward one of the Earth Wall of which four mohawks are hiding behind. They were toote to react when they see me right in front of them as I killed them using Reizpear.


    After that, while the rest of the mohawks haven¡¯t collect themselves, I transformed Blobbies into a gun and shoot at the wind mage mohawks. They haven¡¯t prepared their Wind Barriers, so my shoot hit them all and killed them.


    Four mohawks behind the Earth Wall I killed, and two more wind mage mohawks. I killed six out of the ten mohawks that I fought thanks to my shameless arts. Even though it was just screaming. Enhanced with air magic so my scream was directed toward their ears. Though it was still too loud and many people were affected.


    Now, only four mohawks in front of me. None of them are wind mages, so no one can change the trajectory of my bullets anymore.


    One earth mage, two fire mages, and one lightning mage. This is doable. Though at the moment, there are several other mohawks who think that I¡¯m a huge threat. Fortunately, myrades are not weak enough for them to ignore. Though it won¡¯t be long.


    For now, I will need to take care of these four first. Maybe I should scream one more time. Or maybe several more times. The battle today won¡¯t end just because of my screams. But it should help. Though i will end up confusing my own allies.


    Well, they are the one who needs to know that anything could happen in a war. Including loud scream. They should understand that.

 Chapter 517

    Chapter 517: Spot¡¯s Strongest Breath Attack


    Now that I have defeated six mohawks, I need to get rid of the next four quickly or I will have to fight more than ten since the other mohawks have noticed how threatening I am.


    Before the four mohawks attacked me, I made an obvious body gesture of taking a deep breathe to make them think that I¡¯m going to scream again. And this time, their reaction is to use offensive magic instead of protecting themselves. They knew that if I¡¯m going to scream, the only thing they can do is to cover their ears. They want to kill me first before I could scream. Though their attack couldn¡¯t reach me.


    And I didn¡¯t scream again. I just aimed my two Blobbygun on each hand, toward the earth mage and lightning mage. Now that there are no wind mages, the bullet won¡¯t change direction midair.


    The reason I targeted these two first was because the earth mage is the only one who have defensive magic strong enough to stop me. And the lightning mage was targeted because he has the strongest magic. And since they are trying to attack me now, they don¡¯t have enough time to dodge or block my shot.


    And I also filled the Blobbyguns with special bullets made by Sara. They look just like a normal iron bullets. And Sara made them since she now can control metal albeit just a little. But her control is good enough to create something as small as a bullet.


    But what makes the bullet she created special, is the fact that she also used air magic.


    The bullet she created, has a hollow area in it. And Sara used her air magic to create sleeping gas inside the bullets.


    .....


    Why didn¡¯t I thought of it? Most likely because I can only do what I can do. And I can¡¯t make a bullet. The only thing I can do is to find good stones, and shaped them into bullets. I can¡¯t make something hollow inside the stones. And I never imagine to use that idea on Blobbies.


    Anyway, I used such bullets toward the earth mage and the lightning mage. I got my shot hit the earth mage right at his rib, and I hit the lightning mage at his right thigh bone. Both bullets got dented because of the impact with the bones, and stuck inside their bodies after fracturing their bone. But that¡¯s what I want.


    Because of the impact to their bones and the dent, the gas inside the bullets will be spread in their bodies. And I can see that for mages at their level, gases made by someone in advanced level air mage, can affect their bodies greater than letting them inhale the gases. Also, as a doctor, I know how dangerous it is to have air inside the body.


    Such a crazy invention by an air and earth elements mage. If I can use poisonous gases instead, it will be much more deadly.


    The earth mage and the lightning mage are down. They are sleeping peacefully. Except that it¡¯s doubtful that they will still be alive or not. Though the chance is high that they will never wake up again. They will die in their sleep. What a dangerous creation. And I love it! And if they don¡¯t die, I can take care of themter.


    Of course right after shooting my guns, I didn¡¯t forget to dodge the enemies¡¯ attack. I got my left hand slightly burnt, but overall, I did very well fighting so many artificial master level mages. Though I need to kill thest two since there are several mohawksing this way while ignoring their opponents.


    I aimed my Blobbyguns toward the two fire mages, but instead of attacking me, they keep running to make it harder for me to take aim. And by this time, they already forgotten that I had taken a deep breath.


    This will be my second scream. And I of course used air magic to get my scream directed toward the two.


    ¡°AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA!!!!¡±


    The two fire mages stopped on their tracks. Not just them, but also those who heard my scream. Even though I concentrated the air to make my scream louder for these two, it¡¯s not like the others wont be able to hear it.


    Now that the two fire mages are busy covering their ears with their hands, I rushed toward them and kill them with Reizpear. I don¡¯t want to waste Sara¡¯s bullets after all.


    They died instantly with the de of the spear pierced their hearts.


    And now, I need to take care of the next group of mohawks.


    About thirteen of them have escaped from their pursuers, and chasing me. Just fighting ten artificial master level mages and I got hurt although they were just minor injuries. And thirteen of them just too much.


    And so, I run.


    I escaped from there and run toward an open area where there are no trees. I need to bait the enemies to follow me.


    They probably think that I have no means of fighting with this many people at once. And they are right. Thats why this time, I¡¯m just the bait.


    If I am just a bait, who will fight them? Obviously, it¡¯s the strongest monster among our allies. Our lovely serpent who shares a simr name with many dogs. His name is Spot.


    Where is he? He¡¯s far high in the sky. Floating there where no artificial master level mages can detect. And he float there in one spot without even moving, with his mouth aiming toward where I stand.


    Once I gave him the signal, he will shoot his breath magic to attack this ce. That¡¯s why I need to get as many of the mohawks to this ce before I send the signal.


    So far, only eleven of them are here. The other two who are chasing me are still far behind. I need to survive here for a few seconds until all thirteen of them are here. After that, I need to survive again until Spot¡¯s breath attack get close enough that no one can dodge it before I move elsewhere.


    Good! All thirteen of them are within the range. I covered my mouth with my hand, and opened a very small portal toward Spot¡¯s ear.


    ¡°Spot, attack now!¡±


    I said in a voice that no one else can hear. And now, I need to wait until they can¡¯t dodge Spot¡¯s strongest attack.


    The wounds on my body increased. Even though I have no magic to protect myself, my Aura covering my whole body helped me survive enemies¡¯ attack.


    Finally, with my Divine Vision, I can see Spot¡¯s attack is getting closer. With that speed, no one here can escape. Except for me.


    During this harsh fight, I opened a portal on the ground and let my body fall there. The other side of the portal is connected to Spot¡¯s head, so I managed to escape in time while the enemies are confused. And I closed the portal quicly after I entered it.


    Just like that, all thirteen artificial master level mages died and turned into ashes. No one survives Spot¡¯s strongest breath attack.


    I need a long time to defeat ten mohawks, while Spot only need one attack to kill thirteen. As expected of the strongest monster here.


    ¡°Sigh... that was tiresome. There are too many enemies, but even now, their main force hasn¡¯t arrived yet,¡± I said.


    ¡°Well, such is war. Now that my job here is done, I will fight with the rest. And now, I can¡¯t use my breath attack anymore unless I want to killnour own allies. What about you?¡± Spot asked.


    ¡°I am too tired now. I¡¯ll take a few minutes of rest before I return to the battle. By the way, if you see any angels, tell them to heal me. I got injuries all over my body,¡± I said.


    ¡°Are you dying?¡± Spot asked.


    ¡°No.¡±


    ¡°Then you don¡¯t need healing, right?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m on priority list. To make the battle progress to our advantage, I¡¯m someone who is not allowed to get hurt too much. That¡¯s why even if I¡¯m not dying, I need to get healed quick,¡± I said.


    ¡°What priority list? Though you¡¯re right. As the key yer in this war, you have to be in top shape at all time. I¡¯ll find one angel as fast as possible and drop you from my head,¡± Spot said as he fly toward one battle to help the fight.


    The two of us have killed twenty-three mohawks. And I think Graham, Shelia, and Arin must have killed some as well. That mean we have reduced the number of mohawks by around half.


    This is good. Once I got healed, I can continue killing more mohawks. And I also need to kill those who are trying to retreat.


    So far, Sunny and Elsie worked so well in killing those who are retreating. I guess with this, we can dy the Evil God to know that I¡¯m an Aura user.


    Though I don¡¯t believe that we can keep the secret for too long. But theter they know, the longer we have our advantage. Because once they know that I¡¯m an Aura user, they will use every mean to kill me first. Probably even sending a real master level mages. That¡¯s why I need to be in top shape at all time.

 Chapter 518

    Chapter 518: Gecko¡¯s Fire Breath


    I lie down on top of Spot¡¯s head while he¡¯s looking for his next target. Seems like for him, looking for an angel to heal me is just secondary. Well, that mean I have more time to rest.


    There are several vampires who are in trouble fighting just one mohawk. He¡¯s an ice mage. And he alone can fight against several vampires at once.


    Although the vampires are doing well, they lost a lot of blood. They need to consume some more blood if they need to win. But now that Spot is free, he can help them.


    Just by swinging Spot¡¯s tail and use it as a whip, Spot can break the mohawk¡¯s Ice Shield and injure him badly. As for the rest, the vampires can defeat him.


    Though they didn¡¯t drunk his blood since it seems that artificial master level mage¡¯s blood is disgusting for them.


    ¡°Go back to the fake vige and help the human army against the expert level mages. You can then drink their blood, and if you have drunk enough, you can go back to fight artificial master level mages,¡± I said.


    They were shocked to suddenly hear a voiceing from Spot¡¯s head. They thought it was Spot who spoke. But once they flew above Spot and see me with my injuries lying on top of his head, they quickly returned back to the fake vige to help the army temporarily.


    .....


    ¡°You need to get healed fast.¡±


    One of the vampires said that before she returns to the fake vige.


    ¡°...I agree with her. When will you bring me to the angels? Any angel will do,¡± I asked Spot.


    ¡°Helping those who are in trouble is more important. At least, you didn¡¯t see anyone who really need your help, right? Because if you do, you would have told me about it. For now, I will keep going like this until we finally see an angel. It¡¯s not like you¡¯re dying anyway, ¡± Spot said.


    ¡°Fine. The only thing I can do now is just looking anyway. I¡¯ll leave it to you to make the decision,¡± I said.


    Well, I can still move actually. But in case anything happen, the injuries could get worse. That¡¯s not something anyone want.


    Everyone here already know that it¡¯s not Albert, old man Henry, or even Lynn who is the leader in this war. But it¡¯s me. That¡¯s why if they see me got badly injured, it will only lower the morale of everyone. That¡¯s something that we need to avoid at all cost.


    It took Spot an hour until he brings me to an angel. And during that time, he defeated six more artificial master level mages. They might have been tired after fighting the monsters, but Spot still helped a lot.


    As we get closer to the angel, I stopped using Aura on my body that let me get stuck on his head, and I was sliding down on Spot¡¯s back, all the way to his tail. And when I reached his tail, he swung it toward the angel¡¯s direction.


    That was fun sliding down Spot¡¯s back. I want to do it again.


    ¡°Heal me!¡±


    While I was midair, I shouted to the angel. The angel then quickly slew by my side as she casted healing. It¡¯s a weird situation where I was flung to the sky, and an angel is healing me.


    And right before I started falling, my body is healed. Thanks to Ka¡¯s teaching, most of the angels¡¯ healing magic is much more effective. And I quickly run in the air toward the opposite direction of where Spot is flying.


    This time, I will help the others.


    Although we¡¯re doing well, we already have several casualties. Though after that time I killed ten artificial master level mages, and let Spot killed thirteen of them, fewer people died. Those who were fighting the thirteen mohawks knew about our n to let Spot taking care of those I baited. They quickly went to help the army once I baited the mohawks they fought. That¡¯s why there were no more casualties after that.


    Now that I¡¯m healed, it¡¯s time to get rid of the rest of the mohawks first.


    There are still around fifteen of them. It should be easy since they are not moving in a group. They are all separated thanks to the monsters.


    And although Gecko and the other monsters I saved were only helping us today, they understood what they need to do. Maybe the experiment helped them to be smarter.


    And they are stronger than most werewolves individually. That really helped us reducing the casualties.


    But they shouldn¡¯t be able to keep their cool at all times. Although they shouldn¡¯t hate us, most of us are from the human race. The race that experimenting on them. That¡¯s why I need to go toward them so they will start to think that not all humans are evil. Some humans are willing to help them. It¡¯s also something that I discussed with Albert when I brought him to meet Gecko and the others.


    That¡¯s why I rushed toward them as fast as possible. Though in the way toward them, I also helped the other defeated the artificial master level mages they fought.


    Gecko and the various modified monsters, are fighting two mohawks. And now that the mohawks are within my range, I won¡¯t kill them. I need them to get killed by the modified monsters so they know that I¡¯m helping them in their revenge.


    I shot the two mohawks with normal bullets that Sara made instead of the special bullets. This way, they won¡¯t die too quickly.


    And then, Gecko used Fire Breath to kill one of the mohawks. I guess he¡¯s really rted to a dragon.


    ¡°Taste this attack that you people created for me!¡± Gecko shouted after killing the mohawk with his fire breath.


    ...I was wrong. That was not because of his race. But that¡¯s because of the cult.


    I¡¯m still doubtful if he¡¯s really rted to a dragon or not. Maybe just like the angels? People rte them to Gods, but angels are their own monsters. And dragonic race is simr to that. They call themselves dragonic race, but other than the simr lizard features, they don¡¯t have any other simrities. Why are they calling themselves dragonic race then?


    As for the other mohawk they faced, the two modified vampires killed him. I guess it¡¯s over in this side.


    Now that I¡¯ve seen it, I can say that if there are any ranks among the modified monsters, Gecko would stand on the top. As for the second and third, they belong to the vampires.


    ¡°Hey, Gecko. As you know, I¡¯m a summoner. And one of my summoned monster is a powerful werewolf who loves fighting. Once she sees you, she will probably ask for a duel. I want you to fight her without killing each other so you two can get stronger together¡±, I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s fine. I also think that I need to get stronger so I can defeat them all,¡± Gecko said.


    ¡°You mean you¡¯re going to continue helping us until the cult is gone?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Right. With your permission, I¡¯d like to let me live in the monsters vige you told me about, and let me help you in your mission,¡± Gecko said.


    It¡¯s not just Gecko. Many all the modified monsters whom I thought only wanted to participate in today¡¯s battle, also thinking of helping us. This is good. Though I need to get Albert to ask them first if they really speak the truth that they wanted to help us or not.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m happy that you wanted to help. But I will need to get you all meet Albert again soon. Probably tonight. Until then, please help us through this battle first. We still have a lot of enemies to kill,¡± I said.


    ¡°I understand. We still not able to trust any humans other than you yet, so we will go help the monsters. Is that okay?¡± Gecko asked.


    ¡°That will be great. Then, you can go over there, and I will help the humans. Once you¡¯re done, you can take a rest until everything here is done,¡± I said.


    With their help, I don¡¯t need to go and kill the mohawks myself. And the number of the mohawks have reduced significantly. From more than fifty of them, to just ten of them now.


    With our numbers, I don¡¯t need to help killing the mohawks anymore. And a lot of angels have returned to their duty of healing instead of fighting like the start of today¡¯s battle.


    And so, I focused on fighting the expert level mages while looking around with Divine Vision too see if there will be more enemiesing, or if there are any who are thinking of escaping.


    Of course since the difficulty of the battle has reduced by a lot, I just need to focus on those who are retreating instead.


    And I didn¡¯t let anyone escape at all. Though I let many of them lives as the vampire¡¯s supply of blood. That¡¯s how they will be useful for us.

 Chapter 519

    Chapter 519: The Archbishop Knows the Existence of Aura User


    Finally, all of the enemies have been defeated. And no one escaped. We also captured many expert level mages to interrogate. Of course once we have no more question for them, we let them live just so the vampires have more blood to drink. After all, from the vampires¡¯s experience, expert level mages¡¯s blood is second only to me.


    What about master level mages¡¯s blood? Maybe they will taste better than my blood.


    Anyway, we managed to not let anyone escape. That means the leader of the cult, the Evil God, still won¡¯t know the fact that I¡¯m an Aura user yet. But I don¡¯t think we can keep the secret for a long time.


    Luckily, we managed to capture two expert level mages who tried to escape. And now that the battle is over and we have some time to rest, I¡¯d like to ask one of them why they were trying to retreat when the others didn¡¯t even though they shouldn¡¯t be afraid of death. Though I don¡¯t know if I can get any satisfying answer or not.


    ¡°Hey, let me talk with that one privately. I have something to ask her,¡± I said to the vampire in charge of guarding the prisoners.


    We have built several prison cages thanks to the earth mages. And since we put Magic Restricting Cor on them, we don¡¯t need to worry about anyone escaping.


    ¡°Understood. I¡¯ll get someone to let her go,¡± the vampire replied.


    .....


    She will get an earth mage to let go of the one I asked and then the earth mage will lock the cage again. The only way for them to escape is if they are at least as strong as I am without using Aura. And since none of them were experimental subjects, none of them had the strength for to escape. And we only feed them the bare minimum to not let them die. They should be hungry and thirsty.


    They might not be afraid of death, but dying from hunger or thirst is something that they would never imagine. And we thought that asking them when they are hungry will make them easier to speak.


    Though right now, the female expert level mage that I let out to ask, is still not hungry. Though she¡¯s tired and injured since I shed Reizpear at her legs. She couldn¡¯t stand on her own, so after the earth mage on our side opened the cage, I entered it. Obviously some of them attacked me. But there¡¯s no way any untrained people would be able to hurt me. Of course if they are targeting myher region, I will block it.


    I reached the woman who tried to retreat during the battle, while ignoring, blocking, or dodging the untrained people¡¯s attack. She was sitting down on the ground since she couldn¡¯t stand. I didn¡¯t let her to be healed, so the wounds on her legs are still open. I told her when I captured her that if she stands, she will lose her blood faster. And seeing how she¡¯s sitting down, I can tell that she¡¯s afraid of pain.


    As for the other retreating expert level mage that was captured, he seems to not care about the pain. That¡¯s why I picked this woman to be interrogated. I thought that her mouth should be looser since she was afraid of dying slowly.


    I grabbed the woman who keeps protesting, while the other prisoners are trying to fight me. Though it was easy for me to leave the prison cell, and get the earth mage to rebuild the prison.


    Anyway, during emergency when the vampires needed some blood, they are allowed to destroy the prison cell and drink some blood. As for the prisoners who tried to escape, we have some people who will stay behind to protect our supplies and watch the prisoners. The vampires will only watch the prisoners outside the battle. And if they are doing exceptional during the battle, they are allowed to get one expert level mage¡¯s worth of blood. That¡¯s why letting them watch the prisoners is also a way to motivate the vampires.


    I carried the woman deep into the forest. Even though what I¡¯m going to ask her is not so secretive, especially since everyone on our side already know that I¡¯m an Aura user, I still brought her far from where the others are. It¡¯s also to make her think that I don¡¯t want my own allies to hear this. She will most likely answer my questions if I asked her far from the others. Especially if I told her that I will get her legs healed.


    ¡°Alright. I have some questions for you. If you answer my questions truthfully, I¡¯m considering of healimg your legs. And if I find your answers to be lies, I will add more injuries instead. Do you understand?¡± I spoke while also giving her pressure by intimidating her. The level of my intimidation is so much lower than Andro¡¯s intimidation, but if it¡¯s on a one on one situation, it¡¯s pretty useful.


    ¡°...Will you really heal my legs?¡± the woman asked.


    ¡°Only if you answer with the truth. From what I saw back then, you know a little about myself. And that¡¯s why you decided to retreat. And I need you to know that I have ways to find out if you¡¯re lying or not,¡± I said.


    Of course it¡¯s not as effective as Albert¡¯s lie detection. But seeing her heartbeat should be enough. At least if she¡¯s not used in lying.


    ¡°So... You¡¯re really an Aura user? It¡¯s real? Not just stories for children?¡± the woman asked.


    ¡°Just so you know, I¡¯m the one asking you questions and you will answer. What were you going to do after you retreat? For most expert level mages in the cult, they should not have been afraid of battle. What was the cult nning?¡± I asked.


    Back when I captured her, she was far from where I fought the ten artificial master level mages. That¡¯s why she waste in retreating. Though if she retreated early, she would have been died. Killed by Sunny.


    She only saw me fightingte in the battle. And it was when I killed one mohawk close to her. That¡¯s why I can chase after her. As for the other person who tried to retreat as well, the case was simr.


    ¡°...Those who tried to retreat, even though we were ready to die, including me as well, was because we remember something that the Archbishop told us. Though I think not all of us remember. We were told about the existence of Aura users. Many of us thought that it¡¯s just a myth and the Archbishop was being too paranoid. Though when I saw you, I suddenly remember what he told us back then. We were told to report it no matter what. Even if it¡¯s in the middle of a battle. We were told to retreat and ignore everything. I never thought that Aura user is much stronger than what¡¯s written in stories,¡± the woman exined.


    So, once they see Aura user, they were ordered to inform the Archbishop. They don¡¯t know why, but they were ordered to do so. I guess I¡¯m still safe since I didn¡¯t see anyone escaping.


    ¡°I have answered your question. Can you heal me now?¡±


    ¡°Tell me about the Archbishop and your leader. Are they different person, or are they the same person?¡±


    Since it seems like she didn¡¯t lie, I asked more questions. For her to be told about Aura user, while Celestine and Veronica weren¡¯t told at all even though they were supposed to be leaders of two factions in the cult, means that she is at least have higher position than the two, or the Arcbishop trust her more than the two girls.


    ¡°They are different! Arcbishop is just a human like us! While the leader is our God! He¡¯s the True God who is our saviour and will help us rebuild the world to be a better ce once we destroy it! Don¡¯t mistake them to be the same person!¡± the woman shouted as if she was angry.


    I guess my question seemed to be something to test her faith. That¡¯s why she doesn¡¯t like it. Well, I don¡¯t care about that. But it seems like she knows about the one she calls the True God better than Celestine and Veronica.


    ¡°Then, tell me about them,¡± I said.


    ¡°Nothing. I know nothing about them except that the Archbishop is a human, and the True God is not,¡± the woman said.


    That¡¯s a lie. Her heartbeat was different from before. She must have known something else.


    ¡°Argh! Why did you stab my hand!?¡± the woman screamed after I pierced Reizpear on her hand.


    ¡°I said it before that if I find you¡¯re lying, I will add more injuries. Tell me the truth.¡±


    ¡°I spoke the truth! I know nothing!¡±


    I guess I won¡¯t be able to hear more from her. So, I cut off her tongue . I don¡¯t want her to say something to the other prisoners.


    The only thing I learned is that the Archbishop knows about Aura user. Maybe I can get some other prisoners to tell me about him. Let¡¯s pick a random person next time and ask them about the Archbishop or their god.

 Chapter 520

    Chapter 520: How the First Match of the Tournament Ended


    I think I did a cruel thing to let someone live after cutting her tongue. So, I grabbed the two modified vampires and told them that they can drink her blood dry.


    ¡°Okay, that¡¯s enough. She no longer has even a drop of blood left in her body. Thank you for your hard work,¡± I said to the two vampires.


    Both of them are males, and although they are just Vampire Lords, they are strong enough to be at the level of Vampire Marquises. It¡¯s all thanks to the experiment.


    If they could level up to the Vampire Duke level, it¡¯s possible that they might be as strong as Arin in the future. Though what I¡¯m worried about is that if they get to enjoy their strength long after they were freed from the cult, they might run wild. Not just these two vampires, but also many other modified monsters as well. Including Gecko.


    I need to think of a way to get rid of them.


    ¡°Hmm... this is delicious! But it doesn¡¯t taste as good as the blood we drunk in the cave yesterday,¡± one of the vampires said.


    ¡°What you drank yesterday was my blood. And I will never give them to anyone other than for special events or emergency. If you think of killing me and forcefully drink my blood, I will kill you without mercy. It¡¯s something that the other vampires have understood. You need to achieve something great if you want to drink my blood. I¡¯ll tell you this, even the Vampire Queen rarely get a sip of my blood. So, don¡¯t even think of drinking my blood unless you have achieved something great. You already know my strength, but if you somehow managed to kill me, you will never be able to have a peaceful life. Everyone here is following me,¡± I said to the vampires who looked at me with the desire to get my blood.


    .....


    After I threatened them, they quieted down.


    ¡°Umm... if we¡¯re done here, I will return. Thank you for letting us drink her blood,¡± one of the vampires said as he grabbed the other and left the area we¡¯re in.


    As expected, getting monsters to follow us is difficult. Maybe I should let Arin charm all the male monsters so they won¡¯t think of betraying us. I¡¯ll ask herter.


    Now, the only thing we can do is to rest and wait for the next wave of the enemies. We didn¡¯t have enough manpower to send scouts to find the enemy¡¯s base.


    The goal to destroy the cult is still far from reach. Just how good are they in hiding? They are the world¡¯s greatest champion in hide n seek.


    I¡¯m also feeling fatigued. I think I need some rest as well. I¡¯ll ask Elsie to keep watch.


    Wait, what!? Just as I found Elsie in the corner of my eyes, she disappeared! Along with Sunny!


    The only reason for that os because Lina is summoning them. Just what happened in the capital that needed her to summon the two of them?


    I¡¯ll just wait for now. Sonia will surely appear soon, and I can ask her what happened. For now, I¡¯ll leave it to the werewolves to keep watch. With their sense of smell, they should be able to sense it by the smell if someone is approaching.


    I look for Shelia to give her the order, but it seems like I don¡¯t need to do it as she¡¯s already wary of it.


    ¡°Shelia, I want you and the werewolves to keep watch of the surrounding area. Seems like something happened in the capital and Lina is summoning her two monsters,¡± I said to Shelia.


    ¡°No problem. We have been keeping watch whether that eyeball is watching or not,¡± Shelia said.


    ¡°Good. Also, don¡¯t think too much about Graham¡¯s strength. You are not weaker than him. He¡¯s just more resourceful. He has his magic. I guess the biggest difference between you two is how Graham is more technical while you¡¯re fighting with your instinct,¡± I said to Shelia.


    ¡°...Does it mean I need to learn more about fighting techniques to be able to surpass him?¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°Hmm... I think you should do what you think will make you stronger. Although different, you¡¯re simr to Ang. You need to find your own way to get stronger. If you think it¡¯s a good idea to learn fighting techniques, then go and learn some. If you think brute force is the answer, all you need is to gain more strength. That¡¯s all I can tell you. Though if you want to spar, I will help you. But not now,¡± I said.


    ¡°...That¡¯s right! We¡¯re werewolves! We love battle and will keep on fighting even if the enemy is stronger! We move with our instinct! Thank you for reminding me about it. I will keep growing stronger and make you proud of me!¡±


    And just like that, she disappears somewhere to train. I¡¯d like to remind her that she shouldn¡¯t get herself exhausted while we¡¯re at war though.


    I have three contracted monsters. The first is too weird as she came from another world. The second is a muscle brain. And the third one is an avenger. If I could reach another level in my summoning element, I doubt the next monster I will have will be anything normal.


    Just as I was thinking of that, Sonia appears as expected.


    ¡°Roy, Albert has something to inform,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Before that, just tell me if everything is okay over there. I just saw Sunny and Elsie got summoned.¡±


    ¡°Everything is fine. Albert just asked Lina if she could get Elsie to watch the surrounding. He asked me to check on Elsie before, but you had a big battle here, right? And when I return here again the second time and see everything is fine, I went back and told Lina to summon Elsie and Sunny. It¡¯s just a checkup on the surrounding. You can get them back hereter after they¡¯re done over there.¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t think there will be another battle today, so they can rest with Lina if they want to. Anyway, tell me the situation over there.¡±


    Sonia then told me the situation.


    The opening ceremony ended well. Everyone was excited with how things are going. And the first battle was a team battle, between Tatrama and Varadis.


    With Ka as the leader, it was an easy victory for Tatrama. Ang didn¡¯t participate since they thought it would be best to save her for individual battle after the team battle is over.


    They easily defeated the team from Varadis which was led by an expert level mage under Julia¡¯s teaching. It¡¯s obvious since we have more expert level mages than Varadis. Though Shelia said that there are two more expert level mages other than Julia from Varadis who will participate in the individual battle.


    The expert level mage from Varadis whonlost today, won¡¯t participate in the individual battle. So, I can bring him along with some of his teammate toe here.


    It¡¯s just one expert level mage, but it¡¯s much better than when we had none.


    ¡°That¡¯s good. Tell them to rest for tonight and I will bring them here tomorrow. They already have a Blobby with them, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. Henry gave them after they lost,¡± Sonia replied.


    ¡°How¡¯s the reaction of the fake king?¡± I asked


    ¡°Albert told me that he¡¯s faking his excitement. He¡¯s acting like the real Harold who loves exciting stuffs, but Albert can tell that it was a lie.¡± Sonia replied.


    ¡°Is that so? Anyway, anything else?¡±


    Sonia told me the schedule for the tournament. For today and tomorrow, it will be the team battle. Which mean, tomorrow will be the team from Consenza, against the team from Arturo. And if the team from Consenza loses tomorrow, I might be able to get one more expert level mage.


    After a day of rest, the day after that will be the final of the team battle. But the tournament is not over yet.


    The day after the crowning of the strongest in team battle, there will be individual battle. And unlike the tournament in Melk, everyone have to fight. It will be set like a real tournament, and the participant won¡¯t be representing the country they were from. But instead, they will represent themselves.


    It means that it¡¯s possible for Ang to fight Ka in this individual battle. It was set to be this way so there¡¯s a possibility of participants from Arturo to fight among themselves.


    In one day, there will only be two battle at most. There won¡¯t be more. Though if they can arrange for another tournament in the future, they won¡¯t make it so boring like this.


    ¡°...In any case, I won¡¯t be able to go there myself to cheer for the girls. Well, I have prepared that it will happen.¡±


    I¡¯m not interested in watching the tournament. I just want to cheer for the people I know. Well, if we win the war, we can get another tournament in the future.

 Chapter 521

    Chapter 521: The Final Match Has Been Decided.


    ¡°The girls are asking you if you are doing well or not. I have reported everything to them, but it¡¯s something they want to ask you personally. How will you answer them?¡±


    After informing me about the first day of the tournament, Sonia asked me how I¡¯m doing. And it¡¯s not about if we managed to stop the cult or not, or the situation over here. But they are asking if I¡¯m fine.


    Once again, I moved to tears from how considerate they are. I truly feel loved in this life.


    ¡°Tell them I¡¯m doing fine. Tired, but fine. And I will rest for the rest of the day until the next enemy wave appears. Which is probably tommorow at the soonest. Tell them all to do their best in the tournament. I feel better if I know that they are doing their best over there as well,¡± I said to the ghost.


    With how many of them suddenly appear at once today, I don¡¯t think they wille again today. And probably, they wille tomorrow.


    And we still don¡¯t know where they came from. Just how prepared are they that no one knows where their main base is?


    Until this morning, before the enemy came, we have been sending scouts to find where they came from. But we haven¡¯t found any clue at all.


    .....


    I also returned to where we were originally supposed to go on the first day in case the cult nned to have another army to actually go the way we predicted from the start. But the result is thata there were no oneing at all! Even after having someone to camp over there to wait, there were no report of theming from there!


    Does it mean that they have the confident to just attack the capital of Consenza from just one direction? From this fake vige?


    If so, they must be really stupid. Or maybe, they never expected of this oue at all. They thought that they will only start fighting after reaching the capital.


    I guess I will start asking some of the experienced soldiers if there¡¯s a chance of them attacking another location.


    ¡°What are you thinking about?¡±


    I suddenly brouht back to reality when Sonia spoke. I guess I was too deep in my thought. Well, there are no enemies at the momenr, so it should be fine.


    ¡°I was just thinking if the cult will only attack from here or not. Wait, the armies here is not everyone, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°You only asked that now? And did you not remember what the n is?¡± the ghost had a shocked expression as she asked me that question.


    ¡°I only care about the n that involve me. I know that I needed to bring two armies here, but that¡¯s not everyone, right?¡± I repeated the question.


    Sonia then sighed seeing me confused.


    ¡°Sigh... But I guess that¡¯s how you really are. Of course not everyone is here. If the two countries whose army is here, Tatrama and Varadis, only have this amount of personnel, the two countries would have fallen a long time ago. Did you never thought of that?¡±


    Oh, I¡¯m being scolded by a ghost. Though she¡¯s right.


    I also didn¡¯t see Hill and Oleg. Although a guard and a soldier is different, where a guard is just for the defense of a city and have more freedom than soldier, during emergencies where a huge battle like this happened, they can be considered as soldiers as well. And they are not here. That means Albert is sending them somewhere else to keep watch.


    The biggest different between a soldier and a city guard is that city guards are more likely to deal with people rted issues. Like crimes. But soldiers will be sent out once in a while outside of the cities they are protecting to subjugate the monsters and bandits nearby. Even if there are hunters helping, they will need to do that often. For the guards, going outside is optional. It depends mostly on their leader, or the city they are in.


    That¡¯s why soldiers usually have more experience in fighting than the guards. At least that¡¯s what I heard a long time ago.


    ¡°As far as we know, the cult hasn¡¯t attacked from another location. The only ce we know that they are attacking is here. Another ce should be the capital itself. There must be many cult members already there by now. And they are waiting for the reinforcement before they can attack the capital. Though so far, you have defeated all the reinforcementsing. Do you have other questions? If not, I¡¯ll return back to Albert now. I¡¯m also busy going all over the country, you know?¡±


    Oh, right. If there are other armies, that mean Sonia as the only one who can teleport will be the busiest.


    ¡°I think I¡¯m done for now. I¡¯ll ask the soldiers here instead. Tell those who lost the tournament today and willinge that I will bring them here once I see the iing enemies. If the enemy won¡¯te tomorrow, I might bring them the day after along with the team battle participants from Consenza if they lost. They will be fighting the team from Arturo, right? Thouh if they could win, that will be for the best,¡± I said to Sonia before she disappears.


    The team from Arturo... If they only bring expert level mages to participate the tournament, the only one who can stop them is Ka¡¯s team.


    Seems like for the very first tournament, both the winner of the team battle and the individual battle will be won by Tatrama kingdom. And Ang will be dubbed as the strongest mage in the whole continent.


    Well, that¡¯s great, but the enemy has real master level mages. I don¡¯t know how many of them, or if it¡¯s just the Archbishop, but I don¡¯t think Ang or any of the girls would love to be called as the strongest when they know that there are some people who are stronger than them.


    One of them is me of course!


    After Sonia left, I talked to several high ranked soldiers about the other locations. And just as Sonia told me, they are split into several groups. Though they said that it was Albert and old man Henry who send the strongest army here.


    ...Maybe it was their own ego that make them said they are the strongest army. Well, I don¡¯t care if they are the strongest or not. They have proven themselves to be able to handle many expert level mages without the help of the monsters or any expert level mages.


    The soldiers also racking their brains during their free time to think of where the Arcbishop and the Evil god are kost likely hiding. I guess I underestimating them too much, while also overestimating my value in this war. They are doing so well that I started to think that even if I¡¯m not here, they would still sess.


    Probably not, but they exceeded my expectation.


    While I¡¯m just here calling myself as the leader.


    They probably didn¡¯t even think that I¡¯m their leader. But they do think that I¡¯m an important key yer in this war. And their morale will still go up or down depend on how I¡¯m doing.


    The cult nevere after that. Today is the second day of the tournament, but the enemy still not here. Where is their main force? The one with children as experimental subjects and became artificial master level mages stronger than normal mohawks? And will there be more modified monstersing?


    While I was thinking, Sonia suddenly appears in front of me.


    ¡°What¡¯s new? ¡± I asked.


    ¡°...for the second team battle, all team members from Consenza were defeated by just one of the enemies. With just a powerful AoE magic from their lightning mage, he alone defeated everyone. Not even the expert level mage from Consenza can protect himself from that attack,¡± Sonia reported.


    I guess that¡¯s to be expected. Although there were no mohawks in the participants from Arturo, each one of them should be stronger than any average expert level mage.


    There¡¯s no way that the cult would send their weakest mages for the tournament. Though we were lucky enough that they didn¡¯t bring any mohawk with them, their participants are strong enough to handle a whole team singlehandedly.


    When I asked if they can be sent here, Sonia said that they were injured very badly. They are being healed, but the soonest they cane here to help would be tomorrow.


    ¡°I see. Tell them that if there are no enemiesing today, they cane here along with the team from Varadis tomorrow. Also, tell Ka and the other to be careful. The final for the team battle is the day after tomorrow, right? Tell Lina that Elsie can stay there a little longer to check on the opponent if they wear magical equipments to improve their magic or not,¡± I said.


    To think that they will send a really powerful expert level mage for the tournament, and badly injured the opponents. As expected, they are thinking of dwindling our strength by injuring the participants. Before the main force arrives.


    Well, they will face Ka in the final. There¡¯s no way that Ka and the others will go down without a fight.

 Chapter 522

    Chapter 522: Negative Thoughts


    ¡°Are you really won¡¯t watch Ka and the others fight?¡± Sonia asked me who was just thinking of the tournament.


    ¡°No. Even if I go there, I won¡¯t be able to rx knowing that the cult ising to attack us. Even if there are no enemying today, I can¡¯te to watch the tournament. I¡¯ll be too tense to watch the fight and my mind will fly away to this ce instead. And if the girls see me that way, it would break their concentration instead. It¡¯s best for me to stay here until the tournament is over,¡± I replied to Sonia why I can¡¯t and shouldn¡¯t stay to watch the tournament.


    And now that we¡¯re at war with the cult, but the enemy is not here after we defeated the previous wave, my mind is wandering everywhere.


    Why do we have to fight them here?


    Why did I think that we can destroy the cult this way?


    Why did I think that it¡¯s a good idea to not let our strongest mages fight and nned for a tournament?


    How did I came up with the idea?


    .....


    And why did the four kings thought that my idea is good?


    Well, they do alter my ideas so the chance of us winning is high. But most things we nned came from me.


    Did I actually thought that I know everything when I barely know something and I even have terrible memory?


    I was just an ordinary man, who ended up bing a doctor in the countryside, and somehow managed to gain a little bit of Aura and ended up being overconfident and died. I¡¯m nothing special.


    I just gained a half-assed ability of Aura and died stupidly. Other than that, I have the weirdest contracted monster ever. I guess that¡¯s how it started. From Blobby.


    If it was another summoner who made a contract with Blobby, and he or she is a powerful mage, with good memory and heavily involved in the war during the previous life, that person would be a better help than me. And maybe, the cult would have been destroyed even earlier.


    But me? I¡¯m just someone who met the conditions.


    I learned very little about Aura. And I made a contract with Blobby. That¡¯s how I ended up being chosen to go back in time.


    If I didn¡¯t learned Aura, I won¡¯t be chosen to go back to the past.


    If I didn¡¯t made a contract with Blobby, there won¡¯t be such thing as returning to the past.


    Maybe someone else will learn Aura and make a contract with Blobby. But it didn¡¯t happen.


    Those ifs never happen. There are only facts.


    Fact is, I learned Aura.


    Fact is, I made a contract with Blobby.


    Fact is, I¡¯m the one who got returned to the past.


    Fact is... I¡¯m extremely frightened!


    Fact is, I¡¯m started to think negative thoughts!


    Fuck it! I¡¯ll use calming gas on myself for now. I need to be calm to assess the situation right now, and not thinking of the what ifs.


    Many people believed me in this life. Many people are risking their lives for me. Many people are waiting for me to return home safely.


    What have I been doing all this time? Training.


    I have trained for much longer and harder than in my previous life. I¡¯m much stronger than I was in the past. And I am the only one who can change the future with my involvement.


    What if I ended up losing...


    Oh, no! I started thinking negatively again! Breathe in the calming gas. Breathe in the calming gas.


    ¡°...What are you doing?¡±


    Sonia who had been there from the start since she gave me the report, hasnt left at all. Usually, she would have disappears somewhere else. I guess that mean there¡¯s no information that urgently needed for Sonia to ry.


    ¡°Nothing. There¡¯s nothing to do, so my mind started wandering. And I ended up having negative thoughts, so I used calming gas on myself,¡± I replied truthfully.


    ¡°That¡¯s what happens when you have nothing to do and you are on your own for too long. Go find someone to talk with,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°You¡¯re right. So... you had children, right?¡±


    And that was my stupid attempt to start a conversation with the ghost.


    ¡°...yes. And you already know how the story goes. Also, don¡¯t choose me as your conversation partner since I might not be here the whole time. Find someone else. Though I will be here for a while since I¡¯m free,¡± Sonia said.


    Oh, right. If I talked with her the whole time, when she needed to do something and being summoned far away, I will be lonely again. I need to find someone else here to talk to.


    Sigh... and I missed Victoria¡¯s presence again. She has wide area of topic to talk about. And it¡¯s fun hearing something that doesn¡¯t exist in this world from her.


    Also, I must not let my mind wander too far from this battle. I need to think of what to do even when we¡¯re just waiting.


    ¡°Then, Sonia. I have something for you to do when you¡¯re free. I want you and Arin to use your charm magic to seduce the male prisoners and get them to tell us everything they know about the cult, and everything rted to it. You can still use charm magic, right? And tell Arin that I¡¯ll give her a bag of my blood if she finds important information,¡± I said.


    Instead of making a conversation, I ended up giving an order. Well, it should be fine. And we might receive more information than what we have already knew.


    ¡°You¡¯re giving an order now? Sigh... fine. Though it has been so long since I tried to use charm magic on someone, I should still be able to do it,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Good! I expected a lot from the past Reverse Harem Queen!¡± I said.


    ¡°...Said the Harem King.¡±


    ¡°No, no. The Harem King is Harold. He has more wives than I have lovers.¡±


    ¡°But Harold might end up losing most of them other than Carmen. As for you, your harem might still be increasing,¡± Sonia said.


    Really? I will get more harem members? I don¡¯t know about that.


    Though about what she said about Harold might be the truth. I heard that yesterday, Harold has recaptured the capital of Arturopletely. And because many people didn¡¯t believe that he was swapped, they made a decision to make Fabio the king right away.


    When we meet again, he will be King Fabio. And his hardworking brother, the one who stayed in the capital of Arturo despite the danger, will be rewarded highly.


    Fabio right now is hunting down all the aristocratic family in Arturo who have fallenpletely to the cult.


    As for Harold¡¯s wives, Harold is considering what punishment will suit them. After all, some of their children also helped Fabio rise to the crown. So, they might not be punished harshly.


    Maybe some whose children have fallen to the cult will be divorced by him. As for the others, even if they have fallen, since their children are very helpful, it might just end with house arrest.


    I hope Fabio is done with cleaning up the kingdom quickly so he can help us.


    So far, the fake king is still doesn¡¯t know that the real king has returned. What will be his fate then?


    Those in the capital of Consenza must be racking their brains. After all, it¡¯s not just the fake king, his retainers, and the participants of the tournament came from Arturo. Some civilians and hunters are there as well. And we don¡¯t know if they are from the cult or not.


    Sigh... we know that the cult is the enemy, but we don¡¯t know if someone is from the cult or not. I actually wished that all of them have something that will tell us that they are from the cult. Like the explosive devices in their mouth.


    Unfortunately, only weaker members of the cult have them in their mouth. The strong ones don¡¯t need to have them. And even if all of them have the explosive devices in their mouth, only Elsie and I can tell.


    Just keep thinking about it will do is no good. I¡¯ll just find someone to interact with during this free time.


    The werewolves and the angels are no good. They think of me as their king or master.


    The vampires? Should I talk with them about women¡¯s fashion?


    I¡¯ll just talk to the people in the army. Maybe I could find another air mage or summoner. I already know that there¡¯s someone with a mole as their contracted monster. Maybe we have another powerful monster?


    Instead of giving the order to gather all the summoners, I talked to the soldier one by one and ask them if they knew any summoners in the army. Turns out, we actually have a few more summoners. And they haven¡¯t summoned their monsters because their monsters are not strong enough to fight expert level mages, and they will be burdens instead. But just like the mole, each has their own use outside battle.


    Well, as long as they know what to do with their monster, it should be fine.


    Just like that, the day is over with me getting to know the summoners. Tomorrow, if the enemy doesn¡¯te as well, I¡¯ll talk to the air mages.

 Chapter 523

    Chapter 523: Arin¡¯s Charm Magic


    The next day, it should be the day when the tournament is on a break before the final match between Tatrama and Arturo. Though I don¡¯t think the cult will do anything today. Even if they do, the ones being sent to the capital should just be the scout. Though they may still gather everyone first in this fake vige.


    Anyway, after talking with the general of the two armies, as well as asking for an advices from Albert and old man Henry, the cult will most likely go all out right during the final of the individual battle. That¡¯s when most people will gather at the capital. And many people would even camp outside the arena just to hear the result even if the tournament is being aired in most big cities in the continent.


    Even Fabio is watching it live in Arturo. And I can only hear the result. Just how big is the difference between a king of a country and a king of a race?


    Well, of course the difference is big! I¡¯m the werewolf king, but I can¡¯t be considered as a king in this continent.


    Also , I¡¯m too busy!


    Oh, I see some people. Though they don¡¯t have mohawk as thei hairstyle. Are they scouts instead of reinforcement from the cult? That¡¯s probably the correct answer.


    If they are scouts, that mean if they don¡¯t return to where they came from, the cult will realize something is wrong in the location they are going to. This fake vige.


    .....


    ...isn¡¯t it toote? I thought that they should at least realise it earlier. Well, I guess I¡¯ll just kill them. It¡¯s only three men. Killing them all on an instant should be easy...


    Wait! I just remembered what I asked Sonia and Arinst night!


    After I asked them to seduce the male prisoners, they seeded and the charmed prisoners told the vampire and the ghost everything they know. Though we already know what they informed us about, it¡¯s good since they wouldn¡¯t speak a word before being charmed. Thah means Sonia and Arin¡¯s charm magic is working.


    And now, we have three men approaching us. Although Sonia isn¡¯t here at the moment, Arin is here. She can charm those three to do what she wants.


    I found Arin holding a bag of my blood as if it¡¯s the most precious thing in the world. While drooling.


    It seems like she¡¯s holding back her desire to drink it and wanted to save it forter. She¡¯s the kind that like to savor her favorite drink in a special way.


    Like back then when I gave her a few drop of my blood. She would pour it on a wine ss, sitting on a rooftop and watched the moon while drinking my blood. Even though it was just a few drop.


    Seeing how she can hold herself back from drinking the blood, I know how good her self-control is. Though that is not important right now.


    ¡°Arin, can I ask you something? If you can do what I asked you to do, I¡¯ll give you a few more drop of my blood,¡± I said.


    ¡°Really?¡±


    ¡°It won¡¯t be much though. I¡¯ll just stab the tip of my finger with a needle and let out a few drop of blood. Will you do it?¡± I asked,


    ¡°...What do you want me to do?¡± Arin asked.


    ¡°I see three mening. I¡¯d like you to charm them and ask them what their intention is ining here. I can just kill them, but I want to see if letting them live is a better thing to do or not. Will you do it?¡±


    ¡°Sure. That¡¯s easy. I¡¯ll go alone and greet them by myself. You can just watch from here. They¡¯re just expert level mages, right?¡± Arin asked.


    ¡°Yes, I think so. You¡¯re going to ask them yourself? Then, if they don¡¯t belong to the cult, there¡¯s no need to kill or capture them. Though the chance for them to not belong to the cult is slim. You can go now. They are in the northeast direction from here. Over there. Just go straight and you will meet them.¡±


    I pointed my finger toward northeast where the three men areing. None of them have explosive devices in their mouth. So, unless they are civilians or bandits, they are expert level mages from the cult. Though if they are scouts, why is the cult didn¡¯t send wind mages who can fly? It would be faster that way, right?


    Well, no one can tell what the cult is thinking. They might actually be stupider than everyone thought. Or maybe they are smarter than we thought.


    Arin left on her own toward the three men while hiding her presence. If they are expert level mages, they will recognize Arin¡¯s presence soon when she entered her range. I will see their reaction from here.


    Just as I expected, they detected Arin¡¯s presence when she is within their range. They are expert level mages.


    Even if Arin¡¯s charm is not working, Arin alone is strong enough to kill them in case they fight. Though I doubt she will fight them. She¡¯s doing it just for a few drop of blood.


    Arin talked to them. I can¡¯t hear what they are talking about, but from what I can tell, her charm magic is working.


    Oh, wait! Isn¡¯t it working too well? Two of the three men have fallen too hard for her and are trying to assault her.


    How did that happen? Well, the other man seem to can still control himself to not assault Arin, so he¡¯s protecting her. Though Arin doesn¡¯t need protection.


    I forgot about charm magic. It¡¯s simr to brainwashing, but charm magic can only make the target to fall for the caster. Which mean for those two who were attempting to rape Arin, they have fallen for herpletely. But their mind still work to some extent. And as expert level mages, they must be thinking that they are strong enough to get what they want.


    Unfortunately for them, Arin is too strong. And the other man is too gentlemanly. Though that gentleman felt afraid after seeing how powerful Arin is, he still can¡¯t look away from her.


    And now, Arin is interrogating them. My lip-reading skill is still bad, but I think I can tell what she said.


    It should be something like how she prefers honest men and want them to answer everything truthfully.


    A few minutester, their conversation is over. And Arin led the three men into the prison where other charmed men are imprisoned. After that, Arin is approaching me.


    ¡°How was it?¡± I asked her about what those three wanted to do bying here.


    ¡°They were supposed to be part of the previous wave. But they werete to go with the others, while they were not allowed to join other group which shoulde tomorrow. So, they came here on their own,¡± Arin said.


    ¡°I see. Which mean the next wave is tomorrow. That¡¯s nice to know. And tomorrow is the final of the team battle. Sonia, anyone from the team that cane after the final is over?¡±


    As soon as Arin arrives, I can see that Sonia appears next to me. So, I asked her if there is anyone who cane. Anyone from Tatrama team is powerful enough to defeat several expert level mages on their own.


    ¡°Just Sara and Jewel. The rest will stay behind to keep guard until the tournament is over.¡±


    Sara and Jewel, huh? They haven¡¯t reached expert level, right? But their strength is great enough tonhandle several expert level mages. That¡¯s good.


    ¡°Alright. Tomorrow, as soon as the tournament is over and they cane, Sonia will inform me right away. I will transport the members from Consenza and Varadis who have lost the tournament. Tell them to prepare to enter the portal. Today, we will take a rest. Only let the minimum number of people to keep watch. Oh, Sonia. Tell Lina that tomorrow morning, I will get Elsie and Sunny here.¡±


    After that, I spread the information and the n for tomorrow. When Sonia returned, I opened a portal that let the two expert level mages from Varadis and Consenza to help. Everyone cheered at the arrival of the two expert level mages.


    Today is another rest day. So, I¡¯m thinking of getting a lot of sleep. But Arin stopped me.


    ¡°My reward.¡±


    ...I almost forgot. Though I thought that she wanted to savor it forter tonight. But maybe drinking it warm is better than drinking from a bag. That¡¯s why she wanted my blood now.


    ¡°Okay, here.¡±


    I stabbed the tip of my finger with Blobbyneedle. But there¡¯s nothing for me to pour the blood at.


    Instead, Arin grabbed my finger and sucked my blood directly from it. She¡¯s gripping my finger so strong that anyone else would have their finger broken.


    I told her that it¡¯s just a few drops, but since she¡¯s drinking it directly,it was more than that.


    ¡°That¡¯s enough. If you¡¯re drinking it like that, you should have asked for itter tonight so my blood will still be inside of you tomorrow for the battle,¡± I said as I pulled my finger out of her mouth.


    ¡°Sorry, I couldn¡¯t think straight. The temptation is too strong. But does it mean I can ask for your blood again tonight?¡± Arin asked.


    ¡°No. And you still have some blood left in the blood bag, right? Use that.¡±


    Althought I refused to let her to drink my blood again tonight, she doesn¡¯t seem dejected as she returns ro the other vampires. I guess drinking my blood raises her mood.


    ...No one can know that I got turned on feeling her mouth sucking my finger.

 Chapter 524

    Chapter 524: Getting Sara, Jewel, and Another Person Here


    It¡¯s finally the day of the final for the team battle. It¡¯s between the team from Tatrama against the team from Arturo. Though the team from Arturo and the fake king doesn¡¯t know that the real king has returned to the kingdom and got his son, Fabio, ascend to the throne.


    Harold and Fabio are also busy making sure that no messenger can leave the kingdom. I heard from Sonia that anyone suspicious will be killed immediately. And if someone is using flight magic without permission, they will be hunted down.


    That¡¯s scary. I think if they see me running in the sky they will start to attack me. But what surprise me the most was the soldiers and guards of Arturo seem to be stronger than those from other country. They have triple the number of advanced level mages on their rank than the soldiers from Tatrama.


    Not just that. Seems like Fabio¡¯s brother who stayed behind in the capital of Arturo the whole time, is making sure that most soldiers can be trusted. I think that Toni might be a better king than Fabio, but seems like he refused that offer and only want the position of the Prime Minister.


    Toni carefully spread the rumors that the king has been swapped by someone from the cult, and the real king will return to capture the kingdom back. And Toni managed to get as many powerful soldiers as he can to join his cause. So, when Harold and Fabio returned to the capital, he can send the soldiers to help them right away.


    I think if Toni helped us with the n to destroy the cult that we¡¯re doing right now, he can do much better than we are doing now. But he¡¯s too busy with just one kingdom and can¡¯t help us right now.


    Anyway, Toni is sending the kingdom¡¯s army to take care of the cult members inside the kingdom. And how they can somehow stopped the information about the real king return to other people outside the kingdom means we still have the upperhand. Though once the information is known to the fake king, the tournament will be canceled.


    .....


    Well, I will leave everything that is not happening here to the others. They can do better than me. I can only fight. Though I need to hear thetest information so I can tell if the cult ispletely destroyed or not.


    Today, I¡¯m scouting on my own. Since we received information from the three men that Arin charmed about how the next wave should being today, I move on my own to scout the enemies. Moving alone means I will be much faster. Although I can get Spot toe with me so we can move faster, I chose to be on my own instead. This way, in case monsters with high detecting skill can detect me, I can disappear on my own instantly using portal. If Spot is with me, I need to talk to him first and our disappearance will be dyed even if it¡¯s just one second.


    But if I move alone, once I see that there are monsters that can detect me, if I disappear in an instant, those monsters will think that it¡¯s just their imagination.


    Why am I confident that the enemy this time will bring monsters? Because of the three men Arin charmed.


    Arin didn¡¯t ask them about the next enemies that wille when she met them the first time. But since those three ended up getting captured, I had Arin asked them again about the next iing enemies. And they said that most of those who came are tamers or summoners who will bring monsters. There are no other mages other than the tamers and summoners. That¡¯s why they were refused to join them. Or more like those three didn¡¯t feel safe being surrounded by monsters.


    Anyway, I am going toward the direction they came from. They said that there are huge and slow monsters, so their arrival should be dyed. That mean I might be able to transport Sara and Jewel first since the final of the team battle should be done before they can arrive.


    Why would they send monsters today? My guess would be to distract those protecting the capital. Those monsters might be disguised as a Stampede and cause problem. Well, either way, we just need to kill them all first.


    Since they are monsters, most of them might have been modified so much that they lost their mind and can only follow their master¡¯s order. Which mean that even if we killed their tamers or summoners, those monsters will still attack us. And we have to kill every single one of them.


    If there are monsters with high magic resistance, it will be a trouble for the mages. But we also have monsters who excel in closebat. We can leave those who have high magic resistance to the vampires, werewolves, or even angels. Though I still need the angels to do the healing instead.


    Still, it was very annoying when we heard from the three charmed men that they also don¡¯t know where the cult¡¯s main base is. And those monsters and their masters only gathered where they were told to.


    I always though of myself as a coward. Well, most of the time. But seems like this Evil God is much more of a coward as only very few people know of his location. Just where is he hiding!?


    I continue my search and finally I can see a huge mountain is moving. And of course that is not a mountain. That¡¯s a huge monster. That¡¯s the shell of huge tortoise. It¡¯s a species that can hide itself by camouging as a mountain. Which is why there are some old stories about moving mountains. And we will face them soon.


    I can see the mountain is moving, but my Divine Vision still can¡¯t see the monstersing. I need to get closer. But if they have a werewolf that has its smelling sense enhanced though experiment, they will find my location soon.


    Well, I can just wait for them here. Their marching speed is slow, so they will only be able to reach the fake vige soon before the sunset. They must have thought that nothing is happening in the fake vige, and they should be able to rest right before it¡¯s dark. But they are wrong. The battle will happen until night and they won¡¯t be able to rest.


    I waited for them while covering my body with the smell of some flowers I found on the way. With this, I should be able to cover my smell. Though if they have an All-seeing Eye, I won¡¯t be able to hide myself. Though by now, my vision is about as good as an average All-seeing Eye, so unless that type of monsters have been modified, once we see each other¡¯s position, I can just disappear using portal.


    I also covered my body with Blobbies and disguise myself as a rock. A rock with the smell of a flower. This way, only All-seeing Eye or any other monster with see-through ability can see me.


    I waited for ten minutes, and I can finally see most of the monsters. Luckily, there are no All-seeing Eye at all. So, once I see most of them, I retreated back to the fake vige using portal safely without anyone noticed me.


    As I appear in the fake vige, everyone greeted me.


    ¡°How is it?¡± the General from Tatrama asked.


    ¡°They are slow, so they should be arriving before the sun set. The battle will most likely happen during the night. I think it¡¯s best to rest for now, while adjusting one of you eyes to the dark. It¡¯s just one of the method to see better in the dark. Wearing an eye-patch like a pirate so one can fight in the night. It¡¯s just an idea though. We might still fight them before dark,¡± I said.


    They informed the news to the others. Some wore an eye-patch right away, some didn¡¯t. I also told the angels to not use magic that give light yet. Once the enemies have gotten used to the dark, we can paralyze them with the light from the angels. Though it may not be a good idea if any of the tamers or summoners have light element as their second element.


    In the afternoon, Sonia finally appears to inform me that the final is over. Although there were some challenges, Ka and the others can win with just slight injuries. And now that Jewel and Sara¡¯s injuries have been healed, I can transport them here.


    I opened a portal after Sonia told me that they are in a safe location, to see three girls entering the portal instead.


    ¡°I¡¯m bored. I didn¡¯t get to fight in the team battle, and for individual battle, it will still be a few days until it¡¯s my turn. Let me fight here. At least for this battle. Then, you can return me back tomorrow. I already received approval from Ka, so it¡¯s fine. I will also wear disguise.¡±


    ¡°...Thank you foring, Ang!¡±


    With her here, our strength increased manyfold.


    The n is to let her and anyone participating in the tournament to only focus on their battle. But boredom brought Ang here. And since she has received Ka¡¯s approval, it should be fine.


    With Ang here, dozens of monsters will be defeated in an instant. Our victory guaranteed.

 Chapter 525

    Chapter 525: Small Chat with My Disciple Before the Battle


    ¡°The enemy will arrive in about three hours. Most of them are monsters. Sara, I want you to make guns using earth magic and give them to the air mages. Once the enemy arrives, I want you and the air mages equipped with guns to focus on the humans and monsters who seem to have weak defense. Jewel will fight upfront with her Beastform magic and lightning magic. As for Ang, you, Spot, and I will attack them from the nk,¡± I said to the three new arrivals


    ¡°I¡¯ll do it right away,¡± Sara said.


    As for Jewel and Ang, since their order is not immediate, they can take a rest. And with them here, I can have a chat with them as to not get myself delve in negative thoughts.


    ¡°So, Jewel, how was the tournament?¡± I asked my cute disciple.


    ¡°IT WAS AMAZING! WE WERE-¡±


    ¡°Wait, stop. Speak in lower volume,¡± I said to stop Jewel from screaming non-stop.


    ¡°Oh, right. We were doing great. I had a great fight with the expert level from Varadis on the first match. He¡¯s here, right? It was a great battle. Ka let me fight him one on one. The team from Varadis might have lost, but the expert level mage is strong! The fight was so great that I even got the best yer of the match? that day!¡± Jewel said happily.


    .....


    ¡°Best yer of the match?¡± I asked. Does it mean there¡¯s a reward in every match?


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s an award that only given on every team battle. As for individual battle, there won¡¯t be such reward. And I received the rewad on the first match!¡± Jewel said.


    ¡°Oh, you¡¯re amazing! As expected of my disciple,¡± I said as I rubbed her head to praise her.


    ¡°Hehe! I gotplimented,¡± Jewel closed her eyes as she enjoyed the feeling of my hand rubbing her head.


    ¡°So, what about the final? How did you win?¡± I said as I keep rubbing her head.


    ¡°Hmm... it was crazy. The opponents didn¡¯t even care of how much injury they received and fought us like madmen. Thanks to Ka¡¯s instruction, we managed to gain victory. I even managed to defeat one expert level mage. Though the one who received the best yer of the match award was Ka. Well, that was to be expected though. It¡¯s all thanks to Ka that we can win the tournament,¡± Jewel said.


    ¡°It¡¯s not just Ka, right? If you didn¡¯t participate, the situation will be different. It¡¯s also thanks to you that the team can win,¡± I said while continuing to rub her head.


    ¡°Ehehe...¡± Jewel smiled delightfully after being praised by me, her master.


    Although I taught many people about things I learned from the future, I treated only Jewel differently. Even though most of the things I taught her were taught to other people as well, I focused more on Jewel than even Ka just because she thought of me as her master.


    I¡¯m happy that the result was great. Jewel can do many things on her own. And I¡¯m proud to be called her master.


    ¡°And Ang, how about you? How was it watching the team battle?¡±


    This time, I asked Ang. She has been here listening to Jewel¡¯s story of how the team won the tournament.


    ¡°It wasn¡¯t good at all. I mean it¡¯s good that we won, but the enemy wasn¡¯t good at all. They are only expert level mages. Even Veronica and Celestine back then, back when they just joined us, were still stronger than them. It won¡¯t be a challenge for me. I should have joined you from the start instead of participating thisme tournament,¡± Ang pouted.


    For someone like her, participating in a tournament where the result is obvious is not something that she want. For her, challenging powerful enemies are much better. She prefer to fight just one mohawk rather than facing ten expert level mages.


    When I heard of the team battle, I told her that no matter what, she must not be included in the team battle. Because if she does, the audience won¡¯t be able to enjoy watching a good fight as she could defeat everyone on her own. But if it¡¯s an individual battle, it won¡¯t be a problem even if she defeats her opponent right away.


    And the reason that she has to participate in the tournament no matter what, even if we know that she will win it, is because of the previous tournament. The college tournament in Melk. Everyone knows that she is strong, and they want to see her perform to see if she can be the strongest mage in the continent or not.


    If she¡¯s lucky, she could face someone from our own team. Or maybe Celestine from Consenza, or Julia from Varadis. Maybe those from Arturo whom participate in individual battle are much stronger than average expert level mages. That¡¯s why she will fightter.


    Though in the end, she can¡¯t endure her boredom and she entered the portal when I only invited Sara and Jewel. But that¡¯s good for us as well, so it¡¯s fine.


    If she¡¯s away from battle for too long, I¡¯m afraid that she will lose her touch. Maybe I should get the others as well?


    Well, I don¡¯t think the others are as bad as Ang. They should be able to control themselves better.


    ¡°Since the enemies willete, you can take a rest for now,¡± I said to Jewel and Ang.


    ¡°No thanks. I¡¯ll fly around for a while instead. I¡¯m bored,¡± Ang said as she started floating in the air.


    ¡°At least don¡¯t go toward where the enemies are approaching!¡± I shouted before she takes off as I pointed my finger to where the direction of the enemies so she won¡¯t go over there.


    ¡°I got it!¡±


    And so, Ang flew into the opposite directions. I¡¯m d that she understands.


    Sara is busy creating more guns from the rocks or other mineral she found. As for Jewel, she¡¯s just here with me. She¡¯s interested in hearing the battle from my own mouth, so I told her everything that I experienced in this war from the start.


    Although many of the stories are boring since we just waited for them most of the time, she listened seriously. What a great disciple I have! I¡¯ll give her some treats.


    It was fun talking with Jewel as I finally hear that someone sees a mountain moving this way. That¡¯s the tortoise we¡¯re going to face. And someone reported that Ang is flying this wa as well as she finally returns from her flight.


    ¡°I can see it. That tortoise shell is huge. How was the sizepared to Andro?¡± Ang asked me.


    ¡°I say that the shell alone is worth the size of Andro¡¯s head. Are you going to fight it?¡± I asked back.


    ¡°Yes. Should I wear a mask to cover my face?¡±


    ¡°Yes. Although I¡¯m not nning on letting a single one of them go, it¡¯s best to get prepared just in case. If just one of them somehow escapes, and they sent a message to the fake king in the capital, they would realize that we¡¯re actually nning to get them all,¡± I exined.


    ¡°Okay. The mask made of Blobbies are easy to use, so I¡¯m fine wearing them. I was just asking,¡± Ang said as she wears the Blobbymask.


    Sara and Jewel also wear them. But I still haven¡¯t wear the Blobbyarmor yet.


    ¡°...With their marching speed, it will take another hour before they arrive. We can see the giant tortoise because it was so big. But they are not that fast. Should we go greet them, or should we wait?¡±


    I asked for everyone¡¯s opinion here.


    The Werewolves and the angry angels suggested to greet them. The vampires don¡¯t care as they don¡¯t like the monsters¡¯ blood. Especially if those monsters have been experimented. So, only the humans¡¯ opinion are left.


    I purposely ignored the modified monsters on our side. Their opinions won¡¯t matter as they are only newbies here.


    ¡°Waiting them here is good since we can prepare traps. Though the enemies are mostly monsters, so the traps might not be useful at all,¡± one of the soldiers said.


    ¡°Let¡¯s go toward them instead! The waiting is killing me!¡± another soldier said.


    ...Those soldiers have started to speak casually toward me. On the first day, they would speak to me with respect. But now that I have chatted with them, they started to think of me as someone they can treat however they want. Well, I don¡¯t hate it though.


    After getting everyone¡¯s opinion, most of us decided to attack instead of waiting. I also agree with them.


    ¡°Okay. Let¡¯s go. Ang, Spot, and I will quickly go toward their back. As for the side, the werewolves and the vampires will go. The angels will mostly heal the injured. Again, let¡¯s make sure that none of them escapes,¡± I gave the order to march.


    And so, Ang and I rode on the back of Spot¡¯s head toward behind the enemy line.


    Since Spot is using his camouge skill, the monsters didn¡¯t notice us at all. Just like that, we reached behind the enemy line to stop them from retreating.

 Chapter 526

    Chapter 526: Confronting the Tortoise


    As soon as we reached behind the line, the enemies finally noticed that they are being attacked.


    None of them expected to be attacked in this ce where the other members of the cult should be guarding, but here we are.


    Both Ang and I jumped off of Spot¡¯s back as Spot let out his breath attack toward where the monsters are concentrated at. But as expected of monsters that have been experimented and modified. They could even survive Spot¡¯s powerful breath attack. Though only a few of them.


    Most of the monsters in the line of attack were killed. So, the result is still positive. Though I wish he could kill more, but I guess they are just that strong.


    Some of the humans were also killed. But since they are spread all over the ce, we couldn¡¯t kill them all. And as soon as the summoners noticed that they are being attacked, they started summoning their monster.


    Good thing they don¡¯t know about Pear-y Fruit. It means that no matter how high their summoning level is, they can only summon one contracted monsters.


    I was about to join the fight, but then I see Ang¡¯s magic attacked several areas at once and killed dozens of the monsters and humans. So, I stopped myself from joining the battle.


    .....


    ...It seems like I¡¯m not needed here. Just Spot and Ang can defeat so many of them already. Though there are still many monsters in this ce belonging to the cult. So, I can¡¯t rest easy.


    Well, for now, I¡¯ll just target the tamers and summoners. Some of them are expert level mages in their other elements, so they can still protect themselves.


    With Ang and Spot attacking huge area at once, getting close to the enemies and fight closebat is just suicide. So, I just used dual Blobbyguns on both my hands after I broke Reizpear into pieces and put those pieces in my pocket.


    Using Blobbyguns against modified monsters, it¡¯s difficult to prate their defense. But if it¡¯s against human, and they haven¡¯t started to cast their protective spell yet, killing them in one shot is easy.


    I bet Sara and the other air mages that she has given and taught to fire a bullet are doing their best at the front. There¡¯s no need for me to go there, so I just need to take care of everything else behind.


    ...Actually, I have many things to do. I need to kill the enemies, while not only dodging their attacks. But I also need to evade the attack from my own allies. Ang and Spot.


    Spot¡¯s attack can be evaded easily as I just need to move away from the location of where his head is facing. But for Ang, I need to wait until I can see the direction she¡¯s attacking. Not just that, she can also change the direction of the magic she uses! So, it¡¯s very hard to do so.


    Though sometimes, I helped Ang as well.


    When she¡¯s casting a big magic toward my location, I faced her magic as I transformed Blobbygun into Blobbykatana and I sliced her magic in half. The offensive magic became two as they killed more enemies. Ourbination is the greatest. Though I wish she won¡¯t keep casting her offensive magic toward me all the time. It was as if she¡¯s trying to kill me instead.


    Though so far, Ang hasn¡¯t started attacking the giant tortoise yet. Although the tortoise is slow, and probably isn¡¯t the most threatening monster here, just the sheer size alone can intimidate everyone. I¡¯ll find a chance to defeat him.


    Seeing a gigantic tortoise, I remember the tortoise that the cult raise. I named him Heavyback. This tortoise might be one of his siblings. This one was fed something that makes his size changed drastically.


    Heavyback and his other sibling that we found back in the dungeon cave when we¡¯re trying to capture the Professor were already big. But this one is totally different in size. Though this one doesn¡¯t have any kind of ore or mineral on its back.


    I also almost forgotten about Heavyback if I didn¡¯t encounter this giant tortoise. He and his sibling that I moved somewhere, were living happily without a care. Though they need to find their own food this time rather than being fed, they enjoyed sunbathing instead of being locked.


    But this giant tortoise, I didn¡¯t sense a hint of intellect from it. Not just the tortoise, but also every single monsters here. I guess I was right that there are no monsters with sane mind here that we can talk to.


    Just as I was about to approach the tortoise, I see Spot is charging his breath attack and aimed it to the tortoise. I stopped to see what will happen.


    Spot unleashed his breath attack as it hits the tortoise¡¯s gigantic shell. But Spot¡¯s attack didn¡¯t even leave a scratch! His breath the could even destroy a mountain, is not strong enough to destroy the shell of a tortoise!


    ¡°Hoh, you have a great defense. But how long can that shell protect you?¡± Spot said to the tortoise.


    Although the tortoise didn¡¯t reply, it seems like that tortoise knows that Spot is provoking it. So, it moved it¡¯s unbelievably long neck and aimed its head toward Spot to attack him.


    Now I remember. That time, Heavyback was also wanted to attack me using some sort of breath attack or roar. Maybe it¡¯s racial skill or magic. And Spot doesn¡¯t seem to know about it, so he ignores it.


    It might be stronger than even Spot¡¯s breath, so I need to stop it.


    With my quickest speed, I moved to the head of the tortoise and kicked its jaw as hard as I can. The jaw that was about to be opened to attack Spot, get closed instead. And the tortoise head exploded. That¡¯s how the tortoise killed itself.


    The breath that was about to be used as an attack, can¡¯t leave the head because the jaw of the tortoise was closed. But it was toote to cancel the attack. With no other ce to escape from its mouth, the tortoise ended up killing itself.


    And at the same time the head of the tortoise exploded, Spot attacked his second breath attack toward the tortoise¡¯s shell. It was more powerful than his previous breath attack, but the tortoise¡¯s shell¡¯s defense is still to much for Spot¡¯s breath attack to prate.


    ¡°What? It¡¯s dead already? Hey! I thought it was mine!¡± Spotined to me.


    ¡°Don¡¯tin! If I didn¡¯t kick his jaw, you¡¯ll be the one dying instead! Wait! It¡¯s still alive!¡±


    Just as I replied to Spot¡¯sin, The tortoise¡¯s head regenerated. What the hell? How can we defeat this tortoise then?


    I used Divine Vision to see the inner organ of the tortoise in case I can find a weakness. But before I can find anything, the tortoise head which is very close to me, raise high and went down as if trying to m me down with its head.


    But I evaded it. I stepped back far from the tortoise. Still, the tortoise was too fast. It even let another breath attack toward me.


    I dodged it again. But the monsters and the tamers in my direction were killed by the tortoise. It was great that my allies are not in this direction. But the tortoise¡¯s power is too frightening.


    A powerful shell for defense. A head that even if it¡¯s destroyed, it can regenerate quickly. And the attack that can kill so many monsters and humans at once. Where is it¡¯s weakness?


    Maybe if I destroyed its head again, I can see the source of its regeneration. But it will be difficult to approach it the second time.


    ¡°Spot! Lure the tortoise so it will follow you! Get as far away from us! If possible, kill it by yourself. If not, dy it as long as possible until I finished taking care of the everything else. I will help youter!¡± I gave the order to the serpent flying in the sky.


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    Spot used his tail to p the head of the tortoise which was still chasing me. And now, Spot has became its target and followed after him. Though it was extremely slow, I don¡¯t think this tortoise will target our allies anymore.


    Now, I can focus on the others.


    During the time we had a confrontation with the tortoise, Ang has killed many monsters and tamers. But I see something interesting.


    Once a summoner got their monster killed, they instantly use summoning magic again to make another contracted monsters and summon them. No matter what it is. Even a weak goblin. Just to have another monster to protect the summoner.


    And they will keep doing it whenever their new monster got killed, until they either out of mana to do another summoning, or the summoners are dead.


    It¡¯s the first time I saw it in this life, but it¡¯s a familiar sight in my past life. I have seen some summoners did exactly the same during the war.


    This is how a summoners fight normally. When their monster got defeated, they will make contract with another monster and summon them.


    Though I will never do that. If Shelia, Graham, or even Victoria died, I won¡¯t carelessly make contract with random monster and summon them. And I have became too close with those three as well. So, if they died, I won¡¯t be able to keep calm.


    Well, I hope they won¡¯t die. Anyway, this mean I need to kill all the enemy summoners first. It will be dangerous if they somehow managed to make a contract with powerful monster and summon them here After we kill their current contracted monster.

 Chapter 527

    Chapter 527: More Shooting Squad


    Just finding one human among these monsters are already difficult. Especially since some of the monsters are humanoid. Though I wonder why they modified a goblin into a human? Seeing them wearing loincloth and lifting a wooden club is embarrassing as a human race.


    But seriously, did the cult turns a human into a monster by injecting the monsters¡¯ gene into human¡¯s body? Just how low can they be?


    And why is the stupid Evil God wants to destroy the world? What kind of grudge does he has? At least if he¡¯s trying to conquer the world, I can understand that. Wanting to be the one above everyone. Bing a real god in the end.


    A way for someone to be recognized as a god by the people is simple. Even I know that. They just need to have the power to decide people¡¯s lives. Conquering the world is also one way to be recognized as a god. Though I don¡¯t know if there are real gods or not, a human being recognized as a god is quite simple. Though the method is difficult.


    But this god wants to destroy not only this world, but also Monsters World. Just what¡¯s going on in his head?


    I thought that he only started killing Aura users because Sonia somehow seduced someone he cares about. But I guess that¡¯s not all.


    Well, whatever the reason he has, for me to have my peace, I need to kill him and everyone rted to the cult. Though for those who are still children, I guess the only way to go is to let Russel brainwash them. But he¡¯s old now, so I hope I can get another brainwashing mage like him.


    .....


    Oh, I finally found one human. Unobstructed by the monsters. So, I aimed my gun toward the human target, but before I can shoot my bullet, another bullet from different direction took him down. When I looked toward the source, I saw Sara and several other air mages carrying a gun in their hand shooting from quite the distance.


    Sara notices me. In fact, she knows that I was targeting her target. So, she waves her hand to tell me to go find another target.


    It seems like I have been running around for a while, that I entered the front line of the enemy. I¡¯ll leave things here to Sara and the others as I look for another location.


    And of course since the enemies are mostly monsters, while I was running around, I spread the infuriating gases all around me so the monsters will fight each other. I also need to make sure that none of my allies affected by my gases.


    The battle goes well this time as well. After all, most of the monsters don¡¯t have anything to fight from distance. So, even our human soldiers can stop them. Though killing the monsters are still a bit too difficult for them. The modified monsters have been strengthened their defense so average magic won¡¯t kill them.


    ...Also, the soldiers on our side were distracted by the fact that some monsters look like humans. Just like that goblin-human. The humans who wear loincloth and lifting their clubs. Just how and why did the cult think that was a good idea?


    I think everyone will be traumatized after fighting them. And since they won¡¯t be useful for the vampires, we will kill them all. As for the tamers and summoners, I guess only the lucky ones will be captured.


    Though I will kill them all after this war is over.


    Oh, found another human! Wait, he¡¯s a vampire. Shooting him won¡¯t kill him. I¡¯ll just leave and find another human to kill.


    How many of the human enemies are there? Because some monsters have human form, I can¡¯t tell. And just how many monsters can one tamers tame? Aren¡¯t there too many monsterspared to the humans?


    But with Ang here, we should be able to defeat everyone sooner. It¡¯s starting to get dark. We will lose our visibility soon.


    Same with the enemies. But if the cult have experimented the monsters to be strengthened, they might make their monsters¡¯ vision to be able to see in the dark as well. Not counting the monsters that already can see well, or sense the opponents using other means. Good thing many of the soldiers are wearing eye-patch just like I told them.


    When it turns dark, their other eye that has been covered, would have adapted to the dark and they don¡¯t need to get used to the dark. They can continue fighting as they were.


    But where is Ang?


    Wait! Is that her facing dozens of monsters with high magic resistance! Even if it¡¯s her, it was a stupid thing to do!


    Sigh... she¡¯s just like usual. That mean I will be the one to take care most of the monsters here.


    This time, I won¡¯t care if they are monsters or humans. As long as they are in the enemy¡¯s side, I will kill them. Not just the humans from their side that I will kill. Well, those humans might have been targeted by the shooting squad led by Sara.


    After finding out that I was too close to the front line, I checked on the shooting squad from time to time. They are doing great in holding the enemy line. The enemy can only march slowly when they are under barrage of the guns.


    It¡¯s just as Victoria said. Guns are too amazing as it is dangerous.


    Though after this battle, there will be more guns used for war. I¡¯ll get more earth mage to create guns and share them to those we can trust.


    As I was killing more monsters, I noticed the presence of the invisible Sonia. Seems like I received a message from someone. So, I retreated to a safe distance before I can listen to her message.


    ¡°Roy, a message from Sara. She wants you to open a portal to the Blobby that she left back in the ssroom where you used to teach,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°A portal over there? Does it mean she has reinforcement?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. They are students for Sara¡¯s air magic ss. Sara has selected few of them that she can trust, and told them about the war. And she said that they are willing to help. Sara is moving to another location for this new squad to standby at. You can go meet her first so she can exin everything to you. I¡¯ll be leaving now,¡± Sonia said before she disappears.


    Hearing the message, I¡¯m d that those students have became strong enough to make Sara thinks they are capable to hold their candle in this war. I suppose being a professor even for a while is worth it.


    I ran toward where Sara is. She¡¯s hiding behind the bushes alone as the other shooting squad can do well on their own. It was just today that they received a gun, right? It¡¯s either they can follow order and learn things quickly, or Sara is an amazing teacher. I guess it¡¯s both.


    ¡°Sara! Can they be trusted?¡± I asked Sara right away as soon as I meet her.


    ¡°Yes. When you were busy with training, I had Candy and Wendy helped me to select the capable students. Although we can¡¯t tell if they are lying or not, the three of us were experienced in selecting those who can join our rank as agents of the kingdom. I got Sonia to inform someone who was in standby in Cassau and get him to ry the message to those students to wait in the ssroom tonight. They should be there already,¡± Sara exined.


    If they have received approval from not only Sara, but Candy and Wendy as well, I think I can trust her.


    ¡°Alright. I¡¯ll open a portal right now,¡± I said as I opened a portal to the Blobby she left in the ssroom.


    ¡°Oh! What is this? The scenery changed!¡±


    ¡°It really as Ms. Sara said! We can go to the other side of the world thanks to Mr. Roy!¡±


    I heard various surprised exmation from my students during my teaching days. And not just them. There are also Sara¡¯s students whom I¡¯ve never met before.


    Just hearing that someone called me Mr. Roy feels nostalgic. Even though it was just about one year ago since I left teaching profession...


    ¡°Quickly enter the portal. We¡¯re at war now. I¡¯ll exin the situation after all of youe to this side,¡± Sara said.


    ¡°Oh, okay!¡±


    I can see the agent who was in Cassau standing in the corner of the ssroom waving his hand to me. And seeing how everyone who entered the portal wearing purple armbands, I can tell that he also informed how we tell foes and allies.


    After all of them entered the portal, Sara quickly exined the situation to them as they instantly stay in position. Seems like Sara has taught them not only to shoot, but other things about fighting as well. As expected, she¡¯s an amazing teacher.

 Chapter 528

    Chapter 528: Unexpected Enemy¡¯s Summoned Monster


    Now, we have two firing squad. Although ourtest reinforcement, the students that Sara taught, were new in battle, they learned a lot from Sara in ss. As for the soldier who were taught by Sara just this afternoon, thanks to being soldier, they can follow order well so they are more orderly. Though their uracy was less than the students, they are more levelheaded.


    We have mages holding the line. But thanks to the help of the two shooting squads, we can defend better than before. In fact, the mages are now more in the offensive than defensive. And they are pushing back the enemy¡¯s front line.


    Just one shooting squad was enough to hold the line. But two of them? We¡¯re pushing back.


    Well, it¡¯s also thanks to the monsters. The werewolves, angels, vampires, and the modified monsters, are very helpful fighting the monsters with high magic resistance. With Ang defeating many monsters at once, and Spot holding back the tortoise, we are winning. We just need to continue fighting in this fashion and we can achieve victory in today¡¯s battle.


    As for me, I am now moving in the middle of the enemies. I¡¯m being surrounded, but that doesn¡¯t matter.


    My job is to kill the tamers and summoners. And maybe the monsters along the way. That¡¯s why it¡¯s easier for me if I¡¯m in the middle of the enemy.


    With my Divine Vision, I can tell where my own allies will shoot. Other than Ang¡¯s huge magic, I should be able to dodge all our allies¡¯ magic and bullets. Though I think I¡¯m concentrating too much on the surrounding. But if I¡¯m tired, I¡¯ll just escape to the sky and get far from here to take a short rest.


    .....


    I keep swinging and thrusting my Reizpear to the enemies. And then, two men managed to stop my sh with their weapon.


    Umm... rather than men, they are modified monsters that look like human men. They are wearing loincloth... Just why!?


    Did the cult think of putting them inside a city? But why are they wearing loincloth!? That is totally suspicious!


    Maybe there are clothes for them in the fake vige. That¡¯s why they were ordered toe to the fake vige first before going to the capital.


    ...The cult sure does have a weird hobby.


    But I think if that¡¯s really their n, it might work. These human shaped monsters can¡¯t be differentiated from normal humans. As long as they are wearing normal clothes, no one can tell that they are monsters. So, if they are hidden in the middle of a city, there will be chaos.


    Anyway, there are two monsters whosebined strength is strong enough to block my Reizpear imbued with Aura. What monsters are they?


    The two of them are equipped with a shield in their left hand and a spear in their right. Maybe some sort of soldier type monsters.


    Hmm... I don¡¯t know. Well let¡¯s not care about what species or race they are. I¡¯m going to kill them.


    The two of them blocked my Reizpear side by side as I swung it horizontally. One of them stopped the de of Reizpear with his shield, and another blocked the the spear¡¯s shaft right next to the de.


    The spear that blocked the de has a huge scratch, but thanks to the shield blocking the shaft, the de can¡¯t sh through the shield.


    Well, they can only stop my spear because I¡¯m focusing on my Aura to make my spear sharper. Now, I¡¯m using my Aura to make myself stronger.


    As my spear is still touching their shields, I used more power to push them away. The two human-like monsters got blown away. But thanks to my power, the swing I made was too big. So, the monsters who are excel in closebat were trying to attack me at this moment.


    But I won¡¯t let them.


    Using my movement technique I learned from the ostriches, I dodged their attacks after letting go of my spear. I bet none of them expected me to release my spear.


    After dodging their attacks, I transformed Blobbies into weapons. This time, I won¡¯t use guns. And using spear while being surrounded so close is difficult even if I can overpower them. So, my choice is dual knives.


    Usingbination attacks, as my left hand and right hand move to different direction to stop or to attack the enemies within range, andbined with the ostrich¡¯s movement I learned, I killed five of them in a mere second.


    ¡°Phew... that was close. Now, none of your attack will hit me. You are too slow and I can see all your movement.¡±


    Saying so, I return to offensive again. I let Reizpear be since I can just retrieve itter. This time, I¡¯m moving with dual knives.


    Some monsters are troublesome with their not only high magic resistance, but their physical defense are strong as well. Still, most of them are no match for me.


    But there are some annoying ones who have regeneration ability. Just like that tortoise. Even if I cut off their necks, they will regenerate and able to fight again. But when I stabbed their heart, they died. Just like the vampires.


    I guess most of the monsters have been experimented so they have vampire¡¯s gics that will let them regenerate again and again without needing blood like vampires. And that tortoise, I need to destroy its heart if I want to kill it.


    Well, that¡¯s just a guess. And I¡¯m too busy handling these monsters. I¡¯ll let Spot have fun with the tortoise until I¡¯m done here.


    Though Ang doesn¡¯t need to know about it. Most of the monsters she defeated were dead in an instant before they could even regenerate.


    She seems to be in joyous mood. Staying in the city without having a good fight at all must be boring for her. And now, she can relieve her stress by defeating as many monsters as possible.


    Good thing there are no children yet. If there are, instead of relieving stress, it will only add up.


    I think we have killed a lot of tamers. It¡¯s obvious since they are staying close to their tamed monsters. As for the summoners, they only have one monster. So, those monster might not be enough to protect them. And they are busy using their other elements to protect themselves.


    Although the summoners who lost their monster summon another newly contracted monster again and again, the number of monsters appearing is decreasing. And there are less human-like monsters who only wear loincloth. It should be soon that they are out of monsters.


    ¡°Focus more on the tamers or summoners! As long as there are no more humans, the monsters will fight each other instead! And they won¡¯t be able to summon another monster!¡±


    I shouted an order while still in the middle of battle. I shed a wolf monster and defend myself from a superior species of ogre with my dual knives. Even though they are just knives, they have powerful defense, sharpness, and durability thanks to my Aura. This time, I used my Aura to be a bnced fighter. I made the knives sharp and my body strong. Not just sharp de like before.


    I killed those who seems to be able to overpower me as soon as possible, while defending myself against those I think weaker than me. And so far, my judgement is the right one.


    And if I judged that I can¡¯t defeat those stronger than me quickly, I will save them forter when I¡¯m not being surrounded.


    They are just monsters. Not humans. And even if they have been experimented to be stronger than average, they don¡¯t have good cooperation with each other. They can only follow the order of their masters. Still, if I got careless as they surround me, I will be the one dying.


    Soon after, I killed another powerful ogre. And this one seem to be someone¡¯s summoned monster.


    I was about to kill the summoner as well, but I was toote as he summoned a new monster.


    ¡°Come forth! Whatever you are, defeat the one in front of you!¡± the summoner shouted.


    I was thinking of killing the monster right away, but I can¡¯t do that. Because I judged the monster in front of me to be much stronger than me. In fact, this one might be stronger than any monster I ever faced.


    It¡¯s a dragon! It¡¯s a frigging dragon! The size, although smaller than the tortoise, it was slightly bigger than Spot! And it¡¯s covered with red burning scales.


    ¡°It¡¯s a frigging Fire Dragon!¡±


    I¡¯d like to escape, but if the dragon is attacking, many people would die. Both from our side and from the enemy side. I need to be the one luring this dragon away.


    Ang is too far from here, and she¡¯s having fun killing the monsters around her. She must be interested in killing the dragon, but if I waited, many would fall. That¡¯s why it¡¯s up to me.


    The dragon rise to the sky, and I followed suit. After transforming the Blobbies into a whip to retrieve my spear back, I used the spear to gain the dragon¡¯s attention.


    Even after using my full strength, there¡¯s only a scratch on its scale. This dragon is a cheat.


    I need to at least stall for time until Ang cane to help.

 Chapter 529

    Chapter 529: I Need Her Help. Is She Free?


    I rise to the sky while keep attacking the fire dragon with Blobbyguns so it will keep its attention at me.


    ¡°Hey! That¡¯s a dragon! Do you need any help!?¡±


    While I was flying in the sky, Spot shouted. Seems like he knows how powerful a dragon is.


    ¡°You just need to keep the tortoise busy! I will also stall this dragon! Once the girl is done with whoever she¡¯s fighting, she can help either one of us!¡± I shouted back to the serpent.


    Of course by the girl, I¡¯m talking about Ang. We didn¡¯t speak anyone¡¯s name to keep our identities secret. Ang is too famous right now. Even though she hasn¡¯t taken any part in the tournament, because thementators are the same twins as thementators during the previous college tournament, they have spread the words about how powerful Ang is. At least that¡¯s what I heard from Sonia. And Jewel also told me this afternoon.


    Ang saw me fighting the dragon, but somehow, she¡¯s focusing more on the monsters around her. But that¡¯s for the best.


    Those monsters have high magic resistance, and quite powerful in closebat as well. Even the werewolves are having difficulties fighting them. If Ang isn¡¯t there, those monsters will attack other people.


    .....


    So far, we have been doing well to reduce the casualties. But now, if Spot isn¡¯t facing the tortoise, or I¡¯m not stalling the dragon, or Ang isn¡¯t fighting those monsters with high magic resistance, the casualties will increase and we might even lose. We can¡¯t have that when the cult¡¯s main force, the artificial master level children, aren¡¯t here yet.


    No one among us want to kill children. I don¡¯t know about the monsters, but I hope they are the same as well. But if they came, having more people can stall those children until I used whatever it is that Marie created with the help of Victoria and other people.


    Victoria said that it¡¯s still in experimental phase. They still need some more test before they can feel confident about the tool. That¡¯s why Victoria is still not here yet.


    I wish she could quickly tell me that their tool is working so she cane here.


    Though what I need to do right now is to fight this fire dragon. As for the other monsters, Shelia, Graham, Arin, and the others should be able to do something until Ang or Spot is done fighting their enemies. As for me, I have no confident of defeating the fire dragon on my own when Victoria is not with me.


    Although I have Blobbies, they are different from Victoria. Victoria can alter her weight so I can hit the enemies with heavier attack. The Blobbies can do that to, but the limit of their maximum weight is much lower than how heavy Victoria can be. That¡¯s why defeating a dragon without her is just like a dream.


    Well... maybe Victoria won¡¯t be needed much during the testing session of the new magic tool. I¡¯ll ask Sonia if she is avable for a few hour.


    ¡°Sonia, ask Victoria if she¡¯s avable for the next hour. I¡¯m fighting a dragon and I can¡¯t win without her. Though if she¡¯s busy, tell her that it¡¯s fine to note. I can still stall for time until Ang helped me,¡± I said as I called Sonia who is invisible after appearing next to me.


    ¡°A dragon? Alright, I¡¯ll ask her,¡± Sonia said as she disappears.


    Until she returns, I need to distract the dragon. Also, I need to make sure that the dragon is only focused at me.


    I keep shooting at the dragon while flying toward somewhere far from the battle. And even so, I need to make sure that our position won¡¯t change. With the dragon¡¯s back facing the battle where the others are. Or else, the dragon¡¯s fire breath will kill too many of us.


    I think we¡¯re already far enough. I let the Blobbies return to my armor as I hold the Reizpear I have retrieved back tightly. This will be a difficult battle. But if I can win this, I will be stronger again.


    ¡°Come at me, oversized lizard!¡±


    Although this dragon is smaller than the Giant Smander from the stampede in Melk in the past, it¡¯s still huge. Though when I called it oversized lizard, my Divine Vision which was still active can see Gecko, the dragonic man, looked this way as if I¡¯m calling him.


    You both are oversized lizard, but I¡¯m not calling Gecko. Just focus on your fight.


    The ce where I hit the dragon the strongest was its back. The one protected by powerful scales. But what if I¡¯m aiming at its bellies? Or its eyes? Neck? Tongue?


    What is the most effective attack? Magic? sh attack? Pierce attack? Or blunt attack?


    The sh attack was ineffective on its back. But maybe piercing attack will.


    When the dragon noticed that I¡¯m in front of it alone, maybe it thinks that I¡¯m strong. So, it lets out a fire breath to attack me.


    Combined with my air magic to make the fire weaker, I barely managed to sh the fire breath. Though the shoulder of my armor got burned slightly. Good thing it was my Blobbyarmor. If I don¡±t wear Blobbyarmor, I would get burned instead. And that Fire Breath was more like a Fireball, so I can sh it. If it¡¯s really a non-stop Fire Breath, I would be turned into ashes.


    Though the dragon¡¯s attack is not over.


    As soon as the dragon noticed that I can sh through his fire breath, it flies toward me. And it¡¯s fast! Faster than me at least in the sky!


    The dragon shed its w at me as I blocked it with Reizpear. But I got blown away instead.


    ¡°Shit! It¡¯s also very strong!¡±


    Dragon is truly a cheat. If Andro is much more fit rather than his current overweight body, he would be too strong. Even this dragon is strong. What about the Kaiser Dragon, Andro?


    Unless there¡¯s a gigantic enemy the same size of Andro, I guess I will never know. For now, I need to focus on the dragon.


    Stronger than me and faster than me. Though I hope I¡¯m smarter than it. That¡¯s the only way I can hope to win.


    Should I start using portal? But we¡¯re flying in the sky, so it might be difficult. For now, let¡¯s attach as many Blobbies as possible all over the dragon¡¯s body.


    I threw several Blobbies toward the dragon. And I need to make sure that those Blobbies are located in the right ce. Like on his chest so I can stab his heart directly.


    The dragon¡¯s arm is longer than me with Reizpear. So, it¡¯s difficult to reach its body. But with portal, it should be possible. Though I won¡¯t use portal yet.


    I dodged the dragon¡¯s sh and about to get closer, but the dragon flew backward to gain its distance. Although the dragon is faster than me, when it¡¯s flying backward, I am still a bit faster. So, I can finally reach him again after the first encounter.


    With my Reizpear, I aimed at his heart. His chest is not covered by scales like his back, but the defense is still pretty strong.


    Still, with my full power, My spear pierced its chest. Unfortunately, just as the tip of the spear get closer, the dragon pped its wings to fly backward again. Meaning, I couldn¡¯t stab its heart.


    I pierced its chest, but with my Divine Vision, I can see that the tip was just poked its lung. And the bleeding stopped quickly, so I didn¡¯t give the dragon much damage.


    It doesn¡¯t seem to have the same regeneration ability as the vampires or werewolves, but its healing ability was quite good.


    I guess I will use portal to fight. The dragon won¡¯t be able to predict my attack well if I use portals.


    But when I thought of that, Sonia returns with good news.


    ¡°Victoria said that she can leave the testing to Marie and the others over there. You can summon her. Though after the battle is over, it¡¯s best if you bring her back to Marie¡¯s side.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s great! Victoria!¡±


    I summoned Victoria after I broke my Reizpear into pieces so I can put them in my pocket.


    ¡°It¡¯s been a while, R- A DRAGON! There¡¯s a dragon in front of me!¡±


    ¡°Of course there is! I told Sonia to ry a message to you that we need to fight a dragon!¡±


    As soon as Victoria got summoned, she greeted me. But before she could finish saying my name, she as surprised to see a dragon in front of her.


    ¡°I didn¡¯t know that! Sonia just told me that it will be easier for you to fight if I¡¯m around!¡± Victoria shouted.


    ¡°I just don¡¯t like how you can take it easy with the testing when everyone here is so busy. I had to travel hundreds of times in one day, but you were just watching something and take it easy. I don¡¯t like that.¡±


    Seems like Sonia is envious that Victoria doesn¡¯t look too busy. Even I am envious!


    ¡°Just get ready to fight! It¡¯s not like this is the first time you see a dragon!¡± I shouted to Victoria.


    ¡°Fine, fine. Though it¡¯s the first time that the dragon in front of me is trying to kill us for real!¡±


    Well, back then, Andro just didn¡¯t care at all about us in front of him. But this dragon in front of me is showing hostility to us.


    Now that Victoria is here, I don¡¯t need to worry about how much Blobbies I will waste.

 Chapter 530

    Chapter 530: I¡¯m Not the Dragon yer. I¡¯m the...


    ¡°Alright, Victoria! What should we do!?¡±


    Just as we both prepared to face the dragon, I asked Victoria if she has some sort of n.


    ¡°Wait, you called me here but you don¡¯t have any n at all!?¡± Victoria shouted.


    ¡°The n is to defeat the dragon as soon as possible. But the how to is something I haven¡¯t prepared yet. I¡¯ll just probably end up with beating the dragon over and over again until it finally dies,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s the only thing we can do anyway. Let¡¯s do it!¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°How will you two do it anyway? Even if Victoria is here, it¡¯s not like you can give damage to the dragon easily. Roy, you have experienced it firsthand how tough the dragon is. Can you do it?¡± Sonia who is still here asked. I suppose she¡¯s not in a hurry.


    ¡°Is that so? Roy, what have you tried with the dragon?¡± Victoria asked.


    .....


    ¡°Just things to do with Reizpear. shing it and stabbing it. But I can only give light scratches on the dragon¡¯s scales. If I can do it continuously, I might be able to prate its scales, but the dragon is strong in meleebat as well. It¡¯s also very fast. When I was thinking of using portals in the battle, Sonia returns and told me I can summon you,¡± I exined.


    ¡°Hmm... shing and piercing attack won¡¯t be effective unless we destroyed its scales. We will use portals as our secret moveter if we find the battle to be harder then we thought. I guess it¡¯s obvious why you asked me toe,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Right. Using drill will be effective, but the dragon won¡¯t give me the chance to drill through its body. So, it¡¯s obvious what weapon I need,¡± I said.


    Because we have been partners for a long time, it seems like we already able to read each other¡¯s mind as we spoke at the same time.


    ¡°¡±Giant Hammer it is.¡±¡±


    Both of us agree to use Giant Hammer.


    With Victoria who will be transformed into a hammer, I can give powerful blunt attack to the dragon.


    My main weapon of choice from the start is not the spear that has self-repair magic, Reizpear. But it has always been Victoria.


    The only reason I got Reizpear was because I need something other than my summoned monster to help me get my special ability as an Aura user. And since Reizpear proven to bepatible with me, I started using it more often.


    But still, my main weapon is Victoria. Not Blobby, but Victoria.


    She can change to any kind of weapon I want. And I even learned about using spear the first time when I wield Victoria, not Reizpear.


    Sword, spear, shield, katana, broadsword, hammer, axe, gun, knife, and even grappling hook back when I couldn¡¯t fly. Victoria is a very convenient monster. Though if I told her that she¡¯s convenient, she will be mad, so let¡¯s keep it deep in my heart.


    With her, I can use guns without caring about the bullets. After all, she can make clones of herself again and again, and make her clones disappear when she reach the limit of how much clones she created so she can make some more. So, I won¡¯t be run out of bullets.


    To be as sharp as possible, or have a wide area to hit the enemies, or to be unpredictable. Victoria is any Aura user¡¯s greatest partner. Though I¡¯m the only Aura user in this world and her only partner. It¡¯s just Victoria and Sonia¡¯s opinion as former Aura users.


    ¡°Hmm? Seems like Albert needs me. Well, I¡¯ll leave you to fight the dragon. Good luck!¡± Sonia disappear when she feels that Albert is contacting her.


    She said that she needed to go all over the continent for more or less a hundred times in a day. She is the most hardworking ally that we have. If she¡¯s not with us, we won¡¯t get to fight the cult like this.


    Not just her. It¡¯s thanks to everyone I met.


    Now that I think I have matured a bit, I feel like an idiot to just told everything to Ka and Ang back then. Any smart person won¡¯t put their trust on anyone they just know for a while.


    But I think that was the greatest decision I¡¯ve ever made even though that was stupid. Thanks to that decision, I can move forward with the help of everyone around me.


    Well, if I didn¡¯t tell Ang and Ka about myself back then, I will still go get other people¡¯s help. But I don¡¯t think we can reach this far in destroying the cult if I do that.


    But it all will result with nothing if we can¡¯t defeat this dragon.


    Seems like the summoner has been shot to death by Sara. But this mean the only way to stop the dragon is to kill it.


    I¡¯d like to mention that this dragon is a summoned monster from Monsters World. Which mean, this dragon is stronger than most monsters in this world. Also, even without any modification, this one is the strongest monster in this ce. Even stronger than the tortoise.


    The tortoise is slow, but it has good defense. But this dragon has good defense, strong attack, and very fast as well. But I won¡¯t give up.


    I transformed Victoria into a hammer. The handle is two meters, and the size of the hammer head is a bit over one meter with the diameter of the area of impact is fifty centimeters. The other size of the head is a sharp pick. It¡¯s a warhammer.


    ¡°It¡¯s been so long since I¡¯m in this form. Let¡¯s beat the crap out of the dragon!¡± Victoria said.


    With me covered in Blobbyarmor and Victorihammer in my hands, I fly toward the fire dragon.


    The dragon was still calm. Probably it judged that because it¡¯s faster than me, I won¡¯t be able to reach it.


    That was correct if I don¡¯t have Vitoria with me. But now, she¡¯s here with me.


    I raised the hammer as high as possible, and when the dragon saw that, it flew back a bit just so my hammer will be out of reach.


    But this is Victoria. Not Blobby.


    The hammer that I raised turned not only bigger, but the handle is also longer as well. It was light when I raised the hammer since Victoria made it so, but when I started to swing it down, Victoria adjusted the weight to be at its heaviest as the hammer struck the dragon.


    I can¡¯t hit the dragon¡¯s head, but I hit its shoulder because the dragon moved before I hit it.


    With my strength and Aura imbued to the hammer,bined with the weight of the hammer and gravity, the dragon is in pain and fall down a bit before staying in the air with the help of its wings.


    Although I almost pierced its chest before, it got healed too quickly. But now I hit it with a hammer, it has a harder time to heal itself. This is a good sign.


    I got Victoria to make the hammer as light as possible as I raised it to the sky again as fast as possible, and swung it down as powerful as I can with Victoria adjusting the weight again to be the heaviest.


    This is the greatest form that Victoria can dobined with my strength. A hammer.


    Changing its shape and weight, I can move Victorihammer however I want.


    With my strength, I can dobos of raising the hammer and swing it down as fast as I can without letting the dragon escape no matter how fast it is.


    Maybe I won¡¯t need to use portal anymore.


    Well, this strategy is good only against big target. If it¡¯s human with defensive magic, using spear or another weapon is the right answer. Of course if I can use hammer like this every time, that would be ideal. But humans are smarter and have magic. As for monsters, it¡¯s rare for them to have defensive magic.


    I keep hitting down the dragon over and over again, until finally the dragon hits the ground. There¡¯s no more escape. And now that it¡¯s on the ground, I can move the hammer even faster.


    The dragon¡¯s scales are very strong. Even after I hit it over and over again, there are only a few damages on its scales. But that mean my attacks are effective. And with the dragon being on the ground, the damage is doubled since he can¡¯t be pushed down anymore.


    Finally, I see cracks all over its body. The dragon¡¯s defense is being destroyed. And again, I raised the hammer and swing it down.


    This time it¡¯s different. Instead of the t area of the hammer, I got Victoria to transform it into the pick side of the hammer. With its sharp point, I can pierce through the dragon¡¯s body and killed it.


    I got Victoria adjust the size of the hammer, so the pick will pierce through the dragon¡¯s heart from the back. With my strongest swing, I will kill the dragon.


    ¡°Die, you oversized lizard!¡± I shouted.


    I pierced its heart as blood soaked the ground. I did it! I killed a dragon!


    ¡°AHAHAHA! I¡¯m the Dragon Squasher!¡± I shouted joyfully.


    ¡°Isn¡¯t it supposed to be the Dragon yer?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°But I didn¡¯t y the dragon! I squashed it!¡± I replied.


    ¡°Well, you are technically correct. Other than the finishing attack, you did squash the dragon. Let¡¯s move to the next battle. It¡¯s not over yet, right?¡± Victoria suggested to keep moving.


    ¡°Let me enjoy the satisfaction of being the Dragon Squasher first! Oh, don¡¯t tell Andro that I squashed a dragon. I don¡¯t know what he will do,¡± I said.


    I killed a dragon with the help of Victoria. With this, unless there are other summoners who summoned powerful monsters, the only trouble we have left for today is the tortoise.


    Now that I¡¯m free, I can help Spot kill the tortoise. Unless Spot doesn¡¯t want my help and want to kill the tortoise on his own.


    Well, the sooner we kill the tortoise, the sooner we can rest. Even Spot can get tired after fighting for so long. Let¡¯s help him right away.

 Chapter 531

    Chapter 531: Flying Tortoise


    ¡°Well, now that we have defeated the dragon, where should we go next? Helping the others, supporting Ang, or taking care of the tortoise with Spot?¡±


    After we defeated the dragon, I told Victoria about where Ang and Spot are, and then she asked me which one should I help first.


    I looked around at the battlefield. Ang is doing fine. Now that I have defeated the dragon, she doesn¡¯t need to worry about me. But maybe because she saw me defeating the dragon, she wanted to be the one to take care of the tortoise. So, she keeps ncing at the tortoise¡¯s location even in the middle of a fight.


    ¡°Sigh... Ang seems like she wanted to fight the tortoise. Let¡¯s go to her ce, so she can leave and fight the tortoise. Although Spot doesn¡¯t have any trouble stalling the tortoise, it¡¯s not like he could defeat the tortoise anytime soon. The tortoise¡¯s regeneration ability is too annoying,¡± I said.


    Spot has destroyed the tortoise¡¯s head or its other limbs several times already. But each time they were destroyed, they would regenerate soon after. Even if it¡¯s Spot, he might still get tired.


    In a way, that tortoise is much more powerful than the dragon. At least in term of defense.


    The dragon has its scales covering its body. But even with my Reizpear, I can leave some scratches on the fire dragon¡¯s scale.


    .....


    But the tortoise? Even after Spot used his strongest breath attack, there¡¯s not a single scratch on the tortoise shell. Even its flesh would regenerate whenever they are destroyed.


    Still, if I didn¡¯t defeat the dragon, everyone will be in a huge trouble. That¡¯s why I needed to defeat the dragon first before I can help Spot.


    But before that, I need to kill every enemy¡¯s summoners first. It would be troublesome if they somehow summoned another powerful summoned monster.


    Now that I look carefully, seems like some of the summoners actually did summoned powerful monsters. That¡¯s why Shelia, Graham, and Arin had some trouble. Though I don¡¯t need to help them because I can tell the enemy¡¯s monsters aren¡¯t capable of defeating those three yet.


    Hmm... I guess it¡¯s time tomence our n. But first, I need to go to Ang¡¯s location so she can enjoy a fight with the tortoise.


    I run toward Ang¡¯s location as she was firing several magic at once to the monsters. So powerful.


    To be able to do that, one must need to have high level of concentration. But that is something that we can¡¯t really hope much from Ang. Still, she¡¯s able to do it perfectly because she trained hard for it. And maybe the fact that she¡¯s a multielement mage helped as well.


    Anyway, it¡¯s time to swap.


    ¡°Hey, you really want to fight that tortoise, huh?¡± I asked as soon as I arrive next to her.


    ¡°Yeah. Can you take care of things here while I fight the tortoise?¡± Ang asked while casting another magic at an ogre.


    ¡°I can take care of things here. And if you want to fight the tortoise on your own, you need to ask for Spot¡¯s permission. He¡¯s the one who wanted to fight that tortoise alone in the first ce,¡± I said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll ask him. Also, is the location of the tortoise good?¡± Ang asked.


    ¡°Good for what?¡±


    ¡°Far enough so that we won¡¯t get affected by your n. That is good for me so I can defeat the tortoise on my own. I don¡¯t want to be bothered in a fight,¡± Ang said.


    Far so our n won¡¯t be effective? If it was me, instead, I¡¯d like to go as close as possible. Still, that¡¯s just very Ang. And for me and Ang, it¡¯s best to let her do what she wants.


    ¡°It¡¯s far enough so your and the tortoise¡¯s attack won¡¯t reach us as long as you keep the tortoise¡¯s attention toward you. As for our n... you can just create a huge Earth Wall or something so you won¡¯t get bothered by it. It needs to be big enough for that to happen though,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s easy. Well, I¡¯ll leave now. Good luck in this ce!¡± Ang said as she flew fast toward the location of the tortoise.


    Soon after she chatted for a bit with Spot, she raises a huge Earth Wall. I guess she received Spot¡¯s permission.


    Spot has fought that tortoise for a while and repeatedly used his powerful breath attack, so it¡¯s normal for him to get tired. Especially since the tortoise doesn¡¯t seem to take any damage. And Spot also retreated to a safe distance.


    I look around the battlefield while fighting. I see that everyone has gotten used to fighting in the dark. Including the enemy. There are only few source of light created by either fire from the fire type monsters, or light magic from some tamers or summoners of the enemy.


    The requirements for our n has been fulfilled. Now, it¡¯s time tomence our n.


    Everyone is in ce. Whether it¡¯s on purpose or coincident, our allies are within the range.


    And so, I take a deep breath and use air magic to make my voice as loud as I can. Though this time, even though it¡¯s not for distracting my enemies, it can be used as such.


    ¡°EVERYONE! IT¡¯S TIME! ANGELS, DO IT NOW!¡±


    The n is quite simple. As soon as I give the signal, which is my shout, the angels who were born with light element magic will use their light magic to illuminate the whole ce. Making this battlefield as bright as possible. Possibly, even brighter than it was during the day.


    The angels use their light magic all at the same time. The ce became so bright that no one can see anything. But because of my signal, our allies have closed their eyes and prepared for the sudden brightness.


    As for me, even if I close my eyes, I can still see very well. And I don¡¯t have any problem with darkness or brightness. Even when I¡¯m looking at the sun directly, I was fine. Even though it was weird.


    Although I¡¯m looking with my eyes, it was as if I¡¯m not using them at all. Though I have gotten used to it since I got my Divine Vision for a long time already.


    I look around to see if there are anyone from the enemies which aren¡¯t affected by the light. They will be my target.


    The light will only illuminate the area for one second. During that time, our side who closed their eyes will not be able to fight properly. That¡¯s why I need to protect them for one second.


    Using Victogun, I shoot around the ces where there are monsters who can still move well in the light. And after one second, everyone on our side has opened their eyes again.


    It was a massacre from this moment.


    Various magic was casted to the defenseless enemies.


    War cry and scream of horror can be heard at the same time.


    The soldiers have the face of a serial killer... wait, have they turn crazy?


    I guess this is the first time they can easily kill the cult members after they were blinded by the light. Though they need to kill them fast or they will get used to their sight again. But letting them enjoy the fight is fine as well.


    Well, they should know what to do. As for me, I just need to take care of the enemies who have been able to move well after being blinded.


    And we also have summoners on our side who have let their monsterse out. It¡¯s a good thing that they wear something purple so we can tell they are from our side.


    Now, all the human enemies have been defeated. And the monsters left are not that strong. Again, we¡¯re winning today.


    ¡°Your n was to blind the enemies? Well, that is useful. Is that why some of you wear eye-patch?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. When I suggested to get one of their eyes used to the dark with eye-patches, someone suggested to use light magic to blind the enemies. And look at what happened! It¡¯s a massacre. There were some casualties, but the result was great. Though we don¡¯t know when the artificial master level children wille,¡± I said.


    Victoria and I chatted for a bit, and suddenly, there was a loud sounding from behind the huge and tall Earth Wall that Ang created.


    ¡°...Is she for real?¡±


    ¡°What? What happened?¡± Victoria asked since she couldn¡¯t see behind the wall.


    Before I could answer, she can see what happened.


    The huge tortoise with the size of a mountain got blown away to the sky. There were holes on many parts of the tortoise. I can tell that the tortoise is finally dead. And that tortoise is blown high into the sky.


    ¡°...Victoria, can you tell me if there are any tortoise that can fly?¡± I asked Victoria.


    ¡°...I don¡¯t think so. Just how powerful is Ang right now?¡± Victoria asked back.


    ¡°...Too strong. And too awesome.¡±


    The tortoise started falling down, and it hit the ground with a loud noise. What magic can get that tortoise so high in the sky?


    Whatever the case, the battle tonight has ended with our victory. Though there are still things for me to do, I can at least rest easy for the night.

 Chapter 532

    Chapter 532: Sending Ang Back


    ¡°That was spectacr!¡±


    After the battle ended, I approached Ang and give her apliment.


    It was too amazing! A tortoise the size of a mountain can get blown away by Ang high into the sky! Although I saw how she did it, I can¡¯t exin it well.


    All of a sudden, the ground rise. The impact was so strong that it destroyed the tortoise¡¯s heart. The bottom part was destroyed, but some areas on the shell has holes in it. Telling me that in that short time, Ang also attacked the tortoise¡¯s shell.


    Even though Spot attacked it with his breath, that tortoise didn¡¯t take any damage at all. But just as soon as Ang stepped forward, she defeated the tortoise.


    If that¡¯s her relieving her stress for not being able to leave the capital at all because of the tournament, that¡¯s scary. Next time she had something she wants to do, I¡¯ll be sure to hellp her at all cost. Because if her stress increased, I don¡¯t know what she will do.


    It¡¯s not just me who approached Ang. Everyone is the same. They are all wanted to see the hero who blew away a mountain into the sky.


    .....


    Many people lost their friends and family because of the cult. Although I don¡¯t know what has happened with other countries, I know what happened in Tatrama. The cult has done various terrible deeds that cause the lost of people¡¯s lives.


    These soldiers can be considered lucky since they have the chance to get their revenge. But after fighting for a few days, they realized that they are not strong enough.


    They have heard about my power, but even when I¡¯m in front of them, they still couldn¡¯t believe it. For them, Aura is something that they couldn¡¯tprehend. They don¡¯t think that a human being could do what I can do.


    In fact, these people think of me closer to a monster than a human being. After all, not only I fought the enemies in close range like a monster. I am also the Werewolf King who has the werewolves, angels, and vampires under my control.


    That¡¯s why a human hero is needed. And however high my achievement against the cult is, it can¡¯t be me. And they finally found one.


    Ang is a hero that everyone needed to know. Her magic gives people hope that they can be as good as her.


    Well, I think that¡¯s impossible for anyone. But that¡¯s what I think everyone is thinking. They are thinking that if they train hard, they might be able to be as powerful as Ang.


    No matter how simple my way of fighting is, they can¡¯tprehend it. And it¡¯s probably my fault as well since I didn¡¯t particrly think of spreading the knowledge of Aura to everyone.


    But when they see Ang, they think that magic is much more superior than my Aura. After all, they have witnessed Spot fighting the tortoise, but the tortoise didn¡¯t take any damage. And just as soon as Ang appears, the tortoise was defeated.


    ¡°With her on our side, victory is obvious!¡±


    ¡°But she¡¯s only here for today, right? She needs to go back for the tournament?¡±


    ¡°Why does she need to go back? This war is much more important than the tournament. I know getting a title as the strongest mage in the world is amazing, but it¡¯s not that important, right?¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re right. The tournament is not important at all. But all the participants from every country other than Arturo are not there just for the title of the strongest. They also needed to protect the royalties, and the citizens as well. In fact, their job might be harder since they don¡¯t know if there are any members of the cult disguising as the citizens.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right. I heard that the real king of Arturo was swapped with a fake from the cult. If their king is from the cult, His majesty¡¯s life is in danger. That¡¯s why it¡¯s the job for those participants to protect them as well. We actually has the simpler job since we just need to face the enemies here. But those in the capital of Consenza need to watch out for everything.¡±


    The soldiers nearby started talking about the tournament and the duty of those who stay behind. The stupid one who doesn¡¯t know much started to learn more about the importance of the tournament.


    Maybe we should inform eveyone about why we need the tournament? But I thought the kings have informed their soldiers about it. Maybe this soldier is just too stupid to understand.


    Well, with the cult sending that many monsters here, we should be able to get short rest. Maybe I¡¯ll get the generals to tell the truth about the the tournament to the soldiers. And it¡¯s also good to pass the time as well from waiting. Having a chat that improve their intellect is good to make everyone smarter. Though for those who are too stupid, it¡¯s best to just give up.


    ¡°Ang, should I send you back to the capital? I don¡¯t think the cult will send anymore reinforcement anytime soon.¡±


    I approached Ang and asked her if she wants to go back and wait for her turn at the tournament.


    ¡°Hmm... what would happen if I refuse to participate? There¡¯s shouldn¡¯t be anything bad happening, right?¡± Ang asked.


    ¡°Well, from your point of view, how strong are the paticipants from Arturo?¡± I asked back.


    ¡°It¡¯s just individual battle. And I don¡¯t see anyone stronger than expert level mages on their side. Ka, Shirley, Celestine, or even Julia should be able to win if there¡¯s no surprise. You know, I can just pretend to be weak and lost in my first match so I can go back here right away. What do you think?¡± Ang suggested.


    ¡°I like to agree with you, but I can¡¯t. There are other areas where the soldiers are guarding. And we don¡¯t know if the cult will onlye to this ce. If they go to the capital right away from somewhere I can¡¯t see, you are our hope to stop them. The tournament is just a sideshow. Though if Ka or the other lose, I will bring them here if that¡¯s what they want,¡± I tried to exin it to Ang.


    ¡°But I like it here... Well, it¡¯s just a few days. I¡¯ll try to endure it,¡± Ang said.


    ¡°By the way, who is your matchup?¡± I asked Ang.


    ¡°We used ballot to take a number that decide our opponent. With the help of Sonia and Elsie, we know who we will face. Right on the first match, I will face someone from Arturo. It will only be at the semi-final when I can fight Celestine,¡± Ang said.


    ¡°You don¡¯t want to fight Celestine?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I am interested. But the waiting is annoying,¡± Ang pouted.


    ¡°Just do your best over there. Once the tournament is over and Albert said that it¡¯s safe, I will bring you back here. Though if I¡¯m in trouble, you will need toe here by yourself. Here, I opened a portal to Lynn¡¯s room. You can go back now,¡± I said as I opened a portal to the Emress¡¯ private chamber.


    It¡¯s something unthinkable for amoner toe and go to the Empress¡¯ private chamber however he like. But it¡¯s me we¡¯re talking about.


    After saying farewell, I closed the portal.


    I was thinking of telling the others to rest a bit, but when I see that we have more casualties than usual, instead, I opened portals for their friends to bring them home for a proper burial. Though I told those who wants to return to the capital of Consenza that I can¡¯t bring the corpses there in case the cult members witnessed me. They can only be burried somewhere else.


    I told those who left to have a one day rest. As for the monsters, only two werewolves died. I brought them back to Monsters Vige to get the other werewolves bury them. I stayed for a while since I¡¯m their king.


    After the burial of the werwolves, I return back to the fake vige since I can¡¯t leave for too long.


    Next opponent could be harder than the dragon or the tortoise. I need to be prepared.


    .....


    Meanwhile, in secret location where the cult¡¯s main base is located, the Archbishop is speaking with someone.


    ¡°How was it?¡± the Archbishop asked another cult member.


    ¡°We have just sent the monsters squad. We only have the artificial mages to send,¡± the cult member replied.


    ¡°Are they ready to go?¡± Archbishop asked.


    ¡°Yes. They can leave as soon as possible.¡±


    ¡°Hmm... Send them to the base nearby the capital right away. And tell them to get to the capital during the final. They should arrive right on time when everyone is not prepared because of the final. With them we can kill all kings at once,¡± the Archbishop said.


    ¡°Understood. But do we really need to send them? I think including the monsters, we have sent more than enough to destroy a country.¡±


    ¡°...Many times have our n resulted in failure. And the Professor is missing as well. Even if those children won¡¯t do anything, there¡¯s nothing wrong about being too prepared.¡±


    The next wave will be thest one. And they were all the artificial master level children that Roy and the others afraid of.


    The only hope Roy and the others have is the tool that Marie created with the help of Victoria. Because if that is not effective, Roy has no choice but to kill children. Something that must be avoided at all cost during war time.

 Chapter 533

    Chapter 533: The Magic Tool is Done


    The next few days was very quiet. There were some cult members roaming around, but they were never in a group of more than five. Just some cult members who wanted to pay a visit the fake vige and never really part of the mobilizing army.


    At least that¡¯s the information we received. We have tortured, charmed, and do various things for the investigation. And as a result, we still didn¡¯t find where their main base is.


    ¡°Sigh... If it¡¯s like this, our side will be too rxed. By the time the enemy truly appears, we won¡¯t be ready to greet them,¡± I said to myself.


    It¡¯s a good thing that there are still enemiesing, but their number is too little and it¡¯s not enough to keep up our guard.


    Even the generals agree with me that we have be too rxed. We need to do something, so I opened a portal to somewhere with a lot of monsters once in a while. This way, we can let the soldiers and the monsters on our side to stay in shape for the real battle.


    Over the few days, the tournament has progressed well. I heard that there¡¯s only one mage left from Arturo who will fight in the next round. That one will be defeated soon. And once all of the mages from Arturo are defeated, Albert will make a move to the fake king. That¡¯s what I heard from Sonia.


    Also, the participants from our side who have lost were taken here using portal. Though not all.


    .....


    Ka lost against Celestine. Celestine¡¯s metal magic is stronger than Ka¡¯s magic. It should be interesting to watch Celestine against Ang. Oh, wait. She goes by Celes to keep her identity secret. Though no one from the cult has ever recognize her just by covering her breasts.


    And Julia lost against Shirley. I heard from Sonia that it was the most hyped match in the whole tournament even though it¡¯s not the final because the two of them are princesses. One is the sister of the King of Tatrama, and the other is the daughter of the King of Varadis.


    It was a spectacr match of fire against ice. With ice being the winner of the bout.


    But in the end, both Ka and Julia were not here. They can¡¯t participate in the battle here. Though there aren¡¯t any.


    Ka¡¯s strategy and nning is much needed over there in case the cult somehow attacked the capital. Even if we¡¯re trying to stop them in this ce, it¡¯s not like there won¡¯t be other cult members appearing from somewhere else.


    As for Julia, she¡¯s old man Henry¡¯s daughter. She¡¯s staying there to protect old man Henry.


    Which mean, Veronica cane here. So I called her here.


    She was the guard of old man Henry. At least that¡¯s her disguise while the others are participating in the tournament.


    But now that Julia has lost, Julia can be the one to protect old man Henry in case anything happen. And since Veronica was pretending to be weaker than expert level mage, once Julia came, no one will think much about Julia alone protecting old man Henry because she¡¯s stronger. That¡¯s why Veronica can leave.


    It¡¯s great that we have someone as powerful as Veronica here.


    ¡°It¡¯s good that we don¡¯t have any battle, right? I¡¯ll just rest in one of the stone house. Call me if there¡¯s any battle. Also, bring me a lot of books to spend the time,¡± Veronica said as soon as I transferred her here.


    She entered one of the stone houses that was made by the cult back when they built this fake vige. It became our base and the soldiers on our side used that ce from time to time to rest or chat. But now, it has became Veronica¡¯s private house and no one dares to enter there. Except for those who knows her. Like Jewel, Sara, or me.


    One reason everyone afraid of her was because she¡¯s the strongest expert level mage we have here. Though there are some other expert level mages, she alone stopped a mohawk¡¯s attack and killed him with her wind magic while other expert level mages needed to cooperate to bring down one.


    Those mohawks were members of the cult which for some reason can onlye to this ce a few days after their group was supposed toe. Probably they arrivete because of maintenance. Like shampooing their mohawk or something.


    One other reason that everyone afraid of Veronica is because they still couldn¡¯t trust her. She used to be a member of the cult. And someone at a pretty high status at that. A leader of a faction.


    And when one of the generals asked her anything she knows, she said that she doesn¡¯t know anything despite being in a high position. That¡¯s why they don¡¯t know if they can trust her or not.


    Though it¡¯s also the fault of the cult as well. Even among their own members, they keep a lot of secrets that other cult members with high status don¡¯t know.


    But for Veronica who is an introvert, being able to stay in a house and do nothing but read to waste the time is good. And I know that even though she said that she¡¯s going to spend her time reading or doing nothing, she¡¯s diligently cultivating. She brought a lot of wind element magic stones.


    Jewel and Sara were also diligently cultivating in that same stone house. There¡¯s nothing else to do anyway.


    And then, the semi-final of the tournament is over. With Ang defeated Celestine, and Shirley managed to gain victory against thest mage from Arturo. Meaning the final match will be Ang against Shirley. And Celestine is willing toe to this side instead of protecting Lynn. The final will be held in a few days.


    Well, with Julia, Mustache, and Ka over there, even if Ang and Shirley will be busy, those three and the soldiers of Consenza should be able to stop the cult from hurting the kings. Except for the fake king. He can be hurt as much as possible.


    Another good news! Marie and Victoria¡¯s magic tool isplete! Now, what we need to do is to use it in a real battle to stop the artificial master level children.


    I opened a portal to get Victoria back here again. She helped me fighting the fire dragon previously. And after we¡¯re done, I brought her back to Marie¡¯s side after she gave me more Blobbies.


    ¡°With the time we had, we could only make two of them. Roy, you will take one. As for the other...¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll transport you to Albert¡¯s side. It will be safer that way. Or do you want me to just bring the tool instead and bring you back home to Tatrama? Don¡¯t you miss Albert?¡±


    I interrupted Marie as I suggested her to visit Albert. Her children were also in the capital of Consenza. Though only n stayed with him. As for Lana, she is with Daniel and the others. Being watched by Sophie.


    And by using Sophie¡¯s status as Ang¡¯s and Ka¡¯s friend, Albert can get Lana to meet Albert when Albert arranged a dinner for the participants from Tatrama.


    Lana is smart enough to act, and she pretends to be a stranger with her father and brother. And slowly in the future, Albert will introduce Lana as his daughter and the twin sister of the crown prince, n. Her existence was kept secret because of the danger.


    Just the crown prince being born, and Albert needed to experience many assassination attempts. But if the cult knows that the newborn daughter, Lana, has the aptitude in ice magic just as soon as she was born, the cult won¡¯t stop at anything to kill her.


    That¡¯s why soon, after the war, when the power of the cult is declining, Albert will be able to introduce Lana to the world. He should have enough power to protect his family at that time.


    ¡°I¡¯ll go. It¡¯s been so long since I met Albert, n, and Lana. And I can¡¯t let him stay with my body double all the time,¡± Marie said.


    So, after I brought Victoria and Marie here, I opened another portal to get Marie to Consenza.


    ¡°Tell me about the magic tool and how to use it,¡± I said to Victoria who is in her human form.


    ¡°It¡¯s simple. Anyway, this is the tool,¡± Victoria said.


    We are currently in the stone house where Veronica is resting. Veronica, Celestine, Sara, Jewel, and the generals are here to listen to Victoria¡¯s exnation.


    Victoria put a cube the size of a fist on the table. That cube has a button in the middle.


    ¡°All you need to do is to press this button. Once you do, the box will let out a sound that only children could hear. Probably teenagers could hear it as well. That sound, with the help of Russell, and Marie, has the power to make those who hear it to feel dizziness in their brain. Use that chance to subdue the children and transport them into a room in Varadis where I left my clone. In that room, the sound will keep on sounding. But for this box, it will only let out the sound for five seconds. After that, it needs thirty minutes of cooldown until you can use it again,¡± Victoria exined.


    A sound that only children can hear? That¡¯s interesting. I¡¯d like to hear more.

 Chapter 534

    Chapter 534: Testing the New Magic Item


    ¡°A sound that only children can hear? Is there such thing?¡±


    Jewel asked something that we¡¯re all curious about. What about adults? Is there any effect on adult?


    ¡°You know how old people¡¯s hearing turned bad, right? That¡¯s because as you grow older, some of your senses will grow duller. Even people in their twenties could have worse hearing than teenagers just a few years younger than them. Though if they are perfectly healthy, even adult can have better hearing. And since these children are experimental subjects that have gotten their physical abilities reached it¡¯s maximum potential, their hearing should good enough. It¡¯s something I learned in the past,¡± Victoria exined.


    I see. As expected from a world which is more advanced than this.


    As a doctor, in my past life, I had experience dealing with old people whose hearing, eyesight, sense of smell, sense of taste, or even their sense of touch dulled. And we think that¡¯s normal. But who would have thought that people¡¯s sense can deteriorate naturally even at the age of twenty?


    Though I¡¯m lucky that I¡¯m an Aura user. Which mean I have better senses than normal people.


    ¡°This tool, which hasn¡¯t been named yet, will make a noise only children can hear. We have experimented on it until adult can no longer hear it, so it should be fine. And if there are any adult artificial master level mages, none of you have problem killing them even if these tool doesn¡¯t work on them. We¡¯re still trying to invent something that will stop only the artificial master level mages no matter the age, but since we¡¯re in a hurry, we decided to only stop the children first,¡± Victoria continued her exnation.


    .....


    Seems like what makes the progress of the creation of this magic tool stalled for this long was because of this. Marie, Victoria, and everyone involved in the invention of this tool, were trying to make sure that only children can hear it. And if she said that it has beenpleted, we are safe.


    ¡°Once the children affected by the noise, it will automatically stopped their brainwashing and give them painful headache. That painful headache is actually because of hypnosis magic that will undo any other hypnosis in effect. Though it was not that strong, so the effect will be temporary. Like I said before, it will only made the sound for five seconds. After that, the tool needed around thirty minutes until you can use it again after it collect enough mana from the surrounding,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Five seconds? That seem to be so short. We won¡¯t be able to do much in that five seconds. And thirty minutes cooldown? That¡¯s too long in a war. If only you could create more of this tool, we can cover that weakness. Unfortunately, there are only two of them. And one is needed at the capital of Consenza to protect the kings. We need strategy,¡± Jewel said.


    Oh, as expected from my disciple. She¡¯s smart and have started to think like Ka. Wait, that sounds more like she¡¯s Ka¡¯s disciple than mine.


    Well, she¡¯s still a long way to go. Before we start thinking of the strategy, we need to check on something first.


    ¡°Before talking about the strategy, we need to check the effect of the magic tool on the surrounding area. How wide is the range, and if there are anyone among us who will get affected by the sound that this tool created. Let¡¯s take this outside and gather everyone. Including the monsters,¡± I said.


    Once everyone gathered, we will try testing on this magic tool which hasn¡¯t been named yet. And as courtesy, I don¡¯t have the right to give it a name. Why!?


    I mean, I know that I have terrible naming sense. But why as courtesy? At least it¡¯s fine giving it idea, right?


    ¡°For now, we will call it, Noise Bomb. Until Marie decided something else,¡± Victoria said while we¡¯re waiting for everyone to gather.


    Soon enough, everyone is gathering around us. We told them to be as close as possible and make it cramped. We¡¯re so close to each other that we couldn¡¯t even able to move. Though for me, I stuck my feet on a tree with Aura. While some other mages are flying with their wind magic.


    Victoria is with me, while the Noise Bomb will be activated by Jewel who is interested in it. Rather, if it only affect children, won¡¯t she be the one who got affected the most? She¡¯s the youngest here after all.


    Well, that¡¯s also because if she got affected by the noise, she can stop the noise by pressing the button again. Good thing that Marie created it so it can be stopped right away after pressing it.


    ¡°Is everyone ready? If so, I will press the button in THREE! TWO! ONE! NOW!¡± Jewel suddenly shouted at the end.


    Does she really need to shout like that for the signal? But before I could think of anything else, she pressed the button.


    ¡°GYAAAAAAAAH!!! IT¡¯S RINGING! IT¡¯S NOISY! STOP IT!!!¡±


    Surprisingly, I¡¯m the only one who got affected by the noise. No one else but me can hear the ringing loud noise that came from that box. It¡¯s truly is a Noise Bomb. No one can concentrate when they are under this loud noise. I even fall from the tree, while the others below me avoid me instead of helping.


    Even the monsters who were supposed to have better senses than humans can¡¯t hear it. Only me.


    Even if there¡¯s no hypnosis effect on the noise, just this loud sound alone is enough for anyone who hears it to be in trouble.


    ¡°Oh, Master is the only one who got affected. I guess it¡¯s fine. He¡¯s also the most childish one here, so it¡¯s normal for him to be affected,¡± Jewel said.


    ¡°JUST STOP IT!¡± I shouted.


    ¡°No can do, Master. This is still a test. And we need to see if the duration is really five seconds. And it¡¯s better if it¡¯s longer than that, right? Please ept to be the sacrifice,¡± Jewel said.


    ¡°I SAID ENOUGH! VICTORIA AND MARIE SHOULD HAVE EXPERIMENTED IT MORE THAN ENOUGH!¡± I shouted again.


    ¡°Not really. We haven¡¯t tested it in a real battle, so more testing is needed,¡± Victoria said after she turn herself into her human form next to me.


    ¡°AAAH! WHY IS IT SO LONG!? Oh, it¡¯s finally over...¡± I said.


    It¡¯s finally over. I think that¡¯s more than five seconds. It feels like eternity.


    ¡°...Seems like you¡¯re the only one affected by it, Master. How was it? Are there any side effects?¡± Jewel asked.


    ¡°There shouldn¡¯t be. Other than dizziness, there shouldn¡¯t be any other effect. Even the hypnosis effect will only affect those who have been brainwashed. So, for normal people, there¡¯s only headache. That¡¯s why other than dizziness, it should be safe to use even in the middle of a city. Though we need to be careful and use it only when there are no children nearby,¡± Victoria replied instead of me.


    As for me, I was there lying on the ground looking up at the sky. It was so bright.


    ¡°That¡¯s it, right? It¡¯s done?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No, Master. We need to gauge the distance as well. If we know how far this will affect the people, there are more things we can do,¡± Jewel said.


    ¡°Also, since you¡¯re the one affected by it, I need to test if my clones, the Blobbies, can block the sound if you plug them into your ears. Though that will be forter. Until we can tell the range, you will suffer for a while,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Why do I need to plug my ears? I can just find some ce fa from here when you activate the Noise Bomb,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re asking me that? Then, tell me anyone else here who can move faster than you. Five second is a short time. And you¡¯re the only one who can move fast enough to subdue several children in that short time. That¡¯s why you need to suffer and see if the Blobbies can be used to block the sound. Have a rest for thirty minutes as we will activate it again right away. We also need to make sure the right duration of the cooldown,¡± Victoria said.


    ...And I experienced hell that day.


    Telling me that the cult is unlikely to arrive today, we used the whole day to experiment on the Noise Bomb.


    I know that as an Aura user, my senses are much better than ordinary humans. But for it to be used like this, I wish I don¡¯t have powerful senses. Some of the soldiers also started calling me a child because it was supposed to be only children who can hear them.


    After suffering for ten more times, it¡¯s finally over. Which mean, it has been around five hours since the start of the experiment.


    We discovered that the Noise Bomb is most effective when the enemies are within twenty meters range. That¡¯s good to know.


    Other than that, it¡¯s not five seconds. But around six and a half second. And the duration of the cooldown was twenty eight minutes, and twenty-one seconds.


    And for the first time in a long time, I feel exhausted. Both physically and mentally.


    ¡°I see. So, the result is exactly the same as what we found beforeing here. Well, it¡¯s good that we double checked it,¡± Victoria said.


    ...So, she already know the exact distance and duration for the Noise Bomb, but she still wants to check it again.


    ¡°TO HELL WITH YOU!¡±

 Chapter 535

    Chapter 535: They are Here


    Unsurprisingly, I slept for more than twelve hours after the experiment. It¡¯s good that Elsie is here, so she can watch over the surrounding.


    But twelve hours during a war? At least there are no strong enemiesing yet.


    I heard that there was one mohawk approaching, but that mohawk has been defeated by Celestine alone. That mohawk is not a child, so Celestine can kill that one without wasting much effort.


    Still, the artificial master level children are not here yet. And they probably won¡¯t juste on their own. There will be some adult artificial master level mages with them as well. Although they can be killed, if there are too many of them, it¡¯s difficult to do so.


    And right now, we are discussing the what ifs with the others. What if there are too many children? What if they won¡¯te here?


    ¡°If there are too many children, we will use the Noise Bomb where they are concentrated the most. The strategy is to gather as many children as possible in one area where the Noise Bomb will be activated. Within that twenty meters range, we will get as many artificial master level children as possible. And within that five or six seconds, Master will made them unable to move, and then Master will open a portal to where they will be caged,¡± Ka suggested an idea.


    It¡¯s good that she has became so smart. Though I want her to be able to control her voice like this as much as possible.


    .....


    Even though she¡¯s the youngest, no one thinks that she¡¯s not suited for being a strategist. Everyone agreed to her n.


    This is war. Pride is useless here.


    So what if you¡¯re older, younger, a man, a woman, or whatever you are? Right person in the right ce. That¡¯s what¡¯s needed to win this war.


    ¡°Also, about those children who retreated, Master can just use portal to where they are located using the Blobbies he has spread in the surrounding area to chase after them. That¡¯s the best we can do at the moment,¡± Jewel said.


    ...And she¡¯s such a ve driver. She knows that I¡¯m her Master, right? I¡¯m the one who taught her how to think in the first ce. Although in the end she learned more from Ka, she¡¯s still calling me her Master. But is this how she gives instruction to her Master? I¡¯m sad.


    But that is a good n indeed. Making me move on my own gives me the chance to do anything I want without caring about other people seeing me. Just in case the Noise Bomb is in cooldown, and the artificial master level children are too strong.


    ¡°Also, during the war against the artificial master level children, I won¡¯t be able to give instruction well. It¡¯s because my ears will be plugged and I won¡¯t be able to hear anything no matter how good my hearing sense is. If you have anything you want to convey to me, talk to Victoria instead,¡± I said.


    Using Blobbies, I can protect myself from the dizzying ringing sound of the Noise Bomb. But I won¡¯t be able to listen to anyone talking as well. My lip-reading skill? Don¡¯t count on it.


    Though since Victoria is here now, I don¡¯t need to mind how many Blobbies I used. Still, using two for earplugs was not enough. I need to cover my ears again with ear muffs or something that will make mepletely lose my hearing.


    I can still hear something, but it¡¯s just the blood dlow in my ear. And that¡¯s actually scary in a way to hear that for a long time. So, I hope I won¡¯t have to wear them for a long time.


    ¡°Though there¡¯s one more thing that disturbs me,¡± I said while we¡¯re still in the middle of the discussion.


    ¡°What is it?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°So far, we can face the enemies here because the fake vige is their destination stop before they can attack the capital. But what if the artificial master level children were told to go straight away to the capital without making a stop? They might ignore us and continue with their mission. And as we have talked before, one of the possibilities is that they won¡¯te through this way. If that¡¯s the case, then the real battle can only happen in the capital of Consenza. That¡¯s what we need to avoid at all cost,¡± I said.


    ¡°You don¡¯t need to worry about that.¡±


    All of a sudden, a ghost appears next to me and said that we don¡¯t have to worry about the capital.


    ¡°Has Albert finally done it?¡± I asked Sonia.


    ¡°Yes. Since the final ising soon, and the participants from Arturo has been defeated, Albert subdued the fake king along with his escorts. After that, Lynn made a speech to everyone in the capital about the truth behind the tournament, and how the kingdom of Arturo has fallen under the cult¡¯s control. She asked the citizens to take refugee somewhere safe before the enemy arrives,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°So, the capital is empty?¡± Celestine asked.


    ¡°No. Albert, Lynn, and Henry are all there with the others. The final will still happen because that is a way to make sure the enemy will target the arena while the citizens will stay at the capital and will move right away to safety once there are enemiesing. They can still watch the battle from the screen that was installed, but they can¡¯t watch it directly in the arena,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°...Doesn¡¯t it mean it¡¯s better for us to just stay at the capital and protect everyone rather than staying here?¡± one of the generals asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s impossible. We can also dy the enemy from arriving at the capital or the arena as long as possible. Also, the citizens are people. Not all of them will believe what we say. And some of them might be cult members in disguise. They will tell the citizens that Lynn was lying and they will still roam around in the capital or even go to the arena. It¡¯s difficult to get many people to believe you,¡± I said.


    I think the real battle will be in the arena and the ce around it. Ang and Shirley will be tired when the enemy arrives since they were in the middle of a battle. Maybe I¡¯ll send Graham over there, so he and Ka can heal the two of them right away once the enemy arrives. Good thing the angels have started listening to me now instead of following Graham all the time. Without Graham here, they will still follow my order.


    ording to Sonia, many of the citizens are staying in the capital. And only the soldiers and some hunters who didn¡¯t care about the war watched the final directly in the arena.


    Though Albert and the others are there as well as the bait. But with Ka and the others protecting them, they are in safe hands.


    In case they need to escape, Sonia will contact me and have them transported using portal. Also, if the enemies are children, Marie can just activate the Noise Bomb to dy them. During that five or six seconds, Ka¡¯s earth magic should be enough to protect them for a few minutes until I arrive if I¡¯m not busy. And if she can protect them until the Noise Bomb¡¯s cooldown is over, Marie can activate it once again.


    We talked more and more about what happened in the capital prior to the final, and more strategy we needed to do. The enemy will surelye around this time, so we finished our discussion and get everyone rested while Elsie will keep watching the surrounding.


    There must be a reason why they built this vige here. One of the reason is because it¡¯s right in the middle of where the cult members who will join the war are gathering, and the capital city of Consenza. Though it¡¯s unlikely for that ce to be the main base of the cult.


    And even if they are artificial master level mage, they will need food and water to fill themselves. Although they can get rid of those things if they somehow managed to capture Victoria, I won¡¯t let them.


    After getting few hours of rest, at noon, Elsie finally sees something. And I also used Divine Vision to look at where she¡¯s looking at.


    There are several people with mohawk hairstyle flying in the sky. Some of them are children. And they are really going this way. If they keep flying straight, they will arrive at the capital.


    ¡°They areing! They have children as well! Make sure to attack them and gain their attention so they will stop here! Make sure none of them fly through to the capital!¡± I shouted before I cover my ears. From now on, I won¡¯t be able to hear anything.


    Those artificial master level mages are varies. Not all of them are children, so the Noise Bomb might not work on all of them. But they will still work on the children, so at least we can stop the children here. As for those who are not children, we can only hope that they will die. Either by someone here, or someone in the capital.


    ¡°One of the greatest sins the cult ever did is obvious. Child abuse. Look at how they force children to have such hairstyle. We have to save those children!¡± I said to myself.


    I think someone is saying something, but at this time, I can¡¯t hear anything. Well, I don¡¯t think it¡¯s important anyway. If it does, she will talk directly to my ear since one of the earplugs is actually her.


    It¡¯s time to give lessons to the children of the cult. Mohawk is not an ideal hairstyle for children!

 Chapter 536

    Chapter 536: The Noise Bomb is Very Effective


    The strategy is to gain those artificial master level mages¡¯ attention and stop them before they can arrive at their destination, the capital of Consenza.


    From what I can see, there are only wind magesing. Children or adults, they are all flying on their own. My guess is that there will be moreing, but for now, only the wind mages move first because they are fast.


    And seeing how they didn¡¯t fly too fast despite being an artificial master level mages, prove my deduction. Maybe the rest of the artificial master level mages will arrive soon by foot. They want to let the other artificial master level mages to catch up sooner orter. Though it¡¯s just my guess.


    None of them are going directly to the fake vige. They are slightly away from it. They have no intention in stopping at the fake vige.


    They are too far, but the werewolves, the angels, and the vampires approached them by flying in high speed toward the artificial mater level mages. Because those mohawks didn¡¯t fly at high speed, the monsters can reach them and attack them.


    Unfortunately, some of the mohawks managed to pass the monsters. Though they are the adults. As for the children, all of them are being dyed by the monsters.


    The monsters agreed to stop the children without killing them. But once I activated the Noise Bomb, the monsters will fight the adult mohawks.


    .....


    The n is for when the children got affected by the Noise Bomb, I will open a portal and transport them to a cage where the noise never stops. A ce that Marie, Victoria, and the others prepared back in Varadis to held these children.


    Actually, I can just open a portal there right away, and get the children affected by the noise. Using that ce, there¡¯s no need to wait for a cooldown and the effect was longer than just five or six seconds. But as I keep saying from the start, I need to save my magic in case of emergency.


    After all, if the adult mohawks or some other mohawks managed to pass us and go to the capital of Consenza, I need to move there as well to protect the others. And with the mohawks possibly spread all over the ces, I will probably end up wasting my mana too much if I keep using a portal.


    Well, that¡¯s why I will need to keep on using the Noise Bomb instead. Marie and Victoria actually made the boxes and the cage while keeping my ability in their mind. If I need to use the Noise Bomb while it¡¯s still in cooldown time, I can just open a portal to the cage in Varadis. Very convenient, but I hope I won¡¯t use magic too much.


    In the sky, the monsters are fighting the mohawk children. And those who managed to pass them, the shooting squad were shooting at them. Although those mohawks can still block the bullets with their magic shield, they slowed down considerable. And when that happen, Veronica and some other wind mages fly toward those mohawks and to fight them.


    If it¡¯s just one on one, Veronica alone is enough to defeat them. But there are too many of them, and focusing on just one enemy is difficult since she¡¯s also paying her attention to her allies who are fighting with her.


    Despite being an introvert and how much she loves her alone time, she cares about other people around her. She¡¯s not just a girl with big ass. She¡¯s a kind introverted girl with big ass.


    All of that happened in silent. Actually, they might be so loud, but I can¡¯t hear it at all. Though this time, Victoria helped me making sound effects of what¡¯s happening right in my ear.


    ¡°Bang! Boom! Bang! Bang! Whooosh! You will die here! Awooo! Meow!¡±


    ¡°Okay, you don¡¯t have to make sound effects anymore. That¡¯s actually disturbing. And who the hell is meowing!? There¡¯s no cat monsters at all in sight!¡± I said to the ck Slime.


    ¡°Well, thought that you will be lonely when you can¡¯t hear anything. So, I help you with saying what¡¯s happening out there. As for the meowing, that was me,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Stop that! Anyway, it¡¯s time to move,¡± I said as I fly toward the mohawks that the monsters are facing. The artificial master level children.


    ¡°Tap! Tap! Tap!¡±


    ¡°I said enough! You don¡¯t need to make the sound effect of my footsteps!¡±


    Even after I said that, Victoria didn¡¯t stop. I guess she¡¯s feeling lonely after being away from me. Though I wish she knows that this is not the right time for it.


    I reached where the mohawk children are flying among the ¡°Wooosh!¡±, and ¡°Bang!¡±. There are some children who are too far from the range, so I grabbed them, and threw them into the middle.


    Now that all the children all within range, I grabbed the Noise Bomb and pressed the only button on it.


    ¡°Click!¡±


    ¡°You don¡¯t need to say it!¡±


    And Victoria is still making the sound effect. I was just pressing a button though.


    And after I pressed the button, all the children around me covered their ears as the started falling down since they can¡¯t focus on flying anymore. But since the monsters are here, they can help the children before they hit the ground.


    I know that feeling. That feeling of dizziness that you can¡¯t do anything about. Maybe if I trained my Aura to cover my hearing instead of enhancing it, I can activate this without needing Victoria or Blobbies.


    But the difference of effect to the children and to me, is that when I heard the ringing noise from the Noise Bomb, I will just get dizzy. But for these children, after the first second of dizziness, they all have nk expression. I guess the hypnosis in the sound is very effective to the children.


    By the way, I also started falling down tond on the ground when the children started falling. It¡¯s to make sure that they are all within range.


    The effect is just six seconds. But no matter what kind of experiment they went through, they are still humans. And they need some time to clear their mind after the dizziness, so it should give us a few more seconds.


    And that¡¯s more than enough.


    As the monsters carried the children with nk expression on their faces, they gathered together so they can get them into the portal that I will open.


    And when I opened the portal, the monsters hurriedly put the children inside before leaving the portal. They want to fight the adult artificial master level mages as soon as possible.


    I was greeted by Russell who is ready to undo the children¡¯s hypnosis. He¡¯s saying something, but I couldn¡¯t hear him at all so I close the portal. I can¡¯t keep it open for too long, or the rest of the mohawks who sensed my portal will realize what it was.


    ¡°Why didn¡¯t you say anything when Russell was talking, but keep making weird sound like ¡°Boom¡± and ¡°Bang¡±? I asked Victoria who resumed to make sound effects of the battle.


    ¡°It¡¯s nothing important. Just Russell saying something like ¡°Leave it to me¡±. There¡¯s no need for me to repeat his words,¡± Victoria replied.


    ¡°Anyway, you don¡¯t need to cover my ears anymore until we see other children. Although the Professor said that the experimented children were his greatest creation, there are still many adult artificial master level mages with the enemy. Some of them were managed to escape from us. At least we need to kill as many of them as possible to make things easier for those in the capital,¡± I said.


    This time, Victoria no longer covering my ears anymore. And I can hear the ¡°Bang¡±, the ¡°Boom¡±, and the ¡°Whoosh¡± on my own. And there¡¯s really no one meowing.


    Some of the artificial master level mages were killed. But we¡¯re not without casualties. Some of our friends have fallen as well when the angels didn¡¯t have enough time to heal them.


    We nned things too rashly this time because we heard of the artificial master level children. We never thought of the adult artificial master level mages at all. We never considered them to be double the number of the artificial master level children.


    We prioritize the children. That¡¯s why in this battle, many of our allies have fallen.


    We can just ignore the fact that they are children and fight everyone from the start. But that means we need to kill children. That¡¯s not something that can be epted by many of us. And we might end up fighting each other instead. Can¡¯t have that happen.


    As I keep fighting the mohawks, some of them still managed to escape. We have too few of us who can defeat them. That¡¯s why they can still escape.


    And the worst part was that one of them retreated back to where they came from after watching me fight.


    I guess this is it. We can no longer keep the fact that I¡¯m an Aura user as secret. And the cult will probably focusing all their strength in finding me and kill me.


    Well, it was actually amazing how I can keep it as secret for this long. And I can only fight as usual. There won¡¯t be any change as I keep fighting and protecting those important to me.

 Chapter 537

    Chapter 537: Using Andro¡¯s Intimidation


    Now that the cooldown of the Noise Bomb is over. But we still can¡¯t use it yet since there are no children anymore here. Only adult artificial master level mages.


    We have been fighting these mohawks ever since we captured the children. But we only managed to defeat a few of them, and some of them managed to break out of the encirclement. They are already on their way to the capital of Consenza to kill Albert, Lynn, and old man Henry.


    Well, no matter how fast they are, they won¡¯t be able to reach the capital right away. That¡¯s why for now, I will help fighting the enemies here.


    And I really want to stop the artificial master level mage who retreated when he recognized me as an Aura user. But he flied back to where he came from faster than when he was flying here. It¡¯s impossible to catch up to him, and there are no Blobbies in that area where I can open up a portal to.


    It¡¯s impossible for me to stop him from reporting about my existence. I should give up on it and focus more on what¡¯s happening around me. As for what I should do after their Evil God knows that I¡¯m an Aura user, I¡¯ll think about itter. And there are many people who would help me thinking of what to do as well.


    It¡¯s also a good thing that I, who had terrible memory of remembering people¡¯s names and faces, actually memorized the retreating artificial master level mages. I mean, who can forget the face of an old man with white mohawk, white beard, and a huge mole on his forehead? I can¡¯t.


    If I ever see him again, I will try to capture him and try to get any kind of information from him. Where did he go to report? Who is the person he reported to? And what kind of report was given.


    .....


    If he somehow forgets my appearance, the cult won¡¯t know that I¡¯m the Aura user. They will still know that an Aura user exist, but they won¡¯t know who the person is. Though I can¡¯t have faith in those mohawks. They are too honest. And he will try to remember me at all cost. Unless the person he gave the report to is the stupid one and didn¡¯t ask about my appearance. Let¡¯s just hope that the worst won¡¯te.


    But so what if they know that I¡¯m the Aura user? I can just get people important to me to take refugee in a safe ce. In the Monsters World. Either at the Monster Vige, or on Andro¡¯s back. They will be safe there.


    Still, there are many people who want to fight alongside me. So, I guess it won¡¯t be everyone. And with my portal, we can just go anywhere.


    Well, not anywhere. Just the ce where I installed Blobbies beforehand. Though there were many ces.


    Since I couldn¡¯t catch up with the retreating forehead-mole mohawk, I was thinking of fighting here a bit more before I transport to the capital. Although Sonia has reported the mohawks who break out of our encirclement, they might want to hear it from me directly. Though I need to kill the mohawks here first..


    But another unforeseen situation came.


    The mohawk in front of me, whose heart was stabbed by my Reizpear, didn¡¯t die instantly. And instead, he grabbed hold of my spear without letting it go, as he took a deep breath before shouting.


    ¡°This guy is an Aura user! Kill him!¡± the mohawk shouted.


    Hearing that, some of the mohawks recognize me as a threat. Some tried to escape, but Spot, Shelia, Arin, Veronica, Celestine, Jewel, and the shooting squads led by Sara, stopped them. And some other mohawks ignored the attack from the others as they tried to surround me and kill me.


    ¡°Uh-oh. The cat¡¯s out of the bag,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°I expected this to happen after seeing that forehead-mole mohawk retreated. Well, I guess I need to kill them first before the next batch of mohawks areing,¡± I said.


    ¡°There will be more?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Of course there are. Can¡¯t you see that the ones here are all artificial master level wind mages? There should be moreing from other elements. I thought of trying to kill those who are going to the capital first before returning here, but I guess that¡¯s impossible,¡± I replied.


    ¡°I see. With your estimation, how long until the rest of the mohawkse?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°If they are marching without rest, they shoud be arriving by dusk. That¡¯s just an estimation, so we can¡¯t really tell when they wille,¡± I said.


    ¡°Well, the only thing you can do now is to fight. Good luck!¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t say good luck as if you won¡¯t participate in the fight! I need you as my weapon, armor, and partner!¡± I shouted.


    The Reizpear I had in hand, was hold onto very tight and strong by the mohawk I stabbed. So, I just let it go as I used Victoria as my shield to protect me from another mohawk¡¯s Wind sh. The mohawk I killed fell to the ground with Reizpear still pierced his chest, but for now, I won¡¯t care anymore.


    The battle was conducted in the sky most of the time. But since there are wind mages among the soldier who can fly, they helped Jewel to fly as she¡¯s shooting the mohawks with lightning magic. As for Celestine, she was doing something else.


    She can¡¯t fly. And if she¡¯s in the sky, she won¡¯t be able to use earth magic as powerful as she was when she¡¯s on the ground. So instead, she raised the ground to be so high that her earth magic can hit those artificial master level wind mages.


    Though right now, they are all busy, so I need to fight five mohawks on my own after the mohawk I killed informed them about me being an Aura user.


    But in the end, they are all wind mages. Their attacks were only limited to wind magic as their other elements were too weak to use against me. So, they are all pretty predictable for me.


    Still, fighting five mohawks at the same time is a bit too much even for me. I need to at least defeat one of them. But if I just focus on one person, the other mohawks might choose that chance to escape. Either they would retreat to inform their higher ups, or they¡¯re going to the capital of Consenza.


    Five enemies at once, huh? At most, I can only use two weapons at the same time and kill two of them. But that will be difficult. Though I still have secret move. Portal.


    And this portal, I won¡¯t use it to move me somewhere else. But instead, I will connect the portal to Andro¡¯s location. I had informed him beforehand, that the next time I opened a portal toward his location, he needs to use his intimidation as powerful as possible.


    Our side might have some people paralyzed by fear even though I have informed them about how powerful Andro is, but at least they won¡¯t die. I hope.


    As I opened the portal, the eye of the Kaiser Dragon is in sight. And Andro realizes that he needs to infuse intimidation and spread it all the way over here. I just hope that he¡¯s far from any living beings in that world.


    The mohawks sensed Andro¡¯s intimidation, and got paralyzed. I used that moment when they drop their guard to kill them each with one sh as fluid and as strong as possible using Victokatana.


    The effect of Andro¡¯s intimidation was tremendous. Not only the five around me, but all the living beings nearby got affected as well. Even Spot who is fighting two mohawks high in the sky. Though he received Andro¡¯s intimidation a few times, so he¡¯s used to it.


    Veronica, Celestine, Jewel, and some others were strong enough to endure Andro¡¯s intimidation as they finished off the enemies they are facing. But many of us also paralyzed and unable to move. Though I don¡¯t think the mohawks will be able to focus on them and kill them. Instead, they will focus their sight on me who has just closed the portal.


    What now? I killed five, but there are moreing. Oh, Celestine and Veronica are here to help. I guess I won¡¯t fight alone from now.


    ¡°The enemy is losing! Keep fighting!¡±


    I shouted to raise the morale of the soldiers who were afraid of Andro¡¯s intimidation. And after they heard my shout, they started to stand back up again and ready to fight.


    Seeing their enemies focused on me, a group of soldier managed to bring down two mohawks. This is teamwork. A teamwork where I do most of the things alone, and have the rest take care of the leftovers.


    If it goes on, we should be able to clear the enemies before sunset. And we might be able to get some rest before their main force arriving.

 Chapter 538

    Chapter 538: Re-learning Swordsmanship Again


    Oh well, there¡¯s actually a summoner hidden among the artificial master level mages here. Although this one is not a dragon, it is still a strong monster. It¡¯s theva monster that¡¯s simr to theva monster that I fought back then, but this one seems bigger and stronger.


    Since there are no expert level ice mages with us, the battle will be difficult. And I am currently being surrounded by the mohawks, so I can¡¯t fight thatva monster.


    ¡°Keep your distance! Don¡¯t fight too close to the monster!¡± I shouted while in the middle of the enemies¡¯ attack. Though I dodged them and counter attacked to kill one of the mohawks.


    I feel like I have became stronger now. The artificial master level mages who were so hard for me to kill back then, I can kill them in one hit. Still, no matter how strong they are, they are still just artificial master level mages. Even if I can break through their magic shield since they are not as strong as real master level mages. At least that¡¯s what I thought.


    And now that someone from the cult will report about the existence of me, an Aura user, the cult might send an assassin at the level of master level mage to kill me.


    ...If it¡¯s at the level of master level mage, it won¡¯t be an assassination. But it¡¯s at the level of massacre as they would kill other people as well.


    Well, since I¡¯m going to face them either way, I¡¯ll use this chance to get stronger as well. I will keep on getting stronger in every fight until I can kill even master level mage with just one attack.


    .....


    Although the real master level mage shouldn¡¯t be as strong as the artificial master level mage physically, their defensive magic should be much stronger. And I need to be able to pierce through that shield.


    Thanks to Andro¡¯s intimidation, we have killed more mohawks. But there are still some of them left, and some even managed to broke through and go toward the capital. Once the battle here is over, I¡¯ll get some people return back to the capital. They will prepare the battlefield near the arena. Though I wonder if Ang and Shirley¡¯s fight will still happen? It should be the day after tomorrow, right?


    Using the speed of the flying artificial master level mage, they should be arriving at the capital tomorrow afternoon. And possibly, the rest of the mohawks that haven¡¯te here yet as they are traveling on foot, will arrive at the capital in the morning of the final. That¡¯s just an estimation. Though if they follow the order to kill the kings during the final, they should be waiting for the final match to reach its climax.


    Well, sooner orter, Sonia should appear and inform us of the information that Russell received in Varadis. After removing the hypnosis, he said that he will be the one asking the children of what they know. And we will know of their n. Though that will happen only if those children that we caught know about the information.


    And as the artificial master level mages are loyal to their orders, if they were told to wait to kill the kings when the final match started, they will do it.


    I keep thinking of what will happen as I swung Victokatana. I have learned spearmanship from the angels, so I¡¯m thinking of learning swordsmanship again here. Hopefully, learning both spearmanship and swordsmanship will help me get stronger. I feel like my spearmanship won¡¯t get any better. And the only thing I can do is improve my strength. That¡¯s why I learned about swordsmanship instead since I can improve my strength anytime I want. I mean anytime I can. It¡¯s not like I can do some pushups in the middle of the war.


    Using any kind of weapons to sh, there¡¯s a technique to make the sh sharper and stronger. And that¡¯s what I¡¯m learning from using Victokatana. I hope my sh in using other weapons will get stronger.


    Using the spear, I can sh the enemy from further distance. Or I can grab the top half of the spear to make the sh shorter and faster. But for katana, the handle is shorter.


    Using this fight, I re-learning again about swordsmanship with Victoria guiding me. She was a swordswoman in her past life, so she knows a thing or two.


    ¡°It¡¯s been a while since I teach you some skills. You want to learn them again?¡± Victoria asked me in the middle of a fight.


    ¡°Anything to make me stronger,¡± I said as I shed the neck of an artificial master level mage.


    They have been experimented so their muscles are stronger, but cutting their necks is easier to do now that I have be stronger, and my move be smoother in every sh.


    ¡°That¡¯s a good sh. But you used too much power for that. Try cutting their neck without using much power and only use the technique. Although you are a much stronger Aura user than I was, if you fight me purely with sword technique, you will lose,¡± Victoria said.


    When she¡¯s teaching me, she would be serious and not ying around. Though it was me who loves to y around more.


    ¡°Can I just make you sharper?¡± I asked Victoria.


    ¡°No. Use the sharpness that I have now. Even if you use Aura to make it sharper, don¡¯t use it too much. You want to be able to kill master level mage in one hit, right? Learn the proper technique first. It¡¯s good that you have gotten strong enough that we have leeway for you to learn something in the middle of a fight. But you¡¯re not strong enough to defeat real master level mage,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Yeah, but I need to make sure the others are safe as well,¡± I said.


    ¡°They should be fine. Ignore them if they are just injured since the angels can heal them. And they need this experience so they can get stronger. Even if their magic levels are weaker, they need this experience,¡± Victoria said.


    She¡¯s right. But when I see three artificial master level mages attacking Veronica, I can¡¯t just stand still. I ignored the mohawks around me, and killed one of the mohawks that were attacking Veronica so she can rx a bit more.


    ¡°Thank you, but I can need to handle them alone. Fight your own battle,¡± Veronica said after I saved her.


    ¡°See? I told you that your friends are not weak enough for you to worry about. At this level, even if they got injured, they can still fight. And the angels¡¯ healing should be enough for them tost until the end,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Right, sorry. And I even gained more of their attentions instead. Well, it means I have more practice partner. Oh, can you go help the others instead? It will be better that way,¡± I ordered Veronica.


    ¡°...Sure,¡± she said.


    Seems like she noticed that I know she can¡¯t concentrate on the battle. She keeps watching at how the others are doing. And seeing some people fell in the battle one by one and they were getting healed by the angels only to fall again, she just can¡¯t focus on her battle. That¡¯s why I interrupted her fight so she can go help the others.


    With how good she is in magic control, she can make several people fly all over the ce. Even those without flying magic, will be able to fly ording to her will. That¡¯s how good she is.


    And now that she¡¯s helping the others, they have more mobility in the air and can fight the enemies freely. Though I need to fight more mohawks in exchange.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s focus on our fight as well,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah, sure. Now, you need to train the basic again. You keep using horizontal or diagonal shes because there were many opponents. But the most basic attack is the vertical sh. And if you are trained well in it, it can be your strongest attack. Unlike the hammer, this time, I won¡¯t change my weight. I will keep the same weight and sharpness of a katana and you need to kill them with vertical shes. You can dodge their attacks, right?¡± Victoria asked after giving me some instructions.


    ¡°Easily. They are all wind mages, so I can more or less predict how they will attack. Let¡¯s finish things here so we can fight thatva monsters quickly. Although that monster hasn¡¯t killed anyone yet, its own appearance can intimidate our allies. And there aren¡¯t many powerful ice mages with us. I¡¯ll finish this in a sh and kill thatva monster as well,¡± I said confidently while dodging the enemy¡¯s wind magic.


    ¡°...It¡¯s good that you can dodge their magic. But do you have to do that weird footwork?¡± Victoria asked.


    What I¡¯m using is the ostrich¡¯s footwork. It looks like I¡¯m dancing to Victoria, so it¡¯s weird. But this is also the only footwork I know that can close the distance with the opponents easily.


    If I use normal footwork, I need to dodge the enemy¡¯s magic further and it¡¯s difficult to get close to them. But with this footwork technique, I can dodge the enemy¡¯s attack with the slightest movement, and get close to the enemy without wasting my stamina too much. So, this is the best option.


    ¡°It¡¯s the greatest footwork skill. Don¡¯tin,¡± I said.


    ¡°But it¡¯s embarrassing to be seen with you when you do it. It¡¯s like you are dancing in the middle of a battle. Sigh...¡±


    Well, can¡¯t help it. No matter how embarrassing it is, winning and surviving is more important.

 Chapter 539

    Chapter 539: Defeating the Lava Monster


    As I keep fighting the artificial master level mages, my swordsmanship has improved again. I can make a long distance sh attack smoothly without making any wasted movement, and only used small amount of Aura to give stronger attack. I have gotten stronger now.


    There are only three mohawks around me remaining. As for the rest of the mohawks in this battlefield, they are being taken care of by the others.


    As for theva monster, seems like the mohawk who summoned it died. And it started attacking other mohawks as well. Celestine is trying to stop it as long as possible until I can fight it. She actually tried to kill it, but she doesn¡¯t know theva monster¡¯s weakness and her defense is much stronger, so she¡¯s stalling for time while protecting us. Thanks to her, there were not many of us who died because of theva monster.


    I will kill these three mohawks, and then I will fight theva monster. After that, I will probably return most of the soldier back to the capital. We are all tired, and having them around will only get in the way of me capturing the children.


    The next battle after this one is over, will be harsher with fewer allies and more enemies. But I need to be strong since I¡¯m the only one who can do it.


    Maybe if there are any summoner who improve their summoning level, I will make them make a contract with a monster that can make clones of itself. Other than a ck Slime, the only other monster that I know can make a clone is Graham, an archangel. Though he¡¯s a hybrid of an angel and another monster with darkness element. So, I guess it should be some sort of dweller in the dark.


    I¡¯ll think about itter. We have enemies to defeat.


    .....


    Using Victokatana, I can tell when my sh hit the enemy¡¯s Wind sh, it was stronger. That¡¯s show how strong I have be now.


    I killed one mohawk with a sh from distance that broke apart the enemy¡¯s Wind Shield. After that, I approached another mohawk and cut off his neck. There¡¯s only one more mohawk before I can face theva monster. Though this mohawk girl is a bit tricky. After all, not only she¡¯s an artificial master level wind mage. But she¡¯s an advanced level fire mage as well.


    With her wind magic, her fire can be bigger and stronger than expert level fire mages. Though the fire is not as strong as what an artificial master level fire mage can do, it¡¯s still strong. Although Victoriarmor and my Aura can help protect me from the heat, it was still annoying.


    She¡¯s also smart as she tried to hide herself behind the fire. Though that was a mistake against me who can use Divine Vision.


    Using the chance when she hides behind the fire, I pretend to lose sight of her. She lets down her guard at that moment, and then I shed her body along with the fire around her. Cutting her body in half.


    ¡°Alright, that¡¯s all of them. Let¡¯s leave the rest of the mohawks to the others, and fight theva monsters. Thanks to using the mohawks as practice partners, I have grown stronger. Let¡¯s see how fast I can kill this thing,¡± I said.


    ¡°Rather than improving, I¡¯d say that you regained back your swordsmanship. Because you used spearmanship and the gun more often, your body started to forget about the sword training I taught you in the past. Well, I guess you are a bit stronger than that time. But don¡¯t get careless. As your body can memorize the movement you practiced over and over again, it can also forget some moves if youck practice,¡± Victoria said. She acted like a master to her disciple.


    ¡°I understand, master. Let¡¯s take care of theva monster now,¡± I said jokingly.


    ¡°Good. Now, that¡¯s how my disciple should act to his master,¡± Victoria yed along.


    I run toward where Celestine is. Although she¡¯s powerful enough to protect everyone with her magic, she has exhausted a lot of her mana doing it.


    ¡°I¡¯ll take care of this monster. You go take a rest!¡± I said to Celestine.


    ¡°I¡¯ll go help the others instead,¡± Celestine replied.


    Actually, that¡¯s better. Well, I asked her to rest because I¡¯m considering her fatigue. But if she said that, I guess she still has some more energy to spend. Though it¡¯s doubtful if she can help me with capturing the artificial master level childrenter tonight.


    Well, if it¡¯s her, she might insist oning. That means I need to finish thisva monster as fast as possible and helped the others defeat the rest of the mohawks so we can get some rest before the rest of the mohawks arrive.


    ¡°Hmm... does this monster have intellect? Let¡¯s try talking to it. Excuse me, can you stop attacking us? In returns, I can return you back to your world.¡±


    I tried negotiating with theva monster. Although I said that I can take it back to Monsters World, I didn¡¯t say that I will take it back to its home. I don¡¯t know where it¡¯s originally from after all. Though I can just bring it to the volcano where I fought anotherva monster in the past.


    Instead of getting a reply, theva monster spit out someva toward me. I guess that¡¯s actually its reply.


    ¡°Were you actually trying to talk to a monster which obviously didn¡¯t even have a brain?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Did you seriously asking me that? Where¡¯s your brain now, huh?¡± I asked Victoria.


    ¡°Let¡¯s forget about me now and focus on what¡¯s in front of you.¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re the one who started talking nonsense!¡±


    ¡°And you¡¯re the one who tried to talk to ava!¡±


    It¡¯s nice that she¡¯s back here with me again. We can make a joke yfully again. Though I don¡¯t think that it¡¯s a good idea that we made a joke when our own allies are dying.


    Well, can¡¯t be helped. We¡¯re both crazy. And if we don¡¯t do this, we might be crazier and we don¡¯t want that.


    After dodging theva spit, I run around theva monster. Thisva monster is different. It has two cores.


    The one that I fought in the past only have one core. When I destroyed it, theva monster died. But this time, it has two. What¡¯s the meaning of this?


    Is this actually twova monsters fused into one? If I split them apart, there will be twova monsters? What if I destroyed just one core? Will the other core be the main monster? Or the destroyed core can be restored with the help of the surviving core? Does it mean I need to destroy both cores at the same time?


    Maybe. There¡¯s no time for us. If I fight the monster for too long, there will be more casualties, and we will have shorter time to rest.


    ¡°I guess destroying both cores at the same time will give the obvious result. I can¡¯t waste my time experimenting on the monster,¡± I said to myself.


    ¡°What? This one has two cores?¡±Victoria who heard me asked.


    ¡°Yes. That¡¯s why I will make a wider sh to destroy both cores at the same time,¡± I said.


    But to do that, I need to be in a good position beforehand.


    Theva monster¡¯s cores are about five meters apart to each other. My sh will need to be that wide and can reach both cores to destroy them at the same time.


    I used my fastest speed while dodging theva the monster spit out using ostrich¡¯s footwork technique. Doing this, I can get in the right position quite fast.


    Good. I¡¯m in the good position where my sh can reach both cores at the same time. And after seeing it for a while, I can tell that the two cores didn¡¯t move at all. They keep staying in the same position as before.


    From this location, the one core is right behind the other. Though they might be able to move, so I will use a sh attack instead of a thrust.


    ¡°Die you brainlessva!¡± I shouted as I shed toward the cores.


    ¡°And you¡¯re the idiot! Like I said, it¡¯s ava! Of course it doesn¡¯t have a brain!¡± Victoria shouted back.


    My sh flew toward theva monster. When it destroyed the first core, theva monster stopped and get smaller. The second core was almost moved because theva monster was about to get smaller, but my sh was faster that there wasn¡¯t even a chance for the second core to move. Theva monster then died. Though theva is still here.


    But that was also very fast transformation. If my sh was a bit slower, I won¡¯t destroy both cores and only destroy one. I guess I am getting stronger thanks to the fight.


    ¡°Alright, let¡¯s help the others now.¡±

 Chapter 540

    Chapter 540: The n for the Next Battle


    Theva monster is finally dead. And now, I¡¯m helping the others defeating the rest of the mohawks. There seem to be around thirty of them left. Other than me who have defeated the most mohawks, it was Shelia who killed a lot of them. After that, it was Veronica, Arin, and Celestine.


    Veronica has much more freedom in the sky after all. And Arin, although she can fly as well, she¡¯s preserving her blood usage, so she killed less than Veronica. And Celestine, despite the fact that she focused more on the defense than the offense, she killed quite a number of mohawks as well.


    As for Jewel, since she couldn¡¯t fly, she didn¡¯t defeat that many of them. Although she flew with the help of one of the soldier, it¡¯s difficult to suddenly cooperate with someone you just met the first time after all.


    As for Sara, she was busy with the shooting squads. Thanks to her, we can stop as many mohawks as we could from approaching the capital. And fortunately, we don¡¯t have any casualties from the shooting squad. It would be too much for Sara if any of her students died. After all, it was her who suggested to bring these students to war.


    It was not that long since they learned how good air magic is. It would be a shame if they became afraid in the end.


    The shooting squads have proven themselves to be great assets in war. In the future, many air mages will be recruited as soldiers. And war will be fought using rifles and guns. Though I hope there won¡¯t be any more war in the future. After all, I have united the four kings together to fight the cult.


    That¡¯s right. It was me who unite them.


    .....


    Well, maybe it¡¯s not really me. But I should have some influence in getting them together, right? Right?


    Anyway, thirty more artificial master level mages. Though this time, there¡¯s no need to call Andro to intimidate the enemies again. And everyone, including the soldiers who were at most advanced level mages, have gotten used to fighting these artificial master level mages. After all, they are all wind mages. There¡¯s no way we could be defeated when the enemies using the same attack pattern again and again.


    Though they are still tough enemies to defeat for the soldiers.


    I run around on the battlefield and kill the enemy that is causing a lot of trouble with their other element. Just like that, we decreased the enemy numbers quickly.


    Soon enough, there were only three artificial master level mages left. And we have surrounded them.


    ¡°Three of them left. And they have exhausted their mana. Should we kill them, or bring them to Varadis to have their brainwashing undone? Though if by chance they have the slightest bit of mana left, they might kill everyone there,¡± I said.


    We can just kill them, but we can also gain some new information if we can somehow erase their brainwashing using Russell¡¯s magic. But it¡¯s also dangerous since they are physically strong enough to break the cors if we put on them. That¡¯s why I asked everyone¡¯s opinion.


    With the earth mages protecting us from the three mohawks potentially attacking us with wind magic, there¡¯s no need for us to worry about them anymore. Though if we let them waste all their mana, they will just end up dying.


    ¡°Let¡¯s just kill them. We have enough artificial master level mages captured. Those children should be enough for us to gain new information if there are any,¡± Jewel said.


    ¡°These people might be innocent people who ended up being used and brainwashed by the cult. But we don¡¯t have enough power to save them all. I agree with killing them,¡± Celestine agreed with Jewel.


    After that, everyone agreed that killing them is better since we can¡¯t afford to keep too many prisoners or get every single artificial master level mage to have their brainwashing undone by Russell. It will also give too much burden to Russell as he¡¯s the only one who can do it. And there will be more children to capture after this. Wait, that sounds like we¡¯re doing something bad. Capturing children... that¡¯s kidnapping.


    Anyway, we killed the three mohawks who have exhausted all their mana. If they keep fighting us, they will end up dying anyway since the artificial master level mages are not yetplete and will not be able to function properly after they lose all their mana.


    Maybe that¡¯s why the children were called as the perfect version of the mohawk by the Professor. They won¡¯t just die after they wasted all their mana. Though I have no intention on fighting them until they got exhausted. I need to bring them to the Noise Jail fast. That¡¯s what I called the prison where the children will be transported to as Noise Jail. Where the children will listen to the noise at all time.


    ¡°Alright, the fight is finally over. But there should still be more of them. What should we n next? My suggestion is to bring the tired soldiers back to the capital so they can protect the kings. There were some mohawks that managed to break through our defense here after all,¡± I suggested.


    ¡°Let¡¯s get Sonia to talk with the kings first. We need their opinions as well,¡± Jewel said.


    Oh, as expected of her. She made a sound suggestion. She¡¯s right though. It¡¯s not something that we can decide for ourselves.


    ¡°Alright. Everyone, get some rest first. We¡¯ll talk again after Sonia returns,¡± I said.


    Everyone is so tired. We just fought the artificial master level wind mages, and we are this tired. What if we fight the next mohawks? Fire mohawks? Ice mohawks? Earth mohawks? Lightning mohawks? And other mohawks? We won¡¯t be able to do much then.


    But at least, we managed to stop many quick mohawks. This way, they won¡¯t be able to reach the capital sooner. Though for those we let go, I will also inform Albert to take care of them if possible.


    A few minutes after informing Sonia, she returns with the order from the kings.


    ¡°Albert said that instead of transporting the soldiers back to the capital, it¡¯s better if you make several bases to the capital from this fake vige and fight them in each base. It¡¯s impossible to fight everyone of them just in this one ce. There will be more enemies escaped. If there are too many of them,¡± Sonia said.


    Albert¡¯s n, after discussing it with Lynn, old man Henry, and Ka, was like this. To make several more bases from the capital to this fake vige, and have each bases protected. I will fight in every base. From this fake vige, I will fight the mohawks. And when I can¡¯t fight anymore, I will retreat to the base closest to the fake vige, rest for a bit, and fight again when the enemies arrive while capturing the children.


    As for the soldiers, after helping me in the fake vige, I will transport them to the second base from this fake vige. This way, they can rest a bit longer while the soldiers at the first base will fight next. And after I move to the first base and dy the enemies again, I will move to the second base while transporting the soldiers to the third base. It will goes on until we reach the capital.


    As for the artificial master level wind mages who escaped us previously, there are many people who can fight them in the capital. There¡¯s no need for us to return.


    ...Basically, they are going to work me to the bone. I will keep transporting children to Varadis, and then using portal to retreat before fighting them again and capturing some more children again soon after.


    ¡°Seems like I¡¯m the only one who can¡¯t get some rest,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then leave the bases building to me and Sara. We will ride on Spot to go there faster unless you have Blobbies ced already,¡± Celestine said.


    Sara nodded to her, and they called Spot to ride him. Thanks to them, I don¡¯t need to go check the location of the bases on my own. Their earth magic will be useful in building bases.


    ¡°Thank you, you two. Here. Although it looks like a huge single blob, it¡¯s actually fifty Blobbiesbined into one. Just ce them in the bases one by one. Though I don¡¯t think we will have fifty bases,¡± I said while giving Sara a huge blob of Blobbies. And Sara yed with them since it feels nice to touch them.


    The two, along with Spot, disappear into the sky. Even though it¡¯s not much, it¡¯s good that I can rest even just a little bit longer.


    ¡°I also received information from Arturo. They are done with cleaning the country, and they can lend you some soldiers along with Carmen. They agree that lending Carmen might be advantageous for us strategically since she can build a moat with the help of the earth mages,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°...REINFORCEMENT! YEAH!¡± I cheered with the fact that we can get some more help.


    After that, I told Sonia to tell those in Arturo to get ready and wait to be transported. With them, I hope the n will go smoothly.

 Chapter 541

    Chapter 541: Building Bases for Defense


    ¡°Alright. It¡¯s great that we will receive more reinforcement. But I don¡¯t think we should transport them here. Maybe we should get them to the second base or the third base from this ce,¡± I suggested.


    For this fake vige, including me, there won¡¯t be many people defending this ce. Maybe it should just be me, Shelia, and Arin. As for Graham, he¡¯s in the capital already guarding the the city. Though I can summon him anytime I want.


    He¡¯s there in case someone needed treatment with healing magic. And he can fight as well, so it will be good if he can protect the others over there.


    Though when I brought him to the capital, I heard from Sonia that Albert told Graham to go to another location where it¡¯s likely that a battle will ur. Another ce where the cult wille from. I don¡¯t know how Albert can predict where they wille from, but that¡¯s fine. Whether he¡¯s right or wrong, we just need to be prepared of all situation.


    After Graham saw the status of his own sister, he became absorbed with rage. He needed some rest to calm down, so even if there¡¯s no enemies to fight at the ce he¡¯s protecting, it should be fine. But I told him that during the day of the final match, I might summon him without any warning. Until then, he can rest if there are no enemying to his ce.


    As for his sister, I left her to the others in the Monster Vige. With the angels protecting her, I hope her mind will return someday.


    ¡°If we consider this fake vige as the first defensive base, I think it¡¯s best to put half of the reinforcement from Arturo in the third base, and the other half in the fourth base. Once Celestine and Sara finished installed the Blobbies at the ce where we will build the bases, we will get some soldiers from this side over there. And Master can transport the reinforcement from Arturo, and have the soldiers inform them about the n and everything else,¡± Ka suggested.


    .....


    ¡°In the end, I¡¯m the one with the most work. Well, for this fake vige, just me, Shelia, and Arin should be enough to hold for a few minutes and capture a lot of children. Once I feel that I had enough and used a lot of mana, the three of us will move to the next base. Get ready to prepare a lot of mana potions for me,¡± I said.


    I feel like I will drink a lot of mana potions until my stomach burst. I hope it won¡¯te to that.


    Soon after waiting, Sonia returns with the news that Celestine and Sara found a good ce to make the base closest from here. And I move there along with everyone, leaving behind Shelia and Arin, and also Elsie to look out for the enemy. With Shelia over there, I don¡¯t need to have Blobbies in the fake vige. Though I still have one in case I need to go there.


    The soldiers helped building the base. It¡¯s not much since we only want to reduce their numbers and capture the children here. But from the next base after this, we will be more serious in building a baseplete with walls and probably moats as well. Although the enemy might have ice mages or earth mages that can build a bridge to cross, it¡¯s still good that we can waste their mana.


    I still didn¡¯t hear any report from Shelia about the enemy, so I rested until Sara and Celestine found another ce to make the next base.


    With Sara¡¯s good vision, she can find a good ce quickly. And Celestine¡¯s earth magic is useful to build some walls. As for the rest of the buildings, the other earth mages can do it.


    After five minutes of rest, they found another ce. This time, I left about fifty people consisting of the soldiers, few angels, and werewolves. They will be the second defense after the fake vige with me.


    After moving to the next base, I opened another portal to bring Carmen and the reinforcement from Arturo. Though there¡¯s one other person that want toe.


    ¡°No! You are not allowed toe here if you can¡¯t participate in the battle! You will just be a waste of my mana if I need to transport you again!¡± I said to Fabio, the new king of Arturo.


    ¡°Oh, sorry. I¡¯ll just stay here in Arturo then. Mother, please do your best!¡± Fabio told Carmen to do her best. Carmen smiled seeing that.


    ¡°He¡¯s such a momma¡¯s boy. And you, even though you¡¯re the former queen now that Harold is no longer the king, aren¡¯t you busy?¡± I asked Carmen casually.


    And that casual way of talking was not appreciated by the soldiers of Arturo who never even know me.


    ¡°You! Don¡¯t use that way of talking to her highness!¡±


    ¡°Do you want to die that badly!¡±


    Do these guys not even know who they are talking to?


    ¡°Are you sure you want to fight? You guys who got tricked and never realized your king has been swapped by a fake, against me who noticed that and helped the four kingdoms fight against the cult?¡±


    Maybe because I¡¯m tired, I feel like everyone who doesn¡¯t like me is enemy. And these guys who just appear make me want to kill them.


    ¡°Don¡¯t do that to our benefactor! If not for him, our kingdom would be destroyed by the cult without us knowing about it! I¡¯m sorry Roy, they still don¡¯t know you yet. Fabio has told them about you, but they don¡¯t believe it yet. And probably after seeing how you treat Fabio like that, their impression of you is already bad,¡± Carmen apologized for her soldiers.


    ¡°...Yeah, I¡¯m sorry too. I¡¯m just too tired and don¡¯t want to hear anyoneining. We lost many good people and these guys just appear and startedining. Anyway, just get to work. For this base, I want you, the earth mages, and the water mages, to make a moat surrounding this base. Make it so this base look important and have something to hide. The moat is useless in defensive battle against mages anyway, but that¡¯s fine. It¡¯s just for show. Good thing there¡¯s a river over there as well. You can dig a path from the river to this ce,¡± I ordered Carmen and everyone here.


    While I just close my eyes to rest and wait until Sara and Celestine found another ce, or a report that Elsie found the enemies, I can hear the soldiers who have been with us areining to the reinforcements about how wasteful their magic is and they will be useless in the war if they can¡¯t make it more efficient. I think making the moat is useful to show these soldiers from Arturo how it¡¯s done. To learn about magic control and to not make them get cocky.


    So what if they saved their kingdom from the fake king? It¡¯s because we from behind the scene has prepared ns and strategies for it. Now they are truly in a war, they finally realize how weak and useless they are.


    It won¡¯t be long until the next wave of enemy ising. I don¡¯t know how good these soldiers from Arturo will be, but I hope they are not here only to be killed by the enemies.


    Soon after, Sonia appears telling me that Sara and Celestine found the next ce to be the base. And seems like there will be another one and that will be thest one.


    ¡°So, the fake vige, the second base, this third base, the next fourth base, and thest fifth base before reaching the capital, huh? I think that¡¯s more than enough ces to reduce the number. In the capital, their number will be a lot less,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yes. And the distance from the fourth to the fifth is quite far. And the fifth to the capital is even further. There¡¯s no other good ce to create bases after that,¡± Sonia said. Seems like Sara learned about the geography of this country already. Maybe it¡¯s thanks to Celestine as well since she was born here.


    The two of them are greatbination for this mission.


    ¡°So, two more bases until I can return to the fake vige and rest, huh? Man, I¡¯m tired,¡± I said to myself as I transported arge number of people to the fourth base.


    ¡°You worked more than anyone else to this day. And you will still have a lot of work after that. This war is sure tiring even to an Aura user who has a lot of stamina,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Yeah, but this is still better. In my past life, there were no time at all to rest. The enemy will just appear all of a sudden and we have no choice but to fight no matter how tired we were. But now, with how united the four kingdoms are, and with my Divine Vision, we can be a bit more rxed,¡± I said.


    If only Luna, the princess of Arturo kingdom who can see the future is older, we can use her ability to the fullest. But I don¡¯t want her to use that ability of her too much when she¡¯s still so young. She has seen enough tragedy as it is when she¡¯s still so young.


    Maybe if the cult is not destroyed for a few more years... No, I must not think about it. I will try to destroy the cultpletely as soon as possible without having the need to ask a child for help.

 Chapter 542

    Chapter 542: The Biggest Child Abductor


    With the fake vige, there are five bases before the enemy can reach the capital. Though as for thoseing from another direction, or those who have passed us previously, there¡¯s nothing we can do about them other than letting the others to take care of them.


    I didn¡¯t hear any report about anyone entering the capital today. I guess they really camped outside the capital until the final.


    I thought it would be great if Sara and Celestine who went to look for ces where we could build our bases with Spot, somehow caught up with the previously escaped artificial master level wind mages. But even if they flew to the same direction, those mohawks are still faster. Or they are good in hiding. Or maybe they changed direction. I don¡¯t know.


    Although ourst base should be close to the capital, we didn¡¯t notice anything strange. Even after I got there and look around the ce with my Divine Vision, I didn¡¯t see any mohawks in hiding. That¡¯s why I returned back to the fake vige.


    I opened a portal to Shelia¡¯s location, and get Elsie back to the capital to Lina¡¯s side. She can check on the enemies there.


    ¡°Only four of us here now. What do we do?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Wait. It won¡¯t be long until the enemy arrives,¡± I said.


    .....


    We have destroyed the buildings in the fake vige so they won¡¯t be able to use the buildings to protect and hide themselves.


    The reason only four of us here is because of our stamina. Even among the werewolves and the vampires, Shelia and Arin¡¯s stamina is better than the others. Though for Arin, she can just drink blood to restore her stamina.


    As for me, it¡¯s because we can¡¯t just leave everything to the monsters. This is a war that humans started, so a human must be involved on our side.


    And the rest of the people and monsters in the second base, third base, and so on, they will be able to rest enough while we stall for the enemies. Once we used portal to go to the next base, those who were standing by the base will know that their location will be attacked next.


    Actually, the bases won¡¯t be attacked. In fact, we¡¯re the one attacking them when they are peacefully marching toward the capital. Though because we know their intentions, we have to stop them at all cost. Or at least dy them as long as possible while capturing all the children.


    ¡°What about Graham? Is he doing well?¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°There were no enemies yet at the capital. He will be fine. We¡¯re the one who needs to fight the whole time,¡± I said.


    ¡°I have no problem with that. I want to fight as many powerful enemies as possible. I really enjoy thesest few days,¡± Shelia replied. As expected of a race that loves battle.


    ¡°Good for you. But please be patient and follow my order. Although we will be fighting here, this won¡¯t be the ce where our final fight will be. And the fact that we still don¡¯t know where the cult¡¯s main base is, means that everything is still far from over,¡± I said.


    Even though my status as an Aura user has been exposed, we still don¡¯t know if the Evil God himself wille out to kill me or not. It might still be a while until we can destroy the cultpletely.


    As we were chatting, I finally see peopleing. They uniformly have mohawk. And the numbers are around one thousand.


    Do they want to clean the Consenza Empirepletely? A thousand artificial master level mages!? To kill two kings and an empress? They really send out a lot of them.


    Oh, the white mohawk with forehead mole is with them. Has he reported about my existence?


    Hmm... but the number of children with mohawks are about two hundred of them. Though it will be very hard to capture them all alive.


    One thousand against three. The slime doesn¡¯t count because she¡¯s one with me.


    ¡°Well, there are about a thousand artificial master level mages. Our goal is to reduce their number as much as possible and capture the children. With their number, it¡¯s nearly impossible for us to dy them for more than a few seconds. But let¡¯s try stopping them for at least one minute so we can get as much information about them as possible. Arin, you will stay with me all the time. This way, once I opened a portal, I can bring you with me. As for Shelia, you will be summoned after Arin and I leave. Understand?¡±


    ¡°Understood,¡± Arin replied.


    Shelia just nodded in agreement. Is she smiling in this moment? What a battle-loving freak. At least she understands my order.


    ¡°Shelia, you can go all out against the adult mohawks. Arin, how many blood bag do you have?¡±


    ¡°I have two bags filled with your blood,¡± Arin replied.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think that¡¯s enough. Here, you can drink my blood directly now. If you have the chance, drink some more of my blood during the battle. But you can only do it twice at most today,¡± I said to Arin while giving her my hand which she bites.


    After thinking that¡¯s enough, I stopped her. I might have lose some blood now, but I¡¯m still healthy. Though I have fatigue, I can restter. I just need to dy them for just a few minutes. After that, we will escape.


    When the enemies getting closer, Shelia makes her move first. She transformed into her powerful werewolf form, and started fighting. But there are too many mohawks, so I don¡¯t think she could easily defeat even just one of them.


    As for me, I¡¯m still waiting until I¡¯m close to where the children are. Good thing they are near other children.


    With Arin protecting me, I covered my ears with earplugs, and run toward the center of the children. Right in front of the children who wanted to attack me, I activated the Noise Bomb. And all the children were paralyzed with the noise and the hypnosis effect.


    The adult artificial master level mages were confused. But as long as they are not attacking me, I don¡¯t need to care about them.


    With Arin protecting me, I used Victoria and turned her into a long pole for me to sweep all the children into a portal. It might hurts, but they won¡¯t die. I opened the portal to Varadis, and pushed all the children within my range to the portal. Although there were some adults nearby, I made sure that they won¡¯t get caught.


    If Marie had the time to make a prison with the Noise that can affect adult as well, that would be perfect. Unfortunately, we don¡¯t have time. And we need to capture all the children so we can go all out against the cult. If only there were no children with them...


    The effect of the Noise Bomb stopped when I opened the portal. And when I close the portal, the children slowly regained their senses and judged me to be a threatening existence. At the same time, Arin hugged me from behind and bites my neck. Did she already used that much blood already?


    This time, I¡¯m the one protecting her for a while as I tried to escape from being surrounded. But when I look carefully, I feel like I have a chance to open the portal again and grab some more children before leaving.


    When I see Shelia is still fighting wholeheartedly and full of spirits, I started thinking of opening another portal.


    When I opened the portal, the children got affected again. Arin has stopped drinking my blood, and she understands my intention as she protected me again.


    Previously, I have captured about thirty children in one go. That¡¯s a lot. But that¡¯s because they were unprepared, and they were standing so close to each other. But now that they are spread apart, I can only get twelve of them.


    After getting those children, I closed the portal again. Now, we only need to dy them.


    Arin and I then run toward where Shelia is, and the three of us will fight together. This will increase our chance of survival.


    Because I used portal, which is an unknown magic, the artificial master level mages became wary of me. But that¡¯s good to stop them for a while. And I can just fly in the sky since only the one who reported about me being an Aura user can fly.


    Now that I¡¯m attacking them from the sky, I feel like we have a chance to win. Good thing the previous wave, they sent all the artificial master level wind mages to attack.


    But they are still strong. Their magic attack is very fast as well. If I¡¯m not careful, they can kill us with just one hit.


    Thirty minutes after I activated the Noise Bomb the first time, I used the Noise Bomb again and captured some more of the children. But at the same time I closed the portal to Varadis, I opened another portal to the second base and jumped in together with Arin. After moving to the second base, I summoned Shelia who has started to get exhausted.


    The result was far better than expected. I managed to capture a total of sixty-three children. Maybe in this second base or the third base, we can capture all the children.


    ...And I will be known as the biggest child abductor of all time. By a single person. not a group. If it¡¯s a group, the biggest child abductor is the cult after all.

 Chapter 543

    Chapter 543: The Secret is Safe


    In the second base, there were not many people here. Just about fifty. And the base was build halfheartedly. Only the surrounding wall are quite strong.


    When we build this base, we made the wall to cover arge area. So, even if the enemy wanted to walk around the wall, they need to walk a long distance before they can pass the wall. And before they can do that, they will be attacked by us right away.


    As soon as I entered the second base with Arin, I quickly summoned Shelia without warning. I don¡¯t need to use portal since she¡¯s my contracted familiar.


    Shelia appears with wounds all over her body. And her regeneration was quite slow. I guess she¡¯s tired after so much fighting.


    ¡°Heh. I killed that white mohawk with a huge mole on his forehead that you told me. This way, there won¡¯t be anymore flying mohawks,¡± Shelia said as she rested her back on the wall and sat on the ground.


    ¡°That means we got all of the artificial master level wind mages. Even if other artificial master level mages have advanced or even expert level in their wind element magic, they won¡¯t be faster than us. Good job, Shelia. You can take a rest now. Arin, you should take a rest as well,¡± I said.


    With the monsters¡¯ speed that have been trained well, they should be as fast as any average expert level wind mages. And since we have defeated all the artificial master level wind mages, there¡¯s no one else among the enemy who is faster than us. I hope.


    .....


    But damn, I¡¯m tired. And the fight is still continuing.


    Arin and Shelia have defeated a lot of enemies. And I also captured just a bit over sixty from around two hundred children. With the fifty people here, I should be able to get a little more than that this time. Maybe a hundred? Or even the rest of the children?


    If that happens, we can go all out without caring about children in the fourth or even third base. I truly hope that will be the case. That way, everyone can use everything they have to stop them from approaching the capital. And hopefully, by the fifth base, we have defeated all of them.


    But a thousand of artificial master level mage is a huge number. I can capture sixty children because they were also not prepared. But that won¡¯t be the case in the next battle.


    Also, capturing the children who were not able to do anything is much easier than killing the mohawks. In real battle of life and death, it won¡¯t be that easy.


    ¡°Alright, I will also take a nap now. After calcting the distance and their marching speed, I estimate they will arrive in two or three hours. Wake me up after ny minutes,¡± I said.


    Victoria then left me to chat with the others after making me a single Blobbybed. The bed was so soft and feel good that I instantly fell asleep.


    I was woken up by Victoria after a good nap in thefortable bed to see that the bed has grown bigger, and Shelia and Arin alsoy down on the same bed.


    I get about Shelia. We slept together once in a while. But Arin as well? I guess she was just too addicted with my blood that she¡¯s fine with sleeping with me.


    Well, it was just sleeping. It¡¯s fine. Though I checked my whole body to see if I have another bite mark other than the one I got from before. Seems like she was just sleeping. But why isn¡¯t Victoria just made another bed with Blobbies for Arin?


    ¡°How long have I been asleep?¡± I asked while carefully leaving the bed to not wake the other two monster girls.


    ¡°About two hours. I have told the werewolves here to be on guard of the smell of the enemiesing. And there were no reports at all,¡± Victoria said.


    Then, I used Divine Vision to check on the surrounding. The enemy still hasn¡¯t arrived yet. And I can see several werewolves on guard in different location. Seems like we¡¯ll be safe for a little longer.


    ¡°Alright, let¡¯s have some dinner first. I¡¯m starving,¡± I said as I opened a portal back to the warehouse in Consenza. That¡¯s where our supplies areing from.


    And what I didn¡¯t expect was Lina was there waiting in her maid uniform with warm meal.


    ¡°Sonia told me that you might be hungry. Here¡¯s your food. I prepared some to share with the soldiers and the monsters,¡± Lina said as she and other maids and servants at the warehouse offered us the food.


    The warehouse is currently being used by the empress herself. And the maids and servants were the people from the castle that Lynn can trust. But because they are weak, they were told to leave the castle and help with the supplies here in case the enemy attacked the castle. And they are willing to help.


    ¡°Thank you, Lina. Go get some sleep. It¡¯ste already,¡± I said.


    It¡¯s already past midnight. And the meal they delivered was warm. I guess they are working hard as well even though they can¡¯t fight.


    I grabbed all the meal, and transported them to the three other bases. Other than the guards watching, everyone in the other bases are sleeping.


    Well, since we¡¯re here, and if we can dy them for a bit, at the soonest, the enemy will only arrive at the third base at dawn. Everyone can rest for now. And the supply were good for a few days. As for the warm meals, those are only for us who are at the second base.


    The smell of the meal attracted the werewolves and they left their posts and return. Must be the fried chickens. They were the werewolves¡¯ favorite food.


    Even Shelia got woken up from the smell. And because she moves quickly, she woke Arin up.


    After we finished our meals, I can see the enemies finally arrive. Shelia and the werewolves also can smell them even though the smell of the fried chicken is still here.


    ¡°Alright, everyone! Prepare to battle! Fight as you see fit since I won¡¯t be able to hear anything soon!¡± I said.


    Now, we¡¯re ready for the next match. And after we decrease their number, we used portal to transport to the third base.


    ....


    Back to when a certain artificial master level mage returns to report about the existence of an Aura user.


    The one Roy called as the forehead mole mohawk flies as fast as he can back to where he was dispatched from. That ce was not the main base of the cult, but it¡¯s just the ce where the artificial master level mages, and everyone who participated in the war to kill the kings gather before their dispatch.


    Not everyone came to this ce. There were some other ces. But this is where most of them gather the most. Roy was right about how the enemies wille from another location.


    The forehead mole mohawk returned to the city he was in before to meet someone.


    ¡°Why are you back here again? I thought you should have been flying to the capital already,¡± the man in white robe asked.


    He¡¯s the man who was in charge of the task of killing the kings. The archbishop entrusted him for this task. And he also remember the forehead mole mohawk because of his appearance.


    ¡°Important report. Aura user appears,¡± the forehead mole mohawk said.


    ¡°Oh, is that so? Well, that doesn¡¯t matter. You can go back to march the capital. Since you can fly, you can catch up with those who walk, right? Do it. I¡¯m sending you to an important mission. The only report you need to tell me is a report about your sess. Leave!¡± the man in white robe said.


    He¡¯s also an important figure in the cult since he¡¯s in charge of this mission. And the Professor has given order to the artificial master level mages to obey this man¡¯s words.


    With this mission, he, an expert level mage, was given the chance to cultivate with better resources to be a master level mage. And he will be at the rank where he couldpete against the archbishop.


    Even among the cult where many of the members are loyal, some people are still loyal to their own greed. And that¡¯s how Roy is safe for now since this man doesn¡¯t care about Aura user.


    In the past, everyone was told to immediately report for the appearance of Aura user. But that was long when this man has just joined the cult. And like many other people, he forgot about it.


    Thanks to this man, the forehead mole mohawk returned back to the battlefield, and the report about the appearance of Aura user was kept deep inside the man¡¯s mind. He only cares about one thing, Sess for this mission. It¡¯s so he can cultivate into the rank of master level mage. Other than that, the rest are not important to him.


    And his blindness toward other things ends up with him not knowing that every mages that he has sent before, other than the artificial master level mages who were on their march right now, were being killed, stopped, and captured by Roy and the others. But because Roy took care of the cleanup nicely, other than the forehead mole mohawk, no one managed to retreat back.


    And the forehead mole mohawk also informed the marching squad that he has reported about the appearance of an Aura user. That¡¯s why he will join them. And the rest of the squad don¡¯t need to return and report about an Aura user anymore.


    Thanks to that, the secret of Roy as an Aura user won¡¯t leak for a little longer. At least during this battle.

 Chapter 544

    Chapter 544: Moving to the Third Base


    In the second base, the battle has started. Maybe because the wall covered a wide area, they thought of marching through with their artificial master level earth mages destroying the wall. But the mages on our side tried to regenerate the Earth Wall whenever it¡¯s destroyed.


    Still, even though I have captured over sixty children, they are still more than a thousand enemies. We can barely regenerate the wall for one hour. Which is already amazing since we only have ten advanced earth mages here to do that. I guess that¡¯s show how important magic control is.


    Other than those earth mages, the rest are monsters. Werewolves, vampires, and angels.


    These forty monsters, with me, Shelia, and Arin, run toward the children to capture them again. Since I have done it three times before, the enemies have experienced it and it was difficult to capture a lot of children. But one hour of defense mean I can use the Noise Bomb three times.


    First is when they arrive, second is thirty minutester, and third is one hour after I first used. That¡¯s three times.


    Though in those three times, I barely captured thirty of them even with the help of the monsters. They have became better in protecting themselves. The children I mean. After all, the adults don¡¯t care about them, and they don¡¯t know what makes the children dizzy.


    After protecting the base for one hour, I transported the earth mages to the third base. As for me and the rest of the monsters, we¡¯d like to dy them for a little bit longer. And if possible, I¡¯d like to capture more children.


    .....


    In the first base, we managed to stop them with just the three of us because the enemies are confused. They don¡¯t know what we were doing and the children just disappear.


    But now, it¡¯s different. They just don¡¯t care about us trying to stop them. They want to continue their march without a single care. And even though we have more people with us, or monsters, these artificial master level mages just continued their march while only those we attacked stopped for a while before fighting back or continuing their march.


    Because of that, we couldn¡¯t hold them back for much longer. So, I opened a portal to the Noise Prison in Varadis and captured some more children while the monsters protecting me. With this, we have reduced the children to half. I mean the number. Not their size. It¡¯s sad if those small children end up getting smaller. Who knows if the experiment have side effects to their growth?


    After capturing the children, I tried to kill more of them. But when we almost got ourselves surrounded, I told everyone to retreat. And everyone moved to somewhere safe. Except Shelia who is still enjoying the battle. Well, she¡¯s my summon, so I can just summon herter.


    I opened a portal and transport us all to the third base. After a while, I summoned Shelia who got badly injured in the span of few seconds before I summoned her.


    ¡°What the hell happened!?¡± I asked Shelia while one of the angels hurriedlye over and healed Shelia. Even if she has regeneration magic, her wounds were so bad that her regeneration works slowly.


    ¡°I got careless,¡± Shelia replied calmly.


    ¡°Sigh... Like I told you before, this is not where we will go all out against them. There will be a better chance to go all out. If you¡¯re like this again, I¡¯ll transport you along with everyone using portal instead of summoning you. Got it?¡±


    ¡°...I understand. Sorry,¡± Shelia said.


    Not only I¡¯m her master, I¡¯m also recognized as the werewolf king by her. That¡¯s why I know she won¡¯t do anything to betray me.


    And she¡¯s also one of my women. I don¡¯t want her to do anything rash.


    After informing the people at the second base of what happened in the first and second base, I took another rest. This time, we have a roof over our head. And on the Blobbybed, Shelia jumped in before I even touched the bed. Well, I don¡¯t mind. She seems to be more tired than me.


    The next battle will probablyst from dawn until sunrise. We have enough time for rest.


    This time, I didn¡¯t tell anyone to wake me up. There are many werewolves, and the enemy won¡¯t suddenly attack when someone noticed them. Something I learned in the previous two experiences. So, just having the werewolves watching guard should be fine. And we have more people in this base as well.


    If possible, I¡¯d like to capture all the children in the fight in this base. That way, we can go all out in the fourth and fifth base. And I hope there won¡¯t be other artificial master level childrening from other location.


    Although Marie had the other Noise Bomb, I¡¯m still the only one who can transport the children to the Noise Prison in Varadis. As for the others, they can only stop the children for a while.


    And if the children are the perfect creation of the Professor which won¡¯t die after they spend all their mana, the others can just waste the children¡¯s mana as much as possible to stop them. In that time, it should be enough for me to go there with portal, and transport the children to Varadis before returning to my battlefield.


    I slept quite well this time as well. The I looked around to see those who fight in the second base were still sleeping. It¡¯s best to let them rest until the enemies arrive.


    But they are still human, right? Won¡¯t they need rest, food, and drink?


    Well, the fake vige got destroyed. And they have no helpers anymore. Which mean, they can only follow order. Which is to kill the kings. And no matter how tired they were, they will still continue marching.


    Well, I hope that¡¯s the case. That way, winning will be easier. Though I doubt that¡¯s the case.


    There should be water mages among them. And when I looked with my Divine Vision, although none of them seem to brought any food to eat, they can easily kill a monster they found on the way and eat. But that will make their march slowed down considerably.


    Having five base is a good idea. With this, it¡¯s difficult for them to find any ce to rest since we put the bases in good locations. Thanks to Sara and Celestine. They are at the fourth base right now.


    As for those in the third base, we have Jewel, Veronica, and Carmen. Once we finished our job here, I will bring them to the fifth base while I go to the fourth.


    Hmm... I guess if we¡¯re doing our job well, there won¡¯t be any battle in the capital. Though I don¡¯t know about those mohawks attacking from another ce.


    Well, I won¡¯t care about them. And I won¡¯t ask Sonia either. It was too troublesome after all.


    I¡¯m already busy with the battle here. I don¡¯t want to think of another battle before this one is over.


    Now, about this battle. We killed a few amount of adult artificial master level mages, but the half of the children have been captured. That¡¯s something at least.


    And if they continuously march with a little rest, their mana should have been spent. Even just a little bit is fine. The construction of the wall proves to be a great idea after all.


    But a thousand of them is a lot. And we don¡¯t know if all of them will attack base or just some of them.


    What we can do is just to fight. Killing them and capturing the children.


    Though I wonder how the children are doing in Varadis? With Russell alone and a hundred children already there. Is he doing okay? And the children, they have to listen to that disturbing ringing sound the whole time they are staying in that prison. There won¡¯t be any side effects, right?


    Let¡¯s just hope for the best. I don¡¯t want to think that everyone¡¯s effort goes to waste.


    ¡°If you¡¯re thinking about the children in Varadis, they should be okay. Varadis is a kingdom where the medical aspect advanced the most, right? And you have taught them a lot including about using air magic to put patients to sleep. There are a lot of air mages who got a job to learn about your magic and they will put the children to sleep. And the children will be restrained and they will wear the Magic Restricting Cors as well. It should be fine,¡± Victoria said after I asked her about it.


    Right, I don¡¯t have to do everything on my own. I have a lot of friends and allies.


    As we chatted for a bit more, the werewolves returned with a report about the sighting of arge group of people. Though rather than sighting, it should be smelling, right?


    ¡°Well, here we go again. Let¡¯s keep doing our best, shall we?¡±

 Chapter 545

    Chapter 545: The Mother of a Child Mohawk is a Mohawk


    The battle in the third base. And we have more people right now.


    Now that only a hundred of children are left, with this many people we had, we should be able to hold the enemies for a few hours, and during that time, I should be able to capture the rest of the children as long as they are not too spread apart.


    It has been one hour after the battle started, And I used Noise Bomb three times, using the portals to spread the noise two times, and captured fifty of them. We should be able to go for another hour and capture all the children.


    Now that Shelia is no longer fighting alone, she was not as badly injured as she was in previous battle. And she had a good rest, so her regeneration ability is working fine and can heal small injuries on her body.


    Veronica fights from the sky. She also defeated some artificial master level mages who can use advanced or expert level wind magic to fly. The sky is safe with her covering it.


    Carmen uses water magic very well. And thanks to the moat she created, she doesn¡¯t need to create water from thin air all the time as she can just use water from the moat. Doing that lessen the burden of her magic and she can use her magic effectively with only using little mana.


    Jewel is... seems like her rhino transformation has gotten stronger defense now. The armor is not easily prable by any magic. She just run through the enemies, breaking their shields or walls while casting lightning magic from time to time. I think she killed the most here.


    .....


    Though the enemies are artificial master level mages, who not only have exceptional magic. They also have strong bodies as well. At most as strong as I am without my Aura. That means the werewolves and the vampires can still defeat them though.


    Jewel charging through the enemies might not kill them right away. But the monsters can take care of that.


    As for me, I am trying to gather the children in one ce so I can capture them all right away. We can do it in this base.


    The n is, after we capture all the children here, I will bring everyone in this base to the fifth base right. Thest base before reaching the capital.


    There, they will rest for a little longer and wait. The battle will hopefully end there.


    As for those in the fourth base, I will go there alone after transporting everyone to the fifth base. The main goal for the fourth base is to see the enemies¡¯ weaknesses that we haven¡¯t found yet. If there are any. It¡¯s just a ce where we need to test how going fighting against so many enemies feel like.


    During the previous bases before that, we were going with the intention of capturing the children. The fourth base, we will be more serious. And in the fifth base, we will go all out. There won¡¯t be sixth base.


    Since it seems that the enemies wille from other ces, there will be battle in the capital. That¡¯s without a doubt. And that¡¯s why if we can defeat all the over one thousand artificial master level wind magesing from this area, we can protect more people.


    I thought about that as I opened a portal to Noise Prison to capture the children since the Noise Bomb is still in cooldown time. It¡¯s a good chance since all the children are here.


    We have captured a lot of children here, and there are only about ten children left. When I looked around when I activated the Noise Bomb and opened the portal to the Noise Prison the few times before, I didn¡¯t see anyone else who got affected by the noise. So, this is great.


    Now, where are the bad children?


    Just ten children. I can easily throw them inside the portal. Maybe kick them. Don¡¯t worry. I know how to control my strength. And the children have strong body as well. Maybe I¡¯ll broke a rib or two, but it¡¯s fine.


    As I lifted thest child by his cor, an adult artificial master level mage attacked me all of a sudden while trying to grab thest child. She¡¯s a woman who seems to be in her thirties.


    Why is she attacking me all of a sudden? Why only now? The previous two hundred times, there were not many attacking me when I capturing the children. Just why now?


    Well, she seems to be saying something. But I don¡¯t know what she¡¯s talking about since I have been covering my ears the whole time. Ever since the battle here started. I can¡¯t hear anything.


    Actually, I can just put on the earplugs only when I was about to activate the Noise Bomb or open the portal. But doing it over and over again will disturb my concentration. That¡¯s why I decided to cover my ears the whole time. Though if there are any important messages, Victoria will speak to me directly in my ear.


    ...Though she has been speaking the whole time. Rather than speaking, it was just random noise of the events that she heard. Like some ¡°Bang¡± or ¡°Whoosh¡±. I wish she stopped doing it. But that¡¯s still better than continuously listening to my own blood flowing in my ears. It¡¯s a bit scary to listen to that the whole time.


    ¡°Roy, seems like she¡¯s saying something about the child you just threw as her son,¡± Victoria said.


    I just threw thest child to the portal and closed it when Victoria said that. So, this one knows that family is important? But why did she lets her own son to get modified into something that can¡¯t be called as human anymore?


    That mother mohawk attacked me without caring that her attack hurt her own allies. This mohawk is different. I feel that she has her own will instead of just following order.


    Now that all the children have been captured, I removed the earplugs to hear the ¡°Bang¡± and ¡°Whoosh¡± directly. And the angry mother mohawk is in front of me.


    I forgot to think of how the children can be with the cult. It¡¯s because they parents were in it before. And if their parents can be brainwashed, it¡¯s normal to brainwash the children as well.


    And I might have turn hundreds of children into orphans without knowing. Well, I¡¯ll have Russell takes care of it. Once he¡¯s done undoing the brainwashing on the children, he should have asked them something about their memories. If the children remembers that I killed their parents in front of them, let¡¯s have Russell hypnotize them to forget that memory.


    For the children to be brainwashed, and get the brainwashing undone only to be brainwashed again. Their fate is to be unlucky.


    Though for me, I will be merciless. Not toward children. That means once they grow up, I have no problem killing them. Though I hope by that time, the children have no more rtion with the cult and won¡¯t remember about me anymore.


    As for the mother in front of me, let¡¯s have a chat with her.


    ¡°Hello. Are you up for a nice talk?¡± I asked the mother politely.


    ¡°Where is my son!?¡± the mother with the mohawk asked.


    ¡°Somewhere safe where his brainwashing will be undone. Even if this is a war and we have to kill each other, we are not so heartless to kill children,¡± I said.


    ¡°Are you sure my son is safe?¡± the mother asked again.


    ¡°He is. Including all the children we captured. As long as they don¡¯t attack everyone there. Now, you will answer my questions. Well, not now. Wait for me for a little longer,¡± I said before I retreated. The children are all gone, and I was in the middle of the enemies. I need to be in a safe position before I can shout my order. And the mother mohawk seems to be patiently waiting for me. She¡¯s genuinely trying to protect his son who is in our hand now.


    ¡°It¡¯s done! We have them all! Retreat!¡±


    The children are gone, so it¡¯s time to retreat and bring them to the fifth base where they will rest.


    Everyone, except for Shirley whom I can just summon, moved somewhere safe before I opened a portal and get them to enter. Some of the mohawks attacked us while they are continuing their march, but it¡¯s not hard to defend since they are not focusing on killing us.


    After I got them all to move to the fifth base, I didn¡¯t go to the fourth base right away. I still have some questions to the mother mohawk. The only mohawk with her own will and not just someone who obeyed someone¡¯s order.


    I returned back to where the mother mohawk is. While the other mohawks continued their march, she stayed behind alone. Well, it¡¯s good. At least I won¡¯t have to fight the other mohawks while asking her questions.


    And also, the distance between this base to the fourth base is quite far. I think it¡¯s safe for us until afternoon.


    For now, let¡¯s talk with mother mohawk. If she really has her own will and not being brainwashed, and I can bring her to our side, we will have another powerful ally.

 Chapter 546

    Chapter 546: The Father of the Child Mohawk is Not a Mohawk


    ¡°Alright, I... I think we need to move to another ce,¡± I said to the mother mohawk before I started interrogating her.


    ¡°Why? We¡¯re alone in this ce. Isn¡¯t that enough?¡± mother mohawk asked.


    ¡°It¡¯s not the fact that we¡¯re alone. It¡¯s... how do I say it? Let¡¯s say I want to go to another ce that will give me the advantage when asking you questions,¡± I said.


    I can¡¯t bring her to Albert¡¯s ce directly. But what if Albert can still be present? I¡¯ll just get Ka and Ang to protect him just in case. And the location will be at the ce where the Professor is being held. We can also see his reaction about the questions and the answers from mother mohawk.


    Well, everything will go well only if mother mohawk is not being brainwashed. From how mother mohawk tried to protect son mohawk, it should be safe.


    For now, let¡¯s get everything prepared.


    ¡°Wait here a bit longer. I will prepare something,¡± I said as I left her to wait on her own in this ce.


    .....


    ¡°You think I will wait patiently? I can just kill you here,¡± mother mohawk said.


    ¡°You can¡¯t. Just you alone is too weak against me. And you have witnessed it before. Three times,¡± I said.


    The three times I mentioned were from the three bases where I tried to stop them. Our n is progressing nicely. Though we might be able to do something better if we have her on our side. Can I ckmail her to help us by using her son? That sounds like I¡¯m kidnapping her son and hold him against his will for our purposes. And that¡¯s right. I¡¯m a kidnapper.


    I called Sonia and told her to inform what I got to Albert, Ang, and Ka. As for the others, I don¡¯t care if they want to know or not. I don¡¯t care if more people ising. I just hope they are safe since Albert and the kings are her targets.


    After a while, Sonia returns and told me that I can do it. The final is still tomorrow, so Ang can help me today.


    I wanted Ang because she¡¯s the strongest mage we have. With her instinct, if Albert or the others are in danger, she could protect them quickly.


    Even if I have killed many of them, mother mohawk is still a mohawk. An artificial master level mage. Only Ang is stronger than them.


    After getting their permission, I used portal to go to the ce where the Professor was being held. The opponent is an artificial master level mage, so she can detect other people¡¯s presence. But they shouldn¡¯t know who they are. That¡¯s why I¡¯m thinking of getting the Professor¡¯s body hidden while we¡¯re talking ear him.


    Now that it¡¯s done, I grabbed Albert, Ka, and Ang here. I¡¯m sorry to Marie that I stole her time together with Albert, but this is important.


    I had the three of them in another room where Albert can hear our conversation. That way, he can tell if mother mohawk is lying or not.


    ¡°Roy, are you sure about the person you¡¯re talking about? Is she truly not being brainwashed?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°I know that this one is different. She is still sane enough to protect her son when I was capturing him. We can decide what to do with her after this. That¡¯s why I need Ang to be here. Don¡¯t forget that she¡¯s still an artificial master level mage. She can detect your presence even if you¡¯re in hiding. Though she shouldn¡¯t be able to see who you are,¡± I said as I pointed my finger toward the Professor who is being tied up with his mouth covered so he won¡¯t be able to leak any sound.


    And to make sure he can¡¯t give any signal, his whole body and even his head is being covered by Blobbies so he won¡¯t be able to make any move either. I don¡¯t know about artificial master level mage¡¯s hearing sense, so it¡¯s better this way.


    ¡°Well, if she truly has her own will, we might be able to get something from her. Though from this, I guess we can tell that those experimented children were not just kidnapped. But they are the children of some members of the cult as well. Maybe...¡± Albert started pondering.


    ¡°What? That we have killed the children¡¯s parents and make them orphans? Isn¡¯t that what a war is? Killing people who might have families?¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah, but the children are parts of the enemy¡¯s troop. They might have watched their own parents brutally murdered by us. And since you are a closebat fighter, you are the most likely to be seen,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°So what? If they tried to avenge their parents, they are free to do it. I won¡¯t kill them when they are young, but once they have grown up and be adults, and they are thinking of killing me, I will kill them. Simple, right?¡±


    ¡°So, it¡¯s fine for you if they are adults? Well, that¡¯s fine. Do what you want. I¡¯ll trust your judgement,¡± Albert said.


    After Albert and the others moved to another room, I opened a portal directly to the front of the mother mohawk. She has seen me opening portals and throwing children inside it several times already. She should have known about my magic. Though I don¡¯t think she knows that it¡¯s a magic from a summoner.


    ¡°This is not teleportation magic. Making a path that connect one ce to another. Do you have spatial element magic?¡± mother mohawk asked.


    ¡°First time I heard of that element. Is that real? And no, I¡¯m not a space mage. And I won¡¯t tell you about my elements,¡± I said.


    ¡°Or is it something that an Aura user can do?¡± mother mohawk asked.


    Well, it¡¯s normal that she knows about me being an Aura user. Though Ang on the other side were shocked to hear that mother mohawk knows about it.


    Well, it¡¯s good that I have kept my appearance secret the whole time. Even when I was away from her, I still wear Blobbyarmor and covered my face as well. There¡¯s no way she can tell me from my appearance. Though if she proves to be an enemy even after all this, I will just kill her.


    ¡°We¡¯ll get to thatter. Don¡¯t forget that we¡¯re the one who keep your son¡¯s custody. Even though we¡¯re actually the good guy, I¡¯ll be the viin here,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Fine. Ask away.¡±


    ¡°So, were you not brainwashed?¡±


    I started the interrogation. And I learned man surprising things.


    With the signal from Albert telling me if what she said is true or not, I continued asking. And she has been answering everything truthfully.


    Sometimes, Albert would ask the question instead from the other room. And it was quite interesting how the Professor who had been tied up was trying to move and speak something again and again. Seems like this mother mohawk is someone the Professor knows personally.


    So, this mother mohawk was never been manipted. Everything was her own will. Including joining the troop to kill Albert and the others.


    But her main reason is because her son had no choice but toe. That¡¯s why she joined so she can protect her son.


    When I asked why she didn¡¯t try to stop me from the first time right away, she said that because she was too far from the children at the time. And when she finally got closer, up until we were at the third base, we already escaped.


    And we are too strong for her. Unlike the others who were not afraid of death, she¡¯s afraid of death. So, instead of attacking us, she prefer to protect herself. That¡¯s why it took her so long before she can be with her son. I guess the monsters doing well keeping the adults away from me.


    ¡°Well, that was interesting. And since you have a mohawk as well, did you became like this by your own will?¡± I asked.


    ¡°My son was dying. And even though we were separated, I had no choice but to ask my husband who is smart and have medical knowledge. And he said that my son can be cured if he goes through the experiment. So, I told him that I will take part in the experiment before my own son to see if it¡¯s safe. And so, I became this way. Unlike my own son, if I exhaust all my mana, I will die,¡± mother mohawk said.


    Seems like I was right that the artificial master level children won¡¯t die if they exhaust their mana. But hearing it from her, I sensed something different. It¡¯s like she is personally close to the Professor.


    Well, there¡¯s nothing wrong in checking.


    I walked to the other person in the room, The Professor, who ispletely covered with Blobbies and can¡¯t move and talk. And I removed the Blobbies on his face while still getting his mouth covered.


    ¡°Is this your husband!?¡± I asked the mother mohawk who was shocked when I unboxed the mystery guest.


    ¡°You¡¯re here!?¡± the mother mohawk gasped.


    Seems like I was right. The Professor is father mohawk without a mohawk! What a weird coincidence.


    ¡°Why did you say it like this is a quiz show on TV?¡± Victoria asked.


    I don¡¯t get her. Well, it¡¯s not rted to the stuffs here, so it¡¯s fine.


    So, I first captured and interrogated the father, and then kidnapped their son, before I negotiated with the mother. What did I do to the mohawk family?

 Chapter 547

    Chapter 547: We Can User Her Son as ckmail Material


    ¡°What a turn of event this has became,¡± After I showed the Professor to mother mohawk, Albert just entered the interrogating room we¡¯re in nonchntly.


    ¡°What are you doing here? Go back to your room, young man,¡± I said.


    ¡°Shut up, mom. And you¡¯re not my mom anyway,¡± Albert said.


    For him toe here on his own. I guess he has judged mother mohawk to not be a hostile. And another guess is that he feels safer here with me.


    Ang might be able to protect Albert if mother mohawk attacked. But with me being so close in an enclosed room with mother mohawk, I can easily kill her before she attacked. With my Divine Vision, I can tell if she¡¯s making a move on us or not.


    Hmm? Wait. The Professor is an old man. And the son mohawk is so young. The mother mohawk looks to be in her thirties. Is the Professor ate-bloomer?


    ¡°So, the Professor is the father, you are the mother, and the boy you talked about, the one that my friend over here captured or kidnapped, was your son? Am I right?¡± Albert asked mother mohawk. As for the Professor, he¡¯s still being restrained and unable to say anything.


    .....


    ¡°Right. My son was dying, and that man over there said that he might be able to heal my son if he experimented on the boy. I told him that he must perform the experiment on me first. If there¡¯s any side effect on the experiment, he must not perform it to my son. And the experiment was a sess. Although during his experiment I was not hypnotized, my son was. So, I thought of leaving him. But as long as my son is still there, I can¡¯t leave,¡± mother mohawk said.


    So, the Professor used his own son to get his wife to stay with him. Is that it?


    While Albert asked mother mohawk, I was also thinking of why the Professor is so old while his wife and son were young. It¡¯s because they were artificial master level mages.


    I was surrounded by several expert level mages that I can tell how mages will still look younger than they are if they advanced their magic level. Maybe not all since I see some old expert level mages as well. But there¡¯s a possibility that they reached an old age before bing an expert level mages. Well, they ended up dying in my hand anyway.


    So, I guess mother mohawk is older than I think. And what about the son? Don¡¯t tell me that he¡¯s actually an adult? But he¡¯s still under the effect of the Noise Bomb, which can only be heard by young people. Or me and anyone who has extremely good hearing.


    Let¡¯s just ask them how old their son is.


    ¡°I have another question. How old is your son? And when did he got experimented on?¡± I asked mother mohawk.


    ¡°He¡¯s thirteen years old. He was experimented around six years ago,¡± mother mohawk replied.


    Six years ago? So, that was around the time when the boy was seven, I guess. And the boy¡¯s appearance is also the appearance of a boy around twelve or thirteen. I guess they can still grow up after bing an artificial master level mage.


    And how does one awakened their element when they were young? Well, since Lana was already an ice mage as soon as she was born, I guess it¡¯s possible if the Professor pushed the children¡¯s magical aptitude during experiment.


    ¡°Anyway, who are you? I have noticed that you were listening to us the whole time. And why is he here?¡±


    After mother mohawk asked Albert and the others who they are, she pointed her finger to the Professor. I guess she hates him so much. Does it mean it¡¯s possible to bring her to our side?


    ¡°He¡¯s one of your targets for your mission. The king of Tatrama Kingdom, Albert... I forgot his full name. Well, that¡¯s not important anyway. And these two behind him are my trusted friends,¡± I said.


    I have no problem introducing everyone here. Though I still kept my Blobbyarmor since I don¡¯t want my identity to be revealed. Though just with Ka and Ang here, anyone who knows the two should know about me one way or another, right? Well, I just keep the armor just in case. I also told her that I captured the Professor for interrogation.


    ¡°Oh, really? So, the troops we were facing was the soldiers from Tatrama. Does Tatrama kingdom employs monsters? There were too many monsters with them that I don¡¯t think there are enough tamers or summonerspared to the humans we were facing,¡± mother mohawk said.


    ¡°Among those monsters, only three are contracted monsters. The rest are wild monster unbinded by contracts. We¡¯re just that good in asking for help. And the troops arebined troops of Tatrama Kingdom, Varadis Kingdom, and Arturo Kingdom. As for soldiers from Consenza Empire, they are guarding the capital since that¡¯s where you¡¯re attacking,¡± I said.


    ¡°The four kingdoms have made alliance? But Arturo Kingdom is...¡±


    Mother mohawk stopped talking since Albert interrupted her.


    ¡°It has been taken care of. The fake king who was with us for the tournament has been arrested, and the real king has returned to Arturo.But he¡¯s no longer able to gain the people¡¯s trust because he has been swapped without anyone knowing, so the original crown prince, Fabio, the one who was supposed to be dead, has been coronated as the king. It was just a few days ago. It¡¯s impossible for you to know about this information unless you have a way tomunicate from long distance in an instant,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°...I see. So, you have prepared fo the attack this much, huh?¡± mother mohawk asked.


    ¡°Rather than preparing for the attack, we used the tournament to bait the cult to attack us. We were prepared ever since the tournament was just an idea. Even before the tournament in Tatrama,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Is that so...¡±


    While Albert and mother mohawk were talking, I can see the Professor¡¯s expression seems to hold a hope in it. What hope? Is the cult have some sort of secret that can get them to seed in this mission?


    ¡°Oh, by the way, will there be any master level mages attacking? Or is it just artificial master level mages?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know about that. Though I never see any real master level mages among us before we departed. Though I don¡¯t think that¡¯s the case,¡± mother mohawk said.


    ¡°Why?¡±


    ¡°The man in charge of this mission is too prideful. And he has a goal which is to achieve master level mage. He¡¯s too greedy. There¡¯s no way he would ask any master level mages to participate in this mission. He wanted to get all the credits for himself. Though he¡¯s just sending us to fight while he¡¯s hiding somewhere,¡± mother mohawk exined.


    She then told us about the man in charge. He was just an expert level mage who has quite high position in the cult.


    ¡°What is the chance of that guy asking master level mages toe?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Near zero. Why ask?¡± mother mohawk asked.


    ¡°Because after you told us who the guy in charge of the mission was, that Professor has despair in his face. Seems like the mission is bound to fail,¡± I said while pointing my finger to the Professor.


    Seems like the Professor knows the guy. And he knows he won¡¯t ask any master level mage toe. That¡¯s good to know.


    ¡°But what is the chance of him asking for help anyway? The guy who retreated after knowing that I¡¯m an Aura user were with you after he left the fight the first time. You should have known that you were at least fighting one Aura user, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I didn¡¯t even remember about what to do once we encounter an Aura user until that guy told us that he has reported about the appearance of an Aura user. But for the guy in charge, I know that he¡¯s too greedy. He won¡¯t tell anyone that your side has you, an Aura user, to the Archbishop. Unless you win the battle and none of us returned to report. The Archbishop will be suspicious and asks him what happened. Probably, he will tell him that an Aura user existed at that time,¡± mother mohawk said.


    That¡¯s great! People¡¯s greed is amazing! Especially is if they are enemies. And they are too blinded by their own greed. I have to thank him if we meet in the future. Only if he¡¯s alive of course.


    If the Evil God knows that he kept the existence of an Aura user as secret until they lose so many people, he might be killed.


    And seeing the Professor¡¯s expression and Albert¡¯s reaction, I can tell that she didn¡¯t lie. That mean I should be safe for a while longer. That¡¯s good.


    After Albert asked some more questions, it¡¯s time to decide if we can let her live or not.


    ¡°Will you join us destroying the cult? We will see if we can trust you in the battle. If our Aura user has decided to trust you, you can meet your son again,¡± Albert asked mother mohawk.


    ¡°What if I refuse?¡±


    ¡°Then you will be restrained here until the battle is over. As for meeting your son, we will decide thatter. How about it?¡±


    Mother mohawk then looked at the Professor, and she made a decision.


    ¡°I¡¯ll help you. I always hated the cult. The only reason I stayed was to protect my son. But I won¡¯t use magic until I exhaust all my mana. I still want to live to meet my son,¡± mother mohawk said.


    ¡°Good. You will be a great addition to our team. By the way, what¡¯s your name?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°My name is Iris,¡± mother mohawk replied.


    ¡°Alright, Iris. That Aura user will watch over you. If you betray us, he will kill you. Or worse. He will use your son to ckmail you. He¡¯s that kind of guy,¡± Albert said while pointing his finger at me. And I just waved my hand to Iris.


    ¡°...I¡¯ll keep that in mind,¡± Iris said.


    Good. With this, we have one artificial master level mage with us. As long as we hold her son in our custody, she won¡¯t betray us.


    Just in case, I told Sonia to inform Russell about Iris¡¯ son and get him to undo the brainwashing thest. This way, she will be with us for a while longer.

 Chapter 548

    Chapter 548: Introducing Our New Member


    Getting an artificial master level mage as our ally is a great addition. Though our expert level mages are stronger than the cult¡¯s artificial master level mage, it¡¯s still a great help for Iris to join us.


    After getting her join us, Albert asked her some more questions. And then we let the Professor to talk with Iris, but it seems like it wasn¡¯t necessary. She hated him for experimenting on their son even if that¡¯s the only way for the boy to recover.


    If only the medical knowledge of this world has advanced just ten years into the future, she could just ask any reputable surgeon to operate on her son. And she doesn¡¯t need to go to the cult to ask for help.


    After hearing Iris¡¯ report on her son¡¯s condition, I can tell what his illness was, and I could heal him by performing surgery. Though it happened a few years ago, even before I returned back in time.


    But now, other than me, I have taught several doctors and surgeons on how to cure this illness. And we should be able to heal more people in the future. It¡¯s good that I decided to teach the doctors and surgeons about medical knowledge in the future. This way, once the knowledge spread all over the continent, no one would go to the cult to ask for their help in curing their loved ones.


    Well, as for Iris, she went to her husband whom she had separated with a long time ago. And she said that she has gone to many different hospitals and clinics before finally giving up and had no choice but to ask her husband.


    If only I got returned back to when I was five... Wait, if I¡¯m just a five years old kid, no one would believe me. I should be d that I got returned back in time for my magic aptitude to be tested anyway.


    .....


    Imagine a five years old kid telling an old doctor that he can learn more from the five years old kid. No one would believe that.


    Anyway, it¡¯s time to go to the fourth base. Although it will still be a few hours until the mohawks arrive there, it¡¯s best to let her know some people there first.


    Maybe I¡¯ll go to the fifth base before so I can introduce her to those who are on standby there. And then I will go to the fourth base.


    I won¡¯t let her escape my sight. Even if Albert said that she didn¡¯t say any lies, it¡¯s best to keep watching her under my watch.


    But before that, we need to do something first.


    I told Sonia to ry a message to Lina to prepare something for me. And after a while, Sonia returned to tell me that it has been prepared. And I opened a portal to Lina¡¯s location.


    ¡°Thank you, Lina. That was quick,¡± I said as I received something from her that I asked for.


    Lina smiled as I thanked her, and when she looked behind me to see everyone there, she realized my intention in why I asked her to get this thing.


    ¡°So that¡¯s why Master asked me to get it,¡± Lina said.


    ¡°You¡¯re not going to ask me about it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°A maid only needs to obey her master. And you¡¯re not just my master. There¡¯s no need for me to ask for your intention. I just need to believe you,¡± Lina said.


    She¡¯s so great! What a lovely maid I have!


    Before I closed the portal, I hugged her tightly and said my farewell.


    After I closed the portal, I threw the thing I got Lina to get to Iris.


    ¡°Wear it. With that thing on, at least no one will be hostile to you right away. Oh, and here. A purple bandana. Wear it as well on your arm to show that you¡¯re our ally,¡± I said.


    I didn¡¯t just throw the thing I got from Lina. I also threw her a purple bandana which is the proof that she¡¯s our ally.


    ¡°This...¡± Iris grabbed the thing I gave to her, and then with one hand, she¡¯s touching the bald side of her head.


    ¡°I wonder how you can walk around with that hairstyle,¡± I said.


    ¡°Obviously, it¡¯s not because I want to. It¡¯s the side effect of the experiment. And no matter how long I waited, they won¡¯t grow back,¡± Iris said.


    The thing I gave to her was a wig. A wig with the same color as her hair.


    Even if I want to introduce her to the others, just by having a mohawk as her hairstyle will raise their vignce toward her.


    Because of the cult, the soldier¡¯s perspective of mohawk hairstyle is that they are enemies that must be killed. That¡¯s why she needs to wear a wig.


    I didn¡¯t just gave her the wig and the bandana. I also gave her a Blobby. That Blobby will be hidden under the wig and will be the glue to make sure her wig will stay there and unable to be removed.


    After that, I move to the fifth base with her to introduce her. And then, we moved to the fourth base.


    I told the others that Iris is our new members and she¡¯s very strong. But for our key yers, the generals, my friends, and some expert level mages who are here after losing the tournament, I told them the truth.


    ¡°Can we trust her?¡± Sara asked.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I¡¯ll make sure that she never leave my sight. And also, we have her son in our custody. She won¡¯t do anything that will threaten her son¡¯s life,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s what a kidnapper said. Well, if you say so. Anyway, what¡¯s her element?¡± Celestine asked.


    ¡°I have lightning element that has reached master level artificially, and healing magic that has reached advanced level. But please don¡¯t make me use all my mana. I still want to live to see my son,¡± Iris said.


    Of course I told everyone here how she will die if she spend all her mana. That¡¯s why even though we have new powerful ally, we won¡¯t ask her too much.


    ¡°I will get an angel to fly with her. And Iris will only attack using AoE lightning magic toward the ce where the enemies are more concentrated at. That¡¯s the only thing she will do. But if she does anything else, I have told the angel to drop her to her death,¡± I said.


    If Iris does anything suspicious, I¡¯ll get the angel to fly higher and drop her to her death. If the angel didn¡¯t fly high enough, with her improved physical strength, she should be able to live. Even if her bones are broken, she¡¯s a healer. She can heal herself. That¡¯s why it needs to be an instant death for her.


    ¡°By the way, you look familiar,¡± Iris asked Celestine.


    Well, of course she seems familiar. Celestine was a faction leader when she was at the cult.


    And Celestine¡¯s reply was simple. Her hands reached the hook of the ttening bra on her back and removed it. Even though there are men in this room, she doesn¡¯t seem to care as her boobs are now free. Though it was just for an instant before she fixed her bra, the generals and the male expert level mages we have get nosebleed from the unexpected situation.


    ¡°Oh! It¡¯s you! I thought you were dead. It seems like you joined this side,¡± Iris said.


    ¡°Just like how you joined the cult because of your son, I left the cult because of the orphans I am taking care of,¡± Celestine said.


    ¡°...Is it that difficult to recognize Celestine from her face? She¡¯s a beautiful woman, so it¡¯s not impossible, right?¡± I said.


    ¡°My breasts have more impact,¡± Celestine said.


    I believe that. I have seen that. And once the cult is destroyed, I can feel that. But that¡¯s only if she still remember her promise. My harem members will increase once the cult is destroyed.


    After introducing Iris, I take a short nap. I have used portals several more times more than I expected thanks to Iris. But at least we got a new powerful member. Even if she can only help us asionally.


    When I woke up, the enemies still haven¡¯t arrive yet. We had our meals while we waited.


    After filling our bellies, we finally detected the enemies. They are finally here.


    With no more children in their rank, we can go all out and fight however we want. Our goal is to kill as many enemies as possible so we will have easier fight in the fifth base where we willpletely obliterate them all.


    This is the first full fight against the enemy which only has mohawks in their rank without my ears being covered. I can use all my senses and fight without restraint from the start.


    ¡°What? You have problems with me making sound effects? I thought I made a good job,¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°No, that was annoying. And now that I¡¯m free from your sound effects, I feel much better. Well, let¡¯s go, Victoria!¡±

 Chapter 549

    Chapter 549: The Last Battle is Here


    The battle at the fourth base.


    We dyed the enemies much longer than we expected thanks to Iris¡¯ performance. Even though she didn¡¯t cast her magic too much in order to save mana, she did it well.


    If she was taught magic control, she could be stronger than Ang. But I don¡¯t have any intention of teaching her magic control. After all, once her son has been cured from the brainwashing, she doesn¡¯t have any needs to stay with us. At least she¡¯s not with the cult anymore.


    As for other children whom possibly had their parents killed by us, well, we¡¯ll just raise them in the orphanage. I think our base at Cassau will be renovated to be bigger to be able to contain so many children. I mean two hundred of them? That¡¯s a lot.


    Well, I¡¯ll have Albert and the others to discuss itter after this war. Though most likely, children who can still remember their memories will be returned to where they were born. If they came from Tatrama, they will go to an orphanage in Tatrama. Possibly the orphanage in Cassau. And those from other country will be taken care of by the orphanage in that country. That¡¯s why it won¡¯t be two hundred new kids suddenly in our base. At least I hope that¡¯s the case.


    We have reduced the enemy numbers a lot in this base. From over a thousand in the start, we reduced it to about eight hundred. Not counting the children we captured, that is still a great achievement. Especially since we only had half of everyone in this fourth base.


    In the next base, we will go all out and defeat the rest of the artificial master level mages. We have the power to do so.


    .....


    I look around the battlefield and see that some people on our side have started to get tired. And Iris herself has stopped casting magic as she doesn¡¯t want to spend more mana. I guess this is it. We will stop our attack here and move to thest base.


    ¡°Alright, that¡¯s enough! Retreat!¡± I gave the order to retreat and move to a safe ce.


    The strong ones, the expert level mages and the monsters, fought as the tired soldiers retreating. I also make sure that all the soldiers managed to escape before joining them to open a portal.


    Once we are far enough and the artificial master level mages ignore us because we are not part of their mission, we are safe. Good thing these artificial master level mages were instructed to strictly obey the order of the higher ups. If not, we would have more people dying.


    Finally, Celestine raised an Earth Wall to protect us from the enemies¡¯ attack. I looked with my Divine Vision and see that the enemies have stopped attacking after the Earth Wall was raised. They are moving forward to the capital. But they don¡¯t know that we still have another base left.


    ¡°Alright, we have done well. Good work, everyone. The next base is thest. Once you get there, go take a rest. We will have an all-out battle there,¡± I said as I opened a portal.


    Everyone entered the portal. Although they are obviously exhausted, they have a smile on their face. That¡¯s good. After all, they have done very well. And they must be thinking that the mission is a great sess.


    We have expected there to be more casualties. But it turns out that many of us were alive by the end of the battle in the fourth base. Although some lives were lost, we did better than expected.


    As soon as we entered the fifth base, most of the soldiers from the fourth base instantlyy down. Whether it¡¯s on the bed, the ground, or under a tree, everyone was resting in their own ways.


    I¡¯m also tired, but since I have the most stamina despite the fact that I fought the most, I need to share information with everyone else before I can take a rest. Obviously, I will sleep on Blobbybed.


    I also made two other Blobbybed in an open area for anyone who wants to rest there. Sleeping there is the mostfortable after all. It helps recover your stamina faster. Not that there¡¯s any other special effect. It¡¯s just afortable bed after all.


    I woke up a few hourster and see everyone is still rxing. Well, the distance from the fourth base to here is far after all. With my estimation, they should be here after the final match of the tournament begins. The battle between Shelia and Ang.


    The two who were teammates during the college tournament, became rival in this tournament. Although I¡¯m predicting that Ang would win, Shirley is not someone to be underestimated.


    After the two entered the college in the capital together, Shirley became someone who watched Ang the most. She must have a trick or two topete against her. Though Ang would still win.


    For most people in this continent, Ang will be the most famous mage to exist. But for the cult, I am the most famous. Or should I say infamous?


    Although they don¡¯t know yet about the existence of an Aura user, once the mission failed, they will know. At least the Archbishop will ask whoever responsible why they had lost despite the power they had.


    ...And then I will prepare for my assassination. Fuck.


    Seems like the battle is still far from over. Just where are they hiding!?


    If I could chase that forehead mole mohawk back then to the city they were dispatched from, and then follow the whoever he was talking to, I might be able to find where their main base is. Unfortunately, that wasn¡¯t the case.


    We still don¡¯t have a clue where they were hiding. But I hope once they became wary of the Aura user¡¯s existence, they will lower their guard and we can find their base. But that¡¯s forter.


    As we waited by doing anything we can to sharpen our senses before the battle in thest base, Sonia appears in front of me. Seems like we have new information.


    ¡°The final match has begun. Both Ang and Shirley left a message to you. They said that they will focus on their battle, so you need to focus on your battle. That¡¯s all from the two finalists,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Tell them good luck. Well, they are in a battle already, so don¡¯t. Anything else?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. There is a battle in another ce. Some people from the cult brought two artificial master level mages from another location. Thankfully, you left Graham over there. With his help, they killed all of the enemies. They started checking on the surrounding area of the capital to see if there are more enemiesing. Also, there are some suspicious movements in the capital. But Ka and the others are there, so it should be fine,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Alright, now you can tell those people good luck. Once I¡¯m done here, I will return immediately to the capital,¡± I said.


    Sonia left to ry my message.


    It¡¯s good that I left Graham on his own. As expected, that was a good choice. And I¡¯m d that that I didn¡¯t force Ka toe here. She¡¯s doing well over there.


    One hourter, I received the news that Ang has won the tournament and became the strongest mage in the continent. There were also some disturbance in the capital, but Ka has stopped it. There were some attacks as well, but since most of the civilians are in a safe ce, no one died.


    ¡°Everyone! The final is over! But our battle will only begin soon! They are finally here! Once we¡¯re done here, everyone in the capital will be safe!¡±


    As soon as I received the news that Ang won, I can finally see the enemies. Their n has gone wrong. They are toote ining thanks to us dying them. Although there were still some attacks in the capital, the others can take care of it.


    I shouted to raise the morale. We havepleted our mission to stall for time perfectly well. But if we want to achieve a hundred percent mark, we need to kill all of the mohawks. That¡¯s why I need to raise the morale.


    And so, the battle in thest base begun. Magic flying around and hit the enemies. The shooting squads are doing their best to gain the enemies¡¯ attention, while the soldiers protect them. And the monsters will kill the enemies. It¡¯s a perfectbination.


    Thanks to this battle, the shooting squads that were just made, have improved their uracy. They won¡¯t just carelessly hit the monsters who are on our side.


    Half of them were my students! Aren¡¯t I amazing!? Though it was all mostly thanks to Sara who taught them. Not me. I disappeared before they could even hold their gun properly.


    Well, let¡¯s fight, shall we? I can¡¯t just let my students gain the spotlight. I need to show them what their teacher can do.

 Chapter 550

    Chapter 550: The Battle is Over as I Was Covered in Enemies¡¯ Blood


    The battle in thest base. Once we have taken care of the enemies here, we can rest easy. At least the rest of the battle in the capital and nearby ces should be easier than here. Unless the cult went all out and bring their real master level mages, which I doubt they will.


    When we were interrogating Iris, or let¡¯s say it¡¯s an interview to get her to join us, she told us everything she knows. Unlike other cult members or artificial master level mages, she doesn¡¯t have any loyalty to the cult.


    Rather than loyalty, she doesn¡¯t even have any good impression to the cult at all. That¡¯s why it¡¯s easy for her to tell us everything.


    She told us that there won¡¯t be any master level magesing. Unless those master level magese on their own volition, which is unlikely. There were too few of them and they seem to be too important for this mission.


    But that¡¯s also dangerous. Why would someone as powerful as master level mage won¡¯t participate? Just what kind of important job are they doing?


    If they just let one master level mage to do this mission of killing the kings, they would have seeded already. Just why?


    Iris was just lucky to see one master level mage other than the Archbishop. She was tasked to protect that mage during her breakthrough to master level. And right after that woman broke through, the Archbishop visited her and took her away. Iris said that they would visit their master, which is most likely the Evil God himself.


    .....


    After that, she never saw her again. Other than the Archbishop, she never met any other master level mages than that woman. That¡¯s why she concluded that they have important mission to do and it¡¯s unlikely for them to be here.


    Though once the news of an Aura user was spread, they might make a move. I need to grow even stronger. And I will use this war to do so.


    Be stronger. Be faster. Be more precise. Be more elegant. Well, thatst one might not be necessary.


    I need to improve my... everything. My long distance sh needs to reach even further distance and be more powerful. I need to train it here.


    Good, there are five artificial master level mages standing close to each other. I¡¯ll see if I can sh all five of them right away.


    Using Victokatana, I shed horizontally to see if I can reach all five of them. But because the distance is quite far, the power diminished greatly.


    All five of them got hit, but it was too weak. It¡¯s like a tap of a finger instead of a sh. I need it to be able to kill them all.


    ¡°Roy, you are more proficient in using a spear. How about trying to pierce multiple enemies with one thrust? I think you can do that. Once you perfected it, you can try shing again,¡± Victoria suggested.


    ¡°Got it,¡± I replied.


    Victoria also told me that it¡¯s best to use this chance to get stronger. The cult might have send all their artificial master level mages, so they are currently the best training partners that I can kill. And they are only weaker than master level mages. Not counting our mages who can surpass them thanks to learning magic control.


    And there are still over five hundreds of them. I can practice as much as I want. Though the others will still kill them, so I need to get as much chance to fight as possible before they can kill all of the mohawks.


    I moved to another ce so there will be some enemies in a straight line that I can target with my thrust. I used Victoria as a spear this time instead of using Reizpear.


    Reizpear is a good spear that can repair itself no matter how destroyed it was. But Victoria or Blobbies can transform into anything I want.


    I first used Reizpear because I can¡¯t get another person¡¯s support during the awakening of my ability even if they are my familiar. The Divine Vision I got after killing my first All-seeing Eye. And I got attached to Reizpear since then.


    Maybe I need to get some better weapons. That will help me getting stronger. But do I have time for that?


    There should be a gap from the report that we stopped their attack, until the reports of it. Probably a few days. I¡¯ll try asking the kings if they have magic weapons in their treasure rooms. I will ask them to get their people to collect weapons as well from all over the continent. Anything is fine. Sword, Spear, Bow, Axe, anything. If they are some sort of magical equipment, I will be able to at least fight a master level mage on level ground. I hope that¡¯s the case.


    Maybe some armor as well. Just anything is fine. I will also look for them myself. Probably under the sea or somewhere that other people won¡¯t be able to go.


    That¡¯s forter. To be able to do that, I need to defeat the enemies here as soon as possible so I can have more time searching. But I also won¡¯t let this chance of growing stronger be. So difficult.


    I thrust Victospear and as Victoria said, my thrust is better than my sh. I managed to pierce through two enemies at once. The third person moved before I attacked, so he dodged it luckily. And there are no other people in a straight line.


    ¡°As I said, you can use spear better than other weapons. But that¡¯s still not enough. We don¡¯t know how powerful a master level mage is. But let¡¯s say that they are as strong as the Evil God when he killed Sonia, me, and all the Aura users in the world back then. You are still not strong enough to defeat a real master level mage,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Was he a master level mage?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. Even back then, master level mages are rare. I think you are much stronger than most Aura users, but even the most famous Aura user back then still died. Just be careful,¡± Victoria reminded me.


    ¡°I understand. After we finish this battle, I¡¯m thinking of looking for magical weapons. Reizpear is good, but it¡¯s not strong enough. Other than my own strength, I need external strength as well like weapon or armor,¡± I said.


    ¡°What!? You had enough of me? After everything we went through?¡± Victoria said jokingly.


    ¡°Is it the time for joking around? Well, you are far too important to let go anyway. There¡¯s no way I would abandon you. I just think we need more weapons to get stronger. An entire arsenal for myself,¡± I said.


    ¡°I actually thought of the same thing when Marie and I were working on that Noise Bomb. I have asked Marie to create some powerful melee weapon if possible. And I asked Sonia to look around for some weapons she could find if she¡¯s free. Though even if she find some, those weapons should be at least a thousand years old. They might not be as good as they were in the past,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°I know. I just think that the more we have, the better chance we have in destroying the cult. Why didn¡¯t I think of this sooner?¡±


    ¡°Because I¡¯m too important to you. I¡¯m a convenient woman for you,¡± Victoria replied.


    Well, she¡¯s right. I thought that I had enough with just Reizpear and Victoria. And after Victoria able to create clones of herself, I also didn¡¯t bother to get throwing knives as well.


    Thinking of new tricks is also a way to get stronger. I need to add more list to my Shameless Survival Arts.


    By the way, it has been three hours since the battle in this base started. And there are already less than three hundred of mohawks left.


    Although everyone seems exhausted, they still go on and fight. I think in another hour, we should be able to kill the rest of them. That mean I won¡¯t have any more chance to practice.


    ¡°Let¡¯s increase our pace. This time, I¡¯m training to improve my technique. I need to be fast and precise,¡± I said.


    Using Ostrich¡¯s Footwork, I moved quickly and killed many mohawks as I pass them by. One mohawk with one sh or thrust. More mohawks if possible with one sh.


    I think this suits me more than the previous method. I¡¯m a speed type instead of power type. But that¡¯s not enough to defeat master level mages. I need to be fast and powerful.


    I was too focused in my fight that I didn¡¯t notice everyone else stopped fighting and watched me as my Victoriarmor is covered by the enemies¡¯ blood before Victoria can absorb the blood.


    When I¡¯m done, there are no more mohawks standing. Just me in the middle of the mohawks¡¯ corpses. And everyone is watching me with fear in their eyes.


    ¡°...Roy, that was too much. They should be happy that the battle is over, but now they are frightened by you,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°I guess I was focused too much in my fight. Well, at least we¡¯re done here. Let¡¯s check the capital soon,¡± I said.


    It¡¯s finally over. I want to go home and rest. But I can¡¯t. I need to prepare myself against the cult¡¯s master level mages after cleaning up the mess at the capital. What a pain.

 Chapter 551

    Chapter 551: Don¡¯t Hurt My Father!


    Now the defensive battle from our part is over. Though everything is not over yet.


    I opened a portal into Monsters World, to the Monsters Vige. There, I have three werewolves who are fit, healthy, and ready.


    Even though their race are the kind that love battlefield, there are still individual preferences. Though these three still love fighting, they know that they are far weaker than average werewolves. That¡¯s why when we prepared our n, these three voluntarily refused the offer despite how much they want to fight. They are level-headed. They think that they will be a burden if they fight at the front and too weak to finish the enemies.


    But their speed is about the same. And they have same abilities as normal werewolves. They know that I want to destroy the cult, but they don¡¯t have the strength to do that. But they can still do other things. That¡¯s why Red, the second in charge of the Monsters Vige after me, suggested that these three will track the enemies.


    That was before we even look for the fake vige. And I left some nonbatant agents from Tatrama, to teach those three werewolves to be a good spies.


    And as I opened the portal, those three werewolves, and five other agents, entered the portal.


    ¡°How are they?¡± I asked one of the agents.


    .....


    ¡°They have much better ability and skill than average agents. With the training they went through, blending in might be a little difficult. But if one of us joined them in their search while pretending to be a tamer of a wolf monster, it should be fine,¡± one of the agents said.


    I see. One of the werewolves will turn into a wolf, and pretend that he is a tamed monster. And the agent who wille is the tamer. I think that¡¯s a good idea.


    ¡°Okay then. We were unable to find any trace of where they came from. I hope you can find them,¡± I said.


    Then, the agents who talked with me turns around and talk to the three werewolves who were chatting with Shelia and the other werewolves. I think I heard about this job as their battlefield that no other werewolves can do. Maybe the agents made them think that way. Well, that¡¯s not wrong though.


    The man talked to the three werewolves, and one of the werewolves then turned into a gray wolf and get the man to ride him. As for the other two, they hide their wolf ears with their human transformation.


    Then, the four people left to look for the enemy¡¯s main base. I hope they can find it. I have told them that the cult might realize that they are facing aan Aura user, so they might increase their security. It will be bad if the cult found them spying. But all I can do is to believe in them.


    ¡°Alright, I will leave to the capital. All of you should rest for now. Or maybe you cane to the capital to rest?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Master, it¡¯s best for us to rest here. If there are too many of us entering the portal, you will spend more mana instead. And we¡¯re all exhausted. We will just be burdens if we go. Once you¡¯re done, you can bring us back to the capital. Open a portal to the Blobby I have. If you don¡¯te by tomorrow morning, we will return to the capital on foot,¡± Jewel said.


    Seems like everyone agrees to do that. Except for Celestine and some expert level mages from Consenza. They are worried about what happen to their country.


    I opened a portal directly to where Albert is. I can see Ka, Julia, and some other people are fighting mohawks. Seems like there were still many of them who managed to enter the capital from other ces.


    I see Candy is protecting Albert, Marie, their children, Lynn, and old man Henry on her own. But there are more enemies than she can take as a small Fire Ball pass through Candy¡¯s defense and slightly burns Albert¡¯s arm.


    ¡°I¡¯m okay! Don¡¯t worry about me!¡± Albert shouted. He still doesn¡¯t notice that I have opened a portal.


    I need to be quick. Seems like the fight here is too much even after we stopped so many enemies. Seeing that Ang is not here, she must be busy with the enemies outside.


    As I was running toward Albert¡¯s location, I see something unexpected. Multiple Ice Spears are flying above Albert¡¯s head. But they were not magic that Albert casted. It¡¯s from someone else there. They are from the girl that Marie is holding. One of the twins, Lana.


    ¡°Don¡¯t hurt my father!¡±


    Lana, the girl who was born special. She was almost died while she was still in the womb of her mother. But I helped her to be born safely thanks to the knowledge from the future.


    Unlike other twins, like the twinmentators who were born normal, she was different. After a hard work from her mother and her aunt who cultivated together for a long time, she was finally born with natural inborn aptitude of an ice mage. She can use ice magic since she was born.


    And now that she has grown a little, although she¡¯s still a child nheless, she is protecting her father who got hurt by the enemy.


    She created multiple Ice Spears in the air, and they were all shot toward not just the one who harmed her father. But also all the enemies there. Not just the mohawks, but also some cult members who were in hiding in the capital for a long time.


    As none of them expected that a girl who is still so young to be able to use magic, none of them prepared to get hit by her attack. And Lana¡¯s Ice Spears pierced all of the enemies precisely.


    ¡°...Not only she was born with natural aptitude with ice element, she has good magic control as well. She could be a challenge for Ang in the future in bing the continent¡¯s strongest mage,¡± I said.


    After attacking all the enemies, Lana is visibly tired and went to sleep in her mother¡¯s embrace. But maybe because she is still too inexperienced, all the enemies are still alive. But that¡¯s no problem for Candy and the others there since the enemies have been wounded badly thanks to Lana.


    ¡°Alright, go protect the kings!¡± I ordered the people who came with me. They were all still stupefied by what they just witnessed.


    ¡°Huh? Roy! You¡¯re here!¡± Albert shouted happily.


    ¡°If I see any enemy who is still alive, I would have kicked your ass already for calling my name out loud. How¡¯s the situation?¡± I asked.


    ¡°There were more enemies than expected. Some were hiding with the citizens, but we also have some people blending in with the citizens as well. But there are still a lot of enemies left. Ang, Shirley, and your familiar Graham, are still fighting in the Arena. There are more artificial master level mages there,¡± Albert said.


    Seems like because the reinforcement camete, theymenced the operation right after the final match is over. That¡¯s why Ang and Shirley were still there.


    As for Graham, after he finished his job in another location he was ced, he flies back here so he can heal Shirley and Ang after their battle, which should be impossible for any of them to end unharmed. But if they are still fighting, I guess Graham has somewhat healed them.


    ¡°You go to the arena. The rest of us will protect the capital and the kings,¡± Candy said after she finishes off her opponent.


    ¡°Alright. Take care!¡±


    I moved to the Arena while hearing the reports from Sonia.


    In the arena, only three people are from our side. There were supposed to be many agents in the Arena, but now that the kings have moved to the capital, those agents also followed.


    As the enemies arrived in the arena, Shirley who have just been healed by Graham after her intense battle, or so I heard, against Ang, tookmand of the agents and ordered them to protect the kings and the citizens.


    But seems like the mohawks¡¯ targets are not just the kings alone. They also targeted the finalists of the tournament. So, with just the three of them, Ang, Shirley, and Graham, they fought many artificial master level mages in the arena.


    And even though they are still fighting right now, the arena has been destroyed. It must be a fierce battle. Good thing there were no more people in the arena except for them and the enemies.


    I can see them being surrounded by mohawks. And they can only face the enemies in front of them.


    Ang and Shirley are back to back facing the enemiesing to them. While Graham is fighting those who came too close to them, and also responsible in healing the two girls.


    But now that I¡¯m here, we won¡¯t lose. Ang won¡¯t be busy protecting those two again as she will have more freedom once I¡¯m there. And the enemy won¡¯t survive.

 Chapter 552

    Chapter 552: Ang Became Even More Powerful


    Shirley and Graham haven¡¯t noticed that I have arrived. But Ang has even though she¡¯s facing the other side. Seems like her detection skill is slightly better than artificial master level mage¡¯s.


    After seeing that I have arrived, she stopped attacking and is preparing for something. The other two didn¡¯t know why Ang did that as they were panicked seeing that a lightning element artificial master level mage is about to attack her.


    But all of a sudden, that lightning mage was stopped. It¡¯s because I shot him with Victogun filled with Blobbybullets.


    ¡°Shirley, protect Ang. Graham, Ang still has some wounds, so heal her. I will kill as much as possible while waiting for Ang¡¯s big attack!¡± I shouted.


    The two of them finally noticed that I¡¯m here and they did as I instructed. Graham ignored the attacking mohawks while believing that Shirley will protect him and Ang. As for me, I will take care of the mohawks that Shirley missed.


    There were quite a lot of mohawks in this ce. But it¡¯s not as much as the mohawks that I previously fought. Even if I¡¯m alone, I can kill them all. Though it would take time.


    But since I¡¯m not alone, there won¡¯t be any problem with time. As soon as Ang used her magic, many of the mohawks will be killed. And we can quickly return to the capital to take care of the rest.


    .....


    ¡°Roy, you can do what you did before. Killing them as swift as possible while waiting for Ang to attack. No need to care that you will be showered in blood again. I¡¯l just absorb those bloodter,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°That¡¯s my n anyway. Though I hope we won¡¯t get hit by Ang¡¯s stray attack,¡± I replied.


    I don¡¯t know why Ang needs time to do it. It may be because the magic she will use is powerful. Or that she¡¯s out of mana and need time to recover slightly.


    What I do know is that this might be her strongest magic. And if I¡¯m not careful, I might get hit.


    Until she casted her magic, I need to see carefully with my Divine Vision of the change in the surrounding. I know that Ang is good with her control that she would never hit me. But I still need to be careful at least.


    Graham and Shirley looked at me in awe for killing so many artificial master level mages so quickly. I have improved so much that my attack can now piece through their magic shield. Although their Earth Wall is still too much for me, protection of other elements are not a problem.


    But Graham and Shirley are both very good. Even though they are watching me, they can still focus on their task. And they were not afraid of me unlike the soldiers.


    For this fight, I used dual Victokatanas on both hands. This way, I can hit more enemies at once. And I should be able to kill much more than before at a faster rate.


    And I have also improved the Ostrich¡¯s Footwork so much that they can¡¯t be called as Ostrich¡¯s Footwork anymore. It is now something that I personally use and only I can do. Even better than any ostriches. Let¡¯s call it Roy¡¯s footwork for now.


    With my footwork technique and the swiftness of my attack after fighting so many mohawks, I kill and kill more of them. But there are still many of them.


    And they who noticed that I¡¯m an Aura user keep their distance. So, I also need to attack them using my long range attack. But that will take more time, so I keep moving and get closer to any of the mohawk and kill them one by one instead of focusing those who are too far.


    Meanwhile, Shirley was also fighting the mohawks. She noticed that the enemies now focused more on me than Ang, so she targeted those who are too far for me. But she won¡¯t do it for much longer.


    Why? Because I can tell that Ang is ready to move.


    Ang who has been silent for a while, is fully focused on something. And thanks to Graham who keeps healing her, she no longer has any visible injuries anymore. At least from what I can see.


    And although it was unnecessary, she¡¯s still making a gesture with her hands while performing her magic. With her left hand raised to right in front of her eyes.


    And as she did that gesture, the earth raised. It¡¯s a huge amount of Earth Spikes protruding from the ground. And the numbers of the spikes are as much as the number of the enemies.


    That¡¯s right, each Earth Spikes are focused on one artificial master level mage. Though some of the mohawks noticed that there¡¯s a trace of magic on the ground before Ang¡¯s magic fully activated, they could dodge or block it before it could kill them.


    Some flies into the sky to dodge Ang¡¯s magic. They must be feeling lucky to be able to dodge it. It¡¯s because Ang¡¯s magic is too fast and precise. Most of those who dodged it are earth mages. Either they are artificial master level mages, or their earth element reached expert level. I don¡¯t think those who are advanced level earth mages or lower can dodge or block Ang¡¯s magic.


    But Ang¡¯s magic is not over yet. This time, her right hand moved.


    She moved her right hand up in the air, and then she pressed her left hand which is still in front of her eyes. And that¡¯s simr to her next magic.


    From the sky, multiple Ice Spears were created. There are as many of them as the mohawks who dodged or blocked her Earth Spikes. That¡¯s a really amazing control of her magic. And her concentration is so great. If only she could concentrate this hard in other areas, she would be more amazing. But just focusing on magic and battle for her is enough.


    Each of Ang¡¯s Ice Spears pierced the rest of the enemies. No one was spared. All of the mohawks got hit and died, while she also managed to make sure that we won¡¯t get hit by her attack.


    ...If she is this strong, then we might need to give her a partner. Someone who can keep up with her and protect her while she¡¯s preparing huge magic.


    Though for her, I don¡¯t doubt that she can do anything on her own. She can prepare her magic while being protected by magic barrier that she created herself. Though she must have spend a lot of mana during the fight against Shirley. Just how intense was their fight?


    Although I said that I¡¯m not interested in watching the match, there¡¯s no way that I won¡¯t be curious, right? For Shirley to injure Ang and make her spend so much mana. It must be an amazing fight.


    ¡°Good job, Ang. Seems like you have grown much stronger than even when I brought you to fight the monsters,¡± I said to Ang.


    Back when I was fighting the dragon, she was busy with the other monsters. And then, she alone finished the gigantic tortoise as she blew it to the sky. But now, it seems like she is much stronger than that time. Even though it was just a few days since then.


    ¡°You too, Roy. If you¡¯re not protecting us, you would be able to kill all of them alone. You have became much stronger and faster. I can¡¯t wait until I have the chance to fight you again,¡± Ang said.


    And of course she doesn¡¯t forget to challenge me again.


    Let¡¯s ignore her challenge for now. We can fight as much as she wants once the cult is destroyed.


    ¡°You too, Shirley. Although I didn¡¯t get to watch your fight, I can tell how intense your match was from both your conditions. If you¡¯re tired, I can bring you somewhere safe,¡± I said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll pass. Although I¡¯m tired, I can still fight. And the enemy won¡¯t let us rest peacefully anyway,¡± Shirley said. And Ang agrees with her.


    ¡°What about you?¡± I asked Graham.


    ¡°How¡¯s the other angels and the fight on their side?¡± he asked back.


    ¡°It¡¯s over. We won. There are no casualties among the angels. Only the fight here remains,¡± I replied.


    ¡°Is that so? That¡¯s good. I¡¯m tired, but I can¡¯t let my master waste his mana to send me away. I¡¯ll fly on my own to where humans¡¯ kings are after resting here for a bit,¡± Graham said.


    He has been fighting all the time after knowing his sister was used as an experiment by the cult. And now that the battle is near the end, he seems exhausted already. I won¡¯t force him to fight anymore. He can take a rest. And guarding Albert and the others is the best choice for him right now.


    ¡°Then you do that. Let¡¯s go!¡±


    Ang, Shirley, and I fly toward the capital. But just as I take a step in the air, both Shirley and Ang grabbed my arms and let me tag along with them.


    I guess it¡¯s their way to tell me to take it easy even if it¡¯s just for a while. Well, I¡¯ll take that offer.

 Chapter 553

    Chapter 553: Victory in Consenza


    As soon as we reached the capital, we can see that there are battle everywhere. Lots of buildings were destroyed. But since most of the citizens are in a safe ce, there are onlybatants here.


    The mohawks are easy to distinguish. But there are some other cult members disguising themselves as the civilians and hiding. I¡¯ll take care of them, I guess.


    Although the civilians should be in a safe location, there are some on the street. They are stupid for not following their Empress¡¯ order. Though it could be that they are being influenced by the cult members who were blending in with the civilians. How stupid.


    It will be bad if somehow, someone killed the civilians without them knowing that they are not enemies. I guess that will be my job.


    It¡¯s even worse that the hunters who knows nothing are helping. I won¡¯t know if I will kill the cult members or ordinary hunters who were seriously thinking of being helpful.


    They should have been informed to wear something purple so I can distinguish them. Just like the soldiers and guards of Consenza. That way, there won¡¯t be any pointless friendly fire.


    I thought if it¡¯s udia, she should have informed the Hunter Guild about it. Wearing something distinguishable like purple bandana, which is a rare color, we can tell if they are enemies or not.


    .....


    ¡°Shirley, have the guild been informed about purple cloth? There seem to be many hunters fighting as well,¡± I asked Shirley who is carrying me in the air together with Ang.


    ¡°What? udia should have told the guild about it! I was there when we were discussing about the iing battle. And the guild master here was attending as well!¡± Shirley said.


    ¡°Hmm? But there are many hunters outside without wearing purples. Wait, there are some who wears purples. I guess those who don¡¯t wear it are enemies. They are pretending to be helpful. Ang, Shirley, drop me here. Ang, you kill as many mohawks as possible. As for non-mohawks, we will take care of themter. Shirley, you know what to do,¡± I gave the order.


    For Shirley, I don¡¯t know what order to give her. But at least she¡¯s smart enough to take the initiative. Either she will kill the cult members, or evacuate the civilians who werete in escaping, she knows what to do.


    The two girls let go of my hands and let me free fall to the ground. And then, they split up to different directions. Ang goes to where the battle seems to be the most intense, while Shirley goes to where the civilians seems to be hiding. I guess she really knows what to do.


    As for me, I will take care of the hidden enemies. With my Divine Vision, no one can hide from me. Unless the ce they¡¯re hiding is deep inside a dungeon that is newly discovered. Though I doubt there¡¯s a dungeon in this ce.


    I should also check the underground sewerter. There might be more enemies hiding there.


    And during the whole time, I will keep wearing Victoriarmor to cover my appearance. I don¡¯t know if I would be able to kill all the cult members here.


    At least until a few days after this war is over, I need to hide my appearance. Though I don¡¯t think anyone will notice who I am after I remove the armor. So, I can still walk on public without the armor.


    But for now, it¡¯s time to kill some cult members. There are a lot of them. But none of them are as strong as the enemies I constantly fought thest few days. They are nothing to me.


    Even if they called themselves as hunters who are helping the civilians, I won¡¯t care. They should have been informed to wear purple. But they don¡¯t. It¡¯s that simple.


    Because it¡¯s an emergency, they should have been informed. Like how I got informed back when there were orcs attacking Melk. Through their guild cards. Even if they are hunters from another country, they should receive the emergency signal.


    Though most of the cult members were confused why I noticed. Like why did they have to shout out loud that they got found out every time I asked them that they are the enemy? How stupid.


    But thanks to their stupidity, I never miss. I didn¡¯t kill any civilians or the kind hunters at all.


    On Ang¡¯s side, although she was tired, no one can match her. The enemies she¡¯s facing are not as much as the enemies in the destroyed arena. It was no problem for her at all.


    On Shirley¡¯s side, she protected the civilians and calm them down. udia was with her as well. No wonder I didn¡¯t see her with Lynn. She was with the civilians trying to protect them from the inside. And now, thanks to Shirley, they could find the enemies blending in with the civilians.


    I also see Ka in another location. She¡¯s helping the civilians in another evacuation center. Even though she was alone helping the others, she knows what to do and everyone followed her. I guess they know how smart and strong she is from the tournament. That¡¯s why they willingly followed her instructions.


    Well, not all of them. Some are hunters who were too afraid to fight and risk their lives. And they don¡¯t want to let a girl to be the one in charge. Talk about stupid pride. Ka took care of them and now they were afraid to disobey her. And just like that, the ce she¡¯s at is safe.


    I keep killing more enemies as I see my friends are doing their best. Celestine, Candy, Wendy, Julia, and the others, are split up and doing what they can to eliminate the enemies and protect the civilians.


    Finally, I can¡¯t see any more enemies. We have protected the kings and the people. The battle is finally over.


    Even if there are still some cult members in hiding, it will be fine as long as I hide my appearance. And they also won¡¯t dare to think that they can kill the kings by themselves.


    Not managed to kill all of them is not an ideal result. But this is good enough.


    Of course it¡¯s best if the cult doesn¡¯t know that we have me, an Aura user, fighting them. But it¡¯s toote for that. Though if what Iris said is true, it won¡¯t be known for a little longer.


    ¡°Oy, Lynn. It¡¯s done,¡± I said to Lynn after I returned to where the kings are gathering.


    ¡°Oy? You have been more and more rude toward an Empress. And aren¡¯t you usually spoke to Albert about finishing our mission?¡± Lynn asked.


    ¡°I talked to you because you¡¯re the Empress of this empire. If you don¡¯t announce our victory fast, the people will still think that we¡¯re still at war. I have told Sonia to tell everyone that the battle is over. But you need to be the one to tell the civilians,¡± I said.


    Not only I told Sonia to report the others, I also told her to remind everyone to not call me by my name when I wore Victoriarmor. Previously, it was safe because no one was around. But now, we don¡¯t know if the enemy is nearby or not.


    As long as they don¡¯t know my appearance and name, it should be impossible for them to track me to Cassau.


    Well, if it¡¯s the name, there should be a lot who have simr name to me since it¡¯s actually amon name. But if they deducted about Roy who is getting along well with Ang, Ka, and the others who fought in the tournament as well, they will know which Roy is mentioned. That¡¯s why it¡¯s best for them to not call my name.


    ¡°Good job, Roy. It must have been tough even for you who have the best stamina to keep being vignt and fighting for weeks. What will you do now?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°I¡¯ll take a rest for now. After that, I will be treasure hunting. The cult will know soon that there¡¯s an Aura user, and they might send their master level mage to assassinate me. I need something to make me stronger. Just training is not enough. I hope I can find some powerful weapons that were used by Aura users in the ancient days,¡± I said.


    ¡°I see. I will tell some people to look for anything rted to it as well. What kind of weapon you want? I guess for you anything is fine. You have Victoria after all,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Yeah. If you find anything, tell me immediately. Just rumors, myths, or legends are fine. I¡¯ll go back to Cassau now. I¡¯ll bring Lina, Sophie, and the children home as well. What about your children?¡±


    ¡°I want to stay with them for a little longer. Have a good rest,¡± Albert said.


    After that, I left and look for Sophie, Lina, and the children. They are in one of the evacuation center. And as soon as they see me, Daniel hurriedly run toward me and gives me a big hug. Seems like it was too scary for him.


    In an empty ce, I opened a portal and bring them back home to Cassau. As for Ka and the others, they will help around in the capital for a while longer. And for Jewel and the others, I¡¯ll take them home after I rested enough.


    Now, let me enjoy the rest I deserve. I am tired.

 Chapter 554

    Chapter 554: The Children Have Grown


    I slept the whole day after that. And when I woke up, it¡¯s already noon.


    I look outside to see that everything changed. That¡¯s when I realized that I¡¯m not in Consenza anymore. I¡¯m back home in Cassau. And no one here knows that there was a war happening in Consenza. Though I can see a huge screen in the square. It must have shown the final match between Ang and Shirley. And I can see so many people are talking. Most likely about the final.


    Though after the final is over, the broadcast was stopped because there¡¯s a war. That¡¯s why no one here talked about it.


    My body is stiff after sleeping. I guess I overexert my body too much. I have fought the enemies for days, with only little rest. Although I had a good rest sleeping on Victoria who turned herself as a bed, I couldn¡¯t fully recover since it¡¯s still in the middle of the battle.


    But now, because I know the battle is over, I slept well. Though I still feel a little tired. Maybe I¡¯ll get another rest before I start my journey in finding magical weapons.


    But before that, I still have many things to do.


    I need to travel all over the ce to transport multiple people. From Jewel and the others who were still outside, unless they have returned back to the capital since she said she will move this morning, and transport Albert and old man Henry to their home. But I guess that¡¯s forter.


    .....


    There¡¯s a new king in Arturo. King Fabio. And I will probably get him to Consenza along with Harold and some others so they can greet the other kings.


    This battle is over, but the cult still exist. And I need to be a taxi. At least that¡¯s what Victoria calls me when I transport people to another location.


    I will be busy, though I don¡¯t think I will be as busy as before since I don¡¯t have to fight for a while. It¡¯s just me transporting people.


    Well, now that I¡¯m awake, I¡¯ll ask Sonia where should I go first.


    After I called her, it took a few seconds until she appears in front of me. I guess she¡¯s busy.


    ¡°What is it?¡± Sonia asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m up now. Ask the others what should I do. Also, where is Jewel and the others at the moment?¡± I asked.


    ¡°They will soon reach the capital of Consenza. I don¡¯t think you will need to transport them with your portal anymore. I¡¯ll ask Albert what your job will be. Though since you will just be transporting people, it should be fine for you to do itter. If that¡¯s all, I will be leaving. I¡¯ll return back to give you a job from Albert or the others,¡± Sonia said.


    She has been extremely busy flying and teleporting all over the ce. She¡¯s the busiest ghost in the world.


    When I ask if it was tiring for her to go all over the ce, she said that she wasn¡¯t tired at all. After all, she has been stuck in this house in Cassau for over a thousand years. And only when she met me that she can move to another ce. Well, just the ce where the soil from thisnd is spread.


    And after she trained in Monsters World, she gained ability to move further than where we put the soil from thisnd is. And she could even grab and lift small object.


    And now, with a few grains of sand that she carries every day, she can go anywhere she wants. Though she¡¯s still willing to busy herself up with a job as a messenger.


    And five minutester, Sonia returns.


    ¡°...I thought you just said that it¡¯s fine to do itter. Howe you return so soon?¡± I asked.


    ¡°It¡¯s best if we hurry it up. That¡¯s what Toni said.¡±


    Toni, huh? The one who helped Harold and Fabio to retrieve their kingdom back from the cult from behind the scene. With how much of a genius he is, I guess it¡¯s natural for not only Sonia, but other kings to follow his instructions.


    He¡¯s a very capable man. That¡¯s what I heard from the others at least since I¡¯m not directly involved in their fight to regain their kingdom. But if all the kings said that, that means he¡¯s just that capable.


    The only reason I didn¡¯t hear his name in my past life must be because Arturo Kingdom has fallen so much at that time. It was great that we could have someone as capable as him on our side this time.


    ¡°Where should I go first?¡± I asked Sonia.


    ¡°You should go to Arturo first to get Fabio and the others. And then, bring them to Consenza. The kings will have a meeting on what to do next,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°In Consenza? What about that city in the center of the continent? Wasn¡¯t that ce used to be where they have a meeting?¡± I asked.


    ¡°After Harold and the others took over that city from the cult, the right of that territory belong to Arturo. That ce couldn¡¯t be called neutral anymore. That¡¯s why now that other than those from Arturo, the rest of the kings are in Consenza. It¡¯s best to gather there,¡± Sonia replied.


    ¡°Tell them to get ready. I¡¯ll go get Victoria. She¡¯s ying with the children right now,¡± I said as I rose from the Blobbybed.


    Victoria is ying with Daniel and the others along with Sophie. Lina is with them as well. So, I left my room to greet them.


    ¡°Roy! You¡¯re up!¡±


    The one who said that was Daniel. I think he has grown a lot ever since I picked him up. And for some reason, he has a book about strategy in his hand. Where did he get that book from?


    ¡°Daniel got that book from Albert. He said that he wants to be a smart man like Toni and help a lot of people,¡± Sophie said.


    ¡°Wait, so am I the only one who doesn¡¯t know Toni¡¯s achievements at all?¡±


    ¡°Seems that way. Even Daniel was informed,¡± Victoria said.


    Well, at least that mean Daniel prefer to fight behind the scene than fighting the enemies directly. I should be d for his decision.


    ¡°By the way, you should hear about Hannah¡¯s achievement. She has now reached advanced level and she even defeated an expert level mage who was blending in with the civilians in the evacuation center!¡± Victoria said proudly.


    Sigh... it¡¯s toote for one of the children. Wait, let¡¯s make it two.


    Seems like it¡¯s impossible to destroy the cult so fast that the children won¡¯t have any chance to be involved in our war. Not only Hannah has reached advanced level and killed an enemy, even the very young Lana almost killed multiple enemies.


    It¡¯s just impossible to destroy the enemies too soon. And Hannah herself seems to be very proud. She¡¯s with her mother, Penny, right now. Talking about something.


    What about Penny? What does she feels when she sees her daughter killing an enemy? Scared? Or proud?


    At least right now, she seems happy chatting with her daughter.


    Destroying the cult so the children can grow up in a peaceful world is something that I wish could happen. But it has been a few years since I returned back in time, and even though we have killed so many cult members, there¡¯s no sign of the Evil God at all.


    Maybe it¡¯s just me thinking too much. The children would all grow up in the future and can make a decision by themselves. Even Daniel has decided to be smarter. Whether they would fight the cult or not is their own choice. And I can only support their decisions.


    Hmm... but I¡¯m still afraid to have children of my own. Maybe I¡¯ll wait a little longer for that.


    After talking for a bit, I opened a portal to Arturo. This time, there¡¯s no need to wear Victoriarmor at all. I greeted Fabio, Toni, Harold, Luna, and some other people who were right in front of the portal. They were all prepared to go. Though one person seem to be missing.


    ¡°Where¡¯s Kron?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well... during the cleanup of the cult members in the cult, we discovered a new dungeon. And now that the cleanup is over, Kron happily entered the dungeon by himself trying to conquer it. He said that we don¡¯t really need him anymore now that the battle is over. And he will return to Cassau once he¡¯s done with doing what he wants,¡± Fabio replied.


    ...That guy is too free. While I¡¯m here thinking of the future, that guy just do whatever he wants.


    Maybe I should learn something from him and be a little more rxed.


    ¡°Is mom there already?¡± Luna asked me.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. They seem to be returning from the battlefield this morning, so she should be there anytime soon,¡± I replied.


    ¡°Wait, you mean you left my wife on the battlefield as you return home on your own? Is that how you treat a queen?¡± Haroldined.


    ¡°Shut up! I¡¯m tired, okay? And now, I will opening portals all over the continent. I should have received some payment from transporting you guys. Let¡¯s just leave already!¡±


    I opened a portal from Arturo, to Albert¡¯s location in Consenza. The kings then will be busy with a meeting and the aftermath of the war. While I return the soldiers back to their country.


    Next is the Evil God, Archbishop, and the master level mages. What a pain...

 Chapter 555

    Chapter 555: Preparation for Treasure Hunting


    The aftermath of the battle is being discussed seriously by the kings. And it seems that Toni shows his ability well in the discussion. Harold must be d that the future of his kingdom is safe with his sons taking charge.


    As for Harold¡¯s other children, I heard that those who were influenced by the cult so much were punished. As for those who were not influenced much, Harold treat them differently. Since Fabio has been coronated as the king, there shouldn¡¯t be any more fight for the throne. So, they are either given the appropriate positions, or freed from the shackles of royalty as they will be free to do what they want.


    But is Harold seriously do that? I don¡¯t think that¡¯s the case.


    Even if they are free to do what they want, with the cult still atrge, Harold shouldn¡¯t take the chance of letting his children to be entangled with the cult anymore. So, I guess they are still being watched.


    I have been moving around with portals all over the ce ever since I woke up. From returning the soldiers from other country back to their home, retrieving the remaining of the lost soldiers, and man other jobs.


    And now, I was even told to be on standby along with the kings in the same room so they can ask me for anything if there¡¯s something they want from me, or another ce. But I didn¡¯t really listen to their discussion.


    Other than me, everyone else is there as well. Ka, Ang, Jewel, Shirley, Celestine, Veronica, Carmen, Julia, Candy, Wendy, agents from all countries, Shelia and the werewolves, Graham and the angels, and even Arin and the vampires. It¡¯s such a crowded discussion.


    .....


    Some actually listened to the discussion, while some, like me, just don¡¯t care. Though I make sure the rowdy bunch who were being noisy with something unrted to the discussion to stay in one ce. I get the wind mages to make sure their voice will be blocked and won¡¯t disturb the real discussion..


    I can do that as well since I can just block the air using magic. But there are more wind mages here, so it will be their job. But since it¡¯s wind magic, the wind will keep on blowing thanks to it. And it keeps the room to be breezy as well, which is good. And that makes me sleepy from the breeze.


    As I was about to enter slumber, something invisible touched me to wake me up. It¡¯s Spot. In his small and camouged form. Only the expert level mages here noticed. Including Fabio. The only expert level mage among the kings.


    ¡°Since all the main characters are here, including Spot, I¡¯d like to give my gratitude to everyone here. Thanks to everyone, we could retrieve our kingdom back from the cult. Thank you very much,¡± Fabio said as the king.


    He hadn¡¯t said any gratitude even though it has been a while since the discussion started. But once Spot arrives, he said his gratitude. Well, it¡¯s true that Spot helped a lot in not just retrieving Arturo Kingdom. But also in the battle against the mohawks. He has done extremely well.


    Fabio waited until everyone, including Spot to arrive here to say that. And everyone from Arturo, including some soldiers and even Luna, bowed their head down to show their sincerity.


    Though one person is not here. Kron is just enjoying his time exploring dungeon. Even if he has now be good friend with Fabio, he¡¯s still a hunter through and through.


    After that, they returned to their original discussion. About what to do with the cult after this, and managing their country.


    Other than discussing about what to do with the cult, they also started talking about what I requested. About anything rted to magical weapons that could help me get stronger. Something that will help me stand my ground against master level mages.


    ¡°Tatrama Kingdom will send some agents to investigate anything rted to those weapons. And we will allow Roy to enter our treasury and will dly let him take any weapons he could find,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Consenza Empire will do the same,¡± Lynn said.


    ¡°And so will Varadis Kingdom,¡± old man Henry said.


    ¡°We from Arturo Kingdom, might have some treasures from our treasury taken by the cult, but there are still some stuffs worth checking. We will Allow Roy to enter our treasury as well,¡± Fabio said.


    ...YAHOOOOO! Treasures!


    ¡°With the condition that someone follow him along. We can¡¯t let him take everything inside,¡± Albert continued. And all the four kings nodded.


    ¡°You don¡¯t trust me that much, huh!?¡± I shouted directly to the faces of the kings.


    ¡°It¡¯s you we¡¯re talking about. And we also didn¡¯t check the treasury every time. You must have grabbed a thing or two from there once in a while, right? When we¡¯re not looking,¡± Albert said.


    ...That¡¯s true. Though I won¡¯t admit it.


    I have checked the treasure rooms of all four kingdoms. At least the capital, and the pces or the castle the kings lived in. I haven¡¯t checked the nobles around there. There might be someone who is interested in collecting weapons.


    And in the treasury, I have seen some weapons. Most of them are normal weapons. I can make them stronger with my Aura, but using Victoria is better. Even Reizpear is much better since it can repair itself if I pour some magic in it.


    Though maybe there are some weapons I missed. Or something that is hidden really well by the royalties.


    ¡°Well, Roy, you also said that you¡¯re going to move by yourself to seek for those weapons, right? Who will you take with?¡± old man Henry asked.


    ¡°Since the others need to improve themselves so they can fight against stronger opponents, I probably move alone with the monsters. Unless there¡¯s a fight with powerful opponents. If that¡¯s the case, then I will just contact them and tell them to prepare for a fight,¡± I replied.


    Since the weapons I need will be tested directly, I will have to be the one to check on those weapons. Maybe there¡¯s also some magic weapons suited for air mage. But if that¡¯s the case, I might just give it to Sara instead of using it myself. She¡¯s a better air mage than I am now. I think it won¡¯t be long until she reached expert level.


    And the group I¡¯m talking about is actually the perfect choice for the mission.


    Victoria is my familiar. And she used to be a human who was an Aura user. If there¡¯s a weapon for Aura user, her advise will be important.


    Not just her, Sonia was also a human and an Aura user in the past. Though she might be called by Albert or the others often, so I can¡¯t count on her too much.


    After that, there¡¯s Spot who is currently wrapping his body around my waist. He no longer camouged himself since Fabio has revealed his position when he arrived. And Spot used to be a familiar to an Aura user. He should be a bit familiar to the weapons that were used by Aura users in the past.


    Other than them, I can summon Shelia if there¡¯s a battle, and Graham if I need healing. I think I have the perfect team already.


    ¡°Just Roy and his summoned monsters are enough for him to be called a cheat. Even if he¡¯s not an Aura user and just a mage, his monsters are powerful enough to do everything by themselves. I think that¡¯s a good team you have,¡± Fabio said.


    ¡°I know. And I have eaten the Pear-y Fruit as well, so once I increase the level of my summoning element, I should be able to make a contract with another familiar. Thanks to this war, Shelia, Graham, and Victoria whom I used as weapons, have killed so many powerful enemies. It won¡¯t be long until I can reach expert level in summoning and make another contract with a monster. This journey is also to look for another monster,¡± I said.


    ¡°What about Arin? She¡¯s a powerful Vampire. Why don¡¯t you pick her as your next familiar?¡± Albert asked.


    I nced at Arin who heard that question as well. She just smiled at me after she noticed my nce.


    ¡°She is powerful indeed. But I don¡¯t think we need to make a contract. Just like Spot and Andro. She¡¯s a monster that we can negotiate with,¡± I said.


    And as long as I¡¯m alive, and my blood is still running in my vein, there¡¯s no way the vampires who have became addicted to my blood to leave and let go of the chance to drink my blood. Though they can only receive my blood if they participate in a fight.


    ¡°Roy has full control of us vampires. Even without making any contract, there¡¯s no problem at all in calling him our master,¡± Arin added.


    Just how addictive is my blood?


    Anyway, I have my own path to take before we face the cult again in the future. To search for weapons, and to wait for information by the werewolves who were tracking the enemies.


    I think it will be hard even with their sense of smell to search for the cult¡¯s main base. But I heard from Candy that the agent who went with the three werewolves were good at tracking and investigating. I¡¯ll just put my trust in them and wait.


    Maybe I can find clues during my journey as well. Well, that¡¯s only if I¡¯m lucky. Or unlucky.

 Chapter 556

    Chapter 556: Report of Failure


    After another day of resting, I¡¯m ready to leave. Of course this time, I will keep returning home. At least when I need to sleep. I¡¯ll just leave a Blobby in the ce where I stopped at to mark the ce, and return home with portal.


    I feel like my fighting skills have reached bottleneck. I don¡¯t think I can grow stronger just by training new techniques anymore. That¡¯s the main reason why I need to look for powerful weapons.


    Well, maybe the real reason is because I have never fought someone seriously. And most of the time, the enemies died in one hit after all.


    Both Victoria and Sonia said that it¡¯s natural for Aura users to reach bottleneck. When their martial skills and their Aura won¡¯t grow much anymore. But that can be taken care of once they experienced a difficult battle. But that battle is a serious battle between Aura users. They would fight each other seriously so they can get stronger. And most of the time, one side would even die.


    But that¡¯s impossible for me. I¡¯m the only Aura user left that exist in this world after all. The Evil God has killed every single one of them, and the existence of Aura users were not written in history. Only some children stories have something about Aura users. That¡¯s why no one think that they can be an Aura user.


    Even if I fight with Shelia, Graham, or Arin, I don¡¯t think I would be able to get stronger. I need to fight Aura user, but they are no longer exist except for me. That¡¯s why the only thing I can do left is to find powerful weapon.


    Even the Evil God was sealed by a magical artifact. Maybe there¡¯s something that can kill him as well.


    .....


    After the discussion yesterday, I entered each kingdom¡¯s treasury. I looked for anything that look like weapon, and store them in the warehouse in Cassau.


    There were many weapons that I found from their treasure rooms. From swords, long swords, spears, axe, hammer, knives, daggers, bows and arrows, and many other weapons.


    Most of them were just look expensive. They were just decorative weapons. Though some could be useful, I don¡¯t think they are enough for me to kill the Evil God. I need to find something more powerful.


    Though, does such thing exist? If it does, the Aura users of the past should be able to kill the Evil God and they won¡¯t be extinct, right?


    Maybe if there¡¯s something left behind by the Aura users from even further distance to the past, I might be able to kill the Evil God. Only if those weapons are powerful.


    But maybe there¡¯s something I could learn from Aura users of Victoria¡¯s era. For example, something like a manual or instructions to learn Aura, or something that will help me detect if someone has the talent to use Aura and be an Aura users or not. I mean, if I can¡¯t defeat the Evil God on my own, I can just raise my own army of Aura users and get them to defeat the Evil God.


    I have given up on that when I thought that I might end up killing potential Aura users by performing the tricks that Victoria told me in the past. Pouring a bit of my Aura into someone to see if they can learn Aura or not. But if I found something like a manual to do so, I can really build my own army of Aura users in the future.


    That¡¯s why, our first destination is the ce where Victoria and Sonia learned under their master to be Aura users a thousand years ago. Their master was someone who built a dojo where kids can learn to be an Aura users. I might be able to learn something if I go there.


    ¡°So, where did you learn how to manifest your Aura?¡± I asked Victoria and Sonia as we were in the sky riding on the back of our amazing serpent, Spot.


    I just left my house. And the four of us are in the sky trying to figure out where we should go. That¡¯s where we decide that going to where Victoria and Sonia trained in the past is our priority right now.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. I don¡¯t remember,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°How could you not remember where it was!? You trained there for years!¡± Soniained.


    ¡°Yeah, but I spent a thousand years in Monsters World as a ck Slime. What about you? You were in this world ever since you died, right? And you died in your own house. Though it has became our house now,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°I still remember where it is. Though I can¡¯t tell since it has been a thousand years, and thendscape has totally changed. Even this ce which was originally was mynd, is now a big city. But if we move on foot, I can probably remember where it was,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Wait, so after we¡¯re in the sky, you¡¯re going to tell me that we need to walk?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, running is fine. I think I will remember it since it¡¯s just a straight path from the dojo to my home,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Then we can just fly in a straight line, right? We don¡¯t need to move on foot,¡± I said.


    ¡°You might be right, but if we move too fast, I might forget the exact location. Please just run instead so I can remember,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Sigh... and how long do we need to walk?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Around two weeks,¡± Sonia replied.


    Well, it will take too long if we walk for two weeks. It¡¯s better to fly as expected.


    ¡°So, two weeks with the running speed of an Aura user. Let¡¯s go back home first. I¡¯ll show you how important math is,¡± Victoria said.


    In the end, we waited until Victoria finished calcting the distance and the estimate position of where her old dojo was previously. I hope in the ce we¡¯re going, there¡¯s a ghost there. The ghost of their old master. Though that¡¯s just wishful thinking.


    ....


    In the cult¡¯s main base. The masked Archbishop is facing one of the cult member. The man in front of him was the one who was tasked with the duty of assassinating the kings.


    ¡°So, not only you failed your task. There were no survivors, the Professor is missing, and Arturo Kingdom was taken by the king who was supposed to be dead. Am I right so far?¡± the Archbishop asked the man.


    ¡°...Yes,¡± the man answered.


    ¡°And you still dare to ask me to give you resources so you can reach master level.¡±


    ¡°...Yes. If I had power, I could kill all the kings easily!¡± the man shouted.


    But right after he said that, an arm flies in the air. It¡¯s the arm of the man who failed his task. The Archbishop used his wind magic to cut off his arm.


    ¡°AAAAH!¡±


    ¡°If we have enough master level mages, I won¡¯t even think of sending you all. Just one master level mage and everything is done. You think just because you reached master level, you can do anything you want? That¡¯s wrong. Once you reached master level, you will have to do something important. Killing the kings is just a small taskpared to what the mages who have reached master level are doing right now. Is that your excuse?¡±


    The Archbishop gives the man pressure. It¡¯s the power of a master level mage. And the man who was just an expert level mage can¡¯t endure it for long as he kneeled down in an instant. Ignoring the pain from missing his arm.


    And finally, he remembers something. One artificial master level mage, returned back to him and give the report of something that was supposed to be the highest priority. And he decided to tell it to the Archbishop.


    ¡°T-there¡¯s a report of an Aura user fighting. That must be why we fail even after bringing all the artificial mages to the battle,¡± the man said.


    The Archbishop was about to say something, but suddenly, he feels as if he¡¯s being pushed down by some sort of pressure.


    It came from the door that the Archbishop always protected. The Evil God who was inside the door the whole time is reacting to the word Aura user.


    ¡°You knew that there¡¯s an Aura user but you didn¡¯t return to report me immediately? How much guts do you need to do that?¡± the Evil God asked.


    ¡°I-I-I-I¡¯m sorry!¡± the man put his head to the ground and begged for mercy.


    ¡°How many? How do they look like?¡± the Evil God asked.


    ¡°I-I didn¡¯t ask. I¡¯m sorry!¡±


    ¡°You came here, ignoring the highest priority of reporting the existence of an Aura user, and think you will be safe? Die this instant!¡±


    Without using any magic, just by sheer pressure, the Evil God killed the man who was supposed to be an expert level mage. That¡¯s just how much stronger he is than the Archbishop, a master level mage.


    ¡°You, investigate it. How many of them, and how they look like. If it¡¯s really an Aura user, we need at least a master level mage to kill him. But there¡¯s no time for that. Just investigate about him. Once my seal ispletely removed, I will find him myself and kill him,¡± the Evil God said.


    The Archbishop nodded, and then he left to give the order to other cult members.


    The truth about why the master level mages are busy is because they are being used as sacrifices. The seal that stopped the Evil God needs to consume a lot of magic power so it can be unsealed. And the Evil God and the Archbishop used the master level mages that they raised and make them into sacrifices to free the Evil God.


    They think it¡¯s safe because there¡¯s no one who has reached master level in this era. But now that they know that an Aura user exist, the Evil God regretted that he used all master level mages to be the sacrifices. He should have keep some who are loyal to be his pawn.


    The cult actually doesn¡¯t have any master level mage to send. And Roy can continue his journey to find powerful weapons. At least until the cult has developed another master level mage, or the Evil God has been unsealedpletely. But it won¡¯t be anytime soon.

 Chapter 557

    Chapter 557: Finding a Clue Right Away


    ¡°Alright! I¡¯ve done the math!¡± Victoria said as she finished writing numbers on a piece of paper.


    It was about the estimation of where her old dojo is located in the past. The ce where she was trained as an Aura user was along with Sonia and some other people.


    I thought I could learn something if we go there. Whether their master have a powerful weapon, or something that could help me teach about manifesting Aura to other people. Though thetter is doubtful. After all, if such thing exist, Aura users won¡¯t go extinct. And if it exist, it must have been destroyed by the Evil God since he doesn¡¯t like Aura users.


    ¡°So, where is it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know yet. But at least I know the distance from here to there. Give me a map,¡± Victoria said.


    We¡¯re back inside our home after Victoria said that she¡¯s doing math. And when she asked for a map, Lina quickly left the dining room where we¡¯re waiting for Victoria to finish calcting, and return quickly with a map of the kingdom.


    It¡¯s a huge map and is very detailed. It starts from Cassau, and then a very detailed area outside as well. I don¡¯t think this map is something that was sold anywhere.


    .....


    ¡°It¡¯s a map I drew with the help of Elsie. But it¡¯s iplete since I haven¡¯t been to many cities. But if it¡¯s somewhere I have been to, I drew them in detail,¡± Lina said.


    ¡°...You¡¯re way too amazing, Lina. I don¡¯t think even a normal maid can do this,¡± I gave Lina apliment.


    ¡°Thank you, Master.¡±


    Even after all this time, she still enjoys beingplimented by me. Her face is blushing as she bowed her head down slightly.


    ¡°Sonia, which way is from here to the dojo?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Over there,¡± Sonia said as she pointed her finger to the direction of their dojo.


    That direction... that¡¯s the ce where Sonia always looked at when she¡¯s not doing anything. It was as if she has some sort of longing toward a ce in that direction. I guess it¡¯s because that¡¯s where she learned many things from her master in that dojo. And she missed it.


    ¡°Hmm... so, if the scale of the map is this much, and the distance is about this far going straight to this direction, the location where the dojo was is... here!¡± Victoria said.


    She drew a straight line from Cassau, and then, the pen on her hand stopped at where her dojo was supposed to be.


    Because it¡¯s a huge map of ces that Lina has gone to, it was very detailed. And we can tell where it is.


    Not only the name of the city, but also the building where the pen was stopped.


    ¡°Are you sure it¡¯s there?¡± I asked.


    ¡°At the very least, it¡¯s near this ce. Unless Sonia pointed at the wrong direction. I have calcted the speed of a casual walk of an Aura user. And if Sonia took a break at night for sleep and for meals, it should be around this ce. What do you think, Sonia?¡± Victoria asked Sonia this time.


    ¡°Well, I do feel something familiar when I¡¯m in that city. But I don¡¯t really know if it¡¯s there or not. Do you want me to fly over there for two weeks? Maybe I can be more urate,¡± Sonia asked.


    ¡°If you want to, then sure. I sure don¡¯t want to spend two weeks to a ce where I have marked with Blobbies. You can fly on your own then,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Let¡¯s just go there directly. Two weeks is too long,¡± Sonia said.


    That¡¯s decided then. I don¡¯t want to take two weeks to travel to somewhere we can go directly with my portal.


    I opened a portal to the destination. It¡¯s inside a building. A house. But I just enter the house without asking permission from the owner.


    Why? Because I¡¯m the owner of the house!


    The ce that Victoria marked in the map is my other house in the capital of Tatrama! The ce where Ang and Shirley stayed when they go to college. And the ce that Ian and Ruby are taking care of.


    Who would have expected that the house I owned is possibly the dojo where Victoria and Sonia practiced in the past. And Sonia said that this ce feels nostalgic, so it must be right.


    I haven¡¯t fully checked area around my house there with my Divine Vision. But I might need to do it fully this time. Maybe I can find something.


    As soon as I opened a portal to the living room of my other house, I was greeted by the surprised Ian and Shirley.


    ¡°What are you doing here?¡± Shirley asked. While Ian quietly leave the room and he¡¯s preparing tea for us. How calm he is.


    ¡°Well, we¡¯re trying to go to the ce that Victoria and Sonia trained to be Aura users in the past. And after some math, we think that this house used to be the dojo they were practicing at a thousand years ago. It¡¯s natural for things from a thousand years ago to disappear, but this sure is a huge coincidence for my house to be the dojo. Well, we¡¯ll see if there¡¯s anything left behind by their master. If not, we will continue our travel,¡± I said.


    This is not Shirley¡¯s house. This is my house. But this princess uses this ce for her to rx.


    Isn¡¯t she worried about rumors that she¡¯sing and going from a house which was owned by a man? I guess she¡¯s not. Not just that people here doesn¡¯t know that I¡¯m the real owner of this ce. The people involved are most likely Albert¡¯s agents as well. The one who sold me this ce. That¡¯s why she doesn¡¯t need to care about rumors and can use this ce freely to rx.


    Ian and Ruby are taking care of this ce. Ruby is outside at the moment doing some gardening.


    As for Ang who stayed here since she enters college, she¡¯s in Cassau at the moment. That¡¯s why there are only three people in the house until we arrive.


    ¡°You mean there¡¯s a secret to this mansion!?¡± Shirley asked. Seems like she¡±s getting excited for some reason.


    ¡°Either this mansion or even the capital. We won¡¯t know until we made a thorough search. Thank you, Ian,¡± I thanked Ian for the cup of tea that he served.


    In Cassau, I have the perfect maid. In the capital, I have the perfect butler. What a wonderful life I¡¯m living. Though it will be best if the cult is destroyed already.


    ¡°Alright, let¡¯s split up and see if we can find some sort of secret in this mansion,¡± I said after I finished my tea.


    ¡°I¡¯ll check from the sky,¡± Spot said as he flies in the sky.


    ¡°Then, I¡¯ll go around the mansion,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll just looking around outside the mansion and try to recall something,¡± Victoria said as she transformed into her human form and walked away.


    ¡°Alright. We¡¯ll return here for lunch and discuss what you¡¯ve found,¡± I said.


    Now, the monsters have left. And I started looking around with my Divine Vision.


    Now that my Divine Vision has improved a lot. At least much better than when we first bought this house and start looking around. I just used it once back then in this mansion, and I never used it again until now. If there¡¯s any secret, I won¡¯t miss it this time.


    At lunchtime, everyone returned. Ian prepared delicious dishes for all of us to eat together. And we also discussed of what we have found.


    ¡°Well, the huge tree outside in the garden look suspicious,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re right. Now that I have recalled something. That tree has been there since a long time ago. I remember ying around with other children near the tree. That tree is standing right in front of the dojo,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°I do remember that there¡¯s a tree in front of the dojo. And I never thought that it wouldst for a thousand year,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°That just makes it weirder. If a tree reached a thousand years old, it should be much bigger. Let¡¯s check it out after this,¡± I said.


    Not just the monsters, Ian, Ruby, and Shirley also tagged along to see the tree.


    The tree look just like a normal tree. And the diameter of the tree is about one meter. Which is quiterge, but notrge enough for a thousand years old tree.


    ¡°Ian, Ruby, is there anything strange about the tree?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Now that you mention it, I don¡¯t remember the leaves of the tree ever fall at all. I know because I¡¯m the one doing the gardening,¡± Ruby said.


    Hmm... the tree has roots, trunk, branches, and leaves. But I don¡¯t think this is a real tree. It¡¯s like a fake tree, but it looks so real.


    I look around the tree, but I didn¡¯t see anything strange. And when I use Divine Vision to see the inside of the tree, it looks like a normal tree. Which is strange for a thousand year old tree. It should have a lot of... circr thingies depend on how long it has been alive.


    But if it has been standing for a thousand years, and it didn¡¯t grow at all, that¡¯s weird. And I think I have found a clue to the past Aura users right away.

 Chapter 558

    Chapter 558: The King Skipped His Duty to Watch


    What to do with this tree? This is the only weird object we found that is most closely rted to the Aura users of the past. Something that has been standing for a thousand years old at least.


    Sonia has confirmed that it is the exact same tree that has been there since she was a child. As she yed around with other students of the dojo near this tree. And I believe her.


    There¡¯s no reason for her to lie. Since Sonia is alive in this world, as a monster, and if a ghost can be called as living, and since the cult will destroy the world, Sonia will disappear as well. That¡¯s why she won¡¯t lie.


    ¡°Well, I guess we need to check this tree out first. Maybe the tree itself is some sort of artifact? Let¡¯s try pouring mana into the tree,¡± I said as I touched the trunk of the tree with my hand.


    I pour my mana into the tree like how I pour mana into Reizpear to repair the broken spear. But nothing happened.


    ¡°Nothing happened. Maybe it¡¯s not even an artifact. Just some decoration,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°You think just a mere decoration can stand for a thousand years without changing? There must be some sort of secret about this tree. Victoria, Sonia, can you recall what your master said about this tree? And Spot, if you somehow know about this tree, please tell me about it.¡±


    .....


    I asked the three monsters if they know anything about the tree. And while they were thinking, Ian said that he will ask Albert if the king himself knows anything about the tree. I guess that¡¯s a good idea.


    This is the capital of Tatrama. And the royalties of the kingdom has been here ever since the kingdom was first created. Maybe Albert know something about it.


    Ian transformed into his falcon form and fly toward the royal pce. Since Sonia is still busy thinking, it¡¯s best for someone else to be the messenger.


    ¡°Shirley, what about you? Did you know anything about a tree? A magic tree? Whatever tree they taught you as a royalty?¡± I asked Shirley.


    ¡°There¡¯s nothing I know about it. But I don¡¯t know about my brother. He was taught to be a king. Maybe there¡¯s a secret that he knows about,¡± Shirley said.


    I guess I can¡¯t really rely on Albert here. Well, now what?


    ¡°Sonia, you said that you were ying around near this tree, right?¡± I asked Sonia.


    ¡°Yes. What about it?¡± Sonia asked back.


    ¡°Well, you were a child. Learning swordsmanship and Aura. And you must have at least hit this tree once with your sword, right?¡±


    ¡°Now that you mention it, other than Victoria who has always been a weird one, we hit the tree to see if we can sh it. Our master didn¡¯t say anything about it, so I guess it¡¯s fine,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°If you hit the tree, even if you use a wooden sword, there should be a mark. But there¡¯s no hitting mark at all on the tree. Let¡¯s try shing it with a sword.¡±


    I transformed Victoria into a sword, and shed it at the tree. Just a normal sh without using Aura at all. And my attack was stopped. But there¡¯s an obvious shing mark on the tree. But it¡¯s not deep. As if I just hit its skin. It¡¯s a tree, so its bark I guess.


    Although I didn¡¯t use Aura, it was still too shallow for someone as strong as I am. And it hurts my confidence.


    ¡°This goddamn tree!¡± I shouted as I keep shing my sword at the tree. And the result is always the same.


    ¡°...You didn¡¯t use any Aura at all, but this is surprising. Even a lumberjack can cut down a tree by hitting it with an axe over and over again. But you¡¯re much stronger than ordinary lumberjack, and unable to cut it down. This is a special tree indeed,¡± Victoria who is still a sword said that to me.


    And then, I see a huge falcon in the sky with a human riding it on its back. Ian has returned. With the king on his back.


    ¡°The king is skipping his duty!¡± I shouted.


    ¡°I¡¯m not!¡± Albert shouted back.


    Albert jumped from Ian¡¯s back tond, and then Ian transformed back to his human form.


    ¡°So, do you know anything?¡± I asked Albert.


    ¡°I don¡¯t. I¡¯m here because it seems interesting,¡± Albert replied.


    ¡°The king is skipping his duty!¡± I shouted again.


    The only reason he would be here is to skip his work. I don¡¯t know any other reason.


    ¡°What to do now? Hitting the tree doesn¡¯t work,¡± Shirley asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s just a normal sh. This time, I¡¯ll try using Aura. Wait, the tree somehow recovered its bark? I guess the tree has its own secret.¡±


    As I said, after I tried shing it with a normal sh, my attacks left some marks. But now, the tree bark has recovered as if there¡¯s no damage at all.


    As expected, this tree is weird. Even children who yed around by hitting the tree should leave some marks. Even if they were young, it should at least leave some marks. But there¡¯s nothing at all. No damage remained after a thousand years. That¡¯s why I think this tree is weird.


    This tree was in front of the dojo of an Aura user. Which mean, I need to do something with my Aura on this tree.


    Under the watch of the bored king who skipped his work, I touched the tree again and this time, I connected my Aura to the tree instead of mana. And this time, there¡¯s a reaction.


    ¡°Hmm? I can¡¯t remove my hand from the tree! And the tree is sucking my Aura!¡± I said.


    My hand is stuck to the tree and I¡¯m unable to remove it. As if there¡¯s a glue connecting my hand to the tree. And the tree is sucking my Aura from the tree.


    Aura is simr to mana. But it¡¯s use are different.


    Mana is rted to magic, while Aura is closely rted to body. Like making my body stronger, sticking my feet to the ceiling, or many other things. And there¡¯s also a limit of how much one can use Aura per day just like mana. Though I never had any worry about that since I trained so I can use Aura for a whole day without getting tired thanks to Victoria and Sonia¡¯s training.


    But that huge amount of Aura is getting sucked into the tree. It¡¯s a weird feeling that I felt once a long time ago. Aura exhaustion. Back before I got returned to the past when I keep fighting every day, I got exhausted and unable to use Aura until I rested enough. Though this time, I carefully never used Aura too much. But somehow, this tree sucked all my Aura and only then I can let go of my hand.


    ¡°Fuck! I can¡¯t use Aura anymore today just because of a fucking tree!¡±


    ¡°Wait, Roy! There something ising!¡± Sonia warned me.


    As soon as she said that, I jumped back in case there¡¯s a danger. I¡¯m out of Aura, so I can¡¯t use anything to protect myself. Luckily, Shirley is here. And she quickly stand in front of me and the others to build an Ice Wall.


    I can¡¯t see anything through the wall. I¡¯m out of Aura, and my Divine Vision is not working. This is scary. Too scary.


    ¡°Roy, there¡¯s some words appear in front of the tree!¡± Victoria said.


    She¡¯s not behind the wall, so she can see everything. And since it seems like there¡¯s no danger at all, Shirley removed the Ice Wall so I can read what it is.


    [Cut this tree down if you are worthy.]


    ¡°These words are written by Aura. Such a powerful control of Aura. I don¡¯t think it was from the tree itself. But it¡¯s most likely from the Aura user who created this tree. And it needs someone¡¯s Aura to give us this information. Seems like you have to cut it down, Roy,¡± Victoria said.


    ...That¡¯s it? It sucked all my Aura to write a few words?


    ¡°Goddamnit! Who the hell use someone else¡¯s Aura to write down a few words!?¡± I shouted.


    ¡°It has been a thousand years. There¡¯s no more trace of Aura in this tree, but it¡¯s still standing. And now it has received Aura, it has returned its strength. I don¡¯t know what it will do, but you need to try and cut it down,¡± Sonia said.


    So, I need to cut it down to know more. But I can¡¯t use Aura anymore today. I need to rest.


    And I promise that I will loot every single thing that this tree can give without anything remains. Just like how it absorbed all my Aura.


    ¡°I¡¯ll go to sleep now. I¡¯ll do it after my Aura recovered,¡± I said.


    And so, we returned back to the mansion.


    ¡°...And why are you still here?¡± I asked Albert.


    ¡°I want to see what wille out. And don¡¯t you need to keep everything here secret? I¡¯ll get the agents to make sure that no one wille near,¡± Albert said.


    Whatever. I¡¯m tired. Let¡¯s just sleep. Let¡¯s ignore the king who skipped his duty.

 Chapter 559

    Chapter 559: The Tree is Strong


    I woke up in the morning, and I can feel my Aura has recovered. I checked it by using my Divine Vision, and it works.


    But what surprise me the most is that the king, Albert, is taking all his work here into my house. And not just him. Marie, n, and Lana were here as well.


    Even more, Ang, Ka, Jewel, Candy, and the others who were in Cassau were here as well. Do they want to watch me cutting down a tree so much?


    But how did theye here so fast? Must be Spot. He returned back to Cassau, and brought everyone back here. Is he that fast now? Or did I sleep more than one day?


    Whatever the case, I¡¯m hungry. Filling my empty stomaches first.


    ¡°Master Roy, you¡¯re awake!¡± Ian said as he saw me enter the dining room.


    ¡°And I¡¯m hungry. How long did I sleep?¡± I asked.


    .....


    ¡°Just one night. It¡¯s already noon and lunch is being prepared right now. Lina is doing the cooking,¡± Ian said.


    I guess if it¡¯s Spot, he could move everyone here by that time. Though I just wish that Albert doesn¡¯t need to bring his works here. This is my house, but the king just do everything he wants in my house.


    Wait, if it¡¯s other people, normally they would be happy that the king is staying at their ce. Well, I¡¯m not a normal man at all.


    I told Ian to get my meal prepared sooner. I¡¯m hungry, so I will eat more. And before I finished all the dishes prepared for me, the others should be here for lunch.


    I looked at the tree at the garden while eating my breakfast. Or lunch. And I see Victoria and Sonia were there. With Vitoria in her human form holding a sword, and she tries to cut down the tree.


    Well, I don¡¯t think she can do it. Even if she has the technique and the power, she doesn¡¯t have Aura. So, she¡¯s unable to cut it down. But she must have wanted to know what their master left behind. What is the secret behind the tree?


    The monsters didn¡¯te for lunch as they were discussing something. I¡¯ll go meet them after I finish my meal.


    During lunch, I asked the others why they are here. They said that they just want to see something. And Albert also said that he will soon announce to the people about what happened during the tournament. And he will announce the war against the cult openly. With this, everyone will know that a war is happening. Not just the agents or soldiers. Every citizens of Tatrama will know since the announcement will be broadcasted.


    As for other countries, they will take care of it themselves. Though Consenza might not need to announce it since it was the target of the cult¡¯s attack. And Arturo has announced their war against the cult when Fabio was coronated as the new king.


    As for Varadis, I don¡¯t know. Well, it¡¯s impossible for them to hide the fact that back when I firste there, the cult has influenced many people. Though I hope this time old man Henry has picked someone better as the future king this time.


    Talking about heir, I wonder what the other countries are thinking?


    Albert already has n. Old man Henry has many children. But what about Fabio and Lynn? They were both unmarried and have no children.


    Well, they are a king and an empress. They should have thought about it. And they can just appoint anyone to be their partner. I doubt someone will refuse their offer.


    Or maybe the two will end up together. Well, I don¡¯t know about that. But I don¡¯t think that will be the case.


    Well, it¡¯s their countries. I won¡¯t care about them. They know what to do themselves. I¡¯m just good at fighting. That¡¯s all I can do.


    And I hope I can get stronger after cutting that damn tree down.


    A tree challenging me if I¡¯m worthy or not? It¡¯s the first time I really hate a tree. And it¡¯s probably not a real tree at all.


    After some more chatting, I left to the garden and everyone is following me trying to see me cut the tree down. I looked outside the mansion and see that there are many guards disguising themselves so no one will get close to the mansion just in case. Veronica and Sara also helped to make sure that no sounds can be heard outside.


    Since Sara is here, I don¡¯t need to use air magic to do it myself. That¡¯s good. I can just focus on cutting the tree down.


    ¡°Victoria, Sonia, do you recall anything about the tree?¡± I asked the two monsters who used to be Aura users.


    ¡°All I remember is that this tree is very durable. We both tried to recall our memories about our time at the dojo, and we remember that our master tried to sh this tree many times in the past. But he never seeded in cutting it down,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Yeah. After talking with Sonia, I remember that one time I heard him saying something about not worthy enough after trying to cut this tree. Maybe this tree has been there even long before our master¡¯s time. And our master built the dojo here because of the tree,¡± Victoria said.


    So, it wasn¡¯t their master who created or do something to the tree. But he built the dojo because of the tree. Probably, he wants to see what¡¯s the secret the tree has. And he built a dojo in hope that someone among his students can reveal the secret.


    Though it won¡¯t be his student who reveals the secret of the tree. But it¡¯s his student¡¯s student! Wait, that makes him my grand master.


    ¡°Well, all I can do is trying to cut the tree down. I hope it won¡¯t suck my Aura again this time,¡± I said.


    ¡°How will you do it? Even our master couldn¡¯t do it,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Did your master able to sh from distance or cutting magic in half? If not, then I¡¯m already stronger than your master,¡± I said confidently.


    ¡°Yeah, but you ran out of Aura after touching the tree once,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°That¡¯s just because the tree never received Aura in the past thousand years! I hope that¡¯s the case. Victoria, a sword,¡± I said to Victoria as she transformed into a sword in my hand.


    ¡°Trying it with a sword right away? Good luck,¡± Sonia said.


    Everyone stepped back from the tree. They make sure that they won¡¯t get hit by my stray attack. Though they don¡¯t need to worry too much. They even prepared Earth Walls and Ice Walls to protect themselves.


    First, I need to check the tree again with Divine Vision. Is there anything strange about the tree? It looks just like a normal tree. But maybe there¡¯s something in the middle of the tree that I can¡¯t really see.


    What I see is a normal tree from the outside and the inside. But if there¡¯s a reason why I need to cut it down, is the fact that there must be something hidden inside the tree. Maybe the secret is a squirrel.


    Using two hands to hold Victosword, I raised it up. And I focused my Aura on the sword, and my will to cut down the tree so all my attack will only be received by the tree.


    ¡°HAAAH!!¡±


    I swung Victosword diagonally to cut the tree down. But even when I used all my power, the tree isn¡¯t down at all. And I can only cut to a third of the trunk which has the thickness of about one meter.


    ¡°Fuck! Even with my full strength, I can only cut a third of the the trunk!¡± I shouted.


    ¡°This tree is strong. Not only your full strength, it also able to endure Jewel¡¯s charge in her Rhino form, and even blocked Ang¡¯s magic. They both tried it as soon as they arrive here,¡± Sonia said.


    Blocking Ang¡¯s magic and Jewel¡¯s charge? The tree itself is a treasure. Maybe I can make something from it. A shield maybe?


    If the tree has the attribute to block magic attack, and powerful enough to stop something as powerful as Jewel¡¯s charge, this tree could be essential for the war against the cult. Even if they have master level mages, it would be difficult for them to destroy anything created by using this tree as the material.


    I¡¯ll ask the elves if they know something about this tree. But after I cut it down!


    I pulled Victosword from the tree, and the tree was quickly regenerated. I expected that. But never thought it would be so quick.


    ¡°What to do now? Seems like you need to improve your strength,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°No. I was never a power type from the start. I¡¯m more of a speed type. If I can¡¯t cut it down with one sh, I will cut it down with several more shes. Get back or you might get hit,¡± I said.


    A series of shes using both Aura and will. I think it¡¯s the first time I tried it. But this tree is a good hitting target. I will make sure that I cut it down.

 Chapter 560

    Chapter 560: Cutting the Tree Down


    It¡¯s been two days since I tried to cut the tree down, but it still hasn¡¯t fallen yet!


    When I tried to cut it down with one swing, I failed. And when I tried to use consecutive shes, it recovered itself before I can cut it down! Even when I chipped the trunk down to just a few centimeters, the tree would recover itself before I could cut it down!


    I failed. And those who are bored are already returned either with my portals or riding on Spot¡¯s back.


    And since it might take a while until I can cut the tree down, I had Sonia and Spot to look for other traces of Aura users of the past.


    Albert also has returned to do his duty in the pce. And now that he has introduced Lana to the world as his daughter, he will be busier with a lot of questions from other nobles or even the citizens.


    More importantly, they would ask why he would keep the fact that the kingdom is hostile to the cult as secret. But it was not a secret at all. Shirley has spread it to the people back after we cleared the stampede in Melk. The rumors have been spread, but many people didn¡¯t believe it.


    And now that they know that even the king himself hid the existence of his own daughter from public, they slowly recognize the danger of the situation. Now they know why there are many nobles suddenly disappeared.


    .....


    Well, that¡¯s politic. He needs to gain as many allies from the nobles and the citizens. I can¡¯t do that, so I will leave it to him.


    Anyway, it¡¯s time to cut the tree down again.


    ¡°Victoria, an axe this time,¡± I said.


    ¡°You gave up on using sword? Well, it¡¯s a tree so an axe is a better choice,¡± Victoria replied as she turned into a huge axe.


    As I swung the axe to the tree, Victoria also adjusted her weight so the sh should be stronger. But the result is the same whether I cut it once or multiple times.


    ¡°Just what the heck is wrong with this tree!?¡± I shouted.


    Even a huge axe doesn¡¯t work. What should I do?


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s a tree. How about we ask an elf about it. The queen should know something about it,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Ah, right! Is Lina still here?¡±


    I was about to use Divine Vision to look for Lina, but I suddenly feel her presence behind me.


    ¡°Whoa! You surprise me there! Since when were you here?¡± I asked Lina who appears suddenly like a ghost. Even more hidden than a ghost.


    ¡°Since a while ago, Master. I¡¯ll summon Elestias right away,¡± Lina said.


    And soon after, a beautiful elf was summoned in front of us. Her name is Tia. At least I called her that way. And it¡¯s a rare urrence of me to remember someone¡¯s name. Especially since we haven¡¯t met for a while.


    ¡°What kind I do for you?¡± Tia asked.


    ¡°Can you tell me something about this tree? It¡¯s a weird tree that absorb my Aura and can regenerate itself.¡±


    Tia then looked around at the tree. Not just the trunk. She also checked the branches, leaves, roots, and even the soil. She¡¯s a tree doctor.


    After a while, she then touched the tree and she even talked to it in anguage I don¡¯t know. Is that treenguage? She¡¯s a tree whisperer as well?


    ¡°Hmm... I see. This tree was just an ordinary tree until someone modified it with a power I don¡¯t know. It must be the Aura that Master Roy can use,¡± Tia said.


    ¡°Yeah, that¡¯s what we assumed as well. Anything else?¡± I asked.


    ¡°This tree has the power to regenerate itself when it receive damage. And it can retain its form for a long time. No growth even after thousands of years,¡± Tia said.


    ¡°That¡¯s all? I need to cut down this tree to reveal its secret. Anything else you know? Like its weakness?¡±


    ¡°The tree is very strong and has quick regeneration rate. I don¡¯t know if this can be called as weakness or not, but as it grows from the root, the tree¡¯s regeneration is faster the closer you attack from the bottom part. Maybe it will help,¡± Tia said.


    It¡¯s fast in the bottom and the higher my attack, the slower its regeneration is. I think that helps.


    I have been using brute force from the start. Now, I need some strategy. But I need to learn more about the speed of its regeneration.


    ¡°Victoria, give me four Blobbies. Turn them into axes,¡± I said.


    ¡°Four?¡±


    ¡°One for each gap between my fingers in one hand,¡± I said as I grabbed the Blobbyaxes all in my right hand.


    I covered them all with Aura, and then I attacked the tree with full strength.


    All four axes stuck quite deep into the trunk. And I left the axes there as I wait for a while.


    Soon after, the tree started regenerating. And the axe got pushed away and fall one by one to the ground from the bottom. Even though the gap isn¡¯trge between the axes, I can tell.


    ¡°I see. The regeneration is really faster the lower it receives damage. Let¡¯s have another experiment.


    This time, I used the four axes again to hit the tree quite high above. And then, as soon as the four axes stuck on the tree, I transformed Victoria into a huge axe, and start striking the tree below the four axes as the marks.


    I keep striking at the tree until I see a sign of regeneration. And soon enough, I can see the result.


    While the axes above my the area I hit are still stuck, the ce I hit started regenerating. Tia¡¯s exnation was correct. Not that I doubted her. I just want to see it for myself.


    ¡°So, you have a new strategy?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Give me four more Blobbyaxes. I will then stick all eight axes on the bottom part, and then I will strike the middle part continuously with the huge axe. I will also use my Divine Vision to look below as well. If I see the axes that got stuck started to get pushed, I will strike those axes first before I continue shing the tree. Simple,¡± I said.


    ¡°It does sound simple. But only you can do it. It has just been a few days since you tried cutting this tree down, but you already prepared a strategy. Even my master who have been trying to do it for years failed. At least back before I left the dojo,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°You sure your master is not just muscle-headed?¡± I asked.


    ¡°If he¡¯s a muscle-head, neither Sonia nor I would respect him even if he¡¯s my master. But at least you are smarter than my master. Still, he has better memory than you. He could even remember the name of someone he just met,¡± Victoria ridiculed me.


    Let¡¯s try it. This time, I¡¯m confident I can cut this tree down. I hope the reward will be worth it.


    I stuck all eight axes on the bottom part of the tree, so close to the roots, and I quickly swung Victoriaxe on the tree as strong and as fast as possible.


    After the fourth hit, I can see the axes at the bottom started to get pushed back. So, I strike the axes at the bottom one by one with Victoriaxe before I return to hit the middle part of the tree.


    The part that I hit still hasn¡¯t regenerated. Which is a good news.


    Although the axes at the bottom is being pushed back again after I struck them, I quickly returned to hit the middle part of the tree.


    The closer I got to the center, the harder the tree is. And before I can cut it downpletely, the axes at the bottom is being pushed back so I need to put them back again.


    Finally, myst sh. I used all my Aura and will on thest sh as it started to regenerate since the axes at the bottom have all fallen.


    ¡°RAAARGH!!¡±


    The axe sliced through the tree. The tree falls down with a loud sound and alerted everyone who are still here. Though good thing Veronica is still here since she blocked all the sound from being heard outside the mansion.


    Everyone then quicklye over to see what¡¯s going on. And they see that the tree that has been causing me trouble is finally falling down.


    ¡°I did it!¡±


    ¡°Congrattions, Master,¡± Lina praised me. Which is the opposite of our usual roles.


    And then, something happened.


    The tree that has been cut is disappearing. Not just the part that I cut, even the bottom as well. Including the roots!


    ¡°No! My anti-magic material!¡±


    ¡°Roy! Quickly pour your Aura to the tree! See if you can save even a little bit of material!¡± Victoria shouted.


    I grabbed the part that was cut down, and pour my Aura inside hoping that I can save at least a little bit. But it doesn¡¯t work. The tree still disappearing.


    ¡°No! You goddamned, fricking,...¡±


    Herees my several minutes of curses that no minors should hear. Good thing there are no more children here.

 Chapter 561

    Chapter 561: What¡¯s in the Hole


    The tree disappeared. And the ground sunk because there¡¯s no more roots under there. But it doesn¡¯t end there. The ground around the tree keep sinking as swear words keeping out of my mouth. So, I stopped swearing and cursing.


    ¡°Everyone, step back!¡± I gave a warning as I turn around, and grab as many people as I could as I transformed Victoria into a.


    Though the wind mages fly away as soon as I gave the warning. And Ian also transformed into a falcon and carried Ruby with him into the sky.


    The ground keep sinking and the garden that Ruby has taken care of since she moved here. All the beautiful flowers that she has grown was devoured by the earth.


    I see Sara as she tried to use magic to stop the sinking ground as it goes closer to the mansion. But I stopped her.


    ¡°Sara, don¡¯t stop the earth. Let it sink. I don¡¯t know what¡¯s inside there, but I hope it¡¯s something valuable,¡± I said to stop Sara from using her magic.


    ¡°Okay. But are you sure you¡¯re fine having your house destroyed?¡± Sara asked.


    .....


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. The house can be repaired. Just use earth magic to give you all some footing for everyone here. If it¡¯s a dungeon, I don¡¯t want you to waste your mana too much,¡± I said.


    ¡°Are you sure it¡¯s a dungeon,¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. With my Divine Vision, I can see that there¡¯s a path going down inside. But I can¡¯t see too deep. Which mean there¡¯s either a high amount of mana concentrated in the dungeon, which ismon in a dungeon that hasn¡¯t been discovered, or it¡¯s rted to Aura,¡± I said.


    I thought that since the tree absorbed my Aura, there¡¯s a possibility that this ce is man-made. Created by an Aura user since the tree has been modified. And the fact that I couldn¡¯t see clearly even with my Divine Vision means that not just a ce highly concentrated with mana. I also couldn¡¯t see far into a ce created by an Aura user of the past.


    And the fact that an Aura user did this means that the Aura users of the distant past, even further past than when Victoria and Sonia were still humans and were alive, is very strong. Stronger than what I could imagine.


    If there¡¯s a secret buried by that person here, I could get much stronger. Though if there¡¯s any record of this Aura user from the past, I doubt it can be deciphered. It has been very long time since then after all.


    But maybe if they did some mural drawing in a cave, I might still be able to perceive it.


    Well, we can only know if we go into that tunnel. I hope it¡¯s something good.


    After a while, the ground stopped sinking. Part of the mansion was devoured by the earth, but that¡¯s not a problem. This is a house that is not too important to me, but I had it because of my connection with Albert. He will do something to the destroyed house. I don¡¯t have to do anything.


    Well, he can just get the earth mages to fix the mansion. But I need our earth mages to help me explore where this tunnel lead us to.


    ¡°I think the ground has stopped sinking. I¡¯m going in. Anyone interested ining with me?¡± I asked.


    And then, Ang, Ka, Jewel, Candy, Wendy, Veronica, and Sara raised their hand. I guess this is the party we will go with. As for Spot, he¡¯s too big and won¡¯t be useful in this small space, so he won¡¯t being and just wait for us instead. He doesn¡¯t even want to be small and wrapped his body around me.


    Well, he can do what he wants. I¡¯ll just bring this party with me.


    ¡°I¡¯ll go check the ce first then before you go. I¡¯m curious what¡¯s inside,¡± Sonia said. She¡¯s a ghost, so she should be fine.


    ¡°Alright. Then, we will go in after one hour. Prepare yourself since I don¡¯t know what will happen. And if it¡¯s not a dungeon, we might not be fighting at all. What you will do is just sightseeing. If you¡¯re okay with that, you cane,¡± I said.


    I don¡¯t think it¡¯s a dungeon. And there¡¯s probably no monsters. If there¡¯s a monster in a capital of a kingdom, things will get troublesome.


    After one hour, we prepared to get in the hole. I even brought my Reizpear since I don¡¯t know what will happen next.


    After falling for a bit into the hole, I reached the bottom. The others who were being carried by the wind mages fall slowly behind me.


    ¡°Oh, Sonia is back. It¡¯s been one hour, so it must be quite deep for her to only return now,¡± I said.


    Even though my sight is limited, I can still see further than any ordinary people can see.


    ¡°The earth here is weird. I can¡¯t sense anything further than what I can see,¡± Ang said.


    If someone who is the closest to a master level mage with us said that, it means that we entered some ridiculous ce. We need to be careful.


    ¡°Let¡¯s move after we asked Sonia what¡¯s in front of us.¡±


    Everyone nodded and we waited until Sonia returns.


    Instead of teleporting, she¡¯s floating this way. Maybe there¡¯s something that blocked her from teleporting.


    Sonia stopped in front of us and told us what¡¯s inside.


    ¡°Roy! I see ghosts inside!¡± Sonia shouted excitedly.


    ¡°Yeah, me too. There¡¯s one in front of me,¡± I replied.


    ¡°I don¡¯t mean me! I mean other ghosts! They are trapped inside!¡±


    Ghosts trapped inside this ce? Just what is this ce?


    Before I can make any assumption, Sonia added something.


    ¡°They were all ghosts of Aura users of the past who died here! They failed the uing test from the ancient Aura user who created this ce, and died!¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°So, you mean that even Aura users of the past are still not strong enough to conquer this ce? Man, this ce is ridiculous. Have you asked what trials they went through?¡± I asked Sonia.


    ¡°Yes. The ghosts who died here will be our guides. They won¡¯t harm you since Aura can kill them. Unless they want to die. Once you enter, you can¡¯t leave,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Even if I can use portal?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, magic still work in this ce. That¡¯s what they said, so I guess you should be fine. Anyway, once you go deeper, there are two doors. One is for the test taker, which can only be entered by one person at a time, and the other is for those who want to watch,¡± Sonia said.


    I guess she flew all the way here instead of teleporting since she was excited about something.


    ¡°What is this ce? Some ce for entertainment which have a ce for audience to watch?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Master said it was. This ce was just a test for Aura users if they canplete the test and get the reward. But many people failed during the time the creator of this ce was still alive, so the creator of this ce make it more entertaining,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Wait, master? Do you mean our master? He¡¯s here!?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Yes. That¡¯s why I waste since I talked a lot with him. Anyway, he and the other ghosts can¡¯t leave that ce, so you can meet him once you enter. So, Roy, will you enter?¡± Sonia asked me.


    ¡°A ce filled with Aura users of the past. I¡¯m interested. They died, but I should be safer since I have Divine Vision and portals. But what about the audiences? Sonia, I want you to ask your master and the other ghosts if the audiences will be able to return safely if I fail. If not, the others shouldn¡¯t enter and just wait for me in the surface. And ask the ghosts about the content of the test, and if any of the ghosts were summoners who can use portal, or have vision power like me.¡±


    Sonia returns back to the testing ground. Since we have a ghost with us, we might be able to get more advantages than Aura users of the past. Though I wonder what¡¯s inside this ce for so many Aura users to die here? I hope it¡¯s something amazing.


    ¡°Hmm? Victoria? You seem normal after hearing that you can meet your master again. Even Sonia was excited,¡± I asked Victoria who doesn¡¯t seem to be excited.


    ¡°Well, since I could talk with Sonia again, I¡¯m not really surprised to know that I can talk to someone who has long been dead. We even talked to Javier who came from the far future. I don¡¯t think there are many things that can surprise me anymore,¡± Victoria said casually.


    ¡°You don¡¯t miss him?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Not really. He¡¯s my master, but other than that, we don¡¯t have much interactions,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Well, if that¡¯s what you want. As for me, I guess it¡¯s better if I just wait here and let Sonia chat with the ghosts. We don¡¯t know what will happen after I enter, so I will dy my departure again. It¡¯s also a rare chance for me to learn about Aura from Aura users of the past. Let¡¯s go back to the mansion and wait for Sonia there. And since it¡¯s a test for Aura user, only I will take the test. The rest of you can rebuild the mansion ore to watch if you¡¯re interested,¡± I said.


    I wonder what kind of test I will take. A test which people died in. I need to be extremely careful.


    Do I look like someone who is willing to risk my life for something that I¡¯m not really sure of? No. But I will go since I know that I can escape with my portal. Good thing we have Sonia to check if I can still use magic or not.

 Chapter 562

    Chapter 562: My Name is Roy!


    After waiting for a while, Sonia appears in front of me. Seems like she has finished her discussion with the ghosts inside the hole.


    ¡°So, have you told them everything?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. I just told them that you need to be stronger. You can tell them yourself. Maybe if it¡¯s you instead of me who is also a ghost, the creator of that ce will take notice and recognize the intensity of the situation. I mean the world will be destroyed after all. And you came from the future,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Fine. Have you asked them what will happen after I enter?¡± I asked.


    ¡°The ghosts inside will have material form and will temporarily have the power of that they used to have before they died. All of them. And during the test, you willpete with some ghosts who wants to participate in certain events,¡± Sonia said.


    Events? Just how many things will be tested there? And why is this test needed?


    But hearing that the ghosts will have material form, I feel d. I will take this as a chance topare my skills with Aura users of the past. If I said that the world is in danger, they should want to help me get stronger.


    .....


    Seems like the tree truly hide some amazing rewards. Just the chance of sparring with Aura users of the past will get me stronger. I hope.


    As for the events, seems like each Aura users who entered have done different tests. It¡¯s totally random. Maybe.


    ¡°What else have you learned?¡± I asked Sonia.


    ¡°Right. There¡¯s a room deep inside that no ghosts managed to enter. Even I can¡¯t enter there. If I force myself, I will disappear. Some says that it¡¯s a door to where the creator of the ce is resting. And there¡¯s a rumor between the ghosts that the creator is still alive,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Is there any time limit in the test?¡±


    ¡°You can start when you¡¯re ready. You can give the signal, and the event will start. But before you gave the signal, it will not start at all. And the door to enter the testing ce will still be open. But once the event started, it will be locked until you die, or pass the exam,¡± Sonia said.


    That¡¯s good. It means I can spar with ancient Aura users before I take the test. Maybe if some of them left their precious weapon somewhere before they died, I can take them with me. This way, I might not need to look for other weapons.


    After hearing about what Sonia has learned from other ghosts including her master, I prepared myself before I go.


    Although I have Victoria, I still asked for some Blobbies to be prepared. They became my armor now. As for Victoria, she will be my main weapon. Though I still carry Reizpear.


    ¡°Victoria, if the danger that killed those Aura users of the past ising, I will use portal to leave right away. But instead of leaving a Blobby here, I will leave you since you are immortal. As for the Blobbies, they can be destroyed. That¡¯s why I will leave you there,¡± I said.


    ¡°I understand. I can also talk a lot with my master and other ghosts. Maybe some of them were like me, a reincarnator from another world. That would be interesting,¡± Victoria said.


    As for the others, they also want toe to see the test. Just how bored was the creator of this ce to make it into some sort of entertainment?


    Well, I also can¡¯t say anything about it since I made apetition as well. Two of them in fact. The fighting tournament in Melk, and the tournament between four countries.


    And maybe, the creator of this ce was simr to me. This guy has some sort of hidden intentions. I can only figure it out if I can somehow enter that locked door inside that ce.


    ¡°For those who want to watch, in case I retreated, as soon as I left, I will open a portal directly to the Blobby that Ka had. Just enter the portal immediately right away,¡± I said.


    I don¡¯t know what will happen if I left them behind. The ghosts said that they will still return safely. But I¡¯m just afraid that¡¯s not the case.


    Now, I¡¯m ready. Let¡¯s enter the hole in my garden again and enter the door.


    ¡°We¡¯ll split up here. If you sense something dangerous, contact me right away. Wait, is that a camera?¡±


    I can see Ka, Jewel, and Sara brought some cameras with them.


    ¡°Yes. Albert and the others seem interested about this. During your preparation time, I asked Sonia to inform the kings. And they want to see what¡¯s going on,¡± Ka said.


    My life has became some sort of entertainment for the kings as well. And I heard that it¡¯smon things for celebrities in Victoria¡¯s world. I guess that makes me a celebrity.


    With Reizpear in my hand and Victoria on my shoulder, I entered the door to the testing ground.


    The door won¡¯t be locked until I start the event. So, I let it stay open. And soon enough, a ghost approached me.


    ¡°Wee to the testing ground of Aura Master. Once you passed through all the tests, you will no longer be an ordinary Aura user. But you can call yourself as Aura Master!¡±


    Not Aura user but an Aura Master? Does that mean everyone who died here are not strong enough to be Aura Master? Sonia didn¡¯t exin it to me.


    ¡°Oh, master! It¡¯s been a while!¡± Victoria on my shoulder greeted the ghost.


    ¡°Victoria? You really are a slime now! It was shocking for me to hear that you¡¯re a reincarnator and became a slime after you died. And this guy, Roy, is your disciple, right? That makes me his grand master. Roy, you don¡¯t need to call me grand master. Just call me by my name, rence!¡± Victoria¡¯s master said.


    ...rence? Seriously?


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong? My name is amazing, right?¡± rence was confused why we¡¯re speechless.


    ¡°...Yes, it was a great name,¡± I replied.


    ¡°This is actually the first time I ever heard what your name is. I bet Sonia doesn¡¯t know either, or she should have some sort of reaction when she heard that name,¡± Victoria added.


    ¡°What? What¡¯s wrong with my name?¡± rence asked.


    ¡°Nothing. It¡¯s just the same stage name that I used when I performed as a clown in circus. I used it because it¡¯s a good name,¡± I said.


    ¡°rence is known for being an amazing clown instead of Aura user nowadays,¡± Victoria said.


    rence was angry at how I used that name. Well, that¡¯s something I didn¡¯t know after all. It¡¯s also his fault to not telling his disciples his name.


    ¡°Anyway, what¡¯s this about Aura Master?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s just something that people call the strongest Aura user in the distant past. And this is a testing ground for that,¡± rence said.


    So it¡¯s nothing really important. Just a title. Like how Ang became the strongest in the continent. Even though she hasn¡¯t fought every single mages on the world.


    And to be one, I need to pass the test instead of fighting Aura users? That¡¯s just weird.


    Well, the title maybe useless, but the things I can learn in this ce should be plenty.


    ¡°I heard that you can have material form after I entered. Why are you still a ghost?¡± I asked rence.


    ¡°Because you haven¡¯t entered the testing ground yet. Come on, everyone is waiting for the next Aura user to enter this ce after so long. By the way, I¡¯m the youngest here. That¡¯s why it¡¯s my duty to guide the neer. Be respectful to the others, okay?¡± rence said.


    It seems like Sonia really didn¡¯t told him or any of the ghosts about the fact that the world is in danger. From the start, he acted so casually. I guess Sonia really wants me to be the one to tell everyone.


    Maybe I should bring a TV so the ghosts can see Albert and hear everything from him. Well, I can just use portal to find Albert if I need to.


    Anyway, can ghosts be seen in TV? That¡¯s a big question.


    I can see it. Although it¡¯s a bit blurry, I can see the inside of the testing ground with my Divine Vision. And it looks just like an arena where we used for thepetition. Though it¡¯s much bigger. I can also see Ka, Ang, and the others in the audience seats.


    But what¡¯s different is the stage. Unlike the other arenas I have entered before, I see many tools that I don¡¯t recognize at all. They must be the things that will be used for the tests.


    I also can see many ghosts waiting for me to enter. It really feels like I¡¯m a celebrity. Someone famous who had people waiting for just so they can see me closely.


    There¡¯s a door connected to the testing ground. When I opened it and enter the door, rence who was a ghost turned into a human. A powerful-looking human.


    The other ghosts also turned into humans. With the exception of Sonia who is not a ghost stuck in this ce.


    Though from her reaction, it seems that she hoped to have a material body like the other ghosts.


    They were about to greet me, but I made the first move. With air magic to make my voice louder, everyone could hear me.


    ¡°My name is Roy! The only Aura user left in the world! And I came from the future to prevent the world destruction!¡±


    All the ghosts who were excited were bbergasted hearing what I said. Since Sonia didn¡¯t say anything, they must be shocked to hear that there is no other Aura user left in the world.


    And to prevent the world¡¯s destruction, I will need their guidance to be stronger. I hope there¡¯s no evil Aura user here who doesn¡¯t care if the world is destroyed or not. Even if they have died a long time ago, they should be interested in saving the world, right?

 Chapter 563

    Chapter 563: Another Divine Vision Ability Holder


    ¡°Umm... What did you say?¡± rence asked me.


    ¡°I said, my name is Roy. The only Aura user left in this world who returned back to the past to prevent the world¡¯s destruction,¡± I repeat what I said.


    ¡°...AHAHAHAHA!!¡±


    After a few moment of silence, the ce is filled withughter. All the ghosts here who have returned to their human form that they have back when they were alive, are allughing. They must be thinking that I¡¯m a crazy person who spoke nonsense.


    Well, that can¡¯t be helped. Telling people that I came from the future, they must be thinking that I¡¯m crazy. And preventing the world¡¯s destruction? I¡¯m basically telling everyone that I¡¯m crazy.


    Especially to these old people who are much older than Victoria and Sonia who have lived as monsters for the past thousand years. It¡¯s so hard to convince old people. They are stuck with their traditional mindset. Especially if no one has talked to them for a thousand years. They won¡¯t believe anything I said.


    ¡°Wait! He spoke the truth!¡±


    .....


    Suddenly, a woman said that I spoke the truth. Among the people here, since everyone has their material form except Sonia, only those I bring with me and this woman didn¡¯tugh.


    ¡°Wait, your Aura ability lets you detect lies?¡± I asked the woman.


    ¡°Sort of. I can see through everything and I can even see your heartbeat. I defeated an All-seeing Eye to get this power. Unless you are professional con artist, you truly spoke the truth,¡± the woman said.


    ¡°Oh, my! What a coincidence! I also defeated an All-seeing Eye to get simr power! We have the same Aura ability! I called it Divine Vision. What about you?¡±


    I got excited hearing that someone have the same power as me. And seeing she¡¯s a woman, I don¡¯t think she has any perverted intention.


    Though I didn¡¯t get this ability because I¡¯m a pervert. I truly want to be able to see everything so I can make a good decision that will help me survive any hardship.


    ¡°You have See-through Vision as well? Wait, your name sounds much better. Divine Vision, was it? That¡¯s better since it consist of other things than just seeing through objects. Though it¡¯s kind of disturbing that a man has this ability,¡± the woman said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. Like I said, I came from the future. And I¡¯m not an idiot who wants something perverted after knowing the world wille to an end. I want this power so I have the ability to make a decision quickly since it helps me see things from afar. As for the see-through vision, that¡¯s a bonus that I won¡¯t refuse,¡± I said.


    The woman with Divine Vision is a beautiful woman who doesn¡¯t seem to be older than thirty. Not just her. The other women here are all young. Did they die young? Or is it because of the effect of Aura or mana that preserves their youth? I don¡¯t know. And I won¡¯t ask. In the end, everyone here is over a thousand years old at least.


    As for the men, I can tell that they don¡¯t care about their appearance. Some grows beard and look old, but they seem very healthy and strong.


    ¡°Wait, so the world is trulying to an end? And you came from the future?¡± rence who is the youngest asked me as the representative of the other Aura users.


    ¡°Before that, I¡¯m going to ask something else first. It will take some time to exin. Is it true that Aura ability can be inherited through blood? Like to your children or even skip generation and to your grand children right away?¡± I asked.


    ¡°That is possible. And you can call me Mona. I¡¯ll be your guide from now on as well since the youngest is too shocked. Anyway, I have met some kids who were born with Aura ability even when their parents or even their grandparents were not Aura users. So, yeah. It¡¯s possible. Why ask?¡± Mona, the woman with Divine Vision, exined to me.


    ¡°Actually, the king of thisnd we¡¯re in, have Aura ability. He can detect lies. And the new king of Arturo Kingdom on the east of the continent and his sister also has Aura ability. They can see a little bit into the future. The new king can see a few seconds ahead, but the princess can see up to one minute,¡± I said.


    I thought that if I told them about Albert, Fabio, and Luna, the ancient Aura users will think that the current kings are their descendants. But it seems like none of the ancient Aura users here think so. I guess I won¡¯t find Albert¡¯s ancestor here.


    ¡°I actually have the same ability as the siblings you mentioned. I can see a bit into the future. But I don¡¯t have any descendant,¡± a man said.


    So, he died single. I feel sad for him.


    ¡°Don¡¯t look at me like that! I enjoy being alone!¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s ignore him for now. Anyway, can I really do anything here before I took the test?¡± I asked Mona since she became my guide now.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. You cut the tree and the ground sunk, right? If you die, the tree and the ground will return back to normal. If you seed the ground on the surface will return to normal, but the tree won¡¯t regrow and this ce will disappear. At least that¡¯s what I heard from the previous test taker, who heard it from the previous taker before that, and who heard it from-¡±


    ¡°I get it. So, I cane and go anytime I want until I took the test, right? And I can use portal to move somewhere even after I took the test, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°You¡¯re a summoner, huh? I see that you have a rare ck Slime with you. And she¡¯s the youngest¡¯s disciple? That¡¯s a weird familiar you have. Anyway, you¡¯re right. Even though this ce is to test Aura user, the use of magic is not forbidden. So, yeah. You can use portal to leave and return here anytime you want. Though it seems like it¡¯s impossible toe back here again unless you leave one familiar behind. And you need to use portal again toe back here. Which is why those who have left never returned,¡± Mona exined.


    ¡°Well, I have no problem with that. Victoria here can create clones, and I can connect each clones with portal. So, I can return anytime I want. But before we continue, I think I need to give you some exnations first,¡± I said as I opened some portals. One is to the audience seat where Ka and the others are watching, and some others are to the kings of different countries.


    ¡°Ancient Aura users, the four kings of the countries in this continent. Kings, you have watched everything,¡± I said.


    Good thing Ka brought cameras with her. She and Jewel send the signal so the kings can see what¡¯s going on.


    ¡°Whoa, portals are amazing. And Victoria can make clones as well? That¡¯s cheating,¡± rence said.


    Not just him, Mona, the old single Aura user, and everyone else is also in awe seeing how useful portal is. Especially afterbining it with monster that can create clones.


    Ka and the others then entered the portal without hesitation and enter the testing ground. And I had them to exin everything to the ancient Aura users.


    As for me, I opened some more portals and get Spot, Shelia and the werewolves, Graham and the angels, and Arin and the werewolves. I also called Lina and the others who didn¡¯te here.


    As the kings and the others finished exining, the ancient Aura users take some time to sort their mind after hearing everything.


    ¡°Evil God...¡±


    ¡°He killed everyone!?¡±


    ¡°He was sealed and possibly still alive even now?¡±


    ¡°Monsters World? And it will be destroyed as well!?¡±


    The ancient Aura users were shocked to hear that. And I hope if the creator of this ce is still there behind the door, he could hear everything as well.


    That way, I don¡¯t need to exin everything again.


    ¡°I see. You have it rough. Anyway, is there anything you want to do after telling us all that? You even brought in more people with you. Though this ce isrge, so you¡¯re free to do it,¡± Mona said.


    As she said, this ce isrge. It¡¯s probably half the size of the capital. And Albert is looking around in shock knowing that there¡¯s a huge ce like this right under the capital.


    ¡°Before that, if this ce disappear, the capital on the surface won¡¯t sink into the ground, right?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°It seems that the creator of this ce was a powerful earth mage. Even though he could be an Aura Master, his earth magic seem to be reaching master level. That¡¯s why you don¡¯t have to worry about your capital sinking,¡± Mona exined.


    That¡¯s great news. I would also feel conflicted if the capital is gone.


    ¡°I brought everyone here because of a reason. Training. These people and monsters are those who will help me destroy the cult. I want you all to help me be our sparring partners. Although the enemy is not Aura users, learning how to fight is important,¡± I said.


    The ancient Aura users then gather around and discussed something before making a decision. And as the representative, Mona said their decision.


    ¡°Fine. We will be your sparring partners. We have died and have no interest in the world of living. And if it¡¯s you, you might be able to clear the test. If you clear the test, not just this ce will be gone. We who were stuck in this ce will disappear as well. But that¡¯s fine. If it means we helped the training of an Aura users, our extinction is not a problem. We¡¯re bored to stay here forever anyway,¡± Mona said.


    And with that, we have gotten the strongest sparring partners we can get. I won¡¯t miss this chance.


    And my anger toward the tree has disappeared. I¡¯m d that I came here.

 Chapter 564

    Chapter 564: Requesting Ancient Aura Users to Make Us Stronger


    ¡°You brought a lot of people here. Some of them are even monsters. Are you not just a summoner but also a tamer?¡± Mona asked.


    ¡°I only have two elements. One is summoning element which I also had in my first life, and the other is air element which I only had after I regressed into the past. Just those two. As for why monsters follow me, they have different reason. But they can be trusted,¡± I said.


    Then, I exined to the ancient Aura users about the monsters.


    The werewolves, I received their loyalties because I¡¯m the strongest. I defeated the Werewolf King and I became the next king. And then, the werewolves promised to never challenge me for the title until we destroyed the cult. After all, it¡¯s a fight that they love the most. And they can only get it if they follow my lead.


    The angels, I forced them to follow me. Well, that was what originally happened. But after Graham witnessed what happened to his sister because of the cult, I no longer need to force them to obey me. They want to destroy the cult who dares to perform experiment on their leader¡¯s sister.


    The vampires are quite weird. At first, they just love human cultures so much. And now, they got addicted to my blood. Not as much as drug addiction since they can still hold themselves back. But they want to do anything for the chance of drinking my blood. I hope they won¡¯t raid the hospital for the blood bags.


    The elves didn¡¯t follow me. They follow their leader who is the familiar of my maid. Though they aren¡¯t here now, they can be trusted.


    .....


    Other than those four races, there are individual monsters who joined our cause.


    Victoria and Sonia were humans who died because of the Evil God. Spot used to be a familiar of an Aura user. And then there¡¯s Sunny and Elsie who were Lina¡¯s familiars.


    I guess that¡¯s all the monsters I can introduce to these ancient Aura users. Though we also have some other monsters like the experimented monsters we saved before. But I don¡¯t know if they are loyal or not so I didn¡¯t bring them here.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think even with the size of this ce, we can all fight here. But at least I want to introduce everyone to you first. I want to ask for your help to train us. Even if the enemies are mages and not Aura users, we can still get stronger from your guidance. Also, I have seen through your body. Although you have material form, the inside is basically nonexistent. You don¡¯t have blood, heart, and everything else. But it¡¯s not hollow. Just like a slime. And you are ghosts. Which mean you won¡¯t be able to die, right? You¡¯re all just the perfect sparring partners,¡± I said.


    These ghosts are here for the test. But if they help us to get stronger, that would be perfect.


    They can¡¯t die, and they were supposed to have the strength they used to have before they died. And since they are here, that means they managed to cut down the tree which is difficult thing to do. My method can only work because I have Victoria.


    Maybe some of them are not a muscleheaded idiot. Some might be smarter than me. Not that I think of myself as the smartest man in the world. But at least I can learn something from them.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s not like you have anything to do, right? And moving your body again after a thousand years is better than nothing. Though I hope you won¡¯t kill us,¡± I said.


    ¡°AHAHAHA! Fine, I agree with you! I don¡¯t know about the others, but I will practice with you!¡±


    The one who said that was the man who died single without any descendant, and have simr ability as Fabio and Luna. Future Vision.


    I have introduced him to Fabio, and seems like Fabio learned more about his ability now. If his ability became stronger, Luna doesn¡¯t need to see something she shouldn¡¯t see anymore.


    The man is bald with full beard on his face. And his body is big. He looks very strong as he punched his fists together. Is he some sort of unarmed fighting specialist? Fighting without weapon? I¡¯m interested in fighting him.


    ¡°Okay. I¡¯ll bring those who won¡¯t fight today to leave. As for me, I will fight every day here. After all, if I¡¯m not here, you ghosts won¡¯t have your material form. Ka, arrange the schedule for everyone. I won¡¯t take the test anytime soon. Maybe after a few months of training and everyone has seen the result of their training.¡±


    Leaving the schedule to Ka, I look around to see that not all the ghosts seem to be interested in fighting us.


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, other than him and few others, the rest used weapons to fight. Our weapons that we brought with us the first time we¡¯re here were destroyed with age. We can¡¯t fight well without weapons. I guess we will let those unarmed fighters to fight while we just watch,¡± Mona exined.


    I see. No wonder I didn¡¯t see any weapons here. Even if there are any, they would be too rusty. Even with Aura, they won¡¯t be usable.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. Didn¡¯t I say that Victoria can create clones? She¡¯s also my main weapon because of her shapeshifting ability. You can create your weapons with those clones of hers and fight. If you don¡¯t have enough, tell me,¡± I said as I threw a lot of Blobbies that have been transformed into various weapons toward the ancient Aura users.


    The ancient Aura users were interested in the weapons and grabbed their preferred weapons. Some didn¡¯t have the weapons they are proficient at, so they asked them from me. I also told them that they can just grab any of the weapons and change them with their own will if they want.


    With this, everyone is ready. I returned those who were not scheduled to fight today. The kings were also returned. They told me that I have to get stronger before they left.


    Some of the ancient Aura users tried to enter the portals, but something seems to be blocking them. They have been locked here for thousands of years and they want a taste of freedom. Though I promise them I would bring some snacks whenever Ie here. I wonder if they still have a sense of taste.


    ¡°Alright. Who will you be fighting first? Before we train the others, we¡¯d like to see the strength of the only Aura user left on the world. Who will you fight?¡±


    The Aura user who died single asked me who will be the first I fight. And I already have the answer.


    ¡°rence, I want to fight you. You are supposed to be my grand master, so I¡¯m interested in fighting you,¡± I said.


    ¡°I see. I also want to see how strong the current Aura user is. Victoria, it has been a thousand years since you see me fight, right? But I have been a ghost for a thousand year and surrounded by other Aura users and became even stronger than back when I was still alive. Any advice you give to your disciple won¡¯t be enough,¡± rence said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. My disciple is not just strong and fast. You will lose if you underestimate him,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°That¡¯s good to hear. You remember the weapon I mainly use, right?¡± rence said as he grabbed a Blobbysword from the ground.


    ¡°Sure,¡± Victoria said. And then, the Blobbysword on rence¡¯s hand changed shape. It became a one-handed sword with thinner de. Not as thin as a rapier, but I think it¡¯s also specialized in piercing more than shing.


    ¡°Sonia, please get back. Aura can kill ghosts, but you are the only ghost who can die here. We will be fine if we got hit by Aura, but not you,¡± rence said to Sonia.


    Sonia then moved to the audience seat, while the others also stepped back and cleared the tools nearby to give us more space to fight.


    A thousand year being surrounded by ancient Aura users. Even if he couldn¡¯t try anything, just by hearing their advice should help him get stronger. And as he said, Victoria¡¯s advice might not be enough for me to win.


    Well, winning is not what I want. Winning is good, but this is a training. I need to get stronger instead. So, losing is fine as long as I can learn something. But I will give my all with the intention of winning.


    ¡°Start!¡±


    All of a sudden, the bald Aura user who died single announce the beginning of the match. Well, in real battles there¡¯s no sign at all. As someone who has experienced real battle, I¡¯m already prepared to fight even before I entered this ce after I heard about this ce from Sonia who scouted first.


    But even with all my preparation, I wasn¡¯t prepared to see what¡¯sing from rence.


    The Aura user who was the master of Victoria and Sonia, casted magic as his first move!


    It¡¯s just a normal Fireball. But instead of power, it has speed. It¡¯s much faster than average Fireball. Even the speed is about the same as Ang¡¯s Fireball even though from what I can see, his level shouldn¡¯t be stronger than expert level. Probably, it¡¯s advanced level at most.


    But I¡¯m also fast. I quickly shed the iing Fireball in two with Reizpear and see the shocked expression of my grand master.


    ¡°shing magic with Aura? Boy, you can do something I couldn¡¯t do back when I was alive. But if that¡¯s all you have, it¡¯s not enough to defeat me!¡±

 Chapter 565

    Chapter 565: My Grandmaster is Weak


    It¡¯s exactly as I heard from Sonia and Victoria. The two monsters who taught me everything about Aura this far think that Aura users who can sh through magic are considered legend. And from what rence just said, it seems to be true. He said that he couldn¡¯t do it. Though some Aura users here seem to be able to do that.


    But if he couldn¡¯t do it, how did he cut down that tree? He must have some more secret that he didn¡¯t share with his two disciples. Maybe some secret technique.


    ¡°Roy, be careful! Master used to say that magic can¡¯t bepared to Aura. And he used magic right away. Seems like he learned a lot from the ancient Aura users,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Yeah. He said that I¡¯m better than him back when he was still alive. And since he¡¯s here, there must be some method he used to cut down the tree,¡± I replied.


    ¡°You¡¯re right.¡±


    Seems like rence heard our conversation. He suddenly spoke mid-battle.


    ¡°Just like the kings you brought here, I also inherited an ability from my grandfather. It¡¯s something rted to blood. And with that ability, I can tell f someone has the aptitude to manifest their Aura or not in the future. That¡¯s why I became a teacher,¡± rence said.


    .....


    ¡°Wait, that means there¡¯s no one other than you here who can teach someone to be Aura users?¡±


    ¡°Apparently, yeah. Victoria and Sonia are two of those who got the privilege to learn under me. As for the others here, it seems that they only learned more about Aura after they manifested it, and meet another Aura users who became their master. Only me, and some of my siblings built dojos in various locations. We were all those who either inherit this Aura ability, or gained it. Though I forgot what monsters needed to be killed to learn this ability since I inherit it,¡± rence said.


    He also exined that using this ability, he increased his power so he can cut the tree down in one hit. Probably the monster that needed to be defeated is vampire or something that can control blood.


    ¡°So, does it mean that you can¡¯t do it anymore since you don¡¯t have blood in your body anymore right now?¡± I asked.


    ¡°You want to build an army of Aura users to fight the cult you¡¯re talking about? Unfortunately, I can¡¯t do that anymore. And the others here are not teacher materials as well. They would say watch and learn instead. So, the only thing we can do is to help you guys stronger,¡± rence said.


    I took a nce to the ancient Aure users here and they all nodded in agreement. I guess I should give up in building an army of Aura users then.


    Well, maybe I can learn something from that locked door once I finished the test. Though I won¡¯t raise my hope up.


    ¡°Where are you looking!? The fight is far from over!¡± rence shouted as he charged at me.


    I know that. We¡¯re still in the middle of a fight while we were chatting. But that doesn¡¯t mean I didn¡¯t pay attention. I have Divine Vision after all.


    ¡°That idiot. Hey! Don¡¯t forget! That boy has Divine Vision!¡± Mona shouted from the side.


    rence finally remember that and took some distance from me as he tried to cast another magic. But he¡¯s toote.


    Before he could gain some distance, I already prepared Reizpear for a thrust. And this is a long distance thrust that he shouldn¡¯t have learned as well.


    And so, I killed my grand master. Is what supposed to happen if he¡¯s not a zombie.


    My thrust destroyed the left side of his torso along with his left arm. If he has a heart, he would have died already. But he¡¯s just a flesh without any blood, heart, or even brain. Though he¡¯s more like a slime transformed into human just like Victoria.


    He¡¯s a zombie who has been revived for the test. Though I still don¡¯t know what the test will be, I will at least try to take it after I fought all the ancient Aura users here.


    ¡°...So, how do we decide the winner?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Right. We haven¡¯t decided that yet. I guess making us like this can be considered as your win since our regeneration seem to be slow. As for our victory, I guess it should be when you are badly injured, lose consciousness, or you give up. How about that?¡±


    rence, whose half of his body is being regenerated slowly, suggested that condition to me. The other ancient Aura users seem to agree as well.


    ¡°I¡¯m fine with that. Though there may be some individual differences, we can settle it before the fight. So, this is my victory, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Don¡¯t get too cocky just with one victory, boy. He¡¯s the youngest here, and also the weakest. And I can¡¯t wait to fight you,¡± the Aura user who died single said. That¡¯s too long of a nickname, so I will change it. Since he¡¯s the only one with bald head and full beard, I will call him Bearded Baldy.


    Not just him. The other ancient Aura users seem to be eager to fight as well. And on our side, everyone is also interested in fighting.


    ¡°Now that the opening match is over, let¡¯s get to training. I would like to challenge all the ancient Aura users one by er! As for you guys, go pick someone you want to fight!¡± I said to everyone I brought here.


    Since Ka has arranged the schedule, even if everyone is fighting in this ce, it should fit. And she also didn¡¯t just watch me fight. She created Earth Walls in this ce to make rooms for each of us to fight. Some rooms are bigger than the others. I guess that¡¯s for a team battle.


    ¡°Alright! Big guy! Fight me!¡± Shelia challenged the Bearded Baldy. I guess that¡¯s to be expected. Among the zombies here, he¡¯s the toughest looking one. Though I don¡¯t know if he¡¯s the strongest or not.


    ¡°A puppy girl? Good! You have regeneration skill, right? I won¡¯t hold back then!¡± Bearded Baldy said.


    The two then went into a room together.


    ...As someone who has slept with Shelia, I feel conflicted saying that. This is weird.


    ¡°Thedy with Divine Vision! Fight me!¡± Ang also picked her opponent. But I stopped her.


    ¡°No, Ang. I want to fight her first. I¡¯d like to improve my Divine Vision. Maybe she can help me with that,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s a good decision. I don¡¯t know if there¡¯s something I can teach you, but I¡¯m also interested in how good you are, Roy. Let¡¯s get a room together,¡± Mona said.


    ¡°...That sounds pretty suggestive. Please don¡¯t say it like that. I brought my girlfriends here, so it¡¯s pretty awkward,¡± I said.


    Then, Ka approached us.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. We don¡¯t mind that at all. Even if you¡¯re a ghost, I¡¯m fine if he added you as his harem member,¡± Ka said.


    ...With just one sentence, she made all the male zombies here hostile toward me.


    ¡°You! Fight me after this!¡±


    ¡°No! Me first!¡±


    ¡°Enemy of all men!¡±


    ...Seems like Bearded Baldy is not the only one who died single and without any descendant. I just hope that they don¡¯t hate me enough to kill me.


    ¡°Boy! I will kill you!¡±


    And the Bearded Baldy who just left Shelia, returned and announced that he will kill me. I¡¯m pretty much dead then.


    As for the female zombies, they are interested instead. Probably they want to see the exact reason why there are many girls who like me.


    ¡°So... let¡¯s move?¡± I asked Mona to leave this ce already.


    Ka and the others are very diligent. While I was fighting, they took care of everything here. From building walls to make rooms, and moving the tools here that was supposed to be used for the test to a single room. All the rooms are very tidy.


    ¡°Can you see the smallest room in this ce?¡± Mona asked me on the way.


    ¡°Is it the third room on the right?¡± I pointed at the smallest room.


    ¡°That is small, but not the smallest. Seems like you are simr to the past me. You can¡¯t see too deep in a dungeon, right?¡±


    She¡¯s right. Well, since she has simr ability, she should have experienced it in the past as well.


    ¡°I can say that I¡¯m stronger than rence, but it¡¯s all thanks to my Divine Vision. I can see and predict the opponent¡¯s next move by seeing their muscles movement. You¡¯re also simr right?¡± Mona asked.


    ¡°Right. You¡¯re going to teach me how I can see better?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right. Since you also defeated the All-seeing eye, I can say that our ability are practically the same. You can see objects from distance and see-through any objects, right? That¡¯s not all this power have. If you gained more experience, you can also see your opponents¡¯ weaknesses. And now that I¡¯m a zombie, it should be difficult for you to see my weakness in a fight since there¡¯s a limit of what you see in my body. Anyway, let¡¯s learn by doing it,¡± Mona said.


    She¡¯s right. Although I can see rence¡¯s position with Divine Vision, I didn¡¯t know what move he will do since his body although looks like human from the outside, the inside is like Victoria. Difficult to predict since they both don¡¯t have muscles.


    But for Mona who has been here for a long time, and see the Aura usersing after her and the zombies from this ce, she should have learned how to predict someone¡¯s movement. Even better than me at least.


    I need to learn it from her. Although my enemies are mages and not Aura users, this ability will be useful.


    What if I fight another dragon who has been tamed and modified by the cult? If I improved my ability to predict my opponent¡¯s move, I should have easier time.


    And our training here finally started. I hope the others also get stronger from their experience fighting these zombies who can¡¯t die.

 Chapter 566

    Chapter 566: Master and Disciples Training Again


    ¡°Roy, I will go back and have a chat with my master. I may be much weaker than I was in the past, but maybe master or anyone else here can help me get stronger. Maybe using technique without Aura. I¡¯ll leave a lot of Blobbies with you,¡± Victoria said as she left.


    I am now wearing Blobbyarmor instead of Victoriarmor. But the amount of Blobbies she left is enough for me to shoot a barrage of bullets without having to worry that I¡¯m wasting bullets.


    ¡°A slime that can transform into anything you want as weapon. In the past, your familiar will be every Aura users dream familiar. But if you use it as weapon, does it mean that you have no main weapon?¡± Mona asked.


    ¡°Although I¡¯m more proficient in spear technique, you¡¯re right that I have no main weapon,¡± I replied.


    ¡°That¡¯s a shame. If your main weapon is a huge battle axe, I can teach you a thing or two about it. It¡¯s my main weapon after all,¡± Mona said as the Blobbyspear in her hand turned into a huge battle axe.


    ¡°Well, I do use huge battle axe from time to time. Usually against monsters with strong defense. But I don¡¯t have any preference in what I use. Different type of opponent, different type of weapons,¡± I said.


    ¡°I guess you¡¯re also the first Aura users who uses various weapons. Are you sure that¡¯s the path you¡¯re willing to take?¡± Mona asked.


    .....


    ¡°What path? That I will learn all kind of weapons? Maybe. The age of Aura users has gone. And I don¡¯t know if there will be anyone else who will be Aura user in the future. And I don¡¯t really care. What I want is the destruction of my source of trauma, the cult,¡± I exined.


    There are no more Aura users left in the world. And my enemies are either monsters or mages. If I only use one weapon as my main weapon, I know that I can get stronger just by going down that path. But what I want is not getting stronger. It¡¯s just a path I need to take to get what I want.


    What I want is the destruction of the cult. The decisiveness of killing my enemy. Whatever weapon, I don¡¯t care.


    ¡°For Aura users, we used Aura from our body to strengthen our body, or weapon. That¡¯s the basic of using Aura. But there are still difference. After bing a ghost and meet other Aura users, we agreed that there are two kinds of Aura users. One is martial artists who seek to get stronger and stronger, and assassins. I think you are closer to assassin than a martial artist. There¡¯s no real differences. Just their goals,¡± Mona exined.


    Hmm... if assassin is someone who use any means necessary to get what he wants, I guess that¡¯s me.


    Maybe there are assassins among the ancient Aura users here. And since they can¡¯t do anything other than talking as ghosts, they discussed many things including the difference between those who seeks strength, and those who have a clear goal and don¡¯t care what methods they use.


    Well, a thousand years being together here without being able to leave can do that to you.


    ¡°Then, what do you want to learn from me? Other than Divine Vision?¡± Mona asked.


    ¡°Just teach me everything you¡¯re good at. Including fighting using axe as weapon. I have never fought any Aura users before, so this is a good experience. The closest thing to an Aura users that I have fought are the werewolves. But they are different. Please teach me well,¡± I said.


    ¡°Good. Let¡¯s see how good you are in utilizing your Divine Vision in a fight,¡± Mona said as she charged at me.


    We started sparring right away, and the result was my instant loss.


    ¡°What the hell?¡± I was confused as Iy on the ground with Mona¡¯s axe struck the ground right next to my head.


    I did expect that I would lose since my opponent is an ancient Aura user who has a lot of experience fighting other Aura users. But not this quick. I couldn¡¯t even see the move she used with my Divine Vision.


    ¡°You have a lot of experience fighting against monsters and mages. But fighting another Aura user is different. Though I think rence was just too weak. He cut down the tree thanks to his Aura ability which helps him get stronger. Now that his body has no blood, he¡¯s just an average Aura user,¡± Mona said.


    ¡°I guess I¡¯m the same. I depended too much on my Aura ability as well that I can¡¯t see you. Do you have any advice?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Learn by doing. And don¡¯t die while learning,¡± Mona said.


    ¡°...At least rence is still a better teacher. Well, I kind of agree that it¡¯s best to learn by doing it. Let¡¯s go again!¡± I said. This time, I transformed Blobbyarmor into Blobbygun. I don¡¯t think she will kill me, so I don¡¯t need to put on an armor


    ¡°What¡¯s that weapon?¡± Mona asked.


    ¡°Something to cover my weakness in long-range attack,¡± I said as I shoot Blobbybullets at Mona.


    ¡°Oh, is that wind magic? No, wait. You said that you¡¯re only a summoner and an air mage. Which mean this is air element magic?¡± Mona asked.


    ¡°With the help of tools.¡±


    ¡°But without Aura. There are some Aura users who came after me that can pour their Aura on their arrow even after they let go of the arrow. I suggest you to learn from themter,¡± Mona said as she easily blocked the Blobbybullets.


    Using Divine Vision, she won¡¯t easily get distracted by the bullets. Well, this is a training. I will surely get stronger here.


    ....


    ¡°So, what do you want to learn from the loser?¡±


    Back near the entrance, where Roy was fighting rence, or defeating rence in an instant to be exact, rence is talking with his two former students.


    After seeing how he could be defeated so easily, none of the people that Roy brought asked him for his guidance. But his two former students, Victoria and Sonia, approached him after everyone left.


    ¡°Yeah, you¡¯re weak. But at that time, there were many other Aura users. And you still stand strong. You haven¡¯t used your Aura ability yet, aren¡¯t you? Back when you were fighting Roy?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Actually, I can¡¯t use them anymore. The ability I inherited, and the ability I gained myself, both of them are rted to blood although different. And this body has no blood in it, so I¡¯m the weakest here,¡± rence said.


    ¡°Even back then, you were weak without your abilities. But you still managed to do something against the people who asked you for a fight, right? Teach us that,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Teaching a slime and a ghost? Well, Victoria can transform into her human form. But what about Sonia?¡± rence asked his students.


    ¡°I can still touch and carry light stuffs. If it¡¯s just touching, tapping, or a slight push and pull, I can do that,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Hmm... I guess I have something I can teach you. Let¡¯s practice martial arts then. Since you two are difficult to fight normally, just making some distraction can help Roy a lot,¡± rence said.


    The others might have think of him as a weakling for being defeated in an instant by Roy. But rence is actually quite smart.


    Victoria is a ck Slime which is most likely immortal. And Sonia can¡¯t be killed through normal magic. So, even if they get close to the enemies, there won¡¯t be much problem. And they can make distraction so the others can defeat the enemies faster.


    rence can tell all that from a nce. And he instantly prepared some training method that suit the two. Martial arts which is focused not on defeating the enemies. Just some light movement that the two monsters can learn. And not just the two. The others can also learn it as well.


    ¡°Alright. Victoria, stay in your human form and be my sparring partner. Although I won¡¯t use Aura, it¡¯s best that I don¡¯t practice with Sonia. After I show you how it¡¯s done, you can practice it with Sonia or the others. Now, Victoria, stand still over there,¡± rence said.


    rence then showed the two monsters how to fight as the weak without using power. He also taught them sword fighting again like it was in the past. Even Sonia is holding a light Blobbysword as the three training again like it was a thousand years ago.


    ¡°...Victoria, why are you in a macho man form?¡± rence asked Victoria who suddenly transformed from her original woman form into a macho man.


    ¡°I got bored of training, so I transformed myself to get out of boredom as I train,¡± Victoria said casually.


    ¡°Master, she has always been a weird one. And now that she partnered up with another weird guy, Roy, she became even weirder. Please ignore her antics,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°...Just what happened after a thousand years? Though I was surprised more by the fact that Sonia had a harem. Though why didn¡¯t you try to charm me?¡± rence asked Sonia.


    ¡°You¡¯re too ugly for my taste,¡± Sonia replied calmly.


    ¡°...You two! Swing your sword another extra ten thousand! No rest for you two!¡±


    The three continued practicing as they reminiscing about the past. Although rence looked angry, he¡¯s actually happy to see that his two disciples are doing well.


    ...if being killed and reincarnated as monsters can be called as doing well.

 Chapter 567

    Chapter 567: Learning Mind¡¯s Eye


    One weekter, we still did a lot of training in this testing ground. I don¡¯t think I have achieved a satisfactory strength to fight master level mages.


    There are many of the ancient Aura users here who have fought against master level mages. Some win and some lose. And they still think that I¡¯m not strong enough to defeat a master level mage.


    I haven¡¯t finished Mona¡¯s training to improve my Divine Vision. But I can train it while doing other training with other ancient Aura users. It¡¯s better this way.


    ¡°...so, you want me to teach you while you¡¯re blindfolded?¡±


    The one who asked me was the ancient Aura user I asked to be my partner. He¡¯s someone who is specialized in assassination.


    The others said that he was weak during the test. But they also said that it was because he is not specialized in what was tested at that time. I asked him to train me because the Aura users who came from the same generation as he did all said that this guy is the most famous assassin of his time.


    He was famous enough to be given nickname of Shadow de by everyone at that time. Either they are Aura users, mages, or just normal civilians. And I just called him Shadow.


    .....


    As for why he asked me that question, it¡¯s because I am fighting while being blindfolded. It¡¯s the training that Mona told me to do to improve my Divine Vision.


    ¡°You¡¯re weak, but your fighting skillbined with your Divine Vision is much better than me. I have nothing to teach you about it. But I can teach you to improve your Divine Vision. And to do that, you need to be blind.¡±


    That¡¯s what Mona told me. And that¡¯s why I covered my eyes with bandages. Though the real reason is actually because Mona sliced my eyelids and the blood is annoying me. That¡¯s the punishment I got every time I tried to use Divine Vision.


    It wasn¡¯t deep enough that I don¡¯t have to worry about being really blind. But I wish that she won¡¯t do something this insane. If she can ask an Aura user to blind me with his Aura ability, she should have just done that!


    Though I wonder why he want to blind people? Just what kind of experience has he went through for him to truly desire people¡¯s blindness. That¡¯s just crazy.


    Anyway, here I am. Fighting one of the greatest assassin of his time, blindfolded. But thanks to this training, my other senses have improved. Though this is still insane.


    ¡°Since you¡¯re an awesome assassin, you should be able to hide your killing intent. I want you to hit me while hiding your killing intent. That way, I can improve my sense of danger. Hopefully,¡± I said.


    ¡°Well, if that¡¯s what you want. And after your vision training is over, you want me to teach you about assassination?¡± Shadow asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. Please teach me well,¡± I said.


    ¡°I can only teach by doing. Don¡¯t die,¡± Shadow said before he suddenly disappear.


    He didn¡¯t just disappear. He¡¯s hiding his presence from me. I can sense that Jewel who is watching my training curiously is looking at an empty space, which should be where Shadow is.


    As he disappeared, I quickly pierced Reizpear toward the location Jewel is looking at. But I didn¡¯t feel anything as my attack only pierced empty air.


    ¡°I¡¯ll teach you about assassination skills as well. First is hiding skill. It doesn¡¯t mean you¡¯re just hiding your position. Distracting your opponent from where you really are is one way to hide your presence,¡± Shadow said as he shed my neck lightly.


    Good thing I reacted quickly. When his dagger touched my neck, I quickly pulled back my head so the de only shed me lightly. But if I reacted toote, I would have died.


    ¡°I can tell that you have improved. Even without your Divine Vision and your sight is blocked, you can still see the surrounding clearly, right?¡± Shadow asked me.


    He¡¯s right. Although it was just one week, I have managed to learn what¡¯s Mona and many ancient Aura users here called as Mind¡¯s Eye. Using Aura and all my senses, I gathered all information into my brain so I can start seeing everything without my eyes.


    I can tell how big this room is, and everything in this ce. Though I couldn¡¯t sense Shadow¡¯s presence at all. And how did Jewel looked at an empty air like that?


    ¡°For your information, I¡¯m also good in magic. I only have one element, which is shadow element. And I had improved it to expert level before I died. If I could reach master level, I would have seeded the test. As for my Aura ability, I will tell you about itter,¡± Shadow said.


    No wonder he¡¯s called Shadow de. He was a shadow mage back when he was alive. Although I don¡¯t know everything that shadow mage can do, I have Graham who showed it to me.


    ¡°You¡¯re using clone like graham. And I think you added something like Illusion to make your clone can only be seen by Jewel and not by me, right?¡± I said.


    ¡°I see that you¡¯re smart. I guess as fellow doctors, we need to be smart to save lives. And your angel familiar also has shadow element although he can only create a clone. Since he said he can use shadow clone, I have practiced with him, you know?¡± Shadow said.


    ¡°Oh, I don¡¯t know that you were also a doctor. A doctor and an assassin. That¡¯s a dangerousbination. Also, thanks for training my familiar. How is Graham?¡± I asked even though we¡¯re in the middle of a battle.


    ¡°He¡¯s good. His shadow element is much weaker than his light element. It¡¯s because he¡¯s closer to an angel. But he managed to create two more shadow clones. So, he has three clones now. And if you think you can tell where I am just by talking, you¡¯re dead wrong.¡±


    I swung Reizpear to the source of the voice, but even though the voice was still there, I didn¡¯t hit anything at all. His Aura ability must be rted to illusion.


    If I can sense him, my Mind¡¯s Eye will improve even more. And Mona said that if Ibined Mind¡¯s Eye with Divine Vision, I can see more things. That¡¯s why I trained this way.


    Though I still couldn¡¯t see him now. I can only react when I sensed something moving close to me. Like when his dagger touched me.


    The exchanges between us keep going as Jewel has moved somewhere to get her training partner. Only me, Shadow, and Mona is in this room.


    Suddenly, I feel something is changing. The room suddenly get bigger. And when I think I chased after Shadow, it turns out I was running to a wall and crashed.


    ¡°Ow, what the hell!?¡±


    I think the damage from crashing to a wall is much bigger than being poked by Shadow¡¯s dagger.


    ¡°We¡¯ll change the training method. We won¡¯t just fight in this small room, but we will also chase each other in this maze-like ce. Thanks to your girlfriend, this ce turned into an amazingbyrinth where my power can be shown to the fullest. Let¡¯s start now!¡± Shadow said and I no longer feel his presence.


    ¡°...What?¡±


    ¡°It means this will be a game of tag. Though as long as your Mind¡¯s Eye is iplete, you are forbidden to take of the blindfold. Oh, you¡¯re also allowed to pick another partner. But Shadow de will still sneak attack you from time to time, so be careful,¡± Mona said.


    What the hell? Training while also being wary of Shadow¡¯s ambush? He¡¯s the greatest assassin of his time! Does she want me to die!?


    ¡°You might feel safe with your Divine Vision and your portal. And you think that this is just a training. But even so, you still need to think of this as a life-threatening situation as well. Aura users can grow faster when they are in the face of danger. That¡¯s the true fact about Aura users. Don¡¯t die,¡± Mona said before she leaves the room. She also has been picked by someone to be their practice partner. And she can watch me with her Divine Vision.


    Still, risking my life for a training. I guess I should have expected that this training won¡¯t be easy.


    Although I have been in several life-threatening situations, I can still rest easy since no one I fought has any experience fighting Aura users.


    My first time fighting Aura user was also justst week. I think I have gotten stronger now. But I¡¯m still not strong enough.


    In this ce, there are five ancient Aura users who were not only much stronger than me in fighting back when they were still alive. For that, most of the ancient Aura users here are stronger than me. But those five, they were also mages. Master level mages in their time. And they can use their magic again now that they have material form.


    I will need to be strong enough to defeat those five master level mages so I have the confidence to destroy the cult and survive.


    Not just me. Ang, Ka, and the others as well, are all asked those five master level mages for a spar and to receive some instructions.


    I don¡¯t know when the cult will start fighting back, but I need to get stronger faster first before I could fight them. Good thing this ce has the facilities to do that. The zombies of the ancient Aura users.


    And for the test, I will be sure that I can pass the test and be an Aura Master. Though I don¡¯t know what the content of the test is since it¡¯s random. But I will be sure that I pass the test no matter how long it will take.

 Chapter 568

    Chapter 568: The Door is Opening


    It has been five months since I cut down the tree. And we have been training here every day.


    Right now, I¡¯m in a chasing game against Shadow again. This time, the whole ce has been changed and keep changing thanks to one of the five master level mages. He¡¯s a powerful earth mage who has reached master level, and his power as an Aura user was great as well.


    But unlike a few months ago, this time, I can tell where Shadow is even with his illusion. Not just Shadow, I also chase after another invisible creature. Spot.


    He¡¯s using his camouge which has been strengthened through training here as well. If it was the me a few months ago, I won¡¯t be able to see him even with my Divine Vision. But now, even if my sight is blocked, my Mind¡¯s Eye can see everything as if my Divine Vision hasn¡¯t been blocked at all.


    And afterbining both Mind¡¯s Eye and Divine Vision, I have the greatest sight and I can see everything in this ce. Except for what¡¯s inside the mysterious door that no one has ever opened.


    Not only did I ying tag with Shadow and Spot, the others also here as obstacles. They would attack me and I need to fight them.


    rence, Mona, Bearded Baldy, and even my own friends, Victoria, Sonia, Ka, and the others. As for Ang, she¡¯s too strong for me to fight while being blindfolded.


    .....


    The five master level mages here praised Ang for her power even though she¡¯s not an Aura user. And they have never seen a mage in the past who has reached expert level mage in four different elements at the same time. Ang seems to be the very first multielement mage.


    And she¡¯s currently cultivating with the instruction of two master level mages so she could be one. She¡¯s most likely to be the first master level mage with us.


    As for the others, they have be considerably stronger now. Although most of the zombies are Aura users, some are still mages. And there are five master level mages, and about thirty expert level mages here. From the total of about two hundred zombies.


    I haven¡¯t practiced with everyone, but the Aura users told me that I only need to practice with the strongest of each skill. Like the strongest in fist-fighting, swordsmanship, and other skills. So, I didn¡¯t need to ask each one of the ghost.


    And I did all that while being blindfolded like right now. Although I have removed the blindfold once to test how thebined vision of Mind¡¯s Eye and Divine Vision, I covered it again for this chase.


    And finally, I cornered Shadow after I escape and fought the others. With daggers in each hands, he¡¯s facing me one on one.


    I easily parried his daggers by pushing the side of the daggers, and gave a strong blow to his chest. Creating a hole on his chest that would kill any human being. Though he¡¯s a zombie.


    ¡°Good job, Roy. I don¡¯t think there is anything that we can teach you anymore. You just only need to get stronger by yourself from now on,¡± Shadow said.


    ¡°Thank you. You and everyone here have taught me a lot of things,¡± I said.


    ¡°Not just you. The others who will fight that Evil God has grown much stronger than when they first enter this ce. They even learned the magic we used in the past. Although there¡¯s a weird one among you, he also has grown stronger,¡± Mona said.


    The weird one she¡¯s talking about was Kron.


    After we prepared the schedule, I asked Ka about Kron¡¯s time toe here. And Ka forgot to add him.


    And after I called him that there¡¯s a great training ce, he ended uping here every day like me and Ang. And instead of asking for instruction, he just asked the ancient Aura users here for a fight because he thinks it will help him stronger. Though I hope he also asked for some guidance about magic that was used in the past.


    As for Ang, even though she has been given instruction, no one here can really teach her because she¡¯s one of a kind. Just like me, all of them agreed that she can grow stronger by trusting her instinct.


    Maybe Kron is jealous of her. That¡¯s why he thinks that he can do what Ang do as well.


    Though at least he has grown stronger. But he was branded as a weirdo by the ancient Aura users.


    Actually, he was the third weirdest person here. The first was me, and the second was Victoria. I mean, there are no one among so many ancient Aura users here who learned from ostriches. And there are no powerful air mages here. Rather, they¡¯re the one asking me for instructions about air magic.


    The one I got along the closest here were Mona and Shadow. Mona because she¡¯s also a Divine Vision user, and Shadow because we¡¯re both doctor. He was curious about all the medical knowledge unknown to him in the past.


    I have now learned everything they could teach me. Although we haven¡¯t fully tested our strength to each other. I know that I¡¯m still no match against many of them.


    Not only they were from the age where Aura users were many, they have spent over a thousand years here exchanging ideas and learning from each other.


    ¡°Well, you have learned everything you can learn. What now? Will you just go and ask everyone for a spar?¡± Mona asked.


    ¡°Well-¡±


    Before I could even reply, suddenly, there¡¯s a great tremor in this ce. Is it an earthquake?


    The earth mages including Ang, Sara, and the master level mages, get down and touched the ground with their hands trying to stop the quake. But nothing happened.


    ¡°What is this tremor? This is even stronger than the magic of master level mage!¡± Ang shouted.


    ¡°Stronger than master level mages? Does it mean there¡¯s a level beyond that!? Is it the Evil God? Has he found me?¡±


    I was panicked in an instant. But I still quickly grabbed Victoria and prepare to fight.


    Luckily, it was not the Evil God. It¡¯s this ce. The door that no one has ever entered is opened. And someone ising out of that ce.


    ¡°That¡¯s enough of training. I will force you to start the test right now.¡±


    From the door, a man came out.


    ¡°Are you the creator of this ce? And you¡¯re alive!?¡±


    I was so shocked seeing someone who is at least three thousand years old is still alive. That¡¯s the time the oldest zombie here died.


    With my Divine Vision, I can see that blood is flowing in his body. Real blood. And all the organs in his body are functioning normally.


    He just looks like someone in his forties. A very healthy man. Shadow can also see that since he¡¯s also a doctor like me. But I can tell that clearly because I can see inside of this man¡¯s body.


    ¡°Had enough of looking? That¡¯s right. I¡¯m the creator of this ce, and I¡¯m still alive,¡± the man said.


    ¡°...What should I call you? Landlord?¡± I asked.


    ¡°If that¡¯s what you want. I spent most of my time sleeping after I made this ce. Name is of no important to me,¡± the man said.


    ¡°Though I owned the house and thend where this ce is currently. So, I¡¯m the realndlord. And you should be my tenant and pay for your rent. Especially with this many people living under my house,¡± I said.


    ¡°I slept most of my life, until someone cut down the tree which is the door that led to this testing ground. And once I woke up, I see everything that happened not just in this ce, but also in the surface. And even if I expect that you would reply in a strange way, I didn¡¯t expect that you would ask me to pay for the rent. I don¡¯t have any money, but you have received many things in this ce, right? Consider the rent is paid,¡± he said.


    ¡°...Okay. Then, I will give you a name that I can call so that we won¡¯t be confused. I¡¯ll just call you Timmy,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then I will be Timmy. I will start the test soon. If there¡¯s any question you want to ask, ask away. Not just Roy, but everyone here can ask me anything,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°You said that you have watched everything in the surface as well. Can you tell me where the Evil God and all the remaining cult members are?¡± I asked.


    If I know his ce, I can go there and assassinate him right away. At least that¡¯s what I¡¯m thinking.


    ¡°Unfortunately, I don¡¯t know. My magic level has surpassed master level and could detect everything in this continent. Which mean that person you called Evil God is either not touching the ground, or at least he is not anywhere in this continent,¡± Timmy said.


    I was shocked to hear that. There are many things I¡¯d like to ask Timmy. But one thing for sure is that I can only dy the test by asking him questions. I can no longer utilize the zombies in this ce for training anymore. That¡¯s for sure.

 Chapter 569

    Chapter 569: What the Test Will be


    ¡°Oh, I have something to ask!¡±


    One of the zombies here raised his hand and has something to ask. But I quickly interrupted. Because rather than asking one question and hearing one answer, that would take too long.


    ¡°Before we start asking you questions, I think it¡¯s best if you exined to us about everything that you know first,¡± I said to Timmy.


    ¡°I think that¡¯s for the best as well. Please listen carefully,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°Wait. Because I don¡¯t want to have your exnation be interrupted, I want everyone here who thinks that hearing to your exnation is a pain in the ass, or if they think their intellect is not enough to listen to your exnation, to move to another room where you can return to training or do whatever you want,¡± I suggested to the others, while also open some portals to get the kings and the others who weren¡¯t scheduled to train today.


    Albert and the other kings should have some questions. They also entered this ce from time to time to ask something to the ancient Aura users. Even Fabio who is an expert level mage also trained with the ancient Aura users.


    They also came here because there were some ancient Aura users who were members of some royalties in the past. Even one of the master level mages was a king himself.


    .....


    But before I could exin why I called them all here, someone interrupted.


    ¡°You think we¡¯re stupid enough to not hear about the creator of this ce¡¯s intentions? We have been forced to live as ghosts for the past thousands of years!¡± an fiery-looking ancient Aura user shouted.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know about you, but my friends know their limit and willingly move to another room to continue training. If you want to stay, then stay and listen. That¡¯s all there is to it,¡± I said while looking at Ang, Kron, and some others who directly went to another room.


    ¡°Oh, I¡¯m going as well! I like moving my body more than listening to someone¡¯s lectures. I don¡¯t care if I¡¯m going to disappear or not because of the creator¡¯s you pass this test, but as long as I can move my body now, all is well!¡±


    The one who said that was the Bearded Baldy. He¡¯s the one who likes to fight the most here. And I learned a lot about fist-fighting from him. He¡¯s the best barefist fighter among all ancient Aura users here.


    Not just striking like punches and kicks. He can also grapple as well. It could be said that he has reached the peak of unarmedbat.


    Although he was strong, he still failed the test. Because at that time, the test forced him to be smart. Which is something he couldn¡¯t do as he is a rash fellow. So, he died.


    Bearded Baldy then left the ce to train with Ang and the others. And soon enough, some ancient Aura users also left thinking that they don¡¯t need to care about the creator¡¯s exnation.


    All the monsters also left. They know that their next move should be based on my decision, so they don¡¯t really care about the meaning behind this ce.


    As for me, although I think that this is a pain in the ass, I have no choice but to listen since it¡¯s rted to the test for me to be an Aura Master. And I¡¯m also curious about the strength beyond master level that he has.


    Ang and the others must be thinking that Ka the others are here, so they can just listen to the summaryter. Even though Ang must be the one who wants to know about what¡¯s beyond master level the most, she must be thinking that our exnationter would be simpler and easier for her to understand.


    ¡°I think that¡¯s all of them. You can exin everything now,¡± I said to Timmy.


    ¡°Alright. Let¡¯s start with why we decided to make this ce.¡±


    Timmy started exining how he and his friends created this ce.


    Timmy was an Aura user who reached the level of Aura Master. And his two friends were not even Aura users. They are just mages. But they are strong.


    While Timmy reached master level in his earth element, his friends also reached master level. One with a rare nt element, and the other with even rarer death element.


    The three then travel the whole continent while enjoying their lives happily, until the three of them got bored. And that¡¯s when Timmy decided to make something. A ce for entertainment. And the three decided to make Aura users as their entertainers.


    ¡°...You know what? You three have terrible personality,¡± I said to Timmy.


    ¡°We were bored. The three of us then reached a level beyond master level, and there¡¯s nothing that can even entertain us anymore. We decided to create something entertaining, and this is the result. It¡¯s because Aura Master is something that all Aura users desire to be,¡± Timmy said.


    Timmy then exined that Aura Master is the title of the strongest Aura user. And it¡¯s not an empty title. Because once someone became Aura Master, the use of their Aura improved and they could even create this ce that has been standing for several thousand years.


    The bored three guys made this ce as an entertaining way to be Aura Master for other Aura users. Though one way to do it is simple, it¡¯s the most difficult thing to do.


    It¡¯s to kill the previous Aura Master.


    Even though it¡¯s rted to his own death, he make it entertaining. What a weird guy.


    There¡¯s another way, which is for me to gain the ability by myself. But that would be difficult.


    But why is fighting an Aura Master is easier? Who would think that way?


    To make Aura users got the chance to be Aura Master, they need to pass the test which these three strongest people at that time tasked to the Aura users. And each test is different. But the only way to be able to take the test is to cut down the tree.


    The nt mage created the tree, and the Aura Master made it so the tree will stand forever until someone became Aura Master. And the Aura Master who is also an earth mage build this ce underground. The death mage made it so those who died in the testing ground will be ghosts and locked in this ce until someone became Aura Master. They would also gain a body once someone entered the testing ground. And when someone finally became the Aura Master, they will disappearpletely.


    So, this ce is truly a ce for entertainment. And it seems that Timmy is so confident in his strength that he made this ce this way because he believes that no one would be able to kill him.


    But now, Timmy¡¯s two friends were already dead. Leaving Timmy alone who has longer lifespan thanks to reaching a level beyond master level, and also bing an Aura Master.


    ¡°My best friends are dead now. And I want to follow them, but my life will still go on for several more centuries at the shortest. I want to die soon, and I think you have what it takes to kill me. So, the test I will give you is something that will help you be stronger. And hopefully, this is enough to make you kill that Evil God,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°...Can¡¯t you just go out there and kill that Evil God? Since you¡¯re both Aura Master and a mage beyond master level, you should be able to do it, right? Also, what is the stage beyond master level called?¡± I asked Timmy.


    ¡°There¡¯s no name for it yet and we have no interest in giving it a name. As for why I can¡¯t kill the Evil God myself, It¡¯s because I have no interest in doing it. After my friends died after their lifespan ended even after reaching something beyond master level, everything seems dull to me. I also want to die but there¡¯s no one strong enough to kill me. And so, I want you to be stronger and kill me,¡± Timmy said.


    ...What an annoying guy. If he wants to die, he can just kill himself, right?


    And being an Aura Master means I will have a long lifespan? I might end up witnessing everyone I cared about die in the future. But if it means I can destroy the cult, I will do it.


    I also have my monsters after all. Their lifespans is quite long. I can apany them longer until I die.


    Albert and the others then tried to convince Timmy to go out and kill the Evil God. Even if he doesn¡¯t want to fight, he could at least stay alive until we destroy the cult. Just by being alive, the ghosts here can be zombies who helped us getting stronger.


    ¡°I can¡¯t do that. They have died for a long time and they are not monsters like your ghost friend is. And the death mage who made them this way have died already. I don¡¯t know how long they can stay as ghosts, but it should be shorter than the rest of my lifespan,¡± Timmy said.


    Few centuries are long, you know? If their lives as ghosts are shorter, it should be at least a few decades.


    After trying to convince him many times, Timmy didn¡¯t budge at all. So, we continued with asking him some important questions. But in the end, the answers to those questions are things that the ghosts have suspected for a long time. So, it doesn¡¯t surprise us anymore.


    ¡°Fine. I¡¯ll do it. I¡¯ll take the test, and I will kill you. But can you tell us how you reach a stage beyond master level mage?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Stay true to your path. That¡¯s the only thing I can say. I think the one who is most likely to reach that level is your friend, Ang. Although the others have potential to be one as well, Ang¡¯s potential is much higher,¡± Timmy said.


    That¡¯s the only advice he can give? Well, that¡¯s fine. Let¡¯s see what the test will be.


    ¡°The test is for you to defeat every single Aura users here other than you. Unlike before, once they die, they won¡¯t be able to recover. You can use portal to go back and rest beforeing back to fight again. There¡¯s no time limit,¡± Timmy said.


    Seeing the zombies¡¯ shocked expression, I can tell that this is the first time a test like this happen. To kill them.


    But their expression then changed into excitement. I think I need to write a will right away.

 Chapter 570

    Chapter 570: The Power of Aura Master


    ¡°Kill every single ancient Aura user here?¡± I asked Timmy.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s right that we are ancient Aura users for you. But I don¡¯t like how you call me that,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°You¡¯re the oldest one here. You don¡¯t have any right toin,¡± I replied.


    Since he¡¯s the creator of this ce, he is the oldest one here.


    Still, bing both Aura Master and reaching a stage beyond master level makes him have a long lifespan. Although most of the time he was sleeping. That¡¯s what makes him able to live for thousands of years. But he doesn¡¯t look to be over forty years old.


    Though if he didn¡¯t sleep, his lifespan should be about a few centuries. And that¡¯s still a lot for a human.


    If I be an Aura Master, I might be able to live for at least two or three hundred years more. And I might end up getting asked to do something troublesome. I mean Albert and the other kings are already looking at me as if they want to request something for me.


    .....


    Well, that¡¯s understandable. In about fifty years, Albert would be too old to lead a kingdom, and n would be the next king. Or maybe n¡¯s son. And to make the kingdom stable, someone needs to watch the kingdom over. And someone who lives long like me is the perfect choice.


    Though I can only think about it if I truly end up bing an Aura Master. But why does it feel like Albert and the kings believed that I can kill Timmy?


    After passing the test, which is already difficult, I need to kill Timmy. The strongest human from thousand of years ago. The chance of me winning is slim.


    ¡°Do I have the choice to not do it?¡± I asked Timmy.


    ¡°It¡¯s either do it or not and never be able to return again. I have no n in continuing this testing ground since you¡¯re thest Aura user. Also, I want to die while I¡¯m still at my strongest. I witnessed my friends died of old age. Seeing them died and looked so frail and weak frightened me. I don¡¯t want to die like that,¡± Timmy said.


    So, it¡¯s some sort of trauma for him? Just like my trauma is because of the cult, he¡¯s afraid of die of old age.


    ¡°Can¡¯t you just go fight the Evil God and die then? You might be able to weaken him and I can give the finishing blow then,¡± I suggested.


    ¡°I don¡¯t want that. I also want to left my legacy. The Aura Master. You might be able to be an Aura Master by yourself without having to kill me, but I want to teach thest Aura user to be an Aura Master,¡± Timmy said.


    ...This guy has a difficult personality. If he wants to teach me about Aura Master, he can do that without having to die. Doesn¡¯t he have anything that makes him want to live longer? Good food maybe?


    ¡°Wait, you have been sleeping and staying here for a long time. Don¡¯t you need any food and water to consume?¡± I asked Timmy.


    ¡°Of course I need them. We have a farm inside that room and we eat things we farmed ourselves. With the nt mage, we didn¡¯t need to wait long until they could be harvested. Though I haven¡¯t eaten anything since he died, I still didn¡¯t feel hungry at all,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°That does it. Being an Aura Master will make you no longer a human,¡± Shadow said.


    I nodded hearing that. As a doctor, we both know that humans need to consume something so we can live. But not needing food for years? Even if we can survive longer without food and water, we won¡¯t be human anymore.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. You can still eat if you want to,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°Phew, that¡¯s good.¡±


    ¡°Though you need to be an Aura Master first,¡± Timmy said.


    I don¡¯t need to think about it for now. I guess I will prepare for the test now.


    ¡°Sonia, tell Ang and the others who aren¡¯t here to return. We need to tell them that the time for our training here is ending,¡± I said.


    Sonia then left and return soon after while Timmy answered questions from the others. I was just sitting resting before the fight.


    ¡°Oh, Timmy. Before we start the test, can you show us the real power of an Aura Master? We¡¯re curious about it,¡± I asked Timmy.


    ¡°You want me to show it? Well, if it¡¯s just for a while. But you have to remember that you need to kill me, or I will kill you in the fight. You can¡¯t escape from me with your portal once the fight started. I can sense you anywhere in this continent. I will continue chasing after you until one of us die. And you won¡¯t have any time to think about the cult anymore,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°...I¡¯m just gonna take a guess, but you must be one hell of a criminal in the past. Am I right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°In a way, you¡¯re right. I was a king in thisnd. But my kingdom is ruined just as we finished making this ce after my great grandson took over. It was long before the first person entered this ce,¡± Timmy said.


    So, he was a king. I¡¯m not really surprised. Someone that strong can¡¯t just be a nobody.


    Though there¡¯s one thing that I agree with him.


    ¡°You heard that, Albert? He thinks he¡¯s simr to a criminal because he was a king. A king is indeed closely rted to a criminal because they can just decide if someone is guilty or not,¡± I said to make fun of Albert.


    ¡°You¡¯re using this chance to make fun of me? I already know that even before I was made into a king. Still, this is surprising that the kings of thisnd in the past and in the present are here together. Though I wonder how many kingdoms existed before Tatrama?¡±


    Just as we were talking, we suddenly feel a huge pressureing from Timmy.


    It¡¯s here. He¡¯s showing us the power of an Aura Master. And all ancient Aura users here, including those who have just returned and be informed took interest. Like the Bearded Baldy.


    ¡°Is it transformation!? You will have a transformation!?¡±


    Why is Victoria so interested in transformation? She can transform herself.


    I look around and see that the ancient Aura users can protect themselves. But the people I brought are not strong enough. Even Sara and Wendy is copsing while protecting Albert. They took the pressure on themselves to protect their king.


    And before the pressure hits harder on Albert and the other kings, I moved and protected them all by standing in front of them and make all the pressure goes into me instead.


    I feel like I¡¯m going to vomit, but I need to endure it. If the kings died, it¡¯s all my fault because I asked Timmy to show me his power.


    But still, this is the power of an Aura Master? If I got this power, I won¡¯t have to worry about any master level mages.


    I need to get this power. Let¡¯s try to get it during the test before fighting Timmy himself.


    Unfortunately for Victoria, there¡¯s no transformation at all. Just the power that Timmy leaked was so powerful and able to make people faint. I want to get this power no matter what.


    If the Evil God reached the stage beyond master level just like Timmy, I need to be at least an Aura Master to defeat him. I don¡¯t know about the past, but there should be some other master level mages who were Aura users as well in the past just like the ancient Aura users here. And the Evil God managed to kill them all. That¡¯s why I need to get this power.


    Those who can¡¯t endure the pressure given by Timmy started to fall. Some even lost their consciousness. But because I protected the kings, the kings won¡¯t faint. But it¡¯s me who feels like fainting.


    I need to endure it to get stronger. Timmy is just showing me his power, and he hasn¡¯t used it in a fight yet. I need to show him that I¡¯m worthy of this power.


    I grabbed the broken pieces of Reizpear in my pocket, and return it to its original form as I slowly take a few steps forward. Just one step closer and I feel even stronger pressure.


    Finally, after what seems like a few hours, I reached in front of Timmy. With my hand holding Reizpear, I pointed the tip of Reizpear toward Timmy for a challenge.


    ¡°I... I will get this power no matter what. I will get even stronger during the test, pass it, and I will kill you,¡± I said to Timmy.


    ¡°Good. As I thought, you might be able to get this power by yourself without having to kill me. But I still ask you to kill me. Alright, I¡¯m done. The next time I use this power, is when I fight you,¡± Timmy said as he returns back to normal and the pressure he gives of disappears.


    Everyone dropped on their knees or even fainting. Except for me.


    Even if I faint, I must not fall down.


    ¡°Prepare yourself. Once you are ready, you will fight the first person. Your first opponent is rence. Good luck,¡± Timmy said as he returns back to the locked room he came from. Maybe he¡¯s preparing something.


    This time, I can see everything inside the room with my Divine Vision. I guess he doesn¡¯t need to hide it anymore.


    My first opponent will be rence, huh? I don¡¯t think it will be like the first fight we had.


    I¡¯d like to fight all of them by myself without asking my familiars or the others for help. It¡¯s so that I can grow stronger.


    But for the first fight, I have someone more suitable to fight than me. Though I still need to rest. I¡¯ll fight when I¡¯m ready.

 Chapter 571

    Chapter 571: The Test Begins


    While resting for a while, I asked Timmy to still create another room for Ang and the others who are not interested in watching my fight to train. Since I¡¯m not a mage, and most of the Aura users here are not a powerful mages with only a few exception, I don¡¯t think the others can learn something from my fight. It¡¯s best for them to train by themselves instead of watching.


    Timmy agreed to that and made another training ground right next to the testing ground. But still, there are many who are interested in the fight. Though of course the monsters, like Shelia, Graham, and Arin prefer to train themselves instead of watching.


    The monsters are creatures that get stronger by fighting themselves instead of watching other fights. Not that they are stupid. Some are actually quite smart. But it¡¯s faster for them to learn from their own experiences.


    After resting, the others who are still here were moving to the audience seats. Leaving only rence, Timmy, Victoria, and I.


    ¡°Timmy, is there any order in how you picked my next opponent?¡± I asked Timmy.


    ¡°Not really. But I made sure that those I think you can still learn more from will be thest. Not that you can¡¯t learn anything from rence and the others Aura users you fight first,¡± Timmy said.


    He¡¯s right. Even though I have defeated rence easily before, I might still be able to learn something from him. Though I will have someone else get the chance to fight rence.


    .....


    Timmy then moves to the audience seat as well leaving only the three of us.


    ¡°I¡¯m going to fight you again? Although the result is obvious, I won¡¯t hold back,¡± rence said.


    ¡°That¡¯s good for me. Anyst word? At least to Victoria and Sonia. They were both your disciples,¡± I suggested rence to say hisst words. After all, once he got defeated, he won¡¯t return anymore. Unlike back when we were training. And he called Victoria and Sonia over to give them hisst words. It¡¯s something between them, so I don¡¯t need to hear it.


    Just how could this happen when the death mage has long died? Maybe it¡¯s because he was a stage beyond master level that he can do it even though it was Timmy who decide the test.


    Now I¡¯m thinking what would happen if I be a powerful air mage beyond master level. Maybe I could control the atmosphere. I can decide if someone is worth breathing or not.


    ...That¡¯s just in evil. Though what matter the most for me is the destruction of the cult and the death of the Evil God.


    Albert and the others said that we should be fine for now. The cult has many casualties with possibly all of the artificial master level mages killed back then. They don¡¯t have enough manpower now to even fight one kingdom after Arturo has been recovered by Fabio. There¡¯s no way that they could fight back again so soon.


    And it has been around five months ever since I started training here. There hasn¡¯t been any moves from the cult at all. They arepletely in hiding now.


    But I¡¯m curious about one thing. The location of the Evil God.


    Timmy who is an earth mage beyond master level mage, which is also probably the stage where the Evil God is, couldn¡¯t detect his location even though Timmy could sense everything in this continent that touched the ground.


    That can only mean that the Evil God is someone that we can¡¯t predict. He¡¯s either not touching the ground, or he doesn¡¯t exist in this continent at all. Maybe he¡¯s in another continent, or maybe he¡¯s in Monsters World or some other world.


    One thing for sure is the he should realizes that the cult can¡¯t conquer or destroy this world without him making an appearance. He will surelye out sooner orter.


    But after everything we did, if he still decides that hee outter, that means there¡¯s something that forces him to not be able toe out at all. But we can use that time to get stronger.


    ¡°I¡¯m curious. If I defeat the ancient Aura users here with my monsters, will that increase my experiences and able to make me reach expert level in summoning? Fighting around two hundreds Aura users should help me get there. If so, what do you think is the best monster for me to make a contract with?¡± I asked rence.


    Though this question is not only for him. But also all the ancient Aura users here and even Timmy.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know anything stronger than a dragon,¡± rence said.


    ¡°Before I cut down the tree, I killed a dragon in the fight against the cult. And I already have a Kaiser Dragon as a friend in Monsters World. Do you have any other suggestion?¡± I asked again.


    ¡°All I can say is for you to trust your instinct. All the monsters you made contract with were not mistakes. Whether you were looking for them yourself or it was by chance, the monsters around you are all good choices. But you only need to think about it once you have be an Aura Master,¡± rence said.


    He¡¯s right. Not only I have to fight the ancient Aura users, I also need to fight Timmy as well. And once the fight against him started, I can¡¯t escape unless I move to the Monsters World since he will chase me all the time.


    ¡°Oh, before we started, I forgot one thing. Does anyone here have something like magical weapon that you used to have in the past and possibly still out there? Other than getting stronger myself, if I have strong weapons, I can be even stronger. If you have any, tell Ka about it. She will then tell the kings and the kings will send their people to look for them,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Did you just ordered the kings to do something?¡± rence asked.


    ¡°I might be amoner, but I have higher position than any of the kings. And they will be happy if I get stronger as well because not only I will help the world by destroying the cult, I also have no interest in their position.¡±


    That¡¯s right. There are only disadvantage if they made me their enemies. I also have no interest in bing a king of thisnd.


    ¡°Alright, let¡¯s start. Victoria, you will fight. I will send you Aura remotely. Just think that you are an Aura user like in the past,¡± I said to Victoria who has transformed into her original human form. Not the beautified version of her, or just random person she took fancy to transform into.


    This is the result of my training. One of them is to send Aura remotely. Which will make my Blobbybullet to give more damage. I can send Aura to Victoria who will fight in my ce.


    And this is also between a master and his disciple. Since Sonia can¡¯t fight, Victoria is the only choice here.


    If she can fight using Aura, she could be much stronger and fight on her own. Though she can¡¯t be separated from me. If she does, she could only use Aura for two minutes at best.


    Without any warning, rence attacked Victoria with the Blobbysword in his hand. But Victoria blocked it with a sword in her hand. The fight has begun without any warning.


    I looked at Timmy and I can tell that what I was thinking is right. He made the test into a battle because of the Blobbies.


    If there¡¯s no Blobbies, the ancient Aura users can only fight unarmed. But because of Blobbies, they can use the weapon they were proficient in. And it will be much more interesting.


    In the end, it¡¯s alle to whether it¡¯s interesting or not to him.


    Although the consumption of Aura is much more than when I used Aura myself to fight, I don¡¯t mind. This is also a training. Our coordination has improved as I canpletely tell Victoria¡¯s intention without having tomunicate. I have also improved my summoning element since we have some summoners here as well. Though they can no longer summon their familiar and can¡¯t make another contract.


    At first, the two master and disciple were fighting evenly. But there¡¯s a huge difference between them.


    rence can still get hurt even though he¡¯s a zombie. But Victoria who is a slime doesn¡¯t feel hurt at all. And since rence couldn¡¯t use his Aura ability because he has no blood, Victoria won easily.


    ¡°No wonder I was picked as the first fighter. I¡¯m the weakest here. Good job Victoria. I hope you can kill the Evil God,¡± rence said before Victoria cut his neck.


    And just like that, the body of rence turned into dust. He is dead. And he won¡¯t return as a ghost anymore.


    Both Victoria and Sonia looked sad watching the death of their master. But this is not the end.


    There are still many other ancient Aura users to fight. I mean to kill. I need to kill them all to get stronger. To be the Aura Master. Then, I will destroy the cult.

 Chapter 572

    Chapter 572: The Final Game of Tag


    After the first fight against rence, I continued fighting until I got tired and took a rest. Then, I return again to the testing ground the next day to fight again. And I¡¯m the one fighting most of the time.


    Victoria only got her turn because the first opponent we were facing was rence. Her master. That¡¯s why I let her be the one to put him to rest.


    After that, I fight most of the ancient Aura users. Unless Graham or Shelia wanted to do it.


    Before each fight, I would ask the opponent I would fight about what they were good at and if I can learn something from them. Of course I can still learn a lot from them. But if I thought that either Graham or Shelia can learn more by fighting them instead of me fighting, I would let them fight.


    Graham and Shelia refused to borrow my Aura to get them stronger. They want to get stronger by themselves. So, they ended up only fight once a day because they would end up injured and exhausted after their fight since their opponents were too experienced.


    But it¡¯s all good since they could defeat them without my or anyone¡¯s help.


    And this is the sixth day since the test started. We have put around fifty ancient Aura users to rest. Which makes me fight around ten matches in a day.


    .....


    And every day, I can feel that I grew stronger. Also, I can feel that I received experiences from defeating the Aura users for my summoning element. If this goes on, by the time we finished the test and put all ancient Aura users here to rest, I think I can make a contract with another monster.


    But let¡¯s not think about that. I also need to kill Timmy before I could think of what monster I need to make a contract with.


    Seriously, why does he want to die? And why do I have to fight him? I don¡¯t think I can kill him unless I became Aura Master first. And the fight against the ancient Aura users are the preparation for me to be one.


    But even if I be an Aura Master, Timmy is also a mage beyond master level. Can I kill him?


    Well, if I want to survive, I need to kill him.


    Sigh... if only he would just be our ally instead. He would be a great addition and we can find the Evil God and destroy the cult for good. Just why does he wants to die?


    Anyway, I have killed the ninth opponent of the day. I feel my strength is still growing, and I¡¯m not tired yet.


    ¡°Well done. Will you continue or leave for the day?¡± Timmy asked me.


    ¡°I will continue. I think I can fight one more time,¡± I replied.


    ¡°Then, your next opponent will be Shadow de,¡± Timmy announced.


    Shadow? He has been very helpful with my training. And his medical knowledge as an assassin is also top-notch. I canbine the knowledge I have from the future and the knowledge from the past to advance even more and heal more illnesses.


    And he¡¯s also helping some agents to improve their skill. His abilities are very good for assassination and gathering information. So, Sara and the agents I brought here asked for his teaching. And their hiding skills have improved. Enough so that no expert level mages can detect them when they get close to them.


    I also brought the agent and the werewolves who were supposed to be tracking the cult. There hasn¡¯t been any traces of them at all, so I hope they can get better by training with Shadow.


    Though they can¡¯t get close to me without me noticing. My Divine Vision has improved along with my Mind¡¯s Eye.


    ¡°I guess the time hase. Well, I have taught you everything I need. I won¡¯t hold back, Dr. Roy,¡± Shadow said.


    ¡°That¡¯s what I wanted, Dr. Shadow,¡± I replied.


    Since we¡¯re both doctors, we called each other that way from time to time.


    ¡°Sir Aura Master, I¡¯d like you to build a maze as our stage,¡± Shadow said.


    ¡°Are you sure? Roy has his vision and he could see you from anywhere,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°But I¡¯m not a fighter. I¡¯m an assassin. Narrow ce where I can set traps and ambush my opponent is where I can fight without holding back the most,¡± Shadow said.


    Timmy then looked at me for confirmation, and I nodded. We have been ying tag as my training, and it¡¯s best for us to finish it with a game of tag as well.


    The stage then turned into a maze. But it doesn¡¯t matter to me who can see through it.


    The difference between other maze we used to y tag in was that the walls in this maze. I don¡¯t think I could destroy them. It was made by a mage beyond master level.


    ...I need to think of a name for that. Saying it a stage beyond master level all the time is too long.


    As soon as the maze was built, Shadow quickly disappears and creates multiple shadow clones to distract me. I mustn¡¯t forget that he¡¯s a shadow element mage as well.


    And he¡¯s a doctor. He knows well of human body. So, it¡¯s not just a shadow clone. The inside of the bodies of the clones are the same as the zombies. As himself.


    If it was me who can only use Divine Vision, I wouldn¡¯t be able to find the real him. But now that I can use Mind¡¯s Eye as well, I know where the real Shadow is.


    But the clones are not for distraction. They are for fighting me because he knew that fighting me directly is difficult. He¡¯s an assassin who knows if he can kill his target or not. And he did this because he thinks that he had a better chance this way.


    One against many. And because Graham and Shelia are tired after the previous fights, I can¡¯t get them to help me.


    I can only show him how strong I have became now.


    I have also practiced fighting against numerous Aura users. And I learned that the best way to fight against multiple enemies for me is to fight with my fists instead of using weapons. So, I turned Victoria into gloves.


    I punched the clones, dodged their attacks, parried, blocked, grabbed, and countered them. And after the clones around me were down, I quickly chase after Shadow.


    This game of tag took a long time. But as I move while setting traps, I finally caught up with Shadow.


    Although I have trained so much, Shadow is still much faster than me. And I needed traps to defeat him.


    The traps I made were just my air magic. I created sleeping gases, and infused my Aura into my magic. Which makes even Aura users, and expert level mages, easily sleep when they inhale it.


    And even if they are zombies just like Shadow, as long as I infuse my Aura on my magic, it can even makes zombie sleepy.


    This is what I learned in this ce. Even creatures that don¡¯t need sleep, will be put to sleep if I infuse a lot of my Aura into my sleeping gases.


    ¡°Shit... As a doctor, this is illogical...¡± Shadow said as he started to get sleepy.


    ¡°The more experience you have, the more you will think that it¡¯s a pain to think about every small matter. You can sleep, you will sleep. That¡¯s all. Thank you for all your teachings. I... we will make sure that we destroy the cult,¡± I said before giving the final blow to him.


    Another ancient Aura user has fallen. And I keep being stronger. But this is not enough.


    ¡°Congrattion for defeating Shadow de. I keep hearing him and other people from his generation talking about him being the strongest assassin of his time,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°Yeah? What do you think about that remark?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I think of how low the level of Aura users had be. In my time, his strength wasn¡¯t enough to be proud of,¡± Timmy said..


    ...I guess being an Aura Master is still a long way. This is so hard. I wish I could stop.


    But stopping here means the cult will continue to exist. I do hope that someone else will be able to defeat the Evil God and destroy the cult.


    Unfortunately, that is unlikely.


    After seeing how people epted Ang as the strongest mage, and no one dare to challenge her for a fight, I don¡¯t think there¡¯s anyone who is stronger than me in this continent at the moment. Not counting anyone from the cult.


    I am the only one I can trust for this task. That¡¯s why I have to endure everything and became stronger.


    I used to survive by using my shameless survival arts. By escaping, or doing some other tricks. But now, I can only fight. There won¡¯t be me running away anymore.


    Well... maybe from time to time, there will be a time when I need to run away instead of fighting.


    What I meant to say was to not run away from getting stronger. Yeah, that.


    And this ce might be the only ce where I can grow stronger. There might be some Aura users who hid their real power during training. I need to kill them to pass the test.


    But I¡¯m tired today after ying tag with Shadow. This is it for today. I¡¯lle back again tomorrow for more tests.

 Chapter 573

    Chapter 573: Fighting the Other Divine Vision User


    Every day is the same. But every day, I grew stronger.


    In the morning after breakfast, I enter the testing ground. And then, I took the test and defeat my opponents. I got some break in between the test for lunch, and I return to the test again after that. And after I feel tired, I return home, had dinner, and get some sleep. In the morning, I return to the testing ground again.


    It may feels like a routine. But the fight has never been the same.


    I fought a swordsman with a sword. I fought an archer with my gun. I fought a spear user with Reizpear.


    This is also for my training. So, I always face my opponent with the same weapon that they use with the Blobbies or Victoria that I transformed into weapons. Except for archer since using a gun is easier.


    I had asked some people about the mission to retrieve the ancient Aura users¡¯ weapons that they used to have. But unfortunately, none of them were found. Nothing at all.


    Some were still there, but since it has been a long time without maintenance, those weapons were too rusty and there¡¯s no more magic in it. They were useless.


    .....


    Well, they haven¡¯t searched for everything. I can only hope that there¡¯s a weapon that they found with a good condition at least.


    Though if there are any, I think they would be simr to Reizpear. A self-repairing magic weapon. Which I don¡¯t need them since I have Victoria and Reizpear already. Though maybe I can lend them to someone. Even though the person I gave the weapon to won¡¯t be an Aura user, it should be helpful for fighting closebat.


    Maybe I should just give Reizpear to Graham. He¡¯s also a spear user.


    But he has no Aura, and his spear is already stronger than Reizpear. It would be useless.


    The only good thing about Reizpear is its self-repairing magic. It¡¯s weak. And it only became strong when I infuse my Aura with it. That¡¯s why I need to find stronger weapons. Though I have Victoria, so I need magical weapons.


    I was lucky that I found Reizpear in the store back then. But I haven¡¯t found any other weapons since then. What a shame.


    Anyway, back to testing ground. It has been a month since the test began, and there aren¡¯t many ancient Aura users left.


    And right now, I¡¯m currently facing a sword-wielding Aura users. He has reached expert level in wind magic, so we fought in the air.


    This ce is veryrge, so we can move around freely. Unlike when I fought Shadow, there¡¯s no maze here.


    The most difficult thing about fighting him is that he¡¯s a better wind mage than my friends. With the exception of one wind master level mage among the five ancient Aura users who have reached master level in their magic. He also gave a lot of guidance to Veronica, Shirley, and our wind mages group. Though I don¡¯t know very much about him.


    While I can give a flying sh that can reach long distance, his flying sh is stronger and can reach even further because of his wind magic. But now that my Divine Vision has leveled up thanks to Mind¡¯s Eye, I can predict his move and make a counter.


    But it took a long time until I finally get a hit. And that¡¯s when I started winning.


    ¡°Congrattion again, Roy. Now, you only have ten opponents left. What will you do?¡± Timmy asked.


    ¡°I¡¯ll take a rest today. That was a long match and I need to think back about it. I made a lot of mistakes that I need to fix before fighting the rest,¡± I said.


    Nowadays, I can no longer fight multiple battle in one day. I wasn¡¯t tired. I was just in need to improve myself. And I need the time for it. So, after fighting, I return back home to try and fix my mistakes in battle.


    Ten opponents left. So, it should be around ten days before I could fight Timmy. But these ten should be the strongest.


    With Mona and Bearded Baldy, and also the five master level mages, it won¡¯t be easy. And There are three other ancient Aura users that I don¡¯t know about. Though I don¡¯t think they are master level mages, they should be strong.


    The next day, I returned again to the testing ground. This time, my opponent is Mona. The other Divine Vision user who have taught me hoe to improve my vision.


    ¡°Well, here I am. It¡¯s obvious who will be the winner, right?¡± Mona asked.


    ¡°Yeah. The one who can read ahead the others,¡± I replied.


    We both have Divine Vision and Mind¡¯s Eye. And since I will only use a battle axe like she is, the only way to win is to read further ahead than her.


    If I want to, I can win easily by using other weapon. But I choose not to and face her with an axe just like her. At least for now.


    The two of us just stand there in the ground facing each other without making a move. We can¡¯t make a single mistake here.


    But I¡¯m not that patient. So, I used brute force right away.


    I charged at her while raising my axe high, and swung it down. I also checked which way she would dodge, but instead of dodging, she blocked my axe. Which is unexpected since she should have seen iting and prepare for counter.


    The reason she picked an axe is because of her Divine Vision. As long as she can read her opponent¡¯s attack, she could just dodge them and counter it with her axe. And since it was a heavy weapon, it¡¯s difficult for anyone to stop her counter.


    But this time, she¡¯s just blocking my attack. So, I just put more strength on my axe.


    Turns out, that was a mistake. As I put more weight on my attack, she let go of her axe and punched my chest. That must be what she was nning.


    Her punch was so strong that it broke my ribs. But I didn¡¯t go down without a fight.


    As her fist get closer, at the same time her fist hit my chest, I raised my knee and broke her arm.


    Some ribs for an arm. And because Timmy wanted the zombies to be as human as possible for the test, she can¡¯t recover instantly like before.


    With her arm broken, she couldn¡¯t wield her axe normally again. But I can¡¯t let my guard down.


    She¡¯s someone with Divine Vision. There¡¯s no way that she didn¡¯t see my kneeing. So, she received that attack intentionally. Just to break my ribs.


    While she couldn¡¯t lift her axe normally again with both hands, she can still raise her axe with her other hand. But for me, it¡¯s getting harder to breathe normally. So, I used air magic in my lungs directly.


    ¡°I guess I can¡¯t take advantage of your broken ribs. You¡¯re an air mage who can use magic to breathe,¡± Mona said.


    ¡°But it¡¯s still painful. I can¡¯t make any big move with these ribs,¡± I replied.


    I guess that¡¯s her goal. But that doesn¡¯t mean I can¡¯t defeat her with small moves. And although I faced my opponents with the weapons they were good at, I never make any promise that I will continue that way.


    But for now, let¡¯s continue with just axe and martial arts.


    My chest is hurting me, but there¡¯s no real problem so far. And our exchanges continued.


    This time, we both dodged each other¡¯s attack with only small movements. But one thing I have advantage over her is my ostrich¡¯s footwork. Somehow, even with her Divine Vision, it¡¯s still unpredictable.


    ¡°That damn footwork is annoying!¡± Mona shouted in the middle of the fight.


    ¡°But it¡¯s working!¡±


    Before she could get used to my footwork, I need to defeat her. I can¡¯t make a big move, so I keep attacking her withbination attacks.


    Finally, her defense broke down and I swung down my axe. Cutting her from her right shoulder down to the left side of her waist.


    ¡°That was good... I lost... Good luck with destroying the cult,¡± Mona said before she died and turned into dust.


    Another one died. And she¡¯s also the closest one to me because of our simrities. Thanks to her, I learned a lot.


    ¡°Congrattion again, Roy. I guess you need to rest because of your ribs. Return once you¡¯re healed. And your next opponent will be... him,¡± Timmy said as he pointed his finger at Bearded Baldy.


    ¡°Now that I think about it, is there no one here knows my name?¡± Bearded Baldy asked.


    ¡°Nope. I called you as Bearded Baldy,¡± I said.


    ¡°Sigh... fine. Tomorrow is thest day for me anyway. If I lose, I will disappear. And if I win, I don¡¯t think Timmy will continue with this ce since there won¡¯t be any other Aura usering. Prepare yourself, Roy. I¡¯ll show you how strong I really am!¡± Bearded Baldy imed.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s only if I return tomorrow. Anyway, that¡¯s it for today. I¡¯ll return when I¡¯m prepared to fight. See ya!¡±


    ¡°Wait! Come back here tomorrow, okay! Promise me that you wille tomorrow!¡± Bearded Baldy shouted.


    I just ignored him as I left using my portal along with Ka and the others who were watching. For my fractured ribs, there were some pieces of the bones hurting my lung. I need surgery from Sophieter.


    But before I could ask for it, my other two monsters, Shelia and Graham, approached me with a request.


    ¡°What is it?¡± I asked the two.


    ¡°Master, will you let us fight him tomorrow? We want to test ourbined strength against him,¡± Graham asked.


    ¡°Two against one? Well, that¡¯s fine. I¡¯ll be counting on you then. And I will make you retreat if I see any of you is in danger,¡± I said.


    The two then nodded and left to train before facing Bearded Baldy. As for me, I entered operating room with Sophie as my surgeon.

 Chapter 574

    Chapter 574: I Got Closer to Be Aura Master


    The next day, I returned to the testing ground after my body has been healed. I have the greatest medical team in my house. With Sophie doing the surgery, and Ka helping her by healing magic.


    Thanks to Shadow, our medical knowledge has advanced even further. Though those knowledge were not needed for my surgery, it¡¯s still good to know. And Sophie also has improved a lot. She finished my surgery in less than one hour without my instruction.


    Although using healing magic I could be healed in an instant, it¡¯s best for broken bones to be fixed first. Especially if the position of the bones are weird.


    After surgery, I rested the whole night while thinking about my battle with Mona, and my next battle with Bearded Baldy. Although the ones who will fight him are Shelia and Graham, I will also be present.


    Especially knowing that Shelia and Graham alone won¡¯t be enough to defeat him. And this time, I will be the backup for them when they lose. Doesn¡¯t that make me the main force if I know that they will lose? Well, doesn¡¯t matter.


    Anyway, here we are again. In the testing ground, facing Bearded Baldy, whose real name I don¡¯t even know. And my two monsters are fighting him on even ground.


    It needs two powerful monsters to be even with Bearded Baldy. Just shows how strong he is.


    .....


    In these past few months, they also learned to fight with coordination. They no longer just fight however they want, but also tried to cover for each other.


    Actually, I can tell that Bearded Baldy hasn¡¯t gone all out yet. He¡¯s still holding back even though he¡¯s facing two monsters at once.


    With Shelia fighting in close range, and Graham used her light magic to attack, they could cause any trouble fighting any other enemies. But Bearded Baldy is too strong.


    His body is bigger than me. And he fight without using weapon. He¡¯s the master of closebat fight.


    If we fight normally, I would lose. That¡¯s why when Shelia and Graham asked me if they could fight him first, I agreed.


    And finally, Bearded Baldy used more strength and hit Graham with a straight punch.


    Even after Graham used Light Shield to protect himself, he couldn¡¯t protect himself. The shield got destroyed and could not even stop Beaded Baldy¡¯s punch even for an instant, as his fist reached Graham¡¯s face.


    But Shelia then shed her ws at Bearded Baldy¡¯s arm that is punching Graham. Bearded Baldy then pulled his fist back, and Graham didn¡¯t receive full damage because of it.


    But that was still too strong. Graham couldn¡¯t even get his knees straight, so he can only fly with his wings. As for Shelia, Bearded Baldy then quickly threw his other fist at her. And the two then started exchanging fists with Bearded Baldy has the upper hand since he¡¯s both stronger and faster than Shelia who is a werewolf.


    Graham wouldn¡¯t just sit back. He finally created shadow clones of himself. And unlike before, he can now created multiple clones. About five of them.


    Graham then rested for a while, and when his clones are fighting Bearded Baldy, Shelia also stepped back to rest. Graham casted healing magic to the both of them while observing the fight.


    The shadow clones were not a problem for Bearded Baldy. But since they have good teamwork, they could dy him for a little longer while Graham and Shelia were recovering.


    I watched and observed Bearded Baldy¡¯s move from the side. He was so strong, but it¡¯s not just his body and Aura. His punches and kicks could even reach further just like my sh using Aura and weapon. But he did it unarmed. This is something that I haven¡¯t fully learned yet since Timmy started the test before I could learn itpletely. Which is why I need to learn by watching.


    And I didn¡¯t just stand there and watch. Using summoning magic I learned from a summoner here, I can connect my mind to the two monsters.


    I send them where Bearded Baldy¡¯s attack woulde from, and they would react to it in their own way. This is actually a three-man team instead of two.


    So far, they managed to perform well. But the more Bearded Baldy shows his true strength, the harder it is for Shelia and Graham to follow mymand.


    ¡®That¡¯s enough from me. The rest is up to you,¡¯ I said to the two monsters telepathically.


    Shelia and Graham then fight with Bearded Baldy their own way while minding their partner. Making sure that their attack won¡¯t hit the other.


    ¡°What¡¯s this? Your teamwork be lousy all of a sudden. I guess I should end this fight sooner so I can fight Roy,¡± Bearded Baldy said.


    Shelia and Graham were starting to lose. And finally, Shelia got punched by Bearded Baldy and knocked out. Leaving Graham alone.


    As for Graham, he was about to get hit with a punch from Bearded Baldy. And that¡¯s what I have been waiting for.


    I didn¡¯t think that Shelia and Graham could win, so I need to wait for the opportune moment before I make my move. And that time is now.


    As Bearded Baldy punched Graham in the face, I finally made my move.


    I run toward Graham, and then to the arm that was punching him. I pour all my strength and Aura into both my hands which are covered with Victoriagloves, and then I gripped Bearded Baldy¡¯s arm with both my hand.


    And then, I quickly twisted my grip on his arm as strong as possible, and rip it off of his body.


    With the cost of Shelia and Graham knocked out, I can only rip his right hand. And as soon as I ripped his hand off, his left fist is quickly approaching me. But I expected that, so I dodged it before it arrives.


    At least with this much, he will be considerably weakened.


    But the man I fight right now is not so weak that he would fall with just the loss of one arm. He then started attacking me without caring about the pain in his right arm. Even though he¡¯s a zombie, he still has a sense of pain. But it seems as if his sense of pain doesn¡¯t exist.


    From two on one, it turned into a one on one unarmedbat. I also made Victoria into Victoriarmor. Not that I need it. It¡¯s because I want to get experience from killing Bearded Baldy. If I fight with my own hand, my summoning element won¡¯t improve. That¡¯s why I wore Victoriarmor after I ripped Bearded Baldy¡¯s arm off to cover my whole body.


    It was an intense battle. Even though he only has one hand, and that hand is not his dominant one, I still couldn¡¯t get the upper hand.


    ¡°Don¡¯t think! There are times in a fight where thinking won¡¯t get you anywhere! Swing your arms and legs!¡± Bearded Baldy shouted.


    Stop thinking? That¡¯s right. I¡¯m the kind of person who would overthink stuffs. Even in the middle of a fight.


    But Bearded Baldy is different. Even when he lost his arm, he continued swinging his fist and legs. That¡¯s how he can get stronger.


    It might not be very me, but this is the only way to get stronger when fighting against someone like him.


    Forget about strategy. Forget about the cult. Forget about the Evil God. Forget about everything.


    Face the enemy in front of you without fear. That¡¯s what Bearded Baldy taught us many times. No fighting technique or whatever.


    In a fight, you need only to trust your body that you will never lose. That¡¯s all he taught. And that¡¯s how I will fight right now.


    ¡°Good! That¡¯s it! You have be stronger than before now!¡± Bearded Baldy shouted.


    But I ignored it. As long as he¡¯s still standing, I will keep on moving my body.


    Little by little, I started overpowering him. And I feel something inside of me. A kind of powerful pressure that I can spread to everyone. Much like what Timmy did. But it¡¯s weak.


    This is it. I am slowly reaching the stage of Aura Master. And there are still few opponents I need to face. I will be an Aura Master even before fighting Timmy.


    ¡°This is it! This is the perfect ending for my life!¡± Bearded Baldy said as he used all his power against me.


    He swung his fist at me, but I parry it before countering with a powerful right punch through his body. He died with a happy expression on his face.


    ¡°Congrattion, Roy you have slowly get closer to Aura Master. What will you do now?¡± Timmy asked.


    ¡°...I will take a few days off to get used to this power. I¡¯ll be back once I¡¯m ready like usual,¡± I replied.


    ¡°Understood. Come back whenever you¡¯re ready. Your next opponent won¡¯t be any weaker than him,¡± Timmy said.


    I know. There¡¯s no way thest few people I need to fight would be weaker than those I have fought.


    But with this new strength I have, I am confident I can pass the test. Still, Timmy is the strongest opponent I need to fightter. But as Bearded Baldy said, I only need to face the enemy and don¡¯t think too much.


    ...Though I still didn¡¯t get his name. Well, that¡¯s fine. He will be remembered as Bearded Baldy forever.

 Chapter 575

    Chapter 575: I Know My Weaknesses Better Now


    ¡°RRRAAAAAAARRGHH!!!¡±


    I swung down Victosword toward myst opponent as I shouted. Thest opponent which allow me to face Timmy in a dead or alive situation.


    The opponent is not a master level mage who was also an Aura user. But he is the strongest Aura user who has reached the closest stage to Aura Master.


    While his magic was a lightning element which only reached advanced level, his use of Aura, strength, speed, technique, and experience, were all surpassed me and anyone I have fought. But that¡¯s what makes it worth it to fight him.


    After defeating the Bearded Baldy, I faced the master level mages one by one. And because I have gotten closer to the stage of Aura Master, I could defeat them. Although it wasn¡¯t easy.


    Each fight after defeating Bearded Baldy, I spent at least twenty hours just to defeat one opponent. Though the time decreased for the second, third, and fourth master level mages because I have gotten used to fighting Aura user, the fifth master level mage was too strong that I need two whole days to defeat him.


    After that, I fought two other Aura users who were stronger than those master level mages. No wonder Timmy used this line up.


    .....


    And now, I¡¯m facing thest opponent. He is much stronger than any other ancient Aura users.


    But finally, after hours since the battle start, I finally managed to kill him. With a downward sh of Victosword, I shed through his sword which he used to block it, and split him in two.


    Although the sword he used was Blobbies from Victoria, I didn¡¯t cheat by forcefully transforming the Blobbies. I let those Blobbies be freely used by the ancient Aura users and fight normally since it¡¯s all for the sake of my training.


    I could just cheat and make them all lose their control of their weapons. But I won¡¯t get stronger just by doing that.


    And more importantly, I don¡¯t think Timmy would be happy if I did just that.


    And so, the end of the test hase. But the real thing will start soon.


    ¡°Congrattions. You have defeated your opponent,¡± Timmy congratted me.


    ¡°Thank you. And that¡¯s about the 200th time I heard that. But it feels good to hear that since that means my match is over,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. But do you really need to fight that way?¡± Timmy asked me.


    What he meant was the way I fought. The ¡°Stall for time as much as possible while reserving my stamina, and make the opponent waste their stamina first¡± strategy. Get them tired before killing them.


    Since the test started, they were no longer normal zombie. Although the inside of their body is different than human¡¯s, they can still get tired and hurt. But that¡¯s only after the test started.


    So, when I fought difficult opponent, I would run away. And the game of tag begun again. Though I¡¯m not ¡®It¡¯ since I was the one being chased all the time. Unlike the time with Shadow.


    Since the testing ground was not built into a maze anymore, I build a maze by myself. Utilizing around twenty thousand Blobbies to create walls for the maze.


    Although the walls could be destroyed easily, I can just transform more Blobbies. And I used that chance to rest, recover my stamina, and think of a n to fight.


    Now that I have fought a lot of Aura users, I can tell my own weaknesses. Even the weakness I had for a long time was felt greatly.


    I have too many weaknesses in fact. And that¡¯s why I need to waste a long time to fight.


    Here¡¯s a list of my weaknesses.


    First, I was weaker in strength than many Aura users. Although I could be the strongest in this world, against Aura users, I am one of the weakest. Though since my opponent will be mages and probably not Aura users, I don¡¯t think it would be much trouble. But in this test, it was an annoying weakness.


    Second, although I¡¯m quite proud with my speed, I¡¯m still slower than most Aura users. And master level wind mages were faster than me. If the Evil God is a wind mage, I don¡¯t think I would be able to catch him if he escapes.


    Third, I tend to overthink. Bearded Baldy even warned me about it during our match.


    Combined with my fourth weakness, it was terrible. It¡¯s that I¡¯m not that smart.


    So, not only I spent a lot of time thinking. But the result of that thinking and nning were not good enough for the battle most of the time.


    Lastly, even though I¡¯m not smart enough, I can¡¯t just move my body without thinking like Bearded Baldy. There were times that I can do that, but I can¡¯t trust my own body somehow to do it all the time. Though that part of me was somehow fixed because of the test, it¡¯s not perfect.


    All of those weaknessesbined, along with some that I don¡¯t want to say or that I don¡¯t know yet, makes me one terrible fighter! And I¡¯m not happy about it.


    Good thing my enemy will only be mages. But if there¡¯s an Aura user hiding among the cult, that would be bad. Very very bad news.


    What if it¡¯s actually the Evil God himself? He might even be stronger than Timmy. Not that I know Timmy¡¯s real strength. He hadn¡¯t showed me his full strength.


    Though why would an Aura user hate other Aura users so much?


    ¡°So, when do you think you will fight?¡± Timmy asked me.


    ¡°When I¡¯m ready. Probably in a few days. I¡¯m gonna ask you again if you really have no intention of helping me? The world is about to be destroyed, you know?¡± I asked Timmy again if he wants to join us. With him, our power will increase a lot.


    ¡°No. I have no interest in the world being destroyed or not. Even if you came from the future, I don¡¯t care,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°Sigh... You should have just help us. It will be easier for me that way.¡±


    ¡°But then you won¡¯t be motivated. If I help you, or I made the test to be scheduled after you destroy the cult, you won¡¯t have any motivation since that means you don¡¯t have any reason to grow stronger anymore. If you¡¯re someone who seeks strength like most Aura users who came here, I might have different idea about helping you. But you are not a normal Aura user. You are only motivated because you have a goal. You¡¯re the one with the most difficult personality here,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°I agree. He¡¯s somewhat disappointing,¡± Victoria agreed with Timmy.


    ¡°...Let¡¯s not talk about me right now,¡± I said as I want to leave this topic as soon as possible.


    I was just thinking about my own weaknesses, and then these two started telling me that I¡¯m disappointing. I¡¯m so sad.


    ¡°Anyway, about the location of the Evil God. Can you tell me why you can¡¯t tell of their location? Maybe that could be our clues to finding them. At least you can help us this much, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s fine. There are several reasons. The main reason is obviously because I don¡¯t know who he is. And you also don¡¯t really know about him, right? You just know that he¡¯s exist. And there¡¯s nothing else beyond that,¡± Timmy exined.


    Now that I think about it, it¡¯s stupid of me to ask him why he couldn¡¯t tell where the Evil God is. It¡¯s like asking him if he knew where Bob is, but he doesn¡¯t even know who the hell is Bob. And in fact, I don¡¯t even know any Bob.


    ¡°Other than that, there are several other reasons. Like he¡¯s not touching the ground. Since the element I¡¯m best at is earth element, it¡¯s useless if the person in question isn¡¯t touching the ground. Even though I don¡¯t know where that Evil God is, I can still at least tell any ces that look suspicious. Though I didn¡¯t sense any suspicious location. But if he doesn¡¯t even touch the ground, I will never know,¡± Timmy exined.


    Timmy has been stuck in this ce for much longer than other ancient Aura users. Even if it looks suspicious for us, he won¡¯t know because the culture is totally different. And he may think that those weird things actually normal. Or he couldn¡¯t tell at all, so he decided to ignore them all.


    What if there¡¯s a ce in the sky like the Angel¡¯s Sanctuary? A ce that float with the clouds. Timmy will not be able to sense that ce since it¡¯s not touching the ground.


    ¡°If that Evil God¡¯s elements are something that allow him to transport to another location like your summoning, he can travel to another world like you, right?¡± Timmy asked.


    He¡¯s right. But I don¡¯t think it¡¯s something like summoning element. Because if it is, that Evil God should have gone to the Monsters World already. Or at least he would have send someone there instead of using what Victoria called rocket made by the Professor.


    Which mean he has something that allow him to move to another location that Timmy couldn¡¯t sense, or something that can make him stay in the air for a long time.


    Finding him will be extremely difficult. Though I expected it, it¡¯s still annoying.


    ¡°Then,st question for the day. How can I beat you?¡± I asked Timmy shamelessly.


    ¡°...Think about it yourself. That¡¯s what you always do after all. Good luck,¡± Timmy said before he disappeared into the room he was in and locked the door from the inside.


    I guess that was also to be expected. Well, for now I need to get some rest, and prepare everything before going.


    ¡°For myst battle, I don¡¯t want you toe to watch. But I will bring some cameras and install them here before fighting,¡± I said to Ka and the others who were watching me fighting up till now.


    There won¡¯t be any audience anymore. Only Timmy, me, and my monsters.


    ...I hope he won¡¯t kill me so quickly. Rather, I hope he won¡¯t kill me at all.

 Chapter 576

    Chapter 576: I Won¡¯t be Recorded in History


    Now, I am taking a rest. I don¡¯t want to go and fight Timmy right away even though I¡¯m perfectly fit already after having rested enough. I need to prepare everything else. Including my heart.


    I need to prepare my heart. So, I¡¯m writing my will right now.


    ...Is what I was trying to do. Until Shirley entered my room after Victoria told her something.


    ¡°Ah, Roy. If you¡¯re writing a will, don¡¯t bother. My brother will take care of everything except for your lovers. Well, they can take care of themselves so I don¡¯t think my brother even needs to do anything. At least he can give your properties to someone legally. For your money, it has always been shared by the others. I guess they will be split evenly. Seriously, other than your lovers, and familiars, there¡¯s actually nothing that you have,¡± Shirley said to me and she then left my room right away.


    ...Just what am I? That¡¯s right. Amoner whose wealth can be easily be taken by authority.


    But seriously, I truly have nothing in this world? What the hell? Everything is shared?


    Well, I guess I don¡¯t need to write a will. I also tried to make everyone able to be independent from the very beginning. I made them to not need me in case something happen. And I think I did well in that.


    .....


    But what about my money? My properties?


    Being a king sure is great. He can take everything from me easily.


    ¡°Why are you writing a will? Do you think you will die?¡±


    All of a sudden, the window to my room opened and a man entered from there casually. He¡¯s Timmy. The man whom I will fight to deathter.


    ¡°You¡¯re not going to wait underground until Ie? Why are you here?¡± I asked Timmy.


    ¡°Since you were noting at all, I checked if you want toe today or not. And I saw you writing a will,¡± Timmy said.


    Timmy was bored since I didn¡¯t enter the testing ground. And since there were no more ghosts or zombies inside, there¡¯s no one to apany him. Maybe I will use this chance to persuade him again.


    ¡°How about you go down to the dining room and ask for a meal? Maybe once you taste the delicious food of this era, you will be interested in staying alive and will help me stop the cult from destroying the world,¡± I said.


    ¡°You still haven¡¯t given up yet? I won¡¯t help you kill the Evil God, but I will help you get stronger. If you can¡¯t get stronger, you will die though. As for your invitation for a meal, I will ept it wholeheartedly,¡± Timmy said as he left through the door of my room and enter the dining room normally.


    Everyone in the mansion were shocked seeing Timmy appears in my house, but soon they epted it easily. After all, Timmy is still alive.


    With him, I¡¯m not the only Aura user in this world anymore. But soon, I will be one again. If I win.


    Right now, I have be much closer to bing an Aura Master. I feel power surging in my body. Butparing to the sheer pressure that Timmy showed me back then, I¡¯m still nothing.


    That¡¯s the biggest difference between us in Aura. But what about magic?


    Well, he¡¯s an earth mage at the stage beyond master level. And I¡¯m just an advanced level air mage, and an expert level summoner. Even though I have defeated five master level mages, I don¡¯t think it¡¯s enough for me to defeat Timmy.


    My summoning has reached expert level? That¡¯s right. I can now make contract with four familiars. Though I haven¡¯t decided yet what kind of monster I will make a contract with.


    I tried asking Andro again if he wants to be my familiar. But he refused again. I don¡¯t think I will ask him again. I don¡¯t ever want him to be hostile against me if I asked him too many times.


    I also asked the tortoises I saved from theb that we raided before. But those tortoises were too annoying. I will end up killing them myself and open up a slot to make contract with another monster.


    As for Spot, I have trust in him. I don¡¯t think he would ever betray me. And we already have a good rtionship. I don¡¯t want to ruin it by asking him to be my familiar.


    The modified monsters are no-go. Even though some still have sane mind, I don¡¯t think it¡¯s a good idea to make contract with them.


    And then there¡¯s Sonia. But she refused the idea of bing my familiar.


    And I can¡¯t just wander in Monsters World without a goal. I will end up fighting Timmy with an open spot for a familiar. But it¡¯s much better than just picking a random monster and destroy our coordination.


    Well, can¡¯t be helped. I¡¯ll just find a monsterter after defeat Timmy. If I don¡¯t die at that time.


    I stopped thinking of writing my will and go to the dining room with everyone. Ian has cooked some meal for Timmy and Ka is asking him questions.


    ¡°Oh? You have done writing your will?¡± Timmy asked me.


    ¡°Turns out, I don¡¯t have any personal belongings. And I don¡¯t have anything to say to the others as well. So, can you make it that we don¡¯t have to kill each other?¡± I asked Timmy.


    ¡°...No. Humans are short-lived. And all humans always wanted to have something that they will be remembered forever. For me, that would be you. You will be thest to continue the legacy of Aura Master. And I will be remembered as the man who taught you to be an Aura Master,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°What if I won¡¯t be recorded in history? Even though they look like good people, the kings are most likely to erase my name from any records. They don¡¯t want people to know that an Aura Master is their hero. Aura users are too dangerous and I don¡¯t think the kings want anyone else to be an Aura user. What if they have terrible personality? And even if they decided to keep me recorded in history, they would just make me a mage instead of Aura user. Am I right?¡± I asked Shirley.


    Even though she¡¯s not the king, she¡¯s a princess and a part of the royalty. She knows what Albert will most likely do.


    ¡°...Roy is right. In the future, this world will only be for mages. Aura users are too dangerous. If it¡¯s any other person, my brother might decide to kill him instead once the cult is destroyed. But since it¡¯s Roy, his name will either not written in records, or he will be turned into a powerful mage. But there will be no Aura user written in record. People will continue to think that Aura users are just something from children stories,¡± Shirley exined.


    That¡¯s what I expected. And I just want to destroy the cult. I don¡¯t care about fame at all. Albert and the others can take the credit if they want once we destroy the cult. As for me, I will live however I want. A peaceful life.


    ¡°That¡¯s why your name won¡¯t be remembered, Timmy. And you have lived for more than three thousand years. There¡¯s no one here who knows about you even though you were considered as the strongest man in the past. There¡¯s truly nothing that can make you eternal,¡± I said.


    ¡°Hmm... You¡¯re right. Well, let¡¯s just say that the reason I want someone to seed me as the Aura Master is simr reason why you want to destroy the cult. It¡¯s just our reason for living. Though I don¡¯t have any other reason to live after that, you have. No more asking me about this topic. The discussion is over. There will only be dead or alive battle between us. Now that I¡¯m done with the meal, I¡¯m going to check how good the alcohol after three thousand years. If I¡¯m not there when you enter the testing ground, just wait. I can tell when you¡¯re inside and will go there as soon as possible,¡± Timmy said before he disappears.


    That is not teleportation like Sonia, nor that is transportation via portal like me. That¡¯s earth magic. He used the earth to move to any location that he wants. As long as that ce is connected with the earth, he can go there.


    With my Divine Vision, I can see him quickly sinking into the ground as if he¡¯s turned into dust, and then he would appear in front of a bar in the capital. Still within my sight. So, I can see how disappointed he was when he sees that the bar is closed.


    Did the bars in the past open all the time? That¡¯s something to be envious about.


    No possession, and no future. My record will be erased, or altered. No one will know in the future who I really am. But does it matter?


    I don¡¯t know what makes many people want to be recorded in history. To be immortalized by their achievement. I have no interest in it.


    Destroying the cult and live a peaceful life. That¡¯s all that matter to me.


    ...Though I need to go through a dead or alive trials. What a pain.

 Chapter 577

    Chapter 577: The Cult is Starting to Move


    It has been three days since the end of the test against all ancient Aura users. I need to face Timmy, but I don¡¯t know if I¡¯m ready or not.


    I have thought of everything that I can think of, but I don¡¯t know if that¡¯s enough or not. I think it¡¯s not enough.


    I have fought against a master level earth mage who was an Aura user. He was very strong. Although he was weak in closebat, his earth magic can cover for his weakness.


    It took a lot of effort for me to break through his powerful defense. But Timmy should be much stronger than him. He has reached a stage beyond master level after all.


    Even more, Timmy is also an Aura Master. He might not even need to use his magic to defeat me.


    Thest ancient Aura user I fought was a powerful Aura user. Although he was not a powerful mage, his Aura can give strong pressure simr to what Timmy showed to us back then. But it was still weaker than Timmy¡¯s. Though I learned a lot.


    A powerful mage and a powerful Aura Master. Maybe Timmy is even stronger than the Evil God. If I can defeat him, defeating the Evil God will be much easier.


    .....


    Well, the Evil God should be evil. He must have various other ns in mind. He could be trickier to fight than Timmy so I shouldn¡¯t get my hope up.


    For now, it¡¯s the fight against Timmy that I need to think about. And that¡¯s why I trained in Monsters World.


    If I train in humans world, Timmy would be able to sense everything I do just by sensing it on the ground. Even if my feet never touch the ground, he might be able to sense it somewhat.


    Every moves anyone make, will create vibration. If the ground sensed that vibration, Timmy would be able to sense it. That¡¯s why I can only secretly train in Monsters World.


    And the training partner I had with me is Ang. The strongest mage in our team who have reached even further strength after training with master level mages.


    But it¡¯s not a sparring. It¡¯s just giving advice and guidance to each other.


    ¡°Roy, I can still sense your movement. While you¡¯re running in the air, the air you kicked down pushed the ground and that tells me your location,¡± Ang said.


    ¡°You can sense that much? Then I guess running on air won¡¯t work much in the fight against Timmy,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. Although I only learned it after training with other master level mages, this is a useful skill. I can also sense the movement in the wind as well, so I can clearly sense you when you¡¯re running in the air,¡± Ang said.


    ¡°I guess I will never be able to hide from you. Well, I need to train a little more before I¡¯m ready to face Timmy. Though I don¡¯t think Timmy is in a hurry. He¡¯s in Varadis at the moment tasting different wines with the king,¡± I said.


    This morning, before I went to Monsters World, Timmy asked if I¡¯m going to fight him or not. And when I said that I won¡¯t go, he instantly disappeared.


    Few minutester, Sonia appeared in front of me telling me that old man Henry was enjoying himself talking about different kind of wines with Timmy.


    Timmy has gone all over the ce in this continent. Tatrama, Consenza, Varadis, and Arturo. He has been to all four countries in this short time.


    Being able to move underground in an instant to another country is a cheat. What if he choose to run away during our fight? I won¡¯t be able to catch him ever.


    Though I don¡¯t think he¡¯s that kind of person. If so, he would never asked me to fight him to death. And he would have epted my offer to help me fight the cult.


    After a few hours of training with Ang, I finally got it. A way to move in the air without being noticed by earth mage.


    ¡°Can you sense my movement?¡± I asked Ang.


    ¡°If I only have earth magic, I won¡¯t notice your move at all. But since I can sense the wind movement, I know exactly where you are. I think Timmy would have some difficulties if you move like that,¡± Ang said.


    That¡¯s great. What I did was simple. Using air magic to cover the air that I kicked so the vibration won¡¯t hit the ground.


    Wind mage can sense the wind movement. And air mage is also simr in sensing air movement. After all, wind is just moving air.


    But wind element and air element are different. Air mages can use wind magic, but it¡¯s much weaker than even a beginner level magic. And wind mage can¡¯t use air magic since air magic are mostly about changing the properties of the air.


    If not for Victoria, I would have thought that air mages are useless because we can only use magic to breathe anywhere. But because of Victoria¡¯s teaching, from the knowledge of her original world, I can be this strong


    Although air magic and wind magic are different, there are still something inmon that we have. Like sensing the movement of the air or wind. That¡¯s why I asked Ang who can use four element to help me. She can use earth magic which is Timmy¡¯s specialty, and wind magic as well.


    The two of us entered Monsters World and move to a wide area to train together. Because of my training, her wind magic has slightly improved as she can sense the slightest vibration in the air. Though within a certain distance.


    Still, because she has reached expert level, and she could reach master level anytime soon, the range where she can sense my move is so vast. Probably almost half the size of the whole capital of Tatrama.


    As for me, I can only sense the movement in short range. I¡¯m still just an advanced level air mage after all.


    For now, I can finally move in the air without making vibration on the ground. This should be good enough to stall for time. And I have portal to use as well. I will use them well.


    ¡°Are we done?¡± Ang asked.


    ¡°Yeah. You can train with Shelia and Graham now. Sorry for taking your time. You want to train by yourself, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I did. But training with someone else is better than training by myself. Are you going home?¡± Ang asked.


    ¡°Not yet. I¡¯ll be here for a little longer,¡± I replied before I left the ce we were training by using portal back to the Monsters Vige.


    Training with Ang is not something that only I want. Everyone want to train with her as well. But the priority this time is for me and my familiars.


    Previously, I would just let Shelia or Graham fight their opponent themselves without my help. Sometimes, those two will team-up to fight one opponent. But other than the time I fought Bearded Baldy, I never joined them in their battle. Though I only did that at that time because they lost.


    But now, fighting Timmy one on one is stupid. I need to get Shelia, Graham, and even Victoria to be stronger before fighting him. Anyway, Victoria¡¯s turn was before me, so it¡¯s Shelia¡¯s and Graham¡¯s turn.


    Victoria is still with them watching. And she probably will join with the other twoter to improve their teamwork.


    As for me, I entered a house in Monsters Vige where I prepared my n to fight Timmy.


    In this ce, it¡¯s extremely messy with papers all over the ce. They were all papers with writing of my ns against Timmy.


    During the fight against the cult many times before, I had never been this prepared. But against Timmy, I need to prepare even more. And I keep all my ns here because I don¡¯t want Timmy to find out about them.


    I know very much how by now that I always overthink and my ns were not all good. So, I made more ns. And I will try to memorize them all so I don¡¯t need to think too much during the fight. Good luck, my terrible memory.


    But I don¡¯t think that this is enough to beat Timmy, someone who was dubbed as the strongest in his time. Back when Aura users were still many.


    And so, the only think I can do was to prepare more ns for unexpected situations. But if all of my ns not working, I can only improvise. Fighting without thinking. That¡¯s something that I can only do a few times.


    After hours of staying in Monsters World, we finally returns back home to the mansion in the capital which we have renovated. And we were greeted by Timmy and the four kings.


    ¡°What is it? Why is everyone here?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Roy, we will fight tomorrow. I won¡¯t take a no,¡± Timmy said all of a sudden.


    ¡°Tomorrow? I¡¯m not even ready yet!¡±


    ¡°Nothing I can do about that. I sensed many people gathering in the border between Arturo and Tatrama. None of you kings nned for a war between each other, right?¡± Timmy asked.


    ¡°What!? No! We still have the cult to fight so... Wait, many people are gathering? That must be where the cult are gathering. They must be preparing something,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Exactly. I don¡¯t know what it is, but it should be happening soon. That¡¯s why you need to fight me tomorrow. Go get some sleep and enter the testing ground right away. Because you will be much busier after our battle ended,¡± Timmy said before he disappears and enter the testing ground by himself.


    ...I¡¯d rather he¡¯d be the one to send the kings back to their countries. He can bring other people when he¡¯s entering underground to move. And if he brought the kings back to their countries, I won¡¯t have to open portals myself.


    Still, that¡¯s not the point. The cult is gathering and preparing something. Our peaceful times ended.


    And my peaceful time as well since the kings are using my house to discuss. I need to wait until their discussion is over so I can bring them home and rest.

 Chapter 578

    Chapter 578: Night Before the Deathmatch


    ¡°Since the one who brought you all here has gone, I have no choice but to do it. So, quickly make your decision and return home. I have something I need to do tomorrow. Which is something that might end up with me dying,¡± I said to the kings who started their discussion.


    ¡°How about the werewolves and the agent with them? Where are they right now?¡± Fabio asked.


    ¡°Theirst report was that they were close to the location that Timmy just told us. Let¡¯s get Sonia there to ask them of the cult¡¯s movement. They should have noticed about the cult¡¯s movement. And how they can that close meant that the Evil God is probably nearby. Worse of all, the timing is very bad. I thought they will not make a move for another year or two. But it¡¯s too soon. And Roy is not an Aura Master yet. We need to make a n,¡± Albert said tot he other kings.


    I need to leave this room. If I stay here any longer, my mind will be filled with the thought of the cult during my fight against Timmy. And I will end up dead if I lose my focus.


    ¡°Hey, just tell me when you¡¯re done. I can¡¯t have my mind preupied with things before my battle to the death. Also, don¡¯t make any n that will need my involvement at all. If you¡¯re nning to have a more detailed n, do it after my fight. And only if I win,¡± I said before I left the room.


    I didn¡¯t just left the room. I also run toward theke where we used to have pic at. It¡¯s a quiet ce where I can think in a rxed manner at the moment.


    Since all my senses have improved a lot, if I stay in the city, I won¡¯t be able to concentrate. That¡¯s why I ran all the way here.


    .....


    I thought that I can dy my match as long as possible to make Timmy¡¯s guard down. I would suddenly appear in the testing ground via portal to the Blobby I installed there, and start the fight when Timmy was most unprepared.


    I have used my improved Divine Vision and checked that Timmy would sometime stay in the testing ground instead of in his room after all the other ancient Aura users were defeated. I thought that it was a good n.


    Unfortunately, that n won¡¯t work anymore. Timmy has set the schedule for the fight thanks to the cult¡¯s movement. That¡¯s another reason for me to hate the cult.


    Now, there¡¯s only direct battle. I can¡¯t use that trick anymore.


    ¡°Were you thinking that it¡¯s a shame that you can no longer dy the battle anymore?¡±


    All of a sudden, someone spoke to me from under the ground. That was Timmy¡¯s voice. He suddenly appears from under the ground and talked to me.


    ¡°Why are you here?¡± I asked casually. I already knew that he woulde after I see the movement of the ground.


    ¡°It¡¯s not like I have anything to do in that ce. So, what will you do for our fight?¡± Timmy asked.


    ¡°You think I will leak my n to you? Unfortunately for you, I¡¯m not that stupid. Also, do we need to fight in that ce?¡± I asked Timmy.


    ¡°Why ask?¡±


    ¡°Too many disadvantages for me. That ce is underground and you¡¯re an earth mage beyond master level.You can use the soil from below, above, left, and right for you to attack or defend. Can we change ce?¡± I suggested.


    ¡°Hmm... now that I think about it, you move around a lot when you fight. I guess no matter how big I make that ce it¡¯s still too narrow for you. Alright. We can fight here tomorrow,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°That¡¯s great. As a reward, I will inform you that the previous king of Arturo, Harold, is hiding the strongest alcoholic drink somewhere in his castle. He has many of those. You can steal one bottle and he won¡¯t notice,¡± I said.


    After knowing that Timmy can go anywhere in this continent, Fabio told me that his father has never took a step into the secret cer in the castle anymore. Must be because he wants to keep it as secret from someone who can move anywhere in this continent.


    I was not even allowed to put a Blobby there. Even the Blobbies I had on him, and the Sonia¡¯s soil to contact Sonia, were taken off of him before he enter that cer. That¡¯s how much he loves his drink there. Though it¡¯s impossible to keep that secret from me.


    And I shamelessly told Timmy about that ce. I told him that he can steal from there without being noticed by Harold.


    ¡°...Were you thinking that you might be able to win against me if I was intoxicated? Unfortunately for you, it¡¯s not easy to make me that drunk. I will go there right now though. See you tomorrow then. In this ce,¡± Timmy said before he disappeared.


    I guess that won¡¯t work. The only thing that will work is Harold bing pissed knowing that someone stole his precious treasure.


    So, taking him by surprise and getting him too intoxicated to fight won¡¯t work. But at least I managed to persuade him to not fight underground.


    But that¡¯s not just me who will have the advantage. He will too.


    His powerful earth magic won¡¯t be restricted since he doesn¡¯t need to care about the people on the surface of the testing ground.


    Fighting in the surface instead of underground... I guess I don¡¯t need to install cameras for the fight since I will move around a lot. Though maybe they can watch my fight from the sky while riding on the back of Spot. Only if they dare to.


    Watching this fight will risk their life as well. I will tell them that they are allowed to fight, but they must keep their shield activated at all time. Though it may be useless, it¡¯s better than nothing. I will still tell them that it¡¯s better if they don¡¯te. But the decision will be theirs since it¡¯s no longer underground.


    Soon after, Sonia appears to tell me that the discussion is over. There will be another discussionter after I finish my battle. And I will return to think about the cult again after my victory against Timmy. Though that is the biggest hurdle I have to pass.


    ¡°Roy, after taking us back, I need you to send some troops over to where the spy and the werewolves are. They are already prepared to move. Just the troops from Tatrama and Arturo,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Alright. I also have something to say. The battle tomorrow won¡¯t be underground. It will start near theke. You are all wee to watch, but remember that you will risk your life as well even if Ang is protecting you all with her barrier. Just be careful if you want to watch,¡± I said.


    ¡°It will start near theke? Not will be near theke? Knowing you, I guess you will move around a lot from there. Try to move away from the city,¡± Ka said. She is heavily involved in making strategies together with the kings. I can say that other than me, the kings trust her the most. Or maybe they trust her more than me. And the third person they trust the most is Ang since she¡¯s the strongest mage.


    ...Maybe I am the third. Or less.


    ¡°I will. There¡¯s no way I would move to a city and get my movement restricted because of the people there. And I don¡¯t know how will Timmy attack in a crowded ce. That will be dangerous for me instead,¡± I said.


    As someone who have gone to theke and the surrounding area many times, I¡¯m more familiar with that ce than Timmy. Though that is useless since he can sense everything that is touching the ground.


    Fighting Timmy is the greatest trial I need to face before destroying the cult. I have grown stronger, but I need to be even stronger. This is hard.


    After I brought the troops to where the agent and the werewolves who were tracking the cult were waiting, I returned home and lie down on Victobed. I need to sleep.


    Tomorrow is a big day. If I win, I live and get stronger. If I lose, I will die. And many people will lose since I am the key member of the fight against the cult. If I¡¯m not there, everyone will be in danger since the strategy that they can use is very limited without me.


    I need to set my mind to killing Timmy. Even if I lose a limb, I need to kill him no matter what.


    ...Seriously, did I just try to sleep while giving so much killing intent? Let¡¯s forget the battle as well tonight and focus on sleeping. Once I woke up, my mind will be cleared and I can start thinking of killing Timmy again. Let¡¯s just sleep.

 Chapter 579

    Chapter 579: Thumb Up for My Effort!


    The next morning, I woke up with a good mood from a good night sleep, then I realized today¡¯s schedule and my mood turned bad instantly.


    Today is finally the day that I have to fight Timmy.


    Timmy whose real name might not be Timmy is an Aura Master. Something that is stronger than any other Aura user. Including me.


    And he¡¯s also a powerful earth mage who has reached a stage beyond master level. Those twobinations made him the strongest man in his time. And maybe even now.


    And I have to fight him until one of us die. So unfair. I¡¯m just an Aura user without any real master to teach me, and a weak mage with summoning element and air element. Though my familiars are strong, they are still weaker than me.


    I ate my breakfast while thinking of what my advantages and my disadvantages before the fight against Timmy.


    Disadvantages? There are many. I don¡¯t need to repeat them anymore.


    .....


    Advantages? I can outnumber him with my familiars. We¡¯re fighting in the open space, so if I can get him to fight in the sky, I might be able to win.


    Although I couldn¡¯t catch him by surprise since he scheduled our fight, I managed to get the venue changed to the outside. Although I don¡¯t know how he fight, without his earth magic, the things he could do will be limited.


    Though he hasn¡¯t told me if he has other elements or not. If he has a wind element, I will be doomed. At least I hope it won¡¯t be wind element if he has any.


    And the other advantages I have I can think of is our weapons. Thanks to him opening the door, I can see the inside using my Divine Vision. And in there, I can only see one weapon being maintained very well inside that room. A katana.


    Something that Victoria said that it came from his original world, exist in this world. I guess it wasn¡¯t popr enough, so no one picked it as their main weapon. But it exist in this world.


    For me, it was quite a familiar weapon that I often use because of Victoria. If not for her, I would never know what a katana is.


    But other than a katana, Timmy doesn¡¯t have other weapon in his room. And he never asked me to give him some Blobbies. That mean he will only use a katana.


    As for me, I am more versatile. And although I can¡¯t say that I¡¯m a master in every technique with different weapons, I can say that I¡¯m quite good at it.


    So, it¡¯s a fight between a katana user, against me who is a various weapons user along with my familiars.


    If it was before, I would have think that I can just let Victoria protect me all the time. But thanks to the training and the fight here, I learned that if Victoria received powerful damage, she can still be cut even though she was supposed to be immortal. Her size will be smaller because she was cut, but she can recover with time. And the part that was cut will be considered as Blobby and will disappear soon after.


    At least I know her weakness. That way, I won¡¯t make a mistake.


    After breakfast, I prepared myself while digesting the food in my stomach. And when I¡¯m ready, I left to theke where Ang, Ka, Kron, and some other people were riding on the back of Spot who was floating so they can watch my fight.


    I told them to keep their distance from me just in case. They will watch me from afar.


    ¡°You¡¯re here. Are you re-¡±


    Before Timmy could finish his sentence, I already transformed Victoria into a huge heavy hammer, and swung it down to the ground.


    Thanks to the training, my body and Aura has be stronger. And the transformation that Victoria can do, thanks to finally reaching expert level in my summoning, has became much faster. And the maximum weight she can turn into has increased.


    Combined with the speed I was falling down, I created a huge web-like crack on the ground. But Timmy dodged it easily.


    The ground was shaking so much, and I even see the fainted fishes in theke are slowly surfacing. They were all temporary paralyzed because of my attack. And the calmke created huge waves.


    But nothing has changed about Timmy. He¡¯s still standing there with calm expression as I turned my Victohammer into a Victokatana, and shed it toward Timmy.


    ¡°It¡¯s been three thousand years since I fought another katana user. Though you¡¯re not really a katana user, right?¡± Timmy said as we exchanged moves.


    Although I said that we¡¯re exchanging moves, it¡¯s more like he¡¯s just ying with me.


    Even though I swung my katana with all my strength, infused it with Aura and my will, he could easily block them all with ease. And he didn¡¯t infuse much of his Aura into it. Just a small bit enough to stop my attack.


    ¡°If it¡¯s just this much, I don¡¯t even need to use all my strength. Come on! Use that power!¡± Timmy shouted as he blew me away with just a swing of his katana.


    That power? He must be talking about the power that is close to Aura Master.


    I have trained in it, but I can¡¯t use it perfectly yet. I¡¯m still too weak for that.


    That power, Victoria called it Super Aura. She told me to turn blonde, but I didn¡¯t get her as usual. Just something from her old world.


    Anyway, that Super Aura is something that Aura Master can control freely. But for me, I can only use it for five minutes at most in my current strength. This is totally an unfair match with my chance of winning is less than one percent. Why did Timmy think that this is going to help me if he¡¯s killing me?


    I need to make use of Super Aura at the right time. Five minutes is too short, while he can use it freely. Or at least that¡¯s what he said when I asked him more about Aura Master. Though he agreed to call it Super Aura.


    What Super Aura did to me, is not just giving powerful pressure like what Timmy showed me. It makes me stronger and faster is the simplest way to put it.


    There should be other things that Super Aura can do. Something that exins why there¡¯s a huge gap between an Aura user and an Aura Master. Though I don¡¯t know about that, and Timmy refused to tell me. Must be something that I need to figure out myself.


    For now, I can be happy that at least Timmy hasn¡¯t used his full power yet. He hasn¡¯t used his magic yet. But that is good. Whether it¡¯s because he¡¯s underestimating me or because he wanted to guide me to be an Aura Master, it¡¯s good that he hadn¡¯t used his full strength yet.


    I approached Timmy again, and swung Victokatana downward. Timmy tried to block it, but right before my katana touched his katana, I transformed Victoria into a short dagger so my weapon won¡¯t be blocked.


    The short dagger easily passed Timmy¡¯s blocking attempt, and when I passed it, I transformed Victoria into a katana gain as I thrust it forward. Trying to pierce his brain.


    Timmy dodged it just by swaying his head, but I transformed Victoria again. This time, it¡¯s into a sickle. Although it has a de, it¡¯s more of a farming tool than a weapon. But I also have trained in it because of one of the ancient Aura user that I fought and learned from.


    He was a poor farmer but has talent to be an Aura user. He has no weapon, but he was surrounded with farming tools. So, he used a sickle as his weapon. And I learned it from him.


    The sickle in my hand has a curved de. And it¡¯s curved right behind Timmy¡¯s neck as I pulled it toward me trying to cut Timmy¡¯s head off. But Timmy is faster than me.


    He shifted his katana so he blocked my sickle. And my attack failed again.


    But I didn¡¯t stop. With my free hand that didn¡¯t hold the weapon, I threw a straight punch to his chest. But Timmy stopped it again.


    He let go of his right hand from his katana, and stopped my punch by grabbing it.


    ¡°It won¡¯t work. You are the greatest Aura user who used various weapon that I have ever fought. Even in my time, you could be famous. But you are not strong enough,¡± Timmy said as he casually stopped my punch.


    But I have predicted everything until now.


    In my left fist, I hold a small Blobby that I turned into a small de.


    While Timmy is still holding my left hand with his right hand, I grabbed his right thumb, and sliced it off with the small Blobby de that I hold.


    With this, he won¡¯t be able to use his full strength since I have cut his thumb from his dominant hand. Even if he tried to use all his strength, his grip will be weaker.


    I retreated a few steps back while still holding his right thumb in my hand and raised it high.


    ¡°Alright! Thumb up for my effort!¡± I shouted happily.


    But Timmy didn¡¯t look perplexed at all. He¡¯s still calm even though I just cut off his thumb. I need to be extremely careful. He still has a lot of power he hasn¡¯t showed me, while I have shown him everything from the battles against the ancient Aura users.


    The battle didn¡¯t be easier at all. But this is to be expected from the strongest man in his time. And I¡¯m just lucky so far.


    The real battle will start now. Maybe. Though I hope it won¡¯t while he will keep on holding back until it¡¯s toote. But I won¡¯t hope too much for it.

 Chapter 580

    Chapter 580: Calling All My Familiars to Fight


    ¡°All that effort for a thumb,¡± Timmy said as if it was something small that doesn¡¯t bother him at all.


    ¡°Well then, you tell me when was thest time you can grip your katana without using your thumb? And it¡¯s the thumb of your dominant hand as well. Even if you¡¯re strong, you have no choice but to adjust your the way you hold your weapon, right? Using an unfamiliar method, even if I¡¯m weaker than you, it should be difficult. How about I cut off your other thumb as well?¡± I provoked Timmy even further.


    Like usual, I provoked my opponent so that his move will be more predictable. But this is Timmy I¡¯m fighting right now.


    I still haven¡¯t seen how strong he is, but he should have a lot of experiences. Only someone who went through a lot of obstacles can be called the strongest. And some of those obstacles could be from someone like me in the past. Someone who would use anything, including provoking him, so they can win against Timmy. But since Timmy got called as the strongest in that era, it means they all failed.


    Cutting Timmy¡¯s thumb is obviously not enough. He¡¯s still strong even if he has to change his way of fighting. His grip on his katana should be weaker, but even if I use my full strength, I still won¡¯t be able to easily disarm him.


    I gained some distance from Timmy after throwing his thumb away, and transformed Victoria into a gun. And this gun is different than usual.


    It¡¯s what Victoria called as machine gun. A gun that can rapidly shoot many bullets in a row.


    .....


    I didn¡¯t just trained my Aura and fighting skill so far. I also trained my air element magic even though its level hasn¡¯t improved yet.


    My magic control has be much better now and I can repeatedly create airpression, burst it, and repeat it over and over again without using much mana even though I¡¯m still an advanced level air mage.


    And it¡¯s something that Victoria told me about. A gun that can shoot many bullets in a row. A machine gun. Though there¡¯s no machine at all that is used.


    With my strength, I don¡¯t need to care about the recoil of the air burst. And I can shoot around one hundred and twenty bullets in a minute now. That¡¯s a lot. About two bullets in a second. That¡¯s the limit right now.


    I shot hundreds of bullets toward Timmy, but he blocked them all with just his katana. Even though his thumb was removed, his katana movement is still so fast and so swift as he could block all hundreds of bullets without moving a step.


    But those were all Blobbybullets. I have other ways to use them than just for shooting.


    I opened a portal right in front of me toward a Blobbybullet that was blocked and still close enough to his position. Which makes me aimed at Timmy with just less than one meter distance from his right, while there are still bulletsing at him from his front.


    When I shot more bullets, two bullets aimed wereing at him at the same time and he has to block both of them. But that is still not a problem for Timmy.


    He released his right hand from the handle of his katana, and used his index finger to alter the trajectory of the bulletsing from the portal, while his left hand is still blocking the previous bullets with the katana.


    Timmy is using Mind¡¯s Eye to see the bulletsing at him. Something I learned from Mona.


    There were some other ancient Aura users who learned about Mind¡¯s Eye. That¡¯s why I wasn¡¯t surprised that the Aura Master can do it.


    Mind¡¯s Eye is not something that only Aura user can learn. In fact, anyone can learn it as well. But using it will consume too much stamina and mental strength, and only Aura users have that much stamina and still able to move well.


    As for mages, since they rarely fight in close range with their own body, not many of them could learn it. But some still managed to do it.


    And some of them are my own allies. Obviously, the first one who learned Mind¡¯s Eye among our group other than me was Jewel. She¡¯s the one who fought closebat more than the others thanks to her beastform. And although she is not as good as me in using Mind¡¯s Eye to see the surrounding, it will help her a lot.


    Well, there might be more of us who will learn Mind¡¯s Eye in the future. But I don¡¯t know if the cult will wait for us to get stronger or not.


    Even with his Mind¡¯s Eye and experience, I don¡¯t think he would expect what will happen next.


    I keep opening portals after portals to make Timmy unable to predict where I will shoot from and where it will hit. He can only react after the bullets got close to him. That¡¯s what I can tell right now.


    And without him expecting it, I summoned Shelia right away to have her help me fighting Timmy. Our coordination is great. But we still unable to hit Timmy properly after I cut off his thumb. He either parried or block our attacks.


    It¡¯s weird. He hasn¡¯t attacked yet. And he only blocked our attacks. There are still too many things that he kept hidden.


    What is his Aura ability? And does he have other element than earth?


    If he decided to use magic, or use Aura ability, I might end up losing. I need to take care of him fast.


    And I got another help from the sky. Graham is shooting at Timmy with his light magic. He also used the sun to make a huge shadow of himself, and creates five giant shadow clones to help us fighting Timmy.


    Graham has been standing by in the sky since before I wake up this morning. I told him to do itst night.


    With Graham, his clones, and Shelia attacking Timmy, I retreated and stopped shooting anymore. I grabbed some mana potions and drink them all, and I started observing Timmy¡¯s move now that he is being surrounded.


    Shelia and Graham have grown much stronger. They couldn¡¯t even bepared to their past selves. Even Shelia is now much stronger than Grandpa Werewolf.


    But they are still weaker than me. They were having trouble fighting against Timmy since he could easily block their attacks.


    I observed Timmy¡¯s moves, and he just calmly standing there and blocked the attacks. He even looked at me knowing that I¡¯m just observing him, and smiled. So, I waved my hand.


    ¡°Timmy, you haven¡¯t told me yet if you have other elements you can use or not. Can you tell me?¡± I asked Timmy in the middle of the fight..


    ¡°Do you know the most dangerous thing in a battle?¡± Timmy asked me back instead.


    The most dangerous things? Of course I know. It¡¯s not the strongest opponent, or the manpower they have. It¡¯s always the same thing.


    ¡°The unknown. Even if what they keep hidden for so long is something weak, since it¡¯s something unknown, I could even lose my life if I¡¯m not careful,¡± I replied.


    ¡°Oh... I always thought that if the opponent is stronger, they are the most dangerous. I guess you¡¯re right about that,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°...Fuck. The only reason you said that because you never fight someone strong as the weaker one. Whether they have something unknown or not, you are always the stronger one and win easily. Do I have any chance in winning,¡± I asked myself.


    ¡°I actually want to tell you about my other element. But since you¡¯re thinking that something unknown to you is the most dangerous, I will keep it to myself for now. This way, you will be more wary of me,¡± Timmy said as he blocked Shelia¡¯s attack.


    ¡°Shit. I gave the wrong answer,¡± I said.


    ¡°Rather than the wrong answer, your answer was totally correct that I need to change my mind,¡± Timmy said calmly.


    ¡°Shut up! I¡¯m regretting my answer right now!¡±


    If only I said the wrong answer, he would have told me about his other element. But now, he keeps it hidden.


    I don¡¯t think it¡¯s a decision that he could make right away. Must be because he wanted to test me instead.


    He actually wanted to keep his other skills hidden from me. But he used my answer as the reason to do that..


    Because if not, he would be extremely dangerous. He can make a split-second decision that will cause me trouble.


    ¡°Then, can you at least tell me your Aura ability?¡± I asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s also a secret. Good luck in finding all the unknown,¡± Timmy said as he blocked Graham¡¯s light magic.


    Oh, he can also block magic. I can only cut them through instead of blocking. I think I¡¯ll watch a little bit more before joining Shelia and Graham.


    Shelia, Graham, and Graham¡¯s five shadow clones were all fighting Timmy. But Timmy still didn¡¯t move at all from his spot as he blocked their attacks.


    And I just stand there recovering my stamina, and see what more I can learn from the Aura Master.

 Chapter 581

    Chapter 581: Timmy¡¯s Other Element


    ...All I can see is how superior Timmy is against all of us.


    How can we beat him?


    ¡°How is it? You think you can defeat me?¡± Timmy asked me all of a sudden even though he is still fighting the others.


    ¡°Don¡¯t talk to me all of a sudden like that! It was as if you have the ability to read my mind. That¡¯s creepy,¡± I replied.


    ¡°I don¡¯t need to read your mind to know what¡¯s in your mind. I mean, it¡¯s obvious,¡± Timmy said.


    For now, I don¡¯t think his Aura ability is mind-reading. Though I still need to be wary until I¡¯m confident what his ability is.


    ¡°I guess you must be thinking that I¡¯m not a mind-reader or something,¡± Timmy said again.


    .....


    ¡°...You are a mind-reader! You guessed what¡¯s on my mind correctly!¡± I shouted at him.


    ¡°I¡¯m not. I just have a lot of experiences. You can call me... expression-reader, I guess,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°Then you should know that my expression is telling you that I¡¯m pissed right now,¡± I said.


    How can he be so calm while fighting seven enemies at once? Shelia, Graham, and Graham¡¯s five giant shadow clones.


    Even when Shelia is using her most powerful attack on him, he just blocked it casually with his katana in his hands. He blocked Graham¡¯s light magic with ease. And the five giant shadow clones were no match against Graham.


    Hmm... seems like I won¡¯t be able to learn anything from just watching. Just like Bearded Baldy said, I must move my body and don¡¯t think at all. But that¡¯s difficult for me.


    There¡¯s only one way I could win against Timmy. It¡¯s something that extremely difficult for me to do.


    I have to get stronger during the fight.


    But how? Using guts? Hoping for some miracle? Sudden power increase when I¡¯m close to death? Power of friendship? Love and peace?


    Getting stronger in a fight is something that only happened in stories. There¡¯s no way something like that can conveniently happened to me.


    And the reality right now is that I need to get stronger or I will die.


    Using some hastily-made strategy will not do anything to him. I¡¯m already weaker than him and slower than him. He can use powerful magic. The only thing I haven¡¯t used yet is my Super Aura. But I¡¯ll keep it forter.


    For now, I need to bring him up into the sky. That¡¯s the only thing I can do for now.


    And so, I returned to the battle and tried to get Timmy to fight me in the sky.


    My familiars understood my intention, so they tried their best to stop Timmy from moving from his spot.


    All five giant shadow clones swung down their spears together to the exact same spot, and Timmy blocked them all with his katana.


    ¡°Even if all five giant clones attacking me together, it¡¯s not enough,¡± Timmy said confidently.


    ¡°How about an attack from below!?¡± I shouted.


    I rushed toward Timmy with Victokatana in my hands.


    ¡°Alright, Roy. Do the golf swing!¡± Victoria whispered to me.


    I don¡¯t know what a golf is, but I know the swing. Victoria taught me how to swing it during my training before fighting Timmy.


    The katana in my hand need to be held horizontally above my head, then I need to swing it down before raising it up as fast and as strong as possible.


    Thanks to Victoria¡¯s transformation, I don¡¯t have to worry about her hitting the ground. I can just make her shorter before touching the ground, and make it longer and bigger before the moment of impact. And with her weight maniption, I can swing it very powerfully.


    Timmy didn¡¯t expect that the katana suddenly transformed into a hammer, and he has no way to block or dodge it since he was being held in the same position thanks to the giant shadow clones.


    I don¡¯t care if he can fly or not, but getting him away from the ground is more important.


    At the moment of impact, the giant shadow clones rxed their strength so there¡¯s no stopping force and Timmy finally get his feet off of the ground. Right toward where Graham and Shelia are waiting. High in the sky.


    Seeing that the battle moved into the sky, Spot retreated a bit so he and those who are watching the fight on his back won¡¯t get hit by stray attacks.


    ¡°Oh. Been a while since my feet didn¡¯t touch the ground,¡± Timmy said in a rxed manner.


    Even now, he¡¯s still calm. But the thing he can do will be even more limited.


    In the sky, we attacked Timmy while making sure that he will only get higher and get fewer oxygen to breathe.


    ¡°Hmm? I¡¯ve never been this high before. The air is thinner here than it is below. I guess that¡¯s another reason why you brought me here,¡± Timmy said.


    That¡¯s right. I used air magic on myself, Shelia, and Graham so we can still breathe easily no matter how high we are in the sky. As long as we don¡¯t go beyond the atmosphere, it should be fine.


    But for Timmy, even if he¡¯s an Aura Master, and unless he¡¯s an air mage, he would have difficulty breathing in this ce.


    ¡°Just so you know, although I will still have difficulty breathing, I¡¯m still an Aura Master. I can move well without even taking a single breath of air for hours. Though this is still a good move since it limits my earth magic,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°Are you really not a mind-reader!?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. I just have a lot of experiences,¡± Timmy replied.


    ¡°So you¡¯re just old!¡±


    Timmy was still not using his Aura ability, nor was he using his other element yet. But I don¡¯t have the time to care about that. If I could defeat him instantly, that¡¯s all that matter.


    Even if it¡¯s not the result that Timmy wanted, I have to do it.


    I know that his goal is to make me stronger and turn me into an Aura Master. But I want to survive no matter what. Even if I have to disappoint the strongest man.


    Even if I couldn¡¯t be an Aura Master in the end, since this is a deathmatch, I must kill him or he will kill me. I don¡¯t want to die, so my only choice is to kill him.


    ¡°It seems like you¡¯re thinking that you need to kill me as soon as possible even with the risk of never reaching the level of Aura Master. Am I right?¡± Timmy said as he blocked Shelia¡¯s attack while being blown higher into the sky by me.


    ¡°You have a lot of experience! You can tell what¡¯s on my mind easily! No need to ask me everything!¡± I shouted.


    ¡°After seeing everything you¡¯ve done with the other Aura Master, I guess I¡¯m right. Do you really have no wish to get stronger?¡± Timmy asked.


    ¡°I want to get stronger, but I don¡¯t want to risk my life for it!¡± I replied.


    I want to live. I want to survive. That¡¯s why I seek strength.


    Risking my life so I can get stronger? I don¡¯t want to do that. Even if I do get stronger, I might end up losing everything.


    ¡°Just how does someone like you end up learning Aura?¡± Timmy asked.


    Because I learned it in my past life. Back when I want to risk my life so I can have a better life. And using that experience, and my luck that I canmunicate with Victoria as soon as I summoned her, I could learn Aura easily in this life.


    Maybe in Timmy¡¯s past, he and the other Aura users have to go through live or death situation to even awaken their Aura. But I didn¡¯t do that.


    In this life, I have clearer goal. It¡¯s to live in peace without seeking death like I was in the past. But to do that, I need to destroy the cult.


    I keep repeating what I want over and over again ever since I returned back to the past. Keep repeating why I need to destroy the cult. And until the cult is destroyed, I will keep on repeating it. So I won¡¯t forget.


    ¡°Then, I will have to force you to be in a risky situation. Fine, you want to see what I hide? I will show you. It¡¯s my other element. Beastform!¡±


    As soon as he said that, his body half transformed into something like a reptile.


    So, he¡¯s a beastform mage? And turning into a reptile-like beast in the sky. What kind of reptile flying in the sky?


    ...I know the answer. It¡¯s a dragon. He¡¯s a freaking beastform mage who can transform into a freaking dragon!


    ¡°That is not a beast! That¡¯s a monster!¡± I shouted.


    ¡°You know nothing of magic. Many powerful magic has been erased in history. This is also good thing to teach your disciple, Jewel. I¡¯ll show you Evolution!¡± Timmy said.


    Well, here goes my advantage in the air. He can fly as dragon¡¯s wings were on his back.


    But evolution? Is he saying that beastform can evolve just like caterpir turned into a butterfly?


    I hope he can give the lesson quickly and Jewel can hear him clearly while she¡¯s watching on Spot¡¯s back.


    ...How about I ask him to pause the fight for a bit. That should be fine, right?

 Chapter 582

    Chapter 582: Pausing the Fight


    ¡°Wait, can you exin everything? There were no beastform mages among the ancient Aura users previously, so I want you to exin everything about beastform magic in the past so my disciple, Jewel, can learn more,¡± I said shamelessly.


    ¡°...You do know that we¡¯re in the middle of a deathmatch, right?¡± Timmy asked.


    ¡°A deathmatch in the middle of a war. You forced me to do this, so I will get everything I could get from you. Including about beastform magic so my disciple can be stronger. Spot! Come over here! Jewel needs to see this!¡± I shouted. Loud enough to get Spot and the others who were watching me from afar to hear me.


    They were also shocked that Timmy suddenly turned into a dragon. Not a beast, but a monster.


    It wasmon sense that beastform mage can only transform into a beast, and not a monster. But what about over three thousand years ago?


    There is a huge difference between a beast and a monster even if they look simr.


    A beast is just an animal. Nothing more.


    .....


    But a monster is different. They could be stronger, smarter, and could even use magic. It¡¯s all because of the mana that they have. Either they absorbed it themselves, or it¡¯s something they were born with.


    Evolution. That¡¯s what Timmy said.


    It¡¯s something that animals went through to be monster. Which mean for beastform mage, they could transform themselves into a monster if they could evolve.


    But let¡¯s hear his exnation first. And it¡¯s a good chance to rest.


    Since there¡¯s no advantage we can have by staying in the air, wended on the ground so Timmy could teach Jewel. And Jewel could share what she learned with Ian.


    Although Ian doesn¡¯t seem to be interested in fighting a war, I don¡¯t think he has no interest in getting stronger. If he could get stronger, he could protect Ruby and the others. There¡¯s no reason he would refuse it.


    ¡°So, we¡¯re in the middle of a fight and we stopped so you an teach your disciple?¡± Timmy asked me as he transformed back into his human form.


    ¡°Yes,¡± I replied.


    ¡°Aren¡¯t you too shameless to ask someone who you will fight again to deathter on?¡± Timmy asked.


    ¡°Then you should have teach Jewel before our fight. You have so much power, but you choose to fight to death instead of joining the war. I won¡¯t ask you anymore why you wanted us to fight, but you should at least teach everything you know to us before either one of us dead,¡± I said.


    ¡°Fine. Well, it won¡¯t take long just to exin it. It¡¯s quite simple. Your name is Jewel? Come here and I will teach you about beastform magic,¡± Timmy called Jewel.


    Jewel then jumped from Spot¡¯s back, ande over to hear Timmy¡¯s lesson. As for me, I¡¯m quite busy even though I¡¯m resting. My mind is.


    Right now, I¡¯m resting. But I¡¯m not just catching my breath. I also listened to Timmy¡¯s lesson, while making some strategies using telepathy with my familiars.


    Timmy is strong. And Timmy in his dragon form must be much stronger than the human form. I suspected that he should be much stronger than the fire dragon that I fought before.


    If he¡¯s a dragon, then what is his beastform before evolving into a monster? Most likely a lizard. And why would he pick a lizard?


    Most likely, it¡¯s because of lizard¡¯s ability to regenerate their lost limb. Lizards are a reptile that will cut off their own tail when being approached by danger. But they were fine because their tail can regenerate with time.


    The biggest question is, why is someone who was called the strongest picked that animal? A lizard. I don¡¯t think anyone would imagine that they will lose their limb or something. But Timmy picked that animal as his beast transformation. Did he think that he will surely be a dragon?


    ...Unless he has lost his limb before he awakened as a beastform mage. Or in worse case scenario, the environment he was in was extremely dangerous. So, he needs something to survive. Though that was me. I don¡¯t think Timmy is that kind of person.


    And so, I also listened to Timmy¡¯s exnation.


    It started from when he awakened his beastform magic. And as one of my guesses, he did lost his right hand before he awakened his elements. But he was already an Aura user by that time.


    Thinking that fighting with only one hand is difficult, he became a lizard to regrow his lost limb.


    ...And I just cut of his right thumb, while he has experienced losing his whole hand. No wonder he was so calm.


    Right now, his thumb is slowly regenerating. I don¡¯t care anymore. It¡¯s impossible to win against Timmy right away and it will take a lot of time. It doesn¡¯t make any difference. He¡¯s still stronger than me.


    The young Timmy became a lizard and regrow his lost hand. But he also trained in fighting using one hand while holding a katana during his recovery. He said that while looking at me.


    Just exin everything to Jewel. You¡¯re just showing off like that.


    In his time, beastform are considered to be difficult to increase their level. But when the level increases, the beast that they took form can evolve ording to the mage¡¯s imagination of the beast. And the closest and strongest imagination that Timmy had from a lizard was a dragon. Hence he can transform into a dragon.


    ¡°So how can I improve my beastform magic?¡± Jewel asked.


    ¡°You need to know more about the animal you¡¯re transforming into, and what evolution they have. As for me, it was simple because I picked a lizard. And the strongest evolution was a dragon. Birds form are the most popr in every era including today¡¯s era. And they evolved into elemental birds or something else. It¡¯s all depend on how you perceive the animal you transformed into, and what evolution you think they could get,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°So if I imagine strongly that my rhinoceros form can be an elemental rhino with... let¡¯s say earth element, that means I can have another element?¡± Jewel asked.


    ¡°Like me. I was only an earth mage and a beastform mage. But after transforming into a dragon, I can breathe fire. Although the fire magic I can use is limited, I still got an extra element long after my first awakening,¡± Timmy said.


    Oh, I learned something. Not just about beastform. But also about Timmy.


    Earth mage, dragon beastform mage, and he can also use fire magic. But what about his Aura ability? He hasn¡¯t revealed it yet.


    ¡°I see... In fact, I haven¡¯t even seen what a real rhinoceros look like. Only from books and the form Victoria transformed into when I asked her. But if it¡¯s from imagination, I don¡¯t need to see it for real. And the evolution, I¡¯ll just find the monster myself,¡± Jewel said with conviction.


    No need to see it for real? If it¡¯s all imagination, I think that¡¯s for the best. I can just give her the suggestion of what rhino is really is, and if she believes it, she could be much stronger than an original rhino.


    ...That sounds like hypnosis. Well, I¡¯ll just tell her if she asks me.


    ¡°Master! I want to go to Monsters World! I should be able to find a monster simr to a rhino over there. Even if the cult is starting to move, I don¡¯t think they will use everything they have right away. I¡¯ll get stronger first until that time,¡± Jewel said.


    ¡°...Alright. Go back and tell Lina about it. After all, if I die here, you won¡¯t be able to return. So you need to ask Lina. Maybe you can ask Sunny to go with you as well. Good luck,¡± I said to Jewel as I opened a portal toward Lina¡¯s location.


    If she brought Sunny with her, Lina can open a portal for her to return in case I die today.


    ¡°I¡¯ming with her. I feel like I¡¯m not strong enough,¡± Wendy said as she entered the portal with Jewel.


    She also came here to watch. But seems like she also want to train more. And it¡¯s much better than just sending Jewel by herself.


    ¡°Well, now that it¡¯s over, should we continue?¡± Timmy asked.


    ¡°Now that you have revealed your other element, how about you reveal your Aura ability as well while we¡¯re at it? So we don¡¯t have to stop the fight againter,¡± I said.


    ¡°You know what? We don¡¯t have to stop the fight at all. I can just continue fighting you even if you ask me to stop. But it¡¯s my fault that I didn¡¯t teach Jewel before our fight. And it¡¯s not like you can do anything with it as well even if you know,¡± Timmy said confidently.


    This is great. The unknowns won¡¯t be unknown anymore. I finally learned about his Aura ability.


    ¡°My ability is...¡±


    When I heard about his ability, I can only feel rage. I will kill him no matter what!

 Chapter 583

    Chapter 583: Using Super Aura


    ¡°Go to hell, you bastard!¡±


    Let¡¯s go back to the moment before I shouted that out loud.


    We were pausing our fight because I asked Timmy to teach Jewel more about her beastform magic. It is beneficial for us since we will soon confront the cult. That¡¯s why I asked Timmy to stop the fight for a moment.


    And it happened after I asked about his Aura ability.


    I knew that it doesn¡¯t matter to him if I know about his other element or his Aura ability. But he kept it a secret for a little longer just to provoke me. And although I felt a little angry, I can still be cool about it.


    He showed me his other element, which is beastform, during our fight. And after that, I asked him about his Aura ability. Which he didn¡¯t mind to tell at all. And that makes the unknown variables that he has reduced by two. Which should be good.


    But his Aura ability is something that make me angry. Well, not really his Aura ability. But it¡¯s closely rted to that.


    .....


    ¡°My Aura ability is... ¡°Charm¡±. Just like your ghost friend, I can use Charm magic to seduce girls. I killed an incubus to gain this power,¡± Timmy said.


    Charm? Killing an incubus? So, what his heart desired was a harem? To be surrounded by girls?


    ¡°I manifested my Aura first, and then my magic element. It took a while until I can look for my Aura ability. But by that time, I have became strong enough without it. What I desired waspanionship. And of course I would pick women over boys. That¡¯s why the Aura ability I got was charm magic,¡± Timmy exined.


    ¡°...Timmy, can you tell me one more thing? Maybe you wantedpanions is not a lie. Maybe your two best friends who were with you were actually women and they were your lovers and not your friends. I don¡¯t know and I don¡¯t care. But tell me, is the reason you told me that we have to fight to the death is because I have a harem without having to use any charm magic?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well... that is one of the reason I started this. Not the main one, but it¡¯s still one of the reason,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°You started a deathmatch because of jealousy! Go to hell, you bastard!¡± I shouted.


    And that¡¯s how the second round started. I came at him along with Shelia and Graham behind me, fully rested after the short break.


    I thrusted my Reizpear at him while showing how angry I was. But I¡¯m not really angry. I just want to use this chance to get hm lower his guard if possible.


    Why should I be angry at him? I have a harem of beautiful women. That¡¯s true. And it¡¯s not the first time someone hate me for it. Too many sad men were jealous at me that I can¡¯t count. So what if there¡¯s another one?


    ¡°Oh, you¡¯re pretending to be angry to let my guard down. Sorry, but that won¡¯t work,¡± Timmy said as he transformed into his humanoid dragon form with a pair of wings on his back.


    With just a little bit of Aura covering his body, None of our attack could pierce through his hard scales. Beastform and Aura are too powerful when they werebined. Now I¡¯m jealous of him. Why didn¡¯t I manifest beastform magic?


    If his charm magic can only manipte women, I don¡¯t need to worry about it. But even without it, he¡¯s already many times stronger than me. Seriously, do I need to get stronger in this fight? Where is the power of friendship now? Give me my miracle!


    As a smart man... kind of smart I mean, I know there are some conditions where miracles can happen. One of them is through effort. If one seek for miracle, miracle could happen. Though not all the time.


    And so, the only thing I can do is put in more effort. Fine, I won¡¯t think much anymore.


    It¡¯s time to use my Super Aura. Five minutes. That¡¯s how long I can use it. I don¡¯t need to think whether five minutes is enough or not. What matter for now is putting in more effort and hopefully, miracle will happen.


    ¡°HAAAAAH!¡±


    I used my Super Aura as I shouted. I don¡¯t really need to shout, but it increase my spirit. Making me feel that I can do anything.


    Still, this is my only chance. I have to use this well and kill Timmy.


    ¡°Finally, you¡¯re using it. I will also show you my full strength now. Don¡¯t die too soon,¡± Timmy said as he also showed me his strength.


    The pressure from the both of us increased. But I feel like I got pushed back.


    Shelia and Graham retreated to get some cover in the distance so they won¡¯t get affected heavily. And Spot moved even further to protect those on his back.


    No, I don¡¯t need to care about the audiences anymore. Just me and my familiars. Shelia and Graham is in difficult position since they can¡¯t handle this much pressure. But they need to get used to it.


    The match continued. With me still getting pressed.


    Every moves I did, even after I predicted several moves ahead, were all blocked easily. It¡¯s not just his hard scales and his katana. His tail is also helping him. It¡¯s such a pain to fight someone with an extra limb.


    And even his slowly regenerating thumb, even though it¡¯s still smaller than a normal thumb, his grip is strengthened.


    The only good thing is that my attacks created some scratches on his scales. But they were just scratches.


    ¡°That¡¯s good. Although you are not the fastest Aura user I have fought, you are already faster than most. But it¡¯s not enough. After all, your power is still weaker than most Aura users I have fought,¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°I know that already!¡±


    Among the ancient Aura users I have fought previously, I was never the stronger one. I was the faster one most of the time, but not all the time. So I know very well that I¡¯m weak.


    But those ancient Aura users got defeated by me because of my strategy. Stalling for time as much as possible and hit them when they lower their guard. Though it¡¯s impossible to do it right now.


    I need to be stronger. Faster. And have an extra limb!


    ...Wait, I don¡¯t need to have extra limbs. I have familiars. I have two extra fighters instead!


    ¡°Shelia! Graham! Fight with me!¡± I shouted at the two who were just watching.


    But I didn¡¯t just shout. I also infused my Aura to the two monsters. My Super Aura.


    Just like what I did to Victoria when she fought her master, I got my two other monsters to be able to use Aura momentarily.


    So what if Timmy has five limbs? I have two extra fighters to help me.


    ¡°This is the power of friendship!¡± I shouted.


    ¡°You¡¯re our master though. We¡¯re basically your servants,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°This is the power of a summoner!¡± I corrected my words.


    That¡¯s much better and more suitable.


    With this, although they are not Aura users, they can use the power of Aura momentarily.


    I was thinking of getting Victoria to fight by herself, but I think it¡¯s better for the two of us to stay together.


    ¡°Graham, don¡¯t make shadow clones or the Aura will be dispersed. Fight by yourself!¡± I said to Graham.


    ¡°Understood, Master!¡±


    The three of us fought Timmy at the same time. Doing this will make the time limit reduced. From five minutes to two minutes at most. We have to defeat Timmy by that time.


    ¡°Trying best me using number? That¡¯s good. But that¡¯s not enough!¡±


    Timmy twisted his body while holding his katana horizontally above his head, and then he quickly swing it down.


    The force of his swing creates a crater on the ground. But we dodged it before it could hit us. Thanks to my Divine Vision, I could predict his move. Though I couldn¡¯t predict how powerful it was, I still told my familiars beforehand to move via telepathy. This way, no one was hurt.


    ¡°Very nice! Come at me!¡± Timmy shouted.


    With our teamwork, we finally managed to make a crack on his scales. It¡¯s small, but a crack is a crack. And to distract Timmy, we pretend to focus on that one spot, while we actually think of making more cracks appearing on his scales.


    Few more seconds until the time limit. And we finally created a gap on his scales.


    I thrusted my Reizpear with all my strength into that one spot. Thinking that it¡¯s my final attack and we could finally win.


    ¡°Did you forget about this?¡± Timmy asked as the rocks under him quickly raised and covering the open gap on his scales.


    That¡¯s it. My thrust with all my strength unable to damage him. We were so happy that we broke through his scales, forgetting that he¡¯s an earth mage.


    My strength returned back to normal as I can no longer feel the Super Aura on me.


    After being returned back to the past, this is the first time I feel this much despair. It¡¯s just impossible. Winning is impossible. I might die today.

 Chapter 584

    Chapter 584: Using the Last Card


    ¡°Is it over? I¡¯m disappointed. I guess it¡¯s time for you to die,¡± Timmy said as he gives powerful pressure iparable to before.


    Just by feeling that sheer pressure, Shelia and Graham both lost their consciousness. I can still hold on, but I have no more strength to fight. I¡¯m out of Aura. I can¡¯t use Super Aura anymore, which is the only thing that can break through Timmy¡¯s defense.


    ¡°Even after spending everything, you can still endure this much pressure. At least you can still do something praiseworthy,¡± Timmy said as he walked closer to me.


    I assumed defensive position with Victoshield ced in front of me to protect myself from Timmy. Although I¡¯m out of Aura, I can still move and think. I need to think fast and smart. What should I do to defeat him? What can I do to survive?


    Timmy then casually swung his leg at the shield, and I felt as if I got hit by a boulder. I got blown away with just a kick.


    Even though I don¡¯t have Aura anymore, I¡¯m still confident with my physical ability. But this is too much. Not only I got blown away, my arms were broken as well trying to stop his kick.


    A single kick can do this much damage? Aura Master is such a cheat.


    .....


    ¡°Is that how much you want to destroy the cult!!? Stand up and fight!¡± Timmy shouted. It was as if he was trying to provoke me.


    But that won¡¯t work. Although I¡¯m not smart enough to make any good strategies, I¡¯m smart enough to not easily get provoked. I can hear him, but his provocation meant nothing. He needs to do better to provoke me.


    Stand up and fight? I feel like my ankle is twisted after trying to stop his kick. But all that effort were useless. Still, I tried to stand up by forcing Victoria to turn into an armor, and force my body to move ording to the armor. This is how I can still stand up.


    ¡°Roy! Are you okay?¡± Victoria asked me.


    ¡°How can I be okay? Even you got shrunk after just being kicked. My body is hurt all over and some bones are broken. Please think of a way for me to survive this trial,¡± I said.


    ¡°It¡¯s just impossible. I never thought that there¡¯s something beyond Aura user. Aura Master is just too strong for the current you. Timmy just want to kill you. It was never a test in the first ce,¡± Victoria said.


    A test? I thought the test was the fights against the ancient Aura users. This is not a test. This is a deathmatch with only one of us will survive.


    I don¡¯t think that Timmy is someone who want to kill me for no reason. If he is, he shouldn¡¯t even created that testing ground in the first ce.


    This must really be a test. He want to test my strength. And if my strength can¡¯t satisfy him, I¡¯ll die.


    Even when he kicked me, I still think that it was not his real strength. If he wanted to kill me, that¡¯s when he should use all his strength.


    Is he thinking that I still have a chance to win? Is he provoking me so I can get angry and get stronger?


    Whatever the case, I need to think. That¡¯s the only thing I can do right now. What should I do?


    ¡°FIGHT, ROY!!!¡±


    Whoa, that was so loud. The loud girl has gone to Monsters World, so it¡¯s not her. And the one who shouted just now was Ka.


    She jumped off of Spot¡¯s back to the ground and running here. Using her earth magic, she tried to protect me from the approaching Timmy. Is she going to fight? That¡¯s stupid!


    ¡°Don¡¯te over!¡± I shouted.


    But instead of stopping, she¡¯s still rushing here while Earth Wall has formed in front of me. And not just her. Even Ang, Candy, Spot, and the others who were watching were rushing here.


    Those idiots! They won¡¯t be able to do anything to Timmy!


    As soon as they got close enough, Timmy¡¯s pressure finally hits them and they were unable to move properly. Some even copsed on the spot.


    That¡¯s good. Stay there and don¡¯t move or you will die. Please don¡¯t move and keep fainting.


    ¡°...I see. It¡¯s not you. It¡¯s your friends,¡± Timmy said as he changed direction.


    Instead of walking toward me, Timmy changed direction and walked toward Ka.


    ¡°Stop it! Don¡¯t move! Ka, run!¡± I shouted.


    I tried to move my legs. It hurts so much even with the help of Victoria wrapping around my body so tightly.


    As Timmy was just walking, I can catch up with him. I hugged him from behind with my legs wrapped around his body while trying to choke his neck. But Timmy doesn¡¯t care at all as he still moves toward Ka.


    Think! I need to think fast!


    Ah, that¡¯s right. I can do that and it will stall him for a few seconds. That¡¯s good.


    While still hugging Timmy from behind, I opened a portal in front of us. It¡¯s connected to the ce furthest from here that I have installed a Blobby but it is still in this continent. Old man Henry¡¯s ce.


    I can¡¯t just transport him to Monsters World. He might destroy the vige I built for the monsters while waiting for me.


    Even if he can return back here quickly, it¡¯s enough to stall for time.


    I jumped off from Timmy¡¯s back, and give him a push so he can enter the portal. I can see his surprised expression when he turned around. He never expected that I would us portal to transport him away. Though he is not the only one with surprised expression. Old man Henry was shocked as well. Though I closed the portal instantly.


    ¡°Everyone! Get back to the air! And bring me with you!¡± I shouted.


    Ka then used earth magic to move me and everyone else who fainted, and get us all to Spot¡¯s back as he rises to the sky.


    ¡°Roy, do you have a n? You transported Timmy with portal to stall for time, right?¡± Ka asked. She seems very worried about me. It seems like she¡¯s here not just to watch my fight. But also to join in in case I¡¯m in danger.


    ¡°Stalling is the only thing I can do. With his earth magic which helps him to travel through the ground, he would be here in a few minutes. No matter how powerful he is, he can¡¯t travel instantly like when I use portal. And during that time, I¡¯m going to gamble. Using myst card,¡± I said.


    This is the only thing left I can do. Only miracle can help me, and I hope I can perform miracle.


    ¡°Gamble? For you to think of gambling, I guess you are too desperate. We¡¯re in the air so Timmy won¡¯t be able to notice us, right?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°Right. Once he surfaced from the ground, he will get up here however way he can. By that time, I hope to gain some miracle,¡± I said.


    How will I perform miracle? By using myst card.


    I said it before that the most dangerous things in a fight are the unknowns. And I have one unknown thing left. In fact, even I don¡¯t know what it will be. Will it be something good, or will it be something bad.


    I don¡¯t know. But this is the only thing left I can do.


    ¡°I¡¯m going to summon my fourth familiar. I have reached expert level in my summoning, but I haven¡¯t made a contract with any monster yet. I thought that I would be able to look for one in a rxed manner after fighting Timmy. But it seems to be impossible. So, I have no choice but to do it right now. Making a contract with a random familiar and hopefully I can grow stronger,¡± I said.


    ¡°Are you sure!? If it¡¯s bad, then you need to kill it, right? The chance of a summoner getting powerful familiar using that mean is very low,¡± Victoria reminded me.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I got you, didn¡¯t I? Twice. First in my previous life, and then in this life. I don¡¯t think my luck is all that bad. Just watch. I will make a contract with powerful monster,¡± I said confidently.


    Even though we¡¯re on top of Spot¡¯s back, I prepared to cast my summoning magic. This one will be my new ally and I hope it¡¯s something that can help me go through this trial.


    Enduring the pain in my body, I activated the same magic that I used to summon Victoria for the first time. But something is different.


    ¡°Roy!¡±


    The others are shouting my name. And I can feel that Victoria is leaving my body. She¡¯s not here anymore even though I her as my armor.


    And then, a portal the size of my body appears in front of me. I was sucked in by that portal and that¡¯s when the others are calling my name.


    This feel weird. I was supposed to be the one doing the summoning. But I¡¯m the one got summoned instead?


    ...Am I being summoned to hell?

 Chapter 585

    Chapter 585: The Fourth Familiar


    ...Am I being summoned to hell?


    That¡¯s the very thought thate to my mind as soon as I got transported instead of getting a new monster o make a contract with.


    The ce I¡¯m barely standing on, because of my bad ankles, is pitch ck. But it¡¯s not like there¡¯s no light. I can see everything is dark even though I didn¡¯t use Divine Vision, and there¡¯s no lighting. I can see just fine.


    Is this hell? Did I somehow die?


    ¡°Are you the one who will be my master?¡±


    All of a sudden, I can hear a voice. The one saying it says that I would be its master. Though I don¡¯t know about that.


    Although I exhausted all my Aura and unable to use Divine Vision, I can still use my Mind¡¯s Eye. Thank god that I learned this skill.


    .....


    When the voice suddenly called out to me, I used Mind¡¯s Eye and see that something suddenly appeared in front of me. Simr to Sonia who suddenly appears in front of me. Some sort of teleportation I guess.


    And the one talking to me was not a human. It was a monster. A monster in the shape of a horse.


    ¡°Are you the one who will be my familiar?¡± I asked the horse.


    ¡°Maybe. I brought you here to ask you some questions. We haven¡¯t make any contract yet and it¡¯s my own decision should I ept you to be my master or not,¡± the horse said.


    ¡°I guess it¡¯s some sort of interview, huh? Well, that¡¯s fine. But let¡¯s do it quickly. I don¡¯t know what that guy will do if I¡¯m not there,¡± I said.


    Right now, Timmy should already be on his way to where we were before. And if he doesn¡¯t see me there, he might end up fighting with Ka and the others. They will be in danger. Just to force me to get stronger, he would endanger my friends.


    They onlye to watch our fight and cheer for me. But they ended up being his targets.


    That¡¯s good. At least he won¡¯t target my home and the people there. After all those who watched my fight are at least strong enough to hold Timmy back a little.


    I don¡¯t know what to do if Timmy made a decision to go to my house. Not just the one in the capital, but also the one in Cassau. He might fight everyone instead of just those who can fight like Ang, Ka, Spot, and the others.


    It¡¯s funny how he did this even after taking a short break to teach Jewel about beastform magic. All of a sudden he would attack other people. Just because he wants me to kill him. What a weird guy.


    No, not a guy. He¡¯s a grandpa. He¡¯s over three thousand years old. An annoying grandpa.


    ¡°Let¡¯s do it quick. What do you want to ask me?¡± I asked the horse. The pitch ck horse with fiery red eyes and the mane and tail were like smoke. Not hair, but smoke. Though I have to say it¡¯s somewhat cool.


    ¡°I am Abyss Horse. A creature closest to death and will never appear in mortal world. But somehow you were so close in summoning me. How and Why? Only those closest to death can even see me. And that¡¯s when their lives are disappearing. But you can somehow summon me to mortal world and have the ability to make me your familiar, so I transported you here instead,¡± the horse asked.


    Abyss Horse? That sounds cool. It would be great if he can be my familiar. Though I need to pass the interview.


    I started reminiscing about my past. That must be the reason why I can meet Abyss Horse. Including the recent memory as well.


    ¡°If those who are closest to death can see you, then that would be me. Just as I felt that my life was over, I returned back in time and have a second chance. But at that time I was dying, I didn¡¯t meet you. And then, I got another familiar who has died and got reincarnated as a slime, and a ghost as my... housekeeper. And in the past few months, I was surrounded by ghosts. Maybe that makes me even closer to death and able to meet you,¡± I said.


    ¡°Hmm... if that¡¯s the case, then you¡¯re right. I can sense a scent of death in you. I¡¯m not a fortune teller, so I can¡¯t tell when you will die. But it¡¯s the death that should have been there in the past. It¡¯s a wonder how you¡¯re still alive,¡± the horse said something confusing.


    ...I think I took a bath this morning. Oh, right. After breakfast, I already start moving to theke. I haven¡¯t taken a bath today. Though that shouldn¡¯t be the kind of scent he¡¯s smelling.


    ¡°Someone who was supposed to die got returned back in time and got surrounded by those who have died. Interesting. Alright. I will be your familiar. It¡¯s also my first time living in mortal world, so it should be interesting. You¡¯re in the middle of a fight? Then I will help you,¡± the horse said.


    ¡°That¡¯s good, but now its time for me to ask you questions. I have a goal I need to achieve. How can you help me with it?¡±


    I asked what the Abyss Horse can do. Seems like he could be a great mount, but I don¡¯t know. He just looks cool. But if it¡¯s a mount, riding on Spot¡¯s back could be better.


    ¡°What I can do, huh? Many things. In this space, I encounter many powerful people. All of them were unable to escape from death. The most they can do is only to stall for time. And just by watching millions of people, maybe more, passing through this ce, I learned a lot. I can run fast and I¡¯m strong. And I can lend you the power of mana or Aura. You won¡¯t regret it to make a contract with me,¡± the horse said.


    Lending the power of Aura and mana!? That means my already exhausted mana can be restored?


    This is great! As expected, I shouldn¡¯t think of just getting myself stronger. I¡¯m a summoner. I can also win by numbers. And an Abyss Horse seems to be so powerful.


    ¡°Then, let¡¯s make a deal! What¡¯s your name?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t have a name yet. How about you give me a name, Master?¡± the horse asked.


    Alright, my naming sense is bad. I need to think of a better name for the Abyss Horse. Something as good as his appearance. Red-Eyed ck Horse? That¡¯s stupid. And although Victoria is not here, I got influenced by her too much that I have the urge to say ¡®Let¡¯s Duel!¡¯ right now. So, no.


    Something cool... My name is cool. Let¡¯s adjust it for the Horse.


    ¡°How about Ray? Because right now, you¡¯re my ray of hope. And it¡¯s close to my name, Roy. Do you like it?¡± I asked the horse.


    ¡°Ray, is it? I like that. I will be Ray from now on, Master.¡±


    Just like that, I finally got my fourth familiar. Now, how do we get out of here.


    ¡°Let me ride you for now. My ankles are hurting me,¡± I said as I jumped on Ray¡¯s back.


    Once I get out of here, I will fight Timmy again. So, I prepared my Reizpear. Although Victoria somehow didn¡¯te here, Reizpear stille with me. Maybe because Victoria is still a living being. Though I think it should be her who have met Ray before since she died long time ago. But maybe those who have been reincarnated never met Ray before.


    ¡°Alright, Ray. Once we get out of here, we will enter a fight. I need you to do as I say,¡± I said to Ray.


    As soon as I sat on Ray¡¯s back, I feel my stamina is recovering quickly. And the Aura I have exhausted also recovering. I can use Super Aura again. And this time, I feel like I can use it for longer than five minutes. This is great. Though I need to have a saddle. I can use Victoria for itter.


    ¡°Master, there¡¯s one thing I need to tell you. I am not a creature that should exist in mortal world. Although there shouldn¡¯t be any side effect in that world, something about me might change. And I might not be able tomunicate with you like this again. But I will still trust you. It¡¯s my decision to trust you after all,¡± Ray said that to me.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know how you can trust someone that easily, but I like that. Oh, wait! What do you need to eat to live? Grass just like normal horses? Or something else? Can you eat human¡¯s cooking?¡± I asked Ray.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. I have never consume anything in this world. Let¡¯s try to find out what I like, okay?¡±


    ¡°And one more thing. You said that no one can escape death. Does that include you?¡± I asked Ray.


    ¡°Yes. I have live for a long time in this space but I never thought that I¡¯m immortal. Everyone will die. But some will die sooner, and some will dieter. No one knows,¡± Ray said.


    I guess that makes Victoria not an immortal. And what about Sonia? Since I can exorcise her with Aura, she¡¯s not immortal either.


    Well, it¡¯s time to go back. Thinking that it¡¯s because of my summoning magic that I cane here, I should be able to use portal to return there. Let¡¯s continue the fight and kill Timmy.

 Chapter 586

    Chapter 586: Fighting Together with Ray


    I opened a portal and returned back to where I was before. The ce where I was fighting Timmy.


    I opened a portal to Victoria¡¯s location, and see that everything changed.


    Theke is frozen, thendscape got destroyed, and my friends are copsed on the ground. They must be busy fighting Timmy until now.


    There¡¯s no more of that peaceful sight in thiske where we used to go for a pic anymore. Just destroyedndscape.


    Timmy should be able to wait for me like a good boy. But instead, he waited for me by fighting my friends. And they are copsed on the ground even though it shouldn¡¯t be long since I was moved to... hell? Abyss? Whatever that ce was.


    It didn¡¯t take me more than one second to observe the situation. And I quickly entered the portal while riding on Ray.


    Just my entrance and it makes everyone stopped what they were doing. Timmy was just within an arm reach to Ka when he stopped. He felt the powering from me. Or the power of me and Raybined to be exact.


    .....


    When I first ride on his back, I didn¡¯t feel ufortable at all. In fact, I feel as if he¡¯s already one with me from the start. Like a part of my body.


    And the power inside Ray, the Aura and mana in him, I can use it freely as if they were mine. It¡¯s totally amazing even though it was extremely rare for me to ride a horse. But it feels like I¡¯m already an expert at horse-riding.


    ...though I need a saddle. My ass is in pain.


    I also don¡¯t feel that my twisted ankles are ufortable. Which is weird. But for now, I need to fight. I must not think about other stuffs.


    ¡°Victoria!¡±


    I summoned Victoria, then I got her to create some Blobbies to be my saddle while Victoria is transformed into an armor to help me use my arms again.


    ¡°A horse? You suddenly disappear and got a horse with you?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. Ray is a good and an awesome horse. He looks cool as well,¡± I said.


    ¡°Ray?¡±


    ¡°The name of the horse. I think that¡¯s much better than how I usually naming things, right?¡± I said.


    ¡°Well, that is good indeed. Roy, Ray. Ray, Roy. No one could imagine how you came up with that name,¡± Victoria said sarcastically.


    I look over at the battlefield once again, and then I rushed toward Timmy while on the back of the horse. Now that I have a saddle, a veryfortable one, I feel good.


    The speed of Ray was very fast. Probably even faster than Spot. And I didn¡¯t feel any eleration at all. As if Ray reached maximum speed on the go.


    With Reizpear in my hand, I attacked Timmy who recognize me as a danger. Even without Aura and with two broken arms, I can push him back thanks to Ray. Seems like he can also lend me physical strength. I don¡¯t know how and why, but this is excellent.


    Timmy who didn¡¯t think that he would get pushed back, got blown away. And I grabbed Ka and put her behind me.


    ¡°Ka! Heal me!¡±


    I told Ka to heal me while she¡¯s riding behind me. Of course I made the saddle so it can held two people easily. And as expected of Ray, he could lift two people easily. I think he can lift more weight without being disturbed. Though I don¡¯t need to do that now. No time to test it.


    After leaving that space with Ray, as he told me before, he was unable tomunicate with me anymore. I don¡¯t know if his intellect has reduced or not, but he can¡¯tmunicate even if I use telepathy. But at least he still listens to my order. And he has told me everything that he can do before we came here.


    ¡°Roy! I used too much mana in just a short time. It¡¯s impossible to heal you right away! And Graham is still unconscious!¡± Ka exined to me.


    I guess in that short time I disappear, Timmy has caused too much trouble for everyone here. For an expert level mage to spent so much mana in that short time. Timmy is one hell of an opponent.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about mana. Ray, transfer her your mana!¡± I said to Ray.


    After I gave the order, Ka felt something. Her mana somehow recovered and she should be able to heal me.


    ¡°This is... no time to be shocked. Heal!¡±


    Ka then casted healing magic on me. Good thing I have checked my bones beforehand. They are in ce and I can be healed well.


    Now, my broken arms are healed. And my ankles are fine as well. It¡¯s time for the next round. I will fight Timmy on my own.


    ...No, not alone. I have Victoria, Ray, and Ka behind me to heal whenever I¡¯m injured. This is how I fight. Asking for help whenever I can¡¯t do things by myself. This is the real me. Someone who can¡¯t fight alone.


    ¡°Alright, Ray! Let¡¯s go!¡±


    This time, I used Super Aura again. But with the help of Ray so the time limit will be extended. From how it felt, it seems as if I can use it for thirty minutes. Maybe more than that.


    And now, with my enhanced strength and speed thanks to Ray, I can somehow be equal to Timmy who has transformed into his dragon form. Katana-wielding dragon.


    I thrust my spear at Timmy who then blocked it with his katana. Somehow, he got pushed back even with all the strength he had. Which mean I can now fight on equal ground to him. It¡¯s all thanks to Ray the Abyss Horse.


    ¡°That horse. If I¡¯m correct, that¡¯s something that my death mage friend always seek but never found. It¡¯s a creature from the abyss. Am I right?¡± Timmy asked me while blocking my attack.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know if it¡¯s the same creature. And I have another question. Was he just your friend? Or maybe, it¡¯s not a he. It¡¯s a she. And it¡¯s more than just a friend,¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, I do have charm magic that affect women. The rest, you need to figure it out by yourself if you¡¯re curious,¡± Timmy said as he swung his katana with his full strength.


    Because I¡¯m just used to this power, I got my spear blown back. But now that I¡¯m stronger and faster, I can quickly throw another attack.


    In just a few seconds, we have exchanged dozens of attacks. But I retreated after seeing that the shockwave that we created by our exchanges can be felt by Ka.


    ¡°I guess I can¡¯t bring you with me any longer. Heal me now and go fly with Spot or Ang. Use healing magic on me whenever you think it¡¯s necessary,¡± I said as I opened a portal for Ka and pushed her into it.


    ¡°You have to win, Roy!¡± Ka said as she¡¯s already on Spot¡¯s back.


    I will. Now that I have Ray, I know that I can do it.


    Now that Ka is gone, I give my all on my Super Aura. If she was still here, she would copse from the pressure.


    As if waiting for that moment, Timmy also used Super Aura fully. It¡¯s much stronger than the previous times he did it, but I can endure it better now.


    ¡°Ray, I¡¯m counting on you,¡± I said to my horse who replied with a neigh.


    Ray galloped toward Timmy as we exchanged attacks. I with Reizpear, and him with a katana. It was an intense match iparable to any fights from before.


    And then, Timmy swung his katana upward to disarm me from Reizpear. It worked. But that¡¯s because I loosen my grip on Reizpear on purpose.


    ¡°Did you forget that a spear is not my main weapon!?¡±


    Victoria then transformed into a great sword and I swung it down toward Timmy. But before I could reach him, he built an Earth Wall to protect himself.


    ¡°Did you forget again that I have earth magic?¡± Timmy asked.


    What¡¯s this? Apetition to find who is the most forgetful?


    Let¡¯s just shut my mouth instead of replying.


    After he built an Earth Wall, I had Ray run on air using the technique that makes the vibration won¡¯t be felt on the ground, and run toward Timmy¡¯s back without him noticing.


    He was toote to notice it, but he still managed to block my greatsword with his katana.


    I pulled back my greatsword as I had Ray turn around and give Timmy a powerful kick on his chest before moving again.


    Timmy got pushed back a few steps, but as he stopped, I¡¯m no longer in front of him. I¡¯m above him!


    Good thing Abyss Horse can also run on air. Though the skill used to make the vibration disappears was mine. We had a good teamwork as if we have been fighting together for a long time.


    This time, my attack hit him. He tried to stop it with his right arm, but I severed it. And then he tried to counter it with the katana on his left arm. Leaving a long scratch on my right shoulder to my back. Though Ka has healed me from afar.


    I forgot. He is a lizard. He can regenerate lost limbs so he can fight recklessly.


    In thepetition where we find who is the most forgetful, I won. And that¡¯s not a good thing!

 Chapter 587

    Chapter 587: I am the Aura Master


    ¡°Question! If you can regenerate your body without using magic thanks to your lizard or dragon form, how will I be able to kill you!?¡±


    While still exchanging moves, I asked Timmy a question. Seriously, even if I end up being stronger than him, he could just heal himself.


    I can now use Divine Vision again, and see that the injuries I inflicted on his body has started to recover along with his lost arm. And it¡¯s not a good thing.


    He has experienced the lost of a limb. Maybe many times. Not just that time before he manifested his beastform magic. But many times after he became a beastform mage seeing how he seems to be very experienced in that reckless way of fighting.


    ¡°If I die I won¡¯t be able to regenerate! That¡¯s all!¡± Timmy said.


    ¡°Ain¡¯t that obvious!? Why are you so intent on dying!?¡± I asked Timmy again.


    ¡°I will tell you about it once you¡¯re victorious,¡± Timmy replied.


    .....


    ¡°If I win, you¡¯d be dead!¡± I shouted.


    I could go to that ce where Ray was before purely by chance. The ce where people who died need to pass through so they can go to the afterlife. Maybe if it¡¯s exist. I don¡¯t know.


    And although I have Ray with me here, I feel like I can¡¯t go to that space anymore. Though I need to check itter to confirm if I¡¯m right or not.


    That space allow Ray to see dead people. And maybe, if I kill Timmy, he would pass through that ce. But I feel like I can¡¯t go there anymore. And even if I go there, I feel like I shouldn¡¯t stay for too long. That¡¯s not a ce for a living being to stay for a long time. Even if I have died once already.


    So, if I win, Timmy would die. And I won¡¯t be able to talk to him anymore. Unless he bes a ghost, or reincarnated as an intellectual monster. Like Sonia or Victoria.


    I guess I will never know the answer. What a pain in the ass this grandpa is.


    Unless... this grandpa is a battle freak. Someone who loves fighting more than anything, and want to use all his power in a fight.


    I think I heard about that story from Victoria. About a certain group in her original world who long for death in battle so they can reach... what was it again? Valha? I guess that¡¯s it.


    Maybe it wasn¡¯t as far as her original world. Such people exist as well in this world. And probably, this grandpa is from that group of people.


    Well, I don¡¯t know the answer, and I will probably never know. I have to kill him so I can survive. That¡¯s the simplest thing I have to do right now.


    Kill Timmy, survive, kill the Evil God, destroy the cult, and survive. That¡¯s the order I need to take.


    Well, maybe the order of killing the Evil God and destroying the cult can be reserved. Whatever it is, that¡¯s the only way for me to survive. Though I need to survive from this battle first. That¡¯s why surviving is twice in that list.


    ¡°Come on! Let¡¯s focus on the battle! We¡¯re trying to kill each other here, so don¡¯t think of unnecessary stuffs! Or you will die!¡± Timmy reminded me that we¡¯re still in the middle of a deathmatch.


    If he wants to die that badly, he could just kill himself without causing me much trouble. Or maybe fight the Evil God by himself. Even if he die, he could be regarded as a hero that way. And people can remember him forever as his name will be written in history.


    But he¡¯s too stupid for that. No, rather than stupid, he only care about fighting. This is why I don¡¯t like mucleheaded idiot. Though I know some muscleheaded people, they were not idiot. Timmy is the idiot for wanting to fight to death when we can just talk to each other normally.


    Well, I guess I shouldn¡¯t hold back anymore. I will use all the power I have, including from Ray, and kill Timmy. The fight will end soon.


    I still have some more time until the time for my Super Aura is over. But I should at least defeat him as soon as possible so I won¡¯t lose like before. Unable to give him some real damage because the time limit for my Super Aura is over.


    I used a full power swing with my Reizpear to blow Timmy away before I had Ray run in the air to gain some distance. But Timmy soon regain his bnce quickly and chased after me as he flies with his wings.


    Not just him. He also used earth magic simultaneously so the ground is chasing after me. The speed of his earth magic seem to be as fast as Ray¡¯s fastest speed. It can¡¯t reach us, while we can¡¯t gain more distance.


    We reached an open area where wended but we still continue running with Timmy behind us. The earth magic he used once we are on the ground is splitting the earth right behind us. If Ray loses his speed just a little, we would get caught by Timmy¡¯s magic and fall.


    After running in the open area, we entered the forest nearby. With Timmy still chasing after us.


    ¡°You think you can distract me with branches!? You are a fool!¡± Timmy shouted.


    As soon as I entered the forest while still riding on Ray, I cut off the branches from the trees nearby with Reizpear, while also shooting at Timmy with Blobbygun. It¡¯s to distract him.


    I also had Victoriarmor on me covering my whole body. Though it¡¯s not for protection. It¡¯s for my n.


    Ray continued running on the ground while the branches are falling behind him, and a huge fissure was following him. Timmy can¡¯t see well because of the branches, but he should have Mind¡¯s Eye and his earth magic so he can still follow after Ray.


    Thinking that he can catch up to us, he sunk underground as the fissure stopped chasing after Ray. And Timmy suddenly showed himself before Ray as he brandishes his katana and thrust it forward toward Victoriarmor.


    ¡°The game of tag is over, Roy. You have done well, but that¡¯s not enough... Wait, where¡¯s Roy!?¡± Timmy shouted as the katana on his hand is stuck on Victoriarmor.


    ¡°You think I¡¯m Roy? Sorry, but it was me all along! Victoria!¡± Victoria said.


    There¡¯s no me inside Victoriarmor. It was hollow as soon as Timmy entered the ground. As for me, I jumped off from Ray¡¯s back, leaving behind my Reizpear with Victoria who has transformed into a living armor with the same weight as when I was inside of her so Timmy didn¡¯t notice.


    And when Timmy thrust his katana and pierced Victoriarmor, Victoria holds the katana with her hands as she used Aura thanks to riding Ray. Ray can also lend his Aura into Victoria. That is why I made this n.


    Even though Victoria can¡¯t use Aura as well as I did, she was still a former Aura user. She can hold Timmy back for a few second.


    And that¡¯s enough for me to run down the sky and shed my Blobbysword on the unprepared Timmy. Cutting his heart in two.


    ¡°Being stronger or being trickier. I chose both. I¡¯m sorry to disappoint you, but I¡¯m not someone who can be stronger by myself. I¡¯m someone who can shamelessly ask for help, and I will ask for help when I can¡¯t do something on my own. I guess this is my power of friendship if such thing exist,¡± I said to the dying Timmy.


    ¡°Ugh... Good job... But just because I¡¯m dying doesn¡¯t mean I can¡¯t give my final blow!¡± Timmy shouted as he still able to move his already regenerated right hand which is still connected to his brain.


    His punch, infused with Aura, didn¡¯t hit me at all. It¡¯s all because he has became weaker after being shed.


    He didn¡¯t use his Aura to protect himself, and he didn¡¯t use his magic even though that¡¯s what he was supposed to do. That¡¯s why my air magic, which created confusing gases, works on him in hisst moment. That¡¯s why his punch missed me as it blew away the trees on its path.


    ¡°...It seems like I won¡¯t be able to listen to your reason why we need to do this. But thanks to you, I have grown much stronger than I expected I would be. Thank you, Aura Master,¡± I showed my gratitude toward the dying Aura Master who forced me to get stronger.


    Soon after, I can no more sense life from the Aura Master. Which makes me the real and the only Aura user in this world. No. I¡¯m already an Aura Master now.


    ¡°Congrats, Roy! You finally done it!¡± Victoria said as she has transformed into her original human form while still riding on Ray¡¯s back. I guess she enjoyed the feeling of using Aura by herself. With this, she can help me better in a fight. I have more ns to use against the cult.


    Ka and the others who were watching came down and congratte me for gaining victory.


    Suddenly, I had some weird feelinging from Timmy¡¯s corpse. Although I didn¡¯t sense any malice, I ordered the others to get back and prepare themselves.


    What ising from a corpse? Whatever it is, we need to be prepared.

 Chapter 588

    Chapter 588: Two Ghosts Appear


    I feel that something ising from Timmy¡¯s dead body. I don¡¯t know what it is, and even if I don¡¯t feel any malice from it, I keep raising my vignce. Good thing I quickly finished my fight with Timmy. I still have some more time until my Super Aura time is over.


    I quickly called Ray over and jumped on his back as Victoriarmor opened and enveloped me.


    ¡°...That look kind of scary. Victoria, can you open the armor in a less scarier way?¡± Kron asked Victoria.


    ¡°Not now. If what Roy felt is an enemy, it¡¯s best to intimidate them instead. That¡¯s why I did it in a scarier way,¡± Victoria replied.


    From how others viewed it, it was as if Victoria was eating me alive. Victoria opened a gap in the armor and made some sharp teeth as I entered the armor. Though it was good for intimidation indeed. I don¡¯t know whatever that exists in her original world, but lots of them have been helpful to me. Though that makes me scared to go to her original world.


    The people of that world has scary imagination.


    Anyway, we¡¯re facing something we don¡¯t know about. Is it an enemy? Or is it an ally?


    .....


    But I have made my decision. To attack it first before it does anything.


    Soon after, something like a smokeing out of Timmy¡¯s dead body. Is that a soul? Is Timmy turning into a ghost?


    It¡¯s now or never! Even if he became a ghost and unable to do anything to me other than scaring me, which won¡¯t work after I got to know many ghosts, it will still be too annoying if he somehow stays in the world in whatever form.


    I rushed toward whatever that is with Ray, and tried to kill it. But all of a sudden, we got stopped.


    Vines suddenly grow from under us and wrapped around Ray and me. Stopping our charge.


    ¡°What the hell? Though it¡¯s not strong enough for me,¡± I said as both Ray and I broke free of the bindings.


    Something like a ghost suddenly appears. No. It¡¯s not one ghost. But it¡¯s two ghosts instead.


    And my detective instinct kicked in.


    ¡°Two ghosts? And manipting nts? I suppose that you two are Timmy¡¯s best friends that he talked about. One is a death mage at the stage beyond master level, and the other is a nt mage at the stage beyond master level. Am I right?¡± I asked the two ghosts who make their appearances.


    Both of them then turned into beautiful girls. One of them is an elf though. Must be the nt mage.


    ¡°You¡¯re right. Thank you for killing Timmy and avenging us,¡± the human ghost said that to me.


    ¡°I didn¡¯t do it for you. I did it because if I don¡¯t, I will die,¡± I replied.


    ¡°You don¡¯t seem to be surprised hearing that the two of us who were supposed to be Timmy¡¯s best friend wanted revenge,¡± the elf ghost said.


    By this time, the nts have stopped moving and I still don¡¯t feel that they have malice. They came with friendly manner instead.


    ¡°I have a ghost with me who used to have simr power to Timmy. And she told me of how one of the men she charmed ended up attacking her. Anyway, is his name actually Timmy?¡± I asked the two ghosts as I let go of my weapon. Or more like transforming Victoria.


    I¡¯m still riding on Ray just in case the situation changed. Even if they hate Timmy, they are still strong. Even as a ghost, they can use magic that they had before they died. It was proven by how the nts stopped us.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know about his name. We were just suddenly got manipted to stay with him. And we don¡¯t care either. Since you called him Timmy, it¡¯s easier to exin if we called him Timmy as well,¡± the human ghost said.


    And then, she exined about everything. Including why Timmy wanted to die.


    The two of them, along with many other girls, were tricked to fall for Timmy using his charm magic. But only the two of them and Timmy can live for so long because the others couldn¡¯t get further than master level.


    Timmy was too strong, but when these two reached a stage beyond master level, they can slowly regain control of their mind. But they were still weaker than Timmy, so they didn¡¯t do much.


    Until they finally decided to built this ce for fun. After staying with just the three of them for a long time while watching Aura users died one after another, the two made some ns.


    The death mage casted magic on her and the elf so they will be ghosts after they died. And they will stay within Timmy¡¯s body until he finally dies.


    Because they were weak against Timmy, the only thing they could do was waiting until he died, and tell every secret Timmy had to the one who killed him. Which is me.


    ¡°...Is that the only way you can think of for revenge? Waiting until he died and telling all his secret to me?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, there¡¯s nothing else we can do. Though we witnessed what you and your friends did all this time. And now, thanks to the Abyss Horse, we can stay here for much longer time than we expected. So, other than Timmy¡¯s secret, we can teach you and your friends about magic. We both are mages beyond master level after all. It should be helpful for you guys to destroy the cult,¡± the death mage ghost said.


    That is amazing. Previously, the others can only learn from master level mages who were Aura users. But now, they can learn from even stronger mages.


    ...I need to think of a name for a stage beyond master level.


    ¡°But to do that, we need to stay here for a while longer. And so, we need to stay with your horse. Is that okay?¡± the ghosts asked me to lend them Ray.


    ¡°...Wait a minute. I have realized how terrible I am in making a decision. Not that bad, but most of the time, my decisions were not good enough. So, I will call some people instead,¡± I said as I opened a portal.


    I called Albert and the other kings,and my friends who were not here. Not the monsters. Because the opponents are death element mage and a nt mage. Though I asked Lina to call Tia and the other elves.


    They are cowards and weak. But their nt magic has a lot of potential. With the elf ghost here, she can teach a lot of things to the elves. Even if the elves are still afraid to join our fight against the cult, it¡¯s good enough to make them stronger.


    I also took Shelia and Graham who have awoken to return to Monsters World. They need some rest.


    Albert and the others arrive, and the first thing they checked was my condition. After all, I just fought against the strongest man in his time.


    Especially old man Henry. He was the most shocked to see that Timmy suddenly appeared in his office, then he jumped off of the window and sunk into the ground.


    After that, they finally see the ghosts riding on a horse. I told them about Ray and the fact that he¡¯s my new familiar. I also told them about the two ghosts as well.


    The ghosts then told us why Timmy wanted to die. It¡¯s not that he wanted to die. It¡¯s just that he¡¯s a battle freak. And he had the believe that dying in a battle will get him a special spot i after life. Just like the vikings that Victoria told me about.


    ¡°About Timmy¡¯s secret. Can you give us a map of this continent?¡±


    The two ghosts asked for a map. I grabbed one using my portal.


    ¡°Here, here, and here. These are three ces that Timmy went to after he awoke from his sleep after you cut down the tree. They are ces where Timmy stored his treasures. Magic weapons, equipment, golds and jewelries. Some of them are already unusable, but some should still works. They are treasures that he hid before he built that testing ground with us,¡± the death mage ghost said.


    The three ces she pointed are a forest in Arturo, a desert in Consenza, and city in Varadis. If I¡¯m near, with my Divine Vision, I should be able to find those ces easily.


    ¡°Alright, thanks. Though I don¡¯t think I will go there soon. How long will you stay here until you... move on?¡± I asked the two ghosts.


    ¡°Just until we have taught everything we know to your friends. Don¡¯t worry. With the Abyss Horse here, we can stay as long as possible. And we won¡¯t leave until we say our goodbye,¡± the elf ghost said as she looked at Tia and the other elves.


    I guess they have a lot to teach. They are powerful mages after all. And just like Timmy, I don¡¯t know if these two had other elements or not that has reached the same level as their most powerful element. If they do, that would be great.


    Now that the battle is over, it¡¯s time for me to rest. I¡¯m tired.

 Chapter 589

    Chapter 589: I Don¡¯t Need to Give Anything in Return


    I slept for a long time and when I woke up, it¡¯s morning. I guess I was too tired and slept for a while day after defeating Timmy.


    The battle between Timmy and I started in theke near Cassau, and we moved all the way deep to the forest. But thanks to Timmy¡¯s earth magic, many trees have fallen. What a powerful magic. Good thing it was far from the city. And it was far from where hunters would go for a hunt. So it¡¯s safe.


    ...Maybe. I mean there was a huge change in thendscape of where we fought. So, the guild might have given the hunters a mission to check it.


    Well, I can just tell the guild leader that I was training. He¡¯s already one of us.


    After fighting, meeting two ghosts, bringing the kings and everyone who wanted to train, some discussion, and then taking the kings back home, I returned back to my house in Cassau to rest while the others were still there with the two powerful ghosts. Even as a ghost, the nt mage can still use nt magic. Must be because of the intervention of the death mage. And that¡¯s why Sonia asked to learn from her.


    Now that Victoria can slightly use Aura even though she said that she wasn¡¯t as strong as she was in the past, she will be able to help me more in the fight against the cult. And probably after seeing that, Sonia got jealous. That¡¯s why when we saw that the nt mage ghost can use magic, Sonia might be able to do something other than sending messages.


    Though I don¡¯t think that¡¯s being able to send messages is bad. In fact, she is already far superior than most of us since we don¡¯t have anything such as long distancemunication. No one can rece her.


    .....


    Other than me. But I¡¯m already more of a fighter than a messenger.


    And so, Sonia also training to do something, I don¡¯t know what it is, with the death mage ghost. Even though she¡¯s still busy because of the cult¡¯s movement right before my fight with Timmy, she used her spare time to train something.


    Or at least that¡¯s what I heard from Lina. My excellent maid who have been taking care of me and everything else while I was asleep.


    With the help of Penny who has gotten used to doing odd jobs as my secretary, in which I have forgotten most of the time that I have built a n, they have taken care of everything. Including talking to the guild leader about what happened in theke and in the forest.


    As for Penny¡¯s daughter, she is with the two ghosts trying to get stronger as well. She was also there when we trained with the ancient Aura users.


    Hannah has now reached advanced level and will soon reach expert level. Penny told me that happily as her beloved daughter reached a level which only few people in the world can reach. Though we have quite a lot of expert level mages with us now.


    But Penny looked sad as well knowing that Hannah won¡¯t be able to avoid going to war. That¡¯s why shemitted herself in doing what she can do and became better in taking care of the n when I¡¯m not there. Which is most of the time.


    ¡°Well, I guess I will take a look of what¡¯s going on over there myself. One whole day should be enough for the ghosts to teach us everything that they can teach us. Did the others stay overnight there?¡± I asked Lina since there¡¯s no one here.


    ¡°Not everyone. Since Spot can just fly over here quickly, he brought those who wanted to rest here, and carried some meals for those who wanted to stayst night. And this morning, after getting their breakfast, they left again,¡± Lina exined.


    Even Victoria stayed the night over there. I guess now that she can slightly use Aura a little while riding on Ray, she is interested in training by herself. Maybe Sonia can use Aura as well.


    And if those two can do it, maybe the others can use Aura while riding on Ray¡¯s back.


    Though rather than borrowing Aura from Ray, they can just borrow mana from him. It¡¯s best for them to not change their way of fighting to something they are not used to.


    Although the term that Ray said was borrow, it¡¯s not like we have to give something in return. I felt from Ray that the Aura I received could recover naturally. We don¡¯t need to give anything. Or maybe because we¡¯re alive. Ray will take something when we die. I¡¯ll just ask the death mage ghostter. She should know more about Abyss Horse.


    After breakfast, I left to where the others are training. I can see that everyone is trying their best doing self-training some were sparring, and some are asking for guidance.


    The weird ones were the elves. They seem to be worshiping the nt mage elf ghost. She must be some important figure for the elves since Tia herself was also bowing her head toward the ghost.


    Let¡¯s ignore them and ask the death mage.


    ¡°Hey, thanks for giving us lessons. Do you still have things to teach us?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, everyone has done well. Especially Ang. I can feel that she could be stronger than me. Maybe she could even reach a stage beyond what we reached,¡± the death mage ghost said.


    ¡°Maybe we can give it a name so it will be easier than a stage beyond this or a stage beyond that. Anyway, I have some questions I want to ask.¡±


    ¡°Do you also want to learn magic from us?¡± the death mage asked.


    ¡°No. My summoning magic can improve just by letting my familiars fight. As for air magic, even in your time, was there anyone as good in air magic as I am?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, no. Even in the past, air mages were considered weak unless they were also Aura users. But even then, you are much better than them. So, what do you want to ask?¡± the death mage ghost was curious.


    ¡°About Abyss Horse. Tell me everything you know.¡±


    The death mage ghost then told me everything she knows.


    As a death mage, Abyss creatures were something they wanted to research on. There were various version of them. They could be animals, and they could even be humans. And the one I made a contract with is a horse.


    The fact that there were many of them can mean that there are many afterworlds since one world can only have one Abyss Creature.


    Well, that¡¯s not important. No matter how many afterworlds there are, once you¡¯re dead, there¡¯s nothing else you can do unless you have the luck to be returned to the past or reincarnated into another living beings.


    I asked about borrowing and lending Aura and mana from Ray. Do we need to give anything back in return? And if so, what would that be?


    ¡°Well, Abyss Creatures were not a creature that should exist in mortal world. Either in this world, or Monsters World, such thing shouldn¡¯t exist. Except if they have a contract with a summoner. And once the summoner died, the Abyss Creature they contracted with will return to their original world. Unlike normal familiars which will stay here after the summoner died. The Abyss Creature stored various type of energy inside of them, like Aura and mana, because they encounter many passing souls from the weakest to the strongest. And they can freely lend those power to anyone. There¡¯s no need for giving it back something. It¡¯s because borrowing their power means that the power is not yours. That¡¯s why you don¡¯t need to worry about it,¡± the death mage ghost said.


    That¡¯s it? I can borrow anything from Ray, but Ray won¡¯t need to receive anything? Well, I can just introduce Ray to the food of this world.


    Anyway, is he a herbivore? Ray is a horse after all.


    Maybe omnivore. He¡¯s not a normal horse.


    It will be weird if he consume blood like the vampires. Being bitten by Arin seems much more natural than being bitten by a blood-sucking horse. That¡¯s creepy. Even though there¡¯s nothing natural about getting your blood sucked by a vampire.


    ¡°So there¡¯s no other meaning in borrowing power than that it¡¯s not your own power. That¡¯s all? I guess that¡¯s good,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. Ray is a good horse. The reason you could meet him must be because you experienced death. No matter how much we tried, we death mages were never able to meet Abyss Creature,¡± the death mage ghost said.


    ¡°What do you want to do after meeting it? Now that you have seen an Abyss Horse, what do you want to do?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about that. I have researched what I could from Ray. Though those knowledge are useless since there are no death mages among your friends. I guess it will be lost knowledge soon. Well, that¡¯s fine. We still have a few more things to teach you guys, so we will stay a bit longer,¡± she said.


    ¡°You can stay as long as you want though,¡± I said.


    ¡°We shouldn¡¯t. If we get too addicted to the world of living, we would end up bing vengeful ghosts because it¡¯s the effect of my magic. Unlike Sonia who became a normal ghost monster, vengeful ghosts can attack or even kill people. Not just scaring them. And we even prepared to have shorter time as ghosts. But thanks to Ray, we can stay a little longer. We¡¯ll be here for a few more hours and then we will leave,¡± she said.


    Well, if that¡¯s what she wants, that¡¯s good. Vengeful ghosts, huh?


    I guess I should join the training as well.

 Chapter 590

    Chapter 590: Training Under the Two Ghosts


    After that, I kept asking more questions about Abyss Horse to the death mage ghost. Most of them were not really important. It¡¯s more like she¡¯s a fan and Ray is her idol as she kept praising Ray again and again.


    All of the power of the Abyss Horse, Ray has told me back in that strange world. So, there¡¯s really no need for me to ask the death mage ghost about it. But the death mage ghost just keep speaking.


    I let her be since she will disappear soon. After she has finished teaching us everything, she will be gone. Together with the other ghost. The elf ghost.


    Though there¡¯s one big difference between the two ghosts.


    One is a death mage who idolize Abyss Horse, and the other is an elf who was idolized by other elves.


    As I finished talking with the death mage ghost, I asked one of the elves who the nt mage ghost really was. And it turned out that she was the Elf Queen five generations before Tia who disappeared all of a sudden.


    She disappeared from Monsters World because she got summoned and made a contract with a summoner at that time. Though that summoner was killed by Timmy who took fancy of her, and he used his charm on her.


    .....


    Because she disappeared all of a sudden before having a heir to seed the throne and became the next king or queen, the elves decided to pick someone else among the high elves of that time to be the next king. And that elf was Tia¡¯s ancestor.


    And that¡¯s why Tia and the other elves treated the nt mage ghost with their utmost respect.


    Though for me, I would hate her for it.


    She and her summoner were traveling together, right? Which mean they were together for quite a while and she refused to return to her world. Which meant that she escaped from her people. I would hate her for it.


    But I guess the elves didn¡¯t think that way. Probably because after all this time, they have grown weaker and more cowardly. And now that they have the chance to learn something from their former queen, they dly took that chance.


    Good thing I reminded the nt mage ghost to not say anything bad about humans yesterday. Though it¡¯s fine if she talks bad about some certain individuals as long as it¡¯s not all human being.


    I tried to remind her that both worlds are in danger. Human¡¯s World and Monsters World. And we need the elves to help us fight against the cult. So, even if she hates human because of Timmy, she would keep it for herself while the other elves will continue helping us. It will be much better if they decided to join the fight instead of protecting the vige.


    The nt mage ghost didn¡¯t only teach the elves about nt magic. She also taught them all about archery. And since there¡¯s no other magic I can learn from the two ghosts, I also tried to learn about archery from the former Elf Queen.


    While the elves practiced archery by using the bow and arrows they made from nt magic, Ka and some others also trained by using bow and arrows they made from earth magic. As for me, I just use some Blobbies to do it.


    I can use a gun since it was easier, but maybe bow and arrow can do something useful. That¡¯s why I trained in it as well.


    Maybe because I have used guns many times, I have much better uracy than the others. I lose only to Sara who decided to train archery as well. Though since I used Blobbies as my bow, my shot is far stronger than the elves¡¯ even without using Aura.


    Though I didn¡¯t train for too long. Some of the elves have started to lose their confidence seeing that I¡¯m much better than them. They should have known that I¡¯m an Aura Master and I¡¯m a special case. But they seem to have forgotten about that fact.


    So, to not make them lose any more confidence, Sara and I did our own training somewhere else. Though we stopped training in archery soon after and return to using guns. It¡¯s much easier to use than bow and arrow.


    Other than archery, the elf ghost also taught everyone about movement skills. The nimble and agile movement of the elves that I have witnessed back when I first encounter the elves. She taught that to the humans.


    Ka seem to be the best at that movement. With this, we have more advantages if we engage the enemies while we¡¯re in the forest.


    ...Though that might not be very useful if the enemy is a powerful mage. They can just destroy all the trees and change the terrains. But it¡¯s still a skill nheless. There should be more uses of them than what it seems. It¡¯s not just a skill to run around in the forest.


    As for the death mage, she¡¯s also a master level in wind magic. And her wind magic is more powerful than the wind mage of the ancient Aura user I fought before. She teaches everyone about wind magic and some other magic that even though she doesn¡¯t have the element, she still have some knowledge about them because she was very studious about magic. Not just about death magic.


    Because she has wind element, I brought back Wendy who was originally traveling with Jewel in Monsters World. And in exchange, I got Shelia to go with Jewel who refused to train under the ghosts thinking that finding a rhino monster and learn beastform magic herself has more benefit for her. That¡¯s why I had her travel with Shelia instead as I also grabbed Sunny who was with her.


    As for Sunny, it was weird that the former Elf Queen also worshiped her. Though with her help, Sunny can also grow even stronger.


    Seeing Sunny and even Tia train, Elsie doesn¡¯t want to be the only one among Lina¡¯s familiars who didn¡¯t do anything. So, she also trained in her archery.


    Thanks to her many tentacles, she can aim at several location at once. Maybe she should learn using other weapons as well.


    Just like that, we spend the day training under the two ghosts beyond master level. While Albert and the others were already moving their troops to intercept the cult who has started to move.


    So far, they don¡¯t seem to need our help. So, we can train under the two ghosts instead of helping them. Though if there¡¯s any emergency, they would contact the king through Sonia and I will need to go there.


    But that is weird. If the troops can handle the cult by themselves, it means that there are no powerful mages among them. And that means the person behind the cult, presumably the Evil God himself, is not in that area. Which makes things even harder.


    Because if they find that all the cult members gathering there was killed or captured, the cult will think that we have some way tomunicate long distance. And the cult will start to make carefully nned strategies.


    Maybe that was a trap. To see what we could do. And the only way that we could react so quickly was because we had a long distancemunication. They should know that once they received the news that those who have gathered were gone.


    Though they should have realized it after the invention of TV.


    If it¡¯s not because of Timmy, we would have noticed itter. Not a long time since the spies were close to the location, but thanks to Timmy, we could handle them sooner. Though I think that¡¯s not bad.


    Whatever the case, the cult will be more careful now than ever. Even more careful than they were in my past life. Especially because they have failed many times.


    Well, I guess we can only wait until we got the report of where the Evil God is. With my strength as an Aura Master, I don¡¯t know if I¡¯m strong enough to kill him or not. But I know that the longer I wait, the stronger I became. And that¡¯s the same with the cult as well. If we wait for too long, they will be too strong even for me.


    But nothing we can do about that since we don¡¯t know where they are hiding. Though maybe Ang can learn what Timmy did to sense everything in the continent with her earth magic soon. Not as wide as he did because she¡¯s not at that stage yet, but it should cover a wide area. I believe that she can do it soon.


    But even with Timmy¡¯s help, the Evil God¡¯s location was still unknown. Even if Ang can detect as much as Timmy did, we still won¡¯t know where the Evil God is. What a pain.


    After a few hours of training, the two ghosts said that they have shared everything they know about magic and other things. They said their farewell before they disappear.


    Well, I guess that¡¯s it for the training. Now, it¡¯s time for treasure hunting. I¡¯m d that they told us where Timmy hid his treasures.

 Chapter 591

    Chapter 591: Looking for Timmy¡¯s Treasures


    Alright. Now that the ghosts have gone, the rest of us are training by ourselves. Though some left to the ce where the cult members gathered before. Probably trying to find more clues, and to teach those who couldn¡¯t learn from the two ghosts about what they learned.


    As for me, I had enough of training. And I want to see the treasures that Timmy left behind.


    I remember what the two ghosts told us. One is in a forest in Arturo, another is in a desert in Consenza, and thest one is in a city in Varadis. Though the exact location is not known, my guess is that they are underground because Timmy is an earth mage. And it¡¯s because the people in that city in Varadis don¡¯t know about it after I asked old man Henry, it should be deeper than what average earth mage could detect. Probably even master level earth mage has difficulty to detect it. Timmy was that powerful after all.


    When I asked if there¡¯s anyone interested ining with me, everyone raised their hand. I guess I shouldn¡¯t have asked them.


    For now, I¡¯ll just pick Ang and Ka toe with me to those ces. The rest can do their training.


    ¡°So, it¡¯s us four again. Just like the old days,¡± Ang said.


    That¡¯s right. Now that I think about it, it has been so long since the three of us were in a party together. With Victoria, it¡¯s the four of us.


    .....


    The four of us were the original members of the n. Victoria, Ang, and Ka were the first one who believed me when I say that I came from the future. And they have been with me ever since then.


    ¡°Alright. Where should we go first?¡± Ka asked our first destination among the three locations of Timmy¡¯s treasures.


    ¡°To Varadis. Old man Henry has delivered a Blobby to one of his men, and that man should be in that city already. We can go there instantly. Let¡¯s ask Sonia if they are ready,¡± I said as I called Sonia.


    I called Sonia, and I told her to check not just the location in Varadis. But also on other ces as well since Lynn and Fabio should have done the same in sending some people to the location.


    ¡°They are all ready. Other than those in the city, the others have prepared camps and look for the treasures themselves before you arrive. Seems like the exact location of the treasure vaults were still not found yet,¡± Sonia said.


    We are looking for treasures after all. The kings should have send some people not only to let me easily get there, but also to look for the treasures themselves. I don¡¯t mind if they find them first. After all, we have the same goal.


    The gold and jewelries? I¡¯m already rich because I still dive into the sea once in a while. Although having more is better, there¡¯s no need for me to collect them. They can be taken by the kingdom, and the king will wisely use them. I hope.


    As for magic items and equipment, even if I can¡¯t get them, the kings should also give them to those they trust. And the one they trust the most is me so I don¡¯t need to worry.


    The one thing I find funny is that Albert wasining about why there¡¯s no hidden treasure vault in his country. He was so jealous of other countries and the wealth they can get from finding the treasures. While the other kings just smugly showing off what they haven¡¯t found yet. It¡¯s just ridiculous.


    One thing I can think of why they do that, was because of my influence to the kings. They got influenced by my extremely good personality that they copied me in taunting Albert. I¡¯m such a good role model.


    After preparing to leave, I opened a portal to the city where the treasures are located in Varadis. And I got greeted by Julia. The princess of the kingdom.


    I guess the time for just me, Victoria, Ang, and Ka alone is over. So soon!


    ¡°Wee to Varadis. So, where is the treasure vault?¡± Julia asked right away while the other people behind her also curiously looking over here. Some of them were diligently looking for some clues and tried to detect anything underground. But there were no clues found at all.


    ¡°Ka, Ang, how is your earth magic? How deep down can you detect?¡± I asked the two girls.


    ¡°I¡¯m not as good as Ang, but it¡¯s still quite deep. Then, Ang will check the north of the city. I will go to the south. As for Roy, use your Divine Vision to go from east to west and check everything before joining up with either of us,¡± Ka said and then she left to the south side of the city. Ang also fly to the north side.


    ¡°Men! Go find the treasures before they do!¡± Julia gave the order to her men who is helping us locating the treasure vault. How did it be suchpetition?


    I also left the ce where we transported to and look for the vault myself. Since we¡¯re closer to the east side of the city, it¡¯s no wonder that Ka ordered me to look from here to the west.


    Back when Timmy made a hidden vault for his treasures, there shouldn¡¯t be a city here. It has been a long time, so I don¡¯t know exactly where the vault is. Maybe it¡¯s outside of the city instead? But for now, we started checking on within the city first.


    I didn¡¯t just use Divine Vision to see under me. I also checked everywhere my Divine Vision can see. Including the sky.


    I run above the rooftop of the buildings in the city as to not be found suspicious while looking all over the ces by other people. Running from the east to the west, I didn¡¯t find anything.


    As I wanted to check other ces, I saw Ang flying to the south. I guess she didn¡¯t find anything as well, so I followed her to the south.


    Maybe I should check from inside the sewer instead of from the rooftop. Well, I¡¯ll do thatter if I can¡¯t find anything.


    When we meet up with Ka, Julia was there as well.


    ¡°So, have any of you find anything?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. There¡¯s nothing underground other than sewer. Maybe it¡¯s deeper than what we can detect. If it¡¯s Timmy, it should be possible,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°But if there¡¯s a hollow ce underground, the city above should be in danger. And this city shouldn¡¯t be built in this ce. Maybe it¡¯s not inside the city,¡± Julia thought.


    Outside the city, huh. That would be hard to find.


    ¡°What about the mountain over there? Isn¡¯t itmon in stories that there are treasures in the mountain?¡± Ang asked as she pointed her finger toward a mountain about two kilometers from the city.


    We are all speechless while looking at Ang who might have found a clue of the vault¡¯s location.


    ¡°What? Why are you all looking at me like that?¡±


    ¡°Nothing. It¡¯s just that we never thought of it at all,¡± I said.


    Hiding treasures in the mountain. Maybe that¡¯s exactly where Timmy store his treasures. I should have checked that ce as well.


    If it¡¯s Timmy, he should be able to build a mountain by himself. Though it has been over three thousand years since the mountain was created, so everyone must be thinking that the mountain is natural.


    ¡°We should have brought Spot over here to make it easier to travel. What about Ray?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°He¡¯s a horse. Though if it¡¯s him, he should be able to carry many people. But the problem is not the weight. It¡¯s the space. Anyway, we should check it first. Ang, you go first! We will go there with portal. Just tell Sonia to inform us if you find anything,¡± I said.


    Even if we have no transportation, as long as one of us could get there, we can go there instantly using portal. What a convenient magic.


    Ang then flew toward the mountain while we just chatted for a while. As for the people that Julia brought, they went to the mountain by themselves. It will be too weird if so many people suddenly disappear from here after all. So, only the three of us left.


    Soon after, Sonia appears and told us that Ang found something. I look around to see that this ce is safe, and then I opened a portal to where Ang is.


    I can see that the Julia¡¯s men areing soon. And other than that, there¡¯s also something in the mountain that my Divine Vision can¡¯t see through. Must be the treasure vault.


    ¡°Right. There¡¯s something over there. It¡¯s right in front of us. Inside that rocky mountain,¡± I said.


    ¡°Is there any entrance?¡± Ka asked me.


    I used Mind¡¯s Eye to get clearer sight and see that there¡¯s no entrance at all. It¡¯s natural considering that Timmy could just went through the ground.


    Good thing we have two powerful earth mages here. Even if we destroy the wall, Ang and Ka can block the mountain from falling down.


    With this, we found the first treasure vault.

 Chapter 592

    Chapter 592: The First Treasure Vault


    With Ka¡¯s earth magic, she opened an entrance to the vault under the mountain. Ang¡¯s magic is more powerful, but Ka has better magic control. So, it¡¯s best if she¡¯s the one doing it. And Ang just need to use earth magic to support the mountain so it won¡¯t fall.


    Delicate magic is not what Ang can do best. She¡¯s more of an offensive mage. She prefer to attack her enemies instead of using magic for delicate situation. Ka is the best for that.


    And so, Ang¡¯s task is for our protection. Though I doubt there¡¯s anyone other than those from the cult who would dare to attack us.


    Look at our line up! We have Julia and Ka, finalists of the tournament, and the winner of the tournament who has been dubbed as the strongest mage because of it, Ang. Only few people dare to fight us.


    The mountain opened, and I can see more things that I couldn¡¯t see before when I used Divine Vision. And finally, I see a lot of gold inside the mountain.


    ¡°I can see golds inside the mountain. Mountain of golds,¡± I said.


    ¡°Is he a dragon who horde treasures and sleep on it? Or maybe he¡¯s a duck who used gold coins as swimming pool,¡± Victoria said.


    .....


    ¡°Gold coins as swimming pool? They are solid object. If anyone jumped into it, they could die. Just what kind of duck exist in your world?¡±


    Again, I¡¯m curious about that thing from Victoria¡¯s world. What kind of duck could dive into gold coins?


    All I know about duck is that they are delicious. I don¡¯t know anything else about them other than they can fly and they can swim.


    ¡°It¡¯s nothing important. Anyway, that¡¯s the treasure vault, right? We finally found one. Are there any magic items there?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. I couldn¡¯t see that far yet. We need to check this whole ce,¡± I said.


    ¡°And I will get all the golds and jewelries. Men! Gather all the valuables except for the magical items!¡± Julia ordered her men.


    ¡°You don¡¯t want me to use portal to bring them allter?¡± I asked Julia.


    ¡°I¡¯ll ask that of youter after we have gathered everything we will bring. Let¡¯s check this ce first,¡± Julia said.


    Now, the entrance has been opened and it¡¯s strong enough to support the mountain. Though after we cleared up everything here, I think we should close the vault forever. Destroying the mountain.


    I¡¯ll check the surrounding areater to see if there¡¯s anyone nearby. And when I know that there is no one here, I¡¯ll get Ka and Ang to destroy the mountain. It¡¯s best to not make any potential hiding spots not just for the cult, but also for the bandits as well.


    After Ka opened the mountain, she used light magic to illuminate the dark vault. And the gold reflected the lighting from Ka¡¯s magic.


    ¡°We¡¯re rich! We¡¯re rich! Grab all the golds!¡± Julia said happily.


    Now that I look closer, everyone she brought carrying several bags. Though seeing the amount of gold inside the vault, I don¡¯t think those bags are enough to fit all of the valuables here.


    ¡°Ka, Ang, Victoria, let¡¯s go look for treasures ourselves,¡± I said.


    Victoria then leaves my side and look for treasures herself. I could see her hoarding some golds. I don¡¯t care. There¡¯s a lot of them and I don¡¯t think Julia will mind us taking a bit of gold.


    Two hourster, the vault has been cleaned and tidier. All the gold has been gathered in one ce, and jewelries in another. Other than that, we found several magic items inside the vault.


    ¡°These are what you found? Are they good?¡± Julia asked since she only care about the gold and jewelries. She didn¡¯t participate in looking for other treasures.


    ¡°Don¡¯t know. And we also need to separate normal jewelries and essories to magical items as well. Maybe there are some nes, bracelets, or rings among the jewelries that have magical attributes. I will leave them to you. If you find anything that suit us, tell us. We¡¯ll just take these items for now,¡± I said.


    The items we found are a halberd, two axes, several daggers, magic cloak, and some other items that are obvious to be magical items. The rest are not that obvious, so I will let Varadis appraise them.


    For me, the halberd, axes, and daggers might be good. I¡¯ll test themter after I checked the other treasure vaults. Though I will bring them all back to Cassau to have Jeremy appraise them first.


    About Jeremy, I heard that he is now dating Sam. Well, I don¡¯t care much abotu them. I only need them to take care of the business and make me richer. It¡¯s just that I think it has been so long since the two of them were mentioned. Many people might have forgotten about those two.


    ...I was wrong. I¡¯m the only one who forgot about them.


    Anyway, I transported all that I think could be useful back to Cassau, while the rest will be taken care of by Varadis Kingdom. But before I could transport the gold to Varadis¡¯ warehouse where they would be appraised, something happened.


    A group of people entered the vault and tried to rob us. They are most likely bandits who have been using this mountain as their base.


    ¡°Oy, oy, oy! There¡¯s this many treasure in this mountain? Give everything to us and we may let you leave this ce with your lives. Except for those beautiful women who will stay with me for the rest of their lives! Ahahaha!¡±


    A rough looking man who just entered suddenly said that andughed. And his followers behind him alsoughed.


    ...Are they serious? They might have a hundred mening. But they don¡¯t even know us?


    Here, we have the champion of the tournament and two other participants as well. And the people Julia brought are the soldiers of this kingdom. Those bandits don¡¯t know who they are dealing with.


    ...This look fun! Let¡¯s see how the others will react.


    ¡°Oy, oy, oy! Speechless already? Let me tell you this, I¡¯m an expert level fire mage! I can burn everything here in an instant!¡± the bandit leader said.


    Oy, oy, oy! Don¡¯t say anything about being expert level fire mage with Julia here. She¡¯s the best fire mage I know. Only Ang¡¯s fire burn stronger than her.


    ¡°Oy, oy, oy! If you don¡¯t do anything, I will use force!¡±


    Stop with the ¡°Oy, oy, oy¡± already!


    ¡°Well, who wants to take care of them?¡± I asked.


    ¡°This is Varadis¡¯ territory. I¡¯ll do it,¡± Julia said.


    And so, Julia stepped forward.


    ¡°Oy, oy, oy! A beautiful girl like you want me to spar your life? If you became mine, I will let the rest of you leave. Maybe.


    ¡°Julia, can you kill him so he won¡¯t say another oy?¡± I asked Julia.


    ¡°Easy.¡±


    Without any warning, Julia unleashed powerful fire magic toward the bandits. Killing the leader¡¯s followers while sparing the bandit leader. As for us, Julia made sure that we won¡¯t get hurt by her magic.


    ¡°...¡±


    The bandit leader just stared at Julia with a nk face. He didn¡¯t expect that there¡¯s an expert level fire mage as well here.


    ¡°This is the real power of an expert level fire mage. Show me yours,¡± Julia challenged the bandit leader.


    ¡°...I¡¯m sorry. I¡¯m just an advanced level fire mage. I lied. I¡¯m sorry. Please spare my life,¡± the bandit leader begged for his life.


    ¡°There might be more bandits nearby. Everyone check the surrounding. It¡¯s too close to the city and they might cause trouble even if they¡¯re weak,¡± Julia ordered the soldiers.


    Everyone then left the vault. One of the soldiers also grabbed the bandit leader. He will probably be questioned. Well, I don¡¯t care.


    ¡°Too weak. I thought there will be something interesting happening, but they are too weak. Anyway, I just need to transport everything here, right?¡± I asked Julia.


    ¡°Yes. Will you go to another vault right away?¡± Julia asked.


    I looked at the others and made a decision.


    ¡°We¡¯ll stay in that city for a night and we¡¯ll go to the next country tomorrow morning. It¡¯s been a while since we¡¯re taking it easy. And I have never been to that city before. And there are some cake shop that Victoria is interested in when we passed them before. What about you?¡± I asked Julia back.


    ¡°I¡¯ll return on my own after I take care of some unfinished business here. Good job, everyone. Thank you for making my country richer,¡± Julia said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. After giving me so much trouble, it¡¯s normal for Timmy to give everything he had to me. Now, let¡¯s destroy this ce,¡± I said.


    We left the empty vault, and Ka and Ang destroyed the vault. Making the tall mountain shorter. There will be somemotionter in the city, but I don¡¯t care. For now, it¡¯s time to go get some meal.

 Chapter 593

    Chapter 593: The Second Vault was Already Found When I Arrive


    After ying around for a night in Varadis, it¡¯s time to go and check the other treasure vaults. But before that, I need to know what happened in with the cult members that the troops fought.


    I contacted Sonia, and she told me that most of the cult members died. Either they killed themselves, or die in the battle. So, we don¡¯t have much information to get from them.


    After that, Albert had the three spy werewolves to check the surrounding ce. Anything suspicious will be investigated.


    The werewolves were needed to check if there are anyone escaping from that ce. Those people might have been tasked to report back about the situation. So, we need to capture them fast. Though if the cult noticed that the members gathered there failed to report, they should have known that they failed.


    But still, if we managed to capture more of them, one of them at least willing to cooperate. Either willingly or being forced to do so. Though it will most likely be forced.


    So far, the spy werewolves have found five suspicious people. And two of them have been arrested. As for the other three, they were being watched.


    Those werewolves were amazing. Although theycked fighting powerpared to average werewolves, they are very useful. And the price for making them to work is cheap as well. Just some chicken nuggets and they will be happy.


    .....


    Now that I have heard of the report, I don¡¯t think Albert or the others need me to do something anytime soon. So, I can still continue to look for treasures.


    ¡°Roy, where should we go next?¡± Consenza or Arturo?¡± Ka asked me of our next destination.


    Now that the vault in a city in Varadis has been found, we only have two ces to go left. A desert in Consenza, and a forest in Arturo. And those two ces are not ces I can take a rxing vacation at.


    Yes, I picked Varadis as the first destination so I can have a little vacation after training for so long. As for the desert and the forest, it¡¯s difficult to be rxed there.


    ¡°Either way is fine. But I¡¯ll pick the desert because I have been there before with Celestine,¡± I said.


    ¡°You mean back when you traveled with her to the other kingdoms?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°Yes, that time. Spot wasn¡¯t with us yet, and there were no Blobbies in any of the three kingdoms at that time. So, we move on foot. But in that desert, Celestine used magic so we can travel easily. There were no people in that desert, so she could use any magic she wants,¡± I said as I remembered of what happened.


    Though rather than the travel, I remembered something better.


    ¡°...Must be sad. You traveled all the way there with Celestine on your back, and you reached the desert where she can travel by herself,¡± Ka said as if she could read my mind.


    ¡°Well, I won¡¯t deny I felt a bit sad. But we still get there anyway,¡± I said.


    While we were talking, Ang is thinking about something. And then, she realizes what we are talking about.


    ¡°Oh! You mean those huge melons were stuck on your back the whole time? I felt them a few times, but those were amazing!¡± Ang said.


    Felt them? Like how?! Please tell me in detail!


    Is what I want to say if Ka is not here. Let¡¯s not make my girlfriend any more jealous than this. Though I don¡¯t think she¡¯s one to feel jealous at something like that. I mean she allowed me to have a harem, and even persuaded some girls to be my lovers as well. I don¡¯t know how many women she has asked.


    ¡°Now that we have our destination, let¡¯s go!¡±


    We left the inn we stayed at, and exit the gate. We also said our farewell to Julia who will stay there for a bit longer. Seems like old man Henry heard about some nobles making trouble here so he sent Julia to take care of them. And it was by chance that this ce is where Timmy stored his treasures.


    She¡¯s strong enough to handle everything by herself, so I won¡¯t lend her a hand here.


    After leaving the gate, and walking far enough for anyone to see us, I opened a portal and transported directly to Celestine¡¯s location who was already there. And I can see that she and the people from Consenza have found the location of Timmy¡¯s treasure vault without my help.


    ¡°Everyone is here. I have found the vault and we are separating the gold and the magic items. Feel free to check on them,¡± Celestine said.


    ¡°That was quick. Well, this is a desert with nothing but sand here. And your improvement in earth magic helped you to find the vault under the sand,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. And this ce is nowhere near the ce we traveled through. If it was, even back then, I should notice something strange here. There¡¯s a giant metal vault under the desert. Any expert level earth mage should be able to notice it quickly,¡± Celestine said.


    ¡°You¡¯re right. I can also feel the metal. Although you must have dug it quite deep,¡± Ang said.


    The vault is under the ground. About thirty metes from the surface. Celestine and other earth mages have dug deep enough and created an entrance for us to enter.


    Some people have entered it and as Celestine said, they are separating the gold and the magic items. Seems like we won¡¯t have to wait long before we move to Arturo.


    ¡°Well, I guess we should be able to return home by tonight. Let¡¯s check the items here,¡± I said.


    We entered the vault and see many weapons stored. The weapons look fancy. As if they are not used for battle, but for decoration instead. I¡¯ll just get Jeremy to appraise them. If they are just for decoration, I¡¯ll just use them to decorate my house.


    Though there are some weird items as well. Like brassieres and stockings. Well, I have found a magical fis stocking before. I guess there should be some other weird items.


    ¡°Oh! This dress look simr to the dress Ang wore in my past life. Though the color is darker than I remembered. I think the original was red or pink. Well, they might have simr effects,¡± I said as I grabbed a dress from the vault.


    It¡¯s been over three thousand years, but the dress still look good. And unlike what Ang wears in my past life, this dress is less revealing. What a shame.


    ¡°I can sense powerful magic imbued in that dress. It must be something amazing. I think we found something good,¡± Ka said.


    Well, as long as they make us stronger, I shouldn¡¯t be picky. Still... goodbye, sexy dress. I might not see you in this life.


    Though I have other beautiful girls with me. Maybe one of them will find the sexy dress and wear it. It¡¯s better if everyone got one. Except for the male members.


    This ce is not like the vault in Varadis. Although it was dark, there are torches all around the vault with the me still on. Who knows how long they have been stayed on? Let¡¯s grab them as well.


    ¡°You¡¯re grabbing the torches?¡± Celestine asked.


    ¡°Yes. I didn¡¯t feel any heat from the fire. Just the light. Also, once we cleared everything here, we should bury this ce so it won¡¯t be used by bandits or the cult as their hiding spots,¡± I said.


    Just like the one in Varadis, I will also have this ce destroyed. Though since this ce is underground, we just need to bury it again.


    ¡°Lynn must be happy since we can get so much gold. We don¡¯t need to worry about the empire¡¯s financial after repairing the capital,¡± Celestine said.


    The only one king unhappy about it is Albert. Well, I don¡¯t care about him. He can get some more money somehow anyway.


    We got five torches that never die. Maybe we could ce them somewhere. And we don¡¯t have to worry about the fire spreading as well. This is an amazing magic item. Though I don¡¯t need them because my Divine Vision already has night vision, I can give them to someone else. And the one who is happy about it is Victoria who can now have infinite source of light for when she wants to write her novels.


    ...I shouldn¡¯t have grabbed these torches. I don¡¯t know how many characters she wrote based on me. And I¡¯m afraid to know.


    ¡°Alright, it¡¯s done. Celestine, I¡¯ll bring you all back to the capital. And we will go to Arturo right away. I never thought we will finish things this fast,¡± I said.


    It didn¡¯t take more than one hour to clear the vault and buried it back. I hope it¡¯s the same in Arturo so we can go home right away and wait for the result of appraising all the items.


    I opened a portal to Bernard¡¯s location since his house is the closest one to the forest. And seems like he¡¯s not the only one there. Luna and her mother, Carmen, were there as well.


    All the royalties I know can¡¯t wait until they get the benefit from the treasure vault. Or maybe they didn¡¯t trust me enough to not touch the gold. Well, whatever. This is thest vault. I hope we got something amazing from here.

 Chapter 594

    Chapter 594: Luna Finds the Last Vault


    ¡°This is thest vault?¡± Carmen asked me as soon as I entered the portal.


    ¡°Yes. We have found the other two treasure vaults. And we got many things from those ces. I hope I can get something good here as well,¡± I said.


    In the previous two ces, we found many things that could be useful for us. It¡¯s great that Timmy hoard so many treasures that he kept for himself. Though we will be the one to use them.


    It¡¯s truly great that Timmy is very unlikable. The two ghosts who were forced to be his lovers back when the were alive, regained their sanity and became ghosts so they can tell us where Timmy¡¯s treasures all. Although they didn¡¯t expect that they could stay in this world for much longer than telling us those information. It¡¯s fortunate that we can learn many things from them.


    And right now, we are at thest ce where the ghosts pointed at. The forest in Arturo, which is close to Bernard¡¯s mansion. Bernard himself is here along with Carmen and Luna.


    When I asked if these three are the only one here since Harold has so many children and wives, they replied by saying that it¡¯s already more than needed. Just Bernard here alone is enough, but Carmen and Luna wanted toe here.


    It was Toni who gave the order to just send Bernard. And since Carmen and Luna will be the kingdom¡¯s secret weapon with Carmen as the strongest mage from there and Luna with her Future Sight, they were told to be low-key. And I brought them to train with the ghosts before.


    .....


    Though what about Fabio? He is an expert level mage and has Future Sight as well.


    Well, he¡¯s a king so it¡¯s impossible for him to be low-key. And he¡¯s too busy toe anyway.


    As for Carmen and Luna, I brought them to Bernard¡¯s mansion after Carmen¡¯s training with the ghosts and Luna yed with the children.


    Though Carmen was supposed to instruct Fabio about what she learned. Well, it¡¯s their kingdom so they are free to do what they want.


    ¡°Have you found the treasures?¡± Ka asked Carmen.


    ¡°No. We have send all of the earth mages to dig all over the ces, but we didn¡¯t find any. Even Luna tried to help by checking if the ces they were digging to see if there¡¯s anything at all in the future. But we didn¡¯t find anything,¡± Carmen said.


    I guess with Luna here, with her Future Sight, she can tell if the ces the others are digging will end up reaching something or not. And if the result is that there were no treasures found at all, she will tell Carmen and Carmen will tell the others to stop digging and start digging somewhere else.


    Well, I guess it¡¯s our time to shine. There¡¯s no way these earth mages will be better than the two out of three most powerful earth mages we have, and someone who can see through things.


    By the way, it¡¯s obvious that when I said about the top three strongest earth mages, I meant to say Celestine, Ang, and Ka. And probably in that order. I don¡¯t know. I never ask them which one has the strongest earth magic. Though I said that Celestine is the strongest because she has been an expert level earth mage longer than the others.


    And so, the three of us split up. As for Carmen, Luna, and the others, they will look around the area. So we will go to another location.


    Maybe because of experience, Ang and Ka went to the nearby mountain. Well, I¡¯ll just check another location. Anywhere my Divine Vision can¡¯t see when it should reach should be the location.


    ¡°Where should we go, Roy?¡± Victoria asked me.


    ¡°Three thousand years are more than enough for an entire forest to grow. Maybe the vault is under the trees. Let the people from Arturo look there. I¡¯ll just walk around and hoping that I could see it,¡± I said.


    I wished Carmen, Luna, and the others good luck as I left them. Though I think Luna can see my reaction in the future if I see the treasures. Everyone will stop digging once Luna see the future of someone finding the vault.


    Hmm... I haven¡¯t tried it yet, but maybe if I ride on Ray¡¯s back, my Divine Vision can reach even further. Well, it¡¯s a good time to test it.


    Just as I left quite far from Luna¡¯s location, Luna and Carmen whom I just left behind followed me.


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong? Did you guys find anything?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. Luna see a horseing so she¡¯s running here. That must be Ray,¡± Carmen said.


    Back when the two ghosts are training the others, the children were also ying nearby. And at that time, I need Ray toe out so the ghosts can stay longer. And Ray would y around with the children. Or maybe being yed around by the children.


    The one who love Ray the most was Luna. I don¡¯t know why, but Luna seems to be interested in Ray the most than other children. And she would ride on Ray¡¯s back any time she could.


    No wonder she would run over here happily.


    I summoned Ray and ride on top of him right away.


    ¡°I will get Ray to help me improve my Divine Vision. With Ray¡¯s speed, we should be able to cover more area faster. Luna, want toe with us?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes!¡± Luna replied happily.


    Carmen then lifted her up so I can pick her and put her in front of me. She looks really happy riding on Ray¡¯s back.


    If she manifested beastform element magic in the future, the beast she will try to transform into might be a horse. Well, that¡¯s just my guess. But I think I could be right.


    Carmen returned to where her people are digging, while Luna and I rode on Ray¡¯s back with sitting on top of Blobbysaddle. Luna spread her arms wide enjoying Ray¡¯s speed while I made sure to block the wind from hitting her too much.


    As expected, riding on Spot¡¯s back helped me see further. I could even see Ang and Ka checking the mountain.


    But so far, we didn¡¯t see anything.


    Until finally, it was Luna who found it.


    ¡°Over there! The treasures are over there!¡±


    Luna shouted as she pointed her finger to the opposite direction of the mountain.


    ¡°How far is it?¡± I asked Luna.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. It¡¯s one hourter when you started circling the forest that you will find it over there,¡± Luna said.


    One hour? I thought she can only see a few minutes ahead!


    Must be thanks to Ray. With this, we don¡¯t need to spend an hour traveling.


    ¡°But that ce has a lot of scary-looking uncles. And Roy killed them all,¡± Luna said.


    ...That is not something good for children to see. But it¡¯s not something that I can prevent her from seeing with her ability. Though I can prevent her from seeing it in reality.


    ¡°Alright. We¡¯ll continue riding Ray for a while and let the others take care of them,¡± I said as I called Sonia.


    As for those people must be bandits. Bandits who created their base over there.


    I am someone who will try my best to not use violence in front of children. But the fact that Luna could see it must mean that the situation forced me to kill them.


    I told Sonia to tell the others to go to the ce Luna pointed at right away as I will y with Luna for a little longer.


    And a few minutester, we arrive there and everyone has captured all the bandits. There were some people who didn¡¯t seem to be bandits here. The bandits must have used them as hostages or something and forced me to kill them in front of Luna. Good thing I asked the others to go first.


    Bernard then ordered the others to bring them back to the city to be imprisoned.


    ¡°Roy, I found a dungeon underground. The dungeon must have been cleared regrly by the bandits because they used it as their base. And in the deepest part of the dungeon, I sensed something metallic through the wall. Must be where the vault is,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°Yes! Ang would open the entrance and everything above the dungeon will fall down!¡± Luna said happily.


    ...That¡¯s not something that a kid should say while smiling.


    ¡°Get everyone far from here. Ang will open the vault and the others earth mage will clear the rubbles. It will be difficult for us if the treasures got buried because of it,¡± I said.


    Ka then took the lead to bring all the earth mages to help. As for me and the others, we just wait until the vault is opened.


    I jumped down from Ray and told him to take care of Luna. Even if the ground sink this far from the dungeon, Ray can just fly.


    Soon after, everything nearby got sucked into the ground. But the earth mage managed to prevent them from falling into the vault.


    ...This is the biggest vault we have found. As the light from the sun reached the vault, we can see the inside clearly.


    ¡°Treasures!¡± Luna shouted as she finally see the treasures with her own eyes.


    Well, I guess our search for treasure is over. Let¡¯s grab everything.

 Chapter 595

    Chapter 595: Someone Strong is Coming


    ¡°This...¡±


    The vault is opened and I can now see well with my Divine Vision. This is such a great finding!


    The gold didn¡¯t amount as much as the other two ces, but there are many magical items here enough to give to a whole army. Even if we took what we need, we can still give the rest to the four kingdoms. This should be enough to make Albert happy.


    But if it¡¯s this much, I don¡¯t think Jeremy can handle everything. I guess I¡¯ll take some of the magical weapons for him to appraise. The rest can be handled by the four kingdoms.


    ¡°Carmen, Bernard, Arturo can take all the gold. And separate other items from the gold. Get your appraiser to appraise them and then share all the effects that they have with me and the other kingdoms. I think it¡¯s best for you guys to get some items as well. Though I need you to prioritize my n¡¯s equipment first. After we grab everything we needed, the rest can be shared by the kingdoms,¡± I said.


    ¡°Is it that many? How big is this vault? I didn¡¯t see any items yet. Just the gold,¡± Bernard said.


    ¡°There are some more hidden rooms here. Each filled with various items. I guess the gold is just here to distract those who found it first by chance. Unless they are expert level earth mages. Only expert level earth mages can see more hidden rooms,¡± I said.


    .....


    After we destroyed the dungeon, the vault opened. But it didn¡¯t show everything. There are still more hidden rooms either under the vault, or behind the wall.


    Fortunately, my Divine Vision can see them. Which mean the effect that cover my sight only work until this ce was opened. Now that it has been opened,I can see everything clearly.


    Though there might still some ces where my Divine Vision can¡¯t see. I guess I should check the ces more.


    ¡°Luna, if you can see more stuffs, tell me right away, okay?¡± I asked Luna to tell me whatever she sees with her Future Sight.


    ¡°Okay!¡±


    For now, I¡¯m waiting until all the gold has been gathered. I will transport them all first to Arturo. As for the rest, we will look more after the gold has all been transported.


    Ka and Ang are still checking for more. They also seem to notice that there are more hidden rooms.


    ¡°Ah!¡±


    All of a sudden, Luna gasped. She must have seen something.


    ¡°What is it, Luna?¡± I asked. Carmen was also curious. As for the troops from Arturo, none of them seem to know that Luna can see the future. They just thought that Carmen brought Luna to y.


    ¡°Someone ising,¡± Luna said.


    Seeing how calm she is, I think the one who ising won¡¯t give us much trouble. But let¡¯s just ask her anyway.


    ¡°Who ising?¡± I asked.


    ¡°A loser,¡± Luna replied.


    A loser? That¡¯s a terrible way of saying it. Carmen needs to scold Luna to not say such word without thinking.


    Well, that must be because of my influence. As expected, I¡¯m such a bad influence to everyone. I¡¯ll just admit it myself. Not because Carmen is ring daggers at me. Yeah.


    ¡°So, we will fight someone and that person will lose? Is that what you see?¡± I asked Luna.


    ¡°Someone ising, and pick a fight. And he will lose after a while,¡± Luna said.


    After a while? Not instantly? That person must be quite strong then.


    ¡°How many of them?¡± I asked again.


    ¡°Just one man. Ang defeated himter,¡± Luna said.


    Ang did? And it¡¯s after a while? Then he should at least be an expert level mage. Stronger than average at least.


    Someone quite powerful is picking a fight against us. And he lost. I don¡¯t think he¡¯s a strong mage, but he could be a good practice partner.


    But Luna didn¡¯t tell us in detail. That means it¡¯s not worth thinking hard about it for her. Though I¡¯ll just inform Ka and Ang about it.


    ¡°Ka, Ang, and Carmen as well,e here for a bit!¡± I asked the expert level mages toe.


    Ka and Ang stopped their search and gathered around me.


    ¡°Luna said that someone ising. He should at least be an expert level mage. Stronger than average expert level mage at least. Anyone of you want to face him?¡± I asked the three expert level mages.


    ¡°I¡¯ll fight him. If it¡¯s Ang, she could defeat him quickly. And I¡¯m the weakest expert level mage here even though I reached that level faster then these two. I need more fighting experience.¡±


    The one who stepped forward was Carmen. If it¡¯s this way, I shouldn¡¯t have told Ang and Ka toe over.


    ¡°Well, we can continue the searchter. I¡¯m interested in the fight as well,¡± Ka said. And Ang nodded hearing Ka¡¯s reply.


    I guess these two are bored. Well, that¡¯s fine. I can take care of looking for the hidden rooms.


    Oh, seems like he¡¯sing. Luna didn¡¯t say when he woulde, so I guess it¡¯s right now.


    Since he¡¯s flying quite fast, his wind element should have reached expert level. But what surprised me was that he noticed that I¡¯m looking at him from quite far.


    That can only mean one thing. He is a master level mage. And Luna sees Ang defeated him quickly?


    He must be hiding his skill for some reason.


    ¡°Carmen, be careful. He¡¯s strong,¡± I told Carmen to not let down her guard.


    ¡°Why? He¡¯s a master level mage or something?¡± Ang said jokingly. But that was quite the correct answer.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. He¡¯s a master level mage. Carmen, if you¡¯re not confident, you can step back. That guy is pretending that he didn¡¯t notice someone is watching him. He should be holding back during the fight. That¡¯s why Ang could defeat him easily in Luna¡¯s vision,¡± I said.


    ¡°A master level mage!? Is he a member of the cult?¡± Carmen asked.


    Carmen was quite loud and everyone then looked this way. They must be curious about what we¡¯re currently discussing.


    This is what Luna couldn¡¯t tell. And this could be the worst opponent we have so far.


    A tricky master level mage. I can also see how he slowed down on purpose to let me think that he¡¯s just an advanced level wind mage.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s dy the treasures looting forter. Let¡¯s face him outside since it¡¯s safer. Although he can fly, it should be fine if he¡¯s holding back,¡± I said.


    Everyone stopped their work as we went outside the vault. I had Luna, Bernard, and the others transported somewhere safe before we face the opponent.


    Ang, Ka, Carmen, and I are waiting for the guy toe. Ray is also with me here. Defeating this opponent should be easier with Ray here.


    ¡°...I¡¯ll face him by myself. If he hides his power, I should be able to defeat him,¡± Carmen said.


    ¡°Okay. I can take care of the restter. Until he arrives, Ka and I will be the only ones talking. The two of you should stay quiet,¡± I said.


    The opponent is a wind mage. I don¡¯t know if it¡¯s his wind element that has reached master level or not, but we should be careful. After all, master level wind mages are capable of hearing sounds from far away. They used wind magic to make sound travels to their ears. So, as long as there¡¯s a sound, they could hear it if it¡¯s not blocked.


    Ka and I then talked about the treasures we found and act like the iing guy unable to hear us. I can see him smiling when we mentioned treasures. He might be the leader of the bandits who used the dungeon as their base.


    Soon enough, he arrives. A man who seems to be in his twenties. To be able to reach master level at his age must be something.


    Though he might be older than it seems. He¡¯s a master level mage after all.


    ¡°Hey, you! Where are my people who stayed in this ce!?¡± the man asked as soon as hended in front of us.


    As expected, he¡¯s the leader of the bandits group. And he seems to know us a bit.


    No, it¡¯s not us. Just Ka and Ang. He must have seen them participating in the tournament. I can feel fighting spiriting out of him. I guess he is interested in being the strongest mage.


    ¡°They are arrested obviously. They are bandits. Who are you?¡± I asked the man.


    ¡°I don¡¯t need to tell you who I am. I will defeat you all and see what you¡¯re hiding behind you,¡± the man said confidently.


    ¡°You think you can defeat us by yourself?¡± I provoked the man.


    ¡°Just because she won that stupid tournament, doesn¡¯t mean that she¡¯s the strongest in the world. The world is bigger than that. I¡¯ll show you why right here, right now.¡±


    Wow. As expected, my provocation didn¡¯t work. He¡¯s such a tricky opponents. He must be holding back so he can throw an unexpected attack to uster when we think we¡¯re winning.


    ¡°You won¡¯t get the chance to fight her. Carmen, you can fight him now,¡± I said.


    She should be at a disadvantage here. The man can fly. As for Carmen, she¡¯s a water element mage. And there¡¯s noke or river nearby. Can she win even when her opponent is holding back? I¡¯ll just see what will happen.

 Chapter 596

    Chapter 596: The Master Level Mage is Inexperienced in Fighting


    The bandit leader keeps talking while trying to provoke us. But the women around me has gotten used to provocation. Not toward them. Just my provocation against my opponents. So thesedies know what the bandit leader is trying to do.


    Well, except for Ang. Though Victoria is close to her ears whispering to Ang to calm down. I hope the bandit leader won¡¯t notice Victoria¡¯s whisper.


    Well, even if he does, it doesn¡¯t matter. We have the confidence to win.


    Even if he¡¯s a master level wind mage who can fly very fast, I doubt he¡¯s faster than me when I ride on Ray¡¯s back.


    The man pretend to be angry and started attacking us using Wind sh. But Carmen stopped it by creating water from the atmosphere to block his attack.


    Since his attack couldn¡¯t pierce through her defense, I guess he¡¯s holding back his power enough to make people think that he¡¯s just an expert level mage. But he¡¯s still a master level mage. He noticed my gaze when he¡¯s flying this way and pretend to not notice it when he¡¯s quite far away. That¡¯s something that only master level mage can do. Expert level mage won¡¯t notice that I¡¯m looking at them from far away unless they are at the same level as Ang.


    We have fought a lot of artificial master level mages. But the time when we were sparring against master level ancient Aura users gave us much more benefit and knowledge of what master level mages can do.


    .....


    And I even fought against someone who has reached a stage beyond master level. I ended up winning. No, it¡¯s not me alone. It¡¯s us. I must never think that I can do everything alone.


    Carmen started fighting the bandit leader. The rest of us were just watching.


    Well, I quickly got bored knowing that he¡¯s holding back. I guess I¡¯ll just look for the treasures inside the hidden rooms. There are a lot of them.


    ¡°Ang, Ka, I¡¯ll go look for more treasures. What will you do?¡± I asked the two.


    ¡°Unlike you, I have never truly experienced fighting someone strong. Most of it was just sparring and a fight where I don¡¯t need to risk my life. I¡¯ll just watch and see if I can learn something,¡± Ka said.


    She didn¡¯t say that she never fought against master level mage because she¡¯s wary that the bandit leader can hear us talking.


    As she said, she has never experienced a fight where she risk her life. It¡¯s because we are proteting each other. And she¡¯s important as our strategist as well so it was better if she stays in the back line.


    But that doesn¡¯t mean that she doesn¡¯t need to grow stronger. That¡¯s why she wanted to watch the fight and learn from it.


    As for Ang, she didn¡¯t answer. But I can tell that she doesn¡¯t want to move from that spot. Victoria must have told her to not say anything in case the bandit leader could hear her. It¡¯s good that she was with Ang.


    I guess I¡¯ll just check the treasures myself.


    As I was walking back to the treasure vault, a Wind sh is approaching me. Carmen waste to realizes it and unable to stop it. But that¡¯s not a problem for the current me.


    I don¡¯t need any weapon to stop the Wind sh. I just swung my hand as if I was shing something. With a little bit of Super Aura infused, not only I disperse the Wind sh. But the swing of my spearhand is flying toward the bandit leader.


    My attack didn¡¯t sh him because that¡¯s not what I intended. But it hits him right in the chest. He must be feeling that something big was hitting him.


    ¡°Hey! You¡¯re right that she¡¯s not the strongest mage. But even if you used your full power as a master level mage, it doesn¡¯t mean that you can win against Carmen! And Ang might not need to fight at all! I¡¯ll tell you the same thing. The world is much bigger than what you know! I didn¡¯t care how you provoke us before. I mean we¡¯re using you as our sparring partner. It¡¯s rare for us to fight against master level mage. Anyway, that¡¯s how it is. Don¡¯t bother me with anything else anymore,¡± I said as I entered the treasure vault with Ray.


    The bandit leader was confused. And he was even more confused when Ka used healing magic on him.


    ¡°Just as he said. You are only here to be our sparring partner. If he wants to, he could just kill you right away. I¡¯ll heal you and then you will continue fighting with Carmen. If you win, you are free to leave. But if she¡¯s in danger, we will interrupt. Since you¡¯re a master level mage, we don¡¯t have to hold back when we¡¯re interrupt your fight. I hope you won¡¯t die if that happens. Anyway, if you win, I¡¯ll tell him to spar your life. There, I have healed you. Now, go back to fighting!¡± Ka said to the man.


    What a pitiful man. He flies here thinking that he can get the treasures, but it ended with him as the girls¡¯ sparring partner.


    Well, now that he has stopped holding back, Carmen¡¯s battle became harder. But Carmen didn¡¯tin as she continued trying her best to defeat the bandit leader.


    And the man can¡¯t keep his cool knowing that he¡¯s fallen into our trap. He should have left when he noticed that someone was watching him.


    Well, let¡¯s ignore him and look for treasures.


    I entered the vault, and face the wall in front of me. Behind this wall, there¡¯s a hidden room with various weapons inside.


    There are other hidden rooms as well. One full of magical items, another with magical clothes, another with magical esories, and another with magic potions. But I don¡¯t think those potions will still work after three thousand years. They must have been expired already.


    Why would Timmy keep them? I¡¯ll just get someone to appraise them and see if they can still be consumed. If not, it¡¯s best to throw them away.


    I destroyed the wall with a punch and entered it. There are various weapons here. Other than some staffs and wands, I guess I¡¯m the only one who can use them. Maybe Victoria can use them when she¡¯s riding Ray. She can slightly use Aura when she¡¯s riding Ray after all. Or I¡¯ll just give them to the monsters. They should be able to use these weapons.


    The fight... seems like it will still go on for quite a while. I¡¯ll just gather all the weapons here and went to the next room.


    I¡¯m actualy itching to test those weapons right away. But I don¡¯t know what effect they will have. If the one I tested turns out to have the ability to create explosion, I¡¯ll end up destroying the rest of the weapons. And if there are other explosives in the other rooms, they might get triggered and destroy everything here. I don¡¯t want that to happen, so I¡¯ll test themter.


    I destroyed a wall from this room to get directly to the next room. I¡¯m wondering why Timmy would sort the treasures here, while on the other vaults, he just store them however he wants.


    Well, I will never be able to understand what¡¯s inside a weirdo¡¯s head. Let¡¯s just grab everything.


    How¡¯s the outside? Oh, after a while, seems like Carmen finaly got the advantages. I guess that man never had any fighting experience against someone strong. He¡¯s just a bandit after all.


    My guess is that he hoard all the magic stones for his own cultivation, and cultivate most of his time. While the other bandits were just given gold so they are not that strong.


    Well, the winner is obvious. But we learned something as well. Master level mages don¡¯t have anyone topare their abilities with. So, they should be weaker than expected.


    Hopefully, the master level mages from the cult we will face will be inexperienced as this guy is.


    The battle is over with Carmen¡¯s victory. Though she is tired, she seems happy. As for the man, he¡¯s unconscious. Should we kill him?


    I opened a portal to Victoria¡¯s location and ask them what to do with him after I entered it.


    ¡°Should we kill him? He¡¯s still a master level mage, so if he could join us, we our power will be stronger,¡± Ka suggested to spare the man¡¯s life and use him as a ve. Well, she didn¡¯t say to turn him into a ve. But that¡¯s how it will end up anyway.


    ¡°Let¡¯s get Albert to interrogate himter. Victoria, tie him up. I¡¯ll get the others back here and have someone watch over this guy,¡± I said.


    I opened a portal and get Bernard, Luna, and the others to return. Bernard asked someone to watch the bandit leader, and then we returns to gathering the treasures.


    Not only we get the treasures Timmy left behind, we also received a master level mage we can use. What a bargain!


    Though I ended up being scolded by Luna for letting her mother be injured. Especially when she sees the future where defeating that man was easy. Truly, sorry about that.

 Chapter 597

    Chapter 597: Testing the Weapons We Looted


    BOOM!!!


    An explosion was heard in a middle of a in in the Monsters World. Far from the Monsters Vige.


    This is the location we used to test on the weapons that we have looted from Timmy¡¯s treasury. And there are around five hundreds of weapons that only I can use. Or maybe some werewolves and vampires if they want to.


    There are about two hundred of spears that we found. Especially in thest vault in Arturo. I guess I should share them with the angels so they can be used. I¡¯ll ask them if they have other preferences as well. Maybe some of them would love to swing axe instead of spear.


    But for now, it¡¯s time to test them all first.


    Jeremy and other appraisers have sent us notes about the weapons and their effects. And not just weapons. They also have finished appraising the rest of the items that we looted.


    It has been two weeks since we looted thest vault. I guess they finished appraising everything so fast since there are five hundred of them.


    .....


    And the thing I tried at the moment is a mace. A huge mace that will explode whenever I infuse dome mana into it and the mace hit something. The explosion was quite huge. This could be useful against the cult. Especially since I¡¯mcking in magic.


    This way, in case I need to fight so many enemies, I can save my Aura forter and fight only by using magic weapons.


    ...Though most of the weapons are not that good.


    I mean they are good, but they are just not good enough. Using Victoria or even Blobbies are better.


    Some of the weapons have the ability to get bigger, to get longer, or to get heavier. That¡¯s just like Victoria, so I don¡¯t need them.


    And some has self-repairing ability. Just like Reizpear.


    Then, there¡¯s a sword which can cut through magic. I can do that with any weapons using Aura, but having one is better than nothing.


    Still, other than this exploding mace, there¡¯s no other amazing weapons so far. Though when I said so far, it was just fifty out of the five hundreds weapon we have.


    As for other items, such as clothes, essories, and other stuffs, I got the others to help me with them. They will confirm those items¡¯ effects while I just need to test on the weapons.


    And there are still four hundred and fifty more of the weapons. Though I don¡¯t think I will get bored easily today.


    After all, some of the weapons have unique effects. Such as a huge hammer, which when I infuse mana into it, will make it very light and won¡¯t give much damage. But the sound it created was very loud. This could be used as tricks. Because when I didn¡¯t infuse mana into it, it¡¯s just a normal strong and powerful hammer. I can trick the opponent into thinking that this hammer is not that strong.


    Surprisingly, there were some weapons that needed Aura to infuse into them. Though they are mostly self-repair abilities or lengthening effect so I don¡¯t need them.


    I guess it¡¯s natural for Aura users to want weapons that can repair itself. These weapons must be popr at that time. Though I¡¯m a summoner with an awesome ck Slime that can transform into anything so I don¡¯t need these weapons.


    And those weapons also don¡¯t have any effect when I infused mana into them. Which makes them normal weapons unless they are in the hand of an Aura user. I guess we don¡¯t need them. And we can¡¯t give them to the angels as well.


    Well, I¡¯ll just store them for now. Who knows that we might end up needing to use themter in the future?


    ¡°Roy, look! I can fly!¡±


    While I was trying to test my next weapon, Ka shouted in the air.


    She¡¯s not a wind mage, so she can¡¯t use wind magic to help her levitate. But we found an amazing magic equipment for that.


    Right now, she¡¯s wearing a really fashionable jacket that suit her very well. And when she infuses mana into it, a pair of wings appear on her back.


    I used to say that angels are Ka with wings. But now, Ka turned into an angel. Except her wings are different than the normal wings of an angel. They are steel wings that she can use as protection as well.


    If she¡¯s on the ground, her earth magic is sufficient for protecting herself against most attack. But now that she can fly, she can use that wings to protect herself in the air. Though she can just carry the soil or rocks using the wand that I gave her a long time ago. She¡¯s still using it.


    Since her healing magic is more urate than the angels, being able to fly is a great addition. She knows that as well, but I don¡¯t think she cares about it at the moment since she¡¯s enjoying her first time flying by herself.


    ¡°There are also more jackets, cloaks, and other equipment which help you to fly as well. Though I don¡¯t think you will need them,¡± Jeremy said to me.


    Since he¡¯s an appraiser, I asked him toe during the testing of the items. Maybe there will be more effects that he couldn¡¯t find before, and he finds them now after being tested. Just like the weapons that only Aura users can use.


    With this, we can have more members for the flying troops. If I gave them to the vampires, they don¡¯t need to use blood to fly anymore. And they can save blood until they fight powerful enemies.


    The next weapon I will try is what Victoria called as kunai. A weapon that I can use like a dagger, or as throwing weapons. She said that this is a weapon that ninja used. And I used Ninja as my disguise. That¡¯s why she was so insistent on me trying them.


    There are about ten of them in one set. They are all have the same effects when I pour mana on them. Which was to increase their sharpness when they were thrown.


    I can use Aura for that, but having them will be useful as well. For now, I will try throwing one of them first.


    I threw it toward a rock. I just infused mana and threw it without using Aura. And the kunai pierced through the rock easily. If I infuse Aura as well, they could be much sharper and stronger. This one is good as well.


    ¡°...Roy, you alone is just like an entire arsenal of weapons. Where will you keep them all? I think your storage is full already,¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s obvious. I¡¯ll just ask Albert or anyone else to let me borrow one of their warehouse or something. Though I will still keep some weapons that I can carry somewhere in my body. In case I¡¯m in a situation where I can¡¯t use magic,¡± I said.


    ¡°You think there will be such situation? Even if you have the Magic Restricting Cor put on you, you can just destroy it with your strength,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. But what if it¡¯s not a cor but a room instead? An area I need to pass through where no one can use magic. Making that cor is possible, so making a room should be possible as well,¡± I replied.


    Of course I keep thinking of the worst situation before we face the Evil God. But just not being able to use magic is not the worst situation for me. What if I can¡¯t use Aura. Maybe there¡¯s somewhere where I won¡¯t be able to use Aura. That would be bad.


    And if using Aura and magic won¡¯t be possible, I could die. I need to prepare something for that with Victoria who should be with me all the time when we are ready to face the Evil God.


    The worst situation I can think of would be when I can¡¯t use magic, Aura, and Victoria or her clones are not with me. I can only depend on my own body at that time.


    That¡¯s why I need to get stronger in many ways. And one of the way is to find a good weapon. I need some god-killing weapon in hand. I need to have god-killing strength, and god-killing friends. I don¡¯t know if everyone is strong enough right now, but we¡¯ll keep improving.


    Oh, there¡¯s a spear which enhance the strength of light magic when infused with mana. Ka already has her wand, so I guess I¡¯ll give it to one of the angels.


    I keep on testing the weapons, while the girls are checking on the costumes and essories. Are they doing some fashion show over there? They seem to be having fun in wearing those clothes rather than checking their effects.


    Well, I don¡¯t think they will forget what they need to do. It¡¯s important to rx and have fun. But one thing still bothers me.


    There are no dresses sexier than what Ang wore in my past life. And that¡¯s something I regret not seeing in this life.


    Though I won¡¯t tell anyone that I¡¯m still looking for it.

 Chapter 598

    Chapter 598: Jewel is Injured


    Seems like the girls won¡¯t be done for a while longer. Even though I have more things I need to test than them, I think they will take much longer because they are doing some fashion show.


    I have seen them doing it in the past. We have a clothing store after all. Most of the design are from Victoria¡¯s original world. And they are all so fashionable. The girls loved it so they arranged some fashion show for themselves once in a while when some new designs appear.


    Though that doesn¡¯t mean they are not interested in fashion from the past. It¡¯s obvious from seeing how they are doing a fashion show over there. Ka, Ang, Celestine, and Sara raised Earth Walls and turn them into changing rooms. They even set a stage for them to walk.


    I¡¯m curious. There should be some clothes for men to wear as well. But why didn¡¯t they ask me to put them on?


    Well, I can put them onter. The girls are having fun right now so I won¡¯t ruin their fun.


    Though I¡¯m curious how Timmy can take care of those dresses. Maybe he loves crossdressing?


    Alright! Next is... a scissor?


    .....


    ¡°Hey, this shouldn¡¯t count as a weapon, right?¡± I asked Victoria who is taking a break from the fashion show next to me in her human form.


    ¡°It can be counted as a sharp weapon. Anyway, Jeremy said that you won¡¯t just test the weapons. Some of the items that he and the other appraisers couldn¡¯t find their effects will be given to you so you can test them all. Because some of the effects won¡¯t just appear from infusing mana into them. They need Aura to be used. That¡¯s why you will have a lot more than these to test. Even the dresses that the girls are wearing might need you to test,¡± Victoria said.


    So, I need to wear dresses? I have wore the fis stocking before and I ended up getting humiliated because Victoria pulled a fast one on me. Now I need to wear them in front of everyone without hiding it? No way.


    ¡°Victoria, you can put the dresses and any women¡¯s clothing yourself. You can wear them and ride on Ray¡¯s back so you can use Aura a little bit. There¡¯s no way I can wear those dresses. What if they ripped because I¡¯m too big?¡±


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s what I intend to do anyway. Though I just ask you because maybe you have some interest in crossdressing,¡± Victoria said to me before she left and returns to where the girls are.


    I¡¯m fine with crossdressing. But I don¡¯t like how Victoria and the others might end up pushing me to do it more often.


    I must never let my guard down around anything rted to Victoria¡¯s hobby.


    Anyway, let¡¯s try the scissor. There¡¯s a note written by Jeremy that the scissor can even cut even steel when I infuse mana into it.


    Seriously, there¡¯s no need for me to be the one to test it. It¡¯s better to give this scissor to a tailor. Maybe the one who make the clothes for our clothing stores. And they can make dresses from steel.


    ...That would be too heavy.


    Anyway, the scissor is good. I used it to cut the iron sword with self-repairing effect on it and the sword was cut very well.


    And as I infuse mana into the sword to repair it, Sonia appears in front of me.


    ¡°Roy! Jewel is injured badly! Shelia told me to open a portal right away!¡±


    As soon as she finished speaking, I opened a portal directly to where Shelia is. And Shelia quickly entered it while carrying the injured Jewel on her back.


    ¡°Ka! Heal Jewel!¡±


    I gave the order to Ka who is running this way as I turn my attention to the portal.


    Inside the portal, I can see that it¡¯s a in field just like where we are right now. But there¡¯s a herd of monstersing. They are all animal type monsters. All of them are rhinoceros.


    ¡°...Seems like Jewel has found a rhino she wants to evolve into,¡± I said.


    The herd of rhinos are charging into the portal. So, I entered it and close the portal behind me.


    ¡°What will you do, Roy? Revenge for your disciple?¡± Victoria who came with me asked.


    ¡°Not at all. If Jewel is in danger, she would have noticed it right away and contacted me. But the fact that she didn¡¯t can only mean that she¡¯s facing them willingly. Her injury came from her own decision. And I will respect that. I¡¯m here so I can put a Blobby somewhere so Jewel can return anytime she wants. Maybe I¡¯ll just stick a Blobby onto that biggest rhino. It seems to be angry.¡±


    I pointed at the biggest rhino among the herd. Not only that one is big, it was also the one that looks like the most vicious. Maybe Jewel wanted to evolve into that one.


    All the rhinos here seem strong. Their skins are not like a normal rhinoceros¡¯ skins. Instead, they more like an armor. A powerful armor made of strong metal.


    As the rhinoceros got closer, I jumped into the sky to dodge them. And I stick a Blobby behind the biggest rhino¡¯s ear. Even if the rhino is rolling around on the ground, it will be hard for the rhino to take it off.


    I thought that I¡¯m already safe in the sky and about to go back to Jewel, but it seems that I underestimated these rhinos. I should have expected something from a monster that Jewel picked.


    The biggest rhino then stomped on the ground, and thendscape changed. That rhino has the ability to use earth magic. No wonder Jewel wanted this one.


    I who was supposed to be safe in the air after a very high jump suddenly have my feet touch the ground again.


    This is great. If I didn¡¯t make a contract with Ray, I would have picked this monster as my familiar. But if Jewel can do this, that would be great.


    Once Jewel evolved, I guess we can count her as our earth mage as well. I wonder if Ian wants to evolve as well.


    I¡¯d like to test myself against this rhino. But I will hold myself back since this is Jewel¡¯s target. Whether she wants to defeat it or even if she wants to tame it, the decision is up to her.


    ¡°Sorry, but I have no time to y with you. I¡¯ll let Jewel decide what she wants to do with you. Goodbye!¡± I waved my hand toward the rhino as I opened a portal behind me to where we were before.


    I stepped back and closed the portal when the rhino was within an arm reach. The rhino must be confused, but I don¡¯t care.


    ¡°How¡¯s Jewel?¡± I asked Ka about Jewel¡¯s condition. At the same time, I used Divine Vision to look at her properly.


    ¡°I healed the bruises and any visible wounds. I don¡¯t know if she has broken bones or not,¡± Ka replied.


    From what I can see, there¡¯s nothing serious. At least after Ka healed her. There are some broken bones, but there¡¯s no need for surgery since healing magic is enough.


    ¡°Ka, use healing magic on her... everything. Use higher level healing magic on her whole body. That¡¯s enough to recover her. Though she might need some rest. Shelia, can you tell me what happened?¡±


    After giving the order to Ka to heal Jewel, I asked Shelia who was with her what happened.


    What happened was exactly as I thought. Jewel didn¡¯t notice the rhino¡¯s ability to alter thendscape and let down her guard even when Shelia was there.


    Jewel and Shelia tried to face a herd of rhinos just the two of them. But they were taken by surprise when the ground was altered and Jewel got hit. Even though she has enough time to transform into her hybrid form and protect herself, the rhino was too strong and that¡¯s how she got injured.


    Shelia then retreated and contacted Sonia right away who then told me that Ka was injured. That was surprising knowing that Shelia loves fighting the most. I guess they ended up bing good friends.


    ¡°So, is that thing the one Jewel wanted to evolve into?¡± I asked Shelia.


    ¡°Seems that way. I only managed to put down just one of the smaller ones. But their boss was much tougher. If Jewel can evolve and be like that, she will be much stronger than she is now,¡± Shelia said.


    If she can be that strong, I will be happy as well. Though I need to ask for more information from Jewel herself. But she needs rest right now. She hasn¡¯t been awake even though her body has been healed. She must be exhausted.


    ¡°Well, I guess this is it. Let¡¯s stop the testing right now. We should take a rest as well,¡± I said.


    And so, I brought everyone back home to rest. I got Sophie to nurse Jewel as soon as I get home.


    For the next testing, I¡¯ll do it after Jewel wake up.


    A rhino that can use earth magic, huh? My disciple is amazing indeed if she can evolve into one.

 Chapter 599

    Chapter 599: Steel Rhino


    Late at night, I who checked on Jewel¡¯s condition from my room with my Divine Vision can see that Jewel is waking up. Let¡¯s go there and ask her what she was doing before.


    I can see that Sophie who was taking care of Jewel noticed that she was awake and checked on her condition first.


    After I taught her everything I know about medical knowledge, she has surpassed my ability as a doctor in my past life. Though I¡¯m still better than her because I¡¯m an Aura user.


    Alright, forget it. Being a doctor mean we have to heal our patients. We have no time topete against each other in which one is the better doctor.


    ...Though it¡¯s obvious that I¡¯m the best one.


    On the way to Jewel¡¯s room, I meet Ang and Ka. Seeing that I¡¯m walking toward Jewel¡¯s room, they figured that Jewel is awake and joined me to her room.


    ¡°Good morning, my beloved disciple. Though it¡¯s night right now. How are you feeling?¡± I asked Jewel who is sitting on her bed.


    .....


    ¡°I¡¯m fine. That rhino was stronger than I expected,¡± Jewel said.


    The rhino she is talking about must be the one who can use earth magic to change thendscape. That one is strong indeed. Though I only know about that thing¡¯s magic. Not its physical strength. But since Shelia was there as well, and the two of them had troubles against the herd, that rhino must be really strong.


    I¡¯ve heard the gist of it from Shelia. While Jewel was supposed to fight the leader, Shelia was supposed to distract the other rhinos. But they let down their guards and Jewel got injured.


    I don¡¯t think that these two would let down their guards so much that Jewel would return injured this badly. That means the rhino was even stronger than what they expected.


    ¡°I have heard the gist of it from Shelia, but I want to hear more from your side. What happened?¡± I asked Jewel.


    Jewel told me her side of story and it was as expected. She let down her guard.


    Jewel and Shelia were on a journey together ever since I swapped Shelia with Wendy who wanted to study from the ghosts. They traveled far until they find a location where many animal-type monsters were living. They hoped that they would find a powerful rhino monster there, and they were right.


    Around three days ago, they finally found a group of rhinoceros. And after observing them for a while, Jewel decided to test them. Which happened today.


    Though for Shelia, it was difficult to stay still. So, during the time Jewel was observing, Shelia was quite a distance away fighting other monsters. It was far enough to not alert the rhinos.


    Maybe that¡¯s why they let down their guards. Thinking that Shelia could defeat the other nearby monsters easily, they didn¡¯t think that the rhinos were powerful. And that¡¯s how Jewel ended up getting injured and lost her consciousness.


    ¡°Master! I have decided that I will try to evolve into that rhino! I thought of looking for a rhino that can fly, but if it can alter thendscape, that¡¯s fine as well. Whether the enemy will be on the ground or in the air, I can reach them if I alter thendscape. I can make the ground rise and make me level with flying enemies,¡± Jewel said.


    ¡°Are you sure? As you know, we already have quite a lot of powerful earth mages. How about looking for other rhinos? Maybe you can find winged rhino somewhere,¡± I said.


    ¡°No. That steel rhino is good enough. It has great defense and powerful charge attack. Even after I attacked it with powerful lightning magic, it doesn¡¯t affect him much. It may have some sort of magic resistance. For now, I¡¯ll observe them a little longer and see if they have other abilities,¡± Jewel said.


    ¡°Alright. Do you need any help?¡± I asked Jewel.


    ¡°No. I¡¯ll do it alone. Though I need someone to keep the other rhinos in check. Master, if you¡¯re free, how about youe with me? It¡¯s easier to travel with you,¡± Jewel asked me toe with her the next time she faces the rhino again.


    ¡°I guess I can do that,¡± I said positively.


    ¡°What about testing the weapons? Most of us won¡¯t be able to use them,¡± Ang said.


    ¡°Most of the weapons are magic items that needed mana to be activated. Anyone who can use magic should be able to use them. But ask Jeremy first which one should be tested. Don¡¯t test items that he doesn¡¯t know the effects. For those, ask Victoria. I will left Ray there. Victoria should be able to use Aura a bit and test those weapons,¡± I said.


    Right now, Victoria is in her room writing her next book. Thanks to the torch, she can see better at night. And since she doesn¡¯t need to sleep, she can continue writing until morning without wasting any resources. Using average magic item to give light the whole night is a waste after all.


    ¡°Jewel, I won¡¯t help you much there other than to distract the other rhinos. I don¡¯t remember what Timmy told you about beastform magic, but you should know best what to do. I will only help you when you ask for it,¡± I said to Jewel.


    ¡°Okay, master.¡±


    ¡°Take a day off tomorrow. You can try the magic items we found and get to know Ray. You haven¡¯t met him yet, right? I will go check on those rhinos tomorrow. And then we will go together the day after. Go get Lina to cook you something. You must be hungry,¡± I said to Jewel before leaving the room.


    The next day, after bringing everyone back to Monsters World to test the magic items, I opened a portal to the Blobby I put behind the rhino¡¯s ear.


    When I opened the portal, the rhino who wasying on the ground suddenly jolted. Seems like he knows that I¡¯ming.


    After I entered the portal, I quickly closed it and get away from the rhino.


    Jewel said that they are called steel rhinos. But I think they are harder than steel.


    Well, iron, steel, rock, or whatever they are, I have the confidence to cut them down. I have grown that strong since I became Aura Master.


    Though it doesn¡¯t matter if I¡¯m stronger than them or not. This is Jewel¡¯s business. I will only watch over her.


    For now, let¡¯s test what they can do.


    Other than the leader, the rest are smaller inparison. But they are still strong.


    I heard from Shelia that even she had some difficulties just defeating one. These monsters¡¯ skin is so thick that even Shelia¡¯s w couldn¡¯t pierce through it. She needs consecutive attack until she could pierce them. Much like Timmy¡¯s dragon¡¯s scales. But not that hard.


    Let¡¯s grab some of them to be tested!


    I run away from the leader of the rhinos, and grabbed two smaller rhinos by their horn. Even though I lifted them up by the horn, it doesn¡¯t break. They are strong as expected.


    It is weird how I can easily lift two rhinos by their horn easily. But this is the strength of an Aura Master. Someone who is feared by the Evil God.


    And then, I opened a portal back to where the others are training. I¡¯ll give Jewel one sample of the rhino so she can check it herself before facing the big one.


    ¡°Rhino delivery service! Tie it up so it won¡¯t escape!¡±


    After I said that, I closed the portal and run away. The boss rhino changed thendscape and force me to break through a thick wall to escape. But it¡¯s not a big problem for me.


    I didn¡¯t use portal since I don¡¯t want to get too far from the boss rhino. And soon enough, the boss rhino couldn¡¯t catch up to me and I find a good ce to test the rhino I picked up.


    It was quite heavy and I need to use Aura to lift it up with one hand. And even though I grip it with enough strength to destroy a rock into dust, the horn of the rhino I¡¯m holding isn¡¯t even damaged.


    If Jewel able to transform into one, it would be hard for anyone to pierce through her defense. Maybe Jewel prioritize defensive capabilities because she already has lightning element magic which has powerful offensive capabilities. That¡¯s why she picked this type of rhino.


    ...I am against violence. And I don¡¯t feel proud to abusing animals. But this is a monster, not an animal. And I need to find out more about it. So, what I do to this rhino will be omitted.


    Anyway, the result was quite amazing. Even this small rhino, I need to use quite a bit of Aura to pierce through its skin. And its earth magic was at the level of advanced level. But unlike earth mages, these rhinos need to have their feet on the ground so they can use earth magic.


    This is a good monster for Jewel to transform into. I like it. I hope she will be sessful in her evolution.

 Chapter 600

    Chapter 600: Magic Weapon for Lightning Mages


    ...I will repeat what I said before. I¡¯m against animal abuse. The only reason I will kill an animal is for consumption, or in the rare case scenario, it¡¯s because I¡¯m in danger.


    Anyway, there¡¯s a reason why I said it again.


    After I finished checking on the steel rhino that I grabbed, I killed that monster with just a single punch with my fist covered with Blobbygloves as I covered it with Aura.


    Even for average Aura users, or at least those I call average among the ancient Aura users I fought before, they would have some trouble in crushing the thick skin of the rhino. But I can do it with a punch after bing an Aura Master even though I haven¡¯t used Super Aura yet.


    I killed it because even though it¡¯s not for consumption, it¡¯s a monster. And as a summoner, as long as I defeat them with my familiar, I can get some experience to make my summoning element reach another level. So, it¡¯s not really animal abuse.


    Anyway, monster and animal are different. But seeing what happened after I returned to where the others are, and seeing what happened to the other rhino I gave them, I can only think of the rhino as being unlucky.


    Even though monster and animal are different, I still pity that rhino who died in a gory way.


    .....


    ¡°...So, what happened?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m testing the rhino if it has other abilities! I think I tested too much that the rhino ended up dead so quickly. But I learned a lot! Master, tomorrow, I will go and face the boss rhino! Please help me at that time, Master!¡± Jewel said.


    Okay. So, it ended up this way after being tested by Jewel and the others.


    I heard from Ka that since the rhino has good magic resistance, Jewel and the others tried to use various magic on it. And the result was shocking.


    Any magic from advanced level magic or below won¡¯t even give a scratch on the rhino. I also added that any normal physical attack won¡¯t give them much damage either unless I use Aura.


    As for expert level magic, they needed a strong magic to give the rhino any real damage. But that is still difficult.


    ¡°So, if you can evolve your rhino into a steel rhino, it¡¯s possible that only master level mage can hurt you. Anything below that and you won¡¯t receive any damage. Isn¡¯t that too powerful? But that¡¯s a good choice though,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. I thought that just by getting earth magic that allow me to change the terrain will be good enough. But it turns out that they have something special. As for the boss rhino, it seems that even expert level magic won¡¯t hurt it in any way. But it¡¯s a good thing that Master brought me here,¡± Jewel said as she lifted an iron needle to show me.


    The needle doesn¡¯t seem to be a weapon. It¡¯s too short and too thin to be called a weapon. The length is just around 50cm and even Jewel with her hand can hold around ten of them in one hand. But maybe it is a weapon since it¡¯s among the items that I needed to test.


    ¡°Is that a magic weapon?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes! Victoria told me that it could be good to either me or Candy since we¡¯re both lightning mages. And there are ten of them, so we can share them. Five each. And I think this weapon suit us,¡± Jewel said.


    If they have five each, they can always bring them anywhere. I tried to lift them up, and they are quite light. Even though it looks thin, they seem to be made of strong material.


    ¡°So, what¡¯s the effect of these... needles?¡± I asked.


    After asking Jewel, she then threw one needle to a tree. And the needle stabed it. I guess the physical training she endures every day after bing my disciple went well. Though for her throwing uracy, it¡¯s all her own effort.


    ¡°That¡¯s a good throw. And then what will happen?¡± I asked again.


    ¡°Then, I just need to aim lightning magic on that needle. This will happen.¡±


    Then, Jewel casts a weak lightning magic. It¡¯s just around beginner level.


    But when the magic hit the needle, the damage the tree received were many times than what Jewel used. It¡¯s almost at the same level as her expert level magic at full strength.


    ¡°Whoa! Just a little bit of lightning it bes like that?¡±


    The tree where the needle struck was utterly destroyed. And it started to burn as well. Seems like we found something good for our lightning mages.


    ¡°We have ten of them. We thought of getting them divided between Candy and I. But that¡¯s also depend on how good our throwing skill is,¡± Jewel said.


    ¡°And seems like Jewel will be the one to keep them all. I¡¯m not good at throwing at all. Though I¡¯d like to at least keep some of them for myself,¡± Candy added.


    Then they informed me that those needles are actually consumable weapons. One needle can only receive lightning magic a few times before they got destroyed. And they have disposed two of them already.


    So, to not waste them, Jewel and Candy were practicing their throwing skill by using Blobbies that have been transformed into the same shape and same weight. And that¡¯s when I opened a portal and give them a rhino for them to test.


    If Jewel has some of them, once they got stuck into the boss rhino, she can defeat it. The question is whether it¡¯s necessary or not for her to defeat the boss rhino.


    ¡°Jewel, do you need to defeat the boss rhino so you can evolve?¡± I asked Jewel.


    ¡°Timmy said that I don¡¯t need to. But it¡¯s the faster way. I can just learn more about them slowly, but that will took too much time. So, it¡¯s best to be done with it sooner,¡± Jewel replied.


    So, it¡¯s just a matter of time. Since we don¡¯t know if the cult will attack again, it¡¯s best for her to achieve her goal sooner. So she can evolve quickly.


    ¡°I see. Then, prepare yourself for tomorrow. Though I don¡¯t think your throwing skill will be strong enough to pierce the boss rhino¡¯s skin. How will you do it then?¡± I asked Jewel.


    ¡°Then, I need to get closer to the boss rhino and pierce a needle into the eyes, nose, ear, or mouth. Although they are still hard to prate, those ces are still weaker than the rest of their body,¡± Jewel said as she pointed at the rhino she killed.


    Now that I look carefully, there are needle wounds on the ces that Jewel mentioned. No wonder the rhino died in a terrible shape. After being stabbed in those ces, it got electrocuted by Jewel¡¯s magic.


    And I will mention it again. It¡¯s a rhino monster and not an animal. This is not animal abuse.


    ¡°You want to get closer to the rhino? That would be difficult. You don¡¯t want me to help you with that? I can stab those needles anywhere I want, you know?¡± I asked Jewel.


    ¡°I know that master can do it. But this is also for my training. I can¡¯t expect that the enemies I will face in the future would let themselves get stabbed by the needles. That¡¯s why I want to ask you to help me practice,¡± Jewel asked me to train her.


    ¡°Okay. Let¡¯s do it. Do I need to pretend to be a rhino and keep charging at you?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Just for the battle against the boss rhino. I will ask you to help me in facing human opponents after that,¡± Jewel said.


    ¡°Okay. Victoria, give me a lot of Blobbies,¡± I gave the order to Victoria.


    Some of the Blobbies were given to Jewel. The ones given to Jewel were then transformed into simr looking needles.


    As for the rest of the Blobbies, I had them transformed into a rhino¡¯s head. The same size and appearance as the boss rhino.


    ¡°...What is that?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°A rhino¡¯s head,¡± I replied casually.


    ¡°I know that. But why?¡±


    ¡°For training.¡±


    On the back of the rhino¡¯s head, there¡¯s a handle in which I can hold them. And then while holding the rhino¡¯s head in front of me, I started charging at Jewel.


    ¡°Wait, what!? Master, I¡¯m not ready yet!¡±


    As I charged at her, Jewel jumped to the side to avoid my charge.


    ¡°Don¡¯t expect anyone will wait for you to get prepared! Anyway, I made the nose holes and the ears to be weaker than the rest of the head. As for the eyes and the mouth, I will made them move however I want. Try to not hit those area when the rhino is closing their mouth and eyes. This is the best training for you to prepare your fight against the boss rhino. Well, do your best!¡±


    Training while I pretend to be a rhino is the best for her to be able to defeat it. Though I can¡¯t use earth magic, so Jewel will need to think about it herself on how she will fight it.


    And so, today we ended up training Jewel while the others are testing the magic items and watch us training. It is fun for me to just chase after a target without thinking of anything.


    The next day, I¡¯m ready to bring Jewel to face the boss rhino.

 Chapter 601

    Chapter 601: Testing Aura Weapon Against the Rhinos


    ¡°So, who else will being?¡± I asked Jewel before we left to face the herd of rhinos. Though I will probably be the one facing most of them.


    ¡°Master can decide who wille. Since Master is strong, even you can handle a lot of rhinos alone, right?¡± Jewel suggested for me to decide who wille.


    ¡°Then Shelia wille. She can have her revenge,¡± I said.


    ¡°I did not lose! That was strategic retreat!¡± Sheliained.


    Well, that was also surprising for her to decide to retreat in an instant without my order. She was supposed to be a battle freak.


    ¡°Okay, okay. I¡¯m just taking you so you can test your strength against them for real this time. I won¡¯t do much unless either of you need help,¡± I said.


    ¡°I can defeat dozens of them by myself. I don¡¯t think I will need your help,¡± Shelia said confidently.


    .....


    If that¡¯s what she wants.


    Right now, we are in Monsters World where we tested our loots. The magic weapons and items that haven¡¯t been tested yet. There are still many of them that we don¡¯t know what the effects are.


    ¡°So, I¡¯ll stay here and test the weapons?¡± Victoria asked me.


    ¡°Yes. Though I¡¯ll take some weapons for the real test. I want to test them in a real battle,¡± I said.


    ¡°Huh? Master, the number of the Lightning Needles reduced. Do you know anything?¡± Jewel asked with a handful of needles in her hand.


    Lightning Needles are what she called those needles that can be used as lightning rod to improve her lightning magic. And instead of ten of them, which was supposed to be all we had after looting everything in Timmy¡¯s treasure vaults, she only has seven of them.


    ¡°I gave three of them to Marie hoping that she can make more. They are consumable items after all. One of them can handle being shot by lightning magic only for a few times. So, I think getting Marie to make more of them will be helpful. They don¡¯t need to be as powerful as the ones in your hand, but if we can make more of them, all the lightning mages in our side will be stronger. Those seven are for you to use. While Candy decided that her uracy is not good enough to use them now. Though she will still be practicing them. But I think seven of them for one rhino is too much. Be wise on when and how you use them,¡± I advised Jewel.


    After hearing that there are some magic items that I want her to duplicate, Marie became so interested in making them that Albert kept sending me messages about itst night. Sonia was so busy informing me how angry he was at me. And since he¡¯s busy, n and Lana were told toe and be taken care of by Sophie and the others in Cassau. Though the children happily obliged. Which makes Albert even sadder.


    ¡°So, do you have the confidence to stab those needles to the thick rhino¡¯s skin?¡± I asked Jewel.


    ¡°I have practiced a lot. I think I can do well. Just watch me, Master. I can do it,¡± Jewel said confidently.


    Although she returned with injuries back then, she has the confidence to face the boss rhino right now. Well, it¡¯s most likely because I will be there to protect her from the rest of the rhinos. But it¡¯s good to have confidence.


    After everything is ready, we left to the field where the Steel Rhinos are. And the boss rhino noticed us quickly.


    ¡°Alright, let¡¯s move!¡±


    The three of us dodged the boss rhino¡¯s charge attack, and while Jewel stayed there, Shelia and I split up to take care of the rest of the rhinos.


    I have discussed it with Victoria and the others on what to do with them. Should I kill them or not. And we decide to only kill them if it¡¯s necessary. Though Shelia can do whatever she wants. Whether she wants to kill them or not is her decision.


    Shelia quickly attracted a lot of rhinos by attacking them. Making them pay attention to her instead of Jewel.


    As for me, thanks to bing Aura Master, I can just show a bit of my power to taunt them. Making them pay attention to me when I¡¯m just standing still.


    I brought several weapons with me, but I don¡¯t think I will use most of them. I just picked a walking cane for me to use.


    It¡¯s not an ordinary cane. There¡¯s actually a hidden sword inside the cane. Though that sword is normal. It¡¯s the cane itself which is the amazing one. Or should I say the hidden sword¡¯s sheath.


    With the sword, I can kill my enemies like usual. But the sheath is more amazing. Since it¡¯s something that needed Aura to use, let¡¯s call it Aura weapon.


    This walking cane, when I use Aura with it, it became an amazing tool to capture enemies. Though it will take some time until it can work.


    I need to draw something on the ground first. Either it¡¯s a circle, square, triangle, or any other shape as long as it connects. And barrier will rise from the drawing. And anything inside the drawing will be trapped inside by the barrier. The power of the barrier depend on how much I pour my Aura into it.


    The drawing part is quite difficult since the enemy won¡¯t stay still. But I can do something about them with the hidden sword inside the cane while I was drawing.


    I dragged the cane on the ground with my left hand as I fought the rhinos with the sword in my right hand. And I finally drew a circle with just one rhino in it.


    A barrier then raised form the ground and trapped the rhino in it. I also put enough Aura so the rhino won¡¯t be able to break it. Good thing I tested the rhino¡¯s power yesterday. That¡¯s why I can figure out how much Aura needed to trap one rhino in a barrier.


    As for how long the barrier willst, it¡¯s just one hour. No matter how much mana or Aura I infuse into the cane, the barrier won¡¯tst longer than that. But it can still be destroyed when it receive enough damage. Either from the inside of the barrier or from the outside. Using physical attack or magic.


    But one hour should be enough for Jewel. And I don¡¯t think I will need to test other weapons.


    This cane is truly amazing. Though to be able to protect myself from powerful magic, I need to use Super Aura. But when we face weaker enemies, this should be good enough.


    And it might not show, but the barrier also exist under the ground as well. So no one can escape from underground. And the height is also limited as well. That depends on the thing inside the barrier.


    The height of the barrier is about two meters higher than whatever inside the drawing. If it¡¯s a five meter tree, the barrier should be around seven meters. And it will also cover two meters under the root of the tree as well.


    It was truly amazing. Whether it¡¯s something discovered in a dungeon or created by someone, this cane is amazing. Though I don¡¯t think I can use it against master level mages, or any flying enemies. I need to draw the shape on the ground after all. And master level mages should be quick enough to cast their magic before I finish my drawing. Even if I finish the drawing, they should be strong enough to destroy the barrier unless I put my everything into it.


    But this is still good enough for expert level mages or lower. I can draw a huge circle around a city and protect everyone inside for an hour. Though I will end up consuming all my Aura to do it. But I have Ray so I can recover it quickly.


    The trapped rhino is panicking because it can¡¯t do anything. And I also keep moving to trap the other rhinos.


    I made various drawing on the ground. A circle, a square, a triangle, flower shape, star shape, and some random shape. I easily captured a lot of them.


    I also tested if I can use it for a trap. Like drawing a huge circle, but the line got cut off for a meter or so. I just need to draw the finishing touch and the barrier will be erected. Trapping everything inside.


    ¡°As expected. Practicing it in the real thing is better thanjust training alone. Though it will be difficult to do it while facing human enemies,¡± I said to myself.


    Let¡¯s see how Shelia is doing. She¡¯s facing several rhinos at once. A rhino is charging at her, but she stopped it. Though she got pushed back quite far.


    Well, seeing her smiling, I guess I don¡¯t need to help her. Let¡¯s see how Jewel is doing.


    Thanks to her training with me, she can dodge the boss rhino¡¯s attack well. Though it¡¯s difficult for her to prate its skin or stab the Lightning Needles into the boss rhino. She has thrown two needles, but one of them missed, while the other one couldn¡¯t even pierce the rhino¡¯s eyelid and fell.


    Seems like it will be hard for her to win. Though it¡¯s still possible. I¡¯ll just trust her and watch her from the side.

 Chapter 602

    Chapter 602: Jewel Versus Boss Rhino


    Hmm... using this cane is surprisingly easy against monster. Though my enemies won¡¯t just be monsters so I need to think of a way to use it. Just like how I drew a huge circle with a small gap for an opening. Just a single line and I can finish the circle and trap everything inside the circle.


    I also need to think of a way to fight enemies who might notice what I¡¯m nning to do. Well, there are other weapons I haven¡¯t tried yet. Maybe some of them have even better abilities than this one.


    Anyway, today¡¯s main character is Jewel. I need to check on her if shes okay fighting the boss rhino on her own.


    She only has two elements. A lightning element and beastform. And since her lightning doesn¡¯t have any effect of the boss rhino, she can¡¯t use it unless she managed to stab the boss rhino with her Lightning Needles. Without them, there¡¯s no way she could even hurt the boss rhino.


    Her other element is beastform. She can transform into a rhinoceros or half-rhino half-human form. But it¡¯s just a normal rhinoceros so it¡¯s impossible for her to be stronger than the boss rhino. I wonder what she will do to the boss rhino.


    There are some rhinos that I haven¡¯t put inside a barrier yet. But I have no problem with them. I can easily y with them while watching Jewel.


    And so, while I stopped a rhino charging at me with one hand, I paid my attention toward Jewel and prepare myself to help her if she needs it.


    .....


    Jewel is in her hybrid form with armor covering her body. But they were only bing hindrances for her. But she doesn¡¯t realize it yet.


    Bing a half-rhino and wore that armor only make her movement slower. Although rhino is faster, that¡¯s only when they are running forward. But to face the boss rhino, Jewel needs to dodge it to the side. Using that form only make her slower.


    I won¡¯t tell her that. She needs to figure it out by herself so she can get stronger.


    Although she can still dodge the boss rhino¡¯s charge, it won¡¯t take long before she bes tired and unable to dodge properly.


    But there¡¯s one advantage she has from using that form. She is stronger than when she¡¯s in her human form. And she should be able to pierce her needles easier than when she¡¯s in her human form. Though that boss rhino doesn¡¯t seem like he will let Jewel do it.


    The only way I can think of for her to win, is to be able to transform quickly. After dodging the boss rhino¡¯s charge, she needs to transform quickly and stab a needle into the boss rhino. At least that¡¯s the only thing I can think of if I was her.


    Well, let¡¯s see what she will do next. Oh, another rhino is charging at me. I wonder if a Steel Rhino¡¯s horn can pierce another Steel Rhino¡¯s skin. Let¡¯s try it.


    I lifted the rhino I stopped before, and ce it in front of the charging rhino before I let it go. And the horn of the charging rhino hit the rhino I used to block the way.


    The result was surprising. The horn didn¡¯t receive any damage. It¡¯s still as sharp as before. But the rhino that was hit is shouting in pain even though the horn didn¡¯t pierce its skin.


    I see. So that¡¯s what happened.


    No matter how strong their skin is, they are still one of thergest organ of living beings. It is still a skin in the end.


    My guess is that rhino¡¯s sense of pain is lessened a lot because it¡¯s difficult for them to sense any pain because of their thick skin. But once they received enough damage, without even having to pierce their skin, they would get hurt just like any other living beings. Unlike tortoises who have strong defense because of their shell which is their exoskeleton with the purpose to protect themselves, rhino¡¯s skin is still a skin.


    Still, this knowledge is unnecessary for Jewel. I hope she can do well with the boss rhino she¡¯s facing.


    Well, she¡¯s smart. She should be able to figure out what to do if her original n failed.


    I keep watching her for a few more minutes when she finally realized it herself. She is too slow to dodge with her hybrid form so she stopped using that form to dodge and use her human form. And after dodging, she tried to transform quick enough for her so she can give a counter. Though her transformation is still slow.


    Well, she needs another n then unless she can transform quicker. And I know what her other n is.


    Other than the Lightning Needles, she brought another magic weapon with her. It¡¯s the magic kunai which can be used to throw, and when infused with mana, they can pierce even steel. Though the Steel Rhino should be stronger than a steel, so I don¡¯t know what will happen.


    Jewel gained some distance from the boss rhino, and prepare the kunai to throw and a Lightning Needle in her other hand.


    When the boss rhino is charging at her, Jewel threw the kunai infused with her mana toward its eye. The boss rhino thought that just by closing its eye, it should be able to protect its eye. But that¡¯s wrong because the kunai is too strong.


    The kunai pierced the boss rhino¡¯s right eye. But it can¡¯t go deeper than that. I guess even its eyelid is stronger than we expected. I thought the boss rhino would die with just that one kunai. But it seems that I was wrong.


    Though Jewel prepared for that. When the boss rhino slipped because it was in pain while running, Jewel grabbed the kunai from its eye and pierced the Lightning Needle into the opening gap.


    After retreating a few step back, she casted her most powerful lightning magic. Because of the Lightning Needle¡¯s effect, Jewel¡¯s lightning magic be even stronger than master level lightning magic. And the boss rhino died in an instant.


    ¡°Wow, that¡¯s smart. Will you keep that kunai? I think unlike the needles, kunai is not consumable and can be used again and again,¡± I asked Jewel if she wants to keep the kunai for herself while I dodged another rhino¡¯s attack.


    ¡°Maybe just two of them. Master, I need to cultivate here right now after defeating the boss rhino. Please protect me,¡± Jewel said as she sat down on the ground next to the corpse of the Steel Rhino she defeated.


    ¡°Wait! You didn¡¯t tell me that you need to cultivate right away! Aaah, you stupid disciple! You should have told me everything beforehand!¡± I shouted to Jewel who doesn¡¯t react.


    Since she doesn¡¯t respond, I have no choice but to protect her here. The rhinos are fine. But if there are other stronger monsters approaching, it might be hard. I hope that won¡¯t be the case.


    I quickly distanced myself from the other rhinos, and quickly draw a circle around Jewel and the boss rhino¡¯s corpse with the Aura cane. One hour should be more than enough to get the surrounding monsters away from here.


    If only she had told me about it beforehand, I would have make these rhinos disappear from the start. She was too focused in defeating the boss rhino that she forgot to inform me that she needs to cultivate next ot the corpse.


    I see. So, for beastform mages to increase their level, they need to use the corpse of the monster simr to the animal they transformed into to cultivate. Just like how mages use magic stones to cultivate.


    Though I don¡¯t like how she keep the important info untilter. I¡¯ll give her some punishmentter.


    For now, let¡¯s herd all the rhinos here into a portal to another location. It¡¯s faster than killing them one by one.


    I destroyed the other barriers except for the one that is protecting Jewel, and use taunt to get all the rhinos pay their attention to me.


    After I get al the rhinos to chase me, I opened a portal directly when they are in front of me. All of them quickly entered the portal. And those who somehow stopped were forced to move forward because of Shelia.


    ...it¡¯s like I¡¯m a shepherd. And Shelia is a dog that helped me in herding the sheeps, which are the rhinos. Maybe I¡¯ll open a ranch after I destroy the cult in the future.


    I didn¡¯t kill more than necessary because maybe in the future, there will be another beastform mage who wants to be a rhino and needs Steel Rhino to evolve just like Jewel. As they are monsters that took Jewel and Shelia a while to be found, I don¡¯t know if there are other ces with more of them or not. If there are not, I might end up making their species extinct if I decided to kill them. That¡¯s why I will let some of them live.


    I also want to do the same to other species if possible. Now that I¡¯m much stronger than before, I should be able to do more. Though that will only be my option unless the monsters are too difficult to handle. These rhinos are still considered simple.


    After transporting all the rhinos, there are other monsters appearing. Shelia and I either kill them or transport them away to protect Jewel. And finally, after ten hours staying here, Jewel has seeded in her evolution.

 Chapter 603

    Chapter 603: Jewel¡¯s Hybrid Transformation is Taller than Me


    ¡°That¡¯s your hybrid form? You actually be taller than me. How¡¯s that possible?¡±


    After finishing her cultivation and her rhinoceros form evolved, I asked her to transform.


    Her Steel Rhino transformation is not different at all with the Steel Rhino she defeated. Including the size.


    But when she transformed from her original form into her hybrid form, not only she wears the armor just like her normal transformation. Her height also grow. From the previous Jewel who was a head shorter than me, she became someone who is a head taller than me.


    My height right now is around 190 cm. But Jewel is taller than me after transforming into her hybrid form. Even though I¡¯m already slightly taller than average height of humans, she¡¯s already much taller than that. Though it¡¯s good that she doesn¡¯t be fatter as she¡¯s still keeping her body shape like when she was shorter.


    ¡°Yeah. I¡¯m lucky that I didn¡¯t be fatter. Though I need to get used to this height if I want to fight. Master, let¡¯s go home right away. I want to see if there are other weapons I can use while I¡¯m in this form. Some magic weapon that could enhance my lightning magic if possible,¡± Jewel said.


    ¡°Good. Though you need to ask Candy since she¡¯s also a lightning mage as well. You two can figure out what each other needed. Are you going home in that form?¡± I asked.


    .....


    ¡°...No. Master, can you give me a change of clothes? Transforming into a different form destroyed my clothes. Though I¡¯m curious why such thing never happened when I transformed into a rhino, but only happens when I transform into this form,¡± Jewel said.


    Oh, right. When she transformed into this form, the clothes she was wearing got ripped. She is practically naked. Though thanks to the armor in her hybrid form covering her body, she didn¡¯t show her skin to the world. Though that is useless for my Divine Vision.


    And no. I¡¯m using Divine Vision to see if there¡¯s anything changing inside her body as well. Not to see her naked. Although she¡¯s beautiful, I only see her as my disciple. I won¡¯t lust over her.


    ...it will be different if she wants to be a member of my harem. Though she has never shows me that she has any interest to be one.


    Well, that doesn¡¯t matter. Let¡¯s grab some clothes and return after she get herself dressed.


    ¡°Maybe I¡¯ll give you some more Blobbies to be your clothes. What do you think?¡± I suggested after turning around while Jewel is getting dressed.


    At least it should be enough for her to transform without minding her surrounding. I don¡¯t want her to be distracted by shyness in the middle of a fight.


    ¡°That¡¯s good. But I want to check on the other magic clothes we have. I heard that some of them were for beastform mages so they won¡¯t get ripped during transformation,¡± Jewel said.


    ¡°We have some like that? That¡¯s good. Although I¡¯m already an expert level summoner and able to get Victoria made tons of clones, it¡¯s best to save them. So, you will join us in the magic items testing from tomorrow onward?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. I also need some time to adjust to my new transformation. And if I¡¯m lucky, I could find other type of rhinoceros monsters and I can transform into them in the future. Maybe I can still fly in the future,¡± Jewel said.


    So, right now, she should have powerful defense, and powerful charging attack. And she has magic and physical resistance. She should be able to use earth magic now. And if she can have more abilities in the future, she would be much stronger than most people. Beastform mage is such a cheat. I hope there won¡¯t be any beastform mage in the cult who have knowledge of the past. It will be dangerous if that¡¯s the case.


    ¡°So, after you have adjusted to your new transformation, you will seek more rhinos?¡± I asked Jewel.


    ¡°Yes. As long as the cult hasn¡¯t started their move, I want to improve myself more. If I find more of them, I will ask your help again, Master,¡± Jewel said.


    There¡¯s no way I can refuse my disciple¡¯s request. Though I can just sent someone to protect her instead of going by myself.


    After getting herself dressed, we return to where everyone is. The ce where they are still testing the magic items we looted.


    It¡¯s already dark, so everyone is just chatting and no one is testing the magic items anymore.


    ¡°So, how was it?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°I seeded!¡± Jewel replied.


    Jewel then told the others who are interested about what happened. And they keep talking for another hour before we can finally return home.


    The next day, our schedule is still the same. Testing more items. Though Jewel also asked for training with the others. We want to see if she has magic resistance ability or not.


    I asked Shelia to test Jewel¡¯s defense before we test her magical resistance while I will continue testing the magic weapons or Aura weapons. Though I can still watch her.


    The first thing to test was Jewel¡¯s rhinoceros form. It¡¯s a huge rhino probably around three times the size of a normal rhino.


    ¡°Alright! Shelia, attack me!¡±


    Jewel confidently stand there on all four preparing to receive attack from Shelia.


    Shelia then didn¡¯t swing her w like how she usually fight. She¡¯s throwing a punch instead. Which was weird for a werewolf. But this is a test after all.


    The punch hit the left side of Jewel¡¯s body. But Jewel didn¡¯t react at all.


    ¡°Oh, I felt that. But It doesn¡¯t hurt at all. Just like a tap,¡± Jewel said.


    Hearing that remark, Shelia slightly got angry and threw consecutive punches at Jewel. But Jewel still didn¡¯t feel anything.


    ¡°Shelia! Don¡¯t use your fist! Use your palm! And instead of attacking Jewel¡¯s body, think of it as a p that will attack Jewel¡¯s skin instead!¡± I advised Shelia to p instead of punching.


    Shelia listened to me and swing her hand to p Jewel¡¯s skin as strong as she can.


    ¡°Ow! That hurts!¡± Jewel screamed in pain. Though the pain shouldn¡¯t be much, but she can still feel it.


    ¡°Jewel, rhinoceros¡¯ skin is still a skin. It¡¯s thergest and the most unprotected organ in your body. If the attack is targeted to your skin you will still feel pain if the damage received to your skin is more than what they can handle. You need to think of a way to cover that weakness. Though if your enemy is just an average human, you shouldn¡¯t be able to feel any pain. But because it was Shelia who pped you, you will of course feel pain,¡± I said as I grabbed the next weapon to be tested.


    That is the weakness of the rhino that I found while stopping a group of Steel Rhinos yesterday. But it will still be difficult for her to feel pain from ordinary enemies.


    ¡°Oh, right. I guess I will think about that. Thank you, Master! You are the best in finding weakness as expected!¡± Jewel said that as if it was a huge praise.


    As she said, I¡¯m good at finding weakness. It¡¯s because I was weak in my past life and try to exploit any kind of weakness other people showed me. Though at first it was not in battle, now I tried to see other people¡¯s weaknesses as well even in battle.


    As the weak who haven¡¯t manifested my Aura back then, I still end up getting involved in a fight whether I wanted to or not. And so, I keep looking for everyone¡¯s weaknesses. I guess that makes me able to perceive other people¡¯s and my own weaknesses easily. Though I couldn¡¯t see everything, I can still find a lot.


    But that¡¯s the best I can do. About how I can exploit those weaknesses, I¡¯m bad at it. But this time, I have other people who will help me think how to do it with me. I hope I won¡¯t die a stupid death like in my past life.


    Jewel then continued asking Shelia to attack her in any way, and after a while, it¡¯s time to test her magic resistance.


    ¡°Since I¡¯m a lightning mage, I¡¯m already capable to resist lightning magic to some degree even before I evolved. So, I can just ask Ang to attack me with each of her element,¡± Jewel said.


    Ang then stepped forward and attacked Jewel with a Fireball. The level she used was not her strongest, but she¡¯s still a powerful mage. That Fireball is enough to defeat advanced level mages easily. But Jewel didn¡¯t receive much damage from Ang¡¯s Fireball.


    After that, they tested with ice magic, wind magic, and finally earth magic. For ice and wind magic, they are the same with fire magic. Only a really powerful magic can damage Jewel. But for earth magic, Jewel didn¡¯t feel anything at all.


    ¡°Probably Steel Rhino has aptitude for earth magic. Next, how about we see if you can use earth magic in that form. After that, let¡¯s see if your hybrid form has improved as well or not,¡± Ka suggested.


    Seems like they will continue testing Jewel¡¯s capabilities for a bit longer. I guess it will take a while until we can finish testing all the magic and Aura items here.

 Chapter 604

    Chapter 604: Spot Asking for a Race


    Finally, we have done checking all the magic items from Timmy¡¯s treasure vaults. I didn¡¯t just receive some amazing weapons. There are also a few armor that Aura users can use. They are much better than Victoriarmor and have special abilities as well. Though I only grabbed one.


    It¡¯s a jet ck armor that covers my entire body. This should be enough for not only my protection, but also for my disguise as the living armor. Though I don¡¯t know if the rumor about the powerful living armor is still known by the cult or not. But it¡¯s still good at least.


    And the effect it has is amazing. Though I won¡¯t use it unless it¡¯s necessary. And that time should be when we finally enter an all-out war against the cult.


    This time will be much different than my past life. I feel good about it. Though I don¡¯t know if it will end up with happy ending or not. At least we have put a lot of effort in reaching the happy ending we want. The destruction of the cult.


    First, I have more allies. And they receive knowledge of the future from me, and knowledge of the past from the ghosts. Even the strongest members of our force in my previous life are iparable to a few of us even if I¡¯m not included.


    As for me, I¡¯m already much more powerful than the me in my past life. There¡¯s no need topare.


    Although Ang was powerful in my past life and gained a reputation for being the strongest force that we have, the Ang in the present is much stronger than that. This is something to be happy about. Though she is not wearing the sexy dress. That is something to be sad about.


    .....


    Many things that happen in my previous life, especially the tragedy, were managed to be prevented. Sometimes I would get involved in them, and other time, I would get other people to be involved in them. After all, the four kings in this continent are now working together to fight the cult. Unlike in my past life when some of them have been taken by the cult, or even killed.


    And the four kings have also prepared a troop of powerful mages to eradicate the cult. Though we still haven¡¯t found a sign of where the Evil God is located.


    But the mboyant Mustache Troop has been created. With Mustache as the leader. At least that¡¯s what Albert said. Though most of the members of the troop doesn¡¯t have mustache. But at least they should be much stronger than the mboyant Mustache Troop in my past life. Even Mustache has reached expert level. And he reached it while still doing his job as Albert¡¯s guard. What a guy he is.


    Still, back then, I didn¡¯t even know that the cult has so many expert level mages. And they even have artificial master level mages as well. If they had sent them out in my past life, after I returned back in time, I don¡¯t think I would have the desire to destroy the cult. I would have picked escaping instead of destoying the cult.


    But now, we have found out that they have so many expert level mages and also artificial master level mages. But We have be much stronger. We have defeated a lot of expert level mages, and I think all of the artificial master level mages have been defeated, killed, or captured so their brainwashing could be erased.


    I think most of the children who were brainwashed have their brainwashing erased already. But they still have their strength, so someone in Varadis will help them to adjust with their strength so they can have a normal life.


    Some of the children have said that they wanted to help us detstroying the cult because the cult has destroyed their lives. Albert has gone there and said that they spoke the truth. But still, we only allow those who are fifteen years old or older to participate. Younger than that, and they will be refused.


    It¡¯s funny that most kingdoms here trained their agents from young age how to kill, but the kings rejected their ideas to help us fight the cult.


    ...Turns out, it¡¯s all my fault. Knowing how I much I hate to involve children in the war, the kings decided to not make enemy out of me first before increasing their power. Though they said that they will at least put those children who are still too young to protect the kingdom. The kings have asked the people they trust to guide those children well.


    Okay, let¡¯s stop talking about the children. I don¡¯t like it, but it¡¯s not like I can do anything about it. I¡¯ll leave it to the others to take care of those children who were forced to be experimented and became artificial master level mages.


    Well, there¡¯s nothing we can do now except to grow stronger and make more preparation. Is what I thought at least. But at the moment, we are doing something that ispletely unrted to that.


    ¡°...Spot, are you sure?¡± I asked Spot who made a suggestion to me.


    ¡°Yes. I will ask you to let me race against Abyss Horse and see who is the fastest one between us,¡± Spot said.


    What she asked me to do is to let him race against Ray. The Abyss Horse that I recently made a contract with to be my familiar.


    Is Spot by chance jealous because someone else is taking his spot as our ride? Though Ray is unable to hold too many people. So, Spot is still better in that.


    ¡°I thought that if I continue as I am and act as your friend, I will be able to be the steed of an Aura user like I wanted to do in the past. I really wanted to grow into an adult so much in the past and became my master¡¯s ride. Unfortunately, my master died too soon before I reached adulthood. And when I met you, an Aura user, I thought it would be fine to let you ride me anytime without having to make a contract with you. But in the end, you made a contract with a better ride. At least I want to race him so I can give up on bing your steed,¡± Spot said.


    What? Making a contract with Ray hit his confidence? I¡¯m sorry about that.


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind you racing though. But no matter what, we need you to continue helping us. Well, you are not a contracted monster, so you are free to leave if you want. But for me, I want you to stay with us until the end even without a contract,¡± I said.


    ¡°Understood. After staying with you, I also have started to feel hatred toward the cult. I will do my best to help you destroy them. But for now, I will focus on my race,¡± Spot said as he looked at Ray. Ray noticed that Spot is talking about him, and he looked back.


    ...Why do I feel that Ray wanted to race as well? After that time he took me into his world, I shouldn¡¯t be able tomunicate with him anymore other than giving him some order.


    I guess Ray is also verypetitive. I like that.


    And so, I prepared the venue for the race. In fact, everyone also helped because they want to see who is the fastest among the two. They seem to enjoy it so much that they even started making a bet.


    Although I like Spot and has been with him for much longer, I put my bet on Ray because he¡¯s my familiar. When I said that to Spot, he clicked his tongue. But I know he understands.


    Though in the end, I¡¯m the one responsible to find the track for the race. One that will be fair for these two.


    One is a hybrid of sea and sky serpent, and another is Abyss Horse. The terrain doesn¡¯t matter since they can fly. But a race in the sky alone would be boring.


    Ray can fly just like how I do it. By running in the air. And spot can fly and swim.


    Ray can also run underwater. He is a good swimmer. I took him to a treasure hunt under the sea with me a few times, and even without using air magic on him, he can still breathe. And I don¡¯t need to use Aura on him to move faster. Though using it will get him to move faster.


    As for Spot...


    ¡°I can move onnd as well. Just like a snake. Though I will be fastest onnd if I slither with my real size. So, if you made a track onnd, I want you to make it to be a ce where I can transform in my full size,¡± Spot said.


    Basically, the two creatures are capable of moving onnd, air, and sea. We truly have amazing monsters with us. I like it.


    After a whole day of moving around with portal, I finally prepared the track. I asked for someone¡¯s help in this.


    The race will start tomorrow morning. And the distance was really long considered that these two creatures have amazing stamina. It will probably be over at night.


    Finally, we will see which one is the best steed. Though each have their own advantages, so I will be happy if either of them win.


    ...I lied. I want Ray to win because I ce my bet on him. I hope he will win.

 Chapter 605

    Chapter 605: The Race Begun


    Finally, today is the day when Spot and Ray will race. It will take a long time since the route is so long. Despite their speed, I can tell that it will take them a while until they can reach the finish line.


    Although the others are interested, they won¡¯t be able to watch the race because these two are the fastest creatures we know. Even if Ang is following them while carrying a camera to broadcast the race, she might not be able to keep up with them. So, we will only set the cameras on Andro¡¯s back for everyone to see who will reach the finish line first.


    ¡°Alright. You two,e here. I will exin the race. I tried to make things as fair as possible and this is what I can do. We have three courses. Land, water, and sky,¡± I exined.


    I made three courses because these two creatures capable of moving in those three ces. Though I¡¯m curious how Ray can breathe underwater. But if he¡¯s confident, I guess it¡¯s fine to make the course go underwater.


    The start of the race is from the Monsters Vige. The other monsters also interested to see who is the fastest. I think some of them, mostly the werewolves, were thinking of running as well at the start of the race. Just topare how fast they are against these two fast monsters.


    From this Monsters Vige, Spot and Ray will move onnd all the way to the east until they reached the beach. The first checkpoint. After that, they will go into the water and dive to the deepest part of the sea. After reaching the checkpoint in the deep sea, they will swim to the surface and fly to the sky. To the finish line in the sky. Andro¡¯s back.


    I have introduced Ray to Andro while I asked for his permission to use his back as the finishing line. He said he¡¯s fine with it.


    .....


    ¡°Unlike the other two checkpoints, the finishing line, Andro, is a living creature. And it¡¯s difficult for him to stay still in one spot in the sky. So, he will keep moving. I asked him to keep moving in one direction. To the east. So, the longer you reached the first two checkpoints, the further the finishing line will be,¡± I said.


    ¡°I see. So,nd first, then the sea, and finally the sky. And if we take too long, the finishing line will go even further. Am I right so far?¡± Spot asked after repeating what I told him.


    ¡°Yes. There might be monsters in the way. I don¡¯t care if you avoid them or fight them. But you two are not allowed to fight each other. Also, in the checkpoints, you will see two gs raised. You need to destroy one g in every checkpoint before progressing with the race. Whichever g it is, you just need to destroy one before continuing the race. If the g is not destroyed, even if you win the race, it will be counted that you lose,¡± I said.


    The gs are obviously Blobbygs. I¡¯m worried about the gs being destroyed by a monster for some reason, so I used my intimidation around the area where I raise the gs so monsters won¡¯te. Or at least they won¡¯t if my intimidation works.


    Well, I will use portal anyway to reach the checkpoints first before these two monsters. If the g is not standing before these two monsters arrive, I will fix them.


    The first course of the race is simple. Just run straight to the beach. But the second one is difficult because I put the gs in the deepest part of the oceanic trench. The water pressure under there is not a joke. And the monsters under the sea, especially in the deepest sea, are much bigger and stronger.


    I once dived into the sea in Monsters World before. Swimming is good to build muscles all around my body after all. And what I saw back then, was a huge sea monster. Around the size of Andro¡¯s head.


    That¡¯s right. Andro is just that big. But I don¡¯t know if Andro is the biggest creature or not. Maybe there¡¯s a monster that disguise itself as an ind. Or maybe even a continent!


    So, this is a difficult race for these two. But I think they will be fine.


    Lastly, they will leave the sea and fly toward Andro¡¯s location. So, after they destroyed the gs in the sea, I will use portal to the surface and wait until they appear to tell them where they need to go.


    Though I need to go into the sea as well for their second checkpoints. Not only I need to go there first before Spot and Ray arrive, I need to endure the water pressure there. Maybe I will be the one who got tired the most.


    ¡°Hmm... using gs as checkpoints. Easy. I understand. But it seems like the one who will get tired the most is you. Not us who will race against each other,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about me. Just race until you reach the finish,¡± I said.


    After testing the magic weapons and Aura weapons all the time, I felt like it has been so long since Ist train myself. This race is a good chance for me to do it. And like I said before, swimming is good to increase the muscle in my whole body. And while enduring the pressure in the deep water, I can increase my endurance as well.


    Actually, I made this three course race with the help of Victoria obviously. It¡¯s based on a sportpetition in her world, triathlon. Apetition where the participants wouldpete in three different types of race. Swimming, cycling, and running.


    Riding bicycle is fun and enjoyable for me. What a wonderful invention from Victoria¡¯s world.


    But since the serpent and the horse are obviously unable to cycle, I made the race changed into three different venue. Cycling turned into flying. Though it¡¯s not like there¡¯s a bicycle in this world. Only I have the experience of riding a bicycle. Or should I say Victoricycle.


    ¡°Alright, Spot, are you ready!?¡± I asked Spot.


    ¡°I¡¯m ready anytime,¡± Spot replied.


    ¡°Ray, are you ready!?¡± this time, I asked Ray.


    ¡°NEIGH!¡±


    I guess he¡¯s also ready.


    ¡°Then, we will start when I give the signal to go.¡±


    Other than these two, I see the werewolves turned into wolves and prepared to join the race as well. Including Shelia and Jack. Some angels also interested, but not Graham. He¡¯s still trying to talk some senses into his sister.


    And unsurprisingly, Ang is here as well. Though she¡¯s only fast when she¡¯s flying. Her Groundwalking, the ability to enter the ground and move into another location, is not developed enough. It¡¯s the ability Timmy uses to move far away with his earth magic. Maybe Ang will be able to use it well after reaching master level.


    Other than the two main participants, the others seem to just want to race until the beach. Well, that¡¯s fine.


    ¡°Ready, GO!¡± I gave the signal to start the race.


    Spot and Ray quickly dashed ahead the others. With Ray in the lead.


    As for the others, it¡¯s Ang in the behind those two, and Shelia behind her.


    ¡°You¡¯re not going?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m going now,¡± I replied.


    Of course I will follow them as well. But once Spot and Ray is outside my Divine Vision range, I will use portal. So, it¡¯s not a race for me.


    But now that I¡¯m an Aura Master, with just a little bit of Aura used, I quickly passed the others and run side by side with Ang who is flying in low altitude.


    ¡°Ang! If you are interested in seeing the winner of the race, I¡¯ll open up a portalter after those two reached the second checkpoint,¡± I said to Ang before passing her.


    Although I¡¯m fast, I can¡¯t keep up with the two monsters. But I can still see them.


    Ray is in the lead, while Spot is quitegging far behind Ray. Land is not where Spot can use his best speed at after all.


    But still, Spot¡¯s speed is much faster than in the past. I guess he has been training for a while. Must be because Ray bes my familiar.


    With his huge size, Spot can still slither forward avoiding trees or anything in the way.


    ¡°Roy! How long is the distance from the start to the beach!?¡±


    While I¡¯m still not far from Ang, she asked me the distance to the beach.


    ¡°With your speed, I guess you can reach there by noon,¡± I replied.


    The race is not normal as the distance between checkpoint is quite far. Even using a normal horse carriage would take a few days at least to reach the beach. Though there are no one normal among those who are running right now.


    Thanks to bing Aura Master, My Divine Vision can see even further than before. So, even though Ray is far in front of me, I can see him. And there¡¯s a group of monsters on the way, but Ray dodged them with just a single leap.


    And then, while trying to chase after Ray, they realized that they can¡¯t reach him. And then Spot appears and became their next target.


    Spot easily dodged them and continue moving forward. He ignored them and only focus on the race.


    Again, the monsters are chasing after Spot. But after a while, they can¡¯t reach him anymore and then I appeared in front of them.


    With just a swing of my hand, and Aura covering my hand like a de, I sliced the monsters in pieces before continuing moving forward without reducing my speed at all.


    Well, so far, thend is Ray¡¯s dominion. Although they are still quite far from the checkpoint, Ray have been increasing the gap between the two. But the race is still far from over.


    Soon, Ray will be out of my sight. I guess I¡¯ll open a portal soon.

 Chapter 606

    Chapter 606: First Checkpoint Reached


    Ah... this is nice.


    Sometimes, it¡¯s nice to just run and feel the wind without caring about other things. I can just enjoy the scenery around me. Though the scenery is moving so fast. Oh, wait. It was me who run so fast.


    For now, thanks to bing Aura Master, I can still see Ray far ahead in front of me. But it won¡¯t be long before he reached outside the range of my Divine Vision.


    Spot is also behind him moving very fast. He can easily dodge the obstacles in front of him. But sometimes, he doesn¡¯t even need to dodge. Even without Divine Vision, I can still tell where he is by looking at the remains of the destruction from the path he took. Even now, I can see a tree is falling down after he hit it.


    But doing it will only make him slow down. The gap between the two is getting wider. But maybe that¡¯s what Spot wants. Because the next two courses, the sea and the sky, is his dominion.


    Spot should be able to pass Ray in the sea. But for the sky, I don¡¯t know. I think the result will be very close. With Ray in the lead. I hope.


    Finally, Ray is out of my sight. But the distance from here to the beach is still quite far, so I¡¯ll use portalter and enjoy my run.


    .....


    Seeing that Ray is no more, I slowed down my pace and now I can see the scenery normally. I slowed down so Ang and the others can catch up.


    It¡¯s kind of funny to see her suddenly entered the ground and then moved ahead quickly again and again. But there¡¯s something different than before.


    The range where she can go with her Groundwalking magic is getting longer and faster each time she entered the ground. That¡¯s what a talent is. Maybe before she reached master level, she can cover at least the whole city with her Groundwalking.


    ¡°Good job getting this far, Ang! It will take a few more hours until you get to the beach. And Shelia is getting closer behind you. Be careful!¡± I said to Ang.


    She didn¡¯t look back at all. Probably because she knows that someone is behind her by using her detection magic. She didn¡¯t even greet me when she passed me by. Well, that¡¯s fine.


    Next, Shelia ising.


    ¡°Nice, Shelia! But be careful, Ang is getting faster and faster!¡± I said to Shelia.


    If it¡¯s her, she should know the distance between her and Ang by the smell. Especially when she¡¯s in her wolf form. She said that her smelling sense is much better in that form than when she¡¯s in her normal human form.


    Again, Shelia passed me by without saying anything. But I don¡¯t care.


    After enjoying the scenery quite a bit, I opened a portal. Not to where the beach is, but to where Ray is. I ced a Blobby on the side of his body, and on Spot¡¯s back as well so I won¡¯t distract them. Because if I opened a portal in front of them, they might end up entering the portal and go back to where they were before. They will hate me for that.


    I increase my pace as I entered the portal. And when I entered it, Ray is quickly ahead of me once again. So fast!


    ¡°Good luck, Ray! Make a huge gap so Spot won¡¯t be able to pass you in the next course!¡± I said to Ray who ignored me and just keep running.


    I¡¯m at my full speed again. Running forward without caring about anything for a few minutes before Spot is about to pass me.


    ¡°Spot! Don¡¯t let Ray make the gap too big! You can still pass him in the sea!¡± I said.


    ¡°Roy, which one do you support? Ray or Spot?¡± Victoria asked me all of a sudden.


    ¡°The one I put my money on. Though it¡¯s interesting to see the race getting intense,¡± I said.


    Maybe Spot heard that because when he passed me, his tail suddenly swung toward me trying to hit me. But because he put all his strength on moving forward, there¡¯s no strength behind that tail swung and I can block it with one hand.


    ¡°Spot, don¡¯t bother with other things! Your pace is slowed down a bit because of that!¡± I said.


    ¡°It¡¯s all because of you though. Are you going to keep using portal like that until you get closer to the beach?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s fun to see the two of them so motivated to win. Spot has never had any rival before. Even Andro was a bit too much for him. But now, because Ray is with us, Spot has be extremely motivated. Just look at how fast he is nowpared to before. I¡¯m d I made a contract with Ray,¡± I said.


    Before this, even though Spot has been growing steadily, his growth wasn¡¯t as much as it is now. It¡¯s all thanks to having a rival that he wants to surpass and he refuses to lose against.


    Just like Ang who wants to keep getting stronger than me. Or Kron who refuses to be weaker than any of us and keep training on his own somewhere. Or Ka who keeps learning more and finds something she¡¯s better at than the others. They all have goals and most likely, all those goals are rted to having someone topete with or want to surpass.


    Though that¡¯s not the case for me. I¡¯m just lesspetitive than other people Maybe because I¡¯m actually older than thembined with my previous life so I¡¯m wiser. Or that there are no Aura user I canpare with since they have all gone. Though at least I have be much stronger than them before they disappeared for real after bing ghosts.


    As for Timmy... I¡¯m still weaker than him unless I am riding Ray. Well, that¡¯s how I fight. I won¡¯t fight alone, so it¡¯s fine. But I still need to get stronger.


    After two hours of running, and using portal repeatedly, the two finally got closer to the first checkpoint. A beach.


    And so, I opened a portal to the beach instead of Ray¡¯s location. And I see some monsters wandering around. Though they are not powerful monsters. I think it must be because I used my intimidation here so most of them have disappeared. But these monsters must be curious about what¡¯s happening here.


    I can see the g is taken of by some fishman. I remember that monster. I was weak back then and it gave me some trouble. Though it is no match for me now.


    Even if the fishman is from this world, which most monsters are stronger and smarter than monsters born in humans world, I can kill them easily.


    ¡°Don¡¯t you disturb the race!¡±


    I easily killed the monsters near the two gs. After that, I fixed the gs back to where they were before and wait for Ray and Spot to pass.


    It was around thirty minutester when I can finally see Ray. It¡¯s just around one hour before high noon. He¡¯s really fast onnd.


    Ray is running without stopping and broke a g in front of him before reaching the shore.


    ¡°If you keep going straight, you should reach the deepest trench. It¡¯s around a hundred kilometers from here. And the depth of that trench was about twenty kilometers deep. No normal creature able to endure the water pressure in that depth. And maybe you need to fight. Good luck!¡± I said to Ray who jumped on the shore and dive into the water. He¡¯s very fast as well underwater. But the sea is Spot¡¯s dominion. I hope the gap won¡¯t be toorge between the two if Spot passed him.


    About half an hourter, Spot finally arrives. He broke the only Blobbyg standing and entered the sea. I also gave him the instruction of where the next checkpoint is. Just like I did to Ray.


    They should be able to reach it. Even if they somehow got pushed by the current underwater, as long as they can reach the trench, they should be able ot reach the g.


    Well, it should take a while until they reached there. But this time, I will go there first. I won¡¯t wait for Ang and the others. They can do anything they want in the beach and I will pick them upter.


    For now, I need to use portal to go there. But the pressure at the checkpoint is too strong and it will destroy everything here. So, I opened a portal in a small ind near the trench. I will dive from there with full speed.


    After I move to the ind, I got Victoria to cover me with Victoriarmor and increase her weight into maximum so I can reach the checkpoint faster.


    With Aura covering my body, I can endure the water pressure. But that¡¯s not the only problem.


    ¡°I guess I¡¯ll kill some monsters on the way there as well. There shouldn¡¯t be anything stronger than Spot or Ray, but I don¡¯t want their race to be disturbed,¡± I said as I kill a shark monster on the way.


    I¡¯d like to see how much gap can Spot cover in the sea. Maybe he has already passed Ray. But that will be difficult.


    I can just open a portal to the checkpoint. But it¡¯s difficult even for me to enter when the water pressure can destroy human¡¯s body. That¡¯s why I can¡¯t follow the two like I did before. Although I am confident I can endure it, there¡¯s no reason for me to waste my stamina like that at the moment.


    Well, but the race doesn¡¯t seem to be less interesting anyway. Let¡¯s see who will reach this checkpoint first.

 Chapter 607

    Chapter 607: The Second Checkpoint


    The depth of the second checkpoint is 20km. If it¡¯s just swimming or running, 20km is not that difficult to reach. It won¡¯t take long for me to arrive.


    But if it¡¯s depth, it¡¯s difficult. Even if I try to just continue diving, there will be monsters blocking the way. And even if Victoria is changing her weight into the maximum weight she can handle, reaching the deepest part is still difficult.


    And even though I have been there before to ce the Blobbygs to use as checkpoints, I still don¡¯t know what kind of danger exist here. Even with my Divine Visionbined with Mind¡¯s Eye, I still can¡¯t see everything.


    It was just yesterday when I put the Blobbygs. When I reached the deepest area and stabbed the Blobbygs, I thought that the ce I stabbed was just some rocks. But it turns out to be a giant crag with shell as hard and simr to rocks. And even the internal organ of the crabs were as hard as rock. I didn¡¯t notice it even with my Divine Vision.


    Fun fact. When cooked, that crab¡¯s meat were still as hard as rock. But they are extremely delicious. Though in the end, only those with srong jaw and teeth like the werewolves, and I who can infuse Aura to my teeth, can eat them. It¡¯s a delicacy only us can taste.


    If I can find it again, that would be great. Even though that crab was huge, the werewolves were able to eat everything in an instant. Next time, I will make sure that I got the most portion.


    It was not hard defeating the crab. Though its camouge was difficult to see even with my Divine Vision and Mind¡¯s Eye. I can only tell its whereabouts when it¡¯s moving after I stabbed the Blobbygs on it.


    .....


    Well, I might be able to find them if I look somewhere. Maybe further into the ocean, there¡¯s a trench deeper than this one. And there will be more monsters like the crab. More delicious monster.


    Anyway, I keep defeating monster after monster while I continue diving into the trench. I think Ray or Spot can handle them. But I don¡¯t want to stay here longer than necessary. That¡¯s why I will clean up more enemies so the two monsters can get there faster.


    Halfway to the checkpoint, I encounter a pod of whales. They are much bigger than most monsters I encountered! Though they are still smaller than Andro. That guy is on his own level.


    Fortunately, those whales don¡¯t seem to have interest in me. I guess it must be because they are not hungry or because I¡¯m not a food for them. I heard that despite their size, they only eat much smaller creatures than themselves. Though they still ate tons of them every day.


    Seeing that they didn¡¯t attack me, I think they are safe and won¡¯t cause trouble to Spot and Ray. So, I let them live as I continue going deeper and fight more monsters.


    I thought that I have defeated most of them yesterday. Turns out, I was wrong. There are still many more of them. And even if I defeat them again, by tomorrow, there will be more of them.


    Compared to this, the sea near Cassau where I often dive for treasure hunting is much safer. And there¡¯s no trench as deep as this. At least there¡¯s none of them anywhere near the ce I dived.


    And if I defeat a lot of monsters, it will take some time until they appear again. More than that, there are lots of sunken ships with a lot of treasures. Unlike this ce. Though the reason is obvious because there¡¯s no humans in this world. Why else would there be treasures under the sea?


    The exceptions are pearls and treasure chests from the dungeon under the sea. Other than them, there is no other way for treasure to exist here.


    Finally, I reached the bottom-most part of the trench. I see two Blobbygs still standing on a reef I stabbed them at. It¡¯s not a crab shell anymore so it¡¯s fine.


    I thought that the water pressure would have destroy the Blobbygs. So, I infused a bit of my Aura into the gs when I raise them. I guess it works.


    But there¡¯s a monster staying here this time. And it¡¯s not a crab.


    ¡°That¡¯s a mantis shrimp! The animal with the fastest and strongest punch. And that¡¯s just when they are small. Since this one is about as big as a human, its punch must be stronger,¡± Victoria said.


    Mantis shrimp? First time I heard of that animal. Though it¡¯a monster in front of me.


    The length of the mantis shrimp is actually longer than human¡¯s height. But the front part which is standing is about the same height as me.


    ¡°Watch out, Roy! The shrimp¡¯s punch is so fast it generates heat even underwater!¡± Victoria said.


    It¡¯s always good to hear some warning from Victoria. Although there¡¯s no monsters in her world, there are some animals that is close to monster I guess.


    A punch underwater which is so fast it could generate heat, huh? If I can do that as well, won¡¯t that make me the strongest?


    ¡°I guess it¡¯s time for another training. Let¡¯s defeat it before Ray and Spot reach here,¡± I said.


    And so, I started a boxing match against the mantis shrimp monster. A punch underwater that can generate heat because it¡¯s too fast? I¡¯m interested in seeing... WHOAH!


    ¡°Whoa, what!? If I don¡¯t have Mind¡¯s Eye, I would have die already! And it¡¯s hot!¡±


    I managed to dodge the surprise attack of the mantis shrimp. In just one punch, bubbles appear and I can feel the heat even though this is the deep sea and there shouldn¡¯t be any underwater volcano here.


    ¡°What a punch! Can I win this?¡±


    Even if I dodge, I would still get hit by the heat. So, I need to cover my whole body with Aura at all time.


    I keep dodging the fastest punches, and return it with several punches of my own. My punches were slower, but the mantis shrimp didn¡¯t dodge. It¡¯s because it has hard shell. Even harder than the rock crab.


    Still, I¡¯m an Aura Master. And after a lot of exchanges, I finally broke through its hard shell and killed the mantis shrimp.


    ¡°Huff... that was hard!¡± Iined.


    ¡°And close as well. There were many times that you were so close to get hit. Being underwater also slowed down your move,¡± Victoria said.


    She¡¯s right. But at least I have witnessed that punch. Until Ray and Spot reach here, let¡¯s try to throw some punches. Though I don¡¯t think I want to copy the same punch power and speed as the mantis shrimp.


    Because unlike the shrimp, if I actually throw a punch like that, I will end up losing my arm instead. That¡¯s just how scary that punch was. The speed of that punch was beyond what a human body can do even if they are Aura users.


    The only reason I can dodge its punches was because of Divine Vision and Mind¡¯s Eye. I can still tell when the mantis shrimp was about to throw its punch and dodged it beforehand. But even so, I still only managed to dodge them by a hairbreadth.


    Even if I can¡¯t copy that punch, I can at least throw improve my punch to the limit of what my body can handle.


    And to be able to do that, I will practice my punch while being underwater. It¡¯s also good way to spend my time while waiting for Spot and Ray.


    Thirty minutes after I started shadow boxing, I can finally see Spot. As expected, he has passed Ray in the sea.


    Spot saw me pointing at where the g is with my left hand while pointing at where Andro is with my right hand. Even though it should be a straight track, there¡¯s a chance that Spot and Ray could forget which direction they should take.


    ¡°I¡¯m going up!¡±


    As soon as he reached the bottom, Spot destroyed a g and raise to the surface following the direction where I¡¯m pointing.


    And while Spot changes his direction to upward, I can see Ray ising. The gap is not as much as the gap in thend when Ray and Spot reached the first checkpoint. But once they are out of the sea, Ray will be faster than he is now. We still can¡¯t tell who will win.


    As soon as Ray destroyed the g and changes his direction, I swim away from there so I can open a portal. If I open a portal while they are still close, they will end up getting sucked into the portal after all.


    After seeing that they are far enough, I returned to the previous ind before I dive,and opened another portal to the beach where Ang, Shelia, and some werewolves are waiting.


    ¡°Are you done with the race?¡± I asked.


    ¡°There are still some werewolvesing. Don¡¯t worry, we can go back on our own,¡± Jack said.


    ¡°Okay. For those who wants to wait for the result of the race between Ray and Spot, you can enter the portal and wait for them on Andro¡¯s back,¡± I said.


    Though in the end, only Ang and Sheliae. Well, that¡¯s fine.


    Finally, the race is reaching its climax. Who will finally win the race?


    ...My heart says it will be Ray.


    ...I lied. It¡¯s not my heart. It¡¯s my wallet.

 Chapter 608

    Chapter 608: And the Fastest Monster is...


    After getting Ang and the others who are also interested to see the winner of the race to Andro¡¯s back, including the kings who wanted to take a break for a while, I jumped off of Andro¡¯s back to see where Spot and Ray is currently. Has Ray passed Spot? Or maybe Spot has gained more distance from Ray? Making the gap bigger.


    I told the others that they can see the end of the race from the screen that was already installed beforehand. I have built a stage on Andro¡¯s back. He said that it¡¯s fine as long as we don¡¯t hurt him. He doesn¡¯t want to feel itchy all the time like before anymore.


    Now that I have seen Andro¡¯s back again, all the wound on his back has been recovered. I guess he¡¯s still a dragon that has powerful regeneration skill. I couldn¡¯t see any remains of his old wounds at all.


    The screens that the others are watching are from several cameras installed all over Andro¡¯s back. Since Andro is flying away from the beach, Ray and Spot would reach Andro¡¯s tail first. And I have installed cameras there, and some other ces on his back where we can see everything. It¡¯s quite far from Andro¡¯s tail to the finishing line. Even tens of Spots lying straight are not enough to cover the distance.


    That¡¯s why from Andro¡¯s tail, until the finishing line, it will be the most intense ce for the race. And everyone want to see that.


    And now, I jumped off from Andro¡¯s back trying to see where they are. Though I changed my mind and used portal right away to the previous empty ind, and run toward where Spot and Ray will possiblying out from the water.


    ¡°Victoria, can you sense the Blobbies you ced on Spot and the one ced on Ray?¡± I asked Victoria about the monsters¡¯ whereabouts.


    .....


    ¡°Yes. I can feel them. Spot is deeper than Ray right now, while he¡¯s already much further ahead than Ray. While Ray is swimming upward trying to get out of the sea as soon as possible,¡± Victoria said.


    I see. So that¡¯s their ns.


    Spot realizes that he¡¯s much faster than Ray in the sea. And his speed is not much different when he¡¯s flying or swimming. So it¡¯s fine for him to dy getting out of the sea as long as he can gain more distance. So, from the second checkpoint, Spot has been swimming diagonally upward.


    As for Ray, he knows that he will be faster when he¡¯s outside. He runs faster in the sky than he is underwater. So, he¡¯s swimming vertically upward so he can get out of the sea sooner and reach Andro faster.


    So, for now, Spot is further ahead. But Ray will get out of the sea sooner.


    ¡°Since Ray wille out first, let¡¯s go greet him and direct him to Andro¡¯s location,¡± I said.


    Using Victoria to detect the Blobby on Ray¡¯s body, we move to where he is supposedlye out from the water.


    I stand on the water while waiting for him, and soon enough, I can see Ray is about toe out. When he get closer, he can finally see me pointing to the sky. To where Andro is.


    ¡°Go, Ray! Spot is ahead of you, but he¡¯s still underwater! Pass him and be the winner!¡± I shouted.


    Aftering out of the water, I can feel a little bit of magic used by Ray. I don¡¯t know if it¡¯s wind element or other element, but he bes faster for a moment. Or maybe it¡¯s just Abyss Horse¡¯s magic which elerate his speed momentarily.


    From what Ray told me back when he grabbed me into his world, Ray can only use elemental magic when someone is riding or touching his body. Since no one is riding him, I guess it¡¯s Abyss Horse¡¯s skill or magic. Just like vampires¡¯ using blood to fight or werewolves¡¯ regeneration skill.


    Because when I rode him I use Aura, all his speed and power improved by Aura and he doesn¡¯t need to use that skill. But since he¡¯s on his own, he used that skill to boost his speed.


    The winner is still unknown. Next, let¡¯s wait for Spot toe out of the water.


    I used all my speed and Aura to get there before Spotes out, but it¡¯s difficult to do so. I can only reach there because there are some other inds nearby where I have installed some Blobbies beforehand.


    When I get there, Spot was about toe out as well. So, unlike that time with Ray, I keep running this time so I can direct Spot to where he needs to go because he won¡¯t slow down.


    ¡°Spot, you¡¯re going the right way! Andro is big so you can adjust the directionter when he¡¯s in sight! Ray chooses to fly higher first before moving forward. There¡¯s a chance that he will pass you byter, but for now, you are still gaining more distance!¡± I shouted.


    Ray was running up the sky first before going to the direction of where Andro is. That¡¯s also why I can reach Spot before Ray pass me by.


    Now, the race is reaching its climax. Will Spot who keeps flying diagonally aftering out of the water reach Andro first, or Ray will get there first after flying high?


    Let¡¯s check on Ray again.


    I opened a portal to where he is right in time for him to change direction. He¡¯s running forward without ascending or descending from the current altitude.


    Maybe it¡¯s because he¡¯s a horse. He¡¯s the best when he¡¯s running on tnd without having to go up or down. Well, I don¡¯t know. I didn¡¯t ask Ray about this back then.


    Although Ray can just move diagonally up just like Spot is doing, he didn¡¯t do so. I don¡¯t know why, but I¡¯ll just assume my thinking is correct that he can run faster when he¡¯s not ascending or descending.


    But now that he¡¯s running forward, he is extremely fast. I guess I¡¯ll just wait on Andro¡¯s tail to see who wille first.


    I opened a portal to where the others are waiting for who will be the winner, and told them about the situation. Spot is still in the lead, but Ray still has a chance to pass him.


    After that, I run toward Andro¡¯s tail and wait for the two there.


    ¡°Oh, Andro didn¡¯t move his tail at all when he¡¯s flying. Though just like his other limbs, his tail is much shorter inparison with his body. Andro is a short-limbed dragon,¡± I said.


    ¡°He¡¯s a Kaiser Dragon. Not short-limbed dragon. That¡¯s ame name,¡± Victoria said.


    I passed the time by chatting with Victoria. And around three hourster, I can finally see Spot and Ray. Spot is still ahead, but Ray is just slightly behind Spot¡¯s tail. Well, Spot is very long, so the gap is actually quite long. But with Ray¡¯s speed, he can close the gap quickly. Still Spot didn¡¯t let him do that.


    In the air, Spot, while moving forward, is shaking his tail to obstruct Ray. I told them to not fight, so I guess this is still within the rule. It¡¯s just obstructing Ray from passing him. Not attacking Ray at all.


    Then, Spot quickly passed me. He¡¯s still flying toward the finishing line.


    As for Ray, hended on Andro¡¯s tail and continue running. But he didn¡¯t step on the air this time. And that makes him faster.


    I just told them that the finishing line is on Andro¡¯s back. I didn¡¯t say that he¡¯s not allowed to run on his back and he has to fly. This is also still within the rule.


    I then opened a portal to the finishing line, and wait for the two there with the others.


    While the others are looking at the two on the screen, I can see them with my Divine Vision when they got closer. And they are currently next to each other. They are using their full speed.


    Finally, Ray is slightly ahead of Spot And he boosted his speed once again so he gain more distance from Spot.


    And in the end, it was Ray who finished the race first. He crossed the line just a tenth of a second before Spot did as Spot also somehow elerated. But he is just a tad bitter when he boosted his speed than Ray. So, he lost.


    ¡°The winner is Ray! The difference is so thin that if it was not me who is the judge, no one can tell who is the winner,¡± I said confidently.


    ¡°Hey, you¡¯re the judge but why are you the one being proud?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°Because I have the chance to be proud!¡±


    I looked at the two monsters. I thought that Spot will be depressed after his lost. But it seems that Spot is getting along with Ray instead as he chatted with him about how exciting the race was. Though it was just Spot talking and Ray neighing.


    In any case, the two epted who is the faster one. Ray is the winner, but we all know how stable Spot is in all terrain. Except thend, but he can just fly on low altitude next time.


    And Spot is better in that he can transport many people at once. Well, Ray will just continue being my ride. Though I will let other people ride on him depend on the situation.


    At least I¡¯m d that it ended in such friendly manner between the two. Though I heard that Spot is going to challenge Ray again, but next time, they will just race without asking for my permission. They don¡¯t want to make it such a huge event like this one.


    Well, that¡¯s fine. As I said before, rivalry is good for Spot. Maybe for Ray as well. I hope these two can grow stronger together.

 Chapter 609

    Chapter 609: What To Do Next


    ¡°So, does anyone knows what happened with the cult? Is there any ce that have been attacked or is still under suspicions? Any new reports?¡±


    ¡°Not yet. But there are still many ces we are currently investigating.¡±


    ¡°Same with Consenza. The cult hasn¡¯t make any movement so far.¡±


    ¡°Varadis is also still at peace at the moment. Though I have finally prepared three candidates who will seed my throne.¡±


    ¡°Three? Well, at least that¡¯s better than nothing. I hope you can find a good sessor for the future of Varadis Kingdom.¡±


    At the moment, the four kings are having a meeting and talk about anything suspicious around them. But there are none and the world is seem to be at peace at the moment.


    But we know that it¡¯s just momentary peace because the cult is still exist. Until we can destroy everything rted to the cult, peace will nevere.


    .....


    All the kingdoms in this continent has been attacked by the cult. Though in this discussion, I was a bit confused since these four are talking about other kingdoms that actually exist in this continent other than Tatrama, Consenza, Varadis, and Arturo.


    They are smaller kingdom inparison to any of the big four. I¡¯m curious why none of these four kings wanted to conquer any of those small kingdoms. But I guess that¡¯s fine. They know politics more than I do. If they think that it¡¯s better for those smaller kingdoms to be independent, there must be some difficult things that they are considering.


    If I ask, they will probably answer it honestly. But I will end up getting too tired from listening to politics. If only it was something about getting stronger, making allies, foods, or anything rted to medical knowledge, I won¡¯t get bored.


    Still, it was very annoying to have a meeting. Or more like it was annoying how I have no choice but to participate in a meeting. I have to stay here listening to everyone¡¯s report and not doing anything.


    They won¡¯t serve a meal during meeting, and won¡¯t let me do some training while waiting because they can distract the kings from the meeting. At least until it¡¯s over.


    And it was weird seeing how they were shouting Spot or Ray¡¯s namest night to watch who will be the winner. Then they suddenly changed into serious mood for today¡¯s meeting.


    Of course they are supporting the one they ced their bet on. And the result was Albert and Lynn¡¯s happiness because Ray won, and Fabio and old man Henry¡¯s depression because they bet quite a lot of money on Spot. At least those moneye from their own pocket and not the money for the kingdom.


    And after their momentary happiness or sadness, they return quickly to serious mood as they talk about everything they find out about the cult. Though we didn¡¯t find anything at all, they are still serious talking about it.


    ¡°Roy, what do you think? Where do you think the cult will attack next?¡± Albert asked me.


    ¡°Well, somewhere we expected the least. It could even happen in the capital. And next time, they should be really send their strongest members. Maybe even some master level mages if they have some to spare. I don¡¯t know how much they know about the existence of an Aura user. But they must have prepared a lot to fight against me in some way,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. It will be bad if the enemy prepares their strongest members to fight you alone,¡± Lynn said.


    ¡°No. It could be our advantage as well. If the cult is preparing their most to fight against me, you can just take care of everything else. They will be much weaker in other areas since they will be focused on me. Even if they bring several master level mages at once, I can handle them on my own. And even if I can¡¯t, I can just summon Shelia, Graham, or Ray, or even ask Ang, Ka, or the others in my n to help me. You just need to focus on your own troop,¡± I suggested.


    ¡°I see! While you¡¯re fighting the main force of the cult, we can clear the rest. That¡¯s a good n!¡± Lynn said excitedly. But the others are still acting normal and just smile seeing her reaction. It means that among the four kings, only Lynn doesn¡¯t think of that n.


    Though I was rather surprised that Fabio expected it. I guess that¡¯s to be expected when he has someone amazing as his assistant. Or rather, I hope his assistant, Toni, won¡¯t overwork himself.


    When I asked Fabio about that, he replied by saying that Toni had a lot of vacation actually. After Arturo has been recovered by Fabio and Harold, and they have taken care of the most important matter in their kingdom, Toni took a long vacation while I was training with the ancient Aura users. And he just finished his vacation recently, returning with a lot of ideas. And one of his ideas is actually what I proposed. Making the enemy main force focus on me while the others will fight the rest.


    Well, I think it¡¯s fine if it¡¯s Lynn. Because she has udia with her. Althoughpared to Toni her achievement is not that big, she is smart and still a big help for Consenza.


    ¡°The only thing we can do now is just wait and see it seems. We have no choice but to keep on being defensive because we don¡¯t know when and where the cult will attack,¡± old man Henry said.


    ¡°About that. I¡¯m thinking of traveling around the continent and see if I can find something. And while I¡¯m traveling, I will once in a while show myself wearing full armor to solve simple cases like bandits or monsters subjugation without taking quests from the guild. If the rumor about a living armor saving people is spread all over the ce, the cult will make a move if they know about Aura user. They will think that the living armor is an Aura user and they will make their move soon,¡± I said.


    Actually, instead of traveling to look for the cult, I just wanted to travel around the continent and have some rxing trip. I¡¯ll just open a portal somewhere and bring everyone with me for the vacation. That¡¯s my real goal.


    ¡°So you want to make the cult more aware of you, huh? I think that¡¯s a good n. And while you¡¯re traveling, you can also investigate the cult by yourself. We just need to keep exchanging reports until we find clues of where the Evil God is located. Once we do, we will use everything we have to kill him and then destroy all the remaining members of the cult so the cult will cease to exist,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Okay. But how will you travel all over the continent? Are you going to pretend that you¡¯re a hunter?¡± Fabio asked.


    ¡°Huh? Did you forget already? I am a circus clown. I can travel with Thomas¡¯ circus troupe. During my training with the ancient Aura users, the circus troupe took a break at the same time, right? And it¡¯s about time that the circus to perform again. And why not a tour around the continent? I¡¯ll talk to Thomas about this. You just need to give permission for the circus to perform in your kingdom,¡± I said.


    I haven¡¯t forgotten that I¡¯m a circus clown. The legendary rence the Clown.


    It has been a while since Ist performed. But now, I have grown stronger and faster. There are more tricks I can do.


    ¡°...Being a circus clown is fine. As long as you won¡¯t forget about your goal to destroy the cult,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°I won¡¯t forget. I will travel as a clown with destroying the cult as my main objective, so I can fully be a clown in the future,¡± I said.


    ¡°A clown? Not a doctor?¡± old man Henry asked.


    ¡°Doctor Clown! I have given all my medical knowledge to Sophie and other doctors. Not just knowledge from the future, but also knowledge from the past that I learned from the ancient Aura users. I don¡¯t need to be a doctor anymore. But if there¡¯s a surgery that no other doctors can do because of the difficulty, I will do it,¡± I said.


    As an Aura Master, the movement of my finger has be much faster and much more precise. Even the surgery that I couldn¡¯t perform in the past because I¡¯m just a single doctor in a vige without any help from other doctors, I can do it now alone. And the surviving chance of the patient is also much higher if I¡¯m the one performing the surgery. But I don¡¯t want to continue being a doctor. I have enjoyed being a clown much more than being a doctor.


    ...Well, it¡¯s mainly because of some annoying patients who wouldin and deny the result of my diagnosis. I have experienced a lot of that in my past life even though I¡¯m just a doctor in a small clinic in a countryside.


    I feel like if I have to experience that again now that I have be stronger, I will end up killing the patients instead of healing them. That¡¯s a big no for a doctor.


    That¡¯s why being a clown is the best. Though if there¡¯s a difficult surgery that only I can perform, I will probably do it depend on the situation.


    Soon after, the meeting is over and I return the kings back to their own country. And I talked to Thomas about a tour. He was happy that I will join the tour and he will prepare everything for the tour.


    Well, I don¡¯t need it though. Even if I forgot to bring something, I can just open a portal and ¡°POOF!¡± I have it.


    This time, I will join the tour from start to finish. Hopefully.

 Chapter 610

    Chapter 610: The Circus Tour n is Finalized


    ¡°So, you¡¯re going to travel with the circus?¡±


    As soon as I get home, Candy asked me about the meeting. And I told her and everyone at home that I will be joining on the tour with Thomas and the other circus performers.


    ¡°I am. Although I¡¯m still trying to grow stronger, I also can¡¯t wait for Albert or the others to find the Evil God. I can still continue my training since I can just use portal to Thomas¡¯ location when he stopped by somewhere. With the four kings¡¯ permission, we can go to almost anywhere in this continent. Though there are still other small kingdoms in this continent and Thomas is seeking for permission to enter there,¡± I said.


    ¡°Oh, there are more than four kingdoms here?¡± Ang asked.


    Well, that¡¯s to be expected. I guess she never listen to anything at school. Though it has been so long since we finished school.


    There are only smaller kingdoms around the continent. Only the four kingdoms are the kingdoms we know. Three kingdoms and one empire I mean. These four are the biggest in this continent.


    Albert and the others are also trying their best to convince the leader of those small kingdoms for cooperation. After all, if the cult is hiding from the big countries, there¡¯s a high chance that they will hide in those small kingdoms.


    .....


    I also asked Veronica and Celestine about the small kingdoms. Celestine said that she went to a small kingdom when she was just be the leader of a faction back when she was with the cult. And Veronica went to another small kingdom as well. Which mean the cult also has some influence with those small kingdoms.


    Though whether they have taken over those small kingdoms or not is something we don¡¯t know yet. The kings¡¯ agents were trying to investigate, but it¡¯s difficult for them to find out about it.


    After all, the easiest way to know if they are with the cult or not is by the explosive devices in the mouth of the weaker members of the cult. Other than that, it¡¯s difficult to tell.


    Still, the only one who can easily do that is me because I have Divine Vision. No one else can do that. Which makes things harder for everyone to find where the cult is hiding.


    That¡¯s why I decided to do a tour with the circus. Traveling all over the continent and find where the leader of the cult is hiding. And this is also a good chance to spread more Blobbies to other location.


    This way, even if the cult knows that we canmunicate long-distance, they won¡¯t expect us to stop them early because we have a way to travel long distance in an instant. Using my portal.


    If it¡¯s a location where there¡¯s no Blobbies I can transport to, we can ride on Spot¡¯s back. Or maybe just me and Ray on our own, and open up a portal for the others toe.


    ¡°When will you go?¡± Ka asked me.


    ¡°Thomas will inform me when he and the other performers are ready. Since the other performers are mostly agents from the four kingdoms, they will probably receive some instructions by their king beforehand. That¡¯s why Sonia is too busy at the moment,¡± I said.


    A circus where all the performers are agents from four different kingdoms. At first, I didn¡¯t have any expectation on them since they are agents and not trained performers. But I guess their acting skills are so high that they became so good in their performance just after training a few months.


    And it¡¯s good that most of them now wanted to stay as circus performers instead of being agents. Though I think even if the cult has been destroyed in the future, the kings will still ask them to do something even if they focused their career on performing in the circus.


    Well, whatever the kingdoms want to do with them is not my problem. But since they will be myrade in circus, if the kings wanted to force them to do something they don¡¯t want to do, the kings will end up making me their enemy. They know that and they don¡¯t want that.


    ...I feel like I will be a tool for peace once the fight against the cult is over. Once I¡¯m gone, I don¡¯t know what will happen with the four kingdoms. But I don¡¯t think there will be anything bad happening while these four people still the leaders of their own country. Though old man Henry will retire soon.


    After I finished talking with the others, I returned to my room and get ready for the tour. Though I don¡¯t know what else to prepare. I can grab anything with my portal.


    Though the things I carried on my body increased. They are magic items or Aura items that have been tested and have good effects like the kunai and the walking cane.


    And there¡¯s also one item which is different than the others. It¡¯s a consumable item so we can¡¯t test it since we only have one. And if the effect is as Jeremy said after being appraised, this could be my secret weapon against the Evil God. Though I hope I will never use it.


    And so, I waited until everything is ready. I just trained normally, and do everything as usual.


    Finally, two weekster, everything is ready. And the circus will start a long tour around the continent.


    Since the circus will travel normally, it will take a long time to go around the continent. So we have no real schedule to when we will start performing in which city or which country. Just when we¡¯re there, we will perform for a week in that city before moving again.


    The duration of the tour is expected to be at least one year. Probably even two years or longer. But since we don¡¯t have anything to do other than looking for the cult, it¡¯s fine to waste time doing some shows.


    At least one year of travel, and about one week of performing in the city. It could be less than one week as well depend on whether we can get permission to perform by the lord of the city as well. So, I need a lot of tricks to perform. Whatever that can make the audienceugh.


    And tonight is the start of our tour. Obviously, we start from Cassau.


    It¡¯s the first night of our show in Cassau, and we have a week to let the people enjoy the show. But after discussing it a bit more with Thomas, we reduced it to just three nights at most in every city for the shows. The other four days is for preparation, rest, and investigation. Though we don¡¯t need to investigate things in Cassau, we will still only hold the show at most three days a week.


    And this first night, there are no civilians here. The audiences are the kings of the four kingdoms, their family members, and other agents!


    ¡°...Turns out we have powerful people just on the first night. I¡¯m feeling nervous,¡± Thomas said.


    Not just Thomas. The other performers were nervous as well knowing that their kings are watching them. And I also bring the family members of the performers as well to watch. Most of them are civilians so they are frozen to see that they will watch the performance together with the kings.


    ¡°...But why is the kings of the four kingdoms are sitting on the back?¡± One of the performers asked. He is someone from Arturo. Someone new since Arturo has just been recovered from the cult. And since there were no agents from Arturo in the circus, Toni sent this man to join. He¡¯s the only one from Arturo and he¡¯s already getting along with the others members of the circus.


    Since he has gained Toni¡¯s approval, I think we can trust him.


    ¡°Obviously because my guests are more important than the kings,¡± I replied to the man.


    ¡°...I heard about you from Prime Minister Toni and King Fabio. But I only realized it now that they are saying the truth when they said that you have no respect to the kings,¡± the man said.


    ¡°I have respect to them. If not, I won¡¯t let theme here,¡± I said.


    ¡°...At least the kings are not unhappy. Is it true that you are too strong that the kings are afraid of you?¡± he asked.


    ¡°Did someone tell you that? Well, that¡¯s true. Anyway, it¡¯s time for the show to start. Just focus on not making mistakes. Though since I¡¯m the greatest clown in the world, even if you did some mistakes, I can clean it up easily in a way that makes the audienceugh. Break a leg. If you can¡¯t do it, I can do it for you. Literally,¡± I said to give the man confidence.


    ¡°I don¡¯t want you to break my leg for real so I will do my best to not disappoint you. Wish me luck, rence!¡±


    The man said that before he gets ready for his performance.


    Now, let¡¯s entertain my friends and the kings. Though I don¡¯t care if the kings are not entertained.

 Chapter 611

    Chapter 611: Spy From Another Kingdom


    ¡°Amazing performance like usual, Roy. The others also did well. Will you guys leave tomorrow?¡±


    After the final day of our show in Cassau, Albert and the kings greeted us and asked if we will leave tomorrow.


    ¡°No, your majesty. We will remove the tent and grab some supplies first before we leave. Even though Roy has the ability to transport us with portal, we won¡¯t use them unless it¡¯s necessary. We will also travel normally using several horse carriages,¡± Thomas replied to Albert¡¯s question.


    I also didn¡¯t suggest to Thomas that we should use my portal. But Thomas already understood it. We will probably enter the den of the cult without knowing. And that¡¯s why we won¡¯t recklessly use portal.


    What if the city we entered has been taken over by the cult? If we want to escape, we need to utilize my portal. That¡¯s the second option.


    The first option? Kill all the cult members so our lives will be safe. If I kill everyone, there¡¯s nothing that we need to be wary of.


    But that can only happen if I can easily differentiate between normal civilians and cult members. If not, it will be the second option.


    .....


    ¡°We will leave as soon as possible. Rather than that, do you really have time toe and watch us every night we y in Cassau?¡± I asked Albert and the other kings.


    After the first night they watched the circus, these four along with some members of their family woulde and fill the same seats. Just how much do they love circus? Or is it me? It¡¯s because they love me so much?


    Well, can¡¯t be helped. rence the Clown is lovely after all. I never fail to make anyone unhappy. There¡¯s no one who left the tent while feeling sad. Even if they do, it¡¯s because the show is over. Not because the show is bad.


    ¡°There¡¯s no problem with that, right? After all, we still pay for the tickets,¡± Lynn said.


    ¡°I mean aren¡¯t you guys busy? Toni, what about you? I thought if someone is working, you should be the one working the hardest,¡± I asked Toni who never fail to show up as well.


    ¡°Everything has been stabilized in Arturo. The most important matter has already been taken care of and I can take a rest every night without having to overwork myself. Since there¡¯s a chance of rxing here, I will of coursee here whenever it¡¯s possible. More importantly, did you notice it?¡±


    All of a sudden, Toni asked me in a serious tone. Hearing the change of the atmosphere around him, the other kings suddenly became wary.


    ¡°The girl sitting in that seat over there? Of course I noticed her. It was annoying to see someoneing here and doesn¡¯t want to enjoy the performance. Since she¡¯s here probably on a mission, I didn¡¯t even try to entertain her even though my goal is to make my audiences happy. She is not an audience,¡± I said.


    ¡°What? A member of the cult is here!?¡± Fabio asked.


    ¡°We don¡¯t know that yet. She¡¯s the only suspicious person in the tent, so I had Victoria to stick onto her shoe and follow her. She will contact me through Sonia if needed,¡± I said.


    During the show, there¡¯s a girl who have no interest at all in the performance. A girling to a circus on her own, usuallye because she loves circus. But the fact that she didn¡¯t enjoy the performance meant that she¡±s here for another reason.


    ¡°I have been working for a long time while being surrounded by people who were watching my every move. That¡¯s why I noticed it when someone is watching me. Though I didn¡¯t do anything since Roy here will most likely do something about her. And it¡¯s also the main reason he suggested to do a tour after all,¡± Toni said.


    ...I¡¯ll keep it as secret. The fact that the main reason I suggested the tour was because I want to be a clown and it¡¯s for my own enjoyment is not something I can tell anyone after all.


    But for him to keep being so rxed even though he was being watched, he must have a lot of experience. He was staying in the most dangerous ce for him for so long after all.


    ¡°Then, if she¡¯s with the cult, that means somehow the cult has started entering Cassau again, huh? What a pain,¡± Albert sighed.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think that¡¯s the case. She seems to be writing a letter right now and is about to send it via messenger bird. Should I grab the bird?¡± I asked.


    The female spy in question is releasing a bird and the bird is about to fly. With my speed, it¡¯s easy to grab that bird.


    ¡°Hmm... no need. What¡¯s the content of the letter?¡± Albert asked.


    The other kings were also curious about the identity of the girl.


    ¡°What else? The four kings who were supposed to be in their own respective kingdom were gathered here. She¡¯s someone who knows about your appearances. Do I need to spell it out?¡± I said.


    ¡°Probably she¡¯s a spy from another country. And she must be writing about how there¡¯s a way to transport people to another location quickly. Am I right?¡± old man Henry asked.


    ¡°You¡¯re right, old man. I don¡¯t think she¡¯s from the cult. But I don¡¯t know about the one she¡¯s working for. And the funny thing is, Victoria created a clone of herself. The Blobby is so small and almost weightless. Victoria attached it to the bird. Which means that once the bird arrives to its destination, I can use portal to go there. What should I do now?¡± I asked.


    If it¡¯s a king of a small kingdom, we might be able to ask him for cooperation. But that won¡¯t be the case if that person behind that girl is with the cult. I¡¯ll just kill him if that¡¯s the case.


    Now the question is, should we intercept the bird and stop the letter from arriving, or should we let it be. I want it to be thetter. It will be hrious if the one reading it, right after reading the part where he read about the possibility of quick long distance travel, I suddenly appear. Then he will know that the guess of the spy about the mean of transportation is correct. And the one behind her will have no choice but to work with us because he won¡¯t be able to deny that he¡¯s sending a spy here.


    ¡°That seems to be a good idea. If he¡¯s not rted to the cult, he won¡¯t be able to refuse working together with us. And if he¡¯s with the cult, Roy won¡¯t give him mercy and will kill him. Creating chaos in their kingdom as the king suddenly assassinated. But which country is it?¡± Toni asked me.


    ¡°There¡¯s this symbol in the paper inside the letter,¡± I said as I transformed a Blobby into a shape of a cloud and sun. It¡¯s the symbol that is drawn on the paper.


    ¡°Oh, I remember that. I think it¡¯s a kingdom near my territory. Though I don¡¯t remember the name of the kingdom. I¡¯ll ask dia when I return,¡± Lynn said as she grabbed the Blobby. She will give it to udia to investigate further.


    ¡°And what about the spy?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Just grab her and bring her to me. I¡¯ll take care of the interrogation,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Okay. I¡¯ll return you home now. Then I will go and grab the spy. Will youe again for the next show in the next city?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Will you prepare a new performance?¡± Fabio asked.


    ¡°Thinking of a new performance is difficult. Probably the routine will be the same as usual,¡± I replied.


    ¡°Then if you don¡¯t have any new performance, no need to invite us. We¡¯ll return home now. See youter!¡± Fabio said as he left with Toni, Luna, Carmen, Bernard, and Harold to Arturo.


    The other kings also left. But there¡¯s one thing I have to correct.


    I never invited them toe to see the performance. They¡¯re the one who said to bring them to watch the performance no matter what.


    Well, I guess I don¡¯t need to call them anymore unless it¡¯s important.


    Using telepathy with my familiar, I told Victoria to grab the spy and wait for me. Since I can still see them with my Divine Vision, I don¡¯t need to use portal.


    ¡°Thomas, I¡¯ll be leaving now. Contact me when you¡¯re ready to move,¡± I said.


    ¡°Roy, wait!¡± Thomas then stopped me.


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡±


    ¡°You can¡¯t arrest someone while still wearing the clown costumes. Go get changed first,¡± Thomas reminded me that I still haven¡¯t taken off the clown costume yet.


    I forgot. If the enemy somehow know that the clown of the circus is working with the four kingdoms, it will be bad for our n. Good thing Thomas reminded me.


    I hope I won¡¯t forget about it in the future. I enjoyed my time as a clown so much that I didn¡¯t even care that I would go out in clown costume.


    Taking the costume off and changed to my normal outfit didn¡¯t take ten seconds. Though it was removing the make up that takes longer.


    And after I was ready, I grabbed the spy and brought her to Albert¡¯s location. And we will just wait until the messenger bird stopped at its destination.

 Chapter 612

    Chapter 612: Yadan Kingdom


    The spy has been captured. And now, I¡¯ll wait for Albert¡¯s report and wait until the messenger bird arrive to its destination. The small kingdom near Lynn¡¯s territory. Whether the king of that country want to cooperate with us or he¡¯s already under the influence of the cult, I guess we¡¯ll see itter.


    By the way, I have something to be depressed about. It¡¯s the fact that the children have grown and none of them are sad that I¡¯m leaving them. They even said that it¡¯s fine for me to leave for years.


    I feel happy that they have grown, but I feel sad that they have grown so much. I wonder if this is how a parent feel watching their children grow. A good parent. Not a parent that abandon their children like how they abandon these children I¡¯m taking care of.


    Heck, I don¡¯t need to go as far as thinking about the children. Even my own parents disappeared. Well, I don¡¯t care about them though. I don¡¯t even remember them anymore.


    Finally, when the troupe was about to left to the next city, the messenger bird stopped. Victoria felt that and informed me.


    ¡°Roy, the bird has stopped,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Okay. I¡¯ll go get Albert and Lynn. Only those two wille. Probably udia and Mustache wille as well,¡± I said.


    .....


    The other kings, old man Henry and Fabio, told me that they will leave everything to Albert and Lynn. They are busy with the matter of their own country.


    ...They shouldn¡¯t have visited the circus then if that¡¯s really the case.


    Anyway, they picked Lynn because the ce where we thought the bird is going to was near Lynn¡¯s territory. And that is correct. The direction the bird was flying to was indeed to Lynn¡¯s territory. And Victoria also felt that the bird has stopped near there as well.


    As for Albert, it was not only because he has the lie detection ability. It was also because when the four kingdoms decided to cooperate to fight against the cult, it was him who suggested it. He has experience in getting other people to join him. And talking to another king is easy for him.


    I can just bring Ang with me to show the one reading the letter that we have the strongest mage in our rank. But rather than having her do something like that, I prefer her to continue her training. She¡¯s cultivating at the moment and I don¡¯t want to disturb her. She has been cultivating since yesterday. I hope she will be a master level mage soon.


    I opened a portal to where Albert is, about to grab Albert and Mustache. But I see another person I need to bring as well. The female spy I caught.


    ¡°We¡¯re taking her?¡± I asked.


    ¡°She¡¯s the evidence that their kingdom is spying on us. We¡¯ll see what they will doter,¡± Albert said.


    The spy wasn¡¯t even being tied. She is free to move. I guess the only reason she wasn¡¯t trying to escape was because she knows it¡¯s futile with Mustache here. She knows that her strength is nowhere near Mustache¡¯s who has reached expert level.


    But she¡¯s more wary of me when I appeared. I guess she never expected me to suddenly appear and captured her right away. Must be a shocking experience.


    I brought those three to Consenza and have a small chat with Lynn and udia before we left to our destination.


    ¡°Is it just us?¡± Lynn asked.


    ¡°Yes. If somehow that kingdom is rted to the cult, they will treat us as enemy. It¡¯s easier for me to protect fewer people,¡± I said.


    ¡°You think our Yadan Kingdom is with the cult? No! Even though we are just a small kingdom, we know a lot about what¡¯s going on in other countries. Our defense is enough to stop the cult from infiltrating us!¡± the spyined.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think that¡¯s the case. Look at this guy. Even the one whom he trusted to protect him from the shadow is rted to the cult. We don¡¯t know if your kingdom is rted to the cult or not. And we will find out about it soon,¡± I said as I point my finger to Albert.


    If not for me, Albert would never know that his life at risk at all time. And worse of all, that guy who was also Candy¡¯s teacher also had a huge crush on Marie.


    The spy was shocked that someone unexpected is actually members of the cult. But if she knows about what happened in Varadis and Arturo, she will be even more shocked.


    ¡°...if a kingdom as big as Tatrama could easily be infiltrated, then...¡± the spy hang her head down imagining of the worst situation.


    ¡°That¡¯s what we¡¯re about to find out. Roy, let¡¯s go,¡± Albert said.


    I nodded and opened a portal to the Blobby that Victoria ced on the letter. The one reading it didn¡¯t even sense that we¡¯reing.


    ¡°Hufu... a transportation mean that allow them to travel long distance quickly? Interesting...¡±


    We¡¯re right in front of that person who is wearing a crown above his head. I guess he¡¯s the king of this kingdom. What was it called again? Yadan Kingdom?


    Alright. First impression is important. I need to make sure that he has good impression of us at least.


    ¡°Tada!¡±


    And whates out of my mouth is that obviously.


    The one reading that letter then looked up and saw us in front of him. With the empress of Consenza and the king of Tatrama behind me.


    ¡°What!? Guards! Arrest them!¡± the king shouted.


    King? More like... a pig? He¡¯s fat and has terrible smell. Even more since I¡¯m an Aura Master. Howe someone smell this bad from his sweat?


    ¡°Arrest us? You didn¡¯t even notice who we are?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°Who cares!? Arrest them all!¡± the pig king said.


    Now that I look carefully, I think we¡¯re in the king¡¯s bedroom. But there are guards here. All of them are women who looked at their own king with disgust.


    Seriously? Howe someone like this is a king? Maybe he has something very king-ly about that I don¡¯t know. But I doubt that¡¯s the case.


    I don¡¯t need to do anything to the guards because they are only advanced level mages at most. Some of them were even just intermediate level. Seems like the king only hire guards by their appearance since all of them are beautiful women. And Mustache took care of everyone easily. Even more when those guards are fighting us reluctantly.


    More importantly, howe they can stand being next this pig king for so long? If it was me, I would have killed this pig king already.


    Hmm? I see a group of mening here. Seems like not everyone here is women. But those men are suspicious.


    ...As expected. Those me have explosive devices inside their mouth. This kingdom has fallen to the cult without them knowing if that¡¯s the case.


    ¡°Your majesty! Are you okay!?¡± one of the men shouted as they enter the room.


    ¡°Arrest these people! Take the men to the dungeon and train the women!¡±


    ...is that what a king should say?


    ¡°...I think that¡¯s it. I don¡¯t need his cooperation. Let¡¯s just conquer this kingdom,¡± Lynn said in which udia happily obliged.


    ¡°Do you need an army or not? I asked because I can take care of everything by myself,¡± I asked.


    ¡°We¡¯ll do it by ourselves. We have prepared a troops around this kingdom. Taking over this kingdom won¡¯t even take a day,¡± udia said before she called Sonia to inform her troop.


    Seems like they are ready to take over this kingdom. But they took the long way.


    ¡°You know, we can just kill this pig king and im the kingdom as yours right away. Wait, I will kill those men first because they are annoying,¡± I said.


    Albert and Lynn were discussing something as Mustache and I killed the men.


    ¡°Do we just kill all the men?¡± Mustache asked.


    ¡°You can kill all the men in this castle except for the pig king. There are actually some women who have explosive devices as well. Since I¡¯m the only one who can tell the differences between those who are member of the cult and those who are not, I¡¯ll take that job,¡± I said.


    I never thought that conquering a kingdom to be so easy. I guess that¡¯s just how much stronger I am now.


    After clearing the whole castle from those with explosive devices in their mouth, I returned back to the pig¡¯s room and see the pig is begging Lynn to not attack the kingdom.


    ¡°It¡¯s toote. I have made my decision. The troop should arrive in a few hours. All that is left is to decide how we should kill you,¡± Lynn said.


    This is the first time I see Lynn being so decisive. She just asked the women in the room who dly told her that they hated the pig king. Even the female spy hates the king. They love the kingdom, but they hate the pig king.


    ¡°Seems like this kingdom will be at peace if I kill you. I¡¯ll keep you alive for now. Since I think there are many other people in this kingdom who hate you, you will be executed publicly. The citizens should be happy that way,¡± Lynn said.


    Seems like there¡¯s no more discussion. Only the execution of the pig king left. I will let Lynn do the rest. She¡¯s actually so dependable here. Maybe I¡¯ll get Celestine here as well so she can see her sister being a good empress.


    ¡°So... I don¡¯t need to be here?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°Ask Lynn. She¡¯s the one in charge now,¡± I said.


    Albert can only watch the events happening in front of him while I grabbed Celestine who was training with Ka.


    Well, I guess this matter is over. I don¡¯t know why the pig king sent a spy to Cassau. I¡¯ll let Albert interrogate himter. Which mean he is actually still needed here.


    I guess I can¡¯t make fun of him yet since he is still needed. What a shame.

 Chapter 613

    Chapter 613: Back to Melk


    The pig king was soon executed. I was not the executor because I was busy.


    While the pig king was publicly executed, I was roaming around the kingdom on Ray¡¯s back to find any clues about the cult. I see other cities have troops from Consenza on standby. Some were in battle but it was over very soon.


    Since there are many people in the castle who were rted to the cult, it was as expected that there are many of them left in the city and also in other cities. But I couldn¡¯t find anyone who is expert level or above. Probably because they are being called and have to gather somewhere. Most likely it¡¯s for preparation of their next attack.


    But at least I have killed those who have explosive devices in their mouth. It was easy. Since I move so fast with Raybined with my Aura, and I have armor covered my body, no one will know who I am.


    And sooner orter, the cult will realize that the person inside the armor is the Aura user the Evil God is afraid of. They will search for clues about me and try their best to find me and kill me. But that¡¯s our n. To get their main forces toe out and fight me.


    Moving from city to city didn¡¯t take long thanks to Ray. And finding and killing the cult members residing in each city also didn¡¯t take long. What took me so long was that many of the soldiers from Consenza doesn¡¯t even know me. So, I had to convince them that I¡¯m not their enemy. And it was hard until I opened a portal to grab udia or Lynn.


    ...I had to do it five times in three different cities. So annoying.


    .....


    When I returned to the castle after I installed Blobbies in other cities, the pig king is already dead. His loyal subordinates were... there were none. But the prime minister, a man who seems to be in his sixties, can be trusted. At least that¡¯s what Albert said.


    He wasn¡¯t at the castle before. So, he wasn¡¯t killed by Mustache since I told him to kill every men.


    And so, that man will be in charge for the territory until Lynn sends someone to lead this ce. That prime minister was not loyal to the king but loyal to the people. He would do great since many of the vessels of the kingdom believed him more than the king.


    The people loyal to the kingdom not because of the king. But because of the prime minister¡¯s dedication to protect them.


    As for the pig king, he has done many disgusting deeds. Including forcefully taking any girl he likes as his concubines.


    The spy in Cassau is actually not spy for the king. But spy for the prime minister.


    Most of the spies and agents were beautiful and talented women whom the prime minister picked at early age so they would keep their distance from the king. And they were sent to other countries for work.


    In the end, the territory of the pig king is taken over by Consenza Empire. The former prime minister, although he is trusted by the people, he will still receive punishment. I don¡¯t know what the punishment is but it¡¯s most likely rted to dedicating his life to thisnd even after Consenza conquered it.


    Somehow, I feel like it¡¯s easy to find capable people. There are many of them. But unfortunately, their circumstance didn¡¯t allow them to prove themselves.


    Though I can¡¯t tell which one is a capable person and which one is not. Those are the kind of things that the kings are good at. Not me.


    After everything was over, I brought Albert back to Tatrama. While Lynn, udia, and Celestine whom I broughtter on to watch how well Lynn act as the empress, will stay and return on their own.


    This could also be a warning to other smaller countries. If they are not doing well in protecting their own people, their territory will be taken over.


    And so, it¡¯s time to go back being a clown.


    I opened a portal to Thomas¡¯ location, which is currently close to Melk. We will arrive there soon.


    ¡°Next is Melk? I guess I should bring the others here as well. It¡¯s been a while since we¡¯re all return to our hometown,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yes. This is also where you first became rence, right? I remember there was a horde of orcs attacking the city, and you went to the guild while still wearing clown costume. Ever since then, I make sure to always remind you whenever there¡¯s somewhere you need to go after your performance,¡± Thomas said.


    Why? Being a clown saving people is cool, right? Rather than a clown terrorizing the city. Though my goal right now is to let the cult know that the living armor is actually an Aura user wearing the armor. So, I need to wear armor whenever there¡¯s something to do.


    ¡°Well, since we will arrive soon, I¡¯ll go there first and greet everyone,¡± I said to Thomas before I opened a portal back to Cassau.


    I informed everyone at home that the circus is going to Melk for our performance and ask them if they want to go there. Everyone wanted to go there since it¡¯s been a while since we return. Thest time we were there was when the first tournament happened and TV was introduced. And we¡¯ll be there for a show this time.


    In Melk, I reunited with Oleg there. He¡¯s a friend with whom we protected the city together. He¡¯s also a reliable ally and the captain of the guard in Melk. Everyone in Melk trust him.


    ¡°I quit being the guard. Now, I¡¯m just a hunter. A B-rank hunter,¡± Oleg said soon after I greeted him.


    ¡°...what?¡±


    ¡°Being the captain of the guard, and during this hard time, I was too busy. I could only meet my own son after he was asleep. And I left to work before he wakes up. And so, after leaving everything to someone I trusted, I quit being a guard,¡± Oleg said casually.


    ¡°...Well, that¡¯s fine. Since you have a family, you¡¯re not leaving Melk, right?¡± I asked Oleg.


    ¡°I won¡¯t. Even though I¡¯m no longer the captain of the guard, the people in Melk still supported me. I¡¯ll just be a hunter and protect the city from monsters and any invasive enemies. And since I have more time, I can focus on cultivating and grow stronger while also watching my kid grow. This way, in case the enemy is attacking Melk, I can protect it,¡± Oleg said.


    He might be quitting his job to protect the city. But he will continue protecting the city as a hunter. He is still the most influential man in this city. Much more than the noble that Albert picked to lead this city.


    ¡°Okay. By the way, you should understand why I¡¯m here. I think you already know about it, but I will tell you anyway,¡± I said before I exined everything to him.


    I told him how I¡¯m on a tour with the circus and while I¡¯m traveling, I will look for the Evil God and spread rumors about the living armor who helped people. Now it won¡¯t be just a living armor. But a horse-riding living armor.


    ¡°I understand. Since I have reputation as the former captain of the guard and a B-rank hunter, I know many things. Most of the things I heard were rumors. But if it¡¯s you, I¡¯m sure you can find out whether those rumors are true or not easily. And I suggest that you won¡¯t subjugate any monsters since they are important for the prosperity of the city. It will be bad if the number of monsters is lessened since they are important for us hunters,¡± Oleg said before he told me rumors that he has heard.


    There are rumors in this city, nearby viges, and the surrounding area as well. One of them is even a rumor in my home vige which I have never return to for a long time. I guess it¡¯s time to return.


    ¡°Okay. I¡¯ll check the rumors. If they are real, the living armor wille and help. But it won¡¯t be right away. I don¡¯t want anyone to connect the living armor with the circus,¡± I said.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s get to the most important topic,¡± Oleg said.


    ¡°What topic?¡± I asked.


    ¡°The circus. Where is our tickets? For me and my family. At least I want to enjoy the circus now because I was unable to before,¡± Oleg said.


    ¡°You need to pay for them,¡± I said.


    ¡°I won¡¯t. I will visit thanks to my connection,¡± Oleg said.


    ¡°And you think I will just give them to you for free?¡±


    ¡°You will. Because I¡¯m the most influential person in this city. If the circus came without inviting me, the people will have bad impression of the circus. And the attendance won¡¯t be high just because I¡¯m not invited,¡± Oleg said.


    ...shit. I can¡¯t deny that. I don¡¯t want there to be so little attendance just because of one man. I guess I have to give up here.


    ¡°Fine. I¡¯ll give you the tickets tomorrow. I will make sure that you willugh so much during our performance,¡± I said to Oleg.


    After chatting a bit more, I started checking the rumors around the city. None of them were extremely bad. It was mostly about small crimes like thieves, but they those thieves didn¡¯t hurt anyone. Those are not important to me. The guards can take care of them.


    Tomorrow, the circus will prepare the tent and everything. The show will start the day after. I guess I¡¯ll go and check my vige after a long time before the show start.

 Chapter 614

    Chapter 614: Back to My Vige After So Long


    Today, I¡¯m going to return to my home vige after a long time. The others will stay in Melk and hang out with other people there that they know.


    ...Sorry that I don¡¯t have many friends.


    When was thest time I was actually home? I think ever since I stayed in the brothel where I met Ruby and Sophie for the first time, I was never home again.


    I heard that the vige got destroyed after the stampede. Along with some other viges as well. But my vige has been rebuilt, and people have started living there. Most of them were survivors from the stampede. Vigers who somehow survived and refuse the life in the city. Wanting to be a farmer or a quiet life.


    My former vige was picked to be where they built new vige because even though it has been destroyed, the fields in the area were still good for farming. So, survivors from other viges also came there and stay.


    I don¡¯t think I will meet anyone I recognize there. Everyone is already dead because of the stampede. Though I don¡¯t really know anyone in the vige to mourn anyway.


    About the rumor that is spreading in the vige, it¡¯s about the forest near the vige. People said that there¡¯s a dangerous monster there that must be avoided. Many hunters who heard of the rumor and want to make a name for themselves, entered the forest and never returned.


    .....


    I¡¯ll just say honestly that this vige is where I was born and where I grew up. Because of the stampede, everyone will think that I¡¯m here because I just heard of the rumor of the stampede if I said that I have just returned from another country.


    There¡¯s an old man as a gatekeeper but I don¡¯t know him at all. I told him that this vige was my hometown and he introduced me to the chief of the vige. Some in guy around forty years old.


    ¡°This was your hometown? Wee home, I guess. You must have traveled for a long time. I¡¯m sorry that most of the people here are not originated from here. The original vigers here have mostly died because of the stampede. I was also a chief of another vige before I stayed here. People of different viges came here after their vige was destroyed. And I¡¯m the only chief from a vige that got here. Other vige chiefs are either dead or missing,¡± the vige chief said.


    ¡°Oh, okay. Then, can I have permission to look around the vige? I think the vigers here are wary of strangers. So, if you said that you gave me the permit to look around, they will be less wary of me. And I will just stay here not for long. I¡¯ll continue my journey in the afternoon,¡± I said.


    ¡°Sure. I can tell the vigers that you came from this vige. They are wary because they knew it was the cult that made the stampede back then. They are afraid of strangers and don¡¯t want to get close to them,¡± the chief said.


    I know that even he is wary of me. The gatekeeper who brought me here is actually hiding and listening in case something happened to the chief.


    ¡°I see. Don¡¯t worry. I¡¯m not with the cult. Though even if I say that, you can¡¯t believe me right away. Well, I¡¯ll leave the vige after I finish sightseeing,¡± I said.


    I left the chief¡¯s house and walk around the vige. Though it¡¯s a small vige so I can see everything with my Divine Vision.


    I don¡¯t have anywhere to go here, so I just looked at my former house. Which is already changedpletely, and a family of three is living there. A father, a mother, and their son.


    ¡°I remember this ce. It was where you summoned me for the first time. Though I was mostly not aware the whole time and Blobby was the one in control,¡± Victoria said as she started reminiscing about the first time we met.


    ¡°Yeah. It was terrible how you just spoke a few words to me before you disappeared. Good thing you don¡¯t do that anymore now,¡± I said.


    Now, she can fight on her own. Well, maybe not alone. She needs to ride on Ray¡¯s back so she can use Aura a little.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s leave right away. There¡¯s nothing else in this vige that¡¯s worth seeing. Let¡¯s just go to the forest and check the rumor,¡± I said.


    More importantly, I want to leave right away because the happy family that lives in my old house has now became wary family just because of my appearance in this vige. As long as there¡¯s no one here rted to the cult, there¡¯s no need for me to make trouble. I don¡¯t want to destroy anyone¡¯s peaceful life if possible.


    When I was about to leave the vige, the old gatekeeper greeted me.


    ¡°You¡¯re leaving already?¡± he asked.


    ¡°Yeah. I don¡¯t have anything to see other than my old house. Also, it¡¯s annoying that someone keeps watching me the whole time here. Especially when this is the vige I grew up in. Now that you know my face, I hope you won¡¯t be wary of me at all time again next time Ie here,¡± I said as I left the vige with the shocked gatekeeper behind me.


    He is probably around advanced level and the strongest mage in this vige. That¡¯s why the chief trusted him. But that¡¯s nowhere near enough to stop the cult. So I just warned him that there are much stronger people than he expected. By just telling him that I¡¯m aware that he¡¯s been following me.


    ¡°We¡¯re checking on the forest now?¡± Victoria asked me.


    ¡°No. We will leave through the main road for a while, before I put on the armor and summon Ray. Then, we will check the forest,¡± I said.


    ¡°No more Victoriarmor? I¡¯m sad,¡± Victoria spoke in a sad tone. Though that¡¯s just an act. She¡¯s actually quite happy since she has more freedom.


    ¡°Actually, how about we make the rumor to be two living armors instead of one. I will wear my armor, and you will transform into an armor while keep riding on Ray. This way, the cult will think that there are actually two Aura users,¡± I suggested.


    ¡°So you will move on foot while I will ride on Ray. I think that¡¯s a good idea. With two people, we can do more things,¡± Victoria said.


    She¡¯s right. But more importantly, if the cult knows that there are two Aura users, they might end up splitting their forces in two so they can defeat each one of us. This way, my chance of survival will increase because I won¡¯t have to fight the whole main force alone as they will reserve the other force to fight the other Aura user. Which is actually my summoned familiar.


    They could be nning to split their force to half in hope that the rest of the force can defeat the other Aura user. And I will only receive half of them to fight. Which makes my fight easier that way.


    Of course that would be ideal. But if they choose to keep using their whole main force to fight just one of us instead of saving their force, that won¡¯t make any difference since that¡¯s the original n anyway. To have them focus on me while the kingdoms are fighting the small-fries.


    I told Victoria about this strategy.


    ¡°At the start of the tour, we will move together as a team. Butter on, we will split up so the cult will think that we are not together,¡± I said.


    ¡°I see. That could be a good idea. And even if it doesn¡¯t work, that¡¯s fine because it¡¯s still our original n to face the strongest force of the cult,¡± Victoria agreed with my n.


    ¡°Alright. We have walked far enough. I¡¯ll call Ray now so you can transform into armored warrior now,¡± I said to Victoria.


    After calling Ray and have Victoria ride on him, I wore my armor.


    My armor is special because it¡¯s both magic item and Aura item. I can use both of them.


    After infusing the bracelet in my hand with mana, the bracelet transformed into a ck armor that covers my whole body. That¡¯s the effect of the item after I infuse mana into it. An instant armor.


    And now that I¡¯m wearing it as an armor, if I infuse Aura into it, my recovery rate will improve. Any damage and injury I received will heal faster. The recovery rate won¡¯t be as good as the werewolves. But that¡¯s enough for me.


    As for the armor¡¯s durability, it was about the same durability as Victoriarmor. And I can infuse Aura more into it to make it stronger.


    So, if I infuse Aura, the armor won¡¯t just get stronger. But I will also be healed. Which is amazing.


    ¡°Alright. Let¡¯s go!¡±


    After wearing the armor, I also ride on Ray¡¯s back and we move to the forest in the rumor. Let¡¯s check out the forest now, shall we?

 Chapter 615

    Chapter 615: The Enemies are Subus


    ¡°Roy, do you know anything about the forest?¡±


    When we are already in front of the forest thanks to Ray¡¯s speed, Victoria asked me if I remember anything from the forest.


    I started reminiscing about my past life since in this life I left my vige quickly.


    ¡°During the stampede in my past life, I was in Melk. And my vige was destroyed. Though I and some other surviving vigers rebuilt the vige back then. But because we were not prepared with the stampede, there were no peopleing from other viges. And when I graduate from the introductory school, there were only fifteen people left in the vige. There were no rumors about anything in the forest,¡± I said to Victoria.


    Even the weak me who can only summon Blobby back then, can still roam near the forest without being worried about monsters despite the vige and the area nearby were destroyed because of the stampede. The monsters passing by this vige to go to Melk. And no one stopped to make a nest in the near forest. At least that¡¯s what I thought.


    I¡¯m sorry, okay? I was stupid and have terrible memory in my past life. Right now, I¡¯m still the same. But at that time, it was much worse.


    ¡°I have checked the guild when you were talking with Oleg. It seems that there is a quest in this forest submitted by the chief of your vige. But because of the high number of missing people from those who took the quest, no one have taken it again after a while. We don¡¯t know what kind of monster or maybe even human in this forest,¡± Victoria said.


    .....


    ¡°Though I should be able to see them soon before they can see us. My eyes are already much better than All-seeing Eye. Even Elsie can¡¯t see as good as I can,¡± I said confidently.


    Though so far, I haven¡¯t been able to see anything that could endanger us in this forest. Maybe it¡¯s a bit deeper.


    ¡°Ray, don¡¯t move too fast. I want to see everything clearly,¡± I said to Ray.


    We continue deeper into the forest and finally, we see several corpses. They must be the people who entered the forest for the quests since all of them have hunter cards. And all of them are women. They are the corpses of women who entered the forest.


    ¡°I can see corpses in one area. Let¡¯s go there first,¡± I said as we move to the location I said.


    When we get there, we can see about ten corpses of female hunters. They are all rotten corpses.


    ¡°How can their corpses rot this bad in the forest?¡± Victoria was shocked when she sees the corpses.


    ¡°Because whoever did it was too strong. That¡¯s why there are no weaker monsters nearby who dare to fight them. And that means there are no monsters to eat these corpses. And whoever did this are not killing for food,¡± I said.


    If there¡¯s a vige nearby, and there are no one strong in that vige but the vige can still exist for a long time, that means there are no powerful monsters who threaten the vige. Which mean this forest should only have at most weak monsters.


    But seeing the corpses rotting, I can tell that whoever did it has a bad taste. Not only that the culprit is strong enough to strike fear to weaker monsters, the culprit also gathered the dead women here after they were killed in another ce.


    ¡°But why only women? There are no male corpses here,¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°I can¡¯t be sure yet, but at least we have some clues. Victoria, what kind of monster do you think that would kill women and bring the men somewhere?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Monsters that kill women and bring the men for another purpose? The only monster that I know who would do that are subus. They don¡¯t have any needs for female humans and they would grab the men and suck their lifeforce,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°That¡¯s probably the case. And if they used this ce to throw away the corpses and there are no men, that could mean that they are farming the men¡¯s lifeforce. They kept the men alive and periodically suck lifeforce out of them. But that¡¯s just a guess. Though in the end, we can expect to face a smart opponent,¡± I said.


    Fighting strong enemy is easier than fighting smart enemy. And enemy who is strong and smart is much worse.


    The easy way to defeat them is to kill them before they know that I¡¯m stupid. Whatever trick they use, I need to kill them before their tricks worked.


    ¡°Are you fine with having a subus as your enemy? Even when you faced Arin who is half-vampire and half-subus, you still got yourself charmed. And if the enemy really is subus, their charm magic should be much more powerful than what Arin or Sonia can do,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Then I need to kill them before they can figure out where we are. Seems like this is not the time for the living armor to make a move. It¡¯s time to snipe some subus. If the men are still alive, we will meet themter as two living armors. Don¡¯t say anything since we¡¯re pretending to be living armors,¡± I reminded Victoria that we will act as living armors and we won¡¯t say anything when we meet other people.


    Leaving the unattended corpses here as they are will leave a bad taste. So, I bury them there before we look for the monster that cause the rumor to spread. If they are really subus or not.


    And after walking for a while, I can finally see their settlement. They are indeed subus. And they are imprisoning the men. They feed them, and when they are healthy enough, they would suck their lifeforce until near death before stopping.


    What should I say? At least they don¡¯t attack human¡¯s vige directly?


    No. Even if they don¡¯t attack us directly and only grabbed those whoe here, they are still dangerous creature.


    If they are like the vampires, the lifeforce they sucked will only make them stronger. Even if there are only thirty men there, and some men are being shared by two or more subus, they would still increase their power little by little.


    It may take time, but they will continue growing stronger and could be a threat at the same level as the cult if they are not taken care of quickly.


    ¡°Victoria, sniper rifle,¡± I said to Victoria who then transformed into a sniper.


    I¡¯m still riding on Ray and wore my armor. In case I was seen. Also, I won¡¯t just snipe from one location. That¡¯s why I will snipe while moving on Ray¡¯s back. Though I¡¯ll get Ray to stop before I shoot the bullet.


    ¡°Victoria, Ray, there are around a hundred subus. It will take some time until we can kill them all,¡± I said casually.


    A hundred monster is a lot. But I can dismiss it casually because I know that I¡¯m stronger than them now. Though I won¡¯t be careless. They are still subus. And I don¡¯t know if their charm magic can reach where I am sniping them from.


    And so, I started aiming the first bullet. My first target is the biggest subus over three meters tall. I don¡¯t know if she¡¯s the leader of the group or not, but if she is, once I killed her, there won¡¯t be anyone tomand the other subus.


    I filled the sniper rifle with sharp bullet andpressed air. The power my bullet can give is enough to pierce through a boulder. I hope it¡¯s enough to pierce their head and kill them.


    The bulletes out of the rifle in a straight line. Even with the distance, the bullet wasn¡¯t affected much by gravity. And it pierced the big subus¡¯s head and killed her in an instant.


    ¡°That¡¯s one down. Ny-nine to go. At least it¡¯s good that there are no child subus here. Their appearance is very much like human after all,¡± I said.


    Unless I had to for some reason, I won¡¯t kill children. That¡¯s who I am.


    ¡°Hmm? No one noticed the big subus is dead. I guess it¡¯s best to kill those who are alone and in isted location first,¡± I said.


    While still riding on Ray¡¯s back who hasn¡¯t move at all, I shoot ten more times before the subus finally noticed something is strange. And by the time they noticed many subus have died, only seventy of them left.


    ¡°Seventy more to go. Oh, five of them are lining up together. Aim and shoot. Only sixty-five of them left,¡± I said while shooting five subus to death with one bullet.


    This is great. If I can defeat the Evil God this way, that would be great. I guess I should try cultivating my air element more. It¡¯s still advanced level. If I reached expert level, I couldpress more air and my shot will be stronger.


    Once the subus aware that someone is killing them, some of them tried to grab the men. So, I killed them first before the men can be used as hostage.


    ¡°Ray, some of the subus are flying this way. Let¡¯s start moving from now,¡± I said to Ray.


    After we started moving, the monsters are in state of confusion. They must be thinking that they have many opponents. But it¡¯s actually just one. Me.


    There are no powerful subus here. I guess it won¡¯t be long until we kill them all.

 Chapter 616

    Chapter 616: Rescuing Idiots Only to Let Them Die


    I am the armored horse-riding sniper. The greatest marksman in the world. At least at the moment. I think Sara can surpass me. But at least I am now the greatest since Sara¡¯s sniping skill is still limited by her rifle.


    I think Marie is trying to make a rifle for Sara to use. Which should be at least as good as Victoria when she is transformed into a rifle. But it will take time until it¡¯spleted. That¡¯s why I¡¯m still the greatest.


    Using Blobby as rifle or her old rifle, Sara can¡¯t use her full power topress air inside of them since the durability of those rifles are not strong enough and will easily break if Sara used too much power.


    Anyway, I¡¯m still in the forest sniping subus. There are still around thirty of them left. But I can only shoot one subus around every one minute. So it will take about thirty minutes until I can kill them all.


    The subus have spread all over the ce and went into hiding. Behind a tree or behind a rock. Which makes things harder for me since I need to keep moving.


    I can just shoot through the rocks or trees. But I didn¡¯t expect the subus to have quick reflexes. Once the bullet hit the rock where a subus is hiding, she can still move by reflex a little so my shot won¡¯t hit her vital or even miss. And I need to take another shot to kill her before she went to hide in another location.


    Some of the subus have sessfully took the men they kept as hostages. Which makes things harder for me. Except for the time when some of the men who noticed that the subus were being shot down shouted something. I think they were those who haven¡¯t been charmedpletely by the subus. They would shout out loud and say to kill them as well.


    .....


    And I have no problem killing those who wanted to die. The problem was those who have beenpletely charmed.


    I can kill them as well. But if I kill everyone, the rumor about two living armors saving people won¡¯t be spread. And if I just kill everyone except for a few people whom I let live, I will be thought as the bad guy who won¡¯t think twice to kill people. And I will be the bad guy if the rumors are spread.


    That¡¯s why I only kill the men who said that they want to die. For those who didn¡¯t say that, I¡¯ll keep them alive for a while longer unless they are truly in the way of me killing all the subus.


    ¡°An armored horse-riding sniper. Those profession doesn¡¯t really match with each other,¡± Victoria said to what I imed myself to be.


    ¡°Which one? Armored sniper, or horse-riding sniper?¡± I asked back.


    ¡°All of them. Sniper are usually stay in one ce for a long time. But you¡¯re riding a horse. And you¡¯re wearing armor which is something that vanguard use. Not a sniper who shoot from distance,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°I wonder why there are no armored sniper in your world. That¡¯s weird, isn¡¯t it? It¡¯s safer to wear armor while in sniping position,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s just you. Wearing a heavy armor and stay in one spot for a long time will be too exhausting for normal sniper. They usually only wear a helmet and some body protection which only protect their upper body. Not a full body armor,¡± Victoria exined.


    Hmm... no matter how much she exined, I can never imagine how weird her world is. Sniping in full armor is much safer, right?


    Well, there are things that we can do in this world and things that can¡¯t be done in her world. The more I heard about her world, the wilder my imagination will be. And it¡¯s not like I will be able to go to her world anyway.


    ¡°Oh, there¡¯s one subus chasing after us. She might be the fastest one among all the subus here since she can tell where we are. Although Ray hasn¡¯t used his full speed, she¡¯s fast enough to follow us,¡± I said as I aimed my sniper rifle toward the subus chasing after us.


    When I shot the bullet, the subus quickly dodged my bullet. She is much better than other subus. I should have killed her before other subus. Though she looks just like any other subus so I can¡¯t tell if she¡¯s strong.


    ¡°Ray, keep our distance from her. I don¡¯t want to get charmed by her,¡± I said to Ray as Ray increases his speed.


    But the wider the distance between us, the easier it is for the subus to dodge my bullet. Though I won¡¯t try to get closer to her. I don¡¯t know at what range she can use her charm.


    ¡°Roy, I will handle her. I guess we can still act as two living armors here,¡± Victoria said as she turned from a rifle into a moving armor.


    ¡°I guess that¡¯s a n. Then, I¡¯ll leave her to you,¡± I said.


    ¡°I will help you kill the other subus after I take care of her,¡± Victoria said.


    I jumped off of Ray¡¯s back as Victoria and Ray is going to the chasing subus. Now, I only have Blobbies to turn into a rifle. But this should be enough.


    I keep moving and shooting target. This is harder since I have to run on my own instead of letting Ray do it. But it¡¯s not a problem as long as I keep in the distance where their charm magic won¡¯t affect me.


    Subus are really a bad match with any men. Though I don¡¯t know if their charm magic can affect Hill or not. But they are still bad match with men.


    Did Timmy kill subus to get charm magic? I don¡¯t think that¡¯s the case.


    Timmy¡¯s ability is to charm women. And if I¡¯m not wrong, the male equivalent of subus are called incubus. They must be the one Timmy killed to get his Aura ability.


    And that means, no matter what, I have to make sure that my girls won¡¯t ever meet incubus. I don¡¯t want them to get charmed.


    As I started thinking weird thoughts, the subus that Victoria is fighting with has died. And she has started hunting the other subus.


    Finally, all of the subus have died. And Victoria and Ray returned to me.


    ¡°What now, Roy?¡± Victoria asked while she¡¯s still riding Ray.


    ¡°We¡¯ll meet the survivor and release them. Some of them are still being tied. Though they seem like they will die soon if they were left alone. The subus must have sucked a lot of life force from them,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then are you going to move them with portal?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°No. I¡¯ll just leave them be with some food and knives. They can either get their health back and try to escape the forest, or they can choose to kill themselves if they think they have suffered so much and can¡¯t take it anymore,¡± I said.


    Although they were charmed, they should be able to remember that some of them who were not affected much by the charm magic chose death rather than surviving. Maybe some of them will choose to die. Though I don¡¯t think it will be all of them.


    Those who choose to survive will hopefully be able to escape from the forest. And they will spread the news that two living armors came and help them.


    If those people are hunters from Melk who helped us in the stampede, they should know that a living armor helped killed the giant smander back then. I hope they won¡¯t greet us with hostility.


    ¡°Victoria, remember to not say anything. Living armor shouldn¡¯t be able to speak,¡± I said to Victoria.


    I brought Victoria and freed all of the men before gathering them in one location. Then I gave them some food enough for them to stay alive until they leave the forest and find a city or vige. I also pointed at the knives on the ground. And I showed them a gesture of slicing my own throat. Which was meant to tell them that they can use those knives to kill themselves.


    ¡°...Is there any gesture that I can do to tell them that I meant for them to kill themselves with those knives and it wasn¡¯t meant that they need to kill each other with those knives over food?¡± I asked Victoria after I witnessed the men killing each other.


    What happened after I gathered them in one room is that those men grabbed the knives and use them to kill each other. Maybe because their lifeforce was sucked by the subus, they were unable to use magic. That¡¯s why they only swing those knives awkwardly.


    Why do they think that it¡¯s a survival game where the winner will receive food and can escape? Though since I¡¯m acting as a living armor, I can¡¯t talk.


    I watched human stupidity at its best until there¡¯s only one man remains. And after looking at me, he grabbed all the food I left. He ate some food and drink some water before he looked at me again and then run away from there.


    ¡°Is there no such things as signnguage in this world? It would be great if there is. Their mind must have been broken so badly that they can¡¯t think straight. Or they are just that stupid. What will you do with that man who escapes?¡± Victoria asked me.


    ¡°Leave him be. He will spread a rumor about two living armors who enjoy watching men kill each other for food. I¡¯ll just ask Albert and other kings about it so they can send their agents to fix it,¡± I said.


    Those agents will heard the rumor and dismiss it. Saying that they experience the same thing as that guy did. But instead of the knives for killing each other, they were used for if there are anyone who wanted to kill themselves because they can¡¯t endure the hardship after suffering so much.


    This is way outside my expectation. But at least there will be true rumors that the escaped man will spread. About two living armors who killed monsters. That¡¯s what needed to bait the cult after all.


    After this, there will be more activities for us two living armors. But today¡¯s job is over. It¡¯s time to return to be a clown.

 Chapter 617

    Chapter 617: Leaving Melk


    After we finished taking care of the subus, we returned back to Melk. The preparation is already over by the time we arrived. And the next day, at night, we begun our first show in Melk.


    Of course I gave Oleg and his family tickets so they can see our performance. And thanks to himing to the show, there are more people than we expected who came to the circus. The seats are not enough to hold everyone so many people were unable to watch the show.


    The next day, our second day of show in Melk, the same thing happened. So we decided to stay in Melk for a bit longer. The three day shows turned into five day. And we will continue the tour after a week in Melk.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s to be expected. I¡¯m popr after all,¡± I said.


    ¡°There are two main reason why our show in Melk is a huge sess. First is because you invited the most influential man in Melk to watch the show. Because of him, many people thinks highly of the circus and wanted toe as well. As for the second reason, it¡¯s because of your first performance as rence the Clown. This is where you first became rence the Clown. Many people still remember you and want to see you again. That¡¯s why I decided to stay here for a few more days for the show. I hope you will agree,¡± Thomas said to me.


    The decision that Thomas made was discussed with the others while I¡¯m not around. It was decided during the day when I was looking around for cult members and looking for a way to increase the fame of the two living armors.


    When I returned after that, Thomas told me that we will stay a bit longer than nned because we have so many fans in this city. And I have no problem with that.


    .....


    ¡°I don¡¯t see any problem with that. But everyone has agreed, right? If so, I will follow,¡± I said.


    There¡¯s no real need to be in a hurry after all. The tour we decided is flexible. There¡¯s no real schedule of where and when we should go.


    Although we have prepared a route around the continent, it¡¯s not like we have to stick with the route all the time. We can leave or stay whenever we want. Though we will need everyone¡¯s agreement first.


    After that, we discussed a bit more about the tour. Some of the performers, who are agents, wanted to stay in their hometown for a bit longer. So it seems like the tour will take longer than expected. But that¡¯s not a big problem.


    And so, we decided to stay in Melk for a while longer. But for me, I traveled to various location using portals. I asked some people if there are any famous monster nearby that will gain me some fame as living armors if they are killed. Once we gathered enough information, we will go and take care of them.


    Victoria and I will split up and take care of different monsters, or some troubles, so our fame will increase. The cult will then look for us, and we will fight them.


    There are many people who is investigating about those rumors. And I told them if there¡¯s an urgent situation with people¡¯s lives at stake, they can move on their own without asking for my help. And of course if it¡¯s something they can¡¯t do, they can ask me for help. I will try to get the living armor to be heard by the cult as much as possible. Until they are bored of it and decided to kill me so I can find them and kill them instead.


    Finally, our show in Melk is over. We will stay for another day to prepare for our departure. And the next city we will go to is Mellian.


    ¡°...I hope Hill is not as important of a figure in Mellian as Oleg is in Melk,¡± I said hopefully.


    It¡¯s been quite a while since Ist see Hill. Back then, Hill was aiming at the gullible Kron who didn¡¯t notice it at all. I hope Hill already has someone else or I will be targeted again.


    ¡°I think it will be fine. I have been exchanging letter with him all the time and he¡¯s doing well,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°...Yeah. You two are good friends. I¡¯ll trust you for now, Victoria,¡± I replied.


    I don¡¯t know how fine it will be since Victoria is the one saying it. But there¡¯s nothing else to do except to go there after all. I¡¯m not the one who decide where we should go.


    We have decided all the important location we need to go to. Including smaller kingdoms in the continent. Beyond that, I left the rest to Thomas and the others to decide where else to go.


    After the preparation is over, we left to Mellian. And since I don¡¯t have anything to do, I joined the carriage. With several carts being pulled by horses.


    Actually, I can have just one extremely huge carriage being pulled by Ray alone. But unfortunately, the road isn¡¯t thatrge. It will only cause trouble to other travelers if we do that.


    And more importantly, Ray will be moving together with Victoria as living armor. We can¡¯t let people connect Ray with the circus because of it. That¡¯s why I used portal to move Ray to Monsters World instead.


    I can just unsummon him and return him to where we first met. But Ray doesn¡¯t like that since he will be all alone. Especially since no matter how much I tried, I can¡¯t open a portal to that side. I can only summon Ray and I can¡¯t go there. That¡¯s why Ray will be in Monsters World until I called him.


    What a peaceful life. There¡¯s no movement at all by the cult. The only thing we can do is wait. And rather than stressing myself while waiting, it¡¯s best to do something to take my mind off from the cult. And traveling with the circus is one way to do it. Since we can also ask for advice from the other performers how to make our performance better.


    On the way to Mellian, we encounter several monsters. But the other circus performers took care of them easily. There¡¯s no need for me to get involved at all.


    There¡¯s really nothing I need to do for a few days until we get to Mellian. That¡¯s what I thought until something happened.


    ¡°Alright. Let¡¯s camp here for the night,¡± Thomas said as we prepare to rest for the night.


    It¡¯s alreadyte and we need to get the horses to rest as well. So we decided to rest there by the side of the road.


    This is not a good ce to camp because it¡¯s far from water source. But we brought a lot of water, and I¡¯m here as well. So it doesn¡¯t matter where we stay for the night.


    And since I¡¯m here, I told them that there¡¯s no need to put some people to be the guard for the night. But they decided to do it anyway. Though both Thomas and I were excluded from the position.


    ¡°Well, if that¡¯s what you want, then I willply. Then I will take a walk and look around. I¡¯ll put a barrier around the camp before I leave. It¡¯s only for one hour but that¡¯s enough to protect you until I get there in case there¡¯s an emergency,¡± I said as I grabbed the walking cane and drew arge circle to cover the whole camp.


    It¡¯s just for one hour, but that¡¯s more than enough to handle some enemies. Although those inside the barrier won¡¯t be able to leave, they can prepare for when the barrier is opened in that time.


    I summoned Ray and left the camp with Victoria.


    ¡°Roy, where are we going?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°There¡¯s a small man I saw on the way here. He watched our carriage move and retreated somewhere. He might be nning for something since he acted suspicious,¡± I said.


    ¡°Small man? You mean a child?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°No. There¡¯s no child that can have the lung of a smoker who have smoked for more than twenty years. He might be acting like a child but don¡¯t get careless,¡± I said as we started to move.


    While on the way, I put on my armor and Victoria transformed. There might be a chance that I am overthinking it and there¡¯s actually nothing going on with the small man. But I want to get it out of my mind.


    I can see the small man is moving toward our camp along with two other people. A man and a woman.


    For those who don¡¯t know, they might think that they are a couple of husband and wife with their son. But the small man is probably the oldest even though he doesn¡¯t look like that.


    ¡°Let¡¯s check where they came from first,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re fine with them going to the camp?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Yes. There are still more than fifty minutes before the barrier disappears. There¡¯s nothing anyone can do. They can¡¯t enter the camp, and those inside the barriers can¡¯t leave. It¡¯s best to check the fact first before making a move. They might be a part of bandit groups nearby,¡± I said.


    Soon after we move, I can see arge group of people in a camp where that small man came from. Let¡¯s see if they are enemies or not.

 Chapter 618

    Chapter 618: The Bandits Don¡¯t Know What to Do


    There¡¯s arge group of people inside the forest. It¡¯s not a vige and it¡¯s more of a camp. Most likely, it¡¯s a bandit group nesting in this ce.


    All of them are preparing to move. The direction they are going? My camp. Where the circus troupe are camping for the night.


    ¡°Are they bandits?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Most likely. I doubt they want toe and ask for peace. What to do now?¡±


    I can easily defeat all of them. There are only about fifty of them. and I don¡¯t think any of them are expert level mage. They didn¡¯t even notice me when I¡¯m this close. Any average expert level mage should be able to detect my presence when I¡¯m this close. Especially since I am not using Aura to hide my presence.


    ¡°Well, if there are no expert level mages, just the people in the circus are enough to defeat them all. Well, except for Thomas and few agents who have low level. Even if you leave them be, none of them are strong enough to defeat us,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Yeah. But I¡¯m worried about those three people who were running before. If they are part of these bandit group, then it¡¯s fine to kill them. But if they are actually escaping hostages, that means they are just victims. Hmm... I don¡¯t think there are other hostages here. Everyone is going to our camp,¡± I said after checking the bandit¡¯s camp.


    .....


    ¡°Do you think it¡¯s time for the living armor to make an appearance? Thomas and the others can also help spread the rumors that the living armors are helping travelers from bandit,¡± Victoria suggested.


    ¡°That might be a good n. Let¡¯s discuss it with the others first. They are all agents except for Thomas, so they should know what to do. Though we can just leave them be as well,¡± I said.


    And so, we returned to the camp. When we arrive, the small man and his friends were not here yet. And while the barrier is separating us, I talked to one of the circus performers there. Another clown who is quite good but not as good as I am. He¡¯s also an amazing agent from Varadis who have medical license like me. He¡¯s a doctor.


    ¡°A group of bandits areing here? And three people will arrive first?¡± the clown asked. His name is Burnes.


    ¡°Yes. And among those three, if you look at them, you will think that they are a normal family of three. A mother, a father, and a son. But the smallest one might actually be the oldest. He has the lung of a heavy smoker,¡± I said.


    ¡°Well, how long will the barrierst?¡± Burnes asked.


    ¡°Around thirty minutes. And those three will arrive in around ten minutes while the rest of the bandits will arrive in twenty,¡± I said.


    ¡°Well, there¡¯s nothing we can do but wait. When the bandits arrive, we will wait and see what they do for the next five minutes. If you don¡¯t want to do anything, that¡¯s fine. But if you decided to fight those bandits, do it in thest five minutes. That¡¯s more than enough for you, right?¡± Burnes asked.


    ¡°One minute is more than enough actually. I can just spread sleeping gas and all of them would fall asleep in no time. Though since they are bandits, I¡¯ll kill them all. I¡¯m just asking for your suggestion because I don¡¯t know if those three are hostages or actually part of the bandits,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. It will be fun to see how those three will act when the barrier is not opened. Though if they are truly hostages, or they are pretty good actors, then you can just defeat the bandits in an instant. You can be the living armor. And When we arrive in Mellian, we will spread the news that there¡¯s a traveling living armor who saves people. Alright, I will tell the others about this. This is also some sort of entertainment since we know that we will be fine with you around,¡± Burnes said before he enters a tent and tell the others about it.


    He actually suggested the same n as I was thinking. Well, since two people have thought of that n, there¡¯s nothing wrong in doing it.


    If those three are truly hostages, they will be scared of the bandits. And I will kill those bandits easily.


    But if those three are part of them, and they act so well that we can¡¯t tell if they are also bandits or not, then I will still kill the bandits. Those three will have no choice but to continue acting while we pretend to protect them all the way to the next city when we actually just watching their movement. That should be good enough to stop them from doing anything.


    In any case, there¡¯s nothing they can do except for acting. Though if they are really hostages, then they are safe. That¡¯s all there is to it.


    ¡°For the moment, I¡¯ll go check the wanted posters in Melk and Mellian. I¡¯ll see if there¡¯s a wanted poster of someone from those three first. Victoria and Ray can stay here and protect the others. I¡¯ll go alone,¡± I said before I undo my armor and returns it back into its bracelet form.


    I opened a portal to Melk and check the guild right away. Checking all the wanted posters there without entering the guild since I can use Divine Vision to do it.


    After that, I move to Mellian and do the same before returning back to the camp.


    ¡°How was it, Roy?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°There¡¯s a wanted poster of the small man in Melk but no wanted poster of him in Mellian. At least we know that he¡¯s a criminal,¡± I said.


    We still have some more time before those three arrive, so I informed Burnes and the other as well about what I find.


    ¡°We¡¯ll at least take him with us to Mellian. As for the others, you can decide whether to kill him or not,¡± Burnes said.


    And finally, after waiting for a while, those three arrives. Victoria and I went into hiding while those three approached the camp. Not knowing that there¡¯s a barrier protecting the camp. As for Ray, I will be the one riding him.


    Victoria is pretending to be a pebble on the road. She is right below the three so she can hear what they say. As for me, with my enhanced hearing, I can hear them from where I¡¯m hiding.


    Those three noticed the camp and started acting like they are being chased. And they didn¡¯t notice that they are running straight into the barrier and hit it with their face. That¡¯s hrious.


    ¡°Oh, what the hell!? There¡¯s a barrier here!¡± the man said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t be so loud! We¡¯ll continue our act and pretend that we are asking them for help. With so many people in the camp, they should have a lot to steal,¡± the woman said.


    ¡°Be calm and continue your act. Knock on the barrier and ask for their help before the others arrive,¡± the small man is still calm even though his nose is bleeding from crashing at the barrier.


    Soon after, Thomas, Burnes, and the others arrive. Burnes be the representative since Thomas is not that good in acting. He¡¯s a good clown. But because of the limit in his physical ability, he¡¯s not as good as me. But he¡¯s still being loved by the fans even though we share the same stage.


    The three pretends that they are being chased and asked for help. To open the barrier and let them in.


    ¡°Sorry, but that¡¯s impossible. The barrier will only open when the time is up or it receive enough damage to destroy it. We have tried it before that even if all of us attacked the barrier, it won¡¯t get destroyed. I think we will be safe from the bandits. But for you guys, it¡¯s best to keep running. Those bandits won¡¯t be able to destroy the barrier anyway. Good luck!¡± Burnes said to the three.


    The reaction that those three showed is funny. They are pretending to be a family, but the parents actually looking at their son asking for their next action. But the son can¡¯t do anything because he has to pretend to act like a child.


    And they just started arguing to let them in. But the circus troupe continue saying that the barrier won¡¯t be broken no matter how much they tried.


    Finally, the bandit group chasing after the three arrives.


    ¡°Find those three! Take them as hostages so... what happened here?¡±


    The one who acted as the bandit leader was shocked when he sees that the three were still in front of the camp and everyone there still hasn¡¯t prepared to leave or do anything.


    ¡°Go! Run! While the barrier is still intact, we can dy them!¡± Burnes said to the three. But those three just stood there paralyzed. They don¡¯t know what to do.


    This is funny. The bandits also confused looking at the situation. But I guess it¡¯s time for me to appear soon. Let¡¯s see what will happen next before I make my move.

 Chapter 619

    Chapter 619: I¡¯m a Fan of the Living Armor


    The bandits looked at the situation in front of them. It was too confusing for them to understand. And I¡¯m just watching them being confused.


    I could hear what some of the bandits are talking about. They are indeed friends with those three in front of the camp.


    ¡°Hey, what do we do here? Boss said that he would join their camp, but he¡¯s still out there,¡± one of the bandits asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. Seems like there¡¯s a barrier protecting the camp. Should we continue chasing for the boss?¡± another bandit asked.


    Not only were these bandits are connected with the three people in front of the camp. But one of the three is actually their boss. But which one? The small one? The man? Or the woman?


    Whichever case, since the bandit group is split from their boss, they don¡¯t know what to do. It¡¯s all up to their boss.


    After stopping for a while, someone finally made his first move. The small man is the one making the first move.


    .....


    ¡°Mom! Dad! Let¡¯s escape! They said that they will dy the bandits, right? So it¡¯s fine if we escape! The bandits will go after them instead!¡± the small man said while acting like a child.


    I have to say that he¡¯s a good actor indeed. But that will only work if he¡¯s actually that young. But he¡¯s not. The people in the camp also know that. And some of them couldn¡¯t even hold back theirughter so they retreated into the tent. But I guess Burnes is doing very well. He can hold his expression back. He¡¯s indeed our second best clown after me.


    Though some of them are actually looking at the small man in disgust. But the small man didn¡¯t notice it. Which is good.


    Seems like it¡¯s obvious who the leader of the bandit group is. The one with a wanted poster in Melk. The small man.


    After he said his piece, the bandits return back to their ferocious mood and started shouting to attack the camp instead of chasing the three people.


    ¡°This camp is much bigger than three people! We¡¯ll capture them instead!¡±


    ¡°But there¡¯s a barrier protecting them! What do we do?¡±


    ¡°Just wait until the barrier is gone. There¡¯s no way the barrier can stand for a long time!¡±


    The man who acted as the bandit leader lead the bandits to surround the camp. As for those three who acted like parents and son, they were about to leave.


    No, they can¡¯t leave. I think it¡¯s best to bring just the small man at least to Mellian. Although he has no wanted poster there, I can bring one from Melk and show it to Hill or the others there. We can then get the reward from bringing him in.


    It¡¯s time to make my move. And with Ray¡¯s speed, we¡¯re in front of the camp in no time.


    ¡°What the... Who are you!?¡± the one acting as the bandit leader asked when I suddenly cut in between him and the camp.


    Of course I didn¡¯t answer. I¡¯m a living armor. And I¡¯m not supposed to say anything.


    ¡°Oh! Is that the real thing? The living armor who defeated the giant smander back during the stampede?¡±


    Inside the barrier, Burnes follow-up my appearance as he introduces me to everyone. The other agents also looked excited seeing me and say things to praise me.


    ¡°Oh, the living armor who helped people in trouble? I heard that it was just some rumors. But it¡¯s true?¡± another circus performers said.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s see what he will do. Oh, where¡¯s Roy? He¡¯s a big fan of the living armor!¡±


    ¡°He¡¯s asleep in his tent! When he¡¯s sleeping, not even earthquake can wake him up!¡±


    ¡°Then he will miss everything. What a shame. At least we can continue telling him what we witnessed tonight.¡±


    ¡°We can wake him up by pouring water on his pants though. Should we?¡±


    ¡°Hmm... that¡¯s an interesting idea, but let¡¯s not do that. Because we might be the one who will miss the living armor in action.¡±


    What is this? All the circus performers are bullying me? They made me a fan of myself? That¡¯s not wrong but I can¡¯t say that¡¯s right either.


    Sigh... I guess I¡¯ll be a fan of the living armor and help spreading the rumor as well.


    Well, let¡¯s just kill the bandits except for the three. For now, I¡¯m a living armor who thinks that these three are not rted with the bandits at all. Though just the circus troupe alone is more than enough to handle them. But they are still inside the barrier.


    With Reizpear in my hand, which I still keep inside my pocket even after I got more weapons, I sh and stab the bandits while riding on the abyss horse, Ray. The bandits are panicking because their magic were easily dodged by me. and the stray magic attack that attacking the other circus performers were stopped by the barrier. Only the three people need to protect themselves from the stray magic.


    I took care of the bandits easily. And by the time the barrier finally opened, all the bandits have been defeated. Leaving only the circus performers and the three people who were pretending to be chased by the bandits.


    As expected, their expression turn bad seeing how I killed their friends. But they can¡¯t do anything. Who is the stupid one who had the idea to infiltrate someone¡¯s camp to let their guard down? Probably the small man¡¯s idea.


    In the wanted poster, there¡¯s only a picture of him. The description says that he look like a child but he¡¯s an adult. It wasn¡¯t known yet whether he worked with the bandits voluntarily or not, but he¡¯s the only clue to capturing the bandits in the area who often targeting traveling carriages.


    But with my words, or any of the circus performers¡¯ word, they would believe that this small man is actually the leader of the group. We can safely brought him to Mellian and make him think that we are protecting him. But once we¡¯re there, we will give him to the guards.


    I killed all the bandits easily. And then I looked at the three people and the circus members who are acting as if they are looking at me with respect and awe before I left the area.


    After disappearing, I opened a portal to one of the tent inside the camp. And then I pretend that I just woke up from sleep.


    ¡°Hey, what¡¯s the ruckus?¡± I asked while rubbing my eyes to make myself look sleepy.


    ¡°Hey, Roy! You missed the living armor that you love so much. He killed those bandit group and left right away,¡± Burnes said to me.


    ¡°Oh, fuck! I should have stayed up! And those are the bandits?¡± I pointed at the dead bodies on the ground.


    ¡°Yes. The living armor killed them in just five minutes!¡± Burnes said excitedly. He¡¯s such a great actor.


    ¡°Sigh... fine. And those three are?¡± I asked about the identities of the three people who I shouldn¡¯t know about.


    ¡°They were being chased by the bandits before the living armor came. Oh, right! Hey, the three of you! Come join us! We will travel to Mellian. We¡¯ll protect you till we get there!¡± Burnes said.


    I can see in one of the tent, Thomas who returned early panicked a bit when Burnes said that. He¡¯s the only normal person here. The rest are not normal.


    I¡¯ll tell him to keep staying inside the carriage the whole time during our journey so our act won¡¯t be discovered by these three.


    The three people who were in shock seeing all their friends were dead looked angry. I can see that the small man seems to be prepared to use magic. But if he does, his disguise will be discovered. I can¡¯t have that. I want to enjoy seeing their expression during our journey to Mellian.


    ¡°Hey, you! Go clean up those dead bodies! We don¡¯t want to be noticed by monsters because of the smell. You¡¯re an expert level earth mage so take care of them. And you, you¡¯re a expert level wind mage. Blow a wind to make the scent of blood disappears,¡± I said as I pretend to sulk because I didn¡¯t meet the living armor.


    Hearing that we have at least two expert level mages, the three people were in cold sweat. They didn¡¯t expect that we would be that strong.


    About those expert level mages, they were sent by Albert and old man Henry. Although they need strong mages in their army, they still send expert level mages here thinking that it would be safer this way. And it¡¯s also an agreement with Thomas who is just an ordinary human with low level magic. Since I would often leave, he needed protection so the circus can go on. And Albert then sent the earth mage while old man Henry sent the wind mage.


    The earth mage pushed the corpses aside, and bury them on the ground away from the road. And the wind mage blow a powerful wind to make the scent of blood disappear.


    ¡°Even if the living armor wasn¡¯t here, we could easily take care of the bandits easily,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°But I want to meet him. Whatever. Hey, you three! Come in and have some meal. We¡¯ll take you to Mellian!¡± I said.


    ¡°Ah... umm... we¡¯re fine! We can just... find nearby vige on our own!¡± the man said. The one pretending to be the father.


    ¡°There¡¯s no vige nearby. And Mellian is much closer than any vige. Or is there any reason why you don¡¯t want toe with us? Suspicious...¡± I said while pretending to be in deep thought.


    The small man then noticed that he can¡¯t escape, so he pulled the hand of the woman and the woman figured out what they need to do.


    ¡°In that case, please take care of us. Thank you for saving our lives¡± the woman said.


    She¡¯s better than the man. Though the small man is still smarter.


    ¡°We¡¯ll prepare another tent just for you three. Family must not be separated after all. You can rest right away. No need to worry about night watch. We have expert level mages with us,¡± Burnes added.


    Those three have no escape. They will be brought to justice in Mellian.


    But what I didn¡¯t expect was such thing won¡¯t happen. Two days after the three joined us, something unexpected happened. And without hesitation, I ended up killing those three.

 Chapter 620

    Chapter 620: I Found Cult Members in Hiding


    It has been two days since the three guests joined us on our travel to Mellian. Those three are extremely reserved and unable to do anything knowing that we are far too strong for them who haven¡¯t reached expert level yet.


    And since it has been two days, Thomas also have gotten used to them. but because he¡¯s afraid that he would somehow leak a secret about us if he gets along too well with them, he kept conversation with them to the minimum. But at least enough to tell to those three that everyone here is following him.


    Of course we told him that we are a circus troupe. We even let them watch our new performance to see their reaction. But they were too stiff and too scared to do anything so we never received any proper feedback. They would just say that it¡¯s all great and pped. With the weirdest expression on their faces.


    In their heart, they must be thinking of why a group of powerful mages is joining a circus. And when they are trying to escape at night, those who are responsible to keep watch would stop them.


    This is fun. Especially when they saw me creating a barrier with the walking cane. They even thought of stealing it, but since they also think that I might be as strong as expert level mage, they stopped that thought from crossing again.


    Yes I have heard of them discussing about it in whispers in their tent. They have prepared various of ns. And I told the others about what I heard so we prepared ns to stop them. It was fun. It make our boring journey to be much more entertaining.


    ...We¡¯re a circus troupe filled with sadists. And I love it.


    .....


    Two days have passed, and the three people who were supposed to be safe in our protection were visibly exhausted and stressed. They lost their appetite and were unable to sleep at all at night.


    ¡°They must be thinking that it¡¯s much better if they got arrested already instead of staying here,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°They can get arrested when we arrive in Mellian. But before we reach there, they will be our toys to y with. Though all we did is just to protect them from danger and forbid them to leave. We didn¡¯t do any crime at all,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re all still pretty evil to me though,¡± Victoria said.


    It doesn¡¯t matter how she view us as. What matter is that we find a way to enjoy ourselves from this boring journey.


    ¡°Well, I guess it¡¯s time for me to leave again. I¡¯ll tell Burnes that I¡¯m leaving for a while again,¡± I said.


    During the journey, I would use portal to move to another location to receive reports from other people about what they find or if there¡¯s anything that someone needs from me. Since maybe Albert or the other kings have something they want me to do. Either it¡¯s personal or it¡¯s rted to the cult. Though if it¡¯s personal, I would most likely refuse to do it.


    I have been doing it from the start and everyone in the circus knows about it. So I don¡¯t really need to ask for permission. But since we have three guests here, I don¡¯t want them to know that I have more secret than any of the circus members. They knew that I would sometime disappear, but that¡¯s all they know. Though they didn¡¯t even dare to ask me where I was. They are too scared.


    I left for a while and after knowing that nothing is happening, I returned back. Though not directly to where the carriage is.


    I left quite a far distance from where they were so the three guests won¡¯t know that I can use portal. And when I return to where I put a Blobby before, I¡¯m still way ahead of the carriage.


    ¡°Let¡¯s just walk back to the carriage. There¡¯s nothing interesting happening. Which is good...¡± I suddenly stopped talking and looked at some people in front of us. It¡¯s still quite far, but I can see them with my Divine Vision.


    ¡°You know what? I never like it whenever you suddenly stop talking. What is it that you see?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Cult members. They seem to be waiting for something ahead. Maybe there¡¯s supposed to be something that will pass the road and they are waiting for it,¡± I said.


    Those cult members are waiting in hiding next to the road. They didn¡¯t show themselves. So they are either trying to ambush us or they are waiting for something else. Unless they are both bandits and members of the cult, there¡¯s no reason they are waiting for us.


    I think we are fine. The strongest mage they have is around expert level. We can still defeat them since there are no master level mage. Without my help, it should be fine.


    But how they are waiting in front of us is suspicious. I¡¯ll tell the others about this after I eavesdrop on them a little bit and looked at what they have.


    I quickly returned to the carriage without being seen by the three guests.


    ¡°How many are they?¡± Burnes asked.


    ¡°Just twenty. But we can expect that they are all expert level mages,¡± I said.


    ¡°How do you know if they are all expert level mages? They are not supposed to have the explosive devices in their mouth at that level, right?¡± Burnes asked again.


    ¡°But all of them have the same explosive devices in their pocket. My guess is that they are waiting for the cult¡¯s new recruit,¡± I said as I informed him of what I¡¯ve heard.


    ¡°New recruits? If my guess is correct, then...¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s probably the bandits and our three guests. They might be on the way to meet those cult members and meet us on the way. They didn¡¯t want to miss the chance to rob us. If that¡¯s the case, it¡¯s no wonder why the small man is acting the calmest among the three. Although he also looked disturbed because they are forced to stay here, he¡¯s still the calmest. Though if he didn¡¯t say anything to the other two, I guess he kept it as secret from them,¡± I assumed that¡¯s what the small man is thinking. Although I have no evidence.


    ¡°I¡¯ll inform the others about this. You will exin it to Thomas and bring him to safety,¡± Burnes said as he left my carriage.


    ¡°You think those three is trying to enter the cult?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Whatever the case, battle is unavoidable. Even if those cult members just watching us passing, we will still fight them. There¡¯s no way I can leave any cult member alive for no reason,¡± I said.


    I then informed Thomas about it and opened a portal for him to Cassau where he will be safe. I also told Ka who was there that I¡¯m about to face some cult members. Those who heard it want to join the fight but I stopped them. It¡¯s best for the circus members to gain experience from fighting the cult as well since we can expect that there might be more that we find on our tour.


    It wasn¡¯t long since we decided to tour the continent and we have encountered some of the cult members already. And since we have killed a lot of their members, it wasn¡¯t wrong to assume that they are trying to recruit more people to their side.


    I¡¯ll try to capture them and bring them for interrogation. If that¡¯s not possible, then I will kill them.


    After talking to the others in Cassau, I pretend that I returned normally back to the carriage.


    ¡°It¡¯s rare to see you outside. Want some candy?¡± I said to the small man who is not inside one of the carriage as usual. Since he¡¯s acting like a child, I offered him a candy.


    ¡°No. I think it¡¯s about time that we leave on our own,¡± he said. He has stopped talking in a childish manner.


    When he said that, the other two was curious because all their n to leave has been stopped by us. They must be thinking that their boss still has another n. That¡¯s why their expression slightly brighten up.


    I just walked beside him while trying to talk to him until we finally get close to where the cult members are hiding.


    ¡°Hmm... I see. So the reason you¡¯re not inside the carriage is to let those people know that you are here. Hoping that they can save you. Am I right, the boss of bandits?¡± I said.


    ¡°You! How did you know!?¡±


    ¡°We¡¯re all performers here. All of us are good at acting,¡± I said.


    ¡°Tsk! Come here and save me!¡± the small man shouted.


    After shouting, the cult members then jumped out of their hiding location to see the situation.


    ¡°Save you? You¡¯ll die of blood loss before they could get close though,¡± I said confidently.


    ¡°What do you... AAAARGH!!¡±


    Only now the small man realized that I have sliced off both his arms. There¡¯s no more need to bring these people to Mellian. They deserve to die because they decided to join the cult. T small man¡¯s shout was to ask for help from the cult members who are hiding. That¡¯s enough to assume that he¡¯s with the cult already.


    ¡°Since you two don¡¯t seem to know anything, there¡¯s no need to let you live and bring you to the guards. If you meet my horse after death, be careful. He bites on people I hate,¡± I said before I cut off their neck.


    ¡°...You knew... everything?¡± the small man who is still alive asked in hisst breath.


    ¡°Not everything. Just enough to let me know that you are an enemy and have chosen to stay as our enemy.¡±


    I stopped caring for the small man and his friends, and turn my attention to the cult members. I don¡¯t think they are kind enough to let us pass just like that. Though I have decided that only one side will live while the other die.


    Let¡¯s try to capture them all first. Though deep in my heart, I wish that they would fight back as hard as they could so I can just kill them instead. But information is important so I¡¯ll try my best to let them live.

 Chapter 621

    Chapter 621: The Cult Members Can¡¯t Do Anything to Us


    ¡°Roy. Let some of them live so they can retreat. With that many people and preparation to meet that little man, there must be someone behind them. someone who can make expert level mages move,¡± Burnes said to me after I killed the small man.


    Hmm... that means I can kill some of them while letting the rest escape. That might be a better idea. Especially since it was suggested by Burnes who is actually a spy. He is much better at nning than me. At least he should be.


    ¡°Fine. If that¡¯s the case though, I guess it¡¯s best for me to not join the fight now. They still haven¡¯t noticed yet that I¡¯m an Aura user. I¡¯ll let you and the others fight them. I¡¯ll just show myself as an air mage who snipe them from afar. Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯ll watch your back,¡± I said as I pretend to grab something from inside the carriage, when in fact I just need to transform Victoria into a rifle.


    ¡°We¡¯ll take care of them. You just need to stop them from approaching us,¡± Burnes said as he stepped forward to prepare for the fight. Good thing that Thomas isn¡¯t here. Though I feel sorry for the horses who can¡¯t do anything here.


    Maybe that¡¯s the reason Burnes said that I need to stop the cult members from approaching us. We don¡¯t want the horses to escape after all.


    Burnes then stopped and chatted with the cult members there. About the reason why they are here.


    ¡°We¡¯re here because that little man who have just died from a weak Wind sh wanted to join us. He said that he will bring all the people in his bandit group to join us. But I guess that doesn¡¯t matter anymore. How about you guys? Do you want to join the True God Cult and worship the True God with us? You can¡¯t refuse because if you do, we will kill you,¡± one of the cult members said.


    .....


    Since he called it the True God Cult, that means he¡¯s truly from the evil cult. Only the members called it that way. And that means we don¡¯t need to hold back against them at all.


    ¡°You killed my friends and family! You used monsters stampede to destroy my city!¡±


    One of the member of the circus shouted instead of Burnes. I heard that he¡¯s a victim of the stampede. I guess it was right since I don¡¯t think this is an act.


    From what Burnes said, that guy entered the army to join in the fight against the cult. But he ispetent enough to be an agent so here he is. Though he¡¯s a good trapeze artist as well with his wind magic.


    ¡°Well, you heard him. We don¡¯t join with people who killed others for fun. We are a circus group who make people entertained with our performance. Not kill people for entertainment,¡± Burnes added.


    ¡°A circus troupe? Well, that doesn¡¯t matter. You¡¯re all all going to die here then,¡± the cult member said as he prepared to shoot a magic toward Burnes.


    But that didn¡¯t happen. Because as he stretched out his arm, I already shoot a Blobbybullet at his hand. When he noticed the bullet, he tried to pull back his arm and prepare to cast a barrier. But he was toote and my shot hit his hand.


    ¡°Don¡¯t you know? Because of the tournament, many air mages became interested in how Sara used air magic. She poprized the use of what was called as a gun. At the moment, there are not many air mages who used it. But at least we have some of them in the circus,¡± Burnes said.


    Sara poprized the use ofpressed air to shoot a projectile? I¡¯m the one teaching her! Wait, do Burnes and the others don¡¯t know that? And they think Sara did it because she¡¯s an agent and she¡¯s more popr than me?


    Seems like I have a lot to teach to them.


    Though it¡¯s true. I¡¯m not the only air mage in the circus troupe. There¡¯s a girl here who is an air mage as well. I heard that she joined Sara¡¯s ss after I left. And she learned it fast so she was sent to the circus.


    While I targeting the one in front of us, the girl is targeting the enemies behind us. Just the two of us, but it¡¯s enough to distract the enemies so our expert level mages can defeat them.


    Those who are just advanced level mages have difficulty fighting the enemies¡¯ expert level mages. But since our side learned magic control, we are not at a disadvantage.


    With me shooting at the guy¡¯s hand as a signal, the others cast their magic to the enemies. And I aimed my rifle to another target.


    This time, instead of injuring the enemies and get them to be killed by the other, I¡¯d rather shoot them in the head right away. But I have a better idea.


    Those cult members brought a number of explosive devices which was supposed to be installed inside the mouth of the new recruits. But since I killed their new recruits, those explosives are stored inside their pocket.


    What would happen if at least one of them receive powerful impact?


    And that¡¯s when I started to shoot at their pocket instead. And my first shot at their pocket ended up hitting one of the explosive devices and made it explode. The explosion which was supposed to only destroy a head became several times bigger because after the one I hit explodes, the explosion spread to the other explosives in the pocket and make the explosion bigger.


    ¡°Target their pockets! They have explosive stored there and a little bit of impact will kill them!¡±


    These cult members must not expected that we would find their weakness in an instant.


    With that information, those cult members focused more on protecting what¡¯s inside their pocket instead of killing us. And they didn¡¯t even expect that our expert level wind mage would prefer to decapitate their head with Wind sh. Making it easier to kill them.


    ¡°This sure is easy. Seems like I don¡¯t even need to help anymore,¡± I said as I stopped aiming at the enemies. There¡¯s no need because they are easily defeated after being told what their weakness is. They shouldn¡¯t havee here with pockets full of explosives. That¡¯s beyond stupid. Though they did that because they don¡¯t know that someone can see through the content of their pockets.


    ¡°And this is also good for everyone to gain experience. Since we¡¯re mostly doing espionage mission, we rarely fought enemies directly. There are also some other members who are close to expert level already. I bet once the tour is over, more than half of us would have reached expert level,¡± Burnes said.


    After the tournament is over, there are many people who became motivated and wanted to increase their level. Especially those who fight with us. And more and more have reached expert level. There will still be more of them appearing since I never stop providing the market with magic stones.


    I can find water element magic stones easily by diving to the sea. Though nowadays, I let Spot¡¯s children to do it since I¡¯m busy. As for other elements, there are many of them untouched in Monsters World. I just need to ce some Blobbies there and I can grab as many as I like.


    With that, I be even richer while I just need to spend mana to open a portal. And most of the magic stones were sold to the four kingdoms instead of the market. Only about ten percent magic stones were sold to the market instead of the kingdoms.


    And those kingdoms would provide magic stones to their army. Some of them would be send to agents working in the field. Like the members of the circus. That¡¯s how many more people can be expert level mages.


    And although I have given a lot to the kingdoms, I stored more of them for myself, my beloved, and my friends. We need to reach master level or maybe even beyond that.


    ¡°Oh, they started to escape. I will follow them from afar and see who they will contact,¡± I said.


    As much as we get stronger, the cult can also get stronger. They must have saved a lot of precious magic stones for a long time knowing that the Evil God has lived for a long time. He must have informed his worshipers where to mine them.


    And now that they know their power iscking, they will be focused more on raising master level mages before making their move.


    Maybe I will find a master level mage here. Not an artificial one, but a real one.


    I don¡¯t need to worry because I am already much stronger than a master level mage. But I need to be careful since I don¡¯t know what else they are hiding.


    ¡°Okay. Follow them carefully. If there is no one who noticed you, keep them until we prepared specialized agents to follow them. But if they have anyone who notice you, try your best to capture all of them. If that¡¯s not possible, then only kill those who give you a lot of trouble. If that¡¯s not possible, kill them all,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Okay. I¡¯ll be back soon. Orter. Depend on what I find. Bye!¡±


    I jumped on Ray¡¯s back with Victoria on my shoulder and we followed the escaping cult members from the sky. Far enough for them to not notice us.

 Chapter 622

    Chapter 622: Stalking the Escaping Cult Members


    ¡°Living armor?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Living armor,¡± I replied.


    While we chased after the escaping cult members from afar on Ray¡¯s back, I activated my bracelet to get myself be covered by the ck armor. We will face the enemies as living armors from now on. Though Victoria still hasn¡¯t transformed yet. She can do thatter if there are too many enemies.


    I don¡¯t know where they will escape to, but it must be somewhere where these cult members have prepared in advance. After all, they are running toward the same direction without even asking the others. They know where to go.


    Possibly, we will have to face many opponents. And just the three of us alone won¡¯t be enough. But I can just summon Shelia and Graham. They are already strong enough to face a master level mage on their own.


    ¡°Where are they going, I wonder?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Deep into the forest. From what I can see it¡¯s just more trees. Maybe they will go even further. But it¡¯s interesting to see that none of them were asking the others about where to go. That means the are already know where to go. We¡¯ll keep our distance as we follow them. I also need to be careful in case there¡¯s a master level mage in where they are heading to,¡± I said.


    .....


    ¡°You think there¡¯s one?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Yes. The enemies already know that their expert level mages are not enough to defeat a random group of travelers. They are either nning to bring reinforcement to fight us again because they don¡¯t want to let us live, or they will report it to their leader that they got defeated and suggesting to retreat from their base. If they are nning to fight us again, that means there should be at least one master level mage since they have that much confidence,¡± I said.


    With Ray¡¯s running ability, he doesn¡¯t leave a trace and doesn¡¯t even make any sound as we are chasing the enemies. He¡¯s such an amazing horse.


    He can just fly, but we decided that following them from the ground is easier because they can¡¯t see us.


    Still, even though they don¡¯t know that we are chasing after them, they didn¡¯t even look back to see if they are being chased or not. They must have prepared this n in advance. To ignore everything and retreat to where they have to meet up.


    After around fifteen minutes of running, they have all stopped all of a sudden, and looked back. I also stopped at a distance while hiding behind a tree so they won¡¯t see us.


    There are five people who are escaping. And they were running away on their own. But this time, all of them stopped at the same time without any sign ofmunication. Which mean this had to be nned as well.


    After five minutes break, they are all started running again. This time, they slightly changed their direction.


    I see. They were going the same direction at first in case we followed them, and after a while, and no one is following them, they will move to where they needed to gather. Though I need to be careful as well.


    What would they do if they saw me chasing after them? Fight back? Or retreat to different direction so they can bait us for an ambush?


    But I know that they still don¡¯t know about the fact that we are not chasing after them. Still, I can¡¯t let down my guard until I know clearly what they are going to do.


    They finally stopped at an open area. And this time, they didn¡¯t just stop. But they also talked with each other.


    They are still within the range of my hearing so let¡¯s hear what they want to say.


    ¡°How was a random group of travelers be that much powerful? They only have a few expert level mages, but they killed more while we couldn¡¯t even injure one?¡±


    ¡°They are suspicious. That¡¯s why it¡¯s best to just retreat.¡±


    ¡°Shouldn¡¯t we head back right away? It¡¯s not like those travelers are chasing after us. From how much carriages they are taking, I guess they are not someone who travel for fun. They must be doing it for a job or something. So they don¡¯t have any leisure to chase after us even if they know that we are from the cult. Maybe as they say, they are a circus troupe.¡±


    ¡°That shouldn¡¯t be the case. They might be chasing after us since one of them hate us. Let¡¯s just stick to the retreat n. We will wait here for one hour, and if there¡¯s no one is chasing after us, we will regroup with the others. Because back then we werecking in preparation for the chaos during the tournament, we failedpletely. We need to be more careful from now on.¡±


    I see. So that¡¯s why they are being extremely careful. Because of me.


    Well, that means I need to stay here and wait for an hour before they finally regroup with the others.


    ¡°But isn¡¯t it good that we failed that n? Because of that, the higher-ups pushed the n to increase the number of master level mages. Many excellent expert level mages would be given a chance to prove themselves by given more resources and to improve to master level as soon as possible. Even if we fail now, as long as we are alive, it won¡¯t be long until we can get recognition from above and given the chance to be master level mages.¡±


    The other cult members there smiled at the chance of reaching master level.


    Hearing them talking, I guess I was right that there should be at least one master level mage in where they will regroup. And they have lost so many people so I don¡¯t think anyone would be stupid enough to kill those expert level mages. They need to be nurtured so they can be master level mages.


    This is what I heard from ancient Aura users. In the past, many kingdoms have a lot of master level mages. But they are still weaker than expert level mages who cultivated diligently because their magic level were increased in a hurry.


    In that case, these cult members¡¯ master level mages should be around those ancient kingdoms¡¯ soldier. They are strong enough to be called master level mages, but still weaker than properly trained expert level mages.


    Though in this era, many expert level mages are way too weakpared to the past. Any of those weak master level mage should be enough to even destroy a kingdom. But because of my interference, they are not strong enough to do so.


    Good thing I never asked the other to hurriedly improve their level. I don¡¯t want Ka, Ang, or the others to lose so much potential because they are in a hurry. They have so much potential. They could even reach that stage beyond master level. Which we need a new name for.


    After one hour of thinking of a name that fit for the stage beyond master level, those cult members finally made their move.


    ¡°We¡¯re leaving now?¡±


    ¡°Yeah. I don¡¯t think they can catch up to us even if they are chasing us. Maybe they got lost and give up. I also can¡¯t sense anyone near us. Let¡¯s retreat.¡±


    Finally. They are regrouping with other cult members. I need to gain my distance from them in case they have a master level mage.


    Thanks to my training with Shadow, I can hide my presence better with using Aura. It makes me harder for even master level mage to find.


    Back then, just one nce through building, and even artificial master level mage can sense that I¡¯m looking at them. But now, a real master level mage won¡¯t be able to sense me unless they are stronger than average master level mage.


    Those cult members are flying this time. With the help of two wind mages among them. They only fly a bit higher from the trees so they can hide. But there¡¯s no way for them to hide from me.


    I followed after them to outside the forest. And there¡¯s a vige there which was supposed to not exist in the map.


    After that time in the fake vige, I told the kings that if there are any new viges built, they need to investigate it. But I don¡¯t think this vige has been investigated. This is too new.


    Good thing the vige is not that big. This way, even from distance, I can still see the whole vige.


    I can see a man inside a hut in the middle of the vige where the escaping cult members are entering. He must be the leader in this area.


    Since I can¡¯t get closer to them, I am just looking around the vige after I reported everything to Sonia who will inform the others. Though they don¡¯t need to do anything since I¡¯m here. Unless I asked for help of course.


    For a small vige, there are too many people there. Maybe they are like the small man and his group of bandits. People who want to join the cult. The new recruits.


    If I get closer, the master level mage will know that an individual just entered the vicinity. They will get suspicious. So I can only watch them from afar.


    Although we have killed many of them, their number is still growing. This is disturbing. Because that means there are still that many people who believed in their cause.


    ...Should I kill them all?

 Chapter 623

    Chapter 623: The Raid on the Cult¡¯s Vige


    I keep watching the vige to see what will happen. There are too many people here so they should be thinking of moving somewhere soon. Or maybe they will send the new recruits to a mission somewhere from here.


    The people I chased are talking to one man inside the biggest hut in the vige. They must be exining how a circus troupe is suspicious because we are too strong and even have some expert level mages.


    The man who seem to be the leader is angry and he pped those cult members one by one. The p was too strong that even without using magic, those people got blown away and hit the wall. The sound was loud enough to gain attention from everyone in the vige to hear.


    He is actually a master level mage. I was just assuming that there will be a master level mage, but I never thought that there¡¯s already one of them. There might be more, but if I investigate any closer than this, I will get found out.


    Whenever a mage increase their level, their physical ability also increased as well. So, even expert level mages can win in a fight against any guard from Mellian who have received training from me to improve their muscle. But master level mage is much stronger than expert level even in their physical ability.


    But of course they can¡¯tpare with Aura user or powerful monsters. Though they can just use magic from afar.


    That one master level mage should be enough to destroy the whole circus group. But if he faces anyone from those who have trained with the ancient Aura users or trained with those two ghosts who have reached a stage beyond master level, he won¡¯t be a match to us even though his level is higher.


    .....


    The man was angry, but he couldn¡¯t get too far in his anger probably because he knows that they need more people. He can¡¯t kill them in his anger.


    He then gave some instructions to them and called the other senior members. Not the new recruits obviously.


    ¡°Victoria, should we kill them all? I think capturing even one of them will be difficult. Especially the master level mage. Even if we wrap a cor on his neck, his power is enough to break it,¡± I said.


    ¡°There¡¯s a master level mage here? Seems like your journey topletely destroy the cult will be harder. How many of them are master level mage?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°I only see one. The man inside that big hut in the middle of the vige. He¡¯s calling other cult members inside after hearing of the failure of the people we chased,¡± I exined.


    ¡°Then we just need to grab some people who are gathering in that hut. The rest can be killed. I think you just need to call Shelia and Graham. Even though they outnumber us, they won¡¯t be able to win. And they can¡¯t escape as well since I will be with Ray to make sure no one can escape. You just need to knock them out, and the rest will be easy,¡± Victoria suggested.


    ¡°You don¡¯t want to be the one charging in?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. I can¡¯t do much without Ray. And since he¡¯s the fastest, I should use him to the best of his ability,¡± Victoria said as she transform herself into her armored form.


    ¡°Alright. I¡¯ll call Shelia and Graham right away. Look carefully and see if there¡¯s anyone leaving that hut after I summoned those two. Because once I used my magic, the master level mage should notice right away. If he¡¯s a wind mage, he can easilye here or escape,¡± I warned Victoria before I jumped down from Ray¡¯s back to prepare to summon the werewolf and the archangel.


    I watched until all the important members of the cult entered the room where the master level mage is. Once I summoned Shelia and Graham, even without using the portal, the master level mage should be able to sense my magic. And if there are other master level mage there, I can see them as well.


    Now! All of them have entered the room!


    ¡°Come out! Shelia! Graham!¡±


    I summoned my two familiars simultaneously while watching what¡¯s going on inside the hut.


    And I can see the man who is the boss of this vige is looking at us. Other than him, there is another person looking this way. It seems like there are two master level mages here. Good thing both of them are in the same room.


    ¡°I can sense two people are looking this way. What¡¯s the n?¡± Shelia asked right away.


    As soon as they got summoned here without warning, they must have expected something like this to happen. Well, that¡¯s to be expected knowing that they have known me for so long.


    ¡°Kill everyone outside that hut in the middle. As for the people inside, if they are too difficult to capture, just kill them. Seems like there are only two master level mages here so it won¡¯t be a problem for us. At least try to capture those two and not kill them,¡± I said to my familiars.


    ¡°Then I will take care of those outside the hut first. Just me and my shadow clones are enough if there are no master level mage there,¡± Graham said.


    ¡°I have marked the smell of the two master level mages! I will take care of them!¡± Shelia said as she run toward the hut.


    ¡°Then I will capture as many as I can and help Sheliater. Although Shelia is strong and can defeat two master level mages, she will need some time until she can defeat them. As for Victoria and Ray, they will watch from the outside and make sure that no one escapes. Let¡¯s go!¡±


    After a short briefing, I can see the cult members are making their actions. The two master level mages areing here. With the woman, the second master level mage, flying here with wind magic, and the man, the boss in this vige, is moving the ground underneath him to travel.


    They are quite fast. But Shelia is faster. She has grown much stronger after sparring with the ancient Aura users. And after the fight against Timmy, she has grown even more by asking Ang or the others for a spar, or training by herself.


    Shelia quickly smashed down the flying master level mage toward the direction of the other master level mage, and faces the two of them alone. Though she¡¯s still being surrounded by other enemies, she doesn¡¯t care.


    Because while the enemies are confused, Graham¡¯s clones were already there killing those new recruits. Some of them were even killed while they are putting an explosive device into their mouth.


    Graham has also grown as well. Not only that he can make more clones, each of them are strong on their own as well. Facing so many enemies there is easy for him and his clones.


    Victoria is still not busy since the enemies are in confusion. As for me, I¡¯m already inside the hut while the cult members didn¡¯t even notice. They were too focused on Shelia and Graham, so they can¡¯t sense me even though I no longer hide my presence.


    ¡°Hello, annoying people! If you don¡¯t want to die, then surrender. Though you might faint anyway since I¡¯m using sleeping gas in this room,¡± I said casually.


    I don¡¯t need to pretend that I¡¯m a living armor, so I can talk. The armor is on because I need to get used to it more often since I will move while wearing it more often. Wearing it and wearing Victoriarmor is different after all.


    ¡°You!¡±


    One of the cult members was preparing to attack me with his magic. But I knocked him out in an instant with just one punch to his temple. My punch is strong enough to shook his brain, and with the sleeping gases spread in this room, he faints.


    ¡°Since none of you are master level mages, I¡¯ll put a Magic Restricting Cor on you so you won¡¯t be able to use magic. If you surrender yourself, you can put one on your own instead of having me putting on around your neck,¡± I said after I wrapped a cor around the neck of the guy I knocked out.


    I also throw many cors in case they want to wrap it around their own neck. But instead of wearing them, they became even more hostile.


    ¡°Sigh... I guess I need to hit all of you at least once. If you die, it¡¯s natural. My punch is that strong after all,¡± I said.


    I don¡¯t need to use weapon. With my speed, I can reach them before they cast their magic. So a long range attack won¡¯t be needed.


    I knocked out almost half of them quickly. It¡¯s also because the sleeping gases make them sleepy and they can¡¯t make a proper move or think carefully because of it.


    As for the other half, they tried to escape from the range of the sleeping gas and attack me from distance. But they got knocked out before they can aim at me. Even outside of the gas range, they are still within my range.


    I looked outside and see Victoria and Graham have defeated a lot of enemies as well. This is easy.


    ¡°Let¡¯s increase the pace, shall we?¡±


    With the speed iparably from when I arrive, I defeated the rest of the cult members easily. Now, only Shelia¡¯s side remain. Though I need to wrap cors around these unconscious people¡¯s neck first.


    Sigh... they should have agreed when I told them to wrap the cor on their own neck...

 Chapter 624

    Chapter 624: Capturing Master Level Mages


    Even though I¡¯m unarmed, I defeated all the cult members I faced easily. Some tried to escape, but I¡¯m faster than them. And those who were too far from me and tried to escape, were killed by Victoria.


    Victoria has got the hang of using Aura again. Though she said that she¡¯s much weaker than when she was a human. Maybe that¡¯s because she¡¯s a slime.


    Monsters can use magic. But even after asking the ancient Aura users, I have never heard of any monsters capable of using Aura. Maybe Aura can only be used by humans.


    Although Ray has Aura stored in his body, he can¡¯t use it. But he can transfer Aura to me, Victoria, or even Sonia. Though Sonia needs to be careful because Aura can exorcise her.


    Victoria and Sonia can use Aura because they have experience in using it. But no matter how much they tried, they can¡¯t be Aura users again.


    Maybe I¡¯m right that only humans can have Aura in their body and use them. After all, Ray have Aura but can¡¯t use it. And Victoria and Sonia are monsters and they don¡¯t have Aura but can use it when they are riding or touching Ray because they used to be humans. They could even use it if I transferred some of my Aura to them as well.


    Many things need to be experimented about Aura, but I think it¡¯s fine to not do that. After all, I have decided that I won¡¯t teach Aura to other people. Because it¡¯s too difficult to train them without risking your life.


    .....


    ...It¡¯s just that the people in the past learned Aura because they are crazy. Or either because they are in war and needed to be stronger.


    And I don¡¯t have the same ability as Victoria¡¯s master who can tell if someone can be Aura user or not. Teaching people to use Aura without knowing full well about it is too risky.


    Considering that Aura is too strong of a power as well, it¡¯s best if there¡¯s no one else who can be Aura user in the future. It will be too dangerous if there are other Aura users since Aura can be used for many things.


    Though if I have kids in the future, I will at least get them to learn how I manifest my Aura for the first time. And I hope with my good parenting, they won¡¯t cause trouble whether they be Aura users or not. But that¡¯s for the future. I still don¡¯t have a kid yet.


    After stopping the enemies on my side, there¡¯s only Shelia left who is fighting two master level mages. A man and a woman. The man is an earth mage and the woman is a wind mage.


    ¡°How could this be? Everyone is defeated with just four people and some clones?¡± the woman asked.


    ¡°Not just that. Even when we used our full strength, we can¡¯t do anything against that dog. These are the enemies we have to fight? I should have picked the other choice and help the Evil God instead of leading these ipetent bastards,¡± the man said regretfully.


    ¡°Yeah. If I know the enemy is too strong, I would have picked that choice after bing a master level mage,¡± the woman said.


    Hmm? There are other choice?


    Those two doesn¡¯t seem to realize that I can hear them. Or maybe they just don¡¯t care anymore. But that¡¯s good. At least I can hear a little bit about them.


    Seems like any cult members, after reaching master level, they will be given two options. One is to lead people to do something, like how these two are trying to recruit more people. And two is to help the Evil God directly. Though I don¡¯t know what they will be doing. But my guess is that helping the Evil God directly will make the Evil God able to move freely.


    It has been so long since I stopped the stampede. The first big n of the cult. And the Evil God should have known that the cult members are too weak so he needs to make a move. But so far, he never make any move.


    I don¡¯t think that¡¯s because he doesn¡¯t want to move. After all, if he¡¯s strong enough to call himself as a god, he should have known that he alone can destroy everything in this continent. But the fact that he didn¡¯t make any move means that for some reason, he can¡¯t do it. And that¡¯s why he needs master level mages to help him until he can finallye out and y.


    Seems like we have to capture these two to learn more. From how things are going, I don¡¯t think Shelia is stupid enough to kill them. But I¡¯ll back her up just in case.


    ¡°Graham! Victoria! Gather all the unconscious cult members in one spot and don¡¯t forget to bind them. Ignore those who are dead,¡± I said as I give Victoria a lot of Magic Restricting Cors.


    ¡°Oh, you already done?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Yeah. It was easy since the master level mages are busy with Shelia. Those two might have important information, so I will capture them with Shelia,¡± I said.


    Shelia wasn¡¯t surprised that I came even though she said that she wants to take care of the two of them by herself.


    ¡°Herees another one. This one is wearing an armor and act as a living armor,¡± the woman said.


    ¡°Wait! He¡¯s not using magic when he defeated the others. He must be the one that the Archbishop warned us about. The Aura user,¡± the man said.


    ¡°They exist!? I thought they are just fairy tale! Does it mean that we have no way of winning?¡± the woman asked.


    ¡°There¡¯s only one thing left for us to. For the sake of the True God!¡±


    The man then put his hand in his pocket where there are many explosive devices there. Just how much do they love explosion?


    He must be thinking of suicide but I won¡¯t let him die. I grabbed a kunai from my pocket and threw it toward the man¡¯s arm. Before the hand reached his head to kill himself, I managed to cut it off cleanly with the kunai. It¡¯s a good throwing weapon.


    Without telling her, Shelia quickly run toward the man and hit him in the sr plexus and then to his temple. He got knocked out and fell to the ground. Leaving the woman alone still standing there dumbfounded.


    ¡°You¡¯d better give up or losing your arm is the least of your concern. I won¡¯t let you kill yourself until we have interrogated you and you tell us everything,¡± I said to the woman.


    ¡°...Seems like I can¡¯t even kill myself. Aura user is really too strong for us. Fine, I will surrender,¡± the woman said as she raises her hands up.


    That¡¯s good. But that doesn¡¯t mean I won¡¯t do anything to her. I still knock her out so it will be easier to bring her in for questioning.


    ¡°Ugh... Why?¡±


    Does she really think I won¡¯t hit her? Well, she¡¯s wrong.


    Now, we have the two master level mages. But seeing how there could be two master level mages on the road between Melk and Mellian, there could be more of them in other ces.


    This is getting harder and harder. Not the fight. These master level mages are still easy to defeat. But other people will have difficulty defeating even these weak master level mages.


    ¡°For now, let¡¯s bring them to the prison in Tatrama. Albert will take care of the rest,¡± I said as I opened a portal.


    The portal is connected to the prison and the warden has gotten used to me suddenly appear when he noticed that I opened a portal. I told him to get the two master level mages to be put in separate prison from the rest. They were also too strong for a normal bind, so they got chained by a strong metal chain instead.


    Though those metal chain is too heavy for the warden or other people to bind people with, so the one who did it was Shelia and I who are strong enough to do so.


    ...I actually wanted to do it on my own, but Victoria told Shelia to bind the woman instead. It¡¯s not like I want to touch her or something. She is an enemy.


    ¡°Good. Victoria, we¡¯ll go back to the vige. Shelia, Graham, good job. You can return back to your world now.¡±


    The werewolf and the archangel then returned back to their world. And Victoria, Ray, and I returned to the vige to investigate everything.


    I also opened a portal to the circus group who are continuing their journey without me so I can get Burnes and several other agents toe with me to investigate the vige.


    After taking everything that seems to be suspicious, I transported them all for the others in Tatrama for the people there to investigate. And we then returned back to the carriage.


    ¡°For them to send two master level mages in one location... Seems like we will continue encountering more of them during our tour,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Yeah. But as long as I¡¯m with you guys, you don¡¯t have anything to worry about,¡± I said confidently.


    The journey to Mellian continued without any obstacles. And before we reach Mellian, I transported Thomas back with us.


    Next is our show in Mellian. I can be a clown again!

 Chapter 625

    Chapter 625: Stampede in Mellian


    The show in Mellian was done well. There was no obstacle at all. Mellian is at peace without any visible cult members, or any spies at all.


    The only thing bothering me was Hill. I need to make up various reason why I have to avoid him. Though he believed it when I said that I haven¡¯t finished taking a look a the city yet. I¡¯m a man on a mission after all.


    Though Victoria is spending a lot of her time hanging out with Hill. That is actually terrifying. I don¡¯t want to know what they are discussing about. Victoria then told me without having me asked her that she was actually asking for new materials for her popr novel. That is scary.


    There is no one acting suspicious in Mellian. Even though there were two master level mages on the way, the city is safe. At least even though I¡¯m showing myself and didn¡¯t intentionally hide myself, there were no one who can sense me. Not only this city is safe from master level mages, there were also no expert level mages here.


    Hill said that there are some people in his squad who almost reached expert level including himself. But there were no expert level mages at all.


    After we finished our show and we are making our preparation to leave Mellian, we have no choice but to dy our journey for a few more days because of a stampede.


    I¡¯m still a hunter after all, so Victoria and I got summoned by the guild who informed us that there will be another monsters stampedeing. Though the guild master told us in a very casual manner. Showing us how often this city experience monsters stampede.


    .....


    Mellian is known to be a city that experienced monsters stampede too often. It¡¯s because the city is located in a ce close to where many monsters are nesting. And it became a paradise for hunters who want to gain experience in fighting. Especially after the tournament.


    After watching the tournament from the big screen, many hunters were motivated to be even stronger. They watched the interview with the participants including Ka and Shirley, those I missed because I was busy, and they learned that just cultivating alone won¡¯t be enough to get stronger. So, many hunters then moved to Mellian because this city was well known for having a stampede more often than other city.


    Though I think that is not a good choice.


    Mellian has experienced many stampede every year from possibly, the overpoption of the monsters. They breed like crazy. And even then, even though there were no expert level mages, the city is still standing. That means just advanced level mages are enough to stop the stampede.


    If those hunters want to get stronger, they should go outside and fight stronger opponents instead of waiting for the stampede and participate in the defense of the city. There are many stronger monsters than those that appeared here.


    In any case, the circus can¡¯t move because of the stampede. Those who are also a hunter were asked to help with the defense of the city. Though only the advanced level mages would go.


    Those who are expert level mages got permission from Hill to not participate unless the monsters are too strong for the people.


    It has to be said that this is not Melk. This is Mellian. And unlike Oleg, Hill shouldn¡¯t have that much influence to the people in this city. But he has enough power to tell the lord of the city what to do.


    ...Should I say that the lord was pressing his back to the wall when he met Hill?


    In any case, I don¡¯t have anything to do except to watch how the monsters stampede is going.


    ¡°Roy! You should be fighting as well!¡±


    While I was inside a closed restaurant eating some meal after I forced the restaurant owner to stay open by saying that I will pay thrice the original price, Hill entered the restaurant and shouted at me. the waitress was so shocked that she dropped the meal I ordered.


    ¡°Ah, you can cook it again. I¡¯ll pay for the dropped one as well,¡± I said to the waitress who then left to the kitchen.


    ¡°Forget about the meal! You should be fighting as well!¡± Hill shouted.


    ¡°Wasn¡¯t it you who said that expert level mages should only watch?¡± Iined.


    ¡°Yeah, but you are an Aura user!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m an Aura Master now. Though I¡¯m also an advanced level in my air element, and expert level in my summoning. I don¡¯t need to participate, right?¡± I said.


    ¡°Really? Does that mean you can summon four familiars? I already know Victoria, the werewolf, and the angel. What¡¯s the other one? A vampire?¡± Hill asked curiously. He¡¯s not angry anymore for me not participating in the defense.


    ¡°A horse. Anyway, I have told you that I will be spreading the fame of the living armor, right? Victoria will do it instead of me. She¡¯s riding the horse and will fight the monsters when we are pushed back. Though seeing that this city has a lot of experience dealing with monsters stampede, I don¡¯t think there will be a need for her toe out,¡± I said.


    ¡°Maybe you¡¯re right. But as someone who have been living in this city since I was born, and the guard of this city, I know that the strength of the monsters during monsters stampede has increasedtely. That¡¯s why I want you to participate,¡± Hill said.


    Since he¡¯s not ying around like usual, I know that he¡¯s being serious about it.


    I see. The strength of the monsters have increased, huh? That might be a problem for other hunters. But other than me, there are some expert level mages from the circus. I think I don¡¯t need to worry much about it.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. There are other expert level mages in the circus. They are watching different side of the city. They should be able to move quickly in case we are getting pushed back. And I will also make a move if that happens,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Not convincing since you¡¯re saying it here with a table full of dishes. But I know I can trust you. I¡¯ll take my leave then. I will be busy even after the stampede, so I might not be able to send you off when you¡¯re leaving.¡±


    Hill then leave the restaurant as the waitress brought me my newly cooked meal. I guess this will be myst meal before leaving.


    Since Hill is worried that much and asked me to join, I guess shouldn¡¯t be the only one rxing.


    After finishing my meal, I paid the bill and left the restaurant to look around.


    The hunters and many of the guards are outside the city defending the wall from the approaching monsters. But there are still some evil people who tried to make use of the situation to steal from the empty houses.


    Many of the citizens were evacuated even though the stampede were always stopped before the monsters could break the wall. They prefer to go to the shelter instead of staying home.


    In fact, the shelter looks like a ce for pic now. I think they don¡¯t think of it as evacuating. The citizens are thinking of it as a ce to socialize. I guess the people of Mellian have strong mentality.


    Even in the empty houses, they know what will happen so there were no valuables there. The thieves can only stole what? Table? Chair? Maybe a pillow?


    That¡¯s why there are so few guards patrolling the city. Those thieves won¡¯t be able to steal anything precious.


    And even if they do, they won¡¯t be able to sell them in this city. They need to go to another city to sell them or they will be found out.


    It will be hrious if the thief is selling a stolen pillow, only for the customer nearby said that it was his missing pillow. I¡¯d like to see that happen. I have heard such thing actually happened from one of the guards who were training.


    For now, there¡¯s no need for me to do anything. Victoria can be the one appearing as the living armor and protect the city if it¡¯s too much for the others. At least she can appear once or twice defeating powerful monsters so the rumor will be spread.


    I looked at the north gate and see that the battle is finally happening. Over there, the hunters, the guards, and members of the circus have started fighting.


    ¡°Well, seems like there¡¯s no need for me to participate at all,¡± I said all of a sudden when I stand next to Hill.


    ¡°Whoa! You surprise me there! It¡¯s good to see you here, but are you sure we¡¯re doing fine?¡± Hill asked.


    ¡°So far, you¡¯re doing well. I¡¯ll go check the other ces after this. By the way have you ever given a quest to eradicate the source of the stampede?¡± I asked Hill.


    ¡°There was one in the past. But it ended with failure and only brought bigger disaster to the city as they brought more monsters back to the city. So we stopped making the quest. What? You want to participate?¡± Hill asked.


    ¡°How about you send the quest directly to my n. I think Ka and the others will be interested in it. I¡¯m busy doing shows so I can¡¯t join. But they should be able to handle it. Though it might result in no more stampede. And there will be less hunters in the city. If you¡¯re okay with it, you can send a formal questter,¡± I said to Hill before leaving another location.


    I can tell that Hill is pondering if it¡¯s a good idea to make a quest or not. Well, he will discuss it with the lords and important people in this city.


    And since I¡¯m busy with the circus, I don¡¯t have to do anything with the n for now. They can decide for themselves if they want toe or not.

 Chapter 626

    Chapter 626: Living Armor Made His Appearance


    The monstersing from the stampede are mostly goblins. Many of them are ordinary goblins that most beginner level mage could defeat easily, but there are some powerful variants of goblins as well. And they outnumber the hunters and the guards.


    If the expert level mages are allowed to fight as well, it could be over soon. They can use arge-scale magic that would kill most of them, if not all, easily. But we are not supposed to help unless we are losing.


    But the enemies are goblins. I don¡¯t think there will be any need for us to join.


    That¡¯s what I thought until I see some more powerful goblin variants appearing. Though it¡¯s not as if I have to participate.


    We might get pushed back a little, but if there are any excellent mage here, even if they are just advanced level, they should be able to handle those powerful variants easily.


    If there aren¡¯t any excellent mage? Then the expert level mages have no choice but to participate.


    But still, this is so many goblins. I have checked everywhere outside the city and only see green everywhere. Not the grass. But goblins.


    .....


    Now that I have looked around, let¡¯s go back to Hill and asked him about the goblins.


    ¡°Hill, why is there so many goblins? Is the stampede always caused by goblins?¡± I asked Hill who ismanding his squad to fend off the approaching goblins.


    ¡°So it¡¯s goblins this time, huh? The most likely reason is because of overpoption. Their nest must have been filled with too many goblins so they left their nest looking for another ce. And they found this city,¡± Hill said.


    ¡°Is this normal for overpoption to be this much? If so, that means they have a really huge nest somewhere near this city, right? Isn¡¯t it dangerous to leave it be?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Didn¡¯t I tell you before how we couldn¡¯t find anything? Maybe because it¡¯s too far and too dangerous to go to for normal hunters. If it¡¯s you though, I bet you can find it in a minute. Anyway, I¡¯d like to offer a normal request to your n after this stampede is over. To destroy at least a few nests of some type of monster,¡± Hill said.


    ¡°Is there other type of monsters that attacked this city?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Goblins are the most difficult ones. Because once they attacked, there will be too many of them. Each time they attack, there will be more of them. As for other monsters, there are orcs, wolves, rabbits, and mostly beast type monsters. But the orcs won¡¯t attack us in huge number. And the rabbits woulde with more numbers than the goblins. But they are easy to defeat. So, maybe I¡¯d like to ask your n to destroy the goblins¡¯ nest and probably another monsters¡¯ nest,¡± Hill said.


    Rabbits? Well, ain¡¯t that cute to be surrounded by rabbits?


    Still, if there are that many monsters¡¯ nest nearby, isn¡¯t this city always in danger? The stampede aside, if there are monsters¡¯ nest nearby, they should have much more powerful monsters in the nest. If we leave them be, the city will be in danger of getting destroyed sooner orter.


    I guess it¡¯s best to contact Ka and the others sooner.


    ¡°Hill, I have another suggestion. Once Ka and the otherse here, they will meet other hunters who wanted to be as strong as they are. And they will tell them that they can¡¯t just wait for stampede to happen so they can get experience. I think it¡¯s best for all the monsters nest nearby to be destroyed so the city will be safe. Ka and the rest will do it. Probably we will ask some hunters to tag along so they can watch how strong they are. And they will show them that they can get stronger by fighting stronger monsters. Not fighting the same monsters all the time. That way, there will be less people hoping for stampede,¡± I suggested to Hill.


    ¡°Hmm... there will be less huntersing to Mellian. But if there are at least one or two monsters¡¯ nest left behind, stampede could still happen and the guild can still make new quests. And most hunters will get stronger as well if they started leaving the city. Giving us more strength to face not only powerful monsters, but also the cult. I think that¡¯s a good idea. But we also need to be careful of those leaving hunters in case they meet members of the cult who promise them power. For me, I think it¡¯s best if these hunters just stay here and wait for stampede to happen,¡± Hill exined.


    Oh, wait. That¡¯s right. The cult is annoying.


    If they know that hunters are leaving Mellian to get stronger, they can approach those hunters and tell them that they can get stronger if they join the cult. That is annoying. Making more enemies for me.


    ¡°I¡¯ll just get Ka here right away. I¡¯ll tell her everything and you can discuss it with her together with the lord. I¡¯m not good at nning things like this,¡± I said as I left Hill to continue fighting.


    I entered an empty house and opened a portal to get Ka. Though some other people areing as well.


    ¡°So, themon urrence of stampede might actually work for us, huh?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°Maybe. Even in my past life, I have never heard of the cult trying to take over Mellian. Though they are strong enough to do so. It must be because the monsters near the city are too annoying. What do you think?¡± I asked for what her n is.


    But before she could answer, Candy spoke first.


    ¡°I¡¯d like to say that there have been many agents investigating. Because we are suspicious if the monsters¡¯ nests near Mellian are rted to the cult or not. And even though we found where some nests are, we don¡¯t know if it¡¯s a good idea to destroy them or not. But my suggestion if we decided to destroy their nest is to let some monsters alive so they can continue wander around nearby. That way, the guild will still be able to make more requests,¡± Candy suggested.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯d like to look around first before making ns. Is Ray avable?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°He¡¯s with Victoria looking for the battlefield. I¡¯ll summon them after we left this house and I will swap ce with them so I can be the one acting as the lliving armor,¡± I said.


    Once we left the house, I opened a portal to where Victoria and Ray are hiding. Victoria will join Ka and Ray looking for monsters¡¯ nest while Candy will ask the agents staying in Mellian. The rest who were curious returned back to Cassau since they think that we are enough to take care of things here.


    Now that I have heard from Candy, I guess I should take a look at the monsters¡¯ nest as well. Butter. Not now. There are goblins everywhere.


    The hunters are doing well against the goblins. And after knowing that they are just goblins, they let down their guard and some of them were killed. How stupid. But that¡¯s still not a reason for me toe out. It¡¯s their own mistake.


    Soon after, some powerful goblins five times the size of average goblinse out. The hunters and the guards were shocked. But the circus members, even though they are just advanced level, are doing so well. Their teamwork made them easily defeat those monsters.


    Seeing how the circus members were that strong while they are at the same level, the hunters be motivated to continue fighting. I guess this side will be fine then. Those big goblins are the strongest here. Let¡¯s move to another ce.


    This time, the hunters are in trouble. There were more powerful monsters here. Even though they have Burnes, some circus members, and some experienced agents as well, they have trouble because there are some goblins who can use magic to create barrier that can block all magic attack. I guess I should go.


    Oh, wait. The expert level mage is making his move. And his magic is stronger than the barrier so he can kill the goblins easily.


    After that goblin died, the rest was easy. I guess I don¡¯t need to take part here as well.


    I move around and returned back to where Hill ismanding. The goblins here are much stronger and even though the expert level mage is already helping, they are still in trouble.


    So Ie out wearing my full armor and moving around quickly while shing all the zombies I can reach. I only move fast enough for everyone to see so they can spread the rumor.


    The expert level mage who is also a circus member then shouted my introduction.


    ¡°That¡¯s the living armor who stopped the giant smander in Melk! He¡¯s helping us!¡±


    Well, thanks for the introduction. At least there shouldn¡¯t be anyone stupid enough to attack me.


    I killed the strongest goblins but there are still a lot of them. Since I have made my appearance, it¡¯s fine for me to go around openly and kill more goblins. The rumor about me has been spread to other ces as well who are still fighting the goblins.


    With this, the stampede is over. There were some casualties, but we have done very well despite the expert level mages and Iing outter.


    Next, let¡¯s hear what Ka need to say. I¡¯ll wait for her to return.

 Chapter 627

    Chapter 627: After the Stampede in Mellian


    Thanks to my help, the stampede was over. All of the monsters died. And this is the first time in Mellian that there are so many casualties from the stampede.


    The hunters here have gotten used to it. Fighting the weak monsters in stampede. So they can¡¯t grow stronger. And when faced against goblins, they would let down their guard. Resulting in their own death.


    That¡¯s why I said that if they want to get stronger, they can¡¯t stay in one ce for too long. They should venture out to the world and face stronger monsters. Though if they don¡¯t want to get stronger, they can just stay in Mellian or even not fight at all.


    On that note, I don¡¯t want to get stronger. I have to get stronger. It¡¯s different.


    Now that the battle is over. The hunters looked around to see that their fellow hunters are dead. As for the guards, they already know that it can happen. I guess despite how I see Hill as someone who likes to y around, he¡¯s still a capable man who can lead his men.


    Some people died. But for me, the number of casualty is lower than it should be thanks to me joining in. I say that we have done a good job.


    The aftermath of the stampede was done quickly. The guards along with the hunters and even some civilians are helping since it¡¯s safe already.


    .....


    As for me, I¡¯m staying in Hill¡¯s office together with Hill waiting for Ka to return.


    ¡°She¡¯s not back yet?¡± Hill asked.


    ¡°No. Victoria told me that there are too many monsters¡¯ nest nearby. As for the goblins, overpoption was indeed one of the cause. But not the overpoption of goblin alone. Instead, it was the orcs. The orcs who left their nest because their nest can¡¯t hold that much orcs attacked the goblins¡¯ nest. Most of the goblins run further deep into the forest. And part of them wereing here,¡± I said.


    Those are the things that Ka and Victoria found while they are investigating. Their investigation skill is much better than the agents specialized in it because Ray was just too fast. He can just go further if there¡¯s nothing to see. But the agents¡¯ sight were limited. And it will be too dangerous for them to stay too long out there.


    ¡°...Fuck! If that¡¯s just small part of the goblins, it means that there are more of them, right? Just that many is enough to kill some of us! That does it! I will ask the lord to get rid of all monsters¡¯ nest nearby! There won¡¯t be any more stampede anytime soon!¡± Hill shouted in his office.


    ¡°Let¡¯s wait for Ka first. She should know what to do. Just in case, I¡¯ll prepare to get Albert if your lord disagree with our n,¡± I said.


    ¡°Even if you don¡¯t do that, the lord will still do what I ask him to do. But at least if you call his majesty, the lord will do it voluntarily instead of being forced to do it,¡± Hill said.


    ...Just what has he done to the lord? I said it before that he doesn¡¯t have as much influence in the city as Oleg. But influence to the people doesn¡¯t matter if you can just control the one in charge of this city.


    After waiting for a bit longer, Ka finally appears along with Victoria and Ray.


    ¡°Roy. I think this will be a good ce for our n to train. There are many monster¡¯s nest here. And each one of us can take care of one nest at least. Most of the monsters are weak so we can defeat them easily. Maybe we can each lead a group of hunters to raid those nests to help the hunters get stronger as well,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°There are that many monster¡¯s nests? Well, I will leave the decision to you. I¡¯m busy with the circus so I won¡¯t be able to help. Though if you need me, I¡¯lle right away,¡± I said.


    ¡°Oh, Roy! When will your circus leave?¡± Hill asked me.


    ¡°Thomas said that we will make at least one more show so we can cheer the people up. After that, we might take a few more days before we leave. There¡¯s no problem with our supply until our next destination since I can use my portal. But it will be too suspicious if we leave too early. After the show, I guess I will make my appearance as the living armor in another location. I have been acting as one so close with the circus a few times already. If the cult take notice of it, they will be suspicious of the circus,¡± I exined.


    ¡°I see. Well, I will be busy so I can¡¯t see you leave. But I¡¯ll try to watch the circus,¡± Hill said.


    ¡°Okay. Though you will still pay for the ticket,¡± I said.


    I can¡¯t expect that the show this time will have all the audience seat filled. After the civilians who evacuated returned and heard the news that there are more casualties than usual, they all feel down for underestimating the stampede. Some of them want to feel better by watching our performances, but I doubt all of them will feel the same.


    I will at least perform like usual to those who attend. That¡¯s my duty as a professional circus clown. Making peopleugh.


    ¡°Okay. Before you leave, I have something I want to ask you,¡± Hill suddenly stopped me before I jumped out of the window.


    ¡°What?¡±


    ¡°The circus have two strongmen as the members, right? Do you know if any of them have lover? Or maybe the two are actually lovers?¡± Hill asked.


    ¡°...Bye.¡±


    Without hesitation, I jumped out of the window. Though I can hear Victoria and Hill is talking excitedly and Ka finally snapped and stopped the two before giving more suggestions to Hill on what to do.


    I escaped to the circus where they are nning to raise the tent again for just one show.


    ¡°Has Ka returned?¡± Burnes asked me.


    ¡°Yes. She¡¯s with Hill in his office. Victoria is with her as well while Ray is running to the sky somewhere. Sometimes, he¡¯s like a dog and enjoy going for a walk,¡± I said.


    ¡°What will you do now? If it¡¯s now, if there¡¯s any spy in this city, they should be doing something suspicious. You¡¯re not going to make your move?¡± he asked.


    ¡°Not at the moment. The agents in this city should be investigating, right? I¡¯ll make my moveter. For now, I¡¯ll help in building the tent,¡± I said.


    I then start helping building the tent after telling the two strongmen that Hill said hi to them. They are a bit confused hearing that since they never talk with Hill. I guess not everyone knows what Hill is really like.


    ¡°...He¡¯s not saying anything to me, right?¡± Thomas asked.


    ¡°Not at all.¡±


    ¡°Good.¡±


    I think Thomas is the only one in the circus who knows about Hill.


    During the stampede, I used portal to return him back to Cassau. It was before I called Ka. And after the stampede is over, I grabbed him back.


    As for Candy who came here with Ka, she¡¯s with other agents staying here to investigate more. Just as Burnes said, this is a good time for spies to make their action.


    After they finished their discussion, Ka and Victoriaes to my room at the inn. And after a while, Candy entered my room as well.


    ...I¡¯ll do my own investigation tomorrow. Let¡¯s just sleep with beauties tonight.


    The next night, the show ends well. There were actually so many people who wanted toe. Some are those who have watched us before. I guess I¡¯m just that good.


    My investigation shows that there are no spies here other than those that Albert sent. Though if they are good actors, I won¡¯t be able to tell. But at least this city seems to be fine.


    Candy joined Ka and Hill and they have a meeting with the lord and the guild master. I don¡¯t need to call Albert it seems.


    They agreed to make a formal request to the n. I don¡¯t need to use portal it seems. They are riding on Spot¡¯s back toe. Though when he¡¯s close, Spot will shrink himself and make it as if they areing here thanks to Ang¡¯s and the others¡¯ wind magic.


    As nned, they are going to lead several groups of hunters who will raid the nests. Many are interested in going with Ang, Ka, and Shirley. Though in the end, the guild arranged it so everyone can go.


    While the hunters are raiding the nests, Hill and the guards will protect the city.


    This will be the biggest event in Mellian that can change the future of Mellian. From a city that often experiencing stampede, to a safe city with less chance of stampede.


    There might still be some monsters left. But it won¡¯t attack the city as often as before.


    Everyone will take part in it. From the civilians, guards, hunters, and even the nobles.


    But I won¡¯t join unless I¡¯m truly needed. And by the time they are preparing to attack monster¡¯s nests, our circus group have left the city and we are moving to the next one.


    They will be fine. Everyone in my n is that strong.

 Chapter 628

    Chapter 628: Kron¡¯s Emergency Situation


    The circus group is on the move to another city from Mellian, while I was somewhere in Arturo. Although Fabio and the others have done well making sure that there are no more influence from the cult in the kingdom, there are still some ces still heavily influenced heavily by the cult. And I¡¯m going to eradicate them.


    ¡°These are the location of cities, viges, and settlements. There are still many cult members hiding there spreading their belief. I hope the living armor can take care of them,¡± Fabio said in his office. Toni is there as well. They showed me a map and marked some areas within the map. Those marked ces are the location of where these two suspect to be influenced by the cult heavily even after they took back Arturo.


    ¡°Sure. You picked those ces for me because you couldn¡¯t find any evidence about their rtion with the cult, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. But I know that because when I went there, I see some familiar faces. They are those that the fake king met when the kingdom was still under control by the cult,¡± the one answering me was Toni.


    ¡°Okay. I¡¯ll take care of them. I can¡¯t do everything in one day, but if it¡¯s just a vige or settlement, it should be easy to finish. I¡¯ll inform youter the ces I have purged and you will continue investigating the ces I haven¡¯t. Though if you want to continue your investigation even after I have purged them all, that¡¯s fine,¡± I said before I leave using a portal to the closest city to one vige from the map.


    ¡°Shall we split up?¡± Victoria asked me before we left the city we transported to.


    ¡°Yeah. You will go to-¡±


    .....


    Before I could give her the direction where to go to, Sonia suddenly appeared telling me of an emergency situation.


    ¡°Roy! Wendy and Kron are in trouble!¡± Sonia said.


    Without hesitation, I opened a portal to where Wendy is. I can take care of the cult in Arturoter on. Or maybe I can just let Fabio take care of them himself. But I can¡¯t let my own friends to be in danger. Saving Wendy and Krones first.


    ¡°What¡¯s the emergency?¡± I asked.


    I can see what they need me here to do. It¡¯s obvious seeing that Kron lost one of his legs. And the enemies are wyverns. Arge flock of wyverns are flying above us.


    ¡°One of those flying lizard bit my leg and ate it when I saved a hunter we brought to help us. There¡¯s no healer here,¡± Kron said.


    ¡°Even if there¡¯s a healer, only trained surgeons can reattach your leg back. Wendy, Victoria, protect Kron. I¡¯ll go get his leg back,¡± I said as I jumped on Ray¡¯s back.


    ¡°How? That thing ate my fucking leg!¡±


    ¡°Ate. But it didn¡¯t chew your leg. For now, your leg is still fine. Stay conscious so you won¡¯t die,¡± I said.


    I can see that the biggest wyvern has a leg in its stomach. For now, it hasn¡¯t been digested yet. They called Sonia as soon as Kron¡¯s leg was eaten it seems.


    For him who have reached expert level mage to get hurt this much can only mean one of two things. The enemies are stronger than expected, or the allies are stupider than expected.


    I couldn¡¯t see any hunter they brought here. They must have escaped. Maybe because they know that the enemies are wyvern, they brought only wind mages to have good mobility in the sky. And so, when it¡¯s time to retreat, they will retreat as fast as they could.


    It will be stupid of them if they returned back to Mellian. Though I think that¡¯s the case. Once Kron and Wendy return to Mellian, they will face the truth that they left theirrade behind. And no hunter want to get close to such people. They will have to raise their reputation back if they want to continue being a hunter.


    But that¡¯s forter. I need to retrieve Kron¡¯s leg back.


    Riding on Ray¡¯s back made me arrive at the biggest wyvern quickly. The wyvern didn¡¯t even notice using until it¡¯s toote. When it realizes that we¡¯re there, I have already sliced his body in two while making sure Kron¡¯s leg is fine.


    ¡°Victoria. Have some Blobbies absorb unwanted substances from Kron¡¯s leg,¡± I said after I returned back with a leg in my hand.


    ¡°I¡¯ll take care of the rest of the wyvern. You can bring him back for the operation,¡± Wendy said as she flies to the sky to face numerous wyvern alone.


    Actually, just one of them is fine. Either Wendy or Kron. But from the report, there are too many wyverns here and it will take too long to get rid of them alone. So the twoe together. And they will split up after getting rid of the wyvern. Wendy will go back together with the hunter party they brought, while Kron will continue eradicate other monsters¡¯ nest.


    But that won¡¯t happen. Kron will have to need operation to reattach his leg back and he needs some rest. As for Wendy, she will return back to Mellian to give report. She will also tell the others about the situation via Sonia.


    I opened a portal to Sophie¡¯s location and told her that we need to reattach Kron¡¯s limb back. Then we moved together to the hospital and the operation room is ready in no time.


    Dismembered limbs is notmon things to happen since most people used magic from distance. But it¡¯s also not rare either. There have been a few operations conducted after I taught the doctors how to do it.


    Still, many of the doctors who are free chose to watch my surgery on Kron. Though they won¡¯t be able to see everything because I am too fast. Even Sophie can only watch.


    ¡°Alright. It¡¯s done. Take him to his room. He will be hospitalized for a while. I¡¯ll leave him to you, Sophie,¡± I said to Sophie.


    ¡°Sure. Is the quest they took dangerous?¡± Sophie asked.


    ¡°The monsters? Not so much. The idiots? Very much the same everywhere. I¡¯ll ask Wendy after this for the detail,¡± I said.


    I returned back to where Wendy was, and she now only has three wyverns left to kill. I don¡¯t need to help her.


    A few minutester, I can see the wyverns are burnt to death. The smell was quite appetizing. Or maybe it¡¯s just me being hungry. Wyvern¡¯s meat doesn¡¯t taste good after all.


    ¡°Good job, Wendy. What happened?¡± I asked Wendy after she finished subjugating the wyverns.


    ¡°Some idiots disobeyed our orders. Thinking that wyverns are actually weak. They tried to fight a wyvern and they failed to kill it. But they seeded in angering the wyvern. Then all of a sudden, the biggest wyvern appear and about to eat one of the hunters whole. Kron was focused on other monsters and can¡¯t use another magic, so he kicked the hunter and lost his leg. That¡¯s basically what happened,¡± Wendy exined.


    ¡°That¡¯s what I thought would happen. I guess taking stranger in the team is too much. I¡¯ll go check on the others. You can go back to Mellian,¡± I said.


    Wendy flew off toward Mellian. Those hunters won¡¯t be able to show their faces in Mellian ever again.


    I shouldn¡¯t actually helped anyone here, but I¡¯m worried because of what happened to Kron. So I left with Ray and Victoria while wearing full armor. I still need to act as a living armor.


    The others are doing fine. Must be because they participated in the tournament. The fact that Kron and Wendy didn¡¯t participate must be why those hunters dared to disobey them.


    They could destroy the monster¡¯s nest they are dispatched to easily. Though they took their time so the others can have a chance in fighting as well.


    They must have learned what happened to Kron from Sonia. So after they finished taking care of the monster¡¯s nest they are dispatched to, they ordered the hunters they brought to return back to Mellian.


    They were supposed to go to another nest after clearing the first one. But because of Kron¡¯s situation, they decided to return to Mellian and go back to clearing the nests tomorrow. That¡¯s what Ka told me.


    They have destroyed the nearest nests of monsters while letting only very few monsters alive so the guild can still get some request. If it¡¯s me though, I¡¯ll just kill everything without a care.


    After they all returned, I disguised myself and opened a portal to Mellian to see what happen to the hunters who disobeyed orders.


    They were shocked to see Wendy is still alive after being surrounded by wyverns. Even more after Wendy said that a living armor managed to slice through a wyvern¡¯s body to retrieve Kron¡¯s leg so they could be reattached back. They were so ashamed to retreat and disobeying order after realizing that just Wendy alone is more than enough to destroy a nest full of wyvern by herself.


    I don¡¯t think none of them will dare to stay in Mellian. They must be thinking of leaving the city.


    I also left the city and returned back to Arturo. I have some viges to stomp over.

 Chapter 629

    Chapter 629: He¡¯s the Evil Hide and Seek God


    After Kron has be better, and he can walk and move normally again thanks to receiving healing magic after surgery, he returned back to Mellian and raid some nests on his won. He doesn¡¯t want to get someone else with him anymore.


    The others also don¡¯t like how the hunters are so selfish and might cause their own death. So only some like Ka and Ang who doesn¡¯t care if there are hunters who want toe with them to the raid.


    Many male hunters tried to get closer with the girls. Many of them got kicked in the nut. Did they really think that they can force their way to the girls?


    Some have a boyfriend. Me. And the others have high standard because of me. And there¡¯s also a princess of a kingdom. Did they really think that they have a chance to be with the princess?


    Because of so many men got kicked in the nut, they decided to stop raiding monsters¡¯ nest. And they even leave Mellian. If they want to be popr, they should improve their strength first.


    Anyway, those were the things that they told me after I left. Since that time with Kron, I never helped them again. Though they said that there are still some other nests to take care of so they will be staying there for a little longer.


    As for me, I finally left to Arturo again and this time, I really am getting rid of the cult¡¯s influence. There were no emergency so far so both Victoria and I managed to get rid of so many cult members. Some were managed to escape but that¡¯s because I¡¯m letting them go.


    .....


    Those who escaped will tell more cult members that living armors have started attacking them in Arturo. They will then start investigating about the living armor and try to kill me.


    Little by little, our n bore fruit. Though I think it will be a while until the cult has enough member to go after me. They will need to send a lot of master level mages to kill me. But I think they still don¡¯t have enough master level mages yet.


    An ordinary master level mage is no match for me. Even more if they cultivated their magic and increase their level rapidly. They will be much too weak for me.


    Still, it is very annoying. All the cult members that I intentionally let go were escaping, but none of them were going to where the Evil God is.


    They would retreat to somewhere and I will face more cult members. And from that ce, I will let go some more people, and I would follow them again. They were going to another ce with a lot of cult members.


    But when I get to their final destination when they no longer know where to go, I couldn¡¯t find anything. No Evil God or the Archbishop of the cult. It¡¯s just a ce that the cult knows it belong to them.


    The cult members staying there would receive tasks from the leader of their faction. Either it¡¯s a faction from someone powerful or it¡¯s just fetishist faction like the one that Veronica or Celestine used to lead.


    I learned it after forcing some cult members to speak. By opening their body and letting them see their own intestine. That¡¯s why a doctor shouldn¡¯t be a torturer.


    The higher-ups of the cult will send people to the viges I raided to give the cult members there tasks for them toplete. And so, I have no choice but to wait after Ipletely killed all the cult members in a vige.


    ¡°There¡¯s nothing we can do except waiting. We have taken care of all the viges, settlements, and cities in this area. There shouldn¡¯t be any more cult members. So we can only wait until the messenger arrive so we can follow them,¡± I said to Victoria.


    ¡°Should we take care of the cities in other area?¡± she asked me back.


    ¡°Later. It¡¯s too annoying to keep on killing them. And Thomas will soon reach the next city. We¡¯ll leave after an agente to take care of the rest,¡± I said.


    Soon after, an agent from Arturoe. I left everything to him before I returned to the circus.


    ¡°Aren¡¯t you too busy? We¡¯re in a tour that you arranged, but you¡¯re almost never with us in the journey,¡± Thomas said when I meet him.


    ¡°It¡¯s not a problem. Thanks to Ray, the travel was done quickly. Even without him, I¡¯m already fast enough on my own. And killing the cult members didn¡¯t take too much effort. All the master level mages should be busy. The strongest members I could find was just expert level mages. And there are no more artificial master level mage. It wasn¡¯t tiring at all. Just boring,¡± I said.


    ¡°...A few years ago, if you said killing expert level or master level mage so easily I would get shocked and think that you¡¯re beyond crazy. I¡¯m shocked now because hearing them from your mouth is already natural. Only you can say killing master level mages easily,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°Yeah. I guess it¡¯s time to prepare the camp. Where is our next destination?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Just a small city. But after that, we will go to a small country that doesn¡¯t belong to Tatrama. I guess that¡¯s where you will be more busy,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°I guess it¡¯s time, huh? Thanks for telling me. If you need anything, juste to my tent,¡± I said.


    When I entered my tent, Sonia appears next to me to tell me what Albert has found from the two master level mages that I captured on the way to Mellian.


    The report was something that I figured out while I was on the mission in Arturo. A messenger wille to them to give them some tasks toplete. Though because the one being interrogated were master level mages, there were more details. Like how the master level mages were given order from the Archbishop directly before they depart to built a vige between Melk and Mellian. Though they never returns again.


    Worse of all, they have forgotten where they met the Archbishop. Which mean someone is manipting their memory. No way a master level mage, no matter how weak they are, can¡¯t tell where they were. Unless they are extremely forgetful.


    Someone or something is erasing their memory. Maybe like Russell, they can use mind maniption magic. Or it¡¯s from an item which make their memories disappear.


    If they have something that can delete someone¡¯s memories, they could just grab everyone from the street and turn them into members of the cult. But from how they didn¡¯t do it, it means that the memory erasing thing that they have can only make them lose memory of a recent event. Probably something like forgetting a whole day of memory or something.


    That¡¯s troublesome. Is that the reason why our investigation couldn¡¯t find where the Evil God is hiding no matter what?


    No. That¡¯s not the only reason. Even Timmy who can detect everything in this continent couldn¡¯t sense the Evil God.


    Basically, he is not just the Evil God. He¡¯s an Evil Hide and Seek God. Just the hiding part since he couldn¡¯t find me, an Aura user, even though he should have realize that an Aura user exists.


    For now, let¡¯s focus on the circus. I need to rx by making everyoneugh.


    Two dayster, the circus arrived at a city. We received the permission to y easily. And as usual, the reception was good. Many people attended my performance andughed.


    After two nights of shows, and an extra day to get supplies for our next journey, we¡¯re on the move again.


    ¡°I¡¯m fine since I have a lot of stamina. But what about the others? Aren¡¯t they tired and fatigued?¡± I asked Burnes.


    ¡°We are fine. Thanks to Victoria¡¯s help with her knowledge of the suspension for the carriage, we feel less fatigued from the journey and can sleep well even inside a moving carriage. And our schedule is actually not as busy as our time as field agents,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°I guess you did have a job that needs you to have a lot of stamina before you became circus performers. What about you, Thomas?¡± this time, I asked Thomas.


    ¡°Circus is my dream. There¡¯s no way I can get tired of it. Though it¡¯s mostly thanks to you. Because we have so many problemsing. Like bandits, monsters, or cult members we met on the way. And when it happens, you would return me back to Cassau and I can rest,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°Well, I guess that¡¯s true.¡±


    I think Thomas is the one who is the most energized after me. Having your dream achieved is something anyone wants. And Thomas able to achieve it thanks to me.


    He enjoys every moment of it so he never feel tired. Though he still need to maintain his health. That¡¯s my advice as his friend and as a doctor.


    ¡°Let¡¯s stop here. We will camp here tonight!¡±


    Suddenly, we stopped even though it¡¯s still noon. We could still travel further, but Burnes told us to stop.


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong? Why are we stopping now?¡± I asked. Thomas and Victoria were also confused.


    ¡°There¡¯s so much things to prepare before we go to the country we¡¯re entering. I¡¯ll tell you after we set our camp. I¡¯ll visit your tentter. Thomas, you can go there first,¡± Burnes said before he started preparing to camp.


    I wonder why do we need to learn something about the country we¡¯re going to? Maybe because that country is dangerous? Let¡¯s hear what he has to say.

 Chapter 630

    Chapter 630: Rygis Country


    I wonder what Burnes going to say to us? After my tent is done, which I don¡¯t need to take any time at all since I just grabbed the tent from another location, I entered it and wait for Burnes. Soon after, Thomas entered my tent and we waited for Burnes.


    ¡°Maybe it¡¯s some kind of secret about that country. What if it¡¯s under suspicion of being controlled by the cult? I¡¯m scared to go there now,¡± Thomas said to me as we wait for Burnes toe.


    It sure take time for others to build their tent. Maybe I¡¯m just the weird one since I just need to grab my tent from somewhere else, while the others need to prepare everything. Portal is the best.


    Thomas said what he¡¯s worried about. The country we¡¯re going to is a small country and we don¡¯t know much about it. Maybe that country is as Thomas said. Something scary is going on there.


    ¡°Well, we can take this time to prepare ourselves. If they are being controlled by the cult, the kingdom should have known it right away or tell me to investigate it. But Albert hasn¡¯t told me anything. It means they are still safe from the cult at least,¡± I said.


    ¡°What if it¡¯s not rted to the cult? The danger is from something else and not about the cult? Maybe it could be more dangerous than the cult,¡± Victoria added.


    ¡°If that¡¯s the case, then we can just run away. I can use portal to escape from there easily. There¡¯s nothing to worry about. But we¡¯ll hear everything from Burnes soon,¡± I said.


    .....


    Something more dangerous than the cult? If it¡¯s something that won¡¯t have any rtion to me, I don¡¯t care. If it¡¯s a monster thatck intelligent, we can kill it. But if that dangerous thing decided to make a mess with me, I¡¯ll consider them the same level as the cult. Something necessary to be destroyedpletely.


    Well, we will hear about it from Burnes. I don¡¯t think it will be something dangerous though.


    ¡°Anyway, what is the name of the kingdom we¡¯re going to?¡± I asked Thomas.


    ¡°You haven¡¯t heard? Or maybe you just don¡¯t care. Well, I¡¯ll tell you what I know. Though I only know the name. I think it¡¯s called Rygis. Beyond that, I don¡¯t know anything else about it,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°You have never been there before?¡± I asked Thomas.


    ¡°Nope. I heard many merchants have difficulties entering that ce. That¡¯s the reason we don¡¯t know much about it. Maybe it¡¯s a closed country or something,¡± Thomas said.


    A closed country, huh? And they forbid people to enter? I think it will be hard for us to stay there. Maybe we will get kicked out as soon as we show our face.


    Soon after Burnes enters my tent. Seems like we are the only ones who are left behind. We don¡¯t know anything about the Rygis kingdom while the others already in the know.


    Well, that¡¯s to be expected. The others are all agents after all. They have intel that normal people couldn¡¯t get no matter how hard we try.


    ...Me? Normal?


    Well, other than the fact that I¡¯m an Aura user, or the four kings are my friends, or how I am the most important piece in the fight against the cult, or the fact that I returned from the future, or the fact that I have a harem, I¡¯m just amoner. So I¡¯m pretty much normal.


    ¡°Burnes. Tell us what we need to know about Rygis kingdom,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. But first, it¡¯s not a kingdom. It¡¯s not an empire either. They called it a country. And it was not led by members of royalty. They don¡¯t have such things. The citizens are heavily involved in politic and they have the right to vote who will be the one that will lead the country. They called the one leading the country as president,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Wait, they use voting to pick their president?¡± Victoria was shocked when she heard that.


    ¡°Hm? Oh, right. Victoria, you once told me that most countries in your world used that way to pick their leader, right? I guess you¡¯re more familiar with it. Is it hard to live in such country?¡± I asked Victoria.


    ¡°Not really. But it¡¯s all depend on the country. Mostly, it depends on the traditional morals and values of the country. I guess the problem is not the country itself. But their moral and value,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°She¡¯s right. The country is not a problem. But theirmon senses are mostly different than ours,¡± Burnes said.


    We live in the same world but we have differentmon sense? If it¡¯s Victoria, I can understand when she doesn¡¯t havemon sense since she¡¯s from another world. Though it was mostly me who doesn¡¯t havemon sense. I stayed alone for a long time in my past life after all. Living in a countryside without a care, and stupidly joined the war.


    Burnes then exined to us the biggest difference of ourmon senses with Rygis is.


    ¡°So, the poption of women there is much higher than the men,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°...I have gone to many ces, but isn¡¯t that the same everywhere? Even in my n, there are more women than men. In fact, there are only two men. Kron and me,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yes. But the difference is much more in Rygis than other ces. There were so many women and they are the one with power. In fact, they considered men as ves. Other than those who got lucky and married someone, the rest are ves. Even the children, after they reached adulthood, they will be treated like a ve as long as they are men,¡± Burnes exined.


    ¡°...What?¡±


    ¡°In fact, as soon as they realized their surroundings, the boys have to seek for marriage partner as soon as possible. Because they will be ves if they reached adulthood without getting a partner,¡± Burnes added.


    What the hell!?


    I thought that if the women has power, it would be like Lynn being an empress. But that¡¯s too much! Just because they are men, they are treated like a ve! In fact, very is even legal there!


    ¡°...Most of the circus members are male though,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°Indeed,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Seems like we won¡¯t have any problem then. If we go there, we will get kicked out right away. There¡¯s no need for us to go there. Let¡¯s just skip that country and move on,¡± I said.


    ¡°Agree. There¡¯s no need for us to go there only to be treated like ves. Let¡¯s move on to the next city,¡± Thomas said.


    Men being treated like ves? I won¡¯t go there.


    But maybe if I show them that I¡¯m married, I will be fine. Though I¡¯m not married. I just have lots of girlfriends.


    ...in a country where women ruled, having a harem might be a huge crime instead. None of them would believe that they all love me.


    So, let¡¯s just move on. There¡¯s no need to go to that ce. Even the women in the circus don¡¯t seem to have interest in performing there.


    ¡°Can¡¯t do that. The main purpose of the tour is to eradicate any cult¡¯s influence as much as possible by traveling to every possible location. And obviously, Rygis is one of them. Even if you don¡¯t want toe, you have to. But for Thomas, he¡¯s free to note with us,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    ¡°No!¡±


    It¡¯s obvious who is happy and who is not. Thomas can just leave the circus momentarily and not go there even though he¡¯s supposed to be the leader. But I have to.


    How do I stay safe in that country? Charm the girls with my beautiful smiles?


    ¡°Since Thomas will not go, we need someone else to act as the leader. Roy, you will disguise yourself as Thomas,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Sigh... fine. But if they treated me really bad in that country, I will try my best to escape instead of killing them,¡± I said.


    ¡°...It¡¯s best if you don¡¯t kill anyone in other country unless for good reason. But yeah, it¡¯s best if you prepare to use your portal anytime,¡± Burnes said.


    I guess there¡¯s no escape from going there. But I will try to escape before I kill anyone who bully me there.


    ¡°So, how did they ended up making men as their ves?¡± I asked.


    ¡°We don¡¯t know the truth yet. But from what we gathered, it¡¯s because something that happened long time ago in the past. Someone extremely strong charmed a lot of women and built a vige that only consist of him and his women. Soon after the man disappeared. But the women who have finally been freed of his charm still there. Their hatred to men was so high that they started enving men because of it. Other than for breeding purpose, the men can¡¯t do anything there. Though at least they are still treated better when they were children,¡± Burnes said.


    ...That sounds familiar.


    So, a man charmed so many women in the past, and cause trouble to people here in the present.


    ¡°FUCK YOU, TIMMY!¡±

 Chapter 631

    Chapter 631: Master Level Mages in Rygis


    That fucking Timmy! It was something from more than 3000 years ago. But it gives me trouble this day! I should have killed him in a more painful way!


    Unfortunately, I was too weak against him at the time I fought him. Though in present, I have grown a little bit stronger. I think even without riding on Ray, I should be able to go toe to toe against him.


    How long ago was it when he came to this ce that would be called Rygis? And now, all the women there enve men. Just because of the act of one man.


    If that¡¯s really the case, if they found out that I have a harem, I would be killed. I guess I can¡¯t bring my girls there.


    Though if the women of Rygis think that there are men in the circus who are single, they might be targeted. I guess just bringing one is enough.


    ¡°Well, I guess this is it. Take me away from here, Thomas,¡± Thomas said to me. My name is Roy though.


    ¡°I¡¯m not Thomas. You¡¯re Thomas,¡± I said.


    .....


    ¡°Yeah, I know. But you will need to be Thomas in that country. Burnes, how long will you stay in that country? And how many cities will you stop by?¡± Thomas asked Burnes.


    ¡°At least it will take two weeks even if we just perform one night in each city. There are only a few cities including the capital that we will go to. But since it¡¯s another country outside the four kingdoms¡¯ alliance, we need to be thorough in our investigation,¡± Burnes said.


    The tour won¡¯t take long. But the investigation will take time since it¡¯s a totally unfamiliar ce. Even more, it¡¯s because most men from other country were forbidden to enter that country. The fate of the men in that country must be bad.


    ¡°Though all the information we have so far might not be correct. Maybe they have changed their treatment toward men. It¡¯s been years since that information was reported. Long before Roy started attending introductory school,¡± Burnes said.


    Then there¡¯s a chance that us men won¡¯t be treated badly. But I guess it¡¯s fine to get Thomas away from here.


    ¡°Thomas, I¡¯ll get you to Cassau. But for the circus, I¡¯ll stay as Roy. A representative of the circus since the leader of the circus, Thomas, had terrible diarrhea and had no choice but to get hospitalized. Then we will meet after we leave Rygis. I think that¡¯s good enough excuse to make. Here¡¯s the portal. Bye,¡± I pushed Thomas into the portal before he could say anything.


    ¡°At least make it that I got hurt from an ident during a sho-¡±


    Before he could finish his sentence, I closed the portal and he can¡¯t be heard again. Diarrhea it is.


    ¡°...I guess it¡¯s fine if we make the excuse. I¡¯ll go and tell the others that Thomas is sick so everyone have the same story if asked,¡± Burnes said as he left my tent.


    What preparation should we make? I don¡¯t think there will be some. But I guess getting the girls from the circus to act more dominant among us should be good enough to trick the women of Rygis. But we can only know how useful our act is once we enter their country.


    Two dayster, We are already in Rygis. And I can already see the gate to the capital in sight. With my Divine Vision obviously. Powered by Mind¡¯s Eye and Aura which makes me able to see much further than ever.


    ¡°I can see the gate already. But we need to get closer so I can see everything,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. If you see anything strange, tell us right away. Depend on what you see, the setting we have prepared might need to be changed. We¡¯re all capable agents and spies here. And you can act well. There¡¯s nothing to worry about even if we made some improvisation. Everyone can keep up with the change,¡± Burnes said.


    I¡¯m the only one trained differently than the others here. After all, I¡¯m not an agent. Though I still train like them. And my acting skill was good enough that I put acting in the list of skills I mastered for my Shameless Survival Arts.


    Nowadays, I have be strong enough that I don¡¯t need to be shameless again. But I have be better and more experienced in life so my Shameless Survival Arts should have improved as well.


    ¡°So far, everything is fine. There are men walking around the city normally. They are not being enved at all. Though that¡¯s what I can see. I can¡¯t hear anything,¡± I said.


    ¡°I guess everything has changed from the past. But we still need to be careful. We don¡¯t know if their change ise from within, or it¡¯s because of external influence,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°External influence?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I mean there¡¯s also a possibility of the country changed because of the cult,¡± Burnes replied.


    Oh, right. If the current Rygis changed because of the cult, that mean the cult has taken over this country. Though so far, there¡¯s no one with explosive devices in their mouth.


    But what if all the cult members there are expert level mages at least? Then there¡¯s no need for explosive devices.


    I keep looking around could see theergest building in the center of the city. Probably the one called the president is working there. So I looked through the wall and see that a woman is in her office doing some paperwork. She must be the one called the president.


    ¡°I think I found the one called the president. She¡¯s doing some paperwork in a room that looks like an office. There are also many other people doing jobs in other office rooms. But she¡¯s the only one with a room for herself,¡± I said.


    ¡°Unlike a kingdom where the king or the nobles take care of everything, that country must have no discrimination against status. Anyone who ispetent will help the president rule the country. After all, they will change the president after every few years, right? The must be busier than Albert. Albert can continue ruling the kingdom until his son take over. So he can be rxed with the rule. But if the previous and the current president have differences in ideas, there will be many changes. That¡¯s why their government might be working harder than the ruler of our kingdom,¡± Victoria said..


    A country where even amoner can be someone amazing. If it was me before meeting Albert, I would like to stay there after the cult is destroyed. But now, Albert has promised me that I can live peacefully after destroying the cult.


    One person with a lot of power, and a group of people with the same amount of power as that one person. I¡¯ll pick one person. After all, a group doesn¡¯t mean everyone will agree to everything.


    There are pros and cons in everything. But I won¡¯t care. I just want to destroy the cult and live peacefully.


    ¡°Yeah, they¡¯re all seem busy. Do they get proper rest at least?¡± I asked out of curiousity. After all, no one want to do a job where they can¡¯t get a rest. But seems like the people there don¡¯t really hate their job. I guess they are fine doing what they are doing.


    ¡°They should be. If there¡¯s no rest, no one would want to work there. That¡¯s just very. Is there any man in the building?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Hmm... oh! I see a few. Though one of them is crossdressing. But I guess if they allow men to work in helping the president, there¡¯s no more discrimination. Or at least there are none publicly. I haven¡¯t seen everything ye-FUCK!¡±


    When I looked at the main entrance of the building, I saw something unexpected and instantly turned my sight elsewhere.


    ¡°What is it? What do you see?¡± Burnes asked curiously.


    ¡°...Two women guarding the entrance of that building. They are master level mages. They can sense that I¡¯m looking at them. Though they didn¡¯t do anything since I turned my sight elsewhere quickly. I couldn¡¯t really say their appearance but they know that they are being seen. But I know they couldn¡¯t tell where I¡¯m looking from,¡± I said.


    ¡°Two master level mages!? This is difficult. So the cult have sent their people there,¡± Burnes assumed.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think that¡¯s the case. The master level from the cult that I met before couldn¡¯t tell that I¡¯m looking at them from this far. Which mean these two women cultivated diligently. If so, there¡¯s no way the cult would get two master level mages to stay in that country. They will be given tasks. But if they are from the cult, that means there¡¯s something in that country that the cult wants,¡± I said.


    ¡°But the fact is they have two master level mages. We can¡¯t hide that this circus group is far stronger than any ordinary group. Let¡¯s stop here and make some more ns before entering the city,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Okay. I¡¯ll move around and see if there are other master level mages hiding there or not,¡± I said.


    A small country with two master level mages. If that country decided to conquer the world, most countries will be powerless just because of those two.


    Maybe I can find something about the cult here. But safetyes first. We¡¯ll stay here until we make a sound n to move forward.

 Chapter 632

    Chapter 632: The Master Level Mages Stopped Us


    I looked around the city from distance. I also ride on Ray¡¯s back and look over the city from above as well. But I make sure that I won¡¯t look at the two master level mages directly.


    From my observation, those two are the only two master level mages in the city. But there¡¯s something else bothering me.


    I returned back to where the others are and report everything to them who have already gathered together.


    ¡°How was it, Roy?¡± Burnes asked.


    ¡°The two women in front of the biggest building are the only two master level mages in the city. There were no one else who noticed that someone is looking at them,¡± I said.


    ¡°Just two? I¡¯d like to say that¡¯s a good news, but it¡¯s still bad. We don¡¯t know what they will do to strangers like us from another country. Anything else?¡± Burnes asked.


    ¡°Yeah. There are ces that looks like a slum. There were a lot of men who were being enved. Unlike the men outside the slum. I guess not all very has been gone,¡± I said.


    .....


    ¡°Hmm... I see. At least we know that not all men are safe even if the country has decided to abolish very. Though we need to investigate further. I think I¡¯ll report this to his majesty Albert. If Rygis is open to everyone, we can get some of the agents to infiltrate the country,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Even if they allow people to enter, do you think they will let them leave the country? What if they decided to lock us up?¡± Victoria asked.


    Victoria is right. Even if entering the country has be easier, that doesn¡¯t mean exiting is as easy as entering.


    Although I can use portal to do it easily, it will still be bad if Rygis end up bing hostile toward the kingdom. We can stop them, but there will be casualties since they have at least two master level mages.


    The best thing is if we can kill the two master level mages right away. But what if they are good people? What if they are not rted to the cult at all? They could be our powerful allies.


    ¡°If we do it right, we could even get them to be our allies. But if we do it wrong, even if they don¡¯t side with the cult, they could be our enemies. I¡¯ll go ask his majesty for further order. But if there are nomand given, we will continue our n normally. Act like a normal traveling circus,¡± Burnes said.


    ...Circus is not anything normal. Every members of the circus have something abnormal to show to other people. But I¡¯ll agree with him to continue with our n normally.


    Burnes then called Sonia to send a message to Albert. And we wait for a while as I continue observing the city.


    Everyone lives happily except for those who live in the slum. Especially the enved men.


    Oh, is that some sort of red-light district? Women from outside the slum enters the slum, and being guided to a building where she could then do anything with a male ve there. Some sort of brothel, I guess.


    The man is extremely thin. He must have been yed with so many times. That¡¯s why you should train your body, man. Though I doubt he can do it since he¡¯s being confined in a cell even when he¡¯s not servicing anyone.


    Soon after, Sonia returned with a new order from Albert.


    ¡°Albert said that it might be dangerous even with Roy alone. So, it¡¯s best to bring someone else. At least two powerful mages. He suggested to bring Ang since she¡¯s the strongest mage we have, and Shirley as well. Not only because she is strong, she¡¯s also a princess and have diplomatic power. In case something urgent happened, she can take the lead. Though until then, she will act as a member of the circus as well. Probably as the guard of the circus,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Have you told the two of them?¡± I asked Sonia whether she has informed Ang and Shirley or not.


    ¡°Yes. They both agree toe,¡± she replied.


    I guess their business in Mellian is over already. Or maybe there are still some more monster¡¯s nests, but they can leave it to Ka and the others.


    It¡¯s Ang after all. She must be interested in seeing real master level mages. Not a ghost, and not someone who hastily improve their level and be much master level mages but they are still weaker than ordinary master level mages.


    Well, if those two agreed toe, I¡¯ll pick them up.


    I opened a portal to where Ang is and see that Shirley and the others are there as well. They have heard everything from Sonia. Though they¡¯re not there toe. So I just get Ang and Shirley enter the portal before closing it.


    ¡°Sonia has told me what I need to know. We just need to pretend to be your guards, right? But the master level mages should know that there are some strong mages among the members of the circus. How will you react when asked?¡± Shirley asked Burnes.


    What she meant was me and the other expert level mages here. Though I¡¯m just a summoner, so I only need to summon one familiar if they asked me to prove that I¡¯m a summoner.


    Victoria is obvious. Any master level mages should be able to detect Victoria¡¯s presence. I can¡¯t hide her or disguise her as some kind of object in front of master level mages. I learned it from the time I was training with the ancient Aura users who are also master level mages.


    ¡°Also, from what Sonia told me, if there¡¯s any fight against the master level mages, Roy shouldn¡¯t intervene as much as possible and just leave it to us. We need to show the master level mages the power of people from the outside so they won¡¯t dare to attack us,¡± Shirley said.


    I see. Basically, if there¡¯s a fight against the master level mages, they will need to fight Ang and Shirley. And the two of them will show their power to defeat the master level mages so they won¡¯t dare to attack the kingdom.


    ¡°Fine. I won¡¯t fight. But if I see that you might die, which I don¡¯t think they will happen, I will intervene,¡± I said.


    Ang just smiled hearing that while Shirley nodded in approval to my suggestion.


    Those two didn¡¯t have any trouble facing so many artificial master level mages. And if they face the weaker master level mages, they could handle it as well. As for ordinary master level mages, which I assumed the power of the two master level mages in Rygis are, Ang and Shirley can still handle it. Though they might still get hurt and injured, they can win.


    ¡°Since everyone is prepared, we will continue our journey. And as his majestymand, we have to treat her highness Shirley as a hunter who epted our request to guard us the traveling circus. I¡¯m sorry, her highness, but we will drop our formality from here,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Sure. I don¡¯t mind it,¡± Shirley said.


    And so, we continued our march to Rygis. To enter the city which was supposed to be the capital of that country and face the two master level mages.


    ¡°From here on, I won¡¯t use Divine Vision to avoid suspicion. Assume that the two master level mages already know our existence,¡± I said.


    I won¡¯t use Divine Vision anymore. But with Mind¡¯s Eye, which is basically seeing without the help of your eyes, I am still able to see further than normal human¡¯s eyesight.


    Other than me, Ang also have mastered Mind¡¯s Eye somehow. Shirley can do it as well, though not as good as me or Ang.


    It¡¯s the ability one can learn even without using Aura or magic after all. So the others want to learn it as well. But not everyone can master it.


    At least we have three people here who can react quickly when we see danger.


    ¡°Ugh... I feel like someone is watching me. I don¡¯t like it,¡± Ang said as we get closer to the city.


    ¡°Must be the master level mages. We don¡¯t need to hide our level, so once we sense their location, we can look directly at them,¡± I said.


    They will be wary of us for having so many powerful mage in this group. But it also mean that no one should try to make a mess to us. We are that strong after all.


    ¡°What should we say if they be hostile to us right away?¡± I asked Burnes.


    ¡°Improvise,¡± Burnes said shortly.


    ¡°Okay. I feel like someone is getting closer to us. Prepare yourself,¡± I warned the others about the presences I detect.


    Soon after, we were stopped by two beautiful women. Those of us who are expert level mages already sensed them before so we have prepared our meeting.


    ¡°Stop! Who are you and what are you here for?¡± One of the women stopped us and asked our identities.


    Well, I hope they will let us pass. After all, if they don¡¯t, Burnes and the others will ask me to investigate about the country on my own.

 Chapter 633

    Chapter 633: They Asked for a Match


    ¡°Stop! Who are you and what are you here for?¡±


    The one who stopped us is one of the two master level mages from the city. The two of theming here after they sensed our arrival.


    The fact that I only noticed them with my Mind¡¯s Eye after they moved means that their detection ability has further range than my Mind¡¯s Eye. That shows how strong master level mages are.


    Ang understood that. And she didn¡¯t hesitate to show the two her desire to fight. Is it another moment of her when she will grow stronger by her instinct? And her instinct is telling her to fight them?


    For now, I¡¯ll try to talk with the two first. I am the representative of the circus after all. Since Thomas is gone because of diarrhea.


    ...In truth, after I brought Thomas to Cassau, I gave Lina an order to made a meal solely for him with some ingredients that will give him light diarrhea. It won¡¯t be bad, but he will need to relieve himself a few times today. So, it¡¯s not really a lie that he¡¯s down with a diarrhea.


    After the master level mages stopped us, I who was inside a carriage to pretend to be the leader of the circuse out.


    .....


    ¡°Ah, excuse me. Are you two from Rygis by any chance?¡± I asked the two women.


    Because of their level, they can maintain their beauty. And bing a master level mages mean that their lifespan is much longer than average humans. Just like me who have be an Aura Master. Though I know how old I am. But I don¡¯t know how old these two are. But for now, I will treat them like people of the same age because they look that young.


    ¡°Answer my question first,¡± said the master level mage.


    The two women look simr. Probably they are sisters. Though I don¡¯t think they are twins. But maybe they are mother and daughter. I can¡¯t tell.


    The one who spoke was someone who look slightly older among the two. She¡¯s a bit taller than the other one.


    ¡°Okay, okay. My name is Roy. And I¡¯m acting as the representative of this circus troupe since Thomas, the leader of the circus, is sick. And we are traveling around the continent to spread happiness. We¡¯re going to do amazing performance for everyone to enjoy in every city and country we visit. That¡¯s our reason ining to Rygis,¡± I answered politely.


    I didn¡¯t lie at all. I¡¯m a good person after all.


    ¡°A circus you say? Grandma, what¡¯s a circus?¡± the tall woman asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s something when people with weird abilities gather to perform something,¡± the short woman replied.


    ...Let¡¯s ignore how the tall woman doesn¡¯t know what a circus is. They live a long time in what we expect to be an isted country. A country closed to other people.


    The short one is the grandma!? That means the tall one is the granddaughter, right?


    As expected, we can¡¯t tell how old they are from the outside. Even their inside ages as slow as the outside. I can¡¯t tell how old any of them are.


    Although I didn¡¯t use Divine Vision, I can tell their inside should age as slow as the outside appearance because I have seen the previous master level mages from the cult. Although they are weak, their body has adapted to their magic level. That¡¯s why I can tell.


    And I won¡¯t use Divine Vision on them even if they know I¡¯m looking at them directly here. It¡¯s because master level mages will feel disturbed when I look at them with Divine Vision even if I don¡¯t have any intention to fight at all. Their senses are much greater than expert level mages.


    It seems like the two most powerful mages from Rygis are a pair of grandmother and her granddaughter. What about the mother? I didn¡¯t see anyone else who have reached master level mage in the city. Maybe they are outside.


    ¡°So, a circus is a group of weirdo looking for money. Am I right?¡± the tall woman asked me.


    ¡°Well, that interpretation is not incorrect. We are looking for money. But that¡¯s not our real goal. We are going to spread happiness to the whole continent. Especially during this time of war against the cult,¡± I said.


    I didn¡¯t just randomly said it. I¡¯m also asking them whether they know about the events going on outside their country or not.


    ¡°War? What war? And what cult?¡± the two master level mages were confused.


    ¡°Seems like we have a lot of exnation to do. Everyone, we¡¯ll take a break here. It seems that we won¡¯t be able to progress to the city for a while. And prepare us some tea and snacks while I exin everything to them,¡± I said to the others.


    After preparing everything, we treated the two master level mages politely. And I started exining to them about what happened in outside world.


    Only me, Burnes, Shirley, and Ang is here with the two master level mages. And the others are resting.


    I started exining to the two about the existence of the Evil Cult since it seems that the two doesn¡¯t know anything about it. If that¡¯s the case, that¡¯s fine. But if they are actually members of the cult, but their knowledge of the cult is different with what I had in my mind, a fight is unavoidable.


    We think that they are Evil Cult. But the members of the cult think that they are in the right side and called it True God Cult instead.


    Of course I exined that to the two. But it seems like these two also know nothing about the True God Cult. So we¡¯re safe and can still avoid battle.


    ¡°...I can¡¯t believe that the fate of the world is at stake, and we know nothing about it,¡± the short woman said.


    ¡°Oh, just to remind you that sooner orter, a messenger from Tatrama mighte and they will ask Rygis for their cooperation to eradicate the cult¡¯s influence. I think if you don¡¯t know about this event, you should inform the one in charge of Rygis about this. After all, the war will affect everything in this world,¡± I said.


    ¡°What if we decide to not cooperate? Will you guys fight us?¡± the short woman asked.


    ¡°No. We¡¯re just a circus troupe. We¡¯re here in peace and only want to perform. If we can¡¯t get permission to perform, we will leave to another city,¡± I said.


    ¡°There¡¯s no way a circus troupe can have so much powerful members. Some of you, including yourself, are expert level mages,¡± the short woman said.


    ¡°Oh, these two are hunters and they are acting as our guard. Because we don¡¯t know if we will meet any members of the cult on our tour. And they are quite famous since Ang over here is the champion of a tournament we set for the four kingdoms,¡± I said.


    ¡°What about you? I think you are stronger than her,¡± the short woman pointed her finger at me.


    ¡°Well, I might be an expert level mage. But I¡¯m a summoner. I¡¯m strong because I got help from my familiars. Excuse me, but may I know your names?¡±


    I fogot to ask the identities of these two. So I used this chance to ask.


    ¡°I¡¯m Patricia and this is my granddaughter, Emilia,¡± the short one said.


    ...Even if it makes sense that she¡¯s older because she maintains her youth as a master level mage, it¡¯s still weird to see someone who could be mistaken as a child to have a granddaughter.


    If other small countries have master level mages like these two, I might get surprised even more. I need to get used to it. We¡¯re entering a country which was almostpletely unknown to us after all. And it won¡¯t end with just this one.


    ¡°I¡¯d like to report this to the president right away, but my granddaughter seems to feel intense fighting spirit from the one called Ang. If you don¡¯t mind, I¡¯d like Ang to test her strength with Emilia if that¡¯s okay with you,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°I agree! Let me do it!¡±


    Without even being asked, Ang quickly agreed to have a spar with Emilia. And Emilia herself seems happy to have a chance to fight Ang.


    ¡°...By any chance, is she also the kind that move first before thinking?¡± I asked Patricia.


    ¡°...Seems like your friend is the same. I¡¯ll watch your fight first and report everything to the president after I witness their fight. No matter what, if the existence of the cult is real, Rygis will be in danger as well,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°Then, the two of you should-¡±


    Before I finish talking, the forest in front of us got ttened. Arge open area was made in an instant. It was Ang¡¯s magic.


    ¡°...It seems like you two are prepared already. Everyone! Ang and a master level mage is going to have a sparing session! Put up your barrier so you won¡¯t get hurt!¡± I shouted so the other members of the circus can hear me.


    ¡°So you know that we are master level mages, huh?¡± Patricia asked me.


    ¡°Yeah. It¡¯s kind of obvious for us,¡± I said.


    Ang who is crowned as the strongest mage in the continent because of the tournament, against a real master level mage, Emilia. This will be great.


    If Ang lose, the two won¡¯t think that we will be a problem to them and they will think that it¡¯s not a problem for us to enter Rygis. And if Ang win, they will think that the outside world is far more dangerous than they thought. Then, there¡¯s a chance that they will cooperate with the kingdom. Though they might not give us permission to enter.


    In any case, Ang can show her power against a real master level mage. Not a training session, but a real fight. Let¡¯s see how it goes.

 Chapter 634

    Chapter 634: Quick Battle


    Ang and the master level mage from Rygis, Emilia, walked to the open area and faced each other. From what Emilia¡¯s grandmother said, Patricia, the other master level mage from Rygis, Emilia has simr personality to Ang. And she loves to spar against strong opponent.


    ¡°She loves fighting. But after reaching master level, there¡¯s no one else who can be a match with her except me. And since I¡¯m her grandmother, she feels reluctant to request for a spar with me,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°Is that so? By the way, what about Emilia¡¯s parents?¡± I asked Patricia.


    ¡°They died of old age because they couldn¡¯t reach master level,¡± Patricia replied casually.


    From how casual she said it, it seems that they have died a long time ago. That means Emilia could be the second oldest person in Rygis after Patricia.


    ¡°I warn you. It¡¯s impolite to ask ady about her age,¡± Patricia said before I said anything.


    ¡°Then I will ask you another question. When were you born?¡± I asked.


    .....


    ¡°I was born around... wait, that¡¯s the same question!¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°But I¡¯m not asking your age directly,¡± I said.


    ¡°And the answer is the same! Anyway, let¡¯s watch the match. We¡¯ll talk again after the match is over. I¡¯m curious about how strong the one called the strongest mage in the continent is,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°And I¡¯m also curious about the power of master level mage here. Let¡¯s just watch the match. Victoria, get us some seat,¡± I said.


    There¡¯s only Shirley, Patricia, and me watching directly on the side of the open area. The others are protecting the carriages and the horses just in case the Ang¡¯s and Emilia¡¯s magic is too strong and can reach them. They also moved back a bit until they feel safe.


    They are still in the range of Patricia¡¯s detection, so it¡¯s fine. Patricia must be thinking that if we do something suspicious, she can react quickly.


    And she must have sensed Victoria from before. Though after I said that I¡¯m a summoner, she lets down her guard a bit. And when Victoria suddenly moved, she reacted quickly and put up her guard before she rxed again.


    ¡°A sofa out of nowhere?¡± Patricia was shocked to see that a sofa was suddenly appearing in front of her.


    ¡°It¡¯s not out of nowhere. You¡¯re a master level mage so you should have sensed my familiar, right? Meet Victoria. A ck Slime. And she can shapeshift into anything and make clones of herself. Please take a seat and enjoy the fight,¡± I said.


    Shirley and I sat on the same sofa, and I prepared another sofa for Patricia.though she prefer to stand in the end. I guess she doesn¡¯t want to feel at disadvantage by sitting on a seat prepared by stranger.


    Well, that¡¯s fine.


    ¡°That¡¯s a unique familiar your friend have over there,¡± Emilia said to Ang.


    ¡°That¡¯s not everything she can do though. But let¡¯s ignore them and focus on our fight. Are you ready?¡± Ang asked.


    ¡°Whenever you are,¡± Emilia said confidently.


    Seems like it¡¯s going to start soon. There¡¯s no need for a signal or anything.


    ¡°Your friend might have powerful earth magic. But that¡¯s not enough to defeat my granddaughter,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°Oh, Ang is not just an earth mage, you know. Let¡¯s just watch the match,¡± I said.


    If that master level mage is not any stronger than the master level mages we trained with, the ancient Aura users who were also master level mages, then I don¡¯t need to worry about Ang. She has managed to defeat all the master level mages on her own. An achievement that only she had. While the others can only defeat one or two, but can¡¯t defeat the others.


    I didn¡¯t count myself in that. I just count the mages who practiced with the master level mages using their magic only. Not using Aura.


    As for me? I would have died if I can¡¯t defeat all of them. That¡¯s a requirement for the fight against Timmy after all.


    ¡°Well, I doubt she can win against my granddaughter. Emilia is strong. Her ice magic has reached master level. And her wind magic is advanced level. She can fly freely in the sky and attack using her ice magic,¡± Patricia said proudly.


    Is she the type of grandma who loves spoiling her granddaughter? She probably is. Though she looks younger than her granddaughter, so I¡¯m kinda creeped out.


    ¡°Is it okay for you to say that?¡± I asked.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. There¡¯s just no way that she could lose,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°Then I will tell you about Ang. She had four elements. Fire, ice, earth, and wind,¡± I said.


    ¡°Had? What do you mean by that?¡± Patricia asked curiously.


    ¡°After reaching advanced level in all of them, Ang tried to cultivate all four elements at the same time. She seeded and all her elements reached expert level. Except that they¡¯re all counted as one now. We called it multielement. She¡¯s the only one in the world who have achieved it. I believe that she has a chance to win this match,¡± I said.


    Multielement. But it doesn¡¯t have all type of element like lightning, light, healing, or other element. Just fire, ice, earth, and wind. The element she had before.


    I still don¡¯t get it after all this time. How she can make all four different element into one. And Ang being Ang, she couldn¡¯t exin it herself.


    While Patricia is confused, the match started. Emilia and Ang quickly fly to the sky. And obviously, Ang is faster.


    Emilia cast ice magic to attack Ang. And Ang cast the same ice magic as well. The two magic shed and they¡¯re both equal in power.


    ¡°Oh, the victor is obvious,¡± I said calmly.


    ¡°No way!¡± Patricia then noticed that Emilia is the weaker one.


    ¡°No matter how long you live, you can¡¯t win a fight even if you start as the more powerful one. You need experience as well. Seems like you have been staying in Rygis for so long and there¡¯s no one that can test your strength anymore. So your progress is muchcking to Ang¡¯s. The winner is obvious, but Ang seems to want to test her ice magic more,¡± I said after looking at the fight.


    Emilia is obviouslyck in experience. She should have known that not only her magic, but her physical strength is improved as well. But as a mage who have been fighting using magic all her life, she can¡¯t just change her fighting style and use her superior physical strength to fight all of a sudden.


    If she had experience, she could give some trouble to Ang. Seems like they have a lot to learn these master level mages.


    ¡°Oh, I need to remind you that the cult I¡¯m talking about has increased the number of master level mages they have. And since the four kingdoms have started a war against them, they should have prepared and have some experience in battle as well. If you want to protect your country, you need fighting experience. Just being the stronger one in magic doesn¡¯t mean you can win all the fight,¡± I said.


    ¡°...You¡¯re not here to threaten us with your strength, right?¡± Patricia asked.


    ¡°No. As I said, we¡¯re here for a tour. We want to perform. And if we can¡¯t get permission, we will leave,¡± I said.


    While we¡¯re talking, Emilia started to panic and she finally lost after Ang attacked her with fire magic enhanced with wind magic. Ang has done testing her ice magic it seems.


    Ang and the dejected Emiliae to us after their match is over.


    ¡°I won,¡± Ang said.


    ¡°Yeah, I can see that.¡±


    Meanwhile, Emilia is being consoled by Patricia. They know now that the world is bigger than they think. An expert level mage can defeat a master level mage. Even though the master level mage could be much older than the expert level mage.


    ¡°Don¡¯t be so down. With your strength, you can still be called as one of the strongest mage in the continent. All you need is experience,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. It¡¯s obvious from that match. Emilia, send this letter to the president. And you need to tell everything that happened here to her. I¡¯ll have a chat with them here while waiting for the respond,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°...Yes, Grandma.¡±


    Emilia flies toward the city. Obviously less energetic than when she¡¯s approaching us before.


    ¡°I wrote a letter to our president. And I wrote it positively in hope that you can get permission toe. Though I want to ask you something as well. If you don¡¯t mind, can you spar with us in your spare moment,¡± Patricia asked.


    Shortly after the match, I exchanged information with Patricia a bit more before she wrote down a letter to give to the one in charge of Rygis. It wasn¡¯t much information, but I think that¡¯s enough to give some information to them about the outside world.


    ¡°Just a spar? Well, I don¡¯t mind. Ang and Shirley would love to improve as well. As for the other circus members, they are not as strong as these two. But you may ask them for instruction. They may ept it,¡± I said.


    ¡°...but most of them are men,¡± Patricia said in a low voice.


    It¡¯s here. So we¡¯re right. As someone who is most likely live in Rygis the longest, she should have some hatred toward men. And she showed it here. Though her voice is so low that no one but me can hear her.


    Let¡¯s dig up more info from her while waiting for her granddaughter to return.

 Chapter 635

    Chapter 635: The President of Rygis


    With her flight magic and her enhanced physical strength thanks to reaching master level, Emilia dashed back to the city. She ignores the entrance and just flies above the wall and through the window of a building where she was guarding before. The ce that Roy assumed to be the office of the one in charge of Rygis.


    ¡°Emilia? What¡¯s wrong? You seem to be in a hurry.¡±


    The one inside the office room where Emilia entered asked her. She is the president of Rygis, Yuria. She looks much older than Emilia, but she is actually younger. Her magic level is not that good as she only reached intermediate level. But her political skill is good enough to make all the people in Rygis to vote for her during the presidential election.


    ¡°Yuria, we have outsiders trying toe to Rygis,¡± Emilia reported to her as she gave Yuria the letter written by Patricia. It¡¯s a message from Patricia about Roy and the others.


    ¡°Oh, really? There hasn¡¯t been any guestsing for years. Is it finally the time for our country to be open to the world?¡± Yuria said as she opened the letter and started to read it. But the more she read it, the more stern her expression changed. Not because of the guests. But because of the report written by Patricia about what she learned from Roy and the others. The fact that there¡¯s a war against a cult that worshiped an Evil God and try to destroy the world.


    ¡°Is this real?¡± Yuria asked Emilia.


    ¡°At least that¡¯s what they told us,¡± Emilia replied.


    .....


    ¡°So, a group of circus troupe is traveling all over the continent to spread happiness because there¡¯s a war. And Patricia said that soon, a messenger from Tatrama kingdom or maybe another country which will ask for our cooperation to fight this cult. Do you think they want to get you and your grandmother because you two are master level mages?¡± Yuria asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think so. Grandma said that they don¡¯t know that we are master level mages until we met. Though I can¡¯t tell if that¡¯s the truth or not. But one thing for sure is that they are already stronger than us even if our level is higher,¡± Emilia said.


    ¡°Wait! You mean that a master level mage like you can lose?¡± Yuria was shocked hearing that.


    ¡°It¡¯s not that I can lose. It¡¯s that I already lost. I asked for a match with someone among them who was hired by the circus to be their guard since she¡¯s friend with them. She was just an expert level mage, but not a normal one. They said that there¡¯s a tournament between the four major power in the continent, and she came out as the winner. Hence she was crowned as the strongest in the continent. And I lost against her without even able to give her a scratch,¡± Emilia said.


    Her tone is telling Yuria the mood she¡¯s in. She¡¯s depressed because of her defeat against a stranger from the outside world that was dubbed as the strongest mage.


    ¡°...I thought that a master level mage is undefeated. But the outside world is scarier than I thought. Maybe it¡¯s wrong for me to try and make this country open to the world,¡± Yuria said.


    ¡°No, Yuria. You¡¯re wrong. If we stay locked here forever, we will never know the danger that we¡¯re facing. And if what they said about the cult wanting to destroy the world is true, that means we will also be their target. Knowing how dangerous the outside world is much better than not knowing how we will die,¡± Emilia said.


    ¡°I see... So, you¡¯re agree to let that circus group to enter this city?¡± Yuria asked.


    ¡°I didn¡¯t say that. That¡¯s a separate matter. And it¡¯s for you to decide. Roy, the one who represent the circus, said that if they can¡¯t get a permission, they will leave. But they are just a circus group. They can¡¯t tell the outside kingdom to not send messenger to this country. I¡¯ll leave the decision to you. We decided to trust you as our leader,¡± Emilia said.


    ¡°Hmm... I think it¡¯s good. They can also be our introduction to the outside world. We can allow them to perform here with a condition that they will inform us of what¡¯s going on in the outside world. We will discuss it moreter with the representative of the circuster when we meet. But since most of the citizens still feel unsafe, we can only let them borrow thend outside of the city. Though they are allowed to enter. I¡¯ll write a letter to the circus so you can deliver it,¡± Yuria said.


    Yuria then grabbed a paper and a pen to write her response. Emilia then waited for Yuria to finish her letter.


    ¡°...So, do you know what a circus is?¡± Emilia asked.


    ¡°You don¡¯t know? That¡¯s why you should read more books. There are some books about them in the library. You can go there and read them if you like,¡± Yuria said.


    ¡°Me? Reading? I¡¯ll pass. They wille here anyway. I can watch themter,¡± Emilia said.


    ¡°Sigh... It¡¯s just some people doing tricks. There¡¯s nothing interesting about it. We have magic so why do we need to watch people do some tricks? Magic is more interesting, right? Here¡¯s the letter. Send it to the circus,¡± Yuria said.


    ¡°Alright. I¡¯ll be leaving then,¡± Emilia flew from the window to go to where Roy and the others are.


    ¡°Sigh...e here!¡±


    In the empty room, Yuria shouted to call for someone. And from behind the wall, someonee.


    She is someone covered in ck cloak. But everyone there knows her as the president¡¯s personal guard. Unlike Emilia and Patricia who are responsible for the whole city, this one is only responsible for Yuria¡¯s life.


    ¡°You heard that? Seems like our True God is being called as the Evil God in outside world. What do you think?¡± Yuria asked the woman.


    Unknown to Emilia and Patricia, Yuria and her personal guard are actually closely rted to the cult. They keep it as secret from the master level mages.


    As for Patricia and Emilia, they can sense Yuria¡¯s guard. But they can¡¯t hear what the president and her guard are talking about. So, once Emilia left, the two can freely talk about anything. Including about the cult.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. I don¡¯t have any newsing from the outside for a while. Maybe what they¡¯re saying is true. And they have killed many members who should being here as messengers,¡± the woman in ck said.


    ¡°I see... Then we must continue pretending that we know nothing of the cult,¡± Yuria said.


    ¡°But this is going to be troublesome. I helped you to be the president because you want to change the country. And you said that you will find a way to get those two monsters to join the cult. But you were unable to do that until now. Even more, that person who is called as the strongest in the continent can defeat that monster. Easily. We should have persuade them to join us sooner,¡± the woman in ck said.


    ¡°I know. My n is going well. And they will be easily persuaded in a year or two since my n is working. But because we know nothing of the outside world, we were toote to act. But if someone with the strength of an expert level can defeat a master level mage, don¡¯t you think that those two will be useless in the end?¡± Yuria asked.


    ¡°There¡¯s no way a master level mage will be useless. Bringing them to join us will raise my status more in the cult. Even if it¡¯s just one. Whatever the case, we must hide the truth from everyone. Good thing it¡¯s just the circus. If it¡¯s the messenger from another kingdom, we will be in trouble. We can think of our next n after the circus group is gone. But for now, let¡¯s act like usual,¡± the woman in ck said.


    ¡°Okay. Go and tell the others to stay low and don¡¯t act suspicious. I will try to get information from that circus group as much as possible. Then, we will know of the cult situation outside Rygis,¡± Yuria said.


    The woman in ck then leaves the office to inform the other cult members staying in the city. And Yuria stared at the window toward the direction Emilia is flying.


    ¡°...I hope I did the right thing,¡± Yuria said in low voice.


    Other than the people rted to the cult, no one knows that the cult has infected the country. And even their president is rted.


    And without them knowing anything, our protagonist, Roy, has heard everything.


    While Emilia is delivering the letter to Roy, Yuria is storming her brain to figure out what to do. And the woman in ck is informing the other members of the cult hiding there to stay low.


    And none of them know that in the letter that Emilia delivered to Yuria, Roy has attached a very small Blobby that can¡¯t be detected by the two master level mages. It¡¯s very small, and Roy used his Aura to try to cover its presence from the master level mages.


    Inside that Blobby, there¡¯s a device that can transfer the sound it heard to a device connected to Roy¡¯s ear. Which is covered with air magic so only he can hear.


    Roy who heard what Yuria and the woman in ck smiled after hearing everything.

 Chapter 636

    Chapter 636: We Got the Permission to Perform


    It was good that I was suspicious of them. Though it was extremely lucky that I could attach a small Blobby on the letter Patricia wrote and gave her granddaughter to deliver to the one they call the president.


    While she was writing her letter, I used air magic on my surrounding. And both Patricia and Emilia were surprised and wary that I used magic all of a sudden.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, it¡¯s fine. I¡¯m using air magic to breathe. Although it¡¯s just for a little bit, I made the air in the surrounding to give a calming effect. It¡¯s good for when you have just finished a fight. Ang quite like it as well.¡±


    That¡¯s what I said to the two master level mages. Though that¡¯s not a lie. Ang did like the calming gas. Especially after training or doing anything that could tire her out. And once in a while, when she¡¯s done with her training, I used air magic like this. So I pretend that it¡¯s something that I usually do to Ang and my friends after training.


    The two let down their guard at that moment, and I had Victoria throw a clone of her that she has prepared before when I asked her to prepare seats for us. Because if she only creates clone right before she threw the Blobby, the two master level mages would notice.


    And it¡¯s not just a normal clone. There¡¯s a listening device that Marie created inserted inside the clone. The size is small and since it¡¯s a newly invented device, no one would know what that is.


    After creating the TV, Marie asked Victoria more about the invention in her world. And ording to Victoria, in her world, it was sound first that can travel long distance before visual. Which mean a device tomunicate long distance was created long before TV.


    .....


    But in this world, it¡¯s the reverse. TV was made first. And thanks to that, Marie could easily make a listening device. A small device that can capture all the nearby sound, and another device it¡¯s connected to which will make the listener can hear what sound the other device captured.


    And that device is in my right ear. Covered with air magic to not let any sound or let any other sound enter. And so, I have been talking with the master level mages with only one ear working.


    Emilia arrived at the city and gave the president the letter. And the one they call the president doesn¡¯t notice that there¡¯s a listening device there. I could hear everything she said with another woman there. Who seem to be her guard or assistant since Emilia wasn¡¯t suspicious of her. She¡¯s someone the people has trusted to be that close with the president.


    It seems that the city is on the way to its destruction. Though that¡¯s not their real intention. Their real intention is to get the two master level mages, Patricia and Emilia, to join the cult.


    There will be some trouble during our visit there. But at least we have permission to enter.


    Now, the only problem I have is to inform the others about this. I need to tell them when the two master level mages are not here so they won¡¯t be able to eavesdrop on us.


    The other circus members are fine. They are all agents who have been trained to respond well in any situation. I think it¡¯s fine if I don¡¯t tell them anything yet.


    Victoria won¡¯t speak during our stay here. At least not until I told her that it¡¯s fine to speak. And Shirley is smart. She knows what to do even without being told.


    The only problem is Ang. But as long as I keep it a secret from her, she will act normally. I guess I¡¯ll do that to her. And I¡¯ll try to tell the others about what I heard if I have the chance.


    I tried asking Patricia a bit more about the ce we¡¯re going to visit. But she didn¡¯t answer much about it. Only a little. But I guess that¡¯s the most important part.


    ¡°The ce you¡¯re going to have more women than men. I heard that it¡¯s normal in outside world that men are the ones with power. So I¡¯m telling you this because I don¡¯t want you to be surprised to see that women have more power than men,¡± Patricia said.


    That¡¯s the only thing she told me about Rygis. Though I¡¯d like to say that it¡¯s not only men who have power. Women can have power as well. I know that well since I¡¯m the one who is being pushed around the most at home by the girls.


    Soon after, Emilia returned to us telling that we have the permit to enter. And just like what I heard from them, we will only be allowed to stay outside of the city. But that¡¯s fine. Even if there are monsters there, we are strong enough to protect ourselves.


    ...Maybe they did it on purpose so we can protect the city while staying there. Whatever the case, we got the permit.


    ¡°That¡¯s great! Then, we will go to Rygis. What about you two?¡±


    I asked the two master level mages whether they want to stay with us or move on their own.


    ¡°...We¡¯ll return on our own. See you at the city then,¡± Patricia said before she and her granddaughter run toward the city.


    I guess it¡¯s time to tell the others what I heard. Though I still need to keep it as secret from Ang. Because if she¡¯s wary at all times, she will only provoke the people there.


    As for the Blobby and the listening device in the president¡¯s office, I had them moved after I heard that both the president and the other person are leaving the room. The listening device should be in a safe ce now. Good thing a clone of Victoria can still follow orders even when I can¡¯t see. But I¡¯ll find a chance to hide them in a better positionter.


    I guess for the duration of our stay, I will stay deaf in one ear so I can eavesdrop on the president. But that¡¯s fine since my hearing is good because I¡¯m an Aura Master.


    While Ang helped the others to prepare for our travel to Rygis, I told Shirley, Victoria, and Burnes who will inform it to the others about what I heard.


    ¡°The president is involved with the cult. And someone who is close with her is also the same. There are others as well, so we need to be careful,¡± I said.


    ¡°You too, Roy. We¡¯re in another country. Just because of your hatred and trauma to the cult, you can¡¯t just kill everyone you think is member of the cult. Have you seen anyone with exploding device in their mouth?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°I know. I won¡¯t kill anyone at first sight there. But there were no one with explosive devices in their mouth before. Though that might be because this country is isted from the outside world and there were no supply of explosive devices. The one with the president said that there¡¯s no informationing from the outside. And they gave us the permit so they can ask us about the outside world. That¡¯s why just in case, don¡¯t tell this to Ang. She¡¯s not a good liar. It¡¯s great that those two chose to return on their own. If they stick with us, we can¡¯t have this conversation,¡± I said.


    ¡°Thanks, Roy. I¡¯ll tell the others about this,¡± Burnes said as he left to where the others are.


    ¡°There¡¯s a chance that we might get surrounded by the cult members there. I¡¯ll get Sonia to tell Ka and the others. Roy, prepare to open a portal there to get them here before we¡¯re in danger,¡± Shirley said as she called Sonia.


    Though I¡¯d rather use the portal for us to escape. But that¡¯s fine too. I can just call them, and when we¡¯re in danger, we will all leave with portal.


    ¡°Do you think there will be a fight while we¡¯re staying there?¡± Victoria asked me.


    ¡°Even if they are not the first to pick a fight against us, there will be a fight. Because Im the one who will make the first move. They said that they want to get Patricia and Emilia to join the cult. But no matter what, we have to stop it. Though they must be worried since Ang can defeat Emilia. Still, no matter what, we have to stop their n. Maybe they will target Ang because she¡¯s strong. Not to get her to join them. But to kill her. We have to prevent that from happening,¡± I said.


    Maybe it¡¯s best if we just get someone else instead of Ang toe here. Maybe Ka because she¡¯s the smartest. But she¡¯s already here, so there¡¯s nothing we can do.


    ¡°If it¡¯s Ang, dirty tricks could work. For now, let¡¯s tell everyone to only eat our own food until you have checked everything in that city. We must avoid getting poisoned,¡± Victoria said.


    Poison, huh? They might do that.


    Whatever the case, fight will be unavoidable. But when and how is something we don¡¯t know yet.


    I hope they won¡¯t pick a fight against us during our show. That¡¯s something that I will never forgive.

 Chapter 637

    Chapter 637: The President Invited Me to Meet Her


    After the break, it took some times until we can move again. We took our time until we can reach the city. It¡¯s also to observe the surrounding area.


    ¡°It¡¯s best to go slowly. So we can prepare the route of escape in case danger approach and we¡¯re far from you,¡± Burnes said to me.


    ¡°Yeah. If something happen, I¡¯ll try to get all the attention to me first before I make my escape. Once I escaped, I will look for you all. For now, the main thing is to make sure that at least those two master level mages not hostile to us. Don¡¯t make them our enemies. As for the cult, we¡¯ll figure it outter,¡± I said.


    I can just kill that president and the one guarding her. But that will make the two master level mages as my enemies. And I want to bring them to be our allies in the war against the cult. And we need to be careful about it.


    Well, there¡¯s also the fact that Rygis enved many men. Us men need to be careful so we won¡¯t fall to very. I hope no one dare to mess with us.


    ¡°It¡¯s here. You can see the city now. Though surprisingly, the gatekeepers are expert level mages since they detect our presence. Well, since there are two master level mages, I guess that¡¯s to be expected that the average level of the people here is higher than in our country,¡± I said.


    There are two gatekeepers protecting the gate. And they are all women. Which mean it¡¯s likely that the men are much weaker because of discrimination. Though I don¡¯t care about them as long as it doesn¡¯t involve me.


    .....


    And I even care less after seeing that there¡¯s a man that I know in the brothel. Unlike the other ves who are unhappy about being used and yed with by the women there, he is extremely happy. I saw him back before we met the two master level mages.


    He is someone I know in my past life. And I forgot about him until today. The nodding guy. The guy who was always nodded in response when we greeted each other without a word in my past life. Back when I was a student in the introductory school.


    Although I was somehow unable to meet him after I returned back to the past because I rarely go to school and I never greeted him so I never saw him nodded, that guy is him without a doubt.


    He received a customer with a greeting, and when his customer asked her for something, he nodded in a way that I remember. That¡¯s how I remember him.


    Maybe because he enjoyed getting with all those women, he seems to be quite popr. I¡¯m d he¡¯s doing well. And that¡¯s why I won¡¯t care about the very in this country. Because maybe, there are some other men who are happy with the life they live in.


    ¡°They noticed our presence from here? I guess they are expert level mages. Which mean that Rygis has a way to get magic stones. If we could ask for their cooperation with the magic stones, we can have stronger army,¡± Burnes said.


    Oh, right. I forgot about that. I guess he¡¯s right that magic stones are easy to get in this ce. Well, we will learn more about it as we investigate. For now, let¡¯s greet the gatekeepers.


    ¡°Excuse me! We¡¯re the circus troupe that will perform in this city. We have received permission from the president, and although we are allowed to enter the city, we can only build our tent outside. So, can you guide us to the ce where we can build our tent?¡± I asked the gatekeeper as I gave them the letter that I received from Emilia.


    ¡°Hmm... alright. This is a real letter from the president. We have been instructed to allow you to build your tent around the entrance. You can build your tent anywhere you want as long as you don¡¯t block the road,¡± one of the gatekeeper said.


    Hmm? The other gatekeeper is blushing when she is looking Burnes? I¡¯ll get him to do the talking with her then. He¡¯s an agent. Sleeping with a target to get information is natural.


    Burnes seem to sense it as well as he smiled at the girl. Though he needs to be careful because she¡¯s an expert level mage.


    Well, he understand what to do. I¡¯ll just trust him.


    But I don¡¯t like how Burnes have an admirer right away. I¡¯m more handsome than him!


    Anyway, we got the permission to build the tent where our show will be performed at. As an entertainer, it¡¯s best to keep our audience safe. Even if the average level of this city is higher than normal, it¡¯s best that we build the tent not far from the entrance.


    And obviously, we build the tent near the gatekeeper so Burnes get some information from the gatekeeper who have a crush on him.


    What about the other gatekeeper? Is there anyone whom she took fancy?


    ...the two strongmen appear to be whom she¡¯s interested in. Is it the muscle? Because the men of Rygis were too thin?


    ¡°Apparently, you¡¯re not their taste, Roy,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°It¡¯s not like I¡¯m desperate to have another girl. I already have you and the others,¡± I said while hiding my tears.


    It¡¯s not like I want to have more lovers. I just don¡¯t like it when other men are more popr than me. It has been like that even before I returned back to the past.


    Just wait. Once the show started, rence will be the most popr one.


    ¡°Roy. The president said that she wants to meet the representative of the circus. You¡¯re allowed to bring someone with you,¡± Burnes said.


    He received that message while he was talking with the gatekeeper. I¡¯ll take that offer then.


    ¡°Shirley, I¡¯m going to meet the president. Do you want toe? The others are busy with the tent,¡± I asked Shirley if she wants to meet the president.


    ¡°Sure. I¡¯ll go.¡±


    Of course as a princess, she wants to meet the leader of this country. Someone who might be her ally. Though that president seems to be our enemy though. I don¡¯t know about the others people here, but we¡¯ll just be careful.


    I also need to make the listening device that I installed there to be hidden perfectly. It¡¯s a good time to do that.


    While avoiding the two master level mages, I used Divine Vision again toward where the Blobby is. And I moved it toward the bookshelves when the president and her guard are not looking.


    Good. It should be safe now. As for the Blobby, I will let it stay there without doing anything else. So when I need to, I can kidnap the president.


    Shirley and I entered the city, and there¡¯s someone waiting for us there. She will guide us to the president.


    ¡°Ooh... nice city. I¡¯m curious what kind of treats this city have. Is there any restriction of the ces I must not go or enter?¡± I asked the guide.


    ¡°There shouldn¡¯t be. But in the past, there¡¯s a discrimination toward men. So you might be treated badly because of that and not allowed to enter some establishment just because you are a man. Just be careful and mind your manner,¡± the guide said.


    ¡°...That¡¯s scary. What kind of discrimination was it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well... it¡¯s nothing to worry about. Our president has worked hard to erase discrimination. But that doesn¡¯t mean the people¡¯s hatred toward men diminished. Just be careful and only enter a city with a femalepanion at least,¡± the guide warned me.


    Good thing I chose Shirley toe with me. If I asked Burnes or another man, we might be treated badly.


    ¡°Hmm... there are many women here and I don¡¯t see any men. I guess they hide themselves in their home so they won¡¯t be discriminated. Am I right?¡± I asked the guide.


    ¡°...You¡¯re right. Although it¡¯s better now than in the past, there are still many men who are afraid toe out of their house,¡± the guide replied.


    That¡¯s a lie. Many of them can¡¯t leave their house because their wife or female rtives forced them to stay at home. I saw them when I used Divine Vision from before.


    ¡°Whoa, that¡¯s a huge building! Is that where we will have attendance with the president?¡± I asked. While pretending to be surprised.


    ¡°Yes. You will meet her in her office. Please follow me,¡± the guide said.


    The entrance of the building is being protected by the two master level mages. I greeted them when I entered. Seems like as long as I¡¯m in this city, they will put surveince on us at all time. We need to be careful.


    If they are not master level mages and are important to the city, I would have kidnapped them and took them to meet Albert right away. But being master level mages, they are too dangerous to meet Albert.


    How can I convince them that this country has fallen to the cult? Should I try to provoke the president? Or her guard?


    If they make an action that will endanger the people of Rygis, it would be easier for me to convince the master level mages that they are from the cult. Though if too many people died because I provoked the cult, those two will end up hating me. I need to be careful and not kill anyone right away.

 Chapter 638

    Chapter 638: Exchanging Information


    ¡°Ms. President, it¡¯s me. I brought the circus representative,¡± the guide said after she knocked on the door to the office where the president is working.


    This room is where the listening device is. And I had the Blobby there hid it behind a bookshelf. I can see it with my Divine Vision.


    And there¡¯s also someone else there. Someone in hiding behind the wall. She must be the one that the president was talking to. Though we need to pretend that we don¡¯t know her existence.


    Well, even without Divine Vision, both Shirley and I are expert level mages. We can detect someone¡¯s presence as long as they are within our range. They should have known that I¡¯m an expert level mage. So they know that I can detect the presence of the one hiding.


    The guide opened the door to let us enter. The two of us then entered the office room, and the guide just stand in front of the door.


    ¡°Umm... nice to meet you. I¡¯m sorry that it¡¯s the first time I heard of a president, so I don¡¯t know what to do. Should I kneel down?¡± I tried to ask the president politely.


    Usually, when meeting a king, one should kneel down first until the king told us that it¡¯s fine to stand up. Though I rarely do that. I¡¯m friends with the kings after all.


    .....


    But now, I don¡¯t know what to do. Should I kneel? But we¡¯re in her office. Not in attendance hall or somewhere else. But her office. A ce that no stranger should enter. And we¡¯re here easily.


    ¡°You don¡¯t need to mind your manner. Before I became the president, I was just a normal civilian,¡± the president said.


    ¡°But you need to at least mind your manner.¡±


    The one who said that was the woman in hiding. And since she leaked her presence on purpose, I guess we don¡¯t need to act like she¡¯s not there.


    ¡°Why are you speaking?¡± the president asked the woman in hiding.


    ¡°Those two are expert level mages. They already know where I¡¯m hiding. Though I will still hide myself in case they are trying to do something,¡± the woman in hiding said.


    Their voices are exactly the same as the two that I heard with the listening device. They are rted to the cult. Especially the woman in hiding.


    As for the president, I don¡¯t know whether she has joined the cult or not. But at least I know that she¡¯s working together with the cult.


    Since it¡¯s the president herself who is rted to the cult, it will be difficult if I just kill her. Especially since she¡¯s someone that many people here trusted to be their leader. The dissatisfaction that we killed their president might end up with them waging a war against us.


    If the one in charge here is a king, and that king is disliked by many people, I won¡¯t have any problem to kill them right away. But killing someone popr among themoners will only give us many trouble in the future. That¡¯s why I need to hold myself back from killing them.


    ¡°Okay, I¡¯ll try to be polite then. May I ask why you invited me here?¡± I asked the president.


    I already heard her name from Patricia. But I¡¯ll just call her President or Ms. President to be polite.


    ¡°I want to ask you more about the outside world. This country, until a few years ago, has been closed off from the outside world. So we know very little about what¡¯s going on outside. Even Emilia doesn¡¯t know what a circus is. That¡¯s why I want to ask you more about it. Including about the war against the Evil Cult,¡± the president said.


    ¡°Okay. I kind of expected that to happen when Patricia and Emilia said that they didn¡¯t know about the cult. So, I brought Shirley here. She¡¯s a high-ranked hunter and has been to many ces so she has more information than me who focused more on the circus,¡± I introduced Shirley to the President.


    Although I didn¡¯t lie, her information was because she¡¯s a member of royalty. Good thing I had her with me. She can get to know the political structure of this country.


    Shirley then introduced herself as a daughter of a nobility from Tatrama who became a hunter. And that¡¯s why she knows more than me. I was just there to tell the President about my journey.


    ¡°You¡¯re also a finalist of that tournament I heard before? Does that mean you¡¯re strong?¡± the President asked Shirley.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m still improving. Though there are still some people who are stronger than me,¡± Shirley said.


    We¡¯re currently talking about the tournament between the four countries. President Yuria wasn¡¯t surprised to hear that there are some expert level mages. As expected, the average level here is higher than the outside world. I¡¯d like to know how they can gain their level. But for now, we need to get the conversation going to where we wanted.


    ¡°So, the tournament was actually a bait to attack the cult. Although the strongest mages are fighting the tournament, the four kingdom¡¯s army cooperated together and defeated a lot of expert level mages and the powerful monsters they brought. That¡¯s why the cult should be at their weakest after the kingdoms killed all the artificial master level mages. So, Thomas and I decided to do a tour because we expect the cult won¡¯t make any big move at the moment,¡± I said.


    When I said that many cult members died, President Yuria didn¡¯t react at all. But the woman in hiding clenched her fists. I guess this President is just cooperating with the cult. But she¡¯s not a member of the cult.


    I¡¯ll ask Albertter on how to deal with her. Should we kill herter, or let her live and continue leading this country. Or even let this country be taken over by Tatrama. That¡¯s up to Albert¡¯s decision.


    Albert must have wanted to hear what we¡¯re talking as well. But the listening device can¡¯t reach that far to his pce. As for broadcasting it through the TV in his ce, the camera is too suspicious to bring.


    We keep exchanging information. About the outside world, and about this country. And whenever we told them about the news of the cult¡¯s n that the kingdoms managed to stop, President Yuria didn¡¯t react much. But the woman in hiding was extremely angry.


    For now, I¡¯m going to assume that the President is not a member of the cult. She only used the cult for her purpose. Which I think should be about her changing this country. To make this country open to the outside world.


    She asked the cult¡¯s cooperation to make her the president. But she doesn¡¯t care at all about the cult.


    I think she will start to think that it¡¯s a bad idea for her to continue her rtionship with the cult after I told her about so many bad things that the cult did. She must be trying to cut off her rtionship with the cult.


    I need to get more information before I can confirm it. I might need a way tomunicate with her secretly. But I guess this is it for now. We will stay here for a few days. And the listening device and the Blobby will stay in the office. I can continue eavesdropping on her, or even use portal to kidnap her if I have the chance.


    ¡°Oh, it started to get dark. I think this is it for today. I¡¯m still interested about the outside world. So, if you don¡¯t mind, I¡¯d like you toe again at the same time tomorrow. Is that okay with you?¡± the President invited us toe again tomorrow.


    ¡°Of course I¡¯d like to. And after our chat tomorrow, you cane to watch the circus as well. Today, we¡¯re just preparing for everything. And tomorrow night will be when we start our show. Some of the circus members should have advertised the circus to everyone. I¡¯d like to get permission to let the gate open until the show is over. Is that okay?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Sure. The gate is never closed anyway. Though at night, the security will be increased. But the people have gotten used to it so it¡¯s fine,¡± President Yuria said.


    ¡°Then, for our first meeting, I¡¯ll give you something.¡±


    I grabbed a deck of card from my pocket to perform a trick. It¡¯s a simple sleight of hand trick where I guessed correctly the card that President Yuria picked.


    She picked King of Spade from the deck. And I guessed it correctly even when I didn¡¯t use my Divine Vision.


    ¡°This is just a small performance from me. I¡¯ll give that card to you as a gift for our first meeting. If you want to see something much more impressive, pleasee to our show tomorrow night. Then, I¡¯ll take my leave.¡±


    Shirley and I left the office guided by the same woman who guided us. While the President is still awed by my performance.


    And she doesn¡¯t know that the ck decoration behind the card is a Blobby. All the cards in my pocket have the same Blobby decoration.


    If she brings that card everywhere, I can use portal to get her wherever she is. Though I can¡¯t eavesdrop on her since there¡¯s only one listening device. And that¡¯s the one I hid in the bookshelf. But at least it will be easier for me to get to her.

 Chapter 639

    Chapter 639: A Chance to Kidnap the President


    The next day, I returned back to the office again and talked a lot about the outside world with President Yuria together with Shirley. This time, we¡¯re talking about Tatrama Kingdom.


    I¡¯m not used to call Albert as his majesty so I let Shirley do the talking. And Shirley talked about many things that she knows.


    Well, she¡¯s more knowledgeable about how her country work. While I just focused more on gourmet. If the President asked me what the specialty dishes from Tatrama, I can answer her right away. But it seems like she¡¯s not interested in talking about food so I don¡¯t have much to say.


    The things President Yuria asked were mostly about the situation in the outside world including about the cult.


    ¡°Well, now we have more expert level mages. But it¡¯s still not enough to face against the cult. Even more since just a few days ago, we encountered two master level mages acting as bandits. We don¡¯t know yet if they are with the cult or not. But there¡¯s no way any ordinary bandit can reach master level easily. Though we killed them after a difficult fight,¡± Shirley said.


    She can lie so easily. She wasn¡¯t even with us when I encountered those two master level mages from the cult. And she told the President that we killed two master level mages. Though we won¡¯t say anything about them being in the cult without any evidence. We just make them assume that we killed master level mages from the cult.


    ¡°How can you kill master level mage easily!?¡±


    .....


    All of a sudden, the woman in hiding shouted and asked how we can kill master level mages.


    ¡°Simple. We are fight better and more efficient than them. Even if our level is weaker, we have more experience in fighting while they are probably hiding their power or only have the experience of fighting someone weaker than them while we encountered a lot of powerful enemies and keep trying to improve ourselves by sparring with each others,¡± Shirley replied calmly.


    ¡°But they are master level mages! I can¡¯t even believe that someone as strong as Emilia lose against an expert level mage no matter how much you exined it!¡±


    The woman no longer hide herself. The wall where she hid herself opened and she came out. She¡¯s wearing a ck robe, but I can see her face clearly. She seems to be much older than President Yuria.


    ¡°Then, how about we check it out whether expert level mage can defeat a master level mage or not? Actually, this morning, Emilia asked Ang again for a spar. They should be fighting quite far from here. You can watch it and see whether expert level mage can win or not. Though they both can fly so they might be quite far... did she just leave you alone here with us?¡±


    When I pointed my finger to the location where Ang and Emilia should be sparring, the woman in ck came out of her hiding spot and jumped out of the window and fly toward the direction I pointed at.


    Did she just forget about her duty as the President¡¯s Guard?


    President Yuria didn¡¯t show it in her expression, but I can see her heart is beating so fast. She must be worried that we might do something to her. Especially after knowing that we are too strong.


    ¡°Umm... we can stop our chat today if you want to,¡± I said to the President.


    ¡°...No, it¡¯s okay. But I will ask someone toe here first,¡± President Yuria said as she left her office. And outside the office, the woman who became our guide again today is waiting.


    President Yuria told her to bring Patricia here. Don¡¯t tell me that this is a chance to tell them the truth? A chance to see if President Yuria is a member of the cult or only asking for their cooperation?


    I approached Shirley and whispered in her ears.


    ¡°Shirley, the other woman has left. And the President is bringing Patricia here. Do you think this is our chance to interrogate them?¡± I asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s a good idea. But are you sure about this? You might end up missing a chance to perform tonight if there¡¯s a trouble here,¡± Shirley said.


    Oh, right. Showse first and cultter. Is not something I would think.


    The cult¡¯s destruction alwayse first. My source of trauma should be erased as soon as possible. At least we can do it before we perform. Because if we¡¯re in the middle of our performance, I won¡¯t forgive anyone who makes trouble at that time. Whether they are from the cult or not.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. But for now, I¡¯ll make it simple. We¡¯ll try to get Patricia and the President to cooperate for now. The rest, we¡¯ll do itter. We only have this chance when the President¡¯s guard is not here. And it won¡¯t be long until she returns. For now, we will both try to stop Patricia from doing anything and convince the President. Once they enter, I will use air magic to lock the sound from leaving,¡± I suggested a n to Shirley.


    ¡°Hmm... I have a better n. You carried a Magic Restricting Cor with you, right? We¡¯ll put that on Patricia¡¯s neck. Once she can¡¯t use any magic to protect the President, you will open a portal and let my brother interrogate them quickly. You will stay here and keep watch for when that woman returns,¡± Shirley said.


    ¡°Okay. That¡¯s a much better n. Be sure to get the answer quickly. Even if Ang is quite far from here, it¡¯s best to get things done sooner. Alright, Patricia is close. Let¡¯s do it.¡±


    We acted normally when Patricia and President Yuria are outside the door. Soon after, the two entered the office.


    And as soon as the door is locked, I used air magic to seal the sound in this office.


    ¡°What are you doing!?¡±


    As a master level mage, it¡¯s obvious that she could sense that I activated my magic. But since she¡¯s acting as the President¡¯s guard after the real guard is gone, she can¡¯t use any powerful magic in this enclosed space or she will end up hurting the one she needs to protect.


    ¡°I¡¯m trying to save this country from the cult,¡± I replied.


    Then I grabbed Patricia¡¯s arm to stop her from doing anything. She was shocked to see that I¡¯m much more powerful than her despite her level is higher than mine.


    Using Victoria¡¯s clones, I transformed them into a rope so I can restrain Patricia, and I put the cor around her neck.


    ¡°Sorry about this. Someone will exin everything soon. With your strength, you can easily rip that cor off your neck,¡± I said.


    ¡°Why are you doing this!?¡± Patricia shouted.


    Seeing that a master level mage was restrained easily, President Yuria panicked. But before she could do anything, Shirley stopped her.


    ¡°Please don¡¯t do anything stupid. We know that you are cooperating with the cult through that guard in ck before. We need to confirm if you are only cooperating with them, or you are actually a member of the cult,¡± Shirley said as the air in the surrounding turned cold. She¡¯s pressuring the President with her ice magic.


    ¡°I... I don¡¯t know what you¡¯re talking about!¡± President Yuria denied that she has anything to do with the cult.


    But I can see that she¡¯s lying. And Patricia who is a master level mage is sensitive enough to feel the change around her president.


    ¡°See? You understand, right? For now, please cooperate with us for the safety of your country. I will take you somewhere else where you can hear the truth from your president,¡± I said to Patricia.


    ¡°...Yuria. You will tell me everything about what happened with you and that cult. Roy, where will you take me to?¡± Patricia asked.


    To answer that, I opened a portal directly to Albert¡¯s location. He¡¯s in his office with Mustache and the Prime Minister to do some paperwork.


    ¡°Meet the King of Tatrama, Albert. He will be the one asking you questions, and you will answer everything. By the way, Shirley is his sister. Which makes her a princess. I¡¯m sorry that we lied to you, but it was necessary. Please enter the portal. I will wait here for that guard in ck. When she¡¯s about to arrive, I¡¯ll open up a portal for you to return,¡± I said.


    Even if Patricia is a master level mage, Shirley and Mustache should be enough to stop her from going wild. And President Yuria who is scared of Patricia right now, can¡¯t do anything but obey me.


    Albert was confused because I didn¡¯t tell him that I will bring the President of Rygis to him. But that¡¯s fine. Shirley will exin everything to him.


    Since Patricia no longer resisting, I removed the Blobbyrope binding her. She entered the portal while ripping off the cor on her neck. But she has no intention of fighting at the moment so it¡¯s fine. And her attention is toward her president who might be betraying her country.


    I close the portal and I¡¯m all alone in this room. But there are many expert level mages here who noticed it, so I called Shelia and Graham, and also let Victoria be in her human form. With this, there are the same four people¡¯s presences in this room. No one outside will be suspicious if they sense four people here.


    I have learned that expert level mages and even master level mages can¡¯t tell who is who from just detecting presences. With this, no one can tell that the president and Patricia are gone.


    But of course since I used magic, the guide outside the door is suspicious.


    ¡°Ms. President! Is everything okay?¡± she asked.


    And I, after adjusting my voice with air magic so my voice is simr to President Yuria¡¯s voice, replied back to her.


    ¡°It¡¯s okay. I just asked our guests to show me their magic. Don¡¯t worry since Patricia is here,¡± I said with President Yuria¡¯s voice.


    ¡°Understood. If there¡¯s anything you need me to do, please call me.¡±


    We¡¯re safe for now. Let¡¯s wait for the woman in ck to return, or until I received a message that Albert is done with the interrogation.

 Chapter 640

    Chapter 640: She¡¯s Victoria¡¯s Fan


    I can¡¯t believe that we got the chance to interrogate the President of Rygis so quickly. Good thing Emilia asked Ang to spar. That woman in ck must have wanted to see if Emilia really lost against an expert level mage or not.


    As for Emilia, I hope she can get stronger by learning from Ang. And she will hopefully join our cause.


    Well, I don¡¯t know if she can learn anything from Ang. Ang is a terrible teacher. But if Emilia can learn by watching Ang, or she can improve with her own instinct like Ang, I don¡¯t need to worry about it. Though once Patricia and Emilia joined our cause, I can just let Ka be the one teaching them. And they will grow even stronger even without improving their magic level. Or they could even improve their other element which still hasn¡¯t reached master level or even expert level yet.


    Anyway, I¡¯m left here in the President¡¯s office to wait when that woman in ck willl return. Along with my three familiars who are here so the expert level mages outside will still detect that there are still four people here.


    ¡°So, what are we doing?¡± Graham asked me after I summoned him here.


    ¡°Nothing. Sorry, but you must only act that there¡¯s someone here. I don¡¯t need you to do anything, so you can sit on the sofa. But you mustn¡¯t use magic or do anything suspicious. Though you can sleep if you want to,¡± I said.


    Shelia who heard that she can¡¯t do anything, instantly curled up on the floor to sleep. While Graham just looked around the office with no real intention. Though I told him to avoid the windows or we will be seen from the outside.


    .....


    ¡°So, what do we do?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°What else? This is the President¡¯s office. Let¡¯s see if there¡¯s anything we can get. Any important document or something,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then I will look at the bookshelves,¡± Victoria said as she walked to the bookshelf where I put the listening device at.


    ¡°I will enter the secret passage behind the wall where that woman in ck is hiding,¡± I said.


    ¡°Is there anything interesting there?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°From my experience, the guard of an influential people who protect them from the shadow, is the most suspicious and have something they hide from other people. And this one is a member of the cult, so I don¡¯t want to miss a single thing,¡± I said.


    The experience I talked about was the guard that protected Albert from the shadow. Candy¡¯s teacher who taught her to be an agent. And he has unhealthy affection toward Marie, the queen whom he should protect.


    Maybe this one has weird things with her as well. She has a lot of books inside the passage where she was hiding.


    And as I used Divine Vision to check every single books, I see several books that seem to be used many times. There¡¯s no dust, and some of the pages are crumpled. And there¡¯s also sketchbooks where that woman seem to draw for her hobby. And when I looked at those books, I turned around and leave the secret passage. There¡¯s no need for me to continue checking this ce.


    ¡°Oh, Roy. You¡¯re back already? That was quick. What did you find?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°...that woman in ck is your fan. And she seem to have interest in drawing,¡± I said.


    ¡°Really!? I¡¯m thinking of adapting my novel to aicbook. Or should I say graphic novel? If she¡¯s not a member of the cult, I would like to hire her. Well, I¡¯ll go and check that ce then,¡± Victoria said as she has an obvious delighted expression pasted on her face.


    Adaptation? Does she mean there will be pictures from her novel? The stories she wrote? Where some of the characters are actually based on me? I¡¯ll burn them all when I have the chance.


    Then, I checked the books on the bookshelves in the president¡¯s office. And I also look for important documents. But it seems like this ce is not where the important documents are stored. But since there are no master level mage in this ce anymore, I can use Divine Vision easily and look for where they store the important documents. Though it¡¯s not like I can go there. But at least I know where to go if I need to.


    The woman in ck hasn¡¯t returned when Sonia appears and told me that I can bring them all back here. That¡¯s too fast. But at least they have done discussing the important matter. Though I don¡¯t know what that is.


    For now, I¡¯ll open up the portal. But before that, the guide outside the room called out to the president if there¡¯s anything she wants from her.


    I used air barrier to lock the sound from leaving. But I can still make it so the sound from outside the barrier to get in. I feel like it won¡¯t be long before my air magic can reach expert level.


    I used the President¡¯s voice to say that we¡¯re fine. Though the guide outside is a bit suspicious. Maybe they are using password in case the President is suspicious of something. I need to get the President back quickly.


    I unsummoned Shelia and Graham, and after I entered the secret passage to tell Victoria to quickly return and fixed everything back to its ce, I opened a portal and brought Shirley, Patricia, and President Yuria back.


    Patricia is no longer restrained. And Yuria seem to have refreshed her mind after the discussion. She must have bear a heavy burden after knowing that the cult she is cooperating with is a dangerous group with the intention to destroy the world. Now that she has spoken with someone about her problem, she seems to be free of her burden.


    ¡°Is it done?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. They¡¯re with us,¡± Shirley said.


    ¡°That fast? I¡¯ll hear everythingter. It¡¯s good that we have the cooperation of a leader of a country and a master level mage. So, what do we do with the other master level mage?¡± I asked.


    ¡°For now, we will keep it as secret from her. And from everyone as well,¡± Patricia replied.


    ¡°There are too many members of the cult hiding in this country. If we capture just a few of them, the rest will either escape or fight back. And many civilians will be the victims. That¡¯s why we will keep it as secret for now. Has the person outside the door asked if there¡¯s something wrong in this room?¡± President Yuria asked.


    ¡°Yes. Twice. One after I transported you all to Albert¡¯s location, and another right before I transported you back here,¡± I said.


    ¡°Oh, if I don¡¯t give the right reply, they will think that something happened to me. I¡¯ll speak to her now,¡± President Yuria said as she opened the door to te outside.


    ¡°She has told us about the password that she needs to say when everything is under control. And it¡¯s not a lie,¡± Shirley said.


    President Yuria then spoke to the person waiting outside. And she said, ¡°Everything is okay. We¡¯re just having fun.¡±


    I guess that¡¯s the password. When I looked at Shirley, she nodded.


    I was right that the president needs to say the right word when asked. Good thing I didn¡¯t try too hard in pretending.


    For now, the woman outside is convinced that nothing is wrong. And when the President returns, I used my magic to block the sound from escaping again.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯d like to hear about what you were talking about. But I can ask Shirleyter about it. For now, while this room is soundproofed by my magic, and Yuria¡¯s guard is not here yet, let¡¯s discuss what we should do next,¡± I said.


    ¡°You won¡¯t call me President Yuria anymore?¡± Yuria asked.


    ¡°No. Unless we¡¯re in the presence of someone else. You have met Albert. The king of Tatrama. But Albert and the other three kings of the major countries in this continent know what I can do. And I have more power since I can tell them what to do. Since you¡¯re just a President of a small country, I won¡¯t act politely anymore unless needed,¡± I said.


    ¡°So I was right that you are the strongest,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°Yes I am. At the moment, in our whole alliance, I¡¯m the strongest. But I still don¡¯t know if the Evil God is stronger than me or not,¡± I said.


    After that, we chatted a bit of what to do after this. But it doesn¡¯tst long since I can see that the woman in ck is returning here.


    ¡°She¡¯sing back. Let¡¯s stop the discussion here. Yuria, give me the card I gave you yesterday,¡± I asked Yuria for the card I gave her the previous day.


    She gave it to me in confusion. And when I grabbed the card, the Blobby decoration behind the card moved. I grabbed a few grain of sand and put them on the card. And they are covered by the Blobby.


    ¡°Keep this card with you at all time. This way, I can open a portal to your location. And if you think it¡¯s safe, you can tap the card so you can summon a ghost to be your messenger,¡± I said.


    She wasn¡¯t surprised to hear that we used a ghost as our messenger. That¡¯s because she must have witnessed it before when Albert called Sonia to send a message to me.


    The woman in ck then returned to her duty as a guard while she has bitter expression on her face. I guess she must have witnessed how Ang beat Emilia.


    We talked a bit more, and then I told her to watch the circus tonight before I left.


    With this, we have the cooperation of two of the most important people in this country. It¡¯s going smooth so far. I hope there won¡¯t be any problem during our stay here.

 Chapter 641

    Chapter 641: After the First Show in Rygis


    Later in the night, the show went well. Many people doesn¡¯t understand what a circus is. And when we finally made our performance, everyone is happy. And they are looking for more. Including the President himself who came to watch us.


    Everyone isughing during my performance as rence the Clown. But unfortunately, I¡¯m not the most popr one.


    All the audiences are women. And even if theyughed at my performance, they admired the other guys¡¯ appearance instead of their performance.


    Well, good-looking guy doing amazing performance is what everyone want to see. But I¡¯m not that ugly being a clown, right? Why am I less popr than the others?


    With that, the show on the first night is over. Although there were many peopleing to watch, there are still some empty seats. I hope tomorrow all the empty seats will be filled.


    After the show is over, everyone left the tent. Except for Yuria, her bodyguard, and Emilia who is curious about us.


    ¡°That was a good show. It was much better than I expected,¡± Yuria said.


    .....


    ¡°Yeah! And there were so little magic used. I can¡¯t believe you all can get that strong without raising your level! And how is she so flexible!?¡±


    Emilia asked various question about our performance. Though I let someone answer her questions. I¡¯m talking with Yuria after all.


    As for Patricia, she¡¯s still in the city. Because we expect many people interested in circus, the city should be quieter. And for the cult members hiding in the city, that is their chance tomunicate to each other or do something else. Hence why Patricia is staying behind.


    And I told her that if she feels a gaze from the circus, that would be me. I told her that I can see many things so I will help her observing anything suspicious. Though so far tonight, there were no suspicious act at all.


    Until I looked at Patricia again. It¡¯s a signal to her that the circus is over. And after that, she¡¯s moving toward the gate of the city and to the circus. And at that time, some group of people are gathering together.


    Those people all moved toward the red-light district. And discussing about something. They are most likely members of the cult.


    I want to identify all of them. But I was shocked to see that there are a few men there. And one of them is the nodding guy!


    ...I feel betrayed. Someone I used to greet all the time is possibly a member of the cult. Though I have never greeted him in this life, he¡¯s still someone I know. I will make sure that I¡¯m the one who will take his life.


    Though I hope I am wrong. It¡¯s not like those people gathered because they are members of the cult. But I will keep watching them for now.


    ¡°Is the show over already? Good. Then, let¡¯s go back. Yuria, you still have a lot of work to do. Go get some sleep first. Also, Emilia, tomorrow, you will be the one protecting the city while I watch the circus,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°Why? I want to watch the circus again tomorrow, grandma!¡± Emiliained.


    I¡¯ve seen this several times already. A kid said to their parents that they want to watch the circus again the next day. But for some reason, the parents unable toe again. So the kid won¡¯t be able to watch the circus the second time.


    ...But this time, it was two adults who is arguing. A grandmother and her granddaughter. And the grandmother looks like the younger one because of her short stature.


    What a weird world we live in.


    Soon after, Yuria, Emilia, and the woman in ck left the tent while Patricia still staying behind. She told her granddaughter that she wants to ask something about the outside world to me after hearing about it a little bit.


    But I know that¡¯s not what she wants to hear. Because Emilia who is also interested in hearing it were denied to stay with her. Patricia told her that it¡¯s time for her to work.


    After Emilia left reluctantly, only Patricia and us circus members stayed behind.


    ¡°Ang, go and help the others clean up and check the props. We will use them again tomorrow,¡± I said.


    ¡°Hmm? I¡¯ll just go out and check the surrounding monsters,¡± Ang said.


    Seems like she understands that I¡¯m trying to say something to Patricia. She understands about herself and that she¡¯s terrible at keeping a secret, so she will leave on her own if there¡¯s something that must be kept secret. What a good girl.


    ¡°Burnes and the others who are not busy with the clean up gather here. We have important announcement. Tell this to those who are busyter,¡± I said.


    After everyone gathered, I let Shirley take the spotlight. I also looked around to see if there are anyone hiding or not trying to eavesdrop on us.


    ¡°There¡¯s no one here. You can speak, Shirley,¡± I said.


    ¡°What is that magic? I feel disturbed when I sensed your gaze. I don¡¯t know any element that can help improve someone¡¯s sight,¡± Patricia asked.


    ¡°This is something only I can do. There¡¯s a different version that anyone can learn, but we¡¯ll talk about that in the future. By the way, that ce that look like a slum but actually a red-light district, there are people gathering there after you left your post. Is that something normal or not?¡± I asked Patricia.


    ¡°No. There usually were not many people go out at night and gather together. I didn¡¯t even sense that. Your sight is truly something. Though I hope you won¡¯t use it to peek at girls bathing,¡± Patricia said.


    Toote. I have done that many times. And every time, I will deny it when asked.


    Meanwhile, Shirley started talking.


    She exined how we got a chance to bring Yuria and Patricia to meet Albert and got their cooperation in erasing the cult.


    ¡°Wow, you work fast as usual,¡± Burnes said as he walked to me.


    ¡°Well, there¡¯s a chance and I took it. Since Albert has finished talking to them and he said that they can work together with us, there shouldn¡¯t be anything to worry about,¡± I said.


    ¡°You really trust your king that much, huh?¡± Patricia asked.


    ¡°Well, there¡¯s a reason why I can trust him,¡± I replied.


    His ability to detect lies. Because of that, I know he won¡¯t just send the two back here for no reason. He must have sensed that they will work together with us.


    Shirley then exined everything that happened during the interrogation. Including how Patricia was so angry and tried to attack her own president, but Shirley and Mustache worked together to stop her.


    From what Shirley said, Patricia has a wind element magic that has reached master level. So the resources that this country has should be wind magic stones instead of ice because I don¡¯t feel cold at all here. It¡¯s just Emilia chose to improve her ice element first.


    I was right. And for the cooperation, Yuria will send a lot of wind magic stones to the kingdom. There¡¯s a mountain a few days walk from here where they can get many wind magic stones.


    We couldn¡¯t find a ce to mine wind magic stones. But we have a ce where wind mages can cultivate and their progress rate increased manyfold. On Andro¡¯s back. Next to his wings.


    Though receiving more wind magic stones is better than nothing. And I also don¡¯t want to keep opening a portal to Andro¡¯s back for strangers. It¡¯s best if they can just cultivate at home with magic stones.


    Yuria told Albert that she asked someone who is actually a member of the cult so she can be a president and change the country. It worked. And the very of men in the country were reduced.


    There were still some who doesn¡¯t want that. That¡¯s why Yuria let the slum be. And that slum is most likely where the cult would gather.


    Yuria doesn¡¯t know anyone else other than the woman in ck who are connected to the cult. So we need to be careful.


    That¡¯s the summary of what Shirley told us. And everyone is happy that we have a master level mage to join our cause.


    ¡°The country needs the change if it wants topete with the outside world. I will not me Yuria for cooperating with the cult. But I will kill every single one of them. As for Emilia, I¡¯ll take care of telling her what to do. She can¡¯t keep a secret well, so I need to be careful how to say it to her,¡± Patricia said.


    As I thought, Emilia is simr to Ang. Ang must be happy to have someone who is just like her. And they both even promised to have a spar again tomorrow. Though for talent, I think Ang is far ahead of Emilia.


    ¡°We¡¯ll continue the show tomorrow as nned. And if any of you noticed someone suspicious among the audience, please report it. As for the n to fight the cult, let¡¯s think of a n for that,¡± I said.


    And so, we spent the whole night making a n to fight the cult. And tomorrow, before the show, just like usual, Shirley and I will visit the President again. There are still many things that we can learn from each other.

 Chapter 642

    Chapter 642: Captured by the Cult Members


    After the first night of the show, I got invited by Yuria again as usual in the afternoon before the next andst show in Rygis tonight.


    When I got there, Patricia was in the office as well.


    ¡°I am also interested in listening to you about the outside world. I haven¡¯t heard of everything yetst night,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°Okay. Not that I mind. I¡¯m just the guest here. You¡¯re free to do whatever you want,¡± I said.


    Today, I¡¯m alone. Shirley is not with me. She¡¯s with the other circus members preparing for something that the cult members here might do. Because we expect that they would attack us anytime soon.


    We have expert level mage who can defeat a master level mage. If the cult wants to gain more followers, it¡¯s easy for them to show their worth by showing that they could defeat Ang. Though that means Patricia and Emilia won¡¯t be safe as well. But that¡¯s difficult.


    I also looked at where the nodding guy is. He¡¯s serving a woman with a happy smile on his face. I thought he was happy doing it. But now that I know he¡¯s most likely rted to the cult, I feel hatred.


    .....


    Now, the question is how the cult will try to get Emilia and Patricia when they are not strong enough to do that. They must have a n, right? Maybe there¡¯s a magic item that will help even the weakest mage to defeat master level mage.


    Now that we know what they¡¯re possibly nning, with the help of Yuria, we can think of a n to prevent anything bad to happen.


    And Yuria even suggested to do this n to that woman in ck. Yuria has told me her name before, but I keep forgetting about it. Though it¡¯s not important since she will die sooner orter.


    And the n today is to capture this woman in ck and bring her to Albert for questioning.


    While the four of us are here, Yuria nned to take me and Patricia as hostages. That woman in ck has told Yuria that she will use something that can restrain even someone as strong as master level mages. Probably something like the Magic Restraining Cor. But it¡¯s the upgraded version of that.


    I can see her holding some kind of bracelet in her hand which she hides behind her back under her robe. She¡¯s no longer hiding. And she¡¯s walking around pretending to be busy when she¡¯s actually trying to position herself right behind us.


    And other than her, the guide who has been guiding me since I first arrive to Yuria¡¯s office is also prepared to do something outside of the office. Along with a dozen other people. Including a man who is crossdressing as a woman.


    Last night after the show is over, when it¡¯s time for Yuria to sleep and the woman in ck let down her guard, she contacted Sonia to deliver a message to me


    In the message, it was written that Yuria managed to convince the woman in ck to try and capture us as hostages. As for Emilia, Patricia said that she will be with Ang for a spar again, so they can just take care of herter.


    And so, here we are. In Yuria¡¯s office, pretending to be oblivious to what will happen to us.


    Obviously, if we¡¯re doing well in this situation, we can finish it before our next show tonight. And that¡¯s what I¡¯m nning.


    While we¡¯re chatting about the outside world, which is mostly about our show in different cities, it¡¯s finally the time for them to move.


    Both Patricia and I didn¡¯t take a seat at all on purpose while I am exaggerating about my story. We are standing with Patricia facing my direction on my right. And the woman in ck is behind us. Though now that I used Divine Vision again on her, I can see that she¡¯s not holding bracelets. They are handcuffs.


    And after I put down my arm after my exaggerated gesture when I told my story, the woman in ck quickly put the handcuff on Patricia¡¯s hand. And Patricia who pretends to not expect that let down her guard and got her other hand cuffed as well.


    I pretend to be shocked and the woman in ck ended up putting the handcuff on me as well. Our hands are now behind us being restrained and there¡¯s nothing we can do. Of course that¡¯s what she expect from us.


    ¡°What are you doing!?¡±


    As expected of a grandma. She has lived longer than most people and her acting skill is great.


    Soon after she shouted, the door entered. The guide, the crossdressing man, and a dozen other people whom I assumed to be cult members entered the office room.


    ¡°Restrain those two!¡± Yuria shouted hermand.


    ¡°Tsk! You think I can¡¯t do anything if you cuffed my hands!¡± Patricia tried to resist.


    Though she tried to break off the handcuff with her own strength. But she failed. She also tried to use magic. But she failed as well.


    And someone tried to get close to her. Stupidly trying to restrain Patricia only with her physical strength.


    ¡°Are you stupid! You dare to test physical strength with me!?¡±


    Patricia then kicked her short leg toward the approaching enemy. The one who got kicked fell down, but she¡¯s still conscious.


    I guess that¡¯s just how strong an untrained master level mage is. Her physical strength wasn¡¯t much as she couldn¡¯t even break off the handcuff with her strength and she can¡¯t knock someone out with a kick.


    As for me, just by putting a little bit of Aura and I can see crack on the handcuff that is restraining me. Though I won¡¯t remove the handcuff yet. I¡¯ll pretend that I¡¯m a weak person. Just a normal guy who temporarily lead the circus troupe.


    ¡°Excuse me, but what are you doing?¡± I asked.


    ¡°You can pretend to be calm in this situation? You are much better than I thought. But I¡¯ll tell you this. No one in your circus troupe can help you. It¡¯s a shame that Shirley didn¡¯te with you. But at least we have you,¡± Yuria said. She¡¯s acting as the master mind of this event.


    As for Patricia, an expert level ice mage finally took action and used ice magic to restrain her from moving.


    ¡°YURIA! WHY ARE YOU DOING THIS!?¡±


    ...Is Patricia still acting or not? I don¡¯t know. Maybe the fact that she can¡¯t use her magic is too much for her.


    ¡°She¡¯s too noisy. Gag their mouth and bring them to the basement. Make sure that no one sees you,¡± Yuria said.


    Basement? That¡¯s where they have prison. Why is there a prison in this ce? This isn¡¯t even a pce or a castle. Is it someone¡¯s hobby?


    ¡°Tonight, go and get everyone and attack the circus. But make sure that there won¡¯t be any civilians who got caught up in it. I don¡¯t care what you do to the circus. Destroy them or try and get them to join you, I don¡¯t care whichever it is. But no civilian casualty. I am only cooperating with you for the sake of this country,¡± Yuria said.


    ¡°I know, I know. But you don¡¯t need to care much about it.¡±


    After the woman in ck said that, the others tried to knock Patricia out to no avail. As for me, once someone hit me on the back of my head, I just pretend to be unconscious. Now is the time to see everyone rted to the cult.


    But I didn¡¯t expect what the woman in ck is going to say next. Something that give Patricia a sense of despair.


    ¡°Yuria, you are too slow. You are doing good, but too slow in getting the two master level mages to join us. That¡¯s why we already made our action without you knowing. Since a few months ago, Emilia has been with us. She¡¯s already a member of the cult. It¡¯s fine if she can¡¯t defeat that mage from the outside. As long as she can dy her as much as possible, the rest can easily destroy the circus. I don¡¯t think there are others who are as strong as Ang,¡± the woman in ck said.


    Yuria was shocked to hear that. But she acted normally.


    ¡°Really? Then you just need to convince Patricia, right? It¡¯s good that we can get we want,¡± Yuria said.


    ¡°YOU! WHAT HAVE YOU DONE TO MY GRANDDAUGHTER!?¡± Patricia shouted. Since she¡¯s still conscious, she can hear what they¡¯re saying.


    ¡°Shut up! You¡¯re either going to join us or rot in jail after all. Yuria, it has been good cooperating with you. But now, we don¡¯t need you anymore. Take her to the basement as well!¡±


    Without batting an eye, the woman in ck betrayed Yuria. Yuria was quickly had her mouth gagged and brought to the jail in the basement with us. And they even knock her out when she has been restrained.


    Along the way there, I can feel the wind blowing. There must be a wind mage here using wind magic to block the sound. That¡¯s why I didn¡¯t see anyone reacting from the beginning.


    Hmm... seems like we need a change in our n. It¡¯s already impossible to not involve the civilians if Yuria can¡¯t manage that woman in ck who seems to be the one in charge of the cult members here.


    Well, for now I will experience a few minutes of being imprisoned. So far, there¡¯s nothing that will really cause us trouble other than the fact that Emilia has been with them for a while already. I¡¯ll let Patricia take care of her granddaughterter.


    For now, the woman in ck should be gathering all the cult members living in Rygis to fight the circus. I¡¯ll see where they are gathering and try to memorize their faces. Good thing I¡¯m better in remembering faces than names.


    Though it seems that we won¡¯t be able to perform tonight. But that just mean we can stay here a few days longer than nned and arrange new showster.

 Chapter 643

    Chapter 643: In the Prison


    Yuria, Patricia, and I were being brought to the basement where the jail is. On the way, they carefully make sure that there won¡¯t be anyone watching us getting arrested. I can see beyond the door to each room, there are people watching the others inside while pretending to be working.


    The servants in this building are all members of the cult. As for the officers, there are less of them who are members of the cult. I guess that¡¯s normal considering servants such as butlers or maids able to freelye and go to different ces in this building.


    Patricia is still conscious. But her mouth is being gagged. Not just that, her nose and the gag in her mouth were also frozen. To make sure that she can¡¯t shout or scream. And maybe hoping that she would faint from being unable to breathe.


    Yuria is still unconscious. And her mouth is also being gagged with cloth after she faints. Just like me. Though I didn¡¯t faint for real.


    Patricia keeps fighting back. Even when she is being tied with a rope, she keeps fighting back. Probably she¡¯s thinking that the n failed because even Yuria is being carried to the prison. And she¡¯s thinking that I¡¯m really unconscious.


    I just made it look like I¡¯m unconscious. I¡¯m adjusting my breath without using magic so it seems that I¡¯m totally knocked out. If I use magic, she might start to act docile. And the cult members who captured us might think that she¡¯s acting. Especially after knowing that her granddaughter is a member of the cult.


    Right now, Emilia is sparring with Ang. From what I heard from Ang, Emilia is growing stronger. Though Ang is having fun sparring with her, it seems that she hasn¡¯t used her full power yet. So it will be fine for Ang to stop Emilia alone.


    .....


    It will be a shame for us to kill a master level mage. Though she¡¯s a member of the cult, so it¡¯s not really a shame. In fact, it¡¯s good. But unfortunately, if we kill Emilia, Patricia might refuse to cooperate with us anymore. So I need Patricia to be the one fighting Emiliater.


    But for now, I will wait and see.


    Eventually, we have reached the prison. With Patricia still trying to fight back to no avail. Maybe it¡¯s because she¡¯s a master level mage. she can hold her breath for so long because of it..


    We¡¯re all brought to a single jail room while still being tied. Only a creepy woman here to watch us.


    ¡°Hehehe... A man is finally brought here. I can do anything I want to him.¡±


    ...So, I¡¯m going to be used to satisfy her sexual desire? Sorry, but no. She¡¯s not my type.


    As the creepy woman entered the jail room after the other cult members left, she tried to strip me naked. But I gave her powerful kick to her jaw and knocked her unconscious instantly.


    ¡°Sorry, but you¡¯re not my type.¡±


    ¡°HMMM!!¡± Patricia tried to say something while her mouth is frozen.


    ¡°I¡¯ve never been knocked out. I¡¯m just pretending to faint so I can see what¡¯s going on. Though I didn¡¯t expect them to imprison Yuria as well. Good thing you agreed to cooperate yesterday. If not, I will just let you rot here,¡± I said. While I carefully destroy the ice covering her mouth.


    ¡°Enough. We need to think of a way to get out of this ce. This handcuff make me unable to use magic. We have to get this thing removed,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°You hear that, Victoria? Remove the handcuff, please,¡± I asked Victoria.


    Victoria then left me and turned into her human form.


    ¡°You can easily break that handcuff, right? Why do you need my help?¡±


    Even though she asked me why, her index finger is turned into the shape of a key for the handcuff.


    ¡°These handcuffs is good. Even a master level mage like Patricia is unable to break it. This is much better than the cor and I want to ask Marie if she can create something like this. Hopefully, an even stronger version. That would be great if possible,¡± I told Victoria about what I intend to do with the handcuff.


    Victoria then easily unlocked the handcuff. Although the handcuff is cracked because I put too much strength before, it¡¯s still good enough to stop me from using magic. Which mean anyone, even most master level mages, won¡¯t be able to remove this cuff from their hands. Unless they are stronger than average master level mages.


    ¡°...Your Slime turned into a human! And she can talk!¡± Patricia was shocked to finally meet Victoria for real.


    ¡°Yeah. And she¡¯s over a thousand years old. I don¡¯t know how old you are, but she is much older than you,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. Next is me! Release me!¡± Patricia shouted.


    ¡°Nope. You will be thest one. I want to ask you first about what you want to do once you¡¯re released,¡± I asked.


    ¡°I will kill that woman! And I will confront Emilia why she would join the cult!¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°She must have her own reason. Unlike Yuria who is only asking for cooperation, Emilia might be joining the cult willingly. You can confront her, but what would you do if she asks for a fight?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Then I will fight her. No matter what, I have to hear the reason from Emilia herself,¡± Patricia said.


    Well, that might be good. Though if Emilia joined the cult willingly, and there¡¯s no way for her to leave or join our cause, I will kill her. Even if Patricia hate me for it.


    Well, if Patricia hate me for killing her granddaughter, there¡¯s nothing she can do once she knows how strong I am.


    Victoria then released Yuria and Patricia. Though I told Patricia to not make any move for now.


    The cult is trying to attack the circus soon before the show started. At that time, we can tell that those whoe to the tent are all enemies. And we don¡¯t need to hold back then.


    Yuria regained consciousness soon after and I told her what to do. While also stopping Patricia from doing something reckless right away.


    ¡°All the people who are members of the cult are going to the tent. Let¡¯s leave now. Good thing that you hadn¡¯t told your granddaughter that you joined us in the fight against the cult. If so, we would be in trouble already,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. We were lucky. Let¡¯s go out now! You are called Victoria, right? Please unlock the d-¡±


    Before Victoria do anything, I already approached the locked door. I grabbed the iron bar, and pulled it open without much effort. And it surprises Patricia who knows that I haven¡¯t reached master level yet.


    ¡°...How did you do that? Even I can¡¯t destroy the bars easily like that. You¡¯re an expert level mage, right?¡± Patricia asked.


    ¡°Yes. Do you somehow have a way to determine someone¡¯s magic level or something?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, not really. It¡¯s all just from my experience. So I can tell roughly how strong you are. But I didn¡¯t expect you to be that strong,¡± Patricia said. And Yuria beside her also unable to close her mouth from the shock.


    ¡°Just know that there¡¯s a reason why Albert and the three other kings from the major countries in the continent willing to follow me. I¡¯ll tell youter when I decide to trust you more,¡± I said.


    ¡°Does it mean you haven¡¯t trusted us yet?¡± Yuria asked.


    ¡°Notpletely. I mean someone¡¯s granddaughter actually a member of the cult. Though I believe you when you decide to cooperate with us,¡± I replied.


    I thought that Emilia doesn¡¯t know what the cult is. But it turns out that she¡¯s lying. She¡¯ a good liar.


    Ang is with her right now. I don¡¯t think Emilia would dare to fight us knowing that she¡¯s weaker than Ang. Though maybe she¡¯s going to stay behind trying to dy Ang from helping the circus. She must be thinking that Ang is the strongest one among us. Not me.


    ¡°Okay. What should we do now?¡± Patricia asked.


    ¡°You and Yuria will enter the circus by using the portal. Victoria will go with you as well and tell Burnes and Shirley about everything that happened. Including the fact that Emilia has joined the cult. After that, follow theirmand. I don¡¯t think you have heard about it before, but all the members of our circus, except for Ang and Shirley who are acting as the guards, the real leader of the circus who is not here, and me who just do whatever I want, the rest are all agents sent by the four kingdoms. Ask for their instructions on what to do,¡± I said as I opened a portal to the circus.


    I can see where the circus is right now. And everyone is preparing for the show not knowing that the show will be canceled.


    Seeing that a portal is open, and we¡¯re in a ce with jail, Burnes understands that something important is happening. So he told Patricia and Yuria to quickly enter the portal.


    ¡°Most members of the cult are gathering right now. But there are still a few in this building. I¡¯ll kill them all first before I return,¡± I said.


    After I closed the portal, I didn¡¯t forget to kill the woman who tried to rape me before I sneaked upstairs.


    Without Spot, I can¡¯t use camouge. But my sneaking ability is good enough to not be noticed by expert level mages as long as I¡¯m out of their sight. It¡¯s easy.


    The cult members staying behind can easily get anyone here as their hostages. That¡¯s why I will kill them first. And then I will find other cult members who are not going to the tent.


    As for those going to the tent, Shirley and the others can handle them. Even Patricia is there to help.


    I hope nothing bad will happen.

 Chapter 644

    Chapter 644: Now I¡¯m Angry


    Now, what should I do?


    There are many people in this building that can be used as hostages. And this is a building where they gather people who is governing this country. If any of the people here die, there will be bacsh.


    Sigh... it will be much easier if this is a kingdom. As long as the king is alive, the kingdom will still have people who obey him. Whether by choice or forced to do it.


    But this is not a kingdom. The president will change after a few years, and everyone in this building is important for the future of the country. Well, that¡¯s the same as kingdom. But at least if the king is still alive, everything can be fixed by him.


    Although this country is being lead by a president, she¡¯s not alone in governing this country. They need majority vote to decide what to do. Unlike a king that can change everything to his will.


    Ah! It¡¯s troublesome thinking about such things! And I don¡¯t even know if what I¡¯m thinking is right or not! This is difficult. Let¡¯s just take care of the easy stuffs first.


    Since I don¡¯t think that woman in ck will return here when she and most members of the cult are preparing to attack the circus, I¡¯ll just kill everyone here whom I deemed as members of the cult. Those who are watching everyone¡¯s movement.


    .....


    As for those who might end up involved, I¡¯ll probably just bring them to the circus and let Yuria exins.


    And soon after, I found a staff acting suspiciously. She¡¯s not doing her job. Unless her job is patrolling the building. But she¡¯s not a security guard. So I killed her.


    No, I didn¡¯t kill anyone mindlessly. I know that she talked with the woman in ck after they brought me to the jail. Those are my targets here.


    I killed her with a punch that shatter her ribs and destroy her internal organs while making sure that she won¡¯t spill any blood. This is a stealth mission. Not only I will kill all my enemies without them knowing my existence, I will also kill them all without shedding blood. Neither mine nor theirs.


    After killing the staff, I quickly brought her to the jail and put her next to the corpse of the creepy woman who tried to rape me. I¡¯ll take care of them allter. There are still more enemies here.


    With my speed, it only take a few seconds to do that, and find another target. I keep moving around so much but it didn¡¯t take long. What an amazing day to be an Aura Master.


    Now, all the members of the cult who are keeping watch from the outside have died by my hand. The rest are in the same room with other people. But I can take care of them without hurting the real staffs of the office.


    Using air magic, I make everyone in a room sleep. Except for the expert level mages who can endure my air magic.


    As expected, all members of the cult here are expert level mages. Except for a few whom I witnessed before talking with someone close to the woman in ck. They have fallen into deep sleep.


    I quickly entered the room, and kill the cult members. Though there are two other expert level mages whom I didn¡¯t know whether they are members of the cult or not. So I just opened a portal to the circus and bring them to Yuria.


    ¡°Yuria, I¡¯m killing all the cult members in the building. As for the rest that I don¡¯t know if they are with the cult or not, I will bring them all to you. You can decide what to do with them,¡± I said to Yuria.


    The two confused expert level mages looked at their president. If they can prove that they are not rted to the cult, they will keep their lives.


    Now that Victoria has exined everything to Shirley and the others, I brought her with me and go to the next room. Though I have no n in using her as weapon soon.


    As for the sleeping office staffs, they are safe in the office. Yuria will exin everything to them after it¡¯s all over. It will take a few hours until they finally wake up.


    Now, let¡¯s go to the next room.


    In less than fifteen minutes, while the cult members are still preparing to attack the circus, I have killed all the cult members in the building.


    ¡°Is that everyone? You even brought the other expert level mages to the tent. What will you do to them?¡± Victoria asked me after I stopped killing.


    ¡°If they are with the cult, Shirley can stop them if they try to do something funny. If they are not with the cult, I hope Yuria can convince them to join us. They¡¯re all expert level mages after all. Having them with us will boost our strength even more,¡± I replied.


    Next, I looked around the surrounding ce. It has started to get dark and people are going back to their homes. Except for the cult members who are gathering near the circus.


    What about the gatekeepers then? The two who have recently getting along well with us. Or at least some of us whom they are interested in. One is interested to get closer to Burnes, and the other is interested with the strongmen.


    Well, Burnes and the other guy should have make an attempt to get closer to them first. They are agents after all. And they should have known about the gatekeepers¡¯ affiliation. I hope they are with us as well.


    ¡°The city seems safe. As expected, they have told the citizens to not visit the circus. That¡¯s why no one is leaving their house,¡± I said after observing the city.


    Even in the slum or red-light district, there are less people there. The nodding guy is also seem to be going to the circus. I thought you were my friend. A friend I never talked with.


    ...Actually, that might be the reason why he joined the cult. I never tried to get closer to him. Well, whatever. It¡¯s been done. I will at least kill him.


    Though if he came to the circus, he would realize that Shirley is the princess. Even more if he recognize Ang. Though Ang is not there yet. Is Emilia fighting Ang and tries to make her busy? Maybe that¡¯s the case.


    ¡°Let¡¯s go back to the circus. There¡¯s only the fight there left,¡± I said.


    We then returned back to the circus. Not using portal. I summoned Ray and fly to the sky as I watched the cult members from the sky, and entered the tent without them knowing.


    ¡°Wee back, Roy. Though I didn¡¯t expect you to bring back so many people,¡± Burnes said after I entered the tent.


    ¡°They are expert level mages after all. It would be great if they join us. So, what about them?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Only a few of them haven¡¯t proven themselves to not be members of the cult. We just put the Magic Restricting Cors on them and tied them up for now. How about the enemies?¡± Burnes asked.


    ¡°There are quite a few of them. Around one hundred and fifty of them, I guess.¡±


    ¡°No! That¡¯s many! Not few!¡± Patricia shouted.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. Other than your granddaughter, I don¡¯t think there¡¯s anyone among them who can give us trouble,¡± I said calmly.


    Then, I checked on everyone if they are ready. And when I see the enemies make their move, I told them to leave the tent. Leaving behind only the restrained office staffs. The other air mage here used air magic I taught on them so they will sleep. And once I confirmed that all of them are sleeping, we leave the tent. With me still riding on Ray¡¯s back.


    The approaching cult members stopped when they are in front of us. We arepletely surrounded, but they haven¡¯t shown their intention to attack us yet.


    And with the woman in ck in the lead, she was surprised that Patricia, Yuria, and I were here without them knowing.


    ¡°Surprised? Sorry to say this, but this is actually our n to weed out all the cult members here. And you! It¡¯s been a while. I don¡¯t know your name but we went to the same school together.¡±


    After I greeted the woman in ck, I pointed my finger to the nodding guy. Victoria, Shirley, and the others were shocked to see that I know someone. And we even attended the same school together with Ang and Ka, and we¡¯re all being taught by Wendy.


    ¡°You... you¡¯re the one who was always together with Ang and Ka. I was right when I heard her name here. So it was her indeed. She has be much stronger than master level mage. What a surprise. And that one next to you, she¡¯s Princess Shirley, right? I watched her making a speech after the stampede,¡± The nodding guy said.


    ¡°I was so shocked that you, someone who witnessed that stampede caused by the cult, to join the cult yourself. What a shame that I have to kill my former ssmate,¡± I said.


    ¡°You are just someone who can summon a slime. No wonder you became a clown. It suits you,¡± the nodding guy said.


    ¡°Hey, don¡¯t say that! Calling him a clown is apliment to him!¡± one of the circus members shouted.


    Oops. I shouldn¡¯t be happy right now.


    ¡°I don¡¯t care about what you have done. I joined these people because of my own decision. And we have a special present for you!¡±


    After the nodding guy said that, I can see a group of mages are flying here. Including Emilia.


    And with them, I can see an injured and unconscious Ang whose hand is restrained by the same handcuff that stopped Patricia.


    Oh, no. Now I¡¯m angry.

 Chapter 645

    Chapter 645: Rage


    It shocked me so much that I didn¡¯t move or say anything at all.


    Emilia and some other people fly this way carrying the unconscious Ang.


    Just how did Ang lose? Did Emilia tricked her?


    I can see that Ang is injured badly. And those injury didn¡¯t came from magic.


    Emilia¡¯s magic is ice and wind. That¡¯s what I heard from Patricia. But the injury in Ang¡¯s body came from blunt attack.


    So, Ang got her hands handcuffed, and she received hit from Emilia over and over again. That¡¯s what I got from seeing her condition as they descended andnded on the ground.


    ¡°Ahahaha! Even Ang who always seem invincible can¡¯t avoid being tricked! My n worked! Now, there¡¯s no more hindrances left except for Patricia and Princess Shirley!¡± the nodding guy yelled happily.


    .....


    ...It was him. He was the one who made the n to hurt Ang.


    I made a mistake. So many mistakes.


    From not trying to talk to him just because we never talked. To not trusting Ang.


    If I had just told Ang about the cult here. She can take care of many things by herself. I should have believe in her more.


    Well, I¡¯ll try to change from now and trust Ang more. For now, she¡¯s in danger.


    ¡°Ang!¡± Shirley shouted after seeing her friend in such state.


    ¡°Emilia! Why did you do this!?¡± Patricia asked.


    ¡°Why? How old do you think I am? I¡¯m already 54! And why do you keep treating me like a child!? I can do anything I want! But you keep telling me to not do this or do that! You treat me like a servant just because you¡¯re older! The only reason I listened to you was because you were stronger than me. But now, although my strength hasn¡¯t changed, I have more people with me. I don¡¯t care about what the cult does. As long as they are willing to help me kill you, I¡¯ll even help them destroy the world!¡± Emilia said.


    Not just me. Patricia also made a mistake.


    Well, that¡¯s life. There¡¯s only making mistakes and fixing them.


    While they are chatting, I used my fastest speed without riding on Ray to get to where Ang is. Although Ray is faster, it was for a long run. For a short distance, my speed reached a speed far beyond what Spot and Ray can reach. To the point where it can be mistaken as teleportation.


    This is the speed I trained even after I defeated Timmy. Not only from my real explosive speed from my legs, I also used Aura. And I also used air magic so the air won¡¯t give me much pressure from moving so fast.


    ¡°What!?¡±


    ¡°How did you get there!?¡±


    Emilia and the nodding guy were shocked to see that I suddenly appear next to Ang. But I ignored them all.


    I lifted Ang from the ground, and returned back to the others with the same speed. Though it¡¯s actually slower so Ang won¡¯t get anymore damage from the whish.


    ¡°He disappears again!?¡±


    When the nodding guy realizes that I have returned to the others, I destroyed the handcuff with my grip. I didn¡¯t even ask Victoria to unlock it.


    After that, I summoned Graham.


    ¡°Now there¡¯s a fight... I guess I won¡¯t be fighting. Master, leave Ang to me. I will heal her,¡± Graham said.


    He changed his mind quickly after sensing my anger and sees that Ang is injured.


    ¡°Just heal the wound for now. As for the inside, I¡¯ll take care of themter,¡± I said.


    Ang needs operation. As usual, healing magic is not all powerful. Maybe if the level has reached high enough, healing magic can fix broken bones or even regrow a lost limb. But for now, Graham who has the best healing magic among the angels couldn¡¯t even do that.


    But that¡¯s okay. At least Ang¡¯s life can be saved. I¡¯ll take care of her broken and fractured bonester. For now, I need to unleash my anger.


    ¡°A summoned monster? I thought he already has the slime?¡± Patricia asked.


    ¡°No time for confusion. Everyone, don¡¯t do anything!¡±


    Because I¡¯m angry, Shirley is now the one in charge. And she knows well to not do anything when I¡¯m this angry.


    Ah, when was thest time I¡¯m this angry? I think this is the first time that I got so angry. Both in my past life, and in the present life, this is the first time I feel this much rage.


    ¡°Is that teleportation? Well, who cares about that? It¡¯s nice of you to say don¡¯t do anything. We will have easier time to kill you that way!¡± the nodding guy shouted.


    His personality is not what I expected from him. I thought because we greeted each other in silent, he is quite friendly. But for him to be this way. Maybe I should at least let him die just like in my past life instead of saving him.


    For now, I can no longer hold myself back. With my Aura as the Aura Master, I used intimidation on everyone here. Allies or enemies, everyone received the pressureing from the Aura Master. An intimidation that make everyone lose themselves in fear. Though my allies didn¡¯t receive much pressurepared ot the enemies, they still feel afraid.


    ¡°W-what is this? This pressure... it¡¯sing from him?¡± Patricia said as she fell on the ground from the sheer pressure.


    Now, let the enemies know fear.


    I disappeared from where I was. Graham is still healing Ang, and I dashed toward the closest enemies. I don¡¯t care about the nodding guy, Emilia, or the woman in ck. I will kill everyone I see.


    ¡°Tsk! That idiot! Roy, don¡¯t just kill everyone you see! Victoria, stop him from being reckless!¡± Shirley asked Victoria to stop me.


    ¡°I can¡¯t. I¡¯m here,¡± Victoria replied. She¡¯s not with me as she¡¯s in her human form with the others.


    What is the best weapon to use when you¡¯re angry. Not a sword, spear, hammer, axe, guns, or anything else. It¡¯s your own fists.


    Without using any weapons, I mmed my fist down on the head of a member of the cult. She got hit hard and died instantly and got her body buried on the ground.


    After that, I targeted other cult members. One person one hit. Either it will be a punch, a kick, a p, a stomp, or a headbutt, I killed each one with just one hit. And the enemies were frozen by fear because of my intimidation. There¡¯s nothing to protect them.


    Even Emilia couldn¡¯t follow my speed. Though since I have been moving for a while, I¡¯m no longer as fast as before. But only Graham and Ray can follow my movement. While the others can only sense my location after the noise I made.


    Some still managed to cast barrier magic to protect themselves. But I used brute force to destroy the barrier and kill them. They can¡¯t stop me with their weak magic.


    And as I got closer to the nodding guy, I was blocked by Ice Wall. And it¡¯s not the magic from the enemies. It was Shirley. She¡¯s protecting the nodding guy.


    ¡°Roy, you idiot! We need to capture some of them for interrogation! Don¡¯t kill them all!¡± Shirley shouted.


    Yet. Don¡¯t kill them all yet. But okay. I¡¯ll kill themter. Though before we started the interrogation, I will make sure that the nodding guy will feel pain.


    ¡°I¡¯ll use Ice Wall to mark those you shouldn¡¯t kill! As for you, cult members, if you want to live a little longer, get down on the ground to surrender!¡± Shirley said.


    Is that it? Okay. I won¡¯t kill anyone who is begging for their lives.


    The woman in ck is also protected by Ice Wall that Shirley created. I guess she¡¯s the most important member I shouldn¡¯t kill.


    As for Emilia, she¡¯s strong. One hit won¡¯t kill her. But I made a promise to not kill her and let Patricia talk to her.


    So, there¡¯s only one thing left to do. Kill the rest before they beg for mercy!


    The more people died, the more they are afraid of me. And even the circus members who should have learned who I am started to fear me. But I don¡¯t care.


    Many cult members tried to retreat. But Ray stopped them from leaving and kicked them. But they are still alive so I can kill them.


    And soon after, when my fist was about to destroy an Earth Wall, I stopped. And I casually walked back to where the others are. The front of the tent.


    ¡°What do you feel right now?¡± I asked.


    The one I talked with was the injured person. Ang. She has been healed enough by Graham and regained her consciousness.


    ¡°...Angry,¡± Ang said.


    ¡°Alright. Other than those marked by Shirley¡¯s magic, you can kill the rest,¡± I said.


    Soon after, Ang raised her fractured arms. With a little bit of her strength, she snapped her fingers even though she doesn¡¯t need to do that to use her magic.


    And as the sound of fingersnap sounded, numerous Ground Spikes raised from the ground and killed everyone except for the nodding guy, the woman in ck, Emilia, and few others.


    The battle must have alerted the people in the city. But I don¡¯t care.


    Now, the battle is over. With just Ang and I participating. Oh, and Ray for helping me stop those who are trying to retreat.


    Yup, I feel better now. Though I need to give a few hits to the nodding guy. Good thing I summoned Graham. Graham can heal him if he¡¯s about to die.

 Chapter 646

    Chapter 646: I¡¯ll Hit You Once


    ¡°Alright, you can go back to sleep. You¡¯re no longer in critical condition. I¡¯ll bring you back to Cassau and let Sophie and Ka fix your body first. I¡¯ll be there soon after I take care of everything here,¡± I said to Ang whom, with just a snap of her finger, killed dozens of cult members.


    ¡°...Okay. I¡¯ll leave it to you...¡±


    She doesn¡¯t have any more strength and fainted again. Then I opened a portal to the hospital in Cassau, and opened two others. One to Sophie¡¯s location, and another to Ka¡¯s location.


    Seeing that I carried the injured Ang to the operation room in the hospital, Sophie quickly jumped into the portal. From her location to here, and then she entered the portal to the hospital.


    As for Ka, she knows that Ang must no longer be in critical condition so she entered the portal ande here to look around first before moving on.


    She stopped her sight at the nodding guy who is looking at me with terror in his eyes.


    ¡°You remember him?¡± I asked Ka.


    .....


    ¡°Yeah. He confessed to me many times before at school. And I rejected him all the time. Even after I told him that I have a boyfriend already, he keepsing back. I guess he ended up hating you for it. Though looking at the situation, he must be rted to the cult now. I didn¡¯t expect that at all,¡± Ka said.


    Oh, I get it.


    It¡¯s not only because I never tried to talk to him that he joined the cult. Well, that might be one of the reason.


    It¡¯s because I saved Ka. A girl who was supposed to die early on. And so, she could go to school normally because of it.


    And because she went to school, the nodding guy noticed her and fell for her. But she¡¯s already taken. Still, he never gives up.


    ¡°Though it was surprising that you actually remember him. I thought you didn¡¯t care about other people at all,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°Well, he was someone I know in my past life. Though in this life, I never tried to make a contact with him at all. I guess him joining the cult is partially my fault. He¡¯ll die soon after we investigate him. Anything you want to say to him?¡± I asked Ka.


    ¡°Nope. No mercy to the cult members,¡± Ka said resolutely.


    Well, except for those who truly regret their decision for joining the cult. Either they joined voluntarily or forced to join, as long as they are truly regret their decision like Veronica and Celestine, it¡¯s fine to forgive them.


    But for that nodding guy? He said that he¡¯s the one that nned to subdue Ang that way. He¡¯s the one responsible to it.


    Being able toe up with that n and let the others follow through means that he somehow has some sort of reputation among the cult. Or at least those staying in this ce. And so, we need him to be arrested before he gets executed. And I will be the one to kill him.


    ¡°Okay. Please take care of Ang. I¡¯lle soon after I take care of everything here,¡± I said.


    ¡°Hmm... you won¡¯t y tonight?¡± Ka asked whether I¡¯m going to continue performing tonight or not.


    ¡°I can¡¯t do that. At least not tonight. Maybe tomorrow. Or the day after. Or whatever. I¡¯ll just get Thomas here since they already know that I can use portal,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. See youter.¡±


    Ka entered the portal to the hospital and help Sophie to heal Ang. Sophie¡¯s medical skill isparable to mine, but her physical ability will make the surgery slower than when I do it. But at least with the injury that Ang has now, it¡¯s fine if they take their time.


    ¡°Okay, now... Sigh... Patricia, you can talk with your granddaughter first. Do it fast or I might end up killing her first. Shirley, I¡¯ll let you take care of things here. I¡¯ll go and have a chat with that guy,¡± I said.


    I also gave Shirley Magic Restricting Cor to wrap around the neck of the cult members. As for Patricia¡¯s granddaughter, I gave Patricia the handcuff that block the wearer from using magic. And it¡¯s strong enough to not be destroyed by the strength of a master level mage.


    I stand there for a while and start thinking of what I have done wrong. But it¡¯s just for a while. I still have business to attend to.


    ¡°...Emilia, I¡¯ll put these on you first. Give me your hands,¡± Patricia said. She didn¡¯t say that loudly but I can still hear her.


    ¡°No way! After everything you have forced me to do, you want to stop me from using magic now!? Just because-¡±


    ¡°Because of what?¡±


    Before Emilia could finish her sentence, I interrupted her. And this time again, I used the intimidation of an Aura Master to nt fear on her again.


    ¡°You either do it or I will kill you. Make your choice.¡±


    Patricia then urged Emilia to do as she says. And Emilia had no choice but to obey. She knows now that it wasn¡¯t Ang that she¡¯s supposed to be wary of. But me.


    I just killed a lot of cult members. And without using magic. There¡¯s no way she won¡¯t feel any fear.


    Now that Patricia is talking to Emilia, I¡¯m going toward the nodding guy¡¯s location. With Victoriaing. She must be thinking that I might do something to him. That¡¯s why she¡¯s here so she can try to talk me out of killing him right away.


    As I approached him, the guy cast fire magic at me in fear. It was a quick fire magic attack, but because heck magic control to manipte his magic, it was weak. But it¡¯s at the level of a beginner level at least. And his level should be higher than that.


    And with my hand, I shed the iing magic attack. There¡¯s no wound on my hand at all.


    ¡°That¡¯s impossible!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s possible.¡±


    He took a few steps back and tried to cast fire magic again. This time, it was not a magic he cast hurriedly like before. The strength of this magic is at least advanced level.


    Still, I cut the magic in two with a knifehand strike. No way a magic like this can hurt me.


    ¡°Anything else you want to try?¡±


    This time, I¡¯m already right in front of him. I can just wrap the Magic Restricting Cor on him right here right now. But I will erase all hope from him.


    He keeps attacking me with all the magic he can use. And all of them were useless.


    Everyone is watching in awe. Except those from the cult. They only feel despair.


    ¡°Huff... huff... I see... So that¡¯s how it is, huh?¡± the guy said.


    ¡°How¡¯s what?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No wonder both Ka and Ang followed you. So you¡¯re this strong, huh? Are you the living armor who stopped the stampede?¡± the guy asked.


    ¡°I was. And I¡¯m still pretending to be a living armor to trick the cult,¡± I replied.


    ¡°And now what? What are you going to do to me now? You can ask me anything, but I won¡¯t give you any answer,¡± the guy said.


    ¡°For now, wear this,¡± I said.


    I wrapped the cor around his neck, and then I gave him a helmet to wear.


    ¡°...A helmet?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m going to punch you real hard. As you witnessed before, all your allies who got punched by me died in one hit. I don¡¯t want to kill you yet since it seems that you know more than the others,¡± I said.


    ¡°...What if I don¡¯t want to wear the helmet?¡± the guy asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s okay. I¡¯m not forcing you to wear it,¡± I said as I pulled back my hand. Trying to make a big swing to hit him.


    I will use Aura. Not to make my punch stronger, but to protect the guy from death in one hit. I cover the helmet he hurriedly wore with Aura, and swung my fist at his head.


    The guy blown back and lose his consciousness right away. So weak. So easy. Though his neck is broken, he¡¯s still alive. And I won¡¯t waste my time doing surgery on him.


    ¡°Graham, heal him,¡± I ordered.


    Although the guy was healed, he still hasn¡¯t regained his consciousness. And that wasn¡¯t enough for me to relieve my stress.


    I look around and see that Shirley and the others have finished putting the cors around their neck. And Patricia seems to have finished talking with Emilia.


    I opened a portal to the prison and brought the cult members there. Patricia decided toe in as well. As for Yuria, after asking few questions to the woman in ck, she said that she will try to exin everything to her citizens tomorrow. I guess we won¡¯t perform again tomorrow.


    After I brought everyone to the prison, I move to the hospital and help Sophie fix Ang¡¯s body. Sophie hasn¡¯t finished the operation yet.

 Chapter 647

    Chapter 647: Apology and Punishment


    Sophie has done well in the short time. In fact, she¡¯s already much faster than I was in my past life. Back when I has just started to feel Aura.


    At that time, I should be faster than any average doctors at least. But Sophie¡¯s hand movement in the surgery is faster than that.


    Though there are still many parts that needed to be fixed. Ang¡¯s injuries are too much. So we exchanged position and now I¡¯m the one performing the surgery. And I do it in a much faster rate than Sophie.


    ¡°Ka, the ribs are fixed. Use healing magic there,¡± I said to Ka.


    And while Ka is healing the ribs, I fixed the other part of Ang¡¯s body. And when she¡¯s done, she goes to another part that I have fixed.


    As for Sophie, she had difficulty following my speed. And even though this is Ang¡¯s body, and I was extremely pissed before, I¡¯m still calm enough to exin everything to Sophie while moving my hand.


    Maybe this is how she got so fast. Although she can¡¯t follow my speed, she¡¯s looking at the movement of my hands so she can perform surgery more efficiently.


    .....


    After that, the surgery is over. And instead of getting Ang to stay in the hospital, I brought her to our home instead. Since we have two of the best doctors in the world, there¡¯s nothing to worry about.


    ...Yes, I called myself the best doctor in the world. What¡¯s wrong with that?


    Though I have given all the medical knowledge from the future that I know. However, there are some rare disease that we need patient first so I can perform medication while being watched by other doctors as demonstration.


    And I also have spread the medical knowledge from the past that I learned from Shadow. One of the ancient Aura user ghosts.


    Doctors need to write down the records of everything so the people in the future can learn it. And it won¡¯t disappears just like the medical knowledge of the past.


    Though I will probably live for at least a thousand years since I¡¯m an Aura Master. And more than three thousand years if my magic level can reach the stage beyond master level. So I can still teach other doctors in the future.


    Well, that can only happen if I destroy the cultpletely. That¡¯s my first goal. After that, I live however I want.


    That¡¯s what I¡¯ve been thinking while waiting for Ang to regain her consciousness. I¡¯m not in the mood to return to Rygis. Shirley is there. She can do better than me. And as a princess, the others will obey her more willingly. Unlike me whom some members of the circus is afraid of because of what happened. They witnessed me being angry.


    Anyway, with Shirley over there, she can also proceed to ask Rygis for cooperation to destroy the cult. She can represent Tatrama as the princess. Though the most important part should be done already when I brought them to meet Albert.


    As I wasying down on the bed in my room, I can see Ang¡¯s slowly regaining her consciousness. So I left my room and walked to hers.


    ¡°She¡¯s awake?¡±


    I met Sophie and Ka on the way there. They must be reacting to when I make my move knowing that I¡¯m going to visit Ang.


    ¡°She should be soon,¡± I replied.


    ¡°You can go first then. We¡¯ll wait for your conversation to be over,¡± Ka said.


    Seems like she somehow know what I¡¯m going to talk about with Ang. Well, that¡¯s to be expected of her.


    I entered Ang¡¯s room right as she opens her eyes. She observes the situation and see that she is safe in her own room. And I grabbed a chair and pulled it to the side of her bed.


    ¡°Are you done over there?¡±


    The first thing she asked was the situation in Rygis. Not about her condition, but what happened there.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. I left everything to Shirley and the others there. They can take care of everything by themselves,¡± I said.


    I looked at her condition again and see that other than fatigue, she is perfectly healthy. She only needs to rest. Though I don¡¯t think she is going to sleep anytime soon since I¡¯m here.


    ¡°Can you tell me what happened to you?¡± I asked Ang.


    She raises her upper body and sat on the bed to exin what happened.


    It was the usual sparring with Emilia. Ang didn¡¯t sense anything wrong about it. Just the usual training.


    And as usual, even though Emilia is the one with higher level, Ang can overpower her easily. Though Emilia herself has grown stronger thanks ot the training ording to Ang.


    And then, Emilia asked Ang whether Ang can cast magic without using hand gesture like most mages can. It¡¯s because Emilia herself can do it. But because of habit, she can¡¯t stop herself from moving her hand.


    Ang then proudly said that it¡¯s possible. But just like Emilia, it has be her habit to aim with her hands.


    And that¡¯s when Emilia asked Ang whether they can continue sparring with their hands on their back. Without using any hand gestures.


    Ang agreed. Although she felt weird when Emilia asked for that, she still obeyed and put her hands on her back.


    At first, the two were sparring normally with their hands on their back. And as usual, Ang is winning.


    Still, the opponent is a master level mage. Her physical strength far surpass Ang¡¯s. So, when Ang thinks that the sparring session is over and let down her guard, Emilia make her move.


    Emilia grabbed a pair of handcuffs from under her clothes, and charged at Ang. And Ang who still thought that it¡¯s the continuation of the sparring, still put her hands on her back.


    And then, she noticed some people wereing over. But before she could do anything, Emilia put the handcuff on her hands. And that blocked her from using any magic.


    Knowing that the situation worsened, there¡¯s nothing Ang could do. She knows that Emilia and the others areing to get her, so she can only endure being hit because they wanted to knock her out. And they seeded.


    Though with her Mind¡¯s Eye, she avoided dangerous attack by shifting her body so she can avoid getting hit in her vitals. Good thing I told everyone that they shouldn¡¯t ignore physical training.


    Still, there¡¯s nothing she could do but endure everything until she finally fainted. At least she avoided her vitals getting hurt. Or she could die.


    That¡¯s how she ended up in that state. It¡¯s good that she¡¯s still alive. But that¡¯s still partially my fault.


    ¡°Ang, I¡¯m sorry. Everything was my fault. I should have informed you that the cult was there and we already cooperated with the President to erase them from Rygis. If only I told you about this, you won¡¯t end up in that state,¡± I apologized with my head down.


    Just by saying that the cult was there, Ang won¡¯t let her guard down easily. Even when she¡¯s training with Emilia, she won¡¯t easily get her hand cuffed.


    ¡°No, it¡¯s not your fault. It was my fault to let my guard down,¡± Ang said.


    ¡°It¡¯s my fault that I didn¡¯t trust you enough to tell you about our n. I always thought that you are the same clueless Ang as before. But I learnt from this experience that I need to trust you more. You¡¯re not just the friend that I know the longest after Victoria. You¡¯re someone who trusted me. But I never trusted you enough. I¡¯m sorry,¡± I apologized again.


    ¡°...Okay. When I got hit over and over again, I also regretted the fact that there¡¯s something that I held back all the time. Now I know why you always pick the cult as your first mission before anything else. You want to erase your regret as much as possible, right?¡± Ang said.


    ¡°Umm... that¡¯s obvious, isn¡¯t it? So, what is it that you keep holding yourself back for? If it¡¯s anything I can help, then I¡¯ll do it,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then close your eyes. Your first punishment is to close your eyes. Don¡¯t use Divine Vision, and don¡¯t use Mind¡¯s Eye. Don¡¯t use any magic as well,¡± she said.


    ¡°Okay.¡±


    I willingly do it. And this is still the first punishment. There¡¯s still second. And maybe there will be more.


    And she suddenly grabbed my head and kissed me. All of a sudden, she kissed me.


    I know that she has a feeling for me. I don¡¯t know when, but I know it recently. Though I thought that she won¡¯t do anything yet. But it was surprising that she suddenly do this.


    ¡°...Ang?¡±


    ¡°I had enough of not saying anything. By the time I noticed, there¡¯s no other man better than you and I started to have feeling for you. I thought that I will open up about my feeling to you once I am stronger than you, but I regreted that I didn¡¯t say it to you. And I will say it now. Roy, I love you. I know you have many lovers already, but I still love you. Now that I have said it, I don¡¯t need to hear your answer because I already know what your answer will be,¡± Ang said as shey down again on the bed trying to sleep. She turned her back on me because she¡¯s embarrassed that I¡¯ll be looking at her blushing face. Though I can see it.


    ¡°...Okay. I¡¯ll do my best myself to destroy the cult so we can have a happy life together in the future. Along with the others. You can rest now,¡± I said as I stand.


    ¡°...the second punishment is a date,¡± Ang said when I was about to leave.


    ¡°Okay. During the tour, I¡¯ll find a ce that you will like,¡± I said.


    ¡°A date together with you and all of your lovers,¡± Ang continued.


    ¡°...Alright. It¡¯s weird that you want it, but okay.¡±


    She then covers her head with the nket and didn¡¯t say anything else.


    ...And I got one more lovers. And she¡¯s extremely cute.

 Chapter 648

    Chapter 648: The Rain Calms Me Down


    I left Ang¡¯s room to see that Ka and Sophie were waiting.


    ¡°She fell back asleep. And how much did you hear?¡± I asked.


    I know that they were eavesdropping. Although Ang told me that I shouldn¡¯t use Divine Vision and Mind¡¯s Eye, my senses are still better than average people. My hearing detected their movement behind the door.


    ¡°Well, congrattion on getting another girl. And I¡¯m waiting for the date,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°A date with everyone! I can¡¯t wait!¡± Sophie said excitedly.


    ...my girls are all weird. At least they are happy.


    ¡°If possible, I¡¯d like you to wait for a while longer for the date. There are still some girls possibly wanted to join in as well,¡± Ka said.


    .....


    ¡°Still!? Just what did I do? I know that I¡¯m handsome, but other than fighting and operating patients, there¡¯s nothing that I¡¯m particrly excel at to be admired bydies. Though I¡¯m d to be popr,¡± I said.


    ¡°You are right. Except for the handsome part,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°...Please don¡¯t say that. You¡¯re my girlfriend, so why are you calling me ugly?¡± I felt dejected hearing that from Ka.


    ¡°I didn¡¯t say that you¡¯re ugly. Anyway, there¡¯s no way that you can get admired by girls. The girls who admire you are at least acquaintances or friends. Other than us, it¡¯s impossible for anyone to admire you,¡± Ka said.


    ...That means I¡¯m unattractive. I understand.


    ¡°And so, there are still some girls who is actually interested in you, but they are holding back their feeling like Ang. Most likely, they like you but feel reluctant to say it because you already have so many girlfriends already. I won¡¯t ask you to be the one to make your move. But at least, I want you to wait until the others sort their feeling first. That¡¯s why for the date with everyone, I want us to do it when those girls are clear with their feeling. Either they will join us or give up. I¡¯ll talk about it with Angter,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°...Seems like you know more about it than me. Then, I¡¯ll just continue doing what I can. You can take care of it if you want to. Or let them sort their feelings by themselves. You two need to get some rest as well. I want to get some air tonight,¡± I said.


    ¡°Get some air? It¡¯s raining though. And you¡¯re an air mage. Well, if it¡¯s you, I guess it¡¯s fine. Don¡¯t catch a cold,¡± Ka said as she and Sophie return to their own room.


    Yes, it¡¯s raining tonight. And if I go out, the noise from the rain will be too noisy for me to be lost in my mind. That¡¯s why it¡¯s the best time to get some fresh air. Though nothing can beat my own air that I produce with air magic.


    I enter my room, opened the window, and jumped to the roof from there. And Iy down on the roof and watch the rain. Doing nothing at all.


    This is refreshing. Not having to think about anything. And the noise from the rain helped me rx. I think I should do this more often when I feel more stressed.


    In fact, I have done this many times in my past life. Since I have difficulty making a living, and could only end up being a doctor in a clinic in a small vige. Though I mostly stressed about the fact that I was too weak at that time. I guess that¡¯s why I rarely do it again now. Rxing under the rain.


    I don¡¯t know how long I have been staying without moving at all. I just realized that the rain is starting to stop and the sun is about to rise. And that¡¯s when I enter the house and take a bath before taking a light nap. I still need to go back to Rygister.


    It¡¯s when I wake up that I realized something.


    ¡°Ah! She wanted to go out with everyone. That means she treasures the girls more than she loves me,¡± I said to myself.


    ...At least she still loves me.


    I checked on Ang¡¯s condition again, and then proceed to eat some breakfast before I return back to Rygis. Where Shirley has taken care of everything.


    ¡°It¡¯s done?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. We have settled the most important parts after all back when you brought Yuria to my brother. Though it would be soon that Yuria announces everything. Good thing youe right now. I want you to check if there are still cult¡¯s influence in the city,¡± Shirley said.


    ¡°Okay, I¡¯ll do it. And what about the circus?¡± I asked Burnes this time.


    ¡°You brought Thomasst night before you left. He said that tonight won¡¯t be good for the show. So, we will do it at ater date. Though today, we were told to entertain the people in the street. Just like a street performers. Not the kind of performance that needed to be done on the stage. Just a simple juggling or tricks,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll do it when I¡¯m free. What about the office staffs that I broughtst night?¡±


    ¡°You forgot to bring them to his majesty so we do our interrogation with them ourselves. But for now, nothing suspicious. They are all willing to help us. Especially since they could hear the scream of the cult members you killedst night. They didn¡¯t see it themselves, but they are afraid because even though they are expert level mages, they don¡¯t have experience in fighting to the death,¡± Burnes said.


    And so they decided to go along with whatever Yuria wanted. Well, at least now Yuria has connection with the outside world.


    Though there¡¯s one thing that bothers me.


    ¡°So, why is everyone avoiding me?¡± I asked.


    Ever since I arrived back to the circus, other than Burnes, Thomas, and a few other members of the circus, the rest are too afraid to even look at me.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s because you received praises from the four kings. Everyone has discussed about what the kings are praising you about. And some even make fun of it saying that the kings have been tricked. Especially after they see you often being silly. But now that they witnessed it themselves, they feel ashamed. Even though we¡¯re all agents trained to be able to easily interact with other people, none of us were trained to this situation where their image of you whom they have been with for a while to change so much in one night. Though rather than changing, it¡¯s more like the kings actually spoke the truth when they were praising you,¡± Burnes said.


    And they were ashamed of that? Well, they¡¯re all agent. They know what to do. I¡¯ll just leave them be. Though I hope it won¡¯t be a trouble during our show tomorrow.


    Though does that mean they don¡¯t believe in their own kings? Or maybe because our own situation is weird.


    I mean special agents from four different countries are gathering here together. And they all know that everyone was sent by different country. So they can somehow have something inmon to talk with.


    And rather than talking about some state secrets, they started talking about the information that they gathered by themselves. Like this noble like to do this, or this businessman is doing that.


    And then, one thing inmon to talk about is me. About how the four kings trusted me and praise me so much that they keep hearing about it. And when they finally met me, they only see a clown.


    But once the clown made some action, the clown is actually quite powerful. Though the agents here didn¡¯t know how strong I was. They probably think that I¡¯m a stronger than average expert level mage.


    And finally, they witnessed me got angry. Alone without any weapon, without using magic, and no familiars summoned, I killed so many enemies alone. Thought that¡¯s not the only thing they witnessed. They experienced my killing intent as well. The intimidation that I used to make the cult members stood still frozen by fear.


    Feeling that intent clearly, even though it was reduced because they are not my enemies, they started to fear me. That¡¯s what Burnes told me when I asked him to exin more about it.


    ¡°This side too... I hope they can sort their feeling before our show. It will be bad if our chemistry in the circus turns bad because of this. Well, one night sleep should be enough for that,¡± I said.


    ¡°One more thing, Roy. My brother has finished interrogating Emilia. And after Patricia pleaded to him to not execute her in exchange for her loyalty, he said that she can continue staying in Rygis and protect the country. You can bring her back here now,¡± Shirley said.


    Oh, nice. With this, there¡¯s no need to doubt about the master level mage¡¯s loyalty.


    After Patricia returned here, Shirley and Burnes exined everything that happened here to her. And she said that Emilia will stay in prison at least until the cult is destroyed.


    After that, Emilia will be taken by Patricia. And Patricia said that she won¡¯t restrain her granddaughter so much anymore. Well, that should be expected. Emilia is old enough to have children. Even grandchildren.


    Well, as long as she won¡¯t cause any trouble, she can do anything. Though after what I showed her, I guess she won¡¯t mindlessly pick a fight against anyone she sees.


    With this, we have the cooperation of Rygis. Though it will be a while until we can depart and continue our journey.


    ...And I need to find a dating spot. Although it might take a while until everyone sort their feeling, I still need to find a good ce for it.

 Chapter 649

    Chapter 649: Where They Collect Wind Element Magic Stones


    Rygis was in chaos for a while when Yuria announced about the danger of the cult. It took a while until everything calmed down,so the show ended up being dyed again. We want to perform at least once more before we continue to the next city. Another city that belong to Rygis.


    And so, while everyone is busy, I move alone toward the other cities in Rygis. There is only one other city in Rygis country that we decided to perform at. But I also need to check the other city.


    I move alone so we can investigate whether those cities have been influenced by the cult or not. Of course I will use portal to get some agents to investigate.


    Though this is great. There are many expert level mages. All of them are women. Though that¡¯s to be expected.


    Yuria said that she wanted to change the citizen¡¯s view of men. That¡¯s the reason why she wanted to be the president. She wanted to change her country.


    And so, even though most men are no longer ves, they are still unable to cultivate as their resources are still limited. Many women still don¡¯t like about this change. But at least it has slowly changing.


    Still, the men, even though they should be equal to women now, they are still afraid to do many things. And they still ended up being protected by women so other women won¡¯t assault them. That¡¯s okay though.


    .....


    In other cities, there are also slum area as well. And while the agents, of which all of them are female, are investigating the city, I¡¯ll be checking on the slum and see any suspicious movement.


    Although there was no one with explosive devices in their mouth, because of my experience, I can tell which one is members of the cult or not.


    Well, not really. I was just found some suspicious people whom I assume to be from the cult, and follow them until they revealed themselves. Though how I found them to be suspicious was from my experience.


    My job was over quickly. But the agents will still investigate those cities.


    Now, we can only wait while the country is restored. Seems like some cult members have high position in the country as well. That¡¯s why it will take some time until we can officially receive the permit for our show. And we can only do some light street performance while waiting and to advertise our circus as well to those who haven¡¯t watched it.


    Well, if there are anyone who have watched us and still wanted to go, that¡¯s fine. That means I¡¯m just that good.


    Now, what should I do?


    Oh, right! There¡¯s one thing that made me curious about Rygis.


    Too many expert level mages. Most of them are wind element expert level mages. And there should be a ce where they can get the wind magic stones. I need to check that ce out.


    When Yuria was discussing something with Shirley in the office, I entered the office.


    ¡°Roy, what is it?¡± Shirley asked.


    ¡°Well, I just remember about the wind element magic stones. I want to see where the are being mined and see if that ce is good for cultivating as well for wind mages. Shirley, if you¡¯re free, we should check the ce together,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah, that¡¯s what I want to discuss with Yuria as well. Before that, can you use portal outside the city? My brother has sent a messenger to this country for an official meeting. If you can use portal, the messenger can get there sooner. You also need to bring the carriage as well to show that a messenger from another country ising,¡± Shirley said.


    ¡°Sure. Be back in a second,¡± I said before leaving with portal.


    Now, I don¡¯t need to care about other people watching me using portal. Yuria said that all the expert level mages have agreed to fight the cult. They need to know not to mess with me like the cult members did.


    Yuria has informed them that I¡¯m the one they shouldn¡¯t make an enemy of. Though I don¡¯t know how many people believe her.


    Well, even if there¡¯s someone trying to challenge me, that¡¯s fine. I can ept some challenges when I¡¯m free. Though I hope they won¡¯t risk their lives. Because I would kill them if they do. Attacking me with their lives at stake means they are enemies.


    Now that I¡¯m outside of the city, I opened a portal to where the messenger should be. I asked Sonia to where the messenger is and opened a portal to see that it was Sara who came.


    ¡°You¡¯re the messenger?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. His majesty wants someone strong enough with good reputation as a messenger. This way, when someone asked about me, they will know who I m from thepetition. Though I don¡¯t think anyone here would know me. And I can just say that his majesty picked me to be a member of his royal guard. Though just Miguel alone is enough to be his guard,¡± Sara said.


    ¡°Who is Miguel?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...Mustache. You need to remember his name,¡± Sara said.


    Oh, right. That¡¯s the name other people called Mustache with. Why didn¡¯t he just pick a name instead of having two?


    ¡°Are you still teaching though?¡± I asked Sara.


    ¡°...His majesty increased my rank. Now, I¡¯m a noble. As for teaching, I let someone do it. I have taught them everything I learned from you,¡± she said.


    ¡°Whoa, you¡¯re a noble now? Congrattion!¡± I said.


    ¡°...I became a noble for a while already. You¡¯re the only one who doesn¡¯t know. Though I never told you so it¡¯s partially my fault,¡± Sara said.


    Is that why she rarely came to my ce? She¡¯s a noble now so she has her own house, right? A mansion perhaps?


    ¡°Ah, well. Anyway, you can meet Yuria now. Just go forward and one of the gatekeeper should guide you,¡± I said.


    ¡°...As expected, you are not interested at all,¡± Sara said in low tone.


    Why should I be interested? Though it¡¯s good that she raise up in life. That¡¯s all I care. As long as she¡¯s doing fine, that¡¯s all that matter. As for bing a part of nobility, I¡¯m friend with the royalty. I¡¯m not jealous at all.


    While Sara moves with her carriage, I used portal to Yuria¡¯s office again.


    ¡°Roy, Yuria has told us where they mine the wind element magic stones. And Patricia will be with us as our guide,¡± Shirley said.


    ¡°Okay. So, where it is?¡± I asked Patricia who is already there in the office.


    ¡°It¡¯s over that way if we¡¯re going straight. It¡¯s at the peak of that Gale Mountain where the wind never stop,¡± Patricia said.


    Gale Mountain? Nice naming sense. Though it¡¯s probably not Patricia who came up with that. Maybe someone in the distant past.


    ¡°Hmm... there¡¯s no Blobby near there and I can¡¯t use portal. I guess we¡¯ll just fly there,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then let¡¯s go. Yuria, I¡¯ll talk to youter,¡± Shirley said as she jumped from the window.


    ¡°...Is it some sort of rule that powerful people prefer to jump from the window instead of leaving through the front door like normal people?¡± Yuria asked as she saw Patricia also jump out of the window after Shirley.


    ¡°It¡¯s just that we are fine jumping from this height. And it¡¯s faster this way. Maybe you should just install a door instead of a window. Maybe a balcony? That seems better than just a door. Though that is a bad suggestion. If there¡¯s a balcony, not only we can enter and leave as we please, the enemy can do that as well. But as long as you have Patricia, you don¡¯t have to worry about enemies,¡± I said.


    ¡°Unless the cult are far stronger than expected,¡± Yuria said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. Shirley or some other wind mages from our side can give her instruction on how to get stronger without raising your level. Patricia can get stronger and you can be at ease. You and the presidents after you. Though that will only happen if Patricia chooses to stay here even after you leave,¡± I said.


    ¡°Right... We also need to think about the future as well. I¡¯ll be busy for a little longer, but if it¡¯s about the circus, you are free to perform or leave whenever you want. Since it¡¯s you, you cane whenever you want, right?¡± Yuria said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll tell Thomas about it. He¡¯s the real leader of the circus. Though he¡¯s just a normal civilian. Well, those two have fly so far. I will follow them now. Bye.¡±


    I bid my farewell to Yuria, and then contacted Sonia to tell Thomas that he¡¯s free to set the show whenever he wants.


    Running in the air as an Aura Master, I caught up with Shirley in no time. I guess even if she¡¯s a strong wind mage, she¡¯s still slowerpared to a master level mage.


    When I¡¯m passing her, I summoned Ray for her to ride on. Shirley understood my intention and jumped on Ray¡¯s back after I summoned him.


    As for me, I want to test my speed against a master level mage. So when I passed Patricia, I told her that we¡¯re going to race to the Gale Mountain.


    And I ended up losing. Patricia arrives there after Ray. I guess I still need to train. If the Evil God is a wind mage, I won¡¯t be able to catch up with him like this.

 Chapter 650

    Chapter 650: Climbing Gale Mountain


    ¡°You¡¯re pretty fast even without magic,¡± Patricia praised me after I arrive soon after her.


    ¡°You¡¯re wrong. I used air magic to direct the air pressure so I won¡¯t feel it hit me directly and slow me down. And I still need some more training,¡± I said.


    ¡°Even though you¡¯re that strong?¡± Patricia asked.


    ¡°We don¡¯t know how strong the enemy is. That¡¯s why until we face him directly, we can only get stronger,¡± I said.


    ¡°...No wonder Emilia lost to Ang. We have been living in this country in peace without any real danger. And we know nothing of the outside world. We don¡¯t really have any motivation to grow stronger. That¡¯s why after reaching expert level, most of the mages here thought that it¡¯s a waste of time to continue cultivating,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°I see. And those expert level mages, are all of them wind element mages?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. Except for Emilia who improves her ice magic, everyone here cultivate their wind magic. That¡¯s why for those who doesn¡¯t have wind element, bing advanced level mage is the best they can do. But now that I think about it, how did Emilia gain resources to improve her ice magic? Is it that cult? That means she has been contacting the cult for a long time already,¡± Patricia said.


    .....


    ¡°Well, the Evil God exists since around a thousand years ago. It¡¯s natural to think that the cult has been created since that time,¡± I said.


    We still don¡¯t know in what era the cult was officially formed. They have been hiding from public for a long time after all.


    In my past life, around this time, Albert should have just somehow realized the existence of the cult. And only a few people were informed about this. At least that¡¯s the rumor that I heard while I was busy attending medical school. Though at that time, I was busy with homework. So I don¡¯t really remember much.


    But this time, the existence of the cult was brought to light thanks to me. And we have much better progress in fighting the cult than in my past life. With our strength higher than before.


    Though the cult¡¯s leader is so secretive and we don¡¯t know yet if what we have is good enough or not. What a pain.


    ¡°And that summoned monster. How can you summon more than one monster?¡± Patricia asked.


    ¡°Some fruit that look like a pear did it. Once a summoner ate it, the summoner can get extra monster whenever they raise up a level. I was lucky to found it while I was still a beginner level summoner,¡± I replied.


    And it¡¯s also thanks to knowledge of the past from Victoria. If not for her, I will never know the secret of summoner. Including the use of portal and travel to Monsters World.


    ¡°A fruit? Is it rare?¡± Patricia asked.


    ¡°It¡¯s rare for you but not for me. Those who want it can only try their best to get my recognition,¡± I said.


    If Patricia or someone else here is a summoner, they need to work hard to gain my trust. And at the moment, I can¡¯t trust someone whose granddaughter joined the cult.


    ¡°I see... Anyway, this is Gale Mountain. And to reach the peak you need to climb while enduring the never ending hurricane. Only a few people can climb to the peak. Even if I¡¯m a master level mage, it¡¯s still difficult for me to climb it. And for the magic stones, we can only wait until the wind blow the magic stones away from there since getting inside it will be difficult,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°Well, Shirley, what do you think about this ce?¡±


    I asked Shirley who is still riding on Ray¡¯s back. She has been concentrating on something ever since we arrive here.


    ¡°...The wind is amazing. Unlike Andro¡¯s back where the wind is powerful enough to lift his body, the wind here, although weaker, it¡¯s still pretty strong. And the wind continuously blowing. I feel like cultivating here will be different than cultivating on Andro¡¯s back. But both will give us wind mage amazing improvement,¡± Shirley said.


    ¡°Should I bring the other wind mages?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I think that¡¯s for the best. We all can cultivate here for our training. Good thing the matter in Mellian is over already. They are either finding a way to train more or cultivate. Let¡¯s call them here,¡± Shirley said.


    If that¡¯s what she¡¯s thinking, I guess that¡¯s true. Bing even stronger than they are now will bring us more benefit.


    So, who are the wind mages that I need to bring?


    Well, Shirley is already here. Next is Veronica, Wendy, and Kron. Oh, and Ang might be interested ining as well.


    I opened portals to let Veronica, Wendy, and Kron to enter. Then I opened a portal to Ang¡¯s location and ask her if she wants toe as well.


    ...Her face is still red from just looking at me. I guess she cer.


    ¡°So, there are four of you now. What do you think of this ce?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Andro¡¯s back will improve our attack power due to how powerful his wings are. But for a long fight, I think cultivating in this ce is better,¡± Wendy said. And as the most intellectual among the three, she became the representative because she can exin it better than the others.


    If it Kron, he just said, ¡°It¡¯s great! It¡¯s amazing!¡±


    While Veronica just said, ¡°Okay. This is nice.¡±


    ¡°By the way, that woman over there is a wind element master level mage from this country. If you need anything, just ask her,¡± I said.


    ¡°This little girl is? She must be so talented that she can be a master level mage,¡± Kron said.


    ¡°Talented she might be, she¡¯s not a little girl. She¡¯s a grandma. And her granddaughter was just arrestedst night for cooperating with the cult and injure Ang to the point that she needed operation. That¡¯s one reason why Ang won¡¯e be here today,¡± I said.


    ¡°Wait, Ang was injured!?¡±


    The three of them were shocked by that more than the fact that the woman in front of them is a grandma. Well, that¡¯s natural.


    Not only that, Wendy and Kron instantly be hostile toward Patricia. Though I stopped them before they hurt her.


    As for Veronica, she was different.


    ¡°It¡¯s just her granddaughter who was cooperating with the cult, right? Not her? After all, if she was with the cult, there¡¯s no doubt that she would reach the same status as Celestine and I was. A faction leader. Though she will be the leader of little girl faction,¡± Veronica said.


    ¡°If there¡¯s such faction, I would kill all of them right away.¡±


    I identally leaked killing intent when I heard what Veronica said. And that makes everyone scared and tried to calm me down instead.


    ¡°Rx. That¡¯s only if that woman is with the cult. I never heard of such faction before. Other than big breasts and big butts, the other factions are too weird and have too little followers so I don¡¯t care. But I have never heard of little girl faction,¡± Veronica said.


    ¡°Good. At least the cult is sensible enough to not make that happen.¡±


    Seriously. Making a faction like that with little girls? I think it won¡¯t just be me. even some people in the cult won¡¯t keep quiet about it.


    Or maybe that did happen. And some members of the cult destroyed them instead.


    Anyway, it should be fine. After all, Veronica was raised by the cult without anything terrible happened. There shouldn¡¯t be anything like that.


    ¡°And so, you brought us here to see if we want to cultivate here, right? And also to introduce us to the master level wind mage here. Though since you didn¡¯t kill her right away, I guess she can somewhat be trusted,¡± Wendy said.


    ¡°Yeah. And so, what do you think?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Obviously, we need to check the peak of the mountain first. There should be abundant magic stones there that we can gather. And it¡¯s also great for our training as well,¡± Kron said.


    ¡°About the magic stones, I can see many of them were being lifted by the wind and rotate along with it. It¡¯s like a non-stop hurricane that never move. There are more stones floating than those at the peak,¡± I said after checking with my Divine Vision.


    ¡°Whatever the case, reaching the top is what we need to do! I¡¯ll be going first!¡±


    With that, Kron flies into the hurricane first.


    ¡°...Although that might be helpful for us wind mage, we need to check the pace first. Let¡¯s go there right away as well. Roy, if you mind,¡± Shirley asked me to do something.


    I understand what she wants. She wants me to cut open the hurricane.


    And I did it. Using Victokatana, I split the hurricane, and the wind stopped momentarily.


    ¡°Let¡¯s go! Quickly before the hurricane restarted again! And avoid the falling stones!¡± I said.


    Ray, and now with Shirley, Veronica, and Wendy on his back, flies toward the peak. And I followed behind him with Patricia who was still shocked with what she has just witnessed joining uster.


    At the front, it was the surprised Kron who forgot what I can do. Though he¡¯s still flying toward the peak.


    Even with my Divine Vision, I can¡¯t see everything here. It¡¯s just toorge. Though it¡¯s weird that the peak of a mountain is actually a t meadow.


    Well, what can we get in this ce? I¡¯m curious if there are other thing than magic stones here.

 Chapter 651

    Chapter 651: Spirits


    We entered the hurricane after I cut open a path so we have easier time to enter. But right after I made a path, the hurricane then blocked the path again. It¡¯s a never ending hurricane that can¡¯t be fully stopped.


    Inside the hurricane, wended on the vast meadow that my Divine Vision can¡¯t see everything. Though all I see is grass and many magic stones.


    ¡°Oh, there are a lot of magic stones as well here. Roy, you said that the hurricane lifted more stones than what we see here. Is that right?¡± Kron asked.


    ¡°Yeah. At least around this area only. This area is vast and there¡¯s even a ce where we can still climb higher. Maybe there are ces with more magic stones. But if it¡¯s magic stones we¡¯re after, we don¡¯t need to look more. We could even just wait until the stones that the hurricane carried fall outside,¡± I said.


    After I said that, we can see some smaller magic stones were lifted from the ground by the wind easily, and joined the other magic stones. Rotating along with the hurricane.


    Even if we¡¯re in the eye of the storm, the wind is still strong enough to lift a stone the size of a fist. Though there are even bigger magic stones that won¡¯t be easily lifted.


    When I cut open the hurricane, the stones that were carried by the wind started to fall. But we reached the center before the magic stones that are high in the sky fell to the ground.


    .....


    ¡°...We always have difficulty to reach the peak. Even though I¡¯m a master level mage, I can only stop the wind temporarily. That¡¯s why for us, those stones are obstacles to reach the center. But to think that you can easily cut open a path with a sword. The outside world is too scary,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. It¡¯s just Roy. Other than Roy, there were no one else who can do what he does. Just get used to it,¡± Shirley said.


    For now, let¡¯s mark this ce with a Blobby. I looked for a boulder that I think the hurricane won¡¯t be able to lift and pasted a Blobby there. And I make sure that the Blobby will stick to that boulder and won¡¯t let go.


    ¡°With this, we can easilye here in the future. You can explore this area and see what you can find,¡± I said to the others.


    ¡°Wait! Before that, I have something to tell you. This ce is poisonous. That¡¯s why there are no one willing toe here and stay too long. Don¡¯t stay too long here or you¡¯ll faint from the poison,¡± Patricia said.


    Poison? There¡¯s no such thing though.


    ¡°What kind of poison?¡± Shirley asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. People just started to faint. It¡¯s not something that we know. You won¡¯t die if you get poisoned, but I don¡¯t know if it¡¯s safe or not,¡± Patricia said.


    Faint? Oh, that¡¯s not poison then.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I can tell that it¡¯s not poison. Being this high means the air we breathe is thinner. Though I also feel that the air here is different. Seems like it¡¯s not just wind mages who will benefit from cultivating here. Air mages can improve quicker as well. You guys don¡¯t need to worry. I have cast air magic so you won¡¯t have any problem breathing here for a few hours. Go and explore this ce. I¡¯ll stay here and cultivate,¡± I said as I sat down on the ground.


    Other than being in space, this is the other ce where I can cultivate my air element. And it¡¯s less dangerous than in the outer space. Maybe I can reach expert level here. Or even master level.


    As I cultivate, I feel that my air magic is growing. Although it¡¯s different from cultivating in the outer space, cultivating here also improves my air magic a lot.


    After one hour of cultivating, I think I had enough. It won¡¯t be long before I can reach expert level in my air magic.


    Now, let¡¯s check this ce.


    Seems like Shirley is still riding on Ray¡¯s back here. I can just use portal to where Ray is and find her.


    ¡°Have you find anything here?¡± I asked Shirley.


    ¡°Other than this ce benefits wind mages, I didn¡¯t see anything else. Once the matter in Rygis is over, I think I¡¯ll stay here for a while,¡± Shirley said.


    And then, I see Kron descending from the sky. He must be returning from the peak of this mountain.


    ¡°There¡¯s no difference in cultivating here or at the peak of this mountain. I didn¡¯t sense anything strange as well,¡± Kron said.


    Then Patriciae over and she just shook her head. She also didn¡¯t find anything it seems.


    Suddenly, we feel a gust of powerful winding here. We¡¯re in the eye of the storm and there¡¯s an extra wind here?


    I look over to the source and see that Veronica is there. And she seems to be fighting someone or something. Is there a monster here?


    ¡°Veronica is fighting something. Let¡¯s go there!¡± I said to everyone here.


    Though I can¡¯t see what she¡¯s fighting, that thing is there. I don¡¯t think there¡¯s something wrong with my Divine Vision though.


    And when I used Mind¡¯s Eye along with Divine Vision, I can finally sense what Veronica is fighting. There¡¯s something small, but it feels like something extremely familiar to me. Air.


    Though there are more than one thing Veronica is fighting. The one that¡¯s fighting Veronica doesn¡¯t feel like air. It¡¯s more like wind. Moving air.


    ¡°Veronica! What¡¯s wrong!?¡± I asked her when I arrive.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know! Something suddenly attacked me! I¡¯m just protecting myself!¡± Veronica replied.


    No wonder. The things that Veronica are fighting doesn¡¯t feel like a living being. They are like air and wind.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll take care of the one that feels like air first. You¡¯ll try and stall for the one you¡¯re facing,¡± I said.


    So far, I can only sense two existences. But they didn¡¯t show any killing intent at all.


    The one that feels like wind is facing Veronica. And the other is just watching.


    Although that one feels like air, it feels like that thing is concentrated in one point. And it¡¯s upied only a small space. So I just transformed some Blobbies into a jar and capture that thing.


    Once that thing was captured on an airtight Blobbyjar, the one that feels like wind turns its hostility toward me. This one is trying to help the air one.


    And so, I make another Blobbyjar and locked the thing inside as well.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s done... huh? The hurricane is stopping? Does it mean they are the one responsible for the hurricane?¡±


    With two jar in my hands, I looked at the hurricane that is stopping. All the floating stones are falling down like hail. Though since everyone here other than me are wind mages, they can easily avoid getting rained down by those stones. As for me, I just need to cover my body with Aura. And the stones couldn¡¯t bother me.


    I looked at the inside of the jars, and finally, the wind and the air inside the jar then changed form. And now, they have the form of a fairy. Or at least what I imagined what a fairy look like.


    ¡°Hey, you two. We are not here to cause you trouble. We only want to cultivate and grow stronger. As long as you agree to let us do what we want, I will release you. Don¡¯t worry because I promise to not harm you. At least the people I brought here with me won¡¯t harm you. There are many kinds of human in this world after all,¡± I said.


    ¡°Roy, who are you talking to?¡± Kron asked me.


    The jar was locked so tightly without any opening. So it¡¯s normal that those inside the jars won¡¯t be able to hear me. But I also have trained my air magic to the point that I can vibrate the air inside the jar and make it be the one talking while I just keep my mouth shut.


    So, I vibrated the air inside the jars and make them say the same thing I just said. If the fairy-like thingies can understand me, I will know since I can see with my Divine Vision.


    ¡°Oh, and I can¡¯t hear you. So you can only nod or shake your head as response,¡± I added.


    Hearing that, the one that feels like air nodded. And soon after, the wind one nodded as well. So I opened the jars and let them free.


    Soon after, the hurricane appears again. As expected, the wind one is the reason why there¡¯s a hurricane in this ce.


    ¡°Fairies!?¡± Patricia was shocked when she sees what¡¯s in front of her.


    ¡°Sorry for the ruckus before. I¡¯m Roy. I¡¯m just here to to get myself and my friends stronger by cultivating in this ce and gather the magic stones here,¡± I said.


    ¡°...I¡¯ll trust you for now, human Roy. I¡¯m the wind spirit residing in this ce. And this is my sister the air spirit,¡± the windy one said.


    Wind spirit and air spirit? Are they the reason wind element and air element here feels good for wind mages and air mages?


    ...Is it another chance for me to recruit more monsters?

 Chapter 652

    Chapter 652: Giving the Spirits Names


    ¡°Wind Spirit and Air Spirit? Are they amazing?¡± Kron asked curiously.


    ¡°Well, we don¡¯t know for sure yet. But at least we know that the wind spirit is the one responsible for the hurricane that surround this ce. Veronica, how did you end up fighting them?¡± I asked Veronica. She¡¯s the one who encountered the spirits first.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. I was just walking around when I feel the wind changed. I feel like someone is attacking me with wind magic, so I just protecting myself,¡± Veronica said.


    Oh, right. When I saw her before, she wasn¡¯t attacking at all. She only did defensive maneuver and never fight back. So it was the wind spirit first who attacked first.


    ¡°Well... wind spirit and air spirit, why did you attack my friend? We¡¯re not here to make enemies,¡± I asked the spirits.


    ¡°I¡¯m not fighting her. My brother is the one attacking your friend first,¡± the air spirit said.


    ¡°I was just ying with your friend!¡± The wind spirit said.


    .....


    ¡°ying without asking first. So others will think that you¡¯re attacking her out of nowhere,¡± the air spirit said.


    So the wind spirit was just being yful. I suppose they have the mind of a child.


    Their appearance is that of a fairy like in picture books. Small, just about the height of a person¡¯s head, with translucent wings on their back. The wind spirit looks like a small man, while the air spirit look like a small woman.


    ¡°Hey, hey! Your wind was so strong! Even stronger than that person when her level is supposed to be higher! How can you do that!?¡± the wind spirit asked Veronica.


    ¡°Huh? Well, I practiced my wind magic and cultivate it somewhere where powerful wind blew once in a while. It¡¯s on the back of a kaiser dragon. Because his body was so big, his wings need to be strong enough so he can stay in the sky,¡± Veronica replied.


    ¡°Kaiser dragon!? I wanna see! I wanna see!¡± the wind spirit asked Veronica excitedly.


    The wind spirit seems to be more childish. As for the air spirit, she seems to be calmer.


    ¡°Well... maybe you¡¯ll be able to meet him someday,¡± Veronica said.


    ¡°By the way, what should we call you? Just wind spirit and air spirit? Do you have a name we can call you?¡± I asked the spirits.


    ¡°No. We never have any names. There are only the two of us here with humans asionallye and left quickly after collecting some stones here,¡± the air spirit said.


    ¡°Name! I want a name! Human, give me a name!¡± the wind spirit who heard me talking to the air spirit asked me to give them a name. Is it fine to just give them a name? Shelia, Graham, Tia, and Arin have their own names even though they¡¯re monsters. But maybe they have different cultures. Or that spirits and monsters are totally different. Spirits are not monsters.


    Well, in any case, I need to have easier way to remember their name. Something that I can easily remember.


    ¡°Then, the air spirit will be Airy, and the wind spirit will be Breezy. I can¡¯t call you Windy because that will confuse me with Wendy over there,¡± I said.


    ¡°Breezy! I¡¯m Breezy! Call me Breezy now, Airy!¡± Breezy excitedly flies around his sister.


    ¡°He didn¡¯t put any effort in giving us names. But I don¡¯t hate it,¡± Airy said.


    At least they like their names. Breezy and Airy. It¡¯s easy to remember.


    ¡°So, do you live here?¡± I asked the two spirits.


    ¡°Yes! I¡¯m afraid to go out so there¡¯s only the two of us here!¡± Breezy said.


    ¡°I¡¯m just toozy to move. Though I was also scared as well,¡± Airy said.


    So, while Breezy is energetic, Airy iszy. Though I wonder what these two are afraid of.


    ¡°What were you afraid of?¡± I asked.


    ¡°A long time ago, a mad mane and destroy thendscape just to make a settlement. His earth magic was so powerful that he created this mountain single-handedly. Although we were not in our material form, he always know where we are despite the fact that he¡¯s neither a wind mage nor was he an air mage. Wherever we go, he would chase after us just for fun. To capture us and to show other people that he can catch us. And we would always be freed and tried to escape again only to get caught. And so, we flew high to the sky. And he made this mountain just so he can chase after us,¡± Airy said.


    The spirits¡¯ body were shaking in fear because of the memory of the past. And I understand instantly who the person they were talking about.


    That was Timmy. From what I heard from the two ghosts beyond master level, Timmy¡¯s personality is as the two spirits described. That was in the past. Back when he was trying to woo the girls and get everyone¡¯s approval for some reason. Or at least that¡¯s what the death mage told me.


    ¡°So, you¡¯re afraid of that guy?¡± I asked the spirits.


    ¡°Yes. He was strong enough. His magic level reached higher than master level,¡± Airy said.


    ¡°Wait, there¡¯s another stage above master level!?¡± the only one who gets confused was Patricia. The woman who lives in an isted country.


    ¡°Yes. And he¡¯s most likely the one who created Rygis. Or at least he¡¯s the one who brought all the girls who ended up being the founder of your country. I don¡¯t know his real name but I called him Timmy,¡± I said.


    ¡°You know him?¡± Breezy asked.


    ¡°Probably.¡±


    I then exined the characteristic of Timmy to the two spirits. And the two confirmed my assumption.


    ¡°So it was really that guy. I heard that he was crazy in the past. And he¡¯s the reason why women in Rygis hate men. Even though he¡¯s dead now, he¡¯s still a pain in the ass,¡± I said.


    ¡°How did you know him? He¡¯s someone who lived for over three thousand years ago! Even though I¡¯m a master level mage, I don¡¯t think I can live for that long,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°He¡¯s not a master level mage. He¡¯s one stage above that. So his lifespan is much longer then any ordinary master level mage. And not just that. He¡¯s also an Aura Master. With the two traitsbined, he could probably live for a few more thousands of years before his lifespan is over if I didn¡¯t kill him,¡± I said.


    ¡°You killed him!? Roy, are you strong!?¡± Breezy asked. Airy was also interested about it.


    ¡°I¡¯m strong, but I don¡¯t think I¡¯m strong enough at the moment. And after hearing all the achievement and trouble that he did, I think he must be holding back his real strength when we fought. That¡¯s why I could win,¡± I said.


    ¡°But you can still defeat him! You¡¯re strong!¡± Breezy said.


    The two spirits then surround me with praises. Of course I happily ept it.


    Meanwhile, Patricia asked Shirley about what an Aura is. There are far too many things in the world that she doesn¡¯t know. Though Aura is something that most people never heard of other than from children¡¯s stories in this day. So even if I said I use Aura to fight, unless I show it to them, they won¡¯t believe it.


    ¡°Aura is amazing. So that¡¯s why he can be that strong,¡± Patricia said to herself.


    ¡°By the way, is the hurricane your doing?¡± I asked Breezy.


    ¡°Hmm? Oh, that! At first, it was me who did it. But now, even if I didn¡¯t do it on purpose, it will often happen on its own. So if you put me in a jar like before, the hurricane will disappear. But you only need to wait a little longer before another hurricane was created naturally,¡± Breezy said.


    So it means that even if he¡¯s not here, the hurricane can exist naturally in this ce. That¡¯s good to know if I want to recruit him. That way, we don¡¯t need Breezy to stay here for the wind mages to improve.


    But maybe if they¡¯re with us when we cultivate, either wind element or air element with Airy, our growth rate will improve even better. I¡¯d like to recruit them even more if that¡¯s the case.


    Now, how do I get them to join us? Just for the travel is enough. No need for them to fight.


    ¡°Hey, if he¡¯s dead now, there shouldn¡¯t be anyone we need to be afraid of. But we¡¯re still afraid of leaving on our own. So, can we join you guys when we¡¯re leaving?¡±


    All of a sudden, Airy asked me to join the group. Instead of me recruiting them, she wants to join us by her own will without being asked.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s fine. Buting with us doesn¡¯t mean it safe. After all, there¡¯s a war happening and we don¡¯t even know if we can win or not,¡± I said truthfully.


    ¡°I want toe to! I don¡¯t care about the war! If that happens, I¡¯ll just escape!¡± Breezy said.


    Well, with this we have recruited two spirits with us. Two more monsters.


    Though I still need to exin more about what we do. Because it feels like they are just kids. Though these kids are already over three thousand years old.

 Chapter 653

    Chapter 653: Our New Additions


    We chatted with the two spirits about the outside world. And Patricia is also listening despite the fact that she has heard of it several times before.


    It¡¯s because Patricia lived her whole life in an isted country. Rygis is the only thing she knows. As for the spirits, they were even more isted because they never left the gale mountain. That¡¯s why we¡¯re talking about the outside world with them.


    Good thing Wendy is here. She¡¯s a teacher. Her exnation is easier to understand.


    ...What about me? I¡¯m a professor. A lecturer.


    Well, it was Wendy who taught me at school first. So It¡¯s natural that her exnation is easier to understand than mine.


    ¡°So, are you sure that you still want toe with us? After all, if you do, your lives might be at risk. Not only because of the cult. But also because there are other greedy humans who might be targeting you,¡± I asked the two spirits with concern.


    I really want to get them to join us. But since they¡¯re acting like kids, I can only think of them as children. That¡¯s why instead of forcing them toe, or told them the benefit in joining us like how I asked Arin and the vampire group to join us, it¡¯s best to be straightforward with Breezy and Airy.


    .....


    Hearing what I said, the two spirits have scared expression on their face. It¡¯s easy to tell what they¡¯re thinking.


    I guess they won¡¯t join us, huh? Well, they can just stay here. We cane here whenever we want with portal.


    ¡°You don¡¯t need toe if you¡¯re afraid. You can continue staying in this ce. You have been staying here for three thousand years without anything happening so it should be fine for you to stay,¡± I said.


    ¡°But Roy, what about the cult? Rygis was so close in falling into their hand. And maybe some of them have informed the outside world about the existence of this mountain. Thanks to us, the cult didn¡¯t make any big move at the moment. But they should have known about this ce already since many cult members were already here even before we make the existence of the cult public. Sooner orter, they woulde here. And... Breezy and Airy will end up facing them. I wish you gave them better names...¡± Shirley said.


    Of course those names suit them. They are wind and air spirits after all.


    ¡°You¡¯re right. I guess this ce is dangerous as well. But since we cane here whenever we want, it should be fine. We can just get someone to stay here with them,¡± I said.


    I guess they won¡¯t join us now that we told them they¡¯re in danger outside.


    ¡°But it¡¯s fine if they¡¯re with you, right? You already have so much monsters with you. You shouldn¡¯t have any problems with these two. At least even us who are expert level mages have difficulties finding them when they are not in their material form. And if you¡¯re with Airy, you can continue be stronger,¡± Kron suggested.


    Hmm... that¡¯s a good idea. But that means the spirits can only go wherever I want. Or I can just easily bring them to Monsters¡¯ Vige and get other monsters to get along with them.


    ¡°Then that¡¯s it! We will stick with Roy! It¡¯s simple!¡± Breezy said.


    ¡°Yeah. At least other than some people from the cult, there¡¯s no one who is stronger than him if what he said is right. It will be safer to stick with him. Though that Monster¡¯s Vige seems scary so please don¡¯t let us go there on our own. We¡¯ll obey you so let us stick with you,¡± Airy said.


    ¡°Yeah! If it¡¯s you, you can protect us, right!?¡± Breezy asked.


    Well, I can. If I can¡¯t, I can just transport them using portal to somewhere safe. They want to go meet Andro, right? I can bring them to meet him.


    ¡°I can protect you. But this is war I¡¯m talking about so I¡¯m not 100% sure,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re an air mage. Just by staying with you, you can get improvement in your air magic. And my brother can stay with you or someone else with wind element. He loves moving around a lot,¡± Airy said.


    That¡¯s the problem. I know Airy can stay with me. As for Breezy, he moves around a lot.


    ¡°Are you two okay with being separated?¡± I asked.


    ¡°We¡¯re fine with it. Though for Breezy, I don¡¯t think he can be separated from me for too long. But if he can just open up with someone else, I think he will be fine,¡± Airy said.


    Hearing that, I looked at Kron. For someone who loves to move around a lot, it¡¯s best for him to stick with someone with the same interest. Though one moves around to y, and the other moves around to get stronger. But if Breezy can think of getting stronger as something enjoyable, that would be great. Kron is also a good person and easily socialize with other people. Even now, he¡¯s already best friend with Fabio. The current king of Arturo.


    ¡°Then, If he wants to, Breezy con go with Kron over there. He¡¯s a wind mage and he loves moving around a lot. He has traveled to many locations on his own,¡± I said.


    ¡°Really? That¡¯s cool! Kron, can Ie with you?¡± Breezy asked Kron.


    ¡°Sure. I don¡¯t mind having apanion with me,¡± Kron said.


    ¡°I guess that settled it. Airy will stay with me and Breezy will stay with Kron. As for this ce, it¡¯s fine to leave, right?¡± I asked the spirits.


    ¡°I wonder about that too. What if the magic stones¡¯ production lessened because Breezy is gone,¡± Patricia thought.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. It¡¯s just because I¡¯m here for so long that the hurricane won¡¯t stop. Because of us staying here for so long, the concentration of wind and air is strong enough tost for hundreds of year even if we leave. So this ce is still a good ce to cultivate,¡± Breezy said.


    ¡°Okay, that¡¯s good. Also, although I said that you can stay with us, there will be a time when we need to cultivate so we wille back here either way. You can choose to stay with me or go with another air mage,¡± I said to Airy.


    ¡°I¡¯ll stay with you. When you¡¯re cultivating, I can just rest. I don¡¯t mind not moving around,¡± Airy said.


    ¡°For me, I¡¯ll go with someone else with wind element! If all of them are cultivating, I¡¯ll just stay with Roy since I can be with my sister!¡± Breezy said.


    Well, that¡¯s settled. Next we will introduce these two to everyone.


    ¡°Then, I¡¯ll introduce these two to the others. As for you... I guess all of you will be staying here for a while then,¡± I said after seeing that non of the people here wanted to leave.


    ¡°Yeah. I want to cultivate here for a while,¡± Shirley said. Veronica, Wendy, and Kron agreed with her.


    ¡°I also want to see how strong the other wind mages here is. Can I ask any of you for a spar?¡± Patricia asked.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll spar with you. Though that¡¯s only if you don¡¯t mind sparring with a man. I¡¯ve heard of the culture and tradition of this country before so if you don¡¯t want to, I won¡¯t force you to do it,¡± Kron said.


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind. Participating in the war means that I can¡¯t freely decide whom I want to fight. And I¡¯m different from other women in Rygis. After all, I had a husband and my daughter also married a good husband. Though my granddaughter turned rebellious toward me,¡± Patricia said.


    ¡°Okay then. Let¡¯s fight!¡±


    Well, before I get involved in their fight, let¡¯s leave.


    I opened a portal to the circus with Breezy and Airy sitting on my right shoulder. And on my left shoulder is Victoria. I¡¯m truly being surrounded by monsters.


    Burnes and the others epted easily. I guess the fact that they were afraid of me worked well in convincing them. And I need to get their approval because at least we will continue our tour with Airy by my side.


    After that, I returned to Cassau and get the others toe there. Other than the kings. I¡¯ll visit themter. And Sara who is busy acting as a messenger and meet Yuria. Though I can just barge in to them right away, but I won¡¯t do that.


    At least I want Sara to get to know Airy. Maybe it will be better if Airy stays with Sara instead during the war.


    Ka and the others epted it easily. Especially Ang who gets along with Breezy rather quickly. Though the onlyin they have is my naming sense. I¡¯m sorry, okay.


    Finally, I¡¯m introducing them to the kings. At least if the spirits get along with the four kings, plus one president if Yuria to be added, they can gain protection as long as we¡¯re within their territory.


    And now, the first thing I will show about the world to the spirits is something important. It¡¯s the circus performance.


    Just like the kids they are, they enjoyed it so much that they can¡¯t wait to see our next show.


    And a few dayster, we are ready to move out of Rygis and continue our tour.

 Chapter 654

    Chapter 654: I¡¯m Now an Expert Level Air Mage


    ¡°You¡¯re leaving already?¡± Yuria asked us as we were about to leave Rygis.


    ¡°Yes. There are other location we need to go. And probably some other smaller country that might suffer the same fate as your country did. And they don¡¯t even know it. Well, if those countries have a leader like you, then we can help them if the cult has started spreading there. But if the leader is some kind of tyrant, it¡¯s best for the closest kingdom to that country to gain their territory. I think the citizens would prefer it that way. Well, that¡¯s our job to investigate those ces,¡± I said.


    The show is over. We have performed in the capital of Rygis and another city in Rygis as well. And we returned back to the capital to bid our farewell to Yuria and Patricia.


    ...Actually, it¡¯s not just those two. Burnes and one of the strongmen wanted to bid their farewell to the gatekeepers they got along with. I think they have gotten along so well. Though I don¡¯t know if they¡¯re going to meet again in the future or not.


    ¡°This is just a job. And we have casual rtionship where we can satisfy each other¡¯s desire. We have rified our status that we¡¯re not going out. Though I never told them that we¡¯re agents,¡± Burnes said casually.


    They just used those women to gain information. As expected of agents.


    Because of that battle, only I, Shirley, and Ang made our move against the cult members in Rygis. That¡¯s why those gatekeepers only thought of Burnes and the others as legitimate circus members and not agents of other countries.


    .....


    Burnes and the others know that. That¡¯s why they exploit the gatekeepers¡¯ feeling to gain more information. And maybe there are other members of the circus who get along with other people in Rygis.


    In fact, even Burnes approached another girl in different city. What a yboy.


    I think his job is more like being a yboy than being an agent.


    In Rygis, only Yuria and Patricia who knows that the members of the circus are agents. That¡¯s why it¡¯s fine to tell them the truth.


    When Sara came here, she was an official messenger of Tatrama. And now, Rygis has officially entered our alliance against the cult. Though Tatrama will still help Rygis to clean up all the cult members here because we still don¡¯t know if we have gotten all of them or not.


    By the way, Albert¡¯s interrogation with the nodding guy is over. And I killed him because it seems that Albert has tortured him enough. So I killed him easily by breaking his neck.


    As for the woman in ck, it seems that she is returned to Rygis and can only wait for her execution. Yuria will use her to get everyone to work together against the cult by executing someone whom everyone think close to her. Just by witnessing that, they will understand the weight of the situation.


    The president publicly executing someone who stayed with her for a long time? The citizens will think that their president is a resolute woman who gives no mercy toward enemies of the country. And that helps Yuria gain more supporters from those who want their country to be safe. As long as they get the story right.


    That¡¯s politic. It¡¯s confusing. I just do what I was told as long as it doesn¡¯t bother me.


    We leave Rygis soon after bidding our farewell. With Breezy and Airying.


    ¡°Where are we going, Roy?¡± Breezy asked me excitedly. It¡¯s his first time going to another country. Though for me, it¡¯ just returning back to Tatrama. Just a different city.


    ¡°It¡¯s the kingdom I was born in. Tatrama. Though I don¡¯t think I have gone to the city we¡¯re going next. By the way, I won¡¯t join with the travel. I¡¯m using this chance to go to Gale Mountain to cultivate my air magic. What do you two want to do?¡± I asked the spirits.


    This is a good chance to take a break and cultivate. It¡¯s also to let the agents fight by themselves if they encounter danger instead of depending on me. After all, they have witnessed how scary I am.


    All the circus members have treated me normally again after performing in the circus. Though I want them to experience battle on their own even if their specialty is in espionage rather than fighting. I want them to grow stronger.


    That¡¯s why I will leave during our travel and onlye when they almost reach our next destination. And during that time, any bandits, monsters, or cult members they encounter, they need to take care of them by themselves.


    ¡°I¡¯ll stay with Roy. I want to travel to a lot of ces, but I¡¯m not as enthusiastic as my brother is. And Roy¡¯s progress in his air element will grow faster if I¡¯m with him when he¡¯s cultivating,¡± Airy said.


    Yes, I have tried to cultivate with Airy by my side and when she¡¯s not by my side. The result was even when Airy didn¡¯t do anything, my progress rate bes faster than usual. And when I do it at the peak of Gale Mountain, it will be even faster.


    ¡°I¡¯ll go with Kron then. He¡¯s leaving the mountain when you get there, right? Though I want toe back to you whenever you¡¯re about to perform,¡± Breezy said.


    Kron, Veronica, Wendy, Shirley, and even Ang are all in Gale Mountain to cultivate their magic. And when I get there, they will return to their daily lives because power won¡¯t be gained by just cultivating. They need experience as well to be used well.


    Sara is also there at the moment. After her discussion with Yuria is over, I brought her back to Albert. And after she finished reporting everything, she said that she wanted to go to Gale Mountain.


    She¡¯s already an expert level air mage. Is she aiming to be a master level in her air element? I hope she can be stronger faster.


    As for me, I¡¯m still an advanced level. That¡¯s why I need to cultivate. After all, I don¡¯t know when my summoning element can reach master level and gain another familiar. I need to get stronger in magic as well to be able to defeat the Evil God.


    And so, after we left Rygis, I opened a portal to go to the peak of Gale Mountain. Breezy ising with me as well so he can meet Kron there.


    Even though Breezy was absent for a few days from there, the hurricane was still there. Though the power of the hurricane was considerably weaker then when Breezy was here.


    The wind mages decided to leave as well, so I didn¡¯t close the portal until all of them leave. Breezy meet up with Kron and the two decided to move together.


    As for Ang, Shirley, Veronica, and Wendy, they also left on their own. Wherever they want to go to, I don¡¯t know. They are wind mages. They can move freely in the sky.


    Though they said that they wanted to explore dungeons to improve their strength.


    The only one remaining here other than Airy and I was Sara. And so, I started cultivating air magic next to Sara with Airyying down on myp. Why is this spirit sozy unlike her brother?


    The travel to the next destination should be around one week time. So I¡¯ll stay here to cultivate for six days before returning to the circus.


    On the second day of cultivating, I felt that I¡¯m about to breakthrough to expert level. This is amazing. With Airy here, my progress is much faster than when I was cultivating in the outer space.


    On the third day, Sara said that she wanted to return to Cassau and test her air magic. She said that because of the sses, there¡¯s a designated ce for air mages to learn to shoot guns. And that¡¯s the best ce for her to train.


    As for me, I choose to test my shooting against bandits, monsters, or members of the cult. So I never knew about that shooting practice area in Cassau.


    Finally, at on the fifth night at the peak of Gale Mountain, I reached it. I¡¯m now an expert level mage. Both in summoning and in air element.


    With this, my air magic, like the sleeping gases, calming gases, infuriating gases, depressing gases, and other gases can affect expert level mages easier than before. And probably, my magic can have some sort of effect toward the weaker master level mages as well. It will be easier for me if my job is to capture them and not killing them. Killing them is still easy since I¡¯m an Aura Master.


    ¡°Airy, want to go back to the circus?¡± I asked Airy who has been resting on myp since we came here. She¡¯s only sleeping and not doing anything at all.


    And she told me that as spirits, she doesn¡¯t need to eat or drink. Maybe spirit is not a monster. Though I don¡¯t really care either way. As long as she¡¯s our ally.


    ¡°Sure. Will there be anything special in the ce we¡¯re going to?¡± Airy asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. But from my experience, there are different specialized culinary in every city. Though you can¡¯t eat them, so I guess you¡¯re not interested in it,¡± I said.


    ¡°I said that I don¡¯t need to consume to live. I can still eat or drink like human does. Maybe I¡¯ll find something delicious there,¡± Airy said.


    Well, there¡¯s really no one who can restrain themselves from delicious food. And as an entertainer, it¡¯s my job to entertain Airy. Not only in the circus, but in other ces as well since she¡¯s going to stick with me for a long time.

 Chapter 655

    Chapter 655: Airy Loves Cakes


    ¡°I am back! And you haven¡¯t traveled that far! What happened?¡±


    When I return back to the circus, they haven¡¯t traveled far enough. The carriage should have at least get closer to the next city. Close enough for me to see it with my Divine Vision.


    But from where we are, it looks as if there hasn¡¯t been much progress during the travel. It¡¯s as if they only traveled for two days.


    ¡°Surprisingly, there are many bandits and monsters in the border between Rygis and Tatrama. I guess it¡¯s because no one is paying attention here. Once we arrive in the city, I¡¯ll investigate the lord. He should be the one responsible in clearing the bandits and monsters nearby,¡± Burnes exined.


    Too many bandits and monsters? Looking at everyone here doing fine, I guess those bandits and monsters are not a problem. But there were just so many of them.


    ¡°So, what happened to them?¡± I asked.


    ¡°We only captured the bandit leaders and some important-looking people. As for the rest of the bandits and the monsters, we killed them all. Can you take them to the prison? I want to know if they¡¯re just bandits or rted to the cult. Maybe we will encounter another cult member¡¯s recruitment again on the way,¡± Burnes said.


    .....


    That could be the case. In that case, we will encounter another master level mage.


    Just why do we suddenly have to meet more master level mages? And worse of all, none of them know where the leader of the cult is. Not even the location of that Archbishop of the cult.


    ¡°I guess it¡¯s a good thing I came here then. I have reached expert level in my air element so I want to test it on master level mages,¡± I said.


    ¡°But you don¡¯t need to do anything though,¡± Burnes said to me.


    ¡°Huh? Why?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Wendy is here with us. After that time you started cultivating and the wind mages are free to go wherever they want, we somehow met up with her again during our second encounter with bandits. And seeing that we are a good target for bandits, she thought that it¡¯s easier to find opponent bying along with us than looking for enemy by herself. That¡¯s why she¡¯s here. Though she¡¯s away at the moment. Probably destroying another bandit¡¯s hideout or something,¡± Burnes said.


    Really? Well, if she¡¯s here, I guess I don¡¯t need to do anything. If it¡¯s her, with the help of the others here, one or two master level mage won¡¯t be a problem.


    ¡°Ah. She¡¯s returning here now. If she¡¯s staying here, I¡¯ll go somewhere else then. Let¡¯s ask her first,¡± I said after seeing that Wendy is flying back here.


    Soon after, Wendy came and I asked her what she wants to do.


    ¡°I¡¯ll stay here and be the guard of this troupe. For some reason, this group is targeted by bandits easily. And it¡¯s easy for me to find opponent to test my strength,¡± Wendy said.


    ¡°Then I guess I¡¯ll go somewhere else and gain more poprity as living armor,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s a good idea. We don¡¯t want the cult to connect the living armor¡¯s rtionship with the circus, right? And you don¡¯t have to worry about the circus when I¡¯m here. Though if we¡¯re in a trouble that I can¡¯t solve it on my own, I¡¯ll get Sonia to contact you,¡± Wendy said.


    ¡°How is it, Airy? In the end, we will travel a lot,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re going to save people, right? You have told me about what you do. I don¡¯t expect that you will continue staying with the circus the whole time anyway. Knowing that you can use portal like that, you will surely move around more than Kron and my brother. It¡¯s fine. Though during your time as living armor, I will turn myself invisible,¡± Airy said.


    ¡°Cool. Let¡¯s do that. With that, we¡¯ll be leaving now. Our destination now is... Let¡¯s go to Consenza. We¡¯re going to cause ruckus there.¡±


    After telling Wendy and Burnes where I will be going, I opened a portal directly to where Lynn is. And I can see her in her bedroom taking a nap while hugging a stuffed toy.


    I should have gone to someone else. Though I didn¡¯t need to wait for long when Celestine entered Lynn¡¯s bedroom and take me out with her.


    ¡°You can freely walk around in the castle now?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m still a princess after all. I¡¯m the Empress¡¯ sister. Well, it¡¯s more like everyone here already know the truth. And I even have my own room here. Though the public doesn¡¯t know about me yet,¡± Celestine said.


    ¡°Okay. Do you have any information for me? For my act as the living armor?¡± I asked her as she brought me into her room in the castle.


    ¡°udia should have them. But she should be resting right now, so I suggest you toe back here tomorrow morning,¡± Celestine said.


    ¡°You... renovate your room a lot. No, it¡¯s not just your room. It¡¯s the whole castle. Did you make the hidden tunnel in the whole castle?¡± I asked after seeing what¡¯s inside her room.


    Not only in her room, there are also many other ces in the castle that is connected to hidden passage that I didn¡¯t see before. It should be Celestine who did it. Only she can renovate the castle easily.


    ¡°Yes. And only Lynn, udia, and I knows all the hidden passage in this castle. Well, you should know it as well. And I used magic strong enough to not let any expert level earth mage to detect them. Unless they are at least as strong as Ka, they won¡¯t be able to detect those passages,¡± Celestine said.


    Some of the passage lead to outside the castle. And most of them are connected to this passage here in Celestine¡¯s room. I guess it¡¯s for her so she can easily grab Lynn out of here in case of danger.


    ¡°Alright. Since there¡¯s nothing we can do now, Airy and I will leave today and enjoy the city. Do you want toe?¡± I asked Celestine.


    ¡°...You enjoying city just you enjoying the culinary of the city. I think you have eaten everything that is sold here. I¡¯ll pass. Airy, if you¡¯re bored of going to eat the whole time, you cane to me. There are things that only us girls can enjoy,¡± Celestine said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll go with Roy first. If I¡¯m bored as you say, I¡¯ll go to you,¡± Airy said.


    With that, Celestine just took Airy away from me. Not now though. But probably soon.


    ¡°Oh, right. Roy, if you meet any earth spirit and befriend it, I want you to let it stay with me,¡± Celestine said.


    ¡°It¡¯s not easy looking for spirits. And since you¡¯re an earth mage, I think you will be able to find it sooner than I could find it. How about checking the underground arena that Timmy built? Since he¡¯s an earth mage, maybe some earth spirits wille there,¡± I suggested.


    ¡°I¡¯ll tell Ka about it. I still can¡¯t leave Consenza. I want to build more passage here,¡± Celestine said.


    Just how much did she enjoy building a hidden passage? Well, if it was me, I think I would enjoy it as well. In fact, I would probably build an underground fortress if I¡¯m an earth mage.


    And I will be... The Mole King!


    Let¡¯s stop with that. I don¡¯t know how far my imagination will take me.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s enjoy the city for today. Celestine, we¡¯ll be back tomorrow. I¡¯ll be using one of the hidden passage because it seems to be more fun going there,¡± I said.


    ¡°Just use your portal. You¡¯re always childish in the weirdest way,¡± Celestine said.


    Why should I use a portal when there¡¯s an interesting passage that I want pass through?


    Well, this is also for Airy. She didn¡¯t show it but she seems excited about entering a hidden passage.


    The passages were made by Celestine¡¯s magic. And since she also capable in manipting metal, the passage seems to be strong enough to not get destroyed in case of a big explosion above. Maybe she could be a great architect if it¡¯s not a war time.


    We left the passage from an unused well in an empty alley. And after that, I entered the closest cake shop there.


    Airy can eat. And she¡¯s a girl. So, there¡¯s no way she doesn¡¯t want cake, right?


    ...One thing I didn¡¯t expect was that she ate more than me. And even though all those cakes should be much bigger than her, even one is already bigger than her, she ate them all and didn¡¯t change her size at all.


    ¡°That was delicious! They¡¯re cake? I like them!¡± Airy shouted.


    ¡°Then there are many other ces I can introduce you to. But you can only go there when someone is apanying you. Either me, Celestine, or someone I trust. And don¡¯t steal the cake even if you¡¯re invisible,¡± I warned Airy to not steal any cake.


    ¡°Why? I want to have them all and I don¡¯t have money. It¡¯s fine if they don¡¯t notice, right?¡± Airy said.


    ¡°That¡¯s fine only if the establishment is owned by bad guys. If you steal cake from the cake shop, the cake shop owner won¡¯t have any money to make more cakes. It¡¯s for the sake of cakes,¡± I said.


    ¡°For the sake of cakes. Then I¡¯ll hold back,¡± Airy said.


    ¡°And since you can¡¯t get full no matter how much you eat, if you be a bad girl, I will limit the amount of cake you eat. Do you understand?¡±


    ¡°For the sake of cake!¡± Airy shouted.


    Good thing I used Air Barrier to block the sound. Even though we¡¯re in a private room, we still need to make sure that no one can hear us. Even if we¡¯re just talking about cakes.


    Though I didn¡¯t expect Airy to love cake so much. And there are many other sweets I haven¡¯t introduce her yet.


    What about Breezy? Well, he might enjoy traveling more than eating. I¡¯ll leave him to Kron.

 Chapter 656

    Chapter 656: Spirits can Evolve?


    The day after we arrived in Consenza, we return back to the castle to meet Lynn and udia and ask them about anything that the living armor can do.


    ¡°So, are you a monster or not?¡± Lynn asked Airy after we meet her in her office.


    Although they have met before when I introduce Airy to Lynn, Lynn still asked Airy now whether she¡¯s a monster or not. Though that¡¯s something I don¡¯t know as well. But I just don¡¯t care.


    ¡°I¡¯m an air spirit. That¡¯s all I can say,¡± Airy said.


    ¡°That doesn¡¯t answer the question at all,¡± Lynn said.


    I wonder why Lynn is curious about it.


    ¡°Lynn, why are you curious about it? It¡¯s not like it matters if Airy is a monster, a spirit, an animal, or a human, right?¡± I asked.


    .....


    ¡°Actually, it matters. We have monster friends with us. And now, we have spirits. We can easily tell that Shelia, Graham, Arin, and the others are considered as monsters. But what about Airy and Breezy? I¡¯m asking because I don¡¯t know,¡± Lynn asked.


    But what does it matter?


    No, wait. This is Lynn. She might be weird and I consider her stupid from time to time. But once in a while, she¡¯s pretty sharp. There must be something that she can¡¯t exin it well. I just need to understand her.


    I looked at udia and Celestine who are also confused with Lynn¡¯s intention in asking that question. Though I¡¯m sure they are also confused and curious about whether Airy is a monster or not.


    What is it that makes a creature considered as monster? Can a human be considered as monster?


    They can. Like that Professor who experimented on children, he can be considered as monster. But that¡¯s not what Lynn¡¯s mean I¡¯m sure.


    Oh, magic! That¡¯s it!


    ¡°Lynn, are you actually asking if a tamer can tame a spirit like how they tame a monster? Or summoner can summon a spirit from Monsters World? And the spirits can be their familiars?¡± I asked Lynn.


    ¡°Yeah, right! That¡¯s what I¡¯m asking!¡± Lynn said.


    ¡°Now that you mention it. I think it will be troublesome if the cult¡¯s tamers or summoners have spirits as their familiars. Those spirits can be used to help their mages to improve their magic. Maybe they¡¯re the reason why the cult have so a lot of master level mage now,¡± I said


    I started thinking if there are spirits among the cult¡¯s monsters. And that scares me of how they can grow stronger.


    If it¡¯s just me or my friends, we can kill any average master level mages. But other people can¡¯t. It will be hard for them to do it. That¡¯s why it will be troublesome if the cult have a lot of spirits.


    ¡°...Now that we knew the existence of spirits, we need to have another countermeasure. We can¡¯t do anything about spirits who have made a contract with the cult or willingly join them. But we can do something about those who are still out there in the wild. I guess it¡¯s up to you, Roy. We need you to befriend as many spirits as you can find during your tour with the circus,¡± udia suggested.


    It was just luck that we could find Airy and Breezy. It¡¯s also because I am sensitive to the air around me that I can find them. But for spirits of other elements, it¡¯s better if other people with correspondent element can find them.


    ¡°Airy, do you know about other elemental spirit that exist?¡± I asked Airy.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know everything. But I guess there are spirits of each magical element. And at least I know that there are more air spirits than just me,¡± Airy said.


    ¡°So you have meet other air spirits?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Breezy was air spirit,¡± Airy said it casually.


    ¡°Wait, what!? Isn¡¯t he a wind spirit?¡±


    ¡°He is now. But he was an air spirit like me. But since he moves around so much, he became a wind spirit,¡± Airy said.


    ...So, because he was air spirit, and he moves around so much, he became wind spirit. Simply because wind is moving air.


    If that¡¯s the case, doesn¡¯t it mean that it¡¯s possible for my air magic to evolve into wind magic?


    Hmm... no. I like air magic as it is. But if I can use both air magic and wind magic, without having to lose my air magic, that would be perfect.


    Airy then told us how she met Breezy. It was just that they existed at the same ce. Back before they were being chased by Timmy for fun. That crazy Timmy who keeps annoying me even after death.


    Since they were together, they decided to call each other brother and sister. Though they were not alone. They also met other spirits in the past, Airy can¡¯t remember where they were. After all, it has been so long.


    ¡°Hmm... new information. udia, go tell the other kings about it. I will also try to find more spirits on the way. Share it with all the agents about the existence of spirits and if any of them could be found, try to make them our allies,¡± I said to udia.


    She then contacted Sonia and Sonia deliver the messages to not only the four kings, but also Yuria as well.


    ¡°Albert said that it¡¯s best for everyone to gather around again in two days. We can also introduce Yuria to the other kings as well as get Henry to introduce us to Varadis¡¯ soon-to-be king,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Let¡¯s do that. Now, udia, can you tell me if there are any bandits, monsters, or any wanted individuals that I can hunt?¡± I asked udia.


    ¡°Here¡¯s the list. There are also posters of wanted criminals as well whom we thought should be in Consenza. Though I don¡¯t know which area they are hiding,¡± udia said.


    She gives me a stack of documents. And I then split those information with Victoria who will act as another living armor who will move differently from me. She will be apanied with Ray so she can use Aura a bit.


    ¡°Okay. Airy, are you sure you want toe with me? It will get bloody wherever I go,¡± I said.


    I don¡¯t want to force her toe with me when I¡¯m killing people. That¡¯s why I asked her.


    ¡°I¡¯m fine. Though I still want to eat more cakes,¡± Airy replied.


    ¡°More of them? Why can¡¯t you feel full!? It¡¯s bad for my money if you keep eating,¡± I said.


    Well, then it¡¯s time for me to leave. I get Victoria and Ray transported with a portal to somewhere far from the capital of Consenza, while I will travel mainly around the capital and the neighboring cities.


    Celestine is busy with renovating the castle with a lot of hidden passages so she won¡¯te. And with just her in the castle, the Empress will be safe.


    And when I was about to leave, like usual, jumping out of the window, I see a girl is hurriedly running here. Toward Lynn¡¯s office.


    ¡°Oh, someone ising,¡± I said casually.


    I heard that everyone here should know who I am already. So, I don¡¯t need to hide. And if it¡¯s someone who doesn¡¯t know me, that means they are enemies. Let¡¯s see how she will react.


    Without even knocking, the girl entered the office. Is that how you should act in front of your leader?


    ¡°Excuse me, your majesty! There¡¯s an emergency! Wait, an intruder!? An intruder is here! Who are you!?¡±


    Whoa, she doesn¡¯t know me? Well, even if she knows that I¡¯m Roy that their Empress is talking about, it¡¯s not like they know my appearance. No one has a painting of my face. It¡¯s normal that they don¡¯t know me.


    ¡°I¡¯m your Empress¡¯ future brother-inw,¡± I said.


    Though it¡¯s not a lie. Celestine said that she¡¯ll be my lover in the future. When she can feel that children will be able to live in peace.


    ¡°Empress¡¯ brother-inw? Oh, I¡¯ve heard it before. So you¡¯re Roy,¡± the girl said.


    I guess she¡¯s not an enemy. But has it been spread that I¡¯m going to be Lynn¡¯s brother-inw in the future?


    ¡°When I asked Lynn why she hasn¡¯t find any marriage candidate, she said that I also don¡¯t have one so I need to get married first. And I told her that I¡¯ll be your wife in the future. I guess she spread it then,¡± Celestine said casually.


    Probably Lynn spread it when she¡¯s drunk or something. I can see her looking at me with anger. Just stop being a spoiled little sister, will you? Your big sister is free to do anything she wants.


    ¡°Anyway, what¡¯s the emergency?¡± udia asked.


    ¡°There¡¯s a rebellion near the capital! The Duke started a rebellion and they are moving here!¡± the girl said.


    A rebellion? During a war against the cult?


    Hmm... I have never heard of any rebellion in my past life. But at that time, information from another country is hard to get.


    Well, I guess this is also a good chance for the living armor to make his move. Stopping a rebellion will surely increase the reputation of the living armor.


    Then, let¡¯s stop the rebellion.

 Chapter 657

    Chapter 657: Rebellion in Consenza


    ¡°A rebellion! It¡¯s time for me to shine,¡± I said.


    This is a rebellion by the duke of Consenza, so the scale should be quite big. And that means if I intervene, the fame of the living armor will be spread. And the cult wille out to hunt me.


    It¡¯s a good chance that I won¡¯t miss. Or at least that¡¯s what I nned.


    ¡°No, Roy. You won¡¯t participate in fighting against the rebellion,¡± Lynn said.


    ¡°Huh? Why?!¡± Iined.


    ¡°Because this is my matter. The Empire¡¯s problem. And you¡¯re not even a citizen of the empire,¡± Lynn said.


    And then, udia exined further.


    .....


    ¡°Roy, you¡¯re not a citizen of the empire. And this is a matter that the empire needs to take care without outside help. Not even Tatrama, Arturo, or Varadis will be allowed to help unless we asked for it. Just us. You can continue hunt for other smaller scale crimes, but rebellion is not for you,¡±udia exined.


    It¡¯s not just because I¡¯m not a citizen. There are many other factors.


    Why the duke started the rebellion? Why the duke targeting the Empress? Why at this time when everyone knows that we¡¯re fighting the cult? What is it that they are dissatisfied with that lead to a rebellion? There are many questions. But those questions can only be answered if the Empress takes care of it without outsider¡¯s help.


    ¡°Sigh... I guess I won¡¯t participate then. Though if the cult has an active role in the rebellion, I will participate whether you want to or not. We have openly said that we¡¯re fighting the cult. But those idiots started rebellion at this time. Which mean it¡¯s highly likely that they are rted to the cult,¡± I said.


    ¡°Sure. If that¡¯s the case, we will ask not only for your help. But we will also ask for the others¡¯ help as well. Though this is unlikely to be rted to the cult,¡± Lynn said.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s hear more about this. She hasn¡¯t said anything other than there¡¯s a rebellion,¡± Celestine said.


    Oh, right. We only heard that there¡¯s a rebellion.


    We asked the girl to tell us more about it.


    So, the Duke has started a rebellion in a nearby city. Many members of aristocracy also joined him marching toward the capital.


    For what reason are they rebelling?


    Apparently, the Duke has been extremely disappointed by the Empress, Lynn. It¡¯s because all of his effort to put her into a political marriage with him, who already has a son older than Lynn herself, failed. And it¡¯s not just once. But many times.


    Just how much does he wants to be an Emperor? What an annoying guy.


    ¡°So, because he keeps getting rejected, he asked you to marry his son instead. But you still reject him. And that ends up with him making up some lies to take the throne by force instead. Asking other nobles for help in spreading lies to the citizens that Lynn is doing a terrible job when in fact it¡¯s all their fault. Like raising the taxes or making it harder for the people to live in their territory. They med it all on you. How stupid,¡± I said.


    Although it¡¯s stupid, it makes sense. I have never heard of any news of rebellion or coup from Consenza in my past life. Which could mean that the coup was sessful seeing how there are too little cooperation between countries. And the new Emperor who doesn¡¯t know about the cooperation with other countries ended up getting his empire taken by the cult before anything could happen.


    Well, I¡¯m not sure yet if that¡¯s what happened. But it¡¯s more likely to be that way.


    And the duke, although he has terrible personality and obvious desire to be the emperor, he¡¯s ruling his territory well. That¡¯s why Lynn hasn¡¯t purged him yet even after investigating him. Since she thought that he won¡¯t cause any rebellion. But she ended up wrong.


    ¡°Well, the information about other countries from my past life was extremely limited. There¡¯s not even TV broadcast or anything that can spread information quickly. Probably the kings received information from the agents, but those reports were not told to public. That¡¯s why I never heard of any rebellion or coup at all.¡±


    That¡¯s what I said after Celestine asked me if I know something about the rebellion. Though in my past life, the strength of the mages in the army is much weaker than it is now since I and the others have helped with their improvement.


    There are too many things that have affected the future. It¡¯s no longer the same. We can¡¯t count on my past life anymore.


    There are many amazing people who haven¡¯t even born today. Or maybe they have already born, but they¡¯re still a baby. I don¡¯t know.


    Victoria didn¡¯t exist back then. And Marie is mentally ill and died so she can¡¯t invent more amazing inventions. Too many things changed.


    Maybe there weren¡¯t even any rebellion in the past. And I made it this way now.


    But I don¡¯t care. It¡¯s the present that I need to take care of. Not my past life.


    ¡°Well, since there hasn¡¯t been any information about the cult¡¯s role in this rebellion, I will leave and take care of other things. If you need anything, just call me through Sonia. Though tomorrow or the day after, I will return to Tatrama for the circus. Hopefully you won¡¯t need my help during the show. Then, I¡¯ll be leaving now,¡± I said.


    Instead of the window or the door, I walked to the bookshelf.


    ¡°Where are you going? The window is over there. And you can leave with your portal,¡± Lynn asked me.


    ¡°Through the hidden passage! See you!¡±


    I¡¯m having fun walking through the hidden passage with Airy. There¡¯s no way I would miss it.


    As for the rebellion, as Lynn said, she will take care of it. Though I think if the cult is rted to the rebellion, she won¡¯t tell me unless it¡¯s really impossible for her to win. But the empire has Celestine. The strongest earth mage under master level. Even if the opponent is a master level mage, Celestine can kill her.


    I¡¯d like to find an earth spirit who will join us. That way, Celestine and the other earth mages can grow stronger faster. I hope we find one.


    Oh, right. What about Albert? He said that there will be a meeting in a few days to discuss about spirits. But there¡¯s a rebellion here.


    Well, udia should have informed Albert about it. And if the meeting is dyed, Sonia will inform me. I can only wait.


    And I need to inform Victoria to not do anything to the rebellion yet. I did that while we¡¯re walking in the hidden passage.


    The exit of the passage is in the basement of an inn. It¡¯s probably an inn owned by an agent or something.


    Well, I won¡¯te up to the inn and tell the owner that I came from the castle. I just used a portal here and leave the capital.


    The capital is busy with the rebellion, so it¡¯s best to take care of the small things away from it.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s go then. We don¡¯t really have any destination. Just us looking for enemies randomly. Airy, which way do you want to go?¡± I asked Airy after we used a portal to leave the capital.


    ¡°To the cake shop!¡± Airy shouted excitedly.


    ¡°You still want to eat more? What if you actually ended up being fat? Rejected. Let¡¯s just walk around randomly,¡± I said.


    Then I activated the magic item and wear the armor. Living armor is back in action!


    Hmm? Is that the rebels? I guess we ended up transporting to somewhere close to where the rebels are. Let¡¯s watch them for a bit and see if there are any cult members hiding among the rebels or not.


    Well, probably there are some. But the rebellion might not be instigated by the cult and those cult members only joining the rebellion for personal reason.


    So, even if I see any members of the cult among the rebels, I won¡¯t do anything until Lynn asked for my help.


    From what I can see, there¡¯s no cult members or master level mages among the rebels. I guess Consenza won¡¯t ask for any help anytime soon so I left after watching the rebels for a bit longer.


    And since I¡¯m a living armor now, it¡¯s best to not kill any monsters I find. I need to make my move where other people can see, so probably in a city or a vige.


    I run in the forest and after a while, I can see a vige. And when I was about to look if there¡¯s any wanted individuals byparing them to the wanted posters I received from udia, Sonia suddenly appears in front of me.


    ¡°What is it, Sonia?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Because of the rebellion, the meeting will be dyed. It will be dyed until the rebellion is over, or there¡¯s an even more important matter that need to be taken care of,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°And do you think there¡¯s an even more important matter than a rebellion? Just how calm are they? The are also leaders of their own country,¡± I sighed hearing how calm they are.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s just a rebellion not rted to the cult. Probably, Celestine alone can take care of everything. That¡¯s what Albert said.¡±


    Well, I hope Lynn can take care of the rebellion sooner. I don¡¯t like it when innocent people be victims. I hope the stupid rebels will all die. Or at least captured. Let¡¯s just believe in Lynn and Celestine.


    And so, I acted as the living armor and helped many people for the rest of the day. There¡¯s nothing worth mentioning during this time.

 Chapter 658

    Chapter 658: Another Annoying Problem in the Next City


    This time, we¡¯re back to Tatrama for the circus. Thomas and the others have arrived at the next city and we will performter tonight. And my activity as the living armor will be paused for a while.


    As for the rebellion, I think it¡¯s still ongoing for some reason. I don¡¯t know why though. Because I think just Celestine alone should be enough to handle everything. Or at least she can defeat the rebels¡¯ strongest mages on her own.


    And because the rebellion is not over, the meeting between kings will be dyed once again. It will be a while until Yuria can be introduced to the other kings.


    I have taken care of many people on the list that was given to me from udia. Those people were all criminals that the living armor captured. At least those who are near the capital. As for the rest, I don¡¯t know. I can take my time since none of them seem to be dangerous criminal that specifically needs me to defeat them. I think the guards who have been instructed on how to get stronger are enough to arrest those criminals.


    That¡¯s why I cane back to the circus without thinking much about them. Though Victoria is still with Ray patrolling Consenza. I don¡¯t know where they are now. And if I need them, I can summon them back here.


    ¡°So, is there anything wrong in this city?¡±


    After I checked the city casually with my Divine Vision, I asked Burnes if there¡¯s something wrong with the city.


    .....


    ¡°I said it before right? There were too many bandits and monsters on the way. That¡¯s why our journey got dyed and we can only arrive now. Apparently, the lord of this city is azy man who live the life of debauchery. He doesn¡¯t even have the money for sending the troops to clear the way. And the guild is not maintained as well since the guild leader is a corrupt man who spends money to bribe the lord so he can do anything he wants,¡± Burnes exined.


    ¡°...How the hell is this city still standing?¡± I asked.


    ¡°There are some influential people among the citizen. Someone is even suspected to be a mage around expert level. So it¡¯s probably that mage who protected the city from the outside attack,¡± Burnes exined.


    ¡°And now what? Do we even have the permission to perform in this city?¡± I asked Burnes.


    ¡°Yes we have.¡±


    But before Burnes could answer, the answere from a different person. It was Thomas who answered it.


    ¡°We have? Performing in a city of a corrupt lord? How much do we have to pay?¡±


    Since the corrupt lord loves money and women, at least ording to what Burnes told me, that guy must be thinking that he can earn more money if he let us y. Probably even some percentage of the ie we receive in this city.


    ¡°Just seventy percent of the ie here,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°Seventy percent!? That¡¯s a lot! Even if all the members of the circus doesn¡¯t need money except for you, that¡¯s still a lot to take!¡± I said.


    Yes, our circus doesn¡¯t even need to get paid. They were all agents. They have regr ie that as long as they can return to their country, they can get all the money whenever they want.


    Being an agent mean they will risk their live the whole time during a mission. And that¡¯s why they got paid handsomely. At least it should be higher than the sry of regr guards. Or even captain of the guards like Hill.


    What¡¯s important for an agent is their loyalty. Even if we get agents from other different countries staying in one ce, none of them were thinking of betraying their own country.


    As for me, I¡¯m already much richer than Thomas. That¡¯s why except for Thomas, the rest of us doesn¡¯t need to get paid. But we still get paid normally thanks to Thomas generosity.


    Though in this situation, I think it¡¯s fine to not get paid. All the money should either enter Thomas¡¯ pocket or for maintaining the circus. Like the tents, the props for the performance, and for our supply for the next journey.


    ¡°But is it fine to pay him that much? Won¡¯t it be suspicious? We can just leave this city and travel to the next one where we don¡¯t need to pay the corrupt lord so much,¡± I said.


    ¡°We can. But Burnes said that there are some things he wants to investigate in this city. And that lord, at first he asked for ny percent. I reduced it to seventy after negotiation, so it¡¯s still fine. I feel bad that I can¡¯t pay you though,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. We don¡¯tck money after all. And those money can be used to maintain the circus. We¡¯re here for a more important job than money,¡± Burnes said. And I agree with him.


    ¡°Right! It¡¯s to make peopleugh!¡± I said confidently.


    ¡°...We¡¯re here for two things which are more important than money. Laughter and investigation,¡± Burnes said.


    Wait, he didn¡¯t think of make the peopleugh? He¡¯s a failure of an entertainer. As expected, I¡¯m the best entertainer here.


    In the end, we will perform in this city with so little ie. But there¡¯s another problem.


    ¡°Hey, if the lord is corrupt, that means the citizens need to pay unreasonably high amount of taxes, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. The taxes here is abnormally high,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Then how do we get audience? Do you think there¡¯s anyone here stupid enough to spend more money for an entertainment? For the low or mid-ss citizens, they will need to consider if it¡¯s worth it to watch the circus or not. And they are our target audience. Not the higher-ss citizen who are rich and notcking in entertainment. Those people thinks that circus is useless after all. So, I don¡¯t think there will be any audienceing,¡± I said.


    ¡°...In the end, we will make the poor people poorer if theye, huh? I guess forcing Thomas to set up a show here is wrong. We should have just left the city and let some people investigate. But we will have an obstacle if we do investigation because the people here, especially those who are under the lord, will be suspicious of neer in the city. That¡¯s why we need the circus,¡± Burnes said.


    I see. So, if there are neer in the city, and there¡¯s a circus, those who are suspicious of us will think that we are members of the circus.


    But why do we have to go that far?


    ...Don¡¯t tell me.


    ¡°Burnes. This is still a city in Tatrama. There should be an agent or two in this city, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. But we have never received any reports from the agents we sent here. Neither from the agents in the past, nor those we recently sent. And we don¡¯t know if they are still alive or not,¡± Burnes said.


    Apparently, they also sent an expert level mage, who carried a pendant filled with Sonia¡¯s soil so he can contact Sonia. But that agent disappeared together with Sonia¡¯s soil. Just how did they make soil disappear? Or maybe the soil lost its magic so Sonia can¡¯t detect it?


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll check the city again with my Divine Vision. And since the expert level mage you sent disappeared, we can assume that the enemy is at least at that level or stronger. If it¡¯s a master level mage, that mage should notice that I¡¯m looking. I¡¯ll also check if there¡¯s anyone who is being imprisoned,¡± I said.


    I was about to leave when Burnes stopped me. There¡¯s another important thing he needs to tell me.


    ¡°What is it, Burnes?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I just want to warn you that there¡¯s a high chance that the agents somehow joined with the lord. After hearing that there¡¯s a rebellion in Consenza at this time, there¡¯s no reason that our country won¡¯t experience the same. And if there¡¯s an agent who colluded with the lord, it will be bad because they will have a lot of information about the kingdom. There are too many things to investigate that I don¡¯t think you who can see everything will be enough to do it alone. And we can¡¯t send agents from Tatrama because they might recognize us. Those of us from Tatrama will stay here disguising ourselves as performers and hoping that they won¡¯t recognize us,¡± Burnes said.


    Hmm? I see. So that¡¯s why there are less people here. And those who left are agents from other countries. They are investigating the city.


    ¡°Then I think I don¡¯t need to check everything. I¡¯ll just check if there are any master level mage or not. If not, I can freely move,¡± I said.


    ¡°Be careful, Roy,¡± Wendy said.


    Since there¡¯s a chance that the enemy has a former agent from Tatrama, Wendy who was also an agent can¡¯t freely move. She can only pretend to be a part of the circus here.


    I used my Divine Vision as I run in the sky above the city, and see that there¡¯s no one who notices me. It¡¯s now time for me to move on my own then.

 Chapter 659

    Chapter 659: very Exists Here


    No one notices me looking at them. Which mean that there¡¯s no master level mage in this ce. That¡¯s good. The others can take care of themselves.


    The lord of the city is corrupt. He raises the taxes and epted bribes. He then used the money to buy ves.


    That¡¯s right. very exists here. That¡¯s what I found from my Divine Vision.


    I don¡¯t remember any people from nobility except for Sara who I just recently learned to be one. But from the look of it, deep in the slum, there are many rich-looking people entering a small building.


    The building is small, but that¡¯s only the outer appearance. There¡¯s basement under the building. It¡¯s sorge that it was built outside from that building. Even some part of the basement is actually outside the slum. Which can only mean the lord agreed to the building of such basement.


    There are may rich-looking people there. And I can see that there¡¯s a ve auction happening right now.


    It¡¯s still bright outside. And seeing how they can let the ve auction to happen at this time tells me how corrupt the lord here is.


    .....


    So many rich peopleing means that he also have sponsors. And there¡¯s no agents that Albert can receive reports from. This is one annoying situation.


    But how do those ves just obey order? They wore the cor, but the Magic Restricting cor is only to restrain someone to make them unable to use magic. Is there any other cor that forces the wearer to obey order from their master?


    Maybe that¡¯s the case. Maybe the agents sent here were all captured somehow and be ves. If that¡¯s the case, maybe the circus members will be captured and enved as well if we make a mistake.


    Well, even if we do, I can just release them with my strength. For now, let¡¯s investigate the lord of this ce.


    Looking at the city, I can tell which one is the ce where the lord lives. The biggest mansion here.


    I looked there with my Divine Vision and I can see him being surrounded by women. They were all naked even though it¡¯s broad daylight.


    Oh, wait. I just looked at them with my see-through vision so they¡¯re all naked. They¡¯re actually dressed. Though the women are wearing revealing clothes.


    Those women are all beauty. But what impresses me the most was the man, the lord of this ce. He is actually not fat.


    I thought that the lord of this ce who loves the life of debauchery would be a fat one. Just like that king of small kingdom that got his whole territory taken by Lynn. I was wrong.


    He seems to be working out a lot. Which mean he is quite strong. At leastpared to average people. None of us in the circus are average.


    Hmm... seeing the beautiful women around him, I¡¯m a bit worried about our female circus members. Let¡¯s discuss it with Burnes and the others then.


    I returned back to where the others are and told them about what I found.


    ¡°very? I see. Maybe they are trying to see how desperate we are with money. And since we epted his offer, they will make their move. They will probably capture some of us to be ves to be sold. Either forcefully or they will try to bribe us,¡± Burnes said.


    That¡¯s also what I thought what the corrupt lord will do. We will be sold as ves.


    ¡°What!? I¡¯m sorry everyone. If only I refused his offer, none of you will experience this,¡± Thomas apologized as he thought that he¡±s the one responsible for it.


    ¡°No, it¡¯s not your fault. It¡¯s my fault that I asked you to do our show here no matter what,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Yes. Let¡¯s me it all on Burnes. Though isn¡¯t it fine? The lord seems to take a liking to women. All the women in his mansion wore that cor that forces people to obey their master. Since we will have less money, we can just let the women leave the circus,¡± I suggested.


    ¡°Yeah. Let¡¯s do it as Roy said. The women will leave the circus and won¡¯t perform in this city. Don¡¯t enter the city and instead, move away from there. And once you¡¯re away, Roy will use portal so you can go somewhere else,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Why? We¡¯re not that weak. We can take care of ourselves. We won¡¯t get enved easily,¡± the female air mage from the circus asked.


    ¡°Roy, how do they treat the ves?¡± Burnes asked.


    Why is he asking me that? And how do I know the answer?


    Oh, wait. He¡¯s going to make the women leave the circus. Now I know the answer.


    ¡°They separate the male and female ves. And you suggested the women to leave so us men, at least a few of us, will purposely get captured and be enved. Am I right?¡± I asked Burnes.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. If that ve Cor forces the wearer to obey the master, it will be bad for us if we get caught. The women, we can expect on what those people will do to you. As for the men, we will most likely be used asbor forces. And if Roy get captured, I think he can avoid being forced to wear the cor. Or he can easily rip it off. What do you think, Roy?¡± Burnes asked.


    ¡°So I have no choice but to get captured? Well, I need to test it first. I¡¯ll sneak into the slum and get some cors before I return and test it. Good thing those cors are ck. I can swap them with Blobbies if I need to,¡± I said.


    Then we proceed to make a n.


    Basically, the n is to let the girls leave. And we will let some men to be purposely caught. Including me.


    Though I need to test if Aura can be used to protect myself from that cor or not. If I can¡¯t, then we need to swap the cors that will be wrapped around our necks with Blobbies. And then, there¡¯s only our acting skill left.


    After getting caught, Burnes and the others will try to get information from other ves, and see if they can find other agents who might be captured. While I just need to protect the ves.


    After we agree with the n, I left to get some cors to test on.


    This is sneak mission. To make sure that we sessfullyplete this mission, I need Spot¡¯s help.


    It¡¯s been a while that I asked for his help. And when I asked it, he dly epted it. And he wrapped around my waist like a belt and used his camouge skill so we can sneak into the slum.


    It¡¯s not hard for me to avoid expert level mages who can sense Spot¡¯s camouge skill. Though there doesn¡¯t seem to be many of them. And we entered the ce where they store a lot of ve Cors.


    Is the lord has someone who can mass-produce these cors? That guy is dangerous.


    And what if these cors can actually stop Aura users from doing anything? Forcing me to obey the one who will be appointed as my master?


    I need to get rid of all of them. Or maybe I can use them for my sake. Well, I¡¯ll think about itter.


    Good thing the cors are ck in color. So I swapped some Blobbies with the real cors. Though I make them to be slightly torn in case they were used. That way, if the cor doesn¡¯t work, they will think that it¡¯s because of the damage.


    But before testing it, I need to get it appraised first. So I brought the cors to Cassau to get them appraised. And during that time, the female members of the circus, including Wendy, should be leaving.


    We told them to make a scene of them, and some male members as well, that they hated the idea of getting lower ie so they left the circus. Though we will be reunited in the next city.


    The appraisal is done. And I returned back to the circus and told Burnes and the others about the cors.


    ¡°So, someone needs to pour magic into the cor first to be recognized as the master. And the wearer will obey the word of the one who is recognized as the master. And if they don¡¯t obey, they will be stabbed by the needlesing out of the cor from around their neck until they obey. And if they keep disobeying the order, their head will be cut off,¡± Burnes repeated what I told him about the effect of the cor.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. For now, I¡¯m going to test it on someone else before testing it on myself. Any volunteer?¡± I asked.


    Now we are testing the cor¡¯s effect. If my Aura can be suppressed by that cor, it will be hard for me to pretend to be a ve. That¡¯s why we need to test it. But I¡¯m testing it on someone first.


    And the one who volunteered was Burnes. Well, let¡¯s see how it goes.

 Chapter 660

    Chapter 660: Testing the ve Cors


    We tested the ve cor on Burnes who volunteered to be the first one to be tested. As for the master, someone else in the circus will do it.


    I can¡¯t be the master. Because as the master, I can freely gives order to the ve. There¡¯s no point in testing if that¡¯s the case. That¡¯s why someone else is the master.


    ¡°Burnes. No matter what kind of order you were given, try your best to not do it. You should feel some pain. But just endure it until you can¡¯t take it anymore,¡± I said to Burnes.


    He replied with a nod. And then the master gave him an order to jump on the spot.


    At first, Burnes didn¡¯t do anything. Then I can see him suddenly feel pain and his hands are reaching his neck.


    With my Divine Vision, I can see that there¡¯s needlesing out of the cor and they are stabbing around his neck. It looks like Victoria¡¯s transformation. Because when I checked the cor using Divine Vision, there were no needle at all.


    Burnes endured the pain a little longer, but the longer he endure the pain, the longer the needle will be.


    .....


    ¡°Burnes, that¡¯s enough! Endure it any longer and the needles will kill you!¡± I warned Burnes.


    Burnes then jumped on the spot as blood is flowing down from his neck. That must be painful. Let¡¯s use painkiller gas on him. Also, it¡¯s a good thing that there¡¯s a healer in the circus. And he¡¯s a male member, so he¡¯s not leaving with the girls. Though there are some men who left with the girls as well.


    There¡¯s no need for surgery as Burnes¡¯ wound is healed right away with healing magic. And I stopped using the painkiller gas.


    ¡°I guess if they are afraid of death, the ves will keep obeying order. But this also means that if the master gives an order that the ves absolutely refuse to do, the ves can choose to die instead of doing it. Which mean the master of the ves is smart enough to not give an order that those ves will refuse,¡± I said.


    Burnes then nodded. And he then grabbed the cor on her neck as he tries to rip it apart. It¡¯s locked and I don¡¯t have the key for it. But with Blobbies and Victoria, it¡¯s easy to unlock the cor.


    I have called Victoria here and told her about what¡¯s going on. It¡¯s because we need her to unlock the cors when we don¡¯t have the key.


    Though if it¡¯s me, I think I can easily rip those cors apart with my strength.


    Burnes tried as hard as possible. Even though he trained his body more than most mages, his strength is not enough to take the cor off. But I think a master level mage can do it.


    ¡°Good thing I stole a lot of those. I¡¯ll remove that one and we¡¯ll do another test,¡± I said.


    I used my strength to remove the cor. Even without Aura, it¡¯s still manageable. But using Aura is much easier.


    Which mean this cors won¡¯t work against Aura user. That¡¯s good.


    After finding out about these ve cors, I thought that the cult might have some items that can restrict the use of Aura. Some sort of Aura or magic item. But because it¡¯s not, we¡¯re still fine.


    Still, I need to be careful in case I encounter such item. If such thing exist, that will be dangerous for me who depends so much on using Aura.


    If that happens, then before my magic is sealed, I need to summon my familiars and ask for help. I also need to continue to train my body so I will be strong even without Aura. I think reaching master level mage will help. But that might take a long time to happen.


    Anyway, the ve cor is easy to remove. Even after I wore it on my neck, when I disobeyed Burnes who was supposed to be the master of the cor, I can also use Aura to protect my neck from getting stabbed. No matter how long I disobeyed, I don¡¯t need to worry about getting stabbed.


    Removing it was easy as well. I can either use my strength or use Victoria and transform her into a key. Which mean I need her to be by my side the whole time. But that¡¯s fine. It¡¯s not like just by going around as living armor, we can gain the cult¡¯s attention right away.


    ¡°Alright. The test is over and the result is good. I¡¯ll go get the girls far from here. I¡¯ll bring them to Albert and told him about what happened in this city,¡± I said to Burnes.


    Albert had cleaned the nobles. But maybe he only remove those who are rted to the cult. If the lord in this city is not rted to the cult, it¡¯s natural that Albert didn¡¯t think that this city has a problem.


    Maybe he asked the lord if he¡¯s rted to the cult. And he knows the truth that the lord really is not rted at all. That¡¯s why he left the lord alone since he¡¯s not investigating corrupt nobles.


    After meeting the girls, I brought them to Albert. They have asked Sonia to tell Albert about the city, but hearing it from the agents directly should be better for Albert.


    Maybe he will ask me to bring him there with portal and surprise the lord. Or maybe just a messenger like what previously happened in Rygis where I brought Sara with my portal.


    I returned to where Burnes and the others are. And we¡¯re now preparing to raise the tent for the show when someone uninvitede in.


    ¡°Hey! I see that the girls are leaving! Why? Why can¡¯t they stay?¡±


    He is wearing uniform of the guard. And he asked why the girls are leaving.


    ¡°Oh, I¡¯m sorry. It¡¯s becausetely, we haven¡¯t gotten enough audienceing and we don¡¯t have much ie to pay for everyone. Even in the previous city, we barely had enough to buy supply to travel here,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°Huh? And now that there are no more girls, there will only be fewer audience. Good luck! I bet your show is shitty anyway,¡± the guy then left.


    Thomas is good. Is quick-witted and told a lie easily. But he¡¯s also the weakest. We shouldn¡¯t bring him here carelessly.


    ¡°Thomas. I¡¯ll arrange it so Spot will be with you at all time. Spot, make sure to protect him in case of danger,¡± I said to Spot.


    ¡°Sure.¡±


    He has been with me since our sneak raid into the slum to steal the cors. And he hasn¡¯t left. So I asked him to protect Thomas.


    Our n is to get captured by the people here. Either by walking around, or through some other means.


    Though the one that needs to be captured the most will be me since it will be easier for me if I enter the slum and remove the cors from other ves. Other than me should be Burnes. The only agent from Tatrama who is still staying in the circus.


    The rest of the agents, even the men, also left with the women. And Burnes said he has some kind of reputation as well, so other agents should know his appearance.


    If the agents who were sent here were enved, they should know Burnes. That¡¯s why Burnes needs to get captured.


    As for the rest, they will improvise. Either escaping or get captured as well.


    ¡°Oh, there¡¯s another good idea,¡± I suddenly realized that there¡¯s a better idea than walking around without purpose and just wait to get captured.


    ¡°What is it?¡± Burnes asked.


    ¡°Thomas. I need you to sell us as ves,¡± I suggested to Thomas.


    ¡°Selling you guys?¡± Thomas is confused hearing my suggestion.


    ¡°Exactly as I said. Let¡¯s say that you regretted making a circus perform here and decided to get drunk in a bar. There, you will say that you wish that you can sell us for money. Maybe one of the ve merchant will hear it. And you will suggest me, Burnes, and some other members with strong body so they will make us into ves thinking that we¡¯re good forbor works,¡± I said.


    ¡°I see. Not only Thomas will be safer, he can also get money. And we can pretend that we¡¯re sleeping when they captured us. So, who will be captured?¡± Burnes asked.


    Whoever want to get captured, they will be free anyway. So I suggested that they keep their consciousness at all time, and use the Blobbies I gave them and transform them into something that will protect their neck. But they need to do it swiftly right before they put the cor around them.


    As for me, I don¡¯t need any. Though I already have Victoria.


    ¡°If you all agree to it, then I will do it. But I need you to perform well tonight. We have a show to do,¡± Thomas said.


    That¡¯s right. To make it more convincing, Thomas needs to act after at least one show. And tonight, I don¡¯t think there will be many audienceing. So he can get drunk at the bar after the show. I don¡¯t need to worry since Spot is with him.


    Though there¡¯s one thing I¡¯m worried about. They said that there¡¯s one influential expert level mage in this city, right? Is he a ve?


    If he¡¯s not a ve and he knows the very that happens in this city, he¡¯s an enemy. I hope that¡¯s not the case.

 Chapter 661

    Chapter 661: Captured on Purpose


    Finally, the circus started its show tonight. And as expected there were less people in the audience than usual. In fact, there are too many open seats.


    And surprisingly, the lord of this city is also here. Along with some of the female ves he brought here. I bet they didn¡¯t pay for the ticket.


    As a professional entertainers, we didn¡¯t hold back at all in our performances. And we managed to get the audience, no matter how few they are, tough. Including the lord of the city. Though I¡¯d like to kill him right now.


    The women he brought with him looked nervous the whole time. I guess they¡¯re all acting to not get the lord sees them in a bad mood or they will get punished.


    ...Oh, shit. Some of the women are pregnant. Damn it. They will be born fatherless. At least I hope their mother can raise them properly. Or if they can¡¯t, the children will enter a good orphanage at least.


    Do they know that they¡¯re pregnant? Maybe some of them do. But they endured their hatred or they will die getting their head decapitated by those ve cors.


    The ve cors they wore are not seen openly. They are being covered by scarf or other clothing essories. Though I can see them just fine.


    .....


    No matter how angry I am, during the show, I must not show it. I have to bring the best of my performance as always and make everyoneugh. Even if it¡¯s just for a few seconds, those who were enved or have their beloved captured canugh.


    I wonder what the lord is doing. Why is he doing all of this? Why very? Why bribes? Just how much money does he need? How much ves does he want until he is satisfied?


    The answer? I won¡¯t care. He¡¯s a bad guy. Let¡¯s kill him.


    Though until we can find all the answer, we need to continue our act. I hope our n will go smoothly.


    The show is over. And everyone left the seat except for the lord and his harem of ves. Even when we left the stage and enter the backstage, he was still there. Though there are some people entering the tent without paying the ticket after the show is over.


    ¡°Oh, seems like it¡¯s getting interesting. The lord is waiting in his seat. He¡¯s probably trying to scout some people from the circus and turn them into ves.¡±


    That¡¯s what I¡¯m thinking when I¡¯m looking at the lord. And my guess is probably not wrong.


    ¡°Really? Don¡¯t tell me that he forced the circus to pay so much so we won¡¯t make enough for the show and he wille here to ask Thomas to sell some members to him. I guess that¡¯s not entirely impossible. If so, we don¡¯t need to get Thomas to pretend to get drunk at a bar. Roy, tell us if he¡¯s making his move,¡± Burnes said.


    Thomas who heard it then prepared his line. It¡¯s like we¡¯re in a show after a show. But this time, Thomas is the most important actor. He needs to convince the lord that he will sell some of us.


    So, the people who will be sold are me, one of the strongmen from Consenza, another clown from Varadis, and Burnes who will be the representative from Tatrama. There won¡¯t be anyone from Arturo because there¡¯s only one of them here and he will stay with Thomas. Protecting him while acting as his assistant.


    Though I already had Spot protecting him. Thomas is safe.


    ¡°Oh, the lord is making his move. Anyway, do you know his name?¡± I asked Burnes.


    ¡°I¡¯ll only tell you only this once and I think you will forget it. His name is Randy,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°I see. I¡±ll call him Corrupt Lord instead,¡± I said.


    ¡°See? You don¡¯t even care about his name,¡± Burnes said.


    He¡¯s someone who will die soon. Why should I care?


    Soon after, Corrupt Lord came to the backstage along with the men who have just entered after the show is over. I guess it¡¯s for intimidation.


    ¡°That was an amazing performance! Especially that clown rence. I like him! Tommy, I have something I want to talk with you. Get everyone leave the tent,¡± Corrupt Lord said inmanding tone.


    Just because he¡¯s going to talk with Thomas, he¡¯ll leave us out? Well, I don¡¯t mind. But that¡¯s extremely disrespectful of him to not remember Thomas¡¯ name.


    ...What? I can always hate other people but I don¡¯t want to hate myself.


    We were then left the tent while Thomas and the lord are discussing something. Though the lord¡¯s men were still there. And also the agent from Arturo since he¡¯s acting as Thomas¡¯ personal assistant.


    ¡°What do you think, Roy?¡± Burnes asked me as we¡¯re preparing to do the cleanup after the show.


    ¡°Depend on how good Thomas is at negotiating, he could sell four of us. Don¡¯t worry about him. He¡¯s always good at it. That¡¯s also the reason why he¡¯s the leader of the circus,¡± I said confidently.


    I¡¯m sure that Thomas can sell us with high price. Though the price doesn¡¯t matter here. And even if he sells more than four of us to the lord, it doesn¡¯t matter to us.


    I used my enhanced hearing to eavesdrop. But it¡¯s difficult since Corrupt Lord¡¯s men are noisy talking about something.


    But I can hear Thomas saying something about expensive, cheaply, after midnight, and kidnap.


    ¡°Burnes, I can¡¯t hear everything. But from what I got, I think they will kidnap us after midnight. Let¡¯s pretend that we¡¯re sleeping. Maybe they will try to drug us. Don¡¯t drink or eat anything given by Thomas after this. Just pretend to do so. If you¡¯re hungry, I¡¯ll give you some breads to eat right now,¡± I said as I opened a portal back to Cassau and grabbed some breads from my house for everyone.


    Soon after, Corrupt Lord left. And when we asked Thomas about what they were discussing, he didn¡¯t say anything. Must be because of that guy who is hiding under the desk. Did he think I can¡¯t see him?


    Though why would someone hide under the desk? It¡¯s good ce for hiding only for kids who are ying hide and seek.


    Thomas didn¡¯t say anything except for us to continue cleaning the tent. Though he pointed at the people who will get captured. And when no one is talking, he whispered in low voice about how they will return after midnight when everyone is sleeping and capture us.


    When we return in doing the cleanup again, I told everyone what Thomas was whispering.


    ¡°I was right. They wille at night and kidnap us. And the people who will get kidnapped is the same. But maybe the kidnappers have another idea when theye, so be careful. The others who won¡¯t get captured need to be careful as well,¡± I warned everyone to be careful.


    After cleaning the tent, we went to sleep. We¡¯re sleeping in the tents that we set up. And obviously, all of us who will get captured sleep in the same tent. As for the rest, they will be in another tent.


    As a celebration for the performance, Thomas gave us a few bottles of liquor. And they were drugged with sleeping drug. Thomas whispered that.


    So I emptied the bottle and swapped it with a real non-drugged alcohol and we partied until we pretend to sleep. The kidnapper will think their n is working when they arrive.


    Late at night, after we¡¯re all pretending to be asleep, someone entered our tent. And we got tied with a rope and had a cor wrapped around our neck. The ve cors.


    Though before they wrapped the cors around our neck, I used confusion gas to make them confused. They didn¡¯t notice that the other three except for me already had Blobbie around their neck to protect them from the needlesing out of the cor. Those Blobbies can be transformed into a key to unlock the cors.


    After protecting their neck, I stopped my magic and the confused kidnapper still confused. I wonder what he was confused about. But when he saw us with cors tightly wrapped around our neck, he didn¡¯t think much of it and get others to help him bring us somewhere.


    We were then brought into the slum. The basement of the small building that led to the ce where they auctioned the ves.


    We were thrown into a jail cell where there are other people there as well. All of them are ves.


    ¡°Burnes? Fuck. We¡¯re doomed.¡±


    Huh? I can hear someone whispered something. He¡¯s another ve with ve cor on his neck. And he knows Burnes. I guess he¡¯s an agent. We can learn a lot from him.


    I guess we won¡¯t be sold right away. So I¡¯ll just sleep tonight. When I wake up, Burnes should have learnt a lot from his friend here.

 Chapter 662

    Chapter 662: Break the Wall


    When I wake up, it¡¯s already morning. And there¡¯s a random stranger in front of me.


    ¡°Fuck! Who the hell are you!? Can¡¯t you have a better face at least so I won¡¯t get this surprised when I wake up!?¡± I shouted.


    It was crazy. I woke up seeing an ugly man in front of me. No one wants to see that. Unless that person is married to an ugly partner.


    ¡°You... do you know where you are? How dare you insult me! I won¡¯t forgive you! I as your master order you to hit the wall. Once you feel the pain of your broken fist, you won¡¯t dare to disobey me or insult me anymore!¡± The ugly man said.


    What? Hitting the wall? Me? What the hell?


    Oh, right. Now that I remember there¡¯s a cor on my neck. After the ugly man ordered me to hit the wall, there are needlesing out of the cor trying to pierce my neck. Though I quickly used Aura to protect my neck so I didn¡¯t feel any pain at all.


    But still, hitting a wall? Is that the best he can do? Ordering me to hit the wall? Not punching myself or tire myself out until I faint, but hit the wall until I broke my fist.


    .....


    I have to say that it¡¯s quite original. But that¡¯s stupid of him to ask me to hit the wall.


    But then I heard the other people inside the prison whispered something.


    ¡°It¡¯s here! The hit the wall punishment!¡±


    ¡°It was painful. My fist broke after a few punch. And lightly punching the wall is not allowed as well.¡±


    ¡°He¡¯s a newbie. There are a few newbies here so they need to get a taste of the punishment. They had no choice but to do it if they want to live. Or else, their will be killed by the cor.¡±


    I see. So punching the wall is amon punishment here. And when I see the wall with my Divine Vision, I can see that the wall has been reinforced with steel. Though it wasn¡¯t as good as when Celestine used her magic to built one.


    ¡°I said go and punch the wall!¡± the ugly man shouted again.


    Burnes and the others are here as well, but they didn¡¯t say anything to me. They¡¯re just watching. I guess that means I can do anything I want.


    Then let¡¯s do it.


    ¡°Oh, you¡¯re finally moving,¡± the ugly man said happily.


    I walked to the wall. I can see that behind the wall I¡¯m facing, it¡¯s some kind of waiting room for the guards. There are other ugly people in there. So it¡¯s fine if I punched through the wall and the rubble hit them and kill them, right?


    As I walked, Burnes and the others from the circus who got caught asked everyone to move away from the wall. The ugly man confused why Burnes told the others to move, but he doesn¡¯t care. He¡¯s probably thinking that there¡¯s nothing we can do.


    And so, I punched the wall and destroyed it. The reinforced wall got destroyed and the rubble hit the other guards on the other side. Though they didn¡¯t die. They just lost their consciousness.


    ¡°W-what!?¡± the ugly man, along with the other prisoners, were shocked seeing what they expect to happen didn¡¯t happen at all.


    Seeing that the other guards lost their consciousness, that mean there¡¯s only one ugly guard left.


    And after punching through the wall, I walked casually toward thest ugly man standing.


    ¡°What!? Wait, stop! Don¡¯te over here! Is the cor not working? Stop! Kill yourself!¡±


    The ugly man keep trying to give me order. But the needlesing out from the cor are not strong enough to pierce through my Aura. There¡¯s nothing he can do.


    Oh, now that I look carefully, there are two cors around my neck. The other cor should be a Magic Restricting Cor. I have used it so many times that I can tell without appraisal.


    Other than me, only Burnes and those from the circus have the Magic Restricting Cors. I guess the others don¡¯t need them anymore since they are under the order of their master.


    But seriously, is this ugly man in front of me the master? Why not someone else?


    Whatever. Let¡¯s kill him.


    I grabbed one iron bar, and pulled it to the side and destroying the other iron bars. Making a wide gap that lets me walk out of the prison easily.


    And I pulled one iron bar and raise it high before swing it down and hit the ugly man on the head. Killing him instantly.


    If it¡¯s a sword, he would be sliced in two. But it¡¯s an iron bar. So the ugly man be uglier before he died.


    ¡°Man, I didn¡¯t notice that I wore two cors,¡± I said as I casually ripped the two cors on my neck with my hand.


    Then I looked back and see the prisoners have shocked expression. Except for Burnes and the others who are trying to remove their cors with Blobbykey.


    I approached Burnes after he removes his cors.


    ¡°Is it fine to just do this?¡± I asked Burnes.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. I already got everything. There¡¯s only fighting and killing left. Though there might be some expert level mages among the ves,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°...Why do we encounter more expert level mages nowadays? I thought they were supposed to be rare,¡± I asked.


    ¡°Rich man, more resources. Randy used the money to bring obedient ves in, and get their magic level raised to expert level. Once they achieve that level, he will stop giving them resources so they won¡¯t get any stronger. As for Randy himself, he has reached expert level in two of his elements. Earth and Lightning. At least we have learned that Randy has at least two elements,¡± Burnes said.


    Who is Randy again? Is that Corrupt Lord¡¯s alias? Or is it the other way around?


    Whatever. It¡¯s not like he will live for long anyway.


    ¡°Oh, Roy. If you¡¯re going to kill everyone, at least don¡¯t kill the lord yet. His majesty has something to ask him. We will bring him in for questioning,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°What else have you learned?¡± I asked Burnes.


    Apparently, the agents who were sent to this city by Albert, most of them were caught and became ves. There are even some staying in this prison. But most importantly, there is one agent who actually sided with the lord willingly. That guy is dangerous. I wonder what kind of information he has informed to the lord.


    But I think it¡¯s fine. The corruption in this city has happened for a few years already. Even before I first met Albert. And since the agent disappeared, there¡¯s no way he would know me unless we have a traitor. But Burnes doesn¡¯t think that¡¯s the case. There¡¯s no more traitor after Albert set up that audition with me in the past. Asking the agents and everyone close to him if they are traitors or not.


    ...But I don¡¯t remember if Albert asked them about their rtionship with the cult or if they have betrayed the kingdom. Maybe Albert needs another audition again. Interviewing each one of the agents.


    Though at least the agents should have been asked if they are loyal to him or not. If that¡¯s the case, there¡¯s nothing to worry about. Which mean the one who betrayed the kingdom and is siding with the lord of this city has been here for a long time and won¡¯t be able to receive any new information which is hidden from public.


    ¡°So, any ideas on how we move next? Or you want me to just kill everyone?¡± I asked Burnes about our next n.


    ¡°Can you bring Wendy and the others here? I think we need reinforcement. Some agents who got captured were not strong in battle. And we also need to investigate if the enemies are ves or willing to side with the lord themselves. Oh, before that, make sure that Thomas and the others are in safe ce,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll get Wendy and the others here. Have you told them to return?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. They are ready to return.¡±


    And so I opened a portal to Wendy¡¯s location. And now, Wendy and all the other circus members are here. But is it fine to return here instead of outside? This is a prison after all.


    Whatever. It seems like they are fine with it.


    I ignored the confused noise of the other ves. Some who are agents sent by Albert were released. As for the others, they will stay here until it¡¯s safe.


    ¡°Roy, I think it¡¯s fine if we¡¯re the only one fighting. You don¡¯t need to fight. But just in case, please watch over us so our ns will go smoothly,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Okay. Then I¡¯ll bring Thomas away from this city.¡±


    I used portal to move to Thomas¡¯ location, and after telling him about our n,I moved him back to Cassau.


    ...It seems like he¡¯s the one who moves a lot with portal. He¡¯s not abatant after all. We need to make sure that he¡¯s in a safe ce.


    And now, let¡¯s watch the battle. And while I¡¯m at it, let¡¯s make sure that no civilians be victim during the fight.

 Chapter 663

    Chapter 663: Watching the Fight with the King


    Now, what to do? Should I evacuate the citizens?


    Hmm... I don¡¯t think that¡¯s a good idea right now. We don¡¯t know yet if there are other helper of the lord from among the citizens. And I don¡¯t think anyone would stupidly turn the citizens into hostages.


    Well, even if they do, I can move quickly and save them. I guess that¡¯s why Burnes didn¡¯t want me to join their fight. It¡¯s because my strength and speed let me handle other stuffs quickly. From protecting the civilians, to kill some lowly mobs.


    And so, I will badly tell you the story of what happen now.


    After I destroyed the wall, the noise and the vibration alerted many people. And I think the lord himself noticed it because he¡¯s an earth mage. Wait, he¡¯s sleeping? I guess he doesn¡¯t care.


    Some guards who are loyal to the lord reacted quickly. But none of them are strong. As for the ves, they don¡¯t care. Rather, I think they hoped that we can save them.


    And all of a sudden, a pretty ghost who had a harem back when she was alive appears in front of me. Wait, that¡¯s Sonia.


    .....


    ¡°What is it, Sonia?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Albert said that he wants toe and watch. After I delivered a message from Burnes to him, knowing that you won¡¯t participate and just watch, he wanted toe and see the unfolding event by himself. It will be safe since you¡¯re with him. That¡¯s what he said,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°So he wants to spectate this event? Well, I can do that. Good thing Spot is here as well. I can ask him to stay with Albert now,¡± I said.


    ¡°What about us?¡±


    And after the ghost,e the spirits. The two spirits, Airy and Breezy, are here with me. Airy has always been stuck with me. but she¡¯s always invisible. As for Breezy, he came to watch the circus. But I forgot to return him to Kron. So, he¡¯s still with me.


    Breezy asked me what he should do in this situation. Well, there¡¯s nothing we can do now but watch.


    ¡°Just watch for now. Is there anything you want to do?¡± I asked the two spirits back instead.


    ¡°I have a question. Is this the war you¡¯re talking about?¡± Airy asked me.


    ¡°Hmm... not really. And I can¡¯t really say that it¡¯s unrted. It¡¯s difficult to say,¡± I said.


    ¡°You said it as if it¡¯s amon urrence. Have humans always been like this?¡± Airy asked.


    ¡°Probably. Humans are probably the only species in the world who loves to fight among themselves. And humans are also the only species who hates fighting the most. Let¡¯s just say that humans are the weirdest creature,¡± I said.


    Though it¡¯s probably not just this world. Humans in all kind of worlds both hate each other and love each other. Which makes human weird.


    After answering Airy¡¯s question, I opened a portal and get Albert toe here. And we ride on Spot¡¯s back so we won¡¯t get noticed thanks to his camouge skill. Though if we are too close to expert level mages, we will still be noticed.


    ¡°Sigh... there are other problems apart from the cult it seems. I should have taken care of my people more seriously. A very in my kingdom? Unforgivable,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Yeah. Since you¡¯re the king, you should take all the me. Let¡¯s continue watching. There are already some people fighting,¡± I said.


    Then I acted as amentator of the unfolding event. Though even with all this noise, the Corrupt Lord is still sleeping. What the hell? I need that bed. That seems to be the mostfortable bed in the world. Or at least I need Victoria to copy that bed.


    Wendy takes the lead at the front. Maybe because she¡¯s the strongest. She¡¯s the only one here who has been staying with me the most and learn as much as possible to get stronger after all. So she¡¯s leading at the front.


    And at the back, it was Burnes. He¡¯s in charge of giving order. And he also ordered the other former ves to help. Except those he doesn¡¯t know if they¡¯re enemies or not. Those people still have the ve cors on and were told to stay in the prison until everything is over.


    Hmm?


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong, Roy?¡± Albert asked me who is confused at something that I see.


    ¡°Wendy and the others... they are purposely ignore some people that I thought should be enemies. They are also ves but they have stronger magic. They must be forced to be the guards. Or at least that¡¯s what I thought. Maybe the other ves told Wendy and the others about those who they shouldn¡¯t fight at all and just ignore,¡± I said.


    ¡°It¡¯s difficult to tell since I can only hear yourmentaries. Can we get closer?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°Spot, let¡¯s get closer. But just far enough to not let any expert level mages to notice us,¡± I said to Spot.


    ¡°Okay. Is this enough?¡± Spot moves so quickly that I had to hold Albert so he didn¡¯t get blown away.


    ¡°Yup. It¡¯s enough. Well, there are only fighting now. Oh, there are some children hiding. I¡¯ll take them away from there. Albert, stay with Spot,¡± I said as I jumped down from Spot¡¯s back.


    ¡°We¡¯reing too!¡± Breezy said.


    Breezy and Airy won¡¯t let me go alone as they stuck with me the whole time. I also don¡¯t want them to leave. It will be bad if they got caught.


    Someone used earth magic that shook the ground and the children who are running away fell to the ground. Before they got hurt anymore, I quickly grabbed them and run into somewhere safe close to the gate of the city. I don¡¯t think they will fight all the way to the outside of the city. The target is in the middle of the city after all.


    ¡°Hey, kids. Stay here. I¡¯ll bring the others here,¡± I said to the kids.


    ¡°Is it safe here, uncle?¡± one of the kid asked.


    Me? Uncle? Well, if I include my past life, I¡¯m already an uncle. But I don¡¯t look that old now, right?


    ¡°It will be safe when everything is over. Just stay here. But if you hear screaming or shouting, run away from the source of the sound and hide somewhere safe. Take care,¡± I said before leaving the children.


    This time, I¡¯m not wearing my living armor disguise. I¡¯m acting as a normal passerby who helped those in need.


    Let¡¯s see... the lord is awake now. And he¡¯s looking around. Maybe he¡¯s sensing the surrounding with his earth magic. If that¡¯s the case, I think he might be a powerful mage. I wonder if the others can handle him.


    Even if we have the advantage of knowledge from the past and the future, that doesn¡¯t mean strong people other than us don¡¯t exist. Maybe the Corrupt Lord is a genius. Or he might be lucky to find something that can help him get stronger.


    And the Corrupt Lord just ignores everything as if he has no interest in what happening in his city. What the hell?


    After evacuating some of the civilians near the battle and I see that there are no one else who needs help, I return back to Spot and told Albert about what the lord is doing.


    ¡°Really? Is there anything I need to worry about?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°You installed a huge screen on the square of this city as well right? Back before the tournament between four countries?¡± I asked Albert back.


    ¡°Yes. At least city with a lot of poption had screens installed. And it was around that time as well that I sent some agents. But there has been no reportsing from them. just like the agents I sent before them,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°For him to be so calm is troubling. That means he¡¯s at least stronger than most people here. Maybe even Wendy will have some difficulties fighting him,¡± I said.


    If he watched the tournament, and he sees his city in this situation but he¡¯s still calm, there is a possibility that he thinks that he¡¯s stronger than Ang back when she won the tournament. Though I don¡¯t think he¡¯s at master level yet.


    ¡°Oh? There¡¯s someone quite strong there. An expert level mage. Maybe he¡¯s the one that Burnes told me about. The influential person who helped this city protected from bandits and monsters. This city¡¯s hero. Enved hero I mean,¡± I said.


    The man is facing Wendy. I don¡¯t think he can defeat Wendy so I don¡¯t need to help him. But he¡¯s quite strong with his ice magic. Though in the end, he got defeated.


    And only then I can see the lord¡¯s expression changed.


    ¡°Oh, the Corrupt Lord is making his move now,¡± I said.


    ¡°His name is Randy. Not Corrupt Lord,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°You don¡¯t think that he¡¯s corrupt?¡± I asked.


    ¡°He must have a reason. But whatever his reason is, he needs to get punishment. We have made it so very is illegal in my kingdom. But he¡¯s still doing it. That¡¯s why we need him alive,¡± Albert said.


    Whoa, difficult matters. I¡¯ll just do whatever I wantter when Albert is interrogating him. Let¡¯s watch how capable he is.

 Chapter 664

    Chapter 664: Albert Comes Down


    Just when I thought the Corrupt Lord will make his move, he stopped, And I can also see what happens.


    ¡°Spot, move toward the building with blue roof. We¡¯ll see things clearly there. Don¡¯t fly lower than the roof or someone will notice you,¡± I said to Spot.


    Spot then moved toward where I pointed at. And since I said it with my mouth instead of pointing at it while I¡¯m on top of his head, he understands. That was my fault. I was stupid to point to where we should go from Spot¡¯s back without him seeing. I think I did that many times.


    When we reach there, we can see that Wendy and the others are facing their most difficult opponent. Civilians.


    No, they are not fighting them. Wendy and the others just protecting themselves from the civilians who cast beginner level magic at them.


    ¡°This.. what happened here?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°From what I can see, the civilians started attacking Wendy and the others as soon as Wendy defeated the ice mage over there. He¡¯s unconscious now. My guess is that he is the hero of this city. And seeing that he got defeated, the civilians think that Wendy and the others are enemies,¡± I said.


    .....


    ¡°I see. So that will make the conquest of this city bes harder,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Conquest? You said it as if it¡¯s a city to conquer. This is already your territory, so it¡¯s more like... defending? Or is it recovering this city back to its real owner? Man, it¡¯s difficult,¡± I said.


    Hmm... what to do? Wendy has trouble because whatever she¡¯s trying to exin to the people is ignored. No one believed her. That¡¯s why they be an obstacle. No wonder Corrupt Lord didn¡¯t make his move.


    And Wendy and the others can¡¯t forcefully break through the civilians. They are agents who are loyal to the kingdom. There¡¯s no way they could attack civilians.


    ...Maybe we need a group of special agents who doesn¡¯t care about the lives of the civilians. That will take care a lot of things. But that means we¡¯re no different from the cult. I guess we shouldn¡¯t do that.


    Well, but I won¡¯t know if Albert or the other kings actually had made a group like that. If that¡¯s the case, the only thing I can do is to trust them.


    But now, what to do?


    Before I think of what should we do, Albert summoned Sonia in front of us. She¡¯s invisible that even Albert couldn¡¯t see her. But I can.


    ¡°Roy, is Sonia here?¡± Albert asked me.


    ¡°She is.¡±


    ¡°Sonia. While being invisible, go and tell Wendy and the others down there to move to the lord¡¯s mansion. Get the man they defeated with them so the citizens will follow them. And we can then show the truth to the people when the lord makes his appearance,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Understood,¡± Sonia said. And then she disappears to only appears again down there next to Wendy who is protecting herself from the rocks the people thrown at them. They are weak in magic, so they have quickly exhaust their mana. They are unable to use magic anymore. But that doesn¡¯t mean they are willing to stop when their hero is defeated.


    Still, what did that hero do to make the people admire him so much? I hope it¡¯s not something that will cause us trouble.


    Hearing the n from Sonia, Wendy looked up for a bit and then proceed to do the n. Burnes grabbed the fainted hero and carried him.


    The group then carefully make their way while making sure that they won¡¯t hurt ordinary people. But on the way, other people noticed them and started throwing stones at them. And now there are a lot of angry mobs.


    But I have one question. Why do they keep stones in their house? So they can throw it whenever they want?


    I saw an olddy opened a cab full of stones right next to the window and throw them one by one at Wendy¡¯s group. And she¡¯s not the only one. Other people who sees the event from the window of their house also do the same.


    It¡¯s like they¡¯re prepared to throw stones. What the hell is with the people in this city?


    Anyway, those people are too weak to cause trouble to Wendy and the others. Wendy ignores them as she fight other enemies on the way to the lord¡¯s mansion.


    Probably because he sensed it, Corrupt Lord finally make his move. He gets all the strong ves and his subordinates to prepare to fight Wendy and the others.


    Finally Wendy and the others arrive at the lord¡¯s mansion with the angry mob behind them. They will be facing the lord¡¯s subordinates while the Corrupt Lord himself is watching.


    ¡°What are you doing in my city?¡± the lord asked Wendy and the others casually.


    Meanwhile, Spot, Albert, Sonia, and I are all watching from above. I also looked inside the mansion. There are still many ves inside. Most of them are female ves. I guess they are nonbatants.


    ...Except for one extremely suspicious woman. She had the ve cor, but unlike other ves she had a Magic Restricting Cor put on her neck as well. Which should mean that she might be quite strong. But the lord only wanted her to stay with him.


    She¡¯s suspicious. Instead of cowering in fear, she¡¯s looking down there from the window as if it¡¯s not important to her. As if whether the lord is dead or not doesn¡¯t matter to her.


    I need to watch her. Since she has the Magic Restraining Cor, she might be quite strong. Let¡¯s use Aura to cover our presence as well.


    Anyway, down there, the lord is making his speech while his subordinates and his ves are getting defeated one after another. He made it as if Wendy and the others are criminals. And he even rted them to the cult. Which makes the mob angrier.


    And when all of his men is defeated, he will finally fight.


    ¡°For the sake of the people, I will fight!¡±


    That¡¯s what he shamelessly proimed. As he started to cast his magic, a man suddenly stand in front of him. He¡¯snding there from above.


    ¡°Wait, that¡¯s Albert! Why is he jumping down?¡±


    The king who was supposed to be next to me is gone. And he jumped down from Spot¡¯s head to right in front of the Corrupt Lord.


    And I only realize it now that he¡¯s a wind mage when he used wind magic to slow his descend andnded safely. I guess I never asked. And it¡¯s also not his job to fight anyway.


    ¡°I see that you¡¯re breaking thew, Randy. Any excuses?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°¡±Your Majesty!¡±¡±


    As soon as Albertnded, Wendy, Burnes, and the other agents kneeled down on the spot.


    The Corrupt Lord himself is confused. But as soon as he saw the agents¡¯ reaction, he knows that the king is really here.


    ¡°Your Majesty!¡±


    The Corrupt King also kneeled down. And seeing him kneeling down, the mobs also do the same. They must have never thought that their king would be here.


    That¡¯s a funny reaction. But now, let¡¯s see the suspicious woman.


    She¡¯s watching Albert from the window as she smiled as if she has found her prey.


    She might be dangerous.


    Down there, the lord has finally panicked. Because the king is here. And he¡¯s making his speech about the very in this city.


    It¡¯s actually pretty amazing how he hid very in this city from the citizens. Though after Albert exined it. Some people who lost their loved ones finally realized that they lost them because the lord enved them and sold them somewhere else. But the people only heard about the death of their loved one from the lord¡¯s subordinate.


    Oh, the lord is about to attack the king. That¡¯s a bad idea.


    Lightning magic is supposed to be the fastest magic. But there¡¯s someone faster. Albert.


    He expected Corrupt Lord to fight back so Albert has already grabbed a gun from his pocket. A small gun that can easily be concealed.


    And when Corrupt Lord was about to make his move, Albert quickly aimed his gun at him and pull the trigger. The bullet is strong enough to prate Corrupt Lord¡¯s hand.


    ...Did he spend his spare time to practice his shooting skill? Maybe that¡¯s the case. And he became an expert in quickdraw. It¡¯s a good idea to let Marie made the gun for his safety. Now, even if his magic is weak, Albert should be able to protect himself a bit.


    The lord is down now and Wendy quickly apprehend him. I guess the show is over here. I don¡¯t think this is a good time for the circus.


    ...I lied! Every day is a good time for the circus!


    Oh, the suspicious woman is there as well. She didn¡¯t do anything. She¡¯s just watching the mobs turning their anger to the lord and his subordinates. But Albert stopped them saying that some of them are victims as well. People who have been enved and forced to protect the lord.


    Even now, I can see their cor is stabbing their neck because they haven¡¯t moved to protect the lord yet. So Albert stopped the mob and this way, the lord no longer needs protection.


    So, is this over? Not yet. The suspicious woman is still suspicious. Let¡¯s watch her a little longer beforeing down there.

 Chapter 665

    Chapter 665: He Might Not be a Corrupt Lord


    The Corrupt Lord is being restrained by Wendy. But as she was about to wrap a Magic Restricting Cor around his neck, Albert stopped her.


    ¡°No need for that. He won¡¯t fight back anymore knowing that he won¡¯t be able to win. And I know you¡¯re a healer as well. Heal your hand so we can talk,¡± Albert said.


    What? Albert knows the Corrupt Lord personally? Well, they¡¯re a king and a lord. I suppose that¡¯s natural.


    But is it fine to let him able to use magic? I¡¯ll just trust Albert¡¯s decision.


    Oh, the suspicious woman is down there. Is it time for her to make her move?


    Well, that¡¯s fine. I¡¯m confident that I can block her move before she can do anything. But let¡¯s watch a bit longer.


    ¡°So this is the end, huh?¡± the woman said.


    .....


    ¡°Huh? Who are you?¡± Albert asked the woman.


    ¡°Nice to meet you, your majesty. You¡¯re a big hindrance for our n, so please die,¡± the woman said.


    Wait, seriously? She¡¯s justing out there and said that so casually? Attempting to assassinate Albert?


    There¡¯s no way I would let that be.


    The woman grabbed the cors on her neck with both of her hands and rip them off. Now she can use her magic again. And it also proves that she is a master level mage. That¡¯s obvious since the muscle in her body looks just like a normal untrained body but she has that much strength.


    I guess ve cor also won¡¯t work on master level. But that¡¯s to be expected.


    She then quickly pointed her arms toward Albert. Trying to use magic to kill him. But she finally realizes something.


    She realizes that I am above her and standing on Spot¡¯s back. Now she knows how Albert suddenly appears. It¡¯s stupid of her to keep the Magic Restricting Cor on her neck all the time.


    ¡°...Fuck,¡± the woman said as she quickly trying to escape after she looks at the supposedly empty sky.


    Why is she trying to escape just after seeing me? It¡¯s not like she¡¯s not confident that she can¡¯t defeat us, right? Usually master level mages would be too proud to back down from a fight. But she¡¯s trying to escape right away and even forgetting to kill Albert.


    If she¡¯s being careful, that makes her the most dangerous enemy we encounter so far. I need to get rid of her. Killing her is fine, but that¡¯s impossible.


    Albert noticed that the woman ripped her cors off and realized that his life is at stake. But he knows that I will be protecting him. And he must be thinking that I¡¯m strong enough to face her as he whispered an order to me.


    ¡°Capture her.¡±


    That¡¯s what Albert whispered in a volume that only I can hear. That¡¯s why killing her is impossible.


    Capturing a smart master level mage. It¡¯s not that hard if she¡¯s just at the same level as Patricia. But she¡¯s smart. She might not say anything during the interrogation.


    Well, just like usual. I¡¯ll let Albert be the one interrogating her.


    The woman turns around and with her feet wrapped in fire, she used fire magic to boost her speed as she fly to the sky. That¡¯s the first time I see something like that.


    For explosive speed, she¡¯s much faster than even Patricia who is a master level wind mage. But I¡¯m still faster than her.


    And more importantly, the serpent that I ride is faster than me. And we caught up with her before she could go far.


    ¡°Damn it!¡±


    She changes her direction to avoid me. But she is still slower than Spot. Her magic is not strong enough. She¡¯s just like other master level mages from the cult who waste their potentials.


    Back then, even Spot who was the fastest before I had Ray as my familiar, he couldn¡¯t surpass the speed of ancient master level wind mage ghost. But all the master level mages we faced from the cult is not strong enough.


    The enemies we encountered so far ,we haven¡¯t seen anyone using their full potential. And while they don¡¯t recognize it, it¡¯s best to defeat them. That¡¯s why I hope we can destroy the cult as soon as possible.


    And she¡¯s not trained as well. Even though she¡¯s strong physically, she has never trained her body. I guess just one hit and she will get knocked out.


    I jumped from Spot¡¯s head toward the woman and knocked her out with a strong punch on her head. She must have never thought that I would punch her. And she fell down toward a building and destroyed the rooftop. The house owner was so surprised to see a woman falls down from the sky.


    Let¡¯s ignore him. I went down to grab her without forgetting to put a Magic Restricting Cor on her, and fly back to where Albert is before throwing her in front of him.


    I also don¡¯t need to hide myself anymore so Inded in front of Albert as well. Right next to the unconscious woman.


    ¡°That was quick. Is she a master level mage?¡± Albert asked. Loud enough for everyone here including the angry mob to hear.


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s not that hard with my familiars,¡± I said.


    Though I didn¡¯t summon my familiars at all. But because we¡¯re in public, I can¡¯t say that I¡¯m an Aura user. Who knows how many cult members are here? Maybe this woman is also a cult member as well.


    Albert then running toward Randy whose hand is healed already. What the hell?


    ¡°Your majesty! Please don¡¯te closer to him!¡± Burnes warned Albert to stop approaching the Corrupt Lord.


    ¡°He won¡¯t fight anymore!¡±


    On the Corrupt Lord sitting on the ground, Albert approached him and talk in whisper. Why is he love whispering so bad?


    ¡°Randy, someone I can trust with my life is listening. Tell me. Is there any more enemies in this city? Even your ves?¡± Albert said in whisper.


    Wait, it¡¯s as if Albert knows about the Corrupt Lord. Maybe what he said is right. He¡¯s not really a corrupt lord. But I¡¯ll decide after listening. I¡¯m the one Albert trusts with his life after all.


    ¡°...¡±


    The corrupt lord who might not be corrupt didn¡¯t say anything at first. But Albert continued.


    ¡°Just the ones here first. We need to make sure that no information get out,¡± Albert said.


    Wait, is the corrupt lord a spy? A spy lord? This is confusing.


    ¡°...the guy in red, the ve with tattoo on his neck, the short haired woman on the left, the...¡±


    For now, I¡¯ll just call him lord before I could remember his name. I think I need to remember it. And let¡¯s not assume that someone is extremely corrupt by giving them names without actually knowing them.


    ...Though if it¡¯s his job given by Albert to be corrupt, calling him Corrupt Lord should be apliment for doing his job well.


    Let¡¯s capture all the people he¡¯s talking about. He¡¯s just saying the people who are here, right? Some of them were even ves.


    ¡°Wendy, arrest them all. That¡¯s what Roy said.¡±


    I asked Sonia to deliver a message to Wendy to capture all of them. Though Wendy didn¡¯t know who she should arrest, it didn¡¯t take more than two seconds before she realized the meaning of the message.


    While the angry mob is paying attention to the lord and the king, I sneaked among them, grabbed the people that the lord is saying, and throw them high to the sky. And those are the people that I told Wendy to arrest.


    Wendy is not alone. Spot is also helping her. Just in case some of them are wind mage who can move freely in the sky.


    Oh, wait. Now fire mage can also do the same. Though I think they need to get to master level first.


    In the sky, Wendy and Spot knocked the people I threw unconscious. I wonder who they are? Cult members?


    The lord was shocked to see that the people he¡¯s saying suddenly disappeared into the sky. But he continued calling out some people that I need to throw.


    ¡°...Lastly, the man wearing sunsses on the third floor of the building on the right. That¡¯s all of them that I can see here. There are more of them. Inside the mansion, under the ground in the ce we imprison the ves, and even some working as the gatekeeper,¡± the lord said.


    ¡°Okay. Let¡¯s talk againter,¡± Albert said before he turns his body and face the citizens.


    ¡°Everyone! I will take care of the lord here and make sure that all the ves will be freed! For now, you can go back! I¡¯ll make sure that this man will receive heavy punishment!¡± Albert said.


    One by one, the citizens left. Though some were confused by the people who suddenly went missing.


    I made sure that no one other than the lord and the agents can see me threw those people. I¡¯m sure no one sees me. they will think that I¡¯m a summoner who has a familiar strong enough to be a threat to a master level mage.


    Albert then told the agents to get all the other ves from the prison to the mansion where we will stay. And on the way, we encounter the lord¡¯s ves. The lord then called out the people that I need to capture among them.


    As for the people I threw, they are all on Spot¡¯s back now. Wendy will take care of them until I can go there.


    Now, let¡¯s hear some exnation.

 Chapter 666

    Chapter 666: Another Amazing Person Join Us


    The mansion is clear. All the ves and subordinates of the lord has left the mansion. Only the lord, Albert, and I left.


    ¡°I think I¡¯ll leave for a while and bring all the captured people to the prison first. Spot and Wendy don¡¯t know where to bring those people,¡± I said.


    ¡°Do it quick. After you¡¯re done, bring Wendy, Candy, Ka, and Shirley here. At least those four,¡± Albert said.


    I know about why Albert asked me to bring Wendy and Candy. They are agents that has been with me from the start. The agents who have helped Albert from the start after knowing the truth from me. So I get why Albert wants me to bring those two.


    As for Ka and Shirley, I don¡¯t know. I know that Ka is smart. And Shirley is also a member of the royalty. But why is Albert calling them?


    Well, I won¡¯t know until I return.


    ¡°Is it fine for you to be alone with him though? Just who is he?¡± I asked Albert.


    .....


    ¡°I¡¯ll tell youter. Just bring those four. If you¡¯re worried, you can let Victoria stays,¡± Albert said.


    The lord didn¡¯t say anything at all. He just had that look of confusion seeing me. Probably wondering who I am, where I came from, and how much I know.


    Let¡¯s leave them be. I let Victoria stays with Albert as I used portal to Wendy¡¯s location.


    ¡°Wendy, Albert wants you to go to where he is. I¡¯ll bring these people to the prison and bring the others as well,¡± I said.


    Wendy then entered the portal and quickly stays behind Albert as I close the portal. Then I called Sonia to tell Candy, Ka, and Shirley that Albert wants to meet them.


    I opened a portal to the prison and bring all the people on Spot¡¯s back there. I also opened a portal back to that mansion and grab all the servants that I captured to the prison. They were already unconscious as soon as the lord said their characteristics which made me able to find them right away. And I knock them out without them knowing as I threw them to the sky


    After I brought everyone to the prison, I received message from Sonia telling me that everyone cane now. So I opened a portal and bring them all to Spot¡¯s back before opening a portal to the mansion again.


    Now everyone that Albert called is in the mansion. And in front of the shocked expression of the lord, there¡¯s a shocked expression of the princess, Shirley.


    ¡°Randy? You¡¯re still alive?¡± Shirley asked.


    ¡°Shirley? What is that? Teleportation?¡± the lord asked.


    ¡°No, that¡¯s a portal. A portal that is used by summoner. For now, I¡¯ll introduce you to these people that I trust. There are more of them but that will make this ce too cramped,¡± Albert said.


    So, that guy is not someone dangerous. He¡¯s not an enemy. But instead, he¡¯s someone that needed to be introduced to us for some reason. Maybe because he¡¯s strong. Albert tells us that he¡¯s strong enough to be the main force against the cult. And Shirley seems to know him as well.


    Albert then stands up and started to introduce the lord to us.


    ¡°Everyone, this is Randy. Shirley and my cousin. He¡¯s both smart and strong. In fact, I used to think that he is more suitable to be the king than me,¡± Albert said.


    Hmm? Wait, cousin? Someone who is more suitable as the king? Smart and strong?


    ¡°Huh? I thought that you don¡¯t have other rtives,¡± Ka said.


    I don¡¯t think I ever asked Albert about that as well. Well, it¡¯s not that important to me. That¡¯s why I never asked him that.


    ¡°A few years ago, I heard the report that he died. But to think that he became a lord. Brother, you know something about it, right?¡± Shirley asked Albert.


    ¡°Yeah. He was sent here to rece the lord. The previous lord was a terrible one. And Randy said that he has no interest in bing a king while he¡¯s still loyal to the kingdom. So father decided to make him the lord of this city while hiding the fact that he¡¯s a member of royalty. During official meeting, he rarely appears. So that¡¯s why Shirley doesn¡¯t know he¡¯s still alive,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Cousin? He¡¯s your cousin and you didn¡¯t hesitate to shoot him at all?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No need to hesitate. His healing magic, even back then, has reached advanced level. He can heal himself,¡± Albert said.


    What the hell? So it¡¯s fine if we shoot a healer? Though I won¡¯t shoot Ka ever. Hmm... but maybe if Graham or other angels acting up I will shoot them.


    ¡°So, why is he allowing very in this city?¡± I asked.


    ¡°That... I don¡¯t know yet. I never asked him to give his report at all. I only trust him to do well,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°I was waiting.¡±


    Suddenly, Randy, says something. I can remember his name now.


    ¡°Waiting for what?¡± Shirley asked.


    ¡°Someone strong,¡± Randy said.


    Then he started exining what happened.


    The situation of this city after was so bad. But he managed to make this city into a better ce for the people living here. Until he found out something.


    A woman that was supposed to be a ve of the previous lord. When Randy noticed her, he didn¡¯t react much. But he sensed that she is far stronger than he is.


    Afraid that something bad will happen after she was freed, he decided to be her master. And he had no choice but to continue the very here. Though he make note of everyone who bought the ves and every dangerous individuals or group.


    ¡°As I continue to investigate while making sure that she can¡¯t use magic with the cor, I found out that she is rted to some cult. It was only a few years ago when I realized that the cult is the Evil God Cult after the news I received from Melk. About the stampede that was caused by the cult,¡± Randy said.


    ...He¡¯s a super spy! He stays here the whole time because he knows the danger that will happen if he lets that woman free. Though who is that woman?


    ¡°The woman I talked about was the woman that suddenly got disappear before and got captured by that man,¡± Randy said as he points his finger at me.


    So, it was that suspicious woman? She has been here for a long time already. She must have some sort of influence among the cult members at least in this city.


    Randy then continued. He said that he continued investigating about the woman for years. And the more he learned, the more he realized that he¡¯s no match against her even though her magic is blocked. So he can only hope for someone strong toe and defeat her instead of asking for help. Because she can easily kill him and everyone here.


    That¡¯s to be expected. She¡¯s a master level mage. She can easily destroy the whole city. But Randy must be amazing to be able to prevent her from doing anything. Even if he had to act like the bad guy and even got shot.


    ¡°When the tournament happen, I watched that maybe that Ang would be able to fight decently against her. I hoped that Ang woulde here and ask for her help. But turns out, it¡¯s not Ang who came here,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°Yeah, it¡¯s not her. But it¡¯s her lover. If you have been acting and being secretive for so long, you missed a lot of things. No wonder Albert brought everyone here. Well, it¡¯s not really everyone, but these people here should be enough for you to learn of everything that you need to know,¡± I said.


    So far from what I heard, this Randy is not just an extremely capable man. He¡¯s a spy. A super spy that protect the kingdom even by turning himself into the evil way.


    I probably have found it. The man who doesn¡¯t care if he¡¯s going to cause trouble with civilian. Now, the only thing left to do is to bring him to join us.


    ¡°Randy, you will be arrested from now. But I want you to join us in destroying the cult,¡± Albert asked Randy to join us.


    ¡°I will protect the kingdom. But I don¡¯t know about these people. Let me hear about them first,¡± Randy said.


    And so, I started my introduction to him. Seeing that Albert says that we can trust him, there¡¯s nothing to hide.


    ¡°I¡¯m Roy. A summoner, an air mage, and I¡¯m also an Aura Master. And I came from the future. If you¡¯re close with Albert, you should know that he has special ability, right? Listen carefully because what I¡¯m going to tell you is nothing but the truth. And Albert has confirmed them all to be the truth,¡± I said before I started exining about everything to Randy.


    This is great. He¡¯s an amazing person. Not only he¡¯s smart, he¡¯s also strong and resolute to do evil if necessary. He¡¯s an expert level in earth magic, lightning magic, and healing magic. Simr to Ka. Except it¡¯s lightning instead of light.


    A super helper will join us! Maybe if it¡¯s him, he can find where the evil god is hiding.

 Chapter 667

    Chapter 667: Randy is Too Capable


    I told Randy about everything that I know and is important for him to know. I didn¡¯t taught him about magic control or other magic rted stuffs. Not because I can¡¯t trust him. But because there¡¯s no need to tell him at this point. And he can ask someone with simr element as him to teach him.


    He can learn about earth element and healing element from Ka here. As for lightning, he can ask Candy.


    Though for physical training, he can ask me. I can tell from his body that he trained every day.


    ¡°Why do you train your body? I know that it¡¯s important but most people would ignore physical training since increasing their magic level can improve their strength. And I don¡¯t know why someone like you would train,¡± I asked Randy.


    ¡°It¡¯s because that woman I talked about. The one who pretended to be weak and became a ve,¡± Randy exined.


    Apparently, the master level mage woman who tried to kill Albert but decided to retreat after she saw me was too strong for Randy who is just an expert level mage. And Randy¡¯s instinct told him that she¡¯s dangerous before even fighting her.


    He doesn¡¯t know why someone as strong as her would be a ve. So he tried to improve his magic. But reaching master level mage is too hard for him so he trained his body along the way.


    .....


    ¡°The fastest way to defeat a mage is to hit them before they can use their magic after all,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°Oh, you have the same mindset as Roy. Still, no matter how strong you are, you can¡¯t be stronger than an Aura user,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°But being able to train his body is good. As he says, the fastest way to defeat a mage in close range is to hit them before they use their magic. If it¡¯s him, even without magic, I think he can still defeat expert level mages in close range. Though for master level mage, he¡¯s still far behind in strength. His strength is at least above the strongman¡¯s strength in the circus,¡± I said.


    ¡°Circus? Now that you mention it, I think I have seen you before. Are you from the circus?¡± Randy asked.


    ¡°Yes. During performance, I y as rence the Clown,¡± I said.


    ¡°No wonder you seem simr,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°No, there¡¯s no way they would be simr. He was full with makeup and costume. There¡¯s nothing simr about their appearance,¡± Shirley said.


    No, but extreme fan should know me without the costume. It¡¯s natural since I normally act like how rence would act. Perceiving the surrounding.


    ¡°Anyway, what¡¯s my punishment? I have done a lot of illegal activities. I should be executed, right?¡± Randy asked casually. Howe someone who will be executed asked that so casually? He¡¯s crazy. I like him. He could be our greatest asset.


    ¡°Execution is unavoidable. I¡¯ll get someone to be your body double to be publicly executed. More importantly, I shouldn¡¯t be here. I need to make an excuse why I¡¯m here. Probably something like traveling incognito to investigate this city,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Oh, that¡¯s fine. I have a lot of documents so you can just read them. There should be some more dangerous individuals in this city. But since you could evn capture a master level mage, it shouldn¡¯t be a problem for you to capture or kill them all, right?¡± Randy said.


    Is this okay? Saying things like execution so easily and body double to swap the lord? Even Ka who always seem cool looks surprised.


    ¡°Anyway, you missed a lot of things. So, we¡¯ll need you to catch up with us first before proceeding to our next action. That¡¯s why I had Candy, Wendy, Ka, and Shirley here. As for Roy, you can go and capture the rest of the dangerous people in this city,¡± Albert said as he hand me a stack of documents about dangerous individuals here.


    Man, there are so many of them. I saw some of them before.


    ¡°Hmm? That is... Well, I¡¯d like to get to know this Randy guy more, but some of the people in this list are trying to escape. So, see youter,¡± I said as I left the mansion from the window to capture the escaping people I just saw.


    There are three people in the direction I¡¯m going. Two of them are in the list. And they are both listed to be members of the cult.


    I looked at them and one of them didn¡¯t have explosive device in his mouth. And thest one who is not on the list seem to be the leader of the three.


    How did Randy found them to be members of the cult? He¡¯s so smart. Maybe he¡¯s as smart as Toni in Arturo. Like Albert said, he might be more suitable to be a king than Albert.


    Hmm... maybe he¡¯s more suited in this line. Being a spy or something. He¡¯s so good at it.


    I chased after the three men while checking on the list to check if I see other people or not. I¡¯ll capture themter.


    ¡°Someone is after us! Prepare to fight!¡±


    The leader of the three then turned around preparing to fight when he noticed me. But before they could attack me, I used Victorifle and shoot them with Blobbybullet filled with sleeping gas.


    I¡¯m an expert level air mage now. The gases I created, from magic and not naturally created inside my body, can be very effective against other expert level mages. I¡¯ll try to use them on master level mages as wellter and see if they can be affected or not.


    The Blobbybullet didn¡¯t hit them. But instead, it opened just before it hit the target. And the air inside the bullet spread around the area and make the three of them fell asleep.


    ¡°Alright, that¡¯s three down. Several dozens more to go,¡± I said.


    ¡°Roy, you won¡¯t act as living armor?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Like I said before, it will be too suspicious if the living armor act too close to the circus,¡± I said.


    ¡°But you have let yourself be known as a summoner when you capture that master level mage. If someone is smart enough, they could connect you with the living armor. Thinking that you are the master of the living armor,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Hmm... I didn¡¯t think about that. Well, even if that¡¯s the case, I don¡¯t think it will be much trouble for us. We originally used the living armor to bait the master level mages from the cult toe after us. But just a while after the tour, we already encounter several master level mages from the cult. I think we¡¯re doing fine without having to bait them. But if it¡¯s work, that¡¯s fine. Though I need to show that I¡¯m not the master of the living armor. Since I have Airy with me all the time, I can pretend that she¡¯s my familiar. You don¡¯t mind that, right?¡± I asked Airy who has been sticking with me the whole time.


    ¡°I don¡¯t mind. I¡¯m with you all the time anyway,¡± Airy replied.


    ¡°What about me? What about me?¡± Breezy asked me.


    ¡°Oh, right. Will you return to Kron or will you stick with me a little longer?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I¡¯ll go with Kron! Being with you is confusing. If you want to fight, just fight. Kron did it like that,¡± Breezy said.


    That¡¯s because Kron encounters a lot of bandits in his travel. And most of them are people he needs to defeat. That¡¯s why he doesn¡¯t need to think much and just fight them.


    Unlike me who will look for enemy first and hunt themter. And since I will mostly do it in secret, I¡¯m less shy than Kron. That¡¯s why Breezy prefer Kron more than me.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll transport you after I got his permission,¡± I said.


    I called Sonia to ask Kron, and when she returned, we have the permission to open a portal to where Kron is. We will meet again when we decide our next performance. I guess I¡¯ll ask Thomas if we should perform here again or not. This time with our full members.


    After getting rid of the three, I returned to the city and look for Burnes. He¡¯s talking to someone that he has just defeated when I found him.


    ¡°Hey, Burnes. How is it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°This guy is the agent who betrayed the kingdom. He shared intel with someone from Arturo. And it¡¯s not Arturo now. It¡¯s Arturo back when they were still being under control of the cult,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°No! I didn¡¯t know that they¡¯re from the cult!¡± the former agent shouted.


    ¡°But you still share confidential information with another kingdom!¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°He¡¯s a member of the cult though. The lord is actually some sort of spy. I have his picture on this list.¡±


    I showed Burnes the list of the dangerous people in this city. There¡¯s a picture and the name of the wanted people as well. And this agent¡¯s face is drawn here. Randy must be good at drawing as well. Howe one person be so good in many things? I¡¯m jealous.


    ¡°I see. For now, please take him to the prison. I¡¯ll help you find these people,¡± Burnes said as he took the documents from me.


    Though I will find those people first with my Divine Vision. Well, I don¡¯t mind a helping hand. I¡¯ll just get rid of the people trying to escape first while Burnes will focus on the city.

 Chapter 668

    Chapter 668: No Execution


    Burnes and I split up to capture or kill the people on the list. Although the list is no longer in my hand, as long as Burnes is within my Divine Vision range, I can still check it.


    There are many people that Randy has noted. Most of them have been listed as dangerous and it says that they are allowed to be killed. Some are dangerous but might have some important information so it¡¯s best to arrest them. Some are just suspicious and there¡¯s no reason to capture them. They need to be put under supervision. Randy is so great to be able to find all that out.


    Our targets are people that we are allowed to kill and dangerous people that we need to capture for information. As for the rest, we won¡¯t take action. Unless they have explosive devices in their mouth just like the woman in front of me.


    The woman juste out of a brothel. Probably that¡¯s where she works at. I can see the explosive device in her mouth so I know that she¡¯s a cult member lower than expert level mage. At least that¡¯s what I assume who she is.


    Though I won¡¯t know the truth. So as long as I can capture them instead of killing them, I will. And since she has explosive device in her mouth, she is at most an advanced level mage. It¡¯s easy to knock her out with sleeping gas and bring them to the prison. Though I¡¯d like to gather all of them in one ce first so I don¡¯t need to continuously use portal.


    There are also some more people not on the list with explosive device in their mouth. Of course I captured them all. As for where to put them, I just throw them to the sky so Spot can get them. Once he caught them, he will bring them to the lord¡¯s mansion¡¯s garden. And Spot will watch over them until another person is being thrown into the sky.


    All that¡¯s left after capturing all of them is for me to open a portal to the prison. Albert will be busyter.


    .....


    This is just show how important lie detection ability is. I hope n inherited that ability as well so he can be a great king in the future.


    On the list, not only the picture and the name of the person. There are some more description about them as well. And some even tells how strong they are. Some are intermediate level mages, some are advanced level mages, and some are expert level mages. There¡¯s also the picture of the master level mage woman that I apprehended quickly as well. And she was written as ¡®Potentially a master level mage¡¯. Just how detailed is Randy?


    There are a lot of them. But with the help of Burnes, the members of the circus, and even the former agents who were captured and enved, it didn¡¯t take long to get most of the people in the list. Though unfortunately, some of them are not in the city. And it was also written that they are not in the city!


    I also checked the city if those people are nearby, but there are no trace of them still in the city. Which means Randy is correct that they¡¯re leaving. He¡¯s so good to the point that it¡¯s scary. If he¡¯s really willing to do anything to protect Tatrama, then I have no problem in believing him.


    Right now, Albert, Candy, Wendy, Shirley, and Ka are exining things to Randy. I can see them. And Ka asked a lot of questions to Randy as well. If even Ka decided to trust him, then everything will be good.


    I might be sold to him and being enved. But if he¡¯s this capable and join us, I won¡¯t hold a grudge. As long as we don¡¯t need to pay him back though. I think Thomas made more profit in selling me than from the circus.


    Now, all the people in the city almost all have been captured. Only the ves left. And we let them stay behind in the prison. Since they have ve cors on, I don¡¯t think they will do anything bad.


    Unless they¡¯re master level mage. I guess I need to get things done sooner as well.


    I let Burnes and the others take care of the ves. Most of them were freed. Though we can¡¯t do anything about the ves outside the city.


    Some were captured. They needed to be questioned. Burnes will handle them. Let¡¯s go back to the mansion and get all the captured people enter the prison. They¡¯re all sleeping soundly. The effectiveness of my air magic improved even more after reaching expert level. I hope I can reach master level.


    After that, I returned to where Albert is and ask him about what they¡¯re talking about.


    ¡°Mostly about the cult, the alliance between the countries, and you. There are many things that he wants to know. Including how to get stronger,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Oh, you can ask someone with simr element as you are. I¡¯ll introduce Ang and the others to youter. Now I want to ask you a question. How did you get all that intel that is impossible for you to do alone? How many helper do you have?¡± I asked Randy.


    ¡°Helper? Officially, none. Unofficially, many. I¡¯m the lord of this city and I enved a lot of people. I asked them to do it without making them suspicious of me. You might want to ask me where I sort all the information, right? I do it in-¡±


    ¡°In that hidden room behind the bookshelves in your office over there. I can see that,¡± I said after I interrupted him.


    ¡°...You are really as they say. Able to see many things. How was the future me? If Tatrama is in danger, I would have done everything I can to help,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t ask me something like that. I¡¯m too stupid and have terrible memory. But if you¡¯re really as capable as I expected, you should have made some action by yourself right after Marie gave birth,¡± I said.


    If he knows that the queen bes mentally ill, he should know that Albert needed someone he can trust by his side and do anything for him. Since I prevented Marie from being ill, that never happened in this life.


    ¡°About the birth of the twin, right? Albert told me about it. If that¡¯s the case, as you say, I would return back to the capital as soon as possible. Not because Albert needed something he can trust, but also because Marie is my cousin,¡± Randy said.


    Wait, Marie is Randy¡¯s cousin? And Randy is Albert¡¯s cousin?


    ¡°You mean... incest?¡± I asked Albert.


    ¡°No! My father¡¯s brother is Randy¡¯s father. And Randy¡¯s mother is Marie¡¯s aunt,¡± Albert exined.


    Oh, that does make them not blood rted. But maybe their ancestor have incestious rtionship. It¡¯s actuallymon in the story I read about how the king needed pure-blood heir so it¡¯s natural for the king to marry his own sister. But I guess it didn¡¯t happen here.


    Whatever. They are happy and have two children. I don¡¯t need to care about the rest as long as we can destroy the cult.


    ¡°So, will he join us? In what manner?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I will join your alliance. Using the event here, I can probably gain reputation from the cult as a criminal. And they might approach me if all the cult members here are captured or killed. So it¡¯s best to pretend that I escaped prison and look for intel by myself. I still have some reputation so it shouldn¡¯t be that hard for me to get shelter from other nobles who bought ves from me. Since we canmunicate using the ghost, I can ask for help right away,¡± Randy said.


    Letting him escape, huh? That¡¯s fine.


    ¡°How is it, Albert?¡± I asked Albert.


    ¡°That¡¯s fine. We¡¯ll let him stay in prison for a few months. At least that¡¯s what we¡¯re telling the public. When the truth is he will be improving his strength. Let Randy learn a lot about magic and other stuffs that he hadn¡¯t learned yet. Once he learned everything, he should be strong enough to handle one or two master level mages. He will be a super spy and we might be able to find the Evil God sooner,¡± Albert said.


    We then make a n of what Randy will do next. Although we will say that he¡¯s imprisoned, he¡¯s actually free and is training his magic so he can be much stronger than he already is.


    Once he left, he will be free to do anything. Other ve owner will probably help Randy in some way if he asks for their help. And it will be easier to find the cult since Randy has gained notoriety. That¡¯s what the cult mostly wanted from their new recruit after all.


    Though it means he will avoid execution. But he would never be executed anyway so it¡¯s fine.


    ¡°Well, I guess that¡¯s it. Roy, get a royal carriage from my ce. I will make my leave from this city as fancy as possible. And bring some more carriages to escort Randy. Though he won¡¯t be in there since you will take him elsewhere to train. I will leave in two days. During that time, discuss with Randy about other nobles who owned ves and see if they will be the one that Randy ask for help after escaping prison, or you can arrest them right away,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Okay. I¡¯ll finish it in one day,¡± I said.


    From trying to perform here, to fighting the lord, and getting the lord to join us. Many things happened here in just two days. It was just yesterday that I arrive here. But we gained an amazing ally.


    He¡¯s much better than the best agents from Tatrama. And his fighting potential can even surpass Candy or Wendy if he learned magic control. I hope there are more of people like him from other kingdom who are as loyal as he is. Then, it won¡¯t be long until we find the Evil God.

 Chapter 669

    Chapter 669: Reason for Loyalty


    With Albert in charge of this city after the lord¡¯s arrest, the situation returns to normal.


    No, not normal. It just returns to how it¡¯s supposed to be. Free of very. Though it was just for a few days.


    Many ve merchants got captured. Captured vers were freed and returned to their families. But that only happen to the ves in the city.


    There are many ves who were taken away from the city. And there¡¯s nothing we can do. And even if we find them one way or another during our tour, we can¡¯t do much unless Albert is with us. So maybe I can just bring Shirley around for the tour so she will act as Albert¡¯s representative.


    For the ves with families, they are not much of a problem. But for those without family, they might be a problem in the future if we don¡¯t take care of them well.


    Those with family can be returned to t heir family, and they can hopefully have a good life. But those without family can only look for job. It will be good if they find a good job. But if they can¡¯t, they might end up bing bandits. And that will give us more trouble.


    Some ves were even raised to expert level. If they know that Randy is alive, they will take revenge on him. So it¡¯s best if Randy hides his identity before he goes to his next mission. Let¡¯s have Albert recruit them to join us. We will get stronger with their help.


    .....


    As for Randy¡¯s possession, most of them will be auctioned. But those are not important stuffs like jewelries or properties. The important stuffs like magic stones or magic items will be taken by us to strengthen our troops. That¡¯s also Randy¡¯s intention when he bought them.


    ¡°So, how do we disguise him?¡±


    After the discussion is over, we need to figure out how to put disguise on him. Though it will be a few monthster when he can take his next mission. He needs to learn more so he can be stronger.


    ¡°I can grow my beard and hair. That¡¯s the reason I always have this short hair and clean shave. But I don¡¯t think that¡¯s enough. Roy, you can use sword, right? Then, I want you to put a lot of scars all over my body. Even in the prison, I don¡¯t think there will be anyone who got tortured that much and escape from the prison,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°Wait, you want to put scars on your own body?!¡± Shirley asked.


    Not just Shirley. Everyone else also shocked with his statement. To think that he would be this strict with himself.


    No, this is beyond strict. This is madness. And I like it. This guy is so amazing. To think that there¡¯s someone this resolute with us. I¡¯m d that I found him.


    Let¡¯s ask Albertter if we can find other extremely loyal people like him. If we can find more, even if their magic level is not high, they will still be great additions in our alliance.


    ¡°It¡¯s just scars. If Roy is as good as you all said, he can do it. Especially since he¡¯s also a doctor. But just scars from de might not be enough. So I will need to add some scars from magic as well,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°Ah, don¡¯t worry about it. I can give wounds simr to that of Wind sh magic cast by wind mages. And if you want, I can give you scars from piercing attack. You can lie and say that you got pierced by Ground Spike from earth mage or Ice Spike from ice mage. Though if you want to have more, I don¡¯t mind,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s good enough. Let¡¯s do it after we leave this ce. Before I learned what you call as magic control,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°...When crazy people meet together, they will do even crazier things. Randy, I have never asked you before so I will ask you now. Why are you so loyal to the kingdom? We haven¡¯t done anything to you. And just now, we almost decided to give you a public execution if we didn¡¯t n for your escape from prison. Just why?¡± Albert asked.


    Right. Someone this loyal must have his reason.


    He willingly do crimes knowing that he will get punished. Not like those evil who do it for money or other things. He know that he will get punished, but he still did it and wont refuse punishment if given. Allowing very, corruption, bribes, and maybe other things that I don¡¯t know of.


    Gathering most crimes into this city, and then we capture them all. Is that how it goes? Well, there are still some people who left this city. But Randy has noted all of them.


    ¡°The reason? It¡¯s simple. The people I love are all in this kingdom,¡± Randy said casually.


    Well, make sense. Even for the simplest reason, anyone can do anything. Either it¡¯s something crazy, something amazing, or something amazingly crazy. Even I want to destroy the cult because of my trauma.


    Hmm... I don¡¯t think fixing a trauma is something simple. But whatever.


    ¡°It was back when I got appointed as the lord here. Knowing that the female ve might be dangerous, I decided to sacrifice everything before she or anyone she¡¯s connected in this ce can do anything. I need to protect the people I love,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°...As expected, you are more suited to be the king than I am. If it¡¯s me, even if I want to protect everyone I love, I don¡¯t think I would be able to put myself in your position and sacrifice myself,¡± Albert said.


    Saying that he¡¯s sacrificing himself... that¡¯s an overstatement. He¡¯s still alive, right? And even if he did a lot of crimes, he will be freed since he¡¯s the king¡¯s cousin.


    ¡°And who is this people that you love?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°My family and friends. I think that¡¯s all,¡± Randy replied.


    ¡°Do you have wife and children?¡± Ka asked again.


    ¡°I do have a fiancee. But I have never met her again after I moved here a few years ago,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°And you¡¯re willing to get scars on your face before meeting her. Should we bring him to meet his fiancee?¡± I asked Albert.


    ¡°...Actually, Randy¡¯s fiancee¡¯s parents were rted to the cult,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°What?!¡±


    Of course he¡¯s shocked. Randy is trying to protect her from the cult here, but the cult has spread their influence to the capital. But that¡¯s before I met Albert. And now, Albert has cleared the capital from the cult. Though some of the cult members were actually Randy¡¯s fiancee¡¯s parents is surprising.


    ¡°Though for her, she doesn¡¯t know about it at all. Since her family doesn¡¯t have any heir other than her, and it won¡¯t be good if we choose her to inherit his father¡¯s title, I decided to revoke her family¡¯s nobility. As for the person herself, Marie decided that Randy¡¯s fiancee will be her assistant. I think you have meet her several times, Roy,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°So she¡¯s safe, right? That¡¯s all I need to know. Though I don¡¯t think I will meet her now. The world is in danger. I want the world to be safe for her,¡± Randy said.


    So he doesn¡¯t want to meet her yet. But I don¡¯t care.


    ¡°Rejected. After this, I¡¯m thinking of getting you to meet Marie so you can have a gun. Since you¡¯re strong and smart, I¡¯m sure there are things that you can do with guns. Especially if your magic is blocked for some reason. So I will bring you to Marie and you will probably meet your fiance,¡± I said.


    ¡°What?! Wait, don¡¯t do that! I haven¡¯t seen her for years! And after everything that has happened, I¡¯m not ready to meet her ye-¡±


    ¡°The portal is open!¡±


    I ignored Randy and opened a portal to Marie¡¯s location without anyone¡¯s permission. At this time, she should be in herb to create more amazing stuffs.


    ¡°Hey, Marie. How was the project?¡± I asked.


    ¡°About making more guns? Smaller and easier to hide. That¡¯s what you want, right? And you want to give them to everyone?¡± Marie asked.


    ¡°Yes. That¡¯s right. Though I want to have an extra order for that guy over there,¡± I said.


    Marie then looked inside the portal and see Randy. Her cousin that she hasn¡¯t met for a long time.


    ¡°Oh, Randy! It¡¯s been a while! Roy, it shouldn¡¯t be long since you met him, right? And you said you only want to give the guns to people you trust. But you already trust him enough to give one to him?¡± Marie asked me.


    ¡°What he did so far was worthy enough to receive my trust. Though if Albert never told me about him, I would never know and there¡¯s no doubt that his head will be separated from his body by now,¡± I said.


    I actually ordered a lot of guns for everyone. Ang, Ka, Sophie, Wendy, Candy, and the others that I trust. It¡¯s a gun that doesn¡¯t need air mage topress air inside the barrel to shoot. It can be used if they somehow have their magic blocked.


    And now, I asked for an extra order for Randy who is no longer looking at Marie, but he¡¯s looking at someone next to her. I guess she¡¯s his fiance.


    ¡°...Randy?¡±


    ¡°...It¡¯s been a while, Sheryl.¡±


    Now, the two meet again after so long. But it¡¯s an awkward reunion.


    ¡°You both are being awkward,¡± I said.


    ¡°It¡¯s your fault! Neither of them prepared for this!¡±


    And now Albert is angry at me. It¡¯s not my fault. It¡¯s Randy¡¯s fault. Because if he¡¯s just a little less capable, I won¡¯t ask Marie for an extra order.


    ...I¡¯m so good at making excuse.

 Chapter 670

    Chapter 670: Giving Some Scars


    Randy forcefully got reunited with his fiancee. And even though she no longer part of nobility, they still love each other.


    They really suit each other. Though it will be a while until Randy can live happily with her.


    From what I can tell about him, he is simr with me. He¡¯s afraid of the danger and can only be fully rxed when al of the danger disappear. That¡¯s why he would probably live happily with his fiancee, Sheryl,ter after we destroy the cult. Just like how I only want to have children after the cult is destroyed.


    Well, that is exactly what he¡¯s talking about with his fiancee. As for me, I¡¯m talking with Marie if she can upgrade the gun that Albert has.


    The gun is strong enough to pierce through Randy¡¯s arm. But I feel like it¡¯s still weak. If Randy is just a bit further, his hand won¡¯t get pierced. Though the bullet will still probably stuck in his hand, it won¡¯t get pierced through. Which mean the power is not strong enough.


    ¡°As expected. Well, I¡¯m still developing it further. It¡¯s a technology that doesn¡¯t need to exist here since we have magic. So it¡¯s totally new. But it¡¯s interesting,¡± Marie said.


    I¡¯m d that the Marie in this timeline is saved and doesn¡¯t have mental illness. It was such a big loss that she couldn¡¯t do anything to help Albert fighting the cult in my past life.


    .....


    ¡°Randy, if you have anything that will help you in the future espionage mission, tell us right away. We might have some ideas,¡± I said.


    ¡°If possible, we need some sort ofmunication device. Just letting one ghost do everything is not possible. There will be some dy since she¡¯s working alone,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°That¡¯s also work in progress. After the creation of the Television and the camera, I think we can have two-waymunication in the near future. I even made a one-waymunication device small enough to be put in Roy¡¯s ear. If we can upgrade that to a two-waymunication, and increase the range, that would be perfect,¡± Marie said.


    ¡°In my world, it was themunication device that was first made. Then television waster. It¡¯s the reverse in this world,¡± Victoria suddenly spoke.


    ¡°What?! Who¡¯s there?!¡± Randy got spooked when he heard someone he doesn¡¯t know suddenly speak. And none of us were opening our mouth, So he must be thinking that there¡¯s an extra person.


    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s me. I¡¯m Victoria. You should have heard about the ck Slime, right? That¡¯s me,¡± Victoria then transformed into her human form and talk to Randy.


    ¡°So you¡¯re the one they said to be from another world. I see. So it¡¯s because of you that Marie created many innovative invention,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°You call that innovative, but to me, they are justmon device that we use everyday. I don¡¯t know much about history of my world, but I think at the time of invention, they were indeed innovative. And the gun is actually notmon. But maybe in some part of my world it¡¯smon,¡± Victoria said.


    I will introduce my other familiars to Randy. Maybe during his training. I think I will let him roam around in Monsters World so he can gain experience as well. He can fight the monsters there. And I think Jack and the other werewolves will be happy to have another sparring partner.


    After asking Marie for some more order, I got everyone returned back to Randy¡¯s mansion. This will be thest time Randy meet his fiancee before the cult is destroyed. That¡¯s what he said. Though I don¡¯t care. If I need both Randy and Marie to meet, Randy will meet Sheryl again.


    Let¡¯s tease him to meet his fiancee whenever he¡¯s disobeying my order. Just because I¡¯m not a king doesn¡¯t mean he doesn¡¯t need to follow my order, right? Though I don¡¯t know if I will meet him while he¡¯s on duty next time.


    After that, Randy continue pretending to be prisoner who will be taken to the capital. And Albert will stay until the royal carriage pick him up. I have transported his carriage nearby so they will arrive tomorrow.


    And now, for the next two days, Randy and I are getting rid of the nobles and other criminals in nearby cities and settlements. With Randy wearing a mask to cover his face.


    There are no scars yet on his face and his body. I will do itter. So for now, he can just put on a mask.


    ...Though I think Ka can heal scars. And maybe Randy himself can do it in the future. So it doesn¡¯t matter if he has scars or not.


    It¡¯s good to see how capable he is in a fight. I think he can be the strongest expert level mage if our group is not included.


    We got rid of the nobles except for some that Randy will pretend to ask for help in the future after his ¡®Prison Escape¡¯. And those nobles will be arrested soon after Randy left their territory.


    But that will be in a few months. After Randy learned everything he need to know to get stronger.


    And then, Albert returns back to the capital with empty carriage following his carriage. Though that will only be until the people here can¡¯t see them anymore. After that, I will use portal. Quick travel is done.


    As for Randy, he has been in my mansion in the capital before Albert depart. Seems like Ian knows him as well.


    ¡°Oh, Ka, have you found anything else under the ground here?¡± I asked Ka if there are anything remaining from the testing ground that Timmy made.


    ¡°No. But we made a basement there for training. And if you¡¯re looking for earth spirit, I didn¡¯t feel one at all. Maybe they are hiding deeper under the ground. If air spirit can hide in the air and wind spirit can hide in the wind, the earth spirit can hide in the earth. It won¡¯t be easy to find one. But we might find some if we go deeper. And so we dug deeper from the basement to see if we can find it. But don¡¯t get your hope up,¡± Ka exined.


    I have told to Albert that Spirits might be considered as monsters. And tamer can tame them. Or maybe summoner can make a contract with them if spirits also exist in other world. That¡¯s why I want to find more spirits if possible. But that seems to be difficult.


    Albert said that we will assume that the enemy has spirits in their possession already. That might be the reason why there are many master level mages from their side. And Albert will interrogate that female master level mage that I captured before to find out about it. Though it¡¯s also possible that she and most master level mage didn¡¯t notice about the existence of the spirits. That¡¯s troublesome.


    After chatting for a while, I took Randy to the garden so I can sh him and give him scars.


    ¡°Where do you want me to give you scars? You don¡¯t need to worry since I can sh you without killing you. And if it¡¯s you, maybe you can remove the scars with healing magic in the future,¡± I said.


    I also get Victoria to copy Randy¡¯s appearance so Randy can show me where he wants the scars at.


    ¡°Here, here, and here. At least those ces. If possible, I want some burn marks as well. Maybe I should get a tattoo? What do you think?¡± Randy asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s fine. With healing magic, we can remove tattoo as well. It¡¯s basically removing unneeded objects in one¡¯s body. And that object is ink. I have tried it and it¡¯s possible,¡± Ka replied.


    ¡°That¡¯s good. Then just scars on my face. And I will go to a tattoo artist to cover my scars with tattoo. Even if they can¡¯t be removed, I already got permission so it¡¯s fine,¡± Randy said.


    I guess he asked his fiancee if he can get a tattoo and scars. Though when I asked him if he wants his fiancee to watch him bleed, he refused it. I guess that¡¯s something he doesn¡¯t want the people he cares about to see.


    ¡°Alright then. Here¡¯s a towel for you to bite. And if you can¡¯t endure the pain to heal yourself with low-level healing magic, Ka will heal you. Are you ready?¡± I asked.


    Randy nodded. And I transformed Victoria into a sword.


    The scars might not be necessary at all if he¡¯s going to have tattoo. But Randy said that it¡¯s more convincing that way. So I just let him get what he wants.


    I shed Victosword on the ces where Randy wants the scars to be at. And he¡¯s screaming in pain. Though the scream was muffled by the towel he¡¯s biting.


    Even after that much pain, he can still be calm and use healing magic on himself. The bleeding stopped. And after I gave him another towel for him to wipe the blood off, the scars are there.


    ¡°Good. Now, you can go get yourself some tattoo. Do you want me to look for one for you?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. I know someone I can trust. And he won¡¯t reveal who I am,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°We¡¯ll go thereter then. You lost a lot of blood so you need some rest. If you need blood transfusion, Ian can give you some. He has the same blood type as you,¡± I said.


    ¡°Thanks, but no need. I¡¯ll just rest. We¡¯ll meet the tattoo artist tonight,¡± Randy said before entering the mansion.


    I only said that I will go with him to meet the tattoo artist. But he knows that I¡¯m going there to see if the tattoo artist can be trusted or not. That¡¯s just show how smart he is.

 Chapter 671

    Chapter 671: Visiting a Tattoo Parlor


    At night, Randy and I are going to meet the tattoo artist that Randy knows. He said that the tattoo artist is someone that he can trust, so I asked Albert when Randy was taking a nap.


    ¡°A tattoo artist that he can trust? Well, Randy used to y around so much when he was a child. And he met some tough-looking people covered with scars and tattoos and y with them. And they used to be the one in charge of raising our agents until they decided to leave and leave it to the one who raises Candy and became our shadow bodyguard. Though thanks to you, he has been captured because of his rtion with the cult. I think they can be trusted. I have met them again recently and asked them to teach new recruits again. And they are willing to do it to atone for picking the wrong person as the one inheriting their position,¡± Albert exined.


    So, Randy has been ying with the teachers of the agents from way before. And maybe that¡¯s where he learn about everything. And that¡¯s how he became this way.


    When I asked him if they are the reason that he knows many things, he nodded.


    ¡°Yeah. My parents didn¡¯t like how I always y around with them. Not only because they are rough-looking people, but because they are much older than me who was just a kid. I was just a kid who loves justice and wanted to be a hero. Although they never told me any confidential stories, the stories that they were allowed to tell me make me interested in their former job as agents and make me wants to learn more. Though I didn¡¯t know that they were agents back then. I only know when the king at that time, Albert¡¯s father and my uncle, told them to teach me anything I want to learn,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°I see. Since they are willing to teach again, maybe there will be more agents as good as you are. I really need to find and kill the Evil God before the cult¡¯s force bes bigger and stronger,¡± I said.


    ¡°The one we¡¯re going to meet today is called Hendrick. An old man who is now living as a tattoo artist. As long as he¡¯s still alive, I know where he¡¯s at,¡± Randy said.


    .....


    I followed him and we walked to a district wheremoners are living. And it¡¯s close to the slum area of the capital. Though the slum here is not as bad as the slum in other cities.


    There are several tattoo or piercing shops here. Though I don¡¯t need neither. But I¡¯m confident with my piercing ability. Like putting a hole in someone¡¯s stomach or even head. I can do that easily.


    It¡¯s night time now, so it¡¯s normal that there are no open shops. And some even have the owner of the shop sleeping already.


    And when we got closer to a certain tattoo parlor, the owner who was sleeping suddenly awake and carefully peeking at us from the window of his bedroom.


    ¡°Randy, is that the ce we¡¯re going to?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yeah. You know already?¡± Randy asked back.


    ¡°Just now. I can see the owner is acting like an agent. He¡¯s quite good. How is his magic level?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. But I don¡¯t think he¡¯s expert level mage. At most, he¡¯s just an advanced level mage,¡± Randy said.


    We¡¯re about fifty meters from that ce, but even though he¡¯s just an advanced level, he can tell that someone is getting closer. He¡¯s another super spy. It¡¯s amazing.


    ¡°Do you think he still remember you? It has been a long time since youst meet him, right? And you even got a lot of scars,¡± I asked Randy.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. Even if he¡¯s fighting back, he won¡¯t be any stronger than either one of us. Until the tournament happened, I was convinced that I¡¯m the strongest person in the whole kingdom. At least just below master level mage. But when I saw your girlfriend defeating Shirley, I know that I¡¯mcking. But I¡¯m still stronger than most people,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°I see. By the way, Ang is not my only girlfriend. You have met Ka and Candy as well. And there are more. By the way, this here is Airy. An air spirit,¡± I said as I pointed at my left shoulder.


    ¡°Hmm? There¡¯s nothing there though?¡± Randy said.


    After he said that, Airy showed herself to Randy temporarily before disappearing again. Though I can see her and also feel her because I¡¯m an air mage.


    ¡°Oh. I heard that elemental spirits will help mages grow stronger faster. I have never seen one before until now,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°There are other monsters I will introduce to you. But we¡¯ll do thatter,¡± I said.


    We¡¯re already in front of the tattoo parlor. And Randy knocked on the door.


    ¡°...I guess he doesn¡¯t remember you anymore. Should I break the door?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No need. I¡¯ll just pour some sand inside from the gap of the door. Although I have never trained magic control to fight, I can still use earth magic to manipte sand and write messages with it,¡± Randy said.


    So he never used magic control for fighting, but he has used it for writing message. I guess it won¡¯t take long for him to learn everything since he already understands it. I wonder how strong he will be after training?


    The sand enter from the gap under the door, and it climbed on the door with a message saying ¡®I¡¯m Randy. Open the door¡¯. And Hendrick who is already on the first floor read the message. Without hesitation, he opened the door.


    After we both enter, he closed the door and locked it.


    ¡°Randy? You¡¯re Randy? It has been a long time since west met! You be a lot uglier than before. What the hell happened?¡±


    ...the man called Hendrick didn¡¯t say that to Randy. But he said that to me.


    ¡°I¡¯m not Randy! And who the hell is ugly?! You¡¯re ugly!¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t shout! We don¡¯t want to wake the neighbor!¡± Randy said.


    ¡°I use air magic to block the noise from leaving! We can scream as much as we want here!¡± I said.


    Only then, the man noticed that I¡¯m not Randy. And the Randy he knows is the man who is covered with scars next to me.


    ¡°Randy! What happened?! Who did this to you?!¡± Hendrick shouted.


    ¡°Himself. He did it himself because of a resolute decision. He said that you can be trusted. He needed tattoo to make it so that no one can recognize him anymore,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. Hendrick, please do it. How long will it finish?¡± Randy asked.


    We haven¡¯t exined anything to Hendrick, but he seems to understand that we did it because we had to.


    ¡°If you want a full body tattoo, it will take long. But if it¡¯s to make it so no one recognize you, just your face alone should be enough. And I can finish it in one night,¡± Hendrick said.


    ¡°Then just the face alone is good enough. But I might ask for moreter. Maybe let some scars be visible as well. Can you do it now? We can talk while you do it,¡± Randy said


    ¡°Okay. This seems to be urgent. By the way, who is this rude guy calling me ugly?¡± Hendrick asked.


    ¡°You¡¯re the one being rude to me! You¡¯re calling me ugly right away!¡± I shouted.


    Oh shit. This former agent seems to be senile already. Can we really trust him?


    ¡°At the moment, he¡¯s the one that Albert trusts the most. I just met him a few days ago so I don¡¯t really now much about him. But Albert has confirmed it that he¡¯s someone that Albert can trust with his life,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°...Are you Ninja?¡± Hendrick asked.


    ¡°Oh, I never thought that someone still remember my nickname when I want to do some criminal act. That¡¯s something wee up with as a disguise for whenever I broke thew. But it¡¯s all for a good reason. To kill traitors,¡± I said.


    ¡°I see. So, do you want to get some tattoo as well?¡± Hendrick asked.


    ¡°No. I¡¯m just here to see you since Randy said that you can be trusted and since Albert has said that he trusts you as well. I think I have seen enough. Randy, you can use my mansion whenever you¡¯re in the capital. I¡¯ll be returning to the circus now. I have a show to do,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re still going to y in the circus?¡± Randy asked.


    ¡°Obviously. Tomorrow, I¡¯ll get Ang to be your sparring partner. That way you can experience how strong the strongest mage really is,¡± I said.


    After leaving, I opened portal in the sky when no one can see me and I¡¯m back in the circus. Because of the fight, there are some destruction and the circus members are helping rebuilding the city. Some citizens apologizing for throwing stones at them. Though they still think that they are just members of a circus and not some special agents sent by the kingdom.


    This is good. Everyone has started to feel what freedom is. And I bet tomorrow night we will have a full attendance. That¡¯s nice.

 Chapter 672

    Chapter 672: Randy¡¯s Training


    Finally, the show is over. And the circus troupe need to gather supplies before moving to the next city.


    During our show, we have more peopleing as expected. They are mostly people who have their beloved people returned already after being enved and seek entertainment. Some still doesn¡¯t have their beloved people returned since they were bought by people from outside the city. And it was difficult to find them and return them back to their family. But the show still went on with full attendance.


    Many peopleined and said that Randy needs to be publicly executed. But we can¡¯t do that. We need him to escape from prison.


    There will be moreins if Randy escapes from prison. But I¡¯ll just leave it to Albert and Randy on how they want things to go.


    While the others are getting supplies for our next destination, which should be a few weeks away, I returned back to my mansion in the capital to see how Randy is doing.


    When I return, only Ruby is in the mansion. Ian is secretly meeting Albert while Randy is training quite far from the capital with Ang whom I invited here.


    Ian has been secretly meeting with Albert ever since he got married with Ruby. They do it because Albert needed Ian to send secret message to some people who still doesn¡¯t have Sonia¡¯s soil. Those are people that he can¡¯t trust yet.


    .....


    With his beastform, Ian can travel fast. And no one will expect that a bird flying in the sky is a beastform mage. That¡¯s why he¡¯s the best messenger that Albert has.


    ...By the way, we also don¡¯t know if birds in the sky are beastform mages or not. But as long as they got too close to us who are already expert level mages, we can tell that they are not any ordinary birds or maybe even some other creatures.


    At least now every kingdom within the alliance have expert level mage by the leader¡¯s side. Tatrama has Mustache, Consenza has Celestine, Varadis has Julia, and the king of Arturo, Fabio, is already an expert level mage. So they should be able to notice if there are some intruder in animal form. Because even if they turned into an animal, they are originally mages who have mana in their body. Unless they are trained in hiding their mana, they can be found easily.


    After greeting Ruby, I open up a portal to where Ang and Randy are training at. And when I get there, I can see something obvious. Ang defeating Randy and Randy can¡¯t do anything about it.


    ¡°So... how long have you been training?¡± I asked the two of them.


    ¡°Since after breakfast. He said that he learned a lot. Though he still can¡¯t defeat me at,¡± Ang replied.


    Randy is too tired now and he¡¯s just lying on the ground after healing himself.


    Right now, his face is already covered with tattoo. Just the right side of his face. Not the whole face.


    There are also some visible scar on his face. I guess that¡¯s what he decided. To get both scars and tattoo.


    As for his body, there are some area that has been inked. But they are still iplete. If he wants to, Randy can go and visit Hendrick toplete the tattoo. But it¡¯s not important. As long as he can disguise himself, he can finish his tattoo some other time.


    ...Seeing how he took his time with the tattoo, I guess once everything is over, he will keep the tattoos. Probably the scars as well. Well, he¡¯s also a healer. He can just heal himself if he doesn¡¯t want them anymore.


    ¡°So, how was training?¡± I asked Randy.


    ¡°Huff... I don¡¯t really get it asking from Ang. But at least the practical use of my magic is better than before,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°That¡¯s good. Candy and Ka will be able to teach you from this afternoon. You can ask them about lightning, earth, or healing magic. And what will you do after learning them all?¡± I asked.


    ¡°What do you mean?¡± Randy asked me back instead of answering.


    ¡°I mean do you want to proceed with the n sooner, or continue your training? I can also bring you to Monsters World so you can gain experience there. What do you want?¡±


    ¡°...I think I¡¯ll take that offer of going to Monsters World. Even after knowing everything I needed to know, I still need to gain some experience,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°Okay. Then once you learned everything, I¡¯ll bring you there and I will introduce you to the monsters I know there. The monsters, especially the werewolves, will be happy if you ask them for a spar. They love fighting,¡± I said.


    Though right now, the werewolf I¡¯m in contract with, Shelia, is with Jewel in Monsters World. Jewel is still trying to improve her beastform magic by learning more about other rhino type monsters there.


    Thest time I met her, she has full control of her steel rhino form and she can use steel rhino¡¯s earth magic as well. She can be considered to be at the weaker side of expert level earth mage. Just slightly weaker than the cult¡¯s average expert level mage. But that¡¯s already more than enough.


    ¡°Alright, since you¡¯re doing well, I¡¯ll leave now. Candy and Ka will arrive soon. They¡¯re traveling on their own instead of using portal so they can gain some experience. I will go to Consenza and see how the rebellion is going. I heard from Sonia that they have taken care of it,¡± I said.


    ¡°The rebellion in Consenza? First time I hear about it,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°Oh, and after the rebellion, the Albert said that there will be a meeting with other kings. If you want, you cane and meet them as well.¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll pass. Even if they can be trusted, the less people know me the better since I¡¯ll be moving independentlyter,¡± Randy said.


    I guess he won¡¯t meet Lynn and the others then. That¡¯s fine. As long as he knows that they are not enemies, it doesn¡¯t matter if he meets them or not.


    I then open up a portal directly to Lynn¡¯s location after getting her permission. I open it somewhere Randy can¡¯t see because he said that he doesn¡¯t want to meet them. Unless I have to force him obviously.


    We¡¯re in Lynn¡¯s bedroom as usual. And other than Lynn, udia and Celestine are there as well.


    ¡°So, how¡¯s it going?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Even though we keep being defensive the whole time and the one staging the coup couldn¡¯t do anything and they still haven¡¯t give up. So this morning, we started being offensive. One hour in and they gave up. So stupid,¡± Lynn said.


    ¡°...Aren¡¯t they just way too stupid? They should have learned the strength difference when they can¡¯t even get into the capital. But they only need one hour to get destroyed. So, why did you call me?¡± I asked.


    This morning, before I return to my mansion, Lynn asked me toe here after saying that the rebellion is over. She must have something for me to do.


    ¡°The continuation of the living armor. Yesterday, you said that you might not need it because you keep encountering master level mages. But that doesn¡¯t mean you will stop pretending to be a living armor, right? We want you to go to the cities that the rebels used as bases. They got tricked to join the rebellion but that doesn¡¯t mean there are no enemies there. We want you to get rid of them. Here are the pictures of the people who are heavily connected with the rebels, but there might be more. You have the freedom to decide on what to do with them,¡± udia exined to me.


    She gave me documents with pictures of the rebels that haven¡¯t been captured yet. I guess with me roaming around freely, the aftermath can be taken care of quickly.


    ¡°I understand. Victoria, you heard that?¡± I asked Victoria.


    ¡°Clearly. Summon Ray quickly so I can move! I can¡¯t wait to let loose already,¡± Victoria said.


    My schedule seems to be packed thesest few days. But now that Randy will continue his training, the rebellion is over, and the circus will continue traveling, I will have some free time again.


    But I can only get free time after I get rid of some remaining rebels. That doesn¡¯t seem to be difficult though.


    ¡°By the way, do you find any rtion of this rebellion with the cult?¡± I asked udia.


    ¡°There were some who blew their own head. A few of them got caught without the chance to blow their own head. We¡¯re currently interrogating them if the cult has anything to do with the rebellion or not. But for now, it seems like those cult members join the rebellion on their own ord and not because their higher ups asked them for it,¡± udia exined.


    That mean I need to figure it out as well during the mission. That¡¯s annoying.


    I¡¯ll do it anyway. Even if the cult is destroyed in the future, we can¡¯t guarantee that normal thugs won¡¯t annoy me when I try to live peacefully. So it¡¯s best if we can also get rid of those thugs.

 Chapter 673

    Chapter 673: Capturing the Remaining Rebels


    Victoria and I split up to capture the remains of the rebels. And we also need to investigate more if the cult is rted with this rebellion or not. But I think this Empire can handle that. So I just need to capture them all.


    Unlike the list given by Randy that says I am allowed to kill this person or just capture them, the list given by udia didn¡¯t give much description. So I need to capture as much as possible from the people in the list.


    Maybe each kingdom needs a Randy. That would be great.


    Arturo has Toni, but he didn¡¯t leave his desk job much. And he¡¯s better in politic than espionage. But he¡¯s smart enough to find traitors just from the iing information given to him. Still, he¡¯s too weak.


    Consenza has udia. She¡¯s not as capable as Randy but it¡¯s because her range is wide. Not just looking for traitors, she also need to handle many things at once. She¡¯s not as smart as Toni either, but she has taken a good care of this empire. But she can¡¯t bepared with him.


    As for Varadis, that is troublesome. They have old man Henry. An old man with a lot of experience and many tricks under his sleeve. But unfortunately, he will step off from his duty soon because of his age. I hope the next king will be good enough.


    Oh, right. The next meeting between kings will also introduce old man Henry¡¯s sessor as well. Yuria and Patricia will be introduced there as well. As for other countries, I don¡¯t think there will be any. It¡¯s because the circus haven¡¯t been to other countries than those five. We¡¯re the scout for the four kingdoms after all. To see what other countries have to offer.


    .....


    Victoria is with Ray and I move alone. Well, I¡¯m not really alone since I have Airy with me. And since she never leaves my side, my air magic became stronger whenever I used it. So it¡¯s easier for me to make the targets fall asleep.


    ¡°Airy, I feel like my air magic improves regrly every day just by being with you. Even though I¡¯m not cultivating at all, I can feel that my air element is improving little by little. Is this your doing?¡± I asked Airy.


    ¡°Maybe. I just exist. I don¡¯t know what effect I have on humans,¡± Airy said.


    And then there was a human in the past who ys around with spirits. Capturing them and releasing them before chasing after them again. What the hell is wrong with his mind? That Timmy is sure annoying.


    So, is she a monster or not? That¡¯s something we don¡¯t know. But even if they are not monsters and can¡¯t be tamed by tamers, they have feelings and can interact normally. So it won¡¯t be surprising if the cult somehow have enved them or ckmail them.


    I wear my armor and run toward the former main base of Duke who started the rebellion. Even though this ce should have been taken care of by the soldiers, there might be something else here that they miss. And I can see them with my Divine Vision. Though I won¡¯t know if the things I find is valuable or not for the investigation until we finish checking them.


    I didn¡¯t find anyone in the list, but I managed to find one man with explosive device in his mouth. I still wonder why the cult keep making their members have explosive devices in their mouth when they can be easily removed. I don¡¯t think they are that useful anymore. And the cult should have known about it.


    Maybe just the higher ups of the cult. The rest don¡¯t know much. So when they gave the order that there¡¯s no need for the explosive devices anymore, those who are far less important weren¡¯t told about it. That¡¯s why there are still some people with explosive devices in their mouth.


    Again, that¡¯s just my assumption like usual. But for me, it¡¯s good that they have explosion device in their mouth. This way, I can tell easily that they are enemies.


    And I followed this man and he enters the restaurant. I make sure that no expert level mages can notice me when I get close and try to eavesdrop on their conversation.


    And in their conversation, I heard them talking about a man on the wanted list and they are going to meet him. That¡¯s nice. I can just follow them.


    They also said some praises to the Evil God before moving. I guess they¡¯re members of the cult then. Now, if I capture the man they¡¯re going to meet, udia might be able to find if the cult is involved with the rebellion or not.


    ...Unfortunately for me, the man they¡¯re going to meet is in another city. And I can¡¯t just follow them the whole day until they meet. So I decided to move to that city right away and marked the man. Once they meet, I can find out if the cult is involved or not.


    I returned back and look for some more people, but I didn¡¯t see any one on the list or other suspicious people. So I left for another city.


    In this city, I found many people on the list already. Well, it¡¯s time to catch all of them!


    There were no master level mages at all. No wonder the rebellion is over so easily. Just Celestine alone must have killed more than half of the rebels.


    By the way, is the duke still alive? They must have captured him, right? They need information from him the most because he¡¯s the leader.


    The next day, I went to see the man that the person with explosive device is going to meet. The people I saw yesterday already arrive. And not just them. some more people also gathering together in the ce where the man in the wanted list is waiting.


    It seems to be a big meeting of cult members. I can tell because there are more people with explosive device here.


    ¡°What¡¯s with those people and explosives in their mouth? Don¡¯t they know that those things are dangerous and can explode if not taken care of carefully?¡± Airy asked naively.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s the thing with the cult. To protect their secrets, they chose death,¡± I replied.


    ¡°That¡¯s just sad. Why was the cult created if they don¡¯t care about the people at all? Do they be like this just because they don¡¯t like something and want to destroy the world for it?¡± Airy asked.


    ¡°Oh, that¡¯s a good question. Let¡¯s see... among some people from the cult, I know that some of them lost something important to them, forced to join the cult, or just because of their greed they joined the cult. I don¡¯t know at all, but they should know that we are hunting them down with the intent to kill. So, as long as they are still with the cult, we have to assume that they are enemies that we have to kill or capture. They should know that we are going for the kill if they stay with the cult. And they decided to stay. That¡¯s all I need to know. The rest is for the others to think,¡± I said. Though I didn¡¯t really answer that question.


    Of course I also think a lot about that. But it¡¯s annoying to ask them if my guess is right or not. So I just lock those thoughts deep in my mind and only do what I needed. To destroy the cult. Even if I¡¯m going to be used like a pawn.


    But I¡¯m not a pawn that can be defeated easily. If the king tries to betray this pawn, this pawn won¡¯t be silent about it.


    ¡°Being a human is difficult,¡± Airy said.


    ¡°It¡¯s not. It¡¯s just that humans are being that loves toplicate things. And that makes it harder for humans to live,¡± I said.


    ¡°Well, I don¡¯t mind to follow you all the time. But you need to feed me with sweets, alright?¡± Airy said.


    ¡°You don¡¯t need food to live though. But I guess I can buy some cakes for the others as well,¡± I said.


    I returned to the capital of Consenza and reported about the big meeting with the cult. And when I came back, I¡¯m not alone. Lynn, udia, Celestine, and many soldiers from Consenza surrounded the ce they are gathering at.


    ¡°Since all of you are here, I don¡¯t think I need to participate. I¡¯ll just be watching you guys for now.¡±


    I left them so they will take care of everything. A matter of a country needs to be solved by the country itself. There¡¯s no need to use outsider like me. Though I will help if necessary.


    A huge battle urred. But the civilians have been evacuated.


    The Empress herself is attending the battle. She didn¡¯t help much but her presence is enough to improve the morale of the soldiers.


    After watching for a little longer, I can confirm that they don¡¯t need my help. So I return my act as the living armor.


    I managed to capture everyone before the next circus performance in the next city. I guess this is it for my act as a living armor in Consenza. Where else should I go?

 Chapter 674

    Chapter 674: It¡¯s a Triceratops


    One weekter, when the circus is close to the next city at the border close to Arturo, Randy told me that he has learned enough and it¡¯s time to test it in a real battle. So he wants me to send him to Monsters World.


    ¡°Sure. I heard from the werewolves that there are also many new unexplored dungeons they found. I told them to not clear the dungeon so we can get people to train there. If you want to, you can ask the werewolves about it,¡± I said.


    ¡°That would be good. Thanks to you I have met your friends and also the vampires living in Cassau. But is it really okay to let monsters roam around in human country? What will happen if they decided to hunt other humans for blood?¡± Randy asked curiously.


    ¡°It won¡¯t happen. First, it¡¯s because there are many enemies. From criminals such as thieves to members of the cult. I told them that the vampires are free to join the guard in any city they want so they can drink the blood of the criminals. Second, they are loyal to their queen, Arin. Some of them were actually following the vampire king before I took them here, but now they have gotten along with Arin and the others and they agreed to let Arin be the representative of the vampires here. Lastly, Arin is addicted to drinking my blood. And she knows that she can¡¯t defeat me. So as long as I can give her some of my blood in exchange for her loyalty, it should be fine,¡± I said.


    There¡¯s also the fact that the vampires have enjoyed human cultures so much. And I taught them that if they kill human, they can¡¯t get the dresses they want anymore. Though that ended up with some vampires became tailors to make their own dresses. But many have given up because it was too difficult for the vampires.


    ¡°Your blood, huh? I see. And with that blood transfusion that you invented, it¡¯s easier for them to get blood since you can store it in the hospital. But what if the vampires decided to steal blood bags from the hospital?¡± Randy asked again.


    ¡°They won¡¯t. It has been a while since they came to this world. And they have seen enough to tell that I¡¯m stronger and scarier than them. If they decided to steal some, I will hunt them down to wherever they run to. I have that power. Though it will be bad if they can somehow hide like this Evil God we¡¯re fighting against.¡± I said.


    .....


    ¡°...I guess you really can do that. Then, can I ask you for another favor? Once I¡¯m done training in Monsters World, before I return back to this world, I want to spar with you,¡± Randy requested.


    I guess he¡¯s interested in seeing me in action. He has never seen me fighting after all. He only heard about me mostly from his sparring partner, which are Ang, Ka, Candy, and few others, and they all told him that I¡¯m much stronger than him. Even Ang couldn¡¯t defeat me. Though if it¡¯s her, I think she might be able to do it in the future.


    ¡°You can ask me right now though. But let¡¯s do it as you say. I also have a promise to spar with my disciple who has just finished her training in Monsters World,¡± I said.


    Jewel told me via Sonia that she has finished her training. And she thinks that her beastform right now is the strongest one she could get after traveling around in Monsters World for a while. That¡¯s why she wanted to test it against the strongest person she knows. Her master, me.


    ¡°Hmm... she¡¯s with my familiar, so maybe you can spar with her. She¡¯s the strongest werewolf I know. Just ask her,¡± I said.


    ¡°Maybe I will. But I¡¯ll watch your match first,¡± Randy said.


    After he finished getting ready, I opened a portal to Monsters World. To the Monsters Vige where monsters of three races are living together. Werewolves, elves, and angels.


    ¡°This is Monsters World? They look just like human though,¡± Randy said as he looked at the monsters living there.


    ¡°Yeah. Oh, that¡¯s Shelia. My werewolf familiar. She¡¯s running over here with... Is that Jewel?¡±


    I can see outside the vige that Shelia, who is in her wolf form, is running over here. She said that she was with Jewel, so I looked at the person next to her.


    Wait, that¡¯s not really a person. And Jewel is not transformed into any type of rhinoceros that I know. She¡¯s big, and she has three horn. That¡¯s no longer rhinoceros! That¡¯s a Triceratops!


    ¡°...I guess she transformed so much that she bes dinosaur. She looks tougher now,¡± I said.


    ¡°If a lizard can be a dragon, why can¡¯t a rhino be a triceratops?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Shouldn¡¯t it be that lizard bes dinosaur? Oh, she¡¯s not stopping. I guess the spar is already begun. Randy, move aside,¡± I said.


    To make sure that the vige is safe, I run toward the exit to face her there. Randy followed me at a safe distance. And seeing that we¡¯re here and didn¡¯t greet them, the werewolves, elves, and angels got interested. And they finally get it after seeing a triceratops and a wolf running here.


    Shelia over there also moved aside and returns back to her werewolf form. She wants to watch the fight as well.


    I stopped and prepare myself to receive her attack. And I just waited for her.


    She¡¯s charging at me with her horns. Let¡¯s see how strong she has be.


    There are three horns facing the front side. One on the nose, and two others on the forehead. And when Jewel is right in front of me, I grabbed the horn on her nose and stop it.


    But I got pushed back. Even after using Aura of an Aura Master, I still got pushed back for about five meters. She¡¯s that strong now.


    And it¡¯s not just her physical strength as a beastform mage. She has the help of the trait of the monster she transformed into. The ground under her feet is actually helping her to push me. But after I got pushed for five meters, I stopped her.


    That¡¯s not the end. She used the power of her head and neck to lift me up. As I only use my strength to stop her, I can¡¯t do anything when I got lifted and thrown into the air. But that¡¯s not a good idea.


    ¡°Do you think it¡¯s a good idea to throw someone into the air when you know that they can freely move there?¡±


    As soon as I got thrown, I kicked the air so I can go directly to her back trying to hit Jewel there. But she was quick as well.


    She didn¡¯t dodge me by moving, but she undo her transformation and now she¡¯s in her human form. Wait, it¡¯s not her human form. It¡¯s her hybrid form where she wears armor.


    ¡°I KNOW THAT! AND I EXPECT THAT!¡± Jewel shouted as she throws a punch with her right.


    But before her fist could reach me, she used lightning magic on my right side at the same time. She is using feint.


    Well, it¡¯s not really feint because both attacks are real. She want to hit me with both her fist and her lightning magic.


    But that¡¯s still easy for me to dodge. And I don¡¯t need to move much. I just need to grab the fist she¡¯s throwing at me and pull it so she loses her bnce.


    Because she didn¡¯t expect to lose her bnce, she is in distress. And her lightning magic misses. And I put my fist on her cheek telling her that the match is over.


    ¡°Good strategy. If the opponent is not me. Though your screaming is louder than ever,¡± I said.


    ¡°AAAH! I THOUGHT OF THE PLAN TO BEAT MASTER THE WHOLE NIGHT BUT I CAN¡¯T EVEN GIVE HIM A SOLID HIT!¡± Jewel shouted.


    Man, she¡¯s getting louder and louder. She¡¯s even louder than the audience who are pping after watching the match.


    ¡°Using both fist and lightning at the same time. That might be good for me as well.¡±


    I heard what Randy is saying to himself. I guess he can also learn something from Jewel even when her lightning magic is still weaker than Candy¡¯s


    ¡°Hmm? Master, who is he?¡± Jewel asked.


    ¡°He¡¯s Randy. Albert¡¯s cousin. He¡¯s here because he said that he wants to train here before his mission,¡± I introduced Randy to everyone.


    ¡°Hey! Wanna fight?!¡±


    ¡°Fight me instead!¡±


    ¡°No! Me!¡±


    After I introduced Randy saying that he¡¯s here to train, the werewolves who loves battle asked him for a spar. He bes popr right away. And no one here cares about his scars or tattoo. Except the curious Jewel.


    ¡°Alright. Randy, I will leave now. Jewel, what about you?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I will leave as well! I have been here testing myself against monsters so much that I got used to fighting them in close range. The cult is mostly mages. I need to return and retrain myself in fighting against mages!¡± Jewel said. She has returned to her original human form now.


    ¡°Good. Then see you guyster! Oh, and here¡¯s some food from Lina. Enjoy them,¡± I said as I opened a portal to get the monsters here some food.


    And now, the werewolves attention is not at Randy anymore. But to the food that I brought over.


    I said good luck to Randy as I return with Jewel to our world. Just the two of us even though Shelia said that she wants toe as well.


    I guess she wants to be the first one to fight Randy. I hope she won¡¯t kill him identally.

 Chapter 675

    Chapter 675: Picking up All the Country Leaders


    Two weeks after I sent Randy to Monsters World for him to train and gain experience, and it¡¯s time for the meeting between kings. Yuria and Patricia will be introduced there. There¡¯s also the issue of whether spirits can be tamed or not, and also about old man Henry¡¯s sessor.


    ¡°I¡¯m so nervous. This is the first time since our country opened up and we will finally meet other kings.¡±


    That¡¯s what Yuria keep saying to herself ever since I arrive here.


    It¡¯s obvious that I will be the one in charge of picking everyone and bring them to the meeting spot. And the meeting spot this time is in Varadis since we¡¯re talking about old man Henry¡¯s sessor.


    ¡°I think you¡¯re fine. There¡¯s no need to overthink it. But is it fine for your country? Your title as president is something that anyone can get as long as they receive people¡¯s recognition, right? You might be able to meet us now, but in the future, when you are no longer the president, what will happen?¡± Shirley asked.


    ¡°Oh, that¡¯s easy. And it¡¯s something I also learned from Victoria as well. Thanks to the TV. We will broadcast any information about the country. Not only about the result of our meeting with other countries, but also the situation in other cities so everyone is up-to-date with the recent issues. If someone wants to be the president in the future, watching TV and learning from the news is important. There¡¯s also newspaper as well, so it will be fine,¡± Yuria said.


    ¡°I see. That way, your country might be more advanced than ours. I think that¡¯s something good,¡± Shirley said.


    .....


    From time to time, Yuria would ask me to lend her Victoria for a bit. I guess this is the reason why.


    Still, that¡¯s amazing. This way, even if the president is changing, they will know what happened previously. If it¡¯s a king, only a few people would know what happen. But this country lets everyone knows about it.


    ¡°Yeah. Justst week, the people learned about the truth of the Evil God Cult. Using media such as TV will make it easier for normal people to rte to the situation in their surrounding. And newspaper will help as well, but watching the news from TV is easier since people can do other things while watching,¡± Victoria said proudly.


    Why is she so proud? Whatever.


    And Victoria said that there¡¯s a set time when the TVs will be turned on. And if there are no news, the one inside the screen will just say that everything is okay. There¡¯s no need to spread fake news.


    But using this method means that it¡¯s easier to spread lies and fake news. So for now, the president herself needs to make sure the news to be spread are all have been confirmed to be the truth. And she still need to keep confidential information from the people as well. She will do all that alone until she can get someone to do it.


    ¡°About that, I will bring some people that will help me. they will also follow me to the meeting along with Patricia. Is that okay?¡± Yuria asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s okay. The others also will bring some people. Though the meeting is still a secret. So make sure that they can really be trusted and can keep a secret. We can¡¯t let the cult know that we have someone who can freely use portal,¡± Shirley said.


    Yeah. My portal is... no. Everything about me is a secret weapon to use against the cult.


    After Yuria and everyone from Rygis is ready, I opened a portal and brought them to a waiting room in the castle in Varadis. And I opened another portal to greet Albert next.


    ¡°You¡¯ve brought President Yuria already? That means Shirley is there, right?¡± Albert asked me.


    ¡°Yeah. She said that she¡¯s going to meet Julia before the meeting start. So, who will you take along with you?¡± I asked.


    ¡°The usual. Marie and Miguel. Shirley is already there. And in this asion, I¡¯ll bring Hector as well. Though once the meeting is over, I want you to get Hector back here right away,¡± Albert said.


    Now, who is Hector again? Is this guy the Prime Minister? Maybe.


    Hmm... ying with the kings all the time make me forget even the Prime Minister.


    Whatever. I just need to interact with Albert for Tatrama.


    Next is Arturo. And I need to bring Fabio, Toni, Bernard, and even Luna, Carmen, and Harold. Kron and Breezy are there as well so I will bring them. I also need to introduce the spirit siblings to everyone.


    After that, it¡¯s Consenza. It¡¯s the usual Lynn, udia, and Celestine¡¯s group.


    And after I brought the representative from Consenza to Varadis, I no longer need to open a portal anymore. I just walked inside the castle casually while all the servants and guards there already know who I am. They respected me and some of them were afraid of me. Some even told me that their beloved friends or family were saved from a disease because of my knowledge.


    Wait, how did they know that I¡¯m the one spreading those knowledge? Did old man Henry spread them?


    But if it¡¯s just a rumor of me being a doctor that was spread, I guess that¡¯s fine.


    Imagine this. I became a famous doctor and surgeon. And I never thought that the Evil God that I¡¯m thinking of killing everyday to be sick. So one of the cult members seek for my help to cure the Evil God. And when I meet him, I will sh Victosword around his neck and kill him.


    And that¡¯s it. The story is over.


    That would be great for me. But life is not as easy as that. Even with my knowledge and skill, if there are any doctors among the cult, they can learn it easily. After all, I¡¯m not even the best doctor in my past life. Anyone can learn about it in a few years if I don¡¯t speed things up.


    Even more if it¡¯s the cult. They won¡¯t care about how much sacrifice they need to make even the littlest progress.


    If there¡¯s a doctor in the cult, they will cruelly use humans as experiment to find a cure if the Evil God is sick. So my wish to kill him easily won¡¯t be granted.


    I finally enter the king¡¯s office where old man Henry is waiting. And beside him is a man older than me. he seems to be in his thirties. He must be the one who will seed old man Henry as the king.


    ¡°I¡¯m here! Old man, everyone has arrive now. They¡¯re entering the meeting room right now. You¡¯re thest one,¡± I said right away as soon as I enter his office. And I saw old man Henry¡¯s normal expression as if it¡¯s something that he has experienced many times, and also a shocked expression of his son who never thought that I would be someone like this.


    ¡°...This guy is the amazing surgeon father talked about? He¡¯s so rude,¡± the man said in disgust. If I¡¯m a monkey I would throw my feces at his face.


    ...That¡¯s just me insulting myself, right?


    ¡°Don¡¯t be like that. It¡¯s good that we¡¯re at war with the cult right now. If not, he is just a dangerous person. If we leave him be, who knows what we will do. But now that we know him well, as long as we continue as his friends, he won¡¯t cause any problem. Just know that if not for the cult, he is the most dangerous person in the world. Picking a fight against him can only mean losing everything. But we know what he wants. As long as we help him destroy the cult and promise him peaceful life after that, he won¡¯t cause any trouble,¡± old man Henry exined.


    ¡°Really? If father says so,¡± the man said. But I don¡¯t think he believed old man Henry so easily.


    ¡°Is this the guy who will seed you? Don¡¯t you think he¡¯s so rude?¡±


    This time I asked old man Henry if his attitude is okay for a king.


    ¡°You both are rude. Don¡¯t worry. There¡¯s a reason I picked him. The only thing he needs right now is experience. As long as he has gained experience, I¡¯m sure he could be a decent king. And I won¡¯t retire right away. I will just give him most of my job while I supervise him,¡± old man Henry said.


    A decent king? Not a good or a great one? I guess I shouldn¡¯t expect much from this guy then.


    ¡°Sure. If that¡¯s what you want. Let¡¯s go. And you, future king. This will be your first time experiencing portal. Get used to it since you will see it many times in the future,¡± I said.


    All the country leaders are already in the meeting room together with the people they brought. Other than them are my friends. Ka, Ang, Candy, Jewel, Sophie, and the others.


    It¡¯s to show to the new king and to the president who has just be our new friend that these people are someone they should never make a mess with if they don¡¯t want to fight me.


    ¡°Oh, beautifuldy over there! It must be fate that we meet! I¡¯m the soon-to-be king of Varadis. And I im you to be the queen of Varadis!¡±


    ...The next king of Varadis just grabbed Sophie¡¯s hand and as he confessed. He just makes me into his enemy. Let¡¯s kill him and pick a better person to be the next king.

 Chapter 676

    Chapter 676: Stupid Future King


    ¡°Sigh... just after I told him to mind his manner. William, I told you to not make Roy your enemy. But you just straight up hitting on his girlfriend. I¡¯m sorry everyone, he¡¯s stillck many things,¡± old man Henry said.


    So his name is William. Should I kill him? Right away?


    Hearing that Sophie is my girlfriend, he only lets go of her hand and smiled confidently. Just where did that confident came from?


    It¡¯s good if he¡¯s confident because he¡¯s smart. But if he¡¯s confident because he¡¯s an idiot, I will veto old man Henry¡¯s decision to make William as his sessor.


    ¡°Ah, there¡¯s a kid as well here. Here, I¡¯ll give you some candies. Listen to your mom and don¡¯t cause any trouble, okay? We¡¯re having a serious meeting.¡±


    This time, he thinks that Patricia is a young girl. That¡¯s wrong. She¡¯s the oldest human here. Older than old man Henry who is the oldest king in this room.


    Patricia doesn¡¯t like it how someone younger than her granddaughter called her a little kid. But she keeps her manner. Though she doesn¡¯t know what to do but just ept the candies offered to her.


    .....


    The people that Yuria brought with her are obviously angry at how William treats their master level mage like that. But Yuria stopped her. She¡¯s new here and she thinks that staying quiet is the best choice in this situation.


    As I was about tosh out at him, he quickly move again and this time toward Julia.


    ¡°Oh, Julia! My expert level mage sister! The participant in the tournament who voluntarily lost her match to protect my father! The sister that I love the most! I¡¯m d to be here and meet you! Even though we¡¯re family, it¡¯s a very rare situation for us to meet! Let¡¯s take a seat. Now, let¡¯s start the discussion, shall we? What¡¯s the topic for everyone toe here?¡± William then sat at the seat for the people from Varadis.


    ...He¡¯s an idiot. He actually thinks that Julia gave up the tournament to protect old man Henry. But she actually lost fair and square. I can see that Julia is angry at him.


    The others here except for those who came from Rygis sighed at his stupidity. I don¡¯t even want to kill him anymore. How about humiliate him?


    And it¡¯s best for other countries if he¡¯s the next king. This way, the other kings knows that Varadis¡¯ future king is just a pushover. And William can only nod and obey next time they have a meeting once we humiliate him here.


    After watching William¡¯s rude manner, old man Henry whispered something that only I can hear.


    ¡°Sorry about that stupid boy. He didn¡¯t even care about the tournament. During the tournament, he just spent his time with women he found. He¡¯s actually really smart, but he¡¯s too proud andzy. Especially after knowing that Julia is an expert level mage. We¡¯re here so the others can see if he¡¯s worthy to be the next king or not. But I guess worthiness no longer matter. William will be used by the other kings for the rest of his life. But that¡¯s fine. I already have someone suitable to be the Prime Minister. Just because he¡¯s not a member of the royal family, he can¡¯t be the king. So I actually feel jealous after hearing Rygis country that have the people decide their leader.¡±


    That¡¯s a long whisper. But I guess he has prepared for it. And I think the other kings except for Yuria already knows about William seeing how they smiled.


    Though it seems like no one is interested in starting the discussion. I guess I¡¯ll do it.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s start from the new member of the alliance. Patricia, I¡¯d like you to be the spokesperson from Rygis,¡± I said to Patricia.


    Although Yuria is the president, I need Patricia to introduce herself so William knows what he did wrong.


    Patricia stands up and ready to speak. And I can see that William seems to beughing seeing how a little girl is the representative of some unknown country. But his smile disappear soon after hearing Patricia¡¯s introduction. And his expression turned into fear and despair.


    ¡°Nice to meet you all. I¡¯m Patricia. A master level wind mage who is protecting Rygis. And some of you have guessed, and probably have heard of the news as well, bing master level mage will gain longevity. We¡¯re not immortal, but our growth will be slowed down. Although I look like this, I¡¯m the oldest one here and I even have a granddaughter. Pleasure to meet you all.¡±


    That¡¯s what Patricia said. Everyone already expected that she¡¯s the master level mage, but they never expect that Patricia would look that young. They must have thought that Patricia is another person that Yuria brought.


    ¡°M-master level mage?! No way! That can¡¯t happen! She can¡¯t be a master level mage!¡± William shouted angrily.


    ¡°Of course she can. And since I don¡¯t think you notice it, most of the people here are expert level mage. Even the king of Arturo is an expert level mage. I know that you¡¯re proud of your sister, but you made a lot of mistake just a few steps after entering this room. Including the fact that Yuria actually lost the tournament fair and square. Now that you know, mind your manner. We¡¯re not here because Varadis is the top kingdom. So stop act stupid and learn how to be a king. Or you won¡¯t know what will kill you.¡±


    I put pressure on him. Not with Aura. Just a little bit of killing intent. And he¡¯s scared shitless. Except the shitless part might be wrong. But I don¡¯t want to make this ce dirty so I remove my pressure before anything cane out.


    ¡°King Henry, congrattion on deciding your sessor. I hope our kingdoms will be able to continue this friendly rtionship in the future,¡± Fabio said.


    Oh, they like it how the future king of Varadis seems easy. I guess his fate in international rtion is decided. I¡¯m sorry about the future of Varadis. I hope he can be a decent king for the people at least.


    Now that William is afraid to even speak. I don¡¯t think anything we say will be heard. But old man Henry is by his side and keep telling him to listen whenever he hang his head down. Good job, old man.


    The topic is as we have said before. Introducing Rygis and the president. Including how the country works since the the other kings don¡¯t know how a country without king works. Old man Henry is listening carefully here. But I don¡¯t feel bad at William.


    After that is the issue with spirits. I introduce Airy and Breezy who is with Kron. And I told them that there might be other spirits. Including other air spirits and other wind spirits.


    ¡°If they have just one spirit with them, there¡¯s no doubt that there will be more master level magesing. But if there¡¯s only one type of elemental spirit, we can at least prepare countermeasure against that element. Roy, you have faced several master level mage already. What do you think?¡± Albert asked me.


    ¡°They have different element that has reached master level. So I don¡¯t think that they only have one type of spirit. But if they can somehow get Magic Stones easily, they can still reach master level faster than ordinary people,¡± I said.


    The deeper we got into discussion, the more William realizes the seriousness of the issues we¡¯re talking about.


    And then we move on to the next topic. Varadis¡¯ next king.


    ¡°This is William. The one I chose as my sessor,¡± old man Henry said.


    That¡¯s it. There¡¯s no more introduction. And William is too afraid to even say anything anymore. His sister just sighed seeing him begging for help.


    ¡°You need to learn some manner, future king. Though I¡¯ll try my best with all magic, Aura, and medical knowledge to make sure that old man Henry can still reign as the king for a few more decades. You¡¯re simr to your father in that you¡¯re seeking women. And even the former king of Arturo has a harem. But if you think that you can get away after flirting with my girlfriends, you¡¯re wrong. Not only because I will hunt you down. But because most of them are at least as strong as your sister Julia. You understand?¡±


    William nodded his head rapidly after hearing my threat. He¡¯s still asking for his father and his sister¡¯s help. But they both know that I¡¯m not someone to mess with. There¡¯s no way they would pick his side.


    After that, we started talking about what more we learned from the cult. Lynn started it by saying that they joined the rebellion, but the rebellion is not instigated by the cult. Some cult members just joined the rebellion for different reason. Like wishing for violence. Or probably to speed things up in destroying the world.


    Albert listened everything carefully so he can detect if someone is saying lies. And he also asks the others if they have recently got interact with anyone from the cult. He also asks William and he replied by saying that he never meet anyone from the cult.


    Albert didn¡¯t see any lies from his word so I guess he can be trusted for now. But Albert didn¡¯t leak his ability to detect lies to other. Even to William. Because there¡¯s no need for more people to learn about his ability.


    For now, the future king of Varadis has been tamed. That¡¯s the main goal of this discussion that even old man Henry acknowledge of.


    Other thing is that we learned that William also willing to fight the cult. And it¡¯s not because of my pressure. At least he¡¯s smart enough to know who is the real enemy.

 Chapter 677

    Chapter 677: The Meeting Ends


    William has stopped being cocky. And the meeting progressing really well. Each of us received new information, but none of them are about the cult¡¯s headquarter. That¡¯s suck.


    Yuria is no longer nervous. And she¡¯s doing well as a representative of her country. She¡¯s currently negotiating about exchanging the wind Magic Stones with from other countries.


    Also, there are also issues with other smaller kingdom. Although the circus hasn¡¯t gone there yet, some countries have contacted those kingdom and ask for alliance. All of them rejected the alliance politely, so there¡¯s no need to force them to join. But we still need to investigate if those country has connection with the cult or not. So the circus will still go there.


    The discussion of the main topics is over. And we¡¯re mostly in questions and answers session.


    ¡°Excuse me, but won¡¯t it be difficult if we only have one person responsible for transportation? We can¡¯t rely all the time with Roy,¡± William asked politely.


    I guess he¡¯s no longer acting cocky anymore. He started to talk politely to everyone.


    ¡°As long as I¡¯m still alive, especially if it¡¯s rted to the cult, you are free to use me as transportation method. But in case I can¡¯t do it for some reason, you can ask that guy up there to take you where you want to go. Using portal is faster, but he¡¯s still much faster than any other method of transportation.¡±


    .....


    I pointed my finger to the ceiling. Everyone is looking above but no one is seeing anything. Until the guy I pointed at showed himself.


    ¡°Oh? It¡¯s my turn to show myself?¡±


    The new friends we have looked above to see that the empty space above us is actually upied by one huge flying serpent. All of them are shocked. Except for us who have gotten used to Spot.


    ¡°It¡¯s not even my real size but you¡¯re already shocked? You need to get used to it quickly. I¡¯m Spot. Half sea serpent, and half sky serpent. Nice to meet some of you for the first time. I¡¯d like to show off my real size, but this ce is too small,¡± Spot said.


    Seeing Spot above him, William shows his cowardice and start screaming as he looks at Spot and points his finger at the giant serpent.


    ¡°AAA! Monster! There¡¯s a monster there! Julia! Please kill that thing!¡±


    Haha. He¡¯s embarrassing both old man Henry and Julia. Even though I have told him that we can use Spot to help us in transportation, he¡¯s still afraid. Though the him who was annoying turned into hrious William. That¡¯s quite funny to me.


    The guests from Rygis are also surprised. Including Patricia. Even though she must have somehow sensed Spot¡¯s presence because she¡¯s a master level mage.


    ¡°Hmm... I forgot to ask you to introduce the monsters as well. I never thought of it since all of them are obeying you. But I guess it doesn¡¯t matter anymore,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Right. Then I¡¯ll say it now. I actually made alliance with monsters as well. There¡¯s a wholemunity of werewolves, elves, angels, vampires, and some other individual monsters. Just know that if they didn¡¯t say anything, they are enemies. I have told them all to not attack humans unless they are criminals. Like some thugs or members of the cult. Most of them are in Monsters World. A world that summoners can actuallye and go easily. Some are in this world, but they are under supervision. So it¡¯s safe for us in the alliance,¡± I said casually.


    I don¡¯t need to bring Shelia and the others here. I just need them to trust me that what I¡¯m saying is right. If they don¡¯t, I don¡¯t care. At least I have warned them that even though we have monsters on our side, not all monsters are friends. There are more of them as enemies than friends. So they need to be on guard toward all monsters.


    ¡°It¡¯s not normal! This is not normal at all! Why is there no normal person at all in this room?!¡±


    I thought that he has stopped being cocky. But William is still annoying to the end.


    ¡°A tamer can tame a monster, right? I just found a way to befriend some monster instead of using magic. That¡¯s all there is to it. It¡¯s actually quite normal to make friend. As long as the monsters canmunicate with us through words, it¡¯s not impossible,¡± I said.


    ¡°But it¡¯s still not normal! What cult?! What Aura?! What giant serpent?! What if it¡¯s all just in your head?! What if the cult didn¡¯t actually want to destroy the world?!¡± William keepsining. He has no dignity at all as the future king of Varadis.


    ¡°That means whatever they¡¯re going to do, destroying the world is the only way to get what they want. And we have already have evidences that they are dangerous. Even if they are not going to destroy the world, we have more than enough reason to start a war against them,¡± I said.


    William doesn¡¯t seem to understand the weight of the situation. The cult has attacked all of the countries of the people here. Even in his kingdom. And that¡¯s the reason why old man Henry picked him to be the next king. Because the previous candidate wants him to die.


    ¡°William. You¡¯re embarrassing us. You remember about how many of your siblings died in a single night, right? I have told you that they are rted to the cult and are targeting me. And I won¡¯t be the only target since we have seen what they do to Arturo. They made Harold¡¯s sons and daughters fighting and killing each other. That can happen to you as well. And we¡¯re trying to prevent anything like that from happening ever again. You¡¯re still stupid today. That¡¯s why I need you to join this meeting in hope you can be a bit brighter,¡± old man Henry said.


    About the case where many of his siblings died, it¡¯s all Spot who killed them easily. With just a single breath, he destroyed even the mountain near there.


    Still, this William is too stupid. I feel like he has nothing for him to protect. And that¡¯s the worst trait if he wants to be a king.


    And then Albert started to talk.


    ¡°William. I¡¯m younger than you but I¡¯m already responsible for my kingdom. And I will tell you why you are here. It¡¯s to make us from other kingdoms think that you are just a pushover. And it works well. In the future, when you be the king, we will continue to think of you as a pushover. But even if you¡¯re bad in international rtionship, a king has to take care of his people and his country. Do you think you have what it takes to be a king? If not, then I suggest you to give up from ascending to the throne. It will be a loss for us since the pushover will be gone, but I don¡¯t want the people of Varadis to suffer because of your idiocy.¡±


    Albert is being straightforward and says that William is not going to be a good king at this point. It¡¯s a shame that we won¡¯t have a pushover that we can give order easily if William decided to give up. But I guess this is for the best as well.


    If William still persist to be a king and he ended up not doing a good job in it, I might not have a peaceful life that I want.


    I already got the kings to promise me a peaceful life after the cult is destroyed. But it won¡¯t be for long if William is the king and he¡¯s still acting stupid. I guess it¡¯s good that Albert reminds him about it.


    William just sat there speechless. Old man Henry should have gotten a candidate for the king much earlier than this. But too many things happened and he can only decide the future king recently. So William missed a lot of things that he needs to know.


    He can learn from now. But if he¡¯s still aiming for my girlfriends, I will kill him.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s something that all leader of a country has to go through. Since old man Henry will still continue reigning as the king, we don¡¯t have to worry about William currently. He¡¯s old man Henry¡¯s problem, not ours. He can still learn by watching old man Henry works. Anyway, is there anything else that we can talk about today?¡±


    Fabio swiftly changes the topic. I guess this is more important. And he needs to teach William to take care of the most important thing first rather than thinking about other useless stuffs.


    ¡°Oh, the circus has just left that small kingdom near Arturo. That kingdom doesn¡¯t seem to have any connection with the cult. Each of you will have a more detailed report from the agents in the circus. Except for Yuria. We can¡¯t just ept new recruits for the circus mid-tour. But don¡¯t worry. If there¡¯s anything important, we will inform you as well via Sonia,¡± I said.


    The circus is now in Arturo¡¯s territory. And I told the kings that we are going to reach Bernard¡¯s territory soon. Luna then can watch the circus there. She looks so happy when I said that. I¡¯ll bring the other children as well to watch.


    With that, the meeting is over. And I brought everyone back to their home while I will stay in Varadis for a while. There are some doctors who wants to meet me and ask me some questions here.


    But it¡¯s still troubling. We still haven¡¯t found any clues about the cult. When can we ever destroy them?

 Chapter 678

    Chapter 678: Humans in Monsters World


    ¡°That was a good show. It¡¯s a shame that Fabio is too busy and can¡¯t watch the show.¡±


    The show in the city Bernard is in charge of is over. It went well without any problem. And I greeted Bernard after the show is over.


    He told me how it¡¯s a shame that the king is busy. But I can understand that. At least I hope he can make appearance during the show in the capital. He should. He even watched my show in Cassau. And it will be in his city. Though that will be in a few months until we arrive there.


    Other than Bernard and his wife, Carmen and Luna were here as well. So I also brought n, Lana, Daniel, and the children from the orphanage. Harold who has retired from his position is here as well. Though I can tell that he¡¯s focused more on the performance of our female members. But Carmen was there with him to hit him every time he¡¯s ncing at the girl lustfully.


    Now that I have known him for a while already, I still can¡¯t believe that he used to be a king. He must have a lot of stress and can only be relieved now.


    It was horrible back when I found him. Getting injured all over his body and he couldn¡¯t even stand. It took him a few months until he can walk on his own.


    But he should be happy to have Carmen by his side and not looking for other women. Though thanks to Carmen watching him, Harold is not like that stupid William who thinks he can do anything he wants without repercussion. But I don¡¯t think he¡¯d dare to do it again.


    .....


    ¡°We¡¯ll be staying in this city for a while to gather supplies for our next journey. Though I will probably roaming around. It¡¯s a good time for the living armor to y in Tatrama since the circus has left the kingdom,¡± I said.


    ¡°I see. Take care then,¡± Bernard said.


    But before he left the circus tent, Sonia appears right in front of us bringing new reports. Something that could be dangerous for us.


    ¡°Roy. We found humans in Monsters World. Randy and several werewolves are tracking them for afar, but since they can¡¯t get any closer. We don¡¯t know what they¡¯re ning yet.¡±


    Humans? In Monsters World already? Oh shit. If the cult decided to gather up more power from the Monsters World, that might be dangerous. Even if master level mages are dangerous, some monsters might actually be stronger than master level mages. Like Andro the Kaiser Dragon for example.


    If they can force powerful monsters to submit to them, there¡¯s no need at all for the cult to recruit more members. Maybe the currently frequent Evil God Cult recruitment that I encountered before was actually a distraction for us to think that they are developing their strength here. But in truth, they are actually in Monsters World.


    This is bad. Which mean they have realized that summoner can open a portal to Monsters World. Or maybe, the thing that the Professor invented, the one called Rocket Ship by Victoria, is finished by someone else. And that thing can go back and forth between this and the moon. Taking people or even monsters with it.


    ¡°What?! In Monsters World?! That¡¯s bad, isn¡¯t it? Who¡¯s there right now?¡±


    Harold who was talking with Carmen heard Sonia and asked me who¡¯s in Monsters World right now.


    ¡°Other than the monsters, there¡¯s only one agent that I know to be in that world for training. He¡¯s Randy. Albert¡¯s cousin. An amazing guy who is both smart and strong. Though he¡¯s currently sharpening his magic in Monsters World. After all, He just learned about magic control recently,¡± I said.


    ¡°Oh, I think I have heard about him before from Albert¡¯s father. He said that that boy could be a better king than Albert. But he chose to be a lord of a small territory,¡± Harold said.


    I guess Harold knows about Randy. Randy is still the nephew of the former king of Tatrama back when he was still in the capital. So it¡¯s normal for a king of another country to know about him.


    Randy is so good that he learned a bit of magic control by himself, but what he learned is not for fighting. Still, after the others taught him a bit, he learns everything by himself. And that¡¯s amazing. Just a little more time, and he might be able to think about using magic control by himself.


    ...Wait, if that¡¯s the case, doesn¡¯t it mean that he could be the one who invented about magic control teaching in my past life? But I have never heard about him before though. Well, it¡¯s him after all. He might be using some kind of alias.


    If he is that strong and smart in my past life, he might be the reason why Tatrama is the longest to fight back against the cult. But in the end, he failed. And both our world and Monsters World are destroyed as a result and bringing me back into the past.


    ¡°He said that he won¡¯t show himself to the kings after I invited him. It¡¯s best if less people know about him. But he said that you and old man Henry might know about him since Albert¡¯s father used to boast about him, so I can tell you about him. Anyway, I¡¯ll be going there. Sonia, tell the other kings that we found humans in Monsters World,¡± I said before I told Burnes and the others that I¡¯m leaving.


    I brought the children back home. Harold, Carmen, and Luna will stay here with Bernard even though I brought them here using portal from the capital.


    ¡°Kron is using the capital as his base. There are many location near there that he¡¯d like to go so he said that he will mostly roaming around that area. Since he¡¯s there, we can leave Fabio¡¯s protection to him,¡± Carmen said.


    I guess that¡¯s true. Though Fabio himself is an expert level mage, so he might not need protection. He¡¯s currently the strongest king in this continent. But since he bes busy with his duty as the king, he might not be able to improve his level anymore.


    And that¡¯s why Harold can stay on vacation for as long as he wants since he¡¯s retired. But he¡¯s still a former king of a country. He will support Fabio from behind.


    Carmen is also important figure in the country since she¡¯s an expert level mage. So they said that they¡¯re just going to move around in Arturo with just the three of them, including Luna.


    Luna¡¯s ability in seeing the future is too great and also too dangerous if the enemy knows about it. But it¡¯s not like we can force her to stay with Fabio. That¡¯s why Carmen and Harold decided to let her see everything and and raise her so she can decide for herself what¡¯s the best for her.


    I just hope that she won¡¯t be my enemy when she bes an adult. Let¡¯s quickly destroy the cult so I will disappear and live in a peaceful ce. Far from control of any of the kings. That way I won¡¯t have to worry about making Luna as my enemy. Though I don¡¯t think she has any reason to think of me as her enemy.


    ...I know that I have terrible personality, okay. I don¡¯t know what I will do in the future even if I want to live in peace.


    I used a portal on Randy¡¯s location to ask him what he found out about.


    ¡°So far, no one seem to notice me. But I can¡¯t tell if they have master level mages or not. Maybe they noticed that I¡¯m here, but they won¡¯t do anything since they are thinking that there¡¯s only monster in this world other than them,¡± Randy exined.


    Maybe if they have master level mage, they will think that Randy is a unique monster who can use multiple elements.


    ¡°Alright. What should we do then?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I have some ideas. For now, we¡¯ll get the werewolves turned into their wolf form so no one will think that they are werewolves. They will probably just think of them as slightly stronger wolves. And they will try to eavesdrop on those people. Can we do that?¡± Randy asked.


    ¡°There were three werewolves who have been trained in sneak mission. One of them is in the vige. I¡¯ll ask him to get close to them. But for now, I don¡¯t think that there are any master level mages among them. None of them noticed that I¡¯m looking. Master level mage should notice. So we are safe for now,¡± I said.


    I used portal to go to the vige and asked the werewolf who can do sneak mission to track those people. Surprisingly, that werewolf is teaching other weaker werewolves about espionage. So we have a group of Spy Werewolves!


    Seems like after I became their king, some of them realizes their shoring so they decided to pick something else instead of fighting. Though even the weakest adult werewolf here is already at the level who can defeat a group of advanced level mages on their own. So we have amazing lineups of werewolves.


    And there are even some angels and elves mixed in. Though they can¡¯t do much about hiding, it¡¯s still good that they are trying to learn something.


    And so, we decided to follow what those humans are going to do in this world. I don¡¯t think they¡¯re here for a friendly interaction with the monsters. But for now, let¡¯s watch them.

 Chapter 679

    Chapter 679: Who Are They?


    ¡°What do you think they¡¯re doing in Monsters World?¡±


    While we were watching the group of humans whom we found in Monsters World, Randy asks me that question. I guess I never told him about summoners from the past.


    ¡°We summoners can make a contract with monsters in this world like how tamer does. But we can¡¯t use the same magic in our world. The biggest difference is portal, I guess. Summoners can summon their familiars wherever they are, but tamers can only call their familiars when they¡¯re close. If they are summoners, they should be here to make a contract with a monster. And tamers should be looking for a lot of monsters and get the summoner to return them back to our world.


    ¡°There¡¯s also Pear-y Fruit. That fruit helps us summoners so we can get more than one familiars. We can get an extra familiars to make a contract with when we advance to the next level. But we can use it only twice. After that, we need to eat another Pear-y Fruit. I already have four familiars and will be able to make a contract with a new monster once I reached master level. But Pear-y Fruits are rare in our world and not in this world. So if they are from our world, and they are summoners, they can only have one familiar,¡± I exined.


    ¡°Oh, I see. But there¡¯s no young people among the group. I don¡¯t think they are here to make a contract,¡± Randy guessed.


    There are ten people in the group. And we still don¡¯t know if they are members of the cult or maybe they are from this world. Maybe they just look like human but they are actually monsters. Or maybe they are descendant of summoners from our world who left our world and decided to live here. We don¡¯t know yet.


    We can¡¯t tell until we investigate even further.


    .....


    ¡°Summoners in recent years, until before I introduce them how a summoner should be, at least to our allies only, are cruel toward their monsters. Because it¡¯s totally random. If we get something we don¡¯t like, we will kill that monster so we can have an open spot for a familiar. We do it until we get a summon that we like. My guess is that if they are summoners, they are looking for powerful monster to make a contract with. And they will kill their own monster first. So it doesn¡¯t matter if they are young or old,¡± I exined.


    ¡°I see. If they are summoners, you might be right. On that note, did you try to kill your monster?¡± Randy asked.


    ¡°In my past life. Back then, it was just Blobby the ck Slime. Victoria¡¯s consciousness wasn¡¯t there yet. So I tried to kill it over and over again, but I failed,¡± I said.


    ¡°Hearing about you trying to kill me doesn¡¯t feel good at all. Let¡¯s change the subject. Are we just going to watch over them without doing anything?¡± Victoria asked.


    Not just Randy and I. The werewolves who learned sneaking skills were also trying to get close to that group. And I told them to just watch their moves and listen to what they say if possible.


    ¡°¡±Yes.¡±¡±


    Both Randy and I replied at the same time.


    Randy then exined, ¡°We have no idea why they are here and how they are here. If they came through portal, we need to be careful if they have monsters that can duplicate themselves like you. But if they use some sort of transportation, that means capturing that Professor alone is not enough to stop them from inventing something new. But if we can damage their transportation those people won¡¯t be able to return.¡±


    If they are summoners, they can easily go back to our world. And what if they have tamers as well? Those tamers can easily tame as many monsters as they want in this world before returning to our world. That is dangerous.


    Why is tamers rarer than summoners? I don¡¯t think we have many tamers in our rank. And the tamers we have mostly make a contract with a werewolf, elf, and angels after I introduce them. Though those species are still good because they can still grow. But the tamers still need an even stronger monster.


    Maybe not just stronger. Maybe just useful for one trick as well. Like that summoner who have a mole as his familiar. That is good.


    But I heard that having too many monsters is too big of a burden for tamers. But I don¡¯t know because there are no tamers I know who have tried to tame too many monsters.


    ¡°Roy, I need you to check the surrounding to see if there are any transportation device for them toe here. I don¡¯t think they have walked too far in this unknown world. If so, they must have left that thing somewhere. I¡¯ll stalk them a bit longer,¡± Randy suggested.


    ¡°Then I have a suggestion to you. You remember Spot, right? I introduce you to him before. And I think you had a spar with him as well. He can use camouge along with someone he¡¯s touching. With him wrapping your waist or wherever you want, the have less chance of finding you,¡± I said


    ¡°Alright. That¡¯s good. Please call him right away.


    I contacted Sonia to ask Spot if he¡¯s free and I got immediate response. So I opened a very small portal where the small-sized Spot enter and quickly wrapped his body around Randy¡¯s waist.


    ¡°If you want, you can ask him to take you anywhere. He can still use his camouge skill when he¡¯s huge as well,¡± I said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll do that. Spot, turn big enough so I alone can ride,¡± Randy said.


    Spot then turns a bit bigger and just enough for Randy to sit on top of him. And they fly before Spot use camouge to make them invisible.


    ¡°...if Spot is a broomstick that would be great,¡± Victoria suddenly said.


    ¡°I think Spot being a living creature is much greater than if he¡¯s a broomstick. Why would you think that he¡¯d be great as a broomstick?¡±


    I still don¡¯t get Victoria¡¯s reference. Her world is confusing as usual. Can their broomstick shoot breath attack?


    I summoned Ray and we move around to see anything in the surrounding. If those people are wind mages, I also need to check further area.


    Using Ray¡¯s speed, we checked the surrounding in one hour. But we didn¡¯t find anything. Our guess is that they are summoners indeed. Or at least one of them.


    If there¡¯s only one summoner there, and the other nine are tamers, it will be bad. Though if the monsters they encountered prove to be too much for them, that would be great. They die, and they can¡¯t get any report back to where they from. If they¡¯re from the cult.


    But what if they are inhabitant of this world? Like my other guess, summoners in the past move to this world and these people are their descendant. Will it be easy to get them to join us?


    Though I don¡¯t think they would like to join us fighting the cult even if we exin things to them. Why would they enter danger when they are living peacefuly? But they can only call it living peacefully here if they are strong enough to face monsters here. The monsters in this world are far stronger than the same monsters in our world after all.


    ¡°There¡¯s nothing at all. But maybe there are some further away from here. And we can¡¯t tell yet if their summoner have eaten Pear-y Fruit or not. So maybe they have more than one familiar already. What should we do?¡± I asked Randy after reporting him that I found nothing.


    ¡°It¡¯s better if we can get close to them. But seeing that this is Monsters World, those people should be on guard at all time. We can¡¯t get too close easily and try listening to them. And if they found another human cane to this world, their summoner might return back to our world right away to give report if they are part of the cult. We can¡¯t show ourselves to them yet,¡± Randy said.


    So, we can only see from afar. Until suddenly, a werewolf running in the air to where we are flying. He keeps kicking the air near us so he can stay in the air, so I told Spot to get bigger for him to stand.


    ¡°My King! Please let me approach them and see what they will do. I will act as a wild wolf and see if they are going to make a contract with me or not. If you find a chance, you can capture them all easily,¡± the werewolf said.


    ¡°You mean testing them if they can make you their familiar? Are you sure?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m sure. After all, even if I ended up bing their pet, you will kill the summoner and free me right away. I have nothing to be afraid of,¡± he said.


    I looked at Randy and he nodded in agreement. We both think that what this werewolf said is the best n we can think of. And maybe I should try to remember every single werewolf that I lead.


    ¡°Alright. If you¡¯re sure about it, then let¡¯s do your n. If there¡¯s a fight, think of surviving first before killing them. I won¡¯t help you right away. I¡¯ll watch first before making action,¡± I said.


    ¡°I will do as you say. Wish me luck, my King,¡± he jumped from Spot¡¯s back.


    He¡¯s smart that he didn¡¯t run toward those people right away. Hended a bit far from them before transforming into his wolf form and approach those humans.

 Chapter 680

    Chapter 680: Forcing Them to Retreat


    ¡°Let¡¯s get closer. You have fought and sneak attacked on many expert level mages, right?¡± Randy asked me after I sent that werewolf as a decoy.


    ¡°Yeah. What about it?¡± I asked back.


    ¡°ording to Ka, I¡¯m already good enough in hiding my magic from other expert level mages¡¯ magic detection. But I have never tried it in a real situation. I want you to judge how close we should get before they can notice me. We will watch them from there,¡± Randy suggested.


    ¡°Alright. Since we¡¯re in the air, I hope none of them will fly toward our location. If they do, they might detect us. I¡¯ll go with you on Spot¡¯s back. Ray, you watch on the werewolves. Make sure that none of them start a fight without thinking,¡± I ordered Ray.


    ¡°I¡¯ll go with Ray. In case you have new order, you can tell me telepathically. Ray can¡¯t speak after all,¡± Victoria said.


    I jump from Ray¡¯s back andnd on Spot¡¯s back. While Ray and Victoria will look after the other werewolves, we will watch the werewolf who is trying to get closer to those humans. If they are weak, that werewolf can kill them all alone. But that¡¯s not what we want. We need to know what they¡¯re after. We need them to live. At least until we know what they¡¯re here for.


    ¡°You can speak to your monster telepathically? First time I¡¯ve heard of that skill,¡± Randy asked curiously.


    .....


    ¡°Hmm? Oh, that¡¯s normal. Do you even know any summoners or tamers who have made a contract with monsters that can speak ournguage? They will never know if they canmunicate telepathically because their familiars can¡¯t respond well. Also, it¡¯s something I can do well after my summoner level increased. At advanced level, I can slightly feel that I canmunicate telepathically. But when I reached expert level, it was much clearer,¡± I exined.


    ¡°That means it will be a huge problem if the cult have smart monsters with them,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°That might be true. I don¡¯t know the reason why, but the cult has experimented on those smart monsters to the point that their mind is breaking and can¡¯t talk anymore. My familiar, the archangel Graham, had his sister modified heavily and she even think of her own brother as her enemy. My guess is that they don¡¯t know yet how to utilize telepathymunication yet since their level is too weak.¡±


    That¡¯s what I think. Though if it¡¯s not for Randy right now, I won¡¯t ever think about it. But if my guess is correct, that would be great. I don¡¯t want them to have any way of long-distancemunication like we do.


    ¡°I hope you¡¯re right. Because if they know about it, they can easily contact someone from afar and we would have many loses already,¡± Randy said.


    Now that I think about it, he¡¯s right. We achieved so many victories against the cult so far because we have Sonia. If the cult has any type of long distancemunication device, either they made it or they use monster, our victories won¡¯t be this smooth.


    And with us investigating these people, we can find out about it. It¡¯s something important that I just realized thanks to Randy.


    Hmm... Maybe if I have Ka stay with me more, she could think about it as well. But I let her move on her own. I guess that¡¯s fine. I¡¯ll just talk more with her from now on.


    Spot stopped at a safe distance from the humans group. They won¡¯t detect us unless they fly toward our direction. And this far is good enough for us to see what the werewolf is doing.


    ¡°Hey, there¡¯s a wolf here,¡± One of the men said.


    ¡°Hmm? It¡¯s just a wolf. Even if the monsters in this world are stronger than the same monsters in our world, we don¡¯t have to tame them. There are many other stronger monsters than a wolf,¡± another said.


    ¡°But this one looks stronger. And we¡¯re just taming it anyway. If that thing is too weak, we can just kill itter when we find stronger monster. Since it¡¯s just one wolf, I¡¯ll do it. It might be good for tracking since wolf has good sense of smell.¡±


    Seems like battle is unavoidable. I told him that survivales first. So he won¡¯t just mindlessly enter battle.


    ...That¡¯s only if he can endure his desire for battle. But I¡¯ll just trust him. Werewolves after all monsters that follow their king. And as long as I¡¯m their king, they will hold back their desire as long as I told them to.


    The man saying that he will tame the werewolf started attacking. And he used advanced level wind magic. I guess they have someone who can fly already.


    It was just an advanced level wind magic. And the werewolf, or I guess the wolf since he¡¯s in wolf form right now, swayed his front paw and block the Wind sh. His paw has a small scratch there but that¡¯s okay. His regeneration skill will heal him in an instant.


    But blocking that magic alerted the others in the group. Now he will be surrounded.


    ¡°It¡¯s strong! Everyone, surround that wolf!¡±


    Without hesitation, the others followed that order and move to surround the wolf. But the wolf is fast and they can¡¯t surround him at all. Especially since I told him to survive. There¡¯s no way that he will let those people surround him easily.


    The first guy to attack wants to block the wolf from the sky, so I told Spot to get some distance.


    They are keep trying to fight the wolf. They know already that he¡¯s strong, so they are probably trying to injure him as much as possible and then make a contract with him. But looking at their strength it¡¯s impossible for them to do that.


    The strongest ones among them are the expert level water mage and expert level fire mage. But they can¡¯t attack together or the fire will be extinguished by the water. They shouldn¡¯t have been in the same group.


    ¡°Hmm... I think we need a change of n,¡± Randy suddenly said.


    ¡°Is there anything wrong with this n?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. But it will take too much time. Let¡¯s get him pretend to escape. We will fly next to him without anyone noticing and I will tell him a better n,¡± Randy said.


    A better n? I guess that¡¯s much better than just waiting. Let¡¯s do as he says.


    The wolf is facing ten people in front of him. And he seems shocked when he saw me suddenly appear. I told Spot to undo his camouge while we¡¯re in his line of sight.


    When he notices me, I used hand gesture to told him to escape to an open space nearby. He then quickly go toward the location I told him to.


    ¡°Chase after it! If we can get that wolf, our force will be stronger!¡±


    When the wolf is quite far from them, I had Spot fly low next to him. And we didn¡¯t move fast so the group can still chase after the wolfter.


    ¡°Just fight them. Make sure they get hurt enough to make them retreat. We will then follow where they¡¯re retreating. That ce should be where they make their base at,¡± Randy said.


    The wolf looked at me first for confirmation so I nodded. It¡¯s better if we can find where they are staying at.


    ¡°But won¡¯t it be suspicious if I suddenly fight back and win?¡± the wolf asked.


    ¡°Then get yourself surrounded by them. When that happens, howl so the other werewolves wille and help. I¡¯ll tell Victoria to get them understand our n,¡± I said.


    ¡°I understand. I¡¯ll pretend that I¡¯m tired from running then.¡±


    The wolf slowed down and we fly again at a distance. And I forgot to ask his name again. Whatever.


    The other side soon caught up with him and surround him. Just as they started feeling happy, the wolf howled and called the other wolves. Now the wolves are the ones surrounding the humans.


    A fight ur. The werewolves are doing well despite the fact that they are not fighting in their werewolf form. And finally, they injured three people. Those three people are bleeding badly but they won¡¯t die. If they are from the cult, usually the others will ignore them and retreat. But they didn¡¯t do so.


    They escaped while supporting the injured men. Are they not from the cult? Or maybe their mission is too important to let someone die because of wolves. We won¡¯t know until we found out more about them.


    ¡°Good. Spot, please follow them. And Roy, tell the werewolves to chase after them from afar. They know that wolves have good sense of smell so it will be suspicious if they don¡¯t chase after them,¡± Randy said.


    And so we followed those men. They keep talking to each other to quickly return to the base so they can heal the injured people.


    Since it¡¯s their base, I guess there are more people over there. And maybe they have master level mage as well. But whatever the case, we can¡¯t let those people be since they are in this world.


    Even if they are not with the cult, we still need to find out more about them. Because I don¡¯t want them to ever find the Monsters Vige. As long as I¡¯m their king, I will protect them.

 Chapter 681

    Chapter 681: A Long Chase


    The ten people retreated. They even carried the injured members instead of leaving them behind. And that makes me think that they are not part of the cult. Since the cult members would prefer to kill themselves instead of leaking any secrets.


    But their enemies this time are wolves. Maybe because the enemies are wolves and not humans, they don¡¯t think that those wolves are going to interrogate them. That¡¯s why they won¡¯t risk their lives here. So we can¡¯t tell yet if they are member of the cult or not.


    While we are following those people, Victoria and Ray catch up with us.


    ¡°Roy, we¡¯re going to follow them?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Yeah. We can find their base this way. And even if they are thinking of stopping to heal themselves, they will surely return to where they can take a rest in peace. We will find out if they are members of the cult or not after we follow them,¡± I said.


    We can still see the wolves are chasing after those people. But the wind mages, are boosting everyone¡¯s speed. They are just slightly faster than the wolves. And it will take a while until they can escape from the wolves.


    ¡°Shit! They are too strong!¡±


    .....


    ¡°Just one of them and we can¡¯t even hit it! And now there are more of them! Let¡¯s retreat!¡±


    ¡°They are just like in our world! Wolves are not monsters who moves alone! Even if the monsters here are stronger, doesn¡¯t mean that they move alone!¡±


    ¡°Stop analyzing the situation and focus on retreating! Are they still chasing after us?!¡±


    ¡°We¡¯re getting farther but they won¡¯t stop chasing us. Just keep running until they are out of breath!¡±


    Good thinking. But even if the wolves are out of breath and stop chasing after them, it¡¯s all just an act.


    I told the werewolves chasing after them to keep those people within their range of smell. Once they are far enough, the werewolves will chase after them from the air. Feel the terror of the flying wolves! Though they won¡¯t attack those people yet.


    The people being chased are not stupid. The earth mages and the ice mage keep raising magic wall to dy the wolves even more. And the earth mage even cause a small earthquake but the wolves are not afraid at all. So those people can only build wall or maybe moats to dy the wolves.


    ¡°That might be a good n if they are not that weak. The walls are easy to destroy. The moat is too shallow. The earthquake only make other monsters wary of them. If only they are a bit focused when they raise the wall, the wolves would have been far enough to make them believe that the wolves are no longer chasing after them,¡± I said.


    I can see the wolves easily destroy the Earth Wall and the Ice Wall. They are slowed down but not that slow. So the wolves will continue chasing after them for a bit longer.


    ¡°Are they still chasing after us?¡±


    ¡°Just keep running! They can smell our scent even from distance! Just keep running even after we can¡¯t see them anymore! If we can get back to the base, we will have enough helpers to kill those wolves! Maybe even tame them!¡±


    Nice! There are more of them. We have good information.


    ¡°You hear that? There are more of them apparently. Maybe the cult has started moving there for a while already and created a base. What do you think, Randy?¡± I asked Randy.


    ¡°That could be possible. But at least we know a few things. They are not alone and they are trying to tame a lot of monsters. Roy, be careful with your Divine Vision. Who knows if they have master level mage with them?¡± Randy said.


    ¡°Okay. Spot, when I see someone who notices that I¡¯m looking at them, pretend that it was you who is looking and not me. This way, they won¡¯t think that another human being is in this world,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. But can I kill them if theye after me?¡± Spot asked.


    ¡°You want to fight a master level mage that badly? That¡¯s fine. But there could be more than one so be careful,¡± I said.


    I don¡¯t think that with the size of the mission they are in, taming as many monsters as possible, there could only be one master level mage. There might be more.


    And also, what if the cult¡¯s headquarter is in this world? And what if the Evil God is where we are going right now?


    If a master level mage can notice that I¡¯m looking at them, I will try my best to look at everything before that mage can see that humans other than them are here. I¡¯ll leave everything to Spot after that and run away.


    But if there¡¯s only one master level mage, I can ask Spot to dy him or even kill him while Randy and I will infiltrate the base. And we¡¯ll get the werewolves to guard the surrounding area.


    There are only seven werewolves here. But I can easily get moreter if needed. And I will tell them that there¡¯s no need for them to hide the fact that they are werewolves. Which mean as long as there¡¯s no master level mage over there, we can easily destroy the base. But it seems like their base is further than I expected.


    We keep chasing them for hours. And I told the werewolves to stop chasing after them. I used portal to return them back to Monsters Vige so they can rest. And I told them to prepare to move right away when I open a portalter.


    Since it might be rted to the cult, maybe the angels will help as well. That would be great then.


    ¡°Do you think they¡¯re still chasing after us?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t think so. But we have moved too far from the base it seems. I¡¯ll wash everyone here with water and then we will continue. The wolves won¡¯t notice us then if our scents are washed,¡± the water mage said.


    Seems like there¡¯s no summoner among them. Only tamer. Because if they have summoner, they can just open a portal to escape. But that¡¯s only if they know about portal.


    We followed after them to where they will take a break. But it seems like we¡¯re going to wait until morning.


    ¡°Randy, I¡¯ll return you back to the monsters vige. Tomorrow morning when they make a move, I will bring you back here,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. There¡¯s a high chance that we will engage in a fight. You also need to take a break,¡± Randy said as he entered the portal I opened. Of course I have exined to the werewolves that they won¡¯t move tonight.


    ¡°I have rested enough yesterday. I can move around for a week without resting. I¡¯ll be fine,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Aura users are amazing. The war back in the past must have been something special if they don¡¯t care about night or day,¡± Randy said.


    I close the portal and continue watching the group. Because they are too focused in escaping and healing the injured, they didn¡¯t notice me at all who is on top of a tree right where they are resting. We can hear what they say here easily.


    ¡°Tch! Those wolves are too annoying! Even if the wolves here are stronger than in our world, the difference is too big.¡±


    ¡°We were getting too close to them. But if we¡¯re too far, our magic can¡¯t reach them since they¡¯re too fast. There¡¯s nothing we can do but to rest. Maybe we can ask for reinforcement after we return back to the base. If they know how strong those wolves are, they will be interested in taming them all.¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s rest for now. Take turn for the night watch duty. Except for the injured and me who is a healer.¡±


    ¡°If you¡¯re just a level higher in your healing magic, we won¡¯t have any problem with such injuries. Howe you¡¯re just a beginner level healer?¡±


    And they started arguing whose fault was their failure. But that¡¯s good. Just fight to the point that you¡¯re killing each other. That will be great for me.


    So far, they haven¡¯t talked about anything cult rted. And none of them have explosive devices in their mouth despite the fact that some of them are not even expert level mages. So I can¡¯t jump into conclusion right away.


    The earth mage then raised a wall in the surrounding area to protect themselves. I¡¯m lucky that the tree I¡¯m standing on is inside the wall. Or that they are too stupid to think about it.


    So... I guess I¡¯ll stay here the whole night. I¡¯ll keep my eyes open until morning. But that would be boring. Still, there¡¯s nothing else I can do.


    Well, I¡¯ll just chat with Victoria until morning. They can¡¯t do anything inside this Earth Wall protecting themselves anyway. Though I won¡¯t let down my guard.

 Chapter 682

    Chapter 682: Big Lizard as Transportation


    The next morning, I called Randy again to continue follow after those men. But since they are leisurely taking their time because they thought that the wolves have stopped chasing after them, it will probably take a long time until they can reach their base.


    How stupid can someone be to move too far from their base? Even after I look around the surrounding area, I haven¡¯t find where it¡¯s located at.


    ¡°Roy, you¡¯ve returned? How is it? Did you find anything?¡± Randy asked.


    ¡°Not at all. Which means they are too far from their base. Or maybe they are too stupid and they actually got lost,¡± I replied.


    I have returned now from surveying the area with Ray. And Randy is watching those ten men¡¯s every move from on top of Spot¡¯s head. And Spot is in his one-seater form since Randy is the only one riding him.


    Ah, that¡¯s what Victoria calls Spot¡¯s current form. A one-seater. Which basically means that there can only be one person sitting there.


    Shees up with that name after seeing Spot¡¯s size. And now she started making names for the size depending on how much people will be riding Spot.


    .....


    ¡°Do you think they¡¯re lost?¡± I asked Randy.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think so. They are confident with the direction they are going. Unless they are stupid,¡± Randy replied.


    Then we need to continue following them. What a pain.


    ¡°What if they decided to stop running since they are no longer being chased? Don¡¯t you think that it¡¯s better if we have just one wolf here to spot them to make them escape quickly again?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. If they think that they are being cornered, we don¡¯t know what they will do. We can only be patient and watch them,¡± Randy said.


    Sigh... What a pain. I hope those people know where they are going.


    Still, one of them said that he¡¯s a tamer. But I don¡¯t see any tamed monster nearby. That¡¯s kind of suspicious actually.


    Unless the tamer had his tamed monster killed and now he has no other monster with him. And that¡¯s why these people are venturing so far from their base so they can get a powerful monster for the tamer to tame.


    ¡°Oh, my monster is nearby. We don¡¯t need to walk anymore. I¡¯ll call it right now.¡±


    The one saying that is the man who said that he¡¯s going to tame the wolf from yesterday. So he has a tamed monster already. And since he¡¯s not summoning it, he¡¯s a tamer.


    ¡°From what I heard from him, it seems like he can call his tamed monster when they are in his range. I can¡¯t see any monster rushing toward him, so the range should be further than how far I can see with my Divine Vision,¡± I said.


    Which also mean that tamer canmunicate with their tamed monsters telepathically like me. But probably it¡¯s just giving some simple order likee here or go there.


    The range is also quite far. But it¡¯s still limited because he can only do it now. Not before when they were fighting the wolves.


    ¡°Spot, let¡¯s fly a bit higher. It will be bad if the monstering is a flying monster or anything that can detect our presence,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°Okay.¡±


    If it¡¯s a flying monster, that monster might end up crashing us. Though that monster will die then.


    But from how it seems, those people are rxing when they heard that his monster ising. My guess is that it¡¯s big enough for them all to ride that monster.


    ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll go there and eavesdrop on them a little more. If the monster is a dangerous one, I will retreat,¡± I said before jumping off from Spot¡¯s back.


    Since they feel that they are no longer being chased, they let down their guard. And thanks to all my training, I can get very close to them. In fact, I¡¯m hiding behind a tree that someone is leaning on. And they didn¡¯t even notice it.


    They started talking while waiting for the monster toe. Let¡¯s listen to what kind of monster wille. Or maybe an even better information. Like something with the cult.


    ¡°Hey, if you have an amazing tamed monster, why didn¡¯t you bring it with us? Those wolves will be nothing if you had it with you,¡± one of them asked.


    ¡°It¡¯s an Earth Dragon. Even though there¡¯s a dragon in the name, it¡¯s not a dragon. Just a big lizard with teeth. The best thing it can do is just to transport us. I let it moves on its own because he¡¯s too big. He might scare other monsters or just ends up as their prey. It¡¯s not that strong either,¡± the tamer said.


    ¡°Then you shouldn¡¯t make that thing your pet! Find a better one!¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s the sole reason we¡¯re here, dammit! My other tamed monsters have died for some reason! And now we¡¯re here so we can find even stronger monster in this world since we can¡¯t expect much from monsters in our world!¡±


    Oh, a new information. So they are here to get more tamed monster. And they are from my world. So they are not from this world. And since he said this world, they might not know that this is the moon of our world. Or maybe they know but they always thought of the moon as another world.


    Let¡¯s hear more.


    Apparently, he¡¯s not the only tamer among them. There are three others. But all of them had their tamed monster died because they underestimated this world. They tried to fight the monsters who killed their monster, but they can¡¯t control their strength and end up killing those monsters before they can tame them. How stupid.


    And it seems like the are still not used to be in this world. Must be new here.


    Soon after, I can see a big lizard is running this way. Must be the tamed monster of that tamer.


    But it¡¯s not alone. There are various monsters behind that lizard chasing it.


    ¡°Fuck! That thing juste with more monsters!¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s kill those monsters! As long as they are not as strong as those wolves, we can kill them!¡±


    ¡°Wait! At least try not to kill them! We need more tamed monsters so we can move safely in this world! We have experienced the danger of this world so we should gain more power before we do anything else. And they might be stronger than those wolves from before. Let¡¯s move with caution.¡±


    And then they started fighting monsters that chase after the lizard. And I can only wait.


    ...They are so weak. It has been one hour but why is the battle is not over yet? Even when there are monsters that noticed my presence, they still didn¡¯t notice me at all.


    Oh, as for the monsters that noticed my presence, they tried to not bother with me when I directed my killing intent at them. These monsters are far weaker than werewolves after all. As long as they are slightly intelligent, just smart enough to sense killing intent, they would all leave.


    Finally, the battle is over. And there are now more injured people. But they have more monsters as well.


    ¡°Let¡¯s return to the base now. We¡¯re out of food as well.¡±


    They are al ride on top of the lizard¡¯s back while other monsters are following from behind. Those monsters are monsters that have experienced my killing intent so they won¡¯t cause me any trouble.


    Trouble for what? For when I follow them obviously. I will follow them close enough that I can still hear them talking while moving.


    Where? Well, that¡¯s something funny. Because right now, I¡¯m sticking my body on the belly of the Earth Dragon. Right under the monster. Or should I say big lizard?


    Since the belly is not touching the ground, I¡¯m safe. Though from this far, I can see Randy¡¯s confused face. Just get used to it, Randy.


    ¡°Hmm? What¡¯s wrong?¡± the tamer suddenly asked.


    ¡°What happened?¡±


    ¡°Nothing. This lizard somehow notices something strange.¡±


    ¡°Ignore it. We have either defeated all the monsters here or tame them. there¡¯s nothing that we need to be wary of. Even other monsters are acting normal. Must be because this lizard is not used to this world or something. Let¡¯s just go already,¡± another tamer replied.


    ¡°You¡¯re right I guess. Let¡¯s return to the base!¡±


    And no one knows that I¡¯m under the lizard. Except for the monsters here and Randy and Spot who are watching from above. It¡¯s good that they don¡¯t have monsters that can talk here.


    The lizard starts running and the other monsters followed. While I¡¯m here hugging the lizard¡¯s belly while being upside down. It¡¯s a funny situation.


    I know now that they are from our world. But are they here only to get a lot of monsters? Maybe they have other reason.


    But it will be known soon. We¡¯re here to investigate. And everyone is ready to engage in battle as well. Either those in Monsters Vige or those in our world.


    ¡°Hey. Don¡¯t you think the lizard is a bit weird?¡±


    ¡°Stop asking. It¡¯s just not adapted to this world yet. In our world, this lizard can be considered strong. But in this world, even a smaller monster is stronger than this thing. This lizard is useless other than for transportation. Pay it no mind.¡±


    With that, they still don¡¯t know that I¡¯m here. It¡¯s hrious.

 Chapter 683

    Chapter 683: Large Base is Found


    I tried to listen to what the people riding on the lizard are saying while I¡¯m still sticking my body on the lizard¡¯s belly. And even though the lizard has shown its difort many times, the oblivious mages above didn¡¯t care at all.


    Unfortunately, they didn¡¯t say anything confidential. They didn¡¯t say about anything important information at all except for things I already know.


    The journey continue as the Earth Dragon keeps looking at its own belly to check me. Since I had enough and I don¡¯t want it to alert everyone riding above, I directed my killing intent at the Earth Dragon alone. And finally, it stopped checking on me.


    That was good. I can easily direct my killing intent at just one individual now. Not to everyone I consider to be my enemy. Just one individual. Now there are many other ways I can use this for.


    I look far above and see Spot and Randy are still following. I also look with my Divine Vision to where these guys are going, but after a few hours stuck under the Earth Dragon¡¯s belly, I still found nothing.


    Finally as the sun reached its peak, I can see something. It¡¯s a wall. Something is being covered by a huge wall. And it¡¯s big and covers a wide area. I believe even if I used Divine Vision at the middle of what¡¯s inside the wall, I still won¡¯t be able to see the wall.


    And a base that big must have many people protecting. I guess I can¡¯t stay under the lizard all the time.


    .....


    Afraid that I will be seen by other people, I let go of the lizard¡¯s belly. The lizard noticed something was wrong but it¡¯s afraid of looking. While the other monsters following the lizard also ignore me because they¡¯re also afraid.


    I let my body hit the ground. But the sound of the lizard¡¯s running is too loud that the people above can¡¯t hear me falling.


    I justy down on the ground while letting the monsters running. None of them dare to stomp me. And the idiots above the lizard only focused on their destination so none of them are looking back.


    ¡°They seriously didn¡¯t notice at all. How surprising. And how stupid,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°That means my hiding skill has improved again.¡±


    ¡°And what will you do? You¡¯re not moving at all,¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°If I move too soon, they might notice. I¡¯ll stay here until Spot flies directly above me,¡± I said.


    Just a few secondter, Spot flies above me so I stand and start running toward Spot¡¯s location. Since Spot¡¯s speed is not fast as he¡¯s keeping up his speed with that Earth Dragon or lizard, I can easily reach him.


    Spot then erge his size a bit so he bes a two-seater and I sit behind Randy.


    ¡°It looked stupid when you suddenly came out from under the lizard. It was as if the lizard pooped you out,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°Worst thing is that they didn¡¯t say much about the base. But I can see it now so I left. Their base isrge enough to be called a city. I haven¡¯t seen anyone yet but there must be several master level mages over there. Maybe dozens of them. Even if they are weak master level mages, they can still cause me trouble if I¡¯m not careful. So I left. Spot, don¡¯t move from here. From this location I can only see their base from above but I can¡¯t see anyone. So we will be safe from their master level mages from here,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. How many of them do you think there will be?¡± Spot asked me.


    ¡°A lot. I don¡¯t think just calling the werewolves will be enough to face them all,¡± I said.


    Seems like there will be war if we face them. The werewolves are eager, but we need more. And if I ask the kings to send troops here, their country will be left defenseless.


    ¡°But we still don¡¯t know yet if they are from the cult, right? Roy, what have you learned when you became the lizard¡¯s poop?¡± Randy asked me.


    ¡°I¡¯m not anything¡¯s poop! I was sticking my body on its belly! Anyway, I didn¡¯t hear anything about them being in the cult. So I don¡¯t know,¡± I replied.


    ¡°Hmm... if their base is that big, I guess they should be confident with their defense. I don¡¯t think we can sneak in from underground,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°And there are several towers in that base. We can¡¯t easily enter from the sky as well. And even if I can somehow get a Blobby inside, they can easily detect my portal,¡± I said.


    ¡°Still, the best way to investigate is for us to infiltrate that base. Check the gate and see how those people enter. With a ce that big, I don¡¯t think they knew everyone there. So they must have entered the base through some kind of identification. If that¡¯s the case, we can get inside if we steal it. Roy, did you check the belongings of those people?¡± Randy asked.


    Right! I forgot! But good thing that those people are still within my sight. I¡¯ll check them now.


    Anything weird that they have. Something that can be considered as identification.


    ¡°Spot, move a little closer so I can see the gate. Even if there are master level mages, I doubt they would be the gatekeeper,¡± I said to Spot.


    Spot then flies forward a little closer and stops when I told him to.


    At the gate, I can see two people acting as gatekeeper. Andparing their belongings to what the people on the lizard¡¯s back, I can see that they have something simr.


    A coin. The size is like any other coin but the color is pitch ck. I don¡¯t think that coin is some sort of currency they use. So that thing must be how they identify themselves.


    And all of them have at least one coin in their possession. Some have more but I don¡¯t think they will be used. And the gatekeepers have a lot of coins stored near there.


    As I looked at the wall, I can see that there¡¯s a room for the gatekeepers. And there are a lot of ck coins stored there.


    ¡°All of them have coins in their possession. A ck coin. Maybe that¡¯s what they use to enter the gate.¡±


    ¡°Then let¡¯s wait until they enter the gate. Don¡¯t look anymore than that yet,¡± Randy said.


    I do as he says. Just limiting my sight to reach the gate.


    Then I can see that it¡¯s someone else who left the base and not those who are riding lizard entering. So I pay my attention to the leaving guy.


    ¡°There¡¯s someone leaving the gate. He¡¯s not a master level mage so he didn¡¯t notice me. When he left, the gatekeeper gave him one ck coin after recording that someone left at this time,¡± I said.


    ¡°So the coin is for leaving the gate. Maybe they have to return that coin when they enter the gate. But what about monsters? Do they enter from the same gate?¡± Randy asked.


    ¡°Let¡¯s wait a little more. Those people are approaching the gate. Spot, don¡¯t move. The guy who was leaving is flying low. He will be right under us soon,¡± I said.


    The leaving guy greeted the group and then he continues flying. When he¡¯s right below us, the group we followed also reached the gate.


    The group then offered their coin one by one. One person gave their own coin. So it seems that they can¡¯t give other people their coin to returns. I need to check the coin if each one of them is different.


    About the extra coins that they have, they give them to the gatekeeper after everyone¡¯s coin has been confirmed. I think that coin is somehow simr to hunter card from the guild.


    ¡°They gave their extra coins to the gatekeeper. Those extra coins should be from the dead people wandering outside,¡± I said.


    ¡°Maybe because of theirck of members they can¡¯t let anyone here die. Since they think that we don¡¯t know about this world, they¡¯re letting those with weaker level remove the explosive device and told them to not die. What about the monsters?¡± Randy asked.


    ¡°The group left the lizard except for the tamer who didn¡¯t return his coin. All of the monsters there were tamed by that one tamer. They leave the gate and move along the wall. Spot, we need to move so I can see better,¡± I said.


    We followed the tamer and his monsters. After a few minutes of walk they entered another gate. And this gate is bigger than before and heavily protected. Must be because they need take care of the monsters.


    ¡°They entered that huge gate. For now, I won¡¯t see any further than this in case they have master level mage with them,¡± I said.


    ¡°Good decision. A ce like that is surely o have one or two master level mages protecting it. Did they enter with that tamer¡¯s coin?¡± Randy asked.


    ¡°Yes. I guess this is as far as we can investigate. Any more than this and we need to prepare to get found out. And we can¡¯t use portal since they might be familiar with it. Should I see further?¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s move around that gate first and see how big it really is. I¡¯ll draw a map ording to what you see. And then we will discuss itter with everyone,¡± Randy said.


    Well, there might be a huge battle. So we need everyone¡¯s help. And who knows if the Evil God is in there?

 Chapter 684

    Chapter 684: Capture Them First


    ¡°This is...¡±


    Albert, and the other kings, including Yuria and future king of Varadis whose attitude has be slightly better, William, are here together. They are all surrounding a piece of paper on top of a round table. It¡¯s a map of the base of whoever it is that taming monsters in Monsters World. We still don¡¯t know if the cult is rted or not.


    ¡°A map. It¡¯s a map drawn by Randy. Albert¡¯s cousin who is currently training in Monsters World. And I have to say that his drawing is precisely as what I¡¯ve seen myself,¡± I said.


    ¡°Where is he now?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°In monsters vige. He¡¯s on standby there,¡± I said.


    Even though I¡¯m talking, all eyes are on the map. I also had Victoria¡¯s clone, the Blobbies, to shapeshift into something simr to the drawing of the map. And she said that it¡¯s a 3D map. Though it¡¯s good because we can also see the height of the surroundingndscape and also the height and the thickness of the wall.


    ¡°What¡¯s in the middle? I thought that if it¡¯s you, you can see what¡¯s inside,¡± Lynn asked.


    .....


    ¡°I didn¡¯t look deep inside before. Just in case that there are master level mages there. We have confirmed that they are from this world. Though I don¡¯t know if they realized that Monsters World is the moon or not. Anyway, it will be too dangerous if their master level mages notice me looking at them. If it¡¯s just me alone, I won¡¯t care and just rush inside and get whoever seem to be important. But Randy said that it¡¯s best to discuss it first with the others,¡± I said.


    It¡¯s just a bunch of master level mage. I¡¯m an Aura Master. I¡¯m sure I can do it. I can cut magic after all. And if I ride Ray, I will be even stronger.


    But for now, we need to be careful. We need to see the bigger picture. Because I¡¯m afraid that if their summoner can use portal to travel between two worlds, they can escape quickly. And they can report everything that has happened to the cult members in our world.


    If it¡¯s just killing, that would be easy. I can just stand outside the gate, and swung Victokatana infused with Aura. I¡¯m sure that I can easily slice half of the city. Even if that¡¯s too much, a quarter of the city is good enough. Though I will use up too much Aura and needed rest after that.


    But that¡¯s thest resort. We still need to figure out if they are from the cult or not.


    ¡°Can you infiltrate the base?¡± Toni asked me.


    ¡°Maybe. I need the ck coin that they use as ticket to enter the base. I don¡¯t know if I can trick them by using Blobbies, but I need to be a hundred percent sure first. So I¡¯ll kill someone first and steal their coin. It¡¯s good that we know it¡¯s fine for them to leave for days and camp outside. Even if we kill someone, it will take them days until they found out about it,¡± I said.


    From what I saw before, the group from before carried other medals beside from what was given to them. I guess the owner of those medal died and that group looted those coin.


    If we can just kill someone and grab their coin, I guess we should be able to enter the base freely.


    ¡°Veronica, Celestine, have you two ever heard of Monsters World from back when you two were with the cult?¡± Albert asked the two.


    For those who doesn¡¯t know about it, like William, Yuria, and Patricia, they were surprised to hear that Celestine and Veronica were from the cult. And I can see which faction William will enter if we let the cult be. He will join Veronica¡¯s faction.


    ¡°Nothing at all. We only know about Monsters World because of Roy. But I never had any summoner from my faction. At least there¡¯s none that I remember,¡± Celestine said.


    ¡°Hmm... I remember that there used to be a summoner in my faction. She was only there for a while and then she disappeared. Because I don¡¯t really care about the cult and everyone involved in it, I forgot about her. But maybe all the summoners in the cult has been forced to do other mission even from back then when we still in the cult,¡± Veronica said.


    Maybe they have known about summoner able to make a portal to Monsters World since a long time ago. But is there a need to build a transportation device to the moon if that¡¯s the case? Don¡¯t tell me that they don¡¯t know if Monsters World and the moon is the same. That¡¯s why they think it¡¯s a different ce.


    The cult wanted to destroy everything. Not just our world. That¡¯s why they will also destroy Monsters World. And the moon is also their target. But they just don¡¯t realize they are the same.


    ¡°If they have prepared it for a long time, that means they have a lot of troops. One is to destroy this world, another to destroy Monsters World, and another to destroy the moon. They don¡¯t know yet that two forces are doing the same thing. If they are prepared to attack the moon, that troop should be still in this world. Which mean the force in Monsters World should be the weakest if they divide their force equally,¡± Toni said.


    ¡°For now, how about we capture someone moving outside their base and interrogate them. Maybe capture a whole group instead of individual. If they are from the cult, then it¡¯s easy to decide what to do with them. If they are not from the cult, we will discuss it after,¡± Albert said.


    With that, we decided to capture some of them to interrogate. That means no killing.


    After returning everyone, I returned to the monster vige first to tell the monsters what to do.


    ¡°I want those who are confident in knocking out expert level mages to be the bait. Stay in your werewolf form and let them think that you¡¯re an easy target. When they approach you, knock them unconscious before they can do anything. And although you all will move alone, the others won¡¯t be too far from you. If there are too many enemies or you think that they¡¯re too strong for you, howl and ask for reinforcement. Capture as many of them as possible. Randy and I will move on our own. If you can¡¯t capture them, just kill them. But the more we capture, the more information we can get,¡± I said.


    The mission is to capture. So we just need those who can knock someone out instead of killing them. It¡¯s actually harder for them to do it since they¡¯re not a race that can easily hold back their strength.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll do it!¡± Shelia volunteered.


    ¡°Hmm... I don¡¯t think that¡¯s a good idea. They are looking for monsters they can tame. But you already have a contract with Roy. And if they know that you already had a contract, they will easily figure out that someone with strong summon is in our world. So those whoe must not be those who already make a contract with any summoners or tamers,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°Shelia, if you want toe, you can. But you will be with me watching over the others,¡± I said.


    The werewolves then ready to go to that base. Though they will just do their own things. I don¡¯t think we need the werewolves to do anything right now. But it might be a good idea to let them fight some human enemies from time to time.


    As for Shelia, she said to summon her when there¡¯s a fight. She won¡¯te it seems.


    We won¡¯t go there with portal to where I installed a Blobby. But we¡¯ll fly there so we can gauge the distance from that base to this vige. I think that base is further than the vampires¡¯ castle where I met Arin before. So they could have reached the vampires first.


    The vampires over there no longer have Arin as their leader. Though I know they are still loyal to her. And if they know that there¡¯s a big group of humans nearby, they will surely try to attack them. After all, for vampires, human blood is a delicacy. Especially in Monsters World since finding just one is hard.


    ¡°Victoria, you can sense where the Blobby we marked, right? Lead us there,¡± I said.


    ¡°Easy. It¡¯s that direction,¡± Victoria pointed to where the Blobby is.


    With Spot and Ray, we can get there soon. And Shelia is riding with me as well so it¡¯s easy if we find something amiss on the way with her sense of smell.


    And so I will sleep on the way. It will just be a few minutes but it¡¯s good enough. Although I can stay up for a week without sleeping, I also don¡¯t know how long this will be. And I will probably miss a lot of shows. I hope the circus will be fine without me.

 Chapter 685

    Chapter 685: Waiting for Good Targets


    Soon after, we reached Arin¡¯s castle. Or used to be hers at least. This was where many vampires were staying behind.


    After I took Arin and the others, which was mostly female vampires, the rest of the vampires staying behind are all male ones. And somehow, they still obey Arin even though it has been a while since she used her charm on them. I guess since they have been affected by her charm for too long, it will take a long time until the effect diminished.


    And because they still obey her, when we pass by this ce, they didn¡¯t attack us. Though they can¡¯t attack us anyway because Ray and Spot is extremely fast. Much faster than vampires. Unless they want to exhaust all the blood in their body to catch up to us.


    ¡°Hmm... there were not many vampires before. But now, there are even less,¡± I said after looking at the vampires.


    ¡°Do you think that some of them have been caught by those people?¡± Randy asked.


    ¡°I¡¯ll capture one of them and ask him. Wait for a bit,¡± I said.


    Spot slowed down but he didn¡¯t stop when I went down to grab a vampire.


    .....


    Using Spot¡¯s speed, it didn¡¯t take long before I caught a vampire by his leg and pulled him up to the sky. And we catch up with Spot and Randy before asking him question.


    ¡°Who are you guys?! Oh, you¡¯re the human that Lady Arin says to not harm. What do you want?¡±


    The vampire seems to know me. That¡¯s good.


    ¡°This is important to Arin so I need you to answer my question. What happened to the vampires? Why are there less of them than before?¡± I asked while using Arin¡¯s name so he will answer honestly.


    ¡°Lady Arin said that? In that case I will tell you. Though it will be better if I¡¯m not hanging upside down like this,¡± the vampire said.


    ¡°Just answer quickly. We don¡¯t have time,¡± I said.


    ¡°Alright, alright. I don¡¯t know why Lady Arin chose to stay with you humans. But since she will be grateful if I answer, then I¡¯ll tell you. Some of us vampires have started went missing about five months ago. It seems that there are humans who have been taming us vampires. I got the info from someone who managed to escape. They are not the humans that Lady Arin spoke highly of like you, right? Can we kill them?¡± the vampire asked.


    ¡°Sure you can. They are Arin¡¯s enemies as well. Killing them will make her happy,¡± I said.


    ¡°Really?! Then I need to tell everyone about it. I want to do it alone so I will get praised by Lady Arin, but it seems like there are many of them. Oh, if you¡¯re facing them, then I-¡±


    What? He wants me to tag along? No way. He will just be a burden. So before he asks me to bring him with me, I throw him back to the castle. He was not prepared for that so he didn¡¯t fly at all. Or maybe it¡¯s because the vampirecks blood because many monsters nearby are gone thanks to those tamers.


    ¡°Well, it seems like they have tamed some vampires already. What do you think?¡± I asked Randy.


    ¡°It means that those tamers can get to where the vampires are soon. Do you think the vampires didn¡¯t fight back when they encountered the tamers?¡± Randy asked.


    ¡°No. Arin just told them to not attack us. But maybe they think those humans are allies as well. But even so, Arin also told them to fight back if humans attacked first. But it¡¯s possible that the vampires didn¡¯t know if they are friends or foes so they were fighting without the intent to kill. That¡¯s why some of them were caught already.¡±


    After I got Arin join us and enter our world for the first time, she only returned to this world a few times. And one of those times was to inform the other vampires under her that we are not enemies. And I even gave them some bloodbag near their expiration date to the vampires. They loved it.


    Arin told them to not fight humans unless they attack first. But even then, I guess these vampires were reluctant to go all out against humans because they didn¡¯t know if the humans they were fighting against were enemies or not. That¡¯s why some of them ended up getting tamed.


    The tamers I found before were not weak.But average expert level mages would have difficulty fighting against one Vampire Lord. So the vampires must have been holding back. How stupid. Though it¡¯s partially my fault.


    ¡°If the monsters inside the base were taken to prison, it would be great if their tamer leaves the base to get more monster. Because if we kill the tamer, the monsters, especially the vampires, will fight back. And they even have a lot of blood supplies from other monsters there,¡± I said.


    ¡°But I don¡¯t think that¡¯s the case. I think the tamer would bring their monsters out when they leave the base. But if those monsters were transported to our world already, there¡¯s nothing we can do,¡± Randy said.


    Oh, right. I only saw the monsters were taken to another entrance. I didn¡¯t see anything about them entering portal or not. Because if they enter portal, that mean those monsters are already in our world.


    I don¡¯t think they will be used to fight us right away. Probably they will be taken for experiment and modified to be stronger and obey the cult.


    ¡°Let¡¯s hurry up and capture someone right away,¡± I said.


    We fly toward their base and arrive there soon after. It didn¡¯t take long for us since we¡¯re riding Spot and Ray. Though normally, it should take days to reach there.


    ¡°Roy, what is your n if we find out everything and only ordered to destroy everything in that base? Even if it¡¯s you, I don¡¯t think you can destroy everything in an instant. If we use the mages we have, their mages will be able to stop our magic for a while and probably enough for them to escape using portal. Do you have any other way to destroy the base?¡± Randy asked.


    ¡°I can ask someone who has that much power. But we need to capture someone important before that happens. I don¡¯t think anyone important will be outside the base. So the n will probably be for us to infiltrate the base using the coins we took for them, grab someone important, and bring them to Albert to interrogate,¡± I said.


    ¡°...How many times have you asked Albert to interrogate the people you captured? He¡¯s already busy with his job as a king. Don¡¯t make him even busier,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°Almost all the time, I guess. It¡¯s fine. Albert is also fine with me asking him to do it. Or maybe he¡¯s afraid that I will run wild if he didn¡¯t do it and I only got false information,¡± I said.


    ¡°...That¡¯s the more likely reason he obeys you. Must be nice being the strongest,¡± Randy mumbled.


    I can hear him, but since it seems that he¡¯s not talking to me, I didn¡¯t respond.


    We watched two gates where my Divine Vision can reach and wait until someone left the base. And the more of them leave at the same time, the better it is for us since that mean we can have more people infiltrate their base.


    We wait and we wait. There are some people entering the base but none were leaving. And I don¡¯t want to cause trouble near their base by attacking the returning people, so I didn¡¯t do anything but just watch. While ying cards with Victoria and Randy.


    ¡°You¡¯re using Divine Vision to watch the gate so you should be able to see the card in my hand. But why did you lose?¡± Randy asked.


    ¡°Because I¡¯m not focusing on your hand. I only focus on the gates. And it¡¯s no fun ying if I already know who will win,¡± I said.


    After Randy won 4 times, Victoria won three times, and I only won twice, I can finally see some people are leaving. There are five of them. Good enough to be our target.


    ¡°Alright, we have our target. Let¡¯s finish the game now and focus on our job,¡± I said.


    ¡°Must be nice for you to not lose any more. What a good timing,¡± Victoria said.


    It is good timing. Even if I want to y games fairly, in the end, I still hate losing.


    The five people are moving toward the vampire castle we were before. I guess they must be the ones capturing the vampires.


    ¡°Should we defeat them or should we let the vampires handle them?¡± I asked Randy.


    ¡°Capture all five of them. We¡¯ll bring them all to Albert and interrogate them. I don¡¯t think they have someone important among them so it¡¯s fine if we just capture one of them and let the rest die. But it¡¯s still best to capture them all,¡± Randy said.


    ¡°We¡¯ll see how strong they are first. Let¡¯s make our move once they cross the river.¡±


    There¡¯s a river where they are going to. They need to cross it if they want to go to where the vampires are. And that should be far enough from the base for us to take action.

 Chapter 686

    Chapter 686: Telling the Vampires About the Human Base


    ¡°You¡¯re not going to get close to them?¡± Randy asked me as we¡¯re following the five guys who wereing out from the base.


    ¡°If I do it now, they will find me quickly. There¡¯s a time and ce for me to do it. And right now, when they are wary of monsters, is not a good time. I could do it easily before because I know they were letting their guards down knowing that the wolves no longer chase after them. But now it¡¯s hard.¡±


    I looked at the five men who are getting close to the river. They will reach there soon and once they do, it will be hard for anyone from the base to find them.


    Even if someone will be sent to look after those five, they will just think that they died because of monsters and their body were dumped to the river where the torrent will carry them to the sea.


    Though we¡¯re here to capture them. Not to kill them.


    The five men are crossing the river right now. The earth mage easily built a bridge to cross it. Is there no wind mage among them?


    They are arguing about something, but it¡¯s too far for me to hear.


    .....


    I look around the area with my Divine Vision before we attack them. I can¡¯t see the wall anymore. And there¡¯s no human nearby. If we make our move now, no one will notice.


    There are no humans, but there are monsters. Vampires. The one I talked to before was there as well.


    Looking at the situation, the vampires are trying to find the humans who captured their friends and fight them. Because I have told him that if they are attacked, they can fight back and kill them.


    Not because those people are enemies. But because I believe that my friends whom I bring to this world are strong enough to defeat them. So if they started fighting, the vampires will lose.


    But these guys are expert level mages at most. Just some average expert level mages. Not a strong ones.


    ¡°They will face the vampires soon. Should we move and capture those men, or should we wait and see how it goes?¡± I asked Randy.


    ¡°Will the vampires kill them? Randy asked.


    ¡°They will probably beat those men half to death so they can drink their blood,¡± I answered.


    ¡°Then we¡¯ll just wait. We can just wait for another group to leave. Or better yet, we can just go down there and told the vampires that there¡¯s arge group of humans in that base. And they will all attack them. Though that¡¯s only if you¡¯re fine with it,¡± Randy suggested his idea.


    ¡°Hmm... Arin said that she has no affection toward them anymore. Kind of cruel I guess, but I guess that¡¯s what the vampires really are,¡± I said.


    Arin said that it¡¯s fine if we just kill them. Arin has enved those male vampires since a long time ago and she has gotten tired of them. She even said that if possible, she won¡¯t use charm magic ever again after hearing Sonia¡¯s experience. That¡¯s why she¡¯s living happily without ever charming anyone.


    Though I still asked her once in a while to use charm magic on me. To see if I can block charm magic with Aura and my will.


    The first few times we tried it, I fell head over heel for her. Though thanks to my girlfriends helping me, I snapped out of it quickly. It involves a little bit of violence. Or maybe a lot since I¡¯m strong.


    But after trying it many times, especially now that I¡¯m an Aura Master, even after using her very best to charm me, she failed to do it.


    This could be a good training in case the cult managed to tame subus and use them to charm men. Though I don¡¯t know if a full subus¡¯ charm magic will be better than a half-subus like Arin or not.


    I tried it after that time we rescued Graham¡¯s sister. Because I¡¯m afraid that monsters with special ability that we don¡¯t know of wille and I need to fight them.


    But I have something worse than charm magic. I can use air magic to create lust gas that will make everyone who inhale it will fall into lust and can¡¯t contain their desire. That¡¯s much worse than charm magic. Though the effect is shorter than charm magic.


    Anyway, those vampires are still under Arin¡¯s influence. I don¡¯t think they can be cured anymore.


    And Arin has forsaken them. They can just die. Though they may be useful. Maybe letting them attack that base is a good idea.


    ¡°Then let them attack the base. We¡¯ll exchange the information of the base with those humans. And I¡¯ll try to mark the vampires with Blobbies so I can have a target for portal in that base. Though that¡¯s only if they didn¡¯t notice it. I hope they don¡¯t,¡± I said.


    ¡°Good. Oh, they attacked first.¡±


    Randymented about the earth mage who started attacking the vampires right as soon as they saw the vampires. And the vampires are all smiling knowing that those humans is allowed to be killed.


    The mages are confident that they can defeat the vampires. And as they are busy with the vampires, I have a chance to get closer to them.


    ¡°Wait! Why are they so strong?!¡±


    ¡°They weren¡¯t this strong before. What happened?!¡±


    ¡°Fuck! I thought that they will be easy targets again today! But how did we end up losing?!¡±


    The vampires who no longer need to hold their power back, easily destroy the shield that those mages created. The vampires used the blood they consumed freely.


    One by one, those mages were defeated. Even those who tried to escape were captured. But as I expected, none of them died. The vampires want to suck their blood dry.


    I let them drink a bit of their blood before I leave my hiding spot and approach the vampires. And of course the vampires think of me as enemy right away.


    ¡°Hey, I¡¯m not an enemy. I¡¯m here to tell you that Arin needs me to bring these men for questioning,¡± I said. And again, I just used Arin¡¯s name however I want.


    ¡°Really? Is that what Lady Arin wants?¡± one vampire asked. He¡¯s the one that I captured before.


    ¡°Yeah. In exchange, how about I tell you where these guys came from? There are many other humans there. Some of them are even stronger than these five you just fought. I know that for vampires like you, the stronger the enemy, the more delicious their blood tastes. You can drink as much as you want there,¡± I said.


    ¡°Really? There are more delicious blood than theirs?¡±


    ¡°Yeah. Though there are too many of them. How about you go back to the castle and tell everyone to prepare raiding that ce? Even if you bring everyone with you, I¡¯m sure that there won¡¯t be anyck of blood for you to drink.¡±


    I feel like I can make a living as a scammer. Well, I think I have done it many times. So it¡¯s natural for me to think that way. But I¡¯ll prefer to be a clown than a scammer.


    ...Isn¡¯t a performer doing some sleight-of-hand tricks can be considered as scamming the audience? Then a clown and a scammer is the same.


    The vampires looked at each others and nodded. Seems like agreement has been made.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll give you these guys. It¡¯s a big ce, right? We will go thereter.¡±


    Nice. It¡¯s working. Now there will be a little problem in that base if there¡¯s a master level mage there. Which I think to be highly possible.


    ¡°Good. Though I think you need to restore the blood that was spent from the fight. I¡¯ll give you some bloodbags for you and the other vampires to drink,¡± I said.


    ¡°Huh? You¡¯re going to give us blood, while you asked us to raid the ce filled with humans? That¡¯s suspicious...¡±


    Oh, shit! I said too much!.


    ¡°Don¡¯t you think that the more there is blood to drink, the better it is for you guys? I can only give you bloodbags once in a while. But you can go to that base whenever you want and drink more blood. Though I suggest you to bring everyone with you since they might be stronger than expected,¡± I said.


    ¡°Hah! I don¡¯t think we will lose if we use our all. The previous group who were taken by them was only because we think they were with you since they were not fighting to kill. But now that we know, we won¡¯t be holding back anymore. Everyone, let¡¯s inform the others!¡±


    They all left so quickly. They can¡¯t wait anymore to have a fest of blood. Though that¡¯s only if they survive.


    ¡°Alright, Randy, what will you do?¡± I asked Randy about his next n.


    ¡°I¡¯ll go with them. You¡¯re going to bring them to him, right? Let¡¯s go.¡±


    ¡°Okay. I¡¯ll leave the interrogation to you and Albert. I¡¯ll tell Arin about the fate of the vampires.¡±


    Even if Arin said that she¡¯s fine if we kill them all, I will still tell her about this. Though I don¡¯t think she will have a change of mind.

 Chapter 687

    Chapter 687: The Vampires Start to Move


    ¡°I see. Well, I¡¯ve told you that you can use them however you want. I never really like them. If it¡¯s not for my charm magic, they would never obey me. I used charm magic on them because they are so annoying. And as a queen, it will be troublesome if I kill them myself. So I leave them be. At least they are useful to you if you think you can use them.¡±


    That¡¯s what Arin said after I told her about what I n to do with the vampires who were supposed to be her subordinates. Those vampires should be in their castle preparing to move toward the base. I think they¡¯re going to attack the base at night. Because vampires don¡¯t have any disadvantages at night.


    ¡°Well, if you say so. Anyway, Albert is interrogating the men we caught. If the result shows that they are from the cult, then I might ask you to join us in raiding that base. Well, even then, I need to see the result of the vampires¡¯ raid first,¡± I said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll tell the others to prepare themselves. Since it seems that we won¡¯t make any move tonight, I¡¯ll get the vampires to hunt some bandits to get some blood,¡± Arin said.


    ¡°That¡¯s a good idea. Though I need you all to prepare yourselves. The enemy has tamers. I don¡¯t want you to get tamed by them,¡± I said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. Even if we end up getting tamed, you¡¯ll just free us by killing the tamers, right? We just need to trust you,¡± Arin said.


    That¡¯s the same thing that the werewolf from before told me. Just how much do they trust me?


    .....


    ¡°On that note, since we¡¯re about to fight, can I ask you a little bit of your blood?¡±


    ...In the end, she¡¯s asking me for my blood.


    ¡°Just a bit. There should be a blood bag filled with my blood which is close to its expiration date. I¡¯ll give it to you before the battle.¡±


    I offered my index finger to her in which she bit it and suck a little of my blood. Just as I told her to.


    After that, I return back to the Monsters World. There are werewolves who are on the move near therge human base. It¡¯s best for them to return right away.


    I went to where those werewolves are and told them that I¡¯m bringing them back to the vige. And I told them to bring humans who are still alive with them. Maybe Albert and Randy can learn more from them.


    Some werewolves returned empty-handed, but some have unconscious humans with them. I brought them all to Albert and told the Werewolves and also the angels to prepare for battle.


    ¡°Finally! It¡¯s been a while since there¡¯s a big battle! AWOOO!!¡±


    Shelia is so happy that she started howling.


    ¡°Those guys are tamer? I can finally take revenge on those who make my sister suffer.¡±


    Graham¡¯s desire for revenge is big. And it also affected the other angels. That¡¯s nice.


    ¡°There won¡¯t be anything you need to do at the moment. Just get some rest and make sure that you¡¯re 100% fit. We might meet several master level mages as well,¡± I said.


    I also have informed Ang, Ka, and the others who are willing toe. But as expected, we can¡¯t ask for help from any country. They were needed for the defense of the country. But at least I can get Patricia toe. She¡¯s the only master level mage we have at the moment. Though she¡¯s not the strongest mage.


    But in the end, it will only happen once Albert¡¯s reporte. We will know if they are from the cult or not.


    Though even if they are not from the cult, any group or organization that needed to tame a lot of monsters is still dangerous.


    After that, I open a portal to the vampire castle.


    When I arrive, the vampires are still there preparing to fight. They shared the blood bag I gave them before and they even hunted some monsters.


    They looked at me with bloodthirst in their eyes. But just a giving them a little bit of pressure and they be afraid.


    ¡°How¡¯s the preparation?¡±


    I asked the vampire from before. Seems like he became the representative of this vampire group.


    ¡°We will move at night when it¡¯s dark. Do you think that they are as strong as you?¡± he asked.


    ¡°Nope. I don¡¯t think that there¡¯s any human who is stronger than me.¡±


    I replied honestly. Though it might be true. Unless there¡¯s another Aura Master.


    ...If it¡¯s about magic, there are many who are stronger than me. But if it¡¯s about physical strength, I don¡¯t think there are any human stronger than me. But if it¡¯s monster, there might be some since I don¡¯t think I am stronger than Andro. Though if I have to fight him, it will be easy since he can¡¯t move much.


    I waited with them until nightes. And while pretending to walk around, I put some Blobbies under those vampires¡¯ cloak.


    Now,if some of them got caught and tamed, I can open a portal to where they put the tamed monsters are. And I have instructed the Blobbies to leave the vampires¡¯ side if the vampires are losing or retreating. That way, even if the vampires are no longer inside the base, the Blobbies will still be there.


    Finally, it¡¯s night. And the vampires are ready to move.


    ¡°Hey, I can get you there faster with my portal and you don¡¯t have to spend any blood if you do so. But I won¡¯t help you return here. You need to return on your own since I won¡¯t be going there,¡± I said. In which they agree happily.


    Of course I will go there. But there¡¯s no need to tell them about it.


    For this, I will be with Spot. We need invisibility more than speed to watch everything. I¡¯m sorry to Ray but I won¡¯t ride him tonight.


    Though Ray is happily running around somewhere. Running along some unicorns. Should I try to get the unicorns to join us?


    I don¡¯t think they can speak. Though if Ray can somehow be their leader and have them obey him, we can get another extra additions.


    With all the mages we have getting tired easily running and using magic during battle, what would happen if they use magic while riding unicorn? They can move faster and dodge enemies attack better.


    I let the vampires enter a portal I opened and told them where they need to go to reach the human base. I close the portal and without the vampires knowing, I opened another portal close to where I brought the vampires and enter from there with Spot.


    ¡°It¡¯s stupid of them to get tricked by you,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°It¡¯s not stupid. And I didn¡¯t trick anyone. I only told them the truth. That there¡¯s arge human base where they can drink as many blood as possible,¡± I said.


    And they are the ones agreeing to it. Since Arin has agreed with me to use them, I don¡¯t feel guilty at all.


    The vampires are marching toward the base. But before they can reach there, they meet a group of humans. So they started attacking them first.


    The humans who seems to be returning back to their base were not ready to face arge group of vampires. They tried their best to fight back. But the prepared vampires are too strong for them.


    In a matter of minutes, all of the humans died. And they got sucked dry and died. Only making the vampires stronger before the raid.


    The vampires still not full and return to move toward the human base again. And I go to the remain of their previous battle.


    ¡°Three people and three coins. Those vampires gave no mercy,¡± I said.


    ¡°But you seem happy about it. What if they are not from the cult though? Victoria asked.


    ¡°Then we don¡¯t know anything about them. And they can only me the vampires. Though if they aim for the werewolves, angels, and other monsters we know, whatever they are, they are our enemies,¡± I said.


    ¡°I guess the probability of them being enemy is much higher than them being our ally. Anyway, Timmy said that the Evil God is not in out world. Maybe he¡¯s in this world since we have proof of other human being in this world. What do you think?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°The chance is high that the Evil God is in a stage beyond master level. And that makes sense since he¡¯s been alive for more than a thousand years already. And in that case, he should have known that we are approaching them. If Timmy¡¯s magic is that strong, it¡¯s normal to think that the Evil God is at least as strong as he is,¡± I said.


    Timmy can sense everything in the continent that touch the ground back then when I asked him about the Evil God. In that case, if the Evil God is an earth mage or maybe wind mage at that level, he should be able to sense me if he is hiding in that base.


    I don¡¯t think that¡¯s the case though. I¡¯m sure he¡¯s strong, but for some reason, we can stop many of their ns. That means there¡¯s some variable which make him unable to do anything.


    In any case, we need to be careful. One step at a time. And for not, that base is more important.

 Chapter 688

    Chapter 688: The Vampires Raiding the Base


    ¡°Oh, they¡¯re here. The vampires have arrived at the gate,¡± I said.


    ¡°I can¡¯t see anything though. Can you use portal into my room in Cassau? I left my binocr there. And I think it¡¯s best if you keep it at all time so you can get other people who are with you so they can see from afar,¡± Victoria said.


    It¡¯s her room, so it¡¯s natural that Victoria left Blobbies there. I opened a portal directly there and Victoria grabbed the binocr and returns back to me.


    The binocr is already exist in this world. But with Victoria¡¯s idea and Marie¡¯s ability, they make this one to be much better than any other binocr in this world. With clearer vision and longer distance.


    And after creating just one, Albert noticed how dangerous it is if anyone can spy you from far away. So after creating just a few, the production was stopped. Only the kings, Victoria, my friends, and some other have these high-tech binocr.


    I tried to use it, and I can see much further when I used Divine Vision. But it¡¯s restricting my vision to one spot and it¡¯s difficult to adjust it when I tried to look at my surrounding, so I don¡¯t need it.


    If it¡¯s average person, they barely can see as far as I can with my Divine Vision. So as long as I told them that it¡¯s safe to use it, they can. I don¡¯t want them to suddenly be detected by master level mage.


    .....


    The gate of the base is open because at the same time that the vampires arrive, with their boosted speed by using blood they consumed, there are a group of people about to enter the base. They seem to have just returned from their hunt since there¡¯s another person apanied by several monsters moving to the gate for monsters.


    Though even if the gate is closed, the vampires can just fly above the wall. Even if they don¡¯t want to fly, they can easily jump over that high wall easily and won¡¯t use as much blood as when they are flying.


    ¡°I think that the group that I brought to Albert before said that they previously tamed some vampires. If I kill the tamer, won¡¯t there be a chaos inside the base from the monsters who are freed from their contract? I think that will be good for distraction if we need to destroy that base,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re already thinking of destroying them? We haven¡¯t received the result of the interrogation from Albert yet. And even if we do, it will only be tomorrow when we can make our move.¡±


    Victoria is reminding me to not move too fast.


    I agree with her. Though I don¡¯t like those people who are trying to tame as many monsters as possible. And they even trying to tame powerful monsters. That is not good at all. What are they nning


    Since the kings in our alliance didn¡¯t say anything about getting more troops by taming monsters, that means whoever they are, they are not doing it to fight against the cult.


    ¡°By the way, why is there so few tamers in our alliance? There are also few summoners as well. But from the look of it, inside that base, there¡¯s a lot of tamers and probably summoners as well. I don¡¯t think any average summoner can bring so many people into this world easily,¡± Victoria said.


    Hmm... she¡¯s right. Too few summoners and tamers that we know, but they have a lot of them. That is suspicious.


    ¡°Don¡¯t tell me that... they have spies at school to find summoners and tamers, and took them away soon after knowing their elements. That might be possible. And the fact that they didn¡¯t approach me was because I already made a contract with a ck Slime and they don¡¯t think that I will be useful. That might be it,¡± I¡¯m thinking loudly so Victoria can hear me as well.


    ¡°That is possible. Considering that in your past life, you tried to kill Blobby over and over again but you failed. And in this life, when you were showing Blobby to other people, everyone thinks that you¡¯re weak. Do you remember other tamers and summoners back at your school other than you?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t remember,¡± I said confidently.


    ¡°Then we truly need a cure for terrible memory. You¡¯re a doctor. Make it yourself.¡±


    By the time we finished chatting, the vampires have drink the blood of the gatekeepers and enter the gate. They move on their own instead of staying in groups.


    They must be thinking that the humans there are weak and they can easily kill them as long as they consume enough blood. And there are a lot of people that they can drink blood from.


    ¡°Spot. Next time I open a portal, enter it right away. Since there¡¯s a huge battle inside the base, I¡¯m sure that the master level mages inside will fight. If they somehow enter my range of vision, they will notice me right away. So I¡¯ll open a portal to escape in case they find me,¡± I said.


    ¡°Sigh... I miss the time when I can just blow everyone away with my breath,¡± Spot sighed.


    ¡°If they are enemies, I¡¯m sure you will have the time soon. Though that¡¯s only if the base is not destroyed right away,¡± I said.


    I don¡¯t think I can do it by myself with a base this big. But if it¡¯s that guy, I know he can.


    Some vampires entered the ce where they are holding the tamed monsters. They meet another vampire who have been tamed and talked a bit. But the tamed vampires can¡¯t disobey their master. The only way for them to be free is if the tamers set them free, or the tamers die.


    Thinking that might be the case, the vampires move be even wilder as they are seeking tamers to kill.


    I think some of them have died already since some of the monsters are trying to escape.


    If there¡¯s this much noise, I don¡¯t think their master level mage will notice that I¡¯m looking. This is good.


    The more tamers died, the more monsters trying to break free. And some of them entered the base and helped the vampires go wild.


    Good. Kill them all! Even if you die, I won¡¯t care anyway.


    Though if there¡¯s any werewolves, angels, or elves, I don¡¯t want them to die. What if their rtives are under me? That can be used as a good motivation for the monsters to fight


    There are indeed some elves. But they escaped from the base right away as soon as their contracts were broken. Some angels are flying to escape. But there are werewolves who prefer to kill those people.


    There seem to be multiple locations where they are holding the monsters. Because the fight happens in multiple ces. Though I won¡¯t see everything. If the master level mage notices me too soon, they will think that I orchestrated this whole situation. Though that is correct.


    But now, I don¡¯t want to be known yet. Once someone notices me, I will escape right away.


    The vampires seem to be the strongest monsters there. They killed several expert level mages already. While other monsters could barely defeat one advanced level mage.


    There are still a lot of monsters who can¡¯t do anything. Their contracts are still active. Which mean that the tamers are still alive. And I think that there are too many of them. Maybe most of them are still outside looking for more monsters.


    Suddenly, I can see the monsters died one by one. They are killed easily by someone.


    ¡°It¡¯s here. The master level mage,¡± I said.


    From where I am, I can see two ces where they are holding the monsters. And in one of them, I saw monsters died after getting one-shoted one by one with fire magic. There¡¯s a master level fire mage there.


    And soon after, at the second location, several monsters were frozen at the same time. Including a few vampires who have killed expert level mages.


    ¡°One is a master level fire mage, and another is a master level ice mage. I think there are more of them in another ce. But knowing just two of them is good enough at the moment,¡± I said.


    ¡°Do they not notice you yet?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Not yet. If they can¡¯t sense us at all, we will watch until all of the rebelling monsters that I can see die or tamed. I don¡¯t think they will give up the chance of taming so many powerful vampires at once if they are looking for monsters,¡± I said.


    Though they have killed some of them. Well, just one Vampire Lord is powerful enough to beat several expert level mages. I saw one of them getting hit by fire magic from the master level mage and barely survive.


    And on his deathbed, a tamer approach him and tamed him. And then a healere and healed him. Now the healed vampires are fighting his own kin.


    Seems like the situation will be resolved soon.

 Chapter 689

    Chapter 689: The Cult is Involved as Expected


    Many of the monsters in that base have died. Some were tamed again after their previous tamers died because of the fight against the vampires.


    As for the vampires, because everyone inside thinks that they are strong and very useful, they got tamed even though they needed to sacrifice some weaker mages for it.


    There¡¯s only a few of the vampires left. And they finally realized that they are in a losing battle. Even though they have drunk a lot of blood and make them at their strongest form, they are not a match against a single master level mage.


    But I never thought that the vampires are smart. Instead of just running away, they chose to only target the tamers to release their vampire friends. Once the vampires who were tamed freed, they escaped while also grabbing some humans with them. Probably so that they can drink their bloodter on.


    All the vampires who raided the base, except for some who died, managed to escape. Along with some monsters who were freed from their contract. Though I don¡¯t think those other monsters will return here again. As for the vampires, they might return again in the future just so they can get more blood.


    ¡°Seems like it¡¯s over. Spot, I won¡¯t use portal here. Let¡¯s just retreat normally. I¡¯ll open a portal when we¡¯re far enough,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. Did anyone notice you?¡± Spot asked.


    .....


    ¡°Nope. They are too busy with the vampires and other monsters. They didn¡¯t notice us at all. That¡¯s why we¡¯re retreating normally,¡± I said.


    Even the master level mages didn¡¯t chase after the vampires even though they supposed to have the power to do that. I guess they don¡¯t want to kill too much of the vampires knowing that they are strong and smart monsters.


    Spot flies away with us on his back very quickly. In just a matter of second, we¡¯re already far from that base. And as I was about to open a portal to our world, Sonia appears in front of us.


    ¡°Sonia, any news?¡± I asked her.


    ¡°Yes. Albert has done with the interrogation. He also finished asking the others who were caught by the werewolves as well. And he wants you to meet him as soon as possible,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°I guess it¡¯s something important. Well, I was just about to go home. We¡¯ll meet him right away,¡± I said.


    I was about to open a portal back to Cassau, but I changed my mind and open a portal directly to Albert¡¯s location. He¡¯s in an office near where the prisoners I brought are. Since they are still being imprisoned, I guess they are enemies.


    ¡°Hey, Albert. Randy as well. What did you find?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Roy. That was quick. I was just finished talking with Sonia,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Yeah. The raid is over and most vampires have left the base. I was just about to open a portal when Sonia came to tell me that you¡¯re done with the interrogation. Anything you learned from them?¡±


    Albert then told me to take a seat first before he starts talking. I guess it¡¯s quite serious if he asks me to sit first.


    ¡°Roy. There are some tamers that we have captured thanks to you and the werewolves. By the way, did you ever notice how there are so few tamers and summoners out there?¡± Albert asked me.


    ¡°Well, I was just discussing about it with Victoria before while we were watching the raid. Do you know the reason behind it? Is it the cult again? They are grabbing the tamers and summoners who have just awakened?¡± I asked.


    ¡°You are right. Yes, that base is part of the cult,¡± Albert said.


    At this point, I¡¯m not surprised. That was well within expectation. They let some people die just so they can tame some vampires. But those vampires in the end escape with their lives.


    I¡¯m listening to Albert¡¯s report about what he found. He will also tell it to other kings but he¡¯s telling it to me first.


    Apparently, in many school, the introductory school to introduce kids at the age of 15 about magic, there are some people rted with the cult. Either knowingly or not.


    Some are teachers, some are school staffs, and some were even the students. Or maybe the student¡¯s parents.


    Albert and Randy got this information afterparing the answers with all the prisoners we just caught. We couldn¡¯t even get this information from the Professor. Which means that even with how high his position was, he¡¯s still in no position to know about this information.


    Just how much do they keep everything in secret?


    Those people at school, either they are teachers, staffs, students, the parents, or even those who are just interested in watching kids got their elements, were spies for the cult. Some were given order by the cult directly, but some didn¡¯t even know that they are being used by the cult. The people from the cult were the ones asking them to find someone useful. Like summoners, tamers, or someone with rare elements.


    Summoners and tamers were easy to be taught. Since summoners just need to summon a monster, while tamers only need to tame monsters. But those spies wille to those who have just recently awakened and told them that they found a way to get tamers and summoners to get stronger. Or even entice them using money.


    And the thing is, those tamers or summoners also need at least one other element in which they can prove to be useful. And they will be recruited by the cult unknowingly.


    And when they finally realized that they are in the cult, there¡¯s no escape. They will be introduced to the explosive device that will be put inside their mouth.


    Unless it¡¯s for the tamers and summoners. They will be given mission. The summoners will open a portal and bring as many people as possible to Monsters World, while the tamers will tame as many monsters as possible.


    ¡°...So, do you actually think that there are innocent people inside that base that we mustn¡¯t kill? I prefer to kill them all because it¡¯s easier that way,¡± I said.


    ¡°I agree. Even if they are tricked, they should know that they are risking their lives just by going into Monsters World. We¡¯ll just kill them and get things done as soon as possible,¡± Randy agreed with me.


    ¡°Sigh... you two are too scary. Can¡¯t you find other solution beside killing?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°¡±No.¡±¡±


    Both Randy and I replied together.


    They are with the cult after all. If they have been there for a long time, there¡¯s no point in talking with them.


    ¡°Also, there are no youngster in that base. Where do they took the newly awakened kids to? Must be somewhere in this world, right? They are being forced to join the cult. And they can¡¯t say no if they want to live. Only when they agree will they be used to go to Monsters World. Even if they are kids, they are at least 15 years old. They are old enough to think about themselves. Probably it will take a while until they can be trusted or forced to join the cult,¡± I said.


    ¡°You are right. And here¡¯s our n. Roy, I want you to sneak into that base in Monsters World and see if you think that there¡¯s any innocent people there or not, while also try to grab someone who seem important in there. There might be more information we can get from them,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Me? Enter the base and find someone innocent? My mind is already biased by just hearing that they are from the cult. I don¡¯t think I will find anyone,¡± I said.


    ¡°I know. And I don¡¯t expect that you will find anyone innocent. But I¡¯ll at least say that this is your real mission. I¡¯ll tell this to other kings this way. Saying that you¡¯re looking for innocent people there,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°At least you¡¯re understand.¡±


    ¡°Also, once you think you have found everything, you are free to destroy that base and kill everyone in it. You can ask your friends and monsters toe join you.¡±


    Nice. I¡¯ll finish everything as soon as possible so I can destroy the base then.


    ¡°Next is Randy. Your training is over, right?¡± Albert asked Randy this time.


    ¡°Yes,¡± Randy replied.


    ¡°Then I want you to go and find the location where the cult is training the summoners and tamers. Save them if possible. I want Spot to go with you as well. You can ask for as many reinforcement as possible. You can ask Sonia. And if you need anything else, you can ask me or other kings through Sonia,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Understood. Let¡¯s do our best, Spot,¡± Randy said to Spot.


    ¡°And so, you two need to rest now. I¡¯ll inform the others via Sonia.¡± Albert said.


    And so, I returned back to my home in Cassau after a while.


    In the end, it will be infiltration instead of a direct war against them. Well, I will also try to find summoners right away so they can¡¯t escape back to our world. Maybe assassination suits me more than direct battle.


    Albert said that those people in the base mostly doesn¡¯t even know each other. So it¡¯s fine to infiltrate and use my real name. Though I will probably use an alias. Not Roy, not Ninja, and not rence. I need another name.


    Well, it¡¯s not really important. I¡¯ll just think about itter when they asked me.


    For now, I need to rest. I don¡¯t know how long I will stay there after all.

 Chapter 690

    Chapter 690: Not Just a Base but a City


    It¡¯s early in the morning when I woke up from my rest. And I¡¯m going to infiltrate the cult¡¯s base in Monsters World today.


    I ate breakfast with everyone and told them about what I¡¯m going to do.


    ¡°I¡¯m going to infiltrate the base. And Albert has given me permission to destroy everything there once I¡¯m done investigating by myself. I think I will call for helpter. But I don¡¯t know. If I can kill everyone right away, I think there¡¯s no need for you guys to participate,¡± I said.


    ¡°You think you can destroy everything?¡± Ka asked me.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. Most things that I do are improvisation. I¡¯m not good at nning. As soon as I finished with my objectives, I¡¯ll fight. If I need you, I¡¯ll ask for help. Sorry that I¡¯m not good with nning,¡± I apologized.


    ¡°It¡¯s okay. So, what will you do there?¡± Candy asked me.


    ¡°First, I will try to find and grab all the summoners there. Knock them out, block their magic, and bring them to Albert. That will make sure that no one can leave Monsters World. Then, I will search for the master level mages and important people in that base. I¡¯ll capture them all as well if possible. Once I¡¯m done, there¡¯s only destruction left,¡± I said. At least that¡¯s what I had in mind. I don¡¯t know if I will actually do it or notter.


    .....


    Though infiltrating the base and looking for master level mages might be difficult. So I don¡¯t think that I can capture them all. Because once I used portal to bring the summoners to Albert, I¡¯m pretty sure that the master level mages will notice.


    ¡°Best of luck to you. Don¡¯t pick a fight against anyone as soon as you enter just because all of them are rted to the cult,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°You think I¡¯ll just fight anyone because they¡¯re from the cult?¡±


    ¡°¡±¡±Yes!¡±¡±¡±


    Everyone agreed easily. Even Ang agreed. Am I that unreliable in holding myself back?


    ¡°Whatever. I¡¯ll be going then. Just prepare yourself if Sonia appears,¡± I said.


    ¡°Oh, what about Randy? He¡¯s not going with you?¡± Ka asked me.


    ¡°He¡¯s going to investigate where the newly awakened summoners and tamers were taken to and probably he will save those kids before they got themselves involved too deeply with the cult with Spot,¡± I said.


    I also told them about what happens with school and how there are some people who are scouting for summoners and tamers. And maybe some people who awakened good element.


    ¡°Ah, I think I remember about it. That day, when I was about to go home after my awakening test, someone approached me. He said that he¡¯s interested in my healing magic. Maybe he¡¯s involved with the cult,¡± Ka said.


    Well, that was to be expected. If there are spies at school, someone should have asked Ka just because of her healing magic.


    ¡°Hmm... I think someone did approach me back then. But I don¡¯t remember at all. I just hurriedly went home that day so I can test my magic,¡± Ang said.


    Since she has four elements, it¡¯s also natural for Ang to be approached.


    The others also started talking if there are someone approaching them.


    ¡°Master! Someone also approached me that day! But when I said that I want to transform into a rhinoceros, they gave up on me!¡± Jewel said.


    Even my disciple? Well, they might be thinking that she wants to transform into a bird. And with her lighting magic while she¡¯s flying, she will be very powerful. But they gave up after Jewel confidently said that she wants to be a rhino.


    I was at first shocked with her decision. But now, I think her decision was truly the best decision she ever made. Even master level mage with enhanced physical strength would have difficulty to hurt Jewel in her rhino form.


    But now there¡¯s one question I have in my mind.


    Why didn¡¯t they approach me? I have summoning element which they want. But why didn¡¯t they approach me instead? Is it because they are thinking that I will be weak no matter how much I trained because I have air element as my other element?


    In my first life, I only have summoning element. And they didn¡¯t approach me.


    And in this life, I have two elements. Summoning and air element. But they still didn¡¯t approach me.


    I¡¯m not that useless! But I guess no one would have any expectation on me since that¡¯s all I have.


    ¡°Look. He¡¯s angry now after thinking that the cult never approached him because no one expected him to be anything,¡± Victoria said.


    Damn, now she¡¯s insulting me. Good thing I have something to look forward soon. The destruction of the cult¡¯s base in Monsters World.


    I don¡¯t know if the base will be the only base in Monsters World or not, but just the destruction of one base is already good enough. Even better if I can kill all the summoners so they won¡¯t have any chance of escaping.


    But if there¡¯s a master level mage in one element and also have summoning element as well, that might be hard. They can escape easily using portal.


    After I finished talking with everyone, I left to Monsters World. With Victoria and Airy.


    ¡°...I¡¯m totally useless. I only realized how big the trouble we¡¯re facing now. Are you sure it¡¯s okay for me toe with you?¡± Airy asked me.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. You¡¯re already good enough just by staying with me. Although it¡¯s a little, even though I¡¯m not cultivating, I can feel that my air element is gradually improving. Just by being with you, I can improve my strength. I want you to keep staying with me instead so I can reach master level sooner,¡± I said.


    ¡°That means I¡¯m useful to you?¡± Airy asked.


    ¡°You are. But if you want to leave my side, then you are free to do that. I would never try to restrain your freedom,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll stay! Thank you for saying I¡¯m useful!¡±


    Nice. I picked the right answer. It¡¯s a good thing that she will stay with me voluntarily instead of having me forcing her to do so. I don¡¯t want someone useful to me to leave.


    Now, were¡¯ close to where the base is. We will be entering the base from the gate close to where the vampires left before after their raid is over.


    I changed my clothes into something dirtier and torn. I¡¯m going to enter the base while pretending that I returned after I got attacked by vampires. They will believe me and won¡¯t try to identify me. Hopefully.


    To make it more believable, I roll around on the ground to make myself dirtier.


    One of the human that Albert interrogated before was a healer. I can just say that the healer healed me but he died in the end.


    Next is rough breathing to make it seems like I¡¯m exhausted. And my preparation isplete. Except for my name. But I don¡¯t think anyone will care about my name. I¡¯ll use the name rence I guess. Even if they think that I¡¯m rted to the circus, no one will think that someone who destroyed a base is a clown.


    And so, once I get closer to the base, I started running lightly pretending that I have just escaped.


    I approached the gatekeeper and gave him one coin. Good thing all coins are the same.


    ¡°Huff... I encountered some vampires... everyone else died and I¡¯m the only survivor...¡± I said to the gatekeeper.


    ¡°The vampires again? Damn them. They should have just get themselves tamed. Are you okay? Do you need a healer?¡± the gatekeeper asked.


    Good. He didn¡¯t suspect me at all. I¡¯m so good at acting.


    ¡°I¡¯m fine... Just tired. The healer managed to heal me before he got himself killed. But I couldn¡¯t get everyone¡¯s coins. Sorry.¡± I said.


    ¡°It¡¯s not important anyway. The coin is just to enter the gate. Everyone thinks that by bringing the other¡¯s coin, they can get their belongings since they are dead. But they¡¯re wrong. Though it¡¯s a secret. We just don¡¯t want the coin to fall into the hands of humanoid monsters. Or the ident likest night will happen,¡± the gatekeeper said.


    Before I move from the gate, I need to ask a question to make all suspicion of me disappear.


    ¡°What... happenedst night? I was out,¡± I asked.


    ¡°The vampires attacked the base. Once you enter, you will see that there are evidences of destruction there. No one bothers to clear them yet.¡±


    ¡°Ah? Is my ce destroyed?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Just look at it yourself! My house is also destroyed. It¡¯s just a month ago that I can buy that house! But it¡¯s destroyed now. I had no choice but to sleep at the inn. Just enter already and get some rest! Your breathing is annoying!¡±


    Well, I think that¡¯s enough. He won¡¯t be suspicious of me anymore.


    But an inn? Is this not a base but a city?


    Now that I enter the base and look around, without using my Divine Vision, I can see that it¡¯s not that much different to a city. Which is good. Because I can use a room at the inn as my base while I¡¯m here.

 Chapter 691

    Chapter 691: How They Live Here


    I found an inn and rest for a while. Or at least that¡¯s what I led other people to think.


    I¡¯m still in my room, but I look around the surrounding area with my Divine Vision. Not to the point where I can see many things. Just little by little, the range of my vision increased when I think that it¡¯s safe since the master level mage didn¡¯t sense me looking at them.


    From what happenedst night during the raid, I only found two master level mages. One is a fire element master level mage, and the other is an ice element master level mage. And I think that there are more of them.


    Since I know their appearance, as long as I can just look at their body, I can look at them without having them to notice me. That¡¯s what I learned after sing Divine Vision on Patricia. With her permission to practice how much I can see master level mage.


    By the way, looking through her clothes makes her instantly wary of me. More so than when I look into her eyes from far. That was an ident. Even if she¡¯s far older than me, her appearance is not convincing and she¡¯s not my taste with her appearance anyway.


    Now, as long as I start checking on those people¡¯s features before looking at their eyes, I can see if they are the master level mages I sawst night or not. Though I hope that I won¡¯t meet other master level mages yet. As long as I didn¡¯t see too much of their body.


    The fire master level mage has a birthmark on his right knee and the ice master level mage wears prosthetic thumb on his left hand. I¡¯m sure not many people have the same features. Knowing that the prosthetic thumb is signed by someone, probably the ice mage himself, and the birthmark of the fire mage is in the shape of pentagon.


    .....


    With that information, I started looking around starting from the inn. There are no one with those features and no one notices me looking at them.


    Some are like me, staying at the private room in the inn. Some are in the shared room with other people.


    But what about the crime rate in this ce? Well, since they¡¯re all rted to the cult, everyone is a criminal. But I think those people feel safe here. Even if they are bringing cash with them and leave them behind in the shared room.


    In our world, we used hunter card or simr cards that we can use to buy things. But we didn¡¯t use it here. We need cash. And I easily stole some cash from under the rubble of the destroyed building so I can have some money to pay for the inn.


    There are women as well here, but most of them are not powerful mages who left the base to look for monsters. Most of the women are here to entertain the men. Because it¡¯s easier for them to get money than to look for monsters. And I think they are asked to do it so the men have more motivation to look for monsters.


    With the cirction of money here, I¡¯m sure that there are some people who frequently enter and leave this world. I¡¯m sure that they are being protected by the master level mage as well. To make sure that the people here can still return.


    I need to look for that ce. And I will block their magic one by one.


    Now that I have looked around the inn and rested for a while, I walked down to the bar in the first floor. It¡¯s noon but people have started to get drunk. It¡¯s easier to get information from them when they¡¯re drunk.


    I walk into the bar and order a rather cheap drink and snacks. I don¡¯t think there will be anything appealing here.


    The bar is quite crowded, but I can still get a table for myself. It seems like even though there¡¯s no rule here, everyone is quite good with their manner. Some even ask me politely if they can sit at my table when all the tables are taken.


    It¡¯s just two men. A ck-haired man and a bald man. And at first, I was just focusing on my own snacks. But they started to chat. I can hear them clearly.


    ¡°It¡¯s been a while since I came here again. I have enough money to go back to my home and spent my days happily with my wife and kids for a while,¡± the ck-haired man said.


    ¡°But your wife never knows that you¡¯re in another world ying around with other women! Hahaha!¡± the bald manughed.


    I guess other than being with the cult, they live just like any other people. Have a wife and children. And also cheat on his wife while pretending it to be a business trip. Though I won¡¯t do it. After all, I got permission to get a harem.


    ¡°It¡¯s nice, you know? When I got bored here, I can go back home and pretend that I¡¯m a good husband. When I¡¯m tired with my wife, I cane here and y around however I like. Unlike those newbies who can¡¯t even make a living here,¡± the ck-haired man said.


    ¡°You keep talking about that. How about we talk aboutst night¡¯s attack?¡± the bald man asked.


    ¡°Why should we talk about it? Everyone is talking about it. I¡¯m tired of it.¡±


    That¡¯s right. No need to talk about what everyone is talking. If they want to do it, the should have picked another table instead of here.


    The ck-haired man, in his drunken-state, started talking about things that the bald man seem to know already. Because the ck-haired man keep talking about it when he¡¯s drunk.


    He said that making a lot of monsters tamed in this world gives him a lot of money. Especially the stronger ones. But this guy keeps hunting for weaker monsters so he can survive.


    Those monsters then exchanged with money. That money then used by him to y around here. And he also saved some for his family back in human world.


    He said that he¡¯s telling his wife that he¡¯s going on a business trip. Though it¡¯s not really a lie since he¡¯s working here.


    And once he¡¯s tired of this world, he will return back to his home bringing a lot of money.


    And that means we can go back and forth to this world easily. Only things needed is to pay the summoners for a toll to open a portal.


    ¡°I have enough money now and I¡¯m going back for a bit. Tonight they will open a portal near my home and I will go there,¡± the ck-haired man said.


    ¡°Yeah, yeah. I¡¯ll be returning tonight as well. Getting money here is easy. And I have enough to spend for a whole year at home now. I think I will stay there for a year beforeing back here to get more money. Unlike here, in our world, there are more women. The women here never change at all. We should request for more women to be recruited,¡± the bald man said.


    I don¡¯t care about men or women. Since they¡¯re all rted to the cult, I will kill them all.


    But it¡¯s good. As long as I follow these twoter tonight, I can find the summoners.


    Once all summoners are gone, I can kill everyone here. Though I don¡¯t think I can kill everyone right away since there must be some summoners who are staying in our world instead of staying here.


    So they are free toe and go. While those who are threatened here were also free as long as they have enough money. But even if they leave this world and return after paying with money, they will end up somewhere the cult is operating. After all, that ce they returned to must be secured.


    I guess Albert didn¡¯t ask everything. Or maybe those people he interrogated were too poor to make money to go back to this world. Though in the end I brought them back to their home world. Except instead of a house, they will live in a jail.


    So far so good. No one is suspecting me of being a spy.


    After those two are out from drinking too much, I started to listen to other people¡¯s drunken stories. Most of them were about returning back to their world. And apparently, the girls who are here are mostly forced toe. And they can¡¯t go back home unless someone is willing to pay for their return home.


    There are also some people who are too weak and instead of going out to hunt monsters, they chose a job like carrying the supplies or something else. The supplies are being sent here from our world every night along with the people going home.


    I guess most summoners will be there tonight then. But meeting them all will be difficult. I guess this mission won¡¯t be easy.

 Chapter 692

    Chapter 692: Investigating the City in Monsters World


    After listening to the drunken stories at the bar, I move to another bar and do the same. Other than the story aboutst night¡¯s attack by the vampires, there¡¯s nothing important. Though some of them thought that it¡¯s best to return to their home world before the vampires attack again.


    ¡°They¡¯re attacking us for our blood. That means they wille here again who knows when. I want to go home as soon as possible.¡±


    ¡°To do that, you need to save some money. How much money do you have? I think it¡¯s best for you to go and tame some monsters instead ofining. If you can¡¯t get enough money, you will stay here for the rest of your life.¡±


    That conversation happened in several bars I went to. Many wants to go home, but some who were not involved in the raid think that they are cowards.


    By the way, the drink and the meals in different bars are roughly simr. There are truly no variations here. I guess it¡¯s no wonder why some people wants to return.


    I heard that they had summoners to open a portal every night to bring supply. But they will only take people through the portal once a week.


    With how high the prices for staying in a private room at an inn, I guess it¡¯s difficult for the people here to stay still.


    .....


    Even if they can get enough money to go home, if the time for returning is still a few days away, they need to gather some more money or they will be out of it before they can go home.


    The question is about what happened to where the people here are returning to from this world. I hear that there are some summoners who will bring several people to different ces. And from what I heard, those ces are not always the same.


    Which means that the summoners have to move around in human world. So it¡¯s possible that they are with traveling merchant or something.


    I walk around on the street while also looking for something. I have found out where the summoners are. There are only three of them in this world at the moment while the rest are moving in our world. Which mean it will be hard for me to get all summoners.


    Alright. It will be difficult to kill all summoners anyway. I guess creating a huge disturbance is the easiest.


    Anyway, it¡¯s just three summoners. As long as I can kill them, everyone here won¡¯t be able to return. And summoners from my world will onlye at night to bring in supplies.


    Which means that if I want to kill as many people as possible, I need to do it right after the summoners who brought in supplies close their portal. And once everyone dies, I only need to wait until the next night.


    ¡°But for now, I will just look around first. Good thing that there will be a batch of people returning from this world and entering this worldter tonight. I¡¯ll see if I can leave as well,¡± I said to myself.


    ¡°Don¡¯t forget to capture some important looking people here,¡± Victoria reminded me of my mission. Though she didn¡¯t remind me that I must not kill innocent people. Well, the more I look around inside this city-like base, the more I think that there is no one actually innocent.


    ¡°I think I can find some random people for that. I have a nter. But there are more things I want to learn first,¡± I said.


    I continue walking around the city toward the center. And the closer I am, the more people watch me. And I can feel the wind even though I can¡¯t feel it away from the center.


    And that¡¯s when something pulled my hair from behind. Not the people from here. But the air spirit, Airy.


    I stopped myself from shouting and stepped back away from the wind. And when I¡¯m far enough, I asked Airy what she¡¯s doing.


    ¡°What is it, Airy? It¡¯s rare that you want my attention,¡± I asked Airy.


    ¡°The wind is not natural. The wind is going to the direction of the center of this ce,¡± Airy said.


    ¡°I see. Thanks, Airy. I was also suspicious by the wind. But thanks to you, I¡¯m sure of it. The wind is created by a wind mage, right? If we say anything there, the wind mage would notice it right away. And that mage should be at least a master level mage. I guess there are more than just the two ice mage and fire mage. As expected.¡±


    If the wind mage sensed me alone, but I just say something thoughtlessly, the the wind mage will be suspicious of me. And I can¡¯t no longer be hidden anymore.


    Though that means I can go all out. But I want to destroy everything here. I need to endure it a bit more.


    I know where those three summoners are. I think that instead of evacuating the people here, they are responsible to report what happen in case of emergency. Which mean they might be the closest people to the higher ups. Probably the archbishop. Or maybe even the Evil God himself.


    In that case, they might not be weak. They might be master level mages in their other element than summoning. At least I don¡¯t think that they have multiple familiars to be summoned.


    Summoners can only return from Monsters World from where theying from. And vice versa. They can only enter Monsters World from where they were returning from.


    Other than that, summoners can only open a portal to where their familiars are. And in their case, they only have one familiar at most since I don¡¯t think any of them know about Pear-y Fruit. Instead of using that monster as fighting force, they might be using those monsters as markers. Like how I use Blobbies to mark the ce I need to open my portal to.


    In that case, I can¡¯t take those summoners to bring to Albert. Because that means the ce in our world that will be marked is the prison. Not where they need to meet the higher ups.


    So, I need to capture them and hold them in this world by some means. That way, if we force them to open a portal, we will be brought directly to where the higher ups are.


    No one knows where those summoners will go when they open their portal. And those summoners, along with some people who might be master level mages, are being treated like a royalty in this ce. They are people who have never returned back to human world ever since they first arrive here. That shows how loyal they are to the Evil God.


    ¡°If we can grab those summoners, we might get new information about the Evil God¡¯s whereabouts. I need a better n than what I have in my head right now,¡± I said after I finish looking around the city. There are still a few hours left before the people here can finally go back to their world.


    I have paid for the fee for the return. I think it was horrible how there are so few people can go back even though there are many who wants to leave this world. And some even use this world as a way to get money. Like a job.


    But that¡¯s okay. I¡¯m not too worried about it. And I picked somewhere where there are so few people returning there.


    ¡°You bought a ticket to go back to Varadis. What will you do then?¡± Victoria asked me.


    ¡°Cause some trouble after they close the portal. At least that¡¯s what¡¯s in my mind. But I¡¯ll just attract more trouble then. I want to go back to Tatrama but there are too many people going there. I guess we haven¡¯t finished clearing Tatrama from the cult yet,¡± I said.


    I have returned to the inn where I have paid to rest. And I didn¡¯t pay to rest overnight since I¡¯ll be leaving tonight. Seems like they allow hourly payment here.


    I have eaten lunch and said to the owner that I will be resting until I can go hometer tonight. Everyone here except for the guest are women. At least I have something good to see.


    And obviously, the staffs here will let the guest do anything they want as long as they are paid. These women are so pitiful. Though I might kill them in the end.


    I guess they can be considered as innocent. But I¡¯ll just say that they are necessary sacrifices. I¡¯m sorry to the family they left behind.


    And while I was resting on the bed, I hear a knock on the door. Those women are here. And not just one or two. But all of the staffs of this inn are there outside the door. Including the owner.


    I think I know what they want. But I¡¯ll just ask them anyway.


    I open the door and see them all lining up on the hallway. I asked the owner who is standing in front of them all.


    ¡°What is it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Sir customer. I heard that you¡¯re going back to Earth tonight. Is that right?¡±


    They are calling our world as Earth. Even though earth mage can use magic in this world...


    ¡°Yes I am. What about it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Will you please kindly bring some of us with you? We are forced toe here against our will. Please help us return back home! At least just one person will do!¡±


    As expected. They want me to pay them to go home with me.


    Well, it¡¯s not a problem. I can even pay to bring them all with me. After all, the money I use here are the money that I found and stole from this base.


    And I can bring all these girls to Albert for questioning. Easy.


    But if I save some of them, the rest will hope that I can save them as well. I guess I need to change the n so I won¡¯t kill too many innocent people here.


    Well, that¡¯s okay. If we¡¯re doing it right, I don¡¯t need to care about the innocent people here when I¡¯m trying to destroy this ce.

 Chapter 693

    Chapter 693: Taking Some Girls with Me


    All the girls in this inn are waiting outside my room and asked me if I can bring at least just one of them to return to our world. Using this chance, I can easily get innocent people away from this world.


    But I don¡¯t think I can do it too often. If I suddenly appear again without having the summoners to take me to Monsters World after I return, I will only raise suspicion. Even more when people can only be brought here and back once a week.


    Well, I¡¯m going back anyway. I can just tell Albert about this and ask him if there will be a change of nter on.


    He will be confused why I left Monsters World just after one day here. It was just luck. It was luck that I came here at the same day that the summoners are going to bring people back.


    ¡°You girls want toe with me? That¡¯s fine though. As long as you do whatever I told you back in our world. You don¡¯t think that I will treat you worse than staying here?¡± I asked.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. Even then, it¡¯s much better than having some dangerous monsters appear suddenly and got us killed.¡±


    Maybe it¡¯s thanks tost night¡¯s raid by the vampires. They are all afraid of the monsters.


    .....


    ¡°But don¡¯t you know about what happened back home? They are trying to hunt down everything rted to the cult. Even if you say that you¡¯re innocent, no one will believe you.¡±


    I tried to put on a threatening expression when I said that. I also put a little bit of pressure on the girls as well.


    Even if I bring them to Earth, or that¡¯s what they call our world is, that doesn¡¯t mean that their lives will be better.


    ¡°...That¡¯s fine. At least those who will chase after us are humans,¡± the inn owner said.


    Though as she said that, I can hear whispers of the girls behind her.


    ¡°We were just forced toe here anyway. Our parents are the ones who joined the cult. We had no choice but to be here because of that.¡±


    ¡°Yeah. I¡¯m worried that there are more girls out there who will be forced to be used by these men here once they grow older. Just because their parents are with this damned cult.¡±


    ¡°Shh! Don¡¯t say anything! We don¡¯t want him to know what we had in our mind! All the men here have been brainwashed to be loyal. They have tasted the freedom that doesn¡¯t exist back on Earth. Even if they were forced at first, once they got used to it, they will enjoy itter. All of the men staying here are all like that. We don¡¯t want him to know what we had in our mind if we want him to bring us back to Earth.¡±


    Hmm... those who seem to be older than the rest of the girl gave a good advice to the younger girls. But that seems troubling.


    So, they are forcing girls to entertain men. And possibly since they were young.


    Probably unless they are talented or have something special like Veronica and Celestine that can be used well for the cult. These girls must not have good talent in magic. And although they are all beautiful, they can¡¯t bepared with Veronica or Celestine. So they were brought here against their will.


    That means all the girls here are most likely to be innocent. Haaa... what a pain.


    It would be better if I hadn¡¯t heard of it. I guess I will try to not kill the girls here.


    Hmm... what if I made these girls my spies? I can ask them to gather all the girls in this city in one ce, and when it¡¯s time to destroy this city, I will transport them away. That might be a good idea.


    I¡¯ll bring some of them back to Earth first. I need something that can convince them that I¡¯m a good person and can be trusted.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s good for me if you want to be with me. But I can¡¯t take all of you. Hmm... there are fifteen of you. I¡¯ll just take five. Four of the youngest, and one who have been here the longest. You decide among yourselves since in the future, I will be back here again and bring back the rest of you if you haven¡¯t change your mind. I opened a clothing store on Earth and it¡¯s good if you can work for me there. Though other than tending the store, I need you to obey all my order. The five who will return tonight with me can go to my roomter after dinner.¡±


    I said that I will make them work at my clothing store. Though at first, I will bring them to Albert first.


    I took the four youngest so they won¡¯t be influenced by the cult too soon. And they seem to be the ones who are most intend to leave this ce. The younger they are the easier it is for them to be influenced by the people here. So I need to take them sooner.


    Though from the look of it, the youngest seem to be eighteen years old. And the oldest is around forty. At least it¡¯s good that even younger girls were not taken here yet.


    But just because the parents are with the cult, the children have to suffer? The more I know about the cult the more I hate them. Can we just go and kill the Evil God already? Where is he hiding?


    I asked them that one of the oldest who have been here the longest need toe with me. And if they discussed it first with the others, they will ask someone they can trust to take care of the four toe. But the one they trust the most will still be here taking care of the rest whom I couldn¡¯t bring to Earth.


    If I ask the older girl that I will bring home to join us in the fight against the cult and she agreed, I can bring her back here again with portal and ask her to convince the rest of the people here.


    In the end, I¡¯m moving toward saving the innocents first. I guess I¡¯m still soft in the end.


    This mission will probably take a while until it¡¯s over. I guess I won¡¯t join the circus for a while.


    Later in the evening, after dinner, I¡¯m in my room together with five girls. As expected, the four are the youngest among the fifteen girls here, and one is around thirty years old. The inn owner who seems to be the oldest and the most trusted won¡¯te with me.


    After dinner, I brought the five girls with me to the center of the base. Where they will open a portal for us to return to Earth.


    Returning to Earth with five girls, and walking openly in the street while hugging girls in each arm, everyone¡¯s eyes are on me. But I wore the cloak that were given to us when I paid for the tickets so no one can see who I am. It was given to us so those who are jealous of those who can return won¡¯t know who we are. I also had the girls wear the robes.


    And we leave when the customers at the inn I stayed were sleeping after drinking too much. Or that I¡¯m using sleeping gas on them without them knowing. So no one knows how I look like.


    ¡°Nice, bro! You¡¯re rich! You¡¯re taking five girls with you!¡±


    That¡¯s what the others are saying to me when we passed them by. Even after we enter the building where we will be transported from, the summoner also congratte me.


    And no one knows that I¡¯m stealing money from the destroyed buildings and directly from someone¡¯s pocket.


    ¡°I know, right? I¡¯m actually richer back on Earth and brought my own money from there. I¡¯m thinking of buying a lot of girls from here since they are easier to get than the girls back home.¡±


    ¡°Nice. Maybe I should do that too,¡± the summoner said.


    ¡°No, bro! I want to get more girls!¡± I said.


    ¡°Ahaha! Then I won¡¯t do it!!¡±


    The summonerughed. Good thing he¡¯s not suspicious of me.


    There are four rooms with summoners inside. Each room will have the summoner open a portal to different location. And I¡¯m going to somewhere in Varadis.


    Each summoners have around three people apanying them. At least they are expert level mages. Maybe some of them are even master level mages. But that¡¯s natural since summoners are that important.


    ¡°Alright, everyone is here. I will open a portal in one minute. After that, I need you all to enter the portal within ten seconds. You can enter the portal three people at once. And once I enter the portal, I will close it. If you¡¯re not fast enough, you will wait until next week so you can return. And your money won¡¯t be returned,¡± the summoner said.


    There are about thirty people here. But other than me and the girls, they are already used to it. There are also some girls in other room as well. I guess just like me, someone is paying those girls.


    The summoner is not strong. He can only open a portal for thirty seconds. Maybe a few second longer than that. But I guess it¡¯s natural. There¡¯s no one else who is using portal easily like I do.


    After the portal opened, we all entered it. And we were brought to a city in Varadis. And it¡¯s also night here.


    It¡¯s a big inn in the middle of the city. I can see a sign at the front of the entrance of this inn saying that this inn is full already. I guess the whole inn is rted to the cult.


    But it¡¯s not over yet even after we¡¯re back on Earth. There are still something that the summoner need to say before we leave. Is it a clue about the next time we can return back to Monsters World? I need to hear it.

 Chapter 694

    Chapter 694: Portal Schedule


    ¡°All of you who are below expert level mage will need to have this thing inside your mouth. It¡¯s an explosive devices. If you are in danger and are being interrogated, you can pour magic into this thing inside your mouth so you can kill yourselves. I can¡¯t believe that I have to say this same thing over and over again every week.¡±


    One of the bodyguards of the summoner said. But it¡¯s not over yet.


    ¡°Don¡¯tin. Those stupid kingdoms have hunted more and more of us. For some reason, they can learn something that is supposed to be a secret. Which mean those who are captured are talking about our ns. If you¡¯re going toin, I will ask the higher ups to make even expert level mages to have that thing inside their mouth. Because those who talked must be at least expert level mages since they can¡¯t kill themselves easily,¡± another person said.


    I guess we have made it hard for them to live. It¡¯s their own fault anyway. If their goal is not to destroy the world, all of this won¡¯t happen.


    But from the look of it, that guy who just spoke is a master level mage. I need to be careful around him.


    The girls who are too weak have no choice but to insert the explosive devices in their mouth. They know that they are still not free. But at least they don¡¯t need to worry about being killed by some random monsters.


    Though what if those with explosive device inside their mouth choose to surrender and talk while still having the explosive device in their mouth? I guess since they have explosive devices, they are only advanced level mages or lower. And they don¡¯t have much secret to keep anyway since the higher ups won¡¯t tell them everything.


    .....


    ¡°Here! You too! You¡¯re not an expert level mage, right?¡±


    The person whoined a lot while giving exnation gave an explosive device to me. No one here knows that I¡¯m an expert level mage. But I can¡¯t show it to them.


    No one would believe that I¡¯m an expert level mage in air magic. And I can¡¯t tell them that I¡¯m a summoner either. They will be suspicious of me.


    So I have no choice but to put one explosive device in my mouth. It¡¯s annoying. I can easily destroy it by gritting my teeth. But it will explode if I use force. I don¡¯t want any explosion inside my mouth even if I have strong defense when I¡¯m using Aura.


    ¡°Those explosive devices have been upgraded so that if they are removed forcefully, they will explode right away even when magic is not used. Only some people have the right tool to remove them without harming you.¡±


    The one whom I think that the master level mage is silent. He¡¯s just looking around and see his subordinate speak. As for the summoner, his turn is over. He will rest and probably open a portal again tomorrow.


    ¡°Next is the schedule for those who wants to return to that world. This is the ce and time of where we will probably be. If there are no idents, we will be there at this time listed on the paper. Read it. And if you want to return after a long time here and it¡¯s not in the schedule, good luck finding the schedule yourselves.¡±


    They gave each of us a paper with schedule there. From next week, to two weekter, and every week for the next few months. I guess for those who wants toe here after a long time will have to find some other means to return to that world.


    But this is good. I can just show this paper to Albert and we will know where they will be next week and the week after.


    ¡°Sigh... Lastly, you are free to pick any room in this inn tonight. But if you¡¯re going to stay here tomorrow, you will have to pay normally. I hate to repeat this every week.¡±


    ¡°You said that before. Keep saying it and I will force you to get that explosive device in your mouth. Or maybe in another ce you can¡¯t imagine,¡± the one who seem to be a master level mage said that.


    I guess that¡¯s the end of the briefing. So I left and enter any room I want.


    The girls then followed me entering a room. But I just said that I¡¯m tired and I want to rest alone, so they can pick any room they want. So they picked the room next to mine and sleep there together even though there¡¯s only one bed. Some are sleeping on the floor.


    Sigh... In the end, I will save people. That¡¯s more tiring than just killing everyone.


    My original n is actually to return to human world, and then kill everyone once the portal is closed. But I won¡¯t do that. Not because I brought people who might be innocent here or the fact that there¡¯s someone who might be a master level mage here. But because of the schedule.


    If they die here, the schedule and the location will most likely be changed. And I can¡¯t have that.


    I also can¡¯t move around tonight since there¡¯s a master level mage here. But first, how about I check if he¡¯s a master level mage or not? Just a little bit won¡¯t get me noticed.


    One by one, I looked at everyone including the summoner. None of them seem to notice me.


    And finally, it¡¯s the guy. I checked his body if he has some distinctive feature, but he¡¯s just like any other guy except for the face. I guess I can only see his face to recognize him. Just like normal people do.


    I look at his body, and raise my sight to his face. And when I look at his face, he finally sensed someone is watching him. So I quickly averted my sight.


    I was right. He¡¯s a master level mage. He¡¯s looking around for the source of the strange feeling of being watched. But because I quickly averted my sight, he couldn¡¯t tell where I was watching him from.


    Well, that just mean I can¡¯t do anything tonight. But tomorrow will be different. Since the girls seem to be obeying me so far, I guess they won¡¯t try to escape on their own.


    Instead of freedom, they chose their lives. I will respect their decision. Though that depend if they can answer everything I asked them truthfully or not.


    They probably asked me because I was all by myself the whole time. They can¡¯t ask other men who are together with other people.


    Now, what to do? I can¡¯t do anything here. And I can¡¯t speak anything either.


    Airy pulled my hair slightly when I enter this room. Which mean that there¡¯s a wind mage who can hear me when I¡¯m talking. So I can¡¯t just talk with Victoria or Airy here.


    And I can¡¯t just sleep in this strange ce surrounded by enemies. That¡¯s when I see some people are leaving the inn.


    I guess leaving the inn is still fine. But I have said that I¡¯m tired. I guess I will pretend that I¡¯m sleeping.


    Iy on the bed and cover my whole body with nket. With this, no wind can enter the nket and transport sound to the wind mage.


    The wind mage uses the gap under the door so the wind can carry sound. But inside the nket without opening, the wind mage needs a stronger magic to do that. Which I assume he won¡¯t use.


    ¡°It¡¯s safe. There¡¯s no strange wind here,¡± Airy said.


    ¡°Great. Let¡¯s chat until morning then. I¡¯m bored.¡±


    ¡°Even if you say that, I don¡¯t think they will use wind magic the whole night. Probably just until they fall asleep. Well, even if that¡¯s the case, there¡¯s nothing you can do anyway,¡± Victoria said.


    In the end, we just chatted for a while. And when we no longer feel the strange wind, I just y chess with Victoria. And we¡¯re also teaching Airy how to y chess.


    ¡°...Why are you so good at it when you just learned how to y it?¡±


    I guess I¡¯m always bad in not just card games, but also board games. I¡¯ve been in multiple losing streak recently.


    Let¡¯s improve my confidence by ying with idiotster on. Though that will be for after I finish this mission at least.


    In the morning, after breakfast, I rent a carriage. I don¡¯t care the destination. I just need to find a carriage to take us somewhere.


    And luckily, I found something good. The carriage driver is actually an agent. I know that because Victoria sensed her clone is with him. Though I don¡¯t think that he knows me.


    I paid him in advance while also giving him a memo saying to change the driver with someone who knows the master of the slime. Changing the driver to someone who knows me will make things easier for me. I don¡¯t want to prove myself to some agents who are trained to doubt while acting like they believe me.


    If it¡¯s someone who knows me, they won¡¯t ask too much questions, right?


    I returned to the inn, and bring the girls out. When I returned back to the carriage, the driver has been changed.


    ¡®Do you know me?¡¯


    I open my mouth without leaking any voice. Because unlike me, they can read lips movement. I should learn it as well.


    The driver nodded. And then he acted normally.


    ¡°If you¡¯re ready, then we will go right away. We will go to the capital.¡±


    Oh, we¡¯re going to the capital? Well, it¡¯s not like I care. I¡¯m going to bring these girls to Tatrama.

 Chapter 695

    Chapter 695: Taking Them to Meet Albert


    The five girls and I entered carriage to the capital of Varadis. They look so nervous. Even though they have escaped from the danger of the monsters, their lives are still in danger. With the explosive devices in their mouth.


    Though they won¡¯t explode when they don¡¯t want it to. It¡¯s simple. After all, those explosive devices are for those who are loyal to the cult. And I don¡¯t think these women are loyal to the cult. So they won¡¯t activate them.


    After fifteen minutes of the journey, we are already quite far from the city. And while inside the carriage, I talked to the driver.


    ¡°Hey! You know who I am?¡± I asked the driver.


    ¡°Yeah. I know you. You are quite an influential man. I¡¯ve met you before. Though I don¡¯t think you know me. In fact, if the rumor is right, I don¡¯t think you remember anyone at all other than those close to you,¡± the driver replied.


    I can see that he has a Blobby with him and also Sonia¡¯s soil. I know that he¡¯s an agent. But I need to make sure that he knows that I¡¯m not his enemy first.


    Even if they¡¯re all agents, some of them might not know me. So it¡¯s good if he has seen me. Though I will still doubt him first.


    .....


    If he¡¯s an agent who has learned about me, then he should be given a report about me.


    And if he has seen me personally, he should know what I can do. Let¡¯s ask him a question to see if he really know me.


    ¡°What is my strongest attack?¡± I asked.


    ¡°With your own body and any type of weapon.¡±


    ¡°Alright, you pass. At least that¡¯s not wrong,¡± I said.


    It¡¯s not a magic and I haven¡¯t given any name to my attack using weapon. So that is a pass.


    Hearing what I¡¯m talking about with the driver, the girls inside are confused. But they still won¡¯t do anything.


    ¡°Then, do you know the route to the capital well?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes.¡±


    ¡°Take us to somewhere inconspicuous on the way. You know where?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I know. We can get there in around thirty minutes,¡± he said.


    ¡°Good. I have no n at all to go to the capital.¡±


    The girls inside the carriage be in full alert mode after hearing that. They must be thinking that the driver is in cahoot with me. And we¡¯re nning something bad for them.


    ¡°I¡¯ll destroy the carriageter and take you somewhere. The horse will be freed. I¡¯ll make it look like some bandits are attacking the carriage.¡±


    ¡°I understand.¡±


    With that, we have decided on what to do with the carriage. But to think that this guy is just agreeing with me this easily. He was supposed to be an agent. He should be able to think of a better n.


    Unless there¡¯s no better n than what I¡¯m having. Does that make me a bit smarter now?


    Fifteen minutester, the girls are obviously started thinking of escaping. Some of them have been looking outside from time to time.


    And finally, one of them can¡¯t take it anymore and cast a Fireball at me. It¡¯s just a weak Fireball by an intermediate mage. Not something to worry about.


    I just swatted the Fireball with my hand and the Fireball disappeared.


    ¡°No way...¡±


    ¡°We can¡¯t escape anymore...¡±


    Is that it? They have given up so easily? Well, considering that was just an intermediate level magic, I suppose it¡¯s understandable. They are not blessed with talent or resources.


    Even with talent, those without resources won¡¯t be able to reach high. And those with resources, without any talent, will take a long time for them to reach higher level.


    Of course luck is included. Though I doubt any of these girls are blessed with luck since they are forced to work in that world.


    ¡°Is this your attempt to escape? What a poor attempt. You need at least something that can destroy this whole carriage right away. Just be quiet for the rest of the journey. It¡¯s just a few more minutes,¡± I said.


    The despair in the faces of the girls are visible. Do they really think that I¡¯m that bad of a person? I even told them that they can work for me in the clothing store I manage.


    Soon after, we stopped somewhere. It¡¯s the ce that the agent said to be safe.


    ¡°How is it? I don¡¯t think anyone will notice us from the main road,¡± the agent said.


    ¡°Yeah. If it¡¯s just them. But if it¡¯s bandits they can see us. In fact, they have been following us for a while already. How strong are you?¡± I asked the agent.


    ¡°I¡¯m just an intermediate level mage,¡± he said.


    I guess I need to take care of them. Well, I don¡¯t think it will take a long time.


    ¡°Ten seconds. I¡¯ll be back.¡±


    There are only ten bandits here. Killing them all won¡¯t take ten seconds.


    In the next few seconds, scream of horrors can be heard in the forest where the bandits are hiding.


    I returned without even a drop of blood in my clothes. It was that easy.


    If it¡¯s just the agent, I think he can escape on his own. Though it will be bad for the girls.


    The bandits left their tracks on the way here. They must be thinking of only erasing them after getting rid of us. Though it¡¯s good that they leave their tracks. Even if someone find the remains of the carriage, they will think that they can find the suspect by following the tracks left by those bandits.


    I then proceed to destroy the carriage. After everyone is out, I punched the carriage to destroy it.


    After I¡¯m done, I transported the agent to the capital alone. The girls are shocked to see that I¡¯m a summoner.


    ¡°You¡¯re not a summoner captured by the cult! Who are you?!¡± the oldest woman asked. Finally realized that I¡¯m not with the cult.


    ¡°You¡¯ll know soon enough,¡± I said.


    Oh, wait! I forgot to tell Albert about these girls and the fact that I have returned to this world.


    ¡°Excuse me, please wait here for a while. I haven¡¯t told the most important person,¡± I said before I leave to the forest.


    I need to contact Sonia and tell Albert about the situation. And I can¡¯t just show Sonia to the girls. They might get scared.


    I told Sonia to ry everything to Albert. And told her that I¡¯m going to his ce as soon as possible.


    After Sonia disappears, I returned back to where the girls are. Surprisingly, none of them were trying to escape. I guess they must be scared of me after hearing that scream from the bandits. In fact, these girls didn¡¯t even notice that there¡¯s a group of bandits nearby.


    ¡°Alright. Now, I will remove the explosive devices in your mouth,¡± I said.


    ¡°No! If you do it forcefully, they will explode!¡± one girl said.


    That¡¯s right. They will undoubtedly explode. So need to give an example first.


    ¡°Easy. I just need to do it like this.¡±


    I proceed to insert my thumb and index finger into my mouth, pluck the explosive device, and throw it as far away as possible in an instant.


    The explosive device exploded twenty meters from here. That¡¯s quite far.


    ¡°Just like that. Now, open your mouth wide,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Roy, that sounds so wrong. Good thing you¡¯re a doctor. Or I will think that you¡¯re the worst kind of criminal,¡± Victoriamented.


    What else should I say? That¡¯s the most normal thing to say if I want to remove their explosive devices from their mouth.


    The girls didn¡¯t have any choice but to obey. So I remove all the explosive devices from their mouth and threw them away.


    The explosion attracted some monsters toe nearby. But Sonia already appeared next to me in her invisible form to tell me that Albert is ready.


    I opened a portal and it¡¯s connected to Albert¡¯s office.


    ¡°Enter the portal one by one. Don¡¯t do anything stupid because the person you¡¯re going to meet has scary guard who will kill you if you try to harm him. Juste in and answer everything we ask. That¡¯s all we need you to do,¡± I said.


    With no other choice, they entered the portal to see them inside some sort of office. They don¡¯t know that the person they¡¯re going to meet is a king.


    I entered the portalstly and close the portal before facing Albert.


    ¡°Yo, I¡¯m back,¡± I said.


    ¡°That was quick. Or should I say timely? I¡¯ll ask you moreter. For now, these girls are... too scared. Roy, can you bring Ka and some of the girls here? I don¡¯t want them to be too nervous to hear anything,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°I can. But they will still end up being nervous for a different reasonter on anyway,¡± I said as I opened another portal to my home.


    Without even asking, Ka just entered the portal. She was with Candy and Wendy who also proceed to enter the portal seeing that I¡¯m in Albert¡¯s office with some strangers.


    Seeing that they are strangers, Candy and Wendy acted like how they should react normally. Kneeling to their king.


    ¡°¡±Your Majesty!¡±¡±


    The girls from Monsters World are confused seeing that. And Albert wastes no time to introduce himself.


    ¡°Nice to meet you. I am the king of Tatrama, Albert. This might be a confusing situation, so I¡¯ll let you take a few moment to sort your thoughts,¡± Albert said.


    The girls are shocked to hear that they are in front of the king. They don¡¯t know what to do while Albert asked Candy and Wendy to stand up.


    .....

 Chapter 696

    Chapter 696: The Rescued Girls Will be My Employees


    Finally, the oldest girl realized the situation and knelt in front of Albert in an instant.


    ¡°Greeting, Your Majesty!¡±


    After the oldest girl knelt, the other four girls also realized that they are not in the proper manner to greet a king. They also quickly knelt in front of Albert and greet him.


    ¡°Alright, I ept your greeting. You can stand up now. We¡¯re not in front of audience so you don¡¯t need to mind your manner,¡± Albert said.


    While the girls slowly standing, there¡¯s an awkward silence among them.


    They must be thinking of why are they in front of a king? Why did I pluck the explosive devices from their mouth? Why is everything happened?


    They never thought that they are already in a safe ce away from the cult. They have been in a dangerous situation their whole lives. They don¡¯t understand the meaning of safety yet. They must be only thinking that they can survive if they follow our orders.


    .....


    While we let those girls sort out their thought, Ka, Candy, and Wendy approached me.


    ¡°Roy, who are they and why are we all here?¡± Ka asked me.


    ¡°Those girls said that they are forced to be used as entertainment for the cult members in Monsters World. I don¡¯t know the truth yet, and since they have been in that world for a long time, I thought that it¡¯s best to get Albert to meet them so we can learn a lot from them about the base in that world and probably even the cult itself,¡± I said.


    Well, even the youngest girl in the group has been in that base longer than me who has just been there for a day.


    ¡°I returned right away because it was also the time that they are transporting people to and from this world with their summoners. For now, we¡¯ll listen to what these girls know first before I exin everything. I brought you here since they are all girls and I feel like they can trust other girls more. From their experience in Monsters World, I thought about taking Sophie here. But when I opened the portal, she¡¯s already asleep,¡± I said.


    These girls were forced to be prostitutes. And maybe with Sophie around, they will feel better knowing that someone who used to be in the same industry to be able to live well. Though Sophie is sleeping now and I don¡¯t want to wake her up.


    ¡°Sophie had a surgery to dost night. That¡¯s why she¡¯s asleep,¡± Candy said.


    Yeah. With how few surgeon we have in Cassau, Sophie¡¯s job will increase since she¡¯s the best surgeon there. I hope she won¡¯t force herself too much to cure the patients. She needs to care about herself as well.


    ¡°You¡¯re going to ask those girls to be your spies and gather all the seemingly innocent people in that world together so you can transport all of them at once? I think that¡¯s a good idea,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°...I have never told you about that n. But you quickly thought that is what I will do. As expected of you,¡± I said.


    After we finished chatting for a bit, the girls have slowly calmed down. And the oldest girl stepped forward to be the representative for the girls. That¡¯s also why I want someone who the others can trust to bring to Albert. It¡¯s easier for things to progress this way.


    ¡°Umm... excuse me, but why are we here?¡± the girl asked.


    ¡°Well-¡±


    ¡°For interrogation. You should have been in that world for a while already but we don¡¯t know if you know about the situation outside that world or not. We¡¯re currently at war with the cult and going to destroy anything rted to them. So you need to answer everything truthfully,¡± I said to interrupt Albert who was trying to exin it to them.


    If I leave it to Albert right away, he would just say something and will take more time to exin. It¡¯s best to be direct. And it¡¯s to let them know their own status.


    ¡°You mean you saved us from the cult?!¡±


    The girl who seem to be the youngest suddenly shouted.


    ¡°Well-¡±


    ¡°That depend on the truth behind your words. If you are still have a little bit of loyalty to the cult who sold you out to be prostitutes, I will kill you. If not, you are free,¡± I said after interrupting Albert again.


    ¡°...Roy, you know what? Sometimes, threatening people is not the answer,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Yeah, yeah. Today I was supposed to investigate things but I spend it mostly on resting. I¡¯m pissed because I just found a way where I don¡¯t need to kill everyone right away,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Seems like your decision to ask him to bring some of you home was a correct one if you want to survive. Now, please take a seat and let us begin,¡± Albert said to the girls.


    The interrogation begun. But it¡¯s more like interview.


    Ka and I took our seats as well while Candy and Wendy stood behind Albert with Mustache and acting as Albert¡¯s guard.


    ...No, Candy and Wendy don¡¯t have mustache. I mean that Mustache is here as well as Albert¡¯s guard.


    As they said before, the girls were forced to be there because their parents were with the cult. The parents thought that their daughters actually living well, but they are actually lived a terrible lives. The parents didn¡¯t know about it.


    And when they knew, some of them thought that the girls are doing a favor to the Evil God and let them be. But some actually tried to get their daughters back. I guess not all parents are bad.


    And in the end, the parents who tried to get their daughters back were killed. These girls realized that after they talked about it with other girls from different establishment. That there are some customers who proudly said that they killed traitors and even talking about those so-called traitors in full detail including their name and their home address.


    ¡°Whoa, that¡¯s bad. Really bad. But that¡¯s good. Does it mean that there¡¯s a wholemunity of victims of the cult in that base? Is that really it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, I guess you can put it that way. We talked to others in different establishment, and the stories spread. But I don¡¯t think any of the men knows about it. Some were managed to leave that base, but they are probably being used as ves by the men who brings them out. And we are desperate to escape because of the vampires¡¯ attack,¡± the oldest girl said.


    I looked at Albert and see that he didn¡¯t react at all. All the things that the girls are saying were true. There were no lies.


    ¡°Then, if I want you to return and contact those other girls, can you do that? We want to destroy anything rted to the cult without harming as many innocent people as possible. We need a spy to gather as many information as possible while making sure that they can save as many innocent people as possible. Are you willing to do it?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°...Does it mean you trust us?¡± the oldest girl asked.


    ¡°Yeah. That guy over there won¡¯t kill you anymore. And we don¡¯t want to kill too many innocent people as possible, so those who are willing need to return back to that world and be our spies,¡± Albert said.


    The girls are so happy that they started crying tears of joy. Knowing that they are safe from the cult.


    And then the oldest girl stand up from her seat after those girls discussed for a bit.


    ¡°Then I will do it. If I do it, the others will trust me more. Isn¡¯t that why he asked me toe?¡± she said.


    ¡°Good. As for the others... you need somewhere to stay. Even if you¡¯re free, you¡¯re orphans and don¡¯t have jobs. If we leave you be, you will just end up as prostitutes again. Now, what should we do?¡±Albert said as he looked at me. He wants me to be the one to decide the other four girls¡¯ fate.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. Roy has said that they will be working at the clothing store. Just look at them. They are all beautiful. And I have many clothes I want them to wear. As for lodging, there¡¯s an empty room at the store where we can set as shared bedroom for them. it¡¯s not hard,¡± Victoria said.


    I guess I did say that they will work at my clothing store. Well, that won¡¯t be much problem. And having more beautiful girls advertising the store, there will be more profit in the future as well. And I can open more branches in the future.


    Even Lynn wanted the clothing store to open in her country. It¡¯s just another way for me to get richer. I won¡¯t object at all.


    ¡°Well, I guess I¡¯ll clean up the room for them to use first. You can stay here for a while and have a chat with the king. I¡¯ll be backter,¡± I said.


    It took no time for me to clean the ce and also buy some beds to the store. And I told the store manager that there will be some new workerse.


    And if I save those other girls in Monsters World as well, I might be able to get more workers. Opening multiple brances at once won¡¯t be impossible then. That¡¯s great.

 Chapter 697

    Chapter 697: We Got a New Spy


    Albert has finished talking with the girls I brought. And they were all asleep in the guest room in the pce because all tension is gone. They felt that they are finally free and their fatigue from all the events happening to them make them tired. They fell asleep as soon as Candy brought them to the guest room.


    Now, only Albert, Mustache, Ka, and I stayed behind in Albert¡¯s office. Candy and Wendy are away to do something else.


    ¡°From being a prostitute into a king¡¯s guests just in a few hours. Look how much they have changed,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. It¡¯s good that you brought them here. They don¡¯t know much, but the information about the cult that I can get from them about that ce are still important. We keep talking about the cult like every one of them arebatant. There are also normal people who joined the cult. And those girls, most of them, are children of those normal people. They are with the cult but they are too useless. They didn¡¯t even get the explosive devices installed in their mouth. They are most likely be still alive and oblivious about the fact that their children are prostitutes,¡± Albert said.


    If we look more carefully, there would even be some of the cult believer even in the capital. But they can¡¯t do anything because they can¡¯t contact any main members of the cult now thanks to Albert.


    ¡°But they are still with the cult. As long as they are already an adult, I don¡¯t mind killing them. Though if they are children, I will think about it,¡± I said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t kill children if possible. Don¡¯t even think about it as well if possible. We¡¯re going to investigate about ces where those normal people who joined the cult are and help those children if possible. I¡¯m assigning Wendy for this job and will ask Veronica¡¯s help because she suffered simr fate to those girls,¡± Albert said.


    .....


    Yeah. If Veronica is less talented than other kids, and didn¡¯t grow up to have big butt, she might end up being used by the cult like those girls. Though I don¡¯t know if being used for her butt is lucky or not.


    ¡°Probably, the ce they need to investigate will be the same as the ce that Randy is investigating. So they might be able to help each other. I have contacted Randy about it as well to investigate,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Okay. Is there anything else?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Only that you will need to return back to that world with that woman who is willing to be our spy. Return to the inn you rested before and she will tell the others there about us. They will contact other girls to prepare to leave that world. As for the time, I heard that you¡¯re here for that. Tell me what you found,¡± Albert said.


    And I gave him the paper with the schedule of the portal transportation is written. The time and the location.


    ¡°Hmm... this is good. Not only it was written about where they will perform the portal opening, they also wrote down when it¡¯s going to happen. So they do it every week, huh. I guess you should finish your mission by next week after they close the portal at the very least if you want it done quickly,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Also, it wasn¡¯t written but they opened portal every night to bring in supplies. And there are some people that I think could be useful if I capture them, but I can¡¯t bring them here,¡± I said.


    ¡°Can¡¯t bring them here? Why?¡± Albert asked.


    I thought about those three summoners before I tell Albert about them.


    ¡°Those three are being heavily guarded. Unlike most summoners whoe and go and have at least one master level mage with them, even if I didn¡¯t check it myself, they should have at least five or more master level mages protecting them. Seems like they are far too important even though they are just there, sleeping and eating without doing anything important. My guess is that in case of emergency, they will use their portal to leave and report to their higher ups right away. In that case, do you know what it means?¡± I asked Albert.


    Albert bes quiet and started thinking of what I had just said to him.


    ¡°Then it¡¯s high likely that those summoners have set somewhere in this world as their transfer point. And during emergency situation, they will use portal and transport to that ce which are most likely rted to the higher ups of the cult. And probably even the Evil God himself. That¡¯s why if we transport them to this world, they will lose their transfer point because it will be reset to where we brought them to. Unless they have their familiar in those ce,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Right. That¡¯s why I think it will take a while. Especially since there might be more master level mages in that ce than I expected. And so, I need to think of a way to capture those three summoners and block their magic before they can report to someone. Also, the best time to act is after the cult finished with taking care of their supplies in that world and return to this world. Because once we stopped those three summoners, the cult will only realize what happen the next day when they bring the next supplies,¡± I said.


    We only have at most 24 hours before the cult realized that their base in Monsters World is destroyed. We need to be able to capture all those three summoners quickly before killing all the master level mages.


    Those summoners will be our clue toward their higher ups and possibly to where the Evil God is.


    I told Albert about everything that I learned about the cult¡¯s base in Monsters World. But there¡¯s another thing I want to learn. And Albert also realizes what we need to do first.


    ¡°The raid. What about the vampires¡¯ raid? Did those summoners left during the raid?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s what I want to know as well. I didn¡¯t get any information about it. But at leastst night, they are working normally. The supply and the transport of the people were still working normally. Even then, it didn¡¯t take much for their master level mages to stop the vampires. I guess those summoners won¡¯t leave unless it¡¯s life-threatening for them,¡± I said.


    ¡°So we can still do the raid. How about you check the vampires and ask them if they want to raid that ce again? Then you can see if those summoners will leave or not,¡± Albert suggested.


    And then Ka added something.


    ¡°We can get Arin¡¯s group to help raid the base. They are more careful than those vampires and stronger as well. There are even ten Vampire Dukes with them. It will be safer if we send them. Though they still need to be careful. Once they raid the base, Roy can see the situation in the ce where those three summoners gather and check their reaction,¡± Ka suggested.


    Yeah. Using Arin and the vampires should be better than having to trust those charmed vampires. But we need to be careful wit them getting tamed.


    ¡°I¡¯ll ask Arin about it. And I found a good ce yesterday. Somewhere where it should be fine for me to open a portal and return back to that base. I can go there directly without anyone noticing,¡± I said.


    It was near the inn I rested. Where the girls I brought over were working


    The inn I rested is near the edge of the base. And it¡¯s also cheap while other inn have better service and everything. The food, although every ce have simr food, the closer they are to the center, the better quality of the ingredient they have. So more people chose to stay near the center while those at the edge are mostly for those whock money and only there for the drink, which should be the same everywhere.


    And those whock money and couldn¡¯t even stay at an inn, they prefer to rest at the road near the gate. Or maybe even camp out and only return when they gained fortune. Taming a lot of monsters I mean.


    So the ce I¡¯m talking is safe. And it¡¯s not close enough for expert level mage who should be wealthy enough to stay.


    If I can get the inn-owner to cooperate with me, I can easily open a portal to a private room instead. But that would be when I get her cooperation.


    ¡°Seems like you have a lot to do. I think we are done here. You can leave. I¡¯ll contact the other kings about this,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Okay. Should I bring Veronica here first?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes please.¡±


    I opened a portal to Cassau, and then informed Veronica about it. Although she¡¯s introverted and prefer to stay indoor and read books, she agreed with the n to look for where normal people who joined the cult is gathering. That¡¯s not surprising.


    I transported Veronica back to the capital and see the girls have woke up. So I brought them to my clothing store.


    ¡°This is where you will work from today. I¡¯m nning to open more branches in other kingdom, so if you work well and the manager recognize you, you can get promoted and be the manager in other branch I will open. As for you, you will return with me to Monsters World. You already know what you¡¯re going to do, right?¡± I asked the woman who will be our spy.


    ¡°Yes. I will convince the others to leave. But when will we be able to leave from that ce?¡± she asked.


    ¡°We don¡¯t know the time yet. There are many things we need to learn first. Though I will go there aler tonight. Just get some rest and prepare yourself. I will probably bring you there after a few days. Just get ready as soon as the ghost informed you about it.¡±

 Chapter 698

    Chapter 698: The Second Vampire Raid


    It¡¯s night in Monsters World. I¡¯m back again and this time, I¡¯m not alone. I¡¯m with Arin and other strong vampires from our side.


    ¡°How was it? Will theye as well?¡± I asked Arin.


    ¡°There¡¯s no way they can refuse me,¡± she replied.


    What I¡¯m talking about is the rest of the vampires here. The ones who raided the cult¡¯s base before.


    They are willing to help us in raiding the base again even after a few vampires died before.


    I looked behind us and I can see those vampires from before which consist of mostly males. They are willing to risk their lives again after hearing that Arin wanted their help. Together with the vampires I took from Earth.


    What we¡¯re nning is to get the vampires raid that base again. I want to see if those heavily protected summoners who only eat and sleep, while sometimes grabbed some women with them, will retreat if the base received another attack at simr level as the raid before. Though tonight should be a few level higher than that since we have more vampires.


    .....


    Why didn¡¯t I ask the werewolves, angels, or other monsters? Because I don¡¯t want to.


    The angels really hate the cult. They would risk their lives to kill another member of the cult instead of running away.


    The werewolves are the same. The difference is that they love fighting and not because they hate the cult.


    As for the vampires, they are willing to escape. Because I have taught them that living is good and they can learn many things by living. They love human culture.


    ...Well, I¡¯m not the one who actually taught them that. But I am the person responsible for bringing them to our world. So it¡¯s not really wrong to say that I¡¯m the one teaching them.


    These vampires, or at least just Arin and the ones that I took back to our world, can follow my order better than the werewolves or the angels. I don¡¯t want to reduce our strength by sacrificing some vampires after all. Just one of them can defeat several expert level mages already. They are strong.


    ¡°Alright, I will enter that base now. Wait thirty minutes before you start the invasion. And retreat after fifteen minutes, or you have drunk enough blood, or someone strong appears. Don¡¯t try to fight them,¡± I said.


    ¡°What if I use my Charm Magic on those people? Most of them are men, right? And the women, even if there are some who will fight us, most of them are weak and probably won¡¯t participate in the fight. So I can get those men to fight for us if my charm is sessful. How about it?¡± Arin suggested.


    That might be a good idea. But we are only here for testing the water. Checking about what the summoners will do. Not a full frontal fight. So I don¡¯t think I will need her to do it at the moment.


    But it is still a useful method to capture some men. Let¡¯s do it.


    ¡°You can use charm magic to let some men to follow you. Use Charm Magic on them, then pretend that they are the prey you captured so you can drink their bloodter on. Make the enemy think that way and not because those men are being charmed. Ask some vampires to help you take them away from the base. There are few morre things I need you to doter, but let¡¯s focus on this mission first,¡± I said.


    Using Charm Magic is useful. Though I heard that Arin was reluctant to use Charm Magic anymore. I guess she no longer feel that way. That¡¯s good.


    I think we can use Arin to do more things. But I don¡¯t think I have enough blood in my body to reward her. I¡¯ll try asking her about itter then.


    I opened a portal to inside the base where I have installed with Blobbies yesterday, and had Victoria transformed into a robe to cover my identity.


    Some people from yesterday knows that I should have been returning back to Earth. I can¡¯t show my face to them.


    The state of this ce is not different from yesterday. There are still the debris of the destruction from the first vampires¡¯ raid. I guess they are toozy to fix them.


    I entered a bar where I can see the center of this ce. That¡¯s where those important looking summoners are.


    The three live in the same house. One of them is there just reading some books, another is sleeping, and another is with a girl. I can tell those three are not master level mages because they didn¡¯t sense my gaze on them.


    As for the master level mages protecting them, there¡¯s only two of them at the moment. I remember them from their physical features. But I don¡¯t think that there will only be two of them in action when something happened. There are also many people near that ce who will probably move to protect them.


    There¡¯s still around three minutes left until Arin and the others invade this ce. I checked out other ces including where the supply wasing from.


    They came from the same ce I was returned back fromst night. I guess they used that ce for transportation for both people and supplies.


    They have just finished bringing all the supplies and I can¡¯t see the summoners at all there. They must have returned back to Earth already.


    Seems like the cult have more summoners than expected. Though most of them are probably on Earth.


    In the schedule that was given to us when we returned back to Earth, the same ce where I was transported to will only arrange another transportation in a month. If the summoner didn¡¯t move at all, and they transport people weekly, I guess there are a lot of summoners in the cult.


    With that many summoners, they never approached me for being a summoner. Though that¡¯s a good thing.


    If they approached me a long time ago, I would have agreed and I would never be an Aura user since I can easily get money. And there is no one who would be returned back to the past if that¡¯s the case.


    Soon after, I can hearmotion from the outer part of the city. Arin and the others must have make their move.


    From their past error, I guess there are not many tamers stay near the outer part of the city. I can hear the people here are talking about it. In fact, most of the people in this bar are tamers.


    They don¡¯t want any of the monsters to be released. So even if some people have to be sacrificed, at least the monsters won¡¯t leave.


    They keep gathering monsters without having done anything to those monsters other than feeding them. Where will they be taken to? When? For what reason? No one Albert interrogated knows about it.


    But I guess the protected summoners would know about it. That¡¯s why when we¡¯re destroying this base, I need to capture them without returning them back to Earth. And I will bring Albert here instead.


    The master level mages protecting the summoners seem to have noticed themotion. But they didn¡¯t do anything until someonee there and reporting the situation.


    The summoners didn¡¯t do anything except gathering in one room. Probably preparing for the unforeseen situation. Like the vampires managed to get too close to where they are. But I have told Arin and the others to not do that.


    The summoners still didn¡¯t do anything, while the master level mages seem to be telling the messenger to do something.


    The messenger then left and go to another building where more master level mages are on standby. I guess they will be the ones protecting the base before they retreat. I can see the fire mage and ice mage from the previous raid. They are preparing to move.


    Those master level mages started to move while the ones protecting the summoners still waiting. I guess the summoners won¡¯t escape until things go wrong.


    Oh, they all started writing something. Probably the report of the situation. And after they finished writing, they opened a small portal and only send those letters inside. As expected, they are connected to an important ce for the cult.


    A few minutester, themotion seem to have been over. The master level mages returning instead of chasing the vampires.


    After the messenger gave the report, the summoners wrote another letter saying that it¡¯s safe now and send them through the portal. They really didn¡¯t do anything at all.


    I guess my job for the day is over. Let¡¯s check the aftermath of the raid.


    I can see several people died near the gate. Most of them have been drained of their blood. Though none of them are master level mages. I guess that¡¯s why those master level mages are still calm. They didn¡¯t feel that those vampires are threats for them.


    Well, now that my job is over, let¡¯s meet up with Arin and the other vampires. They should have brought some men who have been charmed.

 Chapter 699

    Chapter 699: Pretending to be One of Them


    The second raid by the vampires is over. The damage caused this time is far less than before. It¡¯s because fighting was only secondary. I just need someone to createmotion.


    And they did it well. Even with less damage in the surrounding, I have received enough information. That the invasion at that level wasn¡¯t enough to make the summoners retreat. It wasn¡¯t even enough to make all the master level mages to make their move.


    I meet up with Arin after I finished my investigation for the day. She has returned to her former castle.


    ¡°Good job, Arin. How is it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°There were no problem at all. Most of them are weak, but once the strong ones appear, we retreated. We have no casualties. Rather, we managed to free some of our kin who were captured, and some other monsters by killing some of the tamers.¡±


    Seems like there were no problem with the raid at all. That¡¯s good.


    The vampires are happy that they captured more humans. Those humans are the men who have been charmed by Arin.


    .....


    I¡¯ll just left one or two of them here and took the rest, along with Arin¡¯s group, back to Tatrama. Though I don¡¯t think that these people have any information other than what we already know. But I¡¯ll let Albert do it.


    I returned to Albert¡¯s ce with portal, and told him everything I learned from today.


    ¡°So they won¡¯t make a move if they know that the attack was at that level and they can handle it with just a few master level mages. And it seems like there are more master level mages than we expected to be in that ce. That¡¯s good to hear,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Yeah. But that¡¯s just in the base. You know that the base was created so the cult can have it easier to hunt monsters to be tamed, right? We still don¡¯t know if there are master level mages roaming around in Monsters World. Maybe one of them would even reach Monsters Vige anytime soon. But at least if we destroyed the base, those roaming master level mages won¡¯t have a way to return,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. But we will still be careful. Once you get to destroy that base, make sure to left behind some people there to keep guard. I¡¯m sure when the summoner who brings supplies came, they will try to retreat as soon as possible. I don¡¯t think this is a mission that can be done stealthily. Maybe we will even fail right away because someone unexpected is also a summoner,¡± Albert said.


    He¡¯s right. I can¡¯t just focus on the three summoners. Maybe even the master level mage near them is a summoner as well. If that¡¯s the case, then the cult will be reported right away. And they don¡¯t need to wait the next day to get the report about the base¡¯s destruction.


    ¡°I will prepare a lot of Blobbies then. Once I see anyone opened a portal, I will throw those Blobbies or shoot them with Victorifle into the portal so I can open a portal to wherever they are moving to. When should we prepare to move?¡± I asked.


    ¡°That is a good n. I think it¡¯s best to move in two weeks time. Right after they transport people to and from Earth. Once they close the portal, that will be when you make your action. Can you do it? You said that you¡¯re going to ask someone to destroy the whole base,¡± Albert asked.


    That¡¯s right. I won¡¯t destroy the base on my own. I will capture the summoners and probably some master level mages as well if possible, and then that someone will destroy the base. I need to move fast so I won¡¯t get caught in the attack.


    ¡°If it¡¯s him, he can. Anyway, that¡¯s all I got. I need to go back there again. I can¡¯t repeat saying that I have just returned from hunting on my own every time. Especially right after a raid by the vampires,¡± I said.


    ¡°Alright. Good luck.¡±


    I return back to that world and stayed at a different inn from before. Because all the staffs at that inn already know my face.


    I also checked that inn and see that all of the staffs are shaking in fear even though the raid was over a few hours ago. If I return there again, they will surely ask me to bring them back to Earth.


    Not now. I need the spy to contact all the girls there first. I need to figure a way to do everything quickly in this two weeks.


    I need to be able to open a portal to get those girls escape, and then quickly capture all the summoners, before I can escape from this base or I will get caught up in the attack.


    Maybe the master level mages will survive the attack. But as long as all the summoners have been captured or killed, I don¡¯t think there will be any big problem.


    Though in the end, the result can¡¯t be hidden. Whether the result is a good one or a bad one, the cult will know about it in the end. And if they find me, one human, infiltrating their base in Monsters World, they will think that there¡¯s nothing that they can do but we can¡¯t do.


    If that happens, the only thing left is for them to directly destroy us instead of doing what they did in hiding. And we can¡¯t have that. We are still far too weak. Only a few of us can defeat master level mages. We need more time until an all-out war can happen.


    That¡¯s why I want to defeat their Evil God as soon as possible. Possibly, without the help of anyone. But he¡¯s so good in hiding.


    I stayed at the inn but I didn¡¯t sleep at all. Sleeping in the middle of the enemy¡¯s turf is something that I shouldn¡¯t do. At least until I know someone I can trust.


    The next day, everyone returned back to normal. Seems like even though there are a few deaths, everyone is still doing their job normally. Though most of them are leaving the city to hunt monsters to tame.


    The girls who we left behind were scared. They are without any means of protection at all. And some of the girls even enter my room fully nakedst night just to get me to protect them.


    ...I didn¡¯t do anything to them. I just said that I¡¯m tired because of the raid and going to sleep, and they can sleep at the same bed if they want to.


    They thought that they can¡¯t gain my favor so they left. And in the morning, before I leave the inn, they approached me again. Still, I won¡¯t do anything to them.


    For now, I¡¯ll pretend that I¡¯m just another individual who seeks wealth here. I¡¯ll try to enter a party with a tamer to get money.


    I found someone whose party members diedst night. And we teamed up and left the base along with two other people we just met.


    ¡°Am I the only tamer here?¡± the tamer asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m a fire mage and he¡¯s an earth mage. We¡¯re both just advanced level mages,¡± the two mages we met introduced themselves.


    ¡°I¡¯m just an advanced level wind mage,¡± I said.


    With my air magic, and also a slight help from Airy, I can introduce myself as a wind mage. I can¡¯t just tell them that I¡¯m an air mage and a summoner.


    ¡°I think this is enough. So, what¡¯s our goal?¡± the tamer asked.


    ¡°How long will we go? I think even with those raid with the vampires, staying outside and inside the city are both dangerous. But I prefer to stay inside the city. So I want it to be done in the evening at least. I don¡¯t want to stay overnight if possible,¡± I said.


    ¡°I agree. Let¡¯s tame a lot of monsters and return by evening. Is that okay?¡± the tamer asked.


    The two other mages agreed so we will return by evening.


    ¡°You three just wait for me at the gate. I will use tamer gate and bring out my beast. It¡¯s a bull that can be used to pull carriage so we won¡¯t get tired by the journey,¡± the tamer said. And then he left as we received the ck coins from the gatekeeper and waited for the tamer.


    We don¡¯t talk to each other at all. And this is normal in this ce. Everyone for themselves. No need to make friend with other people.


    The tamer returned with a bull pulling a carriage. And as we enter the carriage, he asked our destination.


    ¡°Where should we go? Most of the monsters nearby have been tamed. And we can¡¯t go too far if we want to returns,¡± the tamer asked.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. The smell of the blood afterst night should gather the attention of other monsters. They will be attracted to the city and there should be some of them within the vicinity,¡± the earth mage said.


    ¡°Then let¡¯s go that way. A few days ago, I found some monsters with my former teammate over there. They are weak against fire. Though we retreated before the stronger monsters attack us. If we go there, we might need to go all out,¡± the fire mage said.


    ¡°Then let¡¯s go there. Since he¡¯s a wind mage, he can make your fire bigger. It should be easier even if we face stronger monster, right?¡± the tamer said as he looks at me.


    ¡°If it¡¯s just making fire bigger, that¡¯s easy. Let¡¯s go,¡± I said.


    With this, a group of four stranger left the base to look for monsters.


    I can kill them all easily right away. But I¡¯ll just pretend that I¡¯m one of them for now.

 Chapter 700

    Chapter 700: Working with the People Here Temporarily


    There¡¯s no friendship here. Just mutual goal. To tame as many monster as possible so they can make money to stay in the middle area of the city.


    I also didn¡¯t talk much with them. Just following their order.


    After a while, we encountered several monsters. The fire mage¡¯s magic was too weak even though fire was supposed to be the weakness of the monsters we encountered. The tamer only brought his bull to pull the carriage. And the earth mage only there for protection.


    ¡°Hey, you! You¡¯re a wind mage, right? Make my fire stronger,¡± the fire mage ordered.


    I just obeyed his order. Though it¡¯s not wind magic. I just made some mmable gas to make the fire bigger.


    ¡°I won¡¯t make the fire too big. We need them alive so we can get money,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s good enough. Seems like we¡¯re at the right ce,¡± the fire mage said.


    .....


    The tamer and the earth mage, after seeing that the monsters weakened after getting hit by the fire magic enhanced with air magic, or wind magic since that¡¯s what I make them to believe, smiled seeing how easy it is to capture those monsters.


    The tamer then tamed those weakened monsters with the earth mage protecting him, while the fire mage and I were working together.


    ¡°They are not that strong, but since there are many of them, we can get enough money already to stay in the middle area of the city. What do you think? Should we keep going or return?¡± the tamer asked.


    No one speak at all. But no one said that¡¯s enough and let¡¯s return. I guess they want to keep going. But seems like no one here is willing to say it.


    I was thinking that I should just obey them, but I guess I need to take action here.


    ¡°Let¡¯s make things clear first. We¡¯re all here to get some money and live. Am I right?¡± I asked.


    The three of them nodded. But with the cult¡¯s teaching, I guess being a coward and afraid to die will only make them think that they¡¯re traitors for being afraid of death. That¡¯s why no one is willing to say it out loud.


    And now that I pointed it out, they nodded in agreement. They are all willing to leave. Though I don¡¯t care if they are forced to join the cult or not. I¡¯ll just end up getting a headache if I found out that there are more innocent people here. Just the girls alone is enough. I don¡¯t want more of them.


    ¡°Then we¡¯ll decide after we hear what each of us want. I want to stay somewhere further from the wall so I won¡¯t get caught in those attack again. And I want more money so I can sleep with women. What about you?¡± I asked.


    By saying it first, the others will feel less reluctant to tell their intention.


    ¡°I¡¯m also the same,¡± the fire mage said.


    ¡°If possible, I want to save a lot of money so I can leave this world and return to Earth,¡± the earth mage said.


    ¡°I like it here. There are a lot of monsters I want to tame. But I¡¯m too weak and so are you. If I can have more money, I can hire stronger mages to help me tame strong monsters. If I¡¯m lucky, I might be able to tame those vampires who attacked. I¡¯ll say that we keep going,¡± the tamer said.


    We¡¯re all agree to it. But I don¡¯t care.


    Though maybe this is for the better. Maybe I can let them die if we continue with the mission.


    ¡°Does everyone has enough mana to continue?¡± the fire mage asked.


    ¡°Since our targets are those monsters, I only need to increase the power of your fire slightly. I¡¯m fine. Though I will say this. If we face stronger monsters, I¡¯ll escape on my own,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah, that¡¯s what everyone will do. Anyway, it¡¯s all depend on how much more monsters that our tamer can tame. So, how much is it?¡± the earth mage asked.


    ¡°Hmm... I have got seven monsters now excluding the bull. And my maximum number of monsters I can tame is twenty in one day. So, it¡¯s thirteen,¡± the tamer said.


    ¡°Then we will look for at least seven more monsters before we return. I think it will be easier now since we have the help of the monsters. No need to force the tamer to get more monsters. If everyone is fine with it, let¡¯s continue,¡± the earth mage said.


    Now the earth mage is assuming the position of the leader of this made up group. Well, we might just be together for today. And sooner orter, they will all die anyway.


    I¡¯ll just y along with them today. I only want to pretend that I¡¯m with the cult.


    Soon, we encountered simr monsters. There are ten of them, which is still within the limit. And with the help of the recently tamed monsters, we tamed them all easily.


    And so, while it was still afternoon, we return back to the base.


    The bull carriage brought us to the gate while the tamer is bringing the bull and his other tamed monsters to the gate for monsters.


    I gave the ck coin to the gatekeeper and we¡¯re allowed to enter.


    As we enter, we walked to where the tamer is waiting with our money. I wonder why they think it¡¯s a good idea to give the tamer the money. He can easily divide the money unfairly.


    I checked the ce where they are holding the tamed monsters. And the monsters we caught is being counted. And as we arrive there, the tamer is receiving our money.


    Without anyone else noticing, he grabbed some cash and hid it under his clothes before leaving that ce and approach us.


    ¡°Where should we go to share the money?¡± the tamer asked.


    ¡°Let¡¯s just find a cheap ce to eat. We will use the money to pay for the meal, and then divide the rest to the four of us equally,¡± the earth mage said.


    After that, the money was equally shared. With the tamer still hiding the money he grabbed previously.


    It was enough for me to stay at the inn in the middle area for a few days.


    ¡°So, will we team up again tomorrow?¡± the earth mage asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think so. I will just leave when I¡¯m almost out of money. If not, I¡¯ll just stay at the inn. I will leave whenever I want, so I don¡¯t think that joining with any group permanently is a good idea for me,¡± I said.


    ¡°I usually go out once every two days. I won¡¯t work tomorrow, but if it¡¯s two dayster, you can ask me if you need any help,¡± the fire mage said.


    ¡°I want to get as much money as possible, so I will go every day. What about you?¡± the earth mage then asked the tamer.


    ¡°I also want to go every day. Let¡¯s make a team with just the two of us. It will be easy to get someone to join us. And we can ask these two as well when they want to gain some money,¡± the tamer said.


    I don¡¯t think I will go out again to help the cult find more monsters to tame anymore. I had enough. And I learned a lot as well.


    Other than those who are really close with each others, they treat other people as strangers. Even now, we¡¯re not really close.


    The two who just partied together didn¡¯t even tell each other their names. Just how distrustful were they?


    The money I got was so littlepared to the money I looted from the destroyed houses, or the money I stole from the passerby. Though it doesn¡¯t matter anyway.


    We split up after that. There should be no more need for me to meet them anymore. And none of them are staying at the same inn as I was.


    Inside the base, there¡¯s nothing unusual. Other than some people who are extremely on guard for the next attack. Which will probably not happen anytime soon. Unless the vampires who are charmed by Arin and free to do anything they want decided toe again. Though they captured some men, so I think there won¡¯t be any attack for a week at least.


    I return back to the inn I stayed and when it¡¯s midnight, right when the people here lowered their guard the most even though the base was just attackedst night, I move to an empty alley where I opened a portal to enter here before.


    I¡¯m going to get the woman who is willing to be our spy here. It¡¯s finally time for her to make her move.


    I checked the surrounding and didn¡¯t see anyone. There¡¯s no expert level mages nearby. And even though the gate always have someone guarding, I don¡¯t think there will be anyone to return herete at night. Those who are outside should be camping now.


    After everything is clear, I opened a portal and get the girl who was in a room with the other girls I brought back to Earth, entered. The others whispered good luck to her as the portal is closing.


    ¡°Wear this cloak for now. We¡¯ll go to the inn you were before. Try to convince them.¡±

 Chapter 701

    Chapter 701: Return to the Inn


    The inn is empty. There are some people there, but they¡¯re all the staffs. There are no customers at all.


    After the second vampire raid, I think that no one is willing to stay at an inn so close to the gate. That¡¯s why none of them are here now at night. Though if it¡¯s just eating or drinking, this ce is quite crowded because food and drink are cheaper here than in other ces.


    But maybe because of the attack, there were not many people drinking even in other location. Most of them prefer to just go to the inn closer to the middle area.


    In this base, there are some expert level mages acting like the guards of this city. They are getting rid of troublemakers. So, even if everyone here is with the cult, that doesn¡¯t mean that they can do anything they want.


    ...Of course if they have money and power, they can do anything.


    That¡¯s why everyone who doesn¡¯t have enough money to stay at an inn chose to sleep at the street close to the gate. Because they have no choice. If they forcefully stay at an inn for free, they can easily kill the owner and the staffs of the inn. But they can¡¯t avoid death from the guard who will kill them.


    Even the cult has their rule andw. Though it¡¯s better if there¡¯s no cult at all.


    .....


    Me and the girl whom I haven¡¯t heard her name of, entered the inn she previously worked at.


    Since there were no customers, all the staffs are there in the lobby looking depressed. It was my fault that the vampires were raiding this base. Though I don¡¯t care.


    I checked the surrounding area and see that it¡¯s safe. There¡¯s no expert level mages nearby, and no wind magic to eavesdrop us. But I need to make sure that we won¡¯t be heard so I used air magic after I entered the establishment.


    ¡°Airy, tell me if there¡¯s a wind magic trying to break through my Air Barrier,¡± I said in whisper.


    The spy we recruited can¡¯t hear me since I whispered. And I don¡¯t want anyone else to know that air spirit exist.


    ¡°Wee! Do you want to stay overnight or just here for dine and drink?¡± the inn owner greeted us who are still covering our identities with cloaks.


    I gestured to spy to not remove the cloak right away. She seems excited to tell the others about how they can be close to their freedom soon.


    Well, it¡¯s just freedom from being forced to work by the cult. Even if they leave this ce, they still need to do other job if they want to live. It will be up to them how they live their lives. Or maybe me once I opened more branches for my clothing store. It¡¯s so easy to get new recruits for me then. Even more since they¡¯re all pleasing in the eye as well. I will be even richer then.


    ¡°Give us two rooms and give me the most delicious dish you have. Also, get all of the staffs toe here. I want to see everyone,¡± I said.


    They must be thinking that I will be selecting one of them for me to sleep withter. Well, it might be more surprising for them than that.


    The inn-owner then told her staffs to do as I say. They cooked something for me. And maybe because there are only the two of us here as customers, the dish is fancier than I thought for this ce.


    ¡°When can we tell them?¡± the girl I brought asked.


    ¡°Later. There is someoneing this way,¡± I said.


    I didn¡¯t use Divine Vision to see far. But I can still see someone is approaching this ce. I hope he¡¯s just passing by.


    When the dish is done, the man is right in front of this inn. I guess he¡¯s going this way.


    The man entered and looked at us the two customers here about to have dinner. Then he ignored us as he walked to one of the staffs.


    ¡°Come with me. I¡¯ll pay you so you just need to obey me!¡±


    Seems like he already has his sight set on someone.


    The girl he¡¯s targeting is shivering in fear. Is there something wrong with him?


    ¡°That man, there are many bad rumors about him. And they are not just rumors. He indeed forcefully took girls somewhere and did anything he wants with them until they died. That¡¯s the truth. And we can¡¯t do anything about it.¡±


    The spy told me that as she¡¯s also shivering.


    Seeing how empty this ce is, I guess he¡¯s making his move knowing how easy it will be.


    He gave the money to the inn owner and also the girl he targeted. Though I think it will be a while until he¡¯s gone.


    What a pain. I¡¯ll get rid of him.


    I approached the man and with Airy help, I cast sleeping gas on him. In less than a second, he fell asleep. And I caught him before he falls to the floor.


    While everyone was still confused, I opened a portal to the vampire castle. Arin has returned back to Earth, but there are still vampires there. And I threw the man there so the vampires can drink his blood.


    Everyone was shocked by how everything went by so fast.


    I think I can no longer dy it anymore. I need to get it done sooner before any more peopleing. They might have the same idea as that guy.


    I removed the hood from my face and show them that this is the guy who was supposed to have returned to Earth.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯m not an enemy. I think. Anyway, you can listen to her about everything while I have some dinner,¡± I said after I pointed at the girl I brought.


    Everyone was even more shocked after looking that she was one of them. The woman who was returned to Earth along with four others.


    ¡°I¡¯ve returned. With good news! Please don¡¯t be so loud since this will be a secret.¡±


    But she just shout ¡®With good news!¡¯ so loudly! What the hell?


    Sigh, I¡¯ll just eat while listening to them. And I need to make sure that no one can notice us.


    ¡°What?! You met the King?!¡±


    ¡°Yeah, I did!¡±


    ...They are being loud. If I didn¡¯t cast Air Barrier, the whole neighborhood can listen to them.


    I thought that they builtmunity of girls with simr past in this base. Did they speak loudly when they gather? I don¡¯t think it¡¯s a hiddenmunity. Some people must have notice it. I guess this will be much harder than we expected.


    Well, my real mission is to destroy this ce. Not to save people.


    I don¡¯t know if we will destroy this base next week after the scheduled date for the transportation or the week after. So I need to get enough rest. Even if I can move for weeks without sleeping, that is not a really good idea. Just closing my eyes without doing anything is better than not sleeping. So it¡¯s great that we can use this inn as our base.


    Our spy excitedly talked about everything that she had experienced in thest few days. Including how I work for the King of Tatrama.


    ¡°Wait, that¡¯s wrong,¡± I interjected.


    ¡°Huh? You¡¯re not working with the King?¡± the spy asked.


    ¡°We have mutual goal. The destruction of the cult. I¡¯m not working for him. We are using each other. And not just him. I also used the King of Varadis, King of Arturo, and the Empress of Consenza. There¡¯s also the President of Rygis, which is a small country. And in fact, my position is higher than them. don¡¯t say it as if I¡¯m working under them,¡± I said.


    I didn¡¯t say that mindlessly. I also checked their heart to see their reaction.


    None of them were calm hearing what I said. And it shows on their expression as well.


    I want to see if they are truly willing to leave the cult or not. I can¡¯t just trust them blindly. So I need to see their reaction.


    I can¡¯t tell if someone telling lies to me. Even if I can see their heart, if they are expert at lying, I can¡¯t tell at all. But if I can see the slightest hint of their loyalty to the cult, I will kill that person right away.


    This is a secret conversation between me and Albert. Not even Victoria or Airy was there when we were talking.


    ¡°Albert, my real goal is the destruction of the cult. And I will destroy that base even if there are innocent people there.¡±


    ¡°Alright, I understand. I¡¯m also sure that they will somehow get the information that someone bes our spy like it or not. Just try to save as many as possible.¡±


    ¡°That means it¡¯s fine if it¡¯s zero. I¡¯ll see what I can do. This is a mission where I have to do many things at once. Don¡¯t expect the n will go smoothly.¡±


    That¡¯s what Albert and I discussed. So that even if the one who became the spy die in the end, we already expected that oue.

 Chapter 702

    Chapter 702: Let¡¯s n for More Raid Attack


    ¡°I understand. We will help you to get all information. And please help us all in exchange.¡±


    The discussion is over. And the inn-owner who acted like the leader of these women, agreed to let the girls be our spies in this base. In exchange for their safety.


    ¡°I can¡¯t promise you safety. I can only promise you that I will bring back as many people as possible before I make my move. It¡¯s your job to gather as many innocent people as possible,¡± I said.


    ¡°But you said you¡¯re going to help us!¡± one of the staffsined.


    ¡°Like I said, I will save as many people as you can gather. I¡¯ll tell you this, expert level wind mages are capable of using wind magic so they can listen to any sound within their range. And there are at least one master level wind mage in this ce. Their range is even further. I am confident that no expert level wind mage can listen to me, but not with master level wind mages.


    ¡°As for you, who I expect to be intermediate or advanced level mages at most, won¡¯t have any chance to block any wind mages from listening in. So, if you thoughtlessly spread this information, they will know that someone from the outside has invaded this ce. So before you do anything, I want you all to think carefully of what to say to other people. As for me, I think it¡¯s good if you never spread this information to anyone. Since I won¡¯t have to safe themter and just let them die when I start destroying this ce.¡±


    Hearing what I said, those girls was shocked to realize that I¡¯m someone who doesn¡¯t care about their lives.


    .....


    ¡°What should we do? We¡¯ll be at risk if we tell others about this.¡±


    ¡°But we can¡¯t just save ourselves by sacrificing others! They have suffered the same things as we did!¡±


    ¡°Still, I don¡¯t want to die! Let¡¯s just keep it as secret and let him save us. We will have the least risk if we don¡¯t say anything.¡±


    Alright. Their thoughts are split in two. One who wants to save themselves and the other who wants to save other people.


    I can just transfer those who wants to save themselves right away. They will only be a burden for me if they stay.


    For example, if those who wants to save others have informed the others about it, and the secret was somehow leaked, we will have to face master level mages. I won¡¯t have any trouble with it, but some of them will undoubtedly die. And those who chose to save their own lives, knowing that they can¡¯t avoid getting captured, will betray me and say told everything to the cult.


    It¡¯s safer for them to leave this ce.


    But I won¡¯t suggest it now. I¡¯ll tell them about itter. And only to those who wants to save their own lives.


    I won¡¯t return them back to Earth. Maybe I¡¯ll let them stay in the monsters vige first. They will be too afraid to do anything then.


    Though that might be too cruel for them since I just saved four of the youngest here. But let¡¯s say that it¡¯s for Albert¡¯s sake. If I keep sending people every day, he will be too busy. And I might end up being frozen by Lana. Who knows how strong she has be with her ice element?


    ...Somehow, the discussion ended with all of them willing to help other girls with the same situation as them. Just how?


    ¡°I guess we have made too much connection with them. We just can¡¯t live knowing that we sacrifice them without them knowing. It¡¯s good that you brought the youngest girls out of here before. If they¡¯re here, they will not be able to consider about other people¡¯s safety.¡±


    That¡¯s the conclusion theye up with after someins. Well, whatever. That is fine as well. I guess I won¡¯t bring them to monsters vige.


    ¡°Alright. Then... I think if you¡¯re just gathering people in the outer area close to the wall, there shouldn¡¯t be any problem. But tell the people you¡¯re talking to about what wind mages can do. As for those deeper in, I think you just have to be careful. Remember that if somehow our secret is leaked, while I¡¯m confident in facing multiple master level mages, some of you might die during the battle. Just be careful. As for when we will act, I don¡¯t know yet. Probably in two weeks. Also, make sure that you only move at night,¡± I said.


    I let them discuss by themselves on what to do. I¡¯ll just follow them while making sure the ces they¡¯re going will be safe from any wind mages¡¯ range.


    It¡¯s alreadyte at night, but instead of resting, the girls here are excited to tell the others that they can be finally freed. I guess I¡¯ll sleep then.


    ¡°Hey, if you want to do it, do it fast. I don¡¯t think anyone will check on the outer area of this base anymore tonight. Just make sure you¡¯re away from the gate because that¡¯s where the people who don¡¯t have money are sleeping. I told you this before, but make sure that you will not be noticed by any wind mages. if you feel the slightest movement of the wind, just assume that the wind mages are listening. I¡¯ll leave the rest to you. I¡¯m going to rest,¡± I said.


    The next day, I walk around the base from bar to bar. I make sure to remember the ces where I feel the wind mages are listening the most. Though if they are expert level mages, they should be moving around and even leave this base to gain ie by helping tamers to tame monsters.


    At least there are around two master level wind mages. There could be more if they refuse to spend their mana to eavesdrop on other people.


    I returned back to the inn I stayed for lunch. Only the inn-owner is awake. The rest are sleeping because they are too tired after talking the whole night.


    ¡°Lunch?¡±


    ¡°For ten,¡± I said.


    ¡°You eat a lot. I¡¯ll cook them for you for free since you¡¯re going to save us,¡± she said.


    It¡¯s conditional though. If the n is working, I can save them. though I won¡¯t repeat it any more than this.


    ¡°Give me a paper and a pen. I have marked some ces where I feel the wind magic are. It could be useful to you even if it¡¯s not one hundred percent urate since they are also people who can move around. Also, if you¡¯re bringing some girls from the ces I marked, there¡¯s a chance that they might be followed. As for the time I make my move, I still haven¡¯t decided other than within two weeks time,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. Also, I won¡¯t tell the others that you might not save them. Those girls will only be able to survive if they have hope,¡± she said.


    ¡°That¡¯s enough. Someone ising. I¡¯ll change my order from ten portions to just two. Don¡¯t want to make them suspicious of me.¡±


    Since it¡¯s lunch time, people who doesn¡¯t want to spend too much money would go to a cheaper restaurant or inn for food. I think there will be more peopleing until the evening.


    The inn owner then wakes up the other girls, including our spy, to serve the iing customers. Except that our spy will just stay in her private room since we don¡¯t know if anyone noticed that she should have returned to Earth. She has been stying with the other staffs when she¡¯s here as customer.


    Later in the evening, customers have begun leaving. But it seems like I made a slight miscalction. There are still people entering inn near the wall instead of being closer to the center.


    Those people are mages who have been away from this ce for a while. And they returned to see that many ces have been destroyed. But they don¡¯t know the whole story and probably don¡¯t care either as they just enter the inn closer to the gate.


    Luckily, none of them are staying here.


    As the girls are preparing to leave, except for the minimum staffs to take care of the inn, I told them about this.


    ¡°Right. There are people who doesn¡¯t care just because it didn¡¯t affect them directly. We need to be extra careful.¡±


    ¡°Oh, by the way, I¡¯m thinking of making monsters attack this ce again for a few times before I make my move. I¡¯ll tell them to not attack the women if possible. But if you¡¯re afraid, just go closer to the center of this base instead to evacuate,¡± I said.


    After hearing what I said, everyone is looking at me.


    ¡°What is it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°You can control monsters to invade this ce?¡± one of them asked.


    ¡°No. I can tell them to attack here, but I can¡¯t control most of them. Just like the previous two cases,¡± I said.


    ¡°It was you! It was you who terrorize this ce!¡± another one startedining.


    ¡°Don¡¯tin. If none of you approached me when I was about to return to Earth back then, my n won¡¯t change and I will kill everyone here. Just be d that you made me change my n. Anyway, I¡¯m thinking of making monsters raid this ce once in a while. The next group to attack won¡¯t be vampires, but they are more loyal to me. I¡¯m doing this so I can move around this base easily,¡± I said.


    They gave up in protesting after knowing that I¡¯m much too strong. And they started thinking that the raid by monsters actually a good chance to interact with other people.


    Who should I send next time? Probably the werewolves. Though maybe just on the outside of the gate rather than the inside. I¡¯ll have them destroy some part of the wall protecting this base, before retreating.


    That will make more people reluctant to stay on the outer part of the city. What a good n from someone like me!

 Chapter 703

    Chapter 703: This Time, It¡¯s the Werewolves¡¯ Turn


    It has been three days since the staffs of the inn I stayed became our spies. They have been gathering girls from other inns from the outer part of the base and talk to them about my n to get them leave this ce.


    I spied our new spies to see if any of the people they aremunicating with have other ns or not. But seems like it¡¯s true. They aremunity of victims because their parents are with the cult. None of them shows other reaction other than relief.


    Though some of them are actually smarter than the rest. Although they felt relieved, they also doubted us.


    ¡°How will that person save us all? There are too many of us. Even if he¡¯s a summoner, there must be a limit. It¡¯s impossible for anyone to bring too many of us at once.¡±


    That¡¯s what the smarter people are thinking. They¡¯re right though. Normally, no summoner can do what I can do. It¡¯s all thanks to knowledge of the past and also Victoria¡¯s ability to make clones of herself.


    My n would be for me to return to Tatrama first. Ka has built a shelter in the forest near Cassau where I can bring all the people I will bring over first. I will go there after the summoners who will bring people to and from Monsters World return to Earth.


    After that, I will open multiple portals on several marked locations with Blobbies while I¡¯m still in the shelter. Those people can return all at once with so many portals opened at once.


    .....


    At each of the location, I will have one girl from the inn I stayed to lead the others. They can be trusted more than me.


    That¡¯s the n to bring them back to Earth. As for capturing the important summoners, I have no idea other than using brute force.


    It was easy to get the girls who will be our spies to obey after they know that I was the one responsible for the two raids before. And I told them that there will be more raids in the future.


    Today, they have chatted with almost all the staffs of other inns in the outer area of the base. And today is also the day that I asked the werewolves to raid this ce.


    I hope the werewolves won¡¯t enjoy the fight too much. They have to escape since even just one of them is important to me. After all, they have trained enough that even one of them are strong enough to be a match against an artificial master level mage at least.


    Well, I heard that some female werewolves have given birth to some werewolf babies. But I can¡¯t wait too long until they grow up. I want to get rid of the cult sooner.


    The spies told everyone they have beenmunicating with about how there will be another raid tonight. It¡¯s not just to control the people so there won¡¯t be anyone staying at the outer side of the base anymore. But also to see if the secret will get leaked or not.


    If someone leaked the secret to the cult, the raid won¡¯t happen. They might get stopped before they could enter the gate.


    I have informed the werewolves that if the raid got exposed too soon, they need to escape. But now that they feel like they have be stronger, I¡¯m sure that one or two of them will disobey me and choose to continue fighting instead.


    Well, I¡¯ll leave them to Shelia and Jack. Those two are the strongest werewolves and I¡¯m sure the other werewolves will obey them more.


    Sigh... I feel like I no longer have the dignity of a Werewolf King. Maybe in the future some of them will start a coup. Maybe I should give them another lesson to not make a mess with me.


    The girls know that there will be a raid tonight. And they all just stayed at the inn together while serving the customers.


    As for girls at other inns, they all seem afraid. They can¡¯t believe that someone who is not a tamer has the power to control so many monsters. So some of them are going closer to the middle area in the pretense to talk with other girls. Though I had the spies to told them to not inform other people no matter what.


    So far, none of them acted out of line. But I don¡¯t know about the girls in the middle area. They seem to be in a safer ce.


    Just like the women in the outer area, they are all beauties of high quality as well. But the rate to pay for them is much higher than the girls in the outer area. I wonder why?


    And since they are in a safer location, the chance of them leaking the secret is much higher. That¡¯s why I told the spies to only inform themter on.


    The raid soon started. Led by Jack while Shelia who can control her desire the best is watching them from behind. Making sure that no one is acting out of line.


    The fight started. And one by one, expert level mages are dying.


    The advanced level mages were running away instead of fighting. And in the end, they got killed by expert level mages who found them to not fighting back.


    Right. I forgot that this is how the cult is.


    Maybe I was wrong. Maybe after the raid, instead of the outer area to be empty, there will be more people instead.


    But I don¡¯t think that¡¯s the case. Because if they are in the middle area or deeper, they can be more prepared than those in the outer area.


    And I have seen something during the second vampire raid. There are people looting money from the fellow cult members who died, or even money from the destroyed building. I guess people will still prefer the middle area instead.


    But now thanks to the outer area being emptier than before, the werewolves can easily get deeper into the base. But that means they will face master level mages soon.


    I told them that no matter what, they have to act afraid and retreat in the face of master level mages or the people here will think that master level mages won¡¯t be enough and they will all abandon this ce.


    I¡¯m here to kill as many people as possible. I can¡¯t let them all escape.


    The werewolves have no reason to attack this base. Although they eat meat, they won¡¯t eat human meat. But to make sure that that¡¯s what the werewolves wanted, I asked them to kidnap some people while retreating. And pretend that they let go of them when they are retreating and only leave bringing out only a few of cult members.


    They did as I said. And as expected, only a few of them wanted to fight master level mages and stayed behind.


    In the end, those overconfident werewolves lost their limbs and retreat in shame. Though those limbs will be regeneratedter.


    I checked the surrounding and the werewolves truly didn¡¯t attack anyone inside a building even if they are not the girls. I guess that¡¯s enough to make them believe that the werewolves are under me.


    Though it¡¯s not over.


    While the werewolves retreated, the vampires return. The werewolves retreated to the opposite direction of where the vampires areing from.


    I didn¡¯t tell them to attack. They juste on their own.


    I don¡¯t want to be seen to not doing anything, so I pretend that I¡¯ve been knocked out by a werewolf while actually I¡¯m checking the situation.


    The vampire attacks are worse than before because Arin and the others are not here. Only the male vampires who were charmed by Arin.


    In the end, they caught some people and left while some vampires died.


    I pretend that I have just regained my consciousness and helped the others. I can see the important summoners are still there and they didn¡¯t retreat at all.


    That¡¯s good. Though I can¡¯t get the monsters to raid this ce too often.


    Maybe next time, it will be next week.


    ¡°Why did we get attacked so often nowadays? How?¡±


    While I was carrying a corpse of a cult member to get rid of it, someone isining.


    There were no answer at all. Until the master level mage who was in charge of fighting the vampires in this ce replied.


    ¡°What do you mean why? This is a world where summoners get their familiar from. There are more monsters here than in our world. Of course if they know that there are humans here, they will attack. They are creatures who fight other monsters. Why wouldn¡¯t they attack us humans? Just continue with your job,¡± he said.


    ¡°But this is too much! I don¡¯t want-¡±


    Before he finished speaking, the master level fire mage grabbed him by his neck and broke it. Theining man died in an instant.


    ¡°Anyone else want toin?! No? Then do your job!¡±


    ves. These people are ves. But I don¡¯t feel pity for them since they are still with the cult. So it¡¯s fine to kill them.


    After pretending to help, I hide somewhere empty and move to where Shelia and the others are. I returned them back to the vige while I used portal directly to the inn I¡¯m staying.


    I guess it¡¯s time to wait again. It¡¯s still not the time to destroy this ce.

 Chapter 704

    Chapter 704: A Group of Girls Venturing Outside


    For the next wave, I think I¡¯ll get the werewolves and the vampires toe again probably one day after the transportation schedule for the cult members to enter or leave this world. I can¡¯t get them to raid this ce too many times. That will be too suspicious.


    And maybe at the day for the summoners to transport people, there will be more people leaving this ce. But at least we have the time and the location where they will be transporting people from on Earth. Albert and the other kings will send their people to investigate it during the next transportation schedule.


    And the transportation after that will be our target. I will make my big move in this world, while Albert and the others will have their people to capture the people who have just returned from this world.


    I had Ka and the others to prepare for that time as well. I might not ask them toe here, but they will be useful in those ces helping the agents.


    I won¡¯t use portal to help them. They will move on their own or ask the help of Spot and Ray whom I brought back to Earth. Ray has been enjoying his life in Monsters World ying together with the unicorns and pegasus he met.


    Maybe Ray is the king of all horse-type monsters. Does that mean I can ask unicorn and pegasus to be our ride? I¡¯ll try itter after this mission is over.


    What I know is that many people are considering to leave this world during the next portal session. Even the girls who are staffs at the inns or restaurants in the middle area were so desperate. They were willing to do anything to any man who can bought them away from this ce.


    .....


    Sorry that I¡¯m not sorry. The monsters will attack again. They are parts of my n. Though maybe it¡¯s best to start spreading the rumor to other girls in the middle area.


    ¡°You can inform other girls now. But make sure that you are careful about it. And don¡¯t tell anyone that I¡¯m the one who will bring them all back to Earth,¡± I said to the girls at the inn I¡¯m staying at.


    This inn is totally empty other than us. There¡¯s no more customersing. Even people who were targeting women because they think that it¡¯s easy to get women at this time, nevere. Other than that guy whom I brought to the vampires so they can drunk his blood.


    During the day, there are more people going outside to tame more monsters. Even the fire mage I met before who said that he doesn¡¯t want to work every day started to go out every day.


    Thinking that I might be suspicious if I stay the whole time, I also started leaving the base from the gate. I just say that I¡¯m going to meet up with my tamer teammate outside the base when I¡¯m actually on my own.


    Though after I left, I return back to the base by jumping over the wall and do my own investigation in secret. And I return back to the base from the gate after two days.


    By that time, the rumors have spread to almost all the Community of Victims. That¡¯s what I decided to call those unfortunate girls who were forced to go through all of this just because their parents were with the cult, and theyck the talent or resources to be powerful mages.


    ¡°Oh, what were you doing with the money you received here? If you have been here for so long, you should be able to return on your own, right?¡± I asked the inn owner.


    ¡°No, it¡¯s impossible. They only let us leave if someone bought us. If not, no matter how much money we have, we will be locked here forever,¡± she replied.


    ¡°What about giving those money so a man can buy you. I guess that¡¯s impossible,¡± I said after thinking about what I just said.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. Those men will just grab the money and leave. And they might even steal the money and run away before the guard arrive. Even if the guarde and stop those thieves, the guard will keep the money for themselves,¡± she replied.


    Well, that¡¯s how these people are. Why is the cult members have no moral?


    ¡°Well, that sucks. Anyway, is there any women who are not part of the Community of Victims and just want to get money or loyal to the cult?¡± I asked again.


    ¡°Community of Victims? Is that what you call us?¡± the inn owner asked.


    ¡°Is there anything wrong about it though?¡±


    ¡°Sigh... fine. Yes, there are some people who are loyal to the cult or they stay here for some reason. But we in what you call as themunity can¡¯t trust them no matter what. So we never chat with them unless it¡¯s for something important. And they live somewhere in the center and mostly entertain people there. So it¡¯s rare to meet them,¡± she said.


    Though there¡¯s at least one female master level mage here. I don¡¯t know if there are others, but at least there¡¯s one of them.


    I saw her during that time when Arin led the vampires for their second raid here. Although other master level mages are focusing on the monsters even when they didn¡¯t do anything, that woman noticed that I was looking at her. But I quickly turned my head so she couldn¡¯t find me.


    As for what element she has, I don¡¯t know. She didn¡¯t make any action even when the werewolves were attacking.


    Over thest few days of investigation, I also see some other women who are too different than the women in the Community of Victims. Like they are way too confident to stay in this ce.


    And today, after staying one night in the base after I returned from the gate normally, when I was leaving the gate and given a ck coin, there¡¯s a group of women working together. They are leaving at the same time as I am.


    ¡°Hey, you! Stop right there!¡±


    When I was about to leave to the forest away from those girls, one of them suddenly called me.


    ¡°What is it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Where are you going all alone?!¡±


    ¡°To the forest. My teammate is there waiting for me,¡± I said.


    I have prepared my answer in case of a situation like this. I can just say that I have a teammate who prefer to live outside rather than in the base.


    I know why they are curious about me. One of the girls were saying in whisper that I¡¯m too suspicious because I didn¡¯t react at all when I¡¯m near them.


    Sorry about that. I have always been surrounded by beauties. Also, unlike normal people, I don¡¯t need to turn my head to look at them.


    ¡°Why is your teammate move alone?¡± she asked me again.


    ¡°He¡¯s afraid of another raid so he chose to stay near the nest of weak monsters. That way, he is confident to defeat them all. And no tamers interested in taming those monsters. Also, if there are any strong monsters like the vampires or werewolves, those weak monsters will escape. And that will be his rm to relocate,¡± I said.


    Thanks to my good brain and Victoria¡¯s help in writing stories, we prepared this scenario. There¡¯s no teammate and there¡¯s no weak monsters¡¯ nest.


    ¡°I see. That¡¯s all I want to ask. You can leave now.¡±


    Since I can¡¯t fly in front of other people, I just walk leisurely. And that¡¯s when I hear something dangerous.


    ¡°You think that guy was not interested in us girls? That¡¯s wrong. For some reason, he is watching us even though his eyes weren¡¯t turning our way. Even now, he can still see us. I can feel he¡¯s staring at me.¡±


    A master level mage! There¡¯s a master level mage among them who noticed my gaze! That¡¯s dangerous!


    She¡¯s not the woman whom I saw before. The master level mage one. She¡¯s someone I just met today.


    Without making any extravagant move, I pretend that I keep stealing nces at the girls. To make them think that she¡¯s right.


    ¡°See? He¡¯s ncing at us. It¡¯s not like he¡¯s not interested. He¡¯s just smart. Smart enough to know that there¡¯s a group of girls who dare to venture out of this ce like them. He must be thinking that we¡¯re quite strong. That¡¯s why unlike other men, he won¡¯t approach us carelessly. Let¡¯s forget about him. There¡¯s no man in this ce good enough for any of us,¡± she said as she led her group.


    Just like Celestine, she¡¯s transporting her group by moving the ground under them. So she¡¯s a master level earth mage.


    I was so close to death. Maybe if I didn¡¯t turn my head once in a while after hearing her speak, she will be suspicious why she can still feel my stare when I¡¯m not looking. That was close.


    But those girls, they are worth investigating. At least just the earth mage.


    Since they¡¯re outside, I can easily follow them. Though I need to fly, to be invisible, and the control to make sure that a master level mage won¡¯t be able to sense me easily.

 Chapter 705

    Chapter 705: That Woman is Suspicious


    ¡°...You¡¯re crazy, Roy.¡±


    While we are following after that group of girls, Victoria suddenly said that to me.


    ¡°I¡¯m not crazy at all. We already found one master level mage outside the base. This might be a good chance for us to investigate one of them. Even better if we use this chance to kill that master level mage,¡± I said.


    ¡°I¡¯m not talking about that. I¡¯m talking about the method you¡¯re using to stalk those girls,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Stalking sounds like a bad word. Just use following. Oh, wait. I¡¯m doing it with the intent to harm them depend on what I found. I guess it¡¯s kind of stalking. But let¡¯s just use the word following them instead,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s not the point! I¡¯m talking about how you¡¯re following them! You¡¯re riding on Ray who is riding on Spot¡¯s back! This is so weird on so many level,¡± Victoriained.


    ¡°Then how else can I follow after them? I need Spot for his camouge, but I also need Ray so I can spread my use of Aura so the master level mage won¡¯t notice us. This is the first time we do this but we can get closer to them if you stop talking. You¡¯re just alerting them where we are,¡± I said.


    .....


    ¡°Then do it in a better way! You can just ride on Ray while Spot is in his small form and wrapped his long body around your waist. That will look better,¡± Victoria said.


    I guess that will look much more normal than having a human riding a horse who is riding a giant serpent. Let¡¯s do as she says.


    ¡°Alright, I get it. You two, let¡¯s do as Victoria said. And from now on, no talking. That master level mage can hear us if we¡¯re talking. And no touching the ground at all, Ray. Let¡¯s go.¡±


    And now, there¡¯s no one elseining. Though I have to say that we can get closer thanks to this position. If I¡¯m still riding Ray who is riding Spot, the distance from those girls to me would get further and it will be harder for me to listen to them.


    There are five girls in the group with one of them is the master level mage. Obviously, the master level mage is acting as the leader.


    They encountered some boar monsters and they easily defeated them while the master level mage didn¡¯t do anything. That¡¯s easy. They¡¯re just boars after all. Even beginner level mage can defeat them.


    And then, they encountered some orcs. They defeated them as well, but it wasn¡¯t as easy as boars.


    And from what I can see, they¡¯re all only intermediate and advanced level mages. No expert level mages among them. And no tamer either.


    Why is there no tamer? Are they here only for training and improve their abilities?


    Ordinary orcs might be weak, but that doesn¡¯t mean taming them is useless. They are useful in many ways. But those girls just kill them without even taming them.


    Let¡¯s hear their conversation. So far, there haven¡¯t been any important information. But they have started talking about something more serious it seems.


    ¡°So many monsters died. If we have just one tamer with us, we can get a lot of money,¡± one of them said.


    ¡°Even if you have money, what use can they be? We can never leave this ce unless we sold ourselves to a man. Even though I¡¯m desperate, I don¡¯t want to have my life being binded by someone I don¡¯t like.¡±


    ¡°Yeah. It¡¯s best if we just stay with Master instead.¡±


    ¡°I will make sure that you lot won¡¯t have any trouble in this world at least,¡± the master level mage said.


    She¡¯s being called Master? Is she their master? Is it some sort of faction inside the cult or that Master is actually thinking about the girls to help them?


    If that¡¯s the case, since she¡¯s a master level mage, she should be able to bring those girls out easily. Even when it¡¯s not the time for transporting people.


    Is she afraid of the cult? Or maybe it¡¯s even worse. She¡¯s making a faction inside the cult without the cult knowing anything about it.


    If that faction is against the cult, I might be able to ask her to cooperate with us. But if that faction is only for that master level mage¡¯s satisfaction, it¡¯s better to just kill them all.


    I can only knowter after hearing a bit more about them. I hope she won¡¯t find us out. Good thing there¡¯s no expert level mage among them. Even the wind mage is just at advanced level and won¡¯t be able to sense us. There¡¯s no way they can find me as long as I keep my distance.


    ¡°Earth could be worse for you girls even if you don¡¯t return with men. There¡¯s nothing you can do. The work you can do over there won¡¯t be any different from what you do here. That¡¯s why I train you so you can at least be a hunter if you return. Just like your seniors who have returned before you,¡± the master level mage said.


    ¡°Yes! They must be doing well as hunter! I don¡¯t want to be a prostitute even on Earth. But I also don¡¯t want to stay here not knowing when I will die.¡±


    ¡°But Master, what about you? You don¡¯t want to leave this world and return back to Earth?¡± someone asked.


    The master level mage smiled after hearing that.


    ¡°No. I will stay here and teach other girls so they can learn other skills. Not everyone has talent like you girls. Even other people couldn¡¯t see your talent. That¡¯s why you were sent to this ce. I will help all the girls first until everyone can survive on their own,¡± the master level mage said.


    The others looked at the master level mage as if they are worshiping her. But there¡¯s only one thing in my mind.


    Suspicious! She¡¯s extremely suspicious!


    What teaching women skills to survive? She can just force a summoner to open a portal to let everyone to leave. Unless she¡¯s afraid of something.


    But from her reaction after watching her for a while, she¡¯s not afraid of anything. In fact, she¡¯s way too confident with what she said.


    What is she nning? I guess I can only know after I follow herter in the base.


    Suddenly, the girl who have been too timid before started speaking. She hasn¡¯t spoke a word at all before.


    ¡°Umm... Master, have you heard about the rumor?¡± she asked.


    ¡°What rumor?¡±


    ¡°There¡¯s this thing that every staffs of the inn near the wall is talking about. That soon, someone wille and save us all. We¡¯re all going to be transported by a summoner who is not rted to the cult soon to safety. Everyone is talking about this.¡±


    ¡°Everyone?¡± the master level mage asked.


    ¡°Well, just the girls. There¡¯s no men who knows about it. And soon, the rumor will spread to all the girls who lives closer to the center. I suppose it¡¯s fine to tell you about it. It¡¯s just secret for men and those who are loyal to the cult. And since Master is teaching us to survive once we leave this world, I¡¯m sure we can trust you.¡±


    ¡°Oh, I heard about that to. While I was escorting a man a few days go, I overheard about it from the girls talking in a ck alley with my wind magic. I thought they started to go crazy. But if everyone is talking about it, maybe we need to learn more about this. Maybe that person can truly help us out of here,¡± someone added in.


    Thus the girls are now talking about the rumors I had the Community of Victims spread. That those who wish for safety will prepare to leave after given a signal. Though I haven¡¯t even prepared the signal yet.


    ¡°Is that true? Well, if it is, then we should be able to get that information soon. So there¡¯s someone helping the girls, huh? That¡¯s good.¡±


    I don¡¯t think she meant that word. Now that she has heard the rumor, there would be many people unable to leave this world if she¡¯s actually loyal to the cult. But why is she acting like that? Helping other girls and gaining their favors.


    Whatever the case, I don¡¯t care. There might just be more casualties than expected. But that doesn¡¯t matter to me.


    More importantly, I need to follow that woman back to the base. If she¡¯s working with someone else, she will meet them after hearing of the rumor.


    I keep following them fighting monsters. They also continued talking but there¡¯s nothing important in what they¡¯re talking about. Only about what they will do after they return back to Earth.


    And the whole time, the master level mage seems to be thinking hard about something. Must be about the rumor.


    Since they no longer talking about something important, I decided to prank her.


    I gain my distance from her, and when I¡¯m in the forest, I looked at her in the eye. She noticed me looking at them. and instead of making her move to protect the others, she didn¡¯t do anything and just focus on me who is watching her.


    Soon after, they retreat back to the direction of the base. That¡¯s good. I don¡¯t want to wait for too long for them to return back to the base since I want to keep following after that master level mage.


    ...Again, that sounds so weird even if the word stalking is changed into following. Whatever. I¡¯ll find out about her soon after this.

 Chapter 706

    Chapter 706: Getting Someone¡¯s Attention


    That group of girls retreated back to the base just two hours after leaving. It¡¯s because the master level mage noticed that someone is looking at her from far away and her earth magic couldn¡¯t help her to detect the presence of the one who was watching them. Me. It was me who was looking at her.


    I did it on purpose to make them retreat since I want her to quickly contact someone else if my thought is right. Because I don¡¯t think that she¡¯s doing everything she did to help the girls. She must have another ulterior motives. And if I¡¯m right, she must have someone else to help her.


    I don¡¯t want to wait for too long until she returns. That¡¯s why I did it.


    Well, I did it mainly to prank her though. But it¡¯s good that it worked.


    And while they are retreating, I also retreated while slowly looking away from her. That will make her feel that whoever watching her is running away as well.


    This way, if she gives report about a powerful creature¡¯s sighting, she will also report that it was retreating after she started retreating. So it¡¯s normal if it¡¯s not sighted anymore.


    Maybe I can get their attention and make some master level mages leave the base. That would be great. But I don¡¯t think it will be that easy.


    .....


    Even if I gain their attention, it¡¯s not like they need to tame monsters like the lower level cult member does. They don¡¯t need money. Just the fact that they are master level mages is enough to make other people to respect them. And even their higher ups think that they are too precious to let go. Just being a master level mage can make one do anything they want.


    Though there¡¯s another level beyond that. I hope there¡¯s no one among the cult who has or will exceed master level mage and reach the stage above that level.


    Even if they have any, the thing we need to do won¡¯t change. We will destroy anything rted to the cult if possible.


    After I pretend to run away, I chase after that group of girls. Now that they are too far from me, I can no longer hear them talking. But chasing after them took no time since I¡¯m riding on Ray¡¯s back. With Spot wrapped around my waist, no one can see us.


    ¡°Roy, what did you hear from them?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°That master level mage is suspicious. She¡¯s acting like the benefactor of those girls and probably some other girls inside the base as well. But I feel like she has other intention. Also, one of the girls told her about the escape back to Earth that I told our spies to spread. Maybe we will have even fewer people to save because of this,¡± I said.


    ¡°You really don¡¯t care unless you destroy the cult, huh? Well, I hope at least your mission can be done soon,¡± Victoria said.


    I wonder why do I no longer care about other people even if they are innocent? I think back when I was just returned back in time, I didn¡¯t have this mindset.


    But now, after everything I went through, I got to know even worse side of the cult. And that is probably what make my mindset altered. Not changedpletely. Just slightly altered.


    Although I don¡¯t mind casualties even back then, it wasn¡¯t as bad as it is now. And now, I just think of let¡¯s kill everyone. Is there something wrong with me?


    Well, everything will be cleared once I destroy the cult. If I still have this mindset of not caring about innocent lives, I¡¯d end up as criminal in the future. And all the kingdoms will do everything they can to kill me.


    I don¡¯t think that will happen though. Even if my mindset can¡¯t be returned back to normal, I still have my lovers to help me recover my sanity so I won¡¯t go too far in the future.. Maybe I should marry them instead of waiting until the cult is destroyed. I¡¯ll think about it after this mission.


    We reached the base in soon after. The master level mage then split up from the rest of the girls.


    The girls entered an inn in the middle area together while the master level mage enter another establishment.


    Although from the outside it looks like a bar, it¡¯s closed. But there¡¯s one man inside that store.


    I no longer need Ray to walk inside the base, so I had him run free outside while asking him if he can get other horse-type monsters to obey him. It would be great if he could.


    I moved toward the empty bar where only that master level mage woman and another person is in. And when I got closer, Airy pulled my hair lightly. It means that there¡¯s a wind magic used around here.


    It¡¯s just like the ce I marked before on the map I gave to the inn owner. There¡¯s a wind magic which was used and it was centered around that empty bar.


    Which mean that the person who is meeting with the woman I followed is a master level wind mage.


    It would be impossible to get closer. The woman is an earth mage and the man is a wind mage. Getting any closer than this is impossible without being found. Eavesdropping is out of the question.


    So, the only thing I can do is to bait the man.


    The two are talking about something. Probably about the news that the woman just heard. Maybe that man has a high standing in a ce like this since the woman seem to speak to him in a respectful manner.


    I found a cafe nearby and ordered some coffee while waiting for the two of them to have their discussion over.


    It was not long before they split up. The woman entered the inn that the other girls entered previously. Leaving only the man behind in that empty bar.


    Now, I need to bait him. I have to say something that will make him approach me if possible.


    ¡°Sigh... I don¡¯t have enough money to get those girls out of here. I hope someone wille and save them,¡± I said to myself.


    I said that on purpose. Though only wind mage can hear me.


    I want to make him think that I¡¯m someone who wants to save the girls. If he¡¯s thinking the same, or he wants to use me because he knows what I want to do, I¡¯m sure he will approach me. But I don¡¯t know when.


    And I can¡¯t just keep staying in this cafe every day and say that. Not because of what I said. But because the coffee in this cafe is terrible. There¡¯s no sane person who woulde back here for a cup of coffee. No wonder it¡¯s empty.


    I need to find another ce nearby. Maybe just a bar and get some cheap beer. But that¡¯s no reason for me to be in this area.


    ¡°I shouldn¡¯t havee here. The coffee sucks and I started thinking of weird stuffs,¡± I said as I leave my table.


    I can see the wind mage¡¯s reaction. He¡¯s watching me from the window of his bar. Maybe if Ie again tomorrow, he will approach me.


    I left the range of his wind magic from before. But seems like he used more magic as the range of his wind magic increased. Making it so that he can still listen to me when I¡¯m far. And he also followed me.


    But even as I reach the inn I stayed at, the man is still following me from the sky. Maybe he¡¯s going to check whoever I¡¯m going to bring back to Earth.


    I entered the inn and before anyone could greet me, I put my finger on my lip. Telling them to not speak mindlessly.


    ¡°Hey, I¡¯m here again. It sure is empty here,¡± I said.


    Everyone was confused at first, but the inn owner is sharp enough to know that something is wrong. So she asked the other girls to serve me. That way, they will be too busy to talk about anything important that needed to be kept secret.


    I keep talking to not let anyone say anything unnecessary at all. And by this time, they started to understand that someone is using wind magic to eavesdrop on us.


    ¡°I will stay here again if you can give me a discount that would be great! Of course I¡¯d like to have a girl by my... alright, he¡¯s gone now. We¡¯re safe.¡±


    The guy has left and he returned to the bar he came from. And neither Airy nor I can sense his wind anymore. So we¡¯re safe.


    ¡°Roy, do you think it¡¯s a good idea to do that?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Maybe not. And you girls must keep acting this way when you meet me. Just like a normal customer and staff. Just do it until I say that we¡¯re safe. Also, be careful when you spread the rumor again. One of the girls you¡¯re talking to has just spoken with a master level mage. Does anyone know about that master level earth mage woman?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know much, but she has been in this ce longer than I did. And she seems to be kind to girls in the middle area,¡± the inn owner said.


    ¡°Find more about any master level mage if possible. Including her. And do it as discreet as possible. If you get any news, tell me if we have the chance. I¡¯ll be looking around the base after this,¡± I said as I leave the inn.


    Maybe I gained some unwanted attention. But I don¡¯t care. It was just one person after all.

 Chapter 707

    Chapter 707: Time to Act


    It is finally the day tomence our n. I have sent the werewolves again two more times before and now the enemies are far fewer than before. Though the master level mage are still confident that they can kill all the invaders. So they are all still here.


    I have told the spies here to spread the news that once the signal is given, the people should go to five different location. The signal is the werewolves¡¯ howl. We¡¯re nning to get them to act like the werewolves are going to raid this ce again.


    One of the five locations is the inn I use as a base. And I told them to not let anyone to go there other than the original staffs of the inn. It¡¯s because they deserve it since they helped me a lot here.


    Even though they have just met me, they decided to trust me and follow my order even though I told them to not trust me so much. And I have told them that I might let them die if things go wrong. But they still decided to be our spies. So, I want to make sure that their survival chance is much higher than the others.


    I don¡¯t know if in the other four locations there will be spy from the cult or not. That¡¯s why I want at least the people who decided to trust me from the start to be able to leave first.


    I¡¯ll make sure that they can get a proper job once they return to Earth. I¡¯m already so close in opening new branches of the clothing store and I need new managers and staffs of those stores. At least the inn owner will be a good manager.


    The location they will be transported to has been prepared. Ka, Ang, and the others have been there ready to ept people to return and protect them if necessary.


    .....


    As for me, I¡¯m at the usual inn. When the werewolves howled, I will open a portal directly to the transfer point and once I¡¯m there, I will open four portals to four Blobbies that I had our spies gave to people the can trust the most from other establishments. And they will all enter the portal.


    That won¡¯t be as easy as it seems since someone can intercept it after I opened the portal even though I had them all to gather somewhere far from the center of the base. But there¡¯s nothing I can do except for hoping that they won¡¯t get found out. After all, I had them gather in a ce opposite of where the werewolves will give the signal.


    I used my Divine Vision to the fullest while avoiding the gaze of any master level mages in the center. I looked at where the summoners are. Some people are entering this base from the portal the summoners are opening, while some are waiting to leave this world through those portals.


    And no one knows that the ces they were going to have been surrounded by the army. We have found out all the ces they will transport people from Earth to Monsters World, and surround those ces.


    As of now, we have a lot of expert level mages. None of them are stronger than my friends but they are still far stronger than any average expert level mages. They should be able to handle a few master level mages if they work together.


    And I don¡¯t think there will be too many master level mages protecting just one summoner. It should be fine.


    I watched as the summoners started to get the people from here to enter the portal one by one. The summoners will be the second tost to enter as the master level mages protecting them will be thest one.


    Once they do, I will contact Shelia via telepathy to start howling.


    Though I can already see that everyone is already in their ce. But at least once they hear the howl of the werewolves, they will know to enter the portal as soon as I open it.


    I waited and waited until thest summoners entered the portal. The master level mage protecting him then leave as well. Soon after, the portal is closed.


    ¡®Shelia, now!¡¯


    With my telepathic ability thanks to being a high level summoner, Imunicated with Shelia who has prepared to invade together with the other werewolves.


    ¡°AWOOOOOO!!!¡±


    The howl of the werewolves was heard. But right before that, I opened a portal in the empty inn to the transfer point and brought all the girls there back to Earth quickly.


    ¡°Get them all out of here quickly before this ce turn into a battle field!¡± I shouted.


    Even before the girls started moving toward the portal, as soon as I opened the portal, Ang and Kron entered here and quickly grab the girls to Earth.


    ¡°Quick, move! Ladies, please follow us nicely. You will be questioned a lotter, but please don¡¯t worry. We can make sure of your safety.¡±


    One of the agents said that to the girls I just brought over. They then quickly left this ce to another ce, while some other are prepared to get other girls or preparing to fight.


    ¡°If you¡¯re all ready, then I¡¯ll open the next four portals at once. Now!¡± I shouted as I opened four portals at once.


    Each portal is connected to a Blobby that one person among the group in the four designated location were ced at.


    Like before, some, including Ang and Kron, entered the portals and use wind magic to help push the people through the portal. The portal I opened wasrge enough for multiple people to enter at once, so no one was harmed. They are all only shocked.


    But there¡¯s one portal where no one entered from this ce. Because that¡¯s where I¡¯m going to return back to that world.


    ¡°Get inside! Quick!¡±


    I shouted as I leaped into the portal. I will be going to the center of the cult¡¯s base from this ce, which is the closest one to the center.


    And not just that. It¡¯s because I also see one person I expected to see here. The master level earth mage woman. She¡¯s hiding herself among the girls and pretend as if she¡¯s one of the staffs who was forced to work in this ce.


    ¡°Found you!¡±


    I found the woman I¡¯m looking for and quickly run in the air toward her. Then I grabbed her head and threw here to the wall.


    ¡°Quickly enter the portal! She¡¯s an enemy!¡± I shouted.


    Good thing that all the people here, other than these girls, are busy thinking that werewolves will attack this ce again. They are moving toward the gates while we are quite far from the gates. And I used air magic as well to make sure no sound leaked from here.


    The woman is still a master level mage. She¡¯s strong. Even if the wall is destroyed after I threw her body there, she¡¯s still well.


    And now, everyone from inside the portal told the girls to quickly enter.


    ¡°Tsk! Don¡¯t let them live!¡±


    The master level mage woman shouted.


    As expected, she has people with her who will fight for her. They all have entered the portal and will fight everyone there and will probably kill some people as well.


    But too bad, they are at most just expert level mages. They are not master level mages. I¡¯m sure that just Ang alone can kill whoever fighting.


    She, Kron, and all the wind mages there will be boosted thanks to Breezy being there.


    Now that I have closed the portal, I can only hope that they are okay. My problem here is just this master level mage.


    ¡°You think that you¡¯re safe? I¡¯m sure people will starting here. There¡¯s nothing you can do alone,¡± she said.


    ¡°I used air magic to block sound from leaving this area. You¡¯re just one person. And I can¡¯t forgive anyone who used kindness to scam girls and then sold them to ve merchants. I hate human traffickers. You will die today,¡± I said.


    I have investigated her and found out that she helped girls to turn them into ves. There¡¯s a small kingdom near Varadis where very is still legal. And that ce is quite rich because of the numerous resources that they can trade.


    I don¡¯t know about that because the circus hasn¡¯t gone there yet. I think it will be a few months until the circus can get there since they are still in Arturo¡¯s territory. I miss performing as rence.


    This woman, she used the girls¡¯ weakness and teaches them new skills so they can get more expensive to be sold. I hate her.


    While I was about to fight her, she suddenly smiled as she looked at the sky above me.


    ¡°There¡¯s no way some weak air magic can be better than wind magic. It¡¯s calledmon sense,¡± she said.


    I can tell without looking that someone appeared from the sky. It¡¯s the master level wind mage she¡¯s talking with back then. The one who followed me back to the inn.


    Hended between the two of us with his back facing me.


    ¡°It¡¯s two on one now! There¡¯s no way you can win!¡± the woman shouted.


    ¡°You¡¯re right. It¡¯s two on one. But I¡¯m siding with him.¡±


    The master level wind mage said that. And while the woman was shocked, she used wind magic to kill her.


    ¡°I always hate her. Now, what¡¯s the n?¡± he asked me.


    He, Derek, is with us. Since a long time, he has always wanted someone to fight the cult. But he was powerless even after reaching master level.


    And now, after knowing how powerful I am, his hope returned. And he will help us destroying this base.


    I have Albert¡¯s confirmation that he¡¯s safe so we can cooperate with him. At least during the destruction of this base.


    After this, I hope he will continue helping us. I don¡¯t want to let go of a master level mage we got.

 Chapter 708

    Chapter 708: Derek


    It was after my first time being found by Derek. Back when I spoke to myself in a cafe with terrible coffee.


    He followed me to the inn where I used as a base. But at that time, he didn¡¯t do anything.


    Over the next few days, I returned to the middle area and started talking to myself again andin how I couldn¡¯t save all the girls working in this base.


    And finally,st week, the day before the previous portal opening for people toe and go, he approached me. Pretending that he¡¯s just a stranger and had just met me by chance in a restaurant which was far from the middle area. He was obviously trying to approach me.


    When I left that restaurant and entered the inn I stayed, he also followed me from distance.


    And when he entered the inn, I have already told the girls way before I entered the previous restaurant to stay in their room and note out until I told them to.


    ¡°Hello, the wind mage who has reached master level. It hasn¡¯t been long since I baited you and you finallye out to meet me,¡± I said.


    .....


    ¡°...Seems like I got caught. So, what do you want from me?¡± he asked.


    ¡°Your intention. The woman you met back when I first say something on purpose to let you, a wind mage, to hear me, I don¡¯t think she is a good person. Even though she taught girls so they can have a good lives once they left this world and return to Earth, I don¡¯t think that¡¯s her real intention,¡± I said.


    ¡°So you want to know if I am herpanion or I have other intention. But because I use wind magic, you can¡¯t get close to eavesdrop on us since I can find you easily. That¡¯s why you baited me to approach you. You think that I won¡¯t do anything to you?¡± the man asked as he pulled a chair in front of me and sat on it.


    ¡°Do you know the rumors about Aura user who killed the cult members back on Earth? That was me. Now, if I find your answer not satisfactory, I will kill you. I¡¯m confident that I can kill you in an instant even though you¡¯re a master level mage.¡±


    I infused a bit of killing intent and directed it toward Derek. I am d now that he ended up as our ally.


    At that time, he was afraid of me after he realized that he was no match against me. But he still acted strong and asked me questions instead.


    ¡°How true were your words used to bait me?¡±


    ¡°About saving the girls? Not just the girls here. But all the girls who fell victims to the cult. Saving them is not my real intention, but if I can save as many as possible, that would be great. My goal here is to destroy everything rted to the cult. For now this base. I want to kill whoever that Evil God is, but I couldn¡¯t find his whereabouts at all.¡±


    ¡°You think it¡¯s fine to tell me all that?¡±


    ¡°Like I said, I can kill you easily. You won¡¯t be the first master level mage I kill. And you won¡¯t be thest either.¡±


    That¡¯s something I want to say thanks to Victoria¡¯s influence. She told me various stories from her world.


    I think that was not the first time I said that. But that won¡¯t be thest either. Haha!


    Then, the man gave up.


    ¡°Sigh... I can¡¯t trust you yet. Whether you want to save the girls or not, I don¡¯t know. But I want to live so I will tell you everything. I don¡¯t think you lied when you said you have killed other master level mages.¡±


    Then he introduced himself as Derek. He was someone who wanted to save the girls from this ce.


    ¡°Really? You want to save them?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. I stupidly told my brother to let my niece work with the cult. I thought that she could have a better life than my brother. But that was not the case. My niece doesn¡¯t have any talent in magic and even after using as many resources I could give, she barely reached intermediate. So someone told me that it¡¯s best for her to work in Monsters World as waitress. But as you can see, the girls here are used as tools.


    ¡°Now that I have reached master level, I wanted to save my niece. But when I arrive here, she was no longer here. Someone had bought her away from here. She could leave this world, but in the end, she was used as a ve by some rich merchant. She had already died when I found her. So I killed the merchant. Now, I¡¯m back here looking to find anyone rted to that. And that woman who talked to me was one of their agents. She¡¯s here to teach girls skill so they could be sold higher. You are right, she is a bad girl,¡± Derek said.


    I wasn¡¯t shocked back then when I heard that. I expected it to be like that.


    ¡°And what do you think about the cult? Don¡¯t you think that they are also responsible for everything?¡± I asked.


    ¡°There are far too many mages stronger than me in the cult. After my revenge is over, I will try to escape. But I¡¯m doubtful whether I can survive after being chased by the cult,¡± he said.


    ¡°Alright. I¡¯ll take you to someone now and you will repeat what you just said to me. Let¡¯s go. Enter the portal.¡±


    I opened a portal to Albert¡¯s location and had him repeat everything to see if he can be trusted or not.


    And that brought us here. Derek is someone we can trust and he will help us with the destruction of this base.


    Albert promised him that Tatrama will help him in any way possible to find the organization behind Derek¡¯s niece¡¯s very. Of course Albert will ask the other kingdoms as well, but Derek doesn¡¯t need to know that now.


    He killed the female master level mage easily. And from this point, we¡¯re going to kidnap the three summoners.


    ¡°They won¡¯t retreat unless it¡¯s unavoidable! And they are being protected by at least three master level mages!¡±


    Derek has told us about everything he knew about the three summoners. And as expected, they are responsible to send reports about this ce to somewhere. But Derek himself doesn¡¯t know where the reports are delivered to.


    That¡¯s why he agreed to capture those summoners with me.


    ¡°Alright! We don¡¯t have much time until hees! Let¡¯s fly there as fast as possible!¡±


    I summoned Ray and ride on him without hiding myself at all. And Derek flies off with his wind magic. Though he¡¯s far behind me.


    Without making a stop, we run through the wall of the building where the summoners are.


    Without any hesitation, I used Reizpear to sh the necks of the three master level mages who are supposed to protect the summoners.


    The summoners were too shocked to react so they couldn¡¯t open a portal to retreat. And I knock them all out with Reizpear.


    It has been so long since Ist used Reizpear. I thought of never use it again since using Victoria as a spear is now much better. But I just feeling a bit nostalgic so I used it.


    I also used air magic to make sure that they will only breath the minimum amount of air when they¡¯re unconscious. This will make them faint for longer.


    ¡°Who¡¯s there!¡±


    After the ruckus I caused, two more master level mages entered the building. But before they could attack me, Derek arrives and used Wind sh to kill them.


    One of them died right away because he was not prepared to take a hit. And the other barely dodged Derek¡¯s attack. Not knowing that I have thrown a dagger at his chest which killed him.


    ¡°...You¡¯re really not lying when you said that you have killed many master level mages,¡± Derek said in shock.


    ¡°That¡¯s not important right now! We have captured the summoners so we need to escape! He¡¯sing!¡±


    I opened a portal for us to enter. I threw the three summoners inside after binding them with Blobbyropes and Magic Restricting Cors.


    Just to be safe. I don¡¯t know if they are actually much stronger than I expected or not.


    We entered the portal and Derek doesn¡¯t know where we are.


    ¡°Where are we?¡± He asked.


    ¡°We¡¯re on top of the head of someone who will destroy the base for us,¡± I said.


    Derek was confused at first, so I told him to fly to a distance and look back.


    Only then he realized that it¡¯s a huge dragon.


    That¡¯s right. I asked Kaiser to be the one destroying this ce to the ground. With his breath attack, it won¡¯t be hard. He¡¯s the one I asked for help.


    Derek returned back but he was so speechless and unable to say a word. He can only open and close his mouth like a goldfish.


    ¡°Andro! The target is that base! Do it now!¡±

 Chapter 709

    Chapter 709: Andro¡¯s Breath Attack


    ¡°This might be the strongest attack I¡¯ve ever seen. Derek, brace yourself!¡±


    I warned Derek to not get blown away from Andro¡¯s attack. He must have expected that the giant Kaiser Dragon will use a breath attack so he kept his distance. Still, Andro¡¯s attack was stronger than anyone expected.


    I bet even the werewolves looking from below didn¡¯t expect the attack to be that strong as well.


    Andro took a deep breath until his lung which can cover several cities inted to the fullest. Just him letting his breath out can kill someone. But what if it¡¯s an attack?


    Andro released his breath. And with it, magic was infused. Making it a really powerful attack.


    There¡¯s no element in his breath attack. Just like Spot¡¯s breath attack. But the level of destruction was totally different. The size as well.


    The cult¡¯s base in Monsters World, which was the size of several cities, got destroyed in an instant. Leaving only evidence of destruction.


    .....


    The people and unfortunate tamed monsters who got caught in it, died without even knowing how they died. Except for those who looked up and see Andro.


    We didn¡¯t block the sun when Andro arrived at noon. Something the size of Andro blocking the sun will make everything turn dark. And that will alert the people. That¡¯s why we didn¡¯t do it. But now it¡¯s night, we just don¡¯t care. Though we¡¯re still quite far from the base


    And we¡¯re also quite far as well. I thought that Andro¡¯s breath attack won¡¯t be powerful enough since it¡¯s too far, but I was wrong. It was still so strong. And it hasn¡¯t stopped after a full minute as well.


    My Divine Vision couldn¡¯t see that far into the base even though my vision was unobstructed. But I think that there are still several survivors. Mostly, the survivors are around master level. But I don¡¯t think they managed to survive unscathed from that level of attack.


    After a whole minute, Andro¡¯s attack stopped.


    ¡°Thanks, Andro! You can leave now. I¡¯ll see youter!¡± I said to Andro.


    ¡°Yeah. Pleasure to help you, Roy.¡±


    Andro then flies away. The p of his wings created typhoon as he ascend to the sky rapidly. And it pushed both Derek and I back to the ground quickly. Along with the three unconscious summoners.


    I grabbed one summoner to save him from his demise, while Derek used wind magic to help the other two float.


    ¡°I can¡¯t do any more than this. That wing was so powerful. Two is my limit,¡± he said.


    Wended on the ground where the werewolves are waiting. I had Shelia asked some werewolves to retreat together with the three summoners we captured. I can¡¯t bring them to Earth after all.


    ¡°Take care of them. Cover their mouth with cloth so they won¡¯t be able to bite their tongue to kill themselves. I¡¯ll get rid of the survivors,¡± I said to the werewolves.


    ¡°I¡¯ming with you. Though I don¡¯t think you will need my help seeing how powerful you are. Even that dragon is helping you,¡± Derek said.


    ¡°Sure. But I haven¡¯t used my full strength yet. Let¡¯s split up. Kill everyone you see. And if there are any summoner who survived the attack, they will try to retreat using portal. Throw this thing into the portal if you see a portal opened. And make sure that you don¡¯t attack any werewolves. They are helping me,¡± I said as I give Derek several Blobbies.


    He was not the only one I gave Blobbies to. I also gave some to the werewolves who will go to the remains of the base together.


    But since Derek is a wind mage, he¡¯s faster than the rest. Though he¡¯s still slower than me riding on Ray.


    With my Divine Vision, it was easy to find survivors. It¡¯s a shame that the tamed monsters are all dead though. It would be great if they can join us.


    Most of the survivors survived thanks to master level mages who worked together to shield them. Though in the end, they are buried. But they¡¯re still alive.


    As long as they are not buried too deep, I can easily reach them using long distance attack that pierce through the ground.


    As for Derek, he could sense with his wind mage where the people are buried. And he used wind magic to attack them from afar even though he¡¯s still behind me.


    By the time the werewolves arrive, many survivors from the cult have stood up and started to fight back.


    ¡°Where¡¯s the master level mage!¡±


    I can see Jack looking for master level mage to fight. Those who survive are most likely to be strong. He should have just pick anyone he wants and fight them. Like Shelia did.


    Instead of shouting like Jack, Shelia just find an opponent, wait until they able to fight, and fight them. Though most of them are too weak for her. Including the surviving master level mages.


    The city is destroyed. But there are more survivors than expected. They escaped underground thanks to earth mages.


    Some earth mages have started attacking us while underground. Maybe I should ask an earth mage toe here as well.


    Well, it won¡¯t be long until they need to escape. I don¡¯t think they have any air mage as capable as me.


    While I was killing enemy one after another, Sonia appears next to me to give report of the situation back on Earth.


    ¡°Roy, as expected. Many of the girls you brought were not innocent. They started fighting back. But there¡¯s nothing they can do. There¡¯s no casualties at all, but we killed some of those who fought back while the rest have been captured,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°Everyone is safe? That¡¯s good. I can¡¯t return yet. There are more master level mages in hiding than expected,¡± I said.


    Right after I said that, a huge Fireball is approaching me. Though I easily shed it in two. With the strength strong enough to split the caster behind the Fireball in two as well even though he¡¯s in a quite distance from me.


    That¡¯s the master level fire mage that keep the vampires away during the first raid. He¡¯s dead now.


    After that, there¡¯s a huge Ice Spike falling from the sky. That¡¯s the master level ice mage. Seems like he¡¯s also a wind mage.


    I dodged the Ice Spike and threw a Blobbyspear at him. The spear impaled his heart. Killing him before the Blobbyspear disappeared.


    With this, it won¡¯t be long until we kill everyone.


    And so far, there¡¯s no one who is trying to escape by using portal. But that doesn¡¯t mean I can let down my guard.


    I used Divine Vision to the fullest. Even if a master level mage noticed me, I don¡¯t care.


    ¡°Die, Aura user!¡±


    When I was looking around, someone suddenly approached me in high speed. He¡¯s using lightning magic to move that fast. And seems like he noticed that I¡¯m an Aura user.


    He tried to hit me with his fist. I know that his punch won¡¯t be that strong evenif he¡¯s a master level mage. But he¡¯s also a lightning mage.


    I experienced it from Jewel. The feeling of when I was struck by lightning.


    His fist, if it just slightly touched my skin, I could get damaged badly. So I dodged it and about to sh him with Blobbysword I made.


    But he used lightning magic to make himself as fast as lightning. Jewel could learn a lot from him.


    He tried to escape from me after knowing that I can react to his speed. So I chased after him.


    I can see him smiled. He¡¯s thinking of something.


    As I was slowly getting closer to him, he opened a portal in front of him. The location he used as transfer point is somewhere inside arge building that look like a cathedral. And I can see some people were surprised to see a portal suddenly opened.


    Without much thinking, I quickly killed him with a sh. He slowed down thanks to opening that portal. And his body is covering my face so no one in the other side will be able to see my face.


    The dead body crossed over the portal when I changed direction so no one can see me.


    And I also gave them a gift. After I shed him, I attached a small Blobby under his shirt. No one will think that a portal will open from a dead body when I opened er.


    Because the summoner is dead, the portal closed on its own. But I managed to get a Blobby inside.


    As expected, it¡¯s a mission that is hard to go unnoticed.


    I look around and see that the others have taken care of the rest of the enemies. There¡¯s no more survivors.


    ¡°Alright, good job! But someone managed to enter a portal even if it¡¯s just his dead body. Now, I will open a portal there and enter only with my familiars. Depend on the situation, I will open a portal for you guys to enter. Just prepare yourself!¡±


    I covered my body with armor and prepare to open a portal before Derek approached me.


    ¡°I¡¯ming too!¡±


    ¡°No! The cult will think that everyone in the base has died. If you¡¯re still alive, they will be suspicious of you. Just wait there and don¡¯t do anything. I¡¯ll pick you upter.¡±


    Now, I will enter that cathedral and kill a lot of people.


    But seriously, the cult has built a cathedral? Maybe I can find something about the Evil God there.

 Chapter 710

    Chapter 710: To the Cathedral


    ¡°I¡¯ming with you!¡±


    ¡°Me as well!¡±


    Shelia who have defeated the most survivors wanted toe. And so is Graham who had been watching us from the sky.


    Wait, if they suddenly met an angel in a cathedral, if they have stupid believers, they might actually believe us when we say that the cult is the bad guy. That would be interesting.


    ¡°Graham, the ce where he opened the portal to was a cathedral. Can you pretend that you¡¯re some sort of God¡¯s apostle? It would be great if they got tricked,¡± I said.


    ¡°Alright. What should I say?¡± Graham asked.


    ¡°Something like don¡¯t believe those quacks or something,¡± I suggested.


    .....


    ¡°That¡¯s easy. Though I don¡¯t think they will blindly believe me. But if we can make them let down their guard for a moment, that would be great,¡± he said.


    It¡¯s good that he agreed. I thought that he would have a bit of pride like he did back when we first met and refuse it. I guess he has decided to be the cult¡¯s enemy and willing to help me more now.


    ¡°Wait. Roy, what did you see inside the portal? It was not just the building you assumed to be the cathedral, right? Did you see the location?¡± Sonia asked me.


    After informing me about what happened back on Earth, she has been staying nearby. So she saw what happened. That I let one summoner about to escape and alert some people who look important.


    It would be even worse if they have a summoner there as well. The summoner will then open a portal somewhere else and report everything to the higher ups like the Archbishop or something.


    But I don¡¯t think that will happen. They will at best send a wind mage to give the report. Because I think that the cult¡¯s summoners only know that they can only have one familiar at most.


    If the summoner is on Earth, I don¡¯t think they will be stupid enough to get their familiar to be far from them. Because they won¡¯t have any protection then. Especially since they can¡¯t trust other cult members. Unless the summoners are stupidly loyal to the cult.


    Their summoner should only have two transfer point at most then. From the world they are currently at to the other world, and another is to their contracted monster. They shouldn¡¯t have any other transfer points. Unless they have monsters that can create clones.


    And I have never discover any monsters that can do that. I even read the entire monsters encyclopedia that each country in the alliance have. Each has monsters that mostly appears in their territory. But none of them has power to create clones other than slimes.


    But this is Monsters World. Summoner could have some fortune to get such monsters when they tried to make their first contract. Some of them might even have slimes.


    But I don¡¯t need to care about them. After all, slimes are weak monsters. Anyone who made a contract with slimes will think that those slimes are too weak so they will kill those slimes instead. Which mean it¡¯s not likely that they have monsters with cloning ability.


    I¡¯m the special one. Or should I say it¡¯s Victoria. Or maybe Javier since he¡¯s the original personality.


    ¡°Graham, you will face the enemy inside the buiding together with Victoria. She couldn¡¯t do much on her own but she¡¯s still useful. Shelia will look for traces of enemy who flies away or escape from that ce with me who will ride Ray. If possible, we can¡¯t let anyone alive to be a messenger to their higher ups,¡± I said.


    Though it will only be for one day. We can only dy the report back to the cult for one day at most since tomorrow, the cult will bring supplies back to this world. They will be surprised to see that the base is destroyed in just one night.


    One day is too soon. But it¡¯s better than being known right away.


    I need to get this done soon so I can bring Albert to this world and interrogate those three summoners.


    ¡°Sonia, tell Albert that I will bete,¡± I said.


    Ray and I gave a lot of Aura to Victoria so she can fight by herself for a while, while she gave me a lot of Blobbies that I will use as my weapon or just use to mark my targets. Shelia and Graham are preparing as well with Graham already letting all his angel wings out while hiding his demon wings, and Shelia is in her strongest form.


    The enemy we will face will most likely to be master level mages. so this preparation is important.


    ¡°Let¡¯s go!¡±


    I opened a portal, but the first to enter the portal was Graham who will make a performance.


    After he enters, the rest of us entered as well. With my body beingpletely covered in armor riding a horse.


    ¡°This is a warning to everyone! Do not believe in these quacks! They deserve to die!¡± Graham shouted.


    Right after Graham announced that, Shelia, Victoria, and I killed some people there. Only then I started observing the situation.


    The body of the man I killed and entered the portal is still there. Seems like it hasn¡¯t been moved or being checked. And because of this corpse, many people are trying to approach it. And now I have many targets I can kill easily. But that won¡¯t be my job.


    Shelia and I the quickly left the building. This is a cathedral indeed. Or at least it¡¯s much bigger than any ordinary church.


    The location is in some sort of vige. Isn¡¯t it too fancy to have a cathedral in this small vige? Only surrounded by forest and there¡¯s no main road at all leading to other ces.


    For now, let¡¯s mark this ce with several Blobbies while looking for someone who escaped from this ce if there are any.


    ¡°I smell two people who recently left this ce! One to the left, and another to the right!¡± Shelia said,


    ¡°I go to the right one! You will chase the other one! I wille to you as soon as I finished killing that one.¡±


    I used Divine Vision to the fullest and I could barely see that someone is flying away from this ce quickly. And he somehow noticed that I¡¯m looking at him even though he was so focused on leaving. Well, he¡¯s a master level mage it seems.


    The game of chase started. But there¡¯s no way that he could be faster than Ray. He needs to train more in his magic. Just cultivating is not enough to outrun us.


    I caught up with him soon after and we started fighting. I also make sure that there¡¯s no one nearby. Who knows if the cult has another hiding spot nearby?


    It¡¯s just a forest all around. With ntation and monsters. There¡¯s no need for me to worry about being seen.


    The enemy I¡¯m facing is a master level wind mage. He created a typhoon to block me. But that doesn¡¯t work.


    I just broke through the typhoon and killed him. That was easy. He should have do something else instead of hiding himself inside the typhoon. But anything he do will be useless because he was facing me.


    Alright, one is gone. And since he¡¯s a master level wind mage, he should be the furthest one from the cathedral. I¡¯ll check around the surrounding a bit before I move to Shelia¡¯s location.


    Seems like there¡¯s no other person leaving that cathedral. I didn¡¯t see anyone leaving. Maybe they have just started leaving when Graham and Victoria started fighting.


    I need to finish it soon before anyone could leave. I have to return back to Victoria¡¯s ce.


    I opened a portal to Shelia¡¯s location to see that she¡¯s fighting a master level fire mage who also has wind element.


    And I see that she is struggling.


    The man can¡¯t outrun Shelia, but he¡¯s still stronger than her. At least at the moment.


    He¡¯s much stronger than any average master level mage from the cult that I have fought before. He could be someone important.


    ¡°You okay?¡± I asked Shelia.


    ¡°Leave me alone! I will fight him by myself! You will take care of the rest!¡± she said.


    ¡°Alright, I will leave. But if you feel that you can¡¯t win, tell me!¡±


    I opened a portal back to the cathedral. To where Victoria and Graham are.


    And I can see... the cult members are fighting each other.


    Those who look like important figure in the cathedral is fighting mostly against priests or worshipers from the vige by the look of it.


    I guess those priests are those who know nothing about the cult. And they truly thought that Graham is the God¡¯s apostle.


    But those people are too weak. Many of them have died. But none of them gave up. In the end, even if they know nothing, they still loyal to what they belief. And they believe in Graham¡¯s word when it was a lie.


    And I don¡¯t feel sorry at all.


    At least it will be easier for me to defeat everyone here before helping Shelia. Let¡¯s see who Graham is fighting.

 Chapter 711

    Chapter 711: An Archbishop?


    Fighting a cult by pretending to be the apostle of God. I¡¯m basically trying to make another cult here.


    These people believed that Graham is an angel sent by the God. Except for some who was not tricked. They are the people who know that angel is just another type of intellectual monster.


    Which most likely mean that they know the existence of the Monsters World since I have never seen an angel on Earth.


    There are even some expert level mages who believed that Graham is truly the God¡¯s apostle. They killed several of the cult¡¯s loyal believer before getting themselves killed.


    Thanks to them, Victoria didn¡¯t need to waste too much Aura stored in her. So she can focus on protecting Graham since I also told him to not use his shadow clone.


    She shed the magic targeted toward Graham who was busy facing other people. Thanks to being used to sh magic so many times, she knows how to do it.


    There are several master level mages here who noticed that I arrived and looked at them. And only Victoria and Graham are here. It¡¯s really a good thing that we had Graham acted like an apostle.


    .....


    But because of my return to this cathedral, those master level mages started to use their magic to kill everyone. Leaving only those who are loyal to the cult.


    ¡°Ah! Forgive me, God!¡±


    ¡°You frauds will burn in hell!¡±


    Those are the things that the cult members who believed Graham said as theirst words to their murderer.


    The cathedral now is destroyed. There¡¯s no more people except ten master level mages who are prepared to fight. Including one who looks like a really important person.


    ¡°Archbishop! Only us bishops left! The rest have died!¡± one of the bishop shouted.


    Wait, that¡¯s the Archbishop? The one whom Celestine and Veronica said to be closest to the Evil God?


    Hmm... maybe that is indeed the same Archbishop. But that doesn¡¯t mean he is the closest one to the Evil God.


    Seeing how many master level mages from the cult, I don¡¯t think Celestine and Veronica who were just expert level mages when they left the cult would know much. This Archbishop might have someone else above him who is much closer to the Evil God. Probably the Pope or a Saint if they think that it¡¯s an organization.


    That¡¯s right. I also need to think that the cult is simr to a criminal organization with clear hierarchy. With the Evil God at the top. And Veronica and Celestine were just some subordinates whose knowledge is limited.


    I¡¯ll tell Albert about thister. Though maybe someone already thought about it.


    In any case, the one who was called as the Archbishop seems to be the most important and also the strongest. I need to capture him alive if I want to get more information about the cult. Good thing that I still have the handcuff that even master level mage has difficulty to remove and able to block the wearer¡¯s magic.


    There¡¯s only ten enemies left and we only have three fighters since we can¡¯t include Ray in. And Shelia is still busy with the enemy she¡¯s facing.


    Well, with me here, there¡¯s nothing to worry about.


    And as I was thinking of how to kill them as fast as possible, the Archbishop started talking.


    ¡°Who are you? And why did you do this?¡± he asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m an Aura user. That¡¯s the answer for the first question. As for the second question, it¡¯s because we hate the cult,¡± I said.


    ¡°So you¡¯re the Aura user and the one who pretends to be the living armor, huh? You and that woman who doesn¡¯t seem to be a human. And that¡¯s the horse of the living armor. So you¡¯re not really a living armor, but an Aura user who is a summoner who can somehow make contracts with multiple monsters. But why do you hate the cult?¡± the Archbishop asked.


    ¡°Are you stupid? You¡¯re a cult with a a goal to destroy the world. Why wouldn¡¯t anyone hate you? The only ones who don¡¯t hate you are those who agree with you. And most of them are likely those who doesn¡¯t even know that your goal is the world destruction,¡± I said.


    After I said that, some of the bishops were shocked. They must be belong to the group who doesn¡¯t know the cult¡¯s goal.


    ¡°...You talk too much. Kill them.¡±


    That order from the Archbishop wasn¡¯t mean to kill us. It¡¯s to kill the other bishops who know nothing.


    Why would they purposely decrease their chance of winning? From the ten master level mages, four of them died. Leaving behind the Archbishop and five bishops.


    Well, that just makes things easier for us. And now that Victoria is riding on Ray, she can use Aura however much she wants.


    ¡°Killing your own allies? That just decrease your chance of winning here,¡± I said.


    ¡°It¡¯s better than having subordinates who can¡¯t obey.¡±


    Capturing him might prove to be difficult. He might not even care about his own life and choose to kill himself.


    The same could be said to the other bishops. But I can just ignore them if they want to die.


    The problem is the Archbishop. I also want to confirm if he¡¯s the same Archbishop whom Veronica and Celestine know. Though I heard that the Archbishop that they knew wears a mask.


    ¡°This might be where my life is over. But I won¡¯t go down without a fight. Everything is for the True God,¡± the Archbishop said.


    ¡°No, he¡¯s not the True God. He¡¯s an Evil God.¡±


    ¡°Let¡¯s just kill each other now. Bring out everything you have with you!¡± the Archbishop shouted.


    ...Did he just ignore me? That¡¯s not a True God. He¡¯s just an Evil God. That¡¯s what I said. But this Archbishop chose to ignore me.


    ¡°By the way, do you know of the Archbishop who wears a mask?¡± I asked.


    ¡°If you¡¯re ready, let¡¯s fight!¡±


    Alright, he¡¯s deaf. Not fully deaf. He just has very selective hearing. I guess if someone wants to be in a high position in something like a cult, they need to have the ability to listen only to what they want to hear.


    ¡°Fine, I¡¯ll call for reinforcement then,¡± I said as I opened two portals.


    One of them is to the location of the werewolves whom I have informed to prepare to fight at all time tonight. Thest one is also to someone I told to prepare to fight. But she¡¯s not a monster. She¡¯s Celestine.


    I want to ask Veronica as well, but she¡¯s busy with her mission together with Wendy.


    ¡°Hmm? His garb look familiar, but not his appearance,¡± Celestine said as soon as she enters the portal.


    ¡°He¡¯s an Archbishop. Is he the one you and Veronica told me about before?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. This one is shorter and he doesn¡¯t wear a mask,¡± she said.


    Meanwhile, the bishops and the Archbishop who were shocked that I suddenly summoned a lot of monsters. But the Archbishop and several other bishops were shocked to see Celestine.


    ¡°It¡¯s the Boob Priestess!¡±


    Yup. As soon as someone spoke, he was killed by Celestine even though she¡¯s one level lower than him.


    ¡°That¡¯s rude. Even back then, I always thought that you people are the rudest bunch of people in the world. I hate the cult,¡± Celestine said.


    Well, now there¡¯s only five enemies left. Six if I include the one Shelia is fighting.


    ¡°Victoria, go with Ray to check on Shelia. I will capture that Archbishop while the rest of you can go wild.¡±


    ¡°Roger!¡±


    Now, who is Roger again? Oh, right. It meant that she understood.


    ¡°I guess we¡¯re really die here tonight. But don¡¯t forget to kill as many as possible! Including the Boob Priestess!¡± the Archbishop said.


    That¡¯s really rude. She¡¯s my future wife, you know? She already promised me that.


    I guess I¡¯ll kill him after we got all the information we need.


    But seriously, is that what they call Celestine? No one ever told me about it. I guess it¡¯s some sort of inside joke by the higher ups of the cult.


    Victoria and Ray left to the direction of where Shelia is. Shelia has a Blobby with her so Victoria can find her easily.


    Maybe it¡¯s faster if I just open a portal to her location, but I think Shelia is currently enjoying her battle so I don¡¯t want to bother her. The master level mage she¡¯s facing is quite strong after all.


    It would be impossible for her to win the fight unscathed. But she¡¯s a werewolf. The strongest werewolf I know. She¡¯s already far surpassed her grandfather. So even some major injuries can still get healed by her regeneration skill.


    Both sides are prepared to fight. We have the number but they have the strength. But the Archbishop seems to be the strongest here. Let¡¯s separate him from the other.


    ¡°Fight whenever you want!¡±


    I run toward the Archbishop and grabbed his face before I leaped to the sky and threw him away. The two of us will fight in different location than the rest.

 Chapter 712

    Chapter 712: Shelia Faces Powerful Opponent


    The Archbishop got thrown down into the ground as we changed location. I don¡¯t want the others to be disturbed by our fight.


    The Archbishop didn¡¯t scream at all when I threw him. But I could see from his face that he was utterly shocked that I suddenly moved too fast.


    And as he falls down, his head falls first and hit the ground. He lost his consciousness right away.


    ¡°...What the hell?! Why are you so weak?! You¡¯re supposed to be a master level mage, damn it!¡±


    I thought that there will be a great battle. Especially after seeing his confidence after knowing that I¡¯m an Aura user.


    Maybe it¡¯s not his confidence. It¡¯s his duty. His duty as the Archbishop of the cult to fight whoever on their way at the risk of their own lives.


    Still, that doesn¡¯t mean he can just faint after I threw him to the ground! That was so anti-climactic. So stupid.


    .....


    ¡°...Now what?¡±


    Because I also didn¡¯t expect this to happen, I¡¯m at lost.


    But I guess this is fine as well. I have done my job in stopping the Archbishop. Someone who seems to be the strongest among those who stayed in the cathedral.


    Why is he so weak? Maybe because he¡¯s the Archbishop.


    The Archbishop and those several bishops who were prepared to fight with their lives have never been involved in any real fight after they reached their positions. That¡¯s why their skills and decision-making got rusty. That¡¯s what I think.


    I guess I don¡¯t need to help Celestine and the monsters then. They can take care of those bishops.


    But it¡¯s surely an unfortunate news. That a whole vige is being massacred in just one night. No, it¡¯s dawn already.


    It¡¯s the difference in time. When in Monsters World, the location of the base, is night time, here is dawn. Maybe we can guess roughly the location of this ce then. I¡¯ll get someone smart to find out about it.


    This noon, I already got Andro get close to the base of the cult in Monsters World. But I told him that he needs to be over a hundred kilometers away from the base so he won¡¯t block the sun and only get closer when he heard the howl of the werewolves as the signal. I made the werewolves to stay at different position so Andro could hear them.


    From the moment wemenced our n until now, we only spend about fifteen minutes. But this is a long fifteen minutes.


    Anyway, I need to do something first about the fainted Archbishop with a huge swelling on his head.


    As expected of a master level mage. His skull is still fine. Only the obvious bump was there. He must be fainted because of the shaking of his brain.


    Well, let¡¯s incapacitate him first.


    While he¡¯s still unconscious, I put the Magic Restricting Cor on him. He can easily rip it apart as soon as he wakes up. So I need to do something about his body as well.


    So I dislocated his joints and break his bones in different ces. With this, even if he¡¯s a healer, he won¡¯t be able to fix himself to fight me. Though he won¡¯t be able to use magic thanks to the cor.


    What I do might be cruel. But don¡¯t worry. I¡¯m a doctor.


    I also make sure to shove a cloth into his mouth so he won¡¯t try to bite his tongue off to kill himself. But I don¡¯t think that biting his tongue will kill him right away since I can easily stop the bleeding. He will feel a lot of pain though. Maybe I will stick his tongue on a lemon to torture him if he try to do it that.


    ¡°Alright, it¡¯s ready to be delivered now,¡± I said.


    Then I opened a portal to Albert¡¯s location in his office. He has been resting since yesterday because he knows that he will be used a lot by me from this point.


    ¡°Roy, you¡¯re done?¡± he asked.


    ¡°Not yet. We¡¯re on Earth now. You should have listened to Sonia¡¯s report, right? Anyway, this guy is an Archbishop. Make sure to get everything you can from him,¡± I said.


    ¡°He¡¯s the Archbishop Celestine and Veronica told us about?!¡± Albert asked again.


    ¡°Celestine said that this wasn¡¯t the guy who gave her order. Which meant that there might be more Archbishop than we thought. There are also some people called bishops and priests. Though most of them should be dead now. I¡¯ll tell you everythingter. It¡¯s not over yet. By the way, we have captured the three summoners. They are with the werewolves and Derek in Monsters World. I¡¯ll take you to themter,¡± I said as I gave the fainted Archbishop to Mustache.


    I then bid my farewell as I close the portal and opened a new one. This time, I¡¯m going to Victoria¡¯s ce who should be with Shelia now.


    ¡°I don¡¯t need your help! I will fight him alone!¡±


    Right after I opened the portal, Shelia shouted that. Seems like her battle is not over.


    ¡°Whoa, Roy! You surprised me! How was your battle? It was over so soon. I have just arrived here,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°It ended in the most anti-climactic way possible for a fight against a master level mage. When I took him away to change the location, I threw his body too hard on the ground and he fell headfirst. Knocking him unconscious. He¡¯s now with Albert and his body is full of broken bones,¡± I said.


    ¡°Had I know that¡¯d be the case, I would have stayed with Graham and the others. Well, I¡¯ll return now then and see if their fight is over.¡±


    Victoria then leave together with Ray. I guess we¡¯re pretty far if she had just arrive here with Ray¡¯s speed. Maybe Shelia¡¯s fight has moved them further.


    Shelia is seriously injured. But that¡¯s only if she¡¯s a human. She¡¯s a werewolf and her injuries are being healed. Even if her healing is slowed down.


    As for the man she¡¯s fighting, he still hasn¡¯t given up even though he¡¯s outnumbered. He seems to be in the same mindset as the Archbishop. Someone who support the world destruction n.


    Maybe for this one I¡¯ll capture him instead of killing him. But I¡¯ll let Shelia decide it. If she ended up killing him, well, that¡¯s that.


    ¡°Good luck, Shelia! I¡¯m sure you can do it. And you will surely get even stronger after this fight!¡±


    The enemy she¡¯s facing is a real master level mage. At least at this time, he should be stronger than most master level mage who were cultivated by the cult. He¡¯s just a bit weaker than the master level mage who were Aura users ghosts.


    Well, that¡¯s obvious. At that time, I heard that battle ismon urrence everywhere. Especially since they are Aura users who can grow by every fight they experienced. Fighting is a must for Aura user to grow stronger.


    The only reason I can grow this strong is because I have enemy. The cult. If the cult doesn¡¯t exist, even if I trained to be an Aura user, I would never be able to get this strong.


    Shelia and the mage continued fighting. With the mage trying to keep his distance. But since his wind magic is not that high level, he would eventually be caught by Shelia. And that¡¯s when he cast powerful fire magic exploded from his body that would hurt Shelia.


    That¡¯s a suicide attack if he¡¯s any weaker than master level. Even I can feel the heat. Wind magic must have been added to that attack.


    But he used that magic easily. Without any injury thanks to his affinity with fire.


    ¡°That move won¡¯t work the second time!¡±


    Though if she wore the Magic Fis Stocking, she won¡¯t even feel the heat.


    Shelia forces herself to enter into the center of the explosion and hit him. That¡¯s the only injury that I could see from the mage¡¯s body. Which means that Shelia could only reach him now. And he had used that move before. Probably right before I arrive.


    But the mage¡¯s body has been strengthened when he reached master level mage. So even though that one hit was strong enough to probably kill anyone below expert level and could knock out someone at expert level, he could endure it before he tried to retreat and gain more distance.


    Shelia chased after him with her fur still burnt from the previous exchange.


    She tried to attack from distance but the mage easily dodge them even if he¡¯s slow.


    Huh? The way he¡¯s moving is...


    ¡°Shelia, if he keep getting further, I have no choice but to interfere! He¡¯s trying to find an opening to retreat!¡± I shouted.


    The mage seems like he has given up on defeating Shelia. Or maybe it¡¯s because I¡¯m here. So he tried to escape.


    ¡°Do not butt in no matter what!¡± Shelia warned me instead.


    ¡°I¡¯ll just block his escape route then,¡± I said as I make my move.


    I made sure the he would sense me to where he was retreating. Now that he has no choice but to fight.


    ¡°Since I can¡¯t escape, I¡¯ll take you down with me, puppy girl!¡±


    Now the mage chose to fight Shelia.


    But as expected, hecked experience in a fight against someone as strong or stronger than him. He has wasted so much mana that after a few more explosion, he can no longer use Flight magic.


    But he¡¯s still obsessed in killing Shelia. So he used thest bit of mana to cast Fireball on her. Which Shelia endured easily.


    ¡°That was a good fight. I got stronger thanks to you.¡±


    That¡¯s what she said before finishing him off. And she¡¯s also too tired now and can¡¯t stand anymore so I grabbed her before she falls.


    ¡°Good job, Shelia. You can take a rest now,¡± I said.


    With this, the mission is over. We can rx until tomorrow when the cult will find out about the base¡¯s destruction. As for the cathedral and the whole vige massacre here, I don¡¯t know when they will know about it. Maybe it¡¯s even sooner.


    But whatever the case, we¡¯re done here. Maybe I can finally go back to be a clown.

 Chapter 713

    Chapter 713: What Derek Wants


    I picked the exhausted Shelia whom fell asleep as soon as I said that the battle is won, then I opened a portal back to where the cathedral was. It has mostly been destroyed. But there are still some things that might be useful.


    ¡°Everyone, let¡¯s go back. Celestine, I¡¯ll send you back to Consenza first.¡±


    I opened a portal to Lynn¡¯s location. And Celestine entered it. But before I close the portal, she asked me a question.


    ¡°Roy, what will you do with the Archbishop. If he¡¯s simr to the Archbishop I knew, then there¡¯s no way that he would expose any of the cult¡¯s secret no matter how much you torture him,¡± Celestine asked.


    ¡°Then we just need to torture him even more. As long as he can speak, Albert will know the truth.¡±


    Easy. Even if the captured Archbishop tell lies, Albert will know that he¡¯s lying.


    Lies are still considered as information. Albert is sure to know what to ask, and what information he needs to know. That¡¯s why I just love sending all the bad guys to him for interrogation.


    .....


    ¡°Okay then. I¡¯ll see youter.¡±


    After saying her farewell, I look around a bit.


    The cathedral is almost destroyed. Some houses in the vige were destroyed as well.


    As for casualties, we have none at all.


    As usual, the werewolves received injuries. But they¡¯re all something that can be healed by themselves.


    Other than them, there are vigers casualties. Or should I say believers?


    They all died fighting the cult after Graham tricked them to believe him.


    Since Celestine and the monsters have finished their fight soon, Celestine created a hole in the ground and asked the monsters to bury them all. I guess even if they were believers, they were still normal vigers who got tricked. And Celestine felt bad about it.


    Even someone who used to be cruel be this kind. Is it my influence? I hope it is. So I can have evidence that I¡¯m actually a good guy.


    Well, I think it¡¯s more like Lynn who¡¯s responsible for most of her change. And the orphans she¡¯s taking care of helped her be kinder. I just gave her more chance to be kind since shecked the time to do so back when she was with the cult.


    There were no survivors at all. And it was before I summoned the werewolves. Which shows how cruel the cult is.


    ¡°Alright, let¡¯s go back. There are many things that... I guess you guys don¡¯t need toe, huh? There¡¯s no more battle tonight after all. Just return to the vige then. Take Shelia with you as well. Graham, you wille with me. We will return back to that base and you can tell the rest over there that the fight is over and they can return,¡± I said.


    I didn¡¯t bring the angels here with me. They¡¯re still there near the base together with Derek, and several werewolves who are watching the three summoners.


    I open a portal and Graham left me after speaking with the other angels. The werewolves also leave with the angels. Leaving only me, Derek, and the three summoners.


    ¡°Are you done?¡± Derek asked.


    ¡°So far, yeah. The cult hasn¡¯t been destroyed yet, so I¡¯m still far from done. But at least we have reduced their power. How much do you know about the cult¡¯s hierarchy? Like how many bishops, archbishops, priests, and others,¡± I asked Derek.


    ¡°Nothing. I don¡¯t know about them at all other than I joined the cult because of one priest. Though he¡¯s already dead. Beyond priest, I don¡¯t know anything at all,¡± he said.


    Well, it¡¯s not like I really care about it anyway. Albert must have learned about such rank within the cult already. And I just need to kill the enemy.


    If he think that there¡¯s someone that has to be killed a soon as possible, he will tell me about it. And I don¡¯t need to know the target¡¯s status.


    After all this time, I can trust Albert to make the decision for me. No, I had already trusted him soon after meeting him. I hope that he uses me only solely for destroying the cult.


    Though that should be the case. I don¡¯t think he would do anything to make me his enemy. After all, he has no one who can challenge me. All the strongest mages are with me except for a few strong ones like Mustache who is loyal to Albert.


    Ah well, I¡¯ll just take care of these things first.


    ¡°What should we do now?¡± Derek asked me.


    ¡°What do you want to do? Will you fight with us, or continue looking for whoever turned your niece into a ve by yourself? If you join us, the alliance will surely lend you their help,¡± I said.


    ¡°If I said that I will still move on my own?¡± Derek asked again.


    ¡°Ask Albert. Whatever the case, if you¡¯re honestly saying that you will help us, he will ask for the other kings to lend you their help whether you still want to move on your own or not. We¡¯re thinking of destroying the cult, and another master level mage in our rank would be great.¡±


    Since he¡¯s also a master level wind mage, maybe Albert will ask him to ask some guidance from Patricia to get stronger before he decide to move on his own.


    ¡°By the way, how old are you?¡± I asked.


    ¡°72.¡±


    Alright, he¡¯s old. But still younger than Patricia. In fact, he¡¯s closer in age with Patricia¡¯s granddaughter.


    ¡°I¡¯m thinking of staying here for a while longer. Who knows if they have someone toe here to check this ce regrly outside the schedule for the supply toe? These summoners will be my hostages if that¡¯s the case. If I could kill or capture theing summoners. What about you?¡± I asked Derek.


    ¡°...I¡¯ll stay here for now. There are still many things I need to think.¡±


    He then used wind magic to clear out a spot and grabbed a chair he found and sat on it. That must be one strong chair to be able to endure Andro¡¯s breath attack.


    Derek must be thinking of what he should do next. Should he ask for the alliance¡¯s help or not. But I think the answer is obvious.


    If he has no intention to join us, there¡¯s a chance that he will be our enemy. So, I might need to kill him before that happen.


    Now, let¡¯s take some time to rest.


    ¡°Sonia, ask Albert if he¡¯s going to interrogate the Archbishop first ore here right away. And only return here after one hour no matter what his reply is unless there¡¯s an emergency.¡±


    Sonia has appeared for some time already and is looking around. I just told her to ask Albert something.


    ¡°What if I want to look around here for a while longer?¡± she asked.


    ¡°Then you can return here right away. Though you just need to tell me Albert¡¯s reply after one hour,¡± I said.


    ¡°Are you tired?¡±


    ¡°Not really. I just feel more rxed since I¡¯m no longer need to hide I have been on edge for a while so I need to rx for a little bit,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay then.¡±


    Sonia then disappeared.


    There¡¯s really nothing we can do here. Everything is destroyed. And the summoners are still fainted.


    I rxed for one hour and Sonia then returned back.


    ¡°Albert wille here first. As for the Archbishop, you have done too much on his body. He¡¯s still unconscious. Also, Ka said that she wanted toe as well,¡± Sonia said.


    With his body like that, he might be ina for a while. I guess Albert can ask him at ater date.


    I opened a portal to Albert¡¯s location and he entered it together with Mustache. I also opened another portal for Ka to enter.


    ¡°Is it safe here?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°For at most the next twenty three hour, we¡¯ll be safe. It might be sooner than that though,¡± I said.


    ¡°I didn¡¯t ask for just that. I want to know if monsters will approach this ce or not,¡± she said.


    ¡°Oh, right. I guess that¡¯s why you¡¯re here. Thanks for that,¡± I said.


    Ka then sighed, and then used earth magic to create a building with a jail to imprison the three summoners. She also created chairs and table for us.


    But Albert now is walking toward Derek instead together with his bodyguard.


    ¡°So, what will you do now?¡± Albert asked Derek.


    ¡°...I have been thinking for the past hour and the answer is always the same. What would happen if I¡¯m still with the cult and Roy never noticed me. You can see the answer by looking at the surrounding area. I will join you guys after I¡¯m done with the ve trader. Will you help me?¡±


    ¡°Tatrama is a country where very is illegal. I promise you our help within Tatrama¡¯s territory. I can ask for the other kingdoms for it as well. I¡¯ll get Roy to bring you to meet them allter,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°That¡¯s good. I promise you that I will help you to destroy the cult in exchange,¡± Derek said.


    Nice. With this, we have two master level wind mages. Patricia and Derek. Though they both are still weaker than Ang who is still at expert level.


    I wonder when Ang can reach master level? I hope she can reach that level before we face the Evil God.

 Chapter 714

    Chapter 714: Torture First Question Later


    Albert finished talking with Derek, and then the two of theme over here. They entered the ce that Ka had just finished building and Albert took a seat with Mustache standing behind him. I also took a seat on the Blobbysofa with Ka. While Derek still hesitant to be so casual in front of a king. That¡¯smon to everyone. I¡¯m just the weird one.


    ¡°Want me to wake them up now?¡± I asked Albert.


    ¡°Not yet. Have you checked their possession?¡±


    Albert asked me whether I have checked what the three summoners had in their possession or not. Obviously I have.


    ¡°The three of them don¡¯t have anything that seem to be important. Did you seriously ask me if I have checked their possession? I have even checked the inside of their body. They need to stop consuming alcohol,¡± I said.


    ¡°I thought that they would have something like messages or a map of where their transfer point was located. That way, we can figure out in which country they are hiding. And what about the cathedral?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°No one is there. Everyone has died. So there¡¯s no need for me to stay behind,¡± I said.


    .....


    ¡°But if someone set that ce as a transfer point, they might be able to go there using portal. What if this is not the only ce in Monsters World where the cult built their base?¡±


    ...Ah!


    Right, I forgot. There might be more than one base of the cult in this world. And they might use the cathedral in that vige as transfer point.


    ¡°I¡¯ll get Sara and some agents to stay there. I will also ask some werewolves trained by agents toe as well. See you in a bit. Oh, Victoria, protect Albert with Ka. I¡¯ll get Ray to stay here as well,¡± I said.


    Even if Albert said that we can trust Derek, that doesn¡¯t mean that I can just leave the two of them together. Though Mustache is there as well, having Ka and Victoria with them is safer.


    Mustache is specialized in protecting Albert. But hecks experience in fighting monsters. And this is Monsters World.


    Having created so much ruckus in this ce should have got many monsters nearby alerted. They mighte. Or not since it was Andro who came here. They should be afraid ofing here. But some monsters mighte instead to try and challenge Andro. That might be possible.


    That¡¯s why I need them to protect Albert who is the weakest here but the second most important person after me. Or maybe third after Ka. Four after Ka and Victoria.


    I called Sonia and told her to call Sara and some agents, and also to contact the werewolves who have been trained by the agents. They didn¡¯t participate in the fight so they¡¯re not tired.


    I used portal again to return back to the cathedral and then bring the agents and three werewolves over.


    ¡°I can¡¯t believe I will still continue doing this shit after bing a noble,¡± Sarained.


    ¡°I even used the king for my own purpose. And you¡¯re just a noble. Not royalty,¡± I said.


    I then exined Sara about this ce and what I¡¯ve found before returning back to Monsters World. There were really some monstersing. But Derek alone could take care of them all.


    Seems like Derek is a good man as well. Maybe he will truly be one of us after he finished taking care of the ve trader.


    As for Albert, he and Ka were checking the body of the three summoners in case there¡¯s something I missed.


    ¡°This guy on the left, he seems to be a fire mage as well. There are traces of burns on his clothes. He might have tried to use fire magic before you captured him,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Yeah, I know. Those burns were too close to the skin but his skin was fine,¡± I said.


    I already know about that so he doesn¡¯t need toe exin it to me more.


    ¡°This guy, there¡¯s nothing unusual about him. As for thest man-¡±


    ¡°Woman,¡± I interfered.


    ¡°...What?¡±


    ¡°She¡¯s wearing a skirt. I don¡¯t know why you think she¡¯s a man just because her face is disfigured and her chest is t. And I can see clearer than you,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Okay. So, what do you think of her?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°We can only know more about any of them after we interrogate them. Should I wake them up now or do I need to listen to your observation?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...Just wake them up. I was trying to show off my detective skill but I failed. As expected, I shouldn¡¯t have done that in front of you,¡± Albert said.


    So he¡¯s ying around at a time like this? He must be quite stressed because of his job.


    As for the three summoners, I just kicked their head lightly and they woke up.


    Since they have the cors on, they won¡¯t be able to escape using portal.


    ¡°Nice to meet you three. I¡¯m the King of Tatrama, Albert. Now, let me ask you some question,¡± Albert said in a threatening manner.


    Or more like it was Mustache behind him showing a bit of killing intent. I guess being experienced in handling human enemies made him scary to other humans.


    ¡°You think we¡¯ll tell you anything? I¡¯ll just bite off my tongue so I won¡¯t answer your questions!¡± one of the summoner shouted.


    ¡°I will help you with breaking your hands and fingers so you won¡¯t be able to write the answer as well. Do you want it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Do it then! I¡¯m not afraid!¡±


    Well, that¡¯s my invitation.


    I transformed some Blobbies into a club and grabbed the man¡¯s arm before activating my killing intent to the fullest. Which make even Ka¡¯s body shook. Sorry about that.


    Then without hesitation, I smashed the club on his arm with my Aura. Not only did his right arm is broken, it was squashed to the point of no repair.


    ¡°AAAAAARGH!¡±


    ¡°Well, seems like you won¡¯t be using this arm anymore. I¡¯m a doctor so I know that well. I¡¯ll amputate you for free,¡± I said as I pulled his broken arm away from his body.


    Blood pouring out of the ripped arm like a water fall. And the pieces of his bones areing out as well.


    ¡°Sorry. Seems like my healer girlfriend was too shocked. I¡¯ll operate your arm. But I won¡¯t use anesthetic. It will be the most painful experience in your life that you have to endure if you want to live. But since you don¡¯t want to live, it should be fine, right?¡±


    I used Blobbyneedle and Blobbythread to suture the wound. It¡¯s thicker than normal so it will hurt. A lot.


    And I didn¡¯t forget to remove the pieces of bones which were still inside his body. Forcefully. With my fingers. I inserted my fingers into the open wound and grabbed to bone pieces one by one.


    ¡°AAARGH! AAH! AAAAAAH!!¡±


    A scream from a cult member. A music to my ear. I¡¯m so evil.


    When I was about to pierce the Blobbyneedle, he finally gave up.


    ¡°AAH! ENOUGH! I WILL TALK! PLEASE STOP IT!¡±


    ¡°You know, the cult will be happier if you die. If you didn¡¯t give up now you have a chance to help the cult by not leaking any secret. You know that, right?¡±


    ¡°I KNOW! I KNOW! Huff... huff... I just... never thought... that it would be... this painful...¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s why it¡¯s called torture. Making it as pain as possible without killing the target for questioning. Since I¡¯m done with you, I¡¯ll go to the others now,¡± I said as I stood up and approached the other man.


    ¡°I¡¯ll speak! I¡¯ll tell you everything I know!¡± the other man gave up already before I do anything to him.


    ¡°Me too! I will tell you everything!¡± the disfigured woman also gave up.


    ¡°How can I trust you when I haven¡¯t done anything to you? What if I make it fair for you two as well. I¡¯ll rip your arms apart so you can feel the same pain as well,¡± I said.


    ¡°No need! Please, no pain!¡±


    ¡°I promise I will tell everything truthfully!¡±


    At this time, Albert stopped me. I guess they speak the truth.


    ¡°If only you¡¯re always with me during every interrogation. It would be much easier and I can finish every interrogation sooner. Though I might see something unpleasant in exchange. Just stop. I still want to digest my dinner,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Well, okay. The King has spoken! Now, answer all the question asked!¡±


    Ka also has calmed down and started healing the man with the missing arm. And Derek was too scared to look at me. Though I don¡¯t think what I did was too excessive.


    ¡°Just going to tell you an information before we proceed with the interrogation. That man over there, is responsible in bringing the kingdoms together to fight against the Evil Cult where you guys are belong to. He¡¯s a madman who can¡¯t be stopped even if all the kings are together. So, before he got any crazier than that, I hope everyone is willing to answer everything honestly,¡± Albert said to the three summoners.


    Meanwhile, after healing the man without an arm, Ka stood by my side and hold my hand tightly.


    ¡°Sorry about that,¡± I said as we just stood there in silence as we listen to Albert¡¯s interrogation.


    Seriously, this is no ce for any romantic event to happen.

 Chapter 715

    Chapter 715: The Three Summoners of the Cult


    In fear, the three people answered all of Albert¡¯s question honestly. Albert even asked them one by one to see if there¡¯s any differences between the three¡¯s information. But so far, none of them spoke lies. Albert¡¯s ability to detect lies have never been activated.


    The three people have three separate transfer points. Not in the same ce. Which makes sense.


    The three had been in this world ever since the base was created. Around two years ago. I never knew that.


    Well, it¡¯s natural since I rarely venture out around this area.


    The man with the missing arm, thanks to me, had a transfer point in a small vige in Arturo. They built a church there. Not a cathedral.


    Seems like everyone in the vige is believer of the cult. That¡¯s why building a church or cathedral is easy.


    But what about travelers? If they somehow entered that vige, won¡¯t they know that something was weird? Or maybe they got killed right away.


    .....


    The other man has a transfer point also in a vige with a church. But this one is in Consenza¡¯s territory. Maybe that ce was where some artificial master level mages gathered before they raided the Empire. With most of them have been killed by my group.


    The summoner doesn¡¯t know anything about that raid in Consenza. He had been in this ce for quite a while and he never cared about anything that happen on Earth.


    Both he and the man with missing arm loved it here because they were being treated like a king. No women can refuse them and master level mages have to protect them. So they thought that they are in the safest ce possible. Even though this is Monsters World with monsters several times stronger than the same species of monsters on Earth, they feel safe because they have master level mages protecting them.


    As for the disfigured woman, she¡¯s different. She¡¯s here because of hatred.


    The transfer point on Earth that she had is also somewhere near Varadis. But it¡¯s not a vige. And even if it¡¯s called as city, it is famous as awless city. And the country that ce belong to was not Varadis. Just another small country like Rygis.


    The country was led by the Barbarian King where power rules everything. Though even with that much power, they were not able to invade Varadis at all. So they built their own kingdom since even Varadis were not able to defeat them easily unless they prepared for heavy casualties.


    ¡°Whoa, there¡¯s such ce on Earth?¡± I asked curiously.


    ¡°Yeah. There are fewwless cities and countries much like that where the king is the strongest person. Those ces would be thest one we investigate because the can¡¯t trust anyone. Even if we send spies to those ces, the citizens of those ces would kill the spies for no reason at all. We thought that if it¡¯s you, Ang, or Ka, it would be easy to take control of those countries. But we decided against that idea. It¡¯s best for us to send our own troops. But we¡¯re not that strong yet,¡± Albert exined.


    I guess the kings have talked about it together. And since it¡¯s not an important information for me, they decided to not tell me about it.


    Well, that might be a good idea. Had I know about such things, I would go out there and be the king easily.


    ¡°But those ces should be where the cult are most likely to hide, right? We even had a confirmation from her,¡± I said.


    ¡°The risk is too high. And if someone like you juste and terrorize those ces, the cowards inside that country would try to escape and they will enter our territory. And they will end up terrorizing our citizens. That¡¯s why we make sure to not make any move while watching their movement. Only the spies who had been there for a long time were still alive. We haven¡¯t send any new spies there for over thest five years. And just sending reports back to us would be life-threatening,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Well, that makes sense. If you need any help, I think anyone in our group would love the chance. Especially Ang and Kron,¡± I said.


    ¡°We¡¯ll think about it. We have been dying the attack so much but I guess that was a bad idea,¡± Albert said before he returns to interrogate the disfigured woman.


    The woman doesn¡¯t know much as she had been in this world for so long. She doesn¡¯t care about Earth unless they send a report about something important that is happening on Earth. But the reports will be sent through the summoners who were responsible for delivering the supplies.


    Albert was also curious about how they ended up joining the cult. The two men only wants to enjoy lives. And they got it.


    As for the woman, it seems that she was quite beautiful in the past and she was proud of it. But one day, a royal prince of Varadis who was entranced by her beauty didn¡¯t like how she refused his offer to be his mistress. So he pour acid into her face.


    Being ugly, she couldn¡¯t do anything but try to survive every day. And after a few days, a cult member approached her and asked her to join him. She joined, improve her level on her ice element to expert level, but couldn¡¯t forget about who made her suffer. The cult promised her to help her with her revenge. Thanks to her usefulness in summoning element and opening a portal, she stayed here until a reporte about the man who turned her life around. But the report never came.


    So she just wait here. That¡¯s all she did.


    ¡°Whoa, a royalty? Albert, was it you?¡± I asked Albert.


    ¡°If it was me, I would be dead already killed by my wife. And you¡¯re the one who should know who did it. He was the prince of Varadis. Old man Henry¡¯s son who joined the cult so he could take over the kingdom from him,¡± Albert exined.


    ¡°Oh, that means he¡¯s already dead. I killed him. Well, you have no more reason to be with the cult now. But Albert will decide on what kind of punishment you will receiveter. If it¡¯s execution, don¡¯t worry. I¡¯ll make it painless,¡± I said.


    Hearing that I will help with the execution, the three summoners panicked. Even the woman whom I said that her target of revenge was killed by me seems to not care about that anymore even though that was her sole reason to join the cult.


    ¡°Depend on how useful they are, they will receive different punishment. Of course even if they say that they will betray the cult, I won¡¯t believe that no matter how true their words were. Anyway, you three know what we¡¯re nning to do, right?¡± Albert asked the three.


    The three shook their heads. They are too afraid to think calmly.


    ¡°It should have been obvious what we want. We want you to open a portal to the transfer point you are designated to. Write a false report that there¡¯s another attack by the werewolves and send them through portal. That¡¯s all we need from you,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°That¡¯s it?¡± the man with missing arm asked.


    ¡°Yes. Here are the paper you will deliver. Just write reports normally and deliver them. After a while, write another report saying that the base is protected just like before and deliver the letter as well. That¡¯s all we need for now,¡± Albert said as he gave the three several papers for them to write their reports on.


    Obviously, on those papers, there¡¯s a Blobby there. The Blobbies will disguise itself as the ck ink that was used to write the letter after the three finished writing. Covering the real letter written by ink.


    Just with that, and I will got three new transfer points. And we can go there anytime we want.


    ¡°Wait, before you write the letters, I need to ask you where your summons are first,¡± I asked.


    ¡°...Mine was out here roaming around in this world,¡± the man with a missing arm said.


    The two others also said the same. And Albert confirmed it that they didn¡¯t lie. So the three¡¯s transfer points are only to Earth.


    I also asked them if they have more than one summon, but they got confused since they thought that¡¯s impossible. Well, that¡¯s good.


    First, I removed the cor on the man with missing arm. And then he smiled and summoned his monster.


    ¡°I don¡¯t need portal to summon my monster!¡± he said.


    That¡¯smon sense. Portal was themon sense of the past, but nowadays, what he said ismon sense.


    And he summoned an Ice Giant. A gigantic monster covered with ice.


    Mustache and Ka move to protect Albert while Derek was still in shock. Not ready for what¡¯s happening in front of him.


    Well, this is Monsters World and he¡¯s a summoner. It¡¯s to be expected that their summoners have strong monsters. But it¡¯s still not strong enough.


    With just a sh of Victokatana, the Ice Giant was split in two and died. It was just barely moved its finger before it died.


    ¡°So, anyone else want to test me?¡± I asked the three summoners.


    This time, the summoners have truly given up.


    That¡¯s good. Now we have transfer points to their bases.

 Chapter 716

    Chapter 716: Preparing the Stage


    And now, we¡¯re about to get the summoners to send their report letter. Which will be a disguise so I can deliver a Blobby to their transfer point. That way, we can attack that ce anytime we want.


    What we¡¯re trying to do here is... preparing the stage where the summoners will act. Although they will just put the letter for the report into a small portal so they can deliver it, we need to make it look as if everything is normal. No sign of destruction at all.


    ¡°Yes. The room is big enough as it is. For the decorations, I don¡¯t think we need to put chandelier. The sofa will be ced here, and there¡¯s a table over there. This should be enough furniture for the set. Now it¡¯s time to paint the wall,¡± I said.


    We had Ka built a big room simr to the room where the three summoners stayed together. I remember it because I¡¯ve seen it every time we had raid.


    ¡°This feel like a movie set. But the act will just be delivering a letter. I think it¡¯s too much for that,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°But we don¡¯t know if they have master level mage in their side or not. Maybe someone with good eyesight as well. As for the one who will pretend to be the master level mage who protects the summoners, just Derek sitting on this chair is enough. They will think that the other master level mages are busy with the raid,¡± I said.


    ¡°But there¡¯s no raid at all. You think they will be tricked?¡± Victoria asked.


    .....


    ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter as long as the letters are delivered. We will make it as real as possible to not make them suspicious of the portal. And look at that guy happily painting the wall,¡± I said.


    The wall of the room that the summoners were staying were painted white. And so, after I told Ka to prepare the set, I return back to Cassau and bought white paint to paint the wall.


    And right now, the King of Tatrama is happily painting the wall while wearing ck overall. It was Victoria¡¯s idea to get him wore that. So she created Blobbies for us to wear when we¡¯re painting.


    ¡°Your Majesty! Let me do it! You shouldn¡¯t do something like painting the wall!¡±


    That was Mustache. As a loyal guard of the king, he obviously rejected the idea of his king painting the wall. But Albert is happily doing it.


    ¡°No. I want to do it myself. I have never tried to paint or do many things thatmoners do. Not like allmoners do this. But I like doing it,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°And that¡¯s why the paint is uneven. You¡¯re real bad at this, aren¡¯t you?¡± I said,


    ¡°Well, this is my first time. But is this not enough?¡±


    ¡°You can¡¯t just sweep the brush once and done with it! You need to sweep it twice or even more times so the paint will cover everything! Do it slowly now. We¡¯re not in a hurry. There should be more than twenty hours left until the next supplye,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay, I¡¯ll take it slow,¡± he said.


    It¡¯s not like that part of the wall is something that will be seen. The summoners will open a really small portal enough for their hands to enter. And it will only face one side of the wall.


    The wall that Albert is in charge of won¡¯t be seen. As for the rest, I can finish them long before Albert could finish painting even half of the wall.


    ¡°But no one wants to wait that long. I¡¯ll take care of the rest of the wall. You only need to paint that side,¡± I said as I picked the brush.


    I can hear the summoners and Derek are gossiping about Albert.


    ¡°Is that guy really a king?¡± the man with missing arm asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. But at least he had never done anything that mostmoners do. That¡¯s my observation of him,¡± the woman said.


    ¡°He said it himself. And first time I met him was in his pce. So he¡¯s a real king. I was promised to meet other kings as well soon. Well, as long as I can finish my objective, I will be happy to be his dog,¡± Derek said.


    ¡°I see... Wait, you! Why did you betray us?!¡± the man with missing arm asked.


    ¡°For my objective. I have a goal that I can achieve by getting their help,¡± Derek said.


    ¡°You!!!¡±


    ¡°Enough. If you want to live, we can only obey their order. The king isn¡¯t a big problem. But that man called Roy is the biggest problem. He must be the Aura user that the higher ups warned us about.¡±


    The one who said that was the man with... nothing special in his look. What should I call him? He¡¯s just like any average people you see on the street.


    Since he rarely talk unless he was asked, let¡¯s call him the quiet summoner.


    ¡°He¡¯s an Aura user?! That... actually make sense. No wonder the higher ups told us to report if we find anything rted to Aura user. I thought that was just some fairy tale,¡± the woman said.


    ¡°Not just that. He was also a summoner with multiple contracted monsters for some reason,¡± Derek said.


    Seems like he was so bored so he started talking with the summoners. And since he¡¯s not that close with Ka, Mustache, and I, he won¡¯t approach us.


    ¡°Multiple contracted monsters?! That¡¯s the dream of all summoners! How did he do that?!¡± the man with missing arm asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. And the fact that he could enter this world and talking casually with a king, they must have many other summoners with multiple contracted monsters. And they can also easilye to this world and find any monsters they want for themselves. From the look of it, you guys never had a chance against them,¡± Derek said.


    ¡°That might not necessarily be true. We have a lot of master level mages back on Earth. Even if you join their side, it was just one more master level mage. Sure, I will help them give a false report. And I might dieter after doing that. But at least the others from above are much stronger than you. We can still defeat them. Let¡¯s think of a n,¡± the quiet summoner said in whisper.


    Previously, when the man with a missing arm got the cor removed, he summoned an Ice Giant to attack me. I released him not to send a false report at that time. I did it purposely on him so that he would summon his monster which he seems to be confident about. And I killed that monster right away when he summoned it.


    I thought that he would give up after seeing that. But I still put the cor back on his neck again so he won¡¯t do anything stupid.


    In the end, he¡¯s still trying to fight back it seems. Along with the other two summoners.


    The three summoners were whispering about their n to report everything to the higher ups. They don¡¯t care if they die on the way. Just one report. That¡¯s all they need to do.


    ¡°...Hey,¡± Derek called the three.


    ¡°Don¡¯t get close to us. You¡¯re a traitor,¡± the man with a missing arm said.


    ¡°No. You¡¯re an idiot to think of a n close to me. even if you¡¯re whispering, I could still hear you. I¡¯m a wind mage,¡± Derek said.


    ¡°But you still can¡¯t listen to our n,¡± the womanined.


    Are they stupid? They are not three summoners but three idiots? Maybe three idiot summoners.


    ¡°I want to say that the Aura user¡¯s hearing is so good that even if you three are whispering, he could still hear you. Why else would they leave you be without a care and just paint the wall?¡±


    ¡°...What?¡± the three were confused.


    ¡°Sigh... I¡¯ll show you.¡±


    Derek then approached the three and started whispering like they did.


    ¡°If you can hear me, imitate dog¡¯s sound twice and cat¡¯s once,¡± Derek said.


    I stopped painting, turned toward the four of them, and did as he said.


    ¡°Woof! Woof! Meow!¡±


    ¡°Holy shit, Roy! What the heck was that?!¡± Albert was shocked to hear that I suddenly barked and meowed.


    ¡°They are checking if I could listen to them whispering or not. And I showed them that I could,¡± I said.


    ¡°Oh, I see.¡±


    Albert looked at the summoners who are too shocked that I followed what Derek was saying.


    Yup. They gave up. They no longer dare to give a real report to the cult.


    Why don¡¯t they just fight back and let me kill them instead? That will be more helpful to the cult than do what I said to them.


    I guess pain is much more threatening than death.


    When people were talking about death, they are thinking about painless and peaceful death. But I showed them pain. Real pain. And they don¡¯t want that.


    Well, let¡¯s continue painting.


    A few minutester, I¡¯m done with my three sides. As for Albert...


    ¡°I¡¯m out of paint,¡± he said.


    ¡°And you couldn¡¯t even paint half of the wall! How did you make just a part of the wall so thick with white paint! Enough, I¡¯ll do it myself!¡±


    Yup. The king can¡¯t do any chores. Is being a king means that you can only ask for people to do things for you? Yes.


    ¡°At least I had fun painting.¡±


    ¡°FUCK YOU!¡±

 Chapter 717

    Chapter 717: Sending False Reports


    The stage is set. We¡¯ve finished with the appearance of the room where the three summoners supposed to stay.


    Not only we have prepared seats for the three summoners, there¡¯s also another seat for Derek to act as the master level mage protecting them. While we can say that the other master level mages are fighting the monsters.


    The reports have been written. And I have attached a Blobby on each of the letter to be delivered.


    As a summoner myself, I have asked them of how long they can open a portal. It was around the same length I can open back when I was just intermediate level summoner. Not long enough. But good for a small portal just for sending reports.


    Though the difference between me and the three is that while the three only able to open up a portal for a certain time for a normal size portal, I can do the same but with multiple portals opened.


    The man with a missing arm had no more contracted monster since I killed it. He can make a contract easily if there¡¯s any monster nearby. But since this is not Earth, he can only do it in a simr way that tamer made a contract with monster. He won¡¯t be able to summon and make a contract with a monster instantly.


    Knowing that fact, I told the other two that if they summon their contracted monsters here right as soon as I removed their cors, I will kill their monsters no matter how strong they are.


    .....


    After everything is ready, and the three summoners truly had no other choice but to do as I say, we¡¯re ready to remove their cors.


    With the letter in their hand, Ka, Derek, and Mustache removed their cors using Blobbykeys.


    Actually, I wanted to be the one removing their cors. But they¡¯re way too afraid of me knowing that I can easily break their neck. So I had the three to do it for me while I¡¯m protecting Albert. Mustache won¡¯t move a single step unless he knows that Albert is safe.


    Now that the three had their cors removed. The man with a missing arm also had some Blobbies transformed into his arm so no one would be suspicious. We just need to cover it with long sleeves. And the ck color can be said that he¡¯s wearing glove. Let¡¯s say that he¡¯s practicing cooking and that¡¯s a mitten since it¡¯s not cold here. Only if asked.


    ¡°Albert and Mustache, go into hiding. Both Ka and I can act like we¡¯re messengers to inform the situation to them,¡± I said before getting the three send the reports.


    ¡°As for you three, know that any suspicious move will get you some torture. Albert has said that he will let you live if you do as we say. Even after you won¡¯t be needed anymore after this job you need to do. So you can be at ease,¡± I said.


    ¡°Really? And you won¡¯t kill us?¡± the disfigured woman asked me instead of Albert.


    ¡°I never make that promise. But I can promise you that if you won¡¯t do what we told you to do, I will give you pain.¡±


    I threatened the three of them.


    Seeing their scared expression, I think there¡¯s no way they won¡¯t do as we said.


    Now that everything is ready, I told them that they are free to send the reports like how they usually did.


    Good thing that they only send report if there¡¯s anything important. No daily reports or monthly reports. Just write reports whenever something happened.


    I also asked the three of them and Derek as well if there are any other situation where reports were sent. But they said that they don¡¯t know. And after a few weeks staying here myself, I know that is right. There were no report at all.


    But it¡¯s probably the job of the summoners responsible for supplies and those transporting people. They used portal more often than these three.


    Finally, the three send their reports. There were nothing suspicious about. At least when I looked at them from my point of view.


    ¡°Good. Now we have transfer points at those three locations,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°In thirty minutes, you three will send another reports saying that everything is fine. After that, I¡¯ll let Albert decide what to do with you,¡± I said.


    We put the cors back on them so they won¡¯t do anything stupid. And after that, Albert, Mustache, Ka, and I left the building. Leaving Derek behind to watch over the summoners.


    ¡°Should we attack now?¡± I asked Albert.


    ¡°I¡¯ll call Sonia first,¡± he said.


    We¡¯re discussing whether we should attack the transfer points of the summoners who transported people tonight. It was done a few hours ago.


    Thanks to the schedule I got from them before, we got the time and the location of the transfer points. And many of the troops from the four kingdoms will attack those hiding ces of the cult. With the summoners as their main target.


    Hearing that those summoners are too weak and unable to open a portal for so long, I don¡¯t think that they can open another portal as soon as they are attacked. But we still need to make sure that they won¡¯t be able to escape.


    Sonia appeared and Albert told her to spread the news that they can finally attack those ces after thirty minutes after receiving the message.


    While I was staying in this world for a while, I looked at all the faces of the summoners. And I even sculpted the face of the summoners who transported people using the Blobbies, and then send them to everyone preparing to attack the transfer points.


    With this, they can focus on the summoners first. The only obstacle is the master level mage protecting them. But the army¡¯s expert level mages should be able to handle them for a bit. And I will send Ang and the others to whoever needed it.


    Thirty minutester, we removed the cors on the three summoners again and have them deliver the second report saying that everything is fine.


    ¡°Albert, I¡¯ll take you back. Will you bring Derek and those three summoners?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Just Derek. As for those summoners, let them stay in the Monster Vige. We might need more things for them to do so we can¡¯t bring them to Earth yet,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Okay. Ka, what about you?¡± I asked Ka as I opened a portal for Albert, Mustache, and Derek to returns.


    ¡°I¡¯ll stay with you. So when they ask for reinforcement, you can ask me immediately. Who else did you ask to be reinforcement?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°Only Ang, Jewel, Candy, and Kron. But the others mighte,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. I¡¯ll just stay with you,¡± she said.


    And so, after transporting Albert and the others, I brought the summoners to Monsters Vige where they meet the werewolves responsible for the raids.


    Shelia is resting right now. Seems like she¡¯s too tired. But that fight against the fire mage should help her improve even further.


    I told the werewolves to watch over the three summoners who have been wearing their cors again.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, they won¡¯t attack you. But if you want, I can remove your cor temporarily so you can summon your familiar if you¡¯re too scared,¡± I said.


    ¡°¡±Yes, please!!¡±¡± the quiet summoner and the disfigured woman said together.


    And so I removed their cors temporarily for them to summon their monster. As for the man with a missing arm, he doesn¡¯t have any monster to summon.


    The quiet summoner summoned a powerful looking monster. From what Victoria told me, that monster seems to be a minotaur. That look strong. But that minotaur look afraid of the werewolves.


    ¡°Beef meat!¡±


    That¡¯s what the werewolves shouted as soon as they saw the minotaur.


    As for the disfigured woman, she summoned a two-headed snake. This one doesn¡¯t seem to be afraid of the werewolves. But the disfigured woman ordered it to not attack the werewolves and only focused on protecting her.


    As for the werewolves, they are not interested in the snake. I think they prefer beef than snake meat. I also feel the same.


    ¡°Hey, don¡¯t kill their monsters. They¡¯re here as hostages,¡± I said as I put the cors back on them again.


    ¡°Um... may I get a monster to make a contract with? Staying here without protection is really scary,¡± the man with a missing arm said.


    ¡°No. Just so you know that they thought of me as their king even though I only made a contract with one of them. It¡¯s because I was the one who killed their previous king. So don¡¯t even think of making a contract with a werewolf or I will kill you,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Okay.¡±


    Then I looked at Ka and told her that we¡¯re returning back to the destroyed base.


    ¡°Ka, we will return back to the destroyed base in case a summoner is trying to retreat back to this world. It¡¯s possible since they will be attacked. What do you think?¡± I asked her opinion since she¡¯s the smarter one.


    ¡°Do you remember the ce they transported from? Let¡¯s stay near that ce. It will be easier for us to move. And in case you¡¯re too busy opening portals, I can protect you,¡± she said.


    Wow! She¡¯s trying to protect me. What an amazing girlfriend I have!


    I guess I can leave those iing summoners to her then. She can also still grow stronger since the enemies other than the summoners who wille are most likely to be master level mage.

 Chapter 718

    Chapter 718: My Job is to Send Reinforcement


    I waited for further order from Sonia. Surely, if there¡¯s any problem, I will be called.


    But so far, there doesn¡¯t seem to be any trouble at all. I can¡¯t tell because they are on Earth and we¡¯re literally in another world. Or we could say that we¡¯re on the Moon.


    Does the cult still think that the moon and the Monsters World are two different worlds? Maybe. I heard that they are still trying to create something to travel to the Moon from Earth.


    If they knew about it, that means all the people we¡¯re fighting is their full force that they can muster in those areas. But if they don¡¯t know about it, that means we still haven¡¯t fought their full force yet since they spare some of them to the creation of the transportation device.


    I don¡¯t know which one is better. But I hope that in the experiment to go to the Moon, they have to sacrifice many people. That will reduce their number. I hope it won¡¯t be the innocents


    Soon enough, Sonia appears in front of us.


    ¡°Roy, point three had some trouble.¡±


    .....


    We made the designated ces for the summoners from the cult to open portals to transport people called as point.


    There are several ces and we just call it point one, point two, and so forth. And I made sure that I remember which ce is what point.


    Point three is somewhere near both Tatrama and Rygis. I think I performed a circus there right after we left Rygis. I didn¡¯t see anything suspicious back then. I guess they are good at hiding.


    I opened a portal to Cassau and told those who are ready to enter the portal. And everyonees.


    Ang, Jewel, Candy, Kron, and even Randy, Veronica, and Wendy who were supposed to be doing some mission entered the portal. I guess it is much easier for them to leave from my side instead of waiting in Cassau. I think just Lina and her monsters, Sunny and Elsie, can protect our home. Sophie is strong as well even if she doesn¡¯t like fighting. And Hannah, I heard that she¡¯s progressing well in her magic.


    ¡°Ang, you go,¡± I said as I opened a portal to Point Three.


    Without hesitation, Ang entered the portal. After seeing her entered the portal, I checked the situation for a bit before closing the portal.


    I heard some big magic was used. I hope they¡¯re all okay. Not the cult members obviously.


    ¡°Okay, while waiting, line up in a straight line so I can just send the next person right away after I opened a portal,¡± I said.


    Ka then built some chairs from earth and they all sat there. With Kron obviously wanted to be the first after Ang.


    ¡°By the way, what about your mission? Randy first,¡± I asked.


    ¡°With something as big as what we¡¯re about to do, I don¡¯t think there¡¯s any point in investigating more. But I have learned a lot about them. I¡¯ll tell Albertter,¡± he said.


    ¡°What about Veronica and Wendy?¡± this time, I asked the twodies.


    ¡°It was worse than expected. But we found many things. We¡¯ll inform His Majesty after this before returning back to the mission,¡± Wendy said.


    ¡°Well... what¡¯s wrong, Veronica? You¡¯re not going to join them?¡±


    I looked at Veronica who still didn¡¯t sat and just stand there. There must be something going on in her head.


    ¡°Roy, I heard that you captured three summoners. Where are they?¡± she asked.


    ¡°The Monsters Vige. I had the werewolves look after them. Do you know someone among them?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Maybe. I¡¯m looking for a summoner or tamer who made a contract with an Ice Giant. During my mission, I heard that an Ice Giant was purposely called and destroyed some viges just so many vigers will move. The cult would then appear and act as the vigers¡¯ savior by chasing out the Ice Giant. I thought that the Ice Giant might be a contracted monster. Either by a tamer or a summoner.¡±


    Veronica then exined what she found. Wendy also helped with the exnation.


    Seems like the Ice Giant attacked viges on purpose so the cult will gain more believer. And those believers will then be asked to do something simple like scouting summoners or tamers from school during Awakening Ceremony where kids at the age of fifteen awakened their elements.


    Randy then added that he heard simr stores during his mission. But not just with an Ice Giant. Sometimes, it was other monsters including minotaur and two-headed snake.


    ¡°...¡±


    ¡°What is it, Roy? You know something?¡± Veronica asked.


    I didn¡¯t answer. But Ka did it for me.


    ¡°Yes, we know them. In fact, the three summoners we caught are probably the ones you¡¯re talking about. A woman with disfigured face who made a contract with a two-headed snake monster, a man who made a contract with a minotaur, and another man with Ice Giant as his familiar. Or at least he used to be,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°What happened?¡± Veronica asked.


    ¡°Well...¡± Ka looked at me for a second before she continued exining, ¡°Roy ripped his arm from his body and then he killed the Ice Giant with one sh. That¡¯s what happened,¡± Ka said.


    Then everyone looked at me like I¡¯m a crazy guy. They are right though.


    ¡°Well, if he already received his punishment, I¡¯ll think about itter. When will we attack the ce the ces where those three summoners you captured have contact with?¡± Veronica said as she sat on one of the chair.


    ¡°After a few hours. Those ces might be much more difficult to raid than the ces we¡¯re attacking now,¡± Ka said.


    Soon after, Sonia appears again and tells us that there¡¯s another trouble in another location. So I send Kron there.


    ¡°So, any news while I¡¯m staying here?¡± I asked.


    ¡°From what I heard, King Henry from Varadis is focusing more on his magic while his heir took more jobs. Maybe he¡¯s thinking of improving his magic so he can have a long life,¡± Candy said.


    ¡°Oh, that¡¯s good. His son doesn¡¯t seem to have the right mindset to be a king. He still has a lot to learn. And if old man Henry can even reach expert level, that would be great,¡± I said.


    ¡°He has. He reached expert level a few days ago. And he¡¯s asking Patricia if there¡¯s any shortcut to reach master level,¡± Candy said.


    So he only focused on improving his magic level and gain longevity. That might be a good idea. Maybe Albert or Lynn will do that in the future as well. As for Fabio, he¡¯s already an expert level mage.


    Though I hope that once he reached master level, he would try to improve his magic. That way, he won¡¯t be easily defeated by expert level mages.


    I don¡¯t know if quickly increasing your level and stabilize itter is better, or stabilize your magic as best as possible before trying to increase your level is better. We need more research on that.


    Though we don¡¯t have the time for that yet. We¡¯re at war against the cult. We need to be as strong as possible. So we decided to let individuals decide for themselves what they want to do.


    And Sonia appears again to tell me the next location. So I sent Jewel who is ready to fight.


    But soon after, I sensed familiar magic. A portal is opening.


    ¡°Someone ising from over there!¡± I shouted.


    The others quickly prepare themselves for a fight. And seeing that everyone is ready to fight, Ka rxed and just stay by my side. She knows that the others will take care of whoevering.


    The portal opened, and Wendy quickly send a Wind sh to the portal. The man right in front of the opened portal, from my point of view, who seems to be the summoner, died right away.


    The portal closed as I see someone I assume to be a master level mage about to attack us. But he¡¯s toote as the portal is closed already.


    ¡°That¡¯s where I sent Kron before. There¡¯s no need to send anyone there since Sonia hasn¡¯t informed us about it,¡± I said.


    There should only be four ce where summoners go to after bringing people from this world tonight. But we also attacked other ces listed on the schedule even though it¡¯s not the time for them to bring people. And seems like we are right to do it since I sent Kron to the ce where the cult¡¯s summoners shouldn¡¯te from tonight.


    The cult¡¯s influence is too big. Poor vigers believed them to be their savior. And rich people from big city believed that the cult can bring profit to them.


    If only their goal is not world destruction, they might be a decent religion.


    But that¡¯s not the case. And we¡¯re at war with them.


    There will only be one survivor. Either the cult win and they destroy the world, or we win and continue with more troublesome matters. After all, the aftermath of a war is usually much harder to handle than the war itself.


    But those are the trouble for the kings. I¡¯m just the Werewolf King. Let the werewolves have some good meal and a chance to fight, and they will be happy.


    ...Now that I think about it, that¡¯s actually what other kings do. Letting their people bring meals to the table. I guess I¡¯m not that different from other kings. It¡¯s just that the werewolves are much easier to handle than humans.

 Chapter 719

    Chapter 719: Delicious Steak


    After a while, I have sent everyone here to somewhere they needed to help. Leaving only Ka and I behind.


    Once in a while, summoners would open a portal. But Ka defeated them before they could do anything.


    And I still stay here until I heard that everything is really over. But Sonia hasn¡¯t reported that to me yet.


    Rather than that, she asked for more reinforcement. Which we couldn¡¯t handle at the time. So I asked her to ask if there¡¯s anyone free who can help. Including those who have been sent to another ce.


    I have transported Ang a few times already. From one spot to another. And the others have experienced being transported to help at least two times already. Seems like those ces have strong mages guarding it. Stronger than the enemies we have encountered so far.


    I even needed to bring back someone whom I have brought to another ces a few times. There were some hidden experts over there that the soldiers couldn¡¯t handle.


    Maybe because the summoners have summoned their monster to help them. Since we have someone with an Ice Giant, someone with a minotaur, and someone with a two-headed snake, I think t¡¯s natural for those summoners to have powerful monster as well.


    .....


    The problem other than the master level mage is the summoners themselves. Even if the summoners have been killed, if their monster have been summoned before they died, it will still cause some trouble.


    And there might be some problem withpatibility. Like we can¡¯t send mages with ipatible element to fight against the master level mage or the contracted monster with elemental resistance to a certain element.


    Though we don¡¯t have much trouble with it.


    Oh, someone is opening a portal here again. But a giant fist punched through the portal and blow the summoner away. He didn¡¯t die yet and the portal is still open.


    But from the gigantic fist that entered the portal, spikese out of it and pierced through anything nearby. Good thing our allies are not anywhere near the portal.


    ¡°Roy, Randy can¡¯t handle everything on his own. He needed help. Kron, Veronica, and Candy should be free since they are letting the soldiers fight at the moment,¡± Sonia said after she appeared in front of me.


    ¡°I¡¯ll send Kron. Randy is a lightning and earth expert level mage, right? Then Kron who is a wind and ice element expert level mage should be able to cover his weaknesses. If they need fire, contact meter and I¡¯ll send Candy,¡± I said.


    ¡°I think Kron is enough,¡± Sonia said before she disappeared again.


    As for me, I opened two portals to Kron and Randy¡¯s location. Randy is still busy fighting his opponent, while Kron looked at the portal and knows that he was being summoned to help Randy. So he jumped through the portals and helped Randy.


    This happened several more times until one by one, the enemies¡¯ base have been taken down.


    ¡°We¡¯ve been quite busy even though we¡¯re just sitting here,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. How many ces left? Some of them have been taken down already, right?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°We have brought down four out of thirteen if we include the ce where Sara was sent to. The cathedral in the vige where I captured the previous Archbishop,¡± I replied.


    ¡°It hasn¡¯t been that long. I guess we did well then. Even more since we mostly let the soldiers be in charge of the whole situation instead of taking care of it all by ourselves,¡± Ka said.


    She¡¯s right. There should be at least one master level mage in every location. So we¡¯ve been doing well without sending any master level mage.


    From the other ces that have been taken down, I brought the soldiers to other locations as well to help with getting rid of the cult members as soon as possible. So it should be soon before we hear the news that everything is over.


    Though not everything is over. We haven¡¯t even entered the portal to the three transfer points I got from the three summoners we captured.


    I don¡¯t think that we have any need for the summoners anymore. I¡¯ll suggest to Albert to just kill them.


    And when I was thinking of him, Sonia appears. Not with the report of the fight. But a question from Albert.


    ¡°Roy, do you know any summoners or tamers who made a contract with a minotaur?¡± Sonia asked me.


    ¡°One of the summoners I captured is one. The quiet summoner among the three. What about him?¡± I asked back.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. I¡¯ll tell Albert about this first. He was talking with Derek,¡± she said.


    Don¡¯t tell me that the one with minotaur is rted to ve trading? That might be the case.


    Soon after, she really returns and asked me to summon Albert back here.


    ¡°What is it?¡± I asked while I was busy opening a portal from Veronica¡¯s location and Candy¡¯s location so Veronica can help Candy.


    ¡°...You seem busy. But I¡¯ll talk anyway. We think that the man with minotaur as his summon is rted to the ve trade that Derek is looking for. Please open a portal to get us to meet him,¡± he said.


    ¡°Should I bring you there, or should I get him here?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Just bring us there. With Miguel and the werewolves over there, I think I¡¯m already in a safe ce,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Even if that guy was truly rted to the ve trader? Derek, do you think that you can hold yourself back from going wild?¡± I asked Derek this time.


    ¡°That...¡±


    ¡°Just bring that guy here then. Even if the werewolves can attack from distance, they are not expert at protecting me. Even more since I¡¯m not their king,¡± Albert interfered Derek before he could say anything. He changes his mind quite easily.


    Well, it¡¯s obvious that Albert is scared. He won¡¯t be a match against a master level mage who is out of control. Even with Mustache by his side.


    But who is Miguel again?


    ¡°Yup, it¡¯s safer here. I have more use of you so I can¡¯t just let you stay with someone whose sole reason of living is for revenge. We still don¡¯t know how well he react in a situation where his emotion is unstable,¡± I said while pointing at Derek.


    Derek himself didn¡¯t deny that he might go crazy if that summoner was rted to the ve trader involved with his niece or not.


    ¡°...You say that but you¡¯re the one I¡¯m the most worried about,¡± Albert said.


    Well, it¡¯s not about me. And the destruction of the cult is something that we all have agreed with. So I won¡¯t just kill everyone out of anger. Even if I do, I should be sane enough to only target my enemies. Just like when Ang was wounded in Rygis.


    ...Or more like I like hitting individual directly rather than attacking many of them from distance. So even if I¡¯m angry, I would attack my enemies one by one instead.


    I opened a portal to the Monsters Vige and asked the minotaur¡¯s summoner toe here.


    ¡°...Is that beef steak? Where¡¯s the minotaur?¡± I asked Jack and the others.


    ¡°...The minotaur is delicious. My king, you can have some,¡± Jack said as he offered me thest piece of steak.


    ¡°Seems like it was wrong to let the minotaur be summoned in the vige. But it¡¯s good that we taught some of the werewolves to cook. This thing is delicious. Let¡¯s hunt more minotaur in the future,¡± I said after taking a bite of the steak given to me.


    I even offered the rest of the steak to Ka, but she refused. So I offered it to Albert who dly epted it while asking me to bring some eating utensil for him.


    ¡°Manneres first,¡± he said.


    ¡°Then you shouldn¡¯t have eaten it after I took a bite from it.¡±


    Albert then asked Ka to prepare a table for him.


    After the summoner I asked entered the portal without any strength in his body and mind, thanks to his minotaur being killed by the werewolves, we waited until Albert finished eating before he interrogate the summoner.


    And before we could ask anything, another portal opened. And a summoner together with another mage from the ce we¡¯re attacking entered the portal. I could see a triceratops behind the wall on the other side. That¡¯s the ce Jewel is, I guess.


    Ka quickly attacked the summoner with Giant Rock Fist again. But the mage with the summoner seems to be a master level mage as he could block Ka¡¯s attack.


    Seeing the fight, Mustache quickly protecting Albert while also casting Wind sh to the enemies. The master level mage dodged it but the summoner died.


    The portal then closed and the master level mage is still here.


    ¡°...Just what the hell is going on?!¡± he shouted.


    ¡°Your doomsday.¡±


    When the master level mage focusing on us to see what was happening, I took out Blobbygun. With my air magicpressed to the limit,bined with my Aura to make the Blobbybullet more fatal, I shot the gun toward the unprepared master level mage.


    The bullet was so fast and so strong. And the fact that he was unprepared made it easier for the bullet to pierce through that powerful body from reaching master level mage. Creating a hole the size of a head on his chest.


    This might not be my strongest attack. But this is my fastest attack since I just need to pull the trigger. And I have gotten used topressing air so much that it didn¡¯t take long before the gun was ready to shoot.


    I thought that it would be rare for me to use a gun on master level mage. But if it¡¯s at this level, it should be fine to use it. Nice.

 Chapter 720

    Chapter 720: ve Trading Vige


    ¡°...Did you improve the gun again?¡±


    That¡¯s the first thing Albert asked me after witnessing how easy it was for me to kill a master level mage. Someone who was supposed to have the second best physical strength after Aura user.


    ¡°No. There¡¯s no change with the gun. The change is how I used it. For piercing power, I think Sara should be as strong as I am. But I infused Aura so it became more powerful. That¡¯s why even though the bullet size is still the same, I still created a hole that big on his chest,¡± I said.


    The master level mage died with a huge hole in his chest. If he was a bit more prepared and used shield to protect himself, the bullet won¡¯t have enough power to kill him.


    That¡¯s why I rarely used gun in a fight against master level mage. The most I could do was to use it as a distraction. I can only give that much damage if they are unprepared to take any hit. Like what has just happened.


    If I have no confidence in killing the enemy in one shot, it¡¯s best to not use it that way. I don¡¯t want to let the enemy knows how strong I am. Using it is only for ast resort or when I know that I would kill my target instantly.


    Other than that, it¡¯s best to let them think that I¡¯m an Aura user who fought from close range. Even if I can sh the enemy from distance, the gun should still be kept secret.


    .....


    ¡°I think if you make the gun bigger, with bigger bullet, and more firepower, it should be doable. But that¡¯s no longer weapon for self-defense. That¡¯s totally weapon for war. Stick to magic since it hasrger area of effect. Or maybe ask Victoria if she knows any other weapon of mass destruction,¡± I said.


    ¡°We did ask Victoria. But we don¡¯t know how to build one. She didn¡¯t research much about such weapon so we don¡¯t know how to build one. If we know, we might be able to end the war right away. I guess sticking with magic is really the best option we have at the moment,¡± he said.


    Something that can kill so many people without the use of magic. That¡¯s scary.


    Magic is something that depend on the caster. A single person. So how big the attack is, depend on how much the caster understand about magic and how powerful they are. So unless they are strong mages, we don¡¯t have to worry about the effect of their attack.


    But for something that can be created with knowledge, it could be something that anyone can use. And that is extremely dangerous.


    What if someone stupid is in control of the most powerful weapon? Someone ambitious? An idiot coward? The world doesn¡¯t need the cult to destroy it.


    Unless the cult has anyone from another world like Victoria, who is smarter and didn¡¯t just enjoy their hobbies of observing men like Victoria, we don¡¯t have to worry about such weapon from the cult. It¡¯s all about magic for the cult.


    So how could they destroy both Earth and Monsters World in the past life? I was long dead by that time so I don¡¯t know. But I can guess that the Evil God, or someone else from the cult, has reached another stage beyond the stage beyond master level. And we seriously need a name for them.


    What about Aura? I¡¯m already an Aura Master but is there any stage beyond Aura Master?


    Whatever. The only thing I can do is to improve. Though if the cult can be destroyed while I¡¯m at this stage, that would be great.


    ¡°So... how is it over there? Is that guy really is the one you¡¯re looking for?¡±


    I looked over at Derek and the summoner of the cult to see if he was really the person that Derek was looking for.


    ¡°Ah! I forgot!¡±


    Well, I guess my shot was just too amazing for them to the point where they can¡¯t think about anything other than awe of my strength. Or maybe it¡¯s fear.


    I guess it¡¯s fear.


    ¡°Albert, go over there and don¡¯t stay too far from me. Also, don¡¯t block them from my vision,¡± I said.


    ¡°Why? With your Divine Vision, you can see through anything,¡± he said.


    ¡°In case I need to shoot someone. So that you won¡¯t be in the way,¡± I said casually.


    ¡°Oh, right.¡±


    When Albert approached them, Sonia appears and I need to transfer both Kron and Randy to two different locations for reinforcement. The ce they were fighting is still in chaos. But at least they have killed the master level mages over there. That¡¯s what Sonia told me.


    ¡°...Just how did you use portal so many times?¡± the summoner of the cult, instead of focusing on Derek¡¯s interrogation, he was more interested in my skill as summoner. Which was far above his level.


    I ignored him. I¡¯ll just listen to them from afar while focusing on transferring people.


    I listened while Sonia appears and disappears to tell me who and where I should transfer people.


    The summoner was indeed rted to the ve trader. And he might be thest surviving person from that organization in this world. Well, I killed everyone after all.


    He actually had more magic than other summoners. He has reached advanced level in his summoning magic.


    And thanks to that, he could easily open portals a few more times than the other two.


    And he used that power to transfer people to the transfer point, the church in the vige. And the people there will take care of the potential ves. That ce is riddled with ve trader.


    There were no more local people in that vige. All of them has been sold as ves.


    Well, he actually didn¡¯t say that at first. It¡¯s just that after hearing everything, Albert asked him again. After being pressured so much, he gave up and told everything.


    Well, that actually make it simpler for us who will raid that ce. We can just kill everyone there.


    ¡°You! It was you who sent my niece to be a ve! I will kill you!¡±


    In anger, Derek was about to snap the summoner¡¯s neck. But I stopped him by using a non-fatal Blobbybulllet shot at his head. There¡¯s a huge bump because of it, but he won¡¯t die.


    ¡°Don¡¯t kill him yet. We might be able to get more information from him,¡± Albert said.


    Then he looked at me in silence. What is it? Oh, he wants me to make the summoner asleep.


    Forcefully or with sleeping gas? I¡¯ll just shoot a Blobbybullet at his head. That alone should be enough to knock him out unconscious.


    The summoner fainted. And seeing that, Derek started to calm down without having me use the Calming Gas on him. That¡¯s good.


    Then Derek looked at Albert and me respectively. While holding his head where the bump from before is.


    ¡°Please take me to that ce! I will help you get rid of that ce!¡± Derek begged while Ka is healing his head.


    Albert didn¡¯t say anything and just looked at me.


    What? You want me to make the decision?


    ¡°If we have a master level mage with us, that will make it easier for us. And the other ce where that woman is awless kingdom, right? With the Barbarian King? We might need even more power to attack that ce. So we need to get rid of the two locations first before we all attack that kingdom right away,¡± I said.


    ¡°Hmm... Ka, any ideas?¡± Albert asked Ka.


    ¡°We can just have Roy to watch over him so he won¡¯t act out of line. We will split in two with them on one side, and another one will attack the other vige. After we¡¯re done, we can attack the Barbarian King. But just to make sure, everyone in that ce should be criminals, right? We can kill everyone there?¡± she asked Albert back.


    ¡°Yes. But that ce has beenwless for a long time. And it¡¯s not impossible for children to be born in that ce. It¡¯s not impossible as well for the people there to kidnap some really innocent people like peddlers or travelers. I¡¯ll let you make the decision. I trust you that you won¡¯t kill innocent people,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Then it¡¯s fine. We also still need to be careful of children in that ce. Even if they haven¡¯t awakened their magic yet, theirmon senses after being raised there should be different. I think if we have the help of the werewolves, angels, and vampires, it should be fine even if we don¡¯t ask the help of the kingdoms,¡± Ka said.


    I don¡¯t think the werewolves are tired. It¡¯s just Shelia who fought the most and needed rest. The rest of the werewolves is always ready for battle.


    The angels and the vampires, they didn¡¯t participate much before. So they are still full of energy.


    After deciding our n, I opened two portals in Monsters World and in Cassau to bring the werewolves, angels, and vampires here. With only a few of the werewolves left behind to keep watch on the other two prisoners.


    I just told them to prepare to charge in a few hours. I guess I¡¯ll bring some to the vige with me as wellter.

 Chapter 721

    Chapter 721: Raiding Two Viges


    Finally, all target locations has been taken care of. Most of the troops will stay there and some will be returned here with me.


    After hearing Sonia¡¯s report, I told her to ry a message saying that Ang and the others needed to be returned here. And for those who somehow managed to capture the summoners and master level mages, they needed to be brought here as well.


    Only about half of the soldiers and agents from each location were brought here. They¡¯re all tired from just raiding those ces while Ang and the others who have been moved from one ce to another, they didn¡¯t seem tired at all.


    Except for Randy. It seems like he¡¯s still not as strong as the others yet.


    Well, that¡¯s natural. He only learned about magic control for a few months while the others have learned it for years. But I heard that he made a lot of progress.


    ¡°Well, is this everyone? Albert, should I return you back now?¡± I asked Albert.


    ¡°Later. Can you open a portal to Ian¡¯s location? He should be in the pce since I asked him to do misceneous stuffs. I¡¯m going to ask him to get the servants cooked something to reward these people,¡± he said.


    .....


    ¡°Then I want you to prepare something for the werewolves, angels, and the vampires to receive as well. Hearing about rewards, they will get even more motivated to do the mission,¡± I said.


    ¡°Sure. But the vampires part should be your job since you¡¯re a doctor. Go ask the hospital to prepare a lot of blood bags.¡±


    Thanks to the blood bag, many people who got injured badly could recover. And hunters feel at ease knowing that the chance of survival from bad injuries increased. Though it¡¯s not just them.


    Evenmoners feel good knowing that there¡¯s a method to increase the chance of survival. Especially for those whose job is prone to get into an ident. Like carpenter or miner.


    As long as they can be taken into a hospital, they have a chance to survive. And they don¡¯t need to ask for a healer to heal them for a high price. Themoners don¡¯t have that much money. Though getting blood transfussion is not cheap, it¡¯s still cheaper than asking healer to heal.


    And thanks to the blood donation system as well, more people are willing to donate their blood. They didn¡¯t earn a lot of money doing it. But it¡¯s still enough for them tost a few days when they don¡¯t have a job.


    And the more blood donated, the more rewards we can give to the vampires. Though their most sought after blood is mine. After my blood, it¡¯s master level mage¡¯s blood. And then expert level and so on.


    But thanks to being an Aura master, my body can produce blood faster than mages. So now I can donate blood once every few days if possible. Though since I received this mission and stayed in this world for a while, I couldn¡¯t donate my blood in a while.


    But it¡¯s still not a problem for me to give one or two blood bags as a reward for the vampires who took this mission. Even if it¡¯s just one sip, they would enjoy it.


    Though now that I have brought the blood bags here, only the Vampire Queen, Arin, has no interest in it. She prefers to suck my blood directly. But that does make it easier for me to reward herter since I don¡¯t need to prepare anything.


    The other vampires should be interested in drinking my blood directly as well. But they know that they¡¯re no match against Arin.


    We had a meal in front of the confused summoner and Derek. They think that it¡¯s weird that we¡¯re having a meal right before we started a fight.


    During all this, I also drunk some Mana Potions. I have used portals many times tonight and will probably use it a few more times. Everyone also drunk some potions. After all they were fighting ferociously before.


    After Albert gave some speech of encouragement to the soldiers, I returned him back to the pce. And then we rested for one hour before we make our move to the two viges where the church of the cult were built.


    I also brought here the other two summoners. With only one of them, the disfigured woman, has a familiar left.


    Randy and Ka approached the two summoners who no longer have any contracted monster left and asked them about what they knew about the two viges. As for thewless kingdom, that¡¯s forter. After we finished with the two other ces.


    ¡°So, how should we split the forces?¡±


    After questioning the summoners and didn¡¯t get much since they have been staying in this world for too long, Ka asked me how I will split the forces.


    ¡°One of the vige is rted to ve trading. Derek over here, the master level mage from the cult that I managed to recruit, is going there to kill everyone there. And I will also go there to watch over him.


    ¡°As for the monsters, the vampires wille with me while the werewolves will go to the other vige. The angels will split in two and go to both ces. One group will be under me and the other will be under Graham in the other vige. As for the rest, you can discuss it with Ka since you two seem to be the smartest ones here.¡±


    The ces we¡¯re going to, even though there¡¯s just churches there, doesn¡¯t mean that there won¡¯t be any bishops or archbishops. Maybe the two ces are even more dangerous than the ce where I caught the Archbishop from before.


    From the information that we got from these summoners, that might be the case.


    Even though it¡¯s just churches and not cathedral, the two ces seem to have more master level mages.


    One hour passed and everyone has been split into two groups.


    One is with me, Derek, Ka, Ang, and Veronica. Victoria, Ray, and Arin are with me here. The vampires and half of the angels wille with me as well.


    The other is with Kron, Graham, Jewel, Randy, Wendy, and Candy. That¡¯s a lot of -ndy. The werewolves will help them alongside the other half of the angels.


    I left some werewolves here to watch over the three summoners. The two-headed snake is still protecting the disfigured woman. But we¡¯re all ignoring it as if it¡¯s not something special.


    It¡¯s just a snake. Spot is an even bigger and stronger snake than that two-headed snake.


    By the way, Spot is staying on Earth in case someone needed transportation to move somewhere fast. He won¡¯t be helping us here.


    ¡°Alright. There will be huge battle, so win and survive. There are still more battles to fightter. Once you¡¯re done there, just wait in case we haven¡¯t finished yet on our side.¡±


    I opened a portal to the transfer point of the man with a missing arm. The portal is a huge one that can fit five people. And it¡¯s inside a building. So Jewel stood at the front in her triceratops form as a vanguard and to protect the others.


    I also looked at the situation inside while the other soldiers started entering it. I helped with shooting some people who are trying to attack the soldiers before they enter the portal.


    I see Kron and Wendy already facing two master level mages. And I could see more people who might be master level mages approaching. I hope everyone will be okay.


    After everyone entered, I close the portal. And now it¡¯s time for us to move.


    ¡°Well, as you can see, there will be a battle right away as soon as I open the portal. Everyone, get ready.¡±


    For this side, I will obviously be the one leading the others.


    ...Is what I thought.


    As soon as I opened the portal, Ang flies in and started fighting by herself.


    ¡°Victoria, go after her!¡±


    Riding on Ray, Victoria is the fastest one among us. She reached Ang in an instant and protected her from the iing attack.


    I entered the portal, and then I was greeted by a thick and strong Earth Wall. The caster is a master level mage, but he¡¯s not in this room where I opened the portal at. He¡¯s above us.


    He might be a master level mage in both wind element and earth element. He might be the most difficult enemy to fight here.


    But I also paid attention at another ce. There¡¯s a separate building from this church we entered. And in there, I can see some people are being chained and tortured.


    That must be the ce where the ve trader keep the potential ves to be sold. All of them are wearing the same cors.


    That ce seem to have a lot of guard protecting it. Even seem to be more heavily guarded than this church.


    ¡°Derek, the building outside over there is where they keep the ves! Ka, watch over him together with some vampires!¡±


    Derek just blindly trusted me and destroyed everything on the way to the other building.


    Once this fight is over, he will join us. That would be great.

 Chapter 722

    Chapter 722: I Became the Arm-Ripper


    Derek flies toward the other building while Ka was being carried by two vampire girls to follow Derek. I think those four are enough over there.


    But the enemies here in the church won¡¯t just let them move around freely. So it¡¯s my job and the rest of us here to stop them from blocking Ka and the vampires since Derek has flown really fast and get there first.


    Derek will have some problem if there are any master level mage there, but it¡¯s fine. Ka is a healer. And she¡¯s strong enough to fight a master level mage as well.


    Over here, we have angels as healers and attackers as well. They can use their spears to fight or shoot Light Beam magic from distance.


    Some of the angels seem to be about to evolve into archangels like Graham. So they can evolve, huh?


    I could see on their back, where their wings are rooted, that there are some extra roots where wings will most likely sprout. Do wings grow like some kind of nt?


    If we can have more archangels with us, that would be great. I hope they will still follow me. Or at least Graham. Let¡¯s see if they can evolve first. Should I bring them to more battle?


    .....


    Ang is going wild and attacked those she thought as master level mages. or maybe she didn¡¯t think at all and it¡¯s just her instinct.


    Anyway, Ang easily targeted those who might be stronger than average. Veronica just focused on fighting while protecting the soldiers. And I¡¯m looking directly at the mage flying in the sky who used powerful earth magic before.


    He¡¯s also looking at me. Seems like he¡¯s really the strongest one here since Ang wanted to fight him. But the other master level mages stopped her from approaching him.


    Right. That¡¯s what you get when you try to fight other enemy before your previous enemy got killed.


    ¡°She¡¯s the champion of the tournament! Kill her!¡±


    Oh, seems like her fame got to this vige in the middle of nowhere. I guess since this vige is involved with ve trading, there should be someone who work as peddler to transport the ves to other cities. And the people here heard the news about Ang from the peddler, or they are newly recruited in this ce and have watched Ang fought before.


    I don¡¯t need to worry about her. She can handle it on her own.


    I have a lot of experience fighting master level mages now. And the master level mages from the cult are not experienced in fighting since they focus more on cultivating their level. And that¡¯s not their only weakness.


    They have another weakness. Which I could say as the biggest weakness they have even though they should be members of the cult that doesn¡¯t care about people¡¯s lives including their owns.


    That¡¯s right. They are afraid of using the ultimate magic strong enough to destroy everything.


    Back then, when Veronica was fighting Celestine before Celestine joined us, Celestine could even create a huge earthquake and destroy the ground. While Veronica can cut down a part of the forest with her magic. And they were just expert level mages without many fighting experience.


    From that and the experience of fighting the cult I have, I can say that they are looking down on us even after everything that happened. Even when none of us are master level mage. Except for Derek this time.


    They were looking down on us and didn¡¯t expect us to be so strong. So they think that just using smaller scale magic would be enough to defeat us. But that¡¯s very wrong. And they only realized that near the end of their breath.


    If the master level mages truly think that we¡¯re not worth using their full power, that¡¯s a huge mistake. They should have do what they do best. Ignoring their own people and kill everyone.


    Using arge scale magic here would kill most of us right away. The enemy should know that. But because of theirck of experience, they didn¡¯t do that and thought that they should be able to defeat us by using numbers.


    And that¡¯s how we get into this situation. Where Ang, the strongest expert level mage in the world, who should be easily killed by master level mage if they were serious, can be equal in a fight against several master level mages at once.


    And it¡¯s also thanks to our experience in fighting them as well. Maybe everyone subconsciously knows that the enemies will hold back. And even when the enemies started to get serious, our side can somehow protect themselves before going for the kill.


    That one moment when the enemy thinks that they can win, that will be their doom.


    And just as I thought of that, Ang had just killed two master level mages with only using wind magic so far. She hadn¡¯t used her other elements.


    ¡°Do not hold back! Kill everyone here even if you have to! Including yourselves! If you let any of the enemy survive, they will only get stronger!¡±


    Oh, the master level mage that I¡¯m still watching out for knows. Seems like this will truly be difficult for us.


    ¡°Sigh... I guess I need to kill you as soon as possible,¡± I said.


    ¡°Try it if you can.¡±


    Right as soon as he said that, I shot a Blobbygun at his direction. With my strongest sharp bullet, infused with Aura. Like before when I killed the shocked master level mage.


    But this one react too quickly. I thought that the mages from the cult willck experience. But this one seem to have more experience in battle than most.


    But that doesn¡¯t mean that he was left unscathed after I shot him. The bullet didn¡¯t pierce his body. But it did hit his right forearm as he was trying to dodge it.


    The bullet blows away his right hand. Leaving his right arm only to the elbow.


    But he didn¡¯t even scream. He just grunted.


    Instead of screaming in pain and panicked, he cast healing magic on his own arm. So he reached master level in wind and earth element, and he¡¯s also a healer. His healing level is probably around advanced level. Good enough to stop the bleeding in his missing hand.


    By the way, this is the second time I ripped someone¡¯s arm in one day. The summoner, and this guy. Will I be called as Arm-ripper?


    ¡°...I heard about it. Using that weapon as a tool for air mage to shoot powerful projectile. You¡¯re an air mage. Even more, you¡¯re much stronger than that woman in that stupid tournament,¡± he said calmly.


    ¡°I was the one who taught her about it. Though I was also taught by someone else. By the way, she¡¯s already a better air mage than I am. Though it¡¯s true that my shot was much stronger and faster than hers,¡± I praised Sara who is not even here.


    ¡°You seem to be the leader of this bunch of people. And seeing how the portal opened without the summoner who should be here, I guess you¡¯re also a summoner. Just having air magic and summoning element shouldn¡¯t be enough to make you the leader of someone who won that stupid tournament and dubbed as the strongest mage. It means you have something that no one else had. Are you the Aura user?¡± he asked me after summarizing everything he saw.


    ¡°You are correct, Mr. Detective. I also heard that everyone here is involved with ve trading business. So you have no choice but to be killed by us,¡± I said.


    He¡¯s still looked calm even after hearing all that. Maybe it¡¯s because of his experience. He might be in a high position in the cult and maybe his age is already over a hundred years old.


    ¡°Aura user. I have one more question for you.¡±


    ¡°What is it? Do you think that there¡¯s a need for me to answer your question before we start killing each other?¡±


    I tried to provoke him. But he still didn¡¯t flinch.


    ¡°The summoner who should be the only one who could open a portal here. Where is he?¡±


    ¡°Why do you need to know that?¡± I asked back.


    ¡°He¡¯s my son.¡±


    That¡¯s his son? Well, I don¡¯t really care.


    ¡°As long as he behave, he won¡¯t get eaten by werewolves. He¡¯s alive at least,¡± I said.


    ¡°Is that all?¡± he didn¡¯t believe me at all.


    ¡°Well...¡±


    Before I could say anything, someone tried to kill me. I dodged his weak Ice Spike, approached him, and easily ripped his arm from his body. I really did became the Arm-ripper.


    ¡°This is how easy it is for me to kill anyone. I¡¯m an Aura user. My body is already much stronger than yours who got stronger because you raised your level in magic. I trained it. You should know how easy it is already for you to kill anyone just in a physical fight. Well, it¡¯s much easier for me. Ripping someone¡¯s limbs, breaking their bones, or simply punched someone to their death. Also, we have destroyed everything in that base in the other world. Your son¡¯s life is in our hand,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Sigh. Well, once a disappointment will always be a disappointment. You¡¯re free to kill himter. But only if you can stay alive!¡±


    Now the fight begins. He¡¯s different than other master level mages. I need to focus and must not let down my guard here.

 Chapter 723

    Chapter 723: Stopping a Hurricane


    From how it looked, the man I¡¯m fighting is not a master level healer yet. I heard that they can regenerate lost limb. But after I shot him and get him lost his hand, and he just healed it by stopping the bleeding and not regenerating it, he¡¯s not a master level healer yet.


    I wonder why? If he¡¯s that strong, he should have realized that a healing element is the most important and could be the most annoying element.


    Imagine that with so many people under him, he could just heal those who are wounded. That would make the battle harder since the enemies¡¯ stamina will also recover.


    But he didn¡¯t do that. He focused more on his wind element and earth element.


    Well, he¡¯s still a difficult enemy to handle. Especially after who knows how long he had been fighting. He has a lot of experience in fighting.


    While staying in the air, he attacked with both wind magic and earth magic from below. Making it hard for anyone other than me to dodge.


    Well, in my case, I just forcefully breakthrough the magic with Aura. As long as the magic he used isn¡¯t strong, I can just brute force my way to him.


    .....


    But having both wind element and earth element meant that not only he has agile movement. He also had strong defense. He could even make soil from the ground float and use it for defense.


    Even after I managed to catch up with him in the air, he could just burrow himself into the ground and move freely. I had to move my hands real fast so I can dig the ground.


    Even then, as long as there¡¯s a little bit of space for air, he could easily use wind magic underground. And I have no choice but to block it since there¡¯s no ce to dodge it.


    As expected of someone experienced. He might be stronger than the Archbishop I previously caught from the cathedral.


    ...Or maybe that Archbishop was too stupid. He got himself knocked out real fast without being able to use any power at all.


    Maybe I was wrong. I should have acted like Ang before. Instead of trying to protect the others, I should have just flew inside as fast as possible, and kill those who seem strong.


    But I can¡¯t undo it. For now, I just need to waste his Mana and stamina until he can¡¯t use magic anymore. As an Aura Master, I¡¯m confident that I have more stamina than anyone else in the world.


    Of course I will still continue to find his weak points. I¡¯m sure that he will make an opening. Either I forced him to, or when he lets down his guard.


    But I can¡¯t just focus on him. There are some other powerful priests in this church.


    I can¡¯t do the same thing as I did in the cathedral. Using Graham or other angels to act as theid God¡¯s apostles. Because these guys were trading ves.


    Unlike the previous location where there were many believer of the cult, this ce has believer of profits. They were trading ves. Merchants or peddlers who seek to gain money.


    As for the reason, I don¡¯t know. Why would anyone who seeks wealth chose to stay in a vige in the middle of nowhere?


    A whole vige doing it, it must have some sort of connection with a huge tradingpany or some sort. I¡¯ll have other people to investigate it.


    This won¡¯t do. The mage I¡¯m facing is too fast and too agile. I can¡¯t catch up with him. Even if I could he would easily gain distance.


    When he¡¯s in the air, he could easily alter the trajectory of Blobbybullets. And when he¡¯s underground, the Blobbybullets are not strong enough to reach his location.


    So I decided to ignore him. I will fight other people until hees out and decided to fight me. I will still watch over him so he won¡¯t attack anyone else though.


    ¡°Don¡¯t run away!¡±


    Now the pursuer became the pursued. He¡¯s chasing after me as I killed some other members of the cult.


    ¡°I¡¯m running away because you¡¯re running away!¡± I shouted back.


    ¡°It¡¯s a tactic so someone like you who use closebat will not be able to get close to me!¡±


    ¡°And my job is to kill all cult members here! I don¡¯t need to go trough the order that I need to kill you first!¡±


    ¡°Then I just need to kill other people first!¡±


    He stopped chasing after me and about to cast a magic to attack at Veronica¡¯s direction. But before he could do so, I¡¯m already right in front of him.


    ¡°BOO!¡±


    I swung Reizpear filled with Aura at him while he was concentrating in attacking Veronica. It¡¯s a mistake if he thinks that I can¡¯t focus on several things at once. I¡¯m truly d that my Aura ability is Divine Vision.


    Still, the opponent was too good. He managed to alter the trajectory of my swing forcefully with wind magic while used Earth Shield to protect himself. But I still managed to cut off his right leg.


    ¡°And when you¡¯re too focused on attacking someone else, you will let down your guard and give me an opening to attack. No matter how powerful your body has became thanks to reaching master level mage, you still don¡¯t have the ability to react quickly. It¡¯s something you need to train,¡± I said.


    ¡°Ugh...¡±


    Now, he¡¯s trying to heal his leg. And again, I shed Reizpear at him.


    This time, I couldn¡¯t remove his limb again. But he received a long wound on his chest.


    ¡°And when you¡¯re focusing on healing, you let down your guard again. Come on, use your healing magic again!¡±


    This way, he won¡¯t be able to focus on healing or attacking others. While I still can shoot nearby cult members with Blobbygun and kill them.


    I can also intercept the master level mage I¡¯m facing using Blobbygun.


    This will make me win the fight. It¡¯s easy. But that doesn¡¯t make me satisfied.


    In the end, I can¡¯t win in the way I wanted to. I need to use tricks like I usually did as the weak against the strong.


    I don¡¯t like it. But it¡¯s necessary to win here since I will have another fight after this.


    I keep distracting him when he tried to use healing magic, or try to attack other people. But when he was trying to attack me, I can feel from his expression that he finally panicked.


    ¡°Hey, aren¡¯t you going to kill me?¡± I said.


    ¡°Wait, please! I don¡¯t want to die!¡± the man shouted. Acting like he has given up.


    ¡°Me neither! And for me to make sure that I won¡¯t die here, I need to kill you. You think I can easily be tricked by you?¡±


    ¡°I surrender! I¡¯ll do anything you say! I will even join you to destroy the True God Cult!¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re still calling it True God Cult? That¡¯s not good enough. Your surrender is not epted,¡± I said.


    I tried to kill him again, but he either blocked it or dodged it using the remaining of his strength.


    He¡¯s way too scared of death. Maybe this is the reason why most master level mages were weak. Although they said that they were willing to risk their lives, they would shiver in the face of death.


    Rather than death itself, they¡¯re afraid of pain. Hence the need of the explosive device in their mouth. Removing explosive device as soon as they reached expert level was a mistake. They should be willing to risk everything for the cult.


    Well, this makes things easier for me, so I won¡¯tin.


    ¡°You stay with the cult, kill people and enve them for profit, and your goal is for the world destruction. There shouldn¡¯t be any need to seek for profit if you want to destroy the world. Tell me why there¡¯s a need for the cult to gain wealth. I know that you needed a lot of fund for many experiments. Is that the reason for you to enve people?¡± I asked.


    I approached the man who has no right hand and right leg anymore to listen for his answer.


    And as I got closer, I feel danger ising.


    The man used all the remaining Mana he had to cast a powerful and destructive hurricane. Destroying the whole vige.


    ¡°Even if I die, I will take everyone here with me!¡±


    Not only those who were fighting in the church got blown away. Though the church had been destroyed for a while already. The other building where they keep the ves were destroyed as well.


    People, trees, buildings, were all flown into the sky. Only Ang, Veronica, some angels, some vampires, and some of the enemies¡¯ master level mage were not blown. Thanks to their ability to fly. But just staying still took everything from them.


    Now this is a real master level mage. The destructive power is real.


    I didn¡¯t get blown away since I used Aura to stick myself on the ground. Though some parts of the grown were destroyed from the hurricane already.


    I¡¯m in the eye of the storm with the mage in front of me. I see that he no longer spend Mana for his magic. The hurricane will still be active for a long time. So I need to stop it.


    I spun Reizpear above my head, the opposite direction of the hurricane. Using both air magic and Aura, I tried my best to stop the hurricane by creating a powerful rotation at the opposite direction of the hurricane.


    It took me a while until the hurricane was stopped. I actually did it. Stopping a hurricane.


    ¡°...No way.¡±


    Ang and the others who can fly focused on saving Ka and the others. While we let the cult members falling down from the sky like rain.


    ¡°I have other business to attend, so die.¡±


    I killed the mage and other surviving cult members. I don¡¯t know about the fate of the ves. Some of them died because of the hurricane, while some others managed to survive with heavy injuries.


    ¡°Kill the survivors! Healers, go and heal the injured! Including those who were captured as ves!¡±


    After giving the order, I called Sonia to ask what¡¯s happening at the other side.


    I haven¡¯t heard any news from their location, so the battle must not be over yet.

 Chapter 724

    Chapter 724: Ghosts Fights


    Thanks to the hurricane, everything is destroyed. Not only the churches, houses and all the buildings in the vige, he even destroyed arge part of the forest.


    It was crazy. It was so destructive.


    What would happen if he used earth magic instead? What would happen if he used both wind magic and earth magic?


    The answer is only destruction.


    Now I can see how they can destroy the world. Two worlds, I mean.


    Since in my past life, there were no challenger of the cult. Even the strongest, Ang, was not as strong as she is now. Even though that time, she was much older than she is now.


    But we have grown stronger at a faster rate. There are more powerful mages who might have been killed in my past life at this time. But they¡¯re all living now and much stronger.


    .....


    I don¡¯t know why in my past life the cult decided to go the long way to destroy the world. I think it should be in a few years that they started to get more aggressive.


    But now, they can no longer get as much master level mage as they had in my previous life. They simply don¡¯t have the time to nurture them all. Which is great.


    As long as we can defeat them before more master level mages appear, at least those who are as strong as the man I just killed, I think we can destroy the cult.


    Not yet. I can¡¯t get too confident yet.


    During the hurricane, Ang and the others had difficulty protecting themselves. Several soldiers died from it. Either because they were thrown away, or something hit them inside the hurricane.


    I¡¯m fine, but the others are not strong enough to face master level mage at their full level. Those who won¡¯t underestimate other people and will truly not care about their own lives.


    Some might decided to remove the explosive devices after reaching expert level mages. If they did it because they¡¯re afraid of that thing inside their mouth, it¡¯s possible that they will not use their all in a fight.


    However, if they stil remove the explosive device , but they will still risk their everything for the cult, the previous experience won¡¯t be thest one.


    There might be a huge earthquake, a huge fire, or even return to ice age.


    That¡¯s why we still need to be careful, and grow stronger as fast as possible.


    ¡°Anyone can move?!¡± I shouted.


    Everyone is too tired. Because of that hurricane.


    Some angels were dying. So the other angels focused on healing them first before healing the soldiers.


    The vampires almost run out of blood protecting themselves. They started grabbing the corpses of the enemies and drink their blood.


    I threw the blood bags filled with my blood to some vampires and then I rolled over my sleeve and called Arin.


    ¡°Arin, don¡¯t drink too much. I¡¯m going to Candy¡¯s location after this and you and some other vampires wille with me,¡± I said.


    Arin happily drinks my blood directly from my arm. I checked the situation again and see that many of us were no longer able to fight.


    ¡°I will open a portal to check the other side soon. Those who can fight right away wille with me. The rest will stay here and see if there¡¯s anything you can get from the ruins,¡± I said.


    After that, I approached Derek who was shaking in fear.


    ¡°Derek, what about your revenge?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...It¡¯s too much. I¡¯m also a master level mage, but I can¡¯t do what he did. If I join you, will I encounter more people like that?¡± he asked.


    ¡°You will. And you have seen that I¡¯m much stronger than him. Even if you don¡¯t want to join us, I hope that you won¡¯t betray us. You have seen some of our expert level mages could even defeat master level mages with simr strength as you. If you try to do anything, you will die. Anyway, it seems like you won¡¯t be able to make your decision so soon. Stay here with the others and don¡¯t go anywhere. I¡¯ll ask you againter if you still want to join us or not,¡± I said.


    He will think about what to do now that his revenge is over. The vige is destroyed. Everything rted to the ve trading is gone.


    Ka will heal the others here. She can watch over Derek in case he¡¯s trying to run away. Though if he truly wanted to escape, there¡¯s nothing she can do.


    But I don¡¯t need to worry. I have attached a small Blobby on him. I can easily get to where he is. Unless he decided to be naked.


    After getting ready, I called Sonia first to ask about the situation on the other vige.


    ¡°There are some master level mages. None of them used magic as destructive as the one here. But the worst part is that that ce is where they keep the tamed monsters on Earth. And the monsters there are much more powerful than the monsters that were being kept in the base that you destroyed,¡± Sonia said.


    So over there will be monsters. So far, they haven¡¯t contacted us for help. Maybe because they think that we have problems on our side as well.


    ¡°Two minutes! Those who are ready to fight, except for a few who will stay here, wille with me. Drink Mana Potions and get someone to heal you if you¡¯re injured!¡±


    Two minutes is too short for preparation time. But we¡¯re at war.


    Two minutester, we¡¯re ready to go.


    Some soldiers, angels, all vampires, Victoria, Arin, Veronica, Ang, and I. We will enter the portal from where Jewel location is. I told Sonia to get Jewel protect the portal from the iing enemies.


    When I open the portal, our vision is blocked by the huge body of a dinosaur. It¡¯s Jewel in her triceratops form.


    ¡°Quick, enter the portal! Wind mages, push the others!¡± I shouted as I jumped into the portal.


    There are some other dinosaur than Jewel here. Some breathe fire. Wait, isn¡¯t that dragon?


    Whatever. Some of them tried to attack Jewel to reach the opened portal. So I blocked the attack to protect Jewel.


    ¡°Jewel, stay there for a little while longer,¡± I said.


    I can see that Jewel, someone with the strongest defense thanks to her beastform and the earth magic she can use after training her rhino form, has injuries all over her body. They were not deep, but that shows how difficult the battle is in this side.


    ¡°I¡¯m proud of you, my disciple.¡±


    Jewel has protected many people here. I¡¯m sure of that. And now, I will protect her.


    The enemies are mostly monsters. There are some tamers in this vige as well. As long as I can kill them, the monsters won¡¯t be cooperative anymore. And they might even fight the cult members here. That¡¯s a good idea.


    So, while I swung around Reizpear at the dinosaur, I had a Blobbygun on my other hand to aim to the tamers or anyone I thought to be tamers.


    Victoria helped since she¡¯s with Ray. She¡¯s very quickly go to anyone who was ordering the monsters to do something, and kill them.


    Soon after, everyone has entered the portal. And I close it.


    That¡¯s when Jewel¡¯s body shrunk and she¡¯s now in her hybrid mode. The armor-wearing girl.


    ¡°MASTER! I¡¯M FINE NOW! GO AND HELP THE OTHERS!¡±


    ...Why is her shout much louder than the sound of an explosion that happened at the same time?


    Did the volume of her lungs increased after her beastform reached another level? Is triceratops a dinosaur with loud roar?


    Damn. So many questions. And I don¡¯t think I will be able to hear the answer.


    Except for the roar one. One of the monsters here is a triceratops and it actually roared really loud.


    It was being noisy so I killed it by shing at its neck. Removing their heads from their bodies is another simplest way to kill anything. Though anything that will still be alive after I removed their heads is probably a ghost. And that means they¡¯re already dead.


    And yes, there are some ghost type monsters here. And most of us were troubled by it.


    They will die if I use Aura. Or should I say exorcised? So I will be the one fighting the ghost and just trust the others to take care of the master level mages. I don¡¯t want their master level mages to use such destructive magic in this ce.


    Oh, is that Sonia fighting? She¡¯s using a sword to fight other ghosts.


    ¡°Sonia, where do that sworde from?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I used spiritual power as a ghost to materialized a sword that I can use to fight other ghost. Though the sword is useless to any living beings. Don¡¯t worry about the ghosts. I¡¯m stronger than them,¡± she said confidently.


    ¡°Then I will take care of the most problematic ones. I¡¯ll leave them to you!¡±


    I won¡¯t bother in a fight between a ghost against other ghosts. I don¡¯t want to be haunted. Just one ghost is enough.

 Chapter 725 - 725 The Second Village Cleared

    725 The Second Vige Cleared


    The ghost Sonia used a sword made by spiritual power. I don¡¯t know what that is.


    There¡¯s magic, and there¡¯s Aura. And there¡¯s another thing called spiritual power?


    ¡°What is spiritual power?¡± I asked Sonia.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. I called it that way since it¡¯s different from Aura and magic. And I can only use it fairly recently. Whatever the case, with this, I can fight other ghosts. Let me handle the ghost,¡± she said.


    ¡°Did the ghosts appear before, or do they only appear this time when I came here?¡± I asked her again.


    ¡°They only appear now. If they appeared before, I won¡¯te when you called me since I would be fighting them.¡±


    ¡°One more thing. They tamed ghosts. Does it mean that ghosts can actually fight living beings?¡± I asked Sonia again.


    If ghosts can really fight living beings, she would be a great help. But she¡¯s already a big help as it is. Being our messenger. There¡¯s no one else like her.


    Maybe I can move all to other location as fast as she can using portal. But I¡¯m already way too busy as it is.


    .....


    So even if she can fight living being, I want her to do her original job as messenger instead. I prefer it that way so I won¡¯t have to travel everywhere many times in one day.


    Though for now, it¡¯s best to leave the ghosts to Sonia. This way, I can focus on other people.


    ¡°By now, I can lift something like a real sword easily. Using it to fight living beings can be done. But I will leave the problem of fighting other living beings to you guys. I¡¯ll fight any ghosts that will appear,¡± she said.


    ¡°That¡¯s great. I will leave them to you then.¡±


    The ghosts here seem to be able to fight us humans. And unlike Sonia, the ghosts are no longer had their humanity.


    I heard from Sonia that when she trained in Monsters World alone, she learned that if she lost all humanity left in her, she would be a mindless ghost that would attack anyone. I guess that¡¯s what happened to these ghosts.


    Though she could manage to keep her humanity thanks to being surrounded by her harem even after death. That¡¯s ridiculous. But as long as it works, it¡¯s fine.


    The mindless ghosts are scary. They have long arms with huge ws. They don¡¯t have legs and just float. And they¡¯re translucent. Sometimespletely invisible. It will be hard for even Ang to fight them.


    In fact, I don¡¯t know what kind of magic will be effective against ghosts. Maybe we should learn more about it.


    But we have Sonia here. She might have died for over a thousand years already. But she was still an Aura user who trained in sword. She can fight some ghosts.


    Though I think they have more ghosts than I expected. I don¡¯t think Sonia alone can defeat them all. Let¡¯s add someone to help then.


    ¡°Victoria! Go and help Sonia! You two old-timers can go and cooperate together!¡± I said.


    Since Victoria can use Aura with the help of Ray, it should be fine.


    But now that Victoria will help her, I will need to make sure that no one is escaping from this ce.


    The one who has been doing that before I arrive here was Kron and Wendy. Wendy is not as strong as Kron because of a huge difference. Breezy. Breezy is with Kron.


    So, Wendy could only try to kill the slower ones who are trying to escape. As for Kron, he even caught up with some master level wind mages who boosted their speed with fire magic.


    Even then, Kron won¡¯t be able to catch up with everyone. So I need to kill the rest.


    There are not only wind mages who are fast in running away. Some mages are riding fast monsters to escape. There¡¯s one with a wyvern. He¡¯s a master level ice mage as well. But he¡¯s not a tamer.


    ¡°Go ride any monsters for help! They are aiming for tamers! Whether you¡¯re a tamer or not, confuse them by riding a monster! As long as the tamers are still alive, the monsters will not help them to attack us as well! We shouldn¡¯t increase the number of the enemies!¡±


    He¡¯s smart. But unfortunately, after he gave that order, Wendy killed him and his wyvern using fire magic. With improved firepower thanks to her wind magic.


    But the others still follow his order. Now it will be difficult to kill everyone since they¡¯re all spread out.


    Good thing Ang and Veronica are here. Randy is here as well so he could catch up with some slower enemies.


    Graham is also very fastpared to their expert level wind mages. And the werewolves will never let go of the prey they have targeted.


    Soon after, everyone realized that escaping is impossible. Whether through he sky,nd, or ground. So they stopped trying to escape and chose to fight back instead.


    Is it better now? As long as their master level mage won¡¯t cast destructive magic, it should be fine.


    So, I need to focus on master level mages first.


    ...Is what I thought. Kron, Ang, and the werewolves already targeted them first. I guess I¡¯ll take care of the leftover while making sure that everyone is okay.


    How¡¯s Sonia and Victoria doing?


    The ghost seems to be stronger than expected. It¡¯s good that we have two people... monsters who can fight ghosts. Those ghosts are far too powerful for ordinary mages to fight.


    Not that they¡¯re really strong. Any magicing toward them, they can ignore them since those magic will just pass through. And those who tried to have to be really careful so there won¡¯t be friendly fire in case their magic pass through the ghosts.


    There is only one more ghost to defeat. And both Sonia and Victoria attacked it together with simr swordsmanship. I guess that¡¯s to be expected since they both learned from the same master.


    ¡°Alright, that¡¯s done,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll scout the area to see if there are other ghost monsters,¡± Sonia said as she flies away.


    ¡°That was amazing. Now let¡¯s take care of the rest,¡± I said.


    With the master level mages busy, they don¡¯t have the time to cast extremely destructive magic. So it wasn¡¯t hard to kill them.


    Some tried to do it. But I shot Blobbyguns at them to disturb their concentration. Though some shots managed to kill some master level mages.


    There are powerful monsters like dragons here. But with how the werewolves work together to defeat them one by one, the dragons are not much of a problem.


    Even though the werewolves love to fight a one on one battle, that doesn¡¯t mean that they won¡¯t cooperate together. For a really big monster, they can do it.


    I thought that the cult would have even stronger monsters than these. I know that the ghosts and the dragons were a bit of problem for us. But we can handle them.


    If they have been taking monsters from Monsters World for a while, I thought that they would have even stronger monsters. Maybe even somethingparable to Andro.


    If that¡¯s the case, where would they hide such monsters?


    ...I know the answer. Now that I think about it carefully, if such monsters exist, they would be able to hide somewhere most people won¡¯t see.


    They might be underwater. I need to get Spot and his children to scout the ocean and see if they have strong monsters under the sea that shouldn¡¯t be there.


    Wait! What about thewless country that we¡¯re going to attack after this?! Is it close to the sea?


    I need to get more information. If it¡¯s close to the sea, I need Spot toe.


    The only human who can fight underwater other than me would be Carmen. But she¡¯s just an expert level water mage. And shecks killing power when fighting enemies underwater. That¡¯s what she said.


    Maybe that¡¯s it. They can search for sea monsters, tame them, and get them under the sea.


    Sea monsters are well-known to be small when they¡¯re born, but their growth doesn¡¯t seem to be limited. They can grow even after years of living. Unlike humans whose growth normally stopped around the age of 20.


    Maybe that¡¯s another reason why it take so long in my past life for the cult to finally move with their goal. To wait until the monsters grow to be so big and can destroy countries after countries.


    The battle I was involved was onnd. So I don¡¯t know anything about those fighting near the sea. But I might be right.


    I guess I should dive into the sea more often. And I need to kill monsters however small they are. Or just find the tamers and kill them.


    I look around and I can see Ang finally killed thest enemy in this ce. Everyone is exhausted after fighting non-stop. We need some rest.


    It should be 12 hours before some summonerse to Monsters World to bring supplies to the destroyed base. Can we get enough rest before we attack thewless country and return back to Monsters World to wait for those summoners?

 Chapter 726 - 726 Asking Spot’s Family for Help

    726 Asking Spot¡¯s Family for Help


    What a mess.


    Two viges, and everyone is already exhausted.


    Well, I guess that¡¯s to be expected. After all, from now on, the cult would never let their guard down anymore in front of a fight. And we no longer have any weaklings to fight. Most of the enemies we will be facing are expert level mages or above.


    Even worse if they have monsters with them.


    As to where the rest of the monsters that the cult has tamed will go to, my guess is in the third transfer points of the three summoners. From the disfigured woman. Thewless country.


    An entire country, small it might be, is filled with criminals. Fighting is daily urrence for them.


    And monsters? I don¡¯t know. But maybe the criminals feel safe there since there are monsters around the ce. Let¡¯s ask that woman after this.


    Right now, I have returned everyone to Monsters World. Back to the destroyed base of the cult.


    Except for a few agents I left on the two viges, I brought everyone back and get them to rest. I got some earth mages to build shelter and ces to sleep.


    .....


    Even then, we can¡¯t sleep for too long or the news will be spread to thatwless country too soon. And they will be prepared to receive us.


    That would be troublesome. After all, we nned all this to let their guard down. That¡¯s why we¡¯re in a hurry.


    So I let the squads for the raid to the Lawless Country to rest. The fight might be even longer than the previous battles.


    Also, we asked everyone to help on Earth. Especially Varadis.


    We asked old man Henry¡¯s son, who has been doing all the jobs while old man Henry is cultivating and focusing on getting stronger to have longer lifespan, to send the army to surround thewless country.


    They willingly agree since thatwless country has been such an annoyance for them.


    I asked them as well if thatwless country has its border to the sea. And the answer is yes.


    In fact, thatwless country was founded by a group of pirate. So my guess is totally correct.


    We need Spot and his children to help us. And I need to ask Lina to help us by lending us Sunny and Elsie.


    With Sunny power, she can absorb water, even if it¡¯s salt water, and get herself big. She will be a huge help with Elsie by her side to watch the surrounding.


    This will be a huge battle between monsters.


    Should I bring Andro with me as well?


    No, he¡¯s too big. Everyone outside that country will be scared when they see a giant dragon flying above them. Big enough to to stomp a city with just his foot.


    I asked the disfigured woman if there¡¯s anything I need to know about the country.


    ¡°Why should I tell you more? If you have any difficulties in the previous two viges, you don¡¯t have any chance at all to fight in that country. Just go there and die!¡±


    I guess she has gained immunity against me now. She no longer afraid of me. Maybe I can give her pain to let her understand. But I don¡¯t want to spend any more energy on her or any of the three summoners.


    ¡°Hey, you over there.¡±


    I called out the guy from the ve trading vige.


    ¡°What?¡±


    ¡°I met your father. He said that once a disappointment, you will always be a disappointment. He even told me that I can kill you,¡± I said.


    The man is in despair after hearing that. Though my intention is not about him allowing me to kill this man.


    ¡°I don¡¯t care about you. And I don¡¯t want to spare anymore energy for you. I just want to tell you about how your father died.¡±


    I then told him how his father died. From how I first shot his hand, to the chase, and to when I cut down his leg. Forcing him to use healing magic on himself, only to let his guard down and got himself wounded even more.


    ¡°You know what he did afterward? He was a master level wind mage. He created a powerful and destructive hurricane that destroys everything on the way. He killed a lot of cult members by himself and wounded even more. Helping us in making our mission easier than expected. Even if there were some casualties, it was your father who killed most of the cult members,¡± I said.


    ¡°...And what do you intent to do with telling me that information?¡± the summoner asked.


    ¡°To you? Nothing yet. But at least I know of a n for thatwless country. I can just force the master level mages in that country to destroy everything. I won¡¯t have to do much to see that country destroyed. So what if that country has more master level mages? Even if they use weaker magic, they can still kill their fellow members of the cult. As an Aura user, I can do that. It¡¯s fine if you can¡¯t tell us anything else. Just know that whether I will win or not, your lives will be forfeit either way. But I¡¯ll make sure that you will experience pain before your death,¡± I said before turning my back on the three summoners.


    The three fell into deeper despair after hearing that. Death is fine for them. but not pain.


    I regrouped with Ka and the others. Including Derek who is with us.


    ¡°So, you¡¯ve heard what I said, right? If not, then I will repeat again. One of our ns is to let the master level mages on that side to cast destructive magic to kill everyone there. So those who wille, I guess you all will, have to resolve themselves,¡± I said.


    ¡°Not a problem. Basically, nothing changed. We will continue put up our guard and protect ourselves in case such thing happened,¡± Ka said.


    Everyone also nodded and said that they agree with the n if possible. Since that will make it easier for us as well.


    Then I asked Derek if he can use any destructive magic.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. I have never used such powerful magic like that hurricane from before,¡± he said.


    ¡°Then do it now. Let¡¯s move to the forest over there and use your strongest magic,¡± I said.


    Then he flew to the forest. All of us just watched from afar.


    Derek then cast powerful hurricane magic just like the mage from before. It was quite destructive indeed, but hecked power. And the scale is much smaller than the mage from before. Just shows how muchcking he ispared to the mage I killed.


    ¡°Veronica, if it¡¯s you, you can do that as well, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Nope. I can¡¯t use something that destructive. I can create a hurricane smaller than that one, and I don¡¯t think it will destroy much. Though I can make it so the wind will be sharp and still kill many people,¡± she said.


    Yeah. If she focused on making the wind sharper, that¡¯s possible. Which mean if any of the mages in our group reached master level mage, the destructive power we can give will be much bigger. I can¡¯t wait for that to happen.


    And truly, I can¡¯t wait. We need toplete the mission soon we have time limit before the people in that country heard of the news and increase their guard.


    ¡°I guess we all need to reach master level after this mission is over. Even if it¡¯s just one of us, that would be great. But let¡¯s focus on the battle ahead first.¡±


    I reached expert level in my summoning element quite a while already. Though I only made a contract with Ray a bitter. But after the fight tonight alone, I feel that my summoning is rapidly increasing. Maybe because I used all my familiars in battle.


    Once I reached master level in summoning, what will I get other than another contracted monster? Maybe a portal bigger than Andro. That would be great. Though I need something even better.


    After Derek returned, I told everyone to take a rest before the next battle.


    Meanwhile, I opened a portal to call Spot and ask for his and his children¡¯s help. I also told the kings about the next battle and that I needed Spot, so they can¡¯t ask for our help anytime soon.


    I also told them that if there any ghost monsters, Sonia will fight with us. Delivering messages would be difficult. But they agree with our n.


    ¡°So, you need my help to kill sea monsters? Not just me, but my children as well?¡± Spot asked.


    ¡°Yes. Once I¡¯m there, I will quickly go to the sea and open a portal. I won¡¯t be able to enter the sea yet with all the fight onnd. So I want to leave it to you and your children,¡± I said.


    Spot might be a hybrid of Sky Serpent and Sea Serpent. But his children are only Sea Serpents. They can¡¯t fly. So it¡¯s best to get them to the sea first.


    And unlike Spot, they can¡¯t shrunk in size. So I will need to maintain the portal big enough and long enough for all his children to enter.


    ¡°You don¡¯t have to worry about that. All my children now can shrink. Though they can¡¯t shrink as much as I can. We will be on our small form when you bring us there. But once we¡¯re there, I will turn big and carry all my children to the sea. You only need to care about your own fight. As for us, we will enjoy our family time,¡± Spot said.


    His family time is spend by killing monsters? That¡¯s good enough for me. I won¡¯tin to any family whose hobbies will help me.


    Well, that¡¯s the sea taken care of. Not all, but at least Spot and his children are good enough to hold for a while if not destroying thempletely.

 Chapter 727 - 727 Entering the Lawless Country

    727 Entering the Lawless Country


    We have rested enough. It¡¯s finally time to fight in the Lawless Country.


    ¡°Roy, Varadis has started the attack already. The people in thewless country are upied by the soldiers of Varadis. They won¡¯t expect that a portal will open somewhere in the middle of the country,¡± Sonia reported.


    The ce where the portal will be opened is most likely to somewhere important. A ce where the cult members in that ce received information from the summoners here.


    Unless they keep the reports somewhere. The reports won¡¯t just stay in one ce the whole time after all. It should be brought to someone important.


    In the two viges, the portal opened inside the church. In some sort of office of someone important.


    The same is possible with thewless country as well. It could be a church, cathedral, or somewhere else. Maybe even in the middle of a farm.


    I actually wanted to bring soldiers from other country to help subjugating thewless country as well. But that mean I have to open up portals several more times.


    I have used portal many times already. Even with Mana Potions, it¡¯s best if I could save some Mana instead of using it. That¡¯s why only soldiers from Varadis will help since they already prepared soldiers in the border between Varadis and thewless country for a long time.


    They have been informed that reinforcement wille from the middle of the country. We needed to report them many things since most of them are not mages who have helped us.


    .....


    So just like back then, we wore purple cloth as a mark to tell them that we¡¯re not enemies.


    Even then, maybe those soldiers won¡¯t be enough. So, other than us who will enter from the middle, Varadis is sending more reinforcement. They should arrive during our fight there. It should be soon.


    ¡°Jewel, can you protect the portal?¡± I asked Jewel.


    ¡°It won¡¯t be hard. The portal won¡¯t stay open for too long, right?¡± jewel confidently said.


    ¡°Good. Shelia, how¡¯s your injuries?¡± this time I asked Shelia.


    ¡°Don¡¯t you dare leave me out of this battle. I¡¯m perfectly healthy,¡± she said.


    She didn¡¯t participate in the previous two vige raids because of injuries. The mage she was fighting before was about as strong as the one who created the hurricane.


    And now, in thewless country, we can assume that there won¡¯t just be powerful master level mages over there. There could be more monsters that could be as strong as those master level mages as well.


    I¡¯m d that Shelia has recovered. It hasn¡¯t been long, and she should be much stronger than before after experiencing difficult battle.


    It¡¯s a good idea to let her stay in the Monsters Vige to rest and got the angels to heal her.


    Though once she¡¯s healed, she ran by herself from the vige to the destroyed base of the cult. As soon as she arrives, sheined why I didn¡¯t bring her to the previous raids.


    Well, she¡¯s here now. She will be a great help and can help Jewel protect the portal.


    ¡°Prepare yourself. I will open the portal in a few seconds,¡± I said.


    I look around and see that everyone is ready. Including Derek.


    I thought that he would not participate here. But it seems like he has resolved himself to fight to the end. That¡¯s good.


    I¡¯m sitting on Ray¡¯s back with Victoria as my armor. I pocketed Reizpear again after breaking it into pieces. Victoria and my magic or Aura weapons will be more useful than Reizpear here. Though I don¡¯t know if I will ever use those weapons.


    I opened the portal and rushed in. I¡¯m bringing Spot and his entire family with me.


    As soon as I jumped in, I destroyed the wall in front of us. We¡¯re really inside a building. And I can see the people here are moving somewhere. Probably to the border so they can fight Varadis¡¯ soldiers.


    After I entered, Jewel and Shelia entered with Jewel transformed into a triceratops. Maybe I should have given her the fis stocking so she won¡¯t be harmed with fire magic. But seeing a dinosaur wearing a fis stocking is weird.


    I looked toward where the sea is, and threw Spot who have turned quite big enough to lift his children in the sky.


    And in the sky, Spot flung his body to throw his children into the sea.


    Really? That¡¯s bad parenting over there. Though it seems like his children enjoyed it.


    All his children transformed into their original size mid air and dive into the sea. And Spot is flying in the sky before diving into the sea as well.


    While the people are in terror seeing giant serpents jumping into the sea, soon after, I can see several huge monsters in the sea fighting against Spot¡¯s children.


    I was right. They do have powerful monsters in the sea. And some of them were even bigger than Spot¡¯s real size.


    ¡°We¡¯ll rake care of the sea battle! I¡¯ll leave thend and air to you!¡± Spot said as he joined his children.


    There are also powerful monsters onnd. They are gathered in onerge area. And some of them even have wings and can fly.


    Well, they will be our enemies.


    I need to focus on something else. Not the monsters, not the master level mages.


    But children. Even if they belong to the enemies, none of us dare to fight children. And the children of this country... from what I can see, they are experienced with hardship.


    When we caused some noise from the fight, and probably when the soldiers from Varadis attacked this country, the children grabbed anything they can use as weapons. Knives, hammers, axes, anything.


    They are ready to fight. And our side are not ready to fight children.


    So, it will be my job to make sure that we won¡¯t fight the children, and the children can¡¯t fight us.


    ¡°Victoria, we will be known as the biggest child kidnappers in history after this event,¡± I said to Victoria.


    ¡°No. Not me at least. Just you. Let¡¯s do it and save those children.¡±


    This is where I will use my portal most.


    When I captured children, I will open a portal to a transfer points in Consenza where Celestine has been waiting so she can receive the children. There, I can leave everything to her and everyone in Consenza.


    But seeing this ce, it seems like there are more children than I expected. I guess I need to drink more Mana Potionster then.


    Ignoring the walls and everything else, I had Ray go to where I see children. They raised their weapons at me, but it won¡¯t work. Even their small knives were not able to pierce through my skin.


    I grabbed the children and threw them into the portal where Celestine is. And when I see someone who is no longer young but tried to protect the children, I also grabbed them.


    Celestine told me that I shouldn¡¯t just grab the children. I should grab someone who might be their guardian as well so the children won¡¯t be in too much panic since they have someone, an adult probably, whom they can trust.


    And this one tried to help the children with just beginner level magic. Seems like not everyone here is truly evil. They only experienced with evil. Not evil themselves.


    Living in this ce, which even called aswless country, they need to adapt to the evil of other people so they can survive. That¡¯s why even children took up arms.


    But I don¡¯t care. I don¡¯t need to know their stories. I only need to do my job. Grab all the children and their guardians, and bring them to Celestine.


    Celestine helped me a few hours ago in the fight in the cathedral. But after that, after interrogating the disfigured woman and learn the existence of this country, Albert informed everyone and Celestine suggested to help the children as much as possible. So we agreed.


    Once I saved all the children, we will try to provoke the master level mage to use destructive magic so they will end up helping us in destroying this ce.


    I can see that some mages and monsters are chasing after me. I can hear from their order that they are either to capture me, stop me, kill me, or kidnap the children and use them as hostages.


    For those trying to kill me, unless they are master level mages, they are not worthy to be killed by me. I will let the others to fight them.


    But for the master level mages, or those who are trying to grab the children and use them as hostages, I will kill them before they can reach the children.


    It might be a small country, but the size is several times bigger than the capital of Tatrama. It took me a while just to locate all the children.


    Meanwhile, I can see Spot¡¯s children is fighting against a huge starfish that can jump and fly into the sky. That¡¯s crazy. Though Spot helped his children and the starfish died soon after.


    Land, water, and air. There are battles everywhere. But we won¡¯t lose. We will fight on until the cult is destroyedpletely.

 Chapter 728 - 728 Two Extra Master Level Mages

    728 Two Extra Master Level Mages


    By this time, the enemies are spread out. Trying to kill us and also to grab children who I haven¡¯t caught yet to be used as hostages.


    I even had some problem. Especially with smart kids.


    They grabbed knives, and tried to stab me in my heart when I grabbed them. some of them are smart enough to aim for my eyes instead. But I just need to close my eyes and cover it with Aura.


    I don¡¯t know what will happen if my eyes were to be hit directly with knives if I cover it with Aura. But I won¡¯t try it.


    It was easy for me since I can still see with my eyes closed. But how the kids are trying to kill me no matter what, it was troublesome.


    Good thing they didn¡¯t try to shave my hair. Or I will be like Kron and needed to wear bandana.


    Though if it¡¯s a cut from knives, I think my hair will still grow. So it¡¯s not much a problem. But I just don¡¯t like it. So I stopped those who used knives or any sharp weapons to hit my head.


    Once I captured enough kids that my hands were full, I would open a portal and throw them inside. I hope Celestine and the others won¡¯t have too much trouble with the kids.


    There are more kids than I expected. I guess this is awless country indeed. They do it however they like or even force girls to do it, and get the girls pregnant. I hate this country even more.


    .....


    The people here thinks that this is a free country. It is a free country after all. But withoutws and rules to restraint their freedom, they¡¯re just criminals. Hence the namewless country.


    Though after hearing these people calling this ce as free country, I really want to kill them all.


    But I can¡¯t yet. I need to save the children first. There are way too many of them.


    The enemies are shouting at each others. Trying to get as many children as possible. And that can also be used for our advantages.


    Some of the people here actually grabbed children somewhere I can see, and screamed to let me bring them away from there. So before the enemies get them first, I captured them and throw them into the portal.


    ¡°Take my children!¡±


    ¡°At least just my brother!¡±


    ¡°Help me!¡±


    Many were shouting for me to kidnap their children. So I also grabbed them as well. Whether they are their father, mother, brother, sister, or even a total stranger. I just grabbed them.


    I don¡¯t think that any of them were master level mages. That¡¯s why I¡¯m fine with taking them all in. Though even if they were master level mages, Celestine should be able to handle them.


    But I don¡¯t want to risk it. Celestine can handle expert level mages easily. But for master level mages, even if she could kill them, there might be some casualties. Including children.


    That¡¯s why I didn¡¯t bring those who might be master level mages. Instead, I either kill them or told them to kill the cult members here.


    It¡¯s nice. More of them are helping us. At least we have two more master level mages. But it wasn¡¯t easy to get them help us.


    One of them think that I was kidnapping his daughter. So he tried to kill me. But after I threw his daughter into the portal, he followed me while asking why I do that.


    I didn¡¯t say that I¡¯m saving his daughter from the cult. I just say that his daughter will be our hostage since we don¡¯t kill children. He reluctantly helped us kill cult members.


    The other is slightly better. She was nearby when I opened a portal to throw some children and their guardian in. And she saw the inside of the portal that Celestine and the others were actually trying to help them.


    So, she flew to my location with her sister and her sister¡¯s kids and told me to take them somewhere safe.


    ¡°If you bring them to safety, I will help you whatever your goal is!¡± she said.


    ¡°We¡¯re destroying everything rted to the cult!¡± I said as I grabbed her sister and her sister¡¯s kids and threw them into a portal.


    She nodded and helped us killing the enemies.


    As for the previous guy whose daughter I grabbed, he saw our conversation and asked us our real goal. While I grab other children, I told him that we took children to safety and kill the rest. And he decided to help us as well. This time, I didn¡¯t force him.


    ¡°What about their guardian? I know some master level mages who have kids,¡± he asked.


    ¡°Some will live, while some will die. I only care about the children. And it¡¯s best to kill the rest. I¡¯m sorry to the children who will be orphans because of me. But it¡¯s their parent¡¯s decision if they wanted to fight me or not,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then I will try to convince those people that you are taking our children to safety. Some will probably help you,¡± he said.


    ¡°You might be killed if they think that you¡¯re betraying them, you know?¡± I said.


    ¡°If you¡¯re sorry that you make the children into orphans, I¡¯m sure that you have taken some precautions. I don¡¯t care if I die as long as my daughter can live. So, if I really die, please tell my daughter that I died a hero. She loves stories of heroes,¡± he said.


    ¡°Then don¡¯t die and keep reading those stories to your daughter. Wear this purple cloth so we will think that you¡¯re on our side. Though if you betray us, I will kill you,¡± I said.


    Then I also gave another purple cloth to the woman from before as well. And I continue looking for children.


    I told those two master level mages that if there are other master level mages willing to help, to tell me right away before I kill them. It¡¯s so that I can see if they truly wanted to help or they actually thinking of betraying uster.


    As for expert level mages who wanted to help, I just gave it to them. The others can easily handle those expert level mages.


    Though I witnessed some of them tried to give those purple cloth to other people. So I killed them.


    It¡¯s good that purple dye is not something that everyone can get. It¡¯s extremely rare. That¡¯s why most people only know the color purple from eggnts or few fruits.


    And it¡¯s not something that the cult would buy. Why would they buy something to dye their clothes? That¡¯s why it¡¯s best to wear purple cloth to differentiate between enemies or allies.


    Some people managed to grab children as hostages. But before they could do anything, they got attacked by someone. Even the werewolves attacked those who used children as hostages.


    The two master level mages who joined us then helped looking for other children and protect them. The soldiers will help them as well. So the two master level mages, three since Derek also joined to help protecting children, just need to get the children in three different locations and wait until I can get there.


    They and the soldiers will help protecting the children until I can bring them all to safety.


    Now that we have three master level mages, my job became easier. Though it¡¯s still not easy. Just easier.


    There are also many monsters blocking my way. The angels even have difficulties to do their job to heal the injured people. They can only fight the monsters themselves before they can heal others.


    The vampires and werewolves thene to help the angels. The monsters here are stronger than any monsters we have faced.


    There¡¯s even another archangel here. He¡¯s fighting Graham. But since Graham is not a pure angel, and he can create shadow clones, it didn¡¯t take long until Graham defeated the other archangel.


    Since they canmunicate, they are talking while in a fight. It seems like the archangel doesn¡¯t want to fight. He was just forced to because he¡¯s under contract with a tamer.


    So Graham knocked him out before he¡¯s trying to hunt the tamer who made a contract with that archangel. I hope he can find the tamer. Adding another archangel in our group would be great.


    And then it happens. As we predicted, a master level mage finally used his full power to try to kill everyone.


    He¡¯s a master level ice mage. He froze everything starting from the huge mansion in the middle of the city.


    Is that him? The one called as Barbarian King?


    Whatever.


    As soon as the ice started to spread, I shouted at the top of my lung to warn everyone. Including Spot and his children at the sea.


    ¡°HE¡¯S A MASTER LEVEL ICE MAGE! WATCH OUT FOR THE ICE! KEEP YOUR DISTANCE FROM THAT MANSION AT THE CENTER!¡±


    Some get themselves frozen. But most people managed to escape death.


    The ice freeze everything that it touched. Even in the air, it was freezing cold.


    So strong. So destructive. This is master level mage.


    Spot and his children dive deeper and further into the sea to avoid getting themselves frozen. I can no longer see them with my Divine Vision, but at least I didn¡¯t see any of them getting frozen even though some other monsters got themselves frozen.


    The others are fine. Since it seems like the Barbarian King doesn¡¯t have wind element, most of us avoid the ice by flying in the sky. It¡¯s still freezing above, but it¡¯s better than being frozen down there.


    Good thing that I have delivered all the children here by the time the Barbarian King made his move. With this, all that is left is to kill everyone.

 Chapter 729 - 729 Another Archbishop?

    729 Another Archbishop?


    All the children I can see have been moved away to a safe ce. But now, the one they called as the Barbarian King, the king of thiswless country and also probably the strongest person here, made his move.


    With my Divine Vision, I can see that he was talking with someone that wears the same garb as the previous Archbishop I captured. Is that another Archbishop? Why is there so many of them?


    Maybe each Archbishop lead different factions. I will know moreter after Albert finished his interrogation with the captured Archbishop. Though I don¡¯t think I will care much about it. But as long as I can destroy the cult, everything is fine.


    While I was checking on the Barbarian King and the Archbishop, those two also looked at me at the same time. Obviously, they couldn¡¯t see me. There are walls obstructing their view, and the don¡¯t have any see-through vision. But they know that I¡¯m looking at them.


    ¡°Roy, is the Barbarian King over there?¡±


    Before I made my move, Ang approached me and asked me about the Barbarian King¡¯s whereabouts.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. He¡¯s with someone who might be the Archbishop of the cult. Do you want to challenge him?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. He¡¯s the strongest one here, so I want to see how strong he really is. But I don¡¯t think I can fight well with so many people here distracting me,¡± she said.


    ¡°Okay, we... let¡¯s stop it for now and dodge. There are other master level mages here using powerful magic. Let them kill their own people first.¡±


    .....


    I was about to say that we fight each one of them. with Ang fighting the Barbarian King and I fight the Archbishop. But another big magic ising from different master level mage. So we needed to dodge it first.


    This time, it¡¯s just a huge earthquake that split the earth. And since most of us dodged the ice magic by flying, we¡¯re already safe in the sky. But that¡¯s only if it¡¯s a normal earthquake.


    After the earthquake, giant needlesing out of the ground trying to stab us. But we just need to fly higher.


    But then a master level wind mage was about to cast powerful wind magic. Fortunately, Candy was there to kill him first. She was prepared to intervene the master level mage.


    Many expert level mages of the cult died. And some of our soldiers died as well. But that means only the strong ones are left.


    The werewolves happily fight anyone they see. Monsters or humans, only the strong ones are left.


    As for the sea, some of the frozen area was no longer frozen. Because one of Spot¡¯s children is smashing his body to a giant dolphin and and the dolphin crashed on the ice. And Spot himself jumped to the sky to chase after a flying whale and shoot a breath attack that destroyed the ice. And some of the frozen monsters as well.


    It was intense in the water as well. I¡¯m d that I met Spot and get him to be our ally.


    And then I can see a lot of orcas approaching from the sea. It seems like they¡¯re also tamed monsters.


    Only one orca was different. It has a pink spot on its ck head. And it acts like the leader of the orcas.


    ¡°That¡¯s a lot of orcas! It¡¯s an orchastra!¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°You know what? Shut up. Enough with the stupid pun.¡±


    ¡°Roy, I¡¯ll help Spot and the others. You don¡¯t mind if we leave you, right?¡± Victoria suggested.


    ¡°Be careful then.¡±


    I jumped off from Ray¡¯s back as both Victoria and Ray left me to help Spot and his family.


    How many orcas were there? I think it¡¯s more than three hundreds. I don¡¯t think the cult has too much time to tame that many orcas. So it must be only that orca with pink spot who acted as the leader.


    ¡°Sunny! Elsie! You both go to the sea, absorb water to make Sunny bigger, and support everyone! Elsie will watch everything and give Sunny a target. Support everyone in the air,nd, or water!¡± I said to both of Lina¡¯s contracted monsters.


    I think it should be soon that Lina reached expert level and gained another monsters. The Elf Queen is not much of a help in battle.


    Sunny and Elsie are the monsters I brought here with Lina¡¯s permission. They are slow, and if Sunny turns big, she will only be a big target.


    But that¡¯s only if the enemy outnumber us.


    Thanks to their master level mages used powerful magic to kill as many people as possible, most of the enemies are dead. Leaving only the strong ones.


    And those strong enemies will be busy fighting us since we no longer have to focus on weak enemies. That¡¯s why Sunny can freely turn big.


    Not only her magic attack is powerful. She can also use her vines as tentacles to not only attack or restrain enemies, but to be used as foothold as well for those who can¡¯t fly well.


    And for that, Elsie is instructing her how to move and where to attack. Those two have perfect teamwork.


    Now... I¡¯d like to say that we have outnumber the enemies, but I¡¯m wrong.


    Just like that orca, there are other monsters here. The cult probably only tamed the leader of a certain species, so other of the same species would follow them. Just like how I get the angels. By making a contract with Graham.


    As for werewolves, I won the fight fair and square. I¡¯m their king.


    And I look around to see that almost all expert level mages here were dead. Which means that the tamers are among the master level mage here. And that make things difficult.


    Though so far, I didn¡¯t see any summoner among them. I think that¡¯s a good news.


    But if the tamer is the Barbarian King, it will be hard to stop the monsters. Even then, we still need to kill the monsters. Because unless they are smart creatures we can negotiate with, they will continue to fight everyone here.


    I guess it¡¯s an all-out brawl from here on out.


    ¡°Ang, you can fight the Barbarian King. I will fight that one that look like an Archbishop. Veronica,e with me for a bit and check if that Archbishop is someone you know or not.¡±


    I gave the order, and everyone moves. Both us and the enemies. With a giant serpent wrapping its body around a giant electric eel at the background.


    Damn, monsters are scary! And sea monsters are far scarier since only limited people can fight them underwater.


    But once they¡¯re outside of water, many can fight them.


    The werewolves approached the serpent who can¡¯t seem to kill the electric ell by tightly wrapping its body around the eel. In fact, it was the serpent who got hurt. So the werewolvese and finished the eel off.


    And although the werewolves can¡¯t fight that well underwater, they can still fight. So they only fight monsters who surfaced or near the surface of the sea. They are so amazing. I¡¯m so d that I became their king.


    I can leave the sea to them. As for the sky, we already have many flying mages and monsters. And thend is good as well. So we will face the boss.


    ¡°Ang, if you win, you can actually be a queen of a country, you know?¡± I said to Ang who is flying beside me toward the ce where the Barbarian King and the Archbishop are.


    ¡°Then as a queen, what do you think I should do?¡± she asked.


    ¡°Either you can give up your territory to Varadis, or continue as the queen of this country. Though after we killed so many people, it¡¯s best to just give Varadis this ce. They can take care of the rest,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then I will do that. I don¡¯t want to be a queen,¡± she said.


    ¡°Even though I¡¯m a king?¡± I teased her.


    ¡°That¡¯s the only role of a queen I epted. Though if you¡¯re a king, I guess you will have concubines as well. If being a queen force me to do some paperwork, then make me your mistress instead,¡± Ang said seriously.


    ¡°...I¡¯m just a king of the werewolves. Not a king of a country. You won¡¯t have any duty at all once we get married other than being my wife. And probably as mothers of our future children as well,¡± I said.


    The two of us decided to continue this conversationter as we move toward the Barbarian King¡¯s ce. Followed by Veronica who will look at the Archbishop.


    And as we get closer, the Barbarian King and the Archbishop left their ce and greeted us.


    ¡°Is this how an Aura user and the one called as the strongest mage in the continent act? Toe in uninvited and destroy everything?¡± the Archbishop asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s what you do best, right? You¡¯re part of the cult whose goal is to destroy the world. I don¡¯t know why the Barbarian King join you guys,¡± I said.


    ¡°Wait, you¡¯re trying to destroy the world?!¡± the Barbarian was shocked by the revtion.


    ¡°Is that matter right now? We have enemies to face. Fightinges first. You take care of that champion of the tournament, and I will take care of the Aura user. We¡¯ll talkter,¡± the Archbishop said.


    ¡°But you won¡¯t have any chance to talk after this!¡±


    I quickly grabbed the Archbishop¡¯s head, jumped, and threw him far from the Barbarian King. I acted after hearing Veronica¡¯s confirmation that she doesn¡¯t recognize this Archbishop and she left us to fight other people.


    This time, I thought that the Arcbishop will be knocked out like before. But instead, he stood on his ground after being thrown.


    Well, I guess it¡¯s a fight then.

 Chapter 730 - 730 War Between Monsters

    730 War Between Monsters


    Spot is leading his children to fight the group of orcas. Hundreds of orcas.


    The difference in number might be too big, but this is still a fight between monsters. So no one knows how the fight will end.


    Many other sea monsters have been defeated. But that doesn¡¯t mean all of them were dead. There were still some other sea monsters fighting.


    But luckily, Victoria was there to help Spot. She¡¯s riding on Ray who can move fast even underwater and killed weaker monsters.


    She also tried to kill an orca, but the orca was stronger than ordinary orca. These orcas were originally normal orcas, but because of the effect of the Orca King, the orca with a pink spot in the forehead, the other orcas slowly transforming into monster orcas. No longer just animals.


    Victoria couldn¡¯t defeat even one of them easily. She managed to deeply wound one of them, but other orcas then protected the wounded orca and attacked Victoria.


    Victoria would be fine if she got attacked. But not Ray. And Victoria won¡¯t be able to use Aura to fight if Ray is not with her.


    One orca managed to bite Ray¡¯s leg. But Ray kicked its head and escaped. Ray is just slightly faster than that orca.


    ¡®Can Spot and his children beat them all? If we could just defeat the leader, the rest should be easy. Or if we can find the tamer of king of the orcas, it won¡¯t be difficult to handleter,¡¯ Victoria thought to herself.


    .....


    As she thought, defeating the leader or the tamer will make things easier for them. But they can¡¯t depend too much on other people to win easily as well. She also needs to help the others after she finished her duty in the sea.


    Not to mention, Sonia who scouted the area first is being chased by several ghosts. She can¡¯t win on her own. So Sonia needed the help from Victoria or Roy.


    And since Roy will be the busiest person there, Victoria needed to finish everything as soon as possible to help Sonia with the iing ghosts.


    Sonia managed to lure the ghosts to chase after her instead of killing the others. It¡¯s not without reason.


    The tamer who tamed the ghosts is a master level mage in other element as well. He detected Sonia and thought that she would be a huge obstacle in the fight. So he ordered the ghosts to kill Sonia first.


    The rest of the tamers, who tamed a lot of monsters, were all master level mages. And after most of the people in the cult were killed, they no longer have the need to hide their strength. But they weren¡¯t able to do it since they have enemies to fight. They need time until their powerful magic was ready.


    And so, Roy and everyone were thinking the same thing. They have to finish the enemy in front of them first so they can help the others as soon as possible.


    And the enemies being master level mages, any destructive magic those mages used won¡¯t be enough to kill other master level mages. So the soldiers have to put everything in the line just to make sure those mages were not able to cast any destructive magic.


    Spot also wanted to help the others. But the enemies this time, the orcas, were too many. And he couldn¡¯t get close to the leader.


    Even when he used his breath attack to target the orca with pink spot on its forehead, the other orcas would move to protect their leader. Several orcas then died, but the leader was protected.


    And then, each serpents, Spot included, were surrounded by dozens of orcas. Each of the orcas were twice the size of ordinary orcas. Which mean they have became monsterspletely.


    As for the Orca King himself, he¡¯s smaller than ordinary orca. And the pink spot made it easier to locate it.


    The serpents then got themselves bitten by the orcas. They were struggling, but the orcas¡¯ jaws were too powerful and it might even bite a chunk of their meat.


    Spot then used his full power to bring his children to the sky because the orcas won¡¯t be able to do anything there. But he dropped one of his children on the sea and that one was bitten again.


    Victoria then helped the fallen serpent by wounding the big orcas one by one. Still, they didn¡¯t die because their skin was too thick.


    But at least the serpent was freed.


    ¡®We can¡¯t do anything about these orcas. It¡¯s best to just focus on the enemies onnd. We shouldn¡¯t havee to the sea,¡± Victoria thought.


    Spot was also thinking of the same thing. And the wounded serpent then turned small, still big though, and Ray took it out of the sea.


    But that wasn¡¯t the end. The orcas were so good in their teamwork.


    ¡°FOCUS ON THE ORCAS FIRST!¡±


    That was Roy shouting amand to not get Spot and everyone leave the sea.


    Then they realized what the orcas were nning.


    The orcas moving together to create a tsunami. With that many orcas, everything on the shore will be destroyed by the tsunami.


    It was toote when they realized it. So they tried to get as many soldiers as high as possible, or hold onto Sunny who is in her big form and rooted to the ground to not get pushed by the current.


    Some escaped to the air by the help of the monsters. But several non-flying mages got carried by the wave and lost in the sea.


    ¡°Fuck!¡±


    Victoria realized that she did the wrong thing and let the soldiers died. But she didn¡¯t lose her mind in her failures and quickly think of a n.


    ¡°Spot, shoot at the leader of the orcas from here!¡± she said.


    ¡°But the others will protect him!¡± Spot said.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine! Just do it!¡±


    Spot then do as Victoria told him to, and shot a breath attack into the water.


    As expected, other orcas were protecting the leader even if they have to die. But at least they didn¡¯t try to create another wave because of this.


    The breath attack created a hole in the sea. And Victoria move to the opening at once.


    There, she looks for the leader and tried to kill it.


    With Ray¡¯s speed, the two familiars charged toward the Orca King. And with no hesitation, even with the water pressure, Victoria shed her sword and wounded the Orca King.


    Wounded. Not killed.


    The orcas then surrounded Victoria and Ray, and some were protecting their king.


    Victoria realized that her n failed, but Ray didn¡¯t.


    Very quickly, Ray dropped Victoria from his back and kicked her toward the wounded Orca King.


    Victoria knew that that was herst chance. And again, she swung her sword and finally killed the leader of the orcas.


    Their leader died. But that doesn¡¯t mean the orcas will stop being aggressive. Especially since they knew that Victoria and the others are their enemies.


    There won¡¯t be anything that will lead the orcas to create another tsunami. But they are still powerful creatures of the sea. And both Victoria and Ray were surrounded by them.


    Not for long.


    Roy who was busy fighting the Archbishop, also paid his attention to other battles. And when he saw the two killed the Orca King, he summoned the two of them to his side to get them away from the danger.


    ¡°Good job. Take care of the rest!¡±


    Roy said to the soaked familiars. Victoria then rode on Ray¡¯s back again to help Spot and the others. This time, they won¡¯t leave the sea until all the monsters at the sea were eradicated.


    Even if the orcas won¡¯t create another tsunami, that doesn¡¯t mean that they can¡¯t.


    Spot and his children dove into the sea again. And this time, with no one acting as the leader, defeating the orcas were much easier than before.


    The serpents were ecstatic that they can finally take revenge to the orcas who have bitten on them.


    There were still many orcas, but the orcas were no longer as strong as before. So there¡¯s no need for all of them to fight the orcas.


    ¡°Victoria, you go and help the others. Leave the orcas to my children. I will fight other sea monsters here,¡± Spot said to Victoria.


    ¡°Alright! Good luck!¡±


    Victoria and Ray left the sea. And this time, they¡¯re going to Sonia¡¯s side to help her kill the ghosts. Or exorcised them.


    With Victoria helping her, the two former Aura users defeated the ghosts easily even though the ghosts there were much stronger than the previous ghosts they fought together.


    The ck Slime and the ghost have learned how to fight ghosts well from their previous experiences.


    ¡°Victoria, the reinforcement hase! But if we can¡¯t defeat the master level mages here soon, there will be more casualties!¡± Sonia said.


    After defeating the ghosts together, she teleported to the border of the country and see that the reinforcement has arrived.


    ¡°You will continue scouting and be the messenger. I will help the others again.¡±


    The Orca King has been defeated. There were still some powerful sea monsters, but their attack won¡¯t reach the shore since Spot and his children were fighting them.


    But nothing is over with how the master level mages were still fighting.

 Chapter 731 - 731 Another Archangel Joined

    731 Another Archangel Joined


    It was before the tsunami caused by the orcas. Graham is looking around in search of someone.


    Before this, he had fought against another archangel. The archangel he fought was forced to made a contract with a tamer and had no choice but to obey his master¡¯smand.


    And so, Graham and that archangel fought one-on-one.


    Even if the archangel was forced to fight, it doesn¡¯t mean that the archangel couldn¡¯t tell anything to Graham.


    ¡°Hey! You also got yourself tamed? We have shitty fate, huh?¡± the archangel asked Graham mid-fight.


    ¡°Kind of. But now, I willingly joined my master. Your side, had my sister modified until she lost her mind. She doesn¡¯t even remember who I am. So I promised myself to help my master to destroy the cult. What about you? If you want, I will try to kill your master and free you from the contract. You can join us or not after you gain your freedom. Just like the angels who came with me. It was their choice to fight the cult,¡± Graham asked the archangel.


    But the archangel didn¡¯t reply to that suggestion.


    ¡°I understand. Your master is too close and can contact you with telepathy. I will take you far from the range of telepathy, and ask you again.¡±


    After that, Graham created clones of himself and grabbed the archangel to somewhere far before asked him again.


    .....


    ¡°I will decide after I get to know your master¡¯s intention from the person himself. My master is too far now, but I can¡¯t disobey his order to fight right now. You¡¯re stronger than me. Knock me out first then you can kill my shitty master,¡± the archangel said.


    ¡°Alright. Before that, tell me who is your master,¡± Graham asked.


    The archangel then informed Graham about the appearance of his master, and thest known location where the archangel sensed his master at.


    ¡°Be careful. He¡¯s a master level wind mage,¡± the archangel said before he lost consciousness from Graham hitting his head over and over again.


    ¡°Shit. Your head is too hard,¡± Graham said.


    And it was at this time that the center of the city was frozen. Soon afer, earthquake followed.


    Graham looked around and he finally saw a mage flying at the location that the previous archangel said.


    While the others were busy protecting themselves from the spikes that came out from the earth, Graham quickly flew toward the flying mage.


    There¡¯s another wind mage, but Candy killed him first. However, the master level wind mage that she killed was not the master of the archangel.


    And when the tsunami happened, Graham finally located the tamer. He was fighting against Wendy.


    The mage was too strong for Wendy. Not only because he¡¯s a master level mage, but also because Wendy had been fighting for a long time.


    When the mage was about to kill Wendy, Graham appeared and interfere with the mage before he could cast his magic.


    ¡°Leave him to me! You go help the others!¡± Graham said to Wendy.


    ¡°Thanks! I¡¯ll leave him to you then,¡± Wendy replied.


    It¡¯s not just Wendy. But the others were exhausted as well after fighting non-stop. Though they did stopped for a few hours, but that¡¯s not enough rest for them who were risking their lives.


    ¡°A human obeying order from a monster? This world is destined to be doomed,¡± the tamer said.


    ¡°Maybe if you¡¯re smart enough, you can learn how to live together between different races. But no, you¡¯re stupid. That¡¯s why I respect my master,¡± Graham said as he created clones of himself.


    One giant clone, and two clones the same size as himself.


    ¡°You¡¯re not an archangel. What are you?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m a monster who have been recognized by the strongest man and the best master any monster could have. As my master wish, I will help him kill you and everything rted to the cult,¡± Graham replied.


    ¡°...That didn¡¯t answer my question at all. But if you think you can defeat me, think again!¡±


    Right after the tamer said that, he didn¡¯t cast any magic. But he called his tamed monsters. Lots of them. from the sky and on thend. They¡¯re alling to him.


    But when they were trying to attack Graham, several werewolves protected him. Angels and vampires came as well to help Graham fight the monsters, while Graham will fight the tamer.


    ¡°Our monsters move by our own will. While your monsters move because of yourmand. Themon thing both us and your monsters have is that we all hate you. None of them will be able to fight with their full strength since they hate you. But we can. To the monsters who have been tamed, I¡¯m sorry. You will have to die if we can¡¯t kill your stupid master soon. Let¡¯s go!¡±


    While on the sea Spot and the others fighting, in the sky andnd, the monsters also fighting.


    The enemies were not just monsters who have been called by the tamer of the archangel. But also from other tamers who asked their tamed monsters toe.


    ¡°Why do you get to fight him?¡±


    While they are fighting, Shelia came up to Graham and asked him why he¡¯s the one deciding the master level mage as his enemy.


    ¡°He tamed another archangel. And I promised him that I will kill his master,¡± Graham said.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll go and look for another tamer or strong mage to kill.¡±


    Arin who somehow joined them said that.


    ¡°Ah, no fair! I¡¯ll find one before you!¡± Shelia shouted.


    While this conversation happened, the tamer prepared to cast powerful wind magic. Graham and the others noticed that, but their expression didn¡¯t change. Because they have powerful support.


    Sunny who has turned big, shot a concentrated magic after absorbing light toward the tamer. And the tamer had no choice but to dodge it.


    The light beam was so fast, but the tamer used his wind magic to fly and barely dodged it before he tried to attack Sunny.


    ¡°I won¡¯t let you!¡±


    By this time, Graham and his clones had gotten so close to the tamer and attacked together.


    The enemy might be a master level wind mage, but Graham had three clones with him.


    So, when the opponent tried to escape, Graham or his clones have blocked his exit. So he couldn¡¯t get far in his escape.


    ¡°You are just a freaking monster!¡± the mage shouted.


    ¡°And you¡¯re just one human,¡± Graham said.


    Even with how powerful he is, he couldn¡¯t do much fighting against several enemies with one mind. Soon after, he got his body pierced by spears.


    ¡°Ugh... fuck. You said that your master is the strongest. But he will die today! Just like the rest of you!¡±


    That¡¯s what the tamer said on hisst breath.


    ¡°Well, he¡¯s the strongest man I know. But my master himself never thought that he¡¯s the strongest man in the world. Maybe once in a while he did think so, but at least he¡¯s smart. Still, I don¡¯t believe that he will die today. He will only die after we destroyed everyst members of the cult,¡± Graham said.


    But the man he¡¯s talking to was already dead.


    Graham looked at the surrounding. Some monsters stopped fighting, but some didn¡¯t. Those who stopped fighting were tamed by the man he just killed.


    But that doesn¡¯t mean everyone of them stopped. There¡¯s a monster who was not as smart as the others, and continue fighting. But this time, it doesn¡¯t care who the enemy is.


    And it was charging toward Graham¡¯s direction. Trying to kill him.


    But before Graham could react, an armored woman riding a horse killed that monster first.


    It¡¯s Victoria and Ray. They came to help Graham.


    ¡°Move! We need to get everyone healed! They are already exhausted!¡± Victoria shouted.


    ¡°Right. I also need to meet that archangel if he¡¯s already freed from the contract as well,¡± Graham said.


    Graham then flew toward where the archangel he defeated before was fainted at. And on the way, he killed every enemy blocking him, while also cast healing magic to all allies he encountered.


    Soon after, he¡¯s already at the archangel¡¯s side who just had his consciousness regained.


    ¡°How do you feel?¡± Graham asked the archangel.


    ¡°I feel... free. Did you kill him?¡±


    ¡°I did. Well, I¡¯ve done my part. Now I will help my allies. As for you, you are free to do what you want. You can join our side or not. If you don¡¯t want to join us, you can leave now so we won¡¯t mistake you as our enemies. I don¡¯t want to kill you,¡± Graham said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll join you. I don¡¯t know if I can trust your master or not, but I can trust you. If you can help me return to our world, I can even ask the angels following me if they want to join you or not,¡± the archangel said.


    ¡°Great. Wear this armband. Wearing this, you will be identified as our ally. My master said that he¡¯s d to have you join us,¡± Graham said.


    ¡°Telepathy? Well, tell him that I joined you. I didn¡¯t join him,¡± the archangel said.


    The two then helped fighting the cult together. With Graham showing the ropes for the newly joined archangel.


    With that, Roy¡¯s side will grow stronger if he got more recruit from the angels. But that will be for after their mission is over.

 Chapter 732 - 732 The Barbarian King’s Death

    732 The Barbarian King¡¯s Death


    The sea is safe. The orcas will no longer be a problem. And after Graham defeated a master level wind mage who was also a tamer, more monsters were freed.


    There were still some monsters belonged to other tamers, and some others who still fight everything out of rage even after being freed. But the others won¡¯t be troubled much by them.


    The real problems were the master level mages, and other strong monsters who were still under the control of the enemy¡¯s tamers.


    But after Graham defeated a tamer, it became easier for everyone. Not easy. Just easier.


    Everyone continued fighting. Other than those who were injured and needed healing.


    But now that everyone is fighting, the enemy¡¯s master level mages didn¡¯t have any chance at all to use their powerful and destructive magic like before. And other strong tamed monsters also couldn¡¯t do such attack as well because they were ordered not to attack their masters.


    The monsters, such as dragons, have powerful attack that could be considered as strong as the master level mage¡¯s destructive magic. But fortunately for Roy¡¯s group, the tamers didn¡¯t expect that their order would backfire. And that made things easier for Roy¡¯s group.


    And those tamers also didn¡¯t know that they should order their tamed monsters to not care about their own master. And even if they knew, the monsters would just happily attacked their masters and kill them if possible.


    There were many things that the enemies should do but didn¡¯t. Especially the enemy¡¯s tamers. Which made Roy¡¯s group gained some advantages.


    .....


    Even the, winning is still difficult. The others couldn¡¯t easily defeat the enemies they were facing.


    It¡¯s because of fatigue. The rest they took before raiding thewless country was not enough to recover their stamina fully. And even if they had Mana Potions, it¡¯s not like they can drink them anytime they want. And some even had their bottles of Mana Potion destroyed during a fight.


    The only thing they can rely on to recover their stamina is the angels¡¯ healing. As for Mana, they can only use magic sparingly and use their most powerful magic only when they are confident that they could kill the enemy in front of them.


    And there¡¯s another thing to do. It¡¯s to raise the morale.


    Everyone is too tired. But if their morale raised, they could have more strength to continue fighting.


    And there¡¯s already a situation where they could get their morale raised. By killing the Barbarian King.


    One person is already trying to do it. Alone.


    She¡¯s Ang. The person who got recognized as the strongest mage in the continent because of one tournament. Though that tournament didn¡¯t have any master level mage participating. So it could still be said that Ang is the strongest mage below master level mage.


    And in fact, right now, Ang is fighting a master level mage, the Barbarian King, equally.


    The Barbarian King was unlike any other master level mage. Even if he only has ice element which has reached master level, he was much stronger than any master level mage that Roy and his friends has ever faced.


    Not only he was stronger than any other master level mage. The Barbarian King was also someone with a lot of fighting experience.


    The Barbarian King had been a king ever since he defeated the previous king of thewless country. The pirate who founded the country.


    Ever since, he epted many challenges from other powerful mages. But he defeated them all with just his ice magic.


    Even then, all his experience couldn¡¯t prepare him from the fight against Ang.


    Whenever he attacked with his ice magic, Ang would protect herself with fire magic. And it¡¯s not just fire magic.


    She made a barrier from wind and fire magic. Which protect her and melt the ice. And she also couldbine other elements she has. Like earth and fire. Or even ice and fire. Which made the Barbarian King¡¯s simple attack couldn¡¯t reach her.


    And when he was about to cast slightly more powerful attack, Ang would try to intervene his casting by using her fastest Wind sh. Combined with earth element to made the Wind sh more durable, and also fire element to made her Wind sh melt the Barbarian King¡¯s Ice Shield which he made in a hurry.


    ¡°What is this? A burning wind? Burning earth? And even burning ice? What are you?!¡±


    The Barbarian King panicked seeing such use of magic for the first time in his life.


    ¡°I¡¯m a human. A mage. The person I love called me genius. So I guess I¡¯m a genius,¡± Ang said as she continued attacking the Barbarian King.


    ¡°But you¡¯re still just an expert level mage!¡±


    Ang¡¯s attack were blocked by the Barbarian King who this time used Ice Shield and pushed through. Using brute force.


    The Ice Shield melted a bit, but it¡¯s still enough time for the Barbarian King to reach Ang even though she tried to retreat.


    The Barbarian King is a master level mage. With stronger physical attack than other people. Even more when he sometimes trained in it. By killing those who challenged him for the title of the king without using magic.


    A bit like Roy, he had explosive speed enough to reach Ang who had wind magic in split seconds. Even if it¡¯s only useful in short distance, it¡¯s still enough to reach Ang.


    ¡°I bet you never fought a mage like me before.¡±


    The Barbarian King confidently said that as he about to throw a punch at Ang. But he would never expect what¡¯sing at him.


    Ang swiftly dodged his punch and stood right in front of his open chest.


    She then cupped her hands together in front of his chest, and four different elements gathered together there as she was about to release her magic.


    ¡°A mage like you? Never. But I have trained in a fight against the strongest fighter,¡± Ang said as she released her magic.


    Four elements shing together concentrated at one point, and exploded right in front of the Barbarian King¡¯s chest.


    The Barbarian King managed to cover his chest with ice, but the damage was too big. Not on the outside, but his inner organs were destroyed.


    ¡°Ugh... what... magic is that?¡±


    ¡°Something I prepared for a close-range fight that I might get a lot in the future. I have been practicing with angels, vampires, and werewolves. Strong humanoid monsters who can fight really well. And also an Aura user. I don¡¯t know if we will have to fight others in close-range in the future, but I¡¯m d that I practiced with them.¡±


    Ang replied to the dying man¡¯s question. His heart has been partially destroyed, and it¡¯s a miracle he could still talk for a bit longer.


    ¡°What is... your desire?¡± the Barbarian King asked.


    ¡°To be the strongest mage and achieve everything that I want to get with everyone I love and protect them,¡± Ang replied.


    ¡°...That would be difficult. But I hope you who defeated me can achieve your dream.¡±


    The Barbarian King finally breathe hisst breath. And Ang achieved Victory after a hard battle.


    Soon after Ang no longer sensed the Barbarian King¡¯s life, she fell on her butt to the ground. Fighting him took everything she got. And she even coughed some blood after overusing so many magic.


    The result needed to be announced. But Sonia was still busy fighting other ghosts. So she signaled everyone that the Barbarian King is dead.


    She raised her finger to the sky, and with thest bit of Mana she had, she shot a fire that exploded in the sky.


    Seeing the firework, everyone paused for a bit before someone finally shouted.


    ¡°THE BARBARIAN KING IS DEAD!¡±


    It was Jewel¡¯s voice. She was ordered by Roy to shout as loud as possible after seeing the firework as a signal. Telling everyone that the Barbarian King has been killed.


    Roy told Ang and Jewel about that n right before they approached the Barbarian King and the Archbishop. Letting the loudest person other than him to raise the morale of the group.


    Roy himself saw what happened. But he was still busy fighting the Archbishop who was surprisingly stronger than anyone he has fought.


    That¡¯s why he couldn¡¯t say anything. He could only observe everything while busy fighting with the enemy in front of him. He couldn¡¯t say anything to raise the morale of the group.


    The Archbishop was someone very strong. Even after fighting so long, he wasn¡¯t tired. Neither was Roy. But the end of the battle still couldn¡¯t be seen.


    The two were fighting fiercely. Somewhere far from where the others were fighting. But still close enough for Roy to watch the situation with his Divine Vision.


    ¡°So this is how strong an Aura user is, huh? I¡¯m kind of disappointed. I¡¯d like to talk more with you, but since he died, I have to get serious before the others cane here,¡± the Archbishop said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I haven¡¯t been able to use my full strength since I was observing the others fight. Though it is surprising that you¡¯re far stronger than anyone I ever fought. Let¡¯s end this, shall we?¡±

 Chapter 733 - 733 Cat Archbishop

    733 Cat Archbishop


    First, I moved the children away from here. Then, everything started to freeze. After that, there¡¯s a huge earthquake and spikes starteding out of the ground trying to stab people who were flying.


    What a crazy fight. This is the craziest fight we¡¯ve ever been in. So crazy that an entire country, small it might be, is destroyed.


    Well, at least we don¡¯t have to face a lot of enemies at once. Thanks to the master level mages who killed their own people.


    Anyway, I grabbed the one who wears the same garb as the previous Archbishop and threw him away to somewhere far from where the others are fighting.


    But this time, instead of hitting his head to the ground like the previous Archbishop, he¡¯s still fine. In fact, hended perfectly on the ground like a cat.


    This guy...


    ¡°You¡¯re a beastform mage,¡± I said.


    ¡°...I am. And you¡¯re the Aura user who have been caused so much trouble to us,¡± he said.


    ¡°Whoa, that¡¯s surprising. I thought you only know one or two asions where I caused trouble. But how did you know that I caused more than what you¡¯re supposed to be informed about?¡± I asked.


    .....


    ¡°I just thought that with how strong we are, we lost too much. And after I heard the rumor about an Aura user, I ced the pieces together and made a conclusion that everything is rted to you,¡± he said.


    Wow, he¡¯s smart! Or that is to be expected since they keep losing and finally found out that there¡¯s an Aura user among the enemies they¡¯re fighting.


    Maybe I will meet more enemies in the future who will be prepared to face against me no matter in what situation.


    As for this guy...


    ¡°Well, you¡¯re actually right. Though I never thought that the first person to say that to me will be a cat,¡± I said.


    ¡°Not a cat. A tiger.¡±


    ¡°A slightly bigger cat then,¡± I said.


    What¡¯s different? The only reason tiger is scary is because they are big. But if we think that tiger is just slightly bigger cat, then... no. Cats are all assholes. So it¡¯s still bad.


    Well, the biggest different is that while cats will give you scratch, tiger will break your neck. Not just tiger. Any big cats can do the same. Lion, leopard, jaguar, cheetah, or panther.


    ¡°You might be strong physically. But I¡¯m also strong. I won¡¯t lose to an Aura user like you,¡± he said.


    He then transformed into a half-tiger. Simr to a werewolf transformation, but this time it¡¯s a tiger. And he¡¯s different than Jewel who when transformed, she wore armor instead of changing her own appearance.


    He¡¯s actually pretty fast. Our speed is almost the same.


    And he¡¯s also a wind mage. So that makes him faster than me if he used wind magic.


    But for a close-range fight, I¡¯m better than him. With my Divine Vision and Mind¡¯s Eye, I could see his every move.


    Heck experience in fighting against another human who is excel in meleebat. Seems like all his experience came from fighting monsters.


    But I can¡¯t underestimate him. He¡¯s this strong when he¡¯s not even a master level mage. And he could even sense me looking at him from distance. His animal instinct is too great. It¡¯s as if he has been living his whole life in constant danger.


    Even when I thought that my sword will hit him, he dodged it even though he shouldn¡¯t have seen iting.


    His battle instinct might be greater than Ang. But I won¡¯t lose.


    But while fighting, I also observed the surrounding. And I see Victoria and Spot leaving the water thinking that it¡¯s best to let the orcas be.


    ¡°FOCUS ON THE ORCAS FIRST!¡± I shouted.


    A hundred of orcas, with many of them bigger than ordinary orca, could create powerful wave like tsunami.


    And what I feared happened. But I can¡¯t go and help the others since I¡¯m busy fighting this cat-man.


    ¡°Where are you looking at?!¡± the cat-man shouted.


    He thinks that I made an opening for him to attack. But my reaction was faster.


    Even when he tried to dodge, he has an obvious weakness. His priest robe. Or is it an archbishop robe?


    I grabbed the hem of his robe and pulled it hard. He couldn¡¯t escape anymore.


    Then I lifted him up before throwing him to the ground. But while he¡¯s mid-air, he used his ws to cut the robe.


    ¡°Hey, isn¡¯t this robe expensive?¡±


    ¡°Defeating youes first!¡±


    Damn. I hate to face someone experienced in real fight. And I think there will be more people like that in the future. Enemies I have to defeat.


    By this time, Victoria and Ray defeated an orca that might be the leader of the orcas. Seeing them being surrounded in the middle of the sea, I summoned the two of them when I have the chance.


    ¡°Good job. Take care of the rest!¡±


    I said to my two familiars. They also saw me busy with the cat-man before they left to the sea again.


    Our fight continued, I could see that Graham has killed a master level mage. And that mage seem to be a tamer. So our fight bes easier.


    Not for me. It¡¯s still hard to fight this cat-man.


    He¡¯s so agile. And his body is extremely flexible. It¡¯s hard to get a solid hit against him.


    I guess I need to bring it out.


    I stopped using the Blobbysword, and opened a portal to grab another weapon. A sword. But with a cane that can create barrier when I drew a circle with it. It doesn¡¯t have to be a circle though.


    If the enemy can move freely and difficult to catch, then I just need to make our battlefield smaller.


    I fought the cat-man while dragging the cane on the ground. Trying to make a circle.


    But the cat-man move too freely that I have to give up several times and create another circle.


    We keep chasing each other and ended up at where I first started the circle. The first iplete circle.


    ¡°Well, it won¡¯t be as small as I wanted, but it¡¯s better than nothing,¡± I said to myself.


    ¡°What? Are you giving up?¡±


    The cat-man tried to sh me with his ws. Simr to the werewolves, he could also attack from distance. Adding his wind element, it¡¯s even stronger than the werewolves¡¯ attack.


    ¡°No. I¡¯m just finishing drawing a circle. Well, it¡¯s not really a circle. But at least we¡¯re in it,¡± I said.


    I connected the other iplete circle andpleted it. And a wall was created and covering us both in it.


    It¡¯s a weird shape because it¡¯s not a circle. So the wall didn¡¯t became a dome. Just weird.


    ¡°What is this?! I can¡¯t get out!¡±


    ¡°Well, that is a wall as you can see. I created it with the help of this cane. Now, you can no longer escape. I¡¯d like to continue the fight, but let me ask this before we fight. Do you know where the God you worshiped is? I¡¯m trying to kill him, you see,¡± I said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t know. Don¡¯t care. I joined this group because they gave me meals and a chance to survive. I only do what they told me to do and they started to call me the Archbishop and forced me to wear that robe. I don¡¯t care as long as I can survive,¡± he said.


    ¡°Well, if I capture you for interrogation, and after you tell us everything you know and asked whether you want to join us or not, what will your answer be?¡± I asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s funny. Even after doing all this shit, and you might even kill me here today, I still can¡¯t see any future where you can win for some reason. For my survival, I will chose to not change side. You asked me that because you know what my answer will be, right?¡±


    ¡°Actually, yeah. You are far more dangerous and smarter than others from the cult. Even if you said that you wanted to join us, if you think that the cult can give you better survival rate, you will choose that side and betray us in the future. It¡¯s best if I kill you right here,¡± I said.


    ¡°Only if you can! Even if you trap me here, I will still fight!¡±


    This guy joined the cult for survival. So, even if someone other than the cult found him first and helped him, he will still choose to join the cult once he feel that his survival rate will increase there.


    And he fully understands something. No. We both fully understand one thing now.


    It¡¯s either him who will die, or me. There¡¯s no changing side at all.


    His instinct must have told him that he has to kill me no matter what to survive. And I also think that he shouldn¡¯t be left alive no matter what.


    He will be dangerous if we leave him be. Because I feel that even if Albert asked him if he wanted to join us, he will answer it honestly that he will join us. And Albert will believe it. Because for this cat-man, he can only survive if he joined us.


    But that doesn¡¯t mean he will stay. He will betray us and join the cult once he feel that he will survive if he joins the cult.


    He¡¯s simr to me in my past life. Having various ways to survive. In my case, I called it Shameless Survival Arts.


    But in the end, I was not as shameless as this cat-man. Because I have my own principle. To not join the cult who made everyone suffers so much.


    And this guy will join anyone who will increase his survival rate. That¡¯s why I have to kill him now.

 Chapter 734 - 734 Defeating the Cat

    734 Defeating the Cat


    This might be a closed space. But the cat-man is extremely agile.


    Even if I could catch up with him, he used his flexibility to dodge my attack and even tried to counter.


    It has been quite a while since we fought. Even Ang had killed the Barbarian King already. Hurray for the rise of the new Queen!


    Well, she won¡¯t be the queen though. This territory will be given to Varadis who will take care of it.


    There are still monsters at the sea, the sky, and thend. But more and more tamers have been defeated, so those monsters won¡¯t be a problem for long.


    Even the archangel that Graham defeated has joined us. Or more like he decided to follow Graham. But that¡¯s good enough.


    Graham also told me telepathically that the newly joined archangel will ask his angel followers to join Graham at the Monsters Vige once I returned him to the Monsters World. More healers are always weed.


    Some of the monsters decided to retreat. And that makes the fight be smoother.


    Everyone is tired, but they still fight. Even the angels started to get exhausted. So, the fewer the enemies, the better it is for us.


    .....


    As for me, I still took my time facing this cat-man. He¡¯s different from any closebat fighter I have ever fought. Including the werewolves.


    His agility and flexibility from transforming into a half-cat half-human taught me a lot. Not the impossible movement that I can¡¯t do with a normal human body. But I still learn a lot.


    He¡¯s experienced in true hardship. He grew up with survival at any cost. And since he had no choice but to kill me if he doesn¡¯t want to die, we continue fighting.


    Not only his half-human half-cat transformation is annoying. His beast transformation is also annoying.


    Just like Jewel, he has learned many kind of cats to transform to. From a cat specialized in speed, cat specialized in sneak attack, or a sabertooth tiger that could hurt me with hisrge fangs even though I protected myself with the armor and Aura.


    But with how this ce is covered thanks to the Aura weapon I have, he couldn¡¯t use his speed to its full potential. And sneak attack is impossible with how I can use Divine Vision and Mind¡¯s Eye.


    To be honest, I can kill him easily at this point. But I wanted to grow stronger more. If he could damage me, there could be other enemies that can kill me.


    He¡¯s afraid of the cult. He won¡¯t join us, and even if he join, I¡¯m sure he will betray us for the cult.


    Why is that? It¡¯s because of his instinct.


    His instinct told him that there¡¯s a being who is far stronger than me. Someone who is impossible for this cat-man to kill. Maybe there are more than one of them.


    This guy is afraid of them. The cat-man didn¡¯t think that he could survive if he betray them. That¡¯s why he will risk everything here to kill me.


    ¡°Why don¡¯t you just die?!¡± he shouted.


    ¡°Because I¡¯m stronger than you. Soon, I will kill you with ease. Not now though,¡± I replied.


    I only used the sword that came with the cane after I caught him in this barrier. My swordsmanship seem to have gotten better now.


    Over time, he has injured me several times. But now, it was no more than a skin-deep scratch that don¡¯t even hurt and healed in just a few seconds.


    When I first captured him, he used his speed and power to attack me. He left a w mark on my chest.


    And after a few more times, I no longer need to use Aura to protect my body. the skin-deep wound doesn¡¯t hurt and it¡¯s a waste to keep using Aura against him.


    By this time, each attack he sends couldn¡¯t even touch me. It¡¯s time to counter attack.


    ¡°Thanks to you, I have grown even stronger.¡±


    The more we fight, the more frustrated he bes. His attacks bes fiercer and faster. But more predictable as well.


    As everything he used on me didn¡¯t work, he finally charges at me head-on. With his sabertooth tiger form about to pierce my head with his teeth.


    I also had enough. I don¡¯t think fighting any more will make me any stronger than this. I will still gain experience, but it¡¯s not the time since the others haven¡¯t finished fighting yet.


    Even if they don¡¯t need my help, I will help them. We don¡¯t know if we¡¯re still going to fight after this or not.


    But most likely, we will. After this, I will return back to the Monsters World. To the destroyed base of the cult and wait for the cult to deliver their supplies.


    At that time, they will know that the base has been destroyed. But my goal is to put at least one Blobby into any opened portal at that time if possible.


    And I don¡¯t know if we will attack those ces right away or not. Though I hope that I can take a rest before that.


    In front of the charging sabertooth tiger, I stabbed my sword to the ground and prepare myself to receive the attack unarmed.


    ¡°Come at me, overgrown cat!¡±


    When the sabertooth tiger get closer, I grabbed his two huge fangs with each hand and stopped him.


    Then I threw him to the ground. Headfirst. And it was so strong that his tworge teeth that I grabbed were removed.


    This is also the first time he falls on the ground but didn¡¯tnd foot first. Must be weird for a cat to receive fall damage like this.


    It¡¯s not just fall damage though. After his head was mmed on the ground, I pressed my knee into his head.


    ¡°Well, as a fellow survivalist, how about you tell me everything you know about the cult? I want to know if it¡¯s possible for me to kill the Evil God. Tell me before I kill you with your own teeth,¡± I said.


    ¡°Hooweoh...¡±


    ¡°Oh, right. You can¡¯t talk with your mouth like that eating dirt,¡± I said.


    How could I be so stupid that I pressed his head to the ground and asked him question?


    Or maybe I¡¯m not stupid. I was only trying to kill him since anythinge out of him won¡¯t necessarily be correct.


    ¡°Hyawawaheh.¡±


    ¡°...Fine, I will release you so you can speak,¡± I said before I lifted my knee from his head.


    ¡°...I now know that I have no chance against either you, or the one we worshiped. But from our fight, I had a feeling that the True God will be stronger than you,¡± he said.


    ¡°Will be? Not already strong enough?¡±


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. It¡¯s just a feeling. I don¡¯t know about anything else. I¡¯m also under a masked man calling himself the Archbishop who picked me to be another Archbishop. I only followed order. That¡¯s all I do,¡± he said.


    I don¡¯t think he¡¯s lying. He has truly given up on survival.


    ¡°Thanks for the info. I won¡¯t kill you with your teeth anymore. That seem painful. I¡¯ll make it quick and painless,¡± I said as I grabbed the sword I previously stabbed on the ground.


    ¡°Fellow survivalist, huh? But you have a big ambition unlike me. I hope you can get what you want then.¡±


    That was hisst words before I cut his neck.


    Seriously, if only he¡¯s not with the cult, I¡¯m sure that we could be good friends. And I could add more skill to put in my Shameless Survival Arts together with him.


    Though he did teach me another thing other than fighting experience. That surviving is not shameless.


    I guess our biggest difference was that I have a bit of pride in me. That¡¯s why I called it Shameless Survival Arts.


    But for him, survival is not shameless at all. I guess he experienced much more hardship than I did.


    Well, that¡¯s that. We have killed two of the strongest enemies in thiswless country.


    Next is... to destroy the barrier I made myself and get out.


    I concentrated Aura on my fist and punched through the barrier. I spent a lot of time fighting that one cat. Now I need to help the others.


    There are still several master level mages in this ce. Ang has helped the others, but it¡¯s still difficult since the master level mages started working together.


    They have tried to use another powerful magic by getting other mages to protect them. But so far, their n failed.


    And now, I have joined the fight. There¡¯s no need to worry about anotherrge-scale magic.


    It took some time before we defeated and captured the rest of the master level mages and tamers. As for the remaining monsters, those whose contract is still valid since their masters were captured, I transported them to some ce in Monsters World. Far from where the tamers can contact them.


    Of course the tamers have cors wrapped on their neck so they can¡¯t use any magic as well. So there shouldn¡¯t be any problem with monsters for now.


    Since they¡¯re master level mages, I broke their bones and dislocated their joints before transporting them to prison.


    It¡¯s over. Finally our main objective for this mission has beenpleted.


    There are still more problem ahead though. I wish I can take a rest right away.

 Chapter 735 - 735 Sacrificing the Vampires

    735 Sacrificing the Vampires


    ¡°So... is there anything else for us to do?¡± I asked Ka.


    ¡°Return back to Monsters World. This ce will bepletely investigated by people from Varadis that old man Henry sent. We don¡¯t need to do anything else here,¡± she said.


    ¡°I see. Gather everyone then except those who are from Varadis, I will return everyone back to their own country,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re done? Shouldn¡¯t there be a supplying from the cult to the destroyed base?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°Yes. But everyone is too tired. I¡¯ll just bring the monsters with me. Also some other who are willing to help, I guess. But I don¡¯t n to enter their portal anymore. I¡¯ll continue thinking about how I will throw a Blobby into the portal. You too, take some rest. You¡¯re already tired from healing everyone,¡± I said to Ka.


    ¡°Okay then. I will call everyone,¡± she said.


    Soon after, everyone except those from Varadis gathered. I opened portals for them to return to Consenza, Arturo, and Tatrama. Derek and some master level mages who said that they¡¯re going to join us went separate ways.


    Derek will meet Albert, while the other master level mages will go to Consenza and meet Celestine.


    They are the master level mages who are rted to the kids or guardians of the kids that I captured and brought to Consenza. They will meet the kids first to make sure of their safety.


    .....


    udia said that she has a n to make sure that the master level mages wont betray us and asked me to send some strong people as well just in case. So I got Ang and Kron there. udia said that one is enough, but I sent two anyway.


    If they can convince the master level mages to join us, that would be great. I also asked udia if I need to bring Albert or not. She said that it doesn¡¯t have to be right away. But taking Albert to them is still essential so we can tell if they¡¯re going to betray us or not.


    I don¡¯t think any of them, or anyone at all, has simr mindset to the cat-man. So I don¡¯t need to worry about being betrayed if Albert says so.


    Still, if they can change side easily just by getting the kids to safety, that also means that they can go back to the cult if the kids are taken hostages. That¡¯s why we need to make sure that the children will be in a safe ce.


    Everyone returns back to their own country. Spot and his children left as well. But they didn¡¯t enter the portal. They left from the sea.


    It leaves me, the werewolves, the angels, and the vampires in this ce. There¡¯s also an archangel that I just met. He¡¯s the one that Graham told me about.


    ¡°Let¡¯s go to Monsters World then. Graham, you and that archangel will enter the portal to the vige,¡± I said.


    ¡°Understood.¡±


    The two entered the vige while the rest of us returned back to the destroyed base.


    ¡°Roy, if any of the ce connected to viges or cities simr to the previous locations, I don¡¯t think just us will be enough,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°I know. Our goal is not to fight them. We¡¯re just going to make sure that we can at least throw a single Blobby into the portal once it opened. Victoria, create as many clones as possible and share them with everyone,¡± I said.


    This is the only thing I can do for now. Even the monsters are tired. Maybe some werewolves wanted to continue fighting, but I won¡¯t let them. Even after we destroyed several bases in our world, the Evil God still hasn¡¯t been found. We need as many helper as possible.


    Also, the cat-man said that the one called Evil God should be much stronger than us. We still can¡¯t rest easy it seems.


    It may just be his instinct. But for some reason, I can¡¯t say that he¡¯s wrong.


    We¡¯re resting in the buildings that our earth mages previously built. They¡¯re still here. After the raid on the two viges, we raised some buildings for us to rest. And it¡¯s still there.


    ording to the schedule, there should be less than an hour left before they open a portal to deliver supplies. But they can stille anytime they want.


    So we waited. But soon after, we have guests.


    ¡°What happened here? Everything is destroyed.¡±


    The one who asked was a vampire. He¡¯s the one that still remains in the old vampire castle. Along with other vampires who were charmed by Arin.


    And I have a good idea.


    ¡°Arin, you said that it¡¯s fine if the vampires here died, right?¡± I asked Arin who was next to me after drinking a bit of my blood.


    ¡°Yes I did,¡± she replied.


    ¡°But don¡¯t you have the instinct to breed? Having kids in the future?¡± I asked.


    ¡°We don¡¯t need to breed with the same race. Us humanoid monsters can breed with humans or other humanoid monsters. That¡¯s how Graham can create shadow clones. And non-humanoid monsters can also breed with different races as long as they are simr to each others. Just like Spot¡¯s parents who are Sea Serpent and Sky Serpent,¡± Arin said.


    Oh, right. I forgot about them. Though my purpose of asking her is not about whether I can breed with the vampires or not.


    ¡°I see. Then I will use those vampires¡¯ death in my n. Arin, follow me,¡± I said as I left the building we¡¯re resting in and greeted the vampires.


    ¡°Lady Arin! You¡¯re here!¡± the vampire who just arrived said.


    ¡°I am. And we have something to say.¡±


    I have told Arin what our n will be.


    Arin then let me talk to the vampires.


    ¡°Sorry, but due to some circumstances, we needed to destroy this ce. But don¡¯t worry. In less than one hour, a portal will be opened to somewhere with a lot of humans. Even more than any that you¡¯ve seen in this ce. So, you can enter there and have a feast there as much as you like. In fact, it¡¯s actually an order from Arin herself. But I don¡¯t want you to risk your lives for¡ª¡±


    I haven¡¯t finished talking when the vampires suddenly shout.


    ¡°We will do it! If it¡¯s Lady Arin¡¯s wish, we will do it! Even if the others don¡¯t want to do it, I will go by myself!¡±


    ¡°What are you talking about?! I will go as well! You think you can gain Lady Arin¡¯s favor by saying that?¡±


    ¡°Shut up! Wait, no. Just continue fighting so you will be too tired to go. I will go instead.¡±


    And the vampires started arguing and say that they will go instead of the others. That¡¯s great.


    I said that it was Arin¡¯s order because if any of them got tamed, and forced to talk, they will be asked who destroyed the base and why they entered the portal.


    All me will be on Arin. The Vampire Queen. She will be targeted by the cult. But she said that it¡¯s fine. It¡¯s not like anyone can tell if she¡¯s a vampire or not just by looking. She¡¯s pretty much look like a human.


    Well, I just need to protect her even more. Though even if I don¡¯t protect her, I think she¡¯s strong enough to handle some small fries. If there¡¯s someone she can¡¯t handle, then that person should be stronger than any average master level mage.


    ¡°Okay. That¡¯s great. I salute your resolve to help Arin,¡± I said to the vampires to stop their stupid argument. They all just need to go and die. Though it would be great if they didn¡¯t die and continue terrorizing the ce they go to.


    I also patted their shoulder and marked each of them with several Blobbies. This way, once they entered the portal, I will have a transfer point ready.


    From my observation when I disguised myself as someone living in the base, I know that they only have one ce from where they transferred the supplies from. But there were several summoners from there. So they each opened a portal from the same ce and deliver the supplies for the people in the base.


    So, as long as the vampire can enter the portal, even if it¡¯s just one of them, then mission is over. We can take care of that ceter.


    But I also need someone to confirm the location of that ce as well. That¡¯s why on those Blobbies I used to mark the vampires, some of them have Sonia¡¯s soil. That way, she can teleport there right away to inform us where she is.


    After that, we waited for a while and several portals were opened together.


    The people inside the portal were shocked to see that the ce they delivered supply to everyday has been destroyed. And there were some monsters in front of them to make them think that it was the monsters who were responsible for the destruction of the base.


    I told the monsters to act menacing in front of the portal. With the vampires ready to enter the portals once they¡¯re opened.


    When the people watching were shocked, the vampires made their move. And they entered the portal easily.


    ¡°Close the portal! Monsters have destroyed the base! Don¡¯t let any more of them enter!¡±


    One of the summoner shouted. But it¡¯s toote. The vampires have entered.


    Now I have the location marked. And Sonia can get there easily.


    Now... let¡¯s go home.

 Chapter 736 - 736 To Advertise My Store

    736 To Advertise My Store


    After the vampires entered the portal, I contacted Albert and then left the destroyed base of the cult after bringing in some agents and some werewolves to watch over this ce in case more members of the culte.


    We don¡¯t know how many more location is connected to this ce. Even the previous supply base, although there were several portals, they were all connected only to one ce.


    I returned the angels to the vige and brought Arin and the vampires back home with me. For them, their home is in our world. As for the werewolves, they said that they want to stay and watch. Hoping that those who wille are strong mages.


    Then after I returned to my own room andy on the bed, I was instantly hit by fatigue and fell asleep.


    I might be the one with the most stamina. Not counting the monsters obviously. But I have been on a mission to stay in that base for days.


    And after that, I had to go into so many fights. It was so exhausting. But a few hours of sleep should be enough for me to recover.


    Healing magic might recover my stamina. But that doesn¡¯t mean our fatigue will disappear.


    Using healing magic to repeatedly recover your stamina over and over again will only make your body suffers. That¡¯s why one shouldn¡¯t use it too many times unless it¡¯s necessary. Or your body, no matter how strong you are, will break down.


    Well, I have told the others to be careful. Their body is their most important assets after all. We have witnessed several master level mages who could fight well in closebat. So I don¡¯t think anyone would be stupid enough to recover their stamina many times with healing magic after the fight.


    .....


    By the way, Ka learned how to use stamina recovery magic instead of healing magic. She taught that to the angels and all healer so they could spend fewer Mana to just recover our stamina. That¡¯s the magic that Ka and other healers mostly used for the fight in thewless country.


    She¡¯s smart. She thought that with magic control, not only she can concentrate her healing magic to just one injured area, but also to separate healing and recovering stamina.


    I woke up in time for breakfast. I was no longer feel exhausted. Just feeling that I would love to sleep a bit more. But I have skipped meals for a few times. I also eaten far less than usual since I stayed in that base for a while.


    Even more, it has been quite a while since Ist eat anything that Lina cooked. So I had a feast for myself and the children. While the others were still sleeping.


    Everyone is also tired from the continuous fight. Though I fought more than them.


    I can see they are sleeping well. Even after the smell of Lina¡¯s cooking spread to the whole ce, they wouldn¡¯t wake up at all. That¡¯s how I can have all the food for myself.


    ¡°That was delicious, Lina. You¡¯re the best maid ever!¡± Iplimented Lina.


    As usual, she would turn shy after mypliment. I guess even after so manypliments, she is not immune yet topliments from me. But that¡¯s fine. She¡¯s cute when I teaased her like that.


    Anyway, what should I do now? Everyone is tired, and I don¡¯t think I can go back to sleep again. Is there anything I can do today?


    ¡°Roy, how about checking your clothing store? We got the girls from the inn to work there, right? Then after that, we can check on other girls we brought here. They¡¯re supposed to be somewhere near Cassau,¡± Victoria suggested.


    Right. I forgot about them.


    I don¡¯t really care about other girls, but for those who worked at the inn I stayed, they are supposed to be my staffs in my clothing store. It would be great if they decided to stay and work for me.


    As for other girls, I¡¯ll check on themter. I think the agents have done well in taking care of them.


    I used Divine Vision to see the ce they¡¯re supposed to be. But I think it¡¯s further than the range of my Divine Vision. I couldn¡¯t see it.


    Well, that¡¯s good then. I know that there were some girls who were still have faith with the cult and started fighting. Since the ce I moved them was far from the city, I don¡¯t think anyone in the city knows anything about the fight.


    And there are still some agents taking care of them. I¡¯ll check on them after I check my clothing store. And if they want to work at my clothing store as well, that would be great.


    As for my store, those girls are cleaning the store before opening. I think they can do the job well. Let¡¯s go there then.


    I told Lina that I¡¯m checking on my store. I don¡¯t want the others to worry about me as soon as they wake up. Seeing that I¡¯m not home, they will think that there¡¯s a situation where I have to make an appearance. They need to rx after a long fight.


    I walked to my store and was greeted by, ¡°We¡¯re not open yet!¡±


    ¡°...I¡¯m the owner of the store, though? I see that you have been working here well. How¡¯s the others?¡± I asked.


    The woman who greeted me was one of the girls who returned to this world first and worked in the clothing store before the rest of the inn staffs came. She along with a few others have been asked to work here. I think the sry is quite good.


    ¡°Oh, Boss! Everyone will start working from tomorrow. Now we have way too many workers for just one store so we can¡¯t have everyone work together,¡± she said.


    Including the staffs I originally employed, there are indeed too many girls working here. And it¡¯s quite a popr store. After all, it has fashion from another world. Lighter clothes, more fashionable, and more colorful. All the girls in the city have entered this store at least once.


    There are also some clothes for men. But most men don¡¯t really think about fashion themselves. Though most of those who came here were because their wives or lovers asked them toe.


    Right. I need to open up another store right away. I think Ian already prepared a store in the capital.


    By the way, the store is only responsible for selling clothes. As for the production, it¡¯s also here in Cassau. Maybe I¡¯ll get those who are good with their hands to work in the production as well.


    I looked at inside the store and see that everyone is helping to prepare the store. So I asked the girl in front off me to gather everyone.


    When I asked, some girls have experience with sewing. So I asked them to work in the production of the clothes. There can¡¯t never be enough worker for the production with how popr our clothes are. Even more since I want to open a new store.


    It also means that I need a bigger factory for the production of the clothes. Maybe with more variations of clothes as well. I¡¯ll ask Victoria to handle it then. She has more creativity than I do. There¡¯s even a ninja costume for sale. It¡¯s simr to the Ninja costume I wore to disguise myself in the past.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s just one day since I brought you all here. You can think again if you want to work for me or not. You are free to choose what you want to do now. I¡¯m just giving you an opportunity to work with me,¡± I said.


    Although everyone didn¡¯t give a direct answer right away, they are already interested in working with me. I know that it¡¯s because they wanted to wear the clothes that are on sale.


    ¡°Well, while I prepare for another store, those who doesn¡¯t have any work can wear any clothes here if you want to go out. It¡¯s also great for advertising my store. Just tell anyone who asked where you can buy the clothes you wear,¡± I said.


    Just having girls wearing the clothes can advertise my store. It¡¯s simple.


    After that, I move to where they keep other girls are. It looks like a prison, but they are free to do what they want.


    I also offered them the same offer. Those who are good with their hands can work in the production. I also brought a lot of clothes for them so they can wear them when they enter the city.


    Grabbing all the girls so I can advertise my store. What a great n!


    Well, not everyone wanted to work for me. Some have something that they want to do. Like bing a hunter. But I still gave them some clothes from my store.


    ¡°Do we need to keep them here any longer?¡± I asked the agent responsible for taking care of them.


    ¡°We were told to let you make the decision,¡± she said.


    ¡°Okay. Then, everyone can go to the city. I¡¯ll open a portal to my home, and then I will give each of you some money enough to stay at an inn for a few weeks. I still need time to open another store. If you find anything you want to do during your walk, you don¡¯t have to return and inform me about it,¡± I said.


    I also told them to greet the others in the store first. And to inform those at the store if they want toe back for work.


    With this, these girls wearing fashionable clothes will enter and leave my store and make everyone curious about the store. More money for me.


    I guess I don¡¯t need to think much about what they¡¯re going to do after this. It feels nice to do something good once in a while.

 Chapter 737 - 737 The Captured Children’s Guardians

    737 The Captured Children¡¯s Guardians


    After I finished with the girls, it¡¯s time for the kids.


    I opened a portal to Consenza to check on Celestine and the kids I brought over from thewless country. And the master level mages who joined us mid-battle in thewless country are there as well.


    From what I¡¯ve heard, none of the master level mages cause trouble. That¡¯s good. They are truly thinking of the children.


    The location where I brought those kids before is quite a distance from the capital of Consenza. Just in case the master level mages cause trouble. But seems like they won¡¯t attack us at all.


    Anyway, those master level mages don¡¯t feel like the cat-man. I don¡¯t think they will just go and betray us easily. Though whether they will join us or not is still to be asked.


    I want to bring Albert here to meet them, but I will refrain to do so first.


    Sonia is checking on the ce where they delivered supplies from. I don¡¯t know where that ce is located. If there¡¯s any agent from any of the four countries, Sonia should be able to find them since they supposed to have the soil from hernd. But that doesn¡¯t seem to be the case.


    A city big enough to have that much supply, but there¡¯s no agent there. That¡¯s suspicious.


    As a rule ever since we made the alliance, there should be at least two agents carrying the soil from Sonia¡¯snd in every city agents were dispatched. But in that ce, there¡¯s no sign of the soil at all.


    .....


    So, it¡¯s highly likely that there won¡¯t be any agents there.


    There¡¯s also a chance that the agents sent over there were found and the soil is somehow disappear. But if that happens, that mean they know what the soil is for.


    But unless we have traitors, it shouldn¡¯t be possible for anyone to know about the soil. Unless someone out there capable to sense traces of Charm magic in the soil.


    Too much thinking. My brain can¡¯t take it. Again, I will leave the thinking to the others.


    Other than for fighting and medical knowledge, I¡¯m not really good at thinking about other things. Maybe I should also leave the store management to someone else. I guess the inn-owner of the inn I stayed in the cult¡¯s base should be good enough to do it. But I haven¡¯t heard about her saying that she¡¯s going to do it.


    I¡¯ll ask herter. For now, it¡¯s the children and the master level mages here.


    Some distance from the capital of Consenza, there¡¯s a vige newly built. It¡¯s created by Celestine¡¯s and others¡¯ earth magic. It was supposed to be a temporary shelter, but Celestine was just that good at magic so the buildings were strong enough to stand for decades. Not like a vige at all.


    ¡°Celestine, how is it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°The kids have trouble adapting to peaceful life here. And the master level mages and other adults who are the guardians of the kids take turns in protecting the kids. So we built thergest building over there for the kids and their guardians to stay. The adults still don¡¯t trust us yet,¡± she said.


    ¡°Obviously. After all, what I did was basically kidnapping. And now that they will live differently, they have to adapt. They should be introduced to live in a city somewhere. But I guess everyone is too busy right now that they can¡¯t do it. Am I right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. Lynn and udia said that it¡¯s best for them to stay here before they can go to a city. Even if they go to a city, someone need to watch over them. But we still don¡¯t know the location of the city Sonia is currently scouting. If it¡¯s anywhere within our territory, then we need to get ready for it. That¡¯s why we can¡¯t spare many people to watch over the kids. And leaving them to civilians to watch is difficult,¡± she said.


    Leaving these kids who would even grab a weapon to kill someone right away to civilians is out of the question indeed. Even now, some of the kids already started brawling. The adults watching over them then used magic to separate the brawling kids.


    I don¡¯t think they could even have a peaceful live. But what if they be trained as agents? Or maybe just soldiers if they want to fight that badly.


    Once those kids awakened their magic elements, they could use it for crimes and got themselves arrested right away.


    As someone who also takes care of children, I don¡¯t want any kids to grow up and sent to jail right away. We need someone to teach them something.


    Then I meet the kids guardians and the master level mages. I told them my concerns.


    ¡°Well... we want to do that if possible. I don¡¯t want them to grow up like us and do bad things. Unfortunately, we were born there as well. And we grew upmitting crimes to survive. We only learned we¡¯re not normal once we¡¯re adults. Even then, for us, this is normal and we don¡¯t know how to change it,¡± one of the master level mage said that.


    She¡¯s the master level mage that helped me after knowing that I brought the kids to safety. She helped me after I delivered her sister and nieces here. And her sister is here as well.


    I looked at everyone, and all of them seems to have the same mindset. They want these kids to live peacefully.


    So I just said the truth to them.


    ¡°You do know that peaceful life is impossible at the moment, right? We have the cult that you used to be the member of. They wanted world destruction. The only way for the kids to life in peace is to let them be ignorant about the world. Or if the cult is destroyed before the kids grow up,¡± I said.


    ¡°So... you want us to join you in destroying the cult?¡± the female master level mage asked.


    ¡°That would be great. But you can think about the answerter. For now, I want to hear from those who knows the rtionship between that country and the cult is. I saw your king was having a discussion with someone from the cult. And I don¡¯t think that those of you who have reached master level did it by yourselves. The cult must have some involvement in making more people reach master level.¡±


    Some of them left to take care of the kids while the rest are here talking with me.


    They were indeed members of the cult. Or those who were not, know the connection between the country and the cult.


    It was originally a country founded by a pirate. Originally with the intention to have everyone be free. But soon after, he was killed by the Barbarian King. So, instead of being a free country away from nobility and people in high position to rule over the civilians, it became country where nothing matters.


    Instead of freedom, it¡¯s calledwless.


    I heard that at first, Varadis didn¡¯t even care about the country. But after the Barbarian King took over, everything changed.


    And how did the Barbarian King defeat the first ruler of the country? He has reached master level in his ice element before fighting. And ever since, he only grow stronger.


    And yes, the reason he could be strong was because of the cult¡¯s help. There¡¯s even one person here who used to be under the Barbarian King directly and was also involved with the cult directly. Good thing he turned over.


    Yup. I understand one thing after hearing everything. It¡¯s that I... don¡¯t really care about it. I shouldn¡¯t have asked then. It¡¯s just a waste of time.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know when, but sooner orter, you will meet someone important who will probably ask you the same question I asked. Just tell them everything. They will decide what to do with you. As for me, what I can do for you and the kids, is to give you a job if you need any. Though it won¡¯t be right away,¡± I said.


    They became confused after I said that. But it¡¯s true. Listening to how and why something happened will make me lose my interest too soon. Unless it¡¯s something important to me. But their story doesn¡¯t interest me at all.


    I just promise them an opening for a job if any of them want to. I guess I should ask udia to prepare a location for me to open my store and the production factory here. And I¡¯ll ask the other kings as wellter.


    At least from what I¡¯ve seen here, the master level mages and the kids¡¯ guardians don¡¯t have any interest in fighting us. I didn¡¯t sense any hostility from them.


    But is it safe now? No. Because I can feel hostility from the kids. Probably from those who tried to stab me before when I was carrying them.


    It will be bad if those kids have been taught bad things and to join the cult. I hope the kids won¡¯t think of being our enemy.


    Anyway... I¡¯m here. But where are Ang and Kron? They¡¯re supposed to be here, right?

 Chapter 738 - 738 They are Exploring Dungeon

    738 They are Exploring Dungeon


    ¡°Why are you guys exploring dungeons?¡± I asked the two people in front of me. Ang and Kron.


    After my business with the people I brought from thewless country is over, I asked udia where Ang and Kron are. They¡¯re supposed to be there in case the master level mages from thewless country wanted to fight back.


    Well, in the end, they are staying here peacefully. But that doesn¡¯t mean it¡¯s fine to leave them be. Celestine is the only one here who can fight the master level mages. That¡¯s why I¡¯m worried.


    udia then told me that after they had confirmed that the master level mages won¡¯t think of fighting back, she let the two of them to rest in the pce.


    But those two are not normal.


    While the others are still sleeping because of exhaustion, they felt that they already rested enough and ask udia about any dungeons nearby for them to attack.


    Well, that¡¯s just what they¡¯re thinking. Their body obviously still feel the fatigue from the long battle.


    In fact, after I entered the dungeon they¡¯re attacking, I could see that the two of them were in difficult situation even though they¡¯re just facing a weak golem that they should be able to defeat easily if they¡¯re in their normal condition.


    So I helped them before they hurt themselves and asked them why they¡¯re here.


    .....


    ¡°I¡¯m bored. I want to train more,¡± Ang replied.


    ¡°Yeah. Staying still in one ce without doing anything is not good for us. And I have never been to a dungeon in Consenza. It¡¯s interesting,¡± Kron said.


    ¡°Sigh... You don¡¯t even remember how tired your body is and started to explore dungeon right away. That¡¯s how you two were almost got killed by a mere golem. You two are too tired and had been exposed to Stamina Recovery magic by the angels too much. You need rest even if you don¡¯t like it,¡± I said.


    They are not like me. So their stamina recovered slowly. And even after moving and fighting so much, their body won¡¯t recover easily like I do.


    Maybe it¡¯s an Aura user thing. No one other than Aura user can understand my body. Like how can I stay up for several days without getting myself exhauster, right?


    ¡°I thought I¡¯m fine. But being this exhausted, I can¡¯t control my magic well,¡± Ang said.


    This happens once in a while. Her instinct is wrong. Just like how she got hurt in Rygis.


    Maybe I shouldn¡¯t tell her to trust her instinct too much. I will only be more and more worried about her if she does. I should get someone to stick around Ang so she won¡¯t get herself hurt. But who?


    I¡¯ll just trust her a bit longer. After this event, she should realize to not trust her instinct the whole time. Though other than for fighting or to grow stronger, her instincts were rarely wrong. So if it¡¯s to make her stronger, I will believe her.


    But not this time. She didn¡¯t explore dungeon because she thinks that she can grow stronger. She¡¯s just bored.


    ¡°In any case, let¡¯s get out of here. The condition of your body affect your mind and your Mana as well. If your body is tired, even if you don¡¯t know it, you will feel it in your mind and when you¡¯re using magic,¡± I said.


    ¡°Roy, do you ever experienced that? I thought that you only fight with your body so you don¡¯t feel it that much,¡± Kron asked.


    ¡°Of course I felt that when I¡¯m too tired after training myself. But unlike you, if I feel that my magic became harder to control, I let my body fight. I can do that. Rather, that¡¯s what I¡¯m best at,¡± I said.


    One of my training that I have done was to exhaust my body to the limit, and fight while being tired. I dit it when I¡¯m going to train alone or with Victoria.


    This is something from Victoria¡¯s world. And I confirm the theory using my own body.


    When I tire my body to the limit, after resting enough, my body will recover quickly. And my body will also be stronger after a good rest. Albeit just slightly. But the improvement is essential to get even stronger.


    I don¡¯t know about other people, but it is the truth for my body. Though as a doctor, I wouldn¡¯t rmend it to anyone. And it¡¯s too dangerous if you¡¯re in the wild or in the enemy¡¯s territory, and can¡¯t fight anymore.


    The only reason I could do it was because I checked for a safe ce before I trained in this way. Or when I have Victoria with me because once I¡¯m tired, I can just let Victoria turns into my armor covering my whole body, and move me away to safety if I¡¯m tired.


    I can¡¯t really use portal in this situation. Because the magic is too unstable.


    ¡°...Aura user is such a cheat. I want to be one too. But I guess magic is more suited for me,¡± Kron said.


    ¡°Well, Aura user is a cheat indeed. But know that the enemy we¡¯re facing is someone who killed all Aura users in the past to the point of extinction. Even if I¡¯m strong, I don¡¯t know if I can kill that Evil God or not,¡± I said.


    But at least I want to do it quickly. If we wait too long, I don¡¯t know how strong the Evil God will be.


    If he could reach the level at which he killed all the Aura users after in the past, my chance of winning is low.


    Though one thing I know is that during the time he eradicated all Aura users, during Sonia¡¯s and Victoria¡¯s time, there shouldn¡¯t be anyone who have reached the level of Aura Master like Timmy.


    I¡¯m sure that Timmy knew something about the Evil God. There¡¯s no way that he wouldn¡¯t know anything about the Evil God after living for so long. But he never told us anything about it.


    He seriously only intended to raise another Aura Master instead of caring about the world at all.


    Seeking strength or teaching other people is fine. But being ignorant is not fine. Though unless he¡¯s strong and no one can fight him, I guess it¡¯s fine being ignorant about the world. He can just kill anyone in his way.


    ¡°For now, let¡¯s leave this ce. Unless you want to watch me fight the goleming here since you can¡¯t fight,¡± I said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll watch!¡± Ang shouted.


    ¡°Me too,¡± Kron also wanted to watch.


    And on his shoulder, Breezy is chatting with Airy about his adventure with Kron.


    They¡¯re siblings. But they are separated because Breezy wanted a lot of adventure, while Airy just want to stick with me who is an air mage. So when they meet, not in the middle of battle, they both happily chatted about their own adventures to each other. What a close siblings.


    Since Ang and Kron wanted to watch, I guess I¡¯ll fight.


    Since my body, even though my stamina is recovered, it is still tired from all the fighting. So I will only use my magic for portal, and not to breathe. I¡¯ll just fight using Victorihammer and Aura.


    The dungeon is wide. And a ten meters golem can easily fight here. That¡¯s the enemy I¡¯m facing.


    To be honest, I also feel bored. And I¡¯m tired of fighting powerful enemies.


    So when the golem is in front of me, I swung the hammer as strong as possible without holding back. I want to feel good about myself how I can defeat strong monster easily.


    I saw where the core of the golem is. All the golem, the monsters and not golem created using earth magic, has a core in it. And the golem will die if the core is destroyed.


    ...Though any golem created by earth mages also has a core. It¡¯s the mages themselves.


    The core is protected by metal and not rocks. But I swung Victorihammer at it and destroyed the core easily. Well, the hammer is quite big. So the golem didn¡¯t just die. The location where core is also ttened.


    Now I feel good. After fighting strong enemies for the whole day, I defeated a monster which was supposed to be difficult for any A-rank hunters to defeat.


    ¡°Right. Defeating monsters this easily is a good way to relieve some stresses,¡± I said.


    ¡°But youined how we entered a dungeon because we¡¯re bored!¡± Kronined.


    ¡°That¡¯s because you fight using magic, while I don¡¯t. Let¡¯s go back and this time, you two will take a rest for real. Don¡¯t do anything stupid and just rest,¡± I said.


    Then I opened a portal back to Cassau. udia already given me permission tor eturn them back since there¡¯s no more need for them to be here.


    As expected. When they return back to their own room, right after theyy down on the bed, they fell asleep. And they¡¯re trying to push themselves by entering a dungeon?


    Maybe they just can¡¯t take a rest sleeping in the pce. At least if they¡¯re here, they know that they can take it easy because they¡¯re safe. That¡¯s why I brought them here.


    Now, is there anything else I should do today? I think I will also take it easy for today and enjoy myself.

 Chapter 739 - 739 Being a Kind Professor

    739 Being a Kind Professor


    After returning Ang and Kron to Cassau, I also took a nap for a bit before leaving again.


    This time, I have no destination to go. Sonia is still trying to find out where she is located at, and none of the kings asked me to do anything. Or maybe it¡¯s because Sonia is too busy to be of help right now.


    Whatever the case, I¡¯m not busy now. I think I¡¯ll go to the circuster tonight. But it¡¯s still afternoon so I will take a walk in Cassau.


    I don¡¯t know what to do so I just entered cafe, restaurant, bar, and any other ces I haven¡¯t been to. Those ce were open quite recently so I have never been there before.


    I also checked to see if there¡¯s any cult members in the city. Since it has been a while that I checked the city, there might be some new residents who were part of the cult. Or maybe it¡¯s hunters who just recently traveled here.


    No one I found has explosive device in their mouth. Although there were some that I suspect to be expert level mages. But if it¡¯s just expert level mages, I don¡¯t think there will be any trouble. The guards here are already strong enough to handle some expert level mages if they work together.


    As for master level mages, there¡¯s no one here reached that level yet. Or they would know that I¡¯m looking at them.


    I guess Cassau is safe. Maybe it¡¯s much safer than the capital. Because I¡¯m here after all.


    I didn¡¯t do much today. I¡¯m still resting.


    .....


    My body is fine, but I used portal too much during the mission, so I need to rest or my magic will go wild and difficult to control. Just like how Ang and Kron were unable to use magic properly when they were exploring dungeon this morning.


    So I will only use portal two more times today at least. Going to the circus, and then return back to Cassau.


    Unless there¡¯s an emergency, I won¡¯t use portal any more than that.


    I also checked the university again. I¡¯ve never been here as student. And no one would know that I was actually a professor for air element. Except those who attended my ss obviously.


    Since Sara is busy, she can¡¯t teach ss for the next few days. But I heard that Dean is in charge for air element ss so it¡¯s still progressing.


    Thanks to Sara, she could put practice into words and theories so other people can learn it themselves. That¡¯s why Dean can teach air element ss. And I just saw him leaving air element ss. Seems like today¡¯s lesson is over.


    Some students from air element ss then grabbed their guns, given to them by Sara after they finished a certain exam, and practice shooting outside.


    They can also borrow the university-owned guns for air mages to practice by themselves. But the quality is worse than a gun given by Sara. Which she got from Marie.


    Air element is bing more and more popr. Even more since the professor teaching was participating in the tournament before. So air mages from all over the country, and even from another kingdom, came here just so they can learn how to shoot.


    Some of the students here even became part of the shooting squad during the mission in Consenza before. They have became so good at shooting. Still not as good as me though.


    I walk to the shooting practice area, which was created after air element became popr after I left. There, I see the air element students shoot a moving target.


    The practice is using a mechanism that will throw something far and fast, and then the shooter can try to shoot them down. The thing that became the target is created from y, so it¡¯s fine if they got destroyed since the material is easy to find. Or they can just ask any earth mage to create more. There¡¯s even a student who created his own targets and bullets using earth magic.


    ¡°This is nice seeing how air element became so popr,¡± I said to myself.


    ¡°It¡¯s all thanks to me! If not for me, no one would expect that air mage can do things like this,¡± Victoria said.


    Yeah. It¡¯s thanks to her that air mage is as developed as it is today. Not just about shooting, but also changing the properties in the air.


    I heard that Sara teaches shooting with guns first before she teaches the students to change the property in the air.


    I¡¯m interested to see the students inhaling sleeping gases during ss and went to sleep. Must be the most peaceful ss ever.


    As I watched the air mages practicing shooting, one male student approached me.


    ¡°Hey, you! I haven¡¯t seen you in ss before. You always skip ss, huh? Are you jealous that I got my own personal gun instead of using the school-owned gun?¡±


    ...What the hell?


    It¡¯s been a while that I interacted with other people outside of mission. And this is the first thing someone said to me?


    I always forgot that standard bullies love to pick on me. they would pick on me thinking that I¡¯m an easy target because I move alone, or they would pick on me because I¡¯m always with several beautiful girls.


    I bet he¡¯s the type to flirt with Ka or other girls if he sees any of them. And he woulld get kicked in the nut like any other men who tried to approach them.


    It¡¯s been so long since Ist seen Ka kicked someone in the nut. I guess because of the tournament, she has became so popr and no one ever thinks that she¡¯s an easy target anymore.


    Maybe I should gain some poprity so no one can mess with me. But when I know that the other side is much weaker than me, it¡¯s funny to see it.


    ¡°What? You can¡¯t talk back because of a simple provocation? How weak! Ahahaha!¡±


    I¡¯ve seen him before trying to shoot. He might have his own gun, but his shooting uracy is worse than most who practiced here. Even some who used the school-owned gun were much better.


    Oh, one of the students I used to teach recognized me. She was also in the shooting squad back in Consenza. Will she try to stop him?


    ¡°Professor Sara told me that if I see Professor Roy getting picked on to just watch because he can take care of it himself. And she said that he should be able to hear me so I¡¯m here talking to myself,¡± she said.


    ...Sara, what the hell were you teaching them? But she¡¯s right though.


    I guess I¡¯ll take care of it then.


    Behind my back, I transformed Victoria into a gun and grabbed the bullets provided by the school to use for practice. It¡¯s time to show the bully that I¡¯m not someone he can look down upon.


    ¡°What is that gun! So small! You think you can shoot anything with it! Maybe you can ask me for a better gun. I¡¯m close with Professor Sara. I can ask her for one,¡± he said.


    I ignored him and walked toward the tool that throws the y targets. I activated it and set it to throw the y as fast as possible and set it so it will shoot rapidly.


    The bullyughed at me thinking that I¡¯m just showing off. Well, I am indeed trying to show off.


    Then it started. The machine shoots y targets rapidly.


    But I¡¯m faster. I shoot the y target one by one. And even when I¡¯m reloading the bullet, I can still shoot all the y targets perfectly. Without missing anything.


    I actually still train my shooting uracy. At least I need to be at Sara¡¯s level. And I think I have reached her level in uracy.


    Combined with my physical abilities, I¡¯m sure that I¡¯m the best shooter in the world. Though there are too little shooter since it¡¯s just recently became popr.


    Everyone was shocked at what I can do. Even my former students. And Dean even watched me from the window of a nearby building.


    I acted like I returned my gun to the holster, then I walked to the bully who is too shocked and thinks that he must have provoked someone he shouldn¡¯t.


    Usually, I would like to bully him back. But he has a gun. Which means that Sara trusted him enough for him to have his own gun. And he could be our ally in fighting the cult. So I must act like a professor here.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think my student, Sara, is close enough to you. But I appreciate your offer even though I don¡¯t need one,¡± I said.


    The bully is too embarrassed after knowing that I actually Sara¡¯s teacher. The others even looked at me with expectation.


    I guess I know what I do for today. I¡¯ll teach them to use a gun. Even though I promised myself to not use magic other than portalter.


    It¡¯s fine since I will just teach them and not using magic anymore. Even if I do use magic, it won¡¯t be much since it¡¯s justpressing air.


    ¡°Your body is not strong enough to handle the recoil. That¡¯s why your uracy is terrible. I know that youpressed the air in your gun more to have more powerful shoot. But putting too much on power will sacrifice your uracy. Now, try to notpress too much air. Just enough for your body to handle it. And during your free time, do some push ups or other exercise to improve your strength. That way your body can endure bigger recoil and you can shoot stronger bullet.¡±


    Instead of bullying him back, I gave him an advise. It¡¯s good that he¡¯s listening well.


    ¡°And for everyone else! Today is my free time after a while! So if you have anything to ask about air magic, you can ask me!¡±


    How is it? I¡¯m being a nice professor, right?


    Doing this is not bad. They will be stronger and more useful in battle.


    I answered all the students¡¯ question they are satisfied. It feels good to have students who sincerely want to learn.

 Chapter 740 - 740 Waiting for Sonia

    740 Waiting for Sonia


    I taught the air element student for a while. And then Dean invited me to visit the hospital. There¡¯s no urgent surgery that I need to do, or any other knowledge I can spread at the moment. I have spread the knowledge to all the doctors there.


    They only need to watch me perform surgery for some rare disease. But fortunately, there¡¯s no one here has been recorded to be diagnosed with those rare disease.


    At least I have taught them how to perform the surgery if there¡¯s anyone diagnosed with those disease. But if they could watch me perform surgery, the doctors will be more confident if they need to do it themselves in the future.


    Sophie was there at the hospital. She¡¯s popr among the patients, nurses, and other doctors.


    Fortunately among the male doctors and nurses, none of them dare to flirt with her knowing that she¡¯s mine.


    Well, even those who dare, once they got electrocuted by her lightning magic, they won¡¯t dare to do it again.


    It¡¯s good to see someone has changed her life into a better one. It¡¯s all thanks to me! Praise me!


    Well, it¡¯s also thanks to Sophie herself. She tried to make an effort. She is smart and is good with her hands. So once she had the opportunity to be a doctor, she¡¯s doing it so well.


    The only reason I¡¯m still a better surgeon than her is because I¡¯m an Aura Master. If I¡¯m not an Aura user or Aura Master, and I¡¯m just like in my previous life with shitty physical ability, I can only perform surgery slowly.


    .....


    Well, it¡¯s also thanks to Divine Vision. Maybe one of the reason I desired such ability was because I want to see clearly what¡¯s my patients¡¯ disease with just one look.


    I chatted with Sophie, Dean, and other doctors for a bit before I opened a portal to Thomas¡¯ location. To see how the circus is doing.


    ...In just twenty four hours, I do several jobs. It¡¯s funny.


    I was a fighter until a bit past midnight. Then in the morning, I was a businessman. Later, I was an educator. Then I¡¯m a doctor. Soon, I will be a clown.


    I can¡¯t believe that I¡¯m this busy. The me from my past life would look at me now and asks, ¡°What the hell am I doing?!¡±


    Well, in reality, since this is what I choose to do, I don¡¯t feel busy at all. Rather, other than fighting, I feel like my other jobs are for me to spend my spare time.


    I opened a portal and see the shocked face of Thomas.


    ¡°Roy, you¡¯re back! How¡¯s the mission?¡± he asked.


    ¡°At least it¡¯s going good so far. You¡¯re camping?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. We had just left the previous city yesterday. Our performance is going great so far even without you helping,¡± he said.


    I guess I won¡¯t be a clown tonight. But it¡¯s fine. For a circus, it¡¯s more like we travel more than perform.


    As for the next destination, we should get there in a few days. But I don¡¯t know if I can help the circus or not.


    I chatted with everyone there. About their shows during the time I left. And the agents/performers also asked me how I did and how the others are doing in our mission.


    We exchanged information until it¡¯ste. They¡¯re in the middle of a journey and need some rest.


    I would offer them to stay if I¡¯m fully recovered. Sadly, I still need some rest myself. So I bid my farewell and return back to Cassau.


    I had dinner with everyone. They are still tired so they return to their room soon after.


    It¡¯s a great uneventful day. I like it.


    The next day, still no report from Sonia.


    In the morning before breakfast, I left to the forest to check my physical condition.


    With Divine Vision, I know that I¡¯m perfectly healthy. But I still need to move my own body to check if I havepletely recovered or not.


    When I looked at everyone while they¡¯re still sleeping, their body has slowly recovered. Not as fast as my body, but still good. Of course they need to do light training to check their own condition first.


    I jog in the forest, had a fistfight with a bear, racing with a wolf, and I can tell that I¡¯m perfectly recovered. My magic is fine as well. I can do the next mission right away.


    I feel like my body is growing stronger after yesterday¡¯s rest. Well, I was kind of busy, but it didn¡¯t take much of my energy. So I can say that it¡¯s a rest.


    I can even lift heavy object easier than before I stayed in Monsters World. I can still grow stronger.


    I thought that my strength has peaked. My physical strength without Aura.


    But after exhausting myself and rested enough, I realized that I¡¯m still not at the peak. I guess I will return to do regr practice from today. Unless I¡¯m on a mission.


    After breakfast, I move to Albert¡¯s office. If Sonia recognized where she¡¯s currently in, she shoulde here first.


    I hope she¡¯s okay. Because if the Evil God is somehow hiding there, she might note out unscathed. Though I wonder if ghost can bleed or not?


    ¡°Roy, you¡¯re here. I¡¯ve heard the report from the others. Good job,¡± he said.


    This is our first meeting after that night so he can only say that to me now.


    ¡°No problem. More importantly, have you heard anything from Sonia?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Not yet. But have you returned back to Monsters World yesterday,¡± Albert asked me back.


    ¡°No. But I can feel that Shelia was in a fight. I guess the cult entered the portal yesterday, but they lost when they¡¯re up against the werewolves. Am I right?¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s right. One of the summoner we have is connected with the destroyed base in the monsters world. The agent you brought to watch over that ce was bringing a small monster for the summoner to open a portal to so he can be our informant.


    ¡°Last night, a portal opened and from it, several master level mages appear. But the werewolves are much stronger than a few days ago so they can defeat them. Unfortunately, some managed to retreat back to the portal. But one of the werewolves who got close to the portal could smell the scent of a vampire from the night before. Which meant that they opened a portal from the same location,¡± Albert exined.


    That mean the cult probably only have one location as the supply provider. If we can locate that ce, we can get closer to the Evil God.


    ¡°Once Sonia located that ce, gather everyone so we can discuss about our next move. And it will be great if we got a lot of information from the previous battles,¡± Albert said.


    There are several locations that we¡¯re currently investigating. Including thewless country.


    Even that cat-man was ordered to be the Archbishop by another Archbishop. This time, the one ordered him was a masked Archbishop. It¡¯s likely to be the Archbishop that Veronica and Celestine recognized. I haven¡¯t told them about it yet.


    There are too many information entering my brain. I have given my report to one of the agents about the cat-man. He should have informed Albert about it.


    I told him to deliver the report because if it¡¯s up to me, I might have forgotten it by the next day. And I indeed forget about many things except for the important parts. But those forgotten part might be the most important part. So I need to have someone to remember it.


    Well, at least Victoria doesn¡¯t have as bad memory as I do. But she doesn¡¯t always stay with me.


    The one staying with me all the time is Airy. But she¡¯s not as observant as Victoria so we can¡¯t rely on her much. Though we can still ask something from her. Maybe we can gain something from her memory.


    The one thing I asked Airy to do is to see if there are any other elemental spirits nearby. But she didn¡¯t react at all even though we have been to multiple ces.


    Later in the evening, while I¡¯m still in Albert¡¯s pce ying with the twins, Sonia finally appears.


    ¡°I found it. I found where they deliver the supply from,¡± she said.


    ¡°Great. Tell Albert about it first then you can tell the other kings. Including Yuria since she¡¯s already a member of our alliance. Also tell them to free their schedule tomorrow. We might have a long discussion ahead,¡± I said.


    It¡¯s finally here. We can raid another location.


    After I finished ying with the twins, I returned home and informed everyone that we¡¯re having a meeting tomorrow. They are also ready.


    Even if that ce is not where the Evil God is hiding, that ce should be something special for the cult.


    A giant cult is hiding in this world. And the big countries have created alliance to destroy the cult. But they somehow still survive this long. Which mean that they have a way to provide for themselves without the help of any countries.


    An independent country? Probably. We will know more from Sonia¡¯s report tomorrow.

 Chapter 741 - 741 Meeting New Allies

    741 Meeting New Allies


    The next day, I¡¯m here in Arturo. The kings said that we¡¯re going to have a meeting here with the permission from Fabio.


    Harold, Carmen, Bernard, Toni, and Luna are here as well. Still, even with how good her Future Sight is, I don¡¯t think it¡¯s a good idea to have Luna here. Though it was Luna herself who said that she wanted toe.


    From Varadis, Old man Henry, Julia, and the future king, William, areing. Though he might not be a king in the future if old man Henry decided to stay after reaching master level.


    Looking at his level, he does concentrate on cultivating and try to reach the next level as soon as possible instead of getting stronger. Even at the expert level stage, other expert level mages feel much stronger than him.


    Well, if it¡¯s him, his political power is much stronger than his magic power. In fact, even if he just staying alive and continue his job instead of fighting, that would be great.


    From Consenza, Lynn, udia, and Celestine are here. And we asked them to bring some master level mages that helped us in thewless country before.


    It might be dangerous to bring master level mages who are former members of the cult. But Celestine and Veronica are both also former members of the cult. And we¡¯re confident that we can defeat them if they tried to do anything. It has been proven during the battle in thewless country.


    Of course udia sent some people to protect the kids. So even if the master level mages are not there, the kids can still be protected.


    ...They don¡¯t actually need protection from outside attack. udia has made it so that ce is safe from the cult.


    .....


    The only protection the kids need is protection from themselves in case they tried to do harm to other people. If they continue thinking that normal city is the same as thewless country, they won¡¯t be able to live peacefully.


    As from Tatrama, Albert, Marie, Mustache, n, and Lana are here. So this kingdom also brought kids here. At least Luna has friends to y with.


    In fact, those three are the only kids here. And they are seated close to each other. With Julia behind them acting as their guardian while Marie will participate in the discussion.


    Those three children are children of royalty. So they know a thing or two about politics. They won¡¯t cause trouble during the discussion.


    Then, there¡¯s also Yuria and Patricia from Rygis. Those who have joined the alliance are here.


    There are some other people who might be the newly joined members from smaller countries. I guess I missed a lot of things because I have been staying in Monsters World for a while. They are looking at me curiously.


    Since it¡¯s the first time I used portal to bring them in, they were shocked. I was also shocked when Albert and the others told me to bring them in. Good thing Victoria can tell where the clones that were given to those new members.


    As for how, Victoria herself doesn¡¯t know it. She just thinks of where the clone is, and the location will be connected to my mind. And I can open a portal there.


    ¡°It¡¯s Magic World. The only exnation needed is because it¡¯s magic.¡±


    That¡¯s what Victoria told me when I asked.


    Those new members just joined. And it¡¯s a good time as well for Albert to see if they are really saying the truth that they¡¯re going to fight the cult or not.


    Thenstly, it¡¯s us. Me, Ang, Ka, Wendy, Candy, and the others are here. We don¡¯t belong to any country even if we live in one. Derek and Randy joined us here. Though Derek also looked at the other master level mages from thewless country. Maybe he wants to go over there?


    We started with the introduction to the smaller kingdoms. Including Rygis.


    Those smaller kingdoms joined because they have fought against the cult in their territory. And it was timely when someone from the alliance came over to visit. With just some messengers.


    Though after their visit, they left and return back to those countries with soldiers and fought the cult. With the same goal in mind, to destroy the cult, those smaller countries joined. Or maybe coerced to join. I don¡¯t know.


    I heard that those smaller kingdoms have something that they can trade to other countries. Like Rygis and wind magic stones. They have other rare objects that can be found in their kingdoms, and trade it to the alliance.


    Unfortunately, they don¡¯t have master level mages. Unlike Rygis. But seeing how they have some expert level mages with them, I guess they are quite good.


    And after the introduction by the smaller kingdoms, the four kingdoms also introduce themselves before the discussion finally started.


    ¡°And so, we¡¯re going to discuss about everything we have found so far. Including the hidden ce that they used to deliver their supplies from,¡± Fabio, as the host of the meeting, announced the beginning of the discussion.


    ¡°I have something to ask. Who are those people?¡±


    One of the king from the smaller kingdoms pointed his hand at me and asked the other kings about who I am.


    I am someone special. I am the only reason that we can fight against the cult so far. Though I think that will be informed to themter.


    Since they just joined, they must not know about all of my achievements. And they will be informed about all the ongoing event and the past events that is rted to the cult that happened so far. They need to get up-to-dates with the current news.


    ¡°They are... We can say that they are soldiers not rted to any kingdom whose sole reason is to fight the cult. They are also registered hunters. So, while we can only send our own soldiers to a fight in our own territory, they can move freely. That way, they can help other countries first instead of having other countries to send their soldiers to the fight only to be counted as an attempt to invade. For who they are, that will also be included in our discussion. There are many things that we need to inform everyone here. Especially since you only meet us today,¡± Fabio said.


    As a young king, he already has the dignity of a king. Harold is looking at him with pride seeing his growth. Though he then looked at old man Henry with envy.


    I guess Harold also want to have a long life. But if his reason is to get more women, Carmen will stop him.


    ...But I think old man Henry himself wanted to get more wives. I mean he has a lot of wives. But I guess he¡¯s not as controversial as Harold since there are not many rumors about him.


    ¡°Does that mean they are mercenaries? I don¡¯t think that status is enough for them to be in this ce,¡± the king who asked who I was said.


    I am not suited to be here? I¡¯m literally the guy who brought them here. Does he want to be transported into the sea?


    ¡°That¡¯s very wrong. In fact, they are more suited to be here than you are. It¡¯s best if we start the discussion so all of you will know who they are.¡±


    It was old man Henry who said that. Even if he¡¯s focusing on increasing his level and leaving most of the job to William, he¡¯s still the current king of Varadis after all.


    ¡°But they are stillmoners! They are not even nobles or have any high status! They don¡¯t deserve to be here!¡± the king keepined.


    ¡°Oh, first time I¡¯ve seen a king acting like a king from novels. I guess the four kings are just too unusual.¡±


    That¡¯s what Victoria whispers to me. But I guess that¡¯s true. I thought that Albert was like that as well. But in my past life, hearing how much effort he do to fight the cult made me realize that not all king are the same.


    That¡¯s also why it was easy for me to approach him in this life. I already know how he really is.


    But I already prepared this. I know what to do in this situation.


    I snapped my fingers to get everyone¡¯s attention. And when all eyes are on me, I, who stood at the very back of the room, opened a portal behind me. A portal to the Monsters World.


    And everyone who looks can see the werewolves behind me standing there and being intimidating.


    ¡°What if I say that I¡¯m the king of the werewolves? Is that okay? Mind you that each of the werewolves that you see is stronger than most expert level mages. And several are strong enough to face against master level mages. So, do I have the qualification to be here?¡± I asked.


    The werewolves are still in the location of the destroyed base. I guess after some mages came and entered there through the portal, the werewolves just want to fight them. That¡¯s why they stayed.


    The newly joined kings and leaders of their country shut their mouth. Their own bodyguard that they brought was alsote to protect their king as they only reacted a bitter.


    ¡°If you care about your status so much, I don¡¯t mind. But don¡¯t bring it here. We¡¯re here to destroy the cult. Not to fight among ourselves. But if you want a fight, I¡¯m ready anytime.¡±


    After intimidating everyone with the werewolves, I close the portal. That should be enough. Though I still feel hostility from some people.


    Maybe we should have some friendly match after this so they know what kind of enemy they will be facing. That way, they know how stupid they really are.

 Chapter 742 - 742 First Topic is About Me

    742 First Topic is About Me


    No one is looking down on me anymore. After all, I¡¯m also a king.


    It might not be a king of a territory, or even a king of groups of humans. Just a king of a monster tribe. But if I want to, I can destroy any country with just the werewolves.


    Not to mention that I also have angels and vampires who are willing to help me. And maybe some elves. I don¡¯t know what the elves are doing other than staying in the vige in peace though. Maybe I¡¯ll start asking them to do something.


    I heard from Lina that they have started make potions. But none of them are good enough to share with us. The potions they made have some side effects to humans. So Lina told them to continue researching until they can develop a potion without any side effects.


    What I¡¯m worried most is how they know that the potions they made have side effects only on human. How do they know? And to whom are the potions being experimented on?


    I¡¯ll ask Linater. I hope she¡¯s not using her own body to experiment on the potions.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s truly start the meeting now. I¡¯ll start with introducing you all to Roy over there. A summoner, an air mage, and also the king of the werewolves. And it¡¯s not just werewolves. He also have angels, elves, and vampires under him. And he¡¯s also our strongest hidden card against the cult.¡±


    Fabio introduced me to the other kings who are still looking at me in fear.


    Don¡¯t worry, as long as you¡¯re not in any way involved with the cult, I won¡¯t do anything to harm you.


    .....


    ¡°Hidden card? What else he can do other than summoning monsters... wait. How did he have so many monsters as summoner? That¡¯s not possible! Is he both a summoner and a tamer? That will make sense.¡±


    One of the king finally realized what was wrong with me.


    ¡°Well, I guess we¡¯ll start the discussion about Roy first. Since I¡¯m the first one to meet him, I will be the one telling you about him,¡± Albert stood from his seat and started introducing me.


    He didn¡¯t tell the others that I came from the future. No one would believe that. And he also didn¡¯t tell them that I¡¯m an Aura user either.


    Well, that¡¯s natural. Albert has never meet any of them before since I was busy in investigating and nning things in the cult¡¯s base in the Monsters World. He still can¡¯t trust them yet. So he will see their reactions.


    But he did tell them that I have a slime, a werewolf, an angel, and a horse as my familiars. None of them are normal monsters though.


    ¡°How did he get multiple familiars?¡± one of the kings asked.


    Then it¡¯s Lynn¡¯s turn to tell everyone about the Pear-y Fruit¡¯s effect. She¡¯s the one telling the others because she has a lot of that fruits.


    Well, for the alliance, Consenza Empirecked something to trade with other countries since other countries don¡¯tck in anything that Consenza already have. That¡¯s why I suggested that she grows Pear-y Fruit in her territory and share them.


    Though it¡¯s still a secret. We don¡¯t want the cult to know anything about the fruit yet. So we will only share them to everyone in the alliance.


    Growing that fruit is quite difficult. But thanks to Tia who got summoned by Lina to help growing the fruit, Consenza are now able to raise it. But it¡¯s still a rare fruit. And the cult has the most summoners so we can¡¯t just give it to anyone.


    But there should be at least a few summoners belong to any of the countries here. So Lynn will trade the fruit with them.


    She also told everyone how and when to eat the fruits. Because it won¡¯t have any other effect other than increasing the slot for summoners to have another familiar once they leveled up. It didn¡¯t even taste that good. Even normal pears taste better.


    And now, all the kings are interested in summoners. And each of them indeed have summoners under them. Though we still need to test their loyalty first.


    After that, it¡¯s my turn to exin about summoners. Including how to use portal. This way, other kings will probably have a summoner with them most of the time so they can move to a safe ce if the summoners with them opened a portal for them.


    I will also bring those summoners to the Monsters Vige so they can have a safe ce in Monsters World as a transfer point. Maybe as a home for their monster as well.


    I also told them how summoners are the same as tamer in Monsters World. And it¡¯s possible for us summoners to make a contract with a much more powerful monsters there.


    ¡°I see. Then, how did you open a portal to our locations directly? There shouldn¡¯t be any monsters around us,¡± another king asked.


    ¡°Because of me.¡±


    This time, Victoria exined it herself.


    It¡¯s the first time that they see a monsters with intellect. And now they know how I can be the king of the werewolves when I only made a contract with one of them.


    And they know that the present given to each of them is not just an essory that they need to be in their person at all time. They are monsters.


    ¡°Does that mean I will have a piece of monster with me at all time,¡± the king asked.


    ¡°Well, here¡¯s a demonstration of what that piece of monster can do to you.¡±


    I grabbed a chair and walked toward Albert. The bodyguards of the other kings must be thinking that their king could be in danger. But I¡¯m only walking toward Albert. Mustache is staring at me with a scary expression, but he knows that it¡¯s something that we needed to demonstrate.


    I swung the chair at Albert who is acting very calm. The other kings were shocked to see that I attacked Albert all of a sudden.


    Then suddenly, from his chest pocket, a ck slime appears. The ck slime then transformed into an armor protecting Albert from the impact of the chair.


    I also didn¡¯t use Aura so Albert won¡¯t get hurt. Still, with just my physical strength, I barely made a crack on the Blobbyarmor.


    ¡°Well, as you can see, that piece of monster can protect you when you¡¯re in danger. So, not only I can go to your location if you have Victoria¡¯s clone, her clone can also protect you at least from an attack from advanced level mage. But if your opponent is expert level mage, it depends on the strength of their magic. If it¡¯s master level mage, there¡¯s nothing you can do though. But at least you can survive for a while longer just by carrying Victoria¡¯s clones,¡± I said.


    We have tested how quick can the Blobby transform when the carrier is in danger. They were set so they can transform as fast as possible.


    Hearing that just carrying it can protect their lives, they asked for more.


    ¡°Unfortunately, even if Victoria can create as many clones as possible, I won¡¯t give you more than one. The cult knows about portal, but they don¡¯t know that summoner can also open a portal using clones of their contracted monster. So it is something that I will use as much as possible for other things like raiding their base,¡± I said.


    With this alone, everyone already knows how valuable I am. And no one should look down on me anymore.


    ¡°Excuse me for being rude, but I still don¡¯t think he is enough to be called as our strongest hidden card. He¡¯s still just a summoner and an air mage. Only his familiars are strong. The guy himself doesn¡¯t look strong.¡±


    All of a sudden, one guyined. He¡¯s a bodyguard for one of the king who has just recently joined us.


    I heard from Albert who was whispering to himself that their kingdom was almost destroyed by the cult. But the soldiers from Consenza arrive before they werepletely destroyed.


    When Lynn¡¯s messenger looked at the situation and tried to annex that kingdom, the king and the survivors rejected that idea. Even though there are so little people left after all the cult members were killed.


    That makes his kingdom is the weakest. Maybe that¡¯s why they couldn¡¯t ept that someone who is just an air mage and a summoner be called as the strongest.


    ¡°Even if you don¡¯t like it, it¡¯s a fact. There are more important things to discuss rather than strength. So can you just be quiet and listen? There are a lot of stories to tell. Even one day won¡¯t be enough of it. We¡¯re going to continue with this for the next few days, right?¡± I asked Fabio.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. For that, we prepared documents for everyone to read. But even then, we need to discuss everything. So if you want to go back to your country instead of staying here, being hostile to Roy is a very bad idea since he¡¯s the only summoner who can transport you back home,¡± Fabio said.


    ¡°Wait! I have the slime with me! How can I go back if there¡¯s no transfer point?¡± another king asked.


    ¡°When we visit your kingdom, the person who gave you that slime also brought several other slimes. They should still be in your residence since they are your guests of honor. I don¡¯t think there will be any trouble for you to return. Oh, by the way, Roy will give you another slime other than the one that will be with you at all time. ce it somewhere safe that he can use as a transfer point in your ce,¡± Fabio said.


    There are far too many things to exin so I returned them back to their home. But Fabio gave them the documents needed for them to keep up-to-date with recent events. We will continue the discussion tomorrow and probably for the next few days.


    For now, the meeting is over. The kings needed to cool their head down first with all the information they received today before they can read the document.


    I asked Fabio about the documents and he said that it doesn¡¯t report about anything too important in case someone is secretly a member of the cult. We still need to confirm their purpose in joining us after all.

 Chapter 743 - 743 Talking About the Cult

    743 Talking About the Cult


    The first meeting was about introduction. The newly joined members need to know everyone in the alliance.


    I heard that there were some countries who refused for some reason. Those countries are still being watched by the spies to see if they are rted to the cult or not.


    I heard that the circus will go to a country that rejected the alliance soon. But I feel like I will be too busy to join them. I¡¯ll just leave it to everyone there. There are other clowns who can perform well albeit the fact that I¡¯m much better than them.


    ...Man, I miss performing in front of an entire audience.


    By the way, the fact that the circus members are also functioning as agents for the alliance to interact with smaller kingdoms is written in the documents given to each representatives in the alliance. So by now, everyone must have learned about it.


    Even if the documents are neatly written, there must be a whole lot information that everyone need to process. Though I didn¡¯t read it.


    Everyone was given. Including me, Ang, Kron, and even the bodyguards of the kings of the smaller countries. But I didn¡¯t read it.


    My job is just to fight. Though if there¡¯s anything important I needed to know, Ka will inform me about it. I already asked her to just tell me anything important that I might need to know about if there¡¯s any.


    Yesterday, after the first meeting was over, Ka read the entire documents. But she didn¡¯t tell me anything after she finished reading. So I guess there¡¯s nothing really important for me to know.


    .....


    Which mean the documents didn¡¯t include the location of the ce that Sonia scouted. I wonder where it is.


    Also,st night, I entered Monsters World and waited at the destroyed base to see if there will be any other cult members who entered the portal to go there. The result, there were none.


    I waited with the werewolves who have gotten bored and started sparring among themselves. But no one wasing.


    I checked with my Divine Vision just in case, but within the range of my vision, there¡¯s nothing strange at all. Other than the asional monsters who came and got themselves killed by the werewolves.


    Which mean by now, the cult already knows that their base in Monsters World is already gone. There¡¯s not even some tamed monsters there.


    We have destroyed one of their source to get powerful monsters. I don¡¯t know if there are other bases in Monsters World or not. But my guess is that there are several more of them.


    The destroyed base was too far from the sea. But they somehow managed to tame a King Orca and several other sea monsters. So there should be at least a base here close to the sea. I asked some werewolves to scout near the sea just in case.


    I also thought that there might be some master level mages who would camp outside for days, weeks, or even months, before they return back to the base. That¡¯s why we can¡¯t leave that destroyed base alone yet.


    Today is the second day for the meeting. And like yesterday, I brought everyone back to Arturo. some of the kings and the bodyguards seem to be tired. Must be because they were up the whole night reading the reports.


    ¡°Well, we have finished the introduction yesterday. So it¡¯s best if we start our discussion for real this time. What we¡¯re going to discuss first is about the cult. Does anyone have any question from the documents you have received?¡± Fabio asked.


    So it¡¯s just a question and answer session. I¡¯m bored. Even Ang is sleeping. Maybe she should just left and train by herself.


    Since I¡¯m free, let¡¯s just read the documents I received. In the end, I need to read them.


    The first page is about the cult first. The enemy. Maybe it¡¯s to make everyone aware the challenge ahead. Instead of about our alliance and the goal of our alliance, it started with the cult.


    The question is mostly about the kings¡¯ curiosity about the so-called Evil God. Or what¡¯s called as the True God ording to the believers.


    ¡°Then, anyone knows about the cult¡¯s real intention? About their faith, their God, or anything at all rted to the cult?¡± Fabio asked.


    I guess this is the real goal for having the cult mentioned first in the meeting. For Albert to use his lie detection ability to see if any of the neers are lying or not.


    Fabio even asked them one by one about the cult. I don¡¯t need to see their reaction since Albert will just tell me about it if he finds any liar.


    I just read the documents instead. Apparently, they didn¡¯t write anything about the Evil God was a human who killed Aura users to extinction. Or maybe I haven¡¯t read that part yet.


    The wrote that there are factions inside the cult. But even though they fought against each other, they still believe in their True God.


    It¡¯s also written that Celestine and Veronica were members of the cult. The master level mages from the cult that I brought here were shocked.


    But they understand after hearing Celestine¡¯s exnation about different factions. Without ever being told what factions they were in before.


    ¡°Derek, do you know about Celestine and Veronica?¡± I asked Derek who is seated close to me.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know them personally. But I have heard that the big butt factions and big boob factions both had amazing representative. Seeing them here, I guess they were right. I also heard that the faction leader from each side were missing. I guess they joined you guys,¡± he said.


    Everyone heard what Derek said. And obviously, they started looking at Veronica¡¯s butt and Celestine¡¯s boobs. Those two have gotten used to it so they ignored them.


    ¡°Wait, is that man also a former member of the cult?¡± one king asked.


    ¡°Yes. I helped him with his revenge and he¡¯s going to help us with our mission. Don¡¯t worry because we have confirmed all the former cult members¡¯ loyalty. And it¡¯s not toward the cult or the Evil God. And having more master level mages would be great to increase our strength,¡± I said.


    Then I introduced those who were former members of the cult and have reached master level in their magic.


    ...I just pointed my finger at them and tell everyone that they are master level mages. I don¡¯t remember their names other than Derek.


    ¡°Oh, and the bodyguard of the representative from Rygis is also a master level mage. She¡¯s the only master level mage here who wasn¡¯t a member of the cult. Though her granddaughter was one. And we have put her in prison,¡± I said.


    ¡°What?! I thought that she was someone¡¯s daughter! But she¡¯s a grandma?!¡±


    Yeah. That¡¯s the obvious reaction that someone would have after seeing Patricia. I mean she does look like a kid.


    Once she told me that her height never increase even when she was young. So as she increases her level, her appearance became younger and younger. And that made her look like a little girl.


    She said that when she gave birth to her child, her appearance was a bit older than she is now. I guess she hadn¡¯t reached master level yet at that time.


    Now the attention is turned to the former members of the cult and the master level mages. Patricia included.


    ¡°We have this many people reached master level? Don¡¯t you think that we can win easily then?¡± one optimistic king asked.


    ¡°Actually, there were more of them that we encountered. Most of them are dead though. And the rest have been captured. I don¡¯t think they will join us or leave the cult,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Does that mean we will lose?¡± he asked again.


    I didn¡¯t answer because Fabio stopped me from answering. I guess he wants to show everyone how capable he is even though he¡¯s only been a king for a short time.


    ¡°I believe everyone has read the reports, right? Then everyone knows that the cult is nning for world destruction. Maybe it will not just about the world. But the system as well. Killing kings, queens, emperors, and everyone in high position so they are free to do whatever they want. We have confirmed it with the cult members we interrogated. So, if we win, we can protect the world. If we lose, we all die. Even if you joined the cult, you will still die in the end. If you¡¯re thinking of joining hands with the cult, I suggest that you don¡¯t,¡± Fabio said.


    I see. They didn¡¯t mention why we know about the cult¡¯s real goal to destroy the world. I mean who would believe that I came from the future thanks to a slime from even distant future who witnessed the destruction of the world?


    Though it did seem like these people were being coerced to join us. I guess they did experienced what the cult did to their own country. That¡¯s why they were willing to join us in the first ce. And none of them actually thinking to join the cult. That is a good news.


    Albert also told me that none of the people here were lying. None of them are rted to the cult directly. But I guess we still need to investigate more about the people in their countryter.


    And the discussion progressed.

 Chapter 744 - 744 The Greatest Invention

    744 The Greatest Invention


    The discussion continued to the 4th day. I have been taking everyone to Arturo and back four days in a row. But it wasn¡¯t as bad as that time in Monsters World where I have to open a portal for hundreds of people, fight, then open more portals, and more fighting, in just one day without much rest.


    By the way, in the destroyed cult¡¯s base in Monsters World, I heard from Shelia that someone was just returning back after taming hundreds of strong monsters. But the werewolves were much stronger than them all. And Shelia killed the master level mage who was also a tamer.


    That means we¡¯re right to have them stay there. There might be moreing, so it¡¯s a good thing that the werewolves stayed behind.


    I also opened a portal to that ce every two days and gave everyone food and new information from this side. Just to make the agents who stayed behind to not feel bored.


    I also checked other ces like the viges we raided and thewless country. I brought some agents back so they can report it to us directly in the meeting. While the rest will return on their own.


    That¡¯s right. Just walk on your own. Or maybe fly.


    It has been a while since the discussion began, but Sonia still hasn¡¯t told us where the she had been. Is it anotherwless country? Or maybe some sort of country that we have no idea of its existence about? Or maybe both? Or maybe neither?


    But the only reason we haven¡¯t talked about it must be because we¡¯re still safe. The cult is probably still hasn¡¯t prepared anything to attack anyone yet thanks to the destroyed base.


    They must be thinking that it¡¯s because of some powerful monsters. And those monsters are there waiting for more of them toe. They didn¡¯t connect the monsters to us on Earth because they still have no idea that our summoners can use portal as well.


    .....


    So there¡¯s a high possibility that they will attack Monsters World first. Going to the destroyed base, and see all werewolves that seem strong and trying to tame them.


    But we have proven them that our werewolves are stronger than their master level mages. we have defeated several of them. So they will have to send more master level mages if they want to get the werewolves.


    But is it worth it to fight the werewolves and tame them?


    I don¡¯t know. But the cult must have know by this time that conquering Monsters World is not easy. And they¡¯re going to destroy both this world and Monsters World in the future. So they will probably develop their strength first.


    Possibly, they will get as many master level mage first before they start doing anything. But I could be wrong.


    We¡¯re currently talking about what each agents in the viges I raided before found. Some of them seem to be useful.


    The kings that recently joined still have a lot of questions. But Fabio, Albert, and the others who have been with me for so long, answered all the questions patiently.


    ¡°So, there are multiple people in the cult that are called Archbishop. And the one who wears a mask seem to be the big boss of the Archbishops who appointed those fake Archbishops just for shows. There are various theories about why he did that. But the most likely one is that each fake Archbishop is leading a group who made their own beliefs. Just like the factions that Veronica and Celestine lead before. And in case those group of people cause some trouble, the soldiers will fight them and they will think that we will stop after we think that the Archbishop is the highest position and they are not rted to other factions.¡±


    Fabio summarized everything that we have found and discussed today.


    That seem likely. This way, if a faction act like the good guy, once another faction acted like the bad guy, the good guy faction won¡¯t be suspected even though they should be on the same side. So there only be one faction that will fight us.


    But isn¡¯t it already toote by this time to think about that? Maybe they have done so for a long time already. And we just found out about it.


    But I guess the cult didn¡¯t expect that we would found out about it very soon. And they might not know it yet.


    Hmm... but several of the Archbishop has been captured and killed. So they will obviously know about it soon. I guess we just have to keep our eyes open to any iing attack.


    The discussion then continued to Sonia. And we started introducing Sonia to everyone.


    This is a ghost. Ghost can teleport. Ghost ry messages. Ghost is very great!


    Is what I will say if I¡¯m the one introducing Sonia to everyone. But I¡¯ll just let the king do it.


    In the Blobbies that were given to the kings at first, there¡¯s a small amount of Sonia¡¯s soil which will allow her to teleport to their location.


    This means that Sonia will get even busier. Maybe I shouldn¡¯t have killed her harem right away when I first met her. They could be a great help to her.


    But I also never thought that Sonia will be used this way. And I have never heard of her making aint about how busy she is. I guess she can still handle it.


    ¡°I will try my best to ry messages as fast as possible, but it would be difficult if I have several people contacting me at once. But I might not be needed as much anymore thanks to Marie¡¯s invention,¡± Sonia said.


    Wait, what? A new invention? Is that why she brought along those things when I brought them over?


    When I brought them to Arturo, Marie asked me to also bring her inventions. It¡¯s looks like ck hand mirror with a lot of mechanism inside it.


    ¡°Huhu... It¡¯s finally here! The era of phone is here!¡±


    All of a sudden, Victoria shouted.


    We haven¡¯t told them all that Victoria came from another world. But she¡¯s acting weird now.


    So, those ck mirrors are phones, huh? The thing that made Victoria so happy.


    Marie showed the phones and demonstrate it in front of everyone.


    ¡°I made this thing called a phone. In which you can call or even send a text message to another person whom you have registered in your phone,¡± Marie said as she demonstrate it.


    Then she yed with the so-called phone. The mirror suddenly turn bright. But there¡¯s no more mirror. In fact, there¡¯s something that is called screen by Marie.


    Then she touched her phone, and after a while, she puts her phone on her cheek. With one side close to her ear and the other side close to her mouth.


    Soon after, a weird sound was heard. It¡¯s ringing over and over again. And the source is from Albert¡¯s pocket. Of which there¡¯s another phone stored there.


    Then Albert took out his phone, touched it, and do the same thing as Marie putting the phone on his cheek.


    ¡°Marie? Yes, we¡¯re connected.¡±


    Okay. By this time, even Ang whocked interest in the meeting and mostly just sleep or secretly cast small magic to train her magic control, is extremely interested with the invention called the phone.


    This way, we don¡¯t have to use Sonia for rying message anymore. And Sonia can focus on spying on the enemy while being invisible. That would be great.


    Though everyone will still have Sonia¡¯s Soil with them just in case they are in an emergency situation and can¡¯t reach their phone for some reason.


    ¡°We can use it not just for calling other people who have phone. But also to send messages.¡±


    This time, Marie wrote a simple text and showed what the text is to everyone. It¡¯s just a simple greeting.


    Then she tapped her finger on the phone and Albert¡¯s phone is ringing again. This time, it stopped after one ring.


    Albert then showed the message on his phone to everyone. He gave his phone to Mustache who walked around and showed the screen to everyone. And the message is the same that Marie sent.


    ¡°This is amazing! What a great invention! King Albert, your wife is a genius!¡±


    There¡¯s also a ck Slime with me who acted so proudly. She¡¯s not the one being praised though.


    ¡°I actually able to made this for a while already. I just need to make sure that each phone will only be able to be used by the owner and not anyone else. Now, each of the representative here will be given one phone. And I will give them to other people who have been in the alliance for a long time already. I couldn¡¯t create more since the material is rare. You just need to use it like how you use magic item. Imbue your Mana into it. The first time you do it, the phone will be activated and it will register you as the owner. And no one other than you can use it. As for making a phone call and sending messages, you need to have other people¡¯s magic who have phone as well to register their contact. You just need to have the two phones touching each other while the owners are sending Mana into their phones at the same time,¡±


    Marie then gave us instruction on how to use it.


    This is great. But can this thing work to connect this world and Monsters World? If so, this thing is way too amazing.


    But it means that Marie¡¯s life will be in even more danger if the enemy knows that she¡¯s the only one who can create phone. Well, Mustache will protect her. And even Lana is as strong as regr expert level mage now. In normal case.


    When she¡¯s angry or her emotion is provoked, she might be as strong as master level mage.


    This also means that those twins whose mother have the same problem as Marie did during her pregnancy, will have one of the kids be exceptionally powerful when they are young.


    With how the treatment is already known, there might be more powerful babies in the future.


    Still, having twins is already rare as it is. And having the same symptom as Marie did is even rarer. So I hope it won¡¯t be a trouble in the future.


    Anyway, phone is great! Phone is amazing! I want ten of them! Maybe more!

 Chapter 745 - 745 How Amazing a Phone is

    745 How Amazing a Phone is


    It¡¯s great. Apparently, Marie had created a whole lots of them. And they will be given to some high-ranking agents and me, who will give them to whoever I find trustworthy. Maybe the monsters.


    Marie just said that the production is limited so that the others won¡¯t ask for more. So other than one phone for the king, they will be given one or two more so they can give them to their trusted attendants whom they brought here. Their bodyguards.


    It might be the wrong decision though. After all, their bodyguard should be with their king almost all the time. So they don¡¯t really need a phone.


    But it might be a good idea as well. Since if their king is in trouble, and they can¡¯t call for help, their bodyguard will be the one contacting the us for help. Though contacting Sonia is easier since she can just teleport to their location, and check on the situation herself instead of being told what to do.


    No matter, phone is the greatest invention of this world. And almost everyone in Victoria¡¯s world have these thing in their pocket? And even more advanced than this? I guess her world is just too advanced.


    How to use it is simple. It¡¯s just like using any other magic item. Pouring mana into the phone. And the phone has registered its owner¡¯s magic so they can only be activated by the owners. That¡¯s great.


    ¡°And there¡¯s no battery at all. It canst for years or maybe decades without having the need to be charged. Magic is great.¡±


    That¡¯s what Victoria said as her fingers quickly tapped on the phone while the others are still slowly learning. Is that muscle memory?


    I guess even after more than a thousand years living in this world, far longer than the time she lives in her previous world, she still remembers how to use a phone because she used it every day.


    .....


    And it was made to be very simr to the phone in her previous life. One that she is familiar with since I heard that there¡¯s many different types of phones.


    The weight is not that heavy. Even kids can lift them easily. And it¡¯s quite durable that it won¡¯t break easily after falling on the ground.


    ...Though if I squeeze it hard enough even without using Aura, it will break. I need to carefully take care of it so it won¡¯t break since it will be bad if I don¡¯t have other people¡¯s contact information anymore.


    Registering other people¡¯s contact information is by recognizing the differences between each people¡¯s mana. That¡¯s great. Even I just know that each people¡¯s mana have their own characteristic. And even after we leveled up in our magic element, it will stay the same.


    Anyway, we exchanged all contact information with everyone here. Even Ang, Ka, and the others are exchanging contact information with all the kings and their bodyguards.


    I feel like some of the kings are targeting my girls. Though they can protect themselves so I don¡¯t need to worry.


    Then I looked back at the children who are attending this meeting. Especially at Lana.


    She has a phone in her pocket. She saw me looking at her and just smiled while putting her finger in front of her lips saying that it¡¯s a secret.


    I see. They gave Lana a phone since she already can use magic. That¡¯s why n and Luna didn¡¯t get any.


    And Lana didn¡¯t exchange information with the others since it will be troublesome if they know that a child who wasn¡¯t supposed awakened her element yet to be able to use a magic item. She¡¯s special indeed.


    She then walked toward me to whisper something.


    ¡°Father said that I will give you...tak... ¡°Contact information¡± right, that! Later after you brought everyone home.¡±


    After saying that, she returns back to her seat. The others were watching us, but none of them were suspicious since it¡¯s already known that I¡¯m the doctor who helped Marie gave birth to the twins. Though it¡¯s just about me being a genius doctor. Not a doctor from the future.


    I guess for her, it¡¯s too difficult to remember the word ¡°Exchanging contact information¡± so she can¡¯t say it well yet.


    After we finished exchanging contact to everyone, Marie continued her exnation.


    ¡°You can test calling someone or texting someone on your ownter. I will tell you another thing that your phone can do. Other than for calling and texting, you can also use the third function that I made. It¡¯s called forum. And instead of being private like the messaging function, it will get everyone able to see and reply to what everyone says.¡±


    I checked my phone and do as she says. There¡¯s a forum, and there¡¯s a greeting from Marie there. I can even see the name of the one who wrote it. And after hearing her exnation, I quickly replied it with another greeting from me. and everyone can see it.


    This is great. This way, I don¡¯t need to think about to whom I should send the text to. And when I need to deliver a private message, I can use the normal messaging option. Or just simply use Sonia again.


    Fortunately, Sonia can have her own phone. But it will be troublesome if she carries it everywhere since it will be suspicious if anyone is seeing an unknown object floating around.


    We just told Sonia that she can keep her phone somewhere safe and teleport to her phone¡¯s location when she¡¯s going to use it.


    ¡°It¡¯s a shame that the phone has no camera and many other options. But this is good enough,¡± Victoria said.


    So, this thing can have the broadcasting tool like the camera and can act like a TV screen? Maybe in the future. Marie said that the technology to make that is still not something that we can do at the moment.


    But still, this is great. Even in the future, I have never heard of anything like this.


    Probably if Lana survived her birth in my past life, and Marie was healthy, we wouldn¡¯t be suffering as much as we did in my past life. They might be the most valuable asset we have to fight the cult.


    Then Victoria told me that we could have a drawing function and mapping function in the future in the phone. That would be great.


    But the future is the future. We can leave it to Marie and Victoria¡¯s idea about how to make the phone is better. We need to focus on the present. And what the phone can do is already much better than we expected.


    ¡°...I guess this is it for today¡¯s meeting. I don¡¯t think anyone can focus on what we¡¯re going to discuss after this. So let¡¯s just take this time to test how the phone work instead and focus on the meeting tomorrow,¡± Fabio said as the host.


    ¡°What if we just take the phone, and continue our discussion from our own country? I don¡¯t think we need to have a meeting when we can discuss from far?¡± one king asked.


    ¡°We can¡¯t do that yet. We don¡¯t know if your phone can send a signal to another distant country. I think it¡¯s possible. You can test itter after you return to your country. For now, you can check and call or text each one in your contact list. We need to see if there¡¯s any error before you can bring them back,¡± Marie said.


    ¡°Then how about we make it more interesting?¡±


    When we thought that it¡¯s over and we¡¯re just going to stay here ying with our phones, Albert suggested something.


    ¡°After a few days, I can tell that there are still many of us who don¡¯t believe at some points in the discussion. Like how Ang is called as the strongest in the continent, or that there are master level mages here. So how about we go to the arena and watch whoever wants to fight to see how strong they are? Anyone can challenge whoever they want. It will be interesting, right? After all, we have only been talking about the cult, what they are, what they have done, and what we have done to them so far. Don¡¯t you think that it¡¯s best to know more from action? Let¡¯s let those who wants to fight to fight,¡± Albert suggested.


    ...After the tournament, he became addicted in watching more fight. But his job prevented him to do it. So he suggested it to everyone.


    And in Arturo, there¡¯s also a new Arena that was recently build. The poprity of apetition is soaring after the tournament.


    Well, testing what our phones can do while enjoying the fight is not a bad idea.


    Everyone agrees to it. Especially the kings¡¯ bodyguards. Just to see who has the strongest mage in their country. Though I think I will get challenged. But I will have to refuse.


    Or maybe this is the stage that Albert prepared so I can show everyone what I got, and why they call me as the strongest hidden card. If that¡¯s the case, that mean Albert has decided that everyone here can be trusted. And that is great.


    ¡°We can¡¯t just use the Arena here. Roy, go bring Ka, Celestine, and other earth mages to somewhere far and build the venue there,¡± Fabio said.


    ¡°How about we do it in Monsters World? There¡¯s already an Arena there and it¡¯s quite big. And you can challenge the werewolves or other monsters there if you want,¡± I suggested.


    For some, this will be their first trip to Monsters World. So this is a good experience.


    Yesterday, we have informed those kings that they should bring their summoners with them as well. So if those summoners want even stronger monsters or smarter monsters, they can explore Monsters World. It will be great for them to experiene this world.


    Everyone agrees. So I opened a portal for everyone so they can enter Monsters World.

 Chapter 746 - 746 Friendly Match

    746 Friendly Match


    ¡°So this is Monsters World. This ce is where the monsters who are allying themselves with us live, right? Seems like a poor vige. But I guess that¡¯s natural since there¡¯s no need for money to live here. And everyone here is a monster, so they can just find their own food.¡±


    That¡¯s one of the kings¡¯ reaction after I brought everyone to Monsters World.


    We¡¯re going to have a friendly match. To see how strong everyone is. At least one representative from each kingdom will fight once. To see the differences between them.


    Of course we will fight as well. Especially Ang and Kron who seem to be bored from the meeting. They are excited to fight.


    They shouldn¡¯t though. The fight shouldn¡¯t be anything great. But I guess it¡¯s much better for them than being in a meeting.


    By the way, Derek and the other master level mages from thewless country also received a phone each. After a few days, they agree to join us in the fight against the cult. And Albert has confirmed it.


    This is a great news. I guess making the meeting longer will get them to learn something new. And the things they learned made them decide that destroying the cult is a good idea.


    This is something to be celebrated over. We have more master level mages!


    I think Ang and the others are more interested in fighting them than the bodyguards.


    .....


    In Monsters World, we entered the Colosseum. I asked Ka, Ang, and Celestine to make the Colosseum bigger. This way, the audience will be safe and won¡¯t get hit by stray magic.


    Even if there¡¯s a magicing here, it¡¯s just us here. I can easily protect everyone. But having a bigger arena for the fight is a good idea since we have master level mages as well. Maybe they¡¯re interested in fighting.


    While waiting for the Colosseum to be renovated, which only take a few minutes, my phone vibrated. It¡¯s good that I can set it so that it won¡¯t ring. But the vibration is still too strong. I¡¯ll just set it so it won¡¯t vibrate or ring when I¡¯m on a mission. Or wind mages will notice the vibration.


    There¡¯s a new message. It¡¯s from Albert who is watching the earth mages renovating the Colosseum with the others.


    [Have you exchanged contact information with Lana?]


    That¡¯s the message I got from him. Which I replied with a negative response. There are still many eyes here.


    [Roy, I feel that everyone can be trusted. And everyone agrees that we can conduct investigation in their countries to see if there are any cult¡¯s influence in their territory. Everyone here won¡¯t spread our secrets. So you can tell everyone your secret. About the fact that you¡¯re an Aura user.]


    Just that? Not about the fact that I came from the future?


    I heard from Marie¡¯s exnation before that thismunication device is not perfect yet and someone might be able to read our private text messages. That¡¯s why Albert didn¡¯t write anything abouting from the future. Just that I¡¯m an Aura user.


    The old members of the alliance are busy texting with each others and make a phone call with each other. Including me. While the new members are feeling amazed by the earth mages renovating the Colloseum quickly.


    The Colloseum then finished, and we entered it. All of us are in the audience seat in the same side so we can watch the Arena.


    Meanwhile, I have just finished bringing back some werewolves from the destroyed base who might be interested in the fight. I let Arin and the vampires stay there. They are more interested in drinking blood than fighting.


    I also left some angels who can fight well over there. They can help each other in case there¡¯s a fight.


    All my familiars are here. And the elves, angels, and the werewolves quickly filled the audience seat once the Colosseum is finished.


    ¡°Wow. So big! And they built it so fast. And those monsters belong to our alliance?¡± one king asked.


    ¡°They followed Roy to be exact. And as long as Roy is fighting the cult, they are in the alliance,¡± Albert replied.


    ¡°What if he quits? Will those monsters leave as well?¡±


    That king seems to be quite pessimistic.


    ¡°He won¡¯t. It¡¯s because he¡¯s the one who started this alliance and he¡¯s also the first one to notice about the cult and their intention. Don¡¯t worry about him. If there¡¯s anyone who hate the cult the most, it would be him,¡± Albert replied.


    That¡¯s right. I hate the cult and will do everything I can to destroy thempletely.


    Then I introduced my other familiars to everyone. Including Ray.


    In thest few days, he has been staying in this world. I asked him to get as many horse monsters as possible to join us if he can. And I feel like he agrees with me.


    And just yesterday, after meeting, I had Ka rode a pegasus. And that horse obeyed Ka¡¯s order well. Ray must have instructed it to obey Ka.


    This mean that we will have our own rides. Each important mage from the alliance will have one horse during the war. Since it seems like we can¡¯t just let anyone has a wild horse monsters at any time. They are still monsters after all.


    I also still haven¡¯t feel that we can be reassured with the horses. So we will at least ride them when it¡¯s necessary.


    This will also be included in the meeting. Probably tomorrow. For today, the meeting is already over quite early so we can be here.


    I guess a friendly match is still part of the meeting.


    The werewolves are looking forward for the match. I think that no matter how boring the match is, they will be able to enjoy it.


    Some angels and elves also became like that after living together with the werewolves. I guess their feelings are contagious. Though the elves doesn¡¯t want to fight at all.


    The match soon begun. With two bodyguards of different kings facing each other.


    I guess this might be a good match as an opening. Let¡¯s heat things up!


    ¡°Victoria, teach me more about forum,¡±


    I¡¯m going to use the forum function in the phone. And I asked Victoria who knows more about it to teach me.


    Once I finished posting what I wrote, everyone¡¯s phone started ringing or vibrating. And they looked at their own phone at the same time.


    [I¡¯m going to bet on the ck-haired man. Anyone?]


    Soon after, the forum began quite busy. It¡¯s also a good way for everyone to get used to this new device.


    The amount I bet wasn¡¯t much. I just do it for fun.


    Almost everyone then did the same. And not a single person bet a lot of money. Its just for fun after all. And to get used to the phone.


    The referee is one of the werewolves. He has been refereeing many times so he¡¯s an expert at it. Though it¡¯s just battle among the werewolves. But it¡¯s fine to have him be the referee.


    I can ask Kron since he has experience in it, but it seems like he¡¯s more interested in fighting today. Maybe he will get his turnter.


    The two in the arena noticed that their phones were ringing. They looked at it for a while, then they set their phone into silent mode.


    As expected, having a phone in a fight will be distracting. And there¡¯s a chance that they can get destroyed as well.


    Though if they put it in their pocket and get destroyed, there¡¯s a high chance that they won¡¯t care anymore. After all, they would probably be dead because there¡¯s a magic that can get that close to them.


    ¡°Victoria, can you store our phones and cover them with armor so it won¡¯t be destroyed? We do fight melee after all. We have a higher chance of getting our phones destroyed,¡± I said.


    ¡°Square boobs!¡±


    Victoria then put my phone and her phone around my chest as she transformed herself into an armor. But it does look like I have a square boobs. I don¡¯t like it.


    ¡°Just put them on my pants¡¯ pockets. One on the right and one on the left. Then cover them with Blobbies. Having them sticking on my chest kind of disturbing me when I¡¯m in a fight,¡± I said.


    Good bye square boobs. It¡¯s nice knowing you.


    The battle started. The two who are fighting are both earth mages. It¡¯s kind of interesting to see two people with two same knowledge about magic fighting each other. They are equal in strength and technique. Amateurish.


    The fight continues and finally the guy I rooted for lose. I lose a bit of money but I don¡¯t care. And everyone had a good time.


    Well, not really. Some of the kings realized that they are weak. Especially the kings of the two bodyguards who were fighting.


    That is not enough to face the cult. They are still weak. They even had a problem facing opponent of the same level.


    They even know more about it since they witnessed Ka, Ang, and Celestine built the Colosseum with their earth magic. They are still far from those three even though all of them were expert level mages.


    Well, that¡¯s the first match over. Let¡¯s continue, shall we?

 Chapter 747 - 747 My Disciple Will Fight

    747 My Disciple Will Fight


    The fight continues. Seeing the fight, the werewolves then even entered the stage on their own and asked if there¡¯s any mage who want to fight them.


    Well, it was interesting. So we let it be. Even though it was supposed to be just the representatives testing their strength.


    ¡°Albert, what about Shirley? She hasn¡¯t finished with her job yet?¡± I asked Albert who sat next to me.


    Albert¡¯s sister, Shirley, is busy. That¡¯s why she hasn¡¯t even joined the meeting even though it has been a few days.


    Before the meeting, I asked Albert whether Shirley wanted toe as well or not. She would, but her duty at the moment made it impossible for her toe. That¡¯s why she¡¯s not here.


    She was in another kingdom. Or should I say to kingdoms.


    There¡¯s a territory, or two, in Tatrama near Consenza where two small kingdoms are in control of. And they are constantly fighting against each other.


    Shirley is over there. She told Albert that she¡¯s going to try and make those two kingdoms stop fighting. But I guess it¡¯s too difficult.


    She brought several people with her. Each are strong enough to defeat expert level mages. So I guess she¡¯s safe and she won¡¯t be in any danger.


    .....


    Well even if she is, she can contact Sonia. Or if she has a phone, she can call Albert. Albert has told me that she already got herself a phone with Albert¡¯s contact in there.


    I wonder why she wants to stop the war herself? She can ask someone to help her and they will stop fighting easily once they were shown how powerful we are.


    If she¡¯s here, she and Mustache can act as the representatives from Tatrama and show everyone how strong Tatrama is. But I guess just Mustache alone is enough.


    While I was thinking about that, I am ying with my phone and changed Miguel¡¯s name to Mustache in my contact. I don¡¯t want to forget who I¡¯m talking to. It¡¯s good that we can change the name in the contact however we want. Especially since I often forget names and only remember their characteristic. Though I don¡¯t think we will have more phone owners anytime soon.


    ¡°Shirley is still busy. But she said that the two sides are willing to negotiate soon. She will be the mediator so she will be busier. It¡¯s a shame that she can¡¯t be here, but if that¡¯s what she wants, she is free to do it,¡± Albert said.


    Albert believed in Shirley¡¯s capabilities as not only a powerful mage, but also a princess with political knowledge. He is sure that she can bring result. Whether it¡¯s a positive result or a negative result, it would be great for her.


    Though I wonder what negative result cane from trying to stop a fight between two countries. It should be good that someone tried to stop the fight. But if the negative result is something like the two countries joined together and cooperating to conquer the world, that¡¯s no longer just a negative result. That¡¯s a devastating result.


    But if they are weak, that¡¯s just idiotic response. Not even a result at all.


    While I was thinking so, the match is over. There¡¯s a bodyguard at an expert level mage who actually managed to defeat a werewolf. He is good. But he¡¯s not that good yet. He needs more training.


    I thought that werewolf who just lost was someone who focused more on espionage mission than fighting. Then why is he here? Does he want to fight now?


    I guess that means the mage is not that good then. The werewolf he¡¯s facing is just below average in fighting among the werewolves. And he got injured while fighting as well.


    The match is over. Then two angels fly toward the stage and healed the two fighters. It¡¯s also to show how much healer we have to other countries thanks to the angels. And they¡¯re not just healer. They¡¯re also fighters and mages. they can fight with weapons or with light magic.


    Some angels started using sword and even bow and arrow. Some even uses axe. As long as they feel that they made the right choice, that¡¯s fine.


    The phone keep vibrating wildly after the match. In the forum, I can see that it¡¯s extremely active with so many people started gambling. I started to worry about the future if the kings got addicted to gambling no matter how low the bet is. Even though I¡¯m the one who started it.


    ¡°Hey! The one named Roy! Come fight me if you dare!¡±


    Suddenly, one bodyguard asked someone called Roy to fight him. Come on, Roy! Come and fight him!


    Oh, that¡¯s me.


    I think it¡¯s too soon for me to fight. But I guess it¡¯s fine.


    ¡°If you want to fight my master, you have to defeat me first!¡±


    I know that loud voice even though she tried to tone it down. Jewel wants to fight first.


    Not because someone is challenging her master. But she¡¯s also interested in fighting mages from other country. She¡¯s just using me for her convenience.


    I guess I won¡¯t fight. But it¡¯s around the time that our side will be challenged or will challenge someone. Maybe even Ang will challenge me again.


    ¡°You? Fine. If he¡¯s your master, then you won¡¯t be much either. I¡¯ll defeat you in an instant and then I will defeat your master. This will show who is the strongest one here. I bet I¡¯m even stronger than the master level mages,¡± he said provocatively.


    ...Did he forget that I¡¯m a summoner? And I can just call any of my four familiars and he will have to fight them all. All by himself.


    Where does his confidencee from? He even said that he¡¯s stronger than the master level mages.


    Maybe he¡¯s as strong as Ka and the others. Though I doubt that¡¯s the case. I guess fighting Jewel will show us how strong he is.


    ...Which is not that strong.


    He¡¯s a lightning mage. But even though both him and Jewel have reached expert level in their lightning element, Jewel¡¯s lightning is much stronger.


    And as someone who have learned magic control and many other knowledge from the future, from the past, and from her own experiences, receiving lightning magic attack from someone weaker doesn¡¯t do much damage to her.


    He cast a simple lightning magic, and Jewel just blocked it with her hand after predicting where he will shoot his magic. Then as Jewel cast her own lightning magic, the man also tried to block it. Thinking that it won¡¯t be much.


    But his prediction was wrong. The magic didn¡¯t target where Jewel was pointing. Instead, it came fom above.


    And there he is. Struck by a lightning and got paralyzed. And he lost instantly.


    ¡°This is why I love idiots,¡± I said.


    Someone who doesn¡¯t know how weak he is, got himself pped in the face. Though in this case, struck by lightning.


    Us from the four big countries just watched it ended naturally. It was as expected. The result couldn¡¯t be any more obvious.


    But for the others, they were too shocked. They would never expect that the gap between them and us is toorge.


    Maybe if he chose Carmen as his opponent, he might win since Carmen is a water mage.


    Well, not really. Carmen still had more experience than most expert level mages. And she can just quickly cast her magic before her opponent cast one.


    I guess the gap is just too big.


    In shame, he left the stage and return back to next to his king.


    ¡°Alright, since we have got this far, for the next fight, it¡¯s fine if you want to fight one on one, or one against a group, or a group against a group. We don¡¯t have to watch a one on one fight the whole time we¡¯re here,¡± I said.


    ¡°Since I won, I want to fight again. Whoever wants to challenge me cane!¡±


    Jewel herself announced that she will fight again.


    Many Ang and Kron showed their desire to fight, but they are patient enough to wait for the other kingdoms to send their representative to fight.


    Then one of the bodyguard who is wearing sunsses asked me something.


    ¡°Excuse me, can I ask an angel and a werewolf to fight with me?¡±


    ¡°Sure. Only if they want to. Don¡¯t force anyone who doesn¡¯t want to fight,¡± I replied.


    He then asked an angel who is willing to join him in a fight. And when he asked the werewolves, everyone is willing. So he picked two of them.


    ¡°Jewel, if you want, you can also ask someone to be in your party,¡± I said.


    ¡°No thanks! This will be good for my training as well!¡± she replied.


    As expected of my disciple. She¡¯s willing to take four enemies at once.


    The forum in my phone became quite busy. Not only about the betting, but also about how it might be unfair facing four enemies at once. Though those people whoined were betting for the four.


    I obviously put my money on Jewel. I now she can win. And she hasn¡¯t shown anyone here about her beastform magic.


    One mage, one angel, two werewolves. Facing one girl who can transform.


    The others who were just watching casually became interested in the match. Though it¡¯s obvious who will win. There¡¯s no way Jewel will lose. Though it might take a while since she has four enemies.

 Chapter 748 - 748 Showing Great Leadership

    748 Showing Great Leadership


    Five people on the stage. One against four. But the match hasn¡¯t started yet.


    The bodyguard of a king from another kingdom is discussing his strategy to the other three.


    I can¡¯t hear him from here. But from the look of it, he has managed to convince the three monsters to obey hismand.


    That alone has proved his power. He should be someone with a position to lead a group in a fight. Or war.


    I nced at the king he¡¯s protecting. The king brought three guards with him so there are still two other protecting him. One of them is actually his wife he said. That¡¯s not bodyguard then. That¡¯s the queen.


    Three people from a small kingdom, and all of them are expert level mages. Small it might be, that kingdom should be something special.


    Albert has confirmed that everyone attending the meeting, Kings, Empress, president, bodyguards, and other people they brought can all be trusted. All of them want to destroy the cult and are willing to cooperate with us in it.


    Though the biggest problem we currently have in this alliance is that no one believe that I¡¯m the strongest one here. That must be the reason why Albert suggested for us to have a friendly match.


    Later, I will fight. And I will show them who I really am. An Aura user. And I will defeat everyone I fight. If possible.


    .....


    We also have several master level mages who hadn¡¯t had their turn yet. I might be the one facing them. Though I don¡¯t think that¡¯s the case since Ang and the others seem interested in them.


    I don¡¯t think anyone among the master level mage is as strong as the cat-man or the Archbishop in that vige with ve trading as their business. So it should be fine. We won¡¯t lose.


    Well, for now I¡¯ll just watch my disciple fight.


    The guy whose name I forgot, has finished discussing his strategy to the other four. And from the look of it, it seems like the other monsters told him about Jewel¡¯s beastform to him as well.


    I forgot his name. Or maybe he wasn¡¯t introduced to the others since I only hear the kings introduced themselves and not other people they brought. But he has something that is different from other people. His sunsses. So I wrote his name in my contact as Sunsses.


    He wore them because he¡¯s blind. He can¡¯t see. But he uses air magic to determine other people¡¯s location.


    He¡¯s an air mage! Just like me!


    Airy also confirmed it. That guy has noticed Airy¡¯s presence. So his king must have known about her existence as well. Though since it¡¯s already known that I¡¯m a summoner, he might be thinking that Airy is my familiar. But she¡¯s not.


    He¡¯s an air mage, but he got to his position without using it. I¡¯m sure of it. So he must have other element he¡¯s excel at.


    Well, before the match started, I¡¯ll give him something then.


    ¡°Wait! Don¡¯t start the match yet!¡±


    I¡¯m curious. He could convince an angel and two werewolves to follow him in such a short time even though he¡¯s neither a summoner or a tamer. If he could be stronger, that would be beneficial for us.


    I¡¯m going to give him a rifle. That will help him to get a bit stronger. And his air element should have reached expert level as well. The same as Sara and I.


    I jumped to the stage and approached Sunsses before opening a portal and grabbed a rifle and hand it to him.


    ¡°A gift to an air mage. It¡¯s called a rifle. I¡¯ll show you how to use this,¡± I said.


    I¡¯m acting like a professor here. Well, I am a professor.


    ¡°Feel the air around you so you know how to use it. First, put the bullets inside like this. Then,press air inside the barrel, and release it to shoot. Simple, quick, but only has limited use depend on how much bullets you have.¡±


    I taught him how to shoot the rifle and how to reload. He understood it instantly.


    I made some Blobbies to be his targets for practice. Although his uracy is bad, it was good enough. Comparable to the student at the university.


    It wasn¡¯t difficult to teach him how to shoot even though he¡¯s blind. He can sense everything with air magic. Any slightest movement can be sensed. And if there¡¯s someone invisible like Airy or Breezy, he can sense them since there¡¯s an empty space where there¡¯s no air can pass through. Or more like air was somehow entering an empty spot, then suddenly leaving that empty spot. Which means that something is breathing over there. Neither Airy nor Breezy need to breathe. They still do it though.


    After he felt satisfied enough with the rifle, I left and returned back to my seat where other kings are watching at me.


    ¡°You¡¯re teaching him how to shoot and gave him a rifle? Is that okay for your disciple?¡± Lynn asked.


    ¡°Jewel prefers it this way. She enjoys fighting someone at their full strength. That way, she herself can improve. Though it won¡¯t be the first time she¡¯s fighting someone who can shoot. And Sunsses must have other element he¡¯s confident in to be able to get into his position. Jewel will surely enjoy the match this way,¡± I said.


    The kings then started asking about me, about air element magic, and about the rifle. I told them that only air mage can use them. The guns that Albert and Marie had should be something that best kept secret. It¡¯s far too dangerous for other people to know.


    A weapon that anyone, even toddler, can use is dangerous. So it should be kept secret.


    The match started. The angel is wielding a sword and not a spear like most angels.


    The angels have a treasury full of weapons from monsters they defeated. And now that they have learned that they are more suited with other weapons, many angels started testing what kind of weapon suit them most. Though for Graham, he¡¯s still using a spear.


    Graham said that the archangel from before is going back to his home so he can convince other angels to join us. I hope he can get them here.


    The angel surprisingly is the first one to attack Jewel. But Jewel dodged it and about to cast lightning magic when two werewolves approached her. She dodged them again and about to counter when Sunsses shot his rifle at her.


    Unable to dodge, Jewel transformed into half-rhino and protected her own body with her thick skin. Or maybe it¡¯s half-triceratops. I¡¯ll just call it half-rhino.


    She fought the four of them in that form. And Sunsses shoots at her with the rifle while preparing his other magic. Ice magic.


    Feeling overwhelmed since they stopped her from using lightning magic, Jewel turned into a triceratops to protect herself. Now, she would only receive little damage when attacked.


    And in that form, Jewel can calmly prepare her magic. Her endurance is high so she just need to endure the opponents¡¯ attack.


    But the werewolves are strong enough to leave a huge mark on her triceratops¡¯ skin. Still, she endured it.


    That is amazing. The group cooperation is really good even though it¡¯s the first time that they working together. Usually, it was just werewolf with another werewolf. Or angel with another angel.


    Add one person to be the leader, a very capable person at that, and everything changed.


    It wasn¡¯t just me. Ka and everyone watching were amazed with the fight.


    While the new members of the alliance were amazed by Jewel who can transform into a very powerful triceratops and can even use earth magic even though she shouldn¡¯t have it, we who knew her the longest were amazed by Sunsses.


    We have been in many battles. Many lives were lost. And we know that if there¡¯s someone with better situational judgment and can give propermand, there would be less casualties.


    Ka as the smartest would think of a n beforehand, but during a fight, she couldn¡¯t do much.


    If Sunsses are willing to be taught air magic, like how to made his voice louder, he can be a great general in the future. He just need more experience in arge scale battle. That¡¯s what we¡¯re thinking.


    But in the end, he¡¯s losing. Jewel is stronger and has more experience than him. But we can¡¯t justugh at his effort. He was just too good.


    The rifle became useless after Jewel transformed, so he threw it away. He made the floor slippery, but Jewel¡¯s used her control of the earth that she learned to make foothold and charged at Sunsses.


    But as he was about to get hit, the werewolves and the angels blocked Jewel¡¯s charge. She stopped right in front of Sunsses who was about to shoot ice magic at her.


    He made a mistake. When he had just threw his magic, Jewel transformed back into her human form which is smaller. Avoiding the three monsters and shock Sunsses with lightning magic.


    He lost his consciousness. And the monsters no longer have their leader, so the battle became easier for Jewel.


    She finally won. It took a while since the angel was also responsible for healing the others instead of just letting the werewolves heal by themselves. But Jewel is the winner in the end.


    If Sunsses¡¯ learned magic control, has more use of his air magic, and has just a bit more experience, it would be Jewel who lost.


    But this is also a great lesson for him. He could be stronger and help us even more. So maybe I should remember his name. Or not. Sunsses already stuck in my mind.

 Chapter 749 - 749 Sunglasses is a Prince

    749 Sunsses is a Prince


    Several angels thene to the stage and healed everyone. Including Jewel.


    It was a fine match. Even though it was clear for me that Jewel would win, Sunsses did his best and received everyone¡¯s recognition.


    He¡¯s someone we need in battle. By letting him takemand, we might be able to reduce casualties and defeat more opponents. He could be a greatmander.


    The question is whether he can only lead a small group of people, or lead an entire army.


    And with phone in his hand, or even using Sonia as messenger, he can ry order instantly. And the army doesn¡¯t need to wait until someonee to ry his message.


    Still, he needs more experience. Let¡¯s give him a chance to fight in the next battle. He can act as themander.


    If he shows great capabilities as themander, then that would be amazing.


    Jewel and Sunsses returned back to the audience seat. I praised Jewel for er victory, while Sunsses walked to his king and apologized for his loss.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, brother. I lost even though we outnumbered her,¡± Sunsses said.


    .....


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. It was great that you can make a team from a group of strangers. And they are monsters at that. And it was a good show. Now we know how vast the difference of our experiences and strength are. While we only focused on our own territory, they have fought against the cult everywhere. I guess this is a good time to announce it to everyone. You don¡¯t mind if we do this, right?¡± the king asked Sunsses.


    ¡°Yes. I have no problem with it.¡±


    What is it? Everyone here can hear them clearly.


    It seems like Sunsses is a prince. He¡¯s the brother of the king. And the king has prepared to announce something. But Sunsses seem to reject that idea until now.


    His other guards, the woman who is the queen and another person, also agree with something that they are talking about.


    Meanwhile, I tried to remember the king¡¯s name and his kingdom.


    If I¡¯m not wrong, his name is King Gunther from Panthero Kingdom. Small kingdom near Varadis.


    From the discussion, and also the introduction in the documents that everyone received, Panthero was a victim of the cult.


    The cult tried to subdue the kingdom and even block them from asking for help from their neighbor, Varadis. They seeded.


    But the mages that the cult sent were weak. Just some expert level mages and most of them were advanced level or below.


    After years of battle, famine, poverty, and many deaths, Varadis finally started to check on other kingdom. That¡¯s when they noticed that there¡¯s a blockade stopping them from entering.


    Under William¡¯s order, advised by old man Henry, Varadis entered Panthero¡¯s territory without permission. And they finally noticed the situation.


    It was during the time that I was staying in Monsters World so I missed it. Though the cult members were only at expert level at most. So with Julia¡¯s help, they helped Panthero to end the war.


    Unfortunately, many people had died. And there were too many things to do.


    Varadis promised them to give them help while also informing Panthero about things that happening outside of Panthero.


    They conclude that the cult was trying to take control of Panthero as a way to invade Varadis before trying to invade other countries. And Panthero agreed with the alliance there.


    But seeing from the interaction between Sunsses and his brother the king, it seems like they have other ideas.


    Though if it¡¯s about strengthening our alliance, that would be great. Not only Sunsses. But the king¡¯s wife, and the other guard, are also at expert level. I guess that¡¯s why after so long, their kingdom can still survive under the cult¡¯s invasion.


    Then that king, Gunther, asked for everyone¡¯s attention. Except for the monsters who just don¡¯t care. They even started the next fight by themselves since it seems like it¡¯s going to take a while until we finished with Gunther¡¯s announcement.


    Oh, wow! I have memorized his name! As for Sunsses, I still don¡¯t know his name yet though.


    ¡°Excuse me, I¡¯d like to announce something. It has been in our mind for a while. But now, we have agreed on it. King Henry, I¡¯d like to give you my kingdom. It would be best for the citizens if they are under you,¡± Gunther said.


    Oh, that¡¯s it? He¡¯s going to give up his kingdom to old man Henry?


    There¡¯s a heated argument with other kings. Saying things like being irresponsible or calling him coward. But seems like it¡¯s not just him and the people he brought who agree. Other important people in his kingdom also feel the same.


    ¡°I¡¯m sure it won¡¯t be any worse than it currently is. I can¡¯t promise the citizens to give them food and shelter after so many battles. But if the kingdom is gone, and it¡¯s under Varadis¡¯ control, I¡¯m sure that the citizens can prosper. At least much better than it currently is. I rather have that than give them empty promise.


    ¡°And since Varadis have fought against that cult much better than we have, the citizens will feel safer as well. We have thought it through. And we agreed. But we also need to be sure that the alliance have enough strength to fight. That¡¯s why I wanted Rudy, our strongest mage, to test your strength. Fighting against the disciple of the strongest person here is a sure way to confirm the alliance¡¯s strength. And with Roy able to use portal everywhere, he can send people as soon as possible during emergency.¡±


    Oh, they have think it through. Well, it¡¯s also up to old man Henry to decide.


    I don¡¯t think that¡¯s a discussion to have in this ce. So I let the two sides from Varadis and Panthero to discuss it back in Arturo. Fabio and Toni joined as mediator.


    While we still here because there are still matches to see.


    At least at this time, the other kings already understood what Gunther was talking about. I guess they¡¯re all kings who think deeply about their citizens. That¡¯s nice if it¡¯s true.


    For now, everyone enjoyed the match. Wendy fights. Candy fights. Another bodyguard fights.


    And then when Patricia wanted to Derek, I got a call from old man Henry. Their discussion is over.


    And I only realized that the phone can reach the moon. Or Monsters World.


    ¡°Damn, I forgot to test it! But I guess it¡¯s okay now. Marie, the phone can reach the moon. I don¡¯t think we will have a problem contacting anyone,¡± I said before I grabbed old man Henry and everyone back to Monsters World.


    The decision was Panthero will be under Varadis. But old man Henry decided that Gunther will be a noble of Varadis and given that territory.


    With that, old man Henry received three powerful mages. One of them is Sunsses.


    I know his name is Rudy, but I like calling him Sunsses.


    ¡°Hey, I know you¡¯re blind and use air magic to check your surrounding. But I have a question. Is there a time when you remove your sunsses?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Hmm? Usually, it¡¯s just when I want to wash my face or when I sleep. Other time, never,¡± he said.


    ¡°Then I will call you Sunsses from now on. I have terrible memory so you have to put up with it,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Do I have the right to refuse?¡± Sunsses asked me back.


    ¡°Ask Mustache,¡± I replied while pointing at Mustache.


    By the way, Sunsses will participate in more fight from now on. While the other two expert level mages from Panthero, will focus more on protecting the kingdom. So they will be busy with the entire Varadis and not just Panthero anymore.


    ¡°Sunsses, you can continue watching the match and gauge everyone¡¯s strength. With your leadership you¡¯ve shown us before, I have high hopes in you. It will help you grow stronger as well just by watching,¡± I said.


    He then watched the match as I told him to. Especially now. Patricia fighting against Derek. Both of them are master level wind mages.


    Both of them are old. But it doesn¡¯t matter. Master level mage have longer lifespan than average person after all. And they are perfectly fit to fight.


    ¡°Sunsses, what else can you do with your air element?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Nothing much. Just for breathing and detect movement. I just somehow got it to expert level while improving my ice element,¡± he said.


    If he¡¯s just cultivating but somehow get stronger, there might be another air spirit at where he¡¯s cultivating. Maybe if we have two air spirits at the same ce, our cultivation speed will get faster.


    ¡°Alright, listen to me. I¡¯m a professor in a university teaching air elements. Watch this. I¡¯m making Air Barrier. The two people fighting are master level wind mages. Their wind are strong enough to destroy everything and kill everyone here. But even though I¡¯m just an expert level air mage, I still can protect myself and everyone behind me by using Air Barrier. I¡¯ll teach you more about air magic. Including various type of gases. Air element is seen as useless, but if you use it well, it can be used for crowd control. I can also teach you about magic control. It will help you with your ice element as well. Sit, watch, and learn.¡±


    The fight started. And I just teach Sunsses about air element.


    It¡¯s great that he¡¯s a quick learner. He¡¯s even eager to use what he learned and wanted to fight again.

 Chapter 750 - 750 How Sunglasses Can Play with His Phone

    750 How Sunsses Can y with His Phone


    The match between two master level mages, Patricia was victorious. It¡¯s simply because she has slight advantage in magic control. She learned it earlier than other master level mages.


    Magic control is also something that everyone needs to learn. So instead of writing it down on paper, we will send some people to other countries and teach mages over there in how to use magic control.


    It¡¯s easier than just giving them some notes about it. After all, there are many questions to be asked.


    But this is only forter. We still have many things to discuss after this. And I don¡¯t think anyone will be able to focus on learning magic control when they have so many questions about the alliance.


    And for this mission, Wendy and some agents who taught in universities or introductory school will do it. They will go to other countries and teach mages over there about magic control.


    At this point, their exnation is much better than me. Though I will just focus on Sunsses here since he¡¯s an air mage.


    Maybe there are other powerful air mages as well. But I¡¯ll check on themter. Probably muchter since we have a city to destroy.


    Sonia hasn¡¯t informed us yet about the location of where she was before. But I think it¡¯s safe to say that the cult won¡¯t do anything big at the moment. That¡¯s why she hasn¡¯t informed us yet. Though I believe Albert and other kings from big countries have learned about that ce and have sent some agents to scout that ce.


    I just need to wait. And when the timees, I will fight.


    .....


    After Patricia, Randy challenged a master level mage.


    In previous battle, he had problems fighting master level mages. Although he was winning, it took him a lot of time and effort until he finally won. So he wanted to test his strength against a master level mage.


    I told about him and the opponent he¡¯s facing to Sunsses. To let him know about our strength and weakness. He needs to sense the fight since he can¡¯t watch it.


    Though I will teach him about magic controlter. Though after seeing how he can quickly learn how to shoot a rifle withpressed air, I think he will learn about magic control pretty easily.


    That¡¯s why I focus more on the people instead of magic control. So I don¡¯t need to introduce everyone to him again.


    ¡°Why are you telling me about everyone?¡± he asked.


    ¡°You know the reason, right?¡± I replied.


    Sunsses ponder for a bit before he replies.


    ¡°You want me, someone who had just entered the alliance, to lead? Is that right?¡±


    ¡°Nice guess. You¡¯re correct. We have fought many battles against the cult. But there are too many casualties. A fight between mages is just by simply letting them use any magic they want to use. There¡¯s no coordination at all. But if there¡¯s a leader who can take care of that, that would be great. You have shown us how well you are at leading three monsters you just met. Although you lost, that doesn¡¯t mean you¡¯re weak. It¡¯s not just me who think about you well. Albert, Fabio, udia, and old man Henry also think so as well,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Shouldn¡¯t it be Empress Lynn instead of her aide?¡± Sunsses asked.


    ¡°Let¡¯s ignore her. Many of her achievements is thanks to udia. For her to recognize you is hundred times better than Lynn. Though she¡¯s still a good Empress at least,¡± I said.


    ¡°Alright. I¡¯m not close enough to any of you so I don¡¯t know. But is that one match enough to conclude that I could be a good leader?¡± he asked.


    ¡°At least strategically. You almost overpower Jewel in her strongest form and render her lightning magic useless for a while just after seeing her match once. And when you volunteered, you didn¡¯t even know that she¡¯s a beastform mage. You¡¯re quick to adapt and can make a sound strategy. You just need experience,¡± I said.


    In many of our previous battle, it was usually me who made the strategy. And it mostly consist of me going in alone and the rest can do whatever they want. So it¡¯s not really a strategy.


    And other than me, it would be Ka.


    She¡¯s smart. But her knowledge is more about everything instead of strategy at war. She has decent amount of knowledge in it, but to put it into action is a bit too much for her.


    That¡¯s why we need someone like Sunsses.With him around, we should be able to do more with less casualties. I hope that would be the case.


    And now, the matter about long-distancemunication is over. We have phones that we can carry anywhere. So he can... wait!


    ¡°Wait! You have received your phone, right? You¡¯re blind. But can you see the screen on your phone?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. I only followed what everyone is talking about. And when operating this thing called phone, I asked someone else to help me. I can¡¯t read anything in it,¡± he said.


    Now that he mention it, although his name on my contact is already Sunsses, I don¡¯t think he has tested the forum yet.


    ¡°Marie, can you make one phone customized for Sunsses?¡± I asked Marie.


    ¡°I can. But now that you mention it, I have another idea. It might work. Theoretically, it¡¯s possible. You just need to pour your mana into your phone like how you activated it. Then you focus on the text, contact, or the forum. It should be possible for blind people to read the text since it¡¯s connected to mana, and redirect it to your mind. Though he will need to spend more mana just to operate it. Try it,¡± Marie said.


    So, we can use phone without having to touch them? That¡¯s nice.


    We tested it and it actually possible. I don¡¯t need to continuously tapping on the screen to type something. Just focus on my mana, and what I¡¯m trying to convey is written.


    I tried sending it to Sunsses, and he tried to redirect the text on the phone to his mind with magic. This is totally amazing. I don¡¯t know how many times I have praise it already.


    ¡°Oh, I can tell that you¡¯re writing a list of names of your harem. So those girls are your lovers, huh?¡±


    ¡°You really can read it without seeing it. That¡¯s nice. Let¡¯s test it more so if you have any need for upgrade, you can tell Marie. By the way, can you tell who is who?¡± I asked.


    ¡°That one is Ang, she¡¯s Ka, she¡¯s...¡±


    He guesses everyone correctly. I guess he also have a good memory to remember people¡¯s name.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know any Sophie or Lina here. I guess they¡¯re not here,¡± he said.


    ¡°You¡¯re correct. Lina is my maid and a summoner. In fact, the elves here had their queen contracted with Lina. But since Lina is my maid, the elves still obey me. As for Sophie, she focused more on being a doctor. It¡¯s not rted to the cult, but it¡¯s important for doctors to know what she learned. From me. I¡¯m a doctor as well. Well, you will know more about itter. This ce is also a stage for us to reveal more about ourselves. Or maybe just me,¡± I said.


    ¡°You have a secret outside of what¡¯s written in the documents?¡±


    ¡°It won¡¯t be a secret for long. I have never met any of you before, but now, I feel like I can trust you. And for you to trust me, I will have to reveal my secret. Well, it will be knownter. Don¡¯t be surprised,¡± I said.


    ¡°Alright. I can¡¯t wait.¡±


    Sunsses... this guy can use Mind¡¯s Eye.


    It¡¯s not something that only Aura user can use. So it¡¯s normal for anyone to learn it. Andbined with his air magic, he can check more of the surrounding.


    Maybe because he¡¯s blind, he tried to heightened his senses. That¡¯s how he got Mind¡¯s Eye. I¡¯ll tell him about itter.


    Using Mind¡¯s Eye, one can know the exact location and even find the differences between different people even when they close their eyes. That¡¯s why they can tell who is who.


    But they still can¡¯t see. So they don¡¯t know what¡¯s written on the screen of their phone. Unless they used the method Marie taught us.


    I tried using Mind¡¯s Eye as well, and that¡¯s the case for me. I know that there¡¯s a magic in the phone, but I can¡¯t tell what it is.


    Well, at least I know that he¡¯s amazing. And with his Mind¡¯s Eye, he could be a good shooter with a gun.


    It won¡¯t be possible for him to see too far in the distance. But his range should be good enough to see anything in the Colosseum here.


    That¡¯s basically just the average vision of average person. So he should be good enough with that much distance since he¡¯s blind.


    I continued teaching him about many things and introduce him to everyone who was fighting to tell him what they are excel at.


    And now that everyone has fought, it¡¯s finally time to show them how strong I really am.

 Chapter 751 - 751 My First Match is Against the Angels

    751 My First Match is Against the Angels


    ¡°Alright, it¡¯s my turn,¡± I said as I stand up from my seat and about to jump to the stage.


    ¡°Hey, how do you fight? You¡¯re an air mage and a summoner, right? If you¡¯re a summoner, I think it¡¯s easy if you just let your familiar to fight instead of you,¡± Sunsses said.


    It¡¯s not just him who think that way. The other new members of the alliance also think so too. Except for Yuria and Patricia. They already know what I am.


    ¡°This friendly match, although it looks like we did it on a whim, is actually nned by the four kings of the big countries. I¡¯m sure of it. And they want to use this chance to properly introduce me to you all. About who I really am. Just watch and see why they decided to call me as the strongest hidden card,¡± I replied.


    Then I jumped to the stage all alone before making an announcement.


    ¡°Whoever want to fight me, thene down here! One on one, or as many as you want!¡± I said.


    I will fight someone one on one first, and then fight against a groupter.


    Well, it seems like no one is going to take me on one on one match. And it started with facing Graham and the angels first.


    ¡°You¡¯re on that side?¡± I asked.


    .....


    ¡°Yeah. I want to test how strong I am now,¡± Graham said.


    As for the guests in the audience seat, they are interested in watching me, a summoner, facing Graham, my familiar. Though after knowing that I¡¯m just an air mage and a summoner, they don¡¯t think that I can win.


    I pour mana into the phone and the new posts in the forum appear in my head. Most of them were betting against me. Only those who knows me are betting on me.


    I won¡¯t just be fighting Graham. I will also face other people or monsterster. I need to fight quickly, defeat each opponent with one hit, and it must be something that can convince everyone that I¡¯m the strongest here.


    ¡°Alright, Victoria. Are you ready?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. You¡¯re going to fight on your own,¡± she said as she left me, then returned to my seat on her own.


    ...No Victoria, no Blobbies, and just me. With some kunai hidden in my pocket. The magic weapon which will get sharper if I pour mana into it.


    This won¡¯t be something fancy. No one can see it well from the audience seat and they won¡¯t get convinced if I use magic items. But whatever. I¡¯ll use them anyway.


    And I also have no gun. I left one that is neither Victoria nor Blobby, at home. Maybe I should keep bringing it whenever I go.


    Well, I can easily use portal to grab it. And if it¡¯s just me alone that I need to transfer via portal, I can use portal many times more than when we destroyed the cult¡¯s base in Monsters World.


    The match then begins. And I waste no time at all to charge at the closest angels I could find.


    One against twelve. Or fifteen now that Graham has created clones of himself.


    Though I quickly knocked out four angels already. Which leaves eleven.


    They tried to keep their distance as Graham tried to lead the angels. But they are slower than me.


    When I had just finished knocking another angel out, everyone except Graham, grabbed me to stop me from moving. Even his shadow clones are here.


    But I just brute force my way and throw the angels off of me before knocking them out.


    Graham tried to use light magic to attack me from distance, but I easily dodged them.


    Thanks to the fight against the cat-man, I improved rapidly. And this is a good chance as well for me to see how strong I am now.


    Two minutester, all the angels are down on the floor. Everyone either lose their consciousness, or lose their will to continue fighting. Including Graham.


    I can tell that Graham has improved as well. But if I said that to him now, he won¡¯t believe it since I defeated him too fast.


    The new members of the alliance were shocked. The fight ended too soon with the angels unable to do anything. And I didn¡¯t even break a sweat.


    I can tell that Albert has started telling the others about who I am. About the fact that I¡¯m an Aura user.


    Now that I have moved close enough to them, I can hear what he¡¯s saying.


    ¡°He¡¯s an Aura user. If you read children stories, you will know about it. They exist. Aura user existed in the past. But now, Roy is the only one who can use it. Victoria might be able to use it, but she needs some help to use it,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Wait, they are not just fiction?¡± one king asked.


    ¡°They are very much real. In fact, the founder of Tatrama was also an Aura user. But his magic was stronger than his Aura. And he rarely used it. So no one knows about it. I also learned about him recently. Anyway, there are more things that I need to tell you about Roy. And it also involves Victoria and Sonia. About what happened a thousand years ago. It¡¯s not written in the documents given to you because I¡¯m sure if you read it, you will think that we¡¯re just making things up. So, we decided to show you how strong an Aura user is first, and tell you after you are convinced with Roy¡¯s strength,¡± Albert said.


    Though I haven¡¯t shown them how good I am at using Aura. Victoria is not by my side after all. I can only use kunai.


    Maybe I should grab the sword-cane. The next battle won¡¯t be any easier.


    Previously, I knocked them all out with the kunai covered in my Aura. I didn¡¯t make the kunai sharper with either magic or Aura. But I used Aura to cover the kunai to make it blunt. That way I won¡¯t identally kill anyone.


    Next time, I¡¯ll do the same with the sword cane.


    While waiting for my next opponent, I opened a portal and grabbed the sword cane.


    ¡°Roy can fight much better if he has me by his side since I can transform into any weapon he imagined. But since we want to show you how strong he is and it¡¯s not just because of his weapons, he needs to fight without me by his side. I¡¯ll join himter. After this match since I want to face him,¡± Victoria said as she jumped down to the stage.


    I¡¯m going to fight her next? Well, that¡¯s fine.


    I only realized now that Victoria has been in talk with Albert and the others of how to show everyone how strong I am. By letting them watch a fight between two Aura users.


    I understand this, so I called Ray to the stage. Hended from the sky and Victoria quickly ride on his back.


    ¡°Isn¡¯t this the first time that we will fight properly?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°I guess so. You¡¯re my Aura teacher but we have never fought before. At most, it¡¯s just a light sparring. Well, with how infinite your stamina is, I don¡¯t think it will be easy. So, it¡¯s just you and Ray alone?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. Shelia, Jack, and the werewolves will join me.¡±


    As soon as she said that, Shelia and the other werewolves jumped to the stage and ready to fight me.


    Is this why Shelia didn¡¯t fight before? To save her power to when she¡¯s going to face me?


    Hmm... let¡¯s see. They had Graham and the angels to face me first so that I can show to everyone that I¡¯m an Aura user. Then I will face Victoria and the werewolves to show how strong an Aura user is.


    But this is not enough, right? After all, most of the enemies we will fight are mages.


    I¡¯m sure that after this, I will face mages. After all, what they have seen so far, and what they will see now, are about me facing monsters. They must be thinking that Aura user is nothing in front of mages.


    And whoever prepared this must be thinking that even after I fought so many battles, I can still fight. But I don¡¯t that¡¯s the case.


    I think it¡¯s more like a strategy for me to waste my stamina before thest boss appear. As for who it is, I¡¯m sure it would be Ang even though she has fought once before.


    ¡°Is he going to fight everyer?¡± one bodyguard asked. He¡¯s the one that Jewel easily defeated before. The one who made light of me.


    ¡°If he keeps winning, then yes. Don¡¯t worry about it. I¡¯m sure that whoever fighting him won¡¯t even hold back their strength,¡± Fabio said.


    ¡°But I¡¯m not sure about it, King Fabio. He¡¯s good at fighting close range. I¡¯m sure that he could be a great assassin. But I don¡¯t know if we can let him fight against mages. They can attack him from distance long before he could reach them,¡± one king said.


    ¡°That¡¯s what we¡¯re here to show you. You¡¯re still not convinced that he¡¯s the strongest one here, right? You will seeter,¡± Fabio said.


    My next match is starting. And I will continue winning.

 Chapter 752 - 752 Fighting Victoria and the Werewolves

    752 Fighting Victoria and the Werewolves


    This time, it¡¯s me against Victoria, Ray, Shelia, and the werewolves. One against twenty. Totally unfair.


    But I¡¯m not just any Aura user. I¡¯m an Aura Master. And most of the opponents are werewolves with great sense of smell. I can just create smelly gas and distract them.


    Eighteen werewolves. I know Shelia and Jack. But the other sixteen are those whom I¡¯ve seen often in battle. They are the strongest werewolves after Shelia and Jack.


    They really are trying to defeat me. But I won¡¯t lose.


    I don¡¯t think it will be as easy as before. I might not be able to leave unscathed after the fight. But I don¡¯t need to mind about it. After all, I will get healed by the angels after this.


    Hmm... maybe I should refuse to be healed. I don¡¯t want to feel exhausted again after being healed and had my stamina recovered many times like before.


    ¡°Begin!¡±


    The referee announced that the match has begun. But no one attacked. Only the werewolves started moving to surround me.


    In front of me, there¡¯s Shelia. Behind me, there¡¯s Victoria. The rest are around and even above me.


    .....


    Should I use the cane¡¯s ability?


    I don¡¯t think so. It¡¯s a good weapon, but I won¡¯t use it since my job is to convince everyone here.


    As expected, skill and technique is more important. If I can¡¯t do both, then brute force. But that¡¯s forter.


    All the werewolves are already in their strongest form. Not the werewolf form that Grandpa Werewolf used to have when he fought me to death.


    The werewolves are still have simrities with humans. Except that they have hairy arms and ws on each hands. Their legs also be hairy and their feet have ws as well.


    From the look of it, it¡¯s just like their normal form except that their hair has grown. But that¡¯s not all.


    I have seen those form many times and I know that the strength they have is more than their usual strength.


    This is their strongest form. They still look more like a human than a wolf, but their strength already far surpassed Grandpa Werewolf. They are the strongest werewolves.


    For now, I need to fight these strongest werewolves.


    Three of theming at me at once. Their ws tried to pierce my body. but I blocked them.


    I blocked two of them with the sword-cane, and grabbed the wrist of the other one with my other hand. Then I threw the one I grabbed toward the other two.


    I need to be quick. If I¡¯m slow just for even less than a second, Victoria or Shelia will use that chance to hit me.


    Right after the three werewolves were thrown aside, even though I know that they are not hurt at all, I choose to fight the others. I hate being surrounded.


    Shelia and Victoria haven¡¯t moved yet. But Jack has. He and the other werewolves tried to attack me all at once.


    But I can easily block, parry, and counter their attack. Even though I¡¯m an Aura Master, if I get hit by their attack, I could be dead. That¡¯s why I need to block or parry them.


    And the biggest disadvantage that I have is that I can¡¯t kill anyone here. While they expected that already and won¡¯t hold back knowing that I¡¯m stronger than them.


    Even if I hit them once, while even the angel would get knocked out, these werewolves can still be standing.


    I think it¡¯s fine if I could sh them quickly since I can attach them back with surgery if I cut them nicely. But I don¡¯t want to do that. They are still our allies. If they got big injuries, even if they can be healed, our strength will be reduced.


    So, I can only hit them again and again, until they are unable to move anymore.


    Though there¡¯s an exception. I can go all out when I¡¯m fighting against Victoria.


    She¡¯s a ck Slime. And unlike Sonia who will disappear if I cut her with Aura, Victoria won¡¯t. She might still be cut and split. But she can return back to normal.


    Even her split body can act like Blobby and move ording to Victoria¡¯s order. But at least I don¡¯t need to hold back against her.


    So, my n is to defeat the werewolves first. After that, I will target Ray. Victoria¡¯s ride.


    If Ray is not there, Victoria won¡¯t be able to use Aura anymore.


    But for now, the werewolves.


    Since Shelia hasn¡¯t moved, Jack is the biggest problem.


    But I have two weapons in hand. The sword, and the cane.


    I made them blunt with Aura, and use the two weapons to attack and defend.


    The werewolves¡¯ endurance is much higher than the werewolves. And they even have regeneration ability. It¡¯s hard to knock them out.


    Some tried to attack from distance. So I do the same. And it was when the newly joined members of the alliance know that I can use long-distance attack as well.


    But my long-distance attack is still too predictable. So I put the sword back in the cane, then I opened a portal back home and grabbed a gun.


    I have done enough to show them how strong an Aura user is. So now it¡¯s time to show them how I really fight.


    Sword-cane in my left, and a gun in my right. And they use a non-lethal bullet I got from Marie since I don¡¯t have Blobbies.


    The fight be easier since the werewolves were easily distracted by the gun and the gases I made. Sunsses should know that I used air magic in the fight.


    And it was when I feel most rxed, both Victoria and Shelia attacked me together.


    ¡°Whoa, I thought you¡¯re going to wait more,¡± I said.


    ¡°No way. Why would I let a chance to win disappear? Even if this is to show how strong you are, we won¡¯t just let ourselves be defeated by you,¡± Victoria said.


    While fighting the two of them, I also used powerful sleeping gas to make the werewolves fall asleep. But Shelia knows me enough so she just hold her breath when she¡¯s nearby, and get some distance to take a breath beforeing again.


    By this time, there are only ten werewolves left.


    They are not a problem except the fact that they have regenerative power. But I just hit them until they lose their consciousness.


    ¡°...Damn.¡±


    That¡¯s what Jack said before the sword-cane in my hand hit his head. Now there¡¯s only Shelia, Victoria, and Ray left.


    After I hit Jack, I already aimed at Shelia with the gun in my right hand.


    She dodged it easily and I continued chasing after her while dodging all Victoria¡¯s attack. Ray is faster than me after all. But I¡¯m still faster than Shelia.


    It¡¯s a game of chase. But the stage is small so it¡¯s easy for me to finally catch up to Shelia.


    She grabbed the sword-cane to block my attack, but I just let go of it. Then I punched her in the gut. All the air in her lung left and she¡¯s out.


    ¡°Only you two left,¡± I said to Victoria and Ray.


    ¡°...Ray, he¡¯s going to aim for you first. Let¡¯s make use of your speed.¡±


    I can hear what Victoria is saying. And she¡¯s right.


    I can only catch up with Ray on short distance. If he keeps running, i won¡¯t be able to.


    For some reason, my gases won¡¯t work on him. I guess he has great lung capacity or that he doesn¡¯t need to breathe like Victoria.


    I mean, he had a race against Spot tot he bottom of the sea. So he should be fine with holding his breath.


    So Ray keeps running. And once in a while, they would charge at me to attack me. That¡¯s the only time I can get close to them.


    This is where I use brute force.


    When Ray charged at me head on, while Victoria with her sword ready to attack me, I stand still and let them attack. Unarmed as I let go of my weapons.


    When Ray¡¯s head is close to me, I quickly grabbed Ray¡¯s neck, and protected my body with Aura to block Victoria¡¯s attack. Then I mmed Ray on the ground as Victoria jumped to avoid the fall.


    Now there¡¯s only Victoria left.


    It was a great swordfight between Victoria and I. But I¡¯m the better fighter.


    It ended when I finally cut her into pieces.


    She¡¯s fine though. But after Ray got knocked down, she no longer has a way to use Aura. Only enough tost a few minutes before she got shed into pieces.


    That¡¯s how I won. I got several wounds, but they are not a problem.


    ¡°I guess that¡¯s to be expected. Now, we need to show everyone how you usually fight. I¡¯ll join you from now on. Thest match is between you against mages. Prepare yourself,¡± Victoria said.


    Well, okay. I¡¯ll entertain everyone a bit more.

 Chapter 753 - 753 Three on Three

    753 Three on Three


    When I thought that I would fight again, Albert stopped me.


    ¡°Before we show you how strong you are against mages, how about we let the mages fight each other first? They have shown how powerful they are, but I don¡¯t think that¡¯s enough to show everyone how they fight normally,¡± Albert suggested.


    Yeah, I think it¡¯s a good idea. But unfortunately, our strongest ice mage after Ang is not here. It¡¯s Shirley.


    I know that Kron is a wind mage and an ice mage. He¡¯s strong in both. But I think that without Breezy, he is not as strong as our other wind mages even though he¡¯s the one with most fighting experience since he travels a lot.


    I think I know. He felt that he¡¯s too weak. That¡¯s why he needs something to be proud of since it will just be time before the others surpass him.


    Even Shirley who are both wind mage and an ice mage just like him, is already stronger than him.


    I guess we¡¯re all limited by our own talent. And Kron¡¯s talent is about to reach his limit while the others will keep progressing.


    If he can reach master level, he will be stronger. But when the others reached master level, he could be the weakest among master level mages in the future.


    And in previous fights, no one has shown how powerful they are. So Albert suggested them to fight.


    .....


    And so, I returned back to my seat with the kings looked at me in admiration. This feels good.


    ¡°So, how do we decide who will fight who?¡± Fabio asked.


    ¡°Let¡¯s have a three on three match. If there are too many people fighting each other, it will be difficult for us to focus on who we should fight. As for the participants, let¡¯s make it interesting. Three members of royalty from three different countries, or former member of royalty, against three former members of the cult,¡± Albert suggested.


    Three royalties against three former cult members? I think I understand who he suggested.


    The three royalties are from Arturo, Varadis, and Tatrama.


    From Arturo, it would be Carmen the water mage. Although Fabio is an expert level mage as well, he¡¯s a king. He shouldn¡¯t show-off against other kings that he¡¯s strong or the rtionship between the kingdoms will turn bad because of envy and jealousy. So it should be his mother.


    From Varadis, it would be Julia. She¡¯s a fire mage. I heard that in Varadis, she yed important role whenever there¡¯s a fight when the kingdom were searching for the remnant of the cult. She is old man Henry¡¯s daughter.


    Andstly, Randy will represent Tatrama. I think he¡¯s both lightning and earth elements mage. He¡¯s Albert¡¯s cousin that acted like a corrupt lord.


    Although he¡¯s not a former member of the cult, he was almost used by a member of the cult. So he¡¯s part of the royalty group now instead of the former member of the cult.


    From the other side, the former members of the cult are Derek, Celestine, and Veronica.


    Derek is someone who has finished his revenge and decided to help us in our cause to destroy the Evil Cult. He¡¯s the only master level mage among all six participants of the match.


    Veronica is the first member of the cult that joined us. I saw her crying and Victoria approached her. She became very close to Victoria since that day. She has big butt. And that was the reason she cried that day.


    Well, not really. But it is thanks to that fact that she had to lead a faction and order people to do terrible stuffs that she doesn¡¯t like.


    Lastly is the former leader of the big boobs faction, Celestine. Though she turned out to be a royalty as well since she¡¯s Lynn¡¯s older sister.


    So, on the royalty group, there¡¯s one who could be considered as a former member of the cult (Unofficial). Then in the group of former cultist, there¡¯s one who is a member of royalty.


    It looks like it will be an equal match. But I didn¡¯t focuspletely on the match. Just watching it casually. I¡¯m trying to recover my own stamina before the next fight.


    Even though I didn¡¯t fight for too long, the werewolves are too persistent. Fighting them is draining my stamina too much. Well, I can still fight for a few more hours. But I don¡¯t know how my fightter will be.


    ¡°Aura user is amazing, isn¡¯t it? Can you teach other people to use Aura?¡± Sunsses suddenly asked me.


    ¡°I can¡¯t. The only thing you can do if you want to use Aura is to persist in training your body. I can¡¯t give you other advice. I think that I¡¯m a good teacher in magic and medical knowledge, but for Aura, I don¡¯t even want to try it. I only hear bad things about people in the past who learned Aura like death and more death. So I pass on teaching other people to use Aura,¡± I said.


    ¡°Well, I think that magic is more convenient at first. But if you trained your body and Aura, using Aura is more convenientter. Though if you trained your magic more than your body, I think it¡¯s best to just focus on your magic,¡± Victoria added.


    Right. As Aura user, I need to fight and fight to improve myself. And for magic, I just need to cultivate and learn magic control. So at first, using magic is easier.


    I also trained my body because I had no other choice. After all in my past life, I was just a weak summoner with weak monster as my familiar. Though in this time, that weak monster turned out to be a useful monster.


    ¡°Teaching people how to use Aura needs them to be trained at young age. When they are already reached adulthood, it¡¯s difficult for them since they usually have gotten used to using magic. And I¡¯m not someone who will risk children¡¯s lives to get them learn to use Aura. So I won¡¯t teach anyone. If you want to use Aura, learn how to use it yourself. Once you have gotten the hang of it, I will teach you more,¡± I said.


    Though it¡¯s nearly impossible for anyone here to learn Aura. Maybe. Unless they have exceptional talent in Aura.


    Well, if we have more Aura user, that would be great. But I¡¯ll just focus on what we have. Mages.


    The battle is going on. My phone keeps vibrating from the kings¡¯ gambling. As for me, I put some money on the former member of the cult.


    They fight is nearly equal. On both sides, two people from each group have learned magic control. While thest one, Randy and Derek, only learned about it recently.


    Randy learned magic control longer than Derek did, but Derek is a master level mage. That¡¯s why I put my bet on the former members of the cult.


    If Shirley is here, she would fight instead of Randy. And I would put my money on her group. But she¡¯s busy so I picked Veronica¡¯s and Celestine¡¯s side.


    The fight is so intense. Even us in the audience seat were almost got hit by stray magic several times. Though we can use barrier magic to protect ourselves.


    I¡¯m a bit worried about the monsters though. While the werewolves don¡¯t mind getting hit, the angels and the elves are not. But the angels can create Light Barrier barely enough to protect themselves since the magic inside the arena is too strong.


    ¡°Oh, you created an Air Barrier yourself. That¡¯s good. Although it¡¯s usually useless against powerful magic, it¡¯s kind of useful to block sound so we can have conversation in secret,¡± I said to Sunsses who created Air Barrier for the first time.


    ¡°I¡¯m interested in those sleeping gases, infuriating gases, and other type of gases. Please teach me more,¡± he said.


    ¡°That¡¯s my intention. Oh, seems like the battle is reaching its climax.¡±


    None of them are using their full strength. But none of them willing to give up so they are pretty exhausted already.


    Then Celestine and Veronica protected Derek while he¡¯s preparing for a powerful magic. This is why I ce my bet on them.


    Derek is a master level mage. And this is the first time that most people here witnessed a master level mage¡¯s most powerful magic. Though it seems like Derek reduced its destructiveness.


    A powerful wind blew everyone. And no one can use barrier to protect themselves. But we are outside of its range so we¡¯re pretty much safe as long as we hold onto something.


    I had Victoria create some Blobbies to be used as handles for everyone so they won¡¯t get blown away. Though for the monsters, the angels and the werewolves are busy capturing those who got blown away.


    ¡°I think that¡¯s enough. The victory has been decided. I¡¯m going to stop them before anyone get injured.¡±


    With Victokatana in my hand, I shed at the hurricane with Aura. Splitting it in two and stopped the windpletely.


    It¡¯s also to show everyone how I will fight mages. That I can cut magic in two and disperse it.


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s get to the main event. Who wants to fight me?¡±

 Chapter 754 - 754 Calling the Vampires to Join

    754 Calling the Vampires to Join


    ¡°Who wants to fight me?¡±


    I asked as I stand from my seat and was about to jump to the stage. But I was stopped.


    ¡°Many. Including those who have just fought. Let them rest first before they fight you,¡± Albert said.


    ...And I sat back down again.


    Everyone was still awed by how I just split a hurricane and stopped it. It was a magic from a master level mage, but I stopped it so easily.


    Well, because it¡¯s a hurricane. If it¡¯s an earthquake, I can¡¯t stop it.


    Let¡¯s just wait while letting the monsters fight. Even some of the elves wanted to fight but they can¡¯t. But I know that they are very agile. So we just let them have a race or a game of tag with other monsters.


    Even if it¡¯s not fighting, the werewolves are interested. And I¡¯m also interested because the elves are so agile and good at hiding their presences. Maybe they are better for espionage mission than the werewolves. I should maybe ask them if they are willing to do it.


    And since they are slightly smarter than the werewolves who only interested in fighting or any kind ofpetition, and are not aszy as the angels even though I can¡¯t call themzy anymore, maybe it¡¯s better. Though we may need them to learn to read and write. I think they have started teaching the monsters. But there are too few interested in it.


    .....


    Though it¡¯s different from the vampires. Since they live on Earth now, they are willing to learn how to read, write, and calcte so they won¡¯t get tricked easily.


    Right. Maybe I should get Arin and some vampires toe here. They might be interested in fighting.


    ¡°Hey, I¡¯ll get the vampires here as well. Just some who wants to fight and Arin. At least everyone should know Arin,¡± I said to Albert.


    ¡°You¡¯re right. But get some werewolves and angels to go there in exchange. Though I doubt the werewolves are willing to wait there and stay. Especially if they know that they will fight you,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°What? But I have fought them. They¡¯re going to fight me again?¡±


    ¡°It should be just mages at first. But now that everyone has seen how you cut magic, I think we should make it as real as possible. The cult has many master level mages and expert level mages. And they also have many summoners and tamers. So it¡¯s best if we make the situation as real as possible. With just you and Victoria. You can have Ray with you as well if you want,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°...Just me and Victoria. Even though you want it to be as real as possible, this is just a friendly match in the end,¡± I said. If I have Ray, that would be too much.


    ¡°Only you will think that way when the fight started. Just look at how many people and monsters are looking at you with bloodthirst.¡±


    Yeah... I can feel that even without having to see them. And I will just end up having more opponents once I bring the vampires here.


    Arin and some vampires were interested in the fight. Also, from what the agents in the destroyed base said, it seems like it will take a while until the cult can prepare to attack Monsters World again. At least in the area of the destroyed base.


    I also found some werewolves and angels who are willing toe to the destroyed base and wait. They are the type who hates the cult more than they love fighting.


    Well, it¡¯s just the werewolves who prefer to kill their enemies instead of just having a friendly match. They even almost kill their opponents in a match. But the other werewolves stopped them since it was my order that they shouldn¡¯t have any kill or be killed situation in the Colosseum. Just the more traditional werewolves.


    As for the angels, their hatred to the cult keeps growing ever since they know that Graham¡¯s sister has been experimented until she lost her mind.


    She¡¯s now in stable condition. I checked on her from time to time. Though she still can¡¯tmunicate properly. And I don¡¯t know if she still has her memory before she got experimented or not.


    Maybe time is the only thing that can heal her. I hope she will get well soon. I mean she¡¯s Graham¡¯s sister. She might be strong and can help us.


    I closed the portal and introduced Arin to everyone. Then I asked some vampires to fight in the match so they know how a vampire fight.


    ¡°Ah, don¡¯t worry about getting your blood sucked. The vampires prefer those with higher level of magic. So unless you¡¯re a really strong expert level mage or a master level mage, you¡¯re safe. Even then, they love my blood the most since I¡¯m an Aura user. So I told them that if they want my blood, they have to obey me,¡± I said.


    And since I¡¯m strong enough to handle all the vampires alone, there has been no problem that the vampire cause. Though some tried to steal blood from the hospital. But they failed


    Well, they seeded in stealing some blood bags. But those are only weaker level mages¡¯ blood. Although they can be infused to a higher level mage who has the same type of blood, the taste is different.


    As for the blood of the stronger mages, I keep them somewhere safe. The vampires can¡¯t get them.


    After watching some more game of tag by the elves and the monsters, and also Jewel and Ang who are interested in that game of tag, the vampires then start their match.


    Instead of healing by the angels, giving them blood as a reward will get them healed faster. So I promised them blood if they win.


    Everyone now has watched how strong our mages and monsters are. They are the reason why we could keep winning so far.


    And even if the cult send master level mages in the future battle, we still have a good chance to win with our strength. They know that more after watching the master level mages who were former member of the cult lost against expert level mages like Candy and the others.


    The kings are afraid to watch the vampires fight. They have never seen so many blooding out from just an individual. Though they are weapons and not because the vampires are wounded.


    This was also why I didn¡¯t ask the vampires toe here initially. But well, showing the kings how the vampires fight is better. After all, they still didn¡¯t fully believe that the vampires are willing to be under me since none of them are in contract with me.


    Some were contracted though. By some agents. But the main fighters, those who follow Arin, are not under any contract from tamer or summoner.


    Then Arin stepped forward to fight several werewolves. I know that Shelia wanted to fight Arin in a one on one match, but she¡¯s holding back because she want to fight me once more.


    Heck, even Arin wants to fight meter. She¡¯s saying things like drinking my blood in a fight is normal and could even potentially suck more blood than how much I usually give her.


    She fought without using much of her blood. Just use the blood to improve her physical strength, and she¡¯s already stronger than most werewolves.


    It was an easy victory for her.


    ¡°I think that¡¯s enough warming up. Next will be ourst show. Roy and Victoria, against whoever wants to fight him. We will limit the opponents to just fifty and prioritize the mages. For the monsters, Shelia, Graham, and Arin will fight along with some others. Those who wants to fight him can enter the stage,¡± Fabio said.


    He¡¯s still the host of the meeting after all. Even if we¡¯re no longer in his pce. He needs to show everyone that this is still part of the meeting.


    I sat on my seat and watched everyone entered the stage.


    Ang, Ka, Jewel, Candy, Wendy, Kron, Randy, Celestine, Veronica, Randy, Arin, Graham, Shelia, Julia, and Mustache. Then there¡¯s Derek with two master level mages behind him.


    The rest are the monsters.


    Carmen didn¡¯t join. Maybe because she thinks that water magic will be useless against me since I can swim fast and can breathe anywhere with my air magic. As for Fabio, he¡¯s here as a king.


    Good thing Shirley isn¡¯t here. Or she will join as well.


    Well, the result will be the same. I will overpower them before finally losing. Though whether I will really lose or not willeter.


    Seriously, I will face not only Ang. But every one else is here!


    Still, I¡¯m a clown. I¡¯m an entertainer. So even if I lose, I will do it so amazing that no one will question my strength anymore.


    But if I win, I can act proud toward everyone.


    Well, let¡¯s see how it will end.

 Chapter 755 - 755 My Final Match Begins

    755 My Final Match Begins


    Fifty-one people in the arena. One against fifty. Two if I count Victoria. But she¡¯s a weapon now and won¡¯t fight on her own.


    Damn. I shouldn¡¯t have been here. I regret acting tough. It won¡¯t end with just light injury for me.


    But I can¡¯t stop this from happening.


    The king has witnessed enough of my strength and be convinced that I¡¯m actually the strongest here. But everyone here want to fight me. So it can¡¯t be stopped.


    ¡°Everyone ready?¡±


    Fabio will be the one to start thisst match. Everyone watching is either standing up or leaning forward in their seat so they won¡¯t miss a thing.


    I looked at everyone who has prepared themselves to fight me. I¡¯m sure that they don¡¯t think that they can leave this ce unscathed.


    Even if it¡¯s fifty against one, this one guy is too strong. I think I can defeat most of them before I lose in the end. Though I might have a chance to win.


    Whatever. I¡¯ll just get ready to fight.


    .....


    I crouched down on the ground on all four. I sunk my fingers on the ground. This way, I can leap instantly at a high speed as soon as the match started.


    ¡°Start!¡±


    As soon as Fabio announced the start of the match, I leaped forward as fast as possible toward Derek and the other master level mages behind him.


    Derek is a wind master level mage. He¡¯s fast. But I¡¯m much faster.


    At least I can elerate faster than either Spot or Ray. But it¡¯s only for a close distance. For a long distance, they will win in a race. But in short distance, I¡¯m the quickest.


    So right now, I¡¯m already in front of Derek in just one leap. And it¡¯s correct to say that Inded on his chest before kicking him to change direction. This will be how I start the fight.


    Since I¡¯m the fastest in short distance movement, this is how I will fight.


    Leaping toward one target,nded on their body to stop, before kicking their body and leap to another target.


    So, I will move, then stop, then move, then stop. Until this n no longer working, I will keep doing this while targeting those who I deemed as dangerous. And my first three targets are Derek and the other two master level mages.


    After I kicked Derek on his chest, he lost his consciousness. And the same thing happened to the other two as well. And the others can¡¯t attack well or they will hit their own allies.


    And now after the three master level mages are done, I need to target someone else. But I can¡¯t take my time to think, so I just look for someone strong that I needed to defeat, but I know that they won¡¯t be quick enough to react to sudden danger approaching them.


    Those like Ang, Ka, or others who have fought so much and have a lot of experience would be able to react quickly. So my next target is someone with less experience. Randy.


    He¡¯s out. He managed to create Earth Wall, but it was toote. The wall raised after I hit him. So when he got knocked out, the wall is gone again.


    Then I continued defeating my opponents one by one like this.


    But this n doesn¡¯t work all the time. After a while and defeated some more people, the next target Inded on didn¡¯t get knocked out. But I keep using this tactic to injure them quickly without getting myself put in danger.


    I also can¡¯t stop for more than half second. That¡¯s enough for anyone to hit me.


    Everyone also have prepared themselves if I suddenly leaped at them like a frog before moving to my next target the same way. But at least I have defeated enough people. Still, the strongest ones are all here.


    But I continued in this manner until it finally doesn¡¯t work anymore.


    ¡°Well, the frog strategy doesn¡¯t seem to work anymore. They have prepared to counter me,¡± I said.


    ¡°When younded on people¡¯s chest, you kicked them hard enough so they wil get knocked out after their heart stopped beating for a second or the air in their lungs left. That was a good strategy. But it won¡¯t work anymore,¡± Victoriamented.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s just a strategy for a match like this. I don¡¯t think using it in a real battle is a good idea. It¡¯s better to kill them than doing things like this. But I can¡¯t do that here,¡± I said.


    I guess this is where the real battle start. Next, I should target the mages first. But I can¡¯t since they are well-protected by the surviving monsters.


    By the way, those who got knocked out voluntarily left the arena after they regain their consciousness. So the arena won¡¯t be too crowded.


    I have no choice but to defeat the close-range fighter first. The monsters.


    I transformed Victoria into a long staff and spin it around as I hit several werewolves and vampires at once. The angels are flying so I can¡¯t really hit them now.


    This didn¡¯t knock anyone out since this time, the angels have enough time to heal those I hit. So I changed my target to the angels.


    This is the first time I¡¯ve shown the new members of the alliance how I fly. By kicking the air. Since before when I fought the angels, I just jumped and didn¡¯t step on air.


    Although I don¡¯t need to use air magic to do it anymore since I can run on air with Aura, I used a bit of magic without much Aura to show Sunsses that air mage can also fly. Though it might be more tiring than how wind mages fly normally.


    I had Victoria created some Blobbies and turn them into a gun and shoot those who tried to attack me, while Victoria as a staff on my other hand is to knock out those flying angels.


    The angels noticed that I¡¯m attacking them so they created Barriers using light magic. But that doesn¡¯t work.


    I covered Victostaff with Aura and smashed their barrier easily. It would be easier if I use any sharp weapon to cut them, but I¡¯m not going to kill anyone here.


    All the angels have fallen. Except for Graham. Now the only healers here are Graham and Ka. And they both are being heavily protected.


    All of a sudden, Krones flying my way. No other magic he used. Just flying.


    I thought that he will use magic. But I didn¡¯t expect that he would just focus his magic to fly my way without stopping. In fact, all his magic is used to increase his speed.


    And in the end, I couldn¡¯t react when he hit my stomach with his head because I onle prepared myself to receive his magic attack. Even after covering it with my Aura, his bald head covered with bandana still gives me a bit of damage.


    Then I quickly hit him on the back of his head and knock him out. By this time, the others have prepared their magic on me.


    I am being surrounded by magic while I¡¯m in the air. From above and below, they tried to attack me. While the monsters are keeping me in check to make sure that I won¡¯t be able to dodge.


    All attacked me at the same time. So I chose one side that I will break forcefully instead of getting hit by those magic purposely.


    My target is Candy. Her fire magic is too strong and can attack arge area. So I charged at her after I split her fire magic, But Jewel blocked me in her triceratops form.


    I just ignored her and charged forward. Smashing Jewel with my shoulder. Blowing her away and hit Candy with herrge body.


    But Jewel quickly transformed back to her human form before her body gives too much damage to Candy. This is why I could do that. Because I know that Jewel is smart enough to do it.


    Candy got knocked out. And Jewel is in her human form. So I knock her out as well before defeating the monsters nearby.


    ¡°Well, fuck. There are still a lot of them. What should I do next?¡±


    ¡°Keep fighting until you lose,¡± Victoria suggested.


    ¡°What about keep fighting until I win?¡± I asked back.


    ¡°If you think that you can win without taking much damage to yourself, that¡¯s fine. Don¡¯t forget that this is a friendly match. And the cult is still out there,¡± Victoria said.


    I guess that¡¯s how it is. I¡¯ll try my best to win until I can¡¯t.


    After this, the werewolves came at me all at once. They¡¯re working together to bring me down. But they can¡¯t.


    After I fought them in my first match, I can somehow tell what their moves will be. So their moves are pretty much predictable since they didn¡¯t change their tactic.


    I only managed to bring down one werewolves before another group attacks me. The vampires.


    And while I was busy fighting the vampires, Arin came and shed her blood sword at me. I can¡¯t dodge and Aura can only protect me so much. So I lost quite the amount of blood. Which Arin and the vampires dly drink even the blood sprayed on their body..


    Well, I just made them stronger while I¡¯m getting weaker. I think it¡¯s time to use my special move. Or I won¡¯t have any chance at all to win.

 Chapter 756 - 756 The Match Ends

    756 The Match Ends


    I need to use my special move to be able to win this match. It has been a while since I use this move.


    But I need preparation for it. So I used Blobbygun to shoot as many Blobbybullets as possible.


    On the ground, on the wall, or someone¡¯s body.


    Then I will use portal on them so I can move anywhere I want.


    Shooting a gun against these people prove to be difficult. They all have learned the characteristic of a gun which can only fly on a straight line. So they keep moving sideways.


    Still, I managed to get close to some of them so I knock them out using the Victoria as my weapon. But there are still lots of them.


    Because there are too many opponents, and they are stronger than the cult, I feel pressured. And I drained my stamina faster than usual. It¡¯s also because I have to think to make sure that they won¡¯t die from my attack. I need to be careful.


    Even if I miss my shots, I keep shooting because it¡¯s part of the n. And I also need to dodge their magic.


    For something like fire, light, wind, and lightning magic, or even water magic even though I¡¯m not facing any water mage here, I can easily cut them with my Aura. But for any solid object like ice or earth magic, I can¡¯t just cut them since them can still reach me.


    .....


    So for fire, light, wind, and lightning magic, I just need to cut them. but when it¡¯s solid like ice or earth magic, I have to dodge as well.


    Obviously, the most troublesome one is Ang. Since somehow, she can make zing ice. A solid ice that burns. Or it could even look like fire, but it¡¯s actually ice or even earth. So I need to keep observing her to make sure that I won¡¯t get hit by any of her magic.


    Ka is there instructing everyone. Although she¡¯s not as good as Sunsses in strategy and leadership, she is still good enough since she has experience. Even more since she knows me more than anyone.


    In fact, all my opponents here know me and how I fight. They are all my friends.


    They know what I can do. They won¡¯t let down their guard at all. And I... don¡¯t know how much stronger they are now since I¡¯m on a mission for so long while they keep practicing and sparring with each other.


    So Ka can pretty much predict my move. But so far, she doesn¡¯t make any move on the bullets I shot. She should have known that I can use a portal to those Blobbybullets. But she might have forgotten about it.


    Also, it¡¯s probably because I missed. If my shot hit any of them, those who got hit would realize that the bullets are weaker than usual. So they will think that something was wrong.


    I guess I should be d that I miss them all. Though if I can hit them just once, that would be nice.


    Of course for those who stepped on the bullets on the ground, I had the Blobbies attach themselves to the shoes.


    But for now, I will keep shooting.


    ¡°Hmm... he¡¯s pretty good at first. And to be able to cut magic and dodge them, I think it¡¯s more than enough to be called as the strongest individual here. But in the end, a single person can¡¯t defeat a whole group of trained mages. What is it again? Magic control? I¡¯d like the mages in our kingdom to learn more about it,¡± one of the king said.


    Since I¡¯m now close to the wall below where the kings are seated, I can hear them talking.


    ¡°Yeah. We¡¯re currently looking for our people who we will send to other kingdoms so they can learn about magic control. It¡¯s something that can make mages be stronger than their actual level. Which was why those expert level mages can easily defeat master level mages as long as they didn¡¯t use their strongest magic which takes time to cast,¡± Albert exined.


    ¡°That¡¯s good. So, does the cult know about magic control?¡± the other king asked again.


    ¡°From what we observed so far, no. They don¡¯t know yet. And each individual is pretty much selfish. So even those who are stronger than normal don¡¯t seem to be teaching other mages in the cult. But that doesn¡¯t mean that it won¡¯t happen. It could happen to them as well so they could get stronger,¡± Albert said.


    As he said. I already have problems fighting expert level mages who learned magic control. But what if the cult¡¯s master level mages learned magic control? Maybe their most destructive magic will need less time to cast. That will be dangerous.


    Oh, I almost got hit by Arin¡¯s sword. She¡¯s already stronger than before now thanks to drinking a bit of my blood. I must not let my guard down around the monsters as well.


    If Spot is here, he might want to join us as well. Good thing that the arena is not big enough to fit his entire body. Because Spot can only use his full strength in his original size.


    I keep shooting more and more bullets and I managed to hit some. This was when they realized that I¡¯m going to use those Blobbies as my transfer points.


    ¡°Be careful! He¡¯s going to open portals on all the Blobbies nearby!¡± Ka shouted.


    That¡¯s wrong. Not all. Just some since some Blobbies are in the same ce.


    I can see Ka and some other people are trying to remove the Blobbies on their body. So I just opened several portals at those who are trying to remove the Blobbies and knock them out. Sorry, Ka.


    With no one to givemand, it... is still hard for me to find a chance to win since everyone just fight however they want. At least they are still holding back since they tried their best to not hit their own allies.


    Ang tried to attack me with wind magic. It¡¯s pretty cold so I¡¯m sure that if I got hit by that wind, I will freeze.


    This time I didn¡¯t dodge. I just opened a portal directly in front of me, between me and Ang¡¯s magic, and connect it to a portal next to Arin. If she got herself frozen, I don¡¯t think she can use blood to create anything.


    ¡°He used portal to redirect magic attack?! Being a summoner is amazing, huh? I guess he still have more things to hide. He might have a chance to win.¡±


    That king who said that I might lose before changed his mind. I also think that I have better chance now.


    Using portals, I protected myself and keep moving while defeating them all one by one.


    Graham is down. Next were other monsters and Shelia. Then the list goes on until there¡¯s only Ang left in front of me.


    ¡°Well, it ended up with a one on one match. I think you must be waiting for this moment since you can¡¯t fire your magic or you will hit everyone,¡± I said.


    ¡°I still thought that we could defeat you. But I guess your strength still surpass everyone here. Well, you always said that you¡¯re the best in fighting in a closed space. I say that you¡¯re right about that,¡± Ang said.


    It might not be a small space since the arena is quite big. But it is still an enclosed space where no one can go outside the boundary or they will be considered as a loss.


    That¡¯s why I can fight until the end now. But the enemy is still Ang. So it¡¯s quite troublesome.


    Everyone has left the arena and watched us from the audience seat. And they are being healed by the angels. Then they move to the protect the kings from what will happen next since Ang no longer need to hold back.


    She then prepared her magic. She used all her elements to cast her magic.


    I know this one. Thest time she used this was on the Barbarian King. And he died soon after.


    There will be explosion. Can I cut explosion?


    Since we are thest two, I don¡¯t want to end it quickly. I¡¯m still an entertainer after all. So I waited until she¡¯s ready for her magic. And everyone also prepared to raise barrier to protect the others.


    Four elements shing at each other and beingpressed by Ang. It turned into a ball. Smaller than even a Fireball cast by a beginner level mage. but its strength is stronger than any magic from any average master level mages. And this one should be stronger than the one that killed the Barbarian King.


    I turned Victoria into a katana and get ready to cut it. Then Ang threw that ball of magic toward me.


    I swung Victokatana fully covered with Aura at it. Trying to cut it.


    Eventually, I got pushed back. So I used all my strength to stop it.


    But I failed. The ball exploded. It was too strong for me.


    Damn it, Ang is too awesome.

 Chapter 757 - 757 Where the Cult Sends Supplies From

    757 Where the Cult Sends Supplies From


    ¡°The winner is... it¡¯s a draw!¡±


    I got blown away by Ang¡¯s magic. I feel like I lost my consciousness for a second. And when I regained my consciousness, I heard Fabio¡¯s announcement saying that it was a draw.


    I thought I was lost. What is this? How did it ended with a draw?


    ¡°What the fuck, Fabio?! Why was it a draw?! I was the one who got knocked back!¡± I shoutedins toward the king of Arturo.


    ¡°That¡¯s a proof that you are so close in either winning or losing. Look at Ang,¡± he replied.


    Only then I checked my surrounding. And I see that Ang is there lying on the ground unconscious. Did she got blown away by her own magic?


    ¡°Thatst magic she used, when you tried to cut it, Ang concentrated her magic on the part where your sword met her magic. So instead of getting split, her magic stopped your sword. But you are still too strong. In the end, you managed to split her magic. Probably because she thought that there¡¯s no way for her to win, she exploded her own magic and knock you out. But Ang herself got affected by the explosion and she¡¯s out as well. Turning it into a draw,¡± Fabio exined.


    Is that how it looked like from Fabio¡¯s perspective? Maybe that¡¯s right.


    I felt that Victokatana was so close in cutting Ang¡¯s magic. But then I got pushed back, so I used my full strength. I don¡¯t remember much after that so it¡¯s probably true what Fabio said.


    .....


    I cut down Ang¡¯s magic, and then Ang made her magic exploded. That¡¯s how I ended up losing my consciousness. But she ended up got herself knocked out by the explosion she caused.


    This is a friendly match. Not exactly a spar, but it¡¯s still a learning session. But to think that she would do so much.


    I thought that she wouldn¡¯t go this far for a match. She said that she wanted to confess to me once she won against me. But in the end, we got together before she could win. So I thought that she won¡¯t go all out again in trying to win against me.


    I was wrong. Ang is still Ang. Even if she already achieve her purpose in trying to defeat me without defeating me, which is for us to get together, she¡¯s still that girl who wants to win.


    Probably because she sessfully used it on the Barbarian King, she thought that she can win against me. She¡¯s right. And if she had put protection magic on herself before exploding her magic, I would be the one who lost.


    But from her point of view, she probably thought that unless she put everything on the explosion, she won¡¯t be able to win. That¡¯s why she didn¡¯t protect herself.


    And in the end... wait.


    I¡¯m the one who stood up first after both of us were knocked out, right? And it felt like it hasn¡¯t been a second after I lost my consciousness. So shouldn¡¯t it be my victory since I stood up first? After all, in a real battle, there¡¯s no such thing as a draw.


    ¡°Hey, since I stood up first, I should be the one who won,¡± I said.


    ¡°But it was a draw. Let¡¯s make it a draw,¡± Fabio said.


    ¡°No. There¡¯s no draw in a real battle. And Ang won¡¯t ept such result since she¡¯s unconscious,¡± I said.


    ¡°Fine. You won. Though I feel like you¡¯re just being petty. So what if there¡¯s no draw in a real battle? This is a friendly match. And do you hate it so much that Ang is that strong after she used everything she got? I feel like she¡¯s stronger than you,¡± Albert suddenlyined.


    ¡°Really? Then how about I fight like a normal summoner? What if Graham and Shelia are on my side? And what if I was riding Ray or just let Victoria ride on Ray and fight by my side? I think it¡¯s obvious that someone hasn¡¯t used his full strength yet,¡± I said.


    After I said that, everyone is quiet.


    Just me alone with Victoria can defeat forty-nine people before I fell together with thest one. But if I had one other person helping me, this would be an easy win. Especially since I can order them with telepathy.


    With this, no one will question how strong I am.


    ¡°Wanna fight now?¡±


    I looked at the bodyguard of a king who kept trying to prove that I¡¯m not the strongest. The one who lost against Jewel.


    He couldn¡¯t do anything to her. But I defeated Jewel easily. The gap between us is too much.


    He looked away from me. He¡¯s afraid to look at me in the eyes. That¡¯s good. Just because you¡¯re a bit stronger than average doesn¡¯t mean that no one can be that strong.


    Heck, I feel like he was the weakest among those who fought in the match. Not counting the elves who just y tag with the others.


    At least after this, they will train harder. Because they can¡¯t protect anything with the strength they have at the moment.


    ¡°Well, I guess that¡¯s it. Or is there anyone else who want to fight?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I think that¡¯s enough. Roy, can you still use portal?¡± Fabio asked.


    ¡°To bring everyone home? That¡¯s easy. I still hadn¡¯t use everything during the fight so I still have quite a lot of mana,¡± I said.


    After that, I brought everyone back to their own country. It was an interesting day today.


    I managed to not only entertain people, but also making them realize how strong I am.


    But that is not something that they should just be d. They need to know that even with the strength I have shown to them, we still can¡¯t destroy the cult. We couldn¡¯t even find where the so-called Evil God is.


    Some of the master level mages from the cult that we captured or join us told us that when they reached master level, they were asked to pick one out of two choices. One choice is that they will have more freedom of movement for the cult¡¯s benefit. And the other is most likely rted to the Evil God.


    None of them ever heard about those who picked the other choice. They have never met them after they picked their choice. So they might have died. At least I hope so. That way, we will have less enemies to fight.


    The day after the friendly match, Wendy and some other agents will go to other kingdoms to teach them about magic control. At least for themonly owned elemental. Such as fire, wind, ice, earth, water, light, and healing.


    For lightning, summoning, air, taming, or other rare elements, those who will teach other kingdoms have learned the general idea for it. The rest will be up to the mages themselves. Or if possible, they can ask someone with simr element who have learned magic control.


    And the day after, it¡¯s the time for Sonia to reveal where the hidden location of where the cult delivered their supplies from to the Monsters World.


    There hasn¡¯t been any other movement by the cult to the same destroyed base in Monsters World. Most likely, they are focusing on the base in other parts in Monsters World.


    ¡°It¡¯s to the north from Cassau. A ce that no average mages can go. Not just because of the monsters, but because no one can use magic in the area surrounding that ce,¡± Albert said.


    There¡¯s a ce where magic can¡¯t be used? Then wouldn¡¯t it be great if we use that ce as a prison? No one will be able to escape from that prison then.


    All the way north from Cassau, huh? I don¡¯t think I¡¯ve been there. I haven¡¯t even heard of that ce.


    Cassau is located around the southernmost part of the continent. Directly next to the ocean. And going north from there... I don¡¯t know. Never been there before.


    ¡°There¡¯s a ce where you can¡¯t use magic? Sonia, how did you escape from there?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m a ghost. But even then, I need magic so I can survive. Still, if I pass through that ce where I can¡¯t use magic, I would probably be dead. So I used teleportation to leave that ce and go to you. That¡¯s when we met and you told me to inform Albert and the others,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. And hearing from her exnation, we¡¯re sure that it¡¯s over there,¡± Albert said.


    So after she returned, she discussed it with Albert and the others. And they finally confirmed where it is. Is that why they didn¡¯t discuss it right away and wait until they¡¯re sure?


    If magic can¡¯t be used, then there¡¯s only monsters and me who is an Aura Master who can go. So they probably had summoners or tamers to check the area.


    Although the monsters can¡¯t use magic, like how Spot probably won¡¯t be able to fly over there since he¡¯s flying with magic, monsters are still stronger than humans.


    ¡°I had a summoner get his monster travel through that ce and ce a Blobby and Sonia¡¯s soil in a hidden ce over there. So before we attack that ce, Roy will bring some agents to scout the area. If you can destroy it on your own, that would be great. But I doubt you can do it alone,¡± Albert said.


    I guess my next mission is to scout the ce first. But if it¡¯s a ce where magic can¡¯t be used, howe there are mages over there?


    What about flying? Can something fly over that ce beyond where magic is forbidden? I guess that¡¯s also the part I need to investigate.

 Chapter 758 - 758 Checking the Magicless Area

    758 Checking the Magicless Area


    And here we are! A ce where magic can¡¯t be used!


    Well, I passed through this ce with the help of a Blobby that was installed here by someone¡¯s familiar. I don¡¯t think there¡¯s a need at all for me to enter this magicless ce since our goal is to the city inside. Where magic can be used.


    It¡¯s just that the city is being surrounded by the area where no one can use magic. And I¡¯m interested in it.


    ¡°Alright, you guys can go and investigate that city. There must be a lot of master level mages there so be careful. Rip your clothes and purposely get some light wound on your body so everyone will just think that you¡¯re escaping from the monsters inside. Albert said that you will act like hunters risking your lives for big reward to investigate this ce but you got attacked by monsters and have to escape. Well, I don¡¯t need to exin any more. You¡¯re better than me at this. I¡¯ll go check this magicless area. If you need anything, contact me with those phones. You can use it without looking, right?¡±


    ¡°Yeah. We learned it. Thank you for taking us here. We¡¯ll be off now.¡±


    They are agents from Tatrama. Since this is still Albert¡¯s territory, it¡¯s his men who will investigate.


    They have received their phones for the mission. And since it only recognized their own master¡¯s magic, the cult will never expect that we have such an amazing magic item. No one other than their owner can operate phones.


    And if they are in trouble, they have learned how to use it without looking. They will spend more mana doing it, but it¡¯s better than operating it in front of everyone. Though I think master level mages can sense their magic when they¡¯re operating their phones.


    After we part ways, they rip their own clothes and wound themselves with knives that have been sterilized so they won¡¯t get infection. But they have a healer so they can say that once they left the magicless area, the healer healed them.


    .....


    Now they look just like any average hunters risking their lives for a reward.


    I heard that even some nobles participate in this mission. They even officially submitted the request to the guild and have these guys ept it. So there shouldn¡¯t be anything suspicious.


    This is still a ce that no one really knows about. It¡¯s a magicless area with a lot of monsters so mages won¡¯t enter this ce just for fun.


    Still, it¡¯s a dangerous ce. The city has many master level mages. and I heard that even Sonia had problems escaping from there. And because this ce is surrounded by magicless area, it took some time until she decided to just teleport.


    Luckily, she was invisible the whole time she was here. So even if master level mages can sense her, none of them know her exact appearance.


    Well, ghosts are considered monsters. So maybe some of them thought that a tamer or a summoner was letting their familiar run free.


    After those agents left, I entered the magicless area. And as soon as I enter there, my connection with Victoria stopped. Just the telepathy. They are still my contracted monsters.


    ¡°Victoria, you can¡¯t hear my telepathy, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°You tried? Let me try it... How is it? Did you hear what I said?¡± she asked me back.


    ¡°Nope. Not at all. Magic is totally being restricted here,¡± I said.


    Then how did the cult pass through this ce? And hearing that there¡¯s at least a big city inside, that means that it has been decades since the city was built and people live there.


    What about the monsters here? Are they just wild monsters, or are they contracted monsters? It will be dangerous if I kill any monsters here and the cultes to know about it.


    Well, they might think that a really strong monster is here so it might be fine.


    But for now, I need to check if this ce is truly in Tatrama. If I keep going south, I should reach Cassau.


    I walked back to where the magicless area had no effect on me and summoned Ray. Then we move to the south at full speed.


    ording to the map, we should be able to reach Cassau quickly.


    Along the way on the magicless area, it was pretty weird. Because the sensation of me riding on Ray is different.


    Usually, my mana will replenish since Ray will share his mana to me. But the feeling is not there.


    Though at least Aura is still fine.


    On the way, while we¡¯re still in the middle of the magicless area, we encountered several monsters. And I defeated them normally using Reizpear.


    Apparently, Victoria can¡¯t use her transformation here. But if she was transformed before she enters this ce, she will stay in that form. And right now, she¡¯s on my shoulder in her small slime form.


    And before we enter this ce, I had recovered Reizpear in my pocket to its original form. Though if it¡¯s broken here, I don¡¯t think it can be fixed. So I need to make sure that it won¡¯t get broken. And covering it with my Aura to increase its durability should be good enough.


    Soon after we passed the magicless area and we can use magic again.


    ¡°It was weird how I can¡¯t transform for a while there,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°If you want, you can do it all the time. Just by wearing the Magic Restricting Cor and you won¡¯t be able to use magic. Why did I never thought that those cors work on monsters as well?¡±


    ¡°You¡¯re right. But now we know, if we can just put them on a really strong monsters, the only thing we need to worry is their physical strength. Though I believe that most monsters can easily rip the cors with just their strength,¡± Victoria added.


    Now, what if a master level mage is here? If they can¡¯t use magic, they should still have extraordinary strength, right? Although it¡¯s thanks to their magic level, they are still improving their muscles. I know that because I can see their muscles.


    So, they should still be able to pass through this ce, right? Maybe that¡¯s how they entered it in the first ce.


    With Ray¡¯s speed, we reached Cassau soon after. It¡¯s really in the north of Cassau. And I don¡¯t have any memories at all about that ce. Either in my past life or in the present.


    Maybe because I just didn¡¯t care. Well, we know now. So we will take care of it.


    The phone can connect Earth to the Moon. So reaching that ce should be possible with it.


    Sonia¡¯s teleportation can pass through that ce. And my portal as well. So maybe our magic although it¡¯s connected from one ce to another, the magic didn¡¯t pass through that magicless area.


    This is something new that I learned today.


    I thought that creating a portal is making a connection from one ce to another in an invisible path so it¡¯s actually a straight line.


    But it seems like it¡¯s just magic.


    I used magic on one side to open a portal to another side. And instead of having my magic move to that ce, it just magically appear in my target destination without passing any obstacles.


    It¡¯s quite rare for me to be curious about magic theories. Though I won¡¯t do anything unless I can see that I can benefit from learning it.


    Maybe it¡¯s simr to magic phone. The phones are connected to each others magically. So there¡¯s no need to care about the signal being lost.


    I told the agents that before they made further progress that once I left the magicless area, I will contact them to see if the phone is working. So I texted one of them a message.


    The reply came soon after. It still works.


    ¡°Well, we passed through that magicless area easily. Next we should test if it¡¯s still magicless in the sky or even underground. What a weird ce,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re going to dig your way down that ce? Won¡¯t that take a lot of time?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°I¡¯ll dig deep enough that my Divine Vision can still see the surface. Once we entered the magicless area, we will return from the way we entered. That way it won¡¯t take too much time. Good thing Divine Vision is not magic. I can still use it inside,¡± I said.


    If my Divine Vision doesn¡¯t work, I would not rmend to do this at all. It will be dangerous. Who knows if there are any powerful monsters who can burrow themselves underground?


    We flew as high as possible. And once I can see the star and passed the sky I can still use magic even though the magicless area should be right below me. It would be too much for anyone other than air mage to pass even though we can still use magic. But just below where the sky is still blue, I can¡¯t use magic. This is interesting.


    Then I dug a hole as deep as possible. When I can barely see the surface with my Divine Vision, I stopped digging down and just making a path forward.


    When I¡¯m right underneath the border where I can¡¯t use magic anymore, my connection with Victoria who was singing something called anime-song stopped.


    So it won¡¯t work from under or above. Or we need to fly higher than the sky. As for how deep we need to dig, I don¡¯t know yet.


    Either way, it will be difficult for those who are not air mage. so there doesn¡¯t seem to be any other way to go trough this magicless area.


    Well, should I check on the city now? Maybeter. I¡¯ll explore this magicless area first. I can leave the scouting to the agents.

 Chapter 759 - 759 Teaching Shelia to Kick

    759 Teaching Shelia to Kick


    First, we need preparation to go to explore this magicless area. I know for sure that if this ce has been here for a long time, someone who wants to hide from mages would pick this ce to go.


    And my guess is that in the past, there could be some Aura users who tried to hide from the Evil God. And this is the most likely ce to hide. Though that¡¯s just a guess. It¡¯s less likely that I will find any Aura user.


    Is there any other magicless area in this world? Maybe.


    Also, if master level mages are strong enough to survive in this ce, it¡¯s no wonder that they could use this ce as a hiding spot as well. Maybe even the Evil God himself is hiding here. Then it¡¯s no wonder that Timmy couldn¡¯t detect the Evil God.


    Well, this is just one of my guesses. But maybe I can find a clue of the whereabouts of the Evil God.


    We have several master level mages now. But they are too inexperienced in fighting without magic. So I can¡¯t bring them here.


    In fact, I¡¯m the only human who can explore this ce without a care. So I guess I¡¯ll just get my familiars toe here.


    So I summoned Shelia and Graham here. As for Arin, she¡¯s not my familiar. And she¡¯s using blood like magic. So I think she won¡¯t be strong enough here since I¡¯ve seen quite powerful monsters nearby. Just Shelia and Graham. And Ray as my ride.


    ¡°Over this line is where you can¡¯t use magic. Enter and check everything if there¡¯s something that you can¡¯t use. Like transformation or shadow clones. We¡¯re going to explore this ce,¡± I said.


    .....


    I drew a line on the ground to tell my familiars the border to where they can¡¯t use magic.


    They are monsters. So I don¡¯t know if what they use is some sort of magic, or it¡¯s some kind of racial skill. Because if it¡¯s a racial skill, then they can still use it inside.


    While watching them experimenting with their magic anding in and out of the magicless area, I asked Victoria to create a lot of Blobbies for preparation.


    In Graham¡¯s case, his clones are from magic. So he can¡¯t call them from inside there. And if he creates a clone from the outside and entering it, the clone will disappear.


    Unlike Victoria. Since her clones are still part of her body, the Blobbies cane in without disappearing. But they can¡¯t transform inside. So I need the Blobbies to transform first.


    I also grabbed my sword-cane. Since the cane is an Aura weapon, I can still use it inside the magicless area. Using it here should be easier than Reizpear since Reizpear won¡¯t repair if it¡¯s inside.


    It will be useful if I need to entrap something. Using the walking cane, no one would expect that a barrier would appear in a ce where magic is restricted.


    ¡°Master, I don¡¯t think I can be helpful here. The only thing I can do is to use my spearmanship. I can still fly but without magic, it will drain my stamina faster,¡± Graham said.


    He¡¯s using all his twelve wings to fly. But unlike usual, his wings keep pping. As he said, he can only use his spearmanship. I guess I won¡¯t bring him with me.


    ¡°I can¡¯t transform but I can still run on air! This ce will be good for training!¡± Shelia said.


    Graham¡¯s physical strength is lower than Shelia¡¯s. But he will be less useful than Sh. And he might even be a burden here.


    As for Shelia, she only thinks of this as a training. I guess I¡¯ll bring her with me.


    ¡°Then Graham can return. And Shelia, use your human form since you want this to be a training,¡± I said.


    I returned Graham back and Shelia transformed into her human form. Not the werewolf form where she always use to fight. But the form she took when she¡¯s exploring the city with other girls.


    Her strength in this form is about the same as master level mage¡¯s strength without magic. So she¡¯s still strong.


    Now we¡¯re ready to go. Just Shelia, Victoria, and I. Oh, and Ray and Airy as well.


    I had some Blobbies transformed into a mask just in case I need to hide my identity. I also thought of wearing an armor, but whether it¡¯s from the magic armor from my bracelet, or from Victoria turning herself into my armor, it will also be bad if I can¡¯t remove them inside if I need to do something. So I just transformed Blobbies into a robe.


    As for Victoria herself, she¡¯s transformed into an earring on my left ear. She told me that it¡¯s to make it easier for her to talk to me.


    ¡°Shelia, do you need a robe or anything?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Do you think that a disguise will be a good idea for me? I will stay more in Monsters World. And when I fight, I will mostly use my werewolf form. So I don¡¯t think anyone will recognize me like this. But if you think that it could be an obstacle in the future, I will wear one. Though I think it will only obstruct my movement,¡± she said.


    ¡°Then you don¡¯t need one. Let¡¯s go then.¡±


    This time we¡¯re not just passing the magicless area. We will explore it.


    I heard that this ce should be surrounding the city inside in a circle. Let¡¯s see if it¡¯s real.


    ¡°Oh, right. Airy, how do you feel inside this magicless area?¡± I asked Airy.


    ¡°Nothing. I can still do everything without problem,¡± she replied.


    If that¡¯s the case, then this ce might be a good ce for elemental spirits to hide. Maybe we could find some.


    ¡°Then if you sense any spirit nearby, tell me. If we can get them to join us, we can get stronger faster.¡±


    We then explore the area, we didn¡¯t run at full speed. just making sure that I can see everything and Shelia can detect something with her nose. We just walked casually. Though I don¡¯t think riding on Ray can be called walking.


    ¡°Oh, there¡¯s a monster over there. It¡¯s a huge bipedal beast monster. Shelia, do you want to fight it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Sure. If it was under normal condition, I¡¯m sure I can kill it easily. But now, I guess it¡¯s time I learned some technique as well. This way, I can grow even stronger,¡± she said.


    Back then after the battle in Monsters World and going to the viges where the cult has taken control of, she was almost got defeated and injured badly. She almost missed the fight in the Lawless Country.


    And that made her think that she needs something other than raw strength. She will learn more skills as well.


    I¡¯m sure she can do it.


    Shelia can still step on the air. But her speed is slower than usual. However, that was enough for her to dodge the giant beast¡¯s attack.


    In her human form, her ws are not as sharp as usual. So she used her fists to fight. And I taught her how to properly throw a punch. Though she can instinctively understood without having me telling her about it.


    It¡¯s over but it took a while. She defeated the monster with just her fists.


    ¡°Shelia. Herees the next monsters. It¡¯s my turn now. Hold these for me. and watch something that you might need to learn. You have great movement and fighting with your fists is easy. But you don¡¯t know about kicking technique. Watch me finish that one with kicks,¡± I said.


    I gave her the robe and the sword-cane. Then proceed to fight simr monster that she fought before. This time, I used only kicks to show her what she missed.


    With her speed and her movement, her leg muscle is more developed than her arms. If she learned how to kick properly, she could defeat enemies faster.


    Maybe not to the point like how I did it in the friendly match. Using the frog leap tactic to defeat the opponent one by one. That¡¯s only for hit and run tactic.


    But for her, it will be a proper fight with her kicks only. She will surely grow stronger.


    After watching the werewolves fight, I can tell that they prefer to swing their ws at their enemies. And sometimes use bites.


    If she learn how to kick and showed it to other werewolves, they can get even stronger.


    I defeated the giant beast monster with a few kicks. With this, Shelia will be interested in kicking more.


    After that, we continued exploring. And I let her face the monsters alone since she said that she wanted to learn more about kicking.


    As expected, her kick is much stronger than her punch. Although her ws are more lethal, having able to kick will make her move more unpredictable since no one would expect a werewolf with sharp ws would use kicks.


    And after one hour of exploring, I see a vige inside this magicless area. Very suspicious.


    ¡°So, there¡¯s a vige over there. Any suggestion on what we do next?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Destroy it,¡± Shelia suggested.


    ¡°Rejected. Victoria?¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s impossible to act normally since they would know that we¡¯re not normal to be able toe here. Just improvise like how you usually do it,¡± Victoria said.


    Well, I guess that¡¯s what we will do. I wonder who they are. I hope they are not with the cult.

 Chapter 760 - 760 Villagers in the Magicless Area

    760 Vigers in the Magicless Area


    A vige in a ce where magic can¡¯t be used? In a world where everyone thought that magic is everything? Extremely suspicious.


    There are people there. Only around ten houses. And I can only see ten people inside. Ten muscr people. Six men and four women.


    ¡°Well, there are ten people there. Ten muscr people. I guess that¡¯s to be expected if they want to live here. They could be bigger than the muscr guards in Mellian under Hill,¡± I said.


    ¡°Nice!¡± Victoria replied. The earring on my ear just spoke.


    ¡°What should we do then? Fight them?¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°Let me confirm first if they are master level mages or not. Because if they are just people who trained a lot, they won¡¯t have enough strength to be here seeing how strong the monsters nearby are. And it¡¯s possible that they are rted with the cult,¡± I said.


    This time, I checked on their face. If they are master level mages, they should be able to sense me looking at them.


    When I look into the head of one man, he quickly turned his head to me. he noticed me. And then he quickly tries to alert other people.


    It would be bad if they noticed me from his warning since they might not react once I look at themter. So I quickly scanned them all. And all of them noticed me before the previous man finished alerting the others.


    .....


    ¡°Wow. All of them are master level mages. Living here and getting that much muscles must mean that they have a lot of experience in closebat. If they leave this ce, they could be a big problem,¡± I said.


    ¡°Are they from the cult?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know yet. Let¡¯s just go there and ask them about it since they already noticed us anyway,¡± I said.


    Those ten people gathered at the entrance of the vige closest to our location. And they have shabby spears and knives as weapons. I think they made it themselves.


    The knives look just like any normal kitchen knives. And the spears are just long poles with a de attached at one end of the pole.


    They can just ask a cksmith if they want a weapon. But seeing how it seems like they made those spears by themselves, I don¡¯t think they have any connection with the outside world. At least not enough for them to ask someone to build them weapons.


    Maybe they are not rted with the cult. Because if they are, they should have at least enough connection to someone who can provide them with at least iron weapons. But those spears and knives are not enough to be called as weapons. They are too shabby.


    Well, unless I¡¯m the one who use them.


    ¡°Shelia, they are waiting for us. Let¡¯s greet them,¡± I said.


    ¡°Do you think they¡¯re strong?¡± she asked.


    ¡°Stronger than average at least. But I don¡¯t think that they are stronger than you. Just be careful since your regeneration won¡¯t work in this ce. Don¡¯t get hurt,¡± I reminded her that in this magicless area, her regeneration ability doesn¡¯t work.


    She tested it just by prickling her own finger with a needle. And it didn¡¯t heal as fast as usual.


    But she¡¯s still stronger than most people. She should be fine fighting just ten people.


    ¡°Halt! Who are you and what is your reason ining here?¡±


    One of the ten people, who seem to be their leader, asked our identity. I¡¯m wearing a mask now so that they won¡¯t recognize me. Though I don¡¯t think any of them know who I am. This is our first time meeting them.


    Ten people who are strong physically and are master level mages. It will be dangerous if they leave this ce and create chaos.


    If they are with the cult, let¡¯s kill them before they have the time to leave this ce and use magic. If they are not with the cult, let¡¯s try our best to get them to join us.


    ¡°Can¡¯t you see this mask? I¡¯m trying to hide my identity here,¡± I said.


    ¡°Why are you trying to hide your identity?¡± their leader asked.


    ¡°How long have you iste yourselves in this ce with no connection to the outside world?¡± I asked back.


    ¡°Answer my question first!¡±


    ¡°My answer depends on your answer!¡±


    They look confused. Maybe it has been so long since they met anyone from the outside.


    ¡°You mean you¡¯re going to lie depend on our answer?¡± the leader asked me again.


    ¡°No. I will decide what to tell you depend on your answer. I will keep important information to myself depend on your answer,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then we have nothing to tell you. Leave or we will kill you!¡±


    No exchanging information? How stubborn.


    ¡°Shelia, break their spears. And they should be able to withstand at least a few kicks from you. But seeing how they¡¯re here, they might have a great teamwork as well to be able to defeat the monsters. It could be a good training for you. Just be careful and don¡¯t kill them,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay.¡±


    As soon as she said that, she leaped toward them and a fight started.


    Surprisingly, the person she attacked was quick enough to block her kick with her spear. And the spear got destroyed.


    Shelia quickly attacked her again and knock her down. She¡¯s still conscious, but if she stands up now, she will get hit again. She understood that so she just stay still on the ground to take a moment to rest.


    ¡°She¡¯s strong! Be careful!¡±


    Now the rest are surrounding Shelia. While the woman who got knocked still resting and trying to recover her stamina a bit.


    Well, she has fractured ribs. If she just rest a few days, with her strength as a master level mage, she will heal naturally. But if she still choose to fight, her pain might get worse.


    Shelia used this chance to train her kicks. Since she rarely use kicks to fight, being surrounded and only fight with her legs is something new for her.


    She got hit once in a while, but the wounds are not that deep. Even if she can¡¯t use her regeneration ability, they can still heal naturally.


    But their teamwork is very good. Proves how much experience they have fighting together.


    But Shelia¡¯s raw strength is stronger. And they also don¡¯t seem to have experience fighting together against human-sized enemies.


    That¡¯s right. Most of the monsters we fought here are huge. So they don¡¯t really have experience fighting smaller enemy. And Shelia is just like any ordinary female human right now. I bet they don¡¯t expect that she¡¯s a werewolf.


    Three other people are already down. Leaving only six people still fighting Shelia.


    Right now, their position have changed. I¡¯m outside the vige, Shelia inside the vige, and the ten people including the injured ones are between us.


    I know what they¡¯re nning to do since they keep ncing at me. Do they think that I won¡¯t notice?


    Then four people attacked Shelia at the same time.


    ¡°Capture him and use him as a hostage while we stall for time!¡±


    The six people including those who were down then run at me.


    Two people are restraining me while the rest are pointing their knives at me since their spears were broken.


    I told Shelia to not break the knives since they might be used for them to dismantle the monster the hunted for food and for cooking. I¡¯m just being kind.


    But if a knife is pointed at my face, there¡¯s no way I would stand still.


    ¡°Stop fighting or we will kill him!¡±


    ¡°Do it if you can! He¡¯s much stronger than me!¡± Shelia replied.


    I just spread out my arms and the two who were restraining me loosen their grip and lost their bnce. Then I flicked the knives in front of me. Breaking them all easily.


    ¡°Well, now that we know who is the strongest here, shall we go back to exchanging information? Without fighting if possible,¡± I said.


    The ten people quickly gathered together. Then they each reach their pocket and eat some sort of small fruit.


    ¡°You made a mistake. You should have killed us right away,¡± one of them said.


    Is eating fruit something amazing? Well, Pear-y Fruit is kind of amazing.


    And I don¡¯t think I have seen that type of fruit here. So I grabbed one from the one who restrained me. He¡¯s still looking for it thinking that he lost it somewhere.


    ¡°Looking for this? Just what kind of effect does this fruit have... oh, wow! You can use magic here.¡±


    Once they ate the fruit, I can feel something changed. They can use magic now in this magicless area.


    I see. So if you eat this fruit here, you can still use magic.


    What if I wear the Magic Restricting Cor and eat one? Will I still be able to use magic? If so, then I need to inform the others about this fruit.


    What should I call it? Magic-y Fruit?


    ¡°Now that we can use magic, there¡¯s no way we would lo¡ªse?¡±


    Before their leader finished his words, I quickly move and knock out the other nine people. Leaving only him standing. And I¡¯m right behind him.


    ¡°Still think you can win? All I need is information and you can live. That¡¯s all,¡± I said.


    ¡°...I surrender.¡±


    Well, that¡¯s that. Next is exchanging information. I hope none of them are with the cult.

 Chapter 761 - 761 They are Strength-Seekers

    761 They are Strength-Seekers


    ¡°So, what is this fruit?¡±


    After they decided to surrender, we no longer fight. They know that they are no match against me. Even if they can use magic, it¡¯s toote since they are too close to me. I can stop them before they cast any magic.


    So I asked them about the fruit that I stole from one of them. Because after seeing this small red fruit the size of a grape, they are able to use magic in this ce where magic should be blocked.


    Should I call it Magic-y Fruit? Or is it Grape-y Fruit?


    ¡°We just call it fruit. We don¡¯t know the name. But after eating one, we can use magic for a few minutes. The more we eat them, the longer we can use magic. But they are so rare that we don¡¯t have much of them anymore,¡± the one acting as the leader said.


    Now that I¡¯m looking at them with my Divine Vision, other than a well-trained body, in the pocket of their clothes, they only have one or two more fruits.


    And after checking the vige, I can¡¯t see any. Those in the pockets are thest it seems.


    I checked the fruit in my hand. There¡¯s no seed. You can swallow it whole. Well, chewing it first is obviously better. Don¡¯t choke on your food.


    After eating them, the effect is not instant. Only after a while they can start using magic. But it¡¯s still quick enough.


    .....


    Anyone other than me would let down their guard and got defeated by the magic of the master level mages.


    ¡°Alright, let¡¯s talk about the fruitter. Are you guys vigers here? How long have you been here?¡± I asked.


    All of them hesitated to answer. I wonder why?


    ¡°Answer his question!¡± Shelia forced them to speak.


    ¡°Yes. We¡¯re vigers here. We have been living here for a hundred years at least,¡± the leader said.


    Over a hundred years? No wonder they look much older than the master level mages I usually met. But if it¡¯s that long, they might know something about the city where the cult is hiding.


    Or maybe not. The cult might have built that city after these master level mages stayed here.


    As for the reason why they¡¯re here, I think I know why.


    ¡°Can we really tell them everything?¡± one of them asked the others.


    ¡°What else can we do? They¡¯re stronger than us.¡±


    ¡°Yeah. I thought that there shouldn¡¯t be anyone else stronger than us physically. But I guess we¡¯re wrong. It has been so long since we go to the outside world. I wonder how strong the people are out there?¡±


    ¡°Weak. They are physically weak. In fact, you are already the strongest people if you decided to go out since master level mage is quite rare. And it¡¯s difficult to find even one person who train their body since everyone is focused on magic.¡±


    They were quite surprised to realize that I can hear them whispering to each other. Then their expression light up.


    ¡°You can hear whisper from far. Have you surpass the limit of human?¡±


    ¡°Oh my God! Is that what it is? You two have exceeded the limit of human?!¡±


    As expected. These people, after reaching master level, they tried to make themselves stronger. Physically.


    From what I¡¯ve heard, it¡¯s near impossible for anyone who have reached higher level in their magic to learn Aura. So it¡¯s likely that they will never learn Aura.


    Even then, they are much stronger than any humans I¡¯ve faced in closebat. Not as much as the cat-man though.


    They are strength-seekers. And they felt that their strength reached the limit. And seeing how they fought us before, they must have learned to fight together instead.


    What a muscle-headed old people. Though I don¡¯t think they will ever get any stronger than this.


    ¡°Let me guess. You reached master level in your magic element, and thought of training your body so you can be the strongest. That¡¯s why you alle here and built a vige. Am I right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, it was me first. Then the others came one by one. So we built a vige and live together here. All of us thought that if we could increase our strength, we will be the strongest. But it seems like it¡¯s not enough,¡± the leader said.


    So he became the leader because he¡¯s the longest one to be here. I guess that¡¯s natural.


    In the end, they are just people who are obsessed with strength. Let¡¯s see if they know about the cult or not.


    ¡°You might have been here for more than a century, but does anyone know about the True God Cult?¡± I asked.


    I called it True God Cult because that¡¯s what the cult is calling themselves. And seeing their reaction after hearing the name should let me know if they know about it or not.


    It looks like they genuinely don¡¯t know about the cult. So I guess they are safe and not rted with the cult.


    ¡°I think I¡¯ve heard of it. Someone calling himself a priest tried to recruit me to join a cult or something. Though I don¡¯t know if that¡¯s the same cult as you spoke. Is there anything about it? Are you somehow trying to recruit us? If joining can make us as strong as you are, then I¡¯m interested,¡± one woman said


    The rest also agree to join the cult if they can get stronger.


    ¡°Fortunately, I¡¯m not. I just asked you about it to see your reaction. It seems like none of you are involved with the cult. That¡¯s good. Because that cult¡¯s goal is to destroy the world. Also, I called that cult Evil God Cult or Evil Cult. Because they are evil.¡±


    Then I exined more about the cult and the fact that we are in the middle of a war.


    And these people... they look excited instead after hearing that there¡¯s a huge war between the alliance of the kingdoms in this continent, against a very secretive cult.


    ¡°It¡¯s finally time to show our real strength! I¡¯m not satisfied enough with my strength, but this is the best time to act!¡±


    ¡°I haven¡¯t used magic for so long. Even before, I failed to do it. I guess I¡¯ll try to remember all my magic again.¡±


    ¡°FIGHT! THERE¡¯S A FIGHT!¡±


    Yup. They¡¯re all crazy. But now, can I get them to join us?


    ¡°So, which side do you want to join? Because if you want to join the cult, then I will kill you right here right now.¡±


    I let out a killing intent enough to stop them from being excited.


    They all stood still and just looked at me in fear.


    ¡°Umm... will we ever be as strong as you are?¡± someone asked me.


    ¡°Nope. Never. Watch this.¡±


    It¡¯s better to show them how strong I really am than having them hope that they can be as strong as I am.


    I pulled out the sword from the walking cane. Then facing the forest, I swung the sword down vertically.


    The ground split because of my attack. To show them the difference between us.


    ¡°...Amazing. I can do that but with earth magic. Yet he did it without magic. You didn¡¯t eat that fruit from before, right?¡±


    ¡°Nope. I didn¡¯t eat it yet. I¡¯m interested in it so I want someone I know to appraise it. Maybe it could be useful in the future. And since I know someone who is good with nts, I can ask them to grow more of thister,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay, that doesn¡¯t exin how you can do that. We have been training here for a long time but doing what you did is simply impossible. Tell us how.¡±


    That¡¯s what I intend to do. Since I don¡¯t think that they are with the cult, it¡¯s fine to show them my face.


    I remove the Blobbymask covering my face and everyone was shocked with how young I am.


    ¡°My name is Roy. I¡¯m an Aura user,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Aura user?¡±


    Yup. Everyone is confused. I guess they didn¡¯t read any children¡¯s stories here. Or maybe they forgot since they have been here for a long time without leaving.


    ¡°I¡¯ll exin more if you¡¯re going to join us fighting the cult. But even if you don¡¯t want to join either side, I need to bring you somewhere first,¡± I said.


    ¡°What about her? Is she an Aura user as well?¡± a woman asked me about Shelia.


    ¡°No. She¡¯s Shelia. A werewolf. I¡¯m a summoner and she¡¯s my familiar,¡± I said.


    ¡°She doesn¡¯t look like a werewolf at all. Is that your human form?¡± one man asked Shelia.


    ¡°Yes,¡± Shelia replied.


    For now, I¡¯ll just introduce Shelia as my familiar. Victoria can¡¯t transform here. And I think it¡¯s fine if I don¡¯t tell them that Ray is also my familiar. They will think that he¡¯s just a horse. A not very normal horse.


    ¡°So, you can¡¯t make us stronger, but you want us to join you?¡± the leader asked.


    Is strength the only thing they care about? That might be useful though.


    ¡°Do you guys know that there¡¯s at least one stage above master level?¡±


    And now everyone is curious. I¡¯m sure they are interested now that I mention it. I can at least bring them to meet Albert soon.


    I need to get Ang and the others toe as well for safety reason. They are ten master level mages whose physical strength can bepared to a trained werewolf. Not Shelia. She¡¯s way stronger than other werewolves.

 Chapter 762 - 762 Ten Master Level Mages as New Recruits

    762 Ten Master Level Mages as New Recruits


    ¡°T-there¡¯s a stage beyond master level?!¡±


    These people who seek strength above all else and even stayed here for a long time for it look excited. They finally heard something that they have never heard before. The fact that there are people who have reached a stage beyond master level.


    As for me, well, I was lucky to met one. Timmy. And his two harem members who died and turned into ghosts were able to teach us some lessons before they disappearance. So we know more than most people.


    Though if the Evil God was truly someone who have reached the stage beyond master level, and have some disciples to teach, the cult might have several mages beyond master level.


    Though from the look of it, seems like they didn¡¯t made the information public to the small fries. That¡¯s why none of the cult members we fought so far were impossible to defeat.


    Difficult to defeat? Yes they were. Some of them even injured some of our strongest members like Shelia. But it was still possible to defeat them. And that¡¯s what happened to them.


    If my guess is correct, then the real Archbishop, the one that Veronica and Celestine knew who could be talking to the Evil God directly, is already at that stage. That¡¯s why he can just appoint someone to be an Archbishop and let them roam free.


    But what if there¡¯s a pope above him before the Evil God? The fight ahead seems to be harder and harder now.


    Well, we just need to get stronger, find someone strong to help us and get them stronger as well, and defeat the cult before they get as strong as they were when they destroyed the worlds in my past life. Maybe before even I started participating in the war back then.


    .....


    Now that I think about it, we managed to fight decently at that time. I guess our side is pretty strong with Ang as the vanguard back then.


    And now, we are much stronger already. But we realize that the cult could be hiding their full force even now.


    Well, that¡¯s why I want these master level mages to join us right now. They might have been here for a long time and even forget how to use magic. But they are still strong people. And they have good teamwork as well. Though from now on, they probably need to learn to fight against human being rather than monster.


    ¡°Yes. I met one, and killed him. He¡¯s also an Aura Master. It was hard to kill him but I managed to do it in the end. And we managed to get two ghosts to teach us about magic so we can reach that stage one day. They were dead, yes. But they turned into ghosts so we can still chat for a while before they disappeared. So, do you want to learn magic from us and join us?¡± I ask them again if they¡¯re going to join us or not.


    ¡°I¡¯m in!¡±


    After the leader shouted that he will join, the rest also agree to join. Seems like I was right to offer them the chance to get stronger.


    ¡°But you do know that you will risk your lives by joining the war, right? And the opponents have been increasing their magic for a long time. They could be stronger than you all. Well, not physically at least. So, do you still want to join?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Of course it¡¯s natural to risk your life to get what you want! Even more if the world is at stake. There¡¯s no way we would let them destroy the world. But is it true that they are really trying to destroy the world?¡± the leader asked. Still not convinced that someone actually trying to destroy the world.


    ¡°I¡¯m the proof. I¡¯ll tell youter. I have someone I need to introduce to you. Get yourself ready and then get out of this ce to somewhere you can use magic. Shelia wille with you. I also have something I need to prepare so I take my leave first,¡± I said as I jumped on top of Ray.


    Then Ie to Shelia¡¯s side to tell her to kill anyone who tried to escape before leaving.


    It didn¡¯t take long before I leave the magicless area and opened a portal to Albert¡¯s location.


    There¡¯s no meeting with other countries today, but they are still doing it with their phones. I also checked the forum after I entered Albert¡¯s ce.


    ¡°Albert, ten master level mages who trained their bodies in the magicless area said that they¡¯re willing toe after I beat them up. I¡¯m going to bring them soon,¡± I said.


    ¡°...So you went to the magicless area, found ten master level mages, beat them up, and get them to join us? Do they truly want to join us?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°Once I told them that there¡¯s a stage beyond master level, they were so excited about it. They don¡¯t even know about Aura user. I think they are not with the cult but I can¡¯t be one hundred percent believe them. That¡¯s why, as usual, I will bring them to you. I also need to get Ang and the others toe as well for safety reason,¡± I said.


    ¡°Alright. Bring them to the Colosseum in Monsters World. We might need to test them. If they truly seek strength, then Ang is the best example for them to see how strong our strength is. They need to see how strong we are first,¡± he said.


    So while he¡¯s getting ready and even use the forum in the phone to tell the others, I grabbed Ang and the others who wants to see the ten master level mages.


    ...In the end, everyone who was here before during the friendly match are here. Except for the monsters who think that there won¡¯t be a fight.


    ¡°Whoa. This is Monsters World where summoners can go to?¡±


    ¡°Damn it! If only I didn¡¯t try to increase my summoning level to master level, I could have gotten at least one extra familiar after eating that fruit!¡±


    ¡°Hahaha! Shame on you! I¡¯m a tamer and I¡¯m happy to know about this world. Also, didn¡¯t your familiar died fifty years ago? You can still find one monster to make a contract with. Maybe a leader of a tribe like Roy¡¯s. That way, it would be better than just getting five random monsters.¡±


    I haven¡¯t asked them, but it seems like there¡¯s at least one summoner and one tamer. Well, isn¡¯t that great?


    ¡°Oh, Harry! Is that you, Harry? My nephew?!¡±


    Huh? One of the ten master level mages shouted excitedly at old man Henry.


    ¡°You¡¯re... No way! Are you Great Aunt Halley?¡±


    Wow. Old man Henry is rted to one of them? And she¡¯s his Great Aunt? Interesting.


    ¡°Great Aunt? Are you Harry¡¯s son then? No wonder you look so simr,¡± the muscr woman asked.


    ¡°Yes. Harry is my father. The previous king of Varadis. And I¡¯m the current king of Varadis, Henry.¡±


    Who would have thought that this would be a reunion?


    But at least we know that one of the ten is rted to a royalty. It should be easier for us to convince them to join.


    ¡°Oh, a king. Maybe there¡¯s someone here rted to the king of Kalman? I¡¯m not a royalty, but the king there was a good friend of mine. Though he died before I left,¡± a muscr old man asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, but Kalman kingdom was destroyed in a war around eighty years ago. And it became my territory now. I¡¯m the king of Tatrama, Albert. Nice to meet you,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°I see. My friends tried to bring peace to the kingdom. But other nobles wanted to fight instead and he ended up being poisoned. So I killed a lot of them before I started training. I guess it¡¯s no wonder that the kingdom is destroyed.¡±


    If he¡¯s already a master level mage at that time, then I guess it¡¯s normal.


    Don¡¯t bother with a friend of a powerful person. It¡¯s as simple as that.


    And the nobles of the destroyed kingdom didn¡¯t know that rule. So they died in the end.


    ¡°Okay, is there anyone else rted to a king or some important people in the past? You have been out for about one century. You must have missed a lot. Oh, Shirley. You¡¯re not busy anymore?¡± I asked Shirley whom I haven¡¯t met in a while.


    ¡°No. I took care of my job. And I¡¯m here to test my strength with a master level mage since I missed thest match,¡± she said.


    ¡°Well... that¡¯s forter. Is what I like to say. Those master level mages heard you and now they are interested in a fight. I guess we¡¯ll fight first,¡± I said.


    And so, a woman, one of the ten fought with Shirley. She is stronger than most master level mage. Even more with her physical strength.


    But since she can¡¯t use destructive magic because Shirley keep interrupting her, and she never learned about magic control, she ended up losing.


    And that loss only make all ten people became more interested in joining. Especially seeing how an expert level mage defeating a master level mage. which should be impossible in their time.


    Well, this make things easier. I guess they are just people who seek strength. Show them how strong we are, and they will join. Simple.

 Chapter 763 - 763 Another Village

    763 Another Vige


    Not just Shirley. We also let the others to fight the master level mages.


    And hearing that there are fight, the monsters started gathering. And some master level mage who are still going to train their physical strength asked the werewolves to fight them. Without magic. Only pure physical strength.


    It was interesting. They could fight almost equally against the werewolves without using magic. Maybe after they got defeated by us, they learned how to fight against human-sized enemy.


    Though they did it with those shabby knives. I¡¯ll get someone to make them weaponter. If I give them Blobbies, the weapon created will have low durability. And after a few sh, those Blobbyweapons will be destroyed.


    I can use Blobbies just fine since I can cover them with my Aura. But those master level mages can¡¯t.


    While they take a break and some other people and monsters want to fight, we told them about many things. Including what an Aura is.


    ¡°I was told that it would be difficult for older people who have gotten ustomed with magic to learn Aura. Especially if their magic level are high. So I suggest that you don¡¯t try to learn Aura. But if you want it, I can only tell you to keep doing what you¡¯re doing and train your body. If you¡¯re lucky, you can probably learn Aura. But if you want to progress with your magic and surpass master level, I suggest you don¡¯t try to learn Aura. You can still train your body, but focus more on your magic.¡±


    That¡¯s the only advice I can give to them who are still looking to learn about Aura. But I guess I don¡¯t need to to worry.


    After their loses against expert level mages, they realized that they still don¡¯t know everything about magic. Forget about the stage beyond master level. They want to learn magic control first.


    .....


    And their current goal is to defeat Ang. Our strongest mage.


    Ang herself is willing to ept their challenge. So it¡¯s a win-win situation since Ang can keep growing stronger. Though I think that Ang will never lose.


    It¡¯s not just Ang who is willing to fight them. The others also agree to ept their challenge.


    And when someone from the ten master level mages challenged other master level mages we recruited, the fight was close to equal. Because the new recruits learn more about magic control than the ten of them. But those ten managed to keep up with their physical strength.


    For any normal master level mage, just being hit by a small magic by a master level mage will knock them out. Though they had barriers on so it takes time until the magic can hit them.


    But for these ten people, even after their barriers are broken, it needs more than ten hits until they got knocked down. What a crazy bunch of people.


    ¡°So, are there only ten of you?¡± I asked after we told them everything and they decided to join us. Albert has confirmed that they can be trusted so it¡¯s great.


    ¡°There were more. But once in a while, there are strong monsters that we can¡¯t handle with our physical strength. And it was toote for us to eat these grapes. So some people were killed. That¡¯s only in our vige. Back in the past, we had a rivalry with another vige in the magicless area. But it has been decades since we met so I don¡¯t know their fate,¡± Halley, old man Henry¡¯s great aunt, said that.


    ¡°So there could be more than one vige over there. Do you know where it is? I¡¯d like to check. Maybe they woulde and help us,¡± I said.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think you need to do that. Unlike us who want to get stronger by living there, they are those who escaped to that ce. They are also master level mages, but they did crimes and being chased by other master level mages before taking refugee in that ce. Maybe they have left. Anyway, they are the kind who would betray you without batting an eyelid. If you want, I can tell you where they were. But I still won¡¯t rmend you to recruit them,¡± Halley said.


    Well, I guess I¡¯ll go there and kill anyone I see then.


    ¡°I will still go there. Maybe if they¡¯re no longer there, they have gone somewhere else. If it¡¯s to the kingdom, it will be bad. Even worse if they join the cult. Albert, I¡¯ll bring everyone back now. Get ready since I mighte to your location at any timeter. As for you guys... where do you want to go?¡± I asked the ten master level mages.


    ¡°I¡¯ll go back to Varadis. It¡¯s been a long time since I¡¯ve been there and I¡¯m curious on everything I missed. And I may not join the fight. If Henry is truly a good king like what everyone said, it¡¯s best for him to increase his lifespan by reaching at least master level. I¡¯ll be his personal tutor while also learning magic control from his daughter,¡± Halley said.


    ¡°As for us, well, it seems like we don¡¯t have any ce to return anymore. We¡¯ll go to Cassau with Ang and the others and learn more about everything we missed before we decide our own goals,¡± the leader of the ten said.


    ¡°Okay. Here are your phones. Everyone will register their contact on your phones before I return you all home. And this is Victoria¡¯s clone. I call it Blobby. If you have this with you, as long as you are not in a ce where magic is restricted, I can open a portal to your location. And this is Sonia¡¯s soil. If you have this with you, you can call Sonia. She¡¯s the ghost over there,¡± I said.


    They have been introduced to the everyone. Including Victoria who was just an earring when they met.


    They are master level mages, so they probably could sense Victoria before. But she was too small and weak so they didn¡¯t think much about her. They only thought that my presence was weird.


    They are good. I have some magic weapons that they could use. Maybe I¡¯ll give them those weapons instead of making weapons for them.


    After they learned how to use the phone, I brought everyone back to Earth. With Halley joining old man Henry and the other nine people going to Cassau.


    Oh, by the way, I have opened several branch of clothing stores in other ces. The girls I brought back from Monsters World are happily working there. And they made me richer.


    Though I think most of the money is going to Sam. Well, she¡¯s doing her best so it¡¯s fine.


    Even if she got more money, she has a huge business. She no longer stays next to my ce. She has an entire mansion for her and her husband in the capital now. I heard that Ruby visits often.


    She spends money almost as much as she gained them as she keeps looking for some more business to expand. While I spend money mostly on stuffs I needed. Though my money is also being used by the girls.


    It doesn¡¯t matter as long as she didn¡¯t do anything bad with the money she made.


    Yesterday when I met her, she was pregnant. And she only found out about it after I told her and her husband, Jeremy. The appraiser that Albert assigned to me who worked for her and in the end, they got married.


    That will be the heir of a sessful merchant. I¡¯m sure with the right upbringing, he will be at least as sessful as his mother in the future.


    Anyway, after I brought everyone back, I returned back to the magicless area. And from where the vige of the previous ten people was, I move to where they told me the other vige is.


    Riding on Ray, it didn¡¯t take much time for us to get there. Still with Shelia in her human form and Victoria as my earring.


    ¡°I see it. That¡¯s the other vige here.¡±


    The vige is almost gone. Only the remains of the building that hasn¡¯t been taken care of for a long time is there. I¡¯m sure this ce has been abandoned for a long time already.


    ¡°There¡¯s a faint scent of a human,¡± Shelia suddenly said.


    ¡°Follow the scent. Maybe we could find something,¡± I said.


    I couldn¡¯t see anything, but Shelia can somehow smell something. So after following the track to where the scent lead us, I finally see something.


    A human. And it¡¯s not a stranger.


    He¡¯s the agent who was supposed to be investigating the city that is being surrounded by the magicless area.


    ¡°Hey! Wake up!¡±


    He¡¯s still alive. But his heartbeat is getting weaker.


    I treat him with first aid since I can¡¯t get him out of this ce right away.


    ¡°Damn it. We¡¯ll stop the investigation here. Let¡¯s go back and get Ka to treat him,¡± I said.


    One thing for sure, we might be quite lucky. He still has his phone. So maybe whoever did this to him don¡¯t think that it¡¯s not anything special. Just a weird ck mirror for them.


    Let¡¯s get him healed first and ask him how he ended up this way. As for the other agent, I can only hope that he¡¯s doing fine.

 Chapter 764 - 764 A Weretiger Knocked Him Out

    764 A Weretiger Knocked Him Out


    I need to make a decision here. Should I bring this agent out of this magicless area from the closest location to where we can start using magic, or we should go to the opposite side of it?


    If we go to the closest ce here, there¡¯s a chance that we might get found out by someone. Or maybe something. I don¡¯t know yet about who this agent was fighting before.


    Seeing from his injuries, most of them were from blunt object and few scratches from sharp object. My guess is the opponent was a monster. But if there¡¯s a mage who wanted to test his or her own strength on the agent by hitting him and shing a weapon at him, then it¡¯s a human. But it could also be a monster.


    Monsters would be easier to handle. We can just kill them. Even if they are contracted monsters to a tamer and the tamer will notice that their monsters were killed, we can just disguise ourselves as a monster.


    But if the enemy is human, this person might retreat as soon as whoever it is noticed our presence.


    What if we try to escape to the center of this circle of magicless area to where the city is, and someone is blocking us? Even if they are not blocking us, as soon as they notice our presences, they could quickly retreat or fire a signal to the sky to alert the others.


    If it¡¯s someone else, they would be killed. But if it¡¯s me, I would kill them instead. And if they realize that they are weaker than me too soon, they will retreat and alert the others.


    I guess my only option is by going to the opposite side. It¡¯s much safer to go there.


    For Ray, carrying three people on his back is easy. And we left the magicless after a while.


    .....


    I instantly opened a portal back to Cassau. Back home where Ka is.


    When I enter the portal, everyone is in the dining room. Including the nine master level mages who are being introduced to the kids since one of them is in Varadis. Seems like they can get along with kids quickly. Or maybe because they haven¡¯t met a kid for a hundred years.


    ¡°Ka, heal him,¡± I said after I cleaned a table for the agent toy on.


    ¡°Who is he?¡± one of the nine master level mages asked.


    ¡°An agent who was supposed to be investigating the city in the center of the magicless area. I found him injured and unconscious in the vige you told me about,¡± I said.


    Ka then healed the agent. While someone is watching her curiously. He¡¯s someone who has reached master level in his healing element. A master level healer.


    ¡°Oh, that is quick. So with magic control, you can heal someone faster. And if you learn about human¡¯s body, you can just focus on the injury alone instead of healing his whole body. It¡¯s faster and more efficient. Though for me, healing everyone in an instant is faster. But if it¡¯s to heal a single individual, I guess this is the best choice to do it,¡± he said.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. Though I can¡¯t regenerate missing limb like a master level mage yet,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°That¡¯s true. I can only do it after I reached master level in my healing element. But even then, it needs me to use magic on the patient for weeks just to regenerate a single thumb. But if I learned magic control, I think it can be done faster,¡± he said.


    So it¡¯s true that a master level mage can regenerate lost limbs. But it needs weeks for a single thumb? I guess I will continue keeping my limbs intact.


    ¡°What about death? Can a healer revive the dead?¡± Ang asked curiously.


    ¡°Obviously no. If you are dead, then there¡¯s nothing we can do. That¡¯s it,¡± the master level healer said.


    ¡°What about consciousness? Can you wake him up with healing magic?¡± I asked after seeing that Ka has finished with the treatment.


    ¡°No. In the end, healing magic is only for healing. We just need to wait until he wakes up,¡± he said.


    But I don¡¯t want to wait. Let¡¯s quickly wake him up then.


    ¡°WAKE UP!¡±


    I shouted while also pinching his arm. With the pain and the shout, he should be awake soon.


    ¡°AAAAAH! I¡¯m awake! Where is this?¡±


    Yup. Pain is the simplest way to wake someone up.


    ¡°I found you in an abandoned vige in the magicless area. Covered with injuries. Tell me what happened.¡±


    He then quickly checked the surrounding. Other than the nine people he doesn¡¯t know, he recognize us all. Seeing that I can speak about it in front of the nine people, he realized that they are not enemies.


    ¡°Can you bring me to His Majesty? I¡¯ll say what I¡¯ve seen there,¡± he said.


    I have texted Albert that an agent that was sent to investigate was injured. It was back when Ka was healing the agent.


    And just as the agent said that, my phone rung. Albert is calling me.


    ¡°What happened to him?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°He¡¯s awake now. I¡¯m bringing him to you right away. He said that he¡¯s going to talk in your presence,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. Bring him in.¡±


    With Albert¡¯s permission, I opened a portal to his location. I guess now I don¡¯t need Sonia to contact the others before I opened a portal to their location.


    Not just me and the agent entering. Everyone also entered including the curious nine master level mages.


    There, the agent told us what happened.


    They were being careful. But in the end, they are still newly promoted expert level mages. They didn¡¯t expect to encounter a master level mage there.


    Of course they did act as nned. Pretending that they were hunters doing a request by a noble. And it worked. At least the agent thought so.


    They told the master level mage that they were being chased by a monster in the magicless area.


    The master level mage was suspicious at first. Especially seeing two hunters acting polite since hunters are usually rough people. But the two just told him that seeing someone walking around casually near the magicless area, that man shouldn¡¯t be anything normal.


    So the man brought them to the city. At least pretended to.


    All of a sudden, a monster came and attacked them. Only the agents. Not the master level mage.


    The two tried to kill the monster while the master level mage just watching. He might be a tamer.


    The monster was a weretiger. Like a werewolf, but this time a tiger. I guess that¡¯s how he got the bruises and scratches.


    Hearing the enemy is a weretiger, Shelia became interested with the story. As for me, I¡¯m curious to see if that weretiger is willing to join the cult or being forced.


    I¡¯m interested if there are a tribe of weretigers that can possibly join us in the fight. But I won¡¯t expect too much of it.


    Anyway, one of the agent got knocked out by the weretiger. This guy tried to save him, but the weretiger was too strong. So he chose to run away. Hoping that the fainted agent would wake up and continue with the mission alone while he¡¯s distracting the weretiger.


    And that¡¯s how he ended up in that ce. Seeing how the injures were bad but not life-threatening, that weretiger must have yed with him with no intention to kill him.


    ¡°So, how did you figure out that he¡¯s a master level mage?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°He said it himself. And he was too calm when we detected his presences. I assume that¡¯s because he noticed us beforehand,¡± he said.


    The weretiger didn¡¯t destroy the magic items in the agent¡¯s body. Like the phone, Sonia¡¯s soil, or Blobby.


    ¡°What about the Blobby?¡± Albert asked me.


    ¡°Hmm... I can connect to my clones over there. So we can assume that they don¡¯t know about m clones,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Once he wakes up and noticed that we are separated, he should contact me or His Majesty. But I haven¡¯t received any text from him,¡± the agent said.


    That means that he might still be unconscious. Or his phone is in someone¡¯s hand.


    The agent then tried to call the other agent. But no one picked it up.


    ¡°What will you do when the phone was ringing while it¡¯s in someone else¡¯s hand?¡± I asked the agent.


    ¡°There shouldn¡¯t be any problem. I made the phone so they won¡¯t ring or even vibrate if someone else other than the registered owner is holding it. And the agent must have set it to silent mode since he¡¯s on a mission,¡± Marie said.


    Then it¡¯s still safe at least.


    ¡°Well, I guess it¡¯s about time I investigate it myself, right? I¡¯ll stop checking on the magicless area and go to the city then. After two hours of nap. If the agent contacted you before I leave, tell me,¡± I said.


    Before, it was a cat-man. Now, it¡¯s a weretiger. Maybe next is lion.


    Shelia can¡¯t wait to go there, so she asked my permission to go there by herself. It¡¯s only a few hours of run for her from Cassau. But I still lent her Ray so she can get there sooner.


    By the way, when my familiar is inside the magicless area, I won¡¯t be able to summon them to my location. I can¡¯t even open a portal there. So I told her to be careful since I can¡¯t save her when she¡¯s inside.


    Also, when my familiars is inside the magicless area, although I felt that the connection between us is lost, they are still my familiars. So I can¡¯t make a contract with another monster while they are still alive. And I will know if they die since the contract will be broken. Though it¡¯s good that I can know that without having my familiars died.

 Chapter 765 - 765 We Won’t Save Him

    765 We Won¡¯t Save Him


    After taking a nap, I got a text from Albert to meet him before I check on the missing agent¡¯s condition. So I opened a portal to his location and hear what he¡¯s going to say.


    ¡°The agent is still alive at least. He contacted my phone and let it on so I could hear his conversation with other people there. But it was just for five minutes since someone suddenlye and he stopped the call,¡± Albert said.


    So that guy is still healthy enough to call Albert. But maybe the act of calling Albert made a reaction to a master level mage¡¯s magic detection and so he needed to stop it before they realized what happened.


    ¡°There was someone over there who was trying to heal him. So he talked to him while also talking to himself. He stopped the call when he heard that someone wasing so I don¡¯t know the full detail. But I will tell you what he said before the call ended,¡± Albert said.


    At least we have a new information that could be important before trespassing into the enemy¡¯s territory.


    When the agent fought the weretiger, he pretended to not have enough mana. He was a good actor so he pretended to be in panic and even started throwing stones at the weretiger before he lost his consciousness. Though he missed because he was panicked. But even if he didn¡¯t miss, some stones won¡¯t do any harm to a monster.


    ¡°Throwing stones? Is that stone what I¡¯m thinking?¡±


    There¡¯s only one thing that an agent who was trained to be calm at all time to do. It¡¯s to not let panic set in and make an error in his judgement.


    So the stones that he threw, at least one of them, is a Blobby. And I can just go there directly if needed. And instead of opening a portal to the agent¡¯s location, I should go to where he threw the Blobby at. It should be safer this way.


    .....


    ¡°Most likely. He was with someone so he can¡¯t say everything. But there¡¯s no need to tell anyone about throwing stones. So he must be talking about Victoria¡¯s clones.¡±


    But he was fighting against a weretiger before. Or should I say getting himself beaten up by one?


    If I open a portal there, the weretiger could be there already. Though Shelia seems to be going his way. She wants to fight him.


    A werewolf against a weretiger. Using animalparison of a wolf and a tiger, a tiger is stronger individually. Usually at least. From what I know.


    If they fight inside the magicless area, the weretiger might have the advantage over Shelia. So Shelia needed to fight it outside the magicless area.


    Right now, she¡¯s still on the way to the magicless area. Ray should have taken her there soon. But somehow, she¡¯s still only on the way. I know that from telepathy with her.


    (Shelia, where are you?) I asked via telepathy.


    (I¡¯m fighting some bandits. They think that I¡¯m just a weak woman since I¡¯m still in my human form. I let Ray leave since I want to fight by myself. You can summon him to your own location)


    I guess that¡¯s to be expected of her. Since she loves fighting, there¡¯s only a few times that she get away from a fight. And those were because I ordered her to. So when a group of bandits approached her, she will stop.


    At least it¡¯s good that she¡¯s not in the magicless area yet.


    (After you finish with the bandits, just wait for me there. I¡¯ll use portal to get through the magicless area as soon as possible. I have asked Ray to meet up with you)


    After I finished talking with Shelia, I looked at Albert again.


    ¡°Is there anything else I need to know? There should be more than just throwing stones, right?¡±


    Then Albert told me everything else that the agent said before the call got ended.


    It was just a five minutes call, so he couldn¡¯t just tell us everything. So we had Sonia with us topare both their view of the city.


    The agent was located in a church in the city where he was being healed. Since it¡¯s a church, it must be worshiping the Evil God.


    ¡°Yes. There¡¯s a church in that city. When I looked at it from above. If it¡¯s a church, it should be that ce. It was right next to a ce where they keep their monsters. Though I didn¡¯t see any weretiger before,¡± she said.


    ¡°And it¡¯s also possible that they started patrolling because they saw you in the city. That¡¯s how they meet the agents. Maybe Roy should wait a few days before going there,¡± Albert suggested.


    ¡°So I need to wait more? I guess I will have to explore the magicless area again. We sure love to dy everything,¡± I said.


    Not just this mission. But also back then when we were nning for the tournament. It took a while until we could finalized the tournament and proceed with it.


    The agent over there regained his consciousness while the master level mage was carrying him to the city so he could see a bit before he entered the church where he got healed. Of course the master level mage pretended to be weaker than master level.


    It was most likely true that it was him who sent the weretiger to split the two agents. Once they split up, he brought one of them to the city to interrogate. Under the guise of trying to get to know the agent better.


    The agent sensed that there are several mages surrounding the church when he entered. And when he called Albert with his phone, he sensed that some people including the healer in front of him reacted.


    Though it was lucky that the healer is not a master level mage since it was the master level mage who noticed that it was the agent who used magic.


    ¡°What do you think, Roy?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°I think that they also want to recruit the agent to join the cult. He¡¯s an expert level mage, right? And the cult who have lost so many people are in need of powerful mage. And if they fail to recruit him, he will be killed. I don¡¯t think he will betray us, but if the cult have someone who can brainwash him, it would be dangerous,¡± I said.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think there¡¯s a need to worry about it. He willmit suicide if someone is trying to approach him like that. You¡¯ve seen the inside of the agents¡¯ mouth, right?¡±


    As Albert said, I¡¯ve seen it. Simr to the cult, they have something in their mouth. And it¡¯s not a magic item that will explode once activated like the cult does. Because if it was, then I would have killed them thinking that they might be from the cult.


    Those were poison. And they just need to bite the small container and drink the poison if they want to kill themselves. So if anyone approached him and try to brainwash him, he would drink the poison first.


    I wonder who suggested such things. To think that they prepared it in case of being brainwashed.


    The question is whether the agent can tell if the people around him can use brainwash magic or not. Because if he couldn¡¯t tell, he won¡¯t notice that he has been brainwashed.


    Though if he¡¯s wrong and think that other mages can brainwash him, he will just kill himself in the end. So that¡¯s fin. Though it won¡¯t be good for us as well since we will lose one capable agent.


    ¡°Since we¡¯re dying my investigation to that city, does it mean we will let him die?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I hope that won¡¯t be the case, but yeah. Everyone realized the importance of what we needed to do. Everyone is risking their lives in the fight against the cult. So we will just wait until further contact with him. Let¡¯s wait two days before you go there if there¡¯s no more contact. By that time, let¡¯s assume that he has been brainwashed and manipted,¡± Albert said.


    I guess we need to be strict like this. It¡¯s for the greater good.


    It¡¯s great that there¡¯s no one here want to y as a hero and tries to save everyone. We¡¯re all gathering here to save the world. Not to save every single person we see.


    If such person exist here, he woulde to save the agent even by himself. And he will ruin all our ns.


    If someone ask, I will say it again. We don¡¯t need heroes. We need warriors.


    Let¡¯s just get every leader of a country in the alliance get the credit. There¡¯s no need for a single individual to be worshiped as hero. Even me who is the strongest or Ang who everyone thinks as the strongest mage.


    All we need to do is to destroy the cult. Though maybe we can let someone be the target of everyone¡¯s respect. But I¡¯m sure it won¡¯t be me.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll go and tell Shelia about it. We will investigate more about the magicless area and see if we can find the weretiger. We¡¯ll check the abandoned vige first. I¡¯ll contact youter then.¡±

 Chapter 766 - 766 Found More Fruits

    766 Found More Fruits


    ¡°So we¡¯re not saving him?¡±


    As soon as I reunited with Shelia, I informed her that we won¡¯t save the agent who got knocked out by the weretiger. She looked sad after hearing it.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. You just want to fight the weretiger, right? For now, we will check on the abandoned vige where the other agent was found. If there¡¯s still a trace of the agent there, maybe you can find where the agent was when he fought the weretiger. But we will just focus on the magicless area and not leaving it. Let¡¯s hope that we can get the weretiger in the magicless area,¡± I said.


    If Shelia wants a fight, then she can have it. I will help. It¡¯s for her to get stronger after all.


    Maybe we can stay inside the magicless area and find the weretiger. Then we will lure it to the other side of the magicless area so we won¡¯t get closer to the city inside, while also letting Shelia and the weretiger to fight however they want.


    ¡°Shelia. If we find the weretiger, we will lure him out of the magicless area so you can fight freely. Let¡¯s get you to fight in Monsters World as well. Maybe the weretiger is forced to be under contract. If it¡¯s a tamed monster, then the cult also won¡¯t be able to take it back as well,¡± I suggested.


    ¡°Alright. That¡¯s a good idea. Let¡¯s do it then,¡± she said.


    ¡°But we won¡¯t chase it if it goes into the city. We will just continue in the magicless area,¡± I said.


    Even in her human form, she is still a werewolf. So she still has her amazing sense of smell, which was proven by how she found the previous agent in the abandoned vige before I could see him with my Divine Vision.


    .....


    Then we ride on Ray¡¯s back together and return to the abandoned vige. It still look the same as a few hours ago. I guess no one was here.


    ¡°There¡¯s no other remaining scent here other than ours from before. I¡¯ll go check where that guy was found. There should be a remain of the weretiger if that monster attacked him physically,¡± Shelia said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t get too far from me. When my scent is getting fainter, return to my side,¡± I said to her before she leaves.


    I checked the vige to see if there¡¯s anything here. I¡¯m not as detailed as an agent in investigation, but I still can do more than average person at least.


    There are several buildings in this vige. Former buildings since they were never maintained at all.


    Everything here was built with logs. So only wooden building. And all the logs have be rotten. That¡¯s how the buildings crumbled. The support became so weak after so long.


    There¡¯s nothing here. It has been abandoned for decades it seems. And the most likely location they go to is the city in the middle.


    I don¡¯t think I will find anything else here.


    Oh, wait! I see a fruit on a tree here. That¡¯s the fruit that looks like a grape and allow someone to use magic in this ce.


    After I brought the ten master level mages to the Monsters World, I also asked them to give the elves those fruits to see if the elves can grow them. and the elves¡¯ response was positive.


    It might not be much, but this could be useful. Because there are other ces where magic can¡¯t be used.


    We are still appraising it to see if there are other effect of the fruit. But from what the master level mages, there is no side effect at all.


    I guess it¡¯s fine to eat it now then. It¡¯s just one.


    The duration on how long I can use magic won¡¯t be long. Just a few minutes if I only eat one. But that could be life-saving minute.


    I ate one and after a few second, I feel that I can use magic again.


    I tried using air magic for breathing, and then I threw Victoria away and summoned her back here using portal.


    It¡¯s weird that I opened a portal only for an earring, but it¡¯s fine. Although the earring doesn¡¯t have legs, it can still move like a slime. I guess that¡¯s because the earring is originally a slime.


    ¡°Was it necessary for you to throw me?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°No. But it¡¯s faster than if I put you somewhere and get away from you. If we find anymore fruit, you will eat it. I think that you eating that fruit is more effective than me eating that fruit in this ce. But let¡¯s find out more if we find any,¡± I said.


    If Victoria consume the fruit, then during that short moment, she can transform into something else. Though I need to tell her directly what she needs to transform into since we can¡¯t use telepathy here. We need both of us to eat the fruit if we want to use telepathy.


    Also, I need Ray to eat one as well. He can be faster if he can use magic.


    The more fruits we have, the better. I guess it will be fine since the elves are breeding it. It won¡¯t be long until we can eat them. I hope.


    Now, where is Shelia? Oh, she¡¯s still in my sight. Since there¡¯s nothing else to see here, let¡¯s follow her.


    ¡°Ray, let¡¯s go.¡±


    I put Victoria earring back on my ear again and then jumped on Ray¡¯s back to look for Shelia.


    ¡°Shelia, did you find it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I found a scent that I don¡¯t recognize. Maybe it¡¯s from the weretiger,¡± she said.


    ¡°Weretiger should also have a good sense of smell, right? When you find it, just stay still and don¡¯t get any closer. Let it chase after you and lure it so we can trap the weretiger and bring it to Monsters World,¡± I said.


    ¡°I know. But it might have transformed into a regr tiger form. If you see any tiger, it might be the weretiger,¡± she said.


    Oh, right. That¡¯s also a monster. So instead of staying in its weretiger form, it can change into a regr human form or a regr tiger form.


    Though so far, I didn¡¯t see any other human or tiger in the area. And so, while Shelia is following the trace, I keep checking the surrounding to see if there¡¯s anything else to find.


    We found three more fruits. So I had each of them given to each familiar here.


    Ray can now run faster and even run in the air. I guess he used magic for it. Unlike me who can use Aura to run on air.


    Well, Ray can¡¯t use Aura. He can only share Aura that he contain.


    Victoria said that he¡¯s like a portable charger. He can¡¯t use it on himself, but he can share his Aura and magic to others.


    Next is Victoria. As I expected, she can transform in that few minutes. And after the duration is over, her form will be thest form that she transformed into.


    ¡°...But why a nose ring?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Moo and I will answer your question,¡± she said jokingly.


    ¡°Quack!¡± I quacked like a duck.


    ¡°That¡¯s not a moo so I won¡¯t answer,¡± she said.


    Now what? If I find another fruit, I will put it on my nose. Unless I¡¯m going to risk getting my nose wounded by pulling the ring out forcefully. Even if she didn¡¯t pierce my nose, it¡¯s so tight that I¡¯m sure I will lose my nose if I pull it forcefully.


    I hope we can find another fruit before we encounter anyone.


    As for Shelia, I told her to keep it in case she needs to fight a weretiger or other creatures in this magicless area. We don¡¯t know if we will find it or not.


    After walking a while, I found another fruit. So I put it on my nose and now I have an eyepatch. It¡¯s better than a nose ring, but why?


    ¡°Arrrr... you seriously asking me that?¡± Victoria asked.


    Why the ent though?


    Well, an eyepatch doesn¡¯t bother me much so it¡¯s fine. And it¡¯s also useful if I want to trick my opponent. Making them think that I have a blindspot when I can still see fine even if both eyes are closed.


    I can use Divine Vision at all time now because I¡¯m riding on Ray. Although he can¡¯t share his magic he can still share his Aura and charge mine. So I don¡¯t need to worry about headache if I use Divine Vision for too long.


    ¡°The smell is getting closer,¡± Shelia said.


    I used Divine Vision and I can see a male human in the forest. He also seem to have noticed us since he¡¯s downwind. Our scent is being carried by the wind to his location.


    ¡°Shelia, this is enough. He noticed us and started to follow us. Let¡¯s slowly get out of this magicless area and lure him out. If possible, let¡¯s bring him to Monsters World. There you can fight however you want after we ask him some questions,¡± I said.


    Shelia with a smile on her face followed me out of this ce. She can¡¯t wait for the fight.

 Chapter 767 - 767 Luring the Weretiger Out of the Magicless Area

    767 Luring the Weretiger Out of the Magicless Area


    ¡°Did he find us already?¡± Shelia asked.


    I used Divine Vision to see behind us and see the previous man was following us slowly. He¡¯s not chasing us quickly. Just using the same speed as us to make us think that no one is following us.


    ¡°He can see us and is now following us. Just like you, his human transformation seem to be really good. If he didn¡¯t notice us with his sense of smell, I would never thought that he¡¯s a monster,¡± I said.


    Back when he noticed us, it was because he was downwind. Our scents were being carried by the wind to his location. So he knows.


    I¡¯m sure it was because of the smell and not because he saw us or because he heard us. We¡¯re making sure that we¡¯re in a hidden spot and not making any sound at all. So it must be the smell.


    And there¡¯s no human who can smell another creature from far away. Unless they are Aura user who learned Aura ability that let their sense of smell get stronger. Or maybe a beastform mage.


    But beastform mage can¡¯t use magic here. And unlike Victoria, they can¡¯t just transform into their beast form or hybrid form before entering the magicless area so their form will stay. It somehow doesn¡¯t work that way for them.


    I know that because one of the ten master level mages who joined us is a beastform as well. Though it was not his beastform that has reached master level. It was his taming element. And he also has an element that only reached expert level even after cultivating so long. That¡¯s why he gave up on it and only focus more on his physical strength.


    I don¡¯t know what animal he¡¯s transforming to. He didn¡¯t even used it on the match against the werewolves. He only used his physical strength to see if he could be on par against a werewolf.


    .....


    The result was quite surprising. They were equal. Though the werewolf still won in the end.


    That tamer asked the werewolf if he wanted to be tamed. But the werewolf refused. Unless it¡¯s my order since I¡¯m the king.


    There¡¯s no need to tame our own ally. It won¡¯t increase the number.


    Anyway, that tamer who was also a beastform mage entered this magicless area for the first time in his animal form. But when magic was blocked, he returned to his original human form. Different from Victoria who stayed in herst form she used before she enters.


    So, even if beastform mage who transformed into an animal with a great sense of smell is here, his sense of smell will be the same as average human¡¯s sense of smell since magic can¡¯t be used.


    So, the one chasing us must be a monster that can transform into a human form. And since Shelia said that his scent is simr to the scent that remained in the abandoned vige, he could be the weretiger we¡¯re looking for.


    He followed us while we¡¯re moving slowly. We¡¯re pretending that we don¡¯t know that someone is following us.


    And when we left the magicless area, the weretiger finally make his move.


    He increased his speed and stopped in front of us to block the way.


    He must be thinking that he can kill us easily if he can use magic. But he¡¯s wrong.


    As soon as he appeared in front of us, I quickly opened a portal to Monsters World, grabbed his head, and throw him into the portal. Then we entered as well.


    ...We have been going to the Colosseum in the Monsters World so many times in the past few days. I¡¯m sure the werewolves are excited to see that Shelia will be facing a weretiger.


    ¡°...You noticed me and luring me here?¡± the weretiger asked.


    As soon as I threw him into the portal, he transformed into his weretiger form mid air andnded perfectly on his feet even though I tried to get himnd head first. He¡¯s just like the cat-man. Or maybe even better since he¡¯s a real weretiger.


    Shelia might have some problem fighting him.


    ¡°Are you a monster who is under contract with a mage from the city inside the magicless area?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Why ask when we¡¯re going to fight?¡±


    ¡°Just to see if this will be a deathmatch where we have to kill you or we can get you out of there and you can live however you want. Though if you¡¯re under contract, I guess it¡¯s normal for you to stay in that magicless area,¡± I said.


    Since he¡¯s in magicless area, he doesn¡¯t have to obey his master¡¯s order and can live freely.


    Maybe there¡¯s even a vige full of monsters under contract who stayed there so they don¡¯t have to obey someone¡¯s order.


    ¡°I thought that I could defeat you in an instant so I don¡¯t need to stay out for too long. Right now, the one who forced me to be under him realized that I¡¯m out and ordered me toe to him. But he doesn¡¯t know where I am so it¡¯s fine. He will soon order me to kill anyone I see though. Or at least capture someone. Just like one of the two hunters I found today,¡± he said.


    ¡°I see. They are myrades. And that¡¯s why we¡¯re investigating about you. I guess a fight to the death can¡¯t be avoided. So, if you hate your master, tell us everything you know. As a reward, we will try our best to fulfill your wishes. I¡¯m sure I can grant you your wish if you wish to die in battle. If you want to be free though, I can do that. But it will take time,¡± I said.


    ¡°Alright. He¡¯s trying to force me to fight soon. Stop me so we have time to chat.¡±


    I used the cane and drew a circle around him. Then I activated the barrier. This should be enough tost an hour at least. Though that depend on how strong he is.


    I also called Albert and brought him here. This way, we know if the weretiger is speaking the truth.


    And the weretiger tried to say everything. While trying to break out of the barrier I made.


    Tamed monsters, just like summoned monsters, can use telepathy. And I think that the previous master level mage that the agents met should be at least expert level tamer. So he could contact the weretiger all the way here even if he¡¯s not a summoner.


    But telepathy works both way. The master can give order to their monsters via telepathy, and the monsters have to do it. But for the monsters, they can decide if they want to contact their master via telepathy or not. Though if the master force them to speak, the monsters will speak.


    Once in a while, I also hear Shelia¡¯s and Graham¡¯s report when I didn¡¯t summon them for a while. Hearing what they¡¯re doing and what they found in Monsters World. And I don¡¯t need to be the one contacting them first.


    The weretiger told us that there¡¯s an entire vige of weretigers in the magicless area. But when he got tamed, he entered the magicless area so the master¡¯s order doesn¡¯t need to be obeyed. And it will be suicidal for the master to enter magicless area and confront the weretiger even if he¡¯s a master level mage.


    So, even though the weretiger is tamed, he still live freely as long as he¡¯s inside the magicless area.


    And after he got tamed, he told the other weretigers to leave the vige and leave no trace so he won¡¯t be able to chase after them in case the master ordered him to get them.


    He knows that he can¡¯t disobey the master. But once in the past, there was a weretiger who got tamed. But that one was lucky to lure the master to the magicless area and kill him.


    Anyway, the weretiger is now living alone in the wild and only roam in the magicless area unless his master is killed. Though he left the magicless area once in a while when his hunting ground has no more prey. As for the city, he doesn¡¯t know much about it. He only obeyed his master¡¯s order.


    ¡°So, you don¡¯t need to fight to death, right? We can just return you back to the magicless area and you can wait there until your master die. We also have a mission to kill anyone rted to the cult which your master seem to be in. So sooner orter, we can kill him. I know I can because I¡¯m already stronger than any average master level mages. And even if he has monsters with him, I have werewolves here who are following me. They are not tools. They are warriors,¡± I said.


    ¡°Well, that would be great. But I also want to fight a werewolf and see who is the stronger one. I can¡¯t fight my instinct, you know. But I¡¯m going to fight with the intent to kill. So don¡¯t hold back!¡±


    Sigh... is every monster with were in the name of their species love to fight so much? Can¡¯t we all live in peace?


    ¡°Shelia, this fight might be hard for you to win if you hold back. Go all out from the start. If I see any one of you is close to death, I will intervene,¡± I said.


    Well, the match can¡¯t be stopped. So we¡¯ll just watch them fight, I guess.


    So many people loves to fight. I only love winning. Not fighting. I wish we can win without a fight.

 Chapter 768 - 768 Tiger Versus Wolf

    768 Tiger Versus Wolf


    ¡°...And now what? We can¡¯t really fight until the barrier is broken. I can break it with my strength. But are there other things you want to ask him? If not, let the fight begin,¡± I asked Albert.


    Even if the weretiger doesn¡¯t know what else he can say, there¡¯s still time until the barrier I made to be broken. I¡¯m quite strong after all. And I used quite a lot of Aura thinking that the weretiger can break it if it¡¯s any weaker than it is now.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll ask some more questions. Do you remember where your previous vige was? And how long ago was it when you got tamed and asked your fellow weretiger to run away? Were you also the strongest weretiger in your tribe?¡±


    Albert asked several questions at once. And they¡¯re not rted to the cult at all.


    ¡°Oh, and answer everything as fast as possible. We don¡¯t know if your master will notice that you¡¯re being interrogated and he will order you to tell lies. And to make it quick, I will tell you that if you¡¯re alive by the time the match is over, I¡¯ll bring you back to the magicless area where you can wait there without obeying anyone¡¯s order until I kill your master. I will even have someone bring you food so you don¡¯t need to go out of there,¡± I said.


    The weretiger said that he was out of the magicless area today because he found the agents. He was told that it was his job to kill anyone suspicious.


    And that order actually forced him to fight the master level mages. But he said that he saw them before he was tamed and knows that those mages were training to get themselves stronger, so he wasn¡¯t suspicious of them at all. And that¡¯s why he never fight them even when he knew that they are in the magicless area.


    If I could get one of them to bring food for him, he won¡¯t attack and he also doesn¡¯t need to leave there to look for food.


    The weretiger then answered everything quickly and honestly.


    .....


    ¡°Do you remember where I started detected your presence? My vige was close to that ce. I think it has been so long since I got myself tamed. But it¡¯s still less than a hundred years ago. And yeah, I was the strongest in my tribe. So if my master told me to kill them, they can¡¯t fight back,¡± the weretiger said.


    I guess he¡¯s afraid to be forced to kill his own kind. Though maybe like the werewolves, if he needs to fight, it should be by mutual consent. To see who is the stronger one. Instead of being forced for it.


    ¡°Then about the agents. Why did you let him live in the end? He didn¡¯t die and we ended up here because of it,¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°I thought he¡¯s already dead. He was too weak and his breath was too faint. And I have no interest in weaklings,¡± he said.


    After that, Albert asked him more about himself and about weretigers in general. And finally, it¡¯s time for the barrier to be down.


    ¡°It should be time. You can stop banging on the barrier since it will be down soon. I guess you can¡¯t since this is your master¡¯s order. Well, because this is my familiar¡¯s wish to fight you, have a good fight. I¡¯ll return you back to the magicless area once the fight is over,¡± I said.


    Then I brought Albert back to his ce. There¡¯s no need for him to watch the fight.


    ¡°Graham, heal him and recover his stamina once the barrier is down. I want a fair fight myself,¡± Shelia said to Graham.


    ¡°Hah! I like you, Wolf Girl! Let¡¯s have a good fight!¡± the weretiger said.


    Graham just sighed and waited for the barrier to be down. Shelia is in front of him just in case the weretiger is trying to attack Graham instead. But the weretiger said that she doesn¡¯t need to be concerned about it.


    When the barrier breaks, the weretiger instantly rushed toward Shelia. And Graham curatelly cast healing magic and stamina recovery magic on him before leaving the stage.


    The wolf and the tiger are facing each other. And I just want to return back to the mission. But I can¡¯t since the weretiger could be useful for us.


    If I could kill his master, he might even join us. And then we can look for where the rest of his tribe are and get them to join us.


    If we offer them a fight against the werewolves, they might be interested to join us. And if we added their anger toward the cult since the cult tamed their strongest werewolf, they will be even more interested to join.


    Imagine werewolves, angels, vampires, and weretigers fighting together. No matter how big their army of monsters that they worked so hard to tame are, there¡¯s no way they could win against us then.


    Well, the weretigers are just possibility. Even if we help them, they might not want to join us in the end.


    Oh, the weretiger can also run in the air. The way he fight is simr to how a werewolf fight. But he¡¯s stronger physically and is more flexible. Shelia¡¯s attack didn¡¯t hurt him much except for her sh.


    And the weretiger also have self-regeneration ability. Is every race with were at the front of their name like that? Maybe I should look for more of were-something race to help me fight the cult in the future.


    The weretiger is better at everything. From the speed, power, and even punching speed, kicking speed, shing with ws, and transformation, he was better than Shelia.


    His tiger transformation is bigger, but it didn¡¯t cost him his speed. Instead, he became faster. Now I know why the cat-man chose a cat as his transformation. Maybe because he met one before.


    The only thing that made the fight equal so far was because of experience. Shelia has more experience in fighting than the weretiger. Including losing a fight many times even if they were just a spar.


    Using her experience, she dodged the weretiger¡¯s attack and try to counter. But her counter attack kept being blocked or dodged by the weretiger just by his own physical strength.


    And they both looked really happy right now.


    They both got to fight someone strong. And the weretiger also can forget about everything else including how he¡¯s just a contracted monster and focus on his fight.


    And the audience is cheering for both of them. Why not just Shelia? They are mostly werewolves though.


    ¡°...It¡¯s like watching two mythical beasts fighting,¡± Victoriamented.


    Mythical beast, huh? Is such creature exist? Well, the abyss horse, Ray, might be one of them. After all, one can only see it at their death. Unless they have died and somehow got revived like me. Though in my case, time also got rewound.


    ...It¡¯s been two hours since the fight started. Can I just go home now?


    Even Albert has contacted me many times asking me who won. But it still hasn¡¯t ended!


    Sonia who is no longer busy moving around thanks to the creation of phone is also here watching the fight. She is so free now.


    I like to rest, but one of them might die if I look away. So I can only watch it.


    Next time, how about I destroy the Colosseum?


    But I can see that the werewolves will rebel. They will no longer respect me as their king.


    I might have stopped them from having another deathmatch. That tradition is bad for them after all. But if I stopped them from enjoying a fight, I will lose their respect. And I will no longer have an army of werewolves I can order around.


    They will probably still fight if I offer them a fight, but they won¡¯t listen to my order.


    That¡¯s something that must be avoided. So I can only watch.


    Both sides are now exhausted. They have been fighting for so long after all. So we can see the end soon.


    They can no longer run on air, transform, or using long distance sh. So it¡¯s just a brawl.


    Anyone watching will think that the weretiger is winning thanks to his physique. But Shelia is not losing at all.


    Finally, the weretiger who saw Shelia let down her guard made a mistake. He made a big swing for a finishing move. But that¡¯s what Shelia predicted.


    She wasn¡¯t totally exhausted. She¡¯s reserving her stamina for herst attack.


    And when the weretiger made that mistake, Shelia blocked it, and shed her ws at the weretiger¡¯s chest.


    It¡¯s a fatal wound that will kill him if not treated.


    Seeing that the weretiger can no longer fight, I stopped the fight.


    ¡°The weretiger can no longer move! The winner is Shelia! Graham and all the angels, quickly heal both of them!¡±


    I don¡¯t want to lose the weretiger yet. I will bring him back to the magicless area and see if we can recruit him or not.

 Chapter 769 - 769 Given a Mustache as a Proof

    769 Given a Mustache as a Proof


    After the weretiger was healed, he then instantly tried to attack Shelia again.


    No way I will let him do that.


    Even if he might be stronger than me, I¡¯m the better fighter. So I blocked his attack, and sweep his legs. Making him fall on the ground easily.


    ¡°Just so you know, I became the Werewolf King even though I¡¯m not even a werewolf because I¡¯m the strongest and I was the one who defeated their previous king. You could have won against the strongest werewolf if you attacked her at her weakest after her victory over you, but there¡¯s no way you can defeat me,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Yeah. But in the end, this is my master¡¯s order. To kill anyone suspicious in sight. So even if you bring me back to the Magicless Area, I will still fight everyone. Except if I don¡¯t consider them to be suspicious before he gave me the order. So other than those strong humans in that vige and my own kind, I will continue trying to kill everyone,¡± he said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about trying to kill me. I¡¯m much stronger than you. Now, let¡¯s get you back to Magicless Area.¡±


    While restraining him with Blobbyrope, I opened a portal back to near the Magicless Area again. This time, Shelia is too tired and need some rest. So I didn¡¯t bring her with me.


    Riding on Ray, it didn¡¯t take long until we returned to the ce where we met the weretiger.


    ¡°My old vige was nearby. Though I don¡¯t think anyone is living there. Anyway, what do you want me to do?¡± he asked.


    .....


    ¡°Here. A clone of my ck Slime. Your sense of smell is good, right? If possible, I want you to find the other weretigers and show them this. Memorized the smell of the ck Slime and told them that anyone with that smell is not enemies and don¡¯t attack them. Also tell them that I can bring them to safety. Though that also depend on you as well. But if they want a ce where they can fight werewolves, not to the death, I can bring them there. I¡¯d like you to join us fighting against the cult, but I will wait your answer until after I kill your master,¡± I said. Though I think that I will be the one who found his tribesmen first.


    Even if the other weretigere to the vige and help us for a while, they might still be obeying this one since he said that he¡¯s the strongest. So we can only confirm if they want to join or notter after I kill his master and he became a free monster.


    Though I still don¡¯t know if they truly desire for a fight or not.


    But if they really want a fight, they will end up fighting the werewolves every day. And during big time such as war, they won¡¯t be in any condition to fight because of it.


    Maybe if I also became the Weretiger King, they will obey me to not fight too much.


    Though I think it¡¯s good for the angels to improve their healing magic.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll go and find my kin. And if you find any, you need this,¡± the weretiger then plucked one of his cat mustache and give it to me after I released him.


    A mustache. A single strand of a weretiger¡¯s mustache. He gave it to me. Though it¡¯s more like he tried to punched me since he¡¯s still under his master¡¯s order.


    ¡°This is a mustache. I know Mustache but this is the first time someone presented me with a mustache. What should I do with this mustache?¡± I asked.


    ¡°It¡¯s proof that you have defeated me in a fight. And I acknowledge you as someone stronger than me. If you find any weretiger, just show this to them and tell them it¡¯s from Borsce,¡± the weretiger said.


    ¡°Borsce? Who¡¯s that? Why would someone be named Borsce? Why not just Bors or something easier. Why would anyone always make difficult name for me to remember?¡±


    Iined while dodging his attacks.


    ¡°That¡¯s my amazing name! Showing that strand of hair to other weretigers will tell them that I have acknowledged you as someone superior. This will make it easier for them to hear you,¡± the weretiger said.


    ¡°Alright. I¡¯ll tell them that it¡¯s from Borsce. But I will just call you Tiger. It¡¯s easier for me this way,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Whatever you want. You need to leave quickly so I can¡¯t find your trace. If I can still track you, I will have no choice but to keep looking for you,¡± Tiger said.


    That won¡¯t be a problem for me.


    After saying farewell, Ray ran at full speed away from Tiger. Now we¡¯re going to look for other weretigers. Though my main mission is still to investigate this Magicless Area.


    I checked the former vige of the weretigers. Even if they leave, if they have feelings to their old homes, they may be there.


    Unfortunately, the timing is not right.


    When I got there, I see some traces of humans¡¯ feet. Most likely those weretigers were roaming this ce in their human form since normal humans wear shoes.


    ¡°But it proves that they came here once in a while. Just the timing isn¡¯t right. Maybe I should have bring at least one werewolf here with me to track the weretigers,¡± I said to myself.


    ¡°Gotta catch every single one of ¡¯em!¡± Victoria shouted on my ear. She¡¯s a little earring again now.


    ¡°What is wrong with you?!¡±


    ¡°I mean we¡¯re collecting monsters, right? So I just feel the need to shout it loud. It¡¯s just like usual. References from my world. You don¡¯t need to care,¡± she said.


    ¡°I care because you were shouting next to my ear!¡±


    But yeah, we¡¯re trying to see if we could find more monsters to gather as our allies. We¡¯re targeting intellectual monsters who can speak and canmunicate with us.


    Now that I think about it, the cult might have done the same as well. Maybe some monsters feel the same as the cult and wanted to destroy the world so they¡¯re working together.


    But in my past life, when I was killed by a monster, I saw the cult were bringing various type of monsters. Not just one. So I guess they might not be the same at all. Or they haven¡¯t used their full force yet.


    The more I fight the cult, the more I don¡¯t understand them.


    If they even built a city and have already gathered a lot of people, why would they, in my past life, only started the fight muchter?


    Whatever. As long as I can just destroy the cult, I don¡¯t need to know the answer.


    ¡°Well, today has been a long day. Let¡¯s go back home today and rest. Too many things happened today,¡± I said.


    We started this mission in the morning. I brought two agents so they can investigate the city in the middle of the Magicless Area while I investigate the Magicless Area.


    Then, I found ten master level mages who trained their bodies. They are about as strong as average werewolves even without magic. And they joined us in the fight against the cult.


    Then when I returned to the Magicless Area, I found one of the agent injured badly and returned back home.


    And we learned that the other agent was being taken into the city and was being healed by the healer in there. Which most likely to be rted to the cult.


    Then after I took a nap, I was told to rescue him after two days in case he can learn more things by himself. Though it¡¯s highly likely that he would have died by that time. Either he was killed by the cult or he killed himself with the poison in his mouth.


    Next, I found a weretiger. Lured him out of the Magicless Area and brought him to Monsters World to fight Shelia after we asked him what he knew.


    He doesn¡¯t knew much about the cult. But we learned that there¡¯s a tribe of weretigers inside the Magicless Area.


    Why would a strong and powerful race of weretiger live in that ce when they can do many things outside there? I forgot to ask Tiger.


    If they were originally from Monsters World because their ancestors were a summoned monsters, then we might be able to learn about the other weretigers in Monsters World. And we can recruit more allies.


    It all happened in one day. It¡¯s no wonder that my mind is in a mess.


    Let¡¯s get home and take a long rest before going back there again. And by tomorrow, I will probably forget many things that happened today and just focus on what I need to do. It will be just like usual.


    Whatever. I¡¯ll write down everything that happened and tell Albert using my phone.


    Now, it¡¯s time to sleep.

 Chapter 770 - 770 The Mustache Doesn’t Work

    770 The Mustache Doesn¡¯t Work


    The next day, I started looking around the Magicless Area again. And soon I found several weretigers hunting on some monsters. Probably for food.


    ¡°A human! A human is here!¡±


    Thanks to Shelia who have rested enough after her fight with Tiger, we found the weretigers quick enough.


    But it is to be expected from the tribe of monsters whose strongest member has been tamed by a human. They can¡¯t trust a human easily. So they are surrounding me.


    Despite Tiger told me that they are the race that prefer to fight one on one, all of them are surrounding us. Just shows how much they hate humans.


    ¡°What do you think, Shelia? Can you defeat them all? Just asking. We¡¯re not here to fight anyone,¡± I said.


    ¡°Well, as long as none of them were as strong as Tiger, I can win. But with this many opponent, it will take time if I do it alone,¡± Shelia said. She called him Tiger because I called him Tiger first.


    Some of them even have bigger size than Tiger. But I didn¡¯t feel as much pressure as Tiger gave. I guess they are just big. Though maybe they are at the same level as Jack and the others.


    I¡¯m sure they can get along with the Werewolves since they both love to fight. But again, I don¡¯t want them to try to kill each other.


    .....


    Let¡¯s see if they are willing to hear us.


    ¡°Excuse me! Can you bring us to someone in charge? I have this. Borsce¡¯s strand of mustache. He gave it to me because he thinks that I can help you out,¡± I said.


    The weretigers looked at the hair in my hand. Some of theme closer and smelled it to confirm if it¡¯s truly Tiger¡¯s mustache.


    ¡°The smell is really Borsce¡¯s. No doubt about it.¡±


    ¡°But that¡¯s a human! What if they forced Borsce to tell them everything? And he had no choice but to give him the strand of hair because of it? Let¡¯s just kill them right here right now!¡±


    ¡°What about the woman? She doesn¡¯t smell like a human.¡±


    ¡°Who cares! Kill them both!¡±


    TIGER! I thought it would be fine if I just show them this mustache! But their hatred toward humans is so big that they can¡¯t be stopped by a single strand of a mustache! I need the entire mustache!


    If I bring Mustache here, maybe that will work. Wait, no. He¡¯s mboyant Mustache. Not Borsce¡¯s Mustache. Should I call it Borstache?


    ¡°Shelia. Show them that you won this mustache fair and square,¡± I said.


    ¡°I didn¡¯t won that mustache! I won against Tiger!¡±


    Even though sheined, she still fought the weretigers.


    I told her to make sure that she doesn¡¯t kill anyone. Even by mistake. Just to show them that she¡¯s strong enough to match against Tiger.


    Well, the weretiger¡¯s physical abilities are still better than a werewolf¡¯s. But this is Shelia. She¡¯s already far stronger than the previous Werewolf King.


    Instead of fighting them all by herself, she made sure to dodge their attacks and only fight back when it¡¯s just one opponent. Attacking that one several times and make them fall on the ground.


    And this is still a Magicless Area. So the weretigers are unable to use their regeneration magic.


    Though I see some of them have the fruits with them. The fruit that will allow them to use magic in this ce. But they haven¡¯t eaten them yet.


    Shelia also had some fruits. We found more of them on the way. I thought that they might be usefulter so I gave them to her.


    Well, she hasn¡¯t eaten those fruits as well. She¡¯s still fighting the weretigers with punches and kicks.


    ¡°Target the man! He might be the boss!¡±


    Knowing that they can¡¯t defeat Shelia easily, they started aiming for me.


    But it was easy for me. I just need to swing the sword-cane in my hand to keep them away. As for thoseing from behind, Ray will kick them.


    In the end, everyone is fighting.


    As an Aura user who doesn¡¯t need to use magic, I have the greatest advantage. But it¡¯s annoying when the job is to not kill anyone.


    ¡°They are too strong! Eat the fruits!¡±


    Now the weretigers have eaten those fruits. And they transformed from their previous human forms which they have, to a half human half tiger¡¯s form. They are serious in trying to kill us.


    ¡°Hey, hey! Are you serious? We just told you that we¡¯re here because of... that weretiger who was said to be the strongest weretiger. Do you really want to fight us to death? Just know that she¡¯s stronger than him. And I¡¯m stronger than her. So if you really want to kill us, then we have no choice but to kill you,¡± I said.


    There¡¯s no need to give them mercy if they want to kill us. So it¡¯s best to kill them.


    Some of them started hesitating. There¡¯s no way they would risk their lives in a battle against someone stronger than their strongest member.


    ¡°What should we do? If what he said is real and Borsce was really gave the mustache willingly, then they might be our way out of here. We don¡¯t need to wait until Borsce¡¯s mastere here and kill him.¡±


    ¡°But what if he lies?¡¯


    ¡°Then Borsce¡¯s life is already forfeit. Even if we can¡¯t use magic here and he¡¯s being surrounded by all of us, we still unable to wound him. Even that woman only received light wound while she knock some of us out.¡±


    ¡°But is he even a human? I heard that they shouldn¡¯t be this strong. And he¡¯s already stronger than us. Do you think that we can win even if we transformed?¡±


    Well, I¡¯m just stalling for time though. If I stall for time long enough so that the fruit¡¯s effect is over, they can¡¯t transform until they eat another fruit.


    Some of them who have eaten the fruits have transformed. But some who have eaten were still haven¡¯t transformed. I just don¡¯t want to make my problem increase. And it is easier to defeat them in their human form.


    ¡°Did you all forget who we are? We are a battle race! So what if what he said is true or false?! He¡¯s here! And we have a fight! Is there a need to hesitate any longer?!¡±


    Well, there it is. I really am surrounded by a battle-crazed people, huh. They were monsters though.


    ¡°Okay then. You can fight her while I just watch. Wait for her to transform as well. Then wait until she can¡¯t use magic again so it will be a fair fight. That¡¯s okay, right?¡± I suggested.


    With this, the weretigers were no longer surrounding me. And again, there will be a match. I should have brought some more werewolves with me.


    While Shelia transformed, I jumped down from Ray and sat on the ground while leaning my back on the tree. I also checked the surrounding to see if there are other weretigers here. Seems like everyone is here because we have been fighting them for a while.


    I guess I don¡¯t need to look for them anymore after this.


    Let¡¯s just sit here and watch another match between a werewolf and weretigers.


    And as usual, Shelia is winning. And the weretigers no longer care about whether Borsce send me here or not.


    Interacting with monsters is weird. Simple, but weird. I just need to give them what they want. Unless they are stupid. Like these weretigers.


    Interacting with other humans though, is hard. Give them what they want, and they may ask for ten times of what they really want.


    I guess I¡¯m just not good at socializing in general.


    The fight keeps going and Shelia started to get exhausted. It was just yesterday that she exhaust herself from fighting. Now she will do it again.


    ¡°That little werewolf... she felt familiar.¡±


    One of the weretiger, still in his human form, an old one, approached me and started a conversation with me. I guess I¡¯ll just talk with him so I won¡¯t get bored.


    ¡°Have you met werewolves before?¡± I asked him.


    ¡°Yes. A long time ago. Around a few hundred years ago probably. I forgot how long it was. But it was around the time that people like you, Aura users, still exist,¡± he said.


    ¡°...You¡¯re old. So what about it?¡± I asked. He also knows that I¡¯m an Aura user. Unlike other weretigers. They don¡¯t know it.


    ¡°We became good friends. Or maybe rival. We just fight every time we meet. But we respected each other. I won most of the time I fought him so I can tell that despite the fact that magic can¡¯t be used, she¡¯s far stronger than that werewolf even when he¡¯s using magic. I can believe that she defeated Borsce,¡± he said.


    An old friendship between a weretiger and a werewolf. Knowing their pride, I can expect the werewolf to also think that he¡¯s always the one who won every time they met. So I can¡¯t confirm if this old weretiger really won most of their fights or not.


    Hmm? Wait. I think I might know the werewolf he¡¯s talking about.


    ¡°Do you remember that werewolf?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. His name was Doraqy. A weird name for a werewolf,¡± he said.


    I think I remember that name. Or maybe not.


    ¡°Ah! That¡¯s the name unfit for a werewolf! That¡¯s the name of Grandpa Werewolf!¡± Victoria shouted.


    ¡°What a weird earring you have.¡±


    I ignored the old weretiger¡¯sment as I remembered that it was really Grandpa Werewolf¡¯s name. Maybe. But with Victoria here to confirm it, I¡¯m sure of it.


    ¡°I know that werewolf. He¡¯s her grandpa,¡± I said while pointing at Shelia.


    ¡°Really?! Then I will stop the fight. I want to know more about my old friend. And maybe it¡¯s true that you can help us out of here,¡± he said.


    I guess the negotiation can be done sooner if he¡¯s in charge. This is nice.

 Chapter 771 - 771 You are Grandpa Weretiger

    771 You are Grandpa Weretiger


    The old weretiger then tried to stop the fight. Should I call him Grandpa Weretiger then? He¡¯s close with Grandpa Werewolf after all.


    ¡°Enough fighting! We have seen how strong she is. And the man with him is stronger than her. I¡¯m sure that they didn¡¯t lie and Borsce really gave them his mustache on his own. And not because he was forced. So let¡¯s stop the fight and listen to what they want to say,¡± Grandpa Weretiger said.


    ¡°Eh? But I haven¡¯t fought yet!¡±


    ¡°Who cares if Borsce sent them here or not? We just want to fight!¡±


    Why are theyining? Just how much do monsters love to fight anyway? So annoying.


    ¡°Shelia, enough fighting. It will be annoying if you get tired again like yesterday since I may need your help tomorrow.¡±


    I also stopped Shelia from fighting anymore. Even if she¡¯s tired, she¡¯s the kind that won¡¯t refuse any challenge toward her.


    ¡°Tsk! I want to see how many of them I can defeat on my own until I lost. Though I have no n in losing. Why are we stopping? If it¡¯s you, you should be thinking that it¡¯s easier to convince them after we knock them all out and force them to talk and agree with youter, right?¡±


    Just how much does Shelia know me now? How right is she? Very right. That¡¯s actually what I thought until Grandpa Weretiger approached me.


    .....


    ¡°If your fight goes on a little bit longer, that is actually what I nned to do. But that old weretiger said that he¡¯s a friend of Grandpa Werewolf. I told him that you¡¯re his granddaughter, and then he stopped the fight,¡± I said.


    ¡°Really? Wait, Grandpa often told me that there were some opponents that he respected because he couldn¡¯t kill them, and they couldn¡¯t kill him. I think he said that one of them was a weretiger. Maybe it¡¯s him.¡±


    ¡°You will knowter if you talk with him. He said that the werewolf¡¯s name was Dorak-something. And Victoria said that it was your grandpa¡¯s name,¡± I said.


    ¡°Doraqy,¡± Victoria corrected me.


    ¡°Yes. That¡¯s Grandpa¡¯s name. So what should we do now?¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°Probably telling him our connection with Grandpa Werewolf, how Tiger lost against you, and how we will help them out of here,¡± I said.


    I hope we can get it done sooner.


    I don¡¯t think we can investigate the entire Magicless Area by today. So we can take our time doing whatever we want.


    But tomorrow is the deadline that Albert gave us. It¡¯s the deadline for the time if the agent in the city will give us more reports or not.


    We will decide our next move after getting report from him. But if there¡¯s no report, we will go there to investigate. At least me and Shelia. Maybe I should bring Graham as well.


    There will probably a huge fight, so I will get everyone ready. Make them stay in one ce by tonight. And by tomorrow, when there¡¯s a fight, I can just open one portal and bring everyone in to help me in the fight.


    That will be the first fight that Sunsses will be inmand. Though it¡¯s only if it happen.


    If nothing happen and I can infiltrate easily without being noticed, that would be great. But it¡¯s a city suspected to have a lot of master level mages. So I don¡¯t think we can do that.


    And I can¡¯t forget that there were summoners in that ce as well. Connected to the destroyed base in Monsters World. So I need to improve the defense in Monsters World as well. I¡¯ll get the werewolves stay there. If the weretigers will join us, I can ask them to help as well.


    After taking everyone¡¯sins, Grandpa Weretiger gathered everyone around us. No hostility this time.


    ¡°Let¡¯s start from the introduction. My name is¡ª¡±


    ¡°Grandpa Weretiger.¡±


    Before he could introduce himself, I interjected. I need him to know what I will call him.


    ¡°...Actually, my name is¡ª¡±


    ¡°It doesn¡¯t matter. That werewolf you were close with was called Grandpa Werewolf. Since you¡¯re close, I¡¯ll call you Grandpa Weretiger. It¡¯s too annoying that I keep meeting new people and keep being forced to remember everyone¡¯s name. You¡¯re Grandpa Weretiger. The one who gave me the mustache, I called him just Tiger. The rest of you just weretigers. Unless you did something great that I have no choice but to give you a new nickname,¡± I said.


    If they¡¯re humans, they would haveined. But they¡¯re monsters. And I guess they just don¡¯t care about it so it¡¯s fine.


    ¡°Fine. Call me Grandpa Weretiger. That Grandpa Werewolf was my rival. We met often in the past and fought a lot. We respected each other. Can I hear how he¡¯s doing?¡± Grandpa Weretiger asked.


    ¡°He¡¯s dead. I killed him. And now I¡¯m the Werewolf King. That¡¯s the short story. For the long version, it will take longer,¡± I said.


    ¡°No. That¡¯s enough. Although we¡¯re different race and different tribe, we¡¯re the same. Only the strongest can be called the king of the tribe. Even if we are from different species. And since the little girl defeated the strongest weretiger, Borsce, or the one you call Tiger, she should be our king. But you¡¯re stronger than her so you¡¯re the real king. But we won¡¯t know until Borsce himself told us about it. So we can¡¯t call you our king,¡± Grandpa Weretiger said.


    Wait, so I¡¯m the Weretiger King as well? Neat!


    But are they the kind that obey their king¡¯s order? I hope that¡¯s the case.


    Well, if I bait them with a way to get stronger, they might obey me. I¡¯ll get them to train with the werewolves a lot.


    ¡°So, what can you do to help us?¡± Grandpa Weretiger asked.


    ¡°First, is there a reason why you stayed in this Magicless Area?¡± I asked.


    There¡¯s no need for a tribe of powerful race to stay here. They can go anywhere and even infiltrate human¡¯s society.


    ¡°It¡¯s just tradition. This was how I trained to be stronger than the others. Though I have never fought other races after I started living here,¡± Grandpa Weretiger replied.


    So, weretigers are the race that seek strength. And they know that they won¡¯t just get stronger with their regeneration skill, transformation skill, and other type of magic that they can use. So they trained in a skill that can be used even when they can¡¯t use magic.


    Grandpa Weretiger said that he and another weretiger learned it from watching how an Aura user can grow so strong without magic.


    Well, they seeded in getting stronger. But because of that, they thought that staying in Magicless Area will make them stronger. So they rarely left.


    Except for Borsce who often left. That¡¯s how he got strong enough to be Shelia¡¯s equal. By testing his strength on other enemies. Though that¡¯s also the reason how he ended up getting tamed.


    ¡°So, is there any other reason you have to stay? If not, then I will bring you to a safe ce. To her vige. Though it¡¯s now a vige of various monsters. Werewolves, elves, and angels. If you go there, as long as you obey the rule, you can even have a match against werewolves every day,¡± I said.


    Offered with a free fight, there¡¯s no weretigers who want to refuse. But for some reason, they were still hesitant.


    I guess it¡¯s not what they will get. But there¡¯s something else that make them stay here.


    ¡°If you think of waiting for the tamer who tamed Tiger, don¡¯t waste your time. Tiger told you guys to not go out and face them, right? And just wait here in case he came. But I don¡¯t think he wille. I also promised him that I¡¯m going to kill that mage so Tiger will be free. Just leave it to me. Tomorrow, I will go there and kill him and everyone else rted to the cult over there. It¡¯s also for Tiger¡¯s peace of mind that you all move to a safe ce,¡± I said.


    Then I exined my goal and what the cult is. And they just don¡¯t care about the cult. They care more about Tiger¡¯s master.


    ¡°So, that tamer is in an organization who want to destroy the world?¡± Grandpa Weretiger asked.


    ¡°To put it simply, yeah. I¡¯m on a mission to destroy that cult. If you guys want to join us, that will be great. But if not, as long as you won¡¯t get in the way, I don¡¯t care what you do. Though if you want to kill me or any of our allies, I will have to kill you,¡± I said.


    Grandpa Weretiger pondered for a while. Then he looked at me after making a decision.


    ¡°We can¡¯t make a decision without Borsce here. But we will go to a safe ce since that¡¯s what he want. Promise us that once you kill his master, you will bring Borsce to us. Then we can start thinking of what to do next,¡± Grandpa Weretiger said.


    From the look of it, everyone agreed with his idea. To just let Tiger decide what to do next.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s good enough. I¡¯ll bring you to Monsters Vige then.¡±


    This will be the fourth race in the vige. I hope they won¡¯t cause any trouble.

 Chapter 772 - 772 One Step Closer to be the Weretiger King

    772 One Step Closer to be the Weretiger King


    ¡°Okay, let¡¯s go. We will go that way and out of the Magicless Area where I will transport you all to Monsters World.¡±


    After we told the weretigers what we¡¯re here for, I told them that we will move to a safe ce before transporting them to Monsters World. Though only I know that the way we will go to is not the shortest route.


    I¡¯m going to where Ist met Tiger so he can meet the others before I take them away. Just showing him that I¡¯m keeping my words.


    I¡¯m bringing them to a safe ce. So you don¡¯t need to worry about anything else. Is what I¡¯m trying to tell him.


    I let them prepare everything to move. Though I don¡¯t think they have anything important.


    So after a short time, all the weretigers are ready to leave.


    ¡°Are you all ready? Then let¡¯s go!¡±


    Riding on Ray, I slowed down my pace so the slowest weretiger can keep up with everyone. We¡¯re going to Tiger¡¯sst known location before leaving the Magicless Area.


    And we really found him. Shelia can smell his scent and I can see him with my Divine Vision.


    .....


    So I move faster ahead the others. Leaving everyone behind to catch up with Tiger who just realized that I¡¯m moving toward him.


    ¡°Why are you here again? Do you really need me to fight you?¡± asked Tiger.


    ¡°No need. I already know that I will be the one to win. I¡¯m just here to trap you again.¡±


    I quickly drew a circle around Tiger just like before. But since he has experienced being trapped inside my Barrier, he quickly stepped back before I could finish drawing a circle.


    ¡°Wow, you learned. But I¡¯m still better than you.¡±


    Riding on Ray and drawing a circle on the ground with a cane doesn¡¯t inconvenient me at all. He¡¯s like an extension of my body. It¡¯s like we became one when I ride him.


    I can feel what he feels, and I think that he can feel what I feel. Though I can¡¯t confirm since Ray can¡¯t talk like he did when I met him.


    While riding Ray, I quickly chased after Tiger and drew another circle that trapped him. Again. Making him unable to leave. Again.


    ¡°Why do I have to keep being treated this way?¡±


    Tiger keep banging on the barrier. Which won¡¯t break at all with his strength.


    ¡°This time, so you can say goodbye to your fellow tribesmen. I found them and will bring them to Monsters World. And since you¡¯re inside my barrier, you won¡¯t be able to hurt anyone,¡± I said.


    Then I pointed to where I came from. Shelia appeared first. Then the weretigers were all behind her.


    ¡°Borsce... We will leave this ce and follow him. He said that tomorrow, he¡¯s going to fight the city in the middle. And possibly fight your master as well. He said that in case he needed help, he will ask our help. So we will help him,¡± Grandpa Weretiger said.


    ¡°I see. That¡¯s good. You can stay there and enjoy as much fight as you want. And even if you decided to join the war tomorrow, if you¡¯re with him, I can rest easy since you won¡¯t all get easily tamed. So, will you join him in the war? After all this fight for the sake of killing my master, he will continue the fight to destroy the enemy. What will you do?¡± Tiger asked.


    ¡°We only let our strongest make our decision. And it¡¯s still you. Even if they said that you lost, we haven¡¯t seen it yet so you are still our king. So we will let you make our decision after you are freed from your master,¡± Grandpa Weretiger said.


    The other weretigers also agreed with Grandpa Weretiger. So it¡¯s all up to Tiger to decide.


    ¡°...Can¡¯t you see? He did something and I can¡¯t do anything about it. Look, I¡¯m the one inside a cage. He¡¯s obviously stronger than me. That¡¯s enough reason to make him the king,¡± Tiger said while trying his best to destroy the barrier.


    That¡¯s right! I will be the Weretiger King! Then should I call myself Tigerwolf King? Werewere King?


    It¡¯s difficult to call me both Weretiger King and Werewolf King. So I need something that will make it easier for other people to call me.


    Though should I say that I¡¯m also the Elf King and the Angel King? They don¡¯t really have a king though. But they know hierarchy and that I¡¯m much higher than them. I guess I just let other people decide how to call me.


    ...And it¡¯s not like anyone will call me Werewolf King or Weretiger King anyway. Roy is the easiest way for other people to call me. Second only after Mr. Handsome.


    ¡°That will be forter. You said it yourself that you are a tamed monster now. And that we shouldn¡¯t blindly trust you since your master might give you an order to tell us something you don¡¯t really meant just so they can lure us out and tame us. So, you need to either be freed and told us yourself that he¡¯s our king, or die. And we won¡¯t let you die. Just wait. Tomorrow, you should be free,¡± Grandpa Weretiger said.


    Unlike Grandpa Werewolf, Grandpa Weretiger is much wiser. Maybe because he¡¯s not the strongest in the tribe anymore. So he tried to improve the tribe in another way.


    ¡°Since you¡¯re done talking, let¡¯s get out of here. You will meet again tomorrow anyway. Tiger, I don¡¯t know what will happen once the contract is broken since you¡¯re inside the Magicless Area. Maybe you won¡¯t realize it when your master is killed. So, I will send some weretigers to your ce once your master is killed. One of them will be carrying your mustache. Maybe if you¡¯re lucky, the fight will still goes on and you can join us. Then, see you tomorrow.¡±


    We left him alone before the barrier is broken on its own. Though he should still have at least thirty minutes left.


    He told me that he doesn¡¯t need anyone to bring him food. So I won¡¯t do it. But I hope he won¡¯t starve since many monsters and animal nearby has gone thanks to his presence alone.


    This time, I took the shortest route in case we encounter monster that could be Tiger¡¯s prey.


    Then I opened a portal and let all the weretigers into Monsters World.


    Of course Shelia entered first to inform the others. Just so the werewolves won¡¯t pick a fight against the weretigers.


    ¡°Weretigers, I introduce you to the werewolves, the elves, and the angels. And there are some humans that you needed to be introduced to. Important humans who are my allies. But they don¡¯t have time. So I will introduce you tomorrow,¡± I said.


    ¡°Whoa, so many strong monsters! And not just the werewolves! I can¡¯t wait to fight them!¡±


    I heard that from the weretigers¡¯ side. As for the werewolves¡¯ side...


    ¡°Look! Our king is bringing a lot of weretigers! Let¡¯s ask them for a fight!¡±


    I guess there will be some battles tonight. But I don¡¯t want any one of them to be heavily injured before tomorrow¡¯s important mission.


    Saving the agent is secondary. But it will be great to rescue him.


    Our main mission is still destruction. To destroy everything rted to the cult. And this time, it¡¯s an entire city.


    Maybe it will be like Lawless Country and there are some children there. That will be annoying. I hope that¡¯s not the case.


    ¡°Hey. If you want to fight, that¡¯s fine. But remember that I have important mission tomorrow and it¡¯s possible that I will call you all to fight. So those who want to join me tomorrow, don¡¯t fight tonight. Or if you still want to fight, that¡¯s fine. Just make sure that you won¡¯t get injured before tomorrow¡¯s mission.¡±


    I warned all the monsters to not get too excited by our new... members of the vige? Well, I think that they will permanently stay in this vige. Though I may need to knock Tiger out once to prove them that I¡¯m really stronger than him.


    After I gave the weretigers some more instruction, I let the others take care of it.


    After that, I return back to Cassau. There¡¯s no more need to investigate the Magicless Area today. Just rest since I don¡¯t know how many times I will use portal and how long the fight will be.


    Of course I need to give report to everyone. And thanks to the invention of phone, I don¡¯t need to go there or call Sonia. Sonia even enjoying her free time with Daniel and the others ying together.


    I opened the forum and I simply give a report for everyone to read.


    [Just one step closer to be Weretiger King]


    That¡¯s all I¡¯m writing. And then replies starteding from everyone who read it.


    I don¡¯t even need to borate with my report. Victoria is happily ying with her phone in her own room and give reply to everyone who asked.


    I also told everyone that I will raid the city surrounded by the Magicless Area tomorrow. So those who are probably going to fight can prepare themselves.


    Now, let¡¯s sleep.

 Chapter 773 - 773 Another Report Before Mission

    773 Another Report Before Mission


    Today is the day where I suppose to infiltrate the city surrounded by the Magicless Area. I don¡¯t know whether I will rescue the agent or not. Probably not. But that will depend on the situation as well.


    Before I leave, I got a text from Albert to meet him first. Seems like the agent contacted him early this morning. This is good since we can learn something about the city before I infiltrate.


    Mission after mission. There¡¯s no end to it. When will the cult be destroyed?


    Rather, I need to find where the Evil God is hiding first. I need to know that. or else, there will only be more missions for me to do.


    I have to do it or I will never get my inner peace.


    The one who was responsible for my death might be dead. But that¡¯s just one person from a huge organization. As long as the organization, the cult, is still exist, I will never get healed from my trauma.


    Then I opened a portal to Albert¡¯s location to hear the agent¡¯s report.


    ¡°Morning, Albert. You have something important to tell me?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Could be. I don¡¯t know. But every little information could be important, so I will tell you. Early this morning, I got woken up by my phone ringing. I got another call from that agent I sent who ended up talking on his own,¡± Albert said.


    .....


    Apparently, after Albert received the call, he didn¡¯t try to talk at all in case there¡¯s a wind mage who can overhear their conversation. That will make the existence of phones to be known by the cult. Which we can¡¯t let that to happen now.


    So, the agent talked to himself. He even said that he got the reputation of a crazy person in the city because of it. Although the agent said that he feels bad for it, the truth is that he must be relieved because thanks to talking to himself, no one wants to get close to him. Though they still use wind magic to hear what he¡¯s talking to himself.


    He knows that because he¡¯s an expert level wind mage. so the slightest change in the natural movement of the wind, he can tell.


    But it was also because of that, he couldn¡¯t use it to eavesdrop on other people¡¯s conversation. Or a master level wind mage will know that he¡¯s listening.


    ¡°He¡¯s smart. I guess it¡¯s good that he¡¯s the one staying. The other agent is not a wind mage, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. But still, this one still used wind magic from time to time on purpose. Because any wind mage who doesn¡¯t use their magic this way is extremely suspicious. So he just used it within a certain range to make it so that everyone will think that he¡¯s just an advanced level wind mage. He didn¡¯t say that. But that¡¯s what Wendy told me when she appointed him for this mission,¡± Albert said.


    Wendy was also supposed to be here. But I heard that she¡¯s busy. She said that she found some other school with suspicious movement where some tamers and summoners disappeared before they could graduate. And there¡¯s no sign of them being a hunter and died. So it¡¯s possible that they were being taken by the cult and being educated in the cult¡¯s way.


    That¡¯s why she¡¯s not here. And it¡¯s unlikely that she will be able to join uster if there¡¯s a huge fight.


    Well, my mission is still to infiltrate first. Destruction is forter. If necessary.


    Though I think it¡¯s highly likely that it will end up in a fight. Who in the right mind would let me go for an infiltration mission? It¡¯s just fight, kill, assassinate, and destroy for me. It¡¯s easier that way.


    ¡°Well, from your information, I guess he¡¯s still safe. It¡¯s just that people started thinking of him as a nuisance. And they are keeping away from him. I guess that¡¯s good since he can survive,¡± I said.


    ¡°If you¡¯re trying to save him, he will pretend that he¡¯s a coward. Just like how he entered that ce. Then he won¡¯t fight back when you¡¯re restraining him or putting the cor on him,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Is there anything else I need to know?¡± I asked Albert.


    ¡°Yeah. And I think it¡¯s rted to Wendy¡¯s mission. There are no kids in that ce. Most likely, they are being educated by the cult somewhere else. Everyone there is loyal to the cult. And they put everything they can to stock up food. Probably for the bases in Monsters World. Even master level mages are farming, fishing, and raising cattle,¡± Albert said.


    They have to be extremely loyal if those who have reached that stage, still goes for growing their own food. And it¡¯s natural to think that they have another base in Monsters World. And the people here can go there.


    Maybe the summoners there, after knowing that they can¡¯t go back to the base that I destroyed, used their monster who are moving around in Monsters World as a transfer point. And from there, the cult are moving toward another base. And the people in that city is now sending their supplies to that base instead.


    They totally gave up on retrieving the destroyed base. And it¡¯s also futile effort anyway. They have tried it, and they failed. There¡¯s no need to sacrifice more people.


    ¡°If there¡¯s no kids, then there¡¯s no need for us to hold back. So, how big is the city? And how many people and monsters are there?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Big enough for us to send all our troops. But Just your group and the monsters alone is enough. If there¡¯s a fight, which I think will happen since you¡¯re in it, then this is also a good chance for Rudy to show his leadership skills. He has learned a lot from reading the battle logs of all our battle so far,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Nice! Who¡¯s Rudy?¡± I don¡¯t remember any Rudy.


    ¡°The blind man with sunsses who shows his leadership ability during the friendly match.¡±


    Right. Sunsses. He could be a great General for the alliance. But that¡¯s if he can show his skill inmanding many peopleter.


    Well, if there¡¯s a fight, I¡¯ll arrange it so that all the monsters fighting will be under him. And for the mages, except for some people, including me, they will follow Sunsses¡¯mand. And advise him since he¡¯s stillcking in experience.


    ¡°Wait, he¡¯s reading the battle logs? Like, reading?¡± I asked curiously.


    ¡°I had someone to read it for him. He¡¯s blind after all. And even if he can sense things in front of him with his air magic, he can¡¯t use it to read. Also, I heard from Ka that he can somehow use what you call Mind¡¯s Eye. So seeing is not a problem for him. Reading is,¡± Albert exined.


    That¡¯s good. If he can use Mind¡¯s Eye, there¡¯s no problem with him to check the situation.


    ¡°If that¡¯s all, then I will leave now,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. How will you get there?¡±


    ¡°On foot. I will open a portal to where the agent threw the stone previously and walk from there alone. There¡¯s a chance that the Blobby there was found by someone and being guarded. If that¡¯s the case, then I¡¯ll get everyone there right away,¡± I said.


    ¡°Good luck.¡±


    With that, I left to the target location.


    There¡¯s no one here. Seems like I can do the infiltration mission peacefully.


    ¡°Roy, I sensed the remains of air magic used here. But I think it¡¯s from yesterday,¡± Airy suddenly speak to me.


    ¡°You can sense the remains of magic in the surrounding?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Only for air magic. And a bit of wind magic as well. But if it¡¯s been too long, then I won¡¯t be able to sense it,¡± Airy said.


    ¡°Can you follow the trace?¡±


    ¡°No. The magic was only used in this area. And the caster didn¡¯t use it the whole time. Only in this area. But if the caster used it in other areas and I find it, I will tell you,¡± she said.


    So, she can sense the remains of air magic that has been used in the area. But she can¡¯t track the mage like how Shelia track someone by their scent.


    But this is good. At least we know that there¡¯s an air mage here. But for what reason is he using magic here?


    ¡°Can you tell the level of the air magic that you feel?¡± I asked Airy.


    ¡°Hmm... at least the air mage should be a bit weaker than you,¡± she replied.


    Weaker than me doesn¡¯t mean the mage is advanced level mage or lower. The air mage might even be a master level air mage. But I¡¯m just better at magic control so Airy thought that the air mage is weaker than me.


    But that¡¯s already a good information. It¡¯s rare for an air mage to be that strong. And I don¡¯t think that mage is going all the way here to breathe. So that mage must be using air magic for something else.


    I don¡¯t think it¡¯s poison. But the use of air magic for anesthetic has been spread to medical personnel. So the cult should have learned about it as well, and then they tried another way to use air mage.


    It might not be a poison, but it could be another type of gas.


    Well, it¡¯s just another air mage. Since I can just breathe by using air magic on my lung, I don¡¯t have to worry about being affected by it.


    And so, my mission started. What will I find this time?

 Chapter 774 - 774 Don’t Do Drugs

    774 Don¡¯t Do Drugs


    ¡°Airy, inform me more if you sensed more remains of air magic that was used nearby. We will go to the city now,¡± I said.


    ¡°You know, you got me and Airy by your side almost all the time. But it feels like we¡¯re just essories most of the time,¡± Victoria suddenlyined.


    ¡°Because we¡¯re in a mission. And it will be troublesome if people hear you talk when you¡¯re not in your human form. So just pretend that you¡¯re an essory. Just tell me if you realized something important and that¡¯s good enough,¡± I said.


    ¡°As for me, I¡¯m fine with it. I don¡¯t need to talk much and only talk when it¡¯s necessary. I like it,¡± Airy said.


    Right. Airy is much quieter than Victoria. She¡¯s just looking around and most of the time she spoke was when she¡¯s curious at something that she saw for the first time. Or when she sensed something was wrong. But that¡¯s only when there¡¯s a mission.


    Victoria does talk a lot. Especially when ites to her hobbies. Or when she¡¯s talking to Marie about new inventions. Or when she¡¯s hanging out with the girls. Or when she¡¯s... wait, she speaks less with me and more with the others?


    Well, it¡¯s not like we have to talk to each other all the time anyway. So what if we¡¯re lovers? That doesn¡¯t mean that we have to force each other to listen to what the other party doesn¡¯t enjoy listening. Though we still need to talk about something important.


    ¡°Enough talking. I see someone over there.¡±


    Far in front of us, there¡¯s someone who seem to be patrolling. Maybe because of the two agents, the people in the city became suspicious and started patrolling. I didn¡¯t hear anything about them patrolling after all.


    .....


    As expert level mages, those agents wouldn¡¯t notice when a master level mage noticed them. But I can tell. So I know that the man in front of us still hasn¡¯t noticed us yet.


    I have learned to only watch people¡¯s body and their movement instead of looking at them in their eyes. I can¡¯t tell their identity, but it¡¯s enough to tell that there are people there without having them notice me.


    This is an important ce for the cult. So there might be more master level mages than even the Lawless Country. That¡¯s why I have to be careful.


    ¡°I can sense another air magic was used here,¡± Airy informed me.


    ¡°Okay. Tell me if you can find the one who cast that magic. There is someone nearby so let¡¯s not talk much,¡± I said.


    If he¡¯s a master level wind mage, then he can hear us talking all the way here if he¡¯s using his magic. If he¡¯s a master level earth mage, then he can sense my location just from the vibration on the ground. But it doesn¡¯t seem like he¡¯s either one of them.


    Well, this infiltration mission is difficult for anyone but me. I need to cast air magic to let the wind move freely so wind mages won¡¯t sense anything abnormal. But they will still be able to sense that I¡¯m using magic if I¡¯m close enough.


    And for earth mages, I can cover the vibration on the ground whenever I move if I move carefully using Aura covered my whole body. This is something I learned to bypass Celestine¡¯s detection. Though she¡¯s just an expert level mage, it¡¯s good enough to not be noticed by master level earth mage from far away.


    Yeah, I trained a lot for sneaking mission where I have to be hidden. But I still prefer direct confrontation.


    Though we can¡¯t let the cult escape. So for this infiltration mission, if possible, I have to get rid of all summoner first. After all, they are most likely the reason why there¡¯s a city in this ce.


    I should go somewhere else. If I go this way, that guy will notice me.


    I¡¯m not riding on Ray, so I just run. And I just run in the air.


    ¡°We¡¯ll look for a safe hiding ce as soon as we get there and observe where the agent is hiding before making our move,¡± I said.


    ¡°And our next move is to...¡±


    ¡°Kill all the summoners in this ce,¡± I replied to Victoria.


    ¡°And Albert said that this is an infiltration mission. When will you start calling for reinforcement?¡± Victoria asked again.


    ¡°When I can no longer find summoners and need them to open a portal to identify them,¡± I said.


    ¡°But how will you identify them without them opening portals?¡±


    ¡°Victoria, do you know? This is just another one of enemy base. Everyone is enemy. Even if the one I killed is not a summoner, it won¡¯t be a problem,¡± I said.


    ¡°...You never thought of this as an infiltration mission, do you?¡±


    ¡°Assassination mission at minimum. Or maybe I¡¯m just a courier responsible to deliver people. What you call a taxi. And they will be the one killing everyone,¡± I said.


    There¡¯s no way a sneak mission will stay as hidden as it should be when I, someone who hate the cult the most, is doing it. And I¡¯m somewhere where everyone is my enemy.


    Now I can see the city. And as the agent said, there¡¯s no children here. There are men and women. But I don¡¯t see any pregnant women. Probably they are being transported somewhere else where their newborn baby can be educated in the way of the cult.


    So, as soon as the babies are born, they will be taught the cult¡¯s way.


    And how can they travel? By using summoners.


    They can easily get their monster stay in some ce and the summoner will just open a portal when needed to their familiar¡¯s location. That¡¯s easy.


    That¡¯s why I need to kill their summoners first. And if the summoners are not here but their familiars are here, I will just kill the monsters. That way, those summoners won¡¯t be able toe here.


    And when they need reinforcement, they can only wait for master level mages or monsters contracted by the cult members to pass through the Magicless Area. Which should be difficult.


    Also, Tiger said that his master is the one who gave him the order to eliminate one of the agents. So his master should be here. And if I could kill the tamer right away and inform Tiger about it, I can still ask Tiger to stay in Magicless Area. So, when reinforcement from the cult ising, Tiger can stop them.


    So, summoners and tamers. Let¡¯s go look for them.


    I bet no one would think that someone is infiltrating this city. This ce has master level mages all over the ce. But as long as I¡¯m doing it right, none of them can notice me.


    There are buildings all over the ce. Just like a normal big city. But there are no thugs because... everyone is a thug? I guess so. That¡¯s why the back alleys are empty. And I can easily find hiding ce. I just hope that I won¡¯t get too close with any mage with good detection ability.


    Everyone is busy. But if it¡¯s the summoners, they should be in a safe ce and will only be doing their job when needed. Like when it¡¯s time for them to deliver their supplies.


    That means they are probably resting in their homes. I guess I will infiltrate their houses and assassinate them in their sleep.


    I entered the first house and stabbed the heart of a man sleeping there. The next house, there¡¯s a couple. A man and a woman. And I killed both of them the same way.


    Then, there¡¯s another couple. A woman and another woman. And I killed both of them.


    ¡°You¡¯re not going to greet them first and say, ¡°Let me join!¡± or something?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°No. I already have lovers. And for the next house, don¡¯t you dare say that for me,¡± I said.


    Because the next house has another couple. And this time, they are both men. Something that Victoria like.


    ¡°...I¡¯ll endure myself,¡± she said.


    Obviously, I killed them as well.


    And I keep doing this in every house that I see people are sleeping.


    I don¡¯t think that all of them are summoners. There might be some who are wandering around the city and not resting.


    But this is everyone who is resting at the moment. Maybe I should have infiltrate this ce at night.


    ¡°I guess that¡¯s all. Then let¡¯s go to that junkie,¡± I said.


    In this city, I found someone who doesn¡¯t look as healthy and as energetic as everyone else. He was taking drugs. He¡¯s a drug addict. And I¡¯m going to put the me of killing those people on him.


    ¡°You killed all of those people, and you¡¯re thinking of making him take the fall?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°I will also make it look like hemitted suicide after killing those people. At least once someone figured out that something happened, it will buy us time to get reinforcement. They will think that he did it before they investigate it,¡± I said.


    That junkie is a pharmacist. And he opened the only pharmacy in this city.


    As a doctor, I can just make it look like he consumed some more drug before he did those act. I just need to find the right drug for it. Some drugs that he often used, and some others to make it look like he¡¯s experimenting on those drugs.


    This way, everyone who knows him will think that he killed everyone and himself after using that drug on himself.


    So, don¡¯t do drugs or a real bad guy will use that to me his crimes on you. Like me.

 Chapter 775 - 775 Meeting the Agent

    775 Meeting the Agent


    The drug addict pharmacist was found. He looked like he had just stabbed himself. When the truth is that I was the one who found him, killed him, and made it look like he killed himself.


    A pharmacist who is addicted to drugs. As someone who also meddle in medical knowledge, I feel ashamed of him. And every pharmacist who are drug addicts as well.


    He was found in his own house because when I stabbed him, he screamed. It was on purpose.


    I can easily make the sound blocked by air magic. But I didn¡¯t do that so he will scream after being stabbed and everyone will notice him. And I quickly enter the empty alley and hide from everyone.


    I can¡¯t hear what they¡¯re talking about. But I can see their reactions.


    They noticed that there¡¯s a blood trail from somewhere to where the drug addict pharmacist died. And they are going to follow the trail. They will find the other murdered people soon. And because all of them were killed by a normal knife, and I left the knife in the drug addict pharmacist¡¯s hand, everyone will think that the drug addict is the one who killed them.


    If that¡¯s all of the summoner in this ce, that would be great. But I don¡¯t think that¡¯s the case. And some summoners, once they noticed that the other summoners were being murdered, will escape via portal. The only way for them to leave this ce.


    After all, other than being physically strong, the other way out is to have summoner who have their familiars roaming in this world to open a portal to their familiar¡¯s location.


    Though if their familiars are in Monsters World, they can still be used. The summoners will open a portal to Monsters World. And the most likely ce their familiars are staying is in another base in Monsters World. From there, the cult members can get another summoners in another base on Earth to transfer them.


    .....


    Just how many summoners do they have? So annoying.


    Let¡¯s continue looking around.


    Since a lot of them are powerful mages, the corpses are found quickly. Stillying on their bed. Though I made it so the lock on the door to those houses seem to have been picked by someone. Again, to make it look like the drug addict pharmacist trespass those houses.


    And some other people are telling someone else. Let¡¯s follow them.


    The person they give the report to seems to be the most important person in this city. Should I call him Mayor?


    I observed the Mayor and everyone with him. Seems like even though he was assigned as the one in charge of this ce, the others don¡¯t need to be polite around him. I guess he¡¯s just in charge because no one else want that position. Everyone here is equal to the Evil God after all. Worthless to me.


    Considering everyone here seem loyal to Evil God, I might be right. I guess that¡¯s why there¡¯s no crimes happening in this ce.


    Even if they are the bad guys, Albert and the other kings can still learn a thing or two from them. If everyone is loyal to the king, there won¡¯t be much crimes.


    But what if some people¡¯s livelihood came from those crimes? Like the guards? No wonder for some areas, criminals are still important for them.


    Well, I don¡¯t have to care about them. I only need to care about destroying the cult. After all, for those who are loyal to the Evil God, or True God as they call him, we are the bad guys. And I don¡¯t deny that.


    The real bad guys will be decided by the winner. That¡¯s all there is to it.


    Some of the people the Mayor talked to is moving to a same ce. Other houses where some people are resting.


    Let¡¯s follow them. If they are summoners, then I will kill themter. Can¡¯t let anyone escape from this ce.


    Oh, wait! Is that the church? And that person is the agent? He¡¯s resting in one of the guest room there. Is he being treated like a guest by the church of Evil God?


    Interesting. Let¡¯s talk to him.


    The church is always crowded. Well, everyone here is loyal to the Evil God. So they pray every day, I guess.


    But how will I enter the church? And how will the agent leave the church?


    Wait, there are many shops here. But there¡¯s no inn at all. I guess that¡¯s why he got the permission to stay in the church. Especially when all the strong mages are there every day. They can watch over him.


    Should I wait until he leaves the church? I guess that¡¯s an option. And I can¡¯t just kill more people at the moment after they know that some are already dead.


    There¡¯s a river in the city. And from there, I can see the agent¡¯s movement. Let¡¯s hide in the river. Even if that¡¯s where everyone is getting water from, other than water mages probably, they won¡¯t notice me since I will be hiding quite deep. It¡¯s a deep river after all.


    There are some crocodiles, but I just punched them and stop them from moving. Grabbing the crocodiles so they won¡¯t float on the surface of the river. That will be suspicious seeing a fainted crocodile.


    Oh, piranhas. Lucky. I¡¯ll just feed the crocodile to the piranhas. And their bites are not strong enough to pierce through my armor and my Aura. Though these piranhas¡¯ bites are strong enough to even crush bones. There¡¯s nothing remaining from the crocodile. Scary.


    Being underwater, unless there¡¯s a master level water mage, I won¡¯t be found easily. But there shouldn¡¯t be many powerful master level water mages. Even for expert level mages, Carmen is the only one I know to reached that level as a water mage.


    Simr to air magic, water magic is not known to be powerful. So people only use if for convenience when they don¡¯t want to draw water from the well or from the river. Never for fighting purpose. Or at least it¡¯s rare for water mages to learn magic to fight since it¡¯s well-known that water magic are not that powerful.


    So I should be safe.


    But there¡¯s a powerful air mage that Airy detected before. So I might be wrong. And that¡¯s why I need to keep my guard up.


    After staying underwater for four hours, I finally see the agent is leaving the church. Must be hungry for lunch.


    Four hours being underwater is fine for me. I dived into the ocean a lot to look for treasures.


    I leave the river away from the city, then change my clothes to a clean and dry one before meeting the agent.


    ¡°It¡¯s like you¡¯re preparing for a date,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°It¡¯s because wearing wet clothes in the middle of the city is basically screaming, ¡®Hey, I¡¯m suspicious y¡¯all!¡¯ and I will be targeted.¡±


    When I get close to him, Airy told me that he¡¯s using wind magic to hear the surrounding. I think everyone here is already used to it so they didn¡¯t watch him all the time. They must be thinking that he¡¯s just a weak mage.


    Well, he can act weaker than his real strength because he learned magic control.


    I look around and see that no one is checking on him. He¡¯s spending his money to get a private ce in the restaurant. So I can just enter there. Though it will be suspicious for someone entering alone to end up meeting someone else in the private room.


    ¡°Hey, talk to yourself if there¡¯s anything I need to know,¡± I said simply and make my move before I hide under the table and hid my presence.


    ¡°...They didn¡¯t say anything about summoners here. Maybe they don¡¯t think that I know about portals, and they want to keep it a secret from me,¡± he said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t say about anything suspicious. Someone ising,¡± I said.


    The oneing is not a wind mage. But he must be a master level mage since he thinks that there¡¯s something suspicious here. Not the previous waiter who came here and take the agent¡¯s order before.


    ¡°Here¡¯s your order. Is there anything wrong, sir?¡± the waiter asked.


    ¡°Oh, did I talk to myself again? Sorry. I chose private room because I don¡¯t want to bother anyone with me talking to myself,¡± the agent said.


    ¡°Yeah. It¡¯s rare for us to meet anyone from the outside since we are too weak to go out there. At first, we enjoyed hearing you talking to yourself since we can learn a bit about the outside world. But now, many don¡¯t like it and keep away from you. I advise you to not do it too much in public at least,¡± the waiter said. And then he left.


    ¡°You gained reputation as the crazy hunter who talks to himself. He¡¯s far now.. you can talk to yourself again now,¡± I said.


    ¡°Sigh... I should really stop talking to myself. Do I annoy everyone I talk to? Even the priests at the church stopped talking to me unless I approached them first. If there¡¯s an inn here, I could leave the church and not bother anyone else. But I guess I can¡¯t. I¡¯ll just train my body until I¡¯m strong enough to pass trough the Magicless Area then. I¡¯m going back home and confess my love to her!¡±


    He¡¯s good at acting. Though I don¡¯t know if it¡¯s just acting or the truth. I guess it¡¯s a mix of lies and truths. That will make him more believable.


    Well, let¡¯s hear more about what he learned in this ce.

 Chapter 776 - 776 Poisoned Fish Sticks

    776 Poisoned Fish Sticks


    ¡°So, even though there is a church here, there¡¯s no pope or even archbishop?¡±


    While still hiding under the table, I asked the agent about the situation in this city. Since there¡¯s no one nearby, I can talk. But just to make sure, I¡¯m still hiding under the table.


    ¡°If everyone equally worship the Evil God, there¡¯s no need for rank. After all, everyone here seems to know that none of them are above the others in term of loyalty. Seems like the fight here will be the most difficult fight we will have. They are so coordinated together. Though I don¡¯t know what will happen in a real fight,¡± the agent said.


    ¡°I see. Then, order some more fish sticks. I hate the cult but they sure made delicious fish sticks.¡±


    While asking the agent, I keep reaching to the te on the table and grabbed some fish sticks. The smell is so good that I can¡¯t endure it so I keep snatching it from the agent.


    ¡°It will be suspicious if I suddenly eat more than I used to. It¡¯s just two days since I came here, but everyone knows me already. I¡¯m already a regr customer here,¡± the agent said.


    ¡°That means there¡¯s a reason you keeping here, right? Was the fish sticks that delicious?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...yeah.¡±


    ¡°Then it won¡¯t be a problem if you eat more. Since I¡¯m here anyway, you won¡¯t overeat and still be able to continue with the mission,¡± I said.


    .....


    And there¡¯s no poison either in the dishes. I guess they don¡¯t really care about this guy. Because if they are suspicious, they would have tried to poison him.


    ¡°Wow, this is good indeed. Surprisingly, it¡¯s better than Lina¡¯s fish sticks,¡± Victoria said.


    I also gave some to Airy who enjoyed it. I guess we need to have more.


    ¡°While you¡¯re asking for more, don¡¯t forget to ask some takeaway as well. You don¡¯t need to eat more so just give them to me,¡± I said.


    Reluctantly, the agent asked for more fish sticks. As for other dishes, Lina is still better than this restaurant.


    I also looked at the kitchen to see how they cook the fish sticks so I can tell Lina about itter. But what I found was something else.


    ¡°...I guess we won¡¯t be able to eat those fish sticks ever again. They mixed poison to them,¡± I said.


    ¡°What?! I guess it¡¯s time then. They can no longer let me stay here. And instead of kicking me out, it¡¯s best for them to kill me. But why poison when almost half of the people here can easily kill me?¡±


    After saying that, the agent is looking down to the table. Or to be exact, he¡¯s looking at me through the table.


    Though he can¡¯t see through the table. And even though he¡¯s trying to look at my eyes, he¡¯s looking at my neck. Well, I understand what he wants to know.


    ¡°I killed some people who could be summoners. Just to make sure that no one can escape from here. Maybe they are going to me you for it. Anyway, my n is full frontal battle. I¡¯m going to get some monsters to stay in Magicless Area, then I will return to the city and open a portal to get everyone else. This way, other than portal, these people won¡¯t be able to escape,¡± I said.


    And when there¡¯s someone who is opening a portal, I will kill them.


    My targets are summoners and tamers. I don¡¯t know the tamer who is Tiger¡¯s master, so I will try to kill everyone.


    There¡¯s also a monsters residence in this ce. Various type of monsters are gathering in one location must be tamed monsters.


    Some of them were the vampires I sent out first to this ce. They didn¡¯t die?


    I guess I¡¯ll ask them for some information if possible... I guess not. They were forced to drink something that made them act mindlessly. It¡¯s as if they have be mindless monsters. Just like any other monsters without ability to speak. They seem to only move ording to their master¡¯s order.


    I guess I can only free them once I kill their master. But they will end up fighting everyone because they have be mindless monsters. I¡¯ll just kill themter in that case.


    Probably that is why Tiger is in Magicless Area. If he stayed too long outside Magicless Area, he will be given an order to be turned that way. And to block that order, he has no choice but to stay in Magicless Area.


    Another thing was because he¡¯s too strong. If he became weaker because they turned him into a mindless monster, then there¡¯s no point in taming him.


    Maybe he was given that order already. Especially since he has stayed for too long outside of Magicless Area when he was fighting Shelia.


    ¡°They should have known that I have left the church. I guess it was just the timing. Good thing you¡¯re here. You¡¯re a doctor. Can you help me fake my death?¡± the agent asked.


    ¡°Easy. They will be here soon. Bite into this pill filled with sleeping gas. I¡¯ll give you some so you can use it whenever you wantter,¡± I said.


    ¡°Will this be enough? They¡¯re trying to poison me to kill me, right?¡± he asked.


    ¡°There are some people who didn¡¯t die right away when they were bitten by venomous snake. It¡¯s because their immunity is different from other people. If there are any doctor here, they should know that and think that you have better immunity than other people because you¡¯re a hunter,¡± I said.


    ¡°If there¡¯s no doctor, the next time we meet, I¡¯m a corpse. Understood.¡±


    After that, he continue talking to himself about the situation in this city while I keep hiding my presence.


    The waiteres soon after and gave him some fish sticks. Poisoned.


    Not just the one to eat here, the takeaway order also poisoned. As if he¡¯s going to eat those poisoned fish sticks first, then go back to the church to eat more poisoned fish sticks.


    ¡°Well, good luck. I don¡¯t think I can find anything more about this city, so I will start the fight soon,¡± I said.


    ¡°And I will pretend that I had diarrhea before I eat those fish sticks so I can have more time. See youter. If I¡¯m still alive.¡±


    Clutching his stomach, he left the private room and asked to go to the toilet.


    Stay in the toilet for as long as possible. Your survival chance will increase.


    I have nothing else to do so I sneak out to the border close to the Magicless Area. Then I summoned the werewolves, angels, vampires, and weretigers who are going to fight.


    Even if the angels and vampires rely more on their magic, their natural strength is already stronger than average mages.


    ¡°Okay, I forgot to introduce the weretigers to the vampires. Weretigers, vampires. Vampires, weretigers. Now, I want you all to spread out all over this Magicless Area so no one can escape. Then from the border, get closer to the city and kill anyone you see who doesn¡¯t have purple. Any question? If no, then you can move. I¡¯ll get mages reinforcement from the middle of the city. Good luck.¡±


    After that, I sneaked into the city again. From empty alley to empty alley. Seems like everyone has learned that there¡¯s a murder case in the city. And they actually believed that the drug addict pharmacist was the one killing the victims.


    The only reason for that must be because that drug addict pharmacist doesn¡¯t have any friends. And no one like him. So they believed that he¡¯s truly the murderer when he¡¯s just a victim.


    Well, good enough for me. Though his funeral which I think will proceed tomorrow won¡¯t happen because of me. And the ce where I will call the others from is the center of this cemetery where that drug addict pharmacist should be buried tomorrow.


    ¡°Alright. There¡¯s no one nearby, so I will open the portal. Once I do, there should be some mages who will notice us. Let¡¯s get ready to fight!¡±


    I also told everyone using the forum to get ready. And after checking the surrounding again, I opened a big portal for everyone toe.


    ¡°Sunsses! You¡¯re in charge here!¡± I said to Sunsses.


    ¡°It¡¯s weird to see through someone¡¯s eye. Especially if it¡¯s a monster. But I will do my best,¡± Sunsses said.


    Sunsses is now with Elsie. Lina¡¯s familiar. The All-seeing Eye.


    Elsie now has the power to let other people see what she sees. She doesn¡¯t need to tell Lina about what she sees anymore since she can just connect one of her tentacle to other people and have them see what she sees.


    Basically, it¡¯s as if another people other than me have Divine Vision ability. Which is good. Especially if that person is a goodmander.


    ¡°Good luck. I¡¯ll target the summoners first so I will leave everything else to you,¡± I said.


    Sunsses might be themander. But I will still continue moving on my own and do my thing. As long as I don¡¯t cause any problem, it will be fine.

 Chapter 777 - 777 Vision Sharing Ability

    777 Vision Sharing Ability


    The enemy started noticing that something was strange. And they areing this way.


    I¡¯ll leave them to Sunsses and the others. He has been informed to only givemand to some people since there are some like me who can¡¯t follow order. Like Ang.


    As for the monsters, they will slowly arrive. They will take care of those who are close to the Magicless Area or those who are trying to escape without the use of portals.


    As for me, I will look for those who can open portal to another location. I¡¯m looking for summoners to kill. They are my targets.


    Alright, they started fighting from the cemetery. And it seems like Sunsses gave decent orders. I can¡¯t hear him so that¡¯s just my guess. But seeing how they can capture those master level mages quickly, I guess it¡¯s good enough. Though it¡¯s best if they just kill the enemy. But I don¡¯t know. Maybe they have been given order to not kill as much as possible.


    Oh, we also have several summoners. Not as much as the cult, but enough to bring those master level mages who have been restrained to somewhere near the Magicless Area and get them there. And over there, some monsters will guard them.


    Maybe we should have built a prison there. Some weretigers who doesn¡¯t know much were trying to kill those who were captured. But the vampires stopped them.


    Man, I¡¯m the one who should have informed the monsters about it. I guess I missed a lot of things.


    Well, I¡¯ll go check on themter. Those vampires doesn¡¯t seem to be moving to the city. I guess they were tasked to stay and guard the prisoners. That¡¯s fine. And they must be happy to be able to drink master level mage¡¯s blood.


    .....


    Well, there hasn¡¯t been any movement other than those who detected something strange in the cemetery. I guess if the summoners haven¡¯t reached master level in any of their elements, they won¡¯t notice something was strange. So they just stay still and do nothing.


    As for summoners who are master level mage as well, Ang and the others would notice when they opened a portal and try to escape. I¡¯ll leave those summoners to them.


    When the fight be more intense, the other summoners will notice and that will be my turn to kill them. I¡¯m already prepared with my sniper rifle. With Blobbybullets filled with sleeping gases.


    I have other gases that are more fatal, but sleeping gas is what I can use best. Not only it¡¯s useful in a fight, it¡¯s also useful for surgery. So this is the gas I trained at the best. And the effect is quick for expert level mages or lower.


    For master level mages, I think the bullet wil be stopped by the barrier they created instantly. Though the bullets will still break and the gas inside will spread. So they will still be affected although the effect is slower. Unless they are air mages.


    I know that there¡¯s at least one air mage stronger than any ordinary air mage. Airy sensed that mage before. So I also need to look for that mage carefully. What if that mage can use arge area poisonous gas? That will be bad for everyone.


    Oh, I found two people who might be summoners. So I created two sniper rifles and shoot at two different location at once.


    Those two coincidentally tried to open a portal at the same time. But before the portal fully opened, I made my move. They can¡¯t open a portal as fast as I can. And I can see when the portal is slowly being created.


    So, before the portals are fully opened, I shoot at them. Both bullets pierced through their heads. So the sleeping gases inside those bullets were not necessary.


    ¡°You¡¯re probably the first person ever, both in my world and this world, to have shoot two sniper rifles at once and shoot both targets urately. You¡¯re insane,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Maybe if the people in your world is as strong as I am, then they can do it since there won¡¯t be a problem with the recoils. But even in this world, such people are rare. So I guess it¡¯s natural that no one else can do it,¡± I said confidently.


    I see some more. But none of them were opening the portal at the same time. So I just shoot at them one by one this time.


    ¡°Not going to shoot two targets at once again?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°After that first time, it¡¯s obvious for me that my left hand¡¯s uracy is worse than my right,¡± I said.


    ¡°But you killed both of them though.¡±


    ¡°The one on my right died in an instant. I shot him right in his brain and killed him instantly. As for the one on the left, although he died, it¡¯s not in an instant. I hit his brain, but it was not an instant death. He suffered from the pain for a bit before he died,¡± I said.


    ¡°There¡¯s no problem with that, right?¡± Victoria asked again.


    ¡°For that one? No. But when he was suffering, the portal was still about to open. If the next one managed to open a portal and it stay open for a while before it close, then some people would be able to escape or enter this ce,¡± I exined.


    There¡¯s no way that they don¡¯t notice us after or even during this battle. Because if the summoners died, then their familiar who is most likely to be in another ce controlled by the cult will notice. And the cult members near the monster will notice it from the monster¡¯s reaction. So it¡¯s useless to hide this battle.


    We just don¡¯t want anyone to inform other people what really happened here. Though that could be impossible as well if any summoners or tamers here could contact their monsters in another location via telepathy. And those monsters are intellectual monsters who can speak.


    Though unless they have reached master level in summoning or taming element, I don¡¯t think that their telepathy range can reach too far. But if the other location is nearby, that¡¯s possible.


    Whatever. Just kill and kill and kill. That¡¯s all I need to do.


    I¡¯m in a safe ce. Even though it should be easy for master level mages to detect my position, they are busy fighting the others.


    And Sunsses doing really well. There¡¯s no casualties at all. Just small wound. But they don¡¯t even need healing magic to recover.


    Facing many master level mages at once, Sunsses doing really wellmanding the others. It¡¯s also thanks to Elsie who is by his side.


    If Sunsses is either a summoner or a tamer, I would have hunted an All-seeing Eye for him to make a contract with. So that he won¡¯t bother asking Lina to borrow Elsie anymore.


    Wait, Elsie can share her vision with other people. And I gained my Aura ability from killing an All-seeing Eye. Maybe I can do that as well.


    Victoria told me that the ability we gained might not be every ability from the monster we defeated. Like Sonia for example.


    She got Charm Magic from defeating a subus. And Subus has wings and can fly without using magic. But Sonia only received the Charm Magic from the subus she defeated. So I might not get the vision-sharing ability that an All-seeing Eye has. But I can try at least.


    ¡°Victoria, I want to try if I can share my vision with you like how Elsie did it,¡± I said.


    ¡°Can you do it though? For Divine Vision, you can use it right away as soon as you got it, right? But even for Elsie, it was something that she recently learned. I heard that from Lina. Can you do it?¡± she asked me twice.


    ¡°If it¡¯s not magic, I can probably do it. But if Elsie used magic to do it, I don¡¯t think I can. Now, how do I do it?¡±


    While trying to find the answer, I shot another summoner trying to open a portal.


    ¡°Try everything. Sharing your Aura, or magic. Whatever it is, just try. I¡¯ll tell you if I can see what you see,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Okay. For now, let¡¯s move. Our location has been discovered.¡±


    Before they found me, I already escaped. They might have noticed me, but they don¡¯t know how I look.


    And as soon as they reached where I was before, Kron was already there fighting him. And I¡¯m already in another location.


    While targeting other summoners, I tried to share my vision with Victoria.


    First, I tried to pour magic to Victoria just like how I use magic tools. But it doesn¡¯t work.


    And next, I tried to use Aura.


    ¡°Oh! It worked! I can see Jewel fighting over there!¡± Victoria shouted excitedly.


    ¡°Really? Good. That¡¯s what I¡¯m currently focusing at. What else do you see?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...Everything. Aren¡¯t you dizzy to be able to see everything like this every day?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m used to it. I guess you can see what I see. That¡¯s good. With this... I don¡¯t know what good this will be since I move around a lot. Try to get some distance from me and check how far you need to be from me until you can¡¯t see what I see anymore.¡±


    And so, while shooting the enemy summoners, we conducted tests on this vision-sharing ability with Victoria. This might be usefulter. Though I don¡¯t know for what.

 Chapter 778 - 778 The Monsters Arriving

    778 The Monsters Arriving


    Hmm... seems like I need a lot more training for the Vision-sharing skill.


    Victoria can only see what I see after using this skill while having direct contact with my body. any part of my body. And even if there¡¯s a single piece of clothing, it won¡¯t work. I need to touch her directly. Like using my finger.


    When she tried to go a bit away from me, she can no longer see what I see. My vision is no longer shared. And that¡¯s all.


    As for Sunsses who is busy giving orders to the others, one of Elsie¡¯s tentacles have always been touching him. And Elsie always look at where Sunsses is looking. Not watching everywhere and share it to Sunsses. That¡¯s what Sunsses told me before.


    Basically, Sunsses is always looking at where Elsie is looking. But Elsie always only look at where Sunsses is facing. So other than the sight in front of him, Sunsses didn¡¯t see anything.


    Sunsses doesn¡¯t have the need to turn his face the other way when he¡¯s looking. He¡¯s blind. That¡¯s why Elsie always shared her vision of where Sunsses is facing at. That way, it¡¯s as if Sunsses is looking with his own eyes.


    ¡°I see. So I need to make a tentacle so long and that¡¯s how you can share your vision with me even if I¡¯m far from you. As long as my tentacle is connected to you, it will still work,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Most likely. And we need to know if I can use this to other people, or just to my familiars. Because maybe this is another thing I can do as a summoner,¡± I said.


    Though I believe I can use it on other people. Because unlike Elsie, I¡¯m sharing my vision while using Aura instead of magic. And I don¡¯t think that Elsie can use Aura.


    .....


    ¡°Airy, how about you? Do you want to try it?¡± I asked Airy if she want to be able to receive my vision like Victoria did.


    ¡°Sure. But I don¡¯t know if it can be done or not. I¡¯m neither a human nor a monster. I¡¯m a spirit. So I might be special and you can¡¯t do it with me,¡± Airy said.


    ¡°Okay. Just let¡¯s try it once.¡±


    I used my Aura to share my vision with Airy. And this time, like Airy guessed, it doesn¡¯t work. My vision is not shared with her.


    ¡°I guess it doesn¡¯t work. Well, let¡¯s continue the experimentter,¡± I said as I found another summoner tried to open a portal.


    As I look at the target¡¯s face, he turned toward me. He¡¯s a master level mage.


    But I keep shooting at him anyway. Three bullets in a row. To a different location to his body. Head, throat, and heart.


    The first bullet was blocked by an Ice Shield. The second bullet, which came about 0.5 second after the first bullet, was blocked again. But the third bullet was unexpected for him. Because the gap between the time I shot my second bullet to the third bullet was less than 0.1 second. Which disturb his timing thinking that the third bullet will have simr gap in time as the second bullet.


    Still, he was a master level mage. A bullet to the heart didn¡¯t kill him right away. And he managed to open a portal slightly.


    And so I shoot two more bullets. One toward the mage, and another to the portal. To where a monster is. The mage¡¯s familiar. And that monster seem to live in another ce.


    I shot the other bullet into the portal so I can have a new transfer point to the newly discovered location. I don¡¯t know where and if we can¡¯t find it, we will just have full frontal battle from the ce that Blobbybullet was.


    The summoner died after getting shot the second time. But I guess the other side already know this ce is being attacked.


    Let¡¯s check on the others again!


    I can see that the monsters areing here. Except for the few who might be guarding the prisoners in the Magicless Area, everyone ising. Especially the weretigers who are going wild.


    Seeing the weretigers, of course the werewolves refuse to hold back as the senior. The angels and the vampires were not as excited as the other two though.


    I didn¡¯t see Tiger among the monsters. I guess his master is still alive here somewhere.


    Since I can no longer find anymore summoner, let¡¯s check on the monsters this time. The tamers should be staying somewhere close to where the monsters are.


    I can see someone is giving order to several monsters surrounding him. Found one tamer. Let¡¯s kill him.


    As I shoot a bullet toward the tamer, a vampire blocked the bullet with his arm.


    I was the one who got the vampire here. And now he¡¯s an enemy I have to kill. He even blocked my attack toward his master. It¡¯s annoying that if I didn¡¯t get the vampire here, that tamer would have die already.


    Whatever. Just shoot him several more times and he will be dead.


    ...After the first shoot, the vampire got back up again and block the second bullet. He died by the third bullet, but other monsters are now protecting the tamer. So annoying.


    By this time, Kron who was flying noticed the monsters and killed the tamer before I could. He then said something to the monsters who were freed before they made their escape. Though I don¡¯t know if those monsters can escape or not. This ce has been surrounded after all.


    Kron nodded toward my direction before he flies somewhere else. There are still many master level mages in this ce.


    Sunsses is doing a really good job just in his first time participating in a battle, and also the first time he¡¯smanding us. As expected, we need him as ourmander.


    ¡°There are still some more tamers in this city. Let¡¯s kill them,¡± I said to myself.


    ¡°...¡±


    Usually, Victoria would react. But she¡¯s quiet this time.


    ¡°Victoria, what¡¯s wrong?¡± I asked.


    ¡°My clone disappeared,¡± she said.


    Her clone? Which one? I hope it¡¯s not the Blobby that I gave to someone.


    ¡°Which one?¡±


    ¡°The one you just shot through the portal. It¡¯s gone. We can no longer open a portal to that location,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°So they have someone who noticed that the bullet is your clone? Or is it just a coincidence that they killed your clone. Maybe they identally stepped on it,¡± I said.


    ¡°Maybe. I don¡¯t know. Just be careful since the cult could have someone even stronger than anyone we faced,¡± Victoria warned me.


    Okay. But at least that strong person is not here at the moment. So we just need to kill everyone.


    Well, maybe I don¡¯t need to do much by myself here anymore. The monsters have entered the city. And they are helping Sunsses to fight the enemy.


    I have told them that they need to follow Sunsses¡¯mand. Told them that they need to obey the word of someone who is blind and wearing sunsses as if hismands are my order. Though I hope the weretigers will do the same.


    When I see Grandpa Weretiger is alsoing, I went over to his location and grabbed him.


    ¡°Hey, do you know Tiger¡¯s master? Did he ever tell you how his master look like?¡± I asked.


    ¡°He only told us that his master has white beard. He tried to get a single piece of clothing from his master so we can track him by the smell, but he failed to do so.¡±


    So we just know that it¡¯s an old man.


    I look around and see two tamers with simr characteristic. Two old men with white beard. One is just a goatee, and the other is full beard.


    ¡°Hey, was it a goatee or a full beard? I see one each,¡± I said.


    ¡°Borsce only said white beard. And we don¡¯t know much about facial hair style other than our own mustache,¡± he said.


    ¡°Sigh... then I will kill both of them. Graham,e here!¡±


    I called Graham who is flying right above me. He¡¯s healing a werewolf who got burned by a Fireball.


    ¡°What is it?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m killing two people who might be Tiger¡¯s tamer. You know, the weretiger who fought Shelia? Take this grandpa with you and meet Tiger. Tell him that his master might be dead. And then get to the border of the Magicless Area to see if he is free from his contract or not. If not, do your best to push him back to the Magicless Area with this grandpa. If he¡¯s already free, give him something purple and let him participate in this fight,¡± I said.


    ¡°I understand. Let¡¯s go!¡±


    Graham and Grandpa Weretiger left the battlefield to meet Tiger. If he¡¯s lucky, then the fight won¡¯t be over yet and he can go wild and kill the rest of the enemy.


    Well, I think it will be a while until the fight is over. Although we¡¯re winning thanks to Sunsses taking themand, it took time. Though it¡¯s great that we have less casualties than usual. And the worst injury we have can still be healed by the angels.


    With this experience, Sunsses can do better in future battle. This is amazing.

 Chapter 779 - 779 Tiger is Free

    779 Tiger is Free


    There are still tamers in this ce. But I don¡¯t know where they are. So I just approach them to kill them. Just the usual.


    Though this time, I have two targets. Two old men with white beard. One is a full beard, and another is just a goatee. One of them could be Tiger¡¯s master.


    I would like to just snipe them from afar, but it¡¯s difficult this time. They are master level mages. and they are already fighting the others directly. Maybe one of them, or even both of them, were using telepathy to give orders to the monsters while fighting.


    Well, the simplest thing to do is just to kill them directly.


    The full beard one is facing Candy right now. He¡¯s a water mage as well and used water to protect himself from the Candy¡¯s fire magic. But Candy is also a lightning magic. And when she used her lightning magic, he dodged it.


    He¡¯s good. He has experience fighting strong mages.


    I would like for Candy to defeat him by herself, but I don¡¯t want to risk Graham¡¯s life or Grandpa Weretiger¡¯s life who is meeting Tiger soon.


    If I fail to kill Tiger¡¯s master soon, both Graham and Grandpa Weretiger will have to face Tiger who will be ordered to kill them. But if that¡¯s the order, those two should be able to push Tiger back to Magicless Area.


    If his master ordered Tiger to do something else, like escaping or getting his master out of the city, then Tiger would run here with his full speed to do that.


    .....


    Hmm... now that I think about it, I have never really forced my familiars to do things that they don¡¯t like. I only asked them to do something and they agreed to do it.


    I thought that it might be the differences between summoner and tamer. Summoner can¡¯t force their familiar to do what the summoner wants, while tamer can. But maybe it¡¯s just that the level is different. The higher the level, the easier it is to force our familiar to do things that we want.


    Well, I¡¯ll just continue ask them to do things instead of force them to do it. I don¡¯t know if I can do it, but I like how things are going.


    Shelia is willing to fight because that¡¯s what she wants. Graham is helping me because his sister is a victim. Ray is... I don¡¯t know. He¡¯s just loyal to me. I can feel that. As for Victoria, she did everything I ask her because she wants to.


    But maybe if I want to force them like how Tiger¡¯s master do it, I can. Though I don¡¯t like it.


    As I was approaching the man Candy was fighting, an ogre tried to block me. and I killed it to see several other monsters are blocking me.


    And not just me. some other monsters also using their own bodies to protect that full beard guy from Candy¡¯s attack now.


    Then it¡¯s clear. He¡¯s a tamer and probably the one who tamed Tiger. Let¡¯s kill him.


    Oh, wait! The same thing happened to the goatee one! They are both tamers!


    Let¡¯s kill one first and then the other next.


    The full bearded guy is also a master level water mage. Water mage is not well-known for their offensive magic. But they are quite capable in defensive magic. So it¡¯s no wonder how he can block Candy¡¯s fire magic.


    But it¡¯s just water. I can cut it.


    I killed the monsters as I made my way toward the full bearded guy, and when he noticed a guy in full armor approaching him, he created a barrier out of water to also block Candy¡¯s attack.


    I just shed Victokatana at him. Splitting the barrier and his body in two.


    ¡°Sorry to steal your kill, but I need to kill a guy like him so we can get the weretigers to join us,¡± I said to Candy.


    ¡°That¡¯s cool with me. Getting more monsters to join us is always nice. Also, I saw a vampire among the monsters tamed by the enemy. What should we do?¡± Candy asked.


    ¡°Treat them like the other monsters. Kill them unless we killed their master first and they don¡¯t want to fight us anymore,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. Good luck getting those weretigers to join us,¡± she said before she leaves to join another battle.


    Now, it¡¯s time to kill White Goatee.


    He has a lot of powerful monsters. And the ones fighting him are the new guys. The ten master level mages whom we just recruited. Old man Henry¡¯s grandaunt and the others.


    (Master! That weretiger is running to the city! His master is still alive!)


    While I was looking at the ten master level mages, I got contact from Graham. Seems like it was not the full bearded guy. It could be the goatee.


    (Dy him as much as possible! Aim for his legs!)


    If Tiger is running this way, then the master ordered him to protect instead of to kill. If it¡¯s Graham, he can¡¯t win against Tiger. But he should be able to stall him until I kill the Goatee. I just told him to aim for Tiger¡¯s legs so he can¡¯t run fast. And it should be fine knowing that he has the same regeneration ability like the werewolves do.


    If it¡¯s Tiger, he can reach this ce anytime soon. Even if Graham is dying him, Tiger will still get here. So I should kill White Goatee right away.


    ¡°Move aside!¡±


    I killed the monsters blocking the way and go after White Goatee. He¡¯s also a master level earth mage. So he protected himself with rock wall round him.


    But I just transformed Victoria into a hammer and destroy the wall. Finding him inside looking surprised as I threw a magic kunai that pierced through his heart and the hand trying to block the kunai without any resistance.


    ¡°Whoa, what¡¯s that? I want one¡±


    One of the ten master level mages who watched how I killed White Goatee wanted to have a magic kunai as well. Since I have some more with me, I gave the one I used to him.


    ¡°You can take that. I¡¯ll check if the weretigers officially joined us or not.¡±


    I asked Graham right away to see if there¡¯s any change with Tiger. And he said that Tiger stopped running. Graham ryed a message from Tiger thanking me for freeing him from his shackles.


    Great. Now the chance of another monster tribe joining us is high!


    There are still many enemy mages here. Still many tamers and monsters. But there¡¯s no more summoners I can find. So I just kill everyone I see.


    And I didn¡¯t forget to tell the weretigers that Tiger is finally free. This will increase the weretigers¡¯ morale. And seeing the weretigers like that, the werewolves¡¯ moral will also be increased.


    It¡¯s so easy to handle these monsters. I like them.


    ¡°Roy! Large scale air magic started from over there!¡±


    All of a sudden, Airy warned me of an air mage who used arge-scale air magic. I looked at where she¡¯s pointing at and see that the one that the guy that Airy talked about it facing Jewel and Ka.


    He was losing at first, but all of a sudden, Jewel¡¯s and Ka¡¯s movement slowed down. And not just them. Everyone else near that location also turned sluggish. Some of them started to sleep.


    ¡°That¡¯s sleeping gases! He¡¯s an air mage!¡±


    I shouted to warn everyone. Ka and Jewel also heard me so they tried to keep their distance from him. But now that I tried to get closer, I feel that the air magic is more concentrated than before.


    Looking at Ka¡¯s reaction who is an expert level mage, I can tell that he¡¯s at least expert level air mage. But I¡¯m still better than him in air magic.


    So once I got close, I used air magic to clear the sleeping gas. And he noticed that I¡¯m also an air mage.


    ¡°An air mage who walks around in an armor and swinging swords. You¡¯re the Aura user who caused so much trouble to us,¡± he said.


    ¡°Oh my God, you¡¯re right! But that¡¯s not important anyway. Leave him to me. you take care of the others,¡± I said to Ka and the others nearby.


    ¡°It seems like you are better at using air magic than me. Well, I just identally keep improving my air element because I keep using it for breathing for decades. I only know that we can use air magic to create sleeping gases thanks to this unknown air mage who became a doctor,¡± he said.


    ¡°Should you really tell me something like that? And where¡¯s your gratitude now that you met the unknown doctor? He¡¯s right in front of you now. Though he¡¯s wearing a mask, I can tell you that he¡¯s extremely handsome,¡± I said.


    ¡°It was you? Then there¡¯s only one thing left I can do¡ª¡±


    ¡°DIE!¡±


    Before he does whatever that one thing he needed to do, I killed him. There¡¯s no need to spare anyone here. Although Sunsses were given the order to capture as many as possible, that doesn¡¯t mean I will do the same.


    Also, it will be dangerous if this guy knows gases other than sleeping gases. Like the one I learned that will make people kill each other just by inhaling it.


    As expected, air mages are dangerous in arge-scale battle. Good thing I can kill a powerful air mage here.

 Chapter 780 - 780 Chasing a Bird

    780 Chasing a Bird


    Graham lead Tiger and Grandpa Weretiger back to the city where they joined the fight. I can see that Tiger is relieving all his pent-up anger on everyone he sees.


    Good thing I informed im about the purple cloth. That¡¯s why he avoided to hurt his own allies that he never met.


    Grandpa Weretiger tried to fight close to him, but Tiger was too strong and too fastpared to him. So he was left behind and can only clean up after those who didn¡¯t die after getting attacked by Tiger.


    As for Graham, he focused on healing the injured people. Though thanks to Sunsses, there were no major injuries received. So he just supported the others by recovering their stamina and use light magic to attack from distance. He doesn¡¯t even need to create clones to fight.


    Everyone has their part in this fight. And everyone is really doing great. Even better than all the previous fight.


    Sunsses who can see with the help of Elsie is too powerful. His orders and leadership ability is already far greater than when he fought Jewel back then. And he keeps improving as the fight goes on.


    Maybe I should check on him after this fight. Maybe I can help recover his sight by surgery. Or organ transnt that Victoria told me. Though I don¡¯t know if I should transnt two whole eyeballs to him or just some part.


    ...Maybe I¡¯ll just test it on the prisoners first before I do it on him. Though I may be too busy after this, so I¡¯ll just ask Sophie who is starting to get better than me to do the research.


    Though I need to ask him first what made him blind in the first ce. From the look of it, it¡¯s not from birth.


    .....


    Well, that¡¯s that. I¡¯ll just continue look for more summoners who is trying to escape from here or trying toe here.


    As for tamers, now that Tiger has been freed, I don¡¯t need to look for more. The others can take care of it.


    ¡°I guess we¡¯ll just watch the fight from here then. Seeing how they can fight almost equally to master level mages, I don¡¯t think they need my help,¡± I said.


    ¡°Oh, let me see. Being able to see things far away is really convenience. Though it¡¯s still difficult for me to focus on everything. You¡¯re watching everyone and everywhere at once. Although I¡¯m supposed to not have any brain, I feel like I will get dizzy,¡± Victoria said.


    When I shared my vision with her, I actually made it so the range of my Divine Vision is less than half of what I usually see. But I guess it¡¯s still too much for anyone who is not used to it.


    But even then, this is still Victoria¡¯s limit. But at least I can look around enough to protect everyone.


    ¡°You reduced the range of Divine Vision, huh? Well, this is my limit so I guess it¡¯s enough. But this can¡¯t cover everything, right?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s why I will move around a lot. I¡¯ll call Ray now,¡± I said.


    The city is big. And the distance from here to the Magicless Area is quite far. So I need to cover a lot of area by myself. To make sure that no one escapes or no onees here.


    Even if it¡¯s already toote and someone else in the cult away from this ce already knows thanks to the previous opened portal, I will still do it.


    I don¡¯t want the cult members in this ce to escape, and I¡¯m going to help the others so that there won¡¯t be any reinforcementing from the other side. That¡¯s my role as everyone is busy fighting.


    Riding on Ray while sharing my vision with Victoria, I checked to see if there¡¯s any other summoners here. Except for the ones on our side. Like the one who is responsible to deliver the captured prisoners to the Magicless Area.


    Maybe after this, Albert will ask us to clear the Magicless Area so we can build prison there. And after that, the other countries will ask the same. Along with to investigate if there¡¯s any unidentified city or vige near there. Because that¡¯s most likely where we can find more cult members.


    I don¡¯t think I cane back to the circus anytime soon. I guess I¡¯ll just ask those new master level mages we recruited to see if there¡¯s anyone who want to join the circus. There might be some who are interested.


    We can ask them if they want to travel around the continent and see what has changed after they ignore it for thest century. And I don¡¯t have to worry about Thomas and the others if even just one of them is there.


    ¡°Oh, I can see another summoner. This one already has a portal fully open,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re not going to snipe him?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Not yet. He¡¯s entering the portal to leave this ce, while there¡¯s a monstering in from there. It¡¯s a small bird but it¡¯s quite fast and able to use wind magic it seems. Okay, the monster has left. I¡¯ll kill the summoner now,¡± I said.


    I transformed Victoria into a sniper rifle and shoot a Blobbybullet at the portal where the summoner has just entered. There¡¯s no way he would expect that he would be killed by something from the portal when he the portal was just about to close.


    And now, we have a transfer point to the ce where he transported to. Though the Blobby is inside his brain, it should be okay since portals usually won¡¯t open directly to where the transfer point is. Usually, it¡¯s about one or two meters away from the transfer points.


    After killing the summoner, I stopped sharing my vision with Victoria and only focus on the fast bird. That bird used wind magic to boost its speed.


    It was originally aiming toward Sunsses. Probably because the summoner ordered it to do it.


    But now, it¡¯s just flying in the sky trying to escape.


    ¡°I want that bird. We have a master level tamer, right? Among the ten master level mages we recruited? Let¡¯s see if that tamer want to tame this bird or not,¡± I said.


    ¡°Just how fast is it? I can¡¯t even see anything,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°It¡¯s small. And when it used wind magic to boost its speed, it can be almost as fast as Spot or even Ray,¡± I said.


    After I said that, I can feel clearly that Ray is agitated hearing that there¡¯s a faster creature than him. Great.


    ¡°Ray, want to race?¡±


    As soon as I said that, Ray galloped toward the bird. Even if it¡¯s high in the sky, Ray is chasing after it.


    While everyone is in a life or death battle, we¡¯re up here racing a bird.


    A bird I¡¯ve never seen uses wind magic. Even without wind magic, it¡¯s already quite fast.


    Surprisingly, that bird can stop midair almost in an instant. Just stopped midair and changes direction.


    So when Ray got close to the bird, the bird just stopped and changes direction to avoid my hand that is trying to catch it.


    ¡°Wow, amazing! I really like that bird! Victoria, do you know what kind of bird that is?¡± I asked Victoria.


    ¡°Nope. Never seen one before,¡± she replied.


    Among many species that have never been seen, I think that bird species and fish species are have the most. And this bird is something that I have never seen.


    While still watching the battlefield, I tried to catch the bird. This bird should be able to pass through the Magicless Area easily. But while still inside there, the bird¡¯s speed would slow down significantly. And that¡¯s our chance.


    But as soon as the bird reached the border to Magicless Area, it stopped and return back before it could go any further.


    ¡°That bird is smart. I like it even more,¡± I said.


    ¡°And the word ¡®Bird Brain¡¯ doesn¡¯t suit that bird either. Anyway, how¡¯s the battle?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°The cult has lost many master level mages. It won¡¯t be long until everything is under control.¡±


    And luckily,they found the agent here. Maybe he was in the toilet for so long. That¡¯s why he is still safe.


    This time, Ray got close to the bird again. And as the bird stopped and changed direction, I quickly jumped from Ray¡¯s back and captured the bird before it could go any further.


    ¡°Got you!¡±


    The green bird didn¡¯t resist at all while it¡¯s in my hand. As if it has given up.


    So I just release it.


    ¡°You¡¯re going to release it?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°...No. It seems like it recognizes its master. Did I just get another monster for me?¡±


    ¡°...You should have been a tamer. Then no one can stop you,¡± Victoria said.


    She¡¯s right. If I¡¯m a tamer, I would be invincible being surrounded by a lot of powerful monsters. Even better if I¡¯m both summoner and tamer.


    Well, at least I got a bird. And the fight seem to be over. I grabbed the bird again to make sure that it won¡¯t fly away.


    ¡°Let¡¯s group up with the others. The fight is over.¡±

 Chapter 781 - 781 Suspicious Little Green Bird

    781 Suspicious Little Green Bird


    ¡°Congrats, everyone. This city has been purged. No casualties this time with only some people got minor injuries. You did well, Sunsses.¡±


    The battle is over. And I congratted everyone. With Sunsses take the credit for leading everyone to victory.


    ¡°...It¡¯s also thanks to everyone here. If we had just half the strength of what we have right now, or even slightly lower than half, Panthero might not be as it is today. And we could still be a kingdom without having to be controlled by Varadis,¡± Sunsses said.


    What is Panthero again? Oh, right. Rudy¡¯s previous kingdom. And he¡¯s the brother of the king, right? And that king now is a noble under Varadis Kingdom who is in charge of Panthero¡¯s territory right now.


    I heard that the country was so close to its destruction thanks to the cult. But while I was in Monsters World, infiltrating the cult¡¯s base there, Varadis helped that kingdom and stopped the cult from taking it over. Though in the end, Varadis gained enough trust from Panthero and now Varadis is the one taking it over.


    I guess Sunsses still has a lot of regret. If Panthero had half the strength of what we have right now, his country could survive.


    Though I don¡¯t think there¡¯s much change with his country right now. And I think it¡¯s better now that it¡¯s taken by Varadis.


    Varadis is a rich kingdom with abundant amount of resources. And they have more than enough to feed an entire poption of a small kingdom. At least that¡¯s what I¡¯ve heard.


    So, if Panthero insist on being independent, they might need to wait for a while until they can get back their food resources after the famine. And it will kill many of its citizens. That¡¯s why I think it¡¯s good that they are part of Varadis now.


    .....


    ¡°Well, but it¡¯s thanks to you now that we didn¡¯t get as many casualties as usual. You did a good job. Anyway, I was thinking of asking you something. If you have a chance to regain your vision, will you do it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°My sight, is it? Hmm... I honestly don¡¯t know the answer. I feel like my senses are better than they were when I could see. And after Elsie shared her vision with me, I feel like I can do more and give more precise order. Is there any way for me to continue getting along with Elsie?¡± Sunsses asked.


    ¡°Even if you ask me, Elsie is still Lina¡¯s familiar. If only you¡¯re a summoner or a tamer, I can get one for you easily. Well, just ask Lina whenever you need Elsie. And don¡¯t ask her for anything else. She¡¯s still my girlfriend,¡± I said.


    If it¡¯s Ka or the others, I won¡¯t get jealous since they can take care of themselves and would kick his nut. But I don¡¯t know about Lina. I have never seen her kicked someone¡¯s nuts.


    Though Sunny is with her so she should be fine. Sunny can protect her.


    But that means we won¡¯t have many chances to bring Sunny when we need Sunsses. But I think that¡¯s fine after seeing how well we fought today.


    ¡°Roy, what¡¯s that in your hands?¡±


    After talking with Sunsses, Ka asked me. everyone else also curious about it. Except for the monsters who just do their own things.


    ¡°This is a cute little bird that can use wind magic. Its speed is almost as fast as Ray¡¯s speed. It¡¯s an amazing little green bird. Though I don¡¯t know what kind of monster this is. Maybe Little Green Bird is what its called,¡± I said.


    All this time, I have been holding onto the bird I just caught with both my hands. The size is just perfect for me to hold in my hand. So I hold it while use my other hand to rub its head. Of which this bird surprisingly didn¡¯t resist at all.


    ¡°Look like a very tame bird. Must be because its summoner has died,¡± Candy said.


    Meanwhile, Jewel and Ang are taking turns rubbing the head of the bird. They even asked me to release the bird to see how fast it is.


    ¡°Please release the bird! I want to see how fast it is!¡± Ang said.


    ¡°Master! Do it, please!¡± Jewel also asked me.


    Should I release the bird? I don¡¯t think so.


    ¡°Well, here¡¯s the thing. This bird is not actually the familiar of the summoner I killed. And I don¡¯t know if it can talk or not, but I¡¯m sure that it can understand my words because after I said that, this bird is trying to resist. Herees Wind shes,¡± I said.


    Right after I said that, Wind shes attacking us. And the source is this thing in my hand. The bird just tried to kill us. But I used Aura to protect my hand, while the others are quick enough to protect themselves.


    ¡°That bird is someone else¡¯s familiar! And its master is not here!¡± Ka said.


    ¡°Whoa, what? You just said that you wanted the bird because it was interesting. Did I miss anything?¡± Victoria asked.


    Well, I also didn¡¯t exactly tell her everything. But this bird is interesting.


    ¡°Well, when that portal was opened, it was to a monster over there. But not this bird. There¡¯s another monster over there which should be the summoner¡¯s target location. But instead of that monster, this bird came in instead. And when I killed the summoner, this bird acted weirdly. As if it¡¯s forced to act that way when seeing the summoner was killed. Not its master,¡± I said.


    That was what happened back then. This bird is not a familiar of that summoner.


    Also, when the summoner opened the portal, I feel that someone else was there. I can feel from the movement of the air. Someone was hiding from the portal so I can¡¯t see who that is directly.


    ¡°Airy, did you feel the change in the air from that portal?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. It was weird, but I can feel that someone other than the summoner and the monster was breathing. Though it¡¯s far, but I know since after we got close to that portal, the monster inside the portal and the bird breathe differently. Then there¡¯s another person who might be a human,¡± Airy said.


    ¡°And right now, this bird should bemunicating with its master via telepathy. If that person is a tamer, the master can only send order to the bird. And if that person is a summoner, then a portal might be opened. At least if we can confirm that this bird can¡¯t talk, we know that this bird will only send its emotion via telepathy. And the master will only know about the bird¡¯s emotion but not what is truly happening here,¡± I said as I tightening my grip on the bird.


    ¡°So, this bird is a spy?¡± Candy asked.


    ¡°Take one to recognize one. That¡¯s the most likely answer. Checking from the bird¡¯s emotion, the master will try to deduct what happening here. And that¡¯s why I captured the bird so I can bring it to the Magicless Area where telepathy will not work. Then the most difficult part started there,¡± I said.


    And it will probably be the most difficult thing I will ever do. Because this bird is simply amazing.


    A bird that doesn¡¯t seem to be able to talk, can act. This one acted like its master died. And it acted like being tamed after I caught it. Even if it¡¯s because of someone¡¯s order, it is still amazing.


    And that will make it more difficult for me. And I think that facing hundreds of master level mages alone might be better than this.


    ¡°Does anyone know how to interrogate a bird?¡± I asked.


    If it¡¯s a summoner, it will be fine as long as I set it free. The master will just open a portal to this bird¡¯s location. And I will attack by surprise.


    But it won¡¯t be easy. The bird is fast. And if the summoner is good, the summoner can open and close a portal really quickly.


    The bird is also smart. To make the summoner realize that the bird is in a safe ce, I need to be far from where it can sense my with its wind magic. And it¡¯s fast enough to cause trouble even to Ray.


    ¡°Can we ckmail it or something? That bird should understand human¡¯snguage, right?¡± Jewel suggested.


    ckmailing a bird, huh? How will I do that?


    I raised the bird in my hand to right in front of my face, then with a bit of killing intent, I tried ckmailing it.


    ¡°Fried, boiled, or grilled?¡±


    ...The bird fainted.


    ¡°I think that worked way too well that the bird fainted. Anyway, good job. I¡¯ll return you all home except those who are interested in interrogating a bird and those who will investigate this ce. As for the weretigers, I¡¯ll bring you all to Monsters Vige along with other monsters. Whether you want to join us or not is up to you.¡±


    Another city is destroyed. I wonder how many more cities that we will destroy?

 Chapter 782 - 782 Taking the Bird to the Magicless Area

    782 Taking the Bird to the Magicless Area


    Now those who are staying will help me interrogate the bird. Though I don¡¯t think the bird can talk. So we will try our best to understand what the bird is thinking from its reaction.


    Other than me and Victoria, Ka and Candy is here. Just the four of us.


    As for the rest, I brought them home. I let Wendy to inform Albert about everything. Including the weretigers who are freed and will possibly join us, and the suspicious green bird I have.


    As for the weretigers, I transported them to Monsters World. To the Monsters Vige where most of them except for Tiger has been staying at.


    And now that there doesn¡¯t seem to be anymore mission we could take, I told the weretigers and the werewolves that they are free to fight as much as they want as long as no one is dying. I still need the werewolves after all. As for the weretigers, they will most likely ept me as their new king and will join us as well. So I will need them as well for further mission.


    With the angels watching over them, I don¡¯t think that anyone will die soon from a fight. Though I think the angels¡¯ healing magic will improve quickly because of the weretigers¡¯ arrival.


    Just a few days after meeting, the werewolves and the weretigers already have sense of rivalry. No one wants to lose to the other. Though from what I heard from Graham, it looks like everything will be fine. It¡¯s just a healthy rivalry. No one is going to kill anyone.


    Maybe they have gotten along so well in just one night staying together. That would be great.


    I think it would be even better if I could get many other were-type monsters. I would really be called the King of the Monsters if I do.


    .....


    Well, I will wait for their answer soon. I¡¯m busy interrogating the bird.


    I left some people in the destroyed city to investigate the city and watch it in case someone ising. We still don¡¯t know many things about the cult. And the others thought that they could get something important in this city knowing that everyone here is extremely loyal to the cult. I think I¡¯ve seen and heard many explosion throughout the battle. Those are the explosion from the weaker cult members who killed themselves by exploding their own heads.


    The two agents who were responsible for the investigation mission in the first ce also volunteered to stay. One is because he was here the longest and know more than the others, while the other is because he couldn¡¯t achieve anything even though it was supposed to be his mission.


    As long as there¡¯s no reinforcement from the cult, it should be fine.


    After we move close to the border of the Magicless Area, I stopped right in front of it.


    ¡°Victoria, before I forget, let¡¯s make a bird cage from Blobbies to make sure that the bird is unable to get away. Even without magic, its speed is still fast,¡± I said.


    ¡°Oh, right.¡±


    Then a bird cage was created quickly. I put the bird inside and carried the bird cage. There¡¯s no door so even with how smart the bird is, it won¡¯t be able to escape unless I want to.


    ¡°Will that bird cage stay inside the Magicless Area?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°Yes. But it won¡¯t change while inside the area. If you need anything, tell me before we enter,¡± I said.


    I think I know why Ka is here. She¡¯s more curious about the Magicless Area than interrogating the bird. I mean who in the right mind would think of interrogating a bird who can¡¯t even speak humannguage? They must be crazy. And I¡¯m crazy.


    We entered the Magicless Area and the two girls curiously tried to use magic. But they failed to do so. They even tried using magic items, but the magic items didn¡¯t work as intended.


    ¡°Wow, if the fis stocking got destroyed here, then there¡¯s nothing we can do to change it,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°...You¡¯re wearing it,¡± I said after I looked at her legs. Under her pants, she¡¯s wearing a familiar fis stocking that I got from a dungeon.


    ¡°Yes. Sophie gave it to me since she will not fight in the war anymore. Her fight is in the hospital. In the operating room,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°I see. And she gave it to you because you don¡¯t have neither fire element nor ice element to protect yourself from fire and ice magic. Jewel might be one of the candidate to receive it, but because she can transform into a rhinoceros, or a triceratops now, the stocking will just get destroyed when she transform. That¡¯s why it was given to you,¡± I said.


    We got quite deep in the Magicless Area and enter the vige where the previous ten master level mages were living. And we started thinking of what we should do to the bird.


    ¡°By this time, its master should notice that the familiar can no longer receive or give information via telepathy, right? Once the master can send more telepathic message, if that person is a summoner, he would open a portal instantly. Bringing many people with them. And there will be another fight,¡± Candy said.


    ¡°In that case, as soon as we leave this ce, we should go to a safe ce. Probably the Monsters Vige. Because without having to inform anyone, once they see strangers, they would fight. Or at least the werewolves and the weretigers,¡± Ka said.


    That could be a good idea. But I want to see if there¡¯s any better idea.


    ¡°If the master is a tamer, then there¡¯s nothing we can do. Except for following this bird until it returns to its master. But that will be hard to do. Maybe the master will tell the bird to not return directly if the bird sensed that someone is following. Or maybe the bird will lead us to a trap and ambush us,¡± I said.


    ¡°First thing first is to see if this bird can talk or not. I know some species of bird, even if they are not monster, can speak humannguage. It¡¯s mostly just copying the sound that human made. But if this bird is just a bit smarter than those bird, this bird might be able to speak. So what should we do?¡± Victoria asked.


    Yeah, that¡¯s right. There are some species of bird that can talk even though they are not monster. Maybe this bird is one of them. Let¡¯s check if this bird can speak or not.


    ¡°Oh, how about you used calming gas or something to trick its master if we can¡¯t find out anything here? If the bird is calm, the master will think that the bird is safe. If the master is a summoner, that person will lower his/her guard and open a portal without expecting us to waiting for ambush. If that person is a tamer, then the bird will be told to return. If you fly with the bird and make the bird feel calm the whole time on the road, you can ambush the enemy. Other than that, I have no other idea,¡± Candy suggested.


    ¡°Yeah, that would be nice. Let¡¯s wake the bird up first,¡± I said.


    With a ranch I found, I tapped on the bird to wake it up. The bird woke up and feel agitated seeing the situation.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry, I won¡¯t cook you anymore. And now that we¡¯re in the Magicless Area, you can¡¯t use magic anymore. So anything you do will be useless in this small cage,¡± I said.


    ¡°Wait, Roy! What if that bird is a beastform mage?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. Beastform mage, after entering this Magicless Area, will return to their original form since their other form is made from magic. So this one is genuinely a monster,¡± I said.


    Unless there¡¯s something I don¡¯t know. Like maybe this one is a beastform at the stage beyond master level. Though I doubt it.


    ¡°So, right now, you are free from your master. Tell me everything you know,¡± I said.


    ¡°Chirp! Chirp!¡±


    ¡°You can¡¯t talk? How about one chirp for a yes, and two chirps for a no? Can you do it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Chirp!¡±


    ¡°Also to make it seems like we¡¯re close friend, how about you you said ¡®Chirp, Bro!¡¯ whenever you answer?¡± I suggested.


    ¡°...Chirp chirp?¡±


    ¡°Oh, that was just a test to see if you really can¡¯t speak or not. Anyway, we know that you can at least reply with a yes or no. We will ask you a lot of questions so answer them honestly,¡± I said.


    The bird can at least reply with a yes or no. But if the bird is lying, I won¡¯t be able to tell. So I didn¡¯t tell the bird that I will use the bird as a baitter.


    ...Maybe I should bring Albert here. But can he tell which chirp is true and which chirp is false?


    ¡°Ka, wait here. Candy and I will go out for a bit,¡± I said.


    ¡°You want to bring Albert? Sure,¡± Ka said.


    Since Albert¡¯s lie detection is not really magic, I think that he can use it here.

 Chapter 783 - 783 Interrogating the Bird

    783 Interrogating the Bird


    ¡°You want me to go there and interrogate a bird?¡±


    After I contacted Albert and go to his location, that¡¯s the first thing he had to say to me. But that¡¯s understandable.


    All those he interrogated so far were either humans or monsters who can talk. But this bird can¡¯t talk. Though this bird is still a monster.


    ¡°That bird is still considered as monster though. It can use wind magic. But don¡¯t worry, I had it stay with Ka in the former vige of the ten master level mages,¡± I said.


    I¡¯m here with Candy since she might be able to suggest what Albert needed to ask the bird. Even if Ka is smart, Candy is better at interrogating people. It was her original job after all. And she still does it once in a while I think.


    And Ka is not alone. Victoria is with her. She¡¯s now Ka¡¯s earring.


    Though Victoria can¡¯t do anything in that form. As for Ka, if there¡¯s any monstering to her, she should be fine for a while. She used to fight with a sword rapier. And even though her magic improved, she trained in it once in a while.


    ¡°So, what should I ask the bird?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°Just some yes or no questions. That¡¯s the only thing we can ask the bird,¡± I said.


    .....


    Albert thought for a while before asking another question. The bird should be the one being asked though. Not me. But I¡¯ll answer anyway. Just to make it quick.


    ¡°Why do we need to interrogate a bird? I know it¡¯s important, but it seems like you really wanted to know what the bird knows. Why?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°Because that bird is probably the only clue we have that we got from that city. I know we captured a lot of people, but we also learned that everyone in that city is extremely loyal to the cult. I don¡¯t think they will say anything important to us. Even if they do, it will probably a lie,¡± I said.


    Before I brought Ka, Candy, and the bird into the Magicless Area, I brought some people specialized in interrogation to another part of Magicless Area where we hold the prisoners.


    When I looked at the ce, it¡¯s around the ce where Shelia practiced her kicking. So many monsters have been defeated and it¡¯s rtively a safe ce. Though among the people I brought, some of them were tamers and summoners. So they have monsters with them and it should be safe from monsters¡¯ attack.


    And even if those master level mages we captured started to fight back, those monsters should be able to handle them.


    Those people must be interrogating the prisoners right now. But I believe that we won¡¯t get anything from them. That¡¯s why I think that the bird is more important than any of the prisoners.


    ¡°If we can wait for the summoner to visit the bird, or follow the bird back to its master, we might be able to learn where they are hiding,¡± I said.


    ¡°But there should be some people who managed to open a portal back there, right? If it¡¯s you, you should at least throw Victoria¡¯s clone so you can have a transfer point at that location. But why didn¡¯t you do that?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°Seems like after my girlfriends, you¡¯re the one who knows me the best. As you said, I should have done that. In fact, I did. But Victoria told me that the Blobbies that I shot inside the portal got destroyed for some reason. Which means that whoever is staying next to those portals either aware that those Blobbybullets are monsters, or that they were told to destroy anything that enters the portal except for summoners they know.,¡± I said.


    Even master level mage would have some problem with identifying Blobbies from ordinary objects. But those Blobbies, even if it¡¯s just a few, got destroyed rather quickly.


    And those Blobbies should be inside someone¡¯s head. So it¡¯s also likely that they actually intended to destroy the corpse, but the Blobby got caught in it.


    I guess that¡¯s the most likely reason. They wanted to not leave any trace at all. Even if it¡¯s a corpse. So they destroyed the corpses.


    ¡°So we don¡¯t have any other way to find out where they are. That¡¯s understandable. But that means that you will be the one following the bird. If they can somehow n of ambushing you by using the bird as a bait, at least if it¡¯s you, you can prepare for it. Well, for now I¡¯ll go with you and interrogate that bird. It¡¯s in the Magicless Area, right? And Im just a weak mage. so I need to ride on Ray to get there sooner,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°You only want to ride a horse. Sure, I¡¯m fine with it,¡± I said.


    We return back to the border of the Magicless Area and I had Albert ride on Ray. Maybe I should get Ray dominate the horse monsters to submissionpletely and give one to Albert. Either a unicorn or a pegasus could be great for Albert.


    Though it can¡¯t be done right away. So I need to be patient and let Albert ride on Ray for today. While I gave Candy a piggyback ride as Albert and Candy discussed what they needed to hear from the bird.


    As we get there, I can see a monster is getting closer to where Ka and the bird is. So I told Candy to get down and killed the monster barehanded. I should have brought a weapon, but I forgot. Even the Reizpear in my pocket is not in its original form.


    While Albert is interrogating the bird, I asked Ka if she got anything from talking with the bird while I was not here.


    ¡°Well, I can¡¯t tell if the bird was lying or not. But I asked if its remember the way home to where its master is. The bird chirped once, which mean it remembers. Then I asked if there¡¯s other reason why the bird is obeying its master other than the contract between the two. The bird chirped once again. So this bird, even if the master is killed, might still choose to be loyal to the cult,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°There are several species of bird who are loyal only to its partner. So maybe the bird¡¯s partner is being taken as hostage. I asked that to the bird and the bird didn¡¯t answer,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Not answering could be a confirmation. Maybe its partner is not being forced but acted in its own will. Try asking the bird again,¡± I said.


    Though I don¡¯t really care whether the bird is being forced or not. I don¡¯t want to risk my life for the sake of a bird that might not help me fight against the cult. If it¡¯s a werewolf, a weretiger, an angel, an elf, or a vampire, I might help though. Then they might be willing to join us because we already have their race in our group.


    They left me thinking alone. What should I ask the bird? Albert and the others already have enough questions and I can just ask themter. So I joined just to hear what else I can hear from the bird.


    The bird mostly answered with a chirp. Sometimes, it would be two chirps. But there¡¯s another extra chirp if the bird doesn¡¯t know anything.


    And given an extra choice, it turned out that the bird answered with three chirps most of the time. So we can¡¯t get any more information from the bird.


    ¡°That¡¯s why you shouldn¡¯t give the bird a third option. Having only two options mean that if the answer is not one, it should be the other. But with third option, the bird can lie even more,¡± I said.


    ¡°But at least we got enough to know that the bird doesn¡¯t know much. It only obeyed order because its mate is being held hostage. And for the location, it only knows where to go to. It doesn¡¯t know which territory its master is located.¡±


    Well, I guess that¡¯s all we know.


    ¡°Alright. I¡¯ll return you all home then. And as nned, I will use calming gas on the bird before freeing it and follow the bird. Ray, you will go back to Monsters World and get as many horse monsters as possible to submit to youpletely. I¡¯ll bring Spot with me. His camouge ability will be useful,¡± I said to Ray.


    I returned everyone, transported Ray back to Monsters World where he can tame other horse monsters, and contacted Spot and brought him here.


    He has a phone customized for him so it can be attached alongside the Blobby I attached on him. And it won¡¯t fall when he changes his size. He can use magic to y with the phone.


    ¡°It¡¯s been a while since you asked for me. Stealth mission?¡± Spot asked.


    ¡°Yes. Will you help me?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m bored anyway. I didn¡¯t do anything much after fighting those orcas. Let¡¯s do it!¡±

 Chapter 784 - 784 Following the Bird

    784 Following the Bird


    ¡°Well, what do we do?¡± Spot asked.


    I brought him here to help me follow where the bird is trying to go. Hoping that it will lead us to somewhere the cult is hiding.


    ¡°We will follow a bird who is being affected by calming gas and see if it will lead us somewhere,¡± I said.


    ¡°Where¡¯s the bird?¡± Spot asked as he transformed into a smaller version of himself which I can still ride by myself.


    ¡°Over there. That ce is called Magicless Area. Where magic use is blocked and you can¡¯t use magic at all. The bird can use wind magic so it flies very fast. But I think it¡¯s still slower than you. With your camouge ability, we can follow the bird without the bird knowing it,¡± I said.


    The bird will be calm after I used calming gas on it. Or should I maybe use depressing gas? Making the bird feel depressed, then its emotion will be transmitted to its master via telepathy. That will possibly make its master to make a move as soon as possible instead of me having to wait for a long time.


    Then the master will open a portal to the bird¡¯s location and I can ambush whoever it is.


    But that will only work if the master is a summoner. Because when we asked the bird about whether its master is a summoner or a tamer, the bird doesn¡¯t know. What a stupid bird.


    I guess the safest way to go is by using the calming gas.


    .....


    We will release the bird in the area inside the Magicless Area. The destroyed city. Not outside of the Magicless Area where it¡¯s closest to Cassau.


    If the master of the bird noticed that the bird is calm, the master should react by telling the others to open a portal to this location. To the destroyed city. And we an go there if I someone throw a Blobby inside the portal as soon as possible, contacted me, and I will open a portal there right away. To make sure that there will be a transfer point over there.


    The times that I got some Blobbies inside the portals, they were destroyed for some reason. So I need to be quick. But I will do it while following the bird, so it will still be dyed in the end. And by the time I opened a portal, something could happen.


    We already decided what to do. I¡¯ll just follow their decision.


    ¡°It took a while to interrogate the bird but we can go now,¡± I said.


    At the edge of the Magicless Area, the bird is still there. Being held in a cage.


    I grabbed the cage and use Aura to make the cage stronger. So that the bird won¡¯t be able to destroy it with wind magic.


    Then I used air magic to create calming gas as soon as we got out of the Magicless Area, and waited until the effect shows.


    When the bird look calm enough and seem like it wanted to sleep, it suddenly started pping its wings. Trying to move.


    ¡°Alright, we¡¯ll follow the bird as soon as it got out of the cage. Spot, keep your eyes on the bird and get close enough to it so I can still use my magic on it. Meanwhile, I will look at where its moving to,¡± I said to Spot.


    ¡°That¡¯s easy. Though I know that you can focus on everything at once,¡± Spot said.


    That might be true. But if I want to be safe, I need to focus on things other than the bird. Everywhere around us at once. So if Spot just focus on following the bird, I don¡¯t have to focus on the bird. I just need Spot to make sure that the bird is still within the range of my air magic.


    And since the bird is moving fast, using air magic from behind the bird won¡¯t affect the bird so much. So I need Spot to fly beside the bird.


    I released the bird and it flew off instantly. Stopping mid-air for a bit before moving to its destination. To the destroyed city.


    ¡°Whoa, that was quick. I can also float mid-air, but I can¡¯t stop all of a sudden like that. the bird is quite good. But my top speed is still faster than that bird even with its wind magic,¡± Spot said proudly.


    After meeting Ray, I realized Spot¡¯s personality. He loves to race. And I think once in a while, when both of them are together, they would race without even asking for my permission.


    Well, it¡¯s not like they needed my permission.


    And now that Spot meet another fast creature, he was thinking of racing the bird. Though I told him to stop that. Unless the bird will join us. Which I don¡¯t think it will.


    ...Unless I threaten the bird with its partner. Like how the bird is being forced to obey its master. Not only because of the contract, but also for the other reason. Which was its partner that got captured.


    And if its partner is not really captured and instead pretending to be captured since it is moving by its own will, then I don¡¯t think that it will be possible for this bird to join me.


    How do I find out if a bird is cheating on its partner or not? And how do I show the evidence to a bird?


    Am I really going to investigate birds¡¯ affairs?


    The bird didn¡¯t go to the city. The bird flies over the city. Seems like its destination is way to the north. Maybe Varadis? We¡¯ll check it.


    We passed over the city and reached the other side of the Magicless Area. The area I haven¡¯t been to.


    So I captured the bird again and put it in a cage.


    ¡°Spot, can you fly without magic?¡± I asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s impossible,¡± he replied.


    ¡°I guess I¡¯ll carry you all the way to the other side then.¡±


    ¡°But my small form is using magic. So I might return to my original form if I enter,¡± Spot said.


    ...I don¡¯t think that carrying Spot in his original form all the way to the other side, with possibilities of encountering other monsters, is a good idea.


    ¡°Then I will leave you here. Once I¡¯m out of the Magicless Area, I¡¯ll open a portal for you. Stay in your small form so I don¡¯t have to open arge portal for you,¡± I said.


    This time, I run past the Magicless Area without caring about anything. I encountered some monsters, but I¡¯m already prepared with my sword-cane. So those in the way, I killed them. And those who are too slow, I ignored them.


    Again, after reaching the exit, I opened a portal for Spot toe. Then I used calming magic again on the bird before freeing it and then we follow the bird again.


    ¡°Even if I can¡¯t fly, I can still slither quite fast. Though I don¡¯t think I can chase a bird flying in the sky,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°Yeah. Good for you. And your strength alone is enough to defeat all the monsters you encountered. Probably. Oh, right! You haven¡¯t met the weretigers yet, right? Want to meet them after this?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Have they decided to join? If so, then you will probably ask for their help if we get into battle on our destination. We can meet at that time. Oh, the bird stopped again. Is it checking where the bird need to go?¡± Spot then stopped and stay floating mid-air.


    I looked at the bird who has stopped and floating in the sky. Then it just continue flying toward its original destination. As if the bird had just been getting some new order by its master while it¡¯s flying.


    ¡°Maybe it¡¯s getting new orders from its master. And the master is checking its emotion right now. Do you think that being calm is suspicious?¡± I asked Spot and Victoria.


    ¡°Don¡¯t ask me. I just got here. Ask Victoria,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°Whatever will be, will be. Even if it¡¯s an ambush, we might still be able to get something out of it. And I think you should be fine facing multiple master level mages at once,¡± Victoria said.


    That makes sense. No matter what happened, it will be fine for me.


    Even if we got transported to a Magicless Area and can¡¯t use magic, I will still be fine. As for Spot, he isrge and strong. He will be fine for a while.


    This time, I¡¯m already prepared with a sword-cane in my hand. Even the cane is strong enough as long as I use Aura to cover it.


    ¡°I guess you¡¯re right. Spot, just get ready to fight in any situation. Even if it¡¯s a ce where you can¡¯t use magic, if you just keep moving your body, no one will be able to get close to you. And we have something that we can eat so we will still be able to use magic in that ce for a while.¡±


    Just in case, since I don¡¯t know how long we¡¯re going to travel, I wear my armor to cover my identity. And now, we just continue following the bird.

 Chapter 785 - 785 An Island Kingdom

    785 An Ind Kingdom


    We flew for over two hours already. And we¡¯re already in Varadis¡¯ territory.


    The bird stopped once in a while to rest and prey on some worms. For something this strong to only eat worms is quite unique. I think it¡¯s easy to take care of this bird if I ever get simr species to join us.


    This bird also eat fruits. It can easily kick away some monsters or animals trying to feed on some fruits, and just stole it from them.


    Even when the calming gas is still in effect, it can¡¯t erase hunger. And the bird is still vicious enough to kill those in the way.


    Though I think the bird no longer noticed us. Thanks to Spot¡¯s camouge skill, the bird seems to have thought that we no longer chase after the bird. And maybe that¡¯s why it¡¯s more rxed than before.


    Even with calming gas, the target¡¯s original personality is still there. And a bird who seem to be forced to follow order seem to stop caring about us meant that it really thought that we¡¯re gone already.


    ¡°I wonder when will the bird stop by. We¡¯re already close to the Capital of Varadis,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Really? Maybe it¡¯s further north. Let¡¯s ask old man Henry if he knows anything about what¡¯s up north,¡± I said.


    I took out my phone and texted old man Henry if he knew anything about the target location. Or maybe if there¡¯s any Magicless Area nearby. Since there¡¯s a city surrounded by Magicless Area in Tatrama, there might be another one in Varadis.


    .....


    [There should be a fishing vige up north. But we have investigated that ce several times so I don¡¯t think that ce is the destination]


    That¡¯s the reply I got from old man Henry. And I agree with him.


    I don¡¯t think a vige is enough to supply an entire city full of members of the cult. So it shouldn¡¯t be that vige. Maybe there¡¯s another hidden city all the way to the north. But beyond that, it should be the sea, right?


    As we continue following the bird, I got another text message from old man Henry.


    [I just got some information from Great Aunt Halley. She said that there should be an ind further up north which was originally an independent kingdom back in her days. We never heard of such things in these recent years. She will text you about it soon. You can ask her more if you want.]


    So there¡¯s an ind up north? And it used to be a kingdom?


    What about now? If it was back in the past when Halley was still a princess long before she became master level mage, I think it should be around 150 years ago. Back when she should still involve herself in politic in her country. Long before she got obsessed with strength.


    Soon I got a text from her.


    [I heard about you going to the north. Past the north of Varadis, way in the sea, there¡¯s a kingdom that used to be hostile against us a long time ago. The kingdom should be destroyed because of a powerful monster that appeared at the time. Even master level mages couldn¡¯t do anything about it. But whatever the case, you might be going there. At least we know that the ind used to be a habitable ind. Though I don¡¯t know about the monster there]


    That¡¯s the text I got from old man Henry¡¯s Great Aunt.


    An old kingdom that¡¯s erased from history because of a powerful monster.


    Wait! A monster powerful enough that master level mage couldn¡¯t do anything about it? Maybe the water-type monsters like the orca that the cult tamed weren¡¯ting from Monsters World. But it could be from this world.


    They got tamed and are roaming free in the ocean until their master needed them. So that ce is likely where a lot of tamers tamed sea creatures.


    Just taming a single orca, which seem to be a king, and that¡¯s enough for hundreds of orcas toe and created wave powerful enough to be called tsunami. What if there are more of them?


    ¡°Spot, I might need your children¡¯s help,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s fine. They are restless after thest time we fought and wanted more. So it will be good for them to fight again,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°Even if they are outnumbered? I think that if they can fight well onnd, they can get along really well with other monsters,¡± I said.


    Maybe the sea serpents are simr to werewolves and weretigers. And I think that there could be an endless fight if they all live together.


    Even now, I think that some werewolves and weretigers are fighting. Hopefully, not to the death.


    I know that the werewolves can be trusted to obey my order. But I don¡¯t know about the weretigers since I haven¡¯t officially said that I¡¯m their king.


    ...How do I be officially recognized as the Weretiger King? Is it the same as how I got recognized as the Werewolf King? By killing their previous king?


    I hope it won¡¯te to that. Though it¡¯s already obvious who will win. But killing someone with great potential is a huge loss for us.


    But if the one I had to kill is Grandpa Weretiger, I think it would be okay. He¡¯s old. He won¡¯t have much left to live.


    But since Grandpa Weretiger is still alive when Tiger became the strongest, I don¡¯t think it will end in a deathmatch. Which should be okay.


    ¡°We¡¯re stronger than we were back then. Even if there will be some strong monsters, we can handle them for a bit. At least enough until you cane and help us if needed,¡± Spot said.


    Yeah. If the battle there is lead by Sunsses and at least it will go as well as the battle from before, then yes. I can probably help Spot and the others right away.


    The others are still resting. It hasn¡¯t been long since the battle was over. And there will be another battle soon. Which is not something strange and it has happened several times.


    We fight several times in one day, rest for a few days, and then we fight again. Though I think this time, I will get more reinforcement.


    But I don¡¯t think it¡¯s a good idea to attack today if the ce we¡¯re going to is surrounded by water. Again, I¡¯ll just investigate that ce for a while and once I had enough information, I¡¯ll get the others toe.


    We¡¯re at the sea now. We just passed the fishing vige old man Henry mentioned. Seems like we¡¯re really going to that ind Halley mentioned.


    With the bird¡¯s speed, after another hour of flying, I can finally see an ind with my Divine Vision.


    ¡°I can see an ind which might be the bird¡¯s destination. I¡¯ll stop casting air magic now. The effect will continue for a while but we still need to be careful. Spot, don¡¯t stop using your camouge skill,¡± I said.


    ¡°I won¡¯t. But if it¡¯s a Magicless Area, then the camouge skill can¡¯t be used. And it¡¯s the first time we go there, so I think it¡¯s best if you just run instead of riding me,¡± Spot suggested.


    ¡°Alright. Turn smaller then.¡±


    Like we usually do in the past, Spot is now wrapping his body around my waist while using his camouge skill.


    If that city has something that block us from using magic, then Spot¡¯s transformation will be undone and he will turn back to his original size. And without camouge skill, everyone can see him.


    But if I walk, and if I use air magic at all time on my surrounding, I can sense where magic is being blocked. And we can avoid that ce then.


    The closer I get, I can start seeing some people in that ind. There¡¯s also an old castle which should be belong to the former kingdom of... whatever its name was.


    I split up from the bird and look for an empty ce tond in the ind.


    Then before I started investigating, I sent a post to the forum so everyone can read it.


    [Landed on an ind north of Varadis which should be an old kingdom during Halley¡¯s era. We¡¯ll start investigating now so there might not be anymore post from me]


    What should we check now? The water in the sea is deep, so if I want to check what monsters live there, I need to swim deeper. But even then, there are many weaker fishes or monsters. If they noticed me, and they are contracted monsters, then I will get found out.


    For now, my goal is to follow where that bird will stop. Who is the bird¡¯s master. Maybe I can get some information from the bird¡¯s master.


    The bird is entering a castle andnded on the hand of a man there. Is he the bird¡¯s master?


    From the look of it, it seems like they don¡¯t know that I¡¯m here. But I can¡¯t see the master¡¯s face unless I want to get caught.


    At least I know where the bird¡¯s master is sleeping at. I can go thereter.


    Let¡¯s see what I can get from this ce before I called the others.

 Chapter 786 - 786 There are Three Main Islands

    786 There are Three Main Inds


    I need to investigate this ce. But the security is much more tighter than any location I¡¯ve been.


    Not only there are mages, there are also monsters with good senses. Some of them have good hearing with their big ears, and some have good sense of smell like beast-type monsters.


    The good thing is that there¡¯s no All-seeing Eye among the monsters. So I don¡¯t think that they can see me.


    Thankfully, I can hide myself quite well already. I just need to be careful to not be seen. With Spot¡¯s camouge skill, it¡¯s possible. As for smell and sound, I¡¯ll do my best to cover them with Aura and air magic.


    ¡°There are more people here than in the previous city. More monsters as well. We might need to attack with full force,¡± I said.


    ¡°Be careful though. If you kill everyone all the time, you will never know where the cult leader, the Evil God, is hiding. In fact, some people that you killed maybe some who knew the real location of the Evil God,¡± Victoria warned me.


    ¡°I can¡¯t help it. If they¡¯re with the cult, I would try my best to kill them as soon as possible. I think some of them could be like Veronica, Celestine, and some other former members of the cult who ended up joined us. They were being forced to do things they don¡¯t want. But I killed them before I know that. And I think it will happen more often,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then just let Sunsses lead everyone to fight. While you just need to clean up the rest. If it¡¯s the others, I don¡¯t think they despise the cult as much as you do. So when they¡¯re told to capture as many prisoners as possible, they would do it,¡± Victoria said.


    I think that¡¯s a good idea. Maybe the reason that we haven¡¯t found the Evil God at all was because I keep killing those who knew that information. Where the Evil God is.


    .....


    So, I just need to kill less people. I will just watch Sunsses lead the others to victory while trying my best to make sure that there won¡¯t be anyone escaping.


    Just like before. But the purpose is different.


    Previously, I did the same. Sunsses lead everyone, while I kil those trying to escape. But that was for Sunsses to show hismanding ability. I didn¡¯t interfere much so we can see how good Sunsses is at leading.


    But now, I need to do the same. But it¡¯s so that we can find the Evil God sooner.


    But the thing I¡¯m afraid of is the fact that even if the Evil God died, there will still be many loyal believers. And the cult won¡¯t end that easily.


    But at least if I killed the Evil God, the cult will slowly crumble from the inside. And the sessor of the cult won¡¯t be as powerful as before because they will be divided.


    ¡°I¡¯ll hold back from killing as many people as possible. For now, let¡¯s get in. The security is tight, but there are still some blindspots... Well, I don¡¯t think we can use them,¡± I said after I used Divine Vision to check on the area.


    ¡°Why? If there are many blindspots, you can get in easily, right?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Because they are traps. Those blindspots will lead those who enter to enter a prison. There are some people there. And the fact that they are not being restrained means that the prison has something that block the usage of magic,¡± I said.


    After watching the ce, I can tell that the blindspots are purposely created so that intruder will enter from there. And once the intruders enter deep inside, they will fall to a pitfall trap that will lead them to the prison. Probably that ce has simr effect as the prison. Magic is unusable there. So intrudes can¡¯t fly.


    If it¡¯s me, I can use Aura to not fall down. Either step in the air, or just stick my body to the wall or ceiling. But even then, there¡¯s nowhere to go from that ce.


    It¡¯s great that I have Divine Vision. But I wonder where those prisoners came from? Who are they and why are they being imprisoned?


    Maybe they are traitors of the cult. They got found out betraying the cult and got imprisoned. But they are still alive. So I guess the cult wanted to try and brainwash them so they won¡¯t betray them anymore.


    I told everything to Victoria and she was shocked to hear what I said.


    ¡°Then how do we get in?¡± she asked.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s the good part about having Divine Vision. I can see well when the guards are not paying attention. I just need to make sure that I go through a ce that no one is looking at,¡± I said.


    Unsurprisingly, the people here are doingbor like ordinary people. Farming, carpentry, and fishing, they do it without a care even though they could be master level mages.


    Just how did the cult get so many loyal believers like that? Loyal enough to tell master level mages to go to the field and start farming?


    Did the cult just say something like ¡®Provide for yourself and other people, and you will be closer to the Evil God¡¯ and they believed it? Oh wait. True God here. Not Evil God.


    But what I need to do is not just blindly enter the city. I need to go to where I can learn something.


    And the obvious ce I need to go is the castle. Where the bird¡¯s master is staying.


    There are some other people there but I can¡¯t see very well since it¡¯s quite far. I need to make a round trip around the ind first and prepare a route. Maybe several routes since just one won¡¯t be enough.


    Other than that, it¡¯s also up to luck. We told the bird before to lie if asked. To tell its master that the bird was trying its best to escape and not because I freed the bird.


    Whether the master believe the bird or not is unknown. But at the moment, it seems like they won¡¯t send any reinforcement anytime soon to the destroyed city. Or maybe they have given up on that cit and don¡¯t care about it at all. Which I doubt to be the case.


    Whatever. I¡¯ll just take a walk around the ind and investigate.


    Even if the cult send reinforcement to the destroyed city, I don¡¯t think they will send their full force. Which mean those who are currently in that ce should be enough to stall for time or maybe even to fend them off.


    While I walk around the ind, I also used my phone to keep sending report to the forum. And ask other people¡¯s opinion about my n.


    [Prisoners? Where do theye from?]


    [I think there will be a lot of battle in the sea]


    [It shouldn¡¯t be just an ind, right? There might be other things there. Like a mountain, a forest, or something. Go check it first]


    [We¡¯ll keep close eyes on the city surrounded by the Magicless Area. You can take your time to investigate. Don¡¯t worry about us here. We will fight anyone whoes]


    I guess I won¡¯t be done in one day. But I guess that¡¯s a good idea.


    Also if there¡¯s someone isted from the others or being avoided, I can try to kidnap them and bring them away to be interrogated.


    But we will still need to take a round trip around the ind. It will be more annoying if there are other inds than this one.


    And my guess is unfortunately correct.


    After walking around the shore while making sure that no one sees me, I got a text from old man Henry.


    [I found a record about that old kingdom. There should be two other inds other than the main inds. I think you need to investigate those ces as well]


    So, there are three main inds for this old kingdom. I don¡¯t know which ind I¡¯m in. But the three, if connected with lines, will form a triangle.


    If I¡¯m in the closest ind to the continent, then the other inds are in northwest and northeast. So it¡¯s like a reversed triangle on a map.


    Unless you read the map upside down. Then, that¡¯s a normal triangle.


    North is always to the top of the map after all. I know that much.


    ¡°There are two other inds I need to investigate. But we¡¯ll check this ind first.¡±


    Since there¡¯s no one nearby, Spot became slightly bigger so I can ride him. And we fly to the sky to see from above.


    After a round trip, I conclude that this ind is... just a normal ind. With a castle and some viges nearby. There¡¯s also a small volcano. I guess that¡¯s why thend is fertile.


    After that, I checked to the other two ind. I was right that I¡¯m at the southernmost ind among the three.


    The other two inds also simr. But instead of a castle, they have normal cities and some viges nearby.


    The only ce I haven¡¯t checked is underwater. But I can¡¯t do that or I will be discovered by some tamed monsters.


    Even when flying, I avoided trying to get the attention of other flying monsters. I need to be extra careful here.


    For now, I¡¯ll check the two cities first before checking the castle. But I¡¯ll do that tomorrow. I¡¯m hungry.

 Chapter 787 - 787 Fire Dragon King

    787 Fire Dragon King


    Three inds. Three cities and many viges. I¡¯ll check on one of the ind without the castle first.


    It¡¯s an ind I saw from the sky before. An ind filled with more monsters than the people. They are most likely tamers and the monsters are contracted monsters.


    I think each ind will have several summoners. So maybe some of them are summoners.


    On other inds, there are monsters as well. But not as many as the monsters here. Some of them were even dragons. And they were so close to detect me. Either because they can sense my mana or because their enhanced senses. I don¡¯t know.


    Though I don¡¯t think that any of those dragons are stronger than Spot. So if there¡¯s a fight, I think we will still be fine.


    I also have be much stronger than a regr dragon. Though if it¡¯s a dragon the size of Andro, I don¡¯t think I can kill it. But it¡¯s fine since there¡¯s no creature that size that I can see.


    Well, let¡¯s just focus on getting more information here.


    Monster, monster, monster, human, monster, humanoid monster, bird monster, human...


    There are too many monsters here. And I don¡¯t think I see anyone important in this ce. To the cult, not to this ce.


    .....


    They even breed some monsters. Like boars, rabbits, and anything else that can be eaten.


    They tamed some of them, and forced them to breed so they can provide for several cities. Maybe even an entire country if they have some more breeding ce like this.


    But using a tamer as breeder is a good idea. There¡¯s no need to hunt those monsters anymore if they can breed. And there won¡¯t be anyck of meat.


    And if I look closely, I think the monsters that were tamed are most likely something like a king or a leader of the species. So, those lower-ranked species had no choice but to obey. That¡¯s how they can easily get some monsters to raise.


    But that¡¯s not all. I can see a dragon, the same size as any other dragon, but no other dragons nearby dare to get close to it. They are fire dragons. All of them have red scales on their body. But that one dragon look wiser than any other dragons. And above its head, the dragon has a pair of golden horn. As if that horns are its crown


    And that dragon has been looking at me for a while. While other monsters or humans didn¡¯t even notice me, that dragon did. But instead of rming its master, it just looked at me.


    ¡°So... there¡¯s a dragon that has been staring at us for a while. Should we greet it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Is it that dragon with golden horns? Let¡¯s go,¡± Spot said.


    I¡¯m still riding on him in the sky. Just a one-seater serpent for me alone to ride. And if there¡¯s a ce Spot wanted to go, I can¡¯t do anything since he¡¯s not my familiar. And I don¡¯t care anyway.


    Also, even though I¡¯m an expert level summoner, after facing the cult so many times and see how their familiars, either tamed or summoned, would obey their master blindly, I feel like I still have a lot to learn as summoner. Maybe I need to focus on that now since my Aura and air magic are not improving as much as before anymore.


    Anyway, we¡¯re riding toward the resting fire dragon. Should I call it Fire Dragon King?


    As wended on the ground, the other dragons started to notice us. I thought that I need to kill them, but turns out, I don¡¯t have to.


    ¡°ROAAAAAR!¡±


    The Fire Dragon King roared and the other dragons turned tame. But now that I looked closer to those dragons, I can see something was wrong with them.


    ¡°...They are clones. Are they artificially created to be your clones?¡± I asked the Fire Dragon King.


    ¡°...Something like that. I wish they would just kill me,¡± the Fire Dragon King said.


    As expected, this one can speak. I don¡¯t think the Fire Dragon King is hostile, so let¡¯s get as many information as possible from it.


    ¡°So, you were tamed, and forcefully getting your blood, flesh, scales, and ws ripped out of your own body so the people who captured you can make clones of you. No wonder they look different than the fire dragon I faced before,¡± I said.


    I looked inside their body. And I can see that there¡¯s no big differences between the clones and an ordinary fire dragon. But I can somehow tell that those are cloned creatures from their hearts. The clones¡¯ hearts are beating faster than normal.


    ¡°Unfortunately, yes. Are you their enemy? If so, I have a wish I want you to grant. In exchange, I will tell you everything I know,¡± the Fire Dragon King said.


    ¡°I will do it if possible. But let¡¯s do itter. Some people areing here because of your roar. Is there anywhere we can hide?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Hide under my wing and use that invisibility skill you used before. Don¡¯t move and don¡¯t use any magic. I think you know what to do,¡± he said.


    We hide under his wing and I used Aura to hide my presence. Then three people came from the sky. Just one of them is a master level wind mage. one must be the dragon¡¯s master. And the other is... just tagging along, I guess?


    Let¡¯s listen to them first.


    ¡°You roared again today. Do these clones annoy you again? It¡¯s normal. They are your clones. You can say that they are your children,¡± one of them men said. Not the tamer, and not the wind mage. I guess that man is the one who created the clones.


    ¡°Just kill me. I don¡¯t want my body to keep being defiled by you.¡±


    ¡°Can¡¯t do that. You know that even with your strong mentality, you can disobey your master¡¯s order. But your clones made of pieces of your body, are parts of you. So they will still obey your master instead of you. And if you die, the contract will be broken and your clones will run wild until we tamed them all. We need you to be alive.¡±


    I see! They are just like Blobbies!


    Although I¡¯m only Victoria¡¯s master, her clones are still under contract. That¡¯s why they can still transform to things I wanted.


    And if Victoria is dead, which is unlikely, the other Blobbies will still be alive. But without a master to obey.


    So, if I kill the Fire Dragon King, then his clones will go wild and destroy everything. That¡¯s the most likely result if I do.


    And the Fire Dragon King is also strong enough to not obey his master¡¯s order. I guess intellectual monsters will not be easy to get as your subordinates. And I¡¯m lucky that I¡¯m strong enough to get the werewolves and the angels to follow me. As for Victoria and Ray, those two are entirely joined by luck.


    I heard more about the Fire Dragon King from their conversation. The Fire Dragon King has pieces of his body ripped to make those clones. Although the Fire Dragon King has great regeneration ability, because he has been abused for so long, it doesn¡¯t work as well as it used to be.


    And now, they are trying to get more pieces of his body to turn into clones. And there will be more fire dragons.


    So this is one of the cult¡¯s secret. They cloned monsters. Now I can see how the cult destroyed the world. Maybe there are more monsters being forced to do this.


    After they took some pieces of meat, ws, and scales, they left. They didn¡¯t notice us under the Fire Dragon King¡¯s wing.


    ¡°So, are you not a Fire Dragon King? And they are just your clones so they obey you?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I am the Fire Dragon King. Or at least I was until I got captured. I told my kin to escape far from where I was caught and to never get themselves involved with humans. But in the end, they were all captured and tamed. Some who fight back were killed. So I¡¯m all alone. At least in this world,¡± he said.


    I guess he knows the existence of Monsters World. That¡¯s why he said this world.


    ¡°So, do you want me to end your life?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Not just me. There are other monsters who want to die. In fact, we should have died already. But they feed us some medicine that keep us alive. And that medicine also made us unable to use our strength. I want you to kill us all,¡± he said.


    ¡°Okay. I can do that. But that¡¯s forter. We are from a alliance who want to destroy the organization behind all of this shit. And after investigating a bit, we will fight them here. We will kill you and other monsters right before the fight. That way, your clones will go wild and can help us fight the cult. Or if you want, I can kill your master and free you. What do you think?¡± I suggested.


    ¡°I want to, but I can. The medicine, once I stopped consuming them, I would die. And I had enough of living already when all my family members were killed by these bastards. Just let me die.¡±


    I guess it¡¯s impossible to get him to join us. I really want a dragon army.


    But maybe there are other monsters here who want to join us. If so, that would be great.


    For now, let¡¯s listen to what he can tell us.

 Chapter 788 - 788 Other Dragon Kings

    788 Other Dragon Kings


    Fire Dragon King told us everything he knew.


    There are other Dragon Kings that got captured. Earth Dragon King, Ice Dragon King, and even the fastest Wind Dragon King.


    How do they got caught? Does the cult took their families hostage?


    The Fire Dragon King knew the other three Dragon Kings. And he was thetest one among the four to be captured. He was shocked to know that the other Dragon Kings were captured as well. But he didn¡¯t know how that happened.


    Well, it¡¯s not really important to me. After all, I will probably kill them all.


    Those three are in this same ind as well. So if I just travel for a while, I can find them.


    ¡°Those three are the same as me. They wanted to die but they can¡¯t. Just like me, they are being forced to eat those drugs that will make them weak while forcing them to stay alive,¡± Fire Dragon King said.


    It¡¯s horrible what the cult put these Dragon Kings through. But I¡¯m also interested in that medicine.


    If used wisely, that medicine can be used to prolong someone¡¯s life. Maybe make them stay a live longer while I operate on their body. And it can be long enough for someone to finish the operation before the patient die.


    .....


    Now that I think about it, most surgery operation I know came from the future. Someone must have learning it at this time. And the surgeon who did it could be a member of the cult. Maybe they hid many other studies about other diseases so they can¡¯t spread.


    Now that is interesting.


    In my previous life, the research of medicine advanced rapidly around that time when the war was so intense. And the most well-known doctors came from Varadis. Which if I didn¡¯t get involved with them in this life, it¡¯s likely that Varadis will fall under the cult. So we can say that it was the cult who spread the knowledge of medicine in my past life.


    And it¡¯s safe to say that they didn¡¯t share all the other knowledge that they found other than to their fellow believers.


    I¡¯ll inform this to old man Henry. Though I think he already figured it out and asked the doctors there.


    After all, I have told everyone of my terrible memory. Especially in remembering people¡¯s names. So they should have figured it out by themselves after hearing the story of my past.


    If not, then I¡¯ll just ask them to remind them about it.


    So while I listening to the Fire Dragon King¡¯s information, I yed with my phone and asked everyone about it. Seems like they figured it out by themselves already.


    ¡°What are you doing?¡± the Fire Dragon King asked.


    ¡°This is a device that let us contact other people from far away. I¡¯m rying the information you gave me to everyone,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s cool. How many people do you have?¡± he asked again.


    ¡°I thought that it was enough to fight the cult. But seeing how they have so many cities under them, and everyone is loyal believer, it may not be enough. That¡¯s why I asked if you want to join us before. But with your condition, I guess it¡¯s impossible,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. I really wanted to kill them myself. But I have been using that drug for so long that my body won¡¯t move as I want to. Just kill me as nned,¡± he said.


    ¡°Not yet. Fire Dragon King, Earth Dragon King, Ice Dragon King, and Wind Dragon King. If you can teach us something about your element and get us improve our magic and get stronger faster, that would be great. Our strongest mage is just an expert level mage. But she has those four elements. If you can teach her, that would be great,¡± I said.


    ¡°Teaching, huh? Yeah, I know a thing or two about fire. If she can get stronger and help me with my revenge, I will teach you all I know,¡± he said.


    So he continued talking about what he knew about this ce and the people here. I will get Ang, and possibly other fire mages toe here.


    I think we won¡¯t attack these inds anytime soon if they can help us improve our strength. Maybe after a week.


    For safety reason, the Dragon Kings are always far from other people. They are strong enough to not obey their master¡¯s order. So it will be dangerous for them toe here.


    That¡¯s why it¡¯s rather safe here. I just need to be careful when those people came here.


    And since they have just left, there shouldn¡¯t be anyoneing. So I called Ang and ask her if she wants toe here. I also called Candy since she¡¯s a fire mage as well. She can also learn something and share it with the others who can¡¯te.


    They came. And I had them touch Spot so they won¡¯t be seen by other people just in case.


    The Fire Dragon King taught us what he knows about fire. And I think both Candy and Ang got revtion or some sort.


    ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll return and share it with the other fire mages. Ang will stay with you and go to the other Dragon Kings¡¯ location where you will open another portal and ask someone else to learn from them,¡± Candy said.


    Candy left through the portal I opened. And now it¡¯s time to leave.


    ¡°Good bye. I hope that the next time we meet, you will take my life,¡± the Fire Dragon King said.


    The Fire Dragon King also gave me its scale. The scale located on his chest to protect his heart.


    Apparently, dragon¡¯s scale around the chest is the strongest. So that it could protect the heart. And it¡¯s nearly impossible to rip it without any damage unless the dragon willingly gave it away.


    And the other Dragon Kings should know that and won¡¯t attack me when I approach them after showing this to them. Hopefully.


    So, we fly to the next location. The closest one was a mountain where the Wind Dragon King should be.


    When the Wind Dragon King noticed me, I showed him the Fire Dragon King¡¯s scale. And the Wind Dragon King roared to get his clones stopped from attacking us.


    For this, I asked Shirley toe. Because she¡¯s also an ice mage and I won¡¯t have to open another portal when I meet the Ice Dragon King.


    The Wind Dragon King told us what he knew about this ce and the people. Then he also taught Ang and Shirley about wind.


    Being taught by dragons should make them stronger, right? I hope there¡¯s an Air Dragon King or something.


    ¡°He told you that he wished to die? Me too. We¡¯ve been captured far longer than he has. So our body won¡¯t be able to survive without the drug. I think the other Dragon Kings wished the same,¡± the Wind Dragon King said.


    This one also wished to die. Well, with that medicine, there¡¯s really nothing we can do.


    The Wind Dragon King was also quite smart. He didn¡¯t just swallow those drugs right away. They let them stay in his mouth and swallow them when he felt that his body couldn¡¯t endure it anymore.


    There seem to be some addictive in those drugs. So I had some to be appraised. Though the appraisal will found Dragon King¡¯s saliva. Maybe that¡¯s also a rare material?


    Like before, Ang gained something from the Wind Dragon King. Shirley also gained something.


    After the Wind Dragon King finished teaching them, we move to where the Ice Dragon King is.


    The location is quite dangerous since it¡¯s being surrounded by several viges and people were walking nearby. But we managed to get there and get the Ice Dragon King¡¯s approval and talk to him.


    While I keep watch on the surrounding, Ang and Shirley learned about ice. I hope they can reach master level soon.


    After we finished with the Ice Dragon King, whom unsurprisingly wanted to die as well, we waited under his wing until we found a chance to escape.


    I can¡¯t open a portal here since they will realize it. So we just waited.


    Not talking, not eating, not cultivating. And we also can¡¯t use our phone here. So we just waited under the Ice Dragon King¡¯s wing.


    After one hour of waiting, there¡¯s no one outside and we leave quickly.


    When we¡¯re far enough, I returned Shirley and get Ka here. She will be the one learning about earth from the Earth Dragon King.


    And she will also help us to get to the Earth Dragon King. Because the Earth Dragon King and his clones, are inside a cave. With only one way in and out.


    We had to go to the sea and dive quite deep before Ka and Ang dig a tunnel toward the Dragon King.


    ¡°Why is this one being heavily guarded?¡± Ang asked.


    ¡°Either because the Earth Dragon King is the strongest, or the fiercest. I think it will be hard for us to go there discreetly. There should be some master level earth mages in this ind,¡± Ka said.


    Yeah. Ka is right. I need to make sure that we cover the tunnel after we leave or master level earth mages will notice that a tunnel was dug.


    But all of a sudden, we heard a voice. Inside a tunnel. Where only us are here.


    ¡°You don¡¯t have to worry about them. I am still strong enough make sure those people won¡¯t be able to sense the earth this deep.¡±


    ¡°Who¡¯s there?!¡±


    Ang and Ka prepared to fight. While I just look at one direction.


    ¡°...Earth Dragon King?¡±

 Chapter 789 - 789 Earth Spirit

    789 Earth Spirit


    While we¡¯re digging a tunnel to where the Earth Dragon King is being held, we suddenly heard a voice. It should be just us here. But we suddenly heard someone talking. And both Ka and Ang here prepared to fight to the unknown enemy.


    I also didn¡¯t know who it was at first. But when I looked at where the Earth Dragon King is, his eye is looking at me. Just one eye because the other eye is gone.


    ¡°...Earth Dragon King?¡± I asked.


    ¡°You¡¯re half right,¡± the voice replied.


    Half-right? I can see that the Earth Dragon King is looking at our direction even though we¡¯re underground.


    Is it his magic? Even if it is, that¡¯s not a half right. So it means that there¡¯s something else other than the Earth Dragon King here who is talking. Someone who rys the Earth Dragon King¡¯s message and talked to us.


    But who is it? It¡¯s not a ghost because I can see ghost. And there¡¯s no ghost here. In fact, there¡¯s only us here. Me, Victoria, Ang, Ka, and Spot.


    ...Wait, there¡¯s one other person here if I can call her a person. It¡¯s Airy. The air spirit.


    Her presence, even though she¡¯s always with me, I forgot about her a lot. Not only because she rarely talk. But unless I focused only at her, it will be hard for me to watch her unless she¡¯s letting herself be seen by others.


    .....


    If I have difficulty seeing her, then I would have problem as well looking at other spirits unless they shown themselves.


    Which means the answer is...


    ¡°An earth spirit. An earth spirit is rying a message from the Earth Dragon King,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re right. I¡¯m an earth spirit. I have been watching you ever since younded in this ind. And I have informed everything you did in this ind to the Earth Dragon King. My only friend here. From the look of it, it seems like I¡¯m not the first spirit that you see. We are quite hard to find so it¡¯s rare for anyone to know who we are,¡± the earth spirit said.


    ¡°...Airy, show yourself,¡± I said.


    Then on my shoulder which was supposed to be empty, a small creature appears and showing herself to the earth spirit.


    ¡°I¡¯m an air spirit, Airy. Nice to meet you,¡± Airy said.


    ¡°Oh, you have a spirit traveling with you? To be able to gain the trust of a spirit, you must be really amazing. I¡¯ve heard about what you said to the Fire Dragon King. But I guess you are more amazing than I expected,¡± the earth spirit said.


    ¡°Not just her. We also have a wind spirit as well. But he¡¯s too adventurous so he¡¯s with our most adventurous friend,¡± I said.


    ¡°I see. Then, I will trust you. If you have the trust of two spirits, then I can trust you. For now, don¡¯t get any closer to the Earth Dragon King than this. If you do, some master level earth mages will notice you. Although you are being very careful, those mages have prepared some steps in case the Earth Dragon King is trying to escape or get some help. So you will be detected if you get any closer.¡±


    If the Earth Dragon King is being heavily guarded, there must be a reason. I guess even if he¡¯s being tamed, he¡¯s still strong enough to even trying to escape.


    There must have been at least one attempt for him to escape. But he failed. And now, he¡¯s only waiting for his death.


    ¡°Does it mean that if we want to talk with the Earth Dragon King, we have to talk through you?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yeah. I can go there without being detected. So, unless the mages are only focusing on locating my position, it will be impossible for them to find me. But those people shouldn¡¯t know the existence of a spirit,¡± the earth spirit said proudly.


    Good thing the earth spirit listened to our conversation with other Dragon Kings. So we don¡¯t need to exin what we needed.


    He just went back to where the Earth Dragon King is and let him say everything we needed. Including his teaching about earth.


    ...As expected. It¡¯s hard for me to see the earth spirit even with Divine Vision and Mind¡¯s Eye. I need to focuspletely on him and ignore everything else. Maybe because I¡¯m notpatible with him.


    He¡¯s an earth spirit. While Airy is an air spirit and Breezy is wind spirit.


    Since I¡¯m an air mage, I can somehow find Airy. And Breezy is just a bit harder to find. But for earth spirit, since we¡¯re notpatible, unless I focuspletely on his location, I won¡¯t be able to find him.


    We waited in the tunnel while the earth spirit is listening to the Earth Dragon King¡¯s message. Can he remember everything the Dragon King said?


    ¡°So, we just wait here?¡± Ang asked.


    ¡°Yeah. For some reason, the Earth Dragon King is the only one being protected like this. We just need to be patient,¡± I said.


    ¡°Ang, how do you feel after listening to the other Dragon Kings¡¯ exnation about their element?¡±


    While waiting for the earth spirit, Ka curiously asked Ang how she feels.


    ¡°I feel like I can get stronger with those knowledge. Well, I don¡¯t really get it. But I just feel like that,¡± Ang replied.


    I guess the reason Ka is interested is because she also want to get her earth element stronger after getting some teachings from the Earth Dragon King. Via the earth spirit.


    Though Ang can¡¯t really exin it. That¡¯s why I brought Candy, Shirley, and now, Ka, to hear what the Dragon Kings can teach.


    Soon after, the earth spirit returned and told us what the Earth Dragon King told him. And since the information he knew is about the same as what other Dragon Kings told us, the earth spirit didn¡¯t ry that message.


    ¡°Though since I¡¯m an earth spirit and no one have ever noticed me before, I can tell you more about this ind. But from what I heard, there are few other inds nearby with two other inds as big as this one. I only know about this ind, so I¡¯m sorry,¡± the earth spirit apologized.


    ¡°No need to apologize. I didn¡¯t even expect to gain so much here. But thanks to you, the others can n about the attack here.¡±


    On the other inds, there might be other king-type monsters who are being cloned. Either forcefully or voluntarily. So we might be able to learn more about other inds once we started investigation there.


    ¡°Though I want to ask if you know whether there are other spirits here than you. They might be able to help us,¡± I said.


    ¡°There used to be. But I don¡¯t know where they are anymore. Maybe some of them already died,¡± he said.


    ¡°What about you? We¡¯re thinking of killing everyone here. There might be some change with the ind due to how powerful the magic is used. Would you like toe with us and help us get stronger?¡± Ka asked.


    Since she¡¯s an earth mage, of course she wanted an earth spirit to join us. We already have two spirits. And getting more spirits will be great.


    ¡°I like being here. But if the ind is destroyed, I have no choice but to leave. I will decide the answer depend on how destroyed this ind will be after the fight,¡± the earth spirit said.


    ¡°Alright. But if the ind is not destroyed, I hope that you¡¯re willing to help us earth mages to get stronger. Just by being here, we can get stronger,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°If you can get rid of these people, then I don¡¯t mind helping you. Is there anything else you want to ask the Earth Dragon King?¡±


    We have gotten what we want from the Earth Dragon King. I guess there¡¯s no more reason for us to be here. We will need to check on other inds as well now that we have finished our business in this ind.


    ¡°Just one thing. Can you deliver this object to the Earth Dragon King? It¡¯s a clone of my familiar. Which will help me open a portal directly to the Earth Dragon King and kill him when the timees,¡± I said as I gave the earth spirit a piece of Blobby.


    ¡°Delivering an object, huh? I can do it but I need to be really careful to not get caught. But I think I can do it,¡± the earth spirit said.


    ¡°Good. Then we will be leaving. The next time Ie to this ind, it should be when wemence the operation. So we will kill the Dragon Kings at that time. Tell that to the Earth Dragon King.¡±


    In the underground tunnel connected to the sea, I opened a portal and return back to Cassau.


    There are three inds with some other smaller inds here rted to the cult. So we need a big force for the fight. And we can¡¯t do it right away since we need to get ready.


    I¡¯lle back tomorrow to check on the other ind. If there¡¯s a monster I can talk to there, that would be great.

 Chapter 790 - 790 No Master Level Mages

    790 No Master Level Mages


    Time to go investigate the other ind! Yay!


    No, not ¡®Yay¡¯. I have been doing investigating and fighting for a while already. I¡¯m bored.


    But I have no choice. I¡¯m the only one who can do it. Because the people we are going to fight have many master level mages with them. If it¡¯s other people, they will get found out right away. And I¡¯m the only one who won¡¯t get caught. At least not yet.


    ¡°Sigh... Spot, are you ready?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I wish the fight will start today. I want to go into action quickly,¡± Spot said.


    I guess he¡¯s bored as well. He¡¯s just flying around and uses his camouge skill so there¡¯s no fight happening at all.


    In the previous ind, we met an earth spirit. And depend on the result of the fight, we can get the earth spirit to join us. Or at least we can use that ind for earth mage to cultivate since the earth spirit won¡¯t move if the ind is not destroyed.


    What about the next ind? I hope we can find a spirit who will join us. But there¡¯s no strong fire or ice in the next ind. So I don¡¯t think we will find any fire spirit or ice spirit. Though it¡¯s still an ind. Close to the ocean. So maybe a water spirit can be found.


    We already have an air spirit and a wind spirit. An earth spirit also promised to help us. If we can get at least fire spirit and water spirit, then we would have fourmon elemental spirits. Which will help us a lot.


    .....


    Though there¡¯s one person with all fourmon elements. So I guess she will be the one getting the most of it if we can get them.


    And if we can get lightning spirit as well, that would be great. Though I don¡¯t know whether healing spirit, summoning spirit, or tamer spirit exists. I doubt they were.


    I opened a portal to the second ind to investigate. It¡¯s the other ind without the castle. And this one has more people than monsters.


    ¡°Hmm? Hmm.... huh?¡±


    I looked around from above with Divine Vision to check the ind. Simr to other cities rted to the cult, the people are farming, fishing, and hunting. But I see something weird.


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong, Roy? This ind seem to surprise you,¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Yeah. All the monsters here are for breeding purpose and for food. They are not for fighting purpose. Well, it¡¯s just a part of the area I checked. So let¡¯s see other area before making an assumption,¡± I said.


    Riding on Spot in the sky, I checked other area. And I see other breeding ranch for monsters and some animals. Those monsters are big but they are not hostile to people. Some sort of bison monster. Just one of them is big enough to fill the stomach of a small vige. But they breed a lot of them.


    Although the poption of humans is bigger than those bisons, I doubt there will be anyck of meat for them. And not just them. It¡¯s also enough to supply an entire country. Not a big one. But it¡¯s still a lot.


    And in the ind with the castle, I also see some breeding ranches. So maybe there are still other ces in this world where they breed monsters for food.


    Anyway, let¡¯s focus on this ind first.


    Those bisons look so tame. Even if they are not hostile, they are way too tame. Which mean that there¡¯s a tamer.


    The Dragon Kings told me that there¡¯s other monsters who got captured. But they are not here. So my guess is that they are in the ind with the castle, or they were transported to other location.


    And from the look of it, everyone here looks weak.


    As usual, there are no children. But almost every single person here has explosive devices in their mouth.


    Although that once the cult decided that their believers are loyal, they won¡¯t ask them to have explosive device in their mouth. But I guess I was wrong.


    Only a few people doesn¡¯t have explosive device in their mouth. But I don¡¯t think that they are master level mages.


    When I tried to look at them directly at their faces, they didn¡¯t sense it. No reaction at all. Which means that they are truly not master level mages.


    ¡°...Everyone here hasn¡¯t reached master level yet. Seems like this is where they gather the people who are not likely to reach master level but still loyal to the cult. Many of them are old people. None of them look young. And those without the explosive devices look so old,¡± I said.


    ¡°Isn¡¯t that good? That means we can get those without experience to fight here. We recently gained a lot of allies. Most of them joined because the cult was involved in an attack to their territory. But some never been attacked at all. If these people are weak, then it¡¯s a good idea to let our new members to fight here while the others are busy with other inds,¡± Victoria suggested.


    I also thought the same. I guess since this ind is the farthest from the continent, they think that it¡¯s safe here.


    Wait, using that logic, it means that there are many other inds far from the continent where the cult is hiding. Maybe the reason Timmy didn¡¯t sensed the Evil King was because the Evil King is not in the continent at all.


    Well, I don¡¯t know about that. I can only kill people and let the others find out where the Evil King is. I¡¯ll just patiently killing the cult members I found.


    ¡°For now, I think it¡¯s safe to put some agents in this ind. Though I just hope that no one in this ind will be suspicious of them. I¡¯ll discuss it with the others after I finish checking this ind,¡± I said.


    The city works normally. Everyone is busy. And after a few hours of watching, I know that everyone here always go to the church. At least once today. Though those who I didn¡¯t see at the church were probably have been there before I came to this ind.


    If everyone has been to the church, then it¡¯s possible that everyone knew each other. And the viges nearby only have some people. So it¡¯s obvious when outsiders enter the vige.


    I guess it will still be difficult to infiltrate this ind. But at least it¡¯s not impossible since there are no master level mages.


    Maybe if it¡¯s just a vige, it¡¯s possible since they almost never go to the city other than for trading purpose.


    We can just get someone in the middle of the road, asked to enter a vige when the vigers finished trading with the city and on the way home. That way, it won¡¯t be too suspicious. The vigers will just think that it¡¯s another citizen who wanted to live a quiet life.


    Maybe we can ask an older agent to do it. It will be more believable if he just said that his children moved to the main ind or something because of their potential. The vigers will most likely believe it.


    Well, I will suggest it to the others. They will be the one doing it after all. And since this is close to Varadis, I guess it will be Varadis who will send an agent.


    I looked at some vigers, and they also have explosive devices in their mouth. So maybe we will put some fake explosive device inside the agent¡¯s mouth before sending them.


    After looking around for a bit more, I think I had enough.


    ¡°Yup. No one in this ind noticed me. I think it¡¯s time to go home,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re not checking the castle ind right away?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°I¡¯ll do that next time. Investigating this ind make me too rxed since we don¡¯t have to worry about getting discovered. If I let down my guard in thest ind, I will be discovered and that will be bad. Let¡¯s... wait, I see a portal is opening,¡± I said.


    I looked inside the portal, which is inside a building in the city, and it¡¯s not connected to ce I¡¯ve been to. Not any of the three inds here. So it seems like the portal is connected to Monsters World since I see a lot of monsters there.


    Someone entered the portal and talked to someone there waiting for him. Then the man leaves through the portal and the guy he¡¯s talking to is going somewhere else to meet someone and ry a message.


    ¡°I think I just found the man in charge of this ind,¡± I said.


    ¡°What did you see?¡±


    ¡°He¡¯s writing about something like recruitment offer so the people who want to leave can leave. I guess that¡¯s how the cult is getting some people to join them. Some of the opening is doing missionary job to spread the influence of the cult in secret.¡±


    We have moved closer to the man in charge of this ind. Since he¡¯s not a master level mage, he didn¡¯t notice us at all. And I¡¯m close enough to see what he¡¯s writing.


    Well, I¡¯ll tell it to the others. I think it¡¯s time to go home.

 Chapter 791 - 791 Huge Monster Near the Castle Island

    791 Huge Monster Near the Castle Ind


    Today, I¡¯m going to investigate thest ind. The ind with a castle where the bird¡¯s master is located.


    But before I go, Albert and the other kings contacted me and told me to have a meeting all of a sudden.


    ¡°So, how was it?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°Among the three inds, I haven¡¯t fully investigated the ind with the castle. One of the two that I have investigated has more monsters than humans. And a lot of them were the result of cloning technology that the cult created. Apparently, even if we captured the Professor, the one who might be the smartest in the cult, there are other smart people there. And Albert, have you asked the Professor if he has other inventions and technologies that could be disadvantageous for us?¡± I asked Albert.


    ¡°Even if I ask, it doesn¡¯t seem like he will answer anything. But I will try to get what we needed from him,¡± Albert said.


    Yeah, that¡¯s the only thing we can do. The Professor is somehow still being kept alive by Albert for interrogation purpose.


    ¡°Hey, about the cloning technology. Is it possible for the cult to clone a human being? Including their intellect and their thinking capabilities?¡±


    Fabio asked something scary. For a cloning technology to clone a human being. Will that count as a human or a monster?


    Maybe if they put a monster¡¯s flesh or organs, it can be considered as monster. That means they can be tamed.


    .....


    Taming a human being. The thought alone is scary. It¡¯s scarier than enving them.


    Well, both are scary.


    ¡°Wait! Do you mean that it¡¯s possible that the Professor has clones? Or maybe the Professor that we caught is a clone and the real one is somewhere else?¡± Ka asked.


    ...Damn, that¡¯s scary. If there are too many Professor, that would be the worst.


    With their knowledge and skill to not only make clones but also to artificially create master level mages, the cult is already way too powerful.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think they are ready to clone humans yet. Master level mages are too precious. And cloning humans must have some risks as well. While cloning weaker mages will not really improve their overall strength. And if cloning and artificially made them into master level mages is possible, they should have used them to attack Consenza during the tournament. But they didn¡¯t. I guess their technology is not that advanced yet,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°I guess total destruction is needed in those three inds. So that they will stop creating clones,¡± I said.


    On the two other inds I have investigated, I didn¡¯t see any strange technology that they use for cloning. Which means that it¡¯s in the castle ind which I haven¡¯t fully investigated yet.


    I think it will be a while until we can find everything and destroy them.


    Not only so that the cult can¡¯t create clones anymore. But also for us. Even if we have the same mind to destroy the cult, that doesn¡¯t mean that we¡¯re all good guys.


    For example, there¡¯s me. I just thought that if I can create a clone of myself, even if it¡¯s just one, then our strength will be doubled. Having two Aura Masters would be great.


    I¡¯m really tempted to do it. But if my clone went rouge, I¡¯m the only one who can stop him.


    Aura Master facing another Aura Master. Even if I win in the end, I won¡¯t win unscathed. And it will only end after sacrificing many people.


    And some among this group must have thought the same. That¡¯s why none of them rejected this idea.


    ¡°So, Roy will find theb and destroy everything while the others are in battle. Let¡¯s go back so Roy can continue his investigation. As for the agent who will investigate that ind with weaker mages, I will send this man. Roy will bring him to that ind and he will investigate by himself while pretending to be loyal believer,¡± old man Henry said as he introduced the agent.


    Old man Henry said that he has been taught about the cult from the former cult members who joined us. And it¡¯s not just him. Other agents also learned it in case they needed to infiltrate the cult.


    After I brought everyone home, I brought the agent to the second ind. I will leave him on the route from the city to a vige. He will then fly on his own to the vige and ask them if he can stay and work there.


    The agent look old enough to have grandchildren. And it¡¯smon for people at that age to retire to the countryside. So I hope the disguise won¡¯t be discovered soon.


    After he left, I open a portal to the castle ind. From here, I will investigate this ce for a while.


    During the meeting, the kings also suggested that each ind will have a few old agents to infiltrate. For the ind with more monsters, someone is being carefuly selected. And this ind is being investigated by me. So maybe it will be tomorrow that the agents can do their mission.


    ¡°Then, our main objective is to find theb,¡± I said.


    ¡°What about checking the castle?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°That will be too dangerous. Spot, let¡¯s go!¡±


    The castle has a prison with a lot of prisoners at the moment. I don¡¯t know how they got captured, but it¡¯s too dangerous to just go there mindlessly.


    And since it¡¯s a castle, most of the people there would be master level mages.


    But what about theb? Aboratory is obviously a ce where either smart people or experiment to gather. So it¡¯s less likely to have master level mages. And I should be able to infiltrate that ce. Especially since everyone here is rted to the cult. So they would feel that it¡¯s safe and there¡¯s no need for guards.


    The three inds don¡¯t seem to have any enemies. Not people and not monsters. So unless they are on a mission outside, the people here won¡¯t have much experience. And it¡¯s more likely for them to let down their guards even with so many people guarding these inds.


    Though I think the high security was because we have been destroying the cult¡¯s n so many times. And they are just afraid that we will get here. So the cult just increased the security here.


    Everything look normal. And since I can¡¯t see any opening yet to enter the city, I¡¯ll go check on other ces first.


    There are monsters in this ind. But even if they are strong, I can¡¯tmunicate with them. So I can¡¯t learn anything from them. And meeting them will only alert their masters.


    Unlike the Dragon Kings who can keep their calm even though they are tamed, these monsters don¡¯t seem to be as smart as those Dragon Kings. They can¡¯t keep calm if I got too close.


    But at least I need to see the leader. So that once the battle started, I can go directly to them and kill them to make their clones go wild.


    I see a vige and checked it from above. The people there are mostly old people. So I don¡¯t think that they are master level mages. Because master level mages, even if they look old on the outside, the inside is healthy unless they have been alive for over a few centuries.


    Even among the ten master level mages, the oldest was a bit less than three centuries old. He was still healthy, but his organs are not as good as they used to be. It looked just like he is a fifty years old man on the inside.


    But the vigers here are old for real and not master level mages. So I think we an put an agent in this vige.


    After checking that vige, I flew to the other viges. Most of the vigers in those viges are old people. There¡¯s rarely a young people there. So I think it¡¯s safe for the agents to infiltrate those viges.


    But so far, I didn¡¯t see anyb. So it¡¯s most likely somewhere in the city near the castle.


    And as I was flying on Spot¡¯s back, I suddenly see something hugeing out of the ocean. Something like a serpent but it was bigger than Spot¡¯s original size.


    ¡°Let¡¯s fly higher. That thing might be able to sense us if we got any closer,¡± I said to Spot.


    That monster is possibly the one responsible in the destruction of the old kingdom here. Something that look like a serpent, but it¡¯s not.


    ¡°Spot, do you know what that thing is?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. It¡¯s not a sea serpent. And whatever that thing is, it¡¯s stronger than me,¡± Spot said.


    Well, that sucks. So the monster that destroyed the kingdom is still alive. Can that thing destroy this ind again?


    Someone from the castle was flying to the monster. And the two talked for a bit before the monster returned back to the sea. Then that man also returned back to the castle.


    ¡°...Anyone knows what they¡¯re talking about?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...My guess is that the man is an old master level mage. Maybe a tamer. And he tamed that monster and used it to destroy the old kingdom. Well, we won¡¯t know anything unless we investigate it,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Okay. Let¡¯s infiltrate the city next. That monster is too scary. I think that thing could be at the same level as Andro,¡± I said.


    Even Spot and his family won¡¯t be able to defeat that thing. We need a strategy to make that thing go far away from the inds.

 Chapter 792 - 792 Too Many Secret Tunnels in the Island

    792 Too Many Secret Tunnels in the Ind


    I waited for a few hours until the guards changed shift. It¡¯s about time that they showed opening.


    I think that because this city has never been attacked ever since the cult started residing in this city, no one taking the guard duty seriously. But they are still expert level mages and master level mages. So even if they seem rxed, they can sense a bit of change in the surrounding.


    If an uninvited guest suddenly appears, even if the guards seem to be rxing, they would notice. At least the master level mage among the group will. And that mage will report it to the others.


    And there are also almost no opening at all in the spots they are watching. Other than the opening to the prison.


    The castle is big, so even if it¡¯s in the center of the city, I can still see a part of it. And my Divine Vision is good enough to see up to the prison.


    When I looked at it, even though it seems that the opening that lead to a trap to imprison trespasser is safe, there are some people near the path. Even if they are just expert level mages, if I enter that path, they could notice me. That¡¯s why even if I can enter that ce without having to worry about the trap, I could get surrounded. And I can¡¯t use magic inside that prison.


    Maybe I should also investigate if there¡¯s something that block magic. Maybe it¡¯s in theb as well. Just like the cloning technology.


    What if there¡¯s nob at all? What if they experimented it in the wild?


    Well, that¡¯s just stupid. Why would anyone experimenting something like cloning in the wild?


    .....


    I won¡¯t get anything if I enter through the opening that the guards are showing openly. That¡¯s why I waited until the shift ended.


    I don¡¯t know how long each shift is, but I know that it¡¯s impossible for anyone to voluntarily be on guard duty the whole day. Even if they are master level mages who have lived for so long, they can still get bored.


    When the shift is changing, there¡¯s some other opening and I entered the city. Though I can only lower my body on the rooftop while having Spot to camouge us so that we won¡¯t be seen.


    I can see more things inside the city. But why are there so many churches in one city when they all believed in the Evil God?


    Unless it¡¯s only one church for the believers to pray, while the others are where they conducted experiment. Let¡¯s go there before checking the castle.


    The first church I checked is filled with people. They are believers who prayed to the Evil God.


    I guess this is a normal church. But let¡¯s check carefully so I won¡¯t miss a thing.


    Normal believers, normal priests, and normal church activities. But there¡¯s one abnormal priest or maybe some other position in the church. I don¡¯t know. Everyone working in the church wears the same garb. I can¡¯t tell if anyone is another Archbishop or not.


    Anyway, that guy finished his job and left the church while people still goes there. I guess there¡¯s no need for anyone to guard a church when everyone is living here happily.


    Wait, does that mean I¡¯m the bad guy? Well, I am indeed the bad guy. Should I tell the others about how they are living here peacefully?


    I won¡¯t. After all, everyone in the cult, whether they know it or not, are hoping for the destruction of the world. Even if it might seem that they are living happily, most of the people here are busy.


    Not only because of their job. But they are also busy cultivating and even sparring with each other. They are preparing for a big war as well.


    Having an entire poption of believers, they don¡¯t have to worry about breaking through to the next level. Everyone doesn¡¯t care about other people. Just their own magic level. So there won¡¯t be anyone disturbing someone who is trying to breaking through.


    Or maybe they made a rule that those who are disturbing other people¡¯s cultivation will be imprisoned. And that¡¯s how those people got into prison under the castle.


    Anyway, let¡¯s talk about the guy who just left the church. He¡¯s heading to the castle.


    He¡¯s still within my sight so I could see him in the castle. Though I have to be careful to not look at someone in the eyes.


    That guy is not visiting. He¡¯s living in the castle. Then there¡¯s a hooker entering the castle and go to his room.


    Maybe that hooker is also strong. So I won¡¯t see her eyes. But she has such a high quality body. Still not as good as my girlfriends though.


    A priest who is hiring a hooker. Though I can¡¯t tell which one is stronger.


    I waited for a while and there are no other priests who left the church and enter the castle. That guy is the only one. I guess he¡¯s the one with the highest position in the church.


    Anyway, the castle¡¯s guards are just for show. The city alone is already well-protected. And anyone with ill-intention entering the castle won¡¯tst long since there should be many master level mages there.


    Though in my mind, everyone in this ind have ill-intention. They are parts of the cult after all.


    I guess I¡¯m done with this church. Let¡¯s go to the next one.


    The next church, there are also people there praying. But it¡¯s significantly lesser than the previous church.


    There¡¯s an underground tunnel leading somewhere. It¡¯s quite deep so I have to be on the ground level to see where it goes. But for now, I¡¯ll remember that church.


    Now that I thought about it, there¡¯s no need for the church to be the only one with a tunnel to the underground. I¡¯ll also check as many ce as possible to see if I can find more.


    As expected. Several houses in the city have tunnels underneath. Doesn¡¯t that mean that powerful magic from master level earth mage can destroy the whole city? One magic and everything above ground will sink.


    But that¡¯s only if all the tunnels are connected. I should have brought the earth spirit here and ask him to investigate by himself. He should be able to do that, right?


    Well, I don¡¯t think he wanted to leave that ind. Maybe I will destroy that indpletely.


    Right now, I can already meet him by opening a portal to where I met himst. The tunnel that Ang and Ka created.


    It¡¯s no longer connected to the sea. We have covered it. But there¡¯s still a hole for a few people to enter. And when we¡¯re there, the earth spirit said that he will notice right away and will greet us.


    That¡¯s forter. I need to continue checking the city.


    Is there any empty house where I can enter the tunnel from? Maybe I should dig another tunnel directly from somewhere. But it would be easy to get noticed.


    Even more if we start digging from the sea. That giant monster only showed its head and it¡¯s already bigger than Spot. Just a bit of movement and that monster might be able to notice me.


    What about in the previous ind? What if that monster already noticed me and just now, that monster was reporting it to its master?


    If that¡¯s the case, then we have no other choice but to retreat. I have nted a lot of Blobbies on the three inds so we can raid them anytime we want. Even right now.


    Well, seeing how the guy that talked to the monster returned back to the castle without doing anything, I guess it was not something that important. Maybe that monster asked for some sacrifice.


    Whatever the case, it feels like we¡¯re safe for now.


    Anyway, I started checking on the other churches. There are few more where the believers are praying at. But the others are just there hiding something.


    Oh, there¡¯s an empty church. Let¡¯s get in there and hide.


    ¡°Spot, that church is empty. And it has a tunnel leading underground. Let¡¯s go there,¡± I said.


    ¡°Is it safe to go now?¡± Spot asked.


    Since we have been in hiding for so long, Spot also started to get cautious. And he will only move when I said that it¡¯s safe to go.


    ¡°Yes. Go right from above of the church and we will descend directly from there. If possible, I¡¯d like to go underground,¡± I said.


    We entered from a locked window. We just got Victoria to unlock the window so we can enter, then we locked it again.


    We went down to the first floor and go to the tunnel leading down.


    I can see more from here. And I see that the tunnel here is connected to most tunnels from other location.


    Maybe the tunnel was created in the past back when the kingdom was still exist. It¡¯s secret tunnel for the members of the royalty to escape in case of emergency. Just like the tunnels in Albert¡¯s pce.


    I can¡¯t see anymore than this. Because if the people inside are master level mages, they would sense me looking at them.


    This is why I must not investigate things from above. Just by looking down and I can see people in the eyes already.


    Well, for now I¡¯ll attach a Blobby somewhere in this church. And next is to... I guess I can¡¯t enter yet. Someone ising up from underground to this ce. Let¡¯s hide.

 Chapter 793 - 793 Don’t be Too Hasty

    793 Don¡¯t be Too Hasty


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Someone is going through the tunnel and going this way. He¡¯s wearing a priest¡¯s garb. Let¡¯s hide first and wait before we enter,¡± I said.


    ¡°Or maybe you can just leave now. Albert told me that before you make any mistake, I need to remind you that you are not that good at investigating. And you will send some agents to investigate the three inds, right? Just be patient,¡± Victoria said.


    Oh, right. I was about to enter a tunnel to who knows where. And even if the underground tunnel lead to theb filled with smart people, it doesn¡¯t mean that there are no master level mages.


    If I got caught just by looking down to theb and identally see a master level mage¡¯s in the eyes, then they will increase their security even more and it will be harder for us to fightter.


    Why do I want to do something stupid? Is it because I really just want to kill everyone and don¡¯t care how we do it? Because if I do, it makes sense that I want to get discovered so we will have no other choice but to attack this ce right away.


    It¡¯s good that Albert told Victoria to remind me before I make a huge mistake. Though whether my n will be a mistake or not is yet to be seen.


    ¡°Thanks for the reminder. Let¡¯s just leave this ce forter. Anyway, I haven¡¯t seen any summoners in this ind. What do you think?¡± I asked Victoria.


    ¡°Summoners? Maybe because so many of them have been killed, they are hidden somewhere and being protected by powerful mages. Maybe they are in the undergroundb. Because if theb is used for cloning monsters such as dragons, then they will need someone to open a portal to transport them,¡± Victoria said.


    .....


    And I also haven¡¯t seen any huge entrance or exit for those monsters to leave theb. Maybe Victoria is right.


    Maybe I need proper lessons about infiltrating and investigation techniques. Though I¡¯m toozy for that.


    But if it¡¯s learning a new attacking skill, then I will dly do it. Though what else should I practice? Those unconventional weapons from Victoria¡¯s world which is not that efficient and can mostly be used for show?


    Like nunchaku for example. Nunchaku might be a good weapon in that world. But in this world where no one learned martial arts, even a normal stick will be difficult to dodge. And my physical strength already surpassed everyone. So even without being unpredictable, it will be difficult for anyone to dodge my attack in close range.


    So unless I found some magic or Aura weapons for those weird weapons, I don¡¯t think I will try learning it. Maybe I should have asked Timmy if there are other well-known weapons before I killed him.


    The priest now has reached the door. And the hidden door opened with a loud sound. I guess being sneaky is difficult for most people to enter that tunnel.


    Unless they are capable air mages. Like me who can make a soundproof barrier.


    Well, I won¡¯t think about going into the secret tunnel anytime soon. I¡¯ll focus on the ind first.


    At least we have known enough that there are other ces with tunnels leading underground. I¡¯ll see if there¡¯s anything else to find.


    If the ind kingdom was truly destroyed over a hundred years ago because of the monster and that man, then it¡¯s possible that they are hiding something more. Maybe even the Evil God is here. Though I can¡¯t be sure.


    Well, I think tomorrow or the day after is the time that I will bring in the agents to investigate. One of the three inds already has an agent investigating a vige, but maybe more people is needed there. I¡¯ll just deliver those agents to each inds and then I will probably go back to performing in the circus until I got called. Or I will just rest.


    It¡¯s also weird that there¡¯s no movement at all from the cult to the city in the middle of the Magicless Area. I thought that they would send some people there. But from the report, apparently, there¡¯s no oneing at all.


    Maybe the cult has started to be more careful. So many ces have been attacked. And they need to be careful to not lose any more powerful mages and monsters until they are confident enough to destroy the world.


    But why would anyone looking to destroy the world be so patient and wait for the Evil God to do something? Maybe they are not confident to face the world without the Evil God. Maybe it¡¯s one of their teachings to wait for the Evil God to rise.


    The priest left the room. And after a while I also started leaving.


    Like before, we go through the window then had Victoria locked it before flying to the sky.


    ¡°It¡¯s rare to see them flying. In fact, I haven¡¯t seen anyone here flying other than the guy who talked with the huge monster. But at least we know that the sky is safe,¡± Victoria said.


    She¡¯s right. Other than that guy and the little green bird, I haven¡¯t seen anyone or any monsters flying. Just normal birds. Not a monster at all.


    The cult should have more flying type monsters. Unless flying type monsters are too hard to tame. They are usually faster than wind mages after all.


    But rather than the sky, I¡¯m worried about the sea. That huge monster is too scary.


    I made a few more round trips around the ind before I made a conclusion that... I can¡¯t find anything else anymore. I guess I¡¯ll return home now.


    ¡°What about checking other inds? Henry said it, right? There were supposed to be more smaller inds but only three can be counted as the main inds. Maybe we could find something in those smaller inds,¡± Victoria suggested.


    ¡°Then that would be our n for tomorrow. We have wasted a lot of time just in the castle ind. And let¡¯s try to avoid the ce close to where that huge monstering from,¡± I said.


    Maybe that huge monster can notice us even if we¡¯re using camouge. That¡¯s why we won¡¯t go there. At least not yet.


    ¡°What if I distract that thing? Then you can go there, right?¡±


    Spot suddenly gave us a suggestion.


    ¡°I didn¡¯t feel as much fear as I had when we met the huge dragon. So I don¡¯t feel that I¡¯m going to lose at all. But I will still be careful. I can also ask my children toe and help me. If we fight underwater, then it¡¯s unlikely for us to be tamed. That¡¯s fine, right?¡± Spot suggested.


    ¡°That¡¯s... actually a good idea. And since that guy can converse with the monster, maybe you should talk with it first. Just make sure that you don¡¯t leak anything about us. For now, let¡¯s go back first so we can discuss it with the others,¡± I said.


    I can trust Spot. But he¡¯s still a monster without a master. So the others will be skeptical about him. That¡¯s why I will discuss it with the others first.


    When I asked, tomorrow, I will gather everyone together again before I left to the inds. The new members need to know that Spot and his children are our trusted allies.


    And we might get more. With Ray training other horse monsters to help us in the future. Once my mission is done, I¡¯ll go check on him and other horse monsters.


    We already have a few that will help us. But it¡¯s just not enough yet. So the more we have, the better it is for us.


    Though I don¡¯t think we need some rides for the monsters. The werewolves, angels, vampires, and weretigers can fly. So they don¡¯t need a ride. And fighting with their own body instead of magic, it will be difficult for them to adjust when they are fighting on a ride. So it¡¯s best for them to not have a ride.


    Some of the kingdoms already have mage-knights who ride horses. They are mostly not wind mages. That¡¯s why they need horses.


    Butpared to a unicorn, or even a weaker horse monsters, a normal horse is considerably slower. So we need to exchange them with horse monsters.


    Sigh... it¡¯s good that so far, there hasn¡¯t been any ident that the cult created. Maybe they are too busy after so many of their bases are destroyed. Also, we are now united against them. So they should be more careful than they were in my past life.


    But we still didn¡¯t make any progress in finding out who and where the Evil God is. And I keep getting impatient.


    I guess I¡¯ll just watch the circus for tonight. I need something to take my mind off the case. I¡¯ll just be an audience tonight and won¡¯t perform yet. And Thomas also said that there¡¯s a show tonight.


    ¡°So, anyone wants to watch the circus?¡±

 Chapter 794 - 794 Checking the Smaller Islands

    794 Checking the Smaller Inds


    ¡°Alright, I¡¯ll leave you here. Good luck!¡±


    It¡¯s thest batch of agents that I brought to the castle ind. There are three old men here who will infiltrate this ind and hopefully, they can get something.


    Unlike the other ind with mostly weaker mages, this ind has a lot of powerful mages. But that doesn¡¯t mean that there are no weak mages at all. Especially in the viges outside the city.


    They will enter those viges first and gain the vigers¡¯ trust before they enter the city. At least that¡¯s the n.


    This morning, I have sent several other old men and old women for the infiltration mission. Though I was quite surprised that they are still willing to be spies at their old age. But since the king of the kingdom they are serving put their trust on these old men and women, I guess I can trust them.


    They are not just agents from Varadis. The closest kingdom to the inds. But they are also from other kingdoms as well. Because Varadis just didn¡¯t have enough old men and women to send.


    And these old people are willing to die for their country. Some of them even willing to do it happily.


    ¡°I thought that with my age, I won¡¯t get into such mission ever again. I¡¯m d that I can at least have another mission before I die. I don¡¯t mind if I ended up dying. But I will do my best to deliver a precise report of what you needed.¡±


    That¡¯s what these old people said. They are addicted to the thrill of infiltration mission.


    .....


    Though some kings asked them where they used to infiltrate. Of course those things are confidential.


    I can guess that those old agents were sent to any one of the countries among the alliance. But now that we are cooperating together, they will do their best to work together to get result that we want.


    Though it¡¯s kind of funny how one old man from a Varadis recognized another old man from Arturo and talked about how they were best friends who tried to trick each other in but never worked. Because they were both spies. And they were on a mission in another Consenza. They got reunited here.


    Seeing how they reacted like that, I guess their disguise worked perfectly, both of then never realize that the other party was an agent. Though it¡¯s also somewhat hrious to see that.


    After bringing all the agents, I left on Spot¡¯s back. I will search on the nearby inds.


    But before that, I need to drop Spot and open a portal for his children to enter so they can enter the sea. There, they will dive deep and look for that huge monster to distract it from finding me when I fly above them.


    Which mean that I have to fly on my own and I have to be really careful from being seen since I don¡¯t have any camouge skill anymore. And since Ray is busy teaching other horse monsters, I also can¡¯t bring him.


    Last night after I watched the circus with everyone, I went to Monsters World to see Ray¡¯s progress. I could see that there are more horse monsters than before. Ray is doing well but he¡¯s still busy. That¡¯s why I won¡¯t bring him here unless it¡¯s necessary.


    For now, just running in the air is enough.


    Spot and his children dived into the water. And once they are deep enough, I think they will go to the huge monster¡¯s location directly. As for me, I will go the other way.


    Spot has a phone attached to his ear. He can use it and contact me if he¡¯s in danger. And I can also contact him if my mission is over so we can go back home safely.


    I checked the first ind I see. There¡¯s no one there. And no underground facilities as well. So I run to the next ind.


    There were some people there. They looked strong. So I leave them be after I secretly attached a Blobby on top of a tree.


    Why are they here? Are they tamers for the monsters here? Unlike the first ind I checked today, this ind is bigger and has some monsters in it. Maybe the people there are the caretakers of those monsters.


    I don¡¯t think any of them are cloned monsters. They are varied and not just one type of monsters. So they must be tamed monsters. And I don¡¯t think that they are a leader of their race. So I wonder why the cult is taming them?


    Maybe because each monster has special abilities. As for what they are, I don¡¯t know. And staying here for too long will end up with me getting discovered. So as soon as I nted a Blobby there, I moved to the next ind.


    There are so many inds nearby. There are even some in between the three main inds. And since some wind mages used that route to travel, there are even some resting areas there. For those who are tired from flying with their magic or with their ride.


    They even served water and food for monsters. There¡¯s no inn at all, but I think it¡¯s safe to even sleep outside in those inds. Everyone is loyal believers after all. And the monsters here are all probably tamed monsters.


    After a few hours of moving, I think I have seen all of the smaller inds nearby. None of them seem important other than for herding monsters. There¡¯s no sign of ab or anything. But I have marked all the inds with people or monsters in it with Blobbies so we can go there anytime we want. I hope those Blobbies won¡¯t get found.


    Next is... should I check on Spot¡¯s progress?


    From what I see at the ce where that huge monster emerged before, it seems pretty calm. And there¡¯s no sign of a battle at all. But maybe it¡¯s because they are fighting too deep in the sea. Or that they have traveled quite far.


    Let¡¯s contact Spot first.


    Calling him while he¡¯s underwater is stupid. We won¡¯t be able to hear anything. So I just texted him a message. Good thing we taught monsters to read and write.


    Soon a reply came from Spot.


    [He¡¯s too strong and fast. He brought us somewhere far from those inds and we are still fighting him underwater.]


    Hmm? He¡¯s big and fast. And he can carry Spot and his children to a far distance without even making a ripple on the sea?


    Hmm... the sea level is not reducing. Its still the same. So I don¡¯t think that there will be a tsunami here.


    But if that thing wanted to kill Spot and the others, he shouldn¡¯t do something like this. Maybe there¡¯s something I¡¯m missing. So I texted him again.


    [Try talking to it. Pretend that you¡¯re trying to get stronger to kill someone who tamed some of your children and let them die. Maybe that thing doesn¡¯t want you to get noticed by the cult.]


    If that¡¯s the case, then it¡¯s possible that the monster is not an enemy. I truly hope that¡¯s the case.


    If that monster is tamed, then previously, he didn¡¯t need to surface and called that master level mage. The monster could just use telepathy to contact its master. But he didn¡¯t do it.


    [He doesn¡¯t care. He just said that it has been boring since all the monsters in the sea have been tamed so he doesn¡¯t have anyone to fight. And now that we appeared, he took us away so the tamers won¡¯t notice us fighting. If they realized that we are fighting him, they would try to tame us. That¡¯s why he brought us far away]


    ...Another monster who loves battle. I don¡¯t think I can make him join us. He¡¯s not like Andro who has terrible itch on his back.


    [Try to find if he¡¯s tamed or contracted to a summoner. Then, I will move him with a huge portal to Monsters World. Even if he can¡¯t join us, he won¡¯t be a problem to us if he¡¯s in Monsters World]


    While waiting, I asked Victoria to sense where the location of her clone which is attached to Spot and his children. Then I run over there.


    It¡¯s already far from the inds but we haven¡¯t reached there yet. How far has that monster took them?


    [He said that he¡¯s not a contracted monster. He hates humans and only stayed there because of mutual goal]


    Alright. I have heard enough. Anyone with mutual goal with the cult can¡¯t be trusted. Even if I haven¡¯t met the monster yet, whether the monster lied or not, he will just be a hindrance for us.


    [Do you think that you can push him into a portal if I open it?]


    [Nope. He¡¯s too strong. And he¡¯s still just ying around with us. It¡¯s great that I can get into action. But it¡¯s annoying fighting him. Let¡¯s just escape first and think of how to handle him next time]


    Spot has turned into quite a bit of strategist it seems. But he¡¯s right. I think we should do it.


    [Carry your children and fly to the sky. That way, he won¡¯t be able to chase you. Contact me when you think that you¡¯re far enough from the monster]


    That¡¯s the only thing we can do for now. Also, I think I will just exhaust myself if I have to open a huge portal for that monster to enter.


    I guess I need to improve my summoning level to master level to make things easier for us.

 Chapter 795 - 795 Escaping from the Giant Sea Monster

    795 Escaping from the Giant Sea Monster


    Spot and his children are facing the giant monster. I couldn¡¯t even see how big that monster is. But as I exchanging messages with Spot, I learned that it¡¯s something called a Kraken.


    Kraken is something like a giant squid with huge, long, and powerful tentacles that can crush anything.


    And Spot said that the one I saw before was not the head of the Kraken. But it was just one of his tentacles.


    The Kraken could make his tentacles vibrate and make whatever sound that the Kraken wanted. That¡¯s why I thought that it was the head that talked with the mage.


    And the Kraken could absorb vibration so even if his head is deep underwater, he could still listen to what the mage said. At least that¡¯s what Spot told me.


    [It¡¯s hard fighting him, but I don¡¯t think that it¡¯s impossible. We are too unprepared for the fight. We will retreat today and the next time we fight, I¡¯m confident that we can win]


    That¡¯s what Spot said to me in his message. He¡¯s confident that he can win.


    When he was facing Andro for the first time, he was scared until he lost his consciousness. But now, when he¡¯s facing a Kraken which was less than half the size of Andro, Spot didn¡¯t feel any fear.


    I guess either that Kraken is weaker than Andro, or that Spot has grown stronger. Or maybe the Kraken is just ying with Spot and hasn¡¯t even used his full strength. And that made Spot judge him to not be as strong as Andro.


    .....


    But he told me that he could win next time. So I will trust him with that.


    Right now, I¡¯m running in the sky above the sea to where Spot is located. He will carry his children and fly to the sky to escape from the Kraken. And I will pick him up there.


    Carrying several huge serpents on his back should be difficult. Even if he¡¯s much bigger than his children, it¡¯s not an easy matter. But he can do it.


    [Of course I can. They might be adult already, but I¡¯m still their father. Carrying them is my duty. I have been carrying them all my life and will continue to do so until I die]


    What a cool father!


    ¡°Roy, they should be around this area. They are quite far down. Let¡¯s just wait nearby,¡± Victoria said.


    Wait? How will I wait in the sky?


    Unlike Spot, I can¡¯t stay still midair. So I have to keep moving my legs like I¡¯m running or jumping.


    I guess I¡¯ll just run around above that huge cloud. The Kraken shouldn¡¯t be able to notice me hiding above that cloud.


    I passed the cloud and jumped above it over and over again while waiting for Spot toe up.


    ¡°...Just how deep is the sea here? And how big was that Kraken when just one tentacle is bigger than Spot?¡±


    With nothing to do, I just asked myself that question.


    ¡°If the tentacle is as big as Spot, then it¡¯s no wonder that they are having problem getting out of the sea. Let¡¯s just be patient. You should be able to see them when they left the sea,¡± Victoria said.


    Even now, with my Divine Vision, I can¡¯t see where Spot is. But Victoria reassured me that they are below me. I just need to be patient.


    After waiting for a while, I could see ripple on the water. They are getting closer. But I can¡¯t see them yet. I guess they are still quite deep.


    They are huge. So it¡¯s no wonder if they cause a huge tsunami to nearby ind. But we¡¯re already quite far from any ind so it should be fine. Unless the ripple grow bigger and then it became a huge tsunami.


    I don¡¯t mind if the tsunami affected those inds where the people from the cult are living. But if the tsunami affecting Varadis, old man Henry will scold me. I don¡¯t want that.


    Though I just need to not tell him anything about it at all. I can avoid any responsibility if I don¡¯t speak of it.


    Soon, I can see Spot is swimming upward with his children attached on his back.


    How? Do they have some sort of suction power that let them attach themselves to their father?


    Then, I can see a long and huge tentacle trying to catch Spot.


    That... That¡¯s too long! Even from the sea, it should still be able to reach me! I need to go higher!


    Covering myself with magic armor, I jumped higher to the sky before Spot even surfaced.


    Then Spot surfaced and fly diagonally to the sky. I also run toward where he¡¯s flying to.


    And soon, a tentacle ising. By this time, I could barely see the body of the Kraken. That thing is scary.


    Let¡¯s get away from him before he notice me. If he can hear from just vibration, that means his body is extremely sensitive to change. And he can detect my location with that ability of his if I¡¯m too close.


    Now that they are out of water, Spot is faster than the tentacle. But carrying five huge serpents on his back is still a burden to him. I need to help him.


    [Spot! Use your camouge to hide from the Kraken. He could still sense your location but at least you won¡¯t be seen. I¡¯ll be there as soon as I can!]


    Spot who used magic to read the text from his phone directly in his mind, used his camouge ability and disappeared from sight. But the Kraken¡¯s tentacle is still chasing him.


    Even after Spot is moving around, the tentacle is still chasing after him and his family.


    Now that the entire body of the Kraken is out of the sea. He looks like a giant squid.


    He doesn¡¯t seem to have noticed me. Which is good.


    Underwater, he might be fast. But outside of water, even I am faster than him.


    Before long, I can meet up with Spot. But it¡¯s best to make it seems like Spot is running away normally.


    [Spot, you will outrun the Kraken soon. Say yourst message to him before you meet again]


    I texted him while still running. Spot then nced behind at the tentacle before saying something.


    ¡°Kraken! We will meet again soon! Prepare yourself because at that time, my children and I will kill you! Good bye for now!¡±


    The Kraken could hear Spot from his tentacle. And instead of chasing Spot, the tentacle stopped.


    ¡°You wille back and y again? That¡¯s great! I will be waiting for you. Then we can y as much as we want.¡±


    Seems like the Kraken is interested in what Spot will do for their next fight.


    But seriously, seeing a tentacle talking with just its vibration is creeping me out.


    Well, at least the Kraken is Spot¡¯s enemy. I won¡¯t face him when we¡¯re attacking those inds.


    But there are still problems. If Spot and his children are not there, that means there¡¯s no one who can fight the other tamed sea monsters.


    For now the n we prepared is that when the battle begun, I will infiltrate the undergroundb so that they won¡¯t be able to hide anything. Then I will open a portal from there to get as many agents as possible toe and get as many things as they could find.


    As for everyone above ground, they will be busy facing the others.


    Though for me, I think I will infiltrate the undergroundb after I killed the four Dragon Kings. If I left them for other people, it might take too long until they can kill those Dragon Kings.


    But that¡¯s just what we nned for now. There are few agents investigating those inds. And it might take months or even years before we can make our move.


    Until then, I think I will rejoin the circus.


    Though now that the circus no longer need to investigate the ce they perform at since even the smaller kingdoms that were the circus¡¯ destination has joined the alliance. Now it¡¯s just a normal circus.


    Though any normal circus are filled with abnormal people. So I don¡¯t know what is normal anymore.


    The Kraken returned back to the sea after he stopped chasing after Spot. And Spot just continued flying.


    I opened a portal to Spot¡¯s location, and then I opened a new one back to the sea in Cassau. It¡¯s time to go home.


    ¡°Just taking Spot and his children spends a quite a lot of mana. If I transported that Kraken, I won¡¯t have any mana left to go home,¡± I said.


    ¡°What about Andro? Do you think that you can transport him?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Andro is muchrger. While that Kraken doesn¡¯t seem to have a spine and probably can be folded. So the differences are huge,¡± I replied.


    Now that the investigation is over. Let¡¯s take a break from missions and just perform as rence the Clown again.


    I can¡¯t wait to see my audiences.

 Chapter 796 - 796 Back to the Circus

    796 Back to the Circus


    Finally! A free time! Though for how long, I don¡¯t know.


    Now that the mission is on break. I don¡¯t have anywhere else I need to investigate. I will leave it to the agents.


    It was yesterday when we barely escaped from the battle-addict Kraken. Though it¡¯s more correct to say that the Kraken was just relieving his stress from the boredom . But by fighting? That¡¯s a battle-addict.


    So now, we will move when the agents have finished their investigation.


    I have delivered many agents who will infiltrate the viges in those inds and hopefully, they can also enter the city. And I think it will be a few months until the report isplete.


    I told them to not enter the city in the ind castle through the obvious opening. Because that¡¯s a trap.


    The agents who were sent for the mission are old. But still fit enough to work. So they are fit to be farmers, carpenters, or other jobs that needed strength even though they are old.


    They are just around advanced level. So it might be difficult. But they are willing to do it.


    And there¡¯s also Spot to think of.


    .....


    After facing the Kraken, Spot said that he needed preparation so he will be confident to face the Kraken next time alongside his children. And after I brought them back to Cassau, they left.


    ¡°Sorry to ask you this, but I would like for us to be brought to Monsters World so we can train there. We can¡¯t protect the sea for a while, but we needed this to get stronger to face the Kraken the second time. And we can¡¯t do a mission with you until we¡¯re done here.¡±


    That¡¯s what Spot said to me after I brought them back. Not just Spot. His children also looked at me in favor for that request. Seems like Spot knows something that can make them all stronger.


    ¡°I understand. I¡¯ll exin it to Albert and the others.¡±


    That¡¯s what I told them before opening a huge portal for them to enter Monsters World.


    After that, I reported to the kings about the result of myst day of investigation.


    From how many inds I found, and how many of them were lived by humans and how many were for monsters.


    I also told them about the Kraken and also Spot¡¯s decision to go to Monsters World to get stronger so Spot and his children can defeat the Kraken the next time they faced each other.


    The kings allowed it. After all, thanks to Spot and his children, the sea has been safe for a while already. So there shouldn¡¯t be any problem unless the cult suddenly decided to attack from the sea.


    The agents who investigated the city connected by the cult¡¯s summoners to the base we destroyed in the Monsters World also found something. They learned a few other possible locations of the cult¡¯s bases. Though we still haven¡¯t found where the cult leader is.


    And I don¡¯t need to go there by myself. The agents will take care of it.


    After all, it¡¯s best for the kingdoms to let their people handle it instead of getting my help every time.


    Because while the agents will continue to be loyal to their kingdoms after the cult is gone, I won¡¯t. I will take a rest and stop fighting when the cult is gone.


    That¡¯s for the future, but it¡¯s also good for the agents to do their own job instead of relying on me all the time.


    That¡¯s how I get some rest. For how long, I don¡¯t know.


    And today, after waking upte in the afternoon and fill my stomach, I checked my clothing store.


    I haven¡¯t been able to properly check it. So as their employer, I need to check the store.


    ...It was doing very well. I thought that I heard Victoria saying that the clothes here are not suitable for the nobles. And formoners, they just felt that the clothes are umon.


    But after advertising the clothes by letting my employees, the girls I saved from Monsters World, walking around on the street wearing the clothes from the store, more people areing. Even from other cities, they woulde just to buy some clothes.


    As for my employees, they are happy with their lives. Some of them even managed to get a lover. Or two. I don¡¯t care how many as long as they don¡¯t cause trouble with my store. Though I guess they can¡¯t really escape from their former lives as prostitutes yet.


    I also checked other branches of my store. And everything seems great.


    I returned for dinner, then y with the kids before I went to bed.


    The next day, I¡¯m still free. I guess I¡¯ll go back to the circus.


    Knowing that the enemy this time will only be stronger than thest, everyone is busy getting stronger. And they also trying to meet up with Sunsses to learn more about strategy thanks to his previous result as themander.


    For his next duty, Sunsses will need to split the army into at least three teams. Each team will attack one ind. And it will be difficult for Sunsses to give instructions directly even with the use of a phone.


    Anyway, today the house feels quiet. Unlike yesterday. Though yesterday was because I woke upte. And everyone already finished training.


    ¡°Lina, did Sunsses borrowed Elsie again?¡± I asked Lina.


    ¡°Yes. That¡¯s why Sunny feels lonely. So I thought that I will bring her to the Monsters Vige so she can feel rxed when being spoiled by the elves,¡± Lina said.


    Sunny is being worshiped by the elves. And so, when Sunny feels lonely and bored, Lina would bring her to meet the elves. Or she would just bring Tia, her contracted monsters which is the Elf Queen, here. But I guess today Lina will bring Sunny to that side.


    ¡°Today I will return to the circus. If you need anything, contact me through your phone,¡± I said to Lina.


    And so, I returned back to the circus. Unlike previous days earlier when I was just one of the audiences, this time I will return as a performer.


    I opened a portal to Thomas¡¯ location. Not in front of him, but beside him so that I won¡¯t surprise him.


    I have contacted him that I will return today. But when I get there, Thomas was being unresponsive.


    He didn¡¯t even feel my presence even though I¡¯m not hiding it. He¡¯s just sitting there with a sad face.


    I¡¯ve seen him this way back when I watched the circus. I didn¡¯t greet him or other performers, so I just looked at him from the audience seat. And he looked sad just like today.


    ¡°Thomas! Good morning!¡±


    ¡°Whoa! What are you doing surprising me like that?!¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m not surprising you. I just greeted you. But you didn¡¯t answer at all. Is there anything wrong?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No, it¡¯s nothing. Wee back, Roy! How long will you be here?¡± Thomas asked as if there¡¯s nothing wrong at all.


    Well, if that¡¯s what he wants me to think, that¡¯s fine. I think it will be easy to find out what he was thinkingter. I can ask Burnes or the others.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. Maybe for a while. I don¡¯t think we will make any move in the next few months. So I guess I can stay here until the tour is over,¡± I said.


    Right now, we are in Varadis. The circus had just finished performing in the capital. So I think I have enough time until the tour is over.


    We nned the tour from Cassau in Tatrama, then to Arturo, Varadis, Consenza, and back to Tatrama. While passing as many cities and other smaller countries as possible.


    Though we now no longer need to get to smaller countries. But we will do it. Because we are entertainers.


    Even more if those ces have been infiltrated by the cult or even attacked directly in a war. The people there needed reassurance that everything will be fine. And a watching a circus is a good way to rx after the war. So we will still go there.


    ¡°Oh. I see.¡±


    Thomas just said that before he returns to his dreand. Why is he smiling then turn sad, then smiling again? What is he thinking?


    ¡°...Then I will go and greet the others. See youter.¡±


    Thomas didn¡¯t reply. Just sat there while daydreaming about something.


    I don¡¯t think it¡¯s something bad. It shouldn¡¯t be an emergency. But as a leader of this circus, it will be bad if he didn¡¯t pay attention to his surrounding.


    I think it¡¯s fine for now. And he also didn¡¯t put up a performance as much as the others since he¡¯s just the leader of the caravan. But he still gave advice to us on our performance. He¡¯s still the most important person in this circus even if he¡¯s not performing.


    Let¡¯s see... the others are mostly still sleeping. I came here to early I guess.


    Well, I¡¯ll just waste some time ying poker with those who are already awake. We will arrive in the next cityter in the afternoon. So it will be at least a few days before we can perform again.

 Chapter 797 - 797 Thomas’ Love Life

    797 Thomas¡¯ Love Life


    ¡°Roy, you¡¯re here.¡±


    While I yed poker with some circus performers, Burnes greeted me. he had just woken up and about to have breakfast when he saw me.


    ¡°Morning. Seems like there won¡¯t be any show for a few days. But I¡¯ll just stay here. Everyone is busy getting stronger,¡± I said.


    ¡°What about you? You¡¯re not thinking of getting stronger?¡± Burnes asked me.


    ¡°The thing is that I don¡¯t know how. My air element is progressing extremely slow. I don¡¯t think it will improve anytime soon. As for summoning element, even after getting Shelia and Graham to kill as many master level mages as they could in the previous few missions, my level hasn¡¯t grown yet. So it¡¯s best to just move my body,¡± I said.


    ¡°What about improving your Aura?¡± Burnes asked.


    ¡°I did train everyday. But the improvement is so little. And I think that performing and practicing my performance as a clown increase my physical strength even for a bit. So this could be considered as my training.¡±


    Well, it¡¯s not as hard as my usual training. But this could improve my flexibility. I can learn from the contortionist.


    Well, I can¡¯t be as flexible as her. But at least it will lessen the possibilities of getting injured.


    .....


    ¡°Is that so? I guess it¡¯s hard to get stronger when you¡¯re already that strong. Anyway, it¡¯s good to have you back. For how long will you stay?¡± Burnes asked me.


    ¡°The investigation will take a while. Maybe a few months. I think that I have enough time to stay with you guys until the tour is over. By the way, what will you all do after the tour?¡±


    The tour was for investigating other ces. But now that there¡¯s no need for that. There¡¯s only circus shows left. No more investigation unless we found something interesting that needed to be checked.


    That¡¯s why I asked what the circus will do after the tour.


    Obviously, a break is necessary. But when will they go touring again or just performing in one city, I don¡¯t know.


    And Thomas is not in a condition to be asked. Even when I¡¯m looking at him in his tent from here, he¡¯s still nkly staring at an empty space. That¡¯s why I asked Burnes. The clown who somehow be the second-inmand in this circus.


    His appearance is now important in this circus. Even more than me, the best clown in the world.


    Well, it¡¯s obvious since I keep being absent. But from what I heard in the audience seat, he has gained quite a bit of reputation.


    Though for the next show, rence will steal the spotlight.


    As for Thomas, he¡¯s more of a business man now than a circus leader. He rarely ys on stage. But he¡¯s still dreaming of making his circus big.


    ¡°After the tour, huh? I will take a break. We have gotten quite a lot of money not just from the tickets but also from the sponsors we got on our journey. Including from your clothing brand. I have requested to Thomas so that we will take a break for at least six months before we perform again. But he¡¯s been like that ever since we left the capital of Varadis,¡± Burnes said.


    Whoa! I¡¯m not just a member, but also a sponsor? I¡¯m so amazing!


    ¡°Now that you mention it, what happened? How did Thomas be like that? He even didn¡¯t notice me when I came,¡± I asked.


    ¡°It¡¯s not a secret, so it¡¯s fine for you to know. But don¡¯t tease him, alright? Back in the capital of Varadis, Thomas had a drink at a pub with a widow. He didn¡¯t mention it, but it seems like he¡¯s... well... you can guess the rest,¡± Burnes said.


    Meeting a widow at a pub and he became like that. Now that I think about it, Thomas is single. I guess he¡¯s interested in her.


    Burnes stopped exining after seeing my expression turned all smiley. And he¡¯s also all smile when he tried to exin it.


    ¡°Romance is in the air!¡±


    The one who is excited the most is Victoria. She turned into her human form and asked Burnes to exin more on how the two met.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s not official yet. But I think it¡¯s obvious that he likes her.¡±


    Then Burnes exined to us how they both met. The other performers also joined. They already knew it but they love gossips.


    Thomas visited a pub the night after the show in the capital was over. There, he got greeted by a woman who said that she¡¯s a fan of the circus.


    They chatted until it¡¯s time to close. The woman left while Thomas was hoping that he will meet her again.


    ¡°Obviously, as his subordinates, we¡¯re helping him from the shadow. The next morning, we were supposed to leave for the next city. But some of us faked illnesses and dyed the departure for two whole days. So Thomas can meet that woman again in the night,¡± Burnes said.


    Obviously, the circus members know about Thomas meeting with the widow. After all, they¡¯re all agents. Their main job is to investigate.


    And they have traveled with Thomas for a while. So they know when there¡¯s any kind of changes around him. And when they investigated, they learned everything.


    ¡°I guess the reason that you didn¡¯t mention it to Thomas was because there¡¯s no need to. You all think that she¡¯s safe and won¡¯t cause any harm to Thomas or the circus. That¡¯s why you never mentioned her and just watched Thomas from the sideline. Am I right?¡±


    If that woman is someone dangerous like being rted to the cult, then there¡¯s no way that Burnes and the others will keep quiet. So they must have found out everything about her and concluded that she is safe for Thomas.


    There are kings who asked agents to spy on other country. Those agents with deep sense of loyalty to their country.


    But those same agents are making their move just because a circus leader is in love with someone. I think we can say that Thomas has the same power as a king.


    Well, it¡¯s more like that the agents are interested in Thomas¡¯ love life. That¡¯s why they investigated that woman and her surrounding.


    I didn¡¯t ask much about that woman. Because if these people didn¡¯t do anything, then there¡¯s no need for me to know. I¡¯ll just enjoy the fun.


    ¡°So, they just meet up and didn¡¯t go any further?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Nope,¡± Burnes replied.


    ¡°What a shame.¡±


    ¡°We¡¯re all also quite disappointed by the result. And that¡¯s how Thomas is like that now. Maybe he regretted how he didn¡¯t confess to her,¡± Burnes said.


    The other party might be a widow. But if they suit each other, I guess it¡¯s fine.


    ¡°So, any reason why you let it be? Is it something you learned as you investigated on her?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s fine if we leave Thomas be. You don¡¯t want to know more?¡± Burnes asked.


    ¡°Nope. It¡¯s much more interesting if I know less. And it¡¯s not something that you needed my strength to help, right? Then it¡¯s fine if we just watch from the sideline,¡± I said.


    ¡°Uhh... I¡¯m really interested! But as Roy said, the less we know, the more interesting it is. I¡¯ll be patient and just watch,¡± Victoria said.


    I guess Burnes is calm because he knows that Thomas will meet that woman again in the future.


    Who is she? What is her job? And how will the two meet again? Burnes and the other agents must have known about it.


    But from how excited they seem to be, I think that the woman also have some sort of interest in Thomas. That¡¯s why Burnes will not do anything to either Thomas or that woman.


    ¡°So you will not do anything?¡± I asked Burnes.


    ¡°We will if Thomas asked. But we will not tell him everything. Though it seems like Thomas no longer remember that it¡¯s our original job to investigate people. That¡¯s why he never asked us,¡± Burnes said.


    I guess since the alliance with the smaller countries have been formed, and there¡¯s no real need for more investigation by the circus since the kingdoms can just send their agents directly, Thomas has forgotten all about it. And the agents here are just enjoying being performers.


    Now that I returned back to the circus, the atmosphere was much better than when the circus first left for the tour. Everyone is getting along well and even used their spying skills for fun. I really like it here.


    ¡°Can someone ask Thomas to go and eat some breakfast? He hasn¡¯t eaten anything since he woke up,¡± someone suddenly said.


    ¡°...Are you sure you won¡¯t help him with his romance?¡± I asked.


    Seeing that even Thomas himself might end up ruining his health because of love, I started to get worried.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. He will still eat. But he eats slower than usual. Though it¡¯s not good if we keep dying our journey. I¡¯ll go and remind him to eat breakfast,¡± Burnes said.


    I wonder how Thomas¡¯ love life will end? I hope it will be good for him. He¡¯s still my boss after all.

 Chapter 798 - 798 Hearing it from Thomas

    798 Hearing it from Thomas


    ...We¡¯re just here waiting for Thomas to finish his breakfast. But it has been an hour already!


    It¡¯s just some sandwiches! Why would anyone take that long to eat them?!


    Even after I left to chat with the master level mages who joined the circus recently and came back, Thomas still hasn¡¯t finished eating yet.


    There are three master level mages who joined the circus. All of them came from the Magicless Area. The recently recruited members of our alliance.


    One is the master level summoner. But because he never realized the existence of the Pear-y Fruit, he can only make a contract with one monster unfortunately. So he¡¯s still searching for one that fits him.


    His other magic was not that great since he only focused on his physical abilities for thest few decades. But if we can get a powerful monster for him, that¡¯s enough. And since he¡¯s a master level summoner, I can ask him for some guidance for me to improve my level.


    Though since he didn¡¯t even know about portal magic until I told him, I guess I still have more knowledge than him. But at least I can find out how to be a master level summoner.


    Next is the tamer. Seems like the summoner and the tamer get along really well in that small vige of ten. They even came here together. Maybe because they both worked with monsters.


    He¡¯s also a master level tamer. And he has ice element which has reached expert level. But just like the summoner, he¡¯s now focused on his physical strength.


    .....


    The same could be said to thest person. A woman who was also a master level at fire element.


    There is also someone else who has reached master level in her fire element. And like other master level mages we have, they are guiding other mages so they can improve their level faster.


    And because there¡¯s another fire master level mage, she said that she will join the circus instead because there¡¯s no need for two people to teach the same thing. And the other circus members here can also taught her and the other two about magic control as well while training to be a performers.


    Those three decided to perform something that needed physical strength. But they are also interested in other performance. So they are still training.


    They might be the oldest. But they are the newest members who still need practice to be in the show.


    And they can¡¯t just use their full power. Circus meant to be entertaining. Not just a show of strength. That¡¯s why the others are teaching them the basics.


    After talking with those three, I returned back to see that Thomas is still hasn¡¯t finished his meal.


    ¡°He¡¯s taking too long. Why isn¡¯t anyone talking to him?¡± I asked to myself.


    And as usual, when I¡¯m talking to myself, someone is replying. Because I was actually almost never by myself.


    ¡°The others are all agents. Experienced agents. They are taught to keep a cool head and be patient at all time. So of course they don¡¯t mind if the journey got dyed. And other than agents, there are three master level mages who have lived for over a century at least. Taking their time is a normal thing for them. Though I think you¡¯re the only one who is impatient even though your lifespan could be longer than any of thembined,¡± Victoria said.


    Yeah. Just by bing an Aura Master, I can live far longer than a master level mage. But I just can¡¯t seem to take my time.


    ¡°I guess it just means that I don¡¯t have much hobbies. Or maybe, I¡¯m just the kind of man who wants to finish my job as soon as possible and rx. Though since there¡¯s no strict schedule, I guess I should be more rxed,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s a good thinking. But you¡¯re not the one to listen to your own advice, huh?¡± Victoria said as I approached Thomas who is still daydreaming.


    ¡°Thomas. Something must have troubling you. I can lend Victoria so you can talk to her. While I just stand here and pretend that I¡¯m a statue,¡± I said to Thomas.


    ¡°So it¡¯s just him talking to me?! Why not help him directly? You¡¯re an idiot,¡± Victoria sighed.


    In the end, I tried to get Thomas to talk about his problem. Though I already know what it is. In fact, everyone here already knows what Thomas¡¯ problem is. They just leave him be since they know that Thomas will meet that woman again.


    ¡°Roy... and Victoria as well. You¡¯re right. If I go on like this, I will only be a problem for everyone else. Roy, I trust you. So I will tell you what happened. But please don¡¯t tell anyone else about this. It¡¯s embarrassing after all,¡± Thomas said.


    ...He totally forgot who the rest of the circus members are. I mean,e on! Thomas, you¡¯re not that stupid!


    ¡°I promise that both Roy and I can keep your secret. But that doesn¡¯t prevent the others from figuring it out by themselves. Seeing how everyone didn¡¯t talk about it, I can guess that everyone already know what you¡¯re going to talk about,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Really?! Does it mean that... everyone is ignoring me?¡± Thomas asked.


    ¡°Rather than ignoring you, it¡¯s more like they are supporting you so you can make a decision by yourself. Though for Roy who is so impatient, he can¡¯t let things be. Just talk to us. At least it will feel good to have someone to talk with,¡± Victoria said.


    And as promised, I stood still like a statue the whole time Thomas talked with Victoria. Though they both sometimes talked to me. But I just ignored them like a statue would.


    So, Thomas talked about the woman. Her name is Sandra. A woman whose husband died a few years ago. And she was not blessed with children.


    Thomas said that Sandra was a fan of the circus. She had been depressed ever since her husband died, and traveled around for her job. Though she never said what her job was.


    When he watched the circus, she felt better and felt cheerful. So when she saw Thomas entered a pub, she approached him to thank him for the show. And then they both talked a lot.


    The next day, because some of the members came down with some illnesses, they dyed the journey. And he could meet Sandra again at night and talked a lot.


    Well, there¡¯s not much differences between Thomas¡¯ story and Burnes¡¯ story. So I don¡¯t really need to hear them. And I really became a good statue as I stopped listening to them. Though I still heard Victoria shrieked in excitement after hearing Thomas¡¯ story.


    ¡°So, you feel down because you love her and you don¡¯t know if you can meet her again?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Yeah. On the third day, I thought that I would meet her again. But she already left for her job. As to where she¡¯s going, I don¡¯t know. I never asked. I wish that I could talk more with her,¡± Thomas said.


    Then Victoria who is in her human form ever since she¡¯s listening to Thomas¡¯ story,e to my ear to whisper something to me.


    ¡°Stop acting like a statue for a few moment. Do we really need to keep it as secret that the others know more about that Sandra than Thomas? Can¡¯t we just tell him why they are not helping him at all?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Well, we can tell Thomas to ask for advise from the others. Maybe he will remember who they are,¡± I replied. Though I returned back to be a statue again.


    Then Victoria returned to face Thomas again.


    ¡°Thomas. How about you exin it to the others? They are willing to help you if you ask,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°But it¡¯s embarrassing, you know?¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. None of them will make fun of you. You should know them well after traveling together for a while already,¡± Victoria said.


    She¡¯s trying to convince him to speak to the others. While I just act like a statue. A statue who knows that the others are already surrounding this tent and listening to everything we talked about from the start.


    ¡°Asking for help from them, huh? Oh, right! I forgot! They¡¯re all agents! They must have known everything already. Including who Sandra really is and what her job is,¡± Thomas finally remembered.


    I mean, how could anyone forget? They¡¯re all agents. Did he really think that everyone is a normal people? Well, there¡¯s no normal people who trained to be extremely flexible, extremely strong, and extremely talented. This is a circus after all.


    But maybe the fact that he treated everyone here normally is what made everyone is friendly toward him.


    And as soon as Thomas remembered, Burnes and the others entered the tent.


    ¡°Finally, you remembered! Say the word and we will help you. Or even if you want to find out everything by yourself, we will support you by giving you some advise. We¡¯re agents and we don¡¯t have anyck knowledge in almost everything. Including romance,¡± Burnes said.


    Well, with their help, I think Thomas¡¯ love life will end well. And I¡¯ll just continue watching him until then.


    I might be the one with the most girlfriends. But I don¡¯t think I¡¯m good in being romantic. So there¡¯s nothing for me to teach to Thomas.


    ...Maybe I should be a little more romantic to my lovers. It¡¯s sad to know that they have never experienced many romantic experience with me.

 Chapter 799 - 799 Spoiler

    799 Spoiler


    Burnes and some other agents barged into the tent. They didn¡¯t even hide the fact that they have been listening in from the start.


    ¡°Shit, I forgot,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°You could have asked them to help you before you left the capital. But you forgot about it. If not, then they can do more. Maybe they could even find herte husband¡¯s identity,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Actually, we already found out about it,¡± Burnes said casually.


    ¡°...Of course they did,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t forget why we started touring in the first ce. It¡¯s to investigate the cult. And obviously, we need to check everyone interacting with us. Including Sandra. To make sure that she¡¯s not targeting you with ill-intention. And don¡¯t worry. The result is good. She¡¯s not from the cult,¡± Burnes said.


    Thomas sighed in relief after hearing that.


    ¡°It¡¯s good that she¡¯s not rted to the cult. And since you¡¯re here, does it mean that you¡¯re going to help me?¡± Thomas asked.


    ¡°Yes!¡±


    .....


    Burnes answered excitedly. And the other agents nodded.


    ¡°Great! So, what should I do?¡± Thomas asked.


    ¡°Thomas, we¡¯re willing to help you. But we¡¯re not going to tell you about every little thing. We will help you little by little, but we won¡¯t help you with everything. To get a woman, it¡¯s best to do it on your own instead of getting someone to help you all the time. We¡¯re just background supporting characters at best,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Okay. I understand. So what do I need to do now?¡± Thomas asked.


    ...I don¡¯t think he understands at all. Just after Burnes said to not expect help all the time, he asked for help right away.


    ¡°...For now, finish your meal and continue our journey. Although we¡¯re not in a hurry, I think it¡¯s best to get to the next city early for preparation,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°...Right. In the end, I am still busy with the tour. And Sandra is also busy with her business. So it¡¯s not like we¡¯re going to meet anytime soon. Alright, I¡¯ll finish my meal now. Prepare for departure. We¡¯ll leave as soon as I finish my breakfast,¡± Burnes said.


    He sounded disappointed after realizing that he¡¯s still in the middle of a tour. Which will probably be over after a few months.


    ¡°Don¡¯t be too disappointed. After the tour is over, we should have a break, right? Some of us are willing to help you since we don¡¯t need everyone to send their reports. And not everyone has a family to go home to. Finding out where she is after the tour is not a problem for us,¡± Burnes said confidently. Though I think it¡¯s highly likely that we will meet her during the tour. That¡¯s what I feel after seeing the agents¡¯ expressions.


    ¡°Really? Then I will count on you. Roy, that¡¯s enough. You don¡¯t need to act like a statue anymore. We¡¯re also about to leave so you can help the others,¡± Thomas said.


    And that¡¯s the end of my act as a statue. I have to say that I¡¯m pretty convincing as a statue.


    We prepare to leave and after Thomas finally finished his breakfast, when it¡¯s soon time for lunch already, we departed.


    On the way, I asked Burnes about everything else I missed. And I don¡¯t care on how many women he¡¯s sleeping with on every city. Just anything important or entertaining to hear.


    Something like a blooper that the other members made during a show. No matter how professional they have be, they are still humans who make error.


    The good thing was that there¡¯s no one injured. And if it¡¯s just a light injury, there¡¯s a healer in the circus as well.


    It was fun hearing how the others make some bloopers that¡¯s sometimes funnier than Burnes¡¯ own performance. He¡¯s a clown. He should be the funny one.


    But I know that Burnes never mentioned about his own bloopers. He kept talking about other people¡¯s mistakes, but never about himself. So I asked someone else about Burnes. And there was indeed a lot of mistake that he made.


    He tried to be me. To be rence during a show. But he couldn¡¯t do it. At least it was funny in its own way.


    And obviously, Iughed at him.


    ¡°You tried to copy me? Even these master level mages who had just joined the circus won¡¯t be able to copy me with their excellent physical ability. And you who are just an expert level is trying to copy me? So what kind of injury did you get?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...I never got any injury. Just a few slips,¡± Burnes said.


    But the other guy told me the truth.


    ¡°He fractured his legs and unable to perform for a week. Even with a healing magic, it took time until he can perform. Then there are other injuries as well. Like¡ª¡±


    ¡°Stop it! He¡¯s just going to make fun of me the whole journey!¡± Burnes shouted.


    This is fun. The atmosphere is really good. And everyone is getting along with each other just fine.


    Must be because there¡¯s no more need to investigate. Although they would still do it, they no longer need to focus on that job unless it¡¯s necessary. Just fooling around as a fellow member of the circus.


    After that, I also asked the master level mages about their performance. I told them to not do too much and let people know that they are master level mages. Keep their level as secret. I also showed them some tricks that they can do. With their speed and strength, they could do some tricks that no one else but me can do it.


    Though that means I have to learn new tricks. Which is fine because I enjoy it.


    So during the journey to the next city, other than talking with the others, I also practiced my new routine. Not just me, but also some other as well. They don¡¯t want to lose their spots to the recently joined master level mages.


    It¡¯s fine since we can catch up with Thomas and the others while practicing on our own. But I have a new thought.


    What if we swap the horse with horse monsters? Then the journey will be faster.


    Even now, we¡¯re already fast enough. We could travel around the continent in just one year. It¡¯s because once in a while, they would ask me to transport them with portal.


    But like before, if I¡¯m on a mission, then there¡¯s no way but to travel normally. Which is fine since the agents are strong enough to face some monsters. But it doesn¡¯t mean that there¡¯s no danger.


    If we have horse monsters to pull the carriages, we can get to the next destination sooner. I think I¡¯ll go and meet Ray after the show in the next city is over.


    ¡°...It¡¯s boring, isn¡¯t it?¡± Victoria suddenly asked.


    ¡°Not really. It¡¯s peaceful. If you don¡¯t like it, I can return you back to Cassau,¡± I said.


    ¡°I don¡¯t want to. If I return, I won¡¯t be able to witness Thomas¡¯ love life,¡± she said.


    ¡°Then find something to do so you won¡¯t get bored. Aren¡¯t you a writer? Write something,¡± I said.


    ¡°I can¡¯t. My mind keeps wandering to Thomas¡¯ story. Until I witnessed everything, I don¡¯t think I can write anything,¡± she said.


    Why don¡¯t you just worried about your own future instead of someone else? Is not what I asked her.


    I know that she lived a long life. And she¡¯s practically immortal. Or at least no one has found what can kill her yet. So her life must be so boring.


    That¡¯s why she loves to watch other people. To mind other people¡¯s business. Because everything else about her is not that important.


    Maybe I¡¯ll be like her in the future. When I lived long enough to surpass everyone¡¯s lifespan. Though if someone can reach the stage beyond master level, I think can havepanions for a few thousand years. But if I also reached that stage in my magic,bined with the fact that I¡¯m an Aura Master, then I would live for a very long time.


    But I already have two long-living familiars. Victoria who is a slime, and Ray who is an Abyss Horse. Though I¡¯m not so sure about Ray yet. But it¡¯s possible that Ray might outlive us.


    It¡¯s good that I will havepanions for a long time. But that¡¯s forter. After the cult is destroyed.


    ¡°Then what if I tell you a spoiler about how it will probably end? About Thomas and Sandra I mean,¡± Burnes suddenly suggested.


    If Victoria was given a spoiler, then she might be busy with her own imagination rather than getting bored. I think that¡¯s a good idea?


    ¡°Spoiler? Does it mean that you know how it will end?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s not really a hundred percent. So there are still doubts. After all, feelings are not something that we can investigate so easily. And finding the proof is hard. But at least I know something that is possible to happen. Do you want to hear?¡± Burnes asked.


    ¡°Let¡¯s hear it then. Just what is it that an expert like you found out about their rtionship,¡± Victoria said.


    Burnes smiled lightly before he gave his answer. It¡¯s a two-word answer that made Victoria¡¯s imagination run wild.


    ¡°It¡¯s mutual.¡±


    ¡°YEAAAH!¡±


    It¡¯s not like it wille true one hundred percent. But it means something.


    It means that the woman is also has some sort of feeling toward Thomas. And that is good enough to know.


    Next, we just need to get their feelings blossomed. Though the agents will help Thomas. So I will just watch.

 Chapter 800 - 800 Surprise Reunion

    800 Surprise Reunion


    Being told of what the other party might feel toward Thomas, Victoria got so excited. She even talked about it all night long.


    Good thing that I still have my own tent to sleep. Separate from other people. So we didn¡¯t bother anyone.


    But I¡¯m not an immortal who doesn¡¯t need to sleep. So I asked Victoria to go out and hunt some monsters while I sleep. All that energy can be useful to get rid of the monsters nearby.


    Even if she encounters an extremely powerful monsters, she can still be alive. So it¡¯s fine for her to go wild. Though I think any powerful monsters have been subjugated by the others first.


    Then we reached a vige. It¡¯s not where we need to stop, but we are still a group of agents. So we stopped for a night to investigate the vige.


    Even though it¡¯s just a vige, the poption reached a hundred people. I guess that¡¯s quite a lot for a vige. Even after some of the vigers left for the city life, there are still a lot of people here.


    But we set up a stage for just one night. We¡¯re not looking for money. We¡¯re just here to entertain some people while also to let the rookies, the three master level mages, perform. They were only helpers before. But now, they will be the main performers.


    The others will just perform some simple acts and tricks. Because we¡¯re not preparing for huge acts. And we also allowed everyone to watch for free.


    It will be bad if someone in the city knows that we perform for free while they have to pay to see us perform. So the professional ones will only do some simple tricks. And the main performers are the three master level mages.


    .....


    I also perform a bit. With Victoria as my assistant. I¡¯m just here as Roy. Not rence.


    Everyone enjoyed it. And the viges even set up a party for us. We had a lot of drinks and food. And everyone is dancing.


    Everyone is rxed. Though that¡¯s what they want other people to see.


    The most agents who didn¡¯t perform conducted investigation around the vige. Just a small one to see if there¡¯s anything suspicious about the vige.


    I also checked the vige with my Divine Vision and Mind¡¯s Eye. And I didn¡¯t find anything. So I¡¯m not worried about anything.


    And the agents who were investigating returned after thirty minutes. They said that everything is safe and no sign of the cult being here at all. Nothing suspicious.


    So we rested in that vige after the show.


    The three master level mages did very well for their first performance in front of audience. Not as good as professional yet, but with their great physical abilities, they can get there soon.


    Having too many performers mean that we can swap some members. We can make two shifts. One for the first day, and the other is for the second day. Then for the third it will be the first group again, and the second group will y on the fourth day.


    Even with just three new members, that might be difficult. So someone might need more tricks than they used to do. But since everyone thought of it as enjoyable, we¡¯re fine with it.


    ¡°Why not just make the circus bigger so everyone can y? For example, we can make more people do acrobatic shows or more people as trapeze artists. Since I and three master level mages are here, there¡¯s no need to worry about our body and stamina,¡± I suggested.


    ¡°I thought of that as well. For Roy, you have been in the circus for a while so you might not need training to be in sync with the others. But the other new members need some training to improve our chemistry. At least once they reached eptable level, we can start thinking of a bigger performance,¡± Thomas suggested.


    He¡¯s no longer daydreaming most of the time again. But he still do it once in a while. At least he can still give some advise and suggestion to everyone.


    The small show at the vige is done. and the next day, we leave to our real destination. That vige was just a vige we found on the way after all.


    Also, there are too few supplies we can get from there. And if we take any, it could be bad for the vige. Especially after we had a partyst night. So we just left without taking anything.


    Well, it¡¯s obvious that we don¡¯t need to get supply from there. The circus has me. A summoner who can make a portal to any city I have been to and bring supplies here right away. So we don¡¯t need to worry about our supply.


    The master level summoner also said that it might be best for him to get a familiar who can make a clone of themselves. Even if it¡¯s not to the point where the familiar is simr to Victoria, it might be enough for it to be simr to Graham.


    Graham can make a clone of himself. The shadow clones. And I can also open a portal to where they are. But they are not longsting clones like Victoria.


    And the master level summoner also said that he wanted to fight on his own instead of letting his familiars to fight. So maybe it could be something with shapeshifting ability.


    ...Both requirements mean that he¡¯s looking for another ck Slime. Though when I asked, he said that just one of the requirement is enough.


    I also asked him how I could reach master level in my summoning. Seems like just letting my monster fight is not the only way. Fighting monsters on my own. Without magic. That¡¯s how he reached master level.


    That¡¯s a simr way that I could get my Aura ability. To not rely on other people. Just me using my Aura. Though it seems like I also can¡¯t use my Aura since the one I want to improve is my magic.


    I tried to get him remember how he reached master level in his summoning element. And he said that he remember how he had to wrestle against some kind of ape barehanded.


    So, if he needed to fight an ape, what should I fight? Maybe I can¡¯t even use Aura to fight. So it will be a lot harder.


    No Aura and no magic. Fighting against something that strong. Can I use a weapon? Or maybe I need to go barehanded like he did?


    Though I don¡¯t think I can do it anytime soon. Not because I want to destroy the cult. If that¡¯s the case, then reaching master level is important.


    But it was because I haven¡¯t gotten my familiars to fight enough monsters.


    Because I¡¯m a summoner, I need my monster to gain experience in fighting. Only after they all got enough experience, I could breakthrough to the next level. That¡¯s what we know about summoner.


    And now that I have four familiars, I think I will need four time more experience than average summoner with only one familiar.


    I was lucky so far that I could face so many enemies. But I need more.


    Well, I¡¯ll rest for a few months for now. I can fight moreter. There are many monsters in Monsters World. I can go there after I finish with the circus.


    And right now, Shelia and Graham should be fighting monsters in Monsters World when they are free. So I still gained experience gradually by letting them fight.


    I will go to the Monsters World after the show in the next city. But that¡¯s only to see Ray¡¯s condition. Did he managed to get many horse monsters to obey him and be the Horse King?


    And after chatting with the summoner, the tamer joined the conversation. It was simr with him too. He needed to fight a monster barehanded on his own to reach master level.


    Maybe because summoners and tamers are those who work closely with monsters. So we needed to fight like a monster to reach master level.


    For me, I¡¯m fine physically since I¡¯m an Aura Master. But for these two, they were just expert level mages when they fought a monster barehanded. But I might need an even stronger monster to fight.


    Well, at least I know how to get stronger. As for air element, I already know that I have no talent in it. In my past life, I didn¡¯t even manage to awaken it.


    Reaching expert level at this age is already good enough. In fact, it¡¯s already much better than any ordinary mages. I guess I will only continue my progress with air element after my summoning has reached master level and I got my fifth familiar.


    After a few days, we finally reached the next city. And to my surprise, there¡¯s another circus group over there.


    I should have guessed that even if we are a famous group, that doesn¡¯t mean that there are no other circus groups in the world. But to think that there¡¯s another group in the same ce. Though they seem to be done with their shows here. They are cleaning up their tent.


    But I was shocked even more after looking at Thomas¡¯ reaction.


    ¡°Sandra?!¡±


    I see. This is why the others didn¡¯t do anything even though they know so much already.


    A widow who travels for her work. I would never guess that she¡¯s working at a circus.


    Well, everyone is excited to see the continuation of their romance. Especially Victoria who can¡¯t seem to keep her calm.


    Isn¡¯t it interesting? A love between two rival groups who work in the same industry. I think it¡¯s quite amon story in novels I read. Not Victoria¡¯s novel obviously.


    Well, what will Thomas do now that he knows? Let¡¯s continue acting as a bystander in this love drama between the two.

 Chapter 801 - 801 It’s a Love Triangle

    801 It¡¯s a Love Triangle


    ¡°Sandra?!¡±


    Thomas was shocked to see that he met his love again after separating for a few weeks. I looked around at Burnes and the others and I can confirm that they know about this.


    Victoria also just realized it. And she was the most excited among everyone here. So I just sent her a telepathic message.


    ¡°Victoria, don¡¯t say anything. Keep your mouth or whatever it is that let you speak shut. Don¡¯t ruin their moment,¡± I said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll try my best!¡±


    With this, I don¡¯t think she will be any obstacle in Thomas¡¯ love life. She won¡¯t disturb him. Though I¡¯m the one who needs to endure her excitement.


    ¡°Oh, Sandra. Do you know them?¡±


    Suddenly, one man got between the two. A good-looking man. Just interrupted the two¡¯s reunion.


    Again, I checked everyone¡¯s reaction. And they seem more excited than before.


    .....


    I heard that the woman is a widow. And for the agents to let things be and let Thomas do everything by himself, I guess he has a chance. And there¡¯s no way that Burnes would be quiet if he knew that Thomas won¡¯t have a chance.


    If Thomas doesn¡¯t have any chance at all, then Burnes should have told Thomas about it. To give up on his love. And just to focus on finishing the tour.


    That means this guy is not the woman¡¯s partner at all. Thomas still has a chance.


    As for the man, looking at his body, it was simr to a trained trapeze artist. Focusing more on the upper body to swing and jump using his hands on a bar. And from how he stand, he has a good bnce. Maybe he can y as a tightrope walker as well.


    And this guy probably, or most likely, has a feeling toward that woman. So he¡¯s basically Thomas¡¯ rival in love.


    ¡°Roy, is he who I think he is?¡± Victoria asked via telepathy.


    ¡°Most likely. Don¡¯t scream. Just keep calm and watch things goes on,¡± I replied.


    ¡°I¡¯ll try my best!¡±


    Yeah. I just hope that she won¡¯t ruin Thomas¡¯ moment. Though I don¡¯t think Thomas will have any moment soon with that guy here.


    Why am I here watching a love triangle? I guess it is some sort of entertainment as well. To see if Thomas¡¯s love will bear fruit or not.


    And it¡¯s also to see the future wife of our boss. Though the result is still yet to be seen.


    ¡°He¡¯s Thomas. The leader of that famous circus troupe who is currently on tour around the continent. I watched them perform before in the capital when I took a break from the circus because I heard that they would be there. They are much better than our group,¡± the woman said. Wait, I think her name was Sandra. Let¡¯s remember our future boss¡¯ wife¡¯s name properly.


    A rival in love, and a rival in job. Victoria is truly excited to see what will happen next.


    ¡°So... you¡¯re also in a circus?¡± Thomas asked.


    ¡°Yes. I¡¯m curious on why your circus was so famous. I thought it was because of a sponsor making your name big. But I was wrong. You are exceptional indeed. As a person in the same industry, I have to say that I¡¯m not at that level yet. You did a tour back then, but I couldn¡¯t watch your group. And the tournament at that time was more exciting than the circus, so everyone¡¯s focus as more to the tournament. But fortunately, I could watch your group perform in the capital,¡± Sandra said.


    I didn¡¯t feel anything from her words. Burnes said that the love might be mutual. But I guess it¡¯s not. Or at least at this time, it¡¯s not.


    ¡°Oh, really? Then where is that rence I often heard about?¡± the man asked. He¡¯s not convinced that we¡¯re better than them.


    Is he a clown? To think that he¡¯s asking for a clown first before any other performers. I can only guess that he wants to see someone in the same duty. Or maybe because he doesn¡¯t care about other people. I was just famous because everyone keep talking about me whenever I perform. And it was very rare so that rumors about me keep spreading.


    I even heard a rumor that I¡¯m a noble who is hiding my status to y as a clown. There¡¯s even a rumor saying that rence is often get sick and that¡¯s the reason he rarely ys.


    I won¡¯t deny any of those rumors. All of them only make the circus more famous. They expected to see rence perform, but even when I¡¯m not ying, they are entertained enough by the other¡¯s performances.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know about that. When I watched them, rence was not there. But the other clowns are already better than ours. It¡¯s annoying that the one who is said to be the best clown wasn¡¯t there, but it¡¯s more annoying that the other clowns are better than ours. Now that our show here is done, why don¡¯t we stay here for a few days so we can watch their performances? We can learn a lot by just watching them,¡± Sandra said.


    The man just clicked his tongue. He was probably trying to boast his ability byparing himself to the one who was said to be the best. Me. But his crush just told him that we¡¯re better than them. So he¡¯s not satisfied with the result.


    ¡°...Yeah, rence was a busy person. But finally, a few days ago, he can take a break from his real job and joined us again. You can watch him perform tomorrow night,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°Really? That¡¯s great! I can¡¯t wait to watch him perform! If the other clowns are already that good, I wonder how good rence will be!¡±


    Sandra said. Her eyes are sparkling at the mention of me. I bet this is not something that the others can find in their investigation about her.


    ...The fact that I might be Thomas¡¯ biggest rival in love.


    ¡°Damn, Roy! You¡¯re Thomas¡¯ biggest rival!¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°I wasn¡¯t in the circus most of the time. I guess I¡¯m too famous even when I¡¯m not there,¡± I said proudly.


    I turn my attention back to Thomas, Sandra, and the man I don¡¯t know.


    ¡°Ah, yes. rence is... amazing. But he¡¯s a real bad guy outside the circus. I mean he tricked dozens of women to be in his harem. He¡¯s just the worst type of man there is,¡± Thomas said.


    Hey! You¡¯re insulting me! I didn¡¯t trick anyone to be my harem! They are the one who approached me first! And it¡¯s not a dozen!


    ...Maybe not yet. I don¡¯t know. I will live very long after all.


    ¡°I see. What a horrible person he is. To trick women to get a harem. I guess his real personality won¡¯t be as fun as he is as a clown,¡± the other man said.


    Now he¡¯s insulting me? I¡¯ll make sure that his already one-sided love won¡¯t progress.


    ¡°Victoria, would you like to y a prank on that guy? I¡¯ll let you do whatever you want,¡± I said to her telepathically.


    ¡°Anything for Thomas¡¯ love!¡± Victoria replied.


    Good. I don¡¯t think that guy will be able to sleep at night while we¡¯re here.


    Burnes then walked next to me and whisper to not do anything to them. I won¡¯t promise anything. They just made fun of me.


    As for Thomas, he¡¯s not a bad guy. He¡¯s just desperately doesn¡¯t want his crush to have any good impression on any other man. Though I won¡¯t just forgive him so easily.


    ¡°Thomas, we will find a ce to stay. You can talk to them. And don¡¯t eat anything bad again or your diarrhea will return. Last time, it was so horrible that you did it on the stage. Good thing you¡¯re wearing ck pants and we have a pool for a performance so no one noticed it,¡± I said. Loud enough to let Sandra and that man hear.


    The man smirked. But I¡¯m not done yet.


    ¡°As for you, I don¡¯t like that a stranger is insulting me. But I can¡¯t really say anything when there¡¯s a huge rip on your pants that you¡¯re showing your ass to everyone. You¡¯re already embarrassing yourself that I don¡¯t have anything else to say to humiliate you,¡± I said.


    Of course I¡¯m the one who ripped his pants. It was a clean cut that no one noticed how and when it happened. It was deep enough to cut his underwear but not his skin. So he¡¯s uninjured.


    ¡°What?! How?!¡±


    The man retreated backward after grabbing something that can be used to cover his ass.


    Only now that Thomas realized that there¡¯s someone he shouldn¡¯t made fun of.


    ¡°...Meet rence. As you can see, he¡¯s a funny gut. Whether talking or not, he can make everyoneugh. Also, rence is just his stage name. But you can call him that,¡± Thomas introduced me to Sandra.


    ¡°You can call me rence. And no, I¡¯m not someone who trick women to join my harem. Though it¡¯s true that I have a harem. And it¡¯s just us two men having fun, so don¡¯t worry. Though I don¡¯t like it when stranger just insulted me right in front of me without knowing anything. Though I didn¡¯t do anything. I just said what I saw,¡± I said.


    ¡°Oh, okay. I¡¯m Sandra. I can¡¯t wait to watch you perform,¡± Sandra said.


    Then I asked Victoria.


    ¡°What do you think? Was that enough to stop Thomas from thinking that I¡¯m his rival in love?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think she has feelings other than admiration to rence. And for her chance to fall for you should be disappear by now. So it¡¯s fine,¡± Victoria said.


    Good. Now, Thomas only need to think of how to interact with her and to get that man away from her.

 Chapter 802 - 802 I Heard a Good Information While Binge Eating

    802 I Heard a Good Information While Binge Eating


    I have destroyed the chance of Sandra falling in love with me by acting like an ass. So unless she¡¯s into that type of man, Thomas still has a chance.


    I¡¯m just worried if Sandra has a weird taste in men. Then Thomas will be depressed since his friend was the one who stole his crush.


    Though I don¡¯t think she likes that kind of men. People like that are rare. If they want to be happy, they shouldn¡¯t get a partner who act like an asshole.


    We left Thomas so he can be with Sandra. And it seems like most of the agents also left. Only a few of them are near Thomas. Probably to help him if he asked for anything.


    The agents have promised that they will help with Thomas¡¯ love life. But they won¡¯t do everything. They will just support him from the shadow. So it¡¯s all up to Thomas whether he can get closer to Sandra or not.


    ¡°Roy, I¡¯ll stick with Thomas. So that I can experience everything directly. But I will continue tomunicate with you telepathically because if I don¡¯t, I don¡¯t think I can be quiet at all and will just ruin everything,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°That means I have to endure your shrieking the whole time. How about you just leave with me and let him be?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Can¡¯t! There¡¯s something so interesting to watch, so I won¡¯t let go of this chance! And you as well! I¡¯m sure that even if you leave, you will still watch Thomas with your Divine Vision. Am I right?¡±


    She¡¯s right. I¡¯m also making sure that Thomas is still within the range of my Divine Vision. I won¡¯t be able to tell what he¡¯s talking about, but I can see his expression at least.


    .....


    ¡°Then I can tell you anything important that they said. Isn¡¯t it a good deal? I got what I wanted, and you can move if needed. Then, I¡¯m going,¡± Victoria said.


    She then left my body and move on the ground. Then she reached Thomas, and slowly and carefully, to not surprise him, move up from his clothes to the back of his cor.


    Then she said something to Thomas from the back of his ear so that no one can see her. Then she stays there.


    I just leave with the other performers and get us an inn we can stay.


    After the tour, we got enough money to rent an entire inn for ourselves. So we look for one where there are not many customers and stay there.


    It¡¯s Burnes who lead us there. Though I¡¯m the one who find the inn first thanks to my Divine Vision.


    When we get there, the other customers staying at that inn were there as well. So we gave them a sum amount of money so they can move to another inn since we are renting the entire ce.


    If they refuse or ask for more money, then we can just let them stay. It¡¯s not like we need them to go. We are just being polite because everyone is from the same group except for them. So we might be more noisy when we gather and disturb them.


    And if they don¡¯t want to leave, that¡¯s their problem. We have prepared them the money to go to another inn, but they refused. Just like the three men in at the inn.


    ¡°You want us to move? Then pay more!¡±


    ¡°Or maybe just lend us some of the girls you have. They can warm our beds!¡±


    ¡°How about it? Maybe you will join us instead of staying in that group?¡±


    Wow! None of them would expect that most of us are already expert level mage. And those who are not is either master level mages or a monster like Victoria. Though Victoria is not here yet.


    I should just leave it to Burnes. He knows how to handle it.


    But the one who handles it is not him. Instead it¡¯s the female master level fire mage who replied.


    ¡°Boys, I won¡¯t just warm your beds. I will also warm your bodies,¡± she said.


    ¡°Woohoo! Awesome!¡±


    ¡°Alright! Let¡¯s find another inn right away!¡±


    ¡°Yeah. As for me, I¡¯ll pick¡ª¡±


    Thest guy tried to pick someone else. Does he think that the girls are for them to choose?


    Well, whoever they choose, the end won¡¯t be good for them. But the master level fire mage stopped them from picking anyone else.


    ¡°It¡¯s been a long time since I¡¯ve done it. And I want the three of you to y with me. Let¡¯s go!¡±


    She just easily hugged the three of them and lifted them up. Even when they are trying to resist, they can¡¯tpare their strength against a master level mage who trained her body for a century.


    ¡°What the... Release me!¡±


    ¡°Let go, you bitch!¡±


    ¡°What the hell?! Why is she so strong?!¡±


    ...It seems like now that she no longer need to focus stay in a vige with just old people anymore, she¡¯s letting her desire goes free. As expected. None of those ten master level mages are normal.


    ¡°Oh, she finally can¡¯t endure it anymore. I though it should be time,¡± the master level summoner said.


    ¡°Yeah. She was the first girl toe to the vige and y with us men, right? I think everyone had a taste of her already. Though she gave up after knowing that she can¡¯t shake our feelings as we just focus more on training. And she ended up focusing on training as well,¡± the master level summoner said.


    ...So, that¡¯s who she is? Someone who enjoys doing it?


    Though from what these two said, she hasn¡¯ty her hand on the men in the circus. Maybe she¡¯s just being considerate.


    And now that she found three preys, she will devour them.


    ¡°...Do you think that¡¯s the real reason she joined the circus?¡± I asked the two master level mages.


    ¡°I think she was genuinely interested at first. But now that she has slowly adapted to the real world, she¡¯s returning back to how she was before she entered the vige,¡± the master level summoner said.


    ¡°...I guess we can get her to handle such men from now on. So that we won¡¯t get into trouble and she can enjoy herself,¡± Burnes said.


    Everyone just nodded in agreement. It¡¯s better than having to pay them more to leave.


    Though Burnes still asked me to give her some money for those three. The same amount of money we offered at first. And I gave it to her before she left while carrying those men.


    And so, we stayed at that inn. And I picked a room for myself. Still got the special treatment while the others are sharing rooms.


    Other than me, the one who has the special treatment to stay alone is Thomas. And we picked the best room for him. In case he can bring home Sandra.


    Then, Burnes asked me if I want to join him and another performer to see the noble in charge of the city if we can perform here.


    The other performer is an agent from Varadis. That¡¯s why Burnes brought him.


    Since I¡¯m bored, I go with them. And at the same time, I can see that Thomas is splitting up with Sandra. So I asked Victoria to guide him to the inn. But Thomas said that he¡¯s going toe with us. So I chose to not go because there will be too many people just for asking for permission. Just three people and Victoria is enough. So that if there¡¯s anything I need to know, Victoria can contact me right away.


    Seems like there¡¯s no progress with him and Sandra. But at least he still has more chance to meet her in this city.


    As for me, well, it¡¯s the usual food hunting that I haven¡¯t done in ages. So I will enjoy the food in this city with Airy.


    Of course the people always surprised to see that I ordered so many food alone. And even more shocked to see that I¡¯m going to the next shop after finishing my meal when I asked the waiter if there are any rmended ce.


    That¡¯s when I hear something interesting.


    ¡°Sir, you are the second weirdest man I¡¯ve met in this ce. Even after eating so many things, you wanted to go to another ce,¡± said the waiter in one of the cafe I visited. He¡¯s very blunt to a stranger.


    ¡°You mean there¡¯s another one? Who is it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Did you see the smokeing from outside of the city?¡±


    The waiter then pointed at a smoke that came from the forest outside of the city.


    Everyone can see the smoke. But it¡¯s too far. Even my Divine Vision can¡¯t reach the source.


    ¡°That¡¯s not some hunter camping, right? It¡¯s still too early for anyone to prepare a camp,¡± I said.


    ¡°No, sir. It came from a smithy. For a cksmith to create a weapon when everyone fight using magic is weird, isn¡¯t it. He¡¯s the weird guy I just told you. He came to the city once in a while to sell some kitchen knives. His knives are always high quality products that most of the shop in this city must have at least one knife made by him,¡± the waiter said.


    A cksmith! I¡¯d like to meet him!


    But this could be a trap because the cult already knows that someone is an Aura user. I need to be careful. Though I can¡¯t just ignore it.


    I have to see the cksmith for myself.

 Chapter 803 - 803 Good Quality Knife

    803 Good Quality Knife


    A cksmith. It¡¯s someone that I always wanted to meet. Someone who crafted weapon and armor.


    There are many who imed to be a cksmith. But at most, they just crafted knives and cooking utensil. And even if they crafted dismantling knives, the quality is just average. After dismantling a few monsters, those knives won¡¯t be usable anymore.


    But now, I heard that there¡¯s a cksmith living in the forest nearby. And the waiter I talked with said that the cksmith is creating weapons.


    This is a great information. I have to check the man myself. I need to go there.


    Today, we just arrived in this city. It¡¯s still afternoon now. We arrived around lunchtime so that we can quickly ask for permission from the lord of this city to perform. Though I think it should be easy to get. After all, we arrived right after the other circus group finished their shows. So the lord will give us permission. Without a doubt.


    Especially since we are the circus approved by the king and even have agents from Varadis as the performers. If the lord here is someone that old man Henry can trust, then he should have known that a circus ising. So getting a permission is easy.


    Anyway, it¡¯s still bright. And there shouldn¡¯t be any show tonight. So I¡¯d like to meet the cksmith today.


    But before that, I want to check something first.


    ¡°Excuse me. That seems interesting. Can I check the knife?¡± I asked the waiter.


    .....


    ¡°Well... the owner is quite strict with people entering the kitchen. So I don¡¯t know about that,¡± he said.


    But he doesn¡¯t seem sorry at all. He just wants bigger tips. So I gave him some money and I was given permission to enter the kitchen.


    ¡°Hey! No one other than the staffs can enter the kitchen!¡± the chef shouted.


    ¡°I allowed him to enter. He wants to see the knife crafted by Master cksmith. Let him see it,¡± the waiter said. Though it seems like he¡¯s not a waiter at all.


    ¡°Well, if the boss says so, I can¡¯t refuse it. But we can¡¯t just let him touch the new ones we haven¡¯t used yet. So here,¡± the chef said.


    Seems like the waiter is actually the owner of this restaurant. And I was also given permission to see the knife. Though the one I was given was the knife that the chef had just used. As he grabbed a new one and prepare to cut the next ingredient with it.


    But I don¡¯t mind it. This one seem to be a great knife already. It¡¯s just that the chef doesn¡¯t have the right technique. So the de is already smaller than the knives that hasn¡¯t been used that I checked with my Divine Vision.


    But I can feel that the quality of this knife, even though its no longer as good as when it was first finished, it¡¯s still a high quality knife. That¡¯s what I feel when I grabbed the hilt.


    ¡°Can I try cutting something with it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well¡ª¡±


    ¡°I¡¯ll pay you,¡± I said before the owner said anything.


    ¡°Sure!¡±


    Then he instructed the chef to give me a big piece of meat. Seems like a monster meat.


    And I skillfully cut it into pieces in front of the two people. I don¡¯t think that they are from the cult. And all I did was just cutting a piece of meat. So it should be fine.


    There¡¯s no chip in the de at all even though I didn¡¯t use Aura. But if it¡¯s an average chef, it¡¯s normal that the de will get smaller and smaller the more it¡¯s used. But I¡¯m different from them.


    I don¡¯t care about the reaction of the owner and the chef. I was just in awe at the quality of the knife. And it¡¯s a used knife as well! What if I use a new one?


    I don¡¯t think the sharpness and durability will be as good as if I use Aura. But what if I use Aura on such high quality weapon? That will make the weapon even stronger.


    ¡°Alright. I want to see the cksmith so I can buy one for myself. Can I have this? Seems like you won¡¯t be use it after a while.¡±


    ¡°Ah, sure! I can¡¯t believe that I can see a beautiful cutting technique. Who are you?¡± the owner asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m just a clown from a circus. I have a lot of trick, you see. And I y with knives a lot. We just arrive at this city today and will start to perform probably from tomorrow night. If you like, you can watch and see more tricks from me and my friends. Then, I¡¯ll take my leave,¡± I said.


    I left the restaurant. And right away, I contacted Victoria by using telepathy and ask her if we got the permission to perform.


    ¡°We got it. It didn¡¯t take long and we¡¯re already back at the inn,¡± she said.


    ¡°Then leave the inn with the master level mages and meet me at the gate. I found a cksmith who created a decent quality product. I¡¯m going to meet him right away. I will also call Sonia. Seems like she has a lot of free time nowadays,¡± I said.


    Even if I¡¯m an Aura Master, I don¡¯t know about the quality of a real weapon that Aura users of the pastmonly use. So I want to ask the two former Aura users about their opinion. And I will also bring the master level mages who are interested in fighting close range.


    ¡°Really? I¡¯ll be there right away. Also, don¡¯t forget to tell Henry about it. His grand aunt might be interested. And with him, we might be able to recruit the cksmith to help us since he¡¯s still the king of this country,¡± Victoria said.


    She¡¯s right. So while I¡¯m texting old man Henry, I called Sonia and told her what I¡¯m going to do.


    ¡°That knife looks like it used to be a high quality product. But because an amateur kept using it for a long time, it¡¯s already damaged. Though I can still see how good the quality is,¡± Sonia said as she¡¯s inspecting the knife I got from the restaurant.


    ¡°I know, right? Seems like he¡¯s selling the knives to the city whenever he needs money. And most of the time, he¡¯s working in his smithy. We¡¯re going there after meeting up with Victoria and the others,¡± I said.


    Then I got a reply from old man Henry saying that he and his grand aunt will meet us. So I will open a portal once we¡¯re close to the smithy.


    Victoria soon arrived with the three master level mages. Seems like the fire master level mage has finished enjoying her time.


    ¡°This is a great knife. Or at least it used to be. But don¡¯t you think that I can transform into something as good as this? Do we need to meet the cksmith?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Just for precaution. By having a cksmith that can made many things for us, we can probably do more. I can give Blobbies to everyone for self-defense, but it would be better if they have a normal knife. And maybe some sort of light armor that everyone can wear. That would be great,¡± I said.


    ¡°Hmm... you¡¯re right. Let¡¯s meet the cksmith. But are you sure that he¡¯s still making weapons at this age?¡± Victoria asked me again.


    ¡°That¡¯s what the owner of the restaurant said. I can¡¯t see his smithy yet. So I¡¯m going there to confirm it. If you want, you can wait at the inn and I will open a portal for youter,¡± I said.


    ¡°We¡¯ll go with you. Maybe I can find a monster to tame on the way,¡± the tamer said.


    ¡°Good for you. I¡¯m still not ready yet to go to Monsters World alone and look for a monster to make a contract with. If I have a good weapon that suits me, that would be great,¡± the summoner said.


    The summoner said that he¡¯s nning to go to the Monsters World sometime soon to find a monster to make a contract with. But his magic element other than summoning are still to weak. And he was focused more on physical strength for a long time. So having a weapon is always a good choice.


    But why didn¡¯t he think of having a partner to go with? That would be easier, right? I can never tell what he¡¯s thinking.


    If other people have Blobbies, they will have too many choice on what weapon to use. Will it be a knife? A sword? A spear? An axe? Or other weapons? They have to think before transforming the Blobbies.


    But if they already have a weapon right away, then they won¡¯t spend time at all to think of a good weapon to use. Limiting one¡¯s choice is a good way as well to improve reaction speed.


    ¡°Then let¡¯s go. We just need to run to where that smoke ising from,¡± I said as I pointed at the smoke that should being from the smithy.


    Three master level mages who are physically trained, and an Aura Master. We reached the ce just in five minutes.


    And when I got close enough, the man inside the smithy noticed us. He¡¯s an expert level mage.


    I hope he¡¯s not an enemy. An expert level mage who is a cksmith is a great addition to the alliance.

 Chapter 804 - 804 Meeting the Blacksmith

    804 Meeting the cksmith


    ¡°Stop! Don¡¯t get any closer! Who¡¯s there!?¡±


    As we got close to the smithy, just about twenty meters from there, the old bearded man inside the smithy noticed us. He¡¯s not alone. He has a little girl with him in the house. Probably around the age of eleven or twelve. About the same age as Daniel. She¡¯s probably his granddaughter.


    ¡°We are guests looking for the cksmith who crafted this knife. Can we meet you?¡± I asked politely.


    ¡°We¡¯re closed right now!¡± the cksmith said.


    ¡°We just want to ask you some questions,¡± I said.


    While I talked to him from afar, I also checked the smithy with my Divine Vision. There are a lot of high quality products. But most of them are shaped weirdly. Like they just came from his imagination. Like the one who made it never seen what a sword or spear is. They look fancy but the quality seems decent.


    It¡¯s like he¡¯s making those things for fun. But I don¡¯t mind that.


    If it¡¯s just weapons, then Victoria can transform into anything she wants. And she can teach him more about weapons.


    Looking at the products he created, I can think of one thing that he can help us most. He can help Marie with her invention.


    .....


    With Marie¡¯s intellect and this guy¡¯s crafting skill, the products they created will be better than before. Though I want him mostly for his weapon-making skill.


    ¡°I refuse toe out!¡±


    Then the old cksmith goes to grab the girl inside the house and looks like he¡¯s trying to protect her. We¡¯re not here to fight though.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. We¡¯re not here looking for a fight. We¡¯re genuinely interested in the weapons you crafted,¡± the tamer I brought here said.


    We were looking for monsters as we ran to this ce. But there were no monsters at all. I can guess that it was because of that cksmith who is also an expert level mage. He probably killed the monsters on the way. So the tamer couldn¡¯t find any monsters to tame.


    Well, even if there are any, if an expert level mage can defeat them, I don¡¯t think the tamer will be interested in taming them.


    ¡°H-How did you know what I¡¯m doing?!¡±


    ¡°It¡¯s either because we¡¯re at the same level as you are, or that we¡¯re stronger,¡± the tamer said.


    For someone who lives for so long already, he doesn¡¯t have much patience.


    I want to talk with the cksmith peacefully. But he just make the cksmith hostile toward us. Even the little girl looks like she¡¯s about to cry.


    ¡°Hey, the girl inside is about to cry. Stop threatening them,¡± I said.


    ¡°I¡¯m not threatening them. I just stated the truth. We¡¯re all stronger than him. Oh, wait! He¡¯s not, right?¡±


    The tamer realized that there could be someone weaker than the cksmith. It¡¯s the summoner.


    The summoner is just an advanced level mage in his other elements. And he doesn¡¯t even have a familiar to protect him. As for the tamer, he¡¯s still has another element he has reached expert level. So he can protect himself at least.


    ¡°I can protect myself. I¡¯m still a master level mage. I can sense when he¡¯s trying to attack me. And I can dodge before the magic is cast. So don¡¯t worry about me,¡± the summoner said calmly.


    Right after he said that, the door to the entrance was destroyed by the cksmith himself. Then he cast a powerful fire magic at his level. But it¡¯s much hotter than fire magic that Candy cast. He might be better at fire magic than Candy. At least his magic control to manipte the temperature of the fire is much better.


    The fire is going toward our direction. And the three master level mages are prepared to take that magic. They either prepared to use their magic or to dodge it.


    And I just stood there with the knife I got from the restaurant prepared in my hand.


    As the huge Fireball getting closer, I quickly moved forward and split the Fireball using the Aura-covered knife. The Fireball was split and none of us were harmed.


    ¡°Whoa! He just cut magic so easily. I wish I can be that strong,¡± the tamer said


    ¡°It¡¯s toote for us to learn it. It¡¯s best to for us get stronger our own way,¡± the fire mage said.


    ¡°Or we can just make a contract with a monster that can do that. Maybe there¡¯s a monster out there that can block magic,¡± the summoner said to the fire mage.


    A monster that can block magic, huh? If there are any, I would love to make a contract with one. But until I reach master level, I don¡¯t have any opening slot for my familiar. And I don¡¯t want to kill any of the ones I have.


    Well, I¡¯ll look for one when I reach master level. It¡¯s not the time yet.


    ¡°You! How did you do that?!¡±


    After I split the Fireball in two, the cksmith came out and excitedly asked me how I could split his magic in two. His granddaughter who was hugging him before was left inside the house as the cksmith is running toward me.


    ¡°That¡¯s the knife that I sold in the city before. But it has been used badly for so long. And I don¡¯t think it was because of my knife. Then it means that you¡¯re using some kind of technique, right? Finally! Someone who can make my dreame true!¡±


    ...I guess he¡¯s just another freak. From what he said, I guess he created so many weapons hoping that some kind of expert wille and notice his creation and use them. And he found me! Or should I say that I¡¯m the one who find him?


    ¡°Then if you don¡¯t mind, let¡¯s have a chat first. Maybe we can help each other¡¯s dream,¡± I said.


    He will make me the best weapon and armor, while I can use his creation to destroy the cult. That would be nice.


    Though if he, or even her granddaughter, is somehow rted to the cult, then there might not be any cooperation at all.


    ¡°Ah, wait!¡±


    As soon as he said that, he went back to his house and stand in front of the entrance. With his granddaughter behind him. I guess he¡¯s still can¡¯t put his trust in me yet.


    ¡°Sorry. I won¡¯t leave you again,¡± the cksmith said to the little girl.


    Anyway, his magic was great. His fire was hotter than even the fire that Candy created even though they are the same level. That fire might be the reason how his creation has such high quality. He can control the fire while crafting weapons.


    But for now, let¡¯s think about how we should negotiate with him. I want him to create at least one weapon with me.


    The sword for the sword-cane. The hidden sword inside the cane. It¡¯s only good to use because I can use Aura to increase its durability. But if I can get a better quality sword, then even when I can¡¯t use magic or Aura, I can still at least protect myself with it.


    Even if it¡¯s not a magic weapon or an Aura weapon, a better sword is still preferable. Though I wonder why he kept making weapons. Maybe someone ordered them.


    For what? The only reason I can think of is for show. Like a theater or circus. Though for my circus, I let the performers borrow some Blobbies for their props. We use those Blobbies for knives juggling, knife throwing, axe throwing, and for other props.


    Wait. I think I have seen more weapon used for performance than for fighting. Not counting the spears that the angels used or the blood swords that the vampires used.


    If he can make more weapons for my monsters, that would be great. The angels can get stronger. And the vampires no longer need to waste their blood for weapons anymore.


    ¡°So, who are you? And why do you have monsters with you? Are you a tamer or summoner?¡± the cksmith only asked me that.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m a summoner indeed. As for monster, if you¡¯re talking about this ck Slime, then it is my familiar. As for that ghost, she¡¯s a friend. Don¡¯t worry about her since she used to be a human. She won¡¯t bite,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re talking about me as if I¡¯m some sort of a dog. Though I do feel like my job nowadays is to watch the house. So I feel like being a watchdog,¡± Sonia said.


    ¡°I don¡¯t believe you... Wait, where are you going?¡±


    Now that I don¡¯t think he will harm us anymore, it¡¯s time to bring the guy that he has no choice but to believe. The king of this country, old man Henry.


    I walked to an open space and opened a portal. He became wary of me but I ignored him. He won¡¯t attack me mindlessly like before since he knows now that I¡¯m stronger than him.


    The portal opened and old man Henry and his grand aunt, Halley, entered.


    ¡°Nice to meet you, Mr. cksmith. I¡¯m the King of Varadis, Henry. We have a favor to ask you.¡±

 Chapter 805 - 805 Recruiting the Blacksmith

    805 Recruiting the cksmith


    ¡°His Majesty?! And how can I believe you? Making him suddenly appear like that, I don¡¯t know how you did it, but I just can¡¯t trust you,¡± the cksmith said. As for the little girl hiding behind her, she was amazed that I can use something that can make people appear all of a sudden.


    Is it safe to do that in front of them? Am I sure that they are not rted to the cult?


    For now, I don¡¯t know yet. But having him will be essential for the destruction of the cult.


    And not just that. If he can cooperate with Marie and create many more amazing invention, then he will be helpful even when it¡¯s no longer a war time against the cult.


    ¡°What about the crown? It¡¯s not convincing that this old man has a crown on top of his head?¡± I asked.


    ¡°It¡¯s not convincing because someone is actually treated a person who could be a king normally. No normal person would treat their king like that,¡± the cksmith said.


    Ah, he¡¯s right. It¡¯s totally my fault. I just brought old man Henry here and talked to him so casually.


    Though I don¡¯t think that the cksmith will still believe me if I said that I¡¯m not even a citizen of Varadis. And even if I say that, the cksmith will believe me less.


    ¡°I think it would have been better if you brought him to the castle instead. That way, he will believe you,¡± old man Henry said.


    .....


    ¡°Yeah, I think so too. But I¡¯d rather be here and check all the weapons here. Hey, you! You started acting hostile to us as soon as we get here. Do you have enemies? Maybe we can negotiate then. You know that I alone is already stronger than you, right? Maybe we can help each other a bit,¡± I said.


    I¡¯m trying to negotiate with him by saying that I can defeat his enemies.


    He¡¯s acting hostile as soon as we get close. I don¡¯t think any normal people would do that. Or maybe it¡¯s because this cksmith has a lot of experience that he can tell that we¡¯re extremely strong. So he needed to kill us right away. Because he thought that we¡¯re one of them.


    When we¡¯re waiting for answer, instead of the cksmith, it was the little girl behind him who spoke.


    ¡°...There were some scary people. They told us that Grandpa has to join them or they will kill us like how they killed my parents. They gave us some time to think and left,¡± she said.


    Hmm? Some people killed her parents? And they want this grandpa to join them? Are they from the cult?


    ¡°Tina! Enough! Don¡¯t say anything anymore! We can¡¯t trust them!¡± the cksmith shouted.


    ¡°But we can¡¯t do anything! And these guys are strong! They can protect us!¡± the little girl, Tina,ined back to her grandfather.


    So, they are currently trying to avoid those people. If that¡¯s the case, then why are they here?


    ¡°If you don¡¯t want to join them, then why are you guys still here and working on another weapon? You can just leave, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...There were no other ces with good equipment for me to craft weapons,¡± the cksmith said.


    Right. He said that he¡¯s looking for someone who can use his weapons well. He said that after I split his Fireball in two.


    So he chose his dream instead of escaping, huh?


    ¡°For now, how about we have a nice and peaceful talk. Other than the king, we will wear the Magic Restricting Cor so you know that we won¡¯t be able to use magic. That way, we can talk peacefully,¡± I suggested.


    ¡°...That would be useless after seeing you cut a magic in half. You don¡¯t need to do that. You cane in and... there¡¯s not enough seat for everyone. I¡¯m sorry. How about we do it here?¡± the cksmith said.


    ¡°Okay. Victoria, a table and seats for eight people,¡± I said.


    There are eight people here. Me, old man Henry, the four master level mages including old man Henry¡¯s grand aunt, and the cksmith and her granddaughter.


    ¡°This...¡±


    The cksmith was shocked to see a ck Slime split herself into multiple pieces and turned into table and chairs.


    And not just that. I also had some Blobbies and turned it into a sword I used to use. Just to let him see the weapon I used.


    ¡°By the way, here. It¡¯s a weapon I¡¯m using. They¡¯re my familiar that can shapeshift into anything. First, I want to see an expert¡¯s reaction seeing my weapon. You will then know why I came here,¡± I said.


    I showed him Victosword. He checked it and was amazed by it.


    ¡°The sharpness is amazing. And for the durability, I don¡¯t think it¡¯s good enough. The used knife that you used before is still more durable than this sword. But I can¡¯t really tell since this is a living being. At least for sharpness, I think that it¡¯s good enough,¡± he said.


    He¡¯s right. That¡¯s also what I get from using his knife. Though for the sharpness, I don¡¯t know. But seeing at his other creations, I think he¡¯s right.


    ¡°For me, sharpness and durability is not important. But a better weapon is still preferable. Especially for this sword-cane. If possible, I want you to make a sword for this. Just the sword. The cane sheath is irreceable,¡± I said.


    This time, I showed him the sword-cane. The sword is worse than Victosword. And he seems to have a lot ofin about the sword. But he didn¡¯t say anything.


    ¡°Yeah. I can make a better sword than this one. But I want to know your deal. I don¡¯t think it¡¯s just because you want me to make you one weapon. Do you want to recruit me just like those other people?¡± the cksmith asked as he returned the sword back to me.


    ¡°For that, let the King speak. He will tell you everything. And probably, the reason of the girl¡¯s parents death is rted to his fault,¡± I said.


    What I meant was that someone probably killed the girl¡¯s parents after almost the entirety of Varadis got controlled by the cult. Back when before I met old man Henry.


    And even after that, there¡¯s still a time when many of the cities were under control of the cult. Or at least close to that. And it has been taken care of by old man Henry now. But that doesn¡¯t mean that everyone in involved in that has been killed.


    They might learnt that this old cksmith is here and aimed for his craftsmanship. So they might still be in hiding and waiting for a chance to recruit him. Forcefully.


    While old man Henry is exining to the cksmith, I¡¯m checking the surrounding. There might be some traces of the guy who killed the girl¡¯s parents.


    While I do that, I also contacted Burnes about it. He and a few other circus members have phones. So I can contact them. And ask those who are free to prepare toe here because I might have learned something about the cult.


    I opened a portal and the agents then split up to see any traces of people here other than us.


    One agent from Varadis will meet old man Henry and ask the cksmith about something that could be used to track the enemies.


    If they are not with the cult, then the agents can handle them peacefully. Probably some broken bones or so.


    But I don¡¯t think that¡¯s the case. Because this cksmith is an expert level fire mage. And he was extremely cautious when we arrived. So we can tell that the enemy is at least as strong as the cksmith.


    After the agent interrogating him left, the cksmith just sat there in disbelief.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry for being rude, Your Majesty. I can¡¯t believe that all that happened. And if there¡¯s a cult like that in this world, then they are probably the one who killed Tina¡¯s parents. If you really wish to destroy them, then I will help you,¡± the cksmith said.


    ¡°That¡¯s great. With your help, we can do a lot of things. But you will probably live in the capital of Tatrama instead of in Varadis anymore. It¡¯s safer in that country since it¡¯s his home country,¡± old man Henry pointed at me as he exined it to the cksmith.


    He¡¯s just saying that I¡¯m the strongest in the whole alliance and someone that they trust the most.


    ¡°As long as Tina is safe, then I don¡¯t mind. But for the equipment¡ª¡±


    ¡°I can bring them all there easily. But first, we need a ce for you to stay in the capital. Probably in my mansion over there. After all, no one dares to mess with me. If people learned that you¡¯re one of my people, they will keep their distance from you. Even if they don¡¯t, there are many people who can protect you and your granddaughter there,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. But first, about the people who threatened me. It will be suspicious if they see that the house is empty,¡± the cksmith said.


    ¡°That won¡¯t be a problem at all. In fact, you can leave right away if you want. More importantly, I want to check your weapons. Don¡¯t worry, I¡¯ll pay for those that interest me. As for the future when you join us, you don¡¯t have to worry about payment. I¡¯m rich. And the kings are rich. You will be paid handsomely,¡± I said.


    With this, we got a cksmith with us. Now, everyone can have a weapon to protect themselves in case they can¡¯t use magic.

 Chapter 806 - 806 He’s a Fan of Aura Users

    806 He¡¯s a Fan of Aura Users


    The cksmith allowed us to see the weapons he created. There are some normal looking weapons, but most of them are just weapons he made not for functionality. They are just for show.


    ¡°My father was a cksmith as well. Though he only made kitchen knife or dismantling knife. He never created something for the purpose of killing another human being. While I was interested in an old children stories about Aura user. So after I took over as a cksmith, I started creating weapons such as swords and spears,¡± the cksmith said.


    Should I say that he¡¯s my biggest fan? Well, that is totally wrong. He¡¯s just a fan of Aura user. So even Victoria and Sonia are included since they were Aura users as well.


    ¡°Most of them just look good enough. But they are not a weapon. Do you work for some sort of entertainment business,¡± I asked.


    ¡°You¡¯re right. They are mostly weapons for decoration. They are not durable and not sharp. Because they will be sold to a traveling theater for ys. I made them dull so that they won¡¯t hurt anyone just in case. While making them not durable so that my business can continue since they will break easily. I only made some real weapons that I think is good enough. Not a kitchen knife, and not a dismantling knife. Real weapons.¡±


    Then he opened a door on the floor which lead to the basement. Why do I keep involved with someone with hidden passage to the basement? I just left those ind with a lot of passage to the underground. And now I¡¯m entering a basement.


    I already know that there¡¯s a basement in this ce so I¡¯m not surprised. I also have checked the weapons. Just looking at them. I won¡¯t know how good they are unless I tested them myself.


    ¡°So, what do you think?¡±


    I asked the two other people here who have experience in handling weapon. The ck Slime and the ghost. Victoria and Sonia.


    .....


    ¡°The weapons here look nice. If it¡¯s in the past, many experts would pay a lot for these weapons. The quality here is great. I can tell because one of my lovers was a cksmith,¡± Sonia said.


    If that¡¯s the case, then it¡¯s good. Though hearing Sonia said something like one of his lovers, the master level fire mage was interested in that. I think they will be good friends to each other. Talking about their past and how many men enticed by them.


    ¡°I can transform to those weapons. So other than the sword for the sword-cane, I don¡¯t think you need to buy any,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Are you jealous to weapons? When I was with other girls, you¡¯re fine. But now you¡¯re feeling jealous because of weapons?¡± I asked curiously.


    ¡°Because I know that I¡¯m superior in one thing. That you need me. If you buy a weapon for yourself, you will need me less. So of course I¡¯m jealous,¡± Victoria said.


    ...She¡¯s surprisingly honest at this time. Though it¡¯s true that I don¡¯t really need weapons. Victoria and her clones are more convenience.


    But it¡¯s always better if I have spare weapons. And other can also have high quality weapon with them. That¡¯s why having a cksmith will be helpful for us.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. Other than the sword, I don¡¯t need much. And it¡¯s more for the others than for myself. Especially for the ten master level mages who trained their bodies more than their magic in the past hundred year. Even if their magic is powerful, they can¡¯t just forget what they were training for over a hundred years. Just look at them,¡± I said as I¡¯m pointing at the four master level mages here.


    The four master level mages look so excited like kids looking at toys. They¡¯re touching everything that they can see.


    ¡°Hey, can we test some weapons first?¡± the tamer asked. He can no longer endure it and want to test the sword in his hand.


    The cksmith nodded. And I told him not to worry since we will pay for the ones we picked.


    ¡°Take several you want to test outside. Also, for your main weapon, you need something that suits you. It could be a sword, dagger, hammer, axe, or other weapons. Find the one that suits you and choose them. I will pay for now,¡± I said.


    The master level mages then grabbed as many weapons as they can and left the basement. They¡¯re outside and are testing the weapons with the help of Victoria and Sonia.


    Even if the weapons they are using are not swords, Victoria and Sonia both came from the time when many Aura users still exist. And they have watched me fight enough to tell what is good and what is not.


    As for old man Henry and I, we just negotiate more in the living room. The girl, Tina, served us some tea.


    We talked about our n from now on. And what things other than weapons that we need his craftsmanship in. Whatever it is that Marie is nning to create.


    I also contacted Albert that I got a cksmith who will stay in my mansion at the capital. And to tell Marie that she can get a great help from him. Even more since he¡¯s an expert level fire mage.


    Albert and Marie prepared everything for the cksmith¡¯s arrival. They just told their servants and Ian that the cksmith ising. And there will be a new building in my backyard.


    As for the equipment, I will bring them all from here.


    After the negotiation is over, old man Henry and the cksmith shook their hand. The cksmith will be officially introduced to the others when he finished creating more weapons for self-defense.


    ¡°Can you also make armor?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. I can make some strong chainmail as well. Depend on the material, I can make one that anyone can put under their clothes and doesn¡¯t feel heavy at all,¡± the cksmith said.


    ¡°That¡¯s good enough to advertise to the kings since they need extra protection. As soon as we finished moving, prepare to make them. If you need the material, you can tell the butler there who will inform other people to get them,¡± I said.


    ¡°Ah, we might need more people. The equipment I have are pretty... heavy?¡±


    The cksmith was shocked to see I could easily lift several items at once which are too heavy for him.


    He¡¯s someone who work as a cksmith and also an expert level mage. He¡¯s strong. His body is even bigger than those training maniacs in Mellian.


    But to see that I could lift something so heavy at once is such a huge shock.


    ¡°...Are you perhaps a master level mage?¡± the cksmith asked.


    ¡°Nope. I¡¯m still expert level. Haven¡¯t reached that stage yet,¡± I said.


    I guess he knows that the higher a mage¡¯s level is, the stronger they became physically. So he thought that I¡¯m a master level mage.


    ¡°You¡¯re close though. The other four people who are testing your weapons are the master level mages. as for Roy, he¡¯s someone you admired. Someone who came out from a children¡¯s story. An Aura user,¡± old man Henry said.


    ¡°An Aura user! You are real?!¡±


    ¡°I did not came out of a book. I¡¯m a real person. Someone will exin many things to you after we move... wait, someone ising,¡± I said.


    From distance, I can see several people areing. And one of them is the agent who was supposed to be investigating the surrounding. He¡¯s pretending to be captured and following them. Because I can see other agents are watching them. With one of them is flying this way hurriedly.


    ¡°I guess something will happen soon. Old man, I¡¯ll bring you back to your castle. Mr. cksmith,e with me. The little girl as well,¡± I said.


    ¡°Tina too? What if it¡¯s something dangerous?¡± the cksmith asked.


    ¡°If it¡¯s something dangerous, then I can protect you two right away. Did you forget that those four people are master level mages? And I¡¯m also an Aura user. Whoever ising, you will be safe,¡± I said.


    Then I open a portal for old man Henry to return, and meet the others outside. They are already prepared for those people¡¯s arrival. They can sense those peopleing.


    But they ignored them as they still continue practicing swinging their weapons.


    ¡°So, someone ising. The agents investigating is also watching them with one of them is flying here. Let¡¯s hear his exnation, shall we?¡± I said.


    They heard me. But their focus is more in finding a weapon that suit them.


    Well, at their level, there¡¯s really nothing for them to worry about.


    The flying agent arrived and told us about what they found.


    ¡°They are the people who are trying to recruit the cksmith. They saw you guys leaving the city to this direction. So they are probably trying to extort you or threaten you to get the cksmith,¡± he said.


    ¡°What about the captured agent?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. He¡¯s not injured that badly. If he want to escape, he can. Also, none of those people are master level mage. So there¡¯s nothing to worry about,¡± the agent said.


    ¡°Alright. Thanks. I¡¯ll bring you back to the circuster,¡± I said.


    Now, what should we do with them?

 Chapter 807 - 807 The Blacksmith’s Revenge

    807 The cksmith¡¯s Revenge


    ¡°It¡¯s them...¡±


    Hearing the report from the agent, the cksmith look angry. And his granddaughter is holding his hand tightly.


    ¡°They¡¯re the one who threatened you and killed her parents?¡± I asked. Though it¡¯s already obvious the answer is.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. Just because there are more of them, they think that they can do whatever they want knowing that I¡¯m just alone protecting my granddaughter. They must be here trying to recruit me again. With force most likely,¡± the cksmith said.


    ¡°Then you don¡¯t have to worry. If you want, you can go wild and kill them all by yourself. We will protect your granddaughter. Don¡¯t forget that any one of us, can defeat all of them right away,¡± I said.


    ¡°Thank you for that. Then, I¡¯ll do just that. Please protect my granddaughter while I kill them all. And I will promise you that I will make the best equipment for you all. I will even keep improving my skill so that my products will be better and better,¡± the cksmith said.


    ¡°Do that after you done with your revenge. Also, don¡¯t worry about them escaping. They can¡¯t. This ce is already surrounded,¡± I said.


    ¡°...I think you guys are scarier than them,¡± the cksmith said.


    Some agents have returned from investigating. And they¡¯re all already hiding behind the trees.


    .....


    Even if the enemies are expert level mages, these agents have trained their stealth skill. So unless the opponent is a master level mage, they would have difficulty detecting the hiding agents.


    Also, we have master level mages and an Aura Master here. There¡¯s nothing to worry about.


    Escaping? In their dream.


    Though for the agents to have returned, I guess they have finished their investigation. I guess there¡¯s not much to find here.


    ¡°Here theye. Little girl, go hide yourself behind those four people swinging their swords,¡± I said.


    Even though we¡¯re not that close to the master level mages, they should have listened our conversation. They might act like they don¡¯t care. But when I said to the girl toe to them, the four master level mages made a space for girls to hide while being surrounded by them who are still swinging their swords. So those four people are swinging their weapons to the opposite direction of where the girl will hide.


    The girl then agreed and hide behind them. And the master level mages still swinging their weapons. They are trying to use spears this time.


    Soon after, five people arrived. One of them is an agent who is pretending to be weak though. He¡¯s not injured badly from what I can see. Just a bit of healing and he¡¯ll recoverpletely. In fact, he might not need healing magic at all.


    ¡°Why are you here again?! I told you that if you don¡¯t want want to die, nevere here again!¡± the cksmith shouted.


    ¡°Oh, you have guests? Are they your customers from the theater? Swinging a weapon around, look at how stupid they look like. Can they even protect your granddaughter?¡±


    The thug who said that then casually cast a Fireball toward the girl¡¯s direction. But the Fireball hit the master level fire mage and she felt nothing. Though I can see that she cast a Fire Barrier right in front of her so it seems like she was hit directly.


    ¡°Oh, she¡¯s pretty strong. Are they perhaps people you hired for protection?¡± the thug asked.


    ¡°How dare you targeted Tina! I will kill you right here right now!¡±


    The cksmith was angry that his granddaughter got targeted right away. And he immediately cast a strong fire magic toward the enemy.


    They didn¡¯t expect him to attack right away. And the fire mage who aimed at Tina is too weak for the cksmith. His fire is not as hot as the cksmith¡¯s fire. And the fire engulfed that guy and he died in pain.


    Is it safe to show such thing to his granddaughter? Oh, she seems happy that she saw the one who killed her parents died in front of her it seems. But there are still three more people.


    ¡°Kill him! Kill everyone here as well!¡±


    Well, that¡¯s impossible. Also, the agent who was pretending to be captured has already escaped at the same time that guy died.


    Though how did he get captured? He should be acting as a hunter, right? Maybe those idiots think that he can be used as a baggage carrier. And to force him to do that, they need to show him who¡¯s the boss. By hitting him again and again until he gave up.


    Well, now that agent is being healed by another agent in hiding. As for those thugs there¡¯s no need to care about these weaklings.


    All of them tried to kill the cksmith and his granddaughter. Using a wide spell that hit arge area. But they would never realized that the ones they are attacking are master level mages.


    As for the magic that came my way, I just dodged them. Jumping high is easy. Especially since there doesn¡¯t seem to be any wind mage among them.


    After a while, they noticed that the old cksmith is actually stronger than them despite being at the same level. In fact, among many expert level fire mages, his fire could be the strongest and the hottest. Though in real battle, I think Candy can win easily.


    Another man died. And now the other two are trying to escape only to be blocked by the agents. Some of the agents have just arrived. Which mean those who arete might have finished the investigationpletely.


    I guess they split up. Some wereing back here to report to us, while the some were finishing their investigation.


    And now that they are done, they have all returned. Some even bring some gifts.


    The thugs tried to breakthrough. But they never expected that those who are surrounding them are expert level mages. So they surrendered.


    But the cksmith ignored that and killed another one. That¡¯s what you get when you killed someone¡¯s family.


    ¡°If you kill me, then the higher ups will hear about this! Not just you, but everyone here will be killed!¡± the man shouted. Trying to make the cksmith to not kill him.


    ¡°If it¡¯s the group in the city whose real goal is to recruit exceptional individuals for the cult, then there¡¯s nothing to worry about. None of them are master level mages, so we have finished cleaning up everything.¡±


    One of the agent who had just arrived said that, and then he dropped the proofs that the group in the cult has been cleaned up. Thest thug seems to notice what they are and he realized that there¡¯s no way out anymore.


    ¡°You should have keep that explosion device in your mouth even after you reached expert level. That way, you can kill yourself instead of having someone do it for you. Well, if you¡¯re with the cult. If you¡¯re not, then I guess you don¡¯t understand what I¡¯m saying,¡± I said mockingly. But he looked confused instead. Though it didn¡¯t take long since the cksmith killed him soon after.


    ¡°This is for my family!¡±


    The cksmith killed thest thug. And now the cksmith and his granddaughter have finished with their revenge. They¡¯re hugging each other in tear.


    As for me, I walked to the agent who dropped the proofs of that organization.


    ¡°So, they are from the cult?¡± I asked.


    ¡°It¡¯s weird. Rather than from the cult, it was like they are being paid by the cult to find excellent individuals for the cult to recruit. There¡¯s no proof at all that they are with the cult. We just found some letters sent by someone from the cult. And thest time that they made contact with this group was back when you were investigating alone for weeks in the Monsters World. I guess they are already dead. But we will ask some agents we know to stay here and investigate more,¡± the agent said.


    ¡°Okay. Good job. Do you want me to return you back to the inn?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No need. It won¡¯t take long for us to go back anyway. And we might be able to find something. Well, I¡¯ll be backter for dinner. Don¡¯t eat everything, okay?¡±


    The agents then left. Leaving us behind.


    ¡°So, have you feel any weapon that suits you?¡± I asked the four master level mages.


    ¡°I feel like a sword is good. This one that I can hold with two hands. A two-handed sword is what Sonia said. Since I¡¯m strong, I can lift it with one hand. As long as I learn the right technique, I think this is a good choice,¡± the summoner said.


    ¡°This spear. I picked something that I can use while riding on a monster. Though I still don¡¯t have any tamed monster yet,¡± the tamer said.


    The two picked weapons that can be used while riding something. I guess they¡¯re already thinking of what monster they want to make contract with.


    As for the two female master level mages, they haven¡¯t made their decision yet.


    ¡°Don¡¯t forget to try a barehanded fight as well. Maybe that¡¯s why none of these weapon suit you. Though there are also many other weapons that haven¡¯t been tested yet,¡± I said.


    I think that¡¯s enough of testing the weapons here. We will have more timeter since the cksmith will move to my ce.

 Chapter 808 - 808 Helping the Blacksmith Moving

    808 Helping the cksmith Moving


    Now, we need to help the cksmith move. We need to get his forging equipment to take with us. Because he said that he¡¯s familiar with the tools that he has. And I think it¡¯s difficult to find a better one since cksmith is rare enough as it is.


    Since we need him to craft quality products for us, we will take those tools and equipment.


    But first, I need to bring the dead people away. I can just leave it here, but there¡¯s a theater group who is a loyal customer to the cksmith. He made the props for the group. And it will be bad if this ce is surrounded by monsters because of the smell of the corpses.


    I opened a portal to a den of monster in Monsters World and throw the corpses there. There won¡¯t be anything remaining from those corpses.


    As for the theater group who is loyal customer, the cksmith left a letter on the door saying that he¡¯s moving to Tatrama. So if the theater group is looking for the cksmith, they can go there.


    ¡°That¡¯s very convenient magic you have. Is that how you will transport us?¡± the cksmith asked.


    ¡°Yes. For now, you will live in my mansion in the capital of Tatrama. They will prepare a ce for your tools so you can make your weapon there. If you want to get another ce, you can ask the king himselfter. I bet he¡¯s interested in meeting you. Maybe he¡¯s already staying in my ce waiting for you to arrive,¡± I said.


    Knowing Albert, he must be impatient to meet the cksmith. After all, it¡¯s not just for the alliance. But for his wife as well, Marie.


    Because if the cksmith join us, then Marie will have someone that can help her in many ways. But that will be forter.


    .....


    First, the cksmith will craft a sword for my sword-cane. I want a better sword for that.


    Next, the cksmith will make chainmail for me and the kings. One that we can wear under our clothes. So that we can protect ourselves.


    I think there are too many requests. We need to have more people learning from the cksmith. But looking for people who will help might be easy. We have so many helpers after all.


    I think we can get all the people from the smaller kingdom that joined us who were recently attacked by the cult. They can learn about cksmithing for them to make money since they are likely to have lost their source of ie because of the attack.


    Maybe the cksmith will only be in Tatrama for a while. He can go to any ce he wants to go. After all, I can easily transport his weapons and armors with portal.


    But for now, bringing him to Tatrama is ideal. There¡¯s no need to worry about his life. We can get some people to protect him and his granddaughter. It¡¯s much better than being here at least.


    Then I told the master level mages to help the cksmith move. I opened a portal and brought everyone to my ce in Tatrama.


    I guess this is also the first time that the master level magese to my ce here. Though they know about my ce in Cassau though.


    ¡°I¡¯ll be returning to the circus after this. For now, you all can stay and see what weapon fits you. I¡¯ll also get other master level mages toe here and try out some weapons. Maybe Ang and the others as well. Though for them, a self-defense weapon like a knife is good enough. Ah, right! Mr. cksmith, I need you to create rifles!¡±


    I remembered that we can ask the cksmith to make guns as well. This way, Sara and other air mages can have stronger weapon that can endure stronger air pressure.


    I brought the master level mages and Sara here. Then I asked Sara to show him her rifle and maybe ask him to create specialized bullets as well if possible.


    ¡°Whoa, this is the first time I¡¯ve seen something like this. The quality is already decent, but I can make it more powerful if I have the blueprint,¡± the cksmith said.


    ¡°Okay. The owner of the blueprint ising here along with the king. She¡¯s his wife, you see? Which means that she¡¯s the queen. She¡¯s a genius who invented many amazing things. If you help her, then we can have more amazing things to use in the fight against the cult. They¡¯re here now. You can talk to them. I¡¯ll be leaving,¡± I said.


    I was about to open a portal back to the room at the inn where the circus is staying, but Sara stopped me.


    ¡°Then you need to return me back as well. I¡¯m a noble now and I¡¯m extremely busy.¡±


    Yup. I forgot that she¡¯s a noble now. Next time, I need to notice her before I brought her somewhere all of a sudden.


    The three master level mages who joined the circus also asked me to bring them back with me. Seems like they have decided on their weapon.


    The summoner asked for a long sword. Even if it¡¯s a two-handed sword, he can lift it easily with one hand. So he asked for long sword that he can use while riding his monster. Though he still doesn¡¯t have a familiar yet.


    Maybe he will get one after I brought him to the horses that Ray is leading. One of them is maybe a monster that he will be interested in.


    The tamer asked for two spears that he can use while riding as well. I guess I¡¯ll bring the summoner and the tamer to Monsters World after the show is over. I nned to go there anyway after the show at that city is done.


    As for the fire mage, she thinks that a dagger is enough. Because back when they first encountered me, she was one of the few who carried a knife. Maybe she¡¯s used to it. And she doesn¡¯t feel that she will be suited for any of the weapons. So it¡¯s best to just use something she¡¯s already familiar with.


    The rest master level mages are still looking at the weapons with interest. I guess after the show is over and I returned from the Monsters World after checking up on Ray, I¡¯lle back and see their progress. I will also teach them few moves that I can use with the weapon they picked.


    I left the sword and the cane to the cksmith. I brought Sara back to where she came from after she greeted Albert. Then after saying some things to Albert and Marie who came here by riding on Ian¡¯s back after he transformed into a huge falcon, I brought the three master level mages back to where the circus is staying.


    As for old man Henry¡¯s grand aunt though, she¡¯s still trying out other weapons.


    I guess they will all be staying in that mansion for a few days. I don¡¯t mind. Ian is there. If they need anything, they can ask Ian.


    And I have told the cksmith that if he needs any material, he can just ask. If it¡¯s from some rare monsters, I bet Ang and Kron will be more interested in fighting those monsters than getting the material. I just hope that they won¡¯t destroy the material when killing those monsters.


    Oh, right. I probably have the best material for armor. It¡¯s Andro¡¯s scale. Just one scale is big enough to cover several people at once. I think the cksmith will be interested in it. I¡¯ll show it to himter. He¡¯s already busy as it is.


    Though I didn¡¯t ask the cksmith to work right away. He can take a break and walking around the capital with his granddaughter. I gave him some money that they can use.


    I returned back to the inn and see that the agents who were investigating were there.


    ¡°So, other than those people, the city is already safe from the influence of the cult?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. Even most people in that group didn¡¯t join the cult. Only a few of them,¡± one agent said.


    Is that why the guy I said to keep his explosive device instead looked confused before he died? Because he didn¡¯t understand what I was talking about?


    Well, he¡¯s dead now. And that organization has been cleaned uppletely by the agents.


    As for whether they died or imprisoned for interrogation, I don¡¯t care. The agents know best what to do with them.


    Now, let¡¯s prepare for the show.


    The next morning, we prepared the tent quickly. We have gotten used to it that we were finished in just a few hours.


    Though for the other circus group where Sandra is joined, they were shocked to see that we¡¯re done in just a few hours while they need a whole day. Which makes them unable to perform right away at night. So they needed at least two days after given permission so they can perform.


    It¡¯s finally time to perform. As for the lineup, we were split into two groups as nned. One for today and the third day, the second is for tomorrow and the fourth day. As for me, I will perform every day.


    ¡°So, let¡¯s give it our best to support Thomas¡¯ love life as well! His crush is watching from the front seat. Thomas, don¡¯t be too nervous, okay? After all, the one who will be watched closely the most will be me. So you don¡¯t need to worry,¡± I said as our pep talk.


    That is our second goal for today¡¯s performance. To support Thomas¡¯ love life.


    If we¡¯re doing great, then Sandra will be interested to watch again tomorrow. And the time they both can see each other will be longer.


    As for the guy who seems to be interested in Sandra from her circus group, seems like he¡¯s tired because he was unable to sleep at night.


    ...It¡¯s all thanks to Victoria. That guy is having trouble because he kept seeing and hearing things from the shadow at night. Though that is not shadow. That was Victoria.


    The one who is supporting Thomas the most is her. She¡¯s doing her best to keep his rival in love away from them.


    Anyway, it¡¯s time to perform. It¡¯s finally the return of the greatest clown in the world, rence!

 Chapter 809 - 809 Visiting Us After the Show

    809 Visiting Us After the Show


    ¡°That was insane! It was so amazing!¡±


    It¡¯ste at night. The show was just finished for the day. We will perform again tomorrow night.


    But those are the things that we keep hearing from the audiences who watched our performances. Including from the other circus group. It¡¯s full of praise.


    ¡°Yeah! The previous circus group was nice. I thought that I don¡¯t need to watch another circus soon after the previous one. But this one is already much better!¡±


    ¡°I know, right? I want toe again tomorrow!¡±


    ¡°The previous group was good enough. But this one set the bar too high. I think I can still enjoy the previous group¡¯s performance, but it won¡¯t be as nice as this one.¡±


    ¡°That clown is funny! Mom, I want a red nose as well!¡±


    ¡°Shut up, Kid! You¡¯re too noisy at this time in the night! Shut up or I will punch your nose that they will turn red!¡±


    Oh, wait. That¡¯s not someone who had just left the circus. He¡¯s a thug in this city who is bothered by the noise that the citizens created after they watched our show.


    .....


    The kid and his mom run away quickly from the thug. Does he need to ruin the mood? What an asshole.


    When no one is looking, I knocked the thug out unconscious using sleeping gas, strip him naked, and threw him into a brothel with the ugliest prostitutes there with a note saying ¡®Do as you wish,¡¯ and a small bag of money.


    Even if they are ugly, they need to be recognized by the people. One must not look down on them just for being ugly.


    Well, sleeping with them is a big no for me though. I have lovers, so I don¡¯t need to sleep with prostitutes like I did in my past life. And even then, I have never sleep with an ugly prostitute.


    But I still entered some establishment with ugly prostitutes. Because they usually have great sense of humor and a good listener. Even better than the pretty ones who are usually just ignore what we said.


    I think that¡¯s how a brothel with ugly prostitutes can still work. The prostitutes are professional listeners and not just for sleeping. So many people with a lot ofin and less ie would go there for a chat.


    Though for that thug who dares to threatened a small kid, he will wake up being surrounded by those prostitutes. This will be the time of his life. Maybe. If he decided to change his type.


    ¡°Yeah. They are usually a better listener so many people would go there. And that¡¯s where we sometimes get our information. They learned a lot about the situation in the city from the people.¡±


    That¡¯s what Burnes said when I told him that I took the thug to that brothel. I guess they can be a ce to get information as well.


    Enough about brothel. We¡¯re here after cleaning up the tent and set some stuffs for tomorrow¡¯s performance.


    Then we decided to go and have some drinks while we let the other performers who will perform tomorrow to clean up the rest. And there¡¯s an expected unexpected guest. Sandra.


    For us, she¡¯s an expected guest. Because we guessed that she woulde to visit Thomas. But for Thomas,it was unexpected that she woulde to visit.


    And so, everyone decided to leave Thomas¡¯ table and drink at another table. Leaving a seat for Sandra. But when I was about to leave my seat which is next to Thomas, he grabbed the sleeve of my shirt asking to not leave him alone with her. So I didn¡¯t leave.


    ...But can he not do that? Grabbing my sleeve and ask for help like a little child?


    ¡°That was a great show! Sorry, but can I sit here?¡± Sandra asked.


    Thomas is too shy all of a sudden. Didn¡¯t he talk with her normally yesterday? Why is he so shy now?


    ¡°...Sure, you can. We also like to hear about our performance from others. Especially since you¡¯re from the same industry,¡± I said politely.


    ¡°Thank you! I know that you¡¯re enjoying yourself tonight so I¡¯m terribly sorry for bothering you guys,¡± Sandra said.


    ¡°No problem! You are allowed to bother us anytime you want! Isn¡¯t that right, Thomas?¡± I asked Thomas.


    ¡°Y-Yeah! You¡¯re allowed toe anytime you want.¡±


    He¡¯s too nervous. Probably because he knows that he has a chance to ask her out now. Especially since she¡¯s here, and the rest of us here are the people who promised to support him in his... quest for love.


    But it¡¯s too soon. She¡¯s here because of the circus. So she¡¯s going to talk about it and not prepared to be confessed by Thomas.


    Even Victoria said that tonight is too early. We need to wait for a while before their rtionship can progress.


    And as expected, Sandra is only talking about the show. Especially me. Since I did the unthinkable.


    ¡°rence! How did you do that? To think that someone can swallow a sword. Well, not entirely. But wasn¡¯t it painful? The de should be sharp, right? Is your throat okay?¡± Sandra asked me.


    That¡¯s one of the performance that I did. A sword swallowing trick. Something I learned from Victoria.


    She said that it¡¯s amon trick to use for entertainment and often performed in her world. The professional in her world would swallow the entire de of the sword until the hilt, then take it out. Just a thin double-edged sword. Not the sword I usually use which is thicker. Just about the size of my sword from the sword-cane.


    Victoria said that to do that trick, because of the sharp de, the performers would need to swallow the sheath first and put the sword inside the sheath inside their mouth to be safe from being cut. But what I did was much safer.


    ...I just used Victosword, and transformed the de into nothing. Making it seems like I swallowed an entire sword.


    That¡¯s right. I just tricked everyone to think that I swallowed a sword. When in fact, it¡¯s all thanks to the prop.


    Good thing there are no master level mage in the audience. Or they will know the trick.


    ¡°That¡¯s a secret. Though it¡¯s something that only professional can do,¡± I said.


    Though everyone here can do that. Because I told them the trick.


    ¡°That was amazing! Is it a trick and the fact is that you didn¡¯t swallow the sword at all? I guess having good props is also a skill. In the end, what we need to do is to entertain people. So even if it¡¯s a trick that anyone can do once they learn the secret, as long as it¡¯s entertaining, then it will be fine,¡± Sandra said. I guess she knows a lot since we¡¯re from the same industry.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. The best thing about it is that even if they know that there¡¯s a trick involved, more people will be interested in the trick. And the more they focused on the trick, the easier it is to trick them. I¡¯m sure you know since you¡¯re in this industry as well,¡± I said.


    ¡°Well, not as much as you. And it¡¯s not just you. The other performers are amazing as well. Though a lot of it probably thanks to the props. Can I ask where you get them from?¡± Sandra asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s a secret. Though most of them were created by ourselves. Of course that¡¯s the case since we¡¯re the one using them,¡± I said.


    Hey... Isn¡¯t it sad that Thomas didn¡¯t get to say anything? Sandra is just talking to me. What about Thomas? Why to rence?


    I thought that I have removed the chance of her getting interested in me. Well, romantically, the chance is gone. But for business-rted, her interest in me is extremely high.


    ¡°Like that tightrope walker! He just did a back flip on the rope! Then that other clown! Then¡ª¡±


    She¡¯s just like a child getting excited.


    This can¡¯t go on. Especially since now all the other agents are looking at me urging me to change the topic.


    ¡°Yeah... Isn¡¯t it amazing that Thomas can gather all of us here? He¡¯s the best. He might have stopped performing himself, but his status in the circus is the highest. I can even say that even if the king himself is here, I would pay more respect to Thomas than to the king,¡± I said.


    Well, this isn¡¯t a lie. Because I treat even the kings normally. I work with them. but for Thomas, I work for him. Though I¡¯m good friend with them all.


    The agents just smiled because they know what I meant. Though they¡¯re happy that the subject changed at least.


    ¡°Shh! Don¡¯t say that! You don¡¯t know who will hear that!¡± Sandra said.


    I just looked at Thomas so that he will be the one to exin it. He needs to talk. Or I will be the one talking with her more.


    ¡°Actually, the King of Tatrama watched our performance a few times. He was moving incognito, but we knew who he was in the audience. But rence still treated him normally and even asked him for a help in the show. That¡¯s what he meant. We were never invited by any king officially. Just a king visited us incognito,¡± Thomas exined.


    ¡°Oh! A king showed interest in the circus?!¡±


    Good. With this, Thomas can chat with her. And Sandra herself seems like she¡¯s interested in talking with Thomas more since when I talked to her, it was as if I¡¯m boasting. Just like Thomas¡¯ rival in love who keeps boasting nonsense and ended up unable to sleep.


    With this, my help is done. Let¡¯s be a statue that everyone ignores.

 Chapter 810 - 810 Sandra Make Friend with Victoria

    810 Sandra Make Friend with Victoria


    After talking with me about my performance, Sandra is now talking with Thomas about managing the circus.


    That¡¯s a topic that Thomas can discuss about very well. So I just turn myself into a statue. A statue that can eat and drink. Wait, that¡¯s no longer a statue.


    I¡¯d like to leave now, but whenever I tried to leave my seat, Thomas is ring at me asking for help.


    You don¡¯t need my help anymore. You can speak normally with her now.


    And so, I had no choice but to listen to everything. Though there¡¯s a slime that enjoys listening.


    Apparently, Sandra is the leader of the other circus group. But she¡¯s still performing as well as a juggler. Just juggling things. While Thomas has stopped performing and focus on managing the circus and became the host for the circus. Introducing everyone and tells the audience what they will see. Though that¡¯s not really an important part of the circus.


    In my past life, I went to a circus a few times. They didn¡¯t have a host at all to introduce the performers. Just one show after another with almost no break.


    Though maybe we do it now because all the performers are expert level mages at minimum. So they might move too fast for everyone to notice. And if Thomas didn¡¯t exin what will be shown, they won¡¯t be able to see anything. That¡¯s why we need someone to exin.


    Anyway, Sandra and Thomas talked more about the circus before they started talking about their private life. Including about Sandra¡¯ste husband and how that other guy is annoying her so much for obviously trying to flirt with her.


    .....


    ¡°If he¡¯s not the most talented performers in our group, I would have kicked him out already.¡±


    That¡¯s what Sandra said about that guy.


    And Thomas who heard that she doesn¡¯t like someone is flirting with him looked desperate. Because that¡¯s what he wants to do.


    I guess flirting with her is impossible. Just ask the other agents about how to make more progress. I¡¯m useless in this area.


    After saying how annoying it was being flirted, Thomas was silent. He doesn¡¯t know how to react and just sipped his drink. I guess I¡¯ll start talking again now.


    ¡°I know, right? Being flirted by someone who is not your type is annoying. For me, if I¡¯m just being friend with them, that¡¯s fine. But if they keep flirting on me, that¡¯s just annoying. Well, I don¡¯t have any problem with it anymore nowadays with that person set his eyes on another target,¡± I said.


    ¡°...He?¡± Sandra asked.


    ¡°Yes. He¡¯s a man. I prefer my lovers to be women. But good thing I introduced him to my other friend and he¡¯s now setting his eyes on my other friend,¡± I said.


    It¡¯s from my own experience. I don¡¯t hate Hill. Just don¡¯t want him to be involved with me romantically.


    I heard that he¡¯s an expert level mage now. He¡¯s an indispensable for the safety of Mellian. He will protect the boys there, is what he said.


    As for the guy he¡¯s interested in, it¡¯s Kron. And he¡¯s still didn¡¯t notice Hill¡¯s advance toward him.


    Though I think Kron decided to live his life as a hunter and keep getting stronger. I don¡¯t think he will be involved with anyone romantically. He¡¯s just too focused on enjoying himself exploring the world with his partner, Breezy.


    ¡°Oh, I see. For me, I just want our interaction as business only. I don¡¯t think I want him to be my friend. He¡¯s too annoying even to other people,¡± Sandra said.


    Now we¡¯re talking about our love lives. I also told her about my harem members. Though I didn¡¯t tell her everything like how we¡¯re at war with the cult and the fact that we¡¯re the main force.


    Since she asked about my harem, I told her only what she can know. Like the smart and independent woman, Ka. Then I have Ang and Candy whom I said to be excellent hunters. Then the doctor, Sophie. After that, the homely, Lina. Can¡¯t say that she¡¯s my maid since I¡¯m not a noble. Then there¡¯s a the wild girl, Shelia. Andstly at the moment, since they said that I might have more, is the weird writer, Victoria. Though for the nocturnal, Arin, is still questionable. But since she loves my blood the most, I think she¡¯s the closest one to be the next. If she wants to.


    ¡°Writer, huh? That name rings a bell. Oh, right! One of the performers in the circus is a fan of her novels! Wait, is that novel is based on that guy who flirted with you?¡± Sandra asked.


    ¡°Don¡¯t ask me. I don¡¯t want to know whatever she¡¯s writing about. It¡¯s too scary for me,¡± I said.


    Victoria sometimes wrote about my experience. And some characters in her story, back when she started writing and I was curious about what she wrote, are simr to me. So I refused to read them ever again.


    ¡°I¡¯m not too interested with the rtionship between the character. I like the action more,¡± Sandra said.


    Oh, she wrote action novels? Maybe an adventure since she¡¯s staying with me everywhere I go.


    ¡°She¡¯s my fan. Should I go out ande back then introduced myself as Victoria?¡±


    Victoria said that to herself. Though I don¡¯t think she needs an answer from me.


    Also, we want to help Thomas. Not to let her meet a fan... Wait! That might be a good idea.


    So I told Victoria via telepathy that if she wants to, she can do that. I don¡¯t think Sandra will be here for much longer. But if Victoria, who can easily make friend with a lot of people except Sonia when they were both alive, can get closer to Sandra, then even after we split up with Sandra, Victoria can still talk with her.


    Heck. If it¡¯s her, having a sleepover with someone she just met is not impossible. Then she can tell Sandra about Thomas¡¯ good points.


    Victoria agreed to do that. So she left, and return again as Victoria the writer in her human form.


    ¡°Hey, Roy! I¡¯m here!¡±


    Victoria pretended that we made a promise to meet her here.


    Thomas was confused seeing Victoria in her human form. As for the agents, they sort of expected it after seeing Victoria left the building.


    ¡°Sandra, meet Victoria,¡± I introduced Victoria to Sandra.


    ¡°Oh, my! I know some people who wants to meet you!¡± Sandra said.


    ¡°What about you?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m not that interested in meeting famous people other than rence,¡± Sandra said.


    ¡°What about now that you have met him?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Well, during show, he was amazing,¡± Sandra said.


    ¡°What about outside the circus?¡±


    This time, Sandra didn¡¯t say anything. How should I feel now?


    And Victoria easily and quickly get close enough to Sandra to be called her friend. And Victoria asionally talked to both Sandra and Thomas under the guise of research for her novel. She also talked to me to make it seems that she¡¯s not ignoring me.


    What a skill! I can¡¯t do that. If someone asked me my opinion, I would often times speak the truth and make them avoid me instead. I can act and pretend that I¡¯m interested in many things, but I hate that I need to act. So I keep it to the minimum.


    It has been so long since we¡¯re here. But the ce is not closing at all. When I asked Burnes about it via text messages, he told me that the owner of this ce is an agent from Varadis. So we can stay as long as we want.


    Though we can¡¯t stay too long here. Or people will be suspicious why the ce is not closing yet.


    Someonee and told us that they¡¯re closing while Sandra and Victoria are excited talking about everything. It¡¯s hard to keep up with these two.


    But is it fine to show Victoria to her right now? Because if we can trust Sandra, then Thomas will probably tell her that Victoria is actually a monster.


    Well, if we can trust her that much, then it should be fine. There won¡¯t be any problem at all.


    We then split up with Sandra. Victoria said that she will take Sandra back to where she¡¯s staying before returning to our inn.


    ¡°You don¡¯t have to,¡± Sandra said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I want to talk you more tonight. And how about we meet up again tomorrow? Although I look like this, I¡¯m quite strong, you know. I can protect you,¡± Victoria said.


    Thiste at night, Sandra will be safer if Victoria stays with her. But there might be danger as well.


    What if Sandra ended up to be interested with Victoria instead? Then it¡¯s a farewell to Thomas¡¯ love.


    Well, if that happen, then it¡¯s all Thomas¡¯ fault. He should have make a move on his own instead of asking for help all the time.


    Now, what was it again that Victoria said... right! Thomas need to get out of the Friendzone area now. Good luck, Thomas.

 Chapter 811 - 811 To the Monsters World with the Summoner and the Tamer

    811 To the Monsters World with the Summoner and the Tamer


    Today is thest day for us to perform. And it¡¯s as crowded as usual.


    And we have that one fan who has been watching us from the first day we stared here. Sandra.


    Also, Thomas¡¯ rival in love also watched our performance on the second day. Trying to insult and make fun of us. But he failed.


    I was too amazing that he got too attracted with the show and forgot to insult us. Though I knew from the start that he came only to do that. But he forgot.


    And after that, he never came back again. But I saw hm training so he can be better.


    I thought that he only wanted Sandra. But I guess he¡¯s an excellent performer.


    While the others just talking about how great we are, that guy just train on his own. What a great man.


    Well, he can do that because after they got to know each other, Victoria spent a lot of her time with Sandra. So there¡¯s no one to bother him at night. No one to scare the shit out of him.


    And thanks to Victoria getting along with Sandra, Sandra is more interested in Thomas now.


    .....


    I don¡¯t know the detail, but from the agents who were stalking Sandra, it seems that making Victoria get along with her was a good idea. They even said good job to me.


    Well, it¡¯s all thanks to Victoria though. So I¡¯m sure their words of gratitude is for Victoria.


    And so, after thest show in this city, Thomas is finally going on a date tomorrow. And he gathered everyone in the circus to teach him on what to do during the date.


    ...None of us are normal people who went on a date normally. They¡¯re all agents. Although they probably went on dates before, they were mostly to investigate. As for me, I have always been a weird one.


    And so, I just transported us to my store in Cassau. This is when being a clothing store owner is an advantage.


    It¡¯s already closed for the night. But I told the staffs to help us pick Thomas¡¯ outfit for the date. And Sonia is helping as well.


    ¡°This guy is my friend and also my boss in the circus. He¡¯s going on a date tomorrow. Please pick up nice outfits for him. I¡¯ll give you bonus for the ones that he pick,¡± I said.


    And obviously, they are excited with the bonus. Except for the manager. The one who has been here before the other staffs came after I saved them from the Monsters World.


    ¡°Excuse me, Boss. It¡¯s great that we will get a bonus for picking the outfit. But how about you take us to the circus as well? Even I have never been there before when you perform here because I have to watch the shop. I¡¯m really interested to watch the circus that everyone is talking about,¡± she said.


    The others also wanted to go too it seems. Well, it¡¯s my fault that I haven¡¯t brought them to the circus. Why have I never brought them to the circus when I¡¯m their boss?


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll bring you all during our next show. I also need to tell this to everyone else working in the other branches. Well, I¡¯ll tell you when you can go. Anyway, just pick his clothes. Pick a nice one that the girl will think that he¡¯s handsome. Don¡¯t worry about the cost,¡± I said.


    And so, Thomas then forced to dress up in many clothes by the staffs and Sonia. Though I don¡¯t think Sonia need any bonus. Does she want to watch the circus? Though she has watched us several times already.


    The next day, Thomas is ready to go for his date.


    ¡°...Everyone, wish me luck!¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°Roy, I¡¯ll be going with him and give him some advise. I won¡¯t go with you to the Monsters World,¡± Victoria said to me.


    ¡°Alright. Just don¡¯t ruin it for him,¡± I said.


    ¡°I won¡¯t. It should be fine as long as he¡¯s being himself,¡± Victoria said.


    Then they both leave with Victoria is hiding as an ornament on Thomas¡¯ cor.


    I just hope that Thomas won¡¯t be too nervous and say something he shouldn¡¯t say. Like the fact that we¡¯re on a mission to investigate the cult. Sandra doesn¡¯t need to know that yet.


    ¡°Hey, do you think that it will be fine for Sandra to know who we are?¡± I asked Burnes.


    ¡°I think it should be okay. She¡¯s not a bad person. And after the investigation, we found out that her husband died when he was saving a kid from the cult. Sandra knows that. And she hates the cult as much as everyone here. So I think she will support us instead,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Well, if you say so. Then, I¡¯ll leave you to take care of the rest. I¡¯ll be going to the Monsters World with the summoner and the tamer,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. Make sure that the horses can really be trusted,¡± Burnes said.


    I have told him my intention in going to the Monsters World. To see if we have more horse monsters that we can trust. That will be loyal to us or at least to Ray who will give them the order to obey us.


    And I will bring the summoner and the tamer with me who will be looking for their new contracted monsters. Though I think I can tell what kind of monster they are looking from the weapon they picked.


    I don¡¯t think that a two-handed sword is a good idea though. Maybe the monster he will make a contract with doesn¡¯t need to be something he can ride. Or maybe he will still fight on his own or cooperating with his monster.


    I don¡¯t know what the summoner is thinking. As for the tamer, he has two spears. And he can decide to use one or two of them at the same time. And it should be fine to use them while riding on a horse.


    It¡¯s time to leave. With my telepathic message with Ray, even though he can¡¯t say anything, he told me with his emotion that it¡¯s safe to go to where he is now.


    As for the circus, it will be fine. I have left them a lot after all. And even if not everyone is helping since some of them were stalking Thomas¡¯ date, it will still be fine.


    The three of us then entered Monsters World. With the summoner has the two-handed sword sheathed on his back, and the tamer has two spears on his back.


    They asked the cksmith for something so that they can carry their weapon easily. Though in the city, their weapons will be covered in cloth so that no one will see them.


    Not that we need to do it. It¡¯s just that it¡¯s strange for people in this world, in this era, to have weapons. Unless they are from the theater group. Though we are from the circus, so it should be fine, right?


    As we entered the Monsters World directly to Ray¡¯s location, we are greeted by thousands of horses. There are so many of them.


    But we still have more humans than horses. I guess we will not give those who can fly their ride. And we need to give the mages with powerful long-range attack horses that can fly.


    ¡°You got a lot of horse monsters, Ray. I¡¯m proud of you,¡± I said while brushing his hair with my hand.


    ¡°That¡¯s your horse? What an amazing creature. He looks so strong,¡± the summoner said.


    ¡°I know, right? You can¡¯t have him. He¡¯s mine. And so, among the other horses, is there anything that you want to make a contract with?¡± I asked the summoner.


    ¡°I¡¯ll tame as many as I want. Ray, right? Can I ask you which horses I¡¯m allowed to tame?¡±


    Since he¡¯s a tamer, he can tame as much monsters as his mana allowed him to. And because he¡¯s also a master level mage, and an expert level in his ice element as well, it means that he can tame a lot of monsters.


    The tamer excitedly pick at least one horse monsters from each species. There are a lot of horse monsters here. And not all of them are from the same species.


    There¡¯s a pegasus that has wings and can fly, horses covered in me, horses with icy hooves, unicorn, and other species. And the tamer tamed a lot of them.


    ¡°I think I¡¯ll pick...¡±


    The summoner tried to pick a horse to be his familiar, but Ray stopped him.


    ¡°What is it, Ray? Did you find a good monster for him to make a contract with?¡± I asked.


    Ray then nodded and told me to ride on his back. He will take us somewhere it seems.


    So we waited for the tamer to finished taming the monsters he¡¯s interested in. Then he got on top of the icy horse while the summoner just rode on a unicorn.


    And then Ray, leading the other horses, galloped toward the forest. We have so many horses here but going through the forest seems so easy. They can easily dodge the obstacles.


    And then, we finally reached Ray¡¯s destination. This is where we can find the monster suitable for the summoner.

 Chapter 812 - 812 Centaurs

    812 Centaurs


    We were riding on horses. And there are many other horses following us. I guess Ray has done very well to get those other horses follow him.


    But when the summoner was looking for a good monster to make a contract with, Ray brought us somewhere in the forest. And since the monster is not among the horses that followed him, I guess this one still didn¡¯t obey Ray.


    The horses running swiftly in the forest. All of them are moving fast without hitting anything. If they have riders, the riders only need to worry to stay on their back instead of controlling where they go.


    Some of the horses are almost as fast as Ray. And there are even some foals following. I wonder how amazing they will be in the future since we found them and trained them from young age?


    And finally, we¡¯re here. The ce where Ray is bringing us to.


    I have seen the monster that Ray thought would be good for the summoner to make a contract with with my Divine Vision from afar. But now that we¡¯re facing each other, I can see them clearly. And I¡¯m also excited about it.


    Not only that there are a lot of them. But they look strong as well. And one of them is facing us like he¡¯s the leader of the others in the tribe.


    They are centaurs. Creatures with the upper half of human body, and the lower half of a horse.


    No, they don¡¯t have four limbs. They have six limbs. With four horse legs and two human arms.


    .....


    The human upper body didn¡¯t start from the half-part of the horse. But it started from where the horse¡¯s neck supposed to be. And from there, they have a pair of human arms and a human head.


    Does it mean that they have two bodies?


    Well, when I looked inside their bodies to check their inner organs, I have to say that... I don¡¯t have anything to say. Just imagine it yourself how their inner organs worked.


    ¡°You came here again. And this time, you brought humans with you. What do you want?¡± the centaur that looks like the leader asked.


    He¡¯s a strong-looking man. I mean the upper half is more muscr than the upper-half of other centaurs. As for the lower-half, There¡¯s not much difference.


    ...No one answering. Well, they are horses after all. But how do theymunicate before?


    ¡°...Since no one is talking, shall I be the representative of the horses since I¡¯m Ray¡¯s master?¡± I asked the other horses.


    Ray nodded his head slightly and the other horses followed suit. Does it mean I¡¯m the King of Horses now?


    ¡°Well, since no one deny it, I¡¯ll be the representative of the horses. You are centaurs, right? It¡¯s good that we can speak the samenguage. Maybe you have met Ray before and there might be some conflict or misunderstanding, but I will exin everything to you if you are willing to hear. May I?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Make it simple,¡± the leader of the centaur said.


    ¡°Okay. Here¡¯s the simple version. The worlds, my world and this world, will be destroyed. So we¡¯re looking for allies to help us stop the destruction,¡± I said.


    This is the simplest way of exining it. But it¡¯s also the most difficult exnation to be believed. There¡¯s no way anyone would believe that we¡¯re fighting for the world.


    Well, I don¡¯t. I fight because I hate the cult. Though I ask other people to fight to protect the world.


    Hearing my exnation, the centaurs have shocked expression pasted on their face. What is it? Don¡¯t tell me that they believed me right away? There¡¯s no way, right?


    ¡°...That¡¯s frightening. Can you exin it now in detail how the worlds will be destroyed?¡± the centaur asked.


    ¡°Wait, you believed me?! Well, that was easy. But now I¡¯m questioning myself if we need to recruit you or not.¡±


    How could they believe me so easily? Something is wrong. If it this way, then I can¡¯t really trust them, can I?


    If they are gullible creatures, it will be bad. What if a cult member is using tricks to gain their sympathy and make them believe the cult? Then they will easily join the cult.


    ¡°Ah, you must never have encountered us in your world. I know that there are two worlds. I heard about humans from my parents who heard it from their parents who heard it from¡ª¡±


    ¡°Enough. It has been so long since human came into this world. I know. And it was only recently that I found other groups of humansing here. So the one who spread the stories must be your ancestor,¡± I said.


    ¡°Well, yes. I know you¡¯re not a monster from your smell. And for someone with that smell to be here, I guess you must be the human from another world they told us about,¡± he said.


    ¡°Okay. But how did you believe me so fast? Even for some muscle-headed people, I need some convincing before they decided to follow us. Some were with force though. But it was mostly monsters, so it¡¯s fine.¡±


    ¡°Because we are centaurs. We are born with the ability to detect lies. So if anyone is lying, we can tell,¡± the centaur said.


    A creature with the ability to detect lies? We have a lot of Alberts here!


    This is great! This way, I don¡¯t need to bring Albert wherever I go anymore. Though since they are centaurs, it will be difficult for them to walk around in the city.


    Maybe they are the creature that Albert¡¯s ancestor kill to get his Aura ability. I think his name was Rama. The one from the children¡¯s story.


    But I thought the book said that he was weak as an Aura user. How did he managed to kill a centaur without using magic or other people help?


    Did he perhaps put one in a cage and made them weak by letting it starve before he killed them? Maybe.


    There are too many questions I won¡¯t get the answer. So let¡¯s forget about unimportant part and focus on the important part. They can tell the differences between lies and truth.


    ¡°Is that your innate ability?¡± I asked the centaur.


    ¡°Other than this, we also had Future Vision. But even if we say future, the distant future is not something anyone could see,¡± he said.


    ¡°Had? You mean you used to have one?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. Today, we don¡¯t have anyone who can see the future anymore. They are already extremely rare in one tribe. But they went extinct. Thest one I knew died when I was still a foal,¡± he said.


    I see. So while Albert¡¯s ancestor killed a centaur for their lie detection ability, Fabio¡¯s ancestor killed a special centaur for their Future Vision.


    The current centaurs no longer have anyone with Future Vision. But their lie detection is already good.


    And they have horse body and legs. They must be fast. But I wonder if they will allow someone to ride on their back?


    ¡°Alright. Since you want to listen to the full exnation, it will take some time. Are we going to talk here?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...Even though I know you didn¡¯t lie, it¡¯s not like we can just bring you to our vige right away. We will listen to your full exnation and we will also ask you some questions. And then, we will decide on what to do. Even if we believed you, that doesn¡¯t mean that we are willing to join you. We are¡ª¡±


    ¡°Let me guess. You don¡¯t want to obey the order of anyone weaker than you.¡±


    Before he could finish what he was about to say, I interrupted him. He¡¯s a monster. A leader of the centaurs. So I can pretty much guess what he¡¯s trying to say.


    Damn. Here we go again. A fight to get them to join us.


    Why does this happen every time I¡¯m trying to recruit monsters? We even did it to test the strength of our new recruits in the alliance as well.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. Talk first, then we will decide with our strength if you are worthy to be our leader or not,¡± the centaur said.


    ¡°I don¡¯t want to be your leader. I already have my slot for my familiars full,¡± I said.


    ¡°But we¡¯re still monsters. You should know that we obey thew of the jungle. Survival of the fittest. Even if you don¡¯t want to be our leader, you still need to prove your worth with strength,¡± the centaur said.


    ¡°Sigh... fine. For now, I will exin everything to you first then. But under one condition. That you should never tell this to anyone. Even to the other centaurs that belong to your tribe. I can wait here for you to bring everyone here if you want them to listen.¡±


    The centaur agreed to bring everyone else in their tribe here. And so I waited for them toe.


    While waiting, I also informed about this encounter to Albert and I will bring him here. I want him to tell me that those centaurs are not lying when they say that they won¡¯t leak what I will tell themter to anyone else.

 Chapter 813 - 813 Training While Waiting

    813 Training While Waiting


    While waiting for the centaurs toe back, I called Albert about what¡¯s happening here.


    ¡°They have the ability to detect lies? I guess centaur is the creature that my ancestor killed then. And you want me toe there with you so I can tell if they are lying or not when they promised that they won¡¯t tell other people, right?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°Yes. They are quite smart. Also, they used to have the ability to see the future as well. At least very few among their kind. But today, there are no more centaurs with the ability to see the future anymore,¡± I said.


    ¡°So it¡¯s not just my ancestor. Fabio¡¯s ancestor also killed a certain type of centaur to get the ability to see the future. Do you want to get Fabio as well?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°Not really. Also, there will be a fight. They said that they will listen, but they still need to fight to see if we¡¯re stronger than them. They won¡¯t follow anyone weaker than them. Just like most of the monsters who follow me,¡± I said.


    The werewolves and the weretigers are with us because I defeated the strongest ones. As for the angels, I think it was mostly because of threat. Though they followed me voluntarily now.


    The elves, they followed Sunny. The flower that they worship. And since Sunny is Lina¡¯s familiar, who is my maid and lover, they followed me as well.


    Next is vampires. Now they are addicted to my blood. I guess I¡¯m some sort of drug dealer to them.


    Though I¡¯m still stronger than any of them. Even for those who haven¡¯t fought me, I can still defeat them.


    .....


    ¡°So this time, you¡¯re going to fight the strongest centaur?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°No. This time, it won¡¯t be me. Those centaurs are still monsters. And I don¡¯t have any slot for more familiar. So I will let the master level summoner to fight that centaur. He will then make a contract with the centaur if he win. I¡¯m currently teaching him how to use sword. If you¡¯re ready, contact me so I will bring you here,¡± I said.


    Then I hang up. He¡¯s still busy, but it seems like the centaurs¡¯ vige is quite far. So we should have a bit of time.


    I also opened a portal first to bring Graham here. He will be the healer in case someone is injured if the battle ismenced here. As for the battle, if the centaurs let us decide where we should fight, I will bring them to somewhere near the Monsters Vige. Though it shouldn¡¯t be a vige anymore. A city perhaps?


    Well, I¡¯ll just call it Monsters Vige as usual. Or maybe a country? Well, if the centaurs decided to join, then the monsters group will be bigger. I guess calling it a country is fine. But it will still be a vige for me. Because it¡¯s annoying to change the name.


    ¡°Roy. I¡¯m using two swords. But why do you only teach me to use one sword?¡± the summoner asked.


    ¡°You only touched those swords for a few days. It¡¯s impossible for you, even with your strength as a master level mage, to be familiar with those weapons. Using both hands to defend and attack at the same time is difficult for newbie like you. And if there¡¯s a fight, it will only be a one on one battle at best. So you should focus on using one sword,¡± I said.


    The summoner decided to pick two two-handed swords. Because of their length, he can use them to fight while riding a monster.


    He has only been using it in practice for a few days. While he¡¯s also practicing for his performance in the circus. I think he will decide to give up on circus soon. Together with the other two master level mages.


    Well, that¡¯s fine. If they want to get stronger, I will support them.


    I taught the summoner how to wield a two-handed sword. Although I mostly use a katana, it¡¯s originally a two-handed weapon. So I know a bit about using it.


    But there¡¯s a difference between the two. Like the de on the katana is smaller and thinner than the two-handed sword. And after using them, I know that the katana is more specialized in shing attack. Even the curve on the katana helped with the shing. But for a longsword, even if they are good to use for shing, it¡¯s not as good as the katana.


    Well, in the end, the technique is the most important. Even if katana is better at shing, if the longsword wielder is the better swordsman, the katana wielder will lose.


    I taught the summoner while the tamer is learning about spear. And he¡¯s also using only one spear when he picked two from the cksmith as well.


    For the tamer, I can teach him well since I often used Reizpear as my main weapon. So I know a lot about using spear and taught him everything I know.


    Even if he¡¯s not fighting right now, he should still train.


    Should I teach him my special skill with spear? The... I forgot the names.


    How could I forget the name of something I invented myself?! This is not fun.


    Well, I¡¯ll just call it the Twisting Spear Thrust for now. Though I might change itter.


    That skill is too much for the tamer even if he¡¯s a master level mage. He needs to twist his body as much as possible while pulling back his spear, then as he twist the spear and his body, he will thrust the spear ahead to his target. The tamer doesn¡¯t have enough flexibility in his body to do that.


    Though I can at least show him how to do it.


    ¡°You two. Watch me. This is the skill I developed after using spear for so long. For the summoner, this might not be important. But it¡¯s always good to watch new technique. Maybe you can develop your own skill based on this skillter. Well, just watch. I won¡¯t use Aura so maybe you can reach this level one day,¡± I said.


    Then I take out Reizpear¡¯s pieces from my pocket and restore it back to normal.


    I grabbed the spear with both hands. With my left hand in front holding the middle of the spear while the right hand is holding the butt of the spear.


    Then I twisted my body and my right hand. While my left hand is holding the spear to hold the twisted spear so the spearhead. So while the spear twisting, the front part, the part where the de is, doesn¡¯t twist and still aiming straight forward.


    Then I thrust the spear toward the tree in front of me as I removed my left hand. It was both quick and strong. And the tree in front of me can¡¯t stop my attack and got destroyed.


    Not only the tree has a hole in it, the hole is as big as human¡¯s head. That¡¯s the damage that I did with a spear. Even though the tip of the spear is smaller than the hole.


    Now that I used it again, I remember something. A skill is important. Maybe I¡¯ll try using the same trick with other weapons. Because after all, I¡¯m still using various type of weapons.


    ¡°Whoa! That was amazing.¡±


    ¡°To make a hole on the tree like that. It¡¯s an instant kill for anyone in front of you.¡±


    Right after their praises, the tree can no longer endure its own weight and fall down.


    ¡°For you, that skill is still too much. I¡¯m just showing you so you can at least see what you can do in the future if you decide to go with closebat instead of magic. If I use Aura, my attack will be much stronger. But don¡¯t try this now. You need to be just strong enough to defeat the centaur you will be fighting,¡± I said to the two.


    If the summoner win, he can get a quite powerful and smart familiar.


    I know from experience that if you ride apatible monster, something or someone you canmunicate with, then you can be stronger as well.


    After teaching them both for a bit more, I opened a portal to bring Albert here. Then I got a contact from Victoria via telepathy.


    ¡°It¡¯s done! They¡¯re going out for real from now on!¡±


    It hasn¡¯t been long since we left, right? Oh, well. Maybe it has. I lost track of time while teaching these two.


    It¡¯s good. Thomas and Sandra are going out now. There will be partyter. But not now.


    ¡°That¡¯s great. By the way, we¡¯re in Monsters World preparing to face a group of centaurs. Though we need to tell them about everything first. Apparently, they have the ability to detect lies. So I brought Albert here. You want toe as well?¡±


    I invited Victoria if she wants toe. She¡¯s done spying on Thomas and Sandra. So she might be interested in this.


    Victoria agreed toe. So I summoned her.


    After I brought the two here, we still need to wait for the centaurs toe.


    Why do they take so long? Maybe it¡¯s because they need to exin it to the others in their tribe as well after reaching there.


    While waiting, Victoria made ament to the summoner that cause disturbance in our mind.


    ¡°You suck at using sword. Change it.¡±


    ...Well, do we have time until the centaurs return?

 Chapter 814 - 814 They are Expert Interrogators

    814 They are Expert Interrogators


    ¡°Wrong choice of weapon?¡± I asked Victoria.


    ¡°Yes. He¡¯s decent enough as a swordsman. But that¡¯s all he is. Why did you pick two-handed sword anyway? And two of them at that?¡± Victoria asked the summoner.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m good at using both hands. And two-handed sword seems to be longer and stronger than a normal one-handed sword. You said before that it was good for me,¡± the summoner said.


    Right. Back when he and the other master level mages were testing their weapons to find the one that suit them the most, both Victoria and Sonia agreed that he can use two-handed swords in both hands. But now, Victoria changed her mind.


    ¡°Yeah. You¡¯re good just because you can use them. But that¡¯s all. In fact, after watching you train today, I don¡¯t think you will grow anymore no matter how much you try. I don¡¯t know how strong the centaur is, but maybe you can still defeat them using a two-handed sword. But if you want to get stronger, you picked the wrong choice,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Then what do we do? He will fight the centaur soon. He can¡¯t just change his weapon right now,¡± I asked.


    ¡°We can let him fight with two-handed sword as it is, or get him a weapon that suit him right now and train until the centaur returned. They still haven¡¯t returned yet, right?¡± Victoria asked.


    I checked the surrounding using my Divine Vision and I still didn¡¯t see any centaurs returning here. Seems like their vige is so far. Or maybe it take a lot of convincing them all toe here.


    Maybe it¡¯s best if we go there. But the centaur said that they don¡¯t let strangers into the vige. So we can only wait.


    .....


    So, while the tamer is making fun of the summoner for his poor choice of weapon, the summoner had Victoria to change into different type of weapon and tested them.


    ¡°You can¡¯tugh at him. We also don¡¯t know if spear is the right choice for you or not. And you also picked two of them,¡± I said to the tamer.


    He¡¯s also an expert level ice mage. He can create a practice target from ice or even create his own weapons.


    But since his magic control is not at the same level as Shirley or our other ice mages, he can¡¯t create his own weapon. So it¡¯s best for him to get used to his weapon first before he can make them with magic.


    But for the tamer, he seemsfortable with those spears. If he used both at the same time, it will be impossible for him to use the twisting spear technique that I showed him before. But maybe he has some other ideas.


    These two are strong. Physically. Magically, there are a lot of things to improve since they haven¡¯t used magic for at least a hundred years And barely learn about magic control.


    We need to remind them again that they are also mages. They can¡¯t forget about their own magic. Even if they trained their bodies, their magic is as important for them to get stronger.


    I looked at the summoner again and see that he has finally picked his weapon. Nice. Though I don¡¯t think it¡¯s a good time to pick the real weapon from the cksmith. So let¡¯s get him use the Blobbies as weapons first.


    It¡¯s good that the centaur iste. After two hours of waiting, while ying card games with Albert and Sonia who came by to watch and train the summoner and tamer, I finally see the group of centaurs.


    As for the horse monsters that Ray brought here, they left somewhere else. If Ray called, they will gather here quickly. But there¡¯s no need for that.


    ¡°They¡¯re here. Everyone, get ready!¡±


    Soon after, dozens of centaurs arrived. There are a lot of them. About more than twice the centaurs that previously came here.


    The same centaur as before took the role as the leader and told me to start talking. But before that, I need to see if they¡¯re lying or not.


    ¡°The enemies are those who cane to this world as well and potentiallye to you to recruit you or tame you. So I want all of you to promise me to not tell anyone about what I¡¯m going to tell you,¡± I said.


    ¡°We agreed to that,¡± the centaur leader said.


    ¡°Just to make sure. You can detect lies, right? How about you ask the others if they are willing to keep their promise or not. If there is anyone who lies and can¡¯t keep a secret, or maybe they have been involved with the enemies, then we won¡¯t tell you anything,¡± I said.


    In fact, I would kill them all right away if they have gotten themselves involved with the cult.


    The centaur then started talking to each other and see if anyone is telling lies. There don¡¯t seem to be anyone lying. Everyone is willing to keep their promise.


    Is what we thought.


    They said that they have confirmed that everyone is willing to keep the promise. Everyone except for one centaur.


    I have been using Divine Vision to observe all the centaurs here. They have talked to each other, but there¡¯s someone they missed. She acted like she has been asked that question and is checking the other centaurs. So no one knows whether she has been asked or not.


    By the way, the female centaurs are wearing clothes on their upper body. So their upper body is not naked. As for lower body, I guess they are not ashamed to show it to anyone.


    ¡°You! Tell me that you will not tell anything you heard here to anyone!¡± I shouted at the centaur.


    ¡°It is important for a secret to not be leaked after all. So it shouldn¡¯t be fine for anyone to leak the secret, right?¡±


    Instead of answering, she just asked back.


    ¡°Just say yes or no!¡± I shouted.


    ¡°Well, the thing is that, a secret that is leaked can be dangerous for everyone involved. So a secret shouldn¡¯t be leaked at all,¡± she said.


    She¡¯s just speaking nonsense. Trying to not answer me at all.


    ¡°Hey. You all can detect lies, right? Then I will tell you all this. If she doesn¡¯t answer me right now, I will kill her and everyone precious to her. Tell me, am I lying or not?¡±


    I also used a bit of pressure as an Aura Master to make them afraid of me. It¡¯s just a bit though, so they won¡¯t be afraid. But they will know that I¡¯m serious about it. After all, I¡¯m not lying.


    And the centaur in question also noticed that I didn¡¯t lie at all. She¡¯s the one who is scared.


    She looked around her to see that everyone is suspicious at her. Then she turn around and try to escape. But Ray is blocking her way. Ray just mmed his body to that female centaur and stopped her.


    ¡°I see that at least one of you has been involved with the enemy who is trying to destroy the world. Just to be safe, I will kill her. I don¡¯t want any tamer or summoner to hear her messages via telepathy,¡± I said.


    ¡°Wait! We¡¯ll do it ourselves. The world is at risk but one of us is helping the group who will destroy it instead of protecting it. And we don¡¯t know how many more centaurs is involved. Let us ask them some questions first,¡± the centaur leader said.


    Well, that¡¯s fine with me. As long as we¡¯re working toward the destruction of the cult, that¡¯s fine. Though I haven¡¯t told the centaurs about anything yet.


    Maybe they are the kind of race who is close to nature. I think that they can get along with the elves then.


    They brought that female centaurs somewhere else. And I just talked to Albert.


    ¡°So, is there no one else other than her who lied?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. I didn¡¯t sense anyone lying. So everyone is speaking the truth. Anyway, what are they doing?¡± Albert asked me about the centaurs.


    ¡°Well... they brought that centaur quite far from here. I can¡¯t tell what they¡¯re talking about. But Sonia is there following them so you can ask herter. Let me just say this. They are expert interrogators and torturers. It¡¯s far, but I think that female centaur is screaming non-stop,¡± I said.


    What I see is something... I don¡¯t know what to call it, but evil is the closest thing to it. They just tortured the female centaur to talk until she speak the truth. Until they can¡¯t detect any lies from her.


    It took a while. And when that female centaur is no longer breathing, they just left her there and return back to us.


    ...They are so cruel to their own kind. But as a human, I can¡¯t say anything about it.


    ¡°Sorry about that. Apparently, she has been in contact with a certain cult. So, is that cult the reason for the world destruction?¡± the centaur leader asked.


    ¡°If that cult is the same cult as what we¡¯re going to talk about, then yes. Anyway, I want to introduce you to this man, Albert. He¡¯s the king of a kingdom in our world. I think even if you can detect lies, you will believe him more than me,¡± I said.


    And so, I let Albert exin to them about what happened that can lead to the destruction of the world.

 Chapter 815 - 815 Convincing Monsters Can Only be Done with Strength

    815 Convincing Monsters Can Only be Done with Strength


    Albert told the information we have to the centaurs. Unsurprisingly, they are doubtful of many things.


    ¡°We can tell when someone is telling lies or truth. And we can also tell if there are some things that you are doubtful about, we can tell right away,¡± the centaur leader said.


    I guess their lie detection ability is more advanced than Albert¡¯s. Albert can¡¯t tell if I¡¯m telling lies or not even if I said something I¡¯m doubtful about. But the centaurs can.


    As expected, they are more useful than Albert. If possible, I¡¯d like to get close to just one of them so I can bring that one anywhere I go instead of Albert since he has many things to do. Though I don¡¯t think it will be their leader since it will be the master level summoner who will make a contract with the leader.


    ¡°So, which part are you doubtful of?¡± Albert asked the centaur after he told them everything.


    The centaurs then asked more to Albert and Albert patiently exined what he knows. There are some things we know but weck evidence of. Maybe those are the things that they are doubtful of.


    Though since they have promised to us to never say anything they hear in tis ce to anyone else, I guess it¡¯s fine to tell them. since the two master level mages here also agreed to not tell anyone when they joined us, we can tell everything.


    The centaurs keep asking questions until there¡¯s onest question that Albert can¡¯t really answer.


    ¡°Are they really evil? Other than the fact that they killed your people? I mean we are monsters. We kill each other or even our own kind for survival. I don¡¯t think it¡¯s considered evil at all just to kill someone,¡± the centaur leader asked.


    .....


    ¡°Well... I guess it¡¯s just the difference of our upbringing. As human beings, we need to protect each other from harm since we can¡¯t do everything on our own. So...¡±


    ¡°Enough about that. You¡¯re already doubtful enough of what you said. Tell us something true,¡± the centaur leader said.


    And I justughed hearing thatment from the centaur.


    ¡°Haha! Albert, you don¡¯t believe that we must protect each other? I guess you have turned evil ording to your own exnation then,¡± I said.


    ¡°It¡¯s all thanks to you though. Because you can do many things alone, I thought that maybe there¡¯s a way for someone to be on their own without anyone¡¯s help. But I can¡¯t just tell that to the centaurs confidently. After all, I am someone who needs other people help. One can¡¯t be a king if they don¡¯t have the people,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll exin it to you. I¡¯m the king of some monsters now. So I¡¯m more used to talking to monsters than you,¡± I said.


    Then I stepped forward. As the centaurs are all looking at me.


    I took a deep breath and shouted loudly.


    ¡°JUST FIGHT IT OUT ALREADY!¡±


    ¡°...I guess that¡¯s how it ended up, huh? Do I even need to be here?¡± Albert talked to himself.


    Then I continued talking.


    ¡°You already learned what we want to do. We want to recruit you to help us with the mission to destroy the cult who will bring harm to the world. Whether you believe us or not, I don¡¯t care. And you don¡¯t care either. You just want your own survival. All I can say is for you to see it with your eyes once you join us. But I know you won¡¯t let anyone weaker than you to give you order. So let¡¯s have a fight. Pick your strongest fighter and fight that guy. He¡¯s a summoner. And if you lose, your leader will make a contract with him. And the rest of you will obey us,¡± I said.


    Let¡¯s make things simple. Even if they are monsters with intellect and wisdom, they are still monsters. They prefer things to be simple.


    Asking what they¡¯re doubtful about? That¡¯s for them to learn new things.


    Though it¡¯s good that I know a lot about monsters now. Because it¡¯s easier to interact with them.


    And it¡¯s nice to be able to meet them first. Because if the cult found them first, then these centaurs will be our enemy. Because the cult members truly believed that the destruction of the world can bring salvation. And they didn¡¯t doubt it at all.


    If that female centaur has been staying with them for a bit longer, the the cult would have gotten into their vige. But good thing she¡¯s dead now.


    After telling them that it¡¯s time to fight, they look so happy.


    ¡°Where will we fight?¡± the centaur leader asked. He has a mace on his hand. Given to him by another centaur. He¡¯s ready to fight.


    I guess he will be the one who fight the summoner. He seems to be the strongest indeed.


    ¡°If possible, we need to do it in an open area. A in field. Also, do you mind if I ride a horse during the fight? And my weapons are made of monsters as well. But I will still be the one fighting. You don¡¯t mind, right?¡± the summoner asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s fine. I already heard about that ck Slime¡¯s ability. But there¡¯s no open ce nearby. It will take us half a day to reach the closest in,¡± the centaur said.


    ¡°We can use my portal. I know a ce. Also, now that you learned about the cult from that female centaur, what will you do? I¡¯m sure she has informed them about your vige¡¯s location,¡± I said.


    ¡°We will find another ce to settle,¡± the centaur leader said.


    ¡°Then I will bring you all to the ce where you will fight. It¡¯s close to the Monsters Vige. Whether you win or lose, you can move there if you want,¡± I said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll think about it after the fight is over.¡±


    And then, I opened severalrge portal and let everyone enter. It¡¯s close to the vige. An open field where the horses and centaurs can run freely. We prepared this ce after sending Ray to get as many horses as possible.


    Everyone entered the portals and moved to another ce. I have informed Shelia that there will be an addition of centaurs in the vige. And as usual, the result will depend by the match fought between the two representatives.


    And so, the open field is now crowded by monsters who are interested in watching the fight.


    ¡°...There are so many of them. And you still want us?¡± the centaur leader asked.


    ¡°The more the merrier.¡±


    Then I told everyone to not get in the way of the fight. The centaur is fast. And the summoner is also riding a fast horse. It¡¯s not a normal horse. It¡¯s an ordinary horse monster. Still a monster so it¡¯s not considered as animal. Though horse monsters are omnivores. They eat meat as well.


    And the weapons that Victoria had her Blobbies transformed into is a shield and ance. Not a spear like Reizpear, but ance that can be held with one hand. Only the tip is sharp as there¡¯s no de on it. It shaped like a cone. And I know that it¡¯s heavy as well.


    It can be used as a blunt weapon if it¡¯s swung. And this one is what Victoria and Sonia agreed that the summoner is good at. Ance and a shield.


    And he¡¯s also wearing an armor. It¡¯s an ordinary armor that the cksmith modified hurriedly when the summoner was training. I used portal to get it from him.


    As for the centaur, he¡¯s also getting himself ready. There are some centaurs carrying armor for him to wear in the fight. But why is it that only him who have it while the others don¡¯t wear any armor?


    I asked one of the centaur nearby. And he said that it¡¯s because all the other armors are no longer usable. And that¡¯s the only one that has been maintained well enough to be worn in a duel.


    They said that they want to have some armor, but there¡¯s no one who can make it. Maybe I can bribe them with armor since we have a cksmith now.


    And so, I brought the cksmith here to watch as well. Not because I want to introduce him to the centaur. Though that is forter.


    He said that he wants to see how well the armor he made in a fight against the centaur. And he wants to ask the summonerter if there¡¯s anything that needed to be changed.


    As for the other master level mages, they are still haven¡¯t decided their weapon of choice yet. But the cksmith said that they might need armor. So he wants to ask the summoner if there¡¯s anything that can be improved.


    I also asked him to made a shield for the summoner back then. But seems like he can only finish one product at that time. So I asked for an armor instead. Because even if he practiced using shield, it was still his first time using ance and a shield. And he will need to adapt to using it as well.


    But for armor, as long as he can move while wearing it, then it will be fine.


    Now that the two sides are ready. Both are wearing armor. But the centaur also have some armor protecting the horse part of his body. While the summoner¡¯s horse doesn¡¯t wear any.


    ¡°I guess I need to make armor for horses as well,¡± the cksmith said before the match started.


    Well... he might be right. Though for now, let¡¯s focus on the match.

 Chapter 816 - 816 The Summoner Versus the Centaur

    816 The Summoner Versus the Centaur


    In the in field near the Monsters Vige, a battle between a summoner and a centaur is taking ce.


    The two are prepared to fight. The centaur with a mace in his hand and fully covered in armor, including on the horse part of his body, and the summoner covered in armor equipped with a shield and ance.


    The two get some distance between each other. The distance that is wide enough for both sides to reach their full speed right in the middle. They are thinking of finishing each other in one attack even before the match started. And everyone here knows that.


    By the way, Albert also has decided a horse for him to ride. His personal horse. He¡¯s going to watch the match while riding that horse next to me who is sitting on Ray¡¯s back.


    The horse he picked is a silver horse with long hair and tail.


    ¡°Don¡¯t I look very kingly when I¡¯m riding on this one?¡±


    That¡¯s what Albert told me. Though that horse is not as good as the others. It¡¯s just look good. Though it¡¯s still faster than ordinary horse because after all, this one is still considered as a monster. That horse is even chewing on a whole chicken that it found nearby.


    ¡°...If you think that the horse with blood dripping from its mouth is kingly, then you might be a vampire,¡± I said.


    ¡°Once I take this one back to my pce, I will get the chef to cook him some meat so he won¡¯t eat anymore living animal. Just like the werewolves. The horse monsters might be interested in cooked meat from then on and can no longer eat anything raw,¡± Albert said.


    .....


    Well, if that¡¯s what he thinks.


    ¡°I will also ask the cksmith to prepare some amazing armor for this one to wear. For now, I will think of a good name for this,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Want me to help?¡±


    ¡°Anyone but you. I want to think of a name properly,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s fine. But don¡¯t you think that this horse is not as strong as the others?¡± I asked.


    He¡¯s slower than the other. And since this one look fancier than the others, I can find it easily. Especially when it was breathing heavily after we run to the forest to meet the centaur. This one has low stamina as well as being weak.


    Hearing what I said, the horse looked at me angrily. I guess horse monsters can still understand what we¡¯re saying. Though that¡¯s obviously why Ray picked these horses. Because they can understand what we¡¯re talking.


    ¡°This one is the most beautiful. That¡¯s all I needed as a king. To show off. In a real situation, I don¡¯t think I will go into the frontline with this horse. So it¡¯s fine even if he¡¯s not as fast as the others. I have other people to protect me after all. Or they can just bring me to safety,¡± Albert said. And his horse stood proudly hearing that.


    Well, if it¡¯s just for look, I guess this horse is the best-looking one indeed.


    ¡°Okay then. Good for you. Since both sides are ready, then I will start the match. Graham, don¡¯t get too far from Albert. Make sure to protect him,¡± I said to Graham.


    And then, I ride to the middle of the centaur and the summoner to act as the referee.


    ¡°Then, if you¡¯re both ready, let¡¯s begin the match!¡±


    I started the match. And the two sides started to run forward as fast as possible.


    The summoner, whosence was originally pointed upward, is now had hisnce pointed forward. That¡¯s the only thing he trained in before as soon as he found out that he¡¯spatible with that weapon.


    Wielding that hugence with supposedly heavy weight in front of it with one hand, he moved forward on his horse as fast as possible and strike thence toward the target without ever changing his posture. That¡¯s what he was training.


    I also tried to be his testing target. With Victoshield and Aura, I don¡¯t need to worry about getting injured.


    ...I lied. It was still painful. He¡¯s still a master level mage. But my ribs are fine even though thence hit me right on the chest when I didn¡¯t block it with Victoshield. Thanks to the Blobbnce he used being dull at the tip, it didn¡¯t pierce me at all.


    But this time, it¡¯s a realnce. The tip is not dulled like before. And if it hits the heart, the target will die. Good thing we have a lot of angels prepared to cast healing magic.


    This battle will end in an instant.


    The two are going to meet in the middle soon. They are moving rapidly. And the centaur started raising his mace high preparing to hit the summoner. While the summoner didn¡¯t move hisnce at all. But he moved his shield so he can protect himself from the mace.


    And then, the two meet.


    The centaur swing down his mace while the summoner still keep his posture with thence as the shield he has is ready to guard him.


    It was at the same time. They hit each other and get hit at the same time.


    While the mace hit the shield, it was still too strong for the summoner to receive. So the shield got pushed back and hit his body.


    As for the centaur, thence hit him straight in the chest. The armor that he wore is dented but it¡¯s still protected the centaur. Though I can see a few broken ribs.


    It¡¯s confusing but I¡¯ll say it. Centaurs have two sets of ribs. The one protecting the upper human body¡¯s organ, and the other that¡¯s protecting the lower horse body¡¯s organ. As for their inner organs, it¡¯s difficult to say. Because I myself who is looking at their inner organ is also confused.


    And now the after effect of that sh. The centaur got blown back because of the hit and even had to stand on his two hind legs. He even dropped his mace.


    As for the summoner, he got hit strongly. The shield is unusable anymore. Though that is Blobbies, but he wanted a fair fight. So he¡¯ll consider that shield as unusable anymore even though it can recover.


    And he was also blown back from the hit. He fell from his horse as his horse continued to run.


    But he still has hisnce in his right hand. He quickly recover himself as he ignores the damage on his body, and stand up. He then prepared hisnce and instead of stabbing, he swung it and use therge area of thence to hit the centaur.


    The centaur can¡¯t dodge it so he can only receive it. He tried to block thence with his arms. But the summoner¡¯s strength is too strong and he finally fell.


    The summoner stood up and pointed hisnce toward the centaur¡¯s throat. The match is over with the summoner¡¯s victory. Though that was a close call.


    ¡°I won. With this, will you make a contract with me to be my familiar?¡± the summoner asked.


    ¡°Huff... sure. You win, Master.¡±


    WHOAAAA


    The centaur epted his loss and agreed to be the summoner¡¯s familiar.


    Wait, if they became partner, won¡¯t it be difficult for him to fight? If he hasnce and the centaur has mace, how will they fight? The summoner would get his vision blocked by the centaur then.


    As I was thinking about that, before the angels could go there to heal the two, another creature approached the summoner first. It¡¯s the horse that the summoner rode. The one that¡¯s supposedly be ridden by him for this battle only.


    Seems like that one is already close with the summoner after training for a while and went through a battle together.


    Which mean that while the summoner ride that horse, he can still get the centaur to fight by his side. Which is great.


    ¡°The winner is... the Summoner!¡± I shouted.


    ¡°Try to remember people¡¯s name, goddammit!!!¡±


    Right. The summoner¡¯s name is... the Summoner. And the tamer¡¯s name is the Tamer. Let¡¯s keep things simple. Even if it¡¯s the king himself who isining.


    And so, the battle is won. We now have the centaurs in our army. And the leader of the centaurs is now the summoner¡¯s familiar.


    Though everyone is still excited after the match. So the tamer decided to fight the second strongest centaur to see if he can tame him since asking nicely didn¡¯t work.


    The tamer also win. But it was a close fight. At least no one died.


    I told the centaurs that they should move to this vige now that they will join us in the fight. They agreed. And just like the weretigers and the werewolves, they are excited to be able to fight each other.


    As usual, I informed them that fighting to death among the monsters in the vige is not permitted. They have to have at least one angel to witness their fight so they can be healed right away even if they have self-recovery ability.


    This is great. Today, I just hope to see how Ray¡¯s doing. But not only we got the horse monsters, we also got another monster tribe to join us.


    Not only that. The summoner and the tamer also showed their fighting ability. If only they trained from young age, they could be Aura users.


    Whatever the case, today we got the best result. So let¡¯s return back to the circus now.

 Chapter 817 - 817 Farewell to Sandra’s Circus

    817 Farewell to Sandra¡¯s Circus


    The battle is over. And now, I¡¯m bringing Albert back to his pce, the tamer to the circus, and the cksmith who have finished watching how well the armor was back to my ce in the capital. Albert brought back the silver horse and the tamer is taking the horse with ice element with him. If the horse didn¡¯t use any magic, it look like an ordinary white horse. So no one will know that the horse is a magic horse.


    As for the summoner, he can return back to the circus anytime he wants. He can open a portal to return to the circus. He¡¯s a summoner after all.


    He¡¯s talking with the centaur he made a contract with for now. And not just that. The horse he rode during the match is also with him. I guess he will bring back his horse as well.


    Hmm... maybe we will have two horse riders in the circus now. Three if I count myself. I think we can have more performance to show if the horses can learn some tricks. Like jumping over obstacles.


    When I said what I was thinking, Victoria added a suggestion.


    ¡°Then we can add jousting in the show. Everyone loves gambling. They can ce their bet on either the summoner or the tamer. Then if the one they put their bet on win, they can get money. Though that¡¯s no longer a circus. But it can be added as a new performance. As a warmup for the circus,¡± Victoria said.


    I see. To put a gambling and use it as a show to make everyone interested in the circus. We can also advertise the circus then.


    I agree with Victoria. Using something to hype the circus might be profitable. Though the seats are all taken most of the time though. So it might not change anything.


    But if we can profit from the gamble as well, then that would be fine. I have to ask Thomas first about it though.


    .....


    But more importantly, I need to ask Victoria something.


    ¡°What is jousting?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, you saw the match before, right? Imagine both side start the fight like the summoner did. Both with ance and a shield. Then they crashed at full speed. Those who fall from the horse will lose. It was interesting show in the medieval era in my world. So it might be good to do in this world as well. Sometimes, it was used as a way for knights to solve disagreement,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°But won¡¯t that be obvious to the cult that we¡¯re fighting like that? What if they started investigating the circus? I think we need to ask Burnes and the other agents first. Though maybe we can use it to ambush the cult. If they started to investigating us, it will be easier for the agents to find them,¡± I said.


    Also, if that jousting be more popr, there might be more people interested in doing it. Other master level mages and everyone will be willing to learn horse-riding.


    Well, it¡¯s just for show anyway. Even if the cult is suspicious, we¡¯re a circus troupe. If anyone ask, we¡¯ll just say that it¡¯s part of the training for the show for the circus.


    Though if we do that, I think we might need a bigger ce to perform. The tent we usually perform is too small for the horses to run at full speed.


    And bigger tent means bigger performances. We might be able to add other performance that we thought would be impossible in the small tent.


    And it also means more audience. I think if I say that, Thomas will agree.


    ¡°Let¡¯s put that jousting aside for now. I think Thomas is not in any condition to talk about other things yet. He just had a girlfriend,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re right. Next time I see Sandra, I will tell her that I will travel more for research for my new book so that she won¡¯t look for me anymore if I¡¯m not with you. It¡¯s all now up to Thomas to keep their rtionship,¡± Victoria said.


    The centaurs will now move to the Monsters Vige. The summoner is helping the centaurs. While I informed them about how to live in that ce. Not that there will be any special rule or something. Just that to not fight between each other until death.


    I think the cksmith will have a lot more order that he needs toplete now. I hope he got a lot of disciple so he won¡¯t work alone. And his disciple will be talented as well. There are too many people that they need to make weapons for. Just one cksmith is not enough.


    I returned back to the circus. It¡¯ste now and everything has been prepared for our next journey. We¡¯re getting closer to Consenza and should be there before next month.


    ¡°Congrats, Thomas. Though why are you here and not with Sandra?¡± I asked.


    Thomas is here at the inn we¡¯re staying instead of being together with Sandra.


    ¡°She¡¯s also going to travel with her circus troupe. She said that this will be herst tour before she cane to me. So she wants to focus on her circus first,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°Then what? She will join us?¡± I asked.


    I haven¡¯t heard of any other circus troupe who will travel around the continent. So I think Sandra¡¯s group will at most travel within Varadis only. Which mean she will be done sooner than us.


    As for us, we still have a bit of Varadis, the whole Consenza, and a bit of Tatrama as well. So it will be a while until we can finish the tour.


    I think we still have one or two more ce to go before we can go to Consenza. And if we find any viges or cities not listed in the ce we¡¯re supposed to go to, we will still perform there.


    ¡°She said that if possible, she wants to join up with us. But I told her to wait in Cassau instead after she¡¯s done with the circus. What do you think?¡± Thomas asked.


    ¡°You want someone to escort her to Cassau? I can ask someone to do it. And I¡¯m sure she won¡¯t get bored waiting for you there,¡± I said.


    ¡°Thanks. She said that she will be done in twenty days at most. But...¡±


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about that. When we were together, I already attached my clone to her without her knowing. So after twenty days, I¡¯ll get Roy to bring someone to her using portal closest to my clone attached to her. It won¡¯t be hard. I have told her about Ka and the others. And she¡¯s interested in meeting them as well. I¡¯m sure she can get along with anyone Roy will bring,¡± Victoria said to interrupt Thomas¡¯ word.


    ¡°Thanks, Victoria. I won¡¯t be able to get her if it¡¯s not for you,¡± Thomas said.


    I guess I can only get someone from my harem to safely escort Sandra to Cassau then. Well, I¡¯m sure it will be fine. And it¡¯s not like they train every day anyway. They need to take a break once in a while.


    The next day, we¡¯re ready to leave. And we¡¯re meeting with Sandra¡¯s group as well on the gate. Though we will go to different location.


    From the look of it, that guy who was supposed to be Thomas¡¯ rival was crying the whole night. I guess he must have learned that Sandra is now Thomas¡¯ girlfriend.


    ¡°Are you sure it¡¯s okay to leave her with them? What if he¡¯s trying to do something to her?¡± I asked Burnes.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. We have said that we will support Thomas¡¯ love life. So one of us will leave to make sure that she will be safe at all time. Sandra¡¯sst location for their tour is also his hometown. So he can take a break there as well. So it will be fine,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Well, if you say so,¡± I said.


    Now that I look around, the guy he¡¯s talking about, the tightrope walker, is not nearby. Then I looked up and see that he¡¯s standing in the middle of a drying rope forundry of someone¡¯s house. Why though? Just to tell me that you¡¯re there?


    The owner of the house then found him and about to scold him. Only to realize that he¡¯s somewhat famous. Maybe she watched the circus. Then she asked for his autograph before he disappears.


    Once Sandra¡¯s circus is over, I¡¯ll just use portal to the Blobby attached on him.


    Thomas and Sandra said their farewell. But Thomas look so shy and timid while Sandra is just smiling.


    ¡°What are you doing standing there? Just kiss her already!¡± I said.


    Thomas was too shy, so it was Sandra who make the approach.


    It was a short kiss. But Thomas¡¯ face is too red now. Is this the first time that they were kissing?


    I know that Sandra is a widow. So she must have experience with it at least. As for Thomas, I never really asked him. Though it was not important. What¡¯s important is that Thomas¡¯ girlfriend is Sandra now.


    After saying our farewell, we leave the city together before we split up. This might not be any different than our other shows. But for Thomas, I think the event in this city is something unforgettable.


    Well, now that everyone have someone to tease. So it¡¯s just fun for us.


    Though none of us forget that we still have the cult to destroy if we want Thomas and Sandra to have their happily ever after story.

 Chapter 818 - 818 Kron About to Breakthrough

    818 Kron About to Breakthrough


    The tour continued. We are going to city after city. Just as nned.


    We found some traces of the cult several times. But they are mostly just low level members who still have the explosive device in their mouth. I just let the agents do their job. I won¡¯t interfere at all if they are only at that level.


    The tour is boring. But it was worth it to perform in the next city. And as usual, we have the seatspletely filled.


    But it¡¯s still boring in the journey. Especially since I¡¯m a genius who can learn any tricks at first try.


    Well, it¡¯s all thanks to the fact that I¡¯m an Aura Master. Copying someone¡¯s move is easy now.


    ¡°Sigh... We didn¡¯t find much about the cult in the tour, huh?¡± I said to Burnes.


    ¡°It¡¯s not like the tour is over already. We have just entered Consenza¡¯s territory. It will take months before we can finish. Also, you might not know it. But in every city where we thought to be suspicious, we made sure to mark every single one of them so that the nearby agents will focus on the investigation there. They will do better since unlike us, they have the time to do it,¡± Burnes said.


    ¡°Is that so?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s like we¡¯re just the scout. The real investigator experts are going to investigate those cester on. And they will contact the king of the territory if they find any trace of the cult or not. So, we might have found a lot more than expected,¡± Burnes said.


    .....


    It means that it¡¯s possible for the investigators to have located the real headquarter of the cult. But they need to make sure of it.


    I asked Albert and the other kings about it via text messages, and they told me that they indeed have located some suspicious ces. But before they can find the evidence that they are truly rted to the cult, they won¡¯t say anything. At least to me.


    Maybe they have shared their information to each other. Well, that¡¯s the point of having an alliance after all.


    Maybe I should check the forum more often. Some of them might have rted information about what the circus has found.


    ...Maybe not. Too many topics. It¡¯s difficult to read them all. Especially with Victoria posting the most. Most of them is difficult to understand unless it¡¯s from Victoria¡¯s fan who have read her books.


    Her books don¡¯t always contain romance between men as the main point. But it¡¯s still there, right? If so, there must be a lot of the characters based on me or my experience. Reading a bit of it in the past is already enough for me.


    Though for her to have a lot of fans among the royalty, she is truly amazing. I guess that¡¯s how everything in her world is.


    But maybe some of the stories she wrote is not original stories. They are based on the stories from her world. But because there¡¯s no one here who knows about them, so no one will think that she¡¯s giarizing.


    If there¡¯s anything important, Victoria will tell me about it. She¡¯s on the phone most of the time anyway. Even right now, she¡¯s in my pocket ying with her phone.


    Soon, I¡¯m going to gather all the kings again for another meeting. This time, it will be in Monsters World. And the topic will be horse-riding. Everyone will learn and pick the horse that suit them.


    From thest time I went to Monsters World a few days ago, Ray has done well in splitting the horses. It¡¯s so that each country will have a group of horses for the army.


    Obviously, the bigger countries will have more horses. And the smaller countries will have fewer.


    But Ray hasn¡¯t finished it yet. Because it seems like he just got another batch of horse monsters with him and he¡¯s currently training them.


    Though thanks to the centaur, they also helped the horse monsters to adapt.


    Though it¡¯s mostly thanks to the fact that the horse monsters were promised to be fed regrly so that they won¡¯t have to hunt food themselves. As expected, cooked meals are better than raw.


    We continued our journey. The next stop is a city in Consenza. Then we will go to a small kingdom nearby. Good thing the king has given us the permission to perform there. He has joined our alliance after all.


    But on the way, I got a call from Kron. It¡¯s rare for him to call me. in fact, this is the first time he called me. I think this might also be the first time he used his phone.


    ¡°Kron. What¡¯s up?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yo! I¡¯m about to breakthrough! I¡¯m going to be a master level mage!¡± Kron shouted at his phone.


    It¡¯s here. One of us finally about to reach master level. And as expected, it is Kron who will reach that stage first. He has the wind spirit with him after all.


    ¡°I¡¯ll inform the others and prepare a ce for you to breakthrough. Though it would either be at the peak of the mountain near Rygis, or at Andro¡¯s back. I think that Andro¡¯s back is better, but now that we know that the cullt has entered Monsters World, they might feel it when you¡¯re breaking through. I will let you make the decision. So, where will it be?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Hmm... I think on Andro¡¯s back is better. Even if the cult is there, they will only see Andro first. And since Andro is always moving, there will be less enemy who will try to approach me,¡± Kron said.


    ¡°Alright. I¡¯ll inform everyone so that they can protect you. Let¡¯s go when you¡¯re ready. Anyway, do you have anywhere you want to go before breaking through? I can get you there,¡± I asked.


    ¡°Nowhere. Just bring me back to Cassau and meet everyone,¡± Kron said.


    ¡°Okay. See you... now.¡±


    Before I hang up the phone, I already opened a portal to Kron¡¯s location.


    ¡°Using portal is cheating. Anyway, aren¡¯t you busy with the circus?¡± Kron asked.


    ¡°Everyone will be fine without me. I¡¯ll bring you back to Cassau first. Victoria has already informed everyone that you¡¯re going to breakthrough,¡± I said.


    ¡°That was quick. This phone thing is really amazing. If it has the function like the television, then it would be more amazing,¡± Kron said.


    ¡°I know, right? That¡¯s still work in progress. With the cksmith joined us recently, we should be able to do it soon,¡± Victoria said.


    To have that television thing in your pocket. What a technology!


    ¡°Oh, seems like they will dy the meeting for the horses. Because we don¡¯t know how long it will take for you to breakthrough. Well, that¡¯s fine. Let¡¯s go home now,¡± I said as I opened a portal back to Cassau.


    After a long time, Kron finally returned to Cassau. It feels like he used his room like a hotel and only stayed for a while before moving around. Though that¡¯s fine. He¡¯s Kron after all.


    Ka and the others are already waiting for him after they learned that he¡¯s going to breakthrough. One of the ten master level mages who is a wind mage is there as well. Good. Kron can ask her for some guidance.


    We can also ask Patricia. But we already have one here, so there¡¯s no need to go to Rygis.


    After taking him back to Cassau, I also brought everyone who wants toe to Cassau. They are all those who will protect him from any attack during the time Kron is trying to breakthrough. Including Ka, Ang, Shirley, Sunsses, and the usual group. Plus we have several master level mages who are interested in seeing the Kaiser Dragon, Andro.


    But first, I need to inform Andro about Kron going to breakthrough on his back.


    ¡°That¡¯s okay. I¡¯ll make sure that the flight will be as stable as possible. I¡¯ll fly near your Monsters Vige if that¡¯s fine with you,¡± Andro said.


    ¡°No. Just fly over somewhere else. If the cult noticed that there¡¯s a vige of several species of monsters gathering together, they will realize that something is wrong. And they will probably start attacking the vige. We can¡¯t have that. Just fly above the ocean,¡± I suggested.


    ¡°Okay. But I can¡¯t stay in one spot. So those who will protect him will need the ability to fly,¡± Andro said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about that. I have new monsters who can help,¡± I said.


    ¡°You sure know a lot of monsters even though you¡¯re just a human. You¡¯re interesting as usual. Fine, you can stay as long as you want. I also need some help with scratching my back again. It started feeling itchy now,¡± Andro said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll do that now. I can¡¯t have you feel itchy when Kron is trying to breakthrough,¡± I said.


    And so, I spend one hour to scratch Andro¡¯s giant back. He also has a phone now, but there¡¯s only one contact and he can¡¯t use the forum. And the only contact he has is mine. As for the reason, it¡¯s just that it¡¯s difficult to share contact with anyone else other than me.


    Soon, we will have an extra master level wind mage. Andter, there will be more.


    I wonder how the agents in those inds are doing? Have they find anything yet? I can¡¯t wait to conquer those inds so we can get an Earth Spirit helping us.

 Chapter 819 - 819 On Andro’s Back

    819 On Andro¡¯s Back


    We¡¯re here already. On Andro¡¯s head.


    We didn¡¯t transport to his back near his wings right away. But to his head first so that we can talk with Andro.


    ¡°Please take care of me, Andro,¡± Kron said.


    ¡°Sure. I just need to fly straight and as stable as possible so you guys won¡¯t have to worry about losing bnce. But if there are enemies in front of me, I might use my breath attack to kill them. The shockwave might hit you, so be careful,¡± Andro said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about us. We will be fine,¡± I said.


    After that, I transported everyone to Andro¡¯s back near his wings. As usual, the power of just a p of his wings is strong enough to generate small storm. But thanks to Andro flying slowly now, the wings moved slower. But the wind is still strong enough to blow the lighter people away.


    ...And the heavier people were pretending to be blown away for fun.


    Though there¡¯s someone who is having fun here. Breezy. The wind spirit.


    ¡°WOOOHOOO!!! This is awesome!¡± Breezy said.


    .....


    ¡°Breezy, don¡¯t get blown away too far! Or no one will be able to catch you!¡± Airy scolded her spirit brother.


    One is an adventurous spirit who goes around with Kron, and the other is a foody spirit who stays with me. One has been going around to many ces, and the other has been eating in many ces.


    The two have different personalities but they are treating each other as siblings still even after they are separated. Even though they are not really siblings.


    Then I opened another portal to bring the rest here. The monsters.


    The werewolves, vampires, angels, weretigers, and surprisingly, the centaurs joined.


    ¡°Are you sure you want to be here? We¡¯re in the sky and we will fight flying monsters mostly. So you who can¡¯t fly and don¡¯t have any long-range attack won¡¯t be able to do much,¡± I said to the centaur.


    His master, the summoner, is also here. In fact, all the ten master level mages from the vige in the Magicless Area are here. With the wind mage already next to Kron to give him some advise.


    ¡°We actually fight better in a group than individually. If it¡¯s just for protecting one person, we¡¯re confident we can do it. So you don¡¯t have to worry about the monsters you didn¡¯t kill. Let them charge at the target and we will kill them,¡± the centaur leader said.


    ¡°Alright. As for the humans, those who can¡¯t fly, get on the horses that can. Though I only bring those who can fly like pegasus or horses with wind magic. Sunsses, you will be in charge of leading everyone here. We don¡¯t know how long it will take for Kron to reach master level. It might take days or weeks. So use a strategy that won¡¯t make everyone tired at once,¡± I said to Sunsses.


    This is also a good way for him to improve his leadership. Especially since we don¡¯t know when we will start the attack to those inds north of Varadis.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I also have Ka, Candy, and Randy as sub-leaders. They are good enough to lead arge force. But with smaller force, they will give better order. I might not have Elsie with me, but I can leave everything to Sonia who will help us with locating the enemies,¡± Sunsses said.


    Sonia has her phone in hand already prepared to contact Sunsses¡¯ phone and tell him everything she sees.


    He doesn¡¯t think this situation is an important situation where Elsie¡¯s presence is necessary for him to see everything. It¡¯s also possible that Elsie¡¯s ability to share her vision won¡¯t work in the future battle. That¡¯s why he¡¯s thinking of other way he can survey the battlefield without Elsie¡¯s help.


    And right now, he¡¯s trying to use Sonia for that. Though there are other ways that he wants to try to improve his skill.


    With several skilled leaders as the sub-leaders, the group can do more. And even with the centaurs and the weretigers recently joined us, Sunsses has prepared their roles in the fight just based on what I told him about those monsters.


    Centaurs can¡¯t fly but strong physically, while the weretigers have simr strength as werewolves but just better individually. Though in groups, the werewolves are better.


    Well, except that Shelia is still better fighter than Tiger. Other than her, even Jack lost against another weretiger who is the second strongest.


    But when ite to a group battle, I heard from Shelia that the werewolves have overwhelming victory. That¡¯s the difference between experience.


    Though I don¡¯t know if the weretigers can be that good in the future or not. But at least I know the weretigers¡¯ and the werewolves¡¯ rivalry is great for their development.


    ¡°Kron, you¡¯re going to do it over there?¡± I asked Kron after seeing him stopped walking and finding the perfect spot to cultivate.


    ¡°Yeah. This ce is good enough,¡± he replied.


    ¡°Alright. Victoria, get your clones for him to sit on. Make sure that Kron will feelfortable and won¡¯t move even when Andro is upside down,¡± I said.


    ¡°What kind of situation that needs Andro to be upside down?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. Let¡¯s just hope that won¡¯t be the case at all,¡± I said.


    Everyone is ready. Those who can¡¯t fly are already riding on the horses. Though those horses are not the horses that they picked personally. We still didn¡¯t have the time for them to find one that ispatible with them. We just look for the horses that can fly for now.


    For the time when they picked their own horses, it should be soon. But because of Kron about to reach master level, we dyed it. Though everyone is willing because we now will have an extra master level mage. And he has learned magic control more than the other master level mages who have joined us. So he might be stronger than them.


    So, soon Kron will be the strongest mage in our group. But that won¡¯t take long at all because I know that there could be some other people who will reach that level sooner orter.


    Like Shirley for example. The princess is here and is now asking Breezy toe with her after Kron reached master level. She promised him that she will bring him to a ce that he had never been to with Kron. And Breezy agreed.


    Maybe I¡¯ll get Airy to stay with Sara as well. She has better chance to reach master level in air element than me. Sara just need to promise Airy to give a lot of cakes.


    Kron is now sitting cross-legged and everyone can feel the magic power in the surrounding area has started to fluctuating. Even Andro¡¯s whole body is shaking for a bit.


    ¡°Has it started? Good luck, everyone,¡± Andro¡¯s loud voice can be heard all the way from his back. Even though the distance is so great from his head to his back. This is a dragon the size of a small continent after all.


    Though if we say something from here, he will not hear us at all.


    ¡°Everyone, get ready,¡± Sunsses said.


    ¡°Hmm... we¡¯re on top of a moving dragon. So even if there are some monstersing this way, it will take some time before they can catch up from behind even if Andro is slowing down. Let¡¯s focus more on the enemies from the front,¡± Ka said.


    ¡°That¡¯s right. Roy, please don¡¯t do too much as usual,¡± Sunsses said.


    ¡°Okay. I¡¯ll make sure that everyone is safe. Including Andro. You don¡¯t need to worry on the attack thatnded on his back. He¡¯s very strong. Though don¡¯t forget to asionally ask someone to heal his back. When it became so itchy for Andro, I will be the one scratching his back after all. I don¡¯t want to do that too often,¡± I said.


    Then I used my Divine Vision to check the surrounding. And I can see that several monsters are flying this way from below.


    ¡°Iing from below... wait, you don¡¯t have to worry about them. It¡¯s the serpents family,¡± I said with a big smile on my face.


    He¡¯s here to help. I didn¡¯t tell him and his family that we need their help. But they¡¯reing here anyway.


    Spot and his five children. And now, the five sea serpents can fly just like their father.


    His children shouldn¡¯t be able to fly as they are just sea serpent. But I guess since they stayed here, the sky serpent¡¯s blood in their body remind them that they can fly just like their father. Even though they¡¯re just a quarter sky serpents. Not even half.


    Though the thing is, they don¡¯t seem to know that Andro is our ally. And they areing here just like any other monsters. To attack the source of the fluctuating magic power.


    ¡°Everyone, I¡¯ll go and greet Spot and his children first. I need to inform them that we¡¯re allies,¡± I said before I jumped down with Ray to where Spot and his children areing.


    They seem to have grown stronger than before. Maybe they can fight the Kraken now.

 Chapter 820 - 820 Five More Flying Serpents

    820 Five More Flying Serpents


    I jumped down with Ray to meet Spot and his children who areing up here.


    ¡°Roy? So it¡¯s you as expected. There¡¯s no way we will feel anything like this unless it came from the Kaiser Dragon. And the one closest to the dragon that he can use the dragon¡¯s back for whatever reason is you,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°Nice deduction, Spot. Yes, Kron is breaking through to master level stage in his wind element. And I asked Andro to let him breakthrough on his back. It¡¯s easier here since the enemies will be monsters. If we do it in our world, there might be a lot of human enemiesing,¡± I said.


    ¡°He¡¯s about to reach master level? That¡¯s great! Then, it¡¯s a good chance for my children to use what they learned. They will help you. As for me, I¡¯ll just watch them like you do. I know that you would have sent some other people to protect Kron so that they can gain experience. Tell them that my children is for them tomand,¡± Spot said.


    I looked at the five serpents who are flying behind Spot. They look like they gained a lot of confidence after being in this world for a while. Not only they can now fly, they must have learned something else. They gained some scars. Proof that staying here is not easy. But they have the look of confidence in their eyes.


    ¡°They can fly on their own now? I guess it¡¯s time for the children to not rely on being carried by their father again,¡± I said.


    ¡°Saying it that way make me feel a bit sad. They always have the ability to fly. After all, they are my children who is half sky serpent. Once they entered Monsters World and fighting various strong beasts and monsters, their sky serpent¡¯s blood in their body remind them that they can fly. Unlike me who can fly as soon as I was born, they need some training. But now, they can do it well,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°Cool. How long do you think it will take until they carry their father on their back?¡± I asked Spot.


    ¡°Hah! Even if they are my own children, I won¡¯t let them surpass me! I will continue to be the strongest serpent until I die!¡± Spot said confidently.


    .....


    Is that why he¡¯s flying in front of his children? I guess it¡¯s the pride of a father who doesn¡¯t want his children to surpass him yet.


    ¡°By the way, are you guys strong enough to face the Kraken now?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I think we can give him some trouble now. But defeating it is another question. Will we start fighting him soon?¡± Spot asked.


    ¡°No, not yet. They haven¡¯t finished with the investigation yet. I¡¯ll contact you when we¡¯re ready. For now, let¡¯s protect Kron. The monsters are starting to chase Andro,¡± I said..


    I used my phone to tell Sunsses to get ready to receive extra help from five serpents.


    ¡°Oh, right. Just a reminder that you shouldn¡¯t attack the werewolves, angels, vampires, weretigers, and the centaurs. They are all our allies,¡± I said.


    ¡°It increased? I know that you got the weretigers recently. But now, you have centaurs?¡± Spot asked.


    ¡°Not just centaurs. We have other horse monsters as well. It¡¯s thanks to Ray¡¯s effort. Now, almost everyone who fight over there are riding a flying horse,¡± I said.


    ¡°Now we have more flying monsters. Well, It means that that I will be used as a transportation even less than before. But at least that means I have more chance to fight,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°None of them are as fast as Ray or you. Unless they use portal obviously,¡± I said.


    Soon after, we reached Andro¡¯s back near the base of his wings. Spot¡¯s children had some trouble going there because of the p of Andro¡¯s wings. But they quickly gotten used to it.


    ¡°So, what else did they learn? Can they use camouge?¡± I asked Spot who just like me, is watching the fight.


    He¡¯s not in hisrge form anymore and just using his small form and wrapped himself around waist.


    ¡°No. They just learned to fly and to do breath attack. It¡¯s still weak. We will improve them again before we face the Kraken,¡± he said.


    If all his children can do breath attack even just half as powerful as Spot¡¯s breath attack, that would be an amazing sight. It will be a total destruction if all five of them are together.


    Well, unless we face too many master level mages and a lot of powerful monsters. But at least they can protect themselves better now.


    I¡¯m sure that at this time, the cult is still continuing cultivating their believers to reach master level, and to search for more monsters.


    ...We¡¯re doing the same thing though. We¡¯re making sure that our own people can reach master level, then I recruited more monsters without taming them. We¡¯re also recruiting people. But that¡¯s what the cult has been doing from the start.


    The difference between us is our goal. And we¡¯re less cruel than the cult. At least on the surface.


    I said that because I have killed a lot of people. Most of them are with the cult though, so it¡¯s fine.


    Several birds then started approaching. There aren¡¯t many of them, so Sunsses let the werewolves and the weretigers to fight them first. We don¡¯t need to waste our strength, stamina, and mana right from the start. Because we don¡¯t know how long it will take for Kron to reach master level.


    Kron has Breezy and Airy with him. I don¡¯t know if there will be any effect or not when Breezy is with him. As for Airy, she¡¯s worried about Breezy who is worried about Kron. So she stayed there with him.


    The first wave is done rather quickly. Because they are too weak. They are just fast. And the weretigers and werewolves can hit them easily since they know that those bird monsters are only aiming at Kron.


    While we were waiting for the next wave, Inded next to the master level wind mage whom I brought here.


    ¡°How long did it take for you to breakthrough to master level?¡± I asked.


    ¡°At that time, I think it was a year. But for everyone, it¡¯s different. Maybe it¡¯s because I was trying in a ce not suitable for me. I¡¯m a wind mage but I hide myself underground where there¡¯s no wind just because I¡¯m afraid to be bothered by other people or monsters. But for Kron, here, and having a wind spirit with him, I think it will not take long. I say about a week or two at most,¡± the master level wind mage said.


    But it¡¯s just a guess, right? It might take more than a year even with everything here suitable with Kron¡¯s element.


    I guess I will have to work hard as well even if I don¡¯t participate in the fight. Like bringing in supply every day and report everything to Albert and the others.


    Then I also need to ask them if there¡¯s something that they need us to do. If so, then I will have to do it myself first. Or I will swap with someone who can do it and fight in their ce.


    ¡°Hmm... I guess I¡¯ll look around the ground. Maybe we can find some traces of the cult,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then you can go with Ray. I¡¯ll stay here and watch the others. Don¡¯t worry, I won¡¯t let anyone die,¡± Spot said.


    So I left Spot to watch the others. Though I think he will only focus on his children. But that¡¯s fine.


    As for the others, I asked Ka to make sure that everyone is okay.


    I can ask the master level mages, but they want to fight by themselves. And they want to test their strength now that they learned about magic control. I guess asking Ka to do it is the best way.


    By the way, she¡¯s an earth mage. But it¡¯s on Andro¡¯s back, so there¡¯s no soil or other mineral. So Ka lent her wand that allow her to bring soil to anywhere to Celestine who rode on a pegasus, and had her bring a lot of soil from the ground.


    ...I guess I need to wash Andro¡¯s back and scratch itter.


    I move around on thend within the distance where I can still feel the fluctuating magic. I asked Andro to fly quite high. But there¡¯s still arge area where I can still feel someone is trying to breakthtough.


    Luckily, I didn¡¯t find anyone. As for the monsters, once they sensed the mana in the surrounding changed, they looked at the source above. Those who can¡¯t fly just looked above without being able to do anything. As those that can fly, I killed some who are on my way.


    Andro is flying toward the ocean. This way, the chance of a cult member noticing that someone is about to breakthrough is lessened. Unless they are living on the ocean. Which I don¡¯t think they are.


    The ocean is reallyrge. Even if Andro is flying straight, he said that it will take weeks in his usual speed. But now that he¡¯s slower than usual, it might take months just to cross the ocean.


    I guess we don¡¯t have to worry about the cult finding out about us. So I returned back to Andro¡¯s back when he¡¯s right above the ocean and return to watch the others protecting Kron.

 Chapter 821 - 821 First Day is Over

    821 First Day is Over


    More monsters areing. But we can protect Kron just fine.


    The Kron whose hair got burned by the cult and had to wear bandana to cover his bald spot. Though I wonder why he¡¯s still growing the hair on the back. He can just shave them all off instead.


    He had just started attempting to breakthrough a while ago. And we were greeted by several bird monsters whom got defeated easily by the werewolves and the weretigers.


    Apparently, they arepeting with each other on how many enemies they can defeat until Kron breakthrough to master level.


    After the werewolves were taught basic math, they started to count how many enemies they have defeated. And I heard from Shelia that the werewolves started teaching the newly joined tribes to read, write, and also teaching them basic math as well. Previously, it was the weretigers. But now, after the centaurs joined, they teach the centaurs as well.


    From what I heard, the centaurs are smarter than the other tribes in the vige. They can learn everything faster than the others. Maybe they can be tasked as the role of a leader in the future. The leader of the monsters. Just during the fight against the cult at least. Or the werewolves and weretigers won¡¯t obey them at all.


    Well, it would be great if they can do that. If not, at least the monsters will still obey me.


    During the past few days, the centaurs have started getting along with the others. And by getting along means that they have challenged the others to fight.


    From what Red told me, the one who became the representative for the werewolves since the strongest, Shelia, is often go out and fight, they have made it a tradition for the newly recruited tribe in the vige to challenge the others first.


    .....


    The vampires skipped the tradition since they live on Earth. But after I brought the vampires here to help, they said that they are willing to do the tradition sooner orter. At least after Kron finished attempting his breakthrough to master level first.


    The werewolves, elves, and angels agreed on it when they had a discussion before. To make the newly joined members in the future to do this tradition. It was before the weretigers joined.


    And so, the weretigers did it first. Then now, it¡¯s the centaurs turn. They¡¯re all agreed to do it. Though it¡¯s not finished yet since I asked them to protect Kron.


    As for the elves, more of them started to fight as well. They are not that good yet, but they are growing quickly.


    They might not be as fast as the other races, but in the forest, they are the most agile. So if we have a mission in the forest, I¡¯m thinking of asking them to fight.


    And after we got the cksmith, although it wasn¡¯t that long ago, Victoria told the cksmith to at least finished making one bow and a set of arrow as soon as possible. And the cksmith did it.


    Victoria then gave the bow to the Elf Queen, Tia. And she showed us great markmanship. And how she can quickly grab an arrow from the quiver on her back and nock it to the bow, it¡¯s as if she¡¯s born for archery.


    When the other used it, they are not as good as Tia. But they are still better than other race who tried it. Including me when I was curious about it and wanted to try. And as expected, a gun is better for me.


    And so, the elves can start joining the fight. But that¡¯s only when they want to. They are using this tradition of the new tribes to fight the older tribes in the vige as a training.


    I heard that the result was horrible. They lost a lot since they are not experienced. They are just good at moving around and shooting from distance. And in the Colosseum, it¡¯s impossible for them to use their nt magic and there¡¯s nowhere to hide. So except for the few individuals, most of the elves lost.


    Though I think just being an archer is not good enough. I mean we already have mages who can shoot magic from long distance.


    But when I consulted with Sunsses, he said that there are things that only the elves can do. But we won¡¯t ask them to help now. We¡¯re on top of a moving dragon after all. Not a forest.


    ¡°If you¡¯re thinking about what the elves can do, don¡¯t forget about the treasures we got from looting Timmy¡¯s treasure vaults. We have a lot of magic bow and magic arrows. Though I think we need to ask the cksmith to see if they can still be used or not,¡± I said.


    Oh, right! I forgot that I got a lot of treasures that I haven¡¯t used or given to anyone yet. Now that I think about it, there are several magic armor and some normal armors. Maybe some will suit for someone.


    ¡°Victoria, remind me againter to bring the master level mages to see the treasures. I think I have something they can use,¡± I said.


    Most of the armors are too heavy for ordinary mages to wear. That¡¯s why I couldn¡¯t give them to Albert. As for expert level mages, they will have to adapt in using them and will probably change their fighting method if they wear them. That¡¯s what Candy told me when I consulted it with her. So those armors will probably end up with the master level mages.


    I think I¡¯ll show all the treasures I got from Timmy¡¯s treasure vault to the cksmithter. They have all been appraised, but we don¡¯t know if they can still be used or not since the durability might have been decreased after so many years being stored.


    More monsters areing. But they still got defeated by the weretigers and the werewolves. The others still don¡¯t have a chance to fight yet.


    Especially the centaurs. They can only fight those who havended on Andro¡¯s back. They can¡¯t do anything about enemy who can fly.


    At least we can be assured knowing that even if some monsters passed through the others, the centaurs will be there waiting and protecting Kron.


    Oh, I can see more monstersing now. The number is higher than before. I think everyone will have a chance to fight now.


    I won¡¯t tell Sunsses about what I see yet. He said that unless it¡¯s an emergency, he won¡¯t depend on my vision too much.


    ¡°They are here. The numbers is about five hundreds. They¡¯re all wyverns.¡±


    I heard Sonia is reporting to Sunsses about the iing enemies. That¡¯s what Sunsses will depend on in this battle. Sonia¡¯s scouting report.


    Five hundreds. Though we have a lot of monsters here. So I don¡¯t think we need to worry. Even if some of us get injured, the angels are ready to heal them.


    Sunsses then give the order to Ka¡¯s and Candy¡¯s group to move. They will bring some mages and monsters to fight the wyverns. After that, Randy¡¯s group will be behind them taking care of those who passed Ka¡¯s group and Candy¡¯s group. Then the summoner is at ready with the centaurs.


    The wyverns are not that strong. And since Ang is in Ka¡¯s group, she used her magic to defeat many wyverns at once. So the number of wyverns decreased significantly.


    ¡°Don¡¯t go all out right away! It might take days, weeks, months, or even years for Kron to breakthrough! Save your mana as much as possible. Use a bit of mana to cast magic to injure the enemies, then focus on another enemies as the injured ones will be taken care of by those behind you! And even if they managed to survive and continue moving forward, the centaurs will be there to finish them!¡±


    Sunsses¡¯ orders are on point. We don¡¯t know if in the next day, or even in the next week, there could even be a monster as big and as strong as Androing here. Wasting our stamina on the first day is a bad idea.


    Though if Kron can finish breaking through in just one day, then it will be fine. But I doubt it.


    The sight of humans riding flying horses is great. The mages can also focus more on attacking. As for dodging, the horses will take care of that.


    Though the horse and the rider still need to be in sync. They need to work together more. And the rider also need to get along more with the horse. Maybe even take care of the horse in their home. Bringing them home, and caring them. giving them meals and making sure that the horses won¡¯t be ufortable with them.


    This is the start of horse monsters¡¯ domesticating. As for normal horses, we already done that.


    And just like that, the first day is over. Spot and I didn¡¯t do anything. Spot¡¯s children are excellent as well. Because they helped the mage riders who are not yet used to riding a horse who fell.


    I guess it will take time for the mages and their horses to get along. But I¡¯m sure that by the time we attack the inds north of Varadis, everyone is already getting along well with their horses.

 Chapter 822 - 822 The Second Day

    822 The Second Day


    The first day is over. It was a sleepless night for some since even at night, the monster won¡¯t stoping.


    But it wasn¡¯t all that bad. Because we¡¯re on the back of a living creature. And we didn¡¯t stop moving at all.


    Though it was the first time that I see Andro sleeping while flying. Or should I say gliding?


    Before it was dark, Andro called me saying that he¡¯s going to sleep. He won¡¯t know what will happen when he¡¯s sleeping so he told me to be careful. He just told me that he should fly straight when he¡¯s sleeping.


    And as he sleeps, the speed we¡¯re moving keeps reducing gradually. And we¡¯re also descending a bit gradually. But it was stable on his back as he glides in the night sky. So we¡¯re fine until the morning when Andro wakes up.


    Even with how loud we are on his back, he didn¡¯t wake up at all. Must be a nice sleep.


    As for me, I didn¡¯t sleep at all. I want to see their n to fight at night. I¡¯ll start sleeping from tonight on Andro¡¯s head. Since looking at his sleeping face, it seems like it was a really good sleep and I felt sleepy as well.


    It¡¯s the morning and Andro had just woken up. There are still some people fighting on his back trying to protect Kron. And there¡¯s even a mountain of soil and rocks on his back. I helped the earth mage to bring them there since I was not busy.


    After Kron reached master level, we will clean up Andro¡¯s back again. All the remains of the fight will be cleaned up properly. Just to make sure that there won¡¯t be any other creatures started living there. Other than us. If we need to.


    .....


    ¡°Oh, right. Andro, did you ever sleep back before you meet me? I don¡¯t think with how much pain on your back, it would be easy for you to sleep,¡± I asked Andro curiously.


    ¡°Actually, I have never been able to sleep ever since I got an itchy back. After you cleaned my back and scratched it, I started to sleep again. It was such a great sleep that I want to do it again. So, now I would always sleep at night. Especially since the monsters would rarely get close to me at night for some reason. Well, tonight is different, right? But I have you guys to do something even if there are strong monstersing,¡± Andro said confidently.


    ¡°Well, thank you for putting so much trust in us. By the way, do you know any other flying creatures who might be as strong or even stronger than you? It would be great if we have more information on which monster we should be wary of,¡± I said.


    ¡°I think all the creatures that I have seen are all weaker than me. At least that¡¯s from what I can remember. So you can¡¯t really rely on me for that information,¡± Andro said.


    ¡°Do you think that there are other Kaiser Dragon like you in this world?¡± I asked again.


    ¡°If there are any, I think you would have meet them first before I do anyway with those eyes of yours,¡± Andro said.


    He¡¯s right. I might not be able to see the difference between a giant monster and a mountain if I look at their outer appearance. But with my Divine Vision, I can see their inner organ. Unless those monsters have different color for their blood, I can tell the differences between a mountain and a huge monsters.


    If the color of their blood is anything other than red, I will be curious first before I can tell if they are living creatures. I don¡¯t know if I will see some other magical sight or not.


    After chatting with Andro for a while, I move to his back to see how the others are doing. Just like usual, there are a lot of monstersing. And everyone is working hard fighting the enemies.


    As expected, the first one to get tired is the monsters group. Especially the werewolves and the weretigers.


    Thanks to their rivalry, they would go all out from the start. They are still defeating a lot of monsters now. But I can tell that their movements are slightly more sluggish than yesterday. I bet they didn¡¯t even take a proper rest.


    Then I approached Sunsses who is riding on a pegasus.


    ¡°Hey, Sunsses. Will that be a problem?¡± I asked.


    ¡°What is?¡± he asked back.


    ¡°I mean the werewolves and the weretigers. They have been fighting non-stop and they started to move more sluggish than yesterday. Instead of fighting the monsters, it¡¯s like they are facing each other,¡± I said.


    ¡°They follow you, right? Then you can just tell them to do something about it,¡± Sunsses said.


    ¡°Did you forget that you¡¯re the one in charge of this operation? Even if they follow me, you are still someone who lead. It¡¯s just them who are doing it now. But in the future, there might be more people who won¡¯t obey you just because of your position. You have to think of what to do with them,¡± I advised the general of this troop.


    ¡°You¡¯re right. I¡¯ll take care of it. It¡¯s a good chance to do it now since there¡¯s not many monsters right now. Ka, you will be in charge temporarily while I take care of this problem.¡±


    ¡°Sure. Leave it to me,¡± Ka replied as Sunsses is flying toward where Tiger and Shelia is.


    Then, Sunsses gave some order to the werewolves and the weretigers to split into several groups. That way, only some groups will be active while the others will be resting.


    ¡°If you do this well, I¡¯ll ask Roy to ept any challenge from you. And he won¡¯t be able to refuse it,¡± Sunsses said.


    Hearing that only make them more excited. Did he just use me as a bargaining chip?


    Well, using whatever means necessary is important to gain victory. In that matter, Sunsses is doing well.


    ...Hey, that offer should only for the weretigers and the werewolves. Why is the other who heard that is getting excited about it?


    Though I think I know who will be the first one to challenge me. It would be Kron. He¡¯s going to test his new power against me whom he thinks that there won¡¯t be any problem at all if he used all his power.


    I feel like being a shooting target for his magic. A living and moving one. But that¡¯s fine. He also need someone equal or stronger than him to fight so he knows how strong he is currently.


    Most of the flying monsters are generally weak. But they are still useful. So the tamer started looking for some who might be stronger than usual, and tame them. I feel like he might be creating another Monsters Vige with his tamed monsters.


    ¡°Hey, how many more monsters can you tame?¡±


    I approached the tamer and asked him a question.


    ¡°Still a lot more. Then I will have at least three open slot for my tamed monsters at all time. In case I encountered some really strong monster. By the way, how about this Kaiser Dragon? Does he want to be under contract?¡± the tamer asked.


    ¡°He said that he doesn¡¯t want to. And it¡¯s not like we need to. He will help us without the contract anyway. But you can ask him again if you want. Maybe he will change his mind,¡± I said.


    ¡°I don¡¯t think he will change his mind. But I¡¯ll ask himter. Though I don¡¯t think he will be able to go to our world easily seeing how big he is,¡± the tamer said.


    Yeah. It would take a lot of mana just to move him using portal. As for summoning magic that I can use to my contracted monsters, I don¡¯t need to open a portal. But if it¡¯s Andro, even if I don¡¯t need to open a portal to summon him, it will still take a lot of mana to do it.


    I still have one more slot for a monster. I think I want an aquatic monster. Possibly, an amphibious monster like Spot. A monster that can live underwater or onnd just fine, but extremely strong.


    Like the Kraken maybe? But I think that one is way too dangerous. Maybe someone that I can understand instead of having to force them.


    Oh, I can see Spot¡¯s children are fighting other sky serpents. Those sky serpents are creatures from this world. Unlike Spot¡¯s children who were born and raised on Earth. So they should be more powerful.


    But Spot¡¯s children managed to defeat them. I guess they are already stronger than the same species from this world.


    Wait, they are sea serpents and only a quarter sky serpents. Maybe it¡¯s because sea serpents are stronger than sky serpents?


    Whatever the case, they are strong. So strong that the tamer is picking a fight with Spot if he could tame any one of them. The tamer gave up when Spot said that he won¡¯t help us anymore if he¡¯s forcing him or his children to be tamed.


    There¡¯s no need to make a contract with monsters who are already willing to help us. If the tamer is forcing them to make a contract with him, then I will interfere.


    Though I think I might do it soon seeing how the tamer look so angry.


    Well, other than that, there¡¯s nothing big that needs my interference today as well. I hope this will continue until Kron reach master level.


    Be quick, Kron. We don¡¯t know when the cult is going to make their move.

 Chapter 823 - 823 One Week Later

    823 One Week Later


    One week already passed without Kron reaching master level yet. It took one week without seeing any result. But we will continue waiting patiently and protect Kron.


    In the past week, I didn¡¯t always stay there. I would return back to the circus whenever we stopped at a city to perform. I can do that because it¡¯s not like everyone needs my protection at all time.


    Everyone is working hard so that they won¡¯t need my protection all the time. And even if I¡¯m not there, if they need anything, they can ask Andro to do something about it. Using his intimidation, doing a flip, or whatever he can do, he can protect everyone anyway. Though he hasn¡¯t been asked to do anything yet.


    It¡¯s good that his back is a good ce for wind mages to breakthrough. If it¡¯s other elements, then we will stay in a ce without moving and only have ourselves to rely on.


    So, when the others are breaking through, it will be harder than what we¡¯re currently experiencing while protecting Kron.


    And if it¡¯s Carmen, a water mage, then we might need to let her breakthrough to master level underwater. And there¡¯s not many of us who can fight underwater. Probably just me, Spot, and Spot¡¯s children.


    If even Kron needs a long time to reach master level, what about the others? He¡¯s good since he¡¯s in a ce where we can protect him and there won¡¯t be many powerful enemies. But what if it¡¯s Ka? Celestine? Candy?


    Then what about Ang? She will breakthrough all her four elements. No, they are already fused into one element. She might take the longest to breakthroughter.


    Where is the right location for her to do that? And when she¡¯s the one who will do it, we have to stop all our operation just to protect her.


    .....


    At this time, the kings can still ask other agents to do something. But for Ang, someone who will be the strongest mage in our group, to breakthrough, she might lure every dangerous creatures to go for her. And we need more people than ever.


    Especially the most dangerous creature. Humans. Even more if those humans are with the cult.


    Well, for now, it¡¯s Kron¡¯s turn. And we can still rest easy with the monstersing since they are not that strong and everyone can protect him.


    When I left for the circus, Victoria stayed behind. And she¡¯s riding on Ray as she helped kill many monsters. And that helped me a lot to reach master level in my summoning element.


    The master level summoner said that I need to fight strong monsters barehanded when I want to reach master level. But before that, I need to fill my experience first so that I can start doing it. And before my experience point is filled, even if I try to do it, I won¡¯t ever be able to reach master level.


    At this time, everyone is fighting. So I can just do nothing while the experience is slowly being filled. Having four familiars, seems like I need to get more experience than what the master level summoner needed back when he reached master level summoner.


    Victoria and Ray is teaming up since Victoria needed Ray so she can use Aura. Shelia is fighting almost all the time. While Graham, although he¡¯s focusing more on healing the injured people, he also helped fighting some monsters when he has the time. So everyone is helping me get experience. But I don¡¯t know how much more I needed to reach master level.


    And tamer is simr as well. Us summoners and tamers won¡¯t take time when we¡¯re trying to reach master level. But while the other mages needed to breakthrough by meditating, we need to fight.


    ¡°Good job as usual, Roy. We will continue our tour in two days and will probably reach the next city in five. You¡¯re going back to Monsters World?¡±


    Burnes asked me after thest show in this city is over. The others are going to prepare to leave and move on to the next city. But as Burnes said, I will return back to Monsters World.


    ¡°Yes. I want to witness someone reaching master level. Also, how about the agents who witnessed Kron who is trying to breakthrough? Have you heard anything from them?¡± I asked.


    The cult has a lot of master level mages. and from my experience of witnessing Kron trying to breakthrough to master level, the effect in the surrounding area must be quiterge. And that means the cult have a really big territory where they can attempt to breakthrough. And the location is not anywhere that we have gone to before.


    I asked the agents to experience the fluctuating of mana from Kron¡¯s meditation. Because each time, a mage trying to breakthrough, from beginner to intermediate, from intermediate to advanced, from advanced to expert, and from expert to master level, the quality of mana in the surrounding is different. So the agents who experienced it will try to find any location where they could feel the same.


    ¡°They haven¡¯t found any. But using this trick might be better than looking around aimlessly. If we decide where our people can attempt to breakthrough, then we just need to look for other ce that are not our designated location and have the agents investigating those ces. By the way, how about you? You helped everyone trying to breakthrough before. But I have never heard of anyone helping you trying to breakthrough. You¡¯re also an air mage, right? An expert level one at that. So you must have needed some protection,¡± Burnes asked.


    ¡°I did it in Monsters Vige. Everyone is happy that I tried to do it without asking the humans for help. So that the werewolves can have all the enemies for themselves,¡± I said.


    And as an air mage, the fluctuating mana doesn¡¯t seem to be that much difference than normal air. So no one would imagine that someone is actually attempting to breakthrough. This is something I know after I returned to the past. In my past life, I know no such thing at all.


    And when I attempted to breakthrough, there weren¡¯t that many monster waves. So the werewolves were quite disappointed. Even the monsters who came are not that strong. They are just more sensitive to the atmosphere around them.


    ¡°Must be great to be close to you. For us to reach expert level, we can¡¯t just ask you to help easily. Because we¡¯re also considered as our kingdom¡¯s army even though we mostly did things behind the scenes. We have our prides. So we can¡¯t just ask you to help us breakthrough. There are other reason but you don¡¯t need me to tell you that, right?¡±


    Burnes is right. I don¡¯t need him to tell me why he won¡¯t ask me for help.


    It¡¯s so that they can be independent.


    I have said it before, and I will keep saying it again in the future. I have no more n after the cult is destroyed other than having a peaceful life. So if the kingdoms can take care of their problem on their own, that would be perfect.


    After I bid my farewell to Burnes and the other circus members, I returned back to Monsters World. To Victoria¡¯s location. Who is actually moving around quite a lot because there are more monsters than before.


    So right after I opened the portal, Victoria who actually noticed it didn¡¯t care and just fight the monsters while riding on Ray¡¯s back. And I who entered the portal just free falling to the ground since we¡¯re already quite a bit away from Andro¡¯s back.


    And before any monsters could enter the portal, I closed it.


    ¡°Oh, everyone is busy. Even though it¡¯s night, the monsters stilling in waves,¡± I said while free falling.


    I can just walk or run on air. But I want to check the ocean underneath us to see if there¡¯s anything wrong with it. So I just let gravity to its job.


    Everyone who was flying was shocked when they see that someone is falling. But when they realized that it was me, they returned their focus back to the monsters they are facing.


    Does that mean they put so much trust on me? Or do they wish for my demise? I don¡¯t think they want me dead, so they just have a lot of trust in me.


    I checked the ocean and see that nothing is wrong around. I thought that maybe if the cult has a sea monster who noticed us, they would ask the monster to follow us closely. But I didn¡¯t see anything that is chasing us at all. So I guess we¡¯re fine from the cult.


    As I opened another portal to Victoria¡¯s location, this time, I didn¡¯t let myself free falling to the ocean. I just run and sat on Ray¡¯s back. With Victoria sitting in front of me while fighting monsters.


    ¡°Anything strange when I¡¯m gone?¡± I asked Victoria.


    ¡°Except the fact that the master level tamer turned crazy after taming so many monsters? Everything is normal?¡± Victoria said.


    So the problem is not the monsters moving toward Kron. But it might be the tamer who is the problem.


    Well, let¡¯s see if I can do something about it.

 Chapter 824 - 824 The Tamer is Going Insane

    824 The Tamer is Going Insane


    The tamer has turned mad. Being in this world, he tamed so many monsters that now, if all the tamed monsters arended, they could cover a small part of Andro¡¯s back.


    I need to remind everyone that Kaiser is as huge as a continent. So those monsters, if gathered together, they would be more than enough to cover several cities.


    Most of them are flying monsters though. Some of them are stronger than most, but they are still not that strong.


    And the tamer himself doesn¡¯t care about what his tamed monsters were doing. Even when we don¡¯t know which monsters are tamed and which aren¡¯t, and we ended up killing his tamed monsters, he just doesn¡¯t care.


    In fact, he was happier that he will have more open slot for even stronger monsters that he could find. Even if those stronger monsters died, he was still happy.


    ¡°It will be bad if he continue thinking that monsters are expendable. We need to put him in his ce,¡± I said to myself.


    ¡°How? And in this situation?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°I think we still have some leeway for that,¡± I said.


    Tamer has more slots for monsters than us summoners. But even then, they still have their limits. Probably since he¡¯s already reached master level, and also an expert level in ice element, we still can¡¯t see his limit yet.


    .....


    But if he keeps letting monsters be used as expendables, it will be bad. Because then we can¡¯t really trust him to fight with us. After all, we have a lot of monsters.


    And what if he keep doesn¡¯t care about anything? Maybe even letting humans die and he can pretends to be the king of the monsters.


    I can¡¯t have that. I¡¯m already the king of the monsters here. We don¡¯t need two.


    Now that I think about it, I have never fought against him, right? Even if the timing is bad right now, that doesn¡¯t mean that I shouldn¡¯t do it. But should I be the one doing it?


    As I thought so, I can see the tamer has an evil smile on his face after he stabbed some sort ofrge bird-type monster on its body. The monster didn¡¯t die. And the tamer used that chance when the monster is so weak to tame it.


    Even after being tamed, the monster is still dying. So the tamer asked an angel to heal that monster.


    Then, while focusing on healing the monster, the angel didn¡¯t notice that the tamer is approaching him with two spears in both hands. He¡¯s going to attack even the angel? To make him submit?


    I can¡¯t watch it any longer. So I transformed Victoria into a sniper rifle and shoot the tamer on his arm. While making sure that the wound would not leave a permanent injury on his body.


    But the tamer was quick to react. He used his spear to block the bullet. But what he didn¡¯t expect was that there¡¯s another bullet shot even though there¡¯s only one sound of gunshot.


    ¡°Aargh!¡±


    Seeing the tamer injured, the others nearby stopped momentarily. Including the angel who have just healed the monster that just got tamed.


    Ka was the first to react. Seeing that the wound on the tamer¡¯s hand is from a bullet, something she¡¯s familiar with since she¡¯s the one who has been fighting alongside me the longest other than Ang, she looked at me for a moment and instantly realized what happened.


    ¡°Ignore him! Roy will take care of it!¡± Ka shouted.


    Just by saying that I will take care of it, everyone resumed their battle and ignored the tamer. Even the angel closest to him who was about to heal the tamer stopped. He didn¡¯t heal the tamer even when the tamer asked for it.


    I approached the tamer who is still asking to be healed.


    ¡°Hey, are you crazy? Have you gone mad?¡± I asked the tamer after telling thee angel to stay and not to heal the tamer.


    ¡°Me? What about you? You shot your own ally?¡± the tamerined.


    While we¡¯re making a conversation, the summoner and several centaurs came over. They can¡¯t fly so they just watched us while the others are busy in the air.


    ¡°And you tried to harm an angel to tame him without asking for his permission. Didn¡¯t I tell you that you can tame anyone in the Monsters Vige as long as you get their permission? You tried to tame an angel who is healing a monster you just tamed without asking for consent. Who betrays who?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...¡±


    The tamer can¡¯t say anything. Why did he do this? Did he really think that with more monsters, he can do anything?


    ¡°Why are you doing this?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...Does it matter why?¡±


    ¡°Fine. I won¡¯t ask you anything else. But I will show you that just because you have a lot of monsters, you won¡¯t be able to do everything,¡± I said.


    ¡°You think you can?¡± the tamer asked me as if to challenge me.


    ¡°Not me. I¡¯ll get the vampires to fight you and your monster army. There are only twenty vampires here. While you have tamed more than fifty in the past week. You can fight as well. But for the vampires, they can¡¯t ask for help. Not even from me,¡± I said.


    Then I informed the others about what happened, and asked the vampires to fight. The monsters that the tamer had are not something that he really cares. So I don¡¯t mind if they got killed as well.


    ¡°Are you sure to do it right now?¡± Arin asked.


    ¡°Just because he has more numbers doesn¡¯t mean that he is the strongest. We already experienced a lot of it ever since we picked a fight against the cult. We¡¯re almost always outnumbered by the enemy, but we always won. If that tamer continued thinking of using monsters as sacrifices instead of letting them grow, he won¡¯t get any stronger. So we¡¯ll show him here and now that he can¡¯t do much even with so many monsters. Hey, summoner over there! This is also for you so you won¡¯t getcent just because you have an entire tribe of monster with you,¡± I said to the summoner as well.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I already know a lot about it since the centaurs often told me how they could lose against even the angels. I won¡¯t be like him. Also, hit him as hard as possible to put him in his ce,¡± the summoner said with no mercy.


    ¡°Arin, you heard that? Then, if both sides are ready, you can start fighting. You can heal him and his monsters now,¡± I said to the angel who was almost get tamed.


    He reluctantly healed the tamer and then stood next to me to watch the fight.


    Soon the two sides started fighting. The tamer with no strategy at all just used number against the vampires. While the vampires only send five people to fight. Arin didn¡¯t do anything and just watch. As for those five, the Vampire Duke who was following the Vampire King before is leading. I think her name is Car... something. Carlos? I don¡¯t think so.


    ¡°Oh, Carrie is leading the other vampires to fight,¡± Victoriamented.


    Right! Her name is Carrie. And as of now, he¡¯s the second strongest vampire in the group. Only second after Arin.


    Just five vampires and they can easily kill the monsters that the tamer has tamed. And Carrie herself is facing the tamer one on one.


    The vampire with her blood sword, and the tamer with his two spears. The winner is obvious even if the tamer used ice magic to fight as well. And the vampires gained victory.


    ...Which the tamer couldn¡¯t ept.


    ¡°They are just stronger than average monsters! If I could tame them, I would get even stronger!¡± the tamer shouted.


    ¡°Really? But they lost a lot against our expert level mages though. You¡¯re a master level tamer who trained his body, and also an expert level ice mage. but you still lose even when those vampires kept losing against Shirley when she only used her ice magic. She¡¯s better at her wind magic though. Doesn¡¯t that mean you¡¯re just weak? This is why I¡¯m going to put you in ce so you won¡¯t cross the line again,¡± I said.


    All the monsters that he tamed during the time he¡¯s here are dead. He¡¯s on his own. Though he still has his centaur and his horse.


    He still hasn¡¯t given up. Why though? What happened during the time he stayed in the vige in the Magicless Area to make him the most stubborn person who seeks to be the strongest?


    ¡°He¡¯s always like that. As soon as he entered the vige back then, he said that he¡¯s the strongest. He even brought hundreds of monsters with him. Though we killed all his monsters. Then he decided to improve his physical strength.


    Oh, he¡¯s a lost cause from the start, huh?


    If he got defeated by monsters, then he will make an excuse that if he could tame the monsters, he could be the strongest. In the end, we need a human to stop him.


    And that human will be me since I¡¯m the strongest.


    And as soon as I thought of that, he tried to make a contract with another monster. The biggest monster here. Andro. He tried to use his magic while he¡¯s away from Andro¡¯s head.


    Well, technically, we¡¯re still on a part of Andro¡¯s body. So his taming magic might work.


    ...Now what? Will we end up fighting Andro?


    I need to stop him fast!

 Chapter 825 - 825 Andro’s Anger

    825 Andro¡¯s Anger


    ¡°WHO IS IT!? WHO DARES TO MAKE A CONTRACT WITH ME!?¡±


    All of a sudden, a shout infused with powerful intimidation can be heard by everyone here. Not only the monsters stopped fighting. They also lost their consciousness.


    The same happened to the humans as well. Except for Kron who is focused on his meditation so he can¡¯t afford to pay attention to other things.


    Some lost their consciousness. Some barely managed to stay conscious. Even a few master level mages had to drop to their knee.


    Maybe because they trained their mentality, they can still stay conscious after kicking their horses to not faint. Like Sunsses, Ka, and some others.


    But with just one shout, everything stopped. Andro is so powerful.


    As for the tamer, seems like the recoil from failed forceful taming hit him hard as he started vomiting blood. That¡¯s pathetic.


    Just because he¡¯s powerful doesn¡¯t mean that there¡¯s no other more powerful beings than him. And now, he learned it.


    Without any magic, any physical strength, or any other power. Just a shout. Filled with killing intent enough to make anyone lose their consciousness.


    .....


    This is strength as well. Power to make anyone lose their will to fight.


    As for me, I¡¯m perfectly fine. Victoria and Ray as well. And Spot is flying around trying to get everyone who is falling to the ocean because they lost their consciousness mid-air. Including his own children.


    I guess we¡¯re all those who have experienced Andro¡¯s intimidation at full-power when we first met. Excluding Ray. Though for him, he¡¯s the closest one to death because he¡¯s an Abyss Horse. Maybe killing intent doesn¡¯t work on him.


    And so, I walked toward the vomiting tamer.


    ¡°I have been around a lot of monsters ever since I first met the werewolves. They have their own civilization. And they are smart. They also have a lot of pride. So it would be difficult for them to agree to be your subordinate. I got two of my familiars by luck. And the other two, I got them to respect me after I fought them. You can beat any monster and give them order. But the stronger their mentality is, the more they will refuse the order that they don¡¯t like. Don¡¯t you remember about what I told everyone before? About the tamed dragons in those inds?¡± I asked the tamer.


    There are four dragons in that ind before. Fire dragon, wind dragon, ice dragon, and earth dragon. They are so strong. But because of their luck, they had no choice but to be under someone weaker than them.


    If possible, they would try to break the contract binding them. But that¡¯s difficult. Just disobeying some orders already took a lot of effort from them. And they said to me that if they put more effort, they will end up losing their mind instead. And they will be mindless monsters who will obey their master¡¯s order.


    The tamer here, mostly got his monsters to make contract with him after he hurt them until they are unable to fight. Except for a very few.


    But just because of that, his power gets into his head and he started to think that with so many monsters under him, there won¡¯t be anyone who can win against him.


    Well, he¡¯s wrong. And he even lost against a few vampires. All the monsters that he make a contract with ever since we came here, are dead. Only leaving a centaur and several horses with him.


    And from the look of it, the centaur seem disappointed to his master. But he can¡¯t do anything about it. Because that centaur lost against the tamer in a fair fight.


    ¡°Now you know, right? There¡¯s no such thing as omnipotent power. Even master level mages can still be killed. And monsters can still refuse your contract magic even if you are a master level tamer,¡± I said.


    ¡°But that¡¯s just one angel! No matter how many of them obeying you, I can¡¯t just trust them to obey you willingly when they¡¯re not under contract. If I can tame everyone, it will be safer for us, right?¡± the tamer asked as if he was begging me.


    ¡°Then they will grow to hate us instead of the cult. And we can¡¯t trust those who hate us, right? Also, the monsters have their own reason why they joined us. It was mostly because they love fighting the most. But that¡¯s not the case for everyone,¡± I said.


    The werewolves, weretigers, and probably the centaurs as well, they love fighting. They will never back down from a fight unless their king, me, told them to. Though I don¡¯t know if the centaur has dered that I¡¯m their king or not. But if I defeat the summoner who made a contract with the strongest centaur, I think they will.


    As for the angels, they were forced at first. But now, after seeing Graham¡¯s sister¡¯s condition, they hate the cult to the bone. I heard that she¡¯s slowly recovering. Though she still can¡¯t speak and doesn¡¯t know who she is.


    For the elves, it was mostly because of gratitude. And the fact that the creature they worshiped is Sunny. Lina¡¯s familiar. So they want to be as close to Sunny as possible.


    There are other various monsters as well at first. But due to various reasons, after they stayed for a while in Monsters Vige, they left. Probably because they feel different since they are the only one from their race. So they left with some Blobbies saying that if we want their help, we can ask them.


    ...Though I think I will forget about them soon. If only they stayed in Monsters Vige, then I would be able to remember them. But they left.


    At least we know some more monsters. And if they can find their own tribe and bring them to the Monsters Vige, that would be great.


    ¡°Anyway, stop thinking of what you¡¯re doing. No more taming our friends. Because if you do, they will think of you as an enemy instead. But if you want to tame them, you can just ask them. If they are the kind who will obey those stronger than them, then you can defeat them like what you did to the centaur,¡± I said.


    Though I think for that centaur, even though he¡¯s tamed by the tamer, he will put the summoner as priority since the summoner make a contract with the leader of the centaurs.


    ¡°You¡¯re not in a condition to fight. So just rest for now. The others also took a lot of effort to protect themselves from Andro¡¯s intimidation. From now, until all of you have recovered enough to fight on your own, I will fight. Those who can still move are free to fight as well,¡± I said.


    As I said so, Spot returned. His children has regained their consciousness. Because they fell to the ocean. They¡¯re fine because they¡¯re sea serpents.


    As for Spot, he returned with other monsters and people on his back. All of them returned back to Andro¡¯s back feeling exhausted.


    ¡°You hear me, Spot? How about you show your children how strong their father is? There¡¯s arge group of monstersing here. Let¡¯s get the other rest for a moment so we are free to fight as many as we want,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. They seem to grow cocky after fighting some weaklings. I will show my children the strength they need to aim,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°Good. Though I have some other business first. You can go ahead to that ce where most of them are gathered. It will be best if you can defeat all of them on your own though,¡± I said as I pointed to the right side of Andro where many monsters areing from.


    I think because of Andro¡¯s powerful intimidation, the onesing are stronger than before. But this is fine.


    Other than me and Spot, there are some others who can still fight. Like Ang, Shelia, Graham, and Tiger. Just like Spot, they fly toward where he¡¯s going.


    As for me, I rode Ray¡¯s back and run forward to Andro¡¯s head. He might still be angry. So I need to apologize for the rude behavior of the tamer to a friend.


    ¡°Hey, Andro. Sorry about before. He¡¯s acting up because he tamed too many monsters these past few days,¡± I said.


    ¡°And then he didn¡¯t get enough so he tried to tame me? That¡¯s rude, don¡¯t you think?¡± Andro asked back.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. Because of your intimidation, I¡¯m sure that he won¡¯t do that again,¡± I replied.


    I also told the summoner to get his centaur ask the tamer if he will do it again or not. Until the tamer can truthfully say that he won¡¯t do it again, he won¡¯t be put into action anymore.


    ¡°That¡¯s good. But because of me, many are fallen from my back, right? I feel a bit lighter now,¡± Andro said.


    ¡°We got Spot to capture them all before they fall to their death, so it¡¯s fine. Also, it shows how powerful the cult is. If someone like you will end up getting killed by them in the future, then what we have right now is still not enough. They were discussing something before I left. As for Kron, what you did didn¡¯t disturb him at all. He¡¯s still focusing on breaking through,¡± I said.


    I think from now on, unless they are crazy, there won¡¯t be anyone thinking of doing the same thing as the tamer did. Trying to tame our own friends. So it will be fine.


    Now, let¡¯s show everyone how strong I am... not.


    Spot and the others have defeated all the monstersing. I guess I still won¡¯t have my turn now.

 Chapter 826 - 826 My Turn

    826 My Turn


    Now that the ones fighting are much fewer in number than before, they can go wild. And that resulted in how easy it seems for them all to defeat the monsters.


    ¡°I see. So for Ang to be able to use her hundred percent of strength, she needs to at least have that much distance from other people. Or we can get all the durable mages and monsters be with her so she doesn¡¯t need to mind them when she¡¯s casting her magic.¡±


    That¡¯s what Sunsses said after seeing Ang¡¯s fighting without his order. Or should I say hearing the report from Sonia?


    As he said, Ang can move more freely without given an order. But whether or not that is good for the bigger picture, I don¡¯t know. But Sunsses can figure out what he needs to do to let Ang use all her strength in the future battle.


    ¡°By the way, those are not her full strength at all. If I have to say, it¡¯s just twenty five percent since she only used one element instead ofbining it with her other elements. She hasn¡¯t even used multiple element at once other than for flying and other magic. So she still hasn¡¯t shown you her full strength yet,¡± I said.


    Ang is too strong for an expert level mage. She could even kill a master level mage easily. Breaking their magic barrier and kill them. Unless they are really powerful master level mage and not the weak ones.


    I have nothing to do. Ang, Spot, and the others are defeating all the monstersing from that side. And there¡¯s no other monstersing, so I¡¯m just on standby.


    The others are still tired after experiencing Andro¡¯s intimidation. Some who have experienced it are better. But most of them, even the master level mages, have never experienced it. So they feel exhausted after experiencing it once.


    And I got curious. They became master level mage without having many experience in real battle? Or is it that the battle in their era is not as intense as it is today? Or maybe it¡¯s just Andro¡¯s intimidation which is too strong?


    .....


    And I can¡¯t forget that these people decided to left their time as a mages and focus more on their physical strength in thest hundred years or so. Maybe living too peacefully dulled their fighting spirit.


    I¡¯m not interested in their past. I just want to know if they can really help us in future battle or not. Especially since the tamer had just done something crazy.


    They have passed Albert¡¯s lie detection test. But that doesn¡¯t mean their feelings won¡¯t change. That¡¯s why we never expected that the tamer would do something like that to our own ally.


    Then I noticed that anotherrger group of monsters ising from the other side.


    I looked around first and see that everyone is still resting and just watching Ang and the others fight. I guess I¡¯ll do it alone then.


    ¡°Sunsses, there¡¯s another grouping from the other side. Since you all need to rest, I¡¯ll do it by myself,¡± I said.


    ¡°Hmm... I can¡¯t sense it at all. Must be nice having Divine Vision. How about you bring Sonia with you to watch? She can carry that magic tool called camera, and you can bring the television here so we can watch. You want to show the tamer and the others as well how strong you are so they won¡¯t dare to betray you, right?I think doing it this way is a good idea,¡± Sunsses said.


    I agree with him. So I opened a portal and grabbed a camera, only for Albert and the others found out about it. So they wanted to watch as well.


    Because of the development of the phone, Marie managed to send magical signal all the way from Monsters World, or the Moon, to the Earth. So they can watch it live from wherever they are.


    I returned back to Andro¡¯s back carrying a camera for Sonia and arge TV. Now everyone can watch me fight.


    After that, I rode on Ray¡¯s back together with Sonia toward the enemies. With Victokatana in my hand and the magic armor covered my body.


    When I get close to the enemies, I jumped from Ray¡¯s back. I will fight on my own here.


    Ray, with Sonia riding him, took some distance so the camera can capture everything.


    I looked at the monstersing. There are about a hundred of them. And they seem to be stronger than the previous monsters the others have been fighting before.


    But I don¡¯t care. All I need to know is how I could defeat the most monsters with one sh. Should I swing the sword horizontally? Vertically? Or diagonally?


    I didn¡¯t use Reizpear to show the tamer, who have seen my spear technique, that I can still fight so well.


    I found out soon enough that I can kill the most monsters if I swing the sword vertically, I can kill a lot of monsters with one attack.


    Using my Aura filled sword, I swung the sword powerfully. And I cut down a lot of monsters.


    Some of them didn¡¯t die right away. But since I cut their wings that made them able to fly, they will die anyway if they fall to the ocean.


    I looked at Sonia and see that she¡¯s in a good position to show how strong I am. I¡¯m sure everyone can see it.


    But I didn¡¯t stop. As soon as I finished with that one sh, I swung my sword again. This time, I swung it diagonally.


    And just like that, with two shes, there are less than half of the monstersing. It wasn¡¯t hard.


    ¡°This guy is a freak of nature! No wonder someone killed all the Aura users to extinction in the past. They are scared of someone like him to appear!¡±


    Soniamented while broadcasting the fight. I guess it¡¯s to tell everyone how she feels. And she actually feels proud because she was an Aura user.


    Then she startedmenting on how Aura users was so great in the past. And for some reason, Victoria is gone and changed into Blobbysword. As for Victoria herself, she¡¯s with Sonia on Ray¡¯s back adding her own opinion on the matter.


    Let¡¯s ignore them. Now there are only twenty monsters left. And I killed them all with ease before I returned back to Andro¡¯s back.


    ¡°What?¡±


    I asked everyone who is looking at me as soon as I returned. Including Ang and the others who have finished their fight right before I arrived to where my enemies were.


    I guess they must be shocked to see how strong I am. Though some were thinking that it¡¯s natural for me to be that strong.


    ¡°If I went alone and no one is following me, I can do better than that and faster than that. I just don¡¯t want anyone to get hurt,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°Yeah, if it¡¯s you, I¡¯m sure you can use your breath attack to destroy everything. Anyway, does anyone else feel the atmosphere is changing?¡± I asked.


    Unlike before I left Andro¡¯s back, it feels like something has changed from before.


    Everyone also felt the same. Then the master level wind mage gave us the answer.


    ¡°Oh, so soon! It¡¯s from Kron. As he was about to breakthrough the bottleneck, the mana in the surrounding area became thicker. In about an hour, he will be a master level mage,¡± the master level wind mage said.


    Finally! It took him about one week to reach master level! And it¡¯s already faster than others normally. So this is really great!


    ¡°But this means that even stronger monsters wille inrge numbers. Everyone, be careful,¡± the master level wind mage said.


    Well, more monsters and stronger as well. Then it should be good for the tamer toe.


    ¡°So, Tamer, what will you do? If you still think of harming or taming your own allies without permission, then I will open a portal and bring you somewhere. If you promise that you will never do it again, then I can allow you to fight here and tame the monsters that will being,¡± I asked the Tamer.


    ¡°I promise. I won¡¯t do anything that harm our friends anymore and I will ask for permission next time I¡¯m trying to tame any monsters in the alliance,¡± the tamer said.


    Then I looked at the centaur leader who was tamed by the summoner to see if the tamer speak the truth or there¡¯s still some doubt in his words.


    ¡°It¡¯s the truth. There¡¯s no doubt at all in his words,¡± the centaur said.


    ¡°Good. Then you can tame as many monsters as you want. Sunsses, let¡¯s do it!¡±


    ¡°Alright. Everyone is still seem tired because of Andro¡¯s intimidation. So I want you to help as well,¡± Sunsses asked for my help. Which I agree to do it willingly.


    For now, thanks to the previous two groups got defeated by us, we have a bit of time before the next and probably thest waveing.


    And finally, after about thirty minutes of waiting, they finally arrive.


    ¡°...They came from every direction. From the left, right, front, back, above, and below. Don¡¯t worry about the monsters at the front since Andro will use his breath attack to kill them all. We only need to focus on the rest,¡± I said.


    Being surrounded from all directions, even from above and below, means that we will have to be split up. But it¡¯s fine. I¡¯m confident that we can protect Kron without any casualties.

 Chapter 827 - 827 Finally Reached Master Level

    827 Finally Reached Master Level


    ¡°So the n is for Roy and Ang to take the enemies below. And above will be Spot and his children. The front will mostly taken care of by Andro. But some of the monsters might pass him by. Randy¡¯s group will take care of them. As for the rest, Ka¡¯s group, Candy¡¯s group, and the monsters, will take care of the monsters from the side and the back. There¡¯s no more need to hold your strength since Kron is supposed to breakthrough soon. Just go all out,¡± Sunsses said.


    Everyone has slightly recovered after they felt Andro¡¯s intimidation. So they will fight.


    I wonder if Andro¡¯s intimidation triggered Kron to reach master level sooner. If so, then I think for other people to reach master level, they need to do it here.


    Though it¡¯s just a guess. But if it¡¯s true, that would be great.


    Maybe for the next wind mage who will attempt to reach master level, I¡¯ll ask Andro to use that intimidation soon after the one making an attempt started meditating.


    If my guess is correct, then we can get more master level mage faster. But I¡¯ll ask Kron himself if his stage is already solid or not because of Andro¡¯s intimidation. Because if it¡¯s not, then it¡¯s better to not do it in the future. And doing it on Andro¡¯s back will be a bad idea.


    But if it¡¯s true, it could also means that the more dangerous the situation is, the faster that the mages can breakthrough to master level. Maybe putting someone in danger is the right answer.


    Though for that, we just need Andro to use his intimidation. Or maybe me since I have learned to focus my intimidation only on one target. While Andro just used his intimidation on everywhere in his surrounding.


    In any case, what we need to do now is to protect Kron. He should be able to reach master level within thirty minutes more or less. And after that, there wil still be monstersing.


    .....


    Though it¡¯s good for everyone to gain some experience, they have been fighting for a week already. Maybe I¡¯ll return the all home first before I kill the rest of the monsters myself.


    Ang rode on Ray¡¯s back with me after we jumped down from Andro¡¯s back. Seems like Sunsses know that Ang is best staying with anyone who can handle how strong she is.


    Though I wonder why I didn¡¯t get picked to take care of the enemies above. I think Spot and his children is better to fight below Andro since they can also fly as fast as possible to help our allies who are falling to the ocean.


    ¡°I think it¡¯s because of your Divine Vision. With your eyes, you can see if there are anyone who is falling. Also, for those above, it will be hard for them to detect any enemies from below simply because Andro is too big. It even need a few seconds of free falling for someone from Andro¡¯s back to reach the bottom of his foot. That¡¯s how big he is. And you can handle anyone fast enough. Even if you can¡¯t reach them in time with Ray, you have portal,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°I see. I guess Sunsses has thought about it. And we also have to protect Andro¡¯s belly from any attack as well. While the monsters above will focus more on Kron. Oh, right. I need to tell Andro that he is free to fly a bit faster as long as the flight is stable,¡± I said.


    I took out my phone and called Andro to tell him that he can fly a bit faster. With this, it will be hard for monsters from behind to catch up.


    I also told Sunsses to not let anyone fly too far because too many of them are slower than Andro. But if it¡¯s Ray, Ang, Spot, and his children, they can catch up quickly.


    I guess that¡¯s why Sunsses told us to fight those above and below.


    Andro picked up some pace as the monsters are trying to catch up to him. I can also see that Andro is breathing in a lot of air. He¡¯s going to use his breath attack.


    Even without using Divine Vision, I can see the destruction caused by Andro¡¯s breath. Good thing I told him to never get his head looking toward where the Monsters Vige is. Or we won¡¯t know when the vige is gone all of a sudden.


    ¡°Well, the monsters are closing in. Ang, let¡¯s go!¡±


    Ang who was sitting behind me jumped from Ray¡¯s back and flies on her own. As for me, I will continue fighting while still on riding on Ray. It¡¯s faster this way.


    The battle under Andro¡¯s belly started. With a lot of magic used by Ang. Even a simple Fireball from her is enough to destroy a wyvern¡¯s wing now. So she just used as many small magic as possible. She¡¯s not fighting like how she fought with Spot and the others before.


    I guess the number is just too much for her to go all out right away. So she will reserve some mana before even stronger monsters approaching.


    I also fought with my Reizpear. Using the Twisted Spear technique fused with my Aura as an Aura Master, I pierced through a lot of enemies. A lot of them are falling to the ocean. But there are still a lot of them left.


    I also don¡¯t want to spend too much power using Aura like this too many times. So I fought them normally instead of using powerful technique like before.


    ¡°You¡¯re using Reizpear like ance now?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s simple. I just need to aim the spear forward, and when I see the target, I¡¯ll just thrust to their vitals and pull it back. It¡¯s easy and simple. And I don¡¯t need to waste a lot of times since Ray will continue going for the next enemy,¡± I said.


    While saying that, I killed five monsters already. This make it so easy.


    ¡°I am the second best stabber in the world!¡± I shouted.


    ¡°Second? Why not the first?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m not a tailor!¡±


    Obviously, being a tailor means that they have to stab a needle over and over again. And no matter how much I train, I don¡¯t think I can surpass how many times any tailor has pierced their needle through a piece of cloth.


    We don¡¯t know how long we have been fighting. Maybe thirty minutes as we estimated before, or maybe much longer than that. We don¡¯t care. We just need to make sure that Kron can reach master level safely.


    And all of a sudden, we all feel something happening on Andro¡¯s back. We can feel the change in the mana before it finally stopped fluctuating.


    Ang, Ray, Victoria, and I, and even the monsters, are all looking up to where the source of it. When the change of the mana in the surrounding suddenly stopped. All of us just look up from under Andro¡¯s back.


    ¡°He finally did it. We finally have an extra master level mage. And his name is Kron,¡± I said.


    ¡°Finally! Now, what should we do?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Still the same as before. Kill all the monsters that we see! Even if he has reached master level, the monsters won¡¯t stoping for a while,¡± I said.


    I looked at Ang who is still stopping mid-air instead of continuing the fight.


    ¡°Ang, you can go up there now. I¡¯ll take care of things here. I¡¯m sure you¡¯re curious to see Kron, right? And you must have a lot of questions to him. Leave everything here to me. I¡¯ll take care of them all before Ie up,¡± I said.


    Ang then nodded before she flies on her own to where Kron is. I don¡¯t think Kron is ready to fight yet. He should be adjusting the new level and his body. because his strength should be the same as other master level mages by now. So he needs to be careful just to move around.


    ¡°Then you can run on your own. I¡¯ll fight with Ray¡¯s help,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Okay.¡±


    Then we split up. Victoria and Ray on one side, and I¡¯m on another side.


    Now that Kron has safely reached master level, there¡¯s no more need for us to hold back. So I used powerful techniques to defeat dozens of them at once.


    In a few minutes, there¡¯s no more monsters for us to fight. So I opened a portal to someone on Andro¡¯s back so we can get there right away.


    I can see that Kron is getting some guidance from other master level mages to adapt to his new strength. His physical strength and magic strength.


    ¡°There are still monstersing. How about you test it on them?¡± Sunsses suggested.


    And so, everyone stopped to see how strong Kron is. Except for the tamer who is still taming monsters that areing. We killed a lot of his tamed monsters after all.


    Then there are other monsters who don¡¯t care about Kron reaching master level. They just want to fight.


    As for Spot and his children, they are still above us in the sky. I guess I¡¯ll take care of the rest of the monsters then. The ones on the opposite side of where Kron will be going.

 Chapter 828 - 828 Time to Go Home

    828 Time to Go Home


    ¡°Kron, which way will you go? I¡¯ll take the other side,¡± I asked Kron.


    Ha had just reached master level and he¡¯s going to fight the monsters to adapt with his new strength.


    And when he¡¯s going to fight the enemies on one side, I will take care of the other side. Because everyone is still there wishing to see how powerful a master level mage is. A real master level mage who also learned magic control.


    So unlike other master level mages we managed to recruit, everyone¡¯s expectation of Kron¡¯s strength is that he¡¯s much stronger than ordinary master level mages. It¡¯s even to the point that the master level mages here are interested in seeing how strong Kron is.


    As for me, I experienced it firsthand. Not just master level mage. But it was an Aura Master and a mage who has reached the stage beyond master level. Timmy.


    I know how strong he is. And even without learning magic control, he could be that strong. So I don¡¯t think Kron¡¯s magic will be stronger than Timmy even if their elements are different.


    I¡¯m a bit curious, but there¡¯s something I need to do first. To take care of the monsters. And it¡¯s not like I have to see how strong he is.


    I don¡¯t care how strong he is. I just want to know if he¡¯s stronger than the cult¡¯s strongest mage. So even if he used powerful magic, much stronger than he could use previously, I still wish him to get stronger. Strong enough to defeat the organization who will destroy the world.


    So unless someone finally reached the stage beyond master level, then there¡¯s no need for me to be watching them unless it¡¯s necessary. What I know is that we have someone powerful now.


    .....


    ¡°I¡¯ll go to the right side of Andro. Spot and... are those his children? They are above, right? And you just came up from below. So It¡¯s either right side or the left. I¡¯ll pick the right,¡± Kron said.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll pick the left side after I tell Andro that he can fly freely now,¡± I said.


    Then I opened a portal to Andro¡¯s head and told him that Kron has reached master level.


    ¡°Hey, Andro. Thanks for the ride. Kron has finally reached master level,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s good, right? I just don¡¯t want anyone to mess with me like before. As long as you remind your friends to not try to harm me or make a contract with me, feel free to call me for help. I know that at least there are several other people among you who will breakthrough on my back again. When that happens, just contact me first before they can start breaking through. Or I might get disturbed by something on my back and do barrel roll,¡± Andro said.


    Barrel roll is something that Victoria taught Andro. It¡¯s some kind of air maneuver for something called a ne from her world. Or it¡¯s a winged vehicle that can fly.


    And she taught it to Andro. And ever since then, Andro would do it once in a while. Especially when there¡¯s something on his back that annoy him greatly.


    It¡¯s good to get rid of monstersnding on his back. They will have to fall and have to fly on their own.


    But if Andro do a Barrel Roll while everyone is on his back like right now, then they all will fall. And if Andro did it fast enough and get to below those who are falling, everyone might hit his back again as he returned to his original position. It¡¯s because he¡¯s too big. And then everyone might die from the damage.


    Though now that almost everyone has flying horses, it should be fine. But if those horses are too slow, it will be toote if such things happened.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s that. Now you are free to fly anywhere you want. I will take care of the monstersing before we leave,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. Once everyone leaves, just tell me so that I can do a Barrel Roll,¡± Andro said.


    ...It seems like he loves doing a Barrel Roll. Not because it removes everything attached on his back, but he just loves flying like that.


    Well, as long as he enjoys it, that¡¯s fine with me.


    I fly with Ray to where the monsters are and started killing them one by one. They are not organized and it¡¯s easy to kill them. And I don¡¯t want to use too much Aura to kill them. Stabbing them with ance is better.


    I didn¡¯t just stab thence. I also practiced properly. After all, this is a weapon that I have never used before. Though it is simr to a spear.


    So, I tried using it with my right hand, left hand, swing it, and even throwing it. Though I think transforming Victnce to something else before swinging it or throwing it is better. But it¡¯snce training after all.


    Lance and horse-riding. I never thought that there¡¯s a deadlybination like that. Though it has an obvious weakness. Which is that it¡¯s weak against an attack from behind.


    But that can be taken care of if the horse is fast enough to not get caught up with an attack from behind.


    And I even tested how I can fight with twonces on both hands. Not ance and a shield, butnces on both hands.


    ¡°You are weird. But it works against multiple enemies because you¡¯re a powerful Aura Master,¡± Victoriamented about how I used twonces.


    ¡°Right. Well, I think if it¡¯s me or any other Aura users in the past, they can just use any kind of weapons while riding a horse or other mount. Because we can simply attack from distance with a swing of any weapon,¡± I said.


    Maybe in Victoria¡¯s era, or even long before that, there are many Aura users who fought while riding on horses. Though they have all died. So I guess I will not be able to find the truth for that. Not that I care.


    I killed all the monsters here. But seems like Kron has finished taking care of the rest of the monsters on the other side as he came here afterward.


    ¡°You¡¯re slow, Roy!¡±


    Reaching master level in his wind element, his flying speed is much faster than before. I wonder if he¡¯s faster than Ray or not.


    ¡°Have you checked above? I think Spot and his children are still there,¡± I said while pointing up to the sky. Though we¡¯re in the sky already.


    ¡°Yeah, I¡¯ll go there right now. I think I will ask Spot for a spar after this. The others are waiting. Why don¡¯t you return them all first?¡±


    Kron didn¡¯t challenge me but Spot instead? Well, that¡¯s fine with me. I don¡¯t need to fight him then. And since he didn¡¯t ask me, I won¡¯t watch their fight as well.


    ¡°Have you adjusted to your strength yet?¡± I asked.


    ¡°A bit. Even my ice element is now stronger than before while it¡¯s still in expert level. As for wind, well, I think I¡¯m already stronger than other master level wind mages who joined our alliance. Though it won¡¯t be for long, I guess. I know my limit. I¡¯m sure that the others will be stronger than me. But for now, I¡¯ll enjoy being the strongest mage we have,¡± Kron said as he flies to the sky. To where Spot¡¯s children are fighting other monsters.


    I think it will be over soon. So I returned back to where the others are. Then I transported the monsters back to Monsters Vige. As for the humans, they said that they¡¯re going to wait for Kron to returns.


    ¡°He said that he¡¯s going to challenge Spot. Maybe they¡¯re fighting right now already,¡± I said.


    As soon as I said that, Kron and the serpent familye over. I guess they will fight after resting a bit.


    ¡°Roy, he said that he¡¯s challenging me. Where should we fight?¡± Spot asked.


    ¡°Wherever you want. You both can fly, so I¡¯m sure you don¡¯t want to fight in a restricted location, right? Or is there any other requirement that you want?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m going to show my children how strong I am. But I¡¯m worried that someone will be injured. So I want you to get as many angels as possible just in case,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°Then stay close to the Monsters Vige and you two can fight tomorrow after you both rested enough. Go to the sea where you raced Ray before and fight in the sky near there or to the in close to the vige. Bring as many angels as you want. Also, some other monsters might want to watch. So maybe get them to ride on your children¡¯s back so they can watch together. That would be great,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. I guess you don¡¯t want to watch. Then take us to Monsters Vige now,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°What about you, Kron? Will you stay in Monsters Vige?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Hmm... I¡¯m hungry. I¡¯ll return to Cassau then. How long has it been?¡± Kron asked.


    ¡°A week,¡± I replied.


    ¡°No wonder I¡¯m starving. I¡¯ll fight tomorrow, the summoner can take me to Monsters Vige tomorrow,¡± Kron said.


    It seems like the summoner wanted toe and watch. I guess that means I don¡¯t have to bring them there myself. That¡¯s good.


    And so, after I brought everyone back, I returned to the circus. I hope after watching how powerful Kron has be, the others will focus on getting even stronger.

 Chapter 829 - 829 The Second Master Level Mage

    829 The Second Master Level Mage


    The day after Kron reached master level, I¡¯m still with the circus. I didn¡¯t bring Kron and the others back to Monsters Vige for Kron¡¯s battle against Spot. It¡¯s because there is already someone else to bring them there. The Centaur Summoner.


    After Kron reached master level, I brought everyone back to Cassau. Just the humans. Not the monsters.


    As for the monsters, I brought them all back to Monsters Vige. Except for Andro who is too big.


    All the monsters, including the monsters that the Tamer during the time we were protecting Kron, were all brought to Monsters Vige. He managed to tame quite a lot of monsters even after the vampires killed all his tamed monsters. He¡¯s quite good.


    Those tamed monsters were not that smart. They can¡¯tmunicate with humans, and they only move instinctively. But now that they have been tamed, they will obey Tamer¡¯s order to not attack other monsters and just hunt their own food near the Monsters Vige.


    Even if they do attack other monsters, they will be the one to die. They are not that strong anyway. Just stronger than average flying monsters. Butpared to the other residents of the vige, they are much weaker.


    Though if they aimed for the centaurs who can¡¯t fight their enemies from long distance, then they can still win with hit and run tactic.


    Anyway, even though it¡¯s time for Kron to fight Spot, I didn¡¯t bring them to Monsters Vige. And it¡¯s the Summoner who will transport them.


    He might have just only one familiar. The leader of the centaurs. But that centaur is in Monsters Vige, so it¡¯s easy for the Summoner to go there right away bringing everyone who wants to watch.


    .....


    And after the battle is over, the Summoner can bring everyone back to Cassau. If they need someone to bring them to another location, then they can ask meter.


    I¡¯m not interested in seeing a match. It happened too many times that I got bored of it. I don¡¯t want to watch


    Gaining experience by watching the fight? That might be the case for other people. But I¡¯m an air mage and a summoner. I¡¯m also an Aura user.


    As a summoner, I just need to get my familiars to fight. It¡¯s easy.


    As an air mage, I¡¯m the one who invented how to use air magic during a battle. I¡¯m in the position of teaching others in air element instead of being taught. Even if Sara is the one fighting, I don¡¯t think she can teach me anything.


    As an Aura user, well, I¡¯m the only Aura user in the world. I can get some guidance and instruction from Victoria or Sonia who were Aura users back when they were still humans. But now, I¡¯m already an Aura Master. I¡¯m far stronger than they were. So unless I¡¯m the one fighting, it¡¯s difficult for me to grow stronger just by watching.


    Summoner, air mage, and an Aura Master. With all those three things that I need to improve, I¡¯m in the position to teach others with how much I know about each of those thing. And there¡¯s no one else who can teach me any of those.


    Maybe I can ask Victoria to tell me more about her knowledge from her world. But in the end, I will still be the one whobined those knowledge with practice.


    And so, there¡¯s no point in me watching a match knowing that I can¡¯t get stronger by watching it.


    Is it arrogant for me to think that way? Maybe. But it¡¯s the truth.


    I wasn¡¯t like this in my past life. I would try many things that interest me. Even watching a street fight was interesting to me back then.


    But I guess it¡¯s because I have a clear goal in my mind now that I¡¯m different. I want the cult to be gone. And until they are gone, I don¡¯t think I can enjoy other things as much as I enjoyed them in my past life.


    I do still enjoy many things. But those are less enjoyable now than in my past life.


    I guess because I have many things that I liked, when I was killed by the cult and returned back to the past, the only thing I can think of is revenge. So I enjoyed other things less than before.


    But I still have many things that I enjoy more now than in my past life. Like the fact that I have a harem of beautiful girls. Woo-hoo!


    And most of the girls are now watching another man fighting a serpent. Though I¡¯m not jealous.


    Maybe after everything is over, I can start enjoying other things again. Though one thing is true is that I love circus in both my past life and present life. That¡¯s why I never got bored of it.


    And now, the circus is still in the middle of a travel. And I¡¯m also practicing new tricks to perform. If possible, it needs to be a trick that anyone can do, without Victoria¡¯s shapeshifting ability to help, without magic, and without Aura. Just by my own physical ability. But it can¡¯t be to the point that only I can do it.


    And I practiced with the other clowns. It is a fun day today.


    Later in the evening, I heard that the battle is over with Spot¡¯s victory. That was to be expected to be honest.


    Kron had just adapting to his new power. And Spot has grown much stronger than when I first met him.


    We can¡¯t tell how strong a monster¡¯s level is, so it¡¯s difficult to guess. But when they grow stronger, they improved their abilities greatly.


    From what I heard, Spot is still faster and stronger. So the only way for Kron to win is if his use of his magic is better.


    Kron must have improved a lot. But he still lost against Spot. I believe no one will think that reaching master level is not that great. Instead, they will think that Spot is too strong even for master level mages. Especially for Kron.


    I bet Kron is now thinking of a new way to use his new power. Maybe he will try improving his ice element to master level as well.


    As for the others, they should be thinking the same way. If they don¡¯t, then they shouldn¡¯t get involved with the war anymore.


    Spot even called me and said that his children is so proud of him after watching him won against Kron. And that only make them more motivated to get even stronger.


    ¡°The next time we meet, I¡¯m confident that we can defeat the Kraken,¡± Spot said before he hung up.


    I hope so. They are growing stronger as well.


    And so, I resumed the circus tour with everyone. From what I can see, it looks like everyone here other than Thomas is improving their magic as well. I¡¯m sure it¡¯s because they heard the news of Kron reaching master level. Just one person reaching that level and everyone be more motivated.


    By the time the tour is over, I hope there will be at least one other person who can reach master level. I hope it will be Ang, but it seems like from our original group, she will be thest one to reach master level knowing that she¡¯s getting all her elements to improve at once.


    ¡°Thomas, when will we reach the next city?¡± I asked Thomas.


    ¡°I think we¡¯ll get there in four days,¡± Thomas said.


    ¡°Do you want me to get you there sooner?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No need. We¡¯re already faster than usual with this pace. Are you in a hurry?¡± Thomas asked.


    ¡°No. I just thought that maybe I should return back home once in a while and go on a date. Then, I¡¯ll be back in four days. If you need anything, just call me,¡± I said.


    Yeah. Everyone is busy with training and get stronger or smarter. But it¡¯s not like they can¡¯t enjoy life. So let¡¯s go on a date with them.


    Where to go? Just in Cassau, go to Varadis, Arturo, Consenza, or other smaller kingdoms they have never been to? Or to Monsters World?


    Just enjoying life. To make sure that even after we reach the goal, there¡¯s something we can look forward to. It will still take a long time for us to finally be able to destroy the cult. But that doesn¡¯t mean they can focus on just destroying the cult.


    And so, I spent many days rxing with the girls. I even brought them to watch the circus. And when someone ask me for a spar, I will entertain them.


    Before long, two months has passed already. And the tour is over without any incident in Consenza and Tatrama.


    Thomas meet up with Sandra in Cassau as they will stay here for a while. The cksmith is busy making more armors, weapons, and teaching his apprentices.


    And I got a challenge from our second person who has reached master level in this two months other than Kron. Wendy.

 Chapter 830 - 830 Sparring with Wendy

    830 Sparring with Wendy


    Wendy. My first crush. My former teacher. But nowadays, we¡¯re treating each other like friends andpanion during battle.


    To be honest, I still love her. But I don¡¯t think it¡¯s something romantic now that I have girlfriends. It was just admiration for her beauty and intellect. But the young me will still think that she was my first crush.


    She is still a precious someone for me. She has helped us in many ways in the fight against the cult. But now, we¡¯re not going out.


    I¡¯m sure that I will be happier if she bes my girlfriend. But I¡¯m also sure that if there¡¯s any beautiful girl is added as a new member in my harem, I will be happier. Which is why I don¡¯t think that she will be happy if I ask her to be my girlfriend.


    Though if she¡¯s one of the girl who is actually interested in me ording to Victoria¡¯s and Ka¡¯s observation, then that would be great. But I won¡¯t say or do anything about it until Wendy said it herself.


    She¡¯s doing her best as not only our mage in battle, but also as a teacher. She¡¯s still teaching in college. In fact, she has been invited to other universities in the four big countries in this continent to give lectures about wind magic and fire magic.


    She can then do two of her jobs. Teaching, and investigating as agents. She brought other agents as her helper. And they will conduct investigation somewhere Wendy can¡¯t go because she gained some kind of fame in education for her interesting way of teaching a bit of magic control for fire element and wind element.


    No, she didn¡¯t tell everything she knows about those two elements. Those are still things that we¡¯re afraid will be abused by the cult if they learned how to do it. She just gave lectures on how to do it slightly.


    With her busy schedule, I could never imagine that she would be the second one among our group to reach master level.


    .....


    When I say about our group, it doesn¡¯t include Sunsses, the monsters, and other master level mages. It¡¯s us who have been so close for a long time already.


    It¡¯s me, Ang, Ka, Sophie, Candy, Wendy, Lina, Kron, Victoria, Sonia, Veronica, Celestine, Jewel, and Shirley. Though Sophie and Lina shouldn¡¯t be included in battle.


    And there¡¯s also Hannah. But even after she became advanced level mage, I still think of her as a kid. So I didn¡¯t really consider her as part of the group. Sorry.


    There are also other people we know well for a long time already other than the kings. But they rarely join us because they rather focus on their own country. So I just called us the usual group.


    Anyway, I never expected that it would be Wendy who will reach master level first. I thought that it would be Shirley. Because even if they¡¯re both busy, I always thought that Shirley has more free time to cultivate. And she¡¯s even the one with Breezy right now. A wind spirit that helped wind mages to improve at a much faster rate. So I really thought that it would be Shirley who called me first saying that she would attempt to breakthrough.


    But no. It was Wendy who called me. And the process took just three days for her to reach master level. She¡¯s faster at getting there than Kron.


    Just like Kron, she did it on Andro¡¯s back. There were a lot of monsters like usual, but protecting Wendy wasn¡¯t a problem for us. In fact, I only get the monsters to protect her while I came by once in a while.


    And so, Wendy reached master level safely. In her wind element. As for fire element, I think it will still be a while until she get there.


    After a few days of adjusting with her new power, she called me and challenged me for a fight.


    ¡°Sure. I¡¯ll do it.¡±


    That¡¯s my answer after she knocked into my room to challenge me. The tour is over and now we¡¯re waiting for the investigation on the inds to be over. And everyone is trying to improve their strength.


    I let Airy stay with Sara because I think she can reach master level sooner than I could. In fact, I still don¡¯t expect that I can reach that level. So I just lent Airy to her. Though I made sure that Sara will buy Airy a lot of desserts. Airy loves sweets after all.


    I think I heard a rumor of a sweet loving noble recently. It could be Sara.


    Well, with how much Airy loves sweets, I think it¡¯s normal to think that way. And since she can¡¯t be seen, it would be Sara who ended up being thought as the one who buy them for herself.


    She¡¯s a noble now, right? I guess she will have to get married with someone soon and leave a heir. I hope she won¡¯t get too busy teaching the students so she can find a good partner.


    After our preparation, I transferred Wendy to Monsters World for our spar. The fight will be in an open area near the Monsters Vige. Where the Summoner and the centaur were dueling before.


    It¡¯s a vast area. Though we both can fly, so the battle might take ce in the sky more.


    What I need to be careful is that she¡¯s also an expert level fire mage. She can use her wind magic to improve the power of her fire and make it bigger. Though for heat, I don¡¯t think I have met anyone with hotter fire than the cksmith. He¡¯s great in increasing heat.


    ¡°Roy, are you ready?¡± Wendy asked.


    Right now, we¡¯re being surrounded by monsters. Not enemy monsters. But monsters from the vige under me. They are interested in watching a fight as usual. Though I don¡¯t know if they can keep up or not.


    As for the humans, they are focusing more in improving their strength rather than seeing someone else fighting. So none of them are here watching. I guess they are bored to keep watching someone else fighting. They would rather be in a fight instead.


    ¡°I¡¯m ready.¡±


    I have Victorifle in my hand. To show her that I won¡¯t use other weapon. But well, this is just a feint. Victoria can change into any shape after all.


    It¡¯s just precaution. Wendy is a wind mage, so she can easily gain some distance as soon as the fight started. I might be able to catch up with her, but it¡¯s best if I can hit her from distance.


    And using long distance sh attack is useless. Because it¡¯s obvious where I will attack. Wendy just need to focus on where I¡¯m shing and dodge it.


    Shooting a bullet is faster. So I¡¯ll use a rifle instead.


    As soon as the match started, Wendy didn¡¯t choose to gain some distance. But instead, she rushed forward as I aimed the rifle at her.


    Well, I shot at her anyway. And she used wind magic to block it and push the bullet away. She knows that if the bullet is too close to her, the sleeping gas inside the bullet will affect her no matter how slightly the effect is.


    Then I changed into a spear as she got closer while dodging her attack. Only then she gained some distance.


    I see. She¡¯s looking for a certain distance where it¡¯s too far for my melee attack, but too close for a long-range attack.


    ¡°That strategy won¡¯t work on me, you know?¡±


    So, instead of using melee weapons, I transformed Victoria and some Blobbies into two guns. Now I¡¯m wielding dual guns. One on my right, and another on my left.


    ¡°I can just use a gun as melee weapon as well,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Fuck. I forgot about it,¡± Wendy said before she flies to the sky.


    So I run up after her while shooting at her. She¡¯s so fast. But my reaction speed is faster.


    In a short distance, I¡¯m faster than her. But after a few more meters, she gains more distance from me.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll just attack you while moving around!¡± Wendy said.


    Yup. That¡¯s a problem for me. But as long as she doesn¡¯t use powerful magic, I can endure anything thrown at me.


    I didn¡¯t wear the magic armor or I will rely on it too much. And this is a spar to improve my skill.


    In the future, I¡¯m sure there will be many opponents who will do what Wendy is doing now. If they are any slower than Wendy, then I can catch up to them easily. But some might actually by faster than Wendy.


    I can get Ray¡¯s help then. But what if there¡¯s some reason why I can¡¯t summon a familiar with me in future battle? Then Ray won¡¯t be of help.


    This is why I¡¯d rather be in a fight than watching it. This way, I can improve.


    Now, should I find a way to attack Wendy, or should I waste her mana?


    Since this is training, I should find a way to attack Wendy instead of being passive.


    ¡°Well, the real fight starts from now. Let¡¯s enjoy ourselves!¡±

 Chapter 831 - 831 My Victory is Obvious

    831 My Victory is Obvious


    Training usually meant that one needed to do it in order to surpass the limit. But That is not the only thing a training can do. Or in this case, it¡¯s sparring.


    Instead of fighting until one find their own limit then surpass it, what if there¡¯s another meaning of training? For example looking for something that they can do, but they don¡¯t know yet if they can do it? Learning another strategy? Finding the opponent¡¯s weakness?


    For some, it might not be considered as getting stronger. But what¡¯s the goal of getting stronger? Isn¡¯t it so that one can overpower their opponent?


    Whether it¡¯s to kill someone, to protect someone, because they enjoyed it, or many other reasons, the purpose of getting stronger is always the same. To overpower one¡¯s opponent.


    For me, I have a lot of problems in training. It¡¯s because I¡¯m not really specialized in one weapon. So I tried my best in various weapons and how quickly I can change my weapons. Either by getting Victoria¡¯s ability to shapeshift into another weapons in my hand, or to swap a weapon already in my hand with another weapon.


    Even if I can¡¯t be as good as the Aura users in the past in their specialized weapon, if it¡¯s in the past, I should be at least the best in using various weapons.


    Just because I use any kind of weapons, that doesn¡¯t mean that I¡¯m what they call as jack of all trades, master of none. Well I might not be a master of something. But at least I could be expert in all trades.


    Doesn¡¯t that make me the master of various weapons? Maybe. Though I think if I fight an Aura user in the past specialized in just one weapon, and I limit myself to fight that Aura user with that same weapon, I will still lose. But if I¡¯m allowed to use various weapons, I can have various strategy and winning is not impossible.


    Anyway, what I¡¯m talking about is that training doesn¡¯t mean that one must surpass the limit. It also means that I can learn something else I can do within that certain limit.


    .....


    That¡¯s why for this match against Wendy after she reached master level, I limited myself to not use my familiars other than Victoria. Because Victoria is the only one who will always be with me. Even if she doesn¡¯t, I will always have loads of Blobbies I can transform into anything I want.


    I always feel that I have more things I can do now that I have be an Aura Master. That¡¯s why for a match like this one, I want to find out what else I can do.


    We are fighting in the sky. With several monsters trying to follow us. I told them before the match that they have to keep their distance because wind mage¡¯s attacks are mostly targeted for arge area. And they can get hurt just because they want to watch.


    Well, since I have told them about it, they should be careful while we¡¯re both trying our best.


    For eleration to reach the highest speed, I am better than Wendy. But Wendy¡¯s top speed is higher than mine, so once she reached her fastest speed, it¡¯s difficult for me to catch up to her. And using two guns, she can block the bullet approaching her easily. And not just that, she blow the bullets far away from her because she thought that she might end up inhaling the gas that I hid inside the bullet.


    I guess this is how a fight between two sides who knows well about each other. But this also mean that I can figure out more about my weakness. And I can show her what weaknesses she has.


    ¡°Roy, when you swing your sword, as long as your opponent can see your sword movement, they can dodge it easily.¡±


    Wendy said that after she dodged my sh from distance easily. She¡¯s right. Most of the opponents I have faced are those who can¡¯t even see my sword movement even if they are master level mages.


    If the opponent is around Wendy¡¯s level, then my long distance attack will be useless. Or that I have to surpass my limit. But the goal today is to find out more about my weakness that I need to cover.


    ¡°Thanks for mentioning. I know that as well. But don¡¯t you think that it won¡¯t do you any good if you tell me in the middle of a fight?¡± I asked.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. As long as you can¡¯t catch up to me, I won¡¯t lose,¡± Wendy said confidently.


    I still think that there¡¯s a way to beat her without breaking my limit though. I mean my stamina is obviously higher than her. As for mana, even if mine is lower than her, it¡¯s not like I kept using mana all the time.


    If Ipare it, how long I can use Aura is already much longer than how long a master level mage can use magic continuously. So if it¡¯s just a long fight, I will still win.


    Her hope is only if she can hit me with magic from far. But because we¡¯re both quite far away from each other, I can also see her magic from this distance. So I can avoid it.


    Except that her magic has bigger area than my sh. So I need to get far away from her magic. Unlike Wendy who just need to move slightly to avoid my sh.


    Should I make my sh bigger? But if I do, it ended up bing slower.


    Maybe I need to focus on just making my sh smaller and faster, or bigger but didn¡¯t drop its speed.


    When I do that, Wendy had more trouble avoiding my attack. But she still managed to escape and started attacking me again from distance. At least it¡¯s better than when I used guns.


    ¡°How about this?¡±


    Then, Wendy used her strong magic. Creating powerful hurricane that even pushed me.


    Well, I¡¯m in the air, so just a little bit of wind can push me. But this is a hurricane. And I¡¯m far from getting the ground. I don¡¯t have anything to step on except the air. But that¡¯s still difficult.


    Her wind is so strong that even I have problem moving my body in the air. I¡¯m an Aura Master, you know? My physical abilities should be surpassing that of anyone. But I still can¡¯t move my body freely.


    If I use my Aura to the fullest, I can escape from this hurricane. In fact, that should be what I¡¯m after since Wendy started to create a fire. Now it became a fire storm.


    Still, I didn¡¯t use Aura to escape from the fire storm. I just let my body follow the wind as I get blown by the hurricane around with Wendy at the center.


    If I can use the wind created by the wind mage to get close to the enemy, then that¡¯s what I should do. As for the fire, I¡¯ll just protect myself with Aura and use air magic so that even the air that bes the wind are not something that are mmable. This should save me for a few second.


    And I can use that few seconds to use Aura for an instant to reach where Wendy is and hit her. This could be another way for me to fight wind mages in the future.


    ¡°You lose!¡±


    Oh, wait. The wind is too strong that she can¡¯t hear me. Well, that¡¯s fine.


    As I get closer to her, she instantly created a barrier made of wind and fire in panic. But that¡¯s not a problem for me.


    I just covered my arms with Aura and pushed through the barrier. Just one arm holding a gun entered her barrier and aimed directly at her head.


    I can see her expression changed. Afraid of getting hit directly. And I quickly transformed the Blobbygun into just one small marble ball filled with a calming gas.


    Then I flicked the marble into her mouth. Erasing the Blobby as soon as it enters her mouth so the calming gas will take effect in since it will enter her lung right away.


    The winner is decided. Although none of us were harmed, it¡¯s obvious who is the winner. Because if I decided to use the gun and not flicking a marble into her mouth, she could die. And she knows.


    Maybe it¡¯s the effect of calming gas. Or maybe it¡¯s because Wendy has epted her lost. But the fire storm stopped.


    ¡°You won, Roy,¡± Wendy said as I was free falling to the ground.


    ¡°Well, at least we both know more about each other¡¯s weaknesses that we need to improve. That¡¯s what¡¯s important in a training,¡± I said.


    Since there¡¯s no more fire storm, she can hear me just fine even while I was falling.


    I just need tond on the ground. This height is not a problem for me.


    But instead, Wendy grabbed me and carried me like a princess as she helped me descending to the ground.


    ¡°...You don¡¯t need to do this, you know?¡± I said.


    ¡°Are you embarrassed that your first love is carrying you like a princess?¡± Wendy teased.


    ¡°Now the embarrassment is doubled. Fuck you. Let¡¯s go home.¡±


    Yeah, I forgot that she knows that she¡¯s my first love. This is getting more embarrassing even if it¡¯s my second chance in life. Good thing there are only monsters watching us.

 Chapter 832 - 832 At the Artificial Mountain

    832 At the Artificial Mountain


    ¡°...Before we return home, can we have a talk?¡±


    While Wendy is carrying me, she asked me to have a talk first. Is this her real reason in asking me for a spar? What is she going to talk about me?


    ¡°Sure. But is that the reason you¡¯re still carrying me? You can let me down now, you know. And if you don¡¯t want to fly by yourself, we can both ride on Ray¡¯s back,¡± I said.


    ¡°Nah, let¡¯s go like this. I saw a good ce I want to go when I was fighting you,¡± Wendy said.


    ¡°Should I leave?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°You cane as well,¡± Wendy replied.


    Yeah. But I¡¯m not fine with being carried like this. Though there are only monsters watching us. And neither of us needed healing, so no angels will approach us.


    If there is someone else here, this would be extremely embarrassing. Especially since I¡¯m perfectly healthy. Though I can just pretend that I¡¯m injured or something if someone is watching. But that will only make them worry. What kind of power can injure someone like me? Everyone would be curious.


    Then I informed Graham and Shelia to tell the others that the match is over. They can do whatever they want now and they don¡¯t need to follow us.


    .....


    And so, Wendy is flying while still carrying me in her arms. Where are we going? Oh, it seems like we will go to that artificial mountain that we made in the past.


    Thendscape didn¡¯t change much. But this is still an amazing ce.


    This was the result of many expert level mages working together. Though I think some of us were still advanced level mages at the time. But I think even if the level didn¡¯t change from before, the same group can make this artificial mountain even better than back then.


    And what about master level mage? Just one earth mage should be enough to create this mountain alone. That¡¯s how strong they are.


    And so, Wendynded on the mountain. Right next to theke that bes the source of water for the vige. It¡¯s kind of crazy as well that we built a river from here all the way to the vige.


    ¡°This is where you want to go?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. This is something that we were working together to built. It¡¯s amazing what magic can do. And it¡¯s scary as well knowing that magic is how our world will be destroyed,¡± Wendy said.


    Well, we don¡¯t know yet if it was magic or some other means that destroyed our world. It¡¯s still far in the future. Far longer after I died.


    I hope that by changing the past, this didn¡¯t make whatever destroying the world will be prepared sooner.


    About this time in my past life, the cult didn¡¯t do much. But Lana didn¡¯t born and Marie¡¯s mentality got affected. And Albert¡¯s personality is totally different after that. At least that¡¯s what I heard.


    Maybe at this time, the cult should still be slowly increasing their influences. Which is why there shouldn¡¯t be any attack at this time.


    But we have stopped a lot of their ns. And we killed many of their people as well. So the future might be different and they might end up attacking us sooner. Though I don¡¯t think that¡¯s the case.


    Maybe right now, the cult is waiting for us to drop our guard after making us think that they have stopped doing anything. Well, that¡¯s for the agents to find out. I will just hear about itter.


    Then Wendy put me down on the ground and sat next to me watching the calmke. I can see many fishes inside theke. Some of them are going to the river to where the vige is.


    ¡°...When are we going to attack those inds?¡± Wendy asked after a moment silence between us.


    ¡°When the agents gave us enough reports, I guess. I heard that they are still there pretending to be one of them. None of them got caught yet. Anyway, you should know about this more than me,¡± I said.


    Is she getting impatient? I understand. Because I feel the same.


    But we have to keep calm and prepare everything. We don¡¯t know when they will make their move, or if we will be the one making our move first.


    ¡°The longer we wait, the stronger the enemies will be. I heard that there are already five more new master level mages breaking through in those inds,¡± Wendy said.


    I didn¡¯t know that. Or maybe I skipped that information because it¡¯s not worth my attention.


    ¡°Did you get too impatient and ended up reaching master level in a hurry? I hope that¡¯s not the case for you,¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. I made sure that I¡¯m not in a hurry when I¡¯m cultivating. It¡¯s the result of my patience. But I¡¯m worried that the war will go on for a long time,¡± Wendy said.


    ¡°That¡¯s something we try to avoid. Though in my past life, the long war was already a losing battle now that I learned how strong the cult is now already. But now, we¡¯re no longer in a losing war. We do have a chance to win. So just be patient,¡± I said.


    Yeah. I¡¯m not the best person to talk with about your worries. I¡¯m bad at consoling other people.


    ¡°I just don¡¯t like it that I¡¯m teaching my students so that they will enter the war. I wish that it will be over soon,¡± Wendy said.


    Yeah. I don¡¯t like that soon, Daniel might join us. He was just five when I found him. But there are things that I can¡¯t do on my own. So I have to be patient. I have a long live after all.


    I just hope that everyone will be strong enough to at least protect themselves until the cult is destroyed. That¡¯s all I wish.


    And Wendy also started telling me her worry. Which I can¡¯t help at all because I¡¯m extremelycking as an ordinary human. I have never been ordinary after all.


    I¡¯m an Aura user. And in the past, I was just amoner. Just a normal summoner with weak slime as his familiar and a doctor. Even after bing a doctor, I have never lived an ordinary life. Everyone still look down on me even if I¡¯m the one they have to rely when they¡¯re dying.


    So I can¡¯t really solve any of Wendy¡¯s worries. And it somehow led to Wendy and Victoria talking together.


    I just do nothing and listen to everything.


    ¡°Thanks Victoria. And Roy as well. I needed this. If I don¡¯t have this conversation, I don¡¯t know when I will have mental breakdown. This war is frightening. And now that I be a master level mage, I will live for a long time. So I hope that I won¡¯t have to fight in a war for most of my life,¡± Wendy said.


    Yeah. Mental health is important. And even if all I have about this present life is good news, that doesn¡¯t mean everyone perceive it as good news.


    I told everyone how bad the situation was in my past life. And even if I told them that the situation in the present life is better, they only experienced this life. For them, it¡¯s still tragedy.


    ¡°If you need anything, or have anything you want to say, or just someone to listen, then you can ask me. If you want to stop fighting, that¡¯s fine as well. Maybe like Sophie, you can do other things to support from behind,¡± I said.


    ¡°No. I¡¯ll continue fighting. But thanks for the tip,¡± Wendy said.


    ¡°I didn¡¯t do anything though.¡±


    After that, we... didn¡¯t say anything. She didn¡¯t say anything about wanting to go home. So I just stay there with her. Even if she says that she¡¯s okay, that doesn¡¯t really mean that she¡¯s really okay. Though I hope that she¡¯s truly fine.


    I¡¯m a doctor. But I¡¯m not specialized in mental health. Though if she needs something to calm her down, I can use the calming gas on her.


    In the end, I... fell asleep. We didn¡¯t say anything at all, so I¡¯m bored and fallen asleep.


    When I woke up, I feel weight on my chest. Wendy is sleeping with her head resting on my chest.


    What is it? Don¡¯t tell me that she¡¯s interested in me?


    Well, interest should be correct. But love is not necessary true. After all, I¡¯m just weird.


    As for Victoria, she¡¯s fishing on theke. She noticed that I¡¯m awake and just smiled before she focus back on fishing.


    It¡¯s night here already. And the stars here is beautiful.


    I can see our world from here. The moon. It¡¯s blue.


    As for Monsters World, seen from the Earth, it¡¯s blue as well. Only a few years ago I noticed that the moon is a. And not moons.


    Or maybe they are originally the moon, but then monsters started living there. Or is it humans first that lived on the moon? I don¡¯t know. And I don¡¯t care.


    Until Wendy wakes up, I¡¯ll just enjoy the view here.

 Chapter 833 - 833 This Time, it’s Shirley

    833 This Time, it¡¯s Shirley


    Wendy worries a lot. That makes her a good teacher, I guess. She¡¯s worried that her students will join the war in the future.


    That¡¯s something that we can¡¯t avoid. Because the cult has been preparing to destroy the world for a long time. While we just prepared to fight them back a quite a while after I returned back to the past.


    And it¡¯s not just Wendy who is worried. Everyone is the same. But they didn¡¯t really speak about it. Pretending that everything will be fine.


    Just like Albert for example. Well, he¡¯s a king after all. If people see that he¡¯s worried about something, then everyone will be worried.


    So most of us pretend that everything will be okay. But I hope that they can talk to someone instead of bottling it up for themselves. Can¡¯t have them destroy themselves.


    I think most of them chose to strengthen themselves to avoid thinking too much. And when they reach master level, they will start thinking of other things. Like how they will live for a long time and how to spend their lives as they don¡¯t want to continue fighting in a war.


    Many kinds of thoughts entered their mind and just like Wendy, they will need someone to rely on. And for most of them, the person they rely the most would be me.


    Well, not everyone. Since Kron doesn¡¯t seem to care about anything. He just wants to focus on his adventure. And he will help us when we ask for help since he hates the cult.


    I think he has a lot of friends outside the usual group. Maybe he¡¯s talking to them instead.


    .....


    If they want me to listen to their worries, I¡¯ll do it. It¡¯s the littlest thing I can do to them.


    After Wendy wakes up, we returned back to Cassau. Only to learn that it¡¯s Shirley¡¯s time to reach master level.


    So quick. It wasn¡¯t long when Kron became our strongest mage. I knew it was just temporary. But I never thought that Wendy would reach that level so soon after that without even having Breezy around.


    Then there¡¯s Shirley. She should be busier after she decided to help her brother with diplomatic problems. But she¡¯s still managed to reach master level this fast?


    Hearing this, instead of being disappointed, Kron was so happy.


    ¡°Then, I canpare my magic with both Wendy and Shirley. Especially with Shirley since we¡¯re both also ice mages. Though I think she will reach master level in her ice element sooner than me,¡± Kron said.


    No sign of disappointment at all. What a sportsmanship from Kron. I guess he never really cares about being the strongest. He just enjoys his freedom.


    I guess since he mostly cares about himself, he doesn¡¯t think about other people much. Though if it¡¯s him, if he witnesses someone in trouble, he will still help.


    ¡°Okay then. I¡¯ll tell Andro that we¡¯re going there soon. Have you prepared yourself?¡± I asked Shirley.


    Right after I returned with Wendy, she called me and told me to transport her to Cassau. So she¡¯s right here with us now.


    ¡°Yeah. I¡¯ll go tomorrow then,¡± Shirley said.


    ¡°Then get some rest. I¡¯ll leave now to Andro¡¯s ce and tell the monsters to prepare to fight,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay.¡±


    I just left Monsters World. But I¡¯m going back again. Though it¡¯s because another person is reaching master level. I¡¯m d that¡¯s the case.


    So I told the monsters that we¡¯re going to Andro¡¯s back again to protect Shirley this time. And everyone is excited to hear it.


    Thanks to the cksmith, more monsters are well-equipped now. There are even some monsters who applied to be the cksmith¡¯s apprentice. It was really great that he can produce many weapons and armors quickly with his apprentices¡¯ help.


    The angels have new sets of armor and better spears. The elves have bows, arrows, and small daggers to protect themselves. And the centaurs got armors andnces. Though some individual monsters have their own preferences. So some centaurs have bows and arrows instead.


    The horses also wear armor. Even Ray had one. But Ray doesn¡¯t like it. So it¡¯s only a saddle for him a saddle madefortable enough for Ray to run with.


    Having Blobbyarmor covering him is already good enough.


    The next day, everyone is ready. Though the people here are much smaller in number than back when Kron was breaking through. But the monsters are all here on Andro¡¯s back. Including the elves and the centaurs who decided to cooperate together.


    So, the elves will ride the centaurs. The elves will shoot their arrow from the centaurs¡¯ back, while the centaurs will focus on closer enemies.


    Also, the arrows that the elves used were made by branches of some trees. And the elves can use their nt magic on the arrows they shoot. So even if the damage caused by the arrow alone is small, they can use their nt magic.


    For example, they can grow a vine from the arrow that will bind the enemies. Or a poisonous flower can bloom from the arrow. What a cheat ability.


    And they never miss their target. Even if they do and they about to hit their own allies, the elves will use nt magic to elerate the growth of the wooden arrow. So that it will grow heavy and the trajectory of the arrow will change.


    nt magic is awesome. Even more awesome after they learned archery.


    From what Tia told me, the Queen of the elves, this might be how the elves in the past fight. And when the method of fighting disappeared, the elves grew weaker. But now, they are almostparable with other monsters in the vige.


    Though if it¡¯s close range, even if they are more agile, they will still lose in the end. But they are happy enough with just knowing that they can help the master of their God¡¯s master to destroy the cult.


    Now, we¡¯re protecting Shirley.


    We have been doing this twice. And this is the third time. So we¡¯re used to it already.


    Though this time, there are more elves involved.


    The centaurs and the elves will stay on Andro¡¯s back. While other monsters will fight.


    Ang is here because she wants to help her friend, Shirley. And because Ang is here, the others think that it will be fine even if they don¡¯t participate.


    Big difference between Shirley and Wendy. Where Wendy didn¡¯t have other mages helping her. Just monsters. But I guess that¡¯s natural. Shirley is in the position of someone who needs to be protected. While Wendy is in the position of someone who protects. So when Wendy breakthrough, there were no one who insists oning. But for Shirley¡¯s turn, Ang insisted.


    And I even got a call from Albert himself to protect Shirley with my life. He doesn¡¯t need to ask me that. I will do that anyway.


    Ang, the werewolves, and the weretigers will spread out and fight any monsters. Andro is as usual, killing everything in his sight. Then, the elves on the centaurs¡¯ back will shoot anyone who passed Ang and the others. The centaurs will watch out for other enemies approaching. As for the angels, they are spreading out to everywhere so they can heal those who get injured.


    No master level mages helping. Not even the Summoner. But his familiar is here.


    As for the tamer, he has tamed so many flying monsters. Though I¡¯m sure he will help the next one to breakthrough to master level if they are not wind mages.


    And... it¡¯s over. It just took Shirley two days to breakthrough!


    Yeah. Two days. Even faster than Wendy.


    Right after she reached master level, she looked around and fight the monsters on her own. I don¡¯t need to do anything here. All I did was bring in some food for those who are resting.


    It didn¡¯t take long for Shirley to kill the rest of the monsters. Then she went to Andro. I mean Andro¡¯s head. Probably to say her gratitude for protecting her and allowing everyone to breakthrough on his back.


    Then she returned.


    ¡°Alright, let¡¯s get back! For a royalty to reach master level, it needs to be celebrated,¡± Shirley said to herself.


    ¡°You don¡¯t want to keep your level as secret?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No need for that. The cult already knows that we are fighting them. And for our people, knowing that their princess reached master level, it will raise their morale instead,¡± Shirley said.


    Has she been thinking of a n like this? She also told me that if the cult learn of her achievement, there¡¯s a chance that they will make their move in haste knowing that we just got stronger.


    ¡°Well, I always said it. You can think of a n, and I will do it. It¡¯s up to you and the others,¡± I said.


    And so, I returned her back to Cassau first. I only brought her back to the royal capital the day after.


    In the capital, I can hear that many people are talking about Shirley reaching master level. I¡¯m sure the cult will hear of it soon.


    I guess I¡¯ll be her bodyguard during celebration then.

 Chapter 834 - 834 Parade

    834 Parade


    The appearance of a master level mage is not something that the people know. Most would expect that mages at most can reach expert level as master level is regarded as myth. But no one would imagine that a member of royalty will one day reach master level.


    We never told anyone that there are actually a lot of master level mages. People never know about that because we keep it as secret.


    Because if we leak that secret and people learn that the cult has master level mages, then they will fall into despair. After all, themon sense of this world is that master level mages are the strongest. Probably, everyone is thinking that they are much stronger than even Ang who won the tournament.


    By the way, the second tournament is already nned in a year or two. And after that, it will goes on annually at least. With each country has their own way of selecting the mages who will participate.


    I don¡¯t know if Ang and the others will participate or not. But if they just say that they want to, I¡¯m sure Albert will give them the opening spots right away.


    Anyway, we¡¯re about to celebrate Shirley¡¯s achievement of reaching master level.


    People will think that she¡¯s the first master level mage after so long. And they even thought that master level mages are just myth. So they must be really shocked. And happy at the same time.


    They prepared a parade. To let everyone knows that the princess is someone who has reached master level.


    Do we really need to make it this big?


    .....


    Well, Albert said that they do. Because of the danger after the cult hasn¡¯t made any big move at all.


    The danger doesn¡¯te from the cult. But it¡¯s from inside the kingdom. Other nobles who think of having a coup.


    ¡°A coup? There shouldn¡¯t be anything like that in my past life. Though maybe I just didn¡¯t really care about it so I never heard of it. Maybe it doesn¡¯t affect Cassau at all at the time. Or that you are too tough on everyone after Marie fallen sick so no one dares to pick a fight against you.¡±


    I said that to Albert when he asked me if there was any coup at all in my past life.


    But seriously, a coup when the cult is not destroyedpletely? The nobles who think of that must be living a peaceful lives without ever getting directly involved with the war. So when there¡¯s no battle at all, they think that we¡¯re just being paranoid after the cult is gone.


    But no. The cult isn¡¯t gone yet. So why do they n a coup? What part of this kingdom that dissatisfied them so much that they even think about it?


    ¡°Actually, some of them didn¡¯t really want to do it. So they contacted me in secret. You know, we haven¡¯t really spread the phones to everyone. So they send letters via messenger birds. But if we spread the phones, then those people who is nning for the coup will even ask someone far away for support. So it¡¯s good that we don¡¯t spread it yet,¡± Albert said.


    Yeah. Phone is the most dangerous invention ever created. We already learned how amazing long distancemunication when we used Sonia as our messengers before. But with phones, it¡¯s much easier. And it¡¯s much dangerous since people can talk with each other no matter how far they are.


    So if they learned our weakness, they can report it to someone in an instant. That¡¯s what we don¡¯t want. So we haven¡¯t spread the use of the phone yet.


    ¡°Because of that, if we made a show that Shirley has reached master level, I¡¯m sure that there won¡¯t be anyone who dares thinking of nning a coup if they don¡¯t have a master level mage with them. Though I¡¯m worried that there will be many people asking me to let them marry Shirley. But that¡¯s okay. I¡¯ll just say that she¡¯s too strong for me and I can¡¯t force her to do what I say. Or we will lose our strongest guardian,¡± Albert said.


    Oh, that¡¯s right. I think Shirley is still single. I¡¯m sure there will be many people who wants her hand in marriage.


    Well, that doesn¡¯t matter to me. Shirley can pick any partner she wants. And those who were nning for the coup will have no choice but to forget everything. Because Shirley is too strong.


    Though she¡¯s not the strongest yet. I think she¡¯s almost equal in strength with Wendy. But well, both of them are loyal to Tatrama. So if people learned that someone else reached master level, there will only be fear in their eyes.


    ¡®What coup? I never heard of it,¡¯ Is probably what they all will say when asked. Pretending to not know.


    The parade started. It¡¯s just around the royal capital and back to the pce.


    I¡¯m sure no one believed that Shirley reached master level. But she showed some magic that normal expert level mages can¡¯t do. And that¡¯s enough for everyone to believe.


    As for me, I was assigned as a hidden bodyguard among the masses. Finding someone who tries to harm Albert and the others, then kill them and take them away to somewhere without anyone noticing.


    As for Shirley, even if someone is targeting her lives, as long as they are not master level mages, they can¡¯t do anything to her.


    There are other people helping me. Apparently, there are too many people wanted to harm Albert.


    He¡¯s riding his horse instead of being in a carriage. I guess to show how amazing his horse look.


    And not just him. The troop under Mustache are all riding horses. And Shirley herself is riding a pegasus. Though she doesn¡¯t have her own horse at all. And she doesn¡¯t need a pegasus since she can fly. It¡¯s just for show.


    After the invention of phones, Mustache got a lot of free time. Because Albert can just contact him or me when he¡¯s in danger. So he can sent someone else as Albert¡¯s bodyguard while he¡¯s improving his troop¡¯s strength. The mboyant Mustache troop.


    Well, maybe that¡¯s not the real name. But I don¡¯t care.


    There are many people who asked to test Shirley¡¯s strength. But they stopped after hearing that Shirley will ept challenges from anyone in the next few days. They can test Shirley¡¯s strength there.


    But that doesn¡¯t mean there won¡¯t be anyone else trying to harm the others. I even had to kill fifteen people already in the span of thirty minutes. Whether they are from the cult, or someone who used to n the coup, or even someone else entirely, I just kill them.


    And beside me is Veronica who is also taking the job.


    ¡°Hey, I thought that it would be either you or Celestine who reached master level first knowing that you were already expert level mages when we met,¡± I said to Veronica.


    ¡°Well, Celestine is busy, I guess. And after reuniting with Lynn, I guess they have a lot to talk about to catch up with each other. Then she¡¯s busy since she¡¯s the Empress¡¯ sister. As for me, I¡¯m justzier than others,¡± Veronica said.


    ¡°No, you¡¯re notzy. When I see you in your room, I can tell that you¡¯re cultivating. There must be a reason why you haven¡¯t reached master level yet,¡± I said.


    She said that she¡¯szy. But she¡¯s the most hardworking. At least in meditating.


    ¡°Maybe I need real life experience first. I have to fight more. Though I don¡¯t really care about getting stronger. I enjoyed my life now that I¡¯m out of the cult. But if there¡¯s a fight, I will still help,¡± Veronica said.


    ¡°You don¡¯t have to join the fight if you don¡¯t want to,¡± I said.


    ¡°No, I¡¯ll fight. I just don¡¯t care about getting stronger. Especially since everyone is slowly bing stronger than me even though I was one of the first expert level mages who joined you. I¡¯m just happy about it.¡±


    If that¡¯s what Wendy thinks, then it¡¯s fine. Maybe she¡¯s meditating not to improve her strength. Even though I often watched her doing it, it doesn¡¯t mean that she always do it. Maybe I only caught her doing it when I¡¯m at home. And I always go out too often.


    It¡¯s a shame that one of the potentially strongest wind mage refused to get stronger. But that¡¯s fine. That¡¯s what she decided.


    ¡°Okay. But if you decided to breakthrough to master level, then call me. I¡¯ll protect you,¡± I said.


    ¡°I¡¯m sure you will. If there¡¯s no other suspicious people, then bring me home already,¡± Veronica said.


    If she doesn¡¯t want to be here, then why is she here? She has saved a lot of money just by taking requests as a Hunter. So she doesn¡¯t really need money. But she¡¯s stil taking this job of protecting everyone during the parade.


    It looks like she¡¯s just bored staying in her room or ying with the orphans all the time. So she took a time off here. And she got bored here already.


    From all the people in the group, she¡¯s the one I don¡¯t really get. But if she says she¡¯s okay, then that¡¯s fine with me.

 Chapter 835 - 835 One Week Prep Time

    835 One Week Prep Time


    The parade is over. Many people were either killed or arrested. Though most who died was because I killed them. There¡¯s no need to fill the prison with so many people after all.


    I¡¯m still a good citizen who pays taxes. Especially since my business grows so big, I pay a huge amount of taxes. Although I let someone in charge of my business, I still pay taxes. And I don¡¯t want my money to be used to let those criminals live.


    Though the real reason is that no one can stop me if I want to kill someone. And unless the targets are already designated to be arrested and not to be killed, I will kill them. So they have to discuss with me first if there¡¯s anyone I shouldn¡¯t kill.


    ¡°I¡¯m sure that there will be someone from the cult watching and escaped. The cult will be informed of Shirley reaching master level. Maybe they will even attack Tatrama right away. But that¡¯s good. We have prepared a lot of things. It¡¯s also thanks to Roy¡¯s and Ray¡¯s help in getting a lot of horse monsters for everyone. The things we could do is done faster thanks to those horses,¡± Albert said.


    It¡¯s the day after the parade. And we¡¯re having a meeting with everyone in the alliance.


    ¡°Must be nice to be the hometown of Roy. You received a lot of help and advise from him earlier than the rest. So the three people from Tatrama can reach master level firstt,¡± Harold said. He didn¡¯t even hide his jealousy.


    He¡¯s no longer a king. But his advise is still received well here. Despite being a womanizer, he¡¯s still a decent king with a lot of experience.


    As for his son, the King of Arturo, Fabio, he¡¯s here as well. He¡¯s the king now, but sometimes, it feels like Harold is still the king. I guess Fabio is notpletely there yet.


    ¡°Also, there are more wind mages in Tatrama than other kingdoms. So it¡¯s normal that they can grow so quickly since they have the wind spirit with them. And the Rygis country is so close to them. it¡¯s a country close to a spot where the wind gathers, so their cultivation is much faster there,¡± old man Henry added.


    .....


    ¡°Yeah. But we can¡¯t only have master level wind mages. The cult will notice that there must be something in Tatrama that is good for wind mages¡¯ cultivation. Though maybe that will be their reason to attack us the next time,¡± Albert said.


    Other than wind spirit, we also have air spirit. But there are so few air element mages we can trust.


    I asked an air mage in the circus if she wanted to have Airy with her. But she refused saying that it¡¯s best if I could reach master level in air element first.


    But the thing is, I don¡¯t have any talent in it. None at all that I didn¡¯t even have that element in my past life. Even if I have it now, it¡¯s not like I will suddenly have a talent in it.


    So, the chance of me reaching master level is much lower than any other air mages in the world. But that air mage told me that it¡¯s fine. Because if I ended up reaching master level, that will help everyone more than if it¡¯s any other air mage reaching master level.


    Though for Sara, she¡¯s so talented in it that it¡¯s fine for her to bring Airy everywhere. She ended up beingbeled as a Sweet-Loving Noble though.


    I also know an earth spirit. But to get his cooperation, we need to conquer that ind along with the surrounding inds.


    Maybe that¡¯s why we¡¯re here. We have received enough report on those inds to attack them.


    ¡°Thankfully, we learned where we can get the earth spirit¡¯s cooperation. And it¡¯s a good time as well because we learned almost everything we can from the agents we sent to those inds. We will attack in a week time. That should be enough time to prepare. Everyone except for the bare minimum enough to protect their kingdom will be sent. Though for Tatrama, they won¡¯t send their army as they are volunteering to be the bait. That¡¯s the whole reason for the parade,¡± old man Henry said.


    It¡¯s not his son, but old man Henry himself. I thought that he¡¯s only focusing in cultivating now. But I guess that¡¯s not the case. He¡¯s still has enough time to take care of other things that his son can¡¯t handle yet.


    Since the location is closer to Varadis than any other countries, he will be in charge. Though for the general in the field, it will be Sunsses.


    He might be our recent recruit. But he has shown his leadership. So I think everyone is already epting him as the general.


    The meeting is over. We will attack those inds soon. When the cult is focusing on attacking Tatrama thanks to the parade. They will send their strongest mages to kill just one person, Shirley.


    But that won¡¯t happen. Because Ang will be protecting her. And it¡¯s not just Ang. There are many more expert level mages who are as strong as most of the cult¡¯s master level mages.


    There might be some casualties, but we will win.


    It¡¯s good that Shirley announced that she will take some time off for a break in a vi owned by the royalty somewhere quiet. So the cult will focus on going there instead. And of course Albert will still have enough people to protect him and other cities.


    ¡°Then, I will go check on the earth spirit. I asked him to tell me if there¡¯s anything new from the cult¡¯s movement or the dragons,¡± I said after the meeting is over.


    With the earth spirit¡¯s help, we might learn something that the other agents didn¡¯t learn.


    ¡°Ah, Roy. I¡¯ming with you. It might just be a week, but staying near the earth spirit is good enough to improve my cultivation. I don¡¯t think I can reach master level yet, but any improvement before the big fight is good enough,¡± Ka said.


    The other earth mages also agreed to follow me. Ang, Celestine, and Sara. I think five people is enough. Because it will be in that cramped space I dug from the sea.


    And I need toe as well since it¡¯s a closed space. Or they won¡¯t be able to breath.


    Since Sara ising, I think I¡¯ll use that chance to cultivate my air element as well because Airy will be there.


    Hmm... is five people enough in that space? If not, then I¡¯ll just dig up some more.


    So, we first go to Monsters Vige to tell the monsters that we¡¯re going to fight. And this will be the first time that the centaurs and weretigers will join the war. This will also be the first time the elves will join the battle directly instead of just preparing potions for us.


    That means I have to bring Sunny to improve the elves¡¯ morale.


    They have gotten so good that they are no longer the cowardly elves anymore. Just by learning how to use archery in battle already improved their confidence so much.


    For them, we will dispatch them to the ind with thick forest. The centaurs as well.


    When I asked the centaurs if they can fight against mages, they told me to send a mage to fight them. So I had Candy to fight them.


    The result? Any offensive magic that hit them will only have less than half the efficiency than when it¡¯s used against any other opponents.


    ¡°We have high resistance against any type of offensive magic. There will still be pain, but it¡¯s not something we can¡¯t endure. Though your friend was too strong for us. I think anyone stronger than her will be impossible for us to fight,¡± the centaur said.


    Even Candy¡¯s lightning magic is the strongest offensive magic among any other magic that the expert level mages can use. Which mean that they can even endure the attack from the weaker master level mages from the cult.


    ...All the monsters who are helping us are crazy. I love them!


    Each have their own specialty. Though the werewolves and the weretigers are quite simr. But who can refuse the help of strong helpers?


    After I told them to prepare, I told Graham and Shelia to kill as many monsters as they can in the next five days. And the other days will be for resting before the battle. Though I don¡¯t think Shelia will rest just because I told her to. So I just tell her to just some light sparring with fellow monsters with angels watching them.


    After that, I bring Ka, Ang, Celestine, and Sara right into the space underground where Ist met the earth spirit.


    ¡°...it¡¯s cramped as expected,¡± I said.


    ¡°Shall I make the space bigger then?¡± Celestine asked.


    ¡°No, I¡¯ll dig a tunnel myself. If you use earth magic, someone will notice. Even using a portal is dangerous as it is,¡± I said.


    And so, I dug some tunnel and threw the dirt away using portal before the earth spirit greeted us.

 Chapter 836 - 836 Should I Try Fighting Without Magic

    836 Should I Try Fighting Without Magic


    ¡°Hey, you¡¯re here! Are you going to attack right now?¡±


    While I was digging to make the ce bigger for everyone to sit on, the earth spirit came and greeted us. He noticed us appearing here, but he told the earth dragon first before he came here.


    ¡°We¡¯re nning to do it in about one week. So, these girls have something to ask you before the fight,¡± I said.


    The ones who needed the earth spirit¡¯s help the most are the girls. So they will be the one asking him for help.


    ¡°Earth spirit. With only one week to attack, we would like to grow stronger no matter how little improvement we make. So please let us cultivate in your presence. Reaching master level will be difficult in a week, but at least we can get a bit stronger before the fight,¡± Ka asked the earth spirit for a favor.


    With everyone here other than me are earth mages, they will cultivate here and get stronger before they can fight. We can only do it now because everyone is preparing to attack the inds here. And after we get the job done, only then we can get the earth mages to freely cultivate here.


    Before this, if somehow they noticed that we¡¯re here, the cult would either try to escape, which is not likely, or try to find us and kill us. But if we do it now, with only one week left before the fight, then even if they find us and trying to kill us, we can go wild.


    This one week is not because we need that long preparation before the fight. It¡¯s just mean that we are already prepared to fight from the week before the scheduled time. So even if they are looking for us here underground cultivating to improve our magic, we can also get everyone here to fight right away.


    This one week is for everyone to improve their strength no matter how little it is. Because other preparations such as food, water, and other supplies, can just be taken into a warehouse where I will then open portals to get them.


    .....


    I¡¯m used as a courier. But that¡¯s fine.


    ¡°One week... I don¡¯t think any of you can reach master level in that short span of time. But if I can help just by being here, then I will dly help. And you guys will be the one to fulfill the wish of the dragons. For them to die before they lose their mind. I¡¯ll do anything to help my friends!¡± the earth spirit said.


    ¡°That¡¯s great! Though for the dragons, it will be Roy ¡®s job to kill them. He can finish the job faster than the others with his portal. And he¡¯s probably the only one who can kill them painlessly,¡± Ka said.


    Right. ording to the meeting, I will be the one killing the dragons. Though I think their clones will be a bit troublesome to face since they are too many. But I can escape right away.


    Once I kill the Dragon Kings, their clones won¡¯t have anyone to obey and they will fight and even kill anyone in sight. Maybe they can help us a little by killing the members of the cult nearby.


    I will use a portal to go to where those Dragon Kings are. They had been given a Blobby for me to go there when I first came here. Then, I will also open a portal to get the monsters toe here. The monsters will be split into four groups. The same number as the Dragon Kings. And each group will be taken to each Dragon King¡¯s location.


    They won¡¯t fight the Dragon King. They will fight whatever it is in their way. Either the clones of the dragons, or the mages here.


    After I get rid of all the Dragon Kings, I will leave this ind and help other inds. Just the monsters are enough to get rid of everything here. And most of the inhabitants of this inds are monsters. The monsters from Monsters Vige can fight against monsters better than our mages. So I¡¯m sure they will be fine.


    But for the strong monsters like Shelia, Graham, Tiger, and some others, they will help in other inds right away. Facing master level mages.


    ¡°Then what about you? You¡¯re not an earth mage, right?¡± the earth spirit asked.


    ¡°Since I have the time, I will try to cultivate my air element. Airy is here as well,¡± I said.


    Sara can actually just focus more on her air magic. Concentrating fully for the next week in just her air element. But she said that she wanted to improve her earth magic as well. That¡¯s why she¡¯s here.


    Well, for a short term, for her, I think improving her earth magic is a better idea. Because even if she improves her air element in just one week, she won¡¯t reach master level. And the gases that she created won¡¯t be effective toward master level mages.


    But her earth element though, she can still hurt master level mages with it. And if she makes her magic stronger, she can kill master level mages with her earth magic.


    It¡¯s not like she only used earth magic to create bullets. She can also create other things and attack or even kill master level mages with her earth magic. Making a very small bullet for her gun is just more efficient sincepressing air inside the gun didn¡¯t waste mana like using earth magic to attack.


    By the way, Ang won¡¯t be here for the whole week. Probably.


    She needed all her four elements to be equal in cultivation. So after cultivating her earth element for a while, she will return her focus on other elements and raise them.


    Then hopefully, in a few months, she can reach master level.


    It¡¯s fine if she¡¯s the slowest to reach that stage. Because I¡¯m sure that Ang will be stronger than anyone.


    After making the cefortable enough, all of us started cultivating. I prepared some snacks in case the others want to take a break while I¡¯m still cultivating.


    ¡°Roy, your progress is much slower than Sara,¡± Airy said when I took a break after two days of cultivating.


    ¡°Shut up! I know that, okay?¡± I said.


    ¡°I know that you know. I¡¯m just teasing you,¡± Airy said before she flies away to Sara¡¯s shoulder.


    Sara didn¡¯t just focus on her earth element for some reason. She¡¯s also cultivating her air element when she has time. I wonder why?


    Both Sara and I take turns in creating air in this closed space for everyone to breathe. Using air magic once to fill this ce with breathable air, it can stay for around 12 hours.


    If we want to, we can use magic to hold on for a few days. But we take turns every 12 hours just in case.


    Compressing air is what we can do best. Sopressing breathable gas, and make it lighter than the air that we exhaled so that the air we exhale will stay under us is easy. At least for expert level mages like us.


    But seriously, I never thought that air have weight in my past life. Thanks to Victoria¡¯s random knowledge, or maybe it¡¯s not random, we learned a lot.


    If only she¡¯s some sort of air expert from her world, then I¡¯m sure my air magic will be more powerful than it is. But this much is already way too good for us whocked the knowledge about air in this world. So I¡¯m already thankful to her as it is.


    By the way, she¡¯s with Ray right now. Hunting monsters in Monsters World so that I can breakthrough to master level in my summoning element. Though I need to wrestle some monsters if I want to get there.


    Maybe I¡¯ll try it in this situation. I¡¯ll kill the three Dragon Kings first, then kill the earth Dragon Kingst. And I will not use Aura or magic when I fight him. Probably just a weapon. Maybe a spear. Or even unarmed. And I will try to kill the Earth Dragon King.


    Though I promised him that I will kill him painlessly. Well, I¡¯ll ask the earth spirit to ry a message to the Earth Dragon King and see if he¡¯s willing to let me test my strength against him. He will be in a lot of pain, but I hope he will agree to help me get stronger.


    After a while, the earth spirit returned.


    ¡°He said that if you think you can beat him, then that¡¯s fine. But don¡¯t expect that he will hold himself back. Good luck in killing him,¡± the earth spirit said.


    Well, now I have to figure out how to kill a dragon without magic and Aura. A fucking Earth Dragon King. Even at his weakened state, he must be much stronger than ordinary dragon.


    Well, I¡¯ll think about itter. I need to tell Albert first that I won¡¯t be able to help other inds at that time then.


    Maybe I should help other inds first before I kill the Dragon Kings. I¡¯ll ask the kings and Sunsses about their opinions. Then I will move ording to their n.

 Chapter 837 - 837 It’s Time

    837 It¡¯s Time


    ¡°Roy, tomorrow is the day. Let¡¯s go home today to rest,¡± Ka suggested.


    It has been six days since we started cultivating here under the ground with the presence of the earth spirit. And tomorrow is already the day that we¡¯re going to fight these inds at the same time.


    ¡°Is there any news?¡± I asked.


    ¡°There were some movement to the royal capital in Tatrama. But since Wendy is already a master level mage, she took care of them all. None of them were stronger than her alone. Even without her, the others can protect everyone there,¡± Ka said.


    As expected, they took the bait. Seeing that Shirley reached master level, and we didn¡¯t even hide that fact, it¡¯s obvious that the cult will go after her.


    Though if she could just cultivate within Tatrama¡¯s territory, then everyone nearby would be able to notice. But that¡¯s still dangerous, so even she had to breakthrough on Andro¡¯s back.


    If she do that there, I think it will be easier for the cult toe out since we just need to protect Shelia. But Shelia rejected that idea when we suggested it to her. She doesn¡¯t want anyone to get involved in that. Because the cult could even take innocent people as hostages.


    Well, they can still do that now. But at least Shirley can do something about it.


    In the end, we didn¡¯t bait the cult with her breaking through to master level because of her desire to protect the people. But that¡¯s fine. It¡¯s not like I have better strategy to use.


    .....


    I¡¯m sure that when they are trying to assassinate Shirley, they would never imagine that they would be killed by another master level mage. Or even killed by an expert level mage. Because Ang was also protecting her.


    Shirley, Kron, Wendy, and several other master level mages who have decent magic control, are all already capable of defeating most master level mages from the cult. Even if they are at the level of the Barbarian King that Ang defeated, I¡¯m sure they can handle it.


    ...Does that mean Ang is already stronger than our master level mages?


    Well, after Ang had some sparring sessions with Kron and Wendy, though I didn¡¯t witness it myself, they said that Ang is already beyond them in magic. Though for wind magic, she¡¯s just losing a bit. But her other elements helped her boost her strength.


    So, I guess Kron and Wendy had never been our strongest mages at all since Ang is already that strong.


    By the way, Ang left two days ago after saying that she had enough cultivating earth element. She¡¯s going to cultivate her other element to make sure everything is bnced. If she¡¯s too unbnced, her magic won¡¯t be as strong as it is. It will grow weak instead. And she wanted to avoid that.


    ¡°There should be movement in those inds as well. Any news regarding that?¡± I asked Ka.


    ¡°None of the agents noticed anything suspicious at all. Though they noticed that some people leaving those inds. And the closest ce to go from there is Varadis. So Tatrama should still be safe,¡± Ka said.


    Yeah. Varadis in the north and Tatrama in the south. There¡¯s no need for someone from an ind up north of Varadis to go all the way to Tatrama.


    But this also mean that there¡¯s still another ce near Tatrama where the cult is making their base.


    What a pain. I hope they won¡¯t n any big movement anytime soon. We still have inds to conquer.


    I looked around and see that Celestine and Sara are done with their cultivation for the day so I opened a portal for us to go home.


    ¡°Earth spirit, we¡¯ll be leaving now. We will return tomorrow and proceed with our n,¡± I said to the earth spirit.


    ¡°Okay. I wish you the best.¡±


    We return back to Cassau for rest. Though I didn¡¯t rest.


    I move around the continent using portal and gather each country¡¯s army in several designated location. Some of them were from small kingdoms, so I hope they can get along with other kingdoms.


    Except for our usual group in Cassau, those armies are waiting in a base prepared in Varadis. Since it is the closest ce to the destination.


    And the next morning, everyone is ready.


    ¡°I¡¯ll go there first with the monsters. After I killed the three Dragon Kings, and send the monsters, I will transport everyone else to the other two inds before I go back to fight the Earth Dragon King by myself,¡± I said.


    There are three main inds that we¡¯re going to attack. With some other smaller inds around them.


    The monsters and I will take care of the inds with the monsters and their clones. Then the other two inds will be for the others. I just need to open a portal and say that this portal goes where so those who are designated to that ind will enter it.


    First, I move to Monsters Vige. There are already separated into four group of mixed races. They don¡¯t really need to go with one race go together. They are already getting along well with each other.


    ¡°First group,e with me. Graham will go to the castle indter, and Shelia will go to the other ind,¡± I said.


    ¡°Why can¡¯t I go to that castle ind? From how you call it, that¡¯s where the strongest enemies are, right?¡± Sheliained.


    ¡°Because our strongest force will go there as well. You want to get rid a lot of them on your own, right? So you will have to move separately.¡±


    She¡¯s easily convinced. So easy.


    If Shelia can¡¯t fight the strongest enemy, then she just need to face the most enemies.


    ¡°What about me? You don¡¯t trust us because we¡¯re new?¡±


    This time, Tiger, the representative of the weretigersined.


    ¡°You have been cooperating with us humans just a few times. I¡¯m sure not all of you already adapted to how we fight. So it¡¯s best for now to get you all fighting together in an ind first,¡± I said.


    ¡°It¡¯s just purple cloth, right? We can differentiate that much,¡± Tiger stillined.


    ¡°...The enemies are clones of Dragon Kings,¡± I said.


    ¡°Let¡¯s go everyone!¡±


    So simple. Unlike Shelia who is smart enough to know that any dragons who ended up getting tamed by humans can only mean that humans could be much stronger than expected.


    As for Graham, he¡¯s calm. He knows that his main job is not to fight, but to heal. Though if needed, he could be a great reinforcement for the others. He doesn¡¯t mind going to anywhere he¡¯s assigned to.


    Now that I don¡¯t see anyone elseining, it¡¯s time to move.


    First is the Fire Dragon King with the first group of monsters.


    ¡°As soon as I open a portal, all of you will enter and fight everyone there. Let¡¯s go!¡±


    I opened the portal to where the Fire Dragon King is, and as soon as he saw me entered, he raises his neck to let me sh at it cleanly.


    This will be the first creature I kill with the sword that the cksmith created for me. The sword-cane.


    I shed the sword at the dragon¡¯s neck and killed him instantly.


    ¡°Whoa! This is as good as Victosword at least,¡± I said.


    ¡°Huhu, now you know how awesome I am,¡± Victoria said proudly.


    ¡°I always know that though.¡±


    When I see that all the monsters have entered, I return back to Monsters Vige and opened another portal. This time is to the Ice Dragon King.


    Like before, this one also prepared for me to kill him. So I killed him. And after everyone entered, while the dragon¡¯s clones still not reacting to the death of the original, I left again.


    Then the Wind Dragon King. The same as before.


    After that, I didn¡¯t return to Monsters Vige. But I went to the base where everyone is waiting. Including Ang and the others. Even Victoria left with Ray.


    I opened several portals at once. Each to where the agents we sent to those ces ced with a Blobby. Some ces that they won¡¯t expect we arrive from.


    ¡°Good luck, Roy. I made the n to not include you during the fight. So you only need to take care of yourself,¡± Sunsses said to me before he entered the portalst. He¡¯s going to the castle ind.


    Only then I returned back to the Monsters Vige. This is thest group. After this, they shouldn¡¯t expect me to open a portal to anyone. If it¡¯s anything important during my fight with the Earth Dragon King, they need to get Sonia to contact me instead.


    This fight with the Earth Dragon King is not just for me to reach master level in my summoning element. I think I will need sometime to reach there. Though maybe if I¡¯m lucky, I can reach that level since my familiars are fighting.


    It¡¯s just for me to test which level of monster I need to fight if I want to reach master level in the future. If I can defeat the Earth Dragon King, then maybe I need even stronger monster to defeat to reach master level.


    If I can¡¯t defeat it without Aura or Magic, then I need to defeat someone at that level then.


    ¡°Now then, shall we fight?¡±

 Chapter 838 - 838 Legend of Immortality

    838 Legend of Immortality


    ¡°Shall we fight?¡±


    I asked the Earth Dragon King after I transported everyone. There are few monsters I brought here, but their job is to take care of the clones of the Earth Dragon King.


    Everyone is busy. So no one will help me fight the Earth Dragon King. I can only do it alone.


    Not even Victoria is here. Just me, the sword-cane, and Reizpear. But those two weapons are only there just in case. I need to fight the Earth Dragon King barehanded.


    Am I crazy? I am.


    Who would ever think that it¡¯s a good idea to fight an Earth Dragon King without any magic, Aura, and not even a weapon?


    Well, there¡¯s one. Right here. His name is Roy.


    Dear Roy. Can you be a bit smarter?


    Well, if I recognize that my physical strength is insufficient to face the Earth Dragon King, then I will give up. I will use Aura or magic right away. Though it will be most likely Aura since my magic won¡¯t be enough to kill the Earth Dragon King. Though if it¡¯s just for transporting him, I can still do that.


    .....


    What will I gain by this fight? Just the realization of my own strength. Nothing else. Not even a breakthrough to master level in my summoning element. Though there might be a chance for that to happen.


    My own strength, huh?


    I know that even without Aura, I¡¯m already stronger than even the master level mages who trained their physical strength for over a hundred years already. But to face a dragon, this might be difficult.


    So the only thing I can rely on in this fight will be my own body, my battling sense, and my experience in a fight. Though almost all my experience are rted to Aura.


    But what if I can still actually use Aura if I want to reach master level? Then breaking through should be easy.


    I doubt that it will be easy. Though the only thing I can do now is to improve. And this might be one way for me to improve my summoning element. Or maybe how to fight without either Aura nor magic as well.


    ¡°Ready or not, I won¡¯t be able to do anything anyway. Thanks to you, the other Dragon Kings are already dead. If I can help with just let you fight me, then feel free to do it. I still have something to ask you before I let myself loose. And once I let myself loose, I won¡¯t be able to even think. And I will only move ording to my own instinct as a monster in dangerous situation. To kill everything in sight. So I want to ask questions to you first before we fight,¡± the Earth Dragon King said.


    ¡°Some questions? Sure,¡± I said.


    ¡°I already no longer give the order to my clones to stay still. It¡¯s good that your friends can stop them even though they are outnumbered,¡± the Earth Dragon King said.


    So the first thing he do is to praise my allies? That¡¯s cool. They deserve to be praised by a monster with a king in its name.


    ¡°Yeah. They grow stronger after I put various races together in one ce. Theypete a lot among themselves to prove who is stronger. I personally don¡¯t likepetition, but I know it¡¯s good for some people. Or in this case, monsters,¡± I said.


    ¡°I see. Competition, huh? Maybe if I gave the order for everyone topete, then we won¡¯t have to suffer through this,¡± the Earth Dragon King said.


    Well, it¡¯s toote for that. All of his followers have died. Though I don¡¯t know if there are still other Earth Dragon or other dragons exist out there.


    I hope that¡¯s the case. So that if I could defeat the Earth Dragon King who is strong enough to refuse to do the order given to his master, then it would be great addition if I could reach master level in my summoning. A monsterparable to the Earth Dragon King.


    For example, a Lightning Dragon King. That will be so strong.


    Or Water Dragon King. I said it once that I wanted a powerful sea creature to be my familiar. Maybe this one is good.


    ¡°Well, sorry to hear that. Is there any other questions?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I heard most of it from the earth spirit. So I don¡¯t have many questions. Do you think that there will be the King of Humans in the future?¡± the Earth Dragon King asked.


    ¡°No way. That¡¯s impossible. At most it will be a king of a territory. Never a King of Humans,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then what will you do if there are other people like this cult you¡¯re fighting in the future? Someone with the desire to destroy the world and the power to do it without the limit of their own lifespan. What will you do?¡±


    I see. So what he wants to know is what can stop such thing from happening again.


    I¡¯d like to say that I will kill them before they grow. But that will be limited by my own lifespan.


    It¡¯s not like humans are immortal. We will die in the future. No matter how much progress you make as an Aura user or a mage...


    Wait! What the fuck?!


    ¡°Are you trying to say that there¡¯s a way for human to gain immortality?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Imagine the worst. When I heard about youing from the future, that¡¯s the thing that I thought of,¡± the Earth Dragon King said.


    The worst? What is it?


    Something worst. Something rted to destroying the world and reaching immortality?


    ¡°...Just like how ee breakthrough by meditating, we can breakthrough from mortality by killing people. And in this case, by destroying the world,¡± I said.


    ¡°It¡¯s just a guess. But I heard from my grandfather of an ancient story. That humans shouldn¡¯t attempt to reach that stage. Because their desires are unlimited,¡± the Earth Dragon King said.


    ¡°Wait, no. That¡¯s not the worst yet. The worst is that even after reaching that stage, the immortal was the one responsible in destroying the world. He did it for his own desire,¡± I said.


    ¡°Oh, right! That¡¯s indeed the worst!¡± the Earth Dragon King agreed with me.


    Even after reaching immortality, they will kill everyone instead. Just what kind of person has that much hatred to the world? So much hatred enough to kill everyone?


    Alright, he¡¯s crazy. If that¡¯s what the Evil God is trying to do, then he¡¯s crazy.


    What if killing Aura users is his way to breakthrough to immortality? Is that the reason he killed all Aura users in the past including Sonia and Victoria?


    ¡°Okay, that¡¯s enough imagination for the day. Or I won¡¯t be able to concentrate fighting you,¡± I said.


    ¡°Fine. It got crazier the longer we talk about it. It¡¯s just some ancient legend anyway. Anyway, what will you do to stop humans from ever trying to attempt destroying the world again in the future?¡± the Earth Dragon King asked again.


    ¡°Even if I killed those who thought of doing it, it will be limited by my own lifespan. So the only thing we can do is to let those whose lifespans are longer than usual, to watch over the people. That¡¯s not for me to think. All I have in my mind is to destroy the cult. Whatever happen in the future, I can¡¯t care about it at the moment. I¡¯ll just ask someone smarter to think about it,¡± I said.


    ¡°I see. So you¡¯re cursed with your past.¡±


    ¡°That¡¯s one way to put it. So, shall we fight now?¡±


    With difficulty, the Earth Dragon King trying to stand up on his legs.


    ¡°If I can¡¯t regain my own senses until I die, just know that I¡¯m grateful to you.¡±


    That¡¯s thest words he said before he lost his senses and roared loudly.


    ¡°Whoa, this is crazy. He look so strong all of a sudden,¡± I said.


    He started attacking everything. Maybe because I won¡¯t use Aura or magic, the Earth Dragon King didn¡¯t think of me as a danger. So he ignores me.


    So, what can I do with my fists and my legs?


    The first thing to do is to aim at his weakness. His eyes.


    So, I started climbing on his body. From his legs to his back.


    Earth Dragon King is the biggest among all Dragon Kings I met. Though still smaller than a Andro. He has wings, but it seems like it¡¯s impossible for him to fly. But it¡¯s still annoying when his wings are pping when I¡¯m on his back.


    ¡°Climbing without using Aura is difficult. Maybe this is too much.¡±


    It took me about one hour to climb all the way to his head. And I already wasted so much stamina.


    I overestimated my ability. Without Aura or magic, I¡¯m totally useless.


    No wonder I¡¯m a summoner. Because I need some help.


    But I¡¯ll preserve for now. Because I managed to punch him in the eye before he shook his head and threw me to the ground.


    ...Now I have to climb again. Though he¡¯s now focused more on me who had injured his eyes.


    Well, now what?

 Chapter 839 - 839 15 Hours Battle

    839 15 Hours Battle


    Kill more enemies so that the master can reach master level at the end of his fight.


    That¡¯s what all four familiars of Roy agreed before the fight.


    ¡°Hey. Let¡¯s kill a lot of monsters so that Roy can reach master level and add another monster as his familiar.¡±


    The one who suggested that idea was Victoria. Roy¡¯s first familiar. A ck Slime who was an Aura user in her past life. And in her past life before that, she was an ordinary woman from another world.


    She might be teasing Roy a lot with her various knowledge from her original world. But she¡¯s someone who has been with him the longest.


    She knows Roy¡¯s desire to destroy the cult. And she¡¯s trying to help him in any way she can.


    And one way to do it is for her to kill more enemies. Because that¡¯s how a summoner can reach the next level. By letting their familiar to kill enemies.


    If the summoner himself can get experience by the enemies he killed, Victoria had no doubt that Roy would have reached master level a long time ago. If the requirement for reaching master level is not about fighting a monster barehanded without magic or Aura.


    The other three Roy¡¯s familiars agreed. Though for Ray, he¡¯s a horse. So no one knows what he¡¯s thinking. Except probably for Roy.


    .....


    ¡°It¡¯s just killing enemies. That¡¯s what I have been doing from the start. Monsters or humans, as long as they are enemies, I will kill them all,¡± Shelia said.


    She¡¯s the strongest werewolf in her tribe. And fighting is what a werewolf desire most. So even if Victoria didn¡¯t ask her, she will still do it anyway.


    ¡°Then I just need to change my position. Instead of watching our allies to see who is injured and heal them, I will move forward and kill enemies. I will also create a clone so that I can kill more enemies,¡± Graham said.


    He¡¯s the leader of the angels. Someone who can heal and fight.


    Usually, for a big battle, he would go along with the other angels. Healing those who are injured.


    But he won¡¯t stay behind and choose to be the one fighting.


    All of them are willing to help Roy. This is something that rarely any other summoner or tamer will experience. Their familiars willingly help their master without being ordered.


    And when the fight started, the three familiars asionally contacting each other about their situation. Since Ray is moving with Victoria, there¡¯s no need for him to be contacted.


    ¡°It has been five hour since the fight started! Have you heard anything from Roy?¡± Victoria asked the two other monsters.


    As a familiar, they should only be able to contact their master via telepathy. But they can actually use telepathy on each other without having to contact their master first.


    It¡¯s something that no one think it can happen. Because after all, Roy is the first person to reach expert level in his summoning and already have four familiars. The fact that a summoner can make contract with multiple monster is something that was first taught to Roy from Victoria. So not many others, especially from the cult, know about this fact about monsters¡¯ telepathy with each other.


    Even Roy didn¡¯t realize it at first. There were a lot of difficulties every time he reached the next level in his summoning. He had to adapt to those changes.


    Victoria is swinging her sword on Ray¡¯s back and killed another master level mage. None of them can block a sword. As long as Victoria can reach them, victory is granted.


    Those mages only think of Victoria as a Living Armor monster. Once they attacked the armor, the horse will stop. But that¡¯s wrong. Because she¡¯s not a Living Armor at all. She¡¯s a ck Slime.


    And she was taught to cut magic by Roy after she can finally use Aura a bit by riding on Ray. So any magic barrier is useless to her. Though she still can¡¯t use the long-range sh that Roy can do.


    She didn¡¯t hear any positive reply from Shelia or Graham. None of them were notified by Roy about the result. And they know their contract with him still exist, so at least they know that he is still safe and probably still fighting the Dragon King.


    Victoria then focused back to her own battle.


    ¡°That¡¯s make it thirty. I¡¯m sure Shelia had killed more enemies. Thanks to Sunsses with this n to let us kill as many enemies as we can,¡± Victoria said to herself.


    Sunsses is what they call Rudy. The blind strategist. Thanks to Roy¡¯s terrible memory in remembering most people¡¯s name, no matter howmon that name is, he just gave Rudy the nickname Sunsses because of the sunsses he wears. And Rudy just epted it.


    Rudy agreed with Victoria because he knows that the stronger Roy is, the more chance they can win against the cult. Because everything started from Roy. And he¡¯s the strongest key member of the alliance. Even though he rarely involved himself with the meeting between alliance. Except for transporting the people to the meeting. He¡¯s the only one they can ask for transportation after all.


    ¡°Victoria. Without Roy, we don¡¯t know if we have cleaned everything here or not. Have you asked him about the fight?¡± Ka asked Victoria. She¡¯s riding on a pegasus next to Victoria and Ray.


    ¡°No news yet. I guess he¡¯s still okay. Let¡¯s just make sure that we find everything before he finished his fight,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°I see. We¡¯re going underground after we cleared everything here. I¡¯m sure some of them have escaped already. But we have no other choice. Even if Roy is here, it seems to be impossible for us to get rid of everyone before someone escape,¡± Ka said.


    There are many paths leading down to some kind of underground base in the ind castle. And some of the agents have entered the underground base in secrecy to investigate there.


    What¡¯s under there was a researchb for cloning, and also for improving monsters. There are also some artificial master level mages. But they are no longer a problem for anyone who joined the battle.


    Except the children. They are still young so no one can really go and kill them. But that¡¯s just make them hate the cult more.


    ¡°Alright then. If the enemies are too strong, just escape first. You can fight them againter in a more favorable condition. Though it¡¯s best if they are strong and you get them out here for me to kill. Maybe that will help Roy reach master level sooner,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°It¡¯s not like that¡¯s an easy task. Maybe I¡¯ll get Graham or Shelia down there with me,¡± Ka suggested.


    ¡°The ind Shelia is in surprisingly has a lot of enemies. So take Graham with you. If it¡¯s him, when he sees theb, he will only get angrier and will kill all the enemies,¡± Victoria said.


    And so, Ka, Graham, and other members of the alliance who are free enough to move, entered the underground base.


    As expected, Graham started to move on his own and kill all the researchers there. Even if they are just weaklings, if they are involved with the research to make monsters be stronger, they will be killed by Graham. Because of what happened to his sister.


    It took them more than 15 hours until they can get rid of all the enemies. With Shelia, Graham, and Victoria kill the most enemies.


    ¡°You¡¯re just a monster!¡±


    The one who shouted was the one who diedst as he got killed by Victoria¡¯s sword. He¡¯s a master level mage. And he¡¯s also the strongest master level mage in the whole three inds.


    Victoria needed a lot of help just to bring that guy down. But she finally did it and gave thest attack.


    ¡°I hope this will be enough for Roy to reach master level. Now what? We can¡¯t just leave because Roy is still busy,¡± Victoria asked Rudy.


    ¡°Well... I never thought that he will take so much time just to fight one enemy. I guess we will just wait here until he¡¯s done with his fight. After all, we can¡¯t really go home on our own,¡± Rudy said.


    There are many casualties in this battle. Much more than Rudy expected. So he asked the others to bring the body of their friends so they can be buried.


    ¡°Well, then I will go to where Roy is and see how it goes with him. I¡¯ll tell Shelia and Graham to check the surrounding inds. If there are still enemies, they will kill them,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Bring some mage riders with them. Just in case the enemies are trying to escape. They will let Graham and Shelia to give thest hit,¡± Rudy said.


    ¡°Well, I don¡¯t think Shelia will like it. Just tell them to move on their own instead,¡± Victoria said before she left to look for Roy.


    And so, after more than 15 hours, the battle is over. Everyone is tired. But Roy¡¯s battle is not over yet.

 Chapter 840 - 840 Serpent Family’s Battle

    840 Serpent Family¡¯s Battle


    One day before the fight, there¡¯s already a group near the battlefield already. It¡¯s Spot and his five children.


    ¡°Are you sure you¡¯re going now? If that¡¯s the case, then none of us will be able to help you,¡± Roy said to Spot.


    Spot asked Roy to be brought to the ocean near the inds one day before the fight. And before the scheduled time to fight, he and his children will bring the Kraken away from there.


    Kraken. The size is much bigger that just one tentacle of his, is longer than Spot¡¯s original size which already reached over a hundred meters.


    Spot already promised that he and his children will be the one taking care of the Kraken. They will take the Kraken away far from any of those inds and fight him with the intent to kill.


    ¡°It¡¯s best to take him away from the battlefield. We will fight in another location so that our fight won¡¯t identally kill you,¡± Spot said to Roy.


    ¡°Alright. Then, take care of yourself. Also, I will be too busy during the fight. So I won¡¯t be able to help you at all,¡± Roy said.


    ¡°You mean you¡¯re going to fight the Earth Dragon King alone? I thought that it would be easy for you. Just one hit and you will win. Until I heard that you won¡¯t fight using magic, Aura, weapons, or any other support from other people. That¡¯s just crazy,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°I know. I need to be crazy to get stronger. Well, maybe I don¡¯t need to. But this might be important for my future,¡± Roy said.


    .....


    ¡°If that¡¯s what you think. Then, you can return. We will prepare to fight the Kraken now,¡± Spot said.


    Roy then left using his portal as Spot and his children dive deep underwater to discuss about their n.


    Like Roy, they won¡¯t care about the other battle. They won¡¯t be able to help the army fight on any of the inds. Because while Roy is fighting against the Earth Dragon King, Spot and his children will fight a Kraken. A giant squid monster that could be much stronger than any Dragon King.


    Even if Roy is the one fighting the Kraken, without any handicap and he¡¯s allowed to use magic and Aura, the chance for him to win is not high at all. But Spot and his children have the confidence to say that they¡¯re going to win.


    The next day, early in the morning when it¡¯s still dark, Spot made his move.


    ¡°Wait here. I will bring that Kraken here. This is where we will fight him. Do as nned,¡± Spot said.


    The day before, he and his children were busy taking care of the monsters in the surrounding area. So that no one will bother their fight at all.


    The six serpents either scare those monsters away or kill them. Making sure that no one will bother with their battle.


    The area they will fight has been cleared for any kind of monsters within 20km range. And they made sure that it¡¯s not a ce for any kind of monster¡¯s nest to be. Because if that¡¯s the case, then during the fight, some monsters will appear to return back to their nest and could in a way bother the fight.


    Spot then swum very fast to where the Kraken is. To make sure that he can get there before the others arrive at the ind.


    Then even though there¡¯s nothing in front of him, Spot stopped.


    He looked around and noticed that he¡¯s already near the Kraken¡¯s teritorry. Because no other monsters dared to go near there.


    ¡°Kraken! Come out and let¡¯s y!¡± Spot shouted to call the Kraken.


    Not five secondster, Spot can already see a tentacle is approaching him. A tentacle longer than his own length.


    ¡°You¡¯re alone? And you wish to fight me? Is that bravery or stupidity?¡± the tentacle asked.


    ¡°I won¡¯t be alone. I will bring you to where my children are waiting. Let¡¯s go!¡±


    ¡°Ah, so you have chosen the battlefield. Fine, I¡¯ll y with you. It wasn¡¯t that long since west y, so I wonder what will change?¡±


    The Kraken then followed Spot to where his children are waiting.


    Spot was very fast under the sea. But the Kraken didn¡¯t lose his speed at all. In fact, if the Kraken is serious, he could be faster than Spot at full speed. At least under the sea.


    The two giant creature swim very fast. And all the other monsters within their sight were busy escaping from the sheer presenve of the Kraken alone. That shows how scary the Kraken is.


    And as they reached the destination, Spot didn¡¯t stop. The Kraken also didn¡¯t notice that he¡¯s already there.


    And all of a sudden, Spot turned around and used his breath attack on the Kraken.


    It might be underwater, but for a sea monster to attack using their breath, it was as if the water pressure is never a problem for them at all.


    The tentacle avoided the breath attack, but the real body of the tentacle, the squid body, couldn¡¯t dodge it even though the Kraken can see that attack. So the body of the Kraken received a direct hit from Spot¡¯s breath attack. But it didn¡¯t injure him at all.


    ¡°Is this how you will fight? Using a surprise attacke? Wait, what?! AAAARGH!!¡±


    While the Kraken was feeling confident that he could still win, Spot¡¯s children appeared from five different location. And each of them started attacking the Kraken with their breath attack.


    Their breath attack might be weaker than their father¡¯s breath attack. But they are still powerful creatures who have lived for centuries. They could be said as the strongest sea creatures below Spot and the Kraken.


    Spot¡¯s children released sesive breath attack. And they didn¡¯t direct their breath attack to the Kraken¡¯s main body. Because they know that it won¡¯t work at all.


    But in theirst battle, they learned one of the Kraken¡¯s weakness. It¡¯s the root of his tentacles.


    The ce where his tentacle connected to his body is weak. And at that time, the Kraken even tried to protect that ce even though their other attacks were deemed useless on his body.


    Spot¡¯s children¡¯s attack hit the base of the tentacles. And the Kraken¡¯s tentacles were ripped off of his body.


    Now the Kraken only have two tentacles left. They are stronger than the other tentacles. And that¡¯s why these two tentacles were unable to be removed even after Spot helped his children.


    ¡°As expected, it won¡¯t be so easy,¡± Spot said calmly.


    The n was to remove all of the Kraken¡¯s tentacles. Because that will make the Kraken unable to move as he wished. But there are still two more tentacles left.


    Though they need to hurry. Because the Kraken can still regenerate his lost limbs.


    ¡°You fucking bastards! How dare you do this!¡±


    The Kraken was so angry. And Spot knows that he won¡¯t go down so easily.


    ¡°It¡¯s called strategy. I learned it from the humans I¡¯ve been around withtely. He¡¯s not my master, but he¡¯s a good friend,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°Humans again! Why does everything has to be rted to a human! They asked me to destroy things! They tried to kill me! And now, they had you attack me?! Don¡¯t think that I will go down easily!¡±


    Using his magic to increase his regeneration ability, the Kraken regenerate a few of his tentacles right away. So now he has ten.


    The fight continues for much longer. And Spot and his children slowly and carefuly baited the Kraken to go to the surface.


    When they reached the surface, Spot and his children flew to the sky and attacked the Kraken from a safe distance.


    ¡°Come down here and fight for real! Are you a coward?!¡± the Kraken shouted.


    ¡°I used to be what you call prideful monsters. If it¡¯s in the past, I would even fight you even if I have to die. But now, I won¡¯t. I have a goal. Which is to help my friend to destroy the cult. The people you were involved with. They are also the one responsible in killing my original master a thousand years ago. And I will avenge my master!¡± Spot shouted.


    From the sky, Spot and his children attacked the Kraken. Thanks to their new ability to fly, Spot¡¯s children can dodge the Kraken¡¯s attack easily. They also trained to get used to his father¡¯s speed, so they can dodge the Kraken¡¯s tentacles.


    While they are fighting, the Kraken didn¡¯t notice that two of Spot¡¯s children has dived deep into the sea. He only realized it after the two sea serpents bit off his tentacles and remove them before they shoot a breath attack directly into his wound.


    This happened several times before finally, the Kraken no longer have magic to regenerate his tentacles.


    The Kraken finally no longer have the will to fight. He pledged for his life to Spot and his children. But Spot won¡¯t let him live.


    And it was the same time that Graham was above them. It took them so long that the battle on the inds have been over for a while, so Graham was asked by Victoria to check on the serpent family.


    ¡°Graham, kill this one. Maybe this will help Roy reach master level,¡± Spot said.


    And to Roy¡¯s surprise, that was indeed the case.

 Chapter 841 - 841 I’m a Master Level Summoner!

    841 I¡¯m a Master Level Summoner!


    After the first time, I deemed that attacking the Earth Dragon King¡¯s weakness is... not something that I can do.


    I can¡¯t use magic, Aura, and I didn¡¯t even use weapon. Just in case, I also didn¡¯t use Divine Vision at all. So my vision is what a normal people can see. Maybe a bit better.


    Even though I managed to punch the Earth Dragon King in the eye, he threw me off of his head. He wasn¡¯t blinded at all. His left eye is damaged though, but it will heal sooner orter. If I want to blind itpletely, I need to climb again.


    Other than his eyes, I can¡¯t find any other weakness of the Earth Dragon King. Which is why, I had no choice but to climb his body again and attack his eyes.


    Maybe I will target his nose or his tongue. Good thing that the Earth Dragon King has lost his mind. Because even if I repeat my attack, he doesn¡¯t even try to block it.


    Though he knows that I am his enemy and I must be defeated. But I¡¯m too small and his attack is too big. I can dodge him easily.


    Well, not really easily. Because it has been a long time since I have this much physical strength since I didn¡¯t use Aura. So after the first time I got thrown off his head, I had difficulties dodging the Earth Dragon King¡¯s attack.


    I can still dodge them, but barely. Though that was mostly by luck and not because of my own strength.


    Usually, I dodged my enemies¡¯ attack by dodging them by a hairbreadth. But now, even though I dodged the Earth Dragon King¡¯s attack by a hairbreadth, it was mostly by luck.


    .....


    When the dragon hammered his w down, even after I leaped to dodge it, I was still in his range. So I needed to roll to barely dodge it.


    So It took me another hour until I could climb into his head for the second time. And this time, I destroyed his left eyepletely.


    I left his right eye as it is because I don¡¯t want him to change his target to other people. Or things. Or let him destroy everything. I need him to recognize me as his only enemy.


    By this time, all the Earth Dragon King¡¯s clones had been killed by the monsters I brought here. For the other clones, I hope that¡¯s the case.


    The monsters I brought then move to another ce to defeat other monsters or people. Or anything in this ind except for us.


    Only the mindless Earth Dragon King and I are left in this area. The others are fighting somewhere while making sure that no one will bother us. Though I think I can see some vampires checking the perimeter. Making sure that I won¡¯t be bothered by anyone or anything.


    After a few hours, I managed to rip off several scales on the Earth Dragon King¡¯s back. Whenever the Earth Dragon King is shaking his body trying to get me off of his back, I would put my hand inside the opening from the scale that I rip off, and grabbed whatever it is that I can grab. Either it¡¯s the scale I grabbed from the inside, or some kind of bump, I don¡¯t know.


    All I know is that after the scale has been ripped off, even an ordinary punch can slightly hurt the dragon. And so I stayed on his back for as long as I can to give him a lot of damage.


    Finally, the dragon can¡¯t endure the pain so he rolled his body on the ground. I had no choice but to jump from there.


    But as I jumped, his wing slightly moved. And this is the first damage I took without using Aura to cover my body.


    The slight movement of his wing is already enough to m me to the ground. I can feel my left arm is broken. And seems like my ankle is twisted. But they are not something I can¡¯t endure. So I just persist and continue giving damage to the Earth Dragon King.


    It was painful. It was long. And I have to endure it.


    Everything is for my peace. For the destruction of the cult.


    Everyone is also having a hard time. I¡¯m not the only one. Everyone is fighting.


    Unlike me, they can¡¯t use Aura. But they have magic. The same with the cult.


    When I see them fighting with the conviction of what they¡¯re doing is the right thing, the only thing I can do is to prove them that we really did the right thing. That the cult is the worst. And we¡¯re trying to destroy them.


    Though is there any other reason why someone is trying to destroy the world? I don¡¯t think the Evil God is doing it out of kindness. So I know that what we¡¯re doing is the right thing.


    There¡¯s nothing to be afraid of. My current opponent is not the Evil God. Just an oversized lizard with wings on his back who can¡¯t fly and can¡¯t use magic because he got weakened so badly.


    And here, we have... just a guy. Who restrict himself from using any other means except for his own physical strength.


    Well, the only thing can do is to persist. I¡¯m sure I can defeat him. Even if it take days.


    I don¡¯t know how long it has been. We started the fight from morning. And it¡¯s already dark for a few hours. I can barely see the Earth Dragon King anymore. Good thing there¡¯s no cloud above tonight so the stars and the moon helped me see.


    I can see some blood dripping from the dragon¡¯s mouth. He¡¯s already at death¡¯s door.


    Almost all his scales on his back already been ripped off by me. And there are a lot of scratch on his body. I can even see my nail is there stuck on his flesh.


    Have they finish the fight? What about Spot and the Kraken? What about the underground base? Is the Evil God here?


    The dragon finally dropped on the ground and unable to move anymore. All I need is the finishing move that can kill him. But how? Almost all my nail is gone.


    Though I still have some in my left hand. But my left arm is broken. So I won¡¯t have any power left.


    Well, the only thing I can do is keep pummeling him then.


    The Earth Dragon King can no longer move. So this is my chance.


    Though it seems like if I want to reach master level, in the future, then I will need to fight someone at his level then. Because even this much and I barely managed to defeat him.


    ¡°...Hey, Roy. Seems like I regained my sense before death,¡± the Earth Dragon King suddenly spoke.


    ¡°Wee back. Though it will be good bye soon,¡± I said.


    ¡°That was awful of you. But I expected this treatment. Come on and give me a lot of pain then,¡± he said.


    ¡°You sound like a pervert that way. Well, I¡¯ll take that offer. But it will take a while until you will die. Sorry about that,¡± I said before I climbed on his head and start pummeling the head which I have removed his scale from. He¡¯s totally bald now.


    While I was hitting the dragon¡¯s head over and over again, I feel a certain type of sensation. It¡¯s that when my monsters defeated enemies and I was about to reach the next level.


    ¡°It¡¯s here!¡±


    Who is it? Everyone!


    Victoria, Shelia, Graham, and even Ray helped. They killed a lot of monsters. They joined the fight and helped me a lot.


    And finally, on this day, I hit the mark. I need to breakthrough by whatever means so that I can reach master level in my summoning element.


    And I¡¯m currently doing it. Defeating a powerful monsters barehanded.


    ¡°Earth Dragon King! Thank you for letting me fight you like this!¡± I said.


    ¡°Whatever! Just kill me already!¡±


    I guess the pain is too much for him. So I started giving a harder hit to the unprotected head before he finally breathe hisst.


    And I, finally reached master level.


    ¡°I¡¯m a master level now! I can make another monster as my familiar!¡±


    I shouted happily. But I forget how tired I am so I can no longer stand. And I started to fall from the giant head of the Earth Dragon King.


    If I fall like this, I would die. And I¡¯m too tired to even use my Aura.


    But before I hit the ground, someone grabbed me. It¡¯s Shelia.


    ¡°Thanks, Shelia. Can you get Graham to heal me and recover my stamina? I¡¯m so tired,¡± I said before I lost my consciousness.


    The fight was over while I was busy with the Earth Dragon King. I learned that after I woke up.


    Seems like the battle was a bit longer than expected. And they were only done a bit before I finished the Earth Dragon King.


    ¡°So, how was it, Roy?¡± Victoria asked me.


    ¡°I¡¯m a master level summoner now. It¡¯s all thanks to you, Shelia, Graham, and Ray. And the others who helped as well,¡± I said.


    After this, I will think of the next monster I will make contract with. I wonder what kind of monster will it be?

 Chapter 842 Aftermath of the Islands Battle

    Chapter 842 Aftermath of the Inds Battle


    After I finished my fight and my monsters returned to my side, Graham healed me. The broken arm is now better. And my twisted ankle is fine already. Even the bruise is gone.


    As expected of an archangel. His healing magic is so good. Though I still need to rest. Because I just damaged my own body so badly in the previous fight.


    Then I asked Victoria, Shelia, and Graham about who killed the monsterst to get me to the next level. I thought that it will take a while until I can reach master level. Because even though we have been fighting many times, it doesn''t seem to be increasing at all. My level that is.


    So I''m thinking of rewarding the monster who recently defeated someone. Because I heard that the real battle has been over for a while already.


    "Not me. There were some enemies on my way here, but the other mages managed to get rid of them first before I could do anything," Victoria said.


    She''s the one who told Shelia and Graham to kill more enemies than the others in this battle. They asked Sunsses for his instruction. And those three managed to kill the morepared to other people.


    I thought that Graham would just stay behind and heal people mostly. I never even heard of them thinking of doing it. It''s all thanks to Victoria who suggested it to them. So that even Graham fight at the frontline instead of just healing and managed to kill many enemies.


    As for Shelia, no one needs to remind her on what to do. She will just fight anyone.


    "I fought many enemies on the way here. But I don''t think it was me at that time because I was still looking for other enemies to fight," Shelia said.


    Which left Graham. Because after all, Ray is together with Victoria.


    "That might be me. But it''s not all thanks to me. I was just given the right for thest hit on the enemy. It''s all thanks to Spot and his family. They defeated the Kraken and let me have the final hit," get what they want.


    00:02


    Except for Shelia. She is also one of my lovers, but she rarely act that way. Though I think I can guess Graham said.


    Then he told me what happened.


    When Victoria and Shelia are on the way here, they also checked the surrounding area to do some clean up on the cult members who were trying to escape. And the same goes for Graham.


    But Victoria told Graham to check on the serpent family. To see if they have finished their objective. To kill the Kraken.


    And Graham arrived at a timely manner. Seems like the battle against the Kraken took a lot of effort from Spot and his children. They even told Graham that they will dive deep into the ocean to get some rest because of the long battle.


    Spot told Graham to give the Kraken the final hit in case I can reach master level. And he was right. I actually managed to reach master level thanks to him.


    "So it''s all thanks to Spot and his children, huh? Then I will reward them. You four will also be rewardedter. Think about what you want and if it''s something I can give you, then I will give them to you," I said.


    "I can take anything from you without permission anyway. So I''m fine without the reward," Victoria said.


    Right. She''s also one of my lovers even though she''s a ck Slime. And they love to use my money to get what they want.


    Except for Shelia. She is also one of my lovers, but she rarely act that way. Though I think I can guess on what she wants from me. A fight.


    "I''ll pass. If I just ask you for a fight, you will give it to me anyway," Shelia said as expected.


    "Me too. I don''t really need any reward because you already gave me many things. Though I want my sister to be healed. But that''s not something you can do, so it''s fine," Graham said.


    "You know, if I let your sister be contracted with me, she might be able to recover her sense. Even if she can''t talk, maybe her mind will still work. You''re not going to ask me that?" I asked Graham.


    "That would be great. But that means she will fight alongside you. I want you to find the best familiar for you instead so that you can destroy that cult. I think that would be better than letting my sister fight," Graham said.


    These three doesn''t need any reward from me. Even Ray refused when I asked him about it.


    Maybe it''s because I have always given them everything I can give. So it''s not like they need something else from me as a reward.


    After all, without even rewarding them, if it''s something I can give, then I would have given it to them. So there''s no point in reward.


    "I guess that''s the case with you, huh? Fine. I''ll take you back home now then," I said.


    Since there will only be investigation after this, there''s no need for the monsters to help. Except for Victoria and Ray, I brought all the monsters here back to Monsters Vige. And there are also the vampires who prefers to stay in Cassau instead of going to the Monsters Vige. So I brought them back to Cassau instead.


    I also brought back those who wants to return. They are those with the job to fight and not to investigate. Like Sunsses, Ka, Kron, and the others.


    I also brought here some people those who can investigate. They will take care of the rest since it seems like there''s no more members of the cult here.


    I checked on Spot and his children first after that. I dive into the sea while riding on Ray and see that Spot and his children are sleeping. I won''t bother them now. I''ll just let Sonia tell them that I will contact themter.


    I also checked the underground base and all the inds nearby to see if there are some more members of the cult we missed. Some of them must have escaped using portal to Monsters World or somewhere else in this world.


    Well, there''s nothing we can do about that. And it''s obvious that the cult has already know that we''re the one behind the many destroyed base thanks to the parade. After all, there''s no way anyone weaker than master level would be able to do that, right?


    Seems like it''s safe now. But just in case, for the next few hours, I will patrol the whole inds. Or should I say archipgo? There are many inds after all other than the three main inds.


    "Wendy, do you find anything good?" I asked.


    "I don''t know if it''s good or not. But it seems like this is where they mainly proceed with the experiment to artificially create master level mages from weak mages. There were only few children, but we managed to subdue them without killing them," Wendy said.


    I''m underground right now with Wendy. And seems like we found where they created artificial master level mages. Good. Because it means it will be difficult for them to create more. Especially from children.


    No wonder I see a lot of unconscious Mohawks. But they didn''t ask me to transport them first. So I guess it''s fine to let them be for now.


    There were more casualties than expected. I''m sorry about that.


    If I didn''t insist on fighting the Earth Dragon King, then I would y important role in watching everyone and making sure that there will be less casualties.


    "Don''t worry about it. In fact, it''s more of a surprise that many of us managed to stay alive this long. Your strength is the most important thing if we want to face the Evil God," Wendy said.


    "Yeah. Also, it''s great that we have another master level mage. Though this time, it''s a summoner. But at least it''s something," Sara added.


    Seems like she''s investigating other ces and came here when she saw me.


    Yeah, it''s good that I reached master level. If I didn''t persist, then I might have lost instead. If I used magic or Aura, I might not be able to reach master level. In fact, I might not be able to gain anything from this battle.


    Then I checked other ce and meet Candy.


    "Congrattions on reaching master level! How do you feel?" Candy asked.


    "Tired. After making a few more rounds, I will sleep above on the castle. If you need anything, you can wake me up. Or you can sleep with me instead," I said.


    "I''ll do thatter. I''m still busy. Though if there''s nothing important, I might just join you in the bedter. Victoria, make a huge bed for us, okay?" Candy asked Victoria.


    After that, I made a few more rounds around the archipgo before I stopped at the castle.


    It looks luxurious. Is this what they do with their money?


    Whatever. It''s time to sleep. I''m tired. I wasted so much stamina climbing on the Earth Dragon King''s back again and again.


    And this is my first sleep as a master level. Not something to celebrate since it''s just a sleep.

 Chapter 843 Helping Shirley

    Chapter 843 Helping Shirley


    I woke up in the morning when Candy came into my room.


    "Is the investigation over?" I asked.


    "There will be some people stayed here to conduct a more detailed investigation and also to be on standby in case some of the cult members will return here using portal. But yeah, we''re done. In fact, it''s already over a few hours ago. I have came here before to sleep next to you, woke up, left the room, and I have just returned back here again," Candy said.


    That''s a master level sleep. What kind of master level will I have next?


    "So, I''m going to return everyone back today?" I asked.


    "That''s the n. Though most of us are resting right now. so you can go back to sleep again," Candy said.


    "Then I will take that offer and get another master level sleep. Good night," I said before closing my eyes again.


    "Master level sleep?"


    I think Candy said that before I went back to sleep. But I don''t care. This Victoribed is so good that I instantly fell asleep after closing my eyes for a while. Or maybe I was just too tired.


    All my nails on my right hand is missing. And it''s kind of annoying. Who would have thought that losing your nails will be annoying?


    Though the annoyance still didn''t bother me at all in my sleep. Maybe because Graham''s healing magic was too good. In fact, I think I can see that my nails are already starting to grow. Maybe Graham''s healing is already closer to a master level healing magic. That is a great news.


    In a few months, after training a lot more, maybe he can regenerate lost limbs. That would be great.


    Though I will try my best to not lose any of my limbs. Even almost missing an arm was too painful for me.


    When I woke up again, I decided to bring everyone back home.


    There were no news from Shirley''s side even though I heard that some people were aiming for her life. But she can protect herself.


    I wonder what kind of idiots thinking that it''s a good idea to assassinate a master level mage? A total idiot perhaps?


    The cult must have learned that Shirley is too strong right now. And they must have learned that we have gotten rid of the inds here. They must be panicked right now.


    For now, let''s get to Shirley''s side. She should be in the vi for the royalty somewhere quiet right now. Let''s open a portal to Ang''s side instead.


    ...And it''s not quiet at all. There are battles here.


    "Ang, since when have you been fighting?" I asked.


    "Since this morning. They keeping non-stop," she replied.


    There are too many enemies here. Ang, Shirley, and the others can still fight. But I think it won''t take long before someone falls.


    "I''m still not at my 100%. But this is good enough for me to test my strength. Now that I have reached master level, I''m sure that I''m stronger than before," I said.


    "Oh, you''re a master level summoner now? That''s great! Have you decided who to make contract with?" Ang asked.


    "Not yet. But I don''t think it will be Spot or any other monsters who have joined us. It will be a waste if I do that. So maybe after a month of rest, I will travel Monsters World alone to find someone worth making a contract with," I said.


    "Okay. Then, can you get rid of those people and monsters? Many of them areing from that way," Ang said as she pointed to where most of them wereing from.


    "Is that where their base is?" I asked.


    Seeing so many enemiesing from one ce, that''s the correct assumption to think, right?


    "I don''t think so. Shirley said that it might be a trap. And when someone is trying to go over there, "Whoa! I know that reaching master level my physical strength will be improved. But bing this 00:06


    strong is still unexpected. Well, let''s use this battle to adjust to my new strength then," I said.


    there Would be more enemies from another direction. Well, now we have you, I think the burdens for everyone won''t be as much as before," Ang said.


    There are only the troops from Tatrama here except of the few from our group. Wendy was also supposed to be here, but yesterday, after my fight is over, I brought her to the castle ind. Because at that time, she said that there won''t be any problem anytime soon. I guess with how much enemies we''re fighting, the troop is still enough to stop them.


    Well, that''s to be expected. After all, this is Tatrama''s elite troops. They are the ones that I brought during my first and only training camp. So they are already stronger than any other ordinary group.


    And since no one asked me to bring more troops, we will only fight with this many people.


    "Victoria! Ray! Let''s go!"


    We move together like usual. Victoria will fight by my side as my weapon as I wore the magic armor I had with me. The cult shouldn''t recognize me yet. Though I think they should be aiming for my girls now since they didn''t hide their identities at all.


    When I swung Victorisword with Aura imbued within, I killed so many people at once. The weight is still the same as usual, but it seems as if my sword is heavier when I sliced their heads so easily.


    "Whoa! I know that reaching master level my physical strength will be improved. But bing this strong is still unexpected. Well, let''s use this battle to adjust to my new strength then," I said.


    I am too strong. I need to adjust with my new strength.


    The gap between the strength of an expert level mage and a master level mage, I can feel it now.


    My swing be lighter. But more powerful. Maybe I can be faster than Spot or Ray now.


    Well, I doubt that. Though my eleration speed will still be faster than those two. Maybe I should challenge them for a short-distance race. And show them that I''m the best!


    Well, joke aside, it''s great that I''m stronger now. So what kind of monster will be good for me to make a contract with?


    Like Ray, I think it doesn''t have to be any monster good with fighting. Someone who can support us from behind is good as well.


    Well, I will have to make a trip around Monsters World to find anything that I''m interested with. Maybe I will take a dive into the ocean for days to find anything good.


    Just in an hour, the enemies reduced so much. From the previously they outnumbered us, now we''re already outnumber them. It''s all thanks to me appearing. Though if Ang doesn''t need to mind other people, then she could have done it on her own.


    "Roy! You''ll go and check where they came from. We will stay here and wait to see if there are more peopleing!" Shirley shouted an order when she saw me.


    And I did as she says. To find that they built a camp hurriedly in the ce I''m going.


    So I killed them all. Master level mages, expert level mages, artificial master level mages, and monsters, I killed them all. None of them are as strong as the Cat-man.


    I asked some where they came from before they built their base here. But none of them speak.


    Then I got a call from Shirley that this is indeed a trap. There are other enemies, stronger than the previous ones,ing from the opposite side.


    The good thing is that Ang is at the front with everyone is behind her. So she can kill as many as possible before the others are going to help.


    Though I still opened a portal next to Ang. And after seeing that many people were killed by her, I joined the fight.


    "There''s a fight! Let me join!"


    "If you need healing, contact me right away."


    Whoa, it''s my two other familiars. Shelia and Graham. Seems like they can sense my feeling now that our telepathy has grown stronger. Thanks to me reaching master level.


    And they easily assumed that I''m in the middle of a battle. Shelia then asked toe while Graham just said to contact him if I need him.


    So I just called Shelia. And we killed all the iing enemies so easily.


    Without having to call another reinforcement, we managed to stop the attack. And some of the agents also found out where they came from from the prisoners that they tortured.


    So after we''re done with this ce, we went directly to where they came from. It''s a vige in Tatrama that no one knows. And we captured as many prisoners as possible while killing the rest.


    "I guess we''re done here. Ang, let''s go back home," I said after the fight is over.


    "Yeah. I don''t think they need us here anymore. Have you adjusted with your strength?" Ang asked me.


    "I think I have. So, let''s enjoy ourselves with the others for the next month before I leave to explore Monsters World," I said.


    Now, what should I do during my rest? Enjoying my life with my lovers obviously!

 Chapter 844 Asking Shelia for a Date

    Chapter 844 Asking Shelia for a Date


    The day after I took care of everyone aiming for Shirley, and Albert as well, I brought all the kings to a meeting. Like usual.


    "So, We have done all the big moves that we can do. There''s nothing else for us except for interrogating the prisoners and wait for the agents dispatched to report back what they have found in the investigation," Fabio said.


    "Yeah. As for interrogating, we will get Roy to bring all the prisoners we captured to Monsters World. Some earth mages wille as well to build a prison. Then for interrogation, some agents will stay while the centaurs will take care of the interrogation. With their skill of detecting the truth and the lie, they can do it better than our agent. What we need is just to make them talk. So I think it''s fine if the centaurs and the agents are staying there," Albert said.


    That''s the n.


    The agents staying in Monsters World can contact other people here with their phones. So any important information can be given in real time.


    Maybe they will contact someone during the interrogation as well. That way, the people here can hear what the prisoners are talking.


    Though it will be difficult to know if the centaurs over there in Monsters is hearing the truth or not. Because unless they spoke, the people here won''t know. And it''s not like they can just say something like it''s the truth or a lie right in the middle of an interrogation. Because the prisoners will realize that the centaur can detect truth and lies. And they might decide to just shut their mouth the entire time.


    I guess they will contact the people here after they conclude the interrogation. Or whenever they heard something important.


    We haven''t found any ce in Monsters World where magic can''t be used. Or a Magicless Area so to speak. But we have enough Magic Restraining Cors for all the prisoners. With a lot more to spare. So it should be fine to just build a prison near the Monsters Vige.


    As for master level mages who can just rip off the Magic Restraining Cor so easily, we have prepared a special type of handcuff for them. It''s all made by the cksmith. As for the material, I don''t know. But I think some agents were taking the request to hunt a type of monsters whose bones are too strong for an average master level mage to break. Though for the master level mages who have trained their physical strength for over a hundred years, they can still barely made a crack on those material. But I don''t think any of the master level mages we captured can do that.


    Even if someone managed to break free, there are some people and monsters keeping watch on them. So I''m sure it will be safe.


    After the meeting was over, I went to where those who will stay in Monsters World for interrogation. Alongside the prisoners who will never get out of prison alive.


    Why? Because they were with the cult. And I don''t know if they have some sort of reason to be with them or not. So it''s best to kill them after the interrogation is over before I could hear if they were forced to join or not.


    We have enough people who used to be with the cult. And I don''t want to get myself confused hearing why they do this or do that. Though I think the agents responsible for the interrogation will ask because who would refuse an extra help from a master level mage?


    Well, if it''s just me taking care of the prisoners, then that''s what I would do. Kill them all. Though they are the agents are responsible for them now, so I will let them do what they want. I just hope the centaurs will help them in every way.


    Celestine, Ka, and Sara are already in the previous ind where the earth spirit was. So they are not the earth mages I will bring to the Monsters World.


    This time, they no longer need to cultivate under the ground in hiding. Because right now, other than them, the other people in that ind are there to investigate that ce. There are no longer any enemies in that ce. So the earth mages can freely cultivate there.


    Yesterday after helping Shirley, when I brought Ka and the other earth mage to that ind, I saw that the Earth Dragon King was being buried by the earth spirit. So we helped the earth spirit to bury the Earth Dragon King and the other Dragon Kings. They helped us a lot after all. So it''s best to pay them some respect by burying them.


    The earth spirit can now freely explore that ind instead of being hidden. But when I asked if he wanted to go out of that ind, the earth spirit refused. I guess we really can''t bring him out of there. But it''s good enough to have his help.


    I brought the prisoners and the agents to Monsters World. Then helped the agents building a prison while some of them were watching the prisoners.


    There''s not much I need to do. It''s just heavy-lifting. And I can handle it easily.


    It should be quite far from the Monsters Vige. But all the monsters in the vige are so fast so it didn''t take long for them to get there to watch even though we only asked the centaurs help.


    Even Shelia came. She and other werewolves even helped with the heavy-lifting. Making the construction progress faster and we''re done faster than our original schedule.


    I can see the prisoners were shocked to see how a big facility can be finished so soon. Some even said that even with how many master level earth mages they have, they can''t do anything as detailed as our work.


    Well, that''s why Magic Control is important. Not that we will teach them anything about it though.


    But I think soon enough, someone will discover about magic control and spread it. I forgot when, but it should be within a few years.


    "So, what will we do now? Is there any big move that we will do after this one?" Shelia asked me.


    "Big move, huh? I don''t think we have any at all. I guess it''s time for a rest. Shelia, I don''t think I have ever asked you of this, but do you want to go on a date with me? Out of all my lovers, you''re the only one that I haven''t gone on a date that you can enjoy yet," I asked Shelia.


    The others, I have gone on a date with them. For Shelia, since she''s a monster, I don''t know what kind of date will be enjoyable for her. I don''t think a normal date on a restaurant or shopping will be enjoyable for her.


    "I have asked the others about what a date is. I don''t think I''m interested in that. I''ll just gain so much attention instead if I go to a restaurant. As for shopping, I don''t think I have anything I want to buy," Shelia said.


    "Well, a date doesn''t have to be going to a restaurant or shopping. We can just do things that you like together. Just the two of us. I think that''s fine as well," I said.


    "Then that''s easy! Let''s go hunting monsters just the two of us! We''ll explore some ce that we have never been to before. Do you have time for that though?" Shelia asked.


    "I have a lot of time. The circus won''t perform anytime soon. And it doesn''t seem that the cult will attack us anytime soon. Even if they do, someone will contact me if they need help. Also, I want to take a break from the mission for at least a month before I can go out there to find my fifth andst familiar. So let''s do it," I said.


    Shelia just nodded. Her expression didn''t change, but I can see how happy she is from her wagging her tail so strongly.


    "So cute! Then, you two can go on your hunting date while I will go and y with the girls. When will you go?" Victoria asked.


    "How about tomorrow?" I asked Shelia.


    "Okay!" Shelia said before she runs off somewhere. Thanks to my Divine Vision, I can see that she''s jumping around happily after she''s quite far from here.


    I guess she really like me, huh? I thought that at first, we only got together because her grandfather asked her to be with me. But I guess that''s not all.


    "Well, since I have a n for tomorrow, let''s finish things here sooner. The prison has been constructed, now what should I help with?"


    And so, with motivation to go on a date with Shelia, I move faster with my job so we can get it done sooner. And in just a few hours, we''re done transferring all the prisoners into the prison.


    Some tried to escape, but there''s no way that they can do that with my Divine Vision and the werewolves'' sense of smell.


    And I can see a female werewolf who will stop anyone from escaping so we can be done with it faster. She''s like a cute dog. Well, she''s a werewolf. So it might be simr.


    After Shelia, then I will go on a date with each of my lovers. Then I will have fun with Daniel and the children.


    Let''s enjoy the next month to the fullest!

 Chapter 845 - 845 A Date or Walking the Dog

    845 A Date or Walking the Dog


    ¡°So you¡¯re going on a hunt with Shelia now?¡± Ka asked.


    It has been a day since we returned from building a prison in Monsters World. And today is the day that I¡¯m taking Shelia on a date. A hunting date.


    So it¡¯s just the two of us fighting monsters left and right to an unexplored ce in Monsters World.


    Well, I can¡¯t really go on a normal date with her anywhere on Earth. The thing she enjoy is obvious. And it¡¯s different from other girls.


    Even Ang prefer to be treated like a normal girl during a date even when she¡¯s our strongest mage. She likes to go to a fancy restaurant and go shopping.


    But Shelia, even if she enjoys them, she prefer to fight. And so, our date will be to explore Monsters World.


    ¡°It¡¯s not a hunt. It¡¯s a date. And we will explore the Monsters World for a date,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re a human. And she¡¯s a werewolf. Doesn¡¯t it feel like you¡¯re just walking a dog?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Don¡¯t say it! Or I will be conscious of it! Because I really can¡¯t deny that thought!¡±


    .....


    Going on a date with Shelia is like walking a dog. So I just need her to go freely to wherever she wants.


    That¡¯s not the thought that I have to keep in mind during our date. We will just go on a date normally. We¡¯re having fun. Both of us. Walking together. Fighting monsters and if those monsters have good material for cksmithing, then I will dismantle them.


    Thest part is not normal. But for us, I think that¡¯s the best.


    I myself don¡¯t like fighting. Fighting for survival or fighting for sport. But for this time, as long as there are no exceptionally strong monster on our way, then I can easily kill them and go along with our date. They won¡¯t be enough to bother us in our date.


    ...I guess I¡¯m fine with killing but not fighting. I¡¯m just a weird guy.


    And if Shelia is the only one fighting, then I won¡¯t have to do anything. This might be good for rxation since I can just leave her be and watch her. While if I go on a date with other girl, then I would be wary of their emotion and make sure that I won¡¯t make a mistake. Not that I hate that. I still enjoy going out with them. But maybe I am more rxed with Shelia.


    ¡°I feel like you¡¯re just going to a dog park and let your dog loose. Well, as long as you two enjoy it, I guess I¡¯m fine with it. I¡¯ll stay behind so I won¡¯t bother with your date,¡± Victoria said.


    Victoria had a n to go out and y with the girls. Maybe she will ask them to model for her other clothes that she had in her mind. As long as the others are not bothered by it, I guess that¡¯s fine.


    And so, I opened a portal to the vige to get Shelia from there. Then I will open another portal to Monsters World. To a ce closest to where we haven¡¯t explored yet.


    And when I opened the portal, in front of us is Shelia in her wolf form. Not a human form or a werewolf form. But a wolf form.


    ¡°...Like I said, walking the dog,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°...I can¡¯t deny that. Well, see youter then. I don¡¯t know how long our date will be. If you need anything, contact me,¡± I said.


    I looked at the wolf Shelia and wonder if I should put a cor on her. But I rejected that idea.


    I see Shelia lowered her body. I guess that means she¡¯s letting me ride on her back. Now it¡¯s not a dog-walking date. But a wolf-riding date.


    Well, letting her take the lead is not a problem. And I don¡¯t think there will be many monsters that will be a danger to any of us.


    I entered the portal while riding on Shelia¡¯s back. We are here in the destroyed base of the cult. So we know where we haven¡¯t been to yet.


    ¡°This way, or that way? Shelia, you can choose where you want to go. Today is our date, and you can take the lead,¡± I said while pointing to where neither of us have been to.


    Shelia wagged her tail before she decided to go to the left side. Last time we¡¯re here, I think it was Graham who checked that ce. So we haven¡¯t been there. And since it¡¯s Graham, I don¡¯t think he has explored that ce far enough.


    ¡°You can run as fast as you want. Being slow is fine as well. We can enjoy our date slowly that way,¡± I said.


    Shelia didn¡¯t run so fast after I said that. It¡¯s just a normal speed of a horse. So we can enjoy the scenery slowly.


    While passing the destroyed base, I don¡¯t see anyone else here. The agents and monsters staying here have been brought back after enough time. And we thought that there won¡¯t be any other cult members going there. That¡¯s why it¡¯s empty now. Except the evidence of destruction.


    ¡°We did a lot of destruction together, huh?¡± I said.


    ¡°And I enjoy every bit of it!¡± Shelia replied happily.


    She¡¯s so easy to please. Like Lina. Though for Lina, I just need to praise her a lot.


    We are already far from the base. And the monsters we found are just weaklings. So Shelia alone can defeat them all. Even though she¡¯s in her wolf form and I¡¯m riding on her back.


    Well, I don¡¯t need to worry about falling. Victoria might not be here, but I still have Blobbies with me. Though I haven¡¯t used them as a saddle yet.


    Why would I use a saddle when Shelia¡¯s fur is so fluffy? This feeling is good.


    After getting to know more about us, I heard that Shelia took a bath more often. Swimming on theke or enter the bath in my ce. So she¡¯s very clean. She¡¯s not dirty at all.


    I just hugged Shelia from her back and enjoy her fur touching my face.


    ¡°This feel nice. I like touching your fur,¡± I said.


    ¡°I took a bath every day! It¡¯s worth the effort if you say that,¡± Shelia said while hitting a giant boar with her front paw and killing it in one hit.


    She only fought with her front paw so far. So that I won¡¯t get blood on my body. Though even if there are blood, I can just get the Blobbies to clean our bodies. Victoria and her clones can suck all the dirt and blood on our body. It¡¯s great that she can do that.


    Feeling the wind and Shelia¡¯s fur on my face is great. It¡¯s so rxing. Maybe I should go on a date more with Shelia.


    ¡°I smell the sea!¡± Shelia said.


    ¡°Hmm? You¡¯re right. That¡¯s the sea on the other side from where Andro used to fly when Kron and the others were breaking through. What will you do? Will you run on water or continue run onnd?¡± I asked Shelia.


    ¡°I like running onnd more. I will change my direction then,¡± Shelia said.


    She stopped and sniffed the surrounding area. Then she moved on the direction where she doesn¡¯t smell the sea water. Through a forest.


    ¡°Hmm... there are quite a lot of ape monsters here. They are on top of the trees. Seems like they realized that we¡¯reing their way,¡± I said.


    ¡°Let¡¯s just fight them all!¡± Shelia said.


    ¡°Do you want me to help?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Then let¡¯s see who kill more!¡± Shelia said before she threw me off her back and transforming into her werewolf form.


    I see. In the end, it became apetition.


    Well, to satisfy my lover, this is nothing. And as her master, and also the king of the werewolves, I can¡¯t just let her win.


    Let¡¯s fight a bit more seriously now.


    Seems like this is where these ape monsters are nesting. There are about thousands of them. Though it¡¯s nothingpared to the people we usually fight. And they don¡¯t seem to be able to use magic. It¡¯s all just physical strength or them throwing things at us. So it¡¯s quite easy to defeat them all.


    With my new strength as Aura Master and Master level summoner, it didn¡¯t take much effort for me to kill hundreds of them. And seeing how strong we were, most of the apes started to escape. With the biggest one, the one who might be the boss of the apes, escaped first.


    ¡°I guess we¡¯re done here. Shelia, you won¡¯t chase them?¡± I asked.


    It¡¯s not usual for her to not go after the enemies.


    ¡°No need. I¡¯m on a date after all!¡± Shelia said happily.


    She prioritizes our date more than her desire to fight? I guess she enjoyed our date, huh? Though it¡¯s just me riding on her while she¡¯s doing whatever she wants.


    To think that she will let herself lost against me in how many monsters we killed... I guess going on a date with her is the right choice.


    And so, for the next few days, that¡¯s what we do. Exploring Monsters World together and fight any monsters on the way. It seems repetitive, but I actually have fun. It¡¯s a great date.

 Chapter 846 - 846 A Floating Island

    846 A Floating Ind


    This is the third day of our date. But does it take this long for a date?


    I feel like this is no longer a date. This is more like a honeymoon.


    Though it feels more like usual exploration than a date. Because that¡¯s what we did in these past three days.


    I guess this is why the other girls didn¡¯t mind it if I stay with Shelia for this long. Because they know that Shelia would prefer fighting monsters than a regr date. So they don¡¯t feel jealous at all toward Shelia for staying with me for days.


    I do asionally got a contact from Victoria. Telling me what¡¯s happening on her side, while I told her what¡¯s happening on this side.


    Seems like they are enjoying their lives quite a bit.


    After the battle on those inds and fighting those who targeted Shirley for reaching master level, there were no movement at all by the cult. so everyone can rx for a bit. Though some were still focusing on improving their strength.


    Like Ka and Celestine for example. They are busy cultivating in the presence of the earth spirit.


    As for Sara, she¡¯s way too busy now with her duty. She even said that she will quit her duty as a noble in the future and focus on reaching master level instead.


    .....


    I think it¡¯s because Albertcked the capable people who can be appointed as a noble. That¡¯s why he picked Sara who is smarter than most agents in politic.


    Though now that she has been a noble for so long, and because of her sense of duty, she rarely have enough time to rx. So she said that she will stop being a noble in the near future.


    ...As soon as she¡¯s done with what she needs to do first. And her job keeps increasing every day. So it will still be a while until she can really be free from her duty.


    Is it that hard finding someone who can do politic? Or maybe they have to be descendant of a noble to be one? I don¡¯t know. I don¡¯t know how to be a noble. And I¡¯m not interested in it.


    Whatever. I just hope that my first air magic student to be well.


    Speaking of a student, how about my disciple, Jewel?


    With her beastform, there are not many attack that can injure her. And her lightning magic is second only to Candy. So she¡¯s already one of our strongest mages.


    In her hybrid form, she¡¯s wearing armor that can protect herself. And her physical strength also improved. And now that she has grown so much stronger, just like the other master level mages who trained their bodies, I also taught her to fight with a weapon and how to fight barehanded.


    Since she¡¯s already covered in armor, she doesn¡¯t need a shield. And if she wants to charge forward, she can transform into her rhino form. So she won¡¯t use ance either.


    Her weapon of choice is a simple one. A war hammer. And the cksmith has made one for her. It was a good weapon.


    It¡¯s amazing how a beastform mage can transform anything on their body into a beast. Even if Jewel is carrying a war hammer on her back, it will transform alongside her. So when she transformed back to her human form or hybrid form, she will have a weapon already prepared.


    How does that make sense? Magic. Because magic doesn¡¯t always have to make sense.


    ...No, magic itself doesn¡¯t make sense. And the people using them are mostly stupid as well. That¡¯s why there are wars.


    Anyway, Jewel is practicing fighting with a war hammer now. I¡¯ll spar with her when I return. Maybe she will improve by then. Though it¡¯s just a few days, so I doubt there will be any significant change.


    For now, I will enjoy my unusual date with Shelia first. And our destination this time is a floating ind in the sky.


    I haven¡¯t been around this ce before, so this is my first time seeing that ind. Though I have seen a floating ind before. That¡¯s where I first met Graham and the other angels after all. Though that one has cloud as the ground.


    ¡°So, do you want to fly into that ind?¡± I asked Shelia. The one who suggested we go there.


    ¡°Yeah. Do you see anyone there? I don¡¯t smell anyone,¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°Not yet. I don¡¯t think there¡¯s anyone there. It¡¯s just an empty ind above the cloud. Though unlike the one in the vige that can move around with the wind so we need to tie it down to the vige, this one stays in one ce,¡± I replied.


    The ind didn¡¯t move at all. Even though there are winds and I can see the clouds in the surrounding are moving, this one didn¡¯t move at all. So it¡¯s weird. And it piqued our curiosity.


    What is in that flying ind?


    It¡¯s not big, so when we get closer, I can see everything. And there¡¯s... really nothing there. It¡¯s just an ind that float in the sky.


    ¡°There¡¯s nothing here. What should we do?¡± I asked Shelia.


    ¡°I want this as a souvenir!¡± Shelia said.


    ...What? A floating ind as a souvenir?


    ¡°Are you serious?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yeah! It has been fun exploring with just the two of us. But it will end soon, right?¡±


    ¡°If you want, you can ask me to go with you on another time though,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah, but this time is this time. That will be for another time. And I want this ind,¡± Shelia said.


    ¡°Sigh... if you put this ind in the vige, if it can be moved though, people will notice. And maybe monsters and also cult members who saw it will attack the vige just because the vige is under the ind... but I bet most of you will wee it,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s right! If on Earth they are aiming for Shirley, then they can aim for our vige in this world!¡± Shelia said.


    That... is actually a smart move.


    The Monsters World should be bigger than Earth. At least it has morends than the Earth. I don¡¯t know much since I have never really travel around the world.


    There should be many other bases that the cult prepared here to tame monsters. If they see the floating ind, they would go there only to be greeted by ferocious monsters who will attack strangers.


    The only way a human can enter the vige is if the monsters recognize us. And as the werewolves and probably the weretigers as well have amazing sense of smell, they can recognize us from miles away. And if they don¡¯t recognize the peopleing, then they are enemies.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s actually a good n. But we need everyone¡¯s agreement first. Even the kings on Earth needed to be informed. Though I think anything rted to Monsters World will be mostly my responsibilities, so I¡¯m sure they will allow it if I ask them,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s good! Then let¡¯s do it!¡± Shelia said.


    ¡°Well, I need to bring them to see this floating ind first. But before that, we need to see if we can actually move this floating ind or not,¡± I said.


    Now, how do we move an ind?


    It¡¯s not big. Just around 5 km in diameter. And unlike where the angels live, there¡¯s no cloud under the ind. So it¡¯s floating on its own.


    Even when I see the inside of the ind, there¡¯s nothing wrong with it. It¡¯s just floating. What a magical ind.


    So I tried cing some stakes on the ind, and attach them with Blobbyropes. Then I tried pulling it while getting Shelia to watch if it¡¯s moving or not.


    I used a lot of my strength just to move it a little bit. But it really can move. We can bring this floating ind anywhere we wants.


    ¡°Ah! Why don¡¯t you try making a huge portal? Now that you have reached master level, you should be able to do it now,¡± Shelia suggested.


    What the hell? Now I have to listen to an idea suggested by someone who loves fighting? Where did all my cleverness disappear?


    But yeah, now that I¡¯m a master level summoner, I should be able to make even bigger portal. Maybe I can even get Andro to Earth with portal?


    ¡°I¡¯ll do thatter. For now, I will tell the others about what we found. Or maybe we should do itter and continue with the date?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Then let¡¯s this day be ourst day. I smell arge group of monsters before. How about we eradicate it for thest day of the date?¡± Shelia suggested.


    Only her would think that eradicating an entire tribe of monsters as a way to end a date. But this is a date for her to enjoy. So I guess it¡¯s fine.


    And so, before I contacted the others about what we found, we destroyed an entire tribe of insect-type monsters. It wasn¡¯t hard to do. It was just annoying that the sounds they made when flying is too noisy.


    Since I don¡¯t like the noise, I got a bit more serious and killed a lot of them. Just like usual, I kill more than Shelia could. Though since she¡¯s fine with it, then it¡¯s all good.


    Now, let¡¯s see what we should do with this floating ind.

 Chapter 847 - 847 Experimenting on the Floating Island

    847 Experimenting on the Floating Ind


    My date with Shelia is over. I think we defeated too many monsters our date. I hope we didn¡¯t disturb the ecosystem at all with how many tribes were killed by just us two.


    And now that the date is over, I told everyone about what I found. The floating ind in Monsters World.


    ¡°So, that is the ind that you told us about. Is there anything special about it?¡± Lynn asked me.


    I brought the kings here to see the floating ind. There might be a way for us to utilize that thing since we can move it manually. Though it needs some effort and stamina, it¡¯s possible.


    ¡°It floats in the sky. That¡¯s what¡¯s special about it,¡± I said.


    ¡°Is there anything else in that ind or is it totally empty?¡± Lynn asked again.


    ¡°It¡¯s empty. Other than some grass and some other ntations growing there. And those are justmon ntation that can even be found on Earth as well,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then it¡¯s useless, right? It just floats around in the sky!¡± Lynnined.


    ¡°That¡¯s not the case though. We can utilize it in various way,¡± I said.


    .....


    And not just that, the floating ind didn¡¯t float around in the sky. It stays in one spot and never move unless we move it manually. With our own strength.


    I tried to pull the ind higher in the sky where the wind was so strong. It was before I brought everyone here after my date with Shelia is over. And the result was that even with how powerful the wind was, the ind didn¡¯t move at all.


    Though we haven¡¯t tested it with magic yet. So maybe a master level wind mage can push the ind away.


    I told them all about what I knew about that ind after experimenting it for a bit.


    ¡°Really? You¡¯re right. We can utilize it well. Though we need more experiment,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°For now, we will need to test that ind first. Also, for that one ind, I suggest that we put it above the Monsters Vige. As andmark so that the cult wille and the monsters can kill them. I think the monsters will be happy. What do you think?¡±


    This time, I asked the representatives of the monsters I brought here. Though Shelia has been here from the start. But the representative for the werewolves is Red. The smartest werewolf in the tribe.


    Other than Red, Graham is here as the representative of the angels, Tia for the elves, Tiger for the weretigers, that Centaur who got contracted with the Summoner, and Arin from the vampires. Even if the vampires don¡¯t live in that vige.


    Though we have made a settlement for them to stay if they want to stay there. Because I know that even the vampires love topete.


    And all the monsters are fine with the floating ind to be above the Monsters Vige. Now that they can expect more enemiesing their way. Why do they have to be so happy about it?


    ¡°We elves can use our magic to create fences from vines. It might not be strong, but if we ce it properly, we can face the enemies easier. As for water, we don¡¯t have to worry about getting it poisoned. Theke in the vige has the water purified already with the nts we grow. Unless the poison is too strong. But if the poison is too strong, then we can see if the nts are affected. So there¡¯s no need to worry about other ways of attack as they can only fight us directly,¡± Tia said.


    So we decided that whatever the result of the experiment will be, this floating ind will be ced above Monsters Vige.


    ¡°But it¡¯s also useful for other things. For now, let¡¯s experiment with it. Those of you who are not interested, I will bring you home,¡± I said.


    Several kings returned home, but Albert and some others stayed behind. As for the mages, they will stay here. Seems like they also know what good things can this ind be used for.


    First experiment is to see if a wind mage can use their wind to move the ind. So we had Shirley, Wendy, Kron, Ang, and even Veronica who rarely go out to push the ind with their magic.


    First, it was Kron alone. But the ind didn¡¯t move. Then Shirley, Wendy, Ang, and Veronica tried it together. Pushing the ind to one direction. But they all failed.


    ¡°So even wind magic won¡¯t push that ind away. Ang, don¡¯t use offensive magic yet,¡± I said to Ang who wanted to attack the ind without instruction.


    So to move it, we need to push it with our strength. And so, we asked Kron alone to move the ind.


    He¡¯s a master level mage, so he¡¯s strong. But he needed a lot of his strength to push the ind just a bit. I think just me alone moving it will be more efficient.


    As for expert level mage, we had Ang and Veronica tried it by pulling the Blobbyropes I attached before. Just the two of thembined resulted in just a slight move. So a master level mage alone is better than two expert level mages moving them.


    We had other expert level mages, but only those two can fly tried. Though maybe if we attach Blobbyropes on pegasus, we can have sky horse carriage.


    ¡°And then I will wear a white beard and go Yo-Ho-Ho through the night,¡± Victoria added.


    That¡¯s one of the most famous fictional character in her world that I keep hearing about from her. The one that only appear once a year. A scary old man who knows all little children¡¯s secrets.


    Anyway, we¡¯re done experimenting on how we can move the ind. Next is if we can add more area on the ind.


    ¡°Ang, bring a lot of soil from the ground. As much as you can, then fly to that ind to add it. Put it on the edge of the ind and see if the new soil can make the ind bigger or not,¡± Albert said.


    Ang then fly while carrying a huge ball of soil. She split it in two and I who was there use my hand to try and fix the soil to the ind. And I fail. The soil fall to the ground.


    ¡°Let me try,¡± Ang said.


    Then she used magic to mix the soil she brought and the ground on the ind. The result was positive. So we returned back to where Albert was.


    ¡°We can add more area on the ind with the help of an earth mage. Though I don¡¯t know if there¡¯s a limit to it or not,¡± I said.


    ¡°That¡¯s amazing! Do you know what I¡¯m thinking?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°That we can have earth mage attack from the sky. They can stay in that ind and use their magic by using the ground of the floating ind. Though we need to learn more about it,¡± I said.


    Utilizing this floating ind, we can have earth mages fight in the sky. That will be helpful.


    Earth mage is the one with an obvious weaknesspared to other. Because they can¡¯t produce soil by themselves. They need to use the soil from the ground, rocks, or probably other type of minerals.


    Fire, ice, wind, and even lightning mages, can produce fire, ice, wind, or lightning. But only earth mage have to be somewhere in the presence of the earth to use magic.


    ¡°No matter what, if we find another floating ind, we will go and get it already. Then we won¡¯t have to worry about attack from the sky,¡± I said.


    ¡°Alright. Then, next experiment. Shirley, use Wind sh on that ind. Just on the edge and not the center,¡± Albert said.


    The result was amazing. Even with a Wind sh from a master level mage, only a bit of the soil got chipped off. Which means that this floating ind will be a good defense against wind mages. And if we have earth mages on this floating ind, they can attack or defend easily.


    ¡°Well, I think that¡¯s all the experiment we need. The result was great. Is there anything else?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°Yeah. My portal. I¡¯d like to see if I can open a portal big enough for this ind. I have opened a big portal before, but not this big. So I want to see if I can transport this ind or other floating inds with portal,¡± I said.


    If we can do that, then we can have bases in the sky for defense. And they can be used as watchtower as well.


    Then I brought everyone to the the floating ind as I stood at the edge and opening a portal. Sonia was there above Monsters Vige with a Blobby. That¡¯s where I will open the portal.


    Concentrate. It¡¯s just opening a portal. Bigger than usual.


    And I did it. I think I wasted a lot of mana doing it. And I can¡¯t open it longer than thirty seconds.


    ¡°Well, that works. Let¡¯s go back then. I¡¯ll get the werewolves and weretigers help me tomorrow to take this ind to their vige,¡± I said.


    If I do more, then I won¡¯t have enough mana to return everyone. So I will move it tomorrow.


    And with that my next action is decided. During the exploration for my next contracted monster, I will try to find more floating ind like this.


    A portal big enough for this one floating ind can open for just thirty seconds. I hope the other inds won¡¯t be as big.


    Though we can just make it smaller. Then we will ask Ang and the others to make the ind bigger. Problem solved.

 Chapter 848 - 848 Moving the Island

    848 Moving the Ind


    The next day, I brought all the werewolves, weretigers, angels, and even the vampires to the floating ind. It¡¯s to move it to above the Monsters Vige.


    Though it shouldn¡¯t be right above the vige. It will be put somewhere near the vige. That way, in case the ind falls, the vige will be fine.


    I brought everyone because even with how big the portal I made, I need to move it quickly before I run out of mana.


    I can move the ind by myself. But that will take too long. That¡¯s why I¡¯m getting everyone to move the ind.


    ¡°This is great! We canpete on how far we can move that ind!¡± Tiger said.


    ...I guess they will use anything as a way topete. Though that¡¯s fine if the result is positive. With everyone be even more willing to grow stronger.


    ¡°It¡¯s great that you even thought of what to do with the ind. But for now, can you all move the ind first? Once we gained enough speed, I will open a portal so we can finish sooner. Then you can set up a rule on how you want to y that game,¡± I said.


    ¡°Alright! Everyone, you heard that?! Let¡¯s finish it quickly!¡±


    Tiger is great. Seems like he¡¯s the mood-maker of the whole vige. He can raise everyone¡¯s spirit no matter what their race are.


    .....


    Seems like even each representative has their own special skill outside of being the representative of their race. I think.


    Well, that¡¯s good, right? Because their differences ended up making them even more united. Even the centaurs who just recently joined are now having fun with the others in the vige.


    I didn¡¯t bring the elves and the centaurs here because they simply can¡¯t fly. And those two are dwellers of the forest. So they both get along well with each other. That¡¯s why the centaurs didn¡¯t mind that the elves are riding them.


    The centaurs with their speed, and the elves with their agility in the forest. If we have mission in the forest, I¡¯ll ask them to help us.


    ¡°Roy! You just need to wait there and open the portal for us. We will move it on our own!¡± Tiger added.


    I guess they want to do it themselves. That¡¯s great. They can get along better if they work together more. So I don¡¯t mind it.


    Also, I don¡¯t need to waste my strength pulling the ind. So it¡¯s great for me.


    Physically, I might be weaker than the monsters. But once I use Aura, they are no match against me.


    ...I don¡¯t know though. Now that I¡¯m a master level summoner, maybe my strength without Aura is strong enough to face some of them. But yeah, using Aura, I¡¯m the strongest here.


    I guess that¡¯s why they don¡¯t want me to help. Because they know that they will have easier time pulling the floating ind.


    They don¡¯t want easier time. They are the opposite of me.


    If possible, use anything to improve yourself. They only seek strength.


    As for me, strength is just my tool to have easier time. And for me to get easy time, I need the cult to be gone.


    But that doesn¡¯t mean I will try my best in getting stronger in any way possible. Especially when I decided that I¡¯m going to spend this one month to rx. So if they told me to not do anything, I won¡¯t do anything.


    Once I¡¯m on vacation, I don¡¯t even want to train. But when I¡¯m done, I will focus on it again.


    Everyone grabbed the Blobbyropes I attached on the floating ind before. There are dozens of them. With one rope grabbed by several monsters at once. Pulling the ind together.


    I just stood there at the edge of the ind looking at where the monsters are pulling.


    I can see the ind moved. And it slowly elerated. Before long, the ind already moved quickly in the sky.


    It¡¯s funny to see arge group of monsters pulling an ind in the sky from below. If there¡¯s any human looking here, they would have approached us right away.


    Now that we have gained enough speed for me to open and close a huge portal quickly, I run toward the front of the monsters.


    When I gained enough distance, I opened a huge portal. Enough for everyone and the ind to enter.


    The monsters entered first pulling the ind behind. And I jumped to the ind with my body covered in sweats. I spend so much mana at once.


    Just a few secondster, the indpletely entered the portal. So I can close it and rest. Though after the monsters stopped, the ind slowed down but didn¡¯t stop right away.


    The monsters then realized that they shouldn¡¯t have stopped right away. So they are now pushing the ind to make it stop.


    Finally, the ind stopped. With several monsters injured from getting hit by the moving ind after they stopped. Though the angels healed them right away.


    After that, we set the ind close to the vige. Then pulled it upward so it¡¯s higher than the Angels¡¯ Sanctuary or whatever they call it. But some monstersined because it will be too high for those who can¡¯t fly. So we settle it after the elves nted some trees on that ind with long and strong roots or vines so they can pull or push the ind without Blobbyropes.


    ¡°Good job, everyone. From now on, make sure that you have several monsters patrolling to see if there are enemiesing or not. Also, some monsters should go to the ind and see from above. There could be more fight for you. But I guess you will enjoy it. Shelia! Graham! Every time there¡¯s a fight against humans who don¡¯t belong to the alliance, or powerful monsters, report to me even if the fight is over,¡± I said.


    Now the transportation of the floating ind is over. I also have ced a Blobby at where I found the ind before, so I can go there again next time.


    I want to find more floating inds. They can be useful in a war. Especially against wind mages. And if we have earth mages on standby in the floating inds, we have more ways to defend from the attack from above.


    My job for the day is done. So I return home and went to sleep right away.


    I woke up in the afternoon. Since everyone busy because I haven¡¯t asked the girls for a date yet, I just y with Daniel and the orphans. And I also went to the bar with the master level mages who are former members of the cult.


    I already know that they are not loyal to the cult, and they are actually nice guys. So I¡¯m fine with them joining us.


    If they are not loyal to the cult but in reality they are bad guys, they would have die already. I would have killed them without saying anything. But since they are not bad guys and quite enjoyable to hang around with, it¡¯s good. They are also good at taking care of children, so we let them take care of the orphanage.


    By the way, the main person who got us built an orphanage, Celestine, is now living in Consenza with her sister rather than here with the orphans she raised previously. Though she would visit from time to time. Then she also built an orphanage in Consenza. The orphans who missed her can go to that orphanage. Though they like being here so they prefer here.


    I wonder why Celestine opened another orphanage? I guess she likes kids so much that she can¡¯t have enough of them.


    When I return home after hanging out with the master level mages, it¡¯s night. Everyone is sleeping. And since I have slept after returning from Monsters World, I¡¯m not sleepy.


    Though even if I¡¯m not sleepy, I can still fall asleep just fine. But I guess I¡¯ll walk around for a bit longer.


    Where should I go? Maybe I will visit the cksmith. He usually work untilte and forgot to sleep that his granddaughter had to tell him to stop or he will continue working.


    When I visit my mansion in the capital, I can see that the cksmith is still working. While his granddaughter is already asleep.


    ¡°Hey, go to sleep already,¡± I said.


    ¡°After this. This material is so strong that I have to hit it all night with a hammer to form it,¡± the cksmith said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll do it. I have rested enough anyway. And I¡¯m stronger than you. Just give me the instruction while resting,¡± I said.


    And so, I spend the night learning to forge. This might be fun. Though I don¡¯t have anything I need to make since I already have a sword for the sword-cane. So I will probably just do this for fun.


    Maybe I will make some throwing knives. But using Blobbies are easier. And I already have the magic kunai with me. So I don¡¯t think I need it anymore.


    When I finished forging, the cksmith is already sleeping. So I woke him up and told him to go to bed before I return home myself.


    Well, other than moving the ind, there¡¯s nothing important today. Just a peaceful day.

 Chapter 849 - 849 Two More Master Level Mages

    849 Two More Master Level Mages


    One month passed real quickly when you are enjoying it.


    After the date with Shelia and moving the floating ind, I rarely returned to Monsters World. Just a few times when some monsters wanted to challenge me.


    Even though I¡¯m on vacation and I hate fighting, I still epted their challenge. Because I need to move my body so that my body won¡¯t forget how to fight. After all, the fight with the cult is still far from over.


    Other than going there to ept their challenge, I have never been to Monsters World to explore. That will be done soon after I finished my vacation.


    I went on a date with other girls during that one month. I also yed with the kids. Then I visited everyone. Like the cksmith. I tried helping him to forge weapons or armors.


    Then I visited Mellian. Just a short visit. Because I don¡¯t know what Hill will ask me to do there. Though it was by chance that there was a Monsters Stampede at that time.


    The monstersing are weak. And everyone is now much stronger than before. So I don¡¯t need to help. I just watched how Hill and the others were doing.


    Though the whole time, Victoria was staying with Hill and talked about many things. Mostly about her novels. Because Hill is after all a big fan of her work.


    Then I visited Oleg in Melk. He¡¯s doing well there being a family-man. Just asionally went for subjugation mission when he¡¯s bored.


    .....


    I also visited Bernard¡¯s mansion. When I got there, Bernard, Toni, and their siblings other than Fabio the king, were enjoying themselves together. As siblings. No longer fighting each other for the throne.


    Well, after all, the king has been decided. It was Fabio.


    Luna and Carmen were there as well. And since there were some of them who doesn¡¯t know me, Bernard introduced me as the guy who make Fabio the king and also the guy who actually saved their father.


    I heard from Bernard that they are shocked when they realized that their father, the former king, Harold, was swapped. Especially their mother who slept with the fake Harold. And now, their hatred to the cult grew.


    They were gathering just to have some good time. No more fighting among themselves. They each have apologized to each other. Though I have to say that it was amazing that Bernard was the only one other than Toni who didn¡¯t care about the throne.


    There are no more bad blood between siblings. They are now focusing to make their territory safe and grow stronger.


    After that, I went to Varadis. I want to hang out with old man Henry, but he¡¯s busy cultivating. He really wants to reach master level as soon as possible to have a long life.


    Julia was busy as well. Knowing that the enemies from now on will only be stronger, and some of us have reached master level even though she was supposed to be the first to reach expert level, she wanted to grow stronger. Though her progress in cultivation is not as fast as old man Henry, her foundation is more solid because she did it patiently.


    Well, one only seek a long life, while the other seek strength. So it¡¯s obvious who will get stronger.


    And old man Henry¡¯s real powere from his knowledge about politic. So the longer he live, the better it is. Politically at least.


    Though he won¡¯t be the king his whole life. But he can be the advisor at least. and if people learn that he¡¯s a master level mage and live a long life, no one would dare to fight him.


    Just like what happened in Tatrama. Once those who nned for the coup learned that Shirley reached master level, there are no more issue about coup from the noble.


    Whoever reach master level first between Julia and old man Henry, the nobles won¡¯t dare to make any move. Though because of the previous event when almost everyone got corrupted by the cult, I think it¡¯s safe to say that no one would ever think that way anymore.


    Maybe that¡¯s the difference between Tatrama and other countries. Because Albert did things very well that there¡¯s no trace of the cult left behind. So the nobles thought that the cult is just a fake story.


    Even Consenza had incident where someone was attempting for a coup. Though Lynn managed to win.


    When I visited Consenza during my vacation, it was a peaceful country. So peaceful that I didn¡¯t see the Emrpess work at all. Maybe it¡¯s because most of the duties were taken care of by udia.


    Sometimes, I would stay in another country for days. Either alone or with someone else.


    It¡¯s a peaceful month. Though I hate the fact that we found no progress at all with the cult.


    This time, it was as if the cult disappearedpletely. But we know that it¡¯s not over yet.


    We also weed our new master level mages! Celestine and Ka!


    As we expected, Celestine reached master level first among the earth mages. If Veronica focused more on her cultivation, then she would be the first to reach master level. But she¡¯s still in expert level. But that¡¯s fine. She¡¯s growing at her own pace.


    We protected Celestine in that same ind where the earth spirit resides. And Celestine managed to breakthrough safely. There are no trace of the cult attacking at all. Only the monsters.


    But they¡¯re all too weak, so Celestine could breakthrough safely even with not much people and monsters protecting her.


    The same goes for Ka. She broke through to master level in that same ind a week after Celestine did. And the monstersing were far fewer than when Celestine was breaking through.


    As for Sara, I think it will take some time until she reach there. But that¡¯s fine.


    Maybe Sara wanted to reach master level in her air element first? That¡¯s fine as well.


    Now that one month vacation period is over, I guess it¡¯s time for me to search for another monster to make a contract with.


    I don¡¯t know how long the journey will take. Though I can just go home whenever I want with portal.


    I also want to find other floating inds. They are useful for various kind of strategy.


    From being used like a watch tower, to defend against wind mages, so earth mages can fight in the sky, and even letting the elves use their nt magic to grow something on the floating ind.


    By the way, about the floating ind above the Monsters Vige, the monsters really did use it as a way topete in power. To push it or pull it around the vige.


    And seems like there haven¡¯t been any members of the cult who saw that ind from far. After all, it¡¯s not that big. Even Andro is bigger than that and the cult haven¡¯t discovered him yet.


    But the monsters enjoyed ying with that floating ind, so everything is okay.


    ¡°So, I¡¯m thinking of going to Monsters World tomorrow. My goal this time is to look for a monster that I can make a contract with,¡± I said.


    ¡°So it¡¯s tomorrow. You had a long vacation, Roy. Though it¡¯s not like we have found anything anyway. You can go. But if we need anything from you, please return right away,¡± Albert said.


    I have informed the others about my departure. And this time, I¡¯m telling Albert.


    I need to inform everyone even if I have portal. Because then if they contacted me but I¡¯m unavable, they will know that I¡¯m not in a situation where I can speak.


    I asked Graham and Shelia if they wanted to join my adventure. As expected of Graham, he refused. As for Shelia, she surprisingly refused.


    ¡°I think there will be less fight than when we were on a date. So I¡¯ll pass. I¡¯ll just get some of us from the vige for our own adventure,¡± Shelia said.


    If that¡¯s what she feels, then I¡¯m fine with it.


    And so, I will only go out with only Victoria and Ray. The others won¡¯t join us.


    Though some said that they might ask me toe with me if they¡¯re bored because there¡¯s no trace of the cult at all for a month already.


    When the time arrives, I opened a portal to where I found the floating ind. We will move from here in hope that we can find other floating inds.


    ¡°So, since I¡¯m interested in sea monsters, should we go to the direction of the ocean?¡± I asked Victoria.


    ¡°Once we stay in the ocean, it will be hard to find a ce to rest or even find a ce to mark with my clones. I think we should look around thend first,¡± Victoria suggested.


    ¡°Land it is. Though I don¡¯t think I will find any great monsters for me to make a contract with. But it¡¯s not like we have any clear destination. Let¡¯s just explore the Monsters World as much as possible before the cult make any move,¡± I said.


    And so, my search for thest familiar begins now.

 Chapter 850 - 850 An Island, a Dragon, and Eggs

    850 An Ind, a Dragon, and Eggs


    It¡¯s been a week since we traveled the Monsters World. During that time, we fought a lot of monsters.


    No, that¡¯s wrong. I mean killing them is the right word. Because it can¡¯t be considered as a fight.


    Though I make sure that I only kill those who are in the way. Because Ray¡¯s speed is fast enough to outrun those who are chasing.


    This also mean that I haven¡¯t found any monster good enough to be myst familiar. Well, it¡¯s not like finding one is easy.


    At least during this one week, I found two more floating ind. They are considerably smaller than the previous ind I brought to the vige. And just me alone is enough to move the ind with portal. So I don¡¯t need anyone¡¯s help to transport them.


    As for where I transported them, I had them ced above the vige first. I only found two ind while there are four big countries in the continent. So I at least need to find two more.


    I thought that I would dive into the ocean after the first week since I haven¡¯t found any good monster. But this is important as well.


    Having earth mages waiting in a fort in the sky will increase our defense from the enemy¡¯s wind mages or flying monsters. So it will be great to have a lot floating inds.


    I have traveled quite far from where I found the first floating ind thanks to Ray¡¯s speed. and the terrain has changed so much. From a forest, to a mountain, to ake, to a desert. So I¡¯m sure that the floating inds are not located only in one area. I need to look further to find more.


    .....


    Once I found several more ind, I will go to the ocean. Because I haven¡¯t found any satisfying monster onnd. Someone strong enough or capable of something amazing to help.


    We have enough monsters and mages who can fly. So the aerial battle is not a problem. And with the floating inds, we will be stronger. As fornd, it was never a problem.


    But for water, we only have Spot¡¯s family, and several water mages. With Carmen being the strongest water mage and also the mother of the current king of Arturo, she¡¯s quite busy. So it¡¯s not like she can fight all the time.


    Which means for the sea battle, we can only count on Spot and his children.


    I know that they have grown stronger than when we first met. Spot¡¯s children can even fly now even though they haven¡¯t been able to fly for years. Maybe centuries. I don¡¯t know how old they are.


    I heard that Spot is already a grandfather. Spot¡¯s children already have children as well. But they are still too young and too weak, so adding them into the team is impossible. Because they will just die if the enemy is too strong.


    That¡¯s why I want to have a sea monster to help. Maybe that mermaid that Victoria talked about in the past. Half human-like feature, and half fish-like feature.


    ...Is it a half upper-body and half lower-body, or half right and half left? And which part is the human and which part is the fish?


    If the upper body is the fish and lower body is human, that¡¯s weird. But maybe they will be useful innd battle as well.


    Maybe I¡¯ll find stronger monster rather than smarter monster that can speak. Maybe I¡¯ll find a king of a tribe again. Like that pink orca that Spot and the others fought before.


    I can only look for one after I go to the ocean. For now, it¡¯s the floating ind.


    And again today, I found another one. This one is bigger than the previous two, but it¡¯s still smaller than the first ind I found.


    But the different thing that this ind has is that there¡¯s a monster nested on it. A dragon. With several eggsying there.


    From the look of it, she might be a wind dragon.


    I heard from the Dragon Kings that the female dragons are bigger than the male dragons. Even bigger than the Dragon Kings themselves. But they are weaker in a fight.


    Though that¡¯s not an important information to me. What I need to know is that if they are hostile or not. Because I want to take the ind.


    By the way, what about Andro? I think he doesn¡¯t have any element. He¡¯s just big. And strong.


    Since this one is a dragon, maybe I can talk to her to move.


    ¡°Victoria, there¡¯s a dragon on that ind. Be polite when speaking,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re the one who need that advise the most. Don¡¯t kill anyone if they can be our ally,¡± Victoria said.


    She¡¯s right. Maybe if I showed proof that I killed the Wind Dragon King... that will only make her hostile. Well, whatever. Let¡¯s ask her to move so we can get the ind. If she wants to move to our vige, that¡¯s much better.


    So we ride to that ind and about to greet the dragon when she greeted me first.


    ¡°Why do you smell like the Dragon King?¡± the dragon asked.


    ¡°Because I killed the Dragon King?¡± I replied.


    ¡°And there it is. Now we are enemies,¡± Victoria added.


    Yeah, I guess I said the wrong answer. Though it was true.


    The dragon turned hostile toward me instantly. Should I kill it right away?


    ¡°You killed our king?! What did we do wrong?!¡±


    ¡°Well, the Dragon Kings, not just one, but four of them, asked me to kill them because they don¡¯t want to be under the real enemy. When I met them, they were already tamed and it took a lot for them to resist their orders. Even if I kill the ones who make contract with them, they will end up dead. So they asked me to kill them instead,¡± I said.


    The dragon didn¡¯t move. She just stood there with her wings spread open to protect her eggs. So I continued talking.


    About how I met the Dragon Kings, how I asked them to teach us something, and how I killed them. including how I asked the Earth Dragon King for a fight instead of instant death.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s the truth. What do you think?¡± I asked the dragon.


    ¡°How would I know if that¡¯s the truth or not? I¡¯m not a centaur. All I know is that you have the smell of a Dragon King,¡± the dragon replied.


    ¡°Should I bring a centaur here then?¡± I asked.


    Should I just kill her and get it done sooner?


    ¡°I¡¯ll pretend that I believe you. So if you really helped the Dragon King, it shouldn¡¯t be a problem for you to bring a dragon here to prove that you¡¯re stronger than a dragon. Once you do, then we can talk,¡± she said.


    Bringing a dragon here? That¡¯s easy.


    After she said that, I called Andro to see if I can open a portal in front of him so he can see this dragon. And Andro agreed.


    ¡°I will open a portal for a Kaiser Dragon that you will meet. Here we go,¡± I said as I about to open the portal.


    ¡°Wait, a Kaiser Dragon?! What?!¡±


    She¡¯s shocked when she heard that I¡¯m calling a Kaiser Dragon. But I ignored her and opened a portal to right in front of Andro. With Sonia¡¯s help as she float in front of Andro.


    ¡°Hmm? It¡¯s you. It has been a long time ,¡± Andro said.


    ¡°Wait, you know her?¡± I asked Andro.


    ¡°She¡¯s my granddaughter. So of course I know her,¡± Andro said.


    ¡°So you¡¯re a wind dragon?¡± I asked again.


    ¡°No. Kaiser Dragon is a bit special,¡± Andro said.


    I guess I¡¯m right that he¡¯s not an elemental dragon then.


    So... I just identally reunited a grandpa and his granddaughter? Now what?


    ¡°Are they your eggs?¡± Andro asked.


    ¡°...Yes,¡± the dragon replied.


    ¡°Do you want them to hatch safely?¡± Andro asked again.


    ¡°...Yes.¡±


    ¡°Then you can be safe if you¡¯re with him. He built a vige full of monsters. If youe, then all of them will help protecting you,¡± Andro said.


    Though they will happily ept if there are more enemiesing instead of focusing on protection. But I can trust the angels at least to protect her and her eggs.


    Wait, so Andro is now asking her toe to our vige to stay?


    ¡°Can he be trusted?¡± the dragon asked.


    ¡°Yes. He saved me before,¡± Andro said.


    All I did was cleaning up the monsters on his back and scratched it. Even if I didn¡¯t do that, he will still be alive. Angry all the time, but alive.


    ¡°...Fine. I¡¯ll go to that vige then,¡± Andro said.


    ¡°Good. I will be on my way there then. Then we can talk more. As for your eggs, you can let the monsters there to protect them. If Roy tell them to do it, they will,¡± Andro said.


    Wait, so he¡¯s ordering me now?


    Whatever. It¡¯s good at least to have another floating ind and a dragon.

 Chapter 851 - 851 Baby Dragons

    851 Baby Dragons


    ¡°So, where will I stay?¡± the dragon asked after I brought her, her eggs, and the floating ind here to the Monsters Vige.


    ¡°If you need to stay high in the sky, then I suggest you stay in that cloud. That¡¯s where the angels are residing. Though if they don¡¯t allow it, then I guess you will have to stay in that biggest floating ind there. Though you might be moving around a lot since the monsters here will try to push that thing around for sport,¡± I said.


    ¡°Well, I don¡¯t really need to be in the sky. So I¡¯m fine with being in the ground. Though being in that cloud seem interesting,¡± the dragon said.


    ¡°Then I will ask the angels if you can stay there,¡± I said.


    I didn¡¯t contact anyone beforehand so my presence here is quite a surprise for the monsters. But they know me. They know that I sometimee here uninvited. But that¡¯s fine. Because I¡¯m like the king in this vige.


    I also told them that I would bring all the floating inds here when I found one. So they already expected that if Ie here, it would be to bring another floating ind.


    But what they didn¡¯t expect was for me to bring a dragon here. And not just a dragon, but a mother dragon. With 5 eggsying beside her.


    Apparently, a mother dragon doesn¡¯t need to warm the egg with their bodies like a chicken or most birds. But she¡¯s still protecting her eggs. Just like any creatures, I guess. Though I don¡¯t know if all monsters are the same.


    The monsters then approached us since they are curious about the dragon. None of them are hostile because I¡¯m the one who brought the dragon with me. I just hope that they won¡¯t steal the eggs.


    .....


    ¡°Here¡¯s another addition to the vige. A wind dragon and her eggs. I want you all to let her stay here. Graham, is it okay if she stays on that cloud?¡± I asked Graham while pointing at the Angel¡¯s Sanctuary. Or the cloud that we can step on. That has been attached to a tree with several vines.


    ¡°Sure. There are some spaces since some of the angels started living down there. They said that it¡¯s easier to fight or watch a fight from down there. So there are some opening above,¡± Graham said.


    Just like that, the dragon is allowed to go to the cloud. So we moved her eggs to that cloud.


    We asked the elves to built a nest for the dragon and her eggs. It¡¯s done quickly because they are using nt magic.


    ¡°Is she a good addition to the team?¡± Shelia asked.


    The monsters are still there in the cloud asking me if the dragon is a great addition to the vige.


    ¡°She¡¯s Andro¡¯s granddaughter. As for whether she¡¯s strong or not, you can ask to her about it. Well, since she¡¯s a dragon and a direct descendant of Andro, she might be strong. But ask her first if she wants to fight or not. Also, Andro is supposed toe here soon to meet her. Make sure that her eggs are safe,¡± I said.


    Hearing that she¡¯s Andro¡¯s granddaughter, that¡¯s good enough for the monsters to not be hostile to her. They have experienced Andro¡¯s intimidation. And some even fainted because of that.


    I¡¯m sure none of them want to be affected by that intimidation again.


    After saying a few more words, Andro then arrived. I guess he was nearby when I called him.


    The dragon left to meet Andro while leaving one angel to protect the dragon eggs. And I bid my farewell to return back to where I met the dragon. I will continue my journey from there.


    If it¡¯s an ind that size, I should be able to transport another two more. So I will look for them again. Though I don¡¯t think I will find anymore ind today.


    And one week after the dragon moved into the vige, I found two more floating inds. I brought them all to the vige.


    When I brought the floating inds, I see that the dragon has gotten along with the others there. Seems like she¡¯s also a fighter and love fighting. Though she refrains from doing it at least until her eggs hatched and the baby dragons appear.


    ...I want to see a baby dragon hatched. So I asked Graham to inform me if the eggs will hatch.


    And today is the day. So I opened a portal to the Monsters Vige to watch the miracle of birth.


    Yeah, as a doctor myself, I have delivered a lot of babies in my past life. And it¡¯s something that I don¡¯t mind doing it again and again.


    Then I got a message from Ka to ask me about my current situation. So I told her about the dragon.


    ¡°You never told us anything about a dragon! Take us there now!¡± I guess everyone wants to see the eggs hatching.


    ¡°Victoria, did you forget to tell them about the dragons?¡± I asked Victoria.


    ¡°I thought that you wanted to be the one telling them about it,¡± Victoria said.


    I guess it¡¯s my fault then. Let¡¯s just stop the exploration and bring everyone over.


    I thought that I would be able to continue my exploration after watching the eggs hatched. But I guess I¡¯ll take a one day break today.


    Everyone is here. Even Andro. He¡¯s pping his wings quickly so he can float in one spot the whole time.


    I introduced them all to the dragon and soon after that, I see the baby dragons started moving inside the eggs one by one.


    I have watched the baby dragon grows inside the egg. And I think everyone is healthy. Though one dragon is different than the others. But I didn¡¯t tell anyone about it. Because I don¡¯t know if it¡¯s normal or not.


    Though someone asked me about what I see.


    ¡°Roy, you can see inside the eggs, right? Is there anything wrong with my great grandchildren?¡± Andro asked.


    ¡°Well... four of the eggs are fine. But one is different. While the other four¡¯s bodies are big enough to fill the egg, that one is much smaller than the eggs. There are some space left inside the eggs. So even though that one seem to be the first one to move, he hasn¡¯t break the egg yet,¡± I said.


    ¡°A small dragon from a big egg? Don¡¯t tell me...¡± Andro said.


    What? It¡¯s something even better than a normal dragon? Or is this one wed?


    When I thought so, everyone now can see the eggs movement. And one by one, the four eggs started moving.


    Cracks appeared on the eggs as a dragon heading out of there. One by one, four baby dragons came out of the eggs.


    ¡°So cute!¡±


    Yeah, that¡¯s the girls¡¯ reaction seeing the birth of baby dragons. And when I said the girls, it¡¯s just the female humans. The female monsters didn¡¯t react as such.


    After they were born, they instantly recognize their mother. Then their attention turned into the eggs they were hatching from. And they started eating those eggs.


    ¡°Is that normal?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yeah. Dragons eat the shell of the egg they were hatching from. Even if there are other eggs, they won¡¯t pay attention to them. Just the shells from their own eggs,¡± Andro said.


    I guess Andro would have a lot of experience watching baby dragons hatched.


    ¡°If I¡¯m not wrong, it¡¯s because the hatchlings were looking for the nutrients from the eggs. That¡¯s why they are eating the shell of the eggs they hatched from. As for why they didn¡¯t target other eggs, I don¡¯t know.¡±


    That¡¯s Victoria with her knowledge that most people here don¡¯t know. We just let her talk because what she said might be correct since there¡¯s no schr here who researched on dragons.


    If she¡¯s right, then being the smallest could be good for them. Because that means they consumed more nutrients as a baby than the other siblings.


    So I checked on the smallest dragon which is still inside the eggs. Now that I heard about it, I can see that when the dragon is opening and closing his mouth, he¡¯s actually swallowing the liquid inside the egg. And he quickly grow bigger. Once he swallowed everything, he could be the biggest dragon.


    ¡°The small dragon grow bigger so quick! His body is almost as big as the egg now. And it will get bigger again!¡± I said.


    ¡°As expected. Once that egg hatched, the dragon will be bigger than the egg itself. If that one can break out of the shell,¡± Andro said.


    Then he exined what he¡¯s talking about. From his own experience watching so many dragons hatched. And hos own past experience.


    He always felt that some eggs have smaller dragons in them. But then suddenly, they grew bigger.


    And he knew instinctively that¡¯s the birth of another Kaiser Dragon. The same species as he is.


    Unfortunately, before they could break out of the egg, they died inside. That¡¯s why he¡¯s still the only Kaiser Dragon in this world. At least we haven¡¯t found another one yet.


    ¡°So, if this one could hatch, this might be a Kaiser Dragon?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. If not, then his fate will be the same as the rest,¡± Andro said.


    ¡°Can we help by breaking it out from the egg?¡± I asked.


    ¡°You shouldn¡¯t. If he can¡¯t do it himself, then he will only be a weak dragon for the rest of his life,¡± Andro said.


    And so, we waited. For hours. And I see everything inside the egg.


    And finally, the egg started cracking. Even if the dragon is bigger than the others, this one shell seems to be stronger than the others.


    Everyone prayed for the health of the future Kaiser Dragon. And he finally came out with a loud and cute roar.


    ¡°Roaarrr!¡±


    And the second Kaiser Dragon was born. Or hatched. Whatever.


    The others even sweating just to wait for this one to hatch. And now we all know that this one is a fighter.


    ...Though I don¡¯t think that this one and his siblings will help in the fight against the cult. I hope they don¡¯t. Because I don¡¯t want to wait for them to grow to destroy the cult.

 Chapter 852 - 852 How a Kaiser Dragon Grow

    852 How a Kaiser Dragon Grow


    ¡°Oh, look at how baby Andro look like!¡± I said when the baby Kaiser Dragon was born.


    He really look like the small version of Andro. A Very small version. When I look at him from so far away.


    And when I said so far, it means back when I was cultivating my air magic in space. Looking down from there at a moving continent. Because Andro was just so gigantic.


    ¡°He is my great grandson after all. Of course he¡¯s simr to me,¡± Andro said.


    Right. I¡¯ll call this one Baby Andro for now. It¡¯s not like they gave each other names.


    When he grows up, he will be Kid Andro. Then Juvenile Andro, Young Adult Andro, and finally, Andro Mk. II.


    If he goes into rebellious phase, then it will be Rebellious Andro.


    Baby Andro looked around at the surrounding. Then she recognized his own mother before paying attention to his great grandfather. Does it mean they recognize their own species right after they are born?


    I guess I can say that... human babies are the stupidest baby. Well,pared to other creatures babies, human babies are just so... different. They need to be taught well. While monsters or even animals babies will be able to grow on their own by just their own instinct.


    .....


    Even before they were born, they need to fight. Though maybe human babies are the same. But I don¡¯t know since I haven¡¯t seen the inside of the body of a pregnant woman much after I returned back in time. I think Marie¡¯s body was the only one I¡¯ve seen. But her case is different than ordinary pregnancy.


    As for other pregnant women, I didn¡¯t really care about them other than checking their health.


    Though as a doctor, I always feel and also witnessed that it was the mother who fought harder than the baby. Maybe they both work hard together for the baby to be born.


    If I¡¯m someone who wants to continue being a doctor after I returned back to the past, and wanted to focus on that, then I would have used this Divine Vision of mine to examine many things that I haven¡¯t known yet. But I¡¯m not. I¡¯m a fighter more than a doctor now.


    Though maybe it¡¯s best if I could spare some time to research more on human body. Maybe I can save more people that way. Or at least I can have more things to teach other doctors so they can be the one saving lives.


    With how much I have taught the doctors, the development in medicine should progress at a faster rate, right? I can leave the rest to Sophie and other doctors then.


    Back to the Baby Andro. He¡¯s still looking around as if he¡¯s still hungry. Maybe it¡¯s because he¡¯s a Kaiser Dragon that he needs more food right after he was born.


    ¡°By the way, Andro, what do you eat every day?¡± I asked Andro.


    ¡± I usually eat any kind of birds and flying monsters that flies near my head. Once that baby became as big as me, he won¡¯t need to eat much anymore. We can even eat a small bird and that¡¯s enough tost for months, years, or even decades,¡± Andro said.


    ¡°I see. As for me, I like eating much. So I can¡¯t imagine that kind of life,¡± I said.


    Maybe I should bring Baby Andro some food then.


    Just as I thought of that, Baby Andro looked at Jewel. She was excited to see baby dragons were born. And she was so close with Baby Andro.


    Baby Andro then quickly opened his wings, and flied toward Jewel with his mouth open. He wanted to eat Jewel.


    But before he could reach her, I was already there. So, Baby Andro is biting on my right arm instead of biting Jewel.


    ¡°Whoa, what a strong jaw. Any ordinary people would have their arm ripped by his jaw. Also, Jewel, and the others here, don¡¯t get too close to the baby dragons. They are still babies after all. And they are also wild monsters. So they might attack you right away or even kill you. Keep your distance,¡± I said with a baby dragon hanging on my arm.


    ¡°Oh, sorry. I guess we spooked them,¡± Jewel said.


    With his strong jaw, even though I¡¯m a master level summoner now, I still need Aura to protect my arm. He¡¯s just so strong. If it¡¯s Andro, then my arm would have been ripped right away.


    ...No, that¡¯s wrong. If it¡¯s Andro, then he would swallow the whole vige with just a bite.


    And this baby who is biting my arm will grow that big?


    ¡°Andro, how long did it take for you to be that big?¡± I asked Andro.


    ¡°Well, as a baby, he will eat a lot. And when he grows a little, the food intake will not be as much as before. Even if he doesn¡¯t eat much, his body will continue to grow. If I have to say, rather than eating food, we consume magic in the surrounding area. That¡¯s how we get bigger. And that¡¯s why after your friends broke through on my back, I also grow slightly bigger than before,¡± Andro said.


    Wait, he¡¯s bigger than before? I don¡¯t know that! And how would I know that if he¡¯s already big as it is?


    ¡°Which means food is only important for you as a baby. Well, it seems like it won¡¯t be hard to raise him in this vige. Everyone loves to fight. And they would always have a lot of leftover because they hunt more than they eat,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then it¡¯s good that I moved here. Also, since the eggs hatched fine here, there will be other dragonsing,¡± Andro¡¯s granddaughter said.


    ¡°Wait, what? What do you mean by that?¡±


    Apparently, when a baby dragon hatched, other dragons, even if they are of different element, will know that instinctively when they are nearby. And that will tell them that this ce is safe for them toy their eggs.


    But what do they mean by safe ce? I mean, isn¡¯t there a nt named after their dung which makes most monsters unable to get close to that nt? Then shouldn¡¯t a real dung be working more efficiently than the fake one?


    Thought it must be because the monsters have started getting used to it so that even with the nts nearby, they can just enter the area so easily. Maybe it¡¯s all because we have Andro.


    Then, if Victoria wants to enter that ce protected with that flower, she should be able to enter, right?


    So many questions. But I¡¯ll let Albert and the others asked the dragons about it. I¡¯ll just ask the things I care about.


    ¡°So, there will be dragons living in this vige. Is that right?¡± I asked.


    Of course the monsters here, hearing that question, they became slightly excited to the fact that there will be more friends they can y with. And when I say y, it means fight.


    And since the dragon confirmed that she;s fine with fighting, there might be other dragons feeling the same way.


    ¡°Yes. They should being from now if they are nearby,¡± the dragon said.


    ¡°Everyone, you hear that?! If there are any dragons who have been tamed by the cult, they will also notice it. And there will be more enemiesing. Prepare yourself!¡± I said. Acting like a king.


    ¡°WHOOOAAAAAA!!!¡±


    Obviously, they are happy with it.


    I guess for a dragon to seek safety, the number one being who is most likely to put them in danger is human. I must not forget about it.


    ¡°Well, I guess it¡¯s time to leave. I will also resume my journey tomorrow,¡± I said before I was about to open portals for everyone to return.


    ¡°Journey? You¡¯re going somewhere?¡± Andro¡¯s granddaughter asked.


    ¡°Yeah. I¡¯m looking for a monster that I can make a contract with for thest spot as my familiars. We¡¯re at war and I want to grow stronger and get more reinforcement. Which was why I built this vige,¡± I said.


    Though that was a lie. I thought about that long after the vige was built. After the elves and the angels joined the vige. Not when I first built it.


    ¡°Then I might help you. As a thank for letting us stay here,¡± the dragon said.


    ¡°Oh, that¡¯s great!¡±


    ¡°Then, is there any requirement to be your familiar?¡± the dragon asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t have any at the moment. But if it could fight underwater for a long time, that would be great,¡± I said.


    Our biggest weakness at the moment is how weak we are at the sea. And how we can only depend on Spot and his children to fight there. With me fighting underwater asionally.


    ¡°Then I suggest you go to this one ce. It¡¯s close to the ce where we met. That one almost ate me whole when I flew over the sea before Iid my eggs. Maybe you can go there and see if it¡¯s a right monster for you,¡± the dragon then told me the location of where she found that monster.


    ¡°Thanks for the info. I¡¯ll go there tomorrow,¡± I said.


    I don¡¯t know if it¡¯s a good choice or not. But I know that if it could eat a dragon whole, then it should be strong. I¡¯ll go check it out tomorrow.

 Chapter 853 - 853 Continue Searching

    853 Continue Searching


    ¡°Leaving again?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°Yeah. I hope can get myst familiar as soon as possible. After that, I will try to get along with it well from then on. So that when we face the cult again in the future, it will cooperate with me willingly,¡± I replied.


    It¡¯s the day after Baby Andro was born. The newborn Kaiser Dragon was so hungry all the time that if he wasn¡¯t given enough food, he would eat everything. Though I heard thatst night, Baby Andro finally stopped eating and sleeping well.


    From what Andro said, it will goes on for a few more days. Then the Baby Kaiser Dragon won¡¯t have to eat as much as before.


    Just a baby and that thing eat everything. Even I had some problem making him let go of my arm yesterday. If I use too much force, I might end up killing him. And if I don¡¯t use force, that Baby Andro will continue hanging on my arm with just his bite.


    Seems like once he bites something, he will not let go of it at all. Good thing that he only bit me and not anyone else.


    It took some time to adjust my strength to finally get him off of my arm. Because when I tried to remove him, he would strengthen his bite. So I need more power.


    Finally, when he used his full power to bite me, it started to hurt me. Not to the point that I bleed, but it left bite mark on my arm. Though it¡¯s gone now.


    Even though I¡¯m an Aura Master, a bite of a dragon chic could harm me. Kaiser Dragon is truly scary. And he will grow as big as Andro.


    .....


    Though there¡¯s one thing that Andro told meterst night. He called me using magic on the phone I attached on his head and only told me about it.


    He will be gone. The safe birth of a new Kaiser Dragon meant that the former Kaiser Dragon will die. Andro knew that instinctively.


    When will he be gone, he doesn¡¯t know. But I hope we can get rid of the cult quickly before he¡¯s gone. Because I don¡¯t know if the Baby Dragon will be strong enough when we face the cult for real.


    I guess I can¡¯t say that to anyone. The fact that Andro might be dying. Because that means we will lose our strongest monster.


    Then I told Andro that if he knew that he will die soon to tell me right away so that I can tell the others. But I hope it will only be after the cult is gone.


    Though if he really die, I wonder where he will be buried. And how. Should I just sink him into the ocean? Or just let him be?


    Whatever the case, this is not a good news at all. So I kept it a secret even from Victoria.


    I¡¯m already prepared to go to Monsters World. To where Andro¡¯s granddaughter told me about. A ce in the ocean where she almost died being swallowed by a monster.


    That monster should be big. But if it¡¯s weaker than the kraken, then I won¡¯t make a contract with it.


    And so, for this exploration, I won¡¯t bring Ray with me. I will bring Spot instead since he said that he¡¯s bored. And I will also bring his children to Monsters World for their training. Seems like they like how they can grow stronger.


    ¡°Alright, Spot. I don¡¯t know how strong the Kraken were, so I need you to tell me if the monster we will face is as strong as the Kraken or not,¡± I said.


    ¡°Leave it to me. I can do that easily,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°Well then, I¡¯ll leave now. Bye!¡±


    Riding on a small version of Spot, we entered the portal. Victoria is also with me.


    As for Spot¡¯s children, I have brought them to the Monsters World early this morning. And I told them to go to the Monsters Vige first to meet the dragon and the baby dragons so that in the future, when dragons wille, they won¡¯t act hostile toward them. As for Andro, he has left.


    Maybe I will introduce not just the vampires to the dragon, but the others in the alliance as well. Because yesterday we were too excited on watching the hatching of the baby dragons, we didn¡¯t introduce everyone.


    But that¡¯s forter. Once there are more dragons appearing near the vige.


    Now that I think about it, maybe dragons are friendly monsters. They are just look scary so other creatures who saw them can¡¯t hide their fear or hostility. And that¡¯s why dragons learned that they should kill them first before they can be a problems for them.


    I feel like they are really simr to me. In that they prefer to kill their enemies before they can harm them. While they were mostly only focus on living peacefully and survive. Though only a few of them are violent.


    We entered the portal to where I met the dragon before. Then flying on Spot¡¯s back, we move to the direction that the dragon told me before.


    Since I feel that we had enough floating inds, I don¡¯t need to look for more. At least for now. So we no longer need to travel onnd.


    I think that if we have to travel to the ocean, flying on Spot is better. Maybe because he¡¯s a half sea serpent.


    ¡°What do you think, Spot? You have traveled the ocean in Monsters World before. Do you think that there¡¯s a monster that at least as strong as the Kraken?¡± I asked Spot.


    ¡°In the ce where we trained before, there were a lot of strong monsters. But none of them are as strong as the Kraken. As for where we¡¯re going, I don¡¯t think I have been there before. So I¡¯m not sure. Though if it¡¯s stronger than the Kraken, then I¡¯d like to fight it,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°Sure. After I make contract with it. I¡¯m the one who will be the master of that monster. So I¡¯m the one who need to prove my strength. Well, if that monster is looking for a master they can approve by their strength, then I will have to face it first. If it other things, then I¡¯ll just figure it outter,¡± I said.


    ¡°What other thing do you think that they will seek for their master?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know. Maybe they look for beauty? Then there¡¯s no need to fight since they will fall in love with me right away,¡± I said confidently.


    ¡°No, that¡¯s impossible,¡± Victoria said.


    Why is it impossible? It should make sense, right? Though Spot isughing so I guess I was wrong.


    But I¡¯m not ugly. Because if I¡¯m ugly, howe I have a harem, right?


    We¡¯re right above the ocean now. So I started using Divine Vision to see if there¡¯s any sea monsters under us.


    ¡°The dragon should be flying when she flew over this ce, so that sea monsters should either be able to fly, or that they can jump very high. We shouldn¡¯t fly too low then,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°That¡¯s a good idea. We¡¯ll just go close to the surface or dive if that monster is not as strong as we thought,¡± I said.


    ¡°That is certainly possible. There are many monsters who can jump so high from the sea and able to swallow a huge monster. But underwater, they are just prey for even smaller monsters. So this one might be the one that the dragon talked about,¡± Spot exined.


    Then going here is not the right choice. And I will end up continuing my search for who knows how long. What a pain.


    ¡°Let me act smart here. What if the monsters that jump and eat flying monsters evolved? They used to look for prey in the sea, but there are too muchpetition there. So they evolved to look for food in the sky. Which mean that there could be a really strong monsters near the ce where that jumping monsters are,¡± Victoria said.


    That¡¯s some kind of theory that Victoria told me in the past. If so, then we might be able to find it.


    ¡°Well, in the end, we have to dive for who knows how long. But at least we have a direction to go now. If there are any smart monsters that can talk, let¡¯s ask them for direction to the strongest monster. That might help,¡± I said.


    The first day there, I didn¡¯t find anything. Maybe that monster is not hungry at all when I came.


    So we look for a nearby ind and ced a Blobby there before returning back to Cassau.


    And the next day, we return there again and instantly found the monster the dragon was talking about.


    ¡°...If that¡¯s the monster she¡¯s talking about, I don¡¯t think it¡¯s strong enough. It¡¯s just using ambush tactic and attack those who are flying unnoticed with their huge mouth,¡± I said.


    ¡°Yeah. That monsters are weak. If I got closer even in this form, that thing will run away. Should we just dive right away?¡± Spot asked.


    ¡°I guess we have no choice. Since that monster is here, let¡¯s get into the sea and see if there are much stronger monsters than that thing,¡± I said as I remove my clothes. Leaving me only with only my pants before we dive into the sea.


    I hope I can find a monster soon. I don¡¯t want to keep looking for a monster for a long time.

 Chapter 854 5 Days Gone By Underwater

    Chapter 854 5 Days Gone By Underwater


    We dived into the sea. Since I''m riding on Spot''s back, I don''t need to swim on my own. I just need to hang onto him while he''s swimming at his fastest speed.


    There''s no need for us to camouge ourselves. Because we are looking for a strong monster. And if we hide ourselves, there won''t be any monsters that can find us. And that destroy the whole point of my exploration. To find myst familiar.


    Hmm? Wait. If Spot uses his camouge instead, then if there''s any monster that can still see us, that means that monster have great senses at least. Maybe it''s better to use camouge then since we will limit our search only to the monsters that can see us.


    Yeah, that''s a great idea. Let''s do that instead.


    Talking to Spot underwater for me is impossible, but thanks to the phone, we can use the texting feature to message each other. And I can just send a message to Spot.


    He received that message and used magic to read it in his mind. And then he used his camouge skill to hide us.


    And as we dive even deeper, I realized that... my phone started to crack.


    I know that Marie made the phone waterproof, but that doesn''t mean that it can endure water pressure. So this time, I used Blobbies to cover the phone so that it won''t get destroyed as we go deeper.


    I need a new updated version. Maybe the cksmith will help. After all, I''m the one who will dive into the sea the most. After Spot and his children obviously.


    As for Spot, his phone is still fine because it has always been protected by Blobbies. After all, Spot doesn''t have a hand to hold the phone by himself. Though making one durable enough to endure the strongest pressure from the bottom of the sea is still better.


    Maybe my phone can be used as a shield if that''s the case.


    ...Well, I''ll just stick at using Victoria and Blobbies. Using a phone as a shield doesn''t seem to be a good idea.


    Inside the ocean, I see more monsters like the previous one. The giant fish that can swallow even a flying dragon after jumping out of the surface so high. But under the water, they are so timid that they were even afraid of Spot in his small form back before he used his camouge ability.


    Good thing I didn''t make a contract with it right away.


    I can also just make a contract with one of them. And if I''m not satisfied, then I can just kill them. But that will show my other familiars how I don''t care about them at all. I''d like to refrain from doing it at all.


    Bing a master level summoner, even my familiars can send telepathic message to each other. If they know that the contact to one monster is gone, they will notice.


    And they can even feel the emotion of each other. So they will know what kill the other monster.


    The deeper we go, the bigger the monsters. I bet Shelia would like to fight them. Unfortunately, she can''t breathe underwater. Though that''s good for me. Or she will spend most of her time underwater.


    Under the water, it became too dark. Spot who was a Sea Serpent can still see. And I have Divine Vision, so my sight is perfectly fine. As for Victoria, she can''t see anything.


    So I used my ability to share my vision with not just Victoria, but Spot as well. So that they can see better.


    "Whoa, this is much better than what I usually see. Is this what you see every day?" Spot asked me.


    "Obviously not. I rarely go for a dive anymore. But yeah, if you''re talking about how I can see so far and just fine even in the dark, then yeah."


    Obviously, we''re talking via messages through the phone. The only one who can speak here is Victoria. And that''s because she would enter my ear when she wanted to say something.


    We can''t tell the time, so we don''t know how long we have been diving. Spot doesn''t seem to need much sleep. And I have a lot of stamina. While Victoria only sleeps when she wants to.


    So we just continue searching for monsters. But the ocean is sorge. So we don''t know how long we need to look for a monster here.


    Maybe I should ask Marie to add the clock function on the phone. That way, I can tell how long we have been underwater.


    But the difficult part is about the timezone. Maybe we need something that will automatically change the clock on the phone to the time in the area. Not just on Earth, but in this Monsters World as well.


    Well, that will be difficult. But at least if I have a clock, even without that function, I can still tell how long we have been underwater.


    "Spot, let''s just continue swimming until either one of us is tired, or that I''m hungry," I said.


    "Okay. If we need a break, then I will swim to the surface right away and look for an ind. That''s what you want, right?" Spot asked.


    "Correct. Let''s continue for now."


    We found some monsters who can still see us even with the camouge skill. But Spot alone is enough to defeat them.


    With so much ruckus here under the water, I feel that thend is more peaceful. I''m d that I live onnd.


    I don''t know how long we have been here. And when I got hungry, we returned to the surface. The sun was still at the same position as when we entered the ocean. Does it mean we have been under the sea for a day? Or maybe several days?


    "I guess we''ll return to Cassau soon. Let''s look for an ind to mark," I said to Spot.


    We found an ind right away, then I opened a portal back to Cassau.


    "Wee back, Roy! Victoria and Spot as well. Did you find it?" Ang asked.


    "Nope. We didn''t find any satisfying monster. Also, how long has it been? I''ve been under the water for so long that I can''t tell the time. We just returned because I feel a bit hungry," I said.


    "...It has been five days since you left," Ka replied.


    "Five days?! And we haven''t found a good monster. Maybe there''s no strong monsters anymore in the sea. I should lower my requirement and let even any monster weaker than Spot to be my familiar," I said to myself.


    "I don''t think that''s a good idea. We even need Spot and his children to face the Kraken. We need someone even stronger than Spot. Also, you have witnessed how apetition can make monsters grow. With another sea monster topete, not only you will have an additional strong monster. But Spot will have someone topare his strength against," Ka said.


    "Oh, yeah! That''s a good idea! Just staying in Monsters World is not enough to make me and my children grow stronger. You can also help your familiar grow stronger. And I will have someone to y with since I could never be serious when I fight my children," Spot said.


    I guess that''s true. If we can''t find a strong monster, then look for a monster that can grow stronger.


    With that in mind, I started to think about the mermaid. Since they are half human, they should be able to get stronger like other half human monsters in the vige.


    ...I feel like all the monster in the vige are half-human though. Except for the dragon.


    Whatever. For now, I''m hungry. So I asked Lina to cook me some dishes even though it''s not time for a meal yet.


    As for Spot, the monsters he defeated were eaten by him. So I don''t think that he''s hungry at all.


    After finishing my meal, I took a bath and went to sleep. Once I woke up, I will return to Monsters World.


    Unfortunately, I woke up from a call from Fabio asking me to help him transporting something. I guess I won''t return back to Monsters World for a while.


    "Spot, Fabio asked me for something so I won''t return to Monsters World until I''m done helping him," I said.


    "Okay. Then I''ll just stay in the sea nearby. Come when you''re done with your business," Spot said.


    Then I moved to Arturo and helped Fabio transporting some stuffs. It''s just some supply for underdeveloped area in his territory.


    But when I get there, I noticed some people are suspicious. Because in their homes, I can see that they hide a familiar object. The explosive device that the cult members usually have in their mouth.


    And so I dyed my journey again to kill every cult members in this ce. Since they are hiding their identities, it took a while until I managed to kill them all.


    There should be some problem because some people just suddenly went missing, but I transported some of Fabio''s men here to exin the situation to the citizen.


    I don''t think going to Monsters World right away is a good idea after I took some effort in finding the hiding members of the cult, so I dyed my travel again.


    What a pain. But at least I killed some cult members.

 Chapter 855 Still Havent Found Anything

    Chapter 855 Still Haven''t Found Anything


    "We dive again today?" Spot asked.


    It''s the day after I helped Fabio. After I found some houses with the explosive devices, I told Fabio about it and he send some people to help me.


    I killed everyone and those people that Fabio sent were convincing the citizen that they were the bad guy. Simple.


    But for the members of the cult to not have the explosive device in their mouth, something is suspicious.


    This meant that they somehow noticed that someone can recognize that they are a member of the cult when they have the explosive device in their mouth. So the higher ups told them to remove those explosive devices.


    Or that those people have quit the cult. Did I just kill someone who tried to repent?


    Well, I don''t care. And those people I killed were not good people either. Even if they left the cult, they were still thieves and murderers. The people that Fabio sent found proofs of that. They''re still bad guys.


    And today, it''s time to go back to the sea in Monsters World with Spot. It''s good that Spot was not bored at all with the exploration. Because we can ask him for help.


    Well, even if he got bored, there''s nothing else he could do anyway other than raising his children and training. The cult still hasn''t doing any move at all, so we''re currently at peace. And Spot won''t have to fight since there''s no war at the moment.


    Well, as long as there are enemies in our journey, I doubt that Spot will be bored.


    "What do you think, Spot? Do you think that there are strong monster near the surface, or deep in the sea?" I asked.


    "I doubt that there will be any strong monster near the surface. But maybe if it''s somewhere near the reef area, then it''s possible. Though going deep into the bottom will increase our chance of meeting strong monster. Should we just dive deep right away?" Spot asked.


    "Sure. Let''s do that. Not like we have any real destination anyway," I said.


    What is the strongest monster that I found in the deepest part of the sea?


    Well, I found a mantis shrimp monster before. Back when Spot and Ray had a race.


    I could defeat it easily, but the power of that mantis shrimp''s punch was out of this world. It could even generate heat enough to boil the water.


    But other than that punch, there''s nothing worth mentioning. It didn''t take long for me to defeat it.


    If possible, I want monsters with water magic. All the monster I found in the sea were unable to use magic at all. So those who can use magic should be exceptional.


    "Spot, have you seen many other sea monsters that can use magic? Maybe we should look for them," I said.


    "I haven''t seen any. Water monsters usually fight with their body. But that''s a good idea. Instead of looking for the biggest and the strongest, let''s look for one that can use magic and more versatile. Just like the other monsters in the vige, if you lead them, they will grow stronger," Spot said.


    I hope that''s the case.


    Also, if it''s an entire tribe of monster, then I might move them close to the Monsters Vige. Maybe I''ll built anotherke. Or just make the artificialke deeper for them.


    If there are many of them, I''m sure that some of them at least have the love of fighting. Even if their tribe is not like the werewolves or weretigers who loves fighting, some will still be willing to grow stronger after seeing that the other monsters are so strong.


    Though if the next tribe of monsters I found were too weak, maybe I''ll consider it again before I make a contract with them. But I will still invite them to stay in the vige.


    "Is there anything else you want to add to be your familiar?" Spot asked again.


    "Let''s see... right. I want the monster to be able to enter either salt water or fresh water just fine. They can stay outside of water for a while. For a long time is preferable. After all, it will be hard if I have to open a portal to where it is if it''s deep under the water. If I''m not prepared, I would be pushed by the water," I said.


    "I think all water monsters are fine in either salt water or fresh water. Those who are not fine are fish or monsters who are evolved from fish," Spot said.


    "Then let''s look for a monster that doesn''t look like a fish," I said.


    And we continue our search.


    It was a boring search because we haven''t found anything.


    We found many species of monsters. Some look strong and dangerous. But they are too weakpared to Spot.


    And since I was bored, I tried to y those monsters by myself. They were not good at all.


    I think that most of the monsters I found were just evolved from fishes. So it''s not like they are anything special.


    They act like normal fish. The bigger fish eat the smaller fish. And the smaller fish running away from bigger fish.


    Except some big fish who are afraid of Spot''s small form. I guess they instinctively recognize Spot as big and strong.


    We haven''t found anything good for days. So I just spend those times talking with Spot.


    And today, I even brought Ray as well since he seem to be bored. But Spot is here as well. So we''re still using his camouge.


    "Ray is slower underwater. Will there be a seahorse monster for me to ride?" I said to myself.


    Hearing what I said, Ray stopped swimming. He must be pouting.


    "Sorry about that. Just kidding. I don''t need any more ride since I already have you and Spot. And sometimes, Shelia," I said.


    "Oh, you''re riding on Shelia''s back? Oh, right, she was in her wolf form when she met you for your date," Victoria said.


    Oh, right! There''s something I forgot to ask Spot.


    "Hey, Spot. You met your mate on Earth, right? Does it mean mean that there are also powerful sea monsters on Earth?" I asked Spot.


    "If it''s around the ce where I met her, then no. No one is stronger than me. I think the monsters here are stronger than the monsters there," Spot said.


    Except for the Kraken, I guess. Maybe I can find another Kraken here.


    "Oh, I see a nostalgic monster."


    As we swum, I found a monster that I recognize. It''s a monster that helped me increase my summoning level in the past. A fishman. A fish with legs and arms. And this one is carrying a spear-like weapon called trident. Instead of just one tip at the de, this one has three tips.


    The fishman instantly turn hostile to me and attacked me. But I defeated it with just one sh. I''m not the same as I was in the past.


    "Seems like we won''t find any other strong monster. Maybe we need to go further to the ocean before we find a monster in the deepest ce. Let''s just go to the surface and run somewhere far, find an ind, and mark it with a Blobby. Once we do, we will go the next day to go to the deepest ce in this world. There must be something strong that I can make a contract with," I suggested.


    With that, we left the sea. Since we have Ray, we''re running very fast. But I obviously still look for a monster in the sea using Divine Vision in case I found something strong.


    But I still didn''t find anything strong.


    It''s troubling that we have gotten much stronger and now we needed a really strong monster to help us. Though if the next monster can use magic for support, that will be good as well.


    We finally found an ind. But I have something more important to pay attention to. A message text from Sophie.


    "Hmm... Spot, I don''t think we can continue our adventure tomorrow. Maybe after a few days. I have something important to do," I said.


    "What is it, Roy?" Victoria asked.


    "It''s from Sophie. She said that we''re going to test her sight restoration surgery tomorrow as we found someone who are willing to volunteer. I will help her do it," I said.


    "Really? Is it done?" Victoria asked excitedly.


    "Well, that''s why we need experiment. And we found several people willing to do it. Theoretically, it''s possible to restore someone''s sight. So we need practice now. And I don''t want to dy Sunsses from being able to see," I said.


    Sunsses is great. Just by borrowing Elsie''s eyesight, and he lead us well. Though I think that Elsie''s eyesight will still be much better than if his sight is restored. But at least he doesn''t need much help in checking the surrounding if we seed. Restoring his eyesight will take priority over me looking for a familiar. Good thing we found an ind today," I said.


    After this, I will learn everything that we will do for tomorrow''s operation. I hope we can restore Sunsses'' vision.

 Chapter 856 Sunglasses will Still be Sunglasses

    Chapter 856 Sunsses will Still be Sunsses


    I have repeatedly read Sophie''s research. And asked her how she thinks about recovering someone''s sight. Unlike with names, this time I perfectly remembered everything in what she wrote.


    Though I can still read them while performing the surgery. But if I could remember them in my head, then it will be easier.


    Though the main surgeon for this experiment would be Sophie. Not me.


    "I''m the one who proposed it. So I want to take responsibility with my own experiment. Let me do it. If it''s a sess, then you can do it. I might be slower than you, but this is the path that I chose," Sophie said to me when I suggested that I became the main surgeon for the operation.


    What a great woman. In fact, all the women around me are great.


    No one would ever imagine that Sophie, a girl who worked at a brothel, would be a respectable doctor and surgeon.


    If this operation is a sess, her name will be known in medical world. She will be famous.


    Maybe the cult will think of capturing her because of her knowledge in medicine. But there''s no need to worry since we have many people protecting her.


    Even without me asking, Albert has send several agents to protect her from the shadow. He knows how important Sophie is not only in medical world, but also for me. And he knows that she will be targeted if she shows her worth.


    By the way, those who are protecting her from the shadow often get surprised when I brought them some gifts for protecting her. They never expected that I could easily find their location.


    Well, their reaction was funny so I kept doing it. For protecting my woman, they deserve to be rewarded.


    Though Sophie herself is quite strong. It''s just that she is reluctant to hurt other people. She''s so kind.


    But of course if she''s in danger, she will protect herself and attack the assant. She''s already strong enough to face the cult''s mages if she wants to.


    She refused me when I suggested that I became the surgeon. But she didn''t refuse when I said that I will be her assistant.


    I might be better at operation, but she''s not bad at all. I''m an Aura Master after all. Maybe I could even finish the operation in a few minutes if I want to. But for the first operation, she will perform it with me as her assistant, and many other doctors here as witnesses. To see how the operation progressed.


    And if it''s a sess, then many people will be able to recover their sight. Only those who have simr case as Sunsses.


    The volunteers also have the same symptom as Sunsses. We have five of them.


    So in case someone couldn''t see everything on the first operation, Sophie will perform it again on the next patient. Or maybe me since her stamina might not be enough. Though I need to slow down my movement so that everyone can see well.


    And for everyone to be able to do it, we will only use the tools provided by the hospital. Not using Blobbies who have been transformed into the tools needed.


    And so, we started the operation.


    Sophie did well exining everything. And even before she asked for some tool, I already prepared it to her. Because I have learned everything that needed to be done in the operation. Though she still did say the name of the tool so that everyone will know the process.


    Because it is the first operation for this kind of surgery, and also the fact that Sophie needed to exin everything to the guests, it took several hours to just fix a patient''s eyes.


    "It''s done. We will wait for the patient to regain his consciousness to ask him how he''s doing. Though with magic, we don''t need to wait at all," Sophie said.


    Then she looked at me. It''s my turn to wake him up without harming the patient.


    Thanks to the usefulness of air mages, we now have a lot of air mages helping in the hospital. Most of them are my former students. They seem to think that being in a war is scary so they decided to be a doctor. Which is still a good choice.


    Though we have me right now so I will wake the patient up.


    I can just wait for a while, but I don''t want to wait at all. So I used air magic to wake him up by neutralizing the gas that was used to sedate the patient.


    His body raised but he couldn''t see anything. Not because the operation was a failure. But because we wrapped his eyes with bandages. Though with my Divine Vision, I can see that his eyes is slowly recovering to simr to any other human eyes.


    "I can''t see anything. Was it a failure?" the patient asked.


    "We don''t know yet. From now, your eyes will slowly adapt to your body. Once they do, you should be able to see again," Sophie replied.


    "How long will it take?" the patient asked again.


    "Depend on how good the healing mage is. And right now, we have the greatest healer below master level with us. She will heal your eyes and make it adapt to your body so you should be able to see soon. Ka, please," Sophie said.


    It''s Ka''s turn now. And she used her healing magic to heal only the eyes.


    Ka might not be able to see the patient''s eyes. But she knows how to use her healing magic only to only target the eyes. We can believe in her.


    Ka is already a master level mage in her earth element. I think she''s focusing on her healing magic now. As for her light magic, I don''t know about that. I never asked.


    "Alright. I have done my best. Let''s see the result," Ka said.


    "Wait! I still can''t see anything!" the patientined.


    "It''s because of the bandage around your eyes. Here. Can you see now?"


    I swiftly cut the bandages with a scalpel. Now everyone can see his eyes.


    Light has returned to his eyes as he realized that he could see again.


    "I... I can see aga¡ª"


    "Alright, that''s one down. We have four more to go. Does anyone have any question or missed something from the operation?" I asked while ignoring the sentimental patient who just got healed.


    "How long will it take to heal if there''s no healer avable?" a doctor asked.


    "Well, that will be experimented on the other patient. We needed a healer to quicken the pace for this one to see the result. For the next one, we will ask the patient to wait until he recovers by himself. Anyone wants to perform the next surgery?" Sophie asked.


    Of course I raised my hand here. Though they already prepared one patient for me. Sunsses. But I want to try it on other patient first.


    There are some other doctors who wanted to try. So we picked three other doctors to perform the surgery.


    Then Ka will heal two of them after the operation, and the other two will be asked to wait to recover naturally.


    After that, I asked to perform the surgery right away. No one is watching me because we did two operation at once. Except Ka who knew that I would be done in a minute.


    And as I thought, I could finish the surgery in a few minutes using Blobbies as the tool. Ka is already there prepared to use healing magic right after I woke the patient up.


    "Can you see?" I asked the patient.


    "I... I can see ag¡ª"


    Alright, I don''t have the time to see some stranger being sentimental. So I left the room and enter the other operating room.


    The surgeon there barely done with the first step when my patient could already see again.


    Sophie is instructing the surgeon. And the surgery is done faster than the first one because there''s no more need to be overly cautious again.


    This one can see as well. Then thest two patients will have to wait until they can recoverter. Who knows if it will take days or weeks. The hospital will watch over them.


    "Alright, it''s done. And it seem to have high rate of sess as well. Ka, let''s heal Sunsses'' sight now," I said.


    "Will you still call him Sunsses after he recovers his vision?" Ka asked me.


    "I will force him to keep wearing sunsses even if he can see again," I said.


    And so, we both left the hospital. Sophie must be tired. But she seems happy that she seeded.


    I performed a surgery to Sunsses and he finally can see again. His brother, the former king of... somewhere, also there waiting for him. They were so happy that Sunsses can see again.


    "Finally, I won''t have to wear this again," Sunsses said as he broke his own sunsses.


    "Here''s a gift for your recovery. A brand new sunsses. I don''t want to see you without a sunsses. Because I won''t be able to remember your name," I said.


    "...I guess I will continue wearing them forever," Sunsses said as he received my gift.


    With this, we have recovered Sunsses'' eyesight. Though I will watch him for the next few days in case something unexpected happens. But I hope that there won''t be anything wrong with the surgery.

 Chapter 857 - 857 To the Bottom of the Sea

    857 To the Bottom of the Sea


    ¡°Is your sight still fine?¡±


    That¡¯s what Sophie asked Sunsses a few days after the operation.


    It was a sess. And the other patients are also fine. Even those who were not healed by healing magic by Ka. They are all fine. Their sight has returned.


    ¡°I¡¯m fine. I can still see just fine. Can I remove the sunsses now?¡± Sunsses asked.


    ¡°No. I won¡¯t be able to tell who you are if not for the sunsses,¡± I said.


    ¡°...I guess this will be my trademark,¡± he said.


    After the operation, I didn¡¯t return to look for myst familiar yet. I stayed in the hospital to watch over the patients. And I also helped the doctors since, well, I¡¯m a doctor myself.


    And Sophie is busy with taking care of the patients whose sight had just returned. So I took some of her jobs.


    Her old patients wereining that it was me who appeared instead of the beautiful Sophie. If I was the patient, I would feel the same.


    .....


    So I told them that my girlfriend is busy with her new operation. So they became depressed knowing that Sophie had a boyfriend.


    Not only that they were sick, they also got depressed as well. Did they think that someone as pretty as Sophie won¡¯t have a boyfriend?


    Maybe I should propose to her so she will wear a ring. That way, everyone will know that she¡¯s taken.


    Though it¡¯s not like she can wear the ring all the time. Like for a surgery for example. It will just be a bother for her during a surgery.


    And the most annoying ones are those who faked their illnesses to meet Sophie. Theyined that it should only be her who they met. They even threatened me by saying that they are close to important people in the city.


    But they don¡¯t know that those important people in Cassau were all Albert¡¯s men. Which mean for those important people, I¡¯m their important person. And since I¡¯m important, they will protect everyone around me.


    When they found out about it, those men promised to never bother with Sophie ever again. Because I said that they will be cklisted from entering the hospital ever again if they continue faking their illnesses to meet Sophie. So when they are sick for real, no one in the hospital will heal them.


    They gave up when I spread air magic that let them cough without stopping. Making them think that they are sick for real. And I refused to meet them. so they had no choice but to give up meeting Sophie.


    They were so persistent so I have to use force. Although the force I said is just a bit of air magic, it¡¯s still a force. If it¡¯s violence, then they would be dead instead of leaving.


    I¡¯m sure that¡¯s not all. Sophie will continue to be visited by weird people. But just helping her a bit like this is enough to lessen her burden.


    Though if she really hates them, then she could just strike them with lightning. She¡¯s strong enough to defeat most people in this city. Except for us and probably some agents.


    ¡°Well, I think it¡¯s about time that I return to Monsters World. If you need anything, contact me right away,¡± I said to Sophie.


    ¡°Okay. It¡¯s been fun working together with you. Let¡¯s do it again some time in the future,¡± Sophie said with a smile.


    ¡°And I will... I don¡¯t know. Maybe I will try to adapt my sight with that thing you call Mind¡¯s Eye. With my own vision, I think my Mind¡¯s Eye can improve,¡± Sunsses said.


    That¡¯s a good idea.


    Sunsses¡¯ Mind¡¯s Eye is considerably much better than other people¡¯s Mind¡¯s Eye. Even Ang. Or maybe me, but I refuse to agree to that.


    He has been blind for a long time and developed Mind¡¯s Eye on his own. I hope just by recovering his sight, his Mind¡¯s Eye won¡¯t just disappear and instead, it will improve.


    With Spot around my waist, we entered the portal. Ray is not with us now.


    ¡°Where will we go now?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Let¡¯s go to the deepest part of the sea. We have never been deeper than that ce where Spot and Ray raced before. The trench where I fought a mantis shrimp. Maybe we could find something stronger below there,¡± I said.


    ¡°Right. I have never dived deeper than that. Maybe we can find stronger monster there. Though we need to find a ce that deep,¡± Spot said.


    Maybe we need to find another trench like that. A deeper one this time.


    ¡°Spot, we will add weight by changing Victoria¡¯s weight. This way, we can reach there faster,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then go on your own. I¡¯ll swim by myself. I just need to follow you, right?¡± Spot said.


    ¡°You won¡¯t sink with me?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Too scary. Even as a sea monster, if I dive too fast or returns to the surface too fast from the deep part of the sea, it will harm me. Even if you try to protect me with Aura, I don¡¯t want to do it. I don¡¯t want to get used to it,¡± Spot said.


    Then Victoria exined that the change in the pressure from the bottom of the sea to the surface, could harm most creatures. I¡¯m just a weird one since I have Aura.


    Then Spot will dive down slowly, while I will dive quickly with Victoria. I¡¯ll try to not move at all from where I dived so Spot won¡¯t have to look for me.


    This is the small ind we found somewhere in the middle of the ocean in Monsters World. The sea nearby are so deep. But we swum quite a bit far from that ind before we stopped.


    ¡°Then, I will be going first,¡± Spot said as he dived vertically into the sea. He¡¯s not as fast as usual.


    Usually, he would dive down diagonally. So he can get used to the pressure when we dive too deep. That¡¯s why he¡¯s diving slowly now.


    ¡°Victoria, we should go too,¡± I said as I who was standing on the water covered us both with Aura to protect me from the dangerous water pressure.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll take you down with style,¡± Victoria said as she transformed herself into a rope.


    A rope to bring me down?


    Then she tied herself around my legs and transformed the other end of the rope into a boulder.


    Now that¡¯s sinking with style. As if a stylized mafia gang trying to kill me by sinking me into the sea.


    The boulder¡¯s weight is changed to the max as I got pulled into the water.


    I can still lift that boulder with my strength if I want to. But right now, I want to sink into the ocean.


    Soon after, we encountered Spot. So I tried my best to wave my hand for a greeting and told him that I will be waiting down there.


    I sunk so fast that even some monsters who saw me and tried to chase after me couldn¡¯t keep up with the speed of me descending. I guess I¡¯m the fastest creature under the water now. Only when I¡¯m sinking.


    It took a while, but I can finally see the bottom. Though we¡¯re not as fast to the bottom as back when Spot and Ray were racing. Which mean it¡¯s still not as deep as that time.


    As we touched the bottom of the ocean, Victoria returned to her small slime form inside my ear. Of course she adjusted her weight to the lightest now.


    We chatted while waiting for Spot to get here. And after about more than thirty minutes, I can see Spot. He¡¯s even slower than when he started diving.


    ¡°Let¡¯s wait here for a while so that I can adjust to the pressure here. We¡¯re not in a race, so let¡¯s be patient,¡± Spot said.


    Back when he was racing, he would use his full speed to dive. I guess that race took a lot of his strength to finish.


    After a while, I rode on Spot¡¯s back again as we swim. We¡¯re going to continue looking from the bottom of the sea like this.


    There are several monsters with really strong shells at the bottom of the sea. But just a punch from me, and they died. I guess they are still not good enough to be my familiar.


    Even if we dived into the sea, we don¡¯t know if we could find monsters like this. Maybe we will need to do it a few more time.


    ¡°Spot, if we can¡¯t find any good monster now, then we might need to look for it again. Which means that we might dive like this several more times. If you don¡¯t like it, you don¡¯t have to join me,¡± I said to Spot.


    ¡°Then next time, I won¡¯t go too deep. I will look in the shallower area for strong monsters for you. Just continue bringing me here. At least until I got bored,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°If that¡¯s what you want, then sure. Today, and for the next few days maybe, let¡¯s search together,¡± I said.


    If I can¡¯t find anything, then should I try my luck in summoning monster like how I did it with Victoria and Ray?


    No, I might not be lucky all the time. So let¡¯s just focus on searching manually.

 Chapter 858 - 858 Found a Place Where Sea Water Can’t Enter

    858 Found a ce Where Sea Water Can¡¯t Enter


    We continued looking for a monster at the deepest part of the sea. And it has been a month since we first dived to the bottom.


    There were several breaks that I did. Because someone found a ce with a lot of members of the cult. Some people with the explosive devices in their mouth, and some hid them in their house.


    So I helped with the investigation and killed those who are confirmed to be members of the cult. That¡¯s the break that I took.


    Though there were two days when I didn¡¯t do anything other than hanging out with the girls. Because I have been diving for so long for a long time, I got bored. So I took some breaks while Spot was hanging out with his children.


    We found several strong monsters. Some were as strong as Spot. And some, while not as strong as Spot, they were bigger than him. But I don¡¯t feel like they can be a good familiar.


    What makes one a good familiar? I don¡¯t really know myself. It¡¯s just that after I made contract with my four other familiars, I just felt that they are good monsters. Good in the meaning that they could be really helpful for me. Not their personality.


    Though today, they are extremely loyal to me. None of them have unlikable personality at all.


    Wait, maybe that¡¯s what I needed. A monster withpatible personality with me. A monster that will help me when I ask them instead of having to force them to do what I wanted them to do.


    I guess a weaker monster than Spot is fine then. But I feel like that won¡¯t be enough.


    .....


    Should I go after a king of a tribe again? And get a lot of monsters to join me.


    If only it would be that easy. It has been a month since I started looking, but I haven¡¯t found anyone good at all.


    ¡°Sigh... Roy, I think I had enough looking for monster. We have entered a deeper part of the sea. Much deeper than when I raced Ray before. But there¡¯s no one good enough to be your familiar. And I feel like if I continue diving so deep, then resurfaced, then go deep again, and resurfaced again, my body won¡¯t be able to take too much of it anymore. Sorry, but I have to give up helping you here,¡± Spot said to me.


    We have stayed at the bottom of the sea for five days again this time before I got hungry. And after we resurfaced and stopped at an empty ind, Spot said that he gave up searching for monster.


    His body won¡¯t be able to take it anymore? Maybe he will be able to if he trained his body more. But what we did was not training him. He just forced himself to go deep into the water.


    ¡°Alright. I¡¯ll ask Ray if he wants to help. Then, what will you do after this?¡± I asked Spot.


    ¡°After diving so deep for a while, I think that it could be a good training for me. But this time, I will only be training and won¡¯t force myself to go too deep. Just take me to where my children are, then we will train this way,¡± Spot said.


    As expected, he knows what I¡¯m thinking. He knows that he can get stronger still. And has found a way to get stronger even if it¡¯s just bit by bit.


    After that, I opened a portal for Spot to where his children are training. Then after he enters it, I opened a portal to where Ray is and asked him if he wants to join.


    I can ask him via telepathy, but asking him directly shows that I care about him. So it¡¯s better this way. Especially since he¡¯s near the Monsters Vige.


    Ray can¡¯t speak, but I know his feeling. Knowing that even Spot had a hard time even though he¡¯s a sea monster, half sea monster, Ray thought that he won¡¯t be able to do it for so long. So he refused.


    I told him that I can use air magic and Aura to protect him. But he still refused.


    I guess I¡¯ll go by myself then. Oh, wait. Together with Victoria only.


    Why am I fine when even Spot had a hard time? Because as a doctor, I know well about human body. I¡¯m also an Aura Master so I covered not only my body, but also my internal organ with Aura so I will be fine with the change in water pressure.


    Aura users are truly weird. I wonder how it feels to live during Timmy¡¯s era? Or maybe Victoria¡¯s and Sonia¡¯s era before the Evil God started hunting Aura users?


    With so many Aura users back then... no one will be safe anywhere if those Aura users decided to do crimes. I guess I can somehow understand why the Evil God decided to kill all Aura users if that¡¯s the case.


    I mean, one of the monster near me, Sonia, used charm magic to make men fall for her. She¡¯s a criminal herself.


    And I heard that someone the Evil God cared about was one of Sonia¡¯s harem member. Should I say that everything is Sonia¡¯s fault?


    No, that¡¯s too much. Maybe she¡¯s just the trigger. The Evil God realized that it¡¯s great to kill all Aura users after that.


    Though the past is not important right now. What¡¯s important is to stop the cult from destroying the world.


    After Ray rejecting my request to join me in my search, I returned back to Cassau to rest. I think I¡¯ll take a few days of rest again. Because from the next dive, I will be alone. And that means I will spend more energy than before. And I will get hungry faster.


    And so, I took another break and hanging out with the others.


    By the way, I didn¡¯t forget to put some Blobbies at the bottom of the sea. They are disguised as a rock so they won¡¯t get eaten.


    The purpose is not for me to be able to go there right away. But it¡¯s just another method of attacking. By opening a portal directly to the bottom of the sea, and use it as a method of attack.


    No one other than water mages should be able to endure the pressure. Though I doubt even water mages could do it. Even I won¡¯t be able to enter it easily.


    If there are arge group of enemies in front of me, and no allies at all, I can just open a portal there and let them all die from the pressure. Maybe I¡¯ll ask Carmen and other water mages to help me with changing the direction of the water. That would be great.


    Once I find myst familiar, let¡¯s practice with Carmen. If it¡¯s possible, then that method could be used in the future.


    After my break, I dived into the ocean again. Alone.


    I returned to where Ist went to with Spot, and go deeper.


    I found more monsters, but none of them seem to be good enough to be my familiar. So I continued looking.


    ¡°It¡¯s a shame that no one can see what¡¯s under the sea like you did. Thanks to your vision-sharing ability, I can see how beautiful it is underwater. If people won¡¯t die just by going here, then this could be a great ce for a date,¡± Victoria said telepathically.


    ¡°There¡¯s no light down here. But maybe Ka who is a light mage can use her magic to illuminate the bottom of the sea. Though that only meant that more monsters will chase after us. Well, not like I can bring anyone here anyway,¡± I said.


    Those I bring here, have to stay close to me at all time so I can use air magic for them to breathe, and Aura to protect their bodies and inner organ from the pressure.


    Oh, what¡¯s that? A trench?


    There¡¯s a huge hole in front of me. The size is about 3 km in diameter. But I can¡¯t see the bottom. So I guess that this is a trench. And the hole is the entrance into the trench.


    Should I test my luck here in hope to find a monster to be myst familiar?


    Obviously. Luck is what I need the most to find something. So without hesitation, I jumped into the trench.


    Again, with Victoria as a heavy suit, I dived quickly into the trench. She¡¯s no longer ying around by tying my legs and pulled me down with a heavy rock.


    As I go deeper, the hole became bigger. I can no longer see the wall anymore. But I¡¯m still falling.


    I don¡¯t know how long I have been falling. But I doubt I will reach the center of this.


    Then I looked down. Sooner orter, I should reach the bottom.


    And then I see it. A ce where no water enters even though it should be the deepest part of the sea.


    There¡¯s air at the bottom of the ocean? What kind of ce is this?


    A cloud where the angels live. Then a floating ind. And now, a ce where water can¡¯t enter? And there¡¯s air in there? People can breathe there?


    That¡¯s magic, I suppose. Let¡¯s go there and see what thing I will encounter there.

 Chapter 859 - 859 Underwater Dungeon

    859 Underwater Dungeon


    ¡°Victoria, there¡¯s a ce with air down there. And water can¡¯te in. What do you think of that ce?¡± I asked Victoria telepathically.


    ¡°A ce filled with air underwater? And it¡¯s directly below us? How weird. I guess I should say as expected of magic,¡± Victoria said.


    After I told her what I see down below, Victoria no longer be heavy. She reduced her weight to her normal weight as I continue falling deeper but slower than before.


    It¡¯s still barely enter my Divine Vision, so I can¡¯t really tell. It¡¯s quite far.


    And then I see a fish monster down there. Some kind of eel. And the eel is swimming close to the entrance of the air-filled area under the ocean.


    I watched the eel entered that ce, and as soon as its head entered, gravity pulled that eel and that eel fall down. I don¡¯t know how deep inside that ce is because I can¡¯t see that far yet. Even when I used my Mind¡¯s Eye to improve my sight. It¡¯s dark down there.


    What I can see was just the border between the sea, to that ce. And beyond there, even after I fall deeper, it¡¯s just dark.


    ¡°Wait, this happened several times. I guess I know what that ce is,¡± I said.


    ¡°Really? What is it?¡± Victoria asked.


    .....


    ¡°That ce is a dungeon.¡±


    There are several asion when I couldn¡¯t see too far or too deep. And it was mostly inside a dungeon.


    And this underwater dungeon is a bit special. Well, not a bit. But a lot. Because after you enter, you will leave the water. Even though it is directly under the water.


    And the reason why my Divine Vision can¡¯t see too deep is because that dungeon has never been explored. Or at least magic is rarely used there. And so it¡¯s fully concentrated with mana and I can¡¯t see that far.


    ¡°An underwater dungeon with air. That¡¯s just weird. But I guess it really is a dungeon. Though I wonder if you can make a contract with a monster from a dungeon?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Well, tamer can make a contract with monsters from a dungeon. So as a summoner, I should be able to do it if the monster is in Monsters World. Even if it¡¯s from inside a dungeon,¡± I said. Though I¡¯m not a hundred percent sure about it.


    ¡°Also, it¡¯s not impossible that a dungeon will be filled by monsters from the outside. Maybe a monster from outside the dungeon make it as their nest. Like how the elves can enter that giant tree. Though in the end, they became zombies and became monsters from the dungeon,¡± I said.


    I remember about the elves¡¯ case. About how I met Tia¡¯s family member inside the dungeon inside the giant tree where the elves resided before I moved them to Monsters Vige.


    ¡°And we also have explored several dungeons with some monsters. Even the werewolves who were exploring the world entered dungeons. Well, how about we check that ce first. It¡¯s a dungeon. Not only will there be monsters, there should be treasures as well. I hope.¡±


    Then if the treasure is good for me, I will use it. If not, I will give it to the others. If the others don¡¯t want it, they will give it to other others. If no one wants it, as long as the treasure is not something dangerous, then we can just sell it.


    ¡°Do we need to tell the others about this?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Let¡¯s do that after we enter the dungeon. Let¡¯s find a wall that I can stick my body to before we continue falling. Because if the bottom is filled with spikes, then we would die just by falling there. Well, not me. But the others will,¡± I said.


    I still can¡¯t see the bottom. Maybe the eel that fell died because of the fall. Maybe it¡¯s even pierced by spikes down there.


    It¡¯s a dungeon. So there might be traps. And a trap at the entrance is normal.


    That¡¯s why I need to stick to a wall. Or maybe I just need to use Victoria as a cushion. But I want to check everything first before Ind. Or should I just jump in one spot so that I will continue staying in the air?


    Let¡¯s make it simpler then. A simple way to measure the depth. With a really long pole.


    ¡°Victoria, transform into a pole. A really long one that goes even beyond my Divine Vision,¡± I said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll try,¡± Victoria said.


    Then, Victoria transformed. She turned into a pole that I can easily grab in with one hand. The thickness is the same as Reizpear¡¯s shaft. So I¡¯m already familiar with it.


    As for the length though, it can really go deeper than what my Divine Vision can see. Though only in the dungeon. If it¡¯s outside the dungeon, then I can see further.


    It¡¯s just a bit longer than how far I can see, but it¡¯s fine.


    And just in case, I covered myself with the magic armor. Now I¡¯m ready for anything.


    The pole is already halfway entered the dungeon. It will be my turn soon.


    And as my feet passed the water, I got pulled by gravity. Now I¡¯m already inside the dungeon. But I still can¡¯t see the bottom. I can¡¯t even see the wall. Because this ce is already bigger than the hole I entered from.


    I have no problem breathing as usual. But the gas here seems to be dangerous for anyone other than air mages. I guess I can¡¯t bring them here then.


    ¡°Victoria, we can¡¯t bring the others here since the air seems dangerous. So let¡¯s just explore the dungeon just the two of us. Though you can tell the otherster,¡± I said.


    ¡°We need to get to the bottom first. Then we can think of what to doter,¡± Victoria replied.


    And so, we just keep falling.


    And finally, the pole touched the bottom. And I stabilized myself in the air as I slowly had Victoria shrunk and shrunk until I can see the bottom.


    ¡°...There used to be spikes down there. But I guess many monsters fell down there and died. So their bones almost fully covered the spikes. While those above the bones died because of the fall. Including the eel from before,¡± I said.


    Well, since it¡¯s directly at the bottom of the sea, I guess it¡¯s natural that there are many monsters fell into the hole. But seeing that they even covered the spikes, I guess it has been so long since then.


    My feet finally touched the ground. Or it¡¯s more like a corpse of a recently falling whale that died here.


    ¡°Do you think any monsters from the outside can survive a fall this high?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°If they could, I guess that mean they are pretty strong.¡±


    I look around to see if there¡¯s a ce I should go to. But then, I heard something.


    With my vision, I could see farther than my ears can hear. But down here when everything is quiet, I can hear further than I can see.


    I prepared myself by changing Victoria into a katana while still covering my body with the magic armor. I should have worn something instead of just my swimsuit under the armor.


    The sound is getting closer. And while waiting, I ced a Blobby on a skeleton of a fishman so I cane here anytime I want.


    Now that I see it closely, some of the bones of the skeletons were cut. And they were cut nicely. Like a professional chef. Or someone experienced with a sword.


    The onesing might be something strong that use ded weapons. I need to be careful here.


    Now I can hear clearly that it¡¯s the sound of footsteps. And soon after, there were many of them.


    ¡°Oh, shit. Whatever it is, we¡¯re surrounded,¡± I said.


    Then, the sound of footsteps stopped. And it changed into the sound of chewing. Some kind of creature must be biting off the freshly dropped monster here as food.


    Right. If there¡¯s a monster here, and there¡¯s no food that they can find in this dungeon, then their only way of survival is by eating anything that falls into this hole.


    ¡°Hello! Anyone there?!¡±


    After I shouted, the sound of chewing stopped. And now, I can hear them walking closer here. Though it¡¯s hard to hear that since they are stepping on fleshes. But when they¡¯re stepping on bones, I can hear them.


    Now that they have gotten closer, I can see them just fine.


    They look like a human. A head with a face just like a human, and two legs. But they have four arms. Two looks like normal human arms, but the other two are on their back. Right behind the right and left shoulder. And they are not human arms. But I can see that they are covered in shells and look just like a pair of crab¡¯s ws. And their size are big.


    Not only that, but those ws are extremely sharp. Then that exins why some of the bones here are cut cleanly. It¡¯s their fault.


    I might have found it. The monster that I¡¯m looking for. Myst familiar. I hope.

 Chapter 860 - 860 Half-Human, Half-Crab

    860 Half-Human, Half-Crab


    Here I am, inside a dungeon at the bottom of the ocean. Standing on top of corpses of fishes and monsters that have fallen down, surrounded by monsters that I see for the first time.


    They¡¯re all humanoid. Very simr to a human except for a pair of extra armsing out of their shoulders. And those are not hands. But ws like that of a crab.


    And they can easily cut the bones of a monster easily with those ws. And unlike humans who only have one elbow on each arms, at least normal humans, they have several elbows. Some have five, and some have three. My guess is that the older they are, the more joint they have.


    With those joints, even though those ws are on their shoulder, they can move them freely. And the more joints, the more versatile they are in their ws¡¯ movement. I think. I haven¡¯t seen them fight yet.


    They have males and females. They are not wearing anything except for some kind of shells covering their important part of their body. For the males, the shells only cover their legs below the waist. For the female, other than the shells below their waist, they have shells covering their chest.


    And after I called out to them, they can summon those shells at will. So now, most of them are being wary of me as I can see them covering almost their whole body with a thick shell like a crab.


    Between their shells protecting their body, and Jewel¡¯s thick rhino¡¯s skin, I wonder which one is stronger.


    If these creatures have strong defense, then I¡¯m thinking of taking one of them to be my familiar. Because my familiars other than Victoria are not specialized for defense.


    Victoria is useful with her transformation skill and her cloning skill. And she can also fight on her own depend on the situation.


    .....


    Shelia is great at fighting. Leave her alone being surrounded by enemies, then she will be happy. Though I hope the enemies won¡¯t be too strong or she will fight until she dies.


    Graham is good at fighting as well. And he can use his shadow clones to fight. But he¡¯s best at healing. Well, I think he¡¯s around Ka¡¯s level at healing. Not at master level yet.


    Ray is more like a ride and a support as I or anyone who is riding or touching him will be able to restore their mana and even Aura. With him, Victoria can fight using Aura.


    And now, if I can have one of these monsters that I don¡¯t know what they¡¯re called, then I will have someone who can defend well. But that¡¯s depend on how good they are in fighting.


    Let¡¯s see what will happen from now.


    ¡°Hello, my name is Roy. I came in peace!¡± I said to those monsters who have gotten closer to me.


    It¡¯s dark. Because we¡¯re at the bottom of the sea. But for some reason, I can see some kind of light far from here.


    There must be some kind of nts that can illuminate those areas. Just like in some dungeons I have been gone to.


    One of them, fully covered in shell armor, approached me. He should be the leader of the group.


    By the way, I have removed my magic armor. I¡¯m just standing there with my shorts as swimsuit. I should have grabbed some clothes and change before I greeted them. But it¡¯s fine like this.


    ¡°Who are you? How are fine after that fall?¡± he asked.


    ¡°Well, I can fly. Though that¡¯s not how Inded here safely. But yeah, I can fly,¡± I replied.


    We talked but they don¡¯t seem to be putting their guard down. Just some light greetings.


    ¡°Is this a dungeon?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I don¡¯t know what a dungeon is. We have been in this ce for as long as we remember it. Though one of the oldest among us told us that they used to live above, but they fell down and unable to leave. So we know nothing about the outside world,¡± he replied.


    I see. So in the past, a lot of their kind fell into the dungeon. Should I ask how long ago it was?


    Well, I don¡¯t think they know how long it has been. There¡¯s no light to tell the time.


    And maybe there¡¯s no other way to escape from this ce other than where I entered from. And since they can¡¯t fly, they had no choice but to stay here and breed. That¡¯s why so many of them don¡¯t know how they get here. And they don¡¯t even know that this is a dungeon.


    As I was thinking of what I¡¯m going to ask next, someone came over and shouted something.


    ¡°It¡¯s here! That monster has respawned!¡±


    ¡°Really? Let¡¯s kill it then!¡±


    Respawned? As expected, this is a dungeon where monsters can respawn after their death. But monsters from dungeons usually disappear. I guess that¡¯s why they came here and eat from whatever fell down to the dungeon.


    ¡°Wait, what about him?¡± someone asked.


    Then everyone stopped and looked at me.


    ¡°It seems like it¡¯s quite important for you. Can I follow you and see what you¡¯re going to do?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...Fine. But we will keep watching you,¡± the leader said.


    ¡°By the way, what kind of race are you?¡± I asked again.


    ¡°We are called Kreiyb. I don¡¯t know where that name came from, but that¡¯s what our elders used to call us,¡± he said.


    Kreiyb? As in saying crab in an ent? Something has worse naming sense than me.


    ¡°Is there anyone who remembered when your kind fell down to this ce?¡± I asked.


    ¡°No. All of them died a long time ago. Those who are alive here were born in this ce.¡±


    No one has ever left this ce? Then this could be a problem.


    If they are satisfied with their lives here, then I can¡¯t ask them to get out of here and live somewhere else. But if they have the slightest bit of curiosity, then I might be able to do it.


    Asking someone to be my familiar, then get them all out of this ce.


    I¡¯ll do thatter. For now, it seems like they are going to fight something. I¡¯ll see how well they can fight, then I will decide what to do.


    Though they seem to still be hostile toward me. But they are still curious at someone who is still alive after a fall from such heights. So I guess they have curiosity.


    Even if they are not good enough to be my familiar, I will still ask them if they want to leave this ce. Maybe they will help us.


    For now, I need to see for myself what kind of monsters they are.


    I followed them entering a cave where some algae on the wall and the ceilings illuminate the ce. It¡¯s bright here.


    With my Divine Vision, I can¡¯t see far. But from what I can see, this ce seem to be huge. But there¡¯s no monsters other than these Kreiybs. I guess they defeated them all.


    And now, one of the monsters from the dungeon respawned. And they will fight that one.


    ...How is there a spider monster in this ce? This is underwater!


    The enemy they are talking is giant spider. It¡¯s so big that if I didn¡¯t use Air Barrier to cover Victoria, her scream could be heard by everyone here.


    Why is she scared of spiders? We fought even more disgusting monsters together.


    ¡°Kill it!¡± the leader said.


    Now, let¡¯s see how they fight.


    All of them covered their body with shells. They can freely make those shells appear and disappear.


    Their physical strength is quite good. They are about as strong as the werewolves. But they are slower. Though their defenses are stronger.


    And their attack were quite strong as well. I feel like just a punch from the leader, a normal punch with his fist and not his w, it could hurt me who is protected by Aura. That¡¯s about the same strength as Shelia. Though she rarely used her fists in a fight. She has long nails after all. And she used them instead of fists.


    These crabs, I mean Kreiybs, mainly used their four arms to attack. Their ws are so strong and so sharp. I bet the other monsters want to fight them no matter what.


    But the spider is so strong. It took a lot of their effort to just cut down one of its legs.


    They should have a lot of experience defeating that thing, right? Then shouldn¡¯t they know how to defeat them?


    The spider is quick. If that spider jumped to the wall or the ceilings, the Kreiybs won¡¯t be able to do anything since they can¡¯t fly. That¡¯s why they surrounded that spider before the fight so it won¡¯t try to escape to the wall or the ceiling.


    Many of the Kreiybs got their shells destroyed. When I asked some who are taking a break, they said that those shells will recover with time as long as they are alive. So it¡¯s fine if they break.


    Seems like it will be some time until we can chat more. I guess I¡¯ll help them.


    ¡°Hey! I¡¯ll take care of three of its legs!¡± I shouted.


    ¡°You?! Whatever. I don¡¯t want anyone here to die. So please help us!¡± the leader said.


    The spider¡¯s although its legs are thinpared to its body, it¡¯s quite durable that even the Kreiybs¡¯ ws have to attack it many times before the leg got cut off.


    But if I put enough Aura into Victokatana, cutting them in one sh won¡¯t be that hard.


    And so, I joined the battle. Only for me to cut down three legs with one sh each, and leave the battle.


    With this, they should be able to handle it. If not, I will be disappointed.

 Chapter 861 - 861 Let’s Call Them the Crab People

    861 Let¡¯s Call Them the Crab People


    After the spider lost four of its legs, the Kreiybs continued fighting that thing. They had easier time now. Because the spider lost all of its entire legs on one side. Leaving only four of them on the other side.


    But the spider released a web string from not only its butt. But also from its mouth. So the spider pretty much can still attack all direction.


    Though there¡¯s no more need to protect the wall since the spider won¡¯t be able to climb on the wall anymore with only four legs on one side.


    Well, maybe it could but it will be hard. Though if I left at least one leg on the other side, the spider might still be able to climb the wall.


    All the Kreiybs attacked the spider now. But as expected, calling them Kreiybs is annoying.


    ¡°So, I guess we need to rename their species. Kreiyb is just too weird,¡± I said to Victoria.


    ¡°Let¡¯s just call them Crab People. They are like half-human and half crabs. It¡¯s easier this way,¡± Victoria said.


    ¡°Yeah. Let¡¯s do just that,¡± I said as I watched some of the Crab People cut off another one of the spider¡¯s leg.


    Those ws are not as sharp as the sword that the cksmith made for me. the sword-cane. But their durability is much higher. Even stronger than the shells covering their bodies.


    .....


    As expected, they are a creature specialized in defense. But that doesn¡¯t mean that their attack power is not much. They are alreadyparable to the monsters in the Monsters Vige.


    They will be well-received by the others in the vige. I¡¯m sure of it.


    But if I want to make one of them as my familiar, I need to see how well they can fight underwater.


    This ce is literally under the water. But that¡¯s not what I meant. I mean I want to see how well they are in fighting while being underwater.


    But I think being out of water, they are already good enough. They know that they are not the fastest and the strongest. They only have the tool for defense and cutting. So they used their own kind of martial art if I have to say.


    I bet they never had any experience going against mages. But that won¡¯t be a problem if they move in into the vige. It can be taken care ofter since they can ask for a spar with Ang and the others.


    Pinching with their ws, cutting with their ws, and they also punch and grapple with their hands.


    And then, the leader of the Crab People that I talked with before made a move that made me decide that he should be a great decision if I take him as my familiar. The finishing move of the Crab People. Water magic.


    The ws on his shoulder raised and pointing toward the spider. Then from those ws, water came out. High pressure water. Attacking the spider from distance.


    Not only that, they can also manipte the movement of those water. Not so much, but after those water came out of the ws, midway to the spider, they changed direction when the spider moved. Though the water magic started from their ws, so it¡¯s pretty much easy for them to control.


    I wonder if they can manipte the water from the sea? Then my dream of opening a portal to the bottom of the sea and get people to manipte the direction of the watering out wille true.


    And it¡¯s not just the leader. Soon after the leader shoot his water, some other Crab People also started shooting their water. But unfortunately, after a few minutes, they¡¯re all tired from using that magic.


    I guess that¡¯s why they didn¡¯t use that magic from the start. They want to make sure that they can kill the spider before using that magic.


    Though that spider is quite strong to be able to endure such high pressure water. Maybe if that spider can swim, I¡¯ll make that spider my familiar.


    The spider no longer move. But that doesn¡¯t mean that it¡¯s already dead.


    Maybe through experience from fighting that monster many times for a long time, the Crab People quickly surrounded the spider¡¯s body and used their ws to pierce through the body until they confirm that it¡¯s truly dead.


    Except for the leader who approached me. still wearing his shell armor showing that he can¡¯t trust me yet.


    ¡°Thank for your help before. Because of you, no one died this time. Though I¡¯m sorry that I can¡¯t still trust you yet as we don¡¯t know what your intention ining here. You said you can fly, so I¡¯m sure that you didn¡¯t fall into the hole by mistake. You came here with a purpose in mind, right?¡± he asked.


    ¡°Yes. Probably to meet you all. Though I¡¯m not sure yet. By the way, what¡¯s your name?¡± I asked.


    ¡°You can call me Boss since that¡¯s what everyone here call me,¡± he said.


    ¡°No way. I won¡¯t call you Boss. I guess you don¡¯t have a name yet. I¡¯ll call you Crabbe from now on,¡± I said.


    I can hear Victoria sighing from me giving him name. But I don¡¯t care.


    ¡°Crabbe, huh? I guess that¡¯s fine. So, let¡¯s continue our talk. Why are you here?¡± Crabbe asked.


    Then I exined to him what I¡¯m here for. To look for familiar. And the reason why.


    Of course I didn¡¯t just say that it¡¯s because I¡¯m a summoner. I told them that it¡¯s because we¡¯re at war and I¡¯m looking for the greatest monsters to be my familiars.


    ¡°I already have four slots filled with only one spot left for my familiar. The reason I said that I¡¯m here probably to meet you is because I want to see how strong you are. If you¡¯re at least at a satisfying level, then I will ask you to make a contract with me,¡± I said.


    ¡°Hmm... Everyone here were born in this ce. So for things at the surface, we really don¡¯t know much about it. Even if what you said is correct and someone is trying to destroy the world, it doesn¡¯t really matter to us who could not care less about the things outside of this ce,¡± Crabbe said.


    ¡°I said that only if you¡¯re fighting abilities are at a satisfying level, right? Why are you talking as if you¡¯re good enough? Do I need to remind you that while all of you were busy removing just one leg of the spider, I cut down three by myself. What make you think that I¡¯m going to ask you to be my familiar?¡±


    I intentionally provoked them to see if they are simr kind of monsters as the werewolves. If they can be provoked easily, then if I offered them to fight, they might help.


    Also, I don¡¯t want them if they have no desire to leave this ce. Even if they don¡¯t know about the outside world, if they decided to stay in this dungeon, then there¡¯s no point in bringing them out. I can¡¯t just ask some introvert to save the world.


    Hearing my provocation, some of them got angry. Even Crabbe himself is angry.


    ¡°You might not know it, but if we fight underwater, then there¡¯s no way for us to have any trouble fighting that monster!¡± Crabbe said.


    Do they think that all creatures can breathe underwater? They¡¯re funny.


    ¡°So what if what you said is true? I have no intention on making some introverted monsters with no desire to go out of their home to fight with me. I guess I can¡¯t find anything here. Then, I will leave,¡± I said.


    I looked around and see that some of the Crab People were thinking of leaving. They have been here their whole lives and wanted to see something new. Especially the young ones.


    After a while, Crabbe asked me something.


    ¡°If one of us decided to be your familiar, will you take him out of here?¡± Crabbe asked.


    ¡°No. I will only ask the strongest one among you to be my familiar. Then, I will bring everyone who are willing out of here. I have a vige full of various kind of monsters like angels and werewolves living together. Adding you there should be fine,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then let¡¯s fight. I¡¯m the strongest here. If I show you how strong I am, then you can make a contract with me. And you can bring everyone out of here after that,¡± Crabbe said as he prepared to fight me.


    ¡°Not here. I¡¯m looking for monsters that can fight underwater. If you want to prove that you¡¯re good enough to be my familiar, then we should fight underwater,¡± I said.


    ¡°I see. There¡¯s ake over there. It¡¯s not big, but if it¡¯s just the two of us then...¡±


    ¡°No. Not ake. We will fight up there. In the sea. I¡¯ll take you up there, then we will fight. After the fight, then we can go back here. I might not be able to talk underwater, so I will tell you this. Only fight with the intent to kill me. That¡¯s your only way to prove how strong you are,¡± I said.


    I think that Crabbe is quite responsible. So I¡¯m sure that even if I bring him to the sea above, he will return here on his own even if I don¡¯t help him.


    Let¡¯s see how strong he is underwater then.

 Chapter 862 - 862 Moving the Crab People

    862 Moving the Crab People


    ¡°So, how will you take us up there to the sea?¡± Crabbe asked.


    Me? carrying him up to the sea? No way.


    I¡¯ll just use portal to get him out of here. It¡¯s simple.


    As I was about to open a portal, I realized something. They have been in this ce since birth. Other than the light from the dungeon, they have never seen the sun. Their weakness will be exposed right away if I fight them as soon as we move.


    ¡°Hmm... then I will take everyone out of here first. I will find a ce for us to fightter. I guess I can bring all of you to the vige right away. You can settle near theke or even inside theke if you like. As for the match, let¡¯s do it in a few days after you get used to the surface. After all, if you ended up joining our battle, even if I ask you to join because we need power to fight underwater, there will always battle on the surface. Though whether you will join or not will be forter. Just stay there for a few days and then we will fight,¡± I said.


    If I exploit his weakness right away, it won¡¯t be a match. And I won¡¯t be able to see anything about how strong he is. So I suggested this.


    Also, if they somehow enjoyed life under the sun, it will be more likely that they are willing to join us whether I make a contract with one of them or not.


    As monsters themselves, they might be jealous if I asked the others to help me but I don¡¯t ask them for help. So they will be willing to volunteer instead of staying in the vige.


    Even the elves are now willing to fight. Though we don¡¯t have any battle at the moment. So they are currently still improving their strength.


    .....


    I don¡¯t mind if these Crab People enter theke where everyone drink from. Because the elves have convinced me that the nts in theke will sterilize the water and make them drinkable even if someone pee on theke.


    As for where I will fight Crabbe, my first choice would be the sea. But it should be deep enough to see how good he is underwater.


    ¡°So in the end, you will bring us out of here no matter what. That¡¯s good,¡± Crabbe said.


    Now that I think about it, they are crabs. I guess they can¡¯t enter the vige. They need to be in the sea.


    Theke in the vige is artificial. And there are not many fishes there. So they need to go somewhere where there are a lot of fishes for them to hunt.


    But I remember the entrance to this dungeon. Many corpsesying there. I guess it¡¯s fine for them to stay onnd as well since I don¡¯t think that they only eat fish.


    Though they need to be able to hunt. But I think that will be fine seeing how they can fight the spider that well. As for mobility, they are not as fast as the others in the vige. But that doesn¡¯t matter since there are not only the centaurs are there, but a lot of horses who joined us because of Ray were there as well. There are horses without owner near the vige.


    It¡¯s not because we have more people than horses. But it¡¯s because there are many people who refused to get horses. Either because they can fly, or that they feel that riding a horse and using magic at the same time is difficult.


    Some elves have chosen their own horses as well. So it should be fine for the Crab People to get their own horses.


    By the way, it¡¯s actually amazing how the ecosystem near the vige is not disturbed by how many monsters living there. I guess the monsters, especially the werewolves and weretigers, would look for monsters much further. As for the nearer wild monsters, they will be prey for the weaker monsters from the vige.


    Then I guess it¡¯s fine if we keep on adding more monsters in the vige. That¡¯s good.


    I used telepathy to contact Graham and Shelia about the possible neer to the vige. They will inform the others about the Crab People¡¯s arrival.


    ¡°Alright, you need to be careful because outside there, it¡¯s much brighter than this ce. Your eyes need to adjust to the brightness there,¡± I said.


    After my warning, I gathered everyone and opened a portal to near the vige. To where Graham was.


    ¡°Oh! So bright!¡±


    The Crab People squinted their eyes because of the brightness of the sun. And it¡¯s noon. So the sun is at its highest position.


    Normally, I should be like them as well. But I have Divine Vision, so my eyes can adjust quickly to the surrounding.


    ¡°Everyone, don¡¯t alert them. They are not used to the light yet,¡± I said to the monsters waiting there.


    They are excited to see the new guests. Their new friends. And their new rivals.


    After a few minutes, all of them entered the portal. It took a while since they need to adapt to the light first. So I spent some mana since I need to let the portal opened for quite a while.


    After their eyes adapted to the light, their expression turn bright because they finally see something different after living in the dungeon for so long.


    They are enjoying the sights. But it¡¯s a good thing that I prepared something.


    I asked Graham to get some angels, the kindest angels, to guide the Crab People. So the Crab People can quickly learn the way of the outside world.


    ¡°All of you, they will stay here for a while until I can fight their strongest member. After that, whether they will stay or not depend on them. And until then, do your best in treating them in this vige,¡± I said.


    ¡°Does treating them mean that I can fight them if they ask?¡± Shelia asked.


    ¡°Obviously. They are not used to the outside world. Also, my battle will happen underwater. So after they calmed down, bring them to the sea,¡± I said.


    Of course I want to get Crabbe to get stronger before our fight. Because that means that Crab People can grow stronger.


    At least Shelia and Tiger will ask Crabbe to fight them in the next few days. And if Crabbe is smart, he would ept their challenge. And they will fight so Crabbe can get a feel of how strong we are.


    If it¡¯s a fight onnd, I¡¯m confident that Shelia will win. Though maybe Shelia will ask Crabbe to fight underwater. And Shelia will lose.


    I just hope that she won¡¯t lose any limb. Because those ws are sharp.


    ¡°Have you gotten used to the sun yet?¡± I asked Crabbe.


    ¡°What¡¯s a sun?¡±


    That¡¯s what he asked? I guess that¡¯s natural.


    So I spend the whole day exining about things that ismon for us and even the monsters here, but for the Crab People, it¡¯s their first time seeing.


    I hope that they can quickly get smarter. Because it¡¯s sad that one of our potential allies are stupid because they have been living in a cave since they were born.


    ¡°That¡¯s a sun. It¡¯s very far but very bright. That¡¯s a tree. That¡¯s a cloud. That¡¯s called the sky. That¡¯s a floating ind. That¡¯s a house.¡±


    Patiently, the angels taught the Crab People like teaching a kid. I think it will be a while until Crabbe can fight me.


    ¡°Crabbe. Get used to everything quickly. Once you do, you can tell Graham over there, the archangel, or Shelia over there, the werewolf, that you are ready to fight me. If you want to test your strength first, you can ask anyone here for a fight. But remember to not kill anyone or permanently injure anyone. If you think that you have adapted to the outside world and the sea as well, we will fight. And the fight will happen as I told you before, underwater. Do you understand?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yeah. What will you do then?¡± Crabbe asked.


    ¡°I¡¯ll take a break until you¡¯re ready to fight. Also, if you need anything, you can ask the other monsters here,¡± I said.


    After I finished exining things to Crabbe and the other Crab People, I opened a portal to return back to Cassau.


    I haven¡¯t told anyone else about the Crab People. And I also haven¡¯t explored the dungeon where I found them before.


    I will tell everyone about the Crab People now since I have returned home early. As for the dungeon exploration, I will go there before the fight with Crabbe. Alone since the gas inside the dungeon is dangerous for the other who are not air mages.


    ¡°Crab People? Like, snip-snip?¡± Ang asked. While making a hand gesture like that of a crab¡¯s ws. Or like a scissor.


    ¡°Yeah. Snip-snip. They have been inside that dangerous dungeon for so long that they need to adapt to the outside world first. I hope they are the ones I¡¯ve been looking for,¡± I said.


    Well, it¡¯s tiring to look for another monster. I hope they are the right ones for me.

 Chapter 863 - 863 Exploring the Poisonous Dungeon

    863 Exploring the Poisonous Dungeon


    The day after I brought the Crab People to the vige, I have something I want to do. So after I had breakfast in Cassau with everyone, I told them what I will be doing today while waiting for Crabbe to adapt to the outside world.


    ¡°So, I¡¯m going to check the dungeon where I found the Crab People,¡± I said.


    ¡°You¡¯re going to a dungeon? Can Ie to?¡± Ang asked.


    ¡°I¡¯d like that if possible. But the gas inside that dungeon is poisonous. So other than air mages, I don¡¯t think anyone should be able to enter it,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then what about those Crab People? Do they have immunity toward that type of gas?¡± Ka asked.


    ¡°That... is a good question. Though I can¡¯t ask them since it¡¯s theirmon sense to be able to live there since birth. So I don¡¯t think they can give us any answer,¡± I said.


    Those Crab People can live in a ce filled with poisonous gas. And they eat from the corpses of the monsters and fishes that fell to that dungeon. It¡¯s also possible that those corpses have been affected by the poisonous gas and became more poisonous to consume.


    But the Crab People are fine. Which mean that they are highly likely to have resistance against poison. Or at least the poison of the gas inside the dungeon.


    If I can tell what kind of effect that poisonous gas will bring, and I use air magic to produce that gas, I would have another method of attack.


    .....


    Maybe I should check on it as well. Should I risk my life by inhaling those gas?


    I think I will. Fire mages have more resistance toward fire magic. Lightning mages have more resistance toward lightning magic. So it¡¯s natural to think that air mages have more resistance toward poisonous gas.


    Well, if I feel that it was too much for me, I will use air magic to neutralize the poison. I hope it¡¯s possible to do that.


    ¡°Anyway, I¡¯ll be going there only with Victoria. Since they just defeated the boss monster, it should be a while until it respawn again. So I will explore the dungeon and hope that I can find some treasures,¡± I said.


    After saying my farewell, I left. I move to somewhere where no one was. Because I¡¯m afraid that the gas from the dungeon will spread once I open the portal.


    Yesterday, when I opened a portal to Monsters Vige, it¡¯s still fine because I used air magic to contain the gas from the dungeon to not get close to us. Then when no one noticed, I used air magic to neutralize the poisonous gas inside the Crab People. So they are safe to interact with other monsters.


    But now, since I¡¯m here and not in that dungeon, I have to be away from other people.


    I opened a portal to the dungeon, then I cast air magic to not let the poisonous gas to enter this ce. I think some of them were leaking, but it should be fine since it¡¯s not much.


    Then I entered the portal and quickly close it. From here, the only reason I opened a portal should only be when I¡¯m leaving. So I can¡¯t get the others or even grab a weapon. But with Victoria here, I don¡¯t need other weapons.


    I¡¯m inside the room where the Crab People fought the spider yesterday. And I can see a path going deeper. Is this ce not the boss room?


    I explored the dungeon and see a pond. I guess that¡¯s where the Crab People got their source of water. But is it fine to drink?


    I continued walking through the dungeon. It¡¯s much bigger than I expected it to be.


    Since I¡¯ve seen the entrance, where I couldn¡¯t even see the wall from where I fell, I knew that it¡¯s big. But I still underestimate how big the dungeon is.


    Then I see a path blocked by bones of monsters. If I have to guess, I think beyond that path is where the Crab People are forbidden to enter. So beyond that blockade, there should still be monsters. And they might be stronger or more troublesome than the spider from yesterday. That¡¯s why they blocked the path to not let anyone enter.


    For now, I will explore other ce first before entering that path.


    And as I expected, there are no monsters there. There were some treasure chests. But they were already empty. The Crab People must have took them away. But I didn¡¯t see anything about the thing they found. So I guess the items inside must have been used or destroyed. Because it¡¯s probably happened a long time ago. Maybe long before Crabbe was born.


    Seeing that I couldn¡¯t find anything, it¡¯s time to go through the blocked path.


    I just punched through the blockade and walked casually inside. And soon enough, I can see monsters with my Divine Vision.


    ¡°Well, it¡¯s time to fight, I guess.¡±


    Since I can see monsters now, it¡¯s best to just quickly defeat them. So I started running.


    The monsters are mostly spiders. Like the spider that the Crab People defeated yesterday.


    But while the Crab People had trouble fighting one, I easily defeated three of them with one sh. This tells how much the difference in strength is between the Crab People and me.


    But they can use water magic. And they have strong defensepared to other monsters. And maybe underwater, they are as strong as Spot and his children. I can only find out about it after we fight. But when will we fight, I don¡¯t know yet. I¡¯ll just wait until Shelia or Graham contacted me.


    As I continued exploring the dungeon and defeating monsters, I finally found a treasure chest. So I move toward the chest and defeated a slightly bigger spider than before who was protecting the chest.


    I opened the chest to see...


    ¡°Leaves? There are leaves inside the chest?¡± I said curiously.


    Why would there be leaves inside a chest? Is this perhaps consumable items?


    ¡°Well, let¡¯s appraise itter,¡± I said while putting them in my pocket.


    And so, I continued my exploration. I defeated all the monsters.


    Unsurprisingly, the hardest monsters here are not the giant spiders. But the small spiders. They were just too many. And it was too annoying since they are so small.


    There were no more treasure other than those leaves. So I entered thest room to face the Dungeon Boss.


    Another spider. It¡¯s just 2 meters tall though. But this one has thick exoskeleton.


    ...Which got destroyed by just one punch filled with Aura. And it died. So I conquered the dungeon in less than a day.


    I returned back to Cassau and let someone appraise those leaves I found. There were ten of them.


    A few dayster, I still got no contact from my familiars in the vige. But I got the appraisal result of those ten leaves from Jeremy.


    ¡°I used one of them to experiment, so I can only return the other nine. I don¡¯t have the name for them yet. Those leaves are not really came from any kind of nts. I asked Lina to call the Elf Queen to help me with the appraisal, but she said that it¡¯s not a nt. It¡¯s more of a food,¡± Jeremy said.


    ¡°So it¡¯s some kind of foods? What a weird food,¡± I said.


    ¡°They are only effective when they are being chewed. When they are swallowed, they are useless. The effect is that when you chew it while closing your mouth, you can breathe anywhere. Including underwater. And you won¡¯t get affected by poisonous gas as long as you breathe only from your mouth with the leaf inside your mouth.¡±


    Oh, so they are useful for diving. I don¡¯t need them. But maybe I can give them to Carmen and other water mages so the can fight underwater.


    The reason why I didn¡¯t think about them when discussing about underwater battle was because of that. Even if they are water mage, their fight underwater will be limited by how long they can hold their breath.


    Or maybe they can breathe underwater already by using water magic? I don¡¯t know. I never asked.


    So I guess giving it to them will be useless. I think giving them to Shelia or other monsters will be more useful.


    Right. I¡¯ll do just that then. Though I will tell them to hold the use of the leaves until they are in an important battle against the cult. Because if I don¡¯t tell them, they will just use it to watch the fight between me and Crabbe.


    Maybe I¡¯ll just give themter after the fight. That would be fine.


    And a few dayster, I finally got a message from Graham using telepathy. He said that Crabbe is ready to fight and is already waiting for me in the sea near the vige.


    ¡°Alright. I wille tomorrow,¡± I said.


    I wonder how strong they will be underwater? I also never received information about them from Graham and Shelia about their lives there. And if they fought the Crab People while they are adapting to the lives outside the dungeon.


    I can¡¯t wait to see how good they are in an underwater fight.

 Chapter 864 - 864 The Crab People Grew

    864 The Crab People Grew


    ¡°So you will fight underwater today?¡± Ka asked me.


    It¡¯s the day of the match. And I¡¯m ready to fight.


    ¡°Yes. I will fight Crabbe today. I¡¯m curious to see how strong he is. Though I will get Spot and his children first. They are the only ones who can watch our fight and wanted to do so. Though there are other monsters who want to watch but they can¡¯t,¡± I said.


    ¡°What about those chewing leaves? Anyone should be able to breathe underwater and watch you fight if you give them,¡± Ang asked. I guess she just wanted to get one so she can watch our battle.


    ¡°They are consumable items. And there¡¯s only nine of them left. I¡¯d like to save them until the battle. Because even if we have the Crab People to join us, there might be too many of them to fight and they will need your help,¡± I said.


    In my past life, there¡¯s no battle on the sea. At least I don¡¯t know if it happen or not.


    But now, we learned that they have a lot of tamers and summoners. And they have sea monsters as their contracted monsters. So they can fight from the sea.


    At least it¡¯s good that they are sea monsters. Because they might not be able to fight onnd. But if the sea is conquered, then there¡¯s no way to for us to win this war. Even if we end up winning the battle onnd, there¡¯s nothing we can do since we know that the sea has been conquered.


    That¡¯s why I want to have sea monsters as my allies. It¡¯s great that at first, Spot joined us and told his children to protect the sea. But after that time with the orcas, and the time against the Kraken as well, I don¡¯t think just Spot and his children will be enough.


    .....


    And now, we have someone who might be joining us soon. I know that the other monsters were trying to convince them to join us. But I haven¡¯t heard of their answer yet.


    If they won¡¯t join us, then I guess I¡¯ll have to dive again and look for other monsters to turn into our allies. Maybe I will look for another underwater dungeon.


    Then I opened a portal to where Spot and his children are. Spot¡¯s children were still unable to change their size. If I want to transport them using portal, then I would spent quite the amount of mana. I don¡¯t want to do that since I¡¯m going to fight soon.


    Fortunately, they are fast when they are flying. Not as fast as Spot though. So we just fly from where they were to the sea near the vige. Spot said that it will take a few hours to go there. So I just chatted with him on the way.


    ¡°Are they strong?¡± Spot asked.


    ¡°Their attack power and defensive power areparable to the monsters in the vige. And that¡¯s onnd. If it¡¯s underwater, then I don¡¯t know. That¡¯s what I¡¯m trying to find out today,¡± I said.


    The Crab People have the raw strength to fight evenly against the weretigers. But the weretigers have been staying in the vige for a while. So they learned their own skills and technique to fight monsters.


    But for the Crab People, their way of fighting were still amateurish. I hope that in this few days that I left them be, they learned something to get themselves stronger.


    Well, surrounded by battle-addicts, I¡¯m sure that they have grown. Even if it¡¯s just a little.


    ¡°Then, after you fight their representative, let me fight them. We finally have someone to spar with other than ourselves,¡± Spot said.


    ¡°Okay. You can ask themter. But of course I need to fight first,¡± I said.


    ¡°What if I fight first? Since I¡¯m a sea monsters, then you can watch if they could be great in a fight against sea monsters or not,¡± Spot suggested.


    ¡°No. I will fight first. This fight will decide if they are worthy to be my familiar or not after all.¡±


    Although I¡¯m still leaning toward making Crabbe into my familiar, I¡¯m still not a hundred percent sure yet. I¡¯ll just watch how good he will be underwater.


    Though I¡¯m sure that any sea monsters should be faster than me underwater. But if it¡¯s sinking, then I can sink faster than anyone with Victoria¡¯s help.


    Finally, I can see the beach. And I contacted Shelia and Graham that I¡¯m close.


    I can see the werewolves, angels, elves, weretigers, and centaurs there. Even Ray and the horses are there as well. Will it be a great idea for the Crab People to ride horses? Then they won¡¯t have any problem with mobility onnd.


    As for the Crab People... Wait, what?! It has only been a few days since I left them here! How could they became so big!


    ¡°Crabbe? Is that you?¡±


    I asked one of the Crab People I knew. And I even gave him the name myself.


    He grew big. Much bigger than before.


    Previously, all the Crab People are around the size of a human. Just around 170-190 cm. But now, most of them are over 3 meters tall. With Crabbe himself is over 4 meters tall.


    ¡°I am. Soon after you left, we had a feast with other monsters. Then we grew bigger. Though yesterday, our growth stopped. And I have adapted enough to this world and to the sea to face you,¡± the giant Crabbe said.


    ¡°Yes. Other than when we¡¯re eating, we fought almost every day. At first, I was winning easily. But then, it became harder to win. Though I still never lost. Except when we fought underwater,¡± Shelia said.


    So, not only do they grew stronger. They also grew bigger!


    As a doctor, this is confusing. Though what I can say about this is that it¡¯s because of magic. But is it?


    If I have to guess, then it must be because they were affected by the poisonous gas in the dungeon. And now that the air they¡¯re breathing is no longer poisonous, they recovered to the size they were supposed to be at.


    ¡°Crabbe, let me ask you a question. Before they died, your elders were around this size. Am I right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Well, they were not this big. But yeah, they were bigger than I was when I was in that ce,¡± Crabbe said.


    Then it was as expected. The air outside helped them to regain their original selves. Maybe the sea water. But whatever it is, that poisonous gas is the reason why they were small before.


    Especially those ws. They are bigger than his head. And there are more joints so they are flexible enough to move however he wants. Like a whip.


    If I have to fight him, then I have to worry about those ws. Though his physical strength must be improved greatly with his size.


    I thought that I might be able to convince them to join us by showing our culture. But I guess it¡¯s impossible if they are this big. No clothes fit them.


    ¡°Since you helped us getting out of that ce, we agreed that we will help you in the war whatever the result of our fight will be. Even if you don¡¯t make a contract with me, I¡¯m fine to stay in the vige,¡± Crabbe said.


    Well, that¡¯s good. But if he can be my familiar, that¡¯s enough. I¡¯ll test him now.


    ¡°Oh, Master. I forgot to tell you something. We have four more dragons joining the vige. Two of them are a couple. And the female of that couple willy her eggs soon. I think it¡¯s best if you show your face to them soon,¡± Graham said.


    Four more dragons? As long as they are not hostile, then that¡¯s good. Though I don¡¯t know if they are willing to help us or not.


    Maybe we can just ride them like how we ride horses. I¡¯ll ask if those dragons are willing to be our ride or not. Though maybe other than Andro¡¯s granddaughter, none of them are able to speak. I¡¯ll meet themter after the fight.


    ¡°Then I will meet themter after the fight. You can go back now since you can¡¯t watch the fight. We will fight deep enough so only Ray, Spot, and Spot¡¯s children will be able to watch us,¡± I said.


    Some monsters left. But most of them stayed. While all the Crab People were staying to watch our battle.


    ¡°Before we enter, since I can¡¯t speak underwater, I will tell you what you need to know. Don¡¯t worry about me. Just fight with the intent to kill. If you fought with Shelia, then you should know that I¡¯m much stronger than her,¡± I said.


    Crabbe nodded. Then I instructed Spot to bring us to where we will fight. From the beach, a few kilometers away. Then after we reach there, I will dive.


    While I¡¯m sitting on Spot¡¯s head who is swimming on the surface, the Crab People were swimming. None of them were riding on Spot.


    And all of them were good swimmer. I thought that since they are crabs, they won¡¯t be too fast. But I was wrong. They are fast enough to race against Spot¡¯s children.


    And seeing dozens of them swimming is a little scary. Dozens of huge people were swimming very fast. That¡¯s like a scene from nightmare.


    Maybe I should be more serious in the fight then.

 Chapter 865 - 865 Fighting Crabbe

    865 Fighting Crabbe


    I¡¯m riding on Spot¡¯s head as he swum into the ocean. Behind him were his children. And behind his children were the Crab People.


    A whole tribe of Crab People were swimming to the ocean. And seeing how those monsters that kind of look like humans except their four arms and their gigantic size swimming, it¡¯s kind of scary.


    On average, they are over 3 meters tall. With Crabbe himself is over 4 meters tall. So huge.


    I wonder how huge the dragons that have entered the vige? Are they as big as the Crab People? They are getting along with other monsters, right? I hope that they won¡¯t kill each other.


    If there¡¯s any problem in the vige with the arrival of the dragons, I hope that Shelia and Graham can take care of it. And almost all the monsters in the vige arebatants, so they should help if such thing happened.


    And if they can¡¯t do it for some reason, then I will call Andro and stop those dragons from causing ruckus. It should be fine.


    ¡°Alright, let¡¯s stop here.¡±


    After swimming far enough from the shore, I stopped Spot. Then the others also stopped.


    The waves created by them stopping can be seen. Not as huge and as dangerous as the wave created by the group of orcas before. But this is still huge. If those Crab People move more powerfully, they should be able to create bigger and stronger wave.


    .....


    ¡°Crabbe, we will fight down here. We will start from the bottom and then fight however we want. There¡¯s no boundaries of where we should fight. Just fight however you want,¡± I said.


    ¡°Okay. I¡¯m also curious about how strong an Aura Master is. Shelia and the other strong monsters in the vige said that you are the strongest innd. And you wanted to fight me underwater. Are you sure you¡¯re ready?¡± Crabbe asked.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about me. I can breathe just fine underwater. Also, I won against this serpent in a fight a long time ago. So I¡¯m quite strong,¡± I said.


    Though it was not something I can call a victory. But I think that if it¡¯s now, I can win against Spot in a real battle.


    ¡°Well, not really though. If it¡¯s underwater, it¡¯s still my victory since I can just swallow you whole when I¡¯m in my real size. And the battle back then was not just underwater. But also on air and onnd. So you can¡¯t use me as aparison,¡± Spot said.


    But I felt like I was winning back then, so I will say that I won.


    ¡°Anyway, let¡¯s dive to the bottom of the sea. Can you see well in the dark?¡± I asked.


    ¡°You asked me? Someone who have been living in the dark ce since I was born?¡± Crabbe asked.


    Yep, my fault. He can still see well in the dark. At least he won¡¯t have a problem with fighting there.


    ¡°Then let¡¯s go. I won¡¯t be able to talk underwater. So if one of us wave our hand like this, it means that you gave up and the battle is over. If you understand, let¡¯s dive,¡± I said.


    ¡°I can still speak underwater though. So I will not wave my hand like that,¡± Crabbe said before he dives into the water.


    My bad. I guess it¡¯s magic.


    ¡°I can also speak underwater. Though if I do that to you, you might be jealous. That¡¯s why I only texted you using the phone you gave me,¡± Spot said.


    Am I the stupid one in this situation? Maybe.


    Who would have thought that intellectual sea monsters can speak underwater? Not me.


    Crabbe dived into the water so fast. Should be faster than Spot when he¡¯s diving down vertically. Is he okay with the water pressure?


    Then the other Crab People also dived down. They are all covered with shells. Are they useful against water pressure? Or maybe it¡¯s because their bodies are naturally strong?


    Whatever the case, they are good at swimming. As long as Crabbe is willing, I will make a contract with him. Making him myst familiar as a master level summoner. And I hope that no one will die so I don¡¯t have to look for another monster.


    Spot also dived down to see how fast the Crab People were. Leaving me standing on the sea.


    And then, Victoria covered my body and adjust her weight to the heaviest. Since this is not a real fight, I don¡¯t want to wear the magic armor. Victoria will be my weapon underwater.


    With her weight, I sunk faster than anyone else. And I reached the bottom first. Followed by Crabbe and the others.


    Only me and Crabbe here. The others are watching us from a safe distance.


    Well, even if they are not close, that doesn¡¯t mean that I can just use my powerful Twisting Spear attack here. Or I might end up hurting them. I guess I¡¯ll just focus on close range.


    I might not be a fast swimmer. But I can move easily underwater. Just by using Aura covering any part of my body, then I will punch or kick the water so I can maneuver and dodge any attack. That¡¯s what I always do in an underwater battle.


    Though it¡¯s been a long time since Ist fight someone underwater. Thest time is probably when I fought Spot.


    Now, the fight begun.


    Without any warning, I kicked the sand and dashed toward Crabbe. Pointing my spear at him.


    First, it¡¯s just a test. I want to see how strong his shell armor is.


    With just a little bit of Aura infused to Victospear, I thrust it forward toward Crabbe¡¯s chest. His inner organ is very simr to a human. Not everything is simr, but some are. And his heart is located in his left side of his chest. And I aimed toward that ce.


    With this strength, I could even kill most sea monsters I previously encounter. But the tip of the spear stopped at Crabbe¡¯s shell protecting his heart. And there¡¯s barely a dent in it.


    Yup, that¡¯s strong. He¡¯s more than worthy to be my familiar already. But now, let¡¯s see how strong his attack is. Though I already know the answer.


    Not with his w, but with his fist, he punched me. I can endure that punch easily, but I¡¯m not a creature of water. So I still got blown back from that punch.


    From the outside, it seems like he¡¯s the stronger one. Though neither of us were using our full strength.


    I just smiled at him as a recognition that he¡¯s a strong individual. From now, the real battle begun.


    I increased the amount of Aura infused into the spear. And Crabbe realized that he can¡¯t protect himself with his shell, so he used both his ws to defend himself.


    The result was he got blown back several meters. And his right w was dented a bit. Though he can still use it.


    I know that he can regenerate his shell. But when the shell are destroyed, especially on his ws, I don¡¯t think that he can use those ws anytime soon. But it seems like it¡¯s still strong enough to endure an attack from an Aura user.


    I guess that means I have to get more serious.


    Knowing that I¡¯m much stronger than expected, Crabbe attacked me from far using water magic from both his ws. There¡¯s not much attack power, but they are strong enough to push me back. But maybe since we¡¯re underwater, and he¡¯s only using water magic to push me, there¡¯s nothing for me to worry about. And I can protect myself from the water pressure. So I¡¯m quite fine.


    As expected, he¡¯s still not used in using magic for a long time. Just like when he fought the spider. Though he used his magic longer than before now.


    When his water magic stopped, I used all my strength to push myself forward before he could escape.


    This might be underwater, but I can still usebo attack. And I used multiple thrust because it¡¯s the easiest attack to use underwater. I just need to thrust the spear forward and pull it back over and over again as fast as possible.


    But to do that, I need to cover my body with Aura more than before. So the attacking power is less than when I dented one of Crabbe¡¯s w. But it¡¯s normal for abo attack to be weaker than one strong attack.


    I just need to attack Crabbe over and over again until his armor is broken. And I can see some part of his shells have holes since he couldn¡¯t use his ws to protect everything. Though those part are not his vitals at all.


    Isn¡¯t it great to have four arms? He could protect more parts of his body than just using two arms. Especially those huge ws. Though my attack doesn¡¯t seem to break his ws yet. Just how much stronger is his wpared to the shells on the other parts of his body?


    Finally, he used his left w to pinch on Victospear. Then he tried to attack me with his other w. But Victoria is a shape-shifting slime. So I just need to get her transformed to get out of there before he could hit me.


    I see that he got good sense of battle. I¡¯m getting more and more interested in making a contract with him.

 Chapter 866 - 866 My Fifth Familiar

    866 My Fifth Familiar


    ¡°That¡¯s your first familiar, the ck Slime, Victoria. Am I right? She¡¯s a good partner for you. She can transform at will. I, Crabbe, greet my senior,¡± Crabbe said.


    What was that? It¡¯s like some sort of senior junior rtionship. Is he really thinking that he will be my familiar?


    Well, I guess that¡¯s the case. I¡¯m sure that if it¡¯s Graham and Shelia, they knew that I¡¯m already thinking of making Crabbe into my familiar.


    I already have two familiars in the vige. One from the werewolf race, and another from angel race. Then Lina has a familiar from the elf race. After that, the master level summoner has familiar from the centaur race. Other than that, there are weretigers and the recently joined dragons. There¡¯s also vampires on Earth. They¡¯re all amazing monsters.


    But the monsters in the vige are either from the race of a monster I made a contract with, or monsters who somehow get closer to me.


    As for the Crab People, we just met and I already brought them to the vige. So the smart monsters must have thought that I will surely make a contract with Crabbe. Especially since they knew that I¡¯m looking for a sea monster.


    ¡°Let¡¯s continue. I will show you that I won¡¯t lose in underwater fight,¡± Crabbe said.


    ¡°Blub-blub, blub blub blub.¡±


    Right, I forgot that I can¡¯t speak underwater. What am I replying for then?


    .....


    What I tried to say was that there¡¯s no way that I will lose. Though no one can tell. Because we¡¯re underwater.


    Whatever. Let¡¯s just fight.


    Crabbe swum toward me extremely quick. He used his hands to push himself forward with water magic and will attack with his ws. I guess he can use water magic again now.


    I think the way he used it now is much better then using water magic to shoot at the enemy. At least underwater. Though maybe they can use it to levitate in the air if the water magic has enough force. I¡¯ll ask themter.


    If they can, then just like Spot, they can fight mid-air as well. That would be way too amazing. And I want him to be my familiar more and more.


    With his left w, Crabbe tried to hit me. Is that considered a punch?


    Since I¡¯m underwater, I kept using Aura to cover my entire body. If I only use Aura to cover one part of the body, the water pressure at the bottom of the ocean will hit me. And if I keep covering my body with Aura and protecting myself from his attack, there would still be damage taken.


    So I had to protect myself with a weapon. And I used Victospear to block his w.


    Then he threw another attack with his right w. Since that arm is really long, he could even use it to attack me from behind while his left w is still blocked. But I dodged it. Then I blocked his right w with Victospear as well.


    Then, he pinched Victospear with both ws and pulled me who was still grabbing the middle part of the spear toward him. Then he prepared to throw a punch. A really strong punch with wide swing and water magic to push the punch even faster and stronger.


    Then, let¡¯s see. Who has the strongest punch underwater?


    Crabbe¡¯s fist covered with shell, or my fist slightly covered with Aura?


    I let go of Victospear and punched him with my right hand. While he used his right fist as well to hit me.


    Our fist met at the middle. I got my hand blown back because of Crabbe¡¯s strength. But he got not only the shell on his fist destroyed, his fist was also broken. It¡¯s impossible to use it now unless he has the healing skill at simr level of Ka.


    He¡¯s still stronger than me. But my attack, since I¡¯m smaller as well, is more focused in one spot. Though if he trained his punches more, he could hit me harder.


    He retreated back and then used both of his ws to chop off his own broken fist. Is he crazy? I want him in his prefect condition!


    And soon after, a new fist appeared. Just like that, he could easily regenerate missing limb.


    ¡°If I use magic, I can regenerate even missing limbs. Including the shell. Though if I don¡¯t use magic, they will still regenerate. But it will take time,¡± Crabbe said.


    I almost replied with another blub-blub. But still, that was great. Though for him to chop off his own hand like that is crazy. Why not just use the regeneration ability to heal his own fist?


    Maybe because he thought that it will take too long with the same amount of mana used to heal his own fist. That¡¯s why he just chop it off.


    Then, if I want to finish the fight, I have to make it so that he will start thinking that he has no chance of winning. So I became more serious and looked at him with killing intent.


    When he was shocked to see that I wanted to kill him, I¡¯m already close to him and thrust Victospear to his stomach. This time, it was stronger than when I thrust his chest. And Victospear pierced his armor and wounded his stomach.


    With fearful expression, he grabbed Victospear and pulled it out of his stomach. But my attack didn¡¯t end like that.


    I kept thrusting Victospear again and again. But he also started to get used with my killing intent, so he started fighting back.


    Then he grabbed Victospear again and threw her away. So it became a fistfight underwater.


    I only focused on attack, so his punches hit me. And those giant ws and fists that are bigger than my head hit my face. But I ignored them as I focused more on hitting him.


    The result is obvious. I won. Crabbe no longer had the will to continue to fight.


    The fight is over with a right straight to his face. And even though he didn¡¯t lose his consciousness, he knew that he had no chance in winning.


    ¡°I... give up. I can¡¯t win against you. You really are the strongest,¡± Crabbe said while waving his hand in surrender.


    Alright, Roy. Don¡¯t reply. You¡¯re doing good at not humiliating yourself the second time.


    Since the battle is over, I pointed to the surface telling him that we should get out of here. And I see that Victoria turned into a fish as she swam toward me then attached herself into me like usual.


    Why doesn¡¯t she stay as a fish and swim upward?


    Now that the battle is over, Spot and the others who are watching approached us. Then Spot let himself be our ride to the surface. I guess Crabbe was too tired to move after the fight.


    We move around a lot. I thought that we were quite far when we dived to the bottom. But now that we resurfaced, we¡¯re back to the shore again. And I can see some monsters were waiting for us there.


    ¡°Did you win?¡± Shelia asked me.


    ¡°Easily,¡± I replied confidently.


    ¡°I bet it was just because he doesn¡¯t have much experience fighting underwater,¡± Shelia said.


    She¡¯s right. There are many ways that I could lose during the fight. But I still win in the end. That¡¯s all that matter. And I haven¡¯t fully gone all out as well. So even if he got stronger, I would still win.


    ¡°Alright. Crabbe, you know what I¡¯m going to do with you?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yes. You will make me as your familiar. I will ept it and do anything you ask me. I don¡¯t know much about your Earth. But I will just do what you said. Not just me. But all my people will follow you as well,¡± Crabbe said.


    ¡°Good. ept this.¡±


    I used summoning magic to make a contract with Crabbe. And it¡¯s done. He¡¯s now my fifth familiar. And hopefully, thest one.


    ¡°Well, I guess that¡¯s it. I will introduce you all to my friends tomorrow. Is there anything else you want?¡± I asked Crabbe.


    ¡°Well, I like to stay in the vige with the other monsters. We¡¯ll be staying in theke. Is it possible to make it bigger?¡± Crabbe asked.


    ¡°That¡¯s fine. Tomorrow when I bring everyone, they will use magic to make theke bigger. There¡¯s no one from the vige refusing it, right? Then it¡¯s fine,¡± I said.


    Staying in the vige is good. Because I don¡¯t have to look far for them. I don¡¯t have to go to the sea if I need anything from them.


    Maybe I should make an underwater tunnel connecting theke to the sea. That way, they can leave whenever they want to hunt fishes.


    ¡°Ah, Tia. If it¡¯s sea water, can they be purified by the nt?¡± I asked the Elf Queen.


    ¡°Yes. It¡¯s possible. Do you want us to grow those nts in the sea?¡± Tia asked.


    ¡°No. I¡¯m nning to connect theke to the sea for the Crab People. To make it easier for them toe and go. Maybe a huge tunnel the size that Spot¡¯s original size can enter. There might be enemiesing from the sea, but now that we have the Crab People, it will be fine,¡± I said.


    I¡¯ll ask the others about the reconstruction of theke. And they happily epted it.


    For now, it¡¯s time to return.

 Chapter 867 - 867 Making a Tunnel to the Sea

    867 Making a Tunnel to the Sea


    Just like usual. Neers in the Monsters Vige, and I introduced them to Albert and the others.


    ¡°This time, it¡¯s the Crab People. You really did gain a new army. And they can fight underwater as well. Even if you don¡¯t fight and let only the monsters fight, I¡¯m sure that you can easily destroy one or two kingdom. Or even conquer the continent,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Not just me though. Any tamer who can tame them all can do that. Though it seems like being forcefully tamed is not something that these guys want. Even the master level tamer had to ask for permission or the recoil from the contract magic refusal will hit him back,¡± I said.


    The master level tamer is acting up again. With new monstersing, including the dragons, he tried to tame as many as possible. But the monsters here seem to be resistant to contract magic. Unless they were willingly make a contract themselves.


    I don¡¯t know, but it seems like intellectual monsters who canmunicate with are harder to make a contract with. Maybe because they are smarter?


    Anyway, the tamer must be thinking of increasing his strength. So I kicked him to wake him up. As long as I¡¯m here, I won¡¯t let him do whatever he wants.


    I introduced Crabbe and the other Crab People to Albert and the others. The others don¡¯t have names. And I only gave Crabbe his name because I don¡¯t want to call him Boss. It¡¯s as if he¡¯s my boss. So I gave him a name.


    While other Crab People, they can think of a name themselves.


    Still, they are huge. The Crab People and the dragons as well. It¡¯s as if the vige turned into a vige of small creatures like werewolves, angels, and the others. Though they are normal sized. The huge ones are the Crab People and the dragons.


    .....


    When I arrived here with everyone, I could see that a Crab Person is fighting against Jack. The second strongest werewolf. And Jack could barely defeat the Crab Person with his speed. Though for strength and defense, the Crab Person is obviously stronger. He¡¯s justcking in experience.


    But while they are slowly gaining experience, the other monsters are the same as well as they learned more in their victories and losses in the Colosseum. While the Crab People haven¡¯t fought much.


    Other than the Crab People, I also met the dragons for the first time. Other than Andro¡¯s granddaughter and her children.


    Maybe because I was one of the people whom they first saw when they were hatched that they became so attached to me. Five children with one of them being a Kaiser Dragon. The other four were y biting on each of my limbs and the baby Kaiser Dragon, who have grown to be taller than me was chewing on my head. They are so lovely with their way of affection.


    ¡°No, they are trying to eat you. When they get closer to other people or monsters, they would escape or fight back. Which makes these babies afraid of them since they hit them. But you didn¡¯t hit them back. So they are thinking that you are food,¡± Graham exined.


    ...I¡¯m a food it seems.


    Though what about the Crab People? Maybe their shells are too hard for these baby dragons. So they gave up on eating them.


    If I use a bit of intimidation to them, I¡¯m sure that they will be afraid of me and won¡¯t dare to do it again. But let¡¯s not do that and just patiently teach the dragons.


    ¡°Stop biting me or I¡¯ll spank your asses!¡±


    That is not patiently at all. But the baby dragons released me so I guess it works.


    ¡°They are still babies. They need to grind their baby teeth so they will be sharp. And when their baby teeth are sharp, when new teeth are growing, they will be sharper. That¡¯s what they¡¯re doing to you as you might be their best chewing toy.¡±


    The one who said that is flying in the sky. He¡¯s Andro. He¡¯s also here to visit his great grandsons. Especially the baby Kaiser Dragon.


    He doesn¡¯t have long to live since a new Kaiser Dragon is born. But no one other than me knew it yet. Though it seems like he will still be alive until the new Kaiser Dragon reached adulthood.


    He¡¯s also here to keep the new dragons in line. Though that¡¯s not a problem since they are enjoying battle with Shelia and the others. And they also learning to speak.


    Dragons can speak. But they were justzy to learn it. So most dragons never really learnnguage until adulthood. And now that they live in this vige, making friends with other monsters, they started to learnnguage.


    For now, they can simply say, ¡°Let¡¯s fight,¡± to other monsters. And so, more and more monsters are fighting. That¡¯s why some earth mages here helped build the Colosseum to be bigger. Though some battles are outside of the Colosseum.


    After introducing everyone and get to know with the new monsters, I asked earth mages and water mages, including the Crab People, to make theke deeper andrger. And to make a tunnel connecting to the sea. Big enough that Spot in his original size can enter freely.


    We already have master level earth mages, so making theke bigger is not a problem. Though we needed a lot of water. But seems like the water spring, the source of the water on theke, produce a lot of water, so it¡¯s fine.


    Then for the tunnel, we had the water mages and the Crab People to learn to split theke water so the earth mages can make a tunnel. I think it will take a while for the tunnel to bepleted, so we just mostly teach the monsters about magic control for the first day.


    I was about to return, but Red, the smartest werewolf who is in charge of the vige, stopped me.


    ¡°My king, if you like, how about you stay here for the night? Because we gained more monsters, we hunted more monsters. And the dragons and Crab People helped with the hunt. So we have a lot of meat and feasted every night. Please join us if you like,¡± Red said.


    A feast? I won¡¯t refuse then. Then I brought back everyone who is busy and unable to attend the feast, and bring here Lina and Ian to help with the cooking. Ruby also joined because Ian is here.


    The monsters have learned to cook. But they prefer to eat more. If I have Lina here, then the taste of the cooking will suit me more.


    They actually hunted some monsters I never see before. They said that they are delicious, so I can¡¯t wait.


    The dragons and Crab People who are used to eat everything raw tried to eat those monsters right away, but the other monsters stopped them.


    Seems like they need some time until they get used to waiting so they can eat more delicious food.


    It was a great feast. I ate until I¡¯m full. While the baby dragons returned to biting me again after I let down my guard. I just endured it since they will have stronger and sharper teeth when they grow up.


    And so, we stayed untilte and returned back to Cassau.


    We rested for one night before returning to the vige toplete the tunnel.


    Now that the Crab People can use magic better, they split theke and let me and the earth mages to dig a tunnel. Though after we dug deep enough, we covered the tunnel so even after they stopped using magic to split theke, the water won¡¯t enter it.


    We should have done that from the start. But this is fine as well.


    Ka and Celestine used their earth magic to dig the tunnel and reinforce it. Seems like Ka can manipte metal now. Though for that, Celestine is better.


    In just a few hours, the tunnel reached the sea. Just a bit more and it will connect. But we stopped before we connected to the sea.


    ¡°The fresh water and salt water will meet. I think it¡¯s best for the path to theke is opened first. Then the water will enter, and break the wall to the sea. Roy, you can do it on your own now. I don¡¯t want to get wet so please take us out of here,¡± Ka said.


    And so, I get the two back to the vige. Then I opened a portal into the tunnel near the wall to theke. I already had a Blobby there.


    Then with just one punch, I broke the wall connecting theke to the tunnel. Because we made the tunnel quite deep, the water pressure is stronger. Then I just need the water to hit the other wall.


    I just let the water push my body so I can see if the wall on the other side will be broken. Being carried by the current is surprisingly fun.


    Finally, the water reached the wall at the other side. And it really break the wall and connecting theke to the sea.


    With this, the Crab People and the serpents can freely go to the sea when they want.


    ...Though I don¡¯t know if it¡¯s important for battle or not. But this could be used as an escape route just in case. So I guess it¡¯s fine.

 Chapter 868 - 868 Days Like This Happened Too Often

    868 Days Like This Happened Too Often


    It¡¯s been a month since I got Crabbe as my familiar and created a water tunnel under theke in the Monsters Vige to the sea. And so far, we didn¡¯t gain much in our investigation of the cult leader¡¯s location. The so-called Evil God.


    The Evil God was supposed to be the one who hated Aura users and targeted them all. But now that he should know that we have someone who can use Aura, he should be looking for me. But so far, the cult has been very quiet.


    It¡¯s as if he doesn¡¯t really hate Aura user. Then it must be as I guessed. He only killed Aura users to improve his strength.


    We were only taught five level of magic. Beginner level, intermediate level, advanced level, expert level, and master level.


    But on our journey to the cult¡¯s destruction, we learned another level beyond master level. And after gathering as many information as we could, we guessed that the Evil God is already beyond that level beyond master level. And killing Aura users is probably one way to reach that level. It¡¯s just a guess though.


    And so, we are gathering together this time in Consenza. This is our monthly meeting. Though we will gather whenever we learned another important information. Either it¡¯s about the cult, or about how we can get stronger. Or other things that can help each other countries.


    This is the first time that the continent is united after all. Though we still don¡¯t know who the real enemy is, but we can do something to improve the rtionship between countries.


    In my past life, no such thing happened. There were probably only a few countries working together. But now, almost all the countries in the continent is here. Though maybe they did in the past. But just like today, not many people know about it. Only those who are directly involved knew.


    Well, whatever the case, we are already stronger than in my past life. Even Mustache and his mboyant Mustache troop is much stronger than in my past life. Even a few weeks ago, Mustache reached master level. And most of the members of the troops are expert level mages.


    .....


    Then there¡¯s also Randy. I think he will soon reach master level in his earth element. It¡¯s great that we got the help of spirits.


    And surprisingly, Veronica who said that she¡¯szy in her cultivation will soon reach master level.


    I guess we have been living in peace for a while so we didn¡¯t need as many people to fight as before since there¡¯s no big battle so far.


    In this past month, the cult didn¡¯t do anything. But some investigation members found several small cities and viges that has been under the control of the cult for a while. So we cleaned up those ces.


    We also found a port city that has been under control of the cult. That¡¯s when we tried to see how good the Crab People are in fighting.


    There¡¯s no strong mages at that time, but there were some tamers who tamed sea monsters. And Crabbe and the other Crab People easily defeated them all. Without having me to intervene.


    As expected. They are stronger in a group. And they fight better than Spot and his children in a group battle. Though for individual battle, Spot and his children are still the better one.


    I heard that Spot challenged Crabbe in an underwater fight. The result was Spot¡¯s victory. But when he had to fight three or more Crab People, Spot barely won. That¡¯s when he stopped increased the number because he knew that he would lose then.


    Hearing the result of the Crab People¡¯s fight, some suggested to let the Crab People stay in the sea on Earth instead of staying in Monsters World. But then we rejected that idea in the end.


    ¡°This world is too big for a small number of Crab People to protect. So we can¡¯t do that,¡± I said.


    Though we got one other good thing after we got the Crab People¡¯s loyalty. The master level tamer.


    He then ventured on his own with his horse to look for sea monsters by himself. Though in the end, the Summoner and his centaur apanied him. I guess they are close.


    If he could get as many monsters as possible, that would be great. And we also gained an assurance that he won¡¯t ever tried to rebel against us again. He promised to only use those monsters to fight against the cult.


    And back to the meeting, we¡¯re considering our next action.


    ¡°So, we can only wait until they make their move. But do we really need to wait?¡± Fabio asked.


    ¡°We can bait him using Roy. He¡¯s an Aura Master, so if the Evil God is targeting him, then we can justy in ambush. But if he¡¯s really the same Evil God as the one who killed all Aura Users in the past, and he has lived for a long time, he won¡¯t be that stupid to be baited. But do we have any other options?¡± Albert suggested.


    The future has changed greatly from my past life. There¡¯s nothing we can do. Even the strong people who could be our allies might end up never being born in this world. And all the cult¡¯s movements so far were mostly never happened in my past life. So we can only wait. Or use something to bait the Evil God.


    ¡°If they started investigating me, then they would find out where I live, where I went to school at, and my job as a clown. Since I mostly staying in Cassau, then if you want to use me as a bait, you need to make a fort in castle to improve the defense of the city. To make it easier for us to defend against the cult,¡± I said.


    ¡°But if we focused so much in one city, and it¡¯s not even the capital city, they will be suspicious. They will send some people here, but they would realized that other cities¡¯ defenses are weaker since we are focusing on one city. This will be difficult,¡± Randy said.


    Yeah, we have no idea on what to do. And if we are told to wait, we don¡¯t know how long we will wait.


    ¡°Then for now, just like usual, try to improve your strength first. Whether it¡¯s in magic, medicine, or whatever it is,¡± old man Henry said.


    It¡¯s hard. Even after this far, we still don¡¯t know who the leader of the cult is.


    I wish that I can live in peace. But when the cult is still exist, my heart will never be at peace. So I really want to destroy them soon.


    But it¡¯s hard. Even after many things changed, I saved many people, and everyone is helping each other, we don¡¯t know anything about the cult.


    Then, do I have to infiltrate the cult? Pretending to join them?


    I think that¡¯s a good idea. But unfortunately, my heart won¡¯t be able to calm down just by the thought of me pretending to be with the cult.


    And I¡¯m also a master level summoner. A really young master level summoner. They will be suspicious of me if I join them.


    ¡°I¡¯m sure that some of the kings here have asked their people to infiltrate the cult. To disguise themselves as a member of the cult to get more information. But you never talked to me about it because you know how much I don¡¯t want anyone among us to be involved with the cult. So, any news from them?¡± I asked.


    Hearing my question, the kings looked at each other before Albert answered.


    ¡°...Some managed to join them. But most of the people we send were killed because they found out that those people were agents. And those who joined, we never heard anything from them anymore,¡± Albert replied.


    ¡°They might have been brainwashed and told them everything. Those people are not anyone who knew my identity, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. I never told those people about you or even the alliance. They are people who we never tell any secret to and extremely loyal to us. We never told them much about what¡¯s happening with the kingdom so they will know less about it in case we send them to an infiltration mission. I¡¯m sure you will be safe. Even if they have to speak the truth to the cult, they will only tell that I sent them on a mission and never anything more other than what most civilians know,¡± Albert said.


    But we have no informationing from them. Though seeing at everyone¡¯s reaction, I guess they shared this information with each others. Only leaving me behind.


    ¡°Then there¡¯s nothing we can do but wait until someone finds out about something new, or the cult make their move. Let¡¯s just hope that they won¡¯t get too strong before they make their move,¡± I said.


    And so, the meeting is over. We will meet again next month or when something importante up.


    So, I will find a way to get myself stronger. Maybe I will try to reach the stage beyond master level in my summoning element. Then I could have more familiars.


    ...It happened many times, right? That there¡¯s nothing for us to do? So troublesome this cult is.

 Chapter 869 - 869 Taking a Job Request After a Long Time

    869 Taking a Job Request After a Long Time


    After another month of rxing and cultivating hard so I can hopefully reached master level in my air element as well, it¡¯s time for another meeting.


    And as expected, my air element didn¡¯t increase much. But for Sara, she almost reached master level in her air element. For her earth element, it will be soon as well.


    The others also improved a lot. But it was only mainly those who have air element, earth element, or wind element because we have spirits with each of those element to help us improve faster.


    But it means that those with other elements couldn¡¯t improve as much as them. So for this meeting, I want to suggest to Albert and the others to let me explore the continent in hope to look for another elemental spirit to help us. Though I have been waiting until Sara reached master level in her air element.


    ¡°Sure. It¡¯s not like you have anything to do anyway. And if it¡¯s you, I think I can tell what will happen. You will probably not only find another elemental spirit, but you will also hopefully find another tribe of monsters that you will invite to the vige. Making your army stronger and stronger. Aren¡¯t you the one with the strongest army in this alliance?¡± Albert asked in the end.


    That¡¯s right. Except for the centaurs who are mostly followed the Summoner who is apanying the Tamer to find sea monsters. Those centaurs are more loyal to that Summoner instead of me.


    By the way, the tamer managed to make a contract with one of the Crab People. So he can travel to the sea easier. And the chance of him making a contract with sea monsters will be higher.


    Though it¡¯s through violence.


    While I mostly make a contract with my familiars through mutual understanding. Mostly. Like, if you don¡¯t want to die, be my familiar. That¡¯s what happened with Graham, right? Though he understood that he didn¡¯t want to die so he became my familiar.


    .....


    As for the Tamer, other than some when he asked the monsters to be his familiar, he would beat them to near death before he make a contract with them. While the monsters were unable to move, he would forcefully make a contract with them. That¡¯s not my way.


    Well, it¡¯s not like I will make anymore contract with another monster. Though I still ate the Pear-y Fruit just in case my summoning level can reach the stage beyond master level.


    Anyway, Albert is right that my army is the strongest among the alliance here. With various races in one vige, I think it has be too big to be called a vige though, and they have their own specialty, we won¡¯t lose to anyone.


    If I could add more monsters tribe into the vige, that would be great. But I¡¯m not looking for one. That will only happen with luck.


    ¡°I¡¯ll just focus on searching on clues about the cult and the location of the spirits. As for adding more monsters, that will be up to luck,¡± I said.


    And just like usual, the meeting is over without anything important about the cult. Just another discussion between countries.


    The meeting is over and I returned everyone back. The next day, I move together with Victoria and Ray in search for spirits. Airy was not with me because Sara will soon reach master level. She¡¯s with Sara.


    And for me to be able to find spirits, the help of a spirit is important. So I asked Breezy to apany me since our wind mages have all reached master level. Though the normal soldiers and agents were mostly still expert level, it¡¯s best to not get Breezy bored. So I brought him with me instead of having him stay for who knows how long.


    ¡°Okay, I¡¯ll go with you! Kron said he¡¯s going to take a break anyway,¡± Breezy said.


    ¡°Good. At least until Sara reached master level so I can have Airy with me back. Though if you two want toe with me, that¡¯s fine as well,¡± I said.


    The next day, we move together. I asked the others, but they said that it¡¯s a critical time for them so they wanted to train more. They want to get their other element to master level as well. But if they have free time, they will ask to join.


    As for Ang, she¡¯s calmly improving herself. Even now, she¡¯s still stronger than most of our master level mages. I can¡¯t wait until she reached master level.


    ¡°Oh! It¡¯s faster than Kron!¡±


    Breezy shouted happily as he¡¯s sitting on Ray¡¯s head while holding on Ray¡¯s hair. We¡¯re moving at full speed to look for a ce we have never been to.


    ¡°So, is there any direction we should go?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Just like back when you were looking for a good ce to train in Monsters World. For fire, a volcano. For ice, the coldest ce. Do you have any idea where to look now?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Nope. Not at all,¡± I replied.


    ¡°Sigh... Well, how about we climb the highest mountain in the continent first. Back when I was a human, I always heard that the highest peak in the world is in Arturo. How about we go there?¡± Victoria suggested.


    ¡°Okay. That¡¯s good. But we will go there riding on Ray instead of using portal. Just in case we found something that we missed during our circus tour,¡± I said.


    Then, we turned our direction toward Arturo. We will go to the highest peak and hopefully, we can find spirits. Or any clues about the cult.


    Since we have nothing else to do, whenever we see a vige or a city, we would stop. Eat some of their local dishes, and to make Breezy not bored, we entered the guild and took a job request.


    When was thest time I took a quest from the guild? I would usually let Penny take care of n-rted matter. And if there¡¯s some quests that needed to be taken care of, she would give them to someone and it will be done soon after. While I, the leader of the n, didn¡¯t really do anything. She¡¯s more of a leader than me.


    She even took requests for cleaning the sewer or something. Some easy stuffs. Then let the orphans took care of it so they can slowly gain some experience. I¡¯m ashamed as the real leader of the n.


    Though she said that it¡¯s fine because she knows that I¡¯m always busy. But I still told her that I will do a job that might be difficult or dangerous for the others to do. Especially jobs that needed some strength.


    ...Though many of us have reached master level now. And the job that needed some muscles won¡¯t have to be done by me.


    Anyway, this time, I took a request as an individual instead of a n. And I will do it by myself. Or with Breezy¡¯s help if I don¡¯t want him to get bored.


    Anyway, what¡¯s my rank again? I stopped caring about it for a while already.


    When I asked the receptionist, she said that since it has been so long since I took a job because I let others do it, I got demoted to D-rank. It¡¯s because the guild think that I can¡¯t do anything and only let other Hunters in the n do it. Maybe I should take some job asionally after this.


    ¡°A D-rank hunter? Hah! This city only ept high rank Hunters! Just leave this city!¡±


    Suddenly one person inside the guild picked a fight against me. It¡¯s really been a while since this happened to me.


    And seeing Breezy¡¯s reaction, I can guess that even Kron received this treatment during his journey. Breezy is too excited.


    ¡°Oh, look! An idiot! Please don¡¯t talk to me. There¡¯s no scientific evidence that stupidity is contagious. But I don¡¯t want to take risk,¡± I said.


    ¡°You! Let¡¯s fight right now!¡± the man shouted.


    I ignored him and asked the receptionist instead.


    ¡°Is this often happened in this guild?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...Only when he and the people from his n are here,¡± she replied.


    I see. So he¡¯s a famous troublemaker in this city. I bet he¡¯s not that strong.


    Then she exined how there are only few low-ranked Hunters here. It¡¯s because of him and his n. Newbies who didn¡¯t join their n will be harassed. That¡¯s why they gave up or left the city.


    ¡°What an annoying bunch,¡± I said.


    ¡°You! I haven¡¯t done talking with you yet!¡±


    This might turn into a battle between ns. Though we are obviously stronger than them.


    Wait! ns also have their own privilege. Especially those with high-ranked Hunters, right? Then it¡¯s possible that the cult is hiding within some famous n! Why have I never thought about it? I¡¯m so stupid.


    Since I kept ignoring the annoying guy, he started to get physical. He punched me right at the back of my head.


    That¡¯s bad. If it¡¯s anyone else. But not me. So I kept ignoring him.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll take that goblin subjugation request. I¡¯ll be back in the afternoon. Or maybe earlier. Then, see youter!¡±


    The receptionist seems to be a professional in handling trouble like that guy. And seems like the Guild Master is strong enough to protect the staffs. That¡¯s why they never caused trouble directly to the staffs. Though the receptionist was still shocked to see how I didn¡¯t react at all after being hit on the back of my head.


    While everyone is shocked at how hard my head was and how I didn¡¯t even flinch from that annoying guy¡¯s punch, I left the guild.

 Chapter 870 - 870 Been a While Since Thugs Picked a Fight with Me

    870 Been a While Since Thugs Picked a Fight with Me


    Being bothered by some thugs, huh? It has been a while since that happened. Though this time, I chose to ignore them and leave to do my job. A request from the guild. Goblin subjugation request.


    Seems like there are way too many goblins near this city. And the most annoying thing is that there¡¯s one n in control over the city. But the Guild Master is a decent mage, so they don¡¯t have the power to pick a fight against the guild.


    Is this n rted to the cult? I don¡¯t know. But the possibility is not zero.


    Hunters are usually the most unruly and rude group of people. At least those I have met often in my past life. So if they act rude all the time, no one will ever think that they are actually part of the cult. Because people would just think that it¡¯s them, so it¡¯s normal.


    ¡°Yup. Maybe I will ask the kings to send agents to be hunters and investigate ns. Especially suspicious ns. Or even top ns,¡± I said to myself.


    ¡°You said that because of the people following you, right?¡± Vitoria asked.


    ¡°Ignore them. Unless they tried to kill me. Though any attempt to kill me will be useless,¡± I replied.


    Right now, I¡¯m in the forest near the city where I took the request. I¡¯m going to hunt some goblins who have been causing trouble to the nearby viges.


    I will mark the city in the map I have and tell it to the kings to investigate. Though I believe that there are already agents investigating the city.


    .....


    If they let that dangerous n be, does it mean that they are not really dangerous? Or that they have no time to spare with the n?


    Maybe they let them be because if the cult is trying to make a contact with someone in the city, they would make a contact with that n. So the agents are just waiting until someonee and they will make their move soon after.


    Whatever. Let¡¯s just focus on hunting some goblins.


    ¡°Roy! I found some goblins over there! And over there! There are three nests of goblins nearby!¡± Breezy said.


    ¡°Three of them? That¡¯s quite a lot. Thanks for telling, Breezy. You¡¯re amazing,¡± I praised the wind spirit.


    He has been taking requests with Kron a lot, so he is experienced with it.


    And he would usually be the scout. So when Kron is fighting some monsters, Breezy would scout the nearby area and tell Kron about other monsters nearby.


    And that¡¯s what he¡¯s doing now. Though when he told me nearby, I didn¡¯t expect it to be so far. I think that¡¯s because Kron is a wind mage and can fly, so he can easily get to where Breezy was scouting before.


    Though for me now, I can also move fast. But I didn¡¯t have Ray with me now. I left him alone in the stable in the city. Disguised as a normal horse.


    I left him be because I don¡¯t want these people following me to think that Ray is a monster. Though if they make their move, it will be me whom they thought as a monster.


    For now, I¡¯m just a summoner with a ck Slime as my familiar. It will be suspicious if someone learned that I have more than one familiar. Pear-y Fruit hasn¡¯t gone public yet.


    So if they make their move, I will only fight them with Victoria and my air magic. That¡¯s what I will do. And that¡¯s the case with the goblins I will subjugate.


    ...Sorry, I was wrong. I don¡¯t even need air magic or Victoria to defeat them. But it might be interesting if I show them that I¡¯m a master level summoner. Though I can¡¯t tell them that I can use portals.


    With Shirley publicly known as a master level mage now, expert level mages shouldn¡¯t be that rare now. It¡¯s still notmon, but it shouldn¡¯t be that rare. Unless they are toozy in their cultivation.


    And it¡¯s not impossible that there are many people who have reached master level. So if I show my power to them, it won¡¯t be too suspicious.


    It¡¯s already well-known that the higher a mage¡¯s level, the stronger their body became. So if I keep kicking goblins until they¡¯re death, I¡¯m sure that no one will bother me again.


    Well, I was wrong. After killing all the goblins in one nest, those thugs from before surround me. There are about twenty of them.


    ¡°Hehehe, you are surrounded now,¡± the thug who punched the back of my head before said.


    ¡°Hehehe, do you know that most people whoughed that way before they speak, they have a high chance to be a mob and not worth talking to?¡± I provoked him.


    ¡°Are you making fun of me? Just so you know, defeating some goblins without using magic is something that anyone can do. You are surrounded. And for humiliating me, I will kill you!¡± he said.


    ¡°Did you forget that you humiliate yourself? I didn¡¯t do anything. You¡¯re the one trying to hit me. You must be an idiot. ying with other idiots. And making a group called happy idiots. Then you got provoked because you¡¯re an idiot. Then you will all die because you¡¯re all idiots,¡± I provoked them again.


    Wow, look at how easy it is for me to provoke everyone. They¡¯re thugs. With a lot of pride and non-existent ability other than acting tough.


    If it¡¯s acting tough, anyone can do that. Even me. Especially me.


    ¡°Kill him!¡±


    There are twenty idiots. Surrounding one person. And those twenty idiots cast magic at the same time. Not to the ground I¡¯m standing, but they are either aiming for my body. Straight to my chest.


    ...Which means that I only need to jump to dodge them, and the magic will continue until they hit each other.


    Well, some didn¡¯t hit other mages. Because when some magic hit other magic, the stronger magic will devour the weaker magic and continue forward.


    With this, I already eliminated half of the idiots. All I did was jumping though.


    ¡°Well, are you still going to fight me when all your intellectbined will not even be half as smart as I am?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Kill him!¡±


    See? He doesn¡¯t even have the vocabry enough to say other things. Just kill and kill. Should I just kill them then?


    I just casually punched a rock near my feet, and grabbed the pieces of small rocks. Then I threw them up in the air, and use air magic to explode them to different direction.


    The rocks flew all over the ces and hitting them all. Some died right away because the rocks pierced through their head or their heart, and some were lucky to still be alive. Including the man who picked a fight with me.


    ¡°Are we done here? Because I don¡¯t mind to kill the rest of you if you want to continue,¡± I said.


    ¡°Hi-HIIEEEEK!!!¡±


    Just like that, those who are still alive escaped. While limping because I made holes in their legs. Leaving behind the corpses of their friends.


    ¡°To leave behind their friends... how cruel of them,¡± I said.


    ¡°And you think killing them is not cruel? What should we do next?¡± Victoria asked.


    ¡°Well, there are two other goblin nests nearby. Let¡¯s destroy them and kill all the goblins,¡± I said.


    And so, we finished the quest easily. Even though it¡¯s quite far from the city. Though this is quite normal if there¡¯s a wind mage here.


    I put all the proofs of subjugation somewhere, and when I¡¯m close to the city, I opened a portal there and put them all inside a huge sack. Carrying them to the guild and gave them to the receptionist.


    ¡°I found three goblin nests and destroyed them all. I also had some hunters trying to pick a fight against me so I killed them. Here are their cards,¡± I said as I gave them the cards of the hunters whom I killed today.


    ¡°So many goblins! Where did you find them? We didn¡¯t hear any report of other goblin nests!¡± the receptionist asked.


    ¡°I think it¡¯s closer to other cities than here. Well, where¡¯s my reward?¡±


    Though I don¡¯t need money, it is quite satisfying to be rewarded after a minor job. Though for other people, killing goblins and destroying their nest doesn¡¯t seem to be anything minor.


    Seems like I caused some problem killing some Hunters. But the guild doesn¡¯t mind it. It¡¯s just that the n they belong to were furious.


    No one told me. But I can see their movement with my Divine Vision. I think they will watch me before they do anything to me.


    ¡°Excuse me, can I meet the guild master?¡± I asked the receptionist.


    If there¡¯s someone trying to pick a fight with me, it¡¯s best to ask someone with authority if I¡¯m allowed to kill them or not. Then, everything will be simple.


    With how much problem they have caused in this city and to rookie Hunters, I¡¯m sure the guild master will be supportive in me eradicating that n.


    If not, well, I¡¯ll just wait until they attack me first. Then it will be self-defense. Simple!

 Chapter 871 - 871 Small Clan in a Small City

    871 Small n in a Small City


    So, then, we will stay in this city for a while.


    Well, I guess staying is not the right word. We will leave every day in the morning until evening, and return back here to sleep at night. Of course I will escape from the sight of the supposedly dangerous n in the city before I use a portal.


    ¡°Yes. One of our assumptions was that the cult leader belong to a n somewhere. But there are too many ns in Tatrama alone and too few agents to infiltrate. Even if we put some in some famous ns, that doesn¡¯t mean that we will find the cult. Though we have some agents acting as hunters so those ns will approach them. But so far, there¡¯s no evidences of the cult¡¯s involvement at all in all the ns that the agents infiltrated.¡±


    I¡¯m on a phone call with Albert. The king of this country.


    The city I¡¯m in while I¡¯m on the way to Arturo to go to the highest peak in the continent is still within Tatrama¡¯s territory. And I¡¯m actively ying my part as someone whose rank has been demoted to D, but is trying to raise it back. Though I don¡¯t care about rank at all.


    In fact, being low-rank hunter will allow me to be made fun of by some thugs. Though I don¡¯t think that those thugs belong to the cult, I do think that all cult members are worse than thugs. I hope with this n, the cult will approach me.


    And then I will kill them all.


    ¡°Wait, no. Don¡¯t kill them all. If someone approach you, just report it to me or the king of the country you¡¯re at. We will contact our people nearby to help with the investigation. If you kill them all, we will never find any clues at all about the leader of the cult¡¯s whereabouts,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Then I will kill less than everyone,¡± I replied.


    .....


    ¡°Then you will just not kill one person. That¡¯s still not good,¡± Albert said.


    ¡°Three people?¡±


    ¡°...I let Victoria decide how many people you can kill and those who you are allowed to kill. She¡¯s hearing this conversation, right?¡± Albert asked.


    ¡°I¡¯ll do it. Though today, Roy has killed several people from the n in this city. He asked the guild master if he can kill everyone, but even the guild master refused. So he will only wait for them to attack first and he can kill them in self-defense. He told that to the guild master who can¡¯t say anything after that,¡± Victoria said.


    Except that the guild masterughed at me thinking that I¡¯m talking big. He knew that I¡¯m a leader of a n myself. As the guild master, he got that information easily.


    But he also knew that most of the requests going to the n were taken care of by Ang and the others. While the leader, which is me, had almost never done any mission. That¡¯s why I got demoted.


    Because of that, the guild master must have thought that my achievements were all other n members¡¯ achievements. And the demotion fit my real strength.


    But he would never expect that the man he made fun of is an expert level air mage and a master level summoner.


    Though as a summoner, I¡¯ll just use Victoria as my bullet for air magic. That should convince other people why I¡¯m a master level summoner.


    They will think that since I raised my air element, and I killed many monsters by using Victoria as a bullet, it¡¯s natural that I became master level mage. Because of how simple it is the way that a summoner can raise their level. Just by letting their familiar kill a lot.


    Then the guild master and other guild staffs will think that the reason I didn¡¯t do a job was because I¡¯m busy fighting monsters. Though no one will know that it¡¯s also because I have other monsters who helped me improve my level.


    ¡°Well, just don¡¯t cause too much trouble for the people there. We will continue our investigation our ways. If you find anything, contact us,¡± Albert said before he hang up the phone.


    For now, I will continue taking requests. Finish them as soon as possible, then move toward Arturo before returning back to this city using portal.


    If I see other city on the way there, I¡¯ll pay a brief visit and check the city. Using a disguise like wearing Victoria as a wig. Just to make sure that no one will think that I¡¯m at two ce at once. Because I¡¯m not a wind mage. So it will be suspicious if I was seen in both ces.


    The next day, I did as I nned. This time, since I have killed so many goblins, I took the mission to subjugate boars.


    ¡°They are too spread apart! And they keep moving!¡± Breezy informed me of the boars¡¯ location. Far beyond what I can see.


    ¡°Then guide me to the closest one first. We just need to defeat them one by one. And since no one is following us, I can run at full speed,¡± I said.


    I¡¯m still not with Ray. He¡¯s still resting at a stable in the city.


    Maybe I will take him out today, and when I return back to the city, I¡¯ll pretend that he¡¯s gone. So if I want to call him when I¡¯m outside, there won¡¯t be any problem.


    It didn¡¯t take long before I killed twice the amount of the requested boars to be subjugated. Even with that much, promotion is still far. Though I won¡¯t look for a promotion. I don¡¯t care about that. I just act like I care.


    I didn¡¯t bring them back yet. I store them all somewhere safe and move by myself toward Arturo.


    After running in the sky until the sun started to go down, I marked the ce with a Blobby and returned to near the city using a portal.


    Then I return to the city, renting a cart for me to bring the boars back, and somewhere no one could see, I opened a portal to where the boars are stored. Of course I made sure that the boars weren¡¯t spoiled when I return to the city.


    With this much boars, there shouldn¡¯t be any problem with meat in the city for a while. Because most of the boars hunted nearby were monopolized by the n in this city.


    When I returned back to the city with a cart full of boars, I see many people were staring at me. Let¡¯s ignore them and bring them to the guild.


    ¡°So many meat! With this much meat, we won¡¯t have any problem for a week!¡± the receptionist said.


    A week? Well, that¡¯s normal, I guess. If it¡¯s me alone, I can eat them all in a few days. Maybe one day if I¡¯m starving.


    ¡°Is it that bad with meat in this city?¡± I asked.


    ¡°Yeah. Most monsters with edible meat nearby were being monopolized by the n because there¡¯s no other hunters going for them. They became so expensive because of it. So it¡¯s difficult for the people here to get nutritious meal with how little we can harvest from farming,¡± the receptionist said.


    Is it this bad in this city?


    ¡°What about the noble in charge of this city? They must be doing something, right?¡± I asked.


    Since Albert is the king, I¡¯m sure that there¡¯s no way a noble would ignore his order. There must be something going on.


    ¡°Well, he¡¯s focusing more in the search of the cult members in this city. So for hunters, he had no time to spare,¡± the receptionist said.


    I guess there¡¯s a bad thing that could happen if we¡¯re focusing too much on the cult. I¡¯ll tell Albert about this.


    Seems like because of the boars, many people started to look at me. I¡¯m gaining too much attention. Should I just leave?


    Hmm... I guess looking for a spirit and the clues of the cult is more important. I guess I¡¯ll stop staying here even though it¡¯s just two days since I¡¯m here and continue my journey.


    And a n that ys around in this small city? I doubt that they are rted to the cult.


    I have watched their base using Divine Vision. And I didn¡¯t see anything or anyone that seems to be rted to the cult. Even the one wearing a lot of jewelries and seem to be the leader is just an advanced level mage at most. There¡¯s no expert level mages at all.


    If I leave them to some agents, then I won¡¯t have to do anything.


    Then it¡¯s decided. I will leave tomorrow. Forget about destroying a small n in a small city.


    ...Was what I thought. But the next day, when I was about to leave, they surrounded me. In the middle of city.


    ¡°You¡¯re trying to leave? I won¡¯t let you leave this city in one piece. You will have to die for messing with my people!¡±


    Oh, he¡¯s the n leader who is acting like a boss of a gang in this city. Should I kill him now?

 Chapter 872 - 872 Destroying a Small Clan

    872 Destroying a Small n


    Hmm... is this everyone in the n? If so, then it¡¯s best to retreat and leave the city. I can¡¯t cause too much ruckus in the middle of a city no matter how small the city is. So it¡¯s best to get out of here.


    I¡¯m riding on Ray now about to leave the city. I¡¯m sure even without Ray using his full speed, he could outrun them all. But do I want to do that?


    I looked around and see that some people I have met in the city, staffs of the guild, were all moving to the guild trying to contact the guild master. That¡¯s good.


    I want to kill these people surrounding me. This n that has been terrorizing the city. And I can¡¯t do that in the city. Or the people in the city will be terrorized just by my own existence.


    But if it¡¯s outside, then the citizens won¡¯t know And I want it so that the guild master will know that I¡¯m the one who did all that. So I want to wait until the guild master started to follow us as I tried to get out of the city.


    The people in the city were keeping their distance from us. They entered their homes or just watched from afar. Which makes it easier for me to leave while riding on Ray.


    As I keep ignoring the one who might be the n leader who kept talking shit, I prepared a route to escape using Divine Vision. And it¡¯s a good thing that there¡¯s a good ce outside where I can fight without a care. I¡¯ll bait them all there. Including the guild master of this city.


    Oh, the guild master seem to be a wind mage. That makes it simpler then.


    As soon as the guild master saw us, Ray started running to the direction I told him using telepathy. There¡¯s no need to speak since that will only leak our intention to the enemies.


    .....


    We¡¯re rushing through the opposite side of where the n leader is. Not using our full speed. And not even at the full speed of a normal horse either. Still slower than normal. But it¡¯s still faster than advanced level mage¡¯s running speed.


    ¡°Catch him!¡± the n leader shouted as he also cast an Ice Spike to my direction.


    But I easily dodged it. And instead, the Ice Spike pierced his own subordinate. How stupid.


    I just continued running as if I¡¯m afraid of them while dodging all their magic. I don¡¯t want to fight in the city in front of normal civilians. Because they will think that I¡¯m a cold-blooded murderer. Though that might not be wrong, I don¡¯t want to known for that.


    Even though he just killed his own subordinate, he ignored the dead subordinate and chased after me. Though he¡¯s not a wind mage, so he has to be carried by a wind mage.


    Some who can¡¯t fly and were not carried, had no choice but to grab a horse and chase after me. And behind them, the guild master is following.


    There are two ces that is good for battle. A in by the riverside, and an open space in the forest. And I¡¯m going to the forest. Because if I killed someone by the riverside, the blood will be mixed with the water. The location is upstream, so the people in the city will drink the blood of dead people if I kill someone there.


    There, I¡¯m such a good person, right? I¡¯m so considerate to the people in the city that I don¡¯t even know about.


    Hmm... these thugs are bad at casting magic while riding a horse. I guess it¡¯s a good thing that I let the people in the alliance took their horses so they can train doing both.


    Finally, after dodging all their magic while pretending to be scared, I reached my destination. In this ce, there¡¯s no one other than us. So I can kill everyone. And make the guild master keep this as secret.


    When I reached the destination, I stopped. And I waited until everyone is here. Including the guild master.


    ¡°What¡¯s wrong? Can¡¯t run anymore?¡±


    What is wrong with him instead? He kept talking without having any conversation partner. I never said anything but he¡¯s still trying to make a conversation. Is that the requirement to be a thug?


    While catching their breath, I waited for the guild master who arrived soon.


    ¡°Stop! I already had enough of you doing what you want! Stop right now or I will make sure that you won¡¯t be able to take anymore request!¡± the guild master shouted.


    ¡°Huh? Why should I care? Then I will forcefully grabbed anyone who is trying to submit their requests to our n. Simple,¡± the n leader said.


    ¡°I¡¯m sure that you can only do this shit in this city because you¡¯re afraid of going to other city. They are much stronger than this small group. You just want to be a frog in a well,¡± I said.


    ¡°You! You finally spoke and the first thing that came out of your mouth is a cheap provocation?!¡±


    ¡°Oh, you realized that I only speak now? I thought that you have some mental illness and talked to yourself all the time thinking that I talked to you,¡± I said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll kill you!¡±


    So simple. Now, how should I kill everyone? I guess I¡¯ll try testing my strength as a master level summoner against advanced level mages.


    ¡°Oh, wow! I¡¯m going to get killed! Scary. Or maybe not. After all, all of you are just weaklings,¡± I said.


    ¡°You!¡±


    ¡°Enough! Hunter Roy, do not provoke them any further! They will really kill you!¡± the guild master said.


    ¡°Oh, scary. Then, before the killing started, can you introduce me to everyone here?¡± I said to the guild master.


    ¡°Are you crazy?!¡±


    ¡°Just do it. I¡¯m sure that it¡¯s the easiest way to remember me from now on for you,¡± I said.


    ¡°Right. Do it! I want to know who is this bastard that want to die so badly,¡± the n leader said.


    ¡°...Fine. I will introduce you to them. But I won¡¯t let anyone kill you,¡± the guild master said.


    Hmm... seems like no one is going to pay attention. They are just preparing their magic. But the guild master didn¡¯t seem to notice.


    ¡°His name is Roy. Demoted to D-rank hunter because of his long inactivity. He¡¯s an air element mage and also a summoner who can only summon a ck Slime who can¡¯t die. So he can¡¯t ever get another familiar ever since his first familiar is a weak monster that can¡¯t die,¡± the guild master said.


    ¡°The weak part is unnecessary. He¡¯s a stupid guild master,¡± Victoria said to me. Angry for being called weak.


    Yeah. And hearing my introduction, the thugsughed. After all, my both elements didn¡¯t sound strong. But I¡¯m a clown, so I¡¯m fine with beingughed at.


    ¡°Then I will finish my introduction. I¡¯m an expert level air mage, and a master level summoner. And so, the one who will die here is you all!¡±


    As soon as I said that, I moved quickly and grabbed two people¡¯s faces and pushed them to the ground. I didn¡¯t use Aura. Only my strength as a master level summoner.


    Since I introduced myself, even if someone in the cult noticed me, they won¡¯t connect me as the Aura user they¡¯re looking for. But they will still hunt me because I¡¯m a master level summoner that they don¡¯t have. But that¡¯s fine with me.


    After all, I don¡¯t think anyone here, except for the guild master, will still be alive.


    Now, the expression of those thugs changed from confidence to fear.


    Some tried to escape by flying or riding horses, but I killed them with one shot. Using Victoria as a bullet and air magic to shoot her, I killed those who tried to escape. And after every shot, I can summon Victoria back to my side and shoot another person.


    ¡°See? As a summoner, it¡¯s easy to raise my level since I just need to use my monster to kill a lot. And as an air mage, I can do this so I can kill a lot of monster using the ck Slime. This is how I reached master level in my summoning element. Though I will not use this method if you stop escaping. I will just use my physical strength gained from reaching master level to defeat you. So don¡¯t run away,¡± I said calmly.


    Then, I quickly kill more of them before the guild master can say anything. I don¡¯t have any problem killing them even if they are not members of the cult. It¡¯s because I already considered them as the bad guy.


    The guild master was too shocked to stop me from killing everyone. But when only the n leader left alone, he stopped me.


    ¡°Stop! Don¡¯t kill him! At least not him! He needs to be punished in the city so everyone will know that the city is safe again!¡± the guild master said as he blocked me with his body. How brave.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s what he said. So you can keep your life for a while. Though maybe they will publicly execute you. I don¡¯t know. Anyway, if you are wise, you shouldn¡¯t tell anyone about me. After all, there are more master level mages than you can imagine. It¡¯s not the time for me to pick a fight against them yet,¡± I said.


    Then I told the guild master that I will leave the city and will probably not return. So he will take care of everything on his own.


    As for the n leader, he was too scared when I tried to kill him. I believe he won¡¯t dare to do anything to the guild master.


    Though it seems that Victoria forgot that she has a mission to not let me kill everyone. But maybe it¡¯s fine because I let one man live.


    Now, it¡¯s time to continue our travel.

 Chapter 873 - 873 Reunion with Jewel’s Saviors

    873 Reunion with Jewel¡¯s Saviors


    A few days after I left the city and destroyed an entire n except their leader, I got a some info from Albert about the result of me causing trouble there.


    ¡°One of the agents nearby met up with the guild master. I asked him to tell the guild master that your existence is not something that he could spread. Though it¡¯s a good idea that you told the guild master of that city that you were abstain from hunting for so long because you were increasing your level. The guild master is smart enough to stop giving a rmendation for you to rank up as well. This way, you can keep being looked down upon or someone will try to exploit you. You can do whatever you want in case such thing happened.¡±


    That¡¯s what Albert told me. Basically, using his authority, he made it so that I can not raise up my rank. Not even returning back to my old rank before I got demoted.


    ¡°That¡¯s an abuse of authority,¡± I said.


    ¡°You don¡¯t care. You have a lot of money. And all the missions from the guild are way too easy for you to handle. Don¡¯t worry, I told other kings to do the same to the Hunter Guilds in their country. Though they will only tell the guild master after your appearance in the city. Even though we never really mind much about hunters, we have made sure that all guild masters are not involved at all with the cult. You can be assured about it,¡± Albert said.


    Which mean that if I can¡¯t find any agents in any city, I can contact the guild master about something rted to the cult. Or the noble in the city. Though meeting a guild master is easier than meeting a noble.


    Though for me, either one is fine. I will meet anyone when I want to. Either by meeting them from the front gate, or just enter their office without permission.


    ¡°In any case, whatever trouble you cause, we will make sure to take care of the aftermath. If they are just thugs like the one you destroyed yesterday, then we will make sure that you will not gain too much reputation. But if we found out that they are involved with the cult, then we won¡¯t do anything. Though if the agents nearby can handle them, there won¡¯t be any problem for you. But if not, then you will be known by the cult soon. But we will inform you if it happens.¡±


    That¡¯s the end of the conversation. I guess we don¡¯t have any clues at all about the cult. That¡¯s why they let me roam free and do whatever I want in hope that the cult will react to whatever I¡¯m doing. And then the alliance will react after seeing the cult¡¯s reaction.


    .....


    We are not some kind of forces that prevent anything from happening. We are a force that can only react after something happened.


    Though if we had the information beforehand, then we can somehow do something to prevent anything big from happening. But that¡¯s still reacting to a new information. That¡¯s why it¡¯s a reaction instead of prevention.


    After that, it¡¯s time to move again. This time, I won¡¯t be riding on Ray. I brought him to Monsters World because I¡¯m going to walk there with my disciple who is currently free, Jewel. Or should I say riding her?


    ¡°We¡¯re going to pass through the border normally, right?! It¡¯s my first time to do that!¡± Jewel said. With her naturally loud voice.


    Right, I forgot. All this time I brought not just her, but everyone else out of Tatrama, it¡¯s by using portals. Though there¡¯s nothing interesting about crossing the border. There¡¯s no one watching. We can go to and from another country without a care.


    Though on all the nearest cities near the border, they¡¯re all heavily guarded. Including this city we¡¯re currently at.


    But it¡¯s just a normal guard for us. Even Jewel alone can handle them all.


    But for now, we will move normally.


    ¡°Let¡¯s go now. With your speed, we can reach the border before noon and reach Bernard¡¯s ceter. Though maybe we will stop at every city. What will you do?¡± I asked Jewel.


    ¡°I have nothing better to do, so I will stay with you for a while! Maybe even until we reach your destination. That tallest peak in the continent!¡± Jewel said.


    She¡¯s a beastform mage and also a lightning mage. For her beastform, she doesn¡¯t even know anything else she can do to improve. As for her lightning element, she¡¯s already an expert level mage.


    To reach master level in her lightning element, she will need to cultivate for a long time. I guess she got bored of it. That¡¯s why she¡¯s here with me.


    And we hope that on the way to the peak of the continent, we can find a lightning spirit that will help her to increase her magic level. That is also the goal of this journey after all.


    We left the inn when no one looking because it will be surprising that I entered alone, but left with someone else.


    Then as we walked to the gate, someone greeted us.


    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s really Jewel and Roy! You two, it¡¯s been a while!¡±


    Who is it? There¡¯s a group of five people, all women, who seems to know me. While four of them are quite young, thest one is old. I seem to have met them somewhere before.


    ¡°Roy, I bet you forget about them. They are that party who got caved in in the first dungeon we entered near Cassau. We rescued them at that time. I think it was soon after you first met with Albert,¡± Victoria said.


    Now that Victoria mentioned it, I think I kind of remember them. But I thought they had a huge fight after I rescued them, so they broke up.


    Then during a mission at a certain vige, two of them got infected by a clone of ck Slime in the past and make them to never feel hungry, pain, and tired. Though they were unable to leave the vige because of some type of flowers which made monsters unable to get close to them.


    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s dius! It¡¯s been a long time since west met!¡± Jewel shouted.


    ¡°Your voice is still loud, Jewel. Though it¡¯s not as loud as when we first met,¡± one of them said.


    Now that I think about it, the first time I met Jewel, she was escaping from bandits. Then she asked for my help. Which I refused.


    But I told her to do other things and ended up meeting this group and her vige is saved. But she insisted to be my disciple since then.


    What about her family? I think she told me once that they are fine in the vige. And Jewel herself asked Albert to send some retired agents to stay in the vige. So they should be safe. And Jewel herself would sometime return to the vige. It¡¯s close to Cassau, so she never asked for me to use portal to get her there.


    I¡¯m not that close to these girls. But since they saved Jewel¡¯s vige, Jewel talked a lot with them.


    ¡°So, where are you going? Are you going to Arturo? What about the vige?¡±


    I think her name is Jessica. She asked Jewel about our destination.


    ¡°It¡¯s fine. Everyone in the vige is fine. For now, we¡¯re going to Arturo to meet our friend over there. And I just want to explore more areas,¡± Jewel said.


    She didn¡¯t say anything about spirits or going to the peak of the continent. Just saying that we¡¯re going to visit a friend¡¯s ce. Which is not a lie since we¡¯re going to Bernard¡¯s ce.


    ¡°By the way, I heard that you broke up in the past. After that dungeon caving in incident. Why are you together again?¡± Jewel asked.


    ¡°Well, we thought that live is too short for a stupid fight. So we¡¯re together again,¡± Jessica said.


    Too short? Are they still advanced level mages? Well, two of them are expert level mages. The oldest one, and one other girl whose name might be Ellen if I¡¯m not wrong.


    Well, they are just below average expert level mages. Right now, Jewel alone is much stronger than all of thembined.


    Well, not that I care. Though it¡¯s good to see someone I knew in the past to be well now. Though I forgot about them.


    ¡°Since we¡¯re also going to Arturo, how about we move together? If you¡¯re fine with it,¡± Jessica asked.


    Hearing the offer, Jewel looked at me for confirmation. I just gestured that she can do whatever she wants. It¡¯s not like we¡¯re in a hurry anyway.


    ¡°Then let¡¯s go together! We will grab our stuffs before we go. Please wait for us,¡± Jewel said.


    Grab our stuffs? Oh, right. They don¡¯t know that I can use portal. So it¡¯s best to act like a normal traveler carrying some survival tools since it will take a few days to reach Arturo.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll go get a bigger horse carriage while waiting,¡± one of them said.


    ¡°No need. The both of us don¡¯t need a horse,¡± Jewel said.


    I think Jewel never mentioned it to them that she¡¯s a beastform mage. I guess she will be my ride to Arturo.

 Chapter 874 - 874 A Problem that I Didn’t Cause

    874 A Problem that I Didn¡¯t Cause


    ¡°So... what do we need to prepare for a long travel again?¡±


    I know that I left home a lot. But I can use portal, so I always left the house almost empty-handed.


    But now that we need to act like we¡¯re traveling normally, I need to grab something.


    I think only what¡¯s important are needed. So, a tent, and some rations.


    These group of girls knew that I have a ck Slime that can transform into anything I want. So for most things, I just need Victoria to transform. Like into a tent.


    Then I guess I need to bring some rations. I guess we won¡¯t have to carry much since we can also hunt monsters on the way.


    ¡°Master, I think that¡¯s enough. You don¡¯t bring a cake on a travel. It¡¯s normally breads and some simple meal that canst long,¡± Jewel said.


    This is the time when a disciple surpass her master. I¡¯m proud of her. Or should I say that I¡¯m ashamed that I don¡¯t havemon sense and have to rely on my disciple who ended up having more experience than me?


    So I only ask Jewel for what else we needed to bring. And when we had enough, we met with Jessica and the others near the gate.


    .....


    ¡°Are you sure you don¡¯t need a horse carriage? Are you going to walk there?¡± Jessica asked.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry. Though I can¡¯t show you while we¡¯re inside the city. So we need to walk for a while until there¡¯s no one near us,¡± Jewel said.


    Yeah. It won¡¯t be good if everyone sees a rhinoceros suddenly appeared in the middle of a city.


    ¡°Jessica, did you forget? She¡¯s a participant of that tournament. She can transform herself into a rhino whose speed is not worse than a horse. And it has been a while since then, so she must have improved a lot.¡±


    The one who said that is called... Tiffany if I¡¯m not wrong.


    She¡¯s right. I forgot that Jewel should have gained quite a lot of poprity from the tournament. Though it has been a while and the next tournament has not begun. So many people must have forgotten about Jewel. Unless they know Jewel personally.


    And these people are her friends. So of course they would remember it.


    ¡°Yeah. Once we¡¯re far enough, I will transform and let Master ride on my back. That¡¯s how we will travel!¡± Jewel replied.


    That¡¯s actually how we will travel from here onward. Because I won¡¯t ask Ray¡¯s help, I will be riding her. And she¡¯s not slow either in her rhino form. Especially after she became so strong after gaining other forms.


    Because of her beastform, she¡¯s one of the few who didn¡¯t pick a horse. She wanted one, but there¡¯s not one that she feels good enough. Especially since her transformation allowed her to do many things that even those horses unable to do. So she decided to not pick any because she will only think that they are useless to her.


    We left the city and when we¡¯re quite a distance from the city, Jewel transformed into a rhino. A normal rhino.


    ¡°Wow! It looks much more amazing than when I watched it on that big screen called TV!¡± Jessica shouted.


    The other girls and olddy also admiring Jewel¡¯s transformation. While I transformed Victoria into a saddle with an umbre as an attachment because the sun is bright.


    ¡°And that ck Slime is a cheat just like usual,¡± Tiffany said.


    Well, a journey with Jewel and five other girls, it will be quite noisy. And I don¡¯t think they will try to talk with me since we¡¯re not that close. So I will just stay quiet on Jewel¡¯s back. While reading a novel I just bought. Not the one written by Victoria. But a novel written by someone I have never heard about.


    Before I returned to the past, I would spend my time reading novels. So I have read a lot of them. That¡¯s why in this world, I rarely read more because I know about most novel. Especially the best-sellers.


    But now, it seems like I saved the lives of some novelists who should have died. That¡¯s why when I entered this city and see a bookstore, I saw a book I never read before.


    And that¡¯s how I will spend my time while the people with me won¡¯t stop talking.


    They did ask me about things I know, like how is Ka doing and the others as well. But that¡¯s the thing that Jewel already know. So there¡¯s nothing for me to say.


    Other than the group of bandits in front of us. The others haven¡¯t noticed it yet, but I saw them.


    ¡°Everyone, bandits in front of us,¡± I said calmly.


    ¡°Just bandits? Well, that¡¯s not a problem then,¡± the rhinoceros I¡¯m riding said.


    ¡°Be careful. Even if they are bandits, that doesn¡¯t meant that they are weak,¡± the oldest one called Nana said.


    Yeah, that¡¯s right. But I¡¯m a master level summoner. So there¡¯s no need to worry. Though I didn¡¯t say it that I¡¯m a master level summoner.


    But just Jewel alone is enough to defeat them all.


    ¡°Everyone in dius party, just continue moving forward without losing your speed. I will lead the way and you just need to follow me,¡± Jewel said.


    Jewel then increased her speed and run in front of the party. And soon after, Jewel detected the bandits¡¯ location before any members of the party could.


    ¡°No! There are too many of them! Everyone, prepare to fight!¡± Nana shouted.


    ¡°Just sit down and watch. None of them are a problem for the current Jewel,¡± I said calmly.


    And soon after, we reached where the bandits were blocking us. They blocked the path using destroyed carriages. Probably from a merchant that they stole.


    But that¡¯s not a problem for Jewel.


    ¡°Stop! Stop... Please stop! Run away!¡±


    That¡¯s what the bandits said when they saw that Jewel was not stopping. All the blockage and some of the bandits were blown away by Jewel¡¯s sheer strength.


    ¡°Attack! Kill them!¡±


    Toote. Before they could even cast their magic, Jewel already cast a strong lightning magic.


    ¡°Thunderbolt!¡± Jewel said.


    Not just one magic. But Jewel released a series of magic. Lightnings that are strong enough to kill all of them.


    It was so loud. But I had some Blobbies covering my ears. Though the members of dius were covering their ears while screaming.


    ¡°So strong...¡±


    I don¡¯t know who said that. And I don¡¯t care. Because that¡¯s natural considering that she¡¯s my disciple.


    ¡°There¡¯s nothing we can loot from them. So it¡¯s fine to leave them be and let the next people to pass through this road to take care of them,¡± I said as I continued reading the book. I think the next people to left the city after us were a group of hunters. They will be happy to loot these bandits then.


    Lots of words of praises were spoken to Jewel. But I just continued reading.


    It will take three more days at this speed to reach Arturo.


    We spend the first night by the road. The members of dius will sleep on the same tent. And Jewel will be with me sleeping inside Victoritent.


    ¡°What about night shift?¡± Jessica asked.


    ¡°My tent is a monster. She will realize when there¡¯s someone or something approaching. So there¡¯s no need for anyone to watch guard. But if you don¡¯t believe me, you can take care of it yourself,¡± I said.


    Though it will be me who will realize first when someone is approaching. But there¡¯s no need to exin it to them, right?


    Even after talking so much during the day, at night, Jewel and those girls continued talking. Just how much do they love talking?


    As for me, since I¡¯m not tired at all, I just continue reading in the dark. This is my fifth book for the day. It¡¯s surprising that there are many interesting stories from the people who should be dead if it¡¯s not for me returning to the past.


    The next morning, we continued our travel. And the girls continued talking.


    They are mostly talking about some trending topics. Like clothes. Especially from my store.


    Maybe I should learn some today¡¯s trend. How could someone who is the big boss of the most famous clothing brand know nothing about fashion?


    And soon after, I see another group of people. They look neater than bandits. But if they are going to do things that bandits does, then they are no different than bandits.


    ¡°Anotherrge group of people in front of us. I don¡¯t know if they are bandits or not,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Do they have some kind of badges?¡± Nana asked.


    ¡°Yeah. It looks like a yellow dog badges. Someone you know?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m surprised by your sight. Yes, we know them. They are a n full of men. And they are aiming for our party for the obvious reason. Since they are based in the city we¡¯re going, it¡¯s normal that we would meet. But not like this,¡± Nana said.


    Oh, so this is not a problem that I caused. It¡¯s someone else problem! And I just got involved with it.


    ¡°Since it¡¯s for the obvious reason, does it mean that it¡¯s fine to kill them all?¡± I asked.


    ¡°I heard that some of them are expert level mages. And the leader is an expert level lightning mage. Same as Jewel. So it might be hard,¡± Nana said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry about it. I just want to know if we can kill them all or not. I guess it¡¯s fine, right?¡± I asked.


    ¡°...There¡¯s no good rumor at all about them. So yes, it¡¯s fine,¡± Nana said.


    Good. Jewel can just kill them all then. Or maybe I will let these party to fight them since it¡¯s their problem. Though these girls seem to be good girls. So I will help them if they are in trouble.

 Chapter 875 - 875 I’ll Just Watch Them Fight

    875 I¡¯ll Just Watch Them Fight


    ¡°Oh, it¡¯s the famous women-only party, dius! So d that we could coincidentally meet up like this in this ce!¡±


    As we get closer to where those people are, one of them greeted us. Well, not us. Just the girls. I¡¯m not included it seems.


    ¡°Are you famous though? I have never heard of you after you split up back then,¡± I asked the girls.


    ¡°We left Cassau and set up our base in another city. Though we can¡¯t bepared to your n, Wolf¡¯s Crown. Just saying that you are a member of Wolf¡¯s Crown and everyone will greet you with respect,¡± Jessica said.


    Are we famous? I even forget that my n¡¯s name was Wolf¡¯s Crown.


    Back then, I agreed with that name because I am the Werewolf King. But now, I¡¯m also the king of other monsters. So maybe the name Wolf¡¯s Crown is no longer suitable.


    But to think that we¡¯re famous with such stupid weird name. I guess I should pay attention more to my n.


    ¡°Jewel, are we famous?¡± I asked Jewel.


    ¡°So famous in fact that many people were pretending to be our members. But when we found out about them, they no longer dare to fake to be members of our n. Even other agents were helping with it in another country,¡± Jewel said.


    .....


    I see. Does it mean that our fame goes beyond just one country? That¡¯s actually amazing!


    ¡°What? Agents? Your ns have specialized people for some sort of mission?¡± Nana asked after she heard us talking.


    ¡°Well, they are just our helpers. They helped us voluntarily. Though we also helped them in some way,¡± I said.


    I didn¡¯t lie. Because I helped the agents¡¯ bosses, the kings, to destroy the cult. So it¡¯s not a lie.


    ¡°What are you talking about to yourselves? And who is that man?¡± the n leader of the annoying people asked.


    Let¡¯s ignore him. He¡¯s not worth my attention.


    ¡°By the way, I thought that some of you wanted to join our n. Are you still willing to join?¡± I asked.


    I think it was around the time that I helped two of them out of that vige after their body were infected by the clones of a ck Slime. They said that they wanted to join us.


    ¡°Well, I don¡¯t think I can handle that much fame. Just us five is enough. Being in a n seem to bring troubles as well,¡± Jessica said.


    ¡°Not really though. I mean, I¡¯m the leader of that n. But I¡¯m the most free member in the n. That¡¯s why I got demoted to D-rank now,¡± I said.


    ¡°...That¡¯s your own fault, I believe. Most n leaders are the busiest kind of people,¡± Jessica said.


    ¡°Unless they have someone they can trust with the management of the n. I have that someone. And she¡¯s sopetent that I forgot that I¡¯m the leader,¡± I said.


    I wonder if Penny had enough rest? Though whenever I¡¯m home and see the situation at home with my Divine Vision, I have never seen her working or tired.


    Maybe because her daughter, Hannah, has grown. So she no longer need to pay too much attention to her anymore. And she has more free time.


    I think that back in the brothel, Ruby asked Penny to take care of the management of the brothel. I guess that¡¯s why she¡¯s so good at her job since she had experience. But I never thought that she would be that good.


    ¡°Hey! Stop ignoring me! Who the fuck are you?!¡±


    I guess he¡¯s already out of patience. What should I introduce myself as?


    ¡°I¡¯m D-rank hunter, Roy. I¡¯m also a doctor. If there¡¯s any of you who are sick, don¡¯te to me. Because you¡¯re annoying me. It¡¯s best to let you die,¡± I said.


    ¡°I¡¯m a beastform mage. My name is not for you to hear,¡± Jewel said.


    I guess if she said her name, some people will know about her. She¡¯s famous after the tournament after all. And maybe she¡¯s famous as well because of the n being so well.


    Now that I think about it, once in a while, someone asked me to open up a portal to somewhere far. Even to another country. I thought that they were going for a vacation or visiting someone. But I guess they were working.


    And I just spend my timezying around whenever I¡¯m free. Outside of mission, I would just date someone who is free. I guess I¡¯m the bad one.


    Maybe it¡¯s best to not be the n leader again. Once I climbed the highest peak at Arturo, I will gather everyone and ask if they are willing to let Penny be the n leader.


    Though maybe being a n leader for her is too much. Because maybe some ns are being hostile to us because of our fame. And she will be targeted by them.


    I guess I¡¯ll stay as the leader. But I will ask for their opinion once I returned.


    ¡°D-rank hunter? And that rhino is a beastform mage? So why are you with them?!¡±


    Jealousy is ugly. And I¡¯ve seen it many times. Especially when I¡¯m on a date with one of the girls. The stare from the men in the surrounding is as if they wanted to kill me.


    And it¡¯s also the same feeling from these people surrounding me just because I¡¯m here. What a pain.


    ¡°All of you, what do you want to do?¡± I asked the girls.


    ¡°We¡¯re one day away from the closest city. And there¡¯s no one other than us passing this road for a while, I think. So even if we kill them, no one will find out about it. But they have several expert level mages while we only have three if we include Jewel. It¡¯s best if we just kill them since they are acting like thugs wherever they are. But to kill them all, we need Jewel¡¯s help,¡± Nana said.


    ¡°What do you think, Jewel? Will you help them?¡± I asked Jewel.


    ¡°I will. They helped me before. And I finally have the chance to help them back. So I will fight,¡± Jewel said.


    ¡°Then I will wait here,¡± I said as I jumped off from Jewel¡¯s back.


    Then I just sat down on the ground waiting for the fight to end. Though it hasn¡¯t even started.


    ¡°Nana! You¡¯re old. But we can give you to some of our new members while we y with the other girls. There¡¯s no way out for you. We have two expert level wind mages so you can¡¯t even escape from the air,¡± their n leader said.


    ¡°Even if we die, we will never be your ythings! It¡¯s either do or die! Everyone, fight!¡± Nana shouted.


    Hmm... they must have really good teamwork since even after they split up, they got back together again. And I can see that from how they¡¯re fighting.


    They are facing different directions since we are being surrounded. As if they are protecting me. While Jewel only helped by charging through some people while she¡¯s in her rhino form. Ignoring the attacking to her.


    I guess these girls have better expert level mages than these thugs. They can handle themselves just fine.


    The only problem is that there are more enemies than they can handle. So slowly,they got pushed back. Except for Jewel who is running around.


    ¡°You girls are idiot. Instead of getting yourself surrounded, you should have escaped to one ce so the enemies are not surrounding you. One of you who can fly, get out of the circle by carrying the other four. The fire mage can help by boosting the flying speed. It doesn¡¯t have to be a flight for a long time. Just enough to get you all out of here. Then you can attack from there,¡± I said.


    ¡°What about you?!¡± Nana asked.


    ¡°I¡¯m the one you should never worry about the most. I don¡¯t need your protection. If I want to, I can kill them all by myself. In fact, Jewel can do that as well. You¡¯ve seen what she did before,¡± I said.


    They fought that way because they wanted to protect me? They are good girls.


    But I don¡¯t need protection.


    Now that they left me, they fought better. But I don¡¯t think they will win. Because the enemies are too many for just five of them. While Jewel won¡¯t use her full strength because it¡¯s dius party¡¯s problem.


    Oh, I was wrong. I guess they have been fighting together for so long that they can beat most of the enemies. Though I wonder what make the enemies so obsessed with them?


    Because one of the girls is the n leader¡¯s first love? That would be funny.


    The enemies started to fluster seeing how they can¡¯t win against just six girls. And their expert level mages started to cast magic randomly.


    Rather than using magic to attack, it¡¯s as if they are showing what magic they can use. Even a normal Fireball will be much stronger if they focused on it. But I guess they¡¯re too stupid.


    While I stillying on my side being forgotten by the two side. Or at least that¡¯s what I wished for.


    Because things won¡¯t happen the way you wanted. Like how their n leader is sneaking on me. He¡¯s not like Hill, right?

 Chapter 876 - 876 Taken as a Hostage

    876 Taken as a Hostage


    I was lying on my side with my head supported by my hand. Then the n leader, the one who started all this, was sneaking up on me.


    I was looking at the girls fighting while everyone was ignoring me. But it seems like he didn¡¯t ignore me at all.


    He¡¯s trying to sneak on me from my blind spot. Though unfortunately, I don¡¯t have any blind spot. So I just let him do whatever he wants. Unless he ended up to be the second Hill. I have to protect my back side no matter what then.


    Though he¡¯s sneaking so carefully. Not to avoid my sight, but also to avoid the girls¡¯ sight. Though I¡¯m sure that Jewel has noticed him already.


    To make sure to observe everything in the surrounding. That¡¯s what I taught my disciple. So she knows that I¡¯m in danger.


    Well, not really. I¡¯m sure that she doesn¡¯t care at all because she knows that this n leader won¡¯t be able to do anything to me. I¡¯m just way too strong for any weaker than average expert level mage. Even if they are expert level lightning mage, an element which has the strongest offensive power, I can hold back quite well.


    I sparred with Jewel a lot. So I have been shocked many times with her lightning magic. And I can say that any lightning magic that are weaker than Jewel¡¯s won¡¯t affect me much. Though I will still feel the shock, I can endure it with Aura covering my body.


    The only problem after that is my hair which is straight and fabulous will stand up straight for a few hours.


    Well, that would be funny. So I will stay here and let the man do whatever he wants except for the things that I don¡¯t want.


    .....


    But I think it will take some time before he can get here. Because he¡¯s extremely careful. Or slow.


    He should have seen that the girls¡¯ magic were not that fast. And he should be an expert level mage. So he must have good enough physical ability to get here fast, right?


    I guess the reason why there are many bad rumors about his n but he could still roam free is because of his carefulness. Though this is annoying to wait.


    Many people have fallen. Several have died already. But those who were alive were still fighting. As if they are happy that their friends died.


    ¡°If more of them died, then I can y with the girls for a longer time!¡±


    I heard someone said that. Though most of the men were targeting the four girls from dius. No one targeting Jewel since she¡¯s in her rhino form all the time. And Nana, the oldestdy in the party, even have some fans.


    Well, everyone has different tastes. I¡¯ll just let them do what they want. Though they ended up died or getting injured from the girls.


    While Jewel is still running around, the girls started to get tired. Except for the two expert level mages who have more stamina and mana.


    But the men also slowly getting depressed. Some of them have given up. They kept their distance to wait until all the girls were tired. But they got attacked by a rhino instead. They should not forget that there¡¯s a rhino running about.


    Meanwhile, the n leader of these thugs have gotten closer to me. And he has two other men with him. I guess it¡¯s to restrain me.


    I think I remember these two men. Their n have several expert level mages, and these two are expert level mages. The n leader as well.


    Though they¡¯re still no match against me even without Aura. But I still covered my body with Aura to protect myself from the magic that they will use.


    Finally, they make their move. The two men grabbed me who was lying around and lifted me up. Now I¡¯m standing again. But with both my arms being restrained. So it seems as if I¡¯m unable to move.


    How wrong they are.


    ¡°Stop fighting! Or I will kill this doctor!¡±


    Kill the doctor? I guess saying ¡°Kill the D-rank hunter,¡± doesn¡¯t sound too threatening.


    The girls stopped fighting out of worry. Did they forget that I was the one pulling them out from underground with just my physical strength? They should know that I can defeat these three in an instant. But I guess it has been so long since west met so they forgot about it.


    Meanwhile, there¡¯s one rhino who is still running wild. Ignoring the fact that her teacher is being taken as a hostage.


    ¡°Stop! I said stop! Or I will really kill this guy!¡± the n leader shouted to Jewel.


    ¡°Jewel, stop! Roy is in danger!¡± Nana shouted.


    But Jewel continued to ignore us. Even though she could hear us clearly.


    Meanwhile, I¡¯m just there acting scared.


    ¡°Ah. Help. I¡¯m. In. Danger.¡±


    ¡°What kind of person being monotone asking for help while being taken as hostage!¡± the n leader said.


    ¡°This. Guy.¡±


    ¡°You think this is a joke?! Fine, if that¡¯s what you want, consider this as the first warning! Lightning Shock!¡±


    What kind of magic is Lightning Shock? I think it¡¯s the first time I¡¯ve heard that.


    Though now that I felt it, it seems to be the weakest lightning magic. And it also only affected me even though there are two men grabbing my arms.


    Even though I said that it affected me, it only got my hair stand up straight. It¡¯s too weak to break through my Aura.


    ¡°...Is that it?¡± I asked.


    ¡°How are you still fine?!¡±


    Because I¡¯m just too amazing.


    Still, seeing that the girls other than Jewel are not doing anything, I guess I should get involved. Because if I don¡¯t, it will take way too long to handle


    ¡°I am fine because it will be too embarrassing if someone like you, only a weak expert level mage, can hurt someone like me who has reached master level in my summoning element,¡± I said.


    ¡°M-Master level?!¡±


    After I exposed my real strength, I released myself from the restraints, grabbed the two men¡¯s head, and hit them to each other. The brain matter of the two were flying around in pieces with just my strength. Even though I still haven¡¯t use my Aura to attack.


    ¡°N-no way!¡± the n leader fell on his butt on the ground. And without using Divine Vision, I can see his pants is wet.


    ¡°What are you looking at? You have a fight to finish!¡± I said to the members of dius.


    They realized that it¡¯s time to fight back when all the members of the enemy n are shocked after seeing my strength. And they killed them all.


    Though it¡¯s bad that they just killed anyone in sight. They should have killed those who can fly first.


    I guess I¡¯ll take care of them. For those who have retreated early, I don¡¯t care about them. But these guys know that I¡¯m a master level summoner. So killing them is the right choice.


    Those who tried to escape, I just used Victoria as a bullet and shot her using air magic. And just like that, peace has returned.


    ¡°You¡¯re a master level?¡± Jessica asked.


    ¡°Oh, right. Don¡¯t tell this to anyone. Or just like the Princess, I will be targeted,¡± I said.


    ¡°The Princess was targeted?!¡± Nana asked.


    ¡°Yes. There were too many of them, so they asked our n for help. Or should I say that the Princess herself is already a member of the n in the first ce so we¡¯re just helping our own teammate? Well, whatever. Oh, kept the fact that she¡¯s a member of the n as secret as well,¡± I said casually.


    ¡°Does that mean even Ang and Ka have reached master level?¡± Jessica asked.


    ¡°Ka has reached master level. But Ang hasn¡¯t. Though if it¡¯s her, she will surely reach that level sooner orter. I think that¡¯s too much secret leaked for you. That¡¯s enough talking. Let¡¯s continue the journey again,¡± I said.


    ¡°...Understood. What should we do with these corpses then? There are too many of them in the road. Then monsters wille from the smell. I guess we should move them first before we leave,¡± Nana said.


    ¡°I¡¯ll take care of them!¡± Jewel said.


    Then, Jewel who was still in her rhino form, transformed to another rhinoceros. And this one is the one that can use earth magic. Then she used earth magic to move them all out of the road, and bury them deep enough so that no one can notice them. And we¡¯re done.


    We continued our journey in silence. Though that was just for a few minutes before someone asked Jewel about the n and everyone else in it. Then everyone quickly acting like normal and continued talking after just one sentence from Jewel.


    ¡°My master is outside themon sense. So it¡¯s natural that everyone around him is the same.¡±


    ...How could they believe such word so easily and treat me like normal again? They are also weird.

 Chapter 877 - 877 Splitting up with Jewel and Gladius

    877 Splitting up with Jewel and dius


    The day after we eradicated the entire n that aimed for dius, we finally reached a city in Arturo. Though I have to say that we eradicated an entire n because that n got me involved for some reason. I mean they took me as a hostage!


    Well, even if I didn¡¯t get myself involved with the fight, with Jewel alone, they can defeat them all. Though Jewel is so kind to her saviors that she let them fight while Jewel herself never used her full power.


    On the way there, the party dius showed an interest to join my n. But this time, I clearly refused them.


    ¡°I refuse. You have been a party together. And even after breaking up, you got back together again. And you have quite a reputation as well. If I let you in, you will be our weakest members. I¡¯m sure that you don¡¯t have the pride to let that happen. So I will refuse right away.¡±


    That¡¯s what I said when we¡¯re talking about their interest in joining. Though in the end, they said that they prefer freedom. So they wanted to go on their own as being a party has much more freedom than being in a n.


    Though I know that I was right. They have too much pride in them that they won¡¯t allow to be the weakest members of my n.


    But if I said that we know how to improve their strength, they will happily join us even if they have to throw away their pride. But I didn¡¯t say that.


    It¡¯s still afternoon when we reached the city. And as soon as we entered the city, we entered the guild to give the cards of the hunters we killed. Just to get the slightest wealth that they have.


    Though I don¡¯t need them, it¡¯s still a good idea to tell the guild about what that n was doing. And how bad they were.


    .....


    ¡°Really? If it¡¯s that n, then yes. We received a lot of bad rumors regarding them. And to think that they were targeting dius, I¡¯m so mad about them. It¡¯s great that they were traveling with a member of Wolf¡¯s Crown, Jewel,¡± the receptionist said.


    Seems like that n is famous in this city. After all, that n¡¯s base is in this city.


    There are few ns who would travel to another city, or even another country, just to do some mission. My n is one of them. But most n would only stay in one city and do some missions only around that city.


    Sometime, they are also considered as the protector of the city. Though that¡¯s only sometime. After all, they are all still hunters. So they prefer to move for their own benefits rather than to protect some strangers.


    But for ns with huge reputation, they will move to protect the people because that¡¯s what the people were expecting from them. Like that time during the tournament in Consenza, I saw some hunters helping us in the fight. When I heard from udia, she said that they were from a famous n in the capital of Consenza.


    Which means that that n should be safe from the influence of the cult. Because there¡¯s no way that they would fight the cult if they are involved with the cult.


    Anyway, I¡¯m angry right now. Because the receptionist said that we¡¯re safe because Jewel is with us even though I¡¯m her n leader.


    Should I gain some fame as a n leader?


    Well, the others will still be more active than me. So I think what I¡¯m doing is already good enough. I¡¯ll just be happy that Jewel and the others gained some reputation.


    After sharing the money we got from the ns, I want to know what Jewel will do from now on.


    ¡°Jewel, what will you do now?¡± I asked.


    ¡°What do you mean, Master?¡± Jewel asked back.


    ¡°I mean, you reunited with your saviors and friends. If you want, you can stay with them for a while. If so, then I will leave this city right away,¡± I said.


    There are people who know me here. Members of dius party. So I want to not gain too much attention here. Or someone will think that they are with me and will target them. They are too weak after all.


    Though I think it will be me who will be targeted.


    I asked Jewel if she wants to stay because they¡¯re her friends. She can teach them about how to use magic more efficiently and make them stronger if she stays with them. Then even though they won¡¯t join us, we can still get strong friends.


    ¡°Hmm... I¡¯ll stay. Since we have been separated for a long time, I have a lot to talk with them. Like many things that I have been through and I want to know what they have been through as well. I think I will stay here for a while,¡± Jewel said.


    Not only she understood my intention, she also said that she will stay here for a while. Meaning that she will investigate this city. My disciple has grown so smart.


    ¡°Then I will leave right away,¡± I said.


    ¡°Leaving now? But the next city is a few days away. And you haven¡¯t even gathered enough supply for the journey,¡± Jessica said.


    ¡°Don¡¯t you know his strength already? If he wants to, he could finish the journey in a few hours from Tatrama to Arturo. It¡¯s just that he doesn¡¯t have a reason to be in a hurry. So he took his time moving,¡± Jewel exined.


    ¡°Oh, right. I guess he can do it then.¡±


    After that, I split up with Jewel and the other girls. Leaving the city only with Victoria and Breezy. Though after leaving for a while, I summoned Ray and ride him.


    ¡°It¡¯s fun traveling with more people. But it¡¯s fun to be alone as well since we can go wherever we want!¡± Breezy said.


    ¡°Agreed. Though they are not strangers to us. And Jewel had a lot of fun talking with them. So it¡¯s great that we can coincidentally met up,¡± I said.


    Moving together is fine if we¡¯re not in a hurry. And moving alone is great because we can take our time and go wherever we want before we stop at our destination.


    For now, before going to the peak of the mountain, I want to go to Bernard¡¯s ce first. But before that, we can travel to another city and enjoy our time there.


    To get to Bernard¡¯s city, I can easily get there using a portal. I already have a Blobby staying there. In a room in Bernard¡¯s mansion. Especially for me.


    But if I¡¯m riding Ray, I can get there long before the sun set. So I can take my time and look around everywhere.


    For now, I will look around at the ce that the circus didn¡¯t go before during the tour. There should be a small city and a few viges to visit. I guess I check the viges first before staying at the city. It¡¯s not like I have to meet Bernard today.


    The first few viges, I saw some explosive devices in people¡¯s houses. So as a good person, I tried to break into their houses and kill the owners. But the better person, Victoria, stopped me and told me to contact Fabio so he can send agents to the vige.


    And so, that¡¯s what we did. The next time we saw unused explosive devices in someone¡¯s houses, that¡¯s what we will do. Contacting the king of thend.


    Though if they¡¯re inside someone¡¯s mouth, I will just kill them. That¡¯s the simplest thing to do.


    ¡°But so far, we haven¡¯t find anything close to what we¡¯re looking for. Elemental Spirits. Breezy, you sensed any of them nearby?¡± I asked Breezy once in a while.


    ¡°Nope. And I¡¯m started to get bored. Let¡¯s stop by a city and take some requests there!¡± Breezy suggested.


    I guess it¡¯s time to stop looking around in viges and find a city. So we entered a city. And it¡¯s already afternoon, so we grabbed some easy requests from the guild that can be done before the gate to the city is closed.


    Surprisingly, the n in this city was very helpful to foreign hunters and rookie hunters. I think this ce is the best for anyone to start their hunting career as the n that is based here would help everyone in need.


    Most of the members of the ns are old. I don¡¯t think I saw anyone younger than forty. Maybe they were famous hunters who have already retired. But since they don¡¯t know what to do in after retirement, they gathered together and built a n that is helping everyone in the city. Especially young hunters.


    One old man even suggested that he will help us looking for herbs. I tried to refuse, but he insisted because I¡¯m a D-rank hunter. So I let him join us.


    Thanks to Breezy, we gathered the herbs quickly. So we returned early as well.


    The old man I¡¯m with is a good person. He talked a lot about his experience. But from the sound of it, it seems like I have more experience than him.


    Well, making rtionship with someone new is not something bad at all. Just tiring.

 Chapter 878 - 878 Sara Reached Master Level

    878 Sara Reached Master Level


    ¡°Wow, you¡¯re so busy today,¡± I said.


    I have continued my journey and yesterday, I reached Bernard¡¯s mansion.


    And today, he¡¯s stuck in his office with a lot of paperwork to do.


    ¡°Yes. Do you know that we are already preparing for the next tournament already? And I want to suggest that the tournament to be yed here in this city. So I want to fix everything, prepare a big stage for the participants to perform, and many other things. Since there are no other city prepared to host the tournament, I expected my chance to be high. So I want to prepare for the best,¡± Bernard said.


    The tournament will start soon? Well, the kings are meeting at least every months. So maybe during that time, they spoke about the tournament. And I skipped it because it¡¯s not rted to the cult.


    If the tournament happened, with how many people has be stronger now, I guess everyone can expect something great. And there will be more participants as well since there are more countries that will participate.


    Well, I don¡¯t know who will participate in the tournament from my group, but I will wish them the best.


    As for me, I have no interest at all with the tournament. Even if the reward for the first ce is huge, I don¡¯t think there will be anything that will interest me. Other than the cult¡¯s destruction obviously.


    ¡°Why here? Why not in the capital?¡± I asked Bernard.


    .....


    ¡°When the cult almost conquer Arturo and had my father reced by an impostor, this city was not influenced by the cult at all. And the people have learned of that fact. Even the citizens here took pride in that. So if we hosted the tournament here instead of the capital, the people of Arturo will know that there won¡¯t be any influence from the cult at all,¡± Bernard said.


    Hmm... maybe he¡¯s right. But does that matter?


    Well, maybe it does matter. Especially to those who were victims of the cult. They might despise the cult as much as I do. So if the tournament is hosted here instead of the capital which has been controlled by the cult once in the past, the people will be happy.


    Though the happiest one would be hunters and other mages. Because it seems that they all have the chance to participate in the tournament.


    ¡°So, how will the selection for the participants be conducted? If there are hunters, then they might not have any permanent residence. Which country will they fight for?¡± I asked.


    ¡°With more countries participating, there will be more chances for them to be included. They will belong to the country where they entered the selection from. I think we will have a small tournament like back then to decide who will participate. Like the one where colleges from all over Tatrama fight first. There¡¯s a possibility that they will go all over the continent and participate in the selection many times until they could participate. But that won¡¯t be a problem,¡± Bernard said.


    So, when a hunter like a member of dius party wants to participate in the tournament, but they failed to enter because they didn¡¯t pass the selection in Arturo, they can go to Tatrama and try it again. That¡¯s basically what Bernard said.


    With more participants, there will be more fights. That will make everyone happy to have something to watch.


    ¡°When do you think that the tournament will happen?¡± I asked.


    ¡°If there¡¯s no movement from the cult, then it could happen probably within the next year. But if you find any traces of the cult, it might be dyed,¡± Bernard said.


    Back then, it was dyed many times as well. I guess they all love dy.


    In many cities now, there are small scale tournament already. Set by the noble in charge of the city usually. Those who won a lot might enter the selection.


    But there will be a lotpetitors. Like from the army. People who have trained more than hunters especially because of the war. So they have bigger chance to win.


    But if Ang is there, then the winner is obvious.


    Maybe the tournament is started again because the kings wanted to introduce everyone who has reached master level to the people. Making the cult more afraid of us since we have more master level mages now.


    That could be good as well. But I¡¯m not involved at all with the next tournament other than to transport some people probably.


    ¡°Well, since you are busy, I will continue my journey. No need to see me off,¡± I said to Bernard as I jumped out of the window of his office.


    ¡°It would be best if you stop jumping out of the window like it¡¯s normal thing to do. I don¡¯t want kids to try and copy you,¡± Bernard said.


    It won¡¯t be a problem if there are no one watching.


    There¡¯s no need for me to stay here for a long time since I¡¯m sure Bernard has taken precaution in case there are cult members here. Maybe he has gotten rid of the bad n here as well.


    Whatever. My goal is still to go to the peak of the continent. Though I have gone to a ce higher than any peak. To the outer space.


    Well, I don¡¯t need to go there anymore since we have Airy now. Improving my level with her around is much faster than going to the space. And it¡¯s kind of scary going there floating around without direction.


    Just like usual, I stopped at the cities on the way and see if there are any ns that I need to watch out for. Though I don¡¯t think that there are any.


    And going to every city and finish some requests as soon as possible will just be suspicious. So I just try to find out about any ns without having to enter the guild.


    Seems like a n that has bad reputation is actually rare. It¡¯s just that I met them twice in thest few days since I started my journey, so I thought that they aremon.


    Though when there are more than one n in one city, both ns usually hostile to each other. But they mostlypete inpleting quests rather than fighting among each other. And the citizens put their trust on at least one of the ns. So when two citizens who supported different ns met, it¡¯s usually them who caused trouble instead of the ns.


    It was quite funny to see. Though it¡¯s good that at least none of them are strong enough to cause big trouble. It¡¯s just a bar fight at most.


    As for the two rival ns, when they met, they would ignore each other unless there¡¯s something to talk about. Like if there¡¯s a mission that both of them took at the same time.


    Though when I watched them, they actually took care of the problem with the help of the guild master. So it¡¯s nice to see that people actually get along with each other.


    Finally, after a few days of travel from Bernard¡¯s ce, there¡¯s no more city to visit before I can finally climb the mountain.


    ¡°...It¡¯s so tall. Though if I run up there, I can get there in a few minutes,¡± I said.


    ¡°Then I¡¯ll take a few seconds!¡± Breezy said. Trying topete with me.


    ¡°With Ray, it will take even shorter time,¡± I said. Not wanting to lose.


    ¡°Or we can just go there after a few days. I got a message from Sara saying that she will attempt to reach master level in her air element soon. Let¡¯s help her first before we climb up there. Once we¡¯re done with it, we can climb the mountain with Airy,¡± Victoria said.


    Why is she the one who received the message? I guess Sara knows that I would be too busy moving around so she contacted Victoria instead.


    To think that she would reach master level in her air element so soon. If I didn¡¯t go around with Airy all the time, and Airy stayed with Sara, then she would have reached master level even sooner.


    No, I¡¯m not jealous at all that she reached master level in her air element.


    Well... maybe a little.


    Fine, I¡¯ll admit that I¡¯m extremely jealous since I don¡¯t think that I can reach that level anytime soon. But at least I¡¯m already a master level in my summoning element.


    Sara attempted to breakthrough in Monsters World. And since there¡¯s no ce where air mages can cultivate faster, like how wind mages can cultivate on Andro¡¯s back, it took a lot longer for her to reach master level than the others. Though thanks to Airy¡¯s help, it¡¯s not that long either. Just a month.


    And then, Sara can shoot to a distance of more than 10 km without her bullet slowed down at all. I¡¯m so jealous.


    But at least we got another master level mage. And Sara is now focused in her earth element. I think she will be the first to reach master level in two of her elements.

 Chapter 879 Relaxedly Climbing the Mountain

    Chapter 879 Rxedly Climbing the Mountain


    "Breezy, now that Airy has joined us, don''t you want to stay with Kron again?"


    1


    Sara has reached master level. And so, Airy doesn''t have to stay with Sara anymore. Unless Sara wanted to attempt to reach the stage beyond master level.


    But there are too many things that we don''t know about that stage. So for now, Sara and also those who have reached master level wanted to adapt to their new power first.


    Even Kron is also training. And I guess that he stopped adventuring because he is training again. And that''s why Breezy is still reluctant to leave.


    "I''ll stay with you guys for now. Kron is training hard and I don''t want to bother him. At least until he''s confident that he can use his new power well, I will stay with you guys. Though I''m sure that he has gotten used to his power. But he''s just training so he won''t be weaker than other master level mages," Breezy said.


    "What about Airy? I won''t stop at a city to buy some cakes now. So if you want, you can stay with Sara or other girls," I asked Airy this time.


    "I ate a lot already thanks to Sara. I think I will stop eating cakes for now," Airy said.


    I guess Sara treated Airy to a lot of cakes and sweets that Airy has gotten tired of them already.


    climb that tall mountain and see if we can find any spirits there. Though if we could find any spirits on the way, that would be great Just how much did Airy eat for her to get tired? When will a lot be too much for a spirit who can''t get full no matter how much she eats?


    "Well, I guess you two will stay with me for a while then. We will climb that tall mountain and see if we can find any spirits there. Though if we could find any spirits on the way, that would be great as well. Tell me if you sensed anything," I said to the two spirits.


    For Breezy, he''s flying around. Though unlike the time when I took requests from the guild, he didn''t fly far this time. I guess with the terrain here, it will be difficult for him to return to me if he flies too far from me.


    As for Airy, she''s staying at her usual spot, my shoulder. She''s not as active as her brother.


    With two spirits nearby, I''m sure that they can find other spirits easier. Though other spirits need to be closer to us first for them to notice.


    As for my Divine Vision, I don''t know if I could ever find them or not even if they are close to me.


    Maybe with these two around, instead of finding an elemental spirit, they will be found by them instead? And those elemental spirits will approach us. That would be nice as well.


    And so, we''re climbing a mountain. Instead of a trail to the top, there''s a wall in front of us. But it doesn''t matter to us who started climbing the rock wall easily.


    "I always wanted to climb a mountain in my past life. I thought that it would be cool if I have the strength to support my whole body with just the power of my grip as I climbed a wall by grabbing even the smallest thing I can hold to the top," Victoria said all of a sudden.


    "Good for you that you can get your dreame true," I said.


    "Like I said, climbing a wall by grabbing the smallest thing I can hold. This is not climbing like that at all! Who in the right mind climb a vertical wall by riding a horse! And the horse is just casually walking to the top as his hooves stick to the wall! It''s not what I had in mind!" Victoriained.


    As she said, we''re climbing the vertical rock wall by riding on Ray. While he''s sticking his hooves on the wall as he walked up one step at a time.


    We can easily go to the peak by flying. But I want to check everything in this mountain first. So we will go on foot. Or hooves. And check everything that I can see.


    Then maybe we can find an elemental spirits. Or even if it''s another earth spirit, I would be happy to have another one.


    If it''s another air spirit or wind spirit, I hope they can get along with Airy and Breezy.


    "Victoria, if you want, you can climb the wall on your own," I said.


    "...No need. Let''s just continue climbing the wall like this," she said.


    In the end, she won''t climb the wall by herself. Why though? If it''s her dream, even if it''s just for a moment, it should be fine, right?


    "Now that I''m here, I realized that I don''t really have much interest in climbing the wall like that. Instead, it''s best for me if we could reach the top as soon as possible. Rather than the act of climbing, I want to get to the peak right away. If our goal is not to find elemental spirits or finding the cult, I would ask you to reach the top right away," Victoria said.


    The peak is still yet to be seen. And the air has already so thin.


    Most people would have gotten sick at this height. But for us who can fly, it''s not a problem. Though flying this high is actually rare for even wind mages.


    But since none of us are normal humans, it''s not a problem for us at all.


    Soon after, while Ray is still walking up the rock wall, it became colder. So I grabbed my jacket using a portal and put it on.


    I can protect myself using Aura, but I don''t know what I will encounter on the way up top. Maybe some dangerous monsters? Or maybe even the headquarter of the cult itself? So I want to not use Aura as much as possible even with Ray here.


    ...Though as we continued climbing, it got even colder. And it''s also snowing. So I used Aura to protect myself.


    What is wrong with this ce? Why is it colder than when I go to the space? Something is wrong.


    Or rather, something is right. Very right. Because this could mean that there''s an ice elemental spirit in this ce.


    "Airy, Breezy, do you guys think that there''s an ice spirit nearby?" I asked the two spirits.


    "It''s likely! I feel like we will have more friends! I hope the next spirit we found is an adventurous spirit who likes to move around!" Breezy said.


    "If they like to move around, they won''t stay here all the time though," I said.


    Breezy already confirmed it. That there''s a spirit nearby.


    And since it got colder as we slowly reached the top, I''m sure that the source of this phenomenon is there. Somewhere higher.


    Not sure if it''s at the peak or just somewhere on the way there. But it''s up there.


    The closer we are to the peak, the colder it is. Much colder than space. So I assumed that there would be more than one ice spirit in this ce.


    "Airy, Breezy, how many ice spirits do you think there are? It''s way too cold up here," I said.


    "I feel like there are a lot of them," Airy said.


    Maybe because it''s way too cold for any ordinary human, even if they are master level mages, unless they are ice mages or fire mages, it will be difficult for them to stay here.


    Also, I don''t think that anyone would juste all the way here to enjoy themselves. So I don''t think any humans are up there.


    Though if there''s any human up there, that person is extremely suspicious.


    Wait, I am extremely suspicious!


    Whatever. I just hope that the spirits won''t be hostile to me.


    But still, no matter how high I climbed, I still can''t see the peak. Will it reach outer space? If so, I should be able to see it from afar.


    Wait, why did I only able to see how high this ce is after I get close? Don''t tell me that the whole mountain is actually a dungeon?


    This might be dangerous then. Good thing that I split up with Jewel. If not, she might join me all the way here. Though I can just return her back home using a portal.


    "Breezy, has Kron evere here?" I asked Breezy.


    "I don''t think so. If I ever see a mountain so high like this, I would have asked Kron to climb it right away," Breezy said.


    Which means that there''s some kind of illusion magic protecting this mountain to be seen from far away. Or maybe only those who climb the mountain can see how high it really is.


    Illusion, huh? I didn''t sense any magic when I get close. Maybe there are other secrets in this mountain than just elemental spirits.


    Whatever it is, I hope that they won''t be hostile to us. Unless they are part of the cult. If so, they can be hostile to me as much as they want. Because I will kill them all.


    The Novel will be updated first on this website. Come back and


    continue reading tomorrow, everyone!